/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198080.txt	W. M. CLARK, 
Breech-Loading Fire-Arm. 
No. 198,080. 
Patented Dec. 11, 1877. 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
% 
  
 
 
2S say 7 17 
frtazzi/ 
 
E. 
SSS  
S 
adz7W 
\ 
W 
is 
Y 
su----- 
ea:''. 
of n. 
y 1 
g 
- 
Y-8s rt 
AW 
r 
... -- 
W e- 
tes 
2 
v 
s 
WITNESSES 
/21 
 
INVENTOR 
Aawa 22% 
ATTORNEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WARREN M. CLARK, OF WAVERLY, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BREECH-LOADING FIRE-ARMS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19s,0so, dated December 11, 1877; application filed 
". 
. 
September 1, 1877. 
. 
- 
- 
. 
e, formed thereon. By this means, in the act 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WARREN M. CLARK, of 
of firing, the velocity of the hammer is greatly 
wavels, in the courity of Tioga and State of 
increased as it approaches the endofits stroke, 
New York, have. invented a new and valuable 
Improvement in Breech-Loading Fire-Arms; owing to the increased leverage thus obtained. 
: It will be readily seen that this construction 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
of the bearing on the cock enables me to dis 
full, clear, and exact description of the con 
pense with the usual stirrup generally em 
struction and operation of the same, reference 
ployed in attaining this increased leverage and 
being had to the aniexed drawings, making a 
velocity. The hammer Works through an ob 
part of this specification, and to the letters an 
long curved slot in plate D, and is provided 
figures of reference marked thereon. 
upon its front and rear edges, respectively, 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
with projecting Spursff, the upper curved 
of a side view of this invention. Fig. 2 is a 
surfaces g of which are always in close contact 
vertical central section. Fig. 3 is a reverse 
with the end walls of the slot 2, whether the 
view in vertical section. 
hammer be at half or full cock, or in the posi 
This invention has relation to improvements 
tion for firing, thereby excluding dust and 
in breech-loading fire-arms; and the nature of 
other foreign matters from the hollow of the 
the invention consists in combining With an 
lock-case. 
In front of the slot 2 is a second 
open-ended barrel and a vertically-sliding 
slot, 2', in which is arranged the breech-block 
breech-block, closing the said barrel and con 
I, carrying a firing-pin, j, held off from the 
taining the firing-pin, a jointed lever pivoted 
cartridge by means of a spring. The front 
at one end to the said block, and provided at 
face of this block is vertical, and its rear face 
the other end with a prismatic eye, a trans 
beveled or inclined, as shown in Fig. 2, and 
verse shaft extending through the said eye, 
the said block is regulated in its movements 
and a thumb-lever on said shaft, whereby 
by guides h, having the same inclination with 
the operation of opening the breech for the 
reference to the perpendicular as the rear edge 
introduction of the cartridge is greatly facili 
of the said block. This block has upon its un 
tated, and the block is allowed to be raised or 
der side two spaced lateral lugs, l, between 
lowered without binding, as will be hereinaf 
which is pivoted a section, o, of a jointed coup 
ter more fully set forth. 
ling, J, the other section of which is provided 
In the annexed drawings, the letter A desig 
with an eye, m, upon its lower end, of pris-- 
nates the barrel, rigidly secured to the cheek 
matic form, through which a transverse shaft, 
plates B, which, together with the trigger 
L, having its bearings in the sides of the lock. 
guard plate C and the tongue-plate D, consti 
case, extends, and provided with a bearing of 
tute the lock-case. Erepresents the hammer, 
like form. This shaft is actuated by means of 
applied upon a screw, a, in the usual manner, 
a thumb-lever, M, applied upon one of its pro 
and actuated by a mainspring, F. This ham 
jecting ends, upon the right side of the lock 
mer has the usual half andfullcock notches i i", 
case. The heel of the arm bears upon a spring, 
which engage a trigger, G., pivoted, in the usual 
n, rigidly secured to the underside of the barrel, 
manner, in plate C, and maintained and held in 
or to the lock-case, which holds the said block 
proper position for engaging the said trigger by 
stationary When it is in position for closing 
a spring, b, secured at one end to said plate, and 
the breech of the barrel, and which materially . 
bearing at the other upon the heel of the trig 
aids in returning the said blockinto that posi 
ger. The mainspring Fis secured to plate C 
tion after the passage of the cartridge into the 
at one end, and is held in an inclined position 
barrel. The breech is opened by depressing 
by a bearing-spur, c. The free end of this 
the lever M, and closed, after the insertion of 
spring is provided with spaced guiding-lips d, 
a cartridge, by raising the said lever. When 
between which the hammer-edge is received. 
the block is raised it is firmly wedged by the 
The said spring is thereby kept at all times in 
inclined guides h against the end of the barrel, 
proper position in contact with the hammer, 
and is caused to form an air and gas tight 
and bears against an elliptically-curved edge, 
joint there with. 
 
2 
- 
19s, OSO 
In the raising or lowering of the breech 
block the jointed lever J allows, these move 
ments to be made in precisely the same plane; 
consequently there will be no binding or lock 
ing of the said block untilitis wedged against 
the barrel by the guides aforesaid. 
As shown in Fig. 3, the rear end of the bar 
rel is recessed at p, to receive the upper arm 
of an angular extracting-lever, P, the other 
arm of which extends under the breech-block. 
This lever is pivoted or fulcrumed on the shaft 
L, and is provided at its upper end with an 
enlarged head having a beveled lower edge, q. 
This head is L-shaped in cross-section, and, 
when the block is raised to close the barrel, is 
flush with the flange-seat formed in the end 
of the barrel. When the thumb-lever M is de 
pressed the breech-block is forced against the 
horizontal arm r of the angular ejector P, caus 
ing it to swing upon the shaft Li, and throw 
ing the Vertical arm out of its seat or recess 
into the position shown in Fig. 3. The effect 
of this movement is to draw the empty car 
tridge-shell out of the barrel after firing. A 
new cartridge having been inserted into the 
barrel, the movement of the lever is reversed 
that is, it is drawn up-causing the extractor 
to recede into its seat, and the breech-block 
to be raised into position for closing the barrel. 
This is accomplished by the breech-block com 
ing into contact with the beveled under side 
of the head a of the ejector P. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the barrel A and 
the vertically-sliding breech-block I, of the 
jointed lever J, having prismatic eye m, the 
rock-shaft L., extending through said eye, and 
the thumb-lever M at the side of the lock-case, 
substantially as specified. 
2. The barrel A, having slot 2' and guidesh, 
the breech-block I, having a firing-pin, j, the 
jointed lever J, having eye m, the rock-shaft 
L, and the spring n, combined and operating 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
WARREN M. CLARK, 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. F. BAIRD, 
J.NEWTON DEXTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198180.txt	2 sheets-sheet 1. 
H. BAECKER 
Bench-Plane. 
No. 198,180. 
Patented Dec. 18, 1877 
22, Z. 
772. 2. 
72. 3. 
Z2, 4, 
wa 
wa 
 
72rtesses; 
a2(64./ 
24 2. 2. 
N.PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHEQ washingtoN, D.C. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
H. BAECKER. 
Bench-Plane, 
Patented Dec. 18, 1877. 
No. 198,180. 
 
 
N. PETERs, Phot 
O-ufhoGRAPHER, washingtoN, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEINRICH BAECKER, OF REMSCHEID, GERMANY. 
IMPROVEMENT N BENCHPLANES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19s, 1s0, dated December 18, 1877; application filed 
- 
October 8, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
14 is a modification of the mode of fastening 
Beit known that I, HEINRICH BAECKER, 
the iron or bit in place. 
of Remscheid, Germany, have invented Im 
The steel iron or bit 5 is composed of a thin 
provements in the Construction of Planes, of 
sheet of steel, of even thickness, which is sharp 
which the following is a specification: 
ened at its bottom edge, and it is provided 
This invention relates to bench-planes, the 
with a slot, 2, extending centrally from its top 
common form of which consists of a stock in 
edge to a distance beyond its middle part. It 
which the plane-iron is fastened by means of 
is adjusted in the plane - stock between two 
wedges. These plane-irons are, in their main 
break-irons, 89, one of which (the lower, 9) is 
part, composed of an iron plate, to the end of 
secured to the plane-stock. The iron orbit 
which a strip or facing of steel is attached to 
lies between these break-irons, as in Fig. 11, 
-form the cutting-edge. 
Such planes are de 
and the said devices are fastened securely to 
ficient in many respects. They are rendered 
gether by means of a clamping-screw, 10, whose 
expensive by the forging operation necessary 
stem passes through a hole, 11, in the under 
to unite the main part of the plane-iron and 
break-iron 9, through the slot 2 in the iron or 
its steel facing, which mode of manufacture 
bit, and enters a screw-threaded hole, 12, tapped 
- often ruins the structure. The mode of their 
into the upper break-iron S. When the iron 
production frequently renders the said irons 
orbitis properly adjusted between these break 
defective by destroying the high quality re 
irons, it may be firmly secured by properly 
quired for the steel cutting-edge. Such irons 
tightening said clamping-screw. The upper 
require to be bulky, and therefore more diffi 
break-iron 8 and the plane iron or bit are pre 
cult to grind, and on account of the limited 
vented from moving laterally with respect to 
extent of their steel portion must soon be de 
the under break-iron 9 by means of a pin, 13, 
stroyed when frequently ground. 
projecting from the inner face of the under 
My invention relates to that class of planes 
break-iron 9, passing through the slot 2 of the 
wherein the iron or bit is composed of a plate 
iron or bit, and entering a hole, 14, in the up 
having an even thickness, and composed en 
per break-iron 8. The parts thus held together 
tirely of steel-such an iron orbit as may be 
are secured in the mortise in the plane-stock 
sharpened until its length is so diminished 
15 by means of an arm, 16, projecting rear 
that it can no longer be supported in the stock. 
ward from the under break-iron, and fastened 
My invention consists in the means for se 
to the stock15 by means of a screw. The lower 
curing and adjusting such an iron or bit in 
end of the under break-iron rests upon one side 
the plane-stock, the details of which are too 
of the mortise, where it is secured by screws 
fully hereinafter set forth to need preliminary 
40, while the front surface of the end of the 
upper break-iron rests upon the other side of 
description. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
said mortise, the devices being thus held stead 
my invention, in which like reference-charac 
ily in place. 
ters indicate the same parts, Figure 1 is a plan 
In order that the iron or bit 5 may be ad 
view, and Fig. 2 an edge view, of the plane 
justed while its break-irons are fixed in the 
iron orbit; Fig. 3 is a plan view, and Fig. 4 an 
mortise in the plane-stock, the head 6 of the 
edge view, of the upper break-iron. Fig. 5 is 
clamping-screw is provided with gear-teeth, 
a plan view, and Fig. 6 an edge view, of the 
fitting a worm, 4, the shank 7 of which turns 
under break-iron, with the adjusting mechan 
in arms 1718 projecting from the rear face of 
isms attached; Fig. 7, a view of the clamping 
the under break-iron 9. The shank 7 of this 
mechanism. Fig. 8 shows the clamping-screw, 
worm is provided with a squared head, 19, 
and Fig. 9 an operating-key. Fig. 10 shows 
whichfits a similar socketin a turning-key, 20. 
an adjusting-screw. Fig. 11 is a vertical sec 
By these devices the said clamping-screw 10 
tion of all the parts fitted together in operative 
may be turned in and out of the screw-threaded 
position. Fig. 12 is a plan view, and Fig. 13 
hole 12 by inserting the key 20 through a hole 
an edge view, of a rabbet-plane iron, and Fig. (not shown) in the side of the plane-stock, en 
- 
19s, 1s0 
described, except that the adjusting-screw 27 
is omitted, and the clamping-screw is adapted 
by means of a squared head to be operated 
by means of the turning-key, which operation 
may be the more readily effected by having 
the head of said screw project from the front 
side of the upper break-iron, the under break 
iron, in this instance, being provided with the 
screw-threaded hole 12. 
What is claimed is 
1. The combination of the planeiron or bit 
5, upper and under break-irons 89, and clamp 
ing-screw 10, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the plane iron orbit 
5, upper break-iron 8, having hole 14, under 
break-iron 9, having projecting pin. 13, and 
clamping-screw 10, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the plane iron or bit 
5, break-irons 89, clamping-screw 10, worm 4, 
and geared head 6, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the break-irons 89, 
having slots 21 22, with the plane iron or bit 
5, having a slot, 2, pin 23, and adjusting 
screw 27, substantially as described. 
5. An improved plane, consisting of a bit 
having an equal thickness throughout its 
length, and a slot, 2, break-irons 89, clamp 
ing-screw 10, and an adjusting mechanism, as 
screw 27 and pin. 23, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name. 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
HEINRICH BAECKER, 
Witnesses: 
BERNH. SCHENK, 
FRANZ MAY ENBARN. 
gaging the same with the head 19 and operat 
ing said key in the proper direction. 
In order to adjust the plane-iron vertically 
With respect to the break-irons and plane-stock, 
and thus protrude its cutting-edge the desired 
distance, each of the break-irons is pro 
vided with slots in which a pin connected with 
said plane-iron may freely play. The slot in 
the upper break-iron is marked 21, and that 
in the lower break-iron is marked 22. The 
pin. 23, operating the iron 5, projects from a 
hub, 24, and enters one of two holes, 2526, with 
Which said plane-iron is provided. An ad 
justing-screw, 27, having a screw-threaded 
Shank, which runs in a threaded hole tapped 
through the hub 24, is supported in a collar, 
30, fast to the under break-iron, and its squared 
head (adapted to fit the socket of the turning. 
key 20) projects above the plane-stock. This 
construction permits the rotation of said screw 
27 to raise or lower the hub 24, and to impart 
a like movement to the plane-iron without 
disturbing the break-irons. 
It is evident that in order to adjust the 
plane-iron in either direction the clamping 
screw 10 must be first loosened, whereupon 
the adjusting movement may be imparted by 
means of the adjusting-screw 27. This done, 
the iron may be again secured by operating 
the clamping-screw 10. 
Furthermore, if it is desired to remove the 
plane-iron it may be done when the break 
irons are adjusted so as not to clamp and hold 
the said iron. 
In the modification, Figs. 12, 13, 14, which 
represent the irons of a rabbet-plane, the de 
Vices are constructed substantially as before 
; 
; 
; 
; 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198280.txt	F. DEZEND ORF 
Bit-Clamp for Boring-Machines, 
No. 198,28O. 
Patented Dec. 18, 1877. 
 
a ue 7 to . 
72), 
BY 
- 2 =S 
fG 
 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, p. c. 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK DEZENDORE, OF CORNWALL-ON-HUDSON, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BIT. CLAMPS FoR BORING-MACHINES. 
n 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19s, 2.s0, dated December 18, 1877; application filed 
November 3, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, FREDERICKDEZENDORF, 
Of Cornwallon the Hudson, in the county of 
Orange and State of New York, have invented 
a new and Improved Bit-Clamp, of which the 
following is a specification: 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a side elevation of my improved 
bit-clamp, and Fig. 2 a vertical central sec 
tion of the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
SpOnding parts. 
This invention relates to an improved bit 
clamp for power-machines, which is quickly 
adjusted to differently-sized shanks of bits, so 
as to firmly hold and quickly release the same 
without working loose by the motion of the 
machine; and the invention consists of two 
bit-holding jaws, that are fulcrumed to the 
ends of a rigid T-piece of a threaded center 
piece, the jaws being adjusted by a conical nut 
turning on the threaded center-piece, and act 
ing on the upper concaved ends of the jaws. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
center-piece, that is screwed into the lower 
end of the stock of the power-machine, the 
lower part of the same being threaded in op 
posite direction to the thread on the upper 
part, and provided at the lower end with a 
fixed cross-head or T-piece, B, that is rigidly 
keyed thereto. 
To the recessed ends of the T-piece B are 
fulcrumed the jaws C, which are provided in 
the customary manner, at the inside, with an 
gular recesses or grooves a, for taking hold of 
the bit-shanks, in connection with a square 
socket-hole, b, of the center-piece. 
A conical nut, D, works on the lower screw 
portion of the center-piece, and bears on the 
concaved upper ends of the jaws, so as to bring 
the lower ends closer together when the screw 
nutisturned, while admitting the ready spread 
ing or opening of the jaws or screwing the nut 
up. By turning the nut down, a bit-shank of 
any size may be firmly clamped for Work, and 
by turning the nut up the same may be quick 
ly taken out. The screw-nut D is provided 
With holes for the insertion of an adjusting 
lever-pin, by which the required turns of the 
nut are readily given until the shank is firmly 
clamped or released. 
In this manner a powerful and quickly-ad 
justed bit-clamp forbit-shanks of all sizes is fur 
nished that is self-centering, and holds a bit so 
as not to work loose by the motion of the ma 
chine, griping all ordinary bit-shanks and 
auger-shanks equally well, and being readily 
attached to the stock of a power-machine by 
the threaded shaft. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
A bit-clamp for power-machines, consisting 
of a threaded center-piece, with bottom T-piece, 
fulcrumed jaws, and a vertically-adjustable 
conical screw-nut bearing on the upper ends 
of jaws, for setting them to the bit-shank, sub 
stantially in the manner set forth. 
FREDERICK DEZENDORF. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. E. COLDWELL, 
DANIELDRISCOLL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198380.txt	E. B. GUILD. 
Rein-Holder, 
No. 198,38O. 
Patented Dec. 18, 1877. 
WITNESSES 
le/2 
%dae - 
Waz-U) 
NVENTOR 
A. A. 6 via 
4...e6, V-ta-ee, 
ATTORNEYS 
NPEERs, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD B. GUILD, OF TOPEKA, KANSAS. 
MPROVEMENT IN RENHOLDERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19S,3S0, dated December 18, 1877; application filed 
November 17, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWARD B. GUILD, of 
Topeka, in the county of Shawnee, and in the 
State of Kansas, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Rein-Holders; 
and do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and totheletters of referencemarked 
thereon, making a part of this specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
employment and use of a peculiarly - con 
structed metal plate, which is provided with 
a retaining-hook and projection, said plate to 
be secured to the dash-board of a vehicle for 
forming a rein-holder, as will be set forth. 
That others skilled in the art may make and 
use my invention, I will proceed to describe 
its construction and operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, making 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a front or face view of the plate, and Fig. 2 
an edge view of same. 
In the figures, A represents the body of the 
plate, which is constructed of either sheet or 
malleable iron, and which is secured to the in 
ner face of the dash-board by means of screws 
or bolts a, a. 
The upper portion B of this plate is curved 
outward from the board, and stands suffi 
ciently far from it to allow the lines to pass 
down and under the hook D. 
The hook is in a vertical position, with its 
end slightly curved upward to allow the lines 
to pass under it readily. Upon the curved 
portion B of the plate, and beneath the outer 
end of the hook, is an arm, C, which extends 
directly backward from the portion B. 
A curved shoulder is formed at at a upon 
the arm, as seen, the lower part of the shoul 
der meeting the bottom part of the slot formed 
by the hook D and the curved projection B. 
As the body A, with its hook D, are both 
made of malleable iron, the hook may be bent 
upward or downward so that just the thick 
ness of two lines will be left beneath the hook. 
When the lines are placed under the hook, the 
shoulders at at a keeps the lower line in place, 
especially as when the upper line is placed 
upon top of it said line fits snugly between 
the lower line and the hook. In removing the 
lines, it will be seen that by slightly turning 
up the right edge of the lower line they pass 
over the shoulder freely and out of the holder. 
The plate A is secured to one of the ribs of 
the dash-board by screws or bolts a a, which 
pass through curved plates e e on the front 
of the dash, which are tapped for screws. 
The plate should be a little below the top of 
the dash-board, so that the lines curve down 
ward to pass under the hook, and is grooved 
to fit the rib of dash-board. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
The plate A, constructed as described, with 
the curved portion B, the hook D, and the arm 
C, with its shoulders, combined with the dash 
board of a vehicle, for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 23d day of 
October, 1877. 
EDWARD. B. GUILD. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK G. PAY, 
FRED. G. TOMPKINS, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198480.txt	\ 
G. W. WILSON. 
Motors. 
No. 198,48O. 
Patented Dec. 25, 1877. 
 
ha 
A. 
G 
  
  
 
 
as e 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. WILSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MPROVEMENT IN MOTORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19s, 4.s0, dated December 25, 1877; application filed 
April 13, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. WILSON, 
of Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented a new and useful 
. Improvement in Sewing - Machine Motors, 
which is fully set forth in the following speci 
fication, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure.1 represents a front elevation of a 
sewing-machine with my improvement at 
tached, the inclosing case being open; and 
Fig. 2, an elevation of the governor and gear 
ing, with which it is immediately connected, 
on an enlarged scale. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
spring-motors for sewing-machines. 
Motors of this description are well known, 
and many attempts have been made to apply 
them successfully to the work of driving sew 
ing-machines. One great obstacle to their 
success, however, has been the difficulty of 
regulating them so as to obtain uniform mo 
tion. 
Heretofore this has been attempted by 
using a brake controlled by the attendant; 
but it is almost impossible by this device to 
make the motion steady, and it compels the 
attendant to keep one hand constantly on the 
brake, leaving only one hand free to manage 
the fabric to be stitched. 
The object of my invention is to regulate 
the operation of the driving mechanism auto 
matically, so as to secure steady motion of the 
needle, and at the same time leave both hands 
of the attendant free. 
The invention consists in the combination 
of a ball-governor with the train of gearing 
operated by the spring, whereby the move 
ment of the gear-wheel is regulated. 
In the drawings, A represents a sewing 
machine stand or case, which is of cabinet 
form, so as to inclose the motor. 
The driving mechanism is a spring-motor 
- of ordinary construction, and does not re 
quire particular description here. In gen 
eral terms, it may be said to consist of a 
wound spring, B, operating a train of gears, 
C, from which motion is communicated by a 
band, D, or any other suitable device, to the 
mechanism for reciprocating the needle. 
The first third of the spring in length is 
about three-sixteenths of an inch in thickness, 
and the rest one-fourth inch thick, to receive 
uniform force. 
A shaft, E, usually carrying a balance 
Wheel, F, is driven by the last wheel in the 
train, and upon this horizontal shaft Imount 
a bevel-pinion, G, and above the balance 
wheel shaft a vertical shaft, H, is mounted in 
suitable bearings A'. The lower end of this 
shaft is a bevel-pinion, I, which meshes with 
the pinion. The shaft H carries upon its up 
per end an ordinary ball-governor, consisting 
of the arms J, hinged to a fixed collar at the 
upper end of the shaft, and is provided with 
heavy balls K at their lower ends, and con 
nected by links L to a sliding collar, M, on 
the shaft, the movement of the latter being 
limited by a stop, N, on the shaft, 
Any other well-known construction of ball 
governor may be used. 
When the mechanism is set in motion, and 
the spring is exerting its greatest force, the 
balls of the governor will be thrown outward 
in the Well-known way as the speed of the 
upright shaft H is increased. The orbit of 
their revolution will therefore be increased, 
thereby increasing the resistance to the rota. 
tion of the shaft, which is transferred to the 
train of gearing upon which the spring op 
erates, and thus the motion is regulated by 
giving the spring more work to do as the 
movement of the gearing is increased, and 
vice versa. 
The mechanism is also provided with a fric 
tion-brake, O, which acts directly upon the 
balance-wheel, and is operated by the attend 
ant to completely stop the machine whenever 
desired, but is not necessary for regulating 
purposes. 
I have applied my improvement to a full 
sized sewing-machine, and found it to operate 
successfully in securing a regular and steady 
motion of the needle. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
In a spring-motor for sewing-machines, the 
combination, with the spring B secured to a 
drum, gearing C, shaft E, and balance-wheel 
F, of the governor-shaft H, bevel-pinions G 
and I, and driving-belt D, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
GEORGE. W. WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
L. A. BUNTING, 
W. C. CORLLES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198580.txt	J. P. DERR. 
Thorough-Brace Bridge, 
No. 198,58O. 
Patented Dec. 25, 1877. 
Wataesses, 
2.. 
ZZ /e/zzo Z, 
2 C, 
-zze 77ve 725, 
 
 
N. PETERS, PHOTo-Li'HoGRAPHER, washingtoN, a c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN P. DERR, OF MERCER, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN THOROUGH-BRACE BRIDGES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19s,5so, dated December 25, 1877; application filed 
. . . . 
. 
November 20, 1877. 
. . . . . . 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
... 
. . 
. . . . 
. . . . 
To all whom it may concern: 
: 
Beit known that I, JoHN P. DERR, of Mer. 
cer, in the county of Mercer and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Thorough Brace 
Bridges; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompa 
3. inying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
... ence marked thereon, which form part of this 
specification. 
. . 
Myinvention relates to the class of bridges 
nown to bridge-builders as thorough-brace? 
ridges; and it consists in the construction 
if a brace-shoe for the same, as will be herein 
fter more fully set forth. . 
. . . 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention, appertains to make 
and use the same, I will now proceed to de 
scribe its construction and operation, refer 
ring to the annexed drawing, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the end of a 
bridge, showing my brace-shoe in position. 
Fig.2 shows the method of attaching the shoe 
to the chord for inside braces, and Fig. 3 is 
a bottom view of part of the shoe. . . 
. 
A represents a portion of the chord of the 
bridge, and B a portion of the brace. . 
The brace-shoe is composed of two parts, C 
and D. The part C is in L shape, the verti 
callportion of the same being beveled on its 
upper edge, and formed on the back with a 
'rounded projection, C, having a central hole, 
is as shown. The part D of the shoe is made 
somewhat in the formof a cap-that is to say, 
is a top plate with downwardly-projecting side 
flanges; and at the lower end of the same, on 
the under side, are formed ears or projections 
D'D', between which the projection C is to 
fit, and a bolt, a, passing through all, unites 
them together. . 
* On the ends of the bolt a are placed iron 
bars or straps I, which pass along the sides 
of the shoe C, and are bolted to the chord A. 
. . 
. 
. . . 
. . 
. 
. 
; 
The lower end of the brace is beveled on both 
sides, the two bevels being at right angles to 
each other, and fitting upon and against the 
L-shaped shoe C, while the cap 
D fits over 
the brace and is bolted thereto. 
It is well known that wooden bridges first 
give Way at the foot or toe of the outside 
braces, where they were bolted to the chord, 
which defect causes trouble and expense. This 
defect is obviated by my improved brace-shoe, 
which possesses the following important ad 
i vantages: It will prevent the toe or foot of 
the brace from jumping off or slipping back. 
It protects it from the weather. Any kind of 
timber can be used for braces and strain 
beams, as they are not split, but leftinone piece. 
The shoe can be used on inside braces as well 
as outside; hence does not shorten bridges. 
Its connection to the chord is such that either 
Wood or iron may be used as chord, at pleas 
lure. Its connection to wooden chord is such 
that the chord is left independent of the brace, 
which adds to the durability of the chord. 
The shoe can be adjusted to any elevation of 
truss or arch. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
In thorough-brace bridges, the combination, 
with the chord A and brace B, of the brace 
shoe. constructed of the L-shaped part C, with 
projection C, and the cap D, Wuth ears D', the 
two parts being hinged together, as described, 
and the bars or straps I, all constructed sub 
stantially as and for the purposes herein set 
forth. 
in testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I affix my signature in presence of 
tWO Witnesses. 
JNO. P. DERR. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS LEECH, 
R. G. MADGE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198680.txt	G. W. PUTN AM, 
Car-Coupling, 
No. 198,680. 
 
 
it 
721/ 
  
   
 
AALLE-Ze 
... As TSN 
 
a. Ea w 
-%%ge:E. 
1. 
ATTORNEYS 
t 
N, PETERS, PHOTO 
ON, d. C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. PUTNAM, OF GLENS FALLS, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CAR-couplings. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19S,6S0, dated December 25, 1877; application filed 
- 
November 17, 1877. 
w 
forth. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGEW.PUTNAM, of 
Glens Falls, in the county of Warren and in 
the State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Car-Coup 
lings; and do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of ref. 
erence marked thereon, making part of this 
specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
construction and arrangement of a car-coup 
ling, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
In order to enable others skilled, in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
its construction and operation, referring to the 
annexed drawing, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section. 
of my car-coupling, and Fig. 2 is a plan view 
of the same. 
A represents the draw-head, with the usual 
flaring mouth Band interior chamber C. Dis 
the coupling-pin, provided near its upper end 
With projecting journals ortrunnions aa, which 
are inserted in enlarged holes b b formed in the 
jaws of a forked arm, E. This arm is pivoted 
in a sort of three-sided box, H, formed on or 
attached to the top of the draw-head. 
The arm E prevents the pin from becoming 
lost at any time, and also aids the pin in go 
ing down through the head in coupling the 
d is the hole in the top of the draw-head for 
the passage of the pinD, and d is the corre 
sponding hole in the bottom of the draw 
head. This latter hole d is made elongated 
sufficiently for the end of the coupling-pin to 
pass into the same as it comes down on a curve 
by reason of the arm E. This curve is, how 
CaS, 
- 
- 
ever, reduced to the minimum by the trun 
nions a being placed in the elongated holes b . 
in the fork of the arm E. 
In front of the hole d in the top of the 
draw-head is a step, ac, for the pin to rest in 
after uncoupling. When it is desired to couple 
the cars the pin is placed in a step, y, in rear . 
of the hole d, from which step the pin falls 
down through the hole by the jarring. 
Within the chamber C is a sliding block, G, 
pressed forward by means of a spiral or other 
spring, h. When this spring is spiral, as 
shown, it is made to surround a guide-pin, i, 
projecting rearward from the block. In addi. 
tion to this a headed pin, m, projects from 
the under side of the block through a longi 
tudinal slot, n, in the bottom of the draw. 
head. 
The front of the sliding block G is made 
beveled from the top downward and rearward, 
so as to overhang the inner end of the coup 
ling-link I, and thus hold the same in a hori 
zontal position for easy entry into the oppo 
site draw-head. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The box H, pivoted forked arm E, with 
slots bin its jaws, and the pin D, with trun 
nions a a, in combination with the draw-head 
A, having pin-hole d, with steps a y formed 
in front and rear at the top of said pin-hole, 
substantially as and for the purposes herein 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 22d day of 
October, 1877. 
GEORGE W. PUTNAM. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY PHILo, 
A. H. KNOX, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198780.txt	S. SWARTZ & J. R. CROSS. 
Wood-Bending Machine. 
No. 198,780. 
Patented Jan. 1, 1878. 
 
| 
OTOs awgateo sesses 
| | 
|| || 
|| || || | 
| 
| 
| 
| 
Cape see CeOSCO assCacao DOC 
III III 
He see OOose OO eleOce 
| 
|| 
| 
| || || 
|| 
|| || 
|| || || || 
  
On DOCD-O CO-Citsaw To I WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
-6% e4-76.47%- 
17772 /u/. 
r. 
Sowu Stract 
Year ess. 
WA Staquit' seat ATTORNEYs 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LTHoGRAPHER, washingtoN, d. c. 
SAMUEL SWARTZ, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK, AND JOHN R. CROSS, OF 
CLEVELAND, OHIO. . 
. 
": 
-, 
i. 
IMPROVEMENT IN wood-BENDING MACHINES. 
 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19s, so, dated January 1, 1878; application filed 
July 16, 1877. , 
, 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
. 
. 
. . 
. . 
". . . 
. . 
portions of the machine, and give form to the 
: :::::: 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, SAMUEL SWARTZ, of 
corresponding bent portions of the coffin side. 
Buffalo, Erie county, New York, and JoHN R. 
E is a coffin side being subjected to the op 
CRoss, of Cleveland, Cuyahoga county, Ohio, 
. . 
eration of bending in our machine. . 
have invented certain new and useful Improve. . 
The operation of the machine is substantially 
ments in Bending-Machines; and we do hereby. 
as follows: The whole lengt 
h of the material. 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
to be: bent is introduced between the platens; 
act description of the invention, such as willen 
the straight portion rests between the straights. 
able others skilled in the art to which it per 
portions A and B of the platens, while that 
tains to make and use it, reference being had portion which is to be curved rests between 
to the accompanying drawings, which form part 
the curved portions A and B of the platens 
of this specification. . 
. 
if the board has been previously steamed, and 
Our invention relates to a new and improved: 
the machine is designed simply to set the whole 
bending-machine for bending coffin sides and 
board into shape; then the platens are simply 
brought together, and the board held until it. . 
other like pieces. . 
. 
machinery for bending 
It consists in new 
is set to its new shape. Or the board may be. . 
such pieces of wood. 
placed between the platens in a steamed or 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
soft condition, and the platens being of that: 
central section of a machine embodying our 
character known as hollow' or hot platens, 
invention as the same appears when partially 
provided with grooves and orifices on the face . 
closed upon the wood. Fig. 2 represents the 
for the escape of steam generated and set free 
from the wood, the platens are brought to 
same in side elevation when completely closed 
upon the Wood. Fig. 3 represents a variation 
gether and held until the moisture has been 
of our invention, wherein one leaf or die is 
practically expelled and the Wood set to its 
made in two sections. Fig. 4 represents a 
new shape. Or the platens may be of that: 
plan view of one of the plates or dies. 
character known simply as hot platens, 
Heretofore in bending coffin sides and other 
having smooth surfaces, and designed to op 
similar pieces it has been customary to employ 
erate upon wood in its ordinary condition, 
the bending-machine only upon that portion. 
In this event the platens are brought together 
which is to be bent, leaving that portion which 
and held in contact with the Wood for a short 
is to remain straight outside of the machine; 
time, when the wood will set permanently to 
but this process frequently causes the straight 
its new shape. 
portion outside of the machine to become 
In each of these cases the straight portion 
warped or bent out of shape; moreover, the 
has been subjected to pressure, and has been 
strain coming entirely and at once upon the 
made perfectly straight and true, while the 
bent portion, frequently causes it to sliver and 
bent portion has also simultaneously been 
break; but by our machine and process the 
formed. Boards which, on account of bad 
coffin side or other similar piece is taken in 
knots or blemishes, may have warped out of 
its separate form, and the whole piece, includ 
shape or have assumed such a condition as to 
ing that which is to remain straight, is placed 
be workable only into a cheap and rough arti 
between the bending-plates, so that when the 
cle, may be, by this process, Worked directly 
material emerges from the machine it has the 
into jobs that require true or smooth material. 
properbend, and at the same time the straight 
By thus introducing the whole length of the 
portion has been rendered perfectly straight 
board into the machine, both the straight por 
and smooth, and has been set in that position. 
tion and the curved portion, the bending is 
A is the lower bed or platen of a bending 
not so liable to injure or sliver the material 
machine; B, the upper bed or platen. C is a 
along the bent portions, because, as the platens 
joint. D is a steam-pipe. These platens are 
begin to operate upon the board, the pressure 
preferably made hollow, so that steam may 
at e brings the part ein contact with the lower 
enter and heat the same. AB form the bent 
platen, and at the same time causes the part 
. 
. 
19s, so 
require considerable manipulation to render 
them fit for use; but when a coffin side has 
been bent and pressed throughout its whole 
length, as by our process, the resulting board 
is not only true and uniform along the bent 
portion, but is perfectly flat, even, and true 
along the straight portions, and is thus read 
ily distinguished at a glance by these features 
from coffin sides as heretofore made. More 
over, the effect of the pressure of wood be 
tWeen hot plates or platens is to give it a 
smooth and hard appearance, not possessed 
by portions that have not been thus subjected 
to pressure; as, also, it possesses the marks 
of the press, by any of which several distinc 
tive features it is readily distinguished in the 
market. 
What we claim is 
1. A steam or hot press for shaping coffin 
sides consisting of platens AB, provided with 
curved portions A B and straight portions 
A'B', for receiving and simultaneously oper 
ating upon the whole length of the coffin side, 
substantially as described. 
2. In machinery for bending wood, the com 
bination, with the hollow platens, of the jointed 
steam-pipe connecting them, substantially, as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
- 
SAMUEL, SWARTZ. 
JOHN R. CROSS. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIs Tou MEY, 
WELLS. W. LEGGETT, 
e to lift from the platen, thus first distribut 
ing the strain from the point e to the point e. 
Then as theplatens further approach each other 
this long bend and the strains created thereby 
are gradually accumulated along the bent por 
tion, so that the strain has been gradually and 
in part sustained by the whole length of the 
board. 
It is not absolutely essential, however, that 
the platens should be so arranged as to thus 
gradually distribute the strains, for the upper 
platen may, as shown in Fig. 3, beformed in 
two parts, hinged, as shown. In this way the 
Straight portion may be first clamped and 
pressed between the platens, and then after 
ward the curved portions be brought together, 
the result being substantially the same, except 
that in the latter case the strain would have 
to be borne solely by the curved portion, and 
not by the whole length of the board, as above 
described. 
It will be understood from the foregoing 
that we do not limit ourselves to any particu 
lar kind of press. We may have simply press 
plates, or the press-plates may be adapted to 
be heated either by hot air or by steam. So, 
also, they may have smooth pressing-surfaces, 
or those surfaces may be grooved or channeled 
for the escape of moisture from the wood that 
is being operated upon. 
Ordinarily a coffin side is subjected to press 
ure, during bending, only at the bent portions, 
and the resulting coffin side is rough and un 
even along the straight portions, and unless 
the boardis ofremarkably clear and good qual 
ity, the straight portions appear warped and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198880.txt	J, FLEMING 
Road-Scraper, 
No. 98,880. 
Patented Jan. 1, 1878. 
 
WITNESSES 
M.PsFRs, Phot 
er, WAShi 
NWE 
azzi 
ca 
325e. 
cry, 
Z%a-6, 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JONATHAN FLEMING, OF MONROEVILLE, INDIANA. 
IMPROVEMENT INROAD-SCRAPERS. / 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19s, Sso, dated January l, 1878; application file 
October 30, 1877. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoNATHAN FLEMING, of 
Monroeville, in the county of Allen, and in the 
State of Indiana, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Road Scrapers 
and Levelers; and do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompany. 
ing drawing, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, making a part of this specifi 
cation. 
The nature of my invention consists in the . 
Construction and arrangement of a road scraper 
and leveler, as will be hereinafter more fully 
Set forth. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to Which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
its construction and operation, referring to 
the annexed drawing, in which the figure rep 
resents a perspective view of my machine. 
A represents the vertical frame, of any suit 
able dimensions, to which the blade is at 
tached. This blade is constructed of two or 
more sections, BB, and is made concave in 
form from a to b, for about two-thirds of the 
length from left to right, the remaining one 
third, from b to d, being flat or straight. The 
concave portion of the blade is for cutting and 
scraping, while the flat section or sections are 
for the purpose of leveling the soil as it is 
thrown to the left by the concave portion of 
the blade. Both offices of cutting and level 
ing are performed at one and the same time, 
and, the blade being in sections, any section 
that may be broken or injured can be dis 
placed and replaced at a much less expense 
than if the whole blade had to be replaced by 
reason of damage to any part of it. 
Each end of the frame A forms tenonse e, 
to which is hinged a block, C, by means of a 
rod, f, passing through them, as shown, said 
Elect having mortises for the tenons to pass 
O, 
To the outer side of the block or block-hinge 
C is pivoted an elbow or bent lever, D, the 
lower end of which has an outwardly-project 
ing spindle to receive a wheel, E. The upper 
end of the lever D passes up through a semi 
circular ratchet, G, and has a pawl, h, for hold 
ing it at any point desired in said iatehet. 
The rear end of eachhinge-block Cisprovided : 
with a hook, k, which is inserted in any one of: 
a series of holes in a plate, i, secured on the . 
. 
top of the frame A. 
By means of the levers D and their attach 
ments, as described, the blade B may be raised 
or lowered, at pleasure, to cut deeper or more 
shallow. The whole machine can be raised 
sufficiently high so that it can be hauled over 
rough grounds or any character of bridges 
Without endangering any part of the machine; 
and, by reason of the flexibility of the block 
hinges C C, the operator can adjust the wheels 
so as to run in an exact angle or line with the 
tongue or power, preventing any strain on the 
machine; and also, by means of said block 
hinges and attachments, he can raise or lower 
either end of the machine. 
To the front of the frame A is attached a 
half-circle, H, for regulating the position of 
the tongue I. This half-circle is to be made 
of wood and iron, so as to render it more sus 
ceptible of firm bracing, thereby giving the 
machine additional strength and durability. 
It is attached to the frame by screws in pass 
ing through projecting plates m at its ends. 
Between these plates and the frame are in 
serted slotted wedges JJ, which are movable, 
and are for the purpose of raising or lowering 
the tongue by changing the angle at Which the 
semicircular tongue-adjuster is held to the 
frame, and thereby giving the blade more or 
less dip. 
The upper screws in pass through the slots 
in the wedges J, so that by turning said screws 
the wedges can be moved up or down, as re 
quired, and then fastened by said screws to 
change the angle of the adjuster H, and there. 
by raise or lower the tongue, it being under 
stood that the lower edges of the plates in are 
always in contact with the frame A. 
The tongue I is provided with a loop, p, 
, through which the semicircle H passes, and 
its rear end is fastened, by means of a staple, 
t, to the frame A, a pin, 8, passing through the 
loop, semicircle, and tongue, as shown. In 
the frame A are two vertical rows of holes, a, 
for adjustment of the staple t. 
The tongue can easily be moved to the right, 
. 
2 
19s, SS0 
- 
chine. 
thereby moving the power toward the right 
end of the machine, in order to meet the re 
sistance of the soil to the concave portion of 
the blade, and also keep up a perfect equilib 
rium in the movement of all parts of the ma-. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a road-scraper, a sectional blade, B, 
made concave from one end to about two 
thirds of its length, as shown from a to b, and 
the remaining one-third straight, as shown 
from b to d, substantially as and for the pur 
poses herein set forth. 
2. In a road-scraper, the blocks or block 
hinges C C, carrying the supporting-wheels, 
adjustable at any desired angle, and held by 
means of the hooks k and perforated plates i, 
substantially as and for the purposes herein 
set forth. 
3. The combination, with the frame A, of 
the hinge-blocks C, levers D, with wheels E 
and pawls h, and the semicircular ratchets G, 
substantially as and for the purposes herein 
set forth. 
4. The combination of the semicircle H with 
plates m, screws in, and slotted wedges J, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes herein set 
forth. 
5. The combination of the frame A, having 
two vertical series ofperforations, ac, the adjust 
able semicircle H, tongue I, adjustable up and 
down and laterally in the perforations ac, the 
i loopp, pins, and shaft t, substantially as and 
: for the purposes herein set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 17th day of 
October, 1877. 
JONATHAN FLEMING, 
Witnesses: 
W. J. KERR, 
JOHN FI. FILEMENG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US198980.txt	Machine for Drying and Scouring Sheet-Metal. 
A. P. HINE 
No. 198,980. 
Patented Jan. 8, 1878. 
 
LIHElity.III IIII. mIII isHIn millium ImElm 
Zulu Sulu 
Ae / 2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AD ELBERT P. HINE, OF WOLCOTT VILLE, CONNECTICUT. 
IMPROVEMENT IN MACHINES FOR DRYNG AND SCOURING SHEET METAL, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 19s,9s0, dated January 8, 1878; application filed 
September 6, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ADELBERTP. HINE, of 
Wolcottville, county of Litchfield, and State 
of Connecticut, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Machines for Drying and 
Scouring Sheet Metal, which improvements 
are fully set forth in the annexed specification 
and in the accompanying drawing. 
Myinvention is in the nature of an improve 
ment upon the machine patented July 21, 
1868, by C. E. L. Holmes; and has for its ob. 
ject such an arrangement of a portion of the 
cleaning-rollers of said machine as will tend 
very materially to increase the quantity of 
sheet metal that can be scoured and cleaned 
by said machine in a given time, thus reducing 
the cost of such cleaning about one-half. 
Referring to the drawing, Figure 1 is a plan 
view of a machine for drying and scouring 
sheet metal embracing my improvements. 
Fig. 2 is a view, in perspective, of the same, 
showing two of its cleaning-rollers lifted up, 
and a strip of sheet metal, K, lying on the 
under rollers. 
In the drawing like letters refer to like parts 
in the different figures. 
In Fig. 1, A is the body of the machine, of 
oblong box form. 1 2 3 4 5 are gear-wheels, 
geared together, and running on studs at 
tached to the side of body A, or to short shafts 
running in boxes attached to the under side 
of the body. 
The said train of gear-wheels may be run by 
means of a pulley attached to the hub which 
carries gear-wheel 1. 
Lying across body A are four rollers, bl. b 
bl), firmly fixed upon shafts running through 
them, and said shafts are adjusted to run in 
boxes on either side of body A. 
D ID are universal joints interposed in the 
portion of the shafts to rollers bib', between 
the ends of the rollers and the boxes on the 
pinion end of said shafts. f are pinions on 
the ends of the shafts to rollers b blb, and 
they gear into and are run by gear-wheels 2 
3 4 5. 
E is a connecting-bar, attached by its ends 
to boxes d and d. h. and i? are two catch 
springs, arranged to hold boxes d and d down 
in place on body A. 
A disengaging-pedal, to be operated by the 
. . 
- 
- 
foot, may be arranged to release catch springs 
or hooks hand h? from their hold upon boxes 
dl and d. 
In these machines, as heretofore constructed, 
all the scouring-rollers have been arranged to 
run in boxes permanently attached to the body. 
To aid in effectually cleaning the metal, said 
rollers are covered with thick felt, and the box 
shaped body is partly filled with sawdust suf. 
ficiently, perhaps, to immerse the rollers there 
in one-half of their diameter. 
- 
In passing the end of a long strip of thin 
metal through the machine, preparatory to 
drawing it through to clean it, it is passed 
over roller b, under roller b, again over roller 
b, and finally under roller b, whence it is at 
tached to a revolving roller at the end of the 
machine, by which the strip is drawn between 
the cleaning-rollers and wound into a coil. 
A long thin strip of metal cannot be quickly 
and conveniently handled and placed in the 
position between the rollers, as above de 
scribed, and more time is consumed in so plac 
ing the metal, by having to pass it end first 
between the rollers, than is required subse 
quently to draw the Whole piece through and 
clean it. 
My improvement entirely obviates this in 
convenience, and enables the Workman to 
quickly place the metal in the machine with 
out having to pass it end first through the 
rollers, thus effecting a great saving of time, 
and consequent cost for scouring and clean 
ing; and consists in placing in the shafts to 
rollers b and b the universal joints D D, and 
in so fitting the boxes d and d on the front 
end of the shafts to said rollers b and b that 
they will retain their proper places thereon 
without being bolted to the body A. I then 
bolt each end of connecting-bar E to boxes d' 
and d. This maintains the rollers in a posi 
tion parallel to each other, and aids in giving 
a simultaneous upward and downward move 
ment to the two rollers b and b, or one end 
of them, as will be hereinafter explained. 
Catch-hooks h and h are arranged to Snap 
over and catch onto the top of boxes d and d, 
or onto connecting-bar E, for the purpose of 
holding down the ends of rollers b and b. 
The operation of the machine and my im 
provement thereto is as follows, viz: The ma 
- 
. 
chine is set in motion by means of a belt run 
ning upon the driving-pulley heretofore men 
tioned. A workman presses his foot upon a 
pedal, which releases the catch-hooks h h' 
from boxes d and d, and by means of a cord 
and weight, or a spring attached to connect 
ing-bar E, the front ends of rollers b and b 
will be lifted up to the position shown in Fig. 
2, the universal joints D D, interposed in the 
shafts to said rollers, as hereinbefore stated, 
permitting the front ends of said rollers to be 
so lifted while they are running, and while 
that portion of their shafts upon which are 
pinions fare retained in proper position to be 
run by the gear-wheels 2 and 4. This posi 
tion of the rollers b and b permits the work 
man to lay the end of a strip of metal, k, which 
is to be cleaned, directly upon the top of roll 
ers b and b, and now, by pressing down the 
ends of rollers b and b so they will be caught 
and retained by catch-hooks handh', the strip 
of brass will be found in the same position in 
the rollers as if it had been passed end first 
between them, first over and then under the 
other. Thus it is obvious that by letting the 
two rollers b and b up out of the way the end 
of the metal strip can be much more quickly 
put into position to be cleaned, and much time 
Saved. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a machine for scouring sheet metal, 
the combination of the rollers b b, running in 
fixed boxes on the body A of the machine, the 
rollers b and b, with the universal joints D 
D in the shafts thereof, movable boxes d' d', 
and the body A, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, in a machine for dry 
ing and scouring sheet metal, of the rollers b' 
and l and their shafts, the universal joints D 
D, the connecting-bar E, boxes d and d, and 
the catch-springs hand h', whereby the clean 
ing-rollers can be opened apart at one end on 
the line of their axes, and be returned and held 
in an operating position, and whereby the sheet 
metal can be placed between the rollers lat 
erally instead of endwise, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
ADELBERT. P. HINE. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. F. BROOKER, 
SIDNEY S.INGHAM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199080.txt	| 
I. & G. MARSH. 
Pottery Kiln, 
Patented Jan. 8, 1878. 
No. 199,080. 
 
WITNESSES: 
as 
Z/64, 
Muse 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC MARSH, OF MILTON, AND GRIGGS MARSH, OF LEWISBURG, PA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN POTTERY-Ki LNS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 99,0S0, dated January 8, 1878; application filed 
December 4, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, IsAAC MARSH, of Mil 
ton, in the county of Northumberland and 
State of Pennsylvania, and GRIGGs MARSH, 
of Lewisburg, in the county of Union and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and Improved Pottery-Kiln, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification: 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of our im 
proved kiln. Fig. 2 represents a modified 
form of kiln. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
kiln for baking or burning clay wares of every 
description. 
The invention consists in a kiln having fur 
naces located at its sides, and provided with 
flues for conveying the products of combus 
tion to the top of the kiln, and having a cen 
tral chimney, opening into or connected with 
the lower part of the kiln, to create a down 
Ward draft in the kiln, to more perfectly bake 
the wares contained by it. 
Referring to the drawing, A is a kiln, hav 
ing a grated or apertured bottom, B, which is 
arranged a short distance above the ground 
or bottom proper. A chimney, C, is arranged 
centrally in the kiln, and has openings a be 
low the apertured bottom for receiving the 
products of combustion. There are furnaces 
D at the sides of the kiln, which communicate, 
by means of flues b, with the upper portion of 
the kiln, for conveying thence the products of 
combustion. 
The articles to be baked or burned are placed 
upon the apertured bottom B, and the heat 
from the furnaces is applied first to the upper 
portion of the kiln. The upward draft in the 
chimney draws the products of combustion 
downward, between and around the articles 
contained by the kiln, through the apertured 
bottom, and into the openings a. 
The heat applied in this manner bakes the 
wares uniformly from the top to the bottom 
of the kiln. 
In Fig. 1 the flues b are located outside of 
the wall of the kiln, and communicate through 
apertures 0 with the interior of the kiln. In 
Fig. 2 the furnaces D are placed outside of 
the kiln, and the flues b' are placed inside and 
open near the roof of the kiln. The operation 
is the same in both cases. 
The construction of our kiln enables us to 
effect the burning of the clay with one-half 
the fuel consumed infurnaces of ordinary con 
struction. We are also enabled to use an 
thracite coal as fuel. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
A pottery-kiln consisting of raised grate 
bottoms B, central chimney C, having aper 
tures a below said bottom, and side furnaces, 
havifig flues provided with openings at top, 
all substantially as shown and described. 
ISAAC MARSH. 
GRIGGS MARSH. 
- 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL B. REBER, 
W. BRADY MARSH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199180.txt	A. L, BRICKINELL. 
Joining the Ends of Lead-Pipe, 
No. 199,180. 
Patented Jan. 15, 1878. 
 
 
   
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTUS L. BRICKINELL, OF. LONDON, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR TO GEORGE 
WALCOTT GILLETT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN JOINING THE ENDs of LEAD PIPEs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 199,1S0, dated January 15, 1878; application filed 
October 19, 1877. 
To all ?????, it may concer"?: 
Be it known that. I, AUGUSTUS LEABRICK 
NELL, a citizen of London, England, at present 
residing in the city, county, and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Joining the Ends of Lead 
Pipes to each other, which improvements are 
fully set forthin the following specification, of 
which the accompanying drawings form apart. 
The object of this invention is to make a 
thoroughly reliable Well-shaped joint quickly 
and economieally, without the use of fire, sol 
der, couplers, or other dangerous or costly elle 
ments or materials; and I accomplish this by 
first driving a suitably-shaped cylindrical hard 
wood or metal plug into the bore of each pipe, 
whereby the end of each of them is slightly en 
larged, so as to admit of the insertion of about 
half the length of a short, thin, hard-metal 
tube, having, by preference, circular grooves or 
threads or other projections provided upon 
and around the whole or part of its outer sur 
face.. The end of each pipe having been thus 
enlarged, it is found that the lead composing 
the enlarged part has become somewhat thin 
ner by the process of enlargement, andlithence 
becomes advisable to strike a few blows end 
wise on the enlarged end of the pipe, or, by 
other means, to upset, or cause a slight 
thickening of the part to compensate for the 
previous thinning, and also to provide suffi 
cient metal to fill the grooves or projections 
on the tube, and to form aflange and shoul 
ders on the outside of the joint When subjected 
to pressure, as hereinafter explained. 
The process of upsetting or thickening some 
what reduces the diameter and shortens the 
length of the bore of the enlarged part. It is, 
however, readily restored to the proper size to 
receive the tube by a second insertion of the 
plug. The ends of pipes to be joined are next 
rasped or scraped clean and bright on their 
faces. The tube is inserted about half-wa 
y 
into each of them, and by suitable mechanical 
appliances they are pressed into contact until 
they are welded together, being united by 
cohesion, forming a continuous homogeneous 
pipe. The mechanical appliance I prefer to 
use will be better understood by reference to 
the drawings, in which 
- 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section 
of mechanism employed in coupling the pipes; 
Fig. 2, a plan view, and Fig. 3 a view show 
ing a soft-metal coupling. 
A. A. are two lead pipes, welded together 
at an imaginary horizontal line, a, passing 
through the center of the flanged part of the 
Welded joint. B represents the internal tube 
with half its length inserted in each of the 
lead pipes, and provided with the grooves, 
which I prefer to form around it. C C are 
the two halves of an outer die, held together 
by two longitudinal horizontal connecting 
bolts, at a, one on each side. (Shown in Fig.2 
of the drawings.) D Drepresent the inner die, 
also divided vertically into two halves on a line, 
gy, which would pass through the power-bolts 
E. E. The outer and inner dies, with the two 
connecting and two power bolts and their re 
spective nuts, constitute the press. 
Power applied to the nuts FFforces the inner 
die D downward upon the thickened ends of 
the leadpipes, and effects the operation ofcold 
Welding by pressure, as Will be readily under 
stood. The nuts are most conveniently turned, 
particularly in confined spaces, by ratchet 
wrenches, which hold in vertical grooves or 
notches provided around the nuts for that 
purpose; and as the power-bolts are cut with 
right and left hand threads, respectively, the 
Wrenches react upon each other, which dis 
penses with the necessity forholding the press, 
and saves the lead pipe from torsional strain. 
When the joint has been welded, the dies, 
being in halves, are easily removed. 
It will be seen that however rough and un 
sightly the thickened ends of pipes may be 
previous to pressure, the effect of it is to pro 
duce a beautifully Smooth and uniform ap 
pearance to the outside of the joint, corre. 
sponding to the interior form of the die or 
press used. At the same time all the grooves 
or projections on the outside of the internal 
hard-metal tube become solidly filled with lead. 
The particular office of the tube is to resist 
the inward yielding of the lead to the force 
exerted upon it outwardly by the press, and 
thus compel the lead to receive a much greater 
pressure than it could otherwise possibly sus 
tain. The grooves or projections on the tube 
2 
199,180 
or projections upon it. The same may be 
smooth upon its surface; but repeated experi 
ments have demonstrated  the great superi 
ority for the purpose specified of a tube with 
grooves as described. 
It Will be apparent that other devices may 
be used for compressing the pipes end to end, 
and that cams, Wedges, &c., may be substi 
tuted for the power-screws for drawing the 
two parts of the dies together. I therefore 
do not limit myself to the use of the particu 
lar tool described, although I have found it 
very effective. 
I do not here claim the soft-metal union or 
coupling J, as it may form the subject of an 
other application for Letters Patent; but 
I claim 
1. The within-described process of uniting 
Soft-metal pipes-that is to say, by placing 
them with their ends in contact, and then 
forcing them together until united by cohe 
sion, forming a continuous homogeneous pipe, 
as set forth. 
2. The tool for uniting the ends of soft-metal 
pipes by pressure, consisting of two sections, 
each embracing the end of one of the pipes, 
and power-screws, or equivalent devices, for 
drawing the sections together. 
3. The combination of the die C C", in two 
parts, clamped together, the inner die ID ID', 
in two parts, and power-screws, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. A pipe-joint consisting of two pipes of 
soft metal united by cohesion, end to end, form 
ing one continuous homogeneous pipe around 
a central short tube, B, as described. 
AUGUSTUS LEA BRICKNELL. 
Witnesses: 
J. PYNE, 
JOS. PHILLIPS. 
materially aid this result by retarding the es 
cape of the lead from the flanged part of the 
joint longitudinally between the tube and the 
press. The use of the tube, which has the 
same internal diameter as the pipe, also main 
tains a full and undiminished bore Or Water 
Way. 
For the purpose of joining lead pipes at an 
angle to others, I cast short and compact T 
or other suitably shaped junction or branch 
pipes of lead, J, Fig. 3, and proceed as before 
explained, except that, as such pipes may be 
cast with enlarged and thickened ends e, it is 
not necessary to prepare them by enlarging 
and thickening, as in the case of ordinary lead 
pipes. 
These lead castings may be conveniently 
made in small ironmolds fitted with iron cores, 
which can easily be removed. Such molds may 
be arranged to receive the ends of taps and 
such like fittings, which may thus be castinto 
the lead junction-pipes. In some cases a 
Small ring or short piece of lead pipe may be 
cast around a fitting at a distance from its end 
sufficient to allow of its projecting into a lead 
pipe far enough to form a substitute or equiv 
alent for the internal tube. When this is 
done the part of the fitting so projecting should 
be grooved to imitate the tube it represents. 
If a fitting is previously tinned at the part 
upon which it is intended to cast the lead, 
the latter becomes most firmly attached to the 
fitting, and when welded to a lead pipe, as 
described, an extremely solid and reliable com 
bination is the result. A final stop or end to 
a pipe may be a flanged cap or socket of lead 
welded on the end of a pipe over the interior 
tube, in like manner as two pipes are joined. 
Having thus described my invention, I wish 
it to be understood that I do not desire to con 
fine myself to an internal tube having grooves 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199280.txt	2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. A., FREY. . 
Coal- Oil Stove. 
No. 19928O. 
Patented Jan. 15, 1878. 
 
J. A. FREY. 
CO al-Oil Stove. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 199,28O. 
Patented Jan. 15, 1878. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. FREY, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN COAL- Oil STOVES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 199,2so, dated January 15, 1878; application filed 
- 
, 
November 21, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN A. FREY, of New 
York, in the county of New York and in the 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Coal - Oil 
Stoves; and do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, making a part of this specifica 
tion, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my stove ar 
ranged for use, and Fig. 2 is a vertical central first being that represented in Fig. 2. 
Section of the same upon a line passing trans 
Versely across the burners. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
In the use of hydrocarbon oils for illuminat 
ing, heating, or cooking purposes great diffi 
culty has been experienced in preventing fire 
from reaching the oil-reservoir and igniting 
the gases given off from such oils; but all of 
the remedies proposed or tested have had in 
View nothing further than the insulation of 
the burner from the reservoir, so as to prevent 
heat from being conducted from the former to 
the latter. The wick-tube must have such size 
as to permit the wick to move freely through 
the same, and if, as frequently occurs, the wick 
happens to be smaller than the average, a suf. 
ficient space is left unfilled within the tube to 
permit gas from the reservoir to pass upward 
to the flame, and, if in sufficient quantity, said 
gas is liable to ignite within said tube and 
Communicate fire to the gas within the reser 
voir, the result being an explosion, which is 
more or less disastrous in its effect. A like 
result frequently occurs in an attempt to ex 
tinguish the flame in the burner by blowing 
down the chimney, the downward current of 
air causing the flame to be forced into the wick 
tube, so as to ignite the gas contained therein 
and force the same into the oil-reservoir. 
To obviate these difficulties is the design of 
my invention, which consists in a coal-oil stove 
in which are combined the following-named 
elements, to wit: an oil-reservoir which hori 
ZOntally surrounds a central air-chamber, a 
Water-reservoir that incloses the upper side of 
said air-chamber and extends over a portion 
Or the whole of the upper side of such oil-res 
ervoir, and wick-tubes which pass downward 
through said water-reservoir and air-chamber, 
and thence extend in a curve downward, out 
ward, and upward to, and are connected with, 
the bottom of said oil-reservoir, substantially 
as and for the purpose hereinafter set forth. 
As the principle of operation of my inven 
tion is the same whether applied to lanpsor to 
stoves, it will sufficiently illustrate said inven 
tion to show its employment in the latter. 
For the purpose of illustration, two forms of 
reservoir and wick-tubes will be shown, the 
In the annexed drawings, A represents the 
oil-reservoir of my stove, which has, preferably, 
a general rectangular form in the plan view, 
is provided with a correspondingly-shaped 
central opening, B, and rests upon, and is sup 
ported by, a suitable base, C. From opposite 
sides, at the bottom of the reservoir A, two 
wick-tubes, D, extend downward, inward, and 
upward in a curve, and near their upper ends, 
which have the usual elevation above the res 
ervoir, are each provided with one or more wick 
wheels, e, that are secured upon and operated 
by a shaft, E, which extends horizontally out. 
ward in a line parallel with the side of said 
tube, and at its outer end is provided with a 
button, e, by which said shaft is rotated. Said 
wick-wheels are each inclosed in the usual 
manner by a housing, d, which is formed upon 
the side of said tube, while from said housing 
outward nearly to said button-head e a tube, 
d/, incloses said shaft E. Upon the upper side 
of the oil-reservoir A a chamber or reservoir, 
F, is formed by means of a vertical flange, f, 
which extends upward from the upper side, 
near the outer edge of said oil-reservoir, and 
a diaphragm, f, that extends horizontally 
across the opening B at any point between its 
lower and upper ends, the design of which 
chamber is to contain water to intercept such 
heat as is radiated downward from the burners, 
and to keep the wick-tubes and Wick-raising 
Upon opposite sides of the 
mechanism cool. 
oil-reservoir A, immediately outside of the 
flangef, are provided openings a, each of which 
has slightly greater length than the transverse 
length of a wick-tube, D, is arranged directly 
over the lower end of the same, and is pro 
vided with a cover, af, that is hinged or in any 
Surrounding the 
manner secured in place. 
 
2 
199,2so 
contents of the same; third, the form of the 
wick-tubes and the location of the lower end 
of the same below the supply-openings enables 
the wicks to be seen and withdrawn from the 
reservoir whenever they are turned downward 
beyond reach of the wick-wheels, and also en 
ables the operator to know in which direction. 
he is moving said wicks when their upper ends 
are withdrawn from sight. 
Having thus fully set forth the nature and 
merits of my invention, what I claim as new 
S 
A coal-oil stove in which are combined the 
following-named elements, to wit: an oil-reser 
voir which horizontally surrounds a central 
air-chamber, a water-reservoir that incloses 
the upper side of said air-chamber, and extends. 
over a portion or the whole of the upper side 
of said oil-reservoir, and wick-tubes which pass 
downward through said water-reservoir and 
air-chamber, and thence extend in a curve 
downward, outward, and upward to, and are 
connected with, the bottom of said. oil-reser 
voir, substantially as and for the purpose set 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 5th day of 
November, 1877. 
forth. 
- 
JOEN A. FREY. 
Witnesses: 
- 
FRANCIS WILLIAMLAMB 
SAMUEL LOBENTHAL. 
wick-tubesl), between the housings d and their 
upper ends, is a reticulated diaphragm, G, 
which at its edges is secured to or upon a ver 
tical circular flange, G', that is supported 
upon three legs, g, which legs are secured to, 
and extend between, said flange and the oil 
reservoir A. To one side of the flange G/ is 
hinged a cone-plate, H, which is provided with 
cones h, that surround the upper end of each 
wick-tube D, and, when turned downward to 
a horizontal position, inclose the upper side 
of said flange. 
From the edge of the cone 
plate Ha cylinder, I, extends upward to a suit. 
able height, and at its upper end is provided 
With a flaring open-work flange, i, and a grat 
ing, K, for the support of cooking utensils. 
Amica door, I', arranged at one side of the 
heating-cylinder I, enables access to be had to 
the interior of the latter for the purpose of 
lighting the Wicks. 
The stove, which is now complete, and is 
used in the ordinary manner, possesses the 
following advantages: First, the wick-tubes 
are filled with oil within their curved portions 
while any oil remains in the reservoir, and, 
consequently no gas can pass through the same 
from said reservoir, nor can flame pass down 
ward from the burners; second, in consequence 
of the length of the wick-tubes, the heat gen 
erated at their upper ends is dissipated before 
it reaches the oil-reservoir, and does not op 
erate to raise the temperature of the liquid 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199380.txt	W. F. RAYMOND 
Force-Pumps. 
No. 199,38O. 
Patented Jan. 22, 1878. 
W - A 
 
 
NN 
  
S. 
S. 
 
YNY was a c s : 
2.72. 
 
7 
| (\ 
en v c nvers. 
SSSSS 
QWyk) 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, washingtoN, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILBUR. F. RAYMOND, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF, CHARLES 
STER, OF SENECA FALLS, 
A. ALLEN, OF NEW YORK, AND AUSTING. FO 
NEW YORK, 
MPROVEMENT IN FO RCE-PU MPS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 199,3s0, dated January 22, 1878; application filed 
- 
June 25, 1877. 
. 
" 
rel A. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILBUR. F. RAY MOND, 
of Brooklyn, Kings county, in the State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements relating to Pumps, of which 
the following is a specification: 
My improvements may be applied with some 
success to many kinds of pumps; but I have 
in my experiments applied it only to portable 
pumps. I believe that it will be by far the 
most useful in pumps of that class. 
I have succeeded in devising an arrange 
ment and construction whereby a strong and 
continuous stream is thrown with a very com 
pact and reliable mechanism. 
The accompanying drawings form a part 
of this specification, and represent what Icon 
sider the best means of carrying out the in 
vention. 
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal section, 
and Fig. 2 is one of the details on a larger 
scale detached. 
Similarletters of referenceindicate like parts 
in all the figures. 
The barrel is marked A. It is contracted 
at its lower end, forming a seat for the lower 
valve B, and extends a little distance below 
this valve-seat in a slightly-tapered exten 
sion, A', on which tapered part is fitted a 
short length of rubber tube, M, with a broad 
rubber flange or annular rim, M, the func 
tions of which will presently appear. 
The top of the barrel is contracted, with a 
packing and provisions for compressing and 
adjusting it. Through the packing works a 
polished tube or hollow piston rod or plunger, 
D, the upper part of which is adapted to be 
grasped by the hand for operating it. The 
extreme top carries a changeable tip or noz 
zle, which connects with a smaller tube, D', 
extending down the interior of the hollow rod 
D to about the extent indicated. 
This tubel)is peculiarly formed and equipped 
at and near its lower end. At the bottom is 
a contraction, D, forming a seat for a ball 
valve, C. Alittle above the tube is contracted 
suddenly in diameter, and is continued of that 
reduced diameter a sufficient length to form 
thereby a seat, on which the loose annular pis 
ton E may freely play within certain limits. 
This piston E may be mainly of metal packed 
with a soft fibrous material, and forming a 
practically-tight fit on its inner edge against 
the contracted part D of the tube D, and at 
its outer edge against the interior of the bar 
I can employ one or more washers of rub 
ber, G, fitting against slight extensions or 
flanges D D, which aid in making a tight 
fit when the annular piston E presses against 
the same. 
A series of holes, d, are made through the 
tube near the upper end of the contracted por 
tion D. 
I form an annular water-chamber, i, around 
the exterior of the barrel A by inclosing it 
within an exterior casing, H. A series of holes, 
a, near the top of the barrel, put the upper 
end in communication with the annular cham 
ber i. 
The exterior casing H is extended down 
ward below the extension. A? of barrel A, and 
adapted to receive a hose or other suitable 
connection, as may be required. Within it, 
a little above the base, is a short tapering 
tube, HP, supported by means of an internal 
flange, H, which latter is liberally perfo 
rated with holes hand forms the seat for the 
annular valve M, before referred to. 
When the pump is adjusted for use, the rub 
ber portion M forms a tight-fitting connection 
between the extension A' at the lower end of 
the barrel and the internal tube H. 
The exterior casing His formed with a screw 
coupling, H, which, on screwing down, forms 
a tight joint by the aid of a slight rubber 
ring, H', applied as represented. On con 
necting the coupling H', the parts come to a 
tight bearing on the rubber H at the same 
moment as the tapering extension or socket 
A comes to a tight bearing in the rubber 
packed interior of the tube H. 
To allow for want of mathematical perfec 
tion in this respect, the tube H and the ex 
- 
2 
199,350 
- 
. 
--- 
. 
a - 
faced. 
check. 
tension A' are made with only a slight taper, 
so that by the yielding of the rubber Mbe 
tween them the socket or extension. A may 
be thrust deeper down or may be arrested 
higher up, and still the joint be tightly main 
tained by the rubber M within considerable 
limits. 
I provide screw-connections with other suit 
able couplings at the top, and at other con 
venient places, if desired. The exterior of 
the structure, being more exposed to injury 
from blows and otherwise than the internal 
parts, is liable to become bruised and de 
The annular chamber between the exterior 
casing H and the barrel. A performs a double 
function of allowing considerable indenta 
tions in the exterior casing without affect 
ing the barrel, and also of affording a liberal 
Water-passage for the water to reach the 
holes a. 
I prefer ball-valves of rubber or other suita 
ble material for the valves B and C, and in 
such case I can cage them, respectively, by 
extending a pin across a little above each, as 
represented. 
I propose, in most cases, to employ an addi 
tional valve, F, in the position represented, 
also caged by a pin above, which serves as a 
Operation: The parts, being applied effi 
ciently together, and the pump filled with wa 
ter, pressing down the hollow piston-rod D 
causes the valve B to close and the valve C 
to rise and receive water from the lower por 
tion of the barrel into the hollow piston-rod, 
and to be discharged through the nozzle or 
tip at the top. The loose piston E, during 
the early portion of the descending move 
ment, rises both by the friction of its exterior 
against the barrel and by the pressure of the 
water below to the upper end of the con 
tracted portion D, in which position it covers 
the holes d, and constitutes for the time be 
ing an absolutely tight piston, which, as it de 
scends, not only compresses the water in the 
barrel below and forces it out through the 
nozzle at the top, but also draws in water into 
the upper part of the barrel through the holes 
a, which water is received freely through the 
annular space between the barrel and the ex 
terior casing H by the lifting of the flexible 
flange or valve M?. 
So soon as the hollow piston-rod D has 
reached the lower end of its motion, and the 
force of the hand at the top is applied to draw 
it upward again, the valve B rises to receive 
water into the lower portion of the barrel, the 
valve C closes the lower end of the piston-rod, 
and the valve M -drops onto its perforated 
seat, preventing any back flow through the 
holes a, and imprisoning the water in the up 
per part of the barrel. At the same time the 
annular piston E is shifted to the lower end 
of the contracted portion D, and exposes the 
t 
holes d, through which the water in the up 
per part of the barrel is received freely to be 
discharged through the nozzle at the top. 
There is thus a discharge at the top, both with 
the descent and with the ascent of the hollow 
piston-rod. 
In order to maintain a continuous stream, I 
provide an air-chamber by utilizing the up 
per portion of the hollow piston-rod D exte 
rior to its inclosed tube D. Care must be 
taken that in charging the pump it be held 
upright, so as to retain air in the space re 
ferred to. 
In pumping rapidly, or forcing the water 
to any considerable height through a hose 
coupled on the nozzle, under any conditions 
where the pressure in the pump is considera 
ble, the water will rise around the lower end 
of the interior tube D; but it will never rise 
to the top. It will always retain an annular 
chamber of air, which, by its elastic compres 
sions and expansions, keeps the current of Wa 
ter practically uniform. 
Various modifications may be made in the 
details. Thus, for example, I can solder or 
otherwise permanently join the upper ends of 
the internal tube H with the hollow piston 
rod D, and thus reduce the chances of leak 
ing the air from the air-chamber. 
I can provide a cross-handle adapted to re 
ceive both hands, and can equip the pump 
with a base adapted to receive the feet of the 
operator. This may be desirable in some 
peculiar situations; but I prefer the parts as 
here specified. 
Some of the parts may be useful without 
the others. 
For general miscellaneous use all the prin 
cipal parts should be of brass, and as light as 
consistent with the proper strength. 
The valve F, mounted in the hollow piston 
rod D, performs the duties simply of a check 
valve, to aid the other valves in resisting a 
backward flow when the pump is at rest. . It 
may be dispensed with altogether when de 
sired. 
. . 
- 
. 
. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The valve C, mounted below the mova 
ble piston E, in combination with the hollow 
plunger D, having the holes d, and with the 
barrel A, having the holes a, and a suitable 
exterior casing, H, and valves B and M, as 
herein specified. 
2. The valve M7, with its tubular part M, 
and the means for confining it between the 
extension A and the tube H', extending 
synward from the seat H h, as herein speci 
3. The combination of the screw-coupling 
H3 and its packing H' in the exterior casing 
H. With the tapering tube H', rubber valve M 
M", and tapering extension A', extending down 
Ward from the barrel A, as and for the pur 
poses herein specified. 
4. In combination with the barrel A, ex 
ed. 
- 
. 
. 
. 
199,3S0 
3 
terior casing H, hollow plunger D, and hol- 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
low movable piston E, the delivery-valve C my hand this 19th day of June, 1877, in the 
below and the check-valve Fabove said piston, presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
and carried therewith on the hollow plunger, 
WILBUR. F. RAYMOND. 
and with suitable valves B and M seated on 
the fixed parts, as and for the purposes speci- 
fied. 
THOMAs D. STETSON, 
CHAS. O. STETSON. 
Witnesses: 
& 
- -- aer 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199480.txt	0. L. TAYLOR, 
Gate, 
No. 199,48o. 
Patented Jan. 22, 1878. . 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIVER L. TAYLOR, OF FAYETTEVILLE, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN GATES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 199,4so, dated January 22, 1878; application filed 
December 11, 1877. 
. . 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, OLIVER L. TAYLOR, of 
Fayetteville, Onondaga county, New York, 
have invented an Improved Gate, of which 
the following is a specification: 
The object of my invention is a gate con 
structed, as fully described hereinafter, to be 
readily opened, expose the full roadway, re 
main firmly between the posts when shut, and 
simple in its construction and operation, and 
cheap to erect. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side sectional 
elevation of my improved gate; Fig. 2, a plan; 
and Fig. 3, a detached view. 
A and A' are the posts, and B is the gate. 
The post A consists of two side pieces, a. a, 
between which is hung, on a pivot, b, the up 
per bar c of the gate D; and at the inner face 
of each side piece is a groove or slot, e, for a 
purpose described hereinafter. 
The gate consists of bars c, parallel to the 
bar c, and pickets ddd, all secured by bolts 
i, so as to permit the movements hereinafter 
described. 
At each side of the picket d, near the lower 
end, is a pin or lug, n, which extends into the 
adjacent groove e, and on the innerface of the 
post A is a groove, ac, into which project the 
ends of the bars c c'. The end of the upper 
bar projects to the rear, and carries a weight, 
W, which facilitates the depression of this end, 
thereby elevating the gate to the position 
shown in dotted lines, Fig. 1. 
As the gate is raised the lugs in are guided 
in the slots e, so as to insure the folding of the 
bars of the gate together, and direct the lower 
bar c' inward; and when the gate is lowered 
the said lugs and grooves act to separate the 
bars, the ends of which enter the slot ac, and 
are held therein, securing the gate immovably 
in place, except when the upper bar is de 
pressed at the end. 
It will be seen that the lower bar c is so 
guided by the pins and slots that it passes 
completely beyond the inner edge y of the post 
A, thereby opening the whole roadway for the 
free passage of vehicles; and that the bars and 
inner picket, when the gate is raised, are com 
pletely within the outer edge y of said post. 
The gate when elevated, therefore, occupies 
no more room than does the post, while the 
sides of the latter support laterally the gate in 
its elevated position. 
It will further be seen that this construc 
tion, permitting the gate to be brought to a 
vertical position, insures its retention in place 
when elevated without any tendency to fall 
forward, and without the need of any fasten 
ings; and that the extension of the grooves e 
to the edge of the post permits, the gate to be 
swung or removed without displacing the post 
or any part thereof. 
I am aware that elevating swinging gates 
have been made of two cross-bars and a series 
of pickets; but this construction does not per 
mit the gate to be brought to a true vertical 
position, nor does it fully clear the roadway. 
I claim 
A gate-post provided with continuous slots 
e extending upward and to the edges, and 
adapted to receive and guide the lugs in of the 
pivoted folding gate D, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
OLIVER L. TAYLOR. 
Witnesses: 
J. L. JEWELL, 
DAVID DONALDSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199580.txt	Methods of Ornamenting Metallic Surfaces for 
W. RIKER 
Jewelry, &c. 
No. 199,580. 
Patented Jan. 22, 1878. 
Z77.4. 
{ 
 
Z2. a. 
2. 
Z 22, 3. 
 
Z27. 6. 
=4=a. 
Z27, 8. 
W 
727. 9 
Ea. 
Z72. 77. 
% 
Z'ez Ze. 
a. 
: 
WITNESSES 
... 
24-hops 
- 
DYNTOR: 
(; 3 
/4 
ATTORNEYS. 
PEERs, PHOTO-LITHoGRAPHER, washingtoN, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM RIKER, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
IMPROVEMENT IN METHODS OF ORNAMENTING METALLIC SURFACES FOR JEWELRY, &c, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 199,5S0, dated January 22, 1878; application filed. 
, 
, 
- 
January 17, 1878. 
- 
... 
 
- 
- 
: 
ling. 
... 
To all whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM RIKER, of 
Newark, in the county of Essex and State of 
New Jersey, have invented a new and Im 
proved Method of Ornamenting Metallic Sur. 
faces for Jewelry and other similar articles; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
Myinvention relates to the inlaying of gold, 
silver, platinum, (or other suitable metal,) in 
gold or silver, and in producing inlaid rings, 
lockets, pins necklaces, napkin-rings, spoons, 
and other gold and silver ware. 
e 
The method consists in cutting the forms 
which constitute the emblems or configuration 
from a bimetallic plate, or a plate having upon 
one-side the color of metal which gives dis 
tinctiveness to the emblem, and upon the other 
a metal of the same quality and color, as the 
back of the main body portion of the piece of 
ware to be inlaid, so that when the emblems 
are inserted and soldered into the apertures 
cut through the body-piece, and arranged to 
be flush on both front and back surfaces and 
said body-piece, said emblems appearing upon 
the face in different colors, while the back of 
each emblem being of the same color and 
quality of metal as the back of the main body, 
the reverse sides of the emblems are not dis 
tinguishable, but present, with the main part 
of the back, a plain homogeneous surface of 
uniform color and quality, thus giving the ar 
ticle a more finished appearance, and securing 
greater facilities in its manufacture, as herein 
after more fully described. 
The figures of the drawing illustrate the suc 
cessive steps of inlaying a masonic badge or 
pin, for instance, in accordance with my im 
proved method. 
In practicing my invention, Iselect the gold 
to be used for the body of the article-say, red 
gold of fourteen carats, as shown at a. This 
I reduce to the desired thickness-say, one 
sixty-fourth of an inch. I next select the col 
ors to be used in the different parts of the em 
blems-as, for instance, green gold for the com 
passes, as seen at d, silver for the square, as 
seen at c; and yellow gold for the letter G, as 
seen at b. These colors of metals I plate, be 
fore stamping, upon gold of the same quality 
and color, Figs. 6, 9, 12, as that constituting 
the body or back of the badge, (red gold of 
fourteen carats,) and reduce this bimetallic or, 
plated stock to the same thickness as that from 
which the pin is to be made-namely, one 
sixty-fourth of an inch. I now cut, with 
punches, (but a saw or other instrument may 
be used) in the piece to be inlaid an aperture 
of the shape of the letter G, as seen in Fig. 
4. With the same punch I cut from the bi 
metallic plate or plated stock, Fig. 6, having 
the yellow gold b and the redgold a, a letter 
G, Fig. 5, which I insertinto the aperture, Fig. 
4, and solder. 
I then cut another aperture, 
Fig. 7, in the shape of the square, and with 
the same punch cut from the bimetallic plate 
or plated stock, having a face, c, of silver and 
a back, a, of red gold, Fig. 9, an emblem of 
the square, Fig. 8, which I then insert in the 
aperture in Fig. 7, and solder. With a third 
punch I cut an aperture, Fig. 10, in the shape 
of the compasses, and with the same punch cut 
from the bimetallic plate or plated stock, hav 
ing green gold don its face and red gold at at 
the back, Fig. 12, an emblem of the compasses, 
Fig. 11, which I then insert in the aperture in 
Fig.10, and solder. The inlaying is then com 
plete, as seen in Figs.1 and 2, and while the 
faces of the emblems show in different colors b 
cd, the backs of the same are all of the same 
color and quality. a, Figs, 6, 9,12, as the back 
of the main body portions, thus leaving a plain 
surface of uniform and homogeneous color, 
Fig. 2, to the back of the plate shown in Fig. 
1, which plate is afterward worked up in the 
form of a finished pin, as in Fig. 13, and thus 
dispensing with the labor and expense of the 
usual independent backing-piece. 
The nature of my invention therefore con 
sists in inlaying the article to be produced with 
a bimetallic or plated piece, in which one metal 
is of the same character as the article or back 
of the article itself, and the other of some dif. 
ferent color, suitable to the design or emblem . 
to be produced. 
The advantages thus gained are as follows: 
By this method I produce an inlaid article 
which possesses advantages in cheapness, dura 
bility, and in finish over inlaid articles pro 
duced by other methods. 
2 
199,5so 
One of the methods of producing the effect 
of a design in different colors of metal, which 
has heretofore been used, is the rolling of sev 
eral plates or laminae of different colors of gold 
together, and then cutting down with a tool 
to the color desired. The objections to this 
method are as follows: Great care is required 
to avoid cutting too deep through the thin 
plates, and thus exposing the Wrong color; 
much metal must be cut away in order to ex 
pose any area of one color; the cutting being 
in intaglio, the bottom colors cannot be pol 
ished smoothly and simultaneously with the 
top faces; to produce a variety of colors the 
plate must be verythick at one point and thin 
at others, involving greater expense and loss 
of material; and, furthermore, the designer 
has no outline to guide him, and the work 
must be performed by skillful artists. 
In my invention the surfaces of all the colors 
are flush to start with, and may be simultane 
ously and evenly polished by lapping. The 
configuration of the design is produced me 
chanically by the die, and but little skill and 
a small amount of engraving are required. The 
plate is of uniform thickness when completely 
engraved, and hence may be made lighter and 
cheaper, 
Another method, distinct from that now 
claimed by me, is as follows: The article to be 
produced may be inlaid with pieces of a single 
metal, showing the same colors on the back as 
on the face of the article thus inlaid. 
This method is defective, first, in the finish 
of the back, which, in leaving a surface of va 
rious colors, gives to the whole a crude, cheap, 
and inartistic appearance; second, when fine 
gold and other soft metals are used, the pieces 
inserted are liable to be dented in matting and 
the other processes of finishing when unsup 
ported by a backing of a more solid nature. 
These defects are sought to be remedied in 
the following ways: First, by means of a false 
back; second, by backing up each piece after 
it is inserted. 
Objections to methods first and second: 
First, in using a false back, the back used must 
either be heavy, and thus expensive, or it is 
a 
liable, when being soldered in place, to be bent 
and thrown out of shape by the air underneath 
being heated, and thus an uneven back be pro 
duced. Again, after the back is soldered in 
place, it is liable to be sprung out of position 
when the article is heated, and the face thus left 
without support. Unlessit be heavyitis liable 
to be dented in matting and other processes of 
finishing, and the soft metals are thus liable 
under any circumstances. Second, in backing 
up each piece after it is inserted, the difficul 
ties first mentioned are aggravated, and the 
finish will be still less perfect. 
By my improved method, however, as de 
scribed in the specification, produce a solid 
piece, which is not thrown out of shape when 
heated, which presents an even back, of one 
color and beautiful finish, protecting theinlaid 
pieces from being dented in matting and the 
other processes of finishing, and at the same 
time the articles thus produced have the ad 
vantages of cheapness and durability. 
What I therefore claim as my invention, and 
wish to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The method herein described of orna 
menting metallic surfaces forjewelry and other 
similar articles, which consists in cutting aper 
tures in the main plate corresponding to the 
design, and inlaying said apertures with de 
signs or emblems cut from a bimetallic 
plate 
or plated piece of the same thickness as the 
body-plate, in which one metal is of the same 
character and color as the article or back of 
the article itself, and the other of some differ 
ent color, suitable to the design or emblem to 
be produced, substantially as described. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a pin or 
badge having upon its face inlaid designs of 
different colors of metal and a back of uniform 
colorand quality, the said inserted pieces being 
flush front and back with the body-plate, sub 
stantially as shown and described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
WILLIAM RIKER, 
Witnesses: 
EDWD. W. BYRN, 
CHAs. A PETTIT, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199680.txt	L. ANTHOINE. 
Cultivator, 
Patented Jan. 29, 1878. 
No. 199,680. 
- - - - - 
(2) 
4. 
; 
: 
C . . 
tas 
2 o e 4 
 
g 
W 
w ZY 
w 
M 
A O 
sets 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS ANTHOINE, OF EP WORTH, IOW. A. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CULTIVATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 199,6s0, dated January 29, 1878; application filed 
. 
October 30, 1877. 
... 
." 
- 
* 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS ANTHOINE, of 
Epworth, in the county of Dubuque and State 
of Iowa, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Cultivators, of which the follow 
ing is a specification: . 
Figure 1 is a top view of my improved cul 
tivator, one of the plow-beams being omitted. 
Fig. 2 is a side view of the same, partly in 
section, through theirregular linea aa a, Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 is a detail cross-section of the front. 
bar of the frame, taken through the line yy, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a detail cross-section of a 
side bar of the frame, taken through the line. 
2 &, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is an under-side view of 
the axle, and the part of the frame to which 
it is attached. 
Similar letters of reference indicate Corr 
Sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to furnish an 
improved cultivator which shall be simple in 
construction, convenient in use, reliable and 
effective in operation, and easily adjusted, as 
circumstances may require. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the drawing, and then pointed 
Out in the claim. . 
A are the side bars of the frame, the forward 
ends of which are rabbeted upon their upper 
sides to receive the ends of the front cross-bar 
B, which is secured to them by bolts. To the 
side bars A, a little in front of their centers, 
are framed the ends of the cross-bar C, called 
by me the axle-bar. 
Dare the axle-arms, upon the bases of which 
are formed plates E. The plates Ehave three 
slots formed in them longitudinally with the 
axle-arms D, to receive the bolts by which the 
said axle-arms are secured to the bars A C of 
the frame, so that the wheels may be conven 
iently adjusted wider apart or closer together, 
as may be required. 
F is the tongue, which is bolted to the upper 
sides of the front bar B and axle-bar C. This 
construction gives the tongue F an upward 
inclination, so that its forward end may rest 
in the neck-yoke ring, while the frame ABC 
remains level. 
G is the double-tree, which is secured to the 
upper side of the tongue F by a bolt and ham 
mer-strap. 
H is a bar, which is placed beneath the 
front cross-bar B, and its ends are bent up 
ward, and are bolted to the under side of the 
tongue F in front and rear of the cross-bar B. 
The bar His provided with a hammer-strap, 
I, and bolt, so that the double-tree G may be 
attached to the bar H to lower the point of 
draft attachment, and adapt the machine to 
be used as a Walking-cultivator. 
J are the whiffletrees, which are attached to 
the upper side of the ends of the double-tree 
G, so that still other adjustments of the point 
of draft attachment may be obtained by re 
versing the said double-tree, the whiffletree 
hooks being so formed as not to become un 
hooked from the traces whichever side may 
be up. 
Kare U-shaped bars or straps, which are 
passed around the forward side of the front 
cross-bar B. The ends of the bars K project, 
and have holes formed through them to re 
ceive the pivots L., upon the lower ends of 
which are formed lugs to receive the forked 
forward end of the bar M. The rear end of 
the bar M is bolted to the side of the forward 
end of the plow-beam N. The bar M is made 
With an offset at the forward end of the plow 
beam N, to bring it into line with the central 
line of the said beam, and is bent so as to in 
cline upward from the end of the plow-beam 
to the pivot or swivel pin L, so that the said 
plow-beam may be level. 
O are the plows, which are secured to the 
lower ends of the standards P by a single 
bolt, the lower ends of the said standard be 
ing so formed as to fit against the rear side 
of the said plows. 
The standards P are made round, and pass 
through holes in the rear ends of the castings 
Q, which are bolted to the sides of the beaths 
N. The rear ends of the castings or holders 
Q stand out a little to bring the plows con 
nected with the opposite sides of the beams 
to the proper distance apart. The standards 
P are secured adjustably in the holes in the 
castings Q by set-screws, which set-screws 
are not shown in the drawings. 
The holders Q are secured to the beams N 
by two bolts, the rear one passing through a 
hole in the said holder, and the forward one 
passing through a slot leading in from its up 
 
199,6s0 
plows can 
per edge, so that the pitch of the 
be readily adjusted. 
To the forward part of the plow-beam N is 
attached the lower end of a short chain, K, 
the other end of which is attached to the end 
of a crank-arm, S, formed upon or attached 
to the inner end of a short shaft, T. 
The shaft T works in bearings attached to 
the axle-bar C and the side bar A, and to its 
outer end is attached a lever, U, which pro 
jects, and is bent or inclined inward into such 
a position that it may be readily reached and 
operated by the driver from his seat. 
Upon the inner side of the lower part of 
the lever U is formed, or to it is attached, a 
U-shaped projection, V, the ends of which 
engage With the teeth of the segmental ratchet 
wheel W, attached to or formed in one piece 
with the outer bearing of the shaft T. 
The lever U is kept from being drawn too far: 
away from theratchet W by the keeperX, which 
passes around the curved bar of the said: 
ratchet W, and its ends are attached to the 
said lever U. The lever U is held up against 
the ratchet W, holding the projections V in 
gear with the saidratchet W, by a spiral spring, 
Y, coiled around the inner part of the shaft 
T, between the inner bearing of the said shaft 
and the crank-arm S. 
With this construction, by moving the free 
end of the lever U outward, the projection V 
will be withdrawn from the teeth of the ratchet 
W, allowing the said lever U to be moved to 
raise the plows from and lower them to the 
ground, and to adjust them to work at any de 
sired depth in the ground. 
To the plow-beams N, a little in the rear of 
the axle-bar C, are attached the lower ends 
of the uprights Z, to the inner sides of which 
are pivoted the ends of two rods, A. 
The 
rods A" of the two-uprights Z are designed to 
overlap and be secured to each other adjusta 
bly by clasps. 
B' is the seat-board, the ends of which rest 
upon the rear ends of the side bars A, and have 
keepers Cattached to them, which pass around 
the said side bars A. 
- 
 
Two keepers, C, may be attached to each end 
of the seat board B, as shown at the left-hand 
end of said seat-board, or only one, as shown 
at the right-hand end of said seat-board. In 
the latter case the keeper C should cross the 
side bars A diagonally. 
The seat-board B is kept in place upon the 
side bars A by pins D', passing through the 
said board and side bars, as shown in Fig. 4. 
Several holes are formed in the side bars 
A to receive the pins D, so that the seat 
board B may be adjusted as required, to en 
able the driver to balance the machine with 
his weight, whether he be heavy or light. 
- 
With this construction, the seat-board B' 
may be placed upon or hung below the side 
bars A, as the size of the driver may require. . 
To the plow-beams N, in front of the seat. 
board B, are attached rests E, to receive the 
driver's feet, and enable him to guide the 
plows with his feet. 
A number of holes are formed in the plow 
beams N to receive the feet-rests E, so that 
they may be adjusted to correspond with the 
seat-boardB'. The plow-beams N are provided 
with handles F, to adapt the machine to be 
used as a walking-cultivator. The handles 
F are bolted to the side of the rear part of 
the plow-beams N, and are supported at the 
proper height by the braces G', the upper ends 
of which are bolted to the said handles, and 
their lower ends are slotted to receive the bolts 
by which they are secured to the rear end of 
the plow-beams N, so that the handles F can 
be readily adjusted according to the height 
of the plowman. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
The combination, with cross-bar B, of a 
plow-beam, N, connected therewith by the U 
bar K, lug-pivot Li, and offsetted bar M, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
LOUIS ANTHOINE. 
. 
- 
Witnesses: 
JOHN ANTHOINE, 
ROBERT HAENNIG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199780.txt	C. L. BRADLEY. 
Underwear, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 199,780. 
Patented Jan. 29, 1878. 
 
N, PETERs, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, C.C. 
C. L. BR, ADLEY. 
Under Wear. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 199,780. 
Patented jan. 29, 1878. 
 
7zzasss 
 
 
N N 
22. 1724, 
 
N.'PETERs, Photo-LifHoaRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D.C. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
C. L. BR, ADLEY. 
Underwear. 
No. 199,78 O. 
Patented Jan. 29, 1878. 
 
Afzzzzesses 
 
NPETERs, photo-LithogRAPHER, wiASHINGron, D. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLARA. L. BRADLEY, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN UNDERWEAR. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 199, so, dated January 29, 1878; application filed 
January 21, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: , 
Be it known that I, CLARALYNDE BRAD 
LEY, of the city and county of San Francisco 
and State of California, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Underwear, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to a skirt, preferably to 
be worn and combined with the under-suit 
for which Letters Patent of the United States 
No. 198,505 were granted to me under date of 
December 25, 1877. 
The object of the invention is to lessen th 
amount of clothing now worn, as by this im 
provement only one skirt is necessary, and 
this one possesses all the advantages of the 
several skirts now generally worn, and also to 
furnish a skirt which is peculiarly adapted to 
the present style of close-fitting garments. 
The invention consists, first, in the construc 
tion of a skirt adapted to be attached mainly 
below the waist-line; secondly, in said skirt 
being so constructed as to fit the form without 
fullness; thirdly, in the combination of this im 
proved skirt with detachable founces; fourth 
ly, in the construction of said flounces; fifthly, 
in the combination of this improved skirt with 
the under-suit hereinafter referred to. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the skirt. Fig. 2 
is a pattern of one-half of the front breadth of 
the skirt. Fig. 3 is a pattern of one-half of 
the back breadth of the skirt. Fig. 4 is a side 
view of the detachable flounce. Fig. 5 is a pat 
tern of one-half of the front breadth of the 
founce. Fig. 6 is a pattern of one-half of the 
back breadth of the flounce. Fig. 7 is a pat 
tern of one-half of the yoked band for said 
flounce. Fig. 8 is a side view of a skirt, show 
ing a modification of Fig. 1. Figs. 9 and 10 
are patterns of the front and back breadths 
thereof. Figs. 11 and 12 are patterns for the 
construction of the under-suit before referred 
to. Fig. 13 represents the suit and skirt com 
bined and arranged for Wear. 
My improved under-suit, as shown in the 
drawings, consists of two or more pieces, cut 
and adapted to fit the form substantially in the 
mannershown in Fig. 13, and more particu 
larly described in my patent before referred to. 
As an improvement upon said patent, the 
garment may be provided with a stay, m, if 
preferred, stitched crosswise of the garment a 
suitable distance below the waist-line, forming 
additional support for fastening devices. 
To make the skirt, the breadths are cut in 
any suitable number, according to the width 
required, of a gored or tapering form-that is, 
Wider at the bottom than at the top-substan 
tially as shown in Figs. I and 2. The skirt 
may be of any desired length, extending, when 
attached to the under-suit, from about six 
inches or other suitable point below the Waist 
line to a point at or below the knee, forming 
the short skirt, as shown in Fig. 1, or the full 
skirt shown in Fig. 8. 
The upper portion of the back breadth is 
provided with an extension, e, Figs. 1 and 3, 
to be attached to the Waist-line of the under 
suit, as shown in the dottedlines at E, Fig.13. 
The breadths are united in the usual manner, 
the skirt being made to closely fit the form by 
means of darts or gores ab, Figs. 1, 2, taken 
from the top of the breadth, or midway of the 
width, or at any other suitable place. The 
upper edge of the skirt may be finished with 
a hem, though a facing may be used to add 
strength. Said edge is provided with means 
of attachment by which it is united with the 
under-suit, as shown at d, Fig. 13, by the dot 
ted lines, about six inches or other suitable 
distance below the Waist. 
The back extension is secured at the Waist 
linee, Fig. 13, as shown in the dotted lines. 
The darts do away with the usual fullness 
caused by gathering or plaiting into a band 
Or yoke. 
The most essential advantages gained by 
the attachment of the skirt to the under-suit 
below the Waist-line in manner described and 
shown are, that the additional thickness of 
material over the upper part of the hips is 
dispensed with, which is in itself of great im 
portance, and that it permits a perfect fit of 
the close-fitting princess dress so much worn 
at present. The extension of the back breadth 
to the Waist-line furnishes a support for the 
bottom fullness of the skirt and dress. 
It may be here stated that wires or other 
stiffening devices may be inserted through 
pockets formed in the upper portion of the 
back breadth, thus forming a bustle thereon. 
It is further designed to make the short 
 
2 
199,2S0 
skirt extensible, and to furnish additional 
length to any desired extent, thereby doing 
away with the usual outside walking and 
trained skirts, which is accomplished by means 
of a flounce, detachably secured to the bottom 
of the skirt by fastening devices on the top 
and bottom of the skirt and flounce, respect 
ively, as shown, Figs. 1 and 4, the attachment 
being concealed, if desired, by an ornamental 
tuck or ruffle arranged to fall. On the same. 
To make the flounce, the breadths are cut 
of the desired depth, and three or more in 
number, one front and two back, as shown by 
patterns 5 and 6, and in width about twice 
that of the skirt to which it is to be attached. 
A yoked band is then cut in the shape shown 
in Fig. 7, consisting of the plain portion f and 
the yoked portion g, and of a width corre 
sponding to that of the bottom of the skirt. 
The breadths of the flounce, after being united, 
are attached to the yoked band, the front 
breadth fitting into the plain portion, and the 
back breadths being fulled or gathered into 
the yoke portion, the yoked fullness forming 
a fan-shaped train. 
The employment of these founces adapts the 
skirt to different purposes-as, forinstance, the 
change of the depth suitable for Walking to a 
full-train, water-proof, or felt flounce, the 
flounce being so readily adjusted that the style 
of the skirt may be changed with compara 
tively little trouble, and without the neces 
sity of removing the dress. 
The modification shown in Fig. 8 is cut as 
in the former case, and of any desired length. 
The lower portion of the back breadths are ex 
tended outward, as shown ath, Fig. 10, which 
extension provides for the requisite fullness 
in that portion of the skirt, The upper por. 
tion of the skirt is made to closely fit the form, 
and the extension is fulled into the body or 
lower part of the breadth, as shown at g, Fig. 
8. To admit of this being done, a cut is made 
 
part Way across the breadth, as shown ati, 
Fig. 10. 
The skirts and flounces may be made of any 
desired material, as taste may dictate-for in 
stance, cotton, silk, velvet, cloths, paper, &c. 
Having described myinvention, what Iclaim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A skirt adapted in its construction to be 
attached to an under-garment mainly below 
the waist-line, and provided with the exten 
Sion c, substantially as described and shown, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A skirt constructed substantially as above 
described, and provided with darts upon its 
upper edge, whereby it is adapted to fit the 
form without fullness, as set forth. 
3. Askirt constructed substantially as above 
described, in combination with a detachable 
flounce, as set forth. 
4. A detachable flounce consisting of the 
front and back breadths and the yoked band, 
the back breadths being gathered into the 
yoked portion of the band, substantially as 
described and shown. 
5. The combination of a skirt adapted to be 
attached below the waist-line with an under 
suit constructed substantially as described. 
6. The combination of a skirt adapted to be 
attached mainly below the waist-line with an 
under-suit, substantially as described. 
7. Askirt provided with a detachable flounce, 
in combination with an under-suit, substan 
tially as described. 
8. An under-suit constructed to fit the form 
closely above and loosely below the waist-line, 
substantially as des?cribed, incombination with 
a skirt having a detachable flounce, substan 
tially as specified. 
CIARA LYNDE BRADLEY. 
- 
- 
Witnesses: 
H. C. BRADLEY, 
A. R. G. NICHOLs 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199880.txt	F. C. WALKER 
Carpet-Cleaner. 
No. 199,88O. 
Patented Jan. 29, 1878. 
WITNESSES 
22% 
C2 - 426 as 
2e2ss--> 
INVENTOR 
cases------ e. a12 e-eee 
ATTORNEYs. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREEMAN C. WALKER, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CARPE.T. CLEANERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 199, SS0, dated January 29, 1878; application filed 
April 14, 1877. 
A 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, FREEMAN C. WALKER, 
of Indianapolis, in the county of Marion and 
State of Indiana, have invented a new and valu 
able Improvement in Machines for Cleaning 
Carpets; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the construction and operation of the same, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to 
the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of my machine for cleaning carpets, shown in 
perspective. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
construction and arrangement of a machine 
for cleaning carpets, as will be hereinafter 
more fully set forth. 
In the annexed drawing, which fully illus 
trates my invention, A represents the frame 
of my machine, constructed in any suitable 
manner to receive the working parts of thema 
chine. At one end of the frame A, and trans 
versely across the same, is mounted a roller, B, 
upon which the carpet to be cleaned is rolled. 
From this roller the carpet is passed over a 
platform, C, consisting of a series of elastic 
bands, C'C', attached to two horizontal cross 
bars, D D, in the frame, as shown. This plat. 
form is made inclined, so that the carpet will 
pass downward and forward as it is fed by the 
combined beating and feeding mechanism 
hereinafter described. Above the lowerfront 
part of the elastic or flexible platform is 
mounted a roller, composed of four radial 
wings, G, connected at their ends by disks G'. 
To this roller the power is to be applied by 
means of a belt connecting the power with a 
pulley on the projecting journal of the roller, 
or in any other suitable manner. 
at a represent strong, stout cords, which are 
attached at the ends of the wings of the roller 
G G', and are further connected to said wings 
by intermediate flexible straps b b of siutable 
length, as shown. 
When the roller G G is rotated, the straps 
b and cords a are thrown outward by centrif. 
ugal force, and come down upon and beat the 
carpet as it passes over the flexible platform. 
The cords, also, by the rapid revolution of the 
roller, feed the carpet forward at proper speed, 
which is regulated by the speed of the roller. 
It will readily be seen that the beating-cords 
Operate upon all parts of the carpet, and, by 
the flexible platform supporting the carpet, it 
will give or yield sufficiently to prevent any 
injury to the carpet. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is- 
In a carpet-cleaner, the combination of the 
roll B on which the carpet to be cleaned is 
wound, the inclined flexible platform C, and 
a beating-roller provided with radial straps b, 
connected by longitudinal cords a, substan 
tially as shown and set forth, whereby the car 
pet is fed by means of the inclined platform 
and beater without the aid of auxiliary mech 
anism. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of three witnesses. 
FREEMAN C. WALKER. 
, 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE H. RYMAN, 
WILLIAM W. PRINDLE, 
CHARLES OTT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0137031-0200000/US199980.txt	W. H. KELLEY. 
Bottle-Stopper, 
No. 199,98O. 
 
Patented Feb. 5, 1878. 
Ziy. 3. 
f 
Wi/n esses. 
4. 
6 
-Yo - 2% 
(12 
ea 
2 (73 
77 / eae dor. 
% 
24 
2" 
N. PETERs, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, WASNGTON, C.C. 
-- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
1. 
A. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. KELLEY, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BOTTLESTOPPERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 199,9s0, dated February 5, 1878; application filed 
May 17, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. KELLEY, 
of Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Bottles, of which the follow 
ing is a description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, making a part of 
this specification, in which 
Figures 1 and 2 are transverse vertical sec 
tions of a bottle, showing different positions 
of the stopper therein. Fig. 3 is a top view 
of the bottle, showing a horizontal transverse 
section of the neck, and a view of the inside 
of the base of the neck and opening into the 
body of the bottle. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the views. 
The nature of this invention relates to a 
bottle, and the special object of which is to 
cork said bottle by means of a stopper per 
manently remaining in the neck thereof, and 
which, by the pressure of the aerated liquid 
wherewith the bottle is filled, is forced into 
the mouth of the same. The bottle is un 
corked by forcing the stopper back into the 
neck, and is prevented from getting into the 
mouth of the bottle while pouring out the 
liquor therefrom by an annular shoulder at 
the upper end of the neck, upon which the 
end of the stopper rests on pouring out the 
liquid, but which slips therefrom into the 
mouth of the bottle when turned directly up 
side down. 
A further and more full description of the 
invention is as follows: 
In the drawings, A represents the bottle, 
which may be of any holding capacity. B, 
the neck of the bottle at its junction with the 
body, is contracted from two opposite sides, as 
seen at C, Fig. 1, thereby narrowing up in one 
direction the opening or throat at the base of 
the neck, forming an oblong opening, as seen 
at D in Fig. 3. Thereby is formed on each 
side of the opening a shoulder, E, whereon 
the stopper rests when the bottle is in an up 
right position and empty, as shown in Fig. 2, 
the opening D being too narrow to allow the 
base of the stopper to pass into the body of 
the bottle, and the stopper too long to become 
inverted in the neck thereof. The stopper 
therefore remains in a partially upright posi 
tion in an empty bottle standing on its base. 
The stopper, when the bottle is inverted, will 
drop into the mouth thereof, as shown in Fig. 
1, and be therein maintained when the bottle 
is standing on its base by the pressure of the 
aerated liquor, or by the pressure of com 
pressed air that may have been forced into the 
bottle while being filled with unaerated or 
still liquor. The annular shoulder G will 
prevent the stopper from falling into the 
mouth of the bottle when the bottle is inclined 
in the act of pouring out its contents, and 
which will not slip from the shoulder until 
the bottle is in a vertical position, or nearly so; 
hence the stopper will offer no obstruction to 
the pouring out of the contents of the bottle, 
though it may be held in any position while 
so doing-that is to say, in any position sofar 
as respects the circumference of the bottle. 
Its vertical position, when bottom upward, 
Will permit the stopper to slip from the annu 
lar shoulder into the mouth of the bottle, as 
aforesaid, and the elastic packing H secures 
an air-tight fit therein. After the bottle is 
made the stopper is then placed in the neck, 
and then the packing, which may be removed 
for cleansing the bottle. 
The above-described bottle is such a one as 
is used in connection with a bottling-machine 
and for holding aerated liquids and still 
liquids, which are filled into the bottle under 
a pressure of air which is sufficiently strong 
to hold the stopper securely in the mouth of 
the bottle. 
I do not claim, separately considered, balls 
or tapering corks in connection with elastic 
packing to prevent percolation. When bottled 
or corked; but that which distinguishes my 
improvement from others is the arrangement 
of the several parts herein described, whereby 
I am enabled to prevent breaking of bottles, 
as is the case with a gravitating stopper with 
outextra thickness and weight of glass are elm 
ployed; and, further, I am enabled to open 
and close the bottle without any extra tools 
or instruments, as the stopper projects so far 
from the mouth as to be readily pushed back 
into the neck to permit the fluid to escape, 
and, as the stopper is confined in the neck 
only of the bottle, the fluid, in opening the 
bottle, is not materially disturbed or agitated 
- 
2 
199,980 
The elongated conical-shaped glass stopper 
F, in combination with the ring B and neck 
of the bottle A, contracted at its base at C, 
and having a shoulder, G, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
WILLIAM H. KELLEY. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. BURRIDGE, 
AARON HIGLEY. 
therein; also, with my improvement, no pro 
jections in the neck are required, which ad 
mits of the bottle being readily cleaned out, 
and there is no necessity of holding the bottle 
Or having the Stopper in any one certain place 
in filling and pouring out the liquor from the 
bottle. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to Secure by Letters Patent, is 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200080.txt	2 sheets-sheet 1. 
De Vice for Receiving and Delivering Coin and 
J. W. MEAKER 
Detecting Counterfeit Coin, 
No. 2 OO,O8 O. 
Patented Feb. 5, 1878. 
 
w 
N. Peters, PHOTo-LithographER, wASHINGTON, D.c. 
 
J. W. MEAKER, 
2 sheets-sheet 2. 
Device for Receiving and Delivering Coin and 
Detecting Counterfeit Coin, 
No. 20 O,O8O. 
Patentef Feb. 5, 1878. 
 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, 'washingtoN, p C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. MEAKER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF TWO THIRDS HIS 
RIGHT TO HARVEY B. MERRELL, OF MORRISTOWN, NEW JERSEY, AND 
THOMAS FERGUSON, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
." 
... 
. . 
. . 
IMPROVEMENT IN DEVICES FOR RECEIVING AND DELIVERING COIN AND DETECTING COUNTERFEIT CON, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 200,0so, dated February 5, 1878; application filed 
December 24, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN W. MEAKER, of 
the city of Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new and 
usefullmprovements in Apparatus for Receiv 
ing and Delivering Coin and Detecting Coun 
terfeit; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification, in which 
Figure 1, Sheet 1, is a front view; Fig. 2, 
Sheet1, an end view; Fig. 3, Sheet 2, a vertical 
Section on the line at a of Fig. 1; and Fig. 4, 
Sheet 2, a vertical section, on the line aca, of a 
portion of Fig. 1, with the position of the de 
tecter changed. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
coin-counterfeit-detecting device, and to com 
bine it with a novel device for receiving 
and delivering coin in such a manner that gen 
uine coin only may be received and paid out, 
the whole being useful to all persons receiving 
and paying out coin, and especially when it is 
necessary to make change rapidly. 
In the drawings, A represents alongitudinal 
semicircular section of a tube, forming a trough, 
made of any suitable material, and having a 
diameter of the size requisite for the size or 
denomination of coin, L, placed therein. These 
troughs or coin-receptacles are mounted upon 
any suitable frame, B, and arranged so as to 
stand at an angle of about forty-five degrees 
with a horizontal line, as clearly shown in Fig. 
3. Their edges are marked into spaces equal 
to the thickness of the coin, L, placed in them. 
These spaces may be divided into groups, 
numbered by figures, arranged decimally or 
otherwise, so that the quantity of coin in the 
receptacle may be seen at a glance. The lower 
end of each troughis provided with a stationary 
frame, D, in which a gate, E, having a circular 
opening, F, of the same size with that of the 
coin, is arranged to slide vertically, as shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. The gate E is held up by 
a spring, G, so that the opening therein may 
be on a line with the circular edge of the 
trough, so as to permit the bottom or lower 
end coin to pass into the opening, where it is 
prevented from falling through by the cross 
piece of the frame at a, opposite the open 
ing in the gate on the upper side, and by a 
lip, b, or cross-piece c, attached to the lower 
side of the gate, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
In the rear side of the frameD, and directly 
under the lower end of the trough, an opening, 
d, is provided, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, for 
a purposehereinaftermentioned. To the upper 
side of the gate is attached a thumb-piece, H, 
for pressing down the same, as shown in Figs. 
1, 2, and 3. 
A piece of sheet metal, I, with its side edges 
turned up so as to form flanges on the same, 
leaving a space between them equal in width 
to the diameter of the trough or the coin there 
in, and having the flanges at one end turned 
over to form gage-lips f, and having a stop, g, 
projecting upward midway between the flanges, 
is hung between arms K, as shown in Figs. 1, 
3, and 4 and is so balanced as to operate as 
hereinafter described. 
The operation of this entire apparatus is as 
follows: The troughs or semicircular cylinders 
A are filled with genuine coin. Their genu 
ineness, in case of doubt, is tested by means of 
the detecter. When, in the process offilling the 
semicircular cylinders, a piece is suspected of 
being counterfeit or light Weight, the detecter 
is placed in a horizontal position, as shown 
by the dotted lines in Fig. 3; then the sus 
pected piece is entered between the lips f, and 
if of the thickness and diameter of a genuine 
coin, it will just fill the space between the lips, 
pass through, and rest against the stop g. If 
not of the proper thickness and diameter, it 
will not fit the space, and is rejected. Should it 
pass this test as to thickness and diameter, and 
rest against the stop g, the detecter still being 
held suspended in ahorizontal position, the coin 
will, if of the proper weight, be delivered au 
tomatically forward into the receiving-trough 
in front, as shown in Fig. 3, but if too light will 
be automatically thrown backward and re 
jected, as shown in Fig. 4. When the trough 
is thus provided with genuine coin, the num 
 
2 
200,0s0 
ber in it at anytime will be shown by the fig 
ures on the sides, and when one or more pieces 
are wanted to be delivered, it is only necessary 
to press down upon the thumb-piece, which 
forces down the gate, carrying with it a single 
coin, which, as soon as its upper end passes 
below the upper supporting cross-piece a, falls 
forward and outward into the hand of the op 
erator. The release of the coin is rendered 
absolutely certain by the opening d, (shown in 
Fig. 2,) which allows the lower end of the coin 
to tilt back as the upper end falls forward. As 
soon as one is delivered, by releasing the gate 
from pressure, it is forced back by the spring 
to its original position, and is ready to deliver 
another, and so on. 
By having a number of receptacles or troughs 
corresponding with the size of the different 
kinds of coin--as dollars, half-dollars, quar 
ter-dollars, ten, five, three, two, and one cent 
pieces-arranged side by side, and provided 
with these devices, they may be easily filled two witnesses. 
with genuine coin, and any fractional part of 
a dollar desired in making change may be 
quickly, readily, and conveniently counted 
and delivered, thus providing a device of great 
utility for all parties having constantly to make 
change. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A coin receiving and delivering appa 
ratus, consisting of a semicircular receptacle, A, 
gate E, frame D, and spring G, constructed as 
described, and arranged to operate as set forth. 
2. In combination with a coin receiving and 
delivering device, as herein described, the sus 
pended metallic plate I, having lips.fthereon, 
forming a gage to test the thickness, and diam 
eter of coin, with stop g, for holding the same in 
such position that if of the properweightit will 
be delivered automatically to thereceiver, but if 
not, then be automatically rejected, as herein 
shown and set forth. 
3. In combination with the semicircular re 
ceptacle A, the gate E and frame D, provided 
with the opening d, for securing the certain de 
livery of the coin, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own affix my signature in presence of 
JOHN W. MEAKER, 
W 
Witnesses : 
HENRY B. MUNN, 
CHAS. H. FERG-USON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200180.txt	D. S. DARLING. 
Horseshoe, 
No. 200,180. 
Patented Feb. 12, 1878. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL S. DARLING, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
MPROVEMENT IN HORSE SHOES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 200, S0, dated February 12, 1878; application filed 
February 1, 1876. 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DANIEL S. DARLING, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Horseshoes, of which the 
following is a specification: . 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in detachable horseshoes, its object be 
ing to produce a shoe which may be readily 
applied to a horse's hoof and securely fastened 
thereon, and which can be removed at pleas 
ture to relieve the foot, and to allow the hoof 
to grow and expand naturally when the horse 
is idle, for the purpose of preventing the dis 
eases and deformities of the hoof and foot con 
sequent upon the use of the ordinary perma 
nently-secured shoe. 
The invention consists of a shoe conforming, 
as usual, with the sole of the horse's hoof, and 
provided in front with a toe-clip projecting up 
ward, to which is secured a flexible flat fore 
strap, the upper end of which is looped and 
Secured around a clamp embracing the upper 
part of the hoof, the rear ends of which pass 
through heel-plates projecting obliquely up 
ward at the ends of the shoe, and secured 
thereto by means of screw-nuts, the shoe being 
provided with two upwardly-projecting abut 
ments or hoof-stops, which sit in recesses 
formed in the wall of the hoof, and prevent the 
shoe from being forced forward, or the heel of 
the hoof from being improperly bound in con 
tact with the heel-plates, as more fully herein 
after set forth and described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a side 
elevation of a horse's hoof and foot with my 
improved shoe attached thereto. Fig. 2 rep 
resents a view, looking down upon the hoof 
and foot, showing my improved shoe attached 
thereto. Fig. 3 represents a bottom view of 
the shoe; and Fig. 4, a detached view of the 
shoe, showing a modification of the method of 
attaching the fore strap to the upwardly-pro 
jecting abutment or toe-clip of the shoe. 
The letter A represents the horseshoe, con 
structed of iron or steel, of any desired width 
or thickness, and of proper shape to conform 
to the configuration of the sole of the hoof, 
The lower surface of the shoe is preferably 
formed with grooves or recesses at, and of any 
desired number and of convenient depth, ex 
tending transversely across the same at suita 
ble intervals apart. The two spaces at the 
toe of the shoe are generally made about three 
inches apart, measuring around the front of the 
shoe, and those behind are generally arranged 
at equal distances apart, and are triangularly 
shaped, extending into the shoe for about half 
the thickness of the same. Said spaces gen 
erally vary in number from eight to twelve, 
according to the size of the shoe. The inner 
and outer edges of the shoe are beveled to the 
extent of about the eighth of an inch, except 
at a point at or about the center or front of 
the shoe, where the edges are left nearly or 
quite straight, which form enables the shoe to 
securely gripe the roadway. Upon the front 
of the shoe is formed an upwardly-projecting 
abutment, B, and on each end, at the rear or 
heel, a projection, C, extending upward ob 
liquely at an angle corresponding, or nearly 
corresponding, to the angle formed naturally 
by the rear of the hoof and foot of the horse. 
To the abutment B, at the front of the hoof, is 
securely attached a flexible flat fore-strap, E, 
formed of sheet metal, preferably of steel, and 
provided with a loop, e, atits upper end, which 
sits over the clamp F, embracing the upper 
part of the hoof or foot. Said fore-strap is se 
cured to the abutment in any convenient man 
ner, either by forging or Welding it to the 
same, by means of rivets, or by passing it 
through a horizontal slot in the same, as shown 
in Fig. 4, forming a hinged joint, as may be 
desired. The obliquely-projecting ends of the 
shoe, at the rear or heel of the same, are pro 
vided with suitable apertures G, through which 
the ends of the clamp F project, and to which 
they are secured by the screw-nuts H, sitting 
over the said ends, which are suitably threaded 
for the purpose. 
The letters II represent triangular abut 
ments or projections, extending upward from 
the upper face of the shoe, which are adapted 
to fit into similarly-shaped recesses in the lower 
edge of the hoof, formed for the purpose, and 
prevent the hoof and foot from being drawn 
backward by the action of the clamp and screw 
nuts thereon, and injuring the rear or heel of 
the foot by the binding of the projecting heel 
plates against the Saline. 
The clamp or clevy Fis formed with a semi 
2009, SO 
oval section, of ironor steel, of sufficient thick 
ness to give it suitable strength, and at the 
same time allow of sufficient flexibility to ena 
ble it to properly embrace the hoof, and to 
provide against any abrasion of the hoof. Said 
clamp may be kept out of direct contact with 
the same by means of an interposed strip or 
band of rubber or other elastic or yielding 
packing. 
The apertures in the oblique heel-plates 
should be sufficiently large to afford easy play 
for the ingress and egress of the ends of the 
clamp or clevy, in order that the screw-threads 
on the same will not be bruised or injured by 
use; and suitable rubber or other elastic wash 
ers are interposed between the nuts and the 
heel-plates, to relieve the clevy or clamp from 
any undue strain and prevent injury to the 
The shoe-plate which forms the base, incom. 
bination with the fore-strapprojecting upward 
therefrom at an angle to the same, and con 
forming to the front plane of the hoof, with the 
front sides of the angular abutments or hoof. 
stops on the upper face of the shoe, are all ar. 
ranged at such relative angles to each other as 
to forman efficient bearing for that part of the 
hoof, and secure the front portion of the shoe 
securely thereto, while the upwardly-project 
ing oblique heel-plates, in combination with 
hoof. 
- 
- 
the clamp or clevy attached thereto by means 
of the screw-nuts, securely fasten the shoe to 
the rear portion of the hoof, the angular abut 
ments or hoof-stops on the shoe effectually pre 
Venting any injurious strain upon the heel of 
the foot and rear portions of the hoof. 
Strips of felt or other yielding packing may 
be interposed between the shoe and hoof, to 
prevent friction on the surfaces and relieve 
Concussions. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
is 
The horseshoe A, formed with the central 
triangular projections II, the vertical toe-pro 
jection B, and oblique heel-projections CC, in 
combination with the clamp F, having screw 
threaded ends passing through the heel-pro 
jections, and held by nuts H, and the flexible 
fiat strap E, attached to the toe-projection at 
one end and looped around the clamp E at its 
other end, as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand in the presence 
of the subscribing witnesses. 
DANIE. S. DARLING, 
Witnesses: 
W. A. MATHIS, 
CHA.S.TINNEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200280.txt	J. H. G.ORDON, 
Harness. Saddle-Tree. 
No. 2 OO,28O. 
Patented Feb. 12, 1878. 
 
WITNESSES 22 2,222. 
2-F= 4-4- w 
NVENTOR 
ATTORNEYS. 
N.PETERs, photo-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. GORDON, OF KEOTA, IOWA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF HIS RIGHT 
TO NORMAN I. PETERS, OF SAME PLACE: 
MPROVEMENT IN HARNESS-SADDLE TREES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 200,2so, dated February 12, 1878; application filed 
December 29, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMEs H. G.ORDON, of 
Keota, in the county of Keokuk and State of 
Iowa, have invented a new and valuable Im 
provement in Harness-Trees; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the construction and op 
eration of the same, reference being had to the 
annexed drawings, making a part of this speci 
fication, and to the letters and figures of ref. 
erence marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
view of my harness-tree, and Fig. 2 is a per 
spective detail thereof. 
Myinvention relates to harness-saddle trees; 
and it consists in the combination of parts, as 
will be hereinafter more fully set forth, and 
pointed out in the claim. 
The annexed drawings, to which reference 
is made, fully illustrate my invention. 
The harness-tree consists of three pieces, 
viz., a center piece, A, and two side pieces, B 
B, united to the center piece by joints at a. a. 
The centerpiece A has the loop C attache 
to it, and is very short, as shown. 
The check-hook D is fastened to this piece 
by bolt and nut, or other suitable means. At 
each side of the center piece A is a projecting 
tongue, a, which fits in a corresponding slot 
made in the upper end of the side piece B, and 
a pin or rivet, b, projecting from each side of 
the tongue, and passing through the flanges 
of the part B, forms the joint, 
The tree is made in any ordinary form, with 
side flanges, so as to form a groove for the 
skirt. 
E is the pad, in which are embedded suit 
able nuts for an ordinary stove-bolt, d, pass 
ing through the upper end of each side piece 
B; also for the terrets G. G. and bolts H. H. 
By thus constructing the saddle-tree with a 
joint on each side of the center, it is rendered 
self-adjusting, so as to fit the back of any 
horse. 
I am aware that it is not new to make a 
saddle-tree of three parts hinged together, 
and such I do not claim, broadly; but 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is- 
The improved harness-saddle tree consist 
ing of the centerpiece A, having loop C, pro 
jecting tongues a, and projecting rivets b, and 
the grooved or slotted end pieces B B, as 
shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
w 
JAMES HARVEY GORDON. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs H. MILLHOUSE, 
L. A. NORTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200380.txt	Stem-Winding and Setting Device for Watches, 
O, DOMON 
No. 2 OO,38O. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1878. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OVIDE DOMON, OF BIENNE, SWITZERLAND. 
IMPROVEMENT N STEM WINDING AND SETTING DEVICES FORWATCHES, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 200,3S0, dated February 19, 1878; application filed 
December 13, 1876. 
- 
a 
To all chon it may concern: 
can be finished entirely without a case and 
Be it known that I, OVIDE DOMON, of Bi- without a rim, and therefore can be produced 
enne, in the Republic of Switzerland, have in- at a greatly-reduced cost, inasmuch as this 
vented certain new and useful Improvements most difficult and tedious operation is entirely 
in Watches, of which the following is a specifi. dispensed with; and also obviates the neces 
cation: 
sity of using any extraneous or projecting 
The invention subject-matter of this patent pieces, such as slides, knobs, &c., which are 
relates particularly to the watch-Winding and generally used in connection with stem-wind 
hand-setting mechanism, and has for its ob-, ers, in order to shift connection of the stem 
ject the performance of these operations- gear from the winding to the hand-setting 
namely, the Winding and hand-setting-by mechanism, and vice versa. 
means of the crown-piece in the pendant or 
In the Watch shown in the drawings the 
stem of the Watch, and without the use of any stem is shown directly attached to the watch 
auxiliary or accessory devices, by which the plate by means of a suitable metal strap, by 
gear of the minute-hand and the gear of the screws; but the stem may be otherwise se 
winding mechanism are engaged with and dis- cured, according to the judgment of the man 
engaged from the gear directly operated by ufacturer. 
the crown-piece. 
In the accompanying drawings I have shown 
My said invention consists in the combina- a Watch constructed in accordance with my 
tion, with a watch-plate and a stem or pend said invention, Figures 1 and 2 representing 
ant directly attached thereto, of a central exterior views of the watch face and side. 
and longitudinally-movable spindle rigidly Fig. 3 shows the same with the back plate re 
connected with the crown-piece, and provided moved. Fig. 4 is a transverse view of the 
with a Breguet click and suitable gear-wheel, same with a section of the stem. Fig. 5 rep 
arranged in relation to the Watch-Winding resents the Watch seen from the side of the 
gear and the hand-setting gear, substantially minute-Wheel, with a section of the stem, show 
as hereinafter described, and of a helical ling the Breguet click disengaged from the 
spring located in a chamber in the stem. Sur- hand-setting mechanism. 
rounding said spindle, and acting against the 
In said drawings, the plate is shown at A, 
bottom of said chamber and the under side of against or upon which is mounted the watch 
said crown-piece, as and for the purposes mechanism, which it is unnecessary here to 
hereinafter shown and described. 
particularly describe, except so far as to indi 
As before stated, the watch is provided cate by reference to the figures the gear-wheel 
with a Breguet click, and the winding of the and click. 
watch-movement and the setting of the hands 
In the head of the plate, by means of 
are each affected independently of the other. screws, is secured the stem B, through the 
The engaging and disengaging with the re-center of which passes the spindle t, which 
spective gears are effected by means of the is connected at its upper end with the crown 
crown-piece, which, being rigidly connected piece C, and its lower end laterally fits in a 
with a spindle carrying a Breguet click, is, in journal-bearing, yet so as to admit of a longi 
its normal condition, engaged or connected tudinal movement therein. 
with the winding mechanism, while, when de- 
The stem B is provided with a chamber, 
pressed, it is disengaged from the winding Within which a helical wire spring, a, sur. 
mechanism to engage with the hand-setting rounding the spindle, is located. This spring 
mechanism. A helical wire spring located in bears on the One end against the bottom of the 
the chamber of the stem throws the crown- chamber in the stem, and on the other end 
piece, when released from pressure, together against the lower side of the crown-piece. 
with its spindle, out of gear with the hand- The latter is provided on its under side with 
setting mechanism, to engage it again auto- an annular recess, which allows of its being 
matically with the winding mechanism. By depressed to slide a given distance upon the 
this arrangement it will be seen that the Watch stem. 
2 
200,3S0 
The spindlet of the crown-piece passes, at 
its lower end, through the center of the heli 
coidal wheel d, which is loose upon its axis, 
and is arranged to engage with the spring 
barrel. This wheel is rigid with the toothed 
circle of the Breguet click, whose second part 
e is fast upon the spindle at its lower extrem 
ity. 
The lower portion of the Breguet click is 
indented to gear with the minute-handwheels. 
The tendency of the spring a is to throw up 
the spindle, and with it the Breguet click, the 
upper part of which engages with the corre 
Sponding portion projecting from and making 
body with the helicoidal wheel, and in that posi 
tion it is always ready to act upon the barrel 
gear for the purpose of winding the Watch. 
On pressing upon the crown-piece the Bre 
guet click engages with the minute-hand gear. 
Having thus described my invention, and 
the manner in which the same is or may be 
carried into effect, what I claim, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with a watch-plate and a 
stem or pendant directly attached thereto, of 
a central and longitudinally-movable spindle 
rigidly connected with the crown-piece, and 
provided with a Breguet click and suitable 
gear-wheel, arranged in relation to the Watch 
winding gear and the hand-setting gear, sub 
stantially as herein described, and of a heli 
cal spring located in a chamber in the stem 
surrounding said spindle, and acting against 
the bottom of said chamber and the under side 
of said crown-piece, as and for the purposes 
herein shown and described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 8th day November, 1876. DOMON. 
Witnesses: 
RUDOLF AscHMANN, 
O. B. DUNCHERT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200480.txt	G. RIVER A. 
Toilet-Cabinet, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 2 OO,48O. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1878. 
 
Willnesses: 
2.2 
havendor: 
-84. 
N. PETERS, PHoro-HogRAPHER, wasteroN. c. 
ha 
G. RIVER A. 
Toilet-Cabinet, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 200,480. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1878. 
  
 
 
 
W % 
WXLZW7%. rt 
  
 
 
2 
 
 
 
N 7 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
0 2 o NS 
 
ass rts A. 
Witnesses: 
27 2. 
} 
Avedo 
% 
%c/av 
N. PEERs, Photo-IrHogRAPHER, washNdToN, o c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GERONIMO RIVERA, OF BRIDGETOWN, ISLAND OF BARBADOES, 
WEST INDIES. 
IMPROVEMENT IN TO LET CABINETS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 200,4S0, dated February 19, 1878; application filed 
August 9, 1877. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GERONIMO RIVERA, of 
Bridgetown, in the Island of Barbadoes, West 
Indies, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Toilet-Cabinets; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Myinvention relates to improvements in toi 
let-cabinets, and is constructed to contain the 
following elements, viz: Closets on the top, 
containing shelves for toilet articles, &c. Be 
tWeen the said closets is located a tank con 
taining Water, which tank is provided, in its 
lower part, with a delivery pipe and faucet, 
by which the water can be drawn off at 
pleasure. Even with the lower part of the 
aforesaid closets and tank is a movable top, 
that can easily be removed, so as to get ac 
cess to the delivery-pipe from the tank afore 
said. In front of the tank is hinged an ad 
justable looking-glass, having backward-pro 
jecting guides, by which the said glass can 
be secured and inclined in any desired posi 
tion. At the ends of the cabinet are located 
sliding towel racks or bars, that are capable 
of being drawn out when required for use, 
and pushed in when not wanted for use. Be 
low the movable top is located in bearings a 
sliding Writing desk or table, that can be 
drawn out to be used for Writing purposes or 
as a Work-table. Below the writing-deskis ar 
ranged a sliding wash-stand, containing wash 
bowl, soap-dishes, &c., which wash-stand, when 
drawnout, is made torest upon the upper edges 
of the doors of the lower part of the cabinet, 
These doors cover a receptacle containing 
towel or paper drawers, as well as a sliding 
chamber-stool, having hinged cover and legs 
or Supports. The chamber-stool contains a 
removable chamber-bowl. The doors of the 
lower part of the cabinet serve as guides and 
stops for the sliding chamber-stool, and also 
as arms or supporting side pieces for the 
latter. Below the aforesaid doors, in the lower 
part of the cabinet, is arranged a sliding shirt 
or slipper drawer. A pipe having a stop 
valve descends from the wash-bowl, by which 
the watercan easily be emptied from the Wash 
bowl into the stool-bowl beneath, the latter 
being for this purpose drawn out, so that the 
discharge-pipe from the Wash-bowl comes di. 
rectly over the bowl in the chamber-stool. 
A flexible pipe can easily be attached to 
the delivery-pipe of the water-tank in the up 
per part of the cabinet when required for use 
as a fountain-syringe. 
The whole forms a very compact and use 
ful piece of furniture, combining in itself a 
toilet-cabinet adapted to a variety of novel 
- . 
and useful purposes. 
On the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a perspective view of my inven 
tion, and Fig. 2 represents a central longi 
tudinal section of the same. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts wher 
ever they occur on the different parts of the 
drawings. 
a, a represent the closets on the top of the 
cabinet, provided with shelves and doors, as 
shown. Between the said closets is located 
the water-tank b, provided with the outlet 
pipe 0 and faucet d, as shown, e represents 
the adjustable looking-glass, hinged at eat 
the top, and provided with wings or guides 
ff, by which it may be inclined in any de 
sirable position as may be required. g. rep 
resents the movable top, that can easily be 
removed from the cabinet, so as to get access 
to the pipe c in case the latter needs repair 
ing. h. h represent the sliding towel-racks, 
one on each side of the cabinet, or more, as 
may be desired. i represents the sliding Writ- . 
ing-desk, shown in dotted lines in Fig.2 as 
being drawn out ready for use. k represents 
the sliding wash-stand, provided with the Wash 
bowl t and outlet-pipe m, with its valve or 
stop in', as shown in Fig. 2. 
represents 
the sliding towel-drawers below the sliding 
Wash-stand k. O represents the sliding cham 
ber-chair, provided with the removable cham 
ber-bowl p and hinged cover q, as shown in 
Fig.2. represents the hinged legs or supports 
for the sliding chamber-chair 0. 8 represents 
the sliding shirt or slipper drawer in the lower 
part of the toilet-cabinet, as fully shown in 
2 
200,4s0 
Fig. 2. t t represent the hinged doors, which, 
when swung out, serve as a rest for the slid 
ing wash-stand, as well as arm-rests or side 
pieces for the chamber-stool. 
Having thus fully described the nature, con 
struction, and operation of my invention, I 
wish to secure by Letters Patent, and claim 
The herein-described improved toilet-cabi 
net, consisting of the closets a a, Water-tank 
b, pipec, faucet d, adjustable looking-glasse, 
movable top g, sliding towel-racks h h, sliding 
Writing-deski, sliding wash-stand k, sliding 
towel-drawer n, sliding chamber-chair o, with 
its bowl p, coverg, andfolding supports r, and 
the sliding shirt or slipper drawers, as and 
for the purpose set forth and shown. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own invention I have affixed my signa 
ture in presence of two witnesses. 
GERONIMO RIVERA, 
Witnesses: 
ALBAN ANDREN, 
HENRY CHADBOURN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200580.txt	G. K. SMITH, 
Carriage-Spring, 
No. 200,58O. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1878. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE K. SMITH, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CARRIAGE-SPRINGs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 200,5so, dated February 19, 1878; application filed . 
September 8, 1877. 
springs S of the carriage may rest upon an 
Beit known that I, GEORGE K. SMITH, of india-rubber or other flexible pad,7,if thought 
best, by which means I relieve the occupant 
-of the vehicle, and the vehicle itself, from the 
serious results caused by riding over rough 
roads. . 
I disclaim the use of india-rubber between 
the lifts of springs of any kind. I also dis 
claim rigid levers hinged at the center of the 
body of the carriage, combined with adjust 
able rigid bars running transversely across 
the bottom of the body to support rubber or 
its equivalent pads. But the novelty of my 
invention consists in hanging the modern car 
riage-body now in common use upon double 
flexible bearings, consisting of spring-bars B 
and D, passing between two rubber pads, 
(shown at 1 1' and 2 2,) the same being se 
cured directly to the bottom of the body Aby 
means of bolts and straps XX, or their equiva 
lent, while the outer ends of the bars B and D 
are bolted to the ends of cross-bars (secured to 
the top of the elliptic springs SS) provided 
with pads 5 and 6. 
I claim as novel and useful, and wish to pro 
tect by Letters Patent of the United States 
The carriage-body A, provided with spring 
bars B and D, each bar being connected to 
the body by loops C, and arranged between 
two flexible pads, 11 and 22, secured to the 
bottom of the body by straps XX, independ 
ently of each other, in combination with the 
cross-bar provided with flexible pads 55 and 
Springs S', the several parts being arranged 
and combined, in relation to each other, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
Imy own invention I affix my signature hereto 
To all whom it may concern: 
Brooklyn city, in the county of Kings and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in the Construction 
of Carriages or Wagons; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of my invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of an ordinary carriage, hav 
ing the Wheels removed on the front side in 
order to more clearly show the improvement 
set forth and claimed hereinafter, which con 
sists in the manner of hanging the body A 
upon the flexible or rigid bars BD, each sup 
ported and held in position between two in 
dia-rubber pads, 1 1/2 2', at or near the cen 
ter thereof, while the outer ends of the springs 
or bars B D rest upon similar india-rubber 
pads 45, the same being secured to the cross 
bars supporting the carriage by bolts or other 
suitable means. The inner ends of the springs 
Band Dunder the bottom of the body Aare se 
cured to the same by means of a loop, c, orhinge 
e, which allows the front spring B to slightly 
yield to any longitudinal jar in conjunction 
with the pads 1, 2, 4, and 5, which counteracts 
the vertical concussion caused by the wheels 
while passing Over rough pavements or other 
undulations of the road-bed. 
Fig. 2 represents the back part of the run 
ning-gear of the carriage, showing the cross 
bar provided with flexible pads 55 at each 
end thereof, which support the back ends of in presence of two witnesses. 
the side springs D. 
The cross-bar rests upon the india-rubber 
or other flexible pad 6, both being secured to 
the spring S by means of loops O O, or by 
other suitable fastening. The front and back 
GEO. K. SMITH, 
Witnesses: 
JOHN RITCHIE MCLEAN, 
JAMES P. MCLEAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200680.txt	G, ALLAN & J. W. BROWN, 
Telegraph Relays, 
No. 200,680. 
 
Patented Feb. 26, 1878. 
.7%. 2 
N. Peters, PHOO-THCGRAPHR, WASH:NGTON, D. C. -- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE ALLAN AND JAMES W. BROWN, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
IMPROVEMENT IN TELEGRAPH-RELAYS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 200,650, dated February 26, 1878; application filed 
September 20, 1877. 
b is secured to such torsion-thread, so as to be 
maintained in a central position when not 
acted upon by the electro-magnets through 
which the line - currents pass. The jockey 
armatured works on, but is not secured to, the 
torsion-thread i, and is only caused to move 
by the friction between itself and the arma 
ture b, maintained and regulated by the spring 
and nut.f. 
Fig. 4 shows a method of applying the modi 
fication shown in Fig. 3 to a suspended coil. 
Here the main armature b is connected to the 
coilj by the thread k, and the said main arma 
ture is caused to move by the motion of the 
suspended coili, whether such coil is actuated 
by the line-current passing therethrough or 
around electro-magnets in any well-known 
ae. 
It will be obvious that compound armatures 
constructed in accordance With our inven 
tion-that is, having two parts free to move 
On the same center or axis-may be applied to 
a variety of instruments where armatures for 
-making and breaking circuit are employed. 
We claim 
A compound armature for electric-telegraph 
relays constructed in two parts, pivoted or 
working, and free to move separately on the 
same center or axis, Substantially as set forth. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGE ALLAN, civil 
engineer, and JAMES WALLACE BROWN, 
electrician, both of 18 Leadenhall street, in 
the city of London, England, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Electric 
Telegraph Relay-Armatures, which improve 
ment is fully, set forth in the following specifi 
cation, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
The object of this invention is to so con 
struct the armature of a relay that local cir 
cuit shall be made and broken upon a very 
slight rise and fall of potential in the actuat 
ing current. For this purpose we form the 
said armature in two parts, free to move sep 
arately on the same center or axis. One part 
is operated by electro-magnets or like ap 
pliances, around which the line-current or its 
equivalent passes, and the other part makes 
and breaks local circuit. We have found that 
When an armature is constructed in two parts, 
working from different centers, too great fric 
tion is opposed to the Working of such arma 
tures when actuated only by very small rises 
and falls of potential in the electric currents. 
Figures 1,2,3, and 4 illustrate three modifi 
cations of armature constructed under our in 
vention, having both of the movable portions 
of the armature Working separately on the 
same center or axis. 
Figs. 1 and 2: a, electro-magnets, through 
which the line-current passes; b, main arma 
ture actuated by the magnets pivoted at c, d, 
jockey-armature, also working on the pivot c : 
e, contact-stops; f, spring and nut for adjust 
ing the fiction between c and d. 
Fig. 3: Here a torsion-thread, i, is employed 
instead of the pivot c, and the main armature London. 
G. ALLAN. 
J. W. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
Clerk to Messrs. Ridgway Bros., Notaries, 28 
S. CRANSA, 
Royal Eachange, London. 
J. E. WRIGHT, 
Electrician, 17 and 18 Leadenhall street, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200780.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HUGH W. WALKER AND THOMAS L. PATTERSON, OF GREENOCK, scoTLAND. 
MPROVEMENT IN FLAVO RED SIRUPS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 200,7 so, dated February 26, 1878; application filed 
September 24, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
example, we may state that in making what 
Beit known that we, HUGH WILLIAM 
may be termed pine-apple sirup we mix 
WALKER and THOMAs LAW PATTERSON, both 
With every twenty-five cubic feet, equal to 
of Greenock, in the county of Renfrew, Scot 
about one ton of sirup, three and a half pounds 
land, have invented a new and useful Improve 
of the commercial oil known as essence of 
ment in Flavored Sirups, of which the follow 
pine-apple. Although, as hereinbefore stated, 
ing is a specification: 
the fruit-essence may be combined with the 
The object of our invention is to produce 
sirup at any stage of the treatment of the lat 
flavored sirups or preserves for domestic use 
ter, still we prefer to add it in the vacuum or 
from the residual saccharine juices of sugar 
concentrating pan shortly before the final con 
manufacture; and this object we attain in the 
centrationis completed. After the addition the 
manner which we will now proceed to de 
boiling is continued for a few minutes to ren 
scribe. 
der the mixture thoroughly homogeneous, and 
The residual saccharine juices of sugar 
the charge in the pan is then let go or dis 
manufacture have heretofore had but little if 
charged as usual. 
any market value. 
If the fruit-essence is combined with the 
By our invention these residual juices are 
sirup after the latter has left the pan it must 
utilized for making flavored sirups ready for 
be thoroughly incorporated with the sirup by 
domestic use. 
means of stirrers or agitators driven mechanic 
The saccharine juice is first treated by any 
ally or otherwise. 
of the Well-known processes for rendering the 
It should be understood that our flavored 
final product uncrystallizable. For this pur 
sirups are not like the thin mixtures used for 
pose the sirup may be treated with sulphuric 
flavoring aerated waters, and which are of a 
or other acid in the ordinary manner; but 
comparatively low specific gravity, and are 
this particular process does not form an essen 
made from and contain crystallizable sugar; 
tial part of the present application, as any of 
but our flavored sirups are of a specific grav 
the methods known to sugar-refiners may be 
ity of at least 1.420, and are to be used like 
employed for the purpose described. The 
ordinary treacle, fruit jams, or preserves for 
liquid is then neutralized and filtered, and, if 
table use and similar purposes. Notwith 
desired, it may be clarified by chemical agents. 
standing the high specific gravity of our fla 
The juice is next concentrated in the usual 
vered sirups they are not liable to crystallize, 
manner, and we then-prefer to finally clarify because they have been previously rendered 
it by the process for which we have already 
uncrystallizable, and do not therefore contain 
made application for Letters Patent. 
crystallizable Sugar. 
At any stage of the treatment of the sweet 
liquid or sirup, as described, we impart to it 
the desired flavor and aroma by combining 
with it the corresponding fruit-essence or es 
sential oil, either obtained from fruit or flowers 
or obtained artificially. Such artificial es 
sence may be any one of those known to chem 
ists as particular organic salts of alcohol 
radicals. 
The proportions of the flavoring essences to 
be used in different cases will depend on the 
strength or flavoring power of the essences 
employed, and on strength of flavor desired 
to be imparted to the sirups; but, by Way of 
We claim as our invention 
The within-described flavored sirups, con 
sisting of the residual juices of Sugar manu 
facture, rendered uncrystallizable and mixed 
with flavoring extracts, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
HUGE WM. WALKER. 
T. L. PATTERSON. 
a. 
Witnesses: 
t 
JoHN NOBLE, Clerk, 
JAMES ALEXANDER, Clerk. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200880.txt	W. STE WAR.T. 
Knob-Attachment. 
No. 2OO,880. 
Patented March 5, 1878. 
 
 
 
 
 
N. FFERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, LO Q 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM STE WART, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
IMPROVEMENT IN KNOB ATTACHMENTS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 200, SS0, dated March 5, 1878; application filed 
January 26 1878. 
To all chi??, it ??? ???cer?: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM STEWART, of 
Hartford, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements pertaining to a 
Knob-Latch, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, where 
Figure 1 shows a central sectional view of 
the shaft, rose, and adjacent parts. Fig. 2 is 
a detail view of the adjusting-sleeve. Fig. 3 
shows a top view, with a knob removed and 
the rose cut in cross-section. 
The object of the invention is the attainment 
of a ready and secure means for so adjusting 
the shaft of a knob-latch that it shall not have 
the endwise or up-and-down play now so 
COLOI), 
The letter a denotes a square or many-sided 
shaft of a knob-latch. b denotes a rose fast 
ened to a door, c. The letter d denotes a sleeve 
upon the shaft a provided at the inner end 
with a collar, d, fitting to the central depres 
sion lb of the rose. The shaft is threaded at 
the end, and there bears the nute, bearing 
against the end of the sleeve. 
The square-sided sleeve and the nut are 
both of a size, diametrically, and both fit into 
the tubular shaft f, which projects from the 
knobg. The sleeve has the mortised, thereby 
permitting the passage of the screw h, which 
runs from the tubular shaft finto the shaft a. 
The opposite end of the shaft may be fitted 
up as shown in the drawings, or of any other 
Common construction. 
Such opposite end of the shaft being prop 
erly held in place, it is evident that by means 
of the nute and the sleeved, intermediate be 
tween the nut and the rose or the door, the 
shaft can be regulated and adjusted at any 
time so as to have no end play. . 
If, as shown, the sleeve be furnished with 
the collard, fitting into the central depres 
sion b', such endwise adjustment of the parts 
also prevents up-and-down play of the shaft. 
I claim as my improvement 
In combination, the many-sided shafta, the 
sleeve d, fitting to said shaft, the nute, the 
knob g, provided with the tubular shaft?, 
fitting over the nut and sleeve, and the 
screw h. 
WILLIAM STEWAR.T. 
Witnesses: 
RoBT. F. GAYLoRD, 
WM. E. SIMONDS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US200980.txt	C. M. COULTER, 
Cutter-Head, 
No. 200,98O. 
Patented March 5, 1878. 
(i. 25 
 
 
 
; 
 
W, SRSS W. 
ZEWEW 
FEF= 
f 
Prom 
M 
 
area 
A. 
E 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
WITNESSES 
2-4eze 
INVENTOR 
644, 22.2, 
Y 
a 
ATTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
COLUMBUS M. COULTER, OF DAN VILLE, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
HIS RIGHT TO EZRA A. LEONARD, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN CUTTER HEADS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2009 S0, dated March 5, 
1878; application filed 
February 9, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CoLUMBUS M. COUL 
TER, of Danville, in the county of Vermillion 
and State of Illinois, have invented a new 
and valuable Improvement in Rotary Cutter 
Heads; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the construction and operation of the same, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to 
the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a side view of my invention, partly in sec 
tion. Fig. 2 is an end view thereof, also 
partly sectioned. Figs. 3 and 4 are side and 
end views of a modification of the cutter-head, 
and Fig. 5 is a detail view. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in cutter-heads for molding and other ma 
chines. 
The nature of the invention consists in the 
combination, with a bit-holder having opposite 
offsets and curvedbearing-surfaces, of a curved 
bit, having a dovetailed groove upon their un 
der sides, and the adjusting-bolts, having 
dovetailed heads adapted to enter the said 
grooves, as will be hereinafter more fully 
shown and described. 
In the annexed drawings, the letter A des 
ignates a metallic holder, having a central 
aperture, by means of which it is secured upon 
the mandrel. The hub of the holder is cylin 
drical, and has springing therefrom the offsets 
a, the curved perimeters of which are eccen 
tric to the cylindrical hub, The holder is of 
the general form of the letter S, and there is 
a space between its offsets and hub sufficiently 
large to receive the jaws of a Wrench. The 
outer curved surfaces of the hub and offsets 
are continuous, and upon each of the surfaces 
is a raised rib, b, through which, at about the 
middle of the length of the said offsets, a per 
foration is made to receive a bolt, c, having a 
dovetailed head, d. A nut, e, is applied upon 
the threaded end of these bolts in the space 
between the offsets and hub of the holder, as 
shown in Fig. 1. The bits B are sections of 
an annulus, and their inner concave edges 
conform strictly to the convexity of the curved 
surfaces of the holder. Their exterior faces 
are of various forms for cutting the various 
forms of moldings, as the cyma recta and re 
versa, ogees and others. 
These bits are provided upon their under 
sides with a dovetailed groove, f, of a size to 
receive the head d of the bolt c. The groove 
if extends from point to heel of the bit. The 
latter is passed onto the holder by engaging 
the dovetailed head of the bolt in the open 
end of the groove in the bit, and thrusting the 
same endwise on the holder until it is adjusted 
thereon. The nut is then set up and the bit 
rigidly secured to the holder thereby. When 
adjusted to the holder, the groove of the bit 
receives the ribb of the said holder, by which 
means the bit is prevented from all lateral dis 
placement or vibration, while the action of the 
bolt holds it against any endwise displace 
ment, 
Fig. 4 shows a modification of this con 
struction, wherein an inverted T groove, i, is 
formed in the curved sufaces of the holder, 
and a curved bit, B, having edge flanges i, is 
passed endwise into the groove i, and adjusted 
therein by means of the set-screws 8, passing 
upward through the offset a and bearing for 
cibly against the under side of the bit. These 
set-screws are provided with Wrench-seats j, 
by means of which they are the more readily 
applied. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with a bit-holder having 
opposite offsets and curved, flanged bearing 
surfaces, of the correspondingly-curved bits, 
having a dovetailed groove upon their under 
sides, and the adjusting-bolts, having dove 
tailed heads adapted to enter the said grooves, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
COLUMBUS M. COULTER, 
Witnesses: 
G. G. MABN, 
P. WILBER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201080.txt	J. WORICK. 
Grain-Separator. 
No. 201,080. 
Patented March 5, 1878. 
 
 
EaS 
 
 
 
Wivesses 
37%. 3, 
Vvvve vow . 
showa (, erwis, 
(WVorus 4 
N. Peters, PHOTo-LITHOGRAPH 
ER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JEREMLAH WORICK, OF AMEs, IOWA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN GRAN. SEPARATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 201,0s0, dated March 5, 1878; application filed 
December 5, 1877, 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JEREMIAH. WoRICK, of 
Ames, in the county of Story and State of 
Iowa, have invented an Improved Fanning 
Mill or Grain-Separator, of which the follow 
ing is a specification: 
The object of my invention is to reduce the 
size and expense of a portable grain-cleaning 
machine, and to form and construct it in two 
parts, in such a manner that the base upon 
which it is mounted and operated Will serve 
as a grain-receptacle when the machine is in 
use, and as a packing-case and protector when 
not in use. 
It consists, first, in the manner of mounting, 
arranging, and combining a rotary fan and 
vibrating sieve and screen carrier, and trans 
mitting motion to the same by means of fric 
tion or brush wheels; second, in a box-form 
base and packing-case, in combination. With 
the operative machine, all as hereinafter fully 
set forth. 
Figure 1 of my drawing is a side elevation 
of my machine, and illustrates its construction 
and operation. Fig. 2 is a perspective view 
of my combined machine-base and packing 
case, inclosing and protecting the mechanism 
when not in use. 
A is one of the wooden sides of my box-form 
base. B B represent end pieces. They are 
rigidly joined to the sides A and a correspond 
ing bottom, C. They may vary in width, as 
required, to form a base to correspond with 
the width and capacity of the operative mech 
anism combined thereWith. 
d is one of the props, pivoted to the inside 
of the box near its rear corners, to serve as sup 
ports upon which to rest the rear corner-posts 
of the machine-frame when the mechanism 
mounted upon said frame is in Operation. 
fis one of the cleats, fixed at the front ends 
of the sides in an inclined position, to form a 
support for a removable board, g, which board, 
in combination with the end of the box-form 
machine-base, forms a receptacle to receive 
and retain the screenings separated from the 
grain. 
h h are corner-posts of the machine-frame, 
to the insides of Which posts the sides in are 
rigidly fixed in any suitable way. 
represents a section of the rear portion of 
- 
the sides on cut or severed therefrom, to form 
the sides of the vibrating frame that carries 
the sieves and screens required to receive, 
Shake, and separate the grain as it is passed 
through the machine. 
o represents a small bar, pivoted in a verti 
cal position to the outside of the stationary 
side m at its lower end, and to the outside of 
the vibrating screen-carrier in at its top end. 
A bar, o, on each side of the machine thus 
serves to support the vibrating screen-carrier 
in a suspended position. 
p represents one of the fan journal bearers, 
fixed to the front posts h. 
r r represent a series of radial fan-arms, car 
rying vanes. They are rigidly connected to 
the fan-shaft, whose journaled ends or gud 
geons S rest and revolve in the bearers h. 
t represents one of the duplex eccentrics or 
cams fixed upon the ends of the rotating fan 
shafts. 
w is a friction or brush wheel, preferably 
made of hard Wood. One of these wheels is 
rigidly fixed to each projecting end of a rotat. 
ing shaft, ac, that has its bearings formed in 
or attached to the mating vertical edges of the 
fixed sides in and their vibrating sections in. 
y is a crank-handle attached to the wheel v. 
e represents the feed-slide in the grain-hopper, 
formed in the top of the machine. 
a represents a spring, fixed to the sliding 
section of the side m, to engage the station 
ary posth. One of these is used on each side 
of the machine, to aid in imparting a vibrat 
ing motion to the screen-carrier. 
E J in Fig. 2 represent a removable roof. 
form cover, secured on top of the box-form 
base A B C when the machine is dismounted 
and packed therein and ready for transporta 
tion, or to be stored away and protected for 
future use. 
In the practical operation of my invention, 
when properly mounted on its box-form base, 
the crank-handley attached to one of the driv 
ing brush-wheels.v. is seized by hand, and the 
wheel turned. Both brush-wheels being rig 
idly fixed on the same shaft, they move simul 
taneously, and each one engages one of the 
duplex eccentries or cams rigidly fixed to the 
ends of the axle of the rotating fan, and, by 
means of friction, imparts a rotary motion to 
 
2 
20,080 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. . 
  
 
 
 
hit . 
i. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
I. : 
: 
: 
 
  
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. . 
the fan. The eccentrics are only six inches in and a rapid rotary motion for fanning the grain 
circumference and the driver-wheels seventy- are thus readily and simultaneously produced 
two. Hence the fan makes twelve revolutions to accomplish the results contemplated in the . 
every time the brush or driver wheels make operation of a fanning-mill. 
one; and every time the fan and duplex eccen. 
I claim as my invention--- 
I trics make a half-revolution they crowd the 
1. The fan-axles, having fixed-eccentrics or || || || 
hbrush-wheels, and their axle acts to push the cams it, and placed in fixed bearings, the fric 
vibratory screen-carrier in the same direction, tion-wheels (, rigidly fixed to an axle, ac, and 
The springs a are thereby compressed, and as the suspended vibrating screen-carrier n, ar 
quick as the rearward pressure ceases they ranged and combined to operate substantially 
push the screen-carrier forward again. A re-as shown and described, for the purposes set 
ciprocating vibratory motion is thus imparted forth, 
. . 
to the suspended screen-carrier and its sieves 
2. The box-form base ABC, having adjust 
and screens---two forward and two backward-- able propsid, fixed cleats.f, and a removable 
every time the duplex eccentrics and fan make cover, EJ, and thereby adapted to support a 
one revolution. The screen-carrier therefore grain-separator, and to receive the graded mat 
makes four motions every time the duplex ec- ters therefrom while in operation, and to in 
centrics make one revolution, and, as the ec- close and protect the same when not in use, 
centrics make twelve revolutions every time substantially as shown and described. || | 
the brush-wheels make one, it is apparent that 
liforty-eight distinct motions every time the op. 
perator turns the crank around one time, and 
that a rapid vibrating motion for shaking grain 
| | | | | | | | 
A. WR i. i. i. 
. 
iiii JEREMLAH w ORICK. ; 
if i if the screen-carrier and its sieves jointly make it 
. . 
Witnesses; . 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
CYRUSE. TURNER, 
W. C. EDDY. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
| 
: 
: 
 
: 
E. : 
. 
. 
. 
iii. 
| 
| | | | | | 
| || 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201180.txt	P. H., HILL ARD, 
Bell-Toy, 
No. 201,180. 
 
Patented March 12, 1878. 
N s N. 
3) 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL H. HILLARD, OF MIDDLE HADDAM, CONNECTICUT. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BELL-TOYS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 201,150, dated March 12, 1878; application filed 
August 30, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PAUL H. HILLARD, of 
Middle Haddam, in the county of Middlesex 
and State of Connecticut, have invented a 
new Improvement in Mechanical Toys; and I 
do hereby declare the following, when taken 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings and the letters of reference marked there 
on, to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the same, and which said drawings constitute 
part of this specification, and represent in 
Figure 1, a side view, and in Fig. 2, a lon 
gitudinal section, showing the connection be 
tween the bell and the crank. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
that class of toys which, in operation, shows 
a moving figure, the special object in this im 
provement being to show a figure as in the 
act of ringing a bell; and the invention con 
sists principally in a carriage having a bell 
hung thereon, and caused to vibrate by con 
nection within the bell with the running gear, 
combined with a figure connected to the bell, 
so that the movement of figure and bell corre 
spond, giving to the figure the appearance of 
being the power which swings the bell, as 
more fully hereinafter described. 
A represents the carriage-body or platform; 
B, the forward wheels, and C the rear wheel 
or wheels, the wheels revolving according as 
the carriage is moved. 
On the body a bell, D, is hung upon pivots 
at at each side, and so as to swing on said piv 
ots forward and back. Inside the bell an arm, 
b, extends down, and from this a connecting 
rod, d, extends to a crank, e, on the wheel C; 
hence as the carriage moves the crank will, 
through the arm b, impart a swinging or vi 
bratory motion to the bell. 
On the carriage in rear of the bell a figure 
is arranged, composed of the body D'jointed 
to the legs, as at f, and an arm, E, jointed at 
the shoulder. From the hand a connection, h, 
is made to the bell; hence the vibration of the 
bell, imparted as aforesaid, will impart a cor 
responding vibration to the figure, giving to 
the said figure the appearance of being the 
power that swings the bell. 
Attached to the bell is a staff, n, supporting 
a flag, m, so that the staff vibrates with the 
bell, constantly waving the flag. 
I do not wish to be understood as broadly 
claiming a toy having a figure and bell ar 
ranged thereon, combined with the power, so 
that the figure appears to be swinging the 
bell, as such I am aware is not new. Neither 
do I broadly claim a mechanical toy having a 
flag and staff arranged thereon. 
I claim 
1. The combination, in a mechanical toy, of 
the bell D, mounted on pivots on a carriage, 
combined with an arm, b, extending down in 
side of the bell, the crank e on the wheel, and 
a connecting-rod, d, between said crank and 
arm b, substantially as described. 
2. In a mechanical toy, the combination of 
a swinging bell mounted on a carriage, oper 
ated from the running gear, with a staff and 
flag, in connection with said bell, substan 
tially as described. 
PAUL H. HILLARD. 
Witnesses: 
L. D. BUTLER, 
JOSLAHACKLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201280.txt	A, C. NICKER SON, 
Cranberry-Picker. 
No. 2 O1,28O. 
Patented March 12, 1878. 
: 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW C. NICKERSON, OF BARNSTABLE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-THIRD HIS 
RIGHT TO JONATHAN W. ELLIS, OF NEW BEDFORD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CRANBERRY-PICKERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2012 S0, dated March 12, 1878; application filed 
w 
January 4, 1878. 
. 
- 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ANDREW C. NICKER 
SON, of Barnstable, county of Barnstable, and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in a Method 
and Apparatus for Picking Cranberries, of 
which the following is a specification: 
My invention relates to a novel method and 
means for picking cranberries. 
. . . 
. 
It consists, first, in inclosing a given are 
of vines by means of a floating frame, the 
sides of which are in a vertical position when 
surrounding the vines, then picking the ber 
ries, throwing them back into the water to free 
them of unsound berries and cleanse them of 
impurities, and, finally, gathering the berries 
in a cleansed state, and placing them in a 
suitable receptacle; secondly, in a novel ap 
paratus for picking the berries, consisting of 
a prismatic wire cage, the space between the 
Wires On one of its sides or parallelograms be 
ing greater than that between the wires of all 
the other sides, as fully described hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view, Fig. 2 an under-side view, 
and Fig. 3 a rear elevation, of my improved 
apparatus. . Fig. 4 is a diagram of the frame 
employed in my new method of picking cran 
berries in wet bogs. 
The cranberry-rake consists of an oblong 
frame, A, made of any suitable light mate 
rial, and is composed of the two longer arms a, a? 
and the cross-pieces b b. A is a handle, se 
cured to the arms at a' in the center of the 
frame and at an angle thereto, so that when 
the apparatus is held in the hand the apex of 
the prismatic cage will be turned upward to 
facilitate the picking or combing of the vines. 
B B are a series of wires attached to the arms 
at a', which wires, together with the handle A, 
form the back A of the apparatus. The space 
between the Wires B should be less than the 
diameter of a cranberry, to prevent their fall 
ing through after having been combedorraked 
off the vines. C C are wires extending for 
ward of the frame A, their ends being con 
nected with the arms at al. These wires are 
bent or curved to form triangles, or nearly so, 
the space between them being about twice as 
great as that between wires B. C. C are in 
termediate wires, having their ends made fast 
to arm a? of the frame A. These wires are 
also bent or curved into nearly triangular 
shape, their apexes being connected with wires 
C a little below the line of the apexes of the 
latter wires, which may be done by wiring or 
soldering; but as these methods would neces 
sarily leave rough surfaces or projecting edges, 
liable to mutilate the vines, which should be 
especially guarded against, I prefer to pass 
the wires C. through wires C, as shown, em 
ploying for C a wire of less diameter, as will 
be readily understood. 
By this arrangement of intermediate wires 
the lower side A of the apparatus is provided 
with a series of Wedge-shaped openings or 
slots, a *, tapering from below the line of the 
apexes of the wires C to the frame A, being 
narrowest at that point. By these means the 
branches and berries may be drawn through 
the cage and the berries combed therefrom 
and retained within said cage, a tilting motion 
being imparted thereto each time a vine or 
branch is combed or passed through it. 
A' A' are the ends of the cage, formed of a 
series of triangular bent wires, C, and the 
end wires C. The ends of the wires C are 
made fast to the cross-pieces b b, and held 
firmly in position by means of a vertical wire, 
D, passing through the curved or bent wires 
C and the curved or triangular end wires C 
of the series. 
It is well known that whenever practicable 
the cranberry-bogs are flooded for picking, as 
it facilitates the operation and lessens the lia 
bility of injuring the vines. The Wet picking 
being a tedious and disagreeable Work when 
effected by hand, I have, therefore, devised 
a method for inclosing a certain area of vines 
by means of a floating frame of thin boards, 
which frame may be of any convenient shape 
and size, the operation being as follows: 
The frame F (shown in Fig. 4) is pushed 
over the vines, and the berries stripped there 
from by means of the rake or apparatus above 
described, and as fast as picked are dumped 
or thrown in the water again, and prevented 
from floating off by the said frame. When 
s 
20, 
. 
. 
S 
... 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
m 
. 
. 
- S 
all the vines within the inclosure are pigked 
... the berries floating on the surface are gathered 
again and placed in bags. 
living of his method is that only 
the good or sound berries are gathered, as all 
the rotten or unsound berries will sink, and 
furthermore, they are thoroughly cleansed and 
freed from all leaves or other impurities, thus: 
avoiding the sorting or picking over of the 
berries. . 
By means of the improved rake aboye de: 
scribed,in conjunction with the floating frame, 
the work is done in a very rapid and thorough 
manner, the construction of the rake being: 
especially designed to avoid injury to the 
vines, and also to effect a great saying in labor. 
. 
. It will be inderstood that I do not confine 
myself to the particular use of the rake as 
above described, as it is evident that by re 
iducing the space between the wires corre. 
spondingly, the apparatus, may be employed 
for picking other than cranberries--such as 
. . ; 
luckie, or whortleberries. . 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
. and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
. . 
. . . . . . 1. An apparatus for picking cranberries . . 
. 
. 
. consisting of a prismatic wire cage, provided 
. . with a suitable handle, the space between the . 
. . . wires on oneside or parallelogram being greater 
. than that between the wires of all the other 
sides, substantially as described, for the pur 
pose specified. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
 
 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
: . . . 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . . . 
. . 
. 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
. . 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
:- 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. . . 
. . . 
. . . . 
. . . . 
. . . 
. . . . 
. . . . . 
. . . . . 
. . . . 
. . . . . . . 
Seb. 
2. An apparatus for picking. Cranbergies is is 
consisting of a prismatic wire cage, provided 
with a suitable handle, the wires on one of its 
sides or parallelograms being so arranged as: 
: 
to form, wedge-shaped or tapering slots, sub- . 
. . . 
stantially as described, for the purpose. Speci: 
fied. 
. 
. . . 
3. The combination of the frane A wires; 
B C GC2D, and the handle A, all arranged, 
; ; ; is 
and combined substantially as described, for ; 
; ; 
the purpose set forth. . . 
. 
. 
. . 
. . 
4. The combination, with the arm a the . 
frame A, and the wires C, of the wires C, sub::::::: 
stantially as described, and constructed as: 
. 
. 
specified. . 
. 
. 
5. The wires C and C, bent to shape, as der: 
seribed, and provided with suitable aperties 
or holes, incombination, with the vertical 
wires. D'and the curved or triangular Wires. 
C, passing through said wires C9 and the 
frine A, all constructed substantially as der. 
scribed, for 
have 
hereunto set my hand this 28th day of Decent 
ber, 1877. . 
. 
. . . . 
. 
. . . . . . 
. . . 
ANDREW C. NICKERSON. 
. . . . 
. 
. 
in witness that claim the foregoing 
the purpose specified. 
itnesses: 
E. L. STERNER, 
H. M. KNOWLTON. . . . 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
is 
. . 
. 
. . . . 
. . 
. 
. . . . 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201380.txt	T, ARTAUD. 
Valve-Action for Brass Musical Instruments, 
No. 201,380. 
Patented March 19, 1878. 
 
s 
WITNESSES: 
6/1%. 
-66%---e. 
INVENTOR; 
(2/22zzzzz/ 
BY le tode 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODORE ARTAUD, OF JACKSON, MISSISSIPPI. 
MPROVEMENT IN WALWE-ACTIONS FOR BRASS MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2013S0, dated March 19, 1878; application filed 
December 29, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THEODORE ARTAUD, 
of Jackson, in the county of Hinds and State 
of Mississippi, have invented a new and Im 
proved Valve for Brass Instruments, of which 
the following is a specification: 
In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1 rep 
resents a portion of a brass instrument with 
my improved rotary valves, and Fig. 2 a side 
view of one of the side-action valves. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
This invention has for its object to furnish 
for musical brass instruments of different 
kinds an improved rotary valve, by which the 
objectionable and annoying strings used in 
the present Valves are dispensed with, and a 
positive action of the valve substituted there 
for, so that the valve operates with greater 
reliability, easier touch, and increased speed. 
The invention consists of a slotted lever 
attached to the valve, and actuated by a pin 
of a fixed arm of the spring-acted key. 
Referring to the drawing, A represents the 
keys of any brass instrument, which are 
hinged either to the top or side of the in 
strument, according to the special arrange 
ment of the same. The keys are acted upon 
by spiral springs a, placed around their piv 
ots, and connected by curved arms B, hav 
ing fixed pins b, with slotted levers C of the 
valves D. The depression of the spring-acted 
key causes the turning of the valve, which is 
instantly returned as soon as the pressure on 
the key is removed. The pin b slides along 
the slotted lever of the valve, and turns the 
same thereby in reliable manner without the 
use of the strings that have heretofore been 
employed for operating these rotary valves. 
The wearing out of the strings and the unre 
liable working of the valves and other incon 
veniences of the string-operated valves are 
thereby obviated, and a positive or direct top 
or side action obtained. 
I am aware that it is not, broadly, new to 
operate the valves of a brass instrument by 
other means than by a string-connection of 
the valves and keys. I disclaim the positive 
action of the valve, and confine myself to the 
special construction of devices hereinafter 
claimed. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
As an improvement in valves for musical 
brass instruments, the combination of the 
spring-acted key, having curved arm and fixed 
pin, with a slotted lever of the rotary valve, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
THEODORE ARTAUD, M. D. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. LEDBETTER, 
R. R. LEDBETTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201480.txt	J, ARNOLD. 
Trunk Lock. 
No. 201,480. 
Patented March 19, 1878. 
 
722.3, 
4,727.7, 
N. PETERs, PHoro-LTHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN ARNOLD, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
IMPROVEMENT N TRUNK-LOCKS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2014.s0, dated March 19, 1878; application filed 
January 25, 1878. 
s 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN ARNOLD, of the 
city of Newark, in the county of Essex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Trunk-Locks; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of my in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany. 
ing drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention is a trunk lock or catch con 
sisting of a case containing a bolt turning 
on a pivot attached to the case, having lugs 
arranged to be struck by the key, and with 
beveled faces adapted to a spring-plate, as 
fully described hereinafter. 
In the drawing, A represents the lock, the 
view being taken from the back of the lock 
on the side designed to fit against the surface 
of the trunk. B is the hasp, provided with 
holes on for nails or rivets, and constructed at 
the tongue, which fits into the lock, with a 
hook, b, strengthened in its attachment to the 
hasp by a plate, e, the same being placed at 
one side of the hook, to leave an opening (in 
which the plate e is placed) for the hooked bolt 
a. This bolt is cast in one piece, with a plate 
notched at its other extremity, and pivoted 
about the middle at d. 
The key of the lock h is inserted through a 
key-hole, and, in being turned, enters the notch 
between two lugs, i i", formed at the corners 
of the plate named, and pushes against the 
lugito unlock the bolt, and against it to lockit, 
To retain the bolt firmly in either position, 
the plate a i i" is cast at the back side. With a 
projecting hub flattened on two sides, as 
shown at g. A spring-leaf, f, extends across 
the interior of the case, resting at its ends on 
seats in, and bearing at its middle against the 
flattened hub of the bolt-plate a ii. The bolt 
is thus firmly held eitherin the open or closed 
position. 
The plate named may be made, as shown, 
with a tapering hole in its middle for facility 
of casting, in which case it fits on a tapered 
pin cast in the center of the lock; or it may 
be made with a projecting pin on its front or 
back, resting in holes or recesses provided in 
the front and back of the lock. 
As shown in the drawing, the lock requires 
no back plate to aid in supporting the mech 
anism. 
I claim 
The combination, with the case A of the 
bolta, turning on a pivot attached to the case, 
having lugs i i", arranged to be struck by the 
key, and with beveled faces adapted to a spring 
plate, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I hereto affix my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
JOHN ARNOLD. 
Witnesses: 
OLIVER, DRAKE, 
FRED. L. POWE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201580.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN O. WILLIAMS, OF TOLEDO, OHIO. 
IMPROVEMENT IN ARTIFICIAL MARBLE. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 201,5S0, dated March 19, 1878; application filed 
February 5, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN O. WILLIAMS, of 
Toledo, in the county of Lucas and State of 
Ohio, have invented a certain Improved Com 
position for Artificial Marble, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification: 
Myinvention consists in a new composition 
of matter forming an artificial marble of great 
strength, cheapness, and closeness of grain, 
which is well adapted for use in the manufac. 
ture of coffins, mantels, and similar articles. 
In preparing my composition I provide the 
following: Alum, one ounce; white sugar, 
one scruple; cream of tartar, one-half scruple; 
Water, one gallon. 
The three first-named ingredients are dis 
solved in the Water, and then Keen's cement, 
or other similar hydraulic cement, added until 
the mass attains the desired consistency. 
Suitable coloring matter may then be dis 
tributed through the mass, and the latter 
rolled or kneaded until the desired appearance 
of veins is produced. The material is then 
Worked or molded into any desired form and 
permitted to harden. 
A slight Variation may be made in the pro 
portions of the ingredients; but no material 
variation should be made. 
I am aware that artificial marble has been 
made of many different compounds, and that 
Keen's cement and alum have been used 
therein; but I am not aware that any one has 
hitherto used the sugar and cream of tartar in 
connection with the other elements named, 
and by their use I produce a stone which be 
comes very hard, and which is susceptible of 
a higher polish than those now in use. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
An artificial marble consisting of alum, 
sugar, cream of tartar, water, and cement, in 
substantially the proportions specified. 
JOHN O. WILLIAMS, 
. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN J. BRADY, 
H. A. KANE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201680.txt	H. L. JUDD, 
Picture Hook. 
No. 2 O1,68O. 
Patented March 26, 1878. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
HUBERT L. JUDD, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN PICTURE-HOOKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 201,6S0, dated March 26, 1878; application filed 
January 28, 1878. 
- 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HUBERT L. JUDD, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented an Improvement 
in Picture-Hooks, of which the following is a 
specification: 
Hooks have been made of wire and sheet 
metal to connect the picture wire or cord 
with a wooden molding or rod secured at 
the base of the cornice passing around the 
room, so that said hooks can be moved from 
place to place, to suit the pictures to be hung 
on the walls. 
My invention consists in a peculiarity in the 
construction of the hook, whereby it is better 
adapted to themolding upon which it is hooked, 
and to the cord or wire of the picture. 
In the drawing, Figure 1 is a section of the 
molding and edge view of the hook. Fig. 2 
is an elevation of the hook, and Fig. 3 is a 
sectional plan of the hook at the line at a. 
The hook is preferably of cast metal, such 
as malleable iron or brass, and it is in the form 
of a plate, a, with parallel or nearly parallel 
sides, with a cross-bar, c, or T-head at one end, 
and with lugs or projections d at the back, and 
the ends of the cross-bar c are preferably pro 
vided with ornamental headse, and the surface 
of the plate is preferably ornamented with 
recessed or raised designs. 
The general contour of this hookis S-shaped, 
and it is either cast or bent into this form in 
order that the upper end of the hook may cor 
respond with the molding f, that is of wood 
or other suitable material and nailed or other 
wise fastened to the wall. This hooked upper 
end of the picture-support may easily be bent 
to adapt the same to various moldings, and 
the lugs or projections d pass into the cove of 
the molding, so as to prevent the hook being 
pried off the molding by the action of the 
weight hanging upon the lower end of the 
picture-hook. 
The cross-bar c or T end insures the proper 
support for the wire or cord h, that passes to 
the picture, and the same cannot slip of the 
hook because of the projecting Tends. The 
ornamental knobs at the ends of this cross 
bar aid in retaining the picture cord or wire, 
and in improving the appearance of the pic 
ture-hook. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The plate-hook having a cross-piece or 
T-head at the lower end for retaining the 
cord, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the plate-hook 
and cross-piece, of the knobs at the ends of 
the cross-piece, substantially as set forth. 
Signed by me this 24th day of January, A. 
D. 1878. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PNCKNEY, 
CHAS. H. SMITH. 
H. L. JUDD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201780.txt	R. W. HARTNETT, 
Milling Machine for Dressing Printers' Chases. 
Patented March 26, 1878. 
No. 201,78 O. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD W. HARTNETT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN MILLING-MACHINES FOR DRESSING PRINTERS' CHASES, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 201, so, dated March 26, 1878; application filed 
August 31, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
ing the vertical spindle F, to the bottom ex 
Be it known that I, RICHARD WILLIAM 
tremity of which is fixed a horizontal cutter, 
HARTNETT, of the city and county of Philadel 
G, which latter is provided upon its sides and 
phia, in the State of Pennsylvania, have invent 
base with fixed teeth, or with insertible teeth, 
ed a new and useful Improvement in Milling 
as shown in Fig. 3. The cutteris of right-an 
Machines for Dressing Printers' Chases, of 
gular configuration at its base, to enable the 
which I do hereby declare the following to be a 
perfect dressing of the corners of the chase. 
full, clear, and precise description, and suffi 
I is the driving-shaft, to which is keyed a 
cient to enable those skilled in the art to which 
pinion, i, meshing with a gear-wheel, h, con 
it appertains to construct and employ my said 
nected with the carriage-actuating screw H. 
invention, reference being had to the accom 
To the driving-shaft are also secured one tight 
panying drawing, which forms part of this 
and two loose pulleys, which carry a straight 
specification, and of which 
and cross belt, their action in driving or re 
Figure 1 is a view, in perspective, of my im 
versing the screw H being regulated by the 
proved machine; Fig. 2, an elevation of the 
action of the belt-shifter rod M and its stop 
same, looking from behind; and Fig. 3, a de 
dogs N N, which encounter lugs N N on the 
tail of the cutter, illustrating my method of 
carriage, all substantially in the manner usual 
dressing out thereby the corners of the chase, 
in planing-machines, and forming no part of 
in place upon which latter the cutter is repre 
my invention. O in Fig. 3 is the chase. 
Sented. 
K is a driving-drum, imparting through 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
belts motion to the back gear of the head and 
Sponding parts wherever used. 
to the driving-shaft, 
My invention relates to the class of mill 
Such being the construction of my machine 
ing-machines which are employed to dress up 
the following is its operation: The chase inits 
printers' chases. 
undressed condition being secured in the de 
The following is a description of a conven 
sired position in the chuck, motion is imparted 
ient form of machine embodying my inven 
to the entire machine, and the carriage, head, 
tion. 
and revolving cutter caused to travel from end 
A are the shears or ways upon which the 
to end of that side of the chase which is set 
carriage, head, and cutting mechanism travel 
to be dressed, the position of the dogs N N of 
longitudinally. A' A' are the legs or frame 
the belt-shifter rod M being made correspond 
Work supporting the machine. B is the 
ent to the length of the side to be dressed, in 
chuck or chase-supporter, provided with an 
order to secure reversing at the proper time. 
adjustable clamping-block and set-screws b 
The base of the cutterin its longitudinal throw 
b', to adapt it to retain the chase in any given 
trues that inner side of the chase which is 
position, and so constructed as to support an 
exposed. When the length of the side has 
upright chase in position beneath the cutter in 
been thus dressed and the corner reached, 
the dressing of the corners, or being of any 
transverse motion is imparted to the cutter by 
other fit construction to support a chase. 
means of the hand-wheel L and its cross-feed 
C is the carriage, actuated by the proper 
screw, and the cutter driven across the cor 
gearing, whereof hereinafter, to any required 
ner and then retracted, so as to dress across 
longitudinal reciprocation, and provided with 
the corner, after which the chase is reset, an 
and carrying the head and cutting mechan 
other side exposed, and the operation repeated 
ism. D is the head, traveling transversely in 
in the same manner until the Whole has been 
ways don the carriage, and actuated to the 
dressed. 
required extent for dressing across the corners 
It is obvious that the most complete dress 
of the chase by means of a cross-feed screw, 
ing of every portion of the chase is effected 
L, and hand-wheel L' on the carriage engag 
by the machine without the need of any 
hand-finishing. I have specified a hand 
ing with a nut beneath said head. E is an 
ordinary back gear upon the head, to impart 
wheel, L', as a convenient means of trans 
the requisite speed to a bevel-gear, E, driv. versely operating the cutter; but it will be 
w 
 
2 
201,7S0 
readily understood that any automatic mech 
anism adapted to effect the required recipro 
cation may be substituted therefor. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
In combination with the carriage C, when 
adapted, by means of the screw H and its 
actuating mechanism, to be reciprocated longi 
tudinally upon the shears A in relation to the 
chuck B, the head D, when provided with the 
back gear E, bevel-gear E", spindle F, and 
cutter G, and adapted, by means of the cross 
feed screw L, to be reciprocated transversely 
upon the carriage C in relation to the chuck 
B, substantially as shown and described, and 
for the purpose specified. . 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name in the presence of two wit 
0SSS 
RICHARD W. HARTNETT, 
Witnesses: 
J. BoNSALL TAYLOR, 
W. C. STRAWBRIDGE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201880.txt	A. W. JOHNSON. 
Compressible Pump and Check Valves, 
Patented April 2, 1878. 
No. 20,880. 
 
Z 
22 
Wiz, vesses. 
Azvez 22. 
N. PETERs, Phoro-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT W. JOHNSON, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO EDWIN 
E. MERSICK, HOBART B. BIGELOW, AND FREDERIC IVES, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN CoMPRESSIBLE PUMP AND CHECK VALVES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 201,sso, dated April 2, 1878; application filed 
October 6, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT W. JoHNSON, 
of New Eaven, in the county of New Haven 
and State of Connecticut, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Valves; 
and that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, making a 
part of this specification. 
This invention is in the nature of an im 
provement in tubular elastic valves which 
collapse to permit the passage of fluid or other 
matter between the exterior surface of the col 
lapsed valve and the interior Surface of the pipe 
which incloses the valve, and upon or against 
which it seats when closed. (A valve of this 
kind is described in Letters Patent of the 
United States granted to myself and Horace 
A. Nettleton, and issued on the 15th day of 
June, 1875.) 
The invention consists in a projecting flange, 
of metal, of suitable form, firmly secured within 
and to the pipe containing the collapsible tubu 
lar valve, in such a position as to form a seat 
for a portion of its closed end; in strengthen 
ing the port-closing portion of the valve by a 
conoidal protuberance upon its inner surface 
of the elastic material of which the valve is 
made; and in strengthening the open end of 
said tubular valve by a rib or ring of elastic 
material extending around its inner surface 
in a plane practically at right angles to the 
valve-opening. 
This valve is designed more particularly for 
use in pumps for pumping the contents of 
privy-vaults, cess-pools, and other semi-liquid 
matter containing solid substances, and is in 
tended to be nearly in a horizontal position 
when in use, the valve-port being partially 
bounded by the lowerinner surface of the pipe 
containing the valve, and practically on a line. 
with the suction and discharge pipes. In per 
forming this class of work it is essential that 
the valve, when open, should afford a straight, 
clear, and unobstructed passage-way or open 
ing, the diameter of which is not less than 
that of the suction-pipe through which the 
material being pumped is drawn; and this 
requisite is secured in this case by making the 
tubular elastic valve considerably larger in 
diameter than the suction-pipe, while its effi 
ciency for packing closely over and around any 
solid substance which may temporarily stop 
between it and its seat is also increased by 
reason of a greater amount of elasticity thus 
obtained. 
In the accompanying sheet of drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a longitudinal vertical 
section of one of my improved valves; Fig. 2, 
the rear or closed end of same, showing the 
projecting flange, and also the valve-port; Fig. 
3, the front or open end of same. Fig. 4 rep 
resents a longitudinal vertical section of one 
of my improved valves open or collapsed; Fig. 
5, a front-end view of same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in the several figures. 
A indicates a pipe containing my improved 
valve; B indicates a projecting metal flange, 
securely fastened within the pipe A, and form. 
ing a seat for a portion of the closed end of 
the tubular elastic valve C. c indicates a co 
noidal protuberance upon the inner surface 
of the port-closing portion of the valve C, 
strengthening that part of the valve against 
the backward pressure when operating as a 
check. cindicates an elasticribformed around 
the inner surface of the valve at its open end, 
and which is preferably made of the same ma 
terial as the valve, and solid therewith, but 
may be a separate elastic ring inserted therein. 
Its object is to strengthen the open end of the 
valve, and cause it to close more promptly by 
its inherent elasticity than it otherwise would. 
O indicates the valve-port, bounded in part by 
the flange B. 
The operation of my improved valve, when 
fitted to and used in a pump, is as follows: The 
movement of the pump-piston or other ex 
hausting and compressing device in one direc 
tion causes the valve to collapse, and the ma 
terial being pumped to flow through between 
the outer surface of the collapsed valve and 
the inner surface of the pipe containing the 
valve, in the direction indicated by the arrow 
in Fig. 4, while at the reverse motion of the 
piston the valve instantly expands by its own 
inherent elasticity to its first position, as shown 
in Fig.1, its outer surface coming in close con 
scribed. 
a seat for a portion of the closed end of said 
valve, substantially as and for the purpose de 
2. In a tubular elastic valve, a conoidal pro 
tuberance of its elastic material upon the in 
ner surface of its port-closing portion, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. In a tubular elastic valve, an elastic rib 
extending around the inner surface of the valve 
at its open end, substantially as shown and 
described, and for the purpose specified. 
ALBERT W., JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
JosEPH. R. JoHNSON, 
SHABE. W. HODGES. 
2 
201SS0 
- 
tact with and seating against the inner sur-, 
face of the inclosing-pipe A and projecting 
flange B, thus forming a most effectual check 
Valve. 
It is obvious that the greater the pressure 
within the tubular elastic valve the more firmly 
it will be held against the inner wall of the pipe 
A, and also against the projecting flange B, 
whose office is to re-enforce that portion of the 
closed end of the valve covered by said flange. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In combination with a tubular elastic 
valve, a fixed projecting metal flange, forming 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US201980.txt	C. W. BALD WIN. 
Hydraulic Elevator. 
No. 201,980. 
1878. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z 
A 
NNNNNNN 
it. PERS, Photo-KrAPE WASHINGN, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CY RUS. W. BALDWIN, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2019.s0, dated April 2, 1878; application filed 
February 8, 1878. 
Beit known that I, CYRUs W. BALDWIN, of der A. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Brooklyn, county of Kings, State of New York, 
have invented or discovered a new and useful 
Improvement in Hydraulic Elevators; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, concise, and exact description thereof, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ing making a part of this specification, in 
which, like letters indicating like parts 
Figure 1 is an outline elevation of so much 
of the apparatus as is requisite in order to 
illustrate my improvement. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional elevation, to an enlarged scale, of the 
cylinder, piston-valves, and connections of Fig. 
1; and Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are sectional views, 
to a somewhat larger scale, of the valve de 
vices of Fig. 2, showing the different positions 
of the valves as adjusted for different purposes. 
This improvement relates to that class of 
hydraulic elevators in which the ram, piston, 
or plunger is operated by variations of fluid 
pressure on one or both sides of the piston or 
head, and more specifically to the construction 
of a double piston, in connection with other 
operative devices, whereby a double lifting 
poweris secured withoutincrease offluid-press 
ure, or of the diameter of the cylinder. 
A portion of the lifting-rope is represented 
at R. This rope passes over the pulley or 
wheel W, in the usual way, and thence any 
desired number of times around the fixed and 
movable sheaves or pulleys W. W., (of which 
more or less may be used, as desired,) and its 
end is made secure at R. The movable pull 
leys Ware connected by a stirrup, p, with the 
double piston-stem B', which latter, passing 
through stuffing-boxes binto the cylinder A, 
is connected at its opposite end with the dou 
ble piston B. B. The cylinder A is made in 
two parts, or is divided into two compartments 
or chambers, at a, by means of a transverse 
diaphragm, ct, at or about midway between its 
two ends. The piston-heads B B play one in 
Both are attached to the same. 
each chamber. 
intermediate stem B, so as to receive the same 
motions. The stem B plays through a stuff. 
ing-box, b', and in the diaphragm. I make a 
port, c, opened and closed by any suitable form 
of valve, c'. Supply and discharge ports Al 
A are made at or near the ends of the cylin 
The valve-case D has a valve-chamber, d, . 
preferably of cylindrical form, and, by pref. 
erence, lined with lining d, and in such lining 
I make perforations d', covering the ports 
e el e. The porte has a pipe communication, 
P, with the cylinder-port A. The port e, by 
a pipe or passage, P, communicates with a 
cylinder-port, a, at or near the upper end of 
the chamber a, and the porte' is connected, 
by a pipe, P, with the cylinder-port A. 
In the valve-chamber D, I arrange a series 
of disk-shaped valves, s s' s, on a common 
stem, s. These valves are provided with suita 
ble packing, preferably cup-leather packing, 
and the stems project outside of the valve-case, 
so that the valves can be shifted by rack and 
pinion i, or in other suitable Way. Water un 
der pressure is admitted at m from any suita 
ble head or source of supply. 
The valves in valve-case D receive their 
motion, through rack and pinion i, from an 
operating-wheel, G, or other equivalent device 
capable of being moved so as properly to shift 
the valves by the use of an operating-cord 
in the car, or other known means adapted to 
the like end. A hand-hole, h, covered by a 
cap, is provided in the side of the cylinder A. 
near the diaphragma, for convenience in pack 
ing the stem B and the piston-head B. 
The lower open end of the valve-chamber 
constitutes a waste-port, as at di. The appa 
ratus has also an open water passage or com 
munication, g, from the chamber a, near the 
diaphragma, to the chamber a, below or out 
side of the utmost point of motion of the pis 
ton-head B. 
When the operator in the car desires to raise 
the car while empty or with only a light load, 
he works his operating-cord so as to bring the 
valves to the position shown in Fig. 2, 
Both chambers a, a are presumed to be full 
of water under pressure, as also the commu 
nicating pipes. Full water-pressure will then 
be effective on the upper side of the piston 
head B, and water below the piston-head B 
will flow out freely at d. The valve spre 
vents the supply from escaping at the Waste 
port. Water from below the piston-head B 
2019.s0 
- 
will open valve c and flow through the port c, 
so as to fill the space vacated by the piston B 
as it moves downward, the latter acting, per 
haps, somewhat as a pump-piston to draw the 
water through. The residue, if any, of water 
under B will pass through to.the waste-port. 
To work the apparatus with maximum ef. 
fect in raising heavy loads, the wheel G is 
turned so as to shift the valves to the position 
shown in Fig. 3. In this adjustment the ports 
e and e are brought into communication, and 
water in the pipe P (which is continuously 
under pressure) is free to pass from port e, 
through between the valves s and s, through 
port el, and into pipe P, and by port a into 
the upper end of the lower cylinder or cham 
ber, and above the piston-head B. Water 
pressure will then act effectively on top of the 
piston-head B, as before; also, the water 
pressure, entering at a, as just explained, Will 
close the valve c?, and act with its full force 
on the upper side of the piston-head B, the 
water below B escaping by q and d, as before, 
and water below Bescaping at d, in both cases 
without resistance. I thus get the effective 
force of the water-pressure on two cylinders 
instead of one, thus practically doubling the 
power of the apparatus. 
To lower the car, the valves are shifted to 
the position in Fig. 4. In this adjustment 
both valves ss are below the escape-port, so 
that the waste is entirely cut off; also, both 
ports el and e are brought into communication 
with the porte. The car, then being sufficiently 
heavy, or being counterweighted, comes down 
by its own gravity. Water above the two 
piston-heads flows by ports ee into the cham 
bera" bellow the lower piston B, and a por 
tion of it passes up qinto the Space below the 
upper piston B. By raising the valves a little 
the port e can be partially closed, and the cir 
culation of water from above to below the pis 
tons can thereby be so choked as to prevent a 
too rapid descent of the car, should such dan 
ger occur. To stop the car at any time it is 
only necessary to bring the valves to the posi 
tion shown in Fig. 5. The waste or discharge 
is closed by the valves, and the circulation 
from above the pistons to below them is pre 
vented by the valves. 
In all the adjustments described the valves 
are balanced as regards Water-pressure; but 
if such balancing is not desired the valves 
may be omitted, the end of the valve-chamber 
being closed by a cap made with a stuffing 
box for the valve-stem to play through. 
As regards the passage P and its port e, 
and the manner of opening and closing the 
latter, I do not limit myself to the form of con 
struction shown; but in so far as the same is 
an element in the present improvement, I in 
clude herein any suitable water-conduit, com 
municating at one end with the Water under 
pressure, and at the other end with the cham 
ber at above the piston B, and provided with 
any suitable form or construction of valve or 
cock, operated in any desired way, for open 
 
time. 
- 
ing and closing such, conduit; nor, by speak 
ing of the upper and lowersides of the piston 
heads, do I intend to confine myself to a ver 
tically-arranged apparatus, since the cylinder 
may be arranged horizontally, if so preferred. 
The terms upper and lower, above and 
below, are used relatively. 
It will also be observed that the chambers 
a, a are, in effect, two cylinders fixed in posi 
tion in the same axial line; and, if sopreferred, 
they may be made separately, and so arranged 
relatively to each other. The stem B', made 
a little longer, will then extend through a stuff. 
ing-boxin each contiguous cylinder-head, and 
a suitable water-conduit, with any properform 
of valve, will take the place of the diaphragm 
port c, so as to perform the same function. In 
such case the passage g may have the same 
lower terminus as described, or a separate 
valve may be added for closing it at the proper 
I might also use the same device and ar 
rangement in general if both cylinders were 
open at one end and the Water applied to only 
one side of the piston, so that by forcing it 
up or down the necessary power might be com 
municated to the car; but I prefer to use wa 
ter on both sides of the piston, so as to utilize 
the full pressure at the point of discharge, and 
to have the Water to act as a brake in the de 
scent of the car by passing it through a con 
fined space to the bottom of the piston. 
Nor do I limit myself in either form of the 
invention to the use of pistons of the same di 
ameters, since they may be varied in this re 
spect at pleasure, or according as it may be 
desired that the additional piston should do 
more or less than double the Work of the first 
one; also, by a duplication of the proper pipes 
and ports, the skilled mechanic can adapt the 
apparatus described to three or more like cyl 
inders and pistons, and such feature is hereby 
included within the present invention, 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. In a hydraulic elevator, the combination 
of two or more cylinders arranged in line, a 
corresponding number of piston-heads (one in 
each cylinder) on a common stem, a valve-gov 
erned conduit connecting the adjacent ends of 
the two cylinders, a water-supply port and a 
Water-discharge port to each cylinder, and a 
valve in one of such water-supply ports, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a double-cylinder and double-piston 
hydraulic elevator, a valve-governed water 
passage connecting the adjacent ends of the 
two cylinders, and a valve - governed water 
supply to such other cylinder, combined sub 
stantially as described, with reference to the 
automatic opening and closing of the Valve 
between the cylinders, accordingly as the War 
ter-supply valve may be closed or opened. 
3. In a double-cylinder and double-piston 
hydraulic elevator, in which one piston is con 
tinuously subject to Water-pressure, the com 
bination of a pipe or conduit, P, for transmit 
ting such pressure, a valve-governed conduit 
201.9S0 
- 
3 
from or connected with the same source of 
pressure leading to the same side of the other 
piston, anda Valve device forbringing the dis 
charge-ports of both cylinders into communi 
cation with the pressure pipe or conduit, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In a hydraulic elevator, the combination 
of two or more cylinders arranged in line, a 
corresponding number of piston-heads (one in 
each cylinder) on a common stem, an arrange 
ment of Water-supply ports for applying water 
pressure simultaneously to and exhausting it 
from the same side of the piston-heads, such 
ports being opened and closed for supply and 
escape by successive movements of a series of 
Valves on a single stem, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. In combination with two cylinders and 
two pistons (one in each cylinder) on a com 
mon stem, a valve-governed circulation-pipe, 
P, arranged in one adjustment of the valves 
to connect the main water-supply With one end 
of its cylinder, and in another adjustment to 
bring the opposite ends of its cylinder into 
communication, substantially as set forth. 
6. The pipes PP, leading from the upper 
ends of the Water-chambers a a through a com 
mon valve-case, in combination with pipes or 
passages P and q, which lead to the opposite 
ends of the same cylinders, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
CYRUs W. BALDWIN. 
Witnesses: 
WM. BRo. SMITH, 
HARRY C. BEACH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202080.txt	A. R. WEISS, 
B0ttle Stopping Machine, 
No. 202,080. 
Patented April 2, 1878. 
 
 
woir. 
44-4- &c4ara-2a. 
47.4% 
7-ca aer-2147 
N.Peters, Photo-uthogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT R, WEISS, OF BROOKLYN, E. D., NEW YORK, 
IMPROVEMENT IN BOTTLE-STOPPING MACHINEs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202,0S0, dated April 2, 1878; application filed 
March 1, 1878. 
' 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT RICHARD 
WEIss, of Brooklyn, E.D., in the county of 
Kings, State of New York, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Bottle-Stop 
ping Machines, which improvement is fully set 
forth in the annexed specification, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawing, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a front view, partly in section, 
with the lever raised. Fig. 2 is a front view, 
partly in section, with the lever depressed. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts, 
This invention consists in the combination, 
in a machine for inserting stoppers into bot 
tles, of a stop secured to the plunger, which 
acts on the connecting-bar and prevents the 
plunger from pressing the stopper in too far, 
and from driving it into the bottle, a spring 
or weight which raises the lever, and a guide 
which leads the stoppers into the stopper-re 
ceiving funnel; also, in the combination, in a 
machine as above described, of a sliding frame 
which carries the stopper-receiving funnel, so 
that said funnel descends until it rests on the 
bottle, and a stop attached to the plunger and 
acting on the connecting-bar, which raises the 
frame, carrying the receiver away from the bot 
tle when the cork has been inserted and the 
lever is raised by the spring or Weight sup 
plied for that purpose. 
In the drawing, the letter A. designates a 
base-plate of any desired material, to which 
are attached the uprights B B. To these up 
rights BB the cross-piece C is firmly fastened 
by clamp-screws a a, or any other desirable 
means. My object in fastening the cross 
piece C by clamp-screws, as shown in the 
drawing, is that I can adjust said Cross-piece 
at various heights by loosening the clamp 
screws and sliding said cross-piece to the de 
sired height on the uprights BB. This ar. 
rangement is desirable in order to adapt my 
machine to bottles of various lengths. The 
cross-piece C is preferably made of the form 
shown in the drawing, with two parts or arms, 
one above the other. Each part or armispro 
vided with three holes, through which pass 
the plunger D and the guide-bars b b, which 
bars b b carry the stopper-receiving funnel E. 
and connecting-bar c. By this arrangement 
the plunger D and bars b b descend and ascend 
perpendicularly, and the plunger D is made 
to press perpendicularly downward. 
G. G. are two connecting-rods, which trans 
mit the power applied to the lever F to the 
plunger D. These connecting-rods are hinged 
to the plunger D and the lever F, so that the 
plunger D moves up and down, while the lever 
F describes an arc of a circle. The lever F has 
its fulcrum on the cross-piece C, and the end, 
of the lever extends a littlebeyond the fulcrum, 
so as to afford opportunity for the attachment 
of a spring, H. The object of this spring is to 
raise the handle of the lever F, and thereby to 
lift the plunger D and stopper-receiving fun 
nel away from the bottle. In the example 
shown in the drawing the spring is attached 
to a slide, i, fastened to the upright B by a 
clamp-screw, k, so that by placing the slide on 
different places along the upright B the effi 
ciency of the spring may be varied to suit cir 
CumstanceS. 
E represents the funnel-shaped receiver, in 
which are placed the corks or stoppers. From 
this receiverEextends a guide, K, which reaches 
up to a level with the end of the plunger D when 
the lever F is raised, Fig. 1. This guide K 
leads the stoppers or corks into the receiverE, 
and allows the workman to introduce the corks 
easily and rapidly. The receiver E is pro 
vided at its lower end with a hood, h, which 
prevents the bottle from sliding out from un 
derneath the receiver E when said receiver is 
pressed down on the bottle. In the bottom of 
thereceiverE is a hole, through which the corks 
are pressed by the endf of the plunger. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The bottle is placed on the platform, its place 
being determined by the elevation e. A cork 
is placed in the receiver E, and then the lever 
F is depressed. This causes the stop d to de 
scend, and allows the bars b b and receiver 
E, which have before been held up by said stop 
d on the plunger, to slide down until either the 
hood h rests on the bottle or the connecting 
bar crests on the lower arm of the cross-piece 
C. When the receiver E rests on the neck of 
the bottle its downward motion is arrested, 
the plunger D passes on into the receiver, and 
forces the cork through the opening g into the 
mouth of the bottle. To prevent the plunger 
2 
202,0so 
D from pressing the cork too far into the bot 
tle, I provide a stop, m, on the plunger D. This 
stop strikes against the connecting-bar c, and 
prevents the end fof the plunger from forcing 
the cork farther in the bottle than is desired. 
When the cork is inserted into the bottle the 
lever F is released, and rises under the action 
of the spring H. The plunger D is, by this 
means, also raised, and in sliding up the stop 
or projection d strikes the connecting-bal' c 
and lifts the receiver E away from the bottle. 
The bottle is then taken out, another one intro 
duced, and the operation proceeds as before. 
Of course, the machine can be modified in 
various ways-as, for example, the spring H. 
might be replaced by a weight, or the spring 
might be attached in any other way, so as to 
act in raising the lever F. I do not confine 
myself to the precise construction shown in the 
drawing; but the material parts of the ma 
chine are substantially as above described. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a bottle-stopping ma 
chine, of a stop, m, attached to the plunger D, 
which stop acts on the connecting-bar c, and 
prevents the plunger from descending too far, 
and a spring or weight, H, which raises the 
lever F, all combined and operating substan 
tially as set forth. . 
2. The combination, in a bottle-stopping ma 
chine, of a weight or spring, H, to raise the 
lever F, a stop, m, attached to the plunger D, 
which stop prevents it from descending too far, 
and a stopper-guide, K, to lead the corks into 
the stopper-receiving funnel E, all combined 
and operating substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, in a bottle-stopping ma 
chine, of a sliding frame which allows the 
stopper-receiving funnel to descend until it 
rests on the top of the bottle, a stop, d, at 
tached to the plunger, for lifting the frame, 
and a spring or weight, H, for raising the le. 
ver F, all combined and operating substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand and seal this 14th 
day of February, 1878. 
ALBERT RICHARD WEISS. 
Witnesses: 
L. S. 
W. HAUFF, 
CHAS. WAHLERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202180.txt	H. B. LITTLE, 
Adjustable Centering Square, 
No. 202,180. 
Patented April 9, 1878. 
 
 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE B. LITTLE, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
IMPROVEMENT IN ADJUSTABLE CENTERING-SQUARES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202,180, dated April 9, 1878; application filed 
September 27, 1877. 
on the pivot-pin c, and held to a desired ad 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HoRACE B. LITTLE, of justment by the set-nuti, borne on a screw-pin, 
Hartford, in the county of Hartford and State i, passing through the mortise f", and headed 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new and below the armf. 
useful Improvements pertaining to an Adjust 
This tool has other uses than that of cen 
able Centering-Square, of which the following tering wheels and gears, among which I men 
is a specification, reference being had to the tion, that of a protractor, the arm, f being 
accompanying drawings, where- 
graduated, and the ruler-arm serving as a 
Figure 1 is a top view. Fig. 2 is a bottom guide for, and the extension of, the angle-line. 
view. . 
I claim as my invention 
The pivoted legs a b, the pivoted ruler-arm 
The lgs a and b are held at a desired ad. 
justment by the set-nut d, borne on the screw- h, and the rack or segmental arc f, all com 
pine, rising from the lega, and passing through bined and designed for operation and use sub 
the 
armf, which is fast to the leg b. 
With each different adjustment of the legs 
a and b, the ruler-arm h needs to be adjusted 
so as to sit midway or centrally between the 
two legs. To this end the ruler-arm is pivoted 
t E. sef" in e picircular rack-stantially as shown and described. 
HORACE B. LITTLE. 
Witnesses: 
WM. E. SMONDs, 
ROBT. F. GAYLORD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202280.txt	J. F. MA GUIRE, 
Tuy ere. 
No. 202,280. 
Patented April 9, 1878. 
222222 
 
 
LSLSLSLSLSLSLSLSLSLSLSLSLSLLSLLLeeeSeLe LSL LSLSLSLSLSL 
LSSSBSSSLLL 
2 
2 
2a ? 
2 
??? 
SSS 
N.peers. Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHING fon, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. MAGUIRE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN TUYEREs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202,2S0, dated April 9, 1878; application filed 
July 12, 1877. 
To all ?????, it ??? concer?: 
Beit known that I, JAMEs F. MAGUIRE, of 
New York city, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Tuyeres; 
and that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, sufficient to enable 
those skilled in the art to which the invention 
appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention is particularly applicable to 
tuyeres used in forges; and it relates to a 
means for clearing and removing slag, clinkers, 
dead cinders, &c., from under the fire. 
The invention consists in a novel construc 
tion of portions of the tuyere, and the combi 
nation therewith of a clearing device of novel 
construction, whereby the cinders and other 
refuse are crushed and cleared away from the 
fire, so as to allow free access thereto of the 
blast from the blow-pipe. 
The accompanying drawing illustrates the 
manner of carrying out my invention. 
Figure 1 is a top view of a tuyere embody. 
ing my improvements. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
section taken in the line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
is a vertical section taken in the line y y of 
Fig. 1. 
The tuyere A is made of cast-iron, and is 
preferably of cubic or approximate form, with 
a top plate, E, extending beyond the sides of 
the tuyere in flange-like form, for supporting 
it in place in the forge. On one side of the 
tuyere a series of fins or brackets, B, are pro 
vided, for the purpose hereinafter mentioned. 
The fins are preferably cast in one piece 
with the tuyere, and are here shown as of tri 
angular outline, the upper edge being hori 
Zontal and parallel with the top plate of the 
tuyere, and the remaining portion being in 
clined downward and toward the right-hand 
side, as shown in Fig. 2 of the drawing. 
A shaft, C, passes through the tuyere in a 
direction transverse to the edges of the fins 
B. This shaft carries a series of bars or 
plates, D, which may be of any suitable shape, 
but are here shown as of approximately semi 
circular outline. The bars or plates D are 
preferably made of cast-iron, and may be 
keyed to the shaft C or attached in any suit 
able manner. They are arranged in positions 
between or on either side of the fins or brack 
ets B. There may be any suitable number of 
both the fins or brackets and the bars or 
plates. The drawing represents three of the 
fins B and two of the bars or plates D, arranged 
in Such positions with relation to each other 
that one of the bars or plates works between 
two fins or brackets, and the intermediate 
bracket lies between two of the bars or plates. 
Immediately above the fins or brackets and 
the bars or plates is the opening in the tuyere 
through which the blast from the blower 
reaches the fire in the forge. Said bars or 
plates, arranged as described, serve the double 
purpose of supporting the fire and clearing it 
of refuse, and constitute a revolving or oscil 
lating grate, and also a clearing device, while 
the upper edges of the fins serve to support a 
portion of the fire, cinders, &c. 
When the fire becomes clogged or chocked 
with cinders, clinkers, or other refuse, and it 
becomes necessary to clear out the same, the 
shaft C is rotated or oscillated, so as to cause 
the bars or plates D to work between the fins 
or brackets B, and to cut, crush, loosen, or 
unpack said refuse, and allow it to drop to 
the bottom of the tuyere, from whence it may 
be removed, when desired, by opening the 
sliding door G. If the bars or plates D were 
of rectangular shape, it might be impossible 
at times to move them in both directions, ow 
ing to the packing of the ashes and cinders; 
but by making one edge of each plate with an 
inclined, angular, or curved outline, as shown, 
it is possible on all ordinary occasions to ro 
tate them in the direction indicated by the 
arrow in Fig. 2, and when so rotated they 
operate in connection with the brackets B 
after the manner of a pair of shears, and cut 
or crush the cinders and force them down into 
the tuyere. In such case the horizontal up 
per edge of the stationary fin or bracket acts 
as the lower jaw or blade of the shears, and 
the plate D as the upper jaw or blade. 
When, however, the refuse is packed so 
closely as to prevent the plates from moving 
in the direction of the arrow, they may easily 
be moved in the reverse direction, so as to 
unpack and loosen the refuse and thoroughly 
clear it aWay. 
2 
202,2so 
The nozzle or blow-pipe H is intended to 
enter the tuyere near the top plate thereof, as 
shown in Fig. 2. 
The top plate E of the tuyere has its front 
edge formed with a flange or overlap, f, ex 
tending upward and outward, for the purpose 
of overlapping a metal plate resting on the 
upper portion of the forge. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the tuyere A, con 
structed as described, the shaft C and the 
plates D, of semicircular or approximate form, 
constituting a rotating or oscillating grate, 
and also a clearing device, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. In a tuyere, the combination of the fins 
or brackets B, situated below the top plate, 
and the plates D, constructed substantially 
as described, and operating, in connection with 
each other, after the manner of a pair of 
shears, for cutting, crushing, and clearing 
away the refuse, substantially as set forth. 
JAMES F, MAGUIRE, 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS J. MAGUIRE, 
EDWARD COLLINS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202380.txt	J. F. SEVER ANCE, 
Sash-Holder. 
No. 202,38O. 
Patented April 16, 1878. 
 
A ty. 2. 
------- 
2 
N -- T. 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N. 
 
 
NW 
N. 
NW 
 
N 
s 
WN 
WN 
WN 
NSN 
I'67. j. 
Fly, 4. 
- FB f, N 
22622 esses. 
2f 2^ (A 2/ 
/elev e-7c607 
Vazzles A Severarce 
Ay Ai-ii cezezzey, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. SEVERANCE, OF BROCKTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO 
CHARLEs F. SEVERANCE, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN SASH-HOLDERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202,3S0, dated April 16, 1878; application filed 
August 14, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES F. SEVERANCE, 
of Brockton, in the county of Plymouth of 
the State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Window Sash 
or Screen Supports or Attachments; and do 
hereby declare the same to be described in 
the following specification and represented in 
the accompanying drawings, of which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of a window 
and its screen provided with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the window and 
its lower sash as furnished with supporting 
springs in accordance with my improvement. 
My invention consists in the combination 
of a sash or screen, grooved at or throughout 
both of its vertical edges, with springs, as 
described, secured in the window-frame, and 
arranged there with and with the grooves of 
the sash or screen, substantially and to op 
erate in manner and for the purposes as here 
inafter set forth, and as represented in the 
drawings. 
In carrying out my invention, the sash or 
the screen is to be grooved vertically down 
each of its two opposite edges, and, instead 
of sliding upon tongues projecting from the 
window-frame in the ordinary way, such sash 
or screen is to slide upon wire springs secured 
in the frame and extending into the grooves, 
and serving not only to hold or aid in holding 
the sash or screen in connection with the 
frame, but as guides for it in its vertical 
movements, and as means of supporting it in 
any position. Within the limits of its move 
ment-that is, such springs serve as practi 
cal supports or bearings for the sash or screen. 
In the drawings, A denotes the window 
frame, B and Cits two sashes, and D a woven 
wire screen. A top view of the said screen is 
shown in Fig. 3, by which it will be seen that 
it has grooves in its vertical edges, such 
grooves being shown at at a in said Fig. 3, 
and also in Fig. 1. One of the bearing and 
guide springs is represented in side view in 
Fig. 4. The part b, which is inserted in the 
window-frame, answers as a pivot or journal 
to the spring, whose free end or part centers 
a short recess or groove, d, made in the window 
frame. Four or other suitable number of such 
springs are to be applied to the frame for the 
screen or sash to run on, they bearing at their 
middles against the bottoms of its grooves. 
Each of the uppermost springs may be 
formed as shown, and have both of its ends 
inserted in the window-frame, as it will gen 
erally not be necessary to remove either end 
of the spring from the frame in order to admit 
of the application of the screen to or its re 
moval from the springs. 
To remove the screen from the frame, such 
screen should first be moved upward to its 
highest position. The middle springs should 
next be slipped out of their recesses in the 
frame, and the lowermost springs should also 
be slipped out of their recesses and turned 
downward. The screen is next to be drawn 
downward and forward off the springs. 
The method of restoring it to place in the 
window-frame may be thus described: It is 
to be moved in upon the middle springs, which, 
after it may be in place, are to be turned 
down into their recesses. This having been 
done, the lowermost springs are to be turned 
up into their recesses. 
The advantages of my devices for guiding 
and Supporting the grooved sash or screen 
are, that they confine themselves to it bothin 
damp and dry weather, or under any of the 
usual changes of temperature, and enable it 
to slide freely without sticking, as a screen 
often will when supported by rigid tongues 
extending into its grooves. 
I do not claim springs combined with and 
applied to a sash and window - frame, as 
shown in the United States Patent No. 34,352, 
in which case the springs are attached to and 
move with the sash, whereas in my invention 
the springs are applied directly to the win 
dow-frame, and the sash or frame D is grooved 
to receive and slide upon such springs. 
What I claim as my invention is as fol 
lows: 
In combination with a sash or screen, 
grooved at or throughout both of its vertical 
edges, as explained, springs, as described, se 
cured in the window-frame, and arranged 
there with and with the grooves of the sash. 
or screen, substantially and to operate in 
manner and for the purposes as specified. 
JAMES F. SEVERANCE, 
Witnesses: 
R. H. EDDY, 
JOHN R. SNOW. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202480.txt	2. Sheets-Sheet 1 
No. 2 O2,48O. 
Patented April 16, 1878. 
H. A. STEARNS, 
Ma Chine for Folding Cotton-Batting. 
 
 
 
F. G. 5 
WITNESSES 
NVENTOR, 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, D.c 
H. A. STEARN.S. 
Machine for Folding Cotton-Batting. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2 
No. 2 O2,48O. 
Patented April 16, 1878. 
 
in r C Y 
es 
;4-4 
f 
f f 
S. f 
O 
s 
es 
2 e 
2. Tea ae// 
EINE 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR, 
N. Peters, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washingtoN, p. c. 
m 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY A. STEARNS, OF PAWTUCKET, RHODE ISLAND. 
MPROVEMENT IN MACH NES FOR FOLDING COTTON - BATTING. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202,4s0, dated April 16, 1878; application filed 
May 20, 1876, 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY A. STEARNs, of 
Pawtucket, in the county of Providence and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Machines for 
Folding Cotton Batting or Wadding; and I 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved machine for folding batting or wad 
ding. Fig. 2 is a rear end elevation of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a top view of the same, and 
Fig. 4 is a front elevation. Fig. 5 is a sec 
tional view of the folded batting or Wadding. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
machine for folding cotton batting or wad 
ding longitudinally, as it comes from the card 
ing-machines, so as to compress the same into 
a narrower width for convenience of packing 
and transportation. 
The invention consists in the peculiar ar 
rangement of endless belts and funnel-shaped 
chute, composed of sheet metal or other suita 
ble material having a smooth surface, and 
constructed so as to receive the sheet of cot 
ton batting or wadding of the width as it 
comes from the cards, and fold the same by 
means of the endless belts and the sheet 
metal chute, so as to fold the batting either 
into a double sheet, in which the edges meet 
in the center, or into a triple sheet, present 
ing one of the edges. 
In the drawings, a is the delivery-roll, 
which may form the end roll of an endless 
apron, by which the batting or wadding is 
conveyed from the carding to the folding ma 
chine. 
b represents the sheet of batting. c and 
d are endless belts or aprons, and E is the 
fis the sheet-metal chute. g g are the com 
pressing-rolls. 
h is a sheet-metal fender to separate the end 
less belts c and d, and keep them from inter 
fering one with the other. 
ii are the bands or belts by which the mo. 
tion is transmitted to the endless aprons c 
and d. 
k k are two gears placed oh the rollers g 
g, to insure uniform motion of the same. 
In operation, when the Wadding or batting 
is to be folded longitudinally into three thick 
nesses, the guide-board E is arranged so 
that at its widest part it is as wide as the 
Web or sheet of cotton - batting as it comes 
from the carding-machine, and made taper 
ing so that its other end is of one-third the 
width of the batting. As the sheet of bat 
ting advances over the guide-board E the 
edges will hang down over the tapering sides 
of the guide-board, and be taken up by the 
endless belts c and d, and carried under the 
same, so that at the end of the guide-board 
the central one-third of the width of the bat 
ting will be on the board E, and one-third on 
each side be on each of the endless belts c 
and d, one below the other, as is shown in 
Fig. 5. 
The so-folded batting now passes through 
the chutef, in which the folding is completed, 
and thence between the rolls gg, where the 
folded Wadding or batting is compressed suf. 
ficiently for packing and transportation, as 
Well as use. 
By these means, the cotton batting or Wad 
ding is put in a convenient form for packing 
and transportation. 
When it is desirable to have the cotton bat 
ting or Wadding for use thinner than in its 
folded condition, the edges may very readily 
be turned back, so as to assume its original 
Width and thickness, 
By thus automatically folding the sheet of 
cotton batting or Wadding, as it is delivered 
from the carding-machine, and turning the 
edges inward, about one-half the labor re- . 
quired in packing is saved. The sheets can 
be delivered cut into any desired length, and 
packed or rolled. 
The value of the cotton batting is increased 
not only on account of its better and more 
marketable appearance, but as it can be un 
folded without injury, there is less waste. 
Having thus described my invention, Iclaim 
guide-board. 
v 
- 
- 
- 
1. In a machine for folding cotton batting rollers g g, substantially as described. 
2 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat- or wadding, the combination, with the guide 
ent- 
E and endless belts, ed., of the chute f and 
or Wadding, the combination of the guide E, 
the endless belts c and d, and chute far- 
ranged and operating substantially as and fo 
the purpose set forth. 
2. In a machine for folding cotton batting 
HENRY A. STEARNS. 
202,4so 
Witnesses: 
JoSEPH. A. MILLER, 
HORACE. F. HORTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202580.txt	R. B. PER, KINS, 
Lamp-Burner. 
N 
No. 202,580. 
Patented April 16, 1878. 
Mzz A. A. zzs 
2,727, 2-Yr 
 
N.PEERs, Photo-LTHogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUSSELL B. PERKINS, OF MERIDEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO E. MILLER 
& CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN LAMP BURNERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202,5so, dated April 16, 1878; application filed 
February 18, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RUSSELL B. PERKINS, 
of Meriden, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new Im 
provement in Lamp-Burners; and I do here 
by declare the following, when taken in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings and 
the letters of reference marked thereon, to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
which said drawings constitute part of this 
specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1, longitudinal section, enlarged; 
Figs. 2 and 3, detached parts. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in lamp-burners, and particularly to that class 
in which the chimney-rest and deflector are 
hinged to the body of the burner, so that, 
without removal of the chimney, the wick may 
be exposed for trimming or lighting; and the 
invention consists in the method of forming 
the hinge, as more fully hereinafter described, 
and particularly recited in the claims. 
A is the base of the burner, extending up 
and expanding into the body B, which is per 
forated in the usual manner; C, the wick-tube; 
ID, the wick-adjuster; E, the deflector; F, the 
chimney-holder, all of substantially usual form. 
To construct the hinge, a lip, a projects from 
one side of the body, and is turned down nearly 
at right angles thereto, and at each end of 
this lip one part, d, of the knuckle is formed 
by striking it upward in tubular shape, as seen 
in Fig. 2, leaving a space between the said two 
parts. The chimney-rest has a corresponding 
knuckle, e, formed on its under side by strik 
ing down from above, as seen in Fig. 3. This 
knuckle e fitting between the two parts did 
on the body, and the two being set together, 
the wire pintle f is passed through between 
the knuckles d from below and through the 
part e, thus completing the hinge. The lip a 
forms a rest or stop to support the chimney 
and deflector when turned away, as seen in 
broken lines, Fig. 1. 
This construction makes the hinge complete 
without solder, and possessing all the advan 
tages of a pintle-hinge, in which the pintle is 
entirely inclosed by bending the metal of the 
hinged plates around it, and at very much less 
cost than the independent hinge attached to 
the respective parts. 
I do not wish to be understood as broadly 
claiming a hinged burner in which the parts 
of the hinge are made respectively from the 
body and chimney-holder, as such, I am aware, 
is not new; but in such construction the joints 
have been made by forming tongues on the 
respective parts and bending those tongues 
around the pintle, in which case the ends so 
bent around must either be soldered, or the 
metal must be strong enough to resist the 
strain upon the hinge tending to open the 
joint, this invention differing from such pre 
vious construction essentially in the fact that 
the knuckles or parts of the joint are formed 
by striking the metal so as to make loops on 
the one part to extend between the loops on 
the other part, and then the pintle passed 
under the loops of one part and over the loops 
of the other completes the hinge, and without 
fully inclosing the pintle. 
I claim 
1. In a lamp-burner, substantially such as 
described, the hinge constructed by knuckles 
formed by striking up from the body, an in 
termediate knuckle struck down from the 
chimney-holder, and a wire pintle through be 
tween the said knuckles, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a lamp-burner, substantially such as 
described, the hinge constructed by knuckles 
formed by striking up from the body, an in 
termediate knuckle struck down from the 
chimney-holder, and a wire pintle through the 
said knuckles, and a stop, a, on the body out 
side the hinge, substantially as described. 
RUSSELL B. PERKINS, 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD MILLER, Jr., 
ELLIS B. BAKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202680.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN TRENT, OF MAYO FORGE, VIRGINLA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN COMPOST ONS FOR TREATING TOBACCO. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202,650, dated April 23, 1878; application filed 
May 4, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN TRENT, of Mayo 
Forge, in the county of Patrick and State of 
Virginia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Composition of Matter 
for Treating and Curing Tobacco; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, which 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to a new and useful 
composition of matter for treating and curing 
tobacco; and it consists of the following in 
gredients, in about the proportions specified: 
One to three pounds of brimstone, one to two 
pounds of soda, half-pound of copperas; the 
Whole pulverized and thoroughly mixed to 
gether, with a sufficient quantity of wheat 
bran to lighten the mass up and make it burn 
freely. 
The manner in which this composition is 
used for curing the tobacco-leaf is by subject 
ing the leaves in a tight apartment to the 
fumes and gases generated from this compo 
sition, which composition is caused to burn in 
the apartment containing the tobacco. 
In order to insure success with the use of 
this composition, I will proceed to describe in 
detail the treatment tobacco should receive if 
it is desired to effectually cure the same, and 
give to it a beautiful fine yellow color, thus en 
abling persons to realize a larger profit than 
they would have realized on their crops had 
it been treated in the ordinary way of treat 
ing tobacco, the tobacco also being cured in 
a quicker and more thorough manner than or 
dinarily. 
To treat and cure tobacco according to my 
invention I proceed as follows: 
All bruising of the leaves should be avoided 
as much as possible. In hanging or suspend 
ing it in the houses the sticks upon which the 
tobacco is strung should be separate and dis 
tinct, not less than one foot apart. The houses 
should be as tight as possible and uniform in 
size, and each separate class or grade of to 
bacco should be assigned or placed in sepa 
rate houses-that is to say, put yellow tobacco 
from the patch in a house to itself, large ripe 
spotted tobacco in anotherhouse, large coarse 
heavy green tobacco in another house, and 
green pigtail in another house-each to itself 
and distinct. The reason of thus separating 
the different grades is because different de 
grees and durations of heat are necessary for 
each separate grade of tobacco, as follows: 
For ripe yellow tobacco from the patch, the 
heat should be raised to 1000 under it, and 
kept at that heat for forty-two hours; then 
raise to 1050 for three hours; then raise to 
1100, and keep it up for five hours. For 
large ripe sp9tted tobacco, raise a heat of 950 
under it, and keep that heat for thirty-eight 
hours; then raise to 1000 for ten hours; then 
raise to 1050 for three hours; then raise to 
1100, and keep it up to these figures for five 
hours. For large heavy green tobacco, raise 
a heat of 900 under it, and keep that heat for 
thirty hours; then raise to 950 for ten hours; 
then raise for ten hours to 1000; then raise 
to 1050 for three hours; then raise to 1100 for 
five hours. For green pigtail tobacco, raise 
a heat of 850 degrees, and keep that heat for 
twenty-four hours; then raise to 90o for six 
hours; then raise to 950 for ten hours; then 
raise to 1000 for twelve hours; then raise to 
1050 for three hours; then raise to 1100 for 
five hours. 
During the three hours process at 1050 on 
each grade of tobacco one pound of brimstone 
and one pound of soda, mixed with wheat-bran, 
well pulverized together, is to be burned on 
several fires placed beneath the tobacco-that 
is to say, the above quantity to be divided 
among the several fires, and not that quantity 
on each fire. 
About twenty small fires to every twenty 
square feet of house should be made. If the 
house is larger than twenty feet square the 
amount of ingredients should be increased 
in proportion, and the number of fires also 
increased. If smaller, decrease the quantity 
and fires in the same ratio. 
During the five hours process at 1100 on 
each grade of tobacco one pound of brimstone 
and one pound of soda, mixed with wheat-bran, 
the same amount as used for the 1059, must 
be used in the same way as above. When 
through with the five hours' process on each 
grade the heat should be raised to 1150 on 
each grade for two hours; then raise to 1200 
for five hours. During the five hours process 
 
2 
202,6S0 
at 1200 on each grade three pounds of brim 
stone, two pounds of soda, half pound of cop 
peras, pulverized together, with wheat-bran, 
must be used on each fire in the same manner 
as the first two amounts were used. The 
whole quantity should be used at once. When 
through with the five hours' process at 1200 
raise for two hours to 1250; for two hours 
1300; for two hours 1400; for two hours 1500; 
for two hours 1650, which heat keep until 
stem and stock are perfectly and thoroughly 
cured. 
In starting the fires commence at the rear 
of the house, and work toward the door; then 
when all is ignited close up tight. 
The object in using the foregoing-mentioned 
ingredients is to extract the sweat from the 
tobacco, keep it in a healthy and drying con 
dition, and to whiten the tobacco, and give it 
a beautiful face, also an agreeable taste and 
perfume. 
Instead of using wheat-bran, any other simi 
lar substance may be substituted in place 
thereof, this ingredient in my composition 
forming no vital part thereof. 
The copperas is used for the purpose of 
preventing fermentation and consequent de 
cay. It also improves the flavor, and for this 
and the purpose previously referred to it is 
very generally employed in solution with wa 
ter. I think that it acts, in combination with 
the other ingredients, more efficiently, and 
that it more thoroughly permeates the sub 
stance of the tobacco when volatilized in this 
way; and being thus incorporated with the 
tobacco during the process of drying, any sub 
sequent drying is rendered unnecessary. 
The design of employing the soda is in part 
to assist the bleaching properties of the sul 
- 
phurous-acid gas generated by the burning 
brimstone, and, further, to neutralize any free 
acid which might otherwise remain in the to 
bacco after the conclusion of the process. 
The brimstone, soda, and copperas in a pull 
verized or comminuted state are mixed with the 
bran or strewed on top of the same, and equal 
quantities of the compound are placed on each 
of the fires kindled within the drying-house. 
My experiments have satisfied me that the 
ingredients named in about the proportions 
above stated act more efficaciously and pro 
duce a better result when employed together 
in the manner described than any other com 
bination of ingredients or composition of which 
I am aware. 
I am aware that tobacco has before been 
treated or subjected while in a moist or damp 
state to the action of sulphurous-acid gas; 
also, that charcoal has been mixed and burned 
together with sulphur in treating tobacco; 
also, that liquid ammonia has been used ill 
connection with sulphurous-acid gas to neu 
tralize any free sulphurous-acid gas that may 
remain in the tobacco. I therefore lay no 
claim to this. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The composition for curing tobacco, consist 
ing of brimstone, soda, copperas, and wheat 
bran, in about the proportions specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I hereby affix my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
- 
JOHN TRENT. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. HAMILTON JOHNSON, 
WM. H. BRERETON. 
S. 
s' 
W 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202780.txt	J. H. BARR, 
Harrow. 
No. 202,780. 
Patented April 23, 1878. 
22 H II 
42esa 
Z727/eva doz". 
p 
p 
Ay ex44 a? 
0. 
r 
12Aa 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. BARR, OF REDMON, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN HARRows. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202, S0, dated April 23, 1878; application filed 
February 11, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
metal, and welded at a right angle to the 
round front brace B. To prevent the staples 
Beit known that I, JoHN H. BARR, of Red 
mon, in the county of Edgar and State of Illi 
b' b from slipping on this bar or brace, the 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
latter has two annular shoulders, dd, secured 
Improvements in Harrows; and I do hereby 
upon it, each provided with a projecting lug 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
or ear, e, which will control lateral motion. 
exact description thereof, which will enable 
The end of handle E is secured to the bend of 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tongue F by a bolt, f, as shown. 
tains to make and use the same, reference 
Two of these harrows make a set or gang, 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and are for that purpose united by a cross 
which form a part of this specification, and 
beam, G, as shown in Fig. 1. Upon each end 
of this beam is secured an adjustable plate or 
in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan of my improved double 
bearing, g, which may be adjusted in proper 
harrow; and Fig. 2 is a perspective of one of 
position upon the beam by one or more set 
screws, h. This bearing-plate g is bent at a 
the harrows, detached. 
right angle, the projecting part g being 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in both the figures. 
rounded, and terminating in an eye or bolt 
My invention relates more particularly to 
hole, through which a pin, k, may be inserted. 
corn-harrows, used in sets or gangs of two, 
Upon the forward end of each of the tongues 
F is firmly secured a plate, H, the ends of 
but which may be used also in combination 
with cultivators for the purpose of pulveriz 
which are bent at right angles, so as to form 
ing the soil; and it consists in an umproved 
two ears, which are perforated to admit of the 
construction and combination of parts of a 
insertion of the rounded part g. 
It follows 
that, by shifting the position of plates g g upon 
harrow of this class, substantially as herein 
after more fully set forth, and pointed out in 
the cross-piece G., (by means of the bolts or 
the claims. 
screws h,) the distance between the harrows 
may be regulated; while by rounding the part 
In the drawing, A A is the frame, which 
g", upon which the harrow-tongues are hung, 
consists, in each single harrow, of two pieces, 
rabbeted and bolted together at a to form a 
these (the tongues and their harrows) will 
have a free rocking or oscillating motion upon 
sharp angle, as shown. Secured in these two 
pieces are the harrow-teeth bb, which may be 
the part g', so as to conform readily to undu 
lations in the ground. 
of any suitable shape and construction. The 
pieces A A are braced and united together 
i is a clevis, fastened to the middle of beam 
by a round bar, B, the ends of which rest in 
G, to which the double-tree is secured in the 
staples b'b', one in each piece, and also by a 
usual manner. 
bar, C, made in two pieces, one part, C, being 
The advantages of this harrow are that it 
provided with a hole and set-screw, while the 
is perfectly controllable when used for har 
other part, C', has a slot, through which the 
rowing corn. Each harrow being entirely in 
dependent of the other in the same gang, it 
shank of the set-screw passes, the two pieces 
C and C thus forming an extension rod or 
will readily pass over or around any rocks or 
bar, which may be regulated or adjusted so 
stubs that are in the way, and may be used on 
any kind of rough or uneven ground. 
as to keep the rear part of frame A A the 
By detaching the harrows from the cross 
proper distance apart. DD are braces, which 
beam, they may, if desired, be used singly; 
pass from the frame (one on each side) up to 
and, by adjusting the extension-plates CC in 
the handle E, to which their upper ends are 
the manner described, the frame A. A may be 
secured, one on each side, by a bolt, c. It 
expanded or contracted, to harrow coarse or 
will thus be seen that the extension-brace C 
fine, according to the nature of the soil. 
C and the rods or braces DD form a trian 
My improved harrow may readily be at 
gle, the apex of which is at the point where 
the parts D ID are united to the handle. F is 
tached to and used in combination with a 
the beam or tongue, made, preferably, of cultivator, as it is light of draft and easily 
 
 
2 
. 
. 
. 
... 
. . 
202, so 
adjusted, so as to pulverize the soil after the 
plows have gone over it. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. In combination with the adjustable V 
shaped harrow-frame AA, armed with teeth 
b, and having the staples or keepers b' b', 
the curved bar B, having annular shoul 
ders did and tongue F, extension-plates C C, 
braces D D, and handle E the latter being 
pivoted adjustably to the braces ID ID at e 
and to the bend of tongue Fatf, substantially 
as and for the purpose herein shown and de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with the cross-bar G, 
having clevisi, of the adjustable bracket-plates 
g g g g and tongues F, having plates H, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose herein shown 
and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN HENRY BARR, 
Witnesses: 
S. W. CALVIN, 
JACKSON YOUNG. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202880.txt	A. G., SMYTH, 
Device for Converting Motion. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 202,88O. 
Patented April 23, 1878. 
Wysses 
\\\ wisy. 
 
%242,4- 
A. G. S MYTH. 
Device for Converting Motion. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 202,88O. 
 
Patented April 23, 1878. 
 
 
 
 
 
A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
%2 
Z2 2 
W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
osso SARR2RRs 
 
 
 
-%.4%- 
N, PETERs, FHoro-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, d C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABSALOM. G. SMYTH, OF HAMILTON, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN DEVICES FOR CONVERTING MOTION. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202, SS0, dated April 23, 1878; application filed 
July 14, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ABSALOM GRIFFIN 
SMYTH, of the city of Hamilton, in the county 
of Wentworth, in the Province of Ontario, Can 
ada, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Devices for Converting Recipro 
cating Motion into Rotary; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the construction and Op 
eration of the same. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
simple, more effective, and comparatively in 
expensive device for driving various machines 
or parts of machinery that require reciprocat 
ing motion to be converted into rotary. It 
transmits power continuously at What may 
be called the best points of the crank. Conse 
quently there is no dead-center to Overcome, 
and for some purposes the fly-Wheel may be 
dispensed with. It can be applied to ma 
chines running with treadles, and the operator 
has better control of the machine with the foot, 
so far as applying power is concerned, Which 
is a great advantage in sewing-machines, and 
easily applied by connecting the rack With the 
treadle. 
In steam-engines the rack and piston-rod 
may consist of one piece, one end being at 
tached direct to the piston inside of the cylin 
der, which will dispense with the cross-head, 
slides, and connecting-rods, the motive power 
acting in a direct line to the crank-leverage, 
which is not the case when transmitted through 
the connecting-rod. 
The device consists in the combination of 
cog or gearwheels, two having locking devices; 
also, a rack having cogs cut upon its two sides, 
facing opposite directions, for driving the 
Wheels. 
By reference to the accompanying drawings 
it will be seen that Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the device represented as attached for 
convenience to a block. Fig. 2 is a side view 
of the lock cogged pulleys with flanges de 
tached, also the rack for operating them, hav 
ing one of its side pieces removed. Fig. 3 
represents a section of the same. Fig. 4 rep 
resents a section through the center of drive 
wheel. Fig. 5 shows the block to which the 
gears are attached, having the holes placed in 
a directline. Fig.6 represents the same block 
in a crooked form, with the holes placed out of 
line. Fig. 7 is an end view of shaft G from 
the inner end. Figs. 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 rep 
resent some of the modifications set forth in 
the specification. 
A is the frame-work, which may be of any 
suitable form and strength, according to the 
amount of power required to be employed. 
B is a fly or drive wheel, provided with a 
groove-pulley, C, for transmitting power by 
belt, and upon the opposite side is attached a 
gear-wheel, D, said fly-wheel being mounted 
on the spindle or pin E, and revolving loosely 
thereon, one end of said pin being securely 
attached to the frame-work. 
F F are two gear-wheels, each fastened on 
the ends of their respective shafts G. G. With 
screw-pins, and so arranged as to mesh into 
the gear-wheel D, and act, in connection with 
the lock-wheels J J, to convey power alter 
nately to wheel D. 
The two shafts G. G. are held in position by 
the block I. Said block, in light-running ma 
chinery, may be attached to one end of pin E, 
which carries the fly or drive wheel, in order 
that the same shall be retained in position 
while sustaining the necessary wheels to form 
a connection between the rack N and fly or 
drive wheel for converting motion. 
Upon the outer ends of the two shafts G. G. 
are fitted two gear-wheels, JJ, one on each, 
to revolve thereon, and are retained there 
upon one side by the flanges H. H., attached 
or formed on the ends of said shafts, the 
other side being retained by the block I. 
These portions of the shafts upon which JJ 
are placed are made larger in diameter than 
the parts that pass through the block I, there 
by forming a shoulder, which prevents the said 
wheels from being pressed tightly between 
block I and flanges H. H.; also, it gives more 
surface for the locking device to act upon. 
The said two gear-wheels J J each contain a 
recess, K, to receive rollers L L and springs 
MM. The bottoms of said recesses are circular 
in form, to correspond with the shaft, and, be 
ing slightly drawn in toward the shaft at one 
end, will cause the roller, when pushed in one 
direction, to wedge in between the shaft and 
 
2 
202, SS0 
the bottom of the recess, thereby locking the 
gear-wheels fast to the shaft, and when pushed 
in the opposite direction it will loosen and 
allow the gear-wheel to revolve again upon 
its shaft. It will be observed that the length 
of rollers should be slightly less than the 
thickness of wheels J J, and placed length 
Wise of the shaft. 
Flat springs are used, nearly the width of 
the thickness of gear-wheels in which they 
are placed, and are bent U-shaped, leaving 
one prong longer than the other, and placed 
in the deepest end of recess, the upper end 
being next to the shaft with short prong bear 
ing against the roller, which will prevent the 
shaft from interfering with the flexibility of 
the spring, thereby keeping the roller in posi 
tion, so that when the gear-wheel is rotated 
in one direction it will in mediately lock fast 
to the shaft, and a reverse movement of the 
Wheel will cause the roller to loosen itself and 
allow the gear-wheel to revolve on its shaft, 
thereby making the locking device automatic. 
Annular projections are formed on the block 
I and flanges II II, to diminish the frietion 
surfaces, as shown by letters Sh. A single 
stem-rack.N., having cogs upon two sides, facing 
opposite directions, is used to rotate back and 
forth the lock-wheels JJ, which are placed 
facing each other, and at a proper distance 
apart to receive said rack between then, so 
that the cogs of rack and cog-wheels mesh 
into each other. 
Placing the two lock gear-wheels on sepa 
rate shafts provides for the use of this con 
struction of rack, which is simple and can 
be produced at small cost, is very effective 
and durable for rotating simultaneously the 
two lock gear-wheels in opposite directions, 
thereby causing power to be transmitted alter. 
nately through them, thence through the 
shafts G G and gear-wheels F F, which has 
the effect of transmitting continuous power to 
the gear-wheel I); and any kind of motive 
power being applied to the rack N, so as to 
give it a reciprocating movement, will impart 
to the fly or drive wheel B a continuous rotary 
motion in one direction. 
The rack is provided with two thin metal 
pieces, PI, which are about the same length 
as the rows of cogs, and are attaclhed to the 
sides of the toothed end of the rack, and so 
fitted that the edges of said pieces extend to 
the face end of the cogs, thereby serving as 
guides, for the purpose of keeping the said 
rack in position while moving back and forth 
between the two gear-wheels J. J. Annular 
recesses Rare formed upon the sides and outer 
circumference of the lock gear-wheels, in which 
the guides or sides of rack travel, which, if 
properly fitted, will govern the depth that the 
cogs mesh into each other, also allow the 
gear-wheels J J to run closer to block I, and 
provide for a difference between the width of 
cogs and length of rollers used for locking 
device, which gives more surface to retain the 
lock gear-wheels fast to their respective shafts, 
which, in some cases, is of advantage. 
The block I, in some cases, may be made 
straight, but in others requires to be crooked 
sufficient that gear-wheels F may be larger 
in diameter than the gear-wheel D, in order 
to increase the speed of the fly-wheel with 
out increasing the speed of the rack, and per 
mit the two lock gear-wheels to be of suita 
ble diameter to give desirable leverage in 
transmitting the power from rack N, and at 
the same time bring them sufficiently near 
each other to receive between them a light 
constructed rack to rotate them; but when 
not desirable to make such increase of speed, 
the gear-wheels IF F and D may be of one di 
ameter, which will permit the block I to be a 
straight piece, as shown in Fig. 5. 
Slight modifications of the device may be 
described as follows: In place of having the 
fly-wheel revolve loosely upon a pin, it may 
be mounted upon a shaft, and made fast there 
to, and the gear-wheel Dattached to the same 
shaft, two ordinary bed-pieces or portions of 
a frame being employed to support the Same; 
and in place of the block I, one or both of 
said pieces may be so formed as to hold in 
position the shafts G. G, as shown in Fig. 8. 
Also, in place of the recesses K being formed 
in the lock-wheels JJ, they may be made in 
the shafts G G, so that the rollers used for 
locking device may having a bearing against 
the inner surface of said wheels that travel 
in contact with their (as shown in Fig. 10) re 
spective shafts. 
In place of the rack N being worked be 
tween lock-wheels J J, the various wheels 
may be so arranged that it can be used be 
tween gear-wheels FF, or between one of the 
lock-wheels and one of the other gear-wheels, 
to rotate them back and forth. 
In place of both shafts G. Gbeing employed, 
only one may be used by placing one of the 
lock-wheels J upon the drive-wheel, or upon 
its shaft, as shown in Fig.11, in which case 
only one of the gear-wheels F will be required, 
and only a part of the block I needed to sup 
port the one shaft or pin, as shown in Fig.11. 
Another change may be made, and do away 
with both shafts G. G., by forming a shank 
On and projecting from one side of gear 
wheels FF, as shown by t in Fig. 11, one on 
each, of suitable size to receive lock-wheels 
JJ, the locking device having a bearing on 
said shank, and placing the wheels FF on sep 
arate pins, so as to revolve on them, which 
may be attaclhed to any convenient part of a 
frame-work, or to a bed-piece, which carries 
the shaft of fly or drive wheel; and in some 
cases, where only one of the wheels F is used, 
it may be placed on a pin formed on or at 
tached to block I, as shown at Fig.11. 
And be it understood that in all these modi 
fications the rack N can be used in the same 
form and manner, and with the same results 
as regards converting reciprocating motion 
 
202, SS0 
3 
into rotary, which, in some kinds of machin 
ery, has its advantages; for the said rack N, 
working between two gear-wheels, admits of 
its having a vibrating reciprocating move 
ment, as well as rectilinear reciprocating. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In combination with the reciprocating 
rack-bar N, the two wheels J J gearing with 
said bar, mounted upon the shafts G-G, and 
each provided with rolling locks L, placed in 
the eccentric recess K, and the spring M, as 
set forth and described. 
2. The block I, provided with bearings for 
the two shafts G-G, whereon are mounted the 
wheels F and J, supported by the spindle E 
of the wheel B, as set forth. 
3. The wheel B, mounted upon the spindle 
E, and provided with the pinion D, combined 
with the wheels F and shafts G, coupled as 
shown and described, and the reciprocating 
rack-bar N, whereby said wheels FF are al 
ternately rotated, and their motion commu 
nicated to said wheel B, as described. 
4. The wheel J, turning upon the shaft G, 
and provided with the eccentric recess K, com 
bined with the roller L and flat U-shaped 
spring, as shown and described. 
5. The wheel J, provided with the eccentric 
recess K, and the roller L placed therein,com 
bined with the U-shaped spring M, one blade 
of which is longer than the other, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
6. The wheel J, combined with the shaft G, 
constructed with a head, H, and shoulder h. 
below said head, and the block I, provided with 
the annular shoulders S, for the purpose of re 
ducing friction, as set forth. 
ABSALOM GRIFFIN SMYTH. 
In presence of - 
WM. BRUCE, 
A. KINGDON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US202980.txt	H. B. BEACH, 
I0e Pitcher. 
No. 202,980. 
Patented April 30, 1878. 
WITNESSES: 
C-6. 6. 
a 's 
NETERS, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, o c 
 
INVENTOR: 
d2% 
BY 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY B. BEACH, OF WEST MERIDEN, CONNECTICUT. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CE PITCHERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 202,950, dated April 30, 1878; application filed 
March 25, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY B. BEACH, of 
West Meriden, in the county of New Haven 
and State of Connecticut, have invented a 
new and Improved Ice-Pitcher, of which the 
following is a specification: 
The accompanying drawing represents a 
vertical central section of my improved ice 
pitcher, 
The object of this invention is to furnish an 
improved ice-pitcher with a china, glass, or 
otherinterior lining or bowl, which is strength 
ened in such a manner that it is not liable to 
be cracked by the dropping of lumps of ice 
into the pitcher, nor broken on being dropped. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the drawing, and then pointed 
out in the claim. 
Referring to the drawing, A represents the 
interior lining or bowl of my inproved ice 
pitcher, which bowl is made of china, glass, or 
other suitable material, and secured in suita 
ble manner to the top rim B, provided with 
the usual spout and lid. When the bowl is 
made of china, it may be glazed at the out 
side or not, as desired, and covered by a me 
talliclayer, C, for the purpose of being strength 
ened and protected against being Cracked by 
the ice from the inside or broken by being 
dropped. The metallic layer is tightly spun 
over the bowl, with or without the use of 
cement, according as a glazed or unglazed 
outer surface of the bowl is used. The 
tightly-fitting metallic covering C adds to the 
strength of the inside lining, and renders the 
same almost indestructible to the common 
agencies which have heretofore caused such 
annoyance in the use of the porcelain or glass 
lined ice-pitcher. To the bottom of the metallic 
covering of the bowl is soldered a downward 
projecting center-screw, a, that passes through 
a central perforation of the base D of the 
pitcher. 
A fastening-screw, b, binds tightly on the 
base, and holds the body rigidly in position 
on the top rim, furnishing an ice-pitcher of 
superior strength, that is not as liable to 
sweating as the common ice-pitchers, on ac 
count of the strengthening layer of metal, 
which does not admit of as great a difference 
of temperature between the interior and ex 
terior walls of the pitcher, while furnishing 
with the body the same non-conducting air 
space around the bowl. 
I am aware that a spun interior lining for 
pitchers and a screw-bolt with nut for con 
necting the lining with the body are not new; 
but 
What I claim is 
The combination of the inner lining, the 
spun cover, and the body of the pitcher, the 
two latter connected by screw-bolt and nut, 
as shown and described. 
HENRY B. BEACH, 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203080.txt	A. R. SHERMAN. 
Book-Ra, Ok. 
No. 203, O8O, 
Patented April 3O, 1878. 
 
 
 
WITNESSES : 
2-- 12-62-24. 
64-ycle 
 
INVENTOR: 
6.2% 
BY role 
ATTORNEYs, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT R. SHERMAN, OF NATICK, REODE ISLAND. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BOOK-RACKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203,0s0, dated April 30, 1878; application filed 
March 16, 1878. 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT R. SHERMAN, 
of Natick, in the county of Kent and State 
of Rhode Island, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Book-Racks, of which 
the following is a specification: 
Figure 1 is a front view of my improved 
book-rack. Fig. 2 is a side view of the same, 
partly in Section to show the construction. 
Fig. 3 is a detail top view of one end of the 
bottom rail and its bracket. Fig. 4 is a de 
tail cross-section of the back cushion. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. . 
The object of this invention is to furnish an 
improved book-rack for church-pews, which 
shall be so constructed as to hold the books 
against the back of the pew, and at the same 
time hold them shut, which will also hold small 
books in place, and which shall be simple in 
construction and convenient in use. 
A represents the shelf upon which the books 
stand, and to the upper side of which is at 
tached a cushion,B, of felt covered with velvet, 
plush, or other suitable material, to prevent 
noise when the books are placed in the rack, 
and to prevent the edges of the books from 
being Worn. The ends of the shelf A are at 
tached to two brackets, C, the bases of which 
fit and slide upon the lower parts of the base 
plates D, to which they are secured by the 
clamping - Screws E. The screws E pass 
through slots in the lower parts of the plates 
D, so that, by loosening the said screwsE, the 
shelf A may be lowered or raised, according 
as longer or shorter books are to be used in 
the rack. Upon the upper side of the brack 
ets C are formed sockets F, to receive the ends 
of the rod G, the end parts of which are bent 
inward at right angles, and are secured ad 
justably in the said sockets F by the set-screws 
H. The rod G is covered with the material 
with which the rackis upholstered;is designed 
to adapt the rack to hold small books, and 
may be adjusted closer to or farther from the 
back of the pew, according to the size of the 
said Small books. The rod G is secured in 
the sockets F by set-screws H, passing in 
through the sides of the said sockets and 
pressing against the said rod. Upon the up 
per part of the base-plates D are formed sock 
ets I, in which are placed pins J, which are 
secured in place by the spiral springs K, the 
outer ends of which rest against a shoulder 
or flange formed upon the inner surface of the 
sockets I, and their inner ends rest against 
the heads of screws, screwed into the inner 
ends of the said pins J. The outer ends of 
the pins J have eyes formed in them to re 
ceive and hold the ends of the rod L, which 
eyes may be made in the form of hands, as 
shown in the drawings, or of any other orna 
mental shape. The rod L is designed to be 
covered with the same material as is used in 
upholstering the rest of the rack. 
By this construction the rod L. has a recip 
rocating movement, and will adapt itself au 
tomatically to the size of the books. 
The eyes of the holders or pins Jhave shoul 
ders formed upon their lower sides to strike 
against the rubber heads of the stop-pins M, 
which are placed in sockets N, formed upon 
the lower sides of the sockets I, and which 
are secured adjustably in the said sockets N 
by set-screws O, passing in through the sides 
of the said sockets N. 
The stops M are designed to prevent noise 
When the books are removed and the rod L. 
moves inward, and also to limit the inward 
movement of the said rod L, so that space 
may be left between it and the pew-back to 
enable the books to be readily inserted with 
out its being necessary to draw out the said 
rod L with one hand while inserting a book 
with the other hand. 
Against the back of the pew is placed a 
cushion, PQR, the ends of which are inserted 
beneath, and are held by, the upper parts of 
the base-plates D. The back of the cushion 
is a metallic plate, P, the side edges of which 
are bent over forward, and are scalloped or 
otherwise ornamented; and in the grooves thus 
formed are inserted the edges of a rubber 
plate, Q, and a cover, R., of the material used 
for upholstering the racks. The strips QR 
are made wider than the space between the 
turned-over edges of the plate P, so that the 
said strips QR may be convexed or arched, 
as shown in Fig. 4, and thus adapted to serve 
as a cushion. The turned-over edges of the 
plate P are then closed down upon the edges 
of the strips Q R, so as to hold them securely. 
 
203,0so 
Having thus described my invention,I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The book-rack consisting, essentially, of 
the reciprocating rod Li, the pins J, the sock 
ets I, and the plates D, constructed and ar 
ranged substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination of the reciprocating rod 
Li, the holders J, and the spiral springs K 
with the sockets Iformed upon the base-plates 
D of a book-rack, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
3. The combination of the adjustable stops 
M with the movable holding-rod of a book 
rack, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed. 
4. The combination of the adjustable rod G. 
with the shelf A and the base-plates D of the 
rack, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed. 
5. The cushion formed by the combination 
with each other of the rubber strip Q, the 
covering-strip R, and the metallic plate P, 
having its side edges turned over to clasp the 
edges of the said strips. QR, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
ALBERT R. SHERMAN. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS H. EATON, 
- ALONZO L. J.ENKS. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203180.txt	Floating Cover for Extract-Receivers. 
J. MILLER, 
No. 2O3, 18O. 
Patented April 30, 1878. 
CES 
YC 
  
 
 
Vim e 
WITNESSEs. 
INVENTOR: 
TERs, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D.c. - 
L 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JONATHAN MILLER, OF HIMROD's, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO PRESSURE 
EXTRACT COMPANY, OF TRENTON, NEW JERSEY. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FLOATING COVERS FOR EXTRACT RECEIVERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203, S0, dated April 30, 1878; application filed 
October 27, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoNATEAN MILLER, of 
Himrod's, in the county of Yates and State of 
New York, have invented a new and Improved 
Floating Cover for Extract-Receivers; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ing, forming part of this specification. 
The figure is a vertical section of an urn, 
with the cover shown floating on the surface 
of the liquid. 
This invention consists in an automatically 
adjustable cover for coffee-urns, or other anal 
ogous purposes, which floats upon the surface 
of the liquid, and by always preventing an ex 
posure of the liquid surface, preserves the tem 
perature of the liquid, prevents the rising of 
steam when hot liquids are used, stops evapo 
ration, and obviates the objectionable circula 
tion of currents (from convection) in the ex 
tract, all as hereinafter fully described. 
In the drawing, H represents the floating 
cover, shown resting upon the surface of the 
liquid in a coffee-urn or other receptacle of 
extract. This float or cover is made hollow 
and bellied, so as to form an air-chamber, and 
is provided with one or more suitable air-vents 
to prevent rupture from expansion. These 
vents are preferably made in the form of tubes 
a', which form handles wherewith to lift the 
cover from the urn, the tubes being so ar. 
ranged as to prevent, as far as possible, the 
admission of extract to the interior of the float, 
and yet permit the cover to be drained if liq 
uid should gain access to the same. Said float 
may be constructed of metal, stoneware, or 
other suitable material, and corresponds to 
the shape of the urn in which it is placed. 
The float is designed to be used more par 
ticularly for hot liquids, and when floating 
upon the top of the same acts as an automati 
cally-adjustable cover, which, by preventing 
at all times the exposure of the surface, stops 
the uprising of the vapors, while the non-con 
ducting body of air contained in the same 
prevents the loss of heat due to radiation. 
This float tends also, when a constant heat 
is employed beneath the urn, to equalize the 
heat at the top and bottom of the liquid by 
preventing the cooling at the surface due to 
evaporation, and by thus retarding the circu 
lating currents produced by convection, pre 
vents the stirring or racking movement of the 
liquid, which tends to decompose the extract 
and detracts from the quality of the flavor. 
By reason of this result coffee and all other 
extracts are preserved fresh for a 
greater . 
length of time, and the tendency to become 
flat and insipid is correspondingly diminished. 
While the float tends to keep hot liquids 
hot, it may be used also to preserve the low 
temperature of cooled liquids, and is appli 
cable to various other liquids or extracts be 
sides coffee. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
The combination, with a receptacle for cof. 
fee or other liquid, of an automatically-ad 
justable floating cover, substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
JONATHAN MILLER. 
Witnesses: 
EDWD. W. BYRN, 
CHAS. A. PETTIT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203280.txt	J. W. LA W. 
Motor for Operating Pumps. 
No. 203,28O. 
Patented May 7, 187s. 
ERs, Photo-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. LAW, OF BLOOMINGTON, ILLINOIS. 
MPROVEMENT IN MOTORS FOR OPERATING PUMPS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203,2s0, dated May 7, 1878; application filed 
April 15, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN W. LAW, of 
Bloomington, in the county of McLean, and 
in the State of Illinois, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Motors for 
Operating Pumps; and dohereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription thereof, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawing, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, making a part of 
this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation; Fig. 2, a sec 
tion on line a ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail. 
WeW. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
mechanism for automatically operating pumps 
through the medium of spring machinery or 
weight power; and the invention consists in 
the combination and arrangements of parts 
whereby the pump mechanism will be auto 
matically and steadily operated, all as will be 
hereinafter fully described, and pointed out in 
the claims. 
In the drawing, A represents a frame for 
supporting the clock-Work and operating mech 
anism, through the base of which passes the 
tubular pump -piston B, provided with the 
usual discharge-nozzle. b. Rigidly connected 
to the upper portion of the pump-piston is a 
collar, C, which is connected to the lowerfront 
end of lever D by means of the link E, the 
lower rear end of said lever Dbeing connected 
to the plate G, secured to the base of the 
frame by means of the arms FF, pivoted to 
said plate G. 
By means of the above-described mechan 
ism the tubular piston is adapted, through 
the medium of lever Dandintermediate mech 
anism, to receive positive vertical or perpen 
dicular reciprocating movement. 
To the upper end of the pivoted lever D 
One end of a pitman-rod, H, is pivoted, its op 
posite end being connected to the fly-wheel I, 
or the shaft J, upon which the fly-wheel is 
mounted, by means of a crank, K. 
The connection between the pitman-rod and 
crank is made by means of the pivoted strap 
h and the pin h of the crank, said pin resting 
- 
 
in a concavity, i, on the end of the pitman 
rod, as clearly shown in Figs. 3 and 1, and by 
means of said pivoted strap the crank and 
pitman-rod can be easily and readily connected 
or disconnected when desired. 
In the present instance the crank is con 
nected to the shaft J by means of a screw 
thread on the end of said shaft and a female 
Screw in the crank. 
The shaft J is operated through the medium 
of clock or train of gearing, in the usual man- . 
ner, said clock-work or train of gearing being 
operated by spring or weight power, as may 
be deemed most expedient. 
It will be readily perceived that when the 
clock mechanism is wound up the pump mech 
anism will be automatically and steadily or 
uniformly operated, through the medium of 
shaft J, fly-wheel, crank, and pitman-rod. 
. I am aware that spring or weight machin 
ery or clock-work for automatically operating 
pumps is old, and such I do not claim, broadly, 
as my invention; but, 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the pump-piston 
B, pivoted lever D, and intermediate connect 
ing mechanism, of the clock-work and inter 
mediate connecting mechanism, consisting of 
the pitman-rod H, crank K, fly-wheel I, and 
shaftJ, the several parts constructed and rela 
tively arranged to operate substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
2. The combination of the pitman-rod H, 
provided with the concavity i in one end there 
of, and pivoted straph, and the crank K, pro 
vided with the headed pin h, whereby said 
pitman-rod and crank can be easily and read 
ily connected or disconnected, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 25th day of 
March, 1878. 
Witnesses: 
THos. SLADE, 
H. E. HADLEY. 
JOHN W. LAW. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203380.txt	? 
No. 203,380. 
--- 
J. SEBASTIAN. 
.Draft-Equalizer 
Patented May 7, 1878. 
. 
Z??? . Z . 
Z 
????? 
 
???? 
 
 
... 
. 
" 
. : 
??.?. 
? : 
? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB SEBASTIAN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN DRAFT-EQUALIZERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203,3S0, dated May 7, 1878; application filed 
February 13, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that II, JACOB SEBASTIAN, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and Improved Draft-Equalizer, 
which is fully set forth in the following speci 
fication and accompanying drawings, in which 
latter 
Figure 1 is a plan or top view of an appa 
ratus embodying my improvements, and Fig. 
2 is a side view thereof, 
Similar letters designate corresponding 
parts. 
The object of my invention is to equalize 
the draft on a team of horses or other animals, 
and to prevent the wagon-pole from striking 
the team. Whenever either of the front wheels 
meets With an obstruction or sinks into a 
cavity or hole. ' 
Heretofore wagons and their draft apparatus 
have been commonly constructed so that, when 
either of the forward Wheels met an obstruc 
tion, the tongue or pole was swung around, 
and generally struck one of the horses on the 
shoulder, often seriously injuring the animal. 
Again, when the wheels metan obstruction, 
such obstruction overcame the momentum of 
the wagon, and thereby occasioned violent 
shocks to the animals, often causing sore shoul 
ders, and thus rendering the animals tempo 
rarily useless, besides causing them great 
paln. 
To obviate these evil consequences, I con 
struct a draft-equalizer as will be shown here 
inafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Arepresents 
the forward axle. Brepresents the hounds. C 
represents a sliding draft-bar with arms e e 
and hooked ends. D represents the main 
whiffletree. EE represent hooks attached to 
the axle A, for receiving chains F, connecting 
said axle to the draft-bar. In lieu of these 
chains, rods may be used, if preferable. GIG-II 
represent slotted cross-pieces or guides, hold 
ing the houndsrigidlyby the aid of bolts g gi 
and gig, and receiving and supporting the 
shank I of the sliding draft-bar C. H repre 
sents a bolt by which the main whiffletree is 
attached to the drawing-bar. I represents a 
bolt or pin fastened into the sliding bar, and 
serves as a stop, by means of which the difiaft 
 
bar is prevented from escaping. (See Fig. 2.) 
J represents a whifletree -bolt keeper, by 
means of which the main whiffletree-bolt is 
steadied, and which is provided with an eye 
at the rear end, into which passes the hooked 
or upturned end of the shank I of the draft 
bar, and thereby forms the rear end of the bar. 
In practice I construct the cross-pieces G 
GII in such a manner that the shank of the 
draft-bar has room to play from one side to 
another for the following purpose: When one 
of the front wheels meets an obstruction the 
strain is equally divided by reason of the draw 
ing rod or chain being tightened and the free 
play allowed the draft-bar in the slot of the 
cross-pieces. 
It will be seen that by this arrangement the 
pole or tongue has no possible chance of being 
thrown from one side to another, and that the 
strain necessary to overcome the obstruction 
is equally divided between the animals. 
It is obvious that the slotted cross-pieces Gr 
GII are placed on the under side of the hounds 
B, thus serving three purposes: first, as guides 
for the draft-bar; second, as braces for the 
hounds; third, as restsfor the end of the tongue. 
The letter G-I II represents a strap, which is 
placed across the upper surface of the hounds 
BB, and serves to hold them rigidly together, 
and also prevents the tongue from Working 
out of place, it being inserted between the 
As will be seen, the draft-bar C is provided 
with arms on either side, shaped preferably 
like a swan's neck, to facilitate the Working 
and unhooking of the draft chains orrods IFF, 
made preferably of forged wrought-iron, on 
account of its great strength, and constructed 
so that when the Wagon is started the strain 
is directly on the axle. 
Heretofore the whiffletree was attached to 
the hounds by means of a bolt, thus leaving 
the Wood-work to bear the strain. 
The clip cross-pieces, by means of which 
the axle is attached to the bed-piece, are pro 
vided at one end with a hook to receive the 
chain or rod, and thus facilitate the unhook 
ing of the same. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
hounds. 
- 
:- 
1. The combination of a draft-bar, C, with FF, the hooked cross-pieces EE, the whiffle 
one or more cross-pieces, G. G., provided tree-boltkeeper J, attached to the hounds, sub 
With????????? to receive the 
bar C, the said cross-pieces being attached to 
the hounds B B, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, in a draft-equalizer, of 
the whiffletree D, the bolt H, the slotted cross- 
pieces GI GI 1, the draft-bar C, the draft-chains 
RUDOLPH F. EILENBERG, 
GEORGE WURST, Jr. 
JACOB SEBASTIAN. 
I of the 
stantially as herein set forth. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203480.txt	H. C. MINER, 
Wind-Engine. 
No. 203,480. 
Patented May 7, 1878. 
so 
all 7 E. 
s 
4. al 
As 77 
le?s s 
YES5i Hit 
|EarlSeii. fiftly 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- 
- 
466es & 
A. NS 
Zezerz C. ZZzzzez: s 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-ITHOGRAPHER, washingtoN, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. MINER, OF STAFFORD, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN WIND - ENGINES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203,4so, dated May 7, 1878; application filed 
; 
March 16, 1878. 
, , 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY C. MINER, of 
Stafford, in the county of Genesee and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Windmills, of which the 
following is a specification: 
The object of this invention is to so improve 
the wing-vanes of wind-wheels as to enable 
them to more fully utilize the motive force of 
the Wind than heretofore, and also to improve 
the method of securing said wings in position; 
and, further, to provide an effective and read 
ily-operated means of swinging the main vane 
to or from the wind, and thereby causing the 
wheel to be turned away from or into its op 
erative position. 
It consists, first, in a wind-wheel wing-vane 
having the line of its cross-section a double or 
approximately S-shaped curve, so that when 
said Vane is arranged in a proper oblique po 
sition in a wheel its front edge will stand di 
rectly in the path of the wind, and the rear 
edge will stand at angles thereto; second, in 
providing the wing - vanes of wind-wheels 
with ears, projecting laterally in opposite di 
rections from the opposite corners of the 
outer ends of said vanes, and arranging the 
Vanes in a wheel in such position that the 
ears of each lap those of the vanes on both 
sides, and two lapping ears are attached to the 
outer rim of the wheel by a single bolt, so that 
the vanes are attached together,as well as to 
the rim, and great strength is given to the 
wheel; third, in hinging the beam of the main 
Vane to the turn-table on an inclined pintle, 
so that said vane will be held by gravity in a 
position parallel with the axis of the wheel, 
and automatically returned to said position, 
when released, after being swung to the wind, 
for the purpose of shifting the wheel. 
In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1 is a 
side elevation of my improved wind-wheel and 
connections. Fig. 2 is a rear view, showing 
the regulating-vane swung to a position for 
shifting the wheel from the wind. Fig. 3 is a 
detached perspective view of a series of the 
Fig. 4 is a detached view, showing 
WaleS 
the Vanes in cross-section. 
The letter A indicates the wheel, fixed upon 
a shaft, B, which has a bearing partly in an 
arm, b, projecting from a standard, c, rising 
from the turn-table D, the upper portion or 
cover of said bearing being formed in an arm, 
e, projecting from the foot of a bracket, f, in 
the other end of which is formed the upper 
bearing for the rod g, which is intended to 
communicate motion to any desired machinery. 
H designates the wings or wheel-vanes. Trans 
versely or in cross-section these wings are 
formedon a double or reversed curve, the back 
edge being slightly less curved than the front. 
These wings or vanes are secured, in a series 
of any desired number, radially around the 
hub I of the wheel, and are bound at their 
outer edges or ends by means of a rim, K, the 
said outer edges or ends being provided with 
ears L, projecting laterally in opposite direc 
tions from the opposite corners of the outer 
ends or edges of said vanes, the ear of the left 
hand corner of one vane lapping the ear of the 
right-hand corner of the next, and secured to 
the rim by a single bolt, by means of which 
great strength is given to the wheel. 
The turn-table D is provided with two lat 
eral ears or lugs, dd, the lower one projecting 
slightly beyond the upper, through which 
passes and is secured an inclined pintle, N, 
upon which the branches OO of the bifurcated 
beam P of the main vane Q are pivoted, in 
such manner that the gravity of said main vane 
will tend to keep it in its normal position par 
allel with the axis of the wheel. The turn-ta 
ble D is mounted upon the upright standard 
R, which is constructed of two upright sec 
tions, R. R', leaving a space between for the 
downwardly-extending driving-shaft. Said 
turn-table, at its rear, is provided with two ver 
tical standards, S' S, which are preferably 
constructed in one piece, forming an attach 
ment, which may be secured to the turn-table 
by means of screws, or in any other conven 
ient manner. One of said standards is pro 
vided with an elastic cushion, s, against which 
the beam of the main vane rests when in its 
normal position, and which serves to take up 
the shock when said main vane suddenly as 
sumes such position from any cause, in order 
to prevent injury to the apparatus. The other 
standard, S', serves as a fulcrum for the lever 
T, the long arm of which is secured by a con 
nection, U, to the end of an inclined beam,V, 
attached to the main beam, the short arm be 
 
2 
203,4s0 
M 
ing provided with a cord, W, extending down 
wardly through the opening at the center of 
the turn-table, and terminating below within 
ready control of an attendant, by means of 
which the position of the main vane may be 
controlled. 
The operation of my invention will be read 
ily understood in connection with the above 
As the front edges of the wind 
description. 
vanes stand directly in the path of the wind 
by reason of their double curves, instead of at 
an angle to the path of the wind, as in the or 
dinary construction, the whole of the force of 
the wind striking the face of the wheel is ex 
erted on the vanes, securing the full power of 
the same, causing the wheel to rotate in proper 
direction. By reason of the inclined position 
in which the main beam is pivoted, it always 
tends to assume its normal position after be 
ing shifted. 
What I claim is 
1. A wind-wheel having its wing-vanes con 
structed in cross-section of a double or ap 
proximately S-shaped curve, whereby, when 
said vanes are arranged in proper position, 
the front edges will be presented directly to 
the path of the wind, and the rear edges will 
stand at an angle thereto, substantially as and 
for the purposes specified. 
2. In a Wind-wheel, the wing-vanes provided 
With ears projecting laterally in opposite di 
rections from opposite corners of the outer 
ends of said vanes, and arranged in the wheel 
in such position that the ears of eachlap those 
of the vanes on both sides, and two lapping 
ears may be attached to the rim of the wheel 
by a single bolt, substantially as specified. 
3. The turn-table provided with ears or lugs 
did, in combination with the main vane Q, bi 
furcated beam P, and pivot N, constructed 
and arranged substantially as described, where 
by said main vane is held by gravity in a po 
sition parallel with the wheel, and automati 
cally returned to said position, when released, 
after being swung to the wind for the purpose 
of shifting the wheel, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto set my hand in the presence of the 
subscribing witnesses. 
HENRY C. MNER, 
Witnesses: 
JAMES L. NoRRIs, 
JAMES A. RUTHERFORD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203580.txt	J. BERSCH. 
Wentilating-Bung, 
No. 2O3,58O. 
Patented May 14, 1878. 
Aiy 7 
I 
H. 
I 
IT III 
IIHF 
H. A 
 
S3S 
STS-4 
2Sai Si. 2 
N 2 ac 
4' 
2 
 
 
 
1722e.7zzo7 
ZO2se/ABevso 
a 2%-24% 
Azs Attory-ey. 
. PETERs, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEF BERSCH, OF BADEN, AUSTRLA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF HIS RIGHT 
TO HENRY GATH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN VENTILATING BUNGS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203,5S0, dated May 14, 1878; application filed . 
April 9, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, Dr. JosEF BERSCH, of 
the city of Baden and Empire of Austria, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Ventilating-Bungs; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, which will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to bungs for regulat 
ing the fermentation of beer and other malt 
liquors, and the object is to prevent the beer, 
&c., from becoming flat or spoiling. 
The invention consists of a bung into which 
a vertical pipe or tube is screwed, having two 
disks or pistons at its upper end, which fit 
into an inverted cup-shaped cylinder, which 
slides up and down on the pistons as the 
pressure increases or decreases. In the up 
per end of the cylinder is fitted a rubber 
washer to prevent leakage of air through the 
tube. A pin or rod is secured to the cylinder, 
upon which any suitable number of weights 
are placed, according to the differentpressures 
desired, all of which will be more fully de 
scribed hereinafter, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawing, in Which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
bung. Fig. 2 is a vertical cross-section of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a section on line at a of 
Fig. 2. 
In the drawing, A represents a common 
bung, which is driven into a barrel in the 
usualway. In this bung is screwed a vertical 
pipe, B, having two disks or pistons, bb', at 
its upper end, and arranged some distance 
apart. Each of these pistons is provided 
with a number of grooves or indentations, cc, 
on their periphery, to allow the air in the 
cylinder to escape. A cylinder, C, of light 
metal, is provided at its lower end with a col 
lar to weight it, and slides up and down over 
the two pistons. At its upper end the cylin 
der C has a rod or pin, D, attached or cast to 
it, upon which any number of flat Weights d 
are placed to give the desired pressure. In 
the cylinder, at its upper end, is placed a disk 
or washer of rubber or caoutchouc, e, by 
which the mouth of the tube B is closed, as it 
comes in contact with it, when the cylinder C 
descends. 
The operation is as follows: The tube B 
being screwed into the bung and weighted to 
the desired amount, the beer will remain at 
that point until gas is generated in sufficient 
quantity to raise the weighted cylinder, when 
the surplus gas will escape through the grooves 
in the pistons into the atmosphere. The press 
ure on the beer is thus always kept at a uni 
form degree, and it will not become stale or flat. 
The advantages of the bung are, first, the 
beer contained in barrels provided with this 
bung ferments perfectly even, and the effer. 
vescence can be carried to any desired degree; 
Second, the beer will not spoil or become stale 
or flat, because over the beer there will be 
always a layer of carbonic-acid gas, and pre 
Vent the admission of air; third, the rising of 
the ferment sediment cannot occur, and the 
beer will remain perfectly clear, as it is well 
known that during sudden thunder-storms, in 
consequence of the sudden falling of the atmos 
phere in temperature, the sediment will rise 
in the barrels, and often beer that has already 
become perfectly clear will become muddled 
and ferment again; fourth, the bung oper. 
ates automatically, and after it has beenplaced 
in position requires no further attention, the 
principle being that the atmosphere exerts a 
certain pressure upon a certain sized area, 
which would amount on one square millimeter 
to ten grams, or for One square centimeter to 
one kilogram. If, for instance, a surface of a 
certain size were weighted with a certain 
Weight, which would be such that a powerofone 
twentieth, two-twentieths, three-twentieths, 
&c., of an atmospheric pressure were necessary 
to raise the weight, then evidently gas would 
have to be developed in the fermenting beer . 
until this had attained a somewhat greater 
pressure than one-twentieth, two-twentieths, 
&c., of the atmospheric pressure, when it 
would raise the Weight and escape. By in 
creasing the weight, as will be readily under 
stood, the tension of the gas could also be 
increased and retained. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
2 
- 
203, 5S0 
The barrel-ventherein described, consisting ence of two witnesses. 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
is- 
of the plug A, tube B, provided with pistons 
bb', cylinder C, having rod D, and the weights 
did, all constructed and arranged as shown, 
and for the purpose herein set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I hereby affix my signature in pres 
DR, JOSEF BERSCH. 
Witnesses: 
EUGEN NORSE, 
CONST. MANDRONIC, 
-1} -l 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203680.txt	C. C. WEBBER, 
Fulling-Roll. 
No. 203,680. 
Patented May 14, 1878. 
-Erical 
  
   
 
 
 
A. N. 
 
4 SSS-SSS4 2 Y SNY 
27 E7. 
Invritor, 
 
S, PHT-liticaRAPHER, WASENGTON, ). C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES C. WEBBER, OF HOLYOKE, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO JOEL 
S. WEBBER, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN FULLING ROLLS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203,6S0, dated May 14, 1878; application filed 
November 19, 1877. 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs C. WEBBER, 
of Holyoke, in the county of Hampden and 
Commonwealth of Massachusetts, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Fulling-Rolls; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of this 
specification, and in which 
Figure 1represents a top or plan view of one 
of my improved fulling-rolls. Fig. 2 repre 
sents a side view of the roll shown in Fig. 1; 
and Fig. 3 represents a vertical central section 
on line AB, Fig. 1. 
To enable those skilled in the art to which 
my invention belongs to make and use the 
same, I will proceed to describe it more in 
detail. 
In the drawings, the part marked A. repre 
sents the shaft upon which the rolls are se 
cured, and this shaft may be of any desired 
length for receiving the requisite number of 
rolls to be arranged thereon. The rolls used 
are of from twenty-four (24) to thirty (30) 
es in diameter, with six (6) to ten (10) inch 
306, 
Previous to my invention such rolls had 
been made of iron, but were objectionable on 
account of rusting. Brass-faced iron rolls had 
been used; but their expense was very great 
and were otherwise objectionable. Various 
kinds of wood rolls had been used; but the 
varying hardness of wood, liability of decay, 
and other causes soon affected their surfaces, 
rendering them uneven and unfit for use, 
thereby requiring frequent re-turning and re 
newing. 
To obviate the foregoing objections, and to 
produce a roll at a moderate expense which 
should be at the same time almost indestruct 
ible, is the object of my present invention, and 
which roll is produced as follows: A metallic 
spider, B, provided with arms C, central sup 
porting part D, and projecting shoulders or 
hubs E, is first made from iron or other suita 
ble metal, having an even hole through the 
center to receive the shaft A. After the spider 
Witnesses: 
E. W. CHAPIN, 
M.I, CHAPIN. 
has been prepared as above stated, a plastic 
material or compound, composed of fine sand 
and cement, thoroughly mixed and moistened 
with water of the proper consistency for mold 
ing, is tamped and worked into the mold 
around the spider and left to set and dry a few 
hours, after which it is taken from the mold 
(which should be made in sections for conven 
ience of removal from the unhardened roll) 
and laid aside for the completion of the dry 
ing and hardening process, and I recommend 
a daily showering with water for a few weeks 
while the drying and hardening process is go 
ing on. 
If preferred, the drying and hardening pro 
cess may be expedited by subjecting the rolls. 
to artificial heat by means of warm vapor. 
It will be understood that the mold is to be 
of the proper shape to produce the roll F; con 
sequently the roll is ready for use without 
further manipulation as soon as the drying and 
hardening process is completed. 
The proportions of sand and cement used in 
making the plastic material from which the 
rolls are molded are one-half each, by Weight 
or bulk, as preferred, the main object being to 
produce a roll for fulling-mill, or for similar 
purposes, formed from plastic stone-like ma 
terial, as above described, and consequently 
the proportions of the materials may be varied 
to a considerable extent, and therefore I do 
not confine myself to particular proportions so 
long as the object in view is attained. 
Set-screws a are employed for securing the 
spider B, upon which the rolls F are molded, 
to the shaft A. 
Having described my improvement, what I 
claim therein as new and of my invention, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
fulling-machine roll composed of the metallic 
spider B and molded roll part F, substantially 
as shown and described, and for the purposes 
set forth. 
CHARLES C. WEBBER, 
 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203780.txt	A, RUTHERFORD. 
Adjustable Trace-Fastening. 
No. 203,78 O. 
Patented May 14, 1878. 
 
2 a. 
co-2 
 
% 
Z 6-2-ee-a22-222-2 -ee 
S--- 
toes 
N, PETERS, Photo-LITHOGRAPHER, wash NGTON, O. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADAM RUTHERFORD, OF WALLA WALLA, WASHINGTON TERRITORY. 
MPROVEMENT IN ADJUSTABLE TRACE - FASTENINGS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203,750, dated May 14, 1878; application filed 
December 1, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ADAM RUTHERFORD, of 
Walla Walla, in the county of Walla Walla 
and Territory of Washington, have invented 
a new and valuable Improvement in Trace 
Fasteners; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the construction and operation of the same, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to the 
letters and figures of reference marked there 
O). 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of plan view of my trace-fastener. Fig. 2 
is a longitudinal vertical section. Fig. 3 is 
a side view. Fig. 4 is a modification plan 
view, and Fig. 5 is a longitudinal vertical sec 
tional view thereof. 
The nature of myinvention consists in the con 
struction of a trace-fastener; the object being 
to lengthen or shorten the trace at the whiffle 
tree instead of at the hame-tug, as is now 
usual, thereby dispensing with the ordinary 
trace-buckle, as will be hereinafter more fully 
set forth. 
The annexed drawings, to which reference 
is made, fully illustrate my invention. 
A represents the ordinary cockeye, usually 
fastened to the rear end of a trace for attach 
ing the same to the whiffletree. 
My improved cockeye is formed with a 
frame, B, forming two jaws, through which 
passes a shaft, a, and on this shaft are se 
cured two arms, b b, the ends of which are 
connected by rods did, as shown. 
C represents the trace, the extreme rear end 
of which is provided with a loop, D, passing 
around the trace. The trace is passed around 
the shaft a, and then passed around the rods 
d, as shown, and the body of the trace then 
passed through the loop D, and the strain of 
ADAM RUTHERFORD. 
Witnesses: 
REEVEs AYREs, 
R. GUICHARD. 
the trace in passing around the shaft and rod 
a d causes it to bind and hold. 
On one end of the shaft a, outside of the 
frame B, is a star-wheel, h, and when the trace 
is adjusted a screw, i, is inserted in the frame 
between the arms of the star, thus preventing 
the interior frame from rotating. The trace can 
easily be lengthened or shortened, as required, 
by slipping around the shaft and rod a d. 
The above is intended for heavy draft. For 
light draft the frame B is simply provided with 
three stationary rods or cross-bars, d, around 
which the trace is wound, as shown. 
The trace is provided with impressions or 
other marks, as shown at a ac, for the purpose 
of indicating and regulating the distance the 
teamster may want to change the length of 
his trace. 
By this invention I dispense with the ordi 
nary trace-buckle, and change the length of 
the trace at the whiffletree instead of at the 
hame-tug. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The cockeye A provided with the frame 
B, having a series of cross-bars, d, therein, in 
combination with the trace C, having a loop, 
D, on its extreme end, substantially as and . 
for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination of the cockeye A, frame 
B, shaft a with star-wheel h, and arms bb, the 
rods d d, and screw i, all substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
- 
g 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203880.txt	J. R. BLOSSOM, 
Baling-Press, 
No. 203,88O. 
Patented May 21, 1878. 
--- 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH R. BLOSSOM, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, 
IMPROVEMENT IN BALNG PRESSES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203, SS0, dated May 21, 1878; application filed 
April 17, 1878. 
. 
- 
flat, and the part around which the bands are 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH. R. BLOSSOM, placed is no smaller than any other part of the 
of Brooklyn, Kings county, New York, have bale. 
Another plan has been to employ platens 
invented Improvements in Baling, of which 
with a fixed number of ribs, upon and against 
the following is a specification: 
My invention is animprovementin pressing which half-bands have been secured, the spaces 
and baling cotton, &c., fully described herein- between said ribs being occupied by sections 
after, whereby the bale is secured at the points or blocks projecting and held beyond the ribs 
of its greatest compression, and expansion by springs, serving to prevent displacement of 
after pressure is removed is greatly reduced. 
the bands, and depressed only to the level of 
In the drawing, which forms part of this the ribs or bars by the bale when pressed; but 
specification, Figure 1 is a view, illustrating a in no case has the rib on which the band is 
common mode of baling; Fig. 2, a view show- placed been constructed so as to project be 
ing part of a press with my improved appli- yond the plane or level of the rest of the 
ances; Figs. 3 and 4, modifications; and Figs. platen under pressure, so as to force the bands 
5 and 6, perspective views, showing different by the power of the press into a recess in the 
forms of press-bars and the arrangement of bale made by the rib. 
- 
the guards. 
To obviate muh of the great expansion re 
In baling cotton hitherto the platens gen- sulting from baling by any and all of the fore 
erally used have consisted of parallel bars b, going methods is the main object of my in 
Fig. 1, of various forms, often of railway-iron, vention. 
or approximately similar shape, the object be- 
When the platen consists of parallel bars b, 
ing to readily pass the iron bands a, each hav. first described, Eigs. 1 and 2, I apply thereto 
ing the tie or buckle attached to one end, bars B, Fig. 2, which, by any suitable appli 
around the bale while the platens were in ances, as dowel-pins, dovetails, clamps, or 
contact with it, at such distance apart as to bolts, &c., can be adjusted and secured at 
have any desired number of bands, from five desired distances apart, so as to suit all lengths 
to twelve, upon bales, which greatly vary in of bales and any number of bands desired. 
length. 
These bars I make with straight or curved 
Other platens, with some of the bars curved faces-that is, thickest at the ends-in a shape 
in pairs, between which the bands are passed, most nearly resembling the outline which the 
and with intermediate bars with faces coin. compressed bale tends to take after pressure 
ciding with a horizontal plane, have been pat- is removed; and to the faces of the bars I ap 
ented, but are not effective, because the spaces ply the bands, which are thereby forced into 
between the paired bars have always been too the bales. 
small to permit the band to be quickly passed 
The curving of the bars to a form approxi 
through from side to side. With all these mating the shape of the expanded bale reduces 
forms the cotton will protrude between the the length of the bands needed, and also leaves 
bars, making puffs y, around which each band, less slack than with any other mode of balling, 
in one piece, is pulled by hand or by compli. correspondingly reducing the size of finished 
cated appliances, the square corners of the bale. 
pressed bale and rigidness of the iron being 
At the sides of either straight or curved 
greathindrancesto drawing the bands tightly; bars I may arrange spring-guards c, Which, 
and as the band is not put at the points of upon pressure, move below the face of the rib 
greatest compression, the expansion of the in- or bar upon which the band rests, so that 
termediate parts, after the pressure is relieved, every band is forced as deeply as desired into 
and the consequent increase in size of the bale, the material, with less power than is usually 
is very great. 
In some cases the bands have been each in between the bands can be relieved of pressure 
two pieces, afterward fastened at each side to any desired degree by simply raising or 
and laid upon and against platens that are thickening the adjustable rib or bar. These 
required in ordinary processes, as the faces - 
- 
203, SS0 
guards, which prevent displacement of the 
bands, can be supported by any suitable 
springs, e, and may either be separate from or 
attached to the straight or curved bars B. 
In Figs, 2 and 3 they are shown arranged 
between the bars b B; in Figs. 4 and 5, as ap 
plied to bars B, adjustable on the platen-base A. 
The bars B may be modified in form to 
adapt them to varying forms of bar platens or 
to the flat platen, on which the bars may be 
arranged at any desired distance apart, giving 
base enough to maintain them steady under 
pressure; and dowel-pins, dovetailed ribs, 
bolts, or other devices may be employed to 
secure the bars adjustably in place, either on 
the flatplaten-plate or on the faces of the bars b. 
The bars B maybe each in one piece or in two 
pieces, extending partly across the platen from 
each side; or they may extend so far as to over 
lap, as shown in Fig. 6, in which case the ends 
may be united by a pin on one piece extend 
ing into a slot in the other, thus permitting 
the length of the bar to be adjusted at will. 
I claim 
1. The process herein described in pressing 
and baling, consisting in applying the bands 
upon the faces of ribs which are more promi 
nent when under pressure than any other part 
of the platen, thereby forcing the ribs and 
bands into the bale, and securing the ends of 
the bands while the bale is under compression, 
as set forth. 
2. A platen provided with a series of curved 
parallel ribs, constructed and adapted to re 
ceive the bands on their faces and to force the 
same into the bale on lines coinciding sub 
stantially with the outline the bale assumes 
on expanding, substantially as set forth. 
3. The spring-supported guards c, arranged 
to sink below the faces of the band-supporting 
bars on application of pressure to the bale, as 
set forth. 
4. The platen consisting of a series of plane 
faced parallel bars, B, thicker at the outer ends 
than at the center, and arranged upon a flat 
platen-plate, substantially as set forth. 
5. The bars B, made each in two sections, 
for varying the length, as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the platen-plate. 
A, of movable bars B and appliances for se 
curing the same adjustably on the plate A, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOSEPH. R. BLOSSOM. 
Witnesses: 
JAMEs J. DEAN, 
F. B. CHICHESTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US203980.txt	W. ADAMSON. 
Extracting Hydro-Carbons from Fatty Matters 
Patented May 21, 1878. 
No. 203,98O. 
. 
. 
. 
7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM ADAMSON, OF PHILADELPHIA PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN EXTRACTING HYDROCARBONS FROM FATTY MATTERS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 203,9s0, dated May 21, 1878; application filed 
March 28, 1878, 
the cold surfaces of the pipes G. G', is con 
To all whom it may concern: . 
densed, and passes in a liquid form to the 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM ADAMSON, of 
space in the vessel beneath the trough H, and 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented a 
is drawn off from time to time from this space 
new and useful Improvement in Separating 
through a pipe, i. 
Oily and Fatty Matters from Hydrocarbons, of 
The lowest of the lengths of steam-pipesis, 
which the following is a specification: 
of course, the hottest, and the highest is the 
My invention relates to the treatment of 
coolest. Hence the material, asittrickles down 
such oily and fatty matters as have been ex 
tracted from animal and vegetable substances in contact with the surface of the pipes, is sub 
by hydrocarbons; and the object of my in-jected to a gradually-increasing heat, and this 
prevents that sudden charring of the oily or 
vention is to deprive the said matter of the 
fatty matter which might discolor and other 
hydrocarbon with which it has been impreg 
wise injure it. 
nated, by causing it to trickle in thin filmy 
Thick glass windows at a may be secured in 
streams over and in contact with heated tubu 
opposite ends of the vessel, for the purpose of 
lar surfaces in a closed vessel, which is also 
enabling the attendants to note the progress 
provided with cooling-surfaces, so that the 
of the operation. 
hydrocarbon vapors given off by contact with 
It is not essential in carrying my invention 
the said heated surfaces shall be condensed 
into effect to adhere to the precise construc 
and flow from the vessel in a liquid condition 
tion of vessel or zigzag pipes herein described. 
through one pipe or passage, while the puri 
For instance, the pipes G. G. might be dis 
fied oily and fatty matter is discharged from 
pensed with, and cooling-surfaces arranged by 
the same vessel through another channel. 
forming, on opposite sides of the vessel, jack 
In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1 is 
ets, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 1, cold 
a transverse section, and Fig. 2 a longitudi 
water being caused to circulate within the 
nal section, of the vessel whereby my inven 
spaces formed by the said jackets. 
tion may be carried into effect. 
Without confining myself, therefore, to any 
The body of the vessel is preferably cylin 
specific apparatus ir carrying my invention 
drical, with opposite flat ends B B', and con 
into effect, I claim and desire to secure by 
tains a ZigZag pipe, D, to which steam is ad 
Letters Patent 
mitted at the lower end d, and from which it 
1. The mode described of separating from 
escapes at the upper end df. Immediately 
oily and fatty matter the hydrocarbons used 
above the highest length of steam-pipe there 
in extracting the same-that is to say, caus 
is a distributing - trough, e, communicating 
ing the matter to trickle in thin films over 
with the vessel through a series of narrow 
heated tubular surfaces, and thereby evaporat 
slits or perforations. 
ing the hydrocarbons contained in the matter, 
Cold water is caused to circulate through 
condensing the vapors by cooling-surfaces, and 
a series of pipes, G, arranged near one side 
of the vessel, and through a similar series of effecting the desired separation, all in the same 
vessel, substantially as set forth. 
pipes, G', near the opposite side of the vessel. 
2. The combination, in a vessel, A, of a dis 
The matter to be treated is introduced 
tributing-trough, e, with which the inlet-pipe 
through a pipe, f, into the distributing-trough 
communicates, a system of steam-heated 
e, from which it trickles over the highestf 
pipes, D, the trough H, and its outlet h, the 
length of the ZigZag steam-pipe, and passes 
cooling-pipes G. G' or other cooling-surfaces, 
in a thin film dioWinWard and in contact there 
with, and it thus passes from length to length and the outlet-pipe i, all substantially as 
specified. 
of pipe until the oily and fatty matter falls 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
into a trough, H, whence it is drawn off from 
name to this specification in the presence of 
time to time through a pipe, h. 
two subscribing witnesses. 
During the trickling of the material in thin 
films over and in contact with the series of 
steam-pipes the volatile hydrocarbon with 
which oil or fat has been impregnated is so 
diffused over the heated surfaces that it is va 
porized, and the vapor, coming in contact with 
HARRY A. CRAWFORD, 
HARRY SMITH, 
Witnesses : 
WM. ADAMSON. 
N 
. 
. 
. . . . . .a S-l. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204080.txt	S. PERRY. 
Hay-Tedder, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 204, O8O. 
Patented May 21, 1878. 
 
N. Peters, photo-LTHOGRAPHE, wasnao, b. c. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
S PERRY. 
Hay-Tedder, 
No. 204,080. 
Patented May 21, 1878. 
?h 7. 
H Ilariffin 
IITiyyini. 
ins Sumiig 
E7. Higa III 
limit zz-in-a-F 
s 
72 
as 
M 
P 
 
in K 
 
S. 
Ea 
s 
O 
Y 
t 
II 
 
s 
s 
al 
S S. 
s 
it 
7 
Bill 
AHA2." 
HH. 
IIH -A 
FilmIHF 
HINIH . 
HILITATIH. 
Aziz . 
z. z. 
I 
 
&Eliay. / 
Americk. 
 
N. PETERs, PHOTO-LithographER, WASHINGTON, .. 
S. PERRY. 
Hay-Tedder, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 204,080. 
Patented May 21, 1878. 
 
224. 
Arcy. 
N. PEFERS, PHOTO-THOGRAPHER, washington, D.C. 
day. 
- to Arts. 
---...- :----- - 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
s TU ART PERRY, OF NEWPORT, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN HAY-TEDDERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204,0S0, dated May 21, 1878; application filed 
March 12, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, STUART PERRY, of New 
port, in the county of Herkimer and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use. 
ful Improvementsin Rotary Hay-Tedders; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement on 
the rotary hay-tedder patented by me May 16, 
1876; and it consists, first, in a rotary hay 
tedder having the side pieces of the tilting 
frame connected with each other by means of 
two cross-pieces only, one of said cross-pieces. 
serving for the attachment of the draft-frame, 
while the through-axle of the tedder is secured 
to the side pieces by means of collars surround 
ing the ends of the axle, whereby it serves the 
double purpose of an axle and a second cross 
bar for the tilting-frame. 
My invention further consists in a rotary 
hay - tedder provided with a skeleton draft 
frame, which is provided with a central lon 
gitudinal brace for the attachment of a pole, 
and with inwardly-inclined or diagonal side 
pieces for the attachment of thills to the outer 
surfaces of said diagonal sides. 
My invention further consists, in a rotary 
hay - tedder, of the combination, with the 
standard forming part of the adjusting mech 
anism connecting the draft and tilting frames of 
the machine, of the hand-lever connected with 
or formed as a part of the standard, and ex 
tending laterally outward at its upper end, 
and the driver's seat located directly over said 
standard, whereby the latter serves as a safe 
guard in case of the breakage of the seat 
Spring. 
My invention further consists, in a rotar 
hay-tedder, of the combination, with the ad 
justing mechanism which connects the draft 
and tilting frames, said mechanism located at 
or near the longitudinal central line of the 
machine, of a locking device provided with 
a rod leading to the lever-handle, whereby 
said locking device may be actuated simulta 
neously with the lever-handle. 
My invention further consists in the several 
.. 
- 
details of Construction and combinations of 
parts, as will hereinafter be described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a view, in perspective, of my im 
proved hay-tedder. Fig. 2 is a side elevation, 
and Fig. 3 a plan view, of the same. Fig. 4 is 
a detached view of the reel-cam or camway 
and side piece. Fig. 5 is a detached view of 
the reel-guard and side piece of the tilting 
frame. Fig. 6 is a detached view of the stand 
ard and yoke. Fig. 7 is an enlarged view of 
the adjusting mechanism, and Fig. 8 is a lon 
gitudinal section through a portion of the 
through-axle side piece and wheel. . 
A. A represent the road-wheels, each of 
which is provided with a driving-gear, B, se 
cured to the wheel by means of screws a pass 
ing through perforated lugs b. 
C is the main axle of the machine, the road 
wheels A A' being secured to journals formed 
on the outer ends thereof. 
The side pieces D D' of the tilting-frame 
are preferably made of Wrought-iron, and are 
rigidly attached to the main axle Cin the fol 
lowing manner: E are hubs, either of cast or 
malleable iron, and are secured to the side 
pieces D D, by bolts, or they may be welded 
thereon or cast solid therewith, and thus form 
an increased bearing on the side pieces for 
strengthening the connection of the latter 
with the main axle. The hubs are secured to 
the side pieces in line with each other, and the 
side pieces and hubs are then bored through 
to snugly fit on the axle within the journals 
c and are driven onto the axle, so that the 
outer ends of the hubs will be flush with the 
shoulder d between the body of the axle and 
journals c formed on its ends. 
Instead of boring through the side piece 
and hubs after they have been secured in 
place, it is evident that the side pieces and 
hubs may be bored before they are con 
nected with each other, and the hubs after 
ward clamped or bolted to the side pieces in 
any desired manner. The forward ends of the 
side pieces D D, are secured by bolts or other 
means to a strong cross-bar, F, constructed of 
wood or metal, and, if preferred, the extreme 
ends of the side pieces may be bent inwardly 
at right angles to their length, and secured to 
 
2 
204,0s0 
the ends of the cross-piece F by means of bolts edges of the side pieces DD' of the tilting 
e passing transversely through the ends of 
frame. 
The reel cam-way and guard are adapted to 
said cross-piece. The cross-piece F and main 
be adjusted to or from the main driving-gears 
axle are secured to each other at or near their 
B to vary the mesh of the driving-pinions M 
central portions by means of the hand-lever, 
therewith by means of the bolts or screws m, 
standard, or otherwise. The rear and longer 
which extend through the oblong or rectan 
ends of side pieces DD have attached there 
gular slots in the camway and guard, and are 
to, respectively, a camway and reel-shaft 
secured to the side pieces. By loosening 
journal-box and a guard with reel-shaft jour 
screws m the entire reel may be moved toward 
nal-box, said journal-boxes supporting the 
or away from the main axle, and any desired 
shaft of the reel G of the tedder. 
mesh of the driving-pinions and driving-gear 
From the foregoing description it will be ob 
served that the side pieces DD' of the tilting 
Secured. 
By the simple construction of parts as above 
frame are firmly braced and secured to each 
described-namely, combining the reel-shaft 
other by the main axle and a single cross 
journal-boxes with the camway and guard, 
piece or bar. This arrangement of parts sim 
and connecting the latter in an adjustable 
plifies the construction of the machine and en 
manner with the side pieces of the tilting 
ables the frame to be made of a less number 
frame-the relativeposition of the several parts 
of parts than has heretofore been the case, as 
of the reel is always fixed and maintained, 
I cause the main axle to perform not only its 
and also the adjustment of the entire reel to 
usual function of supporting and carrying the 
ward or away from the driving-gear is readily 
several parts of the tedder, but also to per 
accomplished. 
form the additional function of a cross-piece 
for the tilting-frame, and impart strength and 
The reel-shaft N is a continuous metal bar, 
formed with shoulders n, against which shoul 
rigidity thereto. 
ders abut the reel-heads N'. The journals of 
E represents the camway, which is con 
said shaft are preferably reduced in size. 
structed with a cam-groove, f, within which 
By making the reel-shaft continuous it 
travel the anti-friction rollers g g attached to 
serves to impart strength to the reel-frame, 
arms h, which latter are secured at their op 
and, as the shaft is of metal throughout its 
posite ends to the pivoted fork-shafts I, and 
length, it is not liable to warp when subjected 
thus a variable movement is given the fork 
to variable weather, as is the case when the 
shafts, as each is carried around a complete 
shaft is part wood, which is the usual con 
circle, in order that the forks may assume a 
struction heretofore employed. . 
vertical position when they first come in con 
The continuous reel-shaft and self-adjusting 
tact with the hay, and after the latter has been 
mechanism of the reel-forks to the ground-sur 
raised a sufficient distance the cam causes 
face co-operate in a manner to effect the most 
the forks to dip and release the hay from con 
perfect results. 
tact therewith. Heretofore the reel-shaft.jour 
Heretofore, in rotary tedders provided with 
nal-box and camway have been formed sepa 
self-adjusting mechanism the reel-shafts have 
rate and secured to the tilting-frameindepend 
been made of two or more pieces, and the cen. 
ently of each other. 
tral portion of said shaft has been constructed 
In my improved machine the journal-box i 
of wood. As the shaft constructed in the 
is rigidly secured or cast solid with the cam 
manner last described is subjected to variable 
way, so that the cam-groove and reel-shaft 
strains, owing to the springing or warping of 
journal shall maintain a fixed relative position 
the shaft, arising from the unequal strength 
to each other. The reel-shaft journal it is re 
of its different parts or from the warping of 
tained within its bearing i by means of the 
the wood, the journals could not be kept in 
capi, the ends of which rest upon horizontal 
perfect line with each other, and hence would 
flanges it within the cam-groove, said cap be. 
bind in their boxes when the reel was either 
ing firmly secured in place by means of bolts 
raised or lowered. This defect in the con 
f' and nuts.j. Thereel-guard Kisconstructed 
struction of the reel seriously impaired the ef. 
in this respect in like manner to the camway. 
ficiency of the self-adjusting mechanism, as 
The journal-box k is rigidly secured or formed 
the tension of the regulating-spring of the ad 
in a single piece with the guard. k is a jour 
justing mechanism necessary to keep the forks 
nal-box cap or cover, which is retained in place 
in contact with the ground-surface was found 
by means of the bolts k. Journal-box covers 
in many cases to be incapable of raising or 
or capsi and k are formed with open slotted 
lowering the reel as the tedder passed over 
ends k, which fit over central ribs or upright 
flangest formed solid with both camway and 
uneven ground-surface, and this failure re 
sulted from the binding of the reel-shaft jour 
guard, and by means of which the caps or 
nals in their boxes, as heretofore stated. 
covers are prevented from any lateral dis-, 
By constructing the reel-shaft in a single 
placement. 
continuous piece the defects above noted are 
The reel camway and guard each have ex 
obviated, the journals are always kept in per 
tensions L formed thereon, said extensions 
fect line with each other, the boxes are sub 
being provided with face flanges it, which lat 
jected to even and equal wear, and the reel 
ter overlap and snugly fit the upper and lower 
 
204,6s6. 
operates equally well in any position it may 
be placed. Hence the reel-forks may be sub 
jected to any desired tension by means of the 
self-adjusting mechanism, and the reel is al 
Ways under the perfect control of said adjust 
ing mechanism. 
O represents the draft-frame. It consists 
of a rear cross-bar, O', the front bar Ohaving 
inclined sides in in and intermediate diagonal 
bracing-bar O, the ends of said pieces or bars 
being secured to the ends of the hinged bars 
PP. All of these pieces are preferably made 
of Wrought metal, and the diagonal or inclined 
sides in are formed to admit of the attachment 
of the thills Q to their outer surfaces by means 
of bolts o, or in any other desired manner. 
The butt-ends of the thills rest against the up 
turned ends of the hinged pieces or bars PP. 
When it is desired to use a pole instead of 
thills, the latter may be readily removed, and 
a pole, R, readily secured to the central longi 
tudinal frame-piece R', which latter is pro 
vided with end flanges p, that overlap the up 
per edges of the front and rear pieces of the 
draft-frame. Frame-piece R is of T form in 
cross-section, the web portion p' being perfo 
rated for the passage of the bolts p for secur 
ing the pole in place. The ends of the frame 
piece R have plates p formed thereon, which 
constitute firm bearings for the rear and front 
pieces of the draft-frame, said plates and front 
and rear pieces being firmly secured together 
by means of bolts located on opposite sides of 
the Web portion p. Upon the top portion or 
horizontal flange g of the frame-piece R is 
secured a foot-piece, S, which extends upwardly 
a sufficient distance to allow the lower end of 
the seat-spring r to be firmly seated against 
and bolted to the rear wall r of said foot-piece. 
The seat-spring may be strengthened by an 
extra spring, r, interposed between the main 
seat-spring and foot-piece. 
Trepresents the standard, the body portion 
of which consists of the bar s and lower ex 
tremity s of the hand-lever U. The lower 
ends of said bars are firmly secured to a yoke, 
s', by means of boltss. 
Yoke s is constructed with rectangular re 
cesses t for the reception of the ends of the 
bars, and to enable them to be rigidly secured 
thereto. One end of the yoke is connected to 
the main axle by means of the strap-bolts it, 
while the opposite end is firmly secured to the 
forward cross-piece F of the tilting-frames by 
the boltt, which extends through said cross 
piece. The yokes' constitutes a brace, and 
prevents the springing of the axle or front 
cross-piece of the tilting-frame, and also allows 
the standard to be firmly secured thereto in a 
detachable manner. 
The upper end of the hand-lever Nisbent at 
or nearly at right angles to the vertical por 
tion thereof, and extends in a lateral direction 
beyond the seat V, when it is again bent and 
extended upwardly, so that its upper end may 
be in easy reach of the operator. 
W is a notched or serrated sector-bar, piv. 
oted at its lower end within a slot formed in 
the frame-piece R', while its rear and free end 
extends through a slotted plate, u, which is 
Secured to the upper end of the standard by 
means of a bolt, u, extending through a lug, 
u, formed on said slotted plate, and extending 
between the bars of the standard. The outer 
end of the sector-bar is provided with a stop 
pin, i, to prevent the disengagement of the 
sector-bar and standard. Upon the sector 
bar is placed a spiral spring, v, one end of 
which rests against the standard, while the 
other end is held by the inwardly-bent ends 
of a link, v', the opposite end of which is at 
tached to a locking-slide, v'. 
The arrangement of the spring on the sector 
bar is such that the draft and tilting frames 
are adjustably connected in a yielding man 
ner, and any desired tension between such 
parts may be secured by varying the force of 
the spiral spring, as the tension of the latter 
remains unchanged throughout the varying 
degrees of adjustment between the draft and 
tilting frames. 
The locking-slide is provided on its oppo 
site sides with lugs 0, between which the link 
is placed and retained either in or 'out of en 
gagement with the notched sector-bar, accord 
ingly as the locking-slide is raised or lowered. 
To the upper end of the slide vis secured one 
end of a locking-bar, ac, the central portion of 
which is supported in bearings ac' attached to 
the horizontal portion of the hand-lever. The 
outer end of the locking-bar is provided with 
a loop or ring, y, which surrounds the hand 
lever near its upper end. 
It will be observed that the locking-bar is 
in reality a rock-shaft, and by moving the 
enlarged loop or ring to or from the hand-lever 
it operates to raise or lower the opposite end 
of the locking-bar, and thus actuate the slide 
which connects or disconnects the link and 
sector-bar. . 
The standard and sector-bar are located in 
the central longitudinal line of the machine, 
and in such position serve a double purpose. 
When the adjusting mechanism which con 
nects the draft and tilting frames of a hay 
tedder is located at one side of the longitudi 
nal center of the machine, the strain on the 
parts is not equally distributed, and the re 
sult is that the different parts of the frame 
are twisted and warped out of line with each 
other. This difficulty is overcome by placing 
the adjusting mechanism at or near the lon 
gitudinal center of the machine, as clearly 
shown in the accompanying drawings, illus 
trating my invention. 
The sector-bar is pivoted at the center of 
the draft-frame, and the standard is secured 
to the yoke, which, in turn, is attached to the 
central portions of the main axle and front 
cross-bar of the tilting-frame. Again, when 
the standard is located at one side of the cen 
ter of the machine, there is no safe-guard for 
the driver in case the seat spring should 
break, and as this occasionally happens the 
- 
A. 
204,0so 
- 
... 
. 
" . 
. 
. 
. 
Sale. 
: extending laterally from beneath the driver's 
drivers are often subjected to serious injuries 
seat, and projecting above the same within 
from the lack of any such provisions. 
easy reach of the driver, substantially as set 
In a hay-tedder constructed in the manner 
shown and described it will be observed that 
forth. 
5. The draft-frame of a rotary tedder pro 
the driver's seat Wis located directly over the 
vided with a central frame-piece constructed 
standard, and hence, should the spring break, 
with a central perforated web for the attach 
no injury could result to the driver, as the 
ment of a pole, and with end plates for brac 
seat would be supported on the standard and 
ing and securing the front and rear cross 
hand-lever located immediately beneath the 
R of the draft-frame, substantially as set 
It is evident that many slight changes in 
. Orth. 
6. In a rotary hay-tedder, the combination, 
the construction and arrangement of the sev with the main axle and the forward cross-bar 
eral parts of my improved machine might be 
of the tilting-frame, of a yoke for supporting 
devised without departing from the spirit of 
the standard, the ends of said yoke being re 
my invention, and hence I do not limit my 
movably secured to the axle and cross-piece, 
Self to the exact construction shown and de 
substantially as set forth. 
scribed; but, 
7. The combination, with the standard and 
Having fully described my invention, what 
notched sector-bar, of a spring-pressed link 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
and a locking-slide, having lugs formed on its 
ters Patent, is- 
opposite side, which serve as guides for re 
1. In a rotary tedder, the combination, with 
taining the link in place, substantially as set 
a reeland camway or equivalent mechanism for 
rocking the fork-shafts of the reel, of a cross 
8. The combination, with two upright bars 
bar connecting the forward ends of the side 
forming the standard of a hay-tedder, of a 
pieces of the tedder and a through main axle, 
yoke secured to the axle and front cross-piece 
which is rigidly secured to said side pieces by 
of a tilting frame, said yoke constructed with 
means of collars surrounding the ends of the 
rectangular side recesses for receiving the 
axle, whereby the frame is braced and 
lower ends of the parts of the standards, sub 
strengthened by a single cross-bar and the 
RE axle of the machine, substantially as set 
9. The draft-frame of a rotary tedder, con 
Orth. 
structed with diagonal outer sides, in combi 
2. The draft-frame of a hay - tedder con 
nation with thills, which are secured to said 
structed with a central longitudinal frame for 
diagonal sides, substantially as set forth. 
the attachment of a seat-spring, and with in 
10. The draft-frame of a rotary tedder adapt: 
clined or diagonal side pieces for the attach 
ed to both thills and pole, said frame con 
ment of thills to the outer surfaces thereof, 
structed with diagonal sides for the attach 
substantially as set forth. 
ment of the thills, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the standard and 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
the hand-lever extending laterally outward 
have hereunto set my hand this 8th day of 
therefrom, of the driver's seat, located imme 
March, 1878. 
diately over said standard and horizontal por 
Sof the hand-lever, substantially as set 
STUART PERRY. 
Orth. 
4. The combination, with the standard and 
segmental rack-bar, located beneath the driv 
er's seat, of the hand-lever and locking-bar, 
GEO. H. HURLBUT, 
M. N. PEARCE. . 
stantially as set forth. 
Witnesses: 
forth. 
. 
. . . . 
. . 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
. " 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204180.txt	' * ADAM WINGARD, OF SAN FRANCISCo, CALIFORNIA. . . " " 
    1MPROVEMENT IN PADDLE-WHEELS.       
 
. 
  Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204, 1s0, dated May 28, 1878; application filed "' 
                      
    March 26, 1878. ''. " ", 
   
    
 
 
~ 
 
~ 
" 
  
the Water. 
Be it known that I, ADAMr WINGARD, of the 
city and 'county of Saii'F'r?ncisco, in the State 
of *California, have  inwented' an' Improwed 
Paddle-Wheel; and I do.hereby declare that. 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de-', 
Scription thereof, reference being had to cer-  
taindraWingS accompanying this Specification, 
and forming a part thereof. " 
My in wention relates to paddle-Wheels for 
Steam-weSSels; and consists of a peculiar con 
formation and arrangement of the bucketS or 
floats, Whereby I obtain a Sculling or fish-tail 
ati0n 0f the bucketS upon the Water. . 
Warious dewiceSandarrangementShaWebeen 
attempted for pr0ducing a fish-tail action in 
connection With a paddle-Wheel, Such aS c0n 
Structing the bucketS or fl0atS in an X or V 
form; but all are objectionable, as far aS I 
have been able to learn, on account of the fail 
ure of these dewices to take proper hold upon 
My imwention consistS of tWo circular rimS 
or blades, one of Which is Secured to each edge 
of the Wheel-rim, So that it projects from the 
Wheel all around itS circumference. The pr0 
jecting portions of these rimS or blades I crimp. 
or bend at regular interwals in OppoSite direc- | 
tions, so that the edges of the inWard-beut 
portionS of the tWo bladleS are opp0Site each 
other, and meet midWay betWeet the tWo SideS 
of the Wheel, while the outWard bent or crimped 
portionS form lip-like projectionS on each Side 
of the Wheel. The crimpS are opposite each 
other, aS Stated, S0 that a SerieS 0f flaring 0r 
mouth-shaped openings or cawities are formed, 
which alternate with the imWard-crimped por 
tions, all as hereinafter more fully deScribed. 
Referring to the accompanying draWings, 
Figure 1 is an edge wieW of the rim of the 
wheel. F'ig. 2 is a side wiew, showing skele 
LetArepresent a wheel, which, in thepresent 
instance, is represented aS being Solid; but in 
Some "instances it Will be made open in the 
manner of a Spoke or Skeleton Wheel, aS here 
imafter more fully stated. This wheel is 
mounted upon a driwing-Shaft, B. 
To the periphery of the Wheel A, on each 
| { $ide, I sectire a circular rim or blade, g..."The ? "" 
immer edge of each rim or blade is plain,-SO.  
that it can be easily fitted against and Secured  
to the side of the Wheel-rim, while the outer or  
projecting portion is alternately bent or crimp- '.'.' 
ed in opposite directions at regular interwals. - 
The inward bent or crimped portion  of the '''... . 
two opposite-rims meet imidWay between the '' : '.' 
| sides of the wheel, as represented, While.*the' .. 
outwardly bent or crimped portion f forms lip- * ~ 
like projectionS on each side. 
This arrangement providesa.Series of mouth-'' ? 
Shaped openings or buckets, While the inter 
wening inward bends or crimps form arches or 
bridges ower the rim or face of the wheel A. 
This rim or face I gouge or holloW out, So aS 
t0 form a concaWe channel, &, extending en 
tirely around the Wheel, thus providing a 
throat or paSSage of couSiderable Size under 
neath each arch or bridge, which connects the 
line of mouth - shaped buckets. The outer 
edge of each rim or blade 0 Will then be ser 
pentine, aS Sh0Wm. 
This prOwideS a peculiar shaped bucket, 
Which preSentS a, COntinually-changing angle 
of Surfaces, both inside and outside, to act 
upon the Water When the Wheel is in motion. 
The Widened or flaring mouth-shaped buck 
etS Will receive a larger quantity of Water than 
caI readily paSS through the thr0atS under the 
bridges, S0 that the Water is condensed in the 
thr0atS aS long aS the Wheel iS in the Water 
under motion. AS the Wheel m0weS, the oppo 
Site inside SurfaceS of the Submerged bucketS - 
receivre the preSSure, and the Water cloSeS 
0wer the Submerged bridgeS, thuS preSenting a 
(20ustantly-Shifting pulling-Surface, Which actS 
to and from the middle line of the bugketS OI' 
wheel-rim, like the motion of a Scull-0ar or 
fish-tail. The Water Which is c0ndenSed in 
the Submerged throat dischargeS through the 
thr0at int0 the next, bucket aS it riseS ab0We 
the Surface of the Water, thus maintaining the 
action as long aS the Wheel rotateS. * 
The Solid Wheel, represented by A is eSpe 
cially adapted aS a, Stern-Wheel for a riWer 
b0at or for pr0pelling a weSSel 0m c0mpara 
tively calm Waters; but for an Ocean. WeSSel 
Where large WaWeS are to be encountered, I 
ton-frame, 
? 
~ 
2 
2041 180 
- provide a spoke or skeleton wheel, because it 
bucket aS long as the bucket moves in the 
offers 'leSS resistance to Side or quartering 
Water; but aS Soon as it; emerges the Water is 
Wa.weS. In this case I provide a concave face 
at once discharged, so that there is no lifting 
for the Wheel, Which is preferably made of 
of the Water by the rising buckets. 
Sheet metal. 
This wheel is also adapted for operating in 
A Wheel of this construction, half as Wide as 
WaterS in Which ice is floating, as its great 
an ordinary paddle-wheel, has a large area of 
Strength and peculiar form = render it practi 
acting - Surface to come in contact With the 
cally proof from injury should it come in com 
Water, So that I am able to reduce the width 
tact With floating cakes of ice. 
of the wheel-houses and guards of the weSSel 
Hawing thus described my imwention, what 
to half their usual size without Sacrificing any 
I claim, and desire t0 Secure by Tetters Pat 
of the effectiveness of the wheel. This alone 
ent, iS 
is an important item. Again, the conforma 
The paddle-wheel A provided with two pro 
tion of the Wheel is Such that the opening in |jecting rimS or blades, c 0, one of which is Se 
the guards in which it* moweS can be built 
cured to the "periphery of the wheel on each 
close up to itS SideS and bucketS, S0 that no 
Side, the projecting portion of each blade be 
' img alternately bent in opposite directions, S0 
Water will be carried above the line of the 
Shaft, thus permitting the engineer to paSS 
aS to form alternate arches or bridges e, and 
around the wheel for the purpose of oiling the 
flaring or mouth-shaped cawities or buckets.7; 
bearingS or perform other work while it is in 
Substantially as and for the purpose abowe 
Operation. 
described. 
It will be moticed that the bucketS enter and 
In WitneSS Whereof I have hereunto set my 
emerge from the water edgewise, So that they 
produce no jar or concussion. Each flaring 
mouth-shaped bucket Will receive and admit, 
a larger amount of Water than can paSS through 
the throat back of it, so that the water is com 
densed in the throat, and acts like a Solid 
J. V. DEVRY, 
WILL, V, SCHWARTZ. 
ADAM WINGARD. '[L. S.] 
~ 
hand and Seal. 
' 
Witnesses : 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204280.txt	A, S, BAKER, 
Pump, 
No. 204,280. 
Patented, May 28, 1878. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
? 
N.PERS, Photo-trogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALLEN S. BAKER, OF EVANSVILLE, WISCONSIN. 
4 
IMPROVEMENT IN PUMPs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204,2S0, dated May 28, 1878; application filed 
February 5, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALLEN S. BAKER, of 
Evansville, in the county of Rock and State 
of Wisconsin, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Pumps; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full and exact 
description of the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon. 
Heretofore great difficulty has been experi 
enced in the working of the pump-cylinders 
of iron pumps in Wells troubled with loose 
sand, as is frequently the case in drilled Wells, 
since the hinged leather check-valve, now gen 
erally used in the lower end of the cylinder, 
soon becomes stiff and hard, and does not 
close well on its seat, and prevents the water 
from passing into the cylinder on one side, 
where the hinge is situated, thus allowing the 
sand to collect under and around the hinge, 
and preventing the valve from closing. The 
hinged valves also frequently break off and 
have to be replaced. The plunger-valves, be 
ing constructed so as to come in close contact 
With the arms of the cage or plunger, are lia 
ble to catch or miss strokes by the working of 
any small obstructions, such as particles of 
sand, between the edge of the valve and the 
arms of the spider, all of which render the 
Working of the pump uncertain, necessitating 
frequent repairs. 
The object, therefore, I have in view is th 
production of a well-cylinder for iron pumps, 
more especially designed for deep wells, and 
such as are troubled with sand, which will 
have valves constructed so as to make a suffi. 
ciently large opening for the water to pass 
them freely with the minimum rise, thus allow 
ing the valves to close quickly with but little 
jar; and also constructed so that the water 
Will flow equally on all sides of the valves, 
and so that they will stand when raised en 
tirely clear of the valve-seat, the opening be 
low the valve, and the sides of the cage, and 
cannot be disarranged by sand or other small 
obstructions. The lower or check valve is 
made of cast-iron, and its leather facing is 
secured to the valve by a screw, which is ar 
ranged so that it requires no rubber or other 
packing at its head to prevent leakage around 
the screw. 
My invention therein consists in construct 
ing the plunger in two parts, screwed together, 
the upper part or yoke having a hollow hub, 
in combination with the plunger-valve work 
ing on a seat in the plunger below this hub, 
and provided with an upwardly-projecting 
stem sliding in the said hub; and, further, in 
the combination, with the yoke forming the 
upper part of the plunger and its hollow hub, 
of the peculiar plunger-valve, as fully herein 
after explained. 
To enable others skilled in the art to use 
my invention, I proceed to describe the same, 
having reference to the drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of the 
cylinder, the valves, plunger, and rod; Fig. 2, 
a top view of the screw-cap which fits on the 
lower end of the cylinder, with the packing 
removed, showing the lower valve and its 
guiding-spider; and Fig. 3, a separate perspec 
tive view of the plunger-valve. 
Like letters denote corresponding parts in 
all the figures. 
A is the shell of the cylinder, made of cast 
iron, and of sufficient length to allow the 
plunger to work freely within it. Its upper 
end is provided with a cap, (not shown) which 
is connected by tubing when the cylinder is 
in use with the pump-standard. The lower 
end of the cylinder is screw-threaded exter 
nally to receive the screw cap or nut B. The 
upper portion a of this cap B is enlarged, to 
allow it to screw over the lower end of the 
cylinder, forming on the inside of the cap a 
shoulder, af, the internal screw-thread of the 
cap extending down to this shoulder. The in 
terior of the cap is beveled in Wardly and 
downwardly from the shoulder a? to form an 
inclined bearing-suface, b, for the ends of the 
spider-arms. From this bearing-surface the 
bore of the cap extends down to the valve-seat 
c, which is slightly beveled inwardly toward 
the hole through the bottom of the cap. The 
cap B is connected with tubing running to the 
bottom of the Well in the usual manner, and 
has its lower exterior cast in a hexagonal or 
other angular form, whereby it can be grasped 
with a Wrench to turn it into place on the end 
of the cylinder A. 
C is a three-arm spider, having the ends of 
its arms d beveled and resting On the bearing 
 
2042.s0 
surface b. Below this spider is the lower or 
check valve D, whose stem e passes upwardly 
through the center of the spider. This valve 
is made of cast metal, in the form shown, and 
has no stem or other projection on its lower 
side or face. Upon the face of the valve is 
placed a circular piece of leather packing, f, 
which is secured in place by a small brass 
screw, f, having a metal washer, f', under its 
head to give sufficient bearing on the packing. 
The hole bored for this screw.fi does not go 
through the valve, as heretofore, but extends 
up into the centerofthe stem e, so that the valve 
can be made as light as desired without danger 
of leakage around the screw, and without the 
necessity of packing the head of the screw 
with rubber or other packing to prevent such 
leakage. After the spider C and valve D are 
placed in position in the cap B a packing-ring, 
g, is dropped onto the shoulder af, and in 
screwing the parts together the lower end of 
the cylinder presses upon this packing, mak 
ing a water-tight joint, and at the same time 
holding the spider rigidly in position, insur 
ing the certain action of the valve. 
It will be observed that this valve D works 
entirely clear of the sides of the cap, and al 
lows the water to enter the cylinder equally 
on all sides of the valve; and the space below 
and on the sides of the valve being entirely 
clear and free, the valve can be made with the 
least possible amount of rise, so as to work 
quickly and with but little jar. The Working 
of this valve cannot be impaired by any small 
obstructions which may pass through the 
strainer, since the spider always maintains the 
valve in a vertical position, and, in addition, 
the obstructions would pass the valve, the 
space below and around it being clear, as be 
fore stated. 
E is the plunger, cast in cylindrical form, 
and fitted to the bore of the cylinder A. In 
the top of the plunger is screwed the brass 
yoke E, having a flange, h, between which 
and the upper end h' of the plunger the leather 
packing i is securely held. The yoke E has 
a central hub, k, supported by arms k', around 
which the water passes on the downstroke of 
the plunger, as shown by arrows in Fig. 1. 
Into the hub k, from the top, is screwed the 
sucker-rod F. 
The interior of the plunger is cast with an 
annular valve-seat, l, directly below the brass 
yoke, which valve-seat is ground smooth, and 
may be beveled slightly inwardly. Upon this 
valve-seat rests the plunger-valve G. This 
valve is constructed of a flat circular disk, m, 
which is ground to rest closely on the seat l, 
and has a stem, n, rising upwardly from its 
center. The hub k of the yoke E is extended 
downwardly, and is bored out to receive this 
stem in, which works therein. The valve-stem 
n is futed, or has grooves n in its sides, con 
necting with grooves n in the raised central 
portion of the valve around the base of the 
stem, so that the water will pass freely into 
and out of the hub k around the stem, permit 
ting such stem to work easily in the hub. This 
valve G has no projection or obstruction on 
its under side, and is supported by its stem in 
a vertical position free of the sides of the plun 
er. The Water passes freely by this valve 
equally on all sides, and it cannot be tipped 
or disarranged by obstructions. By the con 
struction of this valve G it is only required to 
have a small rise to allow the water to pass, 
and can be moved from one position to the 
other quickly and without appreciable jar. 
As thus constructed, my deep-well cylinder 
is not liable to get out of order, lasts long, 
and is certain and efficient in its operation. 
Having thus fully described my device and 
explained some of its advantages, what I claim 
as new therein, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the brass yoke E", 
screwed into the top of the plunger E, and 
having the central hollow hub k, of the plun 
ger-valve G., having its stem in projecting into 
such hollow hub, the said valve working be 
tween the lower end of the hub and the valve 
seat l, directly below in the plunger, con 
structed and arranged substantially as de 
scribed and shown. 
2. The combination, with the hub k of the 
brass yoke E', of the plunger-valve G, having 
stem in, provided with grooves nin', constructed 
and arranged substantially as described and 
shown. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
21st day of January, 1878. 
ALLEN S. BAKER. 
:: 
- 
Witnesses: 
J. S. McKENNEY, 
J. W. PHIFER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204380.txt	H. F. SCHMIDT. 
Beer-Cooler. 
No. 204,380. 
- 
Patented May 28, 1878. 
SS 
(SessNS 
symmemora-R7R 
22 - S 
a 
strees SS 
- 
sees are 
nSaaS 
2%. 27a- o 
NVENTOR 
w 
ATToRNEY 
N, PETERs, PHOTO-luthOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D. c. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
H. FRANK SCHMIDT, OF QUINCY, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BEER COOLERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204,3S0, dated May 28, 1878; application filed 
April 20, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, H. FRANK SCHMIDT, of 
Quincy, in the county of Adams and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and valuable 
Improvement in Beer-Coolers; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the construction and 
operation of the same, reference being had to 
the annexed drawings, making a part of this 
specification, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon. 
The drawing is a representation of a top 
view of my improved beer-cooler, partly in sec 
tion. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in dvices for cooling beer and ale. 
The nature of the invention consists in com 
bining with a beer-cooling pipe having a con 
tinuous central wooden core, forming with the 
said pipe a narrow annular beer-passage, a 
jacket surrounding a portion of said pipe, and 
provided with an independentinduct and educt 
for water, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
forth. 
In the annexed drawings, the letter. A des 
ignates a retroverted pipe of any suitable 
metal, composed of the parallel parts ( and 
the bent coupling-sections b, connected togeth 
er in the usual way, and forming tight joints 
with each other. 
Inside of the pipe A is a wooden rod, B, of 
less diameter than said coil, and forming 
therewith a shallow annular beer-passage, r. 
The rod B is continuous, and is composed of 
the straight sections c and the curved sec 
tions d. 
The pipe-sections a b and the rod-sections c 
dare concentric with each other, respectively, 
and they are maintained in this relative posi 
tion by means of the radial arms i, projecting 
from the rod-sections, and bearing against the 
inner Wall of the pipe. All or a portion of 
this pipe may be placed in an ice-box, C, be 
ing supported by a suitable cradle, e, therein, 
and designed to be covered with ice. 
D indicates a metallic jacket, covering a 
portion of this pipe A-say one or more bends 
thereof.-and connected by an ordinary pipe 
with a spigot or cock of a water-supply pipe 
or cistern, at f, and having a distinct educt, g, 
at a distance from the beer-educt h sufficient 
to prevent casual mixture of the liquids issu 
ing from the said educts. The wooden core 
rod B causes the beer to pass through the pipe 
A in a thin annular stream, and it is thus the 
more effectively acted upon by the ice in the 
box. The beer reaches the jacketed portion 
of the pipe in a partly-cool condition, and it 
is then subjected to the cooling action of a 
continuously-flowing stream of water in the 
jacket, so that it issues from the educt h in a 
cold state, the Water escaping Warm from the 
eductg. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with a beer-cooling pipe 
having a central continuous Wooden core ex 
tending through it, and forming a narrow an 
nular passage next the pipe-wall, of a jacket 
surrounding said pipe, and having an induct 
and educt for the water, substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two Witnesses. 
H. FRANK SCHMIDT. 
Witnesses: 
ERNST SCHWARZ, 
MILLARD MYERS. 
.." 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204480.txt	H. S. CATE, 
Chair-Seat and Back. 
No. 204,480. 
Patented June 4, 1878. 
 
O 
  
E 
WITNESSES 
4.4%ally 
-6-8%-voe 
n 
INVENTOR: 
e1%26/27 
* M-1 wicz 
AORNEYS, 
NPeters, Photo.uTHORAPHER, WASNGTON, DC. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY S. CATE, OF MILLERSTOWN, (BARNHARTS MILLS. P. O.) PA. 
MPROVEMENT IN CHAR SEATS AND BACKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204,450, dated June 4, 1878; application filed 
February 19, 1878, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, H. S. CATE, of Millers 
town, Butler county, Pennsylvania, have in 
vented an Improvement in the Seats andBacks 
of Chairs, of which the following is a specifi 
cation: 
Figure 1 of drawing is a front elevation, 
partly in section; Fig. 2, a top view, partly in 
section; Fig. 3, a detail section of back. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the drawing, and then pointed 
out in the claim. 
In the drawing, A represents the frame of 
chair; B, the seat or back, formed of any suit 
able material; and D, an intervening strip of 
rubber or other elastic substance. The latter 
is continuous, and gives a degree of spring 
that furnishes a comfortable yielding support 
to the body, is more economical than springs 
or stuffing as usually employed, and is withal 
of sufficient strength to be very durable. 
Having thus described all that is necessary 
to a full understanding of the invention, what 
I claim as new and of my invention is 
The combination, with frame A and seat or 
back B, of the intervening continuous elastic 
strip D, as and for the purpose specified. 
HENRY S. CATE. 
Witnesses: 
E. CROSSMAN, 
G. B. MCCALMONT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204580.txt	J. KIRBY, Jr. 
I,000m Otive Head-Light. 
3 Sheets-Sheet I. 
No. 204,58O. 
Patented June 4, 1878. 
 
 
 
 
 
fi2 i22x sy 
SSX24-in-E2----CS2 in 2E7%Se 
2222222 
af-enzzisz 
S 
C 
 
MPETERS, PHOTO-LIHOGRAPHER, washingtoN, Dic 
 
J. KIRBY, Jr. 
L 000m Otive Head-Light, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 204,58O. 
Patented June 4, 1878. 
 
t est 
5-644 (76eaself- 
p-4 4.e. 
w nvert too 
36. 264. 
32. 
J. KIRBY, Jr. 
Omotive Head-Light, 
I, OC 
No. 2O4,58O. 
Paten 
ted June 4, 1878. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN KIRBY, JR, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO POST & CO, 
OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN LocoMotive HEAD-LIGHTS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204,5S0, dated June 4, 1878; application filed 
May 6, 1878, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN KIRBY, Jr., of 
Cincinnati, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Locomotive Head 
Lights, of which the following is a specifica 
tion: 
This invention, as regards some of its fea 
tures, relates more especially to locomotive 
head-lights in which the reflector, with its at 
tached lamp, is so mounted in the case that it 
may be turned from the position in which it 
faces the bull's-eye or glass front of the case 
to a position in which it will face either of the 
sides or back thereof, to afford ready access to 
the burner without sliding the reflector out of 
the case, as well as to provide for changing 
the direction of the rays of light. 
My improvement consists, first, in mounting 
a turning reflector, by means of a number of 
standards or legs, upon a fixed circular track. 
or Way, for the purpose of giving to such re 
flector a broad, and consequently a firm, sup 
port without any central pivot, as hereto 
fore used for connecting a reflector-carrying 
platform to the base on which it revolves, 
and for preventing its lateral displacement; 
second, in combining with a turning-reflec. 
tor thus mounted on a circular track or way 
a Vertically-adjustable screw or equivalent 
means, operating in such a way that on turn 
ing the reflector to face the glass front of the 
case it is automatically depressed slightly, 
so that its standards will be forcibly pressed 
down on the track or base on which they rest, 
and thus the reflector will obtain a more rigid 
support, preventing its wabbling under the 
vibrations of the locomotive, while on turning 
the reflector to face in a different direction the 
pressure on the standards will be relieved, so 
that it will move freely; third, in so connect 
ing the lamp and oil-reservoir to the reflector 
that they may be readily detached therefrom 
for repairing or cleaning purposes; fourth, in 
combining the hand-hole in the case through 
which access may be had to the lamp with a 
glass-covered opening, so that the person in 
charge may look through this glass in light 
ing and manipulating the burner, avoiding the 
necessity of opening the large door of the case, 
which is very objectionable when the locomo 
tive is running and in windy weather; fifth, 
in providing the oil-reservoir with a peculiar 
form of indicator, showing the level of the oil 
by which the reservoir may be properly filled; 
sixth, in certain other details of construction, 
which will be fully set forth in the ensuing 
description, and specifically pointed out by 
separate claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section of my improved locomotive 
head-light, showing the reflector facing the 
glass front of the case. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view of the reflector and its adjuncts. Fig. 3 
is a perspective view of the locomotive head 
light, showing the reflector turned so as to face 
the door in the side of the case, Figs. 4 to 11, 
respectively, illustrate certain details of my 
locomotive head-light, which will be more par 
ticularly referred to hereinafter. 
Likeletters of reference indicate correspond 
ing parts in all the figures. 
The case A may be constructed in the usual 
form, the front side having a protruding rim, 
A, in the end of which the glass plate A is 
secured, while one of the sides is provided 
with a door, A, large enough to admit of the 
passage of the reflector B and its adjuncts. 
The base of the case is provided with fixed 
dovetailed ways a a, Fig. 1, which are prefer 
ably made of metal, to receive the base C, on 
which the reflector is mounted. The ways 
face the side door, so that the base C. With the 
reflector may be slid in and out through the 
doorway of the case. 
The back of the case may also be provided 
with an arm-hole, through which access can 
be had to the burner, the hole being covered 
by a slide. 
Heretofore it has been customary to make 
the base-plate of the reflector of wood. This 
is an inferior mode of construction, because 
the Wood is liable to warp out of shape, ren 
dering it difficult to slide the reflector in and 
Out. 
To obviate this objection I make the base C 
of metal. In the example shown this base is 
an open frame-work, with a circular track, C, 
of large diameter, which is connected by ribs 
with an elevated central hub, e. 
 
 
2 
204,5S0 
reflector passes through the slot in yoke g of 
The front or mouth of the reflector is Sup 
the rear standard. The standard is secured 
ported upon the standards or legs FF, con 
by a nut, b, having a convex face fitting a 
nected by a bar, F, which is secured to the 
concave seat in a washer, b, so that the nut 
flange of the reflector, and terminates in lat: 
may have a uniform bearing, even though the 
erally-projecting lugs ff, for the support of 
yoke of the standard does not stand at right 
the extreme ends of the oil-reservoir. The 
angles to the stem of the reflector. 
rear end of the reflector is supported upon the 
The burner requires to be very nicely ad 
legs G. G., which branch off from the stem G', 
justed with reference to the reflector to give 
the upper end of which terminates in a yoke, 
the best results. To effect this, and at the 
g, embracing the hub b of the reflector, which 
same time to provide for a ready removal and 
is secured thereto in the manner presently to 
reattachment of the lamp, I connect the oil 
be described. The legs F and G are provided 
reservoir, to which the burner is rigidly fixed, 
with rollers, as shown, which rest upon the 
as usual, to the reflector in the following man 
circular track C of the base C, and reduce the 
ner: The ends of the oil-reservoir K are sup 
friction in turning the reflector. 
ported upon the forked lugs.fof bar F of legs 
In order that the supporting legs or stand 
F, and are secured thereto by bolts and nuts, 
ards of the reflector may be pressed firmly 
the bolts passing through tubes f" in the reser 
down on the track or base-plate, and again 
voir and the forks of the lugs, so that on sim 
relieved on turning the reflector from the po 
ply loosening the nuts the reservoir may be 
sition where it faces the glass front of the case, 
detached from these lugs. 
I provide the following means: ID refers to a 
screw, adapted to freely slide up and down in 
The rear or curved end of the reservoir is 
secured under the feet of plate L, suspended 
the hub c of the circular track C. Its upper 
from the hub or stem b of the reflector, by 
end has a ball-shaped head, fitting a socket in 
means of bolts k, which pass through tubes 
bar E, while its lower end is square, fitting a 
k' in the reservoir. The position of the burner 
square hole in fixed spider D'. A nut, H, is 
with relation to the reflector is determined by 
screwed on the threaded portion of screw D, 
the respective bolt-tubes f" and k', which are 
below hub c. This nut may have the form of 
inserted and soldered fast in fitting the reser 
a wheel or disk, provided with a circular se 
voir on the reflector, and which protrude more 
ries of slots, h, any one of which may be en 
or less from the reservoir to bear with their 
gaged by a pawl, H, attached to one of the 
protruding ends, respectively, against lugs f 
legs F of the reflector, so that on turning the 
and against the feet of plate L. 
latter the nut will turn with it and cause the 
Instead offitting thereservoir on the reflector 
screw D to either ascend or descend, accord 
in the manner just described, it might be held 
ing as the reflector is turned in one direction 
between nuts on the bolts. 
or the other. The slots in nut H admit of a 
It will be observed that by removing the 
proper adjustment, so that the reflector, 
nuts of the bolts which secure the front 
when it faces the glass front of the case, 
ends of the reservoir, and then removing the 
will be pulled down by the ball - head of 
nuts from bolts k, the reservoir can be 
screw D, so as to forcibly press its legs down 
easily removed by first moving it down at 
on the track. The screw ID is connected by 
the rear end to free it from bolts k and the 
ball-and-socket joint with the bar E, to admit 
burner from the reflector, and then moving it 
of proper adjustment of the reflector, and to 
sidewise to draw it off the lugs which support 
provide against irregularities in mounting the 
its front ends; also, that it can be as readily 
parts. It should be clearly understood that 
reattached without requiring readjustment, 
this screw D does not serve as a pivot for the 
because the projecting bolt-tubesk govern the 
reflector, but merely as a means for forcing its 
position of the reservoir, and consequently of 
standards or legs hard down on the circular 
track on its assuming a position facing 
the burner, with reference to the reflector. 
The bar E, through which the screw D acts 
the glass front; and that other means, not 
on the reflector, is loosely connected with the 
centrally disposed, might be substituted for it 
to accomplish this purpose, although the use 
latter. 
Its front end enters and rests in a 
socket on bar F, while its rear end, which is 
of the centrally-disposed screw is the best 
bifurcated to pass around the burner, embraces 
means that I have devised so far. As the re 
the legs and rests upon the feet of plate I. It 
flector reaches its proper position in front of 
is curved to lie close against the curved sur 
the glass front of the case, one or more of its 
supporting-legs bring up against a stop or 
face of the reflector. 
The pitch of the reflector can be regulated 
stops, c, on the track C', and a spring-latch, I, 
by loosening nut band then tilting it on its 
pivoted on one of the legs, falls behind a fixed 
front standards or legs by moving its stem b 
detent, c, on the side of the track, so that the 
up or down in the slotted yokeg of its rear 
reflector will be locked and prevented from 
standards or legs. Such adjustment might 
moving in any direction. Where the case has 
throw the rear standards off the track, to pro 
a door in each side, and it is desirable to pro 
vide against which they are also adjustably 
wide for turning the reflector to face either 
secured, as follows: At the upper end the yoke 
door, the fixed stop or stops c are omitted, 
and a latch, like latch I, substituted therefor. g of these rear standards or legs has a small 
As already stated, the hub or stem b of the teat, i', to bear against plate L, and in the 
 
2045S0 
3 
lower end of the yoke set-screws i i are tapped 
to bear, also, against plate L. By screwing the 
set-screws in or out the legs G can be readily 
adjusted to run true on the track, while the 
yoke of said legs can always be firmy clamped 
to plate L by nut b, to make a rigid connec 
tion. 
The door A of the case has the usual hand 
holeM, covered by a suitable lid, M. Through 
this hole access may be had to the lamp with 
out the necessity of opening the large door, 
the hole being made of such a size that the 
operator's arm will about close it when insert 
ed, so as to exclude air-drafts. Through this 
hole the lamp may be lighted, and the burner 
manipulated through the opening in the back 
of the case after the reflector has been turned 
to face this side of the case. In order that 
the operator may see into the case from the 
most favorable direction during these manip 
ulations, I form a small window or peep-hole, 
N, in door A. above the hand-hole. For con 
venience, a match-safe, N', may also be at 
tached to the interior face of door A. 
The reservoir Kis supplied with oil through 
a suitable neck, near which it is provided with 
a device for indicating the level of the oil in 
it. This indicator consists of a glass tube, O, 
fitted to enter a well in the reservoir, and con 
taining a float, O, having a stem terminating 
in a head distinctly visible through the glass 
tube above the reservoir. The glass tube is 
confined in a metal cage, O', the lower head 
of which is perforated to admit the oil into 
the glass tube. That portion of the caged 
tube which dips into the reservoir is encircled 
by a slotted sleeve, O, to prevent the splash 
of the oil due to the motions of the locomotive 
from seriously affecting the float. 
The foregoing describes what I consider the 
best modes of giving effect to the various fea 
tures of my invention; but these modes may 
be modified in various ways not heretofore 
alluded to without departing from the princi 
ple of my invention, and I do not, therefore, 
confine myself to the specific details set forth. 
It is also apparent that some features may 
be used without others and in other connec 
tions. For example, the feature of forcing the 
reflector hard down on a fixed support to give 
it great rigidity and steadiness may be applied 
to a turning reflector not mounted on a track. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A locomotive head-light the reflector of 
which is supported upon a circular track or 
way, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
2. In a locomotive head-light, the combina 
tion, substantially as specified, of the reflector, 
the standards or legs thereof, and a circular 
track or way, forming the support and guide 
for said legs. 
3. In a locomotive head-light, the combina 
tion, substantially as specified, of a turning 
reflector and a screw or equivalent means for 
forcing the reflector hard down upon its fixed 
support on assuming the position in which it 
faces front. 
4. In a locomotive head-light, the combina 
tion, substantially as specified, of a turning 
reflector, the circular track for supporting it, 
the traveling screw loosely connected with the 
reflector, and the nut connected to turn with 
the reflector to traverse and move the said 
SCeW. 
5. In a locomotive head-light, the combina 
tion, substantially as specified, of a turning 
reflector, the circular track for supporting it, 
the traveling screw loosely connected with the 
reflector, the nut on said screw, and a pawl for 
connecting the nut with the reflector. 
6. The sliding base of the reflector, com 
posed of a metallic frame provided with a cir 
cular track, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
7. In a locomotive head-light, the combina 
tion, substantially as specified, of the turning 
reflector, the circular track, the stop or stops 
thereon, and the latclifor locking the reflector. 
8. The oil-reservoir detachably secured to a 
reflector for ready removal and replacement, 
substantially as and for the purposes speci 
eC. 
9. The oil - reservoir fitted around the re 
flector, with its ends bolted to forked brackets 
thereof, and its curved rear part bolted to a 
suspension-plate, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
10. A locomotive head-light the reflector of 
which is adjustably secured to its support at 
the rear end, substantially as specified, so that 
its pitch can be regulated by moving its rear 
end up or down. 
11. In a locomotive head-light, the combi 
nation, substantially as specified, of the re 
flector mounted on a circular track, the rig 
idly-secured front standards or legs thereof, 
the rear standards or legs, to which the re 
flector is adjustably secured, and the set 
screws for adjusting said rear legs to the 
track. 
12. In a locomotive head-lighthaving a turn 
ing reflector, the window in the door or side 
of the case, arranged with reference to a hand 
hole therein, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
13. In a locomotive head-light, the combina 
tion, substantially as specified, of the oil-res 
ervoir, the covered glass tube dipping into 
and projecting above the same, and the float 
in said tube. 
In testimony of which invention Ihereunto 
set my hand. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN KIRBY, JR. 
JoHN E. JoNEs, 
EDGAR. J. GROSS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204680.txt	J. NEII. 
Liquid Forcing Apparatus, 
No. 204,68O. 
Patented June 11, 1878. 
o'N 
Hill 
 
 
INVENT OF 
24/26% 
ii. FEERS, rhoto-tutoRAPHR, washington, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN NEIL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN LIQUID. FORCING APPARATUS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204,6s0, dated June 11, 1878; application filed 
March 12, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN NEIL, of Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Liquid-Forcing Apparatus; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, which will ena 
ble others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to that class of port 
able tanks used by merchants for holding liq 
uids to be dispensed to customers; and con 
sists of a tank provided with a special appa 
ratus for forcing liquids from barrels or any 
similar vessels into the tank, from the tank 
into a fixed measuring-jar, and therefrom into 
any receptacle, the whole constituting a port 
able apparatus for forcing liquids by the use 
of compressed air. 
The same letters indicate the same parts in 
the accompanying drawings. 
Figure 1 represents a tank with air force 
pump and measuring-jar adjusted. Fig. 2 
represents a vertical cross-section of the tank, 
measuring-jar, and connecting-pipes. Fig. 3 
represents a top view or plan of Fig. 1. Fig. 
- 4 represents a vertical cross-section, illustrative 
of my improvement in the air-pump. Fig. 5 
represents an enlarged view of the lower part 
of the pump's piston and piston-rod with their 
valves. Fig.6 represents bottom view of Fig. 
5. Fig. 7 represents the attachment for trans 
ferring contents of barrels or similar vessels 
into the tank. 
In Figs. 1 and 2, l is the usual lever used in 
pumps, with its fulcrum or pivot at e, and 
having attached the piston-rods p p' by means 
of the joints g q, which, by their operation, 
permit the piston-rods p p' to work through 
the air-tight stuffing-boxes b l' without undue 
friction. The piston H, Fig. 4, is snugly fitted 
to the cylinder A, there being no packing re 
quired, though packing may be used, and has 
through it one or more valveways, r r" r", 
Fig. 6. 
The valve y' is a perforated disk, having 
the piston-rod p' through its perforation, and 
having its lower surface dressed so as to lie 
tightly upon the dressed upper surface of the 
piston, closing thereby the valveways r 
r". 
The piston-rod serves as a guide to the valve, 
upon which it plays, limited in its movement 
by the shoulders and the piston H. The pis 
ton-rods p p' are hollow, and have at their 
lower ends valves, (see , Fig. 6,) which open 
downward, but when at rest are kept closed 
by force of springs. 
In Fig. 1, a a? are outlets for the air from 
the cylinders, which, as indicated by the ar 
rows in Fig. 4, enters through the hollow pis 
ton-rod p' and valve v, thence by force of ac 
tion of the pump through pipe at into tank B. 
The tank B is air-tight when all the ports are 
adjusted, and should be strongly constructed, 
to insure durability. The flow-pipe O leads 
from a very short distance from the bottom of 
the tank up through it into jar C, Fig. 2. The 
air-flow pipe at leads from just within the 
tank into the jar C, Fig. 2. 
The cock c is a combined cut - off for the 
two pipes o and ac', and is so constructed that 
the pipe O may be open and the pipe act closed, 
or the reverse; or both may be closed at the 
same time, but both cannot be opened at the 
Same time. 
The jar C is air-tight except through the 
flow-pipe o', which runs from very near the 
bottom of jar Cup through and out of it, 
The valve t is an ordinary air-valve, for es 
cape of the air from the jar C when liquid 
is flowing in. The jar C may be constructed 
of glass and graduated, or of any suitable 
material or materials and graduated, or hav 
ing graduated register attached or attachable. 
The flow-pipe o and air-flow pipe ac, Fig. 2, 
are fitted into the screw n, so that the pipe o 
and act and measuring-jar may be detached 
from tank. The pump is permanently bolted 
to the tank, but may likewise be detached. 
The stop-cock c may be so constructed as to 
combine the air-valve t by making the cock 
with an air waste or vent, so that when the 
pipe o is open the vent is open, and When the 
pipe 0 is closed the vent is closed; or the stops 
for the two pipes o and ac' and the vent t may 
each be entirely separate from the other. 
The flow-pipe o' is an elongating pipe, slid 
ing tightly in the pipe o', so that it can be 
raised to place a taller vessel under its outlet, 
 
 
2041,680 
and the lower end of o' still be near the bot 
tom of the jar (, so that all the liquid may be 
forced out. 
The screws fits tightly in the tank B, and 
has attached to its top the measuring-stick 
m, to indicate the contents of the tank at any 
time. 
The plug I, Fig. 7, is so constructed as to fit 
air-tight (not necessarily threaded) in the bung 
hole of a barrel or siniilar vessel. The pipes 
o' and r" fit tightly in and pass through plug 
P, the pipe o'extending to or close to the lot 
tom of vessel to which the lug is adjusted. 
In Fig. 4, ne, and ac' indicate two parts of a 
liquid separated by the ascending novel neit 
of the piston H, forming a space between, 
which is filled by air admitted through the 
hollow piston p' and Valve ". 
In the construction aid adjustment of my 
pistons and cylinders, I have in view the use 
of a liquid to answer the purposes of the usual 
packing, the principle involved being that air 
will readily flow or waste where the proper 
liquid will not in detrimental quantities. I 
therefore pour into my cylinders, Fig. 4, a 
sufficient quantity of liquid to keep my pistons 
submerged in any position of their opera 
tion, so that the liquid will intercept the es 
cape of air between the pistons and the cylin 
ders when the former, ascending, are operating 
against the force of the compressed air in talk 
B through piper. 
By this arrangement I am enabled to con 
struct an air-pump combining cheapness and 
durability with thorough efficiency in a remark 
able degree. 
In the reduction of this principle to practice 
two entirely new features are invoved. First, 
the intentional formation of the air-space be 
tween the body of liquid above the piston and 
that below in the cylinder, Fig. 4; second, 
the outlet a', so constructed and located at any 
point in the cylinder as to admit the escape 
of the air filling the said air-space, and not the 
said liquid. And I should regard an opening 
with check-valve leading into the cylinder for 
admission of air beneath a submerged piston 
as the mechanical equivalent of my hollow 
piston-rod p' and valve ; and I should regard 
an air-outlet with clheck-valve opening into 
the air-space aforesaid as the mechanical 
equivalent of the valve r" and air-escape ('. 
The operation of my apparatus may be de 
scribed as follows: By working the lever limo 
tion is imparted to the piston H, which, by its 
ascending movement, tends to create a vac. 
uum in the cylinder beneath, but which is re 
lieved by the air flowing in through the hol 
low piston-rod p' and valves. Instantly upon 
reversal of the movement of the piston the 
valve v closes, and the air beneath forces up 
the valve ', Fig. 5, and passes through the 
piston. The piston next ascending, the valve 
v' being closed, the air is forced through the 
outlet a' and pipe ac into the tank B. It is 
evident that by continuing this operation, air 
is compressed in the tank B; and if there be 
liquid in the tank, as soon as cock c is opened 
the sufficiently-compressed air forces the lil 
quid up through the pipe o into the jar C, the 
valvet being open. A force may thus be 
stored, so that it will not be necessary to re 
sort to pumping every time a little liquid is 
to be drawn; and the tank B being air-tight, 
much of the danger connected with the sale 
of highly-inflammable liquids is averted. 
As soon as the desired quantity of liquid 
has flowed into the jar C, the cock e is turned, 
the liquid cut off, and the air-pipe a' is opened. 
The compressed air thereupon flowing into 
the jar, the valvet being closed, the liquid is 
forced out through the flow-pipe o' into any 
receptacle. 
To transfer liquid contents of any barrel or 
similar vessel into tank B, first adjust the 
plug Pinto the bung of said vessel, sitting 
beside the tank, disconnect the pipe a from 
the tank, and adjust it to the pipe ac'. Hav 
ing placed the mouth of pipe o' in any open: 
ing in the tank, by operating the level 
air is compressed in the said vessel, and its 
liquid contents forced therefrom through pipe 
of into the tank, the operation being the 
same as that described for filling jar C. 
What I claim as new, and for which I cle 
sire I letters Patent, is 
1. The cylinder A, provided with air-escape 
a', in combination with the submerged piston 
II within the cylinder A, as described, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. The hollow piston-rod p", provided with 
air-valve c, or their mechanical equivalents, 
in combination with the cylinder A, directly 
fixed to tank B, liquid flow-pipe o, and liquid 
cut-off c, substantially as described, and for 
the purposes set forth. 
3. The hollow piston-rod p', provided with 
valve , or their described mechanical equiva 
lents, in combination with the submerged pis 
ton H and air-escape a?, substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The cylinder A, directly fixed to tank B, 
flow-pipe o, provided with screw N and liquid 
cut-off c, substantially as described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination of the tank B, adjusta 
ble piper, cylinder A, pipes o' and ac", and 
plug P. substantially as described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination of the measuringjar C, 
air-valve t, and flow-pipe o', substantially as 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
7. The combination of tank B, flow-pipe 
o, and graduated measuring-jar C, substall 
E. as described, and for the purpose set 
orth. 
8. The combination of tank B, air-pipe ac", 
jar C, air cut-off c, and pipe o', substantially 
as described, and for the purpose set forth. 
9. The combination of screw Z, measuring 
 
204,680 
3 
rod n, and tank B, substantially as and for my own I affix my signature in presence of 
the purpose set forth. 
10. The combination of jar C and the elon 
gating flow-pipe, consisting of the two pipes 
o' and o', as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
EVERT M. THOMPsON, 
THOMAS WILKENS. 
JOHN NEIL. 
Witnesses: 
C 
l 
two witnesses. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204780.txt	J. A.R. KELL. 
Paper-Bag, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 
No. 204,780. 
Azazz. 
 
Patented June 11, 1878. 
Z244. 
A/2622-eives. 
aee-4 106-e-C, 
772-2/e/222 7. 
22-2-42/2 22. 
PERS, PTO-ITHOGRAPier, was gon. ... c. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2 
J. A.R. KELL. 
Paper-Bag. 
No. 204,78O. 
Patented June 11, 1878. 
Azaz, 2. 
M 
s 
o 
o 
2. 
: 
o 
o 
0. 
 
d O 
s 
d 
8 
g 37. 
8 
o 
o 
o s 
o 
o 
S. 
 
 
 
777/7eeses. 
?. 77.6% 
772 wee (for: 
N. PETERs, Phoro-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES ARKELL, OF CANAJOHARIE, NEW YORK. 
MPROVEMENT IN PAPER BAGS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204,7 so, dated June 11, 1878; application filed 
May 21, 1878, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES ARKELL, of 
Canajoharie, in the county of Montgomery 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Bags; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, making part 
of this specification. 
Previous to my invention it has been cus 
tomary, in the use of satchel-bottom bags or 
sacks, to close up the open or mouth end of 
the bag, after the filling of the latter, by fold 
ing over or tucking in and overlapping and 
pasting or otherwise fastening together the 
material composing the bag, in such a manner 
as to cause the thus-closed mouth end of the 
package to present a condition and appear 
ance substantially similar to those of the or 
dinary satchel-like bottom end; and by an in 
vention of mine, made the subject of an applica 
tion for separate Letters Patent, a bag or sack 
is provided for use the mouth end of which 
may be folded over and fastened together, to 
inclose the contents of the bag, in such a man 
ner that the closed mouth-end of the package 
will present a structure and appearance pecu 
liar to that kind of satchel-bottom made the 
subject of Letters Patent to myself, Benjamin 
Smith, and Adam Smith, dated the 25th day 
of April 1865, and subsequently reissued Feb 
ruary 13, 1872, and again April 30, 1878, in which 
the polygonal end of the package is composed 
of four flap-like portions of the bag material, 
each of which is about rectangular in contour. 
But in the use of the last-mentioned kind of 
bag a difficulty is sometimes encountered, on. 
account of the slits or cuts in the bag-mouth 
the presence of which permits the formation of 
the peculiar sort of package end referred to, 
(with the four rectangular flaps.) 
It is the practice, in filling bags or sacks 
with flour and other analogous ingredients, at 
the mills or manufactories where the material 
to be packed in the bags is made, to perform 
the operation of charging or filling the bags 
through the medium of a mechanical appli 
ance or contrivance of some sort, known as a 
packer, in which there is a sort of implement 
or device which has to be placed within the 
mouth of the bag, and through which de 
scends into the distended bag or sack the 
requisite charge or quantity of flour or other 
material. Now, when this method of filling 
the bags is resorted to it is found that more 
or less difficulty is encountered in entering 
the filler into the slitted bag mouth, (which 
alone can be used to produce the peculiar sort 
of package end referred to,) because portions of 
the slitted mouth-edge are apt to fall inward, 
and either fold down inside and prevent a 
ready filling of the bag, and subsequent closing 
over of the flaps properly, or (especially in 
the use of paper bags) are liable to catch 
against the filler mechanism and induce the 
latter to tear or mutilate the bag. 
Since it is very desirable to have packages 
made up in the peculiar form resulting from 
the use of the slitted-mouth bag, and the mode 
of filling alluded to is very expeditious and 
advantageous, it will be obvious that any 
means by which all difficulty in filling the sort 
of bag-mouth mentioned by the mode and ap 
pliance for charging the bag alluded to can be 
Overcome must be a great desideratum. 
My present invention has for its object to 
provide for use a bag so made that while 
its mouth end offers the same facilities as that 
of the common bag-mouth for charging the 
bag with a filler device, it also possesses the 
capacity for a ready folding over and securing 
together of the material to form the kind of 
package end peculiar to the slitted bag-mouth; 
and to this end and object my invention con 
sists in a bag made with either slits extending 
to within so short a distance of the edge of 
the bag-mouth that said slits may be most 
easily torn out to the edge by a slight pull on 
the material of the bag-mouth, or with rows 
of perforations at the localities usually slitted, 
which so weaken the stock at the desired lines 
that by the fingers of the operative the ma 
terial may be very readily ruptured or severed 
at the lines or rows of perforations, whereby 
the structure of the bag is, in either case, ren 
dered such that while it presents an unbroken 
or continuous mouth-edge, within which the 
filler may be readily entered without danger 
of obstruction by or damage to the bag, to 
charge or fill the latter, as usual, (with ordi 
nary bags,) the slits or cuts necessary to the 
subsequent folding up of the mouth in the 
peculiar manner desired may be either com 
pleted or produced by a slight effort with the 
2 
204, 7 S0 
: 
fingers of the person who has to fold over the 
mouth end of the bag to inclose the material 
with which the sack has been charged. 
To enable those skilled in the art to make 
and use bags embracing my invention, I will 
proceed to describe the latter according to the 
best modes of carrying out the same now 
known to me, and by reference to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication. 
In the several figures I have designated the 
same part or device of the bag by the same 
reference-letter. 
Figure 1 is a view showing one side of a 
bag in the flattened condition in which such 
bags are usually sent to market. Fig. 2 is a 
similar view of a bag, illustrating a modifica 
tion of the invention exhibited at Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is another similar view, showing still another 
mode of carrying out the invention. Fig. 4 is 
a perspective view of the bag seen at Fig. 1, 
but in a distended condition. Fig. 5 is a simi 
lar view, but with the cuts torn out to the 
edge of the mouth, and the two narrower 
sides of the bag folded in; and Fig. 6 is a 
similar view, with the remaining (wider) side 
flaps folded in and down to completely close 
the package around its supposed contents. 
It will be understood that in the bag shown 
at Figs. 1, 4, 5, and 6 the article is presented 
for use in a condition in which the mouth 
edge of the bag is a continuous or unbroken 
one, and that therefore any ordinary filling 
device or appliances may be inserted into the 
mouth of the bag (or may have the latter dis 
tended over it) with the same facility that 
such filling mechanism can be employed in 
filling the ordinary bags. This is obvious by 
reference to Figs. 1 and 4, in which it will be 
seen that the improved bag presents, both in 
its flattened and opened-out conditions, the 
same structure and appearance at the mouth 
edge as found in the common bag-i. e., con 
tinuous or unbroken edge. 
Supposing, now, the improved bag seen at 
Fig. 4 to have been charged with the requi 
site quantity of flour or other material in any 
usual manner, all that is necessary to be done 
by the operative is to tear out or extend the 
slits at b c d to the edge of the mouth, when 
the bag-mouth Will present the peculiar con 
ditions of structure and appearance which are 
necessary to the formation of a package end 
such as made the subject of the other appli 
cation for Letters Patent by me, hereinbefore 
referred to, and such as will have a closed 
mouth end similar to the sort of satchel-bot 
tom made the subject of the patent to which 
I have alluded. The operative now tucks in 
or breaks down and folds inward the two nar 
row sides e f of the bag-mouth into the posi 
tions seen at Figs. 5 and 6, and then folds 
down the portions g and l into the conditions 
seen at Fig. 6, when (after securely pasting or 
otherwise fastening together the overlapped 
portions) the bag-mouth will have been closed, 
and the thus-closed end of the package of 
 
material will present the peculiar structure 
and form illustrated, with four rectangular 
flaps, and be like the satchel-bottom of a bag 
such as shown in the patent referred to. 
It will be understood that if, in lieu of the 
slits a b c d, (shown at Figs. 1, 4, 5, and 6,) 
rows of perforations, such as seen at mo, Fig. 
2, be used, such rows of perforations should 
be located at the same places, and be of the 
same length, as the cuts for which they are 
substituted, and that after the filling of the 
bag the operative has simply to complete the 
partial severance of the bag material at the 
localities of the perforations, and then tear 
the stock clean out to the edge of the mouth, 
when the latter may be folded over and the 
package closed up, just as shown in the case 
of the slitted mouth at Figs. 5 and 6. 
If deemed expedient, the rows of perfora 
tions may be made clear out to the edge of . 
the mouth, as shown at s t, Fig. 3, in which 
case the bag, after filling, will not require any 
tearing by hand, except where the stuck has 
been already partially severed. 
Of course, the amount of uncut stock left in 
any case will depend upon the nature of the 
fabric of which the bag is made, and will be . 
a matter for the exercise of the judgment of 
the manufacturer, it being necessary and de 
sirable only that just enough strength exist 
in the continuous edge of the mouth to with 
stand the strain to which the mouth-edge may 
be subjected by the filler device, and insure 
the proper filling of the bag by any of the 
usual appliances without such a rupture of 
the bag as might either destroy its efficiency 
or impede the closing up of the filled package 
in the desired manner. 
Of course, other means or devices than the 
cuts or perforations may be adopted in place 
of them without departing from the principle 
of my invention, the gist of which rests in a 
bag having the material so weakened at the 
proper lines or places that while a continuous 
mouth-edge (of sufficient strength) is presented 
at the time of charging the bag, the bag-mouth 
may be separated at such lines in a manner to 
permit the formation of separate flap-like por 
tions that may be severally folded inward and 
downward to close the end of the package; 
and the sizes and relative proportions of the 
flaps may, of course, be varied if it be de 
sired to change the shape of the closed end to 
that of a rectangular figure different from that 
I have shown. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
A bag having either cuts or frangible por 
tions at the mouth end, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal this 13th day of May, 1878. 
JAMES ARKELL. L. s. 
In presence of - 
W. N. SMITH, 
P. D. WAN O'LINIDA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204880.txt	A, A, BROOKS & H. D. CR00KER, 
Atmospheric Clothes-Wa, shers, 
No. 204, 88 O. 
Patented June 18, 1878. 
N N N N 
AN 
Na 
 
Witnesses 
by 5 ir 
C, C2, (2) 
-6 (26.4/ 
Au a 4.94 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
k 
ALBERTA. BROOKS AND HEMAN D. CROOKER, OF BATTLE CREEK, MICH. 
MPROVEMENT IN ATMOSPHER C CLOTHES-WASHERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204,SS0, dated June 18, 1878; application filed 
May 2, 1878. 
and serve to allow cool air to be drawn down 
into the chambers e, thus causing a greater 
ebullition in the Water, as the cool air coming 
through the pipes becomes greatly expanded 
upon contact with the surface of the hot wa 
ter. The expansive pressure of this air forces 
the Water through the clothes much more rap 
idly and thoroughly, and also carries the 
clothes up from the bottom of the tub by 
means of its movement when the Washer 
makes its upward stroke. The Washer is 
forced vertically down through the Water up 
on the clothes, and by this downward move. 
ment forces a large volume of air downward 
through them, and after the Washer has made 
its full stroke it is raised vertically, or nearly 
so, through the Water again to any desired 
height. By having the pipes g communicat 
ing with the different chambers it is evident 
that it is not necessary to exert as great a 
power in lifting the washer upward, as the 
air passes down through the pipes and de 
stroys the partial Vacuum. 
Having thus described our invention, We 
In an atmospheric clothes-washer, the coni 
cal body a, divided horizontally by the parti 
tion c, and the space below the partition di 
vided into separate chambers e by the vertical 
partitions d, in combination with the tubes g, 
the lower ends of which reach nearly to the 
lower edge of the body a, substantially as 
shown and described. 
In testimony that We claim the foregoing 
We have hereunto set our hands this 24th day 
of April, 1878. 
claim- 
s 
ALBERT A. BROOKS. 
HEMAN D. CROOKER, 
Witnesses: 
U. G. GILLILAND, 
MARY EASON. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ALBERTA. BROOKS 
and HEMAN D. CROOKER, of Battle Creek, in 
the county of Calhoun and State of Michigan, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Atmospheric Clothes-Washers; and 
We do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use it, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
atmospheric clothes-washers; and it consists 
in dividing the lower part of the washer into 
a number of separate and distinct chambers, 
and providing each chamber with an air-tube, 
that extends some distance above the side of 
the Washer, for the purpose of admitting air 
to the chamber, as will be more fully described 
hereinafter. 
The accompanying drawings represent our 
invention. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of our inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is an inverted view of the same. 
a represents the body of our washer, which 
is preferably made conical, and is provided 
with a socket, b, in its top to receive the han 
dle. Extending horizontally across this frame, 
at any suitable distance above its lower edge, 
is the partition c, as shown. Extending across 
the bottom of this partition 0 are a number of 
vertical partitions, d, which project downward 
to the lower edge of the frame a, and thus di 
vide the lower portion of the frame into any 
desired number of separate and distinct cham 
berse. Passing down through the sides of the 
frame, through the partition c, and almost 
down to the bottom edges of the partitions d, 
are the air-pipes g, there being one air-pipe 
for each chamber. These air-pipes are pref. 
erably made large and tapering at their tops, 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US204980.txt	G. J. KAUTZ. 
IL 0g-Turner. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 204,98O. 
Patented June 18, 1878. 
WITNESSES : 
. 
INVENTOR: 
6 by-e- 
BY 414e 
ATTORNEYS, 
4. PETERs, PHOTO-LithoGRAPHER, washingTON, D.C. 
 
- 
No. 204,98O. 
G. J. KAUTZ. 
Log-Turner. 
Patented June 18, 1878. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Z 'zz. 3 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
. 
. 
. 
. 
a 
7CN 
7SN . 
. 
Attra-v2 
--- 16/ 
2-, 3 
5 T- . 
e 
7 
. 
 
42 
----- SN 
, 
3. 
 
 
  
%N KEK&N 
N S. NS 
WITNESSES : 
%reer 
BY (2. 
 
r is 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE J. KAUTZ, OF EMPORIUM, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN LOG-TURNERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 204,980, dated June 18, 1878; application filed 
April 23, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
shaft r is journaled in the shorter arm of a 
Be it known that I, GEORGE.J. KAUTZ, of right-angled lever, t, and the shaft is moved 
Emporium, in the county of Cameron and by means of the said lever, so as to bring 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
the friction - pulley q into engagement with 
and Improved Log Roller and Turner, of which 
either of the friction-wheels p, and thus oper 
the following is a specification: 
ate either of the windlasses. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved log 
The teeth d are pivoted in a roller, G, that 
turner and roller. Fig. 2 is a front elevation, 
is journaled in the vertically-sliding bar E, 
partly in section. Fig. 3 is a transverse sec 
and said teeth are capable of being folded up 
tion taken on linea ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a de 
ward in the roller as the bar is drawn down, 
tail view, partly in section. Fig. 5 is a trans 
but are carried outward against the shoulder 
verse section taken on line y y in Fig. 4. 
at the lower side of their sockets in the roller 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
as they are brought into engagement with the 
device for rolling and turning logs in saw 
log by the upward movement of the bar E. 
mills. 
The roller G is capable of turning in the 
Referring to the drawing, A is a portion of 
bar E in the direction in which the log moves 
the frame-work of the saw-mill, which sup 
on the saw-mill carriage, and is returned to 
ports the timbers B and the ways C, which are 
its Working position by a spring, ), in the 
placed below and parallel with the timbers B. 
bar E, which engages the pin ac, that projects 
To the Ways C a sliding carriage, D, is fit 
from the roller G. The object of this arrange 
ted. This carriage consists of two portions, 
ment is to permit of moving the log forward 
a b. The part a is fitted to the ways, and 
before moving back the bar E. 
the part b moves in a slot formed in the part 
The operation of my improved log-turner 
a, and both parts are apertured to receive the 
is as follows: The log being delivered to the 
vertically - sliding bar E, which has in its 
frame A, the bar E is raised by throwing 
lower end a pulley, c, and carries the teeth d, 
the friction-wheel q into engagement with the 
by which the surface of the log is engaged. 
wheel p of the windlass k. The chain g is by 
A pulley, c', is journaled in the upper part 
this means wound upon the windlass, and the 
b of the carriage D, and a chain, d, is fast 
bar E is raised. 
ened to the lower part a and runs over a pull 
The log is rolled by the engagement of the 
ley, e, in the frame-work A, and is attached 
teeth d with its outer surface, and the bar E 
to a weight, f, which draws the part b forward 
is constantly drawn forward into engagement 
on the part a, and presses the bar E into en 
with the log by the weightf 
gagement with the log. 
When it is desired to return the bar E to 
The bar E is operated by means of a chain, 
its starting-point, the carriage D is drawn 
g, which is secured to the timber h, that sup 
back by throwing the friction-wheel g into 
ports one end of the ways C, and extends 
engagement with the wheel p of the windlass 
across the frame A, running over the pulley i, 
o, which draws the chain l and returns the 
journaled in the lower portion of the carriage 
Carl'lage. 
D, and under the pulley c in the lower end of 
Having thus described my invention, I 
the bar E, and over the pulley i, journaled in 
claim as new ald desire to secure by Letters 
the carriage on the opposite side of the bar 
Patent 
E; thence around a pulley, i, which is jour 
1. The combination, with a carriage formed 
naled in the timber h of the frame A; then 
of the two parts a, b, operating as described, 
forward to the windlass k, at the end of the 
of the bar E, provided with pivoted teeth d, 
frame A. 
as and for the purpose specified. 
The windlass o is immediately below th 
2. The spring - actuated roller G, carrying 
windlass k, and both are provided with fric 
the pivoted teeth d, in combination with the 
tion-wheels p, which may be engaged one at 
bar E, as herein shown and described. 
a time by the friction-wheel q on the shaft r. 
The shaft r is provided with a driving-pull 
ley, s, which takes power through a belt from 
one of the shafts of the mill. One end of the 
HENRY EDGCOMB, 
GEO, A, WALKER, 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE J. KAUTZ. 
17 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205080.txt	D. HARRIs. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Machine for Making Button-Hole Linings. 
Patented June 18, 1878, 
No. 205,080. 
 
Af 
asi-67A. 
ai/SE 
Aasif 
C&O PSG 
 
 
2 
. 
r 
 
iii. EEE 
W 
 
a 
 
S 
 
 
 
y Z. 
1// 
M 
BW / 
ZZZZZZZZZ, E V / 
H y / A/ 
 
- List 
27 
III, 
2,575, a 
N: peeRS, PHOTO-LHCGRAPHER, WASHING ON, d, C 
D. HARRIS, 
Machine for Making Button-Hole Linings. 
8, 1878. 
No. 205,080. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
(7. 
RA =Ea a 
ty 
 
  
  
  
   
  
  
 
 
 
 
226 
 
N. PETERS, PHoro-LTHOGRAPHER, washNgtoN, D.C. 
D. HARRIS. 
Ma Chine for Making Button-Hole Linings, 
Patented June 18, 1878. 
No. 205,08O. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
72%y, 
 
Zeeeeez. 
1-42, 
8.peers, FHor 
HOGRAPHER, washingtoN, b.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID HARRIS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF HIS 
RIGHT TO JOHN G. COZINE, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN MACHINES FOR MAKING BUTTON-HOLE LININGS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205,0so, dated June 18, 1878; application filed 
September 17, 1877. 
. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DAVID HARRIs, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvementin Machines for Making Button 
Eole Linings from Leather or other suitable 
Material, which improvement is fully set forth 
in the following specification and accompany 
ing drawing, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved machine. Fig. 2 is a detached view of 
the crimping-plate and crimpers. Fig. 2* is a 
detached view, reduced, of the crimping-plate 
and crimpers. Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 are detached 
Views of various operative parts of the mech 
anism. Fig. 7 represents one of the crimping 
and embossing plates or dies. Fig. 8 is a ten 
sion device. Fig. 9 is a side elevation, partly 
in section, of so much of my machine as is 
necessary to represent a modification of the 
means employed for actuating, in part, the 
feeding mechanism. 
A is the bed-frame, consisting of two sills 
ol' ways fitted with grooves or with V-shaped 
ribs, in which or upon which slide certain de 
vices, to be hereinafter.explained. 
B B is the upright portion of the frame, of 
which B is a guiding dovetailed rib. C is a 
sliding carrier, provided with a dovetailed 
groove, fitting accurately the rib B', and actu 
ated by link b and a foot-treadle. C is a 
crimping-plate, attached to the front of the 
carrier and reciprocating with it. This plate 
has upon each side recesses c in arcs of cir 
cles, (of which the two points c are the cen 
ters, respectively,) as indicated by dotted 
lines in Fig. 2. 
D D are crimping-plates, attached to the 
segmental carriers D'D', which are mounted 
in the segmental recesses c in plate C". The 
crimping-plates are actuated by means of links 
d' d', operated by a treadle, E. The lower end 
of the crimper may be notched to engage with 
opposite sides of the bed-frame, and thus limit 
their downward and inward throw. 
d are notches in the inner faces of the 
crimpers to receive needles, for a purpose 
which will be soon explained, and their upper 
corners are formed into circular ears c' c', 
which enter correspondingly-shaped seats cut 
in the central part of a downward extension of 
the plate C. 
In Fig. 2* a circular opening, d, is shown, 
formed partly in this last-mentioned plate and 
partly in the upper corner of the crimpers. F 
is a centering-tongue, attached to the stand 
ard A' at the rear end of the frame. ff are 
needles passing through the standard A', and 
connected at their rear ends to the upper end 
of a lever, G, which is pivoted to the bed 
frame or to an arm extending rearward there 
from. 
G is a link, connecting the lower end of le 
ver G with the upper end of a bell-crank lever, 
H, which is pivoted at h to a bracket depend 
ing from the under side of the bed-frame. H 
is a bail or hook, the legs of which are piv 
oted in sliding carriers H, which are adjust 
ably attached to both sides of the bed-frame 
by means of a slot and set-screw, one carrier 
only being shown in Fig. 1. The closed end 
of the bail or hook is arranged below the free 
end of the horizontal arm of the bell-crank 
arm H. A strap or loop, H, attached to the 
carrier C, lifts the bail H, as will be explained. 
h is a weighted feeding-dog, pivoted to the 
upper end of the vertical arm of the bell-crank 
lever H. 
I is a locking-lever, pivoted in a suitable 
support at the under side of the bed-frame, in 
Such position that the rear end of the horizon 
tal arm of the bell-cranklever may rest upon a 
spur or tooth, i, of the locking-lever when it is 
desired that the needles ffshall be retracted 
to the position shown in Fig. 1. g is a spring, 
connected with lever G, to thrust the needles 
forward when the bell-crank lever is released 
from the locking-lever I. 
Any other form of spring than that shown 
may be employed for this purpose; or a spring 
may be applied to the bell-crank lever H and 
accomplish the same result. 
It is a tripping-lever, operated by link I 
from the foot-treadle E; and it is a spring to 
hold the locking-lever I in engagement with 
the bell-cranklever, except when saidlocking 
lever has been tripped. Link I is provided 
at the lower end with a screw-nut, to regulate 
-- 
 
... 
2 
205,0SO 
the point at which the foot-treadle in its down 
Ward movement shall trip the locking-lever. 
In Fig. 9 I have shown a modification of 
the means employed in lifting the rear end 
of the bell-crank lever H, as follows: P is 
a link, having its upper end slotted, and ad 
justably secured to the carrier C by means 
of Screws p' p', passing through the slot. The 
lower end of link or lifting-rod P is bent in 
Ward at a right angle, and extends trans 
Versely of the bed-plate A below the rear end 
of the bell-crank lever H. p is a guiding 
plate or bracket, secured to the bed-plate, and 
provided with a hole, through which the link 
P'passes, thus serving as a guide for the lower 
part of the link. 
From the above it will be readily understood. 
that the upward movement of the carrier and 
link P lifts the rear end of the bell-crankle 
ver Hinto the position shown in Fig. 9, and 
that the height to which the link thus lifts the 
lever relative to the height or point at which 
the carrier rises may be regulated by means 
of the screws p' p' and the slot in the upper 
end of the link. 
L is a guide, sliding upon the bed-frame, 
and provided with openings, through which 
the needles ff and the centering-tongue pass. 
l l are elastic arms projecting forward from 
guide L. l l are stops secured to the frame 
Work, and projecting inwardly into the path 
of the guide L, to limit the forward movement 
of the guide. Misan arm, pivoted to a stand 
ard,M', and provided with a dovetailed groove, 
in which a bar, m, slides. The link b, which 
actuates the carrier C, is attached to the lower 
part of this bar at n, and the links did are 
attached at their lower ends to a pivot, m, 
near the upper end, a link, e, connecting the 
bar with the treadle E. 
In Fig. 7 I have shown detached one of the 
forms or die between which the button-hole. 
linings are crimped or molded, and in Fig. 1 
the dies are represented properly set up in 
Working position. N N are the dies. Their 
edges are beveled at top and sides, so that 
when placed side by side there is a groove be 
tween each pair. They are provided, near their 
lower ends, with recesses to fit upon the ways A 
A of the bed-plate, and with two holes, in n, for 
the insertion of supporting-rods O O". They 
have also each two smaller holes, n 7, to re 
ceive the needles ff, and a slot, n, through 
which the guiding-tongue F passes. One side 
of each plate is flat; but the other side has 
centrally an embossing-depression, n. 
Rod O has a nut at one end, and carries at 
the other end of the string of dies a tension or 
pressure device, as follows: o is a washer, hav 
ing a set-screw, o', in one side. o' is a spiral 
spring, arranged between Washer 0 and the 
last die of the series. 0 is a tension-loop, 
clasping rod O, the desired friction of the loop 
upon the rod being produced by means of the 
set-screw o' and spring o' at the outer ends of 
the legs of the loop. 0 is a set-screw, passing 
. 
through one leg and impinging upon the other 
leg. 
inis device is operated as follows: After 
the series of dies have been placed on the rods, 
the spring 0 is placed against the last one 
and compressed by the Washer 0, which is 
then fastened temporarily by set - Screw o'. 
The legs of loop o' are then spread apart by 
set-screw o' until the loop can be easily pushed 
to the position shown in Fig. 1, and the set 
screw of turned backward until the loop is 
held to the rod by the full pressure of the 
springo. Theset-screwol is next turned back 
ward, permitting pressure of spiral spring 
o to be exerted upon the tension-loop, when, 
if the tension of the spiral spring has been too 
great, it will be at once relieved by pushing 
the tension-loop from the dies until the fric 
tion of the loop upon the rod stops it. 
- 
The operation of my machine is substantially 
as follows: Supposing the parts to be in the 
position shown in Fig. 1, the rear end of bell 
crank lever H is supported upon the locking 
lever I, and the needles.ffare withdrawn from 
the path of the crimpers. A blank, P, is 
placed transversely of the series of dies. A 
downward movement of the treadle forces the 
plate C and the crimpers D D upon the 
blank, and presses it (the blank) between two 
of the dies, the groove facilitating the proper 
shaping of the blank. This downward move 
ment is continued until the sliding bar in 
reaches the bottom of the groove in the arm 
M and the pivot n is on a line coincident 
with the pivot about which the arm M. vi. 
brates, when the downward movement of the 
carrier C and crimping-plate c' ceases; but a 
further depression of the treadle causes the 
arm M to swing forward upon its pivot, as in 
Fig.6, and thus, through the links did, to close 
the crimpers D D into the position shown in 
Fig. 2* and complete the formation of the 
button-hole lining. Just before the downward 
motion of the treadle ceases, the link I trips 
the locking-lever I, when the spring g and lever 
G thrust the needlesff through the notches 
d d and the lower ends of the button-hole 
lining, so that when the treadle is released 
and lifted by springs El E the outward and 
upward movement of the crimpers shall not 
remove the lining from its position between 
the dies. 
As the carrier goes up the loop E and bail 
Hlift the rear end of the bell-crank lever and 
hang it upon the locking-lever I, and the for 
ward movement which is thus imparted to 
the feeding-dog h thrusts the series of dies 
forward the thickness of one die and the in 
terposed crimped lining to receive another 
blank; and it will be readily understood that 
the length of the upward throw of the closed 
end of bail H, and consequently the forward 
throw of the feeding-dog h, can be regulated 
at will by moving the adjustable carriers H 
backward or forward. Thus at each rising 
and-falling movement of the crimping-plates 
205,0S0 
and their carrier an automatic intermitting 
feeding of the dies is effected to receive a new 
blank. By the same movement the needlesf 
fare withdrawn into the position shown in 
Fig. 1, and the parts are ready to repeat the 
above-described operation. 
It will, of course, be understood that the 
blanks are to be in proper temper; and it will 
be seen that, as each blank is forced in be 
tween a pair of dies, the tension devices will 
yield to receive it, and this constant pressure, 
which is applied at a point opposite to the em 
bossing-depression n, forms upon one side of 
each lining a raised rib or bead, which is not 
only ornamental, but also serves as a guide 
by which to properly insert the lining in the 
button-fly of a shoe or other article. 
I am aware that male and female dies, or 
their equivalents, have been employed for em 
bossing or otherwise producing a raised fig 
ure or design upon leather by means of a suf. 
ficient pressure being employed to strike up, 
practically instantaneously, the desired im 
pression; but to do this in my machine would 
require a complicated mechanism, because the 
crimpers separate my dies some distance, and 
they (the dies) are advanced upon the bed 
frame to receive each new blank; and it will 
be readily seen that a device which would sud 
denly strike up a bead upon each newly 
crimped lining would require many adjust 
ments to meet the constantly-varying condi 
tions or positions of the dies. Hence I have 
adopted the plan of producing the bead by 
means of a continuous pressure, which forms 
it (the bead) after the crimpers have been 
withdrawn from between the dies, and by a 
continuous pressures produced by the springo. 
Under some circumstances I may dispense 
with the guiding-tongue F and change the 
form or position of the rod O'to better retain 
the dies in position. The upward throw of 
the carrier-plate C is limited by an adjustable 
stop, b'. 
It will be seen that the short section of rod 
O between each pair of dies serves, in com 
bination with the opening d, to form the eye of 
the lining. 
What I claim is 
1. In a machine for making button-hole lin 
ings, the combination, with the dies N and rod 
O, of the vibrating crimpers D D, substan 
tially as set forth. 
. 
2. The vibrating crimpers, in combination 
with the segmental carrier d' d', substantially 
as Set forth. 
3. The combination, with the carrier C and 
crimpers D D, of the treadle E, arm M, slid 
ing bar m, and connecting-link, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the crimpers and 
f of the needles ff, substantially as set 
Orth. 
5. The combination, with the needles, of the 
guide L, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a machine for making button-hole lin 
ings, the combination, with the series of dies 
N, of the guide L, provided with elastic fin 
gers l l and the stops ll, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. The combination, in a machine for mak 
ing button-hole linings, with the needles ff, 
of the lever G, link G, the bell-crank lever H, 
and the locking-lever I, substantially as set 
forth. 
8. The combination, in a machine for mak 
ing button-hole linings, with the locking-lever 
and the bell-crank lever, of the tripping-lever 
I', link I, and the treadle E, substantially as 
set forth. 
9. The combination, with the needles, of the 
spring g, adapted to thrust them into the lin 
ing, substantially as set forth. 
10. The dies N, provided at their lower ends 
with recesses, and arranged in a series, sub 
stantially as shown, whereby the recesses form 
continuous grooves adapted to fit upon the 
ways A, as set forth. 
11. In a machine for making button-hole lin 
ings, the combination, with the dies N, pro 
vided with the embossing-recesses n, of crimp 
ers which force the blank between the dies, 
and a spring which presses the dies toward 
each other after the lining has been crimped, 
and thereby raise the bead, substantially as 
set forth. 
and a tension device, to maintain pressure 
upon the dies, substantially as set forth. 
13. The combination, with the Ways AA and 
dies N, of an automatic feeding device for said 
dies, substantially as set forth. 
DAVI) EARRS. 
12. The dies N, in combination with rod 
Witnesses: 
JoHN G. CoZINE, 
H. H. DOUBLEDAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205180.txt	De W. C. FARRINGTON, 
Cartridge-Holder, 
No. 205, 18O. 
Patented June 25, 1878. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DE WITT C. FARRINGTON, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS, 
IMPROVEMENT IN CARTRIDGE-HOLDERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205,1s0, dated June 25, 1878; application filed 
March 9, 1877. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DE WITT C. FARRING 
TON, of Lowell, county of Middlesex, and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Cartridge - Holders; 
and I declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an oblique view of my improved 
cartridge-holder. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of 
the same, and Fig. 3 shows the improved holder 
filled with cartridges. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
holders or receptacles for cartridges; and it 
consists of a strip of metal or any other suit 
able material provided with end detents and 
With lateral grooves for receiving and holding 
a series of cartridges, the grooves being so 
constructed and arranged as to hold the car 
tridges by the flanges upon their heads, and 
yet permit their free movement along the 
grooves longitudinally of the holder. 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
strong and reliable holder or receptacle for 
cartridges, in which they can be safely packed 
for transportation, and in which the primers 
will be protected from blows or friction, and, 
also, a holder from which the cartridges can 
be readily transferred in a body to the maga 
zine or hopper of a machine or magazine-gun, 
or from which, if desired, they may be taken 
by hand singly and fed to any kind of a fire 
an. 
The construction of the device will be fully 
understood from an inspection of the accom 
panying drawings, 
DE WITT C. FARRINGTON. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIS FARRINGTON, 
C. S. LIVINGSTON. 
Ashere shown, the lateral grooves areformed 
by turning over the edges of the strip of metal 
which constitutes the holder. Manifestly, they 
might also be formed by flanges or projections 
of any suitable shape; and, if desired, two or 
more of these holders may be arranged side 
by side, thus forming a structure containing 
a corresponding number of rows or series of 
cartridges. 
For retaining the cartridges in the holder, 
the ends of the latter may be turned down, as 
shown at A, Fig. 3; but I do not wish to con 
fine myself to this particular device for this 
purpose. 
The grooves, it will be observed, run through 
the holder continuous from end to end. 
By attaching loops or rings to the holder, as 
shown at B B, Fig. 3 of the drawings, it may 
be suspended from the person, so as to permit 
the easy removal of the cartridges as required 
for use. 
The invention of C. Howlett, as set forth in 
Letters Patent granted him May 28, 1867, is 
notherein claimed. 
What is claimed as new is 
A cartridge - holder provided with lateral 
grooves and end detents, the parts being con 
structed and arranged to hold a series of car 
tridges and to permit them to be moved lon 
gitudinally, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205280.txt	G. A. MAN NIE. 
W00 den-BOX. 
No. 205,280. 
Patented June 25, 1878. 
Nwess is. 
Iwever, 
at 4.4.4 
?e-A-4 & 22(22er- A14/.4/E 
r1. 
2227 
7. 
, PETERs, photo-LithoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, P. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. MANNIE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
HIS RIGHT TO WILLIAM. H. BOGART, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN WOOD EN BOXES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205,2S0, dated June 25, 1878; application filed 
IDecember 9, 1875. 
To all choin it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE A. MANNIE, of 
the city of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
Improvements in Boxes of Wood-Veneer, of 
which the following is a specification: 
My invention relates to boxes or receptacles 
made from thin splints or veneers of wood which 
have a grain, and are formed by overlapping 
adjacent sides and ends, the invention con 
sisting in the combination of such a box with 
binding-strips of bent metal arranged to clasp 
and cover substantially the entire upper edge 
of those sides or ends of the box which are 
formed from the end of the veneer and liable 
to split, the object being to bind the ends and 
flaps together, and to prevent splitting, and 
to impart lateral rigidity to the box, all as 
will be hereinafter set forth. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows a blank 
from which a box or receptacle embodying my 
invention is made. Fig. 2 is an end view of 
the box when finished. Fig. 3 is a transverse 
section of the box. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal 
section of the same. Fig. 5 is a plan of the 
Sale. 
In carrying out my invention, I take a wood 
Veneer and cut it out to the form of the blank 
seen in Fig. 1, the same being square or elon 
gated, as desired. This blank A is checked 
or grooved at a a b b to form the bends and 
angles of the box, and slitted at c 0 to sepa 
rate the sides and ends from each other. For 
the sake of distinction I will designate CC 
the sides and DD the ends of the box, the 
grain of the blank running lengthwise of the 
sides and crosswise of the ends, the checks a 
a being cut across the grain. The sides are 
prolonged to form flaps B B, which overlap 
the ends when the sides and ends are bent up 
to form the box. These flaps are cemented 
or otherwise attached to the ends, as shown. 
It is obvious that the ends DD of a box of 
this construction are liable to split from lat 
eral strains or other causes, and to prevent 
this I bind the edges of the said ends with 
bent strips ee, of sheet metal or other suitable 
rigid material, bent over the edge and fast 
ened thereto by compression or in any suit 
able manner. These pieces or strips may be 
applied either before or after the box is other 
wise finished; but I prefer to apply them after . 
the sides have been secured to each other. 
Having thus described my invention, I wish 
it understood that I do not claim, broadly, 
bindings for boxes of all kinds, as these have 
been used; nor do I claim a box made from ve 
neer of the general form and character herein 
shown, as these have been long in use and are 
not new with me; but 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with a veneer box, having 
its sides prolonged to form flaps lapping over 
upon its end, of a bent metal strip, covering 
substantially the entire upper edge of the end, 
and securing the end to the flaps, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand and seal this 6th 
day of December, 1875. 
GEO. A. MANNIE. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, 
ROBT. E. MILLER 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205380.txt	J. HACKALEY. 
Spinning-Mule. 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 2O5,380. 
Patented June 25, 1878. 
 
 
Sa 
as -Y 5. . g 
-W -- 
s 
  
s 
WITNESSES. 
24%A 
 
J. HACKALEY. 
Spinning-Mule, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 205,38o. 
Patented June 25, 1878. 
WITNESSEs. 
6%. 2-2- 
7-4, 44.4 
stor. 
4,62, 
1. the lar 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-lthographer, WASHIgor 
 
J. HACKALEY. 
Spinning-Mule. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 2 O5,38O. 
 
Patented June 25, 1878. 
 
 
WITNESSES, 
w 
|NVENTOR 
4x44,2. 
2s-44 (24 f 
: 
No. 205,380. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
J. HACKALEY. 
Spinning-Mule. 
Patented June 25, 1878. 
  
 
 
Ruis S 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HACKALEY, OF FALL RIVER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF HIS RIGHT TO JAMES P. HILLARD, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN SPINNING-MULES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205,3S0, dated June 25, 1878; application filed 
February 2, 1878. 
To all chom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN HACKALEY, of 
the city of Fall River, in the county of Bristol 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Spinning-Mules; 
and I hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
Which, with the accompanying drawings and 
the letters of reference marked thereon, form 
ing part of this specification, will enable others 
skilled in the art to make and use the same. 
This invention has reference to improve 
ments in power spinning-mules known as the 
Mason mules. 
The object of the invention is to communi 
cate sufficient motion to the spindles after the 
carriage has completed its inward traverse, 
and before the same commences to move out. 
Ward, so that the slack yarn is wound on the 
spindle, and all kinking of the same prevented, 
as will be more fully hereinafter described, and 
Set forth in the claims. 
Figure 1 represents the main portion of a 
mule-head in a side view, the positions of the 
parts being shown at the moment when the 
spindle-carriage has reached the limit of its 
in Ward traverse, and the roller-clutch arm is 
about to connect the driving mechanism with 
the rolls, by which the same commence to de 
liver the roving before the spindles have com 
menced the outward traverse. Fig.2 is a side 
view of the opposite side of the mule-head, 
showing the main portion of the mechanism, 
and particularly the pawl-and-ratchet arrange 
ment by which the variation in the length of 
slack yarn between the upper and lower por 
tions of the cop is compensated for by a corre 
sponding variation in the revolution of the 
spindle. Fig. 3 is a side view of a mule-head 
divested of all mechanism except the parts by 
which the present invention is illustrated and 
the desired results produced. Fig. 4 is a par 
tial cross-section, showing the connection be 
tween the pawl-and-ratchet mechanism and 
the cam operating the letting-off mechanism, 
by means of which the number of turns to 
take up the slack after the back-faller is raisedis 
regulated. Fig. 5 is a transverse section of the 
spindle-carriage and rollers, shown in the po 
sition when the carriage has reached the limit 
of its inward traverse and the back-fallers are 
raised, at which time the additional rotation 
is imparted to the spindles. Fig. 6 represents 
a portion of a Mason mule, showing in solid 
lines the roller-clutch arm, the roller-clutch 
operating bell-crank rod, and the holding 
spring in the positions occupied when the 
drawing rolls are delivering yarn, and in 
broken lines the positions which they occupy 
when the clutch is disconnected by the roller 
clutch arm. Fig. 7 is a view of the roller-clutch 
operating mechanism. 
In the drawings, a is the roller-clutch arm, 
shown in Fig.1 in the position occupied when 
the carriage moves inward toward the rolls, 
at which time the rolls are stopped and the 
yarn wound on the spindle; and it is shown 
in Fig. 3 in solid lines as commencing to con 
nect the clutch with the rolls, and in broken 
lines in the position it occupies when the rolls. 
are connected. 
b is a strap or chain, connected with the 
roller-clutch arm near the shaft, and to the 
drum c, which is loose on the main driving 
shaft of the mule-head, to which the band-pull 
leys for driving the spinning-spindles are se 
cured. d is a ratchet-wheel secured to the 
drivingshaft, and e a spring-pressed pawl 
hinged or pivoted to the side or disk of the 
drum c. 
Considering, now, this portion of the mech 
anism, its function will be clearly understood 
when it is observed that at the moment the 
spindle-carriage has arrived at the limit of its 
inward traverse the back-faller rises and the 
roller-clutch arm describes an arc of a circle. 
Heretofore the yarn at this time formed a 
slack loop, and as the rolls started a little 
ahead of the outward motion of the carriage, 
the slack loop increased, this slackroving kink 
ing as soon as the spindles started, and before 
the same had produced the proper tension on 
the yarn. With this improvement, however, 
the adjustable pin a on the roller-clutch arm 
a comes in contact with the chain or strap b, 
and thus partially pulls the drum caround, 
which, by means of the ratchet and pawl, turns 
the main driving - shaft. The spindles are 
driven from this shaft, and as the upper por 
tions of said spindles are thin, and as the yarn 
2 
205,3S0 
that the chain his shown in solid lines as 
holding the drum c, and preventing its turning 
by the strain of the coiled spring g, and in 
broken lines as hanging loosely, and also that 
as the cam h slowly turns during the forming 
of the cop, the chain h will allow the drum c 
to turn back farther, and the roller-clutch arm 
will cause the drum c, and with it the driving 
mechanism, to turn through a greater portion 
of a circle. 
As the spindles are banded, so as to make 
a great many revolutions to one of the main 
driving-shaft, a slight variation in the posi 
tion of the cam will produce a great difference 
in the number of revolutions made by the Spin 
dles at a time when in mules as heretofore Con 
structed the spindles did not move at all. 
I do not wish to confine myself to the exact 
mechanism shown and described, as these are 
only some of the means that may be applied 
to produce the result; nor is it necessary that 
the motion should be imparted through the 
roller-clutch arm, as other parts of the mech 
anism can be readily used to communicate the 
motion to the spindles when the carriage is in 
and the belt is off the driving-pulley. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. In a spinning-mule, the combination, With 
the main driving-shaft, band-wheel or drum, 
and spindles, of the roller-clutch arm and 
mechanism, substantially as described, where 
by said band-wheel or drum is rotated and the 
spindles turned by the action of the roller 
clutch arm to take up the slack of the yarn by 
the spindles as the carriage approaches the 
roller-beam, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the main driving-shaft, 
band-wheel or drum, roller-clutch arm a, and 
band b with the cam h, chain h, sector i, and 
the intermediate mechanism, substantially as 
described, whereby the spindles are varied in 
their revolutions according to the amount of 
slack to be taken up, as set forth, 
w 
JOHN HACKALEY, 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH A. MILLER, 
BENJAMIN EARL. 
follows the faller, more revolutions of the 
spindles must be made at this point to take 
up the slack. For this purpose the pin fis 
secured to the frame of the mule-head, and 
the band is forced over said pin by the roller 
clutch arm, as shown in Fig. 3 in broken lines, 
and the speed of the spindles is thereby in 
creased, when the winding of the slack is com 
pleted and the spindle-carriage is moving out. 
The essential difference, therefore, is that in 
mules as heretofore constructed, at the time 
the carriage has completed the inward trav 
erse and the followers or back-fallers are raised, 
there is an appreciable slack in the yarn and 
an appreciable time that the spindles stop, 
whereasby this improvement the spindles Con 
tinue to revolve all the time, and maintain a 
uniform tension on the yarn, thus preventing 
the kinking of the same. 
g is a chain-pulley supported loosely on a 
stud, and g a chain connecting the drum c 
with the chain-pulley g. gis a coiled spring, 
secured at one end to the frame, and at the 
other by a chain to the pulleyg. When, now, 
the roller-clutch arm returns to its vertical 
position, the strap or chain b is released, and 
the spiral spring g, acting on the chaing, re 
turns the drum to its former position. 
As there is considerable difference in the 
amount of slack between the lower and the 
upper portions of the cop, owing to the vary 
ing distances of the same from the rolls, it be 
comes necessary to adjust the amount of turn 
ing of the spindles to the amount of slack, so 
as to maintain at all points a uniform tension 
on the yarn, and thus prevent kinks. For 
this purpose the chain his secured to the 
drum c at one end, and at the other to the 
shaper-cam h, or to a separate weighted lever, 
which is operated by the pin h, secured to the 
shaper-cam h. Either of these arrangements 
will work equally well, and a slot can be made 
in the shaper-cam, so as to regulate the tension 
on the chain, the same as is shown in the le 
verh. The cam is slowly rotated through the 
sector i by means of the pawl it and ratchet 
wheel i, connected with the cam-shaft by the 
usual gearing. 
On examination of Fig. 3 it will be observed 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205480.txt	E. G.ORDON & J. A. DUY GAN. 
Railway-Switch, 
No. 205,480. . 
Patented July 2, 1878. 
 
E.PETERS, PHOTO-LTHCGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN GORDON, OF HYDE PARK, AND JOHN A. DUYGAN, OF QUINCY, 
8 
MASSACEUSETTS, 
IMPROVEMENT IN RALWAY - SWITCHES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205,480, dated July 2, 1878; application filed 
March 15, 1878, 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, EDWIN GORDON, of 
Hyde Park, in the State of Massachusetts, 
and JOHN A. DUYGAN, of Quincy, in said 
State, have invented certain Improvements in 
Railroad-Switches, of which the following is a 
specification: 
Our invention consists in the use of a com 
bined switch -rail and guard-rail, so con 
structed that when turned against a main 
track rail a complete track is formed, diverg 
ing from the main track. In this position a 
train moving along the main track in one di 
rection will be turned, by means of this 
switch, onto a siding or branch track while 
a train moving from the opposite direction on 
the main track will pass the switch safely, 
So that, with our switch in the position men 
tioned, in one direction it will offer no im 
pediment to the safe passage of trains on the 
main track; in the other, trains will safely 
pass from the main track to a siding or branch 
track, or from a siding or branch track to the 
main track. When our switch is turned away 
from the main track this main track is a per 
fect track, with rails fixed and immovable. 
With the switch thus turned away from the 
main rail it forms a secure guard for trains 
passing along the main track, and a train can 
pass safely over it from a siding or branch 
track to the main line. 
Our combined switch-rail and guard-rail is 
about six feet in length, (more or less,) of the 
form shown in the drawing, Figures 1 and 2, (a,) 
having on one of its surfaces a raised surface 
along its whole length, and diagonal, as shown 
in Fig. 2, (a,) so that when this surface is up 
permost a train passing from the left to the 
right will pass onto this switch-rail, and so 
onto the branch or siding, being the position 
first above described; and a train moving 
from the opposite direction on the main line 
will, by means of the switch-rail a, (which in 
this position forms an inclined plane,) pass 
over the switch-rail onto main rail; and hav 
ing on its uppermost surface, when turned 
away from the main line, a shorter raised sur 
face in line with the branch or siding, but not 
extending to the main track, a train will pass 
from the branch or siding to the main line, 
but not contrariwise, being the position shown 
in Fig. 1, and the second of the positions first 
mentioned. 
This combined switch-rail and guard-rail is 
hung so as to turn eccentrically (which is the 
way we prefer, but both ends may turn on a 
common axis) in and upon boxes c c, which 
are firmly secured to the sleepers, and which 
boxes form secure bed-pieces for the switch, 
in either position described, to rest upon. 
In the drawing, Figs. 1 and 2 are plans 
of a track, with branch track or siding and 
our switch. In Fig. 1 the switch-rail is turned 
So as to permit a train to pass from the branch 
to the main line, but not the other way. In 
Fig. 2 it is so turned as to permit the passing 
of trains from the main line, as explained 
above. 
a, a is our switch, hung eccentrically in boxes 
b b by means of pins cc, upon which it turns, 
but so adjusted that the weight of passing 
trains will bear upon the boxes, and not upon 
the pins. One of the pins c 0 is of sufficient 
length to receive a crank, and is so connected 
With the switch-frame that the switch can be 
conveniently turned by a switch-tender. 
Figs. 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are sectional views, 
respectively, onlines u, u, v 0, y y, aca, and a 2. 
What we claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
A combined rotating switch-rail and guard 
rail, a hung and rotating upon pins c c, bear 
ing upon and turning in boxes b b, substan 
tially as described. 
EDWIN GORDON. 
JOHN A. DUYGAN. 
Witnesses: 
H. E. CoopER, 
CHAS. H. DREW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205580.txt	S. E. R. USK, 
Telephone Call Signal. 
No. 205,58O. 
Patented July 2, 1878. 
72 
Z 
c2. O 
z. 
y 
14; S$ 6 
- 
? 
6. 
ZE 
6- 
: 
/2 9. 
C 
47 
27 
7s 
WITNESSES : 
- 
f 'r 
INVENTOR: 
of 672. 
r vec.46 
ATTORNEYS. 
N.PETERS, PHOTO-LTHoGRAPHER, wash:NGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL E. RUSK, OF CATSKILL NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN TELEPHONE CALL-SIGNALS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205,5S0, dated July 2, 1878; application filed 
February 27, 1878, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL E. RUSK, of 
Catskill, in the county of Greene and State of 
New York, have invented a new and Improved 
Telephone Call-Signal, of which the following 
is a specification: 
My invention relates to that class of tele 
phones in which magnets, helices, and soft 
iron diaphragms are used in transmitting and 
receiving sounds produced by the human voice; 
and it consists in a device whereby the electric 
current may be rapidly broken and established 
by the vibration of the diaphragm, so that a 
sound will be produced in the receiving-tele 
phone that will be audible throughout a room 
of ordinary size. 
Referring to the drawing, which is a longi 
tudinal section of a telephone having my in 
provement attached, A is the body of the tele 
phone, in which is placed the bar-magnet B, 
and to the larger end of which is secured the 
iron diaphragm C. Upon the end of the mag 
net within the diaphragm a helix, D, is placed. 
The instrument thus far is identical with the 
well-known bell-telephone. 
In one side of the larger part of the tele 
phone-body there is a plate, E, from which 
two pairs of ears, a b, project toward the cen 
ter of the instrument. Between the ears l) is 
pivoted a lever, F, whose shorter arm e ex 
tends backward under the adjusting-screw d, 
that passes through the plate E. The longer 
arm of the lever extends between the ears at 
toward the front of the instrument, is bent at 
right angles, and extends parallel with the 
outerface of the diaphragm to the center of the 
instrument, where it is provided with a plati 
num-pointed screw, e, which passes through 
the lever at right angles to the diaphragm. 
The diaphragm is provided with a small plati 
num disk, f, which contacts with the screw e 
when the call-signal is in use. A short rod, 
g, is screwed into the lever F at the angle, and 
projects through an aperture in the plate to 
receive the insulated knob or thumb-piece h. 
Between the ears at b there is, in the plate E, 
a vulcanite insulator, i, through which passes 
a platinum-pointed screw, i, which, when the 
alarm is not used, contacts with a platinum 
disk, k, attached to the upper surface of the 
lever F. A milled lock-nut, l, is placed upon 
the screw j, and binds the terminal m of the 
helix D, so that it is brought into electrical 
connection with the screw j. A spiral spring, 
8, is placed between the shorter arm of the 
lever F and the plate E, to throw the lever 
away from the diaphragm and into contact 
with the screw j. A wire, n, is connected with 
the terminal m, and also with the diaphragm 
C. The plate E is connected by a wire, o, 
with a binding-screw, p, at the smaller end of 
the telephone-case. The telephone is provided 
with a mouth-piece, G, which partly covers 
the diaphragm and the lever F. 
When the parts are in their normal position 
the telephone is used for talking in the usual 
Way; but when it is desired to give a signal 
the lever F is depressed by pressure of the 
finger upon the thumb-pieceh, the shorter arm 
c of the lever F is brought into contact with 
Screw d, and the screw e is brought lightly 
into contact with the diaphragm C. The cur 
rent, which before passed through the wire O, 
plate E, lever F, helix D, and terminal wire q, 
now passes through the wire o, plate E, screw 
d, lever F, diaphragm C, and helix D, and is 
broken and established at every vibration of 
the diaphragm. The current, when thus in 
terrupted, produces in the receiving-telephone 
a loud reed-tone, which may be readily heard 
in every part of a room of ordinary size. After 
giving the signal the finger may be removed 
from the thumb-piece h, and the telephone 
may be used in talking in the usual way. 
When the lever F is depressed the telephone 
may beenployed in transmitting musical tones. 
It is obvious that many devices may be con 
trived for breaking the electrical current by 
the vibration of the diaphragm. ThereforeIdo 
not limit or confine myself to the form, pro 
portion, or arrangement of the parts of the 
signal attachment, 
Having thus described myinvention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The combination of an adjustable contact 
point carried by a lever; by which it can be 
thrown at pleasure into or out of contact with 
the diaphragm of a bell-telephone, the said 
diaphragm and point being the terminals of 
 
2 
205,5S0 
an electric circuit, and adjusted so that the 
vibration of the diaphragm alternately makes 
and breaks the circuit, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
2. The lever F, provided with an adjustable 
point and connected with one of the line-wires 
of the telephone, in combination with the dia 
phragm C, connected with one of the termi 
nals of the helix D, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
3. The alarm attachment, consisting, essen 
tially, of the lever F, having the adjustable 
platinum-pointed screw e and thumb-piece h, 
the screw d, and insulated screw j, in combi 
nation with the telephone, consisting of the 
magnet B, helix D, and diaphragm C, substan 
tially as herein shown and described. 
SAMUEL E. RUSK. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. M. HoPKINs, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205680.txt	J. A. PRICE & W. McCLAWE, 
Reversible Stove-Grate, 
No. 205,68O. 
Patented July 2, 1878. 
 
24 
WCyac. 
N.PETERs, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, WASHINGiON, D.C. 
3. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. PRICE, OF SCRANTON, AND WILLIAM McCLAVE, OF PITTSTON, 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN REVERSIBLE STOVE- GRATES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205,6S0, dated July 2, 1878; application filed 
May 20, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: . 
Be it known that we, JOHN A. PRICE, of 
Scranton, and WM. MCCLAVE, of Pittston, 
in the county of Luzerne and State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Reversible Stove-Grates; 
and we do hereby declare the following to be 
a full and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification, in 
Which 
Figure 1 is a side view of a stove or grate 
frame, showing the application of our improve 
ments; and Fig. 2 is a top-plan view of the 
Se. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures denote the same parts. 
Our invention relates to that class of stove 
grates which are adapted for reversal to cut 
off the clinkers, ashes, and lower part of the 
fire without dumping the upper part thereof; 
and it has for its object to provide lineans 
for the rotation or reversal of the grate or 
grate-sections, so that after cutting off the 
clinkers, ashes, &c., they shall be stopped at 
the proper point for supporting the fuel in the 
fire-chamber above. 
To this end the invention consists in a han 
dle or crank-arm for turning the grate, which 
is so constructed and arranged to operate, in 
connection with a stop on the stove or grate 
frame, that its movement in turning the grate 
shall be arrested when the grate has been re 
versed or reached the proper position to Sup 
port the fire above. 
In the drawings, A represents a stove or 
grate frame containing the two-part grate B 
B, journaled therein and geared together at 
one end, as shown at C. The opposite end of 
one of the grate journals projects through the 
stove or through the grate-frame to receive 
the handle D, by which the grate is rotated. 
This handle may be straight or in the form of 
a crank, or of any other suitable shape for the 
purpose; but, whatever its general form may 
be, it must be provided with an angular open 
ing, d, for the reception of the extended jour 
nal of the grate, and with a lug or projection, 
E, at some point which, when the handle is 
operated to turn the grate, shall come in con 
tact with a stop, F, on the stove at the mo 
ment the grate is in the proper position to 
sustain the fire in the stove. The handle is 
applied to the grate journal in the position 
shown by dotted lines in Fig. 1, its position 
after the grate has been reversed being shown 
by the full lines in the same figure. 
Although a simple lug cast on the stove to 
form the stop is preferable, as being the cheap 
est, yet a dog pivoted to the stove and adapted 
to engage with the projection on the handle 
may be employed for the purpose. The form 
of stop we regard as immaterial, as the inven 
tion consists in the employment of any kind 
of stop in connection with the handle. 
In the example of grate shown in the draw 
ing the handle is applied to one journal, and 
as the two parts of the grate are geared to 
gether it is evident that when one is turned 
the other is turned also. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new 
The handle D of a reversible stove-grate, 
provided with a lug or projection, E, in com 
bination with a stop, F, substantially as de 
scribed, for the purpose specified. 
J. A. PRICE. 
WM. MCCLAVE. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. ULMER, 
F. C. KRAUTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205780.txt	2 sheets-Sheet 1 
A ZWIEBEL. 
Wind-Engine. 
Patented July 9, 878. 
No. 205,780, 
 
/wV at W70/e. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
A, ZWIEBEL. 
Wind-Engine, 
No. 205,780. 
Patented July 9, 1878. 
 
yNA 7/YAS-S AS 
//7%-4 
 
'iRAFER, WASligon, P.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTON ZWIEBEL, OF BURLINGTON, WISCONSIN. 
MPROVEMENT IN WIND ENGINES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205, so, dated July 9, 1878; application filed 
February 8, 1878, 
T is a lever, running out from rocker-shaft 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANTON ZWIEBEL, of U, and attached to a pitman, V, by a ball-and 
Burlington, in the county of Racine, in the socket joint, the other end of the pitman at 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain Im- tached to the crankW on the main driving 
provements in Wind-Wheels, of which the fol-shaft, which, as the wheel revolves, rocks the 
lowing is a specification: 
rocking shaft U, which has a lever on the other 
My invention has for its object a complete end of it, to which is attached anything to be 
and easy mode of governing a wind-wheel, so operated. The arms I are flexible by means 
that when the wind blows so hard as to give of a joint, X, in the same, and a fulcrum, Y, 
the wheel too much motion the wheel will be at the inner ends of arms I, to which are at 
turned edgewise to the wind, and thus the mo- tached arms H, which are shoved backward 
tion will be slackened, with several other im- and forward as the balls B move out and in, 
provements, which will be described further on. carrying the ends of arms C with them, push 
In the drawings, forming part of this speci-ing and pulling on the joint X, and thus Op 
fication, Figure 1 is an end view of the inven-erating that part of the arm pivoted on full 
tion from the rear of the same. Fig. 2 is a crum. Y. 
side view of the same, and Fig. 3 a view of the 
Z is a shaft, on which the wheel turns as the 
other side of the same. Fig. 4 is a view of a Wind may shift. This wheel has no Vane to 
ball-and-socket joint, which connects the up- keep it to the wind, the wheel being placed 
per end of a pitman with a lever from a rocker. in rear of the tower, at a point where a line 
slhaft. 
drawn from the center of the tower will strike 
AA are two arms, on which the wheel rests; the center of the wheel, and as the wind blows 
B B, the balls on the arms of the wheel, which the wheel will be kept facing it. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
govern the same; C, the arms on which the 
balls operate; D, the shaft on which the wheel by Letters Patent, is 
turns edgewise to the wind; E, the pillow- 
1. In combination with a wind-wheel shaft, 
block, in which the running-shaft is sustained; a rocker-shaft, extending out in the same di. 
F, a clutch, which catches in a groove in block rection therewith, and a lever connecting said 
G, to which are secured arms II, which are rocker-shaft to a pitman by ball-and-socket 
attached to arms I. When the balls B are joint, said pitman being connected to the crank 
thrown out they pull on arms I and throw on the main driving-shaft, so that by means of 
in block G, pushing clutch F back, and rais- the ball-and-socket joint the rocker-shaft may 
ing the arm K with weight L on the end of it. remain in position when the wheel is turned 
This arm K and weight L are raised by the edgewise to the wind, substantially as de 
clutch F being thrown forward and pushing scribed. 
the arm Kagainst fulcrum M on a standard, 
2. Balls B, arm I, clutch F, block G, arm 
N, the end of arm K, with which the clutch K, connecting-rod O, lever Q, segment-wheel 
engages, being bent down. The arm K, pull- R, meshing into wheel S, in combination with 
ing on connecting-rod O, attached at its lower shaft D, substantially as and for the purpose 
end to lever Q, raises lever Q, turning seg 
ment R, which, with cogs on it, meshes into 
ANTON ZWIEBEL. 
wheel S on shaft D, which, as the lever Q is 
raised, turns the wind-wheel round edgewise 
to the wind. 
J. B. SMITH, 
C, A, BROWNSON, 
described. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205880.txt	Strip for Coating Articles with Celluloid and other 
D. C. LOCKWOOD. 
Plastic Compositions, 
No. 205,88O. 
Patented July 9, 1878. 
Wineybe). 
62%-32%. 
'nealog 
22eza, 22. 
rests, huro-utographER, WASHINGTON, DC 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID C. LOCKWOOD, OF NEWARK, N.J., ASSIGNOR TO THE RUBBER AND 
CELLULOID HARNESS TRIMMING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN STRIPS FOR COATING ARTICLES WITH CELLULOD AND OTHER PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205, SS0, dated July 9, 1878; application filed 
December 19, 1877. 
To all chon it inay concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID C. LOCKWOOD, 
of Newark, in the county of Essex and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Strips for Composition 
Coating, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings. 
The invention relates to an improved strip 
for covering articles with plastic composition 
in Such manner as to form a smooth homo 
geneous coating. 
Usually all plastic compositions shrink or 
drag somewhat in the process of drying, and 
thus, if a core be covered with successive bands 
or spiral bands of material having a straight 
edge, the result will be that when the covering 
is dried the edges of each successive band or 
spiral Will be found separated and the core 
exposed between. 
To remedy this defect is the purpose of the 
present invention, which is effected by bevel 
ing the edges of the strip and overlapping 
them as the strip is wound upon the core in a 
spiral form. Thus as the material shrinks the 
Overlapping edges are drawn down upon those 
below, and an even shrinkage takes place 
Without any separations. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a strip of the 
material. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of same, 
and Fig. 3 is a plan view of the strip wound 
upon a COre. 
In the accompanying drawing, A represents 
a strip of plastic composition having the bey 
eled edges a b, 
- 
Now, it is obvious that if the strip A be 
wound on a core, one of these edges will overlap 
the other, as shown at Fig. 3, and thus form a 
smooth-surfaced covering, which, when dried, 
will shrink evenly throughout, and the upper 
Overlapping edge bind the lower overlapping 
edge, all separations being thus avoided. 
These edges may be united in any suitable 
manner, either by vulcanization, cement, or 
Such solvents as soften the material and en 
able the homogeneous blending of the edges, 
To produce the strip, it may be beveled by 
any known cutting device, or when plastic 
rolled into shape, or the nozzle of the stuffing 
box wherein it is formed may be suitably 
shaped to give the strip beveled edges. The 
preferred article for the strip is the composi 
tion known as celluloid. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A strip of plastic composition beveled 
on its edges, substantially as set forth. 
2. A core covered with a strip of plastic 
composition beveled on both edges, substan 
tially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing im 
provement in strips for composition coating, 
as above described, I have hereunto set my 
hand this 13th day of December, 1877. 
DAVID C. IOCKWOOD. 
Witnesses: 
REUNE. J. D. DUNN, 
HARRY COX. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US205980.txt	C. W. SIEMENS. 
Manufacture of Iron and Steel. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 205,98O. 
Patented July 16, 1878. 
W.2% 
SN % N 
Fe=Rs 
N 
 
mm. 
 
 
 
usO 
RSN 
AA 
N 
N N N N S 
 
 
 
WW 
 
  
 
 
N 
sy 
aerialso 
s S 
 
 
 
 
as 
2S 
y 
 
l aligy 
St 34 
A. 
wiTNESSES 
e?. A.2ser 
C 7 - 
5 
N 
S, photo-THORAPHER, WASiSTN, is C, 
 
 
 
 
 
C. W. SIEMENS. 
Manufacture of Iron and Steel. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 205,98O 
 
 
'z'e 14 
WITN ESSES 
C. W. SIEMENS. 
Manufacture of Iron and Steel. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3 
 
 
 
WITNESSES . 
- C. " 
C. 7 feat-1-1- 
NVENTOR 
4.- 
ATTORNEY 
C. W. SIEMENS. 
Manufacture of Iron and Steel, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 205,98O. 
Patented July 16, 1878. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
NEN N 
N 
NN N N N 
WITNESSES 
4-years- 
42.2% ee. 
242...R . 
C. 7. v?. 441-2-1 
4. 
NVENTOR 
  
 
 
 
C. W. SIEMENS, 
Manufacture of Iron and Steel. 
No. 205,980. 
Patented July 16, 1878. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5 
S 
relater rena 
2 
2 
S 
2 
 
 
  
  
d 
CD 
Lu 
INWONONS, 
TOEVOERSYANOET 
ANN? 
WWW 
ANNONI(RNNWYS YN NWYS 
WAS IN 
2 2 
2 2 2 
3. 
2 
A. 
2 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
 
///////////// 
WITNESSES. 
/3 2------ 
a & 
-s 
/2 
C. r. ?et 
NVENTOR 
44.2-, if 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, D. c. 
a-M 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. SIEMENS, OF WESTMINSTER, ENGLAND. 
MPROVEMENT IN MANUFACTURE OF RON AND STEEL 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 205,950, dated July 16, 1878; application filed 
December 2, 1876. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs WILLIAM 
SIEMENS, of Westminster, in the county of 
Middlesex, England, have invented an Im 
proved Process and Apparatus for the Manu 
facture of Iron and Steel; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, that will enable 
other's skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to that class of pro 
cesses for the manufacture of iron and steel 
which are conducted in rotative furnaces; and 
the nature thereof consists in certain improve 
ments upon the processes described in United 
States Letters Patent No. 159,712-that is to 
say, in conducting the process of producing 
Wrought-iron direct from the ore in such a 
manner that the ore is crushed and mixed with 
such proportions of other ores or fluxing ma 
terials as will give a fluid slag, to be formed 
at a comparatively low temperature, which 
slag is tapped off before a Welding-heat is at 
tained, in order that a second and welding 
cinder may be formed within the rotator with 
out the earthy matters so removed, to assist 
in balling up the metallic iron, substantially 
as herein described. 
The rotative regenerative furnace made use 
of in manufacturing iron and steel according 
to my improved process is illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1. represents a longitudinal section. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional plan. Fig. 3 represents, 
on the left side, a lalf transverse section, and 
on the right side a half transverse section. 
Fig. 4 represents a sectional elevation. Fig. 
5 is a transverse section. 
In the drawings, A is the rotative furnace, 
in shape cylindrical, with flat ends. It is 
mounted on rollers, and, instead of clutch 
gearing, each furnace may be driven by a small 
independent engine. The throat or neck of 
the furnace A is in communication with three 
flues, B and CC. The lower opening B is for 
gas only, and the flue brings it direct from 
the producers K K at the back. The two 
lateral parts C C communicate, respectively, 
With the regenerators D D'. These regener. 
ators are used for heating air only, and are 
built in stages, provided with cleaning-doors 
E. The bricks are laid so as to form longi. 
tudinal channels, and at intervals stoppings 
F are carried across, as shown in Fig. 5, so 
that the air and products of combustion going 
to and from the furnace pass backward and 
forward several times. 
G is the regulating-valve, by which air is 
admitted to the furnace, and communicates 
with regulators D ID by means of the revers 
ing-valve EI. The air flows in on one side of 
the flap H into one regenerator, while the pro 
ducts of combustion coming from the furnace 
pass from the other regenerator to the other 
side of the flap H, and thence to the chimney. 
fuel. Thus Wilhel one regenerator is heatedl 
sufficiently by the issuing products of combus 
tion, and the other is cooled by the incoming 
air, a reversal of the flaps Heffects a change 
in the direction of the currents, and the leat 
accumulated is returned to the furnace. 
The gas-producers K K are of any usual 
well-known construction, and therefore need 
no description. 
The gas produced rises from the producers 
KK continuously, and flows out hot through 
the regulating slide-valve L, of which two are 
shown, one to each producer, into the gas-flue, 
along which it passes to the rotative chamber 
A. Thus the gaseous or other fuel flows in 
continually through the port B, while the lat 
eral ports c c' serve alternately to give ingress 
to the hot air and egress to the products of 
combustion. 
The rotative chamber A is constructed of 
Wrought-iron plates, bound together by strips 
and angle-iron, riveted on, and further secured 
by two rings of rails, (shown at M.M.) which 
also serve to support the chamber on the rollers 
N N. The whole is placed on a carriage, I, 
made of cast and Wrought irol, and resting on 
four wheels, running on a pair of rails. Thus 
the rotative chamber may be moved toward or 
away from the regenerator-neck. 
The rotary motion is shown as imparted by 
 
 
 
 
2 
205,9s0 
a small independent engine, 13, provided with 
suitable gearing. There may be one such en 
gine to each furnace, and this arrangement 
may be used instead of the clutch-gearing (le 
scribed in my previous patent. This engine 
may also be connected with the carriage I, 
and employed for moving the rotative cham 
ber A to or from the regenerator-neck. 
The neck of the furnace, opposite the door, 
is composed of two channel-irons, or of iron 
plates bent U-shaped. They are circular 
pieces, one fastened onto the back plate of 
the rotative chamber A, and the other simi 
larly secured to the neck-like extension of the 
regenerator - flues, which also is made of 
wrought-iron plates, firmly riveted together, 
and kept in position by the tuck-staves and 
tie-bolts R. 
Above the neck joint a perforated pipe, S, 
sends a spray of water over the plates and 
neck, to prevent their corrosion by the flame. 
The water is prevented from entering the neck 
joint by the semicircular piece of angle-iron S' 
immediately below the perforated pipe S. 
At T are shown the perforated tubes for 
projecting water upon the casing of A, in or 
der to cool the furnace-lining, and for other 
purposes. 
The rotative chamber A may be also cooled 
by making the casing hollow, and allowing 
water to circulate in the annular space. 
This form of furnace, as above (lescribed, is 
well adapted for the use of petroleum or other 
oil-vapors, or for powdered fuel, as well as for 
ordinary gaseous combustibles. 
In making the lining of the rotative cham 
ber, scale or other oxides of iron, as also oxides 
of manganese, chromium, or titanium may be 
used together or separately, or in combination 
with a rich cinder, such as that obtained from 
relheating and puddling furnaces. A rich alu 
minous cinder is also very useful for admixture 
in certain cases. 
In using an oxide lining I operate as fol 
lows: On the rotator-casing, protected by brick 
work or otherwise, an initial lining of oxide of 
iron is first melted and set around to the depth 
of a few inches. Then a charge of oxide and 
rich cinder, mixed, is melted and set around. 
()n this bed an ordinary charge of ore-fluxes, 
&c., is worked. When the charge las come 
to the metallic condition and the iron is partly 
aggregated, the fluid scoria is tapped off in 
the usual manner. The heat is then raised, the 
balls are formed, and at the same tile a sec 
(ond (inder appears, derived partly from the 
lballs and partly from the lining. This slould 
be a true welding-cinder of the approximate 
formula 2Fe()SiO, Vfter the balls are taken 
out this cindler is not tapped off, but is en 
liclhed by the addition of some of the le. 
fore - mentioned oxides. Some of it is then 
splashed on the furnace ends, and the re. 
mainder is allowed to set, so as to form a 
new working-face for the lining. In order to 
cool the furnace for this purpose the admis 
sion of air and gas is stopped or greatly di 
minished, and water is projected on the cas 
ing in jets from perforated tubes placed above 
and below the outside of the rotative chamber. 
If the lining is to be increased all around, 
the chamber is allowed to rotate slowly while 
the cooling takes place; but if it be desirable 
to form a flat side to the lining, to prevent the 
sliding of subsequent charges, the rotation is 
stopped, and, after enriching the cinder with 
scale or other oxides, lumps of titanium, or 
chromium, or of other refractory materials, 
such, for example, as rich calcined ironstone, 
or lumps of hematite, or magnetic iron ore, 
which, by preference, have been previously 
warmed to avoid decomposition, are thrown 
into the bath and well coated with cindler. 
The water is then turned onto the bottom of 
the rotative chamber, and the flat is quickly 
solidified. The lumps set in give a rough sur. 
face, and not only materially assist in prevent 
ing the charge from sliding, but also help to 
lkeep it continually turning over and exposing 
fresh surface to the action of the flame. In 
this way each charge contributes to the lin 
ing for a subsequent one, and loss of iron is 
avoided. 
A carbon ()1 carbonaceous lining may loe 
used with advantage, especially if fluid steel, 
spiegel, ferro-manganese, or spongy iron is to 
be formed. For such purposes I use graphite 
(plumbago) or the graphitic deposit found in 
gas-retorts. Anthracite or coke may also lbe 
employed. These materials are to be ground 
up and mixed with about twenty-five per cent. 
of fire-clay, so as to form a thick pasty mass, 
which is then rammed into position or molded 
into suitable blocks for lining the furnace. 
liaving now described the improvements in 
my rotative furnace and the mode of forming 
the lining, I will proceed to explain my new 
method of working. 
The ore-reducing age its and fluxes to be used 
are first crushed small enough to pass through 
holes about three-eighths of an inch diameter. 
Then, if the ores contain volatile matter, they 
may be calcined by any suitable means pre 
vious to being charged into the rotator. The 
hot ore, after such preliminary treatment, is 
mixed with a suitable proportion of reducing 
agents and fluxes. 
In selecting the fluxes, my aim is to form a 
slag easily fusible, and capable of carrying of 
the sulphur, plosphorus, and earthy matters 
in the charge at the first tapping, which takes 
place at a comparatively low temperature, and 
just as the reduced iron begins to aggregate. 
If the ore be silicated, bases, such as line and 
alumina, should be added; or, if it be a basic 
ore, then silica must be added. In either case, 
the oxygen in the silica (as SiO,) should be at 
least about half that contained in the bases. 
If these conditions be assured only a small 
(lantity of iron will be carried off in the slag. 
If the ore contains much sulphur and phos 
phorus and refractory earthy matter, I add 
 
205,9so 
bonaceous matter became covered by the heated 
ore, with which it was gradually mingled, while 
fresh intensely-heated surface was continually 
presented to the mixture. When the reaction 
was complete the rotation of the furnace was 
stopped and the scoria tapped off, so as to lib 
erate the metallic iron resulting from the re 
action. A fuller supply of gaseous fuel was 
then turned on, and the furnace was caused to 
rotate five or six times more rapidly than be 
fore, which had the effect of agglomerating the 
iron into balls. 
If it was desired to convert the balls into 
cast-steel, or into a pure cast metal interme 
diate between cast-steel and cast-iron, after 
the balls were formed the rotation of the fur 
nace was stopped and the fluid scoria again 
tapped off, whereupon the furnace was again 
caused to rotate slowly. Some hard carbon 
aceous substance, such as crushed anthracite or 
coke, was then introduced, while the heat of 
the furnace was raised to a high intensity. 
The balls, combining with the carbon, became 
fused into a fluid mass, which could be tapped 
or cast into form or molds; or, instead of in 
troducing hard carbonaceous substances to ef. 
fect the fusion of the balls, broken pig-metal, 
or spiegeleisen, or ferro-manganese was em 
ployed for the same purpose. 
Having thus described the nature of my in 
vention and the manner in which the same is 
to be practically carried out, I claim 
The improvement in the art of producing 
wrought-iron direct from the ore, hereinbefore 
described, which consists in charging the 
crushed ore into the rotator, together with 
such proportions of other ores or fluxing ma 
terial as will give a fluid slag, tapping off the 
said slag before a welding-heat is attained, and 
reducing and balling the metallic iron in the 
presence of a second and Welding cinder 
formed within the rotator after the earthy 
matters have been removed, whereby the ball 
ing up of the metallic iron is aided, substan 
tially as described. 
C. WILLIAM SIEMENS. 
Witnesses: 
A. THORPE POTTs, 
EDWARD C. INGERSOLL. 
an ore containing manganese, so as to insure 
a fusible and cleansing slag at the first tap 
pIng. 
The mixture of ore, flux, and reducing agents 
is charged into the heated volatile chamber, 
and rotation slowly commenced as soon as the 
charge is heated up thoroughly and the slag 
begins to run. The heat is then slightly raised 
until the reduced spongy pieces of iron begin 
to aggregate in a bath of slag. This is now 
nearly all tapped off, and the heat is then 
raised to the welding-point of iron. At this 
stage some of the lining begins to melt, and a 
second small bath of cinder is formed, in which 
the balling-up goes on rapidly. As soon as 
ready, the balls are quickly removed and shin 
gled straight into blooms and rolled into pud 
dled bars. This cinder, which is approxi 
mately a true Welding-cinder of the composi 
tion 2Fe0,SiO, is not tapped off, but is at 
once set around or in a flat, being evolved by 
the Water from the perforated tubes below the 
rotator, and the furnace is ready for the next 
charge. From time to time the Welding-cin 
der should be enriched and Jumps set in, as 
previously described. 
If hard-grained or steely iron be required, 
I add granulated pig-metal, refined metal, 
spiegel, or ferro-manganese to the charge im 
mediately after the first tapping. The carbon 
becomes associated with the iron in the charge, 
while the silicon and manganese go into the 
cinder, to be set around as lining. In the 
charge which follows, the manganese silicate 
comes out in the first tapping, and serves to 
cleanse the charge from impurities. 
The apparatus herein described forms the 
subject-matter of another application for Let 
ters Patent, and is not herein claimed. 
In the process for manufacturing iron and 
steel for which Letters Patent of the United 
States were granted tome February 9, 1875, the 
mixed material was introduced into a slowly 
rotating furnace and heated nearly to the fus 
ing-point of the ore, whereupon was added a 
quantity of the reducing agent, previously 
crushed, but not ground fine; or charcoal or 
Wood, previously dried and cut into pieces. 
By the slow rotation of the furnace the car 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206080.txt	J. N. BROKAW, 
Gate, 
No. 206,080. 
Patented July 16, 1878. 
 
 
 
 
| //zz zz e5 
6. ?? C 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-ITHOGRAPHER, washingto 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN N. BROKAW, OF OVID, MICHIGAN. 
IMPROVEMENT IN GATES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 206,0S0, dated July 16, 1878; application filed 
June 7, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, JoHN N. BROKAW, of 
Ovid, in the county of Clinton and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Gates; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form 
part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view, Fig. 2 a side elle 
Vation, and Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are details, of my 
improved gate. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
novel construction of a device for hanging 
gates, which will serve in the double capacity 
of a hinge, upon which the gate may be swung 
Open, or a sustaining-pulley, by means of which 
the gate may be pushed to one side, substan. 
tially as hereinafter set forth. 
To enable others skilled in the art to which 
my invention appertains to make and use the 
same, I will now proceed to describe its con 
Struction and operation. 
In the accompanying drawing, A represents 
the gate, constructed in any suitable manner, 
having at the top two parallel boards. B is 
the post to which the gate is hinged, and C 
the post against which it closes. D represents 
a pulley or roller, confined and rolling between 
the two upper parallel bars of the gate. This 
roller is constructed in two equal parts, each 
part having a center circular opening and a 
circular recess around the opening. D is a 
circular disk, which is placed in the circular 
recess of roller D, and upon which the roller 
revolves. After the disk has been thus placed, 
the tWO parts of the roller are riveted to 
gether. The disk D is cast or formed with 
one half-circular opening, d, as fully seen in 
Fig. 4; also with the pin-hole d', in which the 
sliding pin d is inserted. 
E represents the supporting-bar or hinge, 
Which is constructed with the arms e e, the 
ends of said arms being turned inward at right 
angles, as seen at e, Fig. 3. 
The full object of this device will be more 
apparent hereinafter. 
It will be seen, however, that when the outer 
end of the supporting-bar E is inserted in the 
half-circular opening din disk D and the pin 
d dropped into the hole in the end of the bar, 
the gate may either swing on this pin as its 
pivot or be pushed back on the roller D. 
To the two inner faces of the gate-post B 
are secured two vertical strips of board, bb, 
around the edges of which the projections e ef 
on the arms e e pass, and the weight of the 
gate on the outer end of the bar E forces them 
against the edges of the boards b b, thus hold 
ing the hinge firmly in place and preventing 
it slipping down. 
If it is desirable to lift the gate from the 
ground, either to allow small animals to pass 
under or for any other reason, it may readily 
be done by lifting the gate, thus removing the 
strain on the supporting-bar and allowing it 
to be pushed up on the boards b b. 
To prevent the bottom of the gate from 
Swinging out from the post, I place a small 
post or pin, f, in the ground at an angle with 
the post B, so that the gate will pass between 
the posts B and f in any position. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The wheel D, made in two parts, and in 
closing between the parts an annular disk, 
said disk having a central opening and pro 
vided with a pivot-pin, all substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination of wheel D and disk D', 
constructed substantially as described, with 
pin d, supporting-bar or hinge E, and gate A, 
all arranged to operate substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I afix my signature iu presence of 
two witnesses. 
JOHN N. BROKAW. 
Witnesses: 
W. W. DENNIs, 
E. C. WHITE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206180.txt	R. J. KING, 
Owen-Door, 
No. 206, 18O. 
Patented July 23, 1878. 
I 
estige; 
G242-2-ace 
o%: 17 sea 
 
P 
77e e?t' 
424. 9.CZz 
f 12. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUF US J. KING, OF DAYTON, O II IO. 
MPROVEMENT IN OVEN - DOORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 206, ISO, dated July 23, 1878; application filed 
March 12, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, IRUFUs J. KING, of 
Dayton, in the county of Montgomery and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Oven-Doors for Stoves 
and Ranges; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same. 
This invention has for its object the im 
proved construction of oven-doors for cook 
ing stoves and ranges, whereby the heat is re 
tained as nearly as possible, and prevented 
from passing through the door, which is usually 
the most vulnerable point. 
The novelty consists in lining or facing the 
inner side of the door with fire-tile, soap-stone, 
or other opaque non-conducting solid sub 
stance with glazed inner surface, and in the 
canstruction of the device, as will be here with 
set forth and specifically claimed. 
In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1 is 
an inside front elevation of my improved door. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same in central 
section. 
The frame of the door is an iron or other 
metal plate, A, having the desirable conforma 
tion and ornamentation. The edges of this 
plate are formed into flanges B, of from one to. 
two inches in length. These flanges are formed 
flaring, as shown in Fig. 2, and form supports 
Whereon to rest the non-conducting lining or 
facing C, which may be a slab of soap-stone, 
fire-tile, or other opaque non-conducting solid 
Substance, having its inner face glazed or 
enameled in any suitable manner. This lin 
ing fits into the shell formed by the plate A 
and flanges B, and is held from displacement 
by a metallic frame, D, through which and 
the shell bolts a are secured. By this means 
the non-conducting lining is held securely in 
position, while at the same time its surface is 
exposed to the oven, except such part as is 
covered by the frame D. To aid it in repel 
ling the heat its surface is glazed, which will 
also preventits absorbing grease or other dirt, 
and permit of its being washed clean. While 
a very good non-conducting door would be 
obtained by entirely filling the shell with this 
non-conducting plate exposed directly to the 
heat of the oven, yet it would greatly improve 
it to leave a space or cavity, E, between the 
plate A and the non-conducting lining, which 
will form a dead-air chamber, which is the 
best non-conductor of heat known. This, in 
connection with the non-conducting plate C, 
will make the door almost if not quite imper 
vious to heat. 
I am aware that it is not new to construct 
an oven-door consisting of a metallic casing 
filled with plaster-of-paris or other non-con 
ducting substance, entirely inclosed on all 
sides by the metal casing, and therefore do 
not broadly claim a non-conducting or refrac 
tory lining. 
I am also aware that glass plates lave been 
used in combination with oven-doors for the 
purpose of enabling the cook to view the in 
terior of the oven without opening the doors; 
and as glass is a non-conductor of heat, I con 
sequently do not broadly claim any solid non 
conductor applied to an oven-door, but limit 
myself to fire-tile, soap-stone, porcelain, or 
other opaque glazed substances, which are the 
best non-conductors, for it is well known that 
transparent substances are comparatively 
poor conductors, and permit heat as well as 
light to pass through them. 
I am also aware that a dead-air chamber 
has been employed in connection with trans 
parent linings, and that fire-tile has been used 
on the inner side of doors opening into the 
fire-chamber. In the former case the dead-air 
chamber simply performed its usual function. 
In the latter case the fire-tile was only used 
to protect the iron and prevent its burning 
out, not for the purpose of retaining radiant 
heat, as in my case, nor was it provided with 
a dead-air space. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim 
1. The combination, with the oven or cook 
ing-clhamber, of a stove-door having an interior 
facing or lining of fire-tile, soap-stone, or other 
opaque solid non-conducting substance, lav 
ing a glazed or enameled surface directly ex 
posed to the heat of the oven, as and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. An oven-door having an interior opaque 
 
ae 
206, SO 
glazed non-conducting facing, and a dead-air 
chamber between the outer metallic shell and I). 1878. 
the non-conducting facing, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. The combination, in an oven-door, of the 
shell AB, opaque glazed non-conducting lin- 
ing C, retaining-frame I), and dead-air chann- 
ber E, the whole constructed and arranged in 
the manner and for the purpose specified. 
Witnesses: 
P. H. GUNCKEL, 
(IIAS. M. PE('K. 
Witness my hand this 5th day of March, A. 
IRUF US J. KIN ( . 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206280.txt	C. H. WAN ARN AM. 
Nut-Lock. 
No. 206,28O. 
Patented July 23, 1878. 
Inventor 
NPEfERS: PhTo-LTHOGRAPHER, wash:NGTON, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CITARLES H. VAN ARNAM, OF LANSING BURG, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT N NUT. LOCKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 206,2S0, dated July 23, 1878; application filed 
December 8, 1877. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs H. WAN AR 
NAM, of the village of Lansingburg, county of 
Rensselaer and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and Improved Spring-Key for 
Securing Threaded Nuts, of which the follow 
ing is a specification: 
The nature of my invention consists in a 
manner of constructing a spring-key, threaded 
nut, and threaded bolt, so that the nut may be 
kept from turning upon the thread, and have 
two or more positions upon each revolution of 
the nut, where the nut and bolt may be secured 
by the key when it is desired to tighten or 
loosen the Inllt. 
In the accompanying drawing there are three 
illustrations of my invention, in which like 
letters designate like parts. 
Figure 1 shows a top view of the nut, bolt, 
and spring-key combined. Fig. 2 illustrates 
the spring-key removed; and Fig. 3 shows a 
vertical section of Fig. 1, taken on the line of y. 
Upon the sides of the bolt are cut three 
grooves, perpendicular to the threads and par 
allel to the sides of the bolt; and in the illus 
tration shown in Fig. 1 there are three such 
grooves, designated at O' O'O' as formed in 
the outer edge of the bolt S. Upon the inside 
of the threaded nut F there are shown two 
grooves cut parallel to the inside of the nut, 
and corresponding in size to those cut on the 
outside of the bolt. These grooves in the nut 
are designated at d and d" in Fig. 1, and at 
Fig. 3 in vertical section, with a recess formed 
in the groove, as shown at H. The spring-key 
D is illustrated in Fig.2 as detached from the 
connection, and in Fig. 3, in vertical section, 
as applied. It is provided with the leaf-spring 
B, attached to its lower end, with a terminal 
projection, A, and a side projection, N, the 
the latter corresponding with the recess formed 
in the bolt-grooves, and as shown at H, Fig. 3. 
The operation of the constructed and com 
bined parts is as follows: When the spring 
key is forced down into the grooves opposite 
each other in the nut and bolt, the projection 
N fits into the recess H, while the bottom pro 
jection A and the leaf-spring Bleep the key 
securely held in position, so that it will not jar 
out, and thus secures the nut from turning. 
When it is desired to unscrew or tighten the 
nut, the spring-key is withdrawn and the nut 
screwed on or off until one of the grooves in 
the nut comes opposite one in the bolt, when 
the spring-key is again inserted. 
While I have shown three grooves in the 
bolt, more may be arranged if desired, and 
more than two employed in the nut also; and 
the recess shown as formed in the grooves in 
the bolt may be placed in the grooves cut in 
the nut, and produce the same result. 
A single groove provided with a recess to 
receive the spring-key may be formed in either 
the bolt or nut, and a simple groove to corre 
spond in size in the other part not containing 
the recess, and the key-spring will answer the 
same purpose in most cases of use. 
I am well aware that a key has been used 
before for the same purpose; but when not 
combined with the spring-detaining projec 
tions and recess, it was liable to work out, and 
failed to keep the nut secured. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The key ID, leaf-spring B, and projections N 
and A formed on the key, in combination with 
the recess H and groove O' formed in the 
threaded bolt S, and the grooved formed in 
the threaded nut F, arranged to operate as 
and for the purposes herein described and set 
forth. 
- 
CIARLES II. WAN AIRNAMI. 
Witnesses: 
BERNARD BLAIR, 
JUSTIN KELLOGG. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206380.txt	. 
W. C. WOLFE. 
Rotary-Engine. 
2 sheets-Sheet l. 
( 
No. 206,38O. 
Patented July 23, 1878. 
. 
 
Mill-less E s- 
It liv Billors 
x 
N. PETERs, Phorc-LithogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D. C. 
 
W. C. WOLFE. 
Rotary-Engine. 
2 sheets-sheet 2. 
No. 206,38O. 
Patented July 23, 1878. 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
| E 
SR 
A. 
S 
s SSS 
SS 
N 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. WOLFE, OF JOINSTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MPROVEMENT IN ROTARY ENGINES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 206,3S0, lated July 23, 1878; application filel 
May 18, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. WoLFE, of 
Johnstown, in the county of Cambria and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Rotary 
Steam-Engines; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it pertains to 
make and use it, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
rotary steam-engines; and it consists in the 
arrangement and combination of parts that 
will be more fully described hereinafter, 
whereby the cheapness, efficiency, and dura 
bility of the engine are increased, the friction, 
wear, and leakage decreased, and a better and 
more serviceable engine produced. This en 
gine is also adapted to be used as a rotary 
pump, a hydraulic engine, an air-compressor, 
a blower, and for other purposes. 
The accompanying drawings represent my 
invention. 
b represents the base of the engine, upon 
the top of which is secured the pedestal A, 
which pedestal has a large transverse groove 
or slot cut through it, as shown. Upon the 
top of this pedestal is secured the case 0 of 
the engine, by means of bolts or any other 
suitable devices. Upon the base, and in be 
tween the two portions of the pedestal, is 
placed a valve box or chamber, in which valve 
d is located. This valve is made tapering, 
and fits in a correspondingly-shaped recess, 
while it is securely held in position by means 
of suitable glands 9 and packing, so as to be 
perfectly steam and air tight. Without this 
screw-gland and a suitable packing the valve 
will not operate. As fast as the valve-pack 
ing wears away, the gland is screwed in to 
take up the wear. Upon the upper side of 
this valve is formed a horizontal recess, and 
across the bottom of the valve is cut a trans 
verse recess or groove, these two recesses or 
grooves being made to extend at right angles 
to each other. The steam is admitted through 
the horizontal recess of valve d. When the 
valve is turned so that the handle is inclined 
to the left, the steam passes through the left 
side of the pedestal, up into the case c, and 
the steam, after having passed around the cir 
cuit of the case, is exhausted through the 
eduction-port in the right side of the pedes 
tal. When the handle of the valve is turned 
so as to incline toward the right, the motion 
of the engine is reversed, and the steam passes 
through the induction-port in the right side 
of the pedestal, and escapes down through the 
eduction-port in the left side of the pedestal. 
Upon the inside of one of the heads of the 
casinge is formed a cam, e, by means of which 
the valves are drawn inward, so as to raise 
them upward and over the abutment as they 
revolve around with the wheel. Upon both 
the heads are formed the fillets or flanges f, 
around the extreme outer edges of the inside 
of the case, for the purpose of forming a tight 
joint with the corresponding outer surfaces of 
flanges p upon the wheel. 
The propelling-wheel g, in which the pistons 
i are placed, is secured to a tapering shaft, S, 
which shaft passes through suitable glands or 
stuffing-boxes 1 in the heads of the casing, so 
as to cause it to move steam and air tight. 
This shaft is made square at its center, where 
it passes through the wheel, and from this 
square part it tapers toward each end, form 
ing journals, the interior of the glands being 
correspondingly shaped. To prevent any ec 
centricity of the shaft arising from neglect 
in screwing up the boxes, or from any other 
cause, and any friction caused by the wheel ?y 
in revolving in the case, the wheel is placed 
loosely on the shaft, and the opening in the 
wheel through which the shaft passes is made 
Somewhat larger at each end than in the 
middle. By thus enlarging the opening at 
the ends the shaft can vary somewhat from 
its true position without affecting the wheel, 
and thus the wheel will revolve evenly and 
truly under all circumstances, which it might 
not do were it secured to the shaft, or no 
provision made for a slight eccentricity of the 
shaft. 
The hubs 3 are formed on the outside of the 
heads of the case 0, and have the flanges 2 
formed in their inner ends, against which the 
packing is screwed. In the outer end of the 
hub are secured the glands 1, which have 
their outer ends made octagonal and of smaller 
diameter than the threaded part, so as to per. 
mit the gland to be screwed entirely in intak. 
2 
206,380 
ing up the wear. The outer ends of these 
glands project beyond the ends of the hubs, 
and as the screw-threads are not visible a fin 
ished appearance is thereby given the engine. 
Between the inner ends of the glands and the 
packing is placed the washer 4, which pre 
vents the packing from turning around with 
the gland when the gland is being screwed 
into the hub. By this arrangement the shaft 
is not only maintained in the center, but all 
wear is compensated for until the bushing is 
screwed entirely in after repeated turning, 
when it can be easily replaced by another. 
The propelling-wheel g has in its circumfer 
ence a groove with tapering sides, as shown, 
formed by two flanges, p, which taper out 
ward on their inner edges, the space between 
them forming the groove, while their out 
ward edges are straight and flush with the 
him of the wheel. Working back and forth 
through the edges of this wheel, upon oppo 
site sides of it and within the groove, are the 
two pistons i. These pistons have rods, pro 
jecting toward the center of the wheel through 
suitable stuffing-boxes, and to these rods are 
fastened the blocks.j, which can be adjusted 
back and forth by means of set-screws. Pro 
jecting from the opposite sides of the blocks 
from the set-screws are the studs or projec 
tions I, attached to the rods , and these studs 
catch in the cam and cause the piston to rise 
upward and over the abutment o, as already 
described. These blocks move back and forth 
with the pistons in slots cut through the pro 
pelling-wheel, and serve to take up any wear 
of the pistons, as well as to control their 
movements. The outer ends of these pistons fit 
snugly against the inside surface or periphery 
of the casing against which they move, and, 
by means of the flanges p upon the wheel and 
the fillets or flanges f on both sides of the cas 
ing, form steam and air tight joints. As these 
pistons wear away they can be adjusted out 
ward by means of the blocks, so as to com 
pensate for all wear by friction. 
Passed up into the casing, through a hole 
through the pedestal and bottom of the case, 
is the tapering abutment o, which is made of 
soft metal, and serves to separate the educ 
tion and induction ports of the engine. In 
order not only to hold this abutment in posi 
tion, but to adjust it upward, as it may wear 
away by the friction of the wheel upon it, 
the hole through which it is passed is closed 
by the Screw-plug m, as shown. 
When it is desired to adjust this abutment 
while the engine is in motion, or at any time, 
it is only necessary to apply a Wrench to the 
end of the nut, and the abutment can be moved 
upward to any desired degree. 
In order to prevent the pistons from ever 
striking against the abutment, in case they 
should give Way from any cause, a projection 
can be placed upon each side of it, so as to 
cause the pistons to rise upward, should the 
cam fail to raise them. By thus using a screw. 
plug and making this abutment adjustable, a 
very great gain and advantage are derived in 
adjusting the friction and Wear of the engine, 
and in rendering it perfectly tight. 
The cam-groove, as here shown, is formed 
of an ellipse and a circle; but any other shape 
or form which causes an abrupt deviation from 
the line of travel of the pistons as they near 
the abutment may be used instead. This en 
gine will be provided with a lubricator upon 
its top, for lubricating the pistons, a lubricator 
upon each bearing of the shaft, and a cock to 
allow the condensed steam to escape, all of 
which may be of any desired form or construc 
tion that may be preferred. 
Upon the base of the engine is bolted a 
plate, ac, having a short pipe screwed into its 
center, and connected with the exhaust-port of 
the engine. The spaces, inclosed by the plate 
and engine-base, forms a chamber or heater, 
through which the feed - Water is forced or 
drawn before entering the boiler. Beneath. 
this chamber 8 is formed a second one, t, con 
necting with the exhaust-pipe through a hole 
in the base-plate of the engine, or at the side 
of the base of the engine. Into this lower 
chamber the exhaust-steam is discharged, 
which comes in contact with the under sur 
face of the floor of the chamber above it, and 
the feed-water contained therein is thereby 
heated. This chamber may also be used for 
a condenser by discharging into it a small 
quantity of water in the form of a shower, and 
delivering this heated water and condensed 
steam into the boiler. This plate a will only 
be used when the engine is not placed upon 
the top of the boiler. When the engine is on 
top of the boiler the exhaust-steam will pass, 
by means of the exhaust-pipe, through the top 
of the boiler and escape up the stack, while the 
feed-Water, in passing through the chamber 
formed by the base of the engine, will be heated 
by the top plate of the boiler. As the feed. 
water passes through the base of the engine 
it prevents the heat from the boiler from over 
heating the engine. 
Having thus described my invention, J 
claim 
1. In a rotary engine, the lhollow basel, form 
ing a chamber through which the feed-Water 
passes on its way to the boiler, the water being 
heated from the top plate of the boiler, sub 
stantially as shown. 
2. A rotary engine having a hollow base, b, 
in which is secured the plate or partition ac, to 
form the chambers, for the purpose of heat 
ing the feed-Water by means of the exhaust 
Steam, Substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the pedestal A, having 
a transverse opening through it, and driving 
Wheel (), having a tapering groove in its outer 
edge, With the tapering abutmento, passed up 
through the bottom of the case into the said 
groove, and held in position by the screw-plug 
m, substantially as set forth. 
4. The driving-shaft S, made square at its 
center, in combination with the driving-wheel 
(1, having the opening through its center made 
 
206,3S0 
3 
larger at the ends than the center, so as to 
allow the shaft a slight movement without 
affecting the wheel, substantially as specified. 
5. In a rotary engine, the combination of the 
tapering shaft 8, hubs 3, having the flanges 2 
in their inner ends, and glands 1, the glands 
being provided with heads that are smaller in 
diameter than the bodies, so that the glands 
can be screwed their whole length into the 
hub, substantially as shown. 
6. The piston-rods , having the adjustable 
blocks.j attached thereto, in combination with 
the came, substantially as described, as a 
means of adjusting the pistons in and out. 
7. The combination of the base A, having a 
transverse slot through it to receive the valve 
box, with the tapering valve d, having a lon 
gitudinal groove to receive the steam, and a 
transverse groove to discharge the exhaust 
steam, all arranged and constructed to operate, 
in a rotary engine, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 30th day of 
April, 187S. 
WILLIAM. C. WOIFE. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN HENDERSON, 
JOHN WIDMANN, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206480.txt	W. N. PHIPPS 
Grain-Tally, 
No. 206,480. 
Patented July 30, 1878. 
 
 
 
 
 
z-21 T16 W. 
Y 
A 
HS 
s 
i 
M 
t 
Ali ST, a 
y - 
WITNESEs: 
D 
C ( 3. c.6%, 
6%r 
7 
INVENTOR: 
7/24. 
BY vetus S 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM N. PHIPPs, OF GLEN WOOD, IO WA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN GRAN-TALLES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 206,4S0, dated July 30, 1878; application filed 
June 26, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM N. PHIPPs, of 
Glenwood, in the county of Mills and State of 
IoWa, have invented a new and Improved 
Grain-Tally, of which the following is a speci 
fication: 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
cheap and simple device to be used at thrash 
ing-machines, for ascertaining the number of 
bushels or half-bushels of grain thrashed. 
To accomplish this a hinged lid is arranged 
to be Supported in a raised position upon the 
end of a vertical sliding rod, kept up by a 
Spiral Spring, which latter is compressible by 
just the weight of a half-bushel of grain. The 
sliding rod is connected with a lever and 
Spring - pressed pawl, to operate a ratchet 
wheel on the end of a drum or roller, which 
is connected by a surrounding tape to an 
other roller. The depression of the lever is 
limited by an adjustable stop, and at each 
depression the ratchet-wheel is revolved for 
the space of one tooth, moving the tape for 
Ward an equal distance. 
Figures marked on the tape, and visible 
through a glass pane on the cover of the box 
in Which the apparatus is inclosed, indicate 
the number of teeth moved forward, and, con 
sequently, the number of half-bushel measures 
successively placed upon the hinged lid. 
In the accompanying drawing, Figure I rep 
resents a longitudinal vertical section of my 
improved grain-tally. Fig. 2 is a top view of 
the same, partly in section. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A is the box inclosing the counting mech 
anism, which is attached to one of the upright 
sides of the box. This is covered with two 
lids, B B', hinged one at each end of the box, 
and meeting at the center, each lid covering 
one-half of the box A. The lid B has an open 
ing through it, covered with a glass pane, ct, 
through which the index is observed. The 
lid B is provided on the under side with a 
pin, b, which rests upon the upper end of the 
rod C, pivoted to one end of the lever D, and 
whose lower end is guided in a hole through 
the stationary lug c. The rod C is Surrounded 
with a spiral spring, E, interposed between 
the lug c and a shoulder on the rod at its 
upper end. The expansion of the Spring E 
keeps the lid B raised, as shown in the draw 
ing, until depressed by the Weight of one-half 
of a bushel of grain placed upon the lid B. 
The lever D is pivoted or fulcrumed at d to 
the side of the box A, and is provided with a 
pawl, F, pivoted to it at f, which pawl is 
pressed, by a spring, G, against the face of a 
ratchet-wheel, H, mounted on a shaft, h, which 
revolves in bearings in the frame I on the in 
side of the box A. 
On the shaft, h is secured a roller, J, and 
another roller, K, is mounted on a shaft, I, 
and arranged in the flame I to revolve parallel 
With the roller J. 
L is a band Or tape, stamped with numbers 
ill Successive arithmetical order, at distances 
apart COI'responding to the space of one tooth 
of the ratchet-wheel B. One end of the tape 
L is attached to the roller J, and the other 
end to the roller K, so that the tape may be 
Would off one roller and onto the other. The 
wheel H is kept from turning back with the 
receding of the pawl F by the stationary spring 
pawl MI, which latter is raised when desired 
to reset the tape, which is done by Winding it 
onto the roller K by an ordinary clock-key 
applied on the end of the shaft le. 
The forward end of the lever D is guided in 
its movement between the side of the box A 
and the vertical bar N, which latter is secured 
with its lower end to the side of the box, and 
has a horizontal offset, n, through which is a 
threaded hole, with a set-screw, O, in it, to 
regulate and limit the downward throw of the 
lever D to correspond with the pitch of the 
atchet-wheel H. 
P is a stop, attached to the side of the box 
A above the lever I), to stop the latter from 
being moved too far upward by the pressure 
of the spring E. 
If desired, the roller J may be connected 
with its shafts h by a key, which key may be 
withdrawn when it is desired to windl the tape 
L from the roller J to the roller K, so that this 
may be done. Without turning the ratchet 
wheel H. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
The hinged lid B, supported on the spring 
raised rod C, in combination with the pivoted 
lever D, having the pawl Falud moving be 
tween the stops N P, and with the ratchet 
wheel H, rollers J K, and indicator-tape L, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
WILLIAM N. PHPIPS, 
Witnesses: 
A. J. RUSSELL, 
I. F. WILLIAMS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206580.txt	H. KNICKMANN. 
T00l for Removing Pintle from Hinge-Joint 
Patented July 30, 1878 
No. 206,580. 
a- - - 3N 22 
2 
2%2 
2xx 
Y 
    
 
N.PETERS, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, wastigion, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY KNICKMANN, OF EAST NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN TOOLS FOR REMOVING PINTES FROM HNGE-JONTS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 206,5S0, dated July 30, 1878; application filed 
July 5, 1878, 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY KNICKMANN, 
of East New York, Kings county, and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Tools for Removing Pintles 
from Hinge-Joints, which invention is fully 
set forth in the following specification, refer. 
ence being had to the accompanying drawing, 
in which 
Figure 1 represents a side view of my tool, 
partly in section, showing the positions of the 
parts when the jaws are closed. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal section thereof in the plane aca, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a side view of the same, 
partly in section, when the jaws are opened. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
My invention relates to that class of tools 
for which Letters Patent of the United States 
were granted to me May 7, 1878, No. 203,466. 
It consists in arranging the notched base 
plate of the tool to slide on its jaw and provid 
ing the other jaw, carrying the ejecting finger or 
fingers, with a rod which passes through a hole 
in the base-plate, so that when the jaws are 
opened or closed the base-plate is slid forward 
or backward by the action of the rod, and by 
this means the notches in said plate are brought 
opposite to the ejecting finger or fingers in any 
position of the jaws, whereby the operation of 
the tool is improved. 
In the drawing, the letters A B designate 
the two jaws of my tool, these jaws being piv 
oted together, and each being provided with 
a handle, C. On the jaw A is arranged the 
base-plate D, in the front edge of which is 
formed a notch, a, while to the front part of 
the jaw B is secured a finger, b, which serves 
to eject the pintles from the hinge-joint to be 
acted on through the notch (t. 
In the example shown a single notch and 
ejecting-finger is used; but it is obvious that 
a greater number can be used, and also that 
a hole or perforation may be substituted for 
the notch. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. WAHLER, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER, 
The base-plate D is arranged in suitable 
ways on the jaw A, so that it is susceptible of 
sliding lengthwise on such jaw, and it is pro 
vided with a hole through which passes a rod, 
E, projecting from the jaw B in the direction 
of the jaw A. The rod E serves to control the 
position of the base-plate D; and when the 
jaws AB are closed the said plate is moved 
inward, as shown in Fig. 1, while, when the 
jaws are opened, the plate is moved outward, 
as shown in Fig. 3. The effect of this move 
ment is that the notch a is held opposite to 
the finger b in any position of the jaws; or, 
in other words, the notch and finger are al 
ways in a corresponding plane to each other 
relatively to the axis of the jaws. I thus ob 
tain a good support for the hinge-joint in the 
operation of removing the pintle therefrom, 
and render my tool available for joints of large 
S120. 
In order to prevent the complete withdrawal 
of the rod E, I form therein a ledge, c, and 
provide the jaw B with a cross-bar, d, against 
which this ledge strikes when the jaws are 
opened, as clearly shown in Fig. 3; but this 
can also be accomplished in other ways. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, in a tool for removing pin 
tles from hinge-joints, of two pivoted jaws, 
one provided with a sliding base plate, D, 
having one or more notches or their equiva 
lent, and the other provided with a rod, E, 
passing through a hole in said base-plate and 
provided with one or more ejecting-fingers, 
all adapted to operate substantially in the 
manner set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand and seal this 25th 
day of June, 1878. 
EIENERY KNICKMANN. 
L. S. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206680.txt	G. T. LEWIS & E. O. BARTLETT. 
Process of Making Lead Pigment. 
No.2O6,68O. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1878. 
GEORGE. T. LEWIS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, AND EAYRE O. 
BARTLETT, OF JOPLIN, MISSOURI. 
"iry 
IMPROVEMENT N PROCESSES OF MAKING LEAD PGMENT. 
Specification forming part of Letters Iatent No. 206,6s 0, dated August 6, 1878; application filed 
January 2, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGET. LEWIs, of 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, and EAYRE O. 
BARTLETT, of Joplin, in the State of Missouri, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in the Manufacture of Dry White Lead and 
White - Lead Pigment from galena, (native 
sulphuret of lead;) and we do hereby declare 
that the following is a full and exact descrip 
tion of the same. 
Heretofore the manufacture of dry white lead 
from galena or the native sulphurets has been 
effected by roasting or desulphurizing the ga 
lena, and then mixing the residue, after roast 
ing, with carbon and subjecting the mixture 
to the action of heat in a compound reducing 
and oxidizing furnace and collecting the re 
sulting fumes in bags, as described in Letters 
Patent of the United States dated March 1, 
1870, No 100,353, granted to Eayre O. Bart 
lett for improvement in the manufacture of 
dry white lead. Pulverized galena has also 
been showered into a bed of fuel and the pro 
ducts collected in bags. 
We have discovered that by mixing the na 
tive sulphuret of lead (galena) in a crushed 
state with carbon and treating the mixture in 
a reducing and oxidizing furnace without pre 
viously desulphurizing the ore a superior 
quality of dry white lead is produced. The 
products given off from the sulphuret of lead 
during this treatment chemically combine with 
the other fumes and improve the body and 
color of the product. 
The furnace which we have found to Work 
Well for the purposes above mentioned is com 
monly known as the Wetherill zinc-furnace, 
for which Letters Patent of the United States 
were granted to Samuel Wetherill, November 
13, 1855, No. 13,806, and which is represented 
in the annexed drawings, in which 
a is the main chamber, the bottomb of which 
is composed of iron bars, perforated with small 
holes of about one-quarter of an inclh in di 
ameter and about one inch apart, and, prefer 
ably, made slightly conical, with the larger 
diameter downward. The size f the holes 
would be such as to prevent the crushed ore 
and coal from falling through. These perfo 
- 
rated bars are suitably sustained at the ends 
On the front and back walls c d. 
The ash-pit, below the perforated bottom, is 
of equal area there with, and is provided with 
a door, e, in front, and with a hole, f, at the 
back for the reception of a pipe from suitable 
blowing apparatus. 
The Walls g g and arch on top should be 
built of some refractory substance, such as 
fire-brick. 
The front is entirely open, and provided 
with sliding doors i, by which it can be closed 
When Working the process or open to remove 
the residuum. 
At the back there are two sliding jambs.jj, 
to give access to the main chamber for stirring 
the charge and for inspection. 
At the back, near the arch, there is a hole, 
k, governed by a sliding damper, leading to a 
chimney for carrying off smoke and impure 
gases in the beginning of the operation on a 
new charge. 
In the center of the roof there is an aper 
ture, l, governed by a damper or sliding door, 
n, leading to a suitable apparatus for the col 
lection of the oxidized vapol's of lead. 
The exterior walls, in O p q, may be built 
above the top to form two feeding-troughs, ' ', 
one on each side of the arch or roof, and pro 
vided each with an aperture or passage, s, 
leading to the inside or main chamber, and 
each aperture or passage is provided with a 
cover to be put on after the furnace has been 
clharged. 
We mix together crushed ore (native sul 
pluret of lead) and carbon, preferably in the 
state of pea or dust anthracite coal, in the pro 
portion of half and half, and treat the mixture 
in a compound reducing and oxidizing furnace. 
Dense white vapors or fumes pass off, which 
are conveyed to a separate chamber, where 
they are strained by passing through a screen 
or series of screens of muslin or other textile 
fabric. Iime may also be employed in the 
furnace in the proportion of two hundred 
pounds of lime to four hundred pounds of ga 
lena, although the addition of the lime is not 
necessary in all cases, 
We have discovered also that the process 
 
205,680 
of sublimation can be carried on with good pigment loy treating unroasted galena (native 
results either in a furnace with grate-bars, with sulphuret of lead) mixed with carbon, by sub 
blast introduced at pleasure from below or at jecting the same to the action of heat and oxy 
the sides, or in a furnace with a solid bot-gen in a compound reducing and oxidizing 
tom, with blast introduced at the sides. The furnace or other furnace capable of oxidizing 
grate or furnace can be either closed or open the sulphuret of lead and collecting the fumes, 
at the top. We find, however, that the solid as above described. 
bottom presents some advantages, as it does 
not, like the grate-bottom, become filled and 
choked with molten lead. 
We have also discovered that generated gas 
can be used in place of coal to accomplish the 
same end. 
IIaving thus described our invention, what 
We claim is- 
The process of manufacturing a basis of a 
(EORGE. T. LEWIS. 
EAYRE O. BARTIETT. 
Witnesses as to Eayre (). IBartlet f: 
Witnesses as to George T. Lewis: 
W. ('. STRAWBRIDGE, 
JoHN JOLLEY, Jr. 
J. I. McCoy, 
3. F. (ARRISON. 
 
. 
. . 
. aka::it::p"... 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206780.txt	D. L. G. ARWER, 
Seed-Drill and Cultivator. 
No. 206,780. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1878. 
 
WITNESSES 
NVENTOR 
r 192e-ee 
ATTORNEYS 
Photo-LITHOGRAPHER, washington. c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID L. GARVER, OF HART, MICHIGAN. 
IMPROVEMENT IN SEED - DRILLS AND CULTIVATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 206, so, dated August 6, 1878; application filed 
April 27, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVIDI. GARVER, of 
Hart, in the county of Oceana and State of 
Michigan, have invented a new and valuable 
Improvement in Seed-Drills and Cultivators; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the con 
struction and operation of the same, reference 
being had to the annexed drawings, making a 
part of this specification, and to the letters 
and figures of reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a part-sectional 
side view of my seed-drill and cultivator. Fig. 
2 is a plan view, and Fig. 3 is a perspective 
detail, thereof, 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
construction and arrangement of a combined 
seed-drill and cultivator to be used by hand 
or by horse power, as will be hereinafter more 
fully set forth. 
The annexed drawing, to which reference is 
made, fully illustrates my invention. 
A. A represent two inclined and diverging 
side beams, which form the handles of the ma 
chine, said beams being connected by a round, 
B. C is the seed-drill platform, suspended 
under the beams AA by stirrups or bent metal 
bars EE. Between the frontends of the beams 
AA is mounted the wheel D, which has its 
rim scalloped, as seen at a, on one side, for the 
purpose of playing against the side of the end 
of a pivoted lever, F, said lever having on its 
front end a roller, b, which is caused to oscil 
late against the scalloped side of the wheel by 
the revolving of the wheel and the operation 
of a spring-lever, G, which holds the roller 
against the Wheel. 
The rear end of the pivoted lever F is at 
tached to a shuttle or slide, H, which is to 
play to and fro under a hopper containing 
seed. When the roller b passes a scallop, a, 
on the wheel the shuttle is passed under the 
hopper, and a hole in the shuttle is filled with 
seed, and the shuttle is then carried to a cor 
responding hole below, which connects with a 
tube to conduct the seed to the ground. 
For the purpose of holding the wheel in its 
proper position a roller, d, is arranged to play 
against the opposite edge of the wheel-rim. 
 
f is a rubber tube used in contact with the 
upper side of the shuttle H, and held in posi 
tion by set-screws e. e. This rubber is used for 
the purpose of preventing friction and clog 
ging and to separate the seed in the shuttle 
from the seed in the lopper when the shuttle 
passes out. 
The spring-lever G is attached near the up. 
per end of one of the beams or handles A, and 
extends downward and connects with the piv 
oted lever F for the purpose of acting in con 
junction with the scalloped wheel-rim in pro 
ducing the oscillations of the shuttle, as de 
scribed. 
When the machine is to be used as a culti 
vator the platform C is removed, and teeth II 
are fastened to cross-bars J J, which are se 
cured on stirrups I, I fastened to the under 
sides of the beams A. The outside teeth are 
used with the seed-drill also; and in changing 
to a cultivator the intermediate ones are at 
tached. 
The teeth I are formed in the shape of a 
half-circle, which is the best form to pass 
through the ground with the least possible re 
sistance. If made to run with points more 
horizontal it has a tendency to come out of 
the ground, and if the tooth stand more per 
pendicular it encounters greater resistance. 
These teeth are formed of spring - steel for 
the purpose of yielding sufficient to prevent 
battering the edge when they come in contact 
with stone, and for the purpose of greater 
strength with less weight, 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
In a hand seed-drill, the combination of the 
wheel D, having its rim a scalloped on one 
side, the pivoted lever F, with roller b, and a 
rigid guide-roller, d, on the opposite side, the 
shuttle H, and spring-lever G, all constructed 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
. 
DAVID L. GARVER, 
Witnesses: 
MARCUs H. BROOKs, 
JOSEPH TYEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206880.txt	F. JOHNSON, 
P10 W, 
No. 206,88O. 
Patented Aug. 13, 1878. 
 
 
 
 
 
As SOH 
Irret-to-2 
(764 age 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FELIX JOHNSON, OF PARIS, TEXAS, 
IMPROVEMENT IN POWS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 206, ss0, dated August 13, 1878; application filed 
July 6, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FELIX JoHNSON, of 
Paris, in the county of Lamar and State of 
Texas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Plows; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
pertains to make and use it, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
plows; and it consists in the combination of a 
revolving concave disk on the mold-board side 
and a revolving cutter-wheel on the land-side 
and an intermediate operating mechanism, as 
Will be more fully described hereinafter. 
The accompanying drawings represent my 
invention. 
a represents the beam, to one side of which 
is secured the land-side b. This land-side is 
made from a single wide plate, which is re 
cessed or grooved at its front edge, to receive 
the colter c. The mold-boardis quite narrow, 
and has its rear edge recessed out, as shown. 
Projecting outward from the center of the 
land-side is the bearing d, from which extends 
the pivote, upon which the revolving concave 
disk revolves. This disk f has its front edge 
hidden behind the rear edge of the mold-board, 
and projects backward at any suitable angle, 
So as to receive the sod and dirt from the mold 
board and turn it over. Upon the rear side 
of this disk are formed the circle of cogs.g., 
Which mesh with the pinion i on the shaft h, 
The shafth has its ends held in suitable bear 
ings, and has secured to it the large rolleri, 
which has one edge to project through an open 
ing in the land-side, so as to bear against the 
vertical side of the furrow, and not only coun 
teract the pressure of the mold-board, but 
cause the shaft to constantly revolve. The 
same bearing, l, in which the lower end of the 
shaft his stepped extends outward and for 
ward, so as to form a covering for the whole 
space between the revolving disk and the land 
side, not only to form a bearing for the roller 
in, but to prevent dirt and obstructions of any 
kind from rising up into the operating mech 
anism. 
The roller in bears against the outer edge of 
the disk, as shown, and braces it in position. 
The pinion i also meshes with the long pinion 
0, which is journaled in suitable bearings on 
the outer side of the land-side, and which, in 
turn, receives motion from the cylinder p, 
which has teeth or cogs formed in its inner 
edge. The pivot or bolt r, upon which this cyl 
inder revolves, passes through a slot in the 
hanging portion of the frames, which is se 
cured to, and projects some distance out be 
yond, the land-side of the beam a, and can be 
adjusted up and down in the slot, so as to raise 
or depress the cutter-wheelt, which is secured 
to the outer end of the cylinder. 
As the pinion o is of considerable length, 
the cylinder and its cutter-wheel t can be ad 
justed up and down sufficiently far to make 
the plow run deep or shallow, as may be de 
sired. 
Around the sides and lower edge of the cyl 
inder is placed the shield , and over the top 
of those parts just in rear of the disk f is 
placed another shield, u, to keep the working 
parts from being clogged with dirt. 
The diskfishere shown as having a mech 
anism to keep it revolving while the plow is in 
use, and this is necessary in those sticky soils 
where the earth adheres to the mold-board in 
such a manner as to clog the plow, but not in 
free soil. Upon the frame s is secured the 
Seaty. 
Eaving thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination, in a plow, of a revolv 
ing mold-board, f, provided with cogs g, the 
vertical shaft h, having pinion i, the gear 
wheel o, toothed cylinder p, and cutter-wheel 
t, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the rolleri, vertical 
shaft h, having pinion i, and the revolving 
mold-boardif, having the teeth g upon its in 
ner side, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of vertically-adjustable 
cutter t, toothed cylinder p, long pinion 0, 
shaft r, and frame 8, substantially as shown. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 12th day of 
June, 1878. 
FEILIN JOINSON, 
Witnesses: 
W. H. NoRTICUTT, 
E. D. SCALES, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US206980.txt	S, SQUIREs. 
Sofa-Bed, 
No. 206,980. 
Patented Aug. 13, 1878. 
 
%SS2. 
3. S$2.53. 
a 5 
Fig. 5 
INVEN tor 
 
N.PETERS, Photo-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIDNEY SQUIRES, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN SOFA-BEDs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 206,9S0, dated August 13, 1878; application filed 
April 22, 1878. 
terwoven as to form the loops d, which corre 
Be it known that I, SIDNEY SQUIREs, of spond in place with the projecting buttons or 
hooks e on the inner sides of the rails, to which 
they are fastened by catching or looping on 
the same in the manner shown in Fig. 3. 
This mode of construction is cheap, simple, 
and effective for the purpose for which it is 
designed. 
It will be seen that the mattress can be re 
moved with ease and facility, and may be re 
versed when desired. 
It will also be observed that by the easy re 
moval of the rail the frame can be readily 
cleaned-a very desirable construction for this 
class of furniture. 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States 
1. In a sofa-bed, the combination of the 
frame A with the removable rails at a?, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a sofa-bed, the combination of a mat 
tress, B, provided with rope-loops d, formed 
by passing a rope in and out the side of the 
mattress, as shown, at or near the center of its 
thickness, the buttons or hooks e projecting 
inwardly from the inner side of the removable 
rails a, a? and the hinged frame A substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
ment in Sofa-Beds, of which the following is 
a specification: 
The objects of this invention consist, first, in 
the described means for fastening the mat 
tress forming the seat and back of the sofa 
bed to the frame supporting it, for the purposes 
hereinafter set forth; second, in the manner 
set forth for securing the front and rear rail of 
the mattress-supporting frame in place, for the 
reasons hereinafter given. 
In the drawing, Figure 1 is a perspective of 
the mattress and frame, with the front rail of 
the frame partially broken out to show the 
manner of fastening the mattress in place. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective, showing the front rail 
removed to expose the method employed in 
fastening it to the rest of the frame; and Fig. 
3 is a partial cross-section to more fully show 
the construction described. 
The frame A is hinged at the center of its 
width in order that that portion forming the 
back of the sofa-bed may be lifted when nec 
essary, and is further provided with the re 
movable rails a af, which are fastened to the 
end and bottom of the frame by means of 
dowels b and lhooks and staples c. 
The mattress B has its sides adjacent to the 
removable rail provided with the ropes so in 
SIDNEY SQUIRES, 
Witnesses: 
E. C. F. SANCHEZ, 
C. AVERA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207080.txt	W. G. STEWENS 0 N. 
Rice-Hulling Machine. 
No. 207,08O. 
Patented Aug. 13, 1878. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM G. STEVEN SON, OF MERIDIAN, MISSISSIPPI. 
MPROVEMENT IN RECE HULLNG MACH NES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 207,0so, dated August 13, 1878; application filed 
June 26, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM G. STEVEN 
SON, of Meridian, in the county of Lauderdale, 
and in the State of Mississippi, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Rice 
Hullers; and do hereby declare that the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, making a part of this 
specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
Construction and arrangement of a machine for 
hulling rice, as will be hereinafter more fully 
Set forth. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
its construction and operation, referring to the 
annexed drawing, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
rice-huller; and Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical 
Section of the same. . 
A represents the frame-work of the machine, 
provided at one end with a hopper, B, through 
which the rice is fed to the operating parts. 
The rice is hulled between a stationary in 
clined bed, C, and a reciprocating rubber, D. 
The inclined bed C is hinged at its upper end, 
and the lower end suspended by means of 
rods FF, which are hooked into eyes a on the 
bed and pass upward through top side bars 
of the frame. Nuts b b are screwed on the up 
per ends of the rods, so that the inclination of 
the bed C can be easily adjusted as required. 
The rubber D may be operated by a crank, 
gearing, or any other suitable or convenient 
means, So as to have a reciprocating motion. 
Both the incline C and rubber D are made 
of wood, placed endwise, and inclosed within 
suitable frames, as shown, and their adjacent 
surfaces corrugated, as shown at aca. 
On each side of the bed-frame, near the up 
per end, is an incline or riser, d, and the rub 
ber D has on each side, at the upper end, a 
curved arm, e, which rides upon the riser d, 
and raises or lifts that end of the rubber at 
each upward stroke to admit the rough rice in 
between the bed and the rubber. 
In the hopper B is a valve, G, attached to 
a shaft, h, which has its bearings in the ends 
of the hopper. One end of the shaft h, be. 
yond the hopper, is made square, and to it is 
attached an angular or L-shaped lever, H., one 
arm of which is weighted, as shown at I, to 
hold the valve closed. The other arm of the 
lever H forms a hook, m, to be actuated by a 
hook, 7, formed on an arm, J, attached to the 
rubber D. As the rubber moves downward, 
if the weight I should fail to close the valve, 
the hooks in on will do so; and as the rubber 
moves upward the arm J, striking the end of 
the lever L, will open the valve at the same 
time as the rubber is lifted by the risers d, and 
allow a certain quantity of rice to pass down 
and in between the bedland rubber. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The valve G arranged in the hopper and 
operated by means of the weighted lever H, 
and the arm J on the rubber D, substantially 
as and for the purposes herein set forth. 
2. The risers d'd on the bed C, in combina 
tion with the rubber D, for the purposes set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 21st day of 
May, 1878. 
WILLIAMI G. STEVENSON. 
WWitnesses: 
HENRY McKINZIE, 
R. J. TRAVERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207180.txt	S. E. HILLIARD. 
Railway Rail-Joint, 
No. 207,180. 
 
Patented Aug. 20, 1878. 
  
 
N 
NS 
t2  
ZZZZZZZZZZsa ZZ 
S. 
Seses 
2. 
S 
Sg, E. 
Pro- 
a? 4S4 
 
WITNESSES 
2% e/, 6a, 6. 
 2. 
INVENTOR 
o4ta 
22.66%ree 
N. PETERS, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, was HINGTON, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL E. HILLIARD, OF RENO, NEVADA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN RAILWAY-RAIL Joints. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 207,1so, dated August 20, 1878; application filed 
June 10, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL E. HILLIARD, 
of Reno, Washoe county, in the State of Ne 
vada, have invented an Improved Expansion 
Joint and Chair for Railway-Tracks; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being 
had to certain drawings accompanying this 
specification and forming a part of the same. 
My invention has reference to a novel con 
struction and arrangement of railway-chairs 
and rail joints, the object of which is to permit 
the rails to expand and contract freely with 
out crowding upon the switch-rails, and to 
preserve the general alignment of the track. 
My improved chair and joint are only re 
quired at those points where the crowding of 
the rails by what is known as the crawling 
of the track down a grade' interferes with the 
movement of the switch-rails, and also at the 
ends of curves, where the expansion and con 
traction of the rails have a tendency to disturb 
the curvature or alignment of the tracks. 
It will be noticed from the following descrip 
tion that all the parts of my chair can be made 
of old railway-rails and such other parts as 
can easily be found ready at hand. 
Referring to the accompanying drawing, 
Figure 1 is a plan. Fig.2 is also a plan, partly. 
in section, showing the arrangement of the 
stops. Fig. 3 is a transverse vertical section. 
Let A A represent two meeting rails of a 
railway-track, the ends of which are supported 
in my improved railway-chair. 
The chair consists of an outside short rail, 
B, and an inside split or half rail, C, between 
which two short rails or parts of rails the ends 
of the track-rails A. A move as slides. The 
parts BC can be made longer or shorter, as de 
sired; but from six to eight feet will be a con 
venient and suitable length. The inside flange 
of the short railB I cut away so that its edge 
will be on a plane with the inside edge of its 
head. I also cut away a portion of the out 
side head and flange of each rail A extending 
from its end to a distance along the rail equal 
to half the length of the short chair-rail B, 
and make a square shoulder, d, where the cut 
away portion terminates. The cut-away por 
tion or side of the rails A. A will then fit close 
against the inner edges of the head and cut 
- 
away flange of the short rail B. It is evident, 
however, than any arrangement for fitting 
these parts of the rails together would an 
SWer-for instance, the short rail B need not 
have its flange cut off, but the flange or base 
of the rail. A could be cut out to fit it. The 
arrangement herein shown, however, is sim 
ple and convenient. 
The inside or split rail C of the chair is just 
as long as the outside short rail B, and it is 
made by splitting an old rail along the middle 
of its web, and taking the flange or base por 
tion and turning it upside down, so that the 
cut edge of the web will rest upon the base D, 
on which the chair is fastened, allowing 
its 
outside flange to project over the inside 
flanges of the abutting rails A A, thus form 
ing a groove in which the flanges of the rails 
can slide. 
E is a bent guard-rail, which is secured to 
the base D inside of the split rail C, so that 
the inside flange of the split rail will overlap 
the outside flange of the guard-rail, as repre 
sented. 
Near each end of the short rail B I make a 
hole through the middle of its web, and through 
this hole I put a bolt, i, which projects on the 
inside of the web, and either has a nut on it or 
is otherwise fastened, so as to form a stop or 
projection. I also make a hole through the 
Web of each rail. A near their adjoining ends, 
and after the ends of the rails have been slipped 
past the stops or projections on the chair-railB, 
I secure a bolt,j, in the hole so that it will pro 
ject on the inside of the web. These projec 
tions will then form stops, which will prevent 
the ends of the rails A. from being drawn en 
tirely out from between the slides, while the 
shoulders d will limit the movement of the 
rails in an opposite direction. These stops 
might be dispensed with, but I prefer to use 
them. 
As a foundation for the chair and joint, I 
place a number of ties, F, close together, and 
secure one or more metal plates, D, upon them. 
For this purpose pieces of old boiler-iron, such 
as can readily be found about any railroad 
shop, will answer. I shall usually rivet or 
otherwise secure the parts B C E of the chair 
to these plates before fastening them to the 
ties F, so that all that is necessary after the 
2 
20?, 150 
has given the utmost satisfaction. It insures 
a perfectly free movement of the switch-rail at 
all times, and saves a large amount of trouble 
and expense which has heretofore been neces 
sary in cutting the rails and Watching the 
track. 
Having described my invention, what Iclaim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A railway-chair consisting of the outside 
short rails B and inside split rail C, arranged, 
as described, in combination with the sliding 
track-rails AA, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
2. An expansion joint for railway - tracks 
consisting of the rails AA, secured as slides 
between an outside short rail, B, and inside 
clamps or guards, C, which embrace the in 
side flanges of the rails, substantially as and 
for the purpose above described. 
3. A railway-chair consisting of the base 
plate D, with its short chair-rail B, half or 
split rail C, inverted and secured, as described, 
and the guard-rail E, all combined and ar 
ranged in connection with the track-rails AA, 
substantially as above specified. 
4. The track-rails AA, arranged as slides 
in a chair, B C E, and having their inside 
corners rounded or beveled, substantially as 
and for the purpose above described. 
and the inside slide C, in combination with 
the sliding track-rails AA, with their stops.j, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal. 
5. The short chair-rail B, with its stops 
Witnesses: 
. 
SAMUEL E. HILLIARD. L. s. 
CHAs. E. SMITH, 
CHARLES E. SHERMAN. 
plates have been placed in position and se 
cured to the ties is to slip the prepared ends 
of the rails A into their places in the slides 
and fix the stops in the holes. 
When the expansionjoint is used for the 
protection of a switch, one of the rails A of 
each chair willform a continuation of the main 
track, while the other connects with the switch 
rail; but when it is used for protecting a curve 
or continuous line of track, each of the rails. A 
will form a part of the main track. 
In setting the rails A, Imove them as far as 
their stops will allow in a direction contrary 
to that in which the track crawls, so that a 
sufficient space or length of movement will be 
provided in the joint to prevent crowding of 
the rails for several months at a time. When 
the crawling of the track has moved the rails 
A to the extent of the slide, a portion of one 
of the rails or of an adjoining rail can be cut 
off, and the rails AA reset in their expanded 
position. 
To prevent the accumulation of dirt in the 
groove in advance of the ends of the rails A, 
Imake holes t t in the plate or base D, through 
which the dirt will pass as the movement of 
the rails forces it in advance of them. 
When a train is passing over this chair and 
joint the wheels of the cars, if the ends of the 
rails A A are separated, will bear on the short 
outside chair-rails B in passing from one rail 
to the other. To prevent the wheels from 
striking the ends of the rails, I bevel or round 
of their inside corners, as represented, so that 
the flanges of the wheels will move easily from 
one to the other. 
This chair and expansionjoint has been in 
use for several months on the Virginia and 
Truckee railroad in the State of Nevada, and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207280.txt	S. B., INGLIS, 
Lamp-Chimney. 
No. 207,28O 
Patented Aug. 20, 1878. 
 
WITNASSES. . 
22, 
726-22- 
Iveyror 
0-na?/644. 
GTON, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL B. INGLIS, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF HIS RIGHT TO E. T. JAMESON, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN LAMP-CHIMNEYS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 207,2SO, dated August 20, 1878; application filed 
March 8, 1878. 
M 
the frame of the lamp, keep the edges of the 
parts C C close together. By turning these 
springs sideward the chimney can be opened 
and cleaned without being taken off from the 
lamp. 
The advantages of this kind of lamp-chim 
neys are, that they are not exposed to break 
through sudden expansion or contraction, as 
is the case for chimneys made in one piece, 
and that their cleaning outside and inside can 
be done far better and more easily. 
What I claim as new is 
1. In a lamp-chimney, the clamps c c', with 
their screws ss' and springs i i", and hinged 
to the frame of the lamp, and the springs S 
S', maintaining the edges of the half-chimney's 
together, in combination with the parts C C, 
as described and set forth. 
2. The half-chimney C", provided with a re 
cess, r, in combination with the clamp c', as 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
SAMUEL B, INGLIS, 
Witnesses: 
ED. T. JAMESON, 
SEBASTIAN STUTZ. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL B. INGLIS, of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvementin Lamp-Chimneys; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section, and 
Fig. 2 is a side view. 
This invention relates to lamp-chimneys; 
and consists in the construction and arrange 
ment of parts, substantially as hereinafter fully 
described and claimed. 
In the drawings, C C are two equal por 
tions of a lamp-chimney, which may be of any 
of the styles in use. cc represent two clamps, 
provided with screws ss' and clamp-springs i 
it, and hinged to the frame of the lamp, by 
which the half-chimneys C C are secured to 
the latter. According to the disposition of the 
lamp, one or both of the two halves CC'might be 
provided with a recess, r, to receive the clamp 
e'. Two movable springs, SS, fixed also to 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207380.txt	H. W. AIKEN. 
Pneumatic Gong-Pull. 
No. 207,380. 
Patented Aug. 27, 1878. 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
NHS 
A. 
Its 
33 
as 
2 
N 
& IRC. 
N 
SN 
SN 
EN zz. 
: 
  
N 
SSSISIR NIN 
STS2 N. 
alia 
R2YYSS 
SS 
3s 4S 
2. 
(2:23) 
  
- Ye SH SNS > 
 
INVENTOR: 
ev6% 2. (e/fz/ 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
II EN R Y V. AIKEN, O FIFISH KILL LAND IN G, N E W YOR. K. 
IMPROVEMENT IN PNEU MATC GONG - PULLs. 
warm-rrrrrrow 
Specifieation forming part of Letters Patent No. 207, 3 so, dated August 27, is7s; application filed 
July 18, 1878. 
- 
r 
. 
. 
Beit known that I, HENRY W. AIKEN, of cylinder B. 
its upper end rests against the cover of the 
To all whom it may concern: 
G. are two or more curvel pipes, the upper 
Fishkill Landing, in the county of Dutchess 
and State of New York, have invented a new ends of which are connected with the upper 
and useful Improvement in Pneumatic Gong- part of the cylinderl3, and their lower ends 
Pulls, of which the following is a specifica- are connected with the lower part of the said 
tion: 
" cylinder. The cylinder B is provided with an 
Figure 1 is alongitudinal section of my im- air-tight false bottom or partition, Il, which 
proved gong-pull. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of is placed just above the lower elds of tri 
the same, taken through the line a ar, Fig. 1. pipes G. Air is admitted into the cylinder 1 
through holes in its sides just above the false 
Fig. 3 is a detail top view of the piston. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre- bottom H. 
sponding parts. 
In the other end of the tube A is folia) (d : 
The object of this invention is to furnish an valve-seat, upon which rests a metal ball (i. 
improved gong-pill which shall be so con- plunger, , and just above the said end is se 
structed that the going may be struck by the cured a gong, J. 
action of compressed air, and which may be 
Witlitlis construction, as the pistoi-rod l: 
used upon vesse, in houses, and in other is pulled upward, the air above the piston ( 
places where signals are to be given. 
is forced through the curved pipes G, through 
The invention consists in an improved pneu- the space below the false botton Ilainti 
matic gong-pull, made of brass or other suit- through the tube. A projecting the ball () ' 
able metal, and formed by the combination of plunger I upward against the gong J. 
the tube, the cylinder provided with a false 
As the piston-rod E is released the spring 
bottom in its lower part, and with perforations F forces the piston C back to its place, the 
just above the said false bottom, the piston air below the said piston opening the Valves 
provided with the valves, the piston-rod, the D, and passing into the tupper part of the cyl 
spiral spring, the bent pipes, the ball or plun-inder B, ready to be again forced througll the 
ger, and the gong, with each other, as herein pipes G and the tube A to give another signal. 
after fully described. 
Having thus described any invention, I claim 
A is a tube extending from the place from 
as new and desire to secure by Lettel's Pat 
which to the place to which the signal is to be 
given. To one end of the tilbe A is attached 
An improved pneumatic going-pull, formed 
a cylinder, IB, in which works a piston, C. 
by the combination of the tube A, the cylin 
The piston C is made air-tight by suitable 
der B, provided with a false botton, FI, in its 
backing, and through it are formed one or 
lower part, and with perforations just above 
mere holes, closed by valves D, opening up 
the said false bottom, the pistol C, l'ovided 
ward. 
with the valves D, the piston-rod E, the spiral 
To the center of the piston C is attacled a 
spring F, the bent pipes (i, the ball or plit 
rod, E, which passes out through the cover of 
ger I, and the gong J, with each other, Sul)- 
the cylinder B, and has a knob attached to its 
stantially as lerein shown ald (lesi'i'il)etl. 
- end for convenience in operating it. The pis 
ton () is held down by a spiral spring, F, 
placed upon the piston-rod E, the lower end 
of which rests against the said piston C, and 
JOIN L, ISO(; Ali als. 
M. E. (UR''NN. 
HENRY WANI) N3 R( 
, Al K N. 
Witnesses: 
ent- 
- 
" . 
1. 
e 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207480.txt	J. BELOU, 
Car-Truck, 
No. 207,480. 
Patented Aug. 27, 1878. 
 
 
 
esses 2 
attazzazza22 
a 22 
N. PETERS, Photo-LogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACQUES BELOU, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
MPROVEMENT IN CAR-TRUCKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 207,4S0, dated August 27, 1878; application filed 
April 10, 1878; patented in France, February 5, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACQUES BELOU, of the 
city of Paris, in France, have invented a new 
and useful Improvementin Anti-Friction Gears 
for Axles, which improvementis fully set forth 
in the following specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in anti-friction gear for vehicles, its ob 
ject being to so arrange the friction-rollers 
thereof that they may move independently of 
each other, to adapt them to the unequal revo 
lutions of the axle-shaft. 
The invention further has for its object to 
provide an elastic support for the friction-roll 
ers, whereby they are kept constantly in con 
tact with the axle or shaft, as more fully here 
inafter set forth. 
To this end the invention consists, first, in 
the combination, with the axle or shaft of a 
vehicle, of two rollers mounted upon a divided 
shaft, the ends of which are secured together 
by means of a collar or sleeve in such manner 
that the rollers may be rotated independently of 
each other, as more fully hereinafter specified; 
second, in the combination, with the friction 
rollers and their supports, of a horizontal arm 
riding on a downwardly-projecting rod secured 
to the truck or frame of the vehicle, as more 
fully hereinafter set forth. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a side 
elevation of a portion of a car, showing my im 
provement. Fig.2 represents a side elevation 
of a modification of my invention. Fig. 3 
represents an end view of the same. Fig. 4 
represents a sectional view, showing my im 
proved axle; and Fig. 5 represents a detached 
view of a modification of the friction-rollers. 
The letter A represents the axle of the ve 
hicle, which may be of the ordinary construc 
tion, or, as shown in Fig. 4, in two parts, one 
part consisting of a tapering cylindrical bar 
and the other of a hollow sleeve, which fits 
upon and is capable of turning on the taper 
ing bar, so as to allow the wheels to rotate 
together or independently of each other. The 
shaft or axle may be journaled at its ends in 
boxes, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, or the wheels 
may be secured to the ends of the axle and 
the journals may be made at intermediate 
points, as shown in Fig. 4. 
The letter B represents the friction-rollers, 
which are mounted upon a shaft, F, which is 
 
divided at its center; the two parts being 
united by means of a sleeve or collar, so that 
they may rotate independently of each other. 
The said shaft F is mounted in boxes e above 
the axle or shaft of the vehicle in such posi 
tion that the rollers will bear against the axle 
and support the same. 
The letter G represents an arm extending 
backwardly from the boxes in which the roll 
er-shaft is journaled, its extremity being bored 
perpendicularly and fitted upon a bar, H, upon 
Which it rides, a spring, R, being interposed 
between it and the truck in order to keep the 
wheels in contact with the axle or shaft dur 
ing the jars or concussions to which the ve 
hicle is liable. 
The letter R represents the springs upon 
Which the truck is mounted, which are secured 
to the said truck by connecting-links r, and 
to the journal-guides by means of bolts or 
their equivalents. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 5 the 
friction-rollers are formed with an annular 
recess, which sits over the end of the axle or 
shaft A instead of having its periphery in 
contact with said axle. 
The letter D represents the axle-guard of 
the shaft A and of the shaft or axle of the 
wheels B. 
It will be perceived that, as constructed, both 
the rollers and the wheels are capable of in 
dependent movement upon their respective 
shafts, whereby provision is made for any ir 
regularities of revolution of the wheels. 
What I claim is 
1. In combination with the axle of a vehicle, 
the friction-pulleys mounted upon a divided 
shaft, the ends of which are secured together 
by means of a collar or sleeve, in such manner 
that the rollers may be rotated independently 
of each other, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
2. In combination with the friction-rollers 
and their supports, the horizontal arms, rid 
ing on downwardly-projecting rods secured 
to the truck-frame, and the spiral springs lo 
cated between said arms and the truck, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
J. BELOU. 
Witnesses: 
H. BONNEVILLE, 
W. H. DAUBENY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207580.txt	S. WILLER SHAUSEN. 
ROcking-Chair, 
No. 207,580. 
Patented Aug. 27, 1878, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
| 
Z 
 
 
SIEGFRIED WILLERSEIAUSEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN ROCKING CHARS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 207,5S0, dated August 27, 1878; application filed 
June 27, 1878. 
To all who? it may concer"?: 
Be it known that I, SIEGFRIED WILLERs 
HAUSEN, of the city, county, and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Rocking-Chairs, which improvement 
is fully set forth in the following specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ing, in which 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section of my 
chair, showing the positions of the parts when 
the rocking frame is at rest. Fig. 2 is a simi 
lar section thereof when the rocking frame is 
in its rearmost position. Fig. 3 is a like sec 
tion of the same when the rocking frame is in 
its forward position. Fig. 4 is a side view of 
the center plates, showing the inner faces 
thereof on a larger scale than in the preceding 
figures. Fig. 5 is a cross-section of the same 
in the line a a, Fig. 4. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
My invention relates to that class of chairs 
consisting of a rocking frame and a stationary 
bed or base frame, on which the rocking frame 
is supported. 
It consists in a base-frame having fixed cen 
terplates, which are each provided with a stop 
pin, in combination with a spring-connected 
rocking frame having fixed center-plates, 
Which are each provided with two shoulders 
On the front edge thereof to engage with the 
Stop-pin and check the forward and back mo 
tions of the rocking frame. Each of the cen 
terplates of the base-frame is provided with a 
guide-pin in addition to the stop-pin, and each 
of the centerplates of the rocking frame has a 
Curved recess besides its two shoulders to re 
ceive the guide-pin, and thus hold the parts in 
proper relation to each other, the curved re 
cess being flanked by a web, against which the 
free end of the guide-pin bears, so that the 
plates are held parallel to each other. 
In the drawing, the letter A. designates the 
base-frame, and B is the rocking frame, of my 
chair, each of these frames having a center 
plate, C or D, on its opposite sides, at which 
points the frames are also connected by a spiral 
spring, E. This spring E is hung at its oppo 
site ends on pins at b projecting from the plates 
CD. The plates CD are fastened by screws 
or other suitable means, and from the plate C 
- 
project two pins, cd, one of which constitutes 
a stop-pin and the other a guide-pin. On the 
front edge of the plate D are formed two shoul 
ders or ledges, e f while in the lower edge 
thereof is formed a recess, g, (see Fig. 4) the 
edges of which are curved, and which is cov 
ered on one side by a web, h. 
The plates C project above the top edge or 
surface of the base-rails, while the plates D are 
arranged to overhang these plates. On the 
inner face of that part of the plates C pro 
jecting above the base-rails is formed an off 
Set, i, as shown in Fig. 5. 
When the rocking frame B is at rest the re 
cess g of the plate D embraces the guide-pin 
d, and by this means the parts are held in such 
relation to each other that when the rocking 
frame is swung backward or forward either the 
bottom or top shoulder, e or f is brought in 
contact with the stop-pin c, as clearly shown 
in Figs. 2 and 3. 
The free end of the guide-pin di bears against 
the inner surface of the web h, as shown in 
Fig. 5, and by this means the plates CD are 
held parallel to each other in any position of 
the rocking frame, which has the effect of pre 
venting the plates from rubbing against each 
other, besides preventing the rocking frame 
from shifting laterally. By the offset i the 
plate C is caused to clear the inner side or sur 
face of the rockers of the frame B, and hence 
this frame is not liable to be retarded by such 
plate. 
If desired, the stop-pin c may be covered 
with india-rubber or other soft material. 
I arrange the guide-pin d on such a part of 
the plate C that the axis of said pin is in the 
plane of the top edge or surface of the base 
rails, as clearly shown, whereby the friction 
between the bearing-surfaces of the two frames 
is reduced to a minimum. 
It will be observed that the rocking frame 
of my chair can be removed from the base 
frame by simply disconnecting the springs. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a rocking-chair, of a 
base-frame having fixed center plates, which 
are each provided with a stop-pin, and a spring 
connected rocking frame having fixed center 
2 
207,580 
plates, which are each provided with two shoul 
ders on the front edge thereof to engage with 
the stop-pin and check the forward and back 
motions of the rocking frame, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination, in a rocking-chair, of a 
base-frame having fixed center plates, which 
are each provided with a stop-pin and with a 
guide -pin, and a spring - connected rocking 
frame having fixed center plates, which are 
each provided with two shoulders on the front 
edge thereof to engage with the stop-pin, and 
With a curved recess to receive the guide-pin 
and hold the parts in proper relation to each 
other, Substantially as described. 
3. The combination, in a rocking-chair, of a 
base-frame having fixed center plates, which ????? 
are each provided with a guide-pin, and a 
spring-connected rocking frame having fixed 
center plates, which are each provided with a 
curved recess to receive the guide-pin, and 
With a Web on one side of the recess to form a 
bearing for the free end of the guide-pin and 
hold the plates parallel to each other, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal this 26th day of June, 1878. 
SIEGFRIED WILLERSHAUSEN. (L. s.) 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, 
CHAS. WAHILIERS. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207680.txt	No. 2O7,68O. 
P. W. PRATT. 
Chair-Pad, 
Patented Sept. 3, 1878. 
 
 
  
& v eveu. 
% 7%te. 
FERS, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP W. PRATT, OF ABINGTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CHARPADS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 207,6S0, dated September 3, 1878; application filed 
November 24, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILIP W. PRATT, of 
Abington, county of Plymouth, in the State of 
Massachusetts, am the inventor of Improved 
Buffers for Chair-Rockers, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a plan, Fig. 2 is a side elevation, 
Fig. 3 is a front-end elevation, and Fig. 4 is a 
longitudinal central sectional view, of a buffer 
for chair-rockers embodying my invention. 
- My invention relates to buffers for the ex 
tremities of chair-rockers, whereby the liabil 
ity to injure surrounding objects by contact 
with the unprotected ends of the rockers is 
avoided; and my invention consists in two elas 
tic arms united at an angle and adapted to be 
secured upon the rocker end, and provided 
with a projection in the interior of the angle 
arranged to fit into a suitable notch in the 
rocker end, and provided with guard pieces or 
webs extending from one arm to the other 
from the point of the angle forward, together 
With a series of ribs or flanges extending along 
or around and projecting from the angle of the 
arms on the exterior thereof, all as hereinafter 
described. 
As shown in the drawings, my buffer is com 
posed of the two arms A and B, which are 
united at one end to form an angle. These 
arms are preferably cast or otherwise formed 
in one angular piece, and are of an elastic sub 
stance, such as india-rubber. The inner faces 
or sides of these arms are preferably flat, so 
that they will conform to the sides of rocker 
ends of any shape, while the outer faces are 
preferably rounded off, as shown. This buffer, 
it is evident, is adapted to be placed on the 
end of a chair-rocker, the arms A and B inclos 
ing and embracing between them the rocker 
end. To secure the buffer upon the rocker, 
tacks or screws may be used, passed through 
openings, as shown at (, in the arms, 
To prevent the buffer from moving laterally 
on the rocker end, Iform a projection or wedge, 
b, in the angle of the arms, as shown, which is 
adapted to fit into a suitable notch cut in the 
end of the rocker. 
To protect the side edges of the rocker, and 
also to assist in preventing the lateral move 
ment of the buffer, I form the guards 0 upon 
one or both sides of the opening of the angle 
formed by the arms, extending from one arm 
to the other from the point of the angle for 
ward, as shown. These guards inclose the 
rocker ends on the sides thereof, and may be 
used either in connection with the wedge b or 
without it, or a guard may be formed on the 
buffer at the outer side of each rocker and 
employed in connection with the Wedge b. 
Upon the exterior of the point of the angle 
of the buffer Iform one or more ribs or flanges, 
d, preferably extending laterally across the 
point. These ribs or flanges serve to soften 
the blow struck upon or by the buffer when 
sudden contact with any surface or substance 
OCCUIS. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an elastic buffer for chair-rocker ends, 
the combination, with the arms A and B, of the 
side guards c, one or both, extending from one 
arm to the other at the edges thereof and from 
the point of the juncture thereof forward, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
2. In an elastic buffer for chair-rocker ends, 
the rib or ribs d projecting from the exterior of 
the extremity of the buffer, as described, and 
for the purpose specified. 
PHILIP W. PRATT. 
Witnesses: 
A. S. FITCH, 
M. F. CLIFTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207780.txt	2 sheets-sheet 1. 
Feed-Water Heater and Circulator for Steam-Boilers 
Patented sept. 3, 1878. 
No. 207,780. 
J. C. STEAD. 
t2 
ZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZ 
Nassss- 
22. 
N. PETERs, Photo-uTHoGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
J. C. STEAD. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
. 
Feed-Water Heater and Circulator for Steam-Boilers. 
No. 207,780. 
Patented Sept. 3, 1878, 
WNNsays 
ge.7%-4. 
C's 
regar, 
4a e e?: 
a 
 
"UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES C. STEAD, OF GREEN POINT, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FEED-WATER HEATERS AND CIRCULATORS FOR STEAM-BOLERS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 207,7s0, dated September 3, 1878; application filed 
July 8, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES C. STEAD, of 
Green Point, New York, have invented certain 
Improvements in Feed-Water Heaters and 
Circulators for Steam-Boilers, (as shown and 
described in Letters Patent of the United 
States No. 198,428, granted to me December 
18, 1877,) of which the following is a specifica 
tion: 
My invention relates to that class of feed 
Water heaters and circulators in which a por 
tion of the heater occupies the bridge-wall. 
Heretofore such portion of the heater has con 
sisted of a drum set on the top of the bridge 
wall, and having connections with the bottom 
alnd the top of the boiler. 
My present invention consists principally 
in the substitution for the drum of a coil of 
pipes, the return-bend pipes of which extend 
longitudinally across the bridge-wall, the low 
est pipe of the coil being connected with a 
pipe through which water is supplied either 
from the service-pipe or from the water-body 
in the bottom of the boiler, and the highest 
pipe of the coil being connected with a pipe 
leading into the steam-space in the upperpart 
of the boiler. The coil is much superior to the 
drum as a means of effecting a vigorous circu 
lation of the Water in the boiler, and as an 
auxiliary steam-generator by reason of the 
greater heating-surface it affords. 
My invention also includes the combination 
of the coil of pipes on the bridge-wall with a 
supply-pipe composed of return-bend pipes ar 
ranged transversely in a plane underneath 
the back part of the boiler and connected with 
a pipe entering the lower part of the rear end 
of the boiler, and also connected with the ser 
vice-pipe; and, further, my invention includes 
the combination of the coil on the bridge-wall 
with a series of return-bend pipes occupying 
a portion of the side of the furnace above the 
level of the top of the coil, and connected with 
a pipe leading into the steam-space in the up 
part of the boiler; and, finally, my invention 
includes the application to the lower part of 
the coil on the bridge-wall of a blow-off pipe 
provided with a valve. 
The accompanying drawings are as follows: 
Figure is an elevation of an ordinary station 
ary boiler, set in brick, with one side wall re 
moved to exhibit the heating-coil. Fig. 2 is a 
front elevation, on an enlarged scale, of that 
portion of the coil which is fixed upon the 
bridge-wall, together with a portion of the pipe 
leading from the coil to the steam-space in 
the top of the boiler. Fig. 3 is an isometrical 
perspective, showing a modified arrangement 
of the pipes forming the coil on the top of the 
bridge-wall. 
The drawings represent a horizontal boiler, 
A set in the usual way, and provided with a 
furnace, B, at one end. The bridge-Wall B 
of the furnace is less than the usual height, 
and is surmounted with a coil composed of 
the return-bend pipes C C C. The highest 
part of this coil is connected with a vertical 
pipe, C, which is carried into the steam-space 
in the top of the boiler. The other end of 
the coil is connected with the pipe D, which 
makes several turns back and forth in the 
flue underneath the boiler, and is carried out 
through the rear Wall, a, and then turned and 
joined to the pipe D', which extends back 
through the Wall a, and is connected with the 
lower part of the boiler. Two valves, d and 
d', are provided in that portion of the pipe D 
which extends outside the back wall, a, and 
between these two valves is a connection with 
the service-pipe E, provided with a valve, E'. 
By means of these valves water may be sup 
plied through the service-pipe directly into 
the bottom of the boiler, or into the coil-pipes 
DC c, from which, after being heated, it will 
be injected into the steam-space in the upper 
part of the boiler through the pipe C1. 
The return-bend pipes C on the bridge-wall 
maybe inclined in opposite directions, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2, for the purpose of preventing 
the formation of any steam-space in any part 
of the coil against which the flames of the fur 
nace directly impinge. This object, however, 
is practically accomplished by building the 
front portion, b, of the bridge-wall high enough 
to shield the lowest tier of the coil-pipes CC 
C, as shown in Fig. 1, and by connecting the 
lowest tier, c, of the coil with the pipe through 
which Water is supplied to the coil, and the 
highest tier, c, of the coil with the pipe C, 
through which heated water or steam is dis. 
4. 
 
charged from the coil into the steam-space. 
The coil on the bridge-wall is extended by the 
connection of its highest tier, c, with the re 
turn-bend pipes c, arranged in a vertical plane 
on the side of the furnace and connected with 
the lower end of the vertical pipe C. 
One of the important features of my inven 
tion is the connection of the heating-coil with 
the water-body in the rear end of the boiler, 
where the water is coolest. 
By means of my improved apparatus the 
feed-water is thoroughly heated before it is al 
lowed to pass into the boiler, and when the 
feeding operation is completed the apparatus 
acts as an auxiliary steam-generator, and cre 
ates a vigorous circulation of water from the 
bottom of the boiler into and through the coil, 
and thence into the steam-space in the top of 
the boiler. 
The lower part of the coil on the bridge-wall 
is connected with a blow-off pipe, c, provided 
With the valve c. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A continuous heating-coil arranged, sub 
stantially as shown and described, upon the 
top of the bridge-wall, and having one connec 
tion with the water-body in the lower part of 
the boiler, and another with the steam-space 
in the upper part of the boiler, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
ROBERT H. POLLOCK, 
EDWD. PAYSON. 
2. The heating-coil C C C, arranged upon 
the bridge-wall of the furnace, connected at one 
extremity with the steam-space in the top of 
the boiler, and at the other extremity with a 
pipe leading into the lower part of the boiler 
farthest from the furnace, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. The heating-coil C C C, arranged upon 
the bridge-wall of the furnace, in combination 
with the system of return-bend pipes D, the 
service-pipe E, and the pipe D', connected with 
the lower part of the boiler, substantially as 
shown and described. 
4. The heating-coil C C C, arranged upon 
the bridge-wall of the furnace, connected at its 
lower extremity with a pipe for supplying it 
with water either from the service-pipe. Or 
from the bottom of the boiler, in combination 
with the system of return-bend pipes C', ar 
ranged upon one side of the furnace, and con 
nected at its lower extremity with the upper 
tier, c', of the coil on the bridge-wall, and at its 
upper extremity connected with the vertical 
pipe C, for discharging water and steam into 
the steam-space in the upper part of the boiler, 
substantially as set forth. 
JAMES C. STEAD. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207880.txt	H. LINGEN 
Measuring-Jacket. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 207,88O. 
Patented Sept. 10, 1878. 
INVENTOR 
BY 
S 
ATTORNEYS, 
N.FETERS, FHo-LGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, C 
 
 
 
H., LINGEN. 
Measuring-Jacket. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 2 O7, 88 O. 
Patented Sept. 10, 1878. 
WITNESSES : 
1% ye. 
INVENTOR: 
By --Cu?e, 
 
N.Pe:ERs, Photo-Tiogas PER, WASHINrto, DC. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
Ns 
HERMANN LINGEN, OF WHEELING, WEST VIRGINIA. 
MPROVEMENT N MEASUR NG-JACKETS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 207, SS0, dated September 10, 1878; application filed 
June 22, 1878. 
- - 
SeaS. 
seams c 0 and shoulder-seams did, similar to a 
To all chom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HERMANN LINGEN, of 
frock coat. 
Instead of being sewed, as usual, the seams 
Wheeling, in the county of Ohio and State of 
c c and dd are connected by elastic cords e 
West Virginia, have invented a new and Im 
andf, which pass through the eyelet-holes g () 
proved Measuring-Jacket, of which the follow 
and h. h. along the edges of the seams c c and 
ing is a specification: 
did on both sides. 
In cutting out dress and frock coats by the 
Upon the front pieces, at a, adjacent to the 
System generally in use it is usual to take the 
seams c 0 and d d, there is a facing, ii, of 
breast and waist measure of the person to be 
black cloth, preferably about two inches wide, 
fitted, and from those measurements and such 
upon the outside of the jacket, and there is 
others as the cutter may be able to make the 
also attached to the front pieces, at a, at the 
body of the coat is cut out. As these meas 
seams on the under side loose flaps lic k, of 
urements are, to a great extent, indefinite, it 
black cloth, (see Fig. 3.) which lap under the 
is necessary to try on the garment with the 
seams basted together and fit it to the person 
I also provide, at the seams 0 c and dd, hooks 
by letting out or altering the seams. This pro 
tl, connected to the back portion, b, of the 
cess causes considerable trouble, especially in 
fitting deformed persons, and it is not entirely jacket by elastic cords passing through the 
eyelet-holes g g; and on the front portion, a ca, 
reliable. 
A measuring-jacket has therefore been de-tiere is a second row, n, of eyelet-holes ad 
vised which is similar in form to the body of jacent to each seam, but farther from the seam 
than the eyelets h. Upon the front portions, 
a frock coat, and having its seams united by 
a, of the jacket, at the bottom edge, on the 
elastic cords, to permit them to open more or 
part which covers the abdomen, provide the 
less to allow the jacket to conform itself to 
vertical cuts in n, which are closed by the elas 
the shape of the body of the person being meas 
tic cords oo passing through eyelet-holes pp 
ured. 
on each side, and provided with hooks q on 
My invention is an improvement in this class 
the front part, o. Upon the under side of the 
of measuring-jackets; and it consists, first, 
seams in in there is a piece of elastic cloth, ', 
in attaching hooks to the elastic seam-lacing. 
(see Fig. 3,) which is attached to both sides 
cords, which hooks may be adjusted from one 
of the seam n. I prefer to use the elastic cloth 
eyelet to another, for the purpose of adjusting 
at this point, as the strain is much greater 
the tension of the cords as required by the 
on this seam in in than at any other When the 
shape of the person; second, in attaching fac 
jacket is stretched by the person. 
ings or flaps to the jacket along the seams, on 
At the back of the jacket, upon the portion 
which the variations from the normal or usual 
b, I provide a horizontal cut, extending from 
shape may be marked with chalk, such varia 
one arm-hole, s, to the other, and this cut is 
tions being indicated by the greater or less 
held together by an elastic cord, t, passing 
divergence or width of the seams; third, in 
from side to side across the cut through the 
providing the jacket with pads, constructed 
eyelet-holes u, u, and there are hooks ) at 
and arranged as hereinafter described. 
tached to the lower eyelet-holes, t, by an elas 
In the drawing, Figure 1 is an elevation of 
tic cord. There is also a facing, c', and flap 
the back part of my measuring-jacket. Fig. 
d at the edges of this cut, similar to the seams 
2 is a front view, and Fig. 3 is a view of the 
o and d. At the front of the shoulders there 
same with the front open. 
is a horizontal cut, v, from the arm-holes 8, 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
connected by a non-elastic cord, gy. 
Sponding parts. 
& 2 are pads, which are usually used with 
I prefer to make the jacket from corduroy 
coats to fill out the hollow of the body at the 
or similar material, which will cling to the 
front of the armpits. I have shown these ex 
body but will not stretch. 
tending over the top of the shoulder, and con 
at a are the front and side portions of the 
nected to the front and side of the garment 
body, and b is the back portion, having side 
2 
202, SS0 
 
by non-elastic cords a through eyelet-holes, 
It will be evident that, these changes caused 
and on the back and top of the shoulder by 
by the shape and size of the person being care 
fully marked and noted, the original pattern 
elastic cords l/. The movement of the elas 
tic seams of the garment, when on the person, 
of the jacket may be laid upon the cloth, and 
renders the elastic connections b' of the pads 
the garment cut according to the variations 
2 necessary, so that the pads may shift. The 
from the pattern; and a deformed person may 
cords at and b' pass through eyelet-holes in 
be as readily fitted as a man of average build. 
the body of the garment and through the pad. 
I do not limit myself to the shape of the 
The measuring-jacket is put upon the per 
measuring-garment shown, nor to the position 
son, and the elastic seams and cuts permit it 
of the seams and cuts, nor the manner of con 
to assume the shape of the body. If the front necting the seams to render them elastic, as 
or back is too short at the shoulders, the seams 
these particulars may be varied without de 
did will open, and the flaps k k may be marked 
parting from my invention. 
to show the amount of opening, or a note made 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
of it; but if these portions are too long, the 
as new and desire to secure by Letters IPat 
edge of the back portion at d may be hooked 
ent 
over the row of eyelet-holes an on the front 
1. The combination of the elastic cords and 
part, a, and the elastic connection of the hooks 
hooks attached thereto with the seamed meas 
l permits the seam to adjust itself to the per 
uring-jacket, having eyelets located adjacent 
son, and the amount to be cut off of the front 
to the seams, as shown and described. 
a may then be marked upon the facing i. 
2. The facings and flaps attached to the 
The operation at each of the seams and cuts 
jacket at the elastic seams, substantially as 
is the same as just described for the shoulder 
and for the purposes set forth. 
Seam. The cuts in permit the jacket to open 
3. The pads 2, connected to the measuring 
for the size of the stomach, and it may be 
garment, substantially as and for the purposes 
marked upon the elastic cloth r. The cord y 
- set forth. 
may be tied to open or close the cut v for the 
size of the arm-hole, and the horizontal cut 
across the back from shoulder to shoulder per 
mits the backportion, b, to adjust itself for an 
unusually tall or long-waisted man, and it also 
may be hooked shorter by the hooks for a 
person shorter than the average. 
LOUIS D. BLOOM FIELD, 
JOHN M. BROST, 
HERMANN LINGEN. 
Witnesses: 
ey 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US207980.txt	G. T. PETER.S. 
Method of Packing Herrings, 
No. 207,98o. 
Patented Sept. 10, 1878. 
 
 
 
 
 
| T || 
j | 
?? 
?????? 
??????? 
???? 
?? 
??????? 
?? 
N.ERS. Phio-Iigri 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE T. PETERS, OF JERSEY CITY HEIGHTS, NEW JERSEY. 
IMPROVEMENT IN METHODS OF PACK NG HERRI NG S. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 207,950, dated September 10, 1878; application filed 
July 26, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE T. PETERs, of 
Jersey City Heights, in the county of Hudson 
and State of New Jersey, have invented a new 
and Improved Method of Packing Herrings, 
which invention is fully set forth in the follow 
ing specification, reference being had to the 
accolmpanying drawing, in which 
Figure 1 represents a vertical cross-section 
of a package containing my invention. Fig. 
2 is a longitudinal vertical section thereof, 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
The object of my invention is to pack her 
rings in such a way that they can be eaten di 
rectly upon their removal from the package 
namely, without any further preparation; also, 
so that their flavor and moisture are preserved, 
and so that they are convenient for sale in 
small bunches or packages without Weighing 
or counting the fish separately. 
It consists in salting, smoking, skinning, 
and boning the herrings, then tying them in 
bunches, and, finally, putting them up in a 
box, as hereinafter fully set forth. 
In the drawing, the letter A designates a 
box, and B are bunches of herrings put up. 
therein according to my invention. 
The box. A may be made of Wood or metal, 
and I prefer to introduce a pane of glass, C, 
in one of its sides, so that its contents are ren 
clered visible from the outside thereof. 
In carrying out my invention I salt and 
smoke the herrings in the usual Way, then re 
move the skin therefrom, and extract the bone 
in any suitable manner. 
By first smoking the herrings, the subse 
quent operations of skinning and boning the 
W. HAUFF, 
E. E. KASTENIUBER, 
same are greatly facilitated. I then arrange 
the same in bunches of one dozen each (more 
or less) by tying that number together with a 
cord, and pack a half-dozen (more or less) of 
such bunches into a box of the proper size and 
shape. The herrings are thus packed up in 
such a condition that no further preparation 
thereof is needed, except perhaps to cut the 
same up on their removal from the package, 
wherefore they form a very useful article for 
touristS or travelers. 
By skinning the herrings and putting the 
same up in bunches their raw flesh is brought 
in close contact, and by this means their inher 
ent moisture and flavor are preserved in the 
best possible manner, the effect thereof being 
also increased by packing the bunches in a 
box, and another advantage of the bunching 
being that no time is lost in counting the her. 
rings singly when a dozen or more are sold. 
I am well aware that the practices of salt 
ing, smoking, skinning, and boning fish have 
long been known, and I therefore do not claim 
any of them as my invention. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The new commercial package consisting of 
salted, smoked, skinned, and boned herring 
tied together in bunches, which are packed in 
a suitable box, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
hereunto set my hand and seal this 23d day 
of July, 1878. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE T. PETERS. L. s. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208080.txt	J. M. FATE, 
Bucket-Pump, 
& 
No. 208,08 O. 
Patented Sept. 17, 1878. 
 
Z727. 7. 
 
 
- - - 
 
 
  
 
see 
N. N. 
NSHN 
Cz 
I 
J. 
 
 
is 
WITNESSES: El 
is 
 
ri.Peters, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, WASH:NGTON, D.C 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYs. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. FATE, OF WEBSTER, CITY, IO WA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BUCKET-PUMPs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20s,0so, dated September 17, 1878; application filed - 
May 20, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMEs M. FATE, of 
Webster City, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Iowa, have invented a new and Im 
proved. Bucket-Pump, of which the following 
is a specification: 
In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1 rep 
resents a vertical longitudinal section of my 
improved bucket-pump on line at ac, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 2 is a top view of the same, partly in 
horizontal section, on line y), Fig.1; and Fig. 
3, a perspective view of one of the buckets de 
tached. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to furnish an 
improved bucket-pump that may be worked 
effectively with slow motion in easy manner 
and without any loss of power or leaking, as 
is the case in the too-tightly or too-loosely 
fitted plungers of the suction-pumps, or in 
chain or other pumps used for raising water. 
The invention consists of the combination, 
with a revolving reel, of an endless chain 
made of connected and pivoted buckets, and 
of a trough extending crosswise in the reel 
below the center of the same, for taking up 
and conducting off the water delivered by the 
buckets. Each bucket is made with longer 
side arms and shorter bottom arms, and with 
a spout-shaped end toward the inside of the 
reel, which end slightly contracts in width and 
extends in upward direction, so as to discharge 
the water with little loss. 
Referring to the drawing, A represents the 
revolving reel of my improved bucket-pump, 
which reel is constructed of two spider 
frames, keyed to the common crank-shaft, and 
stiffened by cross-rods a extending between 
the circular flanges of the reel. The cross 
rods are equidistant from each other and par 
allel with the center shaft, and the space be 
tween the flanges wide enough to allow the 
buckets B to work freely in and out between 
the flanges. 
An inclined trough, C, is arranged below 
the center shaft of the reel and projected at 
both sides far enough beyond the flanges to 
receive all the Water from the buckets. The 
trough is extended at right angles to the 
center section along the pump-casing and 
through an opening to the outside of the same, 
where it discharges into a funnel of a return 
ing drain-pipe. 
The buckets B are made of triangular slhape, 
with longer side arms, b, and shorter bottom 
arms, b', the arms being. connected by pivot 
rods, the shorter bottom arms of one bucket 
being pivoted with the longer arms of the 
bucket next below. 
The distance between the pivot-holes of the 
longer and shorter arms is made to corre 
spond With the space between the cross-rods 
of the reel, so that the arms of the buckets 
may break evenly and freely upon, and swing 
thereby the spout of the bucket into the space 
within the reel, so as to discharge the water 
to the center trough. 
The size of the buckets corresponds to the 
distance between the flanges and to the dis 
tance of the cross-arms of the reel. 
The buckets B are made at the side to 
Ward the reel with a spout-shaped end, that 
is made slightly narrower than the middle 
part, from which the side arms rise, so that 
it will guide itself in between the flanges of 
the reel. 
The spout is made slightly higher where 
the Water pours over than the remaining parts, 
So that the Water does not commence to pour 
until the spout end is projected sufficiently 
over the trough to discharge its contents in 
to it. 
The pump works with great facility and 
With equal advantage even with very slow 
motion, as it saves the power that is necessary 
to raise the Water by the slow motion in chain. 
pumps, also the time and power necessary to 
lift the plunger in suction-pumps. It dis 
penses with the wear and friction of the tube 
in chain-pumps, and is readily worked, even 
by children, who would not be able to work 
the other pumps. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat. 
ent 
1. In bucket-pumps, the combination, with 
a revolving reel having lateral and equidis. 
- 
2 
20S,0so 
 
tant cross-rods and a center trough below the side toward the reel, the spout being slightly 
raised above the remaining parts, substan 
shaft, of an endless chain of buckets con 
nected by pivoted longer side arms and shorter 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
bottom arms, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
2. For bucket-pumps, a bucket made of tri 
angular shape, with contracted spout at the 
O. K. EASTMAN, 
P. M. BANKS. 
Witnesses : 
JAMES MARTIN EATE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208180.txt	W. KEEN AN. 
Felting-Machine. 
No. 208.8 O. 
Patented Sept. 17, 1878. 
22222222s 
  
 
EINE E. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
C - 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM KEENAN, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
Y 
HIS RIGHT TO NICHOLAs B. HOOPER, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN FELTING-MACHINES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20s, 1s0, dated September 17, 1878; application filed 
August 22, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM KEENAN, of 
the city of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Felting-Ma 
chines, of which the following is a description, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
This invention more especially relates to ma 
chines for felting, sizing, or planking hat 
bodies, and will here be described accordingly. 
The invention consists in certain novel com 
binations of devices for felting hat-bodies and 
other articles, in which a reciprocating felting 
rubber, or device having a felting-apron ar 
ranged to run continuously in one direction, 
is used; and, furthermore, consists in certain 
means for operating said devices and a felting 
bed or table, whereby a simple, efficient, and 
expeditious felting-machine is produced. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a partly-broken plan of a felting 
machine constructed in accordance with my 
invention, and Fig. 2 a vertical longitudinal 
Section of the same on the line aca. 
A represents the frame of the machine. Said 
frame, which may be of any suitable construc 
tion, carries at or near its top a lower felting 
table or bed, B, which may be stationary, but 
is here arranged to have a reciprocating mo 
tion in direction of its length, and which may 
be ribbed or of any other suitable construction 
On its upper or felting surface. Such bed is or 
may be reciprocated in direction of its length 
by means of a revolving crank-shaft, C, a le 
ver, D, operated at its lower end by said crank 
shaft, and a rod, E, connecting said lever with 
the bedB. The upper end of the lever D has its 
fulcrumb on an arm, F, of a cross rock-shaft, 
G, at the front end of the machine, from which 
shaft reciprocating motion is communicated 
by means of arms Hand rods I on the reverse 
side of the axis of said shaft to the upper rub. 
ber or felting device, KL, which accordingly 
is made to reciprocate in reverse directions si 
multaneously with the felting bed or table B. 
The felting table or bed B may be fitted to 
slide or reciprocate in longitudinal guiding 
strips or ways M, supported by springs c, to 
give a limited yielding action to said bed. 
The upper rubber or felting device consists, 
mainly, of a reciprocating frame, K, and an 
endless apron, L, running in direction of the 
length of said frame, which latter is fitted to 
reciprocate or slide by guides did in or along 
ways NN, and receives its reciprocating mo 
tion, as hereinbefore described, by the arms 
H and rods I. The apron L of said rubber or 
upper felting device has a continuous motion 
in direction of the arrow y around end rollers 
ff, carried by the frame K. Said apron, . 
which may be made of canvas or any other 
suitable material, is properly backed or Sup 
ported on the inside of its lowerlength to give 
to it; the necessary firmness for felting the hat 
bodies as the latter are introduced and passed 
in between said apron and the bed B. Such 
support of the apron it is preferred to effect 
by means of a series of independent rollers, g, 
arranged in rows lengthwise of the frame K, 
with their axes crosswise of the latter, and in 
termediately of each other as regards each 
successive row of rollers, whereby the lower 
or acting surface of the apron has an irregular 
roughened and effective felting configuration 
when acting on the hat-bodies between it and 
the bed B. The continuous motion of the 
apron L in direction of the arrow 9, while it 
is reciprocated in common with the frame K, 
assists in producing a constant change of Sur 
face of the goods under operation to the ac 
tion of the felting devices, and ultimately 
causes the hat-bodies or goods to be automati 
cally worked offin rear of the felting devices, 
the apron, by its continuous motion in a given 
direction, exerting a progressive motion on 
the goods toward the delivery end of the ma 
chine. 
By combining with the reciprocating frame 
K and endless moving apron L a felting-bed, 
B, reciprocating in a reverse direction simul 
taneously with the frame K, the change in ex 
posure of the surface of the goods under oper 
ation is more effectually secured and a better 
felting effect produced than when said bed is 
Stationary. 
The automatic delivery of the goods from 
between the apron and the bed, by reason of 
the continuous motion of the apron in a given 
direction, materially expedites the work, inas 
 
 
2 
20s, 1s0 
much as it is only necessary to introduce the 
hat-bodies at the front end of the machine be 
tween the apron and the bed, and never nec 
essary to open the machine to remove them. 
If a single passage of the goods through the 
machine is not sufficient to properly felt them, 
they may be passed through again, or any 
number of times, as before. 
To provide for giving to the apron L its con 
tinous motion in a given direction, while the 
frame Kwhich carries it is reciprocating for. 
ward and backward, I arrange on the spindle 
of the front roller, f, a bevel-wheel, h, which 
meshes into a bevel-wheel, k, upon a shaft, l. 
This shaft may be rotated by means of a band 
and pulleys, m in, from the crank-shaft C, and 
has a keyway, o, in or along it, within which 
a key or feather on the bevel-wheel k fits. 
Back of said wheel k is a support or bracket, 
, attached to the reciprocating frame K. This 
support serves to keep the wheel k in gear 
with the wheel h while the frame K is being 
reciprocated, and the keyway o and key in 
the wheel k provide for the rotation of the 
latter and movement of it back and forth with 
the reciprocating frame K. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with a felting bed or 
table, of a reciprocating felting rubber or de 
vice carrying a felting-apron having a con 
tinuous motion in one direction, whereby a 
compound movement is given to said felting 
apron, substantially as specified, 
2. The combination of a reciprocating felt 
ing bed or table with a reversely-reciprocat 
ing felting rubber or device carrying a felting 
apron having a continuous motion in one di 
rection, whereby a compound movement is 
given to the apron, Substantially as specified. 
3. The combination of the crank-shaft C, the 
lever D, the rock-shaft G, with its reversely 
arranged arms F and H, the rods E and I, and 
the reciprocating felting-bed B, and contigu 
ous reversely-reciprocating rubber or felting 
device KL, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination, with the frame K, of 
the reciprocating felting rubber or device and 
its felting-apron L, arranged to run continu 
ously in one and the same direction, of the 
rollersff", the continuously-rotating shaft l, 
the bevel-wheel h on one of said rollers, and 
the bevel-wheel k, supported by the recipro 
cating frame K, and in key or feather connec 
tion with the shaft, l, essentially as described. 
5. The combination, with the felting bed or 
table B and the contiguous reciprocating felt 
ing rubber or device having a traveling felt 
ing-apron, L, of the backing or supporting roll 
ersg within said apron, substantially as speci 
fied. 
WILLIAM KEENAN. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY T. BROWN, 
T. J. KEANE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208280.txt	H. ASHFORD, 
Boat-Detaching Apparatus. 
Patented Sept. 24, 1878. 
Eli W 
Ali 
It 
 
itnesses: 
4.8%-4 
 
-. 
AT roRNEY. 
N.PETERS, PHOTO-ThoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY As H F OR D, OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT N BOAT-DETACHING APPARATUS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20s,2s0, dated September 24, 1878; application fied 
. March 6, 1878. 
To all chon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY ASHFORD, of 
the city and county of Philadelphia, and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Apparatus for Detach 
ing Boats, which improvementis fully set forth 
in the following specification and accompany 
ing drawings, in which the figures are side ele 
vations of the apparatus embodying my in 
Vention, certain face-plates being removed to 
show the operative parts. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
My invention consists of mechanism for in 
stantly and positively releasing a boat simul 
taneously at both ends from the tackle-blocks 
Suspended from the davits or other means of 
Suspension of the boat. 
It also consists of means for retaining the 
disengaging-hooks in position and causing 
their subsequent automatic engagement with 
the tackle-blocks or other means of suspen 
sion of the boat, 
Referring to the drawings, A represents 
Standards, which are secured at opposite ends 
to the bottom or keel of a boat, and B repre 
Sents an upright or support, likewise secured 
to the bottom or keel of the boat, but inter 
mediate of the standards A. To the upper end 
of each standard A. are pivoted a vertically 
extending elbow-lever, C, whose lower end is 
Weighted a latch, D, and a disengaging-hook, 
E. The lever C is below, the hook Eis above, 
and the latch. D occupies a position at one side 
agent to a point between the said lever and 
hook. 
F represents a cam-head projecting from the 
hook Etoward the axis of the latch D and 
engaging with the latter at the curved surface 
a, so as to hold said latch. 
G represents an arm extending from the le. 
ver C below its axis toward and engaging with 
a foot, H, at the lower end of the latch D, the 
said arm and foot G H projecting in opposite 
directions. At or near the center of the in 
ner face of the latch. D there is an arm, J, 
which projects therefrom so as to enter be 
tween the cam-head E and the arm G. 
It will be noticed, in Figure 1, that the up 
per end of the lever C engages with the heel 
of the hook E, the arm G with the foot H, 
and the head F with the latch D, and, owing 
to the disposition of the axes of the lever, 
hook, and latch, the upward strain on the hook 
E is communicated to the upper end of the 
lever C, so that said end is prevented from 
outward movement, This causes the arm G. 
to hold the foot EI, which in return causes the 
head of the latch. D to engage with the nose of 
the hook E, whereby the latter will be firmly 
locked. 
The boat will be suspended from the ship's 
davits or elsewhere by means of the tackle 
blocks or ropes attached to the hooks E, which, 
as has been stated, are firmly secured orlocked; 
consequently the boat may be lowered with 
safety. To the upper end of the lever C there 
is connected a chain or cord, d, which is at 
tached to an elbow-lever, K, pivoted to the 
lower end of the Standard A. To the lower 
limb of said lever there is pivoted a rod, L., ex 
tending horizontally and pivoted to the lower 
end of a lever, e, of a system of cross-levers, 
M, whose axis is on the uprights or supports 
B, the upper end of said levers being attached 
to an operating lever or handle, N. All these 
parts, excepting the levers M and lever or 
handle N, are duplicated, so that there is a 
standard with its connected mechanism at each 
end of the boat. 
It will be seen that when the boat reaches 
the water the officer or other person in charge 
slightly raises the lever N. This operates the 
levers M so as to quickly draw in the rods L, 
and, owing to the elbow-levers K and chains 
d, the upper ends of the levers C are forced out 
ward or from the heels of the hooks E. (See 
Fig. 2.) This raises the arms G and causes 
them to leave the foot Hand press against the 
arms J, the heads F being free from holding 
contact with the latches D, whereby the heads 
of the latches D are moved from the noses of 
the hooks E, which, being no longer controlled, 
immediately turn on their axes and present 
their noses upward, (see Fig. 3,) the tackle or 
rope being thereby quickly disengaged from 
the hooks, and the boat is free. 
As the levers C promptly return to their 
normal positions the hooks restrained by shoul 
derse, which engage with the levers, remain 
 
2 
20s,2so 
open, and are supported on said levers C, the 
heads F assuming somewhat horizontal posi 
tions. When the tackle or ropes are again to 
be attached to the boat the rings or hooks of 
said tackle or ropes are placed on the heads 
F, the superimposed weight thereon causing 
the hooks to return or swing downward. The 
cam-surfaces f on the hooks, near the heels 
thereof, now ride on the upper inner corners 
of the levers C, so that the latter are forced 
outward. When the levers C have cleared 
the cam-faces if the heads F bear against the 
arm J, the levers again engage with the heels 
of the hooks, and the arms G with the feet H, 
whereby the hooks, are again secured orlocked, 
and the boat may be raised. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The hooks E, with cam-heads F, andlock 
ing-levers C, with arms G, in combination with 
the latches D, whereby the latter are doubly 
held by the heads F and arms G, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The hooks E, with heads F, the latches D, 
with arms J and feet H, and the levers C, with 
arms G, combined and operating substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The hooks E, with shoulderse and cam 
faces.f, in combination with the levers C, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The cross-levers M and lever N, in com 
bination with the rods L., elbow-levers K, con 
nections d, lever C, and hooks E, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
HENRY ASHFORD. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
H. E. GARSED. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208380.txt	No. 208,38O. 
J. F. DOWNING, 
Children's Carriage. 
Patented Sept. 24, 1878. 
WZZzzesses; 
7. (fouz 
 
Zzzvezzaz' 
We 077te /", 
t 
Afth 77 eg. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J E ROME F. DOWN IN G, OF ERIE, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CHILDRENS CARRAGES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20S,3S0, dated September 24, 1878; application filed 
August 29, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JEROME F. DOWNING, 
of the city and county of Erie, and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Children's Carriages, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ing and the letters of reference marked there 
on, making part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal sectional view. 
My invention relates to the arrangement of 
the back and seat of a child's carriage so con 
nected that when the back is lowered to allow 
the child to recline the seat will be lowered 
into the bottom of the carriage, and when the 
back is raised to an upright position the seat 
will also be raised into its proper position. 
Among the advantages of my construction 
of children's carriages is that, as the seat is 
movable and as the backishinged to the same, 
when the back is lowered the seat is thrown 
forward and down until it reaches the bottom 
of the carriage. By this means two things are 
accomplished: first, the lowering or throwing 
down of the back elongates the body of the 
carriage and enables a large child to fully ex 
tend its limbs when reclining, which would 
not be the case were the back lowered inside 
of the body of the carriage; and, second, by 
throwing forward and down the seat the ca 
pacity of the carriage, when converted into a 
sleeping-coach, is deepened, and the child pre 
vented from falling out when reclining, which 
would not be the case were the seat stationary. 
The construction and operation of my inven 
tion are as follows: 
A is the body of the carriage, which is prop 
erly secured and pivoted to the running-gear 
by means of the springs at a. The rear section 
of the bottom of the body A is curved, as shown 
at A. B is the back, the lower section, b, of 
which is curved to correspond with the curved 
section. A? of the bottom of the body A, as 
clearly shown in Fig. 2. The sides B of the 
back B have their lower sections, b, in the 
form of an arc of a circle, and rest and move 
in circular guide-grooves a formed on the rear 
Section of the sides of the body A. The sides 
of the back and body are pivoted together at 
a, b are curvedi slots cut in the front of the 
sides B of the back B, and near the circular 
Section l of the same. The sides of this slot 
b' are parallel to the section bi of the sides of 
the back B. a are set-screws, whose shanks 
pass through the slots band have their bear 
ings in the sides of the body of the carriage. 
The object of these screws and the slots is to 
allow the back, and consequently the seat, to 
be held at any desired point. Instead of this 
method of adjusting the back and seat, the 
Same can be accomplished by providing one 
side of the inclined grooves d' with notches, in 
which the pins or projections c of the seat may 
rest and be secured, and thus allow the back 
and seat to be held in any desired position. 
b' is the canopy-holder, secured to the back in 
the usual manner. 
C is the seat, the rear section of which is 
pivoted to the sides of the back B at 0. To 
the front of the seat Care secured pins or pro 
jections c, which work and move in inclined 
guide-grooves c formed on the inside of the 
sides of the body A, as clearly shown in Fig. 
2. The upper section, c, of these grooves c 
is bent at such an angle that the sides of the 
Section shall be parallel with the body A. 
The operation is as follows: When the back 
is raised to allow the child to assume a sitting 
posture, the pins or projections c of the seat 
Crest in the sections c of the inclined grooves 
c, as clearly shown in Fig.1. When it is de 
sired to allow the child to recline, the back is 
lowered by pressing the same outwardly. This 
movement causes the curved section b of the 
back to slide down inside of the body A, fol 
lowing the line of the curved section. A? of the 
same, and the pins c of the seat to travel 
down the inclined grooves c until the seat 
rests upon the bottom of the body, the back and 
seat being hinged together, as clearly shown 
in Fig. 2. The circular grooves a cause the 
back to travelin the proper direction when the 
same is either raised or lowered, while the 
movement of the seat is controlled by the in 
clined grooves c' and the pins or projections 
c. To raise the back and seat after the same 
have been lowered, the reverse of the move 
ment just described is required. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a child's carriage, the back BB', piv 
 
2 
20S,3S0 
 
oted to the sides of the body, combined with 
seat C, having its rear pivoted to the back 
and its front provided with projections c, 
guided in grooves, substantially as specified, 
whereby the turning outward of the back low 
el's the seat into the bottom of the carriage. 
2. In a child's carriage, the back B, having 
a curved section, b, circular section b, and 
slots b, in combination with the body A, hav 
ing a curved section, A', grooves a, and set 
Screws a', when the same are pivoted together 
and operated substantially as described. 
3. In a child's carriage, the seat C, having 
pins or projections c, and body A, having a 
curved section, A', and inclined grooves c, 
 
combined with the pivoted back, all arranged - 
to operate substantially as described. . 
4. In a child's carriage, the body A, having 
a curved section, A', inclined grooves c, and 
set-screws a, back B, having curved sections 
b, circular section b, and curved slots b, and 
seat C, having pins c, when the whole is com 
bined, arranged, and operated substantially 
as described. 
Intestimony that I claim theforegoing Ihave 
hereunto set my hand this 1st day of May, 1878. 
JEROME. E. DOWNING. 
Witnesses: 
WELLINGTON Dow NING, 
HOMER, MI. HILL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208480.txt	W. D. McGLOGHL 0N. 
Watch-Pendant, 
No. 208,480. 
Patented Oct. 1, 1878. 
 
2. 2. 
A ep f: 
77zz/e7e 6 oz. 
N. PETERS, Photo-LITHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, d c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. McGLOGELON, OF LONDON, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
MPROVEMENT IN WATCH PEN DANTS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20s,4s0, dated October 1, 1878; application filed 
January 9, 1878. 
To all clom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMD. McGLOGH 
LON, of the city of London, in the Province of 
Ontario, Canada, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Stem-Winding 
Watches; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same. 
This invention relates to animproved method 
of fastening the pendant-bows of stem-wind 
ing watches. Heretofore they have been at 
tached by being merely sprung on the sides 
of the pendant-bow, and were liable to become 
detached at any moment. 
My invention consists of inserting a small 
plate or nut in the pendant on each side, and 
screws or pins passing through the lower ends 
of the bow and through the pendant are se 
cured to the nuts or plates on the inside. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view of the pendant and bow with attach 
ing-screws. Fig. 2 is a section of same. Fig. 
3 is a drawing of nut and screw. Fig. 4 shows 
the pin used for the same purpose. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A is the pendant; B, the pendant-bow, and 
C the stem-Winder passing through pendant. 
D D are the nuts, sufficiently small to be in 
side the pendant-one on each side of the 
winder-without interfering with the latter; 
 
and EE are the small screws which pass clear 
through the lower ends of the bow B, and 
through the sides of the pendant A, and are 
secured to the said nuts. 
It will readily be seen that when the bow is 
thus secured it is prevented from slipping off, 
as it so frequently does in other stem-winding 
watches when the ends of bow are merely 
sprung on the pendant. 
In place of using a nut, D, and screw E, pins 
shaped as shown, Fig. 4, may be used. These 
are slipped inside the pendant, and the shanks 
F project through orifices in sides and pass 
through the ends of bow in precisely the same 
manner as with the screw. 
The above-described pins are held in their 
proper position in Securing the pendant-bow 
by the winder C, or its equivalent. 
I claim as my invention 
As a new device for securing the bows to 
the pendants of stem-winding Watches, the 
screws E or pins F, passing through the lower 
ends of said bows, and secured to nut D or 
head G, contained in the interior of pendant, 
and retained in position by the Winder C, lying 
between them substantially as shown and de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
W. D. MICGLOGHILON. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY BEECH, 
THOMAS BEECH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208580.txt	M. W. B. ETHRIDGE 
Car-Wheel for Elevated Railways, 
No. 208,58O. 
Patented Oct. 1, 1878. 
N Z2 
2 
1. 242. 
A2 "Till 
a 
47 
as 
e 
 
 
 
22e. 22 era 
 
 
  
22 
V/Z/7ZA6963: 2 
(27%av 
Aulus, 
//zrezzo. 
244, r/39762% 
 
NFERS, PH3To-THOSRAPHER, was insin. o c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MARTIN V. B. ETHRIDGE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MPROVEMENT IN CAR WHEELS FOR ELEVATED RALWAYS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20s, 5S0, dated October 1, 1878; application filed 
July 9, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARTIN W. B. ETH 
RIDGE, of New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and Improved Means for Lessen 
ing Vibration and Noise Produced by Locomo 
tives and Cars; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full and exact description of 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a railroad-track 
with an axle and pair of car-wheels thereon, 
one of the wheels showing the side plate in 
section, and Fig. 2 is a vertical section in-line 
acac of Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures denote the same parts. 
The object of this invention is to diminish 
the vibration of railroad structures and rolling 
stock, and thereby decrease the noise caused 
by passing trains, and increase the durability 
and safety of said structures and stock. 
To this end the invention consists in a rail 
road-car wheel having a plate of non-resonant 
material attached to its side, substantially as 
I will now set forth. 
In the drawings, e e are a pair of railway 
car wheels of the usual form, connected by an 
axle in the usual manner. Attached to the 
side of each wheel by rivets or in any other 
suitable manner is a plate,f, of lead or other 
heavy material, having the quality of not re 
ceiving or imparting sound-vibrations except 
to a small extent, as is the case with lead and 
other soft heavy substances. The plate may 
be slitted to further increase its peculiar prop 
erty of non-resonance. The wheels thus pro 
vided with sound-deadening plates are mounted 
upon rails C C, between which and the sleep 
ers or cross-ties A are arranged lead, rubber, 
felt, or other non-sonorous plates or strips B, 
upon which the rails rest, and which in whole 
or in great part prevent sound-vibrations from 
being transmitted from either rail through the 
cross-ties to the opposite rail. 
It will be observed that as railroads are or 
dinarily constructed each rail rests directly 
upon the timbers of the roadway, so that any 
vibration of either rail is transmitted readily 
through said timbers or through the ground 
to the other side of the track, and the whole 
structure is caused to repeat the vibrations of 
any part thereof. So far as this transmission 
of vibrations from the rails to the supporting 
structure or from one rail to the opposite rail 
through the supporting-structure is concerned, 
the packing beneath the rails tends to destroy 
the ability of the connected parts to receive 
from and transmit to each other the sound 
vibrations produced by the wheels passing 
over the rails; but this alone is not enough, 
for the reason that when a train is passing the 
sound-vibrations of one rail are transmitted 
through the car-wheels and axles or car-wheels 
and cars to the opposite rail, and thus set the 
whole train and both rails in vibration. 
The sound-deadening contrivance applied to 
the wheels, as above described, is therefore 
designed to arrest and prevent the vibration 
of the wheels themselves, and thus cut off to 
as great an extent as possible the transmis 
sion of vibrations to, through, or from the pass 
ing train, and, in connection with the rail-pack 
ing, to thoroughly insulate the two rails from 
each other at all times, so far as concerns 
sound producing or transmitting vibrations. 
Neither the rail-packing alone nor the wheel 
plating alone accomplishes the object satisfac 
torily, although each contributes to the de 
sired result; but both together, acting in co 
operation with each other, are found to operate 
more satisfactorily than any contrivance here 
tofore employed for the purpose. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
SeW 
The combination of car-wheels e, constructed 
in the usual manner, with plates of lead or its 
equivalent applied to their sides in the man 
ner herein described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
MARTIN W. B., ETERIDGE, 
Witnesses: 
ABRAHAM LEVY, 
SAMUEL. D. LEWY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208680.txt	G. S. HAWEN, 
POW. 
No. 208,68O. 
Patented Oct. 8, 1878. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE S. HAVEN, OF RACINE, WISCONSIN. 
MPROVEMENT IN PLOWS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20s,6s0, lated October s, 17s; application filed 
June 27, 1878. 
IBe it known that I, GEORGE S. HAVEN, of point set. 
To all chon it mgy concern: 
Racine, in the county of Racine and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Attaching Standards or Beams 
to Plows, of which the following is a specifi. 
(ation: 
This invention relates to an improved ad 
justable attachment for fastening beams or 
standards to plows, as more fully hereinafter 
described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of a plow-standard. Fig. 2 is a bottom 
view of a plow, to show how brace L of the 
same is encircled by collar A of standard. 
This improvement consists in shaping the 
lower extremity of the Wrought beam or stand 
arl to the form of eye or collar A, through 
which passes brace L of the plow. 
It will be readily seen that I have a cheap, 
durable, adjustable connection between plow 
and beam. 
The point of beam may be raised or lowered 
to regulate the depth of cut, or collar A slid 
along brace I to throw plow to or from land, 
while set-screw E holds beam at whatever 
I do not confine myself to the one set-screw; 
Will use two or more if needed. 
An adjustable connection I received a pat 
ent for on the 23d of April last, and this is an 
improvement on same, as it costs less and is 
more easily adjusted. 
What I claim as new is 
The combination of the curved standard or 
plow-beam is, with a collar, A formed on its 
lower end, and set-screws E, with the brace L. 
and the mold-board and land-side, whereby 
the beam or standard is connected to the lower 
part of the plow only, and provided with lat 
eral adjustment, substantially as shown and 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 22d day of 
June, 1878. 
(EORGE S. HAVEN. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES FIELDING, 
FRANK J. GIBSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208780.txt	J. C. WINDER 
Car-Indicator, 
No. 208,780. 
Patented Oct. 8, 1878. 
 
CAR RECORD. 
S R 
R & A 
P & W 
a 
O O 
2) (2)(3)(3) 
2232 
A7 
ar 
9 ZOZZ Z2 
as 
a 
As AA 777 
Za Z26 
a....A. YY Y-SAYS 
A7 
as Ya TZ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. WINDER, OF RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CAR IND CATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20s, 7 s.0, lated October S, 17s: 
application filed 
January 7, 187s. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN C. WINDER, of 
the city of Raleigh, in the county of Wake and 
State of North Carolina, have invented a new 
and useful device for indicating the location 
or whereabouts of cars, by which the cars be. 
longing to a road may be traced to its several 
connecting roads, and thus to be able to see 
at a glance how many cars are absent and to 
what road they should be charged, the method 
of keeping such record being fully set forth in 
the following specification. 
The invention consists of a painted board 
of suitable size, laid off in spaces to indicate 
the number of connecting roads, and each 
space being of different color and marked with 
the initials of the road it represents, and each 
space pierced with holes, in combination with 
sets of pins, constructed as hereinafter de 
scribed, to denote the peculiar kind of cars 
and their numbers. In the holes of the space 
representing the road keeping the record are 
inserted pins marked with the letter repre 
senting the kind of car-B for box-cars, F for 
flat cars, &c. For greater convenience, the 
box-cars are represented by round-headed pins, 
and flat cars by square-headed pins. Each pin, 
is numbered to correspond to the number of 
each car, so that each car owned by the com 
pany is represented by a pin with correspond 
ing number in the board. 
When a car leaves the road the pin corre 
sponding to its number is taken out and in 
 
Serted in a hole in the space allotted to the 
road to which the car has gone; and this is 
done in all cases of departure. On the return 
the pin representing the car returned is ex 
tracted from the space in which it is found, 
and inserted in the space representing the 
home road. 
The column containing the series or sets of 
pins represents the home road or station at 
which the record is kept; the others, in which 
the pins are placed from time to time, connect 
ing roads. 
Figure 1 is a front view of my device, and 
Fig. 2 represents the pins employed to indi 
cate the different kinds of cars and the nun 
bers thereof. 
IBy this record the officer having in charge 
the movement of cars can See at a glance how 
many cars he has on his load, and how many 
of his cars are absent, and where they are. 
What I claim is 
The indicator hereinbefore described, con 
sisting of a base divided into vertical columns, 
each of which is distinguished from the other 
by a contrasting facing, and provided with pen'- 
forations and indicating-marks, and the sets 
or series of indicating pins, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
.N.O. (...'. WINDER. 
Witnesses: 
J. B. MARTIN, 
I3. IR. IARDING. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208880.txt	A. ATWOOD, 
Device for Muffling Railway Rails. 
No. 208,88O. 
Patented Oct. 15, 1878. 
N. PeTERS, Hof- Ithograper, WASHGTN, . 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANSON ATWOOD, OF DUNELLEN, NEW JERSEY. 
IMPROVEMENT IN DEVICES FOR MUFFLING RAILWAY-RAILS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20s, SS0, lated October 15, 1878; application filed 
August 6, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANSON ATWOOD, of 
Dunellen, county of Middlesex, State of New 
Jersey, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement for Preventing Noise on Elevated 
Railways, Bridges, and other Railway Struc 
tures, of which the following is a specification: 
From experience on the New York elevated 
railways it has been demonstrated that the 
loud and rattling noise and vibrations pro 
duced by the rolling-stock passing over the 
rails is a constant source of annoyance to the 
residents along the line of road, and has 
caused great depreciation in real estate, be 
Sides being considered detrimental to the 
health of those living near said roads. Also, 
heretofore rubber has been used for muffling 
the rails of railways; but this material is ob 
jectionable, as it is affected by the atmos 
pheric changes, becomes hard, and crumbles 
in a very short time, thereby rendering it 
Worthless for the purpose intended. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
these serious objections and difficulties in the 
present system of elevated railways and other 
railway structures by removing or lessening 
the vibration and noise. 
My improvement consists in muffling the 
rails and other portions of the structure with 
a soft packing of non-conducting fibrous ma 
terial, deadening the sound and preventing 
the vibration and noise; also, the providing of 
Suitable means for securing the fibrous mate 
rial in its place. 
My improvement also consists in providing 
a Suitable non-conducting packing that will 
not become hard or rigid from use or age. 
For this purpose I use hemp-tow or other 
non-conducting fibrous material, moistened 
With vaseline, in the proportion of about one 
pound of vaseline to four of hemp, which is 
not affected by the changes of the Weather, 
and the packing material remaining always 
moist and soft, 
My improvement also consists in forming a 
pad composed of a thin casing of galvanized 
iron or tin, filled with the improved prepared 
packing. 
The accompanying drawings, to which ref. 
erence is made, represent my improvements 
applied to a T-shaped rail. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a T-rail 
with my improvement attached. Figs. 2 and 
4 are cross-sections. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of a pad or cushion with metallic casing. 
Fig. 5 is a cross-section of a compound rail or 
beam with the packing between the parts. 
The letter Aindicates an ordinary T-shaped 
rail, consisting of the base B, Web C, and 
tread D, supported upon sleepers or cross 
ties; and E indicates the packing; F, a longi 
tudinal plate; G, spring-clamp; FI, metallic 
casing; I, packing in pad. 
It is well known to those skilled in the arts 
that by muffling a bell the ringing is pre 
vented. This being a fact, I avail myself of 
it by muffling the rails and other parts of ele 
vated railways and bridges for the same pur 
pose-deadening the sound. 
Previous to my invention various attempts 
have been made to use packing at the joints 
of the rails for the prevention of vibration 
and noise. 
My improvement consists in muffling the 
rail along its entire length. On opposite 
sides of the Web C of the rail I arrange a pack 
ing, E, extending from end to end of the rail. 
In other words, it is a continuous fibrous pack 
ing, made of hemp, jute, or other fibrous ma 
terial. For this purpose I prefer to use hemp 
tow, on account of its softness, strength, and 
durability, saturated with vaseline or equiva 
lent substance, having substantially the same 
properties, that will not render the hemp hard 
or rigid from use or time. 
The side flangest form shoulders or sup 
ports for the side packing to rest upon, which 
assist to retain the packing in position, and 
the curved side extensions at of the tread D 
afford a protecting shed for the packing from 
the weather. This packing or cushion is held 
in contact with the rails on each side, and at 
the same time from displacement, by means of 
the longitudinal plates F, extending in the 
same direction with the rails. These plates or 
strips may be made flat, as shown in Fig. 2, 
or corrugated, as shown in Fig. 4, and are in 
tended to be sufficiently wide to hold the 
packing in its place, but not wide enough to 
fill the space between the base and tread of 
the rail. The plates are held in place by 
means of the spring clamping device G, sub 
 
2 
20s, s so 
------ 
- 
The pad slown in Fig. 3 can be made long 
enough to fill the space between the ties, and 
placed under the rails and held to place by 
the spring clamping devices, substantially as 
shown in Fig. 4 of the drawings, thus muf 
fling the entire under surface or base of the 
rails. It will be observed that, by muffling 
the rails and other parts of the structure with 
a non-conducting material, I am enabled to 
break or deaden the rattling and jarring noise 
caused by the rolling-stock on the elevated 
railways. 
I am aware that hemp and other fibrous 
materials have been treated with grease, tar, 
or pitch; but fibrous imaterials treated with 
these substances are objectionable, for the rea 
son that they evaporate at a low degree of 
heat, and the packing, thereby losing its moist 
ure, becomes hard and solid. The vaseline 
used in my packing is free from all glutinous 
matter, does not evaporate under a tempera 
ture of 5000 of heat, and renders the packing 
material durable and soft. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. A composition or product for muffling 
the vibrations and incident noise on railways, 
composed of hemp or other fibrous material 
and vaseline, substantially as described. 
2. A railway-rail muffled along its entire 
length, on its sides and base, with a non-con 
ducting fibrous material treated with a non 
volatile substance, for the purpose hereinbe. 
fore described. 
3. The combination of the spring G, the 
plate F, and the packing E, as shown in Fig. 
2, for the purposes herein set forth. 
4. The combination of the spring G, the 
plate F, the packing E, and the pad EII, as 
shown in Fig. 4, for the purposes herein set 
forth. 
. 
. 
ANSON AT WOOI). 
Witnesses: 
HARRY W. BENTON, 
S. P. JOHNSON. 
stantially as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 4 of the 
drawings, thus securing the packing to the 
sides of the rail. 
At suitable intervals upon the upper Sur 
face of every support or cross-tie I arralnge a 
cushion or pad of fibrous material saturated 
with vaseline or its known equivalent, sur 
rounded by a metallic casing of the construc 
tion substantially as shown in Fig. 3 of the 
drawings, for keeping the packing together. 
This casing prevents the vaseline from being 
pressed out and leaving the hemp to become 
hard and rigid. Upon these cushions or pads 
rest the rails, and are secured in position to 
the cross-ties in any of the well-known ways 
for example, by means of spikes, as shown. 
This saturated packing is also used in other 
parts of the structure of railways, which I 
arrange between the metallic connections-for 
instance, under the switches and frogs. This 
cushion or pad should be so arranged or in 
terposed between the parts as to break the 
metallic connections and the jarring noise of 
the Wood, so to speak, taking up the force of 
the blow, preventing jar and vibration, an 
nulling, in a great measure, the rattle and 
OS, 
The packing (hemp-tow) I prefer to saturate 
or moisten with vaseline-say, about one pound 
of vaseline to four pounds of hemp-tow. The 
vaseline does not evaporate by the heat of the 
Sun, and, being free from glutinous matter, 
the packing does not become hard and rigid, 
but remains soft, and is not affected by the 
atmospheric changes. 
The clamping-spring shown in Fig. 2 of 
tle drawings has to be placed in position 
before the rail is put down. The spring 
shown in Fig. 4 is intended for applying the 
muffling material to the rails, after they are 
laid or down, by first placing it against the 
packing on One side and latching against the 
opposite side of the rail, substantially as 
shown. The opposite side of the rail is cov 
ered in the same manner by reversing the 
spring. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US208980.txt	F. H. LAUTEN. 
Paper-Feeding Apparatus. 
No. 208,98O. 
Patented Oct. 15, 1878. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK H. LAUTEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN PAPER-FEED ING APPARATUS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 20s, 9so, dated October 15, 1878; application filed 
June 17, 1878. 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK H. LAUTEN, of 
New York city, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Paper-Feed 
ing Apparatus for Printing-Presses, &c.; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention consists in an improved appa 
ratus for automatically feeding sheets of paper 
singly to the printing mechanism of a print. 
ing-press or to a folding-machine, or ready-cut 
blanks to the forming and shaping apparatus 
of machines for making paper boxes or bags, 
and other analogous machines which require 
to be supplied singly with sheets of paper or 
any other material, the services of a person to 
feed being dispensed with. This object I ef. 
fect by means of mechanism hereinafter de 
scribed, combined with an air-pump, which lifts 
the sheet from the pile, in connection with 
rollers which carry it forward to the grasping 
devices of the printing-press or other machine. 
Figure 1 in the drawings is an elevation, 
the feed-table being toward the spectator. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal seetion on the line at a 
of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a vertical section on the line 
by y of Fig. 2. 
A is a shaft, rotated by connection with the 
printing-press or otherwise, in such a way as 
to operate in harmony with said press, so that 
a sheet may be lifted and presented to the ac 
tion of the gripers, and carried forward by 
them at the proper moment to receive an im 
pression. 
B B are wheels affixed to the ends of the 
shaft A, exterior to the standards C C of the 
apparatus, and having crank-pins 0 c, which 
are connected by rods DD to the cross-head 
E, which is supported by said rods, having 
journals fitting into bearings at the upper 
ends of said crank-rods. 
IF is a plate attached to stems ff, passing 
through the cross-head E. These stems are 
surrounded by springs ff", which act to de 
press said plate when it is not lifted in the 
manner hereinafter described. On this plate 
the air-pump G is secured. This has an open 
ing at the outer end, and is provided with 
an air-suction pipe; g, having a number of 
branches, gigg', whose open outer extremi 
ties are bent downward, and terminate at 
points immediately over the edge of the pile 
of paper, nearly in line with the stops in m. 
His a frame affixed to one of the standards, 
and serving as a support for the vertical rock 
shaft. This rock-shaft has horizontal arms 
ii, set at suitable angles to be struck by the 
tappets at a on shaft A, in order to produce 
the outward movement of the piston of the 
air-pump G. 
J is a movable cross-head, to which the pis. 
ton-rod of the air-pump is attached; and J', a 
fixed cross-head, to which springs ji are at 
tached, said springs being also attached to 
the extremities of the movable cross-head J, 
producing the inward movement of the air. 
pump piston. 
A is a gear-wheel on the shaft A, meshing 
with the wheel K on the feed-roller shaft K. 
T. L. are the upper feed-rollers. A space is 
left between these upper rollers to let the 
downward-bent ends of the suction-pipe pass. 
The operation of the apparatus is as foll 
lows: A pile of paper having been laid on the 
feed-table M, the springs ff cause the platel 
to exert a moderate pressure on the paper. 
When the mechanism is set in motion the 
crank-rods DD lift the cross-head E, which 
moves in slots N and raises the plate F from 
the pile. The rotation of the shaft A, which 
causes this movement, also presses one of the 
tappets at at against one of the arms i i, pro 
ducing a partial rotation of the rock-shaft I 
and drawing out the piston of the air-pump, 
causing a vacuum in said pump and the pipes 
g" gig', which lifts the edge of the uppermost 
sheet of paper and carries it upward until it 
is in position to be caught between the feed 
rollers KL II. The limit of said upward mo 
tion is determined by stops in n, near end of 
slot N in standards C. C. When the plate 
has arrived at its uppermost position it be 
comes slightly tilted by striking against the 
stops, and the sheet is in position to be caught 
by the feed-rollers, which deliver it to the 
gripers of the printing-machine. At the same 
 
- 
- 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the reciprocating rock 
shaft E, plate F, carrying pipes g g, air-pump 
G, fixed cross-head J, movable cross-head J, 
springsji, vertical rock-shaft I, having arms 
ii, and shaft A, having tappets a ct, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination of the shaft A, tappets 
at a, rock-shaft I, arms i, springs jj, cross 
heads J J', air-pump G, suction-tubes g g, 
plate F, stems ff, springs ff, and recipro 
cating rock-shaft E, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination of the feed-table M, shaft 
A reciprocating rock-shaft E, wheels B B, 
crank-rods DD", standards C C, provided 
with slots NN, plate F, air-pump G, pipes.g 
g'g'g'', frame H, rock-shaft I, cross-heads J J', 
and springs.jj, substantially as specified. 
FRANK H. LAUTEN. 
Witnesses: 
E. SAUNDERS, 
HUGO KOELKER. 
2 
time the arm i becomes freed from the tappet 
a, and the springsfj, acting on the cross-head 
J., cause a rapid reverse movement of the pis 
ton, and the edge of the sheet, being relieved. 
from the preponderating atmospheric pressure 
beneath, falls into a position to be caught by 
the feed-rollers. The plate again descends 
under the operation of the springs ff', and 
the operation is repeated as before. 
The stops on m are preferably made or faced 
with rubber or other rough-surfaced material, 
which, by its friction against the ends of the 
sheet, will tend to prevent more than one 
sheet being lifted at a time, should they acci. 
dentally adhere together. 
I also prefer to have movable stops at the 
opposite or outer end of the feed-table, which 
may be moved inward to press against the 
end of the pile, no matter what will be the 
size of the sheet, so that the opposite edge, or 
that to be lifted, may be kept up to the stops 
on m, and remain undisturbed by vibration of 
the press or otherwise, in proper position for 
the action of the pipes g g g'. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209080.txt	G. M. RICHMOND. 
Feathers for Dusters. 
No. 209,080. 
Patented Oct. 15, 1878. 
 
S S S N 
   
 
  
ES 
2% 
Fig.2. 
Fig. 4. 
?nventor: 
24.2%l. 
Peters, Pot-Lithographer, WASHINGTON, d. C. 
:- 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GILBERT M. RICHMOND, OF CHICAGO, IL LINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FEATHERS FOR DUSTERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 209,0S0, dated October 15, 1878; application filed 
July 28, 1877. 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GILBERT M. RICHMOND, 
of the city of Chicago, Cook county, State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Feathers for Feather-Dusters, 
of which the following is a full description, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is an inside view of a split feather, 
from which the pith of the stem has not been 
removed. Fig. 2 is an inside view of such a 
feather after the pith has been removed. Fig. 
3 is a section at a of Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a section 
at y of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a cross-section of the 
main portions of a machine by means of which 
the pith may be removed. 
In manufacturing feather-dusters from tur 
keys' feathers it has become common to split 
the feathers, in order to render them more plia 
ble. The feathers are sometimes crushed with 
out splitting, for the same purpose. 
When feathers have been so split, the pith 
has hitherto been left unremoved from the 
stem, and this pith after a short time becomes 
dry, and loses to a great extent.its pliability, 
materially interfering with the flexibility of 
the feather. In such feathers the pith, when 
dry, will break by bending the feather, and 
where the pith breaks the whole stem is lia 
ble to break. This has been found to be a se 
rious objection to split feathers. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
this difficulty, which I accomplish by remov 
ing the pith from the split feather. 
In the drawings, Arepresents a split feather; 
a, the pith remaining in the split feather. B 
represents such a feather after the pith has 
been removed. The removal of the pith leaves 
the stem in a very pliable condition, and it 
can be bent over almost double without break 
ing or injuring it. The pith can be removed 
in various ways. A cleaning-roller having 
sand-paper wound upon it would be efficient; 
but a steel cylinder having spiral threads cut 
thereon and placed about half an inch apart 
will be better. 
The roller for cleaning might be provided 
with numerous short sharp points; but this 
form would be more likely to injure the feather. 
An emery-wheel might be used. 
In Fig. 5 I have shown the arrangement of 
the main parts of a suitable device to be used 
for removing the pith from the stem, in which 
be d represent three smooth-faced rollers of 
any suitable length and size. 0 is another 
shaft or roller, provided with a series of spiral 
threads or other suitable projections on its 
face. 
The feathers are to be fed in between roll 
ers b and c, with the pith up. The rotation of 
these rollers will carry the feathers along un 
der roller e, and they will pass out between 
rollers b and d. 
Another cleaning-roller might be located 
below roller d, covered with sand-paper, for 
the purpose of completing the Work by remov 
ing any small portion of the pith left by the 
cleaning-roller e, the feather passing between 
this second roller and roller b. 
The roller e is to be located relatively to 
roller b, so that the cleaning devices thereon 
will come in contact with the pith upon the 
feather, effectually removing it. Rollereshould 
rotate quite rapidly-much faster than the 
feed-rollers. 
If the rollers are of sufficient 
length a number of feathers can be passed be 
tween them at the same time, being placed 
side by side. All the rollers are to be mounted 
in a suitable frame, and can be rotated by 
well-known devices. 
I do not limit myself to this method of re 
moving the pith. 
I intend to file another application for a pat 
ent for my machine for doing this work. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is as follows: 
1. A split feather from the stem of which 
the pith has been removed, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified, for use in feather 
dusters. 
2. A split feather from the stem of which 
the pith has been removed and the stem 
cleaned, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
GILBERT M. RICHMOND. 
Witnesses: 
E. A. WEST, 
O. W. BoND. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209180.txt	T. C. MILES, 
Spring-Scales. 
Patente di Oct. 22, 1878 
No. 209,180. 
 
? 
neerers, photo-uthographER, WASlilxGTO. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
THOMAS C. MILES, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
M PRO VEM EN I N S P R N G -- S CAES. 
Specification forming part of Letters latent No. 209,150, dated October 22, 1878; application filed 
March 2, 1878. 
To all chom, it may concern: 
IBe it known that I, THOMAS C. MILEs, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a Combined Pencil-Point Protector 
and Weighing - Scale for Letters and other 
purposes, of which the following is a specifi 
cation: 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
point-protector for an ordinary lead-pencil 
With a convenient and accurate scale for weigh 
ing lettel's, &c., in combination there with. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an enlarged 
longitudinal mid-sectional view, illustrating 
iny combination. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the 
same with the cover removed as in the act of 
Weighing a lettel'. Fig. 3 is an elevation of 
the same with the cover in place. 
In all of the views the device is shown as 
fulfilling the functions of a pencil-point pro 
tectOl. 
A represents a tube, in which a pencil, B, 
of any kind, may fit snugly. This tube may 
be split, as at (, to cause it to enlarge or con 
tract elastically to fit pencils of different sizes, 
and it may lave all obstruction of some kind 
at b to prevent the pencil from entering too 
far; but these are common in point-protect 
ors, and I do not claim them as my own. 
C is a tube which fits inside the tube A, and 
is attached thereto; or it may, in construc 
tion, form a part of the same. This tube C 
has in it a longitudinal slit, c, along one or 
both margins of which (see Fig. 2) are marks 
or graduations. Inside of the tube C is an 
other tube, D, which has free longitudinal 
play therein, and embraces a spring, E, one 
end of which is fixed to the tube C or A, and 
the other to the tube D. 
F is all elastic clip-hook to nip or hook on to 
the article to be weighed. This clip hangs 
loosely on a pin and turns into the cavity of 
the tube, to which it is attached after the man 
her of a pocket-knife blade, so that it may be 
out of the Way. 
On the tube D, and playing in the slit c, is 
a pointer, e, to indicate the weight. 
Iain aware that letter-scales corresponding 
in general terms to this described are not new 
with me, and I do not make any claim there 
to; nordo I confine myself to the precise con 
 
struction here set forth, as it may be varied 
in some respects without vitiating my combi 
lmation. 
G is a slip-cover, which fits over the tube C. 
This cover is preferably formed from a tube 
of the same diameter as the tube A. 
The top of the cover may be provided with 
an engraved seal, H, as in Fig. 1, or receive a 
rubber eraser, I, as in Fig. 3; or they might 
be made interchangeable, the seal being made 
to screw on in the place of the rubber or over 
it; or, in lieu of the seal or rubber, a blade for 
erasing and other purposes, or a holder for a 
pen, might be substituted. 
The advantages of this combination are ob 
vious. A point-protector to the ordinary pen 
il has become almost a necessity, and the 
eraser combined with it is also a great con 
venience. I combine with the protector a 
scale for Weighing mail-matter, coins, and all 
light articles, in such a manner that the prox 
imity and connection tend to enhance the 
value of both. The slip-cover serves to pro 
tect the scale from injury and to bear some 
Faluable auxiliary to the pencil, as before 
Stated. 
claim- 
- 
1. The combination of an elastic split tubu 
lar pen(cil-lholder al?nd qpoint-]protector Wi tlh a, 
Weighing-scale for light articles, in which the 
pointer is affixed to a slotted sliding tube, into 
which the clip may be folded, all arranged 
substantially as herein set forth. 
2. The combination of the elastic split tube 
A constructed to form a holder and protector 
for the point of an ordinary pencil, the tube 
C, slitted and graduated as shown, the tube 
ID, provided with a pointer, e, to play in the 
slot c, and slotted as shown, the clip F, hung 
to the tube D, and arranged to fold into the 
hollow of the same out of the way, and the 
spring E, inclosed in the inner tube, all sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
THOS. C. MILES, 
* WW itinesses : 
SAMI. TRO. SMITH, 
HENRY CONNETT, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209280.txt	W. McDERMOTT, 
Grind-Stone Frame. 
No. 209,28O. 
Patented Oct. 22, 1878. 
 
Aznavator; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM McDERMOTT, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
IMPROVEMENT N G R NDSTONE FRAMES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 209,2S0, dated October 22, 1878; application filed 
June 24, 1878. 
It will be observed that the upper end of 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMMCDERMOTT, the legs form the cross-bars of the frame; 
also, the bolts c e are the only means of bind 
ing the frame together, no other bolts, nails, 
or screws being required. 
The stone is hung in this frame in the usual 
manner, and the frame is provided with a 
foot-treadle and a drip-bucket standard, also 
a hand-crank, like those now in use. 
The great advantage of this frame is its ca 
pability of compactness for shipment. By 
withdrawing the bolts the frame can be taken 
apart and closely packed. The hand-crankis 
adapted as a wrench for taking off and screw 
ing on the nuts of the bolts. Thus the whole 
structure possesses advantages not found in 
any other grindstone-frame. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
The herein-described grindstone-frame, con 
sisting of the two side rails, AA, having 
the two bevel-gains bb, the two sets of legs 
B B, constructed as described, and forming 
the ends of the frame, and the two bolts c c, 
all combined as and for the purpose set forth. 
WM. MCDERMOTT. 
To all whom it may concern: 
of Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Grindstone-Franes, which 
improvements are fully set forth in the follow 
ing specification and accompanying drawing, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view. Figs, 2 and 
3 are detached parts of the frame. 
The nature and objects of this invention are 
to furnish a cheap, simple, and durable knock 
down grindstone-frame. 
In the drawing, A A are the two side rails 
of the frame, and B B are the legs. The legs 
are constructed-in pairs. The upper ends are 
made square, one side being beveled off, and 
are united by placing the beveled faces to 
gether, so that the feet of the legs are spread 
apart. They are coupled together with one 
rung, a, and when completed are in the form 
of a letter A. The rails A have bevel-gains 
b b cut in their inside faces near the ends, to 
receive the edges of the upper ends of the legs 
B, and have handles turned upon each end. 
The rails AA and legs B B are secured to 
gether with bolts c c, and thus form the com 
plete frame. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. TTBBITTs, 
W. H. Foot'E. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209380.txt	A CONNELLY, 
Faucet and Bushing. 
No. 209,380. 
Patented Oct. 29, 1878. 
  
  
 
 
2NS 
y - 
2Z2& 
ea 
SS 
SYS 
ax 2222222 
f C E x7 %2c 
(SSZ62 
2Y 
A. 
 
WITNESSES: 
64. zozc/o- 
 
N.Peters, phoo-Foqarhea, WASHNGON, D.C. 
INVENTOR: 
e/6% 
21s 
ATTORNEYs, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUSTIN CONNELLY, OF HOBOKEN, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND JOHN V. 
SMITH, OF ELIZABETHPORT, NEWJERSEY. 
IMPROVEMENT, N FAUCETS AND BUSH NGS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 209,3S0, dated October 29, 1878; application filed 
September 19, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, AUSTIN CONNELLY, of 
Hoboken, in the county of Hudson and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and Im 
proved Faucet and Bushing, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification: 
This invention relates to improvements in 
the construction of faucets and bushings for 
beer and ale barrels, casks, &c., the object of 
which is to facilitate the tapping thereof. 
It consists of a faucetprovided with a flanged 
nut for locking it into a permanent bushing 
screwed into the head of the cask or barrel, 
and a piston for removing the plug from the 
bushing, and other details of construction 
which will be fully explained below. 
In the accompanying drawing, forming part 
of this specification, Figure 1 is a longitudi 
inal section of my improved faucet and bush 
ing attached to a section of the head of a 
barrel or cask, with the piston in position to 
drive out the plug. Fig. 2 is a front view of 
the flanged head of the bushing, and Fig. 3 
is an end view of the nut for locking the fau 
Cet to the bushing. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
section of a barrel-head. B is the bushing 
screwed therein, and C is the faucet. The fau 
cet is composed of the head (, and right-an 
gular portion b, with connecting fluid-way c, 
provided with a strainer, d, and cock or valve 
d. The rear end of the faucet is screw 
threaded, and engages a sleeve-nut, e, having 
three flanges, ffif, on its face. On the oppo 
site end is a projecting portion, g, provided 
with a hole, h, and stuffing-box, h', into which 
enters a follower or gland, i, secured by screw. 
cap nut it. Through this is passed a piston, 
j, into the fluidway c, and thence through a 
hole in the strainer d. By means of the stuff. 
ing-box gland and screw-cap this piston can 
be closely and securely packed against the es 
cape of any of the contents of the barrel. 
The bushing B.is provided with a tap-hole, 
j', and a double-flanged head, kk', connected 
by a rim or annulus, l. The outer head, k', is 
cut into a trefoil opening, In, the projecting 
parts an of which extend to the annulus l, 
leaving three flanges, a n n, between, under 
which are short grooves o, extending from the 
 
extremity of the projecting parts on to the 
stops p on the right under the flanges a n in, 
as clearly indicated by the dotted lines in 
Fig. 2. 
The operation of my improvement is as foll 
lows: The bushing is secured permanently 
in the head of the cask or barrel, and the tap 
hole extending through it is closed by a plug, 
q. When the barrel is to be tapped the 
flanged nut is placed in the bushing with the 
projections f" in the openings m'. It is then 
turned, and the projections f pass in the 
grooves o under the flanges a until they rest 
against the stop p. It thus locks itself on ; 
and to make a tight connection between the 
faucet and bushing, the faucet is screwed up 
into the nute until its end bears against the 
face of the head k, and is packed by the in 
tervening packing-ring k", care being taken 
that the adjustment be such that the part b 
will project downward when the faucet is 
screwed up as far as it will go. When thus 
placed the piston i is driven in until it drives 
out the plug q and taps the barrel, whereupon 
it is drawn out into the position it occupies in 
the drawing. To remove the faucet from the 
bushing the operation is reversed with the ex 
ception of the driving of the piston. .. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. As an improvement in bushings, the bush 
ing B, adapted to be screwed into the barrel 
head, and provided with the tap-hole j', heads 
k l', trefoil opening m, flanges in, and grooves 
o, to receive and hold the end of the faucet to 
tap and draw the contents of the barrel, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. As an improvement in faucets, the cap 
nute, with flanges f, to lock it into the bush. 
ing B, in combination with the piston j, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. As an improvement in faucets, the faucet 
E, provided with the pistoni, and cap-nute . 
provided with the flanges f, in combination 
With the bushing B, having tap-holes j', and 
devices forlocking the nute thereto, substan 
tially as described. 
AUSTIN CONNELLY. 
Witnesses: 
C. SEDGWICK, 
W. C. DONN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209480.txt	P. HEW NER, 
Railway System. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 29, 1878. 
No. 209,48O. 
 
w 
No. 209,480. 
 
Patented Oct. 29, 1878. 
P. HEW NER, 
Railway System. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 209,48O. 
 
- N. Perers, p 
HER, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER HEVNER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
GEO. E. HEVNER, OF SAME PLACE, 
IMPROVEMENT IN RAILWAY systEMs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 209,4s0, dated October 29, 1878; application filed 
October 9, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PETER HEVNER, of Phil 
adelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Railway Systems, 
of which the following is a specification: 
The main object of my invention is to com 
bine two continuous rods, forming a double 
elevated track, with a series of endless trac 
tion-ropes, so arranged that hangers or car 
riages, to which the loads are suspended, may 
be caused by the said endless ropes to traverse 
the track continuously. 
Further objects of my invention will appear 
hereinafter, 
- It may be stated here that the main advan 
tages of my improved railroad system are its 
economy in construction and its applicability 
to localities where ordinary railways could 
not be built without great difficulty and ex 
pense-as, for instance, in mountainous min 
ing regions, where minerals have heretofore 
been transported on the backs of mules. 
In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1, 
Sheet 1, is a perspective view illustrating part 
of one of the elevated rails, part of the traction 
rope, and the hanger to which the load is sus 
pended; Fig. 2, a diagram representing a plan 
or top view of the track, and illustrating the 
relative positions of the driving and tighten 
ing stations; Fig. 3, another diagram illus 
trating my invention; Fig. 4. Sheet 2, shows 
the manner of constructing the railway where 
an abrupt turn of the track takes place; Fig. 
5, a perspective view of one of the driving-sta 
tions; and Fig. 6, Sheet 3, a perspective view 
of one of the tightening-stations. 
The track consists of two parallel rods, A. 
A, or rather of a series of rods connected to 
gether, and this track is elevated, being car 
ried by posts driven into the ground, as shown 
in Fig. 5, or by such frames and other appli 
ances as the character of the country which 
the road has to traverse may suggest. The 
loads are carried by these rods through the 
medium of hangers A", one of which, with part 
of one of the rods A, is illustrated in Fig. 1, 
Sheet 1, a pulley, a, having a groove adapted 
to the rod, running loosely on a pin, b, pro 
jecting from the upper end of the hanger, which 
has a griping device, described hereinafter, 
for seizing the traction-rope H, so that the 
movement of the latter shall be followed by 
that of the hanger on the rod. 
The arrangement of traction-ropes will be 
best understood by reference to the general 
plan view, Fig. 2. 
Throughout the entire elevated railway there 
are driving stations D, situated preferably 
about five miles apart, and tightening-stations 
B, situated between the driving-stations. In 
other words, the tightening-stations and driv 
ing-stations alternate. 
Immediately below the rods which compose 
the elevated rails of the track are the traction 
ropes, or rather series of endless traction-ropes, 
which are disposed of in the following manner, 
reference being had to the diagram, Fig. 2. 
It will be noticed that at each tightening 
station B there are two horizontal pulleys, G 
G', and at each driving-station two similar pull 
leys, E. E.'. The former are on vertical shafts, 
each carried by a separate adjustable frame, 
and the frame is so controlled by weights or 
otherwise that the pulleys have a tendency to 
move away from each other, as more fully ex 
plained hereinafter. 
The shafts ee of the pulleys E E of each 
driving-station are adapted to fixed bearings, 
and are driven by a stationary engine or other 
motor; or the shafts may be fixed and the 
pulleys driven through the medium of any suit 
able system of gearing. 
The endless traction-rope H passes around 
the pulley G at the tightening-station B, and 
around the pulley E at the driving-station D. 
Another endless traction - rope, H, passes 
around the pulley E at the station D, and 
around a pulley on the next driving-station 
which occurs in the direction of the arrow 1, 
Fig. 2, and a third endless rope, H, after pass 
ing around the pulley G at the tightening 
station B, passes around a pulley, G, at the 
next driving-station in the direction of the ar 
row 2, the rope in this instance being guided 
by pulleys, so as to follow the track above, which 
takes an abrupt turn at I, in a manner herein 
after fully described. 
The diagram, Fig. 3, will, perhaps, serve bet 
ter to illustrate this succession of endless trac 
tion-ropes. In this diagram the quadrangular 
figures in plain lines represent the tightening 
stations and the quadrangular figures in dot 
 
2 
209,41s0 
ted. Indeed, many different systems of driv 
ted lines the driving-stations, and the dark 
ing appliances may be used. 
circular spots are the vertical shafts, without 
their pulleys, and the endless ropes are shown, 
Whatever style of frame - Work is used at 
one by dotted lines, the next by plain lines, the each driving-station, it must be such as to per 
mit the hangers and the loads to pass freely 
next by dotted lines, and so on, it being under 
through it. 
stood that the stations shown in this figure, as 
The appliances used at each tightening-sta 
well as in Fig. 2, are about two miles and a 
tion are illustrated in the perspective view, Fig. 
half apart, the distance between the driving 
stations being about five miles and the dis 
6, Sheet 3. 
Each of the tightening-pulleys G G is car. 
tance between the tightening - stations the 
ried by a frame, each frame being composed, 
same. These are distances whicll I have as 
in the present instance, of a bottom plate, h, 
sumed in the present instance, and may be de 
a cross-bar, i, and two vertical bars, ji, for 
parted from. 
connecting the said bottom plate and cross 
On turning the pulleys at one of the driv 
ing-stations, two endless ropes will be driven, 
bar together; and from the vertical bars pro 
and on moving the pulleys G. G. of one tight 
ject brackets k, carrying the wheels. 
ening-station two endless ropes will be tight 
The bottom plate has wheels adapted to 
rails in m, secured to a suitable foundation, 
ened. 
When the pulleys of all the driving-stations 
and the cross-bar has wheels adapted to rails 
in n, supported by posts KK, which are to be 
are driven, there will be two continuous lines 
suitably steadied by an appropriate system of 
of traction-rope traversing in contrary direc 
bracing, (not shown in the drawing,) for the 
tions, the two lines of rope being immediately 
reasons above given. 
below and pursuing precisely the same course 
A rope, p, attached to the cross-bar of one 
as the rods. 
The ropes are suspended to the rails through 
frame, passes over a pulley near the top of the 
post M, and another rope, p', attached to the 
the medium of the hangers referred to above, 
bottom plate, h, is guided by a pulley, q, pass 
So that when the railroad is in operation One 
ing upward and over a pulley in the same 
series of loads suspended from One system of 
post, M. On pulling at the two ropes simul 
rods is traversing in one direction and another 
series of loads suspended by the hangers from 
taneously the movable frame, with its pulley 
the other system of rods is traversing in the 
E", will be moved in the direction of the ar 
row, and the endless traction-rope H will be 
other direction. 
tightened. The pulley E may be moved in a 
While there are two continuous lines of trac 
contrary direction by similar appliances, in 
tion-rope extending from end to end of the 
railway, and formed by the series of endless 
which case the endless traction-rope H H will 
be tightened. 
ropes, there are two ropes traversing together 
On each line where the driving-pulleys or tight 
Any suitable tackle may be used for haul 
ing the ropes, or weights may be suspended 
ening-pulleys occur. Thus, where the driving 
pulleys G. G occur at the driving-station D in 
to the same, so as to insure constant tension 
Fig. 2, two ropes are traversing together be 
on the traction-ropes, and so that the movable 
tWeen the points at a on one side and two be 
frames will accommodate themselves to the 
tween the points a' act on the opposite side, 
expansion and contraction of the said ropes. 
(see Figs. 5 and 6,) and it is these double ropes 
It will be understood that the posts M are 
at these points which insure the continuity of 
to be properly braced, and that different styles 
the two lines; but each hanger, as it passes 
of frame-work may be substituted for these 
between the points at a or a? ac', must be re 
posts, and, indeed, for the permanent struc 
leased from one endless rope and attached to 
ture generally, a skeleton or outline frame be 
the other endless rope, for which purpose there 
ing purposely shown in the present instance 
to prevent confusion in illustrating the more 
must be one or more attendants at every sta 
important parts. 
tion to make the necessary transfers as fast as 
the hangers with their loads arrive. 
It is between the points acac in this Fig. 6 
Fig. 5, Sheet 2, shows one of the driving 
where two traction-ropes traverse together, 
stations in perspective, E and E' being the two 
and where each passing hanger has to be de 
driving-pulleys, H H a portion of one endless 
tached from one rope and griped to the other. 
traction-rope passing around the pulley E, the 
Fig. 4, Sheet 2, illustrates the structure 
course of another endless rope, H. H., being 
where a curve occurs in the suspended track. 
indicated by the dotted lines. 
Rigid rails c ac, properly bent, are substi 
AA are the rods which constitute the track, 
tuted for and form continuations of the ele 
and Which are supported by the posts J and 
vated rods where the curve occurs, and are 
connected together by a frame-work, t. An 
their cross-bars. 
Aframe, J, for carrying the bearings of the 
other frame, composed in the present instance 
of posts SS and angular cross-pieces, straddles 
two vertical shafts, is built on a suitable founda 
tion. This frame, as shown in the drawing, 
the track at the curve; and in the frame-work t 
is of the simplest character, the necessary 
and said cross-pieces' the vertical shafts W 
braces, &c., being omitted to prevent confusion. 
W have their bearings, additional bearings 
For the same reason the engines and gearing being secured to a suitable foundation. 
by Which the shafts are driven have been omit. 
To the shaft, W is secured a glide-pulley, X, 
and to the shaft W. a guide-pulley, X, and 
these two pulleys are of such a diameter and 
are so located that the traction-ropes which 
run on the said pulley will follow the same 
curve as the track formed by the rigid bent 
rails v v. 
The elevated rails A A' consist, as before 
remarked, of a series of rods, the latter being 
as long as the distance of the posts apart from 
each other. 
A device for so connecting these rods to 
gether that proper tension may be imparted 
to them is shown in Fig. 7, Sheet 1. Two 
arms, 12, rest on the cross-bars of the posts, 
and the two arms are connected together by a 
bolt, 3. One rod, A, is bent into a recess in the 
head 4 of the arm 1 and the other rod into a 
recess in the end 5 of the arm. 2. This end 5 
of the arm 2 is slotted, so as to present two 
ribs, 66, between which the portion 4 of the 
arm 1, with the bent portion of the rod A, fits. 
When the two arms are secured together the 
ribs 66 form a bridge between the gap which 
exists between the bent ends of the two rods, 
and the pulleys of the hangers ride freely over 
this bridge. 
The rods may be tightened by simply ma 
nipulating the nut of the bolt 3, and thereby 
Inoving the arms toward each other. 
A guide-rod, 7, passes through eyes in the 
arms, and this guide-rod may be secured to 
the cross-bars of the posts by eyebolts or 
screws 8. 
The rods are secured through the medium 
of appropriate appliances, by which they can 
be maintained in a proper state of tension, 
and yet not interrupt the continuity of the 
bearing for the pulleys a of the hangers. 
Different devices may be employed for this 
purpose, and hence it has not been deemed 
necessary to illustrate any mechanism for 
connecting the rods to the cross-bars of the 
posts. 
Turning back to the hanger B, (shown in 
Fig. 1) it will be observed that the upperpor 
tion extends over the pulley and down in 
front of the same far enough to receive the 
spindle b of the said pulley, and to a project 
ing portion of this spindle is loosely hung a 
pendulous arm, f, the lower end of which fits 
freely in a groove in a projection, f', on the 
hanger. When the latter is traversing the 
rod between the supporting-posts this arm 
tends to strengthen the upper overhanging 
portion of the hanger; but when it reaches 
the connecting devices shown in Fig. 7, where 
the ends of the rods A are secured, the pend 
ulous arm will yield to the obstruction pre 
sented at this point, after passing which it 
will, by its own gravity, return to its former 
position (shown in the drawings) and resume 
its strengthening duty. 
The device for griping the traction-rope to 
the hanger consists, in the present instance, 
of a plate,g, Fig. 1, pivoted to the said hang 
er, which has a recess for receiving the rope. 
 
209,450 
3. 
When the plate is moved in the direction of 
the arrow it will jam the rope into the recess, 
the upper beveled edge of the plate fitting 
tightly into an undercut shoulder, t, on the 
hanger. When the latter has to be released 
from the rope in making the transfer above 
alluded to, all that is necessary is to move the 
plate in a direction contrary to that pointed 
out by the arrow, when the hanger will be free, 
and can be secured to the other rope, which 
traverses alongside of the first where the sta 
tions occur. 
Other devices equally as effective as that 
just described may be used for griping the 
rope to and releasing it from the hanger. 
Two hangers may be connected together. 
Indeed I. prefer to let them travel in pairs, 
the connection of one hanger to another be 
ing by rods. (Indicated by the dotted lines in 
Fig. 1.) 
It may be stated here that the track may 
have any inclination which the nature of the 
region may suggest. It may be extended over 
mountains or across rivers and ravines, the 
inclines presenting no impediment to the pro 
gress of the traversing hangers. Hence the 
railway is especially applicable to mountain 
Ous districts and mining regions. 
It will be understood, however, that when 
the track has to cross rivers, &c., a proper sys 
tem of supporting guides or trusses must be 
substituted for the posts. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an elevated railway, the combination 
of two continous rods, forming a double ele 
vated track, with a series of endless traction 
ropes, so arranged that the traveling hangers 
or carriages may traverse the said track con 
tinuously, as herein described. 
2. A railway in which two continuous lines 
of elevated rods and a series of endless trac 
tion-ropes below the rods are combined with 
driving stations arrangedatintervals through 
out the track, each station having two driv 
ing-pulleys, EE", to which the said endless 
traction-ropes are applied, substantially in the 
manner described. 
3. An elevated railway in which two lines 
of elevated rods and a series of endless trac 
tion-ropes are combined with alternating driv 
ing and tightening stations, the former having . 
driving-pulleys and the latter having tighten 
ing-pulleys, with devices by which the said 
tightening-pulleys may be controlled, all sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. The within-described tightening device, 
consisting of two pulleys, G. G., each carried 
by an adjustable frame controlled by ropes or 
chains, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
- 
- 
PETER HEW NER, 
Witnesses: 
HENRY HOWSON, Jr., 
HARRY SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209580.txt	- 
J. M. O'NE ALL. 
Band-Cutting Feeders for Thrashing-Machines. 
Patented Nov. 5, 1878. 
No. 209,580. 
R 
|| || 
TTET 
T t 
se 
l 
E-le s 
S552. 
Rei learaareer 
WITNESSES 
wwaz 
INVENTOR: 
a 26 e 
BY C-1.-- 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERs. Photo-LithogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. O'NEALL, OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BAND-CUTTING FEEDERS FOR THRASHING-MACHINES, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 209,5so, dated November 5, 1878; application filed 
March 21, 1878. 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES M. ONEALL, of 
Fort Worth, in the county of Tarrant and 
State of Texas, have invented a new and Im 
proved Band-Cutting Feeder for Thrashing 
Machines; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved machine for cutting the bands of 
gavels or bundles of grain, and feeding the 
same to the cylinder of a thrasher. 
The invention relates more particularly to a 
guard under the shaft of the rotary cutters, 
and the form and arrangement of the bed of 
the endless carrier. 
In the accompanying drawing, forming part 
of this specification, Figure 1 is a vertical lon 
gitudinal section of the machine, and Fig. 2 is 
a plan view of the same. 
A represents the frame of the machine, pro 
vided with Wings B B and a curved bed, D, 
having at its ends the shafts E, F, carrying 
pulleys G. G., for the endless carrier H, which 
consists of belts. a. a. and Cross-slats b. The 
shaft E carries the pulleys IJ also, the former 
serving to give motion to the shaker K through 
the medium of the belt L and pulley M, and 
the latter to the shaft N of the circular cut 
ters O O by means of the belt P and pulley 
Q. The end of the shaft N is formed into a 
crank, R, to give motion to the rake S by 
means of the pitman T and the crank U. 
Beneath the cutter-shaft N is a guard, V, 
extending upward to cross-bars W. W., at 
tached to the sides of the frame, and at X is 
another cross-bar, acting, in conjunction with 
the guard proper, to prevent danger to the 
operators by accidental contact with the band. 
cutters O O. The guard W also prevents loose 
straw from being caught up and Wound around 
the shaft N. 
In operating the machine, the bundles or 
gavels of grain are laid on the wings or tables 
BB, and from thence fall or are placed upon 
the bed D, and carried forward by the slats b 
under the cutters O, which may either have a 
plain cutting-edge or be serrated, as desired; 
but I prefer the latter. After passing the cut. 
ters, the bundles are operated on by the rake 
S, which, by its rapid vibrating motion, opens 
the grain for the more ready operation of the 
thrashing-machine. After leaving the rake, 
the opened bundles pass over the shaker K, 
which, in its turn, still further opens and 
shakes the grain, so that when it reaches the 
thrashing-cylinder it is in the best possible 
condition for being operated on by the latter. 
The curved bed enables the carrier to pass 
over the bed with but little friction, as the 
carrier has little friction with the bed, except 
at that portion. Where the most of the work is 
required-namely, directly under the cutters. . 
If preferred, the reciprocating rake and the 
rotary shaker may receive endwise motions by 
means of cams and kevers, as in my Patent No. 
197,659. 
The shaker alternately raises and lowers the 
grain, and also helps to feed it to the thrasher. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with endless carrier, 
the curved bed, the shaft N, and cutters O, of 
the convex guard V, constructed and arranged 
substantially as described. 
2. In combination with the band-cutters O 
and carrier H, the fixed convex bed D, hav 
ing its highest point or convexity immedi 
ately beneath the cutters, as shown and de 
scribed. 
JAMES M, ONEALL, 
Witnesses: 
C. E. RATCLIFFE, 
R. H. SHANKLIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209680.txt	No. 209,680. 
 
Witnesses 
QecreS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES HART, oF SPENCER, IOW.A. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FENCES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 209,650, dated November 5, 1878; application filed 
March 4, 1878. 
to all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES HART, of Spen 
cer, in the county of Clay and State of Iowa, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Portable Fences; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, and to letters of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification, 
and in which the figure represents a perspec 
tive view of my improved portable fence. 
My invention relates to portable fences, 
and its object is to produce a cheap and du 
rable fence that can be readily taken apart 
and compactly packed for transportation; and 
the nature of my invention consists in hold 
ing the panels of a fence in an upright posi 
tion by means of braces or tie-rods having 
bifurcated metallic plates upon their upper 
ends and by single metallic plates having 
orifices for the reception of stakes upon their 
lower ends, substantially as hereinafter more 
particularly set forth. 
In the annexed drawing, A and B mark 
the adjoining ends of two panels of a fence. 
These panels are composed of ordinary planks 
b b at a, nailed or otherwise secured to the 
end pieces, b' a', and a middle piece, a, and 
further made firm and secure by vertical 
stays midway between the middle and end 
pieces, and fastened to the boards by suitable 
8S 
The boards are secured upon the middle 
and end pieces at increasing distances apart 
from the ground upward, the purpose of which 
is to prevent Small animals from leaving the 
inclosure. 
The end pieces, ba', and middle piece, a, 
have an extension at their lower ends, which 
are driven into the ground, and which serve 
to hold the panels in an elevated position. 
The panels A B are further held in an up 
right position by means of the braces CD. 
The brace C has upon its upper end a bi 
furcated plate, E, secured thereto by means 
of the screw-bolt and nute, or in any other 
suitable manner, and further secured by its 
lower end, e, being bent and driven into the 
brace. 
The arms ele, upon the upper end of the said 
plate E, are bent at an obtuse angle thereto, 
and are secured to the abutting end pieces or 
posts, ba', of the panels A.B. By means of 
these arms any unevenness between the ad 
jacent posts of the panels is provided for in 
connecting the same together, the uniting of 
the panels facilitated, the fastening-plate re 
lieved from strain, as the arms can be adapted 
to conform to any slight angle out of a per 
pendicular line in which the posts may stand, 
or to yield to any slight vertical movement of 
Said posts, and a simpler and more secure 
fastening is obtained. 
Upon the lower end of the brace C a plate, 
F, is secured, in a manner similar to the plate 
E, and having a bent portion, f, with an ori 
fice, f', through which a stake is driven to 
hold the brace C securely to the ground. 
The brace D is secured to the middle piece, 
a', by a plate, G, having a single arm, g. 
Upon the lower end of this brace is secured a 
plate, H, similar in construction to the plate 
F upon the brace C. 
It will be seen from the foregoing that this 
fence, being simple in construction, readily 
placed in position, and held there by means 
of the braces, (which, being on the outside, 
are removed from the cattle,) or, when not in 
use, the parts being readily separated and 
packed very compactly for either housing or 
transportation, possesses advantages over the 
portable fences now in use. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a portable fence, in combination with 
a wooden brace, metal pieces E, substantially 
aS shown and described. 
2. In a portable fence, in combination with 
a Wooden brace, metal pieces E and F, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I hereunto affix my signature in pres 
ence of tW0 Witnesses. 
JAMES HART, 
Witnesses: 
CHARLESKIRKHAM, 
E. O. BENDER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209780.txt	2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
G. W. STAWER. 
Cultivator, 
Patented Nov. 12, 1878. 
No. 209,780. 
 
G. W. STAVER. 
Cultivator. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 209,780. 
Patented Nov. 12, 1878. 
 
:S  
K 
 
 
GRETCS 
 
N. PeFERs, Photo-uthographer, WASHINGTON. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. STAVER, OF MONROE, WISCONSIN. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CULTIVATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 209, S0, dated November 12, 1878; application filed 
January 9, 1878. 
 
To all whom it may concern: 
movement in all directions, and the other of 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. STAVER, 
which is so constructed as to support the 
sway-bar and prevent it from tipping forward 
of Monroe, Green county, State of Wisconsin, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
and back. 
in Cultivators, of which the following is a full 
The devices by means of which the sway 
description, reference being had to the accom 
bar is connected with the beam are as foll 
panying drawings, in which 
lows: G represents plates, one of which is se 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a device em 
cured to each of the beams C, and can be ad 
bodying my invention; Fig. 2, a rear view; 
justed thereon. 
e is a short post, secured to 
Fig. 3, a plan view of the parts represented. 
the plate G near its outer end, upon the upper 
The remaining figures are details. Fig. 4 is 
end of which post is a ball, H. I. I are two 
a top view of the beam with the plate G at 
plates, which are secured to one end of the 
rigid sway-bar F. Each plate is provided 
tached; Fig. 5, an end view of the same. Figs. 
6 and 7 are sections of Fig. 2, showing the 
With an ear, J, the two ears forming a socket 
means of connecting the sway-bar with one of for the ball H. The opening in these plates 
the beams; Fig. 8, a vertical section of one of 
for the poste, below the socket for the ball, is 
the plates I; Fig. 9, an inside view of the 
enlarged, as shown at f in Fig. 9, and also in 
same. Figs. 10, 11, 12, and 13 represent the 
Figs. 6, 7, and 8, so as to permit a free move 
mode of connecting the sway-bar to the other 
ment of the sway-bar upon the ball in all di 
plow-beam. 
rections. The other end of the sway-bar is 
My improvements relate to devices by means 
connected with the other plow-beam in the 
of which a rigid sway-bar is connected with 
same manner, except that the plates K, which 
correspond with the plates I, are not provided 
the machine. 
In the drawings, A represents a bent axle; 
at their lower ends with the enlargement f; 
B, a split tongue; C, the plow-beams, which 
but these ends g extend down along the side 
are connected with the machine as follows: 
of the post e upon the front and back thereof, 
D represents two hangers, which are secured 
so as to support the sway-bar and prevent it 
to the split tongue, one upon each side. a rep 
from tipping forward or back, and at the same 
resents lugs or projections at right angles to 
time permit a sufficiently free movement of the 
balljoints. 
the hangers D, and permanently secured there 
to. E is a plate, which is pivoted at the top 
By means of this sway-bar F the two beams 
and bottom in the projections a. This plate 
are maintained at the same distance apart, 
is provided with a recess, b, and a plate, E', is 
and by means of the joints connecting it with 
secured to it by bolts b, covering said recess, 
the plates G the two plow-beams can be 
so as to form an opening for the passage of 
moved laterally, and either one can be moved 
vertically independently of the other. 
the plate c at the forward end of the plow 
L is a hand-lever. M is a foot-lever, and N 
represents curved plow-standards. 
c is a metal plate, one end of which is se 
cured in the forward end of the beam, and the 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
other end of which extends out from the beam 
The plates II and sway-bar F, said plates 
some distance and enters the slot b, and is 
pivoted therein at d, Fig. 1, so that the plow 
clamping the sway-bar and inclosing the balls 
beams have a vertical movement on the pivot 
H, in combination with plates G, post E, and 
d, and a lateral movement by turning the 
the beams C, substantially as set forth. 
plate E in its bearings. 
F is a rigid sway-bar, which is connected 
with the plow-beams by means of a ball-and 
socket joint, one of which permits the free 
W. W. WRIGHT, 
WM, M. WRIGHT, 
GEORGE W. STAWER, 
beam. 
- 
Witnesses: 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209880.txt	UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
DOUGLAS F. FRINK, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN THE PROCESS OF 
COLORNG PHOTOGRAPHC PICTURES, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 209,sso, dated November 12, 1878; application filed 
July 22, 1878. 
ter, distilled, four and one-half ounces. The 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DOUGLAS F. FRINK, of effect of this treatment is to set or fix the col 
the city, county, and State of New York, have ors of the photograph and prevent their fad 
invented certain Improvements in the Art of ing out. 
To cement the photograph to the glass, I 
Mounting and Coloring Photographs on Glass, 
employ a compound composed of rice-pow 
of which the following is a specification: 
der, one ounce, and sulphate of quinine, 
The art or process of mounting plotographs 
about one grain, intimately mixed together. 
on glass and of coloring the same has hereto 
I take a little of this paste-powder and mix 
fore been conducted generally as follows: An 
with it sufficient hot water to form a paste 
Ordinary card-photograph-say a portrait 
having the proper consistency, and apply it 
is first soaked off the card, or unmounted, 
in the same manner as ordinary paste. Its 
and then pasted with ordinary four or starch 
advantages are, that it is perfectly trans 
paste, face downward, on a glass plate, usually 
parent, holds the picture firmly to the glass, 
concavo-convex, the picture being mounted 
and will never turn white or opaque in spots, 
on the concave face. When dry the photo 
as in the case of ordinary paste. 
graphic paper is ground down thin on the back 
Instead of grinding down the back of the 
by means of sand-paper or other suitable 
photograph and then applying one of the sub 
abrasive material, so as to make it somewhat 
stances named, I omit all abrasion of the pa 
translucent. It is then treated with Canada 
per, and in lieu thereof apply to it the follow 
balsam, sweet - oil, or paraffine, to render it 
ing, compounded in about the proportions 
still more translucent. The eyes, jewelry, and 
named: castor-oil, two and one-half ounces; 
other parts requiring brilliant color are then 
nux vomica, two drams; tincture of capsicum, 
usually painted with water-color directly upon 
two drams; oil of sassafras, two drams. I pour 
the back of the paper, and the flesh and other 
about a spoonful of this mixture on the back 
parts are tinted by painting with oil colors 
of the photograph, spread it evenly around, 
upon another glass plate arranged behind the 
and let it remain for about thirty-six (36) 
picture. This gives a softened and delicate 
hours, or a sufficient time for it to thoroughly 
effect to the coloring of the picture. 
impregnate the paper. I then remove the sur 
This method, although producing pictures 
plus and permit the paper to dry on the back, 
of great delicacy and beauty, is defective in 
and when sufficiently dry I apply the color in 
that the paste used to affix the picture to the 
the usual manner, as stated, with respect to the 
glass frequently decomposes, so that the pho 
old process. 
tograph is apt to fade, and the oil or other 
Treatment with this solution renders the 
material used will in time evaporate slightly, 
paper so translucent that it is unnecessary to 
leaving the photograph more translucent in 
grind it thin. It gives to the picture a pearly 
some places than in others, thus producing a 
clearness not obtainable by the old method of 
mottled appearance, 
treatment, producing an agreeable softness 
Furthermore, the operation of grinding 
and delicacy of appearance that is especially 
down the back of the paper after mounting is 
pleasing. Moreover, it is practically perma 
tedious and difficult, to perform, and the paper 
nent, as it does not undergo any chemical 
is apt to be ground thinner in some places 
change, so far as I am aWare. 
than in others, producing an uneven appear 
If preferred, vaseline may be substituted 
for the castor-oil in the compound. 
ae, My process avoids these defects, and is as 
I claim as my invention 
follows: After soaking off the picture from 
1. The process of fixing or producing pho 
the card and washing it clean I soak it for 
tographic pictures on glass which consists in 
about eight minutes, or more if the paper is 
treating an unmounted photograph to a bath 
hard, in win at I call the fixing solution, 
in a compound of sulphuric ether, alum, and 
compounded as follows and in about the fol 
lowing proportions: sulphuric ether, one-half water, in about the proportions specified, and 
ounce; alum, powdered, one-half ounce; Wal then securing it, face downward, to a plate of 
209, SSO 
2 
glass by means of a paste composed of rice 
powder, sulphate of quinine, and water, in 
substantially the proportions specified, for the 
purposes set forth. 
2. The process of producing colored photo 
graphic pictures on glass which consists in 
mounting the picture, face downward, on the 
glass, and treating it with a compound of cas 
tor:oil or vaseline, nux vomica, tincture of 
capsicum, and oil of sassafras, mixed in sub 
stantially the proportions named, and apply 
ing color either to the paper of the picture or 
to a glass behind it, substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
DOUGLAS F. FRINK. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY CONNETT, 
ARTHUR. C. FRASER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US209980.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTHONY PIRZ, OF LONGISLAND CITY, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNEASSIGNMENTS, 
TO REUBEN C. BARROWs, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FERTILIZERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 209,9so, dated November 19, 1878; application filed 
June 17, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ANTHONY PIRz, of Long 
Island City, in the county of Queens and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements relating to Fertilizers, of 
which the following is a specification: 
I combine artificially-made sulphate of lime 
with phoshate of lime (powdered bones) under 
proper conditions, and the chemical reactions 
induced result in the production of a valuable 
fertilizer. 
The sulphate of lime with whichI have experi 
mented is a Waste product from the manufac 
ture of acetic acid, according to the patentis 
sued to myself and brother, dated March 2, 
1869, No. 87,365. It contains some free acid 
and tarry matter. 
I take a hundred pounds (100 lbs.) of pow 
dered or broken bone, and intimately mingle 
With it an equal weight of the artificial sul 
phate of lime resulting as a waste product 
from the manufacture of acetic acid accord 
ing to the patent above referred to. I add 
about a hundred pounds (100 lbs.) water, suf. 
ficient to thoroughly wet the mass, and then 
allow it to lie a while at rest. The chemical 
action which ensues induces a considerable 
rise of temperature, and after a few hours it is 
found that the water has been absorbed, ald 
the mass has become a solid of some consist 
ency, which, on being broken up or ground, is 
available as a valuable fertilizer. It may be 
used either alone or mixed with other material. 
Twenty-five per cent. of ashes may be added 
with advantage, or ten per cent of Stassfurth 
muriate of potassa or Stassfulrth sulphate of 
potassa. 
I claim as my invention 
The fertilizer described, composed of bone 
and artificial sulphate of lime, combined as 
and for the purposes herein specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 15th day of June, 1878, in the 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
ANTHONY PRZ, 
Witnesses: 
SAM, C. SLOAN, 
CHAS. C. STETSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210080.txt	W. BALD WIN. 
. 
Padlocks. . 
No. 210,080. 
 
Patented Nov. 19, 1878. 
 
 
  
s 
42 .. 2 s 
7ZZest 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM BALDWIN, OFTIOGA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN PADLOCKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 210,0s0, dated November 19, 1878; application filed 
December 26, 1877. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM BALDWIN, of 
Tioga, in the county of Tioga and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Padlocks, of which 
the following is a specification: 
My invention relates to that class of pad 
locks constructed with self-opening shackles 
and with spring-tumblers which are adjusted 
for opening by the thrust of the key bearing 
obliquely against their edges. 
My lock is constructed with a double set of 
tumblers, working between each other, and 
moved laterally by the pressure of the end of 
a suitable key against their oblique edges, 
and with a narrow guiding-groove, which, 
While it affords a sufficient bearing for the 
proper key, will not afford effective bearing 
for a narrow pick; also, with a curtain con 
stituting a bearing, against which the tum 
blers rest, and serving to conceal the vital 
parts of the lock from inspection through the 
key-hole. 
In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1 is 
a face view of the lock with the face-plate re 
moved, showing the locked condition. Fig. 
2 is a similar view, showing the unlocked con 
(lition. Fig. 3 is a vertical section. Fig. 4 is 
a face view, with the face-plate and tumblers 
removed, showing the shackle in the act of 
engaging with the dog. Fig. 5 is a perspec 
tive view. of a portion of the case, showing 
the key-hole, the guide, the curtain, and the 
post on which the dog turns. Fig. 6 is a per 
spective view of a key adapted for the lock 
represented. Fig. 7 is a side view of the 
Sale. 
A represents the case of the lock; B, the 
face-plate; C, the shackle, hinged at a, and 
having an undercut notch, c, near its free ex 
tremity for engaging with the dog D. The 
said dog is of L shape, having a horizontal 
rigid arm, D', projecting in suitable position 
to receive the pressure of the end of the 
shackle. It is also formed with an undercut 
hook, d, adapted to engage with the under. 
cut notch c of the shackle. 
E represents the stud on which the dog 
turns. F is the spring which tends to throw 
the dog backward, so as to release the shackle, 
when permitted by the tumblers. 
G represents a post, on which the tumblers 
H. and I turn. Said tumblers are provided 
with springs h and with notches h", in cus 
tomary manner, the latter being adapted to 
receive the projecting stump d of the dog D 
When the said notches h of the tumblers are 
adjusted in corresponding position by the ac 
tion of the proper key. Krepresents the key. 
The alternate tumblers I are formed with 
downwardly-projecting arms I, the oblique 
edges of which receive the pressure of the end 
of the key K, so as to draw the said tumblers 
I downward, while the other tumblers, H, are 
pressed upward, the springs of the said tum 
blers being so constructed and applied as to 
press the tumblers H downward and the tum 
blers I upward when released. 
The edges of the tumblers on which the 
key bears are corrugated, as shown in Figs. 1 . 
and 2, to cause an irregular friction against 
the extremity of the key and prevent the pos 
sibility offeeling the notches hwith the dog 
Stump d. 
The successive steps on the extremity of 
the key are beveled in opposite directions, or 
in such a manner as to correspond with the 
surfaces of the tumblers on which they are to 
act. 
The corrugations in the working-edges of 
the tumblers also effect the useful purposes 
of preventing the manipulation of the tum 
blers with a square-ended pick or key. 
L represents a partition or curtain, which 
is cast with the lock-case, serving as a bear 
ing for the tumblers H, against which they 
are thrown by their springs, and serving also 
to prevent inspection of the vital parts of the 
lock from the key-hole J. 
M is a guiding-groove extending in Ward 
from the key-hole J, and affording a bearing 
for the lower edge of the key K, said bearing 
being insufficient to permit the use of a nar 
row pick for the manipulation of the tum 
blers separately. 
S represents the mainspring, by which the 
shackle is thrown up when released. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
- 
2 
2 
210,0s0 
 
following is what I claim as new and desire 
2. The curtain L, constructed and applied 
to secure by Letters Patent: 
as described, to conceal the vital parts of the 
1. The tumblers arranged to open or slide lock, in combination with tumblers I, resting 
R ERCSE Scies E. the E,f a against the back of said curtain, as shown. 
at key sliding endlwise between their oblique 
opposing edges, substantially as set forth, in 
WM. BALDWIN. 
combination with the guide M, constructed 
substantially as described, to support the 
lower edge of the key. 
PHILO TULLER, 
C. A. URELL. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210180.txt	J. H. BULLARD. 
Machine for Checking. Pistol-Handles. 
No. 210,180. 
Patented Nov. 26, 1878. 
 
S 
2. 
S22 w 
SC4S w 
SS 
. 
Y. e 
7 722. Z. 
772%zassey- 
76 (244-24 
Z2 ZZezza27 
42- 66-62.2% 
N.Peters, roto-liriographER, was gon, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. BULLARD, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO 
DANIEL B. WESSON. 
' 
IMPROVEMENT IN MACHINES FOR CHECKING PSTOL-HANDLES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 210,150, dated November 26, 1878; application filed 
October 14, 1878. 
To all chon, it may 000ern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES H. BULLARD, of 
Springfield, in the State of Massachusetts, 
have invented a new and useful Machine for 
Checking Pistol-Handles; and that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description there 
of, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, making a part of this specification, 
and to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
The object of my invention is to produce in 
a uniform manner the grooves usually made 
on the sides of pistol-handles, to give a firmer 
gripe, and ordinarily called checking;' and 
it consists of a shaft having a spiral movement 
lengthwise inside a sleeve arranged to rotate 
in a bearing, and provided with an index, said 
shaft being arranged at an angle with refer 
ence to a Vibrating frame adapted to contain 
a pattern-tool and revolving cutting-tool, as 
Will be more fully described. 
Figure I is a perspective view of my inven 
tion. Fig. II is a vertical longitudinal section 
through the sleeve and its bearing, and through 
that portion of the shaft within the sleeve; and 
Fig. III is a transverse vertical section through 
the sleeve, shaft, and its bearing. 
In the drawing, A represents a shaft, having 
its bearing in a cylindrical sleeve, D', which 
is arranged to revolve in a support, I, and to 
one end of this sleeve is fixed a disk, D, pro 
vided on its periphery with any desired num 
ber of teeth or a series of indents, and a col 
lar or stop, i, is fixed at the other end of the 
sleeve, to prevent the latter from working out 
of its support, 
The shaft A has a spiral groove, c, made 
therein, and a feather, e, on the inside of the 
disk enters this groove, so that when the shaft 
is moved to and fro longitudinally in the 
sleeve it is caused to partially revolve in one 
direction or the other by the feather and 
groove. A spring-detent, F, entering one of 
the indents in the periphery of the disk, serves 
to hold the disk, sleeve, and shaft in any de 
sired position, although any other arrangement 
of detent or stop would answer quite as well. 
The shaft A, near its smaller end, may rest in 
another support, f, to give it the desired rigid 
ity and steadiness. 
At the desired point along the shaft is fixed 
a suitable bed, a, which may be attached by. 
set-screws, or may be permanently fixed, and 
at another point along the shaft is another 
bed, af, the former to receive the material to 
be checked and the latter to receive the 
pattern or former. Instead of these beds, 
however, being made separate from the shaft 
and attached thereto, the latter may be so 
formed at those points as to be adapted to re 
ceive the pattern and the piece to be checked. 
L is a shaft, arranged to revolve in suitable 
bearings or supports in ; and B is a frame 
adapted to swing upon the shaft L as a pivot, 
and this frame I denominate a vibrating or 
swinging frame; and at his a small wheel or 
pattern-tool, and at li is a shaft arranged to 
revolve in bearings in the frame, with a cut 
ter to be secured thereto, a band passing 
around the wheel on the shaft Li, and also 
around the shaft ht, serving to cause the shaft 
h and cutting-tool to revolve rapidly when 
motion is given to the shaft II, 
The upper surface of both beds a and a? and 
the axis of the shaft L should be on the same 
plane to obtain the best results in the accu 
late working of the machine. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
A former or pattern, made of metal or of other 
suitable material, and having a similar exte 
rior form or contour as the surface of the na 
terial upon which the checking is to be made, is 
attached to the bed af, and the material to be 
operated upon is secured to the bed at ; and the 
detent F being pulled away from the disk D, 
the latter, as well as the shaft, is turned into 
the desired position to commence on one edge 
of the material. The detent is then dropped 
into one of the indents in the disk, and the 
shaft is then moved longitudinally until one 
groove is cut, the pattern-tool at h resting on 
the pattern and governing the amount of mal 
terial taken out by the cutter on the shafth. . 
The detent is then drawn out again, the disk 
turned the desired distance, the detent dropped 
in again, and the shaft moved longitudinally, 
as before, and so on until all the grooves 
have been cut in one direction. The piece is 
then removed from the beda, and placed upon 
another spirally-operating shaft, arranged with 
a frame, B, both in a position just the reverse 
i. 
 
2 
210,1SO 
ments by a pattern-tool passing over the sur 
face of a pattern, and I do not claim the same 
nor any part thereof; but, 
Having described myinvention, what Iclaim 
as new is 
The combination, in a checking-machine, of 
the index D and sleeve D', revolving in a bear 
ing or support, the spirally-grooved shaft A, 
and the vibrating frame B, adapted to have 
a pattern-tool and revolving cutter secured 
therein, substantially as described. 
v 
JAMES H. BUILLARD. 
Witnesses: 
T. A. CURTIs, 
G. H. ADAMS. 
- 
from that shown in the drawing, it being nec 
essary to perform the whole work of checking 
when grooves are wanted in both directions, 
or diagonally across each other, to have two 
machines, both alike, but having the shaft A 
and frame B arranged in just the reverse po 
sition with reference to each other to that 
shown in the drawing. 
By this invention the checking on pistol 
handles may be performed very rapidly and 
accurately. 
I am aware that forming - machines have 
heretofore been made in which one surface 
was Wrought with a cutting-tool, and in which 
the cutting-tool was controlled in its move 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210280.txt	E. WELLS, A. E. RICHARDSON, W. J. VAN PATTEN & 
H. WELLS 
Refining and Packing Cate Chu, 
No. 210,280. 
Patented Nov. 26, 1878, 
 
r 
Zeverazar 
-6-4-4-22 
al-Y-2 
4, 72%tiz%. 
NPETERS, ProTo-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, L. c. 
eaesz. 
a2% 
22%242-/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD WELLS, ALBERT E. RICHARDSON, WILLIAM J. WAN PATTEN, AND 
HENRY WELLS, OF BURLINGTON, VERMONT. 
IMPROVEMENT IN REFINING AND PACKING CATECHU. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 210,2S0, dated November 26, 1878; application filed 
May 10, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, EDWARD WELLs, AL 
BERT E. RICHARDSON, WILLIAM.J. WAN PAT 
TEN, and HENRY WELLs, all of Burlington, 
in the county of Chittenden and State of Ver. 
mont, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Processes of Refining and 
Putting Up Catechu; and we do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, which will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper. 
tains to make and use the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawing, and to 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
The object of this invention is to remove 
the impurities from catechu and put it into 
Small packages suited to the wants of the con 
sumer and the trade; and the invention will 
be hereinafter fully set forth, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
The drawing shows a package of the refined 
catechu in the rectangular shape, which we 
prefer, as being the most convenient for use. 
In carrying out our invention we take either 
variety of catechu, designated as Catech, ni 
gratin or Catecht pallidum, and known in com 
merce by the names of cutch, gambir, or 
Terra Japonica, and having removed the mats 
which envelop it we divide it into pieces of a 
convenient size to handle. It is then placed 
in a steam jacketed kettle containing a suffi 
cient quantity of water, and heated until 
liquefied. During the process of liquefaction 
we introduce into the contents of the kettle 
steam of high temperature, to assist in the 
process, and also to cause the lighter impuri 
ties, such as pieces of rushes and leaves, to 
more readily rise to the surface, that they may 
be removed by the skimmer. When thor 
oughly liquefied and of the proper consistence 
it is put through a strainer made of wire-cloth, 
which removes all sticks and stones and coarse 
impurities. 
It is then kept in a liquid state 
and at rest until the earthy impurities settle 
to the bottom, when it may be drawn off, while 
still hot and in liquid form, into boxes of such 
size and shape and material as may be de 
Witnesses: 
A. B. CoGSWELL, 
ISAAC STERNS, 
sirable, usually, however, containing one 
fourth pound, one-half pound, and one pound 
each. 
The boxes we prefer to make of pasteboard 
or paper, of the rectangular form shown in 
the drawing, so that they shall be capable of 
forming a compact mass, completely filling the 
cases in which they are packed for transporta 
tion. 
The crude catechu purified by steam and 
placed in boxes in the manner described is 
much stronger and better for the various pur. 
poses to which it is applied, as well as much 
more convenient for the users and dealers in 
the article. 
We are aware that steam-heat has hereto 
fore been employed in the melting and purifi. 
cation of wax, gums, &c., and We therefore do 
not claim merely the use of steam. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, the following: 
1. The process of refining and packing cate 
chu herein described, which consists in first 
placing the catechu in a vessel containing a 
sufficient quantity of water, then subjecting 
it to the action of Steam-heat, at the same 
time introducing into the mass steam of a 
high temperature, thereby liquefying the cate. 
chu and forcing the lighter substances to the 
surface, then skimming, straining, and set 
tling, and finally placing the catechu, while 
still liquid, in boxes holding certain specified 
quantities, as herein set forth. 
2. The herein-described article of manufac 
ture, consisting of refined and concentrated 
catechu, incased in a tight integument or en 
velope, as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we hereunto affix our signatures in 
presence of two Witnesses. 
EDWARD WELLS. 
A. E. RICARDSON. 
W. J. WAN PATTEN, 
HENRY WELES, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210380.txt	E. WESTON, 
Electric-Light, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 21 O,38O. 
Patented Nov. 26, 1878. 
YNN\\\ss, 
4.7-4.5 
24.2%r- 
Ysax\NSN, 
: E.T., 
* tz. v. 
 
N, PETERS, PHOTO-LT-toGRAPHER, washingtoN, D.C. 
E WESTON, 
Electric-Light. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 210,380. 
Awe 2, 
 
 
Wyss's 
$o. 26.424, 
6. WSSY 
Velet 2certy 
alva el Z/ea 
N, PETERS, Photo-THOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC, 
H 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
EDWARD WESTON, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO WESTON 
DYNAMO-ELECTRIC MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN ELECTRC LIGHTS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 210,3S0, dated November 26, 1878; application filed 
November 4, 187S. 
CASE NO. 2. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD WESTON, of 
Newark, New Jersey, have invented certain 
Improvements in Apparatus for the Produc 
tion of Electric Light, of which the following 
is a specification: 
My improvements are of twofold character. 
They relate, first, to devices for introducing 
into the electric are a conducting-vapor, which, 
by lesselling the resistance between the points 
of the electrodes, affords an effectual means of 
retaining the arc in a prescribed path between 
the electrodes, and by its combustion increases 
the illuminating power of the arc; and, sec 
ondly, to the combination, with electric-light 
appalatlls in which the arc varies in position, 
of all automatic ignitel'. 
The first part of my invention consists in 
the application to, and consequent combina 
tion with, one or each of the electrodes of an 
electric lamp, candle, or torch, but preferably 
with the positive electrode only, of a cylinder 
or Stick of any material, which, although not 
placed between the electrodes, is capable of 
being slowly volatilized by the heat of the 
electric arc, and which, when volatilized, af. 
fords a vapor of better conductivity than the 
carbon particles, which vapor, by its combus 
tion, effects the illuminating qualities of the 
arc, and by its passage to the negative elec 
trode fixes and defines the path in which the 
are is maintained. 
may embody this invention in an electric 
torch composed of two stationary carbons or 
electrodes fixed in relatively parallel positions, 
and l'espectively connected with the opposite 
poles of a battery or other source of electric 
ity; and I may also embody it in the tilting 
electrode-lamp which forms the subject of my 
application for a patent filed September 28, 
1878, designated as Case No. 1, as will more 
fully appear from the subjoined description. 
The second part of my invention consists in 
the combination, with the electrodes of an 
electric lamp, candle, or torch, of an igniter, 
composed, preferably, of a stick of carbon, and 
made, by the action of gravity or a spring, 
when the arc is extinguished, to enter between 
the points of the electrodes, and by partially 
bridging the gap at that point to re-establish 
the arc, and thereupon, by the preponderating 
action upon it of an electro-magnet polarized 
in consequence of the re-establishment of the 
current, made to withdraw from proximity 
With the ends of the electrodes. 
The accompanying drawings, representing 
apparatus embodying my invention, are as 
follows: Figure is a side elevation of all elec 
tric torch provided with an automatically-op 
erating igniter. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of 
the Same. Fig. 3 is a top view. 
The apparatus shown in the drawings con 
sists of an electric torch composed of two sta 
tionary carbon sticks or electrodes, Athe posi 
tive electrode and B the negative electrode, 
insulated from each other, and supported in 
respectively parallel positions in suitable hold 
el's Ct. and b, properly affixed to the base G., 
and respectively connected with the opposite 
poles of a battery or other source of electricity 
by the line-Wires (t? and l'. Included in the 
circuit by proper connection with one of the 
line-wires is the helix of the electro-magnet C, 
which, when polarized, attracts the armature 
c, affixed radially to the hub D, pivoted in a 
post, d. Attached to the hub D are suitable 
jaws for holding the igniter E, which is a stick 
lmade of carbon or alny other suitable conduct 
ing material. When the electro-magnet is 
polarized the igniter-stick, it will be seen, is 
rocked backward away from the stationary 
electrodes, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
When the magnet is depolarized the lever ID 
is rocked in the opposite direction, and the 
igniter-stick E is tilted forward between the 
points of the stationary electrodes, as shown 
by the solid lines in Fig. 1, by the action 
of the spring e. When so tilted forward the 
igniter partially or wholly bridges the gap be 
tween the points of the stationary electrodes, 
and by diminishing the resistance causes the 
electric arc to be established at that point. 
The instant the electric arc is established the 
electro-magnet C becomes polarized, and, ex 
erting a force preponderating over that of the 
spring e, attracts the armature c, and hence 
tilts the igniter away from the points of the 
electrodes. So long as the are continues the 
electro-magnet remains polarized, and when 
the light is extinguished from any cause it is 
H 
2 
210,3so 
, 
immediately re-ignited by the tilting forward 
of the igniter in obedience to the action of the 
spring e. 
It will be seen that this part of my inven 
tion is applicable to that class of electric can 
dles in which the electrodes are placed paral 
lel to each other, and are separated by a fusi 
ble insulating material; and it will also be 
seen that by using only one stationary elec 
trode, and by substituting the other electrode 
in the place of the igniter, the apparatus is 
converted into an electric lamp. In the latter 
case one electrode-as, for example, the positive 
electrode A-is stationary, and is suitably con 
nected with the positive pole of a battery or 
other source of electricity, while the negative 
electrode is mounted in the jaws D of the 
rocking lever, and is provided with a connec 
tion with the negative pole of the battery by 
a wire which includes the helix of the electro 
magnet, as before. 
Those who are familiar with the subject will 
readily perceive that there are various ways 
in which the operation of the automatic igniter 
may be governed by the current other than 
that which I havechosen for illustration. Thus 
the functions of the electro-magnet and spring 
may be relatively reversed. The force of a 
spring or of gravity may be made to withdraw 
the igniter from proximity with the electrodes, 
and the force of an electro-magnet or electro 
helix may be employed to move the igniter up 
to the electrodes for the re-establishment of the 
arc when required. To effect this result the 
line-wires will be connected directly with the 
two electrode-holders, and the electrode-hold 
ers will be connected by a differential circuit 
containing the electro-magnet or electro-helix, 
and also containing a rheostat of suitably-pro 
portioned resistance. In this case the force of 
the electro-magnet will be insufficient to over 
come the force of the spring, excepting when, 
by the extinguishment of the arc, the entirecur 
rent is compelled to pass through the differ 
ential circuit. Instead of using an electro 
magnet, two helices or coils may be employed, 
one being fixed in position and the other being 
attached to the rocking arm of the igniter. In 
this case the action of a spring or of gravity 
is enlisted to move the igniterin one direction, 
and the force due to the polarization of the 
helices or coils tending to alter their positions 
relatively to each other acts upon the igniterin 
the direction opposite to that in which the 
spring acts. 
It will be seen, on reference to the drawings, 
that the positive electrode Aisprovided upon 
the side farthest from the negative electrode 
with the rod or stick F, which is cemented or 
otherwise secured in the longitudinal groovef 
formed in the side of the electrode. This rod 
or stick may be made of various materials-as, 
for example, of so-called lime glass, or of com 
pounds of infusible earths and metallic salts, 
silicates, double silicates, mixtures of the sili. 
cates with other salts of metals, fluorides, dou 
ble fluorides, mixtures of the double fluor. 
ides, fusible oxides, or combinations of the 
fusible oxides with the silicates, the require 
ments, so far as the material is concerned, be 
ing that it shall be capable of volatilization 
when placed on the outer side of the elec 
trode to which it is attached, and that its 
vapor shall be of greater conductivity than 
the vapor or particles of carbon disengaged 
from the carbon electrodes. The foreign ma 
terial added to the carbon may be incor 
porated into the electrode by being mixed 
with the carbon of which the electrode is com 
posed, or it may be introduced into a tubular 
carbon; but I have found it best to place it in 
a groove formed longitudinally in the side of 
the electrode, as shown. When the foreign 
material is applied to the positive electrode 
only the positive electrode is made of about 
twice the area in cross-section of the negative 
electrode. 
One of the essential features of this part of 
my invention, considered by itself, and with 
out reference to the igniter, consists in placing 
the stick F upon the side of the positive elec 
trode opposite to the side adjacent to the nega 
tive electrode; and the object of this arrange 
ment is to insure that the vapor generated 
from the material composing the stick F, by 
the heat of the electric arc, shall be obliged to 
pass over the upper end of the positive elec 
trode in order to reach the negative electrode, 
and hence that the path of least resistance 
shall be definitely fixed in a curved line the 
crown of which is slightly distant from the 
electrodes, so that the electrodes will burn 
evenly at their ends, and there will be no pos 
sibility of a change in the position of the are 
by which it shall be established otherwise than 
at the ends of the electrodes. 
So-called electric candles have heretofore 
been made with parallel electrodes which have 
been insulated from each other by having in 
troduced between and around them a fusible 
material, serving as a shield, which prevented 
the combustion of the carbon electrodes until, 
by the heat of the arc, such material was 
melted and cleared away from the points of 
the carbons, setting them free as the wick of 
a candle is set free when the wax of which it 
is composed is melted; and it has also hereto 
fore been proposed to incorporate into the in 
sulating material so employed certain sub 
stances which, by their combustion, would 
change the color or shade of the light, 
It will, of course, be seen that my igniter 
can be as readily employed with such candles 
as it can be with my electric torch, which dif. 
fers from the electric candles heretofore used, 
first, because, considered broadly, it consists 
in the combination, with one or both of the 
electrodes, of a material which, when vola 
tilized, affords a vapor of greater conductivity 
than the vapor of carbon; and, secondly, be 
cause the foreign material which I combine 
with my electrodes is placed on the outside of 
one or both of the electrodes, and not between 
them, being so placed for the purpose of main 
 
y 
20,3S0 
taining the arc in a curved path slightly dis 
tant from the points of the electrodes, as I 
have explained. This part of my invention 
greatly increases the steadiness of the light, 
and may be embodied in my electric torches, 
which are constructed of two stationary elec 
trodes in electric lamps in which one or both 
of the electrodes are movable, and especially 
in my tilting electrode-lamp. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an electric lamp or torch, the combi 
nation of one or each of the electrodes with a 
l'od or cylinder composed of lime glass or 
other material the vapor of which is combus 
tible, and is of greater conductivity than the 
Vapor of carbon, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. An electric torch composed of two sta 
tionary electrodes fixed in relatively parallel 
positions, and respectively connected with the 
opposite poles of a battery or other source of 
electricity, and having cemented or otherwise 
attached to the Outer side of one or each elec 
trode a rod or cylinder of lime glass or other 
material the vapor of which is combustible, 
and is of greater conductivity than the vapor 
of carbon, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. In combination with an electric lamp, 
candle, Ol' torch in which the position of the 
arc is varied by the combustion of the elec 
trodes, an automatic igniter composed of a 
movable conducting body, a spling, and an 
electro-magnet, the helix of which is included 
in the circuit which supplies the current for 
the arc, the Spring operating to move and hold 
the igniter against or between the points of 
the electrodes when the arc is extinguished, 
and the electro-magnet operating to move and 
hold the igniter away from the points of the 
electrodes when the arc is established, sub 
stalntially as described. 
4. In combination with the negative elec 
trode B, of an electric lamp or torch, the pos 
itive electrode A having twice the area of the 
negative electrode in cross-section, and being 
provided with the longitudinal groove?, in 
which is cemented or otherwise secured the 
stick F of lime glass or other material, as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
5. Broadly, in combination with an electric 
candle or torch in which the position of the 
arc is varied by the combustion of the elec 
trodes, a movable igniter having a variable 
range of motion automatically governed in 
its operation by the current, substantially as 
described. 
EDWARD WESTON, 
Witnesses: 
F. M. QUIMBY, 
W. L. STEVENS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210480.txt	No. 210,480. 
 
S. W. ADAMS, 
Perambulating Toy, 
Patented Dec. 3, 1878. 
Wetz esses, 
: K %26.----f 
- 
- 
Avive/2/07 
SWA-ares. 
A?84 fee-ey 47 
N. PSTERS, Photo-THocRAPHER, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICH. 
SAMUEL W. A. DAMS, OF BOST ON, MASS ACHUSETTS. 
MPROVEMENT IN PERAM BULATING TOYS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 210,4s0, dated December 3, 1878; application filed 
October 7, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL W. ADAMS, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, haveinvented certain Improve 
ments in Perambulating Toys, of which the 
following is a specification: 
This invention is a perambulating toy for 
the amusement of children, and represents a 
child jumping Tope and mounted upon a per 
ambulator, which is to be drawn about the 
floor or ground, the rotations of the axle of 
the perambulator effecting the jumping move 
ments of the child and the swinging of the 
rope, as hereinafter explained. 
The drawings accompanying this specifica 
tion represent in Figure 1 a front elevation, 
in Fig. 2 a vertical section, and in Fig. 3 a. 
vertical cross-section, of a toy embodying my 
invention. 
In these drawings, Arepresents the perambu 
lator, which supports the child, the same being 
composed of a platform or base, A', mounted 
upon an axle, B, and wheels C C, two upright 
standards, D D, arranged parallel with the 
axle B, and two steadying-wheels, E. E., ar 
ranged midway between and in front and in 
rear of the wheels C C, and pivoted to arms 
FF, extending from the base A, these steady 
ing-wheels being so arranged that but one can 
touch the floor at a time, and the perambula 
tor being balanced as nearly as possible upon 
its axle B. 
The purpose of the wheels E E is not only 
to maintain the perambulator in an upright 
position, but prevent its being upset, when 
turned rapidly in a circle. 
I do not limit myself to the particular coln 
struction of the perambulator as above de 
scribed, as such construction may be varied 
without losing sight of my invention, which I 
consider to consistin a miniature child moulnted 
upon a suitable wheeled support, and provided 
with mechanism to cause it to jump up and 
down and to Swing a counterfeit l'ope. 
Within bearings (, a in the upper part of the 
standards D D, I mount a horizontal shaft, G, 
the central part of which is provided with a 
crank or eccentric, H, which extends into a 
horizontal passage formed through the upper 
part of the body or chest of the child, which 
is shown at K, the effect of the rotations of 
the shaft as transmitted through the eccentric 
or its equivalent being to cause up and down 
or jumping motions of the child. 
Upon each side of the child I affix to the 
shaft G one end of a bent wire, J, which is to 
represent the rope which the child is to jump 
or skip; and I prefer to fashion the portions 
of the shaft upon each side of the child into 
the representation of an arm and hand, to pre 
sent a more life-like appearance. 
The rope may be entirely or in part of metal, 
or of any suitable material which will swing 
readily by and with the rotations of the shaft, 
and is to be of such size and shape alnd so 
applied with respect to the eccentric Has to 
swing beneath the feet of the child as the lat 
ter rises above the base A'. 
Other means than an eccentric or crank may 
be employed to effect the jumping motions of 
the child; but the eccentric is a cheap, effective, 
and durable means of accomplishing the de 
sired results. 
To effect the desired rotations of the shaft 
G, I proceed, in the present instance, as fol 
lows: To each end of the axle B, as it protrudes 
outside of the wheel, or to the hub of each 
wheel, as the case may be, I secure one end of 
a wire helix, or other suitable flexible tube or 
rod, b, and to the opposite end of such tubes 
or rods connect the lower end of an upright 
rod, c, the upper end of each of such rods be 
ing in turn secured to the lower end of one of 
a second pair of flexible tubes or rods at did, 
the upper ends of which latter are secured to 
the adjacent ends of the shaft G, thus com 
pleting a continuous shaft disposed in the form 
of a square, and so arranged that rotations of 
the axle B impart corresponding rotations to 
the shaft, G, and consequent swinging move 
ments of the rope and jumping motions of the 
child. 
I do not confine myself to the use of flexible 
connections between the axle B, shaft G, and 
rods c c, as bevel-gears or other devices may 
be employed to transmit the rotations of the 
axle to the shaft; but a flexible connection is 
noiseless and effective, and is readily applied 
and removed. 
As the toy, made as above described, is 
trundled along the floor, the rotations of the 
shaft effect alternating rising and falling or 
 
2 
20,4SC) 
of the axle are transmitted to such suspensory 
to effect rising and falling or jumping motions 
of said child and swinging movements of the 
rope, substantially as and for purposes stated. 
3. The combination, with the perambulator 
A and child K, of the continuous shaft.com. 
posed of the axle B, shaft G, and flexible con 
nections bb and did, substantially as and for 
purposes stated. 
4. The combination of the perambulator, ec. 
centric, shaft, child, and rope with suitable 
means of transmitting the motions of the axle 
to the shaft, substantially as and for the pur. 
pOSes Stated. 
5. A toy composed of a perambulator, a 
child Suspended from and swinging upon it, 
and a rope describing circular sweeps about 
the child, Substantially as and for purposes 
Stated. 
SAM. W. ADAMS. 
Witnesses: 
F.CURTIs, 
LOUISA (CURTIS. 
jumping movements of the child and swinging 
movements of the rope, which presents a life 
like representation of a child in the act of 
jumping or skipping rope. 
My toy is very popular, and can be furnished 
at Small cost. 
I claim-- 
1. A toy composed of a perambulating car 
riage, which constitutes the support of the 
doll or counterfeit, child, a doll or representa 
tive child suspended from or upon such car 
riage, and a suitable connection between the 
axle of the carriage and the suspensory of the 
child, whereby the rotations of the axle are 
transmitted to such suspensory to effect rising 
and falling or jumping motions of said child, 
Substantially as and for purposes stated. 
2. A toy Composed of a perambulating car 
liage, which constitutes the support of the 
counterfeit child, a doll or child suspended 
from or upon such carriage, a suitable con 
lection between the axle of the carriage and 
| 
suspensory of the child, whereby the rotations 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210580.txt	H. A. TURNER, 
Churn-Motor, 
No. 210,58O. 
Patented Dec. 3, 1878. 
 
 
 
 
mini Ha 
-Z 
Till 
"criting Buses: 
 
WTNESSES 
 
NVENTO 
2.2%a. 
ATTORNEY 
Ni Peters, photo-LithoaRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARDAWAY A. TURNER, OF BEDFORD COUNTY, VIRGINIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CHURN-MotoRs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 210,5S0, dated December 3, 1878; application filed 
May 25, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HARDAWAY AMBROSE 
TURNER, of the county of Bedford and State 
of Virginia, have invented a new and valua 
ble Improvement in Churn-Motors; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the construc 
tion and operation of the same, reference be 
ing had to the annexed drawings, making a 
part of this specification, and to the letters 
and figures of reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a top view of my improved churn-motor. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical section there 
of, and Fig. 3 shows detail views of the fly. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in wheel-train motors for churns. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
means whereby the speed of the stroke of the 
dash-rod may be regulated at pleasure with 
out using brakes or other like devices, which 
by their friction tend materially to wear out 
the journals of the train-wheels. 
The nature of the invention consists in the 
combination, With a churn and its actuating 
clock-train, of the fly having blades, and ex 
tension-Wings having guideways upon their 
lateral edges, formed by turning the edges of 
the said Wings upward and over, and adapted 
to receive the fly-blades and the adjusting 
screws, as will be hereinatter described. 
In the annexed drawings, the letter A des. 
ignates a casing, containing a train of wheels, 
B, actuated by a spring in the barrel C. Upon 
the axle of the last wheel of the train is keyed 
a crank-wheel, D, having a wrist-pin, ct, to 
which is attached one end of a pitman, J, the 
other end of which is secured pivotally to the 
power end of a vertically-vibrating lever, K, 
having its fulcrum in a hanger, b, depending 
from the casing. This latter is raised upon 
legs c, and the churn L is placed under it di 
rectly beneath the weight end of the lever K. 
The dash-rod is pivoted to the power end 
. 
of said lever, which latter is guided and pre 
vented from wabbling by means of a forked 
metallic guide, G, depending from the case 
and straddling the same. The spring is wound 
up, in the usual way, by a key or Wrench, and 
through the mechanism aforesaid imparts a 
Vertically-reciprocating motion to the dash 
rod. This movement should be more or less 
rapid, according to the quantity of cream in 
the churn and other circumstances. 
This speed-adjustment is attained as follows: 
The blades c of the fly L'are each provided with 
an extension, d, having on its lateral edges 
ways i, between which the said blades c are 
snugly received. The wings d slide endwise 
toward or from the axis of the fly, thereby 
lessening or increasing the beating-surface of 
the blades, and consequently lessening or in 
creasing the speed of the stroke of the dash 
rod. The wings d are adjusted to the blades 
by means of a set-screw, s. 
I am aware that extensible fan-wingslapped 
upon each other, and secured to the crank 
shaft of a churn power driving mechanism by 
means of slots and clamp-screws, is not new, 
and I make no claim to such devices. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with a churn and its actu 
ating clock-train, of the fly Li, having blades 
c, the extension-wings d, having guideways i 
upon their lateral edges, formed by turning 
the edges of the said Wings upward and over, 
and adapted to receive the fly-blades c, and 
the adjusting-screws s, substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
w 
H. A. TURNER. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK. J. MASI, 
WALTER, C. MASI. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210680.txt	G. L., ELLIOTT. 
Paddle-Wheel. 
Patented Dec. 10, 1878. 
No. 21 O,680. 
WITNESSES: 
 
-64%-vely 
NVENTOR: 
BY Mull--- 
ATORNEYS, 
it, pstERS, Proto-Liticcitapher, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE: L. E LLIOTT, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MPROVEMENT IN 
PADD LE-WHEELS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 210,6s0, dated December 10, 1878; application filed 
November 
12, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE L, ELLIOTT, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
lhave invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Paddle-Wheels, of which the following is a 
specification: 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of one of my 
improved paddle-wheels, taken through the 
line 2, 31, Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of 
the same, taken through the line aca, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to furnishim 
proved paddle-wheels, the paddles of which 
shall be so constructed as to diminish the ve 
locity of the middle portion of the current of 
Water set in motion by the paddles, in order 
that the remaining portion of the said water 
may be made efficient, so that the combined 
action of the different parts of the paddles 
upon the Water may be more effective for the 
propulsion of the boat. 
The invention consists in improved paddle 
wheels in which the paddles are made in the 
form of rectangular parallelograms, and are 
provided with elliptical apertures through 
their middle parts, of such a size that their 
areas may be from one-fourth to one-third the 
area of the said paddles, and in such posi 
tions that their centers may be in the centers 
of the paddles, and their transverse and con 
jugate axes may be respectively parallel with 
the side and end edges of the said paddles, as 
hereinafter fully described. 
A represents the frame-work of a paddle 
wheel, about the construction of which there 
is nothing new. B are the paddles, which are 
made in the form of rectangular parallelo 
grams, and are attached to the frame Ain ra 
dial positions in the usual way. The width 
of the paddles B should be from one-fourth to 
one-third their length, and they should bear 
ranged with their inner edges parallel with 
the axis of the wheel, and at such a distance 
from the said axis that they will be entirely 
Submerged when at the lowest part of their 
Stroke. 
Through the middle part of each paddle B 
is formed an elliptical aperture, C, of such a 
size that its area may be from one-fourth to 
one-third the area of the entire paddle. 
The ellipse C should be so placed that its 
center should coincide with the center of the 
paddle B, and that its transverse and conjil 
gate axes may be parallel with the side and 
end edges, respectively, of the paddle B, and 
the length of the transverse and conjugate 
axes should be in proportion to the length and 
width of the paddle. 
The shape and size of the paddles and their 
apertures should be uniform upon any given 
pair of wheels. 
Paddles B constructed in this way would 
concentrate instead of dispersing the water 
acted upon by them by allowing a compara 
tively small quantity of the water to escape 
through the apertures C, instead of a larger 
quantity around their ends, by drawing in the 
water evenly from all sides toward the aper 
tures C. 
Each paddle B may be made in one piece or 
in two pieces, as may be desired or conven 
ient. In the latter case the two pieces should 
be so jointed together as to leave no slip or 
opening between them, except the aperture C. 
alm aware that the boards of paddle-wheels 
have been provided with perforations through 
out their entire surface; but such wheels could 
not accomplish the result desired-viz., the 
concentration of the water to the center of the 
paddle-board, and the diminishing of the ve 
locity of the middle portion of the current of 
Water set in motion by the paddles. The holes 
being central and elliptical permit the great 
est amount of water to pass through the said 
openings at the center of the paddle, the quan 
tity gradually decreasing toward the ends and 
sides. It will thus be seen that by providing 
the boards with such holes the velocity of the 
water will be diminished more at the middle 
than at any other part, and the Water concell 
trated to the center of the paddle, thereby en 
abling the paddles to act more effectually on 
the Water. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent Improved paddle-wheels in which the pad 
2 
w 
20,680 
dles B are made in the form of rectangular respectively parallel with the side and end 
parallelograms, and are provided with ellip- edges of the said paddles, substantially as 
tical apertures C through their middle parts, herein shown and described. 
of such a size that their areas may be from 
one-fourth to one-third the area of the said 
paddles, and in such positions that their cen- 
ters may be in the centers of the paddles and 
their transverse and conjugate axes may be 
JAMEST. GRAHAM, 
C. SEDGWICK, 
GEORGEL, ELLIOTT. 
- 
^ 
r 
w 
Witnesses: 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210780.txt	J. W. HYATT 
Piano-Key, 
No. 21 O,78 O. 
Patented Dec. 10, 1878, 
 
=ITTF =T-17 
4-1. 
2-2 
-1-1-1 
-1-1-1 
1 - 
1. 
1); fazesses, 
624.22222. 
CW732ca2-4./-. 
- 
722zzzzy 
24-2A-2422z 
7& 4- 
P 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. HYATT, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE CELLULOID 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MPROVEMENT IN PANO - KEYS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2 10,750, dated December 10, 187S; application filed 
May 31, 1878. 
To all chon, it inct) concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN W. HYATT, of 
the city of Newark, in the county of Essex 
and State of New Jersey, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in the Manufac 
ture of Piano-Keys, of which the following is 
a specification, reference being lad to the ac 
companying drawings. 
The invention relates to an improved key 
board for pianos, organs, and other analogous 
instruments; and consists in covering a suita 
ble key-board blank on its exposed upper Sur 
face and edge with a sheet or scroll of some 
plastic composition, which is cemented or 
otherwise caused to adhere to the surfaces 
whereon it is desired. After being thus 
coated, the blank is sawed or otherwise sev 
ered into Sections, each one of which consti 
tutes a covered key. 
In this manner it is plain that at a single 
operation an entire key-board can be covered, 
from which when severed the keys are formed. 
in this mainer the old and tedious operation 
of coveling each key separately after it has 
been formed is elntirely obviated. 
Referril)g to the accompanying du'awings, 
Figure i lepresents a delspective view of a 
key-board blank covered with plastic compo 
sition at the arts whereon the ordinary fac 
ing is lisually laid. Fig. 2 lepresents a group 
of the keys cut out of the covered blank. 
Fig. 3 represents a single key covered with 
the lastic composition or facilg. 
in the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents a key-board blank, composed of wood 
or any other suitable material, of the size and 
contoul required to fol'in the number of keys 
of the dimensions required. Over the upper 
surface and outer edge of this blank, and ce 
inented or otherwise Seculed thereto ill a suit 
able mannel', is provided a thin sheet or scroll, 
B, of plastic composition. So far as known, 
the natelial termed  celluloid' is the best 
adapted to the purpose of covering the blank, 
though it is piain that other materials of a 
plastic nature may alswer. The covering of 
the blank with the sheet of composition or 
material completes the first essential step to 
wald the production of the invention. 
The next operation is to sever the blank 
into sections of the desired size to form the 
keys D. 
Now, as the scroli B adheres very closely to 
the board A, it is plain that at every opera 
tion of the severing device a complete covered 
key is removed from the board, and that in 
this manner the keys may be very rapidly 
and economically produced. 
In securing the scroll upon the blank or 
board, care should be exercised to see that it 
is firmly cemented at every place thereto, in 
order that it may not be torn off or otherwise 
displaced in the operation of cutting out the 
lkey'S. 
Celluloid has been found to be admirably 
adapted to selve for a covering, as it call be 
readily and smoothly cut, is susceptible of a 
vely high polish, is very agreeable to the 
touch, and if any ornamentation is desired 
upon the surface or edges of the keys it is 
only necessary to Walm the celluloid, and by 
meals of suitably-shaped dies or instruments 
impress the desired design, which is retained 
upon the key, as the composition hardens upon 
becoming cold. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a blank 
key-board covered with a continuous strip or 
roll of plastic composition, substantially as 
specified. 
2. The within-described process of forming 
piano or analogous keys, which consists in 
covering a key-board blank with a strip of 
plastic material, and then cutting out each 
key from the coated blank, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony that i claim the foregoing in 
provement in the manufacture of piano-keys, 
as above described, I have hereuinto set my 
hand this 20th day of May, 187S, 
JOHN W. HYATT. 
Witnesses: 
ABRAHANIMANNERS, 
HARRY COX. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210880.txt	J. ROWE, Jr., & J. S. KNIGHT. 
Beer-Faucet, 
No. 21 O,88O. 
Patented Dec. 17, 1878. 
A. 
y 
avaMVMVVAM 
NSSSSS2s2S2S2S 
WM SSS 
C O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
WITNESSEs. 
\) \\\\} as 
7 
M 
2, 
234 22 
224 % N. 
NSWSNy 
24%2NY 
N.VENTORS 
25, 2. Zzy a 4ty. 
PETSRS, PHoro-LTHcGRAPHER, washingren, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICH. 
JOHN ROWE, JR., AND JOHN S. KNIGHT, OF ROCKPORT, MASS.ACHUSETTS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BEER-FAUCETs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 210,sso, dated December 17, 1878; application filed 
November 18, 1878. 
- 
Be it known that we, JoHN ROWE, Jr., and use, the cylinder B being first removed. 
ing transported, or when the faucet is not in 
To all chom it may concern: 
The operation of our invention is as follows: 
JOHN S. KNIGHT, both of Rockport, Massa 
The cylinder A is to be placed in the cask when 
chusetts, have invented a certain. Improved 
empty, and closed by the head . The spring 
Beer-Faucet, of which the following is a speci 
h presses against the disk g and the spheref 
fication: 
and holds the sphere firmly against the pro 
Ourinvention relates to faucets for casks con 
taining beer or other effervescing liquors where jection i, and the sphere thus completely closes 
up the holes 222 and the passage between the 
it would be difficult to insert an ordinary fau 
chambers c and e, and prevents the escape of 
cet without the loss of a portion of the contents. 
any of the contents of the cask. 
The leading features of our invention are a 
When it is desired to draw from the cask, 
cylinder of suitable size, ordinarily about five 
the head is to be unscrewed, and the cylinderl3 
inches in length and one and one-half inch in 
is to be screwed into the chamber 6 of the cyl 
liameter, divided into two chambers, separated 
inder A. When it is completely screwed in, so 
from each other, however, only by a projection 
that the washer t presses against the end of 
of, say, one-eighth of an inch in width; a rub 
the cylinder A, the inner end of the cylinder 
ber ball or valve, held in place by means of a 
B will have pushed back the sphere f beyond 
spring, and preventing the passage of the con 
the holes 222, through which the beer or other 
tents of the cask when the faucet is notin use; 
liquor in the cask will at once flow, and thence 
and a smaller cylinder of suitable length, as 
through the holes 333 into the cylinder B, 
will be explained below, screwing into the 
from whence it may be drawn off through a 
larger cylinder. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents the 
spigot screwed on at 12. 
The faucet above described may be made of 
larger cylinder A.; Fig. 2, the smaller cylinder 
iron or brass, or any other suitable material, 
B, and Fig. 3 a longitudinal section of the 
and the spheref, instead of being made of 
whole faucet when in use. 
rubber, may be made of any other elastic ma 
e is the outer chamber, fitted with a screw 
terial. 
thread, into which the smaller cylinder B 
We are aware that it is not new in a beer 
screws. e is the inner chamber, perforated 
faucet to use a valve shut, when not in use, by 
with holes 111222 for the passage of the beer. 
a spring, to be pushed back or opened by the 
f is the rubber sphere acting as a valve. g is a 
action of a screw when in use; but the valve 
disk fitting against the spheref. h. is a spring 
heretofore used for that purpose is fixed at one 
pressing against the diskg, placed between the 
side, and, in consequence, hops or other solid 
spring and the splieref, the office of the disk 
substances are liable to be lodged around the 
being to furnish a suitable bearing for the 
place where it is fastened to the faucet, and 
spring h, and the office of the spring to press 
thus the valve will frequently not shut tightly, 
the sphere firmly against the projection i, and 
works imperfectly, and permits the escape of 
thus to close the passage between the cham 
the beer. The use of the rubber sphere as a 
bers c and e when the faucet is not in use. i 
valve obviates this difficulty, and entirely pre 
is a head, which may be unscrewed, so as to 
vents the escape of any liquid when it is not 
permit the removal of the spring, disk, and 
forced back by the action of the cylinder B. 
sphere, if desirable. k is a washer with a pro 
Moreover, the cylinder B performs a different 
jection, e, for convenience of unscrewing the 
office from the part used in the faucet men 
cylinder. )) is a screw-thread for putting on 
tioned for opening the valve, in that while the 
a Spigot. 
part B performs that office it also acts as a 
The length of the cylinder B should be such 
conductor of the beer, which flows into it 
that when screwed into the cylinder A the in 
through the holes 333, to the spigot attached 
her extremity of it will push the sphere f be 
to it, which is a feature of great utility. 
low the holes 222. 
What we claim, and desire to secure by Let 
in is a head, which may be screwed into the 
ters Patent, is 
cylinder A when the barrel containing it is be 
 
2 
- 
20, SS0 
1. In a beer-faucet, the cylinder A, with 
screw-threaded front portion and perforated 
smooth portion, constructed with separate 
chambers e c, shoulders i, and screw-capsin, 
and provided with spring h, disk or follower 
g, and elastic ball-valvef, all substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
2. In a beer-faucet, in combination with the 
perforated cylinder A, constructed with sepa 
rate chambers e c and shoulder i, and provided 
with screw-headi, spring h, disk (), and elastic 
ball-valve?, the independent perforated cylin 
der B, constructed with screw-threaded end nt, 
nut k, washer l, and cup-shaped head, which, 
when the cylinder is in place within the cylin 
der A, abuts against and holds the ball-valve 
back from its seat, all substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
JOHN ROWE, JR. 
JOHN S. KNIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN PIERCE, 
ALFRED PARSONS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US210980.txt	W. M. WILL OUGHBY. 
Bed-BOttom. 
No. 21 O,98O. 
Patented Dec. 17, 1878. 
 
ass 
3. 
t 
s 
e 
2 
R. Peters, Piore-lthccRRPher, WASHINGior. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. WILLOUGHBY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MPROVEMENT IN BED - BOO V. S. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 210,9SO, dated December 17, 1878; application filed 
February 2, 1878. 
To all chom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. M. WIL 
LOUGHBY, of the city of Philadelphia, and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in the Construction 
of Spring-Beds, of which the following is a 
specification: 
It consists, first, of two or more series of 
hinged plates, forming chains for the support 
of the bed-slats, some of said plates being 
provided with hooks, to which are attached 
spiral springs, which form the elastic bearings 
of the bed-bottom. 
It consists, secondly, of certain arms, here 
inafter to be described, secured to beams of 
the bed-bottom, which, in connection with ad 
justable straps attached thereto, and to the 
hooks of the outside plates of the chains, serve 
to hold the spiral springs to the required ten 
sion, and to keep the bottom steady in its 
hovement. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation of my bed-bottom. Fig. 2 is an end 
elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view, exhibiting the principal features in my 
device. 
Similar reference-letters indicate like parts 
in all of the figures. 
Referring to drawings, A is a beam, which 
rests upon the rails of a bedstead, having at 
tached to it, by screw bolts and nuts b, stap 
ports (t, which extend upward from said beam, 
and are connected at the top and intermedi 
ately by bars at 
t. These supports are fixed 
on the ends of each beam, to be used in con 
nection with straps, hereinafter to be described. 
The slats C are united and held together by 
hinged plates D D D, to which they are at 
tached by screws and nuts d. The hinged 
plates DD ID are formed to fit the one into 
the other, after the manner of a strap-hinge, 
being secured by pins f. The plates D have 
Secured to them hooks F, over which may be 
slipped the upper ends of the spiral springs 
G. The plates D, forming the ends of the 
chain of hinged plates, are provided with ad 
ditional hooks E, over which are secured the 
straps B. These straps are of leather or other 
suitable flexible material, provided with or 
dinary buckles, by which they may be adjusted. 
They are looped to the bar at of the supports 
a, and bear upon the bar ct, to hold the slats 
in position and increase or decrease the ten 
sion of the springs G. The springs G, which 
are made of wire of varying thickness and 
strength, to bear a greater or less weight, are 
coiled in different directions alternately, so 
that in yielding to vertical pressure they may 
be caused to approach and brace each other, 
to give firmness and strength to the structure. 
Said springs are secured at their bottoms to 
the beams A, by staples or other known de 
vices for the purpose. To prevent clashing 
together, these springs are stayed by cords, 
which unite them and prevent their ends from 
striking together. 
The slats in my bed-bottom are not unlike 
those in general use, and extend at right an 
gles across the several chains of hinged plates, 
described, and to which they are attached. 
In ordinary spring-beds, the top of the 
spring, not being properly fastened, frequently 
becomes loose and tears the mattress. In my 
improvement the top spiral of the spring is 
fastened by a peculiar turn arould the pin of 
the hinge-joint, and is kept in place by a metal 
block fastened by nut and bolt, thereby mak 
ing it immovable, unless by removing the 
metal block which is beveled to hold the pin. 
The great objection to the use of spring 
beds in the past has been the want of uni 
formity in the yielding of the slats to the 
pressure of the weight of the body. Where 
webbing is employed to support the slats and 
each slat is nailed to the webbing, the body of 
the sleeper forces the slats on which it rests 
downward, leaving the others elevated, caus 
ing a sensation similar to resting on two rails, 
which is felt even through the mattress. The 
webbing becomes looser from stretching every 
day, and finally breaks, and, besides, becomes 
a ready breeding-place for vermin. Where 
the slats are supported by straight pieces run 
ning across the bed, the elasticity of the bed 
is lost, and it becomes stiff and rigid. 
In my improvement I place upon each slat 
a metal joint, with projecting arms or joints, 
which fit into flanges on the other joint on the 
next slat, which are joined by a pin, making 
thus a connecting hinge-joint between each 
 
210,9S0 
slat, and thereby giving equal tension or elas 
ticity to the whole surface on which the mat 
treSS rests. 
What I claim is 
1. In a bed-bottom, the hinged plates D D 
D, provided with arms extending at right an 
gles to the lines of the chains, to which arms 
the slats C are attached, in combination with 
Springs G, attached to hooks F, secured to 
plates D D, as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The plates D', with hooks F attached, in 
combination with springs G and beams A, as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In combination with beam A, the arms at 
and adjustable straps B, attached to hooks 
formed on plates D, as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
- 
W. M. WILLOUGHBY. 
Witnesses: 
m 
ROBT. H. HINCKLEY, Jr., 
JOS. DE F. JUNRIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211080.txt	No. 211,080 
E, D, ANDREWS 
Barrel-Truck 
Patented Jan. 7, 1879. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ELVIN D. ANDREWS, OF STERLING, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-EALF HIS RGET TO 
JOHN B. RALPH, OF ROCK FALLS, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BARREL-TRUCKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2110 SO, dated January 7, 1879; application filed 
October 22, 1878. 
: 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELVIN D. ANDREWs, of 
Sterling, in the county of Whiteside and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Barrel-Carts; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference: 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to that class of barrel 
carts in which the barrel is held in a perpen 
dicular position in a frame, and suspended 
therein between the wheels of the cart. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my invention. Fig. 2 is a view of the 
Spindle and its arm detached. 
A A' are two semicircular parts, which, in 
connection with the arms of the spindles, form 
a complete circle, in which the barrel or tub 
is placed. 
B is a spindle, having an arm, b, with the 
slots c therein, which arm is provided on its 
inner curved surface with flanges a. 
CC are the handles by which the cart is 
drawn, and D is a lateral brace bolted at each 
of its ends to the inside of said handles, and 
to the center of the semicircle A. The han 
dles CC are bolted to the semicircle A at 8 
with one or more bolts, and are firmly braced 
laterally by the brace D, which is bolted to 
the semicircle A at t. 
The semicircles A A' are adjusted so as to 
form any circle of the desired size by means 
of the slots c, screw-bolts l, and nuts i. When 
it is desirable to contract or enlarge the circle 
the nuts i are loosened by means of a Wrench 
and the semicircles moved closer together Or 
farther apart, being governed in such move 
ment by the flanges a. 
Another method of adjusting the circle to 
the size of the barrel or tub desired to be used 
is by providing the ends of the semicircles 
with a series of holes corresponding with a 
second series of holes in the arms b of the 
spindle B, and fastening the said semicircles 
and spindles rigidly together by means of two 
or more thread-bolts and nuts in each end of 
each semicircle. 
By attaching the handles to the semicircle 
A? at e, and by means of the lateral brace D, 
bolted as described, great strength and dura 
bility are given to my invention, and the cross 
ing of the handles at f, as shown, renders the 
tipping of the cart backward easy with one 
hand, and without strain to any of its parts. 
My invention is used principally for convey 
ing, in a cask, barrel, or tub, slops, feed, or 
water from one place to another, for the pur 
pose of feeding or watering stock, and by at 
taching a hose to the bottom of the cask or 
barrel my invention may be used to carry Wa 
ter and sprinkle the garden or lawn. 
The advantages of my invention consist in 
its lightness, cheapness, and durability, and 
especially in its susceptibility of adjustment 
to suit the size of the barrel to be used. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The spindle B, having the arms b, slots 
c, and flanges a, substantially as shown and 
2. The handles C, brace D, semicircles A. 
and A', and spindles B, substantially as shown, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a barrel-cart, the combination of the 
semicircles A A', spindles B, having the arms 
b, slots c, and flanges ac, and the handles CC, 
brace D, bolts l, and nuts i, all arranged sub 
stantially as shown, and for the purpose speci 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
described. 
fied. 
EL WIND, ANDREWS, 
- 
a. 
Witnesses : 
SETH LOYD, 
W. SCOTT WARD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211180.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALCIDE. F. POIRRIER, DANIEL A. ROSENSTIEHL, AND ZACHARIE ROUSSIN, 
OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN COLORS FROM CRUDE NAPHTHYAMINE. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 211, S0, dated January 7, 1879; application filed 
November 19, 1878. 
Whichever method of proceeding may be em 
ployed, a series of coloring-matters are pro 
duced. 
The coloring-matters thus produced are sus 
ceptible of further transformation by the action 
of heat, particularly with the concurrence of 
Water and of an alkali, or of an alkaline salt, 
and new and different coloring-matters are ob 
tained. Of the latter we would specially re 
fer to that obtained with the beta-naphthol. 
This matter dies wool a very intense red, 
well calculated to replace orseille in its ap 
plications. 
Having thus fully described our said inven 
tion, and the manner in which the same is or 
may be carried into effect, what we claim, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The new coloring matter or matters ob. 
tained from phtalamine, substantially as here 
in shown and set forth. 
2. The method herein described of produc 
ing coloring-matters by the action of the sulfo 
conjugated diazoic derivatives of phtalamine 
upon the phenols and amines or by the modi 
fications herein shown and set forth. 
3. The coloring-matters produced by the 
transformation of the coloring-matter before 
described by means of heat, with or without 
the addition of alkaline salt and water, sub 
stantially as shown and set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification before two subscrib 
ing Witnesses. 
- 
m 
A. POIRRIER, 
A. ROSENSTIEHL. 
Z, ROUSSIN. 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. M. HoOPER, 
J. ARMENGAUD, Jeune. 
To all whom it may concern, 
Be it known that we, ALCIDE FRANCOIS 
POIRRIER, manufacturing chemist, IDANIEL 
AUGUSTE ROSENSTLEEIL, chemist, and ZACH 
ARIE ROUSSIN, chemist, all of Paris, in the 
Republic of France, have invented certain new 
Coloring-Matter Derived from Phtalamine; 
and we hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same. 
We call phtalamine an alkaloid, which ac 
companies crude naphthylamine, and predomi 
nates particularly in the liquid products which 
impregnate it. It is distinguished from the 
naphthylamine by its sulfo-conjugated deriva 
tive, which is soluble in water, whereas under 
like conditions the naphthionic acid is not sol 
uble in water. In giving this definition, we 
do not wish to be understood as determining 
the question whether or not this body is iden 
tical with that of the same name discovered 
by Messrs. Schtitzenberger and Willm, in 1859, 
in crude naphthylamine. 
We obtain a series of coloring-mattrs by 
starting with the phtalamine, from which we 
make the sulfo-conjugated derivatives, then, by 
means of nitrous acid, the diazoic derivatives, 
following in so doing the processes or methods 
Well known to chemists. This sulfo-conjugated 
diazoic derivative will unite or combine di 
rectly with the phenols and the amines of all 
sorts to give birth to a series of new coloring 
matterS. 
We desire to have it understood that, in 
stead of sulfo - conjugating the phtalamine, 
its diazoic derivative can be prepared directly 
and combined with the sulfo-conjugated phe 
mols and the amines. Or the diazoic deriva 
tive may be made to act upon the phenols and 
the amines of every kind. The resulting col 
oring-matter may then be sulfo - conjugated. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211280.txt	A. WON LOEHR, 
Self-Winding Watch. 
No. 211,280. 
Patented Jan. 7, 1879. 
 
A2.5. 
UNITED STATES PATENT CHCH 
AUGUST VON LOEHR, OF VIENNA, AUSTRIA. 
MPROVEMENT IN SELF-WNDING WATCHES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21, 2s 0, dated January 7, 1879; application filed 
July 13, 187S. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that J. AUGUST VON LOEHR, 
of Vienna, in the Empire of Austria, have in 
vented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Watches, of which the following is a speci 
fication : 
In a pocket-watch constructed according to 
the present invention, a vibrating pendulum 
or weight is so hung that when it is put in ac 
tion by the shaking produced by the walking 
or other motion of the body of the wearer it 
will will up the main Watch-spring by means 
of an elastic pawl acting on a ratchet-wheel 
connected by a train of wheels and pinions 
to the said mail spring, and will do this in 
Such a Way that no special arrangements for 
preventing overwinding will be required. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1 
and 2 show two modifications of the present 
invention, and Fig. 3 shows how the rotation 
of the ratchet-wheel is transmitted by inter 
mediate gearing to the mainspring. 
The pendulum or weight at is so arranged 
that When the Watch is hung vertically and 
the Wearer of it is walking, the said pendu 
lum or weight will swing down by its own 
Weight, and up by the counter-pressure of the 
spring, b or l', connected to it. 
A pawl, c, engages in a ratchet-wheel, hav. 
ing preferably very fine teeth, and each time 
the pendulum a vibrates it will, by means of 
the said spring 0 engaging in the teeth of the 
ratchet-wheeld, drive the ratchet-wheel partly 
around. A second pawl, e, prevents the 
latchet-wheel from returning. 
In order to obviate the danger of over Wind 
ing the mainspring, the vibrating pendulum or 
Weight is preferably made not too heavy, and 
the toothing of the ratchet-wheel, as well as 
the gearing of the train of wheels, is prefer 
ably arranged so that, although a large num 
ber of vibrations of the pendulum will be re 
quired, only little power will be necessary for 
automatically winding up the watch. But an 
especial feature of this invention is, that the 
pawl c is made elastic, in order, by this elas 
ticity, to take up any strain arising from any 
tendency of the pendulum to vibrate after the 
mainspiring has been fully wound up. This 
elasticity may be obtained either by the said 
pawl being made of a fine spring, as shown 
in Fig. 1, or by its being arranged with one 
end pressing against a spring, c', as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
Instead of the flat spring, a spiral spring or 
other elastic equivalent may be used. 
Instead of hanging the pendulum a on a 
pivot, f, as shown ill Fig. 1, it may be hung 
directly to the spring l', as shown in Fig. 2. 
For setting the hands of the watch, a disk, 
(, may be fixed to the stem of the hands, and 
the Setting effected by pressing a finger on the 
said disk and turning the same as required. 
The stops l l serve to limit the distance 
traversed by the swinging pendulum. 
The hook i serves to hang the Watch from 
the side of the pocket, and so insure the ver'. 
tical position of the Watch. When hung in use. 
The ratchet-wheel may be provided with 
about one hundred and fifty teeth, alld the 
gearing may be so arranged that about four 
hundred rotations of the latchet-wheel will 
be necessary to wind up the mainspring com 
pletely. 
As the pendulum at each full vibration will 
move the ratchet-wheel round about five teeth, 
about twelve thousand vibrations of the pen 
dulum may be necessary for completely wind 
ing up the watch; but it is evident that these 
proportions may be varied without departing 
from the substance of this invention. 
When the watch is not worn, and the pen 
dulum is therefore not in motion, the main 
Spring may be Wound up by any ordinary 
well-known means. 
I prefer to make the mainspring of such a 
length that when the Watch is fully wound up 
it will go for about forty-eight hours without 
requiring any motion of the pendulum. 
I am aware that Swinging pendulums have 
been used for measuring Steps, and also for 
winding up watches, but in the latter case 
with special arrangements for stopping the 
notion of the pendulum when the Watch has 
been wound u). 
What I claiin is 
In a self-winding Watch, a vibrating pell. 
dulum carrying an elastic pawl, c, in com 
2 
211,2so 
bination with the spring b, pawl e, ratchet. hereunto set my hand this 27th day of May, 
wheel d, and the mainspring of the watch, 1878. 
connected with said ratchet-wheel by means 
of a suitable train of intermediate gearing, 
substantially as shown and described, for the 
purpose set forth, 
In witness that I claim the foregoing I have 
AUGUST WON LOEHR. 
Witnesses: 
C. O. PAGET, 
T. BARTA. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211380.txt	Collar, 
No. 211,380. 
Patented Jan. 14, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N.PETERS, PHOTo-THogRAPHER, washingtoN, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J. W. ALFRED CLUETT, OF TROY, NEW YORK. 
I MI PROVEMENT I N C O LLARS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 211,3so, dated January 14, 1879; application filed 
October 10, 1878. 
, 
- 
To all chom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, J.W. ALFRED CLUETT, 
of the city of Troy, in the county of Rens 
selaer and State of New York, have invented 
a certain new and useful Improvement in Col 
lars for ladies and gentlemen's wear, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, with the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in mak 
ing the band of the collar of two separate 
pieces of goods, so that the band will be three 
ply or four-ply, as desired, without any sepa 
rate interlining; and the object is to increase 
the strength and rigidity of the band after 
the collar is laundered, and at the same time 
avoid the heavy seams made when the ordi 
nary interlining is put in, and with less mate 
rial than required for the same thickness on 
interlining. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a collar com 
plete. Fig. 2 is a plan view of a portion of a 
collar; and Fig. 3, a sectional view, illustrat 
ing the manner in which the several pieces 
are assembled. Fig. 4 is a sectional view, 
showing a four-ply band; and Fig. 5, a simi 
lar view, showing the folds of the double sides 
located in positions opposite to those indi 
cated in Fig. 1. 
In these sectional views the parts are sepa 
rated by greater distances than in the collar 
itself, to facilitate the illustration. 
Like letters in all the figures indicate cor 
responding parts, and the location of the rows 
of stitches are indicated by dotted lines. 
A is the body of the collar, made in the 
usual manner. 
The band of the collar as ordinarily made 
is two-ply, which, in many styles of collars, 
is not thick enough nor strong enough, after 
being laundered, to make the collar retain its 
proper place around the neck-band; and if 
the band be made three-ply the third ply is 
an interlining, and if made four-ply the third 
and fourth plies are interlinings, which inter 
lining must be cut from an additional pattern 
and its upper edge stitched into the banding 
seam, adding unnecessarily to the thickness 
sides. 
of the seam, while its lower edge, unless care. 
fully secured by stitching, is liable to break 
away from the seam in laundering and dam 
age the collar. Besides, each interlining re 
quires about as much material as either of the 
To obviate the difficulties above alluded to 
I cut the band in two parts, 
For a three-ply collar-band, one side, D, 
of the band is a single thickness of material, 
and of the usual form; but the other side, E, 
of the band is wider, and enough wider to 
fold over to meet, or nearly meet, the oppo 
site edge, and is so cut that when folded 
lengthwise nearly through the center it will 
be double, and with the first side will make a 
three-ply band. 
The folded edge is preferably the lower 
edge of the band, and when stitched to the 
side D makes a seam of only four thicknesses, 
the same as in the ordinary two-ply band. 
The double side E is so cut and folded that 
one of the cut edges will fold over to meet, 
or nearly meet, the other cut edge, which 
preferably has a narrow folded edge, thereby 
making only one fold, or two thicknesses of 
the side E, to be stitched to the collar-body, 
thus making, with the side D, only four thick 
nesses of cloth, the same as in a two-ply band, 
to stitch to the collar-body. The remaining 
cut edge of the side E is stitched to the band 
below the seam, which unites the band to the 
body of the collar. 
For a four-ply band I omit the single thick 
side D, and duplicate the folded side E, as 
in Figs. 4 and 5, thus making two folded 
sides, which are stitched together and to the 
body of the collar, substantially as above de 
Scribed. 
In this mode of constructing the band a 
stronger and better-fitting band is produced, 
with more body for firm button-holes, and 
with seams as flat and smooth as in the ordi. 
nary two-ply band, and with much less mate 
rial than is required for the interlinings of the 
band made in the ordinary manner, and hav 
ing the same number of plies or thicknesses 
of material. 
I do not claim, broadly, a collar-band hav. 
ing three or any number of plies; but 
 
2 
2,3S0 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
In combination with the body of a collar, 
a band made of two separate pieces of mate 
rial, one or both of which has an inner fold, 
to constitute an additional ply of the band, 
substantially as and for the purposes herein, 
described. 
In witness whereof I have hereto set my 
hand this 24th day of September, 1878. 
J. W. AIFRED CLUETT. 
Witnesses: 
N. DAVENPORT, 
G. G. RIORDAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211480.txt	S. J. & G. J. SHIMER. 
Reversible Cutter-Head. 
No. 211,48O. 
Patented Jan. 21, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2. 
 
7, N 
--N 
 
% 
H , 
EA-8 A. 
WITIESSES 
AC76-( 
V 
a10. 
d e1 
IMEITORS 
6. 
ee yey, 6Aver 
76%. G (face 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL J. SHIMER AND GEORGE J. SHIMER, OF MILTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN REVERSIBLE CUTTER-HEADS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 211,4s0, dated January 21, 1879; application filed 
November 22, 1878, 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that we, SAMUEL J. SHIMER 
and GEORGE J. SHIMER, both of Milton, in the 
county of Northumberland and State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented a new and valuable 
Improvement in Rotary Cutter-Heads; and 
we do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the con 
struction and operation of the same, reference 
being had to the annexed drawings, making 
a part of this specification, and to the letters 
and figures of reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a perspective view of our improved cutter 
head. Fig. 2 is a side view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a side view, partly sectional. Fig. 4 is a 
plan view of the upper collar, showing the 
grooves and keys. Fig. 5 shows the method 
of laying off a cutter on a blank. Fig.6 shows 
the finished cutter. 
This invention relates to that class of cut 
ter-heads that are used on reversible shaping 
machines, the cutters of which must have two 
cutting-edges. 
It has been suggested heretofore to secure 
the cutters or knives in the head by means of 
grooves in the spindle, and in a lower grooved 
collar sliding on said spindle, the collar secured 
in position by a nut on the spindle; but no pro 
vision was made for the adjustment of cutters, 
Whereby the cut could be increased or de 
creased. 
Our improvement consists, principally, in 
two grooved collars of unequal size suited to 
reversible shaping-machines for holding the 
cutters, so that the distance between their cut 
ting-edges may be increased or decreased by 
changing the collars, and the depth they cut 
being determined by the angle of adjustment 
relatively to the spindle; also, in the construc 
tion of the cutters, whereby they can be easily 
adjusted to the collars; also, in the novel con 
struction and arrangement of the parts, as will 
be hereinafter more fully set forth. 
To enable others to make and use our in 
tion, we will proceed to describe it as foll 
OWS: 
In the annexed drawings, forming a part of 
this specification, the letter A represents a 
Spindle of a reversible shaping-machine hav 
ing a shoulder, a, and screw-threads b at its 
upper end. B and C indicate the holding col 
lars or flanges, the smaller one resting upon 
the shoulder at of the spindle. Each of these 
collars is provided with two V-shaped parallel 
grooves, b, on or about the lines of an inscribed 
square within the circumferential line of the 
collars, and the upper or larger collar is pro 
vided at right angles with the grooves with 
keys d, or their equivalents, extending from the 
circumference to the center, substantially as 
shown in Fig. 4 of the drawings, for centering 
the cutters. 
The letters D and E represent the cutters, 
having two cutting-edges, e, of the same shape 
and size, made from plates or slips of steel, with 
the upper and lower ends tapered. So as to fit 
into the V-shaped grooves of the collars. These 
cutters are also provided at their upper ends 
with a square notch, f, substantially as shown 
in Fig. 6, to fit over or straddle the key d in 
the upper collar. The lateral edges of the cut 
ters are equal in length to the sides of the in 
scribed squares of the collars with which they 
Work. 
Our method of laying off and making the 
cutters consists in using collars that are of 
different sizes, the upper collar being equal to 
the diameter of the lower collar plus twice the 
depth the cutters cut into the lumber. For ex 
ample, when we wish to make a cut or mold 
one-halfinch deep, the upper collar must be 
one inch larger than the lower collar. The size 
of the lower or guide collar is a matter of choice 
with the workman. To make the cutters work 
with collars thus differing in size, we select 
blank steel plates (see Fig. 5) of a width suit 
ed to the thickness of the lumber to be molded, 
and file or stamp a notch, f, in the center of 
the upper end in each plate to nicely fit a key 
or feather, d, in the upper holding-collar. 
We now mark the edges of the steel plates 
on the circumferential lines of the collars and 
join these marks by lines drawn diagonally 
across the steel plates. Upon these lines lay 
off the ogee or any other desired mold, to be 
formed substantially as shown in Fig. 5 of the 
drawings, and cut out the same by any suit 
able means, and file up the same as in prepar 
ing any straight cutter, and the result will be 
a cutter like that shown in Fig. 6 of the draw. 
ings. The cutters made according to this rule, 
 
214 S0 
2 
incombination with holding-collars of unequal tance apart, and consequently the best possi 
ble clearance for the cutting-edge that is run 
size, as above set forth, are reversible, the col 
ning rearward. 
lars being exchangeable for others of Smaller 
diameter as the cutters Wear down. 
It will be observed that by means of key d 
the cutters are brought into position for Work 
without any further adjustment, the holding 
key adding greatly to the the safety of the head, 
as the cutters are not liable to fly out. 
The cutters have two cutting-edges, and are 
set at an angle, substantially as shown, and 
operate upon the lumber with a draw-cut, the 
one edge of each cutter being operative when 
the spindle runs one way, the other edge when 
the spindle is reversed, the distance between 
their cutting-edges being increased or de 
creased by changing the collars, and the depth 
they cut being determined by the angle of an 
justment relatively to the spindle. 
Ordinarily the common nut on the spindle 
will be found sufficient to securely hold the 
collars and cutters in place. If, however, extra 
heavy work is to be done, or extra security 
required, then a groove or keyway should be 
cut in the spindle and a corresponding key fit 
ted to each collar, or two nuts, H., (only one 
shown,) passed over the upper end of the spin 
dle-the upper one screwed down to hold the 
bottom one from loosening. Either or beth of 
the above-described devices may be employed. 
By this construction and arrangement of the 
unequal-sized collars we get for the cutting 
edges of the cutters the greatest possible dis 
What we claim as our invention is 
1. In a rotary cutter-head, two clamping-col 
lars of unequal size provided with grooves 
which are parallel to each other, in combina 
tion with a pair of cutters, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A reversible rotary cutter-head consist 
ing, essentially, of two collars of unequal size 
provided with grooves and keys, and the cutters 
mounted on a spindle, substantially assetforth. 
3. In a rotary cutter, the collar B, provided 
with grooves b and key d, or its equivalent, 
adapted for use substantially as described. 
4. A reversible rotary cutter-head consist 
ing of a spindle, A, with shoulder a and screw 
threads b, the grooved collars BC, the collar 
B being also provided with a centering-key, d, 
the cutters DE, and a fastening device, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The cutter D, having double cutting-edges 
e e and key-notch f, as an improved article 
of manufacture. 
In testimony whereof we have heretinto sub 
SAMUEL J. SHIMER. 
GEO. J. SHIMER. 
scribed our names. 
Witnesses: 
J. F. BLAIR, 
S. EULRICH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211580.txt	J. F. M0LL,0Y 
Buckles. 
No. 211,580. 
Patented Jan. 21, 1879. 
 
ETER 
R. W 
UNITED, STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. MOLLOY, OF WEST HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
M PROWEMENT IN BUCKLES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 211,580, dated January 21, 1879; application filed 
November 29, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, JAMEs F. MOLLOY, of 
West Haven, in New Haven county, and Stat? 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Buckles, of whichthe 
following is a specification: 
My invention particularly relates to that 
class of buckles in which a loop is provided 
for attaching the buckle to one part of the 
garment orother article upon which it is to be 
used, but is or may be applicable to warious 
kinds of buckles in which a loopis provided 
separate and distinct from the bow of the 
buckle. 
My improvements consist in the construc 
tion of sucha buckle witha combined tongue 
bar and loop, formed of one piece of sheet 
metal, the teeth or prongs of the tongue-bar 
being cut from the inner portion of the loop 
and retrowerted or turned outward, the said, 
piece being also preferably provided with a 
closing portion for attaching the loop and 
tongue to the bow of the buckle. 
In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1 rep 
resents a plan of the blank from which the 
tongue-barand loop areformed; Fig.2, a plan 
thereof the teethor prongs being retrowerted 
i or turned outward: Fig. 3, a transverse sec 
tion of such a blank on the dotted line yy, 
Fig. 2, the teeth or prongs being shown in 
dotted outline as retrowerted or turned out 
Ward: Fig. 4, a plan of a completed buckle; 
and Fig. 5, a transverse section thereofon the 
dotted line w a, Fig 4. 
Simlar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A. designatesa loop, and Ba, buckle-tongue 
bar, They are shown as formed from one 
piece of sheet metal, and as having teethor 
prongs a projecting inward from the tongue 
bar B, andcut from the portion of metal within 
the loop.A. (See particularly Fig. 1.) 
By forming the teethor prongs from thein 
ner portion of the loop I effect quite a saving 
of material, as otherwise that portion of metal 
is useless, except for scrap. 
Upon the outside of thetongue-bar B, Ipref: 
erably form one or more closing portions, b, 
whichare preferably formed in the same piece 
of metal with the loop, and which may be of 
any width. 
C designates the bow of the buckle, which 
mayalso beformed of sheet metal, and pro 
|- 
vided with inwardly-projecting arms or points 
c, about which the closing portions may be 
bent for the purpose of Securing the two parts 
of the buckle together. 
In order to bring the teethor prongs into 
the proper position for use, Ibend the blank 
between the dottedlines d. (See Fig.1.) The 
teethorprongsaarethus retrovertedr turned 
outward into the position shown in Fig. 2. 
By thus bending the blank the tongue-bar B 
and closing portions bareturned over andin 
ward, (see also Fig.2;) and in order to attach 
the buckle-bow it is only mecessary to bend 
the closing portions b still farther down and 
inwardover the armsor pointsc. (See Fig.5) 
By my invention I produce a Very simple 
and strong buckle, which, as the teeth or 
prongsare formed from whathas been hereto 
fore wasted, may be made with less material, 
and, as the loop may be secured to the bow 
and the teeth or prongs brought into a posi 
tion for use atone operation, the cost of manu 
facture is decreased. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A. buckle having a loop, tongue-bar, and 
prongs orteeth formed from a single piece of 
metal, said tongue-barbeing bent around to 
ward orupom the loop, substantiallyas andfor. 
the object set forth. 
2. The method herein described of form 
ing a loop, tongue-bar, and teeth or prongs 
of a, buckle from a single piece of metal, the 
same consisting in cutting the teethor prongs 
from the portion of metal forming the loop, 
and then retroverting the teeth and tongue 
bar, substantially as shown and described. 
3. Acombined buckle, tongue-bar, and loop 
formed in one piece, having provided thereon 
a closing portion for the attachment of the 
tongue-barand loop to the bow of the buckle, 
substantially as herein Specified. 
4. A. buckle comprising the combination, 
with a bow, ofa loop and tongue-bar, formed 
in one piece, which is provided with a closing 
portion for the attachment of the loop and 
tongue-barto the bow, substantiallyasherein 
specified. 
JAMES IF, MOL LOY. 
Witnesses: 
RODERICK, L, CHANDLER, 
WILLIAMIT, SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211680.txt	A, ABBEY & G. BRAMMAR 
Revolving Horse-Rake. 
No. 211,68O. 
Patented Jan. 28, 1879. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALONZO ABBEY AND GEORGE BRAMMAR, OF LIVERMORE, CALIFORNIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN REVOLVING HORSE-RAKES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21,6s0, dated January 28, 1879; application filed 
September 16, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ALONZO ABBEY and 
GEORGE BRAMMAR, of Livermore, county of 
Alameda, and State of California, have in 
vented a Combined Sulky and Single Walk 
ing Revolving Rake; and we do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description thereof, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawing. 
Our invention relates to an improved com 
bined wooden-tooth sulky and single walking 
revolving rake; and our improvements consist 
in so attaching an ordinary single walking re 
volving rake to a sulky that its operation may 
be controlled by the driver from his seat with 
out any one being compelled to walk behind 
to attend the handles regulating the detain 
ing-block, which controls the teeth of the 
lake. 
It also consists in forming the connections 
between the sulky and Walking-rake so that 
they may be separated and the Walking-rake 
E. in the ordinary manner for rough or hilly 
aI(l. 
Referring to the accompanying drawing for 
a more complete explanation of our invention, 
the figure represents a perspective view of our 
invention. 
Let A represent the wheels, B the axle, and 
C the shafts, of a sulky-rake, the seat provided 
for the driver being secured forward of the 
axle, as shown. 
On top of the axle B are secured strap 
hinges D, and on top of the front cross-bar E 
of the rake-frame are corresponding strap 
hinges D', both sets so arranged with relation 
to each other that a connecting-rod, F, will 
pass through the hasps of the hinges and join 
the head of rake and axle of sulky together. 
The revolving rake is formed of the cross 
bar E, frame G, teeth H, mounted on the re 
volving bar or head I, and handles J, to which 
is attached the detaining-block K. 
When used as a walking-rake for rough or 
hilly land, the connecting-rod F is slid back, 
so as to separate the strap-hinges, and the le. 
vers, hereinafter described, are disconnected, 
which allows the frame of the rake to be taken 
from the axle. The horse is then hitched to 
the hooks or lugs L on the lower part of the 
cross-bar E. 
- 
The Woodlen teeth of the rake rest on the 
ground, and are held on an incline forward by 
the curved shoes M on the rear lower side of 
the teeth. The driver holds, the handles in his 
hand, and by exerting a slight pressure down 
Ward keeps the rake-teeth in position by keep 
ing the detaining-block K on the rear ends of 
the rake-teeth. 
After the rake-teeth have collected their 
load on their forward ends, by lifting up the 
handles, which are hinged, as shown at N, to 
the rake-frame, the detaining-block Kis lifted 
from the rear ends of the rake-teeth, and, as 
the forward ends can then catch in the ground, 
the rake-teeth turn over and dump the load. 
This is rendered possible by the head I being 
journaled to the standards of the rake-frame, 
so as to admit of its revolving. As the rake 
turns over the shoes M on the lower rear end 
of the teeth come on top on front, and other 
shoes on the opposite ends of the teeth come 
into position in the rear, to perform the same 
service and be in turn reversed. 
Now, when it is desired to use the revolving 
rake as a sulky-rake, the cross-bar of the rake 
frame is secured to the axle of the sulky by 
the connecting-rod I; but, in order to allow 
the driver on the seat of the sulky to operate 
the rake, a system of levers connecting with 
the handles is necessary. 
On the axle B, beside the driver's seat, is 
the crank-lever N, having the long arm ex 
tending up beside the seat, so as to be grasped 
by the driver. To the other end of this crank 
lever is pivoted the bar O, which extends 
back, and is pivoted or hinged at P to the 
handle-lifting bar Q, as shown. This handle 
lifting bar is hinged to the handles J by means 
of a pin, R, through one end of which passes 
the key S, so that when the key is removed 
the pin may be withdrawn and the bar dis 
connected from the handle, for the purpose 
hereinafter described. The same pin P which 
connects the bars O and Q passes through 
these and through the end of a bar, T, the for 
Ward end of said bar T being pivoted or hinged 
to the axle, as shown. A short distance from 
the forward end of this bar T is pivoted or 
hinged another bar, U, which extends back to 
the top rear bar of the rake-frame, and is there 
held in placeby a pin, V, passing through it and 
 
2 
21,6so 
rake alone, the connecting rod or pin. F is 
slipped out, so that the hinges on the cross 
bar and axle may be separated. Then the key 
in the pin R, joining the bar Q to the handles, 
is removed and the pin taken out, thus dis 
connecting this bar Q from the handles of the 
rake. The pin W may be removed by taking 
out the key W, which disconnects the bar W 
from the rake-frame. 
The revolving rake may then be separated 
from the sulky, the levers and bars remaining 
on the sulky, when the rake may be used as 
an ordinary Wallking revolving rake. 
By this means we provide a combined sulky 
and single walking-rake, which may be used 
as such, or the walking-rake detached for use, 
as desired. 
The connections are simple in construction 
and operation, and the whole device strong 
and practical. It admits of the use of wooden 
revolving teeth, while at the same time a sulky 
can be used and the driver may ride. 
M 
The usual form of teeth in use for sulky 
rakes are curved metallic ones, which collect 
considerable dirt in the grain or hay. The 
revolving hand-rakes with wooden teeth are 
usually preferred, but with their use the dri 
wer has to walk. In Our device the useful fea 
tures of both rakes are combined, while the 
combination may be broken if desired, and the 
walking-rake used as such on hilly or rough 
land. 
Eaving thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The rake-frame E, hinged to the sulky. 
axle at D, and supporting the revolving rake 
in standards, as shown, and provided with the 
lever N, connecting-rods O, Q, and T, in com 
bination with the supplemental connecting-rod 
U, whereby the rake-frame itself is raised and 
the rake is assisted to tilt, substantially as 
herein described. 
2. The combination, with the rake-frame and 
holding-foot, of the operating-lever N, with its 
connecting-rods O, Q, T, and U, the last pro 
vided with the stop ac, all operating respect 
ively as shown, substantially as and for the 
purpose herein described. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto set our 
hands. 
ALONZO ABBEY. 
GEORGE BRAMMAR. 
Witnesses: 
R. W. GRAHAM, 
C. B. ACIKER. 
through lugs, as shown. A key, W, Secures 
this pin, so that by removing the key the pin, 
may be taken out and the bar U disconnected 
from the rake-frame, for the purpose hereinaf 
ter described. 
It will be seen that by the use of this sys 
tem of levers the driver on his seat has the 
same control over the rake-teeth as if he were 
walking behind them and held the handles. 
By a slight backward pressure on the long 
arm of the lever Ni, which forms the handle 
for the driver, the detaining-block Klis held 
down on the rear ends of the teeth by the short 
arm of the lever N7 pushing back on the bar 
O, which is hinged to the bar Q, which, in 
turn, is hinged to the handles J, on which the 
detaining-block is secured. Usually the 
weight of handles and detaining-block are 
sufficient to keep the rake from revolving. . 
When it is desired to dump the load by al 
lowing the rake to revolve, the driver throws 
the long arm or handle of the lever N for 
ward. This action draws the short arm of the 
lever N7 also forward, which, by its hinged 
connections with the rear end of the handles 
J, lifts the rear end of said handles, and with 
them the detaining-block, allowing the teeth 
to revolve and dump the load. 
The same action of drawing the levers N7 
and the bars O and Q forward lifts the Tear 
end of the bar T up, said bar being hinged at 
its rear end to the bar O at P. As this bar T 
is lifted up and its rear end drawn forward, 
the bar U, which is hinged to the bar T, is also 
moved forward and upward. As the rear end 
of the bar U is hinged to the upper part of the 
rake-frame, when the lever N is thrown for 
ward by the connection described leverage is 
applied to the rake-frame so as to lift it up 
ward and admit of the teeth revolving leadily. 
This action of the levers U and Tis, from their 
peculiar connection, somewhat slower than that 
of the bars moving the rake-handles, so that 
as the rake begins to revolve and the driver 
draws his lever forward the action of lifting 
the rake-frame to assist the rake in turning 
comes just at the proper moment. 
A. lug, X, on the bar U is so placed that 
the bar T strikes on it when down, and thus 
prevents the lever. N. from coming too far 
back and the detaining-block from pressing 
the rear end of the teeth too far down to allow 
of the necessary forward inclination of said 
teeth. 
Now, in order to disconnect the Walking 
rake from the sulky, so as to use the Walking 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211780.txt	N. PLYMPTON & C. H. LATHAM. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Table - Caster. 
No. 2,78O, 
Patented Jan. 28, 1879 
 
 
\\\nesses 
718, 
22.22 
O 
as? 
3. eaasess & 
asses Ease aga 
Kia 
2a 
ge 
N 
Yi Yenis 
/zz/24/C. 
" T2 . 
4- 4/24-6-22-6 
Peters, photo-LithographER, WAShilrigTON, DC. 
N. PLYMPTON & C. H. L. AT HAM 
Table-Caster. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 211.780. 
Patented Jan. 28, 1879. 
N. Peters, phoro-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
NATHANIEL PLYMPTON, OF BOSTON, AND CYRUS H. LATHAM, OF LOWELL, 
MASSACEUSETTS, 
IMPROVEMENT IN TABLE-CASTERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2,7SO, dated January 28, 1879; application filed 
July 1, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, NATHANIEL PLYMP 
TON, of Boston, county of Suffolk, and CYRUs 
H. LATHAM, of Lowell, in the county of Mid 
dlesex and State of Massachusetts, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Table-Casters, of which the following is a 
description: 
The object of our invention is to make an 
Ornamental and cheap table-caster or bottle 
holder having a base, upon which the cruets 
stand, which is not liable to be stained or 
corroded by the acids held in the caster; and 
it consists in combining with the metal frame 
a mineral base which is not affected by the 
action of such acids as are usually held in the 
caster; and it also consists in the novel ar 
rangement whereby a solid or continuous 
base-plate is united with the rings of such 
holder when the rings are formed of wire, 
substantially as hereinafter described. 
By a mineral base, one of a non-metallic 
character-such as tile, porcelain, earthware, 
or of a vitreous character. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in per 
spective of our improved caster. Fig. 2 is an 
enlarged view of a portion of the center-piece 
and radial arm; and Fig. 3 shows another 
form of the caster. 
A represents the handle. The several wires 
which are united to form the handle are sep 
arated at or near the center-piece b, and these 
ends are carried outward radially between 
the rings of the caster and bent inward un 
der the center-piece, as shown in Fig. 2. 
B B represent the rings. These rings are 
made of wires separate from the wires which 
form the handle, and a portion of each wire ring 
rests upon the center-piece b, and is firmly 
held thereto by a thin metallic strap, c, which 
passes under the center-piece with its ends 
bent over and around the wire rings on the 
top of the center-piece. This center-piece 
serves to hold the rings firmly together, and 
sustains the weight of the caster by means of 
the radial arms at when it is lifted. 
D represents the base of the caster, upon 
which the cruets stand. Heretofore metallic 
bases have been used in table - casters; but 
these metallic bases are expensive and are 
easily stained, and are liable to be injured 
from corrosion by the acids held in the caster 
- 
which are spilled upon it, and they require 
constant labor and care to keep them clean. 
The non-metallic base, on the contrary-such 
as porcelain, earthenware, or similar material 
is much cheaper, and is not stained or cor 
roded by the acids in the caster, and is kept 
clean with much less labor and care. This 
base D is held in position by the wires which 
form the rings, one wire of two adjacent rings 
being separated after being united to form the 
legs FF, and being bound firmly around the 
periphery or outer edge of the base-plate, as 
shown in Fig. 1. One portion of the feet EE 
forms a bracket, e, upon which the base rests. 
Fig. 3 shows another method of holding the 
base, wherein the wires of the legs are bent 
over the top of the base instead of around its 
outer edge. 
In order to give the frame greater stiffness 
and solidity an upright wire brace, G, may 
be used, extending upward through the base 
and center-piece and having the wires of the 
handle firmly twisted around it. This brace 
G. gives the frame great firmness and strength 
and prevents any lateral bending or yielding 
of the frame. 
We claim as new and of our invention 
PI. In combination with the metallic frame 
of a caster or bottle-holder, a non-metallic 
base, upon which the bottle rests, as and for 
the purpose specified. 
2. The combination of the wire rings B. B. 
with the solid base D, upon which the bottle 
rests, substantially as described. 
3. In combination with the base and rings 
of a caster or bottle-holder, the center-piece b 
and handle A, the latter having the ends of 
the wires of which it is formed bent outward, 
around and under the center-piece b, as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of the handle A, center 
piece b, and solid base D with the upright 
brace G, substantially as described. 
5. The combination of the vitreous or tile 
base of the holder D and the metallic rings B 
B, substantially as described. 
. 
NATHI, PLYMPTON. 
C. H. LATHAM, 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL W. TucKER, 
HENRY FR, WELCH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211880.txt	C. W. BAKER, 
Book-Tablet. 
No. 211,88O. 
Patented Feb. 4, 1879. 
 
232 
stee 
 
2. 47/22. 
1%. 4%z 
c 2.2.2%. 
4 24%%. 
%22. 
parers, photo-utioGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLARENCE W. BAKER, OF JANESVILLE, WISCONSIN. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BOOK-TABLETS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 211, SS0, dated February 4, 1879; application filed 
November 26, 1877. 
pasteboard or thick paper, I, the edges of 
which project some distance beyond the outer 
edges of the two sides of the piece G, as shown. 
In placing the tablet inside of the cover the 
tongue G is slipped into the slot or space in 
the inside of the wing A, while the end and 
edges of the piece I, to which the tongue is 
secured, pass between the two pieces of mate 
rial of which said wing is composed, and thus 
hold the tablet securely in position. 
In removing the tablet it is only necessary 
to open the two covers and pull the tablet to 
Ward the single wing E, when the tongue G 
and piece I will be drawn from their place in 
the wing A. 
By means of this construction the tablet is 
more securely held in position, and the cover 
is made in effect as strong as a solid cover. 
Perforations in the printed matter, or other 
paper held in it, are avoided, and such fasten 
ing devices as springs and strings are dis 
pensed with. 
This invention can be used with bill-heads, 
note-heads, statements, prescriptions, blanks, 
and many other kinds of printed matter, and 
also for memorandum or scratch books. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In a book-tablet, the covers AE, the former of 
which is provided with a pocket formed by and 
between the boards A B, said board A' being 
provided with a slot to receive the tongue Gin 
terposed between the tablet and piece I, which 
piece is secured to said tongue, and when in 
position rests between the boards AB, which 
form the cover A, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
CLARENCE. W. BAKER, 
Witnesses: 
W. H. HoLMEs, 
THOS. E. ADDY. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CLARENCE W. BAKER, 
of Janesville, in the county of Rock and State 
of Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Book-Tablets; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
book-tablets; and consists in a peculiar man 
ner of attaching a tablet temporarily to a cover 
without the use of springs to hold it in posi 
tion. The tablet can be instantly removed 
from its cover and another inserted in its place, 
as will be more fully described hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an inner plan view of the book-cover open, 
showing the slot and the flexible binding. 
Fig. 2 is a transverse section on line acac of 
Fig. 1. 
Similar reference letters indicate like parts 
in both figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A E represent 
the book-cover. The wing A is made of two 
pieces of pasteboard, A B, one laid upon the 
Other, and united together around the outside. 
edges only, so as to form a pocket, a, between 
them. The upper or inner piece, A', has a 
long slot formed in it, so as to expose the outer 
piece, B, through it. 
The wing E consists of but one thickness 
of pasteboard, and is of the usual construc 
tion. Each of the tablets to be placed inside 
of this cover will have attached to it a tongue, 
G, as shown in Fig. 2. This tongue will be of 
pasteboard, just the size and thickness of that 
part cut away from the inner side of the wing 
A. This tongue or strip G is pasted or other 
Wise secured to a wider and thinner piece of 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US211981.txt	W. D. FINK 
Adjustable Harrow. 
No. 211,981. 
Patented Feb. 4, 1879. 
 
WITNESSES 
z - 
INVENTOR: 
% (262-6- 
de 
BY 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. FINK, OF STRASBURG, ILLINOIS. 
MPROVEMENT IN ADJUSTABLE HARROWS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 211,9s 1, dated February 4, 1879; application filed 
November 18, 1878. 
s 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. D. FINK, of 
Strasburg, in the county of Shelby and State 
of Illinois, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Adjustable Harrows, of which 
the following is a specification: 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
harrow. Fig. 2 is a detail section, showing 
one of the square teeth. Fig. 3 is a detail sec 
tion, showing one of the sword-teeth. Fig. 4 
is a detail view of one of the joints. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to furnish an 
improved harrow, which shall be so con 
structed that it may be readily adjusted wider 
or narrower, as the work to be done may re 
quire, which will adjust itself to uneven 
ground, which will allow either half to be 
raised to free it from rubbish, or to avoid 
stumps or stones, without interfering with the 
other half, and which may be readily sepa 
rated into two parts, for convenience in load 
ing it into and unloading it from a vehicle 
for transporting it to or from the field, or from 
one field to another. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the drawings, and then pointed 
out in the claim. 
The harrow-frame is made in two parts, 
each part consisting of a long side beam, A, 
and three short beams, B C D. The beam B 
is hinged or jointed at its outer end to the 
rear end of the long side beam, A, and at its 
inner end to the rear end of the beam C. 
The outer end of the beam D is hinged or 
jointed to the middle part of the long side 
beam, A. The inner ends of the two beams 
C D nearly meet, and are connected by an 
eye rod or link, E, and two staples or eye 
bolts, F. 
To one of the rods or links E is hinged a 
hook, G, which is hooked upon the other rod or 
link E, connecting the middle parts of the har 
row-frame together with a flexible and detach 
able connection. 
The forward ends of the side beams A are 
connected by a link, H, hinged at one end to 
one of the beams A by an eyebolt or staple, 
I, and its other end to the other beam, A, by 
a hook-bolt, J, thus connecting the said beams 
by a flexible and detachable connection. 
The joints between the beams are formed 
by bolting iron plates to their upper and lower 
sides, as shown in Fig. 4. 
For ordinary use the harrow-frame is de 
signed to be adjusted into the form of three 
squares, as shown in Fig. 1; but it may be 
made narrower by moving the beams upon 
their hinges or joints to bring the Squares 
into diamond shape longitudinally, or made 
wider by bringing the said squares into dia 
mond shape transversely. 
To the middle parts of the two beams C are 
bolted the outer ends of two bars, K, and to 
the middle part of the forward half of the 
side beams, A, are bolted the outer ends of 
two bars, L. The inner parts of the bars K 
I overlap each other, and are slotted longi 
tudinally to receive the bolts M, attached to 
the beams D, and by which they are fastened 
together when the frame has been adjusted 
in the desired position. With this construc 
tion the harrow-frame can be adjusted by 
loosening the bolts M, and when adjusted can 
be fastened securely in place by again tight 
ening the said bolts M. 
N are the handles, the inner ends of which 
are bolted to the inner parts of the beams C, 
and the outer parts are supported and strength 
ened in position by the brace-rods O, attached 
to the said handles and to the outer parts of 
the beams C, and by the standards T. 
P is the draw-bar, with the end parts of 
which are connected the forward ends of two 
rods, Q, by clevises or other suitable means. 
The rear ends of the rods Q are connected 
with the beams. A by means of eye or hook 
For all kinds of Work Square, round, or flat 
harrow teeth R may be used; but I prefer to 
use the knife or sword shaped teeth S, as pro 
ducing better effects. The harrow-teeth may 
be set in the frame straight or inclined, or 
some may be set straight and some inclined. 
When the sword-teeth S are used they should 
be set in such positions that their edges will 
be directly forward when the harrow-frame is 
adjusted in squares, which will incline their 
edges to one or the other side when the har. 
bolts. 
s 
Y 
2 at 9s 
2 
row-frame is adjusted in diamonds, and Will 
cause them to act upon the ground in the 
manner of cultivator-teeth. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Lettel's Pat 
ent 
An improved harrow-frame made in tWO 
parts, each part being formed of the log side 
ibeam, A, and the three short beams BCD, 
hinged or jointed to each other, and locked in 
place when adjusted by the longitudinally 
slotted bars K L and the bolt M, and the two 
parts being connected to each other at the in 
her ends of the inner beams, C D, and the 
forward ends of the side beams, A, by the flex 
ible and detachable connections EFG and H 
IJ, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed. 
WILLIAMI D. FINK. 
Witnesses: 
AMOS YORK, 
SANI. WILSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212081.txt	C. F. WOLTERS 
Bath-Tub, 
No. 212, O81. 
Patented Feb. 4, 1879. 
 
N 
N 
2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES F. WOLTERS, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BATH-TUBS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,0s, dated February 4, 1879; application filed 
June 26, 1878. 
 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs F. WoLTERs, 
of the city of Rochester, county of Monroe, 
and State of New York, have invented an 
Improvement in Bath-Tubs, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification: 
The object of my invention is to apply an 
adjustable metallic cover to any bath-tub in 
such a manner as to make a closed chamber. 
or vessel for condensed air or vapor baths, as 
shown in Figure 1 of the accompanying draw 
ings. 
AAA represent an ordinary bath-tub. B. 
B show the adjustable cover, constructed in. 
two sections, D and E, separating at the per 
pendicular dotted line a in Fig. 1, and also 
shown in Fig. 2 at t it. 
The cover B B is made high enough when 
placed on the tub A. A to admit a grown 
person to the top of shoulders in a sitting 
posture. The difference in the height of dif. 
ferent persons is regulated by an adjustable 
stool or chair, d. The top of cover B B is 
provided with a round opening, n, the joint 
tt dividing the same. The round opening m is 
made somewhat larger than the neck of a large 
person. Section D of cover BB has a hinged 
trap, ct, opening to the inside, as represented 
in drawings, Figs. 1 and 3. Section D of cover 
BB is hinged at ce. (Shown in Figs. 1 and 2.) 
To enter the bath-tub A. A the section D of 
cover B B is raised perpendicular, while the 
rear section, E, of cover BB remains stationary. 
The patient before taking a seat in the tub A. 
A adjusts the stool or chair d to the proper 
height, leaving his shoulder (when sitting on 
the stool or chair d) free from the top of cover 
B B, and the chin of the patient, which re 
mains outside of tub A. A clear of the cover 
B B, as shown in drawings, Fig.1. After the 
patient has taken a seat, the section D of cover 
B B is shut down. The trap a being open or 
down, as shown by dotted lines pp in Figs. 1 
and 3, will not come in contact with the face 
of the patient. 
The trap at is provided with one or more 
light bolts, in n, for the purpose of holding the 
trap at in a horizontal position when closed. 
The bolts in n are operated either by the patient 
from the inside or an attendant from the out 
side by means of a knob, 0. At the lower end 
of section D of cover B B is an opening, q, 
covered by a hinged valve or cover, b. The 
valve or cover b is operated either by the 
patient from the inside or an attendant from 
the outside. A string, s, is attached to the 
valve or cover b, and brought to the inside 
through a hole, k, in easy reach of the patient. 
The opening q is for the purpose of admitting 
cold air to the inside of bath-tub or ejecting 
hot air or steam from the inside of bath-tub 
A A. At the foot or lower end of the inside 
of bath-tub AA are one or more atmospheric 
gas-burners, h. h, which are supplied with gas 
from the outside by means of a rubber hose, i. 
't represents a movable water-tank, hung to 
the sides of bath-tub AA and immediately 
over the atmospheric gas-burners. 
It can be 
easily removed if not wanted. 
e represents a perforated movable partition, 
of either metal or wood, and is made to slide 
between narrow strips ff, fastened on both 
sides of the bath-tub, as shown in Fig.1. 
The movable partition e is for the purpose 
of preventing the patient from coming in con 
tact with either the gas-burners or the Water 
tank. 
Warm or cold water is admitted to the in 
side of chamber or bath-tub by means of a 
rubber pipei, passing through the cover BB 
at k, and brought in easy reach of the patient. 
The patient's neck being smaller than the 
opening m, a towel or cloth is used to close up 
the space around the neck to prevent any 
heat or steam from escaping at that point, thus 
forming a closed chamber or vessel, which 
can be heated in a very few minutes, either 
by hot air or steam, to any desired degree. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with a bathtub or cham 
ber, of an arched cover, constructed of two 
independent sections, one of which is hinged 
and provided at the edge adjoining the other 
section with a swinging orhinged piece to close 
upward around the neck of the patient, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination, with a suitable bath 
tub or chamber and the cover B, constructed 
in two sections, one of which is hinged at one 
end and provided with an opening, q, of the 
ru 
es 
s 
212,0s. 
linged valve b and a device connected with Yertically-adjustable partition e, arranged in 
said Yalve and extending into the bathtub or front of said vesselaid burner, substantially 
chamber. Within reach of the patient for oper. as and for the purpose described. 
ating said valve, substantially as and for the 
CHARLES E. WOLTERS. 
Ourpose described. 
3. The combination, with the water vessel or 
tank and burner for heating the same, of the 
GEO. FRAUENBERGER, 
JACOB GERLING. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212181.txt	Ma Chine for Manufacturing Shoe-Lace Studs. 
No. 212,181. 
Patented Feb. 11. 1879. 
m-lars 
 
7 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
WiTNESSES : 
6.9%away 
-6, 7.4% 
  
 
Fro722d 
7 
INVENTOR: 
raz 
4 12.e4. 
u%42 2-6za 
2. 
AttoRNEY. 
F.PTERS, PHOO-LTHOGRAPHER, wash NGTON, p. c. 
M. BRAY. 
Ma Chine for Manufacturing Shoe-Lace Studs. 
No. 212, 181. 
Patented Feb. 11, 1879. 
Sheets-Sheet 2. 
SE 
s s 
Sey H 
 
 
(2) 
is 2. 
ES 
S) e 
A.Y. AEI 
gif 
Tra 
 
O 
i 
: 
 
r 
El A 
a 
! 
i 
. 
, 
Y 
W 
V 
W 
y 
v 
Y. 
f 
f 
O 
y w 
 
1. 
'S -----1 
s - 
-- 
y 
Y 
sh 
I -si 
4. 22.2. 
242 (6 
INVENToR: 
& 
M. Peters, Photo-HoGRAPHER, washington, E. C. 
 
 
WTNESSES: . 
A 
-6. 6.92%. 
M. BRAY, 
7. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Ma Chine for Manufacturing Shoe-Lace Studs. 
Patented Feb. 11, 1879. 
No. 212,181. 
 
HEEE 
- 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR: 
-6, 28.9-6. 0 
4 -237.2%as 
M. Peters, roto-Etegrapher, WASHINesto, b. c. 
m 
M. BRAY. 
7 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Machine for Manufacturing Shoe-La ce. Studs 
Patented Feb. 11, 1879. 
No. 212,181. 
same 
 
 
 
-----S 
 
 
 
Nims  
s Ns 
N 
H2 
s 
s 
A SS 
2IHE HE 
X 
- 
s z 
s 
S 
- - - 
Y 2SAS 
S. 
 
al 
2 2 
 
 
SS I S NS 
 
s 
 
 
i 
 
ATToRNEY. 
N. PeFERs, Photo-tuTHographER, WASHNgor, E.C. 
M. BRAY. 
Machine for Manufacturing Shoe-Laoe Studs. 
No. 212,181. 
7. Sheets-Sheet 5, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 
S. 
 
 
W. 
S. W. 
% SS 
S 
ea 
 
 
 
 
   
 
SS 
Wa 
INN N 
H s 3. 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
anaNN \ Eels--- 
 
 
O f %IE 
 
  
 
2 2 
  
e 
 
SE 
t 
 
 
 
S. 
S 
N SN 
N 
SNY & 
JEE 
 
ent 
T 
I 
AI II 
WT MESSES 
amitriliigi Titulli 
O 
6. 235 at  
- Fl 2 
2 
% 
m 
s = 
-76e4ere 32a2 
a -2, 224224- Attorney. 
N.VENTOR: 
PEERs, photo-I trugRAFHER, washington, D. c. 
Sheets-Sheet 6, 
M, BRAY. 
Machine for Manufacturing Shoe-La Ce Studs. 
No. 212,181. 
Patented Feb. 11, 1879. 
- 
- 
 
3 mm 
mm. Y 
% St. 
2't LSELES o, 
A 
al NYT 
I 
S3% S2 
4. 
WITNESSES: 
sity. 
INVENTOR: 
472-22 AT TORNEY. 
N. PreRs, Phoro-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D.C. 
M, BRAY. 
Sheets-Sheet 7. 
Machine for Manufacturing Shoe-Lace Studs. 
Patented Feb. 11, 1879. 
No. 212,181. 
 
422 
SS 
R.S. a) 
A2a, 22. 
. t 
f 
HINTAI 
A2.23. 
WITIFF 
(2) 
. . 
A's. 25. 
INVENTOR: 
WITNEsses: 
69/66 
-6 694 z. 
% 32: 
ATTORNEY. 
PERS, Photo-LIHoGRApHER, washingtoN, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MELLEN BRAY, OF NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
IMPROVEMENT IN MACHINES FOR MANUFACTURING SHOE-ACE STUDS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,1s, dated February 11, 1879; application filed 
September 18, 1878. 
- 
Beit known that I, MELLEN BRAY, of New 
nation of a disk mounted upon one end of a 
To all chom it may concern: 
shaft, and having mounted in suitable bear 
ton, in the county of Middlesex and State of ings thereon two or more pairs of clamping 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and jaws or dies, two or more levers pivoted to 
useful Machine for Manufacturing Shoe-Lace 
said disk or spidler, and each connected at one 
end to the movable portion of one of said 
Studs, of which the following, taken in con 
clamping-jaws, and at the other end to a tog 
nection with the accompanying drawings, is a 
Specification. 
gle-joint, a spider or skeleton frame mounted 
upon the opposite end of said disk-shaft, and 
My invention relates to the means employed 
forming bearing-supports for the fulcrum-pins 
to separate the blanks, feed them to the oper 
of the several lever - operating toggles, all 
ating-tools, hold them in position while being 
adapted to be intermittently rotated about a 
acted upon thereby, drilling out the shank to 
common axis, to carry a blank held by either 
form a hollow tube, cutting a groove in the 
pair of clampingjaws from the point where it 
head to form an eccentric neck to receive the 
is received successively to a position in line 
lacing, and shaping the outer collar of the 
with the several operating-tools, a reciprocat 
hook-head of the stud described in Letters 
ing plunger in a position and adapted to act 
Patent No. 188,780, granted to Alfred Dawes 
upon a toggle to straighten it, and thereby 
March 27, 1877; and it consists, first, in the 
cause the movable jaw to close upon and clamp 
combination of an intermittently-rotating and 
clamp-carrying disk, adapted to receive, clamp, 
the blank immediately after said blank is fed 
between said movable jaw and the fixed jaw, 
and hold in a fixed position therein the blanks, 
and a vibrating lever in a position and adapt. 
and convey them in succession to the different 
points of operation, a drill arranged upon one 
ed to act upon another toggle, to break or bend 
it from a straight line, to release the pressure 
side of said disk, and adapted to be rotated 
of the clamping-jaws upon the finished stud 
at a high rate of speed about an axis perpen 
preparatory to its being discharged from the 
dicular to the plane of revolution of said disk, 
and to be moved endwise toward said disk for 
machine. . 
My invention further consists in the combi 
the purpose of drilling out the shank of a stud 
nation, with an intermittently-rotating disk 
blank held in the clamping-jaws, and a cut 
ting-tool arranged upon the opposite side of 
having mounted thereon a series of clamping 
jaws or dies adapted to receive a blank, to be 
said disk, and adapted to be moved toward and 
automatically closed upon it while the disk is 
from said disk in a direction at right angles to 
in a state of rest, and hold it firmly during the 
the plane of movement thereof, and then to be 
several operations of drilling the shank and 
moved laterally to form an eccentric neck in 
shaping the head of the stud, and then un 
the head of a stud at the same time that a 
clamp the finished stud to allow it to be dis 
shank is being drilled. 
charged, of a device for separating a single 
My invention further consists in the combi. 
nation of an intermittently-rotating disk hav 
blank from others in bulk and feeding it be 
tween a pair of jaws, two rotary cutters for 
ing mounted thereon and rotating there with 
finishing the heads of the studs, all arranged 
two or more pairs of automatically-operated 
clamping jaws or clies, an automatically-op 
upon one side of the disk, and each opposite 
erated drill and a discharge-plunger arranged 
a different pair of jaws when said disk is in a 
state of rest, and an automatically-operated 
upon one side of said disk, and adapted to op 
drill and a discharge-plunger arranged upon 
erate upon different studs at the same time, 
and a rotating cutting-tool arranged upon the 
the opposite side of said disk and adapted to 
opposite side of said disk, and adapted to be 
be moved endwise toward and from said disk 
in paths perpendicular to the plane of revolu 
noved toward and from said disk in a direc 
tion of said disk, and to act upon different 
tion at Tight angles to the plane of movement 
thereof, and then to be moved laterally to form 
studs or blanks at the same time. 
My invention further consists in a peculiar 
an eccentric neck in the head of a stud-blank 
arrangement and combination of devices for 
while the shank is being drilled. 
separating a single blank from a number 
My invention further consists in the combi 
 
2 
22, S1 
placed in a hopper in bulk, and feeding it into 
a position to be seized and held by its shank 
between a pair of clamping-jaws, the novel 
features of which will be best understood by 
reference to the description of the drawings. 
My invention further consists in the combi 
nation of a tubular spindle, a furcated chuck 
head fitted to a conical bearing in said spindle, 
and adapted to be revolved therewith and to be 
moved endwise therein, and having formed in 
its outer end an undercut circular recess, and 
a partially-divided ring tool-holder, provided 
with a hub having a conical or tapering pe 
liphery, and adapted to fit the recess in the 
chuck-head, as a means of Securing the tool 
holder thereto. 
My invention further consists in the combi 
nation of a cutter-carrying spindle adapted to 
be revolved at a high rate of speed about its 
axis and to be moved endwise and an eccen 
tric sleeve surrounding and forming the bear 
ing for said Spindle, and mounted in a suita 
ble bearing or bearings, and adapted to be in 
termittently rotated within said bearing to 
feed the cutter to its work by causing the axis 
of the cutter-spindle to move through a small 
circle eccentric to the axis of the blank being 
acted upon by the cutter, thus forming a cir 
cular neck upon the stud, located eccentric to 
its shank and the two collars of its head. 
My invention further consists in the combi 
nation of a cutter-head stock, a cutter-carry 
ing Spindle having its bearing in an eccentric 
sleeve adapted to be intermittently revolved 
within its bearing in said cutter-head stock, 
and all adapted to be intermittently recipro. 
cated in a direction parallel with the axis of 
the cutter-spindle, and a locking device for 
holding said cutter-head stockin a fixed posi 
tion While the cutter is forming the neck of a 
stud. 
My invention further consists in the use of 
an annular cutter for cutting the groove to 
form the eccentric neck, composed of a chisel 
shaped tool fitted to a dovetailed groove in 
the side of a ring-holder, cut open upon one 
side in the lear of the tool, and adapted to 
clamp and hold said tool in position by the 
spring of the holder, in combination with a 
furcated chuck or socket adapted to clamp 
Said ring-holder and spring it onto the chisel 
pointed tool, the cutting-point of the tool be 
ing toward the center of the ring-holder. 
My invention further consists in the combi 
nation of a cutter-carrying spindle adapted to 
be continuously revolved about its axis at a 
high rate of Speed, an eccentric sleeve sur 
rounding and forming a bearing for said spin 
dile, mounted in a bearing or bearings encom 
passing its periphery, and adapted to be in 
termittently rotated therein at regular and 
equal intervals of time, with a period of rest 
after each complete revolution, and a locking 
device adapted to prevent said eccentric sleeve 
from being accidentally moved about its axis 
during its period of rest. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a plan of a ma 
chine embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation. Fig. 3 is an elevation of the 
front end. Fig. 4 is a vertical longitudinal 
section on line 11 on Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a ver 
tical longitudinal section on line 22 on Fig. 
3, looking toward the hopper. Fig. 6 is a par 
tial vertical transverse section on line 33 on 
Fig. 1. 
Fig. 7 is a vertical transverse section 
on line 4 4, looking toward the front end. 
Fig. 8 is a vertical transverse section on line 
55 on Fig. 1, looking toward the rear. Fig. 
9 is a vertical transverse section on line 6 6 on 
Fig. 1, looking toward the front end. Fig. 10 is 
a vertical section through one side of the bed 
frame, a portion of the disk, and the friction 
brake. Fig. 11 is a partial vertical section on 
line 77, looking toward the rear. Fig. 12 is a 
vertical section on line S S on Fig. 1, looking 
toward the rear. IFig. 13 is a plan of the 
blank separating and feeding mechanism de 
tached from the inclined chute and other parts 
of the mechanism. Fig. 14 is a vertical sec 
tion on line 99 on Fig. 13, with piece of chute 
attached. Fig. 15 is a horizontal section on 
line 10 10 on Fig. 14, and showing a portion 
of the disk in section and the movable clamp 
ing-jaw in plan. Fig. 16 is a vertical section 
on line 11 11 on Fig. 13. Fig. 17 is a trans 
verse section of the inclined chute. Fig. 1S 
is a central vertical section through the hopper 
and a portion of the inclined chute. Fig. 19 
is a detached elevation of the cam, lever, and 
connecting-rod for imparting the intermittent 
rotary motion to the disk. Fig. 20 is an ele 
vation of the cam for operating the discharge 
plunger. Fig. 21 is a detail, illustrating the 
connection of the testing-lever with the ship 
ping mechanism. Figs. 22 and 23 are, re 
spectively, an elevation and edge view of the 
neck-forming cutter-tool; and Figs. 24 and 25 
are, respectively, an elevation and plan of the 
head-trimming cutter-tool. 
A is the bed-frame, supported upon the legs 
B, and having mounted in suitable bearings 
therein the cam-shaft C, drill spindle D, disk 
shaft E, gear-shaft F, discharge bar or rod G, 
and registering-rod H, all arranged as shown, 
and operated as will be hereinafter described. 
The drill-spindle D is provided with the two 
tight pulleys D and D and the loose pulley 
D, and is revolved at a high rate of speed by 
means of a belt (not shown) leading from an 
overhead counter-shaft (also not shown) onto 
the pulley D', which belt may be shipped on 
to the loose pulley D' by the shipper fork a. 
shipper-rod all, and spring a when it is desired 
to stop the machine, said drill-spindle being 
moved endwise to feed the drill to its Work by 
the can C", the construction, arrangement, and 
mode of operating the drill-spindle being sub 
stantially the same as described in Letters 
Patent No. 1SS,773, granted to me March 27, 
1877, for rivet-drilling machine. 
I is a shaft, mounted in bearings on the 
cross-ties of the legs B, having secured there 
on the pulleys I", I, and I, and has a rotary 
motion imparted there to by means of the belt 
212, is 
3 
p 
- 
s 
y 
I, leading from the pulley D on the drill-spin-1 frame A, and having secured upon its inner 
end the bevel-gear wheel F and cam F. Se 
dle to and around the pulley I. 
A belt, J, leading from the pulley I to and cured to the inner side of the worm-wheel F. 
around the pulley J on the shaft J, imparts is a path-cam, F, the path of which engages 
with a truck, e, mounted upon a pin project 
thereto a rotary motion about its axis, said 
ing from the perpendicular bare, and imparts 
shaft being mounted in bearings in the upper 
to said bar a vertical reciprocating motion in 
ends of the stands K and K, bolted to the 
the bearing formed for the purpose in the 
sides of the frame A, and has mounted there 
stand e, projecting upward from the cap of 
On the Worms J and J and the can J. 
the bearing A, the upper end of said bare 
The worm Jengages with the worm-wheel 
being connected by means of the linke with 
C on the cam-shaft C, and by its action there 
the movable end of the lever f', secured upon 
On imparts a slow rotary motion to said shaft 
the end of the shaft?, having its bearings in 
and the cams C, C9, C, C, C6, C7, and C9, all 
a side branch of the stand K, and having 
secured firmly thereto in their proper relative 
firmly secured thereon the hopper (, all so ar 
positions. 
ranged that the vertical reciprocation of the 
The shaft E has firmly secured thereto near 
bare shall cause the hopper g to be vibrated 
its front end the disk E, to the back side of 
about the axis of the shaft f, so as to be in 
which are pivoted the four levers E, the long 
clined in opposite directions at the two ex 
arms of each of which extend backward there 
tremes of its movement, for the purpose of 
from parallel, or nearly so, to said shaft, and 
agitating the blanks placed therein and cause 
lhave pivoted thereto the adjusting-saddles E", 
them to drop into the slot g', formed in the 
to which is pivoted the inner end of the tog 
center of its bottom, and be delivered there 
gle E, the outer end of which is pivoted to 
from into the inclined chuteh, down the spiral 
the spider E, secured firmly to the shaft E. 
groove of which they slide till they reach the 
A ratchet-wheel, b, is firmly secured to the 
vertical groove h", into which they drop one 
shaft E at its rear end, with which the pawl 
above the other. The spiral groove of the in 
l, hung upon the lever l', engages, said lever 
clined chute his partially covered by the plate 
l' being 1 nounted loosely upon the shaft E, 
h', and the hopper gis provided with two pro 
and connected at its other end by means of 
jecting guide-fingers, g, arranged one upoll 
the connecting-rod land ball-and-socket joints 
either side of the groove g, and curved con 
with the movable end of the lever b, pivoted 
centric with the axis about which said hopper 
at its opposite end to the stand b, and pro 
vibrates, the under sides of the heads of the 
vided with a truck, which fits into and is acted 
blanks resting upon said fingers as they slide 
upon by the path bin the cam C, adapted to 
from the hopper to the inclined chute. The 
impart all intermittent rotary motion to the 
hopper g is also provided with a light flat 
disk E at regular and equal intervals of time, 
spring, g, projecting therefrom over the fin 
said disk moving through an arc of ninety de 
gers g in a position to bear lightly upon the 
grees at each intermittent movement. 
heads of the blanks as they pass from the 
The forward end of each of the levers E is 
hopper to the chute, and serve, in connection 
forked, and engages with a lug projecting from 
with said fingers, to carry back any blanks 
the rear side of the movable jaw or die c, fitted 
that may remain above the end of the chute 
to a dovetail bearing in the front face of the 
when the hopper is vibrated away from the 
diskE, in such a manner that it may be moved 
chute, and thus prevent them from being ac 
radially in said bearing, said jaw or die being 
cidentally thrown out of the chute or guide 
made of a thickness about equal to the length 
way into or among the machinery. 
of the shank of the stud-blank to be operated 
The lower blank in the vertical groove or . 
upon, and has formed across said outer end a 
guide-way his pushed out from under those 
semi-cylindrical groove adapted to fit said 
above it by the spring-actuated plunger i, and 
shank and clamp and hold it in conjunction 
carried along the horizontal guideway it and 
with the fixed or stationary jaw or die c', pro 
deposited in the horizontal guideway i, ex 
vided upon its inner end with a corresponding 
tending across the end of guideway it and at 
semicircular groove. 
right angles thereto, with its axis parallel 
Just outside of the fixed die c' is set in the 
with the axis of the disk, and with its smaller 
periphery of the disk the hardened steel plate 
or shank end toward the disk in a position to 
d, in the edge of which is formed a V-shaped 
be moved endlwise along the guideway i by 
detent-notch, d', with which the beveled or 
the reciprocating plunger i till the shank of 
tapering forward end of the registering-rod 
the blank enters between the clamping-dies c 
H fits to correct any inequality in the move 
and e' with the shoulder of its head bearing 
ment of the disk and bring it into accurate 
against the outer face of Said dies. 
position relative to the drill and cutting-tools. 
The feed-plungeri has intermittent recipro 
A radial hole, d, is also formed in each of the 
cating motion imparted thereto by the cam F. 
plates d, the purpose of which will hereinafter 
and the elbow-lever F, the vertical arm of 
appear. 
which is a steel spring, and is connected by 
The Worm Jengages with and causes to 
the link j' to the plunger j, as shown, the ob 
rotate the worm-wheelF, firmly secured upon 
ject of the spring-lever F being to prevent 
the outer end of the shaft F, mounted in a 
damage to the mechanism in case a blank 
single bearing, A', in the front end of the 
 
4. 
22, AS 
should become obstructed in any way in the cave side of the hub and effectually locks 
guideway i, so that it could not be moved into the sleeve , and prevents it from being acci 
position between the clamping-dies. 
dentally revolved during the time that the 
The inner end of the spring-operated plunger 
cutter-head is being moved toward or from 
i is made to conform to the shape of the side of 
the disk. 
the stud-blank, both longitudinally and circum 
A tubular spindle, ', is fitted to the bore of 
ferentially, as shown in Figs. 14 and 15, where 
the eccentric sleeve with a conical bearing 
by the blank. k. (shown in Fig. 15) is held in a 
therein at its inner end, and having secured 
horizontal position, or with its axis coinciding 
to its other end the pulley O, also having a 
with the axis of the guideway i and the feed 
conical bearing against the eccentric sleeve , 
plunger j, a spring-actuated pin, l, located di 
and adapted to be adjusted upon said tubular 
rectly opposite the plunger i, and having its 
spindle to take up the wear. 
inner end beveled, as shown in Fig. 15, aiding 
To the inner end of the tubular spindle is 
in so holding the blank and serving to pre 
fitted the furcated chuck-head r, having a ta 
vent the blank from being canted to one side 
per bearing therein, and connected to the spin 
when it is first moved forward by the plunger 
dle, so as to be compelled to revolve therewith 
j by presenting about an equal resistance to 
by a longitudinal slot formed in its shank and 
such forward motion upon two opposite sides 
a pin passing through said tubular spindle into 
of the blank. 
said slot. 
An elbow-lever, l, pivoted at l', is connected 
The chuck-head is drawn into the conical 
at one end to the plunger i, and is acted upon 
by means of 
mouth of the tubular spindle 
at its other end by the push-finger l, secured 
the hand-wheel O' and its tubular shank, the 
to the upper side of the block in loosely mounted 
inner end of which screws onto the end of the 
upon the plunger j and connected there with 
shank of the chuck-head, as clearly shown in 
by the pin m, projecting from the side of the 
Fig. 4. 
plunger j through the slot n in said block in 
The cutter-head stock MI is fitted to and 
such a manner that the plunger j may be 
mounted upon a dovetailed slide formed upon 
moved through said block during a portion of 
an extension of the left-hand side bar of the 
its movement alld then cause said block to 
frame A, along which it may be moved toward or 
move there with. 
from the disk by means of the rod P, attached 
The inner end of the guideway iis provided 
by one end to said head-stock, and having its 
with a contracted mouth of a diameter corre 
other end acted upon by the path-cam C to 
sponding to the diameter of the shank of the 
impart thereto a short reciprocating motion, 
blank, said mouth being composed of two jaws, 
said rod being guided by the bearing P, as 
in , connected by the plates in in to the block 
shown in Fig. 2. 
m by means of the screw-pins n n, passing 
To insure perfect and uniform work in cut 
freely through slots o O formed in said plates, 
ting the neck of the stud, it is important that 
said jaws being forced together by the springs 
the disk should be locked to prevent the slight 
O'o', all as shown in Fig. 16. 
est circumferential or other movement during 
The bed ol' frame in whicla are formed the 
the time the neck is being formed, and also 
guideways l', i, and i, is composed of three 
that the cutter - head stock should be held 
pieces, p, p, and p, secured together by screws 
firmly in a fixed position while the cutter is 
or rivets for convenience in constructing the 
operating upon the stud to form the neck. 
several guideways, the whole being supported 
This is accomplished in the following manner: 
upon and secured to the arched stand L, bolted 
The disk is first brought into position with the 
to the cross-tie A of the frame A. 
axis of the blank held between the clamping 
M is a cutter-head stock, having mounted 
jaws in line with the axis of the drill by means 
in suitable boxes M'M', adapted to be adjusted 
of the registering bar or rod H, to which an 
by the wedge q and screw q', a sleeve, ', the 
intern littent reciprocating motion is imparted 
inner bore of which is eccentric to its outer pe 
by the cam C, and then the disk E is locked 
riphery, and having formed upon one end there 
by the bolt s being forced radially into the 
of, outside of its bearing, the spur-gear and 
hole d in the plated by the inclined slots in 
hub '', one side of which hub is made concave, 
the arm P', secured upon and moving with the 
as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 8. 
rod P, acting upon the pin s, projecting up 
A gear-wheel, N, having cogs or teeth on 
Ward from the bolts, as shown in Fig. 11. 
only about two-thirds of its periphery, is 
When the cutter-head stock M has completed 
mounted by its hub in a bearing in the tie-girt 
its motion toward the disk and before the ec 
A, said hub surrounding and forming a bear 
centric sleeve r commerices to rotate to move 
ing for the forward end of the disk-shaft E, 
the cutter into contact with the stud for the 
which revolves freely therein. 
purpose of cutting the neck, the cam C', acting 
To the front face of the wheel N is secured 
upon the lever P, causes the tapering lower 
the bevel-wheel N, which engages with and is 
end of the registering and locking bolt P to 
rotated by the bevel-gear wheel F. 
be forced into a detent-notch having tapering 
To the rear side of the gear-wheel N, oppo 
sides formed in the upper edge of the rod P, 
site that portion of its periphery where there 
as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2, thus cor 
are no teeth, is secured the segmental plateN, 
recting any irregularities in the forward move 
the outer edge of which engages with the con 
ment of the cutter-head stock, caused by wear 
22,1s. 
5 
The end of the chuck-head 
of the parts or otherwise, and firmly locking 
the same in position. 
The cutter-headstock may be adjusted nearer 
to or farther from the disk by means of the 
coupling P, connecting the two parts of the 
rod P by means of right and left hand screw 
threads. 
has formed 
therein a recess, the walls of which are slightly 
undercut to receive and close upon the dove 
tailed hubt of the tool-holding ring t, in which 
is set the cutter t?, fitted to a dovetailed groove 
in the side thereof, said ring being cut apart 
in the rear of said cutter, and cut nearly apart 
upon the opposite side thereof by the slitt, as 
shown in Figs. 22 and 23. 
The clamping of the chuck-head upon the 
ring-holder t causes said ring to be nipped up 
on the cutter t and hold it firmly in position. 
The cutter-spindle and eccentric sleeve are 
so arranged and adjusted that when the ec 
centric sleeve is at rest the axis of the cutter 
spindle shall coincide, or nearly coincide, with 
the axis of the stud-blank clamped in the disk 
and With the axis of the drill, with the cutter 
t at such a distance from the center of said 
spindle that the head-stock may be fed toward 
the disk with the cutter revolving about the 
head of the blank without touching said head. 
Rotary motion is imparted to the cutter 
spindle by means of the belt Q, leading from 
the pulley 18 to and around the pulley O. 
Friction is applied to the periphery of the 
disk to prevent too great a movement around 
its axis by the spring - pressed brake at, as 
shown in Fig. 10. 
The discharge bar or rod G carries at its 
rear end a truck, with which the path of the 
cam C7 engages, and imparts to said rod an 
intermittent endwise motion. 
An upwardly-projecting lug, G, is formed 
on the rear end of the bar G, and engages 
with the adjustable bolt-head it, set in the 
lever G', causing the movable end of said 
lever, together with the plunger at, connected 
thereto, to be moved toward the disk to 
straighten the toggle E, which at the time is 
directly over the shaft E, thereby depressing 
the rear end of a lever, E, and causing the 
clamping-jaw ( to close upon and clamp a 
blank just fed between it and the jaw c'. 
The bar G also has mounted upon a suitable 
stud set in its under side a truck, v, which fits 
into the curved path v, formed in the upper 
side of the curved lever R, pivoted at 0 to a 
stand or ear projecting inward from the frame 
A, all so arranged that a movement of the bar 
G toward the disk will cause the lever R to 
vibrate about its fulcrum and its free end to 
strike and break or throw out of a straight 
line one of the toggles E, and remove the 
pressure of the clampingjaws from the finished 
stud when in a position to be discharged. 
The front end of the bar G has set therein 
a steel discharge-plunger, , which engages 
with the tubular end of the stud and forces it 
Out of the disk when the bar G is moved for 
Ward. 
S is a curved arm secured upon the bar G 
and moving therewith, to the lower end of 
which is pivoted one end of the lever, S', ex 
tending horizontally across the machine in 
the rear of the disk, the opposite end of which 
rests in a slot in an ear of the girt T, and is 
held against the end of said slot by the spring 
S', as shown in Fig. 21. 
In a central hub of the girt T, directly in 
the rear of and in line with the center between 
the lower pair of clamping-dies in the disk 
when at rest, is mounted a testing-point, c, 
surrounded by a spring, c', which tends to 
move it away from the disk and keep its head 
bearing against the lever S, as shown in 
Fig. 5. 
A lever, ac, having a cam-shaped inner edge 
to rest against the end of lever S, is secured 
upon the lower end of a short vertical shaft, 
at, mounted in suitable bearings and carrying 
at its upper end the stop-pawl ac, which is 
made to engage with a notch in the side of 
the shipper-rod a by the tension of the 
spring at, coiled around the shaft act. 
At every forward movement of the bar G 
the end of the lever S, connected thereto, is 
moved a given distance and causes the test 
ing-pin ic to be advanced into the hollow of 
the tubular shank of the stud, the other end 
of said lever remaining in contact with the 
end of the slot in the ear T of the girt T; but 
if from any cause a stud should reach the po 
sition in front of the testing-point 20 without 
having its shank drilled out, or only partially 
drilled out, the point v, when it is moved for 
ward by the lever S, comes in contact, with 
the solid center of the stud and its forward 
motion is arrested, and as a consequence the 
middle of the lever S cannot move fartherto 
ward the disk, but the pin it becomes a full 
crum around which the lever Spivots; and 
while the end connected to arm S continues to 
move toward the disk, the opposite end is 
moved in the opposite direction, and acting 
upon the cam-shaped inner edge of the lever 
a causes it and the pawl acto be moved out 
Ward, disengaging the shipper-rod a, and al 
lowing the spring a to act to ship the belt 
and stop the machine. 
Uis a cutter-headstockmounted and adapted 
to be reciprocated upon a dovetailed slide 
formed upon the stand U", secured to the cross 
ties of the legs B. 
The cutter-head U is fitted up with boxes, 
adjusting-wedge, and screw, hollow spindle, 
furcated chuck-head, hand-wheel, driving-pull 
ley, and tubular coupling-spindle for operat 
ing the chuck-head, all constructed and ar 
ranged as in the cutter-head stock M; but no 
eccentric sleeve is used in the head-stock U. 
Rotary motion is imparted to the spindle of 
the cutter-head U by means of the belt U, 
leading from the pulley I to and around the 
pulley U on said spindle. 
- 
 
22, ES 
The chuck-head carries a cutter-headl and 
cutter substantially like that shown in Figs. 
24 and 25, and is arranged with its axis in 
line with the center of the lowest pair of 
clamping-dies when the disk is at rest. 
A reciprocating motion is imparted to the 
cutter-head stock U by means of the cam C, 
lever V, and rod V, said rod being made in 
two parts, connected together by means of the 
coupling-sleeve W, provided with right and 
left hand Screw-threads in a Well-known mall 
0. 
A spring, y, surrounds the rod V between 
the coupling-sleeve V and the stand W, bolted 
to the under side of the cross-tie A of the 
frame A, and through which the rod V passes, 
said spring serving to keep the cam-truck on 
the lever V bearing against the inner wall of 
the path in the calm C and present a resist 
ance to the movement of the cutter-head stock 
toward the disk sufficient to prevent it from 
jumping toward the disk in such a way as to 
injure the head of the stud. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In combination with an intermittently 
1'otating and clamp-carrying disk adapted to 
receive the blanks, hold them in a fixed posi 
tion therein, and convey them in succession 
to the different points of operation, and then 
1emain in a state of rest while the blanks are 
being operated upon, an automatically-oper 
ated drill arranged upon one side of said disk, 
With its axis at right angles to the plane of 
revolution of said disk, and adapted to be 
moved endwise toward and from the same, 
and a cutting-tool arranged upon the other 
side of said disk and adapted to be rotated at 
a high rate of speed, and to be moved toward 
and from the disk at right angles to the plane 
of movement thereof, and laterally to form an 
eccentric neck in the head of a stud at the 
Same time that a shank is being drilled, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In combination with an intermittently 
rotating disk having mounted thereon and ro 
tating there with two or more pairs of auto 
matically-operated clamping-dies, an auto 
matically - operated drill and a discharge 
plunger arranged upon one side of said disk, 
and adapted to operate upon different studs 
at the same time, and a rotating cutting-tool 
arranged upon the other side of said disk, and 
adapted to be moved toward and from the 
(lisk at right angles to the plane of movement 
thereof, and then to be moved laterally to 
form an eccentric neck in the head of a stud 
While a shank is being drilled, substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination of the disk El, two or 
more pairs of clamping-dies, c c', two or more 
levers, E, two or more toggle joints, E', and 
the Spider E, all mounted upon and adapted 
to be intermittently revolved with the shaft 
E, and an automatically-operated push-pin or 
plunger adapted to act upon and straighten 
each of the toggles E in succession, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
4. The combination of the disk E, two or 
more pairs of clamping-dies, cc, two or more 
levers, E, two or more toggles, E, and the 
Spider EP, all mounted upon and adapted to be 
intermittently rotated with the shaft. E, an 
automatically - operated push-pin or plunger 
adapted to straighten each of said toggles in 
Succession, and an automatically - operated 
push-point adapted to break or bend each of 
said toggles in succession, substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
5. In combination with three or more pairs 
of automatically - operated clamping - dies, 
mounted upon an intermittently rotating disk, 
each adapted to close upon a blank while the 
disk is in a state of rest, hold it firmly during 
the several operations of drilling the shank 
and shaping the head of a stud, and then re 
lease it, a mechanism for separating a single 
blank from others in bulk and feeding it be 
tween a pair of dies, and two rotating cutters 
for finishing the heads of the studs, all ar 
'anged upon one side of said disk, and each 
Opposite a different pair of said dies when 
the taller are at rest, and an automatically 
operated drill and a discharge-plunger ar. 
Iranged upon the other side of said disk, and 
adapted to act upon two different studs at the 
same time, substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
6. In combination with the vertical guide 
way h", horizontal guideways it and i, and 
plungel's and j, the Spring-actuated stop-pin 
l, all arranged and adapted to operate sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
7. In combination with the horizontal guide 
way i and the feed-plunger j, the plunger i, 
Spring-actuated pin l, and the yielding jaws 
1. ), all arranged and adapted to operate sub 
Stantially as and for the purposes described. 
S. The combination of the feed-plungeri, 
the block m, mounted loosely on said plunger 
and provided with the push-finger i, the elbow 
lever l, plunger i, and guideways h, , and i, 
all arranged and adapted to operate substan. 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
9. In combination with the vibrating hop 
per g, guide-fingers (f, and inclined chute h, 
the Spring g, arranged and adapted to oper 
ate substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
10. The combination of the hollow spindle 
r, the furcated chuck-head', fitted to a coni 
cal bearing in said sleeve and connected 
there with SO as to be compelled to revolve 
thereWith While it may be freely moved end 
Wise therein, and provided in its outer end 
With a circular recess having a slightly under 
Cut periphery, and the partially-divided ring 
tool-holder t, provided with the hub t', having 
a conical or tapering periphery, and a dove. 
tailed radial groove to hold the cutting-tool t?, 
all arranged and adapted to operate substan 
tially as described. 
212, S. 
7 
11. In combination with a cutter-carrying 
spindle adapted to be revolved at a high rate 
of speed and to be moved endwise at the 
same time, an eccentric sleeve surrounding 
and forming a bearing. for said spindle and 
adapted to be intermittently rotated about its 
own axis to impart a lateral motion to said 
cutter-spindle, substantially as and 
for the 
purposes described. 
12. The combination of the cutter-head 
stock M, rod P, provided with a bevel-sided 
detent-notch and a cam-truck, the stand or 
bearing P, registering and locking bolt P, 
adjustable lever I?, and cams C and C, all 
arranged and adapted to operate substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
13. In combination with the furcated chuck 
head , having a conical bearing in the tubul 
lar spindle and means of drawing it into 
said conical bearing, the partially-divided an 
nular or ring tool-holder t, and the cutter t, 
fitted to a dovetailed bearing formed in the 
side of said ring, substantially as described. 
14. The combination of a cutter-carrying 
spindle adapted to be continuously revolved 
about its axis at a high rate of speed, an ec 
centric sleeve surrounding and forming a bear 
ing for said spindle, and adapted to be inter 
mittently rotated about its own axis at regul 
lar and equal intervals of time, with a period 
of rest after each complete revolution, and a 
locking device adapted to prevent said eccen 
tric sleeve from being accidentally moved 
about its axis during its period of rest, sub 
stantially as described. 
Executed at Boston, Massachusetts, this 
7th day of September, A. D. 1878. 
y 
MELLEN BRAY. 
Witnesses: 
N. C. LOMBARD, 
MELLEN N. BRAY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212281.txt	J. L., STEVENS, 
Egg-Carrier. 
No. 212,281. 
Patented Feb. 11, 1879. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN L. STEVENS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM H. 
HARRIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN EGG-CARRIERS. 
R 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,2S1, dated February 11, 1879; application filed 
January 8, 1879. 
- 
forth. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN L, STEVENS, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook, and in the 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Egg-Carriers; and do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
making a part of this specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
construction and arrangement of an egg-car 
rier tray, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe its 
construction and operation, referring to the an 
nexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my egg 
carrier tray. Fig.2 shows the different pieces 
of which the tray is composed. 
My egg-carriertrayis composed of strips AA 
and B B, of pasteboard or other suitable ma 
terial. The strips A are formed with slots a 
at suitable intervals, and extending from one 
edge inward for one-half the width of the strip, 
so that the strips can be made to interlock 
when put together. At each end of the strip 
A is formed a tongue, D, with slot d through 
it. The strips A A form the interior of the 
tray, while the strips B are used as outside 
strips, one on each side. Each strip B is pro 
vided with a series of central slots, b, corre 
sponding in size with the tongues D of the 
strips A. At one end of each strip B is formed 
a tongue, C, having a slot, ac, through it. This 
tongue is passed through a slot, l', in the ad 
jacent side strip, B. When the tray has been 
thus put together-the strips A Albeing inter 
locked and their tongues D passed through 
the slots b in the strips B, and the tongue C of 
each strip B passed through the slot b' of the 
adjacent strip-a narrow strip, F, is passed on 
each side of the tray through the slots in the 
protruding tongues, thereby locking the strips 
of the tray together. 
The tray can be folded close together for re 
turn shipment without separating the different 
strips. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
An egg-carrier tray composed of the strips 
A, having slots at and slotted tongues D, the 
strips B, having slots b b' and slotted tongue 
C, and the locking-strips F, substantially as 
herein set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 14th day of 
November, 1878. 
\ 
JOHN I. STEVENS. 
Witnesses: 
WESLEY SIssON, 
WILLIAM. H. SISSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212381.txt	E. & B. HOLMES. 
Keg-Trus sing Machine. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 212,381. 
7'2. Z 
Patented Feb. 18, 1879. 
1%, Z. 
 
  
 
2 4.4 
2. g 
2. 
 
$ 
cut--Peru. 
TATE t 
: 
c. - 
--- 
% 
 
Zezvezzzaz; 
Zazzara Zazzes, 
Z3rzzzzzz-Zozzees, 
N. PETERS, Photo-LithoGRAPHER, washington, D.C. 
. 
 
E. & B, HOLMES. 
Keg-Trussing Machine. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 212,381. 
Patented Feb. 18, 1879. 
 
vitresses, 
v- 222-ca. 
27r- e/7 26-4-ene- 
inventore, 
Za/la-Z/a/ //e/erges, 
A /*A.&6/z Z/oAerges 
2. 
7 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD HOLMES AND BRITAIN HOLMES, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK. 
MPROVEMENT IN KEGTRUSSING MACHINES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,3s, dated February 18, 1879; application filed 
January 5, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, EDWARD HOLMES 
and BRITAIN HOLMEs, both of the city of 
Buffalo, in the county of Erie and State of 
New York, have jointly invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Keg - Trussing 
Machines, which improvements are fully de 
scribed in the following specification and ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1* is a side elevation, and Fig. 1 a 
front elevation. Fig. 2 represents a vertical 
section through the reciprocating cross-head 
through line XX, Fig. 4. Fig. 3 is a side ele 
Vation of a portion of the bed-plate, showing 
a similar view of the plate arranged above it 
and the manner of its connection there with. 
Fig. 4 is a front view of the moving cross 
head and a part of the mechanism for operat 
ing the upper-side truss-hoop drivers. Fig. 5 
represents a vertical section through the bed 
piece and plate, near enough to the center to 
expose the rack arrangement and gearing for 
giving the proper movements to the lower 
truss-hoop drivers. Fig. 6 is a side elevation, 
showing the arrangement of the weight and 
Some of its connections for operating the said 
lower truss-hoop drivers; and Fig. 7 repre 
sents a side elevation of a part of the ma 
chine, showing the construction and arrange 
ment of the several levers and weights for op 
erating the upper truss-hoop drivers. 
This invention relates to the construction of 
machinery for driving truss-hoops on small 
casks and kegs of various sizes; and it con 
sists, first, of a vertically-reciprocating cross 
head having two or more automatically act 
ing and adjustable truss-hoop-driving arms 
capable of an adjustment to or from each other 
in slots radiating from the center of the cross 
head, so that they can be easily adjusted to 
receive kegs or casks of different diameters, 
in combination with a vertically-adjustable 
bed provided with two or more automatical 
ly-acting truss-hoop-driving arms capable of 
an adjustment to or from each other for the 
reasons above stated. 
The second part of our invention consists in 
the combination of a spring-plate with the bed, 
for the purpose of holding the cask up when 
there is no power being applied to it or the 
hoops, so as to afford a smooth table on which 
to set and adjust it, and through which the 
drivers can pass. 
The third part of our invention consists of 
a reciprocating cross-head provided with two 
vibrating side truss-hoop drivers, in combina 
tion with a vertically-moving weighted rod, 
and a vibrating weighted lever for operating 
the side truss-hoop drivers, as will be more 
clearly hereinafter shown. 
The fourth part of our invention consists of 
two weighted vertically-movable rods, both 
having a rack and adjustable collars, in com 
bination with the cross-head and bed plate or 
block, provided with a rack-and-pinion move 
ment and weighted levers, arranged so that 
the upward and downward movement of the 
Cross-head may be applied at any point of its 
motion to swing the truss-hoop drivers in or 
out, as will more clearly hereinafter appear. 
The fifth part of our invention consists of 
an adjustable bed supported on screws for ad 
justing it up or down, so that it can be easily 
adjusted to drive hoops on casks or kegs of 
different sizes or lengths. 
The sixth part of our invention consists in 
the combination of the truss-hoop-driving 
arms with Spring-sleeves and driving-collars, 
for purposes which will be more clearly here 
in after described. 
In the drawings, A represents the frame of 
the machine; B, the upper driving-head or 
cross-head; C, the bed or block. Cis a spring 
plate, connected thereto by the bolts C, (shown 
in Fig. 3,) which pass up through the bed, 
so as to allow a free vertical movement of 
the plate. c. c represent spiral springs for 
holding it up. The object of this plate C is 
to hold the cask up when there is no power 
being applied to the hoops, so as to afford a 
smooth table on which to set and adjust it, 
and through which the drivers pass with suffi. 
cient force. 
D in Fig. 1 represents a connecting-rod, 
of which there are two, one on each side of 
the machine, for connecting with the cranks 
D and a pin, B', projecting from each side of 
the cross-head. D is the driving-shaft. It 
is provided with a screw, d, to work into the 
screw-gear d'. dd is a tight and loose pull 
ley for operating the machine. 
The bed-plate C is arranged so as to be 
: 
: 
i 
2 
212,3S1 
moved up or down within the frame in guide 
ways, and is so moved by means of the screw 
rods E. E.', which are rigidly fastened to the 
bed C, and are operated by the two wheels e e, 
which gear together and act together, when 
turned, as nuts for adjusting the bed up or 
down. 
F G. H. I represent the truss-hoop-driving 
arms in the upper cross-head. Their connec 
tion and arrangement therewith is better 
shown in Figs. 2 and 4. The hoop-drivers F 
and H are arranged so that F will swing out 
in direction of the arrows X, and H will swing 
out in the direction of the arrow X, as shown 
in Fig. 1", or in the position shown in Fig. 2 
by said arrows. The driving-arm His jointed 
by a pin or bolt at f, and is provided with a 
half-pinion, f', which gears into the rack g. 
g is a bar, bent so as to pass around the 
shaft J. It is rigidly fastened to the rack g 
by means of a bolt, f', and is provided with a 
rack, g, which gears into the pinion J on 
shaft J. A double rack, j, is geared between 
pinions J and the toothed portion of F. . It 
will be seen that a movement of the rackg 
in the direction of the arrow h, Fig. 2, will 
cause H to swing in the direction and posi 
tion of the arrows X, and at the same time 
the rack (f, moving in the same direction, will, 
through the pinion. J., cause the double rack 
j to move in the opposite direction, as shown 
by the arrows h", thereby swinging the truss 
hoop driver F out in the direction and posi 
tion of the arrow X on the center le. 
The drivers G. I receive their motion from 
the combined action of the upper cross-head, 
the weighted rod K, and lever L, which is 
pivoted at L to an arm, L, fastened to the 
top of the frame. KL in Figs. 1 and 7 rep 
resent the Weights on said lever and rod. L* 
represents a rod arranged to move vertically 
up or down. IL are collars fastened to said 
rod by set-screws, as shown. M is a piece pro 
jecting from, or an extension of, the cross-head 
B, and moving with it. It is arranged so as 
to clasp over the rod L and move easily up 
or down thereon. In represents a rack also 
arranged to move easily up or down on said rod. 
It gears into the pinion J on shaft J', as shown 
in Figs. 1" and 7. 
M is a weighted lever jointed to a piece, M2, 
which is fastened to the frame of the machine. 
It is forked at the end, so as to clasp over the 
rod Ljust under the head m'. (Shown in 
Figs. 1" and 7.) m represents a weighted 
lever attached to shaft J. 
The operation of this part of our invention 
is as follows: When the cross-head B is in its 
lowest position, the rod LP and collars LL 
are also at the same point. A movement of 
the cross-head B upward causes the part Mto 
move up, the rack in and rod L being, made 
to follow by means of the weighted lever M. 
until stopped by the collars L coming in con 
tact with the piece m, (see Fig. 7,) after which 
the part M moves up away from the lower part 
of the rack, and allows the weighted lever m 
It will be seen that when the cross-head 
to act by falling forward and downward, there 
by turning the pinion on shaft J, and operat 
ing on the racks and upper truss-hoop drivers, 
F H, substantially as shown in Fig. 2. At 
the same time the truss-hoop drivers G.I, Fig. 
4, are made to swing apart on the centers bib 
into the position shown by the dotted lines b' 
b', by means of the cross-head B carrying the 
weighted rod K up so that its collar Kshall 
be above the highest point of the upward 
movement of the forked end K of weighted 
lever L, thereby allowing the weight K to 
move said truss-hoop drivers, as shown. In 
the downward movement of the cross-head B 
the weight L counteracts the force of the weight 
K', and causes said truss-hoop drivers to move 
inward toward each other in the proper posi-- 
tion to reach tihe truss-hoops and drive them, 
the other devices being brought into the same 
position by the action of the several parts for 
operating them being reversed. The lower 
truss-hoop drivers are also operated in a simi 
lar manner by means of the cross-head B and 
weight N, provided with a vertically-movable 
rod, N, having collars N N, and a rack, O, 
which gears into a pinion on shaft O', (shown 
in Figs. 5 and 6,) the shaft O' being provided 
with a weighted lever, P. (Shown in said fig 
ures.) 
is down the weight N and rodN, with its con 
nections, are also down to their lowest point, 
the rack O being forced down by the collar N. 
The extension P, forming a part of the cross 
head B, having passed below the collar N, al 
lows the whole weight of N and the rod N to 
hold it in that position, and the weighted le 
ver P in the position shown in Fig. 5, and by 
the dotted lines P in Fig. 6. An upward 
movement of the cross-head Will cause the pro 
jection or extension P to lift the weight N by 
pressing against the collar N, thereby allow 
ing the weighted lever P' to fall into the posi 
tion shown at Q in Figs. 5 and 6, thereby mov 
ing the rack O upward as the collar N moves 
up, which operation also turns the pinion R 
and moves both racks R. R., thereby moving 
the hoop-drivers F. H. out into the position 
shown by the dotted lines S S, Fig. 5. Both 
the upper and lower truss-hoop drivers are 
thus simultaneously operated, so that the keg 
or cask may be readily put into the machine, 
the truss-hoops driven, and then released. 
The casks or kegs are also leveled by the 
head B at the time the truss-hoops are being 
driven. 
The construction of the truss-hoop-driving 
arms is shown by the driving-arm H' in Sec 
tion, Fig. 5. 
T is a driving-head, arranged to screw up 
or down the sleeve T. This sleeve is made to 
move easily along the shaft U of the driving 
arm, which is provided with a head, U", to 
keep it on. U is a spring for forcing it out 
ward, for the purposes hereinbefore mentioned. 
WW represent vulcanized-rubber springs. 
A strong spiral metallic spring Would an 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212481.txt	A. J. LYTLE, 
Combined Sewing Implement, 
No. 212,48. 
Patented Feb. 18, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
  
1. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ANDREW J. LYTLE, OF HILISBOROUGH, OEO. 
IMPROVEMENT IN COMBIN ED SEWING IMPLEMENTS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,4s 1, dated February 18, 1879; application filed 
December 12, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW J. LYTLE, of 
Hillsborough, in the county of Highland and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Combined Ripper, 
Button-Hole Cutter, Knife, Eraser, and Let 
ter-Opener; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form part of 
this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of the case with the 
blades inclosed therein, and Fig. 2 a side 
view showing the blades opened. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
construction and arrangement of a device 
which shall embrace and combine the quali 
ties of a ripper, button-hole cutter, knife, 
eraser, and letter-opener; and to enable others 
skilled in the art to properly make and use 
it, I will describe its construction and opera 
tion. 
A represents the case or handle, which may 
be made in any convenient shape suitable to 
the inclosed instruments. b is a knife-blade, 
and c the button-hole cutter, ripper, letter 
opener, &c. Both the blade b and button 
hole cutter are secured and adapted to operate 
similarly to a blade in the ordinary pocket. 
knife. 
In Fig. 2 is seen the shape of the button 
hole cutter, &c. It has two curved cutting 
edges, e.e., which meet at the point ac, which 
peculiarly adapts the device to the several 
purposes for which it is intended. 
, If it be desired, a piece of rubber may be 
secured between the sides of the case or han 
dle for erasing pencil-marks. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination of button-hole cutter c, 
blade b, and handle A, all arranged to oper. 
ate substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
A. J. LYTLE, 
Witnesses: 
ED. E. MULLEUX, 
HARRY GLENN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212581.txt	J. D. WRIGHT 
Sewing-Machine, 
No. 212,581. 
Patented Feb. 25, 1879. 
 
22zza/ever, 
a2-4- 
Z7 vzzao 72 
o/2002 Z7.222 2z/4 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB D. WRIGHT, OF WORCESTER, MASSACEIUSETTS, 
IMPROVEMENT N SEWING MACH NES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,5s 1, dated February 25, 1879; application filed 
October 12, 1878. 
To all ch92) it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB D. WRIGHT, of 
Worcester, in the county of Worcester and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Sewing-Ma 
chines; and I declare the following to be a de 
scription of my said invention sufficiently full, 
clear, and exact to enable others skilled in the 
art to Which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication, and in which 
Figure 1 represents a front view of a portion 
of a sewing-machine, showing a vertical sec 
tion of the balance-wheel mechanism con 
structed in accordance With my invention. 
Fig. 2 is an end view of the same. Fig. 3 is 
an end view with the disk removed, showing 
the ratchet devices; and Figs. 4 and 5 are sec 
tional views, showing the details of construc 
tion of the pawl-and-ratchet devices. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in mechanism for operating and con 
trolling the action of the shaft in a sewing 
machine; and consists in the combination, with 
the shaft and balance-wheel or pulley, of a 
hand-disk and a pawl-and-ratchet mechanism 
constructed and arranged for operation as 
hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, Adenotes the goose-neck; 
B, the operating-shaft, and C the needle-bar, 
which parts, together with those not herein 
shown and described, may be of the ordinary 
construction. 
D indicates the balance and pulley wheel, 
with rim D and band-groove D. Said wheel 
D is mounted to turn loosely on the shaft B, 
and is locked to said shaft, when rotated in one 
direction, by a ratchet device suitably arranged 
for flhat purpose. In the present instance said 
ratchet is arranged upon the shaft-extension 
B at the outer end of the balance-wheel hub, 
and consists of a ring or sleeve, E, having 
teeth or notches on its inner surface, which en 
gage with the ends alternately of a pawl-pin, 
I, working loosely through a transverse open 
ing in the shaft or its extension-piece B, as 
indicated in the drawings, said ratchet-and 
pawl mechanism operating substantially simi 
lar to that described in my Letters Patent No. 
203,519, dated May 7, 1878. A pin or lug, K, 
projects from the end of the wheel-hub into a 
notch or opening in the side of the ring E, and 
causes said ring to rotate with the wheel D 
when the latter is operated by the driving-belt. 
Lindicates a disk or plate-wheel, arranged 
upon, and rigidly secured to, the shaft B, (or 
its extended end piece, Bl,) with its periphery 
or outer rim, L', adjacent to the rim D of the 
balance-wheel D, or curved over the side of 
such rim D, or bearing such relation thereto 
that both or either can be grasped or pressed 
by the hand of the operator with a natural and 
convenient movement of the hand placed on 
the wheel-rim in the usual manner. 
The operator, by grasping the wheel-rim and 
disk-rim, has as perfect control of the machine 
as with a rigidly-attached balance-wheel, while 
deriving all the benefits of a loose-running 
wheel for winding bobbins and for similar pur 
poses, and this, too, without the trouble of ad 
justing locking devices or clamps for holding 
and releasing the wheel. 
The operating parts of the machine can be 
run only in one direction, or forward, by the 
treadle mechanism and belt, the ratchet per 
mitting the pawl to pass without actuating 
the shaft when the wheel moves in a backward 
direction. 
The disk L. may be cast or struck up from 
sheet metal, and may be modified to adapt it 
to the different kinds of sewing-machines in 
use; and it may be applied to old machines as 
well as new without departing from the spirit 
of my invention. The present instance illus 
trates the invention as adapted for use on the 
Singer and similarly-constructed machines; 
but in some sewing-machines the disk or rim L. 
would be required to be placed at the oppo 
site side of the wheel, and the size and shape 
of said disk somewhat modified, in order to 
presentits limin suitable manner to be grasped 
at the same time as the balance-wheel. The 
ratchet device can also be arranged at either 
end of the wheel-hub, as required, or be 
formed in the hub, as preferred. 
In applying my invention to sewing-ma 
chines now in use, the shaft B can be extended 
to the required length by means of the exten 
sion-piece or studB, screwed into the end of the 
shaft in the manner shown, the pawl-pin Ibe 
ing arranged through said stud B, and the 
2 
. 
22,5S 
- - 
- - - 
disk L secured to its end; but in new machines 
the shaft B may beformed of sufficient length 
to obviate the necessity of the piece B, the 
disk and ratchet being placed directly on the 
end of the shaft B. 
It will be observed that this mechanism is 
simple and inexpensive, and can be applied to 
Sewing-machines now in use at but slight cost, 
and without material change in the original 
parts of the machine. 
I am aware that balance-wheels formed in 
two portions-one fast upon the shaft and the 
other running loose thereon, with clutching 
mechanism-have heretofore been used on 
sewing-machines, and I do not herein make 
claim, broadly, to such features. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination, substantially as herein 
before described, the shaft B, balance-wheel 
ID, loose upon said shaft, the disk L, rigidly 
secured to said shaft, the ratchet-ring E, pin 
K, and pawl I, for the purposes set forth. 
2. In combination with the shaft B and bal 
ance or pulley wheel in a sewing-machine, the 
extension-studB, the ratchet-ring E, the pawl 
pin I, and locking-pin K, as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
Witness my hand this 8th day of October, 
A. D. 1878. 
JACOB ID. WRIGHT, 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. H. BURLEIGH, 
F. A. HUMPHREY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212681.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM GIBSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN COMPOUND AND PROCESS FOR CRYSTALLIZING GLASS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,6s, dated February 25, 1879; application filed 
November 26, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM GIBSON, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Compound and Process for Crystallizing 
Glass; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
The nature of my invention consists in a 
compound and process for crystallizing the 
surface of glass, enameled Ware, and other 
kindred surfaces by working on the surface of 
glass, whether it be plate, plain sheet, or col 
ored, in the mass, flashed, enameled, or par 
tially stained on one or both sides, and there 
by producing certain new, ornamental, and 
useful effects in decoration, as will be herein 
after more fully set forth. 
I will first describe the compound which I 
preferably use to obtain the best results. 
I melt in a strong fire fifty parts of any or 
dinary flint or lead glass, twenty parts of sili 
cious sand, ten parts litharge in scales, and 
ten parts calcined bones. This when properly 
melted is the material I have found best suited 
as the vehicle or flux by which the various ef. 
fects can be produced. To three parts of this 
compound or mixture I add two parts, by 
measure, of calcined flint-powder. These be 
ing mixed are to be ground in Water in vari 
ous degrees of fineness, according to the ef. 
fect desired. 
mix with a little milk as a binder for plain 
grounds, and over the whole surface of the 
glass I give a uniform coat, and then Vitrify 
in the muffle or furnace in the usual manner 
known to glass-stainers. The sheets of glass 
thus coated are then heated in a tin oven or 
any safe way to prevent breakage, for the pur 
pose of expanding the particles of the mate 
rial of the coating on the surface and the body 
of the glass itself as much as safety will ad 
unit of. After the glass has been thus heated 
the Whole is to be coated with a strong Solu 
tion of gelatine or any of the known hard and 
non-elastic vegetable gums or albumenized 
pastes. This being allowed to dry and harden 
is to be removed by heatin a gas-heated stove, 
or by any other safe or convenient method, 
thereby producing crystalline effect over the 
whole surface of the glass. 
In place of the above I may add to the origi 
nal compound one-fourth of a part of white 
oxide of tin, or the same quantity of purple 
Oxide of cobalt or the oxides of chrome or of 
iron, and using gum-water instead of milk, 
and with this paint I cover such parts of the 
glass only as it is desired to crystalline, and 
remove with any of the coatings, as in the 
first process. By this I obtain clear glass and 
crystalline on the same glass, and in such 
quantity as it may be required. 
The object of these additions to the origi 
nal compound is that in many of the designs 
it may be desirable to leave certain portions . 
of the ground on the glass; and such portions 
so left having a white, red, blue, or other tint, 
it becomes a great aid to the artist in giving 
a texture in his after-finish of leaves, vines, 
draperies, &c., and as one or all may be so 
used on the Same glass gives a great com 
mand of facilities in producing effects. 
Particular effects may be controlled with 
perfect certainty. For instance, when I want 
to produce a stippled or granulated effect I 
apply any of the mixtures first described with 
Olt first heating or expanding the glass just 
Where this effect is desired, and as soon as 
covered, and while still wet, I place it in a 
moderately-heated oven and evaporate or dry 
quickly, increasing the heat so as to remove 
the material at one operation. 
When it is desired to produce large flakes 
or fern-leaf effects, I, after coating the glass. 
with any of the above-described mixtures, use 
real leaves themselves, or cut forms in paper, 
or use pieces of string, open-figured lace, or 
any of the many kindred substances that will 
suggest themselves to the artist in forming 
his design. These, after having been placed 
as taste may suggest on the glass with One or 
more of the adhesive mixtures, are to be coated 
over in whole or in part with one or more coats, 
thus leaving the glass coated in uneven thick 
ness, and being allowed to harden and to be re 
moved by heat, as before described. 
Transparent colors, silver, gold, &c., may 
also be added for mural decorations, panelings 
for furniture, &c. All the various effects may 
be produced on the same glass where defined 
spaces are controlled by design and outline. 
Where a brilliant stony gem effect is required 
2 
- 
22,6S 
a piece of paper embedded in the mass of any 
of the adhesive matters, and made strong and 
of irregular thickness, will give results which, 
although brilliant, have a rounded and not a 
sharp prismatic effect. Again, by coating the 
glass with the adhesive mixture in which has 
been mixed a small proportion of glycerine 
together with some foreign material, such as 
clay, whiting, fullers' earth, or their equiva 
lents, and embedding a sheet of paper or thin 
muslin over the surface of glass in this paste 
mixture on its removal by heat, as before de 
cribed, the prism flakes assume a great size 
and brilliancy, and are valuable for glass 
stainers as a new surface for picture effects. 
When it is desired to produce effects which, 
to the artist, will suggest shells, worms, and 
insects along with the vegetation, I apply the 
adhesive mixture with a small brush, or from 
a syringe forming convolutions or spiral lines 
This should be done 
of different thicknesses. 
with a very strong material, and being allowed 
to dry is again coated over the whole surface, 
with the pasty mass made thinner and weaker 
by the addition of a little Water. The object 
of this is to have the glass coated over with 
kindred substances, weak over strong, or strong 
over weak, which being removed by heat, as 
before, will insure the desired effects. 
When it is desired to produce a brilliant 
uniform, but not flaky or prismatic, effect 
equally over the whole surface, I use first a 
uniform thickness of the adhesive paste, which 
being dried and removed is to be again coated 
uniformly all over, as before, and again re 
moved by heat. 
Double crystalline may be made with the 
same process, and may be used when backed 
up with colors for architectural and other pur 
pOSes. 
By adding glycerine and clay to the adhe 
sive matter, and using it in a weaker form, the 
crystalline will be more soft in its effect, 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. As a preliminary step to the production 
on glass of the various effects herein described, 
the compound or flux formed by melting to 
gether flint or lead glass, silicious sand, lith 
arge in scales, and calcined bones, or their 
equivalents, in or about the proportions set 
2. In combination with a flux, substantially 
as described, calcined flint-powder and milk, 
when mixed and applied substantially as set 
forth. 
3. The process, substantially as herein de 
scribed, of crystallizing the whole or part of 
the surface of glass by coating the desired 
surface with the compound described and 
vitrifying in the muffle, then heating the glass, 
and then coating with a non-elastic paste, 
which, when dry, is removed by heat, all sub 
stantially as herein set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
forth. 
- 
WILLIAM GIBSON. 
Witnesses: 
SPENCER. C. DOTY, 
WALTER W. GIBSON. 
... 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212781.txt	T. AITON, 
Farm - Gate. 
No. 212,781. 
Patented Mar. 4, 1879. 
| || No. 
 
 
 
? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS AITON, OF PLEASANT VIEW TOWNSHIP, EMMETT COUNTY, MICH. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FARM - GATES. 
W 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,7s, dated March 4, 1879; application filed 
December 7, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
One end of said gate is attached to standard 
Beit known that I, THOMAS AITON, of Pleas- or sub-post C by bent guide-plates E, which 
ant View township, in the county of Emmett 
allow the vertical motion of said gate. F des 
and State of Michigan, have invented certain 
ignates a lifting-lever, which is pivoted by one 
new and useful Improvements in Farm-Gates; 
end to standard C, and provided at the other 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
end with a convenient handle,f Said lever 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
has vertical vibration on its pivot, and its mid 
vention, which will enable others skilled in the 
dle part engages, when raised, with any chosen 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
one of a vertical series of catches, hooks, or 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
studs, (preferably hooks,) G, on said part D 
ing drawings, and toletters of referencemarked 
of said gate, said lever being pivoted so loosely 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
that it has a certain lateral play, allowing it 
tion. 
at will to pass over any one or more of said 
In said drawings, Figure 1 represents a front 
studs or hooks either upward or downward. 
elevation of my improved farm - gate when 
By means of these devices the gate can read 
closed. Fig. 2 represents the same, in per 
ily be raised as far as may be necessary to 
spective, with the sub-gate, or foot-passenger 
avoid obstruction by snow or other impedi. 
gate, open and locking devices withdrawn. 
ments, or to allow the passage of hogs, sheep, 
Fig. 3 represents the locking devices in detail. 
If only a 
or other small stock beneath it. 
Fig. 4 represents the stop-block in detail. 
single stud or hook were used it would be dif. 
The objects of this invention are, first, to 
ficult to raise the gate far enough for all pur 
provide convenient means for raising a farm 
poses, unless said stud or hook were set so low 
gate, SO as to prevent it from being obstructed 
down as to be inconvenient of access. Byem 
by Snow, and to allow at will the passage be 
ploying a series of said studs or hooks the said 
neath it of hogs, sheep, and other animals; 
gate can readily be raised step by step. 
secondly, to prevent the main gate from turn 
Said lever is prevented from dropping by a 
ing on its hinges when the supplementary foot 
pin, H, which is inserted at will in anyone of a 
passenger gate is opened; thirdly, to lock and 
vertical series of holes, h, at the end of part D 
brace the said gate by devices hereinafter de 
nearest to supplemental gate E. 
scribed, which can be easily withdrawn from 
I designates a stop-block, arranged below 
either side of the gate, whereby the same act 
said gate, (preferably below the middle of it,) 
unlocks the gate as a whole, and also leaves the 
and transversely recessed on top, at i, so as 
foot-passenge gate free to turn independently. 
to receive the lower rail, d, of said gate when 
This invention relates to farm-gates pro 
the latter is in its lowest position. When thus 
vided with supplementary gates for foot-pas 
in engagement the said stop-block prevents 
sengers; and it consists in the construction, 
the part D of said gate from turning on its 
combination, and arrangement hereinafter set 
hinges when the supplemental gate Eis openedl. 
forth and claimed. 
It also prevents the said part D from being 
In the accompanying drawings, A and B 
opened by accidental pressure. 
designate gate-posts of ordinary construction, 
The gate is locked by means of the follow 
and C designates a vertical standard, connect. 
ing devices: J and J designate two horizon 
ed by hinge a to post A. D designates the 
tal sliding bars, which work through the outer 
main part of a farm-gate, consisting of hori 
end of gate E into a vertical recess, b, of gate. 
Zontal rails d and vertical battens d and E 
post B. The inner ends of said bars are lon 
designates a supplemental gate, hinged at e e 
gitudinally recessed at jij'. In said recesses 
to said main part D. When said supplemental 
play pins or boltskic', connecting, respectively, 
gate only is opened space is left for the passage 
the upper ends and the lower ends of two cor 
of foot-passengers only. When said farm-gate, 
responding straps or links, L. L., which are ar 
consisting of partsD and E, is opened as a whole, 
ranged one on each side of the gate, so as to 
space is left for the passage of farm-wagons be readily grasped by the hand whichever way 
approached. 
and other vehicles, 
 
MM designate two short levers, which are 
arranged in an approximately vertical posi 
tion, and pivoted at the middle to gate E. The 
lower end of upper lever, M, is pivoted to up 
per bar, J, and the upper end of said lever M. 
is pivoted to the end of a similar bar, N, which 
Works horizontally in a reverse direction 
through the inner end of gate E into a recess, 
d, of part D. The upper end of lower lever, 
M", is pivoted to lower bar, J, and its lower 
end is pivoted to the end of a bar,N', arranged 
and Working like bar N, above described. 
The arrangement of the above parts is such 
that when the straps or links L. L are slipped 
toward the outer end of the gate the bars J J'? 
are shot so as to lock the gate to postB, and at 
the same time the bars N N are shot so as to 
lock together the parts DE. When said straps 
are moved in the reverse direction all of said 
bolts are withdrawn, leaving said supplement 
alry gate free to be opened. 
When it is desired to open the entire gate 
without affecting the rigidity of its parts, an 
additional locking device is used. This is 
preferably a hook and staple, O; but any equiv 
alent may be substituted therefor. Various 
changes may also be made in other parts of 
my gate, and its lifting, locking, and guiding 
mechanism, without departing from the spirit 
and Scope of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
The combination of post B, supplementary 
gate E, and main part D of gate, with bars J 
J N N., levers MM, and connecting link-bars 
or straps on each side of the gate, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two Witnesses. 
THOMAS AITON. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID TILLOTsoN, 
E. W. GLEASON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212881.txt	W. BACHTENKIR CH, 
Lifting-Handle for Chests or Boxes, 
No. 212,881. 
Patented Mar. 4, 1879. 
A%2. / 
 
27%zz 
/2- a 222/ 
N. PETERS, Photo-HogRAPHER, wASHNGTON, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELM BACHTENKIRCH, OF ISERLOHN, WESTPHALIA, PRUSSIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN LIFTING-HANDLES FOR CHESTs or BoxES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212, SS1, dated March 4, 1879; application filed 
December 2, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILHELM BACHTEN 
KIRCH, of Iserlohn, Westphalia, Prussia, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Lifting-Elandles; and I do hereby declare the 
following, when taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawings and the letters of 
Ieference marked thereon, to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, and which 
said drawings constitute part of this specifi 
cation, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a front view; Fig. 2, a side view. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in that class of lifting-handles designed for 
chests, boxes, &c.; and consists in the con 
struction hereinafter described, and shown in 
the accompanying drawings. 
a is the base or plate, made from sheet or 
other suitable metal, pierced or provided with 
means for attachment to the box or whatever 
it may be. 
Longitudinally across the plate, on the back 
side, is a groove, made by bending the plate, 
as at b. This groove is of U shape, and pro 
duces a corresponding rise upon the outside, 
and across this groove or ribb two cuts, c, are 
made. 
The handle d is made of wire or other suit 
able material, and of any desirable bend or 
form. 
The two ends are brought into line with 
each other, so as to lie in the groove in the 
plate, the extreme ends being turned outward 
into the cuts or openings c, so that when the 
plate is attached to the box it holds the han 
dle in the groove; and the ends of the handle, 
when turned upward, as in Fig. 2, bear against 
the front of the plate, as a support against 
which to lift, 
I do not claim a lifting-handle constructed 
so that the bar or plate serves as the means 
of holding the handle in place when attached 
to the trunk, as this I know to be old; but 
- 
I do claim- 
The herein-described improvement in lift 
ing-handles, consisting of the base or plate con 
structed with a longitudinal groove in its back, 
combined with a handle supported in said 
groove, its ends turned outward through open 
ings in said groove, substantially as described. 
WILHELM BACHTENKIRCH. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
H. LEWIs, 
GUSTAV RAFFENBERG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US212981.txt	Means for Ventilating Sewer-Pipes and De Odorizing 
A. W. RAND, 
- 
the Foul Air There from. 
No. 212,98 
Patented Mar. 4, 1879. 
NPETERS. Photo-THOGRAPHER, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM W. RAND, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN MEANS FOR WENTLATING SEWER-PIPES AND DE0DORIZING THE FOUL AIR 
THEREFROM, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,9s 1, dated March 4, 1879; application filed 
January 22, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM W. RAND, of 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented a 
new and useful. Improvement in Means for 
Ventilating Sewer-Pipes and Deodorizing the 
Foul Air therefrom, of which the following is a 
specification: 
The object of my invention is to prevent the 
foul air in the sewer-pipes of dwellings from 
passing upwa d through the waste-pipes of 
closets, wash-basins, &c., and to render such 
foul air innocuous by subjecting it to heat in 
1 its passage through a ventilating-pipe. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
all elevation of a sewer-pipe and waste-pipes 
of a dwelling with my improvement, and Fig. 
2 a transverse section on the line 1 2. 
A is the sewer-pipe, placed beneath the 
floor of the cellar, and communicating with the 
sewer, the pipe having the usual trap a. B 
B' represent the Waste-pipes of water-closets, 
Wash-basins, or sinks, each pipe having the 
usual trap b, and communicating with the 
main pipe A. In this pipe there is always 
more or less foul Water and trapped air, which 
is rendered fetid by contact with the water 
and with foul matter which adheres to the in 
Iner surface of the pipe. 
When the contents of a closet or wash-basin 
are discharged into one of the waste-pipes, 
they necessarily impart a temporary pressure 
to the air in the main pipe A, and the air is 
consequently forced upward through another 
waste-pipe, and through the trap b of the same. 
Thus, if d is the basin of a water-closet, and e 
a Washi-basin, and the contents of the former 
be discharged through the waste-pipe B' into 
the main pipe A, foul air will be forced through 
the pipe B, and through its trap into the room 
where the Wash-basin e is situated. 
Attempts have been made to remedy this 
evil by forming a communication between the 
pipe A and a flue, or by carrying a ventilating 
tube from the pipe A to a point above or near 
the roof of the building; but this is only a 
partial remedy, for the foul air often enters 
dwellings through open windows or doors, and 
where there are a number of houses with such 
ventilating-pipes, the air in the neighborhood 
must necessarily be fouled with the exhala 
tions. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM J. COOPER, 
HARRY SMITH, 
- 
eScape. 
I entirely remedy the evil by combining the 
main pipe A with a ventilating-tube, D, which 
communicates with a box or receptacle, E, ex 
posed to the heat of any stove, range, or fire 
place, and having an outlet-tube, H. 
The box E, in the present instance, forms one 
end of the fire-place of a range, I, and is ex 
posed to the direct action of the burning fuel 
in the same, the box being perfectly tight, and 
having partitions which compel the foul air to 
take a zigzag or circuitous course before it can 
In passing through the box, and in intimate 
contact with the heated plates of which the 
said box is composed, the foul air from the 
pipe A is rendered innocuous, and the pipe is 
so thoroughly ventilated that no air can pass 
upward from it through the waste-pipes. 
The box E may form a part of any ordinary 
stove or fire-place, or of a special heater, and 
may be constructed in different ways. A coiled 
or zigzag tube may, for instance, be substi 
tuted for the box, providing it is subjected to 
the desired heat. 
While the tube E may communicate with 
any flue through which the products of com 
bustion are conveyed to the chimney, I prefer 
to carry the tube upward through the flue and 
chimney to a point at or near the top of the 
same, so as to insure the most thorough ven 
tilation of the pipe A. 
I am aware that the gases from a sewer 
have been conducted to the space below the 
grate of a furnace. This, therefore, I do not 
claim; but 
I claim as my invention 
The combination of the sewer-pipe A and 
the waste-pipes communicating there with, with 
a box, E, or other equivalent receptacle, at 
tached to or forming part of a range, stove, 
fire-place, or other heater, and exposed to the 
fuel therein, but having no communication 
there with, and with the tube D and outlet-tube 
H, all substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
ABRAHAM W. RAND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213081.txt	m 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
L, WILLIAMS, 
Machine for Making Pail-Bails. 
No. 213, O8. 
Patented Mar. 11, 1879. 
 
0S (D S 
A 
evil' Fiti Z 
( 
r 
wITNESSEs. 
INVENICER. 
4/372277 
?24-c% 
PreRS, Photo-lifhoGRAPHER, washington, D.c. 
L, WILLIAMS. 
Machine for Making Pail-Bails. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 213,081. 
Patented Mar. 11, 1879. 
 
WingsSS 
42,7442 
44%.7- 
Invester - 
- 
- Zew 7/6%4, 
% yieze, 264 
cave 
N.PEERs, Photo-HogRAPHER, washNGTON, d. c. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS WILLIAMS, OF BENNINGTON, VERMONT. 
IMPROVEMENT IN MACHINES FOR MAKING PAL-BALS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 213,0s, dated March 11, 1879; application filed 
October 24, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEWIS WILLIAMS, of 
Bennington, in the county of Bennington and 
State of Vermont, have invented an Improve 
ment in Machines for Making Pail-Bails, of 
which the following is a specification: 
This invention relates to improvements in 
machinery for forming the eyes of pail-bails 
constructed from wire, and is a modification 
of the machine for making pail-bails for a 
United States patent upon which I made ap 
plication July 25, 1878, and upon which ap 
plication Letters Patent of the United States 
of America No. 209,998, bearing date Novem 
ber 19, 1878, were duly issued to me. 
In both cases substantially the same ma 
chinery is employed for supplying the handles 
or woods to the machine for feeding in and 
cutting of the wire, passing it through the 
handle, forming the offsets in the wire at each 
end of the handle, and forming the principal 
semicircular bend of the bail, for a specific 
description of which reference may be made 
to said Letters Patent. 
In the accompanying drawings, consisting 
of two sheets, which form part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a plan view of my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a view, in elevation, of an ir 
regular vertical longitudinal section of my 
machine, taken on the lines 12 and 34 of Fig. 1, 
and exhibits that aspect of such section which 
is presented when viewed in the direction of 
arrow 5. Figs. 3 and 4 are, respectively, side 
and end elevations of the device for bending 
the wire at the ends of the bail to form the 
eyes. Fig. 5 shows a side elevation of the 
crimp-lever which carriesthe stud around which 
the eye is formed. Fig. 6 shows the combina 
tion and co - operation of the wire - guides, 
winder, and crimp-lever in forming the eye of 
a bail, and also shows the style of eye formed 
by this machine; and Fig. 7 shows a bail made 
by this machine and its mode of attachment 
to an ordinary pail. 
Bails shaped by this machine are adapted 
to be attached to pails or buckets by means of 
hooks or staples driven into or otherwise at 
tached to the side of the pail, whieh hooks or 
staples serve as ears, as seen in Fig. 7. 
In addition to the machinery above alluded 
to for carrying out the several manipulations 
of the bail-wire prerequisite to the formation 
of the eyes at the ends of the bail, I have pro 
vided a fixed or stationary former, A', having 
its front edge recessed away for the reception 
of the bail-handle, and provided on either side 
of said recess with a die in all respects like 
the recess and dies found described in said 
Letters Patent, and having its bending con 
tour of similar shape. 
At each heel of former A' is constructed a 
grooved wire-guide, either made solid or com 
posed of two cheek-pieces, F and F', Figs. 1, 
2, and 6, of which the under one, F', projects 
to the rear slightly beyond the upper one, F. 
The groove for the reception and confine 
ment of the end of the bail-wire lies between 
said cheeks, as seen at s', Fig. 2. 
Upon the upper surface of former A are 
mounted, in suitable bearings H K H', the 
winders G. G. The inner end of each of said 
winders is provided with a bevel gear or pin 
ion, I? I, which engages with and receives 
motion from the duplex segmental bevel-gear 
E", mounted on shaft J. 
From the center or hub of duplex gear E/ 
is a projecting arm, to the outer extremity of 
which is attached a laterally-projecting stud 
or friction-bowl, r, (all shown in broken lines 
in Fig. 2.) which stud or projection r works in 
and receives action from cam-groove G." G' of 
driving-cam Z. 
The shape and configuration of cam-groove 
G' are such as to impart to duplex gear E', 
through projection r, Working therein, a recip 
rocating rotary movement, and thence to the 
winders G. G', through pinions II", a recipro 
catory rotary movement of something less 
than a complete revolution. 
Each of the disks, or winders G. G' is pro 
vided with a projecting pin or finger, c', Figs. 
1, 3, 4, and 6, the function of which is to en 
gage the free end of the bail-wire as it is con 
fined between cheeks F and F', and wrap or 
wind the same around stude' of crimp-lever 
C', as shown in Fig. 6. 
Crimp-levers C C are pivoted upon inde 
pendent centers having their axes of oscilla 
tion, parallel with the axes of winding-disks 
G G', and a little in rear thereof. They are 
 
2 
23,08. 
 
rights and lefts in form, and of the general 
shape shown in Figs. 2 and 5. They receive 
their vibratory movement from cams B B on 
shaft E, acting on tappets a n at the extremi 
ties of the long arms of said levers. 
From theinsideface of the short arm of crimp 
lever C extends a peculiarly-shaped lateral 
projection or wing, at', having its upper con 
tour concentric with stude'. 
To the long arm of lever C a retractile 
spring, D', is attached, the other end of which 
is connected with the frame of the machine. 
These springs serve to keep the tappets in n. 
in contact with the peripheries of cams B. B. 
When the tappets are riding on the lowest 
portion of the edges of cams B B', or on that 
portion nearest the shaft E, the stude" will 
be elevated above the groove between cheeks 
F and F', so that the wire of the bails under 
going formation, in process of being Wrapped 
or bent around the edge of former A' and 
forced into grooves' by the Wire-benders W. 
W, will be brought directly under and athwart 
stude', in a position spanning its path of ro 
tation. 
Motion is imparted to shaft E and its cams, 
upon which the mechanism for forming the 
bail-eyes is dependent from main driving-shaft 
B, through counter-shaft G and appropriate 
gearing. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
Presupposing that the wire has been fed into 
the machine by means of feed-rolls M. M., 
passed through one of the handlesff", cut 
off by shear-blades e d, dropped into position 
in front of former A', there grasped and held 
while the offsets at each end of the handle 
were formed, bent around the edge of former 
A by means of wire-benders W W moving 
up against the wire, and by reason of the re 
sistance offered by wire-bender guides Y Y, 
wrapping the same around the edges of said 
former A' until the extremities lie in the 
grooves sis', we arrive at that stage in the 
process where the eye-forming devices come 
into action. 
While the last-described operations have 
been going on, the several devices for forming 
or bending the eye proper of the bail have 
lain dormant, for the reason that stud , at 
tached to the duplex segmental gear. E", has 
lain in the concentric or inoperative portion. 
of the cam-groove G' of driving-cam Z, and 
tappets in a have been in contact with the 
lowest concentric or inoperative portion of 
cams B B', thus elevating the studs e' e?' 
above and over the position to be occupied by 
the end of the bail-wire after the same has, by 
the wire-benders WW, been forced into posi 
tion in groovess's to be acted upon. At this 
time winding-finger c' of disk G' occupies a 
position underneath and to the right of wing 
(t', as viewed in Fig. 5, and segment-gear E! 
is rotated down to the lowest limit of its path 
of travel. From this point the further pro 
gressive revolution of shaft E will first bring 
the incline at' of cam B against tappet in, 
thus causing the elevation of the long arm of 
crimp-lever C, and a consequent depression of 
the short arm to which wing a' is attached. 
Such depression brings stude' to bear against 
wire ' as it lies in grooves', just opposite 
the projecting extremity of cheek F", which 
presents an abutment of resistance to the 
wire. The result of the depressionis, that the 
end of the bail-wire is bent down across the 
corner or ledge of cheek F" as the initial step 
toward forming the eye, and at the same time 
stude' is brought into axial conjunction with 
the center of disk G, where it remains sta 
tionary during the performance of the conse 
quent operations necessary to complete the 
bending of the eye by reason of the tappet in 
riding upon the highest concentric portion of 
the periphery of cam B. 
From the instant stude' has been thrown 
into position opposite, center of disk G', 
grooved cam Z commences to act on stud r 
by forcing it downwardly or away from the 
axis of movement of cam Z, thus producing 
an upward rotary movement of segment-gear 
E', and, by its engagement with and action 
upon pinion I, causes a partial revolution in 
the opposite direction of disk G' to the ex 
tent of carrying winding-finger c' from its 
position under winga', around stude", to the 
position shown in Fig. 6. 
By reason of the engagement offinger c' 
with the extremity of the bail-wire in the last 
described movement the wire is bent or Wound 
around stude', as seen in Fig. 6, and a com 
plete and perfect eye is formed. From this 
point the further revolution of grooved cam 
Z, brings into action upon stud the retract 
ing portion of groove G', thereby causing 
segment E", pinion I, and disk G' to reverse 
their respective rotary movements and return 
to the positions respectively occupied by each 
before the described operation of bending an 
eye was commenced. The same revolution of 
cam-shaft E will also have carried cam B. 
around, so that tappet n will rest or bear on 
the lowest concentric portion of the periph 
ery of cam B', whereby stude" will be re 
turned to its former position above the plane 
of groove s', as before the bending com 
Upon the completion of the process of 
bending the eye the spring of the bail-wire 
effects its own release from connection with 
the bending appliances, all of which having 
receded from contact with the bail-wire, the 
same is free to spring out and drop to the 
floor or into any suitable receptacle; hence, 
I claim as new and of my invention 
In machines for automatically manufactur 
ing pail-bails from wire, the combination of 
the group of co-operative devices for produc 
ing the initiative bend in the formation of the 
eye of the bail, embracing cheeks F. F" and 
crimping-levers C'C', armed with wings a' and 
center studs, e?', with the group of co-operative 
menced. 
- 
213,0s1 
3 
devices for completing the formation of the 
eye by winding or bending, embracing disks 
G', armed with winding-fingersc', and adapted 
to execute a reciprocating rotary movement 
through the agency of cams. and levers or 
other suitable appliances, substantially as de 
Scribed, and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 4th day of October, A. 
D. 878. 
IEWIS WILLIAMS, 
In presence of - 
FRANKLIN SCOTT, 
N. A. BURRITT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213181.txt	L. DUSTIN. 
Sewing-Machine. 
No. 213,181 
Patented Mar. 11, 1879. 
 
 
 
s 
e 
Zeroccer 
 
N.Peters, photo-lthographER, WAShington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEANDER IDUSTIN, OF ELIZABETEI, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE SINGER 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF NEW YORK CITY. 
MPROVEMENT IN SEWING MACH NES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 213, as g, dated March 11, 1879; application filed 
November 17, 1877. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEANDER. DUSTIN, of 
Elizabeth, in the county of Union and State 
of New Jersey, have made an invention of 
certain new and useful Improvements in Sew 
ing-Machines; and that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description and specification 
of the same. 
- The object of this invention is to enable a 
wheel presser-foot to be employed in a sew 
ing-machine without inconvenience. A wheel 
presser-foot should be arranged with the rim. 
of the presser-wheel in close proximity to the 
needle. When arranged in this position the 
disk of the wheel covers the side of the needle, 
and prevents free access to the needle, both 
for threading its eye and for setting it in the 
needle-bar. 
In order that the use of a wheel presser-foot 
may not be attended with these disadvan 
tages, I have made use of a presser-wheel 
which is combined with the presser-bar by 
means of a hinge-pivot, or its equivalent, and 
a bolt, catch, or other securing device, so that 
the hinge-pivot permits the presser-wheel to 
be readily turned out of the way or into place 
without affecting its connection with the press 
er-bar and with the spring by which it is borne 
downward upon the article being sewed, while 
the catch or bolt secures the presser-wheel in 
its place rigidly, so that the presser-wheel is 
as effective as if it were connected with the 
presser-bar and its spring without the inter 
vention of a hinge or joint. 
In order that the first part of my invention 
may be embodied...I have so arranged and com 
bined the bolt or catch of the presser-wheel 
relatively to the head of the bracket-arm, or 
other suitable part of the machine, and with 
the raising-lever of the presser-foot, that when 
the wheel presser-foot is raised by the lever 
usually provided for that purpose, the catch 
or bolt is disengaged from the stock of the 
presser-wheel, so as to free the latter and per 
mit it to be turned out of the way. This ar 
rangement and combination require but one 
lever to effect the two operations of raising 
the wheel presser-foot and of freeing the 
presser-wheel, and makes the manipulation of 
a machine with a wheel presser-foot very easy 
and convenient for the operator. 
In order that the invention may be fully un 
derstood, I have represented it in the accom 
panying drawings, and will proceed to de 
scribe the best mode in which I have thus far 
embodied it in a working machine. 
Figure I of said drawings represents the 
head of the bracket-arm of a sewing-machine 
with my improvements applied thereto. Fig. 
2 represents the same with the presser-wheel 
turned up. Fig. 3 represents an edge view 
of the said head and appurtenances. Fig. 4 
represents an inside view of the presser-wheel 
attachment detached from the presser-bar, 
and Fig. 5 represents an edge view of the 
same, the reverse of that represented in Fig. 
3. Fig. 6 represents a sectional view of the 
bolt-case. 
The head A of the bracket-arm in the said 
drawings, to which my invention is applied, 
is that of a Singer sewing-machine. The nee 
dle-bar B is constructed to slide vertically in 
this head in the usual manner, and the press 
er-bar C of the presser-foot is also constructed 
in the usual manner found in Singer sewing 
machines, and is fitted with the usual cam 
lever D for raising it, and for permitting it to 
be forced down by a spring concealed within 
the cavity of the head. The presser-wheel E. 
is connected with the lower end of the press 
er-bar by means of a hinge-joint, a, which in 
tervenes between the stock F of the presser 
wheel and the presser-bar C, so that the press 
er-wheel E may either be turned down to its 
operating position, as in Fig. 1, or be turned 
up, as in Fig. 2. 
In order that the presser-wheel may be held 
rigidly in its operating position a spring-bolt, 
b, is provided. This spring-bolt has a T-head, 
e, one end of which engages in a notch formed 
in the edge of the wheel-stock F, while the 
residue of the head moves in a slot formed in 
the bolt-case G, and is guided thereby. The 
spring d is applied to the stem of the bolt. 
The upper end of the spring-bolt or catch is 
arranged a short distance beneath the under 
end of the head A, so that when the presser 
bar is raised a short distance by its lever TD 
 
2 
23, 18 
the upper end of the bolt-stem comes in con 
tact with the said head, as seen at Fig. 2, and 
is thus prevented from rising farther, and that 
the continued upward movement of the press 
er-bar and wheel disengages the wheel-stock 
from the head of the catch, and thus frees the 
presser-wheel, which may then be turned up 
ward on its hinge-joint. On the other hand, 
when the presser-wheel has been turned down 
and the presser-bar is lowered, by moving the 
lever D the spring-bolt is permitted to re-en 
gage with the wheel-stock and secure the 
presser-wheel rigidly in its operating position. 
In practice, I find it expedient to construct 
the bolt-case G separately from the presser 
bar C, and with the wheel-stock pivoted to 
the bolt-case, so that the bolt-case, wheel 
stock, and presser-wheel constitute a remova 
ble presser-wheel attachment for a sewing 
machine. 
This construction is advantageous, because 
it enables a Wheel presser-foot to be used in 
a sewing-machine interchangeably with an 
ordinary sliding presser-foot, as circumstances 
render the use of one or other kind of presser 
foot expedient, the change from the one kind 
of presser-foot to the other kind being readily 
effected by unscrewing the screws, removing 
the One presser-foot, and then applying the 
other foot to the same presser-bar C, and se 
curing the presser-foot so applied by screwing 
in the screw s. 
If the presser-wheel is not required to be re 
movable from the presser-bar, the bolt-case 
may be secured rigidly to that bar, and the 
hinge-pivot may connect the wheel-stock di 
rectly with the presser-bar instead of connect 
ing it with that bar through the intervention 
of the bolt-case. 
I do not claim, broadly, the connection or 
combination of a hinged presser-wheel with 
the presser-bar of a sewing-machine, and with 
some means of securing said wheel in its op 
erative position. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of the head of the bracket-arm, the 
presser-wheel, and its hinged stock, the lever 
for raising the presser-wheel, and the spring 
bolt, arranged to be stopped when raised, and 
to thereby free the presser-wheel. 
2. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of the presser-wheel, the wheel-stock, 
the bolt, and the bolt-case, the whole consti 
tuting a presser-wheel attachment for a sew 
ing-machine. 
Witness my hand this 1st day of Novem 
ber, A. D. 1877. 
LEANDER OUSTIN. 
Witnesses: 
W. L. BENNEM, 
W. E. ISAACS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213281.txt	No. 213,281. 
 
T, DOWLING, 
Pump. 
Patented Mar. 18, 1879. 
S 
VS 
 
 
 
 
  
N 
... Yritress 25. 
--flacies 
N.FETERs, PhorouTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS DOWLING, OF GLOUCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS. 
IMPROVEMENT EN PUMPS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 23,2S, dated March 18, 1879; application filed 
January 22, 1878, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS DOWLING, of 
Gloucester, Massachusetts, have invented cer 
tain Improvements in Pumps; and that the 
same are fully described in the following speci 
fication alnd illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings. 
My improvements relate to means of rotat 
ing and adjusting a pump-handle and its sup 
porting-standard upon an air-chamber fixed 
upon the top of a pump-barrel, in combination 
With a push-rod or outward pitman-connection 
of the handle and plunger-rod and a central 
tube as a guide for the plunger-rod; to a con 
necting device by which the pump-barrel may 
be adjusted by rotation upon the top of the 
base-piece without drilling bolt-holes or remov 
ing the bolts; and to a metallic stand forfasten 
ing the pump to a plank, post, or wall. 
Miy invention consists in the new devices 
and combinations of devices described and re 
cited in the several claims. 
The drawings represent a pump embodying 
the several features of my invention 
Figure 1 being a side view thereof, and Fig. 
2 a vertical central section, taken in a plane 
at a right angle to that indicated in Fig. 1. 
A is an air-chamber, secured upon the upper 
end of the pump-barrel B. C is a standard, 
mounted upon the dome D of the air-chamber, 
and supporting the handle E, pivoted to the 
standard at e. The standard has an annular 
part, c, which surrounds the apex d of the 
dome, and the standard may be revolved on 
the air-chamber, carrying with it the handle 
E, by loosening the nut F, which screws into 
the top of the dome, and has a central aper 
ture, through which the pump-rod G recipro 
CateS. 
When the nut F is screwed down upon the 
annulus c the standardis securely held in place, 
and thus the pump-handle may be adjusted 
and held in any desired position with relation 
to the spout b. 
The handle E is connected with the plunger 
rod by means of a stiff pitman, H, which pushes 
up the piston-rod G on the lifting stroke in 
stead of pulling it, as is customary. The ef. 
fect of this is to double the length of stroke 
Without requiring undue height in the stand 
wa 
- 
ard C, and also to avoid a severe lateral strain 
upon the plunger-rod, which would follow if 
the position of the pitman were reversed. I 
provide a sleeve, h, at the upper end of the 
pitman to receive the upper end of the pump 
rod, bent horizontally to enter it, and I bend 
the lower end of the pitman similarly to enter 
a corresponding sleeve, h', at the upper end 
of the handle E. Such a connection of the 
parts distributes the Wear over a large surface, 
requires no screw and nut, and has the merit 
of cheapness and durability. With this con 
struction I usually make the handle with an 
offset just above the fulcrume, so as to bring 
the upper part into proper relation to the pit 
Within the air-chamber Iemploy, as a guide 
for the plunger-rod in its movements, a cen: 
tral tube, K, secured at the top to the dome D, 
and extending downward into the barrel. This 
guide insures a true vertical movement to the 
rod G, and prevents any lateral strain upon 
the plunger under the action of the pitman. 
- I connect the bottom of the pump-barrel 
with a base-piece, L, by means of two or more 
hooked screw -bolts, M, the curved ends of 
which, of arc form, embrace the barreland en 
gage with an annular flange, N, thereon. The 
bolts then pass downward through recesses in 
the base-piece, and are tightened or loosened 
by nuts O. Slackening the nuts slightly per 
mits the rotation of the barrel upon the base, 
and the bolts may be removed without en 
tirely unscrewing the nuts, since they pass 
through apertures in the base-piece, which are 
merely open recesses. The base Lis mounted 
upon the top of the stand-pipe, which commu 
nicates with the water-supply. 
To facilitate attachment of this pump to a 
post or plank, I provide a stand or frame, P, 
constructed, preferably, of iron, and having a 
seat, Q, for the base-piece or bottom of the 
barrel to rest on, and arms p to receive the 
pump-barrel and to engage with a semicircu 
lar band, R, which, with the arms, embraces 
the barrel B. The arms p and band R are 
united by screws S, and the band is prefera 
bly recessed downwardly from the bolt-holes, 
so that when the screws are slackened it may 
be removed by an upward movement, and the 
2 
23,2S 
pump may be taken from the stand without 
entirely withdrawing the screw-bolts S. 
It is obvious that recesses may be made in 
the arms p to engage with projections upon 
the pump itself, and thus that the band R and 
screws S may be dispensed with. 
In matters of detail each of my improve 
ments herein described may be considerably 
varied without departing from the spirit of my 
invention. 
I claim as of my invention- 
1. A pump-barrel and an adjustable rotary 
standard supporting the pump-handle, in com 
bination with a plunger-rod, a central guide 
. 
. 
. 
tube therefor, and an upright pitman or push 
rod, substantially as set forth. 
2. The barrel B, provided with the annular 
flange N, in combination with the recessed 
base-piece L and the crescent-headed bolts M, 
with their nuts O, substantially as set forth. 
3. A stand for pumps, provided with arms 
p and seat Q, adapted to receive and support 
the pump, substantially as set forth. 
THOMAS DOWLING. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. OXTON, 
WALTER. E. MAYO. 
Ya 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213381.txt	Pr00 ess and Apparatus for Separating Common Salt 
L. BEMELMAN S. 
from its Solution, 
No. 213,381 
Patented Mar. 18, 1879. 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ4A 
, 
, 
, 
  
W. 
N 
- 
C 
- - - 
- - 
Re-la-S. Ariel 
 
 
A. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
Eas 2. is 
  
WITNESSEs: 
S. 
ga INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. Peters, Photo-Totaph 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEON BEMELMANS, OF KANAWHA COURT-HOUSE, WEST VIRGINIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN PROCESSES AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING COMMON SALT FROM ITS SOLUTION, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 213,3S1, dated March 18, 1879; application filed 
November 30, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LEON BEMELMANs, of 
Kanawha Court-House, in the county of Ka 
nawha and State of West Virginia, have in 
vented a new and Improved Process and Ap 
paratus for Separating Common Salt from its 
Solution; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical transverse section. 
Fig.2 is a vertical longitudinal section through 
line at a of Fig. 1, looking in the direction of 
the arrow. Fig. 3 is a vertical longitudinal 
Section through line gy y of Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a 
pil horizontal section through line w w of 
fig, 1. 
My invention relates to a process and appa 
ratus for recovering salt in a pure form from 
any of its solutions, but more particularly from 
the brine of salt springs abounding in West 
Virginia and other places. 
The process consists in admitting continu 
ously the salt brine into a body of bittern, and 
driving off by continuous evaporation the su 
perfluous water as fast as it is admitted, where 
by the salt is rendered incompatible with the 
permanent solution, and is thrown down out 
of solution in the form of pure white crystals 
of Small size and uniform fineness, produc 
ing a merchantable article of a very superior 
order. 
In carrying out my invention a quantity of 
bittern, the larger the better, is kept in a con 
centrating apparatus, and the brine is intro 
(luced in a continuous manner and agitated 
in the bittern, which causes the salt to pre 
cipitate infine uniform and glistening crystals, 
while the evaporation, also in a continuous 
manner, brings back the bittern, or rather 
lmaintains it at the proper degree of concen 
tration. The quantity of brine to introduce 
into the bittern depends on the evaporating 
capacity of the apparatus. It is such, how 
ever, that the bittern will remain approxi 
mately at a constant degree of concentration. 
The degree of concentration at which it is 
proper to keep the bittern varies with the qual 
ity or composition of the bittern. In general, 
it is the degree of concentration at which it 
holds no more salt. It varies with the com 
position of the bittern from 300 to 380 Baum; 
but more or less concentrated bittern pro 
duces results approximating more or less those 
obtained by using bittern concentrated to the 
point aforesaid. 
Referring to the drawings, which show an 
apparatus specially adapted to the carrying 
out of my process, A represents an evaporat 
ing-pan, having a removable cover, B. This 
pan is located above a gas-furnace adapted to 
heat the pan and effect the evaporation from 
the combustion of carbonic-oxide gas taken 
from a colke-oven, gas being preferred as a 
fuel in order to secure cleanliness and keep 
impurities from the salt. The bottom of the 
pan is made of metal, and has alternate arches 
a and gutters b. This form of bottom to the 
pan, in connection with the agitation due to 
ebullition, causes the deposited salt to settle 
in the troughs to the exclusion of other places, 
the tendency of the salt to settle at such places 
being assisted by locating such troughs di. 
rectly over the partition-walls c c, so that there 
shall be no direct heat of the flames at these 
points, and no disturbance of the deposits 
from ebullition. For conveying the deposits 
in these troughs to the outlet at the end, a 
series of swinging arms, p, are pivoted to the 
cover of the tank, and linked together in line, 
so as to be reciprocated by power transmitted 
from an external source. These arms each 
carry a loosely-pivoted shovel that plays in 
the trough, which shovels, as the arms recip 
rocate, transfer the deposits from one to the 
other, and finally deliver it at the outlet d to 
a rotary pump, (not shown,) together with 
more or less of the bittern, to be washed clean 
and dried. This arrangement of devices both 
conveys the deposits and effects the agitation 
of the liquid. 
The furnace beneath the pan has five main 
compartments or flues, C D D and E. E. The 
compartments EE are arranged one upon each 
side of the furnace, and are separated by a 
horizontal partition, e, into two flues, made 
corrugated for greater sulface. In the lower 
flue the gas is introduced through the two 
pipes FF, and emerges through the slits ff 
 
 
213,3S 1 
at the lower end of the central flue, C. 
(See 
Figs. 3 and 4.) 
In the flue, above the partition e, the air is 
admitted, and thence emerges through the 
perforated boxes g g at the lower end of the 
middle flue, C. The air and gas here unite 
to produce the flame, which moves up the in 
cline of the chamber C to its highest end, 
where it passes laterally both ways into the 
side flues, D D, through the open spaces h. 
(See Fig. 3.) 
It then passes up the flues D D, 
Fig. 2, is deflected down through the end 
spaces, ii, and passes around the exterior of 
the gas-pipes, and, after traversing the space 
about the gas-pipes, emerges from beneath the 
partition e at the point where the gas enters. 
As the flame and smoke leave the furnace, the 
air and gas being introduced are heated 
thereby, and this intensifies the combustion of 
the same, when they become mingled and ig 
Inited. 
The apparatus discharges continuously the 
salt deposited in the troughs through the out 
lets d, and the vapors of the evaporated water 
are drawn off through suitable outlets in the 
cover of the pan, at a reduced barometric 
pressure, by means of all air-exhauster at the 
end of a surface-condenser, (not shown,) while 
an inlet-pipe to the pan admits the supply of 
brine. 
In carrying out my process, I would have 
it understood that I do not limit myself to the 
apparatus herein described, but may use any 
form of pain, heated from below, or basins, 
ponds, &c., heated by steam-pipes immersed 
in them; or I may use any other form of evap 
orating apparatus. 
It is to be observed, however, that when the 
bittern holds chloride of magnesium, or any 
other compound easily decomposable by heat, 
it is proper to concentrate the bittern with 
caution, either at a low heat or by ebullition 
under an artificially-reduced barometric press 
le. 
Instead of employing the natural bittern, an 
artificial bittern may be used, consisting of a 
concentrated solution of deliquescent chloride, 
such as chloride of calcium or chloride of mag 
nesium, &c., to start the process. 
The product of pure salt obtained by my 
process is of fine uniform crystals, free from 
the pulverulent matter which characterizes salt 
made in the usual way, (by evaporating into 
large crystals and grinding,) and is better 
adapted to table use. 
In defining my process with greater clear 
ness, I would state that I am aware of the fact 
that salt has been thrown down out of solution 
in the evaporating-pan, and the solution con 
taining the impurities flowed off at the top, 
which latter method was based upon the ob 
servance of the fact that the impurities in salt 
water are held longer in solution and require 
a greater degree of heat to separate them than 
the salt does. 
The facts upon which my process is founded 
are somewhat analogous-i. e., salt is insolu 
ble in a liquid holding enough deliquescent 
chloride to indicate 359 Baum when hot, or 
390 when cold. 
In carrying out my process, however, I pre 
pare a liquid such that when a certain quan 
tity of brine is added to it it will be a solu 
tion of deliquescent chloride at 350. What 
salt then exists in the brine, being incom 
patible with such a liquid, separates instantly. 
After that, if I concentrate anew my solution 
of chloride to get rid of the superfluous water 
and add a new quantity of brine, I precipi 
tate a new quantity of salt, and when, as in 
my process, the evaporation and addition of 
brine are so regulated that the solution of 
deliquescent chlorides remains at a strength 
of 35o Baum when hot, and 390 when cold, 
the operation is a continuous one, and there is 
never any salt in solution in the mixture. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The process of separating salt from its 
brine solution, which consists in admitting 
continuously the said brine into a body of bit 
tern or other concentrated solution of deli 
quescent chlorides, and driving off by con 
tinuous evaporation the superfluous water as 
fast as it is admitted, whereby the pure saltis 
entirely precipitated in the form of fine crys 
tals of uniform size, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The evaporating-pan having its bottom 
wrought into alternate arches and gutters, in 
combination with hinged and pendent shovels, 
connected and arranged to move together in 
said gutters, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the evaporating. 
pan A, of the furnace having compartments 
CD DE E, communicating, as described, the 
pipes FF, arranged in compartments or flues 
E, and having openings f, discharging into the 
central compartment, together with the parti 
tions e and air-boxes g, substantially as de 
scribed. 
LEON BEMELMANS, 
Witnesses: 
JAMES E. MIDDLETON, 
RICHARD HARTE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213481.txt	Mechanism for Driving Fan-Blowers in Railroad-Cars, 
J. H. WICKES, 
No. 213,481 
 
Patented Mar. 18, 1879. 
W3Cu2sses. 
7%.24%- 
76- aty2u. 
N. PETERS, Phoro-Lithograp 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. WICKES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN MECHANISMS FOR DRIVING FAN-BLOWERS IN RAILROAD-CARS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 213,4S1, dated March 18, 1879; application filed 
February 5, 1879. 
To all chon it may concern: 
car-body by pipes i, and which is fastened to 
Be it known that I, JAMEs H. WICKEs, of 
the car-bottom by suitable means, the same be 
ing situated opposite to the gravitating-frame 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
C. On that side of the gravitating-frame C 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Mechanisms for Driving Fan 
bordering on the case D the shaft disextended, 
Blowers in Railroad-Cars, which improvement 
as shown in Fig. 2, so that it projects into the 
is fully set forth in the following specification, 
case, and to that part of the shaft situated 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
within the case are secured a series of blades, 
ings, in which 
(not shown,) suitable to form a blower. At 
Figure 1 represents alongitudinal section of 
the point where the shaft d passes through the 
a car containing my improvement. Fig. 2 is a 
side of the case D, the latter is provided with 
a slot, f, (see Fig. 3,) of sufficient length to per 
cross-section of the same. Fig. 3 shows the 
driving mechanism on a larger scale than in 
mit the shaft to partake of any motion of the 
the previous figures. 
gravitating-frame. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
When the gravitating-frame Cisin its lower 
position the friction-pulley eis thereby brought 
My improvement has relation to that class 
of mechanism comprising a gravitating-frame 
to bear on the pulley B of the axle, and hence 
which supports a shaft, on which is mounted a 
when the car is set in motion the shaft d is 
friction-pulley, bearing by its own weight and 
revolved and the blower is put in operation; 
that of the frame on a corresponding pulley 
and since the fan shaft or blower is practically 
mounted on one of the car-axles, as described 
isolated from the case of the blower by the slot 
in Letters Patent of the United States granted 
f, the shaft is not affected by the swaying of 
the case by and together with the car-body. 
to me May 23, 1876, No. 177,907. 
In my said patent a belt and pulleys are 
In order to prevent the ingress or admission 
used for connecting the blower with the shaft 
of air to the blower-case D through its slotif, 
of the gravitating-frame; and the aim of 
I cover the same by a gate or valve, (not 
my present improvement is, chiefly, to drive 
shown,) which may be arranged in various 
the blower by more direct means without af. 
ways, one of which is to attach the same to 
fecting the operation of the frame or its con 
the shaft d, and combine therewith suitable 
guides, so that the gate does not interfere 
Comitants. To this end Imount the fan-blower 
on the shaft of the gravitating-frame, and pro 
with up and down movements of the shaft, 
vide the case of the blower with a slot, to al 
and at the same time serves to cover the slot 
low the shaft to rise andfall together with the 
in any position thereof. 
frame. With the gravitating-frame and its 
When it is desired to check the blower dur. 
ing the motion of the car the gravitating-frame 
Concomitants I combine also a stirrup, which 
is pivoted to the car-bottom and provided with 
C is lifted, so as to throw the pulley e out of 
a cross-piece, whereby it is adapted to per 
gear; and for the purpose of retaining the 
frame in an upper position, I make use of a 
form the dual functions of a guide and a sup 
stirrup, E. The primary object of this stirrup 
port to the frame, as hereinafter more fully 
is to guide the gravitating-frame C in its up 
set forth. 
In the drawings, the letter A designates the 
and down movements; but in order to adapt 
body of a railroad-car, and bis one of its axles, 
the same to perform also the function of a 
on which latter is mounted a friction-pulley, 
support or stop to the frame, I provide the 
B. The letter C designates a gravitating-frame, 
stirrup with a cross-piece,g, (best seen in Fig. 
which is connected to the car-bottom by means 
3,) at the proper level, and pivot the same to 
of pivots c, and in which is mounted a shaft, 
a suitable part of the car-bottom, as at h, SO 
d, carrying a friction-pulley, e, the parts being 
that the stirrup can be swung out of the Way 
of the gravitating-frame when the latter is to 
So arranged that the last-named pulley is 
adapted to bear on the pulley B of the axle. 
be raised, and can be returned to its normal 
The letterD designates the case of a blower, position when this has been accomplished, so 
which communicates with the interior of the as to bring its cross-piece beneath the frame, 
 
 
2 
213,4S1 
scribed. 
For the purpose of retaining the gravitating- 
as clearly shown. If seen fit, the cross-piece and adapted to operate substantially as de 
g may be duplicated. 
2. The combination, with the gravitating 
frame on the cross-piece? of the stirrup, I com-frame C and its concomitants, of the stirrup 
bine therewith a coupling-pin or other device E, pivoted to the car-bottom and provided 
adapted to fasten the frame or the stirrup. 
with a cross-piece, substantially as and for the 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure purpose described. 
by Letters Patent, is- 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
1. The combination, with a friction-pulley have hereunto set my hand and seal this 28th 
mounted on one of the axles of a car, of a day of January, 1879. 
gravitating-frame, a fan-blower mounted on a 
shaft, d, which has its bearings in said frame, 
and a blower-case having a slot to allow the 
shaft to move with the frame, all constructed 
JAMES H. WICKES. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, 
CHAS. WAHLERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213581.txt	M. MATTS ON, 
Method of Finishing Hard Rubber Trimmings. 
Patented Mar. 25, 1879. 
No. 213,581. 
S Say O D SS 
R 
N 
N N 
NW N 
NSSSN 
l, 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
|| | | || 
Wizavesses: 
/.22 
=EEE!!!E 
N. PETERs, Phoro 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MORRIS MATTSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MPROVEMENT IN METHODS OF FINSHINGHARD-RUBBER TRIMMINGS, 
a 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 213,5S1, dated March 25, 1879; application filed 
February 15, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: , 
Be it known that I, MoRRIS MATTSON, of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Methods of Fin 
ishing Fard. Rubber Trimmings; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the method of finishing hard rubber and anal 
ogous substances capable of being molded 
for use in syringes, breast-pumps, and other 
such articles; and it consists in first forming 
the tubes or plugs in the usual molds or 
formers, and then either forcing a steel die 
into the ends of the tubes, where a connective 
cavity is to be formed, or forcing the plugs 
which are to fit the connective cavities into a 
steel die, whereby the surface of the rubber is 
condensed and perfectly finished, assuming at 
the same time the exact size and taper re 
quired for accurate fitting. 
By this method of finishing two important 
objects are gained-celerity and cheapness in 
the Works and absolute accuracy in all of the 
fitting parts-as will be more fully described 
hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings are shown 
the dies and pieces of hard rubber finished by 
my method. 
a represents a metallic die, preferably of 
steel, having a hole, c, all the Way through its 
center, and a recess, d, of suitable shape and 
form in its top. Through the center of this 
die is passed the rode, of two different sizes, 
the smaller end of which passed through the 
hole in the center of the hard-rubber plug (), 
so as to keep the hole from being reduced in 
diameter while the plug is being pressed in 
the die. 
This plug may be first molded into shape in 
what is called a former, and there Vulcan 
ized in the former; or it may be roughly 
formed on a metallic core without the aid of a 
former, and vulcanized in soap-stone. After 
this it is heated and softened in any conven 
ient manner, and the end i is driven into the 
hole d in the die a. 
m 
By thus forcing the plug into the die the 
outer surface is rendered beautifully smooth, 
compact, and of a definite or unvarying size. 
This process is speedy and effective, and 
greatly preferable to the slow process of form 
ing the plug upon a lathe, in which it is diffi 
cult in making a number of plugs to have 
them all of an exact size. 
The end o may have a screw-thread cut up 
on it, if so required, which may be preferable 
in securing the valve of a syringe or analogous 
instrument in its proper place. 
The connective cavities of hard-rubber in 
duction or eduction tubes are formed by press 
ing into them a suitable die, to be presently 
described. 
An induction-tube is shown at l, which has 
been first molded in a metallic former, and 
then vulcanized in the former with the core 
still in the interior, so as to form the hole 
through its center. After Vulcanization, while 
the rubber is still warm, the core may be easily 
withdrawn, when the cavity at n will be found 
to slightly contract. After this the tube is 
softened slightly by exposure to heat, and 
then a polished steel die is forced into the 
cavity n, which solidifies the rubber and pro 
duces an exceedingly smooth and finished sur 
face. 
Of course the taper of the cavity in and the 
taper of the plug will be the same; otherwise 
a perfect joint will not be produced. 
By this method the connective surfaces are 
finished at once, so as to need no finishing 
upon the lathe or other manipulation, and an 
invariable size is given to each cavity. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
The method herein described of finishing 
the connecting-surfaces of hard-rubber articles, 
consisting in first slightly softening them, and 
then making use of dies, substantially as 
shown. 
have hereunto set my hand this 11th day of 
February, 1879. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing 
M. MATTSON. 
Witnesses: 
H. C. BURTON, 
WM. F. SLOAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213681.txt	C. H. NORRIS. 
En velope-Case. 
No. 213 
,681. 
Patented Mar. 25, 1879. 
 
 
A72 
. % 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZzZzZzZzZzZzzzz 
@ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZ2 
N N N 
N.PETERS, PHOTO-LTHGGRAPHER, WASHNGTON. D. C. 
UNITED STATES IPATENT OFFICIE. 
CHARLIES H. NORRIS, OF IDETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
IMPROVE MENT N ENVELOPECASES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 213,681, dated March 25, 1879; application filed 
December 4, 1878. 
To al vhom it may concern: 
tain as many chambers of diferent sizes as 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs H. NORRIs, 
may be desired. 
of Detroit in the county of Wayne and State 
Any desired style of ornamentation maybe 
of Michigan, have invented an Improvement employed to beautify the rack, which maybe 
in. Envelope-Cases, of which the following is a 
constructed of any desired material. Thein 
specification: 
clined bottom of the chamber may be perfo. 
The nature of my invention relates to new 
rated to allow settling dust to fall through. 
and useful improvements in the construction 
In practice, in the envelope-boxesinordinary 
of that class of devices usually employed in 
use, the topedgesare presented upon the same 
offices and counting-roomsto hold envelopes; 
plane, and theuser, in his hurry, is very aptto 
and the invention consistsin a series of cham 
Withdraw two or three envelopes instead of 
bers With inwardly-inclined bottoms, said 
one, ashe desires; and where several diferent 
chambers being connected together and ro 
kinds of envelopes are employed, itis incon 
tating upon a suitable standard or foot. 
venient to keep them in drawers, and the ob. 
Figure 1 is a perspective of my improved 
ject of my invention is to avoid these objec 
envelope-rack. Fig. 2 is a vertical cross cen 
tions. 
tral section. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, A. represents a 
standard, from which centrallyrises the pivot 
pin B, which supports the series of chambers 
C C", the bottoms of which incline inwardly 
to receive envelopes of various kinds and 
sizes, so that the outer envelope will always 
be presented to the user upon a higher plane 
than the one immediately behind it. 
In the drawings a rack is shown of a rect 
angular form, With two chambersoneach side, 
the outer ones being designed for letter-envel 
opes, and the inner ones for What are usually 
denominated legal envelopes; but the rack 
maybe made of any polygonal form, and con 
What I claim as my invention is 
The envelope-holder described, consisting 
of a polygonal box, provided on each side 
with the two vertical chambers CC", of difer 
ent sizes, and having inwardly-inclined bot 
toms, said box being mounted upon the metal 
base A. by the pivot-pin B, which rises from 
said base, passes through a hole in the bottom 
of the box, and sits into a socket in the top 
of the box, constructed and arranged sub 
stantially as set forth and shown. 
CHARLIES H. NORRIS. 
Witnesses: 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
CHAS. J. HUNT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213782.txt	J. SEANOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Method of and Machine for Reducing Ores. 
No. 213,782. 
Patented April 
 
IIIIII|| 
S 
V 
S. 
A. 
S 
ES N 
 
|------||||||||| 
2. 
N. Peters, Photo-tho 
HER??A 
shingtoN, O C. 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
J. SEANO R. 
Method of and Machine for Reducing Ores, 
No. 213,782. 
Patented April 1, 1879. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2 
 
arker 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN SEANOR, OF CEDARRAPIDS, IOWA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN METHODS OF AND MACHINES FOR REDUCING ORES, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 213,2S2, dated April 1, 1879; application filed 
October 25, 1878. 
To all chom, it may concern : 
Be it known that I, JoHN SEANOR, of Cedar 
Rapids, in the county of Linn and State of 
Iowa, have invented certain Improvements in 
Methods of and Machines for Pulverizing Ore, 
of which the following is a specification: 
The first part of my invention relates to an 
improved method of dry pulverization for ores 
and other hard substances; and consists in 
effecting the reduction by causing an attrition 
of the particles one upon another under very 
light pressure, as contradistinguished from the 
ordinary methods, in which the materialis sub 
jected to a grinding or crushing action under 
heavy pressure. 
In carrying out my method or process of re 
duction any apparatus may be used which will 
give the particles a rolling motion and cause 
them to grind and wear upon each other un 
der a light pressure, so that they will be re 
duced in fineness by such wear or attrition 
upon each other; but I find the best plan to 
be to employ a circular trough or troughs, with 
light metal drags or runners arranged to travel 
therein. 
I am aware that annular troughs or chan 
nels have been used in combination with heavy 
drags or blocks arranged to travel therein, 
and reduce the material by a heavy grind 
ing or crushing action, dependence being 
placed upon the heavy weight or pressure; 
and I wish it to be distinctly understood that 
I lay no broad claim to the combination of an 
annular trough and a metal runner therein, 
nor to the crushing and grinding of ore under 
heavy pressure by such apparatus. 
It is to be clearly understood that in my 
process the pressure of the drags or runners 
is not relied upon to crush the ore, and that 
I employ only sufficient pressure to cause a 
rolling motion of the particles. 
Instead of introducing the ore, as usual, in a 
thick body or layer within the trough, I intro 
duce it in a thin sheet or layer, so that each 
particle may bear against both the trough and 
the runner, and consequently be certain to ro 
tate and to grindagainst the surrounding par 
ticles. 
In practice, I find that the best results are 
secured by subjecting the material to a press 
ure of about one-quarter of a pound to the 
square inch, and by making the shoe or run 
ner and the trough of soft cast-iron, in order 
that they may take hold upon the particles 
with certainty and give them the required roll 
ing motion. 
The second part of my invention relates to 
a machine particularly adapted for carrying 
out my process; and consists in various de 
tails hereinafter described. 
Figure 1 represents a vertical transverse 
section through the center of the machine; 
Fig. 2, a top-plan view of the machine with 
two of the lids or covers removed; Fig. 3, a 
plan view, showing the channels or troughs 
and runners therein with the upper parts re 
moved; Fig. 4, a section on the line yy, Fig. 
1; Fig. 5, a perspective view of one of the 
runners or drags, looking against the under 
side. 
A represents a rigid frame, supporting a cir 
cular bed, B, in which there are a series of 
concentric annular grooves or channels, a ca, 
having flat bottom faces. 
As shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 4, the channels 
are connected with each other by openings or 
passages b, so that the material may pass from 
one to another as it is reduced to different de 
grees of fineness. 
As will be seen on reference to Fig. 3, the 
channels are arranged, in passing from the 
center of the machine outward, one below an 
other, so that the material introduced at the 
center of the machine will naturally flow 
through the intermediate channels in succes 
sion to the one at the outside. 
It will also be noticed that the channels in 
crease in width as the outside of the machine 
is approached, each channel being wider than 
the one next adjoining it on the inside. 
The object of thus increasing the width of 
the channels is to secure a single and even 
layer of the particles or grains on the bottom 
of each channel, a given amount of material 
serving to cover an increased area in propor 
tion to the fineness to which it is reduced, so 
that the coarse particles which covered the 
bottom of a small channel will, after having 
been reduced therein, cover the bottom of the 
next and larger channel. 
By thus increasing the size of the channels 
and providing for the passage of the material 
  
from one to anotheras its reduction progresses, 
I am able to work the machine to its full ca. 
pacity, and to secure a full, but thin, layer of 
the material in each channel--a result which 
is quite important to the success of my im 
proved method of reduction. 
Within each channel I mount a series of 
lightiron runners or drags, C, of the full width 
of the channels. The under faces of these 
runners or drags are made flat, and at the for 
ward ends they are slightly rounded on the 
tlinder side, in order that they may readily pass 
over and upon the particles of ore, instead of 
forcing them out of the way in advance, as 
they might otherwise do. 
In order to give the runners the necessary 
height at the sides, and at the same time se 
cure the required lightness, they are cast hol 
low in the top or back, as shown. 
The runners are also made, by preference, 
with an oblique forward end, resembling in 
general appearance an ordinary plow, for the 
purpose of securing a better and more even 
distribution of the material as it enters the 
channel, and keeping the material, to a great 
extent, in the middle of the channel, so as to 
avoid the tendency to wear grooves or holes 
in the surfaces, and secure a uniform action 
on all the particles. 
In the arrangement of the openings b, 
through which the material passes from chan. 
nelto channel, each one should be placed 
in rear of the one extending to the next chan 
nel above, in orderthat the materiali may be 
caused to travel as far as possible before hav. 
ing a chance to escape. There may be as 
many passages from each channel to the next 
as desired. As a substitute for, or in addi. 
tion to, the plow-shaped ends of the runners, 
there may be one or more small shovels or 
plows, Darranged to travel in each channel, 
to assist in the distribution of the material, 
these plows being attached to the runners or 
to their driving devices, as desired. 
Brushes of steel, wire, or other material may 
also be arranged in the same manner as the 
plows, to assist in the distribution of the ma 
terials in the channel, especially galena and 
other greasy or soapy minerals, paints, &c., 
and sugar. 
In constructing the machine the operating 
surfaces of the channels and runners should 
be made wholly or mainly of soft cast-iron, by 
which is meant iron softer than that usually 
employed for the construction of machinery, 
and without the hard scale or surface com. 
monly found on cast-iron. 
By the employment of the soft metal the 
surfaces are caused to engage or bite readily 
upon the particles of the ore, and to impart 
thereto the constant rolling motion which con. 
stitutes the basis of my process. 
lin order to secure a uniform wear of the 
surfaces, and prevent the grooving and chan 
ineling which is liable to occur on account of 
the porous and honey-combed character of the 
east anetal, I introduce into the surfaces of 
the channels and runners transverse pieces of 
sheet-iron or other thin vertical strips or pieces 
of hard material, d, as represented in the draw 
ings. These pieces are best secured by plac 
ing them in the molds and running the cast 
metal in place upon them. 
In order that the surfaces of the channels 
may be replaced or renewed to compensate for 
wear, they may be provided with removable 
surface plates or sections e, as represented in 
the drawings. These plates will be provided 
with the transverse strips of hard metal as 
before explained, and will be secured in any 
suitable manner within the channels---as, for 
example, by means of cast-metal wedges g 
passed down between their ends, flush with 
their upper faces, and secured by keys hon 
the under side, as represented in Fig. 4. When 
reduced by wear the plates are readily re 
moved and replaced by new ones, and thus 
the body of the bed is adapted to be used for 
an indefinite length of time. 
As a means of driving the entire series of 
runners, I employ a rotary frame or spider, E, 
sustained by a central shaft, i, and provided 
with a series of rings, j, which latter are pro 
vided with vertical holes or slots it, to receive 
two studs or pins, l, on each runner. The 
slotsk, which permit the runners to rise 
and fall and adjust themselves readily to the 
channels and the material beneath them, are 
curved concentrically with spider, and serve to 
prevent the runners from being carried out. 
ward by the centrifugal force so as to bind 
against the outer sides of the channels. By 
thus limiting the runners so as to prevent the 
outward movement, the power required to 
drive the machine is greatly reduced, and 
the lateral wear of the channels and runners 
prevented. 
As a means of feeding the machine, the 
spider or driving-frame is provided with a cen 
tral hopper, F, and a passage, m, leading 
downward and outward through one side, so 
as to deliver into the innermost channel. 
The driving-frame or spider may receive mo. 
tion in any suitable manner; but ordinarily 
it will be provided on the top with a geared 
ring, n, and driven by means of a pinion, o, 
sustained by bearings on the frame, and en 
gaging in the ring, as shown. 
In order to confine the dust within the ma 
chine, a rim or casing, p, is secured around the 
bed, and provided with a top or cover, consist. 
ing of removable panels g, mounted in sus 
taining-arms s, as shown in Figs, 1 and 2. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The herein-described method for the dry 
pulverization of ores, consisting in causing a 
constant rolling motion of the particles in a 
thin layer subject to a very light pressure, sub 
stantially as set forth, whereby the particles 
are reduced by attrition upon each other, in 
stead of being crushed and ground by heavy 
pressure, as usual. 
2. The herein-described method of treating 
 
 
2?3,782 
dry ores, consisting in passing the same be 
tween two flathorizontal surfaces of soft metal, 
one of which moves upon the other, subject to 
a pressure of about one-quarter of a pound 
to the square inch. 
3. In a machine for pulverizing ores, the 
combination of a series of annular channels 
and corresponding runners, both having flat 
faces, the channels being arranged one below 
another, and of increasing size from the high 
est to the lowest. 
4. In a machine for pulverizing ores, two an 
nular channels having flat soft cast-iron faces, 
One channel being arranged below and made 
of greater capacity than the other, in combi 
nation. With flat-faced runners mounted in said 
channels, as shown. 
5. In combination with an annular channel, 
and an elongated runner mounted therein 
and provided with one or more upright studs 
or pins, the rotary frame or spider, provided 
with slots concentric therewith, holding the 
P 
studs loosely, as described and shown, where 
by the runner is advanced, prevented from 
moving radially, but permitted to rise and fall 
freely and independently at its two ends. 
6. In an ore-reducing mill, a soft cast-metal 
runner having hard-metal strips set into and 
flush with its face, as and for the purpose 
shown and described. 
7. In an ore-pulverizing mill, an annular 
channel having a flat soft-metal face, With 
sheet-metal or other hard strips or pieces 
seated firmly therein flush with its surface. 
8. In an ore-pulverizing machine, the Com 
bination of an annular channel or groove With 
a metal runner having an opening or recess in 
its back, as shown, whereby the necessary 
height and lightness of weight are secured. 
JOHN SEANOR. 
Witnesses: 
THos. J. DUDLEY, 
U. C. BLAKE. 
50 ??? 
??? 
?? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213882.txt	J. R. ELLIOTT, 
Fence. 
No. 213,882. 
Patented April 1, 1879 
WITWESSES 
IWWEWTOR 
22 ea 3-4- 
By 
344. 
ATTORWEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JAMES R. ELLIOTT, OF BEEBE STATION, ARKANSAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
HALF HIS RIGHT TO F. P. LAWS, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN FENCES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 213, SS2, dated April 1, 1879; application filed 
January 14, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES R. ELLIOTT, of 
Beebe Station, in the county of White, and in 
the State of Arkansas, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Fences; and 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
making a part of this specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
construction and arrangement of an inclined 
rail fence, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
forth. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe its 
construction and operation, referring to the 
annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my fence. 
Fig. 2 is an end view thereof. 
Each fence-post is composed of two bars, A 
A crossing each other and secured together 
at a, and a short cross-bar, B, connects said 
bars below the point of crossing. In the 
crotch of the bars A A are placed two parallel 
bars, CC, connected at their lower end by a 
cross-piece, b, and between these parallel bars 
are inserted the ends of the rails D ID from 
two adjacent panels. A brace, F, is placed 
under the crotch of the bars A A, and fast 
ened to the cross-bar B and to the parallel 
bars C C, for holding the posts and panels to 
gether and at any angle desired. 
I thus form an inclined fence which is strong 
and durable, and is not liable to be knocked 
over either by wind or by animals. At the 
same time plowing can be done close up to 
the fence, thus making a saving in land. 
In addition to the rails D, riders H are 
placed at the top in the angles, as shown. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
The combination of the crossed bars A. A 
connecting-bar B, inclined parallel bars C C, 
rails D, and brace F, all substantially as and 
for the purposes herein set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 29th day of 
November, 1878. 
JAMES RUSSEL ELLIOTT. 
Witnesses: 
H. AUBREY TOULMIN, 
WALTER MANSFIELD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US213982.txt	R. H. ELLIOTT, 
Water-Heater and Steam-Generator. 
No. 213,982. 
Patented April 8, 1879. 
Q 
9. 
A. 
G) 
-4 
O 
O 
(6) 
e 
O 
O 
O 
O 
(3) 
O 
AZ63. 
Z. 
 
e 
e e. 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
e 
 
AT TEST: 3. 
 
N.FETERs, PHOTo-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
REGINALD H. ELLIOTT, OF KIRKWOOD, MISSOURI. 
IMPROVEMENT IN WATER HEATER AND STEAM - GENERATOR. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 213,9s2, dated April 8, 1879; application filed 
December 28, 1878. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, REGINALD. H. ELLIOTT, 
of Kirkwood, in the county of St. Louis and 
State of Missouri, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Water - Heater 
and Steam-Generator, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming part of this specification. 
My improvement consists in the combina 
tion, in a water-heater, of a bottom box hav 
ing vertical perforations therein connecting 
with vertical tubes, a vertically-perforated 
crown-box, and flat side and end sections, se 
cured as shown, and connecting the bottom 
and crown boxes, and constituting the fire 
chamber. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view with part broken away. Fig. 2 is a hori 
zontal section at line XX, Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a 
longitudinal section at line YY, Fig. 2. Fig. 
4 is a jogged transverse section at Z Z, Fig. 2. 
I shall describe my improvement as having 
the form of a parallelopiped and as made of 
cast-iron; but I do not confine myself to this 
form or material, as it is obvious that the form 
may be varied without any essential change, 
and that the material may be also varied. 
A is the vertically-perforated box, forming 
the bottom of the fire-chamber. This box con 
sists of the bottom plate, a, and top plate, at', 
connected together at the sides and ends so as 
to form a chamber to contain Water. 
At B are shown flues or tubes passing ver 
tically through the box A. These tubes are 
for the upward passage of the air to the fire, 
and for the discharge of ashes from the same. 
The fire-chamber is marked C. 
The upper plate, a , of the box A has a 
number of upwardly-extending sockets, a, to 
receive the lower ends of the flat hollow sec 
tions D D'. The flat hollow sections D D 
form the eommunication between the box A 
and a similar box, E, forming the crown of 
the fire-chamber C. The flat sections D form 
the sides of said chamber, and the sections D' 
its ends. 
The box E has sockets e, (similar to those 
a,) to receive the upper ends of the flat sec 
tions D D'. The ends of the sections are se 
cured in the sockets ae by a water-tight joint, 
such as iron-cement. 
F is the induction water-pipe, and when the 
apparatus is used as a water-heater the pipe 
G would be the steam-pipe. 
The heater may be inclosed in any suitable 
case, such as brick-work or metal, with fire 
front and chimney. 
The upperbox, E, would assistin the heating 
of the water, with which it would be wholly 
filled when the apparatus is used as a water 
heater. 
I claim 
The combination of the vertically-perforated 
box A, having sockets a, vertically-perforated 
crown-box E, having socketse, and flat hollow 
sections DD", secured in said sockets ae, and 
forming the sides and ends of the fire-chamber 
and connecting the bottom and crown boxes, 
substantially as set forth. 
REGINALD H. ELLIOTT, 
Witnesses: 
SAM L. KNIGHT, 
GEO. Ed, KNIGHT. 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214082.txt	G. H. BANGS BEST AVAILABLE COP 
Electric Motor, 
No. 214, O 82. 
Patented April 8, 1879. 
A 27, 7 
 
 
 
  
INVENTOR: 
it...,& 
ATTORNEYS, 
BEST AVAILABLE COP 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. BANGs, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN ELECTRIC MOTORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 214,0s2, dated April 8, 1879; application filed 
November 25, 1878, 
 
To all achom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE H. BANGs, of 
the city, eourity, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and Improved. Electric Motor, 
of which the following is a specification. 
Figure l is a side elevation of my improved 
notor. . Fig. 2 is a sectional plan view. Fig. 
3 is a central vertical section taken on linea 
at in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a lorizontal section taken 
on line yy in Fig. 3. 
\ly invention relates to the class of motors 
propelled by an electric current; and it con 
sists in tho combination of the levers, the ar 
Jnatures, and the ring with the electro-magnets 
alid the segments, and in the combination of 
tle level's, the arnatures, the ring, the frame, 
the fly-wheel, the rod, and the cross-bar with . 
the electro-magnets, the segments, and the 
central standard, as hereinafter more fully de 
scribed. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corr 
sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A is a base-piece, in the 
center of which there is a vertical standard, 
B, around which, and at equal distances from 
it and from each other, are placed, in the 
present ease, four U electro-magnets, C C C 
C. Outsicle of the magnets there are stand 
ards D, which support the metallic segments: 
l: El E, which are arranged in a circle con 
centric with the circle in which the U-magnets 
are placed. A curved copper strip, F, encir 
cles the standards I), and is secured to the 
base-piece A. 
A billding-post, G, is connected with one 
end of tire copper strip F. One terminal of 
each magnet-wire is. placed in electrical con 
jection with the copper strip F, the other 
termi?tal being connected with one of the seg 
incintal pieces E. 
A binding-post, I, is secured to the base 
piece, and is placed in electrical communica 
tion with the central standard B. One end 
of each segment. Els, &c., is opposite the 
middle of the space between the two arms of 
the adjacent clectro-magnet, and the several 
segments are separated by a small space only. 
Two split levers or working-beams, H, are 
pivoted at right angles to each other, and in 
the same plane, to a sleeve, J, that screws up 
or down on the standard B. These levers are 
- 
- - ' 
tery-wires. 
notched, so that one will not interfere with 
the movement of the other. Each lever H 
carries two armatures, K, one near each end. 
Each armature is thus supported in the proper 
relation to the magnet below it. 
The ends of the levers Hare rounded, and 
they are received by holes in a metallic ring, 
L, that rolls or performs a circular oscillation 
upon the metallic segments EE, &e. 
A vertical shaft, M, is journaled in the 
standard B, and supports a fly -wheel, N. 
There is a slot, a, in one of the arms of the 
fly-wheel for receiving the lower end of a rod, 
b that extends upward through afraine, C, 
secured to the ring Il, and also through a 
guide, d, secured to the cross-piece e. The 
cross-piece e is supported by a prolongation 
of two of the standards D. 
The ring Land the segments EE, &c., form 
the commutator which directs the electic cur 
rent. The binding-posts GI receive the bat 
The several segments E. E., &c., being in 
electrical communication with the magnets, 
and the magnets being.in electrieal communi 
cation with the binding-post G, it follows that 
when the ring I, which is connected with the 
binding-post, comes into contact with one of 
the segments E, a current is established in the 
wires of the magnet which is adjacent to that 
segment, and the armature above the magnet 
is drawn down thereby moying the fly-wheel 
N through the medium of the ling L, frame c, 
and rod b. The rotary movement of the rod 
b causes the ring to roll from one segment EE, 
&c., to another, and thus direct the electrical 
current from one magnet to another in regular 
succession. 
By this arrangement of mechanism a direct 
downward pull of the armatures is secured, so 
that the full force of the magnets is realized, 
and the maximum effect is produced with a 
minimum of battery-Qwer. 
I am aware that a disk or wheel has been 
ed above a series of electro-magnets, so 
arral) 
as to be attracted by the said magnets, thereby 
imparting an oscillating motion to the said 
disk or wheel; but 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the levers H, the ar 
above a Se 
-8 
24,082 
BEST AVAILABLE COP 
2 
natures K, alld the ling L. With the electro 
magnets C C C C, and with the segments F, 
substantially as shown and described, and for 
tle purpose set fortl). 
2. The combination of the levers H, the ar 
nattres K, the rilug f, the fraune c, the fly 
wheel N, the rod b, and the cross-bar e with 
the electro-magnets C C C'C', the segments 
E, and the central standard B, substantially 
as shown and described, and for the purpose. . 
Set forth. 
GEORGE H. BANGS. 
With esses: 
GEO. M. HoPKINS, 
C. SEDGWICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214182.txt	. 
s! . . 
aaaaL 00LL LLLSJJS SiiiiSSLLLLSSSS SSS S SSS S SSLL 
; ; * 1 * : 3. 
; 
against l !;: ? s:: - 
. 
. 
or against the in 
. 
. v . . . . 
. 
. Si 
(s ;:! is}{}} sei 
the intermedite st:s () 
with. It will be see tha f. un 'r t! is: : :"", i 
- 
neut the spike s tre litud v try scre  y 
; !; ce. 
, 
. At the shtine ti li, ', 
 
, ej a . 
a k e ti' ! 
cats' should 
spreading of the .ail oi ( ::: 
become loose, tins 
it t (, rise, 
ri; litti i 
t is 
. w up ward. 
the bolts e would t y lo 
'Their movenet vv : ti 've !; 
t !!raw 
the l i v or 
ing up the luts all \ , sli'i's in 
LLL LCLLLL SLLL 
GG 
motice to the tt :  , il s!) (t   
! li, t. , le tr: (k at 
this point is out it o duc : : 
i; es rt r. 
In this way thc { xut situation , i l detect 
can be ascertaillet l vitl  ut dist tibi : : the bel 
which surrou l s t le l'ails 
e' 
spikes. 
M1yinventico) nav ibe al "liedl wit lu : td v anta gree 
to a road which l es not enley : sinl 
l. li. Sill a ('in the 
deadening box or 
form of plate show iii 
('fit. '. F. S. 5 
and 6, can be employ ', tle lit  ( ! 
v ; si 
t is N. '' vs N tr 
the spike being held to ti ( 
SSASS SSSSSSS LLa SaSSSL 
ut el 
e , ve's t 
pei's 
t t 
(nr 
i sigde i volt with a large head 
( ?ts ; 
Seiying is a safety late may be employed, as 
it die; t 
( in section ii Fig. 7, the bolt passing 
through the fie, and icing secured on the un 
dier side by a nuit and washer screwing on jts 
prjecting er, as indicated. 
Faving ties; ripetl my invention, what I 
clain, ai disire to secure by Letters l'atent, 
?$1 
????? 
in coilbination with the track and sound 
deadering troughs or boxes of all elevated 
railway, safety lates overlapping or covering 
the heads of the rail-retaining spikes, and 
l)olts which. ; * oleted to and extendi from 
said plates, anti are provided with nuts and 
washers, ortheireivalents,whicl restagainst 
the under silt of said troughs or the plates or 
strans that, u pli old the same, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony winereof. I have lhere unto set 
ily and this 2-fth day of February, 1879. 
(E4) If E P. OSU) kNE. 
11: pr? ?('n(' ):-- 
, 
. 
N . JP2 RAJOY, 
IN V Y. MI A IRs II AI.L. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214282.txt	P. K. DEDERICK 
Baling-Press. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented April 15, 1879. 
No. 214,282. 
 
P. K. DEDERICK. 
Baling-Press. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 214,282. 
Patented April 15, 1879. 
I 
SA'. AltStStills 
NS S N NI s 
S 
Z 
S 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
Z 
N 2 
4. 
N. PETERs, photo-LithographER, WASHINGTON, d C 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
REISSUED 
PETER. K. DEDERICK, OF ALBANY, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BALING-PRESSES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 214,2S2, dated April 15, 
1879; application filed 
August 13, 1878. 
va 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PETER. K. DEDERICK, 
of Albany, county of Albany, State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Baling-Presses; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full and 
exact description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, in which- 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
continuous baling-press with my improvements 
applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a sectional view 
taken in the line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a simi 
lar view taken in the line yy, Fig. 1. Figs. 4 
and 5 are views, showing the band-wheel and 
balance-wheel and the shipping devices. Fig. 
6 represents a completed bale of cotton, with 
its sack or covering in section. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures denote the same parts. 
This invention relates to improvements up 
on the continuous baling-presses for which 
Letters Patent were granted me October 29, 
1872, No. 132,566 and No. 132,639, and vari. 
Ous modifications of the same patented to me 
since that date; and it has for its object to 
better adapt said presses to the baling of cot 
tOn. 
To this end the invention consists, first, in 
a new mode of compressing and sacking cot 
ton or other loose fibrous material-to wit, b 
pressing the same into bales, tying the bales 
off in the bale-chamber, and forcing them di 
rectly into sacks. 
It also consists in extending the lining of 
the press beyond the discharge end of the bale 
chamber, for the purpose of supporting and 
holding the sacks, and serving as the funnel 
or conductor for the bales. 
It also consists in the employment of ribs 
or projections within the press-box for form 
ing grooves or depressions in the bales for the 
reception of the ties. 
It also consists in the employment of roll 
ers for pressing the ties into the grooves or 
depressions in the bales, whereby the bales 
are rendered smooth and even, so as to readily 
enter the inclosing-sacks and present a smooth 
and neat appearance when completed, 
It also consists in arranging the driving 
pulley and balance-wheel so that they may be 
thrown instantly in and out of connection with 
the shaft on which they are mounted. 
It consists, lastly, in the combination of the 
various parts, all as I will now proceed to de 
scribe. 
In the drawings, A represents the press 
box; B, the bale-chamber; C, the reciprocat 
ing traverser, connected to the crank-shaft D 
by the pitman E; F, the driving-shaft, and 
G- an intermediate shaft geared to the driv 
ing-shaft, and also to the crank-shaft, in the 
usual manner. 
The parts thus far enumerated are all shown 
and described in my prior patents, and will 
not therefore require further description here 
I 
H represents the funnel or conductor for 
holding and supporting the sack. Any con 
ductor will answer the purpose which will per 
mit the sack to be drawn over it and allow the 
bale to pass through and draw off the sack as 
the bale is ejected from the bale-chamber; but 
I find the most practical manner of construct 
ing it to be to line the press throughout with 
sheet metal, preferably sheet-iron, and to ex 
tend said lining beyond the discharge end of 
the bale-chamber, as shown in Fig. 1. This 
insures an unobstructed passage for the bale, 
and the sack can be easily and quickly slipped 
over the end. As the bale emerges it draws 
the sack off from the extended lining or con 
ductor, and is itself gradually enveloped by 
the sack, as will be readily understood. 
Inbaling cotton it is essential that the wires 
or ties which bind the bales shall lie below the 
surface, so as to enable the sack to be easily 
and readily applied, and to give the bale a 
smooth and finished appearance when com 
pleted. 
To accomplish this end I arrange projec 
tions I at the ends of the tying-slots in the 
bale-chamber next the press-box, as shown in 
Fig. 1, or provide raised flanges J J on each 
side of the tying-slots throughout their entire 
length, as shown in Fig. 3, the function of 
such projections and flanges being to crease 
or groove the sides of the bale opposite the 
2 
214,2S2 
tying-slots, so that the ties may be embedded 
below the surface of the bale or lie flush there 
with. 
The projections or flanges may be used sep 
arately or together, as desired. 
To still further insure the embedding of the 
ties, I arrange wheels KK in each slot near 
the discharge end of the bale-chamber, with 
their peripheries in line, or nearly so, with 
the inner surface of the lining, so that they 
will bear upon the ties if they project at all 
as the bale passes out and force said ties into 
their respective grooves. 
It has been customary heretofore to provide 
the press-box with a perforated bottom, so 
that the dirt and trash pitched in with the 
material will be separated and screened out 
before pressing the material into bales. I 
have, however, found in practice that some of 
the dirt and trash is liable to follow the ma 
terial into the bale-chamber. In order to pro 
vide for the removal of this portion also, I 
have perforated the lower wall of the bale 
chamber, as seen at R, Fig. 1. 
In baling cotton it is extremely desirable at 
times to instantly stop the pressing operation, 
and heretofore with presses of this character 
considerable difficulty has been experienced 
in effecting this result. I now propose to 
overcome the difficulty by mounting both the 
balance.wheel and the belt-pulley loosely up 
on the driving-shaft of the press, and employ 
ing a clutch by which to throw them simul 
taneously into or out of connection with the 
shaft at pleasure. In carrying out this part 
of my invention I rigidly connect the belt 
pulley P to the balance-wheel Q, or prefer 
ably construct them in one piece and mount 
them loosely upon the driving-shaft F, as shown 
in Fig. 4. 
For effecting the connection between the 
driving-shaft and the balance-wheel and pull 
ley I prefer to employ a friction-clutch, and 
in Figs. 4 and 5 I have slnown such device, 
which is well adapted for the purpose. It 
consists of a friction-plate, L, arranged to slide 
longitudinally on the shaft, but prevented from 
turning thereon by a feather, a rotatable band 
or head, M, carrying a lever, N, and having 
projections in, which fit within a peripheral 
groove in the sliding friction-plate, and hav. 
ing also a pin or screw, m, which works in a 
spiral slot formed in a projection of the shaft 
box O'. 
It is evident from this construction that by 
raising and lowering the lever the head M 
will be rotated, and cause the sliding plate to 
be moved into and out of contact with the inner 
surface of the balance-wheel, and thus cause 
the balance - wheel and belt-pulley to be con 
nected or disconnected with the shaft. 
The periphery of the sliding plate is prefer. 
ably beveled to fit a corresponding face on the 
balance-wheel, and thus increase the friction 
When the two are in contact. To further in 
crease the friction, another plate may be firmly 
secured to the end of the shaft, with a friction 
face adapted to engage with a corresponding 
friction-face on the belt-pulley, and the same 
operating device will serve to effect both con 
nections, and thus double the friction; or, if 
desirable, the outer friction-plate last described 
may be used alone with the same operating 
devices. 
Any other device for applying the friction 
may be substituted for the one shown and de 
scribed without departing from the principle 
of my invention, as all that is necessary is to 
bring the friction-surfaces to bear by some 
CaS 
Heretofore the balance-wheels of my presses 
have been secured to their shafts by frictional 
contact; but no shipping devices were em 
ployed, and the object was merely to allow the 
wheels to slip in case of accident. By the above 
described arrangement, however, the balance 
wheel and belt-pulley can be simultaneously 
disconnected from the shaft, and the pressing 
operation instantaneously stopped. 
In operation the power is applied to the belt 
pulley, and the friction devices operated to 
connect the balance-wheel and pulley to the 
shaft, and thus start the press. The cotton is 
then fed into the press-boxthrough the feed-ori 
fice O, whence it is forced into the bale-cham 
ber by the reciprocating traverser. The bales 
as they are formed are divided off in the usual 
manner in this class of presses, and bound 
through the slots in the sides of the bale-cham 
ber. 
The projections and flanges within the press 
at each slot form the grooves in the bales for 
the ties, while the wheels at the outer end of 
the slots still further insure the embedding of 
said ties. 
As each pressed and bound bale passes out 
of the press it draws off the sack from the ex 
tended lining, and is enveloped by said sack, 
as before described. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. The herein-described mode of compress 
ing and sacking cotton or other loose fibrous 
material-to wit, by pressing the same into 
bales, tying the bales offin the bale-chamber, 
and forcing them directly into sacks, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In that class of presses for baling and 
sacking cotton or other loose fibrous material 
in which the bales are simultaneously and con 
tinuously formed and bound within and ejected 
from the bale-chamber, the lining of the press 
extended beyond the discharge end of the bale 
chamber, for the purpose of holding the sacks 
and serving as the conductor for the bales into 
the sacks, substantially as described. 
3. In a baling-press in which the bales are 
tied off through slots in the sides of the bale 
chamber, means, substantially as described, 
for forming creases or grooves in the bales for 
 
214,2s2 
the reception of the ties, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a continuously-operating baling-press, 
rollers or wheels arranged in the tying-slots, 
for embedding the ties in the bales, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a baling-press, the balance-wheel and 
belt-wheel mounted loosely upon the driving 
shaft, and adapted to be thrown into or out of 
connection with said shaft by means of a fric 
tion-clutch, in combination with the recipro 
cating traverser and connecting - gearing, 
whereby the pressing operation is enabled to 
be instantly stopped at will, substantially as 
described. 
P. K, DEDERICK. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. SKINKLE, 
R. J. WAN SCOONHOWER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214382.txt	J. GARDNER, 
Primer for Cartridges, 
No. 214.382. 
Patented April 15, 1879. 
02/nesses, 
42-vect%22za 
 
M. PETERs, Phoro-LTHogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN GARDNER, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
HIS RIGHT TO THE WINCHESTER REPEATING ARMS COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE, 
IMPROVEMENT IN PRIMERS FOR CARTRIDGES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 243S2, dated April 15, 1879; application filed 
March 19, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN GARDNER, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
Improvements in Prinners for Cartridges, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention consists in constructing a 
primer for cartridges with its anvil all of one 
piece of metal, as hereinafter more fully de 
scribed. . 
Figures 1, 2, 3, and 4 represent the article 
in its various stages of formation. The re 
maining figures, from 5 to 12, inclusive, repre 
sent the same, slightly modified in construc 
tion, all being enlarged several diameters. 
Primers for cartridges, as is Well known, 
are usually made like an ordinary percussion 
cap, except that they are usually larger in 
diameter and less in height. These primers 
require an anvil to explode them upon, the 
anvil sometimes being made in the head of 
the cartridge-shell, and in other cases sepa 
rately from the shell; but in all cases, so far 
as I am aware, the anvil is composed of one 
or more pieces of metal separate and apart 
from the primer or cap. 
The object of my present invention is to 
construct the cap and its anvil all from one 
and the same piece of metal. This I accom 
plish by first punching out the disk or blank 
that is to form the primer with a series of ra 
dial projections, e, as represented in Fig. 1, 
which shows both a plan and an edge view of 
the blank. This blankis then cupped or drawn 
up by means of a drawing-machine, using 
a die and punch, in the usual manner, when it 
assumes the form shown in Fig. 2. The full 
minate a is then placed in it, and covered 
With a disk, b, of tin-foil, in the usual manner, 
as shown in section in Fig. 3. After this has 
been done it only remains to fold or turn the 
projections e inward, and press their ends 
down upon the foil and fulminate, as repre 
sented in Fig. 4, when the primer is complete. 
This latter operation is readily accomplished 
by means of one or more punches of the proper 
form; and, when thus completed, it will be 
seen that the three projections e meet at their 
inner ends, at or near the center of the cap, 
and thus form an anvil upon which the fulmi 
nate can be exploded. 
When the primer is inserted in the pocket 
of a shell so that its edge is held and sup 
ported firmly in place by the surrounding 
Walls of the pocket, so it cannot yield, the in 
clined points or projections e will be held so 
as to afford the necessary resistance to insure 
the explosion of the fulminate when the primer 
is struck by the point of the firing-pin or ham 
If the projections e be made of such a length 
as to cause their inner ends, when turned in 
ward, to touch or bear against each other, 
they will thus form a pyramidal arch, and, al 
though made of thin metal, Will offer ample 
resistance to the blow of. the firing-pin or 
hammer. 
Instead of three projections, e, it is obvious 
that more or less may be used, and made to 
operate the same. In Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8, I 
have shown the primer with its anvil composed 
of two projections, they being arranged di 
rectly opposite each other. In Figs. 9, 10, 11, 
and 12, I have shown it made with a single 
projection, e, which is made at least twice as 
long as when two or more are used. In this 
case the projection or arme is bent at the cen 
ter so as to form an apex, which bears against 
the fulminate at the center, with its loose end 
bearing against the opposite side of the cap, 
as represented in Fig. 12, and by which means 
it is so braced and held as to cause it to oper 
ate well as an anvil in resisting the blow re 
quired for explosion of the fulminate. 
It is obvious that instead of having the pro 
jections e made in the form shown, they may 
be more or less varied, at will, and that in fact 
they may be formed of a series of points like 
saw-teeth, extending all around the edge of 
the disk or blank, it only being necessary to 
make them of such a length that When turned 
inward they shall form a bearing at or near 
the center of the fulminate, the principle of 
construction being the same Whatever the 
number or form of the projections used. 
A primer thus made has its anvil always 
with it, and secured in such a manner that 
there is no danger of its becoming detached 
g 
24,3S2 
or lost. They are, moreover, simple and cheap 
to construct or manufacture. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A primer the cap of which is formed from 
a piece of metal having one or more points or 
radial projections, e, arranged to be turned 
inward, so as to form an anvil, substantially 
as shown and described. 
2. An anvil for a primer, formed of one or 
more points, e, of metal, attached to the edge 
of the cap, or the blank from which the cap is 
formed, and integral therewith, the said point 
or points being turned inward against the full 
minate, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
JOHN GARDNER, 
Witnesses: 
DANIEL H. WEADER, 
JOSEPH. J. SWEENEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214482.txt	F. J. AUSTIN. 
Ribbon-Block, 
 
PETERs, photo-LTHOGRAPHER, w 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRANK J. A UST IN, OF FARMINGTON, MA IN E. 
IMPROVEMENT IN RIBBON-BLOCKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 214,4S2, dated April 22, 1879; application filed 
January 29, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
gether until the glue or cement dries, and that 
Be it known that I, FRANK J. AUSTIN, of such a method of making them would be both 
Farmington, in the county of Franklin and slow and expensive, besides being more liable. 
to get out of shape or to split after being 
State of Maine, have invented certain Im 
provements in Ribbon-Blocks, of which the 
made; and I am not aware that any such have 
following is a specification. 
ever been made or introduced into use. 
- 
Now, the object of my invention is to pro 
This invention consists of a block for roll 
duce a ribbon-block which, while obviating 
ing or winding ribbons on, which is made of 
the objection to the old-style solid wooden 
wood and made hollow, in order to render it 
light, and at the same time have a body that 
block, of excessive weight, shall at the same 
time retain its shape and present a smooth 
will retain its shape and present a true and 
and even surface, and thereby keep the rib 
even surface upon which to wind the ribbon 
and keep it in shape. 
bon even and smooth. To do this Imake the 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, showing the 
block of wood; but instead of making it solid 
block with a piece of ribbon thereon; and Fig. 
I make it hollow, as shown in Fig. 2. 
It is obvious that this may be accomplished 
2 is a sectional view on the line at a of Fig. 1. 
in a variety of ways; but the simplest and best 
Figs. 3 and 4 represent longitudinal sections 
plan known to me is to make the block of two 
of the block somewhat modified in its con 
parts, A and B, each part being bored or hol 
struction. 
lowed out, and united by a joint, which Will 
It was formerly customary to make the 
bring their outer surfaces flush, as shown in 
blocks or rolls on which ribbons were wound 
by simply turning them of the various sizes 
Fig.2. When these parts are thus constructed, 
and glued or cemented together, the result is 
required from a solid piece of Wood; but blocks 
a cylinder or block which externally has a 
thus made were objectionable because of their 
true cylindrical surface that will retain its 
weight, which is many times that of the rib 
form, and will be in all respects equal to that 
bom wound upon them, thereby greatly en 
hancing the cost of transportation. 
of the solid wooden block, and which at the 
To obviate this objection they have latterly 
same time is as light as those made of paste 
board, or nearly so. Ribbon wound on a block 
been made of pasteboard or paper in several 
different styles, some having cylindrical paper 
thus made will remain even and smooth and 
will be true on its edges when unwound, while 
bodies with wooden heads, and others having 
at the same time the cost of transportation 
similar bodies with pasteboard heads or ends; 
will be greatly reduced as compared with any 
but these have not proven satisfactory, for the 
other block having the same qualities. 
reason that, as the ribbon is usually moist or 
Itis obvious that instead of dividing the block 
damp when wound, the pasteboard bodies fail 
centrally, as represented in Fig. 2, the body 
to retain a truly cylindrical form, their sur 
may be made throughout its length of a single 
faces becoming more or less irregular and dis 
piece, with the head left solid at one end, and 
torted, which renders the ribbon crooked or ir 
regularon its edges when unwound, and not un 
then have a headinserted at the other end, as 
frequentlyirregular and uneventhroughout its 
shown in Fig. 3, or that both end pieces may 
body, thereby seriously affecting its appear 
be made separately and then inserted; but I 
prefer the plan shown, as by the use of proper 
ance, and consequently its sale also. 
machinery they can be made cheaper and 
A ribbon-block has also been described as 
more rapidly. They may also be made in the 
composed of a sheet of veneer bent to form a 
form of a simple open-ended tube or cylinder 
cylinder, with a strip glued on the inside at 
with a diaphragm at the center, as shown in 
the joint to hold the ends together, and with 
Fig. 4; but if so made the body must be 
end pieces of veneer or of wood glued in; but 
thicker, in order to prevent their being crushed 
it is obvious that such a device cannot be 
or split, and this increased thickness would 
made true without the use of a former, and 
render them as heavy as when made with the 
that the parts must be clamped or held to 
 
214,4S2 
? 
solid ends, as shown, and would not be as one, being securely fastened together, substan 
strong, and therefore I prefer the plan shown 
tially as shown and described. 
2. A ribbon-block composed of the hollow 
in Fig. 2. 
cylindrical parts A and B, securely fastened 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
together, substantially as herein shown and 
claim is 
1. A ribbon-block composed of a cylindrical 
described. 
shell or body of uniform diameter from end to 
end, turned from one or more pieces of solid 
Wood, with one or more transverse supporting 
diaphragms or disks, the parts, if more than 
C. B. ROLLIN, 
E. B. LUFKIN. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK. J. AUSTIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214582.txt	G. H. PERKINS, 
Metallio Can. 
No. 214,582. 
Z777 af. Z. 
Patented April 22, 1879. 
Z'ee: 3 
z - 47. 
2 22 
 
 
- 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. PERKINS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN METALLIC CANS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 214, 5S2, dated April 22, 1879; application filed 
September 28, 1878, 
To all achom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. PERKINS, 
of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Pyramidal 
Meat-Cans, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and precise description. 
This invention is an improvement upon that 
set forth in English Letters Patent No. 1,059 
of 1860, and more especially upon such por 
tion of the same as relates to the re-enforce 
ment of the sides of a sheet-metal can by 
means of strengthening-pieces soldered against 
the corners of the sides, and extending from 
top to bottom thereof, such structure being 
illustrated in Fig. 12 of the drawings of said 
English patent, 
My improvement consists in strengthening 
pieces of metal AB, or their equivalent, se 
cured against the corners C of a pyramidal 
meat-can in such manner that said strength 
ening-pieces stop short of the top D or larger 
end of said can, so as to leave a circumferen 
tial portion of the body, as at E, not traversed 
by said strengthening-strips, to the end that a 
knife passed around the said body of the 
larger end of the can will, without interfer 
ence with the strips, sever the sheet metal of 
entire side body F, including the corners E, so 
as to enable the taking off of the head D and 
the removal of the contents in solid molded 
mass by percussion applied to the smaller end, 
G, of the can. 
Of the drawings, Figure 1 is a view, in per 
spective, of a can embodying my invention, re 
enforced by outside strips; and Fig.2, a view, 
in perspective, of a similar can sectioned hori 
Zontally, so as to show the re-enforcements B 
applied to the inside of the corner portions C; 
Fig. 3, a vertical section of Fig. 1 along the 
middle of one corner, and extending half-way 
across the can. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts wherever used. 
In the process of canning cooked meats, to 
Which my invention is of especial applica 
bility, it has been found that the only can 
which it is advisable to employ is the pyram 
idal, because the only form readily permit 
ting the removal of the cooked meat in solid 
molded mass, the larger end of the can being 
cut through around the side body at E and F, 
near the larger head, D, and the contents 
ejected by percussion applied to the smaller 
end, G; and it has been further found that, un 
less these pyramidal cans are re-enforced at 
their corner portions Clby such strengthening 
strips as are set forth in the English patent 
referred to, the can will first bulge out of shape 
under the steam-pressure necessarily gener. 
ated within it during the boiling process to 
which the can and its inclosed contents are 
subjected, and will then buckle or double in 
at its corners under the Subsequent collapse. 
In Order to remove the contents in solid 
mass it is also necessary, as before stated, to 
cut off the larger end portion, or the can-head 
D, by sectioning the metal of the side body 
completely around at E and F. Such cutting 
is impossible in a can constructed as in the 
English patentreferred to, because the strength 
ening-strips therein set forth extend the entire 
distance of the side body, or, as expressed, 
from top to bottom of the can, so that any 
cutting by tools ordinarily in use would be 
rendered impossible at the corners by the in 
terference of said strengthening-strips, which 
render the corners of the English can too 
thick and strong to be cut through. 
By my improvement of stopping saidstrength 
ening-strips AB just short of the larger end 
of the can, (shown at E.) I gain all the ad 
vantages of the re-enforcement, and at the 
same time leave a portion of metal extend 
ing circumferentially and completely around 
the can which is not re-enforced, but around 
and through which the knife can pass. 
The strengthening-strips may be composed 
of any desired material, applied in any de 
sired manner. 
The canis preferably made with its sidebody 
of very thin tin, such as taggers, and both 
its ends of heavier tin than the side body, ac 
cording to an invention of myself and Geo. 
Brown, for which we are about to apply for 
Letters Patent, 
I am aware that lamellar vessels are old; 
that double-walled Vessels have been re-en 
forced by intermediate strengthening-rings; 
and that hexagonal and other cans have been 
strengthened by hoops circumferentially ap 
 
2 
214,5S2 
What Ido claim, and desire to secure by Let. 
In combination with a pyramidal meat-can, 1878. 
plied either inside or outside, and to none of forced, substantially as and for the purposes 
such forms do I lay claim. 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
ters Patent, is- 
signed my name this 25th day of September, 
strengthening-strips applied to the corners 
thereof in such manner as to stop short of the 
larger end of the can, in order to leave a cir- 
cumferential portion of the metal not re-en- 
J. BONSALL TAYLOR, 
W. C. STRAWBRIDGE. 
- 
In presence of - 
w 
GEORGE H. PERKINS, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214682.txt	I, B, MILLINGTON. 
Hydraulic Ram, 
No. 214,682. 
Patented April 22, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
aS S 
% 3. 
 
  
A". 
If a 
Higs- 
He 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
In 
F. 
s/ 
: 
ISRE 
 
AITORNEY 
Er, W. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
ISAAC B. MILLINGTON, OF COLUMBIA, PENNSYLVANIA, 
MPROVEMENT IN HYDRAULIC RAMS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 214,6s2, dated April 22, 1879; application filed 
February 10, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ISAAC B. MILLINGTON, 
of Columbia, in the county of Lancaster and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and valuable Improvementin Hydraulic Rams; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the con 
struction and operation of the same, reference 
being had to the annexed drawings, making 
a part of this specification, and to the letters 
and figures of reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representa 
tion of a longitudinal vertical section of my 
improved ram. Fig. 2 is an end view of the 
same, and Fig. 3 is a detached view of the air. 
chamber. 
The nature of the invention consists in the 
construction and novel arrallgement of a 
straight ram-cylinder having a reduced inlet 
at one end, a valved box at the other end, and 
a reduced neck in the line of the cylinder con 
necting the said box and body of the cylinder. 
In the annexed drawings, the letter. A des 
ignates a strong metallic cylinder, constitut 
ing the body of the ram. This cylinder has 
at one end a reduced neck, a, to which the 
feed-pipe is secured, and at the other end a 
water-box, B, connected with the enlarged 
part of the body by means of a reduced neck, 
b. . At the end of the water-box B is an open. 
ing, c, in which is a horizontally-acting valve, 
d, of the same general construction as that 
shown in my Letters Patent No. 177,144, dated 
May 9, 1876, being so arranged as to receive 
the direct impact of the water-head, and being 
normally open. 
On top of the cylinder, near the reduced 
neck b, is a seat, e, of circular form, having 
formed therein an oval opening, having an in 
clined circumferential flange, e, that is the 
valve-seat. Cindicates the air-chamber, hav 
ing a base-flange, f, conforming to the seat e, 
and resting Snugly thereon. 
A leather washer, g, having an oval open 
ing in it to receive the valve-seat e' and a 
flap covering the opening c', is interposed be. 
tween the base-flange and air - chamber seat, 
as shown in Fig.1. The base-flange is caught 
under the projections g on the ram-tube, and 
the chamber is secured to the seat by means 
of wedgesh, forced in between the said flange 
and projections and clamping the leather 
washer forcibly between them. A valve, , is 
bolted to the flap aforesaid, and accurately 
closes the opening in the seat. This valve is 
provided with a projection, n, arranged at an 
angle of forty-five degrees, or thereabouts, to 
the body of the valve, and of about two 
thirds of its superficial area, the effect of 
which is to render the valve very sensitive 
both in opening and closing, because of the 
counterbalancing and reacting effect of the 
said projection. The valve is of angular form 
in cross-section, terminating above in a sharp 
ridge, , and acting after the manner of a cut 
Water. 
The principle on which a ram operates is so 
Well known that no explanation is necessary. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
. A straight ram - cylinder having a reduced 
inlet, a, at one end, a valved box, B, at the 
other, and a reduced neck, b, in the line of 
the cylinder, connecting the said box and body 
of the cylinder, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
ISAAC. B. MILLINGTON. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. YoCUM, 
GEORGE YOUNG, Jr., 
C. B. MILLINGTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214782.txt	A. E. MANN. 
Wash-Boiler, 
Patented April 29, 1879. 
No. 214,782. 
 
  
 
729, 2. 
a 
sease 
 
2 
III 
III 
Siegelis SSS 
H 
A - 
AE III 
Y 
S. 
Hill 
- First: 
LEIH 
UN 
NUI 
Y 
tec. 
is 
 
e 
a 
--. -- - - - - - - - - - 
asslateraser stressuressessessels-AAS 
Sisle... e. elle le. 
Fig. 3 
firing 
&S 
23, 2S KS S 
II a VY II 
- Hi-NS-LIHE-6 
I-II 
 
  
I H 
S. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADELAIDE E. MANN, OF LAWRENCE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
IMPROVEM ENT N WASH-BOLERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 214,7s2, dated April 29, 1879; application filed 
February 25, 1879. 
, 
----'w- 
-o- 
- 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ADELAIDE E. MANN, of 
the city of Lawrence, in the county of Essex 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Wash-Boilers, 
which invention is fully described and setforth 
in the following specification and accompa 
nying drawings. 
My invention relates to wash-boilers for do 
mestic use; and consists in providing a bas 
ket with a hinged bottom, and means of sus 
pending it above the bottom of the wash 
boiler, as may be desired. 
Myinvention is illustrated in detail in the 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which all similar letters of reference indi 
cate like parts, and in which- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a wash 
boiler to which my invention has been ap 
plied, and shows the crown of the basket rest 
ing on top of the boiler, the basket being 
down in the Water contained in the boiler. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical section, show 
ing the basket partly raised out of, yet sus 
pended in, the boiler above the water. Fig. 3 
is a front view of the basket removed from the 
boiler. 
A is the boiler, a a being its handles. B is 
the top or crown of the basket, to which all 
the other parts are attached. It conforms in 
size and shape to the contour of the boiler to 
which it is applied, and into which it fits, and 
is provided with a slight flange or projection, 
b, which takes bearing on the upper edge of 
the boiler-Walls, and at each end it has the 
handles i i. Its walls are continuous, and 
from the inside, on the same line as the exter 
nal flange, b, projects inwardly a continuous 
horizontal rim or ledge, C, which is about two 
inches wide. From the edge of this rim or 
ledge extends downward a series of ribs, c 0 
c, which join together at their lower ends by 
the continuous band D, thus forming the walls. 
of the basket below the crown B. The entire 
length of these ribs is such that their lower 
ends will be elevated about two inches above 
the bottom of the boiler when the crown is 
resting by its flange b on the top edge of the 
boiler. 
The bottom of the basket consists of a se 
ries of slats or bars joined by their ends to a 
rim, which conforms in size and shape to the 
bottom opening of the basket, into which it 
easily fits, and is hinged to one side thereof, 
so as to open down, as shown by the dotted 
lines did, in Fig. 2. 
F is a vertical rod, journaled in bearings to 
one of the ribs. It extends from just above 
the rim C (where it is surmounted by the knob 
or handlef, by which it is turned) to a point 
immediately below the lower edge of the band 
D, where it is bent to a right angle to its shaft, 
and extends horizontally one or two inches 
under the bottom of the basket, to which it 
gives support whenitis closed, and from which 
it can be turned by the handle f when it is 
desired to open the bottom of the basket. 
G G are two spring-supports, made fast by 
their upper ends to the crown of the basket, 
one at each end. They are of such length. 
that when the basketis partly raised (say, half 
way) out of the boiler they will spring out 
and engage the upper edge of the boiler, and 
support the basket in the position shown in 
Fig. 2. 
Operation: The basket is suspended inside 
of the boiler, the crown being above and rest 
ing by its flange or projection on the upper 
edge of the boiler, so that the bottom of the 
basket is a short distance above the boiler 
bottom, the sides of the basket a short dis 
tance from the walls of the boiler, thus pre 
venting the clothes from coming into contact 
with the boiler. The articles to be boiled or 
cleansed are then placed in the basket, and 
water supplied thereto, the lid being placed 
on the Crown. 
When the boiling process is completed, and 
it is desired to remove the clothes, the basket 
is raised up until the spring-Supports escape 
from the boiler, and springing outwardly, en 
gage and rest on the edge of the boiler, hold 
ing the basket and its contents out of the 
water contained in the kettle, in which posi. . 
tion they are allowed to remain a short time, 
that the water may drain out. When this is 
accomplished the basket and its contents are 
entirely removed from the boiler, and, being 
placed over a tub or other vessel, the contents 
are dumped by turning the rod F until its 
 
2 
24, S2 
point moves from under the bottom of the 
basket, so that it opens, and the contents are 
discharged in bulk. When this is done the 
basket is replaced in the boiler, the bottom 
having been first closed and locked, and it is 
again ready for use. 
Having thus described my invention and its 
operation, what I claim, and desire Letters 
Patent for, is 
1. A basket-vessel adapted, substantially as 
described, to hold clothing in suspension in a 
wash-boiler, and provided with a bottom open 
ing downward for the discharge of the con 
tents in bulk, as shown. 
2. A basket-vessel adapted, substantially as 
described, to hold clothing in suspension in a 
wash-boiler, and provided with a bottom open 
ing downward for the discharge of the con 
tentsin bulk, and having a vertical rod adapted 
A. support said bottom when closed, as speci 
ed. 
ADELAIDE ELLIOTT MANN. 
In presence of - 
CORA. E. MANN, 
WM. Iu. DOWLING. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214882.txt	 
 
J. W. CAMPBELL. 
Adjustable Window-Cornice, 
No. 214,882. 
Patented April 29, 1879. 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
(2- 12/4-242, 
44.7-ir 
INVENTOR: 
y%22z4e^ 
5f vul 16 
Y 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. CAMPBELL, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN ADJUSTABLE WINDOW. CORN CES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 214, SS2, dated April 29, 1879; application filed 
March 28, 1879. 
The cornices may be constructed with vari 
ous ranges of adjustment and of any desired 
length; and a stop, a, fixed on therear surface 
of the inner sliding piece, B, will serve to pre 
vent the extension of the cornice after it shall 
have been fitted to a window. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A window-cornice constructed in two like 
parts that slide upon each other for the pur 
pose of adjustment, and that when put to 
gether form a complete cornice, with center 
piece, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed. 
2. An adjustable window-cornice composed 
of two like front pieces, A and B, two like re 
turn pieces, CC, and two like slotted brackets 
or center-pieces, D D, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
3. The stop a', in combination with the front 
pieces, A and B, return pieces CC, and slot 
ted brackets D D, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
4. An adjustable window-cornice made in 
two like parts, in which the lines and curves 
of the front and rear surfaces of each front 
piece are alike and conforming to the outlines 
of the slots in the brackets in which they slide, 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
JAMES W. CAMPBELL, 
Witnesses: 
C. SEDGWICK, 
I. I. STOVER, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMEs W. CAMPBELL, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and Improved Adjust 
able Window-Cornice, of which the following 
is a specification. 
Figure 1 is a front view of the cornice. Fig. 
2 is a plan of the same. Fig. 3 is a section on 
line aca, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to provide an 
ornamental window-cornice that, withoutbeing 
cut or altered in any way, can befitted to any 
Window. 
The cornice is constructed of two like pieces, 
A and B, that slide upon each other, each pro 
vided with a return piece, C, and a slotted 
bracket, D, whose slot conforms in its outlines 
to the surface-lines of the cornice itself. One 
of these brackets is set upon and permanently 
fixed to an end of each piece, A and B, and 
embraces the other piece, be it A or B, that is 
made to slide in its slot, This slot, it will be 
seen, is as wide as the combined thickness of 
the two pieces. 
In order to secure a good fitting of the pieces 
A and B as they slide upon one another with 
in the brackets, the lines and curves of their 
upper and under surfaces are shaped alike. 
The faces of the brackets may befashioned in 
various ornamental designs, as together they 
form the center-piece or ornament of the cor 
1C0. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US214982.txt	H. W. AT WATER. 
Attachment for Waste-Pipes. 
No. 214,982. 
Patented May 6, 1879. 
A/6vesses. 
M . Are- 
Zverefor: 
4. Maza 
a. 
 
N. PSTERs, PHOTo-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
4. 
HENRY W. ATWATER, OF NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
IMPROVEMENT IN ATTACHMENTS FOR WASTE-PIPEs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 214,952, dated May 6, 1879; application filed 
March 17, 1879. 
shown in Figs. 3 and 4. When the water does 
not flow freely the rod c, with its disk c, also 
the cylinder C, should be removed, which is 
readily done by means of the key C, as indi. 
cated in Figs. 3 and 5, and cleaned. 
The body of the cylinder C should always 
be somewhat smaller than the part of the out 
let-pipe around it, thus forming a chamber be 
tween the outlet-pipe and the cylinder, so that 
when the cylinder is clean the water will pass 
freely through the perforations in the side of 
the cylindler, as well as those in the bottom. 
It will be seen that my device is very sim 
ple, and is readily applied to any wash-bowl. 
As the cylinder C is not fastened to the waste 
pipe and does not assist in attaching the 
waste-pipe to the bowl, it is easily removed, 
and being surrounded by a small chamber, the 
water always has a free passage into the waste 
pipe, unless, of course, all the perforations in 
the cylinder are stopped up. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In combination, the outlet-pipe B B and 
the perforated cylinder C, arranged together 
as and for the purpose specified. 
2. In combination, the perforated cylinder 
C and the rod c, with its disk c, as set forth. 
H. WILLIAM ATWATER. 
-- 
Witnesses: 
J. E. MAYNADIER, 
GEORGE. O. G. COALE. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY W. ATWATER, 
of Newton, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented an Im 
proved Attachment for Waste-Pipes from 
Wash-Bowls, Bath-Tubs, and the like, of which 
the following is a full, clear, concise, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the ac 
Companying drawings, making a part hereof. 
The object of my invention is to guard ef. 
fectually against the stoppage of waste-pipes 
by lint, hair, &c.; and it is an improvement 
on the invention described in my Patent No. 
157,957, dated December 22, 1874. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows the method 
of applying my attachment, part of the waste 
pipe being broken away to show the perfo 
rated cylinder. Fig. 2 shows my attachment 
in section. The other figures show details. 
A indicates a wash-bowl or other recepta 
cle for water. B B is the outlet-pipe, secured 
in the bottom of A. C is a hollow cylinder, 
perforated, as shown, slightly conical at c, to 
fit the slightly-conical part of the opening B", 
the two being ground together to make a wa 
ter-tight joint, and yet allow the cylinder C to 
be readily removed from B. The plug or stop 
per D fits into C instead of into B, as is usual. 
The rod c is arranged in C, as shown, and 
has secured upon it a disk, c'. 
I prefer to 
have the disk c perforated. This device is 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215083.txt	 
 
No. 215, O 83. 
w 
A, BALL ARD. 
Fire-Telegraph Boxes. 
Patented May 6, 1879. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
% 
2 
2 
s 
7 
% 
ZZZ 
 
W Y Sl 
- A 
E 
E 
Avenfor: 
feters, PHOTO-LithographER, washington, d. c. 
 
. 
A, BALL ARD. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Fire-Telegraph Boxes. 
- 
- - 
No. 215, O 83. 
Patented May 6, 1879. 
 
 
  
 
A 
EZ Eez74E 
NE 3 /1N 
M 
3 % 
- All 
. 
SNEEE 
N 
e sa. 
V 
E 
 
 
 
 
   
 
2 
 
N.peers, photo-LithoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
ADDISON nuan, or onesco ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FIRE-TELEGRAPH BoxES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 215,0S3, dated May 6, 1879; application filed 
April 30, 1878. 
-- " 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ADDISON BALLARD, of 
the city of Chicago, Cook county, State of Illi 
nois, have invented new and useful improve 
ments in Fire-Alarms, of which the following 
is a full description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure i is a front elevation with a portion 
of the secondary case or receptacle broken 
away; Fig. 2, a section on line at a of Fig. 1; 
Fig. 3, a detail showing the devices for re 
turning the sliding bar; Fig. 4, a vertical lon 
gitudinal section, enlarged, of the secondary 
case or receptacle and its devices; Fig. 5, a 
detail, enlarged, of the devices for striking the 
gong or bell. 
The object of this invention is to construct 
an attachment, to be used in connection with 
automatic fire-alarms, to avoid the necessity 
of opening the door of the box for the purpose 
of turning in an alarm, and to connect with 
such device an arrangement for striking a 
gong or bell, for the purpose of notifying per 
sons in the vicinity of the box that an alarm 
is being turned in therefrom; and its nature 
consists in providing a mechanism located in 
side of the case or box, to engage with the de 
vice for starting the alarm, and connected with 
a spring or ribbon operated from the outside 
of the case or box; in providing a sliding bar, 
located outside of the case, and having a pro 
jection or catch so arranged as to engage with 
the hook or device for starting an ordinary 
alarm, and operated by a spring or ribbon 
located outside of the case; in providing a 
spring, one end of which is secured to the slid 
ing catch-bar or other mechanism, and the 
other to a shaft, around which the spring or 
ribbon can be wound or coiled; in providing 
the sliding catch-bar with stops so arranged 
as to prevent the bar from operating too far in 
either direction; in providing spirally-coiled 
springs, attached at one end to the sliding 
bar, to readjust the sliding bar or mechanism 
for the next operation; in providing a gong or 
bell, located around the shaft, with a hammer 
and devices so arranged that the revolving of 
the shaft will strike the gong or bell; in pro 
viding the lower end of the hammer arm or 
lever with an arm having an incline, so ar 
ranged as to engage with pins or cross-bars 
on revolving disks, for operating the hammer, 
and a curved projection to receive the end of 
the hammer-spring; in providing a ratchet 
and pawl, so arranged as to connect the disks 
and shaft, to operate the hammer and sound 
the gong or bell when the alarm is being 
turned, and to disconnect them when the re 
coil of the spring takes place, to prevent in 
jury to any portion of the mechanism from 
such recoil; in providing a suitable inclosing 
case or receptacle to receive the spring and 
other devices, to enable the devices to be read 
ily attached to an ordinary box; in providing 
the shaft with a lock-nut so arranged as to 
prevent the spring from being wound too 
tight and to stop the force of the recoil, and to 
prevent winding of the spring in the Wrong 
direction; in so constructing and arranging 
the spring and its operating-shaft that the 
winding of the spring on the shaft will, through 
the sliding bar or other mechanism, turn in 
the alarm, and the recoil of the spring will 
return the sliding bar or mechanism automat 
ically to the proper position to be again oper 
ative, so as to dispense with the necessity of 
independent readjustment, thus making the 
device self-adjustable, and in the several parts 
and combination of parts hereinafter set forth 
aS 6W. 
In the drawings, A represents the case or 
box for the signaling mechanism; B, the front 
or door of the case; C, the signaling mechan 
ism; D, the secondary case or receptacle con 
taining the operating mechanism; E, the shaft; 
F, the spring or ribbon; G, the sliding bar; 
H, the guideways or bars; I, the returning 
springs; J, the gong or bell; K, the hammer; 
Li, the arm having a curved extension; M, the 
cross bars or pins; N, the disks; O, the ham 
mer-spring; P, the ratchet; Q, the pawl; R, 
the pawl-spring; S, the stop-nut; T, the stop 
for preventing overwinding of the spring; U, 
the strengthening-bolt; V, the end flanges; W, 
the crank; D'D', the heads of the case; a, 
the hook of the alarm; b, the catch or projec 
tion; c, the cross-bar on the sliding bar G; d, 
the pin or stop; e, the pins or screws for at 
taching the upper ends of the spirally-coiled 
springs I; f, the pin or hook for attaching the 
 
 
.. 
r 
 
 
 
 
2 
25,0S3 
spring F; g, the opening for the passage of 
F; h, the attaching - flange; i, the hammer 
pivot; ik, the pins or supports for the spring 
R; l n, the pins or supports for the spring O; 
7, the pin against which the hammer strikes 
in its forward movement. 
The case A may be made of cast metal or 
other suitable material, and may be of the or 
dinary construction, or of any desired form 
and size suitable to receive the signaling 
mechanism C, which may be secured therein 
in the usual manner, the signaling mechan 
ism being of the usual construction of such de 
vices, which are operated by pulling down a 
hook or other device. 
The front B may be cast with the case, or 
it may be a separate piece, suitably secured 
thereto, or it may be provided with hinges to 
form the ordinary door, and in case the front 
B is cast with the case a suitable opening is 
to be provided to enable access to be had to 
the signaling mechanism C for the purpose 
of repairs, which opening can be closed by 
means of a plate, sliding door, hinged door, or 
other device suitable for the purpose. 
The case or receptacle D may be cast or 
formed with the case A, or it may be a sepa 
rate case of cast metal, or other suitable ma 
terial, and may be of any desired form, solong 
as it is capable of receiving the spring or rib 
loon and gong and their operating devices. 
In the form shown, the case D is made sepa 
rate from the case A, and is secured thereto 
by means of the flange h, which flange, as 
shown, is secured to the front B by means of 
suitable bolts or screws. This form of case is 
designed to be used with boxes having the 
ordinary door, the flange h being secured to 
the door in any suitable manner. The case D 
is provided at each end with heads ID' and D', 
which heads, as shown, are secured by means 
of screws to flanges V, projecting down from 
the inner face of the cylinder near each end, 
of a sufficient depth and thickness to receive 
and hold the screws. Instead of the flanges 
V, ears might be cast on the outer surface of 
the case D, to which the heads could be se 
cured by means of bolts or screws, or the heads 
can be secured to the case in any other suit 
able manner. 
At the center of the heads ID' D'are located 
the bearings for the shaft E, which shaft ex 
tends across the case, and one end thereof 
projects some distance beyond the head, and 
to it is suitably secured a handle or crank, W, 
by means of which the shaft can be rotated, 
The other end of this shaft E is provided with 
a screw-thread from its center out, and on this 
end is a stop or nut, S, having a correspond 
ing screw-thread, so located and arranged that 
the revolving of the shaft will cause the nut 
or stop to travel forward and back thereon. 
To this shaft E is secured one end of the 
spring or ribbon F, the other end of which 
passes up through a suitable opening, g, formed 
in the cylinder D and bottom of the case A, 
and is secured to the pin or hook fat the lower 
end of the bar G, which bar is located inside 
of the front or door B, and slides up and down 
in the plates or guides H, by means of which 
it is held in position. Near the lower end of 
this bar G is a cross-piece, c, the ends of which 
project some distance beyond the sides of the 
bar, and to each end is secured the lower end 
of a spirally-coiled spring, I, the upper ends 
of which springs are held in place by pins or 
screwse, located each side of the bar G on the 
front or door B. Near the top of the bar G 
may be located a pin or stop, d, so arranged 
as to strike against the upper guide-bar, H, to 
prevent the bar G from being drawn too far 
down. 
On this sliding bar G, and between the 
guide-bars H, as shown, is a projection, b, the 
location and arrangement of which, with ref. 
erence to the hook or other device which starts 
the signaling mechanism, is such as to bring 
the projection immediately over and in con 
tact with the hook or other device, so that any 
downward movement of the bar G will, through 
the projection b, pull clown the hook or other 
device. As shown, the bar G is located di 
rectly in front of the hook a, which position is 
necessary when it is desired to have the pro 
jection bact directly on the hook. 
Two spirally-coiled springs, I, are shown, one 
on each side of the bar G; but a single spring 
night be used, one end being secured to the 
top of the bar G, and the other to the front or 
door B. The projection or catch b might be 
so arranged with its relation to the hook a 
and guide-bars H as to act as a stop for the 
sliding bar G, as well as a means for engag 
ing the hook a. 
By making the spring F sufficiently heavy 
and elastic the recoil of this spring will be 
sufficient to return the sliding bar G to posi 
tion, in which event the spirally-coiled springs 
I are not absolutely essential, but may be used, 
if desired. Other means than the sliding bar 
G, provided with the projection engaging the 
hook a might be used for making the connec 
tion with the spring or ribbon F. Alever might 
be pivoted to the front or door B, one end be. 
ing so arranged as to engage the hook a, and 
the other being so connected with the spring or 
ribbon that as the spring or ribbon is wound 
on the shaft it will depress the end of the le 
ver in contact with the hook and carry the 
hook down, or the end of the spring or ribbon 
might be provided with a catch or hook inter 
locking with the hook a, or some other mech 
anism might be connected with the spring or 
ribbon for engaging with and operating the 
hook a, but the arrangement shown is simple 
and effective, and enables the device to be 
readily applied to doors of ordinary fire-alarm 
boxes, so that a downward action can be had 
on the hook a in a straight line therewith. 
The spring or ribbon F need not necessarily 
be made from steel or other similar elastic ma 
terial, but by using a spring having some elas 
 
 
 
 
25083 
3. 
- 
- 
. 
... 
engaged when the shaft is revolved for turning 
ticity such elasticity will be found useful in re 
in the alarm, and, by reason of such engage 
turning the parts to position. A ribbon hav 
ment, the disks N must revolve with the shaft; 
ing no elasticity could be used, and good re 
but when the shaft is revolved in the opposite 
sults be attained therefrom, the spirally-coiled 
direction, or the recoil of the spring takes 
springs I being made sufficiently strong and 
place, no engagement will be had between the 
elastic to insure the proper return of the parts, 
pawl and ratchet, and no connection is there 
such springs being necessary for this purpose 
fore made between the shaft and disks, so that 
when a non-elastic ribbon is used. 
the shaft is free to revolve without communi 
Other means than the nut or hanger S might 
be employed to stop the overwinding of the 
cating motion to the disks. 
: The nut S not only serves as a stop to pre 
spring; but such device is efficient and easily 
vent the shaft from revolving too far in either 
applied, and by locating it inside of the cylin 
direction, but it also prevents the shaft from 
der it cannot be tampered with. The bolt U 
being turned in the wrong direction, as it can 
is provided to strengthen the flange or stopT, 
not be turned any farther in one direction af 
so that the nut as it strikes against the flange 
ter the nut is in contact with the head D' or 
will not break it, as might be the case if no 
bolt were used. The flange Tis provided with 
flange T. 
In use the alarm is turned in by taking hold 
a suitable opening for the passage of the shaft 
of the crank W and revolving the shaft E in 
E, and is cast with the cylinder D, as shown. 
the direction to wind the spring or ribbon F 
The bell or gong J, as shown, is permanently 
thereon, and as this spring or ribbon is wound 
secured to the shaft E, and is located on the 
up it will carry down the sliding bar G and 
shaft, between the spring F and head D". 
its projection b, or other mechanism which en 
Between this bell and the head D is a loose 
gages with the hook a, or device for starting 
collar, on which are two disks, N, connected 
the alarm, and send in the alarm. The shaft 
together at their outer edges by means of pins 
is revolved until the nut S as it travels there 
or cross-bars M, arranged at equal distances 
on reaches the stop or flange T, against which 
apart. 
it strikes, which prevents the further revolv 
The lever or arm of the hammer K is pivot 
ing of the shaft in that direction, at which 
ed at its lower end to the stud or projection i, 
: time the hook a has been pulled down suffi 
formed on or secured to the head ID', and is 
ciently to turn in the alarm. The shaft E is 
provided at its lower end with an arm so ar. 
then to be released, when it will be revolved in 
ranged as to pass between the two disks N in 
the opposite direction by reason of the recoil 
such a manner as to bring the upperface there 
of the spring F, or the action of the springs 
of in contact with the pins M when the disks 
I, until the nut S has reached the end of the 
N are revolved by the shaft. The under face 
shaft and is in contact with the head D', 
of the arm L is provided with a downward 
which stops the revolving of the shaft in that 
extension, with which one end of the spring O 
direction, during which time the sliding bar 
engages, the other end of which spring comes 
G. and its projection b, or other mechanism 
in contact with the pin or projection m on the 
which engages the hook a, will have been car 
head D', the spring being secured to the pin 
ried back to their first position, by reason of 
or projection-l by means of its coil passing 
the recoil of the spring For the action of the 
around such pin. As shown, the curved ex 
springs I, which allows the hook a to return to 
tension of the arm Lisprovided with an open 
its position, and brings the parts into proper 
ing for making the engagement with the ham 
position to again turn in an alarm. As the 
mer-spring O. 
shaft E is revolved to turn in the alarm, the 
On the head D'' is formed or secured a pin, 
disks N will revolve therewith, because the 
n, the location. of which in reference to the 
ratchet P and pawl Q are engaged, and as 
hammer is such as to prevent the spring O 
these disks revolve the pinsM will be brought 
from throwing the hammer too far, the arm of 
consecutively into contact with the arm Lof 
the hammer striking against the pin or stop n. 
the hammer lever or arm, drawing the ham 
Between the bell J and the disks N is a ratchet 
mer back until the pin M has passed the arm 
wheel, P, permanently secured to the shaft E 
L., when the spring O will throw the hammer 
and to the head or disk N. Next to the ratchet 
forward, striking the bell or gong, so that the 
wheel is pivoted a pawl, Q, so as to engage 
same action that operates the alarm will also 
with the ratchet-wheel, which pawl is held in 
strike the gong or bell, thereby giving notice 
place by the spring R, secured to the stud or 
of the turning in of the alarm to those in the 
pinj on the disk-N, one end-of the spring en 
vicinity. . When the shaft revolves in the op 
gaging the pawl, and the other coming in con 
posite direction no action will be had on the 
tact with the pin or stop k. 
The construction and arrangement of these 
BS this arrangement it will be seen that the 
devices for striking the gong are shown in 
alarm can be turned in quickly and easily, and 
Figs. 4 and 5. 
that the opening of the door of the box for 
By securing the ratchet-wheelPpermauently 
this purpose is dispensed with, so that no key 
to the shaft E, and its ratchet-R to one of the 
heed be provided for opening-the-door, and no 
disks N, which disks are loose on the shaft E, it 
will be seen that the ratchet and pawl will be door is essential, so far astheturning in of the 
gOllg. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
 
 
4 
215,0S3 
alarm is concerned, and is only necessary to winding the spring, whereby the spring will 
enable access to be had to the signalling mech 
act to turn in the alarm and to aid in read 
anism for the purpose of repairs. It will also 
justing the sliding bar for the next operation, 
substantially as specified. 
be seen that any person can turn in the alarm 
readily, as all that is necessary to be done is 
6. In an automatic fire-alarm, the sliding 
to revolve the crank, so that as soon as a fire is 
bar G, provided with the projection b, ar 
discovered a person can run to the box and 
ranged to engage with the hook a, in combi 
instantly turn in the alarm, and not be to the 
nation with the spring or ribbon F, shaft E, 
trouble and delay of looking around for a key 
and coiled spiral springs I, for operating the 
with which to open the door. 
sliding bar and adjusting the device for the 
By adding a gong or bell, which will be 
next operation, substantially as specified. 
rung by revolving the shaft when an alarm is 
7. In an automatic fire-alarm, the sliding 
turned in, it gives a warning to parties in the 
bar G, provided with the projection b, ar 
vicinity of the fact, and it also prevents the 
ranged to engage with the hooks a and stops 
turning in of the alarm by parties for mischief, 
c d, in combination with the guide-bars H, 
as the instant the crank is turned the gong or 
spiral coiled springs I, spring or ribbon F, 
bell will sound, giving notice thereof. 
shaft E, and a suitable mechanism for re 
My improvement may be attached to any 
volving the shaft, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
of the ordinary fire-alarm boxes now in use 
which employ a hook or other pulley device 
8. In an automatic fire-alarm, the sliding 
for turning in the alarm. As heretofore con 
bar G, provided with the projection b, ar 
structed, to pull the hook and start the alarm 
ranged to engage with the hook a spring or 
the door of the box has to be opened; but with 
ribbon F, and shaft E, in combination with 
my improvement attached to such boxes the 
the gong or bell J and a mechanism for 
necessity of opening the door for this purpose 
striking the gong or bell operated by the shaft 
is dispensed with, and the alarin is turned in 
E, whereby the bell will be rung by the re 
with the box or case closed. 
volving of the shaft when turning in the 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
alarm, substantially as and for the purpose 
by Letters Patent, is 
specified. 
1. In an automatic fire-alarm, the combina 
9. In an automatic fire-alarm, the shaft E, 
tion of the spring or ribbon F and a mechan 
for operating the signaling mechanism through 
ism for winding the same, located outside of 
the winding of a spring or ribbon thereon, in 
the case of the signaling mechanism, with a 
combination with the bell or gong J and the 
mechanism to engage with the hook a located 
striking mechanism, substantially as described, 
inside of the case and connected with the 
located on and operated by the shaft, whereby 
spring or ribbon F, whereby the winding of 
the revolving of the shaft when operating the 
the spring or ribbon will turn in the alarm, 
alarm will ring the gong or bell, as and for 
substantially as and for the purposes specified. 
the purposes specified. 
2. In an automatic fire-alarm, the combina 
10. In an automatic fire-alarm, the bell J, 
tion of a mechanism for engaging the hook a 
secured to the shaft E, which operates the de 
with the spring F and a mechanism for wind 
vices for turning in the alarm, in combination 
ing the spring, located outside of the case of 
with the hammer K, having its arm or lever 
the signaling mechanism, whereby the wind 
provided with the inclined extension L, spring 
ing of the spring will turn in the alarm and 
O, and disks N, provided with the pins Mand 
its recoil aid in readjusting the hook-engaging 
located on the shaft E, for giving notice when 
mechanism for the next operation, substan 
an alarm is being turned in, substantially as 
tially as specified. 
specified. 
3. In all automatic fire-alarm, the combina 
11. In an automatic fire-alarm, the bell J, 
tion of the sliding bar G and a device for en 
hammer K, having its arm or lever provided 
gaging the hook a with the spring or ribbon 
with an inclined extension, L, disks N, pins 
F and a mechanism for winding the spring or 
M, ratchet P, pawl Q, springs OR, and stop 
ribbon, located outside of the case of the sig 
n, in combination with the shaft E, spring or 
maling mechanism, for enabling the alarm to 
ribbon F, sliding bar G, provided with the 
be turned in from the outside, substantially 
projection b, and springs f, for turning in the 
as specified. 
alarm, giving notice thereof, and preventing 
4. In an automatic fire-alarm, the projection 
the recoil of the spring when adjusting the de 
b, arranged to engage with the hook a, in com 
vices for the next operation from injuring any 
bination with the spring or ribbon F and a 
portion of the mechanism, substantially as 
suitable mechanism for winding the spring or 
specified. 
ribbon, located outside of the case of the sig 
12. In an automatic fire-alarm, the second 
maling mechanism, for turning in the alarm, 
dary case or receptacle D, inclosing the de 
substantially as and for the purposes specified. 
vices for operating the alarm and giving no 
5. In an automatic fire-alarm, the sliding 
tice thereof, consisting of the spring or ribbon 
bar G, provided with the projection b, ar. 
F, shaft E, bell or going J, and its operating 
ranged to engage with the hook a, in combi. 
mechanism, in combination with the case A, 
nation with the spring F and a mechanism for 
for protecting the devices and enabling the 
 
25,0s3 
19 
5 
mechanism to be readily attached to an ordi- revolutions of the shaft in both directions, 
nary fire-alarm box, substantially as and for substantially as and for the purpose speci 
the purposes specified. 
ADDISON BALLARD. 
13. In an automatic fire-alarm, the shaft E, 
arranged to wind the spring or ribbon there 
on, and provided with a screw-thread at one 
end, in combination with the nut S, flange T, 
and head D', for limiting and stopping the 
O. W. BoND, 
F. F. BRUNS. 
fied. 
Witnesses: 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215183.txt	J. W. TEMBY. 
Fence, 
No. 215,183. 
Patented May 6, 1879. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH W. TEMBY, OF DALLAS, TEXAS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FENCES. 
i 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 215, 1 S3, dated May 6, 1879; application filed 
December 19, 1878. 
- 
f 
form the slot may be bent back, so that it will 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JosFPH. W. TEMBY, of form a barb, as in Figs. 2 and 5. These clips 
Dallas, in the county of Dallas and State of are placed upon the wires b at the loops c, so 
Texas, have invented a new and useful Im- that the pickets are bound firmly to the wires, 
provement in Fences, of which the following and cannot become displaced. 
This fence is strong and ornamental, and 
is a specification. 
may be readily put together. The pickets can 
My invention relates to a combined wire 
be placed close together when desired, and as 
and picket fence; and consists in means for 
but little hand labor is required to manufac 
securing the pickets to the wires, and to the 
ture the parts in the form shown, it can be 
fence as a whole. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
built at small expense. 
The feature of combined wire and picket is, 
trate my invention, Figure 1 is an elevation of 
however, adapted for making a fence of more 
a section offence. Fig.2 is a top view, Fig. 
elaborate character, when that is desired, and 
3 shows the clip which secures the wire to 
Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the parts can be made and sold ready for put 
the picket. 
one picket with wire connected. Fig. 
I am aware that it is not new to form a 
view of a clip formed with barbs. 
chain fence or link rail of small pieces of wire 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
hooked together, or to loop the end pieces of 
sponding parts. 
wire around the picket to which loop the next 
The fence-posts a are of usual character, and 
link is hooked, or to hold the picket by pass 
the wires b b are connected to the posts by 
ing the wire through it, end-hooking and 
staples, or in any other desired manner. 
jointing with links; also, that it is not new to 
The wires b, before being strung, are bent, 
fasten a wire rail to a post by a slotted clip 
as seen at c, to form recesses or loops at the 
and groove in post, or by an end-bent clip, or 
distance apart which the pickets d are to be 
by a slotted plate and key, or by staples; but 
placed, and about half as deep as the pickets 
are thick. These loops are adapted to receive 
What I claim as new is 
The two continuous wire rails b b, having 
the pickets, as shown. 
the bends c, in combination with the pickets 
To hold the pickets securely to the wires, I 
and end-bent clips, as shown and described. 
make use of clipse, which are made of wire 
bent to shape; or they may be made of a sheet 
JOSEPH. W. TEMBY. 
metal strip, with the center cut out to form a 
slot, as shown in Fig. 3, for the wire to pass 
through; and, if desired, the metal cut out to 
U. D. MIHILLs, 
JOSIEM. TEMBY. 
5 is a ting up. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215283.txt	F. H. JURY. 
Children's Carriage 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 215,283. 
Patented May 13, 1879. 
6 ITNESSES 
 
AoEY 
N. PETERS, Photo-uTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
F. H. JURY 
Children's Carriage, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 215,283. 
Patented May 13, 1879. 
a-L 
=esear-OH 
2 a. 
AI 
g 
s | 
C 
3. 
 
| 
 
| || 
II 
 
 
il 
  
 
  
 
59. 
a1 
w 
 
PETERs, photo-LithogRAPHER, wASHINGTON, d c. 
F. H. JURY. 
Children's Carriage. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 215,283. 
Patented May 13, 1879. 
 
32. 
- 
g), 
NRWENTOR 
, 
f 
Aitory 
.PETERs, Ph. 
- 
F. H. JURY. 
Children's Carriage. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
No. 215,283. 
Patented May 13, 1879. 
w 
k", I, plph I, 
it 
or 
(lit. "I 
'''", "It is 
ill." 
in 
| 
it 
E 
 
6.4% 
a 9-22 
 
PETERS, PHOTO-LiriograpHER, washington, D.c. 
F. H. JURY. 
Children's Carriage. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 215,283. 
Patented May 13, 1879. 
 
2. 
62 
i.eTeRS, FROTOTGRAPER, Washington, 3. c. 
F. H. JURY. 
Children's Carriage, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 215,283. 
Patented May 13, 1879. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
F. HERRMAN JURY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
s 
MPROVEMENT IN CHILDRENS CARRAGES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 215,2S3, dated May 13, 1879; application filed 
October 16, 1878. 
To all chon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, F. HERRMAN JURY, of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Childrens Car 
riages; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it pertains to make and use it, 
reference being had to the accompallying dra-W- 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
children's carriages; the object being to provide 
a child's carriage of neat and tasteful design, 
and adapted to be folded into small compass 
for transportation. 
My invention consists in certain essential 
features of construction and combinations of 
parts, as will hereinafter appear from the fol 
lowing description and claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
side elevation of my improved carriage. Fig. 
2 is a plan view. Fig. 3 is a front elevation; 
Fig. 4, a rear elevation. Fig. 5 is a side eleva 
tion of the carriage when folded together for 
transportation. Fig. 6 is an end view of the 
carriage when folded. Fig. 7 is a detached 
view of the carriage-body with its sections 
folded together. Fig. Sisa detached view of the 
locking mechanism for securing the side bars 
to the front section of the carriage-body. Fig. 
9 is an enlarged view of the mechanism for 
securing the handles in position. Fig. 10 is a 
similar view, showing the handles dropped 
down between the rear wheels. Fig.11 is an 
enlarged view of one of the devices for securing 
one of the top standards in an adjustable po 
sition. Fig.12 is a plan view of the umbrella 
top frame when opened or distended. Fig. 13 
is a similar view, showing the frame contracted. 
Fig. 14 is a side elvation of the umbrella-top 
frame. Fig. 15 is a detached view of the 
spring-catch of the umbrella-top frame. 
A. At are the rear supporting-Wheels of the 
carriage, and B B the front wheels of the 
same. Rear wheels, A A', are each mounted 
on separate or divided axle-arms a cy, which 
extend inwardly a short distance, and are con 
structed with backward and upward exten 
sions b l', which latter are united by a cross 
bar, b. To the extreme rear ends of the axle 
extensions b b are rigidly secured the elon 
gated holders b, the latter being arranged at 
the desired angle of the handles when secured 
in position. Eolders bare each formed with a 
groove, l', extending throughout their length. 
CC are handle-arms, their outer ends being 
rigidly secured to the handle C. The oppo 
site ends of the handle-arms are provided with 
sleeves c c, each of which is furnished with a 
rib, c, which is adapted to snugly fit within 
the grooves b in holders b. To the sleeves 
c care attached the rods co", which are in 
serted through openings in the holders b, and 
are provided on their inner and adjacent ends 
with right and left hand screw-threads c c. 
An adjusting hand-nut, D, provided on oppo 
site ends with internal right and left hand 
screw-threaded ends, engages with the screw 
threaded ends of the rods co. By turning 
the hand-nut D in one direction the handle 
arms are forced apart, disengaging the lock 
ing mechanism, and thus, enabling the handle 
to be dropped between the rear supporting 
wheels. 
When it is desired to secure the handles in 
position for use, the handle-arms are raised 
until the ribs on the sleeves are brought in 
line with the grooves in the holders. The ad. 
justing-nut is then turned so as to draw the 
handle-arms toward each other, and thus firmly 
secure the ribs on the sleeves Within the in 
clined grooves in the holders on the extended 
arms of the rear axles. 
The carriage-body consists of the front and 
rear sections, E. E., the front section being 
of less width than the rear section, so that its 
side frames may be inserted between the for 
ward ends of the side frames of the rear sec 
tion, E, and pivoted thereto by bolts e. Each 
section of the carriage-body is provided with 
folding sides E and ends E, which are con 
structed as follows: F are the bottom rails of 
the rear section, E', to the forward and rear 
ends of which are pivoted, hinged, or jointed 
the front and rear side-frame standards, F and 
F, which latter have pivoted or hinged to their 
upper ends the top rail, F. The open space 
within the bottom and top rails and front and 
rear standards of each side frame is inclosed 
2 
25,2S3 
- 
1. 
? 
by means of the slats b, which are pivoted at 
sills or side bars, KK, and projects outward 
opposite ends to the top and bottom rails, F 
from the sides of the body a sufficient distance 
and F. 
to allow of the attachment of the coils i on 
In order that the pivoted slats may not of 
the forward ends of the spring I. The ex 
fer any sharp projecting ends, which would 
treme ends of the rear coils, i, are attached. 
soon destroy the upholstering of the carriage, 
to the projecting ends of the rear cross-bar, J, 
or, if left without covering, injure the occu 
Which is attached to the rear ends of the bot 
pant of the carriage, the top and bottom rails 
tom rail of the rear section of the carriage 
body. 
are grooved to receive the opposite ends of the 
slats, and the pins or rivets fextend through 
Li Li' are short springs, their inner ends be 
ing attached to the rear cross-bar, J, and the 
said rails and the ends of the slats. 
- 
When the carriage is in use it is provided 
outer ends to the cross-bar b, which connects. 
with side frames, of any desired height, and of 
the rear extensions of the axle-arms. 
fanciful or tasty design, which serve to impart 
It will thus be observed that the carriage 
body is suspended between the springs II, 
a comfortable and elegant appearance to the 
carriage, as well as to secure comfort and Safety 
and the latter, by their peculiar shape and 
arrangement, allow the body to yield gently 
to the child. 
When it is desired to fold the carriage into 
as the load is transported over rough and un 
the smallest compass possible, the sides are 
even places. 
folded together, as represented in Fig. 7. The 
The short springs LL' serve to re-enforce the . 
rear section is provided with a supplemental 
main springs, and prevent the rear section 
hinged back, G, which is hinged to the upper 
from tipping backward too far for the comfort, 
edge of the carriage-back G'. When not in 
of the occupant of the carriage. 
use, the supplemental back is folded snugly 
MM" are folding side bars, the forward 
against the carriage-back, as represented in 
ends of which are downwardly curved, and 
support the forward axle, N, upon which are 
dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
journaled the front supporting-wheels, B B', 
When it is desired to give a more extended 
support for the occupant of the carriage, or 
of the carriage. 
for a pillow, the back G is turned up into po 
The rear ends of the side bars, M M', are 
sition, as indicated in full lines in Fig. 1, and 
hinged to the forward ends of the side bars, 
secured in position by the rods g, which are 
KK, of the rear section. Side bars, MM, are 
pivoted to the top rails, and provided with 
provided with housings in m, on their inner 
hooks g on their free ends, that engage with 
sides, near their ends. PP are bolts placed 
studs g, attached to the side edges of the back 
within said housings, and forced outwardly 
G. The front section, E, is also provided with 
by springs. To the rear ends of bolts PP is 
a hinged dash-board, which may be folded over 
secured a hand-bar, Q, for operating both 
bolts simultaneously. 
within section E, as represented in Fig. 7, when 
not desired for use; but when employed it is 
pp. are catches secured to the under side of 
raised into the position indicated in Fig. 1, and 
the front section, E, of the carriage-body. 
secured in place by an oscillating locking-bar, 
When the front section is downwardly pressed, 
g, which engages with a catch, g', on the front 
the inclined faces p of catches p p' strike the 
of the carriage-body. 
inclined ends p of the spring-pressed bolts P 
The front and rear sections are each pro 
P', forcing the latter back until the bottom 
vided with hinged seats HH, each of which 
rail of the body rests upon the side bars, MM, 
is furnished with hinged supports H. When 
when the bolts engage with the catches, and 
the front section is occupied by a child, the 
serve to lock the front section, E, fast to the 
rear seat, H, is folded down flat against the 
side bars, M M'. When the parts are locked 
together, the body is thoroughly braced and se 
bottom of the rear section, and the front seat, 
H, raised, and the support E turned at right 
cured. 
angles with the bottom of the carriage. The 
RR are umbrella-standard plates, which are 
rear seat, H, may also be arranged in proper 
formed with flanges r, and attached to the top 
position in the same manner, and the front 
rails of the rear section, E, of the carriage 
seat folded down against the bottom. 
body. Each standard-plate is provided with 
arc-shaped slots r 
, which are struck from a 
When it is desired to make a bed of the 
carriage-body to allow the child to sleep, the 
central point, ', at which point is pivoted the 
rear seat may be extended and the hinged depending flanger of a clamp-socket, S, which 
support arranged to rest upon the flanges h, 
latter is constructed of a metallic plate bent 
into U form, with a bolt, S', extending through 
attached to the rear standards of the front 
section. 
its thickened ends s. Bolt S is of angular 
The rear section, E', of the carriage-body is 
form, and extends through the clamp and the 
supported by the springs I. Each spring is 
arc-shaped slot 
in the standard-plate, the 
attached to the axle-arm, and the opposite 
heads of the bolt resting against the inner 
ends formed into coils i i", the extreme ends 
surface of the plate. The outer end of the 
of which are attached to cross bars or slats bolt is serew-threaded and provided with a 
JJ'. The front cross-bar, J, extends beneath hand-nut, s. By tightening the nut s8 the 
the forward portion of the rear section, E, of umbrella-standards T may be firmly held in 
the carriage, between the bottom rails and any desired vertical adjustment. When it is 
215,2S3 
S. 
desired to vary either, the vertical or lateral 
adjustment of the umbrella, the nuts is loos 
ened, thus allowing the clamp to expand, and 
then the clamp may be secured to the plate 
at any desired angle at which the umbrella is 
to be placed, and also the standards are Se 
cured at any desired height. 
When it is desired to place the umbrella at 
any angle over the front section, E, of the car 
riage, the adjusting-bolt is placed in the arc 
shaped slot , and the umbrella-top adjusted 
in the manner hereinbefore set forth. The 
umbrella-top may be thrown either forward or 
backward, and, if desired, may be lowered, so 
that its rear end will fit closely against the 
upper edge of the carriage-back. The adjust 
ment is easily effected, and the mechanism is 
of simple and durable construction, and not 
liable to get out of order by unskillful hand 
ling. 
The umbrella-top is constructed as follows: 
T are the umbrella-top standards, which are 
preferably formed in single piece with the 
bow-top cross-bar U, to which is attached the 
covering U. V are folding side frames, the 
inner ends of which are hinged to T-shaped 
brackets secured to opposite ends of the cross 
brace W. To the folding sides V are pivoted 
the outer ends of links 0, the inner ends of the 
same being pivoted to slides , mounted on 
the cross-brace V?. 
are spring-catches simi 
lar to those employed on ordinary umbrellas, 
to keep the side frames locked in an expanded 
or extended position. The folding sides Ware 
furnished with depending flanges ac, having 
any number of perforations, v', formed there 
in, for the insertion of the thread or cord for 
the attachment of the covering thereto. The 
sides V may be folded snugly against the cross 
brace, and the elastic strap W secured around 
the covering, thus securing the top in a coin 
pact condition for stowage or for transporta 
tion. 
Having described the construction of the 
several parts of my improved child's carriage, 
I will now describe the manner of folding the 
same into small compass for packing or trans 
portation. 
The umbrella-top is first folded together in 
the manner above described, and secured by 
the elastic strap W. The hand-nutsfor regu 
lating the adjustment of the umbrella - top 
standards are then loosened, and the top forced 
downward and backward until it rests upon 
the rear edge of the back of section El of the 
carriage-body. The hand-bar attached to the 
spring-pressed bolts which lock the front sec 
tion of the carriage-body to the folding side 
bars is pulled outwardly, releasing the catches, 
and the front section, E, is then folded flat 
against the rear section, E, of the carriage 
body. The folding side bars, which support 
the front wheels, are then folded beneath the 
rear section, E'. 
It will be observed that the under side of 
the rear section, E, of the carriage-body is 
curved at X, to allow the front wheels to be 
carried backward and upward as far as pos 
sible, the front wheels being received between 
the rearwardly-inclined extensions of the rear 
axles. The parts are then secured against 
displacement by means of a strap, X', one end 
of which is attached to the front section, E, 
while the opposite end of the strap is provided 
with a hook, X, which engages with the front 
axle, as represented in Fig. 5. 
If it is desired to pack the carriage in a bOX, 
the handle is turned down against the front 
wheels, as illustrated in full lines in Fig.5: 
but if it is desired to carry the carriage like 
a valise, the handle is turned up in position 
to be grasped by the hand. 
The construction and arrangement of the 
several parts of my improved childs carriage 
are such that it may be folded into the small 
est possible space, and be readily carried by 
hand, thereby rendering it especially adapted 
for use at sea-side or country resorts. Again, 
the carriage may be packed in a box but slightly 
exceeding the diameter of the rear supporting 
wheels, and thus a great saving in bulk and 
freight charges is effected. 
When unfolded and arranged for use, the 
carriage is furnished with all the conveniences 
and attachments of expensive non-folding car 
riages. It is of stylish appearance, the body 
being well elevated above the wheels, and the 
springs, being arranged in the manner shown 
and described, afford the maximum comfort 
and ease to the occupant of the carriage. . 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A carriage-body consisting of front and 
rear sections hinged to each other so that 
the front section may be folded upon the rear 
section, and between the sides thereof, each 
section of the carriage-body being provided 
with folding sides, whereby the hinged sec 
tions may be folded into the smallest compass 
possible, substantially as set forth. 
2. A carriage-body consisting of front and 
rear sectionshinged to each other so that the 
front section may be folded upon the rear sec 
tion, and between the sides thereof, the front 
and rear sections being provided with folding 
sides having slats pivoted thereto, thereby 
constituting open-work sides for the carriage 
body, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a carriage-body, the combination, with 
a grooved bottom rail, of a folding top rail 
grooved on its lower side, and slats, the oppo 
site ends of which are pivoted within the 
grooves in the top and bottom rails, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with a carriage-body 
consisting of front and rear sections hinged 
to each other so that the front section may 
be folded upon the rear section, of seatshinged 
to the bottoms of each section, and arranged 
as described, so that either seat may be em 
ployed, or one or both may be folded against . 
the bottom of the carriage, substantially as 
set forth. 
25,2S3, 
5. The combination, with the front section 
of a folding carriage-body, of a hinged dash 
board, and an oscillating locking-bolt pivoted 
to said hinged dash-board, said bolt adapted 
to engage with a catch-picce attached to the 
calliage-body, substantially as set forth. 
(5. The combination, with the rear support 
ing-wheels of a child's carriage, of separate or 
divided axles provided with inclined arms, 
and means for securing the handle-arms to the 
outer ends of said axle-arms, substantially as 
set forth. 
7. The combination, with rearwardly - in 
clined axle-arms having grooved holders se 
cured thereto, of handle-arms provided with 
ribbed sleeves, and suitable means for con 
necting said sleeves and grooved holders, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
8. The combination, with grooved holders 
and ribbed sleeves, the latter attached to the 
handle-arms, of adjusting-rods attached to the 
ribbed sleeves and extending through the 
grooved holders, the adjacent ends of said 
rods having right and left hand screw-threads 
formed thereon, and an adjusting-nut provided 
with right and left hand screw-threaded ends, 
substantially as set forth. . 
9. The combination, with a cross-bar con 
necting the rearwardly-inclined axle-arms, of 
springs attached to the rear portion of the 
carriage-body and to said cross-bar, substan 
tially as set forth. 
10. The combination, with the folding side 
bars having the front supporting-wheels con 
nected there with, and having bolt-casings-at 
tached to their inner sides, spring - pressed 
bolts placed within said casings, and a hand 
bar attached to the rear ends of said bolts, of 
catches rigidly secured to the bottom of the 
front hinged section of the carriage-body, 
substantially as set forth. 
11. The combination, with a folding car 
riage-body, the rear section thereof being 
partly of concave form on its under side, of 
folding side bars having the front wheels con 
nected therewith, and divided rear axles, 
whereby the front wheels may be folded be 
neath the rear section of the carriage-body, in 
small compass, substantially as set forth. 
12. In a folding child's carriage, the jointed 
sections provided with a strap, in combina 
tion with the front axle, whereby the whole is 
held together when folded, substantially as 
set forth. 
13. The combination, with a standard-plate 
constructed with arc-shaped slots, of a U 
shaped friction-clamp pivoted to said plate, 
and an adjusting-bolt which extends through 
said friction-clamp and arc-shaped slot, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
14. The combination, with the cross-brace 
of an umbrella-top, of T-shaped brackets se 
cured to the opposite ends thereof, and hori 
Zontally-folding side bars or frames hinged or 
pivoted to said brackets, substantially as set 
forth. 
15. The combination, with the cross-brace of 
an umbrella-top and horizontally-folding side 
bars, of slides connected with said cross 
brace, and links having their opposite ends 
pivoted, respectively, to said slides and fold 
ing side bars, substantially as set forth. 
16. The combination, with the cross-brace 
of an umbrella-top, and four horizontally 
folding arms or side bars hinged thereto, of 
slides and links for connecting said brace and 
folding arms, and spring-catches attached to 
the cross-brace, substantially as set forth. 
17. In an umbrella-top, the folding arms 
provided with depending perforated flanges, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 9th day of 
October, 1878. 
Witnesses: 
F. HERERMAN JURY. 
AUG-tST WOLLEN WEBER, 
T. J. MCKEE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215383.txt	P. C. McCUNE. 
Horse-Power, 
Patented May 13, 1879. 
No. 215,383. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
(O-N 
3 & 
WITNESSEs: 
(2.37e 
west-see 
N 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PARDON C. McCUNE, OF MOUNT ETNA, IOW.A. 
IMPROVEMENT IN HORSE-Powers. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 215,3S3, dated May 13, 1879; application filed 
January 2, 1879. 
- 
man-rods are connected respectively to cross 
heads 0, that are fitted to slide in the slide 
Way p, and the heads no are connected to a 
central slide, q, which also moves in way p. 
The connection between each head no and 
slide q is made by a bolt, r, that passes loosely 
through the end of q into the head in or 0, the 
nut of the bolt being in a mortise formed in 
the head. The bolts are loose, and carry spi 
ral springs st, which are rigid enough to make 
a firm, but elastic, connection of the parts, so 
that the revolution of pinion d shall be trans 
mitted to shaft h, and balance-wheel i. 
It is evident that by the above - described 
construction the power is rendered more uni 
form and regular in its action, and the bal 
ance-wheel placed under perfect control. Any 
sudden lurches of the horse will not affect the 
thrashing-machine, as their force will be ex 
pended in the spring-connections, and in case 
the power is stopped the momentum of the 
balance-wheel can carry shaft h around inde 
pendently of the power until it stops, the spring 
connections permitting such movement and 
restoring the parts to their normal position. 
I do not limit myself to the exact details of 
construction set forth, as they may be varied 
without departing from my invention. Belts 
may be used in place of gearing, and the power 
used for other purposes than driving thrash 
ing machines. The pitman-rods may be at 
tached to their cross-heads by a screw con 
nected so that their length may be adjusted 
after the power and slides have been put in 
position at the place where they are to be used. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
In horse-powers, the balance-wheel crank 
shaft h, connected with the master-wheelb by 
the pitman l, the slides n, 0, and q, held to 
gether by spring-bolts ), the pitman n, the 
crank-wheelf, and pinion d, as shown and de 
scribed. 
ent- 
- 
PARDON C. MCCUNE. 
Witnesses: 
H. L. SWEET, 
GILBERT MOTT, 
To all cho?) it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PARDON C. MCCUNE, 
of Mount Etna, in the county of Adams and 
State of Iowa, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Horse-Powers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to horizontal or sweep 
horse-powers; and the object is to apply a bal 
ance-wheel in connection with horse - powers 
used for thrashing grain in place of the tum 
bler-rods generally employed, so as to obtain 
a uniform and regular application of the power 
to the thrashing-machine, and prevent strain 
upon the machinery in stopping the power. 
I make use of a balance-wheel placed upon 
a shaft from which the power is taken to drive 
the thrashing-machine, which shaft is driven 
through the medium of pitman-rods and slides 
having spring- connections, connected with a 
counter-shaft that is geared to the master 
wheel of the power, so that while the parts 
operate usually similarly to positive connec 
tions the spring-connections permit independ 
ent movement of the balance-wheel from the 
master-wheel in case of sudden jerks and in 
stopping the power. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a general plan of the horse-power. Fig. 2 is 
a side elevation. Fig. 3 represents the slide. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The power is set upon a bed, a, which may 
be on wheels for convenience of transporta 
tion. 
The master-wheell and its supporting-frame 
care of usual character, and d is a pinion, op 
erated by master-wheel b, said pinion d being 
upon a short vertical shaft that is fitted in 
bearings e on frame c, alid carries also a crank 
wheel, f. 
The frame g represents the frame of a thrash 
ing-machine. h is a crank-shaft, fitted across 
frameg, and having keyed upon it the balance 
wheel i and a pulley, k, from which power is 
taken to run the thrashing-machine or sepa 
rator. 
lis a pitman from the crank of shaft h, and 
m is a pitman from crank-wheelf. These pit 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215483.txt	M. P. SCHENCK. 
Cider-Press, 
No. 215,483. 
Patented May 20, 1879. 
 
SSS 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
e Ea 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
z % 
% 
SS 
 
% SS Si 
 
 
S. 
. s S ZA 3. 2 2 S2 
Se2 22 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-LithogRAPHER, washiNGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARCUS P. SCHENCK, OF FULTON, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CDER-PRESSES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 25,4S3, dated May 20, 1879; application filed 
January 31, 1878. 
, 
To all chon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARCUs P. SCHENCK, 
of Fulton, in the county of Oswego and State 
of New York, have invented a certain new 
and Improved Cider-Press, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
, 
My press is constructed with two stationary 
upright screws, with right and left threads, 
respectively, on which are nuts operated simul 
taneously by gear-wheels, and bearing through 
anti-friction washers in suitable boxes on the 
press-beam. The nuts are driven by a con 
necting shaft or shafts, operated either by 
power or by hand, as required. 
My improvement particularly consists in a 
combination of stationary screws, press-beam, 
wheels, nuts, recessed steps, and detached 
Washer placed within the steps to reduce wear 
and friction; also, in the combination, with 
the aforesaid screws, beam, and nuts, of a le 
ver-and-ratchet movement for operating the 
gearing, as hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of my improved press. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section of one of the screw-nuts 
and attached gear-wheel on a larger scale. 
Fig. 3 is an elevation of the ratchet-lever de 
tached. Fig. 4 is a plan view of a rack of 
I connected slats to be interposed between the 
layers of material in the press. Fig. 5 is a 
plan of a mat made of cords transversely ar. 
ranged in successive layers for a similar pur 
pose. 
A represents the base or bed of the press; 
B, the press-beam; C C, a pair of stationary 
screws having a right and left thread, re 
spectively, both of them fixed by nuts DD to 
the bed A, and projecting upward through 
suitable apertures in the beam B. 
E represents a bridge-piece extending from 
one to the other of the screws CC at the top, 
and serving to support a driving-shaft, through 
which the machine is worked by means of a 
pulley, F, beveled pinion F, beveled gear G, 
and a vertical shaft, H, which is formed with 
either a spline or a groove, in which the hub 
of the gear-wheel G works, so as to impart ro 
tary motion to the said shaft, while the latter 
slides freely up and down within the gear 
wheel as the press-beam is raised or lowered. 
At the bottom of the shaft H is a beveled 
pinion, h, gearing with beveled pinions i i", 
running loosely on the central part of a shaft, 
l, which is mounted in suitable bearings on 
the face of the press-beam B, and carries at its 
outer ends pinions.jj, which gear with wheels 
J J', the shafts of which are mounted in suit 
able bearings on the press-beam B, and carry 
beveled pinions k k, which drive beveled 
wheels KK, the hubs of which form nuts K, 
as shown on a larger scale in Fig. 2, Working 
on the vertical screws C C, and resting in re 
cessed steps MM on the press-beam. The re 
cesses or chambers of the step contain steel or 
brass washers N, which receive and reduce 
the friction of the lower end of the nuts or 
hubs K?. 
By constructing the steps with recesses to 
receive the said washers and the lower ends 
of the hubs, the hub and nut and the step and 
washers are all held in concentric position, SO 
as to protect the moving parts from any chaf 
ing of the screw. 
The loose pinions i i? are connected with the 
shaft I at the will of the operator, so as to im 
part rotation thereto in either direction by 
means of a clutch, L, operated by a lever, O, 
and connecting-rod P, and sliding on a suita 
ble spline or groove in the shaft, so that when 
it is thrown into connection with the pinion it, 
as illustrated in Fig. 1, the shaft I will be 
driven by the shaft Hin one direction, and 
when the said clutch is thrown into connection 
with the pinion i the shaft I will be rotated in 
the other direction, or by setting the clutch in 
intermediate position both pulleys i i" will run 
loosely, and the shaft I and nuts and press 
beam will remain at rest, while the power-con 
nections FG H may run continuously. The 
press-beam is thus forced down or elevated or 
stopped, at the will of the operator. 
Q represents a crank, by means of which 
the press-beam may be run up or down by 
hand when the clutch L is disconnected with 
the pinions ii. 
For a hand-press the cog-gears KK are 
driven by beveled pinions 
on a horizontal 
shaft, R, which is rotated in either direction 
by a hand-lever, S, working over a ratchet 
wheel, r, on the shaft R, and turning the said 
A. 
s 
2 
25,483 
wheel in either direction by means of an ad 
justable pawl, T, pivoted at S to the lever S, 
and having an elastic arm or lever, t, which 
may be set in either of the notches u, u', or it? 
on the face of the lever S, in order that the 
reciprocation of the said lever may turn the 
ratchet-wheel in either direction, so that it 
may be elevated or lowered or left at rest. The 
Connections of the hand-lever are shown on a 
larger scale in Fig. 3. 
In order to afford a bearing for the press 
cloth, which will protect it from great violence 
or danger of tearing, and especially from forci 
ble outward pressure, I place between the 
cheeses a rack constructed, as shown in Fig. 
4, of slats, V, connected by a webbing, , or 
cloth of any kind. A rack thus constructed is 
readily rolled up for transportation or for stow 
ing away, and while in use not only fully pro 
tects the press-cloth, but affords perfect free 
dom of drainage for the cider or other liquid 
running from the press. 
I further employ for the same purpose a 
mat represented in Fig. 5, consisting of cords 
WW, laid in alternate coils in two layers, the 
coils of one being transverse to the coils of 
the other, as shown. 
X represents the customary platen or fol 
lower, upon which the press-beam rests through 
the medium of transverse beams a. 
Y is the bottom board, resting on the bed 
A and surmounted by the customary rack J. 
Z represents the press-curb, made of boards 
With notched ends locked together. 
For elevating the beam and supporting it 
from the nuts K, I employ brackets or arms 
B, securely bolted to the top of the beam B, 
and engaging in grooves l in the periphery 
of the nuts or hubs K. 
- 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent: 
1. The combination of the wheels KK, nuts 
K?, recessed steps M, and the loose anti-fric 
tion washers N, placed in the bottom of the 
recessed steps beneath the nuts without at 
tachment thereto. 
2. The combination of the press-beam B, 
screws CC", wheels KK, nuts K, shafts H 
I, clutch L, and pinionsh' i i", substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
MARCUS P. SCHENCK. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. A. FOSTER, 
H. ROSENBLOOM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215583.txt	C. S. DEAN. 
Fire-Stop for Steam-Boiler Flues. 
No. 215,583. 
Patented May 20, 1879. 
 
 
 
6%. 4. a c } 
- 2%my 777fesses. 
- - - - 
- 
16-62a- Zvez. 
7 cz 
42-7 
Zz 2 %2.. 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, wash.INGTONic, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CY RUS S. DEAN, OF CROWLAND, ONTARIO, CANADA, ASSIGNOR TO CHARLES 
H. VIBBARD AND NICHOLAS (LANSING ZABRISKIE, OF AURORA, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FRE-STOPS FOR STEAM-BOLER FLUES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 215,5S3, dated May 20, 1879; application filed 
March 31, 1879. 
-- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CYRUs S. DEAN, of 
Crowland, in the county of Welland, Prov 
ince of Ontario, Canada, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Fire-Stops for 
Steam-Boiler Flues, of which the following is 
a specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings. 
This invention relates to that class of fire 
stops for boiler flues or tubes which are made 
of less diameter than the flues and arranged 
within the flues in a series with intermediate 
spaces, whereby the flame and products of 
combustion are held or retarded in their pas 
sage through the flues and deflected against 
the inner Walls of the flues, thereby enabling 
the flues to absorb and utilize a greater quan 
tity of heat than is possible when the flues are 
unobstructed from end to end. 9 
For a more particular description of these 
stops, reference is here made to Letters Patent 
of the United States No. 172,302, granted to me 
for such stops January 18, 1876. 
My present invention has for its object to 
simplify the construction of said stops and 
enable the stops to be readily placed in the 
flues, and to be withdrawn therefrom when 
necessary. 
My invention consists, to that end, of a flue 
stop composed of two deflectors connected 
by longitudinal ribs; also, in providing the 
ribs of the stops with elongated openings 
adapted to receive the hooked end of the rod 
or bar by which the stops are connected. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional elevation of a boiler-flue provided 
with my improved stops. Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation on an enlarged scale of one of my 
improved stops. Fig. 3 is an end view there 
of. Fig. 4 is a cross-section in line a ac, Fig. 
2, showing the connecting-bar in the proper 
position to hook into the elongated opening of 
the stop. 
Like letters of reference refer to, like parts 
in the several figures. 
A represents the flue, and B represents my 
improved fire-stops arranged therein. The 
stops B are each composed of two conical de 
flectors, C C, connected by longitudinal ribs 
or plates D, which intersect each other and 
leave an open space between the deflectors. 
By this construction the stops are rendered 
light and strong, and the flame is permitted 
to freely play between the deflectors. 
r 
 
In the drawings, two plates, DD, are shown 
intersecting each other at right angles; but 
any desired number may be employed. The 
plates D are provided With projections d, fit 
ting within the tubes or flues, so that when 
the stops are inserted therein the deflectors C 
will be held centrally within the flues. One 
or more of the plates D are provided with 
elongated openingsf, arranged at right angles 
to the axis of the stops. 
g represents the bars or rods by which the 
stops are connected and held at the proper 
distance apart. The ends of the bars g are 
bent over or formed in the shape of a hook, 
the bent portion being of such length as to 
pass easily through the elongated openingsf, 
when the latter are arranged with their longest 
dimension in the line of the bent end of the 
bar. 
The stops are placed in the flues one at a 
time, and connected by the hooked bars g, as 
shown in Fig. 1. 
The deflectors C of the different stops are 
preferably made gradually increasing in diam 
eter from the fire-box flue-sheet H toward the 
smoke-box, as clearly shown in Fig. 1, in or 
der to compensate for the tendency of the 
heated gases to taper down or contract in the 
center of the flue as they approach the Smoke 
When it is required to clean the flue, the 
stops B are readily withdrawn therefrom and 
disconnected. 
My improved fire-stops are readily and 
cheaply constructed of cast-iron, and effect 
an important saving in fuel when the boiler is 
provided with a strong draft. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A fire-stop for boiler-flues, composed of 
two conical deflectors, C C, and intersecting 
connecting-plates D, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. A fire-stop for boiler-flues, having pro 
jecting plates D, which are provided with 
elongated openings f, arranged at right an 
gles to the axis of the stop, and adapted to re 
ceive the bent ends of the connecting bars or 
rods, substantially as set forth. 
box. 
- 
- 
CYRUS S. IDEAN. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD WILHELM, 
JNO. J. BONNER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215683.txt	L. S. SCH ANCK. 
Insect-Destroyer, 
2 Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 215,683. 
Patented May 20, 1879, 
 
Za Zaye (ae S.Ac/zzzzcze. 
77(ove/067: 
N. PETERs, Phoro-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
L. S. SCHANCK, 
Insect-Destroyer. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 215,683. 
Patented May 20, 1879. 
 
Za Zag/eace 5-axca 
N. Peters, photo-LithogRAFER washingtoN. E. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LA FAYETTE. S. SCHANCK, OF MARLBOROUGH, NEW JERSEY. 
IMPROVEMENT IN INSECT-DESTROYERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 215,6s3, dated May 20, 1879; application filed 
April 12, 1879. 
pipes and its perforated sprinkler. Fig. 6 is 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, LAFAYETTESSCHANCK, a modified form of the stirring or mixing de 
of Marlborough, in the county of Monmouth vice. 
and State of New Jersey, have invented cer- 
The letter A indicates the vehicle, which 
tain new and useful Improvements in Ma- may consist of the rear truck or section of the 
chines for Destroying Insects; and I do here- running-gear of an ordinary farm-wagon. B 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, is the tank for holding the mixture of water 
and exact description of the invention, which and paris-green or other poison. This tank I 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it prefer to make of an ordinary water-tight bar 
tappertains to make and use the same, reference rel, such as a vinegar or pork barrel, and it 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and is mounted and may be held in any conven 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which ient manner upon a platform, C, secured to 
form a part of this specification. 
the axle of the truck, this platform being of 
This invention relates to an improved appa- sufficient size to also afford standing room, c, 
ratus for sprinkling potato-vines with paris- for the driver, who also operates the shaft D 
green or other poisons in solution or mixed by means of the crank d. This shaft D is 
with water, for the purpose of destroying po- stepped in a bearing, e, at the center of the 
tato-bugs or other insects. 
bottom of the tank. Its upper end passes 
The object is to facilitate the sprinkling of through an aperture in the center of the re 
the vines by providing for the simultaneous movable lid b of the tank, and it has its up 
sprinkling of several rows by an apparatus per bearing in a bracket, f, secured upon said 
traversing the field by horse-power, and thus lid. 
to dispense with the laborious and expensive 
The shaft D is provided with two flat blades, 
method of sprinkling a single row of vines at G, secured to it near its middle, and inclining 
a time by hand with a sprinkling-pot. 
OutWardly and downwardly in opposite direc 
The prevalence of the potato-bug in certain itions, and terminating near the bottom and 
sections of the country, and the necessity of wall of the tank. The lower ends of these 
sprinkling the vines by hand, for lack of a blades are beveled or cut obliquely to the sides, 
more expeditious means, has, as is well known, so that said ends will be about parallel with 
rendered the profitable cultivation of the po- the bottom of the tank, and have an extended 
tato in those sections impossible. 
sweep, which will effectually prevent the set 
Sprinkling-tanks mounted on wheels have tling or precipitation to any extent of the poi 
heretofore been used for sprinkling poisoned sonous substance upon said bottom. 
water upon the rows of potato-plants; and 
Near the bottom of the tank are inserted 
my invention consists in a novel construction two faucets, h. h, in the wall thereof. These 
and arrangement of the discharge-pipes and faucets are at such distance apart and di 
delivering-sprinklers of these tanks, whereby verging to such a degree that when the bent 
they are rendered adjustable, so as to be used leading-pipes I I are secured to the ends 
effectively in fields having the rows at differ- thereof said pipes will diverge sufficiently to 
ent distances apart, as will be hereinafter de- bring the sprinklers k k each over a row of 
scribed. 
potato-vines, as ordinarily planted, when the 
I refer to the following particular descrip. apparatus is in use. The faucets I prefer to 
tion and the accompanying drawings, in make of Woodt, as being cheaper than metal, 
and they are easily driven into auger-holes in 
which- 
tion. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. Fig. 
The leading-pipes II are made of tin, and 
3 is a central vertical section of the apparatus, the ends of each are bent at angles in opposite 
the stirring shaft and blades being shown in directions to the main portions. The sprink 
full lines. Fig. 4 is a detached perspective lersk k are also made of tin, and have necks 
view of the stirring device. Fig. 5 is a de- i, which fit upon the outer ends of the leading 
tached perspective view of one of the leading- pipes, and may be turned thereon, as also the 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my inven- the tank-Wall. 
. 
- 
- 
2 
y 
25693 
- 
inner ends of the pipes may be turned upon 
the faucets. 
By having the pipes II bent as described, 
it will be observed that they may be ad 
justed to bring the sprinklers at any de 
sired distance apart, or at any distance from 
the ground, within certain limits, so that a 
very cheap adjustable apparatus is produced, 
which may be arranged to meet any conditions 
ordinarily incident to farming, and the appa 
ratus is thus adapted for use in sprinkling or 
Watering any crops in rows or hills. 
It will be observed in Fig. 2 the pipes II 
extend forward instead of rearward, and the 
tank should be secured in such a manner as to 
admit of its being turned to bring these pipes 
to the front or rear, as desired. The arrange 
ment of the pipes in front is the preferable 
mode, as it enables the finishing out the ends 
of the rows better than when they extend to 
the rear. 
The wheels of the truck will ordinarily strad 
dle two rows of potato-vines, and when two 
horses are used they should be hitched far 
enough apart to have two rows between them. 
When one horse is used, however, he will 
travel between the two rows operated upon 
by a two-pipe apparatus. 
It will be observed that the tank may be 
supplied with more than two leading-pipes, 
if desired, and that one pipe with two or 
more branches may be used without depart 
ing from the principle of my invention. 
When the apparatus is to be used, the tank 
is supplied with a proper quantity of water, the 
paris-green or other poison is placed in it, the 
lid placed upon the tank, with the shaft D. 
properly stepped in its bearing, and then the 
driver, perched upon the platform, turns the 
crank d, thereby thoroughly mixing the poison 
With the Water. The faucets are then turned 
to permit the proper volume of poisoned water 
to flow and the horses are started. After the 
poison is once mixed with the water, a moder 
ate turning of the shaft, by means of the crank, 
during the progress of the truck, will prevent 
the settling of the poisonous substance to the 
bottom, which it (paris-green especially) would 
do if not continually stirred. 
In Fig. 6 I have shown a modified form of 
mixer constructed of a single piece of stout 
wire, bent or coiled as shown, which can be 
inserted through a hole in the center of the 
head of cask or tank, thereby avoiding making 
a removable head. 
Having now described the construction and 
operation of my invention, what I claim is 
The combination, with the tank, substan 
tially as described, of the faucetsh h, the pipes 
II, having their ends bent in opposite direc 
tions and capable of turning on said faucets, 
and the sprinklers c l, having the necks i, and 
capable of turning on said pipes, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
LA FAYETTE S. SCHANCK. 
Witnesses: 
SAML. C. COWART, 
JO. C. ARROWSMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215783.txt	L. J. WING 
Wentilator, 
No. 215,783. 
Patented May 27, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
Azzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz 
a 3. --c' 
22 
WWA WYZ Aaa 
III 
S 
A. 
 
--se 
Witnesses: 
%2-6-6 
(2.6 &c.-y 
Za vento: 
g?.---, May 
A ?co Atty 
N.PETERs, PHOTO-luTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEVI J. WING, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
IMPROVEMENT IN VENTILATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 25,2S3, dated May 27, 1879; application filed 
November 8, 1878. 
a. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEVI J. WING, of the 
city of Baltimore and State of Maryland, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Ventilators, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The invention relates to an improvement in 
flue or shaft ventilators that are operated by 
a wind-wheel. 
The object of the invention is to produce an 
article of manufacture adapted for public or 
private buildings of any size, which shall be 
at once cheap and effective in its operation. 
My invention will first be described in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings, and 
then pointed out in the claims. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of my fan-ven 
Fig. 2 is a detail view of parts of the 
tilator. 
wind-wheel. 
The letter Arepresents the flue of the struct 
ure to be ventilated. This may be a special 
flue or shaft, or the ordinary smoke-flue of the 
chimney. 
B is the neck or portion of the ap 
paratus which connects with the flue. C is 
an enlarged hood, the upper part of which is 
closed, and is provided with a lateral open 
ing, D, directly above which is the vane E. 
The top or upper part of the hood is provided 
on the inner side with a re-enforcing bar of 
iron, f, extending across diametrically, and a 
hole is formed in the center of the top and 
through the bar, whereby the hood is adapted 
to revolve, as hereinafter described, its rota 
tion being governed by the action of the wind 
on the vane, insuring the opening to be al 
Ways kept from the wind. 
Fis a vertical shaft, the lower end of which 
terminates in a steel spindle, its point resting 
on plate-glass or other suitable material in the 
step b, which is supported by the cross-bar a. 
c is an annular plate, in practice made of 
cast-iron. Its inner edge is provided with a 
down-turned flange, c', to which the neck B of 
the apparatus is secured by rivets, or in any 
suitable manner. On the upper surface of 
this plate, near its outer edge, is an upward 
extending rim or flange, c', around the outer 
side of which the lower edge of the hood de 
pends. Vertical rods of iron d are secured in 
the plate c, close to the inner side of the flange 
c'. In the present example there are four 
rods placed equidistant, which, after rising 
vertically to a sufficient height to permit the 
passage of the blades of the fan, are bent to 
Ward the vertical shaft, their ends being se 
cured in a cast-iron piece, e, having a hole in 
the vertical direction, which constitutes the 
upper bearing for the shaft F. The central 
part of the piece e is of extra thickness, and 
outwardly is circular in shape, constituting a 
fixed spindle, e', around which is an annular 
seat or bearing, whereon the hood C is sus 
pended. Thus its rotation is attended with 
but little friction. 
The letter Hindicates the exhaust-fan, hav 
ing four blades, which are riveted to the 
flanges of the casting i, having a core, through 
which the vertical shaft passes, the parts be 
ing secured by the set-screw K. 
It will be seen the blades extend radially 
from the shaft and are vertical, the fan being 
inclosed by the hood. 
Attached to the shaft, above the hood, is the 
wind-wheel L., having buckets in of peculiar 
form, constructed of sheet-metal strips bent 
or partly folded longitudinally, forming, in 
cross-section, nearly a right angle, as seen at 
V in Fig. 2. 
The ends of two of the angular strips are 
secured together by solder or rivets, forming 
the bucket into an elbow, the angle whereof 
is about sixty-five degrees, the guttered part 
s being on the inner side. The buckets are 
then secured to the upper and lower annular 
plates or rings, p , which are connected to the 
shaft, thus forming the wheel, which, on one 
side, presents the guttered partss to the wind, 
and on the opposite side the backs or angular 
parts t, thereby making the wheel very sensi. 
tive to the Wind. 
The operation of this apparatus is as foll 
lows: The wind acting on the wheel L. causes 
the exhaust-fan to revolve, which forces the 
air from the hood through the opening D, the 
effect of which is to create an upward draftin 
the flue. The air thus rising no sooner enters 
the hood than it, in turn, is expelled. 
The advantage resulting from the construc 
tion here shown is that the exhaustion or as 
piration of airis effected with greater rapidity, 
2 
215,7S3 
as shown by actual tests of the anemometer, 
than by similar devices of different construc 
tion. 
Having described my invention, I claim and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In combination, the revolving hood C, 
having the lateral opening D and vane, an 
nular plate c, provided with flange c', rods d, 
iron piece e, having a hole in the vertical di 
rection, and the fixed spindle e', shaft F, and 
a wind-wheel, and an exhaust-fan, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. In combination, the hood C, provided on 
one side with a lateral opening and Vane, and 
adapted to revolve, shaft F, exhaust-fan H, 
and the Wind-wheel L., as set forth. 
3. In a ventilator, the annular plate c, pro 
vided on its inner edge with the downward 
flange c', and on its upper surface with the 
flange c', and rods d, iron piece e, having a 
hole in the vertical direction, and the fixed 
spindle e', as and for the purpose specified. 
4. The exhaust-fan EI, having radial blades, 
the extremities of which are vertical, in com 
bination with the hood C, having its upper 
part closed, from the center of which it is sus 
pended, and provided on one side with a lat 
eral opening and a vane, as shown and de 
Scribed. 
5. The wind-wheel L., having guttered buck 
ets in, which in cross-section are nearly a right 
angle, and lengthwise are in the form of an 
elbow, the angle whereof is about sixty-five 
degrees, and which are secured to the upper 
and lower rings in such manner that while the 
elbows project outwardly the guttered parts s 
are presented to the wind, as set forth. 
LEWI J. WING, 
Witnesses: 
JNO. T. MADDOX, 
CHAs. B. MANN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215883.txt	P. CONNOLLY. 
Operating Stop-000k. 
No. 215,883. 
Patented May 27, 1879. 
 
ran SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSNo.% 
a 7 
en 
 
Z 
SSNSn 
 
WITNESSES 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
PATRICK CONNOLLY, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
IMPROVEMENT IN OPERATING STOP-COCKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 215, SS3, dated May 27, 1879; application filed 
April 16, 1879. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PATRICKCONNOLLY, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements relating to Operating 
Stop-Cocks, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
Myinvention is adapted for operating cocks 
in water-pipes sunk in the earth, as for con 
trolling at the curb-stone the supply for the 
house. 
I have, in Letters Patent issued to me dated 
April 2, 1878, described a provision for arrest. 
ing a cock at each extreme of the turning mo 
tion. This was done at the surface. 
My present invention effects the arresting 
at a lower point entirely independent of any 
lost motion of the connection, and also guards 
against the chance of the operating-rod being 
withdrawn through mistake or mischief. 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 
this specification, and represent what I con 
sider the best means of carrying out the in 
vention. 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of the lower portion alone, the 
operating-rod and the tube and its connec 
tions which inclose the operating-rod being re 
moved. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in the figures. 
A is the Water-pipe leading from a street 
main. (Not represented.) B is the plug of a 
stop-cock, fitting and turning in an ordinary 
manner within the body A, of cast-brass or 
Othel Suitable material. A is a continuation 
of the Water-passage, leading to the house. 
The material of the case or body A is en 
larged at its upper end and formed with two 
stops, ca, on the interior. 
The plug B is formed with a stout arm, B', 
which applies between the stops at a, so that 
it strikes one of the stops at each limit of its 
turning motion. 
C is an incasing-pipe leading up to the sur 
face of the earth, and formed with an orifice, 
c, which allows any water leaking up from the 
plug B to escape into the earth. 
The top of the pipe C is threaded on the 
exterior, and receives the cap-casting G, as 
represented, 
The cap-casting G confines between itself 
and the smoothly-finished upper end of the 
pipe C a washer, H, upon the upper face of 
which may be fitted a soft leather facing, h, 
turning tightly and easily under the cap G 
when required. 
Disthe operating-rod. Its lower end matches 
in a corresponding square socket in the up 
per end of the plug B. The upper end of the 
rod D is also square in cross-section, but is 
tapered for a considerable distance, as indi 
cated by dotted lines. The washer H has a 
corresponding square hole, and is driven down 
tightly on the taper of the rod D. The cap 
G is extended upward round the upper end 
of the rod and equipped with a cover, K. 
In the use of my device, the cover Kis lifted, 
and any suitable Wrench being applied on the 
rod D to forcibly turn it the plug B may be 
turned to the proper extent. When the cock 
is full open the arm B strikes the stop (t. 
When the cock is full closed the arm B' 
strikes the stop a. Striking either stop ef. 
fectually limits the motion. The plug is sure 
to be arrested in the correct position, irre 
spective of any looseness in the fit or any 
springing under the torsional strain of the 
rod D. 
The washer H, fitted on the tapered upper 
end of D, being held down by the cap G, for 
bids the rod D to be pulled out, the screw 
threads holding the cap G being fitted strong 
ly, so that there is little risk of boys or other 
The parts of the ap 
persons unscrewing it. 
paratus are secured against the introduction 
of foreign matter, and the rod is secure against 
being stolen or pulled out. 
Any suitable provision may be employed 
for locking. I can leave the cover K free to 
turn, and apply a padlock and connection on 
the rod D in the manner shown in my patent 
dated July 23, 1878. 
My box G offers this great advantage, that 
the frost has but little hold on it, because of 
its small size and its conical shape, which 
leaves the parts solidly in the ground, and 
little likely to be wrenched or raised by sur 
face frost. 
Modifications may be made in many of the 
details. I can have the main body of the rod 
D round or square, so long as the ends are 
A. 
- 
2 
215, SS3 
1. The plug B, having an arm, B', in coin 
bination with the case A, having internal stops 
at a, pipe C, operating-rod D, and means G 
for holding down such rod, all arranged to 
serve as and for the purposes herein specified. 
2. In combination with a plug, B, tube or 
case C, and cap G, the operating-rod D, hav 
ing a tapered upper end, with the Washer or 
enlargement H, fitted thereon, as herein speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 14th day of April, 1879, in the 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
PATRICK CONNOLLY. 
Witnesses: 
W. CoLBURN BROOKES, 
E. B. BOLTON. 
properly formed to engage with the plug and 
with a wrench respectively. 
Some of the advantages of the invention 
may be secured by a fixed enlargement on the 
rod D, to be received under the cap G, to pre 
vent the withdrawal of the rod D from above; 
but the construction shown in separate pieces 
is preferable, for the reason, among others, 
that the washer may by forcible means be 
shifted endwise on the rod D, as may be found 
necessary on trial to make a just sufficiently 
close fit under the cap G. 
All the ordinary appliances may be used 
with my invention. I propose to provide the 
ordinary means of draining the water back 
Ward from the house when the cock is closed. 
I claim as my invention 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US215984.txt	E, SLOCUM. 
Refrigerating Butter-Case, 
No. 215,984. 
Patented May 27, 1879. 
RN3. KN22S 
NNXN 
a s- a 2 sea as 
? SH2H2H2H2HS 
s 
 
 
 
ter | 
N 
N 
S" S&S 
S N N 
TOR 
-6. 
BY %z22e24.62, 
ATTORNEYS. 
PetsRs, photo-ITHocRAPHER, washingtoN, D.C 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
EUGENE SLOCUM, OF ROSE HILL, IOW.A. 
MPROVEMENT IN REFR GE RATING BUTTER-CASES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 215,984, dated May 27, 1879; application filed 
September 29, 1877. 
m 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EUGENESLOCUM, of Rose 
Hill, in the county of Mahaska and State of 
Iowa, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Refrigerating Shipping-Cases 
for Butter-Tubs; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full and clear description of 
the same, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it pertains to make and use 
it, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
tion, and in which- 
Figure 1 is a plan or top view of my im 
proved refrigerating shipping-case with the 
lid open, and Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the 
package closed. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in both the figures. 
This invention relates to refrigerating boxes 
or packages adapted for transportation; and 
consists in constructing the bottom and hinged 
cover of a box of this class with diagonally 
arranged ribs, substantially as and for the 
purposehereinafter fully described, and pointed 
out in the claim. 
In the drawings, A is a square or rectangu 
lar box, made of wood, the sides of which are 
mortised together to make a solid and sub 
stantial package, provided with a hinged lid or 
cover, B. 
The bottom of the box A, as well as the in 
her side of its cover B, is provided with a se 
ries of diagonal slats or bars, denoted by a 
and b, respectively, and the sides of box A 
are faced on the inside with vertical slats or 
bars c c, cut off a short distance below the up 
per rim or edge of the box to leave room for 
the bars at of the cover, which, when this is 
closed, will project some distance into the 
C C are two parallel partitions arranged 
vertically in box A with their lower edges 
resting upon the diagonal bars, h. in the bot 
tom of the box. That part of the sides of 
box. A between these partitions is without the 
vertical bars c, as will be seen by reference to 
- Fig. 1; and by these partitions CC, which are 
box. 
permanent, the box is divided into three com 
partments, EFG, the middle one of which, F, 
is to contain the ice, while the butter-tubs, 
denoted by D in the drawings, are piled in the 
end compartinents, E. G. 
The covers of the butter-tubs D are formed 
with an upward-projecting rim or ledge to re 
ceive the bottom of the tub next above; and 
the tubs are of such a size that they will fit 
snugly into the compartments E G when ar 
ranged in a row therein, as shown in Fig. 1, 
to prevent undue shaking during transporta 
tion. 
I am well aware that it isy not new to con 
struct refrigerators or refrigerating shipping 
packages for containing butter, fruit, &c., with 
ribs upon the sides or bottom; but this con 
struction I do not claim, broadly. My im 
provement consists in placing said ribs or 
bars diagonally upon the inner side of the 
hinged cover and bottom, by which they not 
only form grooves or channels for the circula 
tion of the cooling medium in like manner as 
when ribs parallel to the sides are used, but 
also serve as braces for the lid B and the bot 
tom of box A, respectively, so as to greatly 
strengthen the package, which is of impor 
tance in a shipping-case of this kind, contain 
ing a heavy weight unequally distributed, 
(the filled firkins in the end chambers weighing 
more than the ice in the narrow middle com 
partment,) and which is apt to be knocked 
about and subjected to rough usage while in 
transit. 
Having thus described my improvement, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
In a refrigerating shipping case or package 
constructed substantially as described, the 
bottom and hinged cover provided upon their 
inner sides with diagonal ribs or bars b a, as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
EUGENE SLOCUM, 
Witnesses: 
F. L. JACKSON. 
ANDREW.J. COOK. 
- 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216084.txt	F. W. FREUND. 
Bree Ch-L. 0 a ding Fire - Arms. 
2 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 216,084. 
Patented June 3, 1879. 
 
WITNESSES 
FNVENTOR 
???? 
ATTORNEYS 
F. W. FRE UND, 
Breech-Loading Fire-Arms. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 216,084. 
Patented June 3, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
?????????? ??''}'? 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK W. FREUND, OF CHEYENNE CITY, WYOMING TERRITORY. 
1M PROVEMENT IN BREECH-LOADING FIRE-ARMS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 216,0s4, dated June 3, 1879; application filed 
t 
October 30, 1876. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK W. FREUND, of 
Cheyenne City, in the county of Itaramie and 
Territory of Wyoming, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Breech-Load 
ing Fire-Arms, of which the following descrip 
tion, taken in connection with the drawings 
which form part of this specification, is suffi 
cient to give a full and complete understand 
lIng. 
The object of my invention is, first, to pro 
duce an arm that shall be automatically 
cocked or half-cocked by the operation of the 
breech-block in the act of opening and closing 
the breech; and, second, to construct the 
breech-block and the frame in which it oper 
ates in such a manner that when the breech is 
closed the parts shall fit tightly together, to 
prevent dirt or other foreign substances from 
entering; and to these ends it consists, first, 
in an intermediate lever placed between the 
breech-block and tumbler of the lock mechan 
ism in such a manner that the breech-block in 
its downward movement to open the breech 
will operate said lever, and cause it to turn 
the tumbler upon its stem or arbor, and 
thereby cock or half-cock the hammer. In or 
der to provide means for either half-cocking 
or full-cocking the arms, I provide two or more 
interchangeable levers of different lengths, 
either of which may be used at the will of the 
operator. 
Second, in forming lugs or projections on 
both thefrontandrear faces of the breech-block, 
and in extending the upper part of the breech 
frame backward, so as to close the spaces be 
tween the breech-block and the frame, all as 
will be hereinafter more fully set forth and de 
scribed. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings rep 
resents a side elevation, partly in section, of 
a fire-arm embodying my invention with the 
lock-plate removed, but showing the operat 
ing parts of the lock mechanism in the posi 
tions they assume when the breech is opened. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view, showing the position 
of the parts when the breech is closed and the 
hammer down. Fig. 3 is an inner view of the 
lock-plate and its mechanism with the strap 
or stay for holding the parts in position rela 
- 
tively to each other removed, but showing the 
operating parts in the position shown in Fig. 
1. Fig. 4 is a view similar to Fig. 1, but show 
ing a shorter intermediate lever which may 
be used when it is not desired to full-cock the 
gun by the operation of the breech-block. Fig. 
5 is a similar view, showing the breech closed 
and the hammer cocked. Fig. 6 is a perspec 
tive view of the long lever shown in Figs. 1, 
2, and 3 for full-cocking the hammer, and Fig. 
7 is a similar view of the short lever shown in 
Figs. 4 and 5 for half-cocking the hammer. 
Figs. S and 9 are, respectively, a top and bot 
tom view of the breech-frame, with the breech 
block in position for closing the breech; and 
Figs. 10 and 11 are perspective views, show 
ing, respectively, the front and rear faces of 
the breech-block. 
Similar letters of reference indicate the same 
parts in all the figures. 
A is the intermediate cocking-lever, pivoted 
in an opening in the trigger - plate in rear of 
the breech-block. In the normal position of 
the parts, or when the breech is closed, it oc 
cupies a horizontal position, with its front end 
projecting into an opening or cavity, b, formed 
in the lower part of the rear face of the breech 
block D. 
In lowering the breech-block to open the 
breech, the shoulder formed by the upper part 
of the cavity, b presses upon the front end of 
the lever A and rocks it upon its pivot c, 
bringing it to the position shown in Figs. 1 
and 3. This rocking motion of the lever causes 
its inner or rear end to press upward on the 
arm or extension a of the tumbler C, by which 
the latter is caused to turn upon its bearing, 
carrying with it the hammer, which is mounted 
upon the outer end of its shaft in the usual 
manner. This movement of the tumbler is 
sufficient to bring the full-cock notch into en. 
gagement with the sear i, and the arm is thus 
cocked by the single movement of the lever . 
B for opening the breech, and is retained in 
this position when the breech is closed. 
The arm a projects from the upper part of 
the tumbler, and extends forward and down 
ward nearly or quite in a curve forming all 
arc of a circle struck from the center of the 
axis of the tumbler, and is of such length as 
216,0S4 
to bring its end very nearly or altogether into 
contact with the lever A when the breech is 
closed and the lhammer down. 
The cavity b in the breech-block is closed 
at the bottom by a rearward extension or hook, 
f, on the breech-block, which extends beyond 
the rear face of said block, and which, in the 
act of closing the breech, catches on the end 
of the lever A and carries it back into its nor 
mal position, as shown in Fig. 2. 
When it is desired to only half-cock the arm 
by the operation of the breech-block, a short 
lever, N, (shown in Figs. 4, 5, and 7.) is substi 
tuted for the lever A, and, by reason of its 
rear end being shorter than the rear end of 
lever A, the tumbler is turned only a sufficient 
distance to bring it into the half-cock or safety 
notch. The full-cocking is afterward accom 
plished by the hand in the usual manner. 
By reference to Figs. 4 and 5 it will be ob 
served that when the short lever N is used 
the hammer cannot be full-cocked while the 
breech is open, by reason of the point in of the 
tumbler coming in contact with the rear end 
of the lever N, as shown in dotted lines, and 
being prevented from turning far enough to 
bring the full-cock notch into engagement with 
the sear; and also that when the hammer is 
full-cocked the breech cannot be opened, by 
reason of the rear end of the lever N comin 
into contact with the point in of the tumbler, 
(also shown in dotted lines,) and, being thus 
held from turning on its pivot c, its front end 
prevents the downward movement of the 
breech-block to open the breech. 
With the use of either of the levers A or N, 
the hammers cannot fall far enough to strike 
the firing-pin until the breech is fully closed, 
by reason of the arma of the tumbler striking 
the rear end of the lever, and thus either ar. 
resting the movement of the tumbler, or else 
closing the breech by the pressure exerted 
upon the lever, and through it upon the breech 
block. 
On the front face of the breech-block, at its 
lower part, and on either side of the opening 
in Which the link by which it is connected to 
the guard-leveris pivoted, I increase the thick 
ness.of the breech-block by forming lugs or ex 
tensions e e sufficient to fill the space between 
the breech-block and the frame, and the up 
per part of the breech-frame is extended back 
Ward sufficiently to close the space at the top. 
The extension orhook fonthellowerpart of the 
breech-block extends backward to close the 
cavity b in the breech-block, and also to par 
tially close the opening in the trigger-plate 
in which the intermediate cocking-lever is piv 
oted. 
In most arms of this character with which am: 
familiar the extractor extends to the full height 
of the frame, and there is therefore no opportu 
nity for closing the channel or groove k in the 
front face of the breech-block, which is pro 
vided for the reception of the extractor when 
it is tripped to throw out the shell. In order 
to remedy this defect, and to give the arm a 
more finished appearance when the breech is 
closed, I propose to cut off the extractor im 
mediately above the arm which engages the 
flange of the cartridge, and to provide a lug 
or extension, d, on the upperpart of the breech 
frame, as shown in Figs. 1, 4, and 8, to pro 
ject into the upper part of said channel k when 
the breech is closed. Thus the arm not only 
presents a more complete and finished appear 
ance, but all the parts of the breech are closed, 
and the entrance of dirt or other foreign sub 
stances is prevented. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the tumbler C, pro 
vided with arm a, the breech-block provided 
with an opening or recess in its rear face, and 
the intermediate and interchangeable levers 
AN, constructed substantially as described, 
whereby the arm may be adjusted to be either 
half or full cocked by the interchange of said 
levers, as shown and described. 
2. The intermediate lever N, constructed 
with a rearward-extending portion, as shown, 
in combination with the tumbler having pro. 
jection in, whereby the full-cocking of the ham 
mer is prevented while the breech is open, and 
the opening of the breech is prevented while 
the hammer is at full-cock, in the manner 
shown and described. 
3. The combination of the frame or receiver 
provided with lugd, and the breech-block pro 
vided with groove k for the extractor, the said 
lug d projecting into the groove k when the 
breech is closed, as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have hereunto subscribed my 
name in the presence of two witnesses. 
FRAINK W. FRE UND. 
Witnesses: 
A. C. HAMMOND, 
Lu, C. STEWIENS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216184.txt	G. HOAG, 
Combined Scale and CO in Tester, 
No. 216,184. 
Patented June 3, 1879. 
 
Ca --------- 
INVENTOR 
1644 tre, 
BY Cafe. 
nPETERs, Photo-LTHogaAPHER, wash!NGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE EIOAG, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MPROVEMENT IN COMBINED SCALE AND CON-TESTER. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patcht No. 216, S4, dated June 3, 1879; application filed. 
March 27, 1879. 
To all chon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE HOAG, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and Improved Combined Scale 
and Coin-Tester, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Figure 1 is a top view of my improved de 
vice. Fig. 2 is a side view of the same, partly 
in section, through the broken line a. a', Fig.1. 
Fig. 3 is a detailed cross-section of the same, 
taken through the line y), Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a 
detail view of the reverse side of the coin-scale 
beam. 
- 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to furnish 
scales for weighing letters and other mail 
matter which shall be provided witl appli 
ances for testing the weight, size, and thick 
ness of coins, and which at the same time shall 
be simple in construction and convenient and 
reliable in use. 
The invention consists in the combination of 
the slotted vertical plate with the slotted scale 
pan of a scales, for testing the size and thick 
ness of gold and silver coins; and in the com 
bination of the second beam and its weight 
with the main beam and its Weight, and with 
the scale-pain provided with the slots, and the 
vertical plate provided with the slots for test 
ing the weight, the size, and the thickness of 
gold and silver coins, as hereinafter fully de 
scribed. 
A represents the Standard, B the main beam, 
C the weight, and D the pan or platform, of 
the scales, which parts are connected together 
and balalaced in the usual Way. 
The scale-pain D is made flat, and has a se 
lies of slots, d', formed through it to receive 
the different gold and silver coins, the slots 
toward one end of the pan ID being intended 
for the gold coins, and those toward the other 
end being intended for the silver coins. The 
slots d are made of a length and breadth equal 
to the diameter and thickness of the various 
coins, so as to test their size and thickness. 
To the central part of the lower side of the 
pan D is attached the upper edge of a vertical 
plate, E, which has slots et formed in it directly 
beneath the slots d of the said pan D. The 
slots et are made of a breadth equal to the 
breadth of the slots d", and of a depth equal 
to half the length of the said slots d', so that 
the coins will be held with their diameters in 
line with the scale-pain D. 
F is the beam which is used for testing the 
Weight of the coins, and which is connected at 
its ends with the main beam B by bolts, screws, 
or rivets G. The beam F is provided with a 
weight, H, for balancing the coins. In the 
upper edge of the beam F are formed notches 
at the various points where the Weight H. 
should stand to balance the various coins. 
The notches for the gold coins should be 
marked upon one side of the beam F, and the 
notches for the silver coins should be marked 
upon the other side of the said beam, with the 
value of the coins to which they belong. 
The slots d' in the scale-pain D may also be 
marked with the value of the coins to which 
they belong. 
With this construction the device, while 
serving as a scale for weighing letters and 
other nail-matter, also serves as a test for the 
size, the thickness, and the Weight of gold and 
silver coins. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
The combination of the scale-pan D, consist. 
ing of a horizontal plate, provided with slots (ll, 
and the vertical plate E, provided with the slots 
e', and the supplemental scale-beam F, secured 
by the bolts G to the scale-beam B, so as to 
be parallel with the said beam, and provided 
With the Weight H, with the main beam B and 
its Weight C, Substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE FOAG, 
JAMES T. GRAHAM, 
C. SEDGWICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216284.txt	No. 216,284. 
S. C. MEG.ILL. 
Jack-Screw. 
Patented June 10, 1879. 
 
|22% 
 ... 
S.ZSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS<<<<<<SSSRSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
e/7 at tes. Z: 
N. PetRs. Photo-i truegraph 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
SEBRING C. MEGILL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF HIS 
RIGHT TO ALGERNON B. BALDWIN, OF SAME PLACE. 
8 
IMPROVEMENT IN JACK-SCREWS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 216,2S4, dated June 10, 1879; application filed 
June 28, 1878, 
- 
which- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SEBRING C. MEGILL, 
of the city of Chicago, county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Jack - Screws, 
which improvements are fully set forth in 
the following specification and drawings, in 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of a jack-screw, 
showing my improvements. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective view of the reversible nut, with flange 
in the center or at a suitable distance from 
each end, allowing either end of the nut to be 
placed in the column or standard, Fig. 6, as 
desired. Fig. 3 is a common screw, made 
square or of other suitable shape at each end, 
to allow it to fit into the socket in the top or 
purchase-head, Fig. 4, the top or purchase 
head being separate and removable from the 
screw instead of composing a single piece with 
it, as in the common jack-screw. Fig. 4 is the 
top or purchase-head, with socket in it, to al 
low of its being placed on either end of the 
screw above described, Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a 
view of the under side of the top or purchase 
head, showing the socket for the end of the 
screw. Fig. 6 is a separate column or stand 
ard, with notches CC at the top to receive 
the pieces d d projecting upon each side of 
the flange on the reversible nut, Fig. 2, to 
connect or hold the nut and Column, so that 
they will remain stationary while the screw is 
being rotated. 
The object of my invention is to furnish a 
device by which any weight may be raised or 
any purpose accomplished for which a jack 
screw is used much more expeditiously than 
by the common jack-screw, and also to fur 
nish a jack-screw much more durable than 
those heretofore in use. 
These ends are accomplished by the use of 
the loose or removable head and reversible 
nut and screw above described. 
With the commonjack-screw, the weighthav 
ing been raised to a height equal to the length 
of the screw, before it can be raised higher 
or the screw used to raise another weight, it 
is necessary to turn the nut or screw down to 
the original position, causing great loss of 
time, whereas with my improvement it is only 
necessary to remove the loose head, Fig. 4, 
 
- 
a' 
- 
from the top of the screw, Fig. 3, place it upon 
the other end, and invert the screw, when it is 
at once ready for use. 
Another advantage is that the screw being 
reversed, the friction or wear is brought upon 
both sides of the thread alternately, instead 
of being at all times upon one side, as in the 
ordinary jack-screw. The friction of turning 
the screw down is also saved, for both of 
Which reasons my improvement is much more 
durable. 
It will be seen that with my improvement 
the jack-screw can be used either separately 
as a screw and nut only, as used by house 
movers and raisers, by blocking the same up, 
or as a standard or column screw, Fig. 1, as 
used in raising cars, machinery, &c.; and the 
same is designed to be used either with or 
without a standard or column. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Liet 
ters Patent, is 
1. The double or reversible nut, with flange 
at suitable distance from each end, having 
projections did on each side to fit in notches 
ce in standard or column D, constructed sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The loose or removable purchase-head, 
with socket made to fit the end of screw, in 
combination with right or left screw, and Con 
structed substantially as described and shown. 
3. The screw with square or other suitably 
shaped ends to fit in the loose or removable . 
head to connect the same, so that they will 
rotate together, constructed substantially as 
described and shown. 
4. The independent column or standard, 
with notches c c, in combination with reversi 
ble nut, screw, and loose head, all constructed 
and arranged substantially as described and 
shown. 
5. The reversible nut, with flange at suita 
ble distance from each end, in combination 
with the removable head and with the screw, 
each end of which is adapted to receive the 
removable head, constructed substantially as 
described and shown. 
SEBRING C. MEGILL. 
Witnesses: 
E. W. ADKINSON, 
E. W. MAGEE. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216384.txt	C, E, DRAKE, 
Pump. 
No. 216,384. 
Patented June 10, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
2 
I NN 
SS 
3.53 3 S 3 2.SS 
2 
S.LSNS 
|NITA 
 
 
 
N 
is: 
 
WITNESSES: 
-2%.4%&- 
-6 e6, evze/C/ 
INVENTOR 
-6 (610-4a/ 
BY tuu 
S-arionneys. 
... it'." 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CORNELIUS E. DRAKE, OF AVOCA, IOWA, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND 
GEORGE PAHL, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN PUMPS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 216,3S4, dated June 10, 1879; application filed 
February 11, 1879. 
. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, CORNELIUS EDWIN 
DRAKE, of Avoca, in the county of Pottawat 
tamie and State of Iowa, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Pumps, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Figure 1 of drawings is a side elevation; 
Fig. 2, a vertical diametrical section; Fig. 3, 
a plan view of the piston with the cap on, 
and Fig. 4 a plan view with the cap off. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to improve 
the construction of the suckers and plungers 
of pumps in such a way that the pressure of 
the Water may force out the packing-rings 
against the pump-barrel when they are mov 
ing in one direction, and may allow them to 
move inward when they are moving in the 
other direction, and which shall be simple in 
construction and not liable to get out of order. 
The invention consists in the combination 
of the cylinder, having its edges recessed to re 
ceive the sectional packing - rings, the two 
plates having openings formed through them, 
and the open sheet-metal tubes, with each 
other and the stem, as hereinafter fully de 
scribed. 
The cylinder J and the two plates K are 
placed upon the stem B, and are secured to it 
by a nut. The cylinder J has its edges cut 
out or recessed to form water-spaces, and is 
placed between the two plates K, and the said 
plates Khave holes or openingsformed through 
them to allow water to pass into the said 
spaces. 
Hare the packing-rings, which are made in 
sections, and are placed between the plates K. 
, 
and the shoulders formed around the middle 
part of the cylinder J by cutting away its 
edges. 
In the spaces in the cylinder J, at the inner 
sides of the packing-rings H, are placed short 
open tubes L of sheet metal, which are pressed 
outward by the water, and cause the sections 
of the packing-rings to be pressed outward 
equally. 
With this construction, as the plunger moves 
upward, the water enters the plunger in the 
direction of the upper arrows, and forces the 
upper sets of rings outward, packing the 
plunger, the pressure at the same time being 
removed from the lower sets of rings. When 
the plunger moves downward, the lower sets 
of packing-rings Hare forced outward against 
the barrel and the upper sets are left free. 
One of the sections of each ring is connected 
with a section of the adjacent ring of the same 
set by a dowel-pin, to prevent the rings from 
sliding upon each other longitudinally, and 
bringing the joints of the said adjacent rings 
opposite each other. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
The combination of the cylinder J, having 
its edges recessed to receive the sectional pack 
ing-rings H, the two plates K, having open 
ings formed through them, and the open sheet. 
metal tubes L., with each other and the stem 
B, substantially as herein shown and de 
Scribed. 
CORNELIUS EDWIN DRAKE, 
Witnesses: 
C. C. SMITH, 
A. C. COOPER, 
. . 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216484.txt	E. R. YOUNG & G. A. GOELLER. 
Holders for BOOks, &c. 
 
No. 216,484. 
Patented June 10, 1879. 
as 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EDWARD R. YOUNG AND GEORGE A. GOELLER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., 
ASSIGNORS TO POTT, YOUNG & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN HOLDERS FoR Books, &c. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 216,4S4, dated June 10, 1879; application filed 
May 7, 1879. 
To all chom it may concern: 
the holder, so that they may slide beneath the 
Be it known that we, EDWARD R. YoUNG 
bridge, and can be moved back clear of the 
and GEORGE AUGUST GOELLER, both of the 
edge of the holder, as hereinafter more fully 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
set forth. 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
In the drawings, the letter A designates a 
Holders for Books and other articles, which 
holder of the class to which we apply our in 
improvement is fully set forth in the following 
vention, the same being composed of two 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
cheeks, a b, which are united by a flexible back, 
companying drawings, in which 
c, and which, when the articleisintended to hold 
Figure 1 represents a cross-section of a book 
books, are provided with pockets to receive 
holder containing our invention. Fig. 2 is a 
the book-covers. The cheek a of the holder 
rear view thereof when it is spread out and 
carries an ordinary clasp, B, while on the other 
the straps are laid flat upon each other. Fig. 
cheek thereof is formed a bridge, C, a strip of 
3 shows the straps in their innermost position. 
leather or other similar material being used for 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
this purpose. 
Our invention is particularly adapted to 
The letters DE designate two straps re 
spectively designed for closing the holder A 
book-holders, such as described in Eletters 
Patent of the United States to Edwin Young, 
and for carrying the same. These straps are 
Edward R. Young, and F. E. Hafely, No. 
made of different lengths, as shown, and they 
204,872, dated June 11, 1878. 
are united at one end by stitching or other 
For the purpose of closing the holders re 
suitable means, as at d, while in this united part 
ferred to, and carrying the same, two straps 
of the straps is fastened an eyelet, e, for the 
having different lengths are used; and prior 
purpose of adapting the same to engage with 
to our invention these straps were united at 
the clasp B. At the end of each of the straps 
both ends and fastened to the holder at one 
D E, where they are loose or disconnected, is 
end, the long strap being thus distended 
formed an enlargement, for g. The bridge C 
away from the short strap, so as to form a 
embraces both the straps DE, and the latter 
handle, while the short strap is adapted to 
are detached from the holder A, so that they 
are capable of sliding in or under the bridge. 
join or connect the two cheeks of the holder. 
To this arrangement of said straps there are 
When it is desired to close the holder A, 
two objections, one being that the long or 
the straps D E are moved or slid out, so that 
handlestrap remains distended when the holder 
their enlargements fg abut against the bridge 
is opened, and, projecting from the holder in 
C, and then the outer or united end of the 
this state, together with the short strap, forms 
straps is made to engage with the clasp B. In 
an incumbrance, while the other objection is 
this manner the long strap, D, is distended or 
that the holder is liable to break or tear at the 
expanded in a curved line away from the short 
point where the straps are fastened thereto, 
strap, E, so as to form a convenient handle for 
from the repeated strain which is put upon it 
carrying the holder, while the short strap is 
when the straps are thrown back in opening 
stretched over the edges of the cheeks a b, so 
the holder. To overcome these objections we 
as to join or connect them, as shown in Fig.1. 
unite the straps only at one end, and, in addi 
When the holder A is opened the outer or 
tion to the usual clasp for confining the outer 
long strap, D, may be relieved of its distention 
ends of the straps, provide the holder with a 
and made to lie flat upon the short strap by 
bridge adapted to guide and act as a stop to 
drawing the same inward a sufficient distance. 
This position of the long strap is shown in 
the inner end of either or both straps, where 
we form an enlargement or counter-stop, so 
Fig. 2. In this position of said long strap 
that the long strap may be distended to form a both straps D E project beyond the edge of 
handle or adjusted so as to lie flat upon the the cheek a of the holder, but, being flattened, 
other or short strap. We obtain an additional 
are not an incumbrance, as when the long strap 
advantage by leaving the straps detached from 
is left distended; and at the same time, if it 
 
2 
216,484 
-- 
is desired to have the straps within the edge 
of said cheek, as shown in Fig. 3, they can be 
readily moved to that position. 
In the example shown the straps DE are 
enlarged at their outer or united ends, as well 
as at their inner ends, in order to prevent their 
withdrawal from beneath the bridge C; but 
in some cases we omit this outer enlargement, 
so that the straps may be removed from the 
holder. 
In some cases, moreover, the short strap. E, 
is stitched or otherwise attached to the holder 
A. at the inner end instead of being provided 
with the enlargement g at such end. This ar 
rangement allows the straps DE to be moved 
to the position shown in Fig. 2, but not to the 
inner position shown in Fig. 3. 
What we claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a holder having 
the clasp B and bridge C, of the straps DE, 
united at their outer ends, and either or both 
enlarged at their inner ends, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination, with a holder having 
the clasp B and bridge C, of the straps DE, 
united at their outer ends, both enlarged at 
the inner end, and both left detached from the 
holder, substantially as and for the purpose 
: In testimony that we claim the foregoing we 
have hereunto set our hands and seals this 
29th day of April, 1879. 
described. 
-> 
EDWARD R. YOUNG. 
L. S. 
GEORGE AUGUST GOELLER, L. s. 
Witnesses : 
F. E. HAFELY, 
W. EIAUFF. 
2 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216584.txt	4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Process and Apparatus for Manufacturing 
Patented June 17, 1879. 
No. 216,584. 
Carbonic Oxide. 
I 
A. 
k 
gy 
S. 
As- 
S. 
E 
: 
strip 
2S 
| 
E. 
-4 
| 
syst. All" 
|| 8 
259 
3, All Aa 
assis, s 
S/2.SS 
. 
a 
| W. 
A % 
 
 
a 
 
re-Year 
kE 
 
- 
4 sheet-sheet 2, 
C. TESSIE du MOTAY & E. J. JERZMANOWSKI. 
Process and Apparatus for Manufacturing 
Carbonic Oxide. 
No. 216,584. 
Patented June 17, 1879. 
criterscreer-reeler 
sessrseases 
Sea 
sers 
 
W 
Ot 
Y\\nsense 
t 
 
 
a2 YSSSSSS 
846). 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
C. TESSIE du MOTAY & E. J. JERZMANOWSKI. 
Process and Apparatus for Manufacturing 
Carbonic Oxide, 
w 
No. 216,584. 
Patented June 17, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
  
a? ZAZA 
Eosses 
OO 
N . 
S. 
S 
 
Nsers, 
&c. 4,425 
affair 
.. 
PETERs, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D.c. 
 
" - 
C2/22 %z 
titat? 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
C. TESSIE du MOTAY & E. J. JERZMANOWSKI. 
Process and Apparatus for Manufacturing 
: 
Carbonic Oxide. 
No. 216,584. 
Patented June 17, 1879. 
Azure 1, 
 
 
| 
a NEA S 
: 
SES 
cas 
d 
3-gala 
Reis SF 
A. 
A. 
: 
A. s aerer 
5 sig365. 53 
2WAS 
2 
S3 
2A 
al 
YYYYYYarraraya'a 
. 
3. 
o 
 
2 / 
  
 
 
 
27% 
2 
ZSZ, 
YNsas 
2. 7.4% 
- 
 
- 
. 
- 
cySyss, 
7 - 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CYPRIEN TESSIE DU MOTAY AND ERAZM J. JERZMANOWSKI, OF NEW YORK, 
N. Y., ASSIGNORS TO EDWARD STERN, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN PROCESSES AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING CARBONIC OXIDE. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 216,5S4, dated June 17, 1879; application filed 
February 21, 1879. 
- 
s 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CYPRIEN TESSI DU, 
MOTAY, of the city of New York, and ERAZM 
J. JERZMANOWSKI, of the city of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Process and 
Apparatus for the Manufacture of Carbonic 
Oxide from Wood, peat, turf, carbonaceous 
powder, and similar gas-producing substances, 
of which the following is a full, true, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings. 
The object of our invention is to produce 
cheaply and abundantly a supply of carbonic 
oxide, by means of the utilization of material 
of little value containing carbon in a greater 
or less quantity; and our process consists, 
generally, in bringing such carbonaceous ref; 
use in contact with a bed of incandescent coal 
or coke, whereby it is partly converted into 
carbonic oxide and partly into carbonic acid, 
and then in passing this mixture of gas through 
a subsequent converting-chamber, also filled 
with incandescent coal or coke, wherein the 
carbonic acid contained in the gas passing 
from the first generator is converted into car 
bonic oxide, so that only the latter gas es 
capes from the second chamber. The conver 
sion of the carbonaceous material into carbonic 
oxide in the first generatur takes place in con 
sequence of the reaction between itself and a 
sufficient supply of air in presence of the heated 
body of coal or coke before described. 
Our apparatus consists in an arrangement of 
generators, chambers, and connections for car 
rying out the herein-described process; special 
apparatus consisting of a double generator, 
having the connections so arranged that the 
carbonic refuse may be fed into the top of one, 
where it is met by a sufficient supply of air, 
the resulting carbonic oxide or acid being 
passed downward through said generator, and 
out through the bottom, and into the bottom 
of the converting-generator. The two genera 
tors are connected together by a suitable tube 
or connection, the resulting gas escaping from 
the top of the second generator by means of 
a delivery-pipe. The connection between the 
bottoms of the two generators does not pass 
directly under them, but at one side, so as to 
be somewhat out of the way of the falling 
ashes, 
Figure I represents a cross-section of the 
two generators, which Islhall distinguish as the 
primary and converting generators. Fig. 
2 represents a view of the converting-genera 
tor, with the hydraulic main and connections 
in detail. Fig. 3 is a cross-section through 
Fig. 4 represents a 
Fig. 1 on the line at a. 
view of that arrangement of our apparatus in 
which carbonaceous powder is used, and shows 
a slight difference in the arrangement of the 
communicating channels. Fig. 5 is a partial 
section view of the same on the line y y. - 
The generators A and B are in their main 
construction similar to those generally em 
ployed in the manufacture of carbonic oxide. 
As shown, they are arranged with a swell or 
expansion somewhat below the middle, and 
they should be preferably arranged with fire 
clay grate-bars, similar to those heretofore pat 
ented by Jerzmanowski. The generator A is 
provided with a pipe, P, which can be closed 
by a valve, for the purpose of igniting the 
coke, afterward used in the production of car 
bonic oxide. Air may be forced in at the bot 
tom for this purpose. It is also provided with 
an air-pipe, C, for a purpose to be hereinafter 
explained. A passage, K, is provided through 
the brick-work of the structure, which, in the 
first modification of our apparatus, delivers 
about the middle, or somewhat below the mid 
dle, of the connecting retort by means of the 
pipe L and aperture N. 
As shown in the drawings, there are two 
such passages, which are arranged in the sides 
of the structure, so as not to be choked by . 
the ash or refuse which falls from the genera 
tor A. Suitable openings are left for clean 
ing both ash-chambers K and L. 
The gas leaves the converting-generator by 
pipe R, preferably provided with some form 
of exhauster, g, which may be used for increas 
ing the draft or keeping it up while the ash 
doors of the generator A are open. 
The pipe R may deliver into the hydraulic 
main D, arranged to be filled with or discharged 
of water. 
The naphthal-pipe M may be provided for in 
creasing the richness of the gas which passes 
from the converting - generator B by injecting 
supply of naphtha or other 
therein a sufficient 
rich oil, 
 
 
2 
26,5S4 
The operation of our apparatus can now be 
understood. The generator A is half filled 
With coal, coke, or similar material. The con 
Verting-generator B is filled almost to the top 
with a similar material. The coal or coke in 
the generator A is brought to an incandescent 
condition by a sufficient supply of air forced 
through it, the products of combustion escap 
ing at the pipe P; and the coal or coke in the re 
tort B is brought into a similar condition, the 
products of its combustion escaping by purge 
valve T. The pipe P and purge-valve T are 
then closed, and a certain quantity of the ma 
terial to be converted into gas is thrown upon 
the coke in the generator A. A current of 
air, preferably heated, is then forced in by 
pipe C, and the gas produced (which would, 
in this case, be a mixture of hydrogen, carbonic 
Oxide, and carbonic acid) passes off by passage 
K, L, and N into the converting-generator B. 
Air is continually forced into this generator 
through the air-pipes G, and the air used in 
both generators should preferably be heated. 
This air coming in contact with the heated 
Coal or colke in generator B is itself converted 
into carbonic oxide, and meeting the stream 
of gas from the generating-retort at the aper 
ture N it passes up through the remainder of 
the coke, and any carbonic acid which might 
remain in the gas is thereby converted into 
carbonic oxide, and passes off by the pipe R. 
a mixture of carbonic oxide and hydrogen. 
The aperture N is placed somewhat above 
the bottom of retort B, for the purpose of avoid. 
ing an explosion, which might result from 
bringing air in contact with hydrogen passing 
from the primary generator. 
Whenever coal-dust is employed an appa 
ratus similar in construction to that shown in 
Figs. 4 and 5 is employed. The carbonaceous 
powder is fed through a hopper, V, and its flow 
is regulated by valve W. Two or more air-pipes, 
C, are provided to bring a sufficient supply of 
air in contact with this powder as it falls upon 
the incandescent mass of coal or coke below. 
The passage K in this case may be carried 
across horizontal) between the generating 
and converting?,etorts, because as anthracite 
coal powder is employed there will be nogen 
eration of hydrogen. An additional supply of 
air is forced in by pipes G. 
We do not claim, broadly, the production of 
Carbonic oxide from coal or coke, or even the 
production of this gas in one generator and its 
Subsequent further conversion in a second re 
tort; but our process is limited to the produc 
tiolu of carbonic oxide from refuse in the man 
her described. 
We are aware of the English Patent No. 1,946 
of 1863, and also of the American patent to 
W. H. Strong, November 13, 1877, No. 197,062, 
and do not claim anything there shown. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
l. The process of producing inflammable 
gases, which consists in casting on the top of 
an incandescent bed of coal or coke a sufficient 
supply of wood, turf, or other carbonaceous 
refuse, and of forcing downward upon the top 
of the same a sufficient supply of air, and caus 
ing the resulting gases to pass downward 
through the bed of coke, thereby causing the 
gases resulting from the combustion of the 
carbonic refuse to be converted into carbonic 
oxide, as distinguished from the process of 
forcing downward through a body of coal a 
supply of air in the manner described, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The herein-described process of making 
carbonic oxide from wood, turf, refuse, car 
bonaceous powders, and similar material, which 
consists in casting such gas-producing sub 
stance upon a bed of incandescent coal or 
coke, and of forcing down upon and through 
the same a sufficient supply of air, thereby 
partially consuming it and producing carbonic 
oxide and carbonic acid, mingled with other 
gases, and then forcing the resulting gases 
down through such colke, and of then passing 
them into the bottom of a second converting 
generator filled with incandescent coke, where 
in the carbonic acid is converted into carbonic 
oxide and allowed to escape from the top of 
the same, substantially as described. 
3. In an apparatus for producing carbonic 
Oxide, the combination of a primary generator 
and a converting-generator, both generators 
being supplied with a sufficient amount of in 
Candescent coal or coke, the supply-pipe en 
tering the top of the primary generator, the 
connection between the primary generator and 
converting-generator, and the delivery-tube 
from the top of the converting-generator, the 
fuel and air used in the production of gas be 
ing delivered into the primary generator at 
the top of the same, the gas resulting being 
passed out of the bottom of the same and into 
the bottom of the converting-generator by 
means of the connection shown, and finally 
escaping from the top of the converting-gen 
erator, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of a primary generator, 
A, and converting-generator B, the primary 
generator being provided with a fuel-supply 
aperture and an air-supply pipe at the top of 
the same, and with the connections shown 
delivering into the converting-generator B, 
which generator is provided with a tube for 
forcing in a sufficient supply of air at the bot 
tom, and with a delivery-passage, R, for car 
rying off the resulting gas at the top, substan 
tially as described. 
5. The combination of two generators, A 
and B, arranged in one setting, and connected 
by a pipe or pipes, K, which is situated at 
One side of the generator A, and is connected 
With the ash-chamber, for the purpose of pre 
Venting the choking of the pipe by the falling 
ash, Substantially as described. 
C. TESSIE DU MOTAY. 
ERAZM J. JEERZMANOWSKI, 
Witnesses: 
S. F. SULLIVAN, 
WM. J. SAWYER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216684.txt	J. KRAFT, 
Stalk- Cutter. 
Patented June 17, 1879. 
No. 216,684. 
 
ITWESSES 
IwVEWTOR 
443.4%/2.2% 
By 
se a?,3,74,, . 
MPETERs, Photo-Lithographer, WASHINGTON, DC. 
us 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
JACOB KRAFT, OF DOWNEY, CAE, IFORNIA. 
MPROVEMENT IN STALK - CUTTERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 216,6s4, dated June 17, 1879; application filed 
March 29, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, JACOBKRAFT, of Downey, 
in the county of Los Angeles and State of Cali 
fornia, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Stalk-Catters; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the construction and oper 
ation of the same, reference being had to thean 
nexed drawings, making a part of this specifi 
cation, and to the letters and figures of refer 
ence marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a side elevation of my stalk-cutter, and Fig. 
2 is a rear view of the same. " 
My invention relates to a device for cutting 
stalks in the field for the purpose of plowing 
them tander; and the novelty consists in the 
construction and arrangement of parts, as will 
be more fully hereinafter set forth. 
In carrying out my invention I employ a 
body-frame having draft-pole and driver's seat, 
these parts being properly braced in any suita 
ble manner. Hooks are provided to properly 
align the stalks and bring them in the track of 
a roller journaled in the frame, and having 
spiral cutting-knives, which sink into the earth 
to the face of the roller. Pivoted to the frame 
are two levers, in which is journaled a roller, 
which, when the levers are horizontal, follows 
the knife-roller, steadies the machine, and 
buries or presses into the earth the cutpieces 
of stalk. When the levers are secured verti 
cally it operates as a riding or running gear to 
transport the device from place to place. 
Suitable securing devices are provided, by 
which the levers are secured vertically or hori 
Zontally, as the roller is used as a follower or 
transporting means. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
body-frame, having ordinary seat A and pole 
B, to which is loosely pivoted, at b, the hooks 
B', as shown. Journaled in the body-frame A, 
at c, is a roller, C, carrying rigid spiral knives 
C'. Pivoted to the said frame at d, upon each 
side, are levers D, carrying a roller, E, as 
shown. These levers are adapted to operate 
horizontally, being secured in that position by 
hooks fand pivoted hooks f' and a properlock 
catch, and to operate vertically, being secured 
in that position by hook G and set-screw g. 
When in operation the levers D are secured 
horizontally, the hooks B align the stalks, the 
knives cut them, and the roller E. presses them 
into the earth. 
In taking the machine from place to place 
the levers D are secured vertically, and the 
machine rides on the roller E, as shown. 
I claim 
In a stalk-chopper, the combination, with 
the frame A, having the pole B and hooks B', 
of the roller C, having the knives C', and the 
roller E and levers D D, hooksff", and catch 
and hook G and set-screws g, as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
JACOB KRAET, 
Witnesses: 
P. WHEELER, 
M. JONSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216784.txt	2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 216,784. 
Patented June 24, 1879. 
L. FISHER. 
Wind0 W-Sash and Bead-Fastener. 
 
Zvez2 oz. 
zle, (a 4./ 
 
L. FISHER. 
Window - Sash and Bead-Fastener. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 216,784. 
w 
Patented June 24, 1879. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS FISHER, OF LOGAN, OHIO. 
MPROVEMENT IN window SASH AND BEAD FASTENERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 216,7S4, dated June 24, 1879; application filed 
March 15, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that, LOUIS FISHER, of Logan, 
in the county of Hocking and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Window-Sash Fasteners; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
window-sash fasteners; and it consists in the 
arrangement and combination of parts that 
will be more fully described hereinafter. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my invention, 
and Figs. 2, 3, and 4 are detail views thereof. 
Fig. 5 is a perspective of the fastener, and 
Fig. 6 is a perspective of the bead and its 
slide. Fig. 7 is a detail view. 
a represents a common window-frame. In 
the side of this frame are cut a suitable num 
ber of recesses, in which are secured the cast 
ings or frames c, arranged at any suitable dis 
tance apart. Passing through the upper and 
central ones of these castings are the rods d, 
which have the handlese on their Outer ends 
and the stops or catches i on their inner ones, 
which stops are kept constantly pressed out 
ward by coiled springs o, placed back of them. 
In the edge of each one of the sashes are cut 
a suitable number of recesses, f, in which the 
stopsi catch, for the purpose of supporting the 
sashes at any desired point. 
In the upper corner of the lower sash one 
recess is inclined in the opposite direction to 
the others in that sash, so that the stop will 
catch in it, and thus prevent the sash from 
being raised from the outside. The recesses 
in the upper sash all incline in the same direc 
tion, so that the sash cannot be pulled down 
from the outside. 
In the castings c are made the recesses n, 
into which the slides l snugly fit. These slides 
are secured to the inside of the bead Q, so 
that as the bead is shoved into place these 
slides l move into the recesses in, and thus hold 
the bead in position. 
In order to lock the slides, so that the bead 
cannot become displaced by any means, there 
is a flange or projection, , formed on the outer 
end of each slide, which flange extends at 
right angles to the slide, and has a groove 
made in its face to receive a key, s. The in 
ner ends of these keys catch in a hole, t, in 
the frames c, and as they extend directly 
across the front edges of the slides it will 
readily be seen that the slides cannot come 
out until the keys are removed. By passing 
the rods d with their stops through the cast 
ings c, a sash-fastener and a bead-lock are com 
bined together. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
1. The castings c, having the rods d jour 
naled therein, and having the recesses in to re 
ceive the slides l, substantially as shown. 
2. The combination of the casting c, having 
recess in, with the slide l, permanently secured 
to the bead, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing Ihave 
hereunto set my hand this 11th day of March, 
1879. 
claim- 
- 
LOUIS EISEER, 
Witnesses: 
A. H. WILLIGE, 
GOTLLEB BURZ. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216884.txt	Apparatus for Refrigerating Air for Cooling Beer 
F. PAL LAUSCH. 
and other Liquids. 
. 
No. 216,884. 
Patented June 24, 1879. 
 
S S N N X N N N N 
N 
R 
. 
N 
N 
i-S N N 
R . 
N S 
R 
S N N 
 
N 
N 
S. N 
S. 
N 
Nassassssssssssssssssssssssnaana S 
N. PETERS, Photo-utioGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, d, C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANZ PALLAUSCH, OF VIENNA, AUSTRIA. 
MPROVEMENT IN APPARATUS FOR REFRIGERATING AIR FOR COOLING BEER AND OTHER LIQUIDS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 216, SS4, dated June 24, 1879; application filed 
October 
2, 187S. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANZ PALLAUSCH, of 
Vienna, Empire of Austria, have invented a 
certain new and useful Apparatus applicable 
in Refrigerating Fermenting Beer and other 
Liquids, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention consists of a vessel fitted in 
wardly with strips or plates covered with 
coarse weavings or other material of great 
capillary power, maintained in a moist state, 
and arranged inirregular or zigzaglines, incom 
bination with means for forcing a current of 
air or any other suitable gas through said ves 
sel, the cooling apparatus being located in an 
ice-box, and the current of air not coming in 
contact with the ice, all as more particularly 
hereinafter described, and whereby the ice 
melts but slowly, and evaporation is actively 
maintained. 
The liquid caused to evaporate may be wa 
ter, ether, alcohol, or any other volatile sub 
stance, or a mixture of such substances. 
The annexed drawings show, in Figure 1, 
a plan view, and in Fig. 2 an elevation, of my 
refrigerating apparatus as being employed to 
cool beer in the vessels. 
B is, in this case, a horseshoe-shaped box or 
vessel, located in the ice-box D.E., and to be 
surrounded by ice and fitted inwardly with an 
arrangement of strips or plates, a a, of wood, 
tinned iron, zinc, or other suitable material, 
and set opposite one another, and are in prac 
tice to be covered with felt or cotton, coarse 
weavings or fabrics, or any other material of 
great capillary power, to present to the evapo 
rating liquid the largest possible surface. 
G is a gutter, having a perforated bottom, 
and placed inside the vessel B on its upper 
rim or edge, and to be filled with pieces of ice, 
or water may be led into the same. A is a con 
duit-pipe, by which a blast or current of air, 
generated in any desired manner, is directed 
into and through the vessel B. In conse 
quence of the peculiar arrangement of the 
strips or plates a. a, this current of air is forced 
in a zigzag line along and over the said evapo 
rating-surfaces, a part of the current being em 
ployed to melt the ice in the gutter G. 
The ice-water formed in the vessel B may be 
drawn or let off by means of any appropriate 
cock at or near its bottom, and not necessary 
to be shown. Another cock, not needing to 
be shown, may serve to let off the ice-water 
from the vessel E, surrounding the vessel B 
and the ice-gutter. The cooled air, after hav 
ing passed through the vessel B, is directed 
through the pipe C into the room to be cooled. 
The branch pipes H. lead into the refrigerato 
ries K, floating upon the beer in the vessels M. 
J J are cocks to regulate the admission of 
air. L are outlet-pipes for the exhausted air. 
By means of this apparatus air of a temper 
ature of 16O to 18O Reaumur may in a few sec 
onds be cooled to nearly the freezing-point. 
In the manufacture of beer it has usually been 
customary to keep the brewing at the proper 
temperature by means of floaters filled with 
ice, each fermenting vessel or tun containing a 
floater which had to be filled daily, according 
to its size, with, say, three hundred pounds 
of ice, and even oftener if the temperature of 
the place were too high or the ventilation poor. 
This required a great amount of labor in the 
larger breweries, where hundreds of ferment 
ing-tuns are in use, as also a very large quan 
tity of ice, and the emptying and refilling of 
the floaters, and likewise at the same time 
disturbed the fermenting beer. By my inven 
tion, however, the needed working force, as 
well as the amount of ice used, is greatly di 
minished, and any perturbation of the beer un 
der fermentation is avoided. 
The fibrous materials or wicks above named, 
by reason of their well-known capillary power, 
take up the moisture along the plates or strips 
a, a, and this moisture slowly accumulates at 
the bottom of the air-duct in a few drops of 
water, which may be carried offlike the water 
of the ice-box and of the wooden inclosure or 
vessel by means of proper faucets. As the 
strong current of air when entering takes up 
and absorbs a large part of the Waste moisture, 
it will result that a very small amount of ice 
in the interior of the box melts, and even that 
contained in the surrounding case melts but 
very slowly, besides keeping the air which 
passes out of the apparatus into the conduct 
ing-pipe C at about 0o Celsius, as has been 
practically ascertained in a room heated to 
about 18O Celsius. 
If ether or some other rapidly-evaporating 
2 
216,ss4 
spirit or material be thus made to evaporate 
in the apparatus, it is possible to obtain a still 
lower degree of temperature. There may be 
as many branch pipes as there are ferment 
ing-vats in the fermenting-room. 
It will be seen that as the flow or current of 
cold air passes into and through the refriger 
atories K, the beer under treatment remains 
undisturbed during the entire process of fer 
mentation, every other manipulation being 
unnecessary, and thus labor is saved, and also 
that only pure cold air will be forced into the 
fermenting-room, thus rendering it possible to 
obtain for the same an even, steady tempera 
ture, even in fall and winter. 
This apparatus and method are applicable 
for distilleries, chemical laboratories, theaters, 
schools, cars for transporting meat, &c. 
It is obvious that the above-described re 
frigerating apparatus may be varied in form 
and immaterial details, according to the pur 
pose, without departing from the substance of 
my invention. 
What I claim is 
A refrigerating apparatus consisting in a 
vessel fitted inwardly with strips or plates 
covered with coarse weavings or other ma 
terial of great capillary power, maintained in 
a moist state, and arranged in zigzag lines, in 
combination with means for forcing a current 
of air through the interior of the said vessel, 
the whole located in an ice-box, substantially 
as set forth, and shown in the annexed draw 
lings. 
In witness that I claim the foregoing I have 
hereunto set my hand. 
FRANZ PALLAUSCEI. 
Witnesses: 
HEINRICH PALMPT, 
EDUARD WINKELMANN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US216984.txt	D. C. SUMNER, 
Cloth-Shearing Machine. 
"... . 
. 
. 
N. 216,984. 
Patented July 1, 1879. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
D WIG HT C. SUMN ER, OF MILL BURY, M Ass A CHU's ETTs. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CLOTH- SHEARNG MACHINES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 216,9S4, dated July 1, 1879; application filed 
May 27, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
the cylinder C, or so that they follow each 
Be it known that I, DWIGHT C. SUMNER, of other in a spiral series, each sicceeding sec. 
Millbury, in the county of Worcester and State 
tion being offset from the line of revolution of 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
the one in advance of it, as indicated in the 
and useful Improvements in Cloth-Shearing 
diagram, Fig. 3. By this arrangement of the 
cutting-sections 0 the shearing action against 
Machines; and I declare the following to be a 
description of my said invention sufficiently 
the ledger-blade B effects the production of 
full, clear, and exact to enable others skilled 
diagonal lines in the pile or face fibers of the 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
cloth E as it is fed forward over the straight 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
cloth-rest F, the inclination of the diagonal 
companying drawings, which form a part of 
depending on the relative speed of the shear 
this specification, and in which 
ing and feeding mechanism. 
Figure 1 represents a front view of such 
Right-hand or left-hand diagonal lines may 
parts of a cloth-shearing machine as are neces 
be formed, accordingly as the helical arrange 
sary to illustrate the nature of my improve 
ment of the cutting-sections c are set toward 
ments. Fig.2 is a sectional diagram showing 
the right or left hand end of the blade-cylin 
the relative positions of the working parts in 
der. The spirally-arranged cutting points or 
the machine. Fig. 3 is a cutter-face diagram, 
sections c may beformed in continuous series 
showing the manner in which the cutting-sec. 
throughout the entire length of the cylinder, 
tions of the blades follow each other; and Figs. 
or on certain definite portions of its length, as 
4, 5, and 6 illustrate styles of finish effected 
desired, for producing long or short diagonal 
by my invention. 
lines on the surface of the cloth. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
Plain diagonal, as shown in Fig. 4, is formed 
mechanism for finishing that class of cloth or 
by arranging the cutting-sections c in contin 
pile fabric wherein the ornamentation is effect. 
uous helical series from end to end of the cyl 
ed by shearing; and my invention consists, 
inder. By forming the sections c in alternat. 
first, in a cylinder or revolver for cloth-shear. 
ing right and left hand helical portions of de 
ing machines having sectional or recessed cut 
termined lengths along the blade-cylinder, al 
ting-blades, the cutting-sections of which are 
ternating diagonals, as shown in Fig. 5, may. 
arranged in helical order or in spiral series 
be produced; while by forming the sections c 
about the cylinder, as hereinafter more fully de 
in helical series only on occasional portions of 
scribed; second, in the combination, with the 
the cylinder or revolver C, the diagonal is pro 
ledger-blade and cloth-rest in a cloth-shearing 
duced as occasional stripes, as illustrated in 
machine, of a cylinder or revolver having 
Fig. 6. 
notched or recessed shearing-blades with cut. 
The diagonal ornamentation formed by the 
ting points or surfaces disposed in helical or. 
helically-arranged cutting-sections is suscep 
der around said cylinder, as and for the pur 
tible of very fine and delicate delineation on 
poses hereinafter explained. 
the goods, and produces a very desirable fin 
This improvement is applicable to ordinary 
ish at slight expense, while the style of the 
cloth-shearing machines, and it will be under. 
diagonal design or patterns which can be pro 
St00d that portions of the mechanism nothere 
duced by mechanism such as herein described 
in shown or described may be constructed and 
admits of considerable variety, since the pat 
Operated in the usual manner. 
tern may be varied by a modification in the 
In the drawings, A denotes the adjustable 
pitch or direction of the helical curve on which 
top frame of a shearing-machine. Bindicates 
the cutting-points are arranged; also by change 
the stationary ledger-blade; C, the revolver 
in the width or relative sizes of the cutting 
or blade - cylinder, provided with the curved 
sections and recesses, and by variations in the 
blades 1 2 3 4 567, the edges of which have 
movement of the cloth past the shearing 
raised cutting-sections c and recesses or de 
blades. 
pressions d. The cutting-sections c of the sev 
I am aware that diagonal lines have hereto 
eral blades I arrange in helical manner about fore been made in the pile of fabrics by shear 
f 
2 
26,954 
ing with ordinary blades, by the aid of a spi 
ral revolving cloth-restin place of the straight 
rest F, and I do not, therefore, make claim, 
broadly, to the production of diagonal lines. 
Neither do I herein make claim to the inven 
tion of serrated or recessed blades; but 
What I claim as of my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A revolver or blade - cylinder for cloth 
shearing machines having serrated or sec 
tional cutting-blades, the cutting - Sections 
thereof being arranged in helical order about 
the cylinder, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. In a cloth-shearing machine, the combi 
nation, with the ledger-blade and cloth-rest, 
of a cylinder the blades of which are notched 
as described, whereby a series of cutting points 
or surfaces are arranged spirally around said 
cylinder, substantially as set forth. 
3. A cylinder for shearing-machines, the 
blades of which are notched as described, 
whereby a series of cutting points or surfaces 
are developed around said cylinder in spiral 
form, substantially as set forth. 
Witness my hand this 23d day of May, A. 
D. 878. 
DWIGHT C. SUMNER, 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. H. BURLEIGH, 
GEO. M. REED. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217084.txt	. 
, 
 
H. L. F ALCK & D, NEFF, 
Harrow, 
No. 217,084. 
Patented July 1, 1879. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY L. FALCK AND DANIEL NEFF, OF MILLVILLE, INDIANA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN HARROWs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 217,0s4, dated July 1, 1879; application filed 
May 5, 1879. 
------ 
This invention relates to 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, HENRY L.FALCK and 
DANIEL NEFF, of Millville, in the county of 
Edenry and State of Indiana, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Har 
rows; and we do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
Vation. Fig. 3 is a detail view, in perspective, 
of the connecting links and heads; and Fig. 4 
is a similar view of the locking device or catch 
Which forms a part of our invention in con 
nection with our improved harrow. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
sectional har 
rows, or that class of harrows which consist 
of several detachable sectionshinged together; 
and it consists in the combination, with the 
loops and headed connecting-links, of the con 
struction, hereinafter described, by which the 
several sections of the harrow are united, and 
of pivoted locks or catches, substantially as 
hereinafter more fully described. 
In the drawings, A B C D are the several 
(in this case four) sections which compose the 
harrow, and each of which consists of two 
parallel beams, at b, united at each end by 
cross-pieces c. c. The harrow-teeth d, which 
may be of any suitable construction, are in 
serted into the parallel beams a b. 
e. e' and 
ff are iron rods or long bolts inserted 
through beams a, b, parallel to each other and 
projecting laterally on opposite sides of the 
frames, the bolts e eterminating in T-shaped 
heads E, and the ends of bolts ff" forming 
vertical links or loops F, as shown more clearly 
in Fig. 3. The first and last sections of the 
harrow are provided, respectively, with only 
one set of these link and head bolts, and the 
last section, D, has hinged at each end of its 
rearmost beam, b, a catch, G, the forward end 
of which is inserted through a keeper, g, and 
bent or doubled into the shape represented in 
Fig. 4 to form a head, G', provided with two 
laterally-projecting pins, h. i. 
To couple or connect the several sections, 
commencing with A, which is left flat on the 
ground, section B is first raised and set at a 
right angle, longitudinally, to A, in which po 
sition the T-shaped heads E E of B may readily 
be inserted through the vertically-slotted heads 
or links FF of A, when section B may be let 
down and the two sections A, B are coupled. 
Section C is connected to B, and D to C, in 
like manner, after which D and C are firmly 
locked together by pushing the heads G of 
the catches G against the heads or links FF 
of section C in such a manner that the upper 
pin, h, will pass through the link above the 
cross-head E, while the other pin, i, will bear 
against its outside, impinging upon the pro 
jecting shank of the link. 
The draft beam or bar H consists of a flat 
iron bar bent into the configuration shown 
in the drawings, its front end being secured 
obliquely in the corner of the front bar, a, of 
section A, and its rear end in the bar b. It is 
braced between bars at and b by braces lic k, 
and has a series of perforations, ll, in its curved 
front side, into any one of which the draft-link 
in may be inserted. 
From the foregoing description, taken in con 
nection with the drawings, the operation and 
many advantages of our improved harrow will 
be readily understood. In the first place the 
several sections may be readily connected and 
again taken apart; and when disconnected 
the sections may be piled one upon the other 
so as to take up but very little storage-room, 
or they may be readily packed in a cart or 
wagon for transportation to the place where 
the harrow is desired for use. 
The connecting-heads E have sufficient ver 
tical play in the links F to enable each section 
to rise over the unevenness or undulations of 
the ground without affecting its neighbors, so 
that the harrow, as a whole, will give or 
yield to the character of the surface of the 
soil. Again, if any one section should become 
entangled in roots or any similar obstruction, 
the sections to each side of it may readily be 
folded up, one upon the other, until that sec 
tion is reached which has got stuck, and which 
may then readily be disentangled. If the sec 
tion farthest from the draft (D in the draw 
ings) should be inclined to jump, it may be con 
. 
2 
a 
20SA 
nected rigidly to the section in advance of it, 
C, by locking the links, by means of the catches 
G G, in the manner described, which will pre 
Vent vertical play. The arrangement of the 
draft-beam, as herein shown, will permit the 
hitching of the team close up against the cor 
ner of the harrow without lifting this from the 
ground, which greatly reduces the draft. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent of 
the United States 
1. In combination with the coupling-heads 
E and links F, constructed as described, the 
pivoted locking-catches G. G', having pins hi, 
Substantially as and for the purpose herein 
shown and specified. 
2. The combination, with a series of flexibly 
connected harrow-sections, A B C, provided 
with the attachment-loops F and heads E, Con 
structed as described, of the section D, having 
the connecting-heads EE, and provided with 
pivoted locking devices G. G', whereby the 
said last section of the series may be rigidly - 
connected to the section next in front of it, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
EIENRY L. EALCK. 
DANIEL NEFE. 
Witnesses: 
JosLPH. F. KINDLEY, 
DAVID W. B. WELKE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217184.txt	3 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
D. WHITTE MORE, 
Sewing-Machine 
Patented July 1, 1879. 
No. 217,184. 
 
 
Wif77. 
26osett 
A. 
6SS 
62.S. 
ill---- a---. 
) 
N. PETERs, photo 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
D. WHITTE MORE, 
Se Wing-Machine, 
Patented July 1, 1879. 
No. 217,184. 
 
Witnesses. 
&est 2.6%ar. 
27, M, 72-?ell -Y 
- 
777Vev7/oz 
(%-42%rare 
ra, resy. --- 
7. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
D, WHITTEMORE, 
Sewing-Machine. 
Patented July 1, 1879. 
No. 217,184. 
 
A/G. WO 
// 7/ya S S as 
/wVZW7 or 
rver 7, 24, 
N. PETERs, PHoro-LithoGRAPHER, washington, D.C. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
DAVID WHITTEMORE, OF QUINCY, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO WALTER 
L. WHITTEMORE, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN SEWING-MACHINES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,154, dated July 1, 1879; application filed 
January 28, 1879. 
" To all chom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID WHITTEMORE, 
of Quincy, in the county of Norfolk and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Sewing-Machines, 
which invention is fully set forth in the follow 
ing specification, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that kind of Sewing-machines which are con 
structed With an upright work - supporting 
post, the top of which forms a diminutive 
table at a considerable elevation above the 
general level of the bed of the machine, and 
around which a clear space is left, in which 
work that is doubled or folded into irregular 
form may be permitted to overhang the post 
and lie freely around the same below the plane 
of its top, while that portion which is being 
sewed lies horizontally upon the work-plate 
on the top of the post, such elevated and di 
minished supporting - surface enabling the 
operator to stitch certain kinds of work of a 
folded, hollow, or tubular character with 
greater facility and less liability to deface and 
injure the goods thus being worked upon from 
undue doubling and pressure in the process of 
stitching, such as an ordinary flat table would 
necessitate. 
Machines constructed with an elevated post 
and employed for stitching leather with a waxed 
thread, forming a chain-stitch, have been long 
in use, as shown in the patent granted to Da 
vid Haskell August 28, 1860, and machines 
have been formed With a post of diminutive 
size for glove-sewing, with a shuttle therein, 
and having a feed mechanism operated from 
above, and performing the double duty of a 
presser-foot and feeding device. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
shuttle or lock stitch in connection with a 
Work-supporting post and mechanism adapted 
to dry-thread stitching, and a class of work 
for which neither of said machines are adapted, 
or for which they can be successfully em 
ployed; and my invention consists in so con 
structing such post as to support in its top 
part, in a circular recessed race, a rotative 
shuttle for carrying a second thread and 
passing the same through loops formed of the 
upper or needle thread, and combining with 
such post and shuttle a shuttle-driver and 
feed mechanism, both of which are operated 
from beneath the post; also, in combining with 
such post, shuttle, and feeding device so ar 
ranged, a presser-foot operated from above to 
act upon the material being sewed, and in con 
junction with the feeding device; also, in the 
peculiar construction and arrangement of the 
feed-lever and its combination with coacting 
parts; and in the peculiar construction of the 
shuttle and its combination with coacting 
parts. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a sewing-machine embody 
ing my improvements. Fig. 2 is a detached 
vertical section taken through the axis of the 
vertical shaft which drives the shuttle, and in 
the direction indicated by line at ac, Figs. 1 and 
11. Fig. 3 is a top view of the Work-support 
ing post with the sliding work-plate removed 
to disclose the shuttle in its circular raceway. 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged vertical section taken on 
the line indicated by line & 2, Figs. 1 and 11, 
and as viewed from the left in said Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is a top or plan view of my improved 
shuttle with the perforated thread-retaining 
cap removed. Fig. 6 is a plan view of said 
cap. Fig. 7 is an edge elevation of the shut 
tle, the top, as shown in Fig. 5, being shown 
at the right in this figure. Fig. S is a detached 
under-side or inverted plan view, showing the 
relative positions, arrangement, and connec 
tions of the driving-shaft and the short aux 
iliary shaft, the crank and pitman, the rack 
and pinion, the feed-lever, and the cam and 
pin on the short shaft that actuates such lever. 
Fig. 9 is a detached elevation taken as viewed 
from the left in Fig.1, and showing the presser 
foot and its bar, the means of actuating and 
adjusting the same, and the adjacent parts of 
the machine. Fig. 10 is a detached top or 
plan view, showing the front portion of the 
goose-neck, the needle-actuating lever, the 
needle and presser-foot bars, the presser-foot 
depressing spring, and its adjusting device. 
Fig.11 is a horizontal transverse section taken 
through post M, the feed-lever, and shuttle 
driver on the line indicated by line y), Fig. 4. 
In these figures, A represents the bed of the 
 
2 
22, 
machine. B is the goose-neck, upon which is 
pivoted the lever C for operating the needle 
bar D. Said neck also supports the usual 
presser-foot, take-up, thread-guides, and ten 
sion devices, which, so far as they are material 
to my invention, will be described in their or 
der. 
Beneath the bed. A the driving-shaft E is 
journaled in bearings at a, and carries upon its 
outer end the belt-pulleys and balance-wheel 
F, also an eccentric, which operates, through 
pitman G, the lever C. 
At the opposite end of the driving-shaft is 
a crank, H, part 1 of which is secured or 
formed upon the short auxiliary shaft c', while 
part 2 of such crank is formed upon a sleeve, 
a', which is secured upon shaft E by set-screws, 
as shown in Figs. 2 and 8. 
H' is a pitman, one end whereof is pivoted 
upon the Wrist-pin which connects parts 1 and 
2 of crank H, while its opposite end is piv 
oted upon a stud secured to rack I, which rack 
engages the pinion J, secured upon the verti 
cal shaft K, whereby the rotation of shaft E, 
acting through its crank H, pitman H', and 
rack I, which latter slides in fixed ways, will 
produce a reciprocating rotary movement of 
pinion J and of the shaft K, to which it is se 
cured, for the purpose of actuating the shut 
tle through its driver, in the manner to be de 
scribed. 
Upon the bed A is erected a post-like work 
support, M, the top of which constitutes a di 
minished table, Fig. 3, and is provided with 
a slotted throat-plate, b, through which the 
rough-surface feed-plate c of the feed-bar op 
erates, and through a perforation therein the 
eye-pointed needle passes in the usual manner. 
A sliding plate, d, is also provided and fitted 
to slide in Ways in the top of said post, as 
shown in Fig. 3, and so made removable for 
the purpose of access to the shuttle-race. In 
the top of said post is a circular shuttle-race, 
e, Fig. 2, within which the shuttlefis seated, 
as shown in Fig. 3, and is actuated by the 
driver L, which latter is operated through the 
shaft K, as already stated, the depending 
shaft or stem of said driver being centrally 
inserted and secured in the head of shaft K, 
as shown in Fig. 2, for convenience of assem 
bling or removal of said parts. The side N of 
the post M is removable, and is secured to the 
main portion of said post, when in position, 
by screws. Said side N is also vertically slot 
ted, as at l, to receive a flanged and centrally 
threaded block, i, Figs. 2 and 4, through which 
a screw-stud, j', headed at its inner end, passes 
outward through a slot, j, in the part l of the 
feed-bar, such stud serving as an adjustable 
fulcrum, upon which said bar rocks and by 
which the throw of its upper feeding-surface 
c is regulated. The feed-bar, composed of 
parts l and t, is reciprocated vertically by a 
cam or eccentric, q, secured upon shaft c', and 
acting against a shoulder, d, on the back side 
of part l. (See Fig. 2, and indicated by dot 
ted lines in Fig. 4.) A short pin, P, Figs, 2, 
J 
4, 8, secured eccentrically in shaft c, and act 
ing in slot in in the lower end of the feed-lever, 
serves to impart to such end of the lever a 
horizontal vibratory movement; and as the 
pivotal stud j' is, by means of the lock-nut O 
and blocki, adjusted higher or lower relative 
to pin P and the toothed feed-plate c, the 
length of the feed-movement of said plate will 
be accordingly varied. A coiled spring, k, 
secured at its upper end to the feed-bar and at 
its lower end to plate N, insures the constant 
contact of shoulder d of the bar with cam q. 
Said feed-bar is formed in two parts or men 
bers, land t, for convenience of removal of the 
upper part from the post and adjustment 
thereof and its plate c relative to plate b. 
The rough-surface plate e is also removable in 
order that such part which comes in immedi 
ate contact with the material being sewed 
may be changed for one more or less rough or 
sharply toothed, as may in any case be re 
quired. The top part of bar l is formed with 
a dovetail recess to receive the lower end of 
the top part, l, which is secured therein by the 
locking-screw n, Figs. 4 and 11, and in the 
lower end of part l is threaded a screw, n, 
the turning of which in or out to the requisite 
degree gages or graduates the depth to which 
part l enters the recess in part l, and conse 
quently regulates the position of its rough 
surface plate c relative to the upper face of 
the work-plate b. This feed-bar, by the oper 
ation of the mechanism described, performs 
the part of the well-known four-motion feed. 
The shuttle represented separately in Figs. 
5, 6, and 7 is formed with a circular thread 
chamber, t, having no central bobbin or thread 
spindle, but is adapted to receive and carry 
a solid ball of thread so wound as to deliver 
from its center. Said shuttle is provided with 
a perforated cap, s, which serves to keep the 
thread in place, and by means of its perfora 
tions, through which the thread passes, and in 
conjunction with the perforated spring-plate 
it, also serves as a tension device, whereby a 
uniform tension upon the shuttle-thread is se 
cured independently of any action of the thread 
ball within the shuttle. 
The cap s is held and kept from rotation 
relative to the shuttle by means of the pro 
jections from its periphery, which enter corre 
sponding recesses in the wall of the shuttle, 
(shown in Fig. 5,) and it is held from vertical 
displacement by the spring-pressure of plate 
it, produced by spring , between which plate 
and said cap, under a pressure produced and 
regulated by the adjusting-screw 0, the shut 
tle-thread passes with the desired tension. 
By this construction of a shuttle and its self. 
contained tension devices, independent of a 
bobbin or thread-holder, the constantly-vary 
ing quantity of thread within the shuttle will 
in no degree affect the uniformity and perfect 
working of the thread-tension. 
The pressure-roller b', which is of the com 
mon construction, is pivoted in a short angle 
arm, which is provided with a socket and se. 
21, 1s4 
3 
cured by set-screws upon the vertical bar T, 
as shown fully in Fig. 9. This baris arranged 
to slide vertically in bearings in goose-neck B, 
as shown in said figure, and is raised from 
the feed-plate by the usual lifting-lever it, 
pivoted to the said bar, and acting upon the 
lower bearing of goose-neck B. When this 
lever is released the requisite depressing force 
is exerted upon bar Tby the spring U, the front 
end of which acts upon a stirrup, h, secured 
upon the bar by a set-screw, as shown in Fig. 
9. The back end of said spring rests upon 
the upper side of a lug, g, formed upon the 
goose-neck, and the requisite adjustment of 
the force to be exerted by said spring upon 
said bar is produced by screw e', threaded in 
lug f", and which screw, when turned down, 
acts directly upon the upper side of spring U, 
thereby increasing its pressure upon the bar T 
through the stirrup hi. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a lock-stitch sewing-machine, the com 
bination of an elevated work-supporting post, 
M, having in the head thereof a shuttle-race, 
e, of a rotative shuttle, f, a feed-bar, l, a 
shuttle-driver, L, an actuating-shaft, E, and 
intermediate devices for operating such shut 
tle-driver and feed-bar, substantially as speci 
fied. 
- 
2. In a lock-stitch sewing-machine, the com 
bination of an elevated work-supporting post, 
M, a rotative shuttle,f, arranged in a race in 
the head of the post, a shuttle-driver, L, and 
adjustable feed-bar, supported by and operated 
from below such post by means substantially 
as described, and a presser-foot, b', arranged 
and operated above such post, all substantially 
as specified. 
3. In combination, the recessed postM, with 
its removable side N, having sloth, and the 
feed-barl, having slot j, the flanged stud i, 
screw-studj', and securing-nut O, all substan 
tially as specified. 
4. In a sewing-machine feed-bar, the combi. 
nation, with part l, having the longitudinal 
sloti, of the part l', adjustably seated in part l, 
and the locking-screw in and adjusting-screw 
m, all substantially as specified. 
5. The shuttlef, chambered as described, 
and provided with the perforated caps, the 
spring-plate u, the spring v, and adjusting 
screw 0, all substantially as specified. 
D. WHITTEMORE. 
Witnesses: 
EUGENE HUMPHREY, 
SAM L. F. HOWARD. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217284.txt	J. HEIMANN. 
Manufacture of Hats, Caps, and Bonnets. 
Patented July 8, 1879. 
No. 217,284. 
Z'ez. z. 
 
ZzZyeazar. 
PETERs, Piloto-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, 
c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JULIUS HEIMANN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN THE MANUFACTURE OF HATS, CAPS, AND BONNETS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,2S4, dated July 8, 1879; application filed 
June 5, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JULIUS HEIMANN, of 
New York city, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in the Manufacture of 
Hats, Caps, and Bonnets, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
In a former patent, granted to me May 13, 
1879, I have shown a novel form of felt hat or 
bonnet made of cut strips of cloth or felt 
sewed concentrically together in the manner 
of straw goods. Mypresent invention aims to 
provide ahatorbonnet more especially adapted 
for the intermediate seasons, combining the 
materials usually employed for summer and 
winter, such as straw and felt, thus forming a 
hat of a more novel and attractive character, 
and better adapted for spring and fall Wear. 
My invention may, therefore, be stated to 
consist in a hat, cap, or bonnet formed of lines 
or windlings of straw or other braid, with al 
ternate or intervening lines or windings of cut 
strips of cloth or felt, sewed concentrically 
edge to edge, in the well-known manner of 
straw-braid sewing, thus forming an improved 
and novel article of manufacture. 
The invention also consists in a compound 
braid. for the manufacture of the improved 
hats, as hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 of the annexed drawings repre 
sents a hat formed according to my presentin 
vention. It is composed, as illustrated, partly 
of cut strips of felt or cloth and partly of 
braided strips of straw, chip, or hair, which 
are arranged in alternating lines, as illus 
trated. 
The straw, linen, chip, or hair braid a is of 
the usual kind, while the strips of cloth or felt 
b are cut from sheets or pieces of felt or cloth 
in continuous lengths, as described in my afore 
said patent. The straw or other braid and the 
cut strip of felt or cloth may be first stitched 
together, edge to edge, and to the desired 
length, and the compound strip or braid may 
then be stitched concentrically on blocks or 
frames, in the usual manner, to form the com 
plete hat or bonnet. The strips of felt and 
braid may, however, be sewed together at the 
same time directly on the frame or block. 
I prefer to have every line of the straw or 
other braid alternate with every line of the 
felt; but it is obvious that the felt and the 
straw may alternate in several continuous 
lines, and that there may be several continuous 
lines of straw or other braid to one of the felt 
strip, or vice versa. 
It will also be understood that the proprie 
tor may furnish the felt or cloth strips to the 
hat manufacturer to combine with the ordi 
nary straw or other braid to form the new hat, 
or he may furnish the straw braid and the felt 
strip secured together in a compound braid, as 
illustrated in Fig. 2, which forms part of my 
present invention. 
When the hat is sewed or formed on the 
block or frame it may be sized or pressed in 
any of the existing methods, which do not re 
quire description. 
- 
The advantage of the improved hat is that 
it can be manufactured cheaply, and is better 
adapted to intermediate seasons than are other 
hats, and it moreover presents a dressy and 
pleasing appearance. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A hat, cap, or bonnet formed of alternate 
windings or lines of straw or equivalent braid 
and cut strips of cloth or felt sewed concen 
trically together, substantially as herein set 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a com 
pound braid or strip for the manufacture of 
hats or bonnets formed of straw or equivalent 
braid and a cut strip of cloth or felt secured 
together in continuous lengths, substantially 
as herein set forth. 
JULIUS HEMANN. 
forth. 
- 
Witnesses: 
M. T. WALL, 
ED. STIEGLITZ, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217384.txt	C. H. KELSEY. 
Boiler-Tube Cleaner, 
No. 217,384. 
Patented July 8, 1879. 
  
 
   
 
  
 
CY a 2-2 Z 
SS 
SSSS 2. 
2 ZD 
s h 2s. 
 
2 
(Cecesses: 
w 
Zzazeta-7: 
%.67%-44 2. -6-4 4.44% 
N.PE FERs, PHOTO-ThoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. ' 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
CHARLES H. KELSEY, OF NEWPORT, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
MPROVEMENT IN BOLER-TUBE CLEAN ERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 212,3S4, dated July 8, 1879; application filed 
December 19, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs H. KELSEY, 
of Newport, in the county of Sullivan and 
State of New Hampshire, have invented a new 
and useful Improvementin Boiler-Tube Clean 
ers; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my boiler 
tube cleaner complete and ready for use. Fig. 
2 is a view of the spindle. Fig. 3 is a view of 
one of the sections which form the tube, which 
is the principal and most important part of 
said cleaner. Fig. 4 is a view of the conical 
or expanding nut or sleeve when made with 
out a screw, by the aid of which the lower 
ends of the sections are firmly fastened to the 
spindle. 
The same letters indicate identical parts in 
the respective drawings. 
My invention consists of four distinct and 
separate sections, bent in the form of a quar 
ter-circle, thus all togetherforming a complete 
circular tapering tube arranged around a cen 
tral spindle, and confined firmly to said spindle 
at their lower ends, leaving the upper ends to 
expand and contract more or less, but suffi 
ciently to adapt the cleaner to the inequalities 
of the tube to be cleaned, the upper ends of 
said sections forming a complete circular cut 
ting or scraping edge. 
I also increase the cutting or Scraping power 
of my said cleaner by the use of a guide-collar 
formed with angular edges on its periphery, 
which serves not only for cleaning purposes, 
but, in connection with the uppercircumference 
of the sections of the cleaner, to keep said 
cleaner, so far as may be, in line with the tube 
to be cleaned. 
I also construct the spindle and handle with 
a hollow passage running through both of 
them for the admission of steam to be utilized 
in cleaning out cinders, &c., from the boiler 
tubes; and by the aid of a coupler I attach 
the handle to either end of the spindle, thus 
enabling the operator to use the cleaner by 
pushing or drawing the same through the 
tube to be cleaned. 
Having set forth my improvement and its 
purpose, I now proceed to describe its con 
struction. 
A is the spindle, which I construct of 
wrought-iron, with a circular hollow space, a, 
running through its center for the admission 
of steam, and a circular groove, e, in which 
the lower ends of the sections are inserted. 
c c, at the top and lower ends of the spindle, 
are male screws, made of such size as to fit 
into the female screw in the coupler of the 
handle. d is a male screw fitting into the fe 
male screw in the guide-collar, and also into 
the female screw in the tapering or conical 
nut. From the groove e, I make the diameter 
of the spindle to expand gradually and suffi 
ciently to cause the sections to flare slightly 
- 
at their cutting or scraping edge. 
B B are four sections, each curved in the 
form of a quarter-circle, and when confined 
together upon the spindle forming a complete 
circle. I make them in a form regularly taper 
ing from the upper or cutting edge of the 
same to the lower ends thereof, and of cast 
steel properly tempered, which gives them the 
best and most durable cutting or scraping 
edges and the necessary elasticity. The edges 
I make a little beveled to secure better work. 
I curve the lower ends of said sections slightly 
inward, as seen ate, sufficiently to adapt them 
to the groove e in the spindle, by means of 
which, with the aid of the conical or expand 
ing nut or sleeve, the said sections are firmly 
fastened to the spindle. On the upper ends or 
edges of each of said sections I fixatriangular 
or V-shaped guide, l, the outside angle of each 
guide being placed flush with or a very little 
inside of the periphery of the circle formed by. 
said sections, as seen in Figs. 1 and 3, for the 
purpose of enabling the implement to pass 
more easily through the tube to be cleaned, 
and to overcome the elasticity of said sections. 
C is a conical nut or sleeve, which I make 
in the form as seen in the drawings, Fig. 2, 
with a female screw, f, fitting to the male 
screw d on the spindle, the sleeve part being 
made with its diameter gradually expanding, 
to adapt itself to the expanding diameter of 
the spindle, commencing at the groove e. In 
manufacturing the implement the sleeve may 
be made independent of the nut part of the 
r 
. 
. 
. 
. 
217,3s4 
device shown in Fig. 2, with or without a 
washer between them. The office of the sleeve 
and nut is to tighten the sections BB, &c., 
and hold them firmly in their places upon the 
spindle. 
D is the guide-collar nut, with four guides, 
g g, below its flange h, and four guides, ii, 
above the said flange. It may be constructed 
without the guides ii, as may be found to be 
most useful in practice. I construct the flange 
h with angular edges.jj, for the purpose of 
increasing the scraping power of the imple 
ment. The guide-collar D, with its guides and 
flange thus constructed, serves to keep the 
cleaner parallel with the boiler-tube, and to 
aid in cleaning it of scales, cinders, and soot, 
if any shall be left by the cleaner. The guides 
gg and i i are inserted a little inside of the 
flange h, so as not to interfere with its scrap 
ing power when the implement is in use. I 
construct the guide-collar D from one-eighth 
to three-sixteenths of an inch smaller in di 
ameter than the largest diameter of the tube 
of the cleaner for which it is designed, for the 
purpose of insuring the easy operation of said 
cleaner within the boiler-tube. 
E is the handle by which the cleaner is op-i- 
erated, and may be attached by the couplerk 
to either end of the spindle. The said coupler 
also aids in more firmly fastening and keeping 
in place the guide-collar D. 
I do not, of course, mean to be confined to 
the particular construction of my cleaner, as 
above described. I may vary the sections by 
lessening or increasing the number of them, 
always curving them so as when put together 
they shall describe a complete circle. 
Having above described my said invention, 
its purpose, and its construction, what I claim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A boiler-tube cleaner composed of the 
spindle A, the sections B B, with their trian 
gular or V-shaped guides ll, the conical nut 
C, and the guide-collar D, with its guides i i 
and its guides gg, substantially as described. 
2. In a boiler-tube cleaner constructed sub 
stantially as above described, the hollow spin 
dle A, as and for the purposes described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 16th day of December, A. D. 1878. 
. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES H. KELSEY. 
STEPHEN S. KIMBALL, 
GEORGE R. BROWN. 
- 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217484.txt	M. T. & A, B, REEWES 
Apparatus for Opening and Closing Gates. 
Patented July 15, 1879. 
No. 217,484. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
WITNEEEEE, 
-(ofe/Z. 
N.PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, o c. 
M. T. & A. B. REEVES. 
Apparatus for Opening and Closing Gates. 
Patented July 15, 1879. 
No. 217,484. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
6. 
97.18we 
% 
Z/M42-21-a-2 
22 - 
2.4- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
s 
MARSHAL. T. REEVIES AND ALFRED B. REEVES, OF COLUMBUS, INDIANA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN APPARATUS FOR OPENING AND CLOSING GATES, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 217,4S4, dated July 15, 1879; application filed 
February 24, 1879. 
. . 
. 
. 
. . 
To all chon it may concern: 
are of peculiar construction, to wit: The rod 
Be it known that we, MARSHAL. T. REEVEs 
forming each trip or crank is bent, with two 
and ALFRED B. REEVEs, of Columbus, in the 
opposite crank-arms, 3 and 5, for the wheels 
county of Bartholomew and State of Indiana, 
to strike against for the purpose of opening or 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
closing the gate-that is, the crank, as shown 
in Apparatus for Opening and Closing Gates, 
in Fig. 9, is provided with a bent end, 1, that 
of which the following is a description, refer. 
forms a journal that operates in the boxe. The 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings. 
part 2 extends a short distance from said jour 
. The object of our invention is to provide a 
nal at a right angle, and is then bent parallel 
system of newly constructed and arranged de 
with the journal 1, as shown at 3, forming a 
vices having new modes of operation, whereby 
bearing of sufficient length for the wheels of a 
a gate is made to open or shut automatically 
vehicle to strike against. The rod is further 
bent at 4 parallel with the part 2, but inclined 
from either side. . 
Our invention consists in the new construc 
at an angle of about forty-five degrees, and is 
tion and arrangement of parts, and in the new 
then bent, as at 5, parallel with the part 3, 
combination of elements which are deemed 
and the bent at 6, and provided with another 
essential in our newly-organized gate-operat 
long journal, 7, that operates, in the boxe", 
ing device, as will be hereinafter fully de 
thus forming a double trip for operating the 
scribed and set forth. 
throw-rod H. J.; and the inclined part 4 makes 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
the trip strong and prevents the cranks 35 
like letters of reference in the different figures 
from being bent out of shape, and forms a 
indicate like parts, Figure 1 represents a per 
brace to the elevated cranks, should they be 
spective view of our newly-constructed appa 
accidentally struck, the part 3 lying parallel 
ratus, showing the gate closed. Fig. 2 repre 
with the ground, while the part 5 is in a ver 
sents the same with the gate elevated at its 
tical position, and while in this position the 
front end and inclined so as to swing open. 
part 4 is at an angle of about forty-five de 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the gate and 
grees, as shown in Figs. 9 and 1. 
operating devices when open. Fig. 4 repre 
. The journal 7 of the trip is provided with a 
sents a perspective view of the gate-post and 
crank, h, to which one end of the throw-rod 
upper hinge-bracket, for supporting the gate. 
His pivoted. The throw-rod H. extends from 
Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the cog-rack, 
said crank h, which is located attany desired 
the segment cog-arm forming part of the lower 
distance from the gate, to another crank, h, 
hinge-joint, and the bracket for supporting said 
(not shown,) attached to the other trip, located 
arm, showing their relative positions when 
at any required distance from the gate on the 
the gate is elevated at its front end and in 
opposite side. 
clined so as to swing open; and Fig. 6 repre 
The throw-rod His provided with a cog-rack, 
sents a perspective view of the same when the 
J, that operates in a slide-guide formed in the 
gate is closed. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of 
post, or attached thereto, so as to reciprocate 
the post against which the gate closes, show 
back and forward in said guide and support 
ing the arrangement of stops and the inclined 
the rod. 
device for starting the gate open as said gate 
The end D of the gate, that is hinged to the 
is raised at its front end. Fig. 8 represents a 
post A, is provided at the top with an eyebolt, di 
plan view of the segment-arm that forms part 
and the post A is provided with a bracket 
of the lower hinge. Fig. 9 is a perspective of 
hook, Glf, in any ordinary manner. 
the trip or double cranks that operate the gate 
The lower end of the gate-post D is provided 
when said gate is opened or closed, and Fig. 
with an angular corner-plate, L, having a pro 
10 represents an enlarged vertical section 
jecting end, and further provided with a pin, 
through the cog-rack and segment, 
L', as shown. Said pin L operates in the hole 
The trips or double cranks, Fig. 9, that are 
L8 of the arm I of the segment cog-rack K. 
arranged in the roadway at each side of the 
This segment cog-rack is of peculiar construc 
gate, and which operate the throw-rod HT, |tion, to wit, Fig. 8: The cogs K extending 
. . . 
; 
: 
2 
217,4S4 
around its periphery about one-third of the 
circumference, (provided it makes a full wheel.) 
the pivot-hole g is located in the center, and 
the arm L' projects in a quartering direction 
from the cogs, as shown in Fig. 8. The arm 
L' is also provided with a hole, L, in which 
the pin L on the angular hinge-plate Loper 
ates, as shown. 
The segment-rack K is mounted on a suita 
ble bracket, PP, that may be attached to the 
post A, or to some other suitable support. 
The teeth Kof the segment-rack Koperatein 
the sliding rack J, and form a means of throw 
ing the end post, D, of the gate out of balance, 
and raise the front post, E, thereby causing 
the gate to open when the rack J is moved in 
the direction of the arrow ), and to close when 
said rack is moved in the opposite direction, 
as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6. The lower . 
rail of the gate is provided with a row of 
spikes, a, to prevent animals from raising the 
gate. 
The post B, against which the gate closes, 
is provided with stop-pins, cleats, or brackets 
in n for the gate to shut against, and further 
provided with an ordinary catch, n, for hold 
ing the latch Z, when the gate is shut. The 
post B is further provided with a bracket, M, 
that is attached to the post horizontally. Said 
bracket is provided with an angular face, ', 
against which the end E' of the gate-post E 
strikes as it is elevated by the action of the 
trips and their connecting mechanism, the 
sudden contact of the gate with the inclined 
bracket r M forcing the gate to start open with 
a quick motion. As the gate opens to its 
widest point, the latch Z engages with the 
catch b on the post C and holds the gate open, 
as shown in Fig. 3, until the front end of the 
gate is raised by turning down either the crank 
3 or crank 3, Fig. 3. 
The throw-rod H may be supported on up 
right posts, thus preventing the rod from 
swagging and binding, and said throw-rod may 
also be protected by a guard - board. (Not 
shown.) 
The operation of our improved automatic 
gate is as follows, to wit: The gate, first being 
closed, is opened by the wheels of a vehicle 
striking the crank 5 or 5, Figs. 1, 2, and 3, 
at either side of the gate, and closed by strik- . 
ing the crank 3 or 3, also at either side of 
the gate. When the crank 5 or 5 is forced 
down by the wheels, the crank h moves the 
throw-rods H and J, thus causing the rack J 
to partially rotate the segment-rack K, which 
throws the lower end of the gate-post D out 
from the post A, and also to one side, thus 
causing the front end, E, of the gate to be sud 
denly elevated and tilted slightly sidewise, 
thus releasing the latch Z, from the catch n, 
and the end E' of the gate, at the same time 
striking the beveled side r of the bracket M, 
is suddenly thrown or given a start in the di 
rection that the gate is to open. The gate then, 
by its own gravity, aided by the bracket M, 
swings around, and the latch Z, catches in the 
catch b, and the gate is held open with an in 
clined position, as in Fig. 3, until the wheels 
strike the crank 3 or 3. Then the lower end of 
the gate-post D is moved back toward the 
post A, and at the same time is moved side 
wise-that is, endwise of the gate-thus ele 
vating the front end of the gate, and at the 
same time straightening up the side inclination 
of the gate and releasing the latch Z from the 
catch b, and the gate is permitted to swing 
shut by its own gravity. 
The gate can be used and operated by foot 
passengers by simply raising the latch Z, and 
swinging the gate open in the usual manner. 
When the front end of the gate is raised and 
the gate tilted, as in Fig. 2, the relative posi 
tion of the lower end of the gate-post D, seg 
ment-rack K, and rack-rod J prevents the 
gate from dropping until the position of the 
segment-rack K is reversed, as in Fig. 6. 
What we claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The segment cog-rack K, having an arm, 
L', forming part of the hinge-joint, and pivoted 
to the bracket PP', in the manner and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. The segment cog-rack K, having an arm, 
L', forming part of the linge-joint, and pivoted 
to the bracket P P', combined with the rack 
rod J H and trip-cranks, as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
3. The segment cog-rack K, having an arm, 
L', forming part of the hinge-joint, and pivoted 
to the bracket PP', combined with the rack 
rod J H, the gate D, and hinge G. d, as and 
for the purpose specified. 
4. In combination with the gate D E, oper 
, alted to be raised at its front end, and swung 
out of a perpendicular line at its rear end by 
the segment cog-rack K, bracket P P', and 
rack-rod J H, the angular-faced bracket Mr 
on post B, as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
MARSHAL. T. REEVES. 
ALERED B. REEVIES. 
Witnesses : 
FRANK OBRIEN, 
L. H. HoBBs. 
w 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217584.txt	F. CHICHESTER, 
Tilting-Chair. 
No. 217,584. 
 
Patented July 15, 1879. 
Miesses: 
(4. 46 
- 
ZZeevador: 
g7-42.62%zz 
74.62 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, WASHNGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
FRANKLIN CHICHESTER, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN. 
MPROVEMENT N T LTING CHARS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent Noy 217,5s4, dated July 15, 1879; application filed 
December 3, 1878. 
To all chon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANKLIN CHICHESTER, 
of Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented a new and 
Improved Chair; and that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, making part of this specification. 
This invention is in the nature of an im 
provement in chairs; and the invention con 
sists in a chair with an adjustable back-panel, 
the adjustable back-panel being provided with 
one or more revolving cams, whereby the panel 
may be protruded or retracted, and retained 
in the desired position by the revolving cams; 
and the invention also consists in a chair pro 
vided with a lever and coiled spring, in combina 
tion with a lever and adjusting-screw, whereby 
the spring may be adjusted to the required de 
gree of tension in tilting the seat of the chair; 
and the invention further consists in a chair 
with a tilting seat constructed with a slotted 
lever secured to the spider of the chair by 
means of a slot and pin, in combination with 
a coiled spring, connecting one end of the slot 
ted lever to a bell-crank lever pivoted to the 
front arm of the spider, and a spring between 
the front of the seat-frame and the end of said 
front arm of the spider. 
In the accompanying sheet of drawings, 
Figure 1 is a side view of my chair partly in 
section, and Fig. 2 a front view of same. 
Similar letters of reference indicatelike parts 
in the two figures. 
This invention relates more particularly to 
chairs designed to support the back of the oc 
cupant when using the sewing-machine or when 
otherwise engaged. 
To this end the back A of the chair is pro 
vided with an adjustable panel, B, This panel 
has secured to two of its edges plates C C by 
pivots b b, as is shown in Fig. 2. These plates 
are pivoted to the back posts, D, at c c, as is 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Fitted to these back 
posts, and within suitable bearings, is a shaft, 
E, onto which are fixed cams F, which cams 
are placed between the back posts, D, and the 
plates or arms C. These cams are each made 
with a scroll cam-slot, d, and into these slots 
enterpins f, which are fastened to the plates 
or arms C. 
Since it may be desirable to not only have 
the back-panel of the back adjustable, but that 
the seat of the chair may tilt to afford comfort 
and support to the occupant, the seat of the 
chair is pivoted to a spider, G, and to the cen 
ter of the spider is likewise pivoted, at h, a 
lever, H, having a slot, e, formed therein. The 
rear end of this lever H supports the lander 
part of the rear of the seat-frame, and the other 
end of this lever has secured to it a spiral 
spring, I, which spring is also secured to a 
bell-crank lever, J., pivoted in the fore-arm, g, 
of the spider. This bell-crank lever has fitted 
to it an adjusting screw, K, which, at its point, 
bears against the under side of the end of the 
fore-arm g of the spider. In the upper portion 
of this end of the fore-arm g is placed a spring, 
E, against which the front of the seat-frame 
bears. 
Having now described the construction of 
my chair, its operation is as follows: The oc 
cupant of the chair, when leaning forward to 
operate a sewing-machine or Work at a table, 
necessarily inclines the back from the back of 
the chair and leaves it without support. That 
the back of the occupant may, when in this 
position, be supported, the shaft E is turned 
by the wheel m, or by any convenient means, 
and the cams F are caused to turn, and as the 
cams turn the scroll cam-slots d, by acting On 
the pins f, force out the upper end of the plates 
or arms C from the back posts, D, and With 
them the back-panel B, which, being secured 
to the upper ends of the plates or arms C by 
the pivots b, causes the panel to assume a po 
sition parallel to the back posts. The panel, 
being in this way protruded, affords a support 
for the back of the occupant When inclined 
from the back of the chair, as before stated, 
and the panel B may be protruded to a greater 
or less extentor be retracted between the back 
posts, forming an ordinary back, as circum 
stances may require, and in whatever position 
the panel is it remains fixed and offers a firin 
support, and being pivoted, as before described, 
it will yield somewhat to the back of the Occu 
pant of the chair, 
In tilting the seat backward the seat-frame 
 
2 
217,5S4 
bears down the end of the lever Hand against 
the resistance of the coiled spring I, thereby 
preventing its too sudden tilting, the tension 
of the spring keeping the rear end of the lever 
Halways in contact with the rear part of the 
seat-frame. By providing the lever H with a 
slot, e, the chair is enabled to have a forward 
tilting motion on its pivots, for the reason that 
as the chair is tilted forward, the under part 
of the seat, coming in contact with the end of 
the lever H, forces the lever down (the slot e 
acting as a guide) until the upper end of the 
slot comes in contact with the pivot h. This 
movement of the lever permits the chair to 
move forward on its pivots. If it were not for 
the slot e it is clear that the ends of the lever 
would be an obstacle to this forward tilting of 
the chair. The force of the recovery of the 
coiled spring I facilitates the forward tilting; 
and since the tendency of this coiled spring is 
to tilt the seat forward suddenly, the spring L 
in the upper part of the end of the fore-arm g 
receives and cushions the front of the seat 
frame. 
The degree of tension or force to be exerted 
by the coiled spring I may be regulated by the 
set-screw K. by the screwing or unscrewing of 
which this coiled spring is rendered more or 
less yielding through the operation of the bell 
crank lever, J. 
The chair may be made to tilt without the 
slot e formed in the lever H, in which case the 
chair could only tilt backward and not incline 
forward from a horizontal position, and the 
spring Lunder the front of the seat-frame could 
be dispensed with. The seat-frame is pivoted 
at its sides to the transverse barl of the spider, 
and the spider may or may not be provided 
with an elevating and swiveled screw, M, sup 
ported by a pedestal, N. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A chair with all adjustable back-panel, 
in combination with revolving cams F F, shaft 
E, and plates or arms C C, having pins 
fin 
serted therein and engaging with the cams F 
F, whereby the back-panel is protruded and 
retracted, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
2. In a tilting chair, the fore-arm g of the 
spider G, having affixed to it a bell-crank lever, 
J, in combination with a lever, H, coiled spring 
I, and adjusting-screw K, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
3. In a tilting chair, a lever, H, having a 
slot, e, formed therein and a pin, h, through 
the slot, in combination with a coiled Spring, 
I, a bell-crank lever, J, an adjusting-screw, K, 
and a spring, L, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
FRANKLIN CEHICHESTER, 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. HoRWITZ, 
P. T. GRAVES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217684.txt	Process and Apparatus for the Manufacture of Salt, 
W. W. ELMER, 
No. 217,684. 
Patented July 22, 1879. 
 
Azzey Z. 
2.7%. 
. 
Az Z'ezzoz. 
. A. 
42-??% - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. ELMER, OF BAY CITY, MICHIGAN. 
IMPROVEMENT IN PROCESSES AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF SALT, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 217,6S4, dated July 22, 1879; application filed 
December 5, 1878. 
To all chom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM W. ELMER, 
of Bay City, Bay county, Michigan, have in 
vented an improvement in Process and Ap 
paratus for the Manufacture of Salt from 
Liquid Brine, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
In the manufacture of salt from brine by 
the steam process, the brine is heated by steam 
pipes in the bottom of the grainers to a tem 
perature below the boiling-point. As the brine 
evaporates, the salt forms in very fine grains 
or crystals on the surface, and if allowed to 
remain there the grains will gradually increase 
in size by accretion until they become quite 
large, and sink of their own weight. To pre 
cipitate the grains of salt before they become 
too large for useful purposes, butter and other 
animal greases have been thrown upon the 
surface of the brine; but by this method the 
fineness of the salt cannot be certainly con 
trolled, and the grains are not of uniform size, 
since the brine is continually circulating, on 
account of the unequal temperature which 
unavoidably occurs at the opposite ends of the 
grainer, and the butter or other grease follow 
ing the currents is drawn away from some 
parts, leaving the surface of the brine clear. 
For economical purposes manufacturers have 
been in the habit of purchasing the cheap ran 
cid butter and greases unfit for ordinary 
uses and applying them as above described. 
These greases floating upon the surface of the 
brine are absorbed by the crystals in their 
formation, rendering the salt to a certain ex 
tent unfit for human consumption. 
The object of my invention, therefore, is to 
control with absolute certainty the size of the 
crystals desired, and to produce a pure salt by 
rendering it unnecessary to use impure or ex 
traneous materials. This I accomplish by 
blowing upon the surface of the brine while 
undergoing the process of evaporation an in 
termittent blast of air at regular predeter 
mined intervals, so as to agitate the brine and 
to precipitate the grains of salt when they have 
reached the desired proportions. It is not in 
tended that these intermittent currents shall 
N assist the process of evaporation, as this is 
done by heat applied in another way. It is de 
sirable that the air should be of such a tem 
perature as not to chill the surface of the brine, 
as this would retard the evaporation. The per 
forated pipes through which the currents are 
forced being exposed at all times to the heat 
arising from the brine, or immersed in the 
same, will warm the air sufficiently for the 
purpose, the air being of the temperature of 
the surrounding atmosphere when passing 
through the air-pump, or this air may be heated 
in any suitable manner before passing to the 
perforated pipes; or the air can be cooled, which 
cold air, although it would retard slightly the 
evaporation, would chill the crystals and in 
crease their specific gravity, and thereby assist 
the precipitation. 
The first formation of the crystals produces 
grains as fine as flour, and these, if allowed to 
rest upon the surface of the brine, enlarge and 
become, by additional formations attaching to 
them, larger in proportion to the time they are 
permitted to remain. Consequently a continu 
ots disturbance of the surface by a continu 
ous blast or current of air will precipitate 
these fine points as fast as formed, resulting 
in a Salt so fine as to be useless, as it could not 
be handled, because it would absorb moisture 
from the brine before removal from the grainer, 
and from the atmosphere after removal, mak 
ing the salt soggy or wet, and consequently 
with little or no marketable value. Therefore 
there must be an interval of time between the 
blasts, and the length of these intervals will 
regulate the fineness of the salt, the rapidity 
of the evaporation being taken into consider 
ation. For instance, at the usual heat for 
evaporation by the steam process, the blasts 
should be about from one to one and a half 
minutes apart to produce a fine or table salt; 
for barrel or dairy salt, about two and a half 
minutes apart, and for packer's salt the inter 
vals should belonger; but the necessary length 
of the intervals can be easily determined, and 
must depend, as before stated, somewhat upon 
the temperature of the brine and the rapidity 
of the evaporation. 
While I prefer to direct the blast of air upon 
the surface of the brine, since a better effect is 
obtained, and the air-pipes, being above the 
brine, cannot have their openings clogged by 
the crystallization of the salt thereon, still I 
have also designed to charge the air intermits 
- 
2 
. 
2,6S4 
tently into the brine, and to produce the agita 
tion in that manner alone, or by the combined 
action of the surface-blasts and submerged 
pipes. 
My invention consists in the process or 
method of controlling the crystallization of the 
brine to produce a uniform size of the grains 
of salt, consisting in agitating the brine by 
means of intermittent blasts of air; and, fur 
ther, in the apparatus for carrying out this 
process, which apparatus will be now explained 
to enable others skilled in the art to practice 
and use my invention. 
In the accompanying drawing, which forms 
a part of this specification, a pan or graining 
vat provided with steam-pipes, both of the 
ordinary construction, is shown with a portion 
of the side broken out. 
A represents the pan or graining - vat, and 
B the steam-pipes as usually employed. C is 
a steam-cylinder, and D an air-pump, and E 
a piston-rod passing through the steam and 
air cylinders, and giving like motion to pis 
tons therein contained. Secured to the piston 
rod between the two cylinders is a spring 
pawl, F, which engages with the teeth of the 
ratchet-wheel G, and at each forward stroke of 
the piston-rod partially rotates said wheel. 
Said wheel is provided with a cam, H, rigidly se 
cured thereto, which at each revolution of the 
ratchet-wheel engages with the pivoted bell 
crank I, the other arm of which is pivoted to 
the connecting-rod J, which actuates a recip 
rocating valve, K, in the air-pipe L, which 
leads from the pump. Upon the further pas 
sage of the calm it is released from its engage 
ment with the bell-crank, and the spring M 
retracts the other arm of the bell-crank and 
closes the valve. This air-pipe L, which is im 
perforated, connects with a series of branches, 
N, which are perforated in such manner as to 
discharge the air upon the surface of the brine 
in the pan or graining-Vat. It may also be 
connected with another pipe, O, or a series 
of them, as may be desired, which are im 
mersed in the brine and perforated to dis 
charge the air, preferably laterally upon each 
side. 
I do not desire to confine myself to the pre 
cise construction or means herein described 
for injecting and controlling the currents of 
air, as various mechanical devices may be em 
ployed whereby the air may be compressed 
and forcibly driven in intermittent currents 
with. such intervals between them as may be 
desired by different manufacturers or required 
by differences in the quality and density of 
the brine. 
I am aware that it has been proposed to 
agitate the brine intermittently by means of 
floats or bars floating upon or immersed in 
the brine and moved by hand at regular in 
tervals of time, and thereby to attain the re 
sult which I produce; but this plan is im 
practicable for many reasons, among which 
are, first, these floats or bars become loaded 
with salt, which, becoming detached in large 
pieces, injures the commercial value of the ar 
ticle by destroying the uniformity of the crys 
tals; second, the floats are in the way of the 
operators, who work in a steam-filled atmos 
phere of about 1000 Fahrenheit over brine of 
about 1900 Fahrenheit, and must work rap 
idly to remove the precipitated salt before it 
becomes saturated; third, as these floats act 
by scraping the surface, striking the crystals, 
and precipitating them by contact, such con 
tact causes the crystals to stick together in 
some degree and to the floats; and, further, 
in a short time these floats would become so 
loaded as to make them clumsy and impossible 
of use to produce the desired result even in an 
imperfect way; and I am also aware that a 
continuous blast of heated air has been blown 
into brine and over the surface thereof to 
evaporate the brine; but the evaporation in 
my process is accomplished not by the blasts of 
air, but by heat applied otherwise, as by steam 
pipes, my intermittent blast of air being used 
to precipitate the grains of salt and to control 
the granulation. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The process or method of controlling the 
crystallization of brine, consisting in agitating 
the brine while being evaporated, and precip 
itation of the grains of salt at regular inter 
vals by means of an intermittent blast of air 
forced into or upon the surface of the brine, 
substantially as described. 
2. In combination with an evaporating-pan 
or graining-vat, an air-pump and a system of 
perforated air-pipes, said pump being provided 
with an imperforated communicating pipe, 
which is provided with a valve or valves con 
nected with mechanism for intermittently 
controlling the passage of air, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
W. W. ELMER. 
Witnesses: 
B. CHAPMAN, 
F. L. WANDs. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217784.txt	J. W. EICHLER & H, HARTIG, 
Gas-Regulator, 
Patented July 22, 1879. 
2. 
2. 
 - 
YN 
No. 217,784. 
?A 
N 
 
ZB 
ZZ 
? ?? | < <) , 
M. PETERS, photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D. c. 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
???? 
? 
??? 
? 
?? 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS W. EICHLER AND HENRICH HARTIG, OF STUTTGART, GERMANY. 
MPROVEMENT IN GAS REGULATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. ea?, S4, dated July 22, 1879; application filed 
June 18, 1879; patented in Germany, November 6, 1878. 
To all chom, it may concern: 
The opposite end of the chamber is secured to 
Be it known that we, JULIUs W. EICHLER 
the distributing-pipe A' by means of a caout 
and HEINRICH HARTIG, of Stuttgart, Empire 
chouc or other gas-tight connection, B', simi 
of Germany, have invented certain new and 
la]r to tlhe ceo?n?heetion B. 
useful Improvements in Gas-Regulators, of 
To the end of the service-pipe A is secured 
which the following is a specification. 
by any suitable gas-tight connection a sac or 
This invention has for its object to produce 
bag of caoutchouc or other equivalent nate 
a simple, cheap, and effective gas-regulator, 
rial, tlhe connection in the present case con 
by means of which a regular flow of gas may 
sisting of a continuation of the said bag or 
be secured at the burners and a steady flame 
globe extending from the mouth of the same, 
produced, and by means of which any defect 
in the form of a tube, which is sprung over the 
in the distributing-pipes leading from the reg 
end of the service-pipe, and is held tightly 
ulator to the burner will be indicated, as more 
thereto by its elasticity. 
fully hereinafter specified. 
The sac or bag D, near its juncture with the 
To this end our invention consists of a tubu 
service - pipe A, is provided with a series of 
lar chamber having its walls composed wholly 
small apertures, G, the number and size of 
or partly of transparent material, and adapted 
which vary according to the number of burn 
to be interposed between the service-pipe and 
ers to be used. 
the distributing pipe or pipes leading to a gas 
When no gas is being used the sac or bag 
burner or series of burners, said chamber be 
ID shrinks, and the apertures in the same are 
ing secured to the ends of the service and dis 
closed, or nearly closed, by such shrinkage. 
tributing pipe by means of suitable gas-tight 
When gas is turned on at a burner the sac or 
connections, the end of the service-pipe pro 
bag is slightly opened, and the apertures ex 
jecting into the chamber, and having secured 
panded sufficiently to allow a proper amount 
to it a flexible sac or bag, capable of expand 
of gas to supply the burner. 
ing into a globular, or approximately globular, 
As the gas is turned on and lighted at addi 
form, and perforated near its juncture witli 
tional burners the sac or bag will be further 
the end of said service-pipe, as and for the 
expanded, and the apertures correspondingly 
purposes more fully hereinafter specified. 
enlarged, permitting an additional amount of 
In the accompanying drawings, Figurel rep 
gas to flow through corresponding to the ad 
resents a sectional view of our improved reg 
ditional number of burners in use. 
ulator secured to the ends of the service and 
The number of burners to be employed is 
distributing pipes, and Fig. 2 an elevation of 
so proportioned to the size and number of the 
the same. 
apertures in the sac or bag that said sac or 
The letter A indicates the eduction end of 
bag will never expand under a normal press 
the service-pipe, and At the induction end of 
tlhe distributing-pipe. 
lure of gas in the tube A and said globe or ball 
sufficiently to prevent a full supply of gas to 
The letter Findicates a chamber, of any suit 
the burners; but when such normal pressure 
ableform, being tubularin the present instance. 
is exceeded said sac or bag further expands 
Said chamber is constructed, preferably, of 
and contracts the annular space between its 
glass, in order that its interior may be readily 
outside and the interio) of the chamber IF in 
inspected; but it may be constructed of any 
ploper ratio to keep the pressure in the pipe 
other suitable material, and provided with 
A' at a uniform standard, and thus secure a 
suitable apertures, covered with transparent 
steady light. 
material, by which its interior may be inspect 
When all the cocks at the burner are closed, 
ed. The said chamber is contracted at both 
should there be any leak in the distributing 
ends, one of, which ends sets over and is se 
pipe or pipes at any point between the regul 
cured to the service-pipe Aby means of a caout 
lator and the burners, the bag will be expand 
chouc or other suitable connection, B, packing 
ed, and as it can be readily observed through 
rings C being interposed between the cham 
the transparent walls of the chamber A, such 
ber and service-pipe to insure a gas-tightjoint, leakage will be at once indicated, the appara 
. 
284 
tus thus Serving as a safety-indicator as well 
as a regulator. 
What we claim is 
1. A gas-regulator and safety-indlicator con 
sisting of a chamber having its walls composed 
Wholly or partially of transparent material, 
all dl adapted to be interposed between the ends 
of the service and distributing pipes, and con 
nected thereto by gas-tight connections, and 
a flexible and elastic sac or bag connected to 
the service-pipe, said sac or bag being perfo 
rated near its juncture with the service-tube, 
Whereby the gas may be supplied to the burner 
in uniform quantities and a steady flame pro 
duced, substantially as specified. 
2. A chamber having its walls composed 
wholly or partially of transparent material, 
and al?n expanding perforated sac or bag, in 
3o?mlbi?a tio?n Witl? ilhce sel'Wice a?nd distributing 
gas-pipes, to wiich it is secured by suitable 
gas-tight connections, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
J. W. ECHLER. 
HEINR. HARTIG, 
Witnesses: 
EDUARD RETTICHI, 
JULIUS GROSSMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217884.txt	C. H. LEONARD & W. B., HICK. . 
Lubricator for Journal-Boxes. 
No. 217,884. 
Patented July 29, 1879. 
  
WITNESSES: 
44%verer 
INVENTOR: 
BY ults cle 
ATTORNEYS. 
N, PETERs, photo-lithographER, WASHINGTON. C 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. LEONARD AND WILLIAM B. HICK, OF WILKESBARRE, PA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN LUBRICATORS FOR JOURNAL - BOXES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 217, SS4, dated July 29, 1879; application filed 
November 22, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, CHARLEs H. LEONARD 
and WILLIAM B. HICK, of Wilkesbarre, in the 
county of Luzerne and State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented a new and Improved Lubrica 
tor for Journal-Boxes, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to enable the 
lubricating material to be fed to the journal 
and bearings evenly and without waste. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the drawings, and then pointed 
out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming part 
of this specification, Figure 1 is a transverse 
section of a journal-box furnished with our im 
provement. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of 
the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
Referring to the drawings, the pillow-block 
of the journal-box is represented by A, the 
cap thereof is shown at B, and the bolts for 
Connecting the two parts together are repre 
sented by CC. The brasses are indicated by 
D D, and the journal by E, all of which, in 
the main, are of the old and well-known form 
of Construction. 
An oil-reservoir, F, is made on the top of 
the cap B, either by casting or fitting thereto. 
This reservoir is provided with a hinged lid, 
a. The bottom of the oil-reservoir is provided 
With a slot, b, which communicates with an 
other slot, c, immediately underneath, in the 
top brass, D. The slot c is a little longer than 
the one above, so that the parts ee of the bot 
tom, forming the ends of the slot b, project 
slightly over the slot c. 
G represents a roller, made of metal, wood, 
or other suitable material, longer than the slot 
b, which is placed in the slot 0 in the brass D, 
and fits easily therein. 
When the cap B is placed on the pillow 
block, the parts ee, projecting over the slote, 
confine the roller in the said slot, but do not 
interfere with the freedom of its movement. 
The roller G rests upon the journal E, and 
is, of course, frictionally rotated by it. 
Such is the description of the parts of our 
invention and their relation to each other. 
The manner of using it is as follows: 
The lubricating material is placed in the res 
ervoir F, whence it passes down through the 
slot b and comes in contact with the roller G, 
which partially obstructs its free passage to 
the bearing and journal; but as the journal 
rotates it rotates the roller, which takes up 
the lubricant in small but adequate quantities, 
and distributes it evenly on the surface of the 
journal. 
The fitting of the roller in the slot should 
depend largely upon the nature of the lubri 
cant it is intended to use. For example, if an 
oil is used, the roller should fit snugly in the 
slot, so as to prevent a too free passage of the 
oil; but if a compound is used more space 
must be left, and the extent of the space must 
depend upon the solidity of the compound. 
We are aware that it is not new to employ 
a ball on a car-axle journal in connection with 
a tube leading to a separate oil-cup; but this 
is inconvenient, expensive, and entirely inap 
plicable to revolving journal-boxes, as in min 
ing-car wheels. 
We are also aware that a wheel having 
shaft and journals with bearings has been used 
to distribute oil on a car-axle journal; but 
What we claim as new and of our inventio: 
S 
A lubricator for journals provided with a 
roller, G, arranged longitudinally in contact 
With the journal, inclosed in a top slot of bear 
ing D, and connected by a corresponding slot 
directly with the oil-reservoir F, as shown and 
described. 
CHARLES H. LEONARD. 
WM. BAYNES HICK. 
Witnesses: 
G. H. FISHER, 
D. S. BENNET, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US217984.txt	 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1 
W. E. BROCK. 
Building. 
No. 217,984. 
- 
Patented July 29, 1879. 
 
 
 
-- 
l 
AA 
 
73 
la S2E-E-G-S-9SC as 
er 
--- 
3. 
E 
 
  
al 
-2C2 
. 
i. 
He 
P-TE 
st 8 
H 
| 
i 
|H| 
3XXX XX3 
8xxx &x8 
XXX8& R&X& XXXXXX&R&W 
-sa-a-a-a-te-e- 
L 
s 
47 
Ae 
%3 
N 
S 
N 
& 
% 
A. 
 
 
N 
% 
M 
2 
% 
 
& 
c 
N 
% 
d 
Y 
Sa 
A. 
S 
722272esseny PSPS SaaSRS/Z7272/Z2277 
Ss 
SS 
SS 
N.PETERs, photo-uthoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM E. BROCK, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MPROVEMENT IN BUILDINGS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 217,9S4, dated July 29, 1879; application filed 
April 28, 1879. 
W 
posts, as shown in Figs. 2, 4, and 6 of the 
To all chom it may concern: 
drawings. Said side walls may be connected 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM E. BROCK, of 
with the posts by tongue-and-groove upright 
the city and State of New York, have invented 
new and useful Improvements, in Buildings, of 
joints b, and are secured to the posts and 
tightened up from time to time, as required, by 
which the following is a description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
screw-bolts D D, arranged to pass within and 
forming part of this specification. 
through the sides or side walls, thus prevent 
ing their exposure, and through each next ad 
The invention consists in the combination of 
jacent pair of posts, from the exterior of which 
sectionally-constructed side walls and inter 
said bolts are adjustable. In this way each 
vening polygonal-shaped posts, with which 
side wall is separately secured to the posts be 
said side walls connect, and to which said side 
Walls are secured by bolts passing through and 
tween which it is arranged, and each post all 
swers for more than one side wall, as clearly 
under cover of them, and in which certain of 
said posts are so arranged in relation to the 
shown in Figs. 2, 4, and 6. 
By the arrangement of the screw-bolts D, 
side Walls as to form a group of octagonal and 
which connect each pair of adjacent posts, 
rectangular apartments, said walls connecting 
through or within the side walls, and in inter 
with the posts on three different sides, thus 
secting line with the joints which the latter 
effectually bracing the posts, the bolts which 
make with the posts and with the joints which 
secure the side walls to the posts being ar 
the boards composing each wall-section form 
ranged to pass centrally in a transverse direc 
with one another, there is no tendency of said 
tion through the latter; and the invention fur 
joints to gape on either the inside or outside 
ther consists in a sectionally-constructed wall, 
faces of said walls, and a direct pull in line 
formed of a series of posts and panels connect. 
with the walls is obtained when tightening up 
ing the posts, and arranged out of line, but in 
the screw-bolts. This is not the case when 
parallel relation with each other, and bolts 
the bolts connecting the posts are arranged on 
passing through the posts and panels for se 
one side of but do not pass through the Walls. 
curing and tightening up said panels. 
Such arrangement, however, of the screw-bolts 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
in relation with the side walls and intervening 
represents a front elevation of a frame house 
posts is nothere separately claimed; but in a 
constructed in accordance with my invention. 
building having octagon-shaped apartments, 
Fig. 2 is a ground plan of the same. Fig. 3 is 
and in which certain of the intervening po 
a transverse sectional elevation, in part, of 
lygonal-shaped posts are arranged in relation 
said building; Fig. 4, a horizontal section, in 
with the side walls, so that the latter connect 
part, of the same; Fig. 5, a horizontal section 
with the posts on three different sides, as 
through one of the window-frames; Fig. 6, a 
more clearly shown in Fig. 6 of the drawings, 
transverse section, upon a larger scale, of one 
such arrangement of the bolts D causes the 
of the posts, having side walls connected there 
latter to intersect said posts C through their 
with, and bolts for securing and tightening up 
center, and said posts are braced on three of 
the latter. 
their sides, which effectually keeps them up 
The house represented in the accompanying 
right or prevents them from tilting to any one 
drawings is made up of a series of octagonal 
shaped rooms or apartments, A, having side 
side. 
E is the base of the house, secured by bolts 
walls, BB, separated by posts C C, into which 
(see Fig. 3) to any suitable foundation, and 
said side walls are mortised, or with which 
having the posts C secured to it by bolts c and 
they are otherwise suitably connected. These 
I knees d. 
posts and side walls are so constructed and 
Each upper apartment. A has a separate 
arranged in relation to each other that the 
roof composed of pyramidal-shaped sections 
posts, which are preferably of the same shape 
F, corresponding to the shape of the apart 
in their transverse section as the apartments, 
project beyond the faces of the side walls at ment, and secured by bolts and knees G to the 
the angular junctions of the latter with the posts C, as shown in Fig. 3. These sections, 
 
2 
27,9S4 
 
which may be bolted together, should have an fore been constructed with side walls cofit 
elastic or flexible packing introduced between posed of tongued and grooved sections hell 
them to provide for the yielding of said sec- together by bolts running through sail sec 
tions when tightening up the side walls. 
tions; likewise, that intersecting posts have 
The side walls, B, or certain of them, are been colnbilled with tongued and grooved wall 
stiffened externally by bracket-like strips or sections, and bolts for drawing up said sec 
braces H, which also serve to support a ve. tions been arranged to connect said posts ex 
randa outside of the building, as shown in Fig. ternally of the wall-sections. Such, therefore, 
3. Said walls are likewise stiffened internally I do not separately claim. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Ilet 
by bracket-like strips or braces I, disconnected 
from one another, as shown in Fig. 4, to pro-ters Patent, is 
vide for the tightening up of the side walls. 
1. The combination, with the sectionally 
These strips I also serve to support the floors, constructed side walls, of a series of polygo 
or floors and eeilings, of the apartments. 
nal-shaped posts supported by and arranged 
The windows of the hoise have their fraines to connect on three of their sides with said 
k (see Fig. 5) made hollow, and are fitted to side walls to form a group of octagonal and 
receive within them tongues l, formed on the rectangular apartments, as shown, and bolts 
sides or side walls, B, whereby separated for securing said side walls to said posts, ar 
spaces are provided for the weights which ranged to pass within the side walls and cen 
counterbalance the upper and lower sashes of trally in a transverse direction through the 
the windows. 
2. The sectionally - constructed wall, com 
constructed wall, which may connect certain posed of a series of posts, C C, panels M M, 
of the apartments, and which is formed of a connecting the posts, and arranged out of line 
series of posts, C C, panels M, arranged out but in parallel relation with each other, and 
of line but in parallel relation with each other, bolts D', arranged to pass within or through 
and screw-bolts I) passing through the posts said panels and posts, and adjustable from the 
and panels, and providing, by the irregular exterior of the latter, substantially as specified. 
W. E. BROCK. 
but parallel relation of the panels, for the sepa- 
rate tightening up of the latter, as in the case 
of the sides or side walls, B B, of the house. 
I am aware that frame buildings have be- 
In Figs, 2 and 4 is represented a sectionally- 
posts, substantially as specified. 
Witnesses: 
T. J. KEANE, 
FREDK. HAYNES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218084.txt	 
I, C, TERRY & G. H. SAUER, 
Car-Axle Box. 
No. 218,084. 
Patented July 29, 1879. 
 
  
  
7 
7 % 2. 2ZZZZZ2 
M 
-Z. 
272 are array : 
7z wea (azu 
N. PETERS, Photo-LithogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IRA. C. TERRY AND GEORGE H. SAUER, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CAR-AXLE BOXES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21s,0S4, dated July 29, 1879; application filed 
November 13, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, IRA. C. TERRY and 
GEORGE H. SAUER, both of the city of St. 
Louis, in the State of Missouri, have invented 
a certain new and useful Improvement in 
Journal-Boxes for Cars, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
Our improvement may be applied to ordi 
nary railway-cars or to street-railway cars. 
In our improvement the vertical bearing of 
the axle consists of a roller of greater diame 
ter than the axle, and vertically over the axle. 
The side bearings of the axle are against bear 
ing - pieces dovetailed into metallic troughs 
upon each side, containing hard grease that 
flows, when warmed, through orifices in the 
sides of the troughs and bearing-pieces of 
wood. 
The roller we prefer to make hollow, to con 
tain hard grease, which is in contact with the 
arbor-pin, on which it turns, and this pin 
passes through the grease-box, and is fitted 
with a nut at one or both ends to hold it in 
place, as shown. 
The drawings show our improvement as ap 
plied to street-railway-car axles. 
Figure 1 is an end view of the box with the 
cap removed. Fig. 2 is a section at line a ac, 
Fig. 5. Fig. 3 is an outside end view. Fig. 
4 is an inside end view. Fig. 5 is a side view. 
Fig. 6 is a section at a' a', Fig. 3. 
A is the grease-box, which may be of com 
mon construction. B is an ordinary axle, ex 
tending through the inner end, a, of the box A. 
The journal of the axle is shown at b, and upon 
this rests a roller, C, which is preferably made 
hollow, to contain some suitable lubricant. 
The roller C turns on an arbor, E, which 
passes through both the rear end, a, of the 
box A and the outer end or cap, a', and upon 
its ends are nutse, bearing against the out 
side of the box A. The end of the roller Chas 
a hole for the introduction of grease, stopped 
by a screw-plug, D. 
Upon the inner sides of the ends a and a 
are cast bosses F, through which the arbor E 
passes, and which form end bearings for the 
roller C. 
The roller C has long bearings or hubs c, 
between which the grease contained in the 
hollow grease - chamber C comes in contact 
with the arbor, so as to lubricate the bearing 
by gradually working outward along the arbor. 
We prefer to use in the roller a grease that 
is not liquid at ordinary temperature of the 
air, trusting to the slight heat generated by 
friction to liquefy sufficient for lubricating re 
quirements, and thus the quantity supplied is 
regulated according to the need, the heat in 
creasing with the friction. 
Upon the sides of the box A are grease 
cups or troughs G, whose sides form side 
bearing for the axle, to hold it in its position 
beneath the roller C. Each of these cup-bear 
ings G is preferably made with a removable 
bearing-piece, H, that is shown fitted to the 
cup with a dovetail-joint, so as to admit of 
removal and renewal as it becomes Worn 
away. We prefer to make this bearing-piece of 
brass or steel; but do not confine ourselves to 
these metals, as any metal would answer the 
purpose. 
Through the side of the cup G and the bear 
ing-piece H are grease-holes h, through which 
the grease runs from the cup to the journal of 
the axle. 
We prefer to use in the cups G the same 
description of grease used in the roller C, so 
that the supply will be equal to the require 
ments, as before described; but we make no 
claim to the use of hard grease for this pur 
pose, because it is not original with us. 
I is a packing-plate, fitting the axle and 
occupying a recess in the inner Wall, a, of the 
box, to exclude the dust from the interior of 
the box. We do not claim to be the inventors 
of the plate I in this connection. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The combination of axle B, a bearing 
roller, C, vertically above it, and side bear 
ings, G, with recesses to contain grease, and 
oil-holes h, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. The combination, with axle B, of the 
 
 
 
bearing roller C, resting directly on top of side bearings, G, having cavities, to contain 
said axle, and having in its interior the close-grease, and holes it, for the outflow of grease 
ended hollow chamber C, for the reception of to the axle journal. 
the lubricating material, hubs or hearings c, 
and the arbor E, passing through said cham- 
ber in contact with the lubricating material, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the axle B, of the 
IRA. C., TERRY. 
GEO. H. SAUER, 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. KNIGHT, 
C. W. H. BROWN, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218184.txt	J. KING 
Wood-Working Tools. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 218, 184. 
Patented Aug. 5, 1879. 
zz. 
G1 E 
 
64.- 
(2.a?, 7- 
INVENTOR 
Cf2-2 
a 2. ATTORNEYS 
J. KING. 
Wood-Working Tools, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 28. 184. 
Patented Aug. 5, 1879. 
se 
 
WITNESSES 
(f6 7. 2, 3.C.S.C. 
NVENTOR 
N.Peters, Photo-LithogRAPHER, washington, DC 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JESSE KING, OF OSWEGO, NEW YORK. 
MPROVEMENT IN WOOD-WORKING TOOLS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21S,154, dated August 5, 1879; application filed 
June 27, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JESSE KING, of Oswe 
go, in the county of Oswego and State of 
New York, have invented a new and improved 
method of making self-sharpening cutting 
tools or edges, such as mower and reaper 
teeth, saw-teeth, planer-knives, chisels, &c.; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which this invention pertains to make 
and use it, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to edged tools, such 
as saw-teeth, planer-knives, chisels, &c.; and 
it consists in such an implement having its 
cutting-edge formed in the manner hereinafter 
specified. 
In the drawings, Figures 1, 2, and 3 repre 
Sent a removable saw-tooth in side and edge 
elevations. Fig. 4 shows a chisel, by which 
my said invention may be explained. 
Beretofore there have been, to my knowl 
edge, but three ordinary ways of making 
edged implements-one by forming them of 
all steel or equivalent substance; another by 
making them first of, say, soft iron, and then 
converting the edge end into steel. Such a 
process is described in United States Patent 
No. 82,607, granted September 29, 1868, to F. 
C. Curie. The third method consisted in 
originally forming the tool from soft iron, and 
then case-hardening its entire outside crust or 
surface. 
The difficulties and objections frequently 
attending the use of tools made after these 
methods are briefly these: When made of 
Solid steel, in order to be kept sharp frequent 
grinding is required; and with many imple 
ments it is necessary to draw the temper, 
then sharpen, and then retemper. This, espe 
cially in unskilled hands, is attended with 
great risk to the implement, and it is always 
laborious and troublesome. 
In the second case, when the tool is made 
of part steel and part iron, these same objec 
tions are met; and in the third instance, 
where the tool is simply case-hardened, it is 
worthless until re-case-hardened, when the 
hard shell is worn through. 
Now, my invention seeks not only to obvi 
ate these difficulties and objections, but I 
also produce an implement cheap of construc 
tion and self-sharpening. . 
I form the tool originally of soft iron, and 
When it is properly shaped I harden only one 
O the surfaces that terminate in the cutting 
eClge. 
As there are many known ways of convert 
ing soft iron into steel, or into a tough, hard 
condition equivalent to steel, so far as edged 
tools are concerned, I do not limit myself to 
any definite process for hardening this single 
surface of my implements, as above referred 
to. Such a method as set forth in United 
States Patent No. 65,892, granted June 18, 
1867, to Wm. G. Esser, would probably serve 
a useful purpose in this respect. 
To more particularly explain my invention, 
I will refer to Fig. 4 of the drawings. Here 
is shown a chisel, with its handle W and body 
Y. The body Y is originally formed from 
Soft iron. I now harden only the surface Z, 
which terminates in the cutting-edge Z, leav 
ing the body Y and the sides and opposite 
face X soft iron. The face Z now consists of 
a very thin and very tough, hard film of only 
the thickness of a cutting-edge, so that when 
beveled at the end, as shown, the end ex 
posure of this hard film Z will constitute a 
cutting-edge. 
Now, as the tool is used the soft iron will 
Wear away, and the upper film, Z, will always 
afford a sufficient edge, and thus the tool is 
self-sharpening. 
It is apparent that none of the former three 
methods that I have mentioned could produce 
the results attained by my invention. I there 
fore do not lay any claim to any edged tool 
made of all steel, or one having both sides of 
its cutting-edge of steel or equivalently hard 
metal, nor do I claim either of the inventions 
set forth in the said Curie or Esser patents; 
but 
What I do claim is 
An edged tool having only one surface of 
its body, which terminates in the cutting 
edge, converted into steel, or equivalently 
hard, tough metal, to a depth corresponding 
to the thickness of a cutting-edge, the entire 
remaining surfaces and body of said toolbe 
ing of soft iron, substantially as and for the 
purpose shown. 
 
JESSE KING. 
Witnesses: 
B. B. BURT, 
C. C. WENTWORTH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218284.txt	S. L. LEACH & A. W. GRIFFIN 
Relishing-Machine. 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 218,284. 
Patented Aug. 5, 1879. 
 
 
  
  
 
- - 
- 
 
 
  
- CES I 
 
Il 
III. 
2 
e 
a 
 
72. 
62. 
v?. 
Z 
CU 
C/Z 
% 
C. 
C/ 
11/zza2-esses. 
w 
wa- 
We/7-64 
A12 
* 
N 
Z-2z/622 ZoZ3. 
O. A 64 
9 O, sal 
Aov 
S. L. LEACH & A. W. GRIFFIN 
Relishing-Machine. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 218,284. 
Patented Aug. 5, 1879. 
 
z/2 vesses: 
l//z/2 vesses 
62. 
/22/622 Zozs. 
eye?sa. A 
OL 74- %2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMEON L. LEACH AND ALBERT W. GRIFFIN, OF CORRY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MPROVEMENT IN RELSHING MACH NES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21S,2S4, dated August 5, 1879; application filed 
June 3, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, SIMEONL. LEACH and 
ALBERT W. GRIFFIN, of Corry, in the county 
of Erie and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Relishing-Machines; and we do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it per 
tains to make and use it, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
relishing-machines, and is intended more es 
pecially for use upon sashes, blinds, and doors; 
and it consists in the arrangement and com 
bination of parts, that will be more fully de 
scribed hereinafter. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of our invention. 
Fig. 2 is an end elevation, and Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation, of the same. 
a represents a suitable frame, in the lower 
portion of which is journaled the driving 
drum or pulley c, from which run the belts 
which are to drive the different operating 
parts. Journaled in the upper part of this 
frame a are three separate and independent 
shafts, each one being run by its own belt, 
Upon the shaft d are secured the two saws 
e, which are set obliquely, and at any desired 
angle that may be preferred, for the purpose 
of cutting out relishes in the tenons of doors 
and blinds, or any kind of work where a por 
tion of the tenon requires to be cut away. 
These saws will be placed a distance apart 
proportioned to the angle at which they are 
set, and the width of the tenon desired, and 
may be used to relish both sides of the tenon 
at once; or either saw may be used on one 
side only of the tenon. 
In front of these two wabbling saws is 
placed a table, f, upon which there is a stop, 
g, and upon this table is placed the piece that 
is to be relished, and pushed up to the saws, 
when the whole work is finished at a single 
operation. 
All that has to be done to relish a door-rail 
is simply to drive it against the stop g, and 
the saws will cut away the portions to be re 
moved. 
In order to form the tenons for sashes, the 
piece is pushed up to the saw i on the shaft 
n, and the tenon is sawed to the proper Width. 
The operator then puts his foot upon the treadle 
o, and, by means of the cranked lever r, forces 
the shafts, which has the bitt on its inner 
end, up against the piece being sawed, and 
the bit cuts away that portion of the tenon 
desired to be removed. This bit is square on the 
end, as shown, so as to cut the tenon squarely 
off, instead of merely boring a hole in it. As 
soon as the pressure is removed from the 
treadle, the spring moves the shaft back to 
the first portion at once. 
As the thickness of the material used varies 
considerably, the table w, around the saw i, 
is hinged at ac, and provided with means, y, at 
the other end for raising and lowering the free 
end of the table up and down, as required. 
We are aware that two angling saWS Se 
cured eccentrically to their shaft, and placed 
in close relation to each other, for the pur 
pose of rounding off the edges of fellies, are 
not new, and this we disclaim. Our saws are 
placed far enough apart to cut two relishes at 
the same time, or only one, and are secured 
centrally upon their shaft. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim 
1. The combination of the saw i on the shaft 
in with the movable shafts s, provided with a 
bit, t, and a treadle or other means of moving 
the shaft, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the saw i, bit, on the 
shafts, and table c, movable at one end, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing We 
have hereunto set our hands. 
SIMEON II, LEACH. 
ALBERT W. GRIFFIN. 
Witnesses: 
M. CAMERON, 
J. B. GEER. 
I 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218384.txt	C. & W. KIRKPATRICK. 
Coffee-P0t. 
No. 218,384. 
Patented Aug 12, 1879. 
 
 
 0.6az-ece, 
Z/- 73-4-2-4-4, 
744 
PETERs, Photo-UTHOGRAPHER, washington, D.c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
CORNWALL KIRKPATRICK AND WALLACE KIRKPATRICK, OF ANNA, ILL. 
IMPROVEMENT IN COFFEE - POTS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2S,3S4, dated August 12, 1879; application filed 
June 7, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CORNWALL KIRKPAT 
RICK and WALLACE KIRKPATRICK, of Anna, 
in the county of Union and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Coffee-Pots; and we do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use it, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
coffee-pots having vertical wire sieves ar 
ranged to divide them into two portions. 
The said invention consists in providing 
such coffee-pots with vertical grooves formed 
in the metal of the pots, and extending from 
the tops to the bottoms thereof, so as to form 
guides for said sieves and brace and hold the 
same in vertical position, as hereinafter set 
forth. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of our inven 
tion, and Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. 
a represents a coffee-pot of any suitable con 
struction, shape, or size. Down the center of 
its two opposite sides are made the grooves, 
guides, or ways c, in which is slid the strainer 
d. This strainer may consist of a wire frame, 
and be covered over with some flexible mate 
rial, as here shown, or may be made entirely 
of metal, as may be preferred, and serves to 
divide the pot into two halves or portions. 
In that half or portion which is opposite to 
and divided from the spout by this strainer 
is placed the ground coffee. 
When the Water is poured in the pot it cir 
culates freely through the sieve, and extracts 
the strength of the coffee as freely as though 
no sieve or strainer was used. The grounds 
are all kept on one side of the pot, and when 
the coffee is being poured out no grounds can 
escape with it. 
When it is desired to wash the pot it is only 
necessary to pull the strainer out and the pot 
is left perfectly clear, and, no matter how far 
the pot may be turned over in pouring out the 
coffee, there is no danger of the grounds com 
ing out at the top. As the strainer consists 
of only a wire frame and a cloth stretched 
over it, and as the grooves or guides are formed 
in the sides of the pot, it is quite evident that 
the addition of the screen will cost but a trifle. 
We are aware that coffee-pots have been pro 
vided with strainers, and with a guide-flange 
or band at the top of the coffee-pot on the in 
side thereof, said band being recessed to re 
ceive the vertical strainer and guide and brace 
the upper part thereof, and such construction 
We disclaim. 
What we claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The combination, with removable vertical 
strainer d, of coffee-pot a, formed with vertical 
grooves or guideways d c, arranged opposite 
to one another, and extending from the top to 
the bottom of the coffee-pot, so as to brace all 
parts of the strainer and hold it in vertical 
position, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing We 
have hereunto set our hands this 2d day of 
June, 1879. 
CORNWALI KIRKPATRICK. 
WALIACE KIRKPATRICK. 
Witnesses: 
C. E. KIRKPATRICK, 
FRANK KIRKPATRICK, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218484.txt	G. W. CARROLL. 
Horn-Tip for Cattle. 
No. 218,484. 
Patented Aug. 12, 1879. 
WITNESSES: 
C2, .42e2ear- 
zer 
 
N, PETERS, Photo-ITHogRAFER, WASHINGTON, DC. 
-- 
INVENTOR: 
of a 6% 
BY -(else's 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. CARROLL OF UNION CITY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN HORN TIPS FOR CATTLE. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21S,4S4, dated August 12, 1879; application filed 
March 6, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE WHITFIELD 
CARROLL, of Union City, in the county of 
Erie and State of Pennsylvania, have invented 
a new and Improved Horn-Tip for Cattle, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to enable the 
tips to be secured to the horns without liabil 
ity of breaking or otherwise injuring them; 
and it consists in providing wooden tips in 
cased in metal sleeves, attached to chains on 
which are elastic rings adapted to fit the ta 
pering horns and yield to their growth, and 
which are connected together between the 
horns by a loop, whereby the chains can be 
taken up or shortened at pleasure, to adapt 
them to different cattle. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents the head and horns of an animal 
With my improved tip applied to the horns, 
and Fig. 2 shows another arrangement of the 
tips. 
Referring to the drawings, A A are the 
conical wooden tips, having conical sockets a, 
in which the points of the horns are placed. 
These wooden tips are confined in ferrules or 
sleeves b, and to the sleeves are attached, on 
opposite sides, the short chains c c, which are 
attached to a succession of elastic rings, d, by 
a chain, e, with a free end extending beyond 
the last ring of the series. 
To the end of one of the chains is attached 
a hook, f, with a long backwardly-extending 
arm, g, which engages a spring-ring, h, on the 
same chain, to which the hook is attached. 
The rings d are elastic, so as to conform to 
the taper of the horn, and also to enable them 
to yield as the horns grow, and thus avoid in 
juring them. 
The device is applied as follows: The rings 
are slipped over the horns, the first one down 
to the base, and the others at the intervals 
allowed by the chain until all are on, and then 
the tips are placed over the points of the 
horns. The free ends of the chains are then 
drawn together between the horns and secured 
by the hook.f. The tips being thus secured 
to the horns, there is no necessity for their 
being made very tight; hence there is no lia 
bility of injury occuring to the horns, as is 
usual where screw or riveted tips are used, 
and as large a tip may be adjusted as desired. 
So, too, the spring or elastic rings dyield as 
the horns grow, and thus avoidinjuring them. 
When the tips are applied to the animal the 
hook may be made to take up the free end of 
the chain opposite at any point by slipping it 
through the links and catching it under the 
ring h. 
The modification shown in Fig. 2 consists of 
a wooden bar, B, with metal ferrules C C on 
the ends, from which chains ff descend and 
are joined to rings g g. Holes are made 
through the metal ferrules and into the wooden 
bar, to receive the tips of the horns, as clearly 
shown by the dotted lines, and the ends of 
the chain are fastened together between the 
horns by a screw-coupling, D. 
Having thus described my invention, Iclaim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
An improvement in horn-tips for cattle con 
sisting of the wooden tips A, inclosing sleeves 
or ferrules b, chains c, elastic rings d, and 
chain e, combined, arranged, and adapted to 
be confined on the horns by the hook f, in the 
manner substantially as described. 
GEORGE WEITFIELD CAREROLL. 
Witnesses: 
L. G. BARNES, 
JENNLE. B. CARROLL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218584.txt	Construction Of Domes or Crowns of Gas and other 
W. SMITH, 
Furma c es. 
 
  
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM SMITH, OF PITTSIBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO PAMELA 
SMITH, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CONSTRUCTION OF DOMES OR CROWNS OF GAS AND OTHER FURNACES, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21S,5S4, dated August 12, 1879; application filed 
December 5, 1878, 
? 
in each. 
To all cho? ?? ??? ???cer?: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM SMITH, of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in the Construction 
of Furnace Domes or Crowns for the Manu 
ifacture of Gas, &c.; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription thereof, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of 
this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of a gas-pro 
ducing furnace embodying my invention; and 
Fig. 2 is a view of a portion of the cap or crown 
of the same. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
My invention has for its object the improve 
ment of the construction of walls and caps of 
furnaces, and especially of the class shown in 
Letters Patent No. 197,420, granted to me on 
November 20, 1877, for apparatus for the manu 
facture of gas; and it consists in forming the 
dome or crown of furnaces of metal protected 
by refractory material, said refractory material 
being applied to the metal plates in a plastic 
condition and allowed to harden thereon, and 
being bound thereto by a series of pins or pro 
jections and a net-work of wire, whereby an 
effective, durable, and inexpensive crown or 
cap is obtained. 
Heretofore, in the construction of this class 
of furnaces, the dome or crown has commonly 
been constructed either of metallic plates un 
protected from the direct action of the heat, 
and consequently liable to crack or rapidly 
burn out, or from tile, which it required con 
siderable labor and skill to produce and prop 
erly set so as to render the crown durable. 
It is well known that a metal cap or crown 
for furnaces, especially small furnaces, can be 
more readily produced and applied tham any 
other, and would therefore be preferable to 
others if it could be rendered durable with 
little expense. 
The object, therefore, of the present inven 
tion is to overcome the existing objections to 
metallic crowns or caps for furnaces. 
I will now proceed to describe my invention, 
so that others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains may apply the Salme. 
In the drawings, Fig. 1 shows this invention 
applied to one of my gas-furnaces, and I re 
mark that in this furnace my improvement is 
chiefly useful in the construction of the dome 
or cap a, a portion of which appears detached 
in Fig. 2. In this view, in order to clearly il 
lustrate the construction, I show at b a sec 
tion with the projections and wires d, and at 
b'a section lined with the refractory material e. 
The projections care short and headed. They 
may be made with the plate by casting, or 
may be inserted and the ends upset, as in case 
of a rivet, or in any other suitable or conven 
ient manner. 
The refractory material must necessarily be 
plastic when applied, and must be plastered 
in and around the projections and, wires, so 
that they will be thoroughly embedded in or 
surrounded thereby. In making this plastic, 
I use, by preference, equal parts of sand, fire 
clay, and asbestus mixed with Water. I can, 
however, use simply fire-clay and sand, or as 
bestus and sand, or a composition of equal 
merit made of other and different ingredients 
in various proportions; but this I do not wish 
to be limited in, as all that I require is a plas 
tic made of refractory materials which will 
harden properly by heat on the plate, and 
many such plastics are well known and in use. 
I prefer to add salt to the composition, so that 
the lining will be glazed externally by the 
heat. This gives it increased refractory power 
and durability. 
As remarked, the use of the wires extending 
through and embedded in the lining makes it 
more secure than the use of the projections 
alone. So, also, the use of heads on the pro 
jections is better than the use of plain un 
headed projections or pins. 
A furnace constructed of metallic plates so 
lined is superior to the unlined furnaces in 
that the walls retain and confine to the fur 
nace much of the heat which formerly passed 
through them and was lost. This plate neces 
sitates the use of much less fuel. I have by 
actual experience found this saving in my gas 
furnace to be equal to one-half of the fuel. 
 
 
 
Moreover, it saves the metal plates from being 
lured out so soon. In all portable furnaces, it 
is of Very great advantage over ordinary tile 
linings, which are necessarily verythick, while 
iny lined plates are comparatively thin. 
Such 
linings cannot be put in in many places, and 
areliable to break, which is not the ease with 
with my improved plates. 
I am aware that metallic plates having a 
Covering of refractory material bound thereto 
by pins, pegs, or projections have heretofore 
been employed in the formation of furnace 
doors, &c., and do not herein claim the same; 
but, 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
A crown, cap, or dome for gas and other fur. 
naces, the same consisting of a metallic plate 
or plates provided with pins having all inter. 
lacing of wire, and of a lining of refractory 
material, the pins and wire being embedded in 
the refractory material, and the whole.com 
bined substantially in the manner and for the 
purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I, the said WILLIAM 
SMITH, have hereunto set my hand. 
WILLIAM SMITH, 
Witnesses: 
T.B. KERR, 
A. C. JOHNSTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218684.txt	G. M. PHELPS. 
Magneto-Electric Speaking-Telephone, 
No. 218,684. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1879. 
  
 
 
 
 
N 
N 
 
 
2Y 
NEA 
  
ses S 
 
 
 
 
W 
 
1S 
- 
N 
NEN 
D3N as 
N 
N 
% 
2s2 
 
% 
WATWASSES 
% & Oates 
c6. 246. At 
9 
IWWEWTOR 
Geoye -27. Aze/or. 
, 
Aff 
Ssssea-v-wk a S-(5- 
if its Att tirel/s 
N. Peters, PHOTO-THogRAPasR, wASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE. M. PHELPS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, 
IMPROVEMENT IN MAGNETO-ELECTRIC SPEAKING-TELEPHONES, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21S,6S4, dated August 19, 1879; application filed 
June 4, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE MAYPHELPs, 
electrician, of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Mag 
neto-Electric Speaking-Telephones, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My present invention relates to that class of 
speaking - telephones adapted for operation 
either as transmitters or as receivers; and my 
improvement more especially relates to the 
shape of the permanent magnet, the method 
of combining it with the electro-magnet, case, 
diaphragm, and mouth-piece, and with the con. 
ducting-wires. 
The subject-matter claimed hereinafter spe 
cifically will be designated. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a vertical central section through 
my improved telephone on the line 11 of Fig. 
3. Fig. 2 represents a similar section at right 
angles thereto on the line 22 of Fig. 3, which 
latter figure represents a bottom or inverted. 
plan view of the apparatus with a portion of 
the permanent magnet broken away. 
The permanent steel magnet A is shown as 
made of a substantially horseshoe shape with 
one pole flattened and bent inward, so as to 
extend nearly across the open part of the 
horseshoe. This form is convenient for hand 
ling and for the attachment of the parts. 
An electro-magnet, B, of suitable well-known 
construction is mounted upon this inwardly 
bent pole of the permanent magnet, and pro 
vided with well-known means for adjusting it 
relatively to the diaphragm C, which is in 
closed within a case, D, provided with the 
usual mouth-piece or speaking-tube. 
The other pole of the magnet is perforated 
for the passage of the conducting - wires e, 
which are coated with insulating material, 
each wire being connected with the respective 
binding-post E. E. 
The casing is made of non-conducting ma 
terial, and it is desirable that the substance 
employed should be one inexpansible by vari 
ations of temperature. 
The operation of this apparatus being simi 
lar to that of other instruments of this class 
Will be well understood without further de 
scription. 
I claim as of my own invention 
1. The permanent magnet constructed sub 
stantially as hereinbefore set forth, of a horse 
shoe shape with one pole bent inwardly from 
the attachment of the electro-magnet, casing, 
and diaphragm, and with the other pole per 
forated for the passage of the conducting 
wires. 
2. The speaking-telephone herein described, 
consisting of the combination of the horse 
shoe-shaped permanent magnet With its in 
wardly-bent pole and the electro-magnet, case, 
diaphragm, and mouth-piece mounted on said 
ole. 
p In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name. 
GEORGE MAY PHELPS, 
Witnesses: 
ENOs M. BARTON, 
FRANKL. POPE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218784.txt	C. W. SHEPARD. 
Bale-Tie, 
No. 218,784. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1879. 
 
Wifesses; 
Zvezador; 
Aes vetozaey, 
N.Peters, Photo-uTHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, d. C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CEARLES W. SHEPARD, OF NEWTON, MASSACEUSETTS, 
IMPROVEMENT IN BALE-TIES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21s, 7 S4, dated August 19, 1879, application filed 
June 21, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs W. SHEPARD, 
of Newton, Middlesex county, Massachusetts, 
have invented a certain new and Improved 
Bale-Tie, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, Fig. 2 is a 
plan, and Fig. 3 is an edge view, of a bale-tie 
embodying my improvements. 
It is my object to obtain a simple, cheap, 
and strong bale-tie, to which the band can be 
applied readily, quickly, and without twisting 
or lateral bending, and which will not be so 
liable to become detached from the band, 
whether on or off the bale, as others hereto 
fore in use. 
The tie consists of an iron or steel plate of 
proper dimensions, which, at one end or side, 
is thickened or re-enforced in the usual way, as 
shown at a. It is also slotted horizontally at 
b, to form the upper and lower bars, cd for re 
ceiving the upper and lower band-loops. The 
lower bar, d, is separated at one end from the 
body of the tie by a vertical slot, e, which ex 
tends from the lower edge of the plate up into 
the oblong central slot, b. The said bar, at its 
free end and on its upper edge, is formed or 
provided with a projection, f, and is bent out 
Ward or to the front, as indicated plainly in 
Figs. 1 and 3, so that the lower band-loop can 
be set in place over the end of the bar by a lat 
- 
2. 
 
eral movement without requiring to be twisted 
or laterally bent. 
The projection f forms a stop, which pre 
vents the loop from working off from the bar 
when once in place on the bale. The vertical 
part g of the plate beyond the slots b and e 
forms a leg, which prevents the escape of the 
band and greatly reduces the liability of the 
tie becoming detached and separated from the 
band, whether the latter be on or off from the 
bale. 
I remark, in conclusion, that I do not claim 
any of the features of construction of the tie, 
separately considered; but 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The hereinbefore-described bale-tie, consist 
ing of a steel or iron plate horizontally slot 
ted to form upper and lower band-receiving 
bars, the lower bar being separated at one 
end from the body of the plate by a vertical 
slot, and outwardly bent, and provided with a 
terminal projection or stop, as and for the pur 
poses shown and specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 20th June, 1879, in the presence 
of two subscribing witnesses. 
CHARLEs W. SHEPARD. 
Witnesses: 
M. GEORGII, 
JAMES T. POWELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218884.txt	S. KEITH, 
Elastic Cushion for Millstones, 
No. 218,884. 
Patented Aug. 26, 1879, 
All Unit 
 
Witn 65 SeeS. 
77 C24447 
6, 7/0, 64.4// 
-- 
44ty. 
4.264,14. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SQUIRE KEITH, OF SILVER CREEK, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOli, OF ONE-HALF 
HIS RIGHT TO ALBERT H. Sir AULDING, OF SANIE PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN ELAST C CUSHONS FOR MILSTONES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21s, SS4, dated August 26, 1879; application filed 
May 23, 1879. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SQUIRE KEITH, of Sil 
ver Creek, in the county of Chautauqua and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Elastic Cushions 
for Millstones; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompallying drawings, and to lette's 
of reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
Figure i is a perspective view of an elastic 
cushion ol' bed for the stationary stole of a 
grinding-mill, and of the mechanism connected 
there with. IFig. 2 is an elevation of a portion 
of a foundation for the stone to l'est upon, the 
elastic tube Ol' cushion, and the bed-stole, the 
parts being in position for operation; and Fig. 
3 shows the same parts, with the addition of 
adjusting-screws and all adjustable plate for 
supporting the yielding tube or cushion, where 
by the face of the bed-stone may be adjusted 
or trammed to cause it to correspond with the 
face of the revolving stone or the position of 
the spindle upoll which it rests. 
This ill \elltion relates to an apparatus upon 
which the stationary stone of a grinding-mill 
is to be placed, its object being to provide a 
means whereby the stationary ol' bed stone 
may be inade to retain a proper relation to the 
revolving stone, even though said revolving 
stone may not be exactly balanced, or in case 
the unequal Wearing of any of the parts should 
produce a Wabbling motion thereof; and it con 
sists in combining, with the stationary or bed 
stone, an elastic tube or cushion, to be placed 
between the stationary stone of a grinding 
mill and its foundation, or between said stone 
and all adjustable plate supported by Such 
foundation, and filled with compressed air or 
other gaseous substance, so that ill the event 
of an undle amount of pressure being brought 
to bear upon any part of the stationary Stone 
by the imperfect working of the revolving stone 
said stationary one will be capable of yielding 
Ol' let)'eating to such an extent as not to cause 
any considerable additional pressure at the 
point ol' points where such pressure Would oth 
erwise be applied, by which means the stones 
are at all times maintained in their proper re 
lations to each othel; and it further consists 
in combining, with an elastic tube or cushion 
for supporting the stationary stone of a grind 
ing-mill, an air-pump Ol' other Suitable air or 
gas forcing device for supplying air or gas to 
said tube or cushion and for controlling the 
pressure within said tube or cushion, and in 
certain other combinations, as will be more 
. 
fully described hereinafter. 
It is an ascertained fact that Wilell the sta 
tionary stone of a mill for grinding grain, and 
especially those used for making flour, is made 
to l'est upon an unyielding foundation or Sup 
port it is liable to have a greater amount of 
pressure brought to bear upon parts of it than 
is applied to other portions at the same time, 
in consequence of a Wabbling motion of the 
revolving stone, due to an uneven balancing 
the 'eof, ol' in consequence of an unequal Wear 
ing of the revolving stone or its supporting 
parts; and it is also well known that under 
the circumstances last above recited it is in 
possible to make an even grade of flour, as the 
meal which happens to be between the points 
Where the greatest almount of pressure is 
brought to bear, or between the points where 
the Stones come in contact or the most nearly 
in contact, will be reduced to a condition of 
greater filleness than will other portions which 
are between points where less pressure is put 
upon the stationary stone. 
My improvement is designed to remedy the 
above-recited difficulty; and to this end, in ap 
provide any suitable 
plying it practically, 
foundation, A, for the stationary stone when 
it is the lower one of the two, as shown in Fig. 
2 of the drawings. Upon this foundation there 
is placed an elastic tube or cushion, B, of rub 
bel, leather, or other suitable and sufficiently 
Strong material to sustain the required press 
ure; or said cushion may rest upon an adjust 
able plate Supported upon leveling screws or 
Wedges arranged in a portion of the founda 
tion, as shown in Fig. 3, by which means the 
bed-stone may be brought into tram with the 
Spindle of the revolving stone and with the 
face thereof. This cushion may be made cylin 
dutical in for in in cross-section; or it may be of 
any other suitable shape, as, for instance, it 
lnay be oblong or it may be of such form as to 
21s,ss4 
s 
2 
extend inward nearly to the eye of the stone, 
and yet not be of proportionately greater ver 
tical depth than the one shown in the draw 
ings. Whatever the form of the cross-section 
this cushion or tube should be of a diameter 
not greater than that of the stationary stone, 
and should be so placed upon the foundation 
that the bed or stationary stone C may be made 
to rest thereon, the meal, as it is ground, be 
E. taken away by any of the well-known meth 
OOS. 
In order that this tube or cushion may be 
supplied with air or otherforms of gas, its ends 
are united by a T-shaped coupling, D, the di 
ameter of which is less than the vertical depth 
of the tube or cushion, in order that it may 
not prevent the retreating of the stone at the 
point where it is placed. The tube or cushion 
is supplied with nuts for connecting its ends 
to the T-piece, as shown in Fig. 1. 
For supplying the tube or cushion B with 
air or other form of gas, and maintaining the 
requisite pressure therein, a pump, E, or oth 
er suitable compressing device is provided. 
This device may be a single-acting air-pump, 
such as is shown, and be operated by hand, or 
it may be of any other of the well-known forms 
of air or gas compressors, and it may be driven 
by the same motor which drives the stones of 
the mill, or by a separate motor, as found most 
convenient. This pump or air-forcing device 
is supplied with the usual induction and educ 
tion valves E and E, and between the educ 
tion-valve E and the hose or pipe F, which 
leads the compressed air or gas to the tube or 
cushion B, there is placed a safety-valve, G, 
which is supplied with a weight, G', and with 
a lever, which may, if desirable, be graduated 
in such a manner as to indicate the pressure 
maintained within the tube or cushion B. The 
object had in view in providing this safety 
valve is to afford relief to the tube or cushion 
when the pressure is up to the required point, 
and thus prevent the possibility of bursting it, 
and this will be found of great utility when 
the compressing mechanismisdriven by power, 
as at such times the valve may be set to retain . 
within the pipe and the cushion just the re 
quired pressure, and thus any surplus that may, 
obtain in consequence of any increase in the 
speed of the motor will pass off without injury 
to any of the parts. 
For the purpose of still further indicating 
the pressure within the tube or cushion there 
is shown a pressure-gage, H, which is connect 
ed to the safety-valve below or within its point 
of discharge. By the use of a gage of this 
character the pressure is at all times indicated, 
and it may be found useful when the pressure 
is so low as not to raise the safety-valve. It 
is not, however, essential to the practical work 
ing of the other parts of the device. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In combination with the stationary bed 
stone of a grinding-mill, an elastic tube or cush 
ion in which air or other gaseous, substance. 
is maintained under pressure, for the purpose 
of supporting the stone, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination of a pump or equivalent 
air or gas compressing device, an elastic tube 
or cushion for supporting the stationary stone. 
of a grinding-mill, and an intermediate pipe 
or hose for conveying the compressed air or 
gas from the pump to the tube or cushion, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of the tube or cushion 
B, the pump E, connecting pipe or hose F, 
safety-valve G, and pressure-gage H, when 
constructed and operating substantially as . 
and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of the elastic: or yield 
ing tube, or cushion B with the pump E or 
other equivalent air-compressing device, the 
connecting pipe or hose F, stationary stone C, 
and a bed-plate for the support of said stone, 
all substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
SQUIRE KEITH. 
Witnesses: 
D. C. SwiFT, 
C. B. BRADLEY, 
FRANK C. DAWLEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US218984.txt	W. E. KELLY. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Vulcanizing-Chambers for Use in the Manufacture of 
Articles of India. Rubber. 
No. 218,984. 
Patented Aug. 26, 1879. 
N. PETERs, Photo-ITHoGRAPier, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
. 
Vulcanizing-Chambers for Use in the Manufacture of 
W. E. KELLY, 
Articles Of India Rubber, 
- 
No. 218,984. 
Patented Aug. 26, 1879. 
resser 
sale SSSSS 
aRS S is as:- 
y 
sys 
K 
2s 
E rR m 
s 
t 
2 s 
sa 
/2zesses: 
Azuerzazz 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
WILLIAM E. KELLY, OF NEW BRUNSWICK, NEW JERSEY. 
IMPROVEMENT IN VULCANIZING-CHAMBERS FOR USE IN THE MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES OF INDIA 
RUBBER, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 21s,9s4, dated August 26, 1879; application filed 
- 
June 25, 1879. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM E. KELLY, of 
New Brunswick, in the county of Middlesex 
and State of New Jersey, have invented cer 
tain new. and useful Improvements in Vulcan 
izing-Chambers, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to vulcanizing-chain 
bers for use in the manufacture of articles of 
india-rubber. 
It consists in a chamber furnished with a 
series of pipes, unconnected with and isolated 
from each other, though extending from a 
steam-receptacle common to all, whereby, the 
liability of leakage is lessened, and facility af. 
forded for repairing or replacing any of the 
pipes without detriment to the operation of the 
others. 
It also consists in a chamber furnished with 
series of pipes connected to receptacles, so that 
the several series and their receptacles are in 
dependent of the others, are supplied with and 
exhausted of steam.independently of the oth 
ers, and may be controlled and repaired inde 
pendently thereof. 
It also consists in details hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a central vertical section of a vulcanizing-cham 
ber embodying my invention, and Fig. 2 is a 
horizontal section of the same. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in both figures. 
A designates a vulcanizing-chamber, which 
may be built of brick, wood, or other mate 
rial, in the ordinary or any other suitable man 
ner, and provided with a doorway, X, one or 
more, and tracks A', for carriages containing 
articles to be vulcanized. 
B designates series of pipes extending lat 
erally from a receptacle, B, composed of an 
inner and outer compartments, and arranged 
in proximity to the side walls of the chamber 
A. The several pipes are isolated from and 
independent of each other, and are furnished 
at the outer ends with caps B. In these pipes 
are smaller pipes B, open at the inner ends, 
receiving steam from the inner compartment 
of the receptacle B, and extending therefrom 
to near the outer ends of the pipes B. At 
...the outer end they are closed by caps B9, pro 
vided with an opening much smaller than their 
interiors. 
Steam circulates. from the inner compart 
ment of the receptacle B through the pipes 
B', and back through the pipes B into the 
outer compartment of the receptacle B again. 
The caps B on the outer ends of the pipes B, 
owing to the smallness of the openings therein, 
serve to check the flow of steam, so that it 
will not flow mainly through the pipes adja 
cent to its source, but will flow uniformly, or 
nearly so, through the whole of the series. 
The inner compartment of the receptacle Bl 
is supplied with steam by a pipe, B, provided 
with a stop-cock, B, and leading to its upper 
part from a drum, D, or a steam-generator ar 
ranged outside the chamber A, and it is ex 
shausted of steam by means of a pipe, B, lead 
ing from the lower part of the receptacle, and 
provided with a stop-cock, B. 
It is obvious that any one of a series of 
pipes isolated and independent of each other, 
as are those described, can be removed, and 
the hole in its receptacle plugged, so as to 
permit of the use of the other pipes when nec 
essary, or fitted with a new pipe; and, fur 
thermore, that pipes so combined, being desti 
tute of connections, will be less liable to be 
come disarranged and leaky than if connected 
to form a coil or circuit. 
C designates a series of pipes furnished with 
caps C, containing smaller pipes C, fitted with 
perforated caps C9, and connected with a re 
ceptacle, C. This receptacle comprises inner 
and outer compartments, is supplied with 
steam by a pipe, C, provided with a stop-cock, 
C, communicating with the drum Dora steam 
generator, and is exhausted of steam by a pipe, 
C, provided with a stop-cock, C. All these 
parts are similar to analogous parts before 
described, save that the pipes C and C ex 
tend from one side only of the receptacle C, 
and they are arranged in proximity to the back 
of the chamber A. 
E designates a series of pipes extending 
from a receptacle, E, and furnished with caps 
E. Within these pipes are small pipes E, 
furnished with perforated caps. 
E designates a pipe provided with a stop 
, 
a 
2. 
2s, 9s4 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
m. 
cock, E, leading from the drum Dor a stea 
generator, and E designates a pipe provided 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
with a stop-cock, E, whereby steam is ex 
1. A chamber furnished with series of pipes 
hausted from the receptacle. All these parts 
unconnected with and independent from each 
other, extending from a receptacle, substan 
are similar to corresponding parts before de 
tially as specified, whereby liability to leakage 
scribed, and are in proximity to the front of . 
is lessened, and any pipe of any series may 
- the chamber A, below the doorway. The pipes 
be repaired or replaced by another without in 
here extend from one side of the receptacle El 
terfering with the others of the series. 
Only. 
G designates pipes fitted with caps G, ex 
2. A chamber furnished with series of pipes 
tending in horizontal rows from opposite sides. 
unconnected with and independent from each 
of a horizontally-arranged receptacle, G', and other, extending from a receptacle, and con 
taining within them smaller supply-pipes fur 
Containing smaller pipes G, fitted with perfo 
rated caps G9. This receptacle is supplied 
nished with caps having small openings, so as 
with steam by a pipe, G", leading from the 
to check the flow of steam through them, sub 
drum D or a steam-generator, and provided 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
with a stop-cock, G, and it is exhausted of 
3. A chamber furnished with series of pipes 
-steam by a pipe, G, provided with a stop 
connected to receptacles supplied with steam 
by pipes leading from a drum or steam-gener 
cock, G'. All these parts are like those corre 
ator, and provided with stop-cocks, and ex 
sponding to them, and before described, and 
hausted of steam by other pipes, also provided 
are arranged below the tracks A'in the cham 
with stop-cocks, substantially as specified, 
ber A, and near the floor of the latter. 
whereby heat maybe directed to different parts 
It will be seen that any of these series of 
of the chamber, and they may be repaired in 
pipes B, C, E, and G may be controlled by: 
means of the supply-pipes B, C, E, and G',: 
dependently of other series. 
4. A chamber provided with series of pipes 
with their stop-cocks B, C, E, and G, and 
and appurtenances arranged severally in ver 
the exhaust-pipes B, C, E, and G, with the 
stop-cocks B, C, E, and G", independently of 
tical rows in proximity to the sides, front, and 
back, and a series of pipes and appurtenances 
each other series, and hence that the heat. 
may be regulated at different parts of the 
arranged in a horizontal row near the floor of 
the receptacle, and severally supplied with 
chamber, as may be desirable, and that if either 
steam independently of the other series by 
Series of said pipes needs repairs. the others 
are not necessarily rendered inoperative. 
pipes leading to them from a drum or steam 
generator, and provided with stop-cocks, sub 
It is obvious that, in lieu of the pipes con 
taining smaller pipes for securing circulation 
stantially as specified. 
of Steam, pipes containing longitudinal parti 
tions extending to within a short distance from 
their outer ends may be used. 
. 
The steam-receptacles B, C, E, and Gland. 
the pipes communicating with them may be 
arranged in various positions other than those - 
illustrated and described with good results. 
CHANDLER HALL, 
E. P. JESSUP. 
WILLIAM E. KELLY. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219084.txt	E. W. FOWLER, 
Device for Operating Safe-Bolt Work. 
No. 219,084. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1879. 
12, 
2 2 2 
s % 
X 
2 
22 
 
N says esselaa 
2S, SA 
% List 
2%2x2iS 2 
2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
% a1a2222222a2a 222 
6. 
la 
12 tra esses : 
Guia-owd 
N.Peters, PHote-uTHogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, p. c. 
:::::: 
: 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELBERT W. FOWLER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN DEVICES FOR OPERATING SAFE BOLT-WoRKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,0S4, dated September 2, 1879; application filed 
December 14, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ELBERT W. FowLER, of 
Chicago, Cook county, State of Illinois, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Burglar-Proof Safes, of which the following is 
a full description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the inner face 
of a safe or vaultdoor, showing the bolts thrown 
back and the other parts in the position which 
they occupy before they have been adjusted 
for operation. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of 
the inner face of the door, showing the bolts 
drawn back and the other parts in the posi 
tion which they occupy after they have been 
adjusted for operation. Fig. 3 is a longitudi 
nal section at a of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a vertical 
section aty of Fig. 1. 
Myinvention relates to devices for automati 
cally casting and retracting the bolt-work of 
a safe. These devices are not located in a time 
lock, but are outside thereof. The devices for 
casting the bolt-work consist of one or more 
springs, combined with certain bars, and with 
the bolts and with a spring-catch, which de 
vices are so constructed that they can be so 
adjusted that upon closing the door of the 
safe or vault the spring-catch will be released 
and the springs will cast the bolts, all as here 
inafter more fully set forth. 
The devices for retracting the bolts consist 
of springs, bars, levers, holding-catch, and de 
vice for releasing the catch, so constructed 
and combined with the bolts that the same can 
be so arranged and adjusted that when the 
holding-catch is released the springs will re 
tract the bolts, all as hereinafter more fully 
set forth. 
A time mechanism may be used in connec 
tion with the retracting mechanism for the 
purpose of releasing the holding-catch. 
In the drawings, A represents the door of a 
safe or vault provided with tenon-grooves and 
rabbets, to shut into corresponding grooves 
and rabbets in the doorjamb. B B are door 
bolts, connected by a bar, C, and moving in 
bearings in the carrying-bars D. D. E is a 
sliding plate or bar, having arms or extensions 
FF. It is located upon the inner face of the 
door and under the bar C. G is a plate fixed 
to the inner face of the door and between the 
arms FF, serving the purpose of a guide for 
such arms. His a bar permanently secured 
to the plate E. 
In manufacturing, E, F F, and H may be 
made together, forming a single piece. 
a is a spring-catch, arranged to engage with 
the edge of the bar C when the bolts are re 
tracted, and so arranged that when the door 
is closed this spring a will come in contact 
with a projection on the doorjamb. and be 
forced back, releasing the bar C. b bare two 
coil-springs, one end of each of which is se 
cured to the bar C, and the other to the part H. 
c care two other coil-springs, one end of each 
of which is secured to the plate E, and the 
other end to G, or some other suitable fixed 
part. 
de together form a jointed lever, d being 
pivoted at f to a suitable projection or block 
on the inner face of the door, while the part 
e is pivoted at one end to d and at the other 
end to the plate E. g is a catch to engage with 
the outer end of the lever d. It is pivoted to 
G, as shown. 
Any suitable clock-work is to be applied to 
the inside of the door, so arranged that at a 
predetermined time its mechanism will release 
the catch g from the lever d, r is a wheel ro 
tated by such clock-work. The parts may be 
arranged in various ways, according to cir 
cumstances. . 
I have not shown the clock-work in full; but 
any one skilled in the art can easily apply the 
same to a safe in connection with my devices 
from the description herein given. 
The operation is as follows: Suppose the 
safe-door to be open, the bolts retracted, all 
parts being in their normal position, as shown 
in Fig.1, and the time-lock having been wound 
and set, as usual. Then, by means of the 
jointed lever de, the plate E can be thrown 
forward, bringing it into the position shown 
in Fig. 2, where it can be held by engaging the 
catch g with the end of d, in which position 
the springs b b and c 0 will all be under ten 
sion, and the spring - catch a, being engaged 
with the bar C, to which the bolts are secured, 
will hold them retracted. When the door is 
closed this spring a will be pushed back by 
coming in contact with projection on the door 
jamb above mentioned, and the bar C will be 
. 
219,0s4 
released from the spring. Then the tension 
of the springs b b will cast the bolts, alnd they 
will remain in that position until the action of 
the proper mechanism in the clock-Work throws 
the catch g away from the end of the lever d. 
Then the action of the splings c 0 will retract 
the bolts. 
The two parts de of the lever are not ex 
actly in line one with the other when the 
mechanism is set ready for use. 
I have shown two springs b b and two Springs 
c c. A greater number may be used. In place 
of the two springs b b, a single spring might be 
used. So a single spring might be used in 
place of the two springs ( c. 
I prefer to use 
a number of springs of greater aggregate power 
than is required, so that if any one should be 
come unfit for use the remaining Springs will 
do the Work. 
I do not use any spindle or other connection 
with the outside of the door to operate the 
bolts, the bolts being cast by the springs ly 
and retracted by the springS 0. 
It will be observed that both sets of springs 
are made ready for operation by the movement 
of the lever de, so that the safe cannot be 
locked without first setting the power which 
unlocks it. 
My improvement is shown in connection 
with reciprocating bolt-work of the ordinary 
. 
kind; but its use is not limited to such simple 
bolt-work. 
I do not limit myself to the arrangement of the 
lever d e and catch g shown, as various known 
means may be adopted to hold the plate E for 
Ward. 
The arms F serve the purpose of guides. 
They might be slotted and move over a screw 
or headed pin. 
The spring a can be located in any conven 
ient place, and may be released from C by 
coming in contact with the doorjamb or a pro 
jection on the inside of the safe. Instead of a 
single spring, ct, two may be used, one at each 
end of C. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is as follows: 
: 
1. The combination of the sliding plate C, 
bar H, springs b, and spring-catch ( with the 
bar D and bolt or bolts B, substantially as 
Specified. 
2. The combination of the sliding plate C, 
bar H, and springs b with the sliding plate E, 
springs c, lever d e, catch g, and disk r, sub 
! stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
ELBERT W. FOWLER. 
Witnesses: 
E. A. WEST, 
O. W. BOND, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219184.txt	G. L., T ALBOT, 
Shank-Stiffeners for B00ts and Shoes, 
No. 219,184. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1879. 
. 
ZZzza/7/27 
4. 9%. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE L. TALBOT, OF MOUNT PLEASANT, IOWA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN SHANK-STIFFENERS FOR BOOTS AND SHOES, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,184, dated September 2, 1879; application filed 
- 
June 9, 1879. 
- 4 
- 
- 
- 
cation. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE L TALBOT, of 
Mount Pleasant, in the county of Henry and 
State of Iowa, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Boot and Shoe Shank 
Stiffeners, of which the following is a specifi 
The invention relates to a metallic plate, to 
be applied externally as a support and stiff. 
ener to the shanks of boots and shoes. 
Heretofore metallic plates and other kinds 
of material have been used internally as shank 
stiffeners, having been placed there whileman 
ufacturing said boots or shoes, and which 
cannot be applied if omitted at the time of 
manufacturing the same. . 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
shank-stiffener which may be applied to boots 
or shoes at anytime desired, even to straighten 
or strengthen a boot or shoe that has com 
menced to twist while in wear. 
The invention consists in a metallic plate 
shaped to fit outside the shank; or it may be 
made more oval, or have an inverted flute 
lengthwise in its center, leaving a recess be 
tWeen it and the shank, which space may be 
filled with additional stiffening material. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure l is a view of the bottom of a shoe, 
showing the stiffener attached embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a detached view of said 
stiffener; and Fig. 3 is a view of a section 
taken at the dotted line ii, Fig. 2. 
A represents the bottom of a shoe-sole; H, the 
heel, and C the stiffener, the latter of which is 
made of sheet metal, is provided with two or 
more points, e, at its rear end for insertion into 
the heel, and also a suitable number of holes 
around its edge for the reception of nails or 
screws for fastening to the shank. It may be 
made to fit the shank snugly, or provided 
with a longitudinal intervening recess, as 
shown at f; or said recess may extend to near 
the whole width of said plate, and the recess 
filled with additional stiffening material, if de 
sired. 
It is to be applied in use by inserting the 
points e, by suitable means, into the heel close 
to the sole, and otherwise fastening to the bot 
tom by means of nails or screws. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
so as to enable others skilled in the art to make 
the same, what I claim as new, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The improved metallic shank-stiffener for 
boots and shoes, consisting of the plate C, pro 
vided with the longitudinal recess f and at 
taching-prongs e, all substantially as shown 
and described. 
GEORGE L. TALBOT. 
Witnesses: 
e 
H 
A. 
G. SHADEL, 
B. 
HART. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219284.txt	I. 
. MAMBERT. 
Shirt, 
No. 219,284. 
Patented Sept 
... 2 
1879. 
 
 
Zzzvenator 
Isaac H.7tambert, 
7 
 
2-deo ca, 
N. PETERs, Photo-thographer, WAsiaTON, E. C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE 
ISAAC. H. MAMBERT, 
OF TROY, NEW YORK. 
MPROVEMENT IN SHRTS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,2S4, dated September 2, 1879; application filed 
July 2, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ISAAC. H. MAMBERT, of 
Troy, in the county of Rensselaer, and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Shirts, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in shirts; and it has for its object to 
furnish a brace for the bosom which will hold 
it in proper position upon the person, and pre 
vent the Wrinkling of the same and the ad 
jacent portions of the front of the shirt, and 
which will also facilitate the ironing of the 
bosom by holding it in a flat position during 
the operation, 
To this end my invention consists in pro 
viding the shirt with a curved brace, extend 
ing from beneath the arms downwardly to 
the center of the front of the shirt, which, 
when the shirt is starched and ironed, will 
possess sufficient rigidity to prevent the Wrink 
ling of the bosom and adjacent parts of the 
front of the shirt. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 indicates a front 
view of my improved shirt; Fig. 2, a sec 
tional view of the upper and lower parts and 
the band or brace; Figs. 3 and 4, similar sec 
tion of modifications. 
In carrying out the invention, the front of 
the shirt A is preferably formed of two parts, 
BC, as illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2 of the 
drawings, the lower edge of the upper part 
being cut on a curve, D, extending from that 
portion which sets under the armpits in a 
finished shirt to the center of the front of the 
shirt, and the upper edge of the lower part 
cut on a corresponding reverse curve, E, the 
two edges being afterward placed together 
and united by Stitching, in such manner as to 
form a curved band or brace, G, of thickened 
material, which will extend from beneath the 
armpits to the center of the front of the shirt, 
as shown. 
In uniting the curved edges of the upper 
and lower portions of the shirt, it is prefera 
ble to fell the edges together, by which the 
material is thickened or doubled at the junc 
ture of the two parts, adding strength to the 
brace and increasing its capacity to hold 
starch, and thereby be rendered more rigid 
When the shirt is starched and ironed. 
Instead of forming the shirt-front in two 
parts, as above described, the shirt-front may 
be cut as usual, and the part B applied in 
proper position over the upper part of the 
front of the shirt and stitched thereto, the 
brace in this case being formed by turning 
under the curved edge D and sewing it to 
the shirt-front. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 3 the 
lower edge, D, of the part B has folded over 
and stitched to it an independent band of 
fabric of suitable width, and the edge thus 
bound is stitched to the curved edge E of the 
lower part, C, of the shirt-front, said band 
forming the curved brace in the finished shirt. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 4 the 
brace is formed of an independent band of 
folded fabric, which is stitched on a proper 
curve directly upon the ordinary front of the 
shirt by a double row of stitches. 
As thus constructed, it will be evident that 
by reason of the extra thickness of the curved 
band and the increased amount of starch that 
it will receive and hold, it will possess a con 
siderable degree of rigidity, so as to sup 
port the bosom and hold it in a comfortable 
and proper position upon the person, and pre 
vent the Wrinkling of said bosom and the ad 
joining portions of the shirt-front when worn, 
and will also hold the bosom in a flat and 
convenient position while being ironed, thus 
facilitating the operation. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. A shirt provided with a narrow curved 
brace extending from a point at or near the 
armpits of its front downward toward the 
center, whereby the bosom is held in position 
upon the person, and prevented from Wrink 
ling, substantially as specified. 
2. A shirt-front constructed of an upper 
and a lower part, with curved adjoining edges, 
secured together by stitching, whereby a nar 
row curved brace extending from or near the 
armpits downward across the front of the 
shirt is formed, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand in the presence of 
the subscribing witnesses. 
ISAAC H. MAMIBERT, 
Witnesses: 
JAMES L. NORRIS, 
JAMES A RUTHERFORD. 
N 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219384.txt	T. Y. BROWN, 
Gun-Wiper. 
Patented Sept. 9, 1879. 
 
No. 219,384. 
Fig 1 
\\\\essvs y 
Wvex\SYSwsww. 
Yv R.S.A. 
V VyNV 
Yew &\.S. w 
exX Vy VV 
N, PETERS, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, wash:NGTON, o c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS YARDLEY BROWN, OF READING, PENN SYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN GUN-WIPERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,3S4, dated September 9, 1879; application filed 
July 29, 1879. 
- 
To all whom it may concern; 
Be it known that I, T. YARDLEY BROWN, 
of the city of Reading, county of Berks, State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Gun Wipers or Clean 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
The improvementismore particularly related 
to the gun-wiper Patent No. 214,484, of April 
2, 1879, and of the allowed patent of May 28, 
1879, severally granted to me; and consists 
in a change of form in the cone and the at 
tachment of a spiral or scratch brush in the 
rear of the cone, and connected with the sock 
et-holder E by the wire hook C of the cone A, 
as shown. 
In the specification of my first patent I ob 
jected to a solid elastic cone, because it could 
not crimp or close down on itself, and was 
therefore not adapted to press equally upon 
the grooves and lands of the barrel being 
cleaned, and for that reason I adopted the ser 
rated elastic cone. 
I have since then discovered that for certain 
kinds of arms, more particularly rifle-bore, a 
more rigid cone is necessary, and after full 
trial have found the cone shown in Figure 1 to 
meet every requirement. 
It will be noted that the rear of the cone is 
reduced in size about one-third of the diam 
eter of the base of the cone, and extends out 
from the base equal in length to its diameter. 
This neck abuts against the washer, as usual, 
in my specified patent, and the object of the 
extension B is to give room for the crimping 
of the base of the cone A. When I wish to 
secure more elasticity I undercut the base, as 
shown in Fig. 2. This makes it very flexible; 
but I find Fig. 1 to be best adapted for rifled 
3.S. For the purpose of cleaning very dirty and 
rusty arms I attach to the socket E of the 
cylinder E the hooked holder C, terminating 
in a spiral scratch-brush of the usual construc 
tion. Immediately in advance of the brush 
I place one of my toad-stool cones, A, and 
. 
one or more patches, D. Dropping the guard 
h and cord B through the barrel, and just en 
tering the patch, I pour into the inverted 
patch oil; then, drawing the patch, cone, and 
brush through, the oil acts upon the dirt or 
rust in advance of the brush, and, softening it, 
the result is the ready removal of the salme. 
A few passes of the brush, Fig. 4, followed up 
with the cone A and interchangeable patches 
D of Fig. 3, leaves the barrel in a highly-pol 
ished condition. 
I do not broadly claim the spiral or any 
other scratch-brush for the purpose described; 
but I claim that the combination I have inade 
adds to the completeness of the hunter or sol 
dier's kit, and is a novel and useful improve 
ment. 
Fig. 1 is an elevation of the cone A, show 
ing the neck B, as described. Fig. 2 is a view 
of the cone A in section, showing it as under 
cut to obtain more elasticity. Fig. 3 is a plan 
of the gun-wiper complete, showing the cord 
g, guard h, cylinder E, holder C, cone A, and 
interchangeable patches D. Fig. 4 is a plan 
of the gun-wiper complete, with the scratch 
brush attachment. Fig. 5 is an elevation of 
an alternative form of cone somewhat dissim 
ilar to that of Figs, 3 and 4, and will give 
equally as good results for a short time, but 
is liable to shred off, and therefore not adapted 
for long service. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts. 
Having described my improvement, what I 
claim is as follows, to wit: 
1. The combination of holder C, patches D, 
and a cone, A of elastic material, having its 
rear portion elongated as a cylinder, for the 
purpose described. 
2. The combination of holder C with cone 
A, patches D, and scratch-brush F, for the pur 
pose shown and described. 
TEHOMAS YARDLEY BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES R. KENNEY, 
AMOS BRINER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219484.txt	C, O. KANOUSE 
In sole, 
No. 219,484. 
Patented Sept. 9, 1879. 
Ag! Z 
2 
Z3 
/2: . 
17 
y 
2 
//zes M. 
2.2%34.4% 
/26/344 
/re were (or 
6% (2 tact-4 
2%a sy-6-e--- 26.: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES O. KANOUSE, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
MPROVEMENT IN NSOLES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,4S4, dated September 9, 1879; application filed 
February 25, 1879. 
such coating can be readily washed from the 
celluloid, and an insole prepared with it can 
therefore be retained in use much longer than 
if made of other naterial. 
The construction of the insole is shown in 
the accompanying (lrawings, where Figure 1 
is a plan of an insole; Fig. 2, a section of the 
same composed-of celluloid and Inletal, and 
Fig. 3 a section of a similar insole with a cloth 
face attached. 
A is the celluloid; B, the metal, and C the 
cloth cemented to the same. 
When a cloth-faced ifsole is desired I use 
celluloid dissolved in alcoliol or other solvent 
as a cement to attach the cloth to the metal, 
and the whole insole is then free from any in 
gredients which can be affected by or injuri 
ously affect the feet. 
When the cloth is not required the upper 
surface of the metal, as well as its lower, may 
receive a layer of celluloid or coat of celluloid 
varnish to protect its entire surface from oxi 
dation. Such an insole can be washed repeat 
edly without injury and preserved in its origi 
nal condition a long time. 
From the above description the utility of 
celluloid combined with metal will be appar 
ent, as the insole thus made possesses in the 
highest degree the qualities of resistance to 
water, freedom from odor, cleanliness, dura 
bility, and absence from oxidation or corrosion. 
I therefore claim, and desire to secure the 
same by Letters Patent, as follows: 
An insole composed of celluloid and metal, 
substantially as herein set forth. 
- 
- 
CEARLES O. KANOUSE. 
Attest: 
THOS. S. CRANE, 
CHAs. C. HERRICK. 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Be it, known that I, CHARLEs O. KANOUSE, 
of the city of Newark, in the county of Essex 
and State of New Jersey, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Insoles for Boots 
and Shoes, which improvement is fully de 
scribed in the following specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
water-proof insoles for boots and shoes; and 
consists in the application of celluloid to a plate 
of metal for protecting the same from oxida 
tion, while the metallic plate maintains the 
celluloid in the proper shape when in use. 
The celluloid is designed as a substitute for 
rubber, gutta-percha, and the various water. 
proof compositions hitherto used for insoles, 
and possesses, in addition to great durability 
and resistance to water, the quality of not ab 
sorbing any odor, which is a prominent objec 
tion to the use of other materials. Although 
called water-proof, it is well known that the 
other substances specified are gradually decom 
posed when in contact with the heat and moist 
ure of the foot, and that they eithe 
offensive odors or absorb 
Celluloid, on the contrary, does not, when 
properly prepared, possess any odor or absorb 
any from contact, and is not injured in the 
least degree by being washed in water when 
necessary. 
To utilize these qualities in an insole the 
celluloid is combined with a sheet of metal, 
which serves to preserve the shape of the cel 
luloid and keep it from wrinkling in the boot 
or shoe where it is used. 
Although water-proof itself, the metal is not 
adapted for use without the celluloid coating, 
as it is affected by moisture from the boot and 
foot, and acquires a coating which is offensive 
and injurious to the feet and stockings. Any 
- 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219584.txt	G. & T. KOCH, 
Liquid Outage Gage. 
No. 219,584. 
Patented Sept. 16, 1879. 
 
 
-2&zesz: 
--- 2.22%- -- -- 
32-2 626- 
- 
- 
- 
 
'Y' 
Azaz/reza Zors: 
(2.7zz Azeez 
- ZZeac/ere 1.20%--- 
Ms% 
ry 6/6. 
4Zzor e2/s. 
N.FETERs, Photo-uthogRAPHER, wAsH3NGTON, D.C. 
s 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAV KOCH AND THEODORE KOCH, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT iN LIQUID-OUTAGE GAGES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,5s4, dated September 16, 1879; application filed 
July 8, 1879. 
- 
, 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GUSTAVKOCH and 
THEODORE KOCH, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in a Liquid-Indicat 
ing In-and-Out Gage, of which we hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description, which will enable others skilled 
in the art to which our invention appertains 
to construct and make use of the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of the 
gage staff or rod inserted in a liquid-recepta 
cle, also in section. Fig. 2 is a side view of 
the tubular staff or rod embodying our im 
provement, and Fig. 3 an inverted end view 
of the same. 
The object of our invention is the construc 
tion of a simple, convenient, and efficient de 
vice for indicating the inage and outage 
of a barrel, cask, or other liquid-receptacle. 
The exact application, construction, and oper 
ation of the same will hereinafter be more 
fully explained in detail. 
In referring to the drawings, A represents a 
tubular staff or rod, which may be of any di 
mensions that are suitable to the purpose. 
The upper end of this staff is provided with 
the elongated opening C. On the outer sur 
face of the staff A, and adjacent to the open 
ing C, is arranged one or more graduating 
Scales, generally four, as that number would 
adapt the same gage to be used in connection 
With four receptacles of different capacities 
for instance, one-half barrel, sixteen gallons; 
barrel, forty-two gallons; tierce, sixty-four gal 
lons; and hogshead, one hundred and twenty 
gallons. The lines and characters forming 
the graduating-spaces are arranged at irregul 
lar intervals, in order to conform to the vary 
ing outlines of a barrel-shaped receptacle. 
On the interior of the tubular staff A is 
placed the float B, to which is attached the 
lower end of the wire a, and to the upper end 
of this wire is attached the fingers or pointers 
b, which are made to extend outward through 
the elongated opening C, and as the float Bis 
actuated by the liquid this finger points to 
the proper mark or character on the graduat 
ing-Scale, indicating the quantity or number 
of gallons that have been taken out of the bar 
rel or run into the same, as the case may be, 
it, of course, being understood that this de 
vice is not intended as a contents-gage-that 
is, suppose one or more gallons up to any 
quantity less than one-half of the capacity of 
the cask is run off, by the use of this gage 
that quantity is quickly ascertained, which 
amount, of course, is required to fill the cask 
to its full capacity. 
When the holding - capacity of a cask is 
known, then by the use of this gage the actual 
contents can be got at, but not in gaging mis 
cellaneous packages. 
This gage is particularly intended to be 
used in barrels or casks in which liquors are 
mixed-that is, where a certain quantity is re 
quired to be taken from a number of different 
packages and run into one receptacle. 
By inserting and clamping the gage to the 
barrel in the manner as shown in Fig. 1 of the 
drawings, the end of the conducting-hose can 
be inserted into the bung-opening alongside of 
the gage, and one or more gallons, as may be 
required, run into the barrel, and so on, tak 
ing the proportionate quantity from each pack 
age until the barrel is filled, the fingers or 
pointers on the gage indicating the number of 
gallons taken from each package. 
When the barrel is filled, and it is found to 
be not quite what is wanted, a certain quan 
tity or number of gallons can be run off, and 
the same amount again replaced from another 
package, the gage in this case indicating the 
outage as Well as the inage. 
This invention is more especially intended 
for use in rectifying establishments, and saves 
a great deal of time and labor; but it is easily 
adapted to all kinds of liquids by the proper 
adjustment and weight of the floatin the tu 
bular staff. 
In order to adapt this device to be used in 
connection with liquid-receptacles the outlines 
of which do not vary from the bottom to the 
top, have the graduated spaces at regular in 
tervals instead of irregular. 
c represents a lip-like projection attached 
to the tubular staff A, and when the gage is 
in proper position for use this lip sits close 
against the inside of the stave, as illustrated 
in Fig. 1 of the drawings. This lip, in con 
nection with the collar D and screw-bolt d, 
- 
295 S4 
forms the clamping device by means of which 
the gage is secured stationary to the barrel. 
We do not strictly confine ourselves to the 
exact arrangement herein shown for clamping 
the gage to the barrel, but may employ such 
devices or modifications as Would be a just 
equivalent of the device herein shown. 
This gage, registering upon the outside, ob 
viates the necessity of removing the same from 
the barrel while in use. 
The lower end of the gage staff or rod is 
provided with a strainer-cap, for the purpose 
of preventing any sediment or floating matter 
from entering the passage and interfering with 
the free movement of the float. 
The graduated scale on the lower half, or 
that part of the staff which is inserted in the 
barrel, is for the purpose of adapting the gage 
to be used in the same manner as the common 
out-stick in case of the float becoming clogged 
or refusing to work from any cause. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a liquid-indicating gage, the combina 
tion, with the tubular staff or rod A, having 
one or more graduating - scales, the lines and 
characters representing the same being spaced 
at irregular intervals in order to conform to 
the varying outlines of a barrel-shaped recep 
tacle, of the float B, the wire a, and the fin 
gers or pointers b, substantially as and for the 
pirpose herein described. 
2. In a liquid-indicating gage, the combina 
tion of the following elements, viz: the tubu 
lar staff or rod A, having the elongated open 
ings C, the fingers or pointers b, the Wirect, 
the float B, lip c, collar D, and the screw-bolt 
d, all combined, connected, and operating sub 
stantially as described. 
GUSTAV KOCH. 
THEODORE KOCH. 
Witnesses: 
II. E. LEBOLT, 
SOL MOYSES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219684.txt	W. S. BURNHAM, 
Combined D00r-Bolt and Check. 
No. 219,684. 
Patented Sept. 16, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
  
tSSSSSSSSSSn 
mR Rur 
ic 
EAN2, 
Elez 
Yea SS 
WITNESSES: 
26---- 12/2-2, -- 
-6 47 vice 
 
 
NNasa a 2aa 2 
& 
Y 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER. S. BURNEIAM, OF ASHTABULA, OHIO. 
IMPROVEMENT IN COMBINED DOOR BOLT AND CHECK. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,6s4, dated September 16, 1879; application filed 
July 2, 1879. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER. S. BURNHAM, 
of Ashtabula, in the county of Ashtabula and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and Im 
proved Door-Bolt, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the device, 
partly in section, as applied to a door. Fig.2 
is a plan of the same, partly in section, as ap 
plied to a door. Fig. 3 is a transverse sec 
tional elevation on line at ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is 
an end elevation of the socket. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
chain-bolt that, when applied to a door, will 
serve to securely hold it closed or partly open, 
as may be desired. 
The invention consists of a cylindrical bolt 
barrel, having a semicircular slot that extends 
across its top, near its rear end, and is pro 
longed along its sides, one of the side prolon 
gations reaching farther forward than the 
other; and it further consists of a round bolt, 
provided with a hook in its forward end for 
the engagement of the chain, that is movable 
within the barrel, and is also provided with a 
handle that projects through the slot, where 
with the bolt can be turned or pushed forward 
and retracted at will; and it consists, further, 
of a socket, that is to be secured to the door 
frame, and is furnished with a loop, in which 
one end of the chain is fastened, and a horn, 
from which the slack of the chain may be sus 
pended. 
In the drawings, A represents the bolt-bar 
rel, and at the slot cut in it. B represents the 
bolt, furnished with the terminal hook b' and 
the handle c'. When this handle is moved 
along in the lower prolongation of the slot, as 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1, the hook of 
the boltis turned upward, and holds the chain 
so far within the barrel that it cannot be de 
tached therefrom; but when the handle is 
. 
moved rearward and turned into the upper 
slot, as shown also in Fig. 1, the hook turns 
downward, and then, as it is passed forward, 
releases the chain as it passes the point d", 
where the socket is cut away, and enters the 
socket, thus holding the door D effectually 
closed. 
The socket C is cut away at d', so that as 
the bolt, with chain E attached, is thrust into 
it, space is given for the chain to become de 
tached and fall off. The loop f is designed 
for holding one end of the chain, and the horn 
g' for holding up the slack or other end of the 
chain, when desired. 
It will be seen that when a short clhain is 
used, which will permit the opening of the 
door but four or five inches, no one could reach 
within to the handle of the bolt, nor could any 
one detach the chain from the bolt while the 
latter remains within the barrel; hence abso 
lute safety against intrusion is assured whether 
the door be opened or closed. 
When bolting the door the hook on the bolt 
retains the chain until the end of the bolt has 
entered the socket, so that at no moment will 
the door be unsecured whether closed or open. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent 
1. The within-described device, consisting of 
the doubly-slotted bolt-barrel A, bolt B, pro 
vided with hook b' and handle c, socket C, 
cut away at d", and provided with loop f" and 
horn g', and chain E, constructed and ar 
ranged substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
2. The bolt - socket C, cut away at d", and 
provided with loop f and horn g, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
- 
WALTER SCOTT BURNEAM. 
Witnesses: 
O. K. RALPH, 
A. C. BOOTES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219784.txt	W. H. WAN DYCK. 
Top for Children's Carriages. 
No. 219,784. 
Patented Sept. 16, 1879. 
25 a?: 
26. Y. 
 
AEG" . EE 
2. 4. 
 
SSSwomax-Vs 
&to regs. 
N.PETERs, PHoTo-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
: 
 
y 
l' :". 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM. H. WAN DYCK, OF COXSACKIE, NEW YORK. 
MPROVEMENT N TOPS FOR CHILDRENS CARRAGES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,2S4, dated September 16, 1879; application filed 
August 16, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
oted a similar disk, d, formed on the end of 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMBI. WANDYOK, 
an arm, D. The other end of this arm is 
of Coxsackie, in the county of Greene and 
forked or slotted, and in the same is pivoted 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
one arm of an L-shaped iron, F, the other 
and useful Improvements in Tops for Chil 
arm of which is fastened to the under side of 
dren's Carriages; and do hereby declare that 
the top G. 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
In the forked end of the arm D is inserted 
tion thereof, reference being had to the ac 
a set-screw, I, which is to bear against the 
companying drawings, and to the letters of ref. 
pivoted arm of the iron F to hold the same at 
erence marked thereon, which form part of 
any angle to which it may be set. 
this specification. 
It will thus be seen that, in addition to the 
My invention relates to tops for children's 
adjustment afforded by the usual pivoted up 
carriages; and it consists in the construction of 
rights A, A, the top can be adjusted from side 
devices for making the same adjustable in any 
to side by turning the arm D, and also thrown 
position desired, as will be hereinafter more 
forward or backward by the iron F turning in 
fully set forth. 
the arm. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
The various parts may be held in the differ 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
ent positions either by set-screws or by fric 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
tion joints, or by other equivalent devices. 
its construction and operation, referring to the 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
annexed drawings, in which 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in sec 
Letters Patent, is 
tion, showing different positions in dottedlines, 
The combination, with the adjustable up 
and Fig. 2 is a plan.view of the same with top 
rights A A of the bail C, adjustable arm D, 
G removed. 
and the top G, provided with the iron F, ad 
A. A represent the ordinary pivoted up- justable in the end of the arm -D, substan 
rights, adjustable at different angles by means tially as and for the purposes herein set forth. 
of set-screws a, a in slotted brackets B B. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
The upper ends of the uprights A A are my own I affix my signature in presence of 
forked, as shown, and connected by means of two witnesses. 
a bail, C, standing at right angles to the up 
rights. 
Witnesses: 
In the center of the bail C is formed a cir 
cular enlargement or disk, b, on which is piv 
WILLIAM HENRY WAN DYOK. 
CASPER I. COLLIER, 
PHILIP J. WOLFE. 
d 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219884.txt	H. WELLINGTON, 
Extension-Chandelier. 
Patented Sept. 23, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
N.FETERS, Phof&-LTHCGRAPHER. WAShiNGTON, C & 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY WELLINGTON, QF GREEN POINT, NEW YORK. - 
IMPROVEMENT IN EXTENSION-CHANDELIERs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,ss4, dated September 23, 1879; application filed 
May 26, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY WELLINGTON, 
of Green Point, county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Adjustable Chandeliers, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 is an axial section of a device em 
bodying all the essential features of my im 
provements, the retaining wedges or blocks 
being shown in the position which they will as 
sume when at rest or whenever the extension 
slide is being lowered; and Fig. 2 is a similar 
view indicating the position which these same 
Wedges or blocks will assume when the exten 
sion is being elevated. Fig. 3 is an elevation 
of the improved attachment; and Fig. 4, a 
horizontal section upon a plane passing through 
line a ac of Fig. 1. 
Like letters in all the figures, wherever they 
occur, indicate corresponding parts. 
My invention has relation to that class of 
attachments to chandeliers or other suspended 
fixtures which support an oil, gas, or other 
burner for illuminating purposes, and wherein 
the light or burner is made vertically or other 
wise adjustable; and it (the invention) has for 
its object the production of a simple, cheap, 
durable, automatically-operating, and efficient 
sustaining device for the sliding rod or pipe, 
by use of which said rod or pipe may be easily 
adjusted either up or down, and when so ad 
justed be securely held at the desired elevation, 
and all this without necessitating the employ 
ment of any means of operating the clamping 
blocks save the sliding pipe or rod itself. 
To accomplish this, and at the same time to 
compensate for the wearing of the clamping 
blocks, to regulate their frictional bearing 
against the sliding rod or pipe, to adjust then 
so as to sustain different weights of movable 
parts, and to insure certainty of action in con 
nection with the sliding rod or pipe, the inven 
tion involves certain new and useful peculiar 
ities of construction and relative arrangements 
or combinations of parts, all of which will be 
hereinafter first fully described, and then point 
ed out in the claims. 
A is the sliding rod or pipe, upon which the 
suspended lamps, burners, or lighting appara 
tus of any kind are mounted, and this moves up 
and down through the conical casing, or cas 
ing having a conical or equivalently-formed 
interior surface, B, which in turn is suspended 
from the ceiling or elsewhere by the station 
ary pipe C. (Indicated in dotted lines.) With 
in casing B are placed the clamping-Wedges W. 
W, two, three, or more in number, so ar 
ranged as that their vertical faces shall bear 
against the exterior surface of the sliding piece, 
and their inclined or outer faces bear against 
the interior inclined surface of casing B. These 
Wedges or clamping-blocks are preferably cut 
long in comparison with their width, as indi 
cated, so that their wearing effect upon the part 
A will be very slight, and so that the casing 
B may be made of graceful and pleasing form 
and outline. They are prevented from being 
forced out at the upper enlarged end of casing 
B by reason of the presence of the top plate, 
D, which is screw-threaded to receive the end 
of the sustaining-pipe C, and which may be 
connected with the walls of the casing by any 
suitable means. Their size and form prevent 
them from being drawn out through the bot 
tom opening in said casing, which is consider 
ably contracted beyond the limits of that in 
the top. The pipe A is pressed against the 
vertical faces of all the wedges, so that on all 
the points of contact there is a movable bear 
ing, which results in uniformity of wearing and 
ease of motion. The wedge may be faced with 
? soft material, as indicated by the heavy 
10.S. 
When it is desired to move the burners or 
the part A downward, as indicated by the ar 
row in Fig.1, it is simply pulled with the hand, 
the wedges being lowered, as represented, af. 
fording only a certain resistance to the down 
ward motion, which is, however, sufficient to 
sustain the weight of the attachments, but 
only of such a degree as may be easily over 
come when to this weight is added the force of 
the hand. When sufficiently lowered the parts 
will be maintained automatically in their new 
position. 
To elevate the part A and its eonnections, 
it is forced upward with the hand, the Wedges 
 
 
2 
219, SS4 
riding up with the pipe or rod sufficiently to 
relieve the latter of all side pressure due to 
their presence. Being released, the part A 
and the wedges drop down only a very slight 
distance, when the whole are held in place the 
same as before the movement. Under all or 
dinary circumstances the weight of the wedges 
will be sufficient to cause them to drop down 
to the lowermost part of the casing and bear 
against the pipe or rod, when the latter is re 
leased after having been elevated, as desired; 
but to insure their perfect action in this re 
spect, I surround them with a rubber or other 
very light spring, s, of sufficient tension to make 
them hug the pipe at all times, and therefore 
to move up and down with it until arrested by 
the bottom or top of the casing. For the ac 
commodation of this spring groove or furrow 
the outer edges of the wedges, as plainly shown 
and locate the spring within this furrow. This 
construction obviates the bearing of the spring 
against the casing, leaving all the surfaces of 
contact smooth and even or unbroken. 
To regulate the pressure of the wedges 
against the sliding part, the bottom of the cas 
ing is provided with a hollow screw-plug, S, 
which surrounds the sliding part, and may be 
turned in far enough to produce a very slight 
compression of the pipe or rod, when it is low 
ered or turned out far enough to allow the 
wedges room to drop down with the pipe so 
far as to produce all the pressure required for 
the heaviest fixtures or attachments. By use 
of this regulating screw-plug the capability of 
the clamp to hold or maintain any weight may 
be nicely and very easily adjusted. 
The lamps or burners, &c., are, of course, to 
be suitably connected with the lower end of 
sliding part A, and it has not been deemed 
necessary to represent them in the drawings, 
because they may be of any desired kind, and 
their means of connection are very well under 
Stood. 
The device is specially designed for the sup 
port of oil-fixtures of the various kinds; but 
manifestly it may be used in connection with 
gas-fixtures, it being only necessary to connect 
a flexible or other suitable pipe with the top 
of pipe A and allow it, if necessary, to coil and 
uncoil within pipe C, after the manner of ar. 
ranging some forms of gas-chandeliers. 
When unconnected with any pipe from above 
the part A is to be provided with some sort 
of stop, as a, so as to prevent the accidental 
withdrawing of this part through the casing. 
Being constructed and arranged in accord 
ance with the foregoing description, the oper. 
ation of the clamp is smooth, easy, and cer 
tain, and it fulfills all the purposes and objects 
of the invention, as previously stated. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
I desire to add that I am aware of previous 
forms of clamping or holding devices for this 
class of chandeliers wherein the principle of 
the wedge is employed to maintain the sliding 
parts at the required heights; but in these 
previous forms one of these defects has always 
existed: The wedges did not bear uniformly 
against the sliding part, or they had to be op 
erated by a lever or rod independently of the 
sliding pipe or rod, or they could not be regu 
lated to correspond with the weights of va 
rious attachments, or they failed to afford a 
means permitting the lowering of the attach 
ments without first disturbing the wedges 
themselves. The hollow screw-plug S, for the 
adjustment of the clamping-wedges, is also 
known to be old in this class of devices. To 
these old forms I desire it understood that II 
make no claim; but 
What I do claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters. Patent, is- 
11. In a sliding chandelier of the character 
herein specified, the combination, with the loose 
wedges confined within the conical casing, 
against the walls of which they crowd or jam, 
and surrounding the sliding pipe, of the con 
tracting spring located within a groove or fur 
row upon the outer faces of the wedges, and 
causing them to travel with the pipe in its up 
ward and downward movements, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination, with sliding pipe or 
rod A, of the casing B, sustaining-pipe C, ex 
teriorly furrowed or grooved, wedges W. W., 
adapted to crowd or jam against the walls of 
the casing, screw-plug S, springs, and stop a, 
the whole being arranged to operate substan 
tially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand in the presence of 
two witnesses. 
; 
: 
EHENRY WELLINGTON. 
Witnesses: 
WoRTH OsgooD, 
S. W. HOLCOMB. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US219984.txt	R. SCHNECKENBURGER 
ROtary Steam-Engine, 
No. 219,984. 
SS 
Patented Sept. 23, 1879. 
 
SE7 sA 
V N N 
NNN 
 
 
 
 
 
in 
ass T 
| 
III N 
s 
 
 
 
 
st 
 
SaS 
INVENTOR: 
2 .M 
 
ATTORNEYS, 
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT SCHNECKENBURGER, OF JACKSON, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO HIM 
SELF AND SARAH A. FROST, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN ROTARY STEAM-ENGINEs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 219,9s4, dated September 23, 1879; application filed 
April 7, 1879. 
valve is furnished with gear-teeth c' c', that 
mesh into the governor-rack M, that projects 
through the lower part of the chamber, through 
which the adjustment of the valve may be ef. 
fected by means of a lever or the application 
of centrifugal force. 
Keyed upon the shaft G outside of the cut 
off valve, and in close contact with it, is the 
movable valve N, provided with two opposite 
steam-ports, ff. When this valve is set for 
the passage of steam, the steam entering 
through the port O will pass through one of 
the ports in the valve N, and through the port 
D upon the ends of the cams, instead of upon 
or against their tops or peripheries, as is usual. 
The abutment I, being stationary, causes the 
valve N to deliver steam always at the same 
point, while the cut-off valve, being adjust 
able by the rack, enables the engineer to cut 
the steam off at any desired time, so that what 
enters the steam-cylinder may work by expan 
S10. 
Baving thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The within-described combination, with 
the valve-chamber A and steam-cylinder B of 
a rotary engine, of the diaphragm C, provided 
with a steam-port, D, the peculiarly-shaped 
cam-pistons H. H., provided with jointed pack 
ing-strips at a' and slides d' d', the abutment 
I, the cut-off valve K, with geared or toothed 
periphery, the collar L, governor-rack M, mov 
able valve N, provided with steam-ports fif', 
and the port O, all constructed and arranged 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
2. In a rotary steam-engine, the peculiarly 
shaped cam-piston HB, provided with jointed 
packing-strips a? a? and slides d' d', substan 
tially as herein shown and described. 
3. In a rotary steam-engine, the combina 
tion of the jointed packing-strips a? a? and 
the slides d with the elongated teeth of the 
pistons provided with holes b, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
ROBERT SCHNECKENBURGER. 
Witnesses: 
ANSEN TOWNLEY, 
EDWARD CARVER. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT SCHNEgEEN 
BURGER, of Jackson, in the county of Jack. 
son and State of Michigan, have invented an 
Improved Rotary Steam-Engine, of which the 
following is a specification. 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of the engine, 
with the cap of the valve-chamber and the 
movable valve removed. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal sectional elevation on line aca, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation throughy y, Fig. 
2. Fig. 4 is a side view of a cam, partly in 
section. Fig. 5 is a front elevation of the mov 
ing valve that is keyed to the shaft. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to furnish a 
rotary steam-engine with novel valves and 
calms that shall produce better results in the 
working of rotary engines than any others 
now in use. 
The valve-chamber A is separated from the 
steam - cylinder B by the partition or dia 
phragm C, through which is cut the steam 
port D for the passage of steam from A to B. 
At the bottom of the cylinder is the exhaust 
port E. Through the elliptic centers of the 
cylinder pass the shafts F and G, having 
keyed upon them the peculiarly-shaped cams 
El H, that are provided with packing-strips a 
a', inserted in slots in the elongated teeth of 
the cams, and capable of being passed out 
Ward against the inner surface of the cylinder 
by the steam, which is admitted under them 
through the holes b b. These strips are each 
made in two parts, with lap-joints, and secured 
to the cams by screws, in slots in which joints 
are the movable slides-d' d', that make them 
steam-tight. 
The elongated teeth do not lap and mesh 
into each other quarteringly after the usual 
method, and I find that this arrangement in 
Sures an easier continuous motion to then. 
In the valve-chamber, and secured upon the 
face of the partition C, near the steam-port, is 
a stop or abutment, I, of an equal depth with 
the thickness of the cut-off valve K, that 
moves on the ring or collar L, which is set 
loosely on the shaft G, that passes through the 
chamber. A portion of the periphery of this 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220084.txt	R. F. MILFORD, 
Pump for Oil-Wells. 
No. 220,084. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1879. 
 
 
 
    
 
 
NPEERs, Piloto-LTHOGRAP 
WASHINGON. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ROBERT F. MILFORD, OF PARKER CITY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MPROVEMENT IN PUMPS FOR O L WELLS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 220,0s4, dated September 30, 1879; application filed 
January 11, 1879. 
aS 
A Working-barrel, valve, and valve-seats 
constructed of glass, as hereinbefore described, 
will be less liable to wear, and not so liable to 
become inoperative, from the fact that sand, 
paraffine, and other adhesive matter in the oil 
Will not adhere to them, it being an ascer 
tained fact that hydrocarbon oil, when in mo 
tion, Will Wash the surfaces of glass, so that 
none of the adhesive matter in the oil will ad 
here to the valve, valve-seat, and working 
barrel when said parts are constructed of glass. 
The casing B of the working-barrel herein 
before described is attached to the pump 
tubing in the usual way and by the ordinary 
Eaving thus described my improvement, 
what I claim as of my inventionis 
1. In a pump for oil-Wells, a glass working 
barrel, A, a glass valve-seat, A', at its lower 
extremity, and a glass valve, B', the said glass 
valve-seat and glass Working-barrelbeing sur 
rounded by a non-metallic protecting materiai: 
and a casing around said material, substan 
tially as herein shown and specified. 
2. In a pump for oil-Wells, a glass working 
barrel, A, a glass valve-seat, A', and a glass 
valve, B', the said glass valve-seat and glass 
working-barrel being surrounded and pro 
tected by plaster-of-paris, or equivalent pro 
tective substance, and the said protective ma 
terial being surrounded by the casing B, sub 
stantially as specified, and for the purposes 
set forth, 
M 
ROBERT F. MILFORD. 
Witnesses: 
JosEPHAVERY, 
WALLACE MARTIN. 
& 
' 
m 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT F. MILFORD, 
of Parker City, in the county of Armstrong, 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Pumps for Oil 
Wells; and I do hereby declare that the foll 
lowing is a full and exact description thereof, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
pumps for oil-wells; and consists in construct 
ing the working-barrel, valves, and valve 
seats of glass, and embedding the same in a 
metallic casing. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will proceed to de 
scribe its construction and operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of my specification, Figure 1 is a side ele 
vation of my improvement in working-barrel 
and valve-chambers of an oil-pump. Fig.2 is 
a vertical and longitudinal section of the same. 
In the drawings, A represents the working 
barrel, which is constructed of glass; B, the 
metallic casing, and C the packing between 
the outer wall of the Working-barrel A and 
the inner wall of the casing B. The Work 
ing-barrel A and the casing B are concentric 
to each other, and the space between the outer 
wall of the working-barrel A and the inner 
wall of the casing B is filled with plaster-of 
paris or other suitable material. 
The valve-seats A' and valves B", are con 
structed of glass, and are of the usual form 
and connected to the working-barrel of the 
pump in the usual manner. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220184.txt	W. R. SMITH, 
Combined Land Roller and Harrow. 
 
No. 22O, 84. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1879. 
N 
... fill 
s 
s 
III 
R 
HCs1HRH N 
H III NHe 
C 
fits 
I 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. SMITH, OF DALLAS, TEXAS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN COMBINED LAND-ROLLER AND HARROW. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 220,154, dated September 30, 1879; application filed 
July 19, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. SMITH, of 
Dallas, in the county of Dallas and State of 
Texas, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Combined Land-Roller and Har 
row; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, which will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to a combined land 
roller and harrow, and in the combination and 
arrangement of parts, as will be hereinafter 
E. fully set forth, and pointed out by the 
O 
In the annexed drawings, which fully illus 
trate my invention, Figure 1 is a plan view. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation, and Figs. 3 and 4 
are detail views, of my invention. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts. 
A represents the frame, composed of the lower 
ligid portion, B, and upper pivoted portions, 
C, the bars C being pivoted at one end near 
the journal-bearings of the roller, and are held 
in place at their other end by buttons a. To 
the under side of the bars C are secured, in 
any suitable manner, the harrow-teeth b, and 
in the bars B are placed openings c, through 
which said teeth pass. Suitable handles d are 
placed upon the outer ends of the bars C to 
admit of their. being swung upward on their 
pivots by the operator for the purpose of clean 
ing the teeth. 
D represents cross-bars, the forward one 
of which has a seat, e, and the rear one a 
scraper, f, secured thereto, the said scraper 
being for the purpose of cleaning the dirt from 
R rollers that accumulates during their revo. 
ution. 
g represents a suitable clevis by which the 
device is drawn. 
E represents the rollers, of which there may 
be any desired number, and working upon 
suitable journals in the bearings F. Said jour 
nal-bearings are perforated for the purpose, as 
will hereinafter be shown, 
G represent standards attached to the rigid 
portion of the frame, and adapted to receive 
the journal-bearings F. These standards are 
provided with perforations corresponding with 
the perforations in the bearings F. When it 
is desired to adjust the rollers, the same is 
done by means of a pin, h, passed through 
the standards and bearings, as shown, whereby 
the rollers can be raised or lowered, as de 
sired. 
The harrow - teeth may, if desired, be re 
moved from the bar C, and small cultivator 
teeth substituted for sowing grain; or the 
teeth may be taken out, leaving the roller 
alone, or vice versa. Any size roller may be 
used, if desired. 
The parts C of the frame may be pivoted 
as shown, or they may be pivoted to the front 
and rear ends of the machine, if desired. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
The frame A, composed of part B, with open 
ings c, and part C, pivoted to the part B, and 
provided with the teeth b, in combination with 
the handles d and button a, for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM ROBERT SMITH, 
Witnesses: 
MICHAEL ROE, 
WM. P. BARLOW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220284.txt	W. HELMIE, 
Gas-Exhauster Governor. 
No. 220,284. 
Patented Oct. 7, 1879. 
/ o og o 3G 
N/ 
 
 
 
  
-- 
--- - -- 
--m-m- -- - 
"PETERS, PHoro-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H E LME, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN GAS-EXHAUSTER GOVERNORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 220,2S4, dated October 7, 1879; application filed 
August 30, 1879. 
d 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM HELME, of 
Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Gas 
Exhauster Governors; and do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description thereof, and consists in a new ar 
rangement for governing gas-exhausters. 
In the ma:ufacture of gas for illuminating 
purposes it has been found advantageous to 
relieve the retorts of the pressure incident to 
the generation of the gas. Various machines 
have been used for this purpose, known as 
gas-exhausters, mostly propelled by steam 
engines, but in some cases by gas-engines; 
but there are some in which a jet of steam is 
introduced requiring no propelling power, but 
require to be governed in the amount of steam 
admitted. 
As the amount of gas produced in the re 
torts during distillation is constantly varying, 
it is necessary to have a corresponding vary 
ing power to relieve them, in order to main 
tain a uniform pressure. 
The object of my invention is to govern the 
action of the exhauster through the propel 
ling power, and thereby secure this uniformity 
of pressure desired in the retorts during dis. 
tillation. Various devices have been used 
for this purpose with varying success, all of 
which depend upon a float of some kind for 
their action. 
In this arrangement no float is used, and all 
the difficulties heretofore met with in their 
use are obviated. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, Figure 
1 is a side elevation. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
elevation through the center of Fig. 1, and 
on a line with AB in Figs. 3 and 4. Fig. 3 
is a ground plan of Figs. 1 and 4, and in con 
nection with the latter shows how the center 
of the pipe, connecting the exhauster with the 
opening F, can be brought opposite and on a 
line with the center of the shaft supporting 
the cylindrically-formed vessel L, whereby the 
use of a stuffing-box or other device for mak 
ing an air-tight joint around a moving shaft 
or spindle can be adopted. Fig. 4 is an end 
view and elevation with clhamber H in front, 
showing the manner of supporting the vessel L. 
L is a cylindrically-formed vessel (except 
ing the top) supported on a shaft running 
through its axis, and so arranged that it can 
make part of a revolution in either direction. 
Extending from near the bottom of this cyl 
inder, as shown at C, to the top on a perpen 
dicular line through the center is a partition 
partly formed by the plate C and partly by 
the center cylinder, D, both of which are 
made fast in an air-tight manner to the 
heads or sides of the vessel inclosing them. 
This partition might be made entirely of the 
plate C by extending it to the top; but I pre 
fer to use a cylinder, as shown, on account of 
its taking the place of that much water at a 
point where it would be of little use, but add 
much to the weight, and consequently to the 
friction, of the shaft journals. In addition to 
this, by having a cylinder at this point the 
water, which is displaced on the one side and 
transmitted to the other by a change of press 
ure, is removed to a greater distance from the 
center of shaft, thereby increasing the lever 
age and power exerted on the arm M, con 
nected with the lever of steam-valve. 
From the top of the cylinder D to the cir. 
cumference at E is an air-tight cover, which 
is made fast in such a manner as to prevent 
the escape of air from either the ends or sides. 
From the chamber thus formed a pipe leads 
to and is connected with the exhauster, as 
shown at F. 
The chamber G, forming the other side or 
half of the cylinder L, is open at the top, so 
that the water therein contained is subject to 
the pressure of the atmosphere. At this open 
ing water is poured in until it rises to about 
the center of the cylinder D. The water nec 
essary to fill the other side will pass under the 
partition at C, expelling the air through the 
opening F. The water will now stand on the 
the same level in both chambers, and the 
weights K at the bottom will keep the parti. 
tion C in a perpendicular position as long as 
the pressure is equal on both sides. 
By removing a portion of the air from cham 
ber H through the opening F the pressure 
W 
 
220,2S4 
therein will be reduced, and a portion of the 
water in chamber G will be transmitted by 
the pressure of the atmosphere to chamber H 
through the opening under the partition at 
C. This increase of weight on that side will 
cause the cylinder I, to turn on its axis, as 
shown by Fig. 2. 
On the other hand, an increase of pressure 
in chamber H will expel a portion of the wa 
ter which would be transmitted to chamber 
G, producing the reverse effect of what is 
shown in Fig. 2, and is the same in effect as 
all increase in the amount of gas generated in 
the retorts would produce, while a diminished 
amount would have a reverse effect. This be 
ing the case, if the pipe leading from the open 
ing F in chamber H is connected with the in. 
let-pipe to the exhauster, all variations of 
pressure at this point will be communicated 
to this chanber, and the effect would be as 
above described. 
Having secured these reverse motions a con 
nection is made in some convenient way with 
the lever operating the steam-valve, as shown 
at M, opening it when the pressure is too great 
and closing when too little. 
Ordinarily, exhausters are run so as to keep 
the pressure in the retorts at zero, or the same 
as the atmosphere; but there are many gas 
works where this is not adhered to, some run 
ning above and others below, as circumstances i 
may require. To vary in either direction the 
weights K are used, as only the center one is 
needed when running at Zero. 
When running under a reduced pressure, or 
a partial vacuum, one or both of those under 
the chamber G is used, and those under H 
left out. 
When an increase of pressure is desired the 
weights are reversed. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent: 
The vessel L, containing water or other liq 
uid, having a cylindrically-formed bottom and 
supported on a shaft, with journals parallel 
with its axis, and having a partition formed 
of the plate C and inner cylinder, D, extend. 
ing from near the bottom to the top, and there 
connecting with a cover which extends to the 
outer edge or circumference at E, forming an 
air-tight chamber above the water of that 
portion or half of the vessel, in combination 
with the opening F, with which to make con 
nection with the inlet-pipe to a gas-exhauster 
or other gas-conveying pipe about a gas-works, 
for the purpose as shown and described. 
WILLIAM HEIME, 
Witnesses: 
JNo. McILHENNY, 
EDW. M. 3IILINGs. 
AP 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220384.txt	G. H. JONES. 
La, thes for Dental-Surgery. 
No. 22O,384. 
Patented Oct. 7, 1879. 
 
PEERs, photo-liriographER, washigton, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE HORATIOJONES, OF 57 GREAT RUSSELL STREET, BLOOMSBURY, 
COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND. 
IMPROVEMENT IN LATHES FOR DENTAL SURGERY. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 220,3S4, dated October 7, 1879; application filed 
July 3, 1879; patented in England, April 18, 1879. 
" 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE HoRATIO 
JoNES, of 57 Great Russell Street, Bloomsbury, 
in the county of Middlesex, England, surgeon 
dentist, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
have invented or discovered new and useful 
Improvements in Lathes Employed in Dental 
Surgery and for other similar purposes; and 
I, the said GEORGE HORATIOJONES, do hereby 
declare the nature of the said invention and in 
what manner the same is to be performed to be 
particularly described and ascertained in and 
by the following statement thereof-that is to 
Say: 
This invention has for its object improve 
ments in lathes employed in dental surgery 
and other similar purposes, whereby the small 
particles of precious metals, such as gold and 
platinum, which are now usually wasted in the 
operation of grinding, are preserved, at the 
same time that a constant and sufficient sup 
ply of Water is insured on the grinding-stone 
When the same is in use, 
And in order that my said invention may be 
better understood and readily carried into ef. 
fect, I will now, with the aid of the accompa 
nying drawing, which shows a view, in front 
elevation, of a dentist's lathe with my improved 
mechanical arrangement adapted thereto, pro 
ceed more particularly to describe and ascer 
tain the same. 
In order to effect the objects above men 
tioned I affix to one side of the lathe, in any 
convenient position, a tank, B, of any suitable 
form and dimensions, the bottom whereof is 
of an oval or conical shape, and is provided 
in its center with a convenient orifice, which 
is closed by means of a screw-nut, D. I then 
fix a small force-pump, A, on suitable bearings 
a, placed about midway in the frame of the 
lathe, which pump is actuated by means of a 
shaft-wheel and eccentric, in connection with 
the driving-wheel of the lathe, as shown at C 
in the accompanying drawing. Attached to the 
base of such force-pump is a suitable supply 
pipe, E, which is connected with the tank B, 
and which supply-pipe serves to feed the force 
pump with Water from the tank. 
In order to conduct such water to the grind 
stone a second supply-pipe, F, is attached to 
the side of the force-pump, which extends up 
Ward and terminates in a curve immediately 
over the grinding-wheel. 
When the driving-wheel of the lathe is set 
in motion the water is pumped out from the 
top of the tank through the supply-pipe E, and 
conducted through the tube F, from the curved 
extremity of which it drops onto a sponge or 
other suitable porous material, so arranged as 
to touch the grinding-wheel, and through 
which the water passes over the grinding 
wheel, and thence falls into the trough G, con 
nected with which is a suitable outlet-pipe, H, 
passing into the tank B, and extending nearly 
to the bottom of the same, as shown in the 
drawing. 
As the Water so passes into the trough G, and 
discharges itself through the outlet - pipe H 
into the tank B, it carries with it all the mi 
nute particles of precious metal which become 
detached in the operation of grinding,and which 
have hitherto been Wasted, and deposits them 
as a residuum in the bottom of the tank; and 
when a sufficient accumulation of such parti 
cles has taken place the screw-nut D is re 
moved, and they are washed down the conical 
or oval sides of the base of the tank, and re 
ceived into any suitable vessel, whence they 
are removed and submitted to the ordinary 
process of refining, and otherwise treated, so 
as to render them fit for reutilization. 
I form the base of the tank of an oval or 
conical shape, in order to insure all the parti 
cles of precious metal escaping therefrom when 
the screw-nut D is removed. 
It will be observed that the supply-pipe E 
extends nearly to the top of the tank, which is 
kept filled with water to the dotted line I, 
whereby I insure the water at the bottom of 
the tank remaining unagitated, and so allow. 
ing the minute particles of metal to precipitate 
themselves to the bottom instead of being held 
in suspension by the agitation of the water. 
It is also obvious that by my improved ar 
rangement of mechanism a constant and suffi 
cient supply of water is insured to the grind 
Stone. 
My improved mechanical arrangement, as 
hereinbefore described, may be adapted with 
advantage to jewelers and other lathes used 
 
2 
220,3S4 
assif. 
for grinding precious metals and materials, as wheel, the trough under the grinding-wheel, 
well as to those employed in dental surgery. and the pipe for discharging the water and 
Having thus particularly described and as-grindings from the water-trough into the lower 
certained the nature of my said invention and part of the tank. 
the manner of carrying the same into opera 
tion, I would have it understood that what I 
claim is- 
The combination, substantially as before set 
forth, of the water-supply tank, the pump 
drawing water from the upper part of said 
tank and discharging it upon the grinding- 
33 Southampton Buildings, London. 
2 Edith Grove, West Brompton. 
GEORGE HORATIO JONES. 
Witnesses: 
SHIRLEY Bow DEN, 
R. G. WHITE, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220484.txt	 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
HENRY B. MALONE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN FRE-LIGHTERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2204S4, dated October 14, 1879; application filed 
August 11, 1879. 
an 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY B. MALONE, of 
the city of Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented a certain com 
pound, called Chicago Fire-Lighter, to be 
used instead of wood or other material in the 
kindling or lighting of fires, of which the fol. 
lowing is a specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in mix 
ing the various materials and chemicals, and 
in the proportions hereinafter mentioned. 
To prepare the Chicago fire-lighter, take of 
rosin, in a crude state, one hundred pounds; 
maple, hickory, or other hard-wood or soft 
Wood sawdust, (hard-wood sawdust being the 
best) in a dry state, twenty-five pounds; red 
sanders or other coloring - matter of like 
quality, one pound; granulated nitrate of pot 
ash, three pounds; sugar, dark or otherwise, 
three pounds; granulated brimstone, three 
pounds; petroleum, four pounds. This will 
make of the compound Qne hundred and thirty 
eight pounds, or thereabout, the mixture de 
scribed to be made as follows: First, melt the 
rosin, with the sugar, petroleum, and red-san 
ders, or other coloring-matter, in a kettle or 
other vessel by themselves, and bring the same 
to a boiling heat; then, second, mixin another 
kettle or vessel the potash, brimstone, and 
sawdust. After being thoroughly mixed, turn 
same into the kettle or vessel containing the 
liquid compound. This mixture should then, 
while in a warm state, be thoroughly stirred, 
and also while warm be placed or turned into 
molds made of thin pieces of board or other 
material. The size of the mold I would recom 
mend to be about six by ten inches square and 
one and three-fourths of an inclh in thickness. 
The composition, after being turned into the 
molds, is then by the use of a trowel or knife 
cut into blocks two inches square, which must 
be done while the composition is warm. I 
make the molds of the size designated for the 
reason that they are more readily handled in 
that size, and can be more readily placed on 
the market; and I make the cake of the size 
designated for the reason that it is sufficiently 
large for the kindling of an ordinary fire. 
The composition, when cool, is ready for use, 
and can be lighted with a friction-match. The 
rosin and sawdust are, among other reasons, 
used to hold the chemicals together, and to 
render the compound made as described non 
explosive. The sugar is used not only to more 
firmly adhere the compound as combustible 
matter, but also as a disinfectant. 
This Chicago fire-lighter, when prepared and 
made as designated, will not decompose by 
age, for the reason that none of the component 
parts, after manufacture in the manner de 
scribed, are subject to decomposition, and the 
same, by reason of the addition of the rosin 
and sawdust, is rendered non-explosive, and 
is not affected by dampness. 
I claim as my invention 
A compound consisting of the materials 
above set forth, when mixed and made sub 
stantially in the proportions and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
D. W. C. CASTLE, 
W. E. LEFFINGWELL. 
Witnesses: 
EHENRY B. MAILONE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220584.txt	F. W. DE WINE. 
Chain-Pump and Curb, 
No. 220,584. 
Patented Oct. 14, 1879. 
 
2 
6 
N 
/ 
N 
e/ 
 
722 (5. 
-in 
-i 
  
| 
7 
: 
=g. Y 
--- 
. 
 
 
 
 
INVENTOR: 
17. 2 othe/ 
c/2%. 6 
ATTORNEYS, 
N, PETERs, Photo-LithogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK W. DEVINE, OF CARROLLTON, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF THREE. 
FOURTHS OF HIS RIGHT TO LAWRENCE A. DEVINE, R. W. GUNTER, 
AND B. MAGILL, ALL OF SAME PLACE; ONE-FOURTH TO EACH. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CHAIN-PUMPS AND CURBS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 220,5S4, dated October 14, 1879; application filed 
August 28, 1879. 
. To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK W. DEVINE, of 
Carrollton, in the county of Carroll and State 
of Missouri, have invented a new and Im 
proved Chain-Pump and Curb; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of the interior of the 
curb, the removable side wall being taken 
a Way, and the pump being shown in a well. 
Fig.2 is a cross-section through the curb at 
the line aa, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an end view of 
the knockdown curb when folded, the dot 
ted lines indicating its position when recon 
Structed. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in chain-pumps and curbs; and it con 
sists, first, in constructing the curb or cas 
ing above the ground in a hinged, folding, 
and readily-portable shape, as hereinafter de 
Scribed; and in combining the suspended chain 
With a pipe or tube terminating at one end in 
a discharge-spout, and at the other end in the 
Well in the shape of a bent neck having a fun 
nel-shaped mouth, the bend being made larger 
than the other portion of the pipe and pro 
Vided With an opening for the purpose herein 
after described. 
In the drawings, A represents the chain 
Wheel, which is of the usual pattern, and is 
Provided at suitable intervals with buckets a 
of rubber or other suitable material. This 
chain is suspended upon a sprocket-wheel, B, 
at the top of the Well, which wheel is attached 
to a shaft, C, provided with a crank-handle 
for turning the same. This chain passes down 
into the Well through the pipe D, one end of 
Which terminates in the discharge-spout E, at 
the top of the well, and the other end of which 
dips down into the water of the well, and then 
turns and terminates in the funnel-shaped 
mouth F, which receives the entering chain and 
prevents it from catching on the edges. This 
pipe D may be made entirely of metal, or the 
lower bent portion may be made of metal and 
the upper portion of wood. In the bend of 
this pipe, at the bottom, is formed an opening, a great saving in freight and storage, 
d, through which the water gains access to 
the tube when the Water in the Well falls be 
low the funnel-shaped mouth. 
As the chain passes through the pipe D its 
bend hangs suspended in the enlarged lower 
portion of the bent pipe without coming in 
contact with either the top or bottom of the 
Walls of the pipe at this point, and, as there 
is no sliding friction and no lower sprocket 
wheel to be traversed, the pump may be op 
erated at an expenditure of much less power. 
In securing the pipe in place it is bolted to 
the curb, as shown at e, and is also preferably 
stayed or braced in the lower portion of the 
well. 
When the pipe D is made entirely of metal is 
is composed of sections having screw-threaded 
connection, as at f; but when the upper por 
tion is made of Wood, as at g, the Wooden por 
tion is connected to the bent metal portion be 
low by means of a screw-threaded metal col 
lar, h. 
When the funnel-shaped end of the pipe 
extends above the water-level, the air which 
is carried down by the buckets into the bent 
tube serves to aerate and purify the Water. In 
such case the opening in the bend of the tube 
has an important function, in that it allows 
the air carried down by the chain to bubble 
up through the Water of the well, and also 
permits the Water to gain access to the chain, 
so as to be carried up to the spout. 
In constructing the curb or casing, one of 
its sides, G, is connected to the end walls, H. 
H, by means of hinges i, while the other side, 
G", is attached to the outer edges of the end 
walls, either by cleats j and hooks k, or by 
dovetail grooves l; or both sides may be fast 
ened by the dovetail grooves. 
I is the cover of the curb, which is arranged 
on the top of the same in inclined position, 
and is provided with a perforated ventilating 
top, and is held in position by cleats, so as to 
be detachable. This construction of folding 
or knockdown curb permits these parts to be 
packed within a small compass and transporta 
ed with facility, occupying only about one 
third the room of the old form and securing 
 
 
 
2 
220,5 S4 
With respect to the perforated or ventilat 
ing cover to the curb, I would state that I do 
not claim this feature. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is - 
1. A knockdown curb or casing for a chain 
pump, consisting of the side walls, G G', end 
walls, HH, and detachable cover, the said end 
and side walls being detachably fastened by 
hinges and hooks or their equivalent, as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with a chain, A, sus 
pended upon a sprocket-wheel, of the pipe D, 
terminating at one end in a discharge-spout, 
and formed at its lower end with an enlarged 
bend having an opening, d, and a funnel, F, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
FRANK W. DEWINE. 
Witnesses: 
WM. G. PATTON, 
DAVID J. DEWINE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220684.txt	J. F. WALKER, . 
Corn-Planter, 
 
No. 220,684. 
Patented Oct. 14, 1879. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
JAMES F. WALKER, OF WHITEEIALL, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CORN. PLANTERS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 220,6s4, dated October 14, 1879; application filed 
s 
June 28, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
hub, g, within which the grain is put. This 
Be it known that I, JAMES F. WALKER, of hollow hub is provided with an opening, g, 
Whitehall, in the county of Green and State closed by a slide or other suitable door, g. h. 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and itse 
h are a series of hollow spokes, arranged at 
ful Improvements in Corn-Planters, and do 
regular distances around the hub, and con 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
nected with the grain-chamber and with the 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
the rim b of either wheel, which is perforated, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
as shown, to permit the grain to drop into the 
which it pertains to make and use the same, 
ground. The inner end of the hollow spoke is 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
so attached as to leave a cross-opening, h, 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
through it at the periphery of the hubg. With 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
in this opening place a slide-bar, l, the outer 
tion. 
end of which is pressed by a spring, h, while 
This invention has for its object to furnish a 
its inner end projects beyond the spoke, so 
planter which will drop and cover two rows at 
that it will strike against the came ore when 
a time, and by which is obviated the difficulty 
the latter is thrown outward toward the wheel. 
of gain or loss in the dropping mechanism 
The hub is perforated by a hole, g, which 
when the machine is used on uneven ground. 
lets the grain into the gage-hole hin the slide 
It consists in having the grain-boxes, drop 
bar l?. The grain is received into the hole h", 
ping-slides, and other dropping and covering 
and afterward the proper movement of the 
mechanism all united in and forming a part of 
slide lets it drop into the hollow spoke, which 
the wheels on which the frame is supported, 
carries it down through the wheels l or band 
all of which will be hereinafter fully explained. 
deposits it in the ground. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
Over the opening of the hollow spoke in 
tion, showing one of the wheels in vertical sec 
the wheels b or b', I place a plunger, k, which 
tion, and with the lhitching attachments re 
is attached by any suitable means, so as to be 
moved. Fig. 2 is a side elevation, partly in 
held rigidly in place during the operation of 
section, of one of the wheels. Fig. 3 shows a 
the machine. 
plunger attachment with marking-wings. 
When the machine is not employed in drop 
a is the axle, on which the wheels b b are 
ping grain the plungers are removed and placed 
supported, and to which the levers and other 
in a suitable box attached to the frame, after 
mechanism are attached. The wheel b is rig 
which the machine can be taken onto the 
idly attached to and turns with the axle a. 
roads and moved from place to place without 
The wheel b is supported on the axle so that 
injury. 
it will turn thereon. On the axle is also placed 
The plunger k is composed of a rectangular 
a clutch, c, moved by a lever, c', which is 
spout, k, open at its ends and on one side, and 
adapted to engage with theside of the hub of 
provided with wings or flanges k, by which it 
the wheel band hold the latter so that it will 
is attached to the wheels bor b. On its side, 
turn with the axle and simultaneously with the 
close down to its flanges, I hinge a blade, k, 
wheel b. 
so constructed and arranged that it will turn 
To the axle, I affix the thills did, or other 
into the spout k", as shown at ac, Fig. 2. This 
means to which the horse or horses are at 
blade has on it a small weight, which causes 
tached. To the thills or framing d, I attach, 
it to drop more readily into the spout as the 
by suitable hangers d", a guide bar or trough, 
wheel revolves. As the wheel revolves and 
d, in which I place the sliding barsee, on the 
the plunger is brought over to the front the 
outer ends of which are fixed cams e. e. The 
blade ki drops into its position, as shown at 
bars are moved outward towardl or inward 
ac, Fig. 2, and forms a small triangular space, 
away from the wheels by the leverse' e. f is 
k", into which the grain is dropped when the 
the driver's seat, supported on standards af. 
spoke h, reaches the vertical line below the 
fixed to the frame d. 
hub. When the plunger reaches the ground 
Each wheel b blis constructed with a hollow 
the blade and spout are forced into the earth 
w 
s 
 
 
2 
220,654 
by the weight of the wheels and machine. At 
the same time the slides h are engaged by the 
camse'e and are pushed outward, receive the 
grain, and when they clear the cam are thrown 
back by the spring h and drop the grain 
through the spoke into the triangular cham 
ber k. The further revolution of the wheel 
turns the blade back out of and opens the 
end of the spout, so that the grain is dropped 
into the opening in the ground formed by the 
plunger k. 
The camsee may be drawn away from the 
wheels, so that the slides li will not be re 
moved, and either one may be fixed to operate 
the slides of its own wheel, while the slides of 
the other wheel can be left idle, so that, if de 
sired, one row only will be planted. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown the plunger k pro 
vided with two wings, m, which project lat 
erally from opposite sides, and are designed 
to better mark the location of the hill planted. 
Plungers so constructed may be employed; 
but ordinarily I find the plunger without wings 
gives satisfactory results. 
The operation of the machine will be read 
ily comprehended from the description here 
in before given. 
When the end of a row is reached the drop 
ping mechanism is thrown out of gear by mov 
ing the cams ec away from the slides. The 
clutch c is disengaged and the machine can 
then be turned. 
By means of the marks made the machine 
can be readily arranged to plant the first hills 
of the next rows in proper line. If the plun 
gers are not in proper line, the wheel can read 
ily be lifted and turned to bring the said 
plungers in proper line, after which the horses 
are driven forward and the planting proceeds. 
This planter is light enough to be drawn by 
one horse; but two may be used, if desired. 
The draft is light, and the action of the drop 
ping devices is perfect. 
The number of hollow spokes employed may 
be varied according to the pleasure of the 
manufacturer. In the device represented in 
my drawings I have four hollow spokes. In 
case it should be desired to drop the grain at 
greater distances, two or three of the slides 
can be thrown back and fastened, so that they 
will not be touched by the cams e'e', while 
the remaining slides will do the dropping. 
It will also be seen that the dropping can 
be done by one wheel at a time. 
In planting small seeds which need but to 
be on the surface of the ground, the plungers 
need not be used, and a small field-roller can 
be rigged to run in rear of the wheels, whiclh 
will press the seeds deep enough into the 
ground. 
What I claim as my invention is 
In a seeding-machine supported on wheels b 
b', constructed with hollow hubs and spokes, 
as described, the plunger k, constructed with 
the rectangular spout k, open on one side, and 
having the blade khinged thereto, so that it 
will turn into and its end project beyond the 
end of said spout, and having the flanges k 
arranged so that it may readily be attached 
to or detached from the rim of said wheel, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of two 
witnesses. 
JAMES F, WALKER. 
Witnesses: 
G. W. ARMSTRONG, 
F. M. PATTERSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220785.txt	2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 22O,785. 
2 / 
A. E. BARTHEL. 
I, OCk for Fire-Arms. 
Patented Oct. 21, 1879. 
2 
 
 
2. 
le H, 
ee 
 
 
(E 2S, 
-- 
NyNaNS Ge. - - a 
  
xt 23a 
 
 
Attest. 
'Z2 
 
- 
/avendor: 
(Zei6%azz/ 
z2, . 
A. E. BARTHEL. 
L00k for Fire-Arms, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 22O,785. 
Patented Oct. 21, 1879. 
. 
 
S S S 
 2 24 Z Z ZZ ZZZ Z 2% 
l/227 
 
  
2N 
AES SN 2NNA 
 
 
 
 
M 
-- 
- m/-, -1-a- - - t- A. 
w 
If, iii, 
I -13S is is sitti 
- 
s 
- - - 
% zS 
s 
/zzoz. 
41. 
Azozr. 
THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHoto-LTHo, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
A. EDWARD BART HEL, OF DETROIT, MICH IGAN. 
IMPROVEMENT N LOCKS FOR FIRE ARMS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 220,7s5, dated Oetober 21, 1879; application filed 
February 17, 1879. 
S. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBRECHT EDWARD 
BARTHEL, of Detroit, in the county of Wayne 
and State of Michigan, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Revolving Fire. 
Arms, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to a hammerless self. 
cocking and rebounding fire-arm, the improve 
ments being applicable to shotguns, rifles, or 
revolvers, either single-loaders or magazine 
The object of my invention is to simplify the 
construction, to dispense with the usual pro 
jecting parts, and to obtain rapidity of firing; 
and the invention consists in certain novel 
features of construction, set forth hereinafter, 
and shown in the accompanying drawings, 
wherein 
Figure is a section lengthwise of the stock, 
showing the firing mechanism in elevation 
and in its normal position. Fig.2 is a similar 
view with the firing-pin retracted. Figs. 3, 
4, 5, and 6 are detail views of the parts of the 
firing mechanism. Figs. 7 and 8 are, respect 
ively, a longitudinal section and elevation of 
the gun in modified form. Fig. 9 is a sec 
tional plan on line acac of Fig. 7. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, B is the stock, 
and C the revolving barrel-piece, of a shot 
gun or rifle. A is a fixed breech plate or 
block behind the barrels. 
The firing mechanism is contained within a 
cavity in stock B, behind plate A, and the 
lower side of the cavity is closed by the trig 
ger-plates, that is formed with a trigger-guard, 
o, as usual. 
The firing-pin a is fitted to slide in the 
breech-cavity, and is projected by a spring, e. 
A trigger-lever, b, is fulcrumed at i, and is 
formed at its lower end as a trigger, r. This 
lever b is mortised at a' (see Fig. 5) for the 
firing-pin a to pass through it, and also passes 
at each side of the magazine-tube h. The fir 
ing-pin a is mortised to receive a pawl or dog, 
c, that is hung loosely on cross-pin d, so that 
 
- 
. 
the moving end of dog c projects below pin a, 
and engages with the shoulder. b' of lever b 
when the parts are in a normal position. . 
The magazine-tube h is inserted lengthwise 
through stock B, and its inner end screws in 
to the breech-plate A, the tube thereby serv 
ing as a means for securing the parts to 
gether. 
The tube may be made use of as a maga 
zine from which the cartridges will be pro 
jected into the barrels as they come opposite 
tube h in succession. 
Around tube h is a spiral spring, f, that 
bears upon lever b, and returns the lever to 
position after firing. 
The parts described operate as follows: By 
drawing the trigger and lever b back, the 
shoulder b' of lever bacts upon dog c, and the 
dog not being capable of further downward 
movement, the pin a is forced back to the po 
sition shown in Fig. 2, and its spring e is com 
pressed. v. In the first-named position, the 
point of contact between b' and c is in advance 
of the fulcrum i, and as lever b moves the 
shoulder b' drops downward until it clears c, 
and permits pin a to spring forward to fire the 
cartridge. Upon releasing lever b after firing, 
it is thrown forward by its spring f, the shoul 
derb raises dog c, which latter drops to place 
as soon as the shoulder has passed. The pin 
a is caused to rebound from contact with the 
cartridge by means of the fingers ll, formed 
on lever l (see Figs. 1, 5, and 6) and project 
ing upon pin a. The pin a has curved-side 
lugs or projections, n., (see Figs. 1, 3, and 4) 
that are acted upon by fingers on the return 
movement of lever b, and the pin a thereby 
forced back slightly. 
In Figs. 7, 8, and 9 a modification is shown, 
whereby I dispense with the projecting trig 
ger-guard o. In this construction the tube h 
is not used, the trigger' is within the breech 
cavity, and access is had to the trigger through 
apertures in, formed in the side plates of the 
breech. The trigger-lever b is returned to 
position by a plate-spring, fl. 
By the above-described construction I ob. 
tain the required movements with simple 
2 
220, is 5 
mechnism having but few parts. The sides 
of the stock are smooth, having no projecting 
portions to catchin the clothing or bushes. 
Having thus described my invention, Iclaim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters. Pat 
ent 
1. In a fire-arm, the combination and ar 
rangement of firing-pin a, provided with a 
dog, c, the trigger-lever b, having a shoulder, 
b', and the springs ef, substantially as de 
scribed and shown, and for the purposes set 
forth, 
2. The combination of the firing-pin a, pro 
vided with lugs in, and trigger-leverb, having 
fingers l, whereby a retraction of the firing 
pin is caused by the return movement of the 
lever, as set forth. 
- 
ALBRECEIT EDWARD BARTHEL. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT M. HENRY, 
HORACE. H. JoNES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220885.txt	E. SPIES, 
Pantaloons and other Garments. 
No. 220,885. 
Patented Oct. 21, 1879. 
 
E. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EDWARD SPIES, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
IMPROVEMENT N PANTALOONS AND OTHER GARMENTS. 
al 
specificatioi forming part of Letters Patent No. 220, SS5, dated October 21, 1879; application filed 
September 18, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD SPLEs, of 
Washington, District of Columbia, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Wearing Apparel; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description thereof, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
wearing apparel; and the object of the same is 
to provide a means for tightening and loosen 
ing the waist of pantaloons, &c. 
Heretofore such devices have been made by 
sewing a strap to each side of the back of the 
garment, one of these straps having a buckle 
on one of its ends, or by a short strap and 
buckle, or equivalent take-up device extending 
from the side seam to a distance from the mid 
dle on the same side of the garment, and hav 
ing two inclined gores in the rear of the side 
The first methodis objectionable, as it gives 
an unsightly appearance to the garment by 
bunching the material in the seat. The second 
is also objectionable, for the reason that when 
the side straps are tightened they draw the 
material in a bunch at the side and twist the 
legs of the garments out of shape, which makes 
them hang awkwardly on the Wearer. 
The object of the present invention is to pro 
vide a means which can be easily operated, 
and by which the garment may be tightened 
without discomfort to the wearer, and without 
making any unsightly bulk of material at 
either the back or sides of the garment, and 
also Without causing the garment to twist out 
of shape. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a view, 
showing the straps loosened, and Fig.2 a view 
showing the same drawn tight. 
A represents the tightening-strap, which is 
Sea 
, ; ' ' 
 
r 
sewed or otherwise secured at its center to the 
back of the garment, as shown. 
B B are buckles attached to the small straps 
bb, which are secured to the garment a little 
behind the side seams and below the waist 
a (i. 
CC are the gores, which are inserted from 
the waistband and located between the buckles 
BB and center of the strap A. 
Where gores have been used heretofore they 
were placed at the side of the garment, and, 
by tightening the straps, were made to bunch 
and bag in such manner as to present an un 
sightly appearance. By my construction this 
is prevented. The gore is made to lap over 
one-half by making a crease in the center of 
the gore, and to lap over one-fourth by insert 
ing a piece of stiffening equal to one-fourth 
the width of the gore. The lap can be length 
ened or shortened by lengthening or shorten 
ing the stiffening. 
The advantages of my strap above all others 
are apparent, because, first, it takes less time, 
trouble, and material to make it, which, in 
the eyes of a workman, is a very important 
feature; and, second, it is easily operated, and 
does not allow the buckles to hitch off to one 
side, as the old method does, while being hur 
riedly tightened. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire \to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
The combination, in pantaloons and other 
garments provided with the back gores, CC, 
of the straps AA, centrally attached to the 
said garment, buckles B B, and tabs bb, when 
constructed and arranged for operation sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EDWARD SPES. 
Witnesses: 
WM. B. UPPERMAN, 
FRANK GALT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US220985.txt	A. & C. A. NORLING. 
Cultivator, 
No. 220,985. 
Patented Oct. 28, 1879. 
2. 
2. 
WITNESSES fi. 
21 6. 
 
c. 22.2 NyENTORs 
MLll 
N. Peters, PHOTO-Lithograp:ER, WASHINGTON, . C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST NORLING AND CHARLES A. NORLING, OF STANTON, IOWA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CULTIVATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 220,955, dated October 28, 1879; application filed 
April 5, 1879. 
The nature of our invention consists in the near the rear end. 
- 
-- 
passing one over and the other under the 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that we, AUGUST NORLING and tongue, and pivoted by one bolt. The ends of 
CHARLES A. NORLING, of Stanton, in the the two bars E are fastened together, and a 
county of Montgomery and State of Iowa, single-tree, F, is connected to each end of the 
have invented certain new and useful Improve- double-tree thus constructed. 
ments in Cultivators; and we do hereby de- 
Near each end of the double-tree is con 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex- nected a rod, d, which extends rearward and 
act description thereof, reference being had to has a short chain, e, attached to its rear end. 
the accompanying drawings, and to the let- This chain connects with a double eccentric, 
G, pivoted to the under side of the tongue 
ters of reference marked thereon. 
construction and arrangement of a cultivator 
The double eccentric G is constructed as 
which is simplein construction, light and dura- shown in Fig.1, having at each side two points, 
ble, and easily manipulated, as will be herein. h. and i, at unequal distances from the pivot.f. 
after more fully set forth. 
The chains e e are connected to the rear points, 
In order to enable others skilled in the art ii, which are closer to the pivot than the front 
to which our invention appertains to make and points, h. h. 
use the same, We will now proceed to describe 
In operation, when one horse pulls more 
its construction and operation, referring to the than the other, the double eccentric will be 
annexed drawings, which form a part of this turned on its pivot, and the pointh of the ec 
specification, and in which- 
centric, which is thrown outward against the 
Figure 1 is a plan view of our improved cul- chain, will take up more on that side than 
tivator. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of one what is gained on the other. Hence the draft 
end of the axle and coupling. Fig. 3 is a front is always quickly and evenly equalized and 
view of the double-tree. Fig. 4 is an enlarged the team kept in proper position. 
To the vertical part of each axle-section C 
view of the coupling. Fig. 5 is a side view of 
one of the plow-beams. Fig. 6 shows the is, by clips k k, secured a plate, m, from which 
method of attaching the shovel. 
project two arms, in n. This plate and arms 
HHare two cultivator-beams or plow-beams 
having at a suitable point on its under side a 
metal loop or box, a, through which are passed lhaving their forward ends united together, 
two perforated metal bars, B. B. 
and arms pp are also firmly fastened to said 
parts, CC, each made in the form shown in. 
The coupling for connecting the beams with 
Fig. 2, so that when connected together they the axle is shown in Fig. 4, and consists of a 
will constitute an arched axle with spindle at block, I, with four arms, s, projecting from the 
each end for the reception of the wheel D. 
same. Two of these arms or pins are inserted 
The inner ends of the axle-sections are in- in the arms in n, and the other two in the arms 
serted between the perforated bars B B, and pp, thus forming two joints at right angles to 
fastened thereto by bolts. It will readily be each other, which admits of the beams being 
seen that the axle thus constructed can be raised and lowered and swung from side to 
contracted and expanded as required for regu- side, but prevents any twisting of the beams. 
lating the distance between the shovels by 
By the construction of the connection as de 
simply removing the fastening-bolts, moving scribed, the beams may be raised and thrown 
the axle-sections out or in between the bars B, forward on the axle, which leaves the rear 
and fastening the bolts again. A brace, b, ex-sides of the shovels upward, so that rain will 
tends from the outer end of each axle-section not injure their front sides. 
- 
In going to and from the field the beams . 
to the tongue, as shown. 
To the tongue A is pivoted a double-tree, may be hung upon hooks at the ends of a 
composed of two metal bars, E. E., which are cross-bar, J, fastened at the rear end of the 
curved substantially as shown in Fig. 3, and tongue. 
A represents the tongue of the cultivator, may be adjusted up and down, as desired. 
The axle of the cultivator is made in two forward ends of the bams. 
- 
 
220,9S5 
In our equalizer a certain distance of its 
outer edge on each side, from the rear point, 
i, to a point, ac, is on a true circle, having the 
pivot at its center, and from the point a to 
the frontpoint, h, the eccentricity gradually in 
creases. The object of this particular con 
struction is as follows: The two horses can 
never step so nearly alike but what first one 
and then the other will be a trifle ahead, and 
it is not advisable to have the eccentric act as 
such for such slight and continual changes in 
the position. It is only when one horse gets 
too far ahead of the other that it should act. 
Our equalizer, by its pecular construction, 
accomplishes this, for supposing that the horses 
should be exactly even and then one step a trifle 
ahead, the equalizer turns; but as long as it 
does not turn beyond the point at there is no 
change in the draft; but let it pass beyond 
this point and then at once the line of draft 
from the forward horse commences to change 
in Ward until it may finally be in line with the 
pivot, and the line of draft from the rear lorse 
is thrown more and more outward. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the dividled adjusta 
ble axle C C with the perforated connecting 
bars B B, the vertically-adjustable arms in m. 
on each end of the axle, the four-armed block 
I, and the cultivator-beam having arms p p, 
all constructed as described, whereby the cul 
tivators call be adjusted out and ill and up 
and down, and can be manipulated in any di 
rection without twisting, substantially as and 
for the purposes herein set forth. 
2. The double eccentric G, having on each 
side the points hi, at different distances from 
the pivot, and a certain portion on each side, 
from i to ac, on a true circle, in combination 
with the chains, rods, and double-tree, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes herein set 
forth. 
3. The combination of the jointed beam H. 
H', link I, spring jaws or snap OO, and the 
rod P, with cone , whereby when the joint 
of the brace is broken the two parts do not 
separate, but remain together, substantially as 
and for the purposes herein set forth. 
4. The combination of the beam, the shovel 
R, pins ac, stationary plate S, and adjustable 
plate V, as and for the purposes set forth. 
AUGUST NORLING. 
CHARLES A. NORLING, 
Witnesses: 
C. L. EWERT, 
JOHN A. ELLIS, 
The plow or cultivator beams are each made 
in two parts, the front part, H, being connect 
ed to the axle, as described. The rear part, 
H', of the beam is preferably made of two 
bars having their forward ends pivoted on op 
posite sides of the part H, and the said bars 
are held a proper distance apart by one or 
more pins or bolts, t. 
The rear end of the part His shouldered, 
as shown at a in IFig. 5, to form a stop against 
the pint, to prevent the lower part, H of the 
beam from being turned forward beyond the 
proper point. 
The two parts H H are connected in the foll 
lowing manner: In an eye on the under side 
of the part H, a suitable distance from the 
front end, is connected an elongated link, L, 
to the end of which are fastened two spring 
jaWS, O O. To the part H is connected a rod, 
l, which runs forward between the jaws O O 
and into the link. On this rod is attached a 
COne, 2, Over which the jaws OO spring and 
grasp the base of the cone for holding the 
beam in proper position for work. 
As long as the plow or shovel does not strike 
any obstruction the spring-jaws will hold the 
beam properly; but when any obstruction is 
encountered the jaws open and allow the shovel 
to turn backward out of the way. As soon as 
the obstruction is passed the operator can 
easily with his foot, in an instant, bring the 
shovel back in place, without the necessity of 
Stopping the team even for a moment. 
The particular construction of the snap-con 
nection of the brace-rod P is immaterial, as the 
Same may be constructed in various ways. Our 
invention in this respect lies particularly in a 
divided brace-rod connected by a snap and ap 
plied to a jointed beam. 
R is the plow or shovel, which is connected 
to the lower end of the beam as follows: The 
shovel is provided on its rear side with a shoe 
of suitable size to admit of two pins, no ac, pro 
jecting from each side thereof. These pills are 
passed through slightly-enlarged holes in two 
plates, S and W. The plate S is permanently 
fastened to one side of the beam, while the 
lplate Wis provided with slots y), through 
which are passed bolts & 2, so that said plate 
W can be adjusted and held at any point de 
sired. By these means the shovel can be ad 
justed straight or inclined to either side, so as 
to throw the dirt in either direction, as re 
quired. Both plates may be adjustable, if 
deemed necessary. 
We are aware that a double-eccentric equal 
izer is not new, and we do not claim such, 
broadly, as our invention. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221086.txt	W. D. MIDIDLETON, 
Stove-Pipe Shelf. 
No. 221,086. 
Patented Oct. 28, 1879. 
 
  
 
I 
 
 
  
 
 
 
St. 27 
& JS 2. 
traig 
T 2. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. MIDDLETON, OF ELKEIART, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
OF HIS RIGHT TO WESLEY MIDDLETON, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN STOVE-PIPE SHELVES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 221,0s6, dated October 28, 1879; application filed 
May 23, 1879. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. D. MIDDLE 
TON, of Elkhart, in the county of Elkhart and 
State of Indiana, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Stove - Pipe 
Shelves; and I do hereby declare that the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to make 
and use the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form a part of 
this specification, 
Figure 1 is a plan view. Fig. 2 is a side 
view. Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional view. Fig. 
4 is a view of the stove-pipe band or shelf. 
fastening detached. Fig. 5 is one of the shelf. 
sections detached, and Fig. 6 is a horizontal 
Cross-section of one of the shelf-sections. 
Corresponding parts in the several figures 
are denoted by like letters of reference. 
This invention relates to stove-pipe shelves; 
and it consists in certain improvements in the 
construction of the same, which will be here 
inafter fully described, and particularly point 
ed Out in the claim. 
In the drawings, A represents the stove 
pipe, upon which the shelf-support is adjusted. 
The latter consists of two sections, BB, which, 
When put in position, present together the ap 
pearance of two bands, one, C, encircling the 
stove-pipe, and the other, D, arranged above 
band C, at right angles thereto, and at some 
distance from the stove-pipe. The bands C 
D are connected together by brackets E, and 
the two sections B B are secured together by 
- 
nuts and bolts passing through the outer 
brackets, E, as shown. 
The stove-pipe shelf consists of four seg 
mental sections, F, each adapted to rest upon 
the band D, and provided at its inner end with 
a downward projecting bracket, G, fitting 
closely against the stove-pipe and strengthened 
by a flange, H., of such a width as to fit be 
tween the stove-pipe and the band D. The 
lower ends of the bracket G are turned in 
Wardly to form catches I, catching under the 
band C, and thereby holding the shelf-sections 
firmly in position. 
The operation of my invention will be read 
ily understood. The shelf-sections are easily 
adjustable or detachable, and may, when not 
in use, be hung up out of the way. The parts 
are preferably made of open-work cast-iron, 
but other material may be used. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
The combination, with the shelf-support con 
sisting, essentially, of the bands C D and 
brackets E, of the segmental shelf-sections F, 
having brackets G, provided with catches I 
and flanges H, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two Witnesses. 
WILLIAM D. MIDDLETON. 
Witnesses: 
I. N. EVERETT, 
F. W. MILLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221186.txt	No. 221,186. 
 
S. PETTY. 
Mechanical Calculator. 
Patented Nov. 4, 1879. 
fits, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SOLOMON PETTY, OF VOLCANO, CALIFORNIA. 
IMPROVEMENT IN MECHANICAL CALCULATORS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 22,156, dated November 4, 1879; application filed 
November 20, 187S. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SOLOMON PETTY, of 
Volcano, Amador county, California, have in 
vented an Improved Mechanical Calculator; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to certain drawings form 
ing a part of this specification. 
My invention has reference to an improved 
mechanical calculator for computing the result, 
by multiplication or division, of any two nu 
merals of the order of units or fractions of 
units. 
My calculator is arranged in a very simple 
manner, and is especially adapted for count 
ing-house and office purposes, although it can 
be used in any place and for all purposes for 
computing numbers where a ready and correct 
calculator is useful. 
Referring to the accompanying dra Wings, 
Figure l is a perspective view with a part of 
case broken away to show cylinder. Fig. 2 is 
a plan view. 
A is a cylindrical case or shell, which is 
mounted upon suitable end Supports e, as l'ep 
resented. A slot, b, is made along the top of 
this case or shell, extending longitudinally from 
one end to the other, and along each edge of 
this slot a metal or other plate, C, is Secured, 
by means of livets or other fastening, at each 
end, leaving the intermediate portion unat 
tached. One of these plates (preferably the 
one on the right hand) is graduated or marked 
With a scale representing ten whole numbers, 
and the space between each two whole numbers 
is marked off into four divisions, representing 
fourths of whole lllllnbers, so that the scale or 
plate is divided into fourths, the whole num 
bers only being indicated by figures. 
Inside of the case or shell I mount a cylin 
der, F, upon journals which bear in the cen 
ter of the heads of the shell OT case A, so that 
it can rotate freely inside of the case. One of 
the journals projects outward from the head 
of the case, and may have a crank attached 
to it for the purpose of conveniently rotating 
the cylinder. The surface of this cylinder I 
divide off into as many longitudinal columns 
or spaces as there are spaces on the gradu 
ated plate C, each space being of the same 
Width as the slot, l) in the case. 
At one end of the cylinder (preferably at the 
crank end) I make a mark entirely around it at 
a short distance-say half an inch-from its 
end, and in the space thus formed and between 
the lines of the longitudinal spaces I mark, 
print, stalm), or engrave, consecutively, the 
fractions, mixed numbers, or integers which 
the column is to represent-that is to Say, talk 
ing one of the longitudinal spaces for a start 
ing-point, I indicate the fraction 
in the end 
space. This I call the foot-number. I then 
indicate by figures placed in the longitudinal 
column, opposite each mark or graduation of 
the scale C, the multiple of the foot-number, 
and the fraction, mixed number, or integer' 
which the graduation or mark represents. 
h. (see Fig. 2) is a plate provided with pro 
jections ( at its ends and a central slot or 
opening, le. The plates C are attached to the 
casing only at their ends by Screws passing 
through them and into the heads or ends of 
the casing A, and the plate h is placed under 
the plates C, whereby the former may be slid 
back and forth without impediment under the 
plates C. 
The plate his centrally slotted, to allow the 
numbers on the cylinder to be read, and the 
pointer i on the plate h to be bent over the 
graduation on one of the plates C. 
The projections ( c. are flanges projecting 
upwardly from the plate li, which serve the 
double purpose of guiding the plate l, and 
keeping it in place as it is slid back and forth 
under the plates C and as handles for operat 
ing it. 
It will now be seen that if I Want to multiply 
any number indicated on the scale by the foot 
number , all I have to do is to move the slide 
until its pointer is opposite that number, and 
the product will be seen through the open 
ing le. 
The foot-number of the next column is , 
and I deduce the column of figures for its lon 
gitudinal space by the same multiplication 
process. 
The next foot-number is , and its column is 
produced in the same way, and so on around 
 
2 
221, S6 
the cylinder until all the columns are fillel in 
the same way with multiples of the foot and 
Scale numbers. 
Now it will be seen that if I Wish to mul 
tiply one of the foot-numbers by one of the 
Scale-numbers, all I have to do is to rotate the 
cylinder until the desired foot-number appears 
in the slot; then by moving the slide until its 
pointer is opposite the multiplicand on the 
Scale-plate the result or multiple will be indi 
cated through the opening lic. For instance, 
given the example If Abuys three and one-half 
pounds Sugar at nine antil three-fourths cents 
per pound, what does he pay for the sugar?' 
to find the answer Irotate the cylinder until 
the foot-number 33 is brought opposite the 
slot in the case. I then move the slide until 
its pointer is opposite the 9: mark on the 
Scale-plate, and the result, 34, is shown 
through the opening in the slide. If I wish 
to divide the thirty-four and one-eighth by 
three and one-half, I move the slide until its 
opening is over the 34, or number to be di. 
vided, and the pointer will be opposite the 9, 
which is the dividend; or, in other words, the 
column-numbers indicate the multiples of the 
foot-numbers, while the scale-numbers indi 
cate the dividends of the column and foot 
lnumbers. 
This arrangement is quite simple and easily 
lunderstood, so that any person can make cor 
rect computations in an instant's time. 
To steady the cylinder and prevent it from 
being displaced when it is once set, I arrange 
a spring, l, to press upon its end, (preferably 
its rear end.) This spring is attached at its 
lower end to one of the heads of the casing 
A, and bears against the cylinder F at its 
upper end, to retain it in any desired position, 
and projects through the slot at O, so that the 
operator can, by pressing it back at 0 with his 
thumb, allow the cylinder to rotate freely until 
the desired column of figures has been brought 
opposite the slot, when, by freeing it, it will 
press against the cylinder and lhold it in place. 
I am aware that a sliding index-pointer is 
not new, broadly, and that a spring has here 
tofore been employed to hold a cylinder in 
place, and I therefore lay no claim, broadly, to 
Such devices. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Lettel's Patent, 
S 
In a mechanical calculator, the combination 
of the revolving cylinder F, provided with 
longitudinal and circular columns of figures, 
arranged as set forth, an outer casing, A, hav 
ing a longitudinal slot, stationary plates C, 
one of which is graduated, and both of which 
are attached to the casing only at their ends, 
centrally-slotted plate h, having pointeri and 
handles (t, and spring-brake l, having thumb 
piece o, all constructed and arranged to oper 
ate in the manner and for the purpose set 
In witness whereof I have here into set my 
forth. 
- 
land and Seal. 
SOLOMON PETTY. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT STEWART, 
L. MCLAINE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221286.txt	J. L., COPP 
Buffing-Machine for Boots and Shoes. 
No. 221,286. 
Patented Nov. 4, 1879. 
4 
 35 ioni 
CE. 
-- 
2T 
22E2 He 
4SN 6 
III 
T 
. 
iss 
file. 
Sig. 
tity. 
. 
 
20 
s 
2 
WITNESSES: 
6 o'oe 24 
w 
y . 
By 3-kulce S. 
ATTORNEYS, 
-- 
N. PETERs, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washingtoN, DC. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHNL. COPP, OF ROCHESTER, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN BUFFING-MACHINES FoR Boots AND SHOES: 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 221,2S6, dated November 4, 1879; application filed 
September 3, 1879. 
an arm, g, is hung so as to Swing vertically oil 
Be it known that I, JoHN L. COPP, of Roch-shaft das an axis, this connection forming a 
knucklejoint. The arm g carries at its outer 
end a rectangular frame, h, that is hung, as 
hereinafter described, so as to have universal 
movement, and carries the sandpapering-roll 
i in suitable journals at its outer end. 
The side bars, k, of frame h swing on the 
end piece, l, which is fitted to swivel on arm 
g. In the barsk is fitted a cross-shaft, m, that 
carries a pulley, m', from which a belt passes 
to the cone-pulley e, and also carries, at its 
outer end, pulleys in n, that are connected by 
belts with pulleys it i? on the shaft of the sand 
papering-roll i. 
By this construction the frame h can be 
moved to the position required for applying 
the sandpapering-roll, and the roll at the same 
time will be continuously revolved, 
The frame h is fitted with a handle, o, pro 
jecting from a rigid cross-bar, p, to assist in 
the manipulation of the frame. 
The machine is to be driven by power or by 
a foot-treadle, and when driven by power a 
suitable lever will be fitted for operation by 
the Workman to throW the machine in and out 
of action. 
In operation, the Workman places the shoe. 
or boot that is to be buffed and sandpapered 
upon the head-block of post b, starts the ma 
chine, and, by means of the handle 0, brings 
the roll i down upon the sole and manipulates 
it as required. 
The connections described permit the roll to 
be turned in any required direction, and the 
work may be done thoroughly and rapidly, and 
without dust from the pumice-stone that is 
required in hand-work. 
I do not limit myself to the connections ex 
actly as described, nor to the manner of sus 
taining the machine. 
The frame may be hung to the wall or ceil 
ing above the bench, the arm g in that case 
hanging downward and fitted with suitable 
connections for obtaining the necessary move. 
ments. 
The sandpapering or buffing roll is a rigid 
roller, covered with a surface of sand-paper or 
other abrading material, more or less fine, ac-. 
cording to the work to be done. 
To all chon it may concern: 
ester, in the county of Strafford and State of 
New Elampshire, have invented a new and Im 
proved Buffing-Machine for Boots and Shoes, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My improvements relate to machines for 
sandpapering the soles of boots and shoes; and 
they consistin a swinging standard hung upon 
a driving-shaft, and extending over the bench, 
to the upper end of which isjointed an armthat 
carries the sandpapering-roll, and is capable 
of movement to bring the roll to the positions 
required. The roll is driven, by pulleys and 
belts, from an intermediate cone-pulley on the 
standard, which is driven by a belt from the 
driving-shaft, 
The construction will be more particularly 
described with reference to the accompanying 
drawings, and the invention pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional plan 
View of the machine as applied to a bench. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal section of the 
Sae. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A is a section of a work-bench fitted with a 
1ack, a for lasts and tools, and a finishing 
post and head-block, b, these parts being as 
usual. 
Upon the floor beneath the bench, in suita 
ble bearings, is the driving-shaft c, provided 
With a fast and loose pulley, and carrying the 
driving-pulley c'. To the shaft c is hung 
loosely a standard, d, which extends upward 
through a slot in bench A, the slot being near 
one end of the bench, and about midway of 
its width. The upper end of standard d is 
forked, as shown, and is fitted with a shaft, 
d'. On the shaft d, in the fork of standard d, 
is fixed a cone-pulley, e, from which a belt 
passes to pulley c' on the driving-shaft. 
The stairdard dis made in two parts, united 
by a doweljoint, and adjusted by a nut and 
screw, f, whereby the length of standard d 
may be varied and the upper part of the stand 
ard may turn axially upon as well as swing 
with the lower portion. 
At the upper end of standard d, on shaft d', 
A. 
 
t 
2 
222s6 
1. In Sandpapering-machines for boots and purposes described. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim k, end piece l, cross-bar p, and handle 0, fitted 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat. with the shaft in and roll i, and jointed to the 
swinging arm of, substantially as and for the 
ent- 
shoes, the swinging standard g, made in two 
parts, united by a doweljoint, and adjustable 
by means of the screw and nut?, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. The framel, consisting of the side bars 
JOHN I. COPP 
Witnesses: 
O. B. WARREN, 
E. I. KIMBALL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221386.txt	J. L, BARNES, 
Cider-Mill. 
No. 221,386. 
Patented Nov. 11, 1879. 
 
ITNESSES 
i's 
N.Peters, Photo-lthodRApher, WASHINGTON, d C 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN L. BARNES, OF WARSAW, INDIAN A. 
MPROVEMENT IN CDER - MLLS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 221,3S6, dated November 11, 1879; application filed 
April 15, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN L, BARNES, of 
Warsaw, in the county of Kosciusko, and in 
the State of Indiana, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Cider-Mills; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, making a part of this specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
construction and arrangement of a cider-mill, 
as will be hereinafter more fully set forth. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe its 
construction and operation, referring to the 
annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my cider-mill. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical section of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a side view of one of the 
rollers. 
A represents the frame of my cider-mill, pro 
yided with a hopper, B, at one end for the in 
troduction of the pomace. In this hopper is 
a feeding-roller, C, which carries down the 
pomace to an endless apron or cloth, D, which 
passes around rollers E, as shown in Fig. 2, 
and passes over two rollers, F. F. Below 
these rollers, and within the cloth or apron, are 
inclines G. G., which lead to a spout, a, as 
shown. Above the two rollers FF, and in 
contact with the apron on top of them, is a 
third roller, I, which is covered with rubber. 
The two lower rollers, F, are constructed as 
shown in Fig. 3, each roller being formed with 
a series of circumferential grooves, b, at suita 
ble distances apart-say about half an inch, 
more or less. The roller is then covered with 
wire-cloth d. 
The various rollers are connected and run 
by gearing or belts, or both, in any suitable or 
convenient manner. 
By using the three rollers FF and I the pom 
ace is pressed twice asitpasses through the ma 
chine, as the upper rubber-covered roller, I, 
runs upon both the under ones. 
The cider is pressed by the upper roller 
through the cloth or canvas apron D, and also 
through the wire - cloth screens d, into the 
grooves b on the rollers F F, and then runs 
around said rollers, and is discharged on the 
inclines G, and by them conveyed to the 
spout a. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a cider-mill, a roller, F, provided with 
a series of circumferential grooves, b, and in 
closed by wire-cloth d, substantially as herein 
set forth. 
2. The combination of the rubber-covered 
roller I, the endless cloth or apron D, and the 
rollers FF, provided with grooves b and wire 
cloth d, substantially as and for the purposes 
herein set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 8th day of 
February, 1879. 
- 
JOHN L, BARNES, 
Witnesses: 
J. W. KILLINGER, 
G. M. THOMAS, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221486.txt	J. C. WEST 
Railroad-Signal, 
No. 221,486. 
Patented Nov. 11, 1879. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Azz7Zeasses. 
A /3/a44ez 
WA 93rzocu 
N ?zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz  S (SN   <??? 
?zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz!--<Nz 
R ? 
?? 
{{ZZZZZZZZZZZZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz 
SQ 
Z72 Zvezda 7 
Aoz. 64, Z2/- 
by && 
Plass ov/ 
N. PETERs, photo-Thoas 
Pier, 
WASHINGON, 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN CALVIN WEST, OF CLARKSVILLE, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
OF HIS RIGHT TO CALVIN GRUELL, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN RAI ROAD - SIGNALS. 
Specification follming part of Letters Patent No. 22 14s6, dated November 11, 1879; application filed 
September 22, 1879. 
not liable to become clogged by snow or ice, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN C. WEST, of and actuated by an elastic and bent rod at. 
Clarksville, in the county of Pike and State tached to the side of a locomotive or its tender. 
My invention consists in combining, with a 
of Missouri, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Railroad-Signals; and 
Series of hollow posts placed on the side of a 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
track, signal-staffs placed therein, each pro 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
vided with a pulley or roller at its lower end, 
and double-inclined ways or signal-setters pass 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
ing through said posts. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
It consists also in a bent arm pivoted to a 
my invention applied to the side of a curved 
frame or foundation located on the side of the 
railroad-track, with the operating device at 
track at each end of a railroad curve, in com 
bination with a weight suspended from each 
tached to the side of a locomotive - tender. 
Fig. 2 represents a longitudinal vertical sec 
hinged arm, and chains and rods connecting 
tion of one of the signal-staffs and its operat 
said arm with double-inclined ways or signal 
Setters passing through the signal-posts. 
ing inclined ways, in coulnection with one of 
the signal-inclosing posts. Figs. 3 and 4 rep 
It consists also in combining with the above 
elements a double beveled or bent spring-rod 
resent the same in transverse vertical section, 
respectively, with the signal-staff lowered 
projecting from the side of a locomotive, its 
within the post in Fig. 3 and elevated above 
tender or train, for the purpose hereinafter 
in Fig. 4. Fig. 5 represents a bent rod of 
described. 
In the drawings, AA represents the rails of 
spring metal to be secured to the side of a lo 
comotive or its tender to actuate the signaling 
a single but curved railroad-track. They are 
supported and secured as usual to the cross-ties 
devices. 
My invention relates to signals adapted to 
(t. Upon one side of this track, possibly half a 
mile or a mile apart, but preferably adjoining 
be located on the side of railroad-tracks, par 
ticularly at or adjoining curves, and to be op 
the end of a curve, are secured vertically two 
erated automatically by simple means attached 
posts, B. These posts are made hollow by con 
to a locomotive or its tender for the purpose 
structing each one of four boards, united as 
of indicating its approach from one end of the 
shown, or otherwise, to receive the signal-staffs 
C. The latter may be of various forms. In the 
curve to the other. 
present instance they consist of a board, c, 
Beretofore various contrivances have been 
provided at the bottom with a grooved pulley 
used for the purpose of signaling ahead of a 
train its advance upon the track. The ma 
or roll, c', and at the top with a diamond 
shaped danger-signal, c, that may be painted 
jority of them are operated directly by the 
with red color, and may be replaced by a lan 
tread or flange of the passing wheels of a 
train pressing upon a lever projecting above, 
tern at night. Each post B is nearly closed 
but on the side of, one of the rails, the action 
with a cover, b, of wood or metal, to arrest the 
upward motion of the staff; but this cover is 
of which is generally too sudden for the de 
slotted horizontally for the passage of the dan 
vice to stand repeatedly without soon giving 
way. It is also quite liable to become clogged 
ger-signal c'. 
The post is slotted vertically at b', near its 
by snow or ice in winter. 
The object of my invention is to operate a 
bottom, to admit of the passage of the double 
beveled Ways or signal-setters D. As shown 
series of danger-signal staffs located in hollow 
in the drawings, these signal-setters are made 
posts placed along the side and at the ends of 
simply of a straight rod, d, for the bottom, 
a curve or of a dangerous portion of a railroad 
track, to prevent a collision of trains going in 
which rod is bent upon itself to form a loop, 
opposite directions or following one another 
d', at each end, a horizontal rest, d on each 
too closely upon said track, by simple means 
side of the depressed center, and inclined ways 
w 
 
 
221,4s6 
until the last one has been passed by the loco 
motive and the looped or upper portion of the 
bent lever upon the foundation H at the far. 
thest end of the curve has been depressed by 
the spring-rod K. The chain e, taking a short 
bend around the pulley h, is strongly pulled by 
the then elevated end g of the arm G, and, fol 
lowing said chain, the signal-setters D are ad 
vanced until their depressed central portion is 
under the signal-staffs, thus returning the 
danger-signals within the posts. 
To protect the rods connecting the signal 
setters from snow or the effect of the weather, 
they may be covered, as under a pointed roof 
resembling letter A, by placing over them a 
series of sections of boards nailed together at 
one edge. The signal-setters D can also be 
easily inclosed. 
The length of the rods connecting the sig 
nals can be regulated occasionally by the sec 
tion-men for summer and winter temperature 
by connecting the rods e with a few adjustable 
chain-links or other suitable means. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
I claim 
1. The combination, with a series of hollow 
posts, signal-staffs placed therein, each pro 
vided with a pulley or roller at its lower end, 
and double-inclined ways or signal-setters D 
passing through said posts, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
2. As a signal-operating device, two bent 
arms, G, each pivoted to a frame or foundation 
at the end of a railroad curve, and a weight 
suspended from said bent arms, in combina 
tion with clhains and rods connecting sail arms, 
and double-inclined ways or signal-setters l), 
adapted to operate signal-staffs set in posts, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. In combination with signal-staffs placed 
vertically in posts, double-inclined ways or 
signal-setters D, located under said staffs, bent 
arms pivoted upon elevated foundations and 
connected to signal-setters D by chains pass 
ing under pulleys h, or their equivalent, the 
spring-rod K, bent in the middle and secured 
to the side of a locomotive or tender, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
JOHN CALVIN WEST. 
Witnesses : 
T. H. EDWARDs, 
J. J. MCCUNE. 
d between said rests, the general appearance 
of the ways D approaching the form of letter 
M. They may be made of other suitable mate 
rial, and are for the purpose of elevating the 
signal while its roll travels from the depressed 
central portion up along the inclined ways d' 
to the top of the horizontal rests d'. 
The signal-setters D are connected together 
by a series of connecting-rods, e, guided along 
side of the track upon pulleys.f, secured to the 
cross-ties or to other portions of the track. 
The opposite end of each signal-setter is con 
nected by means of a chain, e', with an arm, 
g, pendent from an arm, G, the latter being 
bent in the form of a clevis and hinged to a 
block or foundation, H, established upon the 
side of the track. 
The extension g of the arm G is suspended 
under its hinge, and this extension carries a 
weight, g', to maintain the looped portion G 
vertically, but is free to swing under a given 
impulse. 
The chain e' is attached to the lower end of 
the armg, and passes loosely under a pulley, h 
secured on the side or adjoining the block H. 
The arm G is to be inclined and the whole 
device operated by a spring-rod, K, bent in the 
middle, and approaching in form the letter V 
flattened, secured to the side of a locomotive 
or its tender and projecting from it, being 
either immovable or adapted to be folded close 
to the side before entering the round-house, 
being provided with hinges, as in Fig. 5. 
The railroad-signal is operated as follows: 
A locomotive and its tender provided with the 
side rod K (generally with a train in the rear) 
advancing to the beginning of a curve, the 
engineer finds the danger-signal hidden within 
the signal-posts and the arm G standing up, 
and, continuing to advance, the inclined spring. 
rod K will bear down upon the upper end of 
the arm G and elevate its opposite end g, pull 
ing upon and first lifting the chain e' against 
the under side of the pulley h, and, continuing 
to pull upon said chain, advances the signal 
setters D toward the coming train, so that the 
roller c' of the signal-staff will ride up the in 
cline d' from its lower central portion to the 
horizontal rest d, and support the signal-staff 
in an elevated position, with the red signal 
projecting above every post constructed and 
connected as above described, and so remain 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221586.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES P. MALLETTE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIs. 
MPROVEMENT IN BED-BOTTOMS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 221,5s6, dated November 11 1879; application filed 
November 1, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES P.MALLETTE, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Bed-Bottoms; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
My invention consists in the combination, 
with vertical springs of a bed-bottom arranged 
in Iows longitudinally, of longitudinally-elas 
tic wires or strips of woven-wire fabric inter 
mediate between said rows of springs, which 
are secured at their edges to said springs and 
also secured to the end bars of the frame, the 
object being to secure in the same bed the 
double advantage of continuous surface pecu 
liar to the woven fabric and the universal sup 
port characteristic of the vertical springs, sub 
stantially as hereinafter fully set forth and 
claimed. 
Referring to the drawings, a. a. a. are a num 
ber of conical springs, arranged in the usual 
manner upon the longitudinal slats b l of a 
bed-bottom. C C are end bars, to which the 
slats b b are secured, and d is a diagonal slat, 
secured to the several slats bb, to permanently 
hold the frame in form. 
In a bed-bottom composed of the vertical 
springs at a. it is customary to connect the top 
most coils of the adjacent springs by a wire, 
a band, or other inelastic connection. In the 
improved bed herein described narrow strips 
or sections of woven or coiled wire fabric are 
employed instead. 
DD in the drawings represent such strips 
or sections of wire fabric having their outer 
or marginal wires interlinked with the topmost 
coils of the vertical springs a a, and their ends 
fastened to the cross-bars C. C. Wooden cap 
pieces e e are nailed upon the cross-bars, as 
shown in the sectional Figure 2, to cover their 
irregular ends. Of proper width and thus 
applied, the strips D, running in a single di 
rection, serve to sustain the springs a without 
other connections. 
Other connections between the springs may 
be applied, as shown at c, Fig.1, or transverse 
strips of fabric may be introduced in the same 
manner as strips D, with or without the latter. 
The effect of combining the two forms of 
springs, as described, is to produce a bed-bot 
tom wherein the surface is more continuous 
than in one having the vertical coils alone, and 
in which the support given to the body is dis 
tributed over its inequalities more perfectly 
than in a bed having only the wire fabric. In 
the latter or a Woven-wire bed-bottom the sup 
porting-points against funicular strain are the 
head and foot rails of the frame, and pressure 
at any point between these rails depresses the 
entire length of the coils, giving to the bed 
under such pressure a dishing form, not en 
tirely comfortable. 
In my improved bed the rails are merely the 
anchors of the cords, and the supporting 
points are those vertical springs on the line 
of the fabric-sections, each side of the point 
at which the pressure is applied. The original 
form of the surface is made properly upwardly 
curved, so that under the weight of persons it 
will lie substantially level. This effect may 
obviously be obtained by placing vertical 
springs beneath a contiullous wire fabric in 
terlocking the two; but such a construction 
would be too expensive to be practicable. 
In the drawings the strips of fabric are 
shown to contain several wires; but I do not 
limit myself to any particular number of wires, 
since a single one will operate to the same end 
to a lesser degree than several. 
It is a common fault with vertical - spring 
beds that the marginal springs soon become 
tilted inward, in which position they have less 
strength to support a mattress, besides narrow 
ing the surface of the bed. Many expedients 
have been tried to remedy this fault, but none 
have proven entirely successful. - For the pur 
pose of sustaining these springs in their origi 
nal position, and also of giving lateral resist 
ance to pressure applied to a connected sur 
face, I introduce the longitudinal strips of 
spring metal E, which pass through the upper 
coils of the marginal springs at a, bearing 
 
 
2 
22, SS6 
against the outer curve of the coils, and are 
firmly fastened to the head and foot rails CC, as 
shown. Being drawn or pressed down nearly 
straight when secured in place, the effect of 
these strips is to sustain directly the marginal 
springs to which they are connected, and in 
directly the entire connected body of springs 
forming the bed - bottom. Strong wire may 
be advantageously used in this position, and 
such wire or any other suitable material se. 
curely fastened at the ends and connected with 
the marginal springs at their tops, so as to 
move vertically with them and sustain then 
by reason of longitudinal inelasticity, is meant 
to be included in my claim. The broad flat 
strips of spring metal shown and described 
are, however, obviously preferable. 
When the vertical coils a a are joined by 
coils or fabric D the elasticity of the surface 
is nearly equal in both directions, whichever 
way the fabric runs, and the inward strain upon 
the marginal springs a is not great. This gen 
eral elasticity of the spring-surface therefore 
prevents the depression of springs to any con 
siderable extent on either side of the portion 
pressed. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
In combination with the vertical springs a 
a of a bed-bottom, arranged in rows longitud 
inally, the longitudinally-elastic strips of wire 
fabric ID, intermediate between the rows of 
springs a a. and connected at its edges there 
to, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I affix my signature in presence 
of two Witnesses. 
JAMES P, MALLETTE. 
VWitnesses: 
M. E. DAYTON, 
JOIIN O. FosTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221686.txt	I. B., LIWINGSTON, 
rground-Telegraph Line. 
Unde 
Patented Nov. 18, 1879. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC B. LIVINGSTON, OF SPRING FIELD, MAS SACHUSETTS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN UNDERGROUND-TELEGRAPH LINES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 221,6s6, dated November 18, 1879; application fied 
September 1, 1879. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, Is AAC B. LIVINGSTON, 
of Springfield, county of Hampden, and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in the Construction of Un 
derground-Telegraph Lines, which improve 
ments are fully set forth in the annexed speci 
fication and ill the accompanying drawing. 
My invention consists in the peculiar man 
ner of constructing an underground-telegraph 
line, as is fully described hereinafter, and spe 
cifically pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawing is shown the conducting 
wire a, the surrounding insulating material b, 
the body of hydraulic cement d, and the sur 
rounding earth 0. 
The construction of underground-telegraph 
lines, as heretofore generally practiced, by lay 
ing pipes inclosing the wires insulated in dif 
ferent Ways, or by inclosing the insulated wires 
in a wooden case in the ground, involves a 
heavy expense, necessitates the provision of 
Some means for conveniently opening the said 
pipes or cases to get access to the conductors, 
thereby exposing the wires to the damaging 
effects of water which may penetrate such a 
tube or case, and other causes which operate 
to impair the conductivity of the wires. 
My improved system of underground-tele 
graph construction, as he ein set forth, ob 
viates the above-named obstacles to the eco 
molnical construction and convenient main 
tenance of underground lines, provides a 
novel and effectual means for insulating the 
Wires, and such a construction as can be safely 
and easily broken into at any point on the 
line for the purposes of making branch coll 
hections or repail's and be easily restored to a 
good working condition. 
I construct my underground-telegraph lines 
by digging a suitable trench, in the bottom of 
which I lay a bed of hydraulic cement. Upon 
this bed of cement I place a covering of brim 
stone (applied hot) of a sufficient width to lay 
a wire lengthwise thereon, and over the wire 
thus placed I pour melted brimstone, so as to 
solidly and tightly imbed the wire therein and 
render it impervious to dampness. Upon the 
top of the bed of cement, having thereon the 
 
wire protected by the brimstone, as above set 
forth, I place a thick covering of cement, caus 
ing the latter to be homogeneously united with 
the first-laid bed, so as to form substantially a 
solid cement line or trunk, inclosing within it 
a brin stone-surrounded wire or wires. 
Having thus laid the conducting - wire in 
brimstone and cement, I fill up the trench, com 
pleting the construction of the line. 
It is obvious that the Wire in such an un 
derground line as is above described need 
have but a few made connections therein, thus 
securing greater continuity. 
The hydraulic cement and the brimstone 
constitute a perfect protection for the con 
ducting-wire, and are comparatively inexpen 
sive materials for this purpose. 
Instead of the brimstone above named, as 
phalt, bitumen, or resin may be used, but not 
with so good results, for it is well known that 
the former is much the stronger material, a 
perfect insulator, and very cheap. 
I am aware that asphalt and sulphur have 
been heretofore known as insulating material 
for telegraph-wires, and I do not broadly clain 
the use of these materials; but 
What I claim is 
1. The herein-described mode of laying un 
derground-telegraph lines, consisting in, first, 
laying in a suitable trench dug in the earth a 
bed of hydraulic cement, in placing upon this 
bed a covering of brimstone adapted to re 
ceive the wire and placing the wire thereon, 
next in covering said wire with brimstone, and, 
lastly, in covering the whole with the hydraulic 
cement, causing the same to Illite homogene 
ously with the bed, all as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
2. An underground-telegraph line consist 
ing of a hydraulic-cement bed, of a sulphur 
insulating bed, and covering surrounding the 
Wire and placed upon the cement bed, and a 
covering of iny draulic cement united homoge 
neously to the cement bed, as and for the pur 
pose Set forth. 
ISAAC B. LIVINGSTON. 
In presence of - 
WM. H. CHAPIN, 
J. F. HITCHCOCR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221787.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER A. CROLL, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
IMPROVEMENT IN THE MANUFACTURE OF SULPHATE OF ALUMNA, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 221,7S7, dated November 18, 1879; application filed 
July 15, 1879; patented in England, August 20, 1878. 
To all chon it many CO2Cer"? 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER ANGUS 
CROLL, of Coleman Street, in the city of Lion 
don, England, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in the Manufacture of Sul 
phate of Alumina, which improvement is fully 
Set fo h in the following specification. 
The object of the invention is to facilitate 
the economical manufacture of sulphate of 
alumina and the production of different quali 
ties thereof from the same batch. 
I proceed as follows: Itake, say, nine parts, 
by weight, of china or other aluminous clay 
and, say, seven and a half parts, by Weight of 
sulphuric acid of specific gravity about 1.845; 
or a quantity of acid is to be used equal to 
the quantity stated, but it may be only of the 
specific gravity, say, 72OTwaddell when heated 
to the temperature of 2200 Fahrenheit. 
The china or other aluminous clay I burn Or 
roast to the extent desired, and I retain in the 
product as much as possible of the heat ob 
tained by the roasting until its submission to 
Saturation. 
I reduce the sulphuric acid, by the addition 
of water thereto, to about 720 specific gravity 
Twaddell, and its temperature is raised to 
about 2200 Fahrenheit. The heated china or 
other aluminous clay is then combined with 
such solution of sulphuric acid in a Saturat 
ing-vessel or a series of saturating-Vessels. 
I prefer to employ several saturating or com 
bining vessels, in all of which the like process 
is proceeding at the same time or nearly so. 
Each of these vessels I find it convenient to 
form of dimensions such as to Operate on as 
large a charge in each as convenient; but one 
of these vessels is, however, sufficiently large 
to contain the matter not only of One charge, 
but also, in addition, the contents of the other 
vessels, and these others are so placed in po 
sition that their contents may be readily dis 
charged into the larger vessel. Each of these 
saturating-vesselsis by preference surrounded 
by non-conducting material, so as to preyent 
as much as possible the escape of the heat 
therefrom, and when the whole of the clay in 
tended for each vessel has been added to the 
acid therein I cover such vessels With Wood 
supporting a layer of charcoal, or with other 
suitable non-conducting material. 
When, or even before, rapid ebullition has 
ceased in the respective saturating-vessels, I 
discharge the contents of each of the smaller 
ones into the larger one, care being taken to 
avoid the escape of the material by ebullition 
from the larger vessel, and also the escape of 
heat. This larger vessel, with its combined 
mass, is maintained at its highest point of 
heat, or as nearly so as possible, for several 
hours by means of a surrounding non-conduct 
ing jacket or medium of charcoal or Woolen 
or similar non-conducting material, and by a 
Wooden orother suitable non-conducting cover, 
for the purpose of maintaining the heat and 
consequent fluidity of the mass. 
Supposing the quantity of material at any 
one time under operation to be about fifteen 
tons, the desired operation is generally ef. 
fected in about twelve hours, upon which, or at 
any convenient time after, I proceed to open 
sluices in the Vessel at three or four or other 
number of different points in the height of the 
material therein, and at about equal distances 
apart in such height. From these openings I 
allow the sulphate of alumina to flow; or it is 
drawn out in succession from such openings, 
commencing with the highest one; or succes 
sive quantities thereof are otherwise removed 
from this vessel, and the product is then, when 
cooled, collected in a condition favorable to 
its ready and cheap reduction to small pieces 
suitable for commerce. 
The time during which such heat is main 
tained will vary with the quantity of material 
for the time under operation, the object being 
to maintain a high degree of heat, so as to se 
cure the desired fluidity of the material as 
long as possible. 
I would also state that, although I prefer to 
employ several vessels in which the operation 
is simultaneously proceeding, I do not confine 
myself to such use, as one large vessel night 
be employed. 
By these means I am enabled to obtain vari. 
ous qualities of Sulphate of alumina from one 
batch or manufacture, and it will be found that 
a more intimate and complete action of the 
 
is: 
2 
22, s? 
acid with the clay is effected, and the sul 
phate of alumina obtained is of a superior 
character for commercial purposes. 
Having thus described my invention and 
means which I adopt in carrying the same 
into effect, I would have it understood that 
What I do claim is 
The improved process of manufacturing sul 
phate of alumina, which consists in retarding 
the escape of heat from the mass during the 
chemical reaction of the acid upon the clay, 
and in drawing off different grades in succes 
sion from the same batch. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my hand 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
A. ANG US CROLL. 
Witnesses: 
JNo. P. SUYATT, 
WILLIAM BROOKES. 
 
ill 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221887.txt	S. S. WILLIAMS, 
Automatic Feeding Device for Horses. 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
 
No. 221,887. 
Patented Nov. 18, 1879. 
EIHEIT 
IHEITHIU 
IE 
N 
T 
N 
SS 
SS 
IA asyS If ill-M 
S. 
III N is 
is Y 
als 
TT222 N S. 2 
INVENTOA: 
a 6%24,920 - 42 
Azzoz77e/s. 
- - M - 
22-aa. - - - 
2 2 
% --- - 
PETERs, photo-LithoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D. 
 
S. S. WILLIAMS, 
Automatic Feeding Device for Horses. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
w 
No. 221,887. 
 
Patented Nov. 18, 1879. 
. 
/7ZZes 
46.274 
24-26-e/62 ... 
" 
ZAV VANZoza: 
(*1 
z - % seize kee. 2 - 
'', 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-lthographer, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
SAMUEL S. WILLIAMS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE - HALF OF 
HIS RIGHT TO ROBERT BRAUDHUBER, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN AUTOMATIC FEED ING DEVICES FOR HORSES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 22, SS7, dated November 18, 1879; application filed 
February 7, 1879. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL S. WILLIAMS, 
of Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Stables and Stable 
Fixtures, of which the following, in connection 
With the accompanying drawings, is a specifi 
cation. 
Figure 1, Sheet 1, is a front view of the fix 
tures to which my invention relates; Fig. 2, 
Sheet 1, a section in the plane of the linea ac; 
Fig. 3, Sheet 2, a front view of one of the 
graduated disks; and Fig. 4, Sheet 2, a side 
view of the parts shown in Fig. 3. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts. 
A represents a stable or stall for horses. B 
is the feedbox or trough. C is a supplemental 
box or feed-holder arranged above or over the 
box B, and having an inclined front, as shown. 
D is a swinging valve or shelf, forming the 
bottom of the box C. The valve D is rigidly 
attached to a rocking lever, E, having suita 
ble bearings, and projecting beyond the box 
C, by preference. 
F is an arm or lever, pivoted or hinged 
at its rear end to the wall of the stable, and 
projecting therefrom to a sufficient extent to 
have much force as a lever when employed in 
the manner hereinafter described. G is a link 
or connecting-arm, pivoted or hinged to the 
rear end of the crank or arm of the lever E, 
and looped freely over the lever F. H. is a 
rotary shaft, in the forward part of which is 
cut a spiral groove or worm, I. J is a link or 
loop connected to the forward end of the lever 
F, and looped over and resting freely upon the 
spiral or Worm I. K is a stop passing freely 
through the loop of the link J. 
The shaft EI maybe rotated automaticallyin 
any suitable Way-for example, by means of 
clock-Work, as indicated at a-the direction of 
the rotation being such as to slowly carry the 
upper end of the link J toward the forward or 
grooved end of the shaft. When the link J 
is supported by the shaft H, the valve or shelf 
D is thereby held in such a position as to close 
the bottom of the box C, and consequently 
grain or feed will then be retained in the said 
box, if there placed, for being fed to the horse, 
it being understood that this box will contain 
enough to furnish one feeding. When the 
upper end of the link J reaches the forward . 
end of the shaft H, this link slips of therefrom 
andfalls upon the stop or supportK. The valve 
D then has no support. Consequently the feed 
in the box C is dumped or falls into the box 
B, where the horse may have access to it. 
My purpose in providing means for dump 
ing the feed automatically into the feed-boxes 
may be explained as follows: Many horses are 
employed in work requiring them to be fed 
very early in the morning, and consequently 
the person having charge of them must be up 
much earlier in order to feed them. If the 
shaft H rotates once in one hour, the link J 
will be advanced in that time one thread of 
the spiral or worm I, and if there are ten cir 
cuits of the spiral, the link will drop from its 
support in ten hours from the time it is ar 
ranged to be caught by the rear end of the 
Spiral. 
Therefore, if I wish to have my horse 
fed at 6 a.m., I place in the box C his feed for 
that morning, having hung the link J on the 
rear end of the spiral I at 8 p.m. of the even 
ing before, (which, it may be supposed, is the 
time of feeding at evening,) and having wound 
up the clock mechanism, I may then feel as 
sured that the horse will have access to his 
food at 6 a.m., and consequently I need not 
then go to the stable to feed him. 
It may be perceived that by a very simple 
calculation the linkJ may be so arranged that 
the horse will be fed at a different hour. For 
example, if I wish the horse fed at 5 a.m., it 
is only necessary to arrange the link J one 
spiral forward of that in which it was before 
arranged. To arouse the horse and give no 
tice of the proper working of the mechanism, 
a gong, L, may be employed, the hammer of 
which may be connected to any of the down 
moving parts released when the link J is re 
leased-for example, by means of a cord, M, to 
the arm of the lever E. A disk, N, properly 
graduated, may also be employed in connec 
tion with an index-hand, O, on the shaft H, to 
denote how long the clock mechanism has run 
at the time the link J is to be set. The clock 
mechanism may also be utilized to indicate 
the hour of the day, as illustrated at b, 
Eaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
 
22, ss? 
valve D, supported or suspended on the said 
shaft, in connection with a feed-holder and 
feed-box, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
4. The combination of the gong L with the 
tilting valve or bottom D of the feed-holder 
C and mechanism for controlling the said 
valve automatically, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
SAMUEL S. WILLIAMS, 
Witnesses: 
F. F. WARNER, 
H. C. BALLARD. 
1. The combination of the feed-holder C, the 
trap or valve D, the rock-lever E, the suspend 
ing-lever F, the connecting-links G and J, and 
the spirally-grooved rotary shaft H, substan 
tially as and for the purposes specified. 
2. The combination of the feed-holder C, the 
trap or valve I), the spirally-grooved rotary 
shaft H, the rock-lever E, and means for sus 
pending the said lever on the worm of the said 
shaft, Substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
3. The combination of a clock or chronome 
ter, the rotary worm-shaft H, and the tilting 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US221987.txt	T. W. WELSH. 
Vacuum Brake-Pipe Couplings. 
No. 221,987. 
Patented Nov. 25, 1879. 
 
7 
N 
W (S o 
>g Sasa 
23S 
  
\ala 
\sia total 
2. \swers key Nevil 
().{ %-fe 
N.PETERS, PHoro-LTHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS W. WELSH, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WESTINGHOUSE AIR BRAKE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN VACUUM-BRAKE-PIPE COUPLINGs. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 221,9s 7, dated November 25, 1879; application filed 
August 29, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAs W. WELSH, of 
Pittsburg, county of Allegheny, State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented or discovered a new 
and useful Improvement in Vacuum - Brake 
Pipe Couplings; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, concise, and ex 
act description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, making a part 
of this specification, in which-like letters in 
dicating like parts-- 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective of a pair 
of couplings illustrative of my improvement; 
and Fig. 2 is a like view of one half of the 
coupling, but with a portion of the valve 
broken away in order to show the packing. 
Tling. 
My present invention consists in certain im 
provements in the coupling described in United 
States Patent No. 157,951, granted to George 
Westinghouse, Jr., December 22, 1874, where 
by it is adapted, without material change in 
its general structure, to use as a coupling for 
Vacuum-brake pipes. 
The general construction of the main part 
Or body of each half remains the same as in 
Said patent. The end box, B, is the same, and 
is closed on one side by a like cap, B, though 
the latter is preferably flattened somewhat on 
top, or made less high than is represented in 
said patent. 
A like packing-ring, a, is inserted and held 
in like manner in the port-opening of each 
half-coupling, and like curved hooks e and 
counter-curved hooks et are also provided; but 
... I consider the pressure-frame and spring de 
scribed in said patent as unnecessary, though 
they may be used, if desired. The usual thim 
bles D are also provided, and the through com 
municating - ports are the same, as also are 
the stop-posts in. 
In this coupling, as shown in the drawings, 
it will be observed that the plane of junction 
of the two half-couplings is in the line with 
the general direction of the flow of the air, or, 
in other. Words, passes through and along the 
axial line of the end connection, or substan 
tially parallel therewith. 
While slight variations may be made in this 
respect, I do not propose, in so far as relates 
to the present invention, to make any substan 
tial departure therefrom; but on a coupling 
 
thus constructed I mount back of the flange 
B', which carries the counter-hooke', a post, 
P, and in the latter pivot a bent lever, c, hav 
ing a downward-curved bend, c', at its forward 
end, such that when the valve is seated the 
lever will clear the flange B and be upwardly 
curved at its outer end, as at c, so that When 
the valve is seated the operator may be able 
to catch and depress the lever end c'. With a 
finger or thumb of the same hand with which 
he grasps the coupling or pipe when about to 
make the connection, and also so that such le 
ver end c may be thus so far depressed that 
the valve will clear the cap B in coupling, as 
shown in Fig. 1. 
To the outer end of the lever the valvel is 
attached, so that when seated, as in Fig. 2, it 
will rest neatly on and close the port-opening 
through the packing-ring as and the seating 
face of the valve may be packed with india 
rubber or other suitable material, if SO de 
sired, so as to secure a tight joint, even if the 
pressure of the valve on the ring a should 
force the latter down flush with the surround 
ing face of the box B. . Such a packing-ring is 
shown at a', Fig. 2. 
Spring-pressure to hold the valve to its seat 
may be applied by means of any suitable 
spring, one of the well-known spiral form be 
ing shown at d. 
The half-couplings thus described are du 
plicates of each other, so as to be interchange 
able at pleasure, and so that any two may be 
coupled together, and while having holding 
capacity sufficient for ordinary use they are 
automatically detachable under unusual longi 
tudinal strain. 
I claim herein as my invention 
In a coupling the junction-faces of which 
are in a plane passing along the axial line of 
the end connections, or substantially parallel 
therewith, a flap-valve, b, held to its seat, when 
not forcibly raised, by spring-pressure, in Com 
bination with yielding packing - rings (, un 
yielding curved hooks and counter-hooksee, 
and stop-posts in, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
THOMAS W. WELSH. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. WHITTLESEY, 
GEORGE H. CHRISTY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222088.txt	W. M. & J, SMEATON. 
Water-Closet Walve Mechanism. 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 222,088. 
Patented Nov. 25, 1879. 
 
 
S. 
  
 
 
n 
 
es 
 
S % 
2$Z 
s 
2S: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
a 4A4 
 
 
 
"<<x \7% 
Ym w J. Y. His: 
\ \, 
\ 
\, 
\ \. 
-P. 
--- 
| 
is 
w---- 
n----- l 
71 
R 
w 
- E-- 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR: 
 
 
 
%. 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
pers, Phoro-LTHOGRAPHER, WASON, D.C. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 222,088. 
<< SCSIS 
SSSSSSSSS 
|||||||||||| 
ATTORNEYS, 
N, PETERS, Photo-LTHOGRA 
PHER, WASHINGTON, D.c. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
WILLIAM M. SMEATON AND JOHN SMEATON, OF NEWCASTLE STREET, 
STRAND, COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND. 
IMPROVEMENT IN WATER-CLOSET VALVE MECHANISMS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 222,0ss, dated November 25, 1879; application filed 
July 9, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM.M. SMEATON 
and JOHN SMEATON, of Newcastle street, 
Strand, Middlesex county, England, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Wa 
ter-Closet Valve Mechanisms; and we do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same. 
Our invention relates to improved valv 
mechanism, adapted to be brought into oper 
ation by a pull or handle for the purpose of 
regulating the amount and preventing the 
waste of the water supplied to the bowl of a 
Water-closet, to flush and cleanse it during or 
subsequent to use. 
The principal feature of the invention con 
sists in utilizing hydrostatic pressure to con 
trol the action of the main valve, upon which 
the admission of water for flushing the bowl 
depends. In other words, we connect with 
the chamber of such main valve two small 
supplementary water-chambers, one of which 
is full or being filled when the other is empty 
or discharging. The weight of the water in 
one of said supplementary chambers is nor 
mally on the main or flushing valve when the 
o handle or lever of the valve mechanism is de 
pressed. But when the said lever is raised 
for the purpose of flushing the closet-bowl the 
main valve is relieved of such weight, and the 
water from the supply-pipe being also simul 
taneously set in motion to fill the supple 
mentary chamber, which is empty, the impetus 
or momentum of the water, acting freely on the 
under side of the valve, but not on its upper 
side, overcomes its gravity and inertia, and 
momentarily raises it, so that a sufficient 
quantity of Water passes into pipe 0 to flush 
the bowl. The valve then slowly closes as the 
previously-empty supplementary chamber fills 
and again comesto rest on its seat, thus cut 
ting of the discharge into the bowl. When 
the handle or valve-lever is forced down the 
valve again rises and the bowl is flushed as 
before. 
We show in accompanying drawings, form. 
ing part of this specification, different views 
of the valve mechanism, a closet-bowl and 
water-supply pipe being omitted, since their 
connection with and arrangement in relation 
to such mechanism will be well understood 
from the description following. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the valve 
mechanism. Fig. 2 is a rear sectional eleva 
tion on line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a rear eleva 
tion with parts broken away. Fig. 4 is a ver 
tical central section of the supplementary Wal 
ter-chambers and their valves. Figs. 5 and 6 
are vertical sections of the two chambers in 
planes at right angles to the plane of section 
in Fig. 4. 
X indicates the shell or case of the main or 
flushing valve E', and be the respective in 
duction and eduction water-Ways, to which 
the supply and discharge pipes (not shown) 
are in practice to be attached. The supple 
mentary water-chambers AA are placed above . 
or higher than the valve-case X, and con 
nected with the upper portion thereof by 
means of a tube, I, having lateral and pendent 
tubular extensions, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. 
The induction and eduction of chambers. A 
and A' are controlled by tapered valves or 
plugs B B, respectively, Fig. 4. Each of said 
valves has a longitudinal induction-passage, i, 
and a transverse eduction-passage, i. The 
valves B B are rotated (within the limits of 
a quarter of a circle) by means of a bifurcated 
lever, D, whose arms are attached to the spill 
dles C of the respective valves, so that both 
are operated simultaneously by raising or de 
pressing said lever. 
The valves are placed with their passages ii. 
in such relation to each other that when the 
induction-passage i of one valve B (or B) is 
open, the like passage of the other will be 
closed and its eduction-passage it open, as 
shown in Fig. 4, and vice versa, so that one 
chamber, A', may be filling while the other, A, 
is discharging. When the valve mechanism 
is not in action, the pressure of the weight of 
water in the supplementary chamber A, which 
is filled, is on the main valve E, since there is 
then open communication between the two 
valve-chambers through tube I and one of the 
valves B. 
 
 
222,0SS 
elevated a moment, and the bowl thus receives 
its first flush, but the empty chamber A' being 
soon filled, the pressure on the upper side of 
the valve E is restored, aud hence the gravity 
of the latter carries it down to its seat again. 
The depression of the lever D, however, pro 
duces a second operation precisely like that 
above described-that is to say, the contents 
of the now filled supplementary chamber, A', 
are discharged and the other chamber, A, is 
opened and filled from supply-pipe b, so that 
the main valve E is again relieved of press 
ure and rises as before, thus giving the after 
flush. 
It will be understood that the contents of 
the supplementary chambers A A' discharge 
through the pipe attached at a into the bowl 
of the water-closet, preliminary to the flushing 
of the same, and thus assist in rendering the 
latter operation effective for its purpose. 
What we claim is 
1. In a valve mechanism for water-closets, 
the combination with the main or flushing 
valve that is closed by the water-pressure of 
supplementary water - chambers and valves 
therefor, which allow said chambers to be al 
ternately filled and discharged, and a passage 
leading from the supply to that part of the 
main-valve chamber which is above the valve, 
and a lever adapted to be operated by the pull 
of the water-closet, substantially as shown and 
described, whereby the main valve is moment 
arily opened upon removal of the pressure of 
the water contained in one of the supplement 
ary-chambers, as specified. 
2. The combination of the bifurcated lever 
D, valves BB', having induction and eduction 
passages, the tube l, main valve E' and case 
X, the side passage R., having valve v, and the 
induction and eduction water-ways b c, sub 
stantially as shown and described, to operate 
as specified. 
The above specification signed by us. 
- 
- 
W. M. SMEATON. L. s. 
JOHN SMEATON. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
D. J. FORSTER, 
T. MoRGAN, 
24 Moorgate street, E. C. 
21 Cockspur street, S. W. 
. 
The main valve E is constructed with two 
heads, the upper one being packed to adapt it 
to fit the shell X closely, and the other consti 
tuting the part which rests normally on the 
valve-seat F. A stem, e, projects from the 
lower part of the valve and enters a socket, G, 
for the purpose of guiding and steadying the 
Valve in its vertical movements. 
One side of the valve-case X has a tubular 
enlargement, R., (Figs. 1 and 2,) by which com 
munication is established between the induc 
tion-pipe or water-way b and the upper por 
tion of the valve-chamber E. This passage 
R is always open, but the ingress of water to 
chamber Efrom the supply-pipel) is limited or 
controlled by means of a cock, v. 
To put said mechanism in condition for op 
eration, the water-supply pipe proper is at 
tached at b and the bowl-pipe at c, and a small 
pipe leading to the bowl is attached at a, Fig. 
4. The arm or lever D is also weighted, and 
the pull of the water-closet is provided with a 
lug or projecting part (riot shown) that takes 
under said lever, so that when the pull is 
drawn up the lever will be raised, as shown in 
dotted lines, Fig. 1. At that time one of the 
supplementary chambers, A', is empty, and the 
other, A, is in communication through its pas 
sage i and the tube I with the main valve 
chamber E. The raising of the lever D ro 
tates both valves B B', and opens the dis 
charge-passage it of one valve, B, and induc 
tion-passage i of the other valve, B'. Thus, 
communication is cut off between the chamber 
A and valve-chamber E, and opened between 
the latter and a supplementary chamber, A', at 
the same instant. Hence, the valve E' is re 
lieved of the pressure of the weight of water 
in one supplementary chamber, A, and a cur 
rent is simultaneously set up from supply-pipe 
at b, through passage R, tube I, and valve B', 
to fill the empty chamber A'. Such current 
sets the whole body of Water in the supply 
pipe in motion, and suddenly increases the 
pressure on the lower side of the valve E' at 
the moment the weight of water in the filled 
chamber A is removed from it; and thus the 
gravity of the main valve is overcome by the 
impetus or momentum of the water flowing 
along the supply-pipe. The valve remains 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222188.txt	L. D. HOWEY. 
Churn. 
No. 222, 188. 
Patented Dec. 2, 1879. 
telle-A 
s 3 s. 
 
N. Peters, FHoto-THOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
LORENZO D. HOVEY, OF CLINTON, ILLINOIS. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CHURNS. 
- 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 222,1ss, dated December 2, 1879; application filed 
May 8, 1879. 
- 
. 
. . . . 
To all whom it may concern: 
prevent the splashing cream rising from the 
sides of the churn from being thrown into the 
Beit known that I, LORENZO D. How EY, 
open lower end of the splash-cup. 
of Clinton, in the county of DeWitt and State 
A sheet-metal cap, E, tapering upward to 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Reciprocating Churns; 
form the frustum of a cone, fits closely around 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
the upper cone-frustum, C, of the plug C, and 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
extends above the churn-cover a sufficient dis 
tance to form a barrel or handle for forcing 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the plug C in position without bringing the 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
hands in contact with the cream, and enable 
panying drawings, and to letters of reference 
it to be seized at any time, either to force the 
plug in position or to enable the plug to yield 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
to the swaying of the dash-rod when desired. 
The upper end of the cap E and the lower 
My invention relates to attachments to the 
end of the plug C fit quite loosely around the 
cover of reciprocating or dasher churns, to 
prevent the cream from flying out of the churn 
dash-rod, so that it may be worked without 
opening through which the dash-rod passes. 
friction, while the distance from one to the 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
other is too great to allow the cream to pass 
through the upper opening, and at the same 
device of cheap and simple construction, which 
may be readily and securely attached to the 
time afford a safficient space around the dash 
churn-cover, and which may be conveniently 
rod to admit to the interior of the churn all 
the air required in the process of churning. 
detached and easily cleaned, and which will, 
The cream is thrown up by the dasher D' 
furthermore, admit of the dash-rod being freely 
operated with the greatest effective force with 
around the sides of the churn, and as the plug 
out forming a close joint around it or limiting 
C extends some distance below the cover to 
the interior of the churn-body, it will throw 
its movement, and at the same time prevent 
off the cream without allowing much of it to 
the cream from being forced outside of the 
churn upon the floor or the operator. 
enter the interior of the plug and cap, while 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
the double tapering form of the interior of the 
plug and cap will effectually throw of the es 
a vertical section through the center of the 
churn; Fig. 2, a perspective view of the cap 
caping cream and return it to the body of the 
or upper portion of the device, and Fig. 3 a. 
churn. 
similar view of the plug or lower portion of 
The plug, being made of wood, will adhere 
With less tenacity to the butter than if sheet 
The churn-body A is of the usual pattern of 
metal were employed, and will also form a 
closer joint and better bearing with the cover 
churns of this class, and is provided with a 
wooden cover, B, through the center of which 
and the lower end of the sheet-metal cap with 
out rusting. 
is an enlarged opening, b, rounded upon its up 
The Wooden plug may be thoroughly cleansed 
per and lower edges to form a convex surface, 
with hot Water, and the cap may be easily re 
the purpose of which will hereinafter more 
fully appear. . 
moved from the plug for this purpose. 
As the plug and cap forming the splash-cup 
A. Wooden plug, C, with tapering inner sur 
are joined by tapering and conical bearing 
face, increasing in diameter from its lower to 
surfaces, they may be readily removed, and at 
its upper end, and with its outer surface in the 
all times forced one upon the other, until a se 
form of double cone-frustums united at their 
bases, forms the lower portion of a splash-cup. 
cure joiriture is effected, 
The convex or rounded wall of the opening 
The lower frustum is the longer, and fits closely 
in the churn-cover will admit of the tapering 
into the opening in the churn-cover, so that it 
wooden plug C being inserted at any desired 
will extend below the bottom of the cover a 
sufficient distance into the churn to materially angle, to adapt itself to the movement of the 
the same. 
. 
... 
. . 
w 
- 
. 
 
 
 
 
222, 1ss 
dash-rod, or permit the roll to be swayed a 
limited distance without removing the plug 
from the cover. 
The long barrel or cap extending above the 
cover may be readily seized, when desired, to 
force the plug in position, or enable it to be 
withdrawn to inspect the interior of the churn 
without removing the cover. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with the cover of a re 
ciprocating churn, of the hollow double-cone 
frustum plug fitting into the churn-cover and 
extending below the same, and the sheet-metal 
cone-frustum cap fitting over the upper cone 
frustum of the hollow plug and extending 
above the churn-cover, in the manner and for 
the purposes substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the cover B, provided 
with an opening having a convex or rounded 
wall-surface, b, the conical plug C, the sleeve 
or cap E, and dash-rod D, these parts being 
combined for joint operation substantially as 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two Witnesses. 
LORENZO. D. HOWEY. 
Witnesses : 
STEPHEN K. CARTER, 
JOHN F. MARTIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222288.txt	A. LEMAIRE-DOUCHY, 
Car-Starter. 
No. 222,288. 
Patented Dec. 2, 1879. 
 
7 6.2 
N. PerERs, photo-uTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDRE LEMAIRE-DOUCHY, OF PARIs, FRANCE. 
M PROVEMENT IN CAR-STARTERs. 
W 
specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 222,2ss, dated December 2, 1879; application filed 
October 2, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDRE LEMAIRE 
DOUCHY, of Paris, France, have invented cer. 
tain Improvements in Car-Starters, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a reliable and effective car-starter, which de 
rives its power from the storing up of the mo 
tive power of the vehicle as it is being stopped, 
so that this power may be utilized to start the 
car again. This object I attain in the manner 
which I will now proceed to describe, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved car 
starting devices, the car itself being indicated 
by dotted lines; Fig. 2, a plan view, partly in 
section, with the frame of the car indicated 
by dotted lines, and Figs. X, ac, and y de 
tached views of a modification. 
The nature of my invention consists in Con 
structing a combination of devices whereby 
the last revolutions of the car-wheels, as the 
car is being brought to stand-still, may be 
utilized to cause the piston of a cylinder so to 
move as to form a vacuum or compression in 
the cylinder, and by means of suitable catch 
mechanism to retain the piston of the cylin 
der in position until it is desired to start the 
vehicle again, when the power-transmitting 
mechanism is reversed, and the catch mech 
anism released, so that the piston, under the 
action of the vacuum or compressed air, will 
return to its normal position, and in doing so 
cause the car-wheels to revolve and the ve 
hicle to start on its way. 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, B B are a pair 
of cylinders bolted to a frame secured to the 
under side of the car. The piston-rods of 
these cylinders are adapted to slide in guides, 
also secured to the frame, and are each pro 
vided with a double rack or two racks, CC, ar 
ranged on opposite sides of the front axle, F, 
and in different vertical planes, as shown in 
Fig. 2. With each of these racks gears a pin 
ion, e, loose on the axle F, and in each pinion 
is a conical socket, into which can fit a clutch 
block, M, secured on the shaft F by a feather, 
so that the block can slide on, but must turn 
with, the shaft. The several clutch-blocks are 
under the control of forked levers F, pivoted 
. 
to the frame at p, and having pivoted nuts at 
their outer ends, which are adapted to screws 
e on the transverse shaft V. This shaft can 
becaused to rotate by means of the handlem, 
under the control of the driver or conductor, 
through the medium of bevel-gear, as shown 
in the drawings, so that the screws e on the 
shaft V can move the levers E, so as to throw 
the clutch-blocks Minto gear with those pin 
ions which control either the upper two racks 
or the lower two racks on the piston-rods of 
the cylinders B. B. Secured to the outer ends 
of the racks on the pistons are extensions G, 
provided with hooks gg, which, when the pis. 
ton-rods are moved out, engage with hooks i 
on pivoted spring-arms J. These spring-arms 
are connected, by a chain passing over a pull 
ley, with the lower end of the rod controlled 
by the handle m, so that by turning this han 
dle the spring-arms J may be so drawn back 
as to release the hooks g g on the piston-rods. 
In the ends of the vacuum-cylinders B are 
openings closed by spring-valves S, which, 
when the piston reaches the end of inward 
motion, are acted on by a projection, T, on 
said pistons, so as to allow a little air to enter 
the cylinders and lessen the shock. 
When the car is in progress the parts of 
the brake and starting mechanism are in the 
position shown in the drawings, none of the 
four pinions c being clutched to the shaft F. 
When it is desired to stop the vehicle the 
handle on is so operated as to cause the levers 
F to force the clutch-blocks Minto the two 
pinions c, which are in gear with the upper 
two racks, so that, as the axle, continues to 
revolve, the piston-rods and pistons will be 
drawn outward until the hooks g g engage 
with the spring-catches T, by which time the 
car will have been brought to a stand-still, and 
a vacuum formed in the cylinders B. B. 
When it is desired to start the vehicle again 
the levers F are reversed, so as to cause the 
clutches to connect to the shaft Fthose two 
pinions which gear with the lower two racks, 
C C, and the catches J J are then released, so 
that, under the action of the vacuum in the 
cylinder, the pistons and piston-rods will be 
drawn back, and the racks caused to turn the 
axle, so as to start the vehicle. . 
Instead of working the apparatus with a 
. 
 
222,2SS 
vacuum it may be operated by compressed air 
by a slight modification in the construction of 
the cylinders. 
It is not necessary that two cylinders and 
attachments should be used. In many cases 
a single cylinder with piston-rod, rack, and 
connections will suffice. 
In Fig. XI have illustrated a modification, 
consisting of a single cylinder and attachments. 
The piston-rod A of the vacuum or compressed 
air cylinder B is connected by a swivel-joint, 
D, to a rack, C, having a prismatic extension, 
G, Fig. ac, which passes through a correspond 
ing opening in a worm-wheel, H, geared with a 
worm, V, under the control of the driver of the 
vehicle. This worm-wheel carries a socket 
adapted to a bearing, I, and held in place by a 
transverse pin, so that while the worm-wheel 
and shaft G. must turn with each other the said 
shaft can slide longitudinally in the said wheel. 
Hence by operating the worm V the rack C 
can be so turned as to gear either with a bevel 
pinion, c, on the axle E of the vehicle or with 
a bevel-pinion, c', on a counter-shaft, F, Fig. 
gy, this latter pinion, c', being geared to the 
axle E through the medium of the bevel-wheels 
or pinions c' c. 
understood from the preceding description. 
The operation of the device will be readily 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of a compressed-air or 
vacuum cylinder having a piston-rod carrying 
a reversible or double rack, C, provided with 
a hooked extension, G, with the spring-catches 
J, under the control of the driver, and the car 
axle carrying pinions and devices, substan 
tially as described, for reversing the connec 
tions between the said rack or racks and pin 
101S, 
2. The combination of a compressed-air or 
vacuum cylinder having a piston carrying the 
two racks C C, in different vertical planes, 
with the car-axle carrying loose pinions c c, 
one gearing with each rack, and sliding clutch 
blocks M and levers F, under the control of . 
the driver, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
ALEXANDRE LEMAIRE-DOUCHY. 
Witnesses: 
Jose.PH DEHAGEY, 
ROBT. M. HOOPER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222388.txt	R. DOTY. 
Metallic Packing. 
No. 222,388. 
Patented Dec. 9, 1879. f 
 
WITNESSES 
6-c1aeteece, 1. 
-67-73.7% 
NVENTOR 
w 
( & - outs i.) sile 
AftbRNEYs. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RHODOLPHUS DOTY, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
IMPROVEMENT IN METALLIC PACKING. 
 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 222,3ss, dated December 9, 1879; application filed 
June 26, 1879. 
Be it known that I, RHODOLPHUs DOTY, of ings. 
In the drawings, Figure 
To all whom it may concern: 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Metallic Packing; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
I clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable other's skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to metal packing for 
use in pipejoints, cylinder-heads, &c.; and it 
consists of sheet metal cut to the desired shape 
to fit the size and style of the cross-section of 
the joint to which it is to be adapted, and, 
when thus shaped, to be corrugated in the di 
rection of its circumference or periphery. 
represents, in 
plan view, a few of an indefinite variety of 
styles of metal packing constructed according 
to my invention. Fig. 2 represents, in cross 
section, a few of many styles of corrugating 
said packing. Fig. 3 shows said packing as 
placed in a pipejoint prior to said joint being 
is closed. Fig. 4 represents the same with said 
joint nearly closed, illustrating the operation 
of my packing. 
In the said drawings, A is the packing; B 
B', the abutting ends of two pipe-sections, or, 
as the case might he, a steam-cylinder and its 
head, a steam-chest and its cap, or the like. 
The packing A is constructed of metal, pref. 
erably of copper, zinc, or some non-corrosive 
non-oxidizable material. This packing is 
shaped annularly, square, octagonal, oval, or 
otherwise, to suit the fashion of the joint to 
be packed. The packing A is formed from . 
sheet metal, and is provided with one, two, or 
more corrugations, A, in the line of its cir 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
cumference, substantially as shown in the draw 
It will be observed that, when placed be 
tween the abutting ends of two pipe-sections, 
or the like, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4, there 
will be afforded three points of bearing for 
each corrugation. These points are repre 
sented in the drawings at a. a? a. 
Now, when the joints are screwed together, 
with the packing between them, as shown in 
Figs. 3 and 4, the corrugated sheet A will not 
only yield in such a manner as to allow of a 
proper opposition of said sections, but a tight 
joint will be secured, which will most effectu- . 
ally prevent any escape of steam, Water, or gas. 
under any pressure. 
In the use of this packing it is unnecessary. 
to employ anything additional-Such as recl. 
lead, or the like-to secure perfect tightness. 
Not only is this advantage obtained; but the 
packing is practically indestructible when 
made from copper, zinc, or equivalent non-cor 
rosive substance. It moreover possesses the 
advantages of great cheapness, of quick use, 
and certain application, and of periinitting a sis 
ready opening of the joint 
should this be re 
s 
quired. . 
- 
...i. 
What I claim is- 
The combination, with the meeting-surfaces 
in a joint, of a corrugated metallic packing in 
terposed flatwise between the same, whereby 
said corrugations may be compressed by said. 
meeting-surfaces, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
RHODOLEPEIUS DOTY. . 
". 
. . 
Witnesses: 
JNO. CROWELL, Jr., 
WILLARD FRACKER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222488.txt	Transporting and Deliverin 
No. 222,488. 
N 
t 
 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
A. E. HALL. 
Patent 
a 
9. Pledged Material. 
Dec. 9, 1879. 
2. X is 
OT 
N 
 
26 
 
 
InLierto 
ber-swa at 
s cit custos aloney 
Transporting and Delivering Dredged Material. 
A. E. HALL. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 222,488. 
Patented Dec. 9, 1879. 
Witnesses 
6. 
2-6.94% 
p 
 
In UEnto 
stbol &tiala.k.au. 
l, Cisk-to allery 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT E. HALL OF BOSTON, MASS., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF OF HIS 
RIGHT TO COURTLANDT PALMER DIXON, OF BROOKLYN, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN TRANSPORTING AND DELIVERING DREDGED MATERIAL 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 222,4ss, dated December 9, 1879; application filed 
April 11, 1879. 
To all thon, it may concern: 
E. which is a part of my system, 
Beit known that I, ALBERT ELISHA. HALL, 
to be attached to a locomotive and drawn by 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and Com 
it to the place where the gravel or mud is to 
be deposited, and there dumped, and again re 
monwealth of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful improvement in apparatus for 
turned to the dredger to be refilled and landed 
removing mud or gravel from the bed of shal 
as before, thus enabling me to raise mud or 
gravel from the bed of any water where it can 
low waters to such locations on or near shore 
be reached by the arm of the dredger and 
as it is desired to fill and raise above the flow 
carry it to any point inland where I wish to 
of the tide, for wharves, buildings, or other 
deposit it, (and lay a track for a locomotive 
purposes. 
and cars to run on,) without rehandling it, or 
Heretofore such work has been done in sev 
removing fixed bridges, and without regard 
eral different ways, all tedious and slow, and 
in most cases involving the necessity of hand 
to the height of the tide. 
ling the mud or gravel twice, and sometimes 
The invention consists in the combination 
oftener, and losing a portion of it at each hand 
and arrangement of a boat or scow of sufficient 
ling. 
capacity to receive and carry any desirable 
number of dumping-cars, and so decked over 
Unloaded scows have been floated at high 
water to places, where the mud and gravel 
as not to be liable to be filled with Water and 
swamped, with a proper superstructure and 
would be left uncovered at low water, and then 
filled by shoveling, and again at high Water 
track or tracks for the cars to move and rest 
on above and resting on the deck, a boat or 
floated to the place where it was desired to 
scow properly constructed for the purpose, 
make the filling, or as near it as the height of 
water would allow, and there dumping, and, 
and covered in so that it will not be liable to 
if necessary, again shoveling and moving it. 
be filled with water, carrying a landing-bridge 
with a railroad-track on it arranged to corre 
Scows have been filled with mud or gravel 
spond with and meet the track on the boat or 
from the bed of shallow water, raised by a 
steam shovel or dredger on a hull or float, and 
scow first mentioned at one end, and at the 
moved as near the shore as circumstances other end with a railroad-track on the land 
would allow and dumped, and the mud or ing-head on or connected with the shore, all 
gravel again lifted and placed on shore on constructed substantially as hereinafter de 
carts or cars, to be transported where the fill scribed 
The landing-bridge is made in two equal, or 
was to be made; but this involves two or more 
handlings of the filling material. 
nearly equal, parts or lengths, hinged to and 
A bridge on piles has been run out from the supported by a biock or structure prepared for 
shore to the point where the steam shovel or the purpose ator near the middle of the length of 
dredger would be located, and a rail-track the boat or scow. When in position between 
laid on it, and dumping-cars run out on it to the scow carrying the dumping-cars and the 
be filled, and then drawn where the filling was landing-head on or approaching the shore, one 
to be deposited; but this method was some- end of this landing-bridge rests upon and is 
times impracticalole at high or low tide, and secured to the landing-head to Ward the shore, 
involved a double handling, or a rebuilding and the other end rests upon and is secured 
of the bridge as soon as the available material to the scow carrying the dumping-cars, the 
'within reach of the dredger is removed. 
bridge only bearing upon the scow carrying it 
My method and apparatus obviate all these at the middle on the block or superstructure 
objections and enable me to locate the dredger before mentioned. At both ends of the bridge 
at any desirable station in a bay or arm of the supporting scow is an upright frame-Work 
sea, and remove it to any other station at over the ends of the bridge, and supporting 
pleasure, and then carry the dumping-cars, levers on each side of the scow, the shorter 
adapted to the ordinary railway-track, to it to ends of which levers are connected with the 
be filled, and when filled carry them to the outer ends of the bridge, the length of the le. 
 
 
 
s 
222,4SS 
vers being parallel with the sides of the bridge, 
again downward about four degrees. The two 
tracks on the landing-head are run together 
and the inner ends of the levers are provided 
with balancing-weights, which equal, or nearly 
and united at a distance landward sufficient 
equal, the weight of the outer ends of the 
to make an easy grade from the lower to the 
bridge, to which the outer ends of the levers 
upper one. 
are connected, so that a slight power applied 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
the parts are indicated by the same letter in 
to the inner ends of the levers will raise the 
the different figures, Figure I is a side view 
outer ends of the bridge above and away from 
of the landing-bridge and its supporting boat 
their connections with the landing-head and 
or scow, and a portion of the car-carrying 
the inner end of the car-carrying scow. In 
this detached state the bridge-carrying scow 
scow connected with the bridge, and a portion 
of the landing-head, showing one of the tracks 
may (with or without the aid of a tug-boat) be 
on it. Fig. II is an end view of the landing 
removed to any location desired, to be con 
bridge and its supporting-scow. Fig. III is a 
nected with another landing-head or not, as 
diagram, showing the line of the top of the 
the case may be; or in case of storm it may 
be towed to some location where it will be safe 
rail-track on the shoreward end of the land 
ing-bridge at the different stages of water-low 
from injury. The invention further embraces 
a landing-head at or approaching the shore, 
tide, half-tide, and high tide-and the Water 
resting upon piles or a wall or other suit 
level at low and high tides. Fig. IV is an end 
able fixed support, with two or more rail 
view of the landing-head. Fig. W is a side 
road-tracks arranged to correspond with and 
view of the landing-head. 
a is the float supporting the landing-bridge. 
meet the track on the landing-bridge, but at 
b is the car-carrying scow. cc is the landing 
different heights above the water-level at low 
bridge. d is the landing-head. e is the con 
tide, so that a locomotive from the shore may 
be run onto the landing-bridge with safety 
nection of the landing-bridge to the landing 
head. f is the hinged joint connecting the 
from one track or the other at any stage of the 
two parts of the landing-bridge. g is the sup 
tide, and, being connected with the train of 
dumping-cars on the car-carrying scow, will 
porting-block near the middle of the scow, on 
take them on shore with ease, the upward grade 
which the landing-bridge rests, h. h is the 
from the carrying-scow over the landing-bridge 
frame supporting the lever by which the outer 
never being high enough to impede the pro 
ends of the landing-bridge are raised; ii, the 
gress of the locomotive with its loaded train 
levers and connections by which the outer 
eads of the landing-bridge are raised and sus 
of dumping-cars toward the shore, or to ren 
der the running of the empty cars from the 
ended while the scow and bridge.are removed 
shore over the landing-bridge to the car-carry 
from one location to allother; 0 o, the rail 
track on the landing-bridge, d in the diar 
ing scow in the least hazardous. 
The lower track on the landing-lhead is 
gram indicates high-Water level. c' indicates 
placed so much above the water-level at low 
low-water level; all, top of rail of high land 
ing; b', top of rail of low landing; e, top of 
tide that the upward grade from the car-car 
rying scow over the landing-bridge and land. 
rail at middle of landing-bridge when con 
ing-head will be about two degrees, the top of 
nected with upper landing at half-tide; m, top 
of rail at middle of landing-bridge when con 
the rail-track on the scow and bridge being 
three to four feet above the water-line. The 
nected with lower landing at low tide. e' is 
connection of the landing-bridge with the lower 
also top of rail when connected with lowland 
track on the landing-head will be maintained 
ing at half-tide. n is top of rail when con 
nected with high landing at high tide. 
until the water-level is half-way between low 
and high tide, when the grade off the bridge to 
The diagram Fig. III shows the grade from 
the middle of the landing-bridge to the land 
the landing will be downward about four de 
grees, the end of the scow carrying the bridge 
ing-head at the different stages of the tide, 
toward the landing being cutaway enough to al 
as before explained. 
The landing-head and tracks from it being 
low the scow to rise with the tide without com 
ing in contact with the outer end of the bridge 
made ready for use in the usual way of pre 
paring railway-tracks, for use in similar situa 
to lift it off from its connection with the lower 
tions, either upon piles or masonry, or both, 
track of the landing-head. When the tide is 
half-way between low and high the landing 
or either, combined with earth-filling and pro 
bridge is detached from the lower track and 
vided with means of bringing up and secur 
ing the end of the landing-bridge to it, the 
moved sidewise to the point of connection with 
landing-bridge and its supporting-scow con 
the upper track, and its landward end raised by 
structed upon well-known principles of bridge. 
means of the levers before mentioned to bring 
building and boat-building, and adapted to 
the rails on the bridge to meet those on the 
landing-head, and the bridge is then secured 
each other in the manner herein described, 
to the landing-head. This will produce an 
with a railway-track upon the bridge and the 
car-carrying scow, with the railway-tracks 
upward grade from the bridge of about two 
degrees, which will be gradually diminished 
above its deck to meet the track of the bridge, 
as the tide rises, and at high tide the grade and its proper means of connection with the 
off the bridge onto the landing-head will be landing-bridge, all substantially constructed, 
 
 
 
222,4SS 
the bed of the bay or other water and filling 
up flats or lowlands may be prosecuted much 
Ester and cheaper than it has ever before been 
Ole. 
The steam-dredger may be located and from 
time to time moved as the material within its 
reach is all taken up. A suitable tug-boat 
tows the car-carrying scow with its train of 
dumping-cars on board to the dredger, b 
y 
which the dumping-cars are quickly filled. The 
tug-boat then proceeds with the scow and cars 
to the landing-bridge, to which the scow is se 
cured. The locomotive is then backed down 
onto the landing-bridge attached to the dump 
ing-cars, and steams away with them to the 
place where the filling is wanted, dumps the 
contents, and returns the cars again on board 
of the scow, to be again towed to the dredge 
and refilled, and so on until the work is com 
pleted. 
It is obvious that two trains of dumping 
cars may be used, thuskeeping the tug, dredger, 
and locomotive, and the persons attending 
them more fully employed. 
The saving of cost of filling low lands and 
flats near the Water by the means here de 
scribed will be very important, and notably so, 
as the work can be continued without inter 
ruption at all stages of the tide, and, if desir 
able, night as well as day time. 
With slight modification this system could 
be used with great advantage in transferring 
trains of passenger or freight cars across riv 
ers and arms of the sea where the tide flows. 
I claim as new 
1. In combination, a car - carrying scow, a 
floating portable landing:bridge, and a land 
ing-head with tracks at different heights, all 
constructed and arranged substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
2. A portable floating landing-bridge con 
sisting of a supporting-float and a bridge in two 
parts, hinged upon a supporting-block at the 
middle of the float, and the outer ends sus 
pended from movable balanced levers, all coll 
structed and arranged substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
ALBERT. E. EIALL, 
Witnesses: 
CH. HouGHTON, 
FRED. L. HOUGHTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222588.txt	I, HOGEL AND 
Lifting - Jack, 
No. 222,588. 
Patented Dec. 16, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
&&. AR 
2. 
  
  
H 
e HN 
WITNEEEEE; 
Z 
d5, 
g 
NMENTOR 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISRAEL HOGELAND, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF 
AND GEORGE P. ANDERSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROVEMENT IN LIFTING-JACKS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 222,5ss, dated December 16, 1879; application filed 
March 28, 1879. 
To all choin it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ISRAEL HoGELAND, of 
Indianapolis, in the county of Marion and 
State of lndiana, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Lifting-Jacks, of which 
the following is a description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to that class of ma 
chines used for raising heavy weights and re 
moving stumps, &c. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
system of newly constructed and arranged de 
vices, having new modes of operation, for 
raising heavy weights or extracting stumps 
from the ground. 
My invention consists, mainly, in the new 
construction, arrangement, and application of 
devices; also, in the new combination of old 
elements, all of which, singly or combined, 
are deemed essential in my newly-organized 
lifting-jack, whereby new and useful results 
are produced, as will be hereinafter described 
and set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
like letters of reference in the different figures 
indicate like parts, Figure 1 represents a per 
spective view of a lifting-jack embodying my 
improvements. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the 
upper end of the ratchet-bar. Fig. 4 is a cross 
section of the ratchet-bar. Fig. 5 is a top 
view of the case. Fig. 6 is a side elevation of 
the lifting-hook; and Fig. 7 is a side elevation 
of the notched lifting-pawl. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
outer case, made from metal, having a form 
in cross-section similar to that shown in Fig. 
5-i.e., the hole S is cored through from end 
to end, with a recess, R, in front, and recesses 
R. R.? at the sides at about an angle of thirty 
degrees, and the recess R at the rear side 
adapted to receive the ratchet-bar C F F. F. 
F. The upper end of the case A is enlarged, 
as shown at B, and provided with the holes a, 
which open into the recesses R. R. R', as 
shown. Below the head B the recesses R. R.' 
R are cut through the case, forming slots H, 
extending from the head B to the upper edges 
of the curved fulcrums K, for the ratchet-lift 
ers J to operate in, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The curved fulcrums K K are arranged in 
pairs, and are attached to, or form part of, the 
casing L, and said casing L. may be cast solid 
with the case A, or attached thereto, with a 
slot or recess, g, for the lower part of the pawl 
or ratchet-lifter J to operate in, as shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3. 
The ratchet-bar C is provided with a ratch 
et, F, at the front side, and ratchets F F, 
arranged at an angle of about thirty degrees, 
at the sides, and a rib, F, at the rear, all of . 
which are adapted to operate in the hole S 
and recesses R. R. R. R. of the case A. The 
pawls D are inserted in the holes at of the en 
larged head B, and may be held in position 
by the bar b, passing through a slot, c, and 
also held in contact with the ratchets E. E. E. 
of the bar C by a spring, h, which presses 
against the inner edge of the bar b and inner 
end of the slot C, as shown in Fig. 2. Thus, 
when the ratchet-bar C is raised, the ratchets 
E. F. E. force the pawls D away until a tooth 
of the ratchet is forced above the pawl; then 
the spring h forces the pawl into the notch be 
low, and prevents the bar C from falling un 
til released by pulling the pawl D out of co 
tact there with. 
The latchet-lifter J is constructed similar 
to that shown in Fig. 7-i. e., with a notch, i. 
in the front side, forming a recess for the end 
of the lever P to operate in. The side opposite 
from the notch i is provided with ratchet-teeth 
Ji, corresponding with the ratchets FF F of 
the bar C. The lower end, j, of the ratchet-lifter 
is made tapering-that is, thicker at the bot 
tom than at the base of the Tatchet J-SO as 
to allow the lifter to tilt forward while lifting 
the bar C, as shown in Fig. 2, or to tilt back 
and disengage the ratchets, when the pawl is 
dropped, and the lower beveled edge of the 
pawl J comes in contact with the edge of 
the slot H, also shown in Fig.2. The lever 
P is provided at the end with a curved point 
to operate in the notch i of the pawl J, and 
is also provided with fulcrum-pins.fproject 
ing from each side of the lever, Said fulcrum 
pinf operates on the upper curved edges of 
the fulcrum-horns KK, thus causing the ends 
of the levers to remain in contact with the 
pawl J, and when operated to raise the bar C 
2 
222,5ss 
forces the ratchet J of the pawl J in close 
contact with the ratchets FF F of the bar, 
and prevents them from slipping. 
It frequently happens that additional power 
is required on a singlejack; hence the arrange 
ment of three sets of ratchets, FE. F., on the 
bar C, and by arranging the side ratchets and 
operating-levers at an angle of about thirty 
degrees the jack is adapted to operate in va 
rious places, and three or more persons are 
provided with room to operate the levers with 
out interfering with each other. 
The hook G. G' is constructed similar to that 
shown in Fig. 6, with a series of holes, d', for 
the pin d to fit in, and an adjustable head, E. 
- This device is extremely useful, especially 
when stumps have to be extracted from the 
ground, as the hook G" can be adjusted under 
a root, the head E adjusted to the proper 
height, and resting on the head C of the 
ratchet-bar C, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The operation of my improved device is as 
follows, to wit: The jack being adjusted with 
the levers P in position, and the fulcrum-pins 
f on the curved fulcrum-horns K. K., when 
the levers are lifted the pawls J fall and tilt 
backward in the recess g. As the levers are 
forced down, the pawls J are forced in con 
tact with the ratchets FF F, and the full 
crum-pins f hold them there during the act 
of raising the bar C, the pawls D catching un 
der the ratchets F, and holding the bar C while 
the levers are being readjusted for another 
lift. When it becomes necessary to lower the 
bar C the pawls ID are withdrawn from con 
tact there with, and the bar allowed to drop. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- 
1. In a lifting jack, the case A, having a 
chamber, S, provided with radial recesses R. 
R. R. R., holes a in the head B, slots H, and 
curved fulcrum-horns KK, as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
chamber, S, with radial recesses R. RRR, and 
curved fulcrum-horns KK, combined with the 
ratchet-bar C C, having radial ratchets FF 
F', the pawls J and D, and lever P, provided 
With fulcrum-pin f, as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
2. In a lifting-jack, the case A, having a - 
- 
ISRAEL HOGELAND. 
Witnesses: 
E. O. FRINK, 
G. H. RENNETT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222688.txt	 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A IL E XAN DER IF U G E IL, OF CLAYTON, CA LI FORNIA. 
I MI PROVEMENT IN GRA I N-S E PARATO RS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 222,6SS, dated December 16, 1879; application filed 
July 17, 1879. 
To all chom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER FUGEL, 
of Clayton, in the county of Contra Costa and 
State of California, have invented a new and 
Improved Grain-Separator, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. . 
The invention consists in the means here 
inafter described for imparting motion to the 
upper and lower shoes of a grain-separator. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
is a vertical cross-section of the improve 
ment on line ac ae, Fig. 2; and Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional end elevation, the section being taken 
on line y 21, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
outer casing of the separator, in the rear part 
whereof, which adjoins the thrasher, are two 
cylindrical shells, B B', open on the side to 
ward the screens, the former being located 
in the upper part of the casing, and the latter 
below, on the level of the floor, the two being 
separated by a partition, C, supported in an 
inclined position between the side walls of the 
C3S?. 
In the shells, om suitable shafts or gud 
geons, are placed fans or blowers D D, re 
spectively, connected through pulleys on the 
ends of the shafts by crossed belts, so that 
they will revolve in opposite directions-D in 
the direction of arrow 1, and D in that of 
arrow 2. 
In the upper part of the case, forward of the 
fan, is suspended by hangers b a rectangular 
box, E, open at the rear end and closed at 
the other, from whence an inclined bottom, c, 
extends part of the length of the box, and 
joins a sheet-metal bottom, d, provided with 
perforations and sharp fingers or teeth pro 
jecting toward the open end of the box, form 
ing thus a combined straw carrier and screen. 
Below box E is another box, E, suspended 
by hangers d'. This box is provided with 
two horizontal screens, ee', and below these 
a screen or bottom, f, of fine wire, inclined 
from the outer end of the box to which it is 
fastened to the inner end, where it terminates 
just over a perforated or screen spout, F, piv 
oted at the middle of its length, so that it 
will swing down and join either one or the 
other of the spouts g g, passed through the 
sides of the case, so as to deliver the grain to 
either side, as may be desired. 
Beneath the inclined screenfis an outward 
ly-inclined floor, G, fixed between the sides and 
cut off from the pivoted spout F by cross-bar 
h. The lower end of this floor abuts against 
the tail-piece H, having an opening, i, at the 
lower part for the tailings and the screenings 
falling on the floor G to pass out of it. 
Between the boxes E E is journaled a shaft, 
I, om one eind whereof is a pulley belted with 
the pulley on the gudgeon or shaft of upper 
fan, D, so as to move in unison there with. 
On this shaft, on either side, between boxes 
E E' and the sides of the apparatus, are fixed 
cams J J', having their operating-faces turned 
to opposite sides of the shaft, so that the face 
of the cam J bears against the adjacent side 
of box E, and that of J" against E', as shown. 
The purpose of the cams is to vibrate the two 
sets of screens; and the arrangement is such 
that when the upper set moves to the right 
the lower is moved to the left, and so on. 
The cross-bar K, to which the forward up 
per edge of shell B is fastened, has hinged to 
it a deflector, L, to change the direction of 
the blast from the fan D, deflecting it down 
on and over screense e', or up through screen 
d, as may be desired. 
The operation of this invention is as fol 
lows: The straw, chaff, and grain from the 
thrasher fall down on floor c of box E, thence 
pass to metal bottom d, which carries the 
straw and unthrashed heads off to the eleva 
tor, while the grain falls through the perfora 
tions in d, and, by the force of the blast from 
D, is relieved of its chaff, which is blown out 
through the open end of the screen-box, while 
the grain, falling on screen e, passes through 
screensee', and is freed from oats and other 
offal; thence, falling on inclined screen f, it 
passes over the same into the pivoted trough 
F, and thence passes to one of the troughs or 
spouts g, and thence into the sacks. In its 
progress over inclined screen if and through 
the perforated trough it is cleaned from cheat 
and other fine seeds, and is delivered from the 
spouts thoroughly cleansed. 
2 
222,@88 
Having thus described my invention, I between the two boxes, and having cams J J', 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters arranged to embrace the edges of said boxes 
and impart to them reciprocation in opposite 
Patent- 
h??? ??? combination, with box E, of the directions, as specified. 
shaft I, provided with cams J J', arranged in 
contact with said box, on each side thereof, as 
and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination, with boxes E. E.', ar- 
ranged one below the other, of the shaft I, 
JOHN DORMIER, 
WILLIAM. H. TAYLOR. 
Witnesses: 
ALEXANDER FUGEL. 
?? 
- 
" 
...--?? ? 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222788.txt	O, P, JACKSON, 
Tools for Flaring Glass Ware, 
No. 222,788. 
Patented Dec. 23, 1879. 
Witnesses 
 
22-22. 
x 
Invento". 
Attorneys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
: 
OLIVER P. JACKSON, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM 
I. MILLER, OF SAME PLACE. 
MPROWEVENT N Tools FOR FLARING GLASSWARE. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 2:22,2'ss, dated December 23, 1879; application filed 
June 18, 1879. 
To all chon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OLIVER P. JACKSON, 
of Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful improvements in Tools for 
Flaring Glassware; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains 
to make and use it, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form part of 
this specification, in Which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation; Fig. 2, a trans 
verse section on linea ac, looking to the left. 
Fig. 3 is a similar view on line / y, looking to 
the right. 
This invention relates to an improved tool 
or plug for flaring the mouths of lamp-chim 
neys, smoke-bells, goblets, &c.; and it consists 
in a conical or colloidal body having its sur 
face partly removed in such a manner as to 
leave facets, which overlap each other circum 
ferentially, as hereinafter described. 
The invention is especially designed to op 
erate by oscillation, after the manner described 
in Letters Patent No. 214,150, but can also be 
applied to rotary machines or hand-tools. 
A designates the stem, by which the device 
is attached for operation. B is a conical or 
conoidal body, having the facets a, in relief; 
or it may be described as a solid cone or co 
noid having portions of its surface removed in 
such manner that the surface is not contiu 
ous, either circumferentially or longitudinally, 
thus forming the raised facets (t. These I so 
proportion relatively that the adjacent ends 
overlap, so that the line of the face of one, in 
operating, Will lead onto that of the next. 
Circumferentially there may be two, three, 
or more facets aligned; but I find, in practice, 
that, two of moderate width are sufficient. 
Obviously, the shape of the facets may be 
varied. I show diamond-shaped facets; but 
they may be round, oval, hexagonal, or of other 
outline, or several figures may be associated 
on the one plug. In constant and rapid oscil 
lation these facets present practically a contin 
uous surface to the glass, while the actual 
surface in contact is not sufficient to cause 
crizzling or cording, because the surface is dis 
continuous; yet the surface is great enough 
to prevent too rapid Wear. Such rapid wear 
necessitates the frequent substitution of a new 
tool, or else makes a constantly - decreasing 
size of flare, thus gradually departing from a 
given standard. 
Besides the top of lamp-chimneys, my inven 
tion is applicable to many other uses in finish 
ing glass ware. Hence I do not confine myself 
to a conical form, as a departure from that 
outline may be desirable. 
I am aware that, tools for flaring are not a 
novelty, as they have been made in various 
ways, such as a series of converging wires, a 
solid or a ribbed plug, or a body of suitable 
shape covered with a spiral rib running from 
end to end. These have been given rotary 
motion; and I do not claim herein anything 
constructed in any of sald ways. 
My plug is not a continuous surface at any 
point, either longitudinally or circumferen 
tially. 
There is no direction of the work 
ing-surface either one or the other way. This 
enables the glassWare to ride smoothly on the 
plug when being flared; for while merely ro 
tating the glass is not crizzled, and when be 
ing flared during oscillation or rotation the 
surfaces act in the Same manner. At the same 
time the facets enable me to have a compara 
tively broad surface in contact with the glass 
at all times without producing harmful friction. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A finishing-tool for glassware having its 
working-face discontinuous in all directions, 
substantially as described. 
2. A finishing-tool for glassware consisting 
of a body, B, having the raised and overlap 
ping facets a, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand. 
OLIVER P. JACKSON. 
Witnesses: 
T. J. McTIGHE, 
JOHN MI. PATTERSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222888.txt	J. G. G. ARLAND. 
Apparatus for Moistening the Atmosphere, 
Patented Dec. 23, 1879. 
Alaz. Z. 
. No. 222,888. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
s 
S3. 
s 
UE 
& E 
asz S 
size 
se 
s 
Sis 
gase 
left 
2eer 
-2 S.H. 
s SE 
LIl 
a 
4. 
Peters, Potthographer, WASNKstron. d. c. 
J. G. G. ARLAND. 
Apparatus for Moistening the Atmosphere. 
Patented Dec. 23, 1879. 
No. 222,888. 
-2. Sheets-Sheet 2 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
JAMES G. GARLAND, OF BIDDEFORD, MAINE. 
MPROVEMENT IN APPARATUS FOR MOSTENING THE ATMOSPHERE, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 222, sss, dated December 23, 1879; application filed 
September 25, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, JAMES G. GARLAND, of 
Biddeford, county of York, and State of Maine, 
have invented an Improvement in Apparatus 
for Moistening the Atmosphere, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an apparatus for 
moistening the air or throwing into a room 
Water, or liquid, or medicants, and is applica 
ble to every variety of room, and whether re 
quired for mechanical, hygienic, or any other 
purpose. 
The object of the invention is to provide an 
apparatus which shall keep the air constantly 
supplied with any desired amount of moisture 
or liquid, and which shall at the same time. 
diffuse such moisture or liquid uniformly 
throughout the different parts of the room. 
Heretofore different kinds of devices have 
been described for imparting humidity to the 
atmosphere of rooms, one of which is de 
scribed in Letters Patent granted to me on 
the 1st day of July, 1873, and reissued on the 
12th day of August, 1879, No. 8,847. The ap 
paratus described in this patent, although 
well calculated to infuse a large amount of 
moisture or liquid into the atmosphere of an 
apartment, was not provided with any means 
by which the moisture or liquid could be uni 
formly distributed into all the parts of the 
room, so as to make the atmosphere equally 
moist throughout the entire apartment. 
An apparatus has also been devised for im 
parting moisture to a current of air admitted 
to a room or building by which the room or 
building was supplied with air moistened pre 
vious to its admission. Such an apparatus 
involved the mechanical supply of air to the 
room in addition to the apparatus for diffusing 
moisture throughout the air. 
I am also aware that an arrangement of 
pipes has been devised to be carried around a 
room, conveying water under pressure and 
spraying through ordinary spraying devices, 
such as the rose, whereby the water could 
be divided into thin streams, but not thor. 
oughly diffused in the form of vapor. 
My aim is to obtain the advantages of 
thorough and uniform diffusion through all 
parts of the room by means of atomizers, com 
bined with a system of water-pipes, and of 
 
- 
- 
onizer. 
air or steam pipes, the air or steam pipes hav 
ing proper apparatus for applying pressure, 
alnd the Water-pipes being connected with a 
Water-supply adapted to keep constantly on 
the same level in all the liquid-legs of the at 
My apparatus, which is intended as a sup 
plement or auxiliary to the apparatus de 
scribed in my patent referred to above, con 
sists, therefore, of a series of pipes arranged 
throughout the room, and provided with pipes 
adapted to conduct water and air or steam, 
and also provided with atomizers arranged in 
different parts of the room in numbers suffi 
cient to completely and uniformly moisten the 
air or distribute liquid in every part, said air 
or steam pipes being provided with apparatus. 
to give a regulated pressure, and said water 
pipes being connected with a head or supply 
of water adapted to the common level of the 
atomizers, so as to give a uniform and proper 
supply of water thereto. 
The details of construction of my improved 
apparatus are hereinafter fully described, and 
the particular features claimed by me are es 
pecially indicated in the claims. 
. 
In the drawings hereunto attached and form 
ing part of this specification, Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of the pipes and atomizers 
as they are arranged throughout one part of 
the room, together with their connections with 
the water and air supply. Fig.2 represents a 
side elevation of the bracket with the branch, 
pipes and atomizers in side elevation, and the 
main supply-pipes in section. 
In these drawings, Arepresents a pipe, which 
conveys the water to the atomizer, and which 
is arranged below the air-pipe B. Both of 
these pipes, however, are represented as at 
tached to the same row of posts, and they are 
carried along near each other. Instead of be 
ing arranged in the manner shown upon posts. 
throughout the room, these pipes may be con 
cealed within the ceiling or walls, or beneath 
the floor, and branch pipes be carried to any 
desired point in the room from these main con 
cealed pipes. 
As represented more clearly in Fig. 2, trans 
verse pipes at a are connected to the Water-pipe 
A. These pipes are represented as exact du 
plicates, and, manifestly, one or both may be 
222, sss 
used, according to the requirements of the room. 
Upon the Outer ends of the pipes at at are fixed 
short vertical pipes b, into the open ends of 
which are let down the liquid-legs in of the 
atomizers. The supply of water through the 
pipe A into these branches must be arranged 
so that the water will stand at a level indi 
cated in Fig. 1, or approximately in that posi 
tion. 
To the air-pipe B is connected also a series 
of branch pipes, c c, each set of which is ar 
ranged in relation to the branch water-pipes 
b, so as to act properly in relation throughout 
and accomplish the effect of the ordinary at 
omizer, 
This apparatus for forcing out the diffused 
moisture or liquid, being well known, need not 
here be specifically described. 
It will be understood that the branch pipes 
at a. and b b are located throughout the room, 
all upon the same level, and all have connec 
tions with the same water-supply. This wa 
ter-supply may be a taluk located within or 
outside of the room, or any convenient appa 
ratus or connection which will convey the wa 
ter to the pipes and keep it at a constant and 
uniform level. 
I prefer the apparatus shown in my patent 
heretofore referred to, both for the supply of 
the Water and air; but instead of air, which 
may be introduced by any blower or any mode 
of pressure, I may use steam under pressure 
brought by the pipe B to the branch pipes cc, 
Steam obviously acting in the same manner 
for the diffusion of the moisture as the com 
pressed air. 
The atomizers are located at any convenient 
point upon the pipes, and are firmly supported 
in place by a bracket, D, provided with arms 
e, through holes in which the transverse pipes 
paSS. 
The spray-tube is represented at N, Fig. 2. 
When air is used in this apparatus the atomiz 
ing-tube should be of glass, and of metal when 
steam is used, and the connections with the 
steam-pipe should also be of metal, while, 
when the apparatus is used with air, the con 
nections may be made of rubber. The main 
supply-pipes only are fasteued to the hangers 
or posts, and the spray-arms are always lo 
cated at suitable distances from the posts, in 
order that the spray may not be thrown thereon. 
The air or steam connections are supplied 
with proper stop-cocks, as represented clearly 
in Fig.2. 
I do not limit myself to the special arrange 
ment of pipes which I have shown, since the 
arrangement may be manifestly changed, as 
hereinbefore indicated. 
What I claim is 
The combination of the water-pipe A, air or 
steam pipe B or C, branch pipes a b, and 
branch air or steam pipes c, said parts being 
arranged in relation to each other, and con 
nected to the water-supply and to the Steam 
or air supply, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my llaime 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
- 
JAMES G. GARLAND. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. A. MOODY, 
R. H. INGERSOLL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US222988.txt	C. C. FAIRLAM.B. 
Milk-Can. 
No. 222,988. 
Patented Dec. 30, 1879. 
 
 
2422.2474242 
PHOTO-LITH 
WASHIr! 
Charles CA%irdzzz, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES C. FAIRILAMIB, OF ARENA, WISCONSIN. 
IMPROVEMENT IN MILK-CANS. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 222,9SS, dated December 30, 1879; application filed 
May 26, 1879. 
To all chom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES C. FAIRLAMB, 
of Arena, in the county of Iowa, and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in CansforTransporting and Stor 
ing Cream and other Liquids, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The subject of my invention is a can with 
Straight vertical sides, a hollow follower-head 
fitting its interior, and a filling-tube by which 
the cream or other liquid is introduced beneath 
the follower-head, so as to raise the latter by 
its pressure. 
In Order that my invention may be fully un 
derstood, I will proceed to describe it with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a can, ill 
lustrating my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
longitudinal section of the same. 
A represents a can of cylindrical shape; B, 
a Vertical tube connecting with the bottom of 
the can for filling. C is a hollow cover fitting 
within the can A, and adapted to float upon 
the cream or milk or other liquid therein. An 
aperture or tube, D, passing through the cen 
ter of the cover, prevents the imprisonment of 
E E represent the handles for 
air below it. 
raising the cover. 
FF are handles for carry. 
ing the can. 
My invention possesses important advan 
tages, especially for the purposes of storing 
and transporting cream. It effects a saving 
in labor and in cream by filling through the 
pipe B, permitting the cream to run down into 
the can at bottom and force up the follower 
head as fast as cream is added. This dis 
penses with the common practice of removing 
the follower-head from the can and pouring 
the cream in at the top, which involves coln 
siderable trouble, and also loss of cream, which 
drops from the cover. The old practice is also 
uncleanly, by the spilling of cream and per 
mitting dlust and dirt to en ter the caun. 
Having thus described my invention, the fol 
lowing is what I claim as new therein, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent: 
A portable cylindrical can provided with a 
floating head or follower, C, having an aperture, 
ID, and with a filling-tube, B, extending upward 
alongside of the can, substantially as herein 
set forth, so that the follower-head will be 
raised by the pressure of cream taken in at 
the bottom of the can. 
CHAS. C. FAIRILAMB. 
Witnesses: 
S. S. POWERs, 
F. W. MCCLELLAND. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223088.txt	T. WOL COTT. 
Gear-Cutting Machine. 
No. 223,088. 
Patented Dec. 30, 1879, 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
TOWNSEND WOLCOTT, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IMPROVEMENT IN GEAR-CUTTING MACHINES. 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 223,0ss, dated December 30, 1879; application filed 
June 7, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, Tow NSEND WoLCOTT, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Machines for Cutting Gear or Teeth of 
Wheels, and such like purposes; and I hereby 
declare that the following is a description of 
the invention, reference being had to the an 
nexed drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of the index-plate, 
a slotted arm, and spring-pin; and Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation of the index-plate, adjustable 
arms, ald the Spring-pins. 
Similar letters refer to like parts on both 
figures. 
In common gear-cutting machines the in 
dex-plates are made with a very large number 
of guide-spaces, and in each plate, for the 
highest number of teeth to be cut upon a 
blank, there is an equal number of guide 
spaces, such as three hundred and fifteen for 
three hundred and fifteen teeth, whereas by 
my improvement I can cut that number of 
teeth with only nine guide-holes in the largest 
circle of my index-plate, in which, as repre 
sented, there are only four circles; and I do 
it by three combinations of the circles, while 
with four or all the circles of holes I can cult 
no less than two thousand five hundred ald 
twenty, (2,520.) 
The nature of my invention consists in pro 
viding an index-plate with a series of holes of 
prime numbers and the powers of prime num 
bers arranged in several concentric circles of 
different diameters; also, the combination of 
my index-plate with adjustable arms and ad 
justable spring - pins, whereby a very large 
number of teeth may be cut upon blanks with 
a very small number of guide-holes in the in 
dex-plate. 
In the figures, A represents the index-plate. 
It has four circles of holes. The inner one 
has five equidistant holes; the next one has 
seven. These are prime numbers. The outer 
circle has nine holes. It is the power of three. 
There is also a circle with the even number of 
eight holes. It is the cube of two, and is very 
convenient. The first holes of the circles in 
the said plate A are on the same radial line, 
as shown in Fig. 1. This is the first guide 
line for laying out the work. This index-plate 
may also be made with any desired number of 
concentric circles and suitable holes; but those 
represented are sufficient for explaining the 
invention. 
S is the spindle or shaft, upon which the 
plate A is secured, and upon the Outer end of 
which the metal blank to have teeth cut upon 
it is fastened. 
B is a slotted radial arm, attached by its 
collar on a short shaft, to which it is tightened 
by the nut b. F is a block for sustaining the 
journal-box of said shaft. C is a spring-pin, 
which is capable of being adjusted and held at 
any point in the slot of the arm B by the nut 
c. The pin C Works through a small box, d, 
which has a spiral spring in it, and the thrust 
of said pin is against the face of the index 
plate. The object of this spring in the box d 
is to force the pin C into the holes of the in 
dex-plate to arrest said plate at the proper in 
tervals. 
The tool for cutting the teeth on the metal 
blank is arranged and operated in the usual 
way, and need not be further described. 
D is another slotted arm, similar to B in 
construction and operation, but is set on the 
opposite side of the plate A. It also has an 
adjustable spring-pin, E, which can be moved 
and set at any point in the slot of the arm. 
The two slotted arms BD are alike, and ca 
pable of being moved roundl with the index 
plate A, or of being made fast by their nuts 
to hold them in any position as l'equired. 
They hold different offices while the machine 
is in operation; but their offices are inter 
changeable. The One Spring-pill acts as all 
intermittent stop-motion, while the other acts 
as a dividing or laying-out pin. 
The index-plate A Inay also be used like a 
common one, according to the number of luoles 
in it, by throwing one of the adjustable slot 
ted arms out of action; but this does not re 
quire further mention. 
I will describe the spring-pia C as the stop 
of the index-plate, to arrest its notion at the 
proper cutting intervals. 
The spring-pin E, I will describe as being 
used to divide and lay out the intervals or 
spaces for the teeth to be cut. 
With three combinations of three circles of 
odd holes-namely, nine, seven, and five-I 
will describe how three hundred and fifteen 
(315) may be cut on a metal or other blank. 
The slotted arm B is screwed tight on its 
223,0SS 
shaft by the nut b, and it is so set that its 
spring-pin C is the stop-motion which arrests 
the index-plate A for every tooth to be cut. 
The said pin is now set on the outer circle of 
nine holes. The dividing or laying-out spring 
pin E of the slotted arm D is set on the circle 
of seven holes, and it is intended to cut sixty 
three teeth by this first combination. The 
blank is fastened on the spindle S, and the 
first cut is made upon it at the radial line of 
all the circles. 
For the next cut the spring-pin C is drawn 
out of the hole in the plate A, and the said plate 
moved round until the inner end of the pin C 
snaps or springs into the next hole in the cir 
cle of nine, and the index-plate and its spindle, 
with the blank upon it, are arrested and an 
other cut made on the blank, and so on until 
a revolution is made and nine cuts made, the 
arm B having been held fast in position, its 
shaft being held fast loy the nut b. The pin 
at is for securing the collar of the arm D fast to 
the spindle S of the index-plate as it revolves 
or moves in its journal-box fon block G. 
For the next divide the nut b is slackened 
so that its shaft and the arm B can be moved 
round. The spring-pin C is kept in its hole 
in the index-plate. The pin E is withdrawn 
out of its hole in the circle, and its inner end 
presses on the face of said plate. The index 
plate A, with the arm B, is now turned or 
moved round until the spring-pin E of the aria 
D snaps into the next hole in the said plate. 
of the circle of seven. The nut b is then 
screwed up and its shaft tightened, and the 
arm B made fast, to cominence another revo 
lution of the index-plate, and making another 
nine cuts on the blank secured on the spindle 
S, as has been already described. 
After every revolution the nut b is slack 
ened, the index-plate moved and set one hole 
in the seven, as has been described, until seven 
revolutions are completed and sixty-three 
teeth cut upon the blank. Nine stops are ef. 
fected by pin C during each revolution of the 
index - plate, and seven divides are made by 
the laying-out spring-pin E in cutting the six 
ty-three teeth. 
The next combination to be made is with the 
inner circle of five holes, the divides of which 
and the guiding of the index-plate will produce 
three hundred and fifteen teeth, (9x7=63x 
5=315.) The spring-pin E is next shifted in its 
slot to take into the holes of the inner circle of 
five, and it is moved one hole from the start 
on the general radial line, the arm B, with its 
spring-pin C and the index-plate, being moved 
and adjusted, with the blank on the spindle S 
divided for a new cut on the fifth, and the 
circle of seven is at the same time guided by 
the circle of five. At this point the pin E is 
slackened in its slot and moved back to the 
circle of seven and screwed fast. A new 
Series of stops and movements of the index 
plate is now commenced, like as has been de 
scribed. 
At every revolution of the index-plate and 
its spindle holding the blank the guide-pin E 
is shifted one hole in the circle, and the arm 
B, with the index-plate, also moved and shifted, 
as before described, until sixty-three cuts are 
made. Then the guide-pin E is shifted down to 
the circle of five, and moved forward another 
hole in the said circle, and another divide of 
five is made, with the aforedescribed move 
ments and changes repeated, until the five di 
vides are made by the five holes of the circle, 
and three hundred and fifteen stops of the in 
dex-plate A made, and as many cuts also 
made on the blank which is secured on the 
outer end of spindle S. Thus, with thirty-five 
revolutions of the index-plate, and the combi 
nations of the three circles, having a total of 
only twenty-one (21) holes, no less than three 
hundred and fifteen teeth will be cut; but any 
number of suitable circles and holes may be 
made in this index-plate, and other combina. 
tions than those described effected. 
Thus with the circle of the even number of 
eight holes in plate A, make divides of a 
half, a fourth, and an eighth of an odd num 
ber, and teeth from two up to no less than two 
thousand five hundred and twenty may be cut 
by four combinations, (9x8x7x5=2520.) 
But three combinations are all that will be re 
quired in common manufacturing operations. 
The number of combinations and operations 
presented and described are sufficient to show . 
the great number of products in gear-cutting 
obtained with my index-plate, having such a 
small number of holes, combined with the ad 
justable slotted arms and the adjustable spring 
pln S. 
Common indeX - plates are expensive and 
comparatively large, because they are neces 
sarily made with so many guide-spaces. By 
my invention comparatively small and inex 
pensive guide-plates may be employed. 
I am aware that index-plates having guide 
holes on concentric circles are not new, and 
the novelty of my plate is limited to the pecu 
liar disposition and arrangement of the guide 
holes On Such plates. 
I claim 
1. The plate A, having holes to the number 
indicated, arranged in concentric circles and 
otherwise, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the two slotted arms 
BD, with their adjustable spring-pins CE, and 
the index-plate A, for the purposes set forth. 
3. The two adjustable spring-pins CE, op 
erating, in combination with the index-plate, 
as interchangeable guide and stop pins, as Set 
forth. 
TOWNSEND WOLCOTT. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES A. SEELEY, 
J. A. FRASER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223190.txt	Check-R 0 w Att a chiment t0 C0 rn-Planters. 
J, TH 0 M S 0 N. 
No. 223,19o. 
Pat e n t e di De c. 3O, 1879. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
J 
| || 
|| 
2i  2?????????AA????????????????? 
?????????????????????????????????????????? 
?A 
- 
|| 
|| 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN THOMSON, OF ALEDO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF OF HIS 
W 
RIGHT TO JAMES A. SEHERRIFF, OF SAME PLACE. 
IMPROVEMENT IN CHECK-ROW ATTACH MENTS TO CORN-PLANTERS, 
Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 223, 90, dlatedl December 30, 1879; application filed 
October 30, 1879." 
To all chom, it may conceri: 
Be it known tlat I, JOIHIN THOMSON, of Ale 
do, in the county of Mercer and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Check - Row Attachments to 
Corin-Planters; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, which will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
of reference marked tille'eon which form a 
part of this specification. 
Figure 1 represents a top-plan view of the 
seeding devices of a check-row corn-planter, 
showing my improvements applied thereto, 
the wheel-frame being removed. Fig. 2 rep 
resents a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 
represents an en larged section, looking toward 
the front of the machine, taken through the 
line av aw of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 represents a detail 
perspective view of one of the clamps which 
are operated upon by the check-row wire or 
cord, and thereby actuate, through interme 
diate mechanism, tlhe seeding devices of the 
corn-planter. Fig. 5 represents a detail sec 
tion through one of the knots or projections 
of the check-row wire, and Fig. 6 a detail view 
of the conformation of the wire at the point 
where the knot or projection is cast or se 
My invention relates to check-row attach 
ments for corn-planters. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
check-row attachment for corn-planters which 
will be sure in its action and prevent all lia 
bility on the part of the knotted check-row 
wire or cord to fail to operate upon the de 
vices for actuating the seeding devices of the 
corn-planter. 
My invention consists in a novel construc 
tion and arrangement of mechanism for oper 
ating the seedling devices of a check-row corn 
planter. 
It also consists in one or more pairs of 
ribbed cam-faced clamping-plates for operat 
ing the seeding devices through any suitable 
mechanism, said clamping-plates being actu 
ated by the check-row wire. 
cured. 
It further consists in providing a check-row || K', as the two are brought together. 
corn-planter with bell-shaped guide-rings for 
the knotted wire or cord, each of said guides 
having a diagonal slot for the introduction of 
the kunotted wire into said guides. 
To enable othel s skilled in the art to make, 
construct, and use my inventio, I will lnow 
proceedl to describe it in detail, Omitting a 
particular description of such parts of a corn 
planter as are old and common to the art. 
In the accompanying drawings, A A repre 
sent arms rigidly secured to the follw all'd frame, 
B, of the seeding devices. 
In the drawings the willeels 
and wheel 
frame are lot shown. 
To the frame B are secured the seedl-hop 
pers C and the devices for operating then, the 
whole lbeing supported upon the rummers D of 
the frame. 
Upon each one of the arms Al A' are mounted 
two oscillating arms, E and IF, pivoted at e, 
the inner elds of which are providied with a 
flexible joint, made in any suitable and klow 
way, but. which I prefer to construct with a 
ball-and-socket joint, the one carrying the ball 
g and the other the socket g'. 
Each pair of arms IE and IF, on either side 
of the frame B, are connected by a jointed 
transverse bar, H, by means of pivotal pins p, 
This bar H traverses the franne B above the 
slide-bar I, and to which it is connected by 
the lever J. If desired, the lever J may be 
operated by the extension or lhandle j. 
To the outer end of each oscillating bar is 
secured, in any suitable Way, one of a pair of 
clamp-plates, K, Which is fully illustrated in 
the drawings, the other or opposite one, K', of 
which is mounted and secured upon the sta 
tionary arins A. A ' of the frame. The clamps 
K K" are made fdaring in shape at their front 
ends, or the end toward the front of the ma 
chine, for the purpose of facilitating the en 
trance and passage through of the knotted 
wire or cordl a. The clamp-plates K K" are 
each provided with ribs or projections k and 
corresponding depressions l, each of the clamps 
having the ribs and depressions so arranged 
with respect to each other that the ribs or 
projections k of the one clamp-plate, K, take 
into corresponding depressions l' of the other, 
M 
2 
223, 1909 
Upon each end of the stationary arms A 
A' is mounted andl secured a bell - mouthed 
guide-ring, Lu, for the holding and guidance of 
the kun otted wire or cord a to and from each 
pair of clamping-plates K K7. Each guide 
ring L is provided with a diagonal slot, b, for 
the introduction of the knotted wire or cord, 
and serves to retain and prevent the latter 
from being withdrawn or thrown out during 
the operation of the machine. 
A method is shown in Figs. 5 and 6 of form 
ing the knots or projections in the check-row 
Wire. For each knot a kink or bend is first 
made in the Wire at the desired point. (See 
Fig. 6.) The kink or bend is then firmly and 
immovably embedded in any known and suit 
able Way in a ball of metal or other suitable 
material; or, if desired, and in some respects 
it may be preferable, the knots or projections 
may be formed by casting the metal around 
the kinks or bends. 
Thus constructed, the operation is as fol 
lows: The knotted check-row wire or cord 
a is introduced into the bell-shaped - mouth 
guide-rings Lu of the arm A', and upon which 
a pair of Oscillating arms, E and IF, are piv 
oted, each arm carrying one of the vibrating 
clamp-plates Kof each pair, KK". A knot, a', 
of the knotted check-row wire or cord a (see 
Figs. 1 and 2) is shown as about to enter be 
tween the forward pair of clamp-plates K.K. 
As the machine advances, the knot a' enters 
between said clamp - plates and forces the 
movable or oscillating clamp K away and 
apart from the stationary clamp K', allowing 
the knot a' to pass through, closing the clamp 
plates on the rear end of the arm Al' of the 
frame by means of the joint G, which, in turn, 
gives an end wise motion to the bar H. This 
motion of bar Hactuates the slide-bar I through 
the medium of lever J, and thus allows a 
pocket of seed to be deposited in the ground 
from the hoppers C. As the m?achine con 
tinues to advance, the same knot, a', is brought 
between the pair of clamping-plates K K' on 
tlhe rear end of arm -A", the knotted ?ord be 
ing held and guided by the bell-shaped guide 
rings Lu, when tille same operation is performed 
as was just described in connection with the 
pair of clamps on the front end of arm A'. 
The slide-bar I then receives another throw, 
and thereby deposits another pocket of seed 
in the ground. The same motion closes the 
clamps K K' on the front of the frame, to be 
operated upon in the samme manner by the next 
succeeding knot of the check-row wire. 
The corn-planter, in recrossing the field to 
be planted, takes the knotted wire upon the 
Opposite arm, A, and operates upon the clamp 
ing-plates upon said arm in the same manner, 
the bar H being common to both. 
The clamping-plates K K' do not close suf 
ficiently together to. prevent the free passage 
through the depressions of the latter of the 
wire or cord between the knots. 
The ribs or projections k and depressions l 
of the clamping-plates KK" are arranged with 
respect to each other so that ribs k of the vi 
brating camp take into corresponding de 
pressions l' of the stationary one, and vice 
versa. This serves to allow the cam - faces 
of the vibrating clamps to move through a 
greater arc than would be the case were the 
cam-faces of the clamps not ribbed in the man 
ner described. It also serves to prevent sud 
den vibrations or twitchings of the knotted 
cord, which tend to throw the latter out of 
the clamps and prevent the action of the 
slide-bar at the required time. By this ar 
rangement the cord is always held in either 
one of the clamps by said ribs and depressions. 
The ribs also prevent the slipping out of the 
knotted wire when in the act of operating the 
clamps K KI. 
Having described my invention, what Iclaim 
as mew, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
lS 
1. In a check-row corn - planter, the bell 
mouth - shapedl guide-rings Lu, provided with 
diagonally-cut slots, for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a check-row planter, the cam-faced 
ribbed clanaps KK", for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination of the guide - rings Lu 
with the ribbed clamps KK", levers E and F, 
stationary arm A, and actuating - rod H, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, in a check-row planter, 
of the following devices, to wit: ribbed clamps 
KI K", pivoted and flexibly-connected levers E 
and F, stationary arm A, slide-bar H, lever 
J, and slide-valve bar I, substantially as set 
forth. 
Iun testimony that I claim tlue foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
 
L. F. CHAMBERLIN, 
DANIEL ROSE. 
Witnesses : 
JOHN THOMSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223291.txt	A. K. LIS SBERGER & S. D. SAMUELS. 
Railway - Car. 
2. Sheets-Sheet , 
No. 223,291. 
Patented Jan. 6, 188O. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
J) if zesses, 
C 
SSS E2 
S 
F.G. 5, 
42-12-22-721.22% 
1% 
22-22-226-27 
%722-222- 2, 22e22-232 
/726%. 
-da 
- 1227 . 
!y 
2273 
2 
N. PETERS, PHOTo-LTHOGRAPHER, washi NGTON, 
A. K. LISSBERGER & S. D. SAMUELS, 
Railway - Car. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 223,291. 
Patented Jan. 6, 1880. 
 
W26 vesses. 
f 
A2 were fors, 
2e2; 
N, PETERS, PHOTo-LithogRAPHER, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM K. LISSBERGER, OF BOSTON, MASS., AND SAMUEL D. SAMUELS, 
OF MONSON, ME.; SAID SAMUELS ASSIGNOR TO SAID LISSBERGER. 
RALWAY. CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 223,291, dated January 6, 1880. 
Application filed August 25, 1879. 
oted continuous step extending longitudinally so 
along the side of the car, the said step being 
swung down for the use of passengers in enter 
ing at the sides of the car when the slats are ele 
vated to provide an open car for fine weather, 
the step being readily swung up and caught 55 
in place by a suitable fastening when the side 
of the car is closed in cool or unpleasant 
Weather. 
Our invention consists, thirdly, in a pecu 
liar construction and arrangement of the seats, 6o 
whereby auxiliary seats pivoted at their inner 
ends to stationary seats may be swung down 
or unfolded, so as to extend entirely across 
and close the center of the car when it is to 
be entered at its open sides, and may be read- 65 
ily folded or swung up, so as to open a central 
passage through the car when its sides are 
closed and it is entered from the platforms at 
the ends of the car. 
pivoted to the inner end of the -back of each 
stationary seat, whereby an extension is formed 
which serves as a back for the auxiliary seat 
when swung down across the central passage, 
for use when the car is open at the sides, the 75 
said extension-back being folded in at right 
angles to the main back when the passage 
through the center of the car is to be left open 
Our invention consists, fourthly, in a leaf 7o 
for use. 
. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ABRAHAM K. LISS 
BERGER, of Boston, in the county of Suffolk 
and State of Massachusetts, and SAMUEL D. 
5 SAMUELs, of Monson, in the county of Pis 
cataquis and State of Maine, have invented 
certain Improvements in Railway - Cars, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
Io panying drawings, making part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a street-car 
constructed in accordance with our invention, 
the car being closed. Fig. 2 is a side eleva 
I5 tion of the same, the car being open. Fig. 
3 is a transverse section on the linea at of Fig. 
1, showing the arrangement of the seats when 
the car is required to be closed. Fig. 4 is an 
elevation of one end of the car, a portion of 
2O the casing being removed to show the arrange 
ment of the seats when the car is to be en 
ployed as an open one. Figs. 5 and 6 are per 
spective views of one of the seats in the two 
positions it occupies when folded to adapt it 
25 for use in a closed car, and when unfolded or 
extended to adapt it for use in an open car; 
Fig. 7, detail to be referred to. 
Our invention relates, particularly, to that 
class of car capable of being converted from 
3o a closed to an open car, and vice versa, to 
adapt itself for constant use during the vari 
ous changes of the weather. 
Our invention consists, first, in the side of a 
car composed of a series of longitudinal slats 
35 or sections hinged together or secured to a 
backing of canvas or other suitable flexible 
material, or to two or more belts, chains, or 
cords wound upon and taken up by a longi 
tudinal shaft or roll located at any convenient 
4o point, but preferably within the casing of the 
top of the car, the shaft or roll for elevating 
one side being geared to the shaft or roll for 
elevating the other side, and being operated 
by a wheel, crank, spring, or other suitable 
45 device, whereby both sides may be simultane 
ously raised with facility, and the closed car 
be instantly converted into an Open one, or 
vice versa, at pleasure. 
Our invention also consists in a window 8o 
To enable others skilled in the art to under- 85 
formed of longitudinal sections of glass pro 
vided with independent pivots to admit of the 
glass being wound up with the slatted side 
without breaking. 
stand and use our invention, we will proceed 
to describe the manner in which we have car 
ried it out. 
In the said drawings, A represents the side, 
B the floor, C. the roof, and DD the platforms, go 
of a street or railway car. EE are stanchions 
or posts rising from the tloor a short distance 
inside the line of each of the outerfaces of the 
car, and serve to support its top or ceiling G, 
a longitudinal space or opening, a, being thus 95 
formed between the outer edge of the side of 
the ceiling and each side of the top of the car, 
Our invention consists, secondly, in a piv. | a chamber, b, being also formed between the 
2 
223,29. 
75 
top of the ceiling G and the under side of the 
roof C. Extending longitudinally through 
this chamber b are two shafts or rolls, H H', 
having their bearings in the ends I of the car, 
the extremities of the rolls having sectired 
thereto cog-wheels L. L', which engage with 
each other, respectively. 
One end of the roll H projects through the 
end of the car, and lhas secured thereto a hand 
wheel, M, which is located at such height as 
to be accessible to the driver or conductor of 
the car. 
N N are a series of longitudinal wooden 
slats attached to a backing, c, of canvas or 
other flexible material, the slats and backing 
being cut away at proper places to form the 
openings for the windows d, the slats thus ar 
ranged forming one of the entire sides of the 
car, which may be raised by means of an apron 
of cloth, or by suitable bands, chains, or cords 
connected with the top of the canvas backing, 
or With the slats themselves and with the rolls 
H. Ed', it being simply necessary for the con 
ductor or driver to turn the hand-wheel M, 
which Winds the apron around the roll and 
elevates the slatted side with extreme facility, 
thus converting the car into an open car when 
it is desired to afford the passengers a better 
opportunity of viewing the scenery outside, 
and providing them with abundant air and 
Sull When the Weather is favorable. 
The Windows are composed of sections of 
glass 9), Fig. 7, arranged longitudinally and 
set in independent frames W, hinged together, 
said construction admitting of the Windows 
being raised with the slatted side without the 
glass being broken; and the lower edge of the 
frame of each section of glass is provided with 
a flange, 2, which overlaps the upper edge of 
the frame below it, whereby rain is precluded 
from entering the car. 
The side may be held in its elevated posi 
tion by means of an ordinary pawl, e, engag 
ing with a ratchet, ef, on one of the rolls H 
H', where it projects outside the end of the 
car; and the slats may be instantly dropped 
to close the side and convert the car into a 
closed one, in the event of a storm or change 
of weather, by simply raising the weighted rod 
g, connected with the pawl, which is thus lifted 
out of contact with the ratchet ef, the hand 
wheel being grasped so as to check the too 
rapid unwinding of the apron and too sudden 
descent of the slatted side. 
Hinged or pivoted at ff to the under side 
of the floor is a continuous longitudinal step, 
p, which, when down, as seen in Fig. 4, pre 
sents its upper Or tread side in a horizontal 
position. This step is for the use of passen 
gers in entering the car from the side when it 
is being employed as an open car. 
When the side of the car is closed the step 
may be swung up, as seen in Fig. 3, and held 
in place by a simple button or spring-catch, h, 
at each end of the step. 
R. R. are the seats, which are so constructed 
and arranged as to be adapted for use when 
the car is open or closed at the sides. The 
center of each stationary seat at its outer end 
is secured at l to the inside of the adjacent stan 
chion or post E, while its inner end is supported 
by two legs, m, secured to the floor. The side of 
the seat or inner arm-rest thereof, when the car 
is closed and a passage is to be made through 
its center, is formed by a swinging extension 
piece or supplemental seat, S, provided on its 
front and rear with metal bands, pivoted at n. 
to the top of the legs m, said construction ad 
mitting of the supplemental seat S being 
thrown up, as shown in Fig. 5, to close the in 
ner end of the seat R and serve as its arm 
rest. 
When theside of the car is to remain open, the 
stationary seats R and supplemental seats S 
may be arranged so as to form one continuous 
long seat extending entirely across the car by 
simply throwing or swinging down the two 
contiguous supplemental seats till their inner 
ends abut or come in contact with each other, 
in which position, Figs. 4 and 6, each one is 
firmly supported by a cross-bar, q, connecting 
their outer ends, and brought to a Snug bear 
ing within a groove or channel, q', formed in 
the under side of the stationary seat R. 
The back Tof the stationary seat is made re 
versible, its outer arm, r, being pivoted to the 
stanchion E at S to admit of this movement. 
To the inner end of each back is pivoted a 
leaf or section, t, which may be folded in at 
right angles thereto, Fig. 5, when the supple 
mntal seats are not in use and the passage 
through the center of the car remains open, 
this pivoted leaf being swung back into line 
with the back T, so as to form a continuous 
back when the car is open at the sides, and 
the seats are so arranged as to form a continu 
ous seat extending transversely across the car. 
Through the top or ceiling of the car are 
formed a series of perforations, v, which com 
municate with the chamber b, and through 
each end of the car are formed openings w, 
also communicating with the chamber b, and 
by this means we are enabled to secure per 
fect ventilation for the car when it is closed. 
We claim 
1. In a convertible car, the flexible sides A 
A, each composed of a series of horizontal slats 
placed contiguous to each other in one and the 
same vertical plane, and connected together 
so as to form a continuous closed apron ex 
tending between the ends of the car, and raised 
at one operation by means accessible from the 
platform, substantially as described. 
2. In combination with a car capable of be 
ing opened at its sides, the continuous pivoted 
steps PP, extending longitudinally there with, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a convertible car, the combination of 
the stanchions E, stationary seats R, and sup 
plemental seats S, adapted to be swung down 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
223,291 
3 
to close the passage through the center of the independent pivots, in combination with the to 
car, and thereby form a continuous seat trans- slatted side A, as and for the purpose set forth. 
versely across it, substantially as specified. 
Witness our hands this 4th day of June, 1879. 
4. In combination, the stanchion E, the main 
back T, pivoted thereto, and the leaft, pivoted 
SEE 'sSERGER 
to the latter, whereby it may be folded and 
unfolded, as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. A window composed of sections y, of glass, 
set in independent frames W, provided with 
IBILISSBERGER, 
EDWIN R. HAYNES. 
In presence of 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223391.txt	H. L. RUSSELL. 
Automatic Cut-Off for Cistern-Leaders, 
No. 223,391. 
Patented Jan. 6, 1880. 
 
 
 
 
 
N. PETERS. PHOTOLITHograph ER-WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY L. RUSSELL, OF BILO OMINGTON, ILLINOIS. 
AUTOMATIC cut-off FOR CSTERN LEADERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 223,391, dated January 6, 1880. 
Application filed August 26, 1879. 
- 
- 
Specification. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY L. RUSSELL, of 
Bloomington, in the county of McLean and 
State of Illinois, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Automatic Cut-Offs for 
Cistern-Leaders, of which the following is a 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of my improved 
cut-off, taken through the line aca, Fig. 2. Fig. 
2 is a top view of the same, the cap being re 
moved. 
The object of this invention is to furnish an 
improved device for attachment to the leaders 
that conduct the rain-water from the eaves 
troughs to the cistern, which shall be so con 
Structed as to adjust itself automatically to 
conduct the first water from the roof into the 
Waste-pipe and the succeeding water into the 
cistern, to prevent the coal-dust and other dust 
that may settle upon the roof from being 
washed into the cistern, and which shall be 
simple in construction, inexpensive in manu 
facture, aud reliable in use. 
The invention consists in the combination of 
the pivoted trough provided with a weight at 
one end and a hole in the middle part of its 
bottom, the suspended bucket having a hole 
in its bottom, and the two spouts rigidly con 
nected with the pivoted trough, or equivalents, 
with each other and with the case, having its 
lower part divided into two compartments by 
a low partition, as hereinafter fully described. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A represents the case of the cut-off, which 
is provided with a cap, B. The lower part of 
the case A is divided into two compartments 
by a low partition, a', from which the bottom 
..a inclines downward toward the opposite 
sides, so that the water that may enter the said 
case A may flow out through one or the other 
of the discharge-spouts a a, the spout a 
from the larger compartment leading to the 
Waste-pipe, and the other spout, a, leading to 
C represents the leader, which is connected 
with an opening in the middle part of the 
cap B. 
D is a trough, of such a length and breadth 
as to vibrate freely in the upper part of the 
case A, and which has pivots d' attached to 
the cistern. 
- 
. 
65 
the middle part of its opposite sides, which 
rest and work in bearings a, attached to the 
opposite sides of the upper part of the case A. 
I prefer to make the pivots d' with knife- 55 
edges to make the device more sensitive. 
To the end of the spout D next the waste 
pipe is attached a weight, d, sufficient to hold 
the said end of the said spout D inclined down 
Ward, as shown in Fig. 1. From the other 
end of the spout D is suspended the bucket E, 
of such a capacity that when partly filled with 
water-say about two-thirds filled-it will 
overbalance the weight d and incline the 
spout D in the other direction. 
To the middle part of the under side of the 
trough D is attached a small spout, F, directly 
beneath the small hole a? in the middle part of 
the bottom of the said trough, and in such a 
position that its outer end may be slightly in- to 
clined downward when the weighted end of 
the trough D is inclined downward, and which 
projects into such a position that the Water 
falling from its outer end will always fall into 
the suspended bucket E. In the bottom of 75 
the bucket E is formed a hole, e', which is 
made smaller than the hole a, so that the said 
bucket E will gradually fill with water. 
To the middle side parts of the bottom of 
the trough D are rigidly attached the upper 8o 
ends of the arms g', which are spread apart, so 
that the bucket E may swing between them. 
To the lower ends of the arms g are attached, 
or upon them are formed, the sides of a spout, 
G, which is made of such a length that when 
the weighted end of the trough D is down the 
upper end of the spout G may be beneath the 
hole in the bottom of the bucket E, and its 
lower end may cross the partition af, so that 
the said spout G may receive the water from 
the hole e' and discharge it into the compart 
ment of the case A connected with the Waste 
plpe. 
With this construction, when no water is 
passing through the cut-off the various parts 
remain in the positions shown in Fig.1. 
When it begins to rain, the first water, con 
taining the wash from the roof, passes through 
the trough D into the larger compartment of 
the case A, and thence into the wash-pipe. Ioo 
At the same time a part of the Water that is 
passing through the trough D passes through 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
223,39A 
O 
the hole a into the spout F, and thence into 
the bucket E. A part of the water that enters 
the bucket E through the hole a' escapes 
through the hole e' into the spout G, through 
which it flows into the larger compartment of 
the case A, and thence into the waste-pipe. 
The hole e is made smaller than the hole af, 
so that the bucket E will gradually fill until 
it becomes sufficiently heavy to overbalance 
the weight d and tilt the trough D in the 
other direction. As the trough D inclines in 
the other direction the Water flows from its 
lower end and from the hole a? into the bucket 
E, the spout G swinging back out of the way, 
as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1. The water 
now flows over the top of the bucket E and 
through the hole e' into the smaller compart 
ment of the case A, and flows thence into the 
cistern. When the rain, and consequently the 
inflow of water, stops, the water gradually es 
capes from the bucket E until the weighted 
--- 
end of the trough D overbalances the said 
bucket and descends, bringing the various 
parts into the position first described, ready 
to receive the Water from the roof at the next 
rain-fall. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent 
The combination of the pivoted trough D, 
provided with a weight, d, at one end, and a 
hole, a, in the middle part of its bottom, the 
suspended bucket E, having a hole, e, in its 
bottom, and the spouts FG, rigidly connected 
with the trough D, or equivalents, with the 
case A, having its lower part divided into 
two compartments by a partition, a?, substan- . 
tially as herein shown and described. 
HENRY LEWIS RUSSELL. 
Witnesses: 
O. B. HARRIs, 
J. F. PANCAKE. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223491.txt	A. A. DURAND. 
Cow-Milking Apparatus. 
91. 
Patented Jan. 13, 188O. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
 
QA 
N 
22a- 
 
SN 
N N 
  
Z3. 
Vy 
N 
 
424/2C, 
A. A. DURAND. 
COW-Milking Apparatus. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 223,491. 
Patented Jan. 13, 188O. 
  
WA 
 
727eesses 
2. 2.-- 
BEST AVAILABLE COPY 
PATENT OFFICE. 
UNITED STATES 
ALBERT. A. DURAND, 
COW-MILKIN 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
G APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 223,491, dated January 18, 1880. 
Application filed April 26, 1879. 
- 
. 
To all whom it may concern : . 
both gates or stanchions are opened or closed 
Be it known that I, ALBERT A. DURAND, 
simultaneously and securely locked when shut. 
of the city and State of New York, have in 
Inasmuch as certain features of the inven 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
tion have either a direct or indirect bearing 
in Cow-Milking Apparatus, of which the fol. 
on the inventions of L. O. Colvin, as secured 
lowing is a description, reference being had 
to him by sundry Letters Patent, including 
to the accompanying drawings, forming part 
the Letters Patent No. 74,507, granted him . 
of this specification. 
February 18, 1868, and have also principles in 
This invention more particularly relates to, 
common with those shown in the invention 
cow-milkers in which a series of diaphragm 
for which Letters Patent No. 198,362 were 
pumps are operated directly by mechanical 
granted me December 18, 1877, only cursory 
means for extracting the milk simultaneously 
reference will be made in the following de 
from the several teats of a cow; but it is also 
scription to such parts as are common in ex 
applicable in part to what are known as hy 
plaining this invention. 
draulic cow-milkers' and to other milkers. 
Figure 1 represents a partly-sectional ele 
Furthermore, although the invention is here 
vation of a cow-milking apparatus having my 
shown adapted to a hand-power machine for 
invention applied; Fig. 2, a plan view of the 
milking one cow at a time, it is applicable to 
same; Fig. 3, a horizontal section in part, 
milking apparatus driven by steam or other 
showing the gates or stanchions of the appa 
power, or to any number of such apparatus 
ratus, with means for opening and closing 
deriving their motion from a single prime 
them; Fig. 4, a vertical section mainly on the 
mover. 
line at a in Fig. 2; Fig. 5, an elevation, upon a 
The invention consists in certain combina 
larger scale, of a certain parallel-motion mech 
tions of devices, with a universally-adjustable 
anism for adjustment of the pumps; Fig. 6, 
arm-like support for the pumps of a milking 
a vertical section of one of the pumps with a 
apparatus, including an extensible intermedi 
teat-cup in part attached; and Figs. 7 and 8, 
ate, shaft, whereby increased facilities are 
a vertical section and exterior longitudinal 
afforded for operating the pumps, and for ad 
view of a teat-cup formed in nests and of tele 
justing the frame or hqlder which carries them 
scopic construction, as hereinafter described. 
to suit different positions or sizes of animals 
A is the post by which the apparatus is car 
being milked. 
ried, and B C the arm-like swinging supports 
The invention likewise consists in certain 
which carry the pump frame or holder D. The 
combinations of means for providing for the 
support B, which is capable of horizontal ad 
separate adjustment of the several pumps in 
justment about a pivot, b, on a swiveling 
a series in proper relation with the teats to be 
bracket, c, connected with the post A and of 
nailked. 
an oscillating motion or adjustment about its 
The invention likewise consists in a teat-cup 
longitudinal axis within a box, d, which turns 
of rigid material and of cylindrical or approxi 
on the pivot b, is connected, by an open elbow 
mately cylindrical form throughout its length, 
joint, f, with the other arm-like swinging sup 
and with an internally-projecting rounded 
port, C, the outer end of which carries the pump 
edge at its upper or mouth end, also, prefera 
frame or holder D, that is free to turn axially 
bly, of telescopic construction, and made in 
within or on the support C. 
sections, forming a nest of cups, whereby a 
The arm-like support B may be connected 
more efficient action generally is obtained for 
with the box d by a screw, g, passing through 
the teat-cup, and its adaptability to different 
a slot in the bead of said arm, to provide for 
sized teats is enlarged. 
the adjustment of said arm about its longitudi 
Furthermore, the invention consists in a 
nal axis. 
combination, in a cow-milking apparatus, with 
E is a primary revolving shaft having its 
swinging gates or stanchions for securing the 
bearings in the post A, and which may either 
cow when being milked and for admitting of 
be rotated by hand or by steam or other power 
her passage between them when liberated, of from a shaft, which may be used to drive a se 
a slotted bar connecting the gates, whereby ries of milking apparatus, and F is a sec 
- 
Id 
IS 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
So 
55 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
Od 
vs. 
2 
223,491 
O 
25 
30 
35 
. 
. . . 
Such con- 8o 
ondary shaft having its bearings in the armor 
support C. Connecting these shafts E and F, 
by means of universal joints h h, is a section 
ally-constructed and longitudinally-extensible 
5 oblique intermediate shaft, G, which not only 
provides for communicating mntion from the 
shaft E to the shaft F, but, by its capabil 
ity to expand and contract, allows of a very 
extended adjustment of the pump frame or 
holder ID by its universally-adjustable arm-like 
supports B C to suit different positions of the 
cow being milked, or as different-sized animals 
may require, as in the hydraulic cow-milker de 
scribed in Letters Patent No. 198,362, granted 
15 me December 18, 1877, and the pump frame or 
holder D is not only made axially adjustable, 
but the series of pumps H Hare also made col 
lectively adjustable in a circular direction by 
a stem, i, arranged at right angles to the axis 
of said holder, as and for the purposes de 
scribed in said patent. 
The diaphragm-pumps EIH', of which there 
are here shown four in a series, but of which 
there may be any desired number, are operated 
by a crank, k, on the rotating shaft F through 
the instrumentality of a bell-crank, l, con 
nected with the crank k by a rod, m, and at 
tacbed to a cross-bar, n, which, by means of 
side arms, o, actuate the rods to which the 
flexible diaphragms I of the pumps are at 
tached. 
To obtain for the milker a bunting move 
ment, and to elevate or lower the diaphragm 
pumps for the purpose of adapting the ma 
chine to large or small, short-legged or long 
legged cows, cows with very dependent ud 
ders, or contrariwise, the arm-like support B 
has connected with it an adjustable oscillating 
device, K, substantially similar to that de 
scribed in my hereinbefore-named Letters Pat 
ent No. 198,362. 
The several pumps H H are also made ad 
justable up or down independently of their 
frame or holder D to raise or lower the teat 
5 cups M, which they carry for the purpose of 
adapting said cups to different lengths of teats 
or different altitudes of the latter from the 
ground. This it is preferred to do by sus 
pending each pair of pumps H H by an ad 
So justable parallel bar frame, or support to the 
circularly adjustable stem i, (see more par 
ticularly Fig. 5) such frame or support con 
sisting of parallel bars LL', pivoted at a? a? to 
the stem i, and connected at their respective 
55 ends by links b'b'. By this means each pair 
of pumps H H may be independently ad 
justed, one pump of each pair of pumps H. H. 
moving up while the other is moving down, 
thus dividing the movement of said pumps to 
6o effect their up or down adjustment, and pre 
serving the perpendicularity of the pumps 
throughout their up or down adjustinents. A 
set-screw, c', and slotted curved braced, con 
necting opposite ends of each bar L. L., pro 
vides for securing the pumps when adjusted 
I claim- 
1. The combination, with a universally-ad 
up or down by its parallel bar frame or sup 
port. The side arms, o, are also pivoted ate justable arm-like support or supports for the 
to the cross-bar n, to conform to the adjust 
ment of the pumps up or down, alnd are se 
cured, when adjusted, by a clampf". 
The pump-chamber or pumps HEI are each 
constructed with a flange, g, at their base, and 
said flange formed with a bead or raised edge, 
h'. (See more particularly Fig. 6.) This con 
struction provides for either pump-diaphragm 75 
I being secured in a close or air-tight manner 
to its place without the aid of a separate or 
detachable flange by causing the edges of said 
diaphragm to lap over and hug the bead hon 
the flange of the pump-chamber. 
struction also provides for the ready attach 
ment and detachment of the diaphragms of the 
pumps when necessary. 
The teat-cups M are of rigid material, and . 
of cylindrical or approximately cylindrical 85 
form throughout their length, and with an in 
ternally-projecting rounded edge, i, at their 
upper end, whereby the teat-cups are pre 
vented from pressing laterally on the teats, 
thus leaving the teats free to be controlled by 
the suction of the pumps, yet securing a close 
joint, free from any cutting or damaging ac 
tion of said cups at their rounded upperedges. 
Furthermore, said cylindrical teat-cups are of 
a telescopic construction, each one being colm 
posed of two or more cups of cylindrical form, 
and arranged one within the other, and each 
inner cup (see more particularly Fig. 7) pref. 
erably made, so that it may be drawn out or 
removed from the cup which is on the outside 
of it, and fitted with a flexible packing, n, to 
provide for the close fit of the cups. Thus 
each teat-cup is composed of a nest of cups, 
which not only provide for the telescopic ad 
justment of the teat-cup to the teat, but by in 
serting or removing an inner cup also provide 
for the fit of the teat-cup to a large or small 
teat. 
NN are the gates or stanchions used to -se 
cure the cow while being milked, and, when 
open, admitting of her passage between then, 
as in other cow-milking apparatus; but in the 
present instance both gates are made to open 
and close simultaneouslyinstead of separately, 
and one gate made to close a little in advance 
of the other by means of a bar, R., arranged to 
connect differently-arranged or set cranks in 
at the hinge ends of the gates. This bar has a 
slot, o', inittoreceive throughita holding-down 
guide-pin, o, which directs the bar in moving 
and prevents it from springing to interfere 
with the action of the gates. By thus connect 
ing the gates or stanchions and constructing 
them with miter faces where they meet when 
closed, not only are both gates simultaneously 
opened or closed, but a single locking spring 
bar, 8, and single catch-bar s', controlled by 
cords r r", applied to only one of the gates, an 
swer the same purpose as like devices applied 
to each of the gates, as heretofore done, and 
the gates are just as securely locked. 
40 
- 
I25 
95 
do 
IoS 
O 
IIS 
223,491 
3 
pumps, and a primary shaft and secondary justable stem i, the parallel bars LL', and the 
shaft for actuating said pumps, of a longitudi 
links b' b', essentially as shown and described. 3o 
nally-extensible shaft between said primary 
6. A teat-cup of rigid material, and con 
structed of cylindrical or approximately-cylin 
shaft and secondary shaft, and universal joints 
connecting the ends of said extensible shaft 
drical form throughout its length, and with 
with said primary shaft and secondary shaft, 
an internally-projecting rounded edge at its 
substantially as specified. 
upper or mouth end, essentially as described. 
2. The combination, with the arm-like swing 
7. The combination, with a milking-pump, 
ing supports B C and their connecting jointf 
of a telescopic teat-cup, composed of a series 
of the shafts E F, for giving motion to the 
of cups of cylindrical construction, and ar 
pumps, the extensible shaft G, and the uni 
ranged to fit one within the other, substan 
tially as specified. 
versal joints h h, by which said extensible 
shaft is connected with the shafts EF, sub 
8. The combination, with an outer teat-cup 
stantially as specified. 
of cylindrical construction, of one or more in 
3. The combination, in a cow-milking appa 
ner teat-cups, adapted to form, in connection 
ratus, with the pump frame or holder, of one 
with the outer cup, a nest of cups, and fitted 
or more pumps adjustable up or down in rela 
with a flexible packing to provide for the close 
tion with said holder, essentially as and for 
fit of the cups, essentially as described. 
9. The combination, in a cow-milking appa 
the purposes described. . 
4. The combination, with one or more pairs 
ratus, with the swinging gates or stanchions 
of milking-pumps, of one or more adjustable 
NN', of the slotted bar R, connecting said 
parallel bar frames or supports for said pumps, 
gates, substantially as and for the purposes 5o 
specified. 
arranged to provide for the reverse parallel 
adjustment up and down of each or either pair 
of pumps and their attached teat-cups, essen 
tially as and for the purposes herein set forth. 
5. The combination of the pump frame or 
holder D, the pumps HH', the circularly-ad 
ALBERTA. DURAND. 
45 
Witnesses: 
E. P. JEssUP, 
T. J. KEANE, 
O 
25 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223591.txt	W. C. HURD, 
Switch Rail-Chair. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 223,591. 
Patented Jan. 13, 1880. 
 
Citat s 
as 
 
 
 
  
 
as 22222222222 
62%-24 are 
26/Ye-rid/ 
is 
3.N.3, 
S % 
vary 
ty %-3, /2272. 
PETERs. Photo-LithosRAPHER, was HINGTON, O.C. 
2. 
 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
S 
wa, 2% 
A also 
2 
s% 
INVENTOR. 
 
184k 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. HURD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SWITCH-RAL CHA R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,591, dated January 18, 1880. 
Application filed December 18, 1879. 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. HURD, of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Switch - Rail 
Chairs, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to an elastic founda 
tion for railway-switch chairs, its object being 
to relieve the said chairs of the jarring from 
passing trains, to prevent the battering and 
undue wearing away of the meeting ends of the 
switch-rails by concussive action of the car 
wheels in passing from the end of one rail 
upon the adjacent end of another. 
My invention consists in the combination, 
in a switch-rail chair, of an inclosing box or 
chamber having upon the inner side of its 
bottom a cushion, upon which rests a frame of 
wood or similar yielding material having a 
height somewhat greater than the walls of said 
box or chamber, and a chair-plate resting upon 
said frame and having its upper surface pro 
vided with chairs for the main-track and sid 
ing or branch rails to meet the end of a throw 
rail which swings over the said plate. By 
this construction of the elastic foundation the 
jar of the chairs and the thumping noise which 
has heretofore occurred when trains pass 
switches are prevented. 
My invention further consists in the combi 
nation, with the inclosing-box, the foundation 
cushion, and wooden frame, of a chair plate or 
cover having its upper surface provided with 
two or more elongated chairs having their in 
ner ends terminating at different points on the 
arc of a circle and on said plate, having the 
inner ends of their rail-slots closed to form 
stops for the rails, and adapted to receive rails 
having their lower portions cut away, and 
only their heads left projecting to extend be 
yond said stops and stand flush with the in 
ner ends of the chairs, so as to meet and form 
a close joint with a throw-rail so pivoted that 
its swinging end will traverse the arc upon 
which the inner ends of the chairs are arranged, 
each thusforming a close joint with said throw 
rail when brought into coincidence there with, 
thus preventing the battering and wealing 
away of the ends of the meeting rails by the 
car-wheels, as when said rails are separated by 
a space, as heretofore. 
The invention also consists in certain com 
binations, with the box, foundation-cushion, 
wooden frame, and chair or cover plate, of 
auxiliary cushions or springs, as will be here 
inafter particularly described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my improved elastic 
foundation for switch-chair. Fig. 2 is a simi 
lar view of the same with the top or chair 
plate removed. Fig. 3 is a section on line at ac, 
Fig. 1. - Fig. 4 is a perspective view, illustrat 
ing the application of auxiliary springs and a 
series of interior cushions; Figs. 5 and 6,-de 
tached views of auxiliary elliptical springs. 
Fig. 7 is a view of the box with cover removed, 
showing the arrangement of the several parts. 
Fig. 8 is a longitudinal section of the elastic 
foundation, as shown in Fig. 7, with the cover 
on the box. Fig. 9, Sheet 1, is a perspective 
of a rail having its head projecting to fit over 
the chair-stops. 
The letter A designates the inclosing box 
or chamber, which I prefer to form of malle 
able iron. Upon the inner side of the bottom 
of this chamber is arranged a flat plate of 
vulcanized india - rubber, B, which forms a 
cushion - foundation for the wooden block or 
open wooden frame C, which fits within the 
walls of the box. I sometimes form this frame 
somewhat shorter than the box, and between 
the ends of the frame and the end walls of the 
box I interpose rubber cushions D. 
Upon the top of the frame C rests a plate, 
E, which is the chair-plate. This plate may 
be provided with a lip, d, to fit around the box, 
to preventhorizontal movement of said plate; 
or this lip may be omitted and the chair-plate 
held in position by bolts passing through it, 
the foundation-cushion, and the bottom of the 
box, said bolts having their nuts arranged to 
permit of vertical movement of the plate. The 
top of the plate Eis provided with two chairs, 
F F, having their inner ends inclined ob 
liquely toward each other, and the slots in the 
tops of these chairs are closed at their inner 
ends by stops f, the object of which is to fix 
the point to which the rails may be inserted 
in the chair, the lower portion of the rails be 
ing cut away to leave their heads projecting, 
as shown in Fig. 9, over the stops f and flush 
with the inner ends of the chairs. The inner 
ends of the chairs are arranged upon the arc 
to 
75 
8o 
85 - 
9o 
95 
IO 
2O. 
25 
35 
45 
 
 
Od 
 
2 
223,59. 
O 
--- 
of a circle, and upon the top of the plate E brought into coincidence with ofie of the per 
manent rails, the slits and guides having such 
swings the end of a switch-rail, G, which may 
relative positions that when they are together 
be brought into coincidence with the rail in 
the tips of the throw-rail and its coincident 
either of the chairs. 
permanent rail will be on a perfect level. 
By having the inward movement of the rails 
having fully described my invention, what 
in the chairs limited by the stops f, and hav 
ing the heads of the rails projecting over and 
I claim is 
lying upon said stops, I am enabled to form a 
1. The combination, in an elastic founda 
tion for switch-head chairs, of an inclosing 
snug joint between the swinging switch-rail 
box or chamber having upon the inner side of 
and the converging rails, so that the ends of 
the respective rails will not be exposed to 
its bottom a cushion upon which rests a frame 
or block of wood or similar yielding material 
blows from passing car-wheels, and thus bat 
having a height somewhat greater than the 
tered and worn away, as in the case when 
walls of said box or chamber, and a chair 
there is a wide space between the meeting 
plate or cover resting upon said frame and 
ends of the rails. 
having its upper surface provided with chairs 
When the box is placed in position to sup 
port the rails in the ordinary position of switch 
for the main-track and siding rails, substan 
tially as described. 
rails of a railway-track, the ends of the meet 
2. The combination, with the inclosing-box, 
ing rails and the chairs are, on account of the 
foundation-cushion, and wooden frame, of the 
yielding of the cushion B under the frame and 
chair-plate having its upper surface provided 
chair-plate, relieved of thatjarring experienced 
with the converging chairs having the inner 
by chairs resting upon solid ties or other rigid 
ends of their rail-slots closed by stops, and 
foundations. 
adapted to receive the rails having heads for 
In Fig. 2 I have shown a cushion, H, of rub 
projecting over said stops to meet a throw 
ber sitting within the frame C and resting 
rail and form a close joint there with, substan 
upon the foundation-cushion B. This cushion 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
EI is somewhat higher than the frame, and di 
3. The combination, with the inclosing-box, 
rectly supports the chair-plate, so that the first 
pressure upon the chair-plate is taken up by 
the foundation - cushion, the open wooden 
frame resting upon said foundation-cushion, 
the central cushion, E, and as the plate de 
and one or more cushions or springs of any 
scends it then strikes easily upon the frame C, 
suitable material sitting within the frame and 
through which pressure is communicated to 
extendling above the same, of the chair plate 
the foundation-cushion B, this giving a very 
or cover resting upon said cushion or springs, 
easy yielding movement of the chair-plate, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
and obviating all jar and liability to break the 
4. The combination, with the frame C, hav 
- 
chairs or car-wheels. 
ing the grooves in the inner surfaces of its 
I prefer to form the cushion H with a rib or 
tongue, h, projecting from each of its edges, 
walls, of one or more rubber blocks or cush 
ions fitting within said frame and provided 
and fitting snugly within grooves formed in 
with ribs extending from their edges and fit 
the walls of the frame C, to form a joint which 
ting in said grooves, substantially as and for 
will prevent the passage of dust to the foull 
the purpose set forth. 
dation-cushion. 
5. The combination, with the box, the foun 
Instead of the single cushion H, a series of 
dation-cushion, and the wooden frame inclosed 
smaller cushions, h", may be used, either sepa 
by the box, of the cushion or spring, one or 
rated by transverse partitions of the frame or 
more, sitting within the frame and projecting 
not, as shown in Fig. 4; and said cushions may 
above the same, the elliptical springs arranged 
be secured by ribs and grooves, as is cushion 
H, and I may substitute elliptical or semi-el 
between the ends of the Wooden frame and the 
walls of the box, and the chair plate or cover 
liptical springs for the rubber cushions, as 
resting upon said elliptical springs and the 
shown in sectional view, Figs. 5 and 6; and 
cushion or spring within the wooden frame, 
in addition to the cushion or springs within 
substantially as described. 
the frame, I may locate elliptical springs I, as 
6. The combination, with the converging 
shown in Fig. 7, between the ends of the 
chairs having the guide-plates K projecting 
frame C and the end walls of the box, the 
ends of said elliptical springs being supported 
from their inner ends, of the throw-rail hav 
ing in its swinging end the slit lic, coinciding 
by blocks of yielding material, D, upon which 
in position with and adapted to embrace said 
said springs rest. 
plates, substantially as and for the purpose 
In order that the tops of the permanent 
converging rails may be always maintained 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
at a level with the top of the throw-rail, I may 
have hereunto set my hand in the presence of 
slit the end of said throw-rail transversely 
the subscribing witnesses. 
just above its base, as shown at k, Fig. 1, and 
in front of the adjacent ends of the chairs is 
firmly fixed a guide-plate, K, which coincides 
in position with the slit in the throw-rail and 
takes into said slit when the throw-rail is 
JAMES L. NORRIS, 
JAMES. A. RUTHERFORD. 
WILLIAM C, EURD, 
Witnesses: 
- 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IIO 
IIS 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223691.txt	A. M., ALLEN. 
WelOOipede, 
No. 223,691. 
 
Patented Jan. 20, 1880. 
2 
S. SS 
S. S 
3S -- 
 
a 
 
twwwvor 
w W. Wvw 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR. M. ALLEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
VELOCIPEDE. 
- SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 223,691, dated January 20, 1880. 
Application filed May 14, 1879. 
15 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR M. ALLEN, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
5 in Velocipedes, which improvement is fully 
set forth in the following specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 represents a side view, partly in 
section, of a velocipede embodying my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a plan or top view thereof, 
partly in section. Figs. 3 and 4 are detail 
views of parts. Fig. 5 is a diagram illustrat 
ing the positions of the parts when the vehi 
cle is being steered. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
My invention relates to velocipedes, some 
parts thereof being especially applicable to 
tricycles and four-wheel vehicles, while others 
are applicable both to tricycles and to bicycles; 
and it consists, first, in the combination, with 
the driving-wheel and its shaft projecting from 
the side thereof, and a reach connecting the 
front and rear wheels and provided with a 
seat, of a gear-wheel fixed on the end of the 
axle, a loose crank mounted on the axle and 
carrying at its outer end a fixed gear-wheel 
engaging with the gear upon the axle, and a 
lever pivoted to the axle, extending toward 
the seat and provided with a pedal, whereby 
a person occupying the seat may operate the 
lever with his foot for the purpose of driving 
the velocipede; second, in the combination, 
in a velocipede, of two steering-wheels mount 
ed in independent oscillating supports with 
a steering-post, an arm moving with it, and 
rods connected with the wheel-supports, where 
by, when the steering-post is actuated, the 
wheels are brought into different or non-par 
allel planes; third, in the combination, with 
the driving. wheel of a velocipede and with 
foot driving-gear adapted to act on said wheel, 
of a fixed pulley and oscillating hand-lever 
mounted on the wheel-axle, and a cam secured 
to the lever to adapt the same for actuating 
the pulley, as hereinafter more particularly 
described; fourth, in the combination, in a 
velocipede, of two steering-wheels mounted 
in independent oscillating supports and an 
5o oscillating seat connected to the supports of 
both wheels; fifth, in the combination, with 
45 
35 
. 
55. 
65 
o 
the reach of a three-wheeled velocipede, of 
lateral projections, forming supports for the 
two parallel wheels, adapted to be folded in 
ward; sixth, in the combination, with the 
frame of a velocipede, of a flexible shoulder 
brace attached to the frame; seventh, in the 
combination, in a velocipede driving-wheel, 
of an elastic tire and a corrugated or indent 
ed rim, to prevent slipping of the tire. 
In the drawings, the letter Adesignates the 
front or driving wheel, and B B the hind or 
steering wheels, of the vehicle, combined with 
a reach, C, which, in this example, is provided 
with two seats, a b. 
At its opposite ends the axle c of the front 
wheel carries a crank, D, and a pulley, E, the 
crank being loose and the pulley fixed upon 
the axle, and to said crank is fastened a disk, 
F, which engages with the pulley E. In this 
example the pulley E and disk F are provided 
with teeth; but they may, if desired, be left 
plain, so as to act like friction-gear. 
To the crank D, on the respective sides of 
the vehicle, is also fastened one end of a bar, 75 
G, which is hung on links d, attached to the 
reach C, so that it is capable of a reciprocat 
ing motion, and which is provided with two 
pedals, ef, one at each end. These pedals are 
placed above the centers of the diskE, the re 
sult of which is, that the leverage is increased 
with the forward and decreased with the back 
ward motion. The wheel-axle c also carries a 
pulley, G', and a hand-lever, H., (best seen in 
Fig. 4) one on each side of the wheel A, the 
pulley being fixed and the lever loose, so that 
the latter may oscillate, and to said lever is 
fastened a cam or dog, g, in such a manner 
that the cam is adapted to bear on the face of 
the pulley. In this example the pulley G" on 9o 
each side of the wheel A is formed on the hub. , 
of the wheel. 
Therear wheels, BB, have independent axles 
hh, and they are mounted in independent sup 
ports II, which are connected to projections 95 
JJ, pivoted to the reach C by means of a piv 
ot, i, so that the supports are adapted to oscil 
late. These supports II are both connected 
to a post, i, turning in the reach C in such a 
manner that the supports may be simultane- Ioo. 
ously actuated from or by means of said post; 
and for the purpose of making such connection 
85 
4: . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 
223,69 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
35 tion, step by step. 
I use reciprocating rods lic k and a swinging 
arm, l, fixed to the post, stops at being com 
bined with the rods to limit their movements. 
To the upper end of the posti is fastened 
the forward seat, a, so that the post may be 
turned by means of this seat. 
On its rear part the reach C is provided with 
lateral projections J J for the attachment of 
the wheel-supports I. I. These projections J 
Jare attached to the reach C by means of piv 
ots o, (see Fig. 3,) on which they are capable 
of swinging, and they are held in their normal 
positions by pins p. 
On the upper and forward part of the reach 
Care arranged two staples, in n, or other simi 
lar fastening devices, to which I connect the 
opposite ends of a flexible shoulder-brace, L. 
In order to give motion to the driving-wheel 
A, power is applied to the crank D, whence it 
is transferred to the wheel-axle by the action 
of the disk F on the pulley E, and thence to 
the wheel. This motion may, if desired, be 
produced by a single rider, or by two, inas 
much as by the double seats a, b and the bar 
G, with its double pedals ef, the vehicle is 
adapted for two riders, and both are enabled to 
act upon the crank D in unison without its be 
ing unfit for one rider. The bar Galso allows the 
vehicle to be driven in either direction. If it 
is desired to turn the driving-wheelAby hand, 
the lever H is taken hold of and oscillated, 
during which motion the cam g alternately 
moves free of the pulley G' and grasps the 
same, so as to impart thereto a revolving mo 
The hand-lever EI and its concomitants are 
intended to be used in connection with the 
usual driving-gear to assist in propelling the 
vehicle uphill. The back motion of the lever 
His limited by means of a stop, n. 
In order to adjust the hind wheels, BB, for 
the purpose of steering the vehicle, the posti 
is turned by means of the seat a-that is to 
say, this seat is swung in one or the other di 
rection either by its occupant or by the occu 
pant of the rear seat, b, when a like motion is 
given simultaneously to the supports II of 
both wheels through the gearing between 
these supports and the post. When the post 
i is set to steer the vehicle the arm l moves 
with it, and the rods lic act upon the wheel 
supports I in such a manner as to bring the 
wheels B B in different or non parallel planes, 
as will be perceived by reference to the dia 
gram shown in Fig. 5. This is due to the fact 
that as the swinging arm l moves sidewise the 
angle between one of the rodsk and the wheel 
supportS is increased to a greater extent than 
the angle between the other rod and wheel 
support, which latter is decreased. The result 
of this adjustment of the, wheel-supports I is, 
that the axles of the two wheels B B always 
point to the center or axis of the curve through 
which the vehicle travels. Another result of 
the arrangement of the steering-wheels is, that 
a space is gained between them for the recep 
tion of a baggage-van. 
- 
Instead of the seat a, the usual post and 
handles may be used for the purpose of act 
uating the steering-gear. 
The arrangement of the lateral projections 
J J allows the same to be turned or folded in 
ward, together with the wheel-supports II 
and the rear wheels, and by this means the 
width of the vehicle can be materially re 
duced, so as to facilitate transportation. 
The brace L is intended to be adjusted over 
the shoulders of the rider occupying the seat 
a, and serves to sustain the upper portion of 
his body, thereby promoting his comfort and 
giving him improved leverage. 
The driving-wheel A consists of two disks, 
q, instead of spokes, for the purpose of resist 
ing torsion, which disks are concave and are 
secured to a felly, N, with their cavities facing 
each other, while they each carry a boss to 
form the wheel-hub. The felly N is made of 
less diameter than the disk (, so that a space 
is left outside of the felly between the disks. 
Into this space I introduce an india-rubber 
tire, O, and for the purpose of holding this tire 
in position I corrugate or indent the edges of 
the disks, as at . The felly N is made in sec 
tions and of wood and metal, one material be 
ing made to alternate with the other, and the 
metal sections are sustained by braces s, pro 
jecting from the wheel-axle c. If desired, the 
india-rubber tire O may be omitted, and in 
that case the felly N is made to project out 
beyond the edges of the disks q, so as to form 
the rim of the wheel. 
In Fig. 1 I have shown the seat a as being 
provided with a reversible strap or back-rest, 
t. This strap is to be used instead of or in 
connection with the shoulder-brace L, and by 
being reversible it is made capable of support 
ing the rider, whether he sits in the position 
indicated or in a reverse position. 
If desired, the disk F may be enlarged, the 
rim hollowed out, and the pulley E arranged 
within it. 
What I claim is 
1. In a velocipede, the combination, with the 
driving-wheel and its shaft projecting from the 
side thereof, and a reach connecting the front 
and rear wheels and provided with a seat, of 
a gear-wheel fixed on the end of the axle, a 
loose crank mounted on the axle and carrying 
at its outer end a gear-wheel engaging with 
the 'gear upon the axle and fixed to a lever 
pivoted to the crank, said lever extending to 
Ward the seat, and being provided with a pedal, 
whereby a person occupying the seat may op 
erate the lever with his foot for the purpose 
of driving the velocipede. 
2. The combination, in a velocipede, of two 
steering-wheels mounted in independent oscil 
lating supports with a steering-post, an arm 
moving with it, and rods connected with the 
wheel supports, substantially as described, 
whereby when the steering-post is actuated the 
wheels are brought into different or non-par 
allel planes, as and for the purpose set forth, 
3. The combination, with the driving-wheel 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
I25 
223,69 
of a velocipede and with foot driving-gear 
6. The combination, with the frame of a ve 
adapted to act on said wheel, of a fixed pulley locipede, of a flexible shoulder-brace attached 
and oscillating hand-lever mounted on the to the frame, substantially in the manner and 
wheel-axle, and a cam secured to the lever to for the purpose described. . 
7. The combination, in a velocipede driving 
adapt the same for actuating the pulley, sub- 
wheel, of an elastic tire and a corrugated or in 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination, in a velocipede, of two dented rim to prevent slipping of the tire, sub 
steering-wheels mounted in independent oscil- stantially as described. 
lating supports and an oscillating seat con- 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
Jnected to the supports of both wheels, substan- have hereunto set my hand and seal this 13th 
tially in the manner and for the purpose set day of May, 1879. 
forth. 
5. The combination, with the reach of a 
three-wheeled velocipede, of lateral projections, 
forming supports for the two parallel wheels, ; 
adapted to be folded inward, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
ARTEUR. M. ALLEN. L. s. 
- 
25 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, 
CHAs, WAHLERs. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223792.txt	C. WORTHEN. 
Thill-Coupling. 
No. 223,792. 
Patented Jan. 20, 1880. 
Aziz esses. 
afur (72. 
26% & 44%. 
Fig. 6. 
e 7 
At 7. 7 
7 
Z/22d2. 
CZares Zhor Aez .. 
2zz, 
N. PETERS, Photo-lh HogRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES WORTHEN, OF AMESBURY, MASSACEUSETTS. 
TH - COUPLN G. 
- SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 223,792, dated January 20, 1880. 
Application filed November 28, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES WORTHEN, 
of Amesbury, of the county of Essex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Innprovement in Wheel-Carriages; 
and I do hereby declare the same to be de 
scribed in the following specification, and rep 
resented in the accompanying drawings, of 
which 
Figure 1 is a top view, and Fig. 2 a longi. 
tudinal section, of a carriage axle and thills 
provided with my invention, such figure show 
ing by full lines the thills as down to their 
lowest position, and by dotted lines as up or 
at their highest altitude. Fig. 3 is a longi 
tudinal section taken through one of the elas 
tic friction hooks or springs and its bearing 
or box. 
The main object of the devices hereinafter 
described, on which my improvement rests, is 
to enable the thills, when turned up, to be 
held in position without the necessity of using 
a prop therefor, as heretofore usually cus-- 
tomary. They also act as a safety apparatus 
in case of either thill becoming accidentally 
detached from the axle; and, furthermore, 
they operate to prevent noise or rattling in 
the joints of the axle and thills. 
In carrying out my improvement I combine 
with the axle and thills one or more elastic 
friction-hooks and a box or bearing, as here 
inafter described, for each of the said hooks 
to hook to or into and slide or turn in, such 
box or bearing being fixed to the axle, and 
such friction-hook being connected at or near 
its front end to a thill or a projection there 
from. 
In the drawings, A denotes the front axle, 
and B B the thills, of a common buggy or 
wagon, the cross-bar connecting the thills be 
ing shown at a. 
CC are the hooked friction-springs, and D 
D the bearings or boxes therefor, these latter 
being projected from the axle and secured to 
it by screw-clips band nuts c, or by other proper 
0S, 
Each of the bearings, as represented, is com 
posed not only of a block or piece, d, notched 
to receive the hook of the spring, but of a cap 
. 
- 
devices. 
or saddle, e, to enter the notch and extend 
across the spring, the cap being formed as 
shown in top view in Fig. 4, in side view in 
Fig. 5, in end view in Fig. 6, and in longitudi 
nal section in Fig. 7. The said cap is to be 
held in the notch by screws or other proper 
Each of the friction-springs, near its front 
end, is slotted, as shown at f, to receive a screw 
bolt, g, to fasten it to a bracket or projection, 
h, extending from one of the thills, and se 
cured thereto by nuts and a screw-clip, i, or 
other proper means. 
By having the friction-hook slotted, as de 
scribed, it can be set forward or adjusted to 
bear with the requisite friction in the box. 
On turning the thills either upward or down 
Ward the friction-springs will nove in the 
boxes, and when the thills are turned up 
they will be held up by the said springs and 
boxes. 
One friction - spring and one box therefor 
might be employed instead of two of such 
springs and their boxes, as shown; but it is 
better to have two of the springs, as they serve 
to hold the thills in connection with the axle 
in case of accidental loss or breakage of one 
of the pivotal bolts l of the joints of the 
thills and axle. 
In respect to the block D, with which the 
spring operates, it will be seen that it is com 
posed of a socketed or recessed block, d, and 
the cap e, and that the spring in operating 
passes into and out of the recess of the block 
and about the upper part of the cap e, in con 
sequence of which there is no danger of the 
spring becoming overstrained or broken. The 
spring does not pass through one aperture 
only, but hooks around the part e, and con 
sequently requires no head to it (the said 
spring or extension) from its edges to prevent 
it from being drawn out of the box D, as is 
the case with the spring described and shown 
in United States Patent No. 168,160, wherein 
the spring is represented as going through a 
slot in a bearing-plate and against a roller, the 
spring at its free end being provided with a 
head. 
I claim 
IC 
20 
25 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
 
2 
223,792 
1. The said thill friction mechanism or com- adapted and arranged with, or to be applied 
bination of the elastic friction-hook C and its to, the axle and thill of a wheel-carriage, as ex 
box or bearing a and cap e, substantially as plained. 
set forth. 
2. The combination of the elastic hook, 
slotted as described, with the box or bearing 
and the bracket and clamp-screw, all being 
CHARLEs WORTHEN. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. EDDY, 
W. W. UNT, 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223892.txt	T, DEL ANY., 
Plant-Protector, 
No. 223,892. 
Patented. Jan. 27, 1880. 
 
 
M 
2 
a 
Z2. 3. M 
al 
. . 
a 
a 
a 4 
WITNESSES; - 
INVENTOR: 
Td 
By sts te, 
TTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS DELANY, OF WATERLOO, NEW YORK. 
PLANT-PROTECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 223,892, dated January 27, 1880. 
Application filed July 25, 1879. 
Io 
25 
Figure 1 is a plan of the device. Fig. 2 is 
jurious effects of heavy rain-falls upon them, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS DELANY, of but also the harmful effects of the intense rays 
Waterloo, in the county of Seneca and State of the sun, and it causes an equal distribu 
of New York, have invented a new and Im- tion of the rain about the plant and permits 
proved Plant-Protector, of which the follow-free ventilation and evaporation beneath the 
ing is a specification. 
plate. so that it shall not become overheated. 
In the drawings, A is the plate, provided 
a sectional elevation of the same (with con- with central hole, af, and smaller holes b', which 
cave surface) on line at ac, Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 is latter are connected with each other by the 
a sectional elevation of the same (with flat grooves or leaders c'. B are the legs or sup 
surface) on line at ac, Fig. 1. 
ports to keep the protector from settling upon 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre- the plants. 
sponding parts. 
The plate may be rectangular, round, oval, 
The object of the invention is to provide an or of any other convenient or desired shape, 
efficient device for preventing heavy rains from and of whatever material may be found con 
washing the soil from about the roots of plants, venient and suitable. 
while it gives the water access to the plants, 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
and also permits the air to circulate freely I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
about them. 
1. The within-described plant-protector, con 
or flatplate, of wood, metal, clay, or other suit- sisting of plate A, provided with holes a? and 
able material, pierced from the concave or up- b, grooves or leaders c', and supports B, sub 
per to the convex or lower sides with one large stantially as and for the purpose herein de 
central hole, surrounded by funnel-shaped holes scribed. 
that are connected with each other on the con- 
2. A plant-protector consisting of a con 
cave or upper surface by grooves or leaders, cavo-convex plate pierced with funnel-shaped 
so that an equal distribution of the rain fall-holes, that are connected with each other on 
ing on the plate may be secured; and it fur- the concave or upper face of the plates by 
ther consists in fastening to the under or con- grooves or leaders, as and for the purpose 
vex surface several legs or supports to keep herein described. 
the protector from settling upon the plants, 
and to permit the air-to circulate about them. 
This device is especially designed for straw- 
berry-plants, but is applicable to other plants 
: 35 of low growth. It not only prevents the in- 
I. B. CROCKER, 
H. WARNER. 
2O ... " 
The invention consists of a concavo-convex 
THOMAS DELANY. 
45 
55 
Patent 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US223992.txt	. 
W. T. CARROLL. 
Spindle-Adjusting Mechanism for Spinning-Machines. 
No. 223,992. 
Patented Feb. 3, 188O. 
  
 
 
NIW 
2N (AZ 
2% 
% 
&23.2% 
5 5.I. 
544 
MaCraereleasanae 
  
 
Invent Or. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM T. CARROLL OF WORCESTER, ASSIGNOR TO GEORGE DRAPER 
& SONS, OF HOPEDALE, MASSACEUSETTS. 
SPINDLE-ADJUSTING MECHANISM FOR SPINNING-MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 223,992, dated February 8, 1880. 
Application filed October 4, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM T. CARROLL, 
of Worcester, of the county of Worcester and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented an Im 
provement in Spindle-Adjusting Mechanism 
for Spinning-Machines, of which the following 
description, in connection with the accompa 
nying drawings, is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
spinning-machines, and has for its object 
such a construction of parts as will permit the 
spindle or its bearing or bearings to be ad 
justed into true vertical position. 
In this my invention, as herein shown, the 
spindle-bearing and foot-step are held in a 
bearing-frame provided with adjusting de 
vices, shown as screws, adapted to act upon 
the under surface of the bolster-rail at op 
posite sides of the spindle- opening, to there 
by adjust and secure the bearing-frame upon 
the said rail in such position that the spindle 
held by the bearings of the bearing - frame 
shall stand in proper vertical position. 
Figure 1 shows in dotted lines the bolster 
rail of an ordinary spinning-frame with a 
spindle and my bolster-bearing-holding plate 
or frame applied to it, one side of the bearing 
holding plate being in section on the line at ac, 
Fig. 2; and Fig. 2 is a section on the line yy, 
Fig. 1, the bolster-rail being omitted. 
The spindle and bearing holding plate or 
frame herein shown are adapted to be used 
in a ring-spinning frame. 
In the drawings, a will be supposed to rep 
resent the bolster-rail of a common form of 
spinning-frame. 
The spindle b, provided with the whirl c, has 
its foot-step at the lower end, 2, of the bearing 
framef, which has at its upper end the bolster 
bearing-holding plate 3, provided, as herein 
shown, with four adjusting devices, g, shown as 
screws, one at each corner of the plate, (see 
Fig. 2,) the points of the said screws being 
adapted to bear against the under side of the 
bolster-rail or its flanges, as shown in the 
drawings. 
The bolster-bearing h, or that one which 
acts only upon the sides of the spindle, is at 
tached to the plate 3, and at its upper end 
the bolster is provided with screw-threads 4, 
55 
to receive a screw-threaded fastening or sup 
porting nut, i, made hollow or cup-shaped at 
its upper end to receive oil or other lubricant, 
which is to reach the spindle by passing 
through suitable holes in the bolster k. When 
the bolster-bearing-holding frame herein shown 
is employed the usual foot-step rail will be 
dispensed with. 
In operation, the bolster containing the 
spindle will be inserted through an open 
ing in the bolster-rail until the plate 3 meets 
the under side of the said rail, when the nut 
i will be turned down in contact with the top 
of the bolster-rail. In this condition, by turn 
ing the screws g more or less through the 
plate 3 and manipulating the nut i, (the 
screws being in contact with the under side 
of the bolster-rail,) the spindle-bearings may 
be placed in such position as will insure a 
true vertical position for the spindle, in order 
that it may run truly and concentrically with 
relation to the center of the spinning-ring and 
its race. 
It is obvious that this method of adjusting 
the bearing and spindle might be practiced 
in a machine wherein the parts f and 2 of the 
bearing - frame were omitted. In such case, 
however, the foot-step would be adjustable or 
loosely held in any proper or usual Way in a 
foot-step rail. 
The nut i prevents the descent of the bol 
ster and its frame and spindle, and I denomi 
nate it the plate or frame supporting device. 
The bolster, its holding-plate and plate 
supporting device, adapted to bear against the 
upper surface of the bolster-rail, combined 
with the adjusting-screws to bear or act upon 
the under surface of the bolster-rail at oppo- - 
site sides of the spindle-opening therein, to 
adjust the bearing, as described, and insure a 
true vertical position for the spindle, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 95 
two subscribing witnesses. . 
I claim- 
75 
". 
. 
WILLIAM T. CARROLL. 
Witnesses: 
WM. F. DRAPER, 
EDGAR. A. BROWNING. 
IS 
3O 
35 
45 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224092.txt	N. KIDNEY. 
Door-Cheok, 
t 
No. 224,092. 
Patented Feb. 3, 1880. 
 
Z2/277 esser, 
4/24-, 
Zz ae z/77. 
53222. 
N. PETERS, PHOTo-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NELSON. KIDNEY, OF DUNKIRK, OHIO. 
DOOR CHECK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 224,092, dated February 3, 1880. 
Application filed July 29, 1879. 
O 
. 
. 
. 
. 
' 
. . 
' 
hereinafter. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NELSON. KIDNEY, of 
Dunkirk, in the county of Elardin and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Door-Checks; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to the production of a 
new and improved door-stop constructed to 
hold the door in any desired position to which 
it may be swung upon its hinges by means of 
an elastic pad or ball, which is pressed upon 
the floor and automatically locked in close 
contact there with, as will be fully explained 
Figure 1 is an elevation of my device ap 
plied to a door and in working position, a part 
of the inclosing-shell being broken away to 
more clearly show some of the mechanism; 
and Fig.2 is a front view of the latch detached, 
which holds the friction-pad in contact with 
the floor. 
A represents the edge of a door, which may 
be hinged in any desired or approved manner. 
B represents the floor over which the door 
swings. C is a vertical cylindrical shell, se 
cured to the door by means of brackets or ears 
c c, which may be cast in one and the same 
piece with the shell or attached thereto., c' is 
a narrow vertical slot formed in the front side 
of the shell, and extending about half the 
length thereof. DD is a plunger-rod, sup 
ported within the cylinder or shellin such man 
ner as to slide vertically therein. The lower 
part, D', of this rod is of smaller diameter 
than the upper part, D. D is an elastic ball 
or pad attached to and carried by the lower 
end of the rod. d is a shoulder formed by 
the junction of the part D with the larger 
part D of the rod, and d is a dog or locking 
pin projecting from the front side of the larger 
part D of the rod. This pin has its outer end 
beveled upon the under side, and projects 
through the slot of which is formed for its re 
ception in the shell C. E. is a spiral spring 
surrounding the lower smaller part, D', of the 
55 
rod. The lower end of this spring is sup 
ported upon a cap or in Wardly-projecting flange 
at the lower end of the shell, the upper end 
of the spring engaging with the shoulder dof 
the rod. Thus the spring thrusts the rod in an 
upward direction whenever it (the rod) is free 
to move ili that direction, as will be explained. 
FF is a spring-latch, the lower end being at 
tached rigidly to the shell C, the upper end 
being free to vibrate toward and from said cyl 
inder. The part F is bent outward to form a 
footpiece. f f fare a series of holes in the 
latch to receive the locking-pin d. 
This device may be operated as follows: Af. 
ter the door has been swung into the desired 
position the rod DD may be forced down 
Ward until the elastic ball or pad is thrust up 
on the floor with such pressure that the fric 
tion of said pad upon the floor will hold the 
door in place, the pin d entering one of the 
holes fin the spring-latch F, and thus hold 
ing the ball firmly down upon the floor, and, 
of course, holding the door in position. 
When it is desired to release the door and 
permit it to swing, pressure may be applied to 
the outer end of the foot-piece F, which will 
release the latch from the pin d', when the 
spiral spring E will at once lift the ball or pad 
D from the floor and release the door, as will 8o 
be readily understood from an examination of 
the drawings without further explanation. 
When the spring E is withdrawn from con 
tact with the pin d the spring E throws the 
rod upward until the said pin d strikes the 
shell C at the upper end of the slot c'. Thus 
the upper end of the slot serves as a stop to 
prevent the spiral spring from throwing the 
rod out of the shell. 
It is apparent that if, from any cause, the 
upward movement of the rod D D be not 
stopped by the contact of the pin d with the 
wall of the upper end of slot c', the ball or pad 
D will engage with the bottom of shell C, and 
thus prevent the rod from being thrown out 
of the shell by spring E. 
It will be understood that my device can be 
used without the spring E, because the fric 
tion of the pin d against the latch F willor 
dinarily support the rod and ball and prevent 
the ball from accidental contact with the floor; 
but I prefer the combination of parts shown, 
75 
95 
90 
IOO 
25 
3o 
35 
45 
so 
 
 
 
s 
224,092 
foot to release the door without necessitating 
that the operator shall stoop or bend in order 
to manipulate the devices by hand. The bolt 
D is provided with a head or knob, whereby the 
check can be thrust downward by a pressure 
applied directly upon the top of the bolt, so 
that the operator can fasten the door ii any 
position by a slight pressure on the top of the 
knob. 
because without the spring E the operator shown at F, it can be readily operated by the 3o 
would be obliged to stoop down and lift the 
rod and ball whenever he desired to let the 
door swing freely. 
I am aware that door-checks have hereto 
fore been constructed with latching-springs 
having ears or lugs projecting from the oppo 
site edges; but such locking devices necessi 
tate that the door-check mechanism should be 
substantially rectangular in cross-section in 
order that there may be a flat face in front, 
having at its opposite sides two series of re 
cesses to receive the lugs or ears upon the 
latch-spring. Malking the door-check thus 
Irectangular necessitates that the reciprocat 
ing parts shall be made of several pieces in 
order that a coiled spring may be advanta 
geously placed around it. I, on the other hand, 
have constructed a door-check of great sim 
plicity and with few pieces by so construct 
ing the latching-spring that it shall engage 
with the reciprocating bolt by means of a se 
ries of centrally-arranged perforations, where 
by the bolt itself may be made in one continu 
Ouspiece, being of a shape in cross-section to ad 
vantageously receive the coiled spring around 
it. Moreover, by making the locking-spring 
F stationary and arranging it to have the free 
end extend upward, and by bending it as 
What I claim is 
The herein-described door-check, consisting 
of the combination of the vertically-slotted 
shell, provided at its lower end with an in 
Wardly - projecting flange, the sliding rod D 
D', provided with a shoulder, d, and pin d", 
projecting through the slot in the shell, the 
spring E, a stop to limit the upward throw of 
the rod D D, and the spring-latch FF, ar 
ranged outside the shell and engaging with 
the pin d', substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
NELSON. KIDNEY. 
Witnesses: 
J. J. WooD, 
H. H. WooDs. 
35 
45 
SO 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224193.txt	B, II, IIG0N, 
Pump, 
No.224,193. 
Patented Feb. 3, 188o. 
 
? XII) 
=?? 
? 
7 
WTEssis: 
- 
-- 
INWENT0R 
 
 
 
 
 
UNTTEDSTATEs PATENT OFFICE. 
DWIN T. IGON, OF DEMoPons, AIABAMA, 
PUM P. 
SPECIFICATION_forming part of Letters Patent No. 224,193, dated February 8, 1880 
- 
, 
. 
Application filed April8,1879, 
- 
- 
TO 
15 
2C) 
- 
- 
- 
* 
 
tion. 
10 M10ion i nily (20006/n : 
IBe it klown that II, IEDWIN I. ILIGON, of 
IDemo00lis, in the County of Marengo and 
State of Alabana, lhave invented a, 1new and 
useful Improvementin Pumps, of Which the 
following is a specificatiol. 
IRigire 1 is a detail Section of a, 100rtion of 
a pump Cylinder and pistollillustrating my 
invrentio11. 
IRig. 2 is a Cross-section of the 
Cylinder. IFigs. 3 an(l 4 are detail views of 
the pistion, showing modifidatious of Construc 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
SI0011dilg 10artS. 
- 
Illie object of this inventiou is to furish 
improved.putimps Wilich Shall be simplein Coil 
Struction, ineXpensive in imanufacture, strolg, 
and durable, and which athe Sametime slall 
be Self-packing. 
Ilhe invention Consists in IDImp Cylinders 
ald Distions formed of spirally-Wound Wires or 
strips firmuly soldered together, in 10ump-tyl 
indlers formed of spirally?would Wires orstrips 
firnly Soldere(l together and having metal || 
Castaroundtheir Outer surfaces, andlin 19IImp 
IDistols formed of spitally - Would Strips or 
Wires firtmly soldered together andl laving 
strips or Wires, or strips aludwires, Wound spi 
Irally around their outer surfaces, as hereill 
after fully described. 
Ihe Cylinderis made bytaking a, 100l of the 
Ireguisite diameter, and which is made Der 
fectily true, suchas is madle lythe cold-roled 
pr00ess, aud Winding around it Spirallya Wite 
or strip, A, of brass, or of steel or iron Coated 
Witill tin or zine, ald soldering it t0gether, 
While in place, eitier byimmersingitin melt 
ed metal ot in anyothersuitable and Conven 
ient Imatiner. 
Ifadditional strengthis reguired, the Wire 
ttlbeis placedin a mold SomeWhatilarger than 
the saidl wire timbe, and theintermediate Space 
is filled With meltedl Inetal IB. 
This Construction layalso lbe applied With 
advantage to the Construction of the Cylinders 
of Small engiles, as it Would dispellse With 
1much oftlepreseut costlylathe-Work, and by 
using steel vire or strips the Cyliilders Would 
be Inuch more diturable tillan When Imade in the 
Ulstlal Way. 
The body of the pistion Imay be fomed of 
- 
- 
- 
- 
-- 
UInneCessary. 
The valve is designed to be pladed at the 75 
Fig. 1 sllows a piston with strips ( Wound 55 
C0iled Wire or stril)s A, Soldered togetler, or 
it imay be Cast, and has strips or Wires C, 01 
stril)s an(l Wires C, Woutl(l spirally arotltu(l it. 
spirally arouild it. Fig.4 shows a piston with 
wire C voun(l spirally aroundlit; and Fig. 3 
shows a, 10istion With strips and Wire C W0uld 
spirally around it, tle wire being of a greater 
Clitimeter thain tle thickless of tille Strips, ald 
being plade(i betweell the adjadent edges of 
the Said stripS. 
With this donstruction the Spiral Spaces lbe 
tween the Wires or strips detain tille Water 
Sufficiently to Cause it to Serve as a, 10ackiling, 
thus Imaking the pistols Self-10acking ald 
Irendering the use of leather or other packing 
In case a cast pistion-body be used, the 
| spiral strips or wires should beturned true im 7? 
a lathe, the surfice of the Said Cast body, be 
tween the saidl spiral strips or Wires, being 
left rough,tostillifurtherretard the descent of 
the Water packing. 
top of the 1)istion, Which.positiola gives more 
100mm for the passage of the Water. 
This construction allows the tubing and 
pistoln to be made square ot of Other polyg 
onal shape, ald in tillat CaSe, in Very Cleel) 8o 
Wells, tlebucketor piston Canbeattached, by 
Imeans of a small Wire Cable, to a Wheel ab0ve, 
and by working the Wheel backWard ald for 
ward the tube maybe filled with Water, Which 
1nalythen al lbe raised by Winding up the Said 85 
In this Case the shape of the tulbe and 
Cable. 
piston Will Ikeep the Cable intact and prevent 
- 
its unwinding. 
A small valve maybe inserted in the sidle of 
the tube sometwenty or thitty feetabove the 9o 
surface of the Water, toadmit air un(ler the 
bucket or piston When it has passed that 
point, to relieve it of atml0spheric pressure, 
an(l thus lessen tle subse0ulent labor. 
claimas new and desire tosecture by Letters 
Patent- 
1. IPump cylindlers andl pistols formed of 
spirally-wouid Wites or strips A, firmily S0l 
dered togethet, substantially aSherein ShoWIl Ioo 
and desCribe(t.. 
Having thus described my inventiol, I 95 
2. Pumpreyindersformed of spiralywound 
- 
- 
- 
- 
45 
5? 
? 
??, I93 
wires or strips A, firmily soldered togetille", 
andhaving metal IB cast arould their olte 
smraces, sibstantially as lierein slown and 
described, 
3. Pinmppistons formed of spiraly-Wond 
strips or wires A, firmily soldeed together, 
andfhavingstripsor wires, orstrips and Wires, ! 
C vound spirally around their onter Surfices, 
snbstantiallyas lherein sllow11 andl ClesCrit)e(l? 
IEDWIN T. ILIGON. 
WitimeSSeS: 
G. W. SANTDUSKY, 
IE. I. WEIL.  
. 
2-1 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224293.txt	0. B. KEND ALL. 
Steam Railway-Brake, 
No. 224,293. 
Patented Feb. 10, 1880. 
 
H 
- 
7. 
an 
ATIH. 
elf gian 
Sir 
EHER" E 
z' 
Site - (i. 
| 
H z. s. He 
ly 
Fls 
Tilly row. 
Eads (2 
A. 
  
  
- - 
- 
N. 
it 
 
  
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ORSON B. KENDALL, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK, AssIGNOR TO THE INTER. 
NATIONAL RAILWAY SUPPLY COMPANY, OF MONTREAL, CANADA. 
STEAM-RAILWAY BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent.No. 224,293, dated February 10, 1880. 
Application filed July 7, 1879 
. 
. 
. 
" . . 
. . . 
. 
. . 
. . 
O 
the same. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ORSON BRANCHKEN 
DALL, of the city of Buffalo, in the county of 
Erie and State of New York, one of the United 
5 States of America, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Steam-Railway 
Brakes; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
My invention has reference to that class of 
brakes which are operated by steam under the 
control of the locomotive-driver and act si 
multaneously on the wheels of the cars, its ob 
ject being to produce a brake which shall be 
I5 easily worked, direct and instantaneous in its 
action, either when put on or thrown off, and 
hold the wheels rigidly when applied. 
This I propose to effect by placing under 
the tender or the cab of the locomotive one or 
more cylinders, (if more than one, arranged 
side by side,)these cylinders being constructed 
in the ordinary way, with steam-chests, slide 
or rotary valves, &c., and the stroke of the 
piston operating, through connecting-rods or 
arms and cranks, to rotate a shaft set parallel 
to the axles, and having mounted on it a worm, 
this Worm, through a worm-gear, rotating a 
continuous angling-shaft, on which it is keyed, 
this shaft being made up of sections coupled 
together and carried in bearers or hangers un 
derneath the cars, so as to wind up thereon 
all the brake-chains, and thus apply the shoes, 
intermediate sheave or draft levers being ar 
ranged in combination with these, so as to 
Communicate the action in a direct line to the 
brake-levers. . 
I also provide, for governing the action of 
the steam-valves, the usual eccentric straps 
and rods-i. e., link-motion-with levers to 
operate these and throw the brakes on or off; 
but for fuller comprehension of my invention 
reference must behad to the annexed drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 shows a plan view, looking up, of 
the operating apparatus; Fig. 2, a longitudi 
nal section of the same online 11, Fig.1; Fig. 
3, a plan of the arrangement of shafting; Figs, 
4 and 5, details of indicator, and Fig. 6 a de 
tail of coupling. 
. . . 
25 
30 
35 
45 
 
Similar letters of reference indicate like so 
parts. 
AA are two cylinders, placed preferably 
under the cab or tender of the locomotive, and 
of any suitable diameter and stroke of piston, 
B B being the piston-rods, running in proper 55 
guides b, and C C the cross-heads, to which 
are attached the arms or rods DD, connected 
to cranks D'D', secured on the transverse or 
crankshaft E, which is carried in hangers; or 
the whole apparatus may be inclosed in a frame, 6o 
Z, in which may be formed the bearings for 
the different parts. This shaft E has mounted 
upon it a worm, F, intermeshing with and ro 
tating a worm-gear, G, secured on the contin 
uous angling brake-shaft H., (to be hereinafter 65 
more particularly described,) thereby winding 
up on it, and by reverse action unwinding the 
! brake-chains. 
II are the steam-chests, (the valves in this 
instance being shown rotary, but they may be 7o 
the ordinary slide-valve, with usual link, &c.,) 
K being the links, LL the valve-cranks, and 
M M M arms, levers, and counter-shafting for 
reversing the stroke of engine. N N are the 
rodsimparting motion to the valve-cranks from 75 
the eccentrics OO, set on the crank-shaft E. 
The parts above alluded to are, with the ex 
ception of the transverse or crankshaft E, con 
tinuous angling brake-shaft EI, and the gearing 
transmitting motion from the one to the other, 8o 
practically the same as in the locomotive itself, 
and the operation identical as when the valves 
admitting steam into these cylinders are open. . 
The brakes are put on by the rotation of the 
cranks and continuous angling brake-shaft, 85 
constructed and arranged as will now be de 
scribed, and thrown off by the action of the 
reverse-lever, and by cutting off the steam the 
brakes are held firmly in either position. 
shaft Bare carried in any suitable hangers or 
bearings, preferably from the transoms of the . 
car, H E being short shafts connected there-- 
to by universal joints (of any approved con 
struction, such as a fork and ball) h, and have 95 
ing secured to their outer ends, also by uni 
versal jointsh', bars PP, square insection, en 
tering the sleeve or thimble Q, the interior of 
The main sections of the continuous angling. 9o 
w 
. 
 
 
2 
224,293 
: 15 
which corresponds in section, and is formed 
with a diaphragm, Q, dividing it into two un 
equal chambers, the bar entering the smaller 
of these being secured in place by a chain and 
snap or links, &c., and the other bar being 
free to move in the larger chamber, thus al 
lowing for the change in the position of the 
cars relatively to each other, these square bars 
PP (which may, if desired, be of any section 
O corresponding to the interior of the sleeve Q) 
and the sleeves Q being either or both arranged 
in proper hangers or bearings, so as to bring 
them directly under the draw-bars and in a 
line there with in order to give a central con 
nection, thereby producing a continuous line 
of shafting, the sections of which are partly in 
line and partly at an angle with each other. 
To secure the direct draft on the brake-lever, 
I attach to the shaft H, by a clasp or in any 
other suitable way, a chain, l, the other end 
of which is attached to the periphery of a pull 
ley, S, carried in any suitable way, S' being a 
smaller pulley of any required proportional 
size to S, and either made in one therewith or 
arranged to rotate with it simultaneously, and 
having secured on its periphery the brake 
clhaia proper, R', giving a direct pull on the 
brake-lever and acting as an angle-lever. A 
pair of miter-gears, UIU', arranged, where 
shown, on the shaft H, and a vertical shaft, V, 
I will give motion to this latter, and thence 
through a similar miter-gear, V?, to a crown 
wheel, W, which carries round with it, on a 
spindle, X', a pointer, X, showing 
on the face 
of a dial-plate, Y, how many turns of the brake 
shaft have been inade, so as to judge of the 
amount of pressure. This dial, with indicator, 
may be inclosed in any casing, and is prefer 
ably placed in the cab of the locomotive as a 
guide to the driver or whoever operates the 
brake. 
: 35 
Although I have described an apparatus 
which will be found most efficient for applying 
the power to the brakes, it must be understood 
that I do not confine myself to the exact con 
struction shown, as it may be altered in vary. 
ing circumstances and one or more than two 
cylinders be used and the ordinary slide or 
any other valve, as before mentioned. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is as follows: 
1. In a steam-railway brake, the combina. 
tion, with a continuous angling brake-shaft, 
of a transverse shaft imparting motion to it 
through worm-gearing, and rotated in either 
direction by the piston-rods of one or more 
cylinders constructed in the usual way, all ar. 
ranged substantially as herein set forth. . 
. 
2. The combination, in a continuous brake 
shaft, of the main sections Hand the angling. 
shafts EI" and bars PP, all being coupled by 
universal joints, and the bars being connected 
by sleeves Q, the whole constructed, arranged, 
and operating substantially as herein set forth. 
3. The combination, with the main section 
H, of chain wound thereon, and connected to 
sheave or pulley S, pulley, S', brake-chain R, 
and brake-lever, all substantially as herein 
described. . 
4. In combination with a continuous brake 
shaft rotated through worm-gearing by a trans 
verse shaft operated by the the piston-rods of 
one or more cylinders, a vertical shaft rotated 
through initer-gears and revolving a crown 
wheel and pointer, so as to indicate, the press 
ure of the brakes, all as herein set forth. 
. 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
45 
55 
75 
ORSON BRANCE KENDALL. 
Witnesses: 
PETER. R. MILLER, 
FRAS. HY. REYNOLIDS. 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
; 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224394.txt	G. J. COOK. 
Lamp. 
No. 224,394. 
Patented Feb. 10, 1880. 
 
ZZ 
LqLSLSqSLLqSLLSS LSLSSLSLSSLSL S LSL SLSLSLL LLSLLLLLSLLLLLSLLLLLLSLLA 
????? 
???z????????? 
 
 
 
WITNESSES. 
N. PerERs, PHOTo-LITHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
GEORGE J. COOK, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 224,894, dated February 10, 1880. 
: 
Application filed July 31, 1879. 
? 
? 
The screw-shaft C is also provided with a 55 
The results of this construction are that 65 
pipe D at will, so that the flow of oil into the 
wick-tube I may be stopped at any time by 
that mealms. 
flat face, v, which extends from below up to 
within a suitable distance of the upper end of 
the screw-thread e, so that when it is turned 
up, with its beveled end rout of the orifices in 
the oil-pipe, air will be admitted by means of 6o 
the passage afforded by the flat face v, but 
when the shaft is turned down into its seats 
the flat face will be below the upper end of 
the cylinder and the air be excluded. 
when the shaft C is down no air will be ad 
mitted and no fumes of the oil allowed to es 
cape, to offend by their odor, and the oil in 
the pipe D will be cut off from both the cylin 
der F and the wick-tube I; but when the shaft 7o 
is up the air will be admitted through pas 
sage down into oil-pipe D, and thence will 
force its way up into the upper end of pipe D, 
and thence through the orifices a to the sur 
face of the oil in tank A, and then a corre- 75 
sponding modicum of oil will find its way into 
the lower end of pipe D. 
Fig. 2 is designed to illustrate how any num 
ber of burners, together with my described de 
vices, may be supplied with oil from the same 
tank, which may be placed in the attic or any 
other part of a building, or in any imaginal 
ble position in reference to the burners, pro 
vided, always, that it be above them, so that 
the oil will feed by its own weight. 
A valve, i, may be made to cut off the flow 
of the oil through the pipe D to the burners at . 
the time the tank may be filled. 
In Fig. 3 the construction is similar, and the 
air and oil will pass each other in pipe D. 
Now, the theory of the operation of this im 
proved construction is that, upon filling the 
oil-tank A, the oil will flow by its own weight 
through the orifices a, through pipe D to the 
upper orifice, f, therein, and then, if the shaft C 
be turned up, a modicum of air will be admit 
ted through passage 
into oil-pipe D, and 
thence it will force its way up into the column 
of air in the upper end of pipe D, and thence 
in through the orifices a and to the surface of Ioo 
the oil in the tank A, and immediately there 
upon a corresponding modicum of oil will force 
85 
. 
9o 
95 
2 ? 
". 
25 
I 5 
To all upho? ?? ??? ???cer? : 
Beit known that I, GEORGE.J. CooK, of 
Louisville, county of Jefferson, and State of 
Kentucky, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Lamps, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention-relates to the construction of 
a lamp for burning oil or other burning-fluid 
in such a manner that the feeding of the fluid 
IO to the burner shall be regulated automatically 
by the agency of common air, and to certain 
devices by means of which the admission of 
air for that purpose may be conveniently cut 
off, and to certain other devices by means of 
which the flow of oil may be cut off when and 
as desired. 
My said invention will be hereinafter more 
fully described with reference to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a longitudinal vertical 
central section of a lamp; Fig. 2, a like view 
of the same, showing means for feeding the 
oil to two burners, one below the other, and 
both receiving oil from the same tank; and 
Fig. 3, a like view of the same, showing the 
air-cylinder and oil-tube within the tank. 
The oil-tank A. is made air-tight, and is 
filled through its neck, which is closed by 
ScreW-cap d. 
D is the oil-supply pipe, provided with open 
ings a within the oil-tank, in order to relieve 
the operative parts below them from the press 
ure of the body of the oil above them, and it 
extends up to the top of the tank, and forms 
an air-tight joint there with, in order that when 
the tank is filled with oil it may contain a 
column of air, which will aid in the regulation 
of the feed of the oil to the wick-tube. 
The oil-pipe D leads to and passes through 
4o air-cylinder F, which is much larger than it 
is, and within the said air-cylinder it is pro 
vided with two orifices, one above the other, 
of such diameters that they will fit closely 
around the lower beveled end of the screw 
shaft C, which, at its upper end, is provided 
with a male screw-thread to correspond with 
a female screw-thread in the interior of the 
upper end of the cylinder F. 
By means of this construction and arrange 
ment of parts the screw-shaft can be turned 
down into or up out of the orifices in the oil 
So 
45 
3o 
35 
- 
 
2 
224,394 
its way through one of the orifices a from the 
3. The combination of the air-tight oil-tank 
tank down pipe D, and through its lower ori- A with that part of the oil-pipe D which ex 
fice, m, into the wick-tube I. 
tends within and through the same, and is 
What I claim as my invention, and desire attached by an air-tight joint, and which is 20 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
provided with orifices a, adapted to hold a col 
1. The combination of the air-cylindler F and umn of air above said orifices and aid in the 
the screw-shaft C, provided with the flat face automatic feeding of the oil, substantially as 
v, adapted to admit the air when the shaft is described. 
up and to exclude the air as well as to exclude 
the oil from pipe D when it is down, substan-cylinder F, oil-pipe D, and oil-tank A, substan 
tially as and for the purpose 
2. The lower end of pipe D, provided wit 
orifices f and n, in combination with the lower 
and beveled end, r, of shaft C, adapted to stop 
the passage of both air and oil, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination of the screw-shaft C, air. 25 
lu tially as and for the purpose described. 
GEORGE.J. COOK. 
? ? 
! 
. 
Witnesses: 
JAMEs R. W. SMITH, 
D. M. RODMAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224494.txt	J. H. US HER. 
Scale-Beam, 
No. 224,494. 
Patented Feb. 1 O, 188O. 
 
JOHN EI. USHER, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK. 
SCALE BEAM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 224,494, dated February 10, 1880. 
Application filed September 24, 1878. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN H. USFIER, of 
Buffalo, in the county of Erie and State of 
New York, have made certain Improvements 
in Compound Beams of Weighing-Scales, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to compound scale 
beams; and it consists in the combination, 
With the main beam, of a supplementary lower 
beam, fixed in an inclined position to present 
its face upward for convenience in reading, 
substantially as described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
of the compound beams of a weighing-scale 
having my improved lower beam. Fig. 2 is a 
rear view of the (brass) beam-head, showing 
the insertion of the main steel beam therein. 
I construct the lower beam, A, separate 
from the hangers, and substitute straps a (t, 
first attaching the upper end of one strap a to 
the end of the main beam B, and the top of 
the other to the beam or the beam-head C, 
both being riveted thereto or otherwise fast 
ened. These two straps are then bent or 
curved out toward the front, and their ex 
treme ends l l bent down at an angle and 
the beam. A fastened thereto, presenting the 
O 
25 
face of the beam at a backward slant, so that 
the characters thereon receive the light even 
better than the other beams above it. This 
obviates stooping to read the figures, improves 
the looks of the scale, as all the beams stand 
out from and below the upper one and in a 
downwardly-slanting line. 
D E are the other beams, attached to the 
main beam B by the saddles c c, as usual. 
I am aware that scale-beams with fixed ver 
tical unit-bars are not new; also, that scale 
beams with unit-bars temporarily adjustable 
to an incline are not new. I do not claim 
either of such constructions. 
What I do claim is 
In a compound scale-beam constructed and 
arranged substantially as shown, the lower 
bar, A, obliquely facing upward, as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
iny Ilalne in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
: 
JOHN H. USHER. 
Witnesses: 
J. R. DRAKE, 
T. H. PARSONS. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224594.txt	J. F. HUDSON. 
00rn-Planter. 
No. 224,594. 
Patented Feb. 17, 188O. 
  
 
 
S& 
 
 
Kim E. 
Sye (IHIII 
2 IIH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
m 
 
Ifat'evator 
ETER 
ER, WASH 
 
 
 
 
: 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JUNIOR F. HUDSON, OF WELLINGTON, ILLINOIS. 
coRN-PLANTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 224,594, dated February 17, 1880. 
. 
. 
Application filed August 26, 1879. 
.. 
d 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JUNIOR F. HUDSON, of 
Wellington, in the county of Iroquois and . 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Corn-Planters; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification, and in which- 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
I5 corn-planter. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal verti. 
cal section of the same. Fig. 3 is a transverse 
vertical section, and Fig. 4 is a detail view of 
one of the cams with its shaft, journal-boxes, 
and pinion. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in corn-planters; and it consists of cams on 
hort shafts, between which is extended the 
seed-slide-operating bar or lever, with arms. 
adapted to be struck by the cams; secondly, 
of adjustable shafts with cams, and arranged 
to be driven by suitable mechanism; of open 
ers or runners connected to the planter-frame 
I by a rod, with those portions between the side 
bars of said frame and the runners provided 
with cushions. 
A in the accompanying drawings marks the 
planter-frame, fastened upon an axle, a, sup 
plied with wheels B B, having notches b' in 
the inner edge of the wheel, to receive a brake, 
as hereinafter described. 
Care the openers or runners, upon which the 
seed or corn boxes are supported in the usual 
way, and having the seed or corn slide b. D 
is a lever or bar, with one end pivoted to the 
connecting-piece c between the runners, and 
connected near its other end to the seed-slide b, 
while this end is provided with oblique arms 
dd, with their divergent ends adapted to be 
struck by cams, presently described. 
45. The openers or runners are loosely connect 
led to the planter-frame A by a rod, E, pass 
ing through the same, and held in position by 
... cushions e, supplied between the side bars of 
the frame and the runners. This avoids the 
frictional contact of the parts. 
FF are short shafts or axles supported on 
the frame A, near its forward end, in boxes 
ff, with slots f", which receive adjusting 
screws gig, to permit adjusting the boxes with 
', , 
; so 
75 
The cams G alternately engage the two arms 6o 
the shafts or axles with relation to the driv. 55 
ing-pinions on the wheels. These shafts or 
axles are provided with cams G. G. and with 
pinions h, gearing with pinions i on the driv 
ing-wheels B B. 
d of the lever D, thereby vibrating the seed 
or corn slide and causing the dropping of the 
seed or corn from the seed or corn box. . 
The object of adjusting the shafts F as afore 
said is to permit the isolation of their pinions 65 
from the driving-wheel pinions and the sub 
stitution therefor of sprocket wheels or pulleys, 
to allow the said shafts to be driven by belts. 
His a brake pivoted to the rear corner of 
the frame A, with its handled end resting and to 
acted upon by the spring it. The spring holds 
the brake free of the wheel. 
The forward end of the brake, when its rear 
end is pressed downwardly, is caused to en 
gage one of the notches b' in the edge of the 
wheel nearest to it, and thus be brought forci 
bly down on and brake the wheel while turn 
ing the machine, and to enable the operator 
to drop the seed at uniform distances apart. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a corn-planter, the combination, with 
the cams G on independent shafts F, with 
pinions driven by the driving-wheels, of the 
lever D, connected to the seed-slide, and pro 
vided with oblique arms did, extending be 
tween said cams, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth, 
2. In a corn-planter, the counbination of 
the independent shafts F and their pinions, 9o 
slotted journal-boxes f, and adjusting-screws 
g with the lever Dd, pivoted to a cross-piece 
connecting the runners in front of the seed 
slide, substantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with the planter-frame 95 
A, of the shoes or opener C and rod E, pro- . . 
vided with elastic cushions e between the for 
Wardly-projecting side bars of said frame and 
the runners, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 18th day of 
August, 1879. 
JUNIOR FILLMORE HUDSON. 
Od 
. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID STEVENSON, 
C.A., WAY MIR.E. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224694.txt	M. J0HNS'0'N', 
Hand-Truck, 
 
ATTORNEYS. 
N.PETERs. PHOTO-LTHCGRAPHER, washingtoN, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MOSES JOHNSON, OF LOCKPORT, NEW YORK. 
HAN O TRUCK. 
SPECIFICATION. forming part of Letters Patent No. 224,694, dated February 17, 1880. 
Application filed December 15, 1879. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
To all pho? ?? ??? ???cern : 
Beit known that I, MoSEs JoHNSON, of the 
city of Lockport, in the county of Niagara, in 
the State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements on Hand 
Trucks; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
hand-trucks; and it consists in the combined 
clutch and support or base, the lugs at a and 
c' c', the sharp points c 0 and bb, respectively, 
of the clutch and support, the bolts at a', in 
connection with orifices did, for adjusting the 
length of the arms and leverage of the truck 
to suit the nature of the work or the strength 
of the operator, and in the combination and 
arrangement of the parts, as hereinafter more 
specifically set forth. 
The drawing is a perspective view of a de 
vice embodying my invention. 
The letters A A represent the longitudinal 
sides of a frame or platform, connected by the 
transverse bars b band supported by the ver 
tical standards, to which they are rigidly at 
tached, these standardsee having shoulderse' 
e', upon which rest the longitudinal side pieces. 
The standards furnish the bearings of the axleg, 
and the transverse barb' projects through the 
side pieces, AA, and standards ee. The lon 
gitudinal side pieces are curved to form a con 
cave surface, the better to retain in position 
the article lifted or loaded upon the truck, and 
are pointed at their extreme ends, as shown, 
in order the more securely to grasp or the 
more easily to be slipped under the article to 
be lifted, and their front ends are fashioned 
into handles, as shown at E. They are pro 
vided with the lugs at a, which are pivoted 
thereto by the pins d' d'. 
When articles contained in wooden or solid 
packages are to be lifted the lugs are thrown 
back, and the weight of the articlepressing upon 
the points b b, and the points of the clutch also 
pressing thereon, are alone sufficient to grap 
ple and secure such article upon the truck; 
and when the commodity to be removed is 
contained in sacks, bales, or such material as 
I. ? 
is 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
would be injured by the sharp points afore 
said, the lugs d' d' are thrown forward to cover 5o 
the points, and a smooth surface is thus pre 
sented to the fabric in which such commodity 
is contained. 
The clutch B is provided with the sharp 
points 0 c, for clutching such packages as are 55 
not liable to be thus injured, and also with the 
lugs c' 0", projecting beyond said points, as a 
means of preventing the piercing or injury of 
such bag, bale, or other device as would be 
penetrated by them, and it is arched or curved 6o 
in reverse form to the longitudinal sides of 
the support or base D, thus forming a recess 
between the upper and lower sections of the 
device, the sections being bolted together, as 
shown. The clutch may also be bolted or pro 
jected forward beyond the sharp points of the 
supporting-frame by means of the bolts at a? and 
orifices d' d'. When large cases or boxes are 
to be grappled its longitudinal pieces are also 
rounded or curved downward at the front to 
form the handles FF, which handles, when 
the device is lowered, also serve as feet or 
standards for supporting the load. 
My hand-truck is thus provided with two 
sets of handles, acting as levers of different 75 
force, either set of which may be used at will 
for the intended purpose. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of the longitudinal 
pieces AA, having orifices did, to adjust the 
length of the arms by means of the bolts afa', 
lugs at a, and the clutch BB, having lugs c' c', 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination of the longitudinal side 
pieces, AA, having handles E. E., uprights or 
standards e e, and clutch B B, having han 
dles FF and points cc, substantially as herein 
shown and set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 9o 
two witnesses. 
...  
MOSEs JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
M. C. RICHARDSON, 
J. J. ARNOLD. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224794.txt	J. K. P: PINE. 
Machine for Shaping Cuffs, 
No. 224,794. 
Patented Feb. 24, 188O. 
A / 
o 
Iize 
IN 17, 2 
ZS 
 
 
/72772eases, 
%26 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES K. P. PINE, OF TROY, NEW YORK. 
MACH NE FOR SHAP N G CUFFS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 224,794, dated February 24, 1880. 
Application filed August 2, 1879. 
Sale, 
- 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES. K. P. PINE, of 
Troy, county of Rensselaer and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Machines for Shaping Cuffs, 
of which the following is a specification. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents an end elevation, partly in section, 
of my improved machine for shaping cuffs; 
and Fig. 2 is a sectional side elevation of the 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
spondii)g parts. 
The object of my invention is to furnish a 
machine for shaping linen cuffs in a dry state 
after they have been ironed, so as to dispeise 
with the rolling and banding of the cuffs by 
hand; and the Invention consists of a revolv 
ing shaping-roll, in combination with an end 
less apron or belt that is stretched over guide 
rollers, one at each side of the shaping-roll, 
and kept taut by a third Weighted or spring 
acted lower roller. 
The cuff is tightly pressed 
by the apron against the shaping-roll, and 
shaped by the pressure exerted thereon by the 
roll and apron. 
The journals of both guide-rollers DD are 
laterally adjustable for the purpose of inter 
meshing with the pinion of the shaping-roll, 
to whatever position the latter may be ad 
justed, whether higher or lower, relatively to 
the siderollers. This adjustability of the rolls, 
to which the apron adapts itself automatically, 
admits that any degree of curl or curve may 
be given to the rolls by simply changing the 
relative position of the upper rolls and in 
parting then the required tension to the apron 
by the lower stretching-rolls. 
Referring to the drawings, A. A represent 
the supporting-standards of my improved ma 
chine for shaping cuffs. 
A central shaping 
roll, B, turns in adjustable journal-bearings 
of the standards, while an endless leather 
apron, or belt, C, is pressed against the lower 
part of the roll B by means of guide-rollers D 
D, which are placed symmetrically to the 
shaping-roll B, one at each side thereof. The 
guide-rollers D D turn in side journal-boxes 
of the standards, and are both geared with a 
5o pinion on the end of the shaft of the shaping 
45 
35 
roll, so that by revolving either one of the 
guide-rollers by a hand-crank or power-belt 
the shaping and guide l'ollers are sinultane 
ously revolved, and thereby the shaping-roll 
and the endless apron moved at the same 
speed and in the same direction. The apron 
is stretched taut over the upper guide-rollers 
by a third roller, D', which turns in bearings 
vertically below the shaping-roll, the lower 
roller being acted upon by tightening springs 
or weights D, so as to impart the proper ten 
sion to the apron. 
When a cuff is fed to the shaping-roll and 
apron it is carried forward between the same 
and rolled up or shaped by the joint action 
of the shaping-roll and the bite formed in 
the aproll by the guide-rollers and shaping 
roll. The cuff is thereby curled up, one cuff 
being shaped like the other, so that the cuffs 
can be packed without being rolled up and 
banded by hand, and thereby a considerable 
saving of labor and material is obtained. 
I am aware that an apron or conveyer 
stretched over four rollers, one of which is a 
shaping or molding roller, such as that claimed 
in the patent of Wm. H. Hart, Jr., dated May 
23, 1876, and numbered 177,831, has been used 
heretofore; but in this case only the side 
guide-rollers are adjustable, while the remain 
ing rollers are stationary. This prevents the 
exact adjustment of the rollers and the coln 
venience of adjustment which is the case in 
my machine. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
In a cuff-shaping machine, the combination 
of an endless apron, C, with an adjustable 
shaping-roll, B, laterally adjustable side guide 
rollers, D D, and a lower guided and spring 
actuated stretching-roll, all substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 28th day July, 1879. 
Patent- 
- 
JAMES K. P. PINE. 
Witnesses: 
W.W. KNICKERBOCKER, 
WILLARD W. SEARLE. 
55 
75 
90 
95 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224894.txt	M. FRANK & A. DICKISON, 
Drag-Sawing Machine, 
No. 224,894. 
Patented Feb. 24, 1880. 
R2. &A. 
 
 
INVENTOR: 
(22.2271 
ul-ul-ul-de 
ATTORNEYS, 
NIPETERs, photo- itioGRAPHER, wasHINGTON, D.C. 
r 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
MONROE FRANK AND ALFRED DICKISON, OF BOWLUSVILLE, OHIO. 
DRAG-SAWING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 224,894, dated February 24, 1880. 
- 
Application filed October 31, 1879. 
I5 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, Mon ROE FRANK and 
ALFRED DICKISON, of Bowlusville, in the 
county of Clarke and State of Ohio, have in 
vented a new and Improved Drag - Sawing 
Machine, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
... The object of our invention is to facilitate 
the work of sawing fire-wood. 
o In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan of our improvement. Fig. 2 is a verti 
callongitudinal section of the same, taken on 
linea a of Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 is a cross-section 
of the same, taken on line gy of Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
Referring to the drawings, A A' are upright 
frames supported by base-plates (, al. Frames 
A A' are connected by horizontal side bars, B. 
B. In the inside faces of bars BB are guides 
b b, in which is held the cross-head C. In the 
side uprights, dd, of frame A are grooves d', 
in which are held the edges of slide D. 
E is the saw, stretched in a frame, E'. In the 
upper part of frame E is a round shaft, e, which 
is passed through a hole, e', in slide D, and has 
its ends fastened to saw-frame E'. The saw 
stock f is pivoted to the cross-bar f' of the 
cross-head. A lever, F, fulcrumed at g to 
frame A, is pivoted at h to slide D, so that 
said slide, and with it the saw, can be readily 
raised and lowered by means of said lever, 
Cross-head C is connected by pitman G with 
crank i on shaft H, which carries a balance 
; wheel,i, at one end, and at the opposite end 
a crank, k, which is connected by pitmanl 
with a lever, I, fulcrumed at n. The power 
end of lever I is on the same side and close 
to the power end o of lever F, by which the 
slide D and saw E are raised and lowered, so 
that the operator can manage both levers from 
the same point. 
 
. 
. . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
, 
55 
So 
45 
On the front of uprights did, below saw E, 
are supports pp, on which the log q is placed 
and held by a hook, r, attached to a lever, J, 
fulcrumed at s, and provided with an edge, t, 
to engage ratchet u, so that when the hook 
is drawn down on logg the lever can be se 
cured by causing the edget to engage ratchet it. 
To base-plate at are fixed two supports, v v, 
on each side of the saw E, in such a position 
that the horizontal portions it will be immedi 
ately under the log q on each side of the saw 
cut and support the log as it is being sawed, 
and thus prevent said log from squeezing 
against the saw-blade. 
By means of the lever I a reciprocating mo 
tion is given to cross-head C, and thence to 
saw E. The operator allows the saw to bear 
on the logg by its own weight, or presses it 
down by means of lever F. When the log is 
sawed through, the operator raises the slide D 
and saw E by means of lever F, and by caus-, 
ing the lever F to engage the rack at the saw 
can be held up while the log is being shifted 
or another one placed on supports p. 
The crank-shaft H may be run by steam or 
horse power. 
Baving thus fully described our invention, 
to 
we claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
tel's Patent 
the saw having pro 
jection f and working in the vertical slide D, 
having actuating-lever F, of the slide C, pit 
man G, shaft EI, having cranks ilc and bal 
ance-wheelj, pitman l, and lever I, fulcrumed 
at in, all constructed and arranged as shown 
and described. 
The combination, with the 
75 
MONROE FRANK. 
ALFRED DICKISON. 
Witnesses: 
J. K. ILGES, 
WM. M. ROCKEL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US224994.txt	2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
A, BURGESS, 
Magazine-Gun, 
/ 91,7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N.Peters, Horo-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, b, c, 
| 
 
A. BURGESS. 
Magazine-Gun. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 224,994. 
Patented Mar. 2, 1880. 
 
 
NN 
N; PEERs, photo-urhogRAFHER, wasHINGTON, b.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW BURGESS, OF OWEGO, NEW YORK. 
M A GAZNE- G U N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 224,994, dated March 2, 1880. 
Application filed December 30, 1879. 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
6o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known th?t I, ANDREw BURGESS, of || Zine-spring. 
Owego, county of Tioga, and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Magazine Fire-Arms, of which 
the following, in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification. 
This invention is applicable to various sys 
tems of fire-arms; and it consists, principally, 
in modifications of the loading-traps, bolt and 
carrier, the hand to control the feeding-car 
tridge, and other combinations of parts here 
inafter more fully set forth and described. 
Figure 1 is a sectional side elevation of the 
arm; Fig. 2, a similar view of the other side 
with the breech open. Fig. 3 is a horizontal 
plan or section on the line aca; Fig. 4, another 
horizontal section through the frame, showing 
the hand H of Fig. 2; and Fig. 5 is a view of 
the face of the breech-bolt, showing the pro 
jection B. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A is the frame or receiver of the arm; B, 
the bolt or breech - piece, provided with 
strengthening-ribs D; C, the carrier; T, the 
loading-trap; H, the retaining-hand, and e the 
ejector. 
The trap T is similar to that shown in my 
Patent No. 213,868, excepting the inner in 
clined projection, t t , which I here extend 
back as far as, or still farther than, the rear of 
the opening through the frame, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3; and in lieu of the incline on 
the carrier of said patent I affix an inclined 
projection on the breech-piece or bolt. This 
projection is shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 4. In 
Fig. 3 it is cut off from the bolt and shown in 
the position it occupies when the breech is 
4o closed, which is such that its inclined front b 
is opposite the inclined face of the loading 
trap, and the head of the rear cartridge in the 
magazine rests between and against the in 
clined faces of the trap and bolt, whereby said 
faces retain the cartridges in the magazine, 
and others can be inserted by pressing down 
the trap, as indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 3. 
When said trap is pressed inward its face 
forces the follower or cartridges in the maga 
5o zine forward. In that position the operator 
may at will unload the magazine by allowing 
the cartridges to be forced out by the maga 
The carrier is cut low in front to allow the 
trap T to be pressed in above it, but rises at 55 
c, (opposite the end of inward projection of 
the end of projection t of the carrier.) 
The botton of the face of the bolt is inclined 
upward and forward from the face of the pro 
jection B'. 
The magazine is charged by forcing the car 
tridges forward through the trap, when the 
butt of the last will rest against the inclined 
faces t and b. Then if the bolt be drawn back 
the cartridge will follow in contact with the 65 
face b of the bolt, the face t and projection tt 
of the trap guiding the cartridge against said 
face of the bolt as it moves backward until the 
cartridge reaches rise or incline c on the car 
rier, which forces it up the incline on the face to 
of the bolt, so that on leaving the projection 
t t it will be stopped by the face of the bolt 
above the projection B, and thereby pre 
vented from passing under said bolt or spring 
ing one side after leaving the projection t it'. 
The ejector is operated by the spring et and 
the carrier raised by rear of the projection B', 
which strikes an arm of the carrier, and forced 
down by front of said projection in closing the 
breech. As the carrier raises a cartridge to 8o 
the barrel, as shown in Fig. 2, the hand His 
turned inward and over said cartridge to re 
tain it in position. This hand His hung longi 
tudinally in the frame or in the detachable 
piece H', and pivoted near its rear, its extreme 85 
rear h. entering the frame, as shown in Fig. 5, 
so that when an abutment of the breech-bolt 
strikes the projection h at the extreme open 
ing of the breech it forces the hand to turn on 
its pivot and the long arm through the slot in 9o 
the frame to the position shown in broken lines 
in same figure. 
I prefer to add a spring, h', to retire the long 
arm; but it is not essential in practice. 
It will be observed that the carrier termi- 95 
nates so as to leave considerable space between 
it and the magazine. 
As heretofore constructed, when the carrier 
rises it has to force the next cartridge back by 
an inclined face at the top of the solid part of Ioo 
the carrier. This takes some power near the 
ultimate opening of the breech. I avoid this 
75 
45 
2 
224,994 
by shortening the carrier, as shown in draw 
ings, so that when the cartridge in the carrier 
is ready to rise it stops the next one in the 
magazine ahead of the face of the carrier, so 
said carrier may rise with but very little fric 
tion from said cartridge in the magazine. This 
shortening of the carrier might cause or allow 
the rear of the cartridge to fly up as it is being 
raised and as its point impinges against the 
front wall of the frame; but by inclining the 
face of the bolt forward, as hereinbefore de 
scribed, that danger is avoided. 
In using cartridges without projecting flanges, 
but with a groove for engagement of the ex 
tractor, I employ a stud, S, to spring into said 
groove to hold the cartridge and prevent it 
from entering beyond reach of the firing-pin. 
I prefer to make the stop b on the breech 
bolt with inclined face, as shown; but in lieu 
thereof I use a square stop or spring, attached 
to the bolt in same position, without essentially 
altering the operation of this invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
1. The trap or gate having inclined face, in 
combination with a stop, b, affixed to or car 
ried by the bolt, substantially as specified. 
2. Alongitudinally-reciprocating bolt hav 
ing a face, b, moving with the bolt, and pro 
jecting beneath to stop the cartridge as the 
bolt moves back, in combination with a pro 
jection on or in the opposite side of the frame, 
substantially as specified. 
3. The stop b, moving with the bolt, and the 
inclined face of the bolt above said stop, in . 
combination with the raised portion c of the 
carrier, to guide and control the cartridge, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a magazine fire-arm, a frame open at 
the top, a carrier to raise the cartridge from the 
magazine, and a vibrating hand arranged in the 
frame and operated by the bolt to strike the 
top of the rising cartridge and stop it opposite 
the barrel-chamber, all in combination, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
ANDREW BURGESS, 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. KING, 
J. L. ROWE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225094.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. BENDER, OF CANTON, OHIO. 
RO OFING COMPOST ON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,094, dated March 2, 1880. 
Application filed December 17, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. BENDER, 
of Canton, in the county of Stark and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Roofing Compositions; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sae. 
This invention relates to an improved com 
position to be applied to shingles and other 
roof material for the purpose of rendering 
them water-proof, and also of straightening 
them, if bent or crooked, and retaining them 
in an even shape. 
I have found that finely-comminuted iron 
ore and asphaltum, when mixed in proper por 
tions and at a suitable degree of temperature, 
together with a sufficient quantity of coal-tar 
or gas-tar, enable me to overcome many of the 
difficulties I have met with in using the vari 
ous compositions now known and employed for 
the protection of roofs and similar structures. 
Many of the different iron ores are more or 
less suitable for my purpose; but I find that 
that which is known as the black-band' iron 
ore is the best for the purposes of my im 
proved roofing composition. 
The proportions which I use substantially 
in forming my compound are as follows: One 
part of finely-pulverized iron ore, one part of 
asphaltum, and two parts of coal-tar. When 
applied it is heated to a high degree of tem 
perature, and is then applied with a brush to 
the shingles or other surface to be coated with 
the compound. 
It is well known that the shingles for roof. 
ing will, after a little exposure to the elements, 
warp, crack, and bend up, and be otherwise 
interfered with. I have found that by a proper 
application of the herein-described compound 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
 
45 
55 
the shingles are so affected that they can be 
straightened, and that when the composition 
is applied to them they do not thereafter thus 
warp or bend, and that if the composition be 
applied to them when originally put in place 
it entirely prevents the warping and bending 
that usually occur. 
In order to overcome these difficulties I have 
experimented with all of the compositions that 
I could obtain that have been hitherto in use 
but have never found them to perform the de 
sired work as completely or satisfactorily as 
the composition I have invented and above 
described. 
The composition may be applied to fences, 
posts, and other similarly-exposed structures, 
and will result in a beneficial protection of 
them as well as of roofs, as above described. . 
I am well aware that the elements of my 
improved composition have been used sepa 
rately in various other compositions for roof 
ing, paving, manufacturing artificial Stone, 
cement, &c., and do not wish to be under 
stood as claiming any of these previous com 
positions as my invention; but I believe that 
I am the first to have used the ingredients 
above described in substantially the propor 
tions named and applied in the manner and 
for the purposes cited. 
What I claim as my invention is 
The herein - described roofing composition, 
consisting of finely-comminuted iron ore, as 
phaltum, and coal-tar, in substantially the pro 
portions above named, and for the purposes 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 6th day of 
December, 1879. 
- 
GEORGE W. BENDER. 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
HENRY FISHER, 
ABNER, MICKINLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225194.txt	Z. WILLIAMS, 
Dredging-Machine. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 
Patented Mar. 2, 1880. 
No. 225, 194. 
 
VTESSES 
iVEnTOR 
N. PEERs, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
Z. WILLIAMS, 
Dredging-Machine, 
No. 225,194. 
Patented Mar. 2, 188O. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
72 
72 
Z7 
7. & 
6-e N65. 
12 
a 
m 
Z 
r 
NA - 0 
2-03 
e A 
126 a 
s 
EN 
T 
X 
"7Te N N 
A 
ZN 
NY-(z. 
A SI 7- 
A. | 
e 
T. 
7 
s 
: 
l 
VA 
E - 
7| 2 ||IHF"z 
(2 
RN 
\ 
67 
... 
-u 
/N '2/a 
// 
f? 
e s 
e1 2 
Z7 
MTESSES 
%2, 44.4 %-2 
InvenTOR 
M.Peters, photo-Tiographer, wasiliator, d. c. 
 
Z. WILLIAMS, 
Dredging-Machine. 
No. 225,194. 
Patented Mar. 2, 188O. 
3. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
Z%. 27, 
A/ 
7. 
: 
ty 
w 
2. 
Zf 
t 
56) 
-vo 
asy 
& 
t 
az A. 
A: 
e 
A 
III: 
a 
a. 
A. 
- Z 
27. 
4. 
a 
seas; 
Se 
Z7 
2S2zee 
a - 
v3S 
% 
E721 
Z 
Z 24, 
-64 
sle?2 SN 
S2 
Z 
: 
WITIESSES 
A4%aze 
e 
InvenTOR 
34.4% 
N. PETERs, PHOTO-UTHOGRAPHER, fashiaros, is c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ZEPHANIAH WILLIAMS, OF OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA. 
DREDG ING - MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,194, dated March 2, 1880. 
Application filed August 2, 1879. 
55 
7 O 
75 
the shaft h. (See Fig. 1.) This shaft in at 
To all chon it may concern: 
its ends has bevel-gear wheels n', which en 
Be it known that I, ZEPHANIAEI WILLIAMS, 
gage with wheels p, secured to the lower ends 
of Oakland, in the county of Alameda, and 
of Vertical shafts p'. 
State of California, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Dre?dges; and I 
The sliding frame C, near its top, has fric 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
tion-rollers q, which bear against the exterior 
of the stationary frame B. The frame C, near 
clear, and exact description of the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
its top, has gear-wheels E, formed with sleeves 
n', (see Fig. 1) through which pass the shafts 
in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my inven 
p'. As the frame C is raised or lowered the 
wheels E slide upon the shafts p, but when 
tion; Fig. 2, a rear or back view of the same; 
Fig. 3, a top-plan view taken on line at a of 
said shafts are rotated they carry with them 
the wheels E, which are feathered to grooves 
Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a sectional detail view of the 
disintegrating-box; and Fig. 5, a detail plan 
in the shafts. 
view of the hopper and discharge-spouts. 
The shaft m is provided with a third pulley, 
m", over which passes a belt, m', (see Fig. 1.) 
This invention has relation to dredging-ma 
to a pulley, , upon a shaft, r", by which the 
, chines connected with a suitable SCO W or dredg 
ing-boat; and it has for its object to construct 
shaft is driven. This shaft 
has bearings 
over a discharge-spout, F, (see Fig. 4) and 
an adjustable ladder or frame, over which the 
carries a pulley, G, somewhat large in cir 
bucket-chains are hung, and having the differ 
cumference than the pulley , upon the oppo 
ent sets of chains with their buckets work in 
opposite directions, to equalize the strain, and 
site end of the shaft. 
. From the pulley G. to a pulley, S, passes a 
thus secure greater durability. It also has 
belt, s', for driving the shaft of the pulleys. 
relation to the peculiar Construction of the 
discharge-hopper and disintegrating-box, and 
That portion of the shaft of said pulleys lo 
cated within the disintegrating-box. His pro 
the general details of construction, as will 
vided with a disintegrating-wheel, I. From 
be hereinafter described, and subsequently 
, the front of the stationary frame B projects a 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
hopper, K, inclined downward to a point over 
sents the float or dredge-scow, having rigidly 
the disintegrating-box H, where it branches 
outinto two discharge-spouts, LM. The spouts 
connected thereto a skeleton-frame, B, pro 
project out beyond the sides of the frame B. 
vided with grooves of in its inner faces, and 
The lower end of the hopper K is provided 
arranged at right angles with the scow and 
with trap-doors t, (see Fig. 5,) closing open 
at one end thereof. Within the frame B is 
ings through the hopper; and forward of the 
arranged an elevator-frame, C, having splines 
doors t, at a point where the spouts. LM join 
at sliding in the grooves '' in the frame B, 
the hopper, are gates N. 
carrying upon its sides, top, and bottom 
grooved pulleys a, over which pass chains b, 
When the shaft in is rotated by suitable 
power the shaft n' is also rotated by means of 
said chains having secured to them bucketSD. 
the pulley in on said shaft, connected with the 
The elevator-frame C is provided with racks 
c, to engage with pinions d upon shafts e, said 
pulley in by the belt o. The bevel-wheels n' 
shafts also having bevel-gear wheels f, which 
on the ends of the shaft n' in their rotation 
mesh with the bevel-gears p on the lower ends 
engage with similar wheels g, keyed on a shaft, 
of the shafts p', turning the latter in opposite 
h. The shaft his driven by a belt, i, passing 
directions. The bevel-gears E on the shafts 
over pulley, lc upon said shaft, and over pulley 
p' also turn in opposite directions with said 
l, secured to a shaft, m, by which arrange 
shafts, and engage with the bevel-gears a 
ment of gearing the elevator-frame C is ele 
(see Fig. 1) on the sprocket-wheel shafts o', 
wated or lowered as required. 
thus causing the sprocket-wheels OO (situated 
The shaft in has a pulley, n, over which 
diagonally opposite each other on each side of 
passes a belt, o, to a pulley, n', secured to a 
shaft, n', arranged parallel with and below the frame C) and the chains carrying the buck 
95 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
225,694 
SO 
55 
ets to revolve in opposite directions, so that 
the same amount of strain is caused by the 
buckets in either direction laterally, and there 
by preventing all tendency to twist or turn the 
machine, as would otherwise be the case if 
but one set of lucikets were used. 
P is a hollow float, which is located at or 
near the lower end and in the elevator-frame 
C, and the latter may be adjusted vertically 
by filling the hollow float with water or pump 
ing the same out, thereby raising or lowering 
the frame C. 
By the employment of the hollow adjusta 
ble float P the frame C may be adjusted to the 
depth required for cutting, and in case of a 
hard bottom may be raised therefrom to pre 
vent breakage of the buckets. As the buck 
ets pass over the upper end of the frame C 
the back or door of the bucket is automati 
cally tripped by any suitable tripping mech 
anism, and the contents discharged, the same 
dropping down into the hopper K, and as the 
gates N are open, the contents pass out through 
the spouts L. M.; or should but one mud-scow 
be loaded at a time one of the spouts only is 
used, the other being closed by its gate, which 
forms the wall of the spout. When the mud 
is designed to be conveyed to any distance 
from the scow the trap-doors t are opened, 
and the mud is dropped into the disintegrat 
ing-box H, where the disintegrating-wheel I 
grinds or mixes it with a suitable supply of 
water to allow it to flow freely through con 
ductors to the required distance below the 
level of the discharge-spout F. 
The bridge-trees R at the top and bottom of 
the frame C support the shafts of the chain 
pulleys a. The ends of the bridge-trees are 
supported in elongated slots b (see Fig. 1) in 
the upper ends of the vertical beams of the 
frame C, so that the bridge-trees can be ad 
justed vertically by wedges 2 (see Fig. 1) in 
serted in the slots beneath the bridge-trees, or 
by other equivalent means. 
I am aware that a dredging-machine pro 
vided with a hopper leading into spouts hav 
ing gates has heretofore been employed, and 
I therefore lay no claim to such construction. 
Eaving now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The stationary frame B, provided with 
the shafts e, carrying pinions d and bevel 
gears.f, shaft h, carrying pinions g, shaft in', 
carrying bevel-gears n', and vertical grooved 
shafts p', having bevel-gears p, in combina 
tion with the adjustable frame C, provided 
with racks c, sliding beveled feathered gears 
E, and shafts o', carrying bevel-gears a, where 
by the movable frame may be raised or low 
ered, substantially as described. 
2. The stationary frame B, provided with 
the shafts p', operated as described, in combi 
nation with the movable frame C, having 
shafts o', sprocket-wheels O O, bevel-gears a 
E, grooved pulleys a, chains b, and buckets D, 
Whereby one set of buckets is revolved in an 
opposite direction from the motion of the other 
set, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the scow A and 
stationary frame B, of the adjustable frame C 
and float P, substantially as and for the pur. 
pose specified. 
4. The hopper K, provided with trap-doors 
t, and the spouts L. M., having gates N, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination, with the hopper K, pro 
vided with trap-doors t, of the disintegrating 
box H, arranged below said hopper and hav 
ing the Wheel I, operated by suitable belt and 
pulley, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
6. The elevator-frame C, carrying buckets 
D, in combination with the disintegrating-box 
H and hopper K, provided with the trap 
doors t, the spouts L. M., and the gates N, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
ZEPHANIAH WILLIAMS. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN H. REDSTONE, 
FRANK R. BRAUN. 
75 
85 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225294.txt	J. R. McPHERSON. 
Hydraulio-Elevator. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 225,294. 
Patented Mar. 9, 1880. 
Zzy. Z. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
J. R. MoPHERSON. 
Hydraulic-Elevator, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 225,294. 
Patented Mar. 9, 1880. 
Snass s 
s 
 
2 
2 
2 
Attorney, 
s 
PETERS, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washingro, c.c. 
s 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES R. McPHERSON, OF BELOIT, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
OF HIS RIGHT TO FRANCIS N. DAVIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
HYDRAUC ELEVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,294, dated March 9, 1880. 
Application filed January 27, 1880. 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMEs R. McPHERSON, 
of Beloit, in the county of Rock and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Eydraulic Elevators; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use it, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
hydraulic elevators. 
Eeretofore hydraulic elevators have been 
Constructed in such a manner that when the 
main or lifting cylinder exceeds thirty-three 
feetin height, or the height to which water will 
be forced by atmospheric pressure, the column 
of water in the cylinder in excess of the col 
umn of thirty-three feet in height is not coun 
terbalanced by a reacting column of water, 
but is only displaced by a draft on the head of 
Water employed or the power used to recipro 
cate the piston in raising the cage. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
hydraulic apparatus for elevators in which the 
main or lifting cylinder may be of any desired 
height, either less, or more than thirty-three 
feet in height, and the liquid in the main cyl 
inder subjected to the counterbalancing in 
fluence of independent columns of liquid, one 
of said columns being equal to or less than 
thirty-three feet in height and connecting with 
the discharge-opening, while the other column 
connects with the lower end of the main cyl 
inder and is provided with a tank at its up 
per end, the lower column of water, in con 
nection with the supply in the tank, being 
made to counterbalance the column of water 
in that portion of the main cylinder that is lo 
cated below the discharge-opening of the cyl 
inder irrespective of the length of the cylin 
der, whereby the liquid in the main cylinder 
is always counterbalanced by the independent 
columns of liquid, irrespective of the length or 
height of the main or lifting cylinder; and to 
this end my invention consists, first, in the 
combination, with the main or lifting cylinder 
of a hydraulic elevator, of a discharge-pipe 
or conduit connecting with the upper end of 
the cylinder and extending downwardly a dis 
tance equal to or less than thirty-three feet, 
and a pipe connected with the lower end of 
the main or lifting cylinder and extending up 
wardly, so that its upper end will be practi 
cally in the same horizontal plane with the 
exit-opening of the discharge-pipe, said lower 
pipe having a tank connected with its upper 
end for the reception of water that is forced 
out of the cylinder when the piston is forced 
through its downstroke. 
My invention further consists in certain 
other features of construction and arrange 
ment of parts, as will be hereinafter explained, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view, in perspective, of a hydraulic ele 
vator embodying my improvement. Fig. 2 is 
a vertical section of the lifting-cylinder and 
pipes connecting therewith; and Fig. 3 is a 
modification, representing the arrangement of 
parts when the Water is supplied from a tank 
located in the upper portion of a building. 
The tank may be kept supplied with water 
by any suitable form of pump or forcing ap 
paratus. 
A represents the guideways, and B the cage, 
of an elevator; C, the rope attached to the 
cage, the rope passing over pulleys located in 
the top of the elevator-frame or other suitable 
support, and attached to the upper end of a 
piston-rod, D. 
These several parts may be of ordinary or of 
any approved construction, as I make no claim 
to such parts, my invention being applicable 
to any of the different forms of elevators. 
E represents the main or lifting cylinders, 
which may be of any desired length, and with 
in the same is placed a piston, F, to which is 
secured one end of the piston-rod D. Hence 
it will be readily understood that when the 
piston is forced through its downstroke the 
elevator cage or car is raised, while the up 
ward stroke of the piston allows of the descent 
of the car or cage. 
G is a discharge-pipe, connecting at its up 
per end with the upper end of the lifting-cyl 
inder, the lower end extending down equal to 
or less than thirty-three feet from the top of 
the lifting-cylinder, where it connects with a 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
Vur 
225,294 
75 
95 
Od 
IOS 
IO 
11 5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
valve-casing, H, in which is placed an ordi- valve-casing P is attached the discharge-pipe 
nary three-way valve. 
Q and branch pipe R. 
To the valve-casing H is attached a dis 
The lower end of the lifting-cylinder is fur 
charge-spout, I, which empties into a sewer or 
nished with a pipe, M, and tank N., con 
other receptacle for carrying off the discharge 
structed and arranged to operate in the man 
water. K represents the water-main, and L a 
ner hereinbefore set forth. 
By turning the three-way valve to close the 
pipe connecting there with at one end, while 
discharge, water is admitted from the pipe O 
at the opposite end it connects with the valve 
casing.H. 
leading to the tank, and conducted to the up 
By turning the three-way valve in one di 
per end of the lifting-cylinder, when the press 
rection the port connecting with the discharge 
ure serves to force the piston through its down 
spout is closed, and the water from the main 
stroke and raise the elevator cage or car. By 
or underpressure is allowed to flow up through 
turning the valve to close the supply and open 
the discharge the weight of the cage will 
the discharge-pipe G and into the upper end 
cause it to descend by gravity. 
of the main or lifting cylinder and force the 
A hydraulic elevator embodying my im 
piston through its downstroke, and thus op 
erates to raise the elevator-cage. 
provement is of the most simple and durable 
By turning the three-way valve so as to 
construction, and is perfectly safe and certain 
close both the supply and discharge ports the 
in its operation. 
elevator-cage is securely locked at any point of 
The cage can be regulated in its descent by 
simply varying the position of the valve gov 
its travel, and can only descend by adjusting 
the three-way valve and allowing the water to 
erning the discharge of Water from the upper 
escape through the discharge-opening. 
end of the lifting-cylinder, while the maxi 
To the lower end of the main or lifting cyl 
mum effect of the head or pressure of water is 
insured as the water in the lifting-cylinder is 
inder is connected a pipe, M, which extends 
upwardly to such distance that its upper end, 
counterbalanced by two independent columns 
of Water acting on opposite ends of the cylin 
on, Will be practically on the same level as the 
discharge-opening of the discharge-pipe, while 
der, and hence the cylinder may be made of 
any height desired without necessitating any 
to the upper end of pipe M is secured a water 
additional or complicated mechanism or power 
tank, N. 
As the piston in the lifting-cylinder is forced 
for the perfect and satisfactory operation of 
through its downstroke in raising the elevator 
the elevator. 
cage it operates to displace the water in the 
It is evident that many slight changes 
lifting-cylinder below the piston and forces 
might be resorted to both in details of con 
the water upwardly through the counterbal 
struction and arrangement of parts without de 
ancing-pipe Minto the tank N. The purpose 
parting from the spirit of my invention, and 
of the pipe M and tank N is to counterbalance 
hence I would have it understood that I do 
the column of water in the lifting-cylinder lo 
not restrict myself to the exact construction 
cated below the level of the discharge-open 
and arrangement of parts shown and described; 
ing of the discharge-pipe. In other words, if 
but, 
the discharge-pipe is thirty-threefeet in length, 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
it will serve to counterbalance a column of 
water equal to thirty-three feet in height in 
ters Patent, is 
the upper portion of the lifting - cylinder. 
1. In a hydraulic elevator, the combination, 
with the lifting-cylinder, of a discharge-pipe 
Now, it is often desirable to employ a lifting 
cylinder which will exceed thirty-three feet in 
connecting with the upper end of said cylin 
height, and hence it is desirable to provide 
der and extending downwardly a distance 
means for counterbalancing the column of wa 
equal to or less than thirty-three feet, its lower 
ter in the lifting-cylinder irrespective of its 
end opening to the atmosphere, and a counter 
height, whether it is thirty-three feet or one 
balance-pipe or water-conduit connected with 
hundred feet in height, more or less. This I 
the lower end of the lifting-cylinder, said pipe 
accomplish by providing a separate and inde 
extending upward, so that its upper end will 
pendent pipe, M, connecting with the lower 
be practically on a level with the exit of the 
end of the lifting-cylinder, and providing the 
discharge-pipe, said counterbalance-pipe hav 
upper end of said pipe with a tank, N, the 
ing a tank attached to its upper end, substan 
latter Serving as a Water-receptacle, and also 
tially as set forth. 
operating to confine the head of Water in pipe 
2. In a hydraulic elevator, the combina 
tion, with the lifting-cylinder, of a discharge 
M to practically a uniform level. 
In Fig. 3 I have represented a modified 
pipe connecting with the upper end of said 
form of construction, wherein the supply of 
cylinder, and an independent counterbalance 
water is received from a tank, to which water 
pipe connecting with the lower end of the lift 
may be supplied by a pump located in the up 
ing-cylinder, said pipes being arranged to 
per portion of the building, instead of being 
counterbalance the column of water in the lift 
ing-cylinder irrespective of its length, substan 
taken directly from the water-main. In this 
form of construction O represents the supply. 
tially as set forth. 
pipe, which connects with a valve-casing, P, 
3. The combination, with the lifting-cylin 
in which is placed a three-way valve. To the 
der and a combined supply and discharge pipe 
65 
 
225,294 
3 
lifting-cylinder equal in height to the length of 
the discharge-pipe, and a counterbalance-pipe 
communicating with the opposite end of the 20 
lifting-cylinder and operating to counterbal 
ance the remaining column of water in the lift 
ing-cylinder, said lifting - cylinder extending 
above and below the exit-opening in the dis 
charge-pipe, and the discharge-pipe and coun- 25 
terbalance-pipe being equal in length to that 
of the lifting - cylinder, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand. 
JAMES R. MCPHERSON. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. D. SEYMoUR, 
J. W. HAMILTON JoHNSON. 
communicating with the upper end of the lift 
ing-cylinder, said supply and discharge pipe 
having a three-way valve connected there with 
for opening the supply and closing the dis 
charge, or closing the supply and opening the 
discharge, or closing both the supply and dis 
charge, of an independent counterbalance pipe 
and tank communicating with the lower end 
of the lifting-cylinder, and adapted to coun 
terbalance the column of water in the lifting 
cylinder located below the exit-opening of the 
discharge-pipe, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the lifting-cylin 
der of a hydraulic elevator, of a pipe commu 
nicating with one end of said cylinder and 
serving as a discharge-pipe, and also operating 
to counterbalance a column of Water in the 
Io 
IS 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225394.txt	C. La DOW, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1 
No. 225,394. 
Wheel-Harrow. 
- 
Patented Mar. 9, 1880. 
72 (2. e?see. 
Azzs 4%reg s 
Care Az Zow 
AvvZav7 oA. 
 
MPETERs, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D.C. 
C. La DOW. 
Wheel-Harrow, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 225,394. 
Patented Mar. 9, 188o. 
 
III 
se1, . 
I 
ILL 
M77/wassas, 
% co, af46.s 
c, 2% (2-e 
p 
Mwawroa. 
2, a ze. * * * 
sessival. re 
Q Y. 
 
 
 
Rs. Photo-LTHogRAPHER, washington, D.c. 
es 
 
No. 225,394. 
M777vassa S. 
2 &aza242 
C. 
 
 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
C La DOW. 
Wheel-Harrow. 
Patented Mar. 9, 1880. 
2 % 2 % al 
SS 
2 
Ay his 47/orveezs 
Mwaw704. 
21 es Zz Aote: 
C2a2aes, 
Rao wors 
Peters, Phoro-lithogRAPHER, WAshingtoN, o, C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES LA DOW, OF ALBANY, NEW YORK. 
WHEEL - HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,894, dated March 9, 1880. 
Application filed November 4, 1879 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs L.A. Dow, of 
the city and county of Albany, in the State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Wheel-Barrows, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention more especially relates to 
wheel-harrows of the class having wheel or 
disk gangs attached in sets to a draft-connec 
tion, main frame, or carrying-frame in such 
manner as to admit of lateral swing or play of 
the disk-gangs relatively to the line of draft, 
as well as the ordinary vertical or lateral ad 
justments usual in such machines. 
First. The first part of my invention relates 
to the mode of connecting the disk-gangs with 
the main frame. Its objects are to regulate 
the pressure of the former upon the ground 
and to give the mechanism the capacity of 
rising and falling freely relatively to the main 
frame when desired, which end I attain by 
mounting the disk-gangs on a supplementary 
frame suspended from the main frame by 
means of lifting-levers, detents, and rigid but 
adjustable link-rods, which, when clamped, 
bear upon the disk-gangs, but when loose allow 
the disk-gangs to play up and down freely 
irrespective of the main frame. 
Second. The next part of my invention re 
lates to the driver's seat. Its object is to util 
ize the weight of the driver in forcing the 
disks into the ground, which end I attain by 
mounting the driver's seat on the laterally 
35 swinging frame which carries the disk-gangs 
instead of upon the main or carrying frame. 
Third. My improvement further consists in 
combining a main frame, a supplementary 
frame adjustable in width, a driver's seat, and 
pivoted standards interposed between the seat 
and supplementary frame, to compensate the 
adjustment of the latter. 
Fourth. The next part of my invention re 
lates to the method of adjusting the disk 
gangs relatively to the line of draft, its special 
object being to limit the turning or angular 
movement of the disk-gang relatively to the 
line of draft, which end I attain by combining 
with the disk-gang-adjusting mechanism a stop 
to limit said turning movement. 
Fifth. The object of the next part of my in 
vention is to insure the harmonious co-opera 
tion of the disk-gangs, so that when one set 
varies its angle to the line of draft the other 
set is correspondingly varied, which end I at 
tain by combining the angle-adjusting mech 
anism of each set of disks with an interposed 
rocking lever, so that the movement of one set 
is transferred to the other by said lever. 
Sixth. The object of the next part of my in 
vention is to enable this angle-adjusting appa 
ratus to adapt itself to the varying widths of 
the frame by which it is carried, which end I 
attain by mounting the interposed rocking le 
wer above mentioned upon links pivoted to 
the side beams of said frame. 
Seventh. The object of the next part of my 
invention is to enable the driver, while in his 
seat, to regulate the angle of either disk-gang 
relatively to the line of draft without disturb 
ing the adjustment of the other gang, which 
end I attain by connecting the crank arm or 
plate on the rocking standard of the disk 
gang and the link connecting said plate with 
the interposed rocking lever above mentioned 
by means of an adjustable connection within 
easy reach of and controlled by the driver. 
Eighth. The object of the next part of my 
invention is to enable the driver to employ his 
feet in varying or controlling the angular re 
lation of the disk-gangs to the line of draft, 
and to place such mechanism within conven 
ient reach of the driver, notwithstanding 
variations in the width of the supporting-frame, 
which ends I attain by combining the rock 
ing standard of the disk-gang with the foot 
crank by means of an adjustable clamp, which 
permits the relation of the foot-crank relatively 
to the disk-gangs to be varied. 
Ninth. The next part of my invention relates 
to the method of mounting the disk - gang 
shafts on their supporting-yokes. Its object 
is to vary the inclination of the disk-gang 
shaft horizontally and transversely to the line . - 
of draft, which end I attain by mounting the 
disk-gangs on an adjustable sectional support 
ing-yoke provided with clamps to hold the 
parts in the desired position. 
Tenth. The next part of my invention relates 
to the mechanism for cultivating the Spaces 
between the disk-gangs. Its object is to pro 
vide said space with a rake or rakes the teeth. 
of which can be set at varying angles of in 
4O. 
45 
SO 
55 
95 
OO 
2 
225,394 
75 
O 
is 
2O 
as 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
5O 
55 
clination, as desired, which end I attain by justable bearings b b' in each side of the main 
mounting an axially turning or adjustable rake 
frame in usual well-known ways. 
By this mode of construction it is obvious 
on a shield suspended from the frame so as to 
that the distance apart of the wheels can read 
project therefrom transversely to the line of 
ily be varied to suit different widths of the 
draft. 
rows of plants to be cultivated. 
Eleventh. My improvement further consists 
In order to carry out the next part of my 
in combining the rakes, the shields, and the 
invention, the main or carrying frame is pref. 
disk-gangs with the vertically-adjustable lat 
erably made V-shaped, and consists, in this 
erally-swinging frame. 
instance, of two beams, c c', connected at their 
Twelfth. The object of the next part of my 
rear ends with the sectional axle above de 
invention is so to organize the apparatus as 
scribed, and converging to the front, where 
to utilize the weight of the driver in counter 
they are united by a cross brace or strap, c. 
balancing that of the disk - gangs upon the 
Brace-rods b b, connected at their rear ends 
main axle, which ends I attain by pivoting the 
with their respective crank-axles, are provided 
swinging frame to the main frame in front of 
on their front ends with eyes fitted over screw 
the axle, suspending the disk-gangs from the 
bolts b b, adjustable backward and forward 
swinging frame in front of the axle, and mount 
in slots in the sides of the frame in the usual 
ing the driver's seat on said frame in rear of 
well-known ways. 
the axle. 
By this mode of construction varying ad 
. The accompanying drawings represent all 
justments of the distance apart of the carry 
my improvements as embodied in one machine 
ing-wheels are compensated, at the same time 
in the best way now known to me. Obvious 
that the parts, when thus adjusted, are se 
ly, however, the details of construction of the 
curely held against working strains. 
several parts may be varied in various equiva 
I mount a draft-evener yoke, D, on a neck 
lent well-known ways without departing from 
yoke, E, swiveled to the front end of the frame 
the spirit of my invention. Some of the parts 
in the usual way by means of a swivel, e, and 
may also be used without the others, and in 
connect the evener-yoke by link-rods did with 
machines differing in construction from that 
the usual draft - equalizing levers D'D', to 
herein shown. 
which the whiffletrees are attached, as usual. 
Figure 1 represents a view, in elevation, of 
These levers D' D ordinarily are attached to 
one side of the machine, with the inner driv 
the main or carrying frame; but I have shown 
ing-wheel removed to show the other parts 
them as mounted on the swinging frame which 
more clearly. Fig. 2 represents a vertical lon 
carries the disk-gang. 
gitudinal central section through the machine 
In order to carry out the next part of my 
on the line 22 of Fig. 4. Fig. 3 represents a 
invention, I mount the disk-gangs FF on a 
rear elevation of the machine with the seat 
supplementary swinging frame, which frame, 
removed. Fig. 4 represents a plan or top view 
in this instance, is shown as consisting, essen 
thereof. Fig.5 represents a similar view with 
tially, of two diverging beams, G. G', connected 
portions of the mechanism removed to show 
by a hook and eye (or other well-known form 
the parts beneath more clearly. The dotted 
of swiveling joint) with the main frame, or 
lines represent some of the adjustments of 
with the cross-bar c in the front end thereof. 
which the machine is capable. Fig. 6 repre 
These beams flare or diverge laterally back 
sents a Vertical transverse section through one 
ward, and are connected at a point intermedi 
of the disk-gangs and the mechanism which 
ate of their length with the usual U-shaped 
connects it with the swinging frame, showing 
yoke G?, upon the horizontal arms of which 
the details of construction of the various 
they are capable of sliding to adjust them 
parts. Fig. 7 represents a vertical transverse 
nearer to or farther from each other, and are 
section through one of the disk - shafts, its 
clamped by means of hasps or loops and 
thimbles, and supporting-yoke, showing the 
screws or other well-known means. I sus 
details of construction. Fig. S represents a 
pend this supplementary frame from the main 
plan or top view of a portion of one of the 
or carrying frame by means of links J, piv 
shifting-levers. Fig.9 represents an end view 
oted to lifting-levers I I, provided with sec 
of one of the disk-shafts and locking-washers 
tor-racks and detents of Well-known construc 
for securing the disks in position; and Fig. 
tion, or otherequivalent means to hold them at 
10 represents a plan or top view of one of the 
the desired elevation. These links prefera 
adjusting-plates of the disk-supporting shaft 
bly are made in sections j j', having the ca 
or standard. 
pacity of sliding past each other and being 
In order to carry out the first part of my in 
provided with elongated slots, through which 
Vention, two main or carrying wheels, A A', 
screw-bolts.jpass. (See Fig.1.) 
are shown as being each mounted on its re 
By this method of construction the pressure 
spective bent or crank axle BB, the inner end 
of the supplementary frame, and consequently, 
of which extends across the machine, so that 
of the disks, upon the ground can be regulated, 
the central portions of the axle overlap each 
and by releasing the screw-bolts the connec 
other, and their ends, in fact, in this instance, 
tion becomes a flexible one and permits the 
extend beyond the opposite side of the main 
supplementaly frame freely to rise and fall. 
carrying or supporting frame, each section be 
The same result can be attained by making the 
ing securely held in adjustable clamps or ad 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
125 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
So 
55 
225,394 
3 
75 
links Jinone piece and providing slots in them, 
through which set-screws on this lifting-lever 
may pass; or the slots might be on the levers 
and the screw-bolts on the links. I also pivot 
these links at their lower ends to the standards 
KK", which carry the disk-gangs FF', and at 
their upper ends to the lifting-levers by joints 
which admit of lateral play, and so organize 
the links in relation to the timbers of the main 
or carrying frame that the latter act as stops to 
limit the lateral vibrations of the gang-frames. 
In order to carry out the next part of my in 
vention, Imount the driver's seat M upon stand 
ards in m', pivoted to it at one end and to the 
rear ends of the beams of the supplementary 
frame at the other, whereby the weight of the 
driver is thrown directly upon the supplement 
ary frame, and consequently upon the disk 
gangs, and the driver's seat readily adapts it 
self to the varying distances between the seat 
and supplementary frame-beams to compensate 
for varying adjustments of the width of the 
supplementary frame. 
In order to carry out the next part of my in 
vention, I mount the disk-gangs upon hori 
Zontally-rocking posts or standards KK, piv 
oted on the supplementary frame by means of 
sleeves k k', secured thereto, through which 
sleeves the standards pass, (see Fig.6,) whereby 
the lateral shift of the plows is controlled by 
varying their angle relatively to the line of 
draft while working in the ground, in contra 
distinction to moving them laterally bodily. 
above or through the ground, as heretofore has 
been customary. These rocking standards 
are also provided with crank-plates NN, con 
nected, by links in n', with a rocking lever, O, 
controlled by stops o o' to limit its range of 
movement, and consequently the play or angu 
lar adjustment of the disk-gangs relatively to 
the line of draft. These stops are made adjusta 
ble on the side beams of the swinging frame 
by slots and set-screws or other well-known 
ways, in order to vary the rocking of the disks. 
In order to carry out the next part of my in 
vention, I connect each disk-gang standard, 
by means of a crank plate or arm, N N', and 
link-rod in n', with a compensating or rocking 
lever, O, so that the relation of one disk-gang 
to the line of draft may be controlled by the 
other, and thus equalize their pressure on the 
ground when working in a straight line, and 
also cause one gang to assist the other in 
swerving around a hill of plants out of line in 
the row. 
In order to carry out the next part of my in 
vention, I mount the rocking lever O (which 
equalizes the angular relation of the disk-gangs 
to the line of draft) upon links o 0, pivoted 
on the supplementary frame, by which mode 
of construction the rocking lever adapts itself 
to the varying distances betweentheside beams 
of the supplementary frame as the distances 
between the disk-gangs is varied. 
In order to carry out the next part of my 
invention, I arrange the crank-plates of the the thimble-box. 
disk-gang standards so as to be within easy 
reach of the driver from his seat, and provide 
them with numerous holes, in any one of which 
the link-rod may be inserted, and thus vary y 7o 
the angle of the disk post or standard rela 
tively to the line of draft from which the rock 
ing movement of the disk-gangs starts. The 
same adjustment might be effected by a slot 
and set-screws. 
In order to carry out the next part of my 
invention, I mount upon the rocking disk-gang 
standard a foot-crank, P, and connect the two 
by a rose-clamp-that is, two radially-notched 
surfaces pressed together by a screw-or other 
well-known adjustable connection which will 
admit of the angular relation between the disk 
gangs, and this actuating foot-crank being 
changed to compensate their varying relation 
to the driver's seat as their distance there 
from is varied. A swinging foot-piece, p, piv 
oted on the foot-crank, can be turned and set 
into the position most convenient for the 
driver's foot, or it may follow the motion of 
the driver's foot, if desired. 
In order to carry out the next part of my 
invention, I mount the disk-gangs upon yokes 
the arms or branches I of which are com 
posed of sections sliding past each other and 
controlled by set-screws, (see Fig.1) by which 
means the horizontal inclination of the gang 
shaft transversely to the line of draft may be 
varied horizontally. I pivot upon each beam 
of the supplementary frame a shield, Q, ver 
tically adjustable and movable laterally there 
with. Each shield, it will be observed, is piv 
oted to its respective side beam of the swing 
ing frame, and is adjustable there with. By 
this method of construction the disks roll the 
earth up under the shields and so grind and 
riddle or sift it against the edge of the shields 
and assist in pulverizing the soil around the 
hills. Shovels in combination with shields 
cannot do this. 
In order to carry out the next part of my 
invention, I mount upon these vertically-ad 
justable laterally-shifting shields rakes R., pro 
jecting inwardly transversely therefrom and 
made capable of turning axially in well-known 
ways, in order that their teeth may be set to 
run at different heights above the ground, as 
desired. 
In order to carry out the next part of my 
invention, I so organize the machine that the 
disk-gangs are hung in front of the main axle, 
while the driver's seat extends behind it, thus 
balancing the Weight of the gangs by the 
weight of the driver. Figs. 1 and 2 show this 
organization so clearly as to render further 
description unnecessary. 
I provide each thimble-box S with an oil 
chalmber, s, extending around a thimble, s, 
inclosing the gang-shaft T, and with an annu 
lar fin, S', on the thimble inclosing said shaft, 
which fin serves at the same time to distrib 
ute the oil and prevent the lateral pressure of 
the thimbles or the disks against the end of 
In order to carry out the next part of my 
95 
I 25 
II5 
IOO 
lo5 
O 
 
4 
225,394 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
invention, I provide a thimble, a thimble-box, 
S, turning loosely on the disk-shaft T, with a 
groove, t, into which a lug, t, on the yoke k", 
which sustains the disk-gang, enters to pre 
vent the turning over or reversal of the oil 
cup by the rotation of the disks on their shafts. 
(See Fig. 7.) 
In order to carry out the next part of my 
invention, I provide a groove, t, on the disk 
gang shaft T, with an inwardly-projecting 
feather, u, on the washer, which is interposed 
between the disk W and the nut 0, which 
clamps it on its shaft, thus preventing any 
movement of the washer independent of the 
shaft, and consequently any tendency to un 
screw the nut from the shaft. 
The disk-gang shaft is provided at one end 
with an enlarged head, against which one of 
the disks abuts. A flanged thimble, s, of 
usual well-known construction, is then slipped 
upon this shaft and followed by another disk. 
A similar thimble is then placed on the shaft 
and the thimble-box S is slipped upon it. 
Another disk is then slipped upon the shaft, 
the outer end of which shaft is provided with 
a notch, groove, or recess, t, and all annular 
washer provided with an inwardly-projecting 
feather, corresponding with the notch or re 
cess above described, is then slipped on the 
shaft next the disk, and the parts are all firmly 
clamped together by means of an ordinary nut 
and screw. 
This is the construction shown in the draw 
ings, particularly in Fig. 6, three disks being 
shown in each gang; but the number of disks 
in each gang may obviously be increased or 
Fig. 6 
diminished as circumstances require. 
also shows one oil-box only; but a initia 
vice could readily be applied between each set 
of disks. The disks shown are of the ordi 
nary concavo-convex, solid, or plate-wheel type. 
The disk - gangs, under the organization 
above specified, have the capacity of swing 
ing laterally above ground, as usual with disk 
gangs of this class; but I prefer to shift them 
laterally when working by changing their an 
gle relatively to the line of draft, and thus 
shift them by the lateral pressure due to the 
progressive motion of the machine, for which 
mode of operation the machine is specially 
designed. 
The mode of operation of my improved ma 
chine and the advantages attained by the or. 
ganization of the mechanism therein recorded 
will be obvious to those skilled in the art 
from the foregoing description without fur 
ther explanation. 
I do not broadly claim herein laterally 
SWinging disk-gangs, nor gangs adjustable 
relatively to the line of draft, but limit my 
claims to the organizations of instrumentali 
ties substantially such as are herein specified. 
I claim as of my own invention 
1. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the main frame, the sup 
plementary swinging frame, the disk-gangs 
mounted thereon, the lifting-levers and their 
detents on the main frame, and the slotted 
sectional link-rods, having set - screws con 
necting the disk-gangs and levers, whereby 
the supplementary frame may be left free to 
rise vertically or may be held rigidly in any 
desired position. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the main wheel-frame, the 
supplementary swinging frame, the disk-gangs 
mounted thereon, lifting mechanism, substan 
tially such as described, mounted on the main 
frame, and the driver's seat mounted on the 
laterally-swinging disk-frame to increase the 
pressure upon the disk-gangs. 
3. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the main frame, the sup 
plementary frame, adjustable in width, the 
driver's seat, and the pivoted standards inter 
posed between the seat and frame to compen 
sate its adjustments. 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a disk-gang, its standard, 
a sleeve in which it rocks, a crank plate or 
arm on the disk-gang standard, a rocking le 
ver, a link connecting the crank-arm and lever, 
and a stop to limit the movement of the lever. 
5. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the disk-gangs, their rock 
ing standards, crank-arms, and links, with the 
rocking lever, whereby the disk-gangs move 
in harmony when changing their angle rela 
tively to their line of draft. 
6. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the laterally-adjustable 
swinging frame-beams, the disk-gangs mounted 
in sets, each set on its respective beam, the 
rocking standards, their crank-arms, links, 
and rocking lever, the latter being connected 
by pivoted links to the side beams to compen 
sate adjustments of their distance apart. 
7. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the rocking disk-gang 
standard, its crank arm or plate, the link con 
necting it with the rocking lever, and the ad 
iustable connection between the crank - arm 
and link-rod, to enable the driver, while in his 
seat, to vary the alagular relation between the 
disk-gangs and line of draft. 
8. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a disk-gang, its rocking 
standard, a foot-crank to rock the standard to 
vary the angle of the disk-gang relatively to 
the line of draft, and an adjusting-claimp con 
necting the rocking standard and foot-crank, 
to compensate adjustments in the width of the 
Supporting-frame and to maintain a proper 
relation to the driver's seat. 
9. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the disk-gangshaft or thim 
ble and the adjustable sectional supporting 
yoke to vary the inclination of the disk-gang 
shaft horizontally and transversely to the line 
of draft. 
10. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of the axially-turning rakes 
and the shields in which they are mounted. 
11. The combination, substantially as here 
75 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
 
225,394 , 
- 
5 
the swinging frame in the rear of the axle, Io 
whereby the weight of the driver counterbal 
ances that of the disk-gangs. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name. 
CHARLES LA DOW. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. C. LEE, 
J. J. JANSEN. 
inbefore set forth, of the laterally-swinging 
frame with the disk-gangs, the shields, and 
the rakes, all carried thereby. 
12. The combination, substantially as here 
5 in before set forth, of the main axle, the main 
frame mounted therein, the swinging frame 
pivoted to the main frame in front of the axle, 
the disk-gangs hung from the swinging frame 
in front of the axle, and the driver's seat on 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225494.txt	D. W. SIPRELL. 
Coal- Mining Machine. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 225,494. 
Patented Mar. 16, 1880. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
vii 
www.esses. 
N. PETERs, photo-urhogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
- 
D. W. SIPRELL. 
CO al-Mining Machine. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 225,494, 
Patented Mar. 16, 1880. 
 
CSi 
i 
S 
S S 
S 
 
as 
or 
f 
w : 
Assa 
IIII 
At A (5. (N 
1. s 8 
- r 
Y. 
SM425.26 
ges 
w 
w 
 
 
 
 
SS, 
 
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
Wwesses, 
Swealou. 
N, PETERs, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, wash.INGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DARIUS W. SIPRELL, OF CANAL DOVER, OFIO, ASSIGNOR TO OHIO COAL 
MINING AUGER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
COAL-M IN ING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,494, dated March 16, 1880. 
Application filed December 2, 1879. 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAR.LUs W. SIPRELL, 
of Canal Dover, in the county of Tuscarawas 
and State of Ohio, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Coal-Mining Machines; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation. Fig. 2 is a 
front view, partly in section. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tion aty y. Fig. 4 is a detached view of the 
auger. Fig. 5 is a view of the lower half of 
the threaded ball of the nut. Figs. 6, 7, and 
8 are views of a modification. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in each. 
My invention consists of certain improve 
ments in the construction of coal-drilling ma 
chines. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will now describe its 
construction and mode of operation. 
Augers of this class are supported upon an 
extensible standard, which not only sustains 
the auger, but affords a resistance or brace 
against which the pressure of the tool in boring 
comes. As heretofore made, these standards 
have, as far as my observation has extended, 
been made straight, so that when braced be 
tween the roof and floor of the mine aid the 
pressure of the boring-tool is brought upon 
them they have a tendency to bow out in the 
middle, and consequently to shorten its length 
and slip from their bearing either above or 
below. 
To remedy this defect I have made my 
standard a of curved form, as shown. 
When 
in use the convex side is turned toward the 
face of the wall to be drilled, so that the bear. 
ing of the drill shall be against that side, and, 
instead of loosening the standard, shall, by 
reducing its curve, lengthenit and cause it to 
be more tightly braced. The legs at are tubu 
lar, and the extension part, placed at the 
upper end, is formed of a cross-head, b, hav 
ing curved rods b', which slide inside of the 
hollow legs af, and the desired adjustment is 
secured by means of the set-screws and clamps 
c c', working through the upper ends of the legs 
a' against the rods b/. In the cross-head b is 
a screw-rod, d, having a spur or point, d, on 
the upper end, which, biting into the roof of 
the pit, gives the upper bearing of the stand 
ard. The lower ends of the legs at are fitted 
with like spurs or points at', to prevent them 
from slipping. 
The threaded nute, which sustains and feeds 
the auger, is supported on the standard at by 
the trunnions e'. 
It is desirable to be able to move the auger 
stem and bearing up and down on the stand 
ard at Will. To accomplish this I secure the 
nut to the standard by means of sleevesf, one 
on each side, held in place by Wedge-shaped 
keys f', working in counterpart recesses in the 
sleeves, the large end of the wedge, as shown 
in the drawings, being downward. When the 
keys are driven downward the sleeves are 
loosened and may be moved up and down; 
but when the keys are driven upward the 
sleeves are locked firmly in position. 
The nute is what I term a ball-and-socket' 
nut. It is composed of a shell, e, and a ball, 
g. The shell is made in halves, hinged together 
at one end, so as to be opened when desired, 
and secured by a pin through holes e' in the 
lugs at the other end. It has pivotal side 
bearings, formed by the trunnions 6', passing 
through the ears f' of the sleeves f, and se 
cured therein by nuts. In each half of the 
shell is one half of the ball g, each secured in 
its shell by a stem, g, passing through a large 
hole in the shell and prevented from escaping 
therefrom, but permitted to move freely therein 
by a button or head, g'. 
The two halves are secured together by the 
closing of the shell e', and they are prevented 
from slipping or moving laterally upon each 
other by tongues on the ends of one fitting in 
grooves in the ends of the other. This con 
struction permits the auger-stem to have a 
lateral pivotal movement in the nute, so that 
it may be directed to any point within a lim 
ited lateral range over the rock in front. The 
pivotal bearings e?' permit a straight vertical 
range of the auger. 
95 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
 
225,494 
IO 
25 
5 socket at the front end. 
The stem h of the auger is a rod, upon which 
the threaded sleeve i, which feeds the auger, is 
mounted. It is fitted with a crank, h, at the 
rear end and a square or other shaped hub or 
Heretofore threaded sleeves have been se 
cured rigidly to the stem by a clamp or set 
screw working directly on the rod; but this 
rigid attachment is objectionable, owing to 
the fact that the vibration of the rod causes. 
the straining of the threads of the sleeve. To 
obviate this I secure the sleeve to the rod by 
means of a clamp-clutch, k, which is held in 
position on the rod by the set-screw k'. 
The sleeve is provided with a collar, i, the 
end of which is provided with sockets i', for 
the reception of the headed clutch k, so that 
when the clutch is clamped to the rod and en 
gaged with the sleeve the latter is secured to 
the rod and must turn with it. 
The sleeve i is loose and slides freely on the 
rod unless clamped thereto. It has therefore 
a slight springy action, due to its looseness 
and method of attachment, which is sufficient 
to take up or neutralize the effect of the vibra 
tion of the rod, and so prevent it from strain 
ing the thread. 
The auger n is made in sections, preferably 
of about two feet in length, which are secured 
together and to the rod h by a box, pin, and 
key, 
n'. It has a central stem, m', and a 
single thread, m', which, as the auger always 
extends to the end of the bore, has a continu 
ous draft upon the borings, carrying them 
back and out, and keeping the hole clear and 
unobstructed. This form of auger makes an 
extremely strong, easy-working, and desirable 
tool, 
The augers known to me heretofore were 
made either by twisting or by coiling a bar of 
metal, and they were objectionable, either on 
account of their springiness or weakness and 
of their failure to keep the bore clear and un 
obstructed. These objections are obviated by 
my improved form, in which the solid strong 
stem prevents springiness and weakness, and, 
in connection with the broad single thread, 
keeps the bore clear and unobstructed. 
The bit 0 is provided with a central point, 
p, and a spirally bent or curved forked knife, 
q. The point p being in advance of the knife 
acts as a leading point to it by penetrating 
the coal and making a drift, so that the effect 
of the circular cutting action of the knife is 
to split off fragments of the rock, the frac 
tures running inward toward the central bore. 
My experience with plain-edged knives has 
been that the edge is speedily dulled or turned. 
I avoid this by forking or bifurcating the cut 
6o ting-edge of the knife, forming two sharp 
points with intermediate retreating edges. 
My experience with this knife is, that the 
points sink instantly in the coal and are not 
turned or speedily dulled, and also that they 
65 are especially useful in connection with a lead 
So 
55 
45 
35 
ing central point, such as p, because of having 
a wedge-like action in separating fragments 
inward toward the hole or drift formed thereby. 
The knives p and q are secured in the bit, 
preferably by holes or mortises, such as o'. 
The operation of my...improved device is as 
follows: The standard is set up and braced by 
means of the screw d, with the spurred feet 
planted in the floor of the mine and the upper 
end in the roof or wall. The first section of 75 
auger, having the bit, is fastened to the stem, 
and the latter placed in the nut. The boring 
then begins, and continues until the first sec 
tion of auger is buried in the rock. The nut 
is then opened, and the stem detached from the 
auger and set back in the nut. Another sec 
tion of auger is fastened to the first section 
and to the stem, and the boring continued 
until finished, as many sections being advanced 
to the auger as may be necessary. 
It is evident that the exact construction and 
form of many of the parts may be changed 
without departure from my invention. For 
instance, the curved form of standard is as 
useful with a solidas with an extensible Stand 
ard, and I design to apply it thereto. The 
extension end b may have tubular legs sliding 
over the legs of the standard, which may be 
solid. The forms of the pivotal bearings e', 
the sleeves f, the keys f", and of many other 
parts of my machine may be varied by the 
skilled mechanic. 
Some parts of these machines wear out 
speedily, especially the bit and the nut. By 
my construction these parts can be easily and 
cheaply replaced. In the case of the nut, the 
ball is the only part that will wear rapidly, 
and it can be taken out and replaced by a 
new one without the loss or injury of the shell 
and trunnions. 
A modified construction is shown in Fig. 6, 
which is especially adapted for use in boring 
parallel to the face of the rock, in which posi 
tion the crank cannot be used on the end of 
the rod, as it strikes against the face of the IIo 
rock. 
It will be noticed that there are here two 
cranks, ), one on each side, and that they are 
connected by miter-wheels r" with the wheel t 
on the collart, which rests in a bed, t', in the 
frame it, and is there held by the cap and 
latch t'. The bore of the collart is polygonal 
in shape, and the purpose of this is to cause 
it to turn the sleeve, v, which at one end is of 
corresponding external form. At the other I2O 
end the sleeve is threaded for the purpose of 
feeding the auger, the stem of which is in 
serted into it, and fastened there by the set 
screw '. The threaded nut at is at the for 
Ward end of the frame t, and is in two parts I25 
hinged together, the open ends being closed 
by a pin, 0'. This apparatus is mounted on 
the standard by the trunnions a, to which they 
are hooked at ac'. 
IIS 
95 
IOO 
It is not necessary to have both of the cranks I3o 
225,494 
3 
3. The auger-stem and loose-threaded sleeve, I5 
in combination with the clutch for securing 
the sleeve to the stem, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
4. A mining - auger bit having a central 
leading-point and an outer bifurcated knife 2 o 
Orcutter, substantially as and for the purposes. 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I, the sail DARIUs 
W. SIPRELL, have hereunto set my hand. 
DARUS W. SIPRELL. 
Witnesses: 
R. E. WHITTLESEY, 
T. B. KERR. 
", as under ordinary circumstances one is all 
that is required or used. 
By throwing open the capt' and the nut no 
the sleeve and collar t may be removed. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The curved standard or auger-support 
for coal-mining machines, either with or with 
out an extensible end, substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
2. The ball-and-socket nut having an outer 
shell, and a movable nut or screw bearing in 
the shell, Substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
d 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225594.txt	J. H. GUEST, 
Electric-Lamp. 
No. 225,594. 
Patented Mar. 16, 1880. 
A z/ 7. 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR: 
TTORNEYS. 
 
N, PETERs, photo-LithographER, WASHINGTON, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. GUEST, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
ELECTRIC LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,594, dated March 16, 1880. 
Application filed January 9, 1880. 
It will be seen that the mercury in the bulbs 
e forms a liquid seal that prevents the air en 
tering the chambel A along the joint between 
the glass and wire when the joint is opened by 
the unequal expansion of the glass and metal. 
By this means the clhamber may be retained 
exhausted of air as loung as required. 
I do not limit myself to the chamber in the 
form exactly as shown, as it may be made in any 
suitable form, and the mercury-bulbs placed in 
any desired position. 
In Fig. 3 a modification is shown wherein 
the mercury seal is above the carbon in the 
chamber d, that is divided by a partition, d. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
elt 
1. In electric lamps, the exhausted chamber 
A, formed with the bulbs e at the entering 
point of the wires, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
2. In electric lamps, the combination, with 
the exhausted chamber A and wires at b, that 
are in continuous electrical connection, of the 
mercury-bulbse, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
- 
JOHN H. GUEST. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. D. WALKER, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
35 
40 
45 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN H. GUEST, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Electric Lamps, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My improvement relates to electric lamps 
wherein a pencil or ribbon of carbon is burned 
within a chamber of glass exhausted of air. 
The object of the invention is to prevent 
leakage of air into the chamber through the 
openings made by the unequal expansion of 
the glass and metal at the points where the 
wires pass to the outside. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming part 
of this specification, I have shown a sectional 
elevation of an electric lamp fitted with my im 
provement. 
A is the chamber, of glass or other trans 
parent material. a, b are the wires passing in 
at the opposite sides, and connecting with the 
strip C, of carbon or carbonized material, in any 
usual or desired manner. Tie chamber A is 
sealed air-tight around the wires a, b, and ex 
hausted in any usual manner. At the ends 
Where the wires (t, l enter the chamber A is ex 
tended upward or downward, and formed with 
bulbs e around the wires, in which bulbs mer 
cury is placed and the bulbs then closed at the 
top. 
d 
IS 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225694.txt	A, C, EW ANS. 
Harrow, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 225,694. 
 
Patented Mar. 23, 188O. 
N. PETERs, Pharo-LTHOGRAPHER, washingtoN, D.c. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 225,694. 
Patented Mar. 23, 1880. 
A. C. EY ANS. 
Harr O W, 
A of 
A. 
5. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUSTIN C. EVANS, OF SPRINGFIELD, OHIO. 
HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,694, dated March 23, 1880. 
Application filed January 28, 1880. 
O 
25 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
the middle section. The connections by which 
Be it known that I, AUSTIN C. EVANs, of the sections are held together are similar to 
the city of Springfield, in the county of Clarke those shown in my improved harrow patented 
and State of Ohio, have invented a new and January 13, 1880. 
The post d (seen in the several figures) is 
useful Improvement in Harrows, of which the 
following is a specification. 
firmly fastened in the middle of the shaft a, 
My invention relates to a sectional hinged and is high enough to elevate the outside of 
harrow having three sections connected to- either section A or C by means of its connect 
gether; and it consists in mounting thereon, ing-chain e, so as to allow it to pass over any 6o 
over the middle section, a crank-shaft extend-ordinary obstruction, as seen in dotted lines, 
ing from the front to a little beyond the rear Fig. 2. 
of the harrow-sections. This shaft is pivoted 
In throwing the crank-lever f toward one 
in boxes, and is supported upon blocks bolted side, (giving the shaft a a partial rotation,) and 
upon the front and rear ends of the beams, thus elevating the opposite side section, the 65 
So as to turn freely. It is placed sufficiently middle section acts as a fulcrum at the connect 
above the harrow to have its crank-handle on ing-points, where it is hinged to the former. 
the rear end convenient for the operator. An 
At the top of post dis formed the open or 
upright post extends from the middle of this split ring d, to which the inner ends of chains 
shaft, the top of which is formed into an open e are attached. The object in having this ring to 
or lap - ended ring, from which extend two split is in order to easily disconnect the chains 
light chains, one on either side, to a staple on when packing the harrow-sections fortlanspor 
the outside beam of the outside section, the tation. In packing, the several sections are en 
object being to enable the operator, by means tirely disconnected and A is inverted, C placed 
of the leverage afforded by the crank, to per- upon A, and B upon top of C, making a pack, 75 
form four distinct motions, all of which are as shown in Fig. 5. 
I am aware that hinged harrows have been 
necessary at times when using the implement 
to clear it from obstructions of various kinds made with a lifting-lever secured to a bar fast 
that may be upon the ground. 
ened to the side sections and rigidly attached 
1 and 2 the construction and operation of the have been made with several lifting-levers each 
harrow will be understood, Figure 1 showing hooked at their front ends to the middle sec 
a plan of my improved harrow; Fig. 2, a rear tions. I am also aware that corn-stalk cutters 
elevation; Fig. 3, a side elevation, showing have been made with a rotating drum mounted 
the front end of the harrow elevated to clear in standards on a frame at one end of the mid- 85 
it from trash; and Fig. 4, also a side elevation, dle section of the cutter, and having chains at 
showing the rear elevated to clear it of trash tached directly to the drum and to the outside 
under that end. In the view Fig. 2 the man- sections. Such forms of construction, being es 
ner of elevating the side sections is shown in sentially different from mine, are not claimed 
dotted lines, this movement being by a par-by me. I am not aware, however, that a hair- 9o 
tial rotation of the shaft to the left. Fig. 5 row has been made with a rotating shaft ex 
shows the harrow packed for transportation. 
tending entirely across the middle section and 
In the figures, A B C are the three sections provided with an upright post secured to and 
of the harrow. Upon the middle section, B, moving with the rotating shaft and connected 
is mounted the crank-shaft a. It consists of with the outside sections by chains attached 95 
a long wooden shaft rounded and pivoted at to or near the top of the post, as fully set forth 
each end in boxes ly on the upright blocks b, in the foregoing specification. 
which latter are bolted upon a bar, c, extend- 
I claim as my improvement 
1. A sectional harrow comprised of three 
ing across the ends of the three beams of this 
section at the front and rear. By this ar- sections flexibly connected together, a Crank- Ioo 
rangement a firm support is given to the shaft shaft pivoted centrally over the middle sec 
a, and the bar e gives additional strength to tion, as shown, having an upright post thereon 
By reference to the several figures in Sheets to the lever. I am also aware that harrows 8o 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
225,694 
connected by chains extending from the top of 
said post to each outside section, whereby it 
is adapted, by a partial rotation of said shaft, 
to elevate either of said outside sections, as 
hereinbefore set forth. 
2. In a harrow comprised of three sections 
flexibly connected together, the combination 
of a shaft, pivotally connected at each end 
with the central section, and provided with a 
Crank-lever secured to the rear end of said 
shaft for operating the same, with an upright 
post on the shaft, connected at its top with 
each outside section and at its bottom with 
the central section, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
3. In combination with section B, having 
bars c, blocks b, and boxes b', the pivoted 
shaft a, having crank-lever fand upright post 
O 
d, the latter formed with an open or split ring, 
d/, at the top end, for readily connecting and 
disconnecting the same by chains e to and with 
the outside sections of a three-section harrow, 
as shown and specified. 
4. In a harrow composed of three sections 
flexibly connected together, a rotating shaft 
having a crank-lever attached thereto and ex 
tending across the entire length of the middle 
Section on bearings at each end of said sec 
tion, and connected with the outside sections 
by chains attached to an upright post secured 
to and moving with the rotating shaft, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
AUSTN. C. EVANS, 
25 
Attest: 
B. C. CONVERSE, 
M. M. CONVERSE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225794.txt	E. J. BROOKS. 
Lantern. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 23, 188O. 
No. 225,794. 
 
Acz 
PETERS, poro-THoGRAPHER, washNGTON, D.C. 
E. J. BR00KS, 
Lantern. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 225,794. 
Patented Mar. 
23, 1880. 
 
4Zoes, 
N.FEERS, Photo-HaRAPHER, was ston, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD J. BROOKS, OF ORANGE, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO E. J. BROOKS 
& CO., OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
LANTERN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,794, dated March 23, 1880. 
Application filed February 2, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD J. BROOKS, of 
Orange, New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Lamps and Lanterns, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to car-lamps and oil 
lamps of other descriptions, and to portable 
lanterns for railway officers and others. 
The primary object of the invention is to 
Support the bottoms of such lamps and lanterns 
independently of their globes and without ob 
structing the latter. 
Another object of the said invention is to 
combine a reflector with a central support for 
the oil-reservoir or bottom in a peculiar man 
ner, so that the same shall possess superior 
efficiency and durability. 
Another object of the said invention is to 
combine air-passages with a central reflector 
and a transparent protecting-tube, so as to 
keep the latter cool and clear. 
Another object of the said invention is to 
combine a central air-supply with an annular 
burner and a central reflector, so as to feed 
the flame and protect the surface of the re 
flector at one and the same time. 
The said invention consists in certain forms 
and combinations of parts whereby I have ac 
complished the said objects, and in an im 
proved lamp or lantern in which the same are 
embodied, as hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
an elevation of a portable lantern illustrating 
this invention. Fig. 2 is a half-section of the 
same on the horizontal line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a half-section on the longitudinal line 33, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a plan view of an oil-reservoir 
With a cluster of burners, illustrating a modi 
fication. Fig. 5 is a vertical section of the lat 
ter on the line 55, Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is a plan 
view of a cluster of reflectors adapted for use 
with the said oil-reservoir and cluster of burn 
ers in connection with a central support. Fig. 
7 represents a back view of one of the said re 
flectors, with a section of their supporting-ring. 
Like letters of reference indicate correspond 
ing parts in the Several figures. 
I attach the swinging bail B or other sup 
port or lifter of my improved lamp or lantern 
to a metallic top, T, made of sheet metal in 
any preferred style, and appropriately perfo 
rated for the escape of heated air and consumed 
gases, said top terminating immediately below 
the upper edge of the globe G, which is, by 
preference, flanged at its upper edge, and at- 55 
tached within a depending marginal flange of 
the said top by plaster-of-paris or equivalent 
means, as illustrated in Fig. 3. 
The globe may be of any approved shape 
and relative size, and constitutes the outer 6o 
Wall of the structure, no external frame-work 
being used. A flat plate, P, which may be 
the floor or top of a base of any preferred de 
sign, closes against the lower edge of the 
globe, but need not, and by preference does 65 
not, project above said edge, the whole area. 
of the globe below the top T being left free for 
illumination. Said bottom plate, P, is attached 
to or combined with the oil-reservoir R, which 
in the illustration is inclosed within the globe, 7o 
but may, if preferred, depend from said plate. 
I support the said reservoir and bottom plate 
by means of an axial tube, A, which may be 
Soldered, brazed, or otherwise permanently at 
tached either to the top or to the bottom, and 75 
attached to the other by any preferred form 
of fastenings. In the illustrations said tube is 
permanently attached to the top T, and is fast 
ened to said bottom plate, P, by a pair of bayo 
netjoints, formed by angular slots 8 in the 8o 
lower end of the tube engaging with radial 
pins p, attached to the bottom of said plate. 
The reservoir R has been made annular to 
adapt it to said support, and in the form illus 
trated by Sheet 1 of the drawings it has been 85 
provided with a concentric annular burner or 
wick-tube, b, provided with a suitable wick, 
and with attached chimney-holders l to sup 
port a draft-chimney, c. Said wick-tube may 
be triangular or square instead of round, if 9o 
preferred, with wicks adapted thereto. A 
filling-tube, f, at one side of the burner, pro 
vides for supplying the reservoir with oil. 
To form an efficient and durable reflector 
within the annular flame of the burner b, the 95 
tube A is electroplated externally with silver 
or nickel, and a clear-glass tube, , is applied 
thereto to protect its surface or to form a 
glazed reflector-surface, said tube r being sup 
ported by clips ll, attached to the side of the Io 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
: 
225,94 
O 
(5 
tube A, as shown in Fig. 3. Above the bot 
tom of the reflector-tube 
the tube A is per 
forated, as shown in Fig. 3, to admit air to the 
interior of said tube", said air serving to keep 
said reflector-tube cool and clear, the latter 
by preventing any deposit of sweat within 
the relatively cool glass. 
Air is admitted to the flame through perfo 
rations in the bottom plate, P, the central tube 
of the burner b, which extends down to said 
plate, being made large enough to expose all 
annulus of sufficient area. (See Fig. 2.) The 
air admitted through the latter serves not only 
to feed the flame, but to protect the surface of 
the central reflector, rendering it less liable to 
become Smoked. 
In the modification illustrated by Sheet 2 
of the drawings an annular oil-reservoir, R*, 
is made to fit tightly upon the lower end of 
the tube A, Figs. 1 to 3, in place of the reser 
voir R, said reservoir R being provided with 
a cluster of ordinary burners, l b l', which 
may be of any approved number and pattern, 
but preferably adapted to burn without chim 
neys, and located symmetrically around the 
central tube-hole. These burners screw into 
collars c, so as to be removable, which pro 
vides for refilling. A pair of pins, p, provide 
for attaching the reservoir to the tube A, and 
a perforated marginal flange or bottom plate, 
P, closes against the lower edge of the globe, 
as in the first form. 
Before applying the reservoir R to the tube 
A the latter is provided, in lieu of the re 
flector-tube r", with a ring, "", supporting a 
cluster of reflectors, ', which may be of any 
approved style, corresponding in number and 
relative position with the burners b, and at 
tached removably to said collar by hooks h, 
as shown in Figs. 6 and 7. 
The combination and relative arrangement 
of the tube A and reflectors 
with the reser 
voir R and burners b is illustrated by dotted 
outlines of said parts A in Figs. 4 and 5. 
In addition to the major modification above 
described, I propose adapting the axial tube 
to be used as an oil-reservoir in some cases, on 
the principle of students lamps, and in others 
as an escape-tube for carrying off the con 
O Sumed gases. I also propose making the oil 
55 
7 O 
75 
reservoir or bottom non-annular and attaching 
the axial tube to the top thereof. 
The above description will enable those 
skilled in the art to make and use lamps and 
lanterns according to my invention. 
Other immaterial modifications will suggest 
themselves, such as the silvering of the re 
flector-tube internally, in lieu of plating the 
tube A, the substitution of a solid rod for the 
latter in some cases, changes of forms and 
proportions, the employment of different fast 
enings, and the like. 
I claim as new and desire to protect by Liet 
ters Patent of the United States 
1. The combination, in a lamp or lantern, of 
a metallic top and a transparent globe de 
pending from said top with a removable me 
tallic bottom closing against the lower edge of 
said globe and an axial Support connecting 
said bottom and top, substantially as herein 
specified. 
2. The combination, in a lamp or lantern, of 
a metallic top and a transparent globe depend 
ing from said top with a removable metallic 
bottom closing against the lower edge of said 
globe, an axial support connecting said bottom 
and top, and a concentric reflector formed 
around the said axial support, substantially as 
herein described. 
a bright-plated axial tube, forming a reflector, 
a transparent protecting-tube applied thereto, 
and perforations admitting air within said 
transparent tube at or near its lower end, as 
herein specified. 
4. The combination of the perforated bot 
tom plate, P, the annular burner b, the axial 
tube A, and the concentric reflector-tube , as 
herein described. 
5. The combination of the top T, globe G. 
and perforated bottom plate, P, the annular 
oil-reservoir R, with its concentric burner b 
and chimney c, and the axial tube A, with its 
reflector-tube r, as herein described, for the 
purpose specified. 
EDWARD J. BROOKS, 
3. The combination, in a lamp or lantern, of 8o 
Witnesses: 
ARTEMAS B. SMITH, 
THOMAS E. CROSSMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225894.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY T. WARNER, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
CURTAN BRACKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,894, dated March 23, 1880. 
Application filed February 7, 1880. 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRY T. WARNER, 
of Newark, in the county of Essex and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Curtain-Brackets, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to curtain - fixtures 
having the motive power in themselves for 
raising the shade; and it consists in devices 
whereby the motive power is located in the 
bracket of the fixtures, instead of in the roller, 
as has hitherto been done, actuating the roller 
there from. 
The old style of self-acting shade-fixtures, 
in which the motive-power is contained in the 
roller, is subject especially to two objections: 
First, that after having been cut down to 
fit one window it cannot be used for another 
of greater width. My invention obviates this 
difficulty, as the motive power is connected 
with the bracket, and on changing to a wider 
Window it is only necessary to procure a new 
roller-stick at the cost of a few cents. 
Second, another objection, and a great one, 
to the self-acting rollers, in which the spring 
is in one end of the roller, is that the size of 
the bore to put the spring in leaves very little 
Wood on which to tack the shade. This neces 
sitates the use of very small tacks to prevent 
interference with the spring. These small 
four-ounce tacks are frequently inadequate to 
holding heavy shade materials to the roller, 
and it is a common occurrence for shades to 
pull from the roller the first time they are used. 
The roller in my case being solid throughout, 
this objection does not hold good. 
Figure 1 is a front view of bracket, roller, 
and shade. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section, 
showing my improvements. Fig. 3 is an end 
view of the bracket, partly in section. Figs. 
4 and 5 are views showing a modification of 
the stop devices. 
The bracket for one end of the roller A is 
constructed with a case, B, having the feet, 
C to attach it to the window-frame. In this 
case, which may be two and a half inches long, 
more or less, is coiled a long stretch of elastic 
wire, D, about twenty-five feet on the spindle 
E, and to get this length of spring in so short 
a. Space it is coiled one or more times over 
sitself on the spindle. 
One end of the spring is secured to the 
inner end of the spindle and the other end to 
the case; or it may be reversed to the oppo 
- 
75 
site end of the spindle, or to the wheel F, 55 
which wheel, being part of the spindle, is 
made to turn in and is held in position by 
the end of the case. 
The inner end of the spindle has a bearing, 
H, in the case. 
The wheel F bas a recess or rabbet, I, in 
the outside of the periphery, in which a pawl, 
J, which is attached to the end of the case, is 
inade to rest. In the botton of this rabbet 
is one or more notches, K, to engage the pawl 
and hold the shade at any desired height. 
The wheel has a rectangular or other shaped 
recess, L, not round, to receive the projection 
a from the roller end, which projection has 
the same shape transversely as that of the 
recess. When the shade is drawn down the 
projection a turns the spindle and coils the 
Spring on it. 
The spring as a motive power, in combina 
tion with a bracket, may be employed other 
wise than in a case, for in the place of a case 
there may be an open frame for holding and 
operating it; and the mechanism for stop 
ping the shade may be placed between the 
bracket and roller on the outside of the case 
and the same result be secured in both cases, 
the invention being in uniting the notive 
power with the bracket and having suitable 
mechanism for connecting it with the roller 
without making the fixture large and ungainly 
in appearance. 
Instead of the pawl and ratchet Working 
as described, the pawl may be attached to the 
wheel, which revolves in the case, and the 
notch may be in the case. (See Fig. 4.) Or, 
instead of the pawl, a small piece of metal, a 
parallelogram in shape, with square edges. 
working in ways attached to the end of the 
case, and engaging in notches in the wheel, 
as seen in Fig. 5, may be used. 
The bracket on the opposite end of the 
roller will be an exact pattern of the one con 
taining the spring, and, if desired, it may con 
tain part of the mechanism. Therefore 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The case B, spindle E, spring D, wheel F, 
and pawl J, combined substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
HARRY T. WARNER, 
85 
95 
OO 
Witnesses: 
HORACE EIARRIS, 
D. P. COWL. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Patented Mar. 23, 1880. 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSNNSN N 
z"Za 
4%. c/21 
ATTORNEYS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US225995.txt	J. W. PENFIELD. 
Brick and Tile Machine, 
4. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 225,995 
Patented Mar. 3O, 188O. 
: 
N 
4. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
SS a's as 
S.aaaaaaaa. 
s 1122,162 
ES 
55 
(2) 
5. S 
61 
. 2 
3. ES 
SES 
S22. 
$33. 
$33 
S2.2S 
R22 32 
al 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
WITNESSES 
2-47%. 247- 
W(26%-24 
s 
s s Kas ra X N 
arrar 
sixaxiswww.8x. 
assass 
s ra 
W Val W 
Y 
W 
s 
Aisi 3. 
y 
Y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NVENTOR 
|Aulou (Luu. 
is errorist 
N. PETERs, Photo-LithoGRAPHER, washington, D.c. 
J. W. PEN FIELD. 
Brick and Tile Machine. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 225,995 
Patented Mar. 30, 1880. 
 
2. 
.3 
4: 
WITNESSES 
2%-42.2%rs 
2.47% J2242 
NVENTOR 
1. 
- 
M tui. A. 
?&evitt'? & ATORNEY 
N.PETERs, PHOTO-LTHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, oc. 
J. W. PENFIELD. 
Brick and Tile Machine. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 225,995 
Patented Mar. 30, 188O. 
 
. E 
  
 
  
 
 
WTNESSEs 
W6%-4 
NVENTOR 
(98. ...tc. &iq its 
ATTORNEY 
goist 
Peters. Photo-THOGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D.C. 
- 
- - --R 
J. W. PENFIELD. 
Brick and Tile Machine. . 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 225,995 
Patented Mar. 30, 188O. 
 
Su-6 
3.nestos 
er cuts... Attorneys. 
tipETERS, Photo-THoGRApHER, WASHINGTON, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. PENFIELD, OF WILLOUGHBY, OHIO. 
BRCK AND T E MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 225,995, dated March 30, 1880. 
Application filed October 23, 1879. 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMEs W. PENFIELD, 
of Willoughby, in the county of Lake and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Brick and Tile Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it pertains to make 
and use it, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form part of this 
Specification. 
My invention relates to brick and tile ma 
chinery; and it consists in the construction 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view, in lon 
gitudinal section, of a device according to my 
invention, adapted for the manufacture of tile. 
Fig.2 is an isometric view of my device, show 
ing the tile-carriage and end thereof. Fig. 3 
shows my tile-carriage as lowered in its posi 
tion for receiving tile from the smaller and 
lower dies. Fig. 4 is a view, in side elevation, 
of my improved machine. 
A is any suitable body or casing for con 
taining the plugging-shaft. This casing is pro 
vided with a suitable mouth, A', into which is 
introduced the clay. 
The clay is treated and fed forward in the 
casing A in any Suitable manner, as in respect 
to the Casing A and pugging-shaft B, per se, 
I do not claim any invention, and these parts 
may be varied at pleasure. 
I have, however, improved the construction 
of a tile-machine by making the plugging 
shaft B hollow from end to end and introduc 
ing therein a stem, B', of the core B. By 
this construction the following advantages are 
attained: First, the core B' is firmly secured 
in position and may be effectually prevented 
from rotating. Second, the stem B', by op 
posing its longitudinal strain, serves as a 
brace to strengthen the pugging-shaft and ap 
paratus. This will be apparent when the fact 
is considered that in machines of this class 
the end pressure or strain of the auger or 
pugging device B is very great, and by pass 
ing the stem B' entirely through the pugging 
shaft and securing its rear end by a nut-and 
pin arrangement, which prevents its rotation, 
and at the same time securely fixes it in place, 
operates, as before specified, to brace and 
strengthen the parts through which it passes 
and prevents their displacement while in op 
eration, thus lessening the liability to break 
age or faulty operation. 
B is a master-wheel fixed upon and driving 
the pugging-shaft. This wheel I prefer mak 
ing in the form of a gear-wheel, and the motive 
power may be applied to this wheel in any 
suitable manner whatever. I have found that 
a more steady and even operation of this wheel 
may be effected by driving it with pinions en 
gaged at two or more points, instead of a single 
pinion at a single point, thus lessening any 
liability to bind, and effecting a more even 
running of the machine with a corresponding 
diminishment of wear to the gearing. 
Such a gearing as just mentioned may be 
arranged as follows: Twopinions, C and C, en 
gage with the drive or master wheel B. These 
pinions C and C are placed upon independent 
shafts driven by gear-wheels C and C, which 
gear-wheels engage with and are driven by a 
single driving-pinion, D, fixed upon a shaft, to 
which the motive power is primarily applied. 
EE are pinions gearing with and driven by 
the master-wheel B. These pinions are fixed 
upon hollow shafts, to the other ends of which 
are attached spiral conveyers E' E, which 
operate to feed and force out the clay in mak 
ing the smaller-sized tile, as will hereinafter 
more fully appear. 
The shafts of the pinions EE, like the pug 
ging-shaftB, are both made hollow, and through 
them pass the stems of their respective cores, 
in the same manner and for the same purpose 
as before specified of the stem B'. 
Coming, now, to a description of my machine 
as respecting the dies, cores, carriage, and 
cutting apparatus, it will be found illustrated 
in Figs. 2 and 3 of the drawings. 
My device is only designed to operate either 
the large die alone or to close said die and 
operate the two smaller dies situated below. 
When the upper or large die is to be employed 
the lower ones are to be closed by a plate 
covering them; and when the lower ones are 
desired to be used, then the upper and large 
die is removed and a closed head-piece put on 
. 
95 
OO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
225,995 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
75 
in its place, and in either case the tile-carriage 
and cutting device are adjusted in height as 
may be required. 
It will be sufficient for the purposes of this 
specification to describe the operation of my 
device for either the large upper die or the 
two smaller lower dies, and I will proceed to 
describe the operation of my device with the 
two lower dies closed and the large upper one 
in operation. 
By the revolution of the pugging-shaft B 
the clay is forced out of the casing A through 
the annular exit around the core B', thus shap 
ing the clay in the form of said die, which may 
be square, round, oval, or of any desired form 
of cross-section. As the clay escapes from the 
die it is received upon the carriage F, which 
consists, essentially, of a floor constructed of 
anti-friction rollers; or the carriage may be in 
the form of a trough or tube. The latterform 
I prefer to use with large tile and the former 
one in making brick or square hollow Ware. 
As the clay is pushed forward from its die 
upon the carriage F it finally strikes against 
the plate G, which is attached to the arm 
of the rotary cutter G'. This cutter revolves 
and is fixed upon a shaft, G', which receives 
its motion through a pinion gearing with 
the master-wheel B, or with any suitable pin 
ion or gear-wheel connected with said master 
wheel. 
The gear - connection between the master 
wheel and rotary cutter G' is adapted to be 
automatically engaged and disengaged, in or 
der to impart to the rotary cutter an inter 
mitting operation instead of a constant rotary 
movement. To effect this I make the shaft G 
longitudinahly movable together with its at 
tached parts. Thus, when the clay, as it is 
driven from its die, strikes against the plate 
G, it operates to drive forward said plate, 
and with it the shaft G' and its attached parts, 
thus throwing into gear the connection with 
the master-wheel above described. When this 
is done a rotary movement is imparted to the 
cutter G', whereby the clay is severed into one 
or more parts, according to the number of 
hooks g attached to the cutter G. 
During the revolution and operation of the 
cutter G', a spiral cam, G, is made to engage 
with a stationary stud, G', whereby the shaft 
is gradually moved back to its position before 
it was first moved by the striking of the clay 
against the plate G, as specified. This cam 
G is so constructed that it shall operate to 
disengage the gear-connection between the ro 
tary cutter G' and the master-wheel B when 
the wires g are perpendicular, or substantially 
SO. 
Inasmuch as an important feature of my in 
vention consists in the rotary cutter G', I will 
describe it and its connection with the car 
riage through which it operates. 
The cutter, considered by itself, consists, es 
Sentially, in a suitable frame or arm fixed upon 
the shaft G, for carrying the cutting-wires g. 
This shaft passes through one edge of the car 
riage, substantially as shown in the drawings, 
although the specific construction of parts is 
a matter in which I do not limit myself. 
That portion through which the cutter oper 
ates has its fingers or rollers or platform, how 
ever it may be constructed, attached at but 
oneside-namely, that through which the shaft 
G' passes. The other end or side is left open, 
like a comb, to allow of the passage of the cut 
ting-wires g. 
In order to prevent kinking or bending of 
the tile during its impingement against the 
plate G and while being cut by the wire g, I 
make the carriage yielding or movable, so that 
during this time the carriage is moved out as 
fast as the clay is forced from its die. 
After the cutting-wires g have performed 
their function the spiral calm G operates, in 
addition to its function before described, to 
return the carriage back to its original posi 
tion. 
The carriage F is made vertically adjustable 
to receive clay from either the upper or lower 
dies by being fixed upon one or more adjusta 
ble standards, F, sliding within pipe-sup 
ports, and made vertically adjustable in any 
suitable manner, either by rack-and-pinion ar 
rangement or by nut-and-screw device, or in 
any other manner. 
I have found a convenient method of attach 
ing the cutting-wires g by means of movable 
hooks-namely, by attaching the hook with the 
wire secured thereto to the shaft operating the 
cutter and fastening the opposite end of the 
wire to the arm of the cutter-frame by means 
of a pin or equivalent device. This arrange 
ment permits of a quick and easy replace 
ment of any wire that may break, as substitute 
hooks may be kept at hand suitably armed 
With wire. 
My machine is clearly adaptable to the manu 
facture of tile or brick, and for the manufac 
ture of brick it is only necessary to provide 
dies of suitable dimensions and to dispense 
with the core B, without any other material . 
change. 
What I claim is 
1. A brick or tile machine provided with a 
cutter, G', having intermittent rotary move 
ment, substantially as specified. 
2. In a brick or tile machine, one or more 
cutting-wires, g, fixed upon and carried by a 
suitable arm adapted to have an intermittent 
rotary movement, substantially as shown. 
3. In a brick or tile machine, the combina 
tion, with a traveling carriage provided with 
animpinging plate and a rotary cutter, of mech 
anism, substantially as described, adapted to 
operate the cutter as the clay strikes against 
said plate, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a brick or tile machine, a rotary cutter, 
in combination with the cam G., for throwing 
. 
cutter out of gear, substantially as speci 
eC. 
5. In a brick or tile machine, the combina 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
M 
Witnesses: 
25 
r 
IO 
225,995 - 
w 
3 
tion, with a yielding or moving carriage, F, of vided with independent core-stem and augers, 
the spiral cam G, whereby said carriage is re 
or their equivalent, substantially as shown. 20 
turned to its former position after having been 
9. In a brick or tile machine, the master 
driven forward, substantially as and for the 
wheel B, driven by two or more pinions, C, 
purposes specified. 
said pinions connected by suitable gear with a 
single driving-pinion, D, substantially as and 
6. In a brick and tile machine, the combina 
tion, with a tubular pugging-shaft, of an inter 
for the purposes described. 
nal stem provided with a core at one end, sub 
10. The combination, with the master-wheel 
stantially as set forth. 
B', of the pinions E E and augers or spiral 
conveyers E' E, substantially as specified. 
7. In a brick and tile machine, the combina 
tion, with a tubular pugging-shaft, of an inter 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
nal shaft provided with a core at one end and 
name to this specification in the presence of 3o 
a fastening device at the opposite end, which 
two subscribing witnesses. 
secures the parts together, substantially as set 
forth. 
8. In a tile-machine adapted interchange 
ably to make large or small tile, as specified, 
two or more smaller dies and cores, each pro 
JNO. CROWELL, Jr., 
WILLARD FRACKER. 
JAMES W. PENFIELD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226095.txt	No. 226,095 
E. MERCIER. 
Extinguisher. 
Patented Mar 30, 1880. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD MERCIER, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACEUSETTS, 
Extin GUISHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent. No. 226,095, dated March 30, 1880. 
Application filed September 15, 1879. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD MERCIER, of 
Springfield, county of Hampden, and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented new and use 
fill Improvements in Extinguishing Attach 
ments for Kerosene and other similarly-con 
structed Lamps, which improvements are fully 
set forth in the annexed specification and in 
the accompanying drawings. 
Myinvention, as herein set forth, is in the na 
ture of an improvement upon my patent of De 
cember 11, 1877, No. 198,139, to which reference 
may be had; and the object of it is to simplify 
the construction of the extinguishing devices, 
reduce the operating parts to less than half 
the number embraced in said patent, and, by 
means of the improvements herein shown, se 
cure such an off position for the extinguisher 
cap by the sidle of the wick-tube as prevents 
it from interfering with the upward current of 
air past the flame of the lamp; and it consists 
in an extinguishing-cap constructed to operate 
Without a counter-weight, with a lever requir 
ing no positive connection with said cap, but 
serving to throw it onto and off from the wick 
With no less certainty. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation, partly in section, of the lower por 
tion of the burner, showing my extinguishing 
attachments thereon, with the cap hanging 
down by the side of the wick-tube. Fig. 2 is 
a like view, but showing the parts in the po 
sition required to extinguish the flame of the 
lamp. Fig. 3 shows the wick-tube and extin 
guisher only, and the manner of securing the 
latter to the former. 
In the drawings, A is the base of the burner. 
b is the wick-tube. e is the Wick. at is the ex 
tinguishing-cap. c is the yoke in which the 
cap is pivoted, and d is the lever. 
Like letters refer to like parts in the differ 
ent figures. 
Owing to the weight which I attached to the 
extinguishing-cap, and to the positive connec 
tion existing between the said weight and cap 
and the lever actuating them, as shown in my 
said patent of 1877, the construction of said 
parts is too costly; and, furthermore, such a 
construction interposes Serious obstacles to the 
proper action of the flame of a burner fitted 
with said devices, as it is essential that the 
IC) 
IS 
2 5 
35 
45 
SO 
7 O 
55 
cap should swing low, as shown in Fig. 1, by 
the side of the wick-tube, in order not to cause 
the flame to draw over toward the cap, and 
by constructing the cap and lever as herein 
shown, without any weight attached thereto, 
the cap can be dropped low enough to obviate 
said objection. 
The construction herein shown necessitates 
the employment of only three pieces for the 
entire extinguishing devices, instead of seven, 
as required in constructing those shown in my 
Said patent. 
In applying my improved extinguishing de 
vices to lamps I crowd the yoke c down tightly 
upon the wick-tube, as seen in Fig. 3, and its 
arms perforated, as shown, extend upward 
and obliquely next to two sides of said tube, 
providing supports in which the cap at is ar 
ranged to swing, being secured therebetween by 
two projections, one at each end, as seen, which 
enter the perforated ends of the yoke. Said 
capa is provided with a short lip, i, which, 
when the cap covers the end of the wick-tube, 
stands out at right angles to the side of the 75 
tube, as shown. 
The lever d is hung, as shown, on the rim of 
the base A, being inserted through a suitable 
aperture therein, and has its sun aller end bent 
upward by the side of the wick-tube. The up- 8o 
per end of said lever is bent in the form of 
double curves, as shown; and, furthermore, 
the short arm of the lever is so bent as to cause 
said curved end to press lightly against the 
edge of lip i when that end and the cap are 
in the position shown in Fig. 2, with the ex 
treme end of the lever hooking somewhat over 
the edge of said lip. 
When the lamp is burning, the extinguish 
ing parts rest in the position shown in Fig. 1. 
There is shown the cap hanging over upon the 
side of the wick-tube sufficiently low not to 
interfere with the free burning of the lamp 
flame. Its lip i closes against said tube, and 
the curved end of lever d rests between the 95 
cap and the side of the tube. 
The capa is thrown over the top of the wick 
tube, to extinguish the flame of the lamp, in the 
position shown in Fig.2, bypressing down upon 
the end of lever d, which extends beyond the 
rim of the burner on which it bears, being held 
in place by the curved part thereon, as shown 
9o 
OO 
2 
226,095 
in each of the figures. Upon so bearing down 
On said lever its opposite end moves upward 
and away from the side of the wick-tube, bear 
ing against the side of the cap, and causes it 
to Swing upward in its bearings in yoke c. As 
Soon as said lever has so moved for a short dis 
tance, lip i on the cap swings out, and its edge 
engages in the curved part near the end of 
lever d, and is carried by the latter up to the 
position seen in Figs. 2 and 3, throws the cap 
quite over the top of the wick, and extinguishes 
the flame. A reverse movement of the Outer 
end of the lever d throws cap a. off from the 
wick. 
A kerosene-lamp provided with the within 
O 
I5 
described extinguishing devices has its wick 
protected from dust and the evaporation of oil 
while not lighted, as the cap remains over the 
wick during that time. Thus the lamp is kept 
in better condition for service. 
What I claim as my invention is 
In combination with a lamp-burner, the yoke 
c, secured to the wick-tube b, the cap a, piv 
oted in yoke 0, and provided with the lip i, and 
the lever d, curved at its upper end, as shown, 
substantially as set forth. 
In presence of - 
E. A. CHAPIN, 
WM. H. CHAPIN. 
25 
E. MERCIER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226195.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALVIN D. PUFFER, JR, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO ALVIN 
D. PUFFER & SONS, OF SAME PLACE. 
SO DA-FOUNTAIN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 226,195, dated April 6, 1880. 
Application filed February 7, 1880. 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALVIN D. PUFFER, Jr., 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Soda-Fountains, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to fountains for soda 
Or other aerated water or liquids under press 
ure, in the construction of which a non-corro 
Sive lining is employed inclosed in an outer 
shell or case of sheet metal, usually steel, the 
Coupling-connection by which communication 
is had with the interior of the fountain being 
arranged centrally in one of the heads of the 
Said fountain. 
In my present fountain the lining as well as 
the outer case is open at bottom. 
In my present fountain the bottom is inde 
pendent from the rest of the lining and outer 
case, and is adapted to be readily separated 
from them and replaced should occasion re 
quire, and it is in this feature that the main 
point of my invention will be found to consist. 
My invention further consists in the com 
bination, with the movable bottom before men 
tioned, of means for packing the joint between 
it and the remainder of the fountain, whereby 
the pressure of contents of the fountain op 
erates to crowd the packing into its receptacle 
and completely seal the joint. The greater 
the pressure from within the more secure the 
packing becomes. 
My invention further consists in the pecul 
liar construction of the movable bottom and 
its support, as hereinafter described. 
The drawings accompanying this specifica 
tion represent, in Figure 1, a vertical section 
of a fountain containing my improvements. 
Fig. 2 is a section, on an enlarged scale, of the 
joint between the movable bottom and the 
body of the fountain. Figs, 3 and 4 are modi 
fications of this joint. 
In the said drawings the lining of the foun 
tain, which is usually of block-tin, is shown at 
A as a straight cylinder with a semi-spherical 
top or head, D, and with its lower end open, 
except when closed by the removable bottom, 
which is shown at C, the cylinder A and head 
or top D being united by any suitable joint, 
So and a central orifice, B, being made in the 
35 
II C) 
IS 
45 
head, through which the contents of the foun 
tain find escape. 
The outer shell or case of the fountain is 
shown at E as of a size and shape to tightly 
inclose the lining and its head, and extends 55 
somewhat below the lower end of the lining, 
the head or cap F of the said case being con 
fined to its straight cylindrical portion E by 
any suitable joint, and an opening being made 
in the top of such head to correspond with the 6o 
opening in the head of the lining. 
The removable bottom C, as shown in the 
present instance, is composed of an annular 
disk or block, H, with its central portion, a, of 
thinner metal and joined to it in a suitable 65 
manner, while the bottom b of the lining of 
the fountain is secured to this disk or block 
and is removable with it, the edges of said bot 
tom being turned over and down about the 
periphery of the block, as shown at c in the 
drawings, in order to prevent contact of the 
contents of the fountain With the said block. 
The supporting-base or foundation of the re 
movable bottom is shown in this instance as 
composed of a flat ring, d, terminating at top 
in a horizontal annular shelf or lip, e, while 
upon such shelf is erected an upright annular 
ledge, f, such ledge entering an annular chan 
nel, g, created in the under side of the remov 
able bottom, the said base or support d being 
bolted or riveted to the outer shell. 
To confine the removable botton C to the 
base d, and consequently secure it in place 
within the fountain, I pass upward through 
the annular shelf or flange e of Such base a 
number of bolts or screws, h, and screw these 
latter into the annular disk or circular block 
H, the heads of the bolts bringing up against 
the under side of the shelf. 
The purpose of bolting the removable bot 
tom to the base d is to retain such bottom in 
place while being moved about or transported, 
and the bolt will serve to maintain a tight 
joint between the bottom and lower part of 
the fountain under Small pressure. 
It may be observed that the upper edge, i, 
of the removable botton is crowded close with 
in the lower end of the lining-cylinder A; but 
as this would not provide a joint sufficiently 
tight to stand the pressure within the foun- Ioo 
95 
75 
 
226,195 
IO 
tain, I slope away the lower part of the pe 
riphery of the disk or block H, as shown at k, 
by which means I provide an annular trian 
gular space or channel, which is bounded on 
its inner side by the said periphery of the 
block H., on its under side by the shelfe of the 
based, and on its outer side by the inner pe 
riphery of the lower end of the lining C. 
Within the space or channell, I place a ring, 
n, ofindia-rubber orotherelasticorsemi-elastic 
material, such as any of the well-known vul 
canized rubber compounds capable of lateral 
distention, and when the bolts h, are screwed 
up and the removable bottom drawn downward 
toward the based the packing-ring n is dis 
tended laterally between the periphery of the 
block H and the inner wall of the lining, the 
result being that the joint between such parts 
is effectually sealed. 
As before stated the power of the bolts is 
capable of distending the packing to an ex 
tent sufficient to seal the joint against, small 
pressures. When a considerable pressure ex 
ists within the fountain such pressure crowds 
the removable bottom downward toward the 
based and the packing is distended or crowded 
into the passage in to a corresponding extent. 
An interiorly-threaded nozzle or coupling 
ring, n, is inserted within the orifice of the 
cap of the fountain from the inside, and has 
an allinular outstanding lip, o, upon its lower 
edge, between which and an annular lip, p, 
surrounding the mouth of the cap, a packing 
ring is inserted. 
A nut, , is screwed upon the upper part of 
the neck of the nozzle and against the lip p, 
above referred to, the result being that the 
joint about the Opening in the head of the 
fountain is effectually sealed against escape 
of the contents of the latter. 
In constructing this fountain the head of 
the lining is secured to its cylindrical body 
and placed within the outer shell, the head 
of which has previously been secured to it. 
The nozzle is now inserted from the inside of 
the lower end of the lining-cylinder with the 
packing-ring in place and the nut screwed 
home, which completes the cap or head of the 
fountain. The removable bottom is now pushed 
into the lower open end or mouth of the lin 
ing-cylinder and the based inserted below it 
within the lower end of the outer shell, the 
elastic ring or packing in being placed in po 
sition between them, as explained, and the base 
d Securely bolted or otherwise fastened to the 
Outer case, and the upright ledge or lip f of 
the base entering the annular groove or chan 
nel g in the removable bottom. The bolts h 
are 1).OW Screwed into the under side of the 
removable botton and the latter drawn down 
to Ward the base, and so as to compress the 
packing within its recess. 
The lower end or moth of the annular chan 
nel g should be flaring, as shown, in order 
that the lip f of the base may readily enter it. 
I do not confine myself in any sense to the 
 
7? 
75 
95 
precise manner of securing the removable bot 
tom in place within the fountain or the man 
ner of securing and compressing the elastic 
packing, as herein shown, as these may be va 
ried from to a wide extent without losing sight 
of the essential feature of my invention, which 
I consider to consist in a detachable bottom 
independent from the main body of the lining 
and susceptible of being readily removed from 
or applied to the fountain without unsoldering 
joints or injuring the partS. 
I am aware that fountains have been hereto 
fore made with so-called removable bottoms 
that is to say, the lining has been entire and 
the base or support at the bottom of such lin 
ing removable, in order to permit the entire lin 
ing to be taken out of the case. This, how 
ever, does not permit of access to the inte 
rior of the lining, as in my construction, and 
is not literally a removable botton. 
In Fig. 3 of the accompanying drawings the 
periphery of the removable bottom is shown 
as abutting against the upper edge of the base 
d, which, in this instance, is a simple ring 
bolted to place, the packing in being in 
serted between the two; or this construction 
may be varied somewhat by leaving a space 
between the upper edge of the removable bot 
tom and the Wall of the lining, as shown in 
Fig. 5 of the drawings, in order that a pack 
ing may be inserted into this space from the 
nozzle n of the head, the pressure of the con 
tents of the fountain directly upon this pack 
ing serving to Seal the joint. 
In Fig. 4 of the drawings the periphery of 
the removable bottom is turned under to form 
a lip, s, which rests upon and takes into the 
packing in, which is contained within a chan 
nel, t, formed by a rabbet, u, in the based on 
one side, and on the other side by the inner 
wall of the lining C; and the lower edge of the 
lips may be triangular or knife-edged, or it 
may be flat, or any other proper shape to ef 
fectually distend the packing. 
I. claim 
1. In a soda-water or other fountain, the 
combination, with the body and the lining 
thereof, of a detachable bottom united with 
the bottom lining and fitting within the said 
fountain - body, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
2. In soda-water or other fountains, a re 
movable bottom carrying the bottom of the 
lining, and adapted to operate with an elastic 
or semi-elastic packing and an abutment se 
cured to the body of the fountain, to seal the 
joint between the removable bottom and the 
said fountain by the pressure of the contents 
of the latter body. 
3. In soda-water or other fountains, a re 
movable bottom entering the lower end of the 
body of the fountain and adapted to operate 
With and compress or distend an elastic or 
semi-elastic packing placed between them, both 
by the power of bolts and the pressure within 
the fountain, the bolts serving to compress the 
IOC 
d 
II 5 
I25 
I3? 
226,195 
and theremovable bottom, of the based, formed 
with the shelfe and with the vertical lipf, to 
enter a corresponding channel in the remov 
able bottom. 
8. In combination with the fountain-body 
and removable bottom with the channel in its 
under side, the independent base - piece d, 
formed with a lip, f, to enter said channel, 
substantially as hereinbefore set forth. 
9. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the fountain-body, the re 
movable bottom, the based, the connecting 
Screws h, and the interposed packing m. 
10. The combination of the body of the 
fountain, the detachable bottom, the base for 
confining the bottom in place, and the elastic 
packing. 
ALVIN D. PUFFER, JR. 
Witnesses: 
H. E. LODGE, 
M. BATLEY. 
25 
35 
I. ? 
packing sufficiently for low pressure, and the 
higher pressure serving to automatically dis 
tend the packing. 
4. In soda-water or other fountains, the com 
bination, with the body of the fountain and its 
lining, of a removable bottom inserted within 
the latter and an independent and separate 
abutment or base outside of such bottom and 
secured to the fountain-body. 
5. The combination, with the body of the 
fountain, of the detachable bottom and the 
abutment or base formed and arranged sub 
stantially as described, so that there shall be 
formed between said parts an annular packing 
receptacle or recess, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination of the fountain-body, 
the bottom and support therefor, and packing, 
arranged and operating to seal the joint be 
tween the bottom and the body, substantially 
2O as and for the purposes hereinbefore set forth. 
7. The combination, with the fountain-body 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226295.txt	J. H. FENTON 
Toe-Weight, 
No. 226,295. 
Patented April 6, 188O. 
 
S. 
was 
s: 
A2 
an - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. FENTON, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
TO E-WEIGHT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 226,295, dated April 6, 1880. 
Application filed September 27, 1879. 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN H. FENTON, of 
Indianapolis, in the county of Marion and 
State of Indiana, have invented a new and 
5 useful Improvement in Toe Weights and Fast 
enings for Horses, of which the following is a 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
toe-weight with a means of securing it to the 
hoof and shoe of a horse, so that the weight 
will be firmly secured thereto without the aid 
of straps or the Welding of a spur or project 
ing piece to the shoe. 
My invention consists, mainly, in the new 
construction and arrangement of devices, and 
in the new combination of elements which are 
deemed essential in my newly - constructed 
toe weight and fastening, which will be first 
fully described in the specification, and then 
set forth in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
like letters of reference in the different fig 
lures indicate like parts, Figure 1 represents 
25 a perspective view of a horse's hoof, show 
ing my improved toe weight and fastening at 
tached to the shoe. Fig. 2 is a sectional view 
of the same, showing the arrangement of 
parts more fully. Fig. 3 is a sectional 
of the weight and fastening-spur. Fig. 4 is 
a plan view of the rear side of the weight. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional view of Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is 
a sectional view of the fastening-spur, and 
Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the same. 
A represents the hoof; G, the shoe; B, the 
weight, and D D, the fastening-spur. 
The shoe G is provided with a small hole, 
g, Fig. 2, in the center at the front, to receive 
the hook F of the weight. 
The weight B is provided with a cylindri 
cal recess, H, in the rear side, having a small 
bolt-hole, I, extending through the weight in 
the center. A recess, J, is also formed in the 
rear side of the weight, and extends from the 
cylindrical recess H to the base of the weight. 
The hook E F is cast on the lower edge of 
the weight, and projects rearward with a form 
similar to that shown in Fig. 5. The point 
F is designed to fit into the hole g in the shoe, 
The spur D D is constructed similar to that 
So as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. 
45 
35 
 
55 
shown in Figs. 6 and 7-that is, the upper part 
is provided with a boss, D', having a hole, a, 
provided with a female screw to receive the 
bolt C. The lower part of the shank D is pro 
vided with a notch, f, that extends part way up 
in the shank D and part way into the spur 
ID', as shown in Fig. 6. The spur D projects 
back, so as to fit under the hoof, as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
Having thus described the construction and 
arrangement of parts, I will now describe the 
mode or manner of attaching the Weight to 
the hoof and shoe of a horse, as follows, to wit: 
The spur D is first inserted in a notch 
formed in the base of the hoof and between 
the hoof and shoe. The weight is then placed 
in position on the front of the hoof by insert 
ing the hook-shank E into the notch f of the 
spur, and the hook F is inserted in the hole g 
of the shoe G, as shown in Fig. 2, after which 
the bolt C is inserted in the hole I of the 
weight and screwed fast in the hole at of the 
spur, thus clamping the spur D D, and weight 
B to the shoe G and hoof A, as shown in Fig. 
2. The weight thus secured to the shoe and 
hoof is permanently fastened, and cannot get 
loose or come off until the bolt C is unscrewed. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The weight B, provided with the recesses 
H and J, the hole I, and hook E. F., as and for 
the purpose specified. 
2. The weight B, provided with the recesses 
H and J, the hole I, and hook E. F., combined 
with the spur D D, D, the shoe G, and bolt C, 
as and for the purpose specified. 
3. The weight B, provided with the hook E 
F at its lower edge, as and for the purpose 
specified. 
4. The spur consisting of the parts D D'D', 
having a recess, f, at the bend or union of the 
shank D and spur D', substantially as shown 
and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
JOHN B. FENTON. 
Witnesses: 
E. O. FRINK, 
G. H. RENNETT. 
75 
go 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226396.txt	2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented April 13, 1880. 
D. FRANK. 
Car-Coupling. 
Z. 
Fl 2 
7. 
9. 
SA. 
SIN SEIN AN 
67N INS SSNSSt 
an 
y 
  
  
N 
kN 
2222222 
No. 226,396. 
  
  
 
S 
N 
N 
 
 
 
Inventor: 
42-464 
NPETERS, Piero-THoGRAPHER, washingtoN, p. c. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
D. FRANK. 
Car-Coupling. 
Patented April 13, 1880. 
  
 
 
S. 
No. 226,396. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
p 
4n 
2 
N 
Witnesses: 
In Ventor: 
/42%-4 re 2.76.4% 
2 /.4- 
N.PETERS, PHOTO-lthographer, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
r 
t 
- 
s 
h 
pa- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID FRANK, OF ALLENTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CAR-co UPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 226,396, dated April 13, 1880. 
Application filed February 6, 1880. 
I5 
V 
secure upon the projecting end of the bolt E, 65 
25 ture embodied. 
of an elongated clevis, is rigidly secured to 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID FRANK, of 
the bolt E by causing one of its eyes at one 
end to fit snugly on the square portion e of 
Allentown, in the county of Lehigh and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain Im- said bolt, which portion e is shown in Fig. 4. 55 
It is obvious that the link C may be secured 
5 provements in Car-Couplings, of which the foll- 
to the bolt E in any suitable manner, the sole 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to car-couplings; and object of such connection being to enable the 
the invention consists in the novel construc- link to be raised to a horizontal position by 
tion, combination, and arrangement of devices rotating the bolt E, so as to bring the link into 6o 
Io used whereby the coupling and uncoupling the proper position to enter the recess in the 
can be effected by a person on the car or plat- draw-head of the adjoining car when it is de 
form and thereby avoid the accidents which sired to couple the cars. To effect this rota 
so frequently occur with the ordinary coup- tion of the bolt, and thereby raise the link, I 
lings hitherto in general use. 
Figure 1 is a top-plan view; Fig. 2, a longi- at one side of the draw-head, a pulley, F, as 
tudinal vertical section on the line o O of Fig. shown in Figs. 1, 3, 7, and 8, and to this pull 
1, and Fig. 3 an end view of the draw-headley I attach one end of a chain, l, its opposite 
of cars having my improvements applied there- end being connected to a vertical handle, L, 
to. Figs. 4 and 5 are detailed views of some which has on one edge a series of ratchet- 7 O 
2O of the parts, detached for the purpose of more teeth, by which it can be made to engage with 
clearly illustrating their construction. Fig. 6 or hook on a plate, n, at the point where said 
is a longitudinal vertical section, Fig. 7 an handle extends up through a hole in the plat 
end elevation, and Fig. S a top-plan view, of form above or through any suitable guide 
my improved coupling with an additional fea- which may be secured to the body of the car 75 
in the proper position, as represented in the 
In the drawings, A represents the draw- left-hand portion of Fig. 6. It will readily be 
head, which may be made of cast or wrought seen that by this means the attendant, while 
iron, as preferred, and which is connected to upon the platform, or even upon the top of a 
the draw-bar B in any suitable manner. As freight or box car, in case the handle be ex- 8o 
3o shown in Figs. 1 and 2, this draw-head A is tended up high enough, can at any time raise 
provided at its upper part with a recess, H, the link C into the proper position for coup 
and holes (), to enable the ordinary coupling ling the cars, and that thus all necessity of 
link and pin to be used, and thus enable a car going between the cars to couple them and 
having my improved coupling on it to be the attendant danger of so doing is entirely 85 
the improved coupling on it. Immediately be- 
The device with which the link C engages 
low this recess H, I provide another and larger | I term a gravitating dog, it being shown in 
recess in the end of the draw-head, as shown side elevation, and also in plan, in Fig. 5, as 
in Fig. 2, its lower Wall being inclined or bev- well as in position in the several other figures. 9o 
40 eled at its rear portion and extending for- This dog consists of a hub, having a central 
Ward only about half the length of the head hole of the proper size to enable it to be slipped 
A, thus leaving a slot or opening at its front on the bolt E between the ends of the clevis 
lower edge to permit the link C to hang ver- shaped link, as shown in Fig. 3, and it is pro 
tical, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. I then pro- vided on its rear side with a strong arm or lug, 95 
45 vide a bolt, E, of the form shown in Fig. 4, D, and on its opposite side with a short T 
which is inserted transversely through holes shaped arm, d, this latter being arranged to 
in the lower portion of the head A, as shown extend laterally at one or both sides under the 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, for the purpose of support- arms of the link C, so that when the latter is 
ing the locking-dog D and the link C, the for- released and permitted to hang free, as rep- Ioo 
So mer being arranged to turn loosely on the bolt resented in Fig. 3, and also in the right-hand 
E, while the link, which is made in the form portion of Fig. 2, it will cause the dog to turn 
35 coupled to an ordinary car, or one not having avoided. 
226,396 
So 
55 
75 
gether. In order to raise this wedge K, as is 
necessary to uncouple the cars, the rock-shaft 
J is provided at its outer end with a crank 
arm, to which is pivoted a handle, L, (shown 
in the right-hand portion of Fig. 6, and at the 
left-hand of Fig. 7 also,) said handle L being 
provided on its face with a series of ratchet 
teeth and on its back with a spring, i, by 
which it can be made to engage with a plate, 
1, on the platform, and thus be made to hold 
the wedge K either up or down, as may be 
desired. 
It is obvious that this wedge device K may 
be operated by other means than the rock 
shaft, and be made to operate in the same way, 
and also that it may be used with my improved 
coupling on other than passenger-cars if de 
sired, and therefore I do not desire to be un 
derstood as limiting myself to its use on pass 
enger-cars. 
From the foregoing description the opera 
tion of the devices will be readily understood, 
and therefore any further description is deemed 
unnecessary. 
I am aware that a combined link and pin 
SO constructed that both necessarily moved 
together as one piece has before been shown 
and described, and therefore I do not claim 
such a device; but 
What I do claim is 
1. The combination of the link C, rigidly 
secured to the bolt E, the gravitating dog with 
its arms D and d, and pulley F, with the chain 
l, and notched handle L, all constructed and 
arranged to Operate Substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. In combination, with the link C and the 
gravitating dog, the wedge K, connected to 
the spring-ratchet handle L by means of the 
rock-shaft J, and arm J or equivalent means 
for Operating the same, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
DAVID FRANK. 
Witnesses: 
N. E. BLEBER, 
EDWARD RUHE. 
with the bolt E, thereby raising the arm D 
and causing it to enter and engage with the 
link C of the Opposite car, which is supposed 
to have been shoved into the draw-head over 
the arm D. In case the opposite link has been 
properly adjusted and secured in the horizon 
tal position and the first one allowed to hang 
free, in which case the arm D of the dog will 
be in the elevated position represented in the 
right-hand portion of Fig. 2, then, as the cars 
are brought together, the horizontal link, strik 
ing against the front side of arm D, will shove 
it back, while the link rides over it, and as 
soon as it has passed over it the weight of 
the suspended or free link will immediately 
return the arm D to its elevated position with 
in the link C, thus automatically effecting the 
coupling of the cars. 
It will be observed that the upper end of 
the arm ID when raised is made to bear in a 
notch or recess in the wall above it, thus giv 
ing it a strong bearing or Support when the 
cars are coupled. 
To uncouple the cars it is 
only necessary to bring them close together, 
so that the eln(l of the link will be slowed in 
ward away from the arm D, which being much 
heavier thall the arm d will cause it to fall 
Over Jack the moment it is relieved from the 
pressure of the free or suspended link, which 
is drawn up by the handle L for that purpose, 
When the cars are free to be separated. 
Thus far I have described my improved 
coupling as it would be applied to freight-cars; 
but in passenger-cars it is desirable that the 
cars when coupled shall be held close together, 
and to accomplish this result I add the wedge 
K, as shown in Fig. 6. As there shown, this 
wedge K is pivoted to the front end of an 
arm, J', which is rigidly secured to a rock 
shaft, J, which is mounted in suitable bear 
ings, as represented in Figs. 6, 7, and 8, so 
that said wedge K can be moved vertically up 
and down through a slot in the top of the 
draw-head A, and when the cars are brought 
close together can be forced down between 
the back side of the arm ID and the bend of 
the link C, thereby holding the cars close to 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226496.txt	. 
J, E, CURID, 
Device for Splicing Traces. 
No. 226,496. 
Patented April 13, 1880. 
SNENNsts AsAs. 
2ZZ2Z22-22 r SS 
A. 
A 
 
 
pers, Photo-LTOGRAPHER, wastigion. D. G. 
22 24 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH E. CURD, OF CHARLESTON, ILLINOIS. 
DEVICE FOR SPLICING TRACES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 226,496, dated April 13, 1880. 
Application filed February 2, 1880. 
. 
To effect the repair when the trace breaks 
at a buckle-hole I provide the plate with one 
or more openings, s, which may be brought to 
coincide with the holes in the trace before rivet 
ling. 
I am aware that traces have been mended 
by sewing strips of leather across the point 
where the trace was broken; but this can only 
be done by a skillful workman with proper ap 
pliances, whereas the blade above described, 
owing to its pointed ends, may be readily in 
serted in the space between the leather sides, 
cross-holes cut with a knife or any other pointed 
implement, and bolts or rivets inserted with 
out detaching the horse, and at any point on 
the road, by any one capable of perforating the 
leather. When thus inserted the strength of 
the trace is in no wise diminished, while there. 
are no protuberances to rub against the body 
of the animal. 
45 
55 
claim 
The within - described splice for mending 
harness, consisting of a thin metallic blade, 
pointed at both ends, perforated, and adapted 
to fit between the leathers of the band and to 
be secured thereto by bolts or rivets, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
J. E. CURD. 
Witnesses: 
DANIEL CURD, 
JOHN ADAMS. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JosEPH. E. CURD, of 
Charleston, Coles county, State of Illinois, have 
invented an Improved Device for Splicing 
Traces, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention is a splice intended to facili 
tate the repair of broken traces. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming part 
of this specification, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my improved trace-splice. Fig. 2 is 
a section, showing the same connected to one 
end of a broken trace; Fig. 3, an external 
view of a trace, repaired by means of the 
splice. 
As is well known, the repairing of a broken 
trace by means of external strips of leather 
sewed thereon, or of plates riveted to the out 
side, is not only tedious and expensive, but 
results in a clumsy joint, presenting an un 
sightly appearance, and, when metal is used, 
injurious to the animal and to the vehicle. 
My improved splice is a thin metal blade, 
A, sharpened or rounded at the edges, with 
pointed ends at and openings e. This plate 
is of such a width that it may be inserted 
between the leathers B B of one end of 
the broken harness, and there secured by 
rivets i, the other end projecting, as shown in 
Fig. 2, when the other end of the trace may 
be slipped upon the same and fastened by 
rivets, as shown in Fig. 3. By this means the 
trace is rendered stronger than before, its 
thickness is not materially increased, while 
the outside appearance is in no wise impaired. 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226596.txt	R. F. M. CHA SE 
Knit-Fabric. 
No. 226,596. 
Patented April 20, 1880. 
772.7zes seas: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD F. M. CHASE, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF OF 
HIS RIGHT TO HENRY F. HERKNER, OF SAME PLACE. 
KNIT FABRIC. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 226,596, dated April 20, 1880. 
Application filed March 24, 1879. 
To all aphi??, it may concer? : 
Be it known that I, RICEIARD F. M. CHASE, 
of New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
5 provement in Knit Fabrics, which improve 
ment is fully set forth in the following speci 
fication. 
In ordinary knitting the fabric produced is 
elastic in all directions. Straight warp and 
Io weft threads have been introduced, so as to 
form a fabric especially suited for fire-hose, 
resembling ordinary woven material. Also, 
goods have been made with a separate Weft, 
using a single separate knitting-thread; but 
I5 such fabric, while very difficult to make, 
would be also less elastic, weaker, and inferior 
in appearance to those made in accordance 
with this invention, which consists in a fab 
ric elastic in one direction and inelastic in the 
2O other, and composed of a series of straight 
threads and two or more knitting-threads in 
terlaced and looped together and crossing 
said straight threads on opposite sides to in 
close and bind the same into the fabric. This 
25 fabric, when straight warp-threads are used, 
is especially adapted for Cardiganjackets and 
similar articles, in which it is desirable to pre 
vent the lengthening by Wear, while retaining 
otherwise their elasticity. 
3o The drawing shows the manner of interlac 
ing and binding together of the threads in 
the stitch to form a fabric in accordance with 
this invention. 
c is a series of parallel warp-threads; b c, 
When the threads are drawn close the warp 
threads are not ordinarily visible in front or 
on the looped side of the fabric. 
To illustrate the manner of knitting this 
4o fabric and the kind of machinery required 
I will refer to my application filed June 17, 
1878. In it the machine set forth consists of a 
circular loom, with its series of latched nee 
dles and an operating cam-ring combined with 
45 a warp-frame for guiding warp-threads be 
tween the needles, and two thread-carriers, one 
revolving outside and one inside said warps. 
There is also described therein a device for 
laying in a filling-thread or straight weft. 
5o This is not, however, employed by me in car. 
rying out my present invention; but the other 
35 the knitting-threads. 
elements in combination suffice to effect the 
desired result. 
The inner thread-carrier delivers the thread 
marked b, and the outer that marked c, and 55 
the two are looped together by the same nee 
dles simultaneously. 
It is evident that the fabric might be va 
ried in pattern by using a smaller number of 
warp - threads-say between every alternate 6o 
needle-or by changing on the different feeds 
the color either of the inner or outer knit 
ting-thread, or of both; also by introducing 
an additional warp-knitting thread inside or 
outside the warp on every needle, or on al- 65 
ternate needles, or according to a particular 
figure. 
Fabrics in which Warp-knitting and con 
tinuous-knitting threads are united and the 
manner of making the same are, however, 7o 
made the subject of a separate application 
filed by me, of even date herewith. 
In order to enable one skilled in the art 
to manufacture a Cardigan jacket or similar 
article of this fabric, no particular description 75 
is required in view of the foregoing. 
The garment or article is or may be knit 
upon machines of the character indicated by 
substantially similar operations to those for 
knitting ordinary jackets or similar articles 8o 
upon the common forms of knitting machinery. 
I do not intend to limit myself to any par 
ticular mechanism. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion and the manner in which the same is or 85 
may be carried into effect, what I claim, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
A fabric composed of a series of straight 
threads and two knitting-threads interlaced 
and looped together and crossing said straight 9o 
threads on opposite sides, the said fabric be 
ing inelastic in the direction of said straight 
threads, but elastic in the direction at right 
angles thereto, substantially as described. 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 95 
RICHARD F. M. CEIASE. 
Witnesses: 
KOSSUTH R. CASPER, 
B. F. RICE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226696.txt	J. F. BAPTER OSSES. 
Machine for the Manufacture of Buttons, &c. 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
No. 226,696. 
Patented April 20, 1880. 
FI 
Tii 
hadnesses, 
3.07.  
 
'. 
2 sheets-sheet 2. 
. 
Machine for the Manufacture of Buttons, & 0. 
J. F. BAPTER OSSES. 
No. 226,696. 
Z 7. aPatented April 20, 1880. 
st 
3.. 
- 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
sa 33 
% 8 
22 a 
  
A. 
N 
SY 
 
 
SZ S 
SS 
2S 
S2 
 
2 
r--/ 
ZYZa. , 6 
76 
2 
%. IfZ 
E 
SSa 
Z 
mass, P 
7. ?3f6. 
M.PETERS, Photo-likoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JEAN F. BAPTEROSSES, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
MACHINE FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF BUTTONS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 226,696, dated April 20, 1880. 
Application filed January 13, 1880. 
55 
75 
W 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JEAN FELIX BAPTE 
ROSSES, a citizen of the Republic of France, 
and a resident of Paris, France, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Machines for Making Buttons and Similar 
Objects, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a machine for pressing buttons and similar 
objects of plastic material rapidly and under 
any desired pressure, and this object I obtain 
by combining with the piston of a hydraulic 
cylinder and its regulating cocks button-form 
ing devices, as more fully described hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, 
Sheet 1, is a side view of my improved button 
machine. Fig.2. Sheet2, a sectional plan; Fig. 
3, a vertical section of part of the press; and 
Figs. 4, 5, and 6, sectional views of the cocks 
S. supplying the fluid to the hydraulic cylin 
0. 
On the frame X of the machine are mounted 
the vertical standards X', supporting the hy 
draulic cylinder A, the body of which is suffi 
ciently strong to withstand great pressures. 
To this cylinder is adapted a piston, B, having 
the usual rod C passing through a stuffing-box 
in the end of the cylinder. The joints around 
the cylinder-head, piston, and stuffing-box are 
rendered Water-tight by means offlanged strips 
D, of leather, rubber, or other suitable pack 
ing material, the pressure of the liquid insur 
ing the tightness of the joint. 
To the lower end of the piston-rod is secured 
an extension of the presser-plate G of the but 
ton-forming devices Y, which may be of the 
character described in the Letters Patent 
granted to me August 12, 1873, No. 141,749. 
As shown in Fig. 3, the piston-rod has a 
longitudinal opening at its lower end and a 
transverse slot at right angles thereto. In 
this opening is a bar, F, having a rack at its 
upper part and carrying at its lower end the 
plate which carries the pins for piercing the 
holes in the buttons, as described in my above 
mentioned patent. This bar F is supported 
between an anti-friction roller, e, in the slot 
above referred to and the toothed end of a 
hand-lever, H, pivoted to the piston-rod at I, 
also in said slot. By acting on this lever the 
pin-carrying plate may be raised or lowered. 
The space in the cylinder above the piston 
and that below the piston may be made to 
communicate with either a water-reservoir at 
a medium pressure or an accumulator at a 
high pressure through pipes P P', provided 
with cocks KL and pipes M and N. 
Suppose the piston B to be at the top of its 
stroke and the cocks K and L to be in the po 
sitions indicated by full lines in Figs. 4 and 5, 
the water from the reservoir entering through 
the pipe M descends into the pipe N through 
the cock L, and thence through the cock K 
and pipe P to the space above the piston. 
The liquid below the piston can flow out 
through the pipe P and escape-pipe Q. The 
piston B descends under this pressure and 
carries with it the presser-plate, which imparts 
to the ceramic objects a preliuminary pressure. 
The operator then acting on the lever H de 
presses the pin-plate and turns the cock K to 
the position shown by dotted lines in Fig. 5. 
With the cocks in these positions the space 
above the piston is in communication with 
the accumulator through the tubes R and P 
and the space below the piston with the escape 
outlet Q, as before. The piston continuing to 
descend under the increased pressure, the but 
tons will be compressed to the required degree. 
The cock K being then turned to its original 
position and the cock L turned to the position 
shown by dotted lines in Fig. 4, the space 
below the piston is put in communication with 
the reservoir and the space above the piston 
in communication with the outlet Q, so that 
the piston will be raised to its original posi 
tion and the pressed objects can be removed 
from the press to the baking-oven. 
Thus by simply manipulating suitable cocks 
I am enabled to impart to the buttons or other 
objects a gradual pressure, which can be in 
creased to almost any extent, so that the ob 
jects which by this means are compactly 
pressed do not contract in the subsequent 
baking operation, and consequently are not 
apt to get out of shape. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of a hydraulic cylinder, 
piston, presser-plate, and button-molding de 
IO 
35 
45 
So 
95 
CO 
2 
-: 
226,696 
vices Y with pipes P P, cock L, communi- gearing with said bar, all substantially as set Io 
cating with the reservoir and outlet, the pipe forth. 
N, and cock K, communicating with an accu- 
mulator, all substantially as described. 
rying the presser-plate G and having an 
opening at its lower end, with the rack-bar 
F, carrying the pin-plate, and with the pivoted 
hand-lever H, having a toothed outer end 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two 
2. The combination of the piston-rod, car- subscribing witnesses. 
JEAN FELIX BAPTEROSSES. 
Witnesses: 
JoSEPH DELAGEY, 
ROBT. M. HOOPER. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226797.txt	E. H, SHOEMAKER, 
Car-Axle Box. 
No. 226,797. 
Patented April 20, 1880. . 
 
4 
 
Referee-eeler 
a. 
O2 
 
NY 
| N3 
 
  
 
  
 
 
. 
.. 
36 32 3N 
 
 
 
Witnesse?. NNY 
.5%-44 (6%e2% 
Ifat'evator: 
"/2-2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIAS H. SEIOEMAKER, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE - HALF OF 
HIS RIGHT TO JACKSON D. CONDON, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR-AXE BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 226,797, dated April 20, 1880. 
Application filed January 27, 1880. 
IS 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELIAS H. SHOEMAKER, 
of Columbus, in the county of Franklin and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Car-Axle Boxes; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification, and 
in which 
Figure I is a longitudinal section of my in 
proved car-axle box with the axle in side view. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal section on the line at a 
of Fig. i. Fig. 3 is a vertical transverse sec 
tion on the line y y of Fig. 1; and Fig. 4 is a 
perspective view of the dust-plate removed 
from the axle or lubricator box. 
In car axle or shaft boxes or lubricator 
boxes an enlarged opening is left in that end 
of the box through which the axle or shaft 
enters the box, to permit the axle or journal 
to have a limited amount of play without com 
ing into forcible contact there with. This en 
largement of the opening, it is evident, would 
allow of the escape of the lubricant, or the in 
gress of dust or extraneous particles at that 
point, were not provision made to guard against 
their occurrence. 
The object of my invention is to supply this 
provision, and thereby avoid these disad 
vantages of the waste of the lubricant and the 
ingress of dust, &c., to the lubricator; and to 
these ends it consists of a dust-plate with an 
upwardly-inclined arm or arms, and in certain 
details of construction, substantially as here 
inafter more fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, A refers 
to an ordinary car-axle box or lubricator-box, 
with the axle or journal B in position therein, 
and held to its placeby the brass d. That 
end of the box through which the shaft or 
axle enters the box is provided, as is usual, 
with an enlarged opening, c, to give the shaft 
the desired amount of play. The slided closes 
the upper part of this opening, while its lower 
part is closed by the dust-plate C, which pre 
35 
45 
55 
vents the escape of the lubricant or ingress of So 
dust or extraneous particles at that point. 
This dust-plate consists of an upright board 
or plate, e, which is adjusted or held between 
cleats did, forming grooves or flanges upon 
the inside of the box, and is held with its con 
caved edge against the under side of the shaft 
or axle by the cotton-waste f, wedged or pushed 
under it, as seen in Fig. 1. 
To the inner side of the board or plate e is 
attached an arm, e', or it may beformed or cast 
in one piece there with. The upper side of this 
arm is concaved near the part e, to serve as a 
drain for the dripping lubricant, from which 
it passes upon the cotton-Waste to be again 
fed to the shaft or journal. The under side 
of this arm is provided with spaced-apart or 
separated pendants or studs g, to assist the 
holding of the waste under the arm and part 
e of the dust-plate. 
The arm e' is, furthermore, provided with 
prongsee', extending a considerable distance 
back under the shaft or axle, as seen in Fig. 
1, to serve, by being inclined upward, for 
guiding the pushing or passing of the cotton 
waste under the dust-plate, while the space 
between the prongs permits the waste to come 
into immediate contact with the under side of 
the shaft or journal. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The combination, with an axle-box, of a 
movable dust-plate having an arm extending 
over the waste, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. The dust-plate or upright e, provided with 
a concaved arm, e', substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. In a dust-plate, the upright e, provided 
with the arm e', having upon its under side 
studs or pendants g, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. In a dust-plate, the upright e, provided 
with the arm ef, having an upper concaved 
surface, and its under surface provided with 
pendants or studs g, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
5. In a dust-plate, the upright e, provided 
85 
95 
75 
H 
2 . 
226,797 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I to 
with the arme', having the prongse disposed 
in an inclined position, substantially as and have hereunto set my hand this 16th day of 
for the purpose specified. 
6. The combination of the dust-plate com- 
posed of the upright e, provided with the arm 
e', with the lubricator or axle box A, having 
cleats, grooves, or flanges for holding the dust- 
plate in position therein, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
ELIAS H. SHOEMAKER. 
January, 1880. 
. 
Witnesses: 
WM. E. RENTZ, 
FRANK KOCH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226897.txt	J. WOOD, 
Stock-Car, 
N.PETERS, Photo-LITHoggAPHER, wasRIxGrok, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN WOOD, OF COOPERSTOWN, NEW YORK. 
STOCK-CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 226,897, dated April 27, 1880. 
Application filed IFebruary 16, 1880. 
To all whom it may concer?, : 
Be it known that I, JoHN WOOD, of Coop 
erstown, in the county of Otsego and State of 
New York, have invented certain new Im 
provements on Railroad-Cars for Carrying Cat 
tle; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full and exact description thereof, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, making a part of this specification 
Figure 1 being a cross-section, and Fig. 2 a. 
longitudinal section on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe its con 
struction. 
I construct the car with two bottoms a small 
distance apart, the lower bottom, AA, tight 
and inclined each way toward the center, where 
there is an opening to let out all the wet and 
prevent its getting onto the trucks or rails. 
B B is the upper bottom, which supports the 
weight of the cattle. It is made of scantling 
or small timbers, placed about one inch apart 
to let the wet pass through onto the lower 
bottom, so the animals can stand dry. These 
floor-scantlings can be framed into the tim 
bers on each side of the car by cutting gains 
in said timbers for the end of the floor-scant 
ling to fitin in such a way that they can belifted 
out at any time to clean the tight floor under 
them, or for any other purpose. 
C is a door about one foot wide, extending 
the whole length of the car on each side. It 
can be made in as many sections as desired. 
Said doors are attached to the car by hinges 
at the lower edge, so as to let down for the 
purpose of cleaning out the car, which can 
be washed out with a hose while the cattle are 
in it before going into market. There are 
swing-brackets attached to the sides of the 
car, which are turned out to support the doors 
C in a horizontal position when they are open, 
and said doors form a platform to stand or 
Walk on to feed or water the cattle. Said 
doors when open must be about even with the 
upper side of the scantling-floor. 
D is a portion of the side of the car over 
the doors C, and is about one foot wide. 
E are boxes for feed and water, attached to 
the side of the car on the part D. I prefer 
iron as being the best material to make them 
of, with hooks or some other device at the top 
to connect them to the car in such a manner 
that said hooks act the part of hinges and 
permit said boxes E to be turned up and 
emptied of Water or anything they may con 
taim. 
F is a door on the sides and extending the 
length of the car, about one foot wide, for the 
purpose of being opened to give the cattle 
fresh air, feed, or water, and also for emptying 
anything that may be left in the boxes E on 
the outside of the cars, 
G is a door about one foot wide, extending 
the whole length of the car, about six inches 
from the top. It lets down for the purpose of 
ventilation, and also to put hay or fodder into 
the rack K. Said rack may be constructed of 
iron or wood and placed sufficiently high to 
prevent the cattle (which stand with their hind 
parts toward it) from discharging their manure 
upon it. 
Mare stanchions, placed about two feet from 
each other and about two feet from the side 
of the car. I believe bass-Wood or some other 
similar light wood the best material to make 
them of; but they might be made of iron. 
They are twelve to fifteen inches wide and 
from one and a half to two inches thick, with 
the edges planed and the corners taken off to 
prevent the cattle being hurt on them. These 
stanchions are placed alternately in such a 
manner that the cattle stand heads and tails. 
Said stanchions are loose and secured in their 
places as the cattle are put in the cars. These 
stanchions are attached to the car by mortises 
in the floor-scantling, and also in the top of 
the car, the mortise in the top of the car to 
be the deepest to permit the top end of the 
stanchion to be put into it first sufficiently far 
to permit the bottom end to go into the mor 
tise in the floor, the mortise in the floor being 
so much shallower than the top mortise that 
it will not permit the stanchion to come out 
of the top mortise when it is put into the floor 
mortise, and when said stanchion is in its 
place there is a button on each side of it at 
the top end, which, being turned with the ends 
against the top of the car, forms a shoulder 
and prevents the said stanchions being lifted 
55 
?? 
65 
75 
85 
95 
? ? ? 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
226,897 
for the purpose of tying the cattle. I think 
a strap preferable to a chain, because in case 
of accident it can be cut and the cattle liber 
ated; but if a chain were used it might be an 
impossibility to loose them. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a stock-car, the broad stanchions M, 
provided with attaching-rods O and suitable 
straps and rings for the purpose of separating 
and securing the animals in a car, substan 
tially as specified. 
2. The tight inclined bottom with an open 
ing in the center, the open scantling bottom 
B B, and the door C, combined and arranged 
as and for the purpose specified. 
JOHN WOOD. 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL HARPER, 
EDGAR H. LAKE. 
25 
35 
O 
out of the bottom mortise, and thus secures it 
in its proper place; but other devices may be 
used to connect them to the car. 
Mortises may be made a few inches apart 
5 for the purpose of contracting or expanding 
the space between the stanchions to corre 
spond with the size of cattle. 
For wild and dangerous cattle, mortises may 
be made through the top of the car and the 
stanchions put through from the top and se 
cured in their place by a pin or some other 
suitable device, and when these wide stan 
chions are fastened in place said cattle cannot 
turn around or get away, whether they are tied 
and fastened or not. These broad stanchions 
can be connected with and used on cattle-cars 
now in use. 
O is an iron rod about three feet long, firmly 
secured to the front edge of the stanchion, 
2O. With a ring and Strap, rope, or chain upon it 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US226997.txt	D. A. GREEN & J. H. ROBERTS 
Adjustable-Truck. 
No. 226,997. 
Patented April 27, 188O. 
Witnesses, 
-who-- (3 v-v and 
-2a2...e. (772-v- 
T. 4. 
a-e-Zee, 4%to 
C. grazz 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID A. GREEN AND JAMES H. ROBERTS, OF RUSHVILLE, INDIANA. 
ADJUSTABLE TRUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 226,997, dated April 27, 1880. 
Application filed April 9, 1879. 
their outer ends the projections DD D3 D3. 
Be it known that we, DAVID A. GREEN and The projections D on the beams D D are 
turned down and the projections D on the 
beams D'are turned up, as shown. This con 
struction and arrangement is made in order 
to provide an even or level surface above to 
receive the shoe E, and also an even or level 
surface below to receive the caster. 
The metal plate B, Fig. 3, is turned down 
Ward at its outward ends, forming flanges, and 
is also provided with a guide-flange across the 
center parallel with the flanges at the outer 
ends, thereby making a space or way in which 
the beams D D are inserted. It is also pro 
vided with a round hole, G, in the center, 
through which the bolt or set-screw A, Figs. 
4 and 5, passes. 
The metal plate C, Fig. 2, is made the same 
as plate B, Fig. 3, excepting the hole F, which 
is made square to prevent the bolt or set-screw 
A, Figs. 4 and 5, from turning in the same. 
In the metal plates B and C the guide or 
flanges across the center and parallel with the 
flanges at the ends may be omitted, as shown 
in Fig. 6. 
The beams D DD" D are made a little 
thicker than the depth of the flanges of the 
metal plates B and C, thereby admitting the 
pressure on beams D D D'D' by tightening 
the set-screws A, as shown in Fig. 5. The 
set-screw A is made square at the bottom or 
head to fit the square hole F, Fig. 2, and 
round at the upper end to fit the round hole 
G, Fig. 3. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The combination of the beams D D D D 
and metal plates B and C, connected by bolt 
or set-screw A, substantially as set forth. 
DAVID A. GREEN. 
JAMES H. ROBERTS. 
To all chon it may concern: 
JAMEs E. ROBERTs, both of the town of Rush 
ville, in the county of Rush and the State of 
Indiana, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Adjustable Trucks, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The invention relates to trucks used for 
moving stoves and barrels, and trucks used 
in mercantile houses. Beretofore such trucks 
have been made by connecting the ends of 
two beams together, thus forming a section, 
and connecting the sections by bolts. This 
method is objectionable because one beam can 
not be adjusted without affecting the one con 
nected with it, or both sections, preventing a 
free and independent adjustment of each beam 
of the frame. 
The object of this invention is to make a 
truck-frame that will conform to any desired 
adjustment of the beams, and that either beam 
may be drawn out or pushed in without affect 
ing the adjustment of the other beams, and, 
further, by the means of the metal plates which 
connect the four beams a greater strength is 
secured. 
It consists of a series of four beams arranged 
in pairs, the beams of each pair being placed 
so that their outer ends project in opposite di 
rections, while their inner ends interlap and 
slide past each other in the same horizontal 
plane, the whole series being held together by 
upper and under clamping-plates, as will be 
hereinafter fully explained. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure 1 is a side view of a beam detached. 
Figs. 2 and 3 are metal plates. Fig. 4 is the 
metal plates joined together by bolt in the 
center. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of a de 
vice embodying our invention with casters at 
tached, and Fig.6 shows one of the clamping 
plates formed without the central guide or 
flange. 
The beams D D, DD have provided on 
Witnesses: 
AMBROSE BARNARD, 
DANIEL F. FLEENER. 
55 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US227097.txt	C. D. COLLINS. 
Shoes. 
Patented May 4, 1880. 
No. 227,097. 
 
Z72 were for. 
NPETERS. Photo-LithogRAPHER, WASHINGron, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CAROLINE D. COLLINS, OF LEBANON, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
SHOE. 
SPECIFICAON forming part of Letters Patent No. 227,097, dated May 4, 1880. 
Application filed November 17, 1879. 
O 
To all chon it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, CAROLINE DRAKE COL 
LINS, of Lebanon, of the county of Grafton 
and State of New Hampshire, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Shoes; and 
I do hereby declare the same to be described 
in the following specification and represented 
in the accompanying drawings, of which 
Figure 1 is a side view, and Fig. 2 a longi 
tudinal section, of a shoe provided with my 
improvement. Fig. 3 is a top view of the 
removable tap-sole. Fig. 4 is a view of the 
bottom of the shoe with its portion of the tap 
sole fastening. Fig. 5 is a perspective view 
of the fastening-key. 
My invention consists, first, in the combina 
tion of a boot or shoe with a removable tap 
sole and appliances, as set forth, for readily 
connecting the tap-sole to the shoe and ad 
mitting of the separation of such tap - sole 
from the shoe; second, in the removable tap 
sole as provided at its toe with the shoe-toe 
socket and at the opposite end with the me 
tallic key-receiver, as set forth; third, in a 
shoe or boot provided on its sole with a me 
tallic key-receiver, as set forth, for aiding in 
fastening to the shoe or boot, by means of a 
metallic key, as described, a removable tap 
sole, as set forth. 
The object of my invention is not only to 
save wear of the main sole of a shoe or boot, 
but to enable a tap-sole to be readily fixed 
thereto and removed therefrom as occasion 
may require. 
In the drawings, A. denotes a shoe having 
extended across its sole, at the front part of 
the shank thereof, a metallic key-receiver, B, 
which consists of a narrow strip of metal hav 
ing a dovetail groove, a, extending through it 
lengthwise, as shown. The sole is grooved 
transversely to receive the receiver. B, which 
is secured to the sole by screws b b. 
A similar receiver, C, is similarly fixed to 
and arranged with the removable tap-sole E, 
45 the said two receivers B and C being to en 
35 
25 
gage with a duplex dovetailed key, D, formed 
intransverse section, as represented, such key, 
on being forced into both of the receivers, 
serving with them to connect the tap-sole at 
its inner end to the sole of the shoe, the said 
tap-sole being at its front end provided with 
a toe-tip or socket-piece, F, to receive the toe 
of the shoe in manner as shown. 
The toe-tip and the receivers and key serve 
to connect the tap-sole to the shoe, from which 
it may be readily disconnected after and by 
removing the key from the two receivers. 
The key is to fit to the receivers with suffi. 
cient friction to prevent it from accidentally 
working out of place while the shoe may be 
in use. 
From the above it will be seen that with a 
shoe or a boot provided with a removable tap 
sole and appliances, as described, or their 
equivalents, for connecting it to the shoe, the 
tap-sole can be used to preserve the shoe-sole 
from wear, and when such tap-sole may be 
come worn, so as to be rendered unservice 
able, it may be easily removed from the shoe 
by the wearer and another or fresh one sub 
stituted; or the shoe may be worn with or 
Without the tap-sole, as occasion may require. 
I do not claim a shoe having a tap-sole per 
manently fastened to it either by cement, 
nails, pegs, or stitching. 
What I claim as my invention is as follows, 
WZ, 
1. The removable tap-sole provided at its 
toe with the shoe-toe tip or socket-piece and at 
its inner end or part with the metallic key-re 
ceiver, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination of the key and its two 
receivers, as described, with the shoe and the 
tap-sole and with the toe-tip or socket extend 
ing from the said tap-sole, as set forth. 
MRs. CAROLINE DRAKE COLLINS. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. EDDY, 
W. W. LUNT, 
55 
65 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US227198.txt	Machine for Doubling, &c., Strands of Fibrous Material. 
J. E. & E. ATWOOD, 
 
No. 227,198. 
Patented May 4, 1880. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN E. ATWOOD AND EUGENE ATWOOD, OF STONINGTON, CONN. 
MACHINE FOR DOUBLING, &c., STRANDS OF FIBROUS MATERIAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 227,198, dated May 4, 1880. 
Application filed September 12, 1878. 
IS 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JoHN E. ATWOOD and 
EUGENEATWOOD, both of Stonington, in the 
county of New London and State of Connecti 
cut, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Machines for Doubling, Wind 
ing, and Equalizing Strands of Fibrous Mate 
rial, of which the following is a description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification. 
This invention relates to machines for doub 
ling, winding, and equalizing strands com 
posed of various fibers or material; and it 
consists in certain combinations of devices for 
conducting the threads to and from the equal 
izing devices, and for preventing waste and 
snarling from slack threads when the winding 
bobbin stops. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure l 
represents a front elevation of a machine for 
doubling, winding, and equalizing strands; 
Fig. 2, a side elevation of the same; and Fig. 
3, a further partly-sectional side view in part, 
showing certain working devices, including a 
drop-lever, in a different position to that rep 
resented for them in Fig. 2. 
A. A. are the bobbins or spools, of which 
there may be two or more, carrying the 
strands to be doubled, wound, and equalized. 
These spools are preferably arranged at or 
near the base of the machine, and the threads 
b from each spool are passed up through drop 
wires B B, which are pivoted below at c and 
set inclining slightly backward, so that in case 
of the threads which pass through them break 
ing, or one or more of the spools A from be 
low running off their product, the drop wire 
or wires of such thread or threads will fall 
against an upright stop-lever, C, and arrest 
the motion of the winding-bobbin D, in the 
manner shown in Fig. 3. 
The course of the threads b after leaving the 
drop-wires is over a support or rod, E, and 
through a guide, G, within which they are 
doubled or collected, and from whence they 
pass to and several times around two equaliz 
ing-rolls, H, which are carried by an inde 
35 
45 
 
55 
pendent stand, I, the guide G being arranged 
on one side of said stand, and serving to di 
rect the doubled threads onto one end of the 
rolls H, from whence they are spread by their 
repeated passes over so much of the length of 
said rolls as may be necessary. These rolls 
H may be arranged at any suitable distance 
apart, one above the other, and are hung 
disconnected from each other within the 
stand I. 
To keep the doubled strands or threads b in 
proper spread position upon the rolls H, said 
strands are run through or between a grooved 
separator, L, between the rolls E, and which 
may be formed of a spiral spring or coil hav 
ing a pin, M, arranged longitudinally through 
it. The doubled threads b, after they make 
their final pass around the rolls H, are passed 
through a drop or take-up wire, N, which 
serves to prevent waste and snarling from 
slack threads when the take-up bobbin ID stops. 
From this drop or take-up wire N the doubled 
strands b pass up through the separator L, 
back of the pin M, to and through a guide, d, 
on a traverse-bar, O, and from thence onto 
the take-up bobbin D. 
P is the main shaft, which serves to give 
motion, by a pinion, e, to a wheel, f, that in 
its turn gives motion, by a crank or wrist pin, 
g, and rod h and lever i, to the traverse-bar O. 
Said shaft P also serves to give motion by 
pinions k and l to the spindle S of the take-up 
bobbin D. 
We claim 
1. The combination of the thread or strand 
guide G, the equalizing - rolls H, and the 
grooved separator L, substantially as speci 
2. The combination, with the equalizing 
rolls H, of the take-up wire N, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
fied. 
w 
75 
JOEN E. ATWOOD. 
EUGENE AT WOOD. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. CoWAN, 
C. H. HOLDREDGE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US227299.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 227,299. 
Fig.1. 
C. A. RANDALI. 
Perforating-Stamp. 
. 
Patented May 4, 1880. 
le. Aisy. 2. 
 
E. 
s 
  
  
II 
MLN 
asses les 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
22 
 
 
 
 
R 
 
B6. 
NS 
f 
in 
ii)/, 
2. 52 i 
471, 
7. 
 
 
 
N 
ETTItal/- " - Y 
Trayezazor. 
Charles/7 Fiandoll 
se 
Zety. 
NPETERs, PHoro-LTHOGRAPHER, washLNGTON, D.C. 
 
 
'...}. 
"f 
his 
first 
i 
" ; 
i. i. 
ly in :- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. RANDALL OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PERFORATING STAM P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 227,299, dated May 4, 1880. 
Application filed March 29, 1880. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES A. RANDALL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State of 
5 New York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Embossing Hand-Stamps, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of em 
bossing hand-stamps which are adapted 
mainly for use in offices and counting-houses 
for roughening the surfaces of monetary pa 
pers where numbers and amounts are written, 
in order to prevent alteration or raising. 
Embossing hand-stamps have heretofore 
been of two kinds, in one of which the mova 
ble die is operated by percussion for emboss. 
ing, and retracted by a spring, the percussion 
being produced by a blow from the hand upon 
a head formed upon the stem carrying the die. 
Such stamps are quite rapid and effective, but 
their tise is objectionable on account of the re 
quired blow by the hand, which becomes very 
painful if repeated often at short intervals. 
In the other kind of stamp referred to the 
movable die is impelled for pressure by a cam 
lever, the pressure upon the material to be em 
bossed being gradual instead of percussive. 
While in such a press the disagreeable blow by 
the hand is not required and great power is ob. 
tained, it is not so rapid in action, and does not 
produce the clear, sharp, well-defined impres 
sion upon the material which is effected by the 
sick strike and retraction of the percussive 
0. It is the object of my invention to combine 
in an embossing hand-stamp the desirable 
qualities of the two kinds of stamp above re 
ferred to, while discarding or obviating the 
objectionable features of both; and to this end 
it consists, mainly, in a hand-stamp so con 
structed that the movable die is operated for 
embossing by the force of a spring which is 
first placed under tension by means of a le 
yer, and suddenly tripped or released to exert 
its resilient action upon said die, giving it a 
percussive action upon the material and sta 
tionary die. Thus the lever is the only part 
operated by hand, while at the same time are 
secured the efficiency and rapidity of percus 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of an embossing hand-stamp 
constructed according to my invention. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section of the same. Fig. 3 is 
an elevation, illustrating the action of the le- 55 
wer and trip-dog. Fig. 4 is a view, partly in 
section, of a modification of the apparatus. 
The letter A indicates the stationary or bed 
die, secured to a suitable base, B, from which 
rises a curved standard, C, carrying rigidly 
at its upper end a vertical barrel, D. 
The movable die E is fixed to a stem, e, 
which extends upward into the open lower end 
of barrel D, and against the upper end of the 
stem e bears a strong spiral spring, F, which 
is inclosed by the barrel D, and the upper end 
of which bears against an annular flange or 
shoulder, f, projecting from the inner surface 
of said barrel. 
A stud, G, projects from the stem e through 
a slot, h, formed in the barrel D, and under 
this stud takes the end of a sliding dog, I, car 
ried by the hand-lever J, which is fulcrumed 
to the curved standard C. 
The fulcrum-pin j of the hand-lever passes 
through a slot, i, at about the middle of the 
dog, and a pin, j', projecting from said lever, 
passes through another slot, i, in the outer 
portion of said dog, these slots being of such 
length as to permit the dog to slide rearwardly 
to escape or clear the stud G, and forward to 
take under said stud, as shown in Fig. l. 
When the long arm or handle of the lever 
J is depressed the dog forces the stem e up 
ward, compressing the spring F until, in the 
arc of its movement, said dog leaves the stud, 
as shown in Fig. 3, and the spring, being thus 
released, drives the stem e and the movable 
die forcibly downward upon the bed- die A 
giving a quick percussive blow upon the ma 
terial which is placed upon said bed-die to b 
embossed. At the moment the dog I in it 
upward movement escapes the stud G sai 
dog is caused by gravity to slide rearwardl 
to the position shown in dotted lines, Fig. : 
so that it will clear the stud in a downwar 
movement, and when the lever is then raise 
to the position shown in dotted lines, Fig. 
the dog slides forward, so as to again take u: 
der the stud ready for operating the die. 
In order that,the upper die may be prompt 
retracted from the bed-die, a rod, K, provid 
5o sive action. 
25 
35 
45 
22,299 
2 
with a head, k, extends downward through the 
upper portion of the barrel D, and is screwed 
into the upper end of the stem e, its headle 
resting upon a spiral spring, l, which stands 
upon the upper surface of the flange or shoul 
der fin the barrel. 
The spring F is of such length that it does 
not force the upper die against the bed-die, 
except when under expansive action, the lat 
ter part of its stroke being made against the 
tension of spring l, so that when the stroke of 
said spring Fis completed the spring limine 
diately acts against the head k to lift the up 
per die from the material and bed-die. 
By adjusting the length of rod K, by means 
of its screw-connection with stem e, the height 
to which the upper die may be raised can be 
regulated to correspond to the thickness of the 
material operated upon. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 4 the ex 
tra lifting-spring and the sliding dog are dis 
pensed with. 
The driving - spring F has its lower end 
firmly secured to the stem e, and its upper end 
fixed at the top of the barrel, the length of the 
spring being such that after delivering its 
stroke under the influence of its recoil after 
3ompression it will retract sufficiently to raise 
ihe upper die a predetermined distance from 
the bed-die. 
The sliding dog being omitted, the lever J 
has its inner arm prolonged to act in lieu of 
said dog, and the lever is slotted, as at , to 
ymbrace its fulcrum-pin and to permit it to 
lide forward and rearward to engage or clear 
he stud G, as desired. The inner end of the 
ever is beveled, (as is also the end of the dog 
when used,) in order that it may be forced 
earward should it strike the stude in moving 
ownward. 
I am aware that a continuously-operative 
stamp has been provided with a revolving 
stamping-pad carried by a lever which is 
raised by cams at certain points of its revolu 
tion and depressed by a spring when it es 
capes from said cams, the lever being carried 
by a shaft driven by gear-connection with a 
crank-shaft, and I do not claim such a stamp 
or any of its separate parts. 
Having now described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In an embossing hand-stamp, the combi 
nation, with the bed-die, the movable die, and 
a fixed guide for confining said movable die 
to rectilinear motion, of a spring acting upon 
the movable die, a hand-lever for moving said 
movable die from the bed-die against the ten 
sion of the spring, and means for disconnect 
ing said hand-lever from and connecting it 
with the said movable die, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination, with the movable die 
having stem e, provided with stud G, of the 
barrel D, slotted to embrace said stud, a lever 
for bearing against stud and moving stem e 
inwardly of the barrel, the spring F, bearing 
upon said stem e, the rod K, engaging with . 
said stem and provided with head k, and the 
Spring l, supporting said head, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the movable die 
having stem e, provided with stud G, of the 
slotted supporting-barrel, the lever J, and the 
freely-sliding dog carried by said lever, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
eSSES 
sCHARLES. A. RANDALL. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs G. COE, 
HARRY S. GOODRIDGE. 
45 
So 
55 
o 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US227399.txt	H. WOJAN. 
0X-B0 W F a stem er, 
 
 
 
ORNEYS, 
N. Peters, photo-lifograph 
ER. WASRNGTOIN, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERRMANN WOJAN, OF GOLDEN's BRIDGE, NEW YORK. 
Ox-Bow FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 227,399, dated May 11, 1880. 
Application filed October 15, 1879. 
To all ????? ?? ??? ???cern. : 
Be it known that I, HERRMANN WoJAN, of 
Golden's Bridge, in the county of Westches 
ter and State of New York, have invented a 
new and Improved Ox-Bow Fastener, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved ox-bow, fastener which is 
simple in construction and convenient in use. 
The invention consists in an ox-bow fast. 
ener formed of two annular plates, between 
which an adjustable lever is pivoted eccentri 
cally, and is acted upon by a cam-lever, also 
pivoted between the two plates. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of my improved ox-bow fastener. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view, showing the appara 
tus closediand having the top plate removed. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view, showing the apparatus 
opened and having the top plate removed. Fig. 
4 is a vertical Cross-sectional elevation on the 
line av aw of Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
Two annular plates, A and B, are connected 
with each other by means of four posts, C, C, 
C, and C, so that there is sufficient space be 
tween the plates to receive the mechanism of 
the apparatus, as is shown in Fig. 4. 
The lower plate, B, resting upon the yolke, 
is provided with two or more angular lugs or 
hooks, D D, for fastening the apparatus to the 
yoke, which is provided with a slotted plate or 
some other suitable device, into which the lugs 
D D can pass. 
A small fiat cylindrical piece, E, is eccen 
trically pivoted on the pin C, and is embraced 
by the eye F of a curved lever, G, the other 
end of which terminates in an angular projec 
tion, H, against which a spiral spring, I, fast 
ened to the plates in some suitable manner, 
presses to keep the lever G back when the ap 
paratus is Open. 
A cam-lever, J, provided with a small notch, 
j, is pivoted on the post C' in such a manner 
that the projection H of the lever G rests 
against the cam, as is shown in Figs. 2 and 3. 
A slotted plate, K, is pivoted to the top 
plate, A and a thumb-screw,L, passes through 
the slot in K and through the slot fin the top 
plate, A, and takes in a screw-hole in E. 
The operation is as follows: The apparatus 
is fastened to the yoke over one of the aper 
tures for each bow, so that when the bow is 
passed into the yoke one of the ends of the 
how will pass through the opening of the ap 
paratus, the same being opened, as shown in 
Fig. 3. The cam-lever J is drawn in the di 
rection of the arrow a', and will press the 
curved lever G against the bow until the point 
of the projection El rests against the straight 
edge k of the cam-lever, and the lever G is 
thus locked in this position. 
AS OX-bows of various sizes are used the ap 
paratus must be adjusted accordingly. This 
is done by moving the thumb-screw L in the 
direction of b in case a thin bow is used, for 
then the center around which G turns will 
have moved forward in the direction of c', and 
Consequently G will cover a corresponding 
greater part of the opening in the plates. If 
the screw L is moved in the direction opposite 
to l', the center around which G turns will 
also move back, and G will cover a smaller 
part of the opening in the plates. By screw 
ing the thumb-screw up tight the center of G. 
can be maintained in any desired position. 
If the improved fastening is used, the bows 
need not be weakened by holes, notches, &c., 
which were required for the fastenings in use 
heretofore. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ellt 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, 
the within-described ox-bow fastener, consist 
ing of tWO annular plates, between which an 
adjustable curved lever, G, acted upon by a 
Spring, I, and turning upon an eccentric, E, 
and a cam-lever, J, are pivoted, substantially 
as shown, and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the curved lever, G, 
With the slotted piece K, thumb-screw Lu, and 
eccentric E, substantially as herein shown and 
described, and for the purpose of adjusting 
the lever G to suit the different sizes of the 
bows. 
HERRMANN WOJAN, 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR BRADY, 
MARTIN TODD. 
II. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
?? 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US227499.txt	(Model.) 
J. E. De GRUSH & J. WROATH. 
Side-Bar Vehicle. 
No. 227,499. 
 
Patented May 11, 188O. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. DE GRUSH AND JOHN WROATH, OF SANDY HILL NEW YORK. 
SDE BAR VEH CE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 227,499, dated May 11, 1880, 
Application filed March 20, 1880. (Model.) 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES E. DE GRUSH 
and JOHN WROATH, of Sandy Hill, in the 
county of Washington and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Side-Bar Vehicles; and we do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form part of this specification. 
The nature of our invention relates to the 
construction and arrangement of a buckboard 
wagon, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
forth, and pointed out in the claim. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which our invention appertains to make and 
use the same, we will now proceed to describe 
its construction and operation, referring to the 
annexed drawings, in which 
Figure l is a perspective view of our device, 
and Fig. 2 is a cross-section. 
A represents the front axle, with head-block 
B, and C is the rear axle. The head-block 
B and rear axle, C, are connected by the two 
bars or boards DD, which form what is known 
as the buckboard. 
E is the seat-frame above the boards D, 
said frame being supported upon posts or 
blocks ag, extending upward from the side 
bars, FF. These side bars are connected by 
and supported upon sills G. G., which pass un 
w 
Witnesses: 
BURRITT L. BUCK, 
ALBT. O. HAWKS. 
lder and are secured to the boards DD. A 
rod or bar, H, connects the front sill with the 
head-block B. 
Under the boards DD is placed a cross-bar, 
I, and above or on top of the frame E is an 
other cross-bar, I', which two bars are (on 
nected and held in place by a central screw, J. 
By this device the spring of the buckboard 
can be regulated very quickly, according to the 
weight of the load, or according as the road is 
rough or smooth, without getting out of the 
Wagon. 
This device may be used with a wagon-body 
on the buckboard, and it will spring as easy 
as if there were only a seat fastened to it. 
The device is simple, cheap, and durable, 
and not liable to break or get out of order, 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
In combination with the buckboard D D 
and frame E, the cross-bars II and the con 
necting and regulating screw J, Substantially 
as and for the purposes herein set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we affix our signatures in presence 
of two Witnesses. 
JAMES E. DE GRUSH, 
JOHN WEROATH, 
35 
45 
So 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US227599.txt	4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Sheet-Delivery Apparatus for Printing-Machines, 
Patented May 11, 1880. 
No. 227,599. 
S. D. TUCKER, 
S. 
--M.- 
as 
82 
3. 
- 
 
S $ 3 
s 
% 
%\ 
"%\ 
R S 
try & 
S 
w 
EEEAS E.6S 
 
Y 
S. 
se 
R 
R 
R 
S 
S 
N 
S) 
S 
R 
 
- 
-H 
C 
Ra 
$ 
H 
r 
S. 
s 
Zve Yver, 
5eeweero Z). Zociez. 
y 6. a 62% 
-zzeeras. 
N.PETERs, Phoro-LTHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
S. D., TUCKER 
Sheet-Delivery Apparatus for Printing-Machines, 
Patented May 11, 1880. 
No. 227,599. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
5 
ZZ Z2eaz. 
eresteya . 
Peters, Photo-LithogRAPHER, WASHINgton, D.C. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Sheet-Delivery Apparatus for. Printing-Ma Chines, 
Patented May 11, 1880. 
No. 227,599. 
S. D. TUCKER 
 
y 
w 
SS 
vi. &R 
area. 
s 
(S) 
6s 
x S 
S S S 
YN S. N 
e X 
& 
N 
N 
(o) S 
N S 
S 
S N S S N y 
y 
SN y 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Sheet-Delivery Apparatus for Printing-Machines. 
No. 227,599. 
S. D., TUCKER 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN D. TUCKER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SHEET DEVERY APPARATUS FOR PRINTING-MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 227,599, dated May 11, 1880. 
Application filed February 25, 1880. 
55 
75 
8o 
times Operates to cause the sheet pressed to 
cling upon the cylinder, and, dampened by 
the paste, to buckle up to a degree injurious 
to perfect work. 
The present invention consists in combining 
with such a sheet-collecting cylinder or carrier 
a pasting device that is automatically vibrated 
to bring it into working relation to the surface 
of said cylinder, and there retained during the 
necessary periods of time requisite to apply 
In said drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view, paste to the proper sheet or sheets, or to with 
draw it to a non-operative position during the 
passage of the sheet that is not to be pasted, 
all of which is more specifically pointed out in 
the following description of a machine con 
taining an embodiment of said invention. 
The carrier or cylinder 20 is mounted on 
bearings in a suitable frame-work, and is pro 
vided with the necessary devices to adapt it 
to collect many sheets and deliver them bodily, 
as follows: A set of tapes, 11, run over pulleys 
or a roller, 12, thence for a considerable dis 
tance in contact with the surface of the cylin 
der or carrier 20, pass under pulleys or a 
roller, 13, and return to the pulleys or roller 
12 over pulleys 14. A second set of tapes, 15, 
run from pulleys or a roller, 16, for a consid 
erable distance in contact with the surface of 
the cylinder or carrier 20, pass over pulleys or 
a roller, 17, and return under a roller or pull 
leys, 18. These tapes thus nearly span the 
entire circumference of the cylinder or car 
rier, but leave a space between the rollers or 
pulleys 12 and 17, that is spanned in part by 
curved guides or conductors 2, and constitutes 
the entrance-point for the sheets. These tapes 
also leave a space between the rollers or pull 
leys 13 and 16, that constitutes the delivery 
point for the sheets, and which is governed 
by vibrating switches 3. These devices con 
vert the cylinder or carrier 20 into a gather 
ing or a collecting device, as is fully set forth 
in United States Patents Nos. 192,510,192,954, 
193,056, 196,502, and 197,694, and as will ap 
pear from the description of the operation of 
the machine yet to be explained. 
The cylinder or carrier 20 is provided at one 
end with a toothed wheel, 21, from which the 
pulleys or rollers 13 and 17 are driven by means 
of pinions 22 23 on their shafts, that gear with 
said wheel 21, the tapes 11 and 15 being thus 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN D. TUCKER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of New York, county of New York, and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Sheet-Delivery 
Apparatus for Printing-Machines, fully de 
scribed and represented in the following speci 
fication and the accompanying drawings, form 
ing a part of the same. 
Fig. 2 a side elevation, and Fig. 3 a longitudi 
nal section elevation, of a machine embody 
ing my improvements. Figs. 4 and 5 are, re 
spectively, a plan view and section elevation 
of a modification thereof; and Fig. 6 illus 
trates my improved delivery apparatus as ar 
ranged with a printing apparatus. 
This invention relates to the delivery appa 
ratus of printing-machines; and it consists, 
principally, in a delivery-cylinder or rotating 
sheet-carrier provided with means for collect 
ing many sheets upon its surface and of strip 
ping the same in a single mass therefrom, with 
which is combined a movable pasting device 
that is adapted to be adjusted in or out of 
working relation with said cylinder or carrier, 
or automatically moved to and from such work 
ing contact, for the purpose of applying a cen 
tral line of paste to one or more sheets, so that 
the same may be united together. 
In order to apply a longitudinal line of paste 
to all except the last one of a number of sheets 
passing onto or associated together upon the 
surface of a collecting-cylinder, so that said 
sheets shall form a united pack, a pasting-disk 
has been fixed in working relation to such cyl 
inder at a point forward of that at which the 
sheets are stripped from said carrier or cylinder. 
In such relation the said disk is capable of ap 
plying paste to each sheet passing between it 
and the cylinder, but will operate idly during 
that revolution of the carrier or cylinder when 
the Collected sheets are delivered. In this re 
lation to the cylinder or carrier it is necessary 
that the collecting-cylinder shall be circum 
ferentially grooved, so that the pasting-disk, 
rotating in its fixed bearings, shall not revolve 
in contact with the cylinder or carrier, and 
thus apply paste to its surface when the same 
is not covered by a sheet, which groove some 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
227,599 
- 
driven by the positive rotation of such pulleys 
or rollers. 
The switches 3 are composed of separate 
pieces having curved front and upper faces, 
that are fast upon a rock-shaft, 24, the move 
ments of which cause said Switches to rock 
into the grooves 5 of the cylinder or carrier 20, 
as in Fig. 5, or into the grooves 6 of the roller 
13, as in Fig. 3, according as the shaft 24 rocks 
them forward or rearward. These switches 
are so rocked or vibrated by means of a rock 
arm, 25, attached to the end of the shaft 24, 
and a connecting-rod, 26, said rod being actu 
ated in one direction by a cam, 27, upon which 
its stud 9 bears, and in the other by a spring, 
such movements of it being governed by its 
bifurcated end, which embraces the shaft 28. 
This cam 27 is shown as provided with a toothed 
perimeter to constitute the wheel 29, that is 
carried by the shaft 28 and engaged by a 
toothed wheel, 30, fast on one end of the shaft 
of the carrier 20; but this wheel 29 and cam 
27 might be separate devices. 
The conductors 2 are separate curved pieces 
fast on a shaft, so that their faces coincide 
with the surface of the cylinder or carrier 20, 
while their rear ends extend into grooves 7 or 
the roller 17. 
One form of the pasting device is a disk, 40, 
mounted on a stud, 4, that turns in a bearing 
carried by an arm, 41, fast upon one end of a 
rock-shaft, 42, that is actuated by a rock-arm, 
43, a connecting-rod, 44, and a face-cam, 45, that 
is fast upon the shaft 28. This rod 44 is bi 
furcated to straddle and be guided by the shaft 
28, and carries a stud, 8, that bears upon the 
cam, its rearward movement being effected by 
a spring. (Not shown.) The pasting-disk may 
thus be rocked forward, as in Fig. 3, so as to 
be in working relation to the surface of the 
cylinder 20, or rearward away from the sur 
face of said cylinder, as in Fig. 2. Its stud 4 
is provided with a fast pinion, 47, that meshes 
with a toothed wheel, 48, carried by a rotat 
ing shaft, 50, upon the outer end of which 
shaft is mounted a driving-wheel, 51, that re 
ceives its motion from a pinion, 52, on the 
shaft of the roller 13. This pasting-disk runs 
in contact with a paste supply or fount, as in 
wheel 53, that is fast on the rotating shaft 50, 
the hubs of the journal of said wheel running 
in guiding contact with the inner walls of the 
paste-fountain 54, that is constructed in bracket 
form and affixed to the end frame. 
The pasting-disk is thus constantly rotated 
to receive its supply of paste, and automati 
cally vibrated at intervals into working rela 
tion to the cylinder to apply such paste to the 
sheets passing beneath it, and its gearing is 
So timed that its surface movement is the same 
as that of the cylinder, which unison of sur 
face movement precludes the possibility of the 
sheets being torn when the pasting-disk is 
pressed upon them. 
In Figs. 1 to 3 this apparatus is shown as 
adapted to be supplied with sheets fed to it 
 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
by hand from the feed-table 55; but it is es 
pecially designed to be attached to a printing 
or other automatic sheet-supplying machine, 
as is shown in Figs. 4 to 6, its mechanisms be 
ing driven in unison with such machine by 
means of gears connecting with the wheels 21 
29, or any other suitable one, as is set forth in 
the patents before referred to. 
Each sheet fed to the cylinder 20 will be held 
onto the surface thereof by the tapes. 11 and 
15, and directed by the switches 3, when they 
stand as in Fig. 3, and the guides 2, so as to 
pass onto and revolve with the cylinder. 
At each complete revolution of the cylinder 
a new sheet will be fed to it, so that a number 
of sheets will be collected one upon another 
on the surface of the cylinder, their heads and 
tails being separated a suitable distance apart 
to admit the operation of the switches, as is 
now well understood in this class of machines. 
As each sheet passes the point occupied by 
the pasting-disk it will, in passing in contact 
with such disk, receive a longitudinal line of 
paste upon its outer surface when such diskis 
in the working relation to the surface of the 
cylinder shown in Fig. 3, so that when a sec 
ond sheet is collected upon this centrally 
pasted sheet it will adhere or be united there 
to, which manipulation will be repeated as to 
each succeeding sheet. When, however, the 
sheet which is to complete the predetermined 
number constituting the pack to be collected 
is passing onto said cylinder, the cam 45 will 
operate to vibrate the pasting-disk into its 
rearward position, Fig. 2, away from the sur 
face of the cylinder, so that it will not apply 
paste to this last or outer sheet. This sheet. 
will, however, be united to the next underly 
ing sheet by the line of paste it has received. 
As the tails of the pack of pasted and col 
lected sheets supported upon the carrier have 
passed the switches 3 said switches are quickly 
vibrated forward into the grooves 5, as in Fig. 
2, by the action of the high part of the cam 
27, and thus have their points carried within 
the peripheral line of the cylinder 20, in which 
position they stand, so that the switches inter 
cept the heads of the pack of collected, and 
pasted sheets and strip the same bodily from 
the cylinder and guide them outward, as in 
Fig. 2, so that they may be delivered to a pil 
ing-table before a fly, or to a folding-machine, 
as in Fig. 4, and as is described in Patents 
Nos. 197,700 and 214,067, the switches stand 
ing in that position until the pack of sheets 
has passed over it, and then being quickly, vi 
brated outward by the cam, as in Fig. 3, so as 
to direct the next sheets following the collected 
pack around with the cylinder, as is explained 
in said patents. 
As soon as the collected pack of sheets has 
passed the point occupied by the pasting-disk 
it is vibrated forward by the cam 45, so as to 
bear upon and paste the next sheet passing it. 
The cams 27 and 45 will, of course, be 
shaped and timed so as to cause the proper 
IIO 
IIS 
I25 
227,599 
3 
O 
vibrations of the pasting-disk 40 and switches 
3, according to the number of sheets desired 
to be collected. In the present instance this 
number is two, and hence these cams are cor 
respondingly shaped-that is, the said cams, 
which are revolved at half the speed of the 
cylinder, vibrate the pasting-disk and switches 
at each second revolution of said cylinder, 
and thus cause two sheets to be collected, 
pasted, and delivered, but may be readily ar 
ranged to collect, paste, and deliver any prede 
termined number. 
The pasting-disk may be adjusted so as not 
to apply paste to any of the sheets by detach 
ing the connecting-rod 44 from the arm 43, 
whereby said disk may be moved to and sup 
ported in a rearward position. Thus adjusted, 
the apparatus will collect unpasted sheets and 
deliver them in packs. 
The pasting device may be modified, as il 
lustrated in Figs. 4 and 5, where it is shown 
as consisting of a blade, 33, that is attached 
to the rotating shaft 4, and arranged to be 
vibrated into and out of working relation with 
respect to the surface of the cylinder, so as to 
apply a transverse line of paste to the appro 
priate sheets, so that a pack of sheets thus 
collected and pasted will still be united to 
gether upon a central line. In such modifi 
cation the pasting-wheel 53 will be extended 
as a cylinder and run in a fountain, 54, of 
suitable dimensions, so as to supply the edge 
of the pasting-blade with paste as the same in 
its revolution comes into surface contact with 
said wheel 53. The pinion 47, that rotates 
the shaft of the pasting device, will then be 
placed near the frame, as will the toothed 
wheel 48. In all other respects the structure 
is the same, and need not be again described. 
In Fig. 6 this delivery apparatus is shown 
as attached to a printing-machine and ar 
ranged to deliver the collected sheets to a 
folding-machine, the cylinders 37 38 illustrat 
ing the cutting - cylinders belonging to the 
printing-machine, and usually arranged near 
the same and run in unison therewith, so as 
to divide a printed web into proper - sized 
sheets. 
The roller 61 represents one of a pair ap 
propriately rotated and adapted to nipa sheet 
doubled between their surfaces by a vibrating 
blade, as 62, and deliver said sheet once folded. 
Such a folding-machine is of common form, 
and, being described in the United States 
Patent No. 192,034, need not be particularly 
explained here. 
Tapes leading from small rollers, as 34 35, 
arranged just before the cylinders 3738, will 
then be provided to conduct the sheets to the 
delivery apparatus, the cylinder 20 whereof 
will be made somewhat larger than the said 
cutting-cylinders, so as to accelerate the Speed 
of the paper and separate its sheets a dis 
tance apart, as is set forth in aforesaid Patent 
No. 193,056. 
As here arranged, the tapes 11 are extended 
rearward to pass over the roller 34 and for 
ward to pass over a roller, 58, an intermediate 
guiding-roller, 57, being provided; and the 
rearward portion of these tapes co-operates 
with a set, 64, running from the roller 35 and 
returning over a roller, 36, to form a conduct 
ing-channel leading to this delivery apparatus, 
and the forward extended portions of the 
tapes 11 co-operate with a set, 65, running 
from a roller, 60, and returning over a roller, 
59. In other respects the apparatus remains 
as hereinbefore explained. The sheets will 
thus be conducted from the cylinders 3738, be 
collected and pasted, as before described, and 
the united pack will be delivered against the 
gage 63, and be folded on its longitudinal line 
of pasting by the folding-blade 62. 
If the pasting device is modified, as in Figs. 
4 and 5, so as to paste the sheets on a central 
transverse line, it may be applied to a cylin 
der adapted to collect and fold half-sheets, as 
in Patent No. 197,693; or the product may be 
conveyed to a folding-machine, which will re 
ceive and fold full-sized sheets, as in Patent 
No. 171,196. 
As this improved pasting device is adapted 
to be adjusted in a suitable relation to and be 
timely operated with a gathering-cylinder con 
structed as here shown, or as is illustrated and 
described in the patents referred to, it conse 
quently operates so that the sheets collected 
may be pasted together upon a central line 
and be delivered in pairs or any other suitable 
number. This mode of operation greatly fa 
cilitates the production of bound Work, as the 
signatures of books and the several sheets of 
a newspaper, and the mechanisms, all being 
rotary, admit of very high speed. 
Ehaving thus described the invention, what 
is claimed is 
The combination, with a rotating carrier hav 
ing means for collecting many sheets one upon 
another on its surface and stripping the same 
in a single body therefrom, of a rotating past 
ing device, the shaft of which is provided with 
means for rocking it to move said paster into 
and out of working relation to said carrier, 
whereby the collected sheets are pasted upon 
lines uniting them together, all substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
STEPEEN D, TUCKER, 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT S. BURLINGHAM, 
JOHN B. LOCKWOOD. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
85 
go 
95 
OO 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US227699.txt	R. MORRIS. 
Temporary Binders. 
No. 227,699. 
Patented May 18, 1880. 
 
WITNESSES 
16vz 
IN VEN TO R. 
, 6.d4 ge 
N.FEERs, PHoro-LTHOGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROYAL MORRIS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO JAMESS. McDONALD, 
OF SAME PACE. 
TEMPORARY BINDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 227,699, dated May 18, 1880. 
Application filed January 13, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROYAL MORRIs, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
5 Improvements in Temporary Binders; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, which 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
my invention appertains to make and use the 
to same, reference being had to the accompany. 
ing drawing, forming a part hereof, and in 
which like letters of reference indicate like 
parts. 
My invention relates to that class of tem 
15 porary binders or bill-files having fixed re 
ceiving-wires in a movable or sliding block or 
plate, in combination with a base having firm 
ly secured thereon vertical and arched wires, 
the outer ends of which are provided with 
2 o notches or bevels, so as to smoothly join the 
ends of the receiving-wires and to fit thereto, 
so as to form continuous wires, as hereinafter 
more particularly described. 
In the drawing, Crepresents the base, which 
25 may be made of wood or metal, or both wood 
a, and c, which are made of such a height as 
to fit within the V-shaped ends of the wires 
d and d. 
The height of the guard wire b may be 
somewhat higher than that of a and c, if de 
sired. 
My improved temporary binder is operated 
as follows: The sliding block B is first drawn 
forward the full distance of its play, which is 
about as far as the gage-wire b is set back 
from that of the line of the wires at and c, 
which will bring the ends f of the arched 
wires d and d and gage-wire b in the same 
straight line. The letter or bill is taken 
firmly in both hands and passed over the 
wires at and c until its rear edge strikes the 
gage-wire b, and also the ends f of the arched 
wires d and d", and is then pressed down, 
causing the wiresa and c to pierce the paper, 
when block B is pushed back until stopped 
by the projection A of the base C, which is so 
arranged as to stop the wires ( and c directly 
under the ends f of d and d", so as to form 
one continuous Wire. 
If at any time a particular letter or bill is 
and metal, of the desired form and size, and to be withdrawn from the file, the papers are 
having at its rear end a rise, projection, or raised beyond the joints f and held upon the 
wires d and d, when the block B is drawn 
stop, A. 
forward and the desired paper is lifted there 
from, when the block may be pushed back 
and the papers from the wires d and d re 
turned to their proper places on the Wires (i. 
and 0. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a temporary binder, the combination 
of a base or support, two parallel punctur 
ing-wires, and two parallel curved transfer 
wires, one set of said duplex wires having 
horizontal feet or a connecting-bar arranged 95 
in parallel guideways and capable of sliding 
in a horizontal path parallel to the surface of 
the base or support, substantially as shown 
and described. 
vided with the stop A, arched wires d and d", 
and guide spring-wires e and e, in combina 
tion with the sliding block B, provided with 
the vertical wires a, b c, substantially as shown 
and described. 
Witnesses: 
From the part A. rise vertical wires d and 
3o d, which are rigidly attached to the base C, 
and the upper ends of which are bent into the 
form of an arch, as showin. 
e o are wire spring - clamps and guides, 
which are arranged on either side' of the up. 
35 per surface of the base C, the rear ends of 
which are rigidly attached to the base C, and 
the forward ends of which are bent downward 
at right angles, so as to freely enter perfora 
tions made in the base C. 
4o Under the wires e e' slides a block, B, pref. 
erably of metal, and which is provided with 
vertical wires at b c. 
The wires at and c are the same distance 
apart as the wires d and d', but the wire b is 
45 midway between at and c and about half an 
inch back from the line of a and c, forming a 
gage or guard Wire. 
The Wires e e' are so arranged as to act as 
spring-clamps, pressing down upon the block 
So B, guiding it, and arresting its motion when 
drawn forward. 
The upper ends of the arched wires d and 
d' are cut into V-shaped notches f, to receive 
the corresponding pointed ends of the wires 
N. CoWLEs, 
WVI, ZIMMERMAN. 
ROYAL MORRIS, 
65. 
75 
9o 
--- 
2. In a temporary binder, the base C, pro- Ioo 
eless-- . -m. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US227799.txt	(No Model. J. 
No. 227,799. 
F. LAUFKOTTER, 
Safety-Stop for Elevators. 
- 
Patented May 18, 1880. 
 
WITNESSES: 
42.3%.e44 
-6.6% evice- 
INVENTOR: 
41.2% 
BY wku. of C. 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
 
 
N. PETERs. PHOTo-LTHoGRAPHER, washingtoN, D.C 
va, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANKLAUFKOTTER, OF COLLINS VILLE, ILLINOIS, 
SAFETY-STOP FOR EL EVATORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 227,799, dated May 18, 1880. 
Application filed March 11, 1880. 
(No model.) 
: 
55 
75 
IO 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANK LAUFKOTTER, 
of Collinsville, in the county of Madison and 
State of Illinois, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Safety-Stops for Ele 
vators, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the improve 
ment, part being broken away. Fig. 2 is a 
front elevation, part being broken away. Fig. 
3 is a plan view of the suspended cross-bar 
and its arms. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to furnish 
safety. stops for elevators for buildings, mine 
shafts, and other purposes, so constructed as 
to stop the elevator-cage and hold it securely 
should the hoisting-rope break. 
A represents the ordinary guide-bars of an 
elevator, upon which the cage B moves up and 
down, the said cage being kept in place by 
guards C, attached to it, and which project 
upon the opposite sides of the said guides A. 
To the ends of the top cross-bar of the cage 
B are attached two bars, D, which may be the 
upward extension of the side fraumes of the 
cage B. The bars D incline inward till they 
meet, then pass up together, and have a loop, 
E, formed upon their upper ends. 
The bars D may be formed in one piece, if 
desired, and may be made with an arch or 
To the sides of the cage B, upon the oppo 
site sides of the guides A, are pivoted eccen 
tric wheels F, in such positions that they may 
be turned against the said guides to clamp 
them, and thus stop the descent of the cage B. 
To the eccentric wheels F are rigidly at 
tached, or upon them are formed, arms G, to 
the outer ends of which are pivoted the lower 
ends of rods H. The upper ends of the rods 
E are pivoted to the ends of the arms I, 
formed upon or attached to the cross-bar J. 
The arms I are curved, as shown in Fig. 3, to 
bring their outer ends into proper position to 
receive the upper ends of the rods H. The 
cross-bar J is placed above and at a little dis 
tance from the top cross-bar of the cage B. 
curve. 
- 
- 
- 
To the opposite sides of the center of the 
cross-bar Jare attached the lower ends of two 
bars, K, the upper ends of which are connected 
by a bolt with the ends of a U-bar, L, the bend 
of which passes through the loop E of the 
bars D. 
To the bend of the bar L is attached the 
end of a rod, M, which passes up through the 
top of the loop E, and has an eye formed upon 
its upper end to receive the end of the hoist 
ing rope or chain. 
Upon the rod M, between the bend of the 
bar L and the top of the loop E, is placed a 
nut or collar, N. 
Between the cross-bar J and a cross-bar, O, 
attached to the inclined bars D, is interposed 
a spring, P, as shown in Fig. 2. 
With this construction, when power is ap 
plied to the hoisting mechanism, the first effect 
is to compress the spring P and turn the ec 
centric wheels F away from the guides A. The 
nut or collar N then comes in contact with the 
top of the loop E and raises the cage B. 
Should the hoisting rope or chain or any other 
part of the hoisting mechanism break while 
the cage B is moving up or down the removal 
of the strain from the rod Mallows the spring 
P to throw the bar J downward, turning the 
eccentric wheels F against the sides of the 
guides A, and holding them pressed against 
the said guides, so as to stop the descent of 
the cage and hold it securely until power is 
again applied to the rod M to again turn back 
the eccentric wheels F. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
The combination, with the cage B, of the 
inwardly-inclined loop-bars E. D, the eccentric 
wheels F, having arms G, the pivoted rods EH, 
the arms I, the cross-bar J, the bars K, the 
U-barL, the rod M, having collar N, the cross 
bar O, and the spring P, as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
FRANKLAUFKOTTER, 
Witnesses: 
A. F. HoFFEY, 
S. M. COX. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US227899.txt	N. W. HORTON. 
Carriage for Rock-Drills. 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
W 
No. 27,899. 
s 
S. 
- 
L. 
USJ 
- 
s 
s Patented, May 25, 1880. 
III. 
Sa-Sla 
m 
. 
\ l: 
Gill 
He 
U. 
US 
. 
s. 
 
- 
2 
s. 
... 
Witnes SS 
%7. 
&ge; 
I, 
r 
Qs 
't 
an 
live into u: 
a 3.3, 
in 
N 25, 
it's 
- 
s 
s 
NPETERS, pHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
N. W. HORTON. 
Carriage for Rock-Drills, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 227,899. 
Patented May sy'sso. 
a. af24 z 
-s al 
His EFFF 
EE SSS s 
>2232 % %zz 
%  s (3s2NY 
of 
N  
35 
% SN 2 
al 
(, Eii. 
3 
 3y, 
s 
 
N 
 
r. 
se 
bis 
2. 
CF 3, 
% 
. SSN & 
to E% %  % 
F%2E  3% 
a 2. >2 
Witnesses: =EE, E 
f SEH ram 
Fe 
4.4%% , 7 O = Z.Z. m 
mm mm. 
-- 
is 
 
O 
N. PETERS, Photo-LITHogRAPHER, WASHINGTO,.. 
live tou 
ar 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NATHAN W. HORTON, OF WILKESBARRE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CARRIAGE FOR ROCK-DRILLs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 227,899, dated May 25, 1880. 
Application filed June 14, 1878. 
O 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, NATHAN. W. HoRTON, 
of Wilkesbarre, Luzerne county, State of Penn. 
Sylvania, am the inventor of an Improved Car 
riage for Rock-Drills, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing part of this specification. 
My invention consists in a carriage for rock 
drills, as hereinafter particularly set forth and 
described, and more at length recited in the 
claims. 
Figure 1 is a plan of a carriage for rock-drills 
embodying my improvements. Figs. 2 and 3 
are vertical sectional views of the same on the 
line a ac, Fig. 1, looking in opposite directions 
from the line of section; and Fig. 4 is a sec 
tional view on the line y), Fig.1, showing the 
arrangement of the pivot of the bar to the cross 
pieces. 
A represents the rock-drill. B is a frame, 
which is preferably rectangular in general form, 
as shown. To this frame, upon one side there 
of, is pivoted the drill A. This is accomplished 
by means of the long stout bolt (t, which passes 
from a plate, a', fixed on the drill, through the 
frame B to the opposite side thereof, where it 
is provided with a jam-nut, a, as shown. To 
give the drill a firm seat on the frame the 
table or plate b is fixed or formed on the frame, 
as shown, and on this plate, around the bolt 
hole, is formed the circular boss b', which fits 
into a corresponding recess, a, in the plate af. 
By means of this arrangement the drill can be 
turned or swung upon its pivot on the frame 
in any direction, and there held in position. 
The frame B is mounted on and arranged to 
be moved longitudinally on the bar or beam C. 
This bar is preferably given the form of a 
double-T beam, as shown, and may be of any 
desired length. The moving of the frame along 
the bar may be conveniently done by means of 
a pinion, c. in the frame engaging a rack, c', on 
the bar, extending the length thereof. To hold 
the frame rigidly in place on the bar the screw 
clamp, c' set in the frame and arranged to bear 
upon the bar, as shown, may be employed. 
The bar C is pivoted at its ends to the cross 
pieces D, so that the bar may be revolved on 
its axis and held securely in any desired posi 
tion. To accomplish this I employ the screw 
bolts d, Fig. 4, which extend from either end 
of the bar through the cross-pieces, and are 
provided with jam-nuts d on the outside of said 
cross-pieces. Around the bolts on the ends of 55 
the bar are formed the circular bosses d?, which 
fit into corresponding recesses on the inner 
face of the cross-pieces, thus affording a firm 
bearing for the bar. 
The cross-pieces D are mounted on legs E, 
the legs being pivoted to the cross-pieces and 
also arranged to be vertically adjusted on the 
said cross-pieces. Upon one side of the cross 
pieces are arranged disks or platese, channeled 
or grooved on their outer faces to receive the 
legs, which also pass through slotted openings 
e' in the ends of bolts e, which pass through 
the cross-pieces and said plates e. 
Upon the 
opposite side of the cross-pieces the bolts are 
furnished with jam-nutse, as shown. By loos 
ening the nuts the frame or bars may be moved 
up or down on the legs, and the legs may be 
turned or swung, with the plates e, to one side 
or the other, and the carriage may be thus set 
firmly in the desired position upon an uneven 
surface of rock or soil, and by swinging the bar 
C on its axis so that the frame B is underneath 
the bar, and the drill A is thus on the under side 
thereof, the drill may then, by lowering the 
entire frame on the legs, be brought down to 
the rock floor on which the machine stands, 
and thus be in position to drill into the rock 
wall at the base line thereof. 
I am aware that drilling-tools have hereto 
fore been arranged or mounted upon a bar or 
horizontal frame and constructed to traverse 
the same longitudinally. 
I am also aware that a carriage for drills has 
been heretofore used in which a frame for sup 
porting the drill has been mounted on a bar or 
beam pivoted to blocks sliding in Ways in a 
frame hung upon wheels for carryilug alud sus 
taining the apparatus, said wheels having at 
their rims adjusting-legs to prevent their rev 
olution or movement when the carriage is in 
position for drilling. I do not, therefore, claim 
these devices broadly, but intendl to confine 
my claims hereunder to the specific improve 
ments and novel devices I have described 
herein; and therefore 
95 
75 
IOC 
25 
35 
45 
Rise 
2 
22, s.99 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a carriage for rock-drills, having the 
frame B, mounted on and to traverse longi 
tudinally the bar C, the table or platel on said 
frame, and the plate a? on the drill A, together 
with the bolt a and its nuta, constructed and 
arranged to operate as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. In a carriage for rock-drills, having the 
frame B, to which is pivoted the drill A, mounted 
5 
IO 
on and to traverse the bar C, which is hung to 
swing on its longitudinal axis in the cross-pieces 
D, the legs E, seated in and provided with the 
channeled plates e, the bolts e, having slots e", I5 
and the nuts e, constructed and arranged to 
operate as and for the purposes specified. 
NATEAN W. HORTON. 
Witnesses: 
B. S. CLARK, 
THEODORE G. HOSTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228000.txt	W. C. SMITH & B. D. JosLIN. 
Soldering-Iron 
(Model.) 
No. 228,000. 
Rs 
 
N.FETERS, Photo-LTHoGRAPHER, washingto 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARD C. SMITH AND B. DUANE JOSLIN, OF KINDEREIOOK, MICHIGAN, 
ASSIGNORS OF ONE-TEIIRD OF THEIR RIGHT TO RICHARD LOBDELL AND 
FLINT LOBDELL. 
SOLDERING RON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,000, dated May 25, 1880. 
Application filed March 12, 1880. (Model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLARD C. SMITH 
and B. DUANE JOSLIN, of Kinderhook, in the 
county of Branch and State of Michigan, have 
5 invented an Improvement in Soldering-Irons, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The nature of this invention relates to cer 
tain new and useful improvements in the con 
struction of soldering-irons; and the inven 
Io tion consists in the peculiar construction and 
arrangement of parts, all as more fully here 
inafter set forth. 
. In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
central section. Fig. 2 is a cross-section at a 
I5 a. Fig. 3 is a cross-section aty y. Fig. 4 is a 
modification of Fig. 1. . 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, A represents a hol 
low handle, provided with a feed-pipe, B, the 
20 outer end of which is provided with a jet or 
burner, C. Within this feed-pipe is a small 
perforated pipe, D, which is surrounded by a 
proper wick, E. 
The outer end of the feed-pipe B is exteri 
25 Orly threaded to screw into one end of the per 
forated cylinder or generator F, which is in 
turn threaded into the head G, in which is 
formed a recess, the Walls of which are per 
forated, as shown, and over these perforations 
3o is placed a wire screen, V, within the recess 
in the head. 
In practice, the parts being constructed as 
herein described, the handle A is filled with 
any suitable volatile inflammable liquid. From 
35 the handle, the liquid is carried to the jet or 
burner C by means of the wick and feed-pipe, 
where, mingling with air entering through the 
perforations in the generator F, it is converted 
into gas or vapor, is ignited in any convenient 
manner, and heats the head G, the heated cur 
rents passing out through the perforations in 
the head. 
It will be seen that the perforated pipe F 
can readily be adjusted on the feed-pipe B by 
means of the screw-threaded connection of the 
pipes, whereby more or less air can be admit 
ted to the jet C, as desired, to regulate the 
combustion. 
In Fig. 4 a modification is shown, wherein 
the outer end of the cylinder F is formed into 
a head for use in small work. 
What we claim as our invention is 
1. The combination of the hollow handle A, 
feed-pipe B, carrying the jet C, adjustable 
pipe F, provided with perforations communi 
cating directly with its interior and with the 
outer air, and perforated soldering-head G, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. The combination of the hollow handle A 
and feed-pipe B, carrying the jet C in its outer 
end, the adjustable pipe F, provided with per 
forations communicating directly with the in 
terior of pipe F and with the air, and the re 
cessed and perforated head G, substantially 
as described, and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a soldering-iron, and in combination 
with the hollow handle A thereof, the feed 
pipe B, jet C, perforated cylinder D, wick E, 
generator F, and perforated recessed head G, 
substantially as and for the purposes specified. 
WILLARD C. SMITH. 
B. DUANE JOSLIN. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT FLINT, 
L. J. FLINT. 
4c) 
45 
SO 
55 
7 O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228101.txt	(No Model.) 
T. P. MOORES, 
Cotton-Picker. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 228,101. 
Patented May 25, 188O. 
 
 
7 
A. 
FIELyril 
an 
Iliff HIHILt. 
Z3 Will, 
/7ZZveesees 
a 6%. 
7, 
(No Model.) 
T P. MOORES. 
Cotton-Picker. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 228,101. 
Patented May 25, 1880. 
 
7rvezees 
ala?, 4-(Zazze-4 
7 T. 
Zzvezz/oz 
(76C 77. 
NPFER8, PHOTo-LTHOGRAPHER, washNGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS P. MOORES, OF MILLIKEN's BEND, LOUISIANA. 
COTTON PICKER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,101, dated May 25, 1880. 
Application filed March 15, 1880. (No model.) 
-- 
IS 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOS. P. MooREs, of 
Milliken's Bend, in the county of Madison and 
State of Louisiana, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Cotton-Pickers; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use it, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
cotton-pickers; and it consists in the arrange 
ment and combination of parts, which will be 
more fully described hereinafter, whereby the 
cotton is cleaned from the plants entirely by 
the action of revolving brushes as the ma 
chine is drawn along. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
machine for picking cotton which requires 
simply two horses or mules to draw it along, 
and which will dispense with much of the time 
and labor now required for this operation. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
horizontal Section. 
A represents a suitable frame, which is made 
of any suitable material, and constructed in 
any manner that may be preferred, and which 
is supported upon each side by a driving 
wheel, B. The lower edges of the wheels pro 
ject but little beyond the bottom of the frame, 
so that the frame will run along close to the 
ground, and thus gather the cotton from both 
large and smallplants. The axle C, upon which 
the wheels are fastened, is made U-shaped, so 
as to pass up over the top of the frame, as 
shown, and this axle forms a brace and sup 
port for the frame. Upon the inner side of 
each one of these driving-wheels is placed a 
toothed wheel, D, which meshes with a pin 
ion, E. These pinions are placed upon the 
outer ends of the short shafts F, which are 
journaled in suitable bearings upon the top of 
the frame A. To the inner ends of these short 
shafts are secured the beveled pinions H, 
which mesh with the pinions I on the vertical 
brush-shafts J. Also, secured to the upper 
end of the brush-shafts, where they project. 
from the top of the frame A, are the gear 
wheels K, which mesh with other gear-wheels, 
A A 
45 
So 
35 
- 
K", which are secured to similar vertical brush 
shafts N. These gear-wheels, meshing togeth 
er, cause the brush-shafts placed in the same 
side of the frame to revolve in opposite direc 
tions. 
The inside of the front end of the frame A 
is made V-shaped, and there is left an opening 
entirely through the frame, so that as the ma- . 
chine is drawn along it will straddle over the 
row of cotton-plants and operate upon both 
sides alike. 
Secured to the shafts are suitable brushes, 
made of wire, hair, wood, or any other suita 
ble material, and which are so placed in the 
frame that as they are made to revolve by the 
mechanism above described the bristles, wires, 
or Wood of the brushes will extend out into 
the opening that is made through the frame, 
and will thus act upon every branch of the 
cotton-plants as they are drawn in between 
them. The brushes upon each side, being 
made to revolve in opposite directions, act 
upon the plant first in one direction and then 
the other, and thus every boll is robbed of its 
cotton, so as to leave nothing but a little down 
in it, which can afterward be readily gathered 
by hand. As the cotton is taken from the boll 
by means of these oppositely-revolving brushes 
it is carried by the bristles into the boxes O, 
formed on each side of the frame, which boxes 
have their rear ends inclined in the same illian 
ner as their front ends, and are provided with 
the doors P, through which the cotton is taken 
out. In each box are placed the two combs 
R, which clean all of the cotton from the brush 
and deposit it in the boxes. 
This machine is intended to be drawn by 
two animals, which are to be hitched in the 
shafts S, which are secured to each side of the 
frame, as shown, whereby one animal is made 
to walk on each side of the row. 
The brush-shafts are preferably placed in a 
slightly-inclined position, so as to be nearer 
together at the bottom than at the top, not 
only because the bolls grow nearer together at 
the bottom of the plants, but because the axle 
may be caused to slightly expand or be strained 
or twisted, in which case the brushes will be 
about parallel from top to bottom. 
By means of this machine cotton can be 
rapidly gathered, and at but a very slight ex 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
22.80. 
pense as compared with the present system of 
gathering it by hand. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a cotton-picking machine, the colnbi 
nation of a frame so constructed as to strad 
dle over the top of the row, a box or chamber 
on each side to receive the cotton, two oppo 
sitely-revolving brushes placed in each box, 
which clean the cotton from the bolls and 
sweep it into the boxes, a comb for each brush, 
and a mechanism for driving the brushes, sub 
stantially as shown. 
2. In a cotton-picking machine, a frame so 
constructed as to straddle over the top of the 
row, and having a closed box on each side, in 
combination with two oppositely - revolving 
brushes, which close the opening in the inner 
side of each box, and a comb for each brush, 
substantially as set forth. 
O 
IS 
3. In a cotton-picking machine, the combi. 
nation of a frame, A, which straddles over the 
row and is made V-shaped in front, a cham 
ber, O, on each side of the frame, two oppo 
sitely-revolving brushes placed vertically in 25 
each chamber, which brushes not only touch . 
each other, but close the entire opening made 
in the inner side of each chamber, a comb for 
each brush, and a meehanism for driving the 
brushes, all arranged to operate substantially 3o 
as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 15th day of 
March, 1880. 
THOS. P. MOORES. 
Witnesses: 
F. A. LEHMANN, 
WILL. H. KERN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228202.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 228,2O2. 
F. KROEBER, 
Alarm-Clock, 
Patented June 1, 1880. 
We a 
W2224, 24. 
2. %a?size 
Iroye72dor. 
2- A -- 
for Arse 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FLORENCE KROEBER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ALARM CLOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent. No. 228,202, dated June 1, 1880. 
Application filed April 6, 1880. 
(No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FLORENCE KROEBER, 
of New York city, in the county and State of 
New York, have invented an Improvement in 
5 Alarm - Clocks, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the arrangement of the bell for sounding the 
alarm and the connection of the movement 
with the bell; and the object of the invention 
is to so arrange the bell that it will be situ 
ated outside of the case instead of inside, as 
heretofore. 
The invention consists in connectilug the 
15 bell with a crank-shaft placed in an ornamen 
tal figure above the clock and connecting the 
hammer-tail with the crank - shaft thus ar 
ranged, whereby the alarm-movement com 
municates through the hammer-tail the vibra 
tory movement to the shaft, and thereby vi 
brates the bell and sounds the alarm. 
The invention also consists of details of con 
struction and arrangement, which will be fully 
described farther on in the specification. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a front elevation of my improved 
alarm-clock. Fig. 2 represents a vertical sec 
tion through the center of the figure and a 
part of the clock-case on a plane parallel to 
the face of the clock. Fig. 3 represents a 
longitudinal section of the bell, showing the 
manner of connecting it with the hand of the 
figure. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
35 face of the clock; B, the shellor case, of suita 
ble form; C, the alarm-movement; c, the es 
capement; D, the hammer-tail. 
E represents the figure standing on a base, 
F, which is placed over an opening, G, in the 
shell just over the alarm-movement. The said 
base F has on each side ears b, which rest on 
the shell B, and are connected with the said 
shell by screws or other suitable devices, 
whereby the opening G in the shell or case is 
completely covered in, and the figure E is 
firmly attached to the shell or case of the clock. 
The figure E and base F are hollow, and, it 
will be observed, are made in two parts, de, 
the two parts being put togethel SO as to Con 
ceal as nearly as possible the joint, and con 
nected by screws or in any other suitable 
45 
4.O 
 
manner. In part d is placed the crank-shaft 
K in suitable bearings f. One end of the 
crank-shaft projects out of its bearing f, and 
is connected to the arm EI of the figure. The 55 
hammer-tail D extends from the escapement 
at to the crank-shaft K. 
When the movement C operates the vibra 
tory movement of the escapement at is com 
municated through the hammer-tail ID to the 
crank-shaft K, which is thereby vibrated and 
communicates the vibratory movement to the 
alm H. 
I represents the bell. The clapper () is piv 
oted to the screw-shaft h, which is passed 
through the hand i and secured by a nut 
screwed on its projecting end. The bell is 
thus attached to the vibrating arm EI, and par 
takes of its movement. 
When the escapement at is vibrated the mo 
tion is communicated through the hammer 
tail D and crank-shaft K and arm H to the 
bell I, and when the arm H moves in obedi 
ence to the action of the escapement, the bell 
being vibrated, the alarm is sounded by the 
bel I. 
I have described the invention as applied to 
the arm of the representation of a human fig 
ture; but it is evident that the design of the 
figure E may be materially varied without de 
parting from the spirit of this invention. 
75 
I claim 
1. The combination of the hammer-tail D of 
an alarm-clock with the crank-shaft K, vibrat 
ing artin H, and vibrating bell I, substantially 
as described. 
2. In an alarm-clock, the hollow figure E, in 
combination with the hammer-tail D, crank 
shaft K, vibrating arm H, and vibrating bell 
I, Substantially as described. 
3. The hollow figure E, with the crank-shaft 
K, vibrating arm H, bell I, and base F, in 
combination with the case or shell B of the 
clock, provided with the opening G, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The bell I, having clapper g and screw 
shaft h, in combination with the hand i and 
Vibratory arm H, substantially as described. 
FLORENCE KROEBER, 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS SCHMIDT, 
OTTO. BARTEL. 
85 
9o 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228302.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 228,302. 
C. M. BEARD, 
Clutch for Bow-strings. 
Patented June 1, 1880. 
C-6, 
-6. 
 
WITNESSES: 
Zaeo/ec/(2^ 
V 
INVENTOR; 
Czz (24% 
BY Wuw g 
TTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, FHoro- (THogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES M. BEARD, OF ELROY, WISCONSIN. 
CUTCH FOR BOW STRINGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,802, dated June 1, 1880. 
Application filed March 6, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all whom at may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs M. BEARD, 
of Elroy, in the county of Juneau and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented a new and Im 
proved Arrow-Holder, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved arrow-holder which holds 
the arrow while the bow is being drawn and 
releases it by means of a trigger, thus permit 
ting the bow-string to force the said arrow 
forward. 
The invention consists of a portable clutch 
for seizing a bow-string, which is adapted to 
be held in the hand, and is provided with an 
unlatching device or trigger, by means of which 
the bow-string, when strained to the desired 
point, may be instantaneously released with 
out any relaxation of the muscles of the arch 
er's arm. 
in the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of my improved arrow-holder. 
Fig.2 is a partial cross-sectional and front ele 
vation of the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The lever A, provided with a curved handle, 
B, is provided with a longitudinal slot, in 
which the trigger-wheel C, provided with two 
or more rounded arms, bb, is pivoted. 
A straight lever, D, is pivoted on the upper 
side of the lever A, and has the under side of 
its rear end, E, slightly recessed on a curved 
line. At the end of this curved under side a 
small notch, F, is cut into the same, and next 
to this notch a recess, G, is provided on the 
under side of the said lever, 
The front ends of the levers A and D are 
provided with cushions H, preferably made 
of rubber or Some other similar material, and 
provided with a longitudinal groove in the 
adjoining sides, SO as to obtain a better gripe 
On the end of the arrow. 
The operation is as follows: The arrow, 
which is preferably a little thicker at the rear 
end, is placed between the cushions HH, the 
55 
60 
string of the bow having been previously 
placed into the groove on the end of the ar 
row. By rotating the trigger-wheel C in the 
direction of the arrow at the rounded end of 5o 
one of the arms b glides along the curved 
recessed under side of the rear end, E, of 
the lever D, thereby raising said rear end 
and pressing the front downward, and thus 
holding the arrow firmly. The end of the arm 
b then passes into the notch F and locks the 
lever D in the above-described position. The 
bow-string is then drawn by pulling on the 
handle B, and as soon as aim has been taken 
the trigger is slightly touched, so as to cause 
the end of the arm b to pass out of the notch 
F into the recess G, thereby releasing the le 
ver D, and consequently, also, the arrow and 
the bow-string, which is drawn forward with 
great force by the bow and forces the arrow 
forward with great speed. 
With the herein-described apparatus the 
arrow can be firmly held while drawing the 
boW, the string can be drawn with great ease, 
and very accurate aim can be taken. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The combination of the bent piece A B, 
the straight lever D, having notch F and recess 
G, and the trigger b, as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a hand 
clutch for straining a bow-string, provided 
With an unlocking device, by the operation of 8o 
Which the bow-string may be instantaneously 
Set free, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a hand-clutch for drawing a bow-string, 
the combination of a hook or angular projec 
tion to hold the string while being drawn and 
a trigger to discharge the string when it is 
drawn, as specified. 
65 
7 O 
75 
CEARLES MINOR BEARD, 
Witnesses: 
N. B. WILKINSON, 
E. S. ROGERS. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228403.txt	(Model.) 
w 
M. M. SMITH & J. HASS ALL. 
m 
Glove -Fastener. 
No. 228,403. 
Patented June 1, 1880. 
 
 
WITNESSES 
4.5% 
c6 6%al-e- 
y 
4 
. 
N.Peters, PHoo-lirogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C 
 
INVENTOR: 
5, Water 
BY 
(e) 
1ORNEYS. 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MINARD M. SMITH AND JOHN HASSALL OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNORS 
- 
TO WILLIAM HASSALL, OF SAME PLACE. 
GLOVE - FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,403, dated June 1, 1880. 
Application filed April 3, 1880, (Model.) 
... O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, MINARD M. SMITH 
and JOHN BASS ALL of the city, county, and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
Improved Glove-Fastener, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide an 
improved fastener to be secured to the sides 
of the front opening of a glove for the purpose 
of keeping said opening closed, and the glove 
thereby close about the wrist of the wearer. 
The invention consists of two narrow flat 
strips of steel or other metal curved flatwise 
to conform with the hollow of the hand, and 
pivoted together at their enlarged circular 
ends, which are so fashioned that they lock 
together at the closed or fully open point, as 
hereinafter described. 
Figure 1 is an enlarged rear elevation of the 
fastelner closed. Fig. 2 is an enlarged front 
elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
side elevation of the same. Fig. 4 is an en 
larged rear elevation of the fastener open. 
Fig. 5 is an enlarged top view of the fastener 
Opell. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A B are respectively the two arms of the 
fastener, pivoted together by the pin a, that 
passes centrally through their enlarged heads 
or ends. The enlarged head of the arm. A has 
a vertical slot, b, and a horizontal slot, c, 
formed in its edge, so that a nearly quadrantal 
section, d, of the head remains between said 
slots, and the edge of the said section d, formed 
by the slot b, is beveled, as shown, on the face 
that is in contact With the head of the arm B. 
25 
35 
The enlarged end or head of the arm B has 
its edge cut away, as shown at g, and a circu 
lar cut, h, made in it, extending from the an- 4o 
gle of said cut g about three-quarters of the 
distance around said head, which cut h has 
the effect of detaching the outer rim, m, from 
the said head for that distance. The free end 
in of this rim m is bent in Ward on a double 45 
curve or slope, and rests on the inner face of the 
head of the arm A. When this fastener is 
closed this end in of the rim in engages in the 
horizontal slot c of the arm A, and thereby 
locks the said fastener, and when the arms A 
B are pulled apart and fully opened the said 
end in engages in the vertical slot b of the arm 
A, and thereby holds said fastener open. 
The lever fof the section d permits the easy 
disengagement of the end in of the rim m from 
the slot b when it is desired to close the fast 
ener again. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
glove - fastener constructed substantially as 
herein shown and described, consisting of the 
arm A, provided with slots b c and beveled 
quadrantal section d, and arm B, provided 65 
with rim in, having a curved end, n, said arms 
being pivoted together, as set forth. 
Patent- 
- 
55 
Go 
MINARD M. SMITH. 
JOHN HASSALL. 
Witnesses: 
I. I. STORER, 
O. H. HOLBERG. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228503.txt	(No Model,) 
No. 228,503. 
-23. 7. 
-e. 
af 
W. A. WRIGHT 
Hay-Press. 
Patented June 8, 1880. 
easy 
to 
- 
fitnesses: 
1%. 3%a-4 
144 
3mbentor: 
4 ov ?/.4% 
digit, 
. Peters, PHOTO-LITHographer, Washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. A. WRIGHT, OF CENTRETON, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TOISAAC 
R. KULP, OF HATFIELD, PENNSYLVANIA. 
HAY PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,503, dated June 8, 1880. 
Application filed April 27, 1880. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all chon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. A. WRIGHT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Centreton, in the county of Burlington and 
5 State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Hay-Presses, which 
improvement is fully set forth in the following 
specification and accompanying drawings, in 
Which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the press em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation at a right angle to that of Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the two figures. 
My invention consists of means for con 
veniently stamping hay or other material prior 
to pressing. 
It also consists of mechanism for operating 
the stamping-head and pressing-follower. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
frame of the press, and B the pressing box or 
chamber. 
C ID represent two parallel shafts, which 
are mounted horizontally in suitable bearings 
25 on the outside of the frame A, near the bot 
tom thereof, the shaft C having fitted to it the 
free power-wheel E, a gear-wheel, F, fixed to 
said wheel E, a sliding clutch, G, and a fixed 
winding-drum, H. 
The shaft, D as connected to it a fixed 
gear-wheel, J, which meshes with the wheel F, 
a sliding clutch, K, and a loose pinion, L, 
which engages with the rack M, to one end of 
whicla are connected the levers N of the foll 
The clutch G is operated by a lever, G', and 
the clutch K by a lever, K, both suitably sup 
ported on the frame A. 
A represents a frame, which is sustained 
4o on the press above the box B, and supports 
rollers or bearings a b c d and P represents a 
beam carrying at bottom a stamping-head, 
P', and at top a roller or bearing, e, said beam 
occupying a position at or near the middle of 
45 the frame A', and adapted to enter the box 
B, the top whereof is adapted to be opened. 
A rope or chain, Q, is connected at its up 
per end to the frame A', then passes over the 
rollere, under the roller b, and over the roller 
So C, and extends to the drum H, on which it may 
be Wound. 
35 lower of the press. 
 
SS 
7 O 
75 
A rope or chain, R, is connected to the head 
P or beam P. passed over the rollers cd, and 
extends down aside of the frame A', and car 
ries at its end a weight, S. 
The operation is as follows: The clutch G 
is disengaged from the clutch-box E of the 
gear-wheel F and the clutch K from the , 
clutch-box K' of the pinion L. The drum I, 
being free to revolve, permits the rope or 
chain Q to unwind, and the weight S then ex 
erts its power to raise the head P'. The hay 
or other material is now placed in sufficient 
quantities in the box or chamber B, and the 
clutch G then moved to engage with the box 
F. As the shaft C is rotated by power of the 
wheel E the drum H is also rotated and the 
rope or chain Q wound thereon. This forces 
down the beam P and presses the head against 
the material and forcibly stamps it. The 
clutch Gis again thrown out, and the depressed 
beam and head are immediately elevated by 
the weight S, after which more material is 
thrown into the box or chamber B, and the 
other operations are repeated. When the 
stamping is finished the top of the box B is 
closed, the clutch K is engaged with the box 
K' of the pinion Li, and the rack M is drawn 
forward, thus operating the levers N and forc 
ing the follower against the material in the 
box and pressing it. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The stamping-head P and beam P, in 
combination with the rope or chain Q, bear 
ings a, b e, frame A', and winding-drum H, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The stamping-head P' and depressing 
rope or chain Q, in combination with the ele 
vating rope or chain, with weight S, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The shafts C D, clutches G. F. K. K", 
wheels FJ, drum El, and pinion L, in combi 
nation with the rope or chain Q of the stamp 
ing-head P and levers N of the follower, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
WM. A. WRIGET. 
m 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
A. P. GRANT. 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228603.txt	(No Model.) 
Brush-Holding Caps for Mucilage Bottles, &c. 
M. W. CARR. 
No. 228,6O3. 
Patented June 8, 188O. 
WITNESSE5 . 
. / 
lNVENTOR 
24. 246. /2-2-22-7- 
Zy Mezis' /777. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN W. CARR, OF SOMERVILLE, MASSACEIUSETTS. 
BRUSH-HOLDING CAP FOR M UCLAGE-BOTTLES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,603, dated June 8, 1880. 
Application filed March 10, 1880. 
(No model.) 
1. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARTIN W. CARR, of 
Somerville, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Brush-Holding 
Caps for Mucilage-Bottles, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, sufficient to enable those skilled in 
the art to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
an improved brush-holding cap for mucilage 
bottles, which is designed as an improved ar 
ticle of manufacture; and it consists, essen 
tially, in forming the article from a plastic 
compound, all as will be hereinafter more fully 
described, and pointed out in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of the complete brush-holding cap. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section of the same, and Figs. 3 
and 4 are detail sectional views thereof. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings, a represents the 
cap, formed of suitable plastic composition 
molded in a die of the desired pattern, a being 
the sides, and a' the internal socket surround 
ing the opening c for the brush-handle. l is 
a plate of tin or other metal upon the outside 
of the socket a'. The entire cap at a' a' b is 
molded in a die, and all but the plate bis of 
plastic composition. The plate b is placed in 
the mold previous to molding the cap, and 
its object is to provide a better external sur 
face for the socket, which is the part pressed 
into the neck of the bottle and would natu 
rally come into contact with the mucilage or 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
other adhesive material collected upon the 
neck. d is the brush-handle, molded in a die 
and made of the same material as the cap. 
The brush e is secured to the handle by the 
molding process, being in the material while it 
is being molded. 
My method is, first, to mold the cap, then the 
handle with the brush therein, then to cement 
the handle in the hole c firmly. The whole 
device is then practically one piece, as seen in 
Fig. 1. 
The article above described may be made 
highly ornamental at small expense, of vari 
ous colors, shapes, styles, &c. It is intended, 
chiefly, to be applied to bottles containing mu 
cilage and other adhesive material. 
I am aware that brush-holding caps for mu 
cilage-bottles have heretofore been made of 
rubber or other elastic material for holding 
the brush at proper height in the bottle, and 
also that caps made of wood or rubber have 
been provided with an annular ring of cork, 
for insertion in the mouth of the mucilage 
bottle, and I do not wish to be understood as 
claiming such constructions; but 
What I do claim as new and useful is 
As an improved article of manufacture, the 
herein-described brush-holding cap for muci 
lage-bottles, consisting of the handle d and 
capa, having downwardly-projecting flanges 
a' a', the whole being formed of plastic mate 
rial and adapted to fit the neck of the bottle, 
and provided with the metallic plate b and 
brush e, substantially as specified. 
MARTIN W. CARR. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY W. WILLIAMs, 
JoHN M. ROBERTSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228704.txt	(No Model.) 
J. T. WARING. 
Felting Hat-Bodies, &c. 
 
No. 228,704. 
' -- 1 
Patented June 8, 1880. 
Z22 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. WARING, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
- 
... 
--ror r". 
FELTING HAT-BODIES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,704, dated June 8, 1880. 
Application filed April 30, 1880. (No model.) 
Beit known that. I, JOHN T. WARING, of on some than on the others. 
To all chon it may concern: 
the city of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Machinery 
for Felting Hat-Bodies and other articles, of 
which the following is a specification, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to that description of 
sizing machine for felting hat-bodies and 
other articles the principal elements of which 
are a series of rollers having parallel axes, and 
between and lengthwise of which a roll of hat 
bodies or other articles in a sizing - cloth is 
placed and subjected to a rolling and pressing 
operation. Such machines are commonly pro 
vided with either three or four rollers, but 
might have a greater number. 
In such machines as heretofore constructed 
all the rollers rotate with uniform surface ve 
locity; but one feature of this invention con 
sists in so constructing, gearing, and driving 
the said rollers that they rotate at different 
surface velocities, and thereby have a tendency 
to repeatedly loosen and tighten the sizing. 
cloth and the roll contained therein, instead of 
gradually rolling them up tighter and tighter, 
as is done when the rollers have a uniform 
surface velocity. The effect of this alternate 
loosening and tightening of the cloth and the 
roll is to keep the roll soft, and so produce a 
better working of the felt than is possible when 
it is gradually rolled up tighter and tighter, 
and so compacted into a hard dead mass, in 
which condition the working and felting ceases. 
The different surface velocities of the sev 
eral rollers may be obtained, when the rollers 
are all of uniform diameter, by so driving them 
that some make a greater number of revolu 
tions than others. The several rollers may, 
however, be so driven that all make the same 
number of revolutions, and may have the dif 
ferent surface velocities produced by making 
them of different diameters. The rollers may 
be smooth cylinders, or may have their sur 
faces ribbed, lagged, or corrugated, or other. 
wise provided with projections or protuber 
ances, and the difference of surface Velocity 
may be obtained by making the bodies of the 
several rollers of uniform size, but making the 
55 
ribs, lags, or protuberances more prominent 
A second feature of the invention consists 
in the construction of the rollers of this de 
scription of machine with their longitudinal 
profile of such concave, curved, or taper form 
that there is formed between the said rollers, 
for the reception of the roll of hat-bodies or 
other articles; a cavity or pocket which is 
larger at the middle of the length of the said 
rollers, and tapers toward the ends thereof, by 
which means I prevent the extension in a lon 
gitudinal direction of the roll of hat-bodies or 
other articles placed between the said rollers, 
and thereby obtain a more rapid shrinking or 
sizing. 
Figure 1 is a transverse section of a sizing. 
machine, illustrating the first-mentioned part 
of my invention. Figs. 2, 3, and 4 are trans 
verse sections of different sets of roller's adapted 
to such a machine, illustrating modifications 
of my invention. Fig. 5 is a horizontal view 
of two rollers adapted to such a machine, and 
illustrating the second feature of my invention. 
Fig. 6 is a similar view of two rollers, exhib 
iting a modification of this part of the inven 
tion. Fig. 7 is a similar view, exhibiting an 
other modification of the same. Figs. 8 and 
9 are longitudinal views of other rollers, ex 
hibiting further modifications of the same. 
Fig. 10 represents four rollers, illustrating a 
still further modification. 
B, Fig. 1, is the fixed main framing of the 
machine, having fixed bearings for the jour 
nals of the two rollers A and A, which are 
so geared together by gears a? a and an in 
termediate gear, a, that the said rollers ro 
tate in the same direction. 
C is a frame hinged at 0 to the main frame 
B, and having upon it bearings for a third 
roller, A', which is so driven by a belt, b, run 
ning from a pulley, p', on the shaft of the 
roller A', and over guide-pulleys did, to a pull 
ley, p, on its own shaft, that it rotates in the 
same direction as A' and A. The frame C 
is so connected by a rod, e, with a treadle, D, 
that the said frame and its roller may be raised 
by the pressure of the foot of the attendant 
upon the treadle, for the purpose of placing a 
roll, E, of hat-bodies or other articles between OO 
96 
To 
75 
95 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
22SO4. 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
the rollers A' A' A' and removing it there 
from. 
The said frame may be weighted or loaded 
in any suitable manner to produce a necessary 
pressure on the roller A and upon the roll E. 
This machine has all its rollers cylindrical 
and of equal diameter, and only differs from siz 
ing-machines heretofore in use and well known 
in that its several rollers, instead of being 
geared together by gears or pulleys of uniform 
size, and thereby being made to rotate with 
uniform surface velocities, are geared by gears 
and pulleys of unequal size, and thereby caused 
to make unequal numbers of revolutions, and 
so to have unequal surface velocities, the gear 
a' being represented as so much larger than 
(t, and the pulley p' So much larger than the 
pulley p, that the surface velocity of A is 
greater than that of A', and that of A is 
greater than that of A. These rollers, in 
stead of having Smooth peripheries, may have 
their peripheries furnished or constructed with 
lags or other projections or protuberances. 
The set of rollers shown in Fig. 2 are also 
all of uniform size, as in other known machines 
provided with four rollers, the two lower ones 
being mounted in a fixed frame and the up 
per ones in a frame which is capable of an up 
ward and downward motion. These rollers 
are intended to be geared together by gears 
or pulleys of such different sizes that they ro 
tate with unequal surface velocities. They 
may be so geared that A and A rotate at 
uniform velocities, and that A* and Al rotate 
at uniform velocities, but at greater velocities 
than A' and A8; or their relative difference of 
velocity may be otherwise varied by suitable 
gearing. 
The set of three rollers A', A, and A', which 
may be mounted in frames B and C, like those 
shown in Fig. 1, and similarly lettered, are in 
tended to be so geared that all make the same 
number of revolutions, and their unequal sur 
face velocities are produced by, making the 
rollers themselves of different diameters, A 
being shown larger than A' and A larger 
than A. 
The set of three rollers A', A, and A (shown 
in Fig. 4) are also intended to be mounted in 
frames B and C, in the same manner as those 
shown in Fig.1, and similarly lettered, and are 
intended all to make the same number of revo 
lutions. They are constructed with ribs, lags, 
or protuberances, which may be of any de 
sired form. Their bodies are all shown of the 
same size, but an unequal surface velocity is 
produced by making the ribs, lags, or pro 
tuberances of different size, projection, or 
prominence, those g on A' being represented 
as larger or more prominent thang' on A', and 
those g on Abeing larger or more prominent 
than g. 
The hat-bodies or other articles to be treat 
ed between the rollers with unequal velocities 
may be rolled up into a roll, E, in the usual 
way, in a sizing-cloth, and placed between the 
rollers, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, the direc 
 
tion of the roll of the cloth being such rela 
tively to the direction of revolution of the 
rollers that in the rotary motion given to 
the roll E by the rotation of the rollers the 
outer edge of the lap of the cloth will be 
presented in a backward direction relatively 
to the rotation of the roll E, which will be 
understood by reference to the several figures 
of the drawings and the arrows shown there 
on to indicate the directions of rotation. The 
effect of this will be that in passing from a 
slower to a faster roller there will be a tend 
ency to loosen the cloth, and in passing from 
a faster to a slower roller a tendency to tight 
en it. This alternate tightening and loosell 
ing is found in practice to keep the roll Efrom 
compacting so much or so rapidly, as is the 
case when the rollers all have uniform Sur. 
face velocities, and the result is a much better 
working of the felt and a more rapid felting 
action. 
The rollers A? A (shown in Fig. 5 to illus 
trate the second feature of my invention) 
have smooth surfaces, and have a longitudinal 
profile of a regular concave form. The cav 
ity h, produced between three or more of these 
rollers for the reception of the roll E of hat 
bodies or other articles to be felted, is shown 
to be largest at the middle of the length of the 
rollers and to taper toward its ends. These 
rollers may be modified by making their pro 
files with a straight taper from the ends to 
ward the middle of their length, or with a 
portion of the length at and near the middle 
cylindrical and increasing in size toward the 
ends. 
The rollers A' A' (shown in Fig. 6) are like 
those shown in Fig. 5, except that they are 
constructed or provided with longitudinal 
ribs or lags ii of a profile form corresponding, 
or nearly so, with that of the bodies of the 
rollers themselves. 
In the modification shown in Fig. S, instead 
of longitudinal ribs on the rollers, there are 
represented a series of studs or bosses, lc lic, 
which may be produced by driving pegs into 
holes provided for them in the bodies of the 
rollers, which may be of wood or other suit 
able material. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 7 the 
bodies of the rollers are cylindrical, and there 
are provided thereon lags or ribs.jj, the outer 
edges or profiles of which are wedge-shaped 
or of a straight taper form. 
In Fig. 9 the ribs or lags.jj are shown as in 
sections of a length less than the whole length 
of the roller, and set with middle sections op 
posite the spaces between the end sections, 
but in such way that the general longitudinal 
profile of the roller is concave, as in the other 
figures. 
In Fig. 10 two taper rollers are shown, in 
place of each single roller, with concave pro 
file, the two, A' or A, being arranged on one 
shaft or otherwise. With a corresponding axis, 
the smaller ends of each two of the said roll 
ers being arranged together, so as to produce 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IOS 
C 
IIS 
I25 
22S,204 
O 
between them, as in the other examples, a 
cavity, h, which is largest at the middle of its 
length and tapers toward its ends. In this 
modification of my invention I should prefer 
to use eight rollers, placed two on each of 
four shafts, arranged like the shafts of the four 
rollers shown in Fig. 2. 
The tendency of the concavity of longitudi 
nal profile of the rollers, and the consequent 
form of the cavity h between them, (larger at 
the middle and taper toward the ends,) is to 
gather in the roll Elengthwise, or prevent its 
longitudinal extension, and thereby to obtain 
a more effective and rapid shrinking or sizing. 
Both features of my invention admit of the 
use of an ordinary sizing-cloth with smooth 
surface, or of the sizing-cloth with an irregu 
lar surface, which is the subject-matter of a 
United States Patent No. 227,331, granted to 
me, and dated May 4, 1880. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a sizing-machine for felting hat-bodies 
y 25 
and other articles, a series of three or more 
rollers having their axes parallel, or nearl 
parallel, with each other, and adapted to re 
ceive lengthwise between them a roll of hat 
bodies or other articles, and having different 
surface velocities, substantially as herein de 
scribed, for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a sizing-machine for felting hat-bodies 
and other articles, a series of three or more 
rollers having their axes parallel, or nearly 
so, with each other, and having concave or 
taper longitudinal profiles, whereby there is 
formed between the said rollers, for the recep 
tion of a roll of hat-bodies or other articles 
arranged lengthwise of the said rollers, a cav 
ity which is larger at the middle of its length 
and smaller at the ends, substantially as and 
for the purpose herein described. 
35 
JOHN T. WARING. 
Witnesses: 
EENRY T. BROWN, 
FREDK. HAYNES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228805.txt	J. F. DARBY, 
Wehicle-Wheel, 
No. 228,805. 
Patented June 15, 1880. 
7pezzo-esses 
 
44.6s. 
N. PETERs, PHOTo-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. DARBY, OF MONROE, GEORGIA. 
VEHICLE WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,805, dated June 15, 1880. 
Application filed February 14, 1880. 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN F. DARBY, of 
Monroe, in the county of Walton and State 
of Georgia, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Wheels for Vehicles; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, which form a part of 
this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a front or face view of a wheel 
embodying my improvement, the hub and 
hub-plates having been removed. Fig. 2 is an 
axial section of the complete wheel. Fig. 3 is 
a perspective view of the hub with its sta 
tionary flange or plate, and Fig. 4 is a per 
spective view of one of the spokes detached. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
This invention has relation to wheels for 
vehicles of all kinds; and it consists in the 
improvements hereinafter fully described, and 
particularly pointed out in the claim. 
In the drawings, A is the rim of the wheel, 
the spokes B of which impinge with their in 
nel ends upon a short cylinder or ring, C, 
made of malleable iron, cast-iron, or other 
suitable metal. This ring is perfectly plain 
and smooth, and has no recesses to receive 
the ends of the spokes, which are therefore 
not inserted into, but merely impinge upon, its 
cylindrical outside face. 
The inner impinging end of each of the 
spokes B is formed with a wedge-shaped shoul 
der, a, on one side, which is formed by cutting 
a triangular piece out of each side, reaching 
half-way into the depth of the spoke, as shown 
more clearly in Fig. 4. In placing the spokes 
around the central ring or cylinder, C, each 
alternate spoke is reversed, so that the project 
ing flangest on each side of the Wedge-shaped 
shoulder a will interlock with the flanges of the 
spokes next to it on each side, the spoke last 
driven into place, or the key-spoke, binding 
the whole firmly together around the central 
ring, C, as shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
The metallic hub D is cast with a flange, E, 
and is threaded near its outer end, as shown 
at d. The cylindrical part or body D is in 
serted into the central ring or cylinder, C, 
of the wheel, which is held in place by the jam 
nut F and detachable annular flange-plate G. 
To prevent the nut from working loose a 
sleeve or thimble, H, is inserted upon the 
outer end of the hub D d, and held in place 
detachably by screws e e. 
To prevent any possibility of the wheel, with 
its central ring, C, turning upon its cylindri 
cal hub D, its stationary flange-plate E is ser 
rated or roughened upon its inner face; or it 
may be provided with a series of circumferen 
tially disposed projecting spurs,ff, which are 
forced into the wood of the spokes, thus serv 
ing the double purpose of Wedging these closer 
together and effectually preventing turning of 
the wheel upon its hub D. 
This wheel is exceedingly strong and dura 
ble, and by simply removing the sleeve H, nut 
F, and collar G any one of the spokes may 
readily be removed and another inserted, if 
required from breakage or other causes. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
In a wheel for Velhicles, the combination of 
the rim A, spokes B, having wedge-shaped 
shoulders a and laterally-projecting flanges b 
b, central smooth ring or cylinder, C, cylindri 
cal hub D, having annular flange-plate E and 
screw-thread d, detachable collar G, jam-nut 
F, and sleeve H, provided with the fastening 
Screw see, the whole constructed and combined 
substantially in the manner and for the pur 
pose herein shown and specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
. 
65 
75 
85 
JOHN E. DARBY. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAs C. CAMP, 
CALVIN G. NOWELL, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US228905.txt	(No Model.) 
D. A. KILMER, 
Wire-TW is ter. 
No. 228,905. 
Patented June 15, 1880. 
 
NVENTOR 
E7%. ATTORNEYS 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-lithographer wa 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL A. KILMER, OF HOWES CAVE, NEW YORK. 
WIRE-TWSTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 228,905, dated June 15, 1880. 
Application filed April 5, 1880. 
(No model.) 
S 
O 
IS 
3o 
35 jaws. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL A. KILMER, of 
Howe's Cave, in the county of Schoharie and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Wire-Twist 
ers; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description of the 
construction and operation of the same, refer 
ence being had to the annexed drawings, mak 
ing a part of this specification, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a perspective of my wire-twister. Fig. 2 is 
a detail view of the same, and Fig. 3 is a view 
of a modification. 
The nature of my invention relates to wire 
twisting machines. 
The object of my invention is to construct a 
wire-twister which shall be reversible, and 
which shall also admit of the wire being thrown 
off at any desired stage in the operation of the 
machine. 
The bed or table A is mounted upon suita 
ble supporting-legs, and is provided with the 
usual griping jaws B, which are used for hold 
ing the wires which are to be twisted. 
CC are two treadles, which are connected 
with the shaft D by cords D'. These cords 
are secured to drums or spools upon the shaft 
D, and are wound thereon, so that the alter 
nate vibrations of the treadles will cause re 
verse movements of the shaft. The twister E 
ls arranged upon one end of this shaft, and is 
in line with the space between the griping 
The take-up consists of a spring, F, which 
is adjustably secured to one of the legs of the 
table. The upper end of this spring is notched 
and fits upon the shaft between Oue of the 
drums or spools and a collar, G. 
The cords pass through openings in the 
table and work freely through the same. 
55 
SO 
In order to bring either tread to a stop at a 
certain period, and thus stop the motion of 
the shaft and twister at the salme time, I pro- 45 
vide a block, EI, having recesses I, into which 
the treadles pass when they are depressed. 
Pins K are passed through the block, and 
these pins may be raised or lowered in the 
block, so as to limit the downward movement 
of either treadle, thus regulating the position 
at which the twister stops. 
The shaft is mounted in bearings which are 
secured to the table, these being of any suita 
ble construction. 
The treadles are hinged to a cross-rod, L, 
and are arranged in a convenient position for 
the operator. 
The shank of the hook or twister is held in 
the end of the shaft by a set-screw, whereby 
when the hook or twister becomes worn it may 
be removed and a new hook substituted or 
the old hook refitted. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
In a wire-twisting machine, the rotary shaft 
D, with a hook, E, fitted in one of its ends, in 
combination with the cords D'D', the treadles 
C, and the stop-block H, with recesses I and 
pins K, the said cords being connected with 
pulleys upon the shaft and with the treadles, 
and the stop-block H being provided with 
holes, through which the pins are passed, all 
substantially in the manner and for the pur 
poses specified. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
65 
75 
DANIEL A. KILMER 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT EVERETT, 
JAMES J. SHEEHY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229005.txt	(No Model.) 
O, S, OSBORN. 
Sash Holder. 
No. 229,005. 
Patented June 22, 1880. 
 
Witnesses 
Inventor 
N.PETERS, PHOTouthOGRAPHR, WashingtoN, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIVER S. OSBORN, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
ENGLISH & MERSICK, OF SAME PLACE. 
SASH HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 229,005, dated June 22, 1880. 
Application filed April 17, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
with the arm at its extremity is a roller, d, 
Be it known that I, OLIVER S. OSBORN, of 
which may be made of any suitable material. 
the town and county of New Haven, State of 
I prefer rubber. 
Connecticut, have invented a new and useful 
Fig. 2 is a side view of my invention, with 
Improvement in Sash-Holders for Fastening 
letters corresponding to the same parts as they 
the Sliding Windows of Carriages, which im 
are used in connecting within Fig. 1.- 
provement is fully set forth in the following 
The simplicity of the construction enables 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
the swinging of the arm B to any desired po- . 
companying drawings, forming a part of same. 
sition needed for fastening the window-frame, 
The object of my invention is to afford a sim 
the rollerend d being slightly crowded against 
ple and effectual means of preventing the rat 
the frame, where it may be held securely in 
tle of sliding windows in carriages, and, as 
position by a turn of the clamp thumb-screw C. 
shown in Figure 1, consists of a stationary base, 
I desire to claim and secure as my inven 
A, having screw-holes ( a. in each end for the 
tion 
purpose of allowing it to be bolted or screwed 
A carriage-window-frame fastener consist 
to the window-sill or supportin which the win 
ing of the movable arm B, having at its ex 
dow-frame slides. 
tremity the roller d, the stationary base A, to 
Connected with the base A by means of a 
which the arm is connected by pivot b and the 
pivot, b, upon which it works as an axis, is an regulating clamp-screw C, all substantially as 
arm, B having 
OLIVER, S, OSBORN. 
which admits of the shank of the clamp thumb 
screw C passing through it and into a socket 
in the base, whereby the movable arm B is 
held firmly in any desired position. Connected 
a slot-opening through it, described. 
- 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS F. PREUDHOMME, 
WM, BRYAN. 
25 
35 
d 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229105.txt	W. H. DICKEY. 
Chain. 
No. 229, 105. 
Patented June 22, 1880. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. DICKEY, OF JACKSON, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF OF 
HIS RIGHT TO GEORGE S. BENNETT, OF SAME PLACE. 
CHAIN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 229,105, dated June 22, 1880. 
Application filed February 14, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. DICKEY, 
of Jackson, in the county of Jackson and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Chains; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, reference 
Io being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of my in 
proved chain. Fig. 2 is a detached view of one 
I5 form of the hook. Fig. 3 is a detached view 
of the U-shaped part of the link with its ears 
in proper position to receive the hook. Fig. 4 
is a section of links, one of them being in an 
inverted position. Fig. 5 is a detached view 
2o of the U-shaped portion of the link as cast or 
punched from a plate of metal. Fig. 6 repre 
sents pins or pivots, by means of which the 
hook is attached to the side bars. Fig. 7 is a 
detached view of another form of hook. 
25 The U-shaped portion of the link is formed 
of two side bars, AA, each connected at one 
end to an end bar, B, and provided at their 
opposite ends with seats or pivot-holes a, the 
side bars being enlarged, as at A' A', to re 
ceive these seats. Each of the enlarged por 
tions A is formed with a shoulder, a'. 
The hookis formed of a base, C, and a curved 
part, C', the throat c being of such size as will 
permit the end bar, B, to pass freely into the 
35 hook, said end bar being by preference round, 
its diameter in cross-section being about equal 
to the Width of the throat. I connect the hook 
with the heads A' A' of the side bars by means 
of pivots, so that the hook shall swing freely 
in the U-shaped part of the link, except that, 
when preferred, the link may be formed with 
a projecting lug or stop, c, which will engage 
with the hook, and thus restrict the movement 
of the hook and side bars relative to each other, 
I have shown a number of plans for connect 
ing the hook with the side bars-for instance, 
in Fig. 2 the hook is represented as provided 
with pivots c' formed thereon. 
So When the link is to be made of cast metal, 
45 as indicated in Fig. 1. 
of either malleable iron, gray iron, steel, O 
other metal which may be poured into molds, 
I propose to either cast the hook first and then 
form the U-shaped link by casting it about 
the pivots, or form the U-shaped part first and 55 
afterward cast the hook with the pivots ex 
tending through the seats a. 
If the end bar and the side bars be cast in 
the form shown in Fig. 3 cores must be used 
for the pivot-seats a, but when these parts 
are cast of steel or malleable iron they may be 
made in the form represented in Fig. 5, in 
which case cores may be dispensed with, as the 
pattern can be drawn from the sand, the side 
bars being afterward twisted about a quarter 
of a turn to bring the seats into proper posi 
tion to receive the pivots. 
Instead of casting the hook with the pivots 
attached, it may be formed with an opening to 
receive a pivot substantially like those shown 7o 
in Fig. 6. I prefer this latter method, as it 
possesses many advantages over the one above 
referred to-that is, of casting the hook and 
its pivots in one piece. For instance, by using 
a separate pivot it may be made of much 75 
stronger metal than the other parts of the link, 
whereby the size of the hole through the base 
of the hook and the seats a, a may be reduced, 
while still retaining the requisite strength, 
and all wear in the seats may be prevented by 8o 
constructing the pivot with a spline or feather, 
as shown at d, Fig. 6, or by squaring one end 
of the pivot or other equivalent construction, 
and then making one of the seats of corre 
sponding shape, which will, of course, prevent 85 
the pivot from turning, whereby all the wear 
occasioned by the swinging of the hook will 
come upon the inside of the hole through its 
base. 
In all of the construction I propose to coun 
tersink the seats upon their outer ends and to 
upset the outer ends of the pivots after plac 
ing them in their seats, so as to insure that the 
side bars shall not spread when under tension. 
above explained, I am enabled to prevent the 
side bars from spreading with but a shallow 
countersink, which shallow countersink facili 
tates the removal of the pivot intentionally 
should that become desirable; or, when pre- Ioo 
By preventing the pivot from rotating, as 95 
9o 
2 
229,05 
35 
and recessed; hence I do not claim in this pat 
ent any of these features, but propose to be 
limited to the invention set forth specifically 
in the claim, reserving the right to claim all 
other patentable matter which may be shown 
and described herein in other applications 
heretofore filed by me. 
What I claim is 
A chain-link constructed of a U-shaped por 
tion having its ends enlarged, as at A', and 
provided with shoulders, as at a' af, and hav 
ing a pivoted hook, C C, the point of the hook 
being in the described relation to the enlarged 
portion, and shoulders af, whereby the end bar 
of an adjoining link is retained in the hook 
When the links and hooks are in a substantially 
straight line, but may be readily detached 
therefrom when the hook is moved into a posi 
tion at substantially a right angle to the body 
of the link, substantially, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing l. 
have hereunto set my hand this 12th day of 5o 
February, 1880. 
45 
WILLIAM. H. DICKEY. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. S. BENNETT, 
GEORGE DANIELS. 
ferred, in casting the side bars upon the hook, 
or vice versa, the pivots may be formed with 
enlarged outer ends or heads, (see Fig. 2,) 
which will serve the same purpose. When the 
side bars and end bar are to be made of steel 
or Wrought-iron, I may strike them or punch 
them from a sheet, by suitable mechanism, into 
the shape indicated in Fig. 5, afterward twist 
ing the side bars to bring the seats or eyes into 
proper position to receive the pivots; but I 
prefer to make them out of a practically straight 
piece of metal, as in Fig. 5, and then bend it 
into the required U shape. 
By an examination of the drawings it will be 
readily understood that when a hook is moved 
into the position shown in dotted lines, Fig. I, 
the links can be readily detached; but at the 
same time they will be held together when the 
hook is in the position shown in full lines, same 
figure. 
TamaWare that chain-links have been formed 
With permanently-open hooks cast thereon, 
the throats of the hooks being each narrower 
than the shortest diameter of some portion of 
the engaging end bar in cross-section; that 
links have been heretofore made with their 
hooks pivoted to the side bars, and that links 
have been made with their end bars eccentric 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229205.txt	2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 22, 1880. 
S. R. THOMPSON & S. W. JOHNSON, 
Bark Cutting Machine. 
No. 229,205. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
N 
 
 
 
Hat He-He 
EIIH 
|al HH 
III 
HaHaHH 
at III 
 
MEH!"Hit 
Ha/IIH 
Ea. Ha HaRI 
 
7722-esser. 
a f. ?ilu 
MPETERS, PHOTO-LTHoqRAPHER, washingTon, D.C. 
S. R. THOMPSON & S. W. JOHNSON. 
Bark Cutting Machine. 
No. 229,205. 
 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 22, 1880. 
77227a-e-J Jes. 
< 3%-4%--- 
7, 7 / ----, 
NEERS, Phoro-LTHOGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D.C. 's 
-Z Zee'ezzo Zu. 
Ya 
af 774-4----- 
47 7.4/73------- 
l147u. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL R. THOMPSON, OF BROOKLINE, AND SAMUEL W. JOHNSON, OF 
- 
WEST MEDFORD, MASSACEUSETTS. 
BARK - CUTTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 229,205, dated June 22, 1880. 
Application filed February 14, 1880. 
SO 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, SAMUEL R. THOMP 
SON, of Brookline, in the county of Norfolk 
and State of Massachusetts, and SAMUEL W. 
JOHNSON, of West Medford, county of Middle 
sex, and State aforesaid, have invented cer 
tain Improvements in Bark-Cutting Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to machines having 
rotary cutters for cutting or reducing bark for 
tanners use; and it has for its object, first, to 
provide certain improvements in the rotary 
cutter, whereby the machine is enabled to run 
at a lower rate of speed and with less wear 
and jar than heretofore; secondly, to provide 
improved means for separating coarse frag 
ments of bark from the properly-reduced par 
ticles; thirdly, to enable the cutter to be read 
ily exposed or uncovered when desired. 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
improvements which we will now proceed to 
describe and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a side elevation of a bark-cutting machine 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 represents 
a transverse vertical section of the same. 
Fig. 2 represents a modification. Fig. 3 rep 
resents a section on line aca, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 
represents a plan view of the rotary cutter. 
Fig. 5 represents a section on line gy y, Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 represents a front view of the machine. 
Fig. 7 represents a side view with the hopper 
turned back to expose the cutter, Fig. 8 rep 
resents a side view of the hopper detached. 
The same letters indicate the same parts in 
all the figures. 
In the drawings, A represents the rotary cut 
ter, constituting a part of my invention. This 
cutter is composed of a cylindrical body and 
independent teetha ('', projecting therefrom, 
the cutter being preferably formed by placing 
a series of saws side by side on an arbor, al 
though any other suitable construction may 
The teeth a a? are shaped like 
be adopted. 
the teeth of an ordinary circular saw, and the 
teeth a are longer-that is, their points pro 
ject farther from the axis of the cutter than 
the points of the teeth af, the difference in 
length being preferably about one-eighth of 
an inch. The teeth are arranged in rows ex 
tending longitudinally of the body of the cut 
ter, each longitudinal row being composed of 
alternating longer and shorter teeth, as shown 
in Fig. 4. The teeth forming the longitudinal 
rows are placed side by side, each in contact 
with the next, so that there are no vacant 
spaces between them; hence the longitudinal 
rows are continuous. The teeth are also ar 
ranged in rows extending around the periph 
ery of the cutter, the teeth of each saw consti 
tuting a peripheral row. We prefer to make 
these peripheral rows of alternating longer 
and shorter teeth, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 
By this arrangement of teeth each tooth is en 
abled to separate an independent fragment 
from a sheet or piece of bark, and no part of 
the end of the bark is left untouched by each 
longitudinal row of teeth, as would be the case 
if the teeth were separated by intervening 
spaces, as has been usual heretofore. When 
the teeth are so separated the cutter has to be 
driven very rapidly, in order that the portions 
of the bark untouched by one row of teeth 
may be properly cut by the succeeding rows, 
and unless the cutter is driven very rapidly 
its tendency is to break or crush off the tongues 
left on the end of the bark by the vacant spaces 
between the preceding teeth, the result being 
the detachment of fragments too large to be 
properly leached and the reduction of a por 
tion of the bark to powder, which is always 
objectionable in the reduced bark, because it 
accumulates in masses and resists the action 
of water in leaching. 
We have found by practice that our im 
proved cutter performs good work, and does 
not require to be driven so rapidly as the cut 
ters heretofore used, so that less power is re 
quired to drive the cutter and less jar and 
vibration are caused by the operation of the 
machine. 
It will be seen that while the longitudinal 
rows are continuous, so that they act on all 
parts of the end of a sheet or piece of bark, 
the alternating longer and shorter teeth com 
65. 
7 o 
75 
95 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
 
 
g 
229,205 
75 
- 
 
V 
O 
posing the longitudinal rows insure the sepa- T', to an inclined plate, S', forming a part of 
ration of the bark removed into uniform par 
the frame B. The bolt T is attached to the 
ticles of the proper size for leaching. 
plate R and passes through a slot in the plate 
The arbor of the cutter is supported in 
S'. In this case the plate R is movable in the 
suitable bearings on the top of a supporting 
same plane as the bed-plate. In either case 
frame, B, which incloses a chute, C, below the 
the plate R constitutes an adjustable terminus 
cutter. In this chute is located a shaft, D, 
of the bed - plate, which receives the Wear 
which is journaled in a movable frame, E, 
caused by the action of the cutter on the bark, 
which is adapted to slide into and out of the 
and is capable of being adjusted to compen 
frame B. 
sate for wear. 
The shaft D is provided with a series of pe 
The hopper-frame N is provided with a 
ripheral collars, F, and intervening peripheral 
feed-roll, U, which is positively rotated by a 
grooves or pockets, G, about half an inch wide, 
sprocket-wheel, N', connected by a chain, N, 
and having partitions H. H. The interior of 
to a wheel, N', which is journaled on a shaft, 
the frame E forms a part of the chute C, and 
N", projecting from a plate, N, attached to 
is about equal in width to the diametel' of the 
the side of the hopper-frame. 
The feed-roll 
collars, so that when pieces of bark too large 
U is journaled in Weighted arms U U', which 
to enter the pockets G fall from the cutter they 
are pivoted at at at to the sides of the hopper 
will be arrested by the collars, the properly 
frame, and are adapted to oscillate and permit 
reduced cuttings falling into the pockets G and 
the feed-roll to move laterally. 
being carried over by the partitions H as the 
By pivoting the hopper-frame to the sup 
shaft revolves. 
porting-frame B, as described, and supporting 
The pieces arrested by the collars F may be 
the feed-roll and its driving mechanism on the 
cut or broken up by the joint action of teeth 
hopper-frame, we are enabled to readily expose 
I, formed on said collars, and a shoulder, J, 
the cutter by swinging back the hopper-frame, 
formed on one of the side blocks of the frame 
as shown in Fig. 7, whenever the cutter is to 
E. said shoulder having grooves K, through 
be removed or repaired. We thus avoid the 
which the collars pass. The pieces of bark are 
labor and delay usually incident to removing 
arrested by the shoulder J, while the teeth I 
the hopper and other mechanism to enable ac 
cut or break them. If desired, however, the 
cess to be had to the cutter. 
shoulder J and teeth I may be dispensed with, 
The shaft of the feed-roll projects through 
and the shaft D may be located nearer the 
slots U in the sides of the hopper. The sides 
cutter, so that pieces of bark arrested by the 
of the hopper have vertical openings U, ex 
collars F will be caught up by the cutter as 
tending from the slots U*, to permit the up 
they accumulate and carried over thereby to 
Ward movement of the shaft of the feed-roll 
the bed-plate, hereinafter described, to be re 
when it is desired to remove the latter. The 
duced. 
openings U are closed when the feed-roll is in 
The removable frame E enables the shaft D 
place by pieces U, attached to the cover U of 
to be removed for repairs. The shaft D has a 
the hopper, said cover being detachable with 
pulley, L, on one end, which is belted to a pull 
the pieces U. 
ley, M, on the arbor of the cutter. 
F represents a friction - roll located in an 
N represents what Iterm the hopper-frame, 
opening in the bed-plate. 
which is located at the top of the frame B, and 
We claim as our invention 
is provided with lugs P, extending downwardly 
1. In a bark-cutting machine, a rotary cut 
and pivoted at OO to the frame B. This frame 
ter having alternating long and short teeth 
N incloses and covers the cutter when in oper 
arranged in longitudinal rows, the alternating 
ative position, and has the general form of a 
long and short teeth of said rows being re 
hopper. One side of the frame N is inclined 
spectively alternated with the short and long 
and properly arranged with reference to the 
teeth of each adjacent row, as set forth. 
cutter to constitute a bed-plate, Q, to support 
2. In combination with a rotary cutter hav 
the bark as it is presented to the cutter. This 
ing independent teeth and a chute or passage 
bed-plate does not extend in one piece to the 
leading from such cutter, a rotary shaft, D, 
cutter, but is supplemented by a movable 
located in the chute, having a series of collars, 
steel plate, R. Two methods of supporting 
F, and intervening pockets, G, the diameter of 
and moving the plate Rare shown, respectively, 
said collars being about equal to the width of 
in Figs. 2 and 2. In the former the plate R. 
the chute, so that they arrest all fragments too 
is attached to an inclined plate, S, which forms 
small to enter the pockets, the latter carrying 
a part of the frame B. The plate R in this 
E. the properly-reduced particles, as set 
case is at right angles with the bed-plate, and 
Orth. 
is attached to the plate S by a bolt, T, passing 
3. The rotary shaft D, having collars F, in 
through a slot in the plate R. Screws V, pass 
tervening pockets, G, and teeth II on said col 
ing through a flange, W, on the plate S, serve 
lars, combined with the fixed block having a 
to move the plate R at right angles to the 
grooved shoulder, J, as set forth. 
E. of the bed-plate when the bolt T is low 
4. In combination with the chute or passage 
GeO. 
C and the shaft D, having collars F and pock 
In Fig. 2 the plate R is attached by a bolt, 
ets G, the sliding frame E, supporting the shaft 
I 25 
85 
95 
OO 
Io5. 
O 
II5 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
 
229,205 
3 
5. The combination of a frame or base, B, ruary, A. D. 1880. 
D, and enabling said shaft to be removed from names to this specification, in the presence of Io 
the machine, as set forth. 
supporting a cutter at its top, the hopper 
frame having the feed- roll U, inclined bed- 
plate Q, and lugs P, pivoted to the frame B, so 
as to permit the hopper-frame and feed-roll to 
be turned back, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
two subscribing witnesses, this 9th day of Feb 
SAME TESSN. 
Witnesses: 
E. B. FAIRCHILD, 
C. E. BROWN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229305.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 229,305. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Ny 
A. T. CROSS. 
F0 un taim Pen. 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ.X% ? 
' 
Fig. 4. 
Fig. 
????,???????? 
N. PETERs, Photo-LithoGRAPHER, washington, D. c. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 29, 
188O. 
, AKSINS 
?%?>?%NQ 2% ZZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz>>>? 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZXZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZzzzxzzzzzzzz!z%?? 
Fig.2. 
427? 
7 
C... 
:)? 
?\ 
(No Model.) 
No. 229,305. 
raeraer:::: 
~~~~~ 
cg 
?)) 
 
Z?ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ,2 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz, 
??? 
?? 
* 
?*** 
A. T. CROSS. 
Fountain Pen. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 29, 1880. 
ZZZZZZZZ.XXXXX]? 
 
 
zzzzZZZZZZZZ? 
? 
?z??zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzX? 
??? 
Witnesses. 
N. MEIERS. PHoTo-Lur HoGRAPHER, WASHIx?GTON,  C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALONZO. T. CROSS, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
FOUNTAN - PEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 229,305, dated June 29, 1880. 
Application filed April 24, 1880. (No model.) 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALONZO. T. CRoss, of 
Providence, in the State of Rhode Island, have 
invented an Improvement in Fountain-Pens, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of foun 
tain-pens where the upper end of the reservoir 
is closed air-tight and air is admitted to the 
ink at the lower end of the ink-chamber, and 
it provides convenient means for clearing the 
fine tube at the lower end of the ink-chamber, 
orat the point of the pen, from interfering sedi 
ment or ink deposit, without the necessity, as 
heretofore, of either opening or partially open 
ing the ink-chamber, with consequent liability 
of soiling the fingers with ink. 
It also provides means for preserving the 
proper relative position of the ink-delivering 
tube and its inclosed clearing - spindle, under 
slightly varying conditions, in the connecting 
joint between the point-section and the main 
reservoir, thus rendering it practicable to use 
a frictionjoint for this connection, with conse 
quent cheapness of manufacture. 
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal section of 
a common fountain-pen provided with my im 
provement. Fig. 2 is a central longitudinal 
section of a stylographic fountain - pen pro 
vided with my improvement. Fig. 3 is an en 
larged section, showing the point-section of a 
stylographic pen and the lower portion of the 
central air-tube and the reservoir. Fig. 4 rep 
resents a transverse section, taken at the ac 
companyingdotted line, through the upper end 
of the spindle-carrying guide in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 
represents a transverse section, taken at the 
accompanying dotted, line through the lower 
end of the spindle-carrying-guide. Figs. 6, 9, 
and 12 are central longitudinal sections of a 
stylographic fountain-pen, showing modifica 
tions of my improvement. Figs. 7, 8, 10, and 11 
are transverse sections of Figs, 6 and 9, re 
spectively, taken at the accompanying dotted 
lines. 
In the accompanying drawings, Fig.1. A rep 
resents the ink-reservoir; B, the point-section; 
C, the central air-tube; D, the vent plug or 
valve; E, the ink-delivering tube, and F the 
Writing-pen. 
Upon the lower end of the air-tube C is 
placed the loosely - sliding spindle - carrying less shaded style. 
guide G, to the lower end of which the tube 
clearing spindle EI is rigidly attached. The 
spindle H passes loosely through the contracted 
bore of the tube E, its point extending into 55 
the enlarged lower portion of the tube. The 
bore of the spindle-carrying guide G is con 
tracted at the point g to receive the fine-wire 
connection J, extending between the spindle 
carrying guide and the vent-valve D, the wire 6o 
passing loosely through the contraction g, and 
being secured to the guide by means of the en 
largement or head j within the chamber Kat 
the upper end of the spindle. 
... The vent-valve D is provided with a stem 65 
or guide, d, extending loosely for a short dis 
tance into the air-tube, and the screw-thread 
d of the valve is cut away upon one side, in 
order that the air may enter the tube as soon 
as the flange of the valve is raised from its 7o 
seat upon the upper end of the outer case or 
reservoir, A. 
The wire J is fitted tightly into the stem or 
guided of the valve, the swivel-joint in the 
spindle-carrying guide G serving to permit 75 
the valve to be turned for the purpose of open 
ing or closing the vent, or for disconnecting 
the valve from the reservoir, the position of 
the head j and the contraction g being such 
that the screw-thread d may be entirely re- 8o 
moved without raising the guide G. from its 
seat upon the upper end of the point-section. 
The spindle-carrying guide G is provided at . 
its upper end with the stop g, ctit away, as 
shown in Fig. 4, to allow the passage of ink 85 
from the main ink-chamber into the point-Sec 
tion, and with an enlargement, g, at the lower 
end, also cut away, as shown in Fig. 5, to allow 
the passage of ink to the point of the pen. 
The enlargement of, nearly fitting the bore of 9o 
the point-section, serves to preserve the cen 
tral position of the spindle in its passage 
through the contracted bore of the tube E. 
At the upperend of the point-sectionisplaced 
the hollow screw L, by means of which the 95 
position of the lower end of the guide G. may 
be adjusted with reference to the contracted 
aperture or throat at the lower end of the 
chamber O, in order to allow a more or less 
rapid flow of ink to the point of the pen, ac- Ioo 
cording as it is desired to write in a more or 
35 
? ? 
45 
2 
229,805 
?. ? 
15 
2 ? 
25 
The spindle-carrying guide G is provided 
through the slot l in the enlarged upper por 
tion of the spindle, and the spindle is forced 
upon one side with a slot, g, opposite the lower 
downward by means of the slight spiral spring 
end of the air-tube C, in order to allow for the 
on, operating between the loose washer n and 
desirable adjustment of the position of the 
the collar 0 upon the enlarged portion of the 
guide without changing the point for admit. 
spindle, and the guide G is provided with a . 
ting air to the ink-chamber. Side openings, h. 
slot, g, opposite the lower end of the 
air-tube, 
h, are made in the upper enlarged hollow end 
as in Fig. 1. 
of the spindle H, or in the lower end of the 
The spring M, which imparts movement to 
guide G, in order to provide for the free cir 
the guide G, is to be made stronger than the 
culation of ink within the inclosed chamber K. 
spring m, which operates the writing-spindle, 
The tube E is frictionally held in the bore 
in order that the guide G may be held firmly 
of the point-section, and is thus made extensi 
while in the act of writing, allowing the spin 
ble, in order to permit the employment of pens 
dle H to vibrate with the movement of the pen. 
Fof differentlengths, the corresponding adjust 
Connection is made by means of the wire J, 
ment of the clearing-spindle and guide being 
loosely connected to the guide G, through the 
made by means of the hollow screw L. 
air-tube, to the stem of the vent-valve D. 
In using the pen the vent-valve is to be first 
In ordinary cases, in writing with this stylo 
slightly raised from its seat in order to admit air 
graphic fountain-pen, the ink will flow readily 
to the tube C. Then, if through obstruction 
from the Writing-point upon slightly raising 
in the tube E the ink fails to flow with the de 
the vent-valve from its seat; but in case the 
sired readiness to the point of the pen, the 
pen has been unused for some time, or if the ink 
valve D is to be wholly unscrewed and drawn 
is not clear from dirt or sediment, so that the 
back, thus sliding the spindle-carrying guide 
flow does not commence at the instant of rais 
G upon the air-tube C against the downward 
ing the vent-valve, then, by simply unscrew 
thrust of the spiral spring M, placed below the 
ing the valve andl drawing the point of the 
end of the air-tube, and also moving the spindle 
spindle H back to the limit of the movement 
H within the tube E. The sudden release of 
of the guide and suddenly releasing the same 
the valve ID from the fingers allows the spring 
the Spring M, acting against the guide, will 
M to impart a rapid downward movement to 
throw the spindle downward, the guide oper 
the spindle and guide, thus forcibly ejecting 
ating as a plunger to forcibly eject a small 
the ink through the tube E against the under 
quantity of ink through the tube at the writ 
side of the pen F. 
ing-point, thus effectually clearing and start 
The difficulty of starting the flow of ink for 
ing the pen. The point-cap N may now be 
writing in ordinary fountain-pens of this class, 
placed upon the upper portion of the handle 
where the column of ink is supported by a vac 
Or reservoir, the necessary supply of air pass 
uum, has greatly tended to prevent their ex 
ing to the vent-valve, and thence to the air 
tended use; but my above-described improve 
tube through the hole in the side of the cap. 
ment provides, in a vacuum fountain-pen, con 
Fig. 3 represents a stylographic fountain 
venient means for forcibly expelling the ink 
pen With the spindle E rigidly attached to the 
from the lower portion of the ink-chamber 
guide, and with a hollow adjusting-screw, L, 
whenever desired. 
at the upper eind of the point-section, for reg 
In Fig. 2 the point-section B is attached to 
???tng the position of the point of the spin 
the reservoir. A by means of a friction joint, a, 
causing the upper end of the point-section to 
In Fig. 6 the wire J terminates in a ball or 
be pressed more or less within the outer tube, 
knob, e, at the upper end of the air-tube, cov 
A, forming the reservoir, the end of the tube 
ered by the vent-cap D, a side opening, p, 
A preferably made of hard rubber or similar 
being made through the side of the screw Q 
material, being strengthened by means of an 
and connecting with the bore of the air-tube 
encircling metal band, b. 
C, in order to admit air to the tube upon sim 
The spring M (shown in Fig.1 as below the 
ply raising the vent-cap from its seat upon the 
lower end of the air-tube within the guide) is 
upper end of the reservoir. The vent-cap D 
in this case placed above the guide upon the 
is to be entirely removed from the top of the 
outside of the air-tube, being held between 
reservoir, whenever it is desired to clear the 
the fixed collar c and the guide. 
point of the pen, by means of the backward 
The stop g, made with open spaces for the 
movement of the spindle, as hereinbefore de 
passage of ink, as shown in Fig. 4, rests 
against the upper end of the point-section 
scribed. 
The tube C is made in two parts, the por 
B, thus preserving the proper relative positions 
tion c' being made of hard rubber and the 
of the lower end of the spindle E and inlk 
portion c of silver, or of a metal not readily 
delivering tube E, whether the point-section is 
corroded by the acids contained in ordinary 
passed more or less into the outer tube at the 
Writing-ink, and the spring M is placed upon 
friction joint. The position of the spindle H 
relatively to the stop g may be changed by 
the metal tube between the end of the tube 
means of the adjusting-screw i, the guide G. c' and the spindle-carrying guide G. The wire 
65 being made in two parts, united by means of J is connected to the guide bypassing through 
a screw - thread. The spindle H is attached the holes in one side thereof and then pass 
to the guide G by means of the pink passinging around the body of the guide. 
Cll(3. 
SO 
55 
45 
35 
7? 
75 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
I I. ? 
w? 
II 5 
I2 ? 
I 25 
????????? 
229,305 
3 
In Fig. 9 the wire J terminates in a ball or 
knob, e, at the upper end of a small metal 
tube, P, passing through the ink-chamber and 
out at the upper end of the reservoir, the air 
passing into the ink-chamber through the duct 
a', made in the side wall of the reservoir, be 
ing prevented from passing down the tube P 
by reason of its comparatively small bore, and 
by the thread of the screw closely fitting the 
screw-thread of the vent-cap. 
The writing-spindle His provided with an en 
larged lengthened shank, H', to form a guide 
loosely passing into the bore of the tube P. 
The Wire J is firmly secured in the upper end 
of the guide H', and the spring M is placed 
upon the guide EI between the lower end of 
the tube P and the grooved stop t at the lower 
end of the guide, which rests against the in 
terior shoulder of the point-section. 
By slightly unscrewing the vent-cap air will 
be admitted to the lower portion of the ink 
chamber through the ducta', and in case it is 
desired to cleanse the fine tube E from sedi 
ment the vent-cap D is to be entirely removed 
and the spindle drawn back, as hereinbefore 
described, by means of the wire passing through 
the tube P, the downward movement of the 
spindle being limited by the point-section when 
the pen is closed and ready for use, and by the 
wire and knob, or by an equivalent stop, when 
ever the point-section is removed for the pur 
pose of filling the reservoir. 
In Fig. 12 the spindle-guide E' is held in 
the point-section and disconnected from either 
the air-tube or the main reservoir, and in this 
case the sliding extension G' upon the air-tube 
is to be drawn back by means of the connected 
wire J passing loosely through the air-tube, as 
hereinbefore described. The tube Emay then 
be cleared by either shaking the guide H back 
and forth longitudinally through the increased 
space between its upper end and the lower end 
of the sliding extension G', or by allowing the 
extension-piece G' to spring back suddenly by 
the action of the spring M, forcing the guide 
Ed' downward and ejecting a quantity of ink. 
through the tube E. The sliding extension G 
- 
is secured to the air-tube by means of the pin 
b' passing through the slot gin the side of the 
extension. 
I do not claim in this application an air 
passage or duct made in the solid side or 
wall of the reservoir, as shown in Fig. 9, the 
same having been shown and claimed by me 
in a prior application. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a fountain-pen in which the column 
of ink in the reservoir is supported by atmos 
pheric pressure, an ink-delivering tube of small 
diameter, in combination with an inclosed 
tube-clearing spindle, provided with means for 
forcible backward movement, passing through 
an inclosing-tube to the upper portion of the 
ink-reservoir, and operating against the down 
Ward action of a spring, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a fountain-pen in which the column 
of ink in the reservoir is supported by atmos 
pheric pressure, the combination of an air 
supplying tube with a sliding extension forced 
downward to its stop by means of a spring, 
and provided with means for forcible retrac 
tion, passing through the air-tube to the up 
per portion of the reservoir, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a fountain-pen in which the column 
of ink in the reservoir is supported by atmos 
pheric pressure, and an ink-delivering tube of 
small diameter, the combination of a tube 
clearing spindle with the vent plug or valve 
by means of a loose swiveled connection pass 
ing through the air-supplying tube, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In a fountain-pen in which the column 
of ink in the reservoir is supported by atmos 
pheric pressure, a point-section provided with 
a hollow screw at its upper end, to form an 
adjustable seat for a spindle-carrying guide 
operated downward by a spring, substantially 
as described. 
ALONZO T. CROSS, 
Witnesses: 
CELIUS E. RICHARDS, 
H. WILBER HUBBARD. 
55 
?? 
75 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229405.txt	H. HARTMAN. 
- Bridle. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 29, 188O. 
(No Model.) 
No. 229,405. 
 
ITNESSES 
INVENTOR: 
PETERS, photo-lthographer, washington, c. 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
-(No Model.) 
No. 229,405. 
H. HARTMAN, 
Bridle. 
2. Sheets-a-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 29, 1880. 
WITNESSES 
 
stro 
46% evic/e- 
a 
M 
S 
W 
O 
221 
west 
2 a 
1. 
-- 
'-22 
INVENTOR: 
p 
By 04 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY HARTMAN, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH TERRITORY, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF OF HIS RIGHT TO ANGUS McKELLAR, OF SAME PLACE. 
B. R D.E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 229,405, dated June 29, 1880. 
Application filed April 12, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EENRY HARTMAN, of 
Salt Lake City, in the county of Salt Lake, 
Territory of Utah, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Riding and Driving 
Bridles, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
Figure 1, Sheet 1, is a perspective view of 
the improvement, illustrating its use. Fig. 2, 
Sheet 2, is a perspective view of the bit. Fig. 
3, Sheet 2, is a perspective view of the nose 
pad. Fig. 4, Sheet 2, is a perspective view of 
a part of the nose-pad. Fig. 5, Sheet 2, is a 
perspective view of the curb-chain and pad. 
Fig. 6, Sheet 2, is a perspective view of the 
safety-line. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The object of this invention is to furnish 
riding and driving bridles so constructed that 
horses can be easily and quickly controlled 
should they become frightened or attempt to 
practice ugly or dangerous tricks. 
A is the mouth-piece of the bit, the ends of 
which are swiveled to the bars B. Upon the 
bars B, above the ends of the mouth-piece A, 
are formed lugs, in which are secured rings C, 
to receive the cheek-straps D of the bridle. 
To the rear ends of the bars B are secured 
rings E, to receive the riding or driving reins 
F, by which the horse is guided and controlled 
under ordinary circumstances. 
To the forward ends of the bars B are secured 
rings G, to receive the nose-strap E. Upon 
the lower sides of the rear ends of the bars B 
are formed hooks I, to receive the curb-chain J. 
The hooks I are curved outward and upward, 
and have cross-heads or T-buttons K upon 
their ends, to prevent the curb - chain J from 
becoming detached accidentally. 
Upon the lower sides of the bars B, below 
the ends of the bit A, are formed arms L., which 
project downward, are curved inward and rear 
ward, and have their ends connected or formed 
solid with each other. 
To the ends of the arms Luis attached a ring, 
M, to receive the end of the safety-line N, which 
may be double or single, as may be desired. 
For riding-horses I prefer to use the safety 
line N double, or like ordinary riding-reins, as 
55 
To the curb-chain J is attached, by keepers 6o 
shown in Fig.1; but for driving-horses a single 
rein to each horse will be sufficient. 
The forward part of the safety - rein N is 
made round, as shown in Fig. 6, and its rear 
partis made flat, and is provided with a buckle 
to buckle upon the strap that extends back to 
the driver, and which I prefer to make of web 
ing, so that it will be readily distinguishable 
to the touch. 
or other suitable means, a pad or leather plate, 
O, to prevent the said curb-chain J from chaf. 
ing the horse. 
P is a triangular or heart-shaped leather 
plate, the lower part of which is sewed to the 65 
nose-strap H. The upper end of the plate P 
is buckled or otherwise secured to the face 
strap Q. 
To the inner surface of the side parts of the 
lower end of the plate Pare attached half-pear- 7o 
shaped knobs or blocks R., of wood or other 
suitable material, in such positions as to be 
over the air-passages of the horse's nose, a little 
above the nostrils, as shown in Fig. 1. The 
knobs Rare covered with soft leather or other 75 
Suitable material to prevent them from hurt 
ing or rubbing the horse. 
To the lower part of the plate P, between 
the plies of the nose-strap H, or between the 
nose-strap Hand the plate P, is secured a steel 8o 
spring, S, the end parts of which are slightly 
curved outward, so as to hold the knobs R. 
raised except when the safety-line N is drawn 
upon. With this construction, when the safety 
line N is drawn upon the pad P R will be 85 
drawn down, closing the air-passages of the 
horse's nose, and preventing him from breath 
ing, so that he will be reduced at once to sub 
jection. 
with downwardly-projecting arms on which 
are slide-rings connected with the bit; or to 
use boxes on each side of the nose-band oppo 
site the nostrils, containing levers and hinged 
pads; or to attach pads to a spring-band se- 95 
cured to the bridle by straps and to which the 
safety-reins are attached; or to attach pads to 
a spring-bar which passes across the horse's 
nose and through slides on the bridle to the 
safety-rein; but 
I am aware that it is not new to make a bit go 
IOO 
Io 
15 
25 
35 
45 
2 
229,405 
5 bars B, having rings C E G, the lever-arms L., accidentally detached, as set forth. 
What I claim as new is- 
I, formed upon the bit-bars B and having 
1. In riding and driving bridles, the bit, coni cross-headbuttons Kupon their ends, substan. 
structed substantially as herein shown and tially as herein shown and described, whereby 
described, consisting of the mouth-piece A, the the curb-chain.J. is prevented from becoming 
having ring M, and the hooks I, having cross- 
HENRY HARTMAN. 
heads or buttons K, to adapt the bit to receive 
the various appliances of the bridle, as set 
forth. 
2. In riding and driving bridles, the hooks 
NATHAN KEMPTON, 
CHAS. F. BLANDIN. 
; 
; 
: 
: 
Witnesses: 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
to 
; 
; 
; 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229505.txt	vass w m w we was 
P, R, WEATHERFORD, 
Rotary and Drag Harrow, 
No. 229,505. 
Patented June 29, 188O. 
Z5 
C. 
CA 22 AI O2 
e 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
2. 
A. 
 
rt E. H. 
ZHe 
EE 
IW 
.Y. 
. 
2. E. O 
z 
22 E. Easts tal I 
E. 
id:Hia 
-4H23 E. 
Zaf 
HEH 
M. ZEEE II: 
HEEE 
  
 
a 
III.4-m La II 2, 
WITNESSES 
(2.376/&e/6/. 
-6. wycle 
INVENTOR: 
22 Wzyz, 
dG 
BY 
NPETERS, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, washingtoN, d. c. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PERRY R. WEATHERFORD, OF WAVERLY, KENTUCKY, AssIGNOR TO HIM. 
SELF AND ALEXANDER, KING, OF SAME PLACE. 
ROTARY AND DRAG HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 229,505, dated June 29, 1880. 
Application filed March 9, 1880. 
(No model.) 
 
 
 
O 
25 
35 
45 
- 
Around the chain-wheel P passes an endless 6o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PERRY R. WEATHER 
FORD, of Waverly, in the county of Union and 
State of Kentucky, have invented a new and 
5 useful Improvement in Combined Rotary and 
Drag Harrows, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Figurelis a bottom view of theimprovement. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional side elevation. 
The object of this invention is to furnish com 
bined rotary and drag harrows so constructed 
that they can be adjusted to work at any de 
sired depth in the ground, and can be readily 
raised from and lowered to the ground. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A represents the wheels, the axle B of which 
revolves in brackets C, attached to theframeD, 
to raise the said frame D to such a height from 
the ground that the revolving harrow may be 
placed beneath it. Upon the inner ends of the 
hubs of the wheels A are formed clutch-teeth 
E, with which engage the teeth of the clutches 
F. The clutches F slide upon the axle B and 
turn with it, and are held against the hubs of 
the wheels A by springs G, placed upon the 
axle B and interposed between the clutches F 
and the brackets C, so that one of the wheels 
A in turning may move faster than the other 
without sliding. The axle B also revolves in 
bearings attached to the rear parts of two par 
allel bars, EI, which are placed at such a dis 
tance apart as to receive the driving-gearing 
between them. 
In bearings in the forward ends of the bars 
Hrevolves a shaft, I, the ends of which revolve 
in bearings in the forward parts of the bars J. 
The bars J are placed parallel with the bars 
EI, and their rear ends are pivoted to the ends 
of the axle B. 
harrow-teeth K, the working parts of which 
are curved to the rearward, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The harrow-teeth K are kept at a proper dis 
tance apart by tubular blocks or washers L, 
placed upon the shaft Ibetween the said teeth K. 
To the shaft I, between the forward ends of 
the bars H, is attached a chain-wheel,M, around 
which passes an endless chain, N. The end 
5o less chain N also passes around the chain-wheel 
O, rigidly connected with another chain-wheel, 
P. The journals of the chain-wheels O P re 
volve in bearings in the lower ends of the arms 
Q, which rest in grooves in the outer sides of 
the bars H, and are slotted longitudinally to 55 
receive the screws or bolts R, that secure the 
said arms Q to the bars H, so that the tension 
of the endless chains can be regulated by ad 
justing the said arms Q. 
chain, S, which also passes around a chain 
wheel, T. The chain-wheel Trevolves upon a 
sleeve bushing or bearing placed or formed 
upon the axle B. Upon one end of the hub of 
the wheel T are formed clutch-teeth U, which 65 
engage with the teeth of the clutch W, placed 
upon the said axle B. The clutch V is held 
forward by a spring, W, interposed between 
it and the bearing of the bar H. The clutch 
V is thrown out of gear with the chain-wheel 
T by a lever, X, pivoted to a bracket, Y, at 
tached to the platform Z. The platform Z is 
attached to the frame D to prevent the driver 
from being annoyed by soil thrown by the re 
volving harrow-teeth K. 
a is the driver's seat, the standard b of which 
is attached to the platform Z. 
To the forward ends of the bars J are at 
tached the ends of a shaft, c, upon which are 
placed the ends of the harrow-teeth d. The 8o 
harrow-teeth d are kept in place and at the 
proper distance apart by tubular blocks or 
washerse, placed upon the said shaft c between 
the ends of the said harrow-teeth d. Through 
holes in the harrow or drag teeth d, at a little 
distance from their upper ends, is passed a 
shaft, f, upon which, between the harrow-teeth 
d, are placed tubular blocks or washers g, to 
keep the said harrow-teeth at the proper dis 
tance part. The ends of the shaft fare attached 9o 
Upon the shaft I are secured the centers of to the lower ends of short arms h, the upper 
ends of which are attached to the bars J, near 
their forward ends. The harrow-teeth d are 
slightly curved and are inclined to the rear 
ward, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The drag-teeth d and the rotating teeth K 
are so placed as to alternate with each other, 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
To the shaft c are attached the lower ends of 
two bars, i, the upper ends of which are piv. Ioo 
95 
75 
- 
 
2 
Eirc.t.a.a.r.start: 
A "k 
: 
- 
 
229,505 
oted to the ends of arms.j, rigidly attached to 
the ends of a shaft, k. The shaft k works in 
bearings attached to the side bars of the frame 
D, and to one of its ends is rigidly attached 
an arm, l, projecting in the opposite direction 
from the arms.j, and which may be a continu 
ation of one of the said arms. To the end of 
the arm l is pivoted the upwardly-curved end 
of a rod, m, which slides in keepers n, attached 
to a side bar of the frame D. The rear end of 
the rod m is pivoted to the lower end of the 
lever o, which is pivoted to the frame D or to 
the platform Z, or to a support attached to the 
said frame or platform. The upper part of the 
lever o projects across and moves along an 
arched bar, p, attached to the platform Z, and 
which has one or more notches formed in it to 
receive the levero and hold it in position. With 
this construction, by operating the lever 0 the 
harrow-teeth Kid can be raised from the ground 
O 
IS 
for convenience in turning around and passing 
from place to place. 
g is the tongue, to which the draft is applied, 
and which is rigidly attached to the forward 
end of the frame D. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
A combined rotary and drag harrow con 
structed substantially as herein shown and de-3o 
scribed, consisting of the carriage A B D, the 
pivoted bars HJ, the rotary harrow I KL, 
the drag-harrow c de fgh, the driving mech 
anism M OPT N S, and the supporting and 
adjusting mechanism if k l mo, substantially 35 
as herein shown and described. 
25 
P. R. WEATHERFORD. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. JENKINs, 
C. W. ALLIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229605.txt	(No Model.) 
G. L. GR. 0 UT. 
Re e d 0 ir gan 
No. 229,605. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE L. GROUT, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS. 
REED ORGAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 229,605, dated July 6, 1880. 
Application filed April 26, 1880. 
(No model.) 
IS 
2 ? 
as 
3O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE L. GROUT, of 
the city and county of Worcester, and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Reed - Organs; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, forming a part of this specification, and 
in which 
Figure 1 represents a vertical transverse 
section through the reed-board and a portion 
of the sounding -board of an ordinary reed 
organ, showing my improvements applied 
thereto, as will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed. Fig.2 represents a vertical longitudi 
nal section through a portion of the reed and 
sounding boards, taken through the center of 
the pitman - rods and my aforesaid improve 
ments; and Fig. 3 represents a similar section 
to that shown in Fig. 2, through the reed and 
sounding board chambers of the instrument. 
My invention consists in the construction 
and mode of operating the pitman-rods and 
their valves of an ordinary reed-organ; also, 
in the form and construction of the reed and 
sounding board chambers, and in the man 
ner of securing the reeds so as to require no 
packing. 
To enable those skilled in the art to which 
my invention belongs to make and use the 
same, I will proceed to describe it more in de 
tail. 
In the drawings, the part marked A repre 
sents the reed or tube board; A' A', the reed 
chambers; BB, the reeds; C, the sounding 
board; C, the sounding-board chambers; and 
D, a section of the top of an ordinary pair of 
suction-bellows, to which is attached the sound 
ing-board C in the usual manner, with a cham 
ber, E, between said parts. Top D is provided 
with suitable openings for the passage of air 
through the reeds to the bellows. 
Chambers C", which are of the proper di 
mensions to receive the reeds, are formed by 
cutting recesses in the upper side of the sound 
ing-board C and under side of the reed-board 
A, and securing said parts together, as repre 
sented in the drawings. 
The sounding-board C, instead of being cut 
entirely through vertically, as is the usual 
?? 
practice, is cut only part way through, as rep 
resented in Fig. 1, leaving thin partitions F 
between said chambers and chamber E; and 
to allow of air being drawn through the reeds 55 
by the bellows when the latter are operated 
round openings G are formed in partitions F 
at or near their centers, the positions of said 
openings being governed by the positions of 
the pitman-rods and their valves. 
By the aforesaid construction and arrange 
ment it will be seen that the air, as it is drawn 
into the instrument by the bellows, is con 
ducted so that its greatest force is brought to 
bear upon the inner vibratory ends of the 
tongues of the reeds, thus requiring but little 
power from said bellows to operate the same. 
By the present method of employing long 
valves, which cover the whole bottom of cham 
bers C, considerable power is unnecessarily 
lost when said valves are opened, as a large 
amount of air is drawn through and wasted 
which would otherwise be utilized if it were 
regulated so as to be conducted directly to the 
points best adapted to operate the reeds, as 
illustrated by my invention. 
If preferred, partitions F may be secured 
separately to sounding-board C instead of be 
ing formed upon the same, as before explained. 
Air-passages G are opened and closed, so as 
to operate and stop the action of their respect 
ive reeds, by means of ball-valves H, which 
in this instance are secured upon the lower 
ends of pitman-rods II. The latter are operat 
ed in the usual manner, being, in practice, Se 
cured at their upper ends to the keys of the 
instrument. 
Valves H, being rounded upon their upper 
ends, form very close and tight joints against 
the sides of openings G when drawn up into 
position, as represented in Fig. 1 of the draw 
ings, thus obviating the necessity of using any 
leather or other packing material, as is now 
customary upon the long Valves now employed. 
Said valves Hare firmly held against the sides 
of openings G by means of spiral springs J, 
which are, in turn, held in position upon the 
pitman-rods by bearing at their upper ends 
against collars K, secured to said rods, and at 
their lower ends against shoulders ( of the IOO 
reed-board. 
If preferred, any other suitable style of spring 
95 
75 
5 
I. ? 
35 
40 
45 
So 
g 
229,605 
5 
O 
- 
rods. 
may be used for drawing up the pitman-rods 
and their valves, instead of spiral springs J, 
without departing from the principle of my 
invention. 
The openings through the reed-board for the 
passage of the pitman-l'Ods are enlarged, as 
shown at b, to receive spiral springs J, thus 
economizing in space, and at the sanne time 
by such enlargement producing less fiction 
upon said pitman-rods, only a small portion, 
b', of the reed-board being fitted to the pitman 
A cross-bar or guide, L, secured a short dis 
tance above the reed-board, and through which 
the pitman-l'ods pass, serves to hold the latter 
in position, so that they will move up and 
down in a true vertical line. 
If preferred, guide L. may be made from a 
thin metallic strip instead of wood, as in this 
instance. 
In the drawings, valves H are represented 
as being made separately and Seculed upon 
the pitman-rods; but, if desired, they may be 
formed upon and with the same. They may 
be manufactured from any suitable material 
and of any suitable and desirable form-as, for 
instance, round or conical shaped-instead of 
the form represented, or in the shape of a cube, 
the openings G being made to conform to the 
30-shape of said openings. By makilag said valves 
H of rubber, which can be done at a trifling 
expense in excess of wood or other similar ma 
terials, perfectly ail-tight joints may be pro 
duced. 
Upon the lower ends of pitman-rods I may 
be formed or secured hubs M, provided with 
slots d, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3 of the draw 
ings, thereby allowing of the old form of spring 
being used, instead of spiral splings J, to hold 
the valves H in openings G, should the for 
mer be preferred. 
35 
25 
The reeds B B are retained in position be. 
tween ribsfupon their upper sides and ribs of 
and surfacesh upon their under sides, as fully 
represented in Fig. 1 of the drawings. By 
this arrangement of forming close tight-fitting 
joints between the outer under sides of the 
reeds alnd flat surfaces h of the reed-board air 
is effectually, prevented from entering the in 
strument at that point without the use of any 
packing whatever, thus dispensing with the 
usual packing operation required to make the 
same air-tight, the reeds being arranged so that 
their under sides are raised a short distance 
above the surfaces h by the present method 
employed. 
Those skilled in the art to which my inven 
tion belongs will readily understand and ap 
preciate the advantages resulting from its 
application to an ordinary reed-organ, as here 
in before shown and described. Not only is 
considerable expense saved, but actual tests 
have proven its practicability and value when 
used in colmbilination with the same. 
Having described my improvements in reed 
organs, what I claim therein as new and of 
my invention, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In a reed - organ, the combination, with 
openings G of partitions F, reed-board A, and 
guide Li, of valves H, hubs or projections M, 
pittman-rods I, collars K, and spiral springs J, 
constructed and arranged to operate substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination of reeds B and libs (1 
all dif, arranged, as shown and described, to 
form close joints between the under sides of 
said reeds B and surfaces h. 
. 
. 
GEORGE TIL, GROUT. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT A. BARKER, 
WALTER, B. NOURSE. 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
7 ? 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229705.txt	8. 
vy 
X- 
22 7 CS 
UFOSS Seference 
VA Val w W, 4 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EBEN N. HORSFORD, OF CAMBRIDGE, MAssACHUSETTS, 
PULVERULENT PRE PARATION OF PHosphoric ACID. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 229,705, dated July 6, 1880. 
Application filed May 14, 1880. (No specimens.) 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EBEN N. HoRSFORD, 
of Cambridge, in the State of Massachusetts, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Pulverulent Preparations of 
Phosphoric Acid, for use in the manufacture of 
baking-powders and for othor purposes, and 
in the art of producing the same, whereof the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. 
In Letters Patent No. 14,722, granted to me 
April 22, 1856, and in the reissue thereof, No. 
2,979, dated June 9, 1868, there was described 
a pulverulent preparation of phosphoric acid 
... having the characteristics and capable of the 
IS uses therein specified. The phosphoric acid 
of my former preparations was, however, in 
variably combined with lime in such propor 
tions as to form phosphates possessing more 
or less acid reaction, whether wholly united 
to the base, so as to constitute therewith a 
strictly chemical salt, or only partially so. 
By as much, therefore, as this combination 
with a base neutralized the acidity of the phos 
phoric acid, by so much were its strength and 
efficiency diminished for the purposes, of em 
ployment with alkaline carbonates in bread 
making or in other processes requiring the lib 
eration of carbonic - acid gas. But until my 
discovery and invention, herein to be disclosed, 
I had not known or supposed that phosphoric 
acid uncombined with a base or dissociated 
from acid phosphates formed there with could 
be reduced to a pulverulent condition by ad 
mixture with a neutral substance, like starch 
and kept inert, to be utilized after the manner 
of my former preparations. This discovery 
and the invention by: which I have made it 
practically available enable me to preserve the 
full strength of the phosphoric acid for the 
purposes of reaction upon alkaline carbonates 
without the waste and expense attending its 
partial neutralization by a base. 
My present invention may be efficiently 
practiced by the following mode of procedure: 
I take acid-phosphate liquor, substantially 
such as is prepared by the process described 
in my patent of April 22, 1856, and standing, 
for example, at 150 Baum, or the same may 
be otherwise produced by adding, with con 
stant agitation of the liquid, one thotisand 
six-hundred pounds of pulverized bone-black 
So 
35 
45 
- 
to a diluted solution of one thousand one hul 
dred pounds of oil of vitriol, (one of oil of vit 
riol to three of water), and when the decompo 
sition is complete, which requires some eighteen 5, 
hours of continuous agitation, the emulsion . 
will be thrown upon a cloth filter and leached. 
The first portions of the liquor being above 150 
Barm and the last portions below, it is easy to 
make a liquor of precisely the strength required; 6. 
and after concentrating the liquor in porce 
laiti-lined vessels to about one-third of its 
volume, I add thereto, based on analysis, an 
equivalent of sulphuric acid for the lime present 
in combination with phosphoric acid, thereby 65, 
proilucing gypsum and setting free phosphoric 
acid. The emulsion is allowed to cool and the 
gypsum is separated by filtration. The fil 
trate is then further concentrated in porcelain 
to about one-fourth of the original volume. To 7c. 
this, after cooling, I add, in successive por. 
tions, with stirring for thorough incorpora 
tion, a weight of starch inversely proportioned 
to the intended acid strength of the product. 
Thus, if. I desire that twenty parts of the pull 75 
verulent acid shall neutralize nine part. Af 
bicarbonate of soda, I add, for every one thou 
sand cubic ceutimeters of the original liquid 
of 15o Baum three hundred and sixty grams 
of starch. I incorporate these constituents in 
timately, spread the mass out to dry in a warm 
room, and, when dry, pulverize it. . 
In reducing the acid phosphate liquor of 
my former patent, hereinbefore specified, to a 
pulverulent condition, as therein set forth, the 
quantity of starch required was as about oue 
hundred grains to every one thousand cubic: -. 
centimeters of the liquor taken at 159 Baum. 
It will therefore be seen that in order to ac 
complish the results attained by my present on 
invention a very much greater relative propor 
tion of the neutral substance is needed. 
. 
The pulverulent phosphoric acid so pro- - 
duced I have found by quantitative test to 
95. 
have the same strength that the liquid alone 
ossessed after separation of the gypsin. It 
may be thoroughly mixed with dry bicarbon 
ate of soda to form a baking or effervescing 
powder, which will keep in bottles or (; lins 
without reaction, and will, when mixed with 
water, yield carbonic-acid gas for the purposes 
desired. 
IOC 
. 
y 
 
229,705 
1. 
The gypsum formed by the introduction of dition of free phosphoric acid, and combining is . 
the same with starch in about the proportions 20 
stated, drying, and pulverizing. 
2. A pulverulent preparation of phosphoric 
acid substantially free from combination or 
association with any base, and kept in the 
state of dry powder by admixture only with 25 
a neutral substance like starch, 
3. A baking or effervescing powder consist 
ing of the admixture of pulverulent phosphoric 
acid, substantially such as described, with a 
dry alkaline carbonate. . 
the sulphuric acid into the acid phosphate liq 
uor does not impair the acid strength of the 
product, if permitted, without being filtered 
5 off to reinain as a part of it; but its elimina 
tion is preferable, especially for pharmaceuti 
(a purposes. 
an aware that M. Blanchild, of Puteaux, 
france, has described a process of separating 
to line from acid phosphate liquor by adding an 
cquivalent of sulphuric acid, evaporating the 
liquor, and separating the gypsum produced 
by decantation of the siapernatant liquor; but 
this does not constitute my invention. 
Cambridge, May 13, 1880. 
- 
". 
E. N. HORSFORD. 
- 
. . . . 
n 
I5 
claim as my inventioi 
1. The process of producing pulverulent 
phosphoric acid by treating the acid liquid 
described herein so as to bring it to the con 
Witnesses: 
H. S. EUSTIs, 
GEO. A. BARTLETT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229805.txt	 
J. H. 00LEMAN & G. W. ALDRICH, 
Oil Can Faucet. 
No. 229,805. 
Patented July 13, 1880. 
 
 
-e, 
A ... y 
sh. 
Visove4e) 
38%. , 
W 
/ 
76 chovences 
2. te7. 
23222s. M26 
very 
Rs. Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. . 
JOHN H. COLEMAN, OF NEW YORK, AND GEORGE W. ALDRICH, OF 
BROOKLYN, N. Y. 
O - CAN FAUCET. 
SPECIFICATION forming-part of Letters. Patent No. 229,805, dated July 18, 1880. . 
A 
Application filed December 1, 1879. 
25 
20 
is 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, JoHN H. CoLEMAN, of 
the city and State of New York, and GEORGE 
W. ALDRICH, of Brooklyn, in the State of New 
5 York, have invented an Improvement in Oil 
Can Faucets, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
Oil-can faucets have been made of a metal 
cylinder having a spout at one side and a 
Io valve-seat at the bottom, upon which a valve 
is forced by a screw. An air-vent has also 
been provided with this character of valve; 
but the oil is liable to be projected through 
the air-vent when the oil-can is tipped. 
Our invention is made for giving easy access 
to the oil-can in filling the same, for prevent 
ing the oil passing out of the vent-hole, for 
tightening the valve, so as to prevent leakage 
in transportation, and for easily opening and 
closing the can when a portion of the contents 
is to be poured out. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion of the faucet complete. Fig. 2 is a plan 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a section of the screw 
ring. Fig. 4 is a section of the screw-cap. 
Fig. 5 is a section of the screw-union sepa 
rately, and Fig. 6 is an inverted plan of the 
face of the valve. 
The ring a is preferably of sheet metal, with 
a screw, b. The flange portion 2 of the ring 
is either flat or conical, according to the shape 
of the can to which it is to be attached, and 
this ring is soldered at itsedge to the sheet 
metal can at the opening in said can, so that 
135 the can may easily be filled through this screw 
ring 0. 
The cap c is preferably of sheet metal. It 
screws upon the ring a, and its edge 3, coming 
intimately into contact with the surface of the 
flange 2, forms a tight joint. In the top of this 
cap c there are two holes, 4 and 5. 
The valve is formed with an elastic face, d, 
preferably of cork, attached to the diske, and 
there are holes in the valve-faced and diske 
corresponding to the holes 4 and 5. 
The spoutfis attached to the diske at one of 
the holes therein, and the air-tube gis attached 
to said diske at the other hole thereof. 
The screw-union h is preferably of sheet 
So metal, the flange 7 of which union is upon the 
surface of the diske, and the union h screws 
upon the cap c and clamps the face dand diske 
upon said cap, 
" 
- 
 
When the holes in e, d, and c correspond, the 
oil can be poured from the spoutf, and the air 
will pass into the can through the tube.g. 
When the diske and valve-face dare turned 
so that the holes do not correspond the can will 
be closed. . 
The disk and valve can be easily turned by 
hand when the air-tube and spout are grasped. 
If, however, the union is screwed up with ex 
tra force, the elastic valve-face will be com 
pressed and the valve held firmly, and the 
can may be easily transported. 
It will be understood that the air-tube g 
should be soldered to the disk eafter the lat 
ter has been placed in its position within the 
screw-union h, and by its divergence the disk 
e will be held so that it cannot become sepa 
rated from the screw-union if the latter is re 
moved from the cap c. 
The upward inclination of the air-tube pre 
vents the oil spurting out when the can is first 
tipped. 
Cast metal may be used in place of sheet 
metal, and the faucet may be used for any 
kind of liquid. 
55 
7o 
75 
We claim as our invention 
1. A spout and air-tube upon a disk having 8o 
an elastic face, in combination with a screw 
union, and a cap upon which the union is 
screwed, and to which the elastic face is 
pressed by the screw-union, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. The combination, with the screw-union, 
of a disk-valve and a cap, there being holes 
through the cap and the disk that do not cor 
respond when the disk is turned to close the 
faucet, as set forth. 
3. The combination, in a faucet for cans, of a 
screw-ring, alb, attached to the can, a screw-cap, 
c, a screw-union, h, a disk and elastic face be 
tween the screw-union and the cap, and a spout 
upon the disk, substantially as set forth. 
Signed by us this 11th day of November, 
A. D. 1879. 
95 
JNO. H. COLEMAN. 
GEORGE W. ALDRECEI. 
Witnesses as to signature of G. W. Aldrich: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
WILLIAM G. MOTT. 
Witnesses as to signature of J. H. Coleman: 
BENJ. A. MoRAN, 
GEO. C. ORAM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US229905.txt	(No Model.) 
M. MOSLER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 229,905. 
Safe. 
- 
Patented July 13, 1880. 
SME 
Z2SNSNSNSZ644% 
 
waZ 
QN 
ZX & Gazi Haz 
M EE 
s 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
Des 
IEEE 
Z 
s? 
a 
 
 
) 
SIES 
N.FETERS, Photo-ITtogRAPHER, WASH:NaOM, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MOSES MOSLER, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
SAFE. 
-sur 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 229,905, dated July 13, 1880. 
Application filed April 3, 1880. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern : 
curved depressions, B and C, united by a web, 
Be it known that I, MOSES MOSLER, of the 
D. The outer curved depression, B, extends 
city of Cincinnati, county of Hamilton, State 
back to the center of the casing when the door 
of Ohio, have invented a new and useful Im 
is closed, and makes a close joint around the 
provement in Safes and Vaults, of which the 
The inner curves, C, which are some 
door. 
following is a specification. 
what less than a quarter-circle, are set back 
My invention relates to fire and burglar 
from the edge of the case to permit the curved 
proof safes, vaults, and other secure recep 
locking-pieces E to pass between the door and 
door-case and rest upon the offset or web D. 
tacles. 
The main object of my invention is to secure 
Thus when the door is closed and the lock 
ing-pieces in place, as shown in Figs, 1, 2, and 
a perfect joint between the door and door 
case, to prevent wedging or forcing the door. 
3, forming a close joint between the door and 
My invention also provides a means to ef. 
casing, and the inner edge of the door over 
fectually secure the door upon all sides within 
lapping upon all sides, the casing and lock 
ing-pieces secure the door from being wedged 
its casing. 
A further object is to provide for double 
Or pried open from the outside. 
locking the door as an additional security. 
The locking-pieces E are made concentric 
These objects, and other minor ones, which 
with the case, upon which they are fitted to 
are auxiliary thereto, that will be fully de 
slide, and are guided and held in position by 
scribed hereinafter, and particularly pointed 
Screws a, passing through slotse in the locking 
pieces and into the casing of the door, as seen 
out in the claims, are attained by the devices 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 3; or they may be guided and 
held to place by T-shaped ribs or slides se 
which 
cured upon the segmental or curved case and 
Figure 1 is an elevation of the inside of a 
entering corresponding grooves formed in the 
door and door-case of a fire-proof safe em 
locking-pieces. 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a horizontal 
The segmental or curved locking-pieces E. 
section taken above the arbors. Fig. 3 is a 
transverse vertical section through the door 
are Operated around the inner half of the 
curved casing by angular levers F, which have 
and door-case, and Fig. 4 is a similar section 
view taken through linea at of Figs. 1 and 2, 
their fulcrums in posts G, projections f extend 
the fire-proof case being removed. In these 
ing from the levers to the top of the posts, to 
which they are held by fulcrum-pins or screws 
figures the door is shown closed and locked. 
passing through the pieces finto the posts. 
Fig. 5 is a partial sectional view, similar to 
Fig. 3, showing the locking-pieces withdrawn 
The levers are united to the top and bottom 
preparatory to opening the door, and showing, 
curved pieces E by links H, and are operated 
also, another form of guide for the locking 
from the outside of the safe by arbor Ethrough 
pieces. 
a crank-pin secured in a wheel, J, which wheel 
Similar letters of reference throughout the 
is secured upon the inner end of the arbor. 
various views indicate identical parts. 
The vertical curved piece E, which secures 
the lock-edge of the door, is operated by a simi 
The Walls of the safe, except the frame or 
case of the door, are constructed in the usual 
lar link, H., one end of which is attached to 
manner. The edge of the door-case is made the locking-piece and the opposite end on a 
semicircular in cross-section. The edge pieces crank-pin in wheel J. It will thus be seen 
A are preferably made of the sheet metal that the locking-pieces E are simultaneously 
usually employed in safe-work, bent to the inserted between the door-edge and its case or 
proper shape, but may, if desired, be made of withdrawn therefrom by operating the arbor 
cast metal. The hinge-edge of the door A'is from the outside. 
Upon the arbor Iis secured a notched disk, 
the counterpart of the case and formed in the 
same way. The top, bottom, and lock edges K, and above it, upon the inside of the safe, 
7 cy 
75 
9o 
95 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
so of the door are composed of two segmental or a lock of any approved construction. The bolt Ioo 
4 
:29,305 
is ar 
- 
45 
55 
I have described the use of curved locking 
of the lock is in a position to be shot into the 
notch in disk K and securely hold the lock- pieces, and that is the preferred form; but it 
is obvious that flat locking-pieces may be used 
ing-pieces E against retraction. 
instead, even in connection with the special 
The vertical piece E is provided with a slot, 
construction of the door and its frame, herein 
e', to receive the bolt l of the combination 
before described, although it would be desira 
lock L. Preferably all the pieces E are slotted 
ble to modify the construction thereof some 
to receive the bolts of the combination-lock, 
what, so as to provide for a snug fit of the flat 
and are thus doubly secured against retrac 
locking-pieces. 
tion. For the purpose of this construction the 
combination-lock is provided with bolts, which 
are shot out in three durections to enter the 
slots in pieces E. 
It is evident that the ordinary train-bolts 
now used upon safes may be adapted to enter 
the slots in the Wedging-pieces or pass back 
of then to securely hold them in place between 
the edge of the door and the door-case; and 
in large safes this is the plan contemplated to 
be used. 
The form of safe represented in the draw 
ings is the usual rectangular door and frame 
having the mitered corner-pieces; but my im 
provement is also adapted to doors of circu 
lar or curved form; and instead of the semi 
circular edge-pieces A the case of the door 
may be made of tube metal, or solid instead 
of hollow, as shown. It is only necessary to 
the object of my invention that the outer con 
tour of the case be adapted to receive the con 
vex door - edge to overlap the case upon the 
inside. 
I have shown the door-edge secured by the 
convex case and locking - pieces E upon all 
sides; but good results may be attained by 
omitting the upper and lower pieces E and 
their operating levers and links, and onl 
locking the lock-edge, which, with the form of 
hinge-edge shown, would render it difficult to 
pry open the door. It is also practicable to 
insert and withdraw the piece or pieces E by 
means of the time-locks now in common use, or 
to dog the pieces E against retraction until 
a predetermined time, in the manner that the 
bolt-work of safes is now secured. 
I claim- 
1. The door-case having convex edges A, in 
combination with a door having concave edges, 
as A B C, and locking-piece E, said locking 
piece being adapted to slide between the in 
ner edge of the door and case and be with 
drawn therefrem, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. The combination, substantially as speci 
fied, of the frame having convex edges A, the 
door having concave edges A B C, the wedg 
ing-piece E, and the door-lock, said Wedging 
piece being slotted to receive the bolt of the 
door-lock to secure the piece between the door 
and casing. 
3. In a safe having a concavely-edged door 
and a convexly-edged door-fraine, the combi 
nation of the curved locking-pieces E with op 
erating-levers F and links H, said levers be 
ing connected to arbor I by a crank-pin, for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. In a safe having a concavely-edged door 
and a convexly-edged door-frame, the combi 
nation of the curved locking-pieces E, their 
operating-levers and links, arbor I, notched 
disk K, and a lock the bolt of which is adapted 
to enter the notch in disk K and secure the 8o 
pieces E between the door and its frame. 
MOSES MOSLER. 
Witnesses: 
M. W. OLIVER, 
GEO. J. MURRAY. 
75 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230005.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F. HALL. 
Wise, 
No. 230,005. 
Patented July 13, 1880. 
a 
Zz 4 
W 
A 
 
 
2N) 3NY Y N lz 
3 3e3 ey 
6 32 S2 Z. Y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
% 
2. 
3 
% 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. HALL, OF HAVANA, NEW YORK. 
VSE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,005, dated July 13, 1880. 
Application filed April 3, 1880. 
(No model.) 
55 
65 
To all chon it may concern: 
liable to become enlarged under the action of 
Be it known that I, JAMES F. BALL, of Ha- the hammer, and thus permit the vise-plate to 
Vana, in the county of Schuyler and State of vibrate upon its seat. 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
These several defects or objections, and oth 
ful Improvements in Bench-Vises, of which 
el's not necessary to be enumerated, are obvi 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
ated in my improved vise, which is constructed 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
Substantially as shown in the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters of reference marked 
drawings, wherein 
thereon. 
Figure 1 is an axial section and elevation, 
My invention has relation to that class of 
and Fig. 2 is a plan or top view with the vise 
vises in which the movable jaw or jaws are 
jaWS removed from the Vise-plates. 
mounted upon a bottom plate which is pivoted 
In both these figures like letters of reference, 
to or SWiveled on a bench-plate in such a man 
wherever they occur, indicate corresponding 
her that the vise may be removed at pleasure 
partS. 
or to suit the convenience of the operator; and 
A is one of the vise-jaws. (Shown in dotted 
the invention has for its object the provision 
lines.) B is the body of the vise, and C the 
of simple and efficient means for locking and 
arm connected with the movable jaw, all of 
holding the vise-plate firmly in any position, 
which may be of any desirable pattern. These 
admitting of ready, easy, and accurate adjust 
usual parts of the vise are mounted upon the 
ment. 
vise-plate or top plate, D, which is swiveled 
To this end the invention consists in certain 
upon the bottom plate, E, in such manner as to 
novel and useful arrangements or combina 
turn thereon, ordinarily by use of the hub F, 
tions of parts, all of which will be hereinafter 
center screw, H, and washer G. The bottom 
first fully described, and then pointed out in 
plate, E, is adapted to be clamped to the 
the claims. 
bench or elsewhere, as by the use of ears KK 
Heretofore in this class of vises it has been 
and bolts L. L. 
customary to lock the wise-plate and the 
In the bottom plate, E, I cut, turn, or other 
bench-plate together by means of bolts pass 
wise form a circumferential groove, MI, of such 
ing through holes in both, or by means of 
a depth as to afford a firm bearing at any point 
Spring-actuated pins passing through the vise 
for the clutch or dog J. The clutch or dog J 
plate and entering perforations in the bottom 
is composed of a strong shank Screw-threaded 
plate provided for them at regular or irregular 
at its upper end and provided at its lower end 
intervals, and necessarily at some distance 
with a projection intended to enter the before 
from each other. 
mentioned circumferential groove M, and this 
In either of these forms two prominent de 
projection should be long enough and strong 
fects are observable: first, the bolts or pins 
enough to have a good firm bearing in the 
are necessarily located at some distance within 
groove. 
the perimeter of the plate, and thus are not 
Upon the vise-plate is a perforated ear, R, 
capable of that resistance to the turning of 
through which the screw-shank or dog J is 
the Vise-plate which is peculiarly desirable, 
made to pass, and the nut I bears upon this 
especially in the vises designed for very 
ear and controls the movements of the dog J 
heavy work; and, second, the adjustment of 
when the parts are all in place. 
the vise can only be made through certain 
I find it advantageous to incline the upper 
predetermined distances, depending upon the 
surface of groove Mupwardly and toward the 
location of the bolt-holes or other perforations, 
center of the plate, as indicated, and to corre 
thus rendering them practically unavailable at 
spondingly incline the bearing-surface of the 
certain points or for some particular uses. 
projection upon dog J. This construction in 
The bolt-holes and the perforations for the re 
sures the dog from slipping out of place when 
ception of the pins are likewise liable to become 
the nut I is turned down very hard, and tends 
clogged by filings and chippings, requiring 
to make the dog hug in toward the center of 
time and attention to clear or clean, and are the plate, affording a firmer gripe upon the up 
85 
OO 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
280,005 
- 
per surface of groove M. The under surface 
of the groove should also be inclined slightly 
to facilitate the proper location of the clutch 
or dog, and so that any filings or chippings or 
other refuse which may collect in the groove 
may be readily cleared away as the clutch is 
revolved about with the vise-plate, thus mak 
ing the same Self-cleaning. 
In order to bring the nut I as far over the 
edge of plate E as possible, and thus insure a 
better clamping of the two plates together, the 
shank of clutch J is cut away, as shown, on 
the side next the edge of the plate. This con 
struction gives the clamping-nut a more ex 
tended bearing - surface upon plate D than 
would be afforded if the shank were left cylin 
drical throughout its length. 
Under ordinary circumstances one clutch or 
dog, J, will be found amply sufficient to hold 
the vise in proper place; but for extra heavy 
work it may be found desirable to add a second 
clamping arrangement, which should be made 
in all respects like the one already described. 
Athird, or even more, might be added without 
departing from the principles of the invention, 
the number to be used being no essential part 
of the improvements. 
Instead of locating the groove M and clutch 
or dog J on the extreme edges of the plates, 
the groove might be cut in one of the plates 
at a greater or less distance from the edge 
thereof, said groove being still made continu 
ous, so that, if necessary, the vise may be set 
at any point and the clutch or clutches corre 
spondingly arranged. 
The nut I is represented as being arranged 
to be turned by an ordinary wrench. Of 
course a thumb-piece might be applied, or any 
means of tightening or loosening the nut be 
adopted. 
As thus constructed and arranged, the im 
proved clamping contrivance is found to ad 
mirably answer the several purposes and ob 
jects of the invention as primarily stated. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a vise of the character herein specified, 
a plate provided with a circumferential groove 
adapted to receive the projection upon the re 
movable clutch J and to afford a bearing for 
the same at any point of said groove, as de 
scribed, so that the vise may be set and clamped 
at any point, substantially as set forth. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
2. In a vise of the character herein set 
forth, the combination of the circumferentially 
grooved plate E, a removable clutch passing 
through an ear, R., upon Vise-plate D and en 
gaging with the groove, and a nut, I, these 
Several parts being arranged to operate sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a vise of the character herein set forth, 
the combination of a movable plate carrying 
the visejaws, a stationary plate having a cir 
cumferential groove the upper surface of which 
is inclined upwardly and toward the center of 
the plate, and a clutch having the upper sur 
face of its locking projection similarly inclined 
and adapted to fit said groove, the clutch be 
ing provided with means for operating the 
same, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
4. In a vise of the character herein set forth, 
the combination of a movable plate carrying 
the Vise-jaws, a stationary plate having a cir 
cumferential groove, the upper and under sur 
faces of which are inclined upwardly and to 
Ward the center of the plate, and a clutch car 
rying a locking-nut the locking projection of 
which is adapted to travel in said groove and 
to clear the same, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
5. In a vise of the character herein set forth, 
the clutch J, having its shank cut away, as ex 
plained, and a llut, I, having a bearing upon 
the Vise-plate over the bottom plate, said clutch 
being adapted to engage in the circumferential 
groove upon the bottom plate, the clutch and 
the two plates being arranged and combined 
to operate substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination of vise-plate D, having 
one or more ears, R., bottom plate, E, having 
circumferential groove M, with inclined sur. 
faces, clutch J, cut away, as explained, and nut 
I, the whole combined and arranged to clamp 
the two plates together at the region of the 
groove, substantially in the manner shown, and 
for the purposes set forth. 
have hereunto set my hand in the presence of 
two Witnesses. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing 
9o 
95 
IOC) 
JAMES F. HALL. 
Witnesses: 
T. I. TRACY, 
ELBERT P. COOK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230105.txt	(No Model.) 
S. S. BURR, 
Folding or Cabinet Bedstead. 
No. 230,105. 
Patented July 20, 1880. 
2-0 Z2 
 
NVENTOR 
So/orzS Aurz, 
(y 4/3ala, 
hattorneys. 
PEERs, PHOTo-THoGRAPHER, WASligo, c. 8. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SANFORD S. BURR, OF C EIICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
FOLDING OR CABINET BE DSTEAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 230,105, dated July 20, 1880. 
Application filed May 19, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SANFORD S. BURR, of 
Chicago, Cook county, in the State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Folding or Cabinet Bedsteads, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention has reference to that kind of 
folding bedsteads in which there is combined 
with an upright case or frame a jointed bed 
frame which can be first folded over onto it. 
self and then turned up bodily into the upright 
case or frame. A folding bedstead possessing 
these general characteristics is shown in my 
Letters Patent No. 222,379 of December 9, 
1879. In a bedstead of this kind a top board 
is used to cover the upper ends of the sections 
when the bedstead is folded up. 
Eitherto I have made this top separate from 
the bedstead, so that it may be lifted off when 
ever it is desired to unfold the bedstead. This 
is objectionable for several reasons. It must 
be lifted off or put on each time the bed is un 
folded or folded, and, being separate from the 
bedstead, it is liable to become mislaid or dam. 
aged and is in the way. To remedy this I now 
make the top a part of the frame or case and 
hinge it to that part of the frame which forms 
the head-board when the bed is unfolded, and 
I so arrange it that it will, when the bed is 
unfolded, drop down to form a part of the 
head-board, an opening in that portion of the 
frame being formed which at this time is filled 
by the cover. The cover is lifted when the 
bed is about to be folded up, and constitutes 
then a cover for the upper ends of the bed 
sections, and the place left vacant by it in the 
head-board part of the frame or case consti 
tutes a ventilating-opening. 
The nature of my improvement will be read 
ily understood by reference to the accompany. 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure l is a perspective view of the bed 
stead folded up. Fig. 2 is a like view of the 
same unfolded. Fig. 3 is a transverse vertical 
section through the head-board part of the 
structure, showing the hinged cover or top in 
two positions. 
The case or frame is shown at A and the 
two sections of the bed-frame at B C, the in 
ner section pivoted to the case at a. and the 
two sectionshinged together at b. These parts 
are described in my aforesaid Letters Patent, 
and require no further description here, 
- 
The back. A? of the frame or case A consti 
tutes the head-board, and to it is attached, by 
hinges c, at the proper elevation to constitute 
a cover for the ends of the bed-sections when 
the bedstead is folded up, the top board or 
cover D. In the head-board is formed at this 
point an opening, d, of proper size to receive 
the cover D when the latteris allowed to drop. 
The cover is of size to permit it to pass be 
tween the side posts of the case A, and when 
it drops it enters and fills snugly the open 
ing d, as indicated in Fig. 2 and by dotted 
lines in Fig. 3. When lifted it constitutes a 
cover for the upper ends of the bed-sections, 
the opening d being in this case unfilled and 
serving as a ventilating-passage. 
If it is desired to unfold the bed, the parts 
being in the position indicated in Fig. 1, the 
cover or top board, D, is first raised or turned 
up on its hinges far enough to permit the bed 
to be turned down on its pivots a, and it (the 
cover) is then allowed to drop, passing between 
the posts of the case and entering and filling 
the opening d in the head-board. 
By this arrangement I dispose of the cover 
in the most convenient way, making it a part 
of the structure. I obtain a head-board which, 
while presenting a practically unbroken sur 
face when the bed is lowered, is open for pur 
poses of ventilation when the bed is folded 
up, and I economize material and save expense 
of construction. 
Having described my improvement, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
The combination, with the folding bedstead 
and the case provided in its head-board por 
tion with an opening, as described, of a top 
boardhinged to said head-board portion at the 
upper part of the said opening therein, and 
arranged and operating, substantially as set 
forth, to cover the upper ends of the bed-sec 
tions when the bed is folded and to drop down 
and cover or fill the head-board opening when 
the bed is lowered. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 28th day of April, 1880. 
SANFORD S. BURR, 
Witnesses: 
F. E. CARSLEY, 
J. SPEYER. 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
h 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230205.txt	(Model.) 
G. H. SMITH &. J. H. BE ALE. 
Carpet Lining. 
No. 230,205. 
 
Patented July 20, 1880. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. SMITH AND JOSEPH. H. BEALE, OF BOSTON, MAssACHUSETTS, . 
CAR PET. N. N.G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 230,205, dated July 20, 1880. 
Application fied March 10, 1880. Model.) 
- 
O 
IS 
To all whom it may concerni 
Be it known that we, GEORGE II. SMITH 
and Jose.PH. H. BEALE, of Boston, in the 
county of Suffolk and State of Massachusetts, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Carpet-Linings, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
clheap, simple, convenient, and durable carpet 
lining, which shall be less liable to harbor bugs 
and notlus and retain moisture from the acci. 
dental spilling of water thereon, and to better 
hold or retain dust formed therein, and which 
shall remain more elastic or be less liable to 
become packed" and hard, that similar con 
structed carpet-linings heretofore made or as 
now in common use wherein cotton is em. 
ployed as a filling; and it consists in a carpet 
lining composed of wood excelsior, formed into 
sleets and placed between two sheets of pa 
per, one of which is folded over the edges of 
the other and sewed or stitclied in several rows 
at short intervals throughout the width of the 
same, as hereinafter more fully described and 
set forth, 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
roll of carpet-lining constructed according to 
our invention. Fig. 2 represents a cross-sec 
stion through the same. 
A represents wood excelsior, cut or formed 
from any suitable wood, as heretofore, the finer 
the better. When thus formed it is to be rolled, 
carded, or passed through suitable machinery, 
to form it into sheets of the desired widtl and 
continuous in length; then it is passed upon 
or between sheets of paper, the under one, B, 
of which is somewhat wider than the upper 
one, E, and the edges C of which are turned 
over and upon the upper sheet, E, and-stitched 
through the whole or through the three thick 
nesses of paper C E B and the intervening 
sheet or layer of wood excelsior A, which per 
manently confines the edges, the body portion 
being stitched in like manner with several 
rows of stitching, so as to securely hold the 
wood excelsior in position between the paper 
45 
So 
covering - sheets. We prefer eight rows of 
stitching to a yard in width; but more or less 
may be employed, if lesired. 
Thus constructed, it may be formed in con 
tinuous lengths and rolled up or formed into 
bales or otherwise as a new article of manu 
facture. The wood excelsior, when thus se 
cured within the sheets of paper, is better 
adapted for carpet-lining than any other ma- 55 
terial heretofore employed, on account of its 
clheapness, cleanliness, and durability. 
We are aware that heretofore carpet-linings 
have been constructed by inclosing fibrous 
material between a wide and narrow strip of 6o 
paper and be cling the projecting edges of the 
wide strip over upon and cementing then to 
the surface of the narrow strip; and we are 
also aware that heretofore carpet-linings have 
been constructed from a bat and a single sheet 65 
of paper folded over so as to inclose the bat, 
with its edges overlapping each other and se 
cured. Therefore we lisclaim such inventions, 
as they do not confine the bator fibrous mate 
rial permanently in position, as contemplated 7o 
by our invention, one of the essential features 
of which consists in the several rows of stitch 
ing passing through the lining from side to 
side. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim is 
As an improved manufacture, a carpet-lin 
ing composed of sheets of wood excelsior se 
cured between two sheets of paper of different 
widths, the wider oue having its edges turned 8c 
over upon the narrower one and stitched 
through the several thicknesses, as described, 
and having several parallel rows of stitching 
at short intervals throughout the width of the 
lining, so as to firmly secure the parts togeth 
er, substantially as shown and described, as 
and for the purposes set forth. . 
GEORGE H. SMITH. 
JOSEPH E. BEALE. 
- 
75 
Witnesses: 
SYLVENUs WALKER, 
WM. H. PEARson. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230305.txt	(No Model.) 
C, F, MASON, 
Compensating Pendulum, 
No. 230,305. 
 
  
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR: 
BY 
ATTORNEYS, 
'Rs, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES T. MASON, OF SUMTER, SOUTH CAROLINA. 
C O M PEN SAT NG PEN DULU M. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 230,805, dated July 20, 1880. 
Application filed May 26, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEST. MASON, of 
Sumter, Sumter county, South Carolina, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Compensating-Pendulums, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My improvements relate to pendulums hav 
ing means within tilhemselves, for adljustment 
to compensate for changes of temperature. 
My invention consists in a compound bar of 
metal bent in curved form, hung on the pendu 
lum-rod, and connected by links with the slid 
ing bob in such manner that the expansion 
and contraction of the compound bar shifts 
the bob in the direction of the length of the 
pendulum. The bolo is sustained by the com 
pound bar, and the latter hung on the pellclu 
lum-rods by a screw-rod, which permits adjust 
ment for regulating tlhe clock. 
My invention consists, further, in gearing for 
multiplying the movement of the bob, con 
nected with a handl for indlicating the varia 
tions of temperature. 
In the following detailed description of my 
invention reference is made to tle accompa 
nying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the pendu 
lum, and Fig. 2 is a rear elevation, partially in 
Section. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
at at are the rods of the pendulum, connected 
at their lower ends by a cross-bar, b. c is a 
compound bar of metal, bent in ring form and 
suspended from the cross-bar l) by a screw 
rod, d, that extends through the bar b, and is 
fitted with a nut, e, that permits adjustment 
of the bar c to and from bar b. f is the bob 
or weight, hung on a rod, g, so that it may 
slide freely thereon. The rod g, as shown, is 
connected rigidly to the lower end of rod d, so 
that the bob is within the ring-bar c, and the 
bob is sustained by links h l, that are pivoted 
to its lower side and pass to the opposite ends 
of the bar d, where the links are also pivoted. 
The bob or weight is thus carried by the com 
pound bar d, and partakes of the adjustment 
by the nute, whiclh adjustment is for regula 
tion of the clock. 
The compound bar c is composed of a strip 
? ? 
2 ? 
35 
45 
So 
 
of brass and one of steel liveted or welded to. 
gether, with the brass at the outer side. This 
is bent to nearly a complete circle, the two 
ends being at the under side and connected to 
the weight, as described. 
In operation, increase of temperature will 
cause expansion of the metal, and the expan 
sion of the brass in the compound barbeing 
greatest will throw the ends of the said bar 
in Ward, and by the links h raise the bob f, 
thus shifting a portion of the whole weight of 
the pendlulu in ill) Ward to compensate for its 
extension by the inclease of temperature. 
The reverse action takes place when the pendu 
lum is shortened by fail of temperature, as such 
lower temperature contracts the brass of the 
compound bar and spreads the open ends. 
Upon the back of the weight f is fixed a 
stud carrying a gear-wheel, i, upon the back 
of which is attached a pinion that engages 
Witli a rack, k, fixed on the side of the slide 
bar (). At the center of weight f is fitted an 
arbor, that has suitable bearings on the weight 
and carries at one end, in front of the weight, 
a hand Ol' pointer, l, While at the back end this 
arbor carries a pillion, In, that engages with 
wheel i. 
By this mechanism tle movement of 
Weight f on bar g is multiplied and imparted 
to the pointel' l, which will by its movement 
thus indicate changes of temperature. 
The face of the weights will be marked with 
a graduated Scale, which may be so propol. 
tioned to indicate the changes by proper de 
grees for use as a thermometer. 
The bar g is slotted where the arbor of hand 
i passes through to allow movement of the ar 
bor Witlh the Weight. Upo?n tlue Weiglht f is 
fitted a light Spring, n, from which a cord 
passes to the center arbor, takes up any loose 
ness, and makes the hand more steady. 
If desired, the expansion-bar and bob may 
be reversed in position-that is, the open ends 
of the bar placed upward. In that case the 
brass of the bar will be inside, so that its ex 
pansion shall move the bob upward. 
Having thus (lescribed my invention, 1 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
lPatent 
1. The compensating-pendulum consisting 
of the compound bar c, beint in curved form 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
280 ,805 
and attached atits middleportion to the pendu 
lum-rods, the bob or weight fitted to slide on 
a rod suspended from bar c, and linksh, con 
necting the ends of the bar e with the bob, 
combined for operation substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. In compensating-pendulums, the com 
bined expansion-bar c, carrying the sliding 
bob and attached by screw d and nute to the 
cross-bar of the pendulum-rods, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
s 
1. ? 
3. In compensating-pendulums, in combina 
tion with the sliding bob fitted for movement 
by an expansion-bar, the hand l, pinion m, 
wheel i, rack lic, and their supporting-arbors, I5 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
CHARLES T. MASON. 
Witnesses: 
J. F. W. DELORME, 
CHARLES W. IDAVIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230406.txt	J. E. CRISP. 
Tools for Boot Treeing Ma Chines, 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 230,406. 
Patented July 27, 1880. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N- - - 
S  
 
 
 
 
 
2 
AAyala 
1zz7zasses. 
/7zz/e72Z27 
Tools for 
No. 230,406. 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. E. CRISP. 
B00t Treeing Ma Chines, 
Patented July 27, 1880. 
Z 
 
 
No. 230,406. 
Patented July 27, 1880, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J. E. CRISP. 
Tools for B00t Treeing Machines, 
J22zzzesses. & 
/7ZZe7ZM7 
F. $4% 
N. PereRs, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, was NGTON, D.C. 
 
J. E. CRISP. 
Tools for Boot Treeing Machines, 
4 Seets-Sheet 4, 
No. 230,4O6. 
Patented July 27, 188O. 
Z' 
a 2 S71SN 
O) 
2Sn 
O) 
(e) S.  
2E ) a 
52 Co-R 
E7"NI 
(S) 
NR 2 2 % 
E% 
2 
Ea 
N 
ze 
 
Y?472 esses. 
(A 2-4- 
- 
772.2/e7e ZoZ. 
/26.4% 
 
N.PETERs Photo-rrhogaAPHER, wash.INGTON, D.c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH E. CRISP, OF BOSTON, MASS., ASSIGNOR TO THE COPELAND BOOT 
TREEING MACHINE COMPANY, OF HARTFORD, CONN. 
TOOL FOR BOOT-TREENG MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 230,406, dated July 27, 1880. 
Application filed February 14, 1880. 
O 
IS 
25 
35. 
To all (hom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, Jose,PH. E. CRISP, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and Common 
Wealth of Massachusetts, have invented an 
Improvement in Tools for Boot-Treeing Ma 
chines, &c., of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention embraces an improvement 
upon the smoothing and finishing tool described 
in my reissued Letters Patent No. 9,055, dated 
January 20, 1880. 
It embraces additional 
means for heating the tree or tool and the 
boot upon the tree exteriorly during the tree 
ing Operatio, and automatic means for ap 
plying the filling or dressing composition dur 
ing the treeing operation and for distributing 
it evenly upon the surface of the boot. 
Reference is made to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in explaining the nature of this invention, it 
Which 
Figure 1 represents an elevation of the im 
proved tool and heating attachment. Fig. 2 
is a vertical section on the linea at of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section. Fig. 4 is a vertical 
Section on the line y y of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is a 
View representing, in perspective, a portion 
of the boot-treeing machine, two tools, and 
their holding devices. Fig. 6 is a perspective 
of the tool, representing its coliformability to 
the Varying curvatures of the ball and in step 
surface of the boot. Fig. 7 is an end eleva 
tion of the tool, showing the autoluatic compo 
sition feeling and spreading apparatus. Fig. 
8 is a vertical section thereof, and Fig. 9 a. 
plan. 
In the patented machine there is described 
a conformable smoothing and finishing tool 
or device, consisting of two rolls arranged to 
revolve freely upon a short shaft, which is 
pivoted at its longitudinal center to a holding 
or supporting rod or arm. 
In this invention the arm or holding-rod 
supports and presents to the boot-tree alarger 
number of rolls, and the rolls are so hung and 
balanced in relation to each other and to the 
arm that each roll at all times bears upon the 
boot on the boot-tree with equal force. 
A represents the holding or supporting rod 
or arm. It is provided with means whereby 
the even pressure of the tool on the boot upon 
the boot-tree is maintained, as described in 
my said patent, and it may project from its 
cylinder or supporting block (, in a direction 
at right angle to the axis of the tree, or it may 
be somewhat inclined in relation to said axis, 
as shown at af, Fig. 5. It has pivoted at its 
end a short shaft, b, the shaft projecting in 
either direction from the pivot an equal dis 
tance. This shaft has arranged upon either 
site of the pivot a collar, b', which is free to 
swivel to a limited extent-say a third of a 
revolution-on-the shaft, and which is provided 
with two arms, b. These arms project radially 
from points on each collar about one-third of 
a circumference apart and are of equal length, 
and they each support a block, l, which is 
allowed to swivel freely on the arm and which 
is provided with the short shafts b, that fur 
nish the bearings for the rolls B. 
There are, 
therefore, four sets of bearings for providing 
the rolls with the adjustments necessary for 
obtaining the conformability all evenness of 
Working pressure desired: tirst, the bearings 
of the rolls on their supporting-shafts, one on 
either side of the arm bi second, the bearings 
of the blocks l on said arm b; third, the 
bearings of the collars b' upon the shaft b, 
and, fourth, the beiring of the shaft l on the 
end of the arm A. 
It will be observed that each of these bear 
ings, excepting the first named, is arranged in 
such a Way that it Occurs midway between each 
pair of rolls, between each pair of blocks sup 
porting the roll-shafts, or between the collars 
on the shaft b : that by this arrangement one 
roll balances another, one pair another pair, 
and a set of two pairs a second set of the same 
number; that each set of two rolls has con 
formability distinct from that of the other sets; 
that each set of four rolls has a conformable 
movement that is separate from that of the 
other four rolls of the tool, and that each roll 
bears upon the work with a pressure equal to 
that of each of the other rolls in the series. 
The rolls B may have a spherical or partly 
Spherical surface, or they may have a flat star 
face, as desired. 
In lieu of rolls, any smoothing, rubbing, or 
finishing devices may be enployed in the tool, 
providing they have the relation to each other 
herein (lescribed. 
For the purpose of heating the boot upon 
the boot-tree and the boot-tree or the tool, I 
55 
65 
75 
95 
Od 
45 
So 
 
9. 
230,406 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
attach the gas-pipe C to the short shaft b be 
tween the rolls, and provide it with perfora 
tions or burners c', so arranged as to throw 
gas-jets either upon the tools or directly upon 
the tree, (or the boot upon the tree, or both,) 
as may be desired. 
In lieu of gas-jets hot air forced through a 
perforated pipe may be used for applying heat 
to the boot-tree or tool. 
For automatically applying the filling or 
finishing composition I arrange abrush, D, or 
a suitable equivalent, such as a sponge or a 
spraying device, between the rolls, and fasten 
it to a perforated pipe, d, for feeding it with 
the composition, the perforations opening at 
intervals upon the back of the brush, and al 
lowing the composition to feed through it to 
the boot. The brush may be used merely for 
the purpose of evenly distributing composition 
applied by hand, and it may also be used, in 
addition to the rolls, as a smoothing and finish 
ing device. 
The lower roll of each pair of rolls used upon 
the leg portion of the boot may be weighted 
in order that each pair may automatically as 
sume a vertical position. The rolls for oper 
ating upon the foot portion of the boot I prefer 
to have shaped substantially as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2, and I prefer, also, that they be secured 
to the shafts by washers having a rounded sur 
face in continuation of the rounded surface of 
the roll, and that the nut for fastening the 
washer and roll to the shaft be not projected 
above the surface of the washer, as, with this 
construction, ifa pair of rolls is displaced so that 
the end of the roll bears upon the work, upon 
the movements of the tool it will automatically 
assume its proper position in relation to the 
surface of the Work-that is, a position in 
which the roll-supporting shaft is parallel with 
the surface of the Work. 
I also may provide the post E, which sup 
ports the cylinder or block holding the arm 
A, with a movement in relation to the boot 
tree whereby the inclination of the arm. A 
may be varied, and this is effected by hinging 
the arm E, supporting the post, to the blocke' 
by means of a bolt and nuts e'e', which are 
employed in locking it in a given position. 
Of course I do not confine myself to a tool 
having four pairs of rolls, as the principle of 
this invention may be employed with a tool 
having but two pairs, or with a tool having a 
larger number of pairs than four, the princi 
ple being to balance one roll of a pair by the 
other and each pair by another. 
The advantages of the improved tool over 
that described in my said Letters Patent are 
these: The work can be done quicker and bet 
ter, as two lines of rolls are used in lieu of 
one. The small rolls with narrow working-sur 
faces enable a suitable pressure to be exerted 
upon the work, ald the uniformity ofbressure to 
be maintained, and this feature is particularly 
desirable in the tools which operate upon the 
foot portion of the boot, as it enables them, 
throughout the rapid changes in conformation 
 
of surface, to as rapidly conform to'the sur. 
face, and at all times and in all positions to 
present their working-surfaces to the boot. 
This tool is used in the same way as the 
tool described in my said patent is employed 
that is, the boot-tree may be revolved against 
the rolls, the rolls having a slight traversing 
movement lengthwise the axis of revolution; 
or the rolls may be revolved around the tree, 
and either the rolls or the tree given a tra 
versing movement in addition. 
The use of heat effects the same results in 
working the leather that are described in the 
patent to me, No. 215,440, and it may be used 
to dry it, to temper it, or to dry in the finish 
ing or filling composition, and it differs only 
in the method of applying it from without the 
boot-tree. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. An improved leather smoothing and fin 
ishing tool, consisting of two or more pairs of 
rolls B, each pair having a common axis be 
tween them at a right angle to their axes, and 
every two pairs having a common axis paral 
lel with the axes of each pair, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination of the arm A, the short 
shaft b, pivoted to the said arm, and the rolls 
B, arranged in pairs upon either side of said 
shaft upon axes parallel with said shaft, and 
arranged to have a swiveling movement on 
said shaft, substantially as described. 
3. In combination with the supporting-arm 
A, two pairs of rolls having parallel axes and 
loosely attached to the end of said arm mid 
way between each pair, substantially as de 
4. In boot-treeing mechanism, the combina 
tion of rolls, substantially as described, and a 
heating-pipe adapted to heat both the rolls 
and the external surface of the boot in the 
treeing process, substantially as set forth. 
5. In combination with a revolving boot 
tree, the smoothing and finishing rolls adapted 
to be externally heated by gas-jets or hot air 
in the manner described, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
6. The combination of the smoothing and 
finishing rolls B of a boot - treeing machine 
with means, substantially as described, for 
heating them during the treeing operation. 
7. The combination of a boot-tree with the 
smoothing and finishing rolls B and a spread 
ing device for automatically distributing the 
filling and finishing composition upon the sur 
face of the boot during the treeing operation, 
Substantially as described. 
8. The combination of the post E, support 
ing the tool - carrying arm A, the arm e, and 
the supporting-block e', the said arm being 
hinged to the supporting-block, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
scribed. 
- 
Witnesses: 
J. E. CRISP, 
F. F. RAYMOND, 2d, 
M. W. SAW YER, 
75 
85 
go 
OO 
IOS 
O 
IIS 
125 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230507.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 230,507. 
A/ 
Q ::::::::::::: 
N, O, TIFF ANY., 
Tray for Fruit Driers, 
Patented July 27, 1880. 
M 
-o-; i-3:4:::::::::------------ 
- - - 
ti 
-- 
- - - 
a - - - 
- A - 
; 
: 
- 
i ; 
it 
f 
r 
  
Fig.2, 
a 
, 
 
70 
y 
7 : 
ar 
e 
p 
q Fig. 
A 
2. N 
A. 
A 
Z 
A. 
 
its 
3rventor. 
N.PETERs, Phoro-LTHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NELSON O. TIFFANY, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO OSCAR F. 
TIFFANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TRAY FOR FRUIT.D RERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 230,507, dated July 27, 1880. 
Application filed April 30, 1880. 
(No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NELSON O. TIFFANY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Buffalo, in the county of Erie and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Trays for Drying 
Fruit or other similar materials, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
cheap durable wooden tray for drying fruit, 
vegetables, or other materials; and it con 
sists of a frame of wood having two of its 
sides composed of two parts, one or both parts 
having a series of transverse slots or grooves 
arranged at a suitable distance apart to re 
ceive a series of thin strips of wood set up 
edgewise, the ends of each strip being pro 
vided with a tenon to prevent it from being 
moved longitudinally or out of the frame; 
the whole being combined and fastened to 
gether, as will be more clearly hereinafter 
shown by reference to the drawings, in which 
Figurel is a plan or top view of a tray com 
plete; Fig. 2, a section through lineXX, Fig. 
l; Fig. 3, an enlarged section through line Z, 
Z, Fig. 1; and Fig. 4 represents an enlarged 
side elevation of a portion of a tray. 
A represents the upper sides of the double 
portions of the frame, and A' the lower sides 
of the same, both parts of which are provided 
with slots or grooves F, (see Fig. 4 and the 
dotted lines F in Fig. 1) into which the ends 
D of the thin wooden strips D are fitted, (see 
Fig. 3,) the shoulders or tenons G preventing 
them from moving longitudinally or getting 
loose. 
To prevent the strips D from warping or 
bending, so as to spring together or too far 
apart, a notched piece, B, is fastened to the 
ends C. of the frame, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
and 3, so that one side of the strips D will fit 
into the notches, and thereby be firmly held 
in place by the teeth or projections H, which 
fit into the space between said strips, as shown 
in Fig. 2. 
Heretofore trays, screens, or sieves made of 
galvanized wire or netting have been used, 
also inferior trays, made of wood, all of which 
are objectionable as follows: The acid from 
the fruit removes the galvanizing from the 
wire, leaving it coated with the juices of the 
fruit, whichisimmediately followed by a chemi 
' 
O 
25 
35 
45 
cal action, producing a black slimy substance 
that corrodes the wire, marks the fruit, and 
imparts to it a poisonous property and a me 
tallic taste, thereby destroying much of the 
natural flavor. The netting is objectionable 
on account of the cost, the time required to 
keep the sieves in repair, and the difficulty in 
removing the fruit without breaking. The ex 
treme heat required in driers and evaporators, 
With the frequent wetting and drying, rapidly 
destroys the fiber of the netting and renders 
it worthless. 
The objection to the wood trays formerly 
used is the great expense of preparing the ma 
terial and putting them together, and the dif. 
ficulty of replacing broken strips; also the 
weakenin of the wood by cutting for inter 
locking. 
The objections to trays made of wood with 
strips r bars held in position by wire is in 
the cost of placing the wire around the pieces, 
as the wires appear to burn the wood, as the 
Wood becomes charred wherever the metal is 
in contact with it. 
My tray is therefore put together by wooden 
pins E; but, if desired, nails or screws may be 
used. The parts A A', when together, bring 
the grooves F opposite each other, and form 
mortises, into which the tenons of the strips 
D are fitted and securely held in place. In 
some cases, when the trays are small, the strip 
or bar B may be dispensed with. 
It is obvious that in case any of the strips 
D should be broken the sides A A' can be 
easily separated and a new piece inserted. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A wooden tray for drying fruit or other 
similar materials, consisting of a frame com 
posed of the parts C and the sides A A', pro 
vided with grooves, substantially as specified, 
in combination with a series of strips, D, and 
a notched bar, B, as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
2. In a fruit-drying tray, the combination of 
the parts C. With the sides composed of the 
parts A A' and a series of strips, D, con 
nected thereto, Substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
N. O. TIFF ANY. 
75 
9o 
95 
Witnesses: 
JAMESSANGSTER, 
HUGH SANGSTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230607.txt	C, F, BLAKELY, 
No. 230,6O7. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1880. 
 
IE7 eEs 
Es 
E. 
III 
 
r 
fG.2. 
FG.3. 
FG4. 
FG.5. 
F.G. 6. 
47%ary 
a4 -6cwde. 
inventor: 
ca. 3. f6. 
law 
data 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CEARLES F. BLAKELY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
OF HIS RIGHT TO ANSEL N. KELLOGG, OF SAME PLACE. 
PRINTERS FORM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 230,607, dated August 3, 1880. 
Application filed June 25, 1878. 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES F. BLAKELY, 
of Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Printers Forms, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention, which is designed to facili 
tate the making of changes in printers' forms 
without unlocking them, consists, essentially, 
in providing for and combining with the parts 
to be changed a vertical-sided socket of such 
height and strength as to afford proper sup 
port to the contiguous matter, and to be itself 
held in the form by the pressure from the lock 
ing, and of such interior dimensions that the 
removable type-blocks may be dropped in and 
lifted out without difficulty or binding. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan of a form having one of my socket 
pieces locked in with the other matter. Fig. 
2 is a plan of one of the sockets. Fig. 3 is a 
similar view with a portion of removable mat 
ter in place. Fig. 4 is a vertical central sec 
tion of the socket, and Fig. 5 a. side elevation 
of the removable block of printing matter. 
Fig. 6 shows another form of the removable 
type-block. 
Like letters indicate like parts wherever they 
appear. 
In said drawings, A represents the chase, 
B the socket, and C the removable type-blocks 
or matter. 
The sockets consist of Vertical four-sided 
metal frames, less than type high, but of such 
vertical, lateral, and longitudinal dimensions 
and of such strength of metal that they will 
give the adjoining matter and column-rules all 
necessary support, and as will insure their 
being secured in the form against any contin 
gency by the locking. Interiorly they con 
form to the shape and dimension of the remov 
able matter they are designed to hold; but the 
latter, if made type high, especially when they 
consist of solid stereotype-blocks, need not fit 
very closely, as I find that they are not likely 45 
to be drawn out, even if somewhat loose in 
the sockets. All these features will be fully 
understood from the drawings without further 
description. 
My invention is also capable of use with re 
movable type-plates less than type high and 
resting upon foundation-blocks permanently 
locked in the form; but in such case, if the 
weight of the removable plates is not sufficient 
to secure their retention in the form, auxiliary 
means must be employed to insure that result. 
The invention may also be employed in cases 
where the space filled by the material of the 
frame itself is needed for printing by making 
the printing-surface to extend over and cover 
the upper edge of the frame. This modifica 
tion is illustrated in Fig. 6. 
When using stiff inks an electrotype may 
be used wider at the base than at the top, the 
inside of the frame being correspondingly in 
clined, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 4. 
55 
I claim 
1. The combination, with a printer's form, 
of a removable type-block and a socket where 
in said block is loosely held, said socket being 
a vertical-sided continuous frame less than 
type high, of such dimensions and strength as 
to afford support for the contiguous matter 
and secure its own retention in the form by 
the pressure from the locking, and with an in 
terior conforming to the shape and slightly 
larger than the block, substantially as set forth. 
2. The socket-frame composed of four sides, 
in combination with the removable stereotype 
block fitting the interior of the frame and hav 
ing its printing - surface extended over the 
upper edge of the frame, substantially as speci 
fied. 
75 
CFIAS. F. BLAKELY. 
Witnesses: 
A. N. KELLOGG, 
EDW. S. EVARTS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230707.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 230,707. 
 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C. H. LAND. 
Baby Jumper. 
Patented Aug. 3, 188O. 
N.Peters, PHOTo-LTHoGaAPER, WASHINGTON, n, c 
(No Model.) 
No. 230,707. 
 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
C. H. LAND. 
Baby Jumper. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1880. 
(No Model.) 
No. 230,707. 
 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
C. H. LAND. 
Baby Jumper. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1880. 
vivesses: 
c7%za-CA-4. 
73. 
cate 6-6-c 
662.es/ 
N. Peters, photo-uthogRAPHER, washingtoN, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CEHARLES H. LAND, OF DETROIT, MICEIIGAN. 
BABYU 
UMPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 230,707, dated August 3, 1880. 
Application filed April 26, 1880. (No model.) 
O 
- 
25 
I5 
2O the child teetering. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs H. LAND, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at De 
troit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Baby-Jumpers; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to letters or figures of reference marked 
thereoi, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a side view, 
showing the crib in full and dotted lines. Fig. 
2 is a perspective view of the crib. Fig. 3 is 
a perspective view of the railing-clamp. Fig. 
4 is a perspective view of the jumper, showing 
Fig. 5 is another per. 
Spective view, showing the child at rest. Fig. 
6 is a side view, showing the jumper in an 
elevated position. Fig. 7 is a side view, show 
ing Some modifications. 
This invention relates to the class of baby. 
jumpers for amusing children and affording 
means for the child to rest or sleep in, and is 
designed as an improvement upon those now 
in general use in the following particulars: 
great durability, simplicity, cheapness, noise 
lessness, freedom from friction, and dispensing 
with the use of metal springs and oiling. 
My improvements therefore consist in a 
Spring-board baby -jumper composed, essen 
tially, of two parts, to wit: a base-board and 
a Spring-board Suitably connected at one end 
With a Wedge-shaped block. 
It also consists in the combination of the 
base-board, spring-board, and a crib, or its 
equivalent, capable of a sliding motion upon 
the spring-board, to permit the child to thrust 
its legs through two holes in the bottom of 
the crib provided for the purpose, whereby 
the child can teeter. 
It also consists, in combination with the 
base-board, spring-board, and crib, or its equiv 
alent, of pivoted supports for sustaining the 
jumper in an inclined position, so that the 
child can look out of the window of the house, 
So When placed within a room, and see objects 
45 
35 
65 
The spring-board is united to the base-board, 6o 
without, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
forth. 
In the annexed drawings, forming a part of 
this specification, the letter A represents the 
base-board, which is made of wood and of a 55 
suitable length and width, and the letter B 
represents the spring-board, made of the same 
material and of the same width, but not so 
long as the base-board. 
to gain an acute angle, by beveling the parts 
together, and by introducing at the rear of 
contact a Wedge-shaped block, b, affording a 
better support, substantially as shown in Fig. 
1 of the drawings. 
To the end of the spring-boardisarranged the 
crib D, capable of a sliding motion, its limit 
being controlled or regulated by the stops or 
projections d on the under side of the spring 
board. The bottom board of this crib is re 
cessed of a depth to correspond with the thick 
ness of the spring-board, and is also provided 
with two transverse bars, ee, having suitable 
set means (not shown) for retaining and se 
curing the crib upon the spring-board in the 75 
desired position. 
The sliding Crib is constructed as shown in 
the drawings, Figs. 1 and 2, with a number of 
vertical bars, f, attached to the bottom board 
and upper railing, E, which forms a shield or 8o 
guard to prevent the child from falling out. 
The corner connections of the upper rail, E, 
are firmly secured by means of the metallic 
clamp G, as fully showninperspective in Fig. 3. 
the sides of the railing and bent under, so as 
to lie flat upon the under surface of the railing. 
The bottom board of the Crib or basket D is 
formed with two oblong openings, H, to per 
mit the child, when of proper age or size, to 
pass its legs or lower limbs through them to 
teeter or jump itself from the base-board. 
When the child becomes tired of jumping or 
teetering the legs are withdrawn from the open 
ings and the sliding Crib drawn back to its 
normal position, closing the openings, when 
the child can lie back on a pillow arranged 
within the crib or basket, substantially as 
shown in Fig. 5 of the drawings. 
The ends h of the clamp G are passed down 85 
When the child is very young, not able to Ioo 
95 
230,0? 
the crib, also in connecting the forward ends 
of the base-board and spring-board by means 
of a metallic angular piece, M. 
The rear ends of the base and spring boards 
are provided with a catch and hook for com 
pressing the parts at this end within a small 
compass, so that the jumper can be stowed 
away in the corner of a closet or under the bed 
or hung upon the wall. 
It will be readily seen that a baby jumper 
of this construction is very simple and noise 
less, also free from friction, and needs no oiling. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patentis 
1. A spring-board baby jumper consisting 
of a base-board and a spring-board united di 
rectly together at their front ends at an acute 
angle, and supported by a wedge-shaped block, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination, substantially as de 
scribed, of a base-board, a spring-board, and 
a sliding crib having two openings for the 
passage of the child's lower limbs, the cribbe. 
ing adapted to slide forward upon the spring 
board to close the openings and form a crib 
for the child to lie in. 
3. The combination, with a base-board, a 
spring-board, and a crib, of pivoted supports 
or props for sustaining the jumper in an up 
right or inclined position, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. The combination, with a base - board, a 
Spring-board, and a crib, of pivoted supports 
or props and a cross-bar attached in rear of 
the pivoted supports, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES H. LAND. 
Witnesses: 
WM. W. WITHERSPooN, 
JNO. B. CORLISS. 
45 
55 
75 
teeter himself, the spring-board will be oper 
ated by the foot of the attendant, 
In operation, the weight of the child in the 
crib will cause the forward end of the jumper 
to slightly rise, as seen in Fig. 4, from the 
floor to the distance of about one inch, and by 
depressing this portion of the jumper with 
the foot, as seen in Fig. 5, which is merely the 
raising of the forward portion of the foot, it 
causes an undulatory movement at the rear 
end of about six inches, thereby producing 
upon the infant or child a most agreeable and 
soothing effect. 
It will be observed that the base and spring 
boards in my jumper are made of flat pieces 
of wood, and that the spring-board, being ar 
ranged at an acute angle, affords an incline 
plane for the child to ascend, and also a means 
for the child to enter the crib. 
By this arrangement of the spring-board 
and basket or crib with the base-board I am 
enabled to bring the upper end of the spring 
board within one foot or more from the floor, 
so that there is no danger of the child being in 
jured. 
The base-board, near its rear end, is provided 
with two pivoted supports or props, I, arranged 
on opposite sides, (see Fig. 6,) to sustain the 
jumper with child in an upright or inclined po 
sition for further amusement. These supports 
are retained in position from backward dis 
placement by means of a cross-bar, K, attached 
to the under surface of the base-board in such 
a manner as to be switched in the direction of 
the length of the board. 
By means of these supports I am enabled to 
further annuse the child by adjusting and sup 
porting the jumper on its front end, so that it 
can be raised up to a window to see objects 
without. 
In Figs. 6 and 7 of the drawings I have 
shown a modification in the construction of 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230807.txt	, 
l 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. PALMER, OF ELIZABETHTOWN, AND WILLIAM A. ROOT, OF 
NEW YORK, ASSIGNORS OF ONE-THIRD OF THEIR RIGHT TO CHARLES 
N. WILLIAMS, OF ELIZABETHTOWN, N. Y. 
WRE OR ROD CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 230,807, dated August 8, 1880. 
Application filed December 12, 1879. 
To all uplom it may concern : 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM E. PALMER, 
of Elizabethtown, in the county of Essex and 
State of New York, and WILLIAM. A. ROOT, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Wire or Rod Cutters, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The invention relates to hand tools or shears 
for use, where other than hand-power is not 
convenient, in cutting wire or metal rods and 
bars into desired lengths for rivets, &c., and 
for trimming the ends of same after burrs or 
Washers are in position. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
tool or hand-machine that can be easily car 
ried about, that can be applied to wire in the 
coil or straight, or iron in the bar or rod, and 
that will at one operation cut the same smooth 
and flush with the face of a gage or guide, or 
with the surface of anything through which the 
same may project. 
The invention consists of two reversible and 
interchangeable cutting-dies placed opposite 
each other in a frame, one of which is held 
rigidly in position by means of a seat or re 
cess in said frame, into which it fits, the other 
of which is actuated by two reversible and in 
terchangeable levers or handles, which force it 
against said rigid cutting-die or draw it away 
therefron. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure 1 is a top view of our device. Fig. 2 
is a longitudinal section on the line fg, Figs. 
1 and 3. Fig. 3 is a view of our device with 
the top plate removed. Fig. 4 is a transverse 
section on the line de, Figs. 1, 2, and 3. Fig. 
5 is a side view of our device. Fig. 6 is a 
transverse section on the line at b, Figs. 1, 2, 
and 3. Fig. 7 is a side view of the end plate, 
K, Fig. 5. Fig. 8 are views of the top plate, 
B, in Fig. 1. Fig. 9 are views of the bottom 
plate, J, in Fig. 3. Fig. 10 is a view of one of 
thereversible and interchangeable cutting-dies 
as it appears when detached; they being both 
alike, but one is shown in the drawings. Fig. 
11 is a transverse section of the cutting-die on 
the line a b, Fig. 3; and Fig. 12 is a longitudi 
?? 
SO 
55 
nal Section of one of the cutting-dies on the 
line fg, Fig. 3. 
The plates B, Fig. 8, and J, Fig. 9, together 
with the end piece or plate, K, Fig. 7, constitute 
the frame-work or body of the tool. The said 
frame-work is securely held together by means 
of the screws H'H', Fig. 1, passing through 
the said plate B and into the plate J, threads 
having been cut in said plate J for the reception 
of the thread ends of said screws El H, and 
the end piece or plate, K, Fig. 7, having been 
first placed between the smaller ends of the 
said plates B and J. The end piece or plate, 
K, is held in position between the plates B and 
Jby means of the screws H'H' passing through 
suitable holes in the said plate K. The re 
versible and interchangeable cutting-dies CC, 
Figs. 1 and 3, one of which is also shown de 
tached in Fig. 10, are placed opposite each 
other, between the plates B and J, (see Fig. 3.) 
and held in position by means of their base 
plates E. E., to which they are secured in any 
well-known manner. Said base-plates E. E. 
are of a larger surface than the cutting-dies C 
C, fastened thereto, thus also furnishing flanges 
for said cutting-dies C. C. The base-plates E 
E are provided with circular projections FFF 
F, Figs. 3 and 10, upon each of their corners, 
which projections serve the following purpose, 
viz: to hold the upper of the two cutting-dies 
CC securely in position by fitting into recesses 
in the endplate, K, Fig. 7, by projecting slightly 
beyond the cutting-edges G G of the dies CC, 
(see Fig. 1) thus preventing the said dies CC 
from quite meeting and dulling their said cut 
ting-edges G. G. upon each other, and by fit 
ting into recesses DD in the levers AA, Figs. 
1 and 3, hereinafter described. 
The cutting-dies C C, Fig. 1, are prevented 
from having a lateral movement by means of 
a slot in the upper plate, B, Figs. 1 and S, into 
which they fit in such a manner that their 
faces coincide with the outer surface of the 
said plate B. This slotis of a length somewhat 
greater than that of the two cutting-dies CC 
combined, thus admitting of the lower of the tWO 95 
cutting-dies C C having a limited longitudi 
nal movement. Each of the levers AA Figs. 
1 and 3, is formed with one of its ends circu 
75 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
30 
35 
45 
lar-shaped, and provided with a pivot-hole, I, dies C C into contact with the said article to 
in said circular-shaped end, and a circular de. 
be cut, which is also, and at the same time, 
pression, D D, in each of its sides in said cir 
forced by the lower of said dies C C against 
cular-shaped end, and in line with each other 
the upper of said dies C C, thus bringing one 
and the said pivot-hole I. (See Fig. 3.) The 
of the cutting-edges of each of said dies C C 
screws HH, Fig. 1, serve as pivots for the le 
into contact with the article to be severed, and 
vers A A, FigS. 1 and 3, and also assist in 
upon opposite sides thereof. 
fastening the tool together. 
The screws H. H. and H. H., Fig. 1, may be 
either screws, (as represented,) bolts, or rivets. 
The combination of the several parts to form 
the complete tool is effected as follows: The 
levers AA, the plates E. E., to which the cut 
ting-dies C C are securely and permanently 
attached, and the end plate, K, are all placed 
in position on the under plate, J. (See Fig. 3.) 
The plate B is then placed over them, and the 
screws H H and F1/ H' screwed down tight, 
thus combining and Securing all the parts to 
form the tool, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The operation of the tool is as follows: The 
levers A A are first moved outward in oppo 
site directions or away from each other, thus 
opening the tool. The article to be severed is 
then placed between the cutting-dies CC; af. 
ter which the levers A A are moved toward 
each other, thus forcing the lower of the two 
What we claim is 
1. The combination of two reversible and in 
terchangeable cutting-dies with actuating-le 
vers, substantially as shown and described. 
2. The reversible and interchangeable plates 
EE, having semicircular projections upon each 
of their corners, substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. The reversible and interchangeable piv 
oted levers A A in combination with the cut 
ting-dies C C and plates E. E., substantially 45 
as described. 
W. E. PALMER. 
WILLIAM A. ROOT. 
Witnesses to signature of W. H. Palmer: 
A. PERRY, 
H. G. FRIENCIH. 
FRANK W. PooLE, 
GEO. E. CLAY. 
Witnesses to signature of William A. Root: 
35 
O 
15 
2 ? 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US230907.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
H, THIBALT & T. HAWKINS, 
RO tary Engine. 
No. 23O, 9 O7. 
 
Patented Aug. 10, 1880. 
 
 
S 2&zzzzz 
 
 
SS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
% % 
SNSSE2 S 
22 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Winesses:-- 
ya's S- 
2252-y - 
\muemor 
enryl Tibet 
d'Avia?-44/ 
N.PETERs, Photo-LithoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
knvertor 
74.A./ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY THIBALT AND THOMAS HAWKIN s, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
ROTARY ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 230,907, dated August 10, 1880. 
Application filed May 27, 1880. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom at may concern: 
Beit known that we, EIENRY THIBAULT, a 
citizen of the United States, and THOMAS 
HAWKINS, a citizen of Great Britain, and both 
residing in the city, county, and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Rotary Engines; and we do here 
by declare the following, taken in connection 
With the accompanying drawings, to be a full, 
clear, and accurate description of the same. 
Our invention relates to rotary engines; and 
it consists in certain improvements therein, as 
hereinafter more fully set forth, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a cross 
section of our improvement in the line acac of 
Fig. 2. Fig. 2 represents a vertical section of 
the same. Fig. 3 represents a vertical section 
in the line y y of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 represents the 
packing-rings. 
Our improvement is made as follows: A case, 
R, is mounted or secured on a bed, H. This 
case R is provided with channels or ports F 
and F, for the passage of steam, and recesses 
a ca. Within the case R revolves a drum, L, 
connected with and secured to a sla?t, O. The 
drum L is provided with end flanges, L', bev. 
eled outwardly, and eight sliding pistons, M, 
which slide in receptacles provided in the drum 
Li, and which pistons M rest on springs N, 
which are for the purpose of holding the 
pistons MI in position to take steam, and at 
the same time to diminish the shock when the 
pistons M, by the revolution of the drum L, 
are forced down by contact with the case IR in 
the receptacles of said drum L. These recep 
tacles are covered with the covers P, as shown 
in Fig. 2. 
The flanges L' of the drum L are beveled, as 
shown in Fig. 1, to correspond with the pack 
ing-rings S, one side of which is also beveled. 
These packing-rings S are fitted between the 
case R and flanges L' of the drum L and the 
recesses a of the case, for the purpose of pack 
ing the joint between said case and drum, thus 
preventing the escape of steam and rendering 
the said joint steam-tight. These packing 
rings S are provided on their backs with flat 
springs I, (shown in Fig. 4.) to prevent the 
rings from binding. The said rings S are 
tightened or loosened and adjusted by means 
of the set-screws J, (shown in Fig.1) and which 
set-screws work upon the springs I at their 
Center. 
Steam is admitted to the engine by means 
of the feed-pipe A, which connects with the 
Steam-chest I3, which is connected with the 
ports IF F of the case R. The steam admit 
ted to these ports F F by means of the valve 
C, connected with the steam-chest B, passes 
thence into the steam-spaces V V between the 
case IR and drum L. 
The (lrum L and case R are so arranged in 
relation to each other as to cause the steam 
spaces V at portions of their circumference to 
be of such depth as will allow the pistons M 
to be acted on by the pressure of the steam, 
and then to cause the said steam-spaces V to 
taper gradually, so that the drum and case 
nearly touch, as shown in Fig. 2. 
E represents the exhaust-pipe for the steam 
to pass out after it has exerted its pressure on 
the sliding pistons M. 
G G are two springs or face-packing for the 
drum L, which are placed between the drum 
L and case R for the purpose of preventing 
the escape of steam between the drum and the 
case at the points where said packing is placed. 
Dis a lever, connected by a rod with the valve 
C for the purpose of reversing the engine when 
desired. 
The mode of operation of our improvement 
is as follows: The steam enters the steam-chest 
B through the feed-pipe A, and thence passes 
into the ports or channels F of the case R, 
following the direction of the arrows shown in 
Fig. 2, and thence passes into the steam-spaces 
V V at the same time. Two pistons, M, one 
on each side of the drum L, are held outin po 
sition by the springs N, ready to take steam, 
and the steam, entering the steam-spaces VV, 
exerts pressure on said two pistons M, at the 
same time, and thus causes the drum L and 
shaft O to revolve, and the steam, thus acting 
on two opposite sides of the drum at the same 
time, relieves the shaft O from the weight 
which would be caused by the pressure of the 
steam on the face of the drum were the steam 
admitted to one side only of the drum. The 
pistons M, as they are carried around the cir 
cle by the revolution of the drum L., are forced 
down into the receptacles of the drum as they 
go 
95 
IOO 
5 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
230,907 
pass from the beginning of the inner ports, FF, 
of the case R to the points at G. (Shown in Fig. 
2.) The said pistons M, after passing the said 
points G, are forced out into the steam-spaces 
WW, so as to take steam, by means of centrif. 
ugal force, aided by the springs N. The steam, 
after exerting its pressure on the pistons Mas 
they pass through the steam-spaces VV, passes 
out of the exhaust-pipe E. 
If it is desired to reverse the engine, the le 
ver D is pulled, which acts on the valve C and 
allows the steam to flow into the opposite ports 
FF, and thus reverse the action of the engine. 
The engine can also be packed while running 
at full speed by turning the set-screws J on 
the outside of the case, which adjust the pack 
ing-rings S, thereby avoiding all trouble and 
waste of time in packing, as is the case in 
packing other eigines. 
Our construction of case is such that there 
is no action of the steam on the pistons while 
working in and out of the drum, thereby pre 
venting friction and insuring long wear of pis 
tons. The pistons are isolated or separated 
from each other in each of their receptacles, 
SO that steam Cannot escape from one to the 
other, thereby preventing the steam from in 
terfering with the pistons out of action. The 
O 
25 
- 
engine, as so constructed, will also have no 
dead-points, and there is no loss of power at 
any point of the revolution of the drum. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is- 
1. The combination, with the case R, pro 
vided with recesses a ct, of the drum L., having 
beveled flanges L', beveled packing-rings S, 
provided with flat springs I, and set-screws J, 
substantially as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. The combination, with the case R, having 
the recesses a. a. and steam-ports F E, of the 
drum L, provided with the beveled flanges L', 
sliding pistons M, and springs N, steam-spaces 
V, covers P, beveled packing-rings S, having 
flat springs I, and set-screws J, the whole con 
structed, arranged, and operated in the man 
ner and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands this 24th day of May, 1880. 
HENRY THIBALT. 
TEOMAS HAWKINS. 
35 
4O 
45 
In presence of - 
CEIARLES G. COE, 
R. F. WAN BOSKIRCK. 
-4 
-a, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231007.txt	R, MI, CATLIN, 
Apparatus for Compressing Air, 
No. 231, oo7. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1880. 
elz. ZY 
| 4 
C | C | 43 
dZ 
7. 12. 
3 
/ar, * . 
| |- 
| || |||||||||||z ^ 
--- Bg ---- K HRE 
| | | | 
eg 
---- 
| 4 
||||||||| 
---- 
---- 
-|||||| 
|| 
---- 
nn 
Y) 
/* } 
 
| 
Z 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
 
/Y /27: . (G) 8% 
WITNESSES : 
 
 
*** 
7. | 
E22:ssa 
HINWENTOR, 
(BY MAww.~~ dig, 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, PHoTo-LITHOGRAPHER, w ASHINGTON, D C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT M. CATLIN, OF TUSCARORA, NEVADA. 
APPARATUS FOR CO V PRESS I NG A R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 231,007, dated August 10, 1880. 
Application filed December 13, 1879. 
55 
75 
N 
To all nivhom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT MAYO (ATLIN, 
of Tuscarora, in the county of Elko and State 
of Nevada, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Apparatus for Compressing 
Air, of which the following is a specification. 
My present invention is primarily an inn 
provement in apparatus for elevating water by 
the direct action of compressed air, such as 
shown in Letters Patent granted to me, No. 
221,778, November 18, 1879, but contains fea 
tures that are applicable in connection with 
any steam or air engine. 
The object of the invention is, first, to utilize 
a portion of the exhaust without back-press 
ure or the use of compound cylinders; second, 
to prevent loss of power by condensation of 
the steam and to obtain a more perfect valve 
action. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion of the air-compressing apparatus With the 
valve and the exhaust chamber. Fig. 2 is a 
similar section at right angles to Fig. 1. 
Fig. 
3 is a horizontal section on line a ac of Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the apparatus, A. is a U-shaped pipe, fit 
ted at the upper end of its shorter leg ( With a 
valve-case, B, that contains a cylindrical slide 
valve, b, to which case is connected the inlet 
pipe c, for steam under pressure, and exhaust 
pipe d. At the side of case B is a case, e, fit 
ted with an auxiliary valve at the end of the 
rod f, that extends into tube A, upon whiclh 
rod fis a float, g, that by its movement up and 
down, with a liquid in tube A, operates the 
auxiliary valve to start the main valve. This 
feature is similar to the device shown in my 
previous patent, and need not be further de 
scribedl. 
At the side of case B, and opening into the 
same by a port, 1, is a lhollow case, C, which 
I term the  exhaust - chamber. From the 
valve-chamber a port, 2, opens to the leg a, to 
supply steanu or air from pipe c, and a port, 3, 
opens from leg a to the valve-chamber and 
exhaust-pipe d. The valve b is formed as a 
cylindrical plunger, with a central annular 
groove, a', that opens connection between 
orts 2 and 3 and pipes c d, and between the 
middle pipe, 1, and exhaust-chamber C. 
The valve-case B is elongated, so that an air 
cushio is formed at each end of valve b, and 
to start the valve in case it passes beyond the 
port 4, that supplies air or stean to move the 
valve, the valve is formed near each end with 
a narrow annular groove, ac*, and the iner 
surface of case B at the port 4 is formed with 
an annular groove, a, that is wider than the 
space between the groove a and the end of 
valve b, so that the pressure will act in groove 
(t to move the valve in til its end returns over 
the port 4. 
The operation of the described parts is as 
follows: Supposing the valve b be in position 
to admit air or steam from pipe c to leg a, the 
liquid in a is forced down by the pressure, as 
described in my said patent, or as hereinafter 
described, and the float g falling shifts the 
auxiliary valve, which admits air or steam to 
the port 4 to shift valve b. The valve b, in 
moving, first opens exhaust-port 1 to the cham 
ber C, so that the chamber becomes filled with 
air or steam under pressure. The further 
movement of the valve b opens port 3 and al 
lows the final exhaust by pipe d. The liquid 
then again rising in pipe a shifts the auxiliary 
valve by means of the float, and the first move 
ment of valve b back opens the port 1, and the 
air or steam in chamber C rushes into pipe a, 
and exerts its force previous to the main press 
ure, that enters from pipe c by port 2. Thus 
a portion of tlhe exhaust i utilizedl at every 
stroke without back-pressure, and it will be 
seen that this device may be used wherever 
air, gas, or steam are used under pressure for 
any purp?Se. 
The longer leg b' of the U-shaped pipe A is 
fitted with a valve, h, opening into a pipe, i, 
that will lead to a storage-reservoir. In the 
top of b'' is an opening, k, to admit atmospheric 
air. Within the U-shaped pipe, to about the 
level of the top of leg a, a fixed oil is to be 
placed, to serve as a liquid piston, against 
which the steam entering from pipe e will act 
to force the air above the oil in leg b' out by 
pipe i and compress the same. The stem can 
mot evaporate the oil, and the oil will become 
heated, so that condensation of the steam and 
loss of pressure are thereby avoided. : 
I do not limit myself to the details of con 
struction exactly as shown, as they may be 
O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
95. 
CdO 
2 
23,002 
varied without departing from my invention. 
For the purpose of varying the size of the open 
ing a' in valve b the saidl valve may be in two 
pieces, united by a screw-rod. A condenser 
may also be used in connection with the ex 
haust-pipe d in any usual manner. 
EHaving thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. In an apparatus for compressing air by 
the direct pressure of steam, the liquid piston 
consisting of a column of oil within a tube 
that is Connected to the air-tube and Steam 
chest, substantially as shown and describedl. 
2. In an air-compressing apparatus, the U 
slhaped pipe A, having its longer leg connected 
to the air-receiver and its short er leg with the 
valve and steam-chest, and containing oil, sub 
stanutially as and for the purposes specified. 
3. In an apparatus for using air, gas, or 
steam under pressure, the combination tilhere 
witlu of an exhaust-reservoir connected by a 
O 
I 5 
2 O 
port with the valve-chamber, and a valve that 
ope?s communication between the reservoir 
and the cylinder intermediately of the main 
illet and exhaust ports, substantially as de 
scribed and shown, whereby a portion of the 
exhaust is utilized?. 
4. In an apparattus for using air, gas, or 
steam under pressure, the combination, with 
the steam-chest and valve- chamber, provided 
with the ports 1 2 3 and valve b, of the reser 
voir C, connected by a port with the valve 
chamber, substantially as and for the purposes 
set fortlin. 
5. The pistom-valve b, formed with the annu 
lar groove a at each end, combined with the 
elongated valve-case B, having the annular 
inlet-groove a, as and for the purposes speci 
fied. 
ROBT. MAYO (CATTLIN. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
E. H. THARP, 
J. LEVY. 
W 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231109.txt	A. SHIRLAW. 
Perforating Ma Chine. 
No. 231, 1 O9. 
 
Patented Aug. 10, 18 
e - 
s 
- 
 
  
Z 
f'y. 2, 6-7s 
A 
 
24All.2, 
t 
  
 
  
Sa en, 
2S 
. 
%N 
A KS 
N2. 
. . T NZ 
NZ 
7, 
S3 
N2 
S 
N2 
SE E% 
SZSS 
S2 
N 
N 
NYS 
N2\s 
N 
2N 
%.S. 
SNS 
2XSSS 
%NSN N i i NZ 
3DOEICARICERC, 
2 
SAN 
%assistill 
%a. 
% 
% 
% 
4. 
2 
t 
3 
2 
2 
% 
% 
55 
% 2k is a SSSS % 
(e. 
%z%z7%z% 
Aave aton: 
/77 orew Shirlaw 
-6-224 
/Zety. 
z 2,. 
N. PerERs, Photo-rhographer, washNGTON, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ANDREW SEIIRLAW, OF BIRMINGHAM, ENGLAND. 
PERFORATING MACH NE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 231,109, dated August 10, 1880. 
Application filed February 19, 1880. 
Patented in England July 30, 1879. 
S 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
To all chon it may concen: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW SEIIRLAW, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at Birmingham, in the county of Warwick, 
Ringdom of Great Britain, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Perforat 
ing-Machines, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to machines employed 
for perforating checks, bills, and similar valu 
able papers for the purpose of preventing their 
fraudulent alteration. This I accomplishin the 
manner hereinafter described in detail, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of a 
perforating-machine; Fig. 2, a vertical central 
sectional view, and Fig. 3 a sectional view on 
the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the metallic frame is composed of a base-piece, 
a, end standards, b, and an upper cross-piece, 
c, the base-piece having ends d, provided with 
perforations by which to secure the frame to 
a suitable support. 
The base-piece is constructed with two ver 
tical plates, e, situated a suitable distance apart 
to receive between them the die-wheels f, which 
are loosely journaled on an arbor, g, having its 
end bearings in the plates e e, and the upper 
ends of the latter are respectively connected 
with the end standards, b, by means of the 
horizontal platforms h, within which are ar 
ranged lead or other soft-metal plates i, hav. 
ing perforations and forming a seating for the 
punch-pins, hereinafter described. 
The die-wheels fare polygonal in shape, and 
each of their peripheral sides are perforated 
(see Fig. 1) to correspond with the punch-pins 
on two punch-wheels, l, of similar form to the 
die-wheels, and which are journaled on an ar 
bor, l, in the side arms, l, of vertically-slid 
ing frames, said frames consisting of lower 
pieces, In, end pieces, n, and top connecting 
bars, 0, and, in connection with the arms l, 
forming substantially two rectangular frames 
depending from the connecting-bar 0. 
The end pieces, n, are provided with laterally 
projecting pins p, arranged in slots r in the 
end standards, b, for the purpose of guiding 
and limiting the vertical movement of the slid 
ing frames, 
To the central part of the bar 0 is fixed a ver 
tical cylindrical or other shaped stud, s, which 
passes through a cort espondingly-shaped open 
ing, t, in the cross-piece c, and is provided with 
a head, at, between which and the upper side 
of the said cross-piece is arranged a spiral or 
other suitable spring, , for the purpose of main 
taining the sliding frame in an elevated posi 
tion with respect to the lower die-wheels,f. 
Between the lower edge of the sliding frame 
and the upper edge of the stationary platforms 
l, and the soft-metal plates is arranged a draw 
off plate, 0, for the purpose of releasing the 
check or other paper from the punch-pins when 
the latter are elevated. 
The sliding frame is depressed for the pur 
pose of puncturing the paper by any suitable 
means, the same consisting, in the present ex 
ample, of a lever, gy, pivoted at one end to a 
lug, 2, on the cross-piece c, and resting on the 
head of the stud s, the lever being provided 
with a handle, by which it is actuated. 
The perforations in the die-wheels f and the 
punch-pins on the wheels l are arranged in the 
form of numerals from 1 to 9, the remaining 
numeral being a cipher. 
The drawings show two die-wheels and two 
punch-wheels, which are, of course, adapted 
for two columns of figures only; but by the 
use of additional wheels the columns may be 
extended. 
- The lower edge of the sliding frame may be 
provided with a cipher (one or more) to multi 
ply the amounts punched by ten or to indi 
cate francs, florins, or dollars, and on the op 
posite side of the wheels said sliding frame is 
provided with an arrangement of punches rep 
resenting Under. 
The die and punch wheels are each provided 
with a series of apertures, a?, into any of which 
may be inserted the ends of rods b', passing 
through one of the end standards, b, for the 
purpose of locking the wheels in their adjusted 
position. 
As each side or face of the wheels is pro 
vided, respectively, with a numeral arrange 
ment of punches and a numeral arrangement 
of perforations or matrices, and as each wheel 
is capable of being rotated independent of the 
other and then locked in position, it will be 
manifest that any two numbers can be adjusted 
into position for use, 
w 
9o 
95 
IC) 
- - - - 
- 
s 
231,09 
- 
The operation of my machine will be evident 
from the foregoing description; but in order 
to explain, I will state that when the die-wheels 
and punch-wheels have been properly adjusted 
to the required figures the check or other pa 
per is inserted beneath the draw-off plate 0, 
and rests upon the platform h. The sliding 
frame is then suddenly forced down by means 
of the actuating-lever, which will perform the 
puncturing operation, when the lever is re 
leased and the sliding frame will be thrown 
upward by means of the spring , and caused 
to assume its normal position. 
I do not wish to be understood as claiming 
a stationary matrix, a clearer-plate, and a re 
ciprocating perforator, as such is not my in 
vention. 
What I claim is 
1. In a machine for perforating checks and 
other paper, the combination of the rotary ad 
justable die-wheels journaled on an arbor al 
ranged in fixed bearings, a platform for Sup 
porting the check or other paper, and the ro 
tary adjustable punch-wheels journaled on an 
EO 
IS 
arbor arranged in a vertically-movable frame, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination, in a paper-perforating 
machine, of the rotary adjustable die-wheels, 
a platform for supporting the paper to be per 
forated, the rotary adjustable punch - wheels 
journaled in a vertically-movable frame, mech 
anism for locking the said die and punch 
wheels in the adjusted position, and mechan 
ism for reciprocating the movable frame, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination of the rotary die-wheels 
and the rotary punch-wheels, capable of ver 
tical reciprocating movement, each of said 
wheels having a series of lateral apertures, af, 
with the rods b', adapted to be passed through 
said apertures for locking the respective wheels 
in their adjusted position, substantially as de 
scribed. 
35 
ANDREW SEIIRLAW. 
Witnesses: 
PERCY I. B. PAYNE, 
HENRY T. TALBOT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231209.txt	F. A. BROOKS & H. WILL ARD. 
Ma Chinery for Making Lock Casings. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 231,209. 
Patented Aug. 17, 188O. 
 
   
  
 
 
222-22 S % 
ar 
aarararavanana 
AA 
 
M22 esses 
32 is 
q2, afts; 
4ea 47-gaz &%2/ 
4 (12/e1762% 
 
F. A. BR00KS & H. WILL ARD, 
Ma Chinery for Making Lock Casings. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 231,209. 
Patented Aug. 17, 188O. 
| . || | 
L -- 
5 S 
No. 
s // 
|- Z Z 
! | 
s 
212.7 vesses; 
o24. 
62 
52.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK A. BROOKS AND HORATIO WILLARD, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
MACHINERY FOR MAKING LOCK- CASINGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 231,209, dated August 17, 1880. 
Application filed February 12, 1880. 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that we, FREDERICKA.BROOKs 
and HORATIO WILLARD, of Dayton, in the 
county of Montgomery and State of Ohio, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Machinery for Making Lock-Casings; and 
we do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
machinery for making wrought - metal lock 
CaSlings. 
It consists in the construction of two sets 
of dies peculiarly constructed and arranged, 
and by the operation of which strips of metal 
of the proper width and thickness are punched, 
cut, and pressed to form the two parts of the 
lock-case, as will be herewith set forth and 
specifically claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, 
Sheet 1, is a sectional view, in side elevation, 
of the punching and shaping dies. Fig. 2, 
Sheet 1, is a plan view of the base or female 
portion of the same. Fig. 3, Sheet 1, is an 
inverted plan view of the male portion of the 
same. Fig. 1, Sheet 2, is a plan view of the 
female portion of the second die. Fig. 2, 
Sheet 2, is an inverted plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3, Sheet 2, is a central sectional view, in 
elevation, through both portions. Fig. 4, 
Sheet 2, is a perspective view of the finished 
CaS0. 
First describing the devices represented 
on Sheet 1 of the drawings, A is the base 
plate, of metal, and, if desired, may form part 
of the power-press, of any suitable construc 
tion. (Not here shown.) Upon this is attached 
in any convenient way the die or female B, 
which may be a rectangular metal block or 
die having recesses a, b c d for the bolt-open 
ing, the screw-holes, and the rivet-holes, re 
spectively. Upon the upper side of this block 
B are guides C, which may be adjustable, if 
Just in the rear of the block B is a second 
stationary or adjustable metal former, D, hav 
ing a rectangular wedge-shaped top, as seen, 
and this top edge is on a level with the top of 
the block B. Some little distance in the rear 
of the former D is a rectangular stop-plate, E, 
So adjustably fastened by a set-screw, e, to the 
bed-plate A, so that its distance from the 
former D may be regulated. 
desired. 
45 
35 
P 
55 
65 
The male portion F, which is attached to 
the movable portion of the press, so as to de 
scend upon the block B and former D with a 
reciprocating motion, consists of a rectangul 
lar or other suitably-shaped metal block, hav 
ing secured in it so as to project from its un 
der surface steel punches f. Figs. 1 and 3. 
These punches are of such shape and so ad 
justed as to accurately fit the corresponding 
apertures a, b c d in the block B. Also, fitted 
to the under side of the block F is the Com 
bined cutting and bending die G, of the shape 
shown, with a recess in its under face, which, 
when the block descends, fits over the former D. 
Now, the operation is as follows, supposing 
the block F, with its punches and cap, to be 
rising and falling uniformly by power applied 
from the press: A strip of metal, I, of any 7o 
length, just as it comes from the mills, but of 
uniform and proper width and thickness, is 
slipped between the guides C until its end is 
exactly flush with the rear edge, ac, of the 
block B, when the punches descend and punch 75 
out the bolt-opening, the screw-holes, and the 
rivet-holes. As soon as the punches ascend 
the operator pushes the strip. I through until 
it is arrested by the stop-plate E, when, the 
block F again descending, the edge y of the 
female die G catches the strip between it and 
the edgea of the block B and cuts it through 
at that point, thus severing a piece of the 
proper length for one part of the lock-casing. 
At the same time and by the same operation 
the strip I has been a second time punched. 
Now, to follow the process upon the severed 
piece, as soon as it is cut it is caught between 
the edges y and 2 of the cap G and the top 
edge of the former ID, as seen in Fig. 1, and 
is bent upon the latter, so as to form a selvage 
or the top part of the lock-casing containing 
the bolt-opening, as seen by the dotted lines 
g, Fig. 1. This completes the plate, with all 
its necessary holes and slots, ready for receiv 
ing the back part of the casing. This plate 
is seen in perspective at J. By this means 
every downward stroke of the block G and 
its attachments forms a completed plate, J, 
punched and bent ready for use in a lock 
casing. 
Sheet 2 shows the same invention as applied 
to the construction of the back part of the 
casing. Here the lower or female die, A', 
9o 
95 
IOC 
 
Alagrater * rest 
 
231,209 
O 
has the key-hole recess ?t' and the irregular 
recess B", of the shape shown, containing a 
rectangular former-block, C, located as shown. 
This latter, in its function, corresponds with 
the former-block D of Sheet 1. A stop, D', of 
the shape shown, is employed, as in Sheet 1, 
and likewise guide-strips b'. The upper or 
male portion, E', carries on its under side the 
key-hole punch c' and a cap-piece, d". This 
latter is shaped externally so as to fit exactly 
into the irregular recess B", and it contains on 
its under surface a recess which fits over the 
former-block C. The lower inner edges of the 
walls of this recess are rounded as seen at e'. 
The operation of this pair of lies is exactly 
similar to that of the dies above described, 
and the fed-in strip is punched, cut, and bent 
at one operation into the back piece, N, Fig. 
4, of the lock-casing. 
The advantages of this process are obvious, 
and the great savings of tine and metal are 
important. Another great advantage is, that 
by means of the formers employed, which bend 
the metal toward the edge instead of from it, 
a lower quality of iron can be employed, thus 
enabling casings of good quality to be made 
from cheaper material than by the present 
processes. 
We are aware that trunk corner-clamps 
have been formed in a press containing punch 
ing, cutting, and bending dies, each separate 
and distinct from the other, but capable of 
punching, cutting, and bending the corner 
clamps in a continued operation. But this 
machine necessitated the use of a slide to carry 
the blank, after it had been punched and cut, 
to the bending-die, so that while all three sets 
of dies descended uniformly, yet the action of 
25 
35 
each was independent, and an extra handling 
of the blank was required after it was punched 4o 
and cut. Our machine obviates this by the use 
of the combined cutting and bending dies, 
without the necessity of extra handling, for 
the same motion that carries the strip to be 
freshly punched locates the part already 45 
punched so as to be severed and bent by the 
same die and without intermediate shifting. 
What we claim as new is 
1. In machinery for forming wrought-metal 
lock-casings, the combination, with the punch- 5o 
ing-dies B and F, constructed as described, of 
the bending-die D, having a rectangular wedge 
shaped top, and the shearing and bending die 
G, substantially in the manner and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. In machinery for forming wrought-metal 
lock-casings, the combination, with the punch 
iug-dies B and F and shearing and bending 
dies D and (i, of the adjustable stop-plate E, 
the parts constructed and relatively arranged 
in the manner and for the purpose specified. 
3. In machinery for forming wrought-metal 
lock-casings, the combination of the female 
die A', containing the recessed former-block 
C', and the male die E', carrying the shearing 
and bending cap d', the parts constructed and 
relatively arranged substantially in the main 
ner and for the purpose specified. 
Witness our hands this 2d day of January, 
A. I). 1880. 
55 
FREDERICK A. BROOKS. 
HORATIO WILLARD. 
P 
Witnesses: 
PATRICK H. GUNCKEL, 
CHAS.M. PECK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231310.txt	G. O, HALL. 
Tenoning Ma Chines. 
No. 231,310. 
Patented Aug. 17, 1880. 
A//7M/ASSAS 
% -2%. 
6-6zes/ 
T/W/a/v72 A. 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-THOGRAPHER, WAShingtoN, 30, C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GOREIAM. O. HALL OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
TENONING - MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 231,310, dated August 17, 1880, 
Application filed March 8, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, GOREAM. O. HALL of 
the city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Tenoning-Machines, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification. 
My improvement relates to the device for 
giving to the head-stocks the required vertical 
adjustments; and it consists in supporting the 
head-stocks in their vertical position by a ver 
tical screw, each head-stock being supported 
on a screw-threaded collar or nut on the screw, 
said collar forming the hub of a bevel-wheel 
and turning in an ear or lug of the head-stock 
or adjustable plate in which the cutter-shaft 
has bearing. The construction is such that 
the head-stocks are raised and lowered simul 
taneously by the turning of the vertical sup 
porting-screw, and each of the head-stocks has 
independent vertical adjustment by the turn 
ing of its supporting-laut upon the screw. The 
bevel-wheel nut is turned by a bevel-wheel on 
a spindle to whose end a winch is placed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion. Fig. 2 is a section at a. a, Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a rear elevation. 
A is the frame, having vertical guides BB, 
on which the plates or head-stocks C C are ad 
justable vertically. 
The head-stocks are fitted 
to the angular guides B with lips or ribs c c, 
which engage the rear sides of the guides. 
The head-stocks have upon their front side 
ears DD, giving journal-bearing to the cutter 
shafts E. E. 
I make no claim to novelty in the cutter 
shafts Eor rotary cutter-heads F. The latter are 
shown with side cutters, f, and cross-cuttersf'. 
On the rear sides of the head-stocks C C' 
are fixed ears G. G., in which turn nuts EI H, 
having bearing on top of the ear G by a bevel 
cog wheel, I, and upon the bottom of the ear 
by a collar, J. The nuts H H screw upon a 
vertical screw, K, which thus acts to support 
the head-stocks and hold them in position. 
Thus it will be seen that by turning the screw 
K the head-stocks C C are either raised or 
lowered simultaneously and equally. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
As the means for giving independent adjust 
ment to the two head-stocks, Iturn the nut H, 
connected with said head-stocks, upon the screw 
K. This is done by the rotation of a bevel 
wheel L., engaging the bevel-wheel I of the nut, 
and attached to the end of the spindle M, turn 
ing in a socket N of the head-stock. These 
spindles, like the screw K, may be turned by 
hand-wheels, hand-cranks, or any suitable 
means. I have shown them fitted to receive 
a crank-key or winch upon their angular ends 
for this purpose. 
The stuff to be tenoned may be held in any 
suitable carriage and fed between the cutter 
heads F. A tenon of any required thickness 
may be formed upon it, or a rabbet-groove may 
be formed along the edge of a board or piece 
of timber upon the upper or under side, or 
both. 
O O are the driving-belt pulleys upon the 
cutter-shafts. These are usually driven by a 
single belt with an idler to keep it taut; but 
Separate belts may be used. 
I do not confine myself to the bevel-gears I 
L as a means of turning the supporting-nuts H. 
The same movement might be accomplished 
by other means, I will instance a screw-wheel 
upon the nut I and a gear-screw or worm upon 
the shaft M. I prefer the bevel-gear, as giving 
more speedy adjustment. 
claim as my invention 
1. The combination of vertical adjusting 
screw K, ears or bearings G, secured to the 
head-stocks C C, and the nuts H, having bear 
ing upon said ears and working upon the ver. 
tical screw, as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of screw K, turning in 
bearings in the frame, for imparting vertical 
adjustment to the head-stocks C C, nuts H, 
having bearings in ears G upon said head 
stocks, ald pinions L, or equivalent means, 
carried by the head-stocks, for operating the 
supporting-nuts H, substantially as described. 
GOREAM. O. EIALL, 
Witnesses: 
SAML KNIGHT, 
GEO. H. KNIGHT. 
55 
75 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231410.txt	r 
W. H. De LOACH, 
Horse POWer. 
No. 231,41O. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1880. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM B. DE LOACE, OF. KIRBY SPRINGS, GEORGIA. 
HORSE POWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 231,410, dated August 24, 1880. 
Application filed February 19, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM HENDERSON . 
DE LOACH, of Kirby Springs, in the county of 
Bryan, in the State of Georgia, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Horse 
Powers, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, illustrating the 
same and forming part hereof. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple, strong, and readily - portable horse 
power adapted to the requirements of farmers 
in thrashing their crops. 
The invention consists in a horse-power hav. 
ing a folding driving-wheel mounted upon a 
frame which is adapted to be attached to the 
running-gear, axles, or pillow-blocks of ordi 
nary falln-Wagons, so as to permit of the ready 
transportation of the mechanism from place to 
place, the wheel being made with hinged seg 
ments adapted to fold back upon the body of 
the wheel, so as to contract it between the 
wagon-wheels, thereby reducing its bulk to ad 
mit of its being drawn along narrow Woods 
bound roads. 
In the above-referred-to drawings, Figure 1 
is a side elevation of my horse-power mounted, 
and Fig. 2 is a top-plan view, the wheel being 
shown folded by clotted lines. 
A represents a frame, composed of longi. 
tudinal stringers a, having notches b therein, 
and connected by cross-pieces c. From the 
stringers a rise posts d, supporting beams e. 
These posts are braced by crossed rods f, to pre 
vent lateral displacement and to strengthen 
the frame. 
Centrally of the beams, and mortised there 
in, are cross-timbers g h, the former being 
fixed and the latter adjustable, and held at de 
sired adjustment by Wedges or cams i. Cen 
trally of these timbers semicircular recesses 
are made, and in these recesses and between 
the timbers g h is placed the shaft k of the 
driving-wheel l. This shaft has a step-bear 
ing in or is pivoted upon a cross-piece, In, mor 
tised in the stringers a, Said shaft is held 
in its bearing between the timbers g h with 
the proper tension by the adjustment of the 
timber h through the wedges or cams i. 
65 
The rim in of the wheel may be made in So 
skeleton form to insure lightness, its strength 
being in nowise thereby diminished. The said 
rim has two leaves or segments, o p, hinged, 
as at rst, at the top of the body of the wheel, 
So as to permit such segments to be turned up 55 
and back and folded upon the wheel, as indi 
cated in dotted lines, Fig. 2, so that when the 
mechanism is mounted upon the running-gear 
of a Wagon, as illustrated in the drawings, the 
wheel may be folded within the compass of 6o 
the sides of the same, and so permit travel 
along roads closely bound by Woods and ren 
der the load less top-heavy. The periphery of 
this driving-wheel l is adapted to receive any 
suitable belt, chain, or rope for transmitting 
motion to the thrashing or other machine, and 
when said belt, chain, or rope is in Working 
position its tension upon the wheel will be suf 
ficient to hold the folding parts thereof hori 
zontally extended and prevent their displace 
ment. 
The lever or pole u, by which the power is 
to be driven, is inserted in a socket in the hub 
0 of the wheel. Any number of levers may be 
employed. 
This horse-power is designed to be moved 
from farm to farm by thrashing parties; and 
to this end its stringers are provided with the 
notches b, whereby it is adapted to be easily 
applied to the head or pillow blocks or axles 
of ordinary wagons, and hence no special car 
riage of peculiar construction and excessive 
cost is required. 
During transportation the levers, belting, 
gearing, &c., may be stowed upon the frame 
beneath the wheel. 
This horse-power may be made of Wood, and 
is strong and cheap, and a desideratum long 
looked for in farming neighborhoods removed 
from thickly-settled localities. 
75 
What I claim is 
1. A driving-wheel for horse-powers pro 
vided with hinged leaves or segments arranged 
to be folded back upon the body of the wheel, 
substantially as described, for the purpose 
specified. 
2. The combination of transversely-connect 
ed notched stringers a, brace-posts d thereon, 
9o 
95 
EO 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
2 
231.410 
To the above specification of my invention I 
beams e, secured to said posts, and support 
ing a fixed piece, g, and an adjustable mem- have signed my name this 4th day of August, 
ber, l, and the cross-piece mon, the stringers, A. D. 1879. 
with the vertical shaft k and folding driving 
5 wheell, constructed and arranged to form a 
portable horse-power adapted for use sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
A. H. SMITH, 
W. W. ALLIFF. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. DE LOACH, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231510.txt	J. M., UNDERWOOD, 
Whip Socket. 
No. 231,51O. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1880. 
 
Fig. 2. 
Az?aesses: 
O S. -- 24 
/eavendor: 
7, 4%zac 
ve. Allaz, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN M. UNDERWOOD, OF NEWARK, N.J., ASSIGNOR TO ANSON SEARLS, 
WHIPSOCKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 231,510, dated August 24, 1880. 
Application filed January 19, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN M. UNDERWOOD, 
of Newark, State of New Jersey, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Whip-Sock 
ets, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of the same, of which 
Figure 1 is a face view of a rubber ring con 
taining my improvement. Figs. 2 and 3 are 
modifications of the same. Fig. 4 is an edge 
view of said ring, and Fig. 5 is a top end view 
of a whip-socket provided with the said ring 
or disk. 
My invention relates to the flexible elastic 
ring used in the upper end of whip-sockets for 
holding the whip-stock upright in the socket. 
A flexible elastic ring or disk, placed in an 
annular recess just Within the upper open end 
of whip-sockets, for the purpose of preventing 
the whip-stock from wabbling in the socket 
and from being rubbed or chafed against the 
body of the socket, is a common device; but a 
difficulty has been experienced in retaining 
this elastic ring in place in the socket and the 
ring yet be adapted to receive and hold whip 
stocks of various sizes. When the ring is 
made thick enough to adequately serve its 
purpose of holding the whip - stock and the 
central opening is of suitable size to hold the 
stocks of small diameter, the ring is liable to 
be pushed or pulled out of its groove or seat 
in the socket by the insertion of a stock of 
larger diameter. To obviate this difficulty I 
form a plane ring or perforated disk of rubber, 
or its equivalent, of suitable external diame 
ter to fit into the common annular groove in 
the mouth of the socket, and of sufficient thick 
ness for the purpose, preferably about an eighth 
of an inch, the central perforation or opening 
being of suitable size to grasp and fit around 
a whip-stock, preferably about one-half inch; 
then I cut away a portion of the rubber be 
tween the central opening and the outer edge 
or periphery, making a number of perforations 
of smaller size than the central opening. 
There should be left between these smaller 
openings and the said periphery sufficient 
breadth of rubber to substantially fill the 
groove in the socket, and also some portion 
of the rubber between these openings and the 
central opening, so that the whip-stock will be 
grasped by a continuous ring of rubber of the 
full thickness of the body of the disk, and a 
continuous and unbroken outer ring of said 
rubber will occupy the groove in the socket, 
while between the said outer and inner un 
broken portions the rubber, by having por 
tions cut away, will be so yielding and flex 
ible that, practically, whip-stocks of varying 
sizes may be readily introduced into or with 
drawn from the ring without liability to dis 
place the ring from its seat in the socket. 
In the drawings, A represents the disk, a 
the central opening, and c the openings where 
the rubber is cut away between the outer un 
broken portion, d, and the inner unbroken por 
tion, e, of the body of the disk. 
B represents the upper end of a whip-stock 
with the said disk in place in an annular 
groove in said socket. 
The openings c may be circular, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, the form shown in Fig. 3, or any 
other suitable form, as preferred. 
United States Letters Patent No. 221,482 
were granted to me November 11, 1879, for 
improvement in whip-sockets, in which is de 
scribed and claimed a rubber ring having noll 
contiguous projections on its inner edge. I re 
gard my present invention as an improvement 
upon the invention covered by that patent, my 
present ring having, in fact, the said non-con 
tiguous projections united together at their in 
ner ends by an elastic ring. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The perforated flexible elastic disk A, adapt 
ed for use in a whip-socket, and composed of 
the outer unbroken ring, d, and the inner un 
broken ring, e, with portions of the body of 
the disk cut away by openings c between the 
said outer and inner rings, as and for the pur 
pose described. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN M, UNDERWOOD. 
R. GRAY, Jr., 
L. K. GRAY. 
25 
45 
55 
75 
85 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231610.txt	D. R. PROCTOR, 
Spark. Arrester, 
No. 231,610. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1880. 
- aniz7 
. 
. 
. 
7/ 
DO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
El 
--- val 2 S. SE 
Eeererect 
- PTT T. 
sk, GOS) 
6s 
 
- 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
2 s 
a t252 
arS22 
S. Aa 
712rzesses 
I 
22%% 
of 
 
-2 
HR 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID R, PROCTOR, OF GLOUCESTER, ASSIGNOR TO EDWIN WALDEN, 
OF LYNN, TRUSTEE OF THE SUCCESS SPARK ARRESTER COMPANY., 
OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
SPARK-AR RESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 231,610, dated August 24, 1880. 
Application filed March 22, 1879. 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID R. PROCTOR, of 
Gloucester, in the county of Essex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain Im 
provements in Spark-Arresters, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of spark 
arresters in which sparks and cinders are con 
ducted from the Smoke-stack to a receiver in 
the rear. 
The object of my invention is to provide for 
locomotive-engines an apparatus which shall 
effectually arrest and collect the sparks, cin 
ders, and dust without obstructing the draft. 
of the engine. It also has for its object to 
provide means whereby the nettings of loco 
motive smoke-stacks may be easily removed 
and turned or rotated; also, to prevent the 
Smoke and exhaust steam or vapor escaping 
from a locomotive from trailing down into the 
space between the engine and the succeeding 
car; and, finally, to provide convenient means 
for removing the collected sparks, cinders, &c., 
from their place of deposit. 
To these ends my invention, consists in the 
improvements which I will now proceed to 
describe and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1. represents 
a side view of a locomotive provided with my 
invention. Fig.2 represents a top view of the 
apparatus embodying my invention, none of 
the engine being shown excepting the top of 
the cab and stack. Fig. 3 represents a sec 
tion on line a ac, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 represents a 
sectional perspective view of a portion of the 
netting of a smoke-stack and its holder. Fig. 
5 represents a rear view of the curved top or 
mouth of the smoke-stack. Figs. 6 and 7 rep 
sent, respectively, side and top views of the 
chamber with a deflector. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
In the drawings, A represents the body of 
the smoke-stack, which is of ordinary con 
B represents a curved end or mouth, which 
struction. 
- 
is applied to the stack, and is formed to de 
flect the current passing through the stack to 
a horizontal direction, as indicated. The end 
or mouth B is cylindrical where it joins the 
body of the stack, and is flattened or elongated 
to an oval shape at its upper end, as shown 
in Figs. 3 and 5. 
C represents a chamber about eight inches 
deep, which constitutes an extension of the 
stack B, and is arranged to receive the cur 
rent passing from the top B. The chamber 
extends back a sufficient distance to contain a 
netted opening, D, of considerable size-say 
three feet across-(which opening is entirely in 
the rear of the end or mouth,) and to form an 
imperforate hood or guard, c, behind the open 
ing, which hood or guard is a portion of the 
top of the chamber. The rear end of the cham 
ber C is preferably semicircular or rounded. 
E E represent eduction-pipes, each about 
four inches in diameter, leading back Wardly 
from the chamber C. These pipes communi 
cate with the chamber through a flaring mouth, 
E", under the hood or guard c, which mouth 
is practically a continuation of the semicircu 
lar end of the chamber. 
If desired, a single pipe of larger area may 
be employed instead of two pipes; but I pre 
fer to use two, in order that they may pass on 
each side of the whistle of the locomotive. 
F represents a receiver located on the roof 
of the cab. This receiver is preferably about 
eight inches deep, and of a length somewhat 
less than that of the cab. Its forward end is 
preferably pointed, as shown in Fig. 2. The 
pipesEE enter the forward end of the receiver. 
G represents a netted opening in the for 
ward portion of the receiver, which opening 
is preferably about two-thirds of the area of 
the opening D in the chamber. The interior 
of the receiver back of the opening G forms a 
cavern or receptacle which is practically tight, 
or, in other words, closed, so that no exit or 
opening of any considerable size is afforded 
behind the opening G, excepting one or more 
discharge-openings, H, which are closed, ex 
cepting when the contents of the receiver are 
75 
85 
Io 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
2360 
IO 
25 
... 
35 
40 
45 
55 
5 ceiver to the tender of the locomotive. 
90 
75 
8o 
other movable fastenings, whereby the ring 
being removed. The discharge-openings Hare 
r may be secured and released. This arrange. 
preferably short tubes orfues extending down 
ment enables the netting to be easily removed 
wardly from the rear portion of the receiver, 
for repairs, renewal, or adjustment withotiti 
and adapted to discharge matter from the re 
disturbing the stack. 
I prefer to provide the receiver with one of 
The operation of this apparatus is as follows: 
more rakes or hoes, h, having handles project 
The upward current of gases, steam, sparks, 
ing through holesin the end of the receiver, so 
&c., passing through the stack is deflected by 
that they can be operated by a person standing 
the mouth and caused to enter the chamber C 
on the tender of the engine to draw the accumu 
in a horizontal direction, the cinders, sparks, 
lated matter in the receiver to the discharge 
and dust being driven by the force of the ex 
pipe or pipes H. The holes through which 
haust directly across the chamber to the 
the handles pass should be provided with suit 
rounded rear end and into the mouth E'. The 
sides and bottom of the chamber converge or able packings, movable or otherwise, to pre 
vent steam, gases, &c., from escaping when 
curve gradually to the mouth E', as shown in 
the engine is in operation. 
Figs, 2 and 3, so that the current meets no 
d represents a deflector or flange on the roof 
salient angles nor opposing surfaces. The 
of the cab, extending, preferably, from the 
bottom of the chamber is provided with an ill 
front end of the same backwardly and behind 85 
cline, c', which is flush with the bottom of the 
the receiver. This deflector is inclined back 
mouth E', and the sides of the chamber join 
wardly at its rear portion, and is considerably 
the sides of the mouth with a gentle curve. 
higher than the receiver. Its sides are prefer 
The current, as it enters the rounded end of 
ably curved to join the inclined back, and the 
the chamber, and the contracted mouth E is 
curved portions are preferably curved inwardly 
divided, the most of the lighter material (the 
gases, smoke, &c.) escaping upwardly through 
at their upper edges, as shown at did. This 
device prevents the Smoke and steam escap 
the opening D, while the heavier cinders and 
ing from the openings D G from being drawn 
coal-dust, with the residue of the smoke, gases, 
downwardly behind the cab by atmospheric 
and steam, are forced onward horizontally 
pressure, the curved inclined back of the de- 95 
through the pipes E E to the receiver F, into 
flector forming a chute or guide, which directs 
which they are projected with sufficient force 
the steam, smoke, &c., in Wardly and upwardly, 
to accumulate the sparks, cinders, and dust 
as shown by the arrows in Figs. 1 and 2, 
in a solid mass at the rear end or cavern of 
If desired, an upwardly-curved deflector, d, 
said receiver. The gases, steam, and smoke 
passing through the pipes E. escape through 
may be placed on the chamber C, back of the 
opening D, as shown in Figs. 6 and 7, to pre 
the opening G, which is located so near the 
vent the smoke, steam, &c., from trailing down 
front end of the receiver that the escaping 
steam and gases cannot agitate and carry 
into the space between the chamber and the 
with them the cinders, sparks, and dust col 
cab. 
lected at the rear portion or cavern of the re 
ceiver. In fact, the force of the gases en 
tering the receiver is not sufficient to agitate 
the sparks, cinders, and dust after they are 
deposited therein, the larger proportion of the 
gases and steam escaping through the opening 
D of the chamber, so that the remaining 
portion is just sufficient to facilitate the pas 
Sage of the sparks, cinders, and dust and de 
posit them in the rear end of the receiver, 
as described. 
I have found by a practical test of several 
months on a locomotive that the described ap 
paratus separates not only the sparks and 
larger cinders, but also a very large propor 
tion of dust and minute cinders and solid 
particles from the Smoke and gases, so that 
there is no annoyance to passengers on the 
train from the dust or any of the usual ema 
nations from the locomotive, excepting the 
smoke, which is so purified that it is hardly 
The netting n, that covers the opening D, is 
preferably riveted or clamped to a ring, r, which 
rests in a rabbeted ring or seat, ', attached 
in any suitable Way to the chamber C. The 
ring r is detachable from the ring r", and the 
latter is provided with pivoted buttons b, or 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a locomotive spark-arresting appara 
tus, the combination, with a smoke-stack and 
a pipe or pipes, E, extending backwardly 
therefrom, of a receiver arranged to receive 
in its forward end the pipe or pipes E, pro 
vided with a netted opening, G, for the escape 
of steam, smoke, and gases, in the forward 
portion of its top, and extended backwardly 
from such opening to form a cavern or recep 
tacle for cinders, dust, &c., beyond the agi 
tating influence of the gases, steam, and 
smoke escaping through the opening G, as 
set forth. 
2. The receiver F, located on the roof of 
the cab and provided With a discharge-open I2O 
ing, H, and a hoe, h, having a handle pro 
jecting through a hole in the rear wall of the 
receiver and adapted to be moved by said 
handle to draw the accumulated cinders, &c., 
in the receptacle into the discharge-opening I 25 
H, as set forth. 
3. As a means for preventing the smoke of 
a locomotive from trailing downwardly behind 
the cab, a smoke guide or deflector on the roof 
of the cab, formed as shown, to give an upward 13o 
direction to smoke passing over the roof, 
4. In a Smoke-stack, a metallic ring pro 
IIS 
CO 
IOS 
IO 
6o perceptible. 
23610 
3 
vided with a netting, combined with a rab- name to this specification, in the presence of 
beted holder or seat adapted to receive the two subscribing witnesses, this 19th day of Io 
ring, and provided with buttons or movable March, 1879. 
fastenings adapted to hold the ring in place, 
5 and also adapted to be displaced to permit the 
ring to be turned on its seat or removed there- 
from, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
C. F. BROWN, 
GEO. W. PIERCE. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID R, PROCTOR, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231710.txt	(Model.) 
- 
A. L. GOOD ENOW & W. J. OWENS, 
. . . 
No. 231,710. 
Grate, 
Patented Aug. 31, 1880. 
FIGl 
Witgesses 
WA. Wad-zaaz, 
$3-, 4-pz- 
flyeltor: 
(AA-Uk S.soccuuour. 
Nueck (owevis. 
... 
- 
- 
t'. 
N. PETERs, PHoro-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT L. GOODENOW AND WILLIAM J. OWENS, OF UTICA, NEW YORK. 
GRATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 231,710, dated August 31, 1880. 
Application filed July 16, 1880. (Model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ALBERT L. GOODE 
NOW and WILLIAM J. OWENs, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Utica, in the county 
of Oneida and State of New York, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Grates; and We do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
or figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Similar letters indicate like parts. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
the class of rotary grates and their connections 
for stoves and furnaces; and it consists in cer. 
taill details and principles of construction, 
hereinafter more fully described and shown. 
Its object is to provide a grate that is easily 
; 
operated, and will effectually and quickly clear 
the fire of ashes and break up and remove all 
clinkers, slag, and cinders. 
In the drawings, Figure I is a plan view of 
our grate and its connections. Fig.2 is a side 
elevation. Fig. 3 is the frame or rest upon 
Which the grate is supported and oscillated. 
Fig. 4 is a section, in detail, of the grate and 
grate-rest, representing the anti-friction roller 
beneath the grate and its bearings, also the 
annular groove or trackin the rim of the grate 
COrresponding to the periphery of the roller. 
Fig. 5 represents one of the horizontal grate 
bars through the center of the grate. Fig. 6 
is a Section through the linea at of Fig. 2, rep 
resenting the ash-sifter, its rollers o', and their 
bearings et d'. 
The grate A is circular in form, and is pro 
vided with one or more central horizontal bars, 
Q, the ends of which are pivoted in opposite 
sides of the rim of the grate, whereby they are 
capable of an independent rocking motion. 
Depending from the front end of these bars 
are forked arms R, which embrace concentric 
radial studs S, projecting from the inner side 
of the grate-ring. 
The grate-frame is hinged or pivoted to the 
rear of the furnace in the usual manner, and a 
hook or latch, d, is provided in front for hold 
ing it in place. At suitable intervals slots N 
s 
are provided for the rollers O. The edges of 
these slots, which form the track or bearings 
for the rollers, are beveled or A-shaped, in 
Order that they may readily clear of ashes, and 
Corresponding A-shaped grooves are provided 
in the arbors of the rollers to enable them to 
fit thereon. The grate rests upon these rollers, 
their periphery occupying the annular groove 
Pin its outer rim. It is rendered thereby ca 
pable of being freely and easily rotated on its 
Vertical axis without regard to... the superin 
Cumbent weight upon it, while its central hori 
Zontal bars, Q, by means of the depending 
forked arms R, embracing the radial studs S, 
are caused to rock in unison, and by means of 
projecting teeth or studs on their surface serve 
to grind and pulverize all cinders, slag, and 
clinkers, which ordinarily find their way to the 
Center of the grate and serve to block up and 
(leaden the fire. 
C is the shaker--a short lever fulcrumed in 
front of the grate, its end projecting through 
its rim between the bars Q. 
The ash-sifter B is located below the grate 
aud a little in front of it, and consists of a per 
forated plate resting upon anti-friction rollers 
0', similar to those already described, upon 
Which it has a free horizontal motion, and 
Seryes to separate the finer particles of coal 
Which escape through the grate from the ashes. 
We are aware that grates have been hereto 
fore constructed having horizontally-pivoted 
rotating bars. We are also aware that anti 
friction wheels or rollers have been employed 
in connection with grates and furnaces; but 
We do not claim these, broadly. 
What We claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The circular grate provided with the cen 
tral pivoted rocking bars, Q, having the de 
pending forked arms R, in combination with 
the studs S of the ring or frame, substantially 
as described, and for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination of the recessed grate A, 
the rollers O, mounted in the grate-ring M, 
having the grooved arborse, fitting the conical 
supports d', with the ash-sifter supported on 
similar rollers, substantially as described, and 
for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination of the grate A, grate 
rest M, having the conical bearings d", and the 
25, 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
7 O 
M 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
23,710 
rollers O, with the grooved arborse, substan- is oscillated by means of depending forked 
tially as described, and for the purpose speci- arms embracing fixed radial studs in the grate 
fied. 
ring, for the purpose set forth. 
5 anti-friction rollers o', with grooved arbors in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures I5 
4. The perforated ash-sifter B, mounted on 
e', in combination with the grate and grate- 
rest, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
5. A grate constructed substantially as here- 
Io in described, having central pivoted horizontal 
bars, which are caused to rock when the grate 
ALBERT Lt. GOODENOW, 
WILLIAM J. OWENs. 
Witnesses: 
E. B. HASTINGs, 
WM. R. DENISON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231810.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 231,810. 
J. L. JUDD, 
Pl O W, 
Patented Aug. 31, 188O. 
Azza. 
777esses: 
4%-- - 
2. A 1-d 
Zzz view/ar : 
%al-a -6A4 
%-41% 
 
N. Peters, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, O, C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES L. JUDD, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF OF 
HIS RIGHT TO HARRY WIARD, OF SAME PLACE. 
- 
PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,810, dated August 31, 1880. 
Application filed June 26, 1880. (No model.) 
rest, and along the meeting edges of the point 
(see Fig. 1) and other parts, the under or in 
side is chamfered off at the meeting edge b to 
fit said rib a, as is clearly seen in the figures 
on the drawings, by which the edge at the 
joint is made thin, so as to be readily and ex 
peditiously ground and fitted with a minimum 
amount of labor, while the thin edges, when 
in place, are firmly sustained by the rib at afore 
said, as is clearly illustrated in Fig. 4, which 
also aids to keep the parts steadily in place 
when screwed together. 
Having thus fully described my device, I 
1. In a plow frame or seat, the riba, formed 
on the seat along the line of junction of the 
superimposed parts, as and for the purposes 
specified. 
2. The combination of the ribs a, and chain 
fered edges b in plow-castings, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
claim- 
- 
JAMES 1. JUDI). 
In presence of - 
J. J. GREENOUGH, 
R. A. MCENTEE. 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES L. JUDD, of the 
city of Syracuse, New York, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvement in Form 
ing the Joints of the Point, Mold-Board, Land 
side, &c., of Plows, of which the following is 
a specification. 
It is found in practice that considerable la 
bor is required to grind the meeting edges of 
the several parts at the joints, and especially 
when they consist of chilled or very hard metal 
castings. I remedy this difficulty in the fol 
lowing way, which at the same time serves to 
strengthen and give stability to the union of 
the parts, which is shown and illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 shows the under side of the plow 
point; Fig. 2, the seat of the plow-point on 
standard. Fig. 3 shows the inside of the land 
side and its seat; Fig. 4, a cross-section at 
right angles to a joint, showing the relative 
position of the parts. 
Along the lines of junction of the superim 
posed plates there is a bead or rib, a, project 
ing from the seat on which the plate or plates 
TO 
..IS 
2O. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US231911.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 231,911. 
G. H. HOLLIDAY. 
Shelf for Stove Owens. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 7 
188O. 
27264 ) 
af, 
Irventor 
2464 
32 
G. H. HOLLIDAY. 
Shelf for St0 ve Ovens. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 7, 1880. 
(No Model.) 
No. 231,911. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. HOLLIDAY, OF HANGING ROCK, ASSIGNOR TO LAZARD KAHN, 
OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
SHELF FOR STOVE OVENS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 231,911, dated September 7, 1880. 
Application filed April 5, 1880. (No model.) 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE EI. HoLLIDAY, 
of Hanging Rock, Lawrence county, Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
5 provements in Shelves or Slides for Stove 
Ovens, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to cooking stoves and 
ranges, either large or small, in which ovens 
Io are used for baking purposes; and its object 
is to provide a ready and convenient means of 
placing into and withdrawing from the oven 
articles to be baked without the necessity of 
handling the same, and thereby obviating the 
I5 discomfort and the liability of burning some 
portion of the person of the cook attendant 
upon the common mode of directly handling 
the utensils while being introduced into or 
Withdrawn from the oven, or inspecting the 
2O same While in the oven and during the process 
of baking. 
One feature of my invention relates to the 
Combination of a pivot-pin with an oven-shelf 
and the stove; and it consists, in general, in a 
novel Construction of the pivot-pin and that 
portion of the stove which receives the pin, 
whereby the shelf may, when desired, be quick. 
ly attached to or detached from the stove, and 
yet, When attached, will allow the shelf to be 
30 slid in and out of the oven, and at the same 
time prevent the shelf from being upset. 
Another feature of my invention consists in 
a device whereby the door may be connected 
or disconnected from the shelf at pleasure, and 
35 the operator thereby be enabled to operate at 
Will the shelf, either by the door or independ 
ently thereof. 
Another advantage of this feature of my in 
Vention is that the shelf can be left undis 
4o turbed in the oven while the oven-door is 
opened or shut. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
View of one side of an ordinary cooking-stove, 
the Oven-door of which is shown partly open, 
45 and the shelf in position, partly withdrawn 
from the oven. Fig. 2 represents the pivot. 
pin of the shelf and the opening in the bottom 
of the oven for its reception. Fig. 3 repre 
sents an adjustable catch, which is attached to 
So the oven-door, by which the shelfis withdrawn 
from the oven. Fig. 4 represents one side of 
a stove, showing the oven, the bottom plate 
of which is provided with an opening for re 
ception of the pivot-pin which is attached to 
the shelf. 
A is the oven of a stove, and B the oven 
door. C is a shelf embodying the principal 
features of my invention. This shelf is pro 
vided with numerous openings a, to permit the 
heat to pass through without obstruction to 
the article being baked. The shelf is provided 
at b with a pivot-pin, by which said plate is 
connected with the bottom plate of the oven. 
Some suitable device is preferably employed 
to prevent, when the shelf is in position, the 
pin from being withdrawn from the hole in 
which it is to turn. For this purpose, in the 
present instance, this pivot-pin is made L 
shaped, as shown in Fig. 2, so that when the 
pin has been placed in the hole c in the bot 
tom plate, D, of the oven, the point b' of the 
pin fits under the projecting edge of the hole, 
thus holding the shelf in position as regards 
the bottom plate of the oven, and not allowing 
it to be lifted from the oven without first ele 
vating its outer edge. This opening or hole c 
is located in the oven-bottom and near the rear 
corner of the latter, directly beneath that cor 
ner of the stove-shelf which in Fig. 1 is marked 
m. Beneath the hole c, and connected to the 
under side of the bottom oven-plate, is a cup 
or pocket, f, which, catching any liquids, as 
gravies, &c., which may happen to reach the 
oven-bottom and run through hole c, prevents 
the same from running down onto the floor or 
platform on which the stove stands. This 
shelf C is provided with the slots d, in which 
the point of the catch d moves when the shelf 
is being withdrawn from or returned to the oven 
by the opening or shutting of the door. I 
preferably employ two of these slots d, situ 
ated at opposite corners of the shelf, as shown 
in Fig. 1, thus enabling me to use the shelf at 
either side of the oven. I also provide a con 
tinuous ridge on the edge of the shelf, as ate, 
or studs, as ate", the purpose of either of which 
is to prevent the shelf from slipping from un 
der the article being baked, and thus leaving 
it in the oven when the shelf is withdrawn. 
The operation of my invention is very sim- Ioo 
55 . 
75 
85 
95 
2 
2391. 
ple, and will be readily understood from the 
foregoing description, which operation is as 
follows: The pivot-pin b being placed in the 
hole c in the bottom plate of the oven the 
shelf or slide C is pushed into the oven, and 
the door closed. If it is now desired to With 
draw the shelf C from the oven, the catch dy 
is turned, by means of a handle or knob, d, 
on the outside of the door, so that its point 
rises into the slot d in the side of the shelf, as 
shown in Fig. 1, when, the door being opened, 
the shelf is withdrawn from the oven by being 
turned on the pivot-pin. When the shelf is 
thus drawn out one corner rests on the catch 
d", and the side opposite this corner rests on 
the front edge of the bottom oven-plate, thus 
having a firm support to permit the operator 
to place any article to be baked on said shelf 
preparatory to placing in the oven. . The arti 
cle to be baked being placed on the shelf, the 
door is closed, and with it the shelf and con 
tents are pushed into the oven. 
When it is desired to look into the oven with 
out withdrawing the shelf it can be done by 
turning the catch d so that its point is dis 
engaged from the slot d, when the door can be 
opened without disturbing the shelf. 
While I prefer the device herein described 
for withdrawing the shelf, some other device 
may be used, in connection with the door, to 
accomplish this purpose, and still fall within 
the scope of my invention. 
The several features of my invention are, in 
dependently, of value and use. 
What I claim as new and of my invention, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A sliding oven-shelf provided with pivot 
pin b, in combination with the bottom oven 
plate of a stove provided with hole c and 
pocket.f, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. A sliding oven-slel? provided with pivot 
pinb, having point l' projecting at an angle to 
the length of said pin b, in combination with 
the oven-bottom provided with opening c. 
3. A sliding oven-shelf provided with pivot 
pin b, having point b projecting at an angle 
55 
6. A sliding oven-shelf provided with slot 6o 
to the length of said pin b, in combination 
with the bottom oven-plate of a stove pro 
vided with hole c and pocket f, substantially 5o 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. A sliding stove-shelf provided with slot 
d, in combination with latch d and the oven 
door, substantially as and for the purposes set 
fortl. 
5. A sliding stove-shelf provided with slot d 
and pivot-pin b, in combination with the latch 
d and the oven-door, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
d, pivot-pin b, and ridge or studs e, in com 
bination with the latcl d and the oven-door, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
7. A sliding oven-shelf provided with slots 
d and ridge or studs e e' and pivot-pin b, in com- 65 
bination with a stove provided with opening c, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
S. A sliding oven-shelf provided with pivot 
pin l and slot d, in combination with oven A, 
provided with opening c, and oven-door pro- 7o 
vided with latch d, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
9. A sliding oven-shelf provided with pivot 
pin b, having point b', arranged in reference to 
pin b substantially as described, and with slot 75 
d, in combination with oven A, provided with 
opening c, and oven-door provided with latch d", 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
10. A sliding oven-shelf provided with pivot 
pin b, having point b', arranged in reference to 8o 
pin b substantially as described, and with slot 
d, in combination with an oven provided with 
opening 0 and cup f, and oven-door provided 
with latch d, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
ll. A sliding stove-shelf provided with slot 
or opening d, in combination with a suitable 
latch for engaging in said slot, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
85 
GEORGE H. HOLLII)AY. 
Witnesses: 
F. U. MARTIN, 
HENRY HENDERSON. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232011.txt	A. DUDGEON. 
Steam Packing, 
No. 232,011. 
A. f. 
Patented Sept. 7, 1880. 
 
  
  
 
 
 
A. 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-LTHogRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER DUDGEON, OF CALEDONIAN ROAD, MIDDLESEX COUNTY, 
GREAT BRITAIN. 
STEAM - PACK NG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent.No. 232,011, dated September 7, 1880. 
Application filed March 12, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDERDUDGEON, 
of Caledonian Road, in the county of Middle 
sex, Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in the Manufacture of Packing for Parts of 
Steam-Engines and for other Uses, of which 
the following is a specification. 
In order to produce an efficient and a durable 
packing for parts of steam and other engines, 
&c., I use asbestus in sheets, formed in a simi 
lar manner to asbestus. paper, and I fix the 
said asbestus sheet in strips of suitable widths 
short distances apart on canvas made of cot 
ton, flax, hemp, or other cloths, so that when 
the canvas is rolled up with a solution of in 
dia - rubber a succession of bags is formed, 
wherein the sheets of asbestus are confined, 
thus preventing waste of asbestus, which can 
not escape into the gland until the outside 
layer of canvas is worn through. Thus the 
successive layers of asbestus in the bags are 
successively brought into contact with the pis 
ton or other l'od or moving part of the machine 
as the packing Wears. 
Packing as described may be steeped in a 
solution of silicate of soda, silicate of potash, 
stannate of soda, or other substances contain 
ing properties to resist the action of great heat, 
or in paraffine or other lubricating substances. 
The core consists of a strip of vulcanized in 
dia-rubber. 
Referring to the accompanying sheet of 
drawings, Figure 1 shows in plan, and Fig. 2 
25 
in section, a piece of canvas, a, onto which is 35 
fastened a core consisting of a strip of vul 
canized india-rubber or of alternate strips b 
b*, also a sheet of asbestus, c. Having fast 
ened the compound core and the asbestus onto 
the canvas, I next coat the surface (shown in 
Fig. 1) with a solution of india-rubber, and I 
then roll the canvas with its superposed as 
bestus around the core, after which the com 
pound body may be pressed into any conven 
ient sectional form. (See Figs. 3, 4, and 7.) 
Figs. 5 and 6 are corresponding views to 
Figs. 1 and 2, showing the mode of making 
the packing with a number of strips, c, of as 
bestus sheet, the process of manufacture being 
the same. 
Figs. 8 and 9 show how the packing is made 
with diagonal strips of asbestus sheet c, and 
Figs. 10 and 11 show the packing made with 
plaited or woven vegetable fibera in lieu of 
canvas. b is the core as before, and c the 55 
Other asbestus sheet. 
What I claim is 
The packing described, having a core of rub 
ber, around which are wound layers of can 
was and asbestus cemented with rubber, as 
herein specified. 
45 
So 
ALEXANDER, DUDGEON. 
Witnesses: 
W. LLOYD WISE, 
H. T. WALKER, 
Patent Agent, London. 
Chandos Chambers, Adelphi, W. C. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232111.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. BROCK. 
Sheet-Metal Can Machinery. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 232, 11. 
Patented Sept. 14, 188O. 
 
N, PETERS, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, washingtgN, D. C. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
W. H. BROCK 
Sheet-Metal Can Machinery, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 232,111. 
Patented Sept. 14, 188O. 
 
 
 
  
 
  
"go (2. 
Draft afts 
e 
2%WSs 
&4S5 
r - SAH 
His 
 
-1. 
- 
; 
: 
:---- 
; 
- - - - - - - 
- - - - - - - - 
e - it. ...; -- if - - - 
; 
-----. 
s 
 
: 
: 
--------- 
N. PETERS, Photo-uTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. BROCK, OF CORONA, ASSIGNOR TO JABEZ. A. BOSTWICK, OF 
NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SHEET METAL - CAN MACHINERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 232,111, dated September 14, 1880. 
Application filed July 19, 1880. 
(No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM H. BROCK, of 
Corona, in the county of Queens and State of 
New York, have invented an Improvement in 
Sheet-Metal-Can Machinery, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This machinery is for closing the folded 
sheet-metal edge of the head and causing it to 
clamp and hold the edges of the can-body. I 
make use of a revolving shaft with a cross 
head and rollers, that actuate internal and ex 
ternal clamping-dies and press them upon the 
folded edges of the head to close them firmly 
upon the ends of the sheet-metal body. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan of said 
machine. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the shaft 
and cross-head and section of the frame. Fig. 
3 is a section in larger size at the line aca. 
Fig. 4 is an end view of one of the outer dies 
and its ways. Fig. 5 is a plan of the clutch. 
Fig. 6 is a plain of the can bottom or head. 
Fig. 7 is a section of a portion of the can. Fig. 
8 is a partial plan, illustrating a modification 
of this machine. Fig. 9 is an end view of one 
of the outer dies, shown in Fig. 8, and Fig. 
10 is a vertical section through the shaft, hubs, 
and clutch-bolt. 
The vertical shaft a is supported in the bed 
a' and a frame-work, b, of any suitable char. 
acter. I have shown the bed in the form of 
a cross and the frame as verticallegs, between 
which is a second cross-frame, b', for the lower 
end of the shaft (t. 
Around the shaft at is a gear-wheel, d, driven 
by suitable power, such as the bevel-pinion e 
and shaft f, and a clutch or coupling device 
is used to connect the wheel d to the shafta, 
or to disconnect it therefrom to stop the ma 
chine. 
I have shown a bolt, i, that is within a mor 
tise in the hub a', and is thrown up into a re 
cess in the hub of the wheel d by a spring, 3, 
and the said bolt is notched in its side, so that 
when the incline at the end of the sliding fork 
g is brought into the path of the bolt said in 
cline will enter the notch of the bolt and force 
it down and unlatch the said bolt and stop the 
shaft. This sliding fork g is under the con 
trol of the attendant through the treadlek and 
spring l. 
From the top of the bed l there are bracket 
pieces l', that rise above the bed and then ex 
tend inwardly and downwardly, as in Fig. 2, 
and support the ring in and the parts carried 
thereby. 
The ring in has upon it fixed ways a for the 
sliding dies 0 o', and there are four pairs of 
dies adapted to operating upon the four round 
ing corners of the can head or bottom. Hence 
the ends of the inner dies, o, will be convex, 
and the inner ends of the outer dies, o', will 
be concave. Each die is allowed a small amount 
of movement, and the springs ' ' serve to open 
the dies and cause them to assume a normal 
position after having been closed. These dies 
are located so that when open they will re 
ceive between them the rounded corners of 
the otherwise square head or bottom of the 
sheet-metal can shown in Fig. 6, and it is to 
be borne in mind that the head or bottom is 
folded all around its edge with a U-shaped 
flange and groove, into which is placed the 
end of the sheet-metal body of the can. These 
parts are made by dies in the manner well 
known to tin-can makers, and the attendant 
places one of the heads stamped up, as afore 
said, upon the dies o o', with the folded rim 
between the dies o and o', and with the lower 
end of the can-body in the U-shaped fold, and 
starts the machine, and the said dies 0 and 
o' are closed in pairs successively by the re 
volving of the aforesaid shaft a. Upon this 
shaft a there is a cross-head, s, with four roll 
ers, t t and t t, upon vertical studs. The 
rollers t t act upon the inner ends of the slides 
o o, and the rollers t t act upon the outer 
ends of the sildes o' o' to force them inwardly. 
These rollers act upon opposite pairs of the 
slides o o', so as to compress the U-shaped 
folds of the metal at opposite corners simul 
taneously, and as the movements are compar 
atively small the ends of the slides against 
which the rollers act only require to be rounded. 
The rollers t t and t t should be adjustable. 
For this purpose the studs or gudgeons for the 
rollers t are upon stocks t, bolted to the cross 
heads, the stocks being slotted for the bolts to 
pass through, and pieces of sheet-tin are intro 
duced at 13, between the inner ends of the 
stocks, so as to hold them apart under the strain 
5 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
90 
95 
OO 
232, T.I. 
The gudgeons 
to which they are subjected. 
for the rollers t t should be slightly eccentric 
to the portions of those gudgeons which enter 
into the cross-head, so that by revolving the 
gudgeon in the cross-head and then clamping 
it securely the rollers may be adjusted with 
the greatest accuracy. 
By this construction the curved corners of 
the can may be closed by the shaft being 
turned one-half of a revolution, but a com 
plete revolution may be used; and I remark 
that the clies may be extended more or less in 
width, so as to act upon portions of the straight 
edges of the head, as seen in Fig. S, where the 
Width of the dies 0 o' is such as to act upon 
half the side of the head, as well as upon 
the curved corners. When the dies are made 
in this manner it will not be necessary to em 
ploy other means for closing the folded edges 
of the head; but when only the rounded cor 
ners are closed, as by the dies shown in Fig. 
1, then the straight portions will have to be 
closed by ordinary tinmens tools. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the pairs of dies o 
o' and their supporting-ways, of the revolving 
shaft a, cross-head s, and rollers t t t t, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
O 
IS 
25 
2. The combination, in a sheet-metal-closing 
machine, of the dies o, having convex surfaces, 3o 
the dies o', having concave surfaces, the ring 
or 'support in for the same, the cross-head s, 
and rollers t t t ti, the shaft a, and actuating 
mechanism, substantially as setforth, whereby 
the dies are closed in pairs at opposite angles, 35 
substantially as specified. 
3. The dies o 0' and the frame or ring an upon 
which they are supported, in combination with 
the brackets l, supporting the ring, the cross 
head, and the rollers that actuate the dies, the 
brackets rising above the path described by 
the rollers, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, in the sheet-metal-clos 
ing machine, of the driving-wheel d, the shaft 
a, the mechanism actuated by the shaft for 
closing the folded seam, the cross-frame l', for 
supporting the lower part of the shaft, the 
sliding coupling-bolt i, and the disconnecting 
fork g and actuating-treadle lic, substantially 
as set forth. 
Signed by me this 14th day of July, A. D. 
SS(). 
45 
SO 
WILLIAM. H. BROCK, 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
CHAS. H. SMITH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232211.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. S CHILLING. 
Reservoir Mucilage Stand, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM J. SCHILLING, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO GEORGE W. 
DAVIDS. 
RESERVO I R M U CI LAGE STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 232,211, dated September 14, 1880. 
Application filed August 11, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM J. SCHILLING, 
a resident of the city, county, and State of 
New York, and a citizen of the United States, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Reservoir Mucilage-Stands, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of ves 
sels or bottles of a special shape and form de 
To signed for use as a receptacle of mucilage and 
as an Ornamelltal article of desk-furniture. 
Such vessels are designated in and by the trade 
as fountain or reservoir mucilage-stands, 
and in their construction is involved the old 
and well-known so-called barometer princi 
ple, the object sought for being to draw grad 
ually a limited supply of mucilage to a par 
ticular point, while the main source of supply 
is contained in a large chamber away from 
2O evaporating influences, and delivered there 
from only as required for use. 
The present invention consists in the pro 
vision of a reservoir containing the main body 
of mucilage, and a delivery mouth or well ar 
25 ranged to receive from the main supply-cham 
ber a limited quantity of mucilage, which is 
drawn therefrom for consumption by the usual 
form of brush. This delivery-well is so ar 
ranged and constructed as to provide a means 
3o of preventing the cork from entering below a 
fixed point. The arresting device also serves 
the additional purpose of assisting the removal 
of the cork, as well as a wipe-off for removing 
the surplus mucilage from the brush when 
5 mucilage is being drawn therefrom for use. 
The bottom of the main reservoir is also so 
formed as to cause all sediment that may be 
deposited from the mucilage to at once move 
forward into the well, from which it is drawn 
4o and consumed. This device insures a clear body 
of mucilage at all times. 
In the drawings, which forman essential part 
of this specification, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
sectional elevation of a fountain mucilage 
45 stand in which my invention is fully embodied. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional front elevation of the same, 
taken on line aa in Fig.1, and Fig. 3 is a side 
view, in section, showing method of removing 
the cork. 
The same letters of reference marked on the 
several figures of the drawings will designate 
corresponding parts, 
SO 
The mucilage-stands heretofore manufac 
tured have been composed of a reservoir or 
chamber carrying the main supply and a de-55 
livery-well, the two being connected together 
by means of a neck, the whole being arranged 
upon an elongated base. Two distinct classes 
of such devices have been produced and are 
now largely in use, one with a large sup- 6o 
ply reservoir or fountain and a delivery-well, 
both, however, being entirely separate and 
distinct from each other, but connected by 
means of a long neck or passage, of small 
diameter, formed in the base of the stand 65 
which supports the reservoir and well, the ob 
ject of this arrangement being to provide a 
very small quantity of mucilage in the well, 
and it is intended that the reservoir shall re 
place the same as used througlu the small con 
necting-passage. This form is in Morgan's 
mucilage-stand, as shown in patent of July 16, 
1867, and it is supposed to retain, by atmos 
phelic pressure, the main supply of mucilage 
in the reservoir, which may be entirely full, 75 
while in the well there is but little, the levels 
found by the fluid being different in Well and 
reservoir. Objections exist to this form, the 
small diameter of the connecting-passage mak 
ing the delivery of the mucilage to the well a 8o 
matter of great difficulty, there being no means 
of admitting air to the reservoir in order to 
equalize the air-pressure, and no fluid can en 
ter the well until the vessel is turned upon its 
side to allow air to enter. This is plainly ob-85 
vious, as well as the fact that the same trouble 
exists when it is desired to fill the reservoir. 
In the second form of vessel a reservoir and 
delivery-well are also used; but they are con 
nected by means of a large neck of the full 9o 
width of the well and nearly as high as the 
reservoir. I have adopted this form as a part 
of my combination, confining the major part 
of my improvement in the construction of the 
delivery-well, and to the base of the reservoir. 95 
A represents the supply chamber or reser 
voir, arranged for receiving and holding the 
main body of mucilage. It is of the form 
and shape as shown in the drawings, and it 
may rise above the top of the delivery-mouth, too 
if so desiredl. 
B is the delivery-well connected with the 
chamber. A by means of the wide deep neck 
a. The bottom of the chamber Ais formedl on 
2 
@$2,2?? 
? ? 
an incline, b, for the purpose of causing any 
sediment deposited from the mucilage to move 
forward into the well B. Centrally in the de 
livery-well B, and projecting upwardly from 
its bottom, a pyramid-shaped stand, d, is formed. 
Its base e is made somewhat smaller in its en 
tire circumference than the bottom of the well, 
for the purpose of permitting the mucilage to 
freely flow about it. 
Its apex f one way is 
carried nearly to a point, (see Fig. 1) but the 
other way it is elongated, as in Fig. 2. 
The 
apex of this stand d forms a stop and seat for 
the cork D, which, when inserted, will rest 
thereupon, as shown in Fig. 1. It is plainly 
apparent that this will effectually prevent the 
| cork from being driven into the Well by acci 
dent or otherwise. 
The mouth of the well B at the base of its 
bell terminates in a recessed shoulder, l, which 
is located about one-eighth of an inch above 
the line of the apexif of the stand d. This ar 
rangement permits the base of the cork D to 
swell below the shoulder h when it is pressed 
down into place, thus effectually preventing 
any leakages. 
When it is desired to remove the cork a gen 
tle pressure of the finger will cause it to rock 
upon its seat on the apex.fof the stand d, loos 
2 ? 
25 
ening it from the grasp of the shoulders h, as 
shown in Fig. 3, when it is easily removed. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a mucilage-stand, the combination of a 
supply chamber or reservoir, a delivering-well, 
and a neck for connecting the two, all being 
arranged upon a common base, such deliver. 
ing-well being provided with a pyramidal or 
cone shaped stand resting vertically in its cen 
ter, and arranged to act as a stop for the cork, 
all substantially as and for the purposes as 
herein shown and set forth. 
2. The combination of the supply-reservoir 
A delivery-well B, provided with shoulders 
h, and cone-shaped central stand, d, and con 
necting-neck (, all arranged and applied as and 
for the purposes substantially as herein shown 
and set forth. 
3. The combination of the delivery-well B, 
cone-shaped central stand, d, shouldersh, and 
cork D, arranged for attachment to the supply 
chambers of a fluid-vessel, all substantially as 
and for the purposes as herein shown and set 
fortilh. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM JOSEPH SCIIILLING, 
A. L. MUNSON, 
E. G. WARD. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232311.txt	(Model.) 
No. 232,311. 
E. T. STARR. 
Dental Engine Hand Piece. 
Patented Sept. 14, 1880. 
----------l 
 
 z 4%, 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
paea))=ae 
-, 
22??22222222ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZT 
??5? 
% 
% 
22 
? 
 g?W A 
IW'VEMTO R 
?? 
By his Attorneys 
-ZZ- ZSZarz, 
N, PETERs, Photo-LithogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED ST ATES P ATEN OFFICE. 
ELI T. STARR, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANLA, ASSIGNOR TO JAMES 
W. WHITE, J. CLARENCE WHITE, AND H. M. LEWIS, OF SAME PLACE, 
TRUSTEES, UNDER THE WILL OF SAML. S. WHITE, DECEASED. 
D ENTA L- EN G IN E HAND - PIECE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 232,311, dated September 14, 1880. 
Application filed July 9, 1880. 
(Model.) 
t 
To all thon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELIT. STARR, a citizen 
of the United States, residing in the city and 
county of Philadelphia, in the State of Penn 
5 sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Dental - Engine Hand 
Pieces, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My present invention relates more especially 
Io to dental-engine hand-pieces of the class in 
which the tool is locked in the Socket of the 
rotary tool-holder or chuck by means of lateral 
ly-yielding clamping jaws or devices. 
The object of lny invention is to produce a 
15 hand-piece superior to those of its class here 
tofore in use; and my said invention consists 
of certain new combinations and Organizations 
of devices pointed out at the close of the speci 
fication. 
2O. The accompanying drawings represent my 
said improvements as embodied in the best way 
now known tO me. 
In said drawings, Figure I is a longitudinal 
central section through the hand-piece casing 
enlarged, a tool being shown as clamped in the 
spiIndle tool-holder Or clhuelk. 
Fig. 2 is a, lon 
gitudinal central section through the front end 
of the hand-piece casihg and through the tool 
holder or chuck in the plane indicated by the 
3o line 22 of Figs. 5 and 6. Fig. 3 is a similar 
section in a plane at right angles to that of 
Fig. 2, as indicated by the line 3 3 in Figs. 4 
and 5. Fig. 4 is a view of the frontend of the 
hand-piece. Fig. 5 is a transverse section 
35 through the hand-piece on the line 55 of Fig. 
3, and Fig. 6 is a similar section on the line 
66 of Fig. 2. 
The views depicted in Figs. 2 to 6, inclusive, 
are on a scale still larger than that of Fig. 1. 
The casing A of the hand-piece preferably 
consists of a sectional one composed of four 
tubular sections, to wit: of a handle-section, 
a, which envelops the tool-holder or chuck B 
and gives it bearing near its front end; of a 
45 section, a?, which is connected with the handle 
section by screw-threads, so as to permit ready 
disconnection of said handle-section for the 
purpose of oiling the bearings, &c., and gives 
bearing to the rear journal of the chuck; of a 
25 
?? 
section, a, connected with the section at by 5o 
Screw-threads, so as to permit of tle separa 
tion of said sections to expose an adjustable 
Collar, b, on Sald chuck; and of a shank-sec 
tion, ct, which is connected with the section 
(t by a SWivel-joint, so as to permit the handle- 55 
Section which is grasped by the hand to direct 
the tool and hold it to its work, (held ordi 
narily Centrally of the fingers and thumb of 
the operator, somewhat in the manner of hold 
ing a pen or pencil,) to be turned or swiveled 
around the Chuck relatively to said shank-sec 
tion, in order to conform to the turning move 
ments of the land of the operator in manipu 
lating the tool. Said shank-section alis con 
nected, in practice, with the outer or free end 
of a flexible sheath or tube extending from the 
usually upright engine-arm, while the butt-end 
of the tool-holder or chuck B is connected with 
the outer or free eld of a flexible torsion-shaft 
enveloped by said sheath or tube, and rotated 
to give a rapid revolving motion to said chuck, 
the said flexible shaft or power-conveyer being 
connected with and driven by a pulley-driven 
spindle or stiff shaft of the engine. 
Inasmuch as neither said flexible driving 
shaft and sheath nor the peculiar construction 
of the engine form part of the present inven 
tion, they are not shown in the drawings, and 
I deem it unnecessary to describe them here 
in detail. 
My patents of September 2 and November 
25, 1879, respectively numbered 219,320 and 
222,093, show what I consider to be good forms 
of flexible driving-shaft, sheath therefor, and 
engine, with which my present improvements 
may be used. 
The tool-holder or chuck, as before stated, 
revolves on journals in bearings-one at front 
in the nose of the handle-section (, of the cas. 
ing and another in rear in the section a? 
thereof-the rotation of said chuck being 
steady and without Wabbling or rattling nove 
1mentS. 
In order to prevent endlwise movement of 
the chuck in the casing it is provided with an 95 
annular enlargement or shoulder, b', which 
abuts against the annular shoulder formed by 
the front end of the section a' of the casing, 
75 
232,3, 
I. ? 
IS 
2. ? 
25 
35 
45 
said shoulder or en largement b constituting 
the thrust-bearing of the chuck, so that when 
a thrust or push cut is being made by the 
tool it will prevent in Ward movement of the 
chuck in the casing, while upon the chuck in 
rear of the casing-section a is secured an annu 
lar ring or collar, b, which is adjusted so as to 
abut against the alnnular shoulder formed by 
the butt-end of said casing-section a', and con 
stitutes the pull-bearing of the chuck, prevent 
ing movement of said chuck outward when a 
pulling or draw cut is being made by the Op 
erating-tool. 
It will be seen that as the collar l) is adjust 
able endwise on the chuck, wear of said chuck 
or of the casing-section a? may be compensated 
or taken up and all looseness or rattling of 
the chuck obviated. This arragement, how 
ever, I do not claim as my invention, as it is 
very old. 
The front end of tle chuck or tool-holder B 
is socketed, as usual, for the reception of the 
driving ends of the shanks of the operating 
tools. The journal at said front end of tle 
chuck consists of a hard-metal annulus or ring, 
C, fitting snugly the front end of the casing, 
said annulus being rigidly connected with the 
chuck, so as to form part thereof, preferably 
by screws c c, which pass from opposite sides 
through the annulus and an interposed bridge 
piece, C, encircling the chuck, into the walls 
of said chuck. (See Figs. 1, 3, and 5.) 
The sides of the interposed bridge-piece C/ 
are reduced or cut away, (see Figs. 2 and 5,) so 
as to form passages or openings for the two 
members DD of the split spring-jawed tool 
lock, which members pass at their front ends 
through the passages formed for them between 
the annulus C and the bridge-piece C, and are 
provided on their outer peripheries each with 
conical or tapering surface d, so that when 
drawn inwardly within the tapering mouth of 
the annulus C said members will be coin 
pressed together upon the tool-shank, which 
is passed through an opening formed centrally 
in said spling-jaws into the socket of the chuck, 
and thereby lock said tool in the chuck-socket 
from end Wise movement. 
The members of the tool-lock, at their rear 
ends, are united into a sleeve, d, surrounding 
the chuck, and this sleeve is provided with an 
annular shoulder or collar, d, between which 
and the annulus C a coiled spring, E, is com 
pressed, the said spring at all times exerting 
its force to draw the locking ends of the men 
bers of the tool-lock into the mouth of the said 
annulus to compress them together. 
In order to move said tool-lock forward so 
as to carry the conical head formed by its mem 
?? 
65 
7 O 
75 
bers out of the mouth of the annulus C, which 
will permit the jaws to expand or spring apart 
and release the tool, I pivot externally upon 
the casing a lever, F, having a projecting end 
or nose, f, which, when the long end of said 
lever is raised, engages the rear side of the 
collard, and as the lever is rocked backward 
upon its pivot carries the locking devices for 
ward against the tension of the Spring E. As 
soon as the lever is returned to its normal po 
sition, as shown in Figs. and 2, the spiral 
spring E immediately retracts the ends of the 
tool-locking members within the annulus C to 
grasp the tool-shank slould such be inserted 
between said members into the chuck-socket. 
an order to lock the tool-shank in the chu.clk 
Socket against independent turning move 
ments, and to drive it positively with the 
chuck, I preferably provide the driving end 
of the round-shanked tool With a flat surface 
adapted to engage a driving lug or surface, g, 
extending into the chuck-socket; and I also 
preferably provide the tool-shank with a coln 
cave annular groove, l, for the reception of 
the locking ends of the members of the split 
springjawed locking device, as shown in Fig. 
2, which prevents more securely end wise move 
lment of the tool in the socket and its with 
drawal while in use. 
I disclaim herein in favor of my application 
filed July 29, 1880, all patentable subject-mat 
ter common to said application and this pres 
el ti Ole. 
85 
90 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the spindle-chuck, the 
annulus constituting the journal at the front 
end thereof, the split Ol' Spring-jawed tool 
locking device, movable endlwise on the chuck 
and surrounded by said annulus, and a spring 
to retract the locking-jaws of the tool-lock I oo 
within said annulus to compress them. 
2. The combination, Substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the casing, the spindle 
chuck, the tool-driving surface in the socket 
of the chuck, the endwise-movable split or Ios 
springjawed tool-lock having a tapering head, 
the Spring acting to compress the jaws of said 
tool-lock within an annulus constituting the 
front journal of the chuck, and the lever to 
mOve said tool-lock forward to release saidl II o 
jaWS alld permit theim to expand or move lat 
erally. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name. 
ELI T. STARR. 
Witnesses: 
JOIIN URIAN, 
J. A. B. WILLIAMS, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232411.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J. PADDEN, 
Car Coupling. 
No. 232,411. 
Patented Sept. 21, 1880. 
 
 No. 
a 
| 
e 
Witnesses 
772 reva zoz 
John J. Pazo/e7. 
Az Z or 77 etys 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN J. PADDEN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIs, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF OF HIS 
RIGHT TO JAMES P. PADDEN, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR COUPLNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 232,411, dated September 21, 1880. 
Application filed April 13, 1880. (No model.) 
- 
5 the following is a specification. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN J. PADDEN, of 
Chicago, Illinois, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Car-Couplers, of which 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
car-coupler which shall be self-operating in the 
coupling of cars, and which shall allow them 
to be uncoupled easily and expeditiously with 
Jo out imposing in either case the necessity of an 
operator going between the cars for the pur 
pose. 
The invention is illustrated in detail in the 
drawings. 
I5 - Figure 1 is a top view. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal vertical section. Fig. 3 is a longitudi 
nal transverse section, and Fig. 4 is an end 
view of the device. 
Sinmilar letters indicate similar parts in the 
different figures. 
A is an ordinary draw-bar, attached in the 
usual manner to a car. B is a draw-head in 
which the link is inserted which couples the 
cars. C is the pin which passes through and 
secures the link. The upper end of this pin 
passes through a cross-piece, and is secured 
therein by a nut. In the outer extremites of 
this cross-piece are also secured the upper ends 
of two guide-rods, cc, which pass downward 
through suitable openings c' c' in the draw 
head, and are secured to a similar cross-piece 
at their lower extremities. The guide-rods cc 
and the cross-pieces thus form a rigid frame, 
which moves up and down freely in the open. 
ings in the dra W-head, the pin C projecting 
downward from the upper cross-piece, and be 
ing a sufficient length to pass through and se 
cure the coupling-link when the frame is per 
mitted to drop to its lowest position, and when 
raised to entirely clear the same, the guiding 
rods being made of the proper length to se 
cure this result. 
D is a movable metal block secured in the 
rear extension of the cavity in the draw-head 
provided for the insertion of the coupling-link 
immediately back of the opening through 
which the pin C drops into the draw-head, 
made so as to play freely backward and for 
ward within a fixed limit, and capable of pro 
Sojecting into the link-cavity, and when so doing 
coming directly under the opening through 
30 
45 
35 
65 
which the pin C drops, the pin C thus resting 
upon and being sustained by it. In the rear 
of this block is a spring, d, which operates 
upon it, pressing it forward so that when not 55 
restrained it projects into the link-cavity, as 
stated. 
Projections upon the sides of the 
block, striking in its movements against shoul 
ders provided in the sides of the chamber, reg 
ulate the distance through which it can move. 6o 
E is a lever pivoted at its fulcrum to the 
lower side of the draw-head and at its ex 
tremity to the lower cross-bar of the frame car 
rying the link-pin, and by which the frame 
and thus the pin can be raised. 
e is a device projecting to thesides of the car 
by which the lever is operated. In the upper 
end of the link-pin is an eye provided for the 
attachment of a chain designed to extend and 
be fastened to the top of the car, by means of 7o 
which a person on the top of the car can raise 
the link-pin and uncouple the cars. 
F is an ordinary device for attaching the 
draw-head to the draw-bar. When ready for 
use the frame with the link-pin is raised, and 
the block D, being pressed forward by the 
spring d, projects into the link-cavity under 
the pin C, supporting it and the frame. When 
the car carrying the draw-head described comes 
in contact with the car to which it is designed 
to be coupled, the link, being in the latter car, 
enters the link-cavity, as denoted by the dotted 
lines in the drawings, and, striking the block 
D, presses it back beyond and from under the 
link-pin, and being thus left without support 
the pin with the frame to which it is attached 
drops by the weight of itself and the frame, 
the guide-rods c 0 sliding through the open 
ings in the draw-head, and the pin thus passes 
through and secures the link. When it is de 
sired to uncouple the car the pin is raised, as 
already stated, by means of the chain extend 
ing to the top of the car or by the lever E. 
This lever is operated by the device e, which 
consists of an iron rod extending across and 
under the car, secured in bearings and bent at 
its extremities and at its middle to form a 
crank at each of these points, that at the mid 
dle impinging upon the end of the lever E, so 
that a person standing at the side of the car, 
by pressing upon the crank-shaped extremity, 
will press down the lever and raise the link-pin. 
9o 
95 
75 
 
IOO 
2 
232,4 
Various devices to accomplish this purpose 
will suggest themselves to the mind of any 
mechanic, this being described as one of many. 
In draw-heads made in accordance with this 
5 specification the link will be so supported that 
it will enter the draw-head of another car with 
out guidance, thus saving the necessity of any 
person going between the cars, and so avoid 
ing danger and accidents which would other 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
To wise frequently occur. 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
In a car-coupling, the combination of the 
guide-rods c c, connected by cross-pieces attop 
and bottom, the link-pin C, the block D, spring 
d, the lever E. running back under the center 
of the car and pivoted thereto at its fulcrum, 
and the rod e, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
JOEIN J. PADDEN, 
In presence of 
T. S. E. DIXON, 
PLINY B. SMITH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232511.txt	(No Mode1.) 
W 
L. KY SER & A. C. REX, 
Toy Money B 0X. 
No. 232, 5 11. 
Patented Sept. 21, 1880. 
NWA i 
| 
| 
|| 
WWWWW 
W 
| 
| 3 
N 
S 
GA-ANNSSYN 
Fiji 
NSSYNI 
 
N 
y 
$ 
Y 
M 
 
TIS 
ITSESS3 
**M 
es t'i 
* 
-7Z 
} 
WM 
AZZAZKAZAKAZAYAAAAYAA 
64Y 
/ 
 
" PETERS PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, wasHINGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS KYSER AND ALFRED C. REX, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANILA. 
TO Y MONEY -- BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 232,511, dated September 21, 1880. 
Application filed June 2, 1880. (No model.) 
O 
15 
2 O 
25 
32 
35 
 
To all choim, it may concern: 
Be it i known that we, LOUIS KYSER andl 
ALFRED C. REX, both of the city and county 
of Philadelphia, and State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented an Improvement in Toy Money 
Boxes, (Case A,) of which the following is a 
specification. 
Our invention relates to toy money-boxes 
in which the insertion of a piece of money 
causes the figure attached to and forming part 
of the toy to move; and our invention con 
sists in so constructing the toy that no money 
can be deposited within the box without first 
causing a figure to move its head and hand, 
and, if desired, its whole body, and act as 
though recording the amount of the deposit 
in a book which lies open before it, and upon 
the passage of the money into the box the fig 
ure resumes its upright position again, and at 
the same time it causes a bell to be struck, 
indicating that it is ready for the next de 
posit. 
It further consists in the construction of 
the toy, and which construction is fully set 
forth in the following specification, shown in 
the accompanying drawings, and referred to 
in the appended claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of our improved toy money-box. Fig. 2 
is a sectional elevation of the same on the line 
8 8 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the 
same. Fig. 4 is a skeleton view of the operat 
ing mechanism. 
A is the box proper, and is composed of es 
sentially two parts, B and C. The front part, 
C, is made open, as at D. The entire box is 
lightened by numerous perforations. The 
parts B and C are secured together by means 
of lugs b b and c c and bolts or rivets a, which 
pass through them. 
The box is closed at the bottom by plate G, 
which is held in place by lugs g or rivets, or 
both. This bottom plate is provided with an 
opening or doorway, which is closed with the 
door H, which is provided with a lock, H'. 
Secured in the open part C of the box is a 
horizontal flat table-plate, E, which is pro 
vided with a slot, K, through which the money 
is deposited, and immediately behind the slotis 
a representation of an open book, I. Attached 
to this plate E is an i arched plate, Lu, which 
Secured to plate E at the rear of the open 6o 
Passing through slots in the book I, resting 7o 
The top of the box is ornamented with the 55 
| entirely closes the opening E of the box, and 
at the same time forms a recess in which the 
figure is secured and operates. 
knob a', and the lower sidles of the same are 
covered inside with a tin plate, O, when the 
perforations are large enough to allow the es 
cape of money. 
book I is the figure of a monkey, F, the head 
Q and arm R of which are movable. One arm, 
R, of this figure is spread upon the book, and 
the other arm - holds a pen, r, and is pivoted 
by a shaft or pin, s, to the body P. The head 65 
Q is secured upon a rod or lever, M, tlhe lower 
end of which is furnished with a weight, m. 
This lever M is secured to the pin s by the 
piece S, or they may be joined directly. 
against the rod or lever M and across the i 
middle of tlhe slot K, is a sliding bar, J, which 
is provided with a small projection, j, or its 
equivalent, to prevent the bar from passing 
through the slots in the book I. 
Secured to the bottom plate, G, or side is a 
bell, N, which is supported upon a standard, m. 
If desired, that part of the box inclosing the 
bell may be divided off by a division-plate, T. 
(Shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2.) 
By making the sides of the box of castings 
having large openings much metal is saved, 
and at the same time a finer effect may be had 
by the secondary thin metallic plate inserted 
behind the perforations and in the interior of 85 
the box. . This thin lining also allows the de 
signer to make the perforations of a shape to 
suit his ideas, and regardless of making them 
too large to prevent the escape of money, as 
the interior plate performs that office. 
Having described the general construction, 
the operation is as follows : A piece of money 
to be deposited is placed against the end of 
bar J, and then pressed toward the figure of 
the monkey IF or book I. until it comes over 95 
the slot K, when it is pushed through the slot 
into the box, as shown in Fig. 2, dotted lines. 
As the bar J moves back it presses against 
the lever M, oscillating it backward into the 
position shown in Figs. 2 and 4. This move- II oo 
ment of bar J and lever M throws the head Q 
forward and down, and at the same time the 
75 
8o 
9o 
 
232, 5 
arm R, holding the pen r, is moved down, and 
the pen touches the book I just as the money 
passes through the slot K. As soon as the 
money is deposited the weight mm. falls by grav 
ity, striking the bell N, and at the same time, 
through the agency of the lever M, the head 
and arm are raised, and the bar Jis pushed out 
again andl prevents the passage of money into 
the box through the slot Kwithout going over 
the same operations once more. 
If desired, the body, head, and arm may be 
made solid, and the whole be oscillated over 
by the bar M in the manner just described; 
but the construction shown and set forth is 
that which we prefer. 
Having now described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Luet 
ters Patent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a toy 
money-box provided with a figure, in combi 
nation with mechanism adapted to be operated 
by the money during its deposition within the 
box in such a manner that the figure is caused 
to undergo the movements indicative of re 
cording the deposit within an open book. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a toy 
money-box provided with a figure, in combi 
nation with mechanism adapted to be operated 
by the money during its deposition within the 
box in such a manner that the figure is caused 
to undergo the movements indicative of record 
ing the deposit and then of ringing a bell. 
3. In a toy money-box, the combination of a 
box, A, provided with a slot, K, sliding bar J, 
figure IF, having an oscillating head, Q, and 
arm R, lever M, weight m, and bell N, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
4. In a toy money-box, the combination of a 
box, A, provided with a slot, K, sliding bar J, 
lever M, arm R, book I, weight m, and bell N, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
5. In a toy money-box, the combination of a 
box, A, provided with a slot, K, sliding bar J, 
lever M, arm R, and book I, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
6. In a toy money-box, the combination of a 
box, A, provided with a slot, K, sliding bar J, 
lever M, weight m, and bell N, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
7. In a toy money-box, the combination of 
the back B, front C, open half-way down, fdat 
table-plate E, provided with a slot, K, and 
arched plate Lu, fitting the opening in front 
part, C, and inner edge of flat plate E, within 
a recess, substantially as described. 
8. In a toy money-box, the perforated sides 
forming the box, in combination with a thin 
metallic plate or its equivalent, to close up the 
perforations in the box to prevent the escape 
of money, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
9. In a toy, the combination of box A, slot 
K, sliding bar J, lever M, and weight m, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony of which invention we here 
unto set our hands. 
LOUIS KYSEER. 
ALFRED C. REX. 
Witnesses : 
R. A. CAVIN, 
JoHN SPARHAWK, Jr. 
45 
55 
65 
LI O 
I 5 
3o 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232611.txt	 
S. H. M0 GIBENY. 
No. 232,611. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SYLVESTER H. McGIBENY, OF WEST ALMOND, ASSIGNORTO HIMSELF, RICH 
ARD H. CEARLES, OF ANGELICA, AND FREDERICK M. SHELDON, OF 
HORNELLSVILLE, NEW YORK, ONE-THIRD TO EACH. 
STOCK-CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 232,611, dated September 28, 1880. 
Applicationfiled February 16, 1880. 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
T all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SYLVESTER H. McGTB 
ENY, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at West Almond, in the county of Allegany 
and State of New York, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Stock 
Cars; and T do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and toletters or figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form apart 
of this specification. 
 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in that class of Cars designed for carrying 
Stock long distances, the object being to af 
ford greater comfort to the stock, thereby de 
livering them in better condition, and at the 
Same time obviate the delay caused by the 
necessity of unloading the cattle for food, 
water, and rest, as is now the common prac 
tice; and the invention consists in the con 
struction and arrangement of the devices for 
Supplying food and water, and in the means 
used for securing the cattle so as to prevent 
them from injuring each other or being in 
jured by the jolts and shocks of the car, as | 
will be hereinafter fully described, and then 
Specifically stated in the claims. 
In thedrawings, Figure 1 is a verticallongi 
tudinal section through the middle of the car. 
Fig. 2 is a transverse section On the line a a, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detailed plan of one of the 
stalls, showing the devices used for retaining 
the head of the animal in place. 
A representsthebody of thecar, constructed 
substantially in the same manner as those in 
common use, but provided with doors B upon 
the sides, hinged at the bottom, so as to fall 
down when opened for the introduction of hay 
orgrain to the feed-boxes C. These boxes are 
provided, at top and bottom, on the side next 
the wall of the car, with guides a. a., which are 
arranged to slide up and down on the vertical 
bars D. 
Resting upon the guides a of the boxes are 
the strap-guides a/, attached to One end of the 
stallor division bars E, theotherend of which 
passes between a pair of the guide-beams, FF, 
which pass from side to side of the car be 
neath the roof, each pair of beams being 
placed at such a. distance apart as will allow 
the stall-bar to slide freely between them, its 
upper end, which projects above the beams, 
being provided with a cross-pin, b, which pre 
vents it from falling out. 
As it is generally desired to place the ani 
mals in Such a manner that their heads and 
tails shall alternate, thus giving them more 
room, and preventing them from fighting by 
keeping theirheads at a distance equal to the 
width of two stalls from each other, it becomes 
necessary to have two stall-bars in close juX 
taposition, yet Sliding in opposite directions. 
This is accomplished by placing three of the 
guide-beams side by side, the middle one doing 
duty as a mate to each of the others. The 
stall-bars and feed-troughs, when the car is 
empty, occupy a position in the top of the car, 
entirely out of the way, the feed-troughs be 
ing supported by the spring-catches c, which 
are secured to the sides of the car; but as the 
car is filled, after each animal is in position 
the feed-troughs and stall-bars are lowered 
until the troughs rest upon the stops d and 
the bars assume an inclined position, as shown 
in Fig. 2 of the drawings, thus forming a par 
tition between the animals, givingeacha sepa 
rate stall and feed-trough. 
In order to secure the animals head in its 
proper position in the stall, the chains e may 
be employed, one end of the chains being at 
tached to the guides a', on the end of the bars 
E, or to a ring sliding freely on the vertical 
bars D, while the opposite end is secured to 
the head or around the neck of the animal. 
It will be evident that other means of retain 
ing the animal in position within the stall may 
be used and not depart from the principle in 
volved in this inventionthat is, affording a. 
ready means of filling the car with stock, and 
giving to each animal a separate stall and 
feed-trough, the whole apparatus employed in 
accomplishing thisend being capable of ready 
Stowage in the upper part of the car, S0 aS to 
leave it perfectly free and open to be reloaded 
with stock orother freight. 
95 
 
2 
232,61 
1. In a stock-car, the sliding stall-bars E, 25 
 
Having thus describedmy invention, Iclaim 
as new, and desire to Secure by Letters Pat 
enf, the following: 
in combination with the guide-bars D and 
beams F, for the purpose of forming remova 
ble partitions between theanimals, as set forth. 
2. The combination, in a stock-car, of the 
Slidingstall-bars, vertical guide-bars, and feed- 3o 
troughs C, as and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a stock-car, the chains e, attached to 
the sliding guides a/, for securing the heads 
of the animals so as to allow of free vertical 
motion, but restrict the side movement of the 35 
same, substantially as shown and described. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
SYLVESTER. H. MCCIBENY. 
Witnesses: 
DAN. DEWITT, 
CHARLES H. MAXSON. 
IO 
In order to supply the stock with water 
while on the road, a tank, G, is secured in the 
upper part of the car, which may be filled at 
the ordinary water-stations. From this tank 
the pipes H Hare carried along each side of 
the car, being provided with cocks d at that 
point where they will be opposite each feed 
trough when the latter are lowered, and rest 
upon the stops d, so that an attendant, by turn 
ing the cocks, can supply each trough with 
water as often as it may be required. 
The use of these devices upon stock-cars will 
be found of great advantage in enabling them 
to deliverstock in bettercondition after trans 
portation over long distances than it is possi 
ble to do with the method of transportation 
in common use, thus recompensing the stock 
man for the small additional expense, as well 
as affording him the satisfaction of knowing 
that he has taken a step forward in the cause 
of humanity. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232711.txt	(No Model.) 
R. E. HARBAUGH & S. R. OWEN 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Gate. 
No. 232,711. 
Patented Sept. 28, 1880. 
 
u-, 
EESA2ZE 
El EEZE -6. 
S ... 02. 
e 
s E a. 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
A/ 
Mazz 
VETORS 
aud 22 
Z% ATTORNEY 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washt NSTON, is C. 
(No Model.) 
R. E., HARBAUGH & S. R. OWEN, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
No. 232,711. 
Gate, 
Patented Sept. 28, 1880. 
-- A. A. AA. A. 
s 
- 
S) -- a 
ji 3/ A: /7 A. 
3A 
7 y 
527////5 
4. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2. 
S A27, , 
, , , , 
WI///7///// 
, , 
E. 
s 
(S =s 
: 
24 
all--- 
WITNESSES 212- 
A 
ATTORNEY 
N. Peters, PHOTO-LTHOGRApher, WASHINGTON, Cyc 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
REUBEN E. HARBAUGH, OF AMITY, AND SILAS R. OWEN, OF ST.JOSEPH, MO. 
GATE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 232,711, dated September 28, 1880. 
Application filed May 15, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, R. E. HARBAUGH, of 
Amity, DeKalb county, Missouri, and S.R. 
OWEN, of St. Joseph, in the county of Buch 
anan and State of Missouri, have invented a 
new and valuable Improvement in Gate Hang 
ers and Openers; and we dohereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the construction and operation of the 
same, reference being had to the annexed 
drawings, making a part of this specification, 
and to the letters and figures of reference 
marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a side view of our improved gate and hanger. 
Fig. 2 is a top view of the same. Figs. 3, 4, 
5, and 6 are details, and Fig. 7 is a perspec 
tive view. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in gates; and the nature of the invention con 
sists in certain novel means whereby the gate 
is swung between the gate-posts, and in cer 
tain other improvements, as will be hereinaf. 
ter more fully set forth. 
In the annexed drawings, the letter A des 
ignates the gate, usually constructed with lon 
gitudinal slats and cleats. B is the latch-post, 
and NO the other posts, bounding the gap in 
the fence and arranged parallel to each other, 
but not in line, the interval between them be 
ing slightly greater than the thickness of the 
gate. 
D indicates a vertically-vibrating latch piv 
oted to the gate at CL, and engaging a catch, b, 
on post B. This latch, when engaged with the 
catch, is vertical, and it extends up beyond 
the top of the gate a sufficient distance, and 
it is prevented from vibrating beyond the point 
necessary to engage the latch by a stop, c, of 
any suitable description. 
On one of the rails, d, of the gate is placed 
a saddle, I, which is doubly branched, as shown 
at e, and is adjustable toward either end of 
the gate by means of notches et, in the upper 
edge of the rail d', next below, and the bolt 
and nut i i? and perforations it in rail d. 
Hindicates a wire, one end of which is at 
tached to the top of the latch D, and is thence 
carried under one of the branches of the saddle 
I, thence to and around one of a series of pins, 
f, in a board connecting the upper ends of the 
posts NO, thence back under the other branch 
of the saddle, thence to the latch D, when, be 
ing drawn taut, it is secured rigidly to the said 
latch. The wire EI, together with a pin, g, ex 
tending through a slot, h, in the bottom rail, 
d', of the gate, and through posts NO, con 
stitutes the hanger of the gate, the object of 
the pin g being to prevent the gate from sag 
ging, as well as to support it at bottom and 
hold it against endwise motion between the 
posts N. O. The ping rests in auger-holes in 
the posts NO aforesaid. 
F is a vertically-vibrating lever, pivoted at 
its lower end to the gate, extending through 
a guide thereon, and connected by a wire, k, 
to the latch. D. By thrusting the power end 
of this lever away from the latch-post B the 
latch. D is disengaged from the catch, and the 
gate, supported by the hanging device above 
set forth, may be swung back sufficiently to 
pass a foot-passenger, or wholly, to pass a ve 
hicle, Without sagging to any appreciable ex 
tent. The board K, bridging the tops of posts 
NO, is set with pins f, arranged in the arc of 
a circle, described with the saddle I as a cen 
ter. These pins support the loop end of the 
wire, and their object is to control the eleva 
tion of the latch end of the gate. For instance, 
if the gate is situated on a hill-side and opens 
to the right up hill, the looped end of the wire 
should be passed over that pin farthest from 
the center of the board K if the slope is the 
greatest for which the gate is adapted. If the 
slope be not so steep, one of the pins nearer the 
center of said board should be used. By this 
means the raising of the gate can be regulated 
to any incline, and it may be made to close 
automatically. By shifting the saddle I to the 
right or left the gate can always be prevented 
from sagging, as in effect the wire E is there 
by shortened. 
P is a horizontally-arranged double pulley 
Working on a vertical post, P', near the piv 
otal point of the gate, and R is a similar pull 
ley, also rotating horizontally upon the end of 
a post, O', at a short distance from the postN 
and in line with two posts, N, arranged one 
at each side of the gate, sufficiently far out to 
allow the gate to swing to the open position. 
The posts N7 are each provided with a verti 
cally-arranged pulley, S. Posts N, O, and N 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
2 
232, 
ing through a slot, S, of the gate, and connect 
ing posts ON, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the posts NO and 
latch-post B, of the gate A, supported by and 
rotating on ping, connecting posts NO, and 
extending through a slot of the gate, the ver 
tically-arranged and vibrating latch D, the 
saddle I, the bridge K, having the pinsf, and 
the hanger-wire E, secured to the latch, pass 
ing under the bridge, and looped to one of said 
pins, Substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with a hung gate, A, it 
latch D, and lever F, connected to said latch, 
of the post P on said gate, the horizontal dou 
ble-grooved pulley P on said post, the post Of 
at one side of the gate, and having double 
grooved pulley R, the posts N', having pulley 
S, arranged vertically, and the cords UV, pass 
ing around pulleys S, R, and P, and secured to 
the power end of said lever, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony that we claim the above we 
have hereunto subscribed our names in the 
presence of two witnesses. 
R. E. EIARBAUGH. 
SILAS. R. OWEN. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED SNELLING, 
JAMES H. BORTLE. 
are in a line at right angles to the gate when 
closed. 
U indicates a cord or wire passing from the 
pulley S, at one side of the gate, around sheaves 
R and P, and secured to lever F and W is a 
similar cord or wire passing over the pulley S, 
on the other side of the gate, and also passing 
around the sheaves Rand P and secured to said 
lever. By drawing forcibly upon either of these 
cords or wires the gate-latch will be disen 
gaged from the catch and the gate be opened. 
Thus a horseman or coachman may operate the 
gate without dismounting. After passing 
through the gap the gate may be closed by pull 
ing on the other cord, and its weight being 
supported by the latch through the hanger 
Wire E the said latch cannot fail to engage 
its catch. 
What we claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a gate, the combination, with the posts 
NO and the latch-post B, having catch b, of 
the bridge K, having the pins f, the gate A, ex 
tending between the posts NO, the vertically 
vibrating latch D, vertically arranged, the ad 
justable saddle I on the gate, the hanger-wire 
H, secured at each end to the latch, having its 
branches passed under the saddle and engaged 
With one of the pins, f, and the bolt d, extend 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232811.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 232,811. 
G. F. G.E.A.R. 
Car Axle BOX. 
Patented Oct. 5, 1880. 
 
 
NSN3s 
N 
 
 
 
EA 
 
 
  
22 
\\ 
% V 
NS 
N N3 
N k- N3N 
SSKWNSN 
E2 
\ 
carzzzzza2a2a2a 
7' 
  
 
 
 
 
N.Peters, Photo-LITHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D. C. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GILES F. GEAR, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
CAR-AXE BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,811, dated October 5, 1880. 
Application filed August 5, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GILESF. GEAR, of Cleve 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State of 
Ohio, have invented a certain new and Im 
proved Self-Lubricating Railway Journal-Box; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and complete description thereof. 
This invention relates to railway-car axle 
boxes; and the improvement thereof consists 
in providing the axle-box with a reservoir of 
oil, from which oil is applied to the journal of 
the axle by means of brushes attached to the 
end of the axle and revolving there with. Said 
brushes, as they revolve, pass through the res 
ervoir of oil, more or less of which is carried 
up by the brushes and dropped upon the axle, 
thereby automatically lubricating the journal. 
A more complete description of the inven 
tion will be found as follows, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, making a 
part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of a railway-car axle 
box. Fig. 2 is a vertical section. Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5 are views of the oil-reservoir detached 
from the axle-box. Fig. 7 is a detached sec 
tion. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the several views. 
The axle-box above alluded to is like those 
in ordinary use. Hence a brief description of 
the box is all that will be necessary for a full 
understanding of the invention applied thereto. 
In the drawings, A represents the journal 
box, and B the cover, through which access is 
had to the axle for oiling, &c. C is the jour 
nal seat or bearing. D is a block interposed 
between the seat and the top of the box A. 
E is the axle, all of which are, as abovesaid, 
like those in ordinary use, or may be. 
In the lower part of the axle-box, imme 
diately under the axle, is a large space or cham 
ber, which is usually filled with cotton or other 
similar material saturated with oil, which by 
its contact with the axle lubricates it. This 
way of supplying the axle with oil is not reli 
able, and needs to be frequently watched to 
see that the cotton is Saturated and in contact 
with the axle. The constantjarring to which 
the axle and box are subjected packs the satu 
rated cotton, causing it to settle down away 
from the journal of the axle. Hence the jour 
nal becomes heated, and causes a delay of the 
train until the axle is cooled off. 
To avoid the use of cotton and supply the 
axle constantly with oil is the purpose of the 
invention, which is effected as follows: 
The space (above referred to) under the axle, 
instead of being filled with cotton, is fitted 
with an oil-vessel, F, Fig. 2. A detached view 
of said vessel is shown in Fig. 3, representing 
a side view thereof, the shape of which is 
adapted to fill the entire space under the axle 
journal, and is concaved for that purpose, as 
shown in Fig. 6, causing the sides of the ves. 
sel to extend up around the journal about half 
its (liameter, but without touching. So much 
of the vessel as is under the axle inside of 
the collar G is entirely closed by the curved 
top at and partition or wall b, Fig. 2. The 
front part of the vessel is open at the top, 
so that the collar G is therein immediately 
outside of the wall, as seen in said Fig. 2. 
The open space or cup H of the vessel is in 
open relation with the inclosed space F thereof 
by an aperture, c, near the bottom of the wall, 
Hence, on pouring oil in the cup H, which may 
be done through the door B, it will flow at 
once into the vessel or reservoir F, from which 
it will again flow in the cup E, for supplying 
the axle. 
bar, I, the ends of which project beyond the 
collar G. To each end of the bar is attached 
a brush, J, which may be of metal or of other 
suitable material. Said brush is secured to 
the ends of the bar by a stud, K, Fig. 7, the 
stem of which is loose in the bar, so that it 
will freely turn therein. The head of the stud 
is transversely slotted down near to the stem, 
as seen at e, thereby forming two cheeks of 
the head. Through the head is a hole in align 
ment with the slot e. In said hole is inserted 
the material of the brush, which is clamped 
therein by a set-screw, d, passing through the 
cheeks of the stud and the material of the 
brush, as seen in Fig. 7. 
The above-described device operates as fol 
lows: The oil vessel or reservoir Fis charged 
with oil. As a consequence the cup H will 
contain oil, in which the brushes will be im 
mersed as the axle revolves. Each brush, as 
it leaves the oil during the revolution of the 
axle, carries with it more or less oil, and drops 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
O 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
To the end of the axle is secured a 8o 
OO 
2 
232, S. 
Or Splashes it upon the upper side of the axle 
or journal, thereby keeping it constantly sup 
plied with oil during the movement of the 
train, the amount of oil being more or less, 
5 according to the size of the brushes and num 
ber of revolutions of the axle. The oil, if 
applied to the axle in excess, is conveyed back 
into the cup H by the concave of the reser 
voir, which, as will be seen in Fig. 2, is in 
IO clined downward toward the oil space or cup 
H, and is again applied to the axle by means 
of the brushes. As the oil is used from the 
cup it is supplied from the reservoir F through 
the aperture e, in and through which it was 
By having the brushes secured loosely to 
the ends of the bar they adapt themselves more 
readily to the condition of the oil-cup H and 
journal-box, and will revolve with more free 
2O dom than if they were attached to the bar in 
a rigid manner. 
The oil-vessel above described can be ap 
plied to car-axle boxes without changing their 
structure or modifying them in any Way. The 
15 first filled. 
vessel being no part of the axle-box, it is made 25 
and pushed into the box through the door B, 
and removed therefrom with equal facility by 
means of the ring N, secured to the front end 
of the vessel. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The stud K, pivoted to the bar I, and pro 
vided with a slotted head in alignment there 
with, a hole in which to insert and secure the 
brush by means of a set-screw, substantially 35 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In car-axle boxes, the oil vessel or reser 
voir F, constructed and arranged in relation 
there with and to the axle as described, in 
combination with the bar I and brushes, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
GILES E, GEAR. 
Witnesses: 
A. W. DECKER, 
J. E. BURRIDGE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US232911.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. THOMPSON & J. LLOYD, 4. Sheets-i-Sheet 
Seed Planter and Cultivator, 
No. 232,911. 
Patented Oct. 5, 188O. 
 
 
Z27e esses. 
4ec(4-6-2a3-4 
CA 
--- 3.42. 
(No Model.) 
J. W. THOMPSON & J., LLOYD, 
Seed Planter and Cultivator. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 232,911. 
Patented Oct. 5, 188O. . 
 
 
N 
Na 
SS s S 
WITNESSES 
TORS 
42 a 6222276 
2, 22-2e -rfify 
N. PETERs, Photo-LTHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. W., THOMPSON & J. LLOYD, 
Seed Planter and Cultivator, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 232,911. 
 
Patented Oct. 5, 1880. 
WITNESSES 
c/6644 22624.e. 
242-4-2-e-4 
STORS 
sr. . 2-259Bs. 
2- 93.426 %ifi, 
N. Peters, PHOTO-LIHOGRAPHER, wash NGTON, G. & 
(No Model.) 
J. W. THOMPSON & J, LLOYD, 
Seed Planter and Cultivator, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 232,911. 
Patented Oct. 5, 1880. 
  
  
 
). 
M2/-zersey 
- 17 a - 
Ze'ez ?ers 
all 27, c1, 
PEERs, phoro-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. THOMPSON AND JAMES LLOYD, OF AUSTIN, TEXAS. 
SEED - PANTER AND CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 232,911, dated October 5, 1880. 
Application filed May 8, 1880. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES W.THOMPSON 
and JAMESLLOYD, citizens of the United States 
of America, residing at Austin, in the county 
of Travis and State of Texas, have jointly in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Seed-Planters and Cultivators; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a descrip 
tion thereof, such as will enable persons skilled 
in the art to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to combined seed 
planters and cultivators intended for different 
kinds of seeds and crops; and it consists of a 
novel construction of machine having a de 
tachable harrow and seed-drum, and being 
what we call a universal seed-planter and 
cultivator, all of which will be fully under 
stood by the following description. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of our machine with the seed-hop 
per and also the seeding-drum attached to 
the frame. Fig. 2 is a view of the opposite 
side of the machine, showing the connecting 
rod and cranks for operating the seed-roller in 
Fig. 3 is a bottom view 
the forward hopper. 
of the machine. Fig. 4 is a top view. Figs, 
5, 6,7,8,9, and 10 are detached views. 
Our machine is mounted upon wheels U, 
Fig. 1, to regulate the depth of the working. 
The frame is made very strong, having side 
pieces, A, four cross-pieces, B, and three short 
bars, C, C, and D, all securely bolted together, 
so as to hold the whole frame very rigidly 
under strain in planting and Working the 
ground. Attached to the front of this flame 
is a harrow, E, provided with teethe, Fig. 1, 
and also a furrow-opener or share, F, with its 
shank fattached to bar D of the frame. This 
central plow opens the furrow for the seed, 
which may be dropped from hopper G, which 
is provided with a seed-roller, EI, having a 
series of cups, h, for measuring, and thus regul 
lating the amount of seed to be dropped in a 
hill. A brush, M, serves to cut off the excess 
of seed from cups has the roller H revolves, 
and the seed in falling passes through tube V, 
thus reaching the furrow just behind the 
opener F. 
The roller H is operated by crank K and 
pitman J, which is slotted and works on the 
roller W, provided with a rubber surface to 
prevent jar and noise. 
The hopper G and other devices just de 
scribed are employed for planting corn and 
similar seeds; but for planting other seed our 
machine is supplied with a drum-hopper, L, 
Fig. 6, both hoppers being removable. The 
drum L is placed between and attached to the 
wheels U, which support and carry the frame, 
the drum being provided with bolts b, passing 
through the wheels U, and provided with nuts. 
By removing these bolts the chamber of the 
drum may be removed from the wheels U when 
desired. 
A cross-section of the chamber of the drum 
is shown in Fig. 6, the same being star-shaped, 
having angular or W shaped projections l and 
central seed-holes, and also doors l', for the 
introduction of the seed. This drum-hopper 
has an inner wall or chamber, L', for carrying 
the seed and directing the same to the central 
Seed-holes. 
The machine carries four shares or hoes, N, 
all of which may be used for cultivating, and 
reversed, if desired, to turn the furrow in the 
opposite direction. 
In plainting corn the two outer shares are 
removed and the two inner ones used to cover 
the seed. A roller, Q, follows to roll down 
the loose earth and crush the clods. This 
roller has drag-rods R and coiled springs T, 
and also an adjustable supporting-rod, S, all 
of which hold the roller to its work, and yet 
allow the proper SWay in passing stones or 
other obstructions. 
Our machine may be provided with a plant 
shield, Fig. 7, to be attached, in the usual Way, 
to the under side of the frame, and to travel 
between and just behind the two inner shares 
or hoes, N, in order to prevent clods or lumps 
of dirt from being thrown inward upon the 
young plants; and a row-marker, X, Fig. 4, is 
used for laying off the rows at equal distances, 
This marker is made reversible, and may be 
attached to either the right side or left hand 
of the machine. It is held in place by all alm, 
X', and a brace-rod, ac, as seen in Fig. 4. 
The cultivator-shares are exchangeable, and 
may be set to throw the earth either toward 
or from the row of plants. The two outer 
ones are removed in planting. The harrow 
9 O 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
232,911 
also may be removed, when desired. The teeth 
In a combined seed-planter, cultivator, and 
of the harrow are so placed that each alter- harrow intended for planting different kinds 15 
nate tooth travels directly in front of one of of seed, requiring different hoppers, the frame 
the cultivator-shares, thus clearing the track of A B, mounted on wheels U, in combination 
5 trash or rubbish and of clods or lumps of dirt. with the removable drum L, substantially as 
The harrow is attached to the frame A by and for the purposes set forth. 
means of screw-bolts b, Fig. S, provided with 
a crank, So as to be easily turned without a signatures in presence of two witnesses. 
Wrench, and the shaft or axle of the wheels U 
J. W. TEOMPSON. 
1o has bearings on the under side of the frame, 
JAMES LLOYD, 
and is locked in place by simple clasps (, Fig.9. 
Ehaving described our invention, what We 
claim is- 
A. NEIL, Sr., 
H. L. BENTLEY. 
In testimony whereof we hereto affix our 20 
Attest: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233011.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HELEN D. PARTRIDGE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FOOT= BATH. 
SPECTFTCATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 288,011, dated October 5, 1880. 
Application filed August 4, 1880. 
(No model.) 
5 
[ C) 
I 5 
25 
3? 
35 
? 
f10 dll ?0h0?? ?t? ?)t(t?/ 001.006}i?: 
Be it known that I, HELEN ID. PARTRIDGE, 
of Broolklym, in the county of JKingS and State 
of New York, have in wented a new and useful * 
Improvement in Foot-Baths; and I do hereby 
declare that the folloWing is a full, clear', and 
exact description thereof, and of the manner 
of operation, reference being had to the ac 
companying draWiingS, and to the letterS of 
reference marked thereon, and making a part 
of this Specification. 
My invention is intended more particularly 
for use by Sick perSOnS, and When. it is desired 
to obtain the benefits of a wapol' or medicated 
"bath. 
In Such caSeS it i$ W'ery eS$ential t0 c0m 
fine tble wapor and to preweut itS ready escape. 
This can be done only wery imperfectly when 
the ordinary foot-batl is used, even though a 
blataket or other c0wering is placed around 
the limbs and Ower the tub, and there is also 
a liability in the use of Such a bath that the 
cowering Will become Wetted by getting into 
the tub, and if additional Warm water is Te 
quired the wapor Will more or leSS escape when 
tlhe additional Water is Supplied. . 
'The object of my in wention is to provide a 
more comWellient and perfect meanS for comfin 
ing the Stealm OT WapOr, and alS0 Secure a mode 
of Supplying additional Water Without alloW 
img the escape Of the Steam or wapor, or per 
mitting any current of air to come against the 
limbS, and Without disturbing the patient. 
Figure 1 is a perspective wiew of my im 
provred foot tub and bath from the back or 
Tear, and I'ig. 2 is a perspectiWe wieW Of the 
Same from Olue end, ShoWing also the dewice 
for Supplying additional Water. 
The loWer part, A. Of the batll may be madle 
oWal or round or in any form desired. If'rom 
this on the f]'Ont Side, and extending Some 
What more thau half around the top of A., rises 
a part or Semi c0wer, IB, Which is united tightly 
to the part A, and extends upWard to about 
The construction of the bath With the part 55 
the height of the Soft fieShy part of the limb, 
and inclines in Ward, So as nearly to reach the 45 
upper part of the limbS when the feet are in 
the tub A. This part B causes the warm wa 
|por to be deflected tOWard and against the 
limbS, alld alS0 furnisheS a comW'emieut Support 
for any Wrap that may be placed about and 5O 
ower them, and at the Same time prewents the 
dreSS or Wrap becoming Wetted. The benefitS 
of both a water and wapor bath are thus Se 
cured. 
B also enableS the Wrap to be easily placed 
closely around the back part of the limbS So 
that the wapor Will be prevented from escap 
ing and made most effectual for the purpoSeS 
desired. 
To permit tlhe introduction of additional 
Warum Water as that first introduced becomeS 
cooled, or when it is desired to increase the 
temperature of the Water, and that this may 
be effected without exposing the limbs or 65 
hawing them Subjected to ally draft of air, a 
moZZle or Opening, C, is made in the upper 
part of the bath A, through Which additional 
water can be Supplied, and Which is fitted with 
a cOwer, 6, which can be closed after water haS 7 O 
been SO Supplie(l, S0 that the Warm wapOI' can 
1not escape from the bath, and Will be most 
effective as a, batlh. 
The bath A. may be made of different sizes, 
and the part B may be Varie(d in heiglut Or in- 75 
(clination, aS dleSired. 
What is claimed iS 
A foot-bath consisting of the wesSel A., with 
ain elewated or upWard and inclined Selmi-cower, 
B, and furnished With a moZZle or receiving- 8? 
conduit, C, Substantially as and for the pur 
pOSeS Set forth. 
? 
HELEN D. PARTRIDGE. 
Witnesses: 
STEPHEN H. CAMP, 
MARY BUTLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233111.txt	 
  
A. N. & De W. C. NORRIS. 
Seeding Machine, 
Patented Oct. 12, 188O. 
No. 233,111. 
 
"a x2 
 
S&SSA4 
SS Eas 
YS3Ra 
 
 
72S 
 
 
N.PETERS, PHOTO-urhogRAPHER, washNGron, D.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT N. NORRIS AND DEWITT C. NORRIS, OF RUSHVILLE, INDIANA. 
SEED NG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 233,111, dated October 12, 1880. 
Application filed November 4, 1878. 
20 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ALBERT N. NORRIS 
and DEWITT C. NORRIS, of Rushville, in the 
County of Rush and State of Indiana, have in 
Vented a new and useful Improvement in Seed 
ing-Machines, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon. 
Figure represents a side elevation of our 
machine. Fig. 2 represents a plan view of 
the adjustable gearing and its relation to the 
frame and the driving - wheel. Fig. 3 repre 
sents the bed-plate, to which the support of 
the axle of the drive-wheel and the oblique 
rest or slotted open box for the line-shaft sup 
port are connected. Fig. 4 represents a per 
spective view of the slotted open box detached 
and the adjustable box for the line-shaft. Fig. 
5 represents a perspective view of one of the 
hangers for securing the hoes to the side bars. 
Our machine is for sowing grain between 
corn-rows, and is made with a central frame 
piece, to each side of which hinged side bars 
mounted with seed - boxes and seeding mech 
anism are connected. But one of the side bars 
With its appurtenances is shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 1 represents one half of the machine, 
the other half being precisely the same. The 
central frame-piece extends to the rear end of 
the machine, and is supported by a small 
wheel, and supports the mechanism for ex 
panding and contracting the hinged side bars 
in the usual manner. 
Our invention relates to the mechanism for 
changing the speed of the dropping mechanism. 
The driving-wheel A is supported centrally 
in the frame-piece C, and each end of its axle 
B is mounted with four. gear-wheels dished 
together, and constituting a cone-shaped nest 
secured together by ledges and corresponding 
indentations cast upon their sides, and are 
thereby held in their relation. 
The shaft D, that operates the feed-wheels 
within the cups or boxes E, is jointed by a 
ball-and-pivot joint, F, and is mounted at its 
forward end with a concavo-convex gear-wheel, 
which can be adjusted to mesh with either of 
the gears constituting the nest on the drive 
5o wheel axle. This gear-wheel is adjustable 
45 
35 
 
55 
75 
upon its shaft, so as to enable it to be brought 
into mesh with either of the gears of the nest. 
The slotted rest H, upon which shaft D has 
its bearing C, is arranged obliquely, so as to 
Occupy a plane parallel with the line of the 
nest of gears, as indicated by lines a gy, Fig. 2. 
The hoes d are hinged to their respective 
hangers under the feed-wheels, and their front 
Connection with their hangers is by a wooden 
break-pin. The front hanger (shown in Fig. 5) 
is cast with an elongated front plate, w, which 
Serves the double purpose of a support for the 
hoe and as a hinge to connect the side bar, I, 
to the central frame, C. 
The hollow oblique rest H and the support 
B for the axle of the driving - wheel are cast 
With a base-plate, J, and when secured to the 
frame C they will retain their fixed position. 
Thereby they always maintain the parallel re 
lation of the nest of gears and the adjustable 
bearing a, in which the driving - shaft D is 
journaled. 
The adjustment of shaftD, with its gear G, 
by means of set-screw I', which works in a 
nut in the hollow rest H, will cause a change 
of speed of the feed-wheels which drop the 
grain through boxes E and the hoes below 
them. 
Heretofore seed-drills to work between corn 
rows have been provided with either three or 
five hoes, one hoe having been arranged cen 
trally under the central frame; but experience 
has proven that these machines did not do 
their work well and uniformly, because the 
Central line of earth between the corn-rows is 
left in a solid condition by the cultivator or. 
plow after plowing the corn, and therefore 
the central hoe did not bury the seed of uni 
form depth with the side hoes. Besides, the 
hard condition of the central ridge of soil re 
ferred to required that greater power be used 
to propel the machine. Our drill avoids this 
difficulty by the use of two rows of hoes only, 
each of which performs its workindependently 
and withoutthrowing an undue amountofearth 
upon the grain deposited by the hoes in ad 
vance of it, working like the large field seed 
drills, and the grainis planted in the loose and 
mellow soil on both sides of the narrow central 
ridge to an equal depth. 
go 
95 
OO 
shaftD, the laterally-adjustable bearing a, and 
the oblique bed-plate J, having the axle-bear 
ing, B and bearing-rest H thereon, substan 
tially as and for the purpose herein specified. 15 
Witness our hands this 15th day of October, 
A.D. 1878. 
ALBERT N NORRS 
IDEWITT C, NORRIS. 
Witnesses: 
CLAUDE CAMBERN, 
JESSE HENLEY. 
2 
233, 
The ball-and-pivot joint Fallows the side 
bars, I, to be adjusted laterally to adapt the 
machine to work between the rows of corn of 
varying width. The ball of this joint has four 
Sholes made in it, into which four pins or piv 
ots cast in the pronged ends of the coupled 
shaft D are driven by percussive force. 
Having described our invention, we claim 
The combination of the conically-arranged 
to bevel - wheels on the axle B, the adjustable 
bevel-gear wheel G on the laterally-adjustable 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233211.txt	; 
: 
j. 
 
 
W. W. CROOKER, 
Polishing Wheel for Boot and Shoe Soles. 
No. 233,21 1, 
Patented Oct. 12, 188O. 
 
 
 
 
 
k 
 
 
SSSSSS 
e S 
faS e' 
Witnesses: 
69/06/way. 
T by u12, 723 
fittorney. 
Fig. 1. 
Inventor: 
%, 7% 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. CROOKER, OFLYNN, MASSACHUSETTS,ASSIGNOR OF ONE-BALF 
OF HIS RIGHT TO JOHN W. BRIMBLECOM, OF SAME PLACE. 
PO ISHING - WHEE FOR BOOT AND SHOE SOLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 233,211, dated October 12, 1880. 
Application filed January 8, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM W. CROOKER, 
of Lynn, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Polishing-Wheels, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to a polishing-wheel for 
use infinishing the bottoms of boots and shoes, 
Io and especially designed for polishing those pori 
tions of the sole which have previously been 
Sandpapered, buffed, and colored, and espe 
cially to the construction of said wheel and to 
the particular material used to produce the pol 
I5 ishing-surface; and it consists in the combina 
tion of a foundation-wheel secured upon a shaft 
and having formed in its radial faces sunken 
recesses to receive the edge of the envelope or 
covering of flannel or other soft woolen cloth 
2O drawn over the edges of the annular lips or 
ribs bounding said recesses, and two circular 
disks fitted to and adapted to be moved on said 
shaft in the direction of its length, and there 
by be forced into said recesses, one upon either 
25 side of the foundation-wheel, and bind the edge 
of the envelope or covering and draw it taut 
across the outer surface of said wheel. 
It further consists in the combination of the 
recessed wheel secured upon a shaft, two cir 
3o cular disks or followers mounted upon said 
shaft, upon either side of said wheel, and adapt 
ed to be moved thereon toward or from said 
wheel, and a disk or ring of rubber secured to 
the inner face of each of said followers and pro 
35 jecting slightly beyond the peripheries thereof, 
and adapted to press the flannel or other soft 
Woolen envelope or covering hard against the 
inner surfaces of the annular rings projecting 
from the sides of said wheel, and by its fric 
4otion thereon draw said envelope taut over the 
outer face of the wheel. 
Figure I of the drawings is a plan of a pol 
ishing-wheel illustrating my invention, and 
Fig.2 is a central vertical section of the same 
A is the frame, provided with suitable bear 
ings A' A', in which is mounted the shaft B, 
provided with the driving-pulley C, and having 
secured thereon the wheelD, which may be of 
5o metal or Wood, though I prefer wood, the outer 
45 on line at a on Fig.1. 
periphery of which is slightly crowned or con 
vex in the direction of the length of the shaft, 
and the radial sides of which are recessed so 
as to form around the outer portions thereof 
the annular lips or ribs act, as shown in Fig. 2. 55 
The outer periphery of the wheel D is covered 
with a band of felt or other soft semi-elastic 
material, b, over which is tightly drawn an 
envelope or outer covering, c, of soft woolen 
cloth, preferably of flannel, the edges of which 6o 
are folded inward over the edges of the an 
nular lips at a. and are secured in position as 
follows: E and E are two metal disks, pro 
vided with hups d and d", respectively, in which 
are formed female screw-threads fitted to and 65 
engaging with corresponding male threads 
formed upon the shaft B in such a manner that 
said disks may be moved toward or from the 
wheel D and be made to press against the cloth 
envelope and clamp it to the wheel. The in- 7o 
ner faces, or at least the outer portions of the 
inner faces, of said disks are covered with thin 
rubber e and e', which projects slightly beyond 
the periphery of said disks, and as said disks 
are forced into the recesses in the sides of the 75 
wheel D the edges of the rubber are folded over 
the edges of said disks, and thereby serve to 
press the envelopec hard against the inner sur 
faces of the ribs a, a, and by the friction thas 
created and the peculiar adhesive nature of the 8o 
rubber said envelope c is drawn taut over the 
face of the wheel D. 
The screw-thread in the hubs d and d of the 
disks E and E' may be dispensed with, if de 
sired, said hubs having a smooth fit on the shaft 85 
B, and independent nuts may be used to force 
said disks into the recesses in the sides of the 
wheel D in an obvious manner. 
By this construction of the wheel the polish 
ing-surface, which requires to be renewed quite go 
often, may be readily replaced by a fresh enve 
ope or covering, with very little delay of the 
Work. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is- 95 
1. The wheel D, provided with the annular 
lips at a, in combination with the disks E and 
E and the flexible covering c, all arranged and 
adapted to operate substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the wheel D, provided Ioo 
egg. 
233,211 
with the annular lips a a, cushion of felt or other all arranged and adapted to operate substan. Io 
soft semi-elastic material b, an outer envelope tially as and for the purposes described. 
or covering, c, of flannel or other softwoolen 
R.", clamping-disks E and E', all ar. day of January, A. D. 1880. 
Executed at Boston, Massachusetts, this 3d. 
; 
: 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
7 
WILLIAM W. CROOKER, 
. 
. 
. 
: 
: 
. 
. 
. 
ranged and adapted to operate substantially 
S as and for the purposes described. 
3. The combination of the wheel ID, provided 
with the lips a a, covering c, clamping-disks 
E and E', and rubber disks or rings e and c', 
Witnesses: 
F. G. WALLIS, 
C.H. DODD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233311.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 233,311. 
A, MCI. WILLIAMSON. 
Carriage Wheel. 
Patented Oct. 12, 188O. 
IN 
 
u%-44.47% LEED 
-6-4-2 e14-4 %, ATTOREYS 
 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-lutioGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A. McINTOSH WILLIAMSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CARRAGE WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 233,311, dated October 12, 1880. 
Application filed April 5, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, A. McINTOSH WILLIAM 
SON, of Philadelphia, in the county of Phila 
delphia and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Carriage-Wheels; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the construction and operation 
of the same, reference being had to the an 
nexed drawing, making a part of this speci 
fication, and to the letters and figures of ref. 
erence marked thereon. 
The drawing is a representation of a side 
elevation of a carriage-wheel, partly broken 
away to show my improvements. 
The nature of my invention relates to the 
construction of wheels for vehicles. 
The essential features of the improvement 
relate to means for securing elasticity of the 
wheel, the parts connected being allowed to 
have a certain almount of play, which will pre 
vent breakage of the wheel in striking or 
passing over any obstacle upon the road. It 
also admits of each spoke receiving its share 
of the jar incident to driving the vehicle over 
pavements or rough roads. Many other ad 
vantages might be enumerated, but these will 
all be apparent to those skilled in the art. It 
will be noticed, however, that the fellies are 
not weakened by mortises having metal sock 
ets set into them, as has been done in a for 
mer instance. 
In the drawing, which fully illustrates my 
invention, A designates the hub of the wheel, 
and B B the spokes. 
The spokes have elastic rings C, which fit 
against the fellies E, and the tenons b of the 
spokes, which pass into mortises in the fellies, 
come against elastic cylindrical or other equiv 
alent-shaped pads D, which are fitted in the 
mortises in the fellies. 
The tire F, which is passed around the fel 
lies of the Wheel, compresses to some extent 
the elastic pads D, thus tending to keep the 
fellies in their original form and symmetry, 
relieving the spoke from springing through 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
careless hooping of the wheel, taking up the 
expansion incident to light tires from hot 
weather, and giving to wood-wheeled vehicles, 
to a greater extent, the results derived from 
the ordinary springs. 
At the points of juncture between the fellies 
elastic plates G are interposed, these plates 
being fitted to the ends of the fellies. These 
elastic plates or pads constitute auxiliaries to 
the previously-mentioned pads, and tend to 
keep the wheel from breaking or becoming 
rim-bound. The pads, which are set against 
the tenons of the spokes, also act as a pre 
ventive against the breakage of the wheel, 
and Will further accommodate themselves to 
the contraction or expansion of the tire. 
The mortises or holes through the fellies or 
bent rims are made round, so that the tenons 
will fit into them, and the elastic pads or 
cushions are made of cylindrical shape, so as 
to fit into the said round holes of the fellies. 
The end of the spoke is more securely held to 
the felly by a wedge, e, driven into the end 
of the spoke to spread it in a well-known man 
lner, and the said wedge will also serve an im 
portant function to compress the cushion-rings 
C, so as to allow them a limited degree of elas 
ticity only, which is regulated by the dis 
tance the wedge is driven into the end of the 
spoke. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
The carriage-wheel as described, constructed 
with the elastic pads interposed between the 
spokes and the fellies, between the ends of 
the spoke-tenons and the tire, and between 
the meeting ends of the fellies, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
A. MCINTOSE WILLIAMSON, 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT EVERETT, 
JAS. J. SHEEHY, 
55 
75 
85 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233412.txt	(No Model.) 
A HAR WEY. 
00 upling for Steam Supply Pipes, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW HAR VIE Y, OF DE TROIT, MICHIGAN. 
CO U PLI NG FOR STEAM - SUPPLY P PES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,412, dated October 19, 1880. 
Application filed July 12, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, ANDREW HARVEY, of 
Detroit, Wayne county, Michigan, have in 
vented an Improvement in Couplings for 
Steam-Supply Pipes, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The nature of this invention relates to cer 
tain new and useful improvements in supply 
couplings for steam-pipes; and the invention 
consists in the peculiar construction, arrange 
ment, and combinations of the parts, all as 
more fully hereinafter set forth. 
In steam-pipes, especially in pipes of large 
size, the expansion and contraction are always 
a source of danger to supply-couplings, which 
danger can only be completely counteracted 
by enabling such couplings to compensate 
themselves, and to effect such compensation 
in a manner and by such means that it never 
will become detrimental to the duty of the 
coupling. 
In the accompanying drawing, which shows 
a central section of my improved coupling, 
and forms a part of this specification, AA' 
are the flanges which connect my supply 
coupling with the pipe-line. B C are the two 
parts composing my supply-coupling. D is a 
stuffing-box. El Eare supply-pipe connections. 
The part C of the supply-coupling has on 
its inside and cast with its body an annular 
flange, a, upon which is accurately fitted the 
annular metal bushing b, which is firmly held 
in place by the stuffing-box D. 
The compensating coupling or thimble B, 
which, by the force of the expansion or con 
traction of the pipe-line, will be driven in or 
drawn out of the coupling C, has an annular 
flange, d, upon its inner end, which will im 
pinge against the bushing b and prevent the 
thimble B from being forced out when con 
tracted, the flange d in such case pressing 
I. ? 
25 
35 
against the lower face of the bushing; and in 
case of much contraction the movable bush 
ing b will yield and press the elastic packing 
s upward, thus preventing breakage of the 
parts from contraction. By this construction, 
also, the thimble B may be readily removed 
and replaced by removing the stuffing-box D, 
packings, and bushing b, when the thimble 
can readily be removed. 
It is hardly necessary to explain here that 
such accidents cannot always be traced to 
faulty calculation of the needed contraction, 
but will occur owing to other circumstances, 
even where such contraction was in the first 
instance provided for. Even to prevent acci 
dental disconnection when pipe-lines are laid, 
and to give the workmen an unerring guide 
as to the limit of the possible contraction, is 
an important gain. 
To prevent the expansion which sometimes 
accidentally or otherwise accumulates at cer 
tain points of the pipe-line from interfering 
with the free flow of steam to the supply-pipes, 
I enlarge that portion, F, of the coupling C to 
which the supply-pipes are connected, and cast 
on the inside of the flange At the stops.ff, so 
that at all times, even when the extreme limit 
of expansion is reached, steam is always free 
to pass through the enlarged chamber F to 
the supply-pipes. 
What I claim as my invention is 
The combination, with the cylinder C, hav 
ing the interior flange, a, of the movable bush 
ing b, packing s, stuffing-box D, and tube B, 
provided with the flange d, substantially as 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
ANDREW HARVEY. 
Witnesses: 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
CHARLES J. BHUNT. 
45 
SO 
55 
?? 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233512.txt	(Model.) 
C. P. HOWE. 
Mattress Making Machine. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 233,512. 
Patented Oct. 19, 188O. 
 
(Model.) 
- 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
C. P. HOWE. 
Mattress Making Machine, 
No. 233,512. 
Patented Oct. 19, 188O. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES P. HOWE, OF GALVESTON, TEXAS. 
MATTRESS - MAKING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 233,512, dated October 19, 1880. 
Application filed March 19, 1880. 
(Model.) 
O 
IS 
2Cd 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs P. How E, of 
Galveston, in the county of Galveston, and in 
the State of Texas, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Mattress-Making 
Machines; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, making a part of this speci 
fication. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
Construction and arrangement of a machine for 
making mattresses, as will be hereinafter more 
fully set forth. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
its construction and operation, referring to the 
annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my mat 
tress-making machine, and Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal vertical section of the same. 
A represents the base of the machine, at one 
end of which are two posts or standards, B B. 
Upon a rod, a, between said standards are 
pivoted the two side pieces, CC, which are pro 
vided with legs E, for supporting the same in 
about a horizontal position. At the forward 
ends of the side pieces, CC, at the bottom, on 
a rod, b, is hung a door or gate, D, which closes 
upward and has groovese, to receive the ends 
of the side pieces, said door being then held 
by latches d d. 
Below the rod is a cylindrical head, F, jour 
naled in the standards BB, and to this head 
are fastened a series of slats, II, which, when 
in a horizontal position, are supported upon a 
cross-bar, G, attached to the standards, and 
also upon a bar, H, which is let into the legs 
E and under edges of the sides C. This bar H. 
forms a gage for holding the sides the proper 
distance apartformattresses of different width, 
it being notched at suitable points to fit on the 
legs. Another gage, J, attached to the stand 
ards, holds the inner ends of the sides, 
 
L represents a solid top hinged upon a re 
movable rod, h, and provided at its outer end 
with a series of pins, i, upon which straps m, 
attached to the outer ends of the slats, are to 
be fastened. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The door D is let down and the top L. raised. 
The material of which the mattress is to be 
made is then laid on the slats I and spread in 
proper form. The top I is then let down and 
pressed upon the material until the straps in 
can be fastened on the pins i. The ticking, 
having been previously sewed at the sides and 
one end, is now drawn over the top, material, 
and slats, and the door D closed. The rod h 
is then drawn out and the top L drawn out at 
the back, the material and the slats yet remain 
ing in the ticking. The mattress can then be 
tacked between the slats, if desired, and the 
whole raised up, the head F turning on its 
journals, when the mattress can be easily drawn 
off and completed. 
Some of the slats I are removable, so as to 
be taken out for making a mattress of less width, 
in which case a narrower top is also used. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the laterally-adjust 
able sides C C, legs E, hinged door D, and the 
gages H.J., arranged to hold the sides C C at 
different points, substantially as and for the 
purposes herein set forth. 
2. The journaled head F, with slats I, in com 
bination with the hinged top L, having pins i 
and the straps m, substantially as and for the 
purposes herein set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set iny hand this 27th day of 
January, 1880. 
w 
CEARLES P. HOWE, 
Witnesses: 
F. A. GLASS, 
P. H. MOSER, 
So 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233612.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
0. G ASSETT & I. FISHER, 
Railway Signal Apparatus. 
No. 233,612. 
Patented Oct. 26, 1880. 
Fid 1. 
 
WiFi E is ses, 
3 -7-6-4-7 
An (Pa-wevio-le/ 
live Fors. 
Cocal Saas-ect as 
Jytaee 324 fiel- G 
c; Ov, 
PersRs, Photo-ITHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-in-Sheet 2. 
O. CASSETT & I. FISHER 
Railway Signal Apparatus. 
No. 233.62. 
Patented Oct. 26, 188O. 
Wils ses. 
-6 16-7- 
r --- 
 
IVE IFors. 
%covi Saaete evo 
G-1, 4-y-ry. octy. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OSCAR GASSETT AND ISRAEL FISHER, OF BOSTON, MASS., ASSIGNORSTO 
THE UNION ELECTRIC SIGNAL COMPANY. 
RAILWAY SIGNAL APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 233,612, dated October 26, 1880. 
Application filed March 20, 1880. (No model.) 
O 
IS 
55 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, OSCAR GASSETT and 
ISRAEL FISHER, both of Boston, county of 
Suffolk, State of Massachusetts, have invented 
an Improvementin Railway Signal Apparatus, 
of which the following description, in connec 
tion with the accompanying drawings, is a 
specification. 
Our invention relates to an automatic sig 
nal apparatus for railways, and is embodied 
in a machine controlled by an electro-magnet, 
and adapted to show a signal or banner in one 
position while a train is on a section of track 
to be protected by the said signal, and to 
place the said signal in another position when 
the said section of track is free to be entered 
upon by a train. 
The machine is intended to be controlled by 
an electro-magnet placed in an electric circuit 
with the rails of the track, the said magnet 
being demagnetized by shunting or short-cir 
cuiting it by the wheels and axles of a train, 
or otherwise, the battery-circuit remaining 
constant, except when accidentally broken, 
as by the breaking of a rail, or washing out of 
the track, or rupture of a wire, or otherwise. 
The present invention is based on a ma 
chine invented by Oscar Gassett, on which an 
application for patent filed August 14, 1879, 
is now pending, in which a signal-machine 
actuated by a weight is controlled by a detent 
operated by the armature of an electro-mag 
net in such manner that the mechanism is 
stopped with the signal in one position when 
the said armature is attracted to its magnet, 
and in the other position when the said ar 
mature is released by the demagnetization of 
its magnet. In both that machine and the 
present the signal-banner is shown as turning 
on an axis in its plane, and indicating one con 
dition of the block-section when the plane of 
the said signal is parallel with, and the other 
condition when perpendicular to, the line of 
railway, and both sides being alike, a quarter 
revolution is sufficient to change the signal, 
the edge of the signal-banner being presented 
to the engineer to indicate one condition of 
the section-as, for example, danger, and 
the face thereof to indicate the opposite condi 
tion, or safety. 
The present invention consists, first, in a 
novel detent device, in which a vibrating de 
tent-lever has a shoulder near its pivotal point 
which receives the shock and pressure of the 
revolving signal mechanism, the said pressure 
acting on one side of the said pivotal point to 
tend to vibrate the detent-lever in one direc 
tion when the signal is in one position, and 
on the other side to vibrate the said lever in 
the other direction when in the other position. 
The detent-lever is itself stopped from vibrat 
ing in one direction by engaging a stop on 
an armature-lever when the armature is at 
tracted and held up to the poles of its electro 
magnet, and is stopped from vibrating in the 
other direction when the electro-magnet is de 
magnetized and the armature released. This 
construction removes all shock from the ar 
mature-lever and renders the pressure thereon 
very light, so that a weak current is sufficient 
to control it and the signal. 
The invention also consists in the construc 
tion of the stop-points on the armature-lever, 
whereby the said detent-lever is always caused 
to stop or come to rest on the proper face of 75 
the stop, thereby always insuring the correct 
position of the signal when the controlling 
armature comes to rest; also, in a stop device 
controlled by the actuating - power, herein 
shown as a spring, to stop and hold the Sig 
nal in position to indicate danger before the 
said actuating - power is wholly exhausted or 
run down; also, in an adjustable detacher for 
the armature-lever to press on the said lever 
When the armature is close to or in contact 
with the poles of the electro-magnet, to over 
come any residual magnetism when the mag 
net is demagnetized and insure that the arma 
ture will fall away. 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of a signal-ma 
chine embodying our invention; Fig. 2, a plan 
thereof in one of its normal positions-that is, 
indicating safety; Fig. 3, a plan, partly in secr 
tion, of a portion thereof in the other position 
to indicate danger;' Fig. 4, a side view of the 
detent-lever detached; Figs. 5 and 6, details, 
showing the engagement of the detent-lever 
with the armature-lever stops, being sections 
on the lines a a and y y of Figs. 2 and 3, re 
spectively, looking toward the armature-lever; 
95 
IOO 
- 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
O 
25 
35 
- 
75 
Figs. 7 and 8, details to be referred to illus 
trating the operation under certain circum 
stances. 
The actuating-power is shown as a spring, 
a, attached at its outer end to a stud, af, on 
the frame, and at its inner end to a winding 
spindle, b, adapted to be wound by the keyb', 
from which the power is applied, in the usual 
way, by a ratchet, b, and pawl c, to the large 
driving-gear c', from which the power is trans 
mitted by the speed-increasing train c co" to 
the signal-shaft, d, provided with a socket, d, 
to receive the signal-banner, and having a tend 
ency to rotate in the direction of the arrow, 
Fig. 2. 
The signal-shaft is provided with four arms, 
ee e'e', at right angles to one another, shown 
as projecting from the socket d', and provided 
with detent-studs ffff', the ones,ff being 
farther from the axis of the shaft d than the 
f'f''. These detent-studs, flattened on 
OneS 
their bearing side, as shown in Fig. 3, are 
adapted to strike on and be held by the shoul 
der g of the detent-lever g', pivoted at 2 on the 
frame-plate, the studs markedffbeing placed 
to strike the said shoulder g on one side, and 
those markedff on the other side, of its pivot 
2. The studs f tend to vibrate the leverg' 
toward the position shown in dotted lines, Fig. 
2, and the ones f" tend to vibrate it as shown 
in Fig. 3, and in either case if it is permitted 
so to vibrate, the studs for f" will escape over 
the edge of the shoulder g, as indicated in Fig. 
3, just before the lever g' reaches one of the 
stop-pins 3 or 4. 
The detent-leverg' is prevented from vibrat 
ing to release the studf and arme by the stop 
h on the armature-lever h, pivoted at 5, and 
controlled by the electro-magneti, the said 
stoph being in position to engage the lever g', 
as shown in Figs. 2, 5, and 7, when the arma 
ture is attracted, while the said leverg is pre 
vented from vibrating to release the stud f' 
by the stop h on the said armature-lever h, 
when the electro-magnet is demagnetized and 
its armature permitted to fall away, being then 
overbalanced by the long arm of the lever h. 
on the left of the pivot 5 in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The movement of the lever hi? is limited in 
one direction by the adjustable pointi, and in 
the other by the fixed stop j', shown as an in 
sulated bracket overhanging the end of the 
said lever h. 
The magnet i is adjusted in proper position 
by the screw i and nut i, and is retained in 
this position by the set-screw i. 
It will be observed, referring to Figs. 5 and 
6, that when the detent-leverg is properly en 
gaged on the perpendicular front or stopping 
face of either of its stops h or h the other one 
of the said stops is in position to allow the 
said lever to, vibrate freely by it. 
In Fig. 8 the armature-lever is in the same 
position as in Fig. 6, and consequently the le 
verg should be in the same condition-that 
is, free to vibrate in the direction of the arrow 
past the stoph to release one of the signal 
arms ef. If, however, the lever g should be 
held by the rear side of the stop h, it will be 
seen that the said stop would then act to pre 
vent movement in the direction of the arrow, 
and thus cause one of the armse to be retained 
and a false signal given. 
When, in the operation of the machine, as 
hereinafter described, the lever g is caught 
behind the stop h, as shown in Fig. 8, and 
with the stud f' of a signal-arm, e, stopped on 
the shoulder g, tending to move the leverg in 
the direction of the arrow, the inclined surface 
6 of the end of the lever will bear against the 
inclined rear surface, 7, of the stop h, and the 
latter will yield to the pressure, thus raising 
the armature-lever h and allowing the lever 
g' to pass in the direction of the arrow, after 
which the lever l' will drop again, the lever 
g' vibrate to allow the arm e to escape, and 
then, when the shoulder g is struck by the 
stud f', stop against the front face of the stop 
h and hold the arm et as in Fig. 6, thus giving 
the correct sigual. 
Fig. 7 illustrates the operation when the de 
tent-leverg is caught behind the stop h. In 
this case, if the stop h were rigidly attached 
to the lever h, the armature would have to be 
pulled away from its magnet to let the lever 
g' pass; but this is obviated by pivoting the 
stop h at 8, so that it may drop down and let 
the said leverg pass, after which it is imme 
diately raised by the spring 9, Fig. 5, against 
the pin 10, to properly stop the detent-lever g' 
on its front face. 
The detacher for the armature is shown 
as a strong spring, k, attached to a post, k', 
on the frame, and adjustable by a screw, l, 
and check-nut l, to bring its outer end, 11, 
which overhangs the armature-lever h", into 
proper position to bear upon said armature 
lever when the armature is at the end of its 
movement toward the poles of its magnet, in 
order to insure that the said armature shall 
fall away when the magnet is demagnetized. 
The circuit-wires for the electro-magnet i 
are to be attached to the insulated binding 
screws 2021, and the wires of another circuit 
to be controlled by the signal to operate any 
desired instrument. Usually, a secondary sig 
nal-machine similar to the one in hand may be 
attached to the binding-screws 2223, the said 
circuit then terminating in the flexible springs 
m in on an insulating-block, o, the said springs 
when left to themselves, as in Fig. 3, being 
separated and the circuit open. 
One pair of opposite signal-arms (herein 
shown as the ones marked e) is provided with 
pins p, adapted to bear on an insulating-plate, 
n", on the spring n, and press the said spring 
provided with a contact-stud, n, against the 
spring in to close the circuit. When the pins 
p are on the arms e this circuit is closed, while 
the electro-magnet i is charged and broken 
when the said magnetis demagnetized; but by 
placing the pins on the wings e' the opposite 
condition would be the result. 
The stopping device for the machine con 
55 
45 
9o 
95 
Iod 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
233,612 
3 
75 
sists of a hooked arm, r, attached to a rock 
shaft, s, extended down between the frame 
plates, and provided near the bottom with an 
arm, t, which is pressed by a light spring 
against the outer leaf of the main actuating 
Spring ct, which, as it opens out in operating 
the machine, swings the arm t, and conse 
quently the hooked arm r, in the direction of 
the arrow, Fig. 2, until, before the spring is 
so Weak as to cease actuating the machine, 
the hooked end is in position to catch one of 
the pins at on the arms e and hold the said 
arms, and consequently the machine and sig 
nal, when the said arms e are in the position 
occupied by the arms e' in Fig. 2, in which po 
sition the signal indicates danger. 
Another secondary circuit is closed when 
the armature is attracted between the wires 
2526, the former wire connected with the metal 
frame, and consequently with the armature 
lever, and the latter wire, 26, connected with 
the insulated armature-lever stop j', the arma 
ture-lever being provided with a contact stud, 
27, Figs. 5 and 6, to make contact with the 
said stop j'. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The signal consists of a plane disk alike on 
both sides-for example, red to indicate dan 
ger'-and is so placed that one of the opposite 
faces of the disk will be presented to the en 
gineer, and consequently the same or danger 
signal be given, if either of the arms e', which 
may be called the danger-arms, is stopped 
by the detent device, and one of the opposite 
edges of the disk will be presented to indicate 
safety if either of the arms e, or safety-arms, 
is stopped. When the magneti is vitalized, the 
armature is attracted, and the machine comesto 
rest with the end of the detent-leverg' resting 
against the stoph, and one of the detent-studs 
f of one of the safety-arms e bearing on the 
shoulder g. In this position the circuit-closer 
in n is closed by the pin p. If the magnet is 
demagnetized, the stoph drops from the range 
of the end of the detent-lever g', which swings 
against the stop-pin 3, allowing the arm e to 
escape, after which the stud f' of the next or 
danger-arm strikes the shoulder g and swings 
it back from the stop-pin 3 until its end strikes 
the stop h and is detained, thereby allowing 
the said arm el to escape, so that the signal 
continues in this position until the magnet i 
is again charged, when the arme' escapes and 
an arm, e, is detained. 
When the stud f' of one of the danger-arms 
is detained, the circuit-closer m n is open, as 
shown in Fig. 3, so that if an electro-magnet 
of another precisely similar machine to the 
one shown is in a circuit controlled by the said 
circuit-closer it will give precisely the same 
indications, as would, also, one in circuit with 
the Wires 25 26. 
Usually the signal is operated by a single 
change in the condition of the electro-magnet 
i-as from magnetized to demagnetized, or vice 
versal-and a consequent single movement of 
the armature to one or the other of its stops; 
but sometimes, as by the throwing of a switch, 
two changes are made in rapid succession, 
bringing the magnet back to its original con 
dition, the armature-lever passing first from 
one stop to the other, and then back to the 
first stop. In this case the detent-lever will 
be released and the appropriate signal-arm es 
cape on the first change of the magnet; but 
it is possible that the second change may take 
place and the armature - lever return to its 
original position before the next signal-arm 
has reached the shoulder (, in which case the 
end of the detent-lever g' will be caught be 
hind the stop that has just released it, the 
said stop in the first movement of the armature 
lever having released the detent-lever, which 
Would then, in the usual course of operation, 
come to rest against the other stop placed in 
line there with by the first movement of the 
armature-lever; but before this can happen 
the second movement brings the first-men 
tioned stop backinto the line ofmovement of the 
detent-leverg, as shown in Figs. 7 and 8, when 
the said stop will be moved aside to let the said 
detent-lever pass, as herein before described, 
and the second arm will escape and the signal 
finally come to rest in its original position, as 
it should, since the circuit and track are now 
in their original condition. 
It will be observed that if the stops h h 
were omitted and the machine left to run down, 
the detent-lever g would act as an escape 
ment, checking and almost stopping the move 
ment of the arms e e', so that they can never 
strike the shoulder g with a momentum greater 
than that derived from a quarter-revolution of 
the shaft d. 
The shock of stopping the machine is re. 
ceived by the shoulderg, which is a solid piece 
of metal with the leverg, and its sustaining 
pivot 2 is firmly bedded in the frame-plate, 
while the said leverg strikes and bears on the 
stops of the armature-lever very lightly, hav 
ing no effect on its pivot 5 to make it loose, 
and its friction on the said stops does not ap 
preciably resist the movement of the said 
lever. 
It is obvious that the stopping devicer could 
readily be adapted to be operated in a ma 
chine actuated by a weight, the rod t or its 
equivalent being then engaged, for example, 
by a knot or projection on the cord or chain 
by which the weight is suspended. 
If desired to have the signal indicate safe 
ty when the magnetis demagnetized, it is only 
necessary to turn the signal a quarter of a 
revolution in its socket. 
We claim 
1. In a railway signal apparatus, a visual 
signal, a mechanical motor to place it, and de 
tent-studs to stop it in different positions, com 
bined with a detent-lever provided with a 
shoulder to engage and hold the said studs, 
and adapted to be vibrated in one direction 
under the pressure of one of the said studs 
engaged to hold the signal in one position, as 
indicating safety, and to be vibrated in the 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
 
4. 
233,612 
IO 
5 
other direction under the stress of a stud, hold 
ing the signal in the other position, as to indi 
cate danger, and an electro-magnet and its 
arunature adapted to stop the vibration of the 
said detent-lever in one direction when at 
tracted by, and in the other direction when 
released from, its magnet, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
2. In a railway signal apparatus, a mechani 
cally-actuated signal and detent-lever to stop 
it in different positions, an electro-magnet, and 
armature-lever therefor provided with a stop 
having a front face to engage and hold the 
said detent-lever when in proper position, and 
inclined on its rear surface, to enable the de 
tent-lever to move it aside and pass it when 
engaging it on its rear side, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
3. A mechanically-operated signal appara 
tus and detent-lever to engage and stop it in 
different positions, combined with an arma 
ture-lever and an electro-magnet to control it, 
and a pivoted stop thereon to engage the said 
detent-lever when in proper position and pre 
vent it from moving in one direction, but 
adapted to be turned aside on its pivot, to al 
low the said detent-lever to pass by it in the 
other direction, substantially as described. 
4. An electro-magnet and its armature and 
Witnesses: 
L. F. CoNNOR, 
JOS. P. LIVERMORE. 
lever therefor, adapted by its weight to draw 
the armature away from the said magnet when 
demagnetized, combined with the adjustable 
detaching-spring adapted to be adjusted to 
bear on the armature-lever only when close to 
the poles of its electro-magnet, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
5. In a mechanically-actuated railway-Sig 
nal, a stopping device therefor adapted to be 
engaged by the actuating - power, and moved 
thereby into position to engage and stop the 
signal mechanism in position to indicate dan 
ger before the said actuating-power is wholly 
exhausted, substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with the actuating 
spring, of a rock-shaft and arm thereon to be 
engaged by the said spring to rotate the said 
shaft, and a hooked Stop-arm to engage a pin 
and stop the signal mechanism. When the sig 
nal is in position to indicate danger, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
OSCAR GASSETT. 
ISRAEL FISEER. 
45 
SO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233712.txt	No. 233,712. 
Patented Oct. 26, 1880. 
  
 
 
Z 
F1 G.3. 
 
UNITED, STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT H. THURSTON, OF HOBOKEN, NEW JERSEY. 
TESTING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 233,712, dated October 26, 1880. 
Application filed February 18, 1880. 
IC 
To all whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, ROBERTH. THURSTON, 
of Hoboken, Hudson county, State of New Jer 
sey, have inwented a new and Improved Con 
struction of Jaws for Holding Test-Pieces; 
and I do lhereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, 
reference beinghadto the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 illustrates the test-piece as it is 
usually formed when the material is to be 
tested by torsion. The ends a a" are held in 
the jaws of the testing-machine. The smaller 
portion, b, between is unsupported, and its 
length and section are given the dimensions 
of the piece of which it is desired to know the 
resistance ofered. 
Fig. 2 ilustrates the usual construction of 
tlejawsoftle testing-machine,which hold the 
test-piece. The ends a a" insert into the cor 
responding recesses A. A' in the jaws. Force 
is applied, as shown by the arrow F, to revolve 
the jaw A and the end a of the test-piece, 
wlich is held by it, and this force is opposed 
by a suitable resistance, R, given to the other 
jaw, A", and consequently to its end a" of the 
test-piece. 
Itis essential that the axis of tle test-piece 
should exactly coincide with the axis of the 
jaws. To make thisadjustmentasis nowdone, 
by the insertion of thin plates between the 
faces of the test-piece and jaws, requires much 
painstaking, and is rarely effected with the 
requisite exactness. 
My improved means for adjustment consist i 
30 
 
35 
W 
of the centers C C in the axisa y of the jaws. 
One of these may be backed by a spring, D, 
which will press that center forward against 
the end of the test-piece with a force sufi 
cient to hold tle test-piece until it be secured. 
The centers insert into the same holes at the 
ends of the test-piece that Were used when 
turning up the latter in the lathe. The axis 
of the jaws must therefore coinciele exactly 
with the center of the test-piece. Should these 
center holes have been cut of the test-piece 
call be recentered in a latlne. 
Forgreater convenience im securing the test 
pieces I use the following construction: The 
recesses in the jaws which receive the ends of 
the test-piece are considerably enlarged, andi 
are best formed as a slot, T. T', extending 
through the jaws transversely to the axis, as 
shown in Figs. 3, 4, 5. When the test-piece 
is centered, Fig. 3, two wedges, IF F", are 
pressed in between the faces of the test-piece 
and those of the slot, and thus ho?d the test 
piece So that it cannot yield. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent 
1. The Combination, with the jaws of a test 
ing-machinie, of the centers C C and spring D. 
2. Tle slot T and pair of wedges F F" com 
bined, to hold the test-piece, substantially as 
W 
set forth. 
ROBERT H. THURSTON. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
E. H. BouGHTON, 
JOS. WHITINEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233812.txt	(No Model.) 
r 
J, SMITH, 
Baling Press. 
No. 233,812. 
Patented Oct. 26, 1880. 
 
S8)ity cyscs, 
W4, /347 a. 
& Csalak 
31-uc 11-tet, 
Jo?hi Sanith. 
by (32. 
Attorney 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN SMITH, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
BALING-PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 283,812, dated October 26, 1880. 
Application filed September 1, 1880. 
(No model.) 
IO 
IS 
20 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN SMITH, of Balti 
more city, State of Maryland, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Bal 
5 ing-Presses; and I hereby declare the same to 
be fully, clearly, and exactly described as fol 
lows, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure is an end elevation of the press, 
and Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the chain 
drum. 
My invention relates to hay, straw, or cot 
ton presses in general, and to that class of 
the same in which the follower is lifted by 
means of a chain wound upon a conical or 
tapering drum actuated by means of a ratch 
et-wheel, pawl, and lever. 
My invention consists in an improved mech 
anism for operating the ratchet-wheel, as here 
in after set forth. 
Proceeding to a description of the mechan 
ism whereby these ends are attained, and re 
ferring to the accompanying drawings, A is 
the press-body, having the usual end beams, 
25 A' A', hinged side A', top beam, C, secured 
by links B, that are hinged to a cross-bar, b, 
lever D, and pawl H. These parts are all of 
the ordinary construction and operate in the 
usual Way. 
E" is a link embracing the lever D, and 
serving as a fulcrum-rod for the same, and 
connected thereto at its end, and is also at 
tached to the shaft f of the drum I, turning 
freely thereon. 
A link, a, pivoted to the end of the lever 
D, engages with the teeth of the wheel G, and 
a second link or pawl, E, pivoted to the lever 
at some distance from its end, also engages 
with the teeth of the wheel, as shown. Both 
4o links are pressed into engagement with the 
teeth by means of a double-leaf spring, c, 
having arms c' c'. 
One side of the press is hinged, as usual, 
35 
- 
 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
at h, and the side beams are secured by 
catches e. e. 
On the shaft f is keyed a tapering drum, I, 
around which the chain i, that is attached to 
the follower-beam J., is wound. This drum is 
provided with a groove, K, of a width equal 
to the thickness of the links, and of a depth 
equal to the part of the link that projects lat 
erally beyond the plane of the adjacent links, 
the design being to so conform the groove to 
the links that the latter will wrap smoothly 
on the drum, every other link lying in a plane 
about at right angles with the shaft, and the 
others flatwise on the face of the drum. By 
these means, as the chain is wound up, each 
link falls smoothly in place and the chain is 
not twisted. 
In operation, as the lever D is depressed, 
the links at and E engage with the teeth of 
the ratchet-wheel G, the link a operating to 
pull and the link E to push and turn the drum, 
winding the chain thereon and lifting the fol 
lower. 
At first the effective leverage is slight, by 
reason of the large radius of the drum at its 
outer end, and the follower rises swiftly. As 
the contents of the press become condensed, 
the effective leverage increases, the chain 
winding then on the small end of the drum. 
Engaging, as it does, with two teeth of the 
wheel, the lever distributes its strain, and the 
danger of breakage is lessened. 
What I claim is 
1. In combination with the lever D, having 
links Ea, and the spring c, the ratchet-wheel, 
drum, chain, and follower, as set forth. 
2. In combination with the ratchet - wheel 
and pawl H, the link E, lever D, spring c, 
having arms c' c', and links Ea, as set forth. 
JOHN SMITH. 
Attest: 
R. D. WILLIAMs, 
JOHN C. GITTINGER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US233912.txt	(No Model.) 
J. S. BANCROFT. 
Cord Edge for Hat Brims. 
No. 233,912. 
Patented Nov. 2, 188O. 
 
es 
'it': 
(2, 4.1%. 
 
A 2 
777/e/ZZ2/. 
04. 8. /34-cy 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN S. BANCROFT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CORD EDGE FOR HAT- BRMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 233,912, dated November 2, 1880. 
Application filed May 4, 1880. 
(No model.) 
SO 
55 
75 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN S. BANCROFT, of 
New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a new and Improved 
Cord-Edge for Eat-Brims, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in the 
arrangement for curving up the edge of soft 
hat-brims; and it consists in applying an end 
less cord to the brim, and in a new way of se 
curing it in place, so that it will have perfect 
liberty to adjust itself around the brim and 
hold the latter always properly contracted. 
The invention is applicable to soft-felt, straw, 
or other flexible hats. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a top view of a hat having an up 
curved brim. Fig.2 represents a bottom view 
of the hat with the lapped-over portion of the 
brim removed and exposing the cord, and Fig. 
3 is a cross-section of Fig. 1 on line at ac. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
crown of the hat; B, the up-curved flexible 
brim. In the edge of the brim, under a lapped 
under portion, a, is placed a cord, C, which is 
continuous or endless and of less diameter 
than the brim B. To set the cord C in place 
the brim is pressed upward into a curved form, 
as shown, so as to make its diameter about 
correspond to that of the cord C, which is then 
placed against the under side of the brim and 
secured in place by a thread, b, which is sewed 
directly through the brim, but whipped over 
the cord without passing through it. By this 
mode of fastening the cord is held in connec 
tion with the brim, so that there is no liability 
of its slipping or moving laterally; but it is 
permitted to slip longitudinally around the 
brim, and thus adjust itself in place, whereby, 
in case the cord shrinks, it will draw the brim 
all around evenly, instead of in places, as when 
the cord is stitched to the brim. By making 
the cord continuous it braces or supports the 
brim in its upward-curved position. A flap, 
a, on the brim is folded over the cord to con 
ceal the same and Sewed fast at its edge. It 
will be observed that the cord is connected 
with the brim by passing the threadb through 
and through the brim and leaving the cord 
free to contract in the direction of its length; 
and in case a binding is used to inclose the 
cord, instead of covering it under the flap a 
the thread is whipped over the cord C and 
passed through the edge of the brim, as before. 
The object in thus connecting the flexible 
cord C with the brim, instead of sewing through 
and through it in the usual manner, is to 
avoid attaching it in such a manner as to pre 
vent it from contracting freely without affect 
ing the brim. By this arrangement I succeed 
in giving form to the brim without the use of 
metal, which will discolor the hat when wet 
through with rain. 
I am aware that hat-brims have been pro 
vided with stiffening - cords, and also that 
brims have been made with rolled or turned 
over edges, thus dispensing with the usual 
binding. I therefore make no claim to either 
of said features, broadly; but, owing to the 
difficulty attending the insertion of the shap 
ing-cord, no soft hat-brims, I believe, have 
heretofore been made with a shaping-cord and 
a folded edge. 
What I claim is 
1. The method of finishing soft hats con 
sisting in attaching to the brim all endless 
cord, C, of less diameter than the brim, by a 
series of stitches, b, which latter pass through 
the brim and are whipped over the cord C to 
hold the latter in place Without preventing its 
free longitudinal movement, and finally fold 
ing the edge of the brim over said cord and 
stitching it, substantially as set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a soft 
hat the brim of which is provided with an 
endless cord, C, of less diameter than the 
brim, said cord being attached directly to the 
brim by a whipped thread, b, and the brim 
lapped over said cord and stitched, to give a 
finished appearance to the hat, substantially 
as set forth. 
JOHN S. BANCROFT. 
Witnesses : 
WILLY G. E. SCHULTZ, 
WILTON C, DONN, 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234012.txt	(No Model.) 
L., A. FISH, 
Bag Holder, 
No. 234,012. 
Patented Nov. 2, 188O. 
 
 
27%testseries), , 
62%2 ^ 
age 
ea 
1. 
WITNESSES 
C.../z. 
As 
e/e7 3. 
INVENTOR: 
-Jezcz, 
BY Muse 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
 
 
(UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS A. FISH, OF FARIBAULT, MINNESOTA. 
BAG - HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,012, dated November 2, 1880. 
Application filed July 13, 1880. 
(No model.) 
S. 
O 
IS 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEWISA. FISH, of Fari 
bault, in the county of Rice and State of Min 
nesota, have invented a new and Improved 
Bag-Holder, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
a simple and convenient device especially 
adapted for use in flouring-mills and feed 
stores and granaries for holding bags open 
for filling and conveying them, open or closed, 
from one place to another. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with the frame provided with staples, a base 
plate, and wheels, of the fixed and the adjusta 
ble toothed holder, each provided with curved 
arms; and in the combination, with the fixed 
holder, consisting of a plate having a vertical 
and horizontal arm, of the laterally-adjustable 
holder, consisting of a plate toothed on its 
lower edge, moving laterally between staples, 
with one of which staples the teeth engage, 
and having a central vertical and horizontal 
arm, that receives and holds one side of the 
bag, as will be hereinafter fully described. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the device 
With an open bag secured in position. Fig. 2 
is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
cross-section on line a ac, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A represents an upright 
'frame, support, or standard, consisting, in this 
instance, of a frame, a, strengthened by cross 
bars b b, having handles c. c. The frame A is 
Sustained in an upright position by means of 
a base-plate, A', which is attached, by screws 
or bolts s, to the lower end of frame A. The 
base-plate A' is bent at right angles, and the 
front portion, d, extends in front of frame A 
where it rests upon the ground and supports 
the frame A on one side, the other side of frame 
A being supported by the wheelsh, which rest 
on the ground, and are attached by axle g to 
lugs or ears.f, that project from the rear part 
of the base-plate A', as shown. The frame A 
is thus firmly supported on both sides in an 
upright position by means of the base-plate 
A'. When it is necessary to move the appa 
ratus the frame A is turned down to an in- 5o 
clined position, so that it will rest and run on 
the wheels h. 
B represents the fixed section of the bag 
holder, consisting of a plate, k', having a short 
vertical arm, k, with a long horizontal arm, l, 55 
carried on the end thereof, and said section B 
is secured to the face of the support A, near 
one side thereof and a little below the upper 
edge, by screws m or other convenient device, 
and Said vertical arm k has its lower end 6o 
slightly sprung forward, as shown at n, Fig. 
3, thereby holding and supporting the hori 
Zontal arm l off from the face of the support 
A, in order that the upper edge of a bag may 
be readily introduced between said section B 65 
and frame A, said arm t being continued a 
short distance toward the edge of the support 
A and parallel with the face of said support, 
is then bent outward, as slhown at v, Fig. 3, at 
right angles to the face thereof, and has its 7o 
extreme end curved inward, as shown at 0, to 
prevent injury to the bag which it assists in 
holding. 
C represents the laterally-adjustable sec 
tion of the bag-holder, consisting of a metal 75 
plate, o, toothed or serrated on its lower edge, 
and held and sliding horizontally in the sta 
ples EE, that are fixed vertically and parallel 
with each other in the face of the support A, 
while from the center of the horizontal plate 8o 
o a short arm, p, depends perpendicularly and 
is slightly sprung outward, as shown at q, Fig. 
3, to admit of the introduction of the upper 
edge of a bag behind it, and said arm p carries 
on its lower end and at right angles there with 85 
a long horizontal arm, r, that extends a short 
distance toward the contiguous edge of the 
support A, parallel with the face of said sup 
port, and is then bent outward at right angles, 
as shown at ac, and has its extreme end bent go 
inward, as shown at 2, toward the holder-sec 
tion B. 
D represents a bag in position on the device, 
the mouth of said bag D being held open by 
the engagement therein of the horizontal bent 95 
arms of the sections BC of the bag-holder, the 
section C being moved laterally to produce the 
required tension of the mouth of said bag D, 
35 
45 
2 
234,012 
curved arm raca, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
2. In a bag-holder, the combination, with the 
fixed holder B, consisting of the plate k", hav 
ing a vertical and horizontal arm, kl, of the 
laterally-adjustable holder C, consisting of a 
plate, o, toothed on its lower edge, moving lat 
erally between staples E, with one of which 
staples the teeth engage, and having a central 
vertical and horizontal arm, p r, that receives 
and holds one side of the bag, all as set forth. 
25 
LEWIS AUSTIN FISH. 
Witnesses: 
R. A. MoTT, 
C. C. PERKINS. 
and then fastened in place by the engagement 
of one of its teeth, m', in the outer staple, E, 
and thus said bag Disheld open and supported 
in position to be filled. 
By moving the holder or section C inward 
the tension is relieved and the mouth of the 
bag D can be readily removed from the bag 
holder. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
to claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a bag-holder, the combination, with the 
frame A, provided with the staples E, the base 
plate A', and wheelsh, of the fixed holder B, 
15 provided with the curved arm lac, and the ad 
justable toothed holder C, provided with the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234112.txt	P. E. AUSTIN & B. W. NICHOLS. 
Shuttle Carrier for Sewing Machines. 
No. 234,112. 
Patented Nov. 9, 1880. 
?er/SE --- 
s ,/ -s. 
== eel I 
G - = - 
-tz 
NSN 
N 
A. 
 
ca, 
Z7 
S 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
x 32 2 fiS 
7 
NA 
Z77/e7zzo7: 
12 
221 >3% 23. 
2 2-6-4 
 
N. PeTERs, Photo-LTHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHINEAS E. AUSTIN AND BYRON W. NICHOLS, OF NEW HAVEN, CONN. 
SHUTTLE-CARRIER FOR SEWING-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,112, dated November 9, 1880. 
Application filed February 18, 1880. 
-IO 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, PHINEAS E. AUSTIN 
and BYRON W.NICHOLs, citizens of the United 
States, residing at New Haven, in the county 
of New Haven and State of Connecticut, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Shuttle-Carriers for Sewing-Machines; and 
we do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form apart of this speci 
fication. 
In this invention a hood-shaped carrier, 
which is adapted to inclose the shuttle and 
which can be slid back and forth on the shut 
tle-lever, is attached thereto by a sleeve and 
is held to its place by a spiral spring. The 
shuttle-carrier is made so as to cover the swell 
of the shuttle sufficiently to keep it in posi 
tion while in motion, and this construction en 
ables the shuttle to be poised or balanced so 
that it will not rest its own weight against the 
shuttle-race. It also prevents the flying out 
of the shuttle if the race-covers be removed 
while the machine is in motion. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a bottom or under side view of the 
invention attached to the bedplate of a sew 
ing-machine of that class which is provided 
with a curved shuttle-race. Fig. 2 is a top 
view of the shuttle-driving lever with the im 
provement attached. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal 
section of the same. Fig. 4 represents a modi 
fication of the invention in which the shuttle 
carrier is attached to the vibrating lever by a 
pin or screw passing through a slot in said 
lever, and the spring is coiled on a rod One 
end of which is attached to the screw or bolt 
and the other slides in a stud, as shown. 
The shuttle-carlier A is attached to the vi 
bratory shuttle-lever by a sleeve, B, and held 
in position by a spiral spring, C, which is coiled 
around the shuttle-lever and presses against 
the sleeve of the carrier, forcing it outward and 
keeping it in position against the shuttle-race. 
The carrier is hood-shaped, as shown, and is 
So constructed ofmetalor any other suitable mate 
rial, and covers the swell or circle of the shut 
45 
35 
Witnesses: 
A. HEATON ROBERTSON, 
ANDREW O'NEILL. 
tle sufficiently to render it impossible to re 
move or insert the shuttle without moving the 
carrier away from the shuttle-race. The top 
side of the carrier may be cut away, as shown 55 
by dotted lines, to allow the passage of the 
thread around the tension-spring on the shut 
tle in cases where such a spring is used. 
The shuttle-lever is in two parts, D D, which 
are clamped together by a clamp-bolt, E, as 
shown, so that said lever can be adjusted as 
to length to take up wear and regulate the ten 
sion of the spring. 
The carrier is prevented from turning by a 
pin, d, projecting through a slot, b, in the 
sleeve. 
In order to remove the shuttle from the car 
rier it is slid back on the lever, and to insert 
it in position for use it is only necessary to 
enter the point of it between the carrier and 
the side of the race and it is readily pressed 
into place, the spring allowing the carrier to 
recede sufficiently for the purpose and then 
automatically forcing it to its place. 
The modification shown in Fig. 4 is adapted 
for machines as they are now generally made. 
The carrier is attached to the lever by a screw, 
F, which passes through a longitudinal slot, 
G, in the lever D, and the spring C is coiled 
around a rod, one end of which is secured to 
the screw F and the other slides in a stud or 
projection, H., on the lever. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the hood-shaped shut 
tle-carrier A, provided with sleeve B, the spring 
C, and adjustable shuttle-lever D D, all con 
structed and arranged as herein set forth, for 
the purpose specified. 
2. The combination of the shuttle-carrier A, 
having sleeve B, provided with slot b, spring 
C, adjustable lever DD', clamp pin or bolt E, 
and pin d, all arranged as herein set forth, for 
the purpose specified. 
-- 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
85 
95 
9o 
PEINEAS E. AUSTIN. 
BYRON W. NICBOLS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234212.txt	C. TESSIE du MOTAY. 
Process for Treating Copper 0 res. 
4. Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 234,212. 
Patented Nov. 9, 1880. 
 
C. TESSIE du MOTAY. 
Process for Treating Copper Ores. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 234,212. 
Patented Nov. 9, 188O. 
  
assists SE 
$53,535;35&SE 
- 
A A . A 
22 
s 
 
2 
a 
 
C. TESSIE du MOTAY. 
Process for 
Treating Copper 0 res. 
No. 234,212. 
Patented Nov. 9, 188O. 
 
 
 
E. 3 
. 
92 
s 
s 
2S (6. 
2. 2. 
ae ????:????????????&<ae 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CYPRIEN TESSIE DU MOTAY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO EDWARD 
STERN, OF SAME PLACE. 
PROCESS OF TREATING COPPER O RES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,212, dated November 9, 1880. 
Application filed November 18, 1879. 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
MoTAY, of the city, county, and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Process 
s of Treating Copper Ores, of which the follow 
ing is a full, true, and exact description, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
lings. 
My process is especially applicable to cop 
Io per pyrites, being the double sulphides of iron 
and copper. These ores have hitherto been 
very difficult to reduce, the expense of the 
process being generally more than the value 
of the result. My process, however, is very 
I5 simple and inexpensive, requiring but little 
fuel, and reducing the pyrites in one opera 
tion to the state of metallic copper. The man 
ner of treating the pyritesis by forcing through 
them, while in a melted condition, air, steam, 
2O and a combustible gas, in a manner to be here 
inafter explained. 
The apparatus used in carrying out my pro 
cess is plainly shown in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section through 
my reducing-furnace; Fig. 2, a section through 
Fig. 1 on the line XX; Fig. 3, a section on 
the line Y Y through Fig. 1. Fig. 4 repre 
sents a vertical section of a modified form of 
My apparatus consists, generally, in a cham 
ber or furnace so constructed as to contain the 
melted ores to be treated, and to facilitate the 
forcing through the ores in a molten condition 
35 of the various gases before referred to. In the 
form shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 it consists, 
generally, of a U-shaped chamber or furnace, 
one end being closed and the other being open 
for the escape of the gases, and connected with 
4o the chimney G, as shown. The chamber is 
divided, as shown, by a partition, R, provided 
with an opening, O, at its bottom. In other 
words, the divided partition does not entirely 
separate the chamber. 
Arranged to communicate with the closed 
portion of the chamber are three reservoirs, 
containing the gas, steam, and air to be used, 
lettered, respectively, A, B, and C. These 
communicate with the furnaces by pipes a, b, 
and 0, each provided with a valve, , as shown. 
Be it known that I, CYPRIEN TESSIE DU The vessel A contains a combustible gas, pref. 
erably that known as water-gas, at a suitable 
pressure-say, of three or four atmospheres. 
The vessel B contains steam, preferably super 
heated, and at about the same pressure. The 
vessel C contains compressed air, also at about 
the same pressure. 
The steam used in the vessel B may be pro 
duced by the same apparatus which makes the 
water-gas contained in the vessel A; or the 
vessel B may represent a boiler preferably pro 
vided with a suitable superheating apparatus. 
The furnace F is also provided with a suitable 
supply-aperture, P, and a delivery-aperture, 
D. These are arranged to be properly closed 
by plugs or valves, as shown. 
The copper pyrites, having been first melted 
in an apparatus suitably arranged, are caused 
to flow into the furnace F through the supply 
opening P. The vessel containing compressed 
air, which air may also be heated, is put in 
communication, by means of the tube C, with 
the closed portion of the furnace- chamber. 
The pressure existing in this portion forces 
the air downward and through the melted 
pyrites beneath. The result of this operation 
is, that the sulphur oxidizes, burning with 
great heat, serving to still further liquefy the 
mass, and leaves it in the condition of mingled 
oxide and protoxide of iron and oxide and 
protoxide of copper. The communication with 
the reservoir of steam is then opened, which 
causes the mingled air and steam to pass 
through the molten mass. The result of this 
is the conversion of the oxide and protoxide 
of copper into the protoxide of copper, and the 
protoxide of copper, being heavier, falls to the 
bottom and the protoxide ofiron floats on its sur 
face. As Soon as all the sulphur has been oxi 
dized, which is known by the circumstance 
that sulphurous acid is no longer formed, the 
supply of steam is cut off, and the third reser. 
voir, containing the combustible gas, is put in 
communication with the closed end of the fur 
nace. This gas, mingling with the air which 
is being supplied through the pipe C, burns 
With great intensity, and thoroughly liquefies 
the iron and copper contained in the furnace. 
3O my apparatus. 
95 
25 
45 
 
34,212 
. 
S 
. 
. 
1o toxide of copper is reduced to the condition of consists inforcing air through them when it 
The gas used should be one containing a cer. ber. O, and so into the atmosphere. The op-3o 
tain amount of hydrogen, either free or in cration is precisely similar. 
combination with a gas, and a certail amount 
I do not claim, broadly, the use of steam for 
of water in the condition of steam. The the purpose of separating copper from iron, 
supplies of air and of combustible gas are so that being old in the art. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 35 
regulated that the resulting flame is a reduc- 
ing flame, the gas being in excess of the secure by Letters Patent, is 
quantity which can be burned with the air, 
1. The process of separating the oxides of 
. The result of this operation is, that the pro- copper and iron produced from pyrites, which 
metallic copper; but the protoxide of iron is inelted, thereby reducing them to the condi- 4o 
not reduced, owing to the presence of the wa-'tio of mingled oxides and protoxides of iron 
liter of combustion. When this has been and copper, and subsequently separating the 
. thoroughly accomplished the delivery-aper. copper from the iron by forcing steam through it 
. 
. 
. 
15ture is opened and the melted copper is al. the melted mass, substantially as described. 
lowed to flow out through the aperture I). 
2. The process of producing metallic copper 45 
The melted protoxide of iron follows, and may 
from copper pyrites, which consists inforcing 
be received in a separate receptacle, or may air and steam through the molten mass, there. 
be allowed to fall upon the top of the copper, by reducing it to a condition of mingled pro 
20 from which, when cool, it is easily separated toxide of copper and iron, and subsequently 
by a blow. 
Fig. 4 represents, a modification, in which sing hydrogen and water, thereby reducing the 
an annular partition divides a cylindrical re- protoxide of copper to metallic copper, sub 
site two portions, the in iner one being closed stantially as described. 
treating then with a reducing-flame contain. 5o 
; 
; 
; 
; ; 
: 
25 for the reception of the gas, steam, or air, le. : 
5 Fi to, and the outerioratinular clan. 
ber being in communication with the atmos. 
phere by chimney G. The gas escapes from 
the inner chamber through the annular chan. 
Witnesses: ; 
: 
; 
C. TESSIE DUMOTAY 
; 
; ; ; ; 
. 
iss 
; ; 
; 
; 
; ; ; 
S. F. SULLIVAN, 
WM. A. POLLOCK. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
  
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234312.txt	(No Model.) 
E. McGOWERN 
Securing Boiler Tubes. 
No. 234,312. 
Patentes Nov. 9, 188O. 
m rar"Mimmomaximmemorax: "ca 
2 
 
Es 
P -- ci IT 
C. 
 
HN EN s 
auzW2 M 
A/G, 2. 
 
Jitnesses; 
culouia ow 
4,A4% 
Inventor, 
Apward M9 Govern, 
will. It's. 
storney. 
i. PEERS. Horo-LTHoGRAPHER, washington, 
c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD McGOVERN, OF ONEONTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO ROBERT 
C. BLACKALL, OF ALBANY, NEW YORK. 
SECURING BOILER-TUBES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,312, dated November 9, 1880. 
Application filed March 22, 1880. 
(No model.) 
55 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWARD McGovERN, of 
Oneonta, in the county of Otsego and State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
ful Device for Securing the Ends of Tubes in 
Steam-Boilers and other Structures, of which 
the following is a full and exact description. 
My invention consists of a metallic sleeve 
of a slightly-tapering exterior form, provided 
With an annular flange and adapted to fit on 
the outer diameter of the tube, and of a ductile 
metal bushing interposed between the tapered 
surface of said sleeve and the tube-hole in the 
tube-sheet. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
reliable fastening for the ends of boiler-tubes, 
Water-grate bars, &c. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, and to which ref. 
erence is herein made, Figure 1 is a side ele 
vation of the end of a boiler-tube secured by my 
device, the tube-sheet and bushing being shown 
in section; Fig. 2, a longitudinal section of 
the sleeve; Fig. 3, an end view of same, and 
Fig. 4 a side elevation of my device as applied 
to the tubes of water-grate bars. 
A is the tube; B, the tube-sheet in which 
the tube is fastened; C, the fastening-sleeve; 
D, the bushing. 
The boiler-tube A may, when desired, be 
fastened at one end to one of the tube-sheets 
by any of the old and Well-known modes, and 
at the opposite end it may be secured by my 
fastening. 
When my device is used on old tubes that 
are to be restored to their places in an old 
boiler where the holes for receiving them can 
not be readily enlarged, the end of each tube 
should be swaged down to allow sufficient 
space between the tube and the hole in the 
tube-sheet to receive the sleeve and bushing. 
The fastening-sleeve C is usually made of 
wrought-iron. The bore of each is of a uni 
form size and should fit the external surface 
of the tube on which it is used. As usually 
made the tubular portion of it is one and 
three-fourths inch long, and it is tapered on 
its outside about one thirty-second of an inch 
on each side in that length. At its larger end 
it is provided with an annular flange, c, which, 
when the sleeve is driven home, bears against 
the flange produced on the bushing and holds 
it against the face of the tube-sheet B. . The 
outer end of the bore of the sleeve is cham 
fered to form the countersink c', into which 
the end of the tube should be upset or riveted 
to hold the sleeve more securely in place. 
In the tubular part of the sleeve a fine lon 
gitudinal slit, c, is made, which extends from 
the smaller end of the sleeve and terminates 
near the flange c, the distance from said flange 
being equal to about one-half the thickness of 
the tube-sheet. The object of said slit is to 
facilitate the placement of the sleeve and per 
mit the same to either enlarge or compress, 
as occasion may require, when it is driven to 
its place. 
The bushing D is made of copper or other 
equally ductile metal. It is cylindrical in 
form, and is interposed between the hole in 
the tube-sheet B and the sleeve C in such man 
ner that by the act of driving in the sleeve 
the outer end of the bushing is expanded to 
form thereon an annular flange, d, which re 
mains between the flange of the sleeve and 
the tube-sheet. At the same time the tubul 
lar part of the bushing becomes compressed 
to form a tight joint with the tube-sheet and 
sleeve, and the sleeve C, by reason of the slit 
c, is compressed to form a tight joint with the 
tube. 
In constructing water-grates in boilers with 
internal fire-boxes one end of the tube may 
be screwed into the tube-sheet at one end of 
the fire-box, and at the opposite end my de 
vice may be used for the fastening. In such 
cases the sleeve C and bushing D are first 
slipped onto the tube A, and the end on which 
my device is used is passed into the hole pre 
pared for my fastening, after which the screwed 
end of the tube may be inserted and secured 
in its place, and then the sleeve and bushing 
are driven in to complete the fastening of the 
tube. When applied in the manner last de 
scribed, the flanged end of the sleeve is placed 
toward the middle of the tube, as shown in 
Fig. 4. 
I claim as my invention 
1. As a device for securing the ends of tubes 
in tube-sheets, the taper sleeve C, arranged on 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
284,392 
the outside of the tube, and provided with a 
flange, c, and slit c, essentially as hereil 
specified. 
2. The combination, with tube A and tube. 
5 sheet 13, of the taper sleeve C, arranged on 
the outside of the tube, and having a flange, 
c, and slit c, as herein described, and the due 
tile bushing D, as and for the purpose herein 
specified. 
EDWARD MCGOVERN. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. H. Low, 
WILLIAM II. SEWARD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234412.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 234,412. 
G. P. & L. J. LEE, 
Fruit Drier. 
Patented Nov. 16, 1880. 
7Fitnesses: 
27e/262s 
235(c.2: 
 
N. PETERs, photo-LITHoGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE P. LEE AND LEVERETT J. LEE, OF GREECE, NEW YORK. 
FRUIT. DRER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,412, dated November 16, 1880. 
Application filed June 17, 1880. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that we, GEORGE P. LEE and 
LEVERETT J. LEE, residents of the town of 
Greece, Monroe county, New York, have jointly 
invented certain Improvements in Fruit-Driers, 
of which the following is a specification, ref. 
erence being had to the annexed drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in sec 
tion, of our improved fruit-drier. Fig. 2 is a 
horizontal section on the line aca, Fig. 1, show 
ing the parts below that line. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation of the adjustable boxes which carry 
the ends of the rollers. Fig. 4 is a horizontal 
section of the same on the line y Q, Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a side view of the bracket which sup 
ports the roller ('. 
Our invention relates to an improved fruit 
drier, in which the fruit is dried while passing 
through a drying-chamber on a series of end 
less Wire- cloth belts placed one above the 
other, and arranged to deliver the fruit from 
one to the other, each lower belt having a 
slower motion imparted to it than that given 
to the one next above it. 
Our invention also consists in the combina 
tion, with the series of endless belts arranged 
as just mentioned, of a series of steam-heating 
pipes arranged between the belts and having 
a steam-circulation from above downward, for 
the purpose of Subjecting the greenest fruit to 
the hottest steam; and it also consists in the 
mechanical construction and arrangement of 
the apparatus, as hereinafter more fully pointed 
Out. 
Our improved fruit-drier is represented in 
the accompanying drawings, in which AA is 
the frame of the machine; B, the siding; C, 
the top or roof; D, the belts, and E the steam 
pipes. 
In the construction of our improved fruit 
drier We form an inclosure or drying-room, of 
a size adapted to the quantity of fruit to be 
operated upon, by constructing a suitable 
frame-work, A, and attaching sides, ends, and 
roof thereto, as represented in the accompany 
ing drawings. 
Within the drying-chamber and at each end 
thereof are placed a series of horizontal rollers, 
at a, a bb b, over which pass the endless wire 
cloth belts ID D. The ends of the rollers are 
supported in suitable boxes attached to the 
siding or frame of the machine. 
Motion is transmitted to the series of rollers 
bbl by means of a chain, d, running over pull 
leys e ee on the roller-journals, in such man 
ner that the upper parts of the belts DD travel 
in leverse directions, as represented by the 
arrows in Fig. 1, so that the fruit to be dried, 
being placed on the upper belt between the 
side of the machine and the rollera', is carried 
by it to the opposite end of the drying-cham 
ber and there delivered to the next lower 
belt, by which it is brought back to the right 
hand end of the machine, to be there delivered 
to the next succeeding belt, and so on from 
belt to belt until it is finally discharged from 
the machine, fully dried, by the lowest helt, 
at G, Fig. 1. 
Suitable chutes or guide-boards fff, placed 
across the machine below the ends of the belts 
in the proper positions, insure the delivery of 
the fruit from one belt to the next lower belt. 
The rollers are so placed that each belt is 
somewhat shorter than the next lower belt at 
one end or the other, so as to effect the de 
livery of the fruit from belt to belt as it passes 
downward through the machine. The motion 
of each belt is slightly slower than that of the 
next upper belt, the pinions on the rollers b b 
b being made larger from above downward, so 
that the lower belt travels two or three times 
as fast as the uppel' Ones. 
A chain, d, l'unning around the pinions, 
serves to revolve each alternate shaft l) in the 
opposite direction to that in which its neigh 
bor turns, so as to give motion in the proper 
directions to the belts DD ID. The chain is 
carried around corner pulleys, gh, and a crank, 
i, is attached to the shaft of one of the rollers 
b ll, by which the machine is operated. 
It is evident that the proper relative mo 
tions can be given to the belts DD ID by means 
of a train of gears With intermediates between 
the shafts where the pinions are small; but 
We prefer the chain, as herein shown. 
The journals of the rollers l b b are sup 
ported by boxes secured to an upright, j, on 
the side of the machine and forming part of 
the frame thereof. 
The journals of the roller's a ct a revolve in 
boxes m, Figs, 2 and 4, which are made ad 
5 
IO 
25 
45 
So 
95 
IOO 
2 
234,412 
55 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
into the lower part of the drying-chamber by 
sliding doors 
at the lower part of the ma 
chine. 
In Fig. 2 the wire-cloth belts are broken 
away, So as to show the steam-heating pipes. 
The ends of the wire-cloth belts may be con 
nected together by soldering, sewing with wire, 
or by hooks. 
A valve, s, for regulating the escape of air 
from the drying-chamber, may be placed in the 
top thereof. 
We are aware that steam-leating pipes have 
been previously used to leat a volume of air 
on its introduction into a drying-chamber con 
tailing a series of horizontal belts, and such 
arrangement we do not claim, as it is essential 
to the proper operation of our invention for 
the purpose of drying fruit that the steam 
heating pipes should be located between the 
fruit-carrying belts, and that the steam should 
be introduced into sail pipes at their upper 
ends, so that the greenest fruit on the upper 
most belts shall be suljected to the greatest 
degree of heat. 
We do not claim anything shown or de 
scribed in the patent of Miller, No. 44,260, or 
of Wilson and Catlin, No. 215,191. 
We claim 
1. In combination with a series of steam 
heating pipes, E. E. E., the endless wire-cloth 
belts DDD, arranged to deliver the fruit from 
Olne to the other, and lhaving differential mo 
tions in parted to then by means of pinions 
e e e, of differing sizes, and chain d, so that 
the lower belts move slower than those above 
them, Substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the series of belts ID 
D D, roller's a (, at l l b, roller af, located out 
side of the machine, and rollers a' (''' in the 
Openings through which the upper and lower 
belts pass in the side of the machine, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a fruit-drying chamber, a series of end 
less wire-cloth belts, DD D, passing over roll 
ers at either end thereof, arranged to deliver 
the fruit from one belt to the next lower, and 
having differential motions imparted to them 
by pinions ee e and chain d, substantially as 
described. 
GEO. P. LEE. 
LEVERETT. J. LEE. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. B. SELDEN, 
H. G. PHILLIPS. 
5 
Io 
IS 
justable lengthwise of the belts D D, for the 
purpose of regulating their tension. 
An Opening, p, Fig. 4, is inade through the 
side B of the machine for the purpose of per 
mitting the removal of the roller, and this 
opening is closed by the box in, which is pro 
vided with a flange, l, of sufficient width to 
cover the opening pin whatever position the 
box and roller may be placed, 
The flange l is provided with horizontal 
slots in n, Fig. 3, through which pass bolts oo, 
by which the box is secured to the siding. 
These slots permit the horizontal adjustment 
of the box in and rollers, so that the tension of 
the belt D may be regulated thereby. Each of 
the series of l'oller's at a is provided with these 
adjustable boxes at each end thereof. 
The roller a? is made adjustable by means of 
a sliding box, , attached to the bracket S by 
means of the bolt o'. Fig. 5. 
The position of the box in when moved to 
the right as far as the slots n n will permit is 
shown in dotted lines in l, Figs. 3 and 4. 
The journals of the roller af', the function of 
which is to support the belt D and to close 
the opening into the machine between the up 
per and lower portions of that belt, so that 
air cannot enter or escape through it, need not 
be made adjustable. 
Tile boxes of the roller ?t', which carries 
the right-halnd end of the lower belt, and also 
operates to prevent the passage of air, may be 
made adjustable by slightly changing the form 
of the flange l. 
The opellings thi'ough the side of the ma 
cline above the uppel' and lower belts are 
closed by a cloth or curtain, tt, attached to 
the side aud hanging down over the fruit, as 
it passes in and out of the machine, so as to 
prevent as much as possible the escape or en 
trance of air at these points. 
The Series of steam-pipes E E are supported 
by iron rods at at it, Fig. 1, passing across the 
machine. The pipes are connected at each end 
with suitable distributing-pipes 
, by which 
Steam is introduced into then. Steam is in 
troduced into the upper row of pipes by means 
of the Supply-pipe C, and disclarged from the 
lowest row through the pipe 2, the object being 
to Subject the fruit, when first introduced into 
the machine, to the greatest degree of heat. 
Steam passes from each upper row of pipes to 
the next lower row through pipes p' p'. 
Provision is made for the introduction of air 
4.O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234513.txt	(Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
E. WOOD WARD. 
B00 t and Shoe Sewing Machine, 
No. 234,513. 
Patented Nov. 16, 1880. 
 
 
A 
F. 
(Model.) 
B00t 
No. 234,513. 
E. WOODWARD. 
and Shoe Sewing Machine. 
w 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 16, 188O. 
 
 
 
 
N N 
 
  
 
 
NYZ, 
 
 
Fig 5. 
sc-4s 22-224-----e. 
INVENT OR 
4-4-27 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ERASTUS WOODWARD, OF BOSTON, ASSIGNOR TO GEORGE W. COPELAND, 
TRUSTEE, OF MALDEN, MASSACHUSETTS. 
- 
BOOT AND SHOE SEWING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,513, dated November 16, 1880. 
Application filed June 29, 1880. (Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ERASTUs WooDWARD, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and Com 
monwealth of Massachusetts, have invented 
5 an Improvement in Boot and Shoe Sewing 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention is an improvement upon that 
described in reissue Letters Patent No. 6,535, 
Io dated July 6, 1875, granted Gordon McKay 
and Robert H. Mathies, assignors to Gordon 
McKay, trustee. 
It consists in the combination of the horn 
with a whirl having alternate periods of rota 
I5 tion and rest as it is moved in one direction; 
also in mechanism for providing the whirl 
With Said movement. 
The Operation and construction of the horn 
and whirl are fully described in said Letters 
2O Patent, and also in Letters Patent No. 45,422, 
granted McKay and Blake, December 13, 1864, 
and in Various patents of subsequent date. 
The mechanism in the horn for operating 
the Whirl is the same mechanism that is de 
25 scribed in the said reissue Letters Patent No. 
6,535. 
Reference is made to the accompanying draw. 
ings, forming a part of this specification, in 
explaining the nature of my invention, in 
Figure 1 is a view, part in elevation and 
part in section, of my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
plan below the line a a of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a 
side elevation of my improvement. Fig. 4 is 
35 a cross-section on the liney y of Fig. 1, show 
ing one position of the operative mechanism 
hereinafter described. Fig. 5 is a cross-sec 
tion on the same line, showing another posi 
tion thereof. 
4o The whirls have been provided with alter. 
nate periods of rotation and rest for the pur. 
pose of feeding the thread to the hook-needles, 
as described in said reissue Letters Patent 
that is, the whirl has been made to turn around 
45 the needle about two-thirds of a revolution at 
a time, when the needle has arrived at the 
lowest part of its stroke, carrying and laying 
the thread into the hook of the needle, and 
then, when the needle is withdrawn from the 
So whirl, to return or turn back to its first posi 
3o which 
The shaft F has a bearing in the foot of the To 
tion, ready to again perform the operation of 
laying the thread into the hook of the needle. 
Instead of providing the whirl with alter 
nate periods of rotation and rest, in which the 
movement of the whirl is reversed between the 55 
rests, I provide the whirl with a movement of 
rotation in one direction, and provide one pe 
riod of rest for each complete revolution. 
A represents the horn; B, the work-plate 
bed or support; C, the whirl; c, a bevel-gear 6o 
upon the whirl; c', a bevel-gear upon the shaft 
D; d, the bevel-gear at the lower end of said 
shaft; e, the bevel-gear upon the horizontal 
shaft E, which engages with the bevel-gear di 
e', a bevel-gear upon the said shaft E, which 65 
engages with the bevel-gear f, upon the ver 
tical shaft F. Thus far, the construction is 
similar to that described in the said reissue 
Letters Patent. 
horn, and is operated by means of the cam 
groove G in the block g, and cam-pin H upon 
the cam-diskh. The shaft F projects upward 
from the central block, g, and furnishes the 
upper bearing thereof. Suitable bearing at 75 
the lower end of the block in the frame at is 
also provided. 
The cam-disk his revolved continuously by 
means of the shaft h", connected by the bevel 
gear h h and shaft h", or in any other de- 8o 
sirable manner, with the main shaft of the 
machine. 
The block g is further provided with the 
lugs (f, which are separated by a space, g, a 
trifle greater than the width of the cam-disk h, 85 
The lugs are so arranged upon the block as 
to bring the space between them in line with 
the upper portion of the cam-groove G. The 
cam-disk his cut away ath, leaving the b0SSh 
supporting the cam-pins H, and the shouldersh go 
are preferably somewhat beveled on their edge. 
Upon the revolution of the cam-disk the cam 
pin Henters the cam-groove G at its lowest 
point and revolves the block g, leaving the 
calm-groove at the upper end of the block. 95 
At the instant immediately preceding its dis 
engagement from the groove the cam-disk 
commences to enter the recess between the lug 
of at the point h, and the edge of the cam 
disk between the shoulders l' acts in connec- Ioo 
234,513 
So 
55 
65 
75 
time in which the revolution was made, and 
then again making a revolution. 
Having thus fully described the invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the supporting 
horn and whirl C mounted therein, of the block 
(1, provided With the cam-groove G, and the 
lugs (f, the cam-disk h, provided with the cam 
pin H and projecting portion h, and mechan 
ism for operating said disk and communicat 
ing the proper motion from said block g to the 
whirl, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the supporting 
horn and whirl C mounted therein, of the 
block (1, provided with the cam-groove G, the 
cam-disk h, provided with the cam-pin H and 
projecting portion l', and mechanism for rotat 
ing the disk h, and for communicating the 
proper rotary motion from the block g to the 
whirl, and for holding the block stationary 
during a portion of the rotation of said disk, 
whereby the whirl is caused to have alternate 
periods of rotation and rest, substantially as 
described. 
3. The combination, with the supporting 
horn and whirl mounted therein, of the block 
g, provided with the cam-groove G, the disk h, 
provided with the cam-pin H, and mechanism 
for rotating said disk, for communicating mo 
tion from the block of to the whirl and for lock 
ing the said block in a stationary position 
While the cam-pin H is not engaging the cam 
groove G, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with the supporting 
horn and whirl mounted therein, of the block 
9, provided with the spiral groove G., extend 
ing completely around the block and other 
wise shaped, as described, mechanism for com 
municating motion from the block to the whirl, 
and a revolving disk provided with the cam 
pin H, adapted to engage the cam-groove dur 
ing a portion of its revolution in revolving the 
blockg, and mechanism for revolving the cam 
disk, all substantially as set forth. 
ERASTUS WOODWARD. 
Witnesses: 
F. F. RAYMOND, 2d, 
A. J. OETTINGER. 
O 
tion with the lugs of in maintaining the block 
at rest until the cam-pin is about entering the 
lower portion of the cam-groove G, when the 
shoulder it passes beyond the lugs if and al 
lows the block to be revolved. 
The ratio of the rest to the movement of the 
block 1, as shown by the drawings, is about 
three to one, providing the calm-disk h has a 
uniform rate of speed at all times. 
By providing the blocks g with two cam 
grooves and the disk h, with two cam-pins, and 
in otherwise modifying the shape of the cam 
disk, the block of may be rotated twice in one 
revolution of the cam-disk h, and other modi 
fications of its movement are obvious. 
It will be observed that the space between 
the shoulders h7 and the boss I 
provides 
sufficient room for the rotation of the lugs of 
between them immediately after the com 
mencement and before the end of the rotation 
of the block g; also, that the portion h of the 
cam-disk, in connection with the lugs of, act 
as stops in holding the block (1 stationary un 
til the cam-pin has reached a position to en 
gage with the cam-groove; also, that the con 
struction and arrangement of the cam-disks, 
cam-pins, lugs, and cam-groove are such that 
the cam-pin must have entered, or must be 
about to enter, the cam-groove before the por 
tion h of the cam-disk has revolved beyond 
the lugs (f; also, that the cam-pin must be 
about leaving the cam-groove when the por 
tion h of the cam enters between the lugs. 
It is desirable that the block be brought to 
rest by the cam-pin, in which case, of course, 
the portion of the calm-groove at the lower and 
upper ends must be Substantially vertical. 
This construction is desirable in order that the 
lugs of may not backlash on the portion h of 
the cam-disk after the cam-pin H leaves the 
groove. 
The advantages of this invention consist 
mainly in the economy and simplicity of con 
struction. 
In operation, the Whirl C is revolved once 
for every revolution of the block (1, and then 
rests until it is again revolved by the cam-pin 
H and block G, the whirl making one com 
plete revolution, then resting about twice the 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234613.txt	G. RISLER, 
Cotton Picker. 
No. 234,613. 
Patented Nov. 16, 1880. 
 
(~~~~~ 
W 
W 
azuava azaz 
. PETERS, Phoro-LithographER, washington, d. c. 
N 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT 
 
GEORGE RISLER, OF SENNEIEIM, GERMANY. 
COTON PICKER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,613, dated November 16, 1880. 
Application filed February 17, 1880. Patented in Alsace May 15, 1875, and in Germany August 7, 1877. 
IO 
IS 
25 
To all chom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE, RISLER, of 
Sennheim, of Alsace-Lorraine, in the German 
Empire, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Cotton-Pickers, of which the 
following is a specification, 
The invention was patented in Alsace on the 
15th day of May, 1875, and in Germany on the 
7th day of August, 1877. 
My invention relates to the preparation of 
cotton for carding, and is carried out by cer 
tain new and useful mechanism, hereinafter set 
forth and claimed. 
Before the cotton is passed through a card 
ing-engine it is submitted to a treatment by 
my improved picker, which consists, essen 
tially, of revolving drums having toothed cov 
ers and being partially surrounded by grating. 
The manner in which the cotton is acted upon 
Tesembles very much the process of carding. 
A lap is obtained thereby, in which the fibers 
are laid very nearly parallel and are freed 
from tufts and curls. By this process the nec 
essary Succeeding operation is greatly facili 
tated. 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 
this specification. Figure 1 is an elevation of 
my device in section; Fig.2, a detail, showing 
the arrangement of the covered drums and grat 
ing. Figs. 3, 3, 3 are details of the toothed 
plates or cloth which cover the drums, showing 
the teeth of several different kinds and at sev 
eraldifferent inclinations. Fig. 4 is an enlarged 
view of one of the grated cylinders. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
OO is the framing sustaining the operating 
parts of the device. 
A is a cylinder, of cast-iron or wood, covered 
with plates b, which carry teeth, made of steel 
or other material, as shown in detail in Figs. 
3,3,3}. These teeth may be made of different 
forms and set at different inclinations, accord 
ing to the nature of the cotton to be worked.- 
D is a second cylinder, of smaller size, situ 
ated beneath the cylinder A, and similarly cov 
ered with toothed plates or cloth. C is a grat 
ing, which lies about the arc of the revolution 
of the cylinder A, which is between the feeder 
so and the drum D. E is a grating which par 
45 
35 
55 
tially surrounds the drum D. J is a third 
piece of grating, lying under the drum D. 
B is a feeding-roller controlled by levers b b'. 
The cotton passes this roller on its way from 
the feeder N to the drums AD. As the cotton 
passes about the drums it is picked and torn 
and has the tufts and curls straightened out, 
is freed from seed, leaves, &c., which fall 
through the grating. From these it is thrown 
up over the grating J J through the trunk F, 
in which, as already stated, it is laid in bats, 
and in a great lineasure straightened, and is 
drawn between the metallic cylinders G. G., 
which are situated at the upper and rear end 
of the trunk. From these cylinders the cotton 
is taken into the lap apparatus H, which con 
sists of a series of rollers, as is ordinarily used 
in machines of this character. 
In the trunk F are placed the cylinders K. 
K. These cylinders turn in the direction in 
which the cotton moves as it passes from the 
picking-drums A D to the condensing-cylin 
ders G. G. They are formed open and present 
cylindrical grates, through which leaves, seed, 
and other impurities having escaped the pick 
ers A D may drop and fall into the segmen 
tal receivers L, hanging from the shaft of the 
cylinder inside of the same, but not turning 
there with. The seed, leaves, &c., may be re 
moved from these receivers in any convenient 
manner. The number of these grate-cylinders 
may be increased as much as the needs of in 
dividual cases may require. 
The cleaning of the drums A D is always 
assured from the peculiar construction and ar 
rangement of the teeth thereon and by the sur 
rounding grating, which relieves them by al 
lowing the impurities to pass off. 
The bars in the grating C E J may be placed 
at different distances apart and at different in 
clinations relative to the revolution of the 
drums. 
I prefer to drive the cylinder A at a speed 
of nine hundred to one thousand revolutions 
per minute, and the cylinder D at a speed of 95 
six hundred and fifty to seven hundred and 
twenty revolutions per minute, in order to se 
cure the most efficient action and best result. 
The advantages gained by the use of my 
picker are as follows: First, an improved mode loo 
75 
2 
234,613 
of liberating cotton of leaves, Seed, husks, &c., 
with which it is mingled, and an improved 
manner of opening the same by separating 
the fibers; second, a decrease in quantity of 
waste, as the picker removes only seed, husks, 
&c., and does not throw out good cotton; third, 
an improvement in cotton-picking, with in 
creased production, as the carding-engines are 
fed from my picker with cotton Well opened 
and with separated fibers, and, besides, the 
picker liberates the cotton of the greater part 
of its leaves, seeds, husks, &c., and the Waste 
from the carding-engines will therefore prove 
cleaner, whiter, and hence more valuable. 
What I claim is 
1. In a cotton-picking machine having suit 
able feeding mechanism N B and grating C 
E J J', the combination there with of the cyl 
EO 
inders AD, covered with toothed surfaces and 
arranged for operation substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The picking-cylinders AD, provided with 
a toothed cover, b, in combination with the 
grates C E J, as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a cotton-picking machine, the cylindri 
cal grates K K, located and operating as de 
scribed, and provided with the interior receiv 
erS L, SWinging loosely upon the axes of the 
grates, as Set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
GEORGE RISTER. 
m 
Witnesses: 
EB. HAUVILLER, 
E. MEYER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234713.txt	(Model.) 
S. W. L. AMBETH 
Fly Fan. 
No. 234,713. 
 
Patented Nov. 23, 188O. 
itnesses: 
-4,8-6-4 
1424) 
(C 
3upentor 
4-422.4 
pageal Attorn EY, 
efs. PHOTo-Lithographer, WASHINGON, O C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL W. LAMBETH, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FLY FAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,713, dated November 23, 1880. 
Application filed March 20, 1880. (Moder.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL W. LAMBETH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Fly-Fans, which improvement 
is fully set forth in the following specification 
and accompanying drawings, in which 
Figurel is a side elevation, partly in section, 
of the portion of a fly-fan embodying my in 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal section in line 
ventiol). 
a; ac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a horizontal section of 
a modification. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding partS in the Several figures. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
fans which have arms connected to a staff, the 
rotation Whereof is Occasioned by a train of 
gearing, after the manner of clock-work, the 
motion of the blades which are attached to 
said arms serving to frighten flies and other 
insects. 
The invention consists in so constructing the 
rotary staff that its strength is increased, and 
weight of the device reduced. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
staff or shaft rising from a stand or base, B, 
containing a mechanical power-such as clock 
work-for rotating said staff, as is well known 
in the class of fly-fans, a vertically-adjustable 
collar, C, being fitted on said staff and held 
thereon by suitable means. 
O 
25 
The staff or shaft is necessarily long, and, as 
heretofore constructed of a solid rod, has been 
broken or found to bend, thus causing diffi 
culty in adjusting the collar and variableness 
in the rotation of the fan-blades, and it adds 
considerable Weight to the fan. These defects 
are remedied by my invention, which consists 
in providing the fan with a hollow or tubular 
staff, whereby a stronger and lighter fan is 
produced, the Staff preserves its straightness, 
and the blades rotate regularly, (which other 
wise is hurtful to the eyes,)the fan thus being 
a better and more serviceable article. 
I do not claim, broadly, a rotary staff for a 
fly-fan, as I am aware that that is not new; 
neither do I claim the fan-supporting collar 
or mechanism fitted on said shaft, as that is 
well known; but 
What I do claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
The coin bination, with the stand B, con 
taining the clock-work, and the collar C, sup 
porting the fan-blades, of the staff A, rising 
from the stand and connected to the clock-work, 
and made of tubular form throughout its en 
tire length, Substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
SAMUEL W. LAMIBETH. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
FRANK COOPER. 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234814.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 234,814. 
 
W. SAY AGE. 
Snow Plow. 
Patented Nov. 23, 1880. 
 
 
  
ZijC 
 
BY 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHcGRAPHER, WASHENGTON, D.C. 
? ?% 
???? 
i.e. 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER SAVAGE, OF CROOKSTON, MINNESOTA. 
SNOW-PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,814, dated November 23, 1880. 
Application filed September 29, 1880. 
(No model.) 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER SAVAGE, of 
Crookston, in the county of Polk and State of 
Minnesota, have invented a new and Ilnproved 
Snow-Plow, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
an improved snow-plow for removing Snow 
from railroad-tracks. 
Figure 1 is a plan of the plow. Fig. 2 is a 
sectional side elevation of the same on line a 
ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional elle 
vation on line y 21, Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 4 is a 
transverse sectional elevation on line 22, Fig. 
2. Fig. 5 is a partial plan of the reverse of 
the plow. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A represents the body of 
the plow; B, the flat share ortop thereof, hav 
ing a broad beveled point, a, and extending 
rearward the full length of the body A, with 
an upward slope of fifteen degrees, or there 
about, and overhanging the body A, on both 
sides thereof. 
CC are the wheels, preferably eight in num 
ber, set beneath the body A of the plow to be 
better protected from the snow. 
D is a dividing-block or mold-board, some 
what of a diamond shape, fixed rigidly and 
centrally on the higher part of the top B, with 
its sharper end forward. Below the block or 
mold-board D triangular wings EE are hinged 
- 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
to the sides of the slare or top B, so that when 
not in use they hang perpendicularly, and 35 
when in use will be elevated by pressure of 
the Snow beneath them on a level with the 
face of the top B, and serve to guide or throw 
the snow clear of the track. Behind the rear 
and broader ends of these wings E E the body, 
top or share, and block or mold-board ABD, 
respectively, are made wedge-shaped, as shown 
at b, that the plow may offer a minimum of 
resistance in the snow to the backing up of 
the locomotive to which it may be attached. 45 
This plow is designed to be made of wood 
clad with iron to increase its weight, strength, 
and durability. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. An improved snow.plow constructed sub. 
stantially as herein shown and described, con 
sisting of body A, flat, sloping, overhanging 
top or share B, wheels C C, dividing-block or 
mold-board D, and hinged triangular wings E 
E, said plow having its rear wedge-shaped, as 
set forth. 
2. In a snow-plow, the combination, with 
the top or share B, of the hinged triangular 
wings E. E., substantially as herein shown, 
and for the purpose described. 
WALTER, SAVAGE. 
55 
?? 
Witnesses: 
W. R. DUNN, 
JAS. H. CREIGHTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US234914.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 234,914. 
C. B. HAL STEAD. 
Castrating Instrument. 
Patented Nov. 30, 1880. 
WITMESSES 222 Mtto rely 
 
IWVEWTOR 
ck. /6. Yada-a- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES B. HALSTEAD, OF RANTOUL, ILLINOIS. 
CASTRATING-INSTRUMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 234,914, dated November 30, 1880. 
Application filed July 26, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
Beit known that I, CHARLESB. HALSTEAD, 
and use my invention, I will describe its con 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Ran 
struction, and to that effect refer to the accom. 
toul, in the county of Champaigu and State of panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, and Fig. 2 a. 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Castrating-Instruments; and longitudinal elevation. 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
Referring to the drawings, A represents one 
clear, and exact description of the invention, lever, and B its fellow, the two being pivoted 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to together at b. 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
O represents a curved lever pivoted to the 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. arm B at 0, and operating in a slot, ct, in the 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference lever A. The curved lever C is slotted at C 
marked thereon, which form apart of this speci- to receive the end of the lever B, as shown. 
fication. 
Pivoted at d to the lever A, and to the le 
My invention relates to an instrument adapt. ver C at d", is an arm, D, and from the knuckle 
ed for service in spaying or castrating ani- e of the lever B extends a chain, E, which op 
mals; and the novelty consists in the construc-erates in the slot at and is loosely secured to 
tion and arrangement of parts as will be more the lever C at ef. 
fully hereinafter set forth, and pointed out in 
The chain E is of such width in relation to 
the slot a that the spermatic cord will not only 
the claim. 
In this art it is necessary to sever the sper- be severed, but the ends will be pinched so as 
matic cord, and also to stop the flow of blood. to seal them from flow. 
What I claim as new is 
Various and painful methods have been em- 
In an instrument for castrating animals, the 
ployed. 
My invention has for its object the sever-lever A, having slot a, and the lever B. piv 
ance of the spermatic cord, and at the same oted thereto, as shown, in combination with 
time to seal the end or ends of said cord so the lever C, having slot C, the bar D, and the 
that it would be ligatured. 
The invention consists in two pivoted levers, 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
one having a slot, in which the other operates in presence of two witnesses. 
to a certain extent; but instead of employing 
the ordinary shear construction, which gives 
a positive and arbitrary motion, I employ a 
combination of levers, pivoted as shown, by 
means of which I obtain a gradual differential 
InOWement. 
chain E, as and for the purposes specified. 
CEARIES B. HALSTEAD. 
Witnesses: 
H. R. PERRING, 
T. W. CHAMBERLIN. 
55 
IO 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235014.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMEON G. PHILLIPs, OF PERTE AMBOY, NEW JERSEY. 
PRE PARATION OF CLAY FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF POTTERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 235,014, dated November 30, 1880. 
Application filed July 27, 1880. (No specimens.) 
Thus conditioned, even 55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SIMEON G. PHILLIPs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Perth 
Amboy, Middlesex county, in the State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements relating to the Preparation of 
Clay for the Manufacture of Pottery, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Myimprovementis intended more especially 
for the fine clays used for the manufacture of 
American china, iron-stone, white granite, and 
analogous white or slightly blue or yellow 
ware for table sets and the like; but I believe 
it may be used to advantage in the treatment 
of other clays and for other purposes. 
I have discovered a law not before recog 
nized relating to the action of clay in its sepa 
ration from fine foreign mattermingled there 
With, and have devised an importantimprove. 
ment based thereon. 
I have ascertained by extended experiments 
that in the treatment of heavy-bodied fine clay 
a particle of oxide of iron, iron pyrites, silica, 
or other solid matter associated with clay in 
the earth becomes so intimately united with a 
layer of fine clay lying immediately adjacent 
that they do not readily separate. The Well 
known process of Washing thoroughly agitates 
all the parts of the clay, and reduces the greater 
portion of the clay to a thin liquid condition; 
but the particles of clay immediately adjacent 
to theiron, silica, &c., remain adhering. In this 
condition, obtained after ordinary washing, the 
foreign particles, with their considerable quan 
tity of clay adhering, form a small lump, which 
is so nearly of the same specific gravity as the 
thinner clay around it that only the larger 
masses sink, and such masses sink slowly. 
They accumulate on the bottom in the form of 
a mass of refuse, of which the greater propor 
tion is clay, with a small proportion of pyrites 
or other foreign matter. Even a prolonged 
soaking, without a subsequent Washing, does 
not remove the last particles of clay surround 
ing a solid particle of other matter; but if the 
clay is first washed to remove all that is easily 
removed, then allowed to soak a long time in 
a quitefluid condition, and then washed again, 
the preliminary washing away of the free clay 
and the succeeding long soaking will be found 
to have so affected the clay immediately ad 
hering to the foreign matter that on the final 
washing the clay will all be removed from the 
foreign matter and the foreign matter left 
naked in the fluid. 
the very fine particles of foreign matter will 
sink when allowed to remain the ordinary time 
in the ordinary floating-beds. 
The nature of my invention consists in a cer 
tain succession of treatments: first, Washing 
the clay, which may be done in the ordinary 
manner and by an ordinary washer; then al 
lowing the washed material to stand a long 
time; (I have found one week to suffice, but 
three weeks or more will be better where the 
time can be afforded;) then Washing again; 
and then letting thematerial flow slowly across 
a floating-bed to deposit the foreign matter, 
and then to stand in settling-tanks to deposit 
the clay. 
I believe no drawings will be necessary to 
convey a full knowledge of the invention. 
I can, if desired, soak the clay over night in 
the ordinary manner before the first Washing. 
I prefer that the liquid from the first washing 
shall be in a condition nearly as thick as cream. 
If it is toothin it requires larger storage-tanks 
to hold a given quantity of clay, and involves 
increased expense in apparatus, an increased 
water-supply, and increased power for pump 
ing; but it is very essential that it be not too 
thick. The success of my process depends on 
this material being thoroughly washed, and 
tinen on its lying in the condition of a fluid 
rather than in a pasty condition. 
If the fluid is made very thin some of the 
foreign matter will sink while in the soaking, 
intermediate between the two washings; but 
I do not esteem it expedient to rely upon any 
separating there. I pump out the whole, sedi 
ment and all. I have in my experiments used 
six tanks, each about five (5) feet deep and 
thirteen (13) feet square, inside measurement. 
Each will hold a day's work. These tanks are 
filled and emptied in succession, so that the 
contents of each have stood a week. From 
these tanks the fluid, in a creamy condition, is, 
after its long soaking, pumped into the regu 
lar washer, where it is agitated with a liberal 
supply of pure water, and is discharged in the 
thin and milky condition suitable for being 
passed slowly over the floating-beds. 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
23504 
O 
25 
The treatment of the material after its emer 
gence from the second washing is identical with 
the ordinary treatment of china-clays-that 
is to say, it is passed slowly over the float 
ing-beds, where it is an hour or more in mov. 
ing a thousand feet, and deposits. its foreign 
particles, and is then received in capacious 
settling-tanks, where it stands absolutely at 
rest for twenty-four hours (more or less) and 
deposits its clay, allowing the clear water to 
be drained off and wasted or conducted around 
to be used again. The only difference in the 
treatment of my clay after the second Washing 
is in the result. The sediment deposited in the 
floating-bed is not, as usual, an inferior quality 
of clay, but is composed almost entirely of the 
foreign matter. 
After having passed over my floating-bed 
and recovered between three and four hundred 
tons of fine clay, I cleaned up the apparatus 
and tookout only between three and fourtons 
about one per cent-of foreign matter lodged 
in the bottom of the floating-bed. That is the 
Whole of the Waste, except the minute quantity 
passing off with the waste water. The clay 
from the bottom of the settling-tanks still holds 
large quantities of Water. This is removed 
by pressing, under strong hydraulic pressure, 
through stout closely-woven cotton duck, 
In the completest form of my invention a 
Certain amount of chemical as well as mechani 
cal action is induced to remove the fine iron 
particles. There is alum in the clay. The 
same Water, which has become strongly impreg 
nated with alum in the treatment of a lot of 
clay, is reserved and used for the first Washing 
of another lot. Thus the soaking in the creamy 
condition between the first and second wash 
ing is effected in a flaid unusually saturated 
with alum. In fact, the water thus used is wa 
ter Which has been several times employed on 
Successive charges of clay. About one-tenth 
to) of the water is fresh, puniped from a well 
in as pure a condition as possible. The other 
nine-tenths () is water which has been sub 
jected to one or more circuits through the ap 
paratus. The small stream of fresh water is 
introduced at the Second Washing-none at the 
first Washing. It follows that the clay stands 
in soak in the most concentrated solution of 
alum. I believe that this acts chemically, by 
virtue of the free sulphuric acid contained 
therein, or otherwise, to dissolve the iron. 
Other chemicals can be added if it shall be 
found expedient; but I have found the alum 
in the clay from Woodbridge, New Jersey, and 
the corresponding clay in the vicinity sufficient, 
With the mechanical action, to effect the com 
plete removal of the iron. 
At the end of the operation the clay has been 
washed in a water which has received its in 
stallment of fresh, and the water down to nearly 
the last traces is removed, not by evaporation, 
but by compression in bags. So little damp 
lness is left in the clay after the compression that 
practically all the soluble material, including 
the sulphate of iron, is removed. Chemicals 
must be added cautiously, if at all, or they are 
liable to injure the fabric in the subsequent ex 
pressing of the water. 
Modifications may be made in many of the 
details. I can effect the first Washing without 
the preliminary soaking. I can Wash two or 
more times with a soaking after each before 
the final washing. I can lawn or screen the 
clay at any desired stage to remove light im 
purities. 
It will be understood that my process does 
not prevent the additional use of any other. 
The clay may be treated before, afterward, or 
at intermediate stages by any other process 
which may tend to improve the clay or pro 
mote the adaptation of the clay to any special 
use. The clay I have treated-heavy-bodied 
Woodbridge fine clay-was pumped up from 
the base of the settling-tanks and compressed 
in a press which I have invented, and which is 
set forth in the patent issued to me July 29, 
1879, No. 218,058. 
I have made but one grade of clay-a uni 
formly good clay-and the ware therefrom is 
unusually free from local or general faults or 
discoloration. It is especially free from what 
are known as specks, which the ordinary 
washing does not remove. The Wareis stronger 
than ware from the same clay as heretofore 
treated. 
Washing by the peculiarly efficient ap 
paratus ordinarily used in that process, tech 
nically so called, is eminently adapted to serve 
for the fine separation of the clay preliminary 
to my soaking, which latter I prefer, as before 
stated, to effect in a creamy condition, So that 
the foreign material is not likely to sink at this 
stage; but I believe it practicable to attain 
the preliminary creamy condition by other 
means than Washing. It is only essential that 
it shall be such a thorough treatment as shall 
soak a part and thoroughly disintegrate all of 
the clay except that immediately around the 
particles of foreign matter. Nothing but what 
is technically known as washing' can suffice, 
in my judgment, for the second and final wash 
ling. 
For fire-brick the ordinary large proportion 
of coarser refractory clay may be worked with 
a small proportion of fine clay refined by my 
process, and in such case the excess of Water 
in my clay, as it comes from the bottom of the 
settling-tanks, will not be too great for direct 
mingling with the dry coarser clays in the pit, 
and thus allow the kneading and molding of 
the clays together without further treatment. 
Parts of the invention may be used without 
the whole. I can use the method successfully 
by concentrating the resulting clay by evapo 
ration instead of decanting and pressing; but 
I esteem the latter far preferable, because it 
removes all the soluble matter carried by the 
Water. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In the preparatory treatment of potters' 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
II 5 
I 25 
23504 
3 
5 as and for the purposes herein specified. 
clay, the process of reserving a portion of the 
water discharged from the clay at the termi 
nation, and employing it in the earlier stages 
of the washing of a subsequent batch of clay, 
2. In the preparatory treatment of potters' 
clay, causing the clay to remain a long time. 
finely divided in a thin fluid containing alum 
or other desired chemicals, subsequently add 
Io ing liberal quantities of water, part or all of 
which is fresh, and separating by decantation 
and pressure, so as to remove the solid im 
purities by both mechanical and chemical ac 
tion, as herein specified. 
hand, at Perth Amboy, this 23d day of July, 
1880, in the presence of two subscribing wit 
Tn testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 15 
SIMEON G, PHILLIPS. 
Witnesses: 
ISAAC D. WARD, 
I. THOMGOLDING. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235114.txt	A. ZINS SER, 
Press Mechanism for Expressing Liquids from Fruits 
No. 235,114. 
Patented Dec. 7, 1880. 
and Other Materials. 
2- 
 
P 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
Oe 
 
N, PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHR, wash NGTON, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST ZINSSER, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
PRESS MECHANISM FOR EXPRESSING LIQUIDS FROM FRUITS AND OTHER MATERIALS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 235,114, dated December 7, 1880. 
Application filed February 20, 1880. 
IS 
O 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUST ZINSSER, of 
New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a Press Mechanism for 
5 Expressing Liquids from Fruits and other 
Materials, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
apparatus for squeezing or pressing juice, 
moisture, &c., out of ground, chopped, or 
crushed material, such as fruit, malt, or the 
like; and the invention consists in a press 
provided with pressing or squeezing rolls, 
which are inclosed in elongated endless alb 
sorbing-belts, as described hereinafter, so ar 
ranged that the material is pressed between 
the two belts where they cross or cover the 
upper and lower rolls, respectively. The lower 
belt will serve as an apron for conveying or 
feeding the material to the rolls and carrying 
it from them after being pressed, so that it 
can be delivered and deposited at any desired 
distance from the rolls. 
The invention also consists ill making the 
upper belt adjustable, so as to more or less 
utilize it as a feeding-belt. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of my improved press, and 
Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the same, taken 
on line acac of Fig. 1. 
Referring to the drawings, A A represent 
the housings of the press. B represents the 
lower roll, held in stationary bearings. Crep 
resents the upper roll, held in vertically-ad 
35 justable bearings at, which are placed in mor 
tises b in the housings, above the bearings of 
the lower roll. The bearings at are held down 
by springs d, interposed between them and 
that part of the housings immediately above, 
which forms the upper end of the mortises. 
The springs d press the bearings at down, so 
that the upper roll, C, will be close to the lower 
roll, but at the same time they allow the bear 
ings to rise slightly, when a mass of material 
45 is fed to the press, and, by allowing the upper 
roll to adjust itself to the quantity of material, 
prevent choking. 
On both sides of the housings arms DD pro 
ject outward and upward, and support on suit 
25 
- 
- 
. 
 
--- 
To the arms D D on the discharge side of 65 
able gudgeons, and at about the level of the so 
lower roll, B, rollers EE, and underneath the 
housings, in suitable bearings, is a third roll 
er, E'. 
F represents an stage; This belt 
F is stretched around the Oilers E E E and 55 
over the lower pressing-roll, B, the arrange 
linent being such that the endless belt between 
rollers EE forms a flat surface at about the 
same level as the pressing-face of the lower 
roll, B, as clearly shown in Fig. 2, whereby the 
said belt at this portion is adapted to serve 
as an apron for feeding the material to be . 
pressed to the rolls, and then carrying it 
away from them. 
the press a metal Scraper, G, is or may be at 
tached S0 that its edge bears against the out 
side of the endless belt F, whereby any ma 
terial tiat may adhere to the belt will be 
scraped off and the belt kept clean. 
H is a roller, which has its gudgeons sup 
ported in plates H.' H', which project from the 
housings on the side from which the material 
is fed to the rolls. The position of the roller 
H can be readily changed with relation to the 
housings and to the roll C, the plates H be 
ing notched or slotted to permit such adjust 
ment. From the discharge side of the hous 
ings arms I project, which support on suitable 
gudgeons a roller or rollers, H. 
J is an endless felt absorbing-belt, similar to 
the belt F, which is passed under the upper 
roller, C, and over the rollers H. H. The belt 
J, where it passes under the roller C, is held 
in contact with the belt F by the downward 
pressure of the roller C. By adapting the 
roller H to be changed in its position the angle 
of the front of the belt J to the roller C and 
the belt F can be changed, and the space be 
tween the front of belt J and belt F thereby 
increased and diminished at pleasure. The ob 
ject of this arrangement is to make a variable 
feeding-space between the two belts, and also, 
in case a large quantity of material is fed to 
the rolls, the upper belt, J, will assist in press 
ing it to the shape of a wedge, and thereby 
it will be fed between the rolls gradually, and 
it will not be pushed back on the feeding-belt, 
75 
95 
235,114 
IO 
IS 
25 
- - 
porting-rollers. 
as would be the case were it fed to the rolls di 
rectly and without first being pressed to a ta 
pering form. 
To the arms I may be attached a scraper, K, 
the edge whereof bears against the outside of 
the belt J and scrapes off any material that 
may adhere to it. 
The rollers BC are geared together by toothed 
wheels, so as to rotate at the same speed, and 
when they are in operation the frictional con 
tact of the belts with each other or with the 
material passing through the rolls causes the 
belts FJ to move around their respective sup 
In the lower part of the housings, under the 
lower roll, B, is a gutter, Li, which receives and 
carries off the juice, water, &c., that passes 
through the belt F and drops from the same 
and from the roll B. 
The operation of the press is as follows: 
Power being applied to the rolls BC, they are 
rotated, and the belts FJ are caused to revolve. 
The material to be pressed-say, for example, 
crushed fruit-is spread on the top of the belt 
F at the front of the press, and the belt carries 
it through the Tolls, by which it is pressed or 
squeezed, and the juice passes through the belt 
and runs from the roll B to the gutter L, from 
whence it flows into a suitable receptacle. 
The belts F J should be sufficiently long for 
the moisture to dry out while they are making 
one revolution; but if this cannot be done con 
veniently fans, blowers, and other artificial 
means may be employed to dry the belts by 
evaporating from them the moisture they ab 
sorb during their revolution around the sup 
porting-rollers, so that a normally dry surface 
will at all times be presented to the pressing 
faces of the rolls B C. 
The ends of the rollers B C may be provided 
with flanges or gutters to prevent the juice 
from running off the ends and wasting. 
- 
-v 
45 
55 
In practice the upper belt, J, may be dis 
pensed with, and the lower belt, F, and the two 
rolls may be used alone. 
I do not wish to confine myself to the use of 
scrapers for cleaning off the belts, as brushes 
and other devices may be employed for the pur 
pose; neither do I wish to confine myself to 
the use of a fixed bearing for the supporting 
roller FI, as I may arrange this roller H to be 
adjusted similar to roller H. 
I am aware that presses having endless 
aprons placed over the pressure-rollers are not 
new ; but they necessitated the use of receiv. 
ing chutes or conduits under the entire upper 
part of the lower apron. 
By using an apron of absorbing material and 
loringing it always to a normal degree of dry- . 
lness, as stated, I cause the juice to be passed 
through it directly over the lower roller, to 
drip thence into the trough, and do not require 
guides, side boards, or chutes to direct the juice 
into the trough. I thus obtain a more simple 
apparatus, purer (because less oxidized) juice, 6 
and an able to redry the apron in one revolu 
tion, which could not be done if it were a drip 
ping-apron from roller B to roller E. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with the pressure and 
guide rolls of a press for expressing liquids 
from fruits and other materials, of endless felt 
aprons capable of absorbing the juice, thereby 
dispensing with the usual side boards or chutes, 
all substantially as set forth. 
2. In combination with the belt J, the ad 
justable supporting-roller H, to adapt the belt 
J to be placed at different angles to the belt 
F, substantially as described. 
7 O 
75 
AUGUST ZINSSER. 
Witnesses: 
WILTON C. DONN, 
TOMPSON B. MOSHER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235214.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 235,214. 
E. M. CROSS. 
Emery Wheel. 
Patented Dec. 7, 188O. 
SSSSSSS S N N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
2 N 
N 2 N 
2. 
NS S2 : 
 
  
 
A 
2 
S2Al4S 
RNaser 
Z. . Z N S 
S s 3. SS SS SS 
 
Av. 3 
W//wes 5E5. 
%. 34 
%. 22. 
---. 
rt. PETERs, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D. c. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN M. CROSS, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK. 
EMERY WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 235,214, dated December 7, 1880. 
Application filed October 28, 1880. 
(No model.) 
O 
15 
3O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN M. CRoss, of 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Emery.-Wheels, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
This invention relates to improved means of 
securing to the periphery of an abrading or 
polishing wheel a facing of emery or other 
analogous substance, whereby said facing is 
rendered more durable and effective; and it 
consists in the combination, with the usual 
wooden body of the wheel, of side plates pro 
jecting at the periphery of said wheel, and 
segmental sections of leather secured between 
the projecting side plates by bolts or rivets 
passing through the same, all as hereinafter 
more fully described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of my improved abrading or pol 
ishing wheel; Fig. 2, a vertical transverse sec 
tion of same; and Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are detail 
views of the constituent parts of my inven 
tion. 
Similar letters of reference inclicate corre 
W represents the wheel, usually made of 
wood and mounted on a suitable shaft, c, by 
which it is rotated. To the two sides of the 
said wheel are secured annular plates b, which 
project at the periphery of the wheel and form 
two circumferential flanges aroulid the same. 
Between the said flanges are inserted edge 
wise rings r, of leather or other material of 
the requisite elasticity, and secured in position 
by bolts or rivets passing through the side 
flanges of the wheel and through the aforesaid 
elastic rings. The rings r are of sufficient 
sponding parts. 
- 
width to project past the side flanges and form 
a cushion for the facing of emery, e, or other 
abrading or polishing material applied to the 
external periphery thereof. 
In order to economize in material and re 
duce the cost of manufacture of my improved 
wheel, I form the rings r of segments s, cut 
out of the leather or sheet material. 
The advantages of my improved abrading 
or polishing wheel are as follows, viz: The 
leather strips or rings r, being applied edge 
wise and firmly secured between the side 
flanges in the manner described, effectually 
prevents the stretching of said rings and the 
resultant inequality in the abrading or pol 
ishing face of the wheel, thereby rendering the 
same more durable and effective. The elas 
ticity of the cushioned backing of the abrad 
ing or polishing face can be regulated to suit 
the work to be accomplished by allowing a 
greater or less projection of said cushion at 
the periphery of the side flanges. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The combination, with the wheel W., of the 
annular side plates, b, projecting at the pe. 
riphery of the wheel, and the segmental sec 
tions ss, secured between the projecting side 
plates by bolts or rivets passing through the 
same, substantially as described and shown. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name and affixed my seal, in the presence 
of two attesting witnesses, at Syracuse, in the 
county of Onondaga, in the State of New York, 
this 22d day of October, 1880. 
EDWIN M. CROSS. 
L. S. 
Witnesses: 
E. LAASS, 
WM. C. RAYMOND. 
45 
So 
55 
75 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235314.txt	} 
... . 
(No Model.) 
f 
No. 235,314. 
 
r 
R. THAMM. 
Water Power. 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
Patented Dec. 7, 1880. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 235,314. 
R. THAMM. 
Water Power, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 7, 188O. 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR: 
44/ 
N. PETERs, photo-TungRAPHER, WASHINGTON C. C 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT THAMM, OF OSEIKOSH, WISCONSIN. 
WATER POWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 235,314, dated December 7, 1880. 
Application filed October 18, 1880. (No model.) 
 
 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
H and engages with a beveled cog-wheel, K, 
Beit known that I, RoBERT THAMM, of Osh 
mounted on a crank-shaft, I, to which the rods 
kosh, in the county of Winnebago, and State 
M, acting upon the rods of the pumps NN, are 
pivoted. 
of Wisconsin, have invented a new and Im 
proved Water-Power, of which the following 
A tank or receiver, O, is constructed below 
is a specification. 
the wheel G, and is connected with the main 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
race D by means of a chute or race, P. Be 
new and improved water-power which is so con 
yond the junction of the races D and P the 
structed that the water can act upon but a sin 
race H is provided with a gate, Q, which is 
gle motor or upon a series of motors arranged 
also pivoted at the lower end, and is operated 
at different heights along the water-race, and 
by means of a pivoted lever, R. 
which can be brought into action at any de 
A water-wheel, S, is mounted on an inclined 
sired time and in a simple manner. 
shaft, T, below the gate Q, and is provided 
The invention consists in a water-power pro 
with a pulley, U, for transmitting the power 
to machinery. 
vided with an inclined water-race which con 
A tank or receiver, W, is arranged below the 
ducts the water from the main tank to one or 
more Water-wheels, as may be desired, each of 
wheel S, and the water collected therein is car 
these wheels having a separate race to conduct 
ried off by a chute or race, W. It may be used 
the water to the next lower wheel. The upper 
to drive a third wheel or may be conducted to 
most wheel is provided with gearing or other 
a tank or reservoir to be pumped up into the 
main tank A again, partially by the pumps N 
mechanism that acts upon a crank-shaft con 
N and partially by a steam-pump or some other 
nected with the levers of a series of pumps, 
so that the descending current, by acting upon 
pump driven by animal-power. 
this first wheel, actuates the pumps and re 
The height from the floor of the tank A to 
turns a quantity of water into the tank, the 
the lower water-wheel may be arranged as cir 
Water that has acted upon the first wheel pass 
cumstances may require, but should prefera 
ing down the chute and acting upon the next 
bly be not less than fifty to sixty feet. 
wheels, which may be connected with machin 
The gates are all pivoted at the lower end, 
ery or otherwise so arranged that their motive 
as shown in Fig. 3, so as to prevent the Water 
power may be utilized. 
from flowing over the opening of the gate. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
The operation is as follows: The tank hav 
perspective view of my improved water-power. 
ing been filled with a certain quantity of wa 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
ter, the gate B is opened by pulling down the 
detaillongitudinal elevation of one of the gates 
outer end of the lever C. The water rushes 
down the race D, and if the gate Eis not opened 
of the Water-race. 
it will pass downto the gate Q. If thisis opened 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
the water will be suddenly checked by the 
opened gate and will swell and flow through the 
The Water is collected in a tank or reservoir, 
A, provided with a pivoted gate, B, in the bot 
opening of the gate upon the wheel S with con 
tom, which gate can be raised by means of a 
siderable force. The wheel S is so inclined 
lever, C, one end of which is connected with 
that it receives the action of the Water to the 
greatest advantage; but if the gate E has been 
the gate, whereas the other end is provided 
with a rope for the operator. From the tank 
opened the water will flow through the open 
ing of this gate E, will act upon the wheel G, 
A the water runs into an inclined and curved 
race, D, provided with a gate, E, pivoted at rotating the same, whereby the pumps N N 
its lower end and operated by means of a le 
are operated and water is raised into the tank 
A; but the water that has operated the wheel 
ver, F. 
A water-wheel, G, is mounted on a shaft, H, 
Grushes down the short race P, and as the 
gate Q is open it also operates the wheel S. 
which is slightly inclined, so that the wheel G. 
is also inclined below the gate E. A beveled 
The water thus first acts upon the wheel G. to 
operate the pumps N, and then acts upon the 
cog-wheel, J, is mounted on the inclined shaft 
95 
OO 
235,314 
In place of the pumps N N any other kind the next lower wheels, as set forth. 
wheel T, which is arranged to act upon ma- of the several water-wheels arranged below 25 
chinery either by means of a belt passing over the main race, thereby permitting the water to 
the pulley U or by means of suitable gearing. act on the uppermost wheel first and then upon 
of pump can be arranged to be acted upon by 
2. In a water-power, the combination, with 
the shaft H of the wheel G, and if desired the the inclined water-race D, of the gates E and 3o 
pumps may be dispensed with and both wheels Q, the water-wheels G and S, and the addi 
G. and S may be used to obtain motive power. thonal races IP and W, leading into the main 
The size of the races or chutes is to be varied race D, substantially as herein shown and de 
according to the quantity of water at hand scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
and according to the power desired. The gates 
are to be of the entire width of the chute, so the water-race D, of the gates E and Q, the 
that no water can escape by the sides of the water-wheels G and S, and the additional races 
Sal, 
P and W, leading into the main race D, and 
The special advantage of the within-described of the pumps N N, substantially as herein 
water-power is that still water can be utilized shown and described, and for the purpose of 4o 
as well as a running strean). 
utilizing the water first to work the pumps and 
Having thus described my invention, I claim raise part of the water again and to drive ma 
as new and desire to secure by Iletters lat- chinery also, as set forth. 
ent 
1. A water-power made substantially as 
herein shown and described, and consisting of 
a water-race provided with gates at various 
heights, and with additional races below each 
3. In a water-power, the combination, with 35 
ROBERT THAMM. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. HUME, 
W. H. CASEY. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235414.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 235,414. 
8 Sheets-Sheet . 
W. L. CROWSON. 
Cotton Gin Feeder. 
Patented Dec. 14, 1880. 
222 
772.Werator? 
%346tly 
 
ETERs, photo-uTHogRPER, washingtoN, D.c. 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 235,414. 
W. L. CR0 WSON. 
Cotton Gin Feeder. 
Patented Dec. 14, 188 O. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
SSSSSSSSR 
&SRS 
XXXXXXXXX 
sixxxxxxx) 
XXX XXX XXX 
& 3&S& 
s &S y S Y S 
XXX XXX XXXYXX. 
XXXX 
&8&8 
XX 
O 
XX 
O MZ 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. m .1- - 
- 
- 
- 
al 
exaxxxaxxxxxxxxx xxxx 
4 
 
 
SZZ 
(Siri g 
22. 7 
7ter 
y 
Yezzzzo 
law, 
or 
 
4. 
3. 
N.PETERs, FHoro-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
 
W. L. CR0 WSON. 
Cotton Gin Feeder. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 14, 1880. 
(No Model.) 
No. 235,414. 
 
it. 
N, PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM L. CROWSON, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
COTTONG IN FEEDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 235,414, dated December 14, 1880. 
Applicatin filed June 30, 1880. (No model.) 
EO 
To all whom it may concern: 
- Be it known that I, WILLIAM L. CROWSON, 
of the city of St. Louis, in the State of Mis 
souri, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Cotton-Gin Feeders, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming part of this specifica 
tion. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion, the dotted lines showing the banding, 
gearing, &c., of the opposite side to that which 
is here presented. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec 
tion at a. a, Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a front elevation, 
with part of the front covering of the machine 
removed, showing the interior as seen from 
the front, or part where the feeder discharges 
the cotton. Fig. 4 is a top or plan view. Fig. 
5 is a side elevation of the feeder and the up 
per portion of a cotton-gin, showing the man 
ner of attachment. Fig. 6 is an enlarged de 
tail perspective view, showing the relative po 
sition of the stationary and movable feed-bars. 
Figs. 7 and 8 are enlarged details of the clutch 
gear, Fig. 7 being a section at bb, Fig. 8. 
The object of this invention is to provide for 
the cotton-gin in general use a cheaper and 
more accurate automatic cotton-gin feeder, 
and one that shall be more easily regulated 
to suit any cotton-gin and all kinds of cotton 
than any other cotton-gin feeder in use. 
The nature of the invention is defined by the 
A. A. are the legs, which stand upon the 
frame of the cotton-gin. (See Fig. 5.) The 
feeder has close sides B and ends C. Its bot 
tom is open for the most part, and in its top 
is a large hopper or cotton-box, D, to receive 
the cotton. The bottom of the hopper con 
sists of a number of bars, E, inclining upward 
toward the front or discharging end, and sup 
plied with teethe, raking, as shown, so as to 
prevent the backward movement of the cot 
ton, but allow its forward movement upward 
on the bars. These bars are supported at the 
lower end by a horizontal rod or bar, F, on 
which they may be adjusted as a pivot in 
changing their inclination to vary the feed ac 
cording to the condition of the cotton. The 
bars E are fixed together at the lower end and 
the upper end by cross-bars G. G. 
claims. 
- 
7 a 
75 
Beneath the upper ends of the bars E is a 
transverse shaft, H, carrying one or more cams, 
h, bearing against the under side of the cross 
bar G, and thus supporting the upper end of 55 
the hopper-bottom. As the shaft H is turned 
the camsh are raised or lowered, and the in 
clination of the hopper-bottom is changed. 
The shaft H carries an adjusting-arm, I, whose 
end carries a set-screw with a hand-nut, I, 
the screw being adjustable in a slotted brack 
et, J, at the side of the case. The cotton is 
caused to travel up the bars E by the action 
of the reciprocating bars K, parallel to and 
alternating with the bars E. These bars rest 
at the upper ends upon the cross-bar G', and 
at the lower ends are supported on a crank 
shaft, Li, which passes through them and gives 
a revolving movement to the lower ends of 
the bars K. The vertical movement decreases 
toward the point of support upon the bar G', 
while the endwise movement, of course, is the 
same from end to end. The bars Kare armed 
with teeth k, similar to the teethe. The teeth 
k cause the upward and forward movement 
of the cotton in their forward movement, and 
in the back movement pass freely beneath the 
cotton, which is supported on the teethe of the 
fixed bars E. The crank-shaft L. rotates in the 
direction shown by the arrows, so that the 
lower ends of the bars K will be lifted when 
moving upward and forward, and will be de 
pressed when moving backward, thus forcibly 
engaging the cotton in the forward stroke and 
releasing it on the back stroke. 
D' is an inclined board, forming part of the 
rear end of the hopper D, and whose lower 
end is a little distance from the top of the 
feed-bars E and K, so that gravel and other 
objectionable things in the cotton may escape 
through the aperture D'as they drop from the 
roll of cotton turning in the hopper, (under the 
influence of the feed-bars E.) 
Above the upper end of the hopper-bottom 
is a reciprocating rake, M., hung upon a crank 
shaft, N, rotating in the direction shown by the 
arrows. The purpose of the rake is to prevent 
the passage of too great a quantity of cotton, 
and for this purpose its backward movement 
is made when in its lower position-that is, 
when the crank is making its lower semi-revo 
lution-and the return or forward and inacts 
95 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
 
". . 
. . ." 
* 
"E"; 
*::::::: 
2 
235,44 
f 
ive movement of the rake is made when in its 
upper position. When it is in its upper posi 
tion, and consequently in its return movement, 
the rake will not engage the cotton. The 
rake oscillates on a transverse rod or bar, O, 
passing through slots o in the vertical bars of 
the head, said slots permitting the vertical 
movements induced by the crank-shaft N. 
The feed of the cotton is regulated by the 
position of the upper end of the hopper-bot 
tom. This end is raised to decrease the feed 
by making the inclination of the bars E and K 
steeper, and by lessening the size of the pas 
sage between the hopper-botton and the rake. 
When the cotton leaves the hopper or box D 
it falls upon the arms p of a rotary beater 
having a shaft, P, and turning in a case whose 
inner side, Q, is of wire-work, to allow the es 
cape of dust and other inpurities. The main 
purpose of the beater is to thoroughly lighten 
up the cotton before entering the gin. From 
the beater the cotton falls into the chute R, 
leading to hopper S of the cotton-gin T. The 
bottom of the chute has adjustable inclined 
guides U, arranged to carry the cotton out 
ward and discharge a greater amount into the 
ends of the roll. thus condensing its ends and 
preventing its breaking. The guides are sup 
ported on pivots at, and held in position by bolts 
V, passing through slots tin the chute-botton, 
and carrying set-nuts . The clute R is ad 
justable upon a rod, R', and is held in posi 
tion by a slotted bracket, l', through which 
passes a set-screw, R, to lock the chute in po 
sition. 
The feeder may receive motion by means of 
a belt, W, upon a pulley, X', on the saw-shaft 
X of the gin, and passing over a pulley, P', 
upon the shaft P of the beater, from there by 
a cross-belt, Z, passing from pulley I' to the 
pulley N' upon the crank-shaft N of the rake; 
thence, by a pulley, N', upon said shaft and 
belt c, to a pulley, L', on the crank-shaft L. 
n is a hand-nut screwing upon the end of 6o 
The clutch-pulley Nturns freely upon the shaft 
N, except when clutched thereto by the spring- 45 
clutch. (Shown most fully in Figs. 7 and 8.) 
The clutch consists of a ratchet-hub, d, upon 
the pulley, which engages with a ratchet-col 
lar, f, sliding endwise on the shaft P, and turn 
ing the shaft by means of a diametric pin pass- 5o 
ing through a slot in the shaft, or by a feather 
key or other well-known means of connection 
for the said purpose. The clutch-collar has the 
usual circumferential groove g, taking the toes 
of a forked lever, i, by which it is moved upon 55 
the shaft to engage or disengage the members 
d and f of the clutch. The lever is perfo 
rated to allow the passage of a horizontal fixed 
rod, j, carrying a spring, l. 
the rod i and pressing the spring lagainst the 
outer side of the lever i. The spring l forces 
the clutch into engagement and holds the parts 
in this position. Thus it will be seen that to 
stop the motion of the feeder it is only needed 65 
to pull out the end of the lever i, thus opening 
the clutch, and that as soon as the lever is re 
leased the spring l will close the clutch, and 
the feeder will be put in motion. The lever 
(to open the clutch) may be drawn out by a cord 7o 
or cords extending to any part of the building. 
I claim as any invention 
1. The combination, with the inclined bars 
E and K, of the rake M, having a compound 
oscillatory and revolutionary motion, substan. 75 
tially as set fortli. 
2. The chute R, having adjustable guides 
U, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
support at the lower end and adjastable sup 
port attle upper end, for the purpose set forth. 
WILLIAM L. CROWSON. 
3. The inclined bars E and K, with hinge- 8o 
Witnesses: 
SAML KNIGHT, 
GEO. H. KNIGHT. 
15 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235514.txt	 
(No Model) 
." 
... 
. . 
C. B. CLARK & J. T. LAMBERT. 
Stove Pipe Damper. 
No. 235,514. 
Patented Dec. 14, 1880. 
 
 
  
 
 
s 
Ivaye7atoats 
Chorles E. Olcork. 
Jennes Tianbert. 
Aes 
7 isy 4. 
2 
A. GA m 
yy 
Er 
NipETERs, Photo-utioGRAPHER, wash:NGTON, D. . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
 
CHARLEs B. CLARK AND JAMES T. LAMBERT, OF DETROIT, MICEIIGAN; 
SAID LAMBERTASSIGNOR TO SAID CLARK. . . 
STOVE-PIPE DAMPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 235,514, dated December 14, 1880. 
Application filed November 3, 1880. (No model.) 
55 
The radial socket e of the damper, which 6o 
To all whom it may concern: 
the damper-faces are in horizontal planes within 5o 
Be it known that we, CHARLEs B. CLARK 
the stove-pipe; or, if desired, such opening 
and JAMES T. LAMBERT, both citizens of the 
may be dispensed with and the damper made 
United States, residing at Detroit, in the 
somewhat smaller than the area of the stove 
5 county of Wayne and State of Michigan, have 
pipe, either of these features being common in 
invented new and useful Improvements in 
this class of dampers. 
Stove-Pipe Dampers, of which the followin 
The journal D of the damper, which, as di 
is a specification. 
ametrically opposite to the above-mentioned 
Our present invention relates to stove-pipe 
journal B, is formed by a slightly-contracted 
Io dampers provided with detachable handles; 
portion of the detachable damper-spindle E. 
and it consists, first, in the combination, with 
the damper-disk having a radial socket formed 
receives the detachable spindle, is formed by 
by straps arranged to bridge over a slot in 
bridging over with three straps a slot extend 
the disk, of the damper-spindle made in two 
ing from a point near the central opening, C, 
I5 parts, with their outer ends connected by a 
out to the periphery of the disk, these straps 
spring-handle; second, in the combination, 
being cast with the damper and arranged so 65 
with the damper-disk having a radial socket 
that the strap F at the inner, and the strap F 
formed by straps arranged to bridge over a 
at the Outer, terminus of the radial slot both 
slot in the damper and a lug extending into 
project out from one face of the damper, while 
2o the socket near the inner terminus thereof, of 
the remaining strap, G, projects out from the 
the damper-spindle composed of two expan 
other face of the damper at a point about in- 7o 
sible halves connected at their outer ends by 
termediate of the two straps F E. The de 
a spring-handle, and formed with a notch at tachable damper-spindle, which fits in the 
one or both of the inner ends of said spindle socket thus formed, is composed of a split stem 
25 for engaging with the said lug for the purpose or spindle, E', the two halves of which are 
of retaining the spindle in the damper-disk connected at their outer ends by a ring-shaped 75 
and cause it to move in a lateral direction suf. handle, E, having sufficient elasticity to cause 
ficient to hold the damper in the pipe at any the halves of the stem to spring apart, as il 
desired point of adjustment, all as more fully 
lustrated in Fig. 3. In the outer side of each 
one of the inner ends of the halves of the 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a top or plan 
spindle is formed a notch, I, and a lug, K, for 8o 
view of the damper with its spindle connected 
engaging either one of these notches after the 
therewith, the damper being illustrated as ap 
stem has been inserted into the socket, is 
plied to a stove-pipe which is shown in sec 
formed at one of the points of juncture be 
35 tion. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the 
tween the inner strap, F, and the disk, so as 
damper-disk. Fig. 3 shows, in perspective, 
to extend into that portion of the socket which 85 
the spindle detached from the damper, and 
is bridged over on one side of the disk of the 
Fig. 4 is a section taken transversely through 
said Strap. 
the spindle on the line at ac, Fig. 3. 
It will be seen that the split spindle is flat 
In the drawings, the letter A refers to the 
tened along two sides and rounded upon its 
damper, which consists of a circular metallic 
other sides, the notches I being made to ex- 9o 
disk, preferably of cast metal, and formed with, 
tend into one of the flattened portions of each 
or having secured to, its periphery in any suit 
half of the spindle at points upon a line taken 
diametrically through the spindle, so that, no 
able manner one of the journals, B, which, 
45 when the damperis arranged within the stove 
matter which flattened side of the split spin 
pipe, passes through an opening in the stove 
dle is uppermost, one of the notches will al- 95 
pipe, as herein illustrated. 
ways be in proper position for the engagement 
The damper is formed with a central open 
of the lug there with. The split in the spindle 
ing, C, to admit of a moderate draft, while 
continues from the inner end thereof through 
3o hereinafter set forth. 
4.o. 
regreer 
 
235.514 
O 
IS 
the journal portion thereof to the handle, and 
between the spindle and its handle each half 
of the spindle is provided with a segmental 
flange, which flanges, when the two halves of 
the spindle are forced together, constitute a 
collar adapted to bear against the outer side 
of the stove-pipe, while the spindle is fitted to 
the damper. 
In introducing the split spindle into the 
socket the halves of the spindle will be forced 
together until one of the notches arrives at a 
point opposite to the lug, and then the halves 
will expand so that the lug will be received 
into such notch, and thereby lock the damper 
and the spindle together, and at the same tine 
bind the pipe at the journal-learing sufficiently 
to hold the damper in any desired position. 
To admit of the detachment of the spindle 
from the damper, the sides of the notches are 
inclined, so that by drawing upon the spindle 
its halves will be brought together, so as to 
effect the disengagement of the notch from the 
lug. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
1. The combination, with the damper-disk 
having a radial socket formed by straps ar 
ranged to bridge over a slot in the disk, of the 
damper-spindle made in two parts, with their 
outer ends connected by a spring-handle, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the damper-disk 
having a radial socket formed by straps ar. 
ranged to bridge over a slot in the damper 
and a lug extending into the socket near the 
inner terminus thereof, of the damper-spindle 
composed of two expansible halves, connected 
at their outer ends by a spring-handle, and 
formed with a notch at one or both of the in 
her ends of said spindle for eugaging with the 4o 
said lug, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
CHARLES B. CLARK. 
JAMES T. LAMBERT, 
Witnesses: 
JAMEs M. WELCH, 
ANDREW MCLELLAN. 
we claim is 
25 
2 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235614.txt	(No Model.) 
J. O. AUSTIN 
Device for Sheltering Animals. 
2. Sheets-Sheet I. 
 
 
- 
No. 235,614. 
Patented Dec. 21, 1880. 
  
  
 
N 
s NH 
 
N 
 
perer 
 
 
 
  
NS 
 
G^ 
- 
 
2 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 4. 
Eslamizhi, - 
". 
e 
T O R e 
- 
Y1019/thep 
ATTORNEY 
NPETERs, photo-lutioGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, ). C. 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
: 
- 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. O. AUSTIN 
Device for Sheltering Animals. 
- 
No. 235,614. 
- 
Patented Dec. 21, 1880. 
 
  
V 
NNNS 
  
wrNESSES 
62 ?ea 76/ 
- r- invasion 
Soct. 
 
t 
N.Peters, PHord-LithgrAPHER, WASHIN3ON, d. C: 
2 
235,64 
45 
So 
55 
said extension and has its ends respectively 
connected to the door and said horizontal arm, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a vertically-swing 
ing compartment, a horizontal arm extending 
therefrom, and a door hinged at its bottom to 
swing vertically, said door being provided with 
an extension which projects in horizontal line 
rearwardly from its hinge-line when the door 
is let down, of a flexible connecting device 
which passes over said extension and has its 
rear end fastened to the horizontal arm of the 
swinging compartment, the front end of said 
connecting device passing through a hole in 
the door and fastened to a transverse rod hav 
ing its extremities journaled on opposite sides 
of the door and forming the hinge upon which 
the latter turns, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a vertically-swing 
ing compartment provided with a projecting 
arm, a vertically-swinging door binged at its 
bottom, and intermediate connections of said 
'arm with the door, of a tilting way located by 
the side of the swinging compartment, a lever 
projecting therefroim, and a connecting device 
between said arm and lever, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. The combination, with a vertically-swing 
ing compartment provided with an arm, a 
door, and intermediate connection of the lat 
ter with the arm, of a stationary compartment. 
formed between the door and swinging coin 
partment, a partition between the two com 
partments, and a passage-way which connects 
them, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 3d day of 8o 
April, 1880. 
75 
7 o 
JOHN OVERTON AUSTIN. 
Witnesses: 
JONES ABERNATHY, 
JOS. P. NOBLE. 
IO 
5 
IS 
on the tilting way, thereby depressing the lat 
ter and causing the lever, by means of the in 
termediate connection, to raise arm B. This 
action of the tilting way insures the opening 
of the door, so that if by any means the swing 
ing compartment should fail to rise as the 
animal leaves it, the door will be suitably 
opened as the animal treads upon the tilting 
Way. 
It will be observed that this tilting way rests 
upon the floor of the passage when the door is 
swung down in open position; hence it is not 
operated or affected by the tread of the ani 
mal as the latter passes to the swinging com 
partment; but when the door is closed the 
tilting way is raised above the floor of the pas 
sage, and as the animal steps thereon the way 
is pressed down until it rests on the floor of 
the passage. 
It is obvious that by making this device of 
any suitable size it may be employed to ad 
vantage in the different uses previously re 
cited for it, and in each instance admirably ac 
complish the end in view. 
It will be observed that in the form of de 
vice shown in the drawings the foregoing-de 
scribed compartments are raised from the 
ground and Supported upon a lattice-Work, 
which forms a chicken-coop,M; but this coop 
may be omitted without departing from my 
invention. 
Elaving fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a compartment 
pivoted at its rear portion to swing vertically, 
a horizontal arm extending forwardly there 
from, and a door-casing which inclines for 
wardly from bottom to top, of a door hinged 
4o at its bottom to swing vertically, and provided 
with an extension which projects rearwardly 
from its hinged line when the door islet down, 
and a connecting device which passes over 
35 
25 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN O. AUSTIN, OF BONEIAM, TEXAS. 
DEW CE FOR SHE E RING AN VALS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 235,614, dated December 21, 1880. 
Application filed April 15, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN O. AUSTIN, of 
Bonham, in the county of Fannin and State of 
Texas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Devices for Sheltering Ani 
mals; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it pertains to make and use 
it, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form part of this specifica: 
tion. 
My invention relates to a device which may 
be adapted for use as a hen's nest, a dog-ken 
Inel, a stable for domestic animals, or for analo 
gous purposes. 
The principle of construction prevalent in 
all these different adaptations for use of the de 
Vice consists of certain improved means for 
automatically closing the door as the animal 
steps into a Vertically-swinging compartment, 
and for automatically opening the door as the 
animal leaves said swinging compartment. 
The device is, primarily, intended as a hen's 
nest, the door being automatically closed as 
the hen gets into her nest, so that she may be 
free from all intrusion while laying her egg; 
but when built on a larger scale it is equally 
capable of sheltering a horse, cow, or other 
domestic animal, thus permitting any one of 
them to automatically stable themselves 
against storm and cold, or shut themselves 
off from intrusion of the others. So, too, the 
device, under suitable size, is admirable as a 
dog-kennel, permitting the faithful house-dog 
to find shelter against the Weather as he auto 
matically closes the door by entering. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view, in 
horizontal section, of the device. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal vertical section through line at a 
of the preceding figure. Fig. 3 is a transverse 
vertical section through line y y of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a detail view, in front elevation, of the 
door, showing its manner of hinging. 
The compartment A has its rear portion 
resting upon a horizontal transverse bar, A'. 
One or more studs, e, projecting upward from 
this bar, fit loosely in socket f formed in the 
corresponding portion of the bottom of the 
Compartment. These studs do not interfere 
with the free swinging movement of the com 
partment, and serve to maintain the latter in 
55 
position with its rear edge bearing upon the 
transverse bar. A horizontal stud, g, project 
ing from the rear end of the frame, fits loosely 
in a vertical slot, h, formed in the top of the 
rear side of the swinging compartment, and 
aids to maintain the latter in position. A 
horizontal arm, B, extends forwardly from the 
bottom of the swinging compartment. A door 
casing, C, inclines forwardly from its bottom 
to its top, and door C' is hinged at its bottom 
to swing vertically. The door is provided 
with an extension, ct, which projects in hori 
Zontal line rearwardly from the hinge-line b of 65 
the door when the latter is let down. Over 
this extension passes a flexible connecting de 
vice, D, having its rear end fastened to the 
free end of the horizontal arm B. The for 
ward end of Said connecting device passes 
through hole l in the door, and is fastened to 
rod b, which latter is secured transversely to 
the outer side of the door. This rod has its 
extremities projecting beyond the door sides, 
and journaled in suitable bearings c, thereby 
forming the hinge-joint, about which the door 
has swinging movement in a vertical plane. 
It will be observed that extension at of the 
door serves the function of the power arm of 
a lever in raising the door. When compart 
ment A is depressed the connecting device 
D exerts downward pressure upon said exten 
sion a, so that the door is swung upward in 
pivotal movement on rod b. 
Between the door and the vertically-swing 
ing compartment is a stationary compartment, 
E, and a vertical partitioh, F, separates the 
two compartments, so that the helm or other 
animal which enters the swinging compart 
ment may not be able to see the door as it 
swings upward in closed position. 
A passage, G, located by the side of the 
swinging compartment, connects the latter 
with the stationary compartment. Above the 
bottom or floor of this passage is a tilting 
way, H, the rear extremity of which has piv 
otal bearing d in line with the way. The for 
ward extremity of the tilting way is rigidly 
secured to one extremity of a lever, K, which 
latter is pivoted to partition F. A connect 
ing device, L, depends from the opposite end 
of the lever to arm B. 
When the animal steps out from the swing 
ing compartment it necessarily puts its weight 
85 
90 
95 
75 
OC 
O 
I5 
25 
35 
45 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235714.txt	(Model.) 
A, STOLER. 
Fertilizer Sower. 
No. 235,714. 
Patented Dec. 21, 1880. 
 
NS2. 
EN Nay 
 
 
e 
 
 
 
24 NSe 
2. 
Rs A. 
 
NS 
i? 7/VASSAS. 
JWPAWTOR 
2,4- 
62- 
47 rosvey 
 
als 
N.Peters, PHOTo-uthogRAPHER, wastilNGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM STOLER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FERTLIZER-SOWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 235,714, dated December 21, 1880. 
Application filed March 1, 1880. (Model.) 
e 
Io wherein 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ABRAHAM STOLER, of 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia, 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Fertilizer 
Sowers; and I do hereby declare the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description of the 
same, reference being had to the annexed 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
Figure 1 is a vertical transverse section of 
my invention; Fig. 2, a side elevation, and 
Fig. 3 is a longitudinal vertical section, of the 
She 
15 My invention has for its object to provide 
means whereby fertilizers, such as guano, &c., 
may be fed with regularity and certainty from 
a hopper, so as to be sown or distributed uni 
formly over the ground or together with seed. 
2O My improvements relate to means for feed 
ing such fertilizers; and they consistin the com 
bination, with a hopper having a discharge 
opening in its bottom, of an exposed feed 
wheel located below such bottom, and a comb 
25 or cleaner below such wheel and in perpendic 
ular line with the shaft thereof, the teeth of 
such Wheel projecting through such bottom 
opening and passing through the interstices 
of the cleaner. 
Referring to the annexed drawings, A indi 
cates a hopper of ordinary construction, de 
signed to be mounted on a frame and wheels 
to constitute a machine, or to be placed on the 
frame of a seeding-machine. The bottom a of 
35 such hopper is designed to be formed with a 
series of openings, such as shown at a, each 
of said openings having a cut-off or slide, B, 
whereby it may be closed or its extent gradu 
ated. Beneath each opening a' (and therefore 
4o below the bottom of the hopper) is a feed-wheel, 
C, having teeth c, which project and work 
through said openings. These wheels are each 
3o 
composed of a series of sections or rings, C', 
having the teeth c and hubs c', mounted on 
shafts D. The rings C are so arranged that 
the teeth c alternate or break ranks, as shown. 
Below the feed-wheels C, and in line with the 
shaftsD, are combs or cleaners E, having teeth 
e, with interstices e', through which latter the 
teeth of the feed-wheels pass. Said combs op 
erate to clean the feed-wheels and to detach 
therefrom any adhering portions of fertilizers. 
The operation is as follows: Motion being 
communicated to the feed-wheels in any suit 
able manner, (as by gear-connection with the 
supporting-wheels of the machine,) the fertili 
zer in the hopper is drawn down through the 
openings a' in the bottom of said hopper by the 
action of the teeth of said feed-wheels, the lat 
ter being cleared or stripped of any adhering 
material, when they reach the perpendicular, 
by the combs E, the fertilizer so fed falling to 
the ground, or passing thereto through the 
fluke or spout of a seeding-machine, if used in 
connection with the latter. 
What I claim as my invention is 
The combination, with a fertilizer-hopper, 
A, having an opening, af, in its bottom, of all 
exposed feed-wheel located below such bottom 
and having its teeth project through such open 
ing, and a comb or cleaner located below such 
wheel and in perpendicular line with the shaft 
of said wheel, the teeth of the latter being 
adapted to pass through the interstices of the 
comb when they assume a vertical position, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 27th day of 
February, 1880. 
ABRAHAM STOLER. 
Witnesses: 
AL. P. BURCHELL, 
S. J. VAN STAVOREN. 
45 
So 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235814.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 235,814. 
T. L. RANKIN. 
Ice Making Apparatus. 
Patented Dec. 21, 1880. 
N.PETERs. PHOTo-lithogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, O.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS L. RANKIN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ICE-MAKING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 235,814, dated December 21, 1880. 
Application filed April 22, 1880. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS L. RANKIN, of 
New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Ice-Making Apparatus; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form part of this specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in an 
ice-machine barge with an ice-manufacturing 
plant on board, the absorbers and condensers 
being hung upon the sides of the craft and in 
the water in which the barge floats, as will be 
hereinafter more fully set forth. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
its construction and operation, referring to the 
annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, Fig. 2 an ele 
wation of the reverse side, and Fig. 3 a plan 
view, of my invention. 
A represents a barge or vessel of any de 
sired size and construction, and containing 
within it a suitable ice-machine, embracing a 
furnace in which the ammonia still-pipes are 
placed, as well as tanks with freezing-coils. 
B is the stuffing-box joint or joints to the 
outlet-pipe from the still in the boat, leading 
to the condenser C, submerged in the water 
and hung against the side of the boat. D is 
the return stuffing-box joint from the con 
denser C to the pipe leading to the valves in 
the freezing - tank. These joints are for the 
purpose of allowing the submerged condensers 
and absorbers to be swung upward or down 
ward, as the boat may be heavily or lightly 
loaded. 
F is the outlet from the valves in the freez 
ing-tank, through a stuffing-box to the absorber 
G, which is hung upon an incline upon the 
side of the barge. 
His the stuffing-box outlet for weak water 
of ammonia from the bottom of the stills to a 
cooling coil or loop, I, also submerged, which 
cools the weak water and connects with the 
absorber at the upper end. 
The process of manufacturing the ice it is 
not necessary to describe here, as it is sub 
stantially the same as in ordinary use. 
The advantages of my barge arrangement 
are: The facilities for moving from place to 
place to supply cities where ice can be dis 
posed of to the best advantage. The expense 
of land and buildings is nearly saved, and 
river barges will bring coal without expense of 
cartage. The water for cooling costs nothing. 
A Water-tank may be located directly over 
the freezing-tank for settling river-water, from 
Which it can be drawn down into the freezing 
tank from cocks located above the bottom, and 
thus I am enabled to use any river-water for 
ice-making. 
A large item of expense in ice-making is in 
the great amount of absorbing-pipe required 
where it is immersed in a tank, and the amount 
of power required for pumping the water for 
cooling. This expense is very materially re 
duced in the barge system. 
I am aware that the individual parts of the 
within-described apparatus are not new; and 
I am aware, also, of the fact that submerged 
steam-condensers have been used on the out 
side of a floating structure; hence my claim 
is not intended to embrace what I here ac 
knowledge to be old. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with a floating structure 
furnished with ice-making machinery, of the 
inclined condenser C and absorber G, said 
condenser and absorber being suspended from 
the outside of the structure and connected to 
the tank still and coils by means of flexible 
joints, for the purpose of allowing an upward 
and downward motion to the condenser and 
absorber, Substantially in the manner herein 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
- 
THOS. L. RANKIN. 
Witnesses: 
J. G. CoOKRILL, 
GEO. W. GATES. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US235915.txt	a 
X. STIEGLER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
m 
Feeding Mechanism for L00ms for Weaving Seamless 
Patented Dec. 28, 1880. 
No. 235,915. 
s 
S 
Corsets, &c. 
s 
 
at TEST 
24.4.6. 
{ 
A. 
--- 
m 
- 
S 
. 
S. 
INVENTOR . 
Stesz-Celt, 
26 clu-cut 
13 
lco -2&to vaulty-4, 
N.FEERs, Photo-ITHoGRAPHER, WASHENGTON, D.C. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
Feeding Mechanism for L00ms for Weaving Seamless 
Patented Dec. 28, 1880. 
No. 235,915. 
Corsets, &c. 
X. STIEGLER. 
 
ATT EST. 
2/64 
73. 
" 
. 
... 
INVENTOR: 
3 acce: Seeg 22. 
is a vavulsa, 
a-1-, 3-aa- (Sors 
N. Peters, Photo-LithogRAPHER, WASHINGTCN, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
XAVIER, STIEGLER, OF BAR-LE-DUC, MEUSE, FRANCE, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF 
AND JULES CARGEMEL OF SAME PLACE. 
FEEDING MECHANISM FOR LOOMS FOR WEAVING SEAMLESS CORSETS, &c, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,915, dated December 28, 1880. 
Application filed September 3, 1880. (No model.) Patented in France May 20, 1880. 
15 sumed. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, XAVIER STIEGLER, a 
citizen of the French Republic, residing in 
Bar-le-Duc, Meuse, France, have invented cer 
tain Improvements in Feeding Mechanisms for 
Loomsfor Weaving Seamless Corsets and other 
Irregular or Gusseted Fabrics, of which the 
following is a specification. 
It is necessaryin weaving fabrics where con 
vex or concave places occur to form gussets 
by weaving in short weft-threads until the de 
sired fullness is produced, and then to draw 
the unfinished edge of the web into a straight 
line, that the full-width weaving may be re 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1, 
2, and 3 are diagrams illustrating the fabric in 
the successive stages of this operation. 
AA are the warp-threads, indicated by light 
lines, and B B are the weft-threads, indicated 
by heavy lines. Weft-threads, shown at a. a, 
are woven entirely across the fabric until the 
place is reached where the gusset is to be 
formed. Then shorter weft-threads (shown at 
25 b b) are woven in until the gusset attains the 
desired fullness. Fig.1 shows the fabric after 
this has been accomplished. Then the batten 
is broughtforward until the reed rests against 
the last of the short threads and the woven 
web is released, so that the tension upon the 
warp draws the unfinished edge forward 
against the reed, thereby bringing it into a 
straight line. Fig. 2 shows the fabric after 
this operation has been performed. Then the 
35 weaving of full-width weftis resumed, as shown 
at a? in Fig. 3. 
Irregular weaving is distinguished from regu 
lar weaving by the fact that in the latter all 
portions of the woven fabric or web are fed 
forward uniformly or at an equal speed, while 
in the former, being woven without uniformity, 
they must be fed forward at different speeds, 
the fuller portions being fed faster than the 
others in proportion as they are woven faster. 
In weaving regular goods by power-looms the 
finished web is wound upon a roller, which 
takes it up as fast as it is woven; butin weav 
ing irregular or gusseted fabrics it has here 
tofore been found necessary to feed intermit 
5o tently, holding the Web stationary by a clamp 
. 
. 2d 
45 
until a certain amount has been woven, then 
releasing the clamp and carrying the web for 
ward by the batten to the extreme forward 
position of the latter, and then giving the 
clamp a new hold and resuming the weaving. 55 
Consequently it has been essential that the 
batten should recede by the width of a thread 
as each thread is wovenin. In hand-weaving 
this is easily accomplished, since the play of 
the batten is not necessarily uniform, being 6o 
regulated by the hand of the operator; but in 
power-looms complicated mechanical devices 
have to be employed to carry back the batten 
uniformly and at a speed corresponding to the 
speed with which the weft is filled in, and to 65 
carry it forward quickly and to its fullest ex 
tent when the Web is to be carried forward. 
To overcome these objections I have devised 
a feeding mechanism applicable to the ordi 
nary power-loom, which carries forward the 
web as fast as it is woven, as in regular weav 
ing, and which, after the short threads form 
ing a gusset have been wovenin, may be made 
to release its hold upon the fabric, letting the 
latter be drawn back to a straight edge against 75 
the reed, whereupon it may be moved back 
and re-engaged with the fabric, and the feed 
ing resumed. Thus the batten has a uniform 
play, and does not recede as the weftisfilled in. 
My improved feeding mechanism is illus 
trated in Figs. 4, 5, and 6 of the accompa 
nying drawings, the forward portion of the 
loom being also shown in Figs. 4 and 5, but the 
remainder thereof being omitted, since it is of 
the usual construction and forms no part of 85 
my invention, nor is it essential to elucidate 
the operation thereof. Fig. 4 is a front eleva 
tion. Fig. 5 is a vertical section taken in the 
plane of the line at a in Fig. 4, and Fig. 6 is a 
sectional detail view on a larger scale. 
C is the fixed frame of the loom; D, the lay 
or batten, and c the reed or comb mounted in 
the latter, all being substantially of the usual 
construction. 
fabric (shown in Fig. 5 by the line d) may be 
griped or clamped. The bar E is preferably 
faced with leather, rubber, cloth, or other soft 
or elastic substance over which the fabricpasses. 
The bar E is arranged above the bar E, and Ioo 
E E are clamping-bars, between which the 95 
90 
2 
235,915 
  
is capable of being pressed forcibly down upon tate with the wheel in the direction of the ar. 
the same, and its loweredge is preferably formed row in Fig. 5, drawing forward the racks and 
the frame e until the latter occupies the posi 
with fine teeth or points to engage the fabric 
and prevent its slipping. The two bars E. E.' 
tion shown in full lines. The fabric is thus 
drawn steadily forward, while the threads a and 
are capable of motion together toward or 
b are being Woven, at a speed corresponding to 
from the batten. This may be effected in sev 
the rapidity of the weaving. At the comple 
eral ways, the preferable one (shown in the 
drawings) being by mounting them on a swing 
tion of the threads for the gusset, or when the 
frame e has assumed the position shown in 
ing frame, e, which is pivoted beneath on a 
full lines, the loom is stopped by the action of 
rock-shaft, f. The bar E is fixed to the frame 
the Jacquard mechanism, which governs the 
e, while the bar E is mounted thereon so as to 
weaving in of the thread b or by other suita 
have a slight vertical motion. Its ends are 
ble means. The batten D will then be moved 
fixed to the short arms of levers gg, whose 
forward, being assisted by the hand of the op. 
long arms are connected, through the medium 
erator if necessary, until its reed rests against 
of links h h, levers ii, and links jj, to levers 
the last thread, b, Fig. 1, of the gusset, being 
l l, which carry weights FF. The weights 
then in about the position shown by the dot 
act at great mechanical advantage to force 
ted lines in Fig. 5. The operator then disen 
the bar E' down upon the bar E, and are lifted 
gages the clutch J from the wheel H, thus 
to raise the bar E by depressing a treadle, n, 
freeing the shaft G and framee, and then, by 
with the foot, this treadle being fixed to a rock 
pressing with his foot on the treadle on, he lifts 
shaft, n, which ties together the two levers ll. 
the clamping-bar E', and thus releases the fab 
The devicesh, i,j, k, l, and Fare preferably 
duplicated, as shown, though a single set, if 
ric, which is at once drawn back by the ten 
arranged centrally, might serve the purpose. 
sion of the weights, which stretch the warp 
until its rear edge is brought into a straight 
The bars EE are drawn forcibly forward by 
line against the reed c, as shown in Fig. 2. 
the following-described mechanism: Theframe 
The operator then, while still holding down 
e is provided with toothed racks p p, which 
the treadle, pushes back the frame e into its 
mesh with pinions r , fixed on a shaft, G, 
first position, then releases the treadle, thus 
which has bearings in the frame C. The racks 
permitting the bars E E to again clamp the 
may be guided and kept in mesh with the pin 
fabric, and again tightens the clutch J, when 
ions by means of guiding-frames SS, which 
the loom is again started, the weaving of wide 
embrace the shaft G and determine the extent 
weft-threads is resumed, as shown at a', in 
of motion of the frame e. The shaft G bears, 
Fig. 3, and the former operation is repeated. 
near its extremity, a gear-wheel, H, which is 
The operation thus proceeds intermittently, 
loose on the shaft and meshes with any suita 
the forward motion of the clamping-bars feed 
ble gearing of the loom, a portion of which is 
ing forward the goods as it is woven, and the 
shown in Figs. 4 and 5, being lettered tt. This 
bars being brought back each time after the 
gearing is preferably the same and driven by 
weaving of a certain length, usually the dis 
the same means as that commonly employed 
in power-looms for operating the cloth-roll or 
tance between two gussets. 
My mechanism is susceptible of considerable 
take-up, that roll having been removed from 
modification without departing from its essen 
the machine and the shaft G applied in its 
tial features, as, for instance, the lower clamp 
place. I provide some suitable means for 
ing-bar might be made the movable one. The 
causing the shaft G to rotate with the wheel 
two bars might be pressed together by springs 
H when desired, the preferable device for this 
instead of Weights and levers. The bars might 
purpose consisting of a radialarm, I, fixed to the 
slide forward and backward in guides or ways 
shaft close to the wheel, and fitted with a clutch, 
instead of being borne by a pivoted frame. 
J, to engage the periphery of the wheel. The 
preferable form of this clutch is shown in Fig. 
The forward movement of the frame or bars 
might be effected by other gearing and con 
6, which is a vertical mid-section. The clutch 
consists of a clamping-head which overhangs 
nections than those shown. The connecting 
and disconnecting of the mechanism for mov 
and bears against the rim of the wheel, and 
ing forward the bars might be effected by 
has a screw-threaded shank which passes 
through the end of the arm I and is engaged 
other forms of clutches or by any known form 
of let-off device, and a single bar with teeth 
by a nut which forms part of a handle or le 
to penetrate the goods might be substituted 
ver, K. By turning this handle the screw is 
for the clamping-bars. 
drawn back and the rim of the wheel tightly 
clamped. A device for taking in between the 
teeth of the wheel may be substituted for the 
clamp. 
The operation is as follows: The framee e 
stands at first in the position shown in Fig. 5 
in dotted lines, its clamping-bars having firm 
hold of the fabric. 
If, now, the clutch J be 
engaged with the wheel H, by turning the le 
ver K the shaft G and its pinions r will ro 
I claim as my invention 
1. A feeding mechanism for looms, consist 
ing of an engaging portion for taking hold of 
the Web, which can be engaged therewith or 
be disengaged therefrom at will, and which is 
capable of motion bodily toward and from the 
batten, in combination with mechanism for 
propelling it forward or from the batten as 
the Weaving proceeds, and with means for con. 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
So 
75 
95 
I do 
O 
l I5 
 
I25 
55 
 
235,915 
- 
3 
Io 
necting and disconnecting it with said pro 
pelling mechanism, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
2. A feeding mechanism for looms, consist 
ing of clamping-bars E E of suitable con 
struction, capable of motion toward and from 
the batten of the loom, in combination with 
means for forcing them together and for sepa 
rating them, with mechanism for propelling 
them forward or away from the batten while 
the weaving is in progress, and with means 
for disconnecting them from said propelling 
mechanism, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a feeding mechanism for looms, the 
combination of the pivoted frame e, the clamp 
ing-bar E, fixed thereon, the levers gg, full 
crumed to said frame, the clamping-bar E', 
mounted on said levers, the weighted levers 
l, suitable connecting mechanism between le 
vers g and l, and the treadle m, whose depres 
sion lifts the weighted levers and raises the 
bar E, substantially as set forth. 
 
4. In a feeding mechanism for looms, the 
combination of the engaging device for hold 
ing the fabric, the framee, bearing the same, 25 
and the rack p, pinion r, shaft G, wheel H, 
and means for engaging and disengaging said 
shaft and wheel, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a feeding mechanism for looms, the 
combination of the engaging device for hold- 3o 
ing the fabric, the framee, bearing the same, 
the rack p, the pinion r, the shaft G, the wheel 
H, the clutch J, and the lever K, substantially 
as set forth. 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 35 
XAVIER STIEGLER. 
Witnesses: 
- 
PAUL GAY, 
R. TENIERE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236015.txt	(No Model.) 
Seed Planter and Fertilizer Distributer. 
C. E. G. ARDNER 
No. 236,015. 
Patented Dec. 28, 1880. 
 
=3; 
e. f 
y 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
A. 
 
 
SaaS 
S 
Z. 
WITNESSES: 
44%-24 
paskwa 
 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LTHOG:APHER, Washington, d. c. 
a. 
--- 
suici 
INVENTOR: 
66 %ace/ 
v 
NBY 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTIAN E. GARDNER, OF ORANGEBURG, SOUTH CAROLINA. 
SEED-PLANTER AND FERTLIZER-DistriBUTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 236,015, dated December 28, 1880. 
Application filed May 19, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHRISTIAN EGARDNER, 
of Orangeburg, in the county of Orangeburg 
and State of South Carolina, have invented a 
new and Improved Seed-Planter and Fertil 
izer-Distributer; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same. 
My invention relates to machines of the 
wheelbarrow pattern in which two hoppers 
are each provided with dropping devices, so 
that different materials may be carried and 
fed or distributed with a single machine. 
The object of my invention is to so construct 
a machine of the above class that it may be 
used either as a single or as a double dropper 
or planter, and when used as a single planter 
only may have an increased capacity for car 
rying the material to be deposited; and the 
improvement consists in providing a double 
compartment receptacle with a removable slid 
ing portion, formed of sectionshinged together 
in such manner that the partition between the 
two independent compartments may be with 
drawn and unfolded and placed across the re 
ceptacle in such manner as to form a single 
enlarged compartment for holding and drop 
ping a single material, as will more fully ap 
pear from the following detailed description 
thereof. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a plan view of my improved machine; Fig. 2, 
a side elevation of the same; Fig. 3, a longi 
tudinal section through the center of the hop 
per and its connections detached, and Fig. 4 
a detail view of the valves and connections 
for operating them. 
The general structure of the machine is of 
the wheelbarrow pattern. A base-frame, A, 
supports a box, A', formed of parallel vertical 
side pieces and inwardly-sloping end pieces, 
and by means of a partition, A', of peculiar 
construction, is divided into a double compart 
ment, A' A', as will hereinafter appear. The 
front end of the machine is supported upon a 
wheel, B, formed of an iron or steel disk, of 
sheet metal, to the sides of which wooden 
faces B'B' are secured by wood-screws b, pass 
ing through them. The periphery of the metal 
disk B is sharpened to a cutting-edge, and the 
outer surfaces of the wooden pieces B are 
made convex, and together form a colter-wheel 
of the form of a double-convex lens with an 
acute-angular edge. The wheel B is secured 
to an axle, C, supported in bearing-straps c c, 
secured to the under side of the base. The 
forward end of the base is cut out to fit closely 
against the sides of the double-convex colter 
wheel, and may be edged with metal to scrape 
away any mud or dirt that may adhere to it. 
A crank, C, is secured to the end of the 
axle C, and is connected, by a pitman, D, with 
one end of a double crank, E, the other end of 
which passes through the side wall of the for 
ward hopper and projects into the end of a 
wooden hub, E', which is provided with a stud 
bolt, e, upon its opposite end, that is supported 
and turns freely in bearings in the opposite 
side wall of the hopper. The hub E' is secured 
to the end of the double-crank arm by means 
of a pin, E, that passes through holes in both 
of them, and may be readily removed or re 
placed by means of a loop or ring handle upon 
its upper projecting end. 
The hub E is formed into an agitator and 
guano-feeder in a cheap and simple manner, as 
follows: A series of holes are bored all the way 
through the hub, and wire rodse' pass through 
them and project at each of their ends. The 
ends of about one-half of these l'ods are bent 
over at right angles to their shanks in one di 
rection, and the ends of the other rods are 
bent in the opposite direction in a correspond 
ing manner. 
Radial pins e may be inserted in the hub 
midway between the rods e', and sweep the 
middle portion of the discharge-opening of the 
hopper to clear it of obstructing matter, while 
the bent rods agitate the mass and cause it to 
be regularly fed through the opening. 
To the middle portion of the crank E is con 
nected, by a short pitman, F, a crank, G, simi 
lar to the crank E, but shorter in length. A 
hub, G', similar to hub E', and provided with 
agitators, is connected to the upper arm of the 
double crank G. by a pin, as in the case of the 
hub E'. By means of the crank-axle, double 
cranks, and two separate pitmen, the agitators 
may be vibrated together. By removing the 
short pitman of the agitator it is obvious that 
the rear hopper will be inoperative. 
Covering-plows H. H., secured to beams h h', 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
236,05 
bolted to the under side of the rear end of the 
frame A, are arranged to straddle the row and 
cover the fertilizer deposited therein with a 
two-furrow lap of earth. 
The beams h h' are braced and held in posi 
tion by a plate, H, screwed to the under side 
of the framing. 
When the machine is used as a planter the 
plow-shovels may be removed and a covering 
board substituted therefor. 
Handles II are secured at their forward 
ends to the side of the receptacle by means 
of Wood-screws i, or other suitable mealns, and 
are also secured at the rear end of the box by 
metal angle-plates it, which give the handles 
the proper spread to be conveniently grasped 
by the operator. 
Each of the compartments A A' is provided 
with a discharge-opening, (tal, the area of which 
is regulated by means of sliding valves KK, 
each provided with a screw-threaded stem, K, 
and a nut, K, with a corresponding thread 
that fits upon the end of the stem. An an 
lular groove in the hub of the nut receives 
the jaws of a metal plate, K, securely attached 
to the side of the frame, in such manner that 
as the nut is turned the stem and its valve Will 
be in oved across the discharge-opening and 
regulate its area. The edges of the disclharge 
openings may be protected by metal plates K, 
to secure greater accuracy. The discharge 
openings a, a? are in line with each other, and 
are covered by a rectangular strip, L, of wood 
or metal, perforated at such point in its length 
that it will come opposite the discharge-open 
ing at of the rear hopper when the valve 
shall have been drawn back to its full length 
to open both of the ports. The valve L slides 
in a depression in the bottom of the frame A, 
and is held in place by a cross-strip, L'. 
A lever, L, pivoted to the frame, is slotted 
at one end to embrace a pin on the valve, and 
at the other end passes through a loop or slot, 
l, at the lower end of a hand-lever, L, pivoted 
at l' to the side of the boxing at its rear end, 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
to bring the upper end of the lever L within 
convenient reach of the operator to close the 
valve L while the machine is turning or in 
passing over uncultivated space around trees 
and stumps. The forward end of the frame is 
connected by means of a bail,M, with the draft 
apparatus. 
The hoppers A*A* are divided by a partition, 
A*, of peculiar construction. (Shown clearly in 
It is made of two rectangular pieces 
Fig. 3.) 
hinged together at their upper edges, so that 
they may be spread apart at the base or bot 
tom of the hopper, to form an inclined partition 
for each adjoining hopper to deflect the mate 
rial to the central discharge - aperture and 
within range of the agitators. The forward 
hopper is purposed to distribute cotton-seed 
and the rear hopper to distribute guano as a 
fertilizer at the same time. 
When it is desired to use the machine as a 
cotton or wheat planter only, the discharge 
aperture in the rear hopper is alone used. 
In order to afford increased space and util 
ize nearly the entire interior of the box for a 
single hopper, the hinged partition A'is with 
drawn from its guides, as shown in full lines 
in Fig. 3, and when unfolded may rest upon 
strips upon the inner sides of the box, as shown 
in dotted lines in the same figure, and form an 
inclined bottom for an enlarged single recepta 
cle in which nearly the entire space of the box 
is utilized. 
What I claim as new is 
In a combined manure-distributer and seed 
planter, the hopper having the partition formed 
of two hinged sections, which may be folded 
together and arranged as described, to form 
a double-compartment hopper, or unfolded and 
arranged in the manner specified, to convert 
the hopper into a single-compartment recepta 
cle, substantially as set forth. 
CHRISTIAN E. GARDNER. 
SO 
55 
7 o 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
J. E. GLOVER, 
G. B. LALLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236115.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BEINRICH TRENK, OF BERLIN, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF, JEAN 
BALLATSCHANO, AND CONSTANTIN BALLATSCHANO, OF BUCHAREST, 
ROUMANIA. 
COMPOSITION FOR USE IN TANNING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 236,115, dated December 28, 1880. 
Application filed July 20, 1880 (No specimens.) Patented in Germany April 24, 1880, and in France March 15, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HEINRICH TRENK, of 
Berlin, Prussia, Germany, have invented a 
new and Improved Composition of Matter for 
5 Tanning, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved composition of matter to 
be used in tanning for the purpose of making 
to the leather dense and compact, and for aug 
menting and assisting the action of the other 
tanning substances or compositions. 
The improved composition of matter con 
sists of a concentrated solution of crude tartar 
I5 or argol, to which a small quantity of chloride 
of zinc or some analogous salt, such as muri 
ate of ammonia, chloride of nickel, chloride of 
calcium, &c., is added. The proportions are 
one thousand parts of the tartar solution to 
This liquid is to be used to treat the hides 
or skins before or after they are submitted to 
the action of a tanning-liquid or tanning mat 
ter, and this liquid is especially well adapted 
25 for treating skins before tanning them with 
vegetable matter; for instance, a skin can be 
2O fifteen parts of the salt. 
 
tanned in thirty days with a solution of one 
thousand parts water, thirty parts of pyrolig 
neous acid, and one part of tannin, if previ 
ously treated with the above-described liquid, . 
whereas, without the said treatment, the last 
mentioned tanning solution would have no ef 
fect upon the hide. 
The within-described liquid is never to be 
used alone, but always with some other tan 
ning-liquid. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The herein-described composition of matter', 
to be used in tanning, consisting of a concen 
trated solution of crude tartar or argol, to which 
a small quantity of chloride of Zinc or some 
analogous salt, such as muriate of ammonia, 
chloride of nickel, or chloride of calcium, is 
added, all as specified and set forth. 
This specification signed by me this 25th 
day of June, 1880. 
HENRICE TRENK. 
Witnesses: 
FRANZ SCHULTZ, 
BERTHOLD ROI. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236215.txt	(No Model.) 
T. B. DE FOREST. 
Lead Pencil. 
No. 236,25. 
Patented Jan. 4, 1881. 
 
 
 
t 
2%ze- 
36%. 
 
. 
2. r 3 ZO-%-2- 
 
E. PETERs, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON. b.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS B. DE FOREST, OF BIRMINGHAM, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO THE JOSEPH DIXON CRUCIBLE COMPANY, OF JER 
SEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
LEAD-PENCIL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 236,215, dated January 4, 1881. 
Application filed March 13, 1880. (No model.) 
4O 
45 
foration, b. The end of the pencil should be 35 
cut away, as seen in Fig. 2, so as to leave a 
clear passage from the perforation b to the 
perforation a, and the perforation b should be 
larger than the perforation a. This completes 
the pencil. 
To attach the cord, pass one end throug 
the perforation a, thence turning outward 
through the perforation b; then tie a knot or 
make other enlargement in the end of the 
cord, and draw such enlargement through the 
perforation b, against the perforation a, as seen 
in Fig. 2, which secures the pencil to the cord 
in a neat and convenient manner. Instead of 
the side and end perforations, the perforation 
may extend diametrically through the cap, and 5o 
the cord be passed through and tied to itself, 
forming a loop in the cord through the cap. 
By this construction I produce, as an article 
of manufacture and sale, a Wood lead-pencil 
permanently provided with means for attach- 55 
ing to a cord. 
pencil with means for suspension. 
I do not broadly claim providing a lead 
I claim 
As an article of manufacture, a Wood lead- 6o 
pencil provided with a perforated metal cap 
constructed with perforations a b, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
THOMAS B. DE FOREST, 
Witnesses: 
Jos. O. EARLE, 
J. H. SHUMWAY. 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAs B. DE FOREST, 
of Birmingham, in the county of New Haven 
and State of Connecticut, have invented a 
new Improvement in Lead-Pencils; and I do 
hereby declare the following, when taken in 
Jnnection with the accompanying drawings, 
and the letters of reference marked thereon, 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
same, which said drawings constitute part of 
t...is specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1, side view; Fig. 2, a vertical sec 
tional view. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in lead-pencils such as are made from a cylin 
der of wood with a stick of lead through the 
Center. 
In many cases it is desirable to attach the 
pencil to a cord, as, for instance, to slates, 
books, and many other places; but the pencils 
as usually produced afford no convenience for 
such attachment. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
the pencil with such means for attachment, 
which shall be a permanent part of the pencil; 
and it consists in the pencil provided with a 
perforated cap, through the perforation of 
which the cord may be secured, and as more 
fully hereinafter described. 
A represents a common wood lead-pencil. B 
is a metallic cap, formed from sheet metal or 
other suitable material, struck up so as to close 
ly fit one end of the pencil, and perforated at its 
closed end, as at a, and also with a side per 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236315.txt	(Model.) 
No. 236,315. 
A, EGOLF. . 
Alarm Bolt. 
Patented Jan. 4, 1881. 
 
  
 
S 
C 
fals, 35T 
Tala) 
2S2 
1. 
A Z G. a, 
- see - 
 
 
s N 
- 
vers 
agree 
--- 42 & 7. 
C. 
  
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADAM EGOLF, OF ROYERS FORD, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO SAMUEL EGOLF, OF SAME PLACE. 
AARM - BOT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 236,815, dated January 4, 1881. 
Application filed October 26, 1880. (Model.) 
I5 side of the door or shutter. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ADAMEGOLF, a citizen 
of the United States, residing in Royer's Ford, 
Montgomery county, Pennsylvania, have in 
5 vented an Improved Alarm-Bolt, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The main object of my invention is to pro 
vide the locking-bolt of a door or shutter with 
mechanism whereby, on an attempt being made 
Io to open the door or shutter, when the bolt is 
projected an alarm will be given, a further 
object being to secure the bolt ill position after 
the sounding of the alarm, and thereby pre 
vent the retraction of said bolt from the out 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section of a locking-bolt with my 
improved alarm mechanism; Figs. 2 and 3, 
sectional plans of Fig. 1, and Figs. 4 and 5 
2O detached perspective views of parts of the 
alarm mechanism. 
A represents part of a window-shutter, and 
B part of the opposite shutter; or B may rep 
resent part of a door-fraine, and A part of a 
25 door opening outwardly. For the purpose of 
this description, however, I will regard these 
parts as window - shutters. The shutter A 
carries on the inside a plate, D, with staples a 
for the retention and guidance of the bolt E, 
3o and the shutter B has a plate, F, with staples 
b for the reception and retention of the end 
of said bolt when the latter is projected. The 
boltE has a slot, d, for the reception of a ham 
mer, G, which is hung to a suitable pivot 
35 pin, e, and is acted upon by a spring, f, as 
shown in Fig. 1. The lower portion of the 
slot d extends to the inner face of the bolt E, 
and in this portion of the slot is pivoted a 
trigger, i, which is acted upon by a Spring, n, 
4o and is adapted to engage with a notch, n, in 
the hamliner when the latter is elevated, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The rear end of the 
trigger projects from the inner face of the 
bolt, which is beveled to permit such projec 
45 tion, the heel of the bolt being reduced in 
thickness, as shown in Fig. 2. An opening, 
p, is formed in the bolt E for the reception of 
a cap or cartridge, S, the opening occupying 
such relation to the pivot of the hammer G 
. 
that when said hammer is depressed its point So 
Will occupy the opening. 
When the hammer is elevated and is re 
tained in its elevated position by the engage 
ment of the front end of the trigger i with the 
notch n, the bolt E can be moved backward 55 
and forward to fasten or unfastern the shutter 
without danger of releasing the hammer, as 
no pressure is exerted upon the projecting end 
of the trigger; but when the bolt is projected 
and any attempt is made to open the shutter 6o 
without first retracting the bolt-such, for in 
stance, as an attempt to pry open the shutters 
the angle assumed by the latter causes press 
ure upon the projecting end of the trigger i 
and operates the latter so as to release the 65 
hammer G, which descends and explodes the 
cap or cartridges in the opening p. (See Fig. 3.) 
After its descent the point of the hammer rests 
in the opening p, and said hammer embraces 
the staple a, so that the retraction of the bolt to 
to release the shutters cannot be effected with 
out first elevating the hammer. 
The various forms of hammers and triggers 
can be adopted in carrying out my invention, 
those shown merely embodying my invention 75 
in a simple form which has been found to be 
effective in practice. 
When the bolt is applied to a pair of shut 
ters or a door opening inwardly the shape of 
the bolt and the location of the trigger will 8o 
have to be modified accordingly. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A locking-bolt constructed for the regep 
tion of a cap or cartridge, and carrying a ham 
mer, G, and trigger i, and springs for Oper-85 
ating the same, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the hammer G and 
trigger i and their springs with a bolt con 
structed for the reception of a cap or cartridge, 
and having a slot, d, for receiving said ham- go 
mer, trigger, and springs, as set forth. 
3. The combination of a pair of shutters, or 
a door and door-frame, a plate, F, having 
staples b, a plate, D, having staples a, and a 
bolt, E, adapted to said staples at and b, pro- 95 
vided with a hammer, G, and trigger i, and 
constructed for the reception of a cap or car. 
tridge, as specified. 
236,35 
4. The combination of a pair of shutters, or projected and the hammer depressed, said 
a door and door-frame, a plate, F, having sta- hammer will embrace the outer staple, (t, alnd 
ples b, a plate, D, having staples a, and a slot-confine the bolt longitudinally thereto, as set I5 
ted bolt, E, adapted to the stables a and l, forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
having its inner face beveled or cut away to name to this specification in the presence of 
E. the projection of the trigger, as de- two subscribing witnesses. 
scribed. 
5 provided with a hammer, G, and trigger i, and 
ADAM EGOLF. 
5. The combination of the plate D, having 
to staples a, with the bolt E, having an opening, 
p, and a hammer hung in respect to the opell- 
ing, as set forth, whereby, when the bolt is 
Witnesses: 
JONAS BICKHART, 
HENRY WALIKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236416.txt	W. O. BOURNE. 
Ore Separator. 
No. 236,46. 
Patented Jan. 11, 188. 
 
 
... ------4---------- 
VIII.7. Vaatzazi, Zazafa. 
D 
W 
%2N 
s 
has 
N 
SS SS 
s 
s 
3. 
M 
 
 
 
 
s % 1. 
| K. | \ 
'''Cataly 
2 3|a 21 
 
 
 
/22%r 
-7- 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. O. BOURNE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ORE.S EPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 236,416, dated January 11, 1881. 
Application filed October 14, 1879. 
O 
25 
35 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM OLAND 
BOURNE, residing in the city, county, and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Ore-Separators, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of ma 
chines which treat rocks and earths containing 
metals or metalliferous substances of different 
specific gravities, when such matters have been 
pulverized and sifted to an approximately-uni 
form fineness, and when such machines are pro 
vided with a working surface or bed of woven or 
perforated metal, or other proper material for 
carrying the pulverized material, and whereon 
it is subjected to an upward motion from puffs 
of air through the bed from a bellows or other 
blowing contrivance, and by which action the 
heavier are separated from the lighter parti 
cles, from difference of specific gravities, and 
fall on the bottom or bed, while the lighter por 
tion forms a top stratum as Waste. Such ma 
chines, actuated by mechanical power, are well 
known Wherein the pulverized material is auto 
matically supplied to the machine and is sepa 
rated and passed from the machine in a con 
tinuous concentrated stream at one point of 
delivery, while the waste or tailings are also 
continuously delivered at another point. 
The objective feature of my invention, which 
I have named the pan-separator, is to con 
struct a simple, cheap, and efficient portable 
separator to be worked by hand, and wherein 
I may employ either air or water as the sepa 
rating medium; and my invention consists, 
mainly, in constructing such machines so that 
the downward movement of the ore-receptacle 
operates the bellows, and in certain combina 
tions of parts whereby the main feature of my 
invention is carried out, as will be hereinafter 
more fully described, and then pointed out in 
the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a sec 
tional vertical elevation of my improved ma 
chine, and Fig.2 a plan of the working-bed 
with certain parts cut away to illustrate its 
construction. 
In the accompanying drawings, Brepresents 
a bellows consisting of a base-plate, b, provided 
with a central orifice, c, having a flap-valve, v, 
covering its inner end and opening upward. 
a represents a collapsible case, formed of leather 
or other flexible material, connecting the pe 
ripheries of the base b and upper head, d. The 
base-plate b is preferably provided with legs to 
raise it from the floor and admit a free passage 
of the air to the inlet-valve of the orifice c. 
communicating with the interior of the bellows. 
A represents an ore-receptacle in a central 
opening in the upper head, d, communicating 
with the interior of the bellows, and consist 
ing, mainly, of a sieve-bottom and curbs sup 
ported on a suitable frame. 
e e e are thin bars lying under and support 
ing the sieve f, of woven wire, perforated metal, 
or other material, upon which a bed or cushion, 
g, is laid, consisting of one or more thicknesses 
of woven cloth stitched or quilted at frequent 
intervals to the sieve f. 
i shows a shallow curb or border surround 
ing the bed, and h is an adjustable but deeper 
curb, fitting closely within the curb i, to be 
raised or lowered, according to the quantity 
and nature of the naterial under treatment. 
An inclined plate, k, as a waste or water shed, 
is secured to the top edge, outside of h, a part 
of which plate is cut away to receive a delivery 
spout, l, as shown. 
in represents a shallow pan secured under 
the bars e, so as to leave a space all around 
between its edges and the frame-work for free 
passage or outlet of the air from the bellows to 
the perforated bed and mineral above. This 
pan is to catch any fine particles of mineral 
which may pass through the bed. All the de 
scribed upper part of the machine may be read 
ily lissected from the fraune d. 
in represents a pipe intended to communi 
cate with the interior of the bellows to supply 
water when that medium for separation is used 
instead of air, and O shows a helix-spring for 
distending the bellows-case. 
The apparatus may with advantage bese 
cured to the floor by the base b in any conven 
ient manner when Working, to prevent its mov 
ing about under the force employed, and in 
operating a thin couch of the pulverized mat 
ter is laid upon the bed g; then, with the hands 
on each side of the top rim, press gently down 
ward. The air from the bellows will be forced 
through the sieves and mineral, giving it an 
undulating and wave-like motion, separating 
the lighter from the heavier portions and forc 
ing the former to the top. 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
236,46 
O 
When either the concentration or the waste 
has accumulated so as to embarrass the work 
ing action it may be shaken off by the spout l, 
and a light brush and shovel be used to collect 
the ore from of the bed; or it may be thrown 
off into a proper receptacle by a dexterous mo 
tion of the hand. 
In using water a supply-pipe from a fountain 
or other pressure should be attached to the 
pipe it, as described, proceeding as before. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent for an ore-separator, is 
1. In a separator, a receptacle, A, having a 
sieve-bottom, in combination with and secured 
directly to a bellows, B, and moving there with, 
the interior of the bellows communicating with 
the interior of the separator, whereby a move 
ment of the receptacle will operate the bellows 
and agitate the naterial in the separator, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. In a separator, the combination of the re 
25 
ceptacle A, having a perforated bottom, a, blast 
mechanisin B, communicating with the recep 
tacle A by an opening under the perforated 
bottom, and a spring, O, substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination of the base b, provided 
with the valve , flexible material a, bead d, 
carrying an ore-receptacle, A, having a sieve 
bottom, adjustable curb h, and spring O, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
4. The combination, with a bellows having 
a central opening in its head d, of an ore-recep 
tacle having a sieve-bottom, and pan m, hav 
ing openings in its side, suspended in the open 
ing in the head d, substantially as described, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
WM. OLAND BOURNE. 
Witnesses: 
J. B. HYDE, 
L. FUCOT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236516.txt	T. M. UILLERY. 
Lim e Kilm. 
No. 236,516. 
* 
Patented Jan. 11, 1881. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236616.txt	(No Model.) 
p 
No. 236,616, 
E. S. PALMER. 
Adjust able Scaffold Clamp, 
Patented Jan. 11, 1881. 
WITNESSES 
22 (424. 
2. 
w 
NVENTOR 
? 62&azz4-2. 
4a ATTORNEY 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERASTUS S. PALMER, OF FARIBAULT, MINNESOTA. 
ADJUSTABLE SCAFFOD- CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 236,616, dated January 11, 1881. 
Application filed June 12, 1880. 
(No model.) 
thereby sustain the clamp at any point upon 
the upright A to which it may have been ad 
justed. 
Heretofore clamps of this class have been so 
constructed as to render the clamp liable to 
lateral play or motion on the upright, thereby 
endangering the security of the clamps. I 
have obviated this defect by providing the pro 
longed straps or arms a ct, firmly joined to the 
claw and closely embracing the upright. By 
this construction there can be no tendency of 
the supporting bracket or claw to swing lat 
erally. Absolute security is thus afforded in 
this class of clamps. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
In an adjustable scaffold-clamp, the claw D, 
having dog b, guard c, and prolonged arms a 
a, perforated at a' a', made in one piece, in 
combination with the removable bolte, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
ERASTUS S. PALMER, 
Witnesses: 
JOHN M. HUNTER, 
JOSEPH. C. MOLD. 
35 
45 
SO 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ERASTUS S. PALMER, 
of Faribault, in the county of Rice and State 
of Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Adjustable Scaffold 
Clamps; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawing, in which the figure is a 
perspective view of an adjustable scaffold 
clamp embodying my improvements. 
This invention has relation to adjustable scaf. 
fold-clamps; and it consists in the improved 
features of construction and combination here 
inafter fully described, and particularly pointed 
out in the claim. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawing, A designates a section of one of the 
uprights of a scaffold. 
2O D designates a claw having dog b, guard c, 
and straps or arms at a formed in one piece 
with the claw, and perforated at a? a for the 
reception of a through-bolt, e, by which the 
clamp is adjustably secured to the upright A. 
D' designates a joist, one end of which rests 
upon the clamp C, between the guard c and the 
upright A. Weight upon joist D' causes the 
clamp to vibrate on the bolt e as a pivotal 
point and the dog b to bite the upright A, and 
IS 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236716.txt	 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
G., NEILSON. 
Draft Device for Locomotives. 
No. 236,716. 
Patented Jan. 18, 1881. 
 
X 
PETERS, PHOTo-LTHogRAPHER, washingtoN, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE NEILSON, OF CHELSEA, MASSACEUSETTS, 
O RA FT D E VI C E FOR LO C O V OVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 236,716, dated January 18, 1881. 
Application filed March 11, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all cho? ?? ??? ???cer? : 
Be it known that I, GEORGE NEILSON, of 
Chelsea, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Draft Device for Locomotive and other 
Boilers, of which the following is a specifica 
tlOn. 
My invention relates to that class of boilers 
in which one or more of the air-supplying de 
vices Works in variable duplicate functions 
i. e., the device furnishes a varying amount of 
fresh air to the fire, and, at the same time and 
through about the same instrumentalities, a 
varying quantity of the products of incomplete 
combustion, the two operations co-acting, but 
in variable degrees, in relation to each other. 
For instance, in some cases the amount of 
pure air may much exceed the products of 
combustion, and in other cases the terms are 
reversed; but in all cases with my invention 
the relative amounts may be accurately con 
trolled. 
My invention consists in connecting, with 
the under side of a boiler, a tube, one end of 
which is exposed to the open air while the 
other opens into a distributing-chamber near 
the fire-box, the air flowing from the distrib 
uting-chamber under a flange and in the im 
mediate vicinity of the deflector and a fresh 
air opening, so that the air that flows in under 
the grate from this source is delivered in a 
flat sheet and well distributed over the under 
side of the fire-grate surface. The air-tube 
above mentioned has openings into the smoke 
chamber, and is provided with a number of 
dampersaud deflectors for the purpose of draw 
ing in volumes of fresh air or the products of 
incomplete combustion, and also for the pur 
pose of controlling the relative amounts of 
the same. This system can be best under 
stood by reference to the drawings and speci 
fication. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical lon 
gitudinal section of a locomotive-boiler hav 
ing my invention attached. Fig. 2 is a verti 
cal cross-section through the fire-box. Fig. 3 
is a cross vertical section taken through the 
smoke-chamber air-induction tube; also show 
ing the chamber S and damper N. 
The boiler A, fire-box A', and smoke-cham 
ber B are made in the usual manner. 
55 
?? 
D' is a deflecting-plate, placed as shown in 7o 
I will now proceed to describe the parts in 
which my invention is embraced. 
D ID' is an air-tube having an opening in 
front and a place of discharge at D'. The 
chamber S, into which the air-tube D D' dis 
charges, extends along the back of the fire 
box, as shown in Fig. 3, so that the inflowing 
air may be distributed along the entire width 
of the grate-surface. 
H, Fig. 1, is a deflector, located as shown, 
and is intended to contract the inflowing cur 
rent of air, and to thus cause a partial vacuum 
behind it at M. The object of creating a par 
tial vacuum at M is to draw the products of 65 
incomplete combustion from the smoke-cham 
berB and to pass them, mixed with fresh air, to 
the ash-pit C, and thence to the fire, as indi 
cated by the arrows. 
Figs. 1 and 2, and it serves to cause a par 
tial Vacuum in the space S whenever the front 
damper, N, is open, thus assisting the flow of 
products of incomplete combustion from the 
smoke-chamber. 
K, Fig. 1, is a damper for the purpose of 
closing, or partly closing, the orifice between 
the smoke-chamber B and the air-tube D D'. 
This damper K, being connected by a rod, (see 
Fig. 1) connects the damper L in the smoke- 8o 
stack to the damper K, so that the two damp 
ers L and K move together. These may be 
operated by a rod or cord extending to the 
cab of the engines. 
tube D D' for the purpose of admitting air 
and for increasing the velocity of the current. 
This orifice has a valve, E', to regulate the 
flow of the incoming air. 
steam into the current of air, and thus warm 
it and otherwise facilitate the draft. 
The damper N, (see Figs. 1 and 3,) when 
open, serves to admit fresh air under the grates. 
The deflector D'' (see Fig.1) is so placed as to 
prevent the fresh cold air from directly strik 
ing the grate-bars; and it also serves to form 
a partial vacuum and thus draw air from the 
chamber S to intermingle with the fresh air 
that flows in when the damper N is open. 
The damper I in the smoke-stack is used to 
check the direct draft, and thus cause a circu 
E, Figs. 1 and 3, is an orifice made in the 85 
T, Fig. 1, is a pipe for the introduction of 9o 
75 
? ? ? 
O 
I 5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
combination with the air-space S and deflector 
D', all operating together substantially as 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a locomotive-boiler, the damperL, con 
necting-rod k, and damper K, in combination 
with the air-tube D D, air-space S, and ash 
pit C, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
GEORGE NEILSON. 
IS 
Witnesses: 
FRANK. G. PARKER, 
JAMES A. CROCKER, 
lation from the fire-box A", through the tubes, 
to the smoke-chamber B; thence downward to 
the tube D D, and chamber S to the ash-pit C. 
With the circulating incomplete products of 
combustion there is mingled more or less fresh 
air, So that the mass of air and gases that 
reaches the fire Will not only sustain combus 
tion, but add fuel for it. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I desire to secure by Letters Patent is 
1. In a locomotive-boiler, the air-tube D D, 
having a deflector, H, and inlet-orifice E, in 
5 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236817.txt	. 
. 
. 
m 
. . 
. 
(No Model). 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Illuminating Grating or Perforated Plate Of Metal and 
other Materials, and Constructions made there from. 
No. 236,817. 
Patented Jan. 18, 1881. 
T. HY ATT. 
. 
 
N, PETERs, roto-Ittographer, WASHINGTON, D. G. 
T. HY ATT. 
(No Model) 
3 sheeta-sheet 2. 
Illuminating Grating or Perforated Plate of Metal and 
other Materials, and Constructions made there from. 
No. 236,817. 
Patented Jan. 18, 1881. 
 
 
  
  
 
 
24-7 - 
(E. 
N. PETERs, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D. c. 
3N NSS 
SSS 
 
FG. VIII. 
SS 
t 
INVENTOR 
zge 
 
al 
(No Model.) 
 
 
T. HY ATT. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Illuminating Grating or Perforated Plate of Metal and 
other Materials, and Constructions made there from 
No. 236,817. 
Patented Jan. 18, 1881. 
 
 
 
FIG. XI. 
UNITED STATES 
THADDEUS HYATT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO ELIZABETH 
PATENT OFFICE. 
ADELAIDE LAKE HYATT, OF SAME PLACE. 
v; 
ILLUMINATING-GRATING OR PERFORATED PLATE OF METAL AND OTHER MATERIALS, AND CON 
- 
, 
STRUCTIONS MADE THEREFROM, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 236,817, dated January 18, 1881. 
Application filed December 24, 1880. (No model.) Patented in England October 18, 1873, and March 4, 1874. 
O 
I5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THADDEUs HYATT, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
5 ments in Illuminating-Gratings or Perforated 
Plates of Metal and other Materials, and in 
Constructions Made Therefrom, with reference 
to fire-proofing and ornamenting the same, of 
which the following is a 'specification. 
The object of my invention is to make fire 
proof illuminating roofs and surfaces and 
roof pavements or area-coverings by construct 
ing them of materials fire-proof in themselves. 
or of materials made fire-proof. 
The illuminating roofs, surfaces, and area 
coverings now in general use throughout the 
country are constructions devised by me as 
an application to new and useful purposes of 
my original invention of an illuminating-grat 
2Oing or perforated metal plate set with glass, 
patented by me as a vault-cover or coal-hole 
plate in the year 1845, as invented by me in 
the year 1834. These constructions are made 
of naked metal, and consequently are not 
strictly fire-proof, although incombustible. 
My present invention is the application of 
strictly fire-proof illuminating-gratings or per 
forated plates set with glass to the construc 
tion of illuminating-roofs, walking and other 
surfaces, and embraces the following novel 
points, to wit: First, fireproofed illuminat 
ing-gratings where glasses previously inclosed 
in mounts or jackets enter into the combina 
tion; second, glasses applied (either nakedly 
or set in mounts) to fireproofed metal grat 
ings or plates after the fireproofing material 
has become set and hard; third, applying 
molded and hardened fireproofing materials 
to glass-set metal gratings or plates; fourth, 
ornamental fire-proof illuminating - surfaces 
formed of the above-named construction ma 
terials; fifth, glass-set mounts in the form of 
common bricks, and constructions therefrom 
made in the manner of ordinary brick con 
structions. 
The illuminating construction patented by 
me in England in 1869 as a beam-platform, 
made of illuminating gratings faced With as 
phalt, was fire-proof to the extent that as 
45 
35 
25 
40 
io 
phalt is a fire-proof material and to the ex. So 
tent that the application of the material to one 
surface only could make it, but by reason of 
its coating became possessed of three quali 
ties not existing in my previous structures 
viz., first, fire-proof within the limits above 55 
stated; second, non-sweating to the extent of 
the covered surface; third, non-slipping. The 
concrete employed in the 1869 construction 
was a bituminous one. 
My presentimprovements have reference to 
obtaining the above-named three qualities in 
better shape by employing hydraulic cements, 
concretes, and baked clays, the invention con 
sisting in making glass-set gratings of baked 
clays, or of Portland or other hydraulic ce 
ment, concrete, or material possessing hy 
draulic properties, or of glass-set metal grat- . 
ings incased in fire-proofing material, and in 
constructions made therefrom, the novel fea 
tures of the constructions being, first, a con 
tinuous surface of the incasing material, and 
On both the Weather and house face of the roof 
or surface; second, in addition to the fire 
proof quality, obtaining, as a result of cover 
ing both surfaces of the construction, security 75 
against the wrenching strains that now affect 
illuminating-roofs and roof-pavements covered 
with concrete or material on the weather-face 
only, where the naked metal of the under side 
is expanded by the hot atmosphere below it 
at a moment when the concrete or material 
without is feeling the effects of a winter's freez 
ing cold. 
The aforesaid improvements were secured 
to me in England by Patents No. 3,380, Octo 
ber 18, 1873, and No. 783, March 4, 1874. In 
the former the invention is described in the 
form of cells and cell-quarries, the roofs or 
constructions formed by their union being 
honey-combed. In the latter the invention is 
described in the form of the ordinary illumi 
nating-gratings or perforated metal plates in 
common use, the fireproofing materials em 
ployed to cover them consisting of baked clays 
or brick in plain and ornamental shapes, also 
fire-clay combined with asbestus and gelati 
nous silica, also hydraulic cements and con 
cretes, employed and applied either according 
95 
9o 
 
is a site 
y 
236, S1 
to the ordinary and common methods of apply 
ing plastic materials or in a molded and hard 
ened state, the union of any number of such 
incased gratings producing roofs and surfaces 
with fire-proof junction-edges, and consequent 
ly complete fire-protection, because of the con 
tinuous fire-proof surface of the structure so 
formed. 
In the drawings attached hereto, and mak 
ing part of this specification, like parts are in 
dicated by like letters in all the figures. 
Figure I represents an illuminating-cell, A, 
a a being the top or weather face; b b, the 
sides; c c, the glasses. The cell is made of 
metal incased in fireproofing material, (repre 
sented by the dotted surface.) did is a portion 
of the metal left exposed. 
Fig. II represents a cell-quarry holding seven 
glasses. 
Fig. III represents the union of a number of 
such cell-quarries as employed to form roofs 
and surfaces. 
Fig. IV represents a cast-iron grating, B, 
made with square light-holes, incased, like the 
cells, with fireproofing material. The light 
holes are represented as set some with souare 
glasses c. c and others with circular glasses 
set in square mounts. 
Fig.V represents three of such incased grat 
ings joined by abutting them together, the 
fire-proof incasement of one grating being in 
this way brought into contact with the ad 
joining one, thus forming one continuous sur 
face of fireproofing material over the entire 
roof or structure, as well upon the under as 
the upper face thereof. C represents a circu 
lar ornamental mount inclosing a circular glass. 
Drepresents an octagon mount inclosing a 
circular glass. E represents a hexagon mount 
inclosing a circular glass, and F represents a 
mount made of ordinary brick material in lorick 
form, containing three glasses, and designed 
for being laid with other bricks, either illumi 
nating or otherwise, in wall, partition, roof, and 
floor constructions requiring light. 
Fig. VI represents an illuminating-grating 
where the glasses are inclosed in ornamental 
circular mounts, like C. 
Fig. VII represents an illuminating-grating 
where the glasses are inclosed in octagon 
mounts, like D; and Fig. VIII represents an 
illuminating-grating where the glasses are in 
closed in hexagon mounts, like E. I prefer to 
make the mounts of colored baked clays, such 
as tessellated or Minton pavements are made 
of. They may be combined in the manner of 
making such pavements, or according to the 
plan described, and illustrated by Fig. 19, in 
my American Patent No. 206,332, July 23, 
1878, where concrete surfaces are made in or 
namental and design form by means either of 
glasses (when light is an object) made in or 
namental shapes, or (where no light is wanted) 
by means of colored bricksin ornamental shape, 
the contour of the glasses or bricks expressing 
the design in the concrete forming the surface 
between them, the difference between the Min 
ton pavement and mine being that in place of 
joining the colored bricks or tiles closely, with 
only room enough for the cementing material, 
I place them farther apart, so as to make the 
concrete cementing body itself form a portion 
of the design surface. 
Figs. IV and V represent incased gratings 
where a portion of the glasses are shown as set 
nakedly in square shape, and others of circu 
lar shape are set in square mounts to fit the 
openings of the grating. The gratings here 
shown are meant to represent the invention as 
described in my English Patent No. 783, 1874, 
where the glasses are set directly (nakedly) 
in the openings as left after the gratings have 
been incased; or they may be first set in brick 
mounts, and these mounts be then joined to 
the incased grating by hydraulic cement. 
Fig. IX represents, in cross-section, such a 
grating where the incasement has been put 
about the metal in the condition of a plastic 
material or concrete and allowed to set and 
harden before joining the glasses to it, the 
glasses, whether naked, as represented in the 
figure, or set in brick mounts, as mentioned in 
the English patent, being then let into the 
apertures and there fixed by means of hydrau 
lic cement. 
Fig. X represents, in cross-section, the same 
thing as Fig. IX, except that the fireproofing 
material, instead of being put about the metal 
in plastic condition, is first molded and hard 
ened, or, if made of baked clay, is then in the 
form of terra-cotta or brick sections ee, which 
embrace the bar of the grating d on either 
side. 
Where the gratings are incased by the 
method represented by Fig. X, it is evident 
that the glasses, whether naked or in mounts, 
must be joined to them after the incasement 
has been put on. It is also evident that where 
the material is put about the grating in a plas 
tic state and allowed to set and harden, as in 
tended to be represented by Fig. IX, the 
glasses, whether naked or set in mounts, re 
quire to be united by hydraulic cement to the 
incased grating. 
Figs. XI and XII illustrate a mode of in 
casing the grating, with the glasses, whether 
naked or in mounts, placed in the openings of 
the grating before the application of the in 
casing material, whether in a plastic state or 
in a molded and hardened one. 
Fig. XI represents the plastic method of 
incasement, the process being interrupted 
when half finished. 
Fig.XII represents the dry method of molded 
sectious. It is seen that the incasement, 
whether plastic or hard, can be as easily ap 
plied with the glasses in position as not, and 
whether set in mounts or nakedly, the method 
of setting being the same in both cases. 
Having thus fully described and illustrated 
my invention, what I claim, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. Illuminating-gratings or perforated metal 
plates set with glasses, in combination with a 
IS 
2Cd 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
ICO 
IoS 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
 
 
236,s 17 
3 
 
fire-proof incasement which completely in 
closes the metal, substantially as and for the 
purposes herein set forth, and illustrated by 
my drawings. 
2. Illuminating-roofs and walking-surfaces 
made by the combination of any number of 
fireproofed illuminating gratings or plates, as 
aforesaid, substantially as and for the pur 
poses herein set forth, and illustrated by my 
drawings. 
3. Illuminating-roofs and walking-surfaces 
made by the combination of any number of 
fireproofed gratings or plates, as aforesaid, so 
combined as to produce a practically continu 
ous fire-proof roof and walking-surface, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes herein de 
scribed, and illustrated by my drawings. 
4. Illuminating-roofs and walking-surfaces 
formed by the combination of any number of 
illuminating - gratings or perforated metal 
plates overlaid by or incased with ornamental 
fireproofing materials, substantially as and for 
the purposes herein set forth, and illustrated by 
my drawings. 
O 
IS 
5. Illuminating-roofs and walking-surfaces 25 
formed by the combination of any number of 
illuminating - gratings or perforated metal 
plates overlaid by or incased with fireproofing 
materials in which the glasses are inclosed in 
jackets or mounts, substantially as and for 3o 
the purposes herein set forth, and illustrated 
by my drawings. 
6. Applying fireproofing material in molded 
and hardened form as an overlayer or as an 
incasement to illuminating-gratings or perfo-35 
rated metal plates, substantially as and for 
the purposes herein set forth and illustrated 
by my drawings. 
7. Applying the glasses of illuminating grat 
ings or plates, when overlaid by or incased in 4o 
fireproofing material, after the same has be 
come set and hard, substantially as and for 
the purposes herein set forth, and illustrated 
by my drawings. 
TEIADDEUS EYATT. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. M. LocKWOOD, 
L. BACON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US236917.txt	 
(No Model) 
No. 236,917. 
 
H. G. STEENBURGH. 
& 
Vehicle Spring. 
Patented Jan. 25, 1881. 
an 
c) 
o 
Ze 
0 
it, 
al 
N. PETERS, PHOTo-LifhogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, DC. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY G. STEENBURGE, OF COHOEs, NEW YORK. 
VEHICLESPRNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,917, dated January 25, 1881. 
Application filed December 2, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY G. STEENBURGH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Co. 
hoes, in the county of Albany and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Vehicle-Springs; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective of the running 
gear of a Wagon with my improvements ap 
plied thereto; Fig. 2, a plan of the axles and 
reach with my springs and circle-bars ap 
plied thereto, and Fig. 3 a rear elevation of 
the same. 
My invention relates to carriages and wag 
Ons generally, and particularly to the means 
for bracing the reach, and for suspending the 
springs and vehicle-body, as well as to the 
construction of the springs, as hereinafter par 
ticularly described, and then sought to be spe 
cifically defined by the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter 
A indicates the axles, B the wheels, and C 
the reach, which is connected at one end to 
the rear axle, and at the opposite end to the 
head-block. A circle-bar, D, rests upon the 
bed-piece on the rear axle and upon the reach, 
and is securely held to both the axle and reach 
by means of staples, clips, or other suitable 
means, as illustrated in the drawings, and a 
portion of it projects to the rear of the axle. 
A similar circle-bar is likewise connected to 
the reach toward its other end, and to the head 
block. These circle-bars serve a twofold pur 
pose-one purpose being to act as a brace, tak 
ing the place of double reaches and the usual 
iron braces, the other being to afford the sup 
ports from which the springs on which the 
vehicle-body rests are suspended. These bars, 
extending as they do from near the ends of 
the head-block in one case, and considerably 
out toward the ends of the bed-piece in the 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
other case, afford a very strong brace for the 
reach, and are excellently positioned for sus 
pending the springs. 
The springs each consist of metal plates E, 
resting upon and secured to a strap, F, of rub 
ber or leather, which is extended beyond the 
ends of the plates and provided with looped 
ends. These springs, it will be observed, ex 
tend crosswise of the running-gear, and are 
suspended from the circle-bars by means of 
clips G, passed around the bars, and rings or 
loops B, hinged to the clips and passed through 6o 
the looped ends of the straps F. The top of 
each spring supports a bar, I, which is held 
to the spring by bolts passed through both 
the bar and spring, and metal plate J under 
the strap of the spring. The carriage-body 
rests upon the bars I. The forward spring is 
suspended from the circle-bar back of the axle, 
while the rear spring is suspended from the 
ends of the circle-bar which project back of the 
axle; and while that method of suspending the 
spring I consider to possess advantages over 
other methods of suspension, yet it is obvious 
that both the springs may be suspended from 
the bars, either to the front or rear of the axles, 
without departing from the spirit of my inven 
By supporting the body on springs coln 
structed and suspended as I have described, 
the body is lower than when otherwise sus 
pended, and a better spring is given to it with 
out detracting from the spring itself; and the 
circle-bars, in addition to serving as a support 
for the suspension of the springs, afford supe 
rior braces for the reach. 
Having described my invention, what Iclaim 
S 
The combination of reach C, circle-bars D, 
and the straps F, suspended from said circle 
bars and supporting the springs E, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof i affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY G. STEENBURGH. 
tion. 
75 
- 
9o 
Witnesses: 
EENRY A. STRONG, 
EDGAR B. NICHOLS. 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237018.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 237,018. 
C. HENDRIE. 
Coffee Roaster, 
Patented Jan. 25, 1881. 
 
 
 
R. PETERS, ProTo-LIrHoGRAPHER, wasHINGTON, D. C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES HENDRIE, OF ROCKPORT, KENTUCKY. 
COFFEE-ROASTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,018, dated January 25, 1881. 
Application filed November 2, 1880. (No model.) 
IS 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs HENDRIE, of 
Rockport, in the county of Ohio and State of 
Kentucky, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Coffee-Roasters; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
coffee-roasters; and it consists in the combi 
nation of an outer casing, which sits over one 
of the openings of the stove, and has an open 
ing through its bottom, so as to admit heat 
through its interior, and two revolving cylin 
ders, one of which is placed inside of the other, 
and which two cylinders are placed inside of 
the outer casing, as will be more fully de 
scribed hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to protect the 
inner cylinder, in which the coffee is placed 
to be roasted, from the direct action of the fire, 
and to have both cylinders revolve, so that 
the outer one will not receive the heat always 
upon the same spot, and thus prevent the outer 
cylinder from being so soon destroyed. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of an appa 
ratus embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal section of the same. 
A represents a sheet-metal casing or frame, 
which may be of any desired shape, size, or 
construction preferred, and which is secured 
at its lower edge to the flanged iron plate or 
casting B, which rests upon the stove, over 
the top of one of the holes, and which plates 
or casting B has a hole through its center, so 
as to allow the heat from the fire to pass up 
into the interior of the casing A. This plate 
B has a flange formed all around its outer edge, 
So as to secure the frame A to it, and has a 
flange formed on its under side, so as to catch 
inside of the hole of the stove and prevent the 
frame from being moved. To the top of this 
frame A is secured a suitable handle, of any 
desired construction, for the purpose of carry 
ing the roaster around. Across the opening 
in the bottom of the frame may be stretched 
5o a net-work of wires, P, as shown in dotted 
45 
 
55 
75 
lines in Fig. 2, so as to prevent coals of fire 
from getting into the frame. Passed through 
the end of this casing or frame A is the re 
volving outer cylinder, C, which has its inner 
end closed and its outer end open, but pro 
vided with the removable cover D. This open 
end of the cylinder C projects far enough be 
yond the opening in the frame A to allow the 
cover to be fastened on in any suitable man 
ner Placed inside of this outer cylinder is a 
small cylinder, G, which revolves with the 
outer one, and which has its inner end closed 
by the inner end of the outer cylinder, C, and 
its outer end by the cover D. 
Passed through the cover D, the cross-bar I, 
which extends across the end of the inner cyl 
inder, through the center of the two cylinders 
and the rear end of the frame A, is the shaft 
O, which has a crank formed on its outer end, 
and by means of which the two cylinders are 
made to revolve. 
The two cylinders are connected together 
so as to be practically one, and the outer one 
serves to prevent the direct heat of the fire 
from coming in contact with the inner cylin 
der, in which the coffee is placed. After the 
coffee has been roasted, both cylinders are 
drawn out of the frame A by means of the 
shaft, and the coffee is removed by taking off 
the cover D. 
Where the outer cylinder or casing, in which 
the inner cylinder is placed, is stationary, 
the heat of the fire is applied always to its 
under side, and hence this outer cylinder is 
soon burned through, and then becomes of no 
further use; but where this cylinder is kept 
constantly revolving the heat is applied to all 
parts alike, and hence will last indefinitely. 
By revolving the inner cylinder the heat is 
applied evenly to the coffee that is being 
roasted, and hence it can never become burned 
or roasted unevenly. 
I am aware that it is not new to inclose the 
cylinder in which the coffee is placed to be 
roasted in a stationary Outer frame or casing 
to which the heat of the fire is applied direct, 
but always in the same place, and this I dis 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim. 
- 
claim 
go 
95 
ICO 
 
e 
237,01s 
In a coffee-roaster, the combination of the 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
sheet-metal frame A, iron base B, having a have hereunto set my hand this 1st day of 
series of wires, l, stretched across its open- September, 1880. 
ing, the two cylinders G C, secured to the same 
5 shaft and closed by the same cover ID, the 
parts being arranged for operation substan- 
tially as shown and described. 
CHARLES HENDRIE. 
Witnesses: 
Z. W. ScHULTZ, 
J. A. WOODBURN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237118.txt	(No Model) 
P. MED ART. 
Split Belt Pulley. 
No. 237,118. 
Patented Feb. 1, 1881. 
7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP MEDART, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
WILLIAM MEDART, OF SAME PLACE. 
SPLT BE LT-PULLEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 237,118, dated February 1, 1881. 
Application filed September 9, 1880. (No model.) 
to a part of this specification. 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, PHILIP MEDART, a citi. 
zen of the United States, and a resident of 
St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have in 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Split Belt-Pulleys; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the mode of constructing belt-pulleys 
as patented to me by Reissue Letters Patent 
No. 8,909, dated September 30, 1879, and has 
I5 for its object the production of a cheap, dura 
ble, and effective halved or split pulley for use 
in the arts upon shafting that is already up and 
where it is difficult to apply the ordinary 
whole pulley; and this invention consists in 
forming the cast-metal spider or center of the 
pulley in two halves, to the arms of which a 
wrought-metal rim is attached, the line of di 
vision being through two of the arms. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, illustrating my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a side view, showing the 
pulley with an even number of arms in a 
closed position. Fig. 3 is a similar view in an 
open position. 
The rim Alis formed of a flat sheet of metal 
riveted to bracket-lugs at the ends of the arms 
b of the cast-metal spider B, as in my former 
patent above referred to. The spider in my 
present improvement is cast in two halves, 
with the line of division through two of the 
arms b, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and the 
hub-sections will be provided with independ 
ent bracket-lugs c for reception of the bolts, 
4o as shown. A space, b, is left between the 
half-arms and hubs, so as to allow for the bet 
35 
25 
55 
ter clamping of the parts around the shafting 
to which the pulley is applied. The object of 
forming the line of division of the spider 
through the arms, as above described, is for 15 
the purpose of furnishing a bearing for the 
ends of the metal rim, as will be clearly un 
derstood by an inspection of the drawings. 
At one end of the line of division of the spider 
the two ends of the rim. A meet, so as to al- 5o 
low the two halves of the spider to be sprung 
into position, when it is desired to place the 
pulley on a shaft, the springing open of the 
parts being allowed by the natural elasticity 
of the rim at the point a. 
C are bolts for securing the two halves of 
the spider or center B together around the 
shafting. These are preferably arranged as 
shown; but any other desired arrangement of 
bolts may be used, as also any other mode of 6o 
fastening, without departing from the spirit of 
my invention. 
The end a? of the rim A is preferably ar 
ranged to lap past the line of division of the 
spider, as indicated in Fig. 2, so as to form a 
stiff and perfect joint at that point. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion, what I claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
wrought metal and a cast-metal spider formed 
in halves with the line of division through 
two of the arms, as described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
spider B, when provided with a space, b', as 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, in a split pulley, of the 75 
1. A split belt-pulley having a rim of 7o 
PEIILIP MEDART, 
Witnesses: 
EUGENE WoLF, 
WILLIAMIMEDART, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237218.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
A. L. WALKER. 
Combined Rake and Tedder. 
No. 237,218. 
Patented Feb. 1, 1881. 
 
 
N. Peter8, PHCro-LTHOGRAPHER, wASHINGTON, D.C. 
. 
(No Model.) 
No. 237,218. 
Patented Feb. 1, 1881. 
A. L. WALKER. 
Combined Rake and Tedder. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
II 
FR 
IIH 
H 
His 
E. E. 
H 
He 
IHE I 
Due 
starrer 
O 
P 
22 
EAHIHEAMNHIB 
III 
C. 
e GTI 
7224 at- 
 
27tzz 
N. PETERS, PHOTo-LTHoaRAPHER, washingtoN, D.c. 
 
s UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAM L. WALKER, OF HINSDALE, NEW YORK. 
COMBINED RAKE AND TED DER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 237,218, dated February 1, 1881. 
Application filed August 3, 1880. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ABRAM L. WALKER, of 
Hinsdale, in the county of Cattaraugus and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Combined Hay 
Rake and Tedder; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains 
to make and use it, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to an improved com 
bined hay rake and tedder; and it consists, 
first, in an attachment which can be secured 
to any or almost any of the horse-rakes now 
in use, whereby the rake is converted into both 
a rake and a tedder; second, in a shaft which 
is journaled in suitable bearings above the axle, 
and which is operated by a driving-wheel that 
is Secured to the axle, and which shaft is pro 
vided with suitable segments, cams, or other 
suitable devices, whereby levers which have 
cross-heads at their rear ends for catching 
under the teeth, and suitable devices secured 
to their front ends for engaging with the seg 
ments or other devices on the shaft, are made 
to alternately lift the rake-teeth in any desired 
number at a time, enabling the hay-rake to be 
also used as a tedder. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
attachment which can be applied to any of the 
hay-rakes now in use, so as to enable the rake 
to be used either as a rake or a tedder, as may 
be desired, and thus save the expense of buy 
ing both of these implements. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a rear view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a 
plan view. 
A represents a horse hay-rake of any desired 
construction, and which has a gear-wheel, B, 
secured to one of the driving-wheels. Upon 
the top of the beam O are secured the two up 
rights, D, in which uprights is journaled the 
shaft F, which is provided with a pinion, G, 
at one end, for engaging with the gear-wheel 
B on the axle. Upon this shaft are secured 
any desired number of segments, cams, or other 
suitable devices, J, which are placed at differ 
ent angles, and which are alternately brought 
into operation as the shaft is revolved. 
Projecting outward from the rear side of the 
beam C, at any suitable angle, are a number 
of bearings or supports, H, in which are piv 
oted the levers I. These levers I have their 
front ends projecting forward, and are pro 
vided with suitable segments L, so as to en 
gage with the segments on the shaft, or have 
their front ends so shaped as to be acted on 
by the cams, where cams are used. Each one 
of these levers has a cross-head secured to its 
rear end, which cross-head catches under any 
suitable number of rake-teeth, O, so that each 
time that the lever is raised upward at its 
rear end by the action of the segments or cams 
on the shaft, the rake-teeth will be raised up 
Ward at the same time, so as to release the 
hay which they have gathered upon their lower 
ends as the machine is drawn along. These 
teeth are not all operated at once, but are op 
erated alternately in groups or pairs, as may 
be desired, so as to more thoroughly stir up 
the hay without raking it into windrows. 
When it is desired to use this machine as a 
rake alone, either the operating-shaft may be 
thrown out of gear with the driving gear-wheel, 
or the cams or segments may be so shifted upon 
the shaft as not to operate the levers. 
By means of this attachment, which may 
be applied to any of the hay-rakes now in use, 
the rake may be converted into both a rake 
and a tedder, either one of which can be used 
at pleasure, and thus save the expense of buy 
ing two separate implements. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. A horse hay-rake, in combination. With a 
revolving shaft, which is provided with cams 
or segments, and a series of independent levers, 
which catch under the teeth of the rake With 
their rear ends, and which have their front 
ends operated upon by the cams or segments, 
whereby the pivoted rake-teeth are raised up 
Ward in pairs or groups, substantially as shown. 
2. The combination of a horse hay-rake pro 
vided with a driving-gear, B, a shaft, F, pro 
vided with a pinion, G, and with suitable seg 
ments or cams, with the levers, which are op 
erated by the segments or cams, and which, in 
turn, alternately raise the rake-teeth in groups 
or pairs, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of the operating-levers, 
95 
ICO 
Io 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
2 
237,2Es 
pivoted in suitable bearings, and provided at 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing, I 
their rear ends with cross-heads for catching have hereunto set my hand this 20th day of 
under the rake-teeth, with a suitable operat- July, 1880. 
ing mechanism for alternately depressing the 
5 front ends of the levers and raising the rake- 
teeth in groups or pairs, substantially as speci- 
fied. 
ABRAM. L. WALKER. 
Witnesses: 
F. A. HAWLEY, 
A. C. TORREY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237318.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. POWELL & D. H. BARNET. 
Finger Ring and the Art of Manufacturing the Same. 
No. 237,318. 
Patented Feb. 1, 1881. 
 
S& 
Wy. 
a 
veters 
2 life. 
Octivudh ?ainth, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
l, 
JAMES H. POWELL AND DAVID H. BARNET, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
FINGER-RING AND THE ART OF MANUFACTURING THE SAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 237,318, dated February 1, 1881. 
Application filed May 7, 1880. (No model.) 
To all chon, it may concern: 
Beit known that we, JAMESH. POWELL and 
DAVID H. BARNET, of Newark, in the county 
of Essex and State of New Jersey, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements in 
Finger-Rings and the Art of Manufacturing the 
Same; and we do hereby declare the following 
to be a fully clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
The object of this invention is to reduce the 
cost of constructing finger-rings, more espe 
cially of the style known in the market as solid 
English seal' or marquis rings, by greatly 
facilitating the operation of manufacturing 
the same, reducing the quantity of gold here 
tofore necessarily used in their construction, 
and by enabling a less skilled, and therefore 
a less expensive, Workman to accomplish sub 
stantially the same results. 
The invention consists in striking up a fin 
ger-ring having a solid shank and a head, sub 
stantially as hereinafter shown and described, 
from a sheet-metal blank of the thickness of 
the shank of said ring. 
It also consists in a ring having notches in 
its shank, and a wedge-shaped lining-plate 
adapted to be driven into said notches. 
It still further consists in a ring having a 
solid shank, (contradistinguished from a filled 
or hollow one,) a head having recesses extend 
ing a short distance into said shank, notches 
formed in the shank, and a wedge-shaped 
lining-plate fitted into said notches. 
Heretofore the method of constructing the 
peculiar style of ring above mentioned was, 
first, to punch out or form a thick blank, such 
as shown in Figure 10 of the accompanying 
drawings, of the thickness of the depths of 
the head, then to form the aperture therein, 
as shown in said figure, and to reduce the 
thickness of the arms which form the shank 
by the tedious process offiling or swaging, in 
which there is a loss of gold. By this process 
the head of the ring will be finally brought to 
about the shape shown in Fig. 9, where, it will 
be observed, and especially if compared with 
Fig. 7, the head is so formed as to require a 
large amount of gold in its construction. 
In further reference to the drawings, which 
form a part of this application, and in which 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts 
in each of the several figures, Fig. 1 represents 
the thin metallic blank from which our ring 
is formed. Fig. 2 is a view of the blank after 
having been further formed by the die. Fig. 
3 is a section thereof. Fig. 4 illustrates the 
third operation of striking out the head, leav 
ing the aperture for the reception of the stone, 
Figs. 5 and 11 being sections of the same, the 
latter showing a recess impressed in one side 
of the wall of said aperture by the same op 
eration. Fig. 6 is a side view, showing the 
wedge-shaped plate passing through the ring, 
forming a lining to the head; Fig. 7, a section 
of the same, showing notches into which the 
wedge-shaped plate is adapted to be forced; 
and Fig. 8, a plan of the before-mentioned 
plate before it has been bent to be inserted 
into the ring. Figs. 9 and 10 have been already 
referred to and explained. 
In carrying out our invention, we first strike 
out the blank A, Fig. 1, from comparatively 
thin sheet metal. We then place the blank 
thus formed into the die, and form it into the 
shape shown in Figs. 2 and 3, the head having 
the covering b, as indicated. It is then placed 
into a third die or force, having a projecting 
head, which projects down the shank as far as 
necessary, forming the recesses, as shown in 
Fig. 11. The metal from these recesses enters 
into and forms a material part of the metal 
necessary for the enlargement of the head of 
the ring, thereby requiring less metal for the 
formation of the head than would be required 
if the metal were not taken from the inside of 
the head, where its absence, or the recess made 
by its absence, will not be noticed. This die 
also strikes out the covering b, leaving the 
aperture c for the reception of the stone. 
formed notches d, for the reception of the plate 
e, which forms a lining for the head of the ring. 
One great advantage of the plate e extending 
down upon the shank is shown in the fact that 
it makes a much shorter soldering joint, which 
can be more easily and quickly perfected, and 
leaves no pin-holes, and is therefore neaterin 
55 
75 
85 
O 
25 
35 
AO 
45 
So 
Into the interior surface of the shank are 95 
Tod 
 
5 
Io 
IS Patent, is 
25 
35 
23,3S 
2 
appearance than those made by the old method. ring next to the head, and finally securing a 
The plate e We prefer to make slightly taper 
plate under the head, substantially as and for 
ing or Wedge-shaped, as shown in Fig. 8, thus 
the purpose set forth. 
adapting said plate to be driven by any ex 
2. In a finger-ring having a head and a 
traneous force into the notches d, which taper 
shank, a wedge-shaped lining fitted under 
correspondingly, and thus enable a perfect 
the head into correspondingly-shaped notches 
joint to be produced with facility. After this 
formed in the shank, substantially as and for 
the arms are united to form the shank, the 
the purpose set forth. 
plate soldered fast to the body of the ring, and 
3. In a finger-ring having the recesses fand 
trimmed off to conform to the shape of the 
notches d, the plate e, fitted under the head 
ring, and the whole finished off in the usual 
and into notches d, substantially as and for 
manner, ready for the wearer. 
the purposes set forth. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing 
we claim, and wish to have secured by Letters 
we have hereunto set our hands this 29th day 
of April, 1880. 
1. As an improvement in the art of making 
finger-rings, the method consisting in striking 
up, by means of a die, a solid shank and a head 
from a metal blank of the thickness of the 
shank, then simultaneously striking out the 
head and forming recesses in the inside of the 
JAMES H. POWELL. 
DAVID H. BARNET. 
OLIVER DRAKE, 
CHARLES H. PELL. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237418.txt	L. C., TIFF ANY. 
Colored Glass Window, 
Patented Feb. 8, 1881. 
(No Mioclei.) 
No. 237,418. 
 
Azz7 
65. 4. ( 27, 
/7ZZZZZZ 7. 
Peters, Photo- iTungpapies, Washion, c. 
 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS C. TIFF ANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
COLORED-GLASS WINDOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 237,418, dated February 8, 1881. 
- 
Application filed October 25, 1880. (No model.) 
- 
dows. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS C. TIFF ANY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented new and useful Improvements in Col 
ored-Glass Windows, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to the introduction of 
a new character of glass in colored-glass win 
The improvement consists in a metallic lus 
ter-being given to one surface of pieces of 
glass and the insertion of such glass among 
other pieces of colored glass in a window or 
mosaic. The effect is a highly-iridescent one 
and of pleasing metallic luster, changeable 
from one to the other, depending upon the di 
rection of the visual ray and the brilliancy or 
dullness of the light falling upon or passing 
through the glass. This is the case either 
when such combination of glass is as a trans 
parency or permanently in a window or in a 
reflective mosaic-that is to say, with a mosaic 
containing a reflective surface as a back 
ground, so as to reflect the light back to and 
through the surface of the mosaic. The me 
tallic luster is produced by forming a film of 
a metal or its oxide, or a compound of a metal, 
on or in the glass either by exposing it to va 
pors or gases or by direct application. It may 
also be produced by corroding the surface of 
the glass, such processes being well known to 
glass-manufacturers. 
O 
25 
35 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a front 
view of a window containing my improve 
ment; and Fig. 2 is a cross-section thereof, 
taken in the line at a of Fig. 1. 
at a, &c., are pieces of metallic - surfaced 
glass, and b b are pieces of glass of various 
colors. c e are leaded joints running between 4o 
and joining the pieces of glass to each other. 
All glass in windows is, by the application 
of this metallic luster, made more beautiful in 
effect, at night producing a highly-iridescent 
and more lustrous effect, and when on the 
surface of opalescent glass the dull whiteness 
and spotty appearance are removed. 
With opalescent glass in exteriors there is 
generally too strong a contrast. This is re 
moved by the use of the metallic-luster opa 
lescent glass in the window or windows, as 
herein before specified. 
45 
So 
I claim 
A mosaic or window composed of a plural 
ity of panes of colored glass, a number of said 
panes, distributed among the rest, having one 
of their surfaces provided with reflective coat 
ings, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
55 
LOUIS C. TIFF ANY. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES H. HuNTER, 
ELWYN. S. MAILLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237518.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 237,518. 
4. 
- H. B. GRAY. 
Umbrella and Sun Shade. 
Patented Feb. 8, 1881. 
 
t . 
. 
6 synce 
vessed 
AfroRNEYS. 
NPETERS, Photo-LITHOGRAPHER, wash INGTON, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HIRAM. B. GRAY, OF COLUMBUS, TEXAS. 
UMBRELLA AND SUNSHADE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,518, dated February 8, 1881. 
Application filed September 10, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HIRAM. B. GRAY, of 
Columbus, in the county of Colorado and State 
of Texas, have invented a new and Improved 
Sun and Rain Protector, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
device to be secured upon the person as a pro 
tection against sun and rain, and designed 
especially for the comfort and protection of 
all persons exposed thereto. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, showing the 
device devoid of its covering in place upon a 
person. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the de 
vice. Fig. 3 is an enlarged, partly sectional, 
side elevation of a portion of the device. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A represents a short ver 
tical plate, to the inner face of which, near 
the bottom thereof, is laterally attached, by 
screws a or other suitable device, a stout wire 
rod, B, whose extended ends are bent inward 
in easy curves to fit about the waist of the 
wearer. Above this rod B and near the top 
of the plate A, a rod, B', is attached in the 
same manner, and has its upward-extending 
arms curved downward to fit over and upon 
the shoulders of the wearer. The ends of said 
rod B may be provided with pads to prevent 
their hurting the Wearer. 
A metal standard, C, longitudinally slotted 
at each end, as shown at bb', respectively, and 
and having its upper end curved to clear the 
head of the wearer, as shown at c, is adjusta 
bly secured to the plate A by a thumb-screw 
and nut, c', that passes through the slot binto 
said plate A. 
The frame D consists of a narrow flat strip, 
of metal, D', having adjusting-holes did, curved 
inward at about its center, and provided with 
sockets.ff on its inner face, at its ends. Into 
each of these sockets is inserted a staple, g, 
that extends a short distance beyond the end 
of the strip D'. A stout wire or wires, D', 
bent in the shape of an oval or an ellipse, is 
firmly secured in these staples gg, thereby 
forming, in combination with the strip D', a 
curved frame somewhat of the shape of an 
egg divided longitudinally. This frame D is 
adjustably secured to the standard C by a 
screw-bolt, h, that passes through one of the 
holes d and the slot b' of said standard C, and 
has on its screw end a thumb-nut, h'. 
The frame D is held at a suitable distance 
from the standard C, and permitted a certain 
freedom of movement by a ball, k, between 
the sockets ll, that are fitted upon the bolt h, 
between said standard C and strip D'. The 
frame D may be elevated or lowered and 
tipped forward or backward by adjusting the 
bolt h in other of the holes d, and by moving 
the said bolt h in the slot b'. 
G is the covering, of cambric or other fabric, 
stretched over the frame D, and secured by its 
edges to the wires D', and by rivets or stitches 
along its center to the strip D'. 
In Fig. 1 the device is shown secured in 
place on a man, H. 
The apparatus is designed as a protection 
from Sun and rain of all persons out of doors, 
whether riding, driving, walking, or working, 
and the person protected by it will always 
have the hands free. It can also be attached 
to a wagon, agricultural machine, &c., to pro 
tect the drivers thereof. It is a light weight, 
easily secured to the person, easily adjusted, 
and does not interfere with the work of the 
Weae. , 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A sun and rain protector constructed sub 
stantially as herein shown and described, con 
sisting of plate A, provided with waist and 
shoulder rods BB, curved slotted standard C, 
provided with screw and nut C', covered frame 
D, composed of socketed strip D', staples gg, 
wires D', and cover G, bolt and nuth h', and 
ball and sockets kill, as set forth. 
HIRAM BALDERSTON GRAY. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. E. BINKLEY, 
GEO, GEGEN WORTH, 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
5 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237618.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 237,618. 
 
E. L. SMITH, 
Corset. 
Patented Feb. 8, 1881. 
24 eaez2 
JWQ A. Ruq. 
- 
N.VENTOR 
4. 4.2 
-6, 
A. Y. fat. 
N, PETERs, Photo-LIIHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMMET L. SMITH, OF JACKSON, MICHIGAN. 
CORSET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 237,618, dated February 8, 1881. 
Application filed April 30, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EMIMET L. SMITH, of 
Jackson, in the county of Jackson and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Corsets; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the construction and oper 
ation of the same, reference being had to the 
annexed drawings, making a part of this speci 
fication, and to the letters and figures of ref. 
erence marked thereon. 
IFigure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a side elevation of corset, and Fig. 2 is a 
sectional detail view of the same. 
The nature of my present invention relates 
to that class of corsets in which means are 
provided for the expansion or contraction of 
the corset at the hips. 
The peculiar features of my invention will be 
first described in the following specification, 
and then particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, A designates the corset, 
which is formed with slits B B at one or both 
sides of the hips, thus leaving an intermediate 
flap, C. 
E E are side flaps, composed of triangular 
shaped pieces secured to the corset at the sides 
of the slits, and provided with eyelets F. 
To the flap C is secured a piece, G, which 
may be oblong, straight, or shield-shaped, and 
to this piece are secured the clasps H. H. 
In adjusting the corset to the size of hips the 
clasp-rings are clasped over the edges of the 
O 
25 
central flap, C, and the side flaps, E, and then 
brought into engagement with the pin I of the 
clasp, which will be passed through eyelets K. 
at the lower corners of the flap C, and through 
the desired eyelets of the side flaps, E. This 
forms a complete adjustable hip-corset, and 
leaves no objectionable opening, as heretofore. 
It will be observed, also, that the triangular 
shaped flaps E will, after the parts are fast 
ened together, be between the intermediate 
flap, C, and the fastening-strip, as herein shown. 
What I claim is 
1. In a corset, a piece, G, secured to the hip 
portion of the corset, said piece being provided 
with clasps adapted to secure the same to the 
side flaps having series of eyelets, whereby the 
corset may be adjusted at the hip portion, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a corset, a side flap, E, provided with a 
series of eyelets, in combination with the piece 
G, secured to the hip-flap of the corset, Said 
piece G being provided with clasps adapted to 
secure it to the side flaps, whereby the corset is 
rendered adjustable at the hipportion, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
EMMETLE GRAND SMITH. 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
Witnesses: 
D. A. TUCKER, 
M. S. LARRABEE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237719.txt	(No Model.) 
G. C. BARNEY. 
Billiard Cue Tip. 
No. 237,719. 
Patented Feb. 15, 1881. 
4ZZeyz 
-z. 252-222ea 
A 2-6-4% 
Zzz Z'ezzzo-y- 
6eosye CAzz-za 
2.22% 
-1/2- 
N.PETERS, Photo-LTHOGRAPHER, washingTon, C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
 
GEORGE C. BARNEY, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OE ONE-EALE TO 
WILLIAM W. PETHERICK, OF SAME PLACE. 
BLARD CUE. T. P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 237,719, dated February 15, 1881. 
Application filed November 10, 1880. (No model.) 
IS 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE C.BARNEY, of 
Detroit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented an Improvement in 
5 Billiard-Oue Tips, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
The nature of my invention relates to new 
and useful improvements in the construction 
and application of billiard-cue tips, by the use 
of which the employment of chalk is rendered 
unnecessary. The tip is securely attached to 
the end of the billiard-cue and requisite firm 
ness and elasticity of the tip produced. 
The invention therefore consists in the pe 
culiar construction and application of cue-tips, 
as more fully hereinafter described. 
Figure 1 is an elevation of a section of a cue 
with my improved tip. Fig. 2 is a central lon 
gitudinal section of a cue with my improved 
tip attached thereto. 
In the use of cue-tips as ordinarily construct 
ed and applied the surface of the tip must be 
well chalked to prevent the tip from slipping 
when brought into contact with the smooth 
surface of the ball. This use of chalk is ob 
jectionable, as it soils the cloth of the table, 
which is rapidly worn out by the hard and 
frequent brushing, and soils the hands and 
clothing of the player. To remedy this defect 
the tips of billiard-cues have heretofore been 
made of vulcanized rubber mixed with chalk, 
whereby the employment of chalk applied from 
time to time to the tip was dispensed with; 
but in such construction the tip cemented to 
the end of the cue becameliable to be detached 
therefrom. To obviate this defect and give 
increased firmness and elasticity to the tip I 
form in one piece with the tip, made of rub 
ber intermingled with chalk, a short central 
shaft constructed of hard rubber, which is in 
serted in a hole bored centrally in the end of 
the cue and cennented therein, whereby the tip 
is securely attached to the end of the cue and 
increased firmness and elasticity are given the 
tip. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, A represents a tip, 
40 
45 
35 
spherical or oval upon one face and flat upon 
the reverse. This button-shaped tip is made 
of what is termed semi-hard rubber, into 
which chalk is introduced in the process of 
manufacture, as corundum, emery, or analo 
gous substances are introduced into Such rub 
ber in the manufacture of what are known in 
the market, as ink-erasers. The chalk or 
other substance that will produce a like result 
is first reduced to a powder before being amal 
gamated with the rubber. The flattened lower 
face of the tip A is provided with the short 
central cylindrical shaft, B, made of hard rub 
ber, and extending downward and formed in 
one piece with the disk portion A of the tip, 
and adapted to be inserted in a hole bored in 
the upper end of the cue, cement being applied 
in the hole and to the lower face of the disk 
portion of the tip, whereby the tip is securely 
attached to the end of the cue and increased 
firmness and elasticity produced in the tip. 
I am aware that rubber cue-tips have been 
made and unsuccessfully used. Therefore I do 
not broadly claim cue-tips made of rubber. 
I am aware that a billiard-cue tip formed of 
a mixture of vulcanized rubber and chalk and 
a billiard-cue tip formed of leather, with its 
screw-threaded shank and disk made in one 
piece, have heretofore been employed, and I 
therefore lay no claim to such construction, 
my invention obviating the necessity of chalk 
ing the tip, as in the first invention disclaimed, 
and at the same time giving greater firmness 
and elasticity to the tip by the employment of 
the hard-rubber shank; but 
What I claim as my invention is 
As a new article of manufacture, the billiard 
cue tip herein described, consisting of the disk 
A, composed of a mixture of soft rubber and 
chalk, and shank B, formed of hard rubber, 
the disk and shank being formed in One piece, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
GEORGE C. BARNEY. 
SO 
55 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
J. PAUL MAYER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237819.txt	(No Model.) 
. G. CLARK. 
Steam Radiator, 
No. 237,819. 
- 
Patented Feb. 15, 1881. 
Z? 
als 
O 
as 
so 
ASSNS 
s 
; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE CLARK, OF WEST TROY, NEW YORK. 
STEAM-RADATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 237,819, dated February 15, 1881. 
Application filed July 8, 1880. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that, GEORGE CLARK, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at West 
Troy, in the county of Albany, and State of 
New York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Steam-Radiators, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in steam-radiators. It has 
for its object to produce a more thorough cir 
culation of the cold air to be heated; and it con 
sists in the arrangement of the steam-pipes in 
two piles with a space between them to form 
a flue, said flue being so divided horizontally 
as to form a series of air-heating chambers at 
different altitudes, and adapted to receive and 
expel the air to be heated, as will be herein 
after more fully set forth. 
In order that those skilled may fully under 
stand my invention, I will proceed to describe 
the same, referring by letters to the accompa 
nying drawing, which represents a central 
cross-section of a steam-radiator embodying 
my invention. 
AA are the steam-pipes or side plates, hav. 
ing the outward appearance of corrugated 
plates, through which the steam is caused to 
circulate in the usual manner, being received 
and discharged through pipes shown in dot 
ted lines. The corrugated plates or tubes are 
formed in couplets with thin webs B B B B', 
&c., so that when they are arranged in the 
usual way a short distance apart a vertical 
space is left between them, and when the ends 
are surrounded by a solid plate, C, said space 
has no communication with the outside air, 
except as hereinafter explained. These side 
plates, formed as described, are mounted upon 
a suitable base, D, and surmounted with a 
cap, E. The webs B are somewhat longer 
(vertically) than the webs B, in order that they 
may be perforated, as shown by the horizontal 
arrows, without weakening them too much. 
At the points B there are cast or otherwise 
formed with the webs horizontal plates F, ex 
tending inwardly to the center of the space 
between the two side walls, and outwardly a 
short distance only, to form a deflecting-plate 
at such point. The inwardly-projecting por 
tions, when the sides of the radiator are in 
position, firmly abut to form a continuous par 
tition, thus forming compartments G, the num 
ber of such compartments depending upon the 
location and number of plates F, in which 
particular I do not wish to limit my invention. 
These plates may simply abut, as described, 
or they may overlap, as shown at a, in the top 
partition. 
It will be observed that the perforations 
through the webs B are below and above the 
plates F, so that the lower one forms the exit 
from one compartment, G and the upper one 
the inlet to the next compartment above. 
The lowest or foundation steam-pipe may be 
cast with a Web, B', designed to rest in a suit 
able groove in the bottom or base plate, D, 
and by which it may be held in position, and 
the upper tier of pipes and the cap-plate E 
may be similarly connected. 
The lowermost web, B', may be perforated 
to receive the strata of cold air nearest to the 
floor, or the plate D may be perforated, as 
seen at b b, and the cap-piece E should be per 
forated or cast open for final exit. 
The inlets and exits to the several compart 
ments are composed of a series of perforations, 
so that the air is divided up into a series of 
fine streams, as I have found that this greatly 
facilitates the heating of the same. 
From the construction described it will be 
seen that the cold air at different altitudes in 
a room is drawn in at the bottom of each 
heating-compartment G, and in its travel up 
ward is heated by radiation and escapes at 
the top of said chamber or compartment, the 
outwardly-projecting portions of the plates F 
serving to direct it horizontally into the room. 
It will be observed that if the compartments 
G were formed into a single flue by the re 
moval of the plates F, and the perforations 
at B dispensed with, the result would be a 
single continuous flue, into which the cold air 
would be drawn at the bottom only and rap 
idly discharged at the top without becoming 
thoroughly heated. By dividing up this space 
and providing for the entrance of cold air at 
different altitudes a much better result is ac 
complished. 
I do not wish to confine myself to the exact 
details of construction, as they may be con 
siderably varied without departing from the 
spirit of my invention, the gist of which rests 
w 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
- 
237, s19 
; 
; 
; 
5 
1. A steam-heating radiator composed of fore set forth. 
What I therefore claim as new, and desire 
in the idea of forming a series of air-heating the plates F, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
compartments at different altitudes. 
short distance to form deflectors, as hereinbe. 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
pipes or steam-conduits having the outward 
In testimony whereof. I have hereunto set 
appearance of corrugated plates, with web- my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
like connections, and provided at one or more scribing witnesses. 
points with plates F, whereby two or more is 
and for the purpose set forth. 
GEORGE CLARK. L. s.) 
3. The plates F, extending externally a 15 
Io compartments G are formed, substantially as 
Witnesses: 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
: 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
: 
GEORGEF. ALEXANDER, 
ISAAC. B. POTTER. 
- 
- 
- 
2. The webs B", perforated above and below 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US237920.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. W. STANLEY. 
Manufacture of Paper Pulp from certain Waste Products 
No. 237,92O. 
Patented Feb. 15, 1881. 
 
 
see 
Stree E 
skas as a s we - - - - - - 
PEERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. W. STANLEY, OF LONDON, COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, GREAT BRITAIN. 
MANUFACTURE OF PAPER-PULP FROM CERTAN WASTE PRODUCTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 237,920, dated February 15, 1881. 
Application filed December 16, 1880. (No model.) Patented in England April 28, 1880. 
75 
) 
O 
5 
o 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoEIN CHARLEs WIL 
LIAM STANLEY, of the city of London, in the 
county of Middlesex and Kingdom of Great 
Britain, have invented certain new and use. 
ful improvements in the Manufacture of Pa 
per-Pulp from certain Waste Products, (for 
which I have received Letters Patent in Eng 
land, No. 1,735, dated April 28, 1880;) and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same. 
I take the ordinary asln-pit or dust-bin ref. 
use of towns and other places. This I riddle 
(or I may take it ready riddled) to separate 
the light portions, such as bits of paper, straw, 
vegetable-stalks, and the like light materials 
which I propose to utilize, from the ashes and 
other heavy portions. The mass of lighter 
materials-rags, straw, paper, &c.-is passed, 
When found necessary, through crushing-rolls 
to crush any pieces of cinders, glass, or other 
materials that may adhere to it, and is then 
put through a dusting machine or apparatus 
to remove the crushed mineral matters. It is 
hen passed onto a knife cutting-machine,where 
it is cut up small, somewhat like chaff. This 
chaff is next placed in a washer, where it 
is subjected to a stream of water, preferably 
hot (though cold may be used if preferred.) 
and agitated, and here the cut straw, wood, 
vegetable matter and the like rise to the 
surface of the water, and may be removed in 
the most convenient manner, the plan I pre 
fer being to allow of an overflow of water, 
which carries them over the sides of the 
washer into a suitably-arranged wire-netting, 
or equivalent, through the meshes of which 
the Water passes, leaving the chaff behind in 
the netting. The agitation is continued till 
no more matters rise to the surface. During 
this part of the process the paper, rags, and 
other heavy matters fall onto a false bottom, 
which is perforated to allow of the remaining 
mineral substances and dirt dropping through 
the real bottom of the washer. 
The paper, rags, &c., can be run off through 
a cock or vent placed just above the false bot 
tom, and the water strained from it, or it 
might be collected in any convenient manner, 
and is then boiled in a suitable boiler for a 
sufficient time, with a weak solution of soda 
or other suitable alkali to soften and remove 
grease, dirt, &c. The length of time during 
which the boiling continues must of necessity 
vary with the consistency and quantity of the 
pulp and the proportion and strength of the 
alkali; but in an ordinary case, with about 
one hundred-weight of commercial Sodh to 
the ton of pulp, &c., one hour's continuous 
boiling should be sufficient. The real test, 
however, for the length of the boiling is that 
the pulp, &c., is properly clean when the boil 
ing is discontinued. After the boiling, the 
mass of paper, pulp, rags, &c., is placed in a 
beating-machine till all the paper is properly 
pulped, which is speedily accomplished when 
the particles of rags, twine, &c., al'e l'elnoved 
from the pulp by strailing. 
The rags can be prepared for sale by sorting 
or otherwise, as may be desired, and the pulp 
bleached or not, alid run into sheets, blocks, 
or other convenient form for sale. A coll 
venient way of doing this is by running it onto 
a travelling perforated band passing through 
rollers to express the water; but any of the 
ordinary methods used for this pupose in pal 
per-making will do. The straw, wood, and 
other matters remaining after the previous 
separation may be converted into paper lina 
terial by reducing with caustic soda in the 
manner usually adopted by paper-makers for 
the reduction of straw into pulp. The mass, 
when the straw which it contains is in a state 
of pulp, is placed in hot water, and the un 
dissolved wood, &c., will separate from the 
straw-pulp, and rising to the surface of the 
water can be removed, and can then be pulped 
in the ordinary manner or otherwise clealt 
with, as may be desired. 
With one exception the machines ald ap 
paratus mentioned herein are all well known 
in the paper and rag trades, and therefore do 
not need special description here; but the 
g 
washer I have specially designed for this pur 
pose, and therefore describe more fully. 
The accompanying drawings represent the 
washer surrounded by the netting already 
mentioned. A is the tank or body of the 
washer; B, the perforated false bottom; C, the 
real bottom; D, the legs or other supports; 
35 
40 
45 
So 
n 
23,920 
E, the water supply; F, the wire-netting, which 
is made in sections, each section being hinged, 
G G, or otherwise attached, and secured at 
top so that it can be turned down, at pleasure, 
for the easier removal of the straw, &c. The 
netting slhould project above the top of the 
tank all round. His the outflow for the pulp 
after the straw has floated off over the top and 
the dirt fallen through the perforated bottom 
B; and I is the outflow for the dirt, &c., in the 
bottom of the washel'. loth outflows II and I 
are provided with suitable cocks, or their equiv. 
alent, to close or open them as required. 
I have described the method of using up 
the straw, as well as the paper-pulp, for the 
manufacture of paper; but when the straw is 
Wanted for other purposes, such as packing, 
bedding horses, &c., it may be floated off after 
passing through the knife-machine. 
Having now described my invention, and 
the method of performing the same, I wish it 
to be understood that an aware that the 
larger pieces of rags and paper in ash-pit re 
fuse have been already used for paper making, 
the usual manner of obtaining these being to 
hand-pick them froin the other rubbish, which 
is then removed to waste places to rot for 
manure, where it accumulates in the neighbor 
hood of large towns in enorinous heaps and 
is a nuisance and constant source of trouble,) 
and that I do not claim the use of the mate. 
rials prepared or recovered in the ordinary 
nanner for the manufacture of paper; but 
that 
What I (lo claim, and desire to protect under 
the hereinbefore in part recited Letters Pat. 
ent, is 
O 
20 
25 ( 
3o 
45 
So 
55 
I. The Luerei-described method or process 
of utilizing asl-pit, clust-bin, or similar refuse 
(consisting chiefly of paper, rags, twine, cin 
ders, shavings, wood, and vegetable refuse.) 
and converting the same into naterial suitable 
for being manufactured into paper, by the 
separation of the less easily reducible por 
tions from the paper and other more easily re 
ducible portions, substantially as set forth. 
2. The helreill-described inctlhod or process 
of separating the less easily reducible por 
tions (such as straw, wood, and the like) of 
said refuse from the more easily retlucible por 
tions, which are reidered capable of sepal'ate 
treatment with strong and weak alkalies, re 
spectively, substantially as set forth. 
3. The herein-described treatment of the 
imatelials with water after cutting up, by 
which the less easily reducible portions are 
floated off from the other portions, and the 
separation of said portions is thereby effected, 
sulbstaitially is set fort). 
4. Thele'cil-described mailufacture of pulp 
for pape-making from ash-pit or similar ref 
tise, substaitially as set fortin. 
5. in the all facture of pulp for paper 
malking foil a sil-bit or similar refuse, the en 
loyment of tic washer A, with perforated 
false bottom 3, outflows II and l, and sur 
lounded by netting, in sections, so attached 
that it, call lo?s folded back from the tol), sub 
stall tially as and for the purposes set forth, 
and show in the accompanying drawings. 
ON CLARES WIAA STANIEY, 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED J. Bli, RELT, 
STEPHEN HUNT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238020.txt	(No Model.) 
Apparatus for Producing Illuminating Gas Or Vapor, 
Patented Feb. 22, 1881. 
No. 238, O2O. 
S. J. ANTHONY & E. J. FROST. 
F. G.1. 
ic 
ise E - - - 
Miss 
EEE 
- - - - - - - - 
FEEEEEEEEE 
- - - R - - - - - 
- - - 
- - - 
A- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
re, as E. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL J. ANTHONY AND EDWARD 
J. FROST, OF PHILADELPHIA, PA. 
APPARATUS FoR PRODUCING LLUMINATING GAs oR v APor. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,020, dated February 22, 1881. 
Application filed May 15, 1880. (No model.) 
IS 
2O. 
25 
3O 
O 
S. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, SAMUELJ. ANTHONY 
and EDWARD J. FROST, both of the city and . 
county of Philadelphia, and State of Penn 
5 sylvania, have invented certain new aud use 
ful Improvements in Apparatus for Producing 
Illuminating Gas or Vapor, commonly known 
as Carbureters, whereof the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings. 
Of these, Figure I represents a vertical sec 
tion through the center of the apparatus, and 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal section on the line a 
of Fig. 1. 
Our invention relates to that class of so 
called carbureters in which a current of airis 
forced over surfaces saturated with a volatile 
hydrocarbon, and the inflammable vapor thus 
obtained is conducted through pipes to the 
burners. 
The improvements consist in constructing 
the evaporator of wood veneering disposed 
inclosely-approximating and uniform surfaces, 
with regular air-passages throughout. 
They further consist in so constructing the 
evaporator as to prevent direct contact of the 
air-current with the body of liquid in the evap 
orating-tank, and only permitting contact be 
tween the air- current and such fluid as has 
passed through the capillary material and has 
exuded upon its surface, thus forming a dry 
carbureter. 
They further consistin a device by which 
both ends or edges of the capillary material 
are kept immersed in the fluid, whose level is 
maintained by an automatically-regulated feed. 
In the drawings, A, Fig. 1, represents the 
reservoir or tank of fluid, preferably the hy 
drocarbon known as gasoline, the supply 
pipe being indicated at C. Below this tank 
is placed the evaporating-vessel D, preferably 
a cylindrical tank of metal, into which the 
flanges E E fit tightly, so as to form close 
joints with the sides of the vessel. The lower 
flange rests upon an annular shelf upon the 
inside of the vessel. The flanges E E are 
turned true upon their upper and lower sur 
faces, respectively, and are each provided with 
annular ribs in n, the interior surfaces of which 
Resting upon the lowerflange,E, and fitting 
tightly between the ribs n n of both flanges, 
The cylindrical vessel L between the disks to 
is placed the evaporator G. This is constructed 
of a continuous sheet of thin veneering of 
gum, poplar, or other porous wood, coiled spi- 55 
rally in such a manner as to leave a regular 
and continuous air-passage from the inner to 
the outer end of the spiral, contact between 
the coils being prevented by the interposition 
of strips HH of wood veneering at each edge. 6o 
The sheet G being tightly wound by machinery 
and the strips H H being interposed during 
the process of winding, a close joint isformed 
at each edge. The core of the coil consists of 
the cylinder L, having annularly-ribbed disks 65 
0 0 at each extremity. The outer surfaces of 
the ribs and the faces of the disks are turned 
true, so as to allow the formation of a close 
joint with the evaporator G. 
is provided throughout with small openings 
for the equal distribution of the air-current, 
which is supplied from the pipe M, the air 
current being produced by any of the well 
known devices in use for that purpose. The 
lower disk, o, of the vessel is supported by 
feet r . An open space is left within the 
evaporating-tank above and below the evap 
orator G, and communication is maintained 
between these open spaces through the tubu 
lar bolts F E. connecting the flanges E. E. 
A feed-pipe, B, provided with a cock, b, con 
nects the reservoir A with the evaporating 
tank. 
A pipe, O, having a cap, S, with minute per 
forations serving as a vent, is placed near the 
top of the evaporating-tank, as shown. 
The spiral air-passage of the evaporator G 
leads from the interior of the open space K, sur 
rounding the perforated cylinder L, into the 
free annular space J, inclosed laterally between 
the evaporator G. and the sides of the evapo 
rating-tank, and at top and bottom by the an 
nular flanges E. E. From the annular space 
J an exit-pipe, N, leads to the burners. 
The operation of our apparatus is as follows: 
The oil-tank A being filled with gasoline or 
other similar fluid, the latter flows through the 
feed-pipe B, filling the open space Pat the bot 
tom of the tank, and, rising through the tubul 
lar bolts FF, fills the apper space, Q, to the 
level of the vent-pipe. By this arrangement 
an automatic feed is obtained and the fluid in 
the evaporating-tank is maintained at a con 
85 
95 
75 
35 
40 
45 
5o are also turned true. 
OO 
2 
238,020 
Y 
m 
O 
25 
15 
20 
obviated. 
stant level. As the flanges E Emake a close 
joint with the walls of the tank, and as both 
the flanges E E and the disks oo make a close 
joint with the edges of the evaporator G, the 
5 fluid is prevented from entering the annular 
space J and the central air-space, K, but is 
permitted to reach the evaporating-surface of 
the coil C by penetrating the exposed edges 
thereof and permeating the capillary material 
of which it is composed. The air-current, en 
tering through the pipe M and distributer L, 
circulates freely through the passages of the coil 
C, and, taking up in the form of vapor the liq 
uid supplied to the surface of the latter through 
the pores of the material, passes out through 
the exit-pipe N. We thus obtain a dry carbu 
reter, since the air-current can only comein con 
tact with the fluid which is exposed upon the 
evaporating-surface, and the danger of freez 
ing or of driving the liquid in the exit-pipes is 
It is obvious that various modifications may 
be made in the disposition of the continuous 
sheet of capillary material-as, for instance, 
instead of being wound in a spiral coil, it might 
be folded in closely-approximating zigzags, or 
Wrapped around a prismatic core instead of a 
cylindrical one. While, therefore, we prefer 
the latter as the most convenient and compact 
3o of the different arrangements, we do not desire 
to limit our claim to the spiral form embodied 
in the drawings, provided a practically con 
tinuous sheet of capillary material be so dis 
posed as to leave a practically uniform and con 
35 tinuous air-passage between closely-approxi 
mating surfaces. 
It is obvious that the end strips, H. H., may 
be made of metal or other pliable material in 
stead of the wood veneering, and we therefore 
do not desire to limit our claim to the method 
shown for preventing contact between the 
closely-approximating coils and isolating the 
air-current from direct contact with the body 
of the liquid. Nor is it essential that both 
edges of the capillary material should be im 
mersed in the liquid, though we deem that 
method best adapted for thorough saturation 
of the air-current. We therefore do not limit 
ourselves to the precise form of the evaporat 
So ing-tank and the arrangement of the evaporat 
ing-coil therein shown in the drawings. 
We are aware that it is not new to construct 
evaporators of closely-approximated sheets 
of canton-flannel or similar limp material, 
stretched by fastening them at both ends or 
attached to a supporting - surface of sheet 
metal. Our method of construction differs 
from this in that the wood veneering which we 
use has sufficient rigidity to require nostretch 
ing or backing, but will supportits own weight, 
thereby avoiding the necessity of supporting 
it by fastenings which occupy room without 
affording any increase of evaporating-surface, 
and We are thus enabled to obtain a very large 
surface of capillary material in a most com 
pact form, permeable throughout by the liquid. 
55 
45 
75 
85 
We are aware that it is not new to construct 95 
We are also aware that wood in the form of 
sawdust' or of masses of shavings has been 
used for the evaporators; but in this form the 
peculiar advantages due to its rigidity are lost, 7o 
and, moreover, the air-passages being neces 
sarily irregular, the current seeks those which 
are freest, and hence where there is least liq 
uid, and thus is not brought into contact with 
the entire evaporating-surface. 
In our evaporator the arrangement of the . 
veneering in closely-approximating and uni 
form sheets or folds, with regular and uniform 
in-passages throughout, compels the contact 
of the current with every portion of the evap 
orating-surface, and thus not only disposes the 
latter in a compact form, but also occasions--a 
uniform and thorough saturation of the air. , 
It is also obvious that to obtain the second 
feature of our improvements-namely, a dry 
carbureter having an isolated air-passage-it 
is not absolutely essential that the capillary 
material used should be wood veneering, al 
though we deem that best adapted for the pur 
pose, and it may therefore be constructed of 9o 
sheets of any pliable capillary material, hav. 
ing the edges of the air-passage closed from 
direct contact with the liquid by strips either 
of capillary or non-capillary material. 
carbureters of a scroll coil of fibrous absorbent 
material maintained in position by strips of 
heavy metal at each end, and having the liquid 
reservoirin direct communication with theinte 
rior of the spiral air-passage, such a device be 
ing described in the Letters Patent to H. J. 
Ferguson, dated March 2, 1875, No. 160,410. 
Our improvement differs from this method of 
construction in the fact that we protect the 
air-current from direct contact with the body 
of liquid from which the evaporating-surface 
is fed by isolating the air-passages, and thus 
obtain a dry carbureter, while in the other spi. 
ralevaporators referred to the liquid was freely 
admitted into the spiral air-passage, and was IIo 
liable to be blown into the pipes or congealed 
by the cold produced from too rapid evapora 
tion. 
We are also aware that it is not new to sup 
ply the liquid to the evaporating-sheets by 
means of siphons or lamp-wicks attached to 
the top of each sheet and communicating with 
an adjacent oil-reservoir, while at the same 
time the bottom of the sheets was immersed 
in liquid. We do not desire to claim this 
method of construction, since in our improved 
evaporator we immerse both the upper and 
lower edges of the sheet directly in the liquid 
and at the same time maintain the air-passage 
in complete isolation therefrom. 
We claim 
1. In an apparatus for producing illuminating. 
gas by the volatilization of a liquid, an evap 
Orator consisting of a sheet or sheets of wood 
Veneering uniformly disposed in, closely-ap 
proximating surfaces. 
2. In an apparatus for producing illuminat 
Ios 
I25 
- 
II5 
OO 
28s,020 
. 
IS 
Io 
3 
ing-gas by the volatilization of a liquid, an ervoirs are provided for the immersion of the 
evaporator constructed of closely-approximat 
edges of the capillary material. 
ing coils of capillary material having the 
4. The combination of the tank A, the com 
municating reservoirs P and Q, and the vent 
spaces between their edges closed by strips, in 
pipe O, whereby the level of the liquid is au. 
combination with an exterior reservoir for the 
topically maintained in the evaporating 
liquid, whereby the outer edges alone of the 
evaporating-coils are immersed in the liquid 
and an isolated air-passage is formed between 
'. SAMUEL J. ANTHONY. 
the coils. 
EDWARD J. FROST, 
3. The combination of the pipes F with the 
flanges EE, fitting closely to the sides of the 
tank D, the disks o o, and the intermediate 
closed evaporator, whereby communicatingres 
WM. H. MYERs, 
JOHN MYERS. 
Witnesses: 
alk. 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238122.txt	(Model.) 
No. 238,122. 
 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
R. R. JAMES & M. N. LYNN, 
Grain Meter, 
Patented Feb. 22, 1881. 
Y N 
 
WITNESSES: 
Z/4%.2% 
26% 
f. C. year 
Yu.4-e- 
46 u/27. 
ATTORNEYS, 
(MOdel.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
R. R. JAMES & M. N. LYNN, 
Grain Meter, 
No. 238,122. 
Patented Feb. 22, 1881. 
 
  
 
 
 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
atta/ SNN 
 
n N 2 
NNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 7 
WITNESSES 
r 
G 11-62/u/ 
 
57. 
INVENTOR: 
SHS 
r2 ga 
lessles releas 
O 
Suz 
% 
NYaYaNNNNNNNYNNNNNNY 
e 
% 
46 // 92 
? I 
ATTORNEYS, 
N, PETERS, Phoro-LTHOGRAPHER, wast:NGTON, D.C.. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
REUBEN R. JAMES AND MIRABEAU. N. LYNN, OF RISING SUN, INDIANA; SAID 
LYNN ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO BRADFORD MILL COMPANY, OF CIN 
CINNATI, OEIO. 
GRAN-METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,122, dated February 22, 1881. 
Application filed May 10, 1880. 
(Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, REUBEN R. JAMEs 
and MIRABEAUN.LYNN, of Rising Sun, in the 
county of Ohio and State of Indiana, have in 
5 vented a new and Improved Grain-Meter; and 
we do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same. 
Our invention relates to apparatus for weigh 
ing and measuring and registering the amount 
IO of grain that passes through it by means of 
apparatus actuated solely by the weights of 
the grain, and thereby be automatic in its op 
eration; and the improvement primarily con 
sists in employing double balanced measuring 
I5 buckets suspended from a balance-beam that 
is supported upon a vibrating ever operated 
upon alternately by the weight of the grain in 
one of the buckets, and the weight of a scale. 
beam connected with the free end of the vi 
2O brating lever, to hold the receiving-bucket in 
its raised position until the proper weight or 
quantity of grain shall have been delivered to 
it, when it will be allowed to drop of its weight 
at Once in a peculiar manner, and in so doing 
5 close the receiving-valve and open the dis 
charge-valve connected to the full bucket, to 
allow the grain to discharge therefrom, while 
the other measuring-bucket is by the same 
movement raised and acts upon its receiving 
3o and delivery valves-to respectively open the 
one and close the other, and become, in turn, 
the receiving-bucket-the operation above de 
scribed to continue so that one bucket will 
operate upon the other so long as grain is al 
In order to prevent the grain from being 
choked or smothered in its passage through 
the discharge pipes or openings, and thereby 
stop the further operation of the buckets, the 
4o improvement further consists in suspending a 
vibrating discharge-hopper upon pivots below 
the measuring-buckets to receive the grain that 
is discharged from them, and in connecting 
the vibrating ends of the hopper by rods with 
45 counterbalance-weights, and a sliding gate ar 
ranged in the grain-chute above the valves 
that open into the measuring-buckets, in such 
manner that an excessive weight of grain upon 
the discharge-hopper will close the valve across 
So the grain-chute, so that no more grain will be 
admitted to the measuring-buckets until the 
35 lowed to pass the receiving-valves. 
discharge-hopper shall have been relieved of 
its excessive weight. 
In order that an accurate account and regis 
try may be kept of the number of bushels or 
weight of grain that has passed through the 
machine, a novel registering mechanism has 
been employed; and the improvement consists 
in providing a number of numeral-wheels, which 
will be made to revolve by a peculiar form of 
ratchet and locking mechanisin, to locate and 
fix securely one numeral after another in reg 
ular order opposite the open face of the regis 
ter-box, and in connecting these wheels upon 
the shaft and with each other by peculiar 
mechanism, which will allow the first wheel of 
the series to make a complete revolution to 
each one-tenth part of a revolution of the next 
adjoining wheel, and so on from one to the 
other, as will hereinafter more fully appear. 
Our invention finally consists in suspending 
the meter from springs, which will admit of a 
slight vibration of the machine in Weighing, 
where there is a jar, without affecting the ac 
curacy of the machine's operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of our improved machine 
with the face of the casing removed; Fig. 2, 
a transverse vertical section through the 
weighing - machine and register-box in the 
line at a of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an end elevation 
of the machine with a portion of its casing 
broken away; Fig. 4, a longitudinal section 
through the register-box; Fig. 5, a face view 
of the reverse side of one of the numeral 
wheels of the register detached; and Fig. 6 is 
a perspective view of one of the register-wheels, 
with the spring-hook of another wheel, shown 
in dotted lines. 
The meter is inclosed within a rectangular 
shell, AA, having a removable face, to admit 
of access to the weighing mechanism for ex 
amination, adjustment, &c., and has also a 
hinged lid, A', upon the upper and near side 
of the casing, to cover the grain-receiving hop 
per B. The lid A' is formed with a rectangu 
lar opening through it, to allow the grain to 
pass into the meter-casing from the grain-tube 
or spouting to which the meter is connected. 
The hopper B is of triangular shape, the top 
b and front side, b', of which are at right an 
gles to each other, and the third side, b, 
. 
75 
55 
65 
95 
OO 
2 
23S,122 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
forming the bottom, extends diagonally from 
the outer corner of the top toward the lower 
corner of the front side or Wall of the hopper. 
The bottom plate, b, does not quite reach 
the lower corner of the front side, b, and the 
lower edge of the said side l' is turned under 
and up toward the lower edge of the bottom 
plate, b, to leave an opening, b, between them, 
through which the grain may pass from the 
hopper B on toward the weighing-buckets of 
the meter. 
A sliding gate, C, arranged parallel with 
and directly below the bottom plate, b, rests 
upon rollers c' and slides into a basin or 
pocket to control the opening l', as hereinaf 
ter described. 
A chute-board, b, is arranged nearly paral 
lel with and a little below the bottom plate, 
b', and gate C, to leave a space between them, 
which space is divided into two branching 
channels, that extend to the valve-openings d 
d", which openings are regulated by vertically 
sliding valves D D, that work in guides upon 
the front plate, b'. The valve - openings did 
are respectively located directly above the 
Weighing and measuring buckets EE, so that 
the grain from the hopper B is conducted to 
them. 
The buckets E E are suspended from the 
opposite ends of a balance-beam, F, which is 
pivoted midway of its length to a vibrating 
beam, G, that extends horizontally across the 
meter, and is supported at one end by a hinged 
connection to the side wall of the meter-cas 
ing, so that the other end of the lever will be 
allowed a limited vibration. The free end of 
the lever G is connected by linkg with the 
lifting end of a weighing or scale beam, H, 
that is also arranged horizontally within the 
casing and located directly above the beam 
G. The scale-beam H is pivoted at h h to 
brackets secured to the casing, and is gradu 
ated upon its face, to indicate the number of 
pounds in the measure required. Suitable 
weights, H', regulate the balance, so only a 
given weight of grain will be allowed to enter 
the bucket at each movement. The buckets 
EE are suspended from the balance-beam F by 
rodsee, secured to the buckets in a suitable 
manner. The upper rim of each of the buckets 
has arms e'e', that connect the bucket with its 
valve D or D', so that when the bucket rises the 
valve will be opened, and when it falls the 
valve will be closed into a pocket or basin 
formed by the bottom projecting and being 
turned up. Each of the buckets has delivery 
valves II', that regulate the openings 6 e in 
the lower part and upon the inner and adja 
cent Walls of the buckets, so that the valve 
openings of the buckets will come directly op 
posite each other. A frame formed of two 
horizontal bars, KK", one arranged above the 
other, is secured to the casing, so that they 
Will pass between the buckets and be located 
close to each of the adjacent sides of the buck 
ets. The delivery-valves II have flanges i i 
projecting horizontally from their outer face, 
and the said flanges pass between the bars K. 
K', so that the valve will be allowed only a 
limited vertical movement, and the bars KK 
will serve to raise the valves II and expose 
the openings ee when its respective bucket 
goes down, and close the Valve when the bucket 
is lifted. 
In order to secure a prompt opening and 
closing of the valves at the moment when the 
exact weight of grain shall be held in the re 
ceiving-bucket, the balance-beam F is pro 
vided with an arm, F, extending at right an 
gles from the beam at a point directly oppo 
site its pivotal center. The upper end of the 
arm F bears upon a friction roller or pin, L, 
secured to the inner side of the cover of the 
casing, to interlock in a peculiar manner with 
the lever F. upon either side and hold the re 
ceiving-bucket in its raised position until the 
full weight of grain has been admitted to the 
bucket. This movement is accomplished by 
the combined action of the balance-beam F, 
vibrating beam G., and weighted scale-beam 
H. The weighted beam H. supports the free 
end of the vibrating lever G in its raised po 
sition, so that the upper end of the arm will 
bear against the side of the roller opposite the 
receiving-bucket, and will be held there until 
the weight of grain in the bucket raises the 
weight until the end of the arm shall have 
cleared the roller L, and being then supported 
only by the weight the bucket will instantly 
fall and the empty bucket will be at once 
raised, and the receiving and delivery valves 
of the buckets will be operated at the same 
moment, to cause an accurate admission and 
cutting off of the grain to the weighing-buck 
ets. The arm E of the balance-beam F will 
then swing to the opposite side of the roller, 
and be caught behind it to support the oppo 
site bucket in its raised position in a similar 
alG. 
The buckets EE are held in place so that 
they will move easily up and down without 
jarring or rubbing. against other parts of the 
device by means of link-rods ee', hinged to 
the inner surface of the side walls of the cas 
ing. This device greatly prevents rattling and 
secures a light movement of the buckets. 
The delivery-hopper M is located directly 
below the buckets, to receive all of the grain 
that is discharged from them, and is pivoted at 
its front corners, in m, so that its opposite side 
may vibrate freely upon its pivots. The bot 
tom of the hopper has a discharge-opening, M', 
which comes directly opposite a corresponding 
opening, ct, in the bottom of the casing. The 
vibrating or rear end of the hopper M is con 
nected by rods in n' with the opposite ends of 
the sliding gate C, that slides in the pocket 
and controls the admission of the grain to the 
receiving-spouts, and serves as a cut - off to 
partially arrest or entirely stop the operation 
of the meter, when the discharge-hopperis over 
loaded, until it shall have freed itself of its ex 
cessive Weight of grain. 
A weighted bell-crank lever, N, is pivoted 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IIC 
IIS 
I 25 
 
23s,122 
O 
25 
35 
.45 
So 
85 
7 o 
to the sides of the hopper, and is connected 
with the joints between the gate C and rods 
m m', so that the gate C and hopper Mare 
both supported by the counterbalance-weights 
N", which may be additionally weighted to 
counterbalance any required weight of grain 
in the hopper, and when the amount of grain 
in the hopper shall exceed the force of the 
weights N the hopper will tilt and close the 
valve C until the hopper M is relieved of its 
excessive weight, and prevent the grain from 
accumulating sufficiently to check or intercept 
the regular movement of the buckets. 
The casing A is suspended from any perma 
nent beam or framing by means of coiled 
springs A*, two or four of which are prefera 
bly employed. Any jar or vibration given to 
the casing by the falling of the buckets or 
valves or any outside influences will be so re 
duced, cushioned by the springs, that no dis 
arrangement of the registering mechanism is 
caused thereby. 
The registering apparatus is inclosed in a 
separate casing, O, secured to the face of the 
Casing A in a Suitable manner. 
The register is formed of a series of drum 
wheels, PPP, secured to a permanent axle, 
R, so that they may freely turn thereon. The 
inner surfaces of the drums are divided by 
radially-projecting plates p into ten compart 
ments, and a roller, p', secured to a spring 
arm, p, attached to a stationary plate, p, is 
also secured to the axle R, so that as the drum 
is turned the roller will fall into the opposite 
compartments and arrest the further move 
ment of the Wheel. Each wheel has the first 
ten numerals marked upon its periphery, so 
that one of the numerals will come opposite 
each of the compartments, and as the roller 
falls into the compartment the corresponding 
number upon the wheel will be accurately lo 
cated opposite the face-plate of the register 
box O. The plates pare either permanently 
keyed upon the axle R, or they may be, as in 
this instance, provided with collars or hubs p", 
which will pass through the hub of the register 
drum and form a journal, upon which the drums 
may freely turn. The collars or hubs of all of 
the plates pass entirely through the wheel 
hubs, so that the collars p" will bear against 
each other and form one continuous hollow 
tube from one end of the axle to the other. 
One end of this tube will bear against the 
inner surface of the casing O, and the other 
end will be pressed against by a collar, p, that 
passes through the casing O, and is held with 
sufficient pressure against the hub-tube p' to 
prevent all of the plates from turning. A 
metal plate, S, secured to the outer side of the 
casing by screws ss, is forced against the outer 
end of the tube, or may be secured by a bolt 
passing through the inner tube, p, to give the 
required pressure. The unit-wheel of the reg 
istering mechanism has ten notched teeth se 
cured upon its rim, to correspond With the num 
ber of compartments and numerals upon the 
Wheel, and project through the casing O of the 
register, and also through the casing A of the 
meter at a point directly opposite the central 
line between the buckets E E of the meter. 
Spring-hooks c' cupon each of the buckets 
engage with one of the notched teeth of the 
Wheel P as each bucket is lifted. 
In order to move the second or tens wheel 
from one compartment or numeral to the next 
to each full revolution of the unit - wheel, a 
horn, p", is secured to one end of the plate p 
upon the unit-wheel, which projects at its point 
Somewhat within the next or unit' wheel. 
The units-wheel is provided with a hook, p", 
upon its face, opposite the tens-wheel, which 
projects somewhat within the rim of tens 
wheel. The hook p forms a part of a trian 
gular wire or plate that is hinged to the face of 
the drum or number wheel, and is held against 
the face of the plate by a spring, p. When 
the unit-wheel revolves until the spring-hook 
p' shall come opposite the horn p, the hook 
will be drawn into the next or tells wheel and 
press against One of the plates p, and the 
coupled wheels will move together until the 
hook p passes beyond the horn p", when its 
spring will withdraw it from the adjoining 
wheel and the unit-wheel will revolve alone, 
as clearly shown by the hook pin dotted lines, 
passing over the horn ) in Fig. 6. The horn 
p' is only of sufficient length to allow its wheel 
to be moved one-tenth of a revolution. The 
hundreds, thousands, and other wheels of 
the register mechanism are connected with 
the wheel of the next lowest denomination in 
a sinnilar manner, so that the figures exposed 
upon the register will be raised a single num 
ber at each upward movement of a bucket and 
register the exact number of movements of the 
buckets. The scale-beam will indicate the 
number of pounds to the bucket and the num 
ber of pounds to the bushel. 
The parts employed for intermittently re 
volving and locating the rollers relatively to 
each other are closely grouped around the hub 
or axle of the drum, and are completely inclosed 
and protected by it. Furthermore, the rims of 
the drums are not cut away to allow the lo 
cating and actuating rollers to pass through 
to the outside, so that with our form of con 
struction and arrangement the outer surfaces 
of the drums are not marred. 
In practice we make the first drum in the 
register have on its face , , ;, 0, , , ;, 0, in 
which case two hooks and eight equal sides 
are employed; or it may be provided with eight 
equal sides and display the numerals , , 3, , 
, , , 0 in regular order, in which case but 
one hook is employed. 
The operation of the meter and register will 
be readily understood from the foregoing. 
We clain as our invention and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent 
1. In a grain-lmeter, the combination of the 
measuring-buckets, suspended from the oppo 
site ends of a balance - beam, the vibrating 
beam upon which the balance-beam is pivoted, 
hinged at one end of the casing of the meter 
95 
CO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
23S, 22 
O 
and supported at the other end by a weighted 
scale-beam, the bucket being connected to and 
provided with suitable receiving and delivery 
valves, so that the bucket will alternately op 
erate, substantially as described. 
2. In a grain-meter, the combination of the 
measuring-buckets, balance-beam pivoted to a 
projecting arm, the vibrating fulcrum-beam, 
the Weighted scale-beam, and a tripping block, 
pin, or roller secured to the casing, and ar 
ranged in such manner that it will hold the 
receiving-bucket in its raised position until it 
is properly filled, in the manner and for the 
purpose substantially as described. 
3. In a grain-meter, the combination of the 
measuring-bucket, suspended from scale-beams 
arranged to alternately rise and fall, and ver 
tically-moving receiving-valves secured to the 
lower portion of the sides of the receiving-hop 
per, operated upon by brackets secured to the 
buckets, to lift the valve as the bucket rises 
and automatically receive the grain, substan-- 
tially as described. 
4. In a grain-meter, the combination of the 
measuring - buckets, suspended from scale 
beams arranged to alternately rise and fall, and 
Vertically moving discharge-valves secured 
to guides upon the lower and inner sides of the 
buckets, and a frame permanently secured to 
the casing of the meter, to embrace projecting 
lugs upon the valves, to open and close the 
valves, respectively, upon the buckets as they 
rise and fall, substantially as described. 
5. In a grain-meter, the combination of the 
25 
35 
vertically - moving measuring -buckets, sus 
pended from scale-levers, a vibrating dis 
charge-hopper arranged beneath the measur 
ing-buckets and pivoted upon one side of the 
casing-rods, to connect the free side of the 
hopper to a vertically-moving cut-off valve ar 
ranged in the grain-chute above the receiving 
valves, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
6. A grain-meter provided with weighing or 
measuring buckets that vibrate vertically as 
they are filled and emptied within a casing 
that is suspended from a fixed support by 
springs, to admit of a limited vibration of the 
meter without affecting its accuracy, substan 
tially as described. 
7. In a registering apparatus, the combina 
tion of a series of intermittently-revolving 
drums, PP, the pawl or roller plate p, pro 
vided with hubs p, that form journals upon 
which the rollers revolve and bear against each 
other, to form a continuous hollow shaft, to 
gether with the collar p and the presser-plate 
S, for clamping the hubs one against the other, 
to prevent them from turning with the drums, 
and a fixed axle, R, that passes through the 
tube formed of hubs p", to hold the parts to. 
gether, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
REUBEN RODNEY JAMES. 
MIRA.BEAU NORMAN LYNN. 
45 
So 
55 
Witnesses: 
JAS. HAINER, 
JOHN H. JoNES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238222.txt	(No Model.) 
Supplemental Flue for Furnace Registers. 
C. H. FIFIELD, 
No. 238,222. 
Patented March 1, 1881. 
 
 
7/27azz-e J's ecs. 
2.2 
- Zzzeeze-Zaz 
2 */5. 
PERS, PHOTO-uTiogrape, WASHINGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. FIFIELD, OF SALEM, MASSACHUSETTS, 
SUPPLEMENTAL FLUE FOR FURNACE-REGISTERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,222, dated March 1, 1881. 
Application filed December 18, 1880. 
(No model.) 
metal, 1, having flanges 22, to the innersurface 
of the casing A, the wall of the casing form 
ing one side of each tube C and the flanged 
plate or strip 1 the other sides, as shown in 
Figs, 2 and 3. The lower ends of the plates 
are curved outwardly to meet the wall of the 
casing below the perforations B. Hence each 
tube C communicates at its lower end with 
One of said perforations, so that air entering 
the perforations will pass upwardly into the 
upper portion of the casing A, the tubes Cbe 
ing Open at their upper ends, which may ex 
tend to the upper end of the casing A, or to 
any desired lower point. 
It will be seen that by the described con 
struction simplicity and economy are coin 
bined, the walls of the casing A being made 
to serve also as the outer sides of the tubes 
C, thus effecting a saving both in material 
and in weight. 
I prefer to provide the casing with suitable 
handles, H, for convenience in moving it. 
The described supplemental flue is intended 
to be placed over a register without being at 
tached thereto or to the floor, so that it can be 
removed, if desired. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES H. FIFIELD, 
of Salem, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certainImprove 
ments in Supplemental Flues for Furnace-Reg 
isters, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to the device known as 
an improvement in hot-air registers described 
in Letters Patent of the United States granted 
to William B. Kehew and myself July 22, 1862. 
The object of the present invention is to pro 
duce a simpler and cheaper device to accom 
plish the same result as the device shown in 
Said patent-viz., to facilitate the upward pas 
Sage of hot air from furnace-registers, and to 
prevent the accumulation of cold air over the 
Sale, 
To this end my invention consists in the de 
vice which I term a supplemental hot-air 
flue, constructed as described and claimed 
hereinafter. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure I represents 
a perspective view of my improved supple 
mental hot-air flue. Fig. 2 represents a verti 
cal section of the same, and Fig. 3 represents 
a horizontal section. 
I claim 
The improved portable supplemental hot 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
air flue for furnace-registers, consisting of the 
same parts in all the figures. 
In carrying out my invention I construct a 
sheet-metal flue or casing A, open at its ends, 
casing or flue, A, of sheet metal, open at both 
adapted to stand on one end in a vertical pO 
ends, preferably tapered from one end to the 
sition on a floor and surround a furnace-regis 
ter, and provided with perforations B near its 
other, and of suitable size and shape at the 
bottom or larger end to inclose the area cov 
lower end, and with the tubes or flues C, each 
formed by attaching a flanged or bent plate of 
ered by a furnace-register, so that when placed 
Over a register the casing A constitutes vir 
metal to the inner surface of the casing, so that 
tually a continuation of the flue which con 
said inner surface serves as one of the sides of 
ducts hot air from the furnace to the register. 
each tube, said tubes communicating at their 
The height of the casing A is preferably about 
lower ends with the perforations B, and open 
thirty inches, but may be varied from this, if 
ing at their upper ends into the flue or casing 
A, all as set forth. 
desired. 
B B represent perforations formed in the 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
sides of the casing close to the bottom there 
of. These perforations are preferably four in two subscribing witnesses, this 14th day of 
number, as shown, and they constitute orifices 
December, A. D. 1880. 
through which cold air from the lower portion 
of the room may enter the casing. 
C C C C represent cold-air tubes or flues 
within the casing A, each formed by solder 
ing or otherwise attaching a plate or sheet of 
MICHAEL GRUSH, 
DEAN C. SYMONDS, 
CEIAERLES H. FIEEED. 
Witnesses: 
55 
75 
85 
O 
IS 
3O 
35 
45 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238322.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F., ALLEN, 
T001 Holder. 
No. 238,322. 
Patented March 1, 1881. 
 
: 
lik 
Winesses 
/arentor. 
2-ya- -27.2 
2. 2-2. 
- . 
- 
 
N. PETERS, PHOto-Lithographer washNGTON, d. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. ALLEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TO O - HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,322, dated March 1, 1881. 
Application filed April 1, 1880. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN.F.ALLEN, of New 
York, in the State of New York, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Tool-Hold 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to holders for tool 
blades or cutters; and it consists in the con 
struction and combination of parts hereinafter 
set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I 
represents a side view of my improved tool 
holder. Fig. II is an end view. Fig. III is a 
front view, and Fig. IV is a top view, of the 
same. Fig. W is a top view of a tool-holder 
for a single central or square tool. 
Similar letters represent similar parts in all 
the figures. 
A is the tool-holder, in which the shank or 
stock C is made square or oblong to fit into 
the tool-post, and is secured in the same in the 
usual manner. The head b of this tool-holder 
is made deeper to give sufficient bearing for 
the tool steel. In this headl of the tool-holder 
holes n. 2 or n are made to receive the tool 
Steel or the tool proper, B. If a straight or 
Central tool is required a hole, m, is made in 
the center of the tool-holder, as shown in Fig. 
V, and is placed at an angle with the horizon 
tal plane of the tool-holder, at the same time 
the square hole is so cut as to present the cor 
ner angle of the tool steel to the work. For 
right and left handed tools two holes, grooves, 
or channels, in n, are made into and through the 
forward part or head, b, of the tool-holder, at a 
proper angle with the horizontal plane of the 
tool-holder in one direction, as seen in Fig. I, 
and diagonal to each other and to the front 
face of the tool-holder in the other direction, 
as shown in Figs. III and IV. In this case 
the sides of the holes n n may be cut parallel 
to the sides of the tool-holder, or only slightly 
inclined to the same. In large tool-holders the 
holes in 2 and in may be made in one and the 
same holder. 
In the upper part of the tool-holder a set 
Screw, v, is arranged within the plane bounded 
by the sides of the shank, and in a direction 
to act nearly Square against the back of the 
tool B; and in the lower part of the head b of 
the tool-holder a second set-screw, v, is ar 
ranged, likewise within the plane bounded by 
55 
65 
the sides of the shank a of the tool-holder, 
and acting, consequently, diagonally upon the 
back of the tool.B, and likewise diagonal to 
the set-screw , by which arrangement a per 
fectly firm gripe on the tool B is obtained. 
The steel tool B requires to be only about 
one-half of an inch square or round, and is ap 
plicable for a central as well as for a right or 
left handed tool, and requires only to have the 
edge or cutting-point ground, without any ne 
cessity for forging. 
At the back of the tool steel slight recesses 
may be ground to increase the grip of the 
Set-screws and prevent slipping when taking 
a heavy cut. These recesses are readily ground, 
and will be found necessary for tool steel that 
is hardened throughout, such as Mushet's 
steel, and as they are at the back of the tool 
steel no further damage will thereby be done 
to the tool itself. The upper screw, v, bears 
against the blade or tool B in a line at right 
angles therewith, while the lower screw, W, 
being horizontal, bears against said blade in a 
line which makes an obtuse angle with said 
blade. The lines of pressure of these screws 
') and v would cross one another, if prolonged; 
hence their combined action on the blade is a 
converging pressure, which holds said blade 
much more firmly than a single set-screw or 
two set-screws pressing in parallel lines. 
I am aware that it is not new to employ a 
screw for clamping a tool-blade in a holder; 
also, that it is not new to make tool-holders 
with several ways in them, for the purpose of 85 
allowing tool-blades to be set at different an 
gles. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In combination with a tool-holder and a 
tool-blade held therein, a pair of set-screws 
Which bind against said blade in converging 
lines of pressure, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. In combination with tool-holder A. and 
blade B, a pair of screws, w, binding against 
said blade in converging lines of pressure, said 
blade being provided with recesses to receive 
the ends of said screws, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
0, one 
3. In combination with set-screws 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
IS 
25 
3 5 
40 
45 
SO 
238,322 
above the other, and having converging lines 
of pressure, the stock A, having recesses or 
grooves extending in different directions, said 
screws working through screw-threaded pas 
sages into said grooves and clamping the blade 
B, substantially as shown. 
4. The stock A, screw-tapped to receive fast 
ening-screws and 0, recessed to receive the 
head of the upper screw, v, and provided with 
two or more grooves or channels, n, which are Io 
inclined in different directions, in combination 
with said screws and with blade B, adapted to 
be shifted from one to another of said grooves 
or channels at Will. 
JOEN F. ALLEN. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY E. ROEDER, 
S. A. EMANUEL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238423.txt	(Model.) 
S. NICHOLS, 
Car Coupling, 
No. 238,423. 
Patented March 1, 1881. 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
(2%ai.e., 2-6-4 - 
22 
of 7tze/& 4 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMEON NICHOLS, OF LISBON, MAINE. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,423, dated March 1, 1881. 
Application filed August 14, 1880. (Model.) 
Sale, 
I5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SIMEON NICHOLs, of 
Lisbon, in the county of Androscoggin and 
State of Maine, have invented a new and Im 
5 proved Car-Coupler, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
simple and convenient device for adjusting the 
elevation of the coupling-link, and for coupling 
Io and uncoupling cars without going between 
the cars for that purpose. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the coupler. 
Fig. 2 is a transverse sectional elevation of the 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A represents the front of 
a car-platform. A'is a bumper, secured to the 
face thereof. 
2O B is a draw-head, provided with an open 
mouth, a, and secured to the platform A by 
the strap B', that embraces said draw-head B 
and has its points directed upward and entered 
into the platform A. 
25 C is a bolster fixed between the platform A 
and the draw-head B, to hold the latter at a 
proper level. 
D is a stirrup-shaped elbow-lever, pivoted 
through its elbows on the rod D', that passes 
3o transversely through the draw-head B, so that 
the horizontal slightly-curved forearms b b of 
said lever D extend forward along the sides 
of said draw-head B, toward the face thereof, 
and the connecting cross-bar c, which is pro 
35 vided with a lip, d, projecting outward and 
downward, stretches across the front of said 
draw-beadB. The vertical arms.ff of saidle 
ver D extend upward on either side of the 
draw-head B, and are provided with eyes f"f 
4o in their extremities, in which are engaged the 
chains EE, that connect said lever D with 
the bent levers FF, that are fulcrumed on 
pins g g on the under side of the platform A, 
so that by moving the handles of said levers 
45 FF forward the said lever D has its lip dele 
wated. 
When the lever D is in the position shown 
in Eig. 2 the lip d serves as a guide for the en 
tering of a coupling-link, G, into a draw-head, 
- 
B, when the opposite car is lower, and when So 
it is desired to couple with a higher car the 
link G is elevated to a suitable position by 
elevating the lever D, as shown in Fig. 1. 
Thus it will be seen that the purpose of the 
lever D is to guide and adjust the coupling- 55 
link. G. 
Along the upper edge of the car-platform A 
a rocking rod, H, is held in straps H H', the 
ends of said rod H being bent outward to serve 
as handles whereby to operate said rod H. 6o 
From the center of said rod Ea curved grooved 
arm, I, projects forward, said arm I consisting 
of a slightly-curved round section, m, connected 
directly with the rod H, and of a slightly 
curved section, n, grooved on its upper convex 65 
face, as shown at 0, and bent at an angle of 
about ninety degrees downward from the sec 
tion in, and in the bend of said arm I is fixed 
a staple, p, from which the coupling-pin L is 
suspended by the chain M, that is held in the 7o 
groove 0, so that when said arm I is turned 
down by the action of the rod H, as shown in. 
full lines in the drawings, the bend of the arm 
I is brought in a direct vertical line above the 
coupling-pin orifices q q., directing and permit- 75 
ting the coupling-pin L to enter said orifices 
of q and hold the link G, while, when the arm 
I is turned up, as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 
2, the tip of the section in will be in a vertical 
line over the orifices q q., so that the coupling- 8o 
pin L will be raised and held suspended di 
rectly over said orifices q q. 
The levers FF and rod H may be operated 
from the sides of a car, or by means of simple 
mechanism from the top thereof, whereby the 85 
dangers to life and limb consequent on going 
between cars for coupling or uncoupling may 
be avoided. 
The stirrup-shaped elbow-lever D may be re 
duced in size and be fixed within the draw. 9o 
head for protection from injury by contact with 
outside objects. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent- 
1. A car-coupler constructed substantially 
as herein shown and described, consisting of 
draw-head B, stirrup-shaped lever D, provided 
95 
2 
23S423 
with lip d, levers FF, rocking rod H., curved the said coupling-pin is directed and entered 
grooved arm I, chain M, and coupling-pin L, and withdrawn from the draw-head, as set 
as set forth. 
forth. 
SIMEON NICHOLS. 
2. In a car-coupler, the combination, with 
5 the coupling-pin L, of the rocking rod H., curved 
and grooved arm I, and chain M, substan- 
tially as herein shown and described, whereby 
Witnesses: 
JESSE DAVIS, 
OZIUS B. COTTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238524.txt	(Model.) 
C, N, PETESCH, 
Surface Feeder for Boilers, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 238,524. 
ac 
Patented March 8, 1881. 
 
(Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
C. N. PETESCH, 
Surface Feeder for BOilers. 
No. 238,524. 
Patented March 8, 1881, 
727. 2. 
|---, -,| | 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Wazeesses. 
c6.4/24 Mezvezzazza 
Aterrvey, 
N, PEreR8, Foto-tutosaapHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CEIARLES N. PETESCH, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
DWIGHT COOKE, OF SAME PLACE. 
SURFACE FEEDER FOR BOLERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,524, dated March 8, 1881. 
Application filed November 10, 1880. 
(Model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs N. PETESCH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented a new and use 
ul Surface-Feeder for Boilers, called a clean 
ser and feeder for steam-boilers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
In the drawings accompanying, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a boiler provided with a 
surface-cleanser and feeder embodying my in 
2ntion. 
Fig. 2 is an end view of the same, 
.nowing the end of the boiler removed. Fig. 
3 is a top view of the same, shown partly in 
horizontal section. Fig. 4 is a vertical central 
longitudinal section, showing a modification in 
the location of some of the parts. Fig. 5 is a 
vertical Central section of the condensing 
chamber and reservoir-chamber. 
My invention relates to the construction and 
Combination of the several chambers and pipes 
mentioned herein, and their arrangement in 
and connection with any steam-boiler to pre 
vent foaming and remove impurities from the 
Water. 
I construct a condensing-chamber, A, a res. 
ervoir-chamber, B, and pipes C and F, D, E, 
and G, so constructed, connected, and located 
with reference to the boiler that the water en 
tering the chamber A near the top through P 
shall pass out near the bottom through the 
pipe C, and out into the boiler through the 
slotted pipes DD in such manner and at such 
places as most prevents foaming, and as it is 
converted into steam that portion of it loaded 
with impurities shall rise through E, be car 
ried through F, around a stand-pipe,G,entering 
G near the bottom of the chamber A, through 
which pipeit shall be deposited in the reservoir 
B, the condensed steam to be withdrawn and 
kept in circulation, and the impurities to sink 
to the bottom of B, whence they can be re 
moved as often as necessary through the waste 
pipe W. 
The pipe C is coiled as much as practicable 
in the boiler, so that the water passing through 
it may be heated before it is discharged into 
the boiler. 
The pipe F is coiled around G, so as to se 
cure a more perfect condensation of the steam 
and deposit of impurities, while at the same 
time the water in A is somewhat warmed. 
The pipes D ID are closed at the ends, and 
slotted their entire length, so as to distribute 
the water-supply over the whole surface of the 55 
water in the boiler, and so placed against the 
shell of the boiler that the Water, as it comes 
from the slots, shall be supplied at or near the 
surface of the water. This supply and distri 
bution of the water tend to prevent foaming 6o 
by an equalization of temperature, and to keep 
the impurities on the surface, to be carried off 
in the steam through E. The location of the 
pipes DD against the shell prevents foaming 
by diverting the flow of the rising steam to. 65 
ward the center of the boiler. 
E is a float and pipe attached, sliding in F 
within the boiler, the end of the pipe spread 
ing out into a cup, N, which, by the float, shall 
at all times be kept at the surface of the wa- 7o 
ter, to gather up the impurities on the surface 
and in the rising steam. 
The stand-pipe G passes through the cham 
ber A, is closed at the top, H, and discharges 
into the reservoir-chanber B. 
receive the contents of the pipe F and conduct 
them to the reservoir-chamber B. 
Other boilers may be connected with the sup 
ply-pipe C outside the chamber A, and with 
the pipe F by connections or couplings outside 8o 
the chamber A, so that the impurities from 
the several boilers may be deposited in the 
reservoir-chamber B, there being similar ar 
rangements of pipes C, D, E, and F in the 
several boilers, the coil of the pipe F and the 85 
stand-pipe G being enlarged, if necessary; or 
a pipe, F, from each of the other boilers may 
enter the chamber A independently, and be 
coiled around and enter G like the first. 
B is connected with the suction-pipe of a force 
pump, which forces the water through the pipe 
P into the chamber A, and through C to the 
boiler. By this means the water discharged 
into B is returned into the boiler, and the cir- 95 
culation of the steam through F is promoted 
and increased, and the impurities drawn into 
the cup N. The chambers A and B may be 
placed at the end or by the side of the boiler. 
S is a pipe by which the reservoir-chamber 9o 
Its office is to 75 
I employ any suitable form of force-pump in IOO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
23s, 524 
connection with my feeding device, the inlet 
or suction pipe of the pump being connected 
in any convenient way with the pipe S of 
chamber B, and the delivery-pipe of the pump 
with pipe P of chamber A, as before stated, 
the office of the pump being the usual one of 
keeping up the supply and circulation of Wal 
ter in the boiler and apparatus, and thus make 
the device operative. 
Having thus explained my invention, I 
claim 
1. The condensing-chamber A, in combina 
tion with the reservoir-chamber B, the stand 
pipe G, and the connections or pipes P, S, and 
W, all constructed and arranged substantially 
as shown and described. 
2. The combination of the pipe C with the 
slotted pipes D D, constructed and arranged 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination of the pipe F and the 
float and pipe E with the cup N, all construct 
ed and arranged substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the float and pipe E, 
the pipe F, the chambers A and B, and the 
stand-pipe G, to collect, conduct, and deposit 
the impurities in the water, substantially as 
described. 
5. In a surface-feeder for steam-boilers, in 
combination with any suitable form of force 
pump, the condensing-chamber A, the pipe C, 3o 
and the slotted pipes D D, located against the 
shell of the boiler, heating, supplying, and dis 
tributing the water, and diverting the boiling 
water from the sides of the boiler, substan 
tially as described, to prevent foaming and 35 
carry the impurities to the cup N. 
6. In a surface-feeder for steam-boilers, in 
combination with any suitable form of force 
pump, the condensing-chamber A, the reser 
voir-chamber B, with the connections P and S, 
for the force-pump, the waste-pipe W, the 
stand-pipe G, the pipe C, the slotted pipes D 
D, the float and pipe E, with the cup N, and 
the pipe F, discharging into the stand-pipe G, 
constructed and arranged to maintain a thor- 45 
ough circulation, prevent foaming, and carry 
off and deposit impurities, substantially as de 
scribed. 
40 
CEHARLES N. PETESCH. 
In presence of 
GEORGE N. STONE, 
JAMES J. NOBLE. 
O 
IS 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238624.txt	J. WESTBER. G. 
Apparatus for Scraping Ships' BOttoms. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1 
(Model.) 
No. 238,624. 
Patented March 8, 1881. 
 
N 
R 
R R N 
- 
ir 
- 
-- - 
- - - 
A 
Zzzasses. A S 
Zezzzz" 
tags Sr. (; 
2-2.2 Sea A-4-4A 
Y. 
HE 
(Model.) 
A. 
J. WESTBER. G., 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Apparatus for Scraping Ships' Bottoms. 
No. 238,624. 
Patented March 8, 1881. 
 
Zzzaffar 
23-4, 
X %is-s 
NS 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, WASHING()N, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN WESTB ERG, OF BRA HE STAD, FINLAND, RUSSIA. 
APPARATUS FoR SCRAPING SHiPS BOTTOMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,624, dated March 8, 1881. 
Application filed February 1, 1881. 
(Model.) 
55 
65 
vessel. These plates are hinged to the frame 
A at d, and when closed rest on the triangu 
lar sides E or other suitable support. They 
are connected by lines or chains e, as shown, 
this being a nicety, not a necessity, all that is 
needed being that each plate shall be so con 
nected with the frame of the scraper as to be 
prevented from opening beyond the prescribed 
angle. By connecting the two, as shown, the 
opening of one will compel the closing of the 
other. 
I remark that I may use one deflecting-plate, 
or I can use more than two. I find, however, 
in practice that the best results can be ob 
tained from two. 
The scraper is provided at the top and bot 
tom with lines?, by which it is drawn up and 
down. It is also in practice provided with a 
line at one or both ends, g, by which its posi 
tion lengthwise of the ship may be shifted. 
The mode of operation is as follows, refer 
ence being had to Fig. 3, in which the scraper 
is shown in position for use on a vessel. The 
scraper is lowered in the water alongside the 75 
vessel, a line, f, extending from each side of 
the vessel, and by these lines the scraper is 
drawn up and down. When drawn down the 
under plate, D, Will close and the upper one 
Will open, thus presenting inclined surfaces 
against which the water will act to press the 
scraper closely against the vessel. When the 
scraper is drawn up the plates will automati 
cally shift to the position shown in dotted 
lines, Fig. 3, and full lines, Fig. 2, in which 
position their angle of inclination is again such 
as to cause the water to press the scraper 
against the vessel. The deflecting-plates will 
thus automatically shift with each reversal of 
the motion of the scraper, and will at all times 
present surfaces so inclined that the pressure 
of the water thereon will act to jam or force 
the scraper against the vessel. 
With a device such as shown I can scrape a 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN WESTBERG, of 
Brahestad, Finland, in the Empire of Russia, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Apparatus for Scraping the Bottoms 
of Wessels, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
The apparatus in which my invention is 
comprised is intended for use on vessels at 
sea, the object being to obtain an apparatus 
which, while the ship is in water, can be effect 
ively used to scrape and clean the ship's bot 
tom. 
The characteristic feature of the apparatus 
consists in the combination, with the scraper 
proper, or that portion which directly acts on 
the sides and bottom of the vessel, of auto 
matically-shifting inclined deflecting-plates, 
which, whether the scraper be drawn up or 
down, act to press it closely against the ship. 
The manner in which my invention is or 
may be carried into effect will be understood 
by reference to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, and Fig. 2 a. 
transverse section, of an apparatus embodying 
my invention. 
That portion of the frame of the apparatus 
which holds the scraper proper, or the device 
or devices which act directly on the ship's sides 
and bottom, may be of any suitable shape and 
dimensions. 
In practice I find it advantageous to use a 
rectangular frame, A, of wood or other proper 
material about three feet by two. In this 
frame are placed the scrapers, which, in this 
instance, consist of two frames, B, each hung 
on pivots a, and each containing two smaller 
frames, C, armed with metallic scraper-blades 
c, and pivoted each to the larger frame B at b. 
The arrangement of the two sets of pivots at 
and b is such as to permit the scraping-surface 
to adapt itself freely to the sides and bottom 
of the vessel. This is one convenient kind of vessel's bottom to within two or three feet 95 
scraping-surface; but I do not restrict myself each side of the keelson. 
For scraping the bottom at the bow and 
to the same. I can use stiff bristles or any 
suitable instrumentality, and the scraping de 
stern, where the lines are sharp, I make use of 
a hand-scraper, such as shown in Figs. 4 and 
vice may be pivoted or not, as preferred. 
5, of smaller dimensions, provided with a han 
The frame A is backed by hinged inclined 
dle, F, of suitable length-say from fifteen to 
plates D, which, as before said, are the means 
of pressing the scraper against the side of the twenty feet-and with metallic scraper-blades, 
85 
OO 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
23S,624 
one of which is shown separately in Fig. 6. 
The form and dimensions of this scraper differ 
somewhat from the scraper shown in Figs. 1 
and 2, but the principle of operation remains 
the same. The shifting-plates D act with en 
tire efficiency to hold the scrapertightly against 
the vessel. In this scraper, as Well as in the 
other, the scraping-surface may be formed of 
metallic blades or of any other suitable instru 
mentalities. 
Having described my invention, what I claim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A scraper for ships' bottoms provided 
with one or more automatically-shifting in 
clined plates movable with respect to the 
scraper-body to which they are jointed, and 
IO 
Witnesses: 
E. A. DICK, 
N. C. LANE. 
arranged and operating to present to the water 
at all times faces inclined in such direction 
that the pressure thereon of the water through 
which the scraper moves back and forth will 
tend to hold the scraper against the vessel, 
substantially as hereinbefore set forth. 
2. The combination, with the scraper proper, 
of the hinged automatically-shifting inclined 
deflecting-plates, substantially as and for the 
purposes herein before shown and set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 24th day of January, 1881. 
JOHN WESTBERG. 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238724.txt	(No Model.) 
C. SNEIDER 
Process of Producing Relief Line Printing and 
Patented March 8, 1881. 
Embossing Plates. 
No. 238,724. 
in 
a 
P. as 
a 
a 
, 
t'. 
 
O Saezae 
// 
77z/reuses. 
2-e-ea (2-6, 
A 4-6, 
. 
Zee eve/240 
66. 6.4// 
/7 4.4 eco sky-- a--- 
ag. 
''. PETERS, PHOTO-LTHOGRAPHER, washingtoN, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES SNEIDER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF TWO.THIRDS TO 
DANIEL, SLOTE, OF SAME PLACE, AND SAMUEL L. CLEMENS, OF HART. 
FORD, CONN. 
PROCESS OF PRODUCING RELEF-LINE PRINTING AND EMBOSSING PLATES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,724, dated March 8, 1881. 
Application filed December 9, 1880. 
(No model.) 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES SNEIDER, of 
New York, in the county of New York, and in 
the State of New York, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Processes for 
Producing Relief-Line Printing and Emboss 
ing Plates; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompa 
Io nying drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, making a part of this specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the process of producing relief-line 
I5 plates, types, and blocks for printing and em 
bossing and other similar purposes; and it 
has for its objects to provide a method where 
by a plate, type, or block may be cast in hard 
metal or alloy, such as brass, bronze, or the 
like, having the designs or letters clearly and 
sharply defined in relief, and whereby the oc 
currence of blow-holes, bubbles, and the like, 
as well as other imperfections so common to 
castings in hard metal, may be wholly ob 
viated. 
To this end my invention consists in the 
process more fully hereinafter set forth, and 
specifically pointed out in the claim. 
Figure 1 represents a sectional view of a 
mold constructed With a matrix formed ac 
cording to my invention, and Fig. 2 represents 
a plan view of the matrix, showing the de 
signs in the face thereof. 
To put my invention into practice I first 
take a plate of suitable size, constructed of 
glass or other suitable material which will be 
readily frangible under the influence of heat, 
and cover it with a coating, to any desired 
thickness, of material capable of being con 
veniently and properly worked or cut through 
in the desired lines of the designs or letters by 
means of a graver or otherwise. This mate 
rial for coating or covering the plates may con 
sist of any substance or composition which will 
possess the requisite qualities, and in practice 
I have found the following to answer well for 
general purposes, viz.: ground brick or por 
ous clay, one pound; whiting, one - half 
pound; plaster-of-paris, one-fourth pound. For 
So the hardest alloys or metals a little more 
ground brick or clay may be employed. The 
composition is formed into plates or tablets of 
any desired size and shape, in any convenient 
manner, and is allowed to set, and is baked 
until properly hardened. It is then pasted, 55 
cemented, or otherwise secured to the glass 
plate. For this purpose the cement known 
as stratena' will be found to answer Well. 
When the cement has become thoroughly 
dried and the material fastened securely to 
the glass, the lines of the desired designs, 
types, or figures are cut through the compound 
to the surface of the glass by means Ofa graver 
or other instrument, after which the plate is 
set, with the glass surface downward, in the 
lower part of a flask filled with sand, and the 
sand leveled off even with the upper face of 
the compound plate, the sand below the plate 
being perforated in innumerable places previ 
ously, by means of a suitable instrument or 7o 
pattern, in such manner as to form a large Se 
ries of air-passages, while at the same time 
the intervening portions of the sand will form 
a backing to support the plate. The upper 
part of the flask, filled with sand as usual, in 75 
which is formed a space of a size equal to the 
back or body of the plate to be produced, is 
then placed upon the lower part and the two 
secured together in the ordinary manner. A 
gate is constructed at the adjoining edges of 8o 
the two flasks, on a line with the upper face of 
the compound plate, so that the metal to be 
cast, when poured in, will flow evenly over the 
said upper surface of the plate and carry the 
air before it, and thus come in intimate con 
tact with the entire surface, a pool or recepta 
cle for the superfluous metal being formed on 
the side of the mold opposite the gate, in which 
such metal collects. As the fluid metal thus 
passes over the face of the compound plate it 9o 
will be evident that it will fill the lines, forming 
the designs or letters therein, to the exclusion 
of the air, while the heat of the metal will 
break the glass of the said compound plate 
to such an extent as to admit of the passage 
of air through the same, while it leaves the 
body virtually intact, so as to preserve its 
form and prevent the escape of the metal, and 
by which the gases developed by the hot metal 
may escape, relieving the metal of the press- I oo 
85 
35 
45 
2 
23S,724 
as these form the subject-matter of separate 
applications. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The process of producing relief-line plates, 
blocks, or types for printing or embossing, 
the same consisting in securing a plate of 
suitable substance upon a plate of glass or 
other material frangible under the influence 
of heat, engraving the design in said sub 
stance down to the supporting-plate, placing 
the same in a mold in a suitable flask pro 
vided with a gate for the introduction and a 
receptacle for the superfluous metal, and pour 
ing the metal into the mold so as to pass over 
the face of the matrix before cooling thereon, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 20th day of 
November, 1880. 
CEIAS, SNEIDER, 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
J. J. McCARTHY, 
H. J. ENNIS. 
O 
ure generated by such gases and effectually 
obviating the blow-holes, which would other 
wise be formed in the face of the completed 
type or block, the first portion of the metal 
flowing into the receptacle and collecting 
therein, carrying all slag with it. 
In order to facilitate the breaking of the 
glass, the back of the same may be scored or 
scratched by means of a diamond or other 
suitable tool previous to the insertion of the 
compound plate in the flask. 
In the drawings, the letter A indicates a 
flask of ordinary construction, B the sand 
therein, and C the matrix embedded in the 
lower part of the mold. 
The letter D indicates the passages at the 
rear of the matrix, for the escape of the gases 
when the destructible backing is broken. 
The letter Eindicates a gate atoneside of the 
mold, and F the pool or receptacle at the op 
posite side for the superfluous metal, the said 
pool being open at the top, as indicated by 
the letter G. 
In the present application I do not claim the 
matrix, nor the peculiarly-constructed mold, 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238824.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. WILLIAMS. 
Cider Mill. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 238,824. 
Patented March 15, 1881. 
al 
c 
s 
a. 
ASN y 
l 
2 s's 2. NS a C d", 
73 
- 
 
Intellini 
iTTIllin AHIM 
E 
witnesses 
ce % - 
- - - 
- W 
- 
Peters, Photo-ITHOGRAPHER, washing.TON, D. 
INVENTOR 
Wr v. urua... 
) 
AYY-1S-Mt/v 
ATTORNEY 
 
(No Model.) 
W. M. WILLIAMS, 
Cider Mill, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 238.824. 
Patented March 15, 1881. 
 
 
NEe 
Z Z, Z 
3 
N 
N 
 
a. 
2 
e 
  
  
 
 
 
EEE 
  
E 
. . 
A 
S 
f 
--- 
draw /coa/ 
N, PETERs, PHoro-LithogRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D. C, 
Urw (Aulawa 
\, t st 
.iii. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. WILLIAMS, OF SUMMER SEIADE, KENTUCKY. 
CDER-M1 LL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,824, dated March 15, 1881. 
Application filed September 23, 1880. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may CO2C6, 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM M. WILLIAMS, 
of Summer Shade, in the county of Metcalf and 
State of Kentucky, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Cider-Mills; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form part of this specification. 
My inventilon relates to an improvement in 
cider-mills, the design of which is to produce 
a device of that character of simple and dura 
ble construction, easily operated, and main 
tained in working condition, and capable of be 
ing manufactured and supplied to the trade at 
a comparatively light cost. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in the combination, with a fly-wheel hav. 
ing a disk made integral there with or secured 
thereto, of an eccentric detachably secured to 
said disk, and an eccentric-rod journaled on 
said eccentric and attached at one end to a piv 
otal concave. 
My invention further consists in the combi 
nation, with a pivoted concave having an up 
wardly-extending arm, of an eccentric-rod at 
tached to the extreme upper end of said con 
cave arm. 
My invention further consists in the combi. 
nation, with a concave having an upwardly 
projecting arm, of a hopper provided with wings 
or arms which inclose said concave arm. 
My invention further consists in the combi 
nation, with a fly or driving wheel having an 
eccentric attached to one face thereof and a 
rod operated by the eccentric and attached to 
a pivotal concave, of a pulley located on the 
grindling-cylinder shaft, and a belt connecting 
said fly-wheel and pulley. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view, in side elevation, of my invention. Fig. 
2 is a plan view thereof. Fig. 3 is a view in 
Fig. 4 is a view in hori 
vertical cross-section. 
Zontal cross-section, and Fig. 5 is a detached 
view of the hopper. 
Let A represent the frame, B the driving or 
fly wheel, C the hopper, D the press, and Ethe 
pomace-trough, of my improved cider-mill. 
press-frame at a. a, consists of a large wheel of 
suitable material and construction, and having 
a broad peripheral face, b, to retain a band or 
belt, c, by which it is connected and its move 
ments transmitted to the grinding-cylinder d. 
Diske, firmly secured to or formed integral with 
the wheel B, forms a bearing for the eccentric 
rod af, and offers a point of attachment to the 
eccentric b', which, as here shown, is secured 
thereto by screw c'. The forward end of the 
eccentric-rod is pivotally secured to the up 
wardly-projecting arm d of the concave A', the 
lower arm, A', of which is secured in the frame 
A by pivot e', to the right of and below the 
grinding-cylinder. The eccentric connection 
of the concave A' imparts to it a rocking no 
tion, which operates to present and then with 
draw its concave face afron the grinding-cyl 
inder d during the operation of makingpomace 
from the fruit. 
The grinding-cylinder d, journaled at b b 
to the frame A of the mill, is formed of wood 
or metal, and has a pulley, c', rigidly secured 
to or made integral with the grinding-cylinder 
shaft c'. A recessed block and Cross-pieces, 
e e, separate the cylinder from the pulley c 
and screw a, and prevent the pomace from 
being scattered. Both the grinding-cylinder 
and the concave face a of the concave A' are 
studded with nails n, to assist in thoroughly 
reducing the fruitto fine pulp, called poinace. 
The hopper C, into which the fruit or apples 
are poured preparatory to grinding, is adapted 
to fit down over the journals of the grinding 
cylinder, and has two extending arms or Wings, 
cic, which inclose the upper arms, d', of the 
concave A'. The hopper also has a seat, d, 
located in its interior and adapted to throw 
the fruit forward toward the concave a. 
A pomace-trough, E, is supported on a frame 
work directly under the grinding mechallism, 
and a uovable cider-press, D, is placed there 
on and arranged to be moved under the grind 
ing-cylinders and be filled with pomace, and 
when so filled to be drawn forward and pressed 
under the screw a. 
Having thus described my invention in de 
tail, I will now briefly describe its method of 
operation. 
The fly or driving wheel is first set in mo 
Fly or driving wheel B, journaled to the tion, either by a hand-crank attached thereto 
9o 
95 
OO 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
So 
23S, S24 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
or by other motive powers, and belt-connec 
tion is made between it and the pulley of the 
grinding-cylinder. When the eccentric car 
ries the concave away from the said grinding 
cylinder the fruit in the hopper will fall down 
between its concave face and the cylinder. A 
half-revolution of the driving-wheel will now 
throw the concave forward and hold the fruit 
on the grinding-cylinder, which is rapidly ro 
tating, until it is reduced to a pulp and falls 
into the press onto the pomace-trough or in 
other receptacle provided therefor. The mo 
tion of the fly-wheel is a steady one, and the 
cylinderis rotated with great rapidity, enabling 
a great quantity of fruit to be reduced to po 
mace in a comparatively short time. 
Among the attributes of superiority which 
my improved cider-mill possesses over those 
now in use are, the particular construction of 
the fly-wheel and its eccentric connections with 
the concave, and the method of transmitting 
its motion to the grinding-cylinder. Great 
economy of motive power and a reduction of 
friction are effected by attaching the eccentric 
directly to the fly-wheel; again, by providing 
the concave with a long arm and connecting 
it with the eccentric-rod at its extreme upper 
end an excellent leverage is obtained and a 
better motion is imparted to the concave. 
Heretofore connection has been made be 
tween the fly-wheel and the grinding-cylinder 
by trains of gear-wheels. However, these are 
objected to, because if any foreign substance is 
introduced into the hopper, and the cylinder 
revolving at a high speed is suddenly stopped, 
the shock will often Wrench and break the 
machine, while with a belt-connection, if such 
accident should happen the belt will slip on 
the pulley and such wrenching be avoided. 
Less power is required to operate the pomace 
mechanism of a cider-mill when constructed 
according to my invention than with the old 
form, where the friction between a long train 
of gear-wheels must be overcome. 
I would have it understood that I do not 
limit myself, to the exact construction shown 
and described, but hold myself at liberty to 
make such slight changes and alterations as 
come within the spirit and scope of my inven- . 
tion. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a cider-mill, the combination, with a 
fly-wheel having a disk made integral there 
with or secured thereto, of an eccentric de 
tachably secured to said disk, and an eccentric 
rod journaled on said eccentric and attached , 
at one end to a pivotal concave, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. In a cider-mill, the combination, with a 
pivotal concave having an upwardly-extend 
ing arm, of an eccentric-rod attached to the 
extreme upper end of said concave arm, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a cider-mill, the combination, with a 
concave having an upwardly-projecting arm, 
of a hopper provided with wings or arms which 
inclose said concave arm, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. In a cider-mill, the combination, with a . 
fly or driving wheel having an eccentric at 
tached to one face thereof and a rod operated 
by the eccentric and attached to a pivotal con 
cave, of a pulley located on the grinding-cyl 
inder shaft, and a belt connecting said fly 
wheel and pulley, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand. 
WM. M. WILLIAMS. 
Witnesses: 
WiM. M. RIGGs, 
H. A. GRIDER. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US238927.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARSHALL C. LEFFERTs, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MANUFACTURE OF STAYS FROM CELLULOD AND OTHER PASTIC MATERAL, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 238,927, dated March 15, 1881. 
Application filed December 7, 1880 (No specimens.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that,MARSHALLC.LEFFERTS, 
of New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in the Manufacture of 
Stays from Celluloid and other Plastic Mate 
rial, of which the following is a specification. 
The invention has relation to improvements 
in corset-stays and analogous articles which 
form a part of or areased in connection with ar 
ticles of Wearing-apparel. It is intended to 
be practiced in the production of stays and 
similar devices of all kinds, without regard to 
the purpose for which they are employed. It 
will be utilized in the manufacture of the front 
and side pieces or stays of eorsets, in the bod 
ies of dresses, in hoop-skirts, bustles, expand 
ers, and otherwise, as may be desired. 
In the manufacture of the class of stays, 
&c., to which the invention has relation, it has 
heretofore been customary to employ whale 
bone, horn, metal, &c., which have been cov 
ered with kid or other material, or used with 
out being covered, according to circumstances; 
but there are objectious to the best of these, 
which I am able to successfully avoid, besides 
producing an article which possesses advan 
tages that have not, as far as I am aware, been 
embodied in any heretofore made. 
An objection common to all of the materials 
now in use is, that whenever it is desired to 
wash the garment or article of apparel it is 
necessary to remove the stay to prevent its 
being injured by being wet or remaining im 
mersed in water. This is especially true of 
such as are made of metal, and those made of 
whalebone, horn, &c., after a time, become 
what is termed set, and also lose their elas 
ticity. The class which are covered with kid 
or other material are obnoxious to the objec 
tion that they are affected by the perspiration 
and heat of the body, and soon become offen 
sive, which renders them valueless. 
By means of my invention I overcome all 
of these objections, and provide an article 
which is light, of ornate appearance, durable, 
and at the same time permanently elastic, 
which may be washed without removing it 
from the garment, or which may be taken out 
So and washed without injury, and which is un 
like any stay heretofore used. 
45 
25 
35 
The essential novelty of the invention con 
sists in the employment of celluloid or other 
compounds of pyroxyline, the application be 
ing governed by the circumstances of the 55 
case. In some instances I propose to use the 
celluloid or other compound as a covering or 
coating, and in others to use it to form the en 
tire article. When used as a coating or cov 
ering I employ , by preference, a core or body 6o 
consisting of a strip or piece of elastic steel, 
the covering or coating being secured in any 
convenient way, and being of a character 
adapted to the particular use to which the ar 
ticle is to be applied. After the coating or 65 
covering has been put on, the article will, by 
preference, be polished or finished as may be 
desirable. 
If preferred, the covering or coating may be 
in the form of a varnish or solution laid on 7o 
with a brush, or otherwise; or the strip or 
piece may be dipped. 
In lieu of steel, any other suitable metal or 
material may be employed, the method of ap 
plying the coating being adapted to the nature 75 
of the naterial. 
In some instances I intend to omit the core 
or center of metal or other material, and use 
a strip or piece consisting wholly of celluloid 
or other compound of pyroxyline, which will 8o 
be formet and finished in any appropriate 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
1. A stay for corsets and other articles, con- 85 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
posed wholly or in part of celluloid or other 
compound of pyroxyline. 
2. A stay for corsets and other articles, 
which consists of a core or center covered or 
coated with celluloid or other compound of py- 9o 
roxyline. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing im 
provement in the manufacture from plastic 
material of stays, &c., as above described, I 
ave hereunto set my hand this 2d day of De- 95 
cember, 1880. 
MARSEALL C, EFFERTS. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. C. GILL, 
PARISCHALMERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239027.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
A. H. BRINTNELL. 
Maohinery, for Manufacturing Cheese, 
No. 239,027. 
Patented March 22, 1881. 
 
harvesses. 
16 W 1344-v. 
A 3-whee 
N. Peters, PHOTO-THOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, O, O, 
Machinery for Manufacturing Cheese, 
No. 239,027. 
Patented March 22, 1881. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
a: 
I,Turentor 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
A. H. BRINTNELL. 
Ma Chinery for Manufacturing Cheese. 
No. 239,027. 
  
 
O 
 
I 
 
 
 
Patented March 22, 1881. 
4-c. 
HTTH HI-Cf 
N 
? 
N 
 
  
III 
Fig. 5. 
a Nagas-SZ. 
NS r& a 
7 
v. 
, M . A 
Z% 
N.Y. Ola 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARCHIBAL.D. H. BRINTNELL, OF BELLEVILLE, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
MACHINERY FOR MANUFACTURING CHEESE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 239,027, dated March 22, 1881. 
Application filed July 12, 1850. (No model.) Patented in Canada, January 22, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ARCHIBALD H. BRINT 
NELL, of the city of Belleville, in the county of 
Hastings and Province of Ontario, Canada, 
have Invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Machinery for Manufacturing Cheese; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in mechanism for manufacturing cheese; and 
it consists in the peculiar construction and ar 
rangement of the parts, as hereinafter more 
fully set forth, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a plan, Fig. 2 a longitudinal Section, and 
Figs. 3 and 4 cross-sections, of machinery em 
bodying my improvements. 
A is a curd-vat, constructed and heated by 
Steam in the usual manner, and B is a sink 
placed in connection with the vat at a lower 
level, and arranged to receive the contents of 
the vat by gravitation through the pipe A'. A 
number of these vats, and sinks are placed 
in a row, with a suitable space between each 
set for the movement of operators and inspec 
tion. Above each vat a frame, C, is built, on 
which is mounted a series of upright shafts, C', 
Which are rotated simultaneously and at equal 
speed by means of the pulley's C C, belt C, 
and connecting-bar C, as shown, or in any 
other suitable manner. Each of the upright 
shafts is provided with a cross-beam, D, to 
which is attached a pair of -adjustable agitat 
ors, D. These agitators are pivoted at their 
upper ends to the cross-beam, provision being 
made, by means of a slot, s, and the pivotal bolt 
e, screw-threaded at one end and provided with 
a nut, to allow of vertical adjustment, and at 
their lower ends are provided with a broad 
curved blade, d, which is immersed in the 
curds, and as the shafts rotate stir and break 
up the contents of the vats in a very efficient 
and expeditious manner. The mechanism of 
each vat is driven from a main-line shafting, 
E, by means of the counter-shaft F, gearing F, 
bevel-gears FF, and shaft F, and to provide 
a means for throwing the mechanism out of 
operation, one end of the shaft F, supported in 
ea 
the frame E, is connected to a slotted Wedge, 
f, by the proper movement of which the gear 
wheels F can be placed out of contact and 
the motion of the vat machinery arrested, When 
desired, without stopping the line-shaft or in 
terfering with the operations in the remailing 
vats or in the sinks. 
The sink B is of peculiar construction, being 
circular in form, and provided with a well, B', 
in the center of the bottom of which is placed 
a strainer, B. This strainer projects upwardly 
from the bottom of the sink in a slightly coni 
cal form, and is closed at the upper end. The 
strainer may be constructed of sheet metal pro 
vided with perforations, as shown, or may be 
made of wire-cloth or other suitable material, 
which will allow of the proper discharge of the 
whey from the sink without allowing the solid 
matter to escape. 
J is a sink-agitator, having three (more or 
less) arms, J', to each of which are attached 
the teeth K. These teeth are made adjustable 
on and detachable from the arms, and each 
tooth is provided with a number of outwardly 
projecting spurs, k, which are designed to 
break up or cut the matter in the sink with 
great thoroughness. The agitator is attached 
to a vertical shaft, L, which is driven from the 
main-line shafting by the bevel-gearing L'L'; 
and for the purpose of allowing the sink mech 
anism to be put out of operation, when de 
sired, the beam M, which supports the shaft 
and wheel L', is provided with a cam-plate,M', 
so that the teeth of the bevel-wheels can be . 
thrown in and out of gear at pleasure. Thus 
it will be seen that all the vat and sink mech 
anism can be run simultaneously from a single 
line-shaft, or individual sets can be operated 
or thrown out of gear, or a vat or sink mech 
anism can be operated independently of the 
remainder of the plant at pleasure. The agi 
tators in the vats are arranged so that they 
may be turned up or withdrawn from the con 
tents of the vats, when desired, by removing 
bodily the frame C and its connections, the 
side posts, C, of the frame C being removably 
supported in sockets S, secured to the vat A, 
and they, together with the teeth in the sink, 
may be readily detached from their respective 
places of attachment, when required, by re 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
 
239,02? 
45 
vertical shaft, horizontal shaft E, bevel-gears 
L' LP, frame F, beam M, and cam-plate M", 
substantially as described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the shaft E, coun 
ter-shaft F, double slotted frame F, and mech 
anism, substantially as described, for operat 
ing the agitators, of the wedgef, pivoted to a 
lever, and provided with an inclined slot car 
rying one end of the counter-shaft F, substan 
tially as described, whereby the gear-wheels of 
a vat can be disengaged and the rotation of its 
agitators arrested, when desired, without in- 5O 
terfering with the rotation of the agitators in 
the other vats, as specified. 
4. The combination, with the curd-wat A, pro 
vided with an outlet, A', leading into the sink, 
of the sink B, provided with the strainer B', 
agitators D', stirrers K, and mechanism, sub 
stantially as described, whereby the agitators 
and stirrers are revolved, substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination, with the card-vatA, pro 
vided with an outlet, A', leading into the sink, 
of the sink B, provided with the strainer B', 
agitators D', stirrers K, beam M, provided with 
the shipping cam-plate M', and mechanism, 
substantially as described, for revolving the 
agitators and stirrers, whereby said agitators 
and stirrers are simultaneously revolved or the 
agitators only revolved, substantially as de 
scribed. 
55 
Toronto, February 23, A. D. 1880. 
Witnesses: 
A. H. BRINTNEIL. 
GEORGE A. AIRD, 
C. W. BALDWIN. 
5 
O 
moving the bolts e, which secure them to the 
cross-beams D. 
The advantages of my improvements are, that 
the operations of preparing the curds in cheese 
making, now so largely dependent on manual 
labor, is efficiently and rapidly performed by 
machinery in a cheap, clean. and satisfactory 
ae. 
If desired, the vat and agitator can be em 
ployed in creameries for the manufacture of 
butter with advantage, as the agitation caused 
by the paddles is very conducive to the rapid 
formation of butter. 
In operation, after the curds are formed in 
the vats in the usual way, and allowed to stand 
undisturbed a sufficient length of time, and af. 
ter the curds are cut, as usual, the agitators 
are introduced into the mass, and, being placed 
in motion, rapidly induce the congealed curds 
to the consistency required. After this opera 
tion is performed the mass is drawn off into the 
sink through the spout at the end of the vat, or 
by a siphon, if preferred. Here the whey is 
separated from the Solid portion of the mass, 
and passed off through the strainer-well and 
connecting-pipes, the action of the rotating 
teeth, with their spurs, performing the work of 
separation with great efficiency alld rapidity. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with the vat A, of the 
frame C, shafts C, agitators D', pulleys C'C', . 
connecting-rods C, with its cranks, and belt C. 
whereby a rotary motion is imparted to the 
agitators, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the revolving sink 
agitator J, having arms Ji, with teeth K, of the 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239127.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 239,127. 
S. T. WELL MAN. 
Lifting MOt0r. 
Patented March 22, 1881. 
 
WITNESSES 
NVENTOR 
& cat-us 
-ut 
(RNEY 
id:PETERS, Photo-LogRAFHER, washing 
cN, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
SAMUEL. T. WELLMAN, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
LIFTING-MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 239,127, dated March 22, 1881. 
Application filed July 6, 1880. 
(No model.) 
O 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL T. WELLMAN, 
of Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Lifting-Motors; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to motors for derricks, 
cranes, elevators, and the like; and it consists 
in the construction hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents, in lon 
gitudinal section, a device constructed accord 
ing to my invention, with both sections of its 
compound plunger within the chamber or cyl 
inder. Fig. 2 represents the same device with 
the larger section of the compound plunger in 
operation, and Fig. 3 the same with the smaller 
section of the compound plunger in operation. 
In the said drawings, A is a chamber or cyl 
inder, constructed of metal or of any suitable 
material, and of any desired form of cross-sec 
tion, round being preferred. At the lower 
end of said chamber A an inlet, A', for water 
or steam, is provided, and this inlet may be of 
any kind, and provided with any valve appa 
ratus required for governing the entrance and 
escape of water or steam. The cylinder A 
may be supported by any suitable frame 
work, A. 
B is the larger section of the compound 
plunger. It fits tightly within the cylinder A, 
and is driven up by the water or steam enter 
ing at A'. The plunger-section B is hollow, 
and contains within its cavity smaller section 
C of the compound plunger. At the bottom 
of the plunger B is an opening, B, for the 
entrance of water or steam when only the 
smaller section of the plunger is to be em 
ployed. When the larger section B is used 
both sections of the plunger B and Care moved 
together; but when the smaller section C is 
What I claim is 
to be employed alone the larger section B is 
1. In a lifting-motor, the combination, with 
locked down, and the smaller section C moves 
a cylinder having one end provided with an 
up and down within the section B. 
inlet-opening, of two concentric pistons and 
B is a locking device. This locking device 
consists of a ring surrounding the upper end a device for locking the outer piston station 
of the larger section B, and this ring is pro 
vided with projecting lugs, which, by turning, 
are brought beneath lugs or projections on the 
frame A, thus preventing section B from 
rising. 
It will be observed that the outer piston has 
its end, which corresponds to the cylinder end, 
having an inlet-opening, provided with an 
opening in line with said cylinder - opening 
and of greater sectional dimension than the 
latter. The inner piston is adapted to fit over 
said outer piston-opening, and constitutes the 
entire piston area subjected to water-pressure 
in line with the cylinder when said outer pis 
ton is in locked position. 
Obviously the compound plunger or piston, 
instead of being constructed of two sections, 
may be made in three or more sections fit 
ting into each other in the manner here shown, 
and each section should then be constructed 
so that it may be locked down at pleasure, to 
permit the smaller section within it to move. 
The object of my invention thus described 
is to economize water or steam in the employ 
ment of cranes, elevators, or the like. 
Were only the large plunger B employed it 
would take the maximum amount of water or 
steam to raise it, whether the load to be lifted 
were light or heavy. This is wasteful. 
By my invention I am enabled to modify 
the amount of water or steam consumed in 
proportion to the load to be lifted. If the load 
is heavy a greater surface of plunger shall be 
exposed, and in such case the section B is in 
operation. If the load belight a smaller plunger 
will answer, and in such case the section C is 
used and the section Blocked down; and if 
still smaller sections than the section C be de 
sirable, it may be provided and used as already 
sufficiently indicated. 
It matters not how the elevator or crane 
be connected with the plungers of my device. 
They may be directly attached, or the plungers 
may be coupled to compound pulleys or other 
wise, that forming no particular feature of my 
invention. 
75 
85 
go 
95 
OO 
 
2 
239,12? 
ary against that end of the cylinder, the outer with the cylinder when said outer piston is 
piston being provided with an opening in its in locked position, substantially as set forth. 
correspondingend, and adapted, wheninlocked 
3. In a lifting-motor, the combination, with 
position, to have said end free from water-press- a frame-work provided with an in Wardly-pro 
5 ure in line with the cylinder, substantially as jecting lug and a cylinder, of two concentric 
set forth. 
pistons and a locking-ring fitted loosely to 
2. In a lifting-motor, the combination, with the outer cylinder, said ring being provided 
a cylinder having one end provided with an with a slot adapted to register with said lug : 
inlet-opening, of two concentric pistons and when rotated in suitable adjustment, substan 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
ing its corresponding end provided with an to this specification in the presence of two 
opening in line with the cylinder-opening, and subscribing witnesses. 
of greater sectional dimension than the same, 
I5 the inner piston being adapted to fit over said 
outer piston-opening and constitute the entire 
piston area subjected to water-pressure in line 
Io mechanism for locking the outer piston against tially as set forth. 
... that end of the cylinder, the outer piston hav- 
SAMUEL. T. WELLMAN. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. CROWELL, Jr., 
WILLARD FRACKER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239228.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 239,228. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
H. DAWEY, 
Differential Walve Gear of Steam Engines, 
Patented March 22, 88. 
 
 
 
~ 
Z 
N g 
VMZZeeges: 
ITLE 
S 
N NNNN 
 
NNNNNN 
N S 
NS 
NAMA 
peTEs. PTO-Li HoarafhER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
?????ZZ? 
???? 
?Zuez 
'&?re 
. 
????? 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
(No Model.) , 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
H. DAWEY. 
Differential Valve Gear of Steam Engines. 
No. 239,228. 
Patented March 22, 1881. 
x 
??? 
? 
?????? 
??? ? 
NO 
 
r. 
??? 
AZZeafsaf 
%', 
. 
.????? 
 ?????r 
-ZlzZ?? 
 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LithogRAFER, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY DAVEY, OF CfARENDON ROAD, 
LEEDS, COUNTY OF YORK, ENGLAND. 
DIFFERENTIAL VALVE- GEAR OF STEAM-ENGINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 239,228, dated March 22, 1881. 
Application filed January 20, 1881. (No model.) Patented in England July 26, 1880. 
65 
To all phom it may concer?: 
Zen of England, residing at Clarenden Road, 
Leeds, in the county of York, England, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in the 
Differential Valve-Gear of Steam-Engines, (for 
which I have obtained a Patent in Great Brit 
ain, No. 3,070, bearing date the 26th July, 
1880,) of which the following is a specification. 
The differential valve-gear for steam-engines 
which forms the subject of former patents 
granted to me is now largely used; but in or 
der that my present invention may be more 
clearly understood, I will, in the first place, de 
scribe generally the usual form of differential 
gear employed for working the slide-valve of 
a steam-engine. 
A lever termed the differential lever is at 
one end linked to the engine-piston, or to some 
part of the engine moving in time with the 
piston. At its other end the differential lever 
is linked to a piston working in an auxiliary 
cylinder and controlled in its motion by the 
resistance of liquid to a piston in a cataract. 
cylinder. At or about its middle the differen 
tial lever is linked to the main slide, which 
thus receives a differential motion, partly from 
the auxiliary piston, which moves it so as to 
open the steam-port, and partly from the main 
piston, which moves it so as to close the steam 
port. Thus, supposing the main piston to be 
at one end of its stroke, and to be stationary, 
or nearly so, then the auxiliary piston moves 
the slide so as to admit steam to act on the 
main piston, and the main piston, in making 
its stroke, moves back the slide, so as to cut off 
the supply of steam, and it does this the 
sooner the more rapidly it moves, because in 
that case it outruns the auxiliary piston, which 
advances at a rate governed by the cataract, 
tending to open or to keep open the supply-port. 
Now, the object of my present invention 
is to provide means for arresting the move 
ment of the auxiliary piston at any desired 
point of its stroke, so that the slide moved by 
it, while it has a definite lead in advance of 
the motion of the main piston, may remain 
practically stationary during part of that mo 
tion, instead of being rapidly opened and then 
gradually closed. I also provide means for 
compensating inequality of resistance to the 
motion of the main piston in its forward and 
Beit known that I HENRY DAVEY, a citi-backward strokes without having recourse to 
the heavy counter-weights which are often em 
ployed for this purpose, particularly in pump 
ing-engines. I will describe the construction 55 
and arrangement which I adopt for this pur 
pose, referring to the accompanying drawings, 
of which 
Figure I is a longitudinal section of the cyl 
inder and slide of an engine, showing my in 
vention applied thereto, and Fig. 2 is a plan 
of the differential valve-gear of the engine. 
A is the cataract - cylinder, the piston of 
which controls the piston of the auxiliary cyl 
inder B. This piston is linked at Z to one end 
of the differential lever E, the other end, E, of 
which is linked to an arm on a rocking shaft, 
X. This rocking shaft has on it a long lever, 
Y, which is linked to an arm, D, projecting 
down rigid from C, the cross-head of the main 
piston. The differential lever E is, at about 
its middle, linked to G, the rod of the main 
slide M. On the slide-rod G are fixed two ad 
justable stops, K and L, one on each side of a 
stationary abutment, which consists of a brack 
et, H, firmly secured in a fixed position, and 
through which the slide-rod works. 
It is by: 
means of these stops K and L that the move 
ment of the slide is determined, as I will now 
If the differential gear were made in the 
usual way without stops, such as K and L, then 
when the main piston reached the end of its 
stroke, the point F remaining practically sta 
tionary for a time, the point Z could be moved 
its full stroke by the piston of the auxiliary 
cylinder B, and the point G, with the main 
slide linked to it, would consequently make its 
complete stroke, opening fully the steam-port, 
which would thereafter be gradually closed by 
the movement of the point F in time with the 
main piston. Thus the steam-port might be 
fully opened before the commencement of the 
stroke of the main piston, and as the piston 
made its stroke there would be a gradual cut 
of By introducing the stops Kand L a dif. 
ferent result is obtained, as follows: The aux 
iliary piston of B is prevented from making its 
full stroke at once by one or other of the stops 
K or L coming in contact with the abutment 
or bracket H, the slide M nevertheless making 
explain. 
- 
95 
75 
OO 
 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
239?228 
its full stroke. The point F then beginning to 
move in one direction, the lever E for a time 
merely turns on the rod G as a fulcrum, the 
point Z continuing to move with the auxiliary 
piston in the direction opposite to F until Z, 
having completed its stroke and come to rest, 
the continued motion of F is imparted to the 
rod G, closing the steam-port. Thus when the 
main piston is at either extreme of its stroke 
the sequence of operation is as follows: The 
main piston begins to move, and the auxiliary 
piston still continuing to move in time with it, 
the main slide remains stationary, keeping the 
steam-port for a time open. When the auxil 
iary piston has completed its stroke the main 
piston, continuing its stroke, moves back the 
slide, closing the steam-port. 
In order to compensate inequality in the two 
strokes of the main piston I apply a sliding 
plate, N, on the back of the main slide M. 
This plate can be moved to or fro by turning 
a screwed rod, O, by an external hand-wheel, 
P, so as to be made to cover, more or less, 
either of the steam-passages through the slide 
M, and so to throttle the steam-supply while 
the piston is making its lighter stroke, permit 
ting the full supply to be given for the heavier 
stroke. This arrangement is particularly ad 
vantageous when it is applied to the slide of 
the larget or low-pressure cylinder of a com 
pound engine, because the throttling of the 
supply to the one end of the cylinder not only 
reduces the power of the one stroke when less 
power is required, but also insures the reten 
tion of an increased supply of steam for effect 
O 
IS 
2 ? 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
55 
ing the other stroke of the low-pressure piston 
when greater power is required to overcome 
the greater load. 
Having thus described the nature of my in 
vention, and the best means I know of carry 
ing it out in practice, I would have it under 
stood that I make no general claim to differ 
ential valve-gear for steam-engines, as such 
gear has already formed the subject of patents 
and is largely used; but 
I claim 
1. In differential valve-gear for steam-en 
gines, the combination, with a slide-valve 
moved differentially, substantially as de 
scribed of a stationary abutment and adjusta 
ble stops arranged upon the valve-rod on op 
posite sides of said abutment, substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
2. In differential valve-gear for steam-en 
gines, the combination, with the cylinder, pis 
ton, slide-valve and its rod and connecting 
devices, arranged to differentially move the 
slide-valve, of the stops adjustably secured to 
the valve-rod and arranged on opposite sides 
of a stationary abutment, all substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto signed 
my name to this specification, in the presence 
of two subscribing witnesses, this 20th day of 
December, A. D. 1880. 
HENRY DAWEY. 
Witnesses: 
A. V. DoCKERY, 
CHIAS. GILLIARID. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239328.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. HUNT. 
Device for Loading Coal. 
No. 239,328. 
Patented March 29, 1881. 
 
 
- 
 
UNITED STATES. PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. HUNT, OF NEW BRIGHTON, NEW YORK. 
DEVICE FOR LOADING COA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 239,328, dated March 29, 1881. 
Application filed February 7, 1881. (No model.) 
15 
20 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs W. EUNT, of 
New Brighton, county of Richmond, and State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
5 ful Improvement in Devices for Loading Coal, 
which improvement is fully set forth in the foll 
lowing specification and accompanying draw 
lingS. 
The object of my improvement is to provide 
an artificial passage-way or gallery arranged 
in a manner to facilitate the removal of coal 
through apertures in the top or sides when the 
passage-way is covered by or submerged in 
coal, thereby obviating the delay heretofore 
occasioned by shoveling when loading vehi 
cles, &c., such passage-Way or gallery being 
dedicated to the use of dealers in coal. 
Figure 1 represents a longitudinal section 
of Iny artificial passage-way, indicated as he 
ing covered with coal. Fig. 2 represents a 
vertical transverse section through the same, 
shown as supporting an elevated path or rail 
way, E, parallel to said passage-way; Fig. 3, 
a perspective view of the passage-way, Fig. 
4 representing end elevations of a series of 
passages or galleries, T, supporting an elevated 
path or railway, E, arranged transversely to 
said passages. 
My artificial passage-way or gallery is to 
consist of the walls W W, suitably braced by 
the outer walls, B B, and covered by a roof 
or top, R, which latter is provided with aper 
tures A, arranged at suitable distances apart, 
Fig. 3. The apertures A are furnished with 
suitable sluices, gates, or slides, S, Fig. 2, by 
the manipulation of which the apertures may 
be opened or closed and the coal, in its influx 
from the coal-deposit D above the top, readily 
directed into the cart O. Above the tunnel a 
suitable elevated path or railway, E, is ar 
ranged, Figs. 2 and 4, which is traversed by a 
35 
40 
45 
5o 
55 
wheelbarrow or car, C, for conveyance of the 
coal. 
The cart O being placed in position, it is 
but necessary to open the slide S, when the 
coal will by gravity shoot into the cart. This 
operation may be repeated until the coal above 
to top R has been disposed of, and is obvi 
ously a rapid and economical method of load 
ing the cart or vehicle. The coal each side of 
the passage-way and below the openings A 
must necessarily be removed in the ordinary 
manner, or to obviate which earth can be 
thrown up each side of the passage-way as 
high as may be thought advisable. 
It is also apparent that the passage-Way may 
be constructed in a trench, rendering the for 
mer partially below the surface. 
I do not confine myself to the use of a pas 
sage-way consisting of the walls WW BB 
and the top R, as shown, as it is obvious that 
an arched passage-way, or one being a modi 
fication of both, having apertures A and 
sluices or slides S above the top of the cart 
or vehicle to be filled, would equally well an 
swer the purpose intended; nor do I limit my 
self to its use in handling of coal, as such 
passage-way may be appropriated to the load 
ing of minerals, ores, or other material. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
An artificial covered passage-way with open 
ings in the sides or top, intended to be cov 
ered with coal or other material which is to be 
loaded into vehicles through said openings, 
substantially as shown and described. 
C. W. HUNT. 
Witnesses: 
CHS. F. PRENTICE, 
J. G. FREEMAN. 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239429.txt	(Model.) 
F. P. BE UCL.E.R. 
Tire Setter, 
3 Sheets-Sheet , 
No. 239,429. 
Patented March 29, 1881. 
 
 
2 
: (), 
A. 
7 
22 
- - - - s 
Y 2s 
YZ. 
2. 
 
Here AEI 
IRE 2 
assai 
 
 
  
vaSA 
 
WITNESSES: 
gase-as-a- 
INVENTOR: 
BY v(lette's 
1. yelor 
 
N, PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, wash:NGTON, D, C, 
ATTORNEYS, 
8 
   
(Model.) 
es 
F. P. BEU CLER. 
Tire Setter. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 239,429. 
Patented March 29, 1881. 
-Z 7 
- 
Z/ 2. 
III - A.A ..., LILATIII 
ZIN Eri12. R 
arm. A 
III V 
II 
tani 
/ I, Ize 
- Y - 
z 
  
4. 
-- Zs 
& 2/ 
TSSw:ASSWSS 
C 
NS SS 
Nassa 
X SSS 
s \ 
area 
WITNESSES 
-6%areer 
INVENTOR; 
BY ?culus g 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, D : 
(Model.) 
No. 239,429. 
 
F. P. BEUCLER. 
Tire Setter. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented March 29, 1881. 
  
WITNESSES: 
(2%ally/2%-62-zz, 
64%areer 
JNVENTOR: 
6%.7%a/ 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
NPETERs, PHOTO-Lithographer, WASHINGroN, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDRIC P. BEUCLER, OF CHARLESTON, IOW.A. 
TRE-SETTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 289,429, dated March 29, 1881. 
Application filed August 10, 1880. (Model.) 
. 
. 
. 
fication. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDRIC P. BEUCLER, 
of Charleston, in the county of Lee and State 
of Iowa, have invented a new and Improved 
Tire-Setter, of which the following is a speci 
The object of this invention is to facilitate 
the setting of wagon and other tires, and the 
adjustment of felly and spokes. 
The invention consists of a revolving swing 
ing head carrying a central ring, which is pro 
vided with pivoted radial arms that can be 
retracted or extended to suit wheels of vary 
ing diameters, and is vertically pivoted in a 
block that is rocked on a vertically-adjustable 
standard by levers from a horizontal to a ver 
tical plane, and vice versa, whereby a wheel 
on the machine may be plunged into and with 
drawn from a water-tank; and it consists, fur 
ther, of other novel adjusting devices, all of 
which are hereinafter fully described. 
Figure 1 is a plan of the device, partly in 
section. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional elevation 
online w w, Fig. 4. Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional 
elevation on linea ac, Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a trans 
verse section on line y), Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a ver 
tical sectional elevation online 22, Fig. 4. Fig. 
6 is a transverse section online v, Fig. 2. Fig. 
7 is a plan of the clamping device. Fig. 8 is 
a perspective view of the auxiliary lever-bar. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A represents the bed of 
B is a rectangular socket provided with 
bottom flanges, ct, and a? at are bolts passin 
9. 
through said flanges at and holding the socket 
B to the bed A. 
C is the standard of the device, supported 
in the socket B, and extending downward 
into 
the central opening, b, of the bed A. 
Rigidly secured on the top of the standard 
C, and at right angles thereto, is a rectangular 
plate, D, having lugs b'b' extending upward 
from two opposite sides. 
Suspended just above the plate D, on trun 
nions c c', that pivot in the lugs b'b', is a rect 
angular block, E, so pivoted that it may be 
the tire-setter. 
, , , 
. 
. 
. 
" 
turned from a horizontal to a vertical position, 
the trunnions c c' being entered through the 
lugs b b', near the front edges thereof, to per 
mit such turning or swinging of said block E. 
The trunnion c' is extended laterally, and has 
attached thereto a crank, c', for purposes here 
inafter set forth. 
From the center of the block E a shaft, E, 
extends vertically upward, and is held firmly 
in place in block E by a set-screw, E'. Set 
centrally on this shaft E' is the revolving 
Swinging head F, consisting of a hub, d, Sup 
porting a horizontal circular plate, d, and pro 
vided with two opposite side uprights, d' d', 
that support the ring H. Just above the face 
of the plated the shaft E' is bent at right 
angles, and has on its end a roller, E', that 
rests in a vertical plane on the face of said 
plate d', thereby holding the swinging plate 
F down in position, and permitting it to re 
volve with a minimum of friction. 
Projecting radially from the ring Hare sev 
eral lugs,ff, and on the vertical pinsff", 
that pass through the extremities of these lugs 
, the radial arms II are pivoted so as to 
ff 
be capable of being folded or retracted later 
ally, or of being extended at full length to ac 
commodate a smaller or larger wheel. On 
either side of these arms II, near the extremi 
tiesthereof, are staples gg, in which are hooked 
rods I? I, that connect said arms II, so that 
they shall all fold or unfold or retract and ex 
tend together. One interspace between said 
arms II is without arod, I', as shown at I'', to 
permit this folding and unfolding. 
Embracing the uprights d' d', with its op 
positely-hooked ends h h below the ring EI, is 
a rigidly-supporid cross-bar, K, through the 
cene: if which ... a pin, h, on which is piv 
oted the pright 
r K, that extends upward 
through and above the said ring H, and is 
provided, near its to, with several pin-holes 
h'. A wheel, L, being placed horizontally on 
the arms II, with one end of its hub extend 
ing down through the ring H, and with the 
bar K projecting up through the hub, is held 
firmly in place by a clamping device, M, which 
is set over the bar K upon the upper end of 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
 
2 
239,429 
O 
25 
35 
the hub of the said wheel L. Said clamp or 
clamping device M consists of an elongated. 
flat plate, l, having beveled ends, as shown at 
l, and a nearly-central rectangular orifice, l', 
and is provided with a brace or support, In, 
that projects upward and inward from one 
end at an angle of about forty-five degrees, 
and supports in its forked end, on a pivot or 
pin, m, a lever, M, from the extremity of the 
longer arm of which an edge notched ortoothed 
bar, m', is suspended. The orifice l' being 
set over the bar K, and the clamp M on the 
wheel-hub, the short arm of the lever M is 
pinioned to the top of the said bar K by a 
pin, m', that is attached to the clamp M by 
a chain, m'. The long arm of lever M is 
then borne down, with the effect of pressing 
down the clamp-platel upon the wheel-hub, 
and thereby the wheel L firmly upon the ring 
Hand arms II, and then a tooth on the notched 
bar m/ is caught beneath the front beveled 
end of the plate l, and the clamp M and wheel 
L thus held in place. . 
In order to obtain a better leverage on the 
lever M? a bar, M', having on one end a cross 
bar, o, provided with hooked ends o'o', is fixed 
or clamped on said lever M', as shown in Fig. 
2, the said cross-baro being furnished with the 
hooked ends o' o', that the bar M" may be 
more readily and quickly applied, though but 
one end, o', is engaged at a time. 
In the horizontal position shown in Figs. 2, 
3, a wheel, L, is in position for setting the tire 
and spokes. 
The construction and arrangement of the 
adjusting device, whereby the block E, swing 
ing head F, ring and arms HI, and all thereto 
connected parts are swung from a horizontal 
to a vertical plane, as shown in Fig. 5,whereby 
a wheel, L, is swung so that its tire may be 
cooled and shrunk by immersion in a tank 
of water, are as follows: From the front of the 
plate D an arm, r, having a downward and 
rearward bent tip, r", projects laterally, and 
on this tip r" a crooked lever, N, is secured by 
a pin, '', passing through said tip r", below 
said lever N, and by an anti-friction ring, r", 
set around said tip of above said lever N. 
The perforated end of the short arm of said 
lever N is connected with the perforated end 
of the crank c" by a link, N, whose lower end 
hooks into the perforated end of the lever N, 
and whose upper end is bent at right angles 
and entered into the perforated end of crank 
c', and is held therein by a burr, r", so that 
when the handle or long arm of the lever N 
is brought upward to the front, as shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, the block E and all the parts 
supported thereon and above it are held in the 
positions shown in said Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, the 
ring and arms HIbeing in a horizontal plane. 
By moving the long arm of the lever N out 
ward and upward and around the bent end of 
the arm , and into the nearly vertical position 
shown in Fig. 5, the block E, with all the parts 
above it, is swung from the horizontal to the 
vertical position shown in Fig. 5, so that the 
ends of the arms I and the rim and tire of a 
wheel, L, may diplinto a water-trough, O, for 
the purpose of shrinking the tire on the said 
wheel; and when the parts are in this position 
the swinging head F, and all its upper connec 
tions, may be revolved in a vertical plane on 
the shaft E", so that the wheel-tire may be 
evenly cooled and shrunk in every part. 
On the bed A a hooked and forked plate, 
P, is secured by bolt or screw s, and in the 
hooks or lugs of this plate P the bent lever Q 
is fulcrumed, as clearly shown in Fig. 3, the 
end of the short arm of said lever Q being pro 
jected down through a slot, t, in the bed A, 
and made to encircle the rearward-projecting 
stud no of the base of the standard C, so that 
by downward pressure on the long arm of said 
lever Q the standard C, and all the parts sup 
ported upon it, may be elevated or depressed, 
so as to bring the ring and arms H. I at a con 
venient elevation for the operator. This ver. 
tical movement of the standard Cisfacilitated. 
by the roller u, set transversely in the project 
ing lugs of the socket B, against which roller 
at said standard C bears as it moves, and the 
vertical plate R, rising from the bed A, stead 
ies the movement of the standard C by afford 
ing a bearing for the end of the stud v. When 
the standard C and its supported parts are ele 
vated or depressed, as desired, they may be 
secured at such level by engaging the long 
arm of the lever Q in the notched plate T, 
that inclines upward from the bed A. 
If desired, the bar M?" may be applied to the 
lever Q to obtain a better leverage, as shown 
in Fig. 3. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent 
1. The combination, with the rocking block 
E, provided with vertical shaft E', of the ro 
tating head F, ring H, provided with radial 
lugs ff, and pivoted connected radial arms 
II, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with the clamping de 
vice and uprights d", the rotating head F, 
and ring and arms HI, of the hooked cross 
bar K, and upright bar K, pivoted thereto, 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
3. The combination, with the swinging head 
F, ring and arms H I, and bars KK, of the 
clamping device M and pin m', substantially 
as herein shown and described. 
4. In a tire-setter, the combination, with the 
rocking block E and swinging head F, of the 
shaft E", provided with a roller, E", bearing on 
the plated of said swinging head F, substan 
tially as herein shown and described, whereby 
said swinging head may be revolved with a 
minimum of friction, as set forth. 
5. The combination, with a tire-setter, of the 
clamping device M, supports K, consisting of 
- 
75 
90 
95 
TOC) 
IO 
IIS 
I2OT 
(25 
So 
55 
65 
 
239,429 
3 
pin r", link N', and burr r", substantially 
as herein shown and described, whereby the Io 
said block and its supported parts are verti 
cally and horizontally adjusted, as set forth. 
FREDRIC. P. BEUCLER, 
Witnesses: 
H. H. CRoss, 
W. M. BASSETT. 
lever M', plate l, having beveled ends l and 
opening l', and provided with inclined brace 
m, pivot m', and toothed bar im', substantially 
as herein shown and described. 
6. In a tire-setter, the combination, with the 
plate D, provided with bent arm r, and rock 
ing block E, provided with trunnions c c' and 
crank c', of the crooked lever N, ring ', 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239530.txt	(Model.) 
J. A. MORS MAN. 
Sulky Plow. 
No. 239,530. 
Patented March 29, 1881. 
 
N. Peifers, PtolTaraper, WASligo, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. MORSMAN, OF CENTRALIA, ILLINOIs. 
SUKY PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 239,580, dated March 29, 1881. 
Application filed January 4, 1881. (Model.) 
Io 
-. 
25 
fication. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN A. MoRSMAN, of 
Centralia, in the county of Marion, and in the 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Sulky-Plows; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawing, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, making a part of this speci 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in sulky-plows; and it has for its objects 
to provide certain means whereby one wheel 
of the plow may run in the furrow and the 
plow at the same time be kept level, to pro 
vide certain means for adjustably attaching 
the tongue to the frame, and to provide for 
balancing the plow, as more fully hereinafter 
specified. These objects I attain by the appa 
ratus illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ing, which represents a perspective view, 
showing my improved plow complete. 
The letter A indicates the main frame of the 
plow, which is constructed of bar metal bent 
into an approximately rectangular shape, as 
indicated. At one side of said frame are 
formed extensions B and C by bending the 
metal, which extensions serve as a seat for the 
3o tongue D, which is secured to such extensions 
by means of the hooked bolts E. 
The letters F. G indicate the wheels upon 
which the plow is mounted. These wheels are 
of unequal diameter, so that one wheel can 
run in the furrow formed by the plowshare, 
and the level of the machine may at the same 
time be maintained. The axle of the larger 
wheel is rigidly secured to one end of a bent 
transverse bar, H, which is secured to the 
main frame by means of bolts or otherwise. 
The axle of the other wheel is secured to the 
lower end of a lever, I, which is fulcrumed at 
K to the transverse bar H. The said lever is 
slotted, as indicated by the letter L, through 
45 which slot passes a toothed segment, M, which 
is pivoted at N to the main frame. The lever 
is provided with a dog or pawl, O, which is 
adapted to engage the teeth of the segment, 
whereby the lever may be adjusted to elevate 
5o or depress the frame at one side, the said dog 
or pawl being connected by means of a rod, P, 
35 
40 
55 
with a hand-lever, R., by which it may be op. 
erated. 
The letter S indicates a lever fulcrumed at 
T to the transverse bar H, which is connected 
at its rear end by means of an adjustable seg 
ment, U, with a link, V, which connects with 
the plow-beam W. The said plow-beam is 
supported by a frame, A', swiveled to a frame, 
B', secured to the main frame. The forward 
end of the plow-beam connects, by means of a 
link, C, with a lever, D, fulcrumed at E to 
the main frame. The said lever, at its forward. 
end, is connected to the curved lever S by 
means of links F, and at its rear extends 
backward, so as to be within convenient reach 
of the driver. 
The letter G' indicates a curved arm, pivot 
ed to the forward end of the lever S, and ex 
tending through a slot, H', in the lever D'. 
The said arm is provided with recesses I at 
its lower edge, with which a pin in said lever 
is adapted to engage, and is released by a 
pawl or dog, K', which is operated by means 
of a rod and lever, L', whereby the plow- 75 
beam may be elevated or depressed and held 
in any desired position. The forward end of 
the lever S is provided with a weight or coun 
terpoise, M', to counterbalance the weight of 
the plowshare and permit its position to be 8o 
shifted conveniently. 
In raising the plow from the ground it will 
be perceived that owing to the peculiar sys 
tem of levers the forward end of the plow 
beam will be lifted in advance of the rear end, 
thus elevating the point of the plowshare be 
fore it is withdrawn from the ground, mate 
rially assisting the operation of Withdrawal. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a sulky-plow, of the 
plow-beam, with the frame A' and link C for 
supporting it, the lever D', connecting with 
said link and fulcrumed upon the main frame, 95 x 
the link F, connecting with the forward end 
of said lever, which is extended in advance of 
its fulcrum, and the counter-balance M', said 
members being constructed and adapted for 
operation substantially as described. 
2. The combination, in a sulky-plow, of the 
plow-beam, supported at a point between its 
9o 
Oo 
3. 
239,530 
forward end and the plowshare, with the piv 
oted lever D', fulcrumed upon the main frame, 
a link connecting said lever with the forward 
end of the plow-beam, a notched arm, G', con 
5 nected with the forward end of the lever by a 
link, the pawl K, for engaging the notches of 
said arm, and the counter-balance M', all con 
structed substantially as described. 
3. The combination, in a sulky-plow, of the 
Io main frame with the pivoted lever S, the rod 
or link V, connecting the rear end of said le. 
ver with the plow-beam, the counter-balance 
M at the forward end of the lever, the notched 
arm G', the lever D', carrying a pawl adapted 
I5 to engage the notches of said notched arm, 
the link F, the forward end of the lever D', 
with the lever S and with the notched arm, 
and a link connecting the lever carrying the 
pawl with the forward end of the plow-beam, 
2O substantially as described. 
4. The combination, in a sulky-plow, of the 
frame A and the cross-bar H with the plow 
beam W, its supporting-frame A', hung upon 
the swinging frame B', the rod or link V, the 
adjustable segment U, pivoted lever S, link F, 25 
notched arm G', pivoted lever D', carrying a 
pawl, K, the counter-balance M', and the link 
C', connecting the lever carrying the pawl with 
the forward end of the plow-beam, said mem 
bers being constructed and organized for op-3o 
eration substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 20th day of 
December, 1880. 
JOHN A. MORSMAN, 
Witnesses: 
JAMES SWATMAN, 
JAS. B. SANDERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239630.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 
239 
>zzzzzzzzzzz 
 
 
 
 
  
 
J. J. WALTER, 
Burner for Hydrocarbon Furnaces, 
Patented April 5, 1881. 
 
SS Z S 
 
zIt 
26 2 
2 2 2 2 
>s; 
N. PETERS, Photo-LITHOGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB J. WALTER, OF INDIAN CREEK, PENNSYLVANIA. 
BURNER FOR HYDRO CARBON-FURNACES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 239,630, dated April 5, 1881, 
Application filed April 30, 1880. 
(No model.) 
IO 
5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JACOB J. WALTER, of 
Indian Creek, in the county of McKean and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain. 
new and useful Improvements in Burners for 
Hydrocarbon-Furnaces, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Hydrocarbon liquids-such, for example, as 
petroleum-when employed for heating pur 
poses, are commonly introduced or injected 
into a furnace by means of a jet of super 
heated steam, and the object to be attained in 
such burners or injecting devices is to effect 
the thorough commingling of the hydrocarbon 
liquid and the steam, so that they are injected 
together in the form of vapor or spray, and 
are readily and thoroughly consumed. 
My invention consists in the combination, 
with a chamber or shell having a tubular 
socket contracted at its inner end, of a pipe 
for the introduction of hydrocarbon liquid 
passing through said socket, and having its 
outer surface fitting closely within the inner 
surface of the contracted portion thereof, one 
of the fitting-surfaces being constructed or 
provided with a series of spiral grooves, 
through which the steam enters in fine jets to 
commingle with the hydrocarbon liquid. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a longitudinal section through a 
burner or injecting device embodying my in 
vention. Fig. 2, represents a cross-section 
upon the line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents a 
longitudinal section of the tubular socket or 
nozzle of a similar burner, in which the spiral 
grooves are formed upon the inner surface of 
said socket or nozzle; and Fig. 4 represents a 
transverse section upon the dotted line yy, 
Fig. 3, with the pipe for the hydrocarbon liq 
uid inserted therein. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A designates the shell or chamber of the 
burner, which is represented as provided with 
an open mouth, A', which serves to spread the 
flame. From the end of the shell or chamber 
extends a tubular socket, B, which might be 
made in the same piece with the shell or cham 
ber, but which is here represented as con 
structed in a cap-piece or cover, B, secured to 
the shell or chamber by means of a screw 
- 
55 
65 
thread, a. The inner end, b, of the tubular 
socket B is contracted for a short distance 
from its mouth, so as to form a nozzle, and its 
outer end is closed by a plug, c. 
D designates a nozzle, to which the inlet 
pipe for steam may be attached. 
C desiguates a pipe for the introduction of 
the hydrocarbon liquid, arranged within the 
tubular socket B, and secured in place, in this 
instance, by being screwed into the plug c, and 
adjusted so that its inner end is in proximity 
to the inner end of the said tubular socket. 
Between the exterior of said pipe and the side 
of the tubular socket is an annular duct for 
the circulation of steam, except at the con 
tracted end portion b of the tubular socket, 
which is of a size to fit closely around the pipe 
C. Between the fitting-surfaces of the pipe 
C and the nozzle b-in the present instance up 
on the exterior of the end portion of the pipe 
C-are a number of grooves, d, which form 
channels or passages for dividing the steam 
and causing it to enter the shell or chamber 
A. in small jets, which enable it to more thor 
oughly commingle with the hydrocarbon liq 
uid entering through the pipe C; and to enable 
this result to be more effectually accomplished 
the said grooves extend spirally upon the pipe 
C, so that the atoms of steam have imparted 8o 
to them a spiral motion, or rather a forward 
motion in a spiral direction. 
The grooves d may be more or less in num 
ber, and may be of considerable size or very 
minute, as is found most desirable in practice. 
Instead of the spiral grooves d being in the 
exterior of the pipe C, they might be formed . 
in the interior of the socket or nozzle b, as 
shown in Figs. 3 and 4, and in that case the 
end portion of the pipe C will be perfectly 
plain and smooth, as seen in Fig. 4. 
Various hydrocarbon liquids-such as petro 
leum or the products of gas manufacture, such 
as tar-may be employed, and the steam em 
ployed should be superheated to a greater or 
less degree. 
When the valves which control the admis 
sion of steam and hydrocarbon fluid are opened 
the steam passing around the pipe C and out 
through the grooves d into the shell or cham 
ber serves, in a measure, the purpose of an in 
jectorin drawing in the hydrocarboniliquid, and 
85 
95 
75 
OO . 
25 
3C 
35 
4O 
45 
So 
 
S. 
239,630 
as both issue into the shell or chamber they 
become thoroughly mingled together and form 
a spray or vapor which is very combustible. 
In the operation of my burner the numerous 
Currents or jets of steam issuing from the 
grooves din a spiral direction form, in point of 
fact, a hollow tube the walls of which are mov 
ing spirally, and hence the hydrocarbon liquid 
issuing through the pipe C cannot drop down 
or escape from this tube of steam without be 
coming mingled with the steam. Where the 
Steam issues in separate straight jets much of 
the hydrocarbon liquid or spray escapes be 
tween the streams or jets of steam, and hence 
the advantage of giving said streams or jets 
a spiral direction. 
I am aware that it is not new to employ two 
concentric nozzles, one inside the other, to in 
ject liquid by means of steam. I am also aware 
that it is not new to introduce oil into a retort 
by means of a small chamber through which 
the steam enters, which is placed just below 
the induction-passage for the oil, and is pro 
vided with spiral ribs for giving the entering 
Steam a Whirling motion. I am also aware that 
it is not new to injectoilinto a furnace by means 
of a nozzle or pipe which is concentric with 
and passes through a cap, in the end of which 
are numerous holes or openings converging 
25 
toward the mouth or end of the oil pipe or 
nozzle, and therefore I do not claim any of 
these as of my invention. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a burner for hydrocarbons, the com 
bination of a shell or chamber having a tubul 
lar socket extending from it and contracted at 
its inner end, a pipe for the introduction of 
hydrocarbon liquid passing through said sock 
et, and having its outer surface fitting within 
the inner surface of the contracted portion 
thereof, one of the so fitting surfaces being 
constructed or provided with a series of spiral 
grooves for the escape of steam, whereby the 
currents or jets of steam are impelled in a 
spiral direction around the pipe through which 
the liquid enters, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. The combination of the shell or chamber 
A, the tubular socket B, comprising a con 
tracted portion, b, the pipe C, fitting the said 
contracted portion b, one of said fitting-sur 
faces being provided with spiral grooves d, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
JACOB J. WALTER, 
Witnesses: 
A. R. SLOAN, 
J. J. BERNARD. 
35 
40 
45 
SO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239731.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
- 
G. s. CLEMENTS & D. S. LIGHT, 
Railroad Rail Fastening. 
No. 239,731 
Patented April 5, 1881. 
Ab26/zeyyes, 
996a, 2-4. 
As a 6-4- 
. . 
Zverezovs ; 
22 
Tz/4, a 
N, ETSRs. PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHER, washington, D. c. 
 
O 
IS 
 
 
 
 
 
To all chon it may concert: 
Be it known that we, GEORGES.CLEMENTs 
and DANIEL S. LIGI IT, of Mill Creek, in the 
county of Huntingdon and State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented a new and Improved 
Joint-Bar for Railroad-liails; and we hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact account thereof, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, making part of 
this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, showing the 
ends of two rails joined with our device. Fig. 
2 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the rail 
and tie or joint bar. IFigs. 3, 4, alld 5 are de 
tails to be referred to. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
means for securely fastening the ends of track 
rails of railroads; and our invention consists 
in a joint - covering device composed of two 
pieces of rolled metal clasping the ends of con 
tiguous rails, and secured by a key which gives 
a lateral pressure, and is, in turn, secured by 
spikes driven in offsets provided for the pur 
pose, as hereinafter more fully described and 
claimed. 
In the said drawings, A A' represent two 
track-rails, the ends of which abut against 
each other in the usual manner. A plate of 
steel or iron, B, is bent to conform to the shape 
of the rail, starting from beneath the T on 
one side, passing down and over the foot of 
the rail, and beneath the rail to the opposite 
edge of the foot, when it is turned or lapped 
25 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFIC 
GEORGE S. CLEMENTS AND DANIEL S. LIGBT, OF MILL CREEK, 
RAROAD - RAL FASTENING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 239,731, dated April 5, 
Application filed January 6, 1881. (No mode1.) 
over, as seen at a. a. Another pla 
or iron, I, passes from beneath the e 
T of the rail, down over the foot ( 
and its edge passes beneath the lap 
b b pass through the rails and thro 
B I, and fasten them securely tog 
plate B, when the lap is inade, an 
left for a longitudinal key, E, wh 
driven in, crowds the edges of the 
gether by its lateral pressure and h 
firmly. In the bight of the lap in 
cut recesses e e, to receive spikes to 
plates. In the side of the key E a 
recesses i i, whicl, when the key 
home, register with recesses e e, and 
spikes secure both the plate and 
Where plate B passes around the e 
foot of the rail recesses o o are cut 
spikes to add to the security of the 
Having thus described our inven 
we claim as new, and desire to sect 
ters Patent, is 
The improved rail joint fastening 
of plate B, clasping the rails on th 
bottom, and provided with lapa, a 
engaging in lapa, in combination W 
said lap and key being provided wit 
for the purpose set forth. 
GEO. S. CLE 
IDANIEL S. L 
HENRY L. WILSON, 
JAMES COZIZENS. 
Witnesses : 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239831.txt	(No Model.) 
S 
OLIVER, 
J 
Spark Arrester, 
No. 239,831. 
Patented April 5, 1881. 
 
N, PETERs, PHOTO-LithoGRAPHER, WASHNGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN S. OLIVER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO HAM. 
LINE Q. FRENCH, OF SAME PLACE. 
'SPARK, AR RESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 239,831, dated April 5, 1881. 
Application filed June 2, 1880. 
(No model.) 
5. 
55 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN S. OLIVER, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Spark-Arresters, of which the following is 
a specification. 
Myinvention consists in a certain novel com 
bination, with a smoke-stack or chimney, of a 
surrounding jacket or cylinder, an imperforate 
deflector for deflecting sparks, ashes, or other 
solid matter down into said jacket or cylin 
der, and self-closing doors through which the 
accumulation of matter in said jacket or cyl 
inder may be withdrawn, and in a novel pro 
cess of using exhaust-steam or a current of 
air to clean out the deposit from a smoke-stack 
or chimney. 
The accompanying drawing represents a cen 
tral longitudinal section of a stack or chimney 
embodying my invention. 
A represents the body of a steam boiler or 
generator of cylindrical form, such as is used 
on locomotives. 
B designates a smoke-stack or chimney, 
which communicates through the body A of 
the boiler with the furnace, whereby the steam 
is generated. This stack or chimney may be 
made of sheet-iron, and is preferably of cy 
lindric form. It may be secured to the body 
A of the boiler by rivets passing through the 
latter, and through a flange, a, at the base of 
the stack or chimney, or otherwise. 
C designates a cap arranged above the open 
top of the stack or chimney, and supported by 
arms or standards extending from the stack or 
chimney, or in any other appropriate manner. 
It is of a conical or pyramidal form, and its 
bottom edge laps beyond, and is shown as 
about on a level with the top of the stack or 
chimney. This cap forms a deflector, and not 
a sieve, like the spark - arrester caps of ordi 
nary form, and hence is made of sheet metal or 
other suitable imperforate material. 
D designates a cylinder or jacket, made of 
sheet metal or other suitable material, sur 
rounding the stack or chimney B, and mounted 
upon and secured to the body A of the boiler 
by rivets or otherwise. About opposite the 
top of the stack or chimney B and the cap C 
- 
the cylinder orjacket is provided with a cham 
ber, E, consisting of two reversed frusta of 
cones or pyramids, the upper corresponding 
and being proximate to the cap C. Above this 
chamber is a delivery-flue, G, which is prefer 
ably of cylindric form and of about the same 
diametrical measurement as the stack or chim 
ney B. 
It will be observed that the lower edge of 
the conical cap C is coincident, or nearly coin 
cident, with the upper edge of the smoke 
stack or chimney B, and that the chamber E 
has an unobstructed communication with the 
said stack or chimney. By this construction 
and arrangement the products of combustion, 
together with the cinders, sparks, and ashes, 
are all deflected downward, and all heavier 
matters, such as sparks or cinders, will fall 
into the cylinder orjacket D, while the lighter 
smoke and gases will rise around the cap C 
and escape through the flue G. The products 
of combustion, with unconsumed particles of 
fuel and fine ashes, ascend through the stack 
or chimney B, and, coming in contact with the 
cap C, are deflected outward and downward. 
The smoke thence passes upward between the 
exterior of the cap C and the chamber E, as 
represented by the arrows delineated in bold 
outline, and escapes through the delivery-flue 
G. The sparks and other unconsumed solid 
products of combustion and the ashes are, how 
ever, by the deflection at the cap C, thrown 
sufficiently out of the current or draft of the 
ascending smoke to enable their gravity to , 
act and cause them to fall to the bottom of the 
cylinder or jacket D, as shown by the arrows 
delineated in dotted outline. This cylinder or 
jacket is shown as provided on opposite sides 
with doors E, which may be opened to facili 
tate the removal of the matter which collects 
in the cylinder orjacket. These doors are 
hinged at one side, and held closed by springs 
c, wound around the pintles of their hinges. 
They may be connected to devices within the 
reach of the engineer, so that he can open 
them from time to time, without leaving the 
cab, to let the accumulated solid matter escape. 
The stack or chimney may be inclined or 
provided with inclines at the base, so as to 
75 
go 
95 
IO 
25 
45 
 
239, sai 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination of the smoke-stack or 
chimney B, the imperforate cap C, the jacket. I5 
or cylinder D, and the doors E, having springs 
c, all constructed and arranged substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
JOHN S. OLIVER, 
Witnesses: 
H. Q. FRENCH, 
EDWIN H. BROWN. 
form a chute opposite the doors El, facilitat 
ing the ejectment of said matter. If the ex 
haust-steam is allowed to escape against the 
imperforate cap or deflector C, when the doors 
Hare open, the cap or deflector will direct it 
downwardly, so as to cause it to blow through 
the doors and clear out the solid matter col 
lected in the cylinder or jacket D. 
It will be seen that by my invention I produce 
a spark-arrester which, while simple and cheap 
in construction, is very effective in operation. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US239931.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
T. R. BULLOCK. 
Cue Bridge for Billiard Tables. 
No. 239,931. 
Patented April 12, 1881. 
  
 
4/zvesses: 
6-646- 
Inventor 
SA 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS R. BULLOCK, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
s 
CUE - BRIDGE FOR BILLIARD-TABLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 239,931, dated April 12, 1881. 
Application filed March 2, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS R. BULLOCK, 
of Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Cue 
Bridges for Billiard-Tables, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide the 
handle of a cue-bridge With a stop, so as to 
prevent the handle or bridge, so called, 
from sliding through the common hook or 
holder secured to the under side of the table, 
to retain the handle of the bridge when not in 
use by the players making shots. As the butt 
end portion of the handle rests in the hook, 
the opposite end, having secured thereto the 
notched bridge, rests upon the floorbeneath the 
Thus, being supported on an 
billiard-table. 
incline, the handle is very liable to be pushed 
inward too far, so as to fall upon the floor, to 
the discomfort and annoyance of the player; 
and, again, when the bridge is placed flat upon 
the billiard-table-orfarinward, so the butt-end 
of the handle is inside of the cushion and rests 
upon the surface or cloth of the table, it is not 
readily grasped by the hand, whereas by means 
of my invention the stop, applied to the 
handle a short distance from the end, would 
rest upon the table, and thereby retain the end 
portion of the handle a sufficient distance 
above the same to permit it to be quickly and 
easily grasped by the hand of the player to 
IO 
25 
move the bridge at any time; and any inven 
tion consists in the construction, combination, 
and arrangement of the said stop with the 35 
bridge-handle, as hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and set forth. 
The figure represents a perspective view of 
a billiard-cue bridge having its handle pro 
vided with my invention. 
A represents the notched bridge, secured to 
the smaller end of the tapering handle B, of 
usual construction; and E represents the stop 
applied to the said handle so as to remain six 
or eight inches from the butt or outer end, 
more or less, as desired. This stop E may be 
made of any suitable material; but I prefer a 
ring of elastic or common rubber, which may 
be slid upon the handle, as shown, it yielding 
sufficiently to fit various sizes of handles and so 
retain itself in position without further means . 
of fastening at any desired point thereon, as 
may suit the convenience and serve the pur 
poses contemplated. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
The combination of the stop-ring E with a 
billiard-cue-bridge handle, substantially in the 
manner described and shown, as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
55 
45 
THOMAS R. BULLOCK. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN B. MARTIN, 
M. F. OSLER. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240032.txt	(No Model.) , 
A. F. LIMBRIGHT. 
Hold Back, 
" 
. 
- 
No. 240,032. 
Patented April 12, 1881. 
 
 
- NY 
 
 
22. 2 ae-22%ea 
10- 
4-year7272.2%z-23%z 
a 
N. PETERS, Photo-LithogRAPHER, wash NGTON, D.C. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTUS F. LIMBRIGHT, OF FLAT ROCK, MICHIGAN. 
HOLDBACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,032, dated April 12, 1881. 
Application filed October 18, 1880. (No model.) 
O 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUSTUS F. LIM 
BRIGHT, of Flat Rock, in the county of Wayne 
and State of Michigan, have invented an Im 
provement in Holdback Attachments for Ve 
hicles and Harnesses, of which the following 
is a specification, 
The nature of my invention relates to new 
and useful Improvements in the construction 
of attachments to the shafts of wagons, and to 
harnesses, ordinarily termed holdbacks, by . 
means of which buckles, snaps, and the appli 
ances now in common use for the purposes, 
and which are clumsy and at times very un 
handy, are rendered unnecessary and useless. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction of an attachment to be secured to 
the shafts of a vehicle, and in combination 
therewith a T-headed-loop attachment to the 
holdback-straps of a harness, as more fully 
hereinafter described. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved attachments as in operation. Fig. 2 
is a longitudinal central section of the attach 
ment for the shafts of a vehicle. Fig. 3 is a 
perspective of the T-headed loop detached. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, A represents the 
section of one of the shafts of a one-horse 
vehicle, to which the shell B is securely at 
tached by screws, or in any other suitable and 
proper manner. In the front of this shell 
there is a long slot, a terminating in a trans 
verse slot, b. The interior of the shell is pro 
vided, one on each side, with two curved 
ledges, c, commencing at the transverse slot, 
IS 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
and terminating in half-round depressions d. 
A curved spring, e, is secured in the recess in 
the bottom of the shell by means of the screw 
which holds the rear end of the shell to the 
shaft, C is a T-headed loop, through which 
the holdback-strap of the harness is secured. 
In practice the T-head of the loop is in 
serted in the transverse slot in the shell, and 
slides along the curved ledges until the ends 
of the head drop into the depressions d. The 
shaft of the loop passes through the longitudi 
nal slot in the face of the shell, and, being at 
tached to the holdback-strap of the harness, 
the holdback device is complete, the spring e 
holding the T-head in place and preventing it 
from rattling. 
It will be observed that in my construction 
the T-head of the loop C can be removed and 
inserted in its position in the shell without 
turning said head, and that the cutting away 
of a part of said head, as in the ordinary con 
struction, to allow the head to be inserted in 
a recess, is dispensed with. 
What I claim as my invention is- . 
The combination, with the T-headed loop 
C, of the shell B, provided with the longitudi 
nal slot a terminating in the transverse slot 
b, opposite curved ledges c, having curved 
recesses d, and spring e, whereby the T-head 
of the loop can be inserted or removed from 
its seat without turning it on its axis, substan 
tially as described. 
Witnesses: 
- 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
CHARLES J. HUNT. 
A. F. LIMBRIGHT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240136.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 240,136. 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
G. IBRUGGER. 
Cupola Furna, 00, 
Patented April 12, 1881, 
  
N N 
ama-ram-m-m-m-m-m-m-m-m-m-m-m-m-m-m 
WITNESSES: 
(2- -  2. 
INVENTOR 
BY 
ATTORNEY 
G, IBRUGGER. 
Cupola Furna, 00, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented April 12, 1881. 
(No Model.) 
No. 240,136. 
S. N 
 
N SS 
SN w R 
N. 
N New 
N 
N 
S 
3.SSS S. R 
$ & Sws 
NHS N 
R 
N 
N 
R 
N 
N SM 
N 
SSN 
s 
s 
Y 
Q 
N 
 
 
a K% 22 
y 
2 
 
 
------------------------- 
---mm-m-m-m-m-m-m-m-m-r-rm-- 
--- -------------------- 
Sl-N- 
INVENTOR 
WITNESSES: 
- 2- 
262. 
ATTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAV IBRUGGER, OF NORDEN, PRUSSIA, GERMANY. 
CUPO LA FURNA CE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,136, dated April 12, 1881. 
Application filed May 18, 1880. 
(No model.). 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
resident of the city of Norden, in the King 
dom of Prussia, German Empire, have in 
vented Improvements in Cupola-Furnaces, of 
which the following is a specification. 
In a former application for a patent for a cu 
pola-furnace, which has been filed by me under 
date of March 25, 1880, Ihave described a cupo 
la-furnace in which a separate collecting trough 
or Well is arranged below the furnace and con 
nected there with by a central bottom opening 
or channel, through which the fire-gases are 
drawn down into the well and there burned, 
S0 that the heat of the same can be utilized for 
melting and uniting Wrought-iron with the 
molten pig-iron from the furnace. 
By a number of experiments I have found 
that the heat generated by the combustion of 
the gases in the collecting trough or well may 
be still further utilized for various purposes 
by conducting them off to the point of use. I 
have further discovered that it is not abso 
lutely necessary to employ a single bottom 
opening, but that, on the contrary, better re 
sults are obtained when several connecting 
openings or channels leading from the furnace 
to the well below the same are used. The rel 
ative position of the well to the shaft of the 
furnace is also immaterial, as it may be either 
directly below or in front or sidewise of the 
same, as described.. 
instead of conducting the gases of combus 
tion from the shaft of the furnace to the well 
through the opening through which the melt 
ing pig-iron passes, I arrange, besides, sepa 
rate channels for the escape of the gases, as 
repeated experiments have demonstrated that 
a greater number of connecting-channels be 
tween the furnace and well prevents the top 
smoke of the furnace and admits the more per 
fect ultilization of the fire-gases in the well. 
As there is no top smoke the furnace can be 
built considerably higher and charged with a 
greater quantity of material, so that the ca 
pacity of the furnace is greatly increased. 
This invention consists more especially of 
a cupola-furnace which is connected by one or 
more bottom openings with a collecting trough 
or well arranged below or in front of the fur 
nace, the well being provided with a discharge 
opening, a bridge for supplying the Wrought 
Be it known that I, GUSTAV IBRgGER, a iron, and a side opening for conducting off the 
gaseous products of combustion for further 
USe. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1 
and 2 represent, respectively, a vertical cen 
tral and a vertical longitudinal section of my 
improved cupola-furnace, in which similar let 
ters of reference indicate corresponding parts. 
A in the drawings represents the collect 
ing trough or well, which in this case forms a 
chamber in which the combustion of the gases 
escaping from the shaft of the furnace A takes 
place. This well or combustion-chamber A 
is either directly below or in front of the fur 
nace proper, it being separated from the latter 
by an inclined arch, B. At the lowest point 
of the inclined arch B is a vertical connecting 
opening, b, which extends from an arched re 
cess or niche, a, downward into the Well A. 
The molten pig-iron and the slag pass from 
this channel b into the well A. Besides the 
connecting-channel b, one or more additional 
channels, d, arearranged in the arch B, through 
which the gases are drawn down into the well 
A. The hot air required for the proper com 
bustion of the gases in the well A is supplied 
from the main trunk of the air-blast by a valved 
tube,f, and a connecting-channel, g, as shown 
clearly in Fig. 1. 
The well or chamber of combustion, A, is 
provided with an inclined bottom and an open 
ing, through which the molten metal is drawn 
off. A side opening, h, serves for conducting 
off the gases of combustion, so that they can 
be ultized for other purposes, as, for instance, 
for melting metal in a furnace, D, or in cruci 
bles E, (shown in Fig. 2,) or for heating up air 
for drying purposes, heating malleable iron 
preparatory to tempering, and for other suit 
able purposes. In most cases it is advisable 
to provide a proper supply of heated air, as 
the same is more favorable for the combustion 
of the gases and for a more complete utiliza 
tion of their heat in the different applications 
which are made of the same. 
In the combustion-chamber A a fire-bridge, 
l, is arranged, upon which the Wrought-iron 
scrap is placed, so as to be properly heated up 
preparatory to its being fed into the molten 
pig-iron collected in the well A. The latter 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
- 
240,36 
2. The combination of a cupola-furnacehav 
is gradually united with the wrought-iron with 
ing an arched inclined botton), with a connect 
out impairing the fluidity of the same. 
ing-opening for the metal and one or more open- 20 
The advantage of this construction of cupola 
ings or channels for the gases of combustion, 
furnace consists, mainly, in the fact that a con 
Stinuous working of the same can be substituted with a collecting well or chamber of combus 
for the intermittent working heretofore em- tion below the furnace, said well being pro. 
vided with an inclined fire-bridge and a side 
ployed. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim opening or flue, substantially as specified. 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent- 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
1. A cupola-furnace having an arched in- to this specification in the presence of two sub 
clined bottom, the latter being provided with scribing witnesses. 
a discharge-opening at its lowermost point, 
and with one or more openings or channels for 
the fire-gases, in combination with a collect 
I5 ing well or chamber of combustion below or in 
front of the cupola-furnace, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
FRANK C. ZIMMERMAN, 
CARL FEHLERT. 
25 
Witnesses: 
GUSTAV IBRUGGER. 
Io 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240236.txt	(No Model.) 
Insulating an 
9, 
P. B. DEL ANY., 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
d Protecting Electrical Conductors. 
Patented April 19, 1881. 
 
N. PETERS, Phro-LTHOGRAPHER, washington, D.c. 
r 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Insulating and Protecting Electrical Conductors. 
Patented April 19, 1881. 
No. 24 O,236. 
P. B., DEL ANY., 
  
 
 
 
 
 
NSANANNAMSMSNNYMSYNYMSNSNYSN 
P 
W 
A 
7-aaaaaaaaa-Zavaaraz-ZYAZYZZYZZYZZYZZ 
Claraterary SNCACAAce 
... 
..., 
.'; 
s Sna 
ba 
M 
2 
2 
ea 
2 Y 
s 
-TR- E. D FI 
Rei N-T III - 
N, PETERS, Photo-LTHoGRAPHER, washington, D.C., 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Insulating and Protecting Electrical Conductors. 
Patented April 19, 1881. 
No. 240,236. 
P. B. DEL ANY. 
C 
 
 
Zzzazz 
Zzzle/2Zage 
2% 2 0-27% 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
(No Model.) 
Insulating and Protecting Electrical Conductors. 
Patented April 19, 1881. 
No. 240,236. 
P. B. DEL ANY. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
.*<<?<<s<<<<<<<<<gzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz 
?,u 
397 
zz- ( aer 
Zzz 
Zezzotz ZZezoza 
2z, 
% 
<<<<<<<<<<<<<s<<2zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz) 
No.? 
? 
No.~ 
\?, 
``,` 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< | || , 
??R]_^ 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
PATRICK B. DELANY., 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
INSULATING AND PROTECTING ELECTR CAL CONDUCTORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,286, dated April 19, 1881. 
Application filed February 2, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all chon it inctly conce' : 
Be it known that I, PATRICK B. DELANY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Insulating and Protect 
ing Electrical Conductors; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters or figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
The object of this invention is to produce, 
for either underground or overground use, a 
telegraph-cable which will be practically un 
affected by variations of atmospheric or earth 
temperature, and in which the conductor's will 
be protected from the effects of moisture and 
electrical induction. 
Many inventions have been inade looking to 
the production of a cable of this character, but 
experience has proven them to be but partially 
successful. In some of these cables the coln 
ducting-wires have been inclosed in tubes and 
surrounded by a fusilole resinous insulating 
material, which is melted and forced into the 
tubes around the wires. Such insulating ma 
terial has been found to be quite easily affected 
by even slight changes of temperature, and the 
tubes are, in consequence, Warped and often 
broken, and the wires brought in contact with 
each other or the tube, and thus rendered use 
less as conductors. Most of such insulating 
materials also undergo chemical decompositiou 
in a short tiane, and permit or promote the con 
densation of moisture upon the Wires. In 
other cables the wires depend for protection 
and insulation upon fibrous vegetable usulat 
ors, which soon decay, and in one the conduct 
ors are inclosed in a tube kept filled with oil, 
which has been found to soon decompose and 
deleteriously affect the wires. 
In the endeavor, which I believe to be en 
tirely successful, to overcome the objections to 
the old styles of cables, my invention consists, 
mainly, in protecting the electrical concluctors 
from moisture by conducting heat, by means 
of a suitable medium, in sufficiently close prox 
imity to said conductors to dissipate all moist 
ure in their immediate vicinity and prevent 
its condensation upon them. 
My invention also consists in a telegraph 
cable composed of an outer and a separate in 
ner tube, forming two chambers, in one of 
which are arranged the electrical conductors, 
properly supported and insulated, while the 
other clhamber serves as a passage for a suita 
ble lucating mediuim, such as hot air, hot wa 
ter, or steam, this second part of my invention 
being a practical application of the first part. 
My invention further consists in a telegraph 
cable composed of a protecting-tube, in which 
are stretched the conducting-wires, Surrounded 
by dry pulverized talc. This substance is not 
liable to be affected by variations of atmos 
pheric or earth temperature, and therefore the 
cable will not be warped, twisted, or 'uptured 
by contractions and expalusions of the insulat 
It is extremely unliable to 
ing material. 
chemical change, and, when properly packed, 
renails well in that condition, and is not lia 
ble to crumble or be injuriously affected by 
any thermic or hygrometric conditions which 
it is likely to encounter. Talc is plentiful and 
easily accessible, there being extensive mines 
or veins of it in various parts of the country. 
It is therefore cheap. 
My invention also consists in a telegraphic 
cable composed of an outer and an inner tube, 
between which are arranged the electrical 
conductors, packed in a suitable insulating 
material, while the illner tube is left to serve 
as a passage for a heating medium. This 
heating medium, while serving the other pur 
poses herein before set forth, also, by its action 
upon the insulating material, causes said ma 
terial to have some little degree of electrical 
} conductivity, just about sufficient to relieve 
the wires of overstrain from electrical currents, 
and prevent them in a great degree from af 
fecting one another by induction. Induction 
has been deemed by electricians to be caused 
by an electrical strain of the inducing body 
having no outlet or escape, and it is also known 
that even solid glass becomes in Some degree 
a conductor when heated. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
view, partly in section, of a portion of a tele 
graph-cable constructed according to my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the cable. 
75 
95 
LOC) 
IS 
35 
45 
 
2 
240,236 
O 
25 
35. 
45 
So 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged view, mainly in section, 
of a portion of the cable. Fig. 4 is a view of 
a templet for supporting the wires and inner 
tube of a cable constructed as shown in the 
preceding figures. Fig. 5 is a view, mainly in 
section, and Fig. 6 a cross-sectional view, of a 
modified form of the cable. Fig. 7 is a view 
of an open frame or spider for supporting the 
inner tube of a cable constructed as shown in 
Fig. 5. Fig. Sillustrates a mode of connecting 
a branch cable with the form of cable illustrated 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. Fig. 9 illustrates the junc 
tion of a branch with the form of cable shown 
in Fig. 5. Fig. 10 is a perspective view, illus 
trating a mode of laying an overground cable 
constructed according to my invention. Fig. 
11 is a view of a portion of a cable in process 
of construction, and of an apparatus used for 
introducing the insulating material. Fig. 12 
is a perspective view of an apparatus used in 
ramming the pulverized talc material in the 
tube. Fig. 13 is a plan view, partly in section, 
illustrating the mode of ramming the insulat 
ing material in the tube. Fig. 14 is a view of 
the follower. Fig. 15 is a view of the yolke for 
connecting the tube with the frame of the ram 
ming-machine. Fig. 16 is a sectional view, il 
lustrating a cable similar to that shown in Fig. 
1, but with the packed talc omitted; Fig. 17, 
a partially-sectional view of the wires not Sur 
rounded by the packed talc, and a heat-con 
ducting tube, arranged in a tunnel. Fig. 1S 
is a cross-section of the tunnel. 
Referring to Fig. 1, the letter A indicates 
an outer tube, which may be made of any suit 
able material, preferably of cast-iron, and in 
short lengths, connected by leaded joints, like 
ordinary gas-mains. 
B is the inner tube, which may be also made 
of any suitable material which is practically 
impervious to air and water, but for which, by 
preference, I use an iron pipe, in sections, coll 
nected by suitable couplings, an inner tube of, 
say, one inch diameter being placed in an outer 
tube of, say, six inches diameter. These pro 
portions may, however, be varied as desired. 
C designates the conducting - wires, which 
are stretched in the space between the inner 
and Outer tubes. 
Dis the insulating material which surrounds 
the inner tube and the wires, and is tightly 
packed between the two tubes by apparatus, 
which will be hereinafter described, or by any 
other suitable means. 
The letter E designates the templets which 
maintain the tubes and wires in their proper 
relative positions, each of said templets being 
a disk, of porcelain or other non-conductor of 
electricity, of a diameter to fit and move snugly 
within the outer tube, and provided with a cen 
tral aperture, e, for the passage of the inter 
tube, and a surrounding series of apertures, e", 
for the passage of the wires. 
The various elements of the cable are manu 
factured or prepared in the usual manner; but 
the cable as a whole, as composed of these ele 
ments, is made as it is laid or arranged for use, 
and in substantially the manner described as 
follows: 
Supposing an underground cable is to be 
laid, a trench is dug of the desired depth-Say 
two or three feet-and on the bottom of this 
trench are laid in order the lengths or sections 
of the outer tube, these sections being sepa 
lated from each other by a suitable space for 
convenience in working-say, for instance, a 
suitable number of sections are laid to form a 
mile of the cable. I then pass through all 
these Sections a somewhat greater length, pref. 
erably of the iron pipe, which is to form the 
inner tube. I then pass through the sections 
the predetermined number of wires which are 
toform the electrical conductors. Ample rootn 
should be left at the initial end of the trench 
for convenience in working-that is, about a 
rod should at first be left vacant from the point 
where the cable is to begin. The inner tube 
and wires having been passed through the 
Outer tube-sections, Idraw these wires and tube 
Solne distance beyond the initial section, and 
then string upon said wires and tube a suffi 
cient number of the templets E for use in the 
length of cable to be presently constructed 
that is, one templet for each outer tube-sec 
tion, though more may be used if desired. 
The wires being passed through properly-co 
incident apertures of the templets, the initial 
section of the outer tube is then moved along 
in the trench to the place it is to finally occupy, 
and all save one of the templets which have 
been strung upon the wires aid inlier tube are 
forced through the initial section of the outer 
tube and moved along the wires in advance of 
said section, so as to be out of the way of sub 
sequent operations. I then Secure the wires 
and inner tube in any suitable mannel', so that 
they cannot be drawn through the apertures 
of the first templet-that is, the one which 
has not been passed through the initial section 
of the outer tube-leaving a sufficient length 
of wires and inner tube projecting through 
said templet for convenience in making con 
nections. The said templet is then placed so 
as to close the end of the initial outer tube 
section, and there secured by ally suitable 
means-say, for instance, by having a suitable 
bar secured to its outer face, which will project 
radially beyond the tube-Wall; or this first 
templet may have a rim to fit against the end 
edge of the tube. 
I now have the parts referred to arranged 
as partially shown in Fig. 11, and one of the 
templets which has been passed through should 
be moved up toward the mouth of the initial 
outer tube-section, as shown in Said figure, 
this templet being supported by a shoe, f, at 
a little distance from the mouth of the Outer 
tube-section, to bring its apertures in line with 
those of the templet in the opposite end of 
said tube-section, in order that the wires and 
inner tube may be held straight. The initial 
outer tube-section is then ready to receive the 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
If 5 
I 25 
fd 
r 
N. 
5 
d 
O 
5 
k 
25 
h 
240,236 
3. 
insulating material which is to be packed with 
in it and surround the wires and inner tube 
respectively. This insulating material, being 
coarsely powdered, is to be blown in by the 
apparatus G, (shown in Fig. 11) in which figure 
G' is a case, in which is mounted a fan operated 
by a crank, g, and from this case leads an 
eduction-tube, g, at an intermediate point of 
which is connected a hopper, G', while to the 
end of said eduction-tube is connected a hose, 
g. The end of this hose being introduced into 
the tube-section nearly the full length of said 
section, the powdered insulating material, hav 
ing been previously heated to expel moisture, 
is placed in the hopper and the fall operated, 
when the said powdered material will beforced 
snugly into the tube, the hose being gradually 
withdrawn as the filling proceeds, When the 
tube-section has been properly filled-say, to 
within three or four inches, or as near as practi 
cable to its mouth-the lose is entirely with 
drawn, and the templet which had been placed 
upon the shoe f is forced into the mouth of 
the section, and said templet and the insulat 
ing material are then rammed in by means of 
the apparatus shown in Figs. 12, 13, and 14, 
or any other suitable means. 
Referring to the apparatus illustrated ill 
these figures, the letter H designates a hollow 
follower composed of two longitudinal semi 
cylindrical sections, l h, provided with heavy 
head flanges hf and ears h, which are held to 
gether by suitable bolts when the parts are to 
gether. This hollow follower is placed around 
the wires and inner tube in advance of the 
tube-section, and its smaller end introduced 
into the mouth of the section and against the 
margin of the templet which is in front of the 
insulating material. In this position the fol 
lower is ready to be operated upon by the rain 
ming-machine shown in Fig. 12. This ma 
chine consists of a frame, I, adapted to sit 
upon the surface of the ground, and provided 
with downward-projecting portions I", adapted 
to extend down into the trench. On the inner 
sides of these downward-projecting portions 
are arranged the ramming-bars i, moving in 
suitable guides it, and provided on their outer 
surfaces with teeth, which engage the Worms 
l, mounted on shafts l', these shafts having 
fixed upon them worm-Wheels l, which engage 
with the worms if on vertical shafts l', these 
vertical shafts being provided with worm 
wheels, which engage with worms on the mo 
tive shaft M, which is provided with suitable 
cranks. The machine is arranged, by block 
ing or otherwise, so that the Outer ends of the 
bars i will bear against opposite sides of the 
head of the follower H, as shown in Fig. 13, 
the follower-head being preferably provided 
with sockets to receive the ends of said bars. 
The yoke N (shown in Fig. 15) is placed around 
the end of the tube-section, behind its collar, 
as shown, and connected with the frame of the 
machine by the rods 1, and the machine is 
then operated by turning the cranks of shaft 
M, the bars advancing and driving the fol 
lower H in until the insulating material is 
packed as tightly as desired. The ramming 
being completed, the apparatus and appliances 
used therefor are removed, an additional tube 
Section is moved up, its end placed in the col 
lar of the rammed section, and the joint leaded 
in the ordinary manner, as shown in Fig. 1. 
It is then filled and rammed, as was the first 
section, and the operation is the same for all 
succeeding sections. 
Any suitable apparatus may be used for fill 
ing and ramming the sections without depart 
ing from my invention. 
The length of trench dug and number of tube 
Sections laid to operate upon at any particular 
time depends entirely upon convenience. 
In Order to guard against interruption of 
the insulation by accident, the inner tube may 
be surrounded by a sheath of mill-board or 
pasteboard if desire(l. 
The form of cable the construction of whicl 
has now been described may be laid overground 
as well as unclergl'ound-as, for instance, along 
the line of railways-and in such case may be 
conducted across Streams, ravines, and mal'shes 
by the trestle-work which supports the track 
and bridges. In laying this style of cable over 
ground I pre?erably arrange it in a housing, O, 
as shown in Fig. 10, this housing being sup 
ported on short posts 0, the height of which 
may vary in accordance with the topography 
of the route, in order to keep the cable as nearly 
on a level as is found desirable. The housing 
O should have a proper transverse capacity to 
permit the cable to be surrounded by an insu 
lating material similar to that within it, the 
cable being supported centrally within the 
housing by any suitable means preparatory to 
the insulating material being placed around 
it. Suitable cross-partitions might be placed 
at intervals in the housing, with apertures for 
the passage of the cable, the insulating mate 
rial being filled in between said partitions and 
the roof of said housing, or one side of the 
roof after Ward placed in position. 
While it is probably preferable to protect 
the overground cable by the housing, substan 
tially as described, it is not absolutely neces 
sary, as the cable may be supported by suita 
ble brackets or slings on posts, trestle-Work, 
or bridges, and painted to protect the outer 
tube from the Weather. 
The cable, either overground or underground, 
being in readiness for use, a current of hot wa 
ter, steam, or hot air is to be forced through the 
inner tube, and will, by the heat which it im 
parts, effectually dissipate all moisture, which 
is otherwise liable to collect by condensation 
upon the wires and tubes, said wires and tubes 
being always maintained in their relative po 
sitions and the wires properly insulated, owing 
to the non-susceptibility of the insulating ma 
terial to chemical change or to be affected by 
variation of temperature. 
The entire cable may have branches con 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
SO 
55 
6o 
65 
7 o 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
13O 
4 
240,236 
5 
O 
25 
45 
SO 
SS 
particularly requires to be protected by a hous 
nected with it in any suitable manner--as, for 
ing and surrounding insulating material, to 
instance, as shown in Fig. 8, where the letter 
prevent loss of heat by radiation, as in this 
B indicates a T-joint inserted in the inner 
case the heating medium is next to the Outer 
tube, and a branch tube, B, is connected with 
said joint and leads through a neck, A', pro 
tube, while in the former case radiation is al 
most entirely prevented by the packed pulver 
jecting from the side of the outer tube. To this 
neck a branch outer tube may be connected 
ized talc which surrounds the inner tube. 
In Fig. 9 is illustrated the mode of making 
and constructed in the same manner as de 
junction for a branch of cable constructed ac 
scribed for the main cable. In order to prop 
cording to Fig. 5. Tjoints are used in both 
erly support the main inner tube at the coln 
pipes, aud, an elongated templet, E', with side 
mencing of the construction of the branch 
passages for the branch wires, is preferred. 
cable, templets should be placed, as shown, in 
The wires used in both the modifications of 
the main outer tube, near each side of the junc 
the cable may be naked, but I prefer to lave 
tion of the branch, and these templets, in con 
them provided with an insulating coating of 
junction with another, whiclh is placed in the 
cotton, kerite, or some other approved insul 
neck A', serve to support the branching wires 
lator before being embedded in the mineral in 
where they bend to change direction. Ordi 
nary Tjoints may also be used for forming 
the tubes. I do not confine myself to any ar 
ticular forms of joints or couplings, as it is 
the junction of branches with the outer tube, 
obvious that the various forms in use may be 
and two branches may lead in opposite direc 
used as well with my tubes as elsewhere. 
tions from the main cable if desired, the ordi 
By means of suitable joints or junction 
nary four-Way joint being used in such cases. 
pieces branches may be run to the Surface 
In the modification illustrated in Fig. 5 I re 
from underground pipes for establishing test 
verse the relative positions of the electrical 
boxes at proper points. 
conductors and the heating medium. In this 
modification the sections of the outer tubing 
The inner tube, when metallic, in both forms 
are joined together in the same manner as 
of cable may be used as an electrical con 
ductor for sending either reversed or constant 
shown in Fig. 1, but the inner tube, B, is rela 
tively much larger than the inner tube shown 
currents, which will counteract the effect of 
induction between the wires, or it may be 
in said Fig. 1, in order that it may have suffi. 
grounded at such distances as may be found 
cient capacity to contain the properly-sepa 
desirable for the purpose of destroying induc 
rated electrical conductors C. The inner tube, 
B, is composed of short lengths of either iron 
tion. 
or earthen ware tubing, having collars for form 
In Fig. 1 the letter q indicates wires con 
ing joints in the ordinary manner, and should 
necting the inner and outer tubes, which is 
equivalent to grounding, of course, when the 
be arranged to break joints with the outer tube, 
outer tube is in contact with the ground; but 
so that in constructing the cable the end of the 
in an overground cable the said wires should 
inner tube will project outward beyond the end 
pass through the outer tube and to the ground. 
of the last laid section of the outer tube. This 
is for convenience in filling in and ramming 
I wish it to be understood that I may use a 
cable composed simply of a tube containing 
the insulating material in the inner tube, this 
filling and ramming being performed with ob 
the conductors packed in powdered talc, with 
out the heating-tube, and without departing 
vious modifications of the apparatus hereto 
from my invention; or I may arrange the 
fore described. The templets for the inside of 
wires or conductors without the surrounding 
tube B' are simply disks, of porcelain or other 
rigid insulating material, pierced with aper. 
packed mineral in any suitable inclosure or 
passage-way, and arrange also, in or adjacent 
tures for the passage of the wires. The tube 
to said passage-way, a conducting passage or 
B is supported centrally within the outer tube, 
tube for a heating medium-as, for instance, 
A, by ineans of open frames or Spiders P, con 
sisting of bands p, having lugs p' projecting 
the Wires, Without the surrounding packed 
mineral, may be properly supported through a 
outward therefron, and of such length as to 
permit said spiders or open frames to fit within 
tunnel or covered trench, or inclosed viaduct, 
through which is arranged a pipe or passage 
the outer tube. A sufficient number of these 
for conducting a heating medium. In Figs. 
spiders, and also of the templets, must be 
passed over the wires at the commencement of 
17 and 18 the letter R, indicates the wall of 
the tunnel, C the conducting-wires, and B a 
the construction, and in laying down the tube 
tube or pipe for conducting hot air, hot Water, 
sections for use one of the smaller sections 
should be placed in each large section, in order 
Of Stean. 
to have them conveniently near each other 
A cable may be constructed as shown in 
when required. The outer tube having an in 
either Figs. 1 or 5, with the packed mineral 
otmitted, in which case the wires, properly in 
ner diameter of six inches, the inner tube may 
sulated, will be surrounded by hot air, in direct 
have an external diameter of about four or five 
inclues, the intervening space forming the pas 
contact with them. This form is shown in 
Fig. 16. 
sage of the heating medium. This modifica 
I am aware that powdered glass, silicious 
tion of the cable may be laid overground, as 
well as the form illustrated in Fig. 1, but more stones, and asbestus have been used to pack 
7 O 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
ICS 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
I30 
d 
240,236 
O 
tubular telegraph-cables, and I do not claim 
any of those substances. Powdered glass and 
stones are good conductors of heat, and would 
permit a radiation very disadvantageous to 
my heated cable, while asbestus will not re 
main in a packed condition except under con 
tinuous pressure. 
What I claim is 
1. The method herein described of protect 
ing electrical conductors from moisture, the 
same consisting in conducting heat by means 
of a suitable medium in proximity to said con 
ductors, whereby moisture will be dissipated 
in the neighborhood of, and prevented from 
condensing upon, said conductors, Substan 
tially as described. 
2. A telegraph-gable composed of a protect 
ing-tube, in which are arranged the conducting 
wires, closely surrounded by pulverized talc, 
which is packed within said tube and closely 
around said wires. 
Witnesses: 
B. W. FERGUSON, 
ED. SLATER. 
. . 
5 
3. A telegraph-cable composed of an inner 
and a separate outer tube, forming two cham 
bers, one of said chambers containing the con 
ducting-wires packed in a suitable insulating 
material, and the other being left vacant to 
serve as a conductor for a heating medium, 
substantially as described. 
4. A telegraph-cable composed of an outer 
and a separate inner tube, between which are 
arranged the conducting-wires packed in a 
suitable insulating material, while the inner 
tube is left to serve as a passage for a heating 
medium, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
PATRICK. B. DELANY. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240336.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
P. P. PRATT, 
Portable Cigarette Machine. 
No. 240,336. 
Patented April 19, 1881. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PARLEY P. PRATT, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
PORTABLE CIGARETTE-MACH NE. 
SRECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,836, dated April 19, 1881. 
Application filed February 1, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
5 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PARLEY P. PRATT, of 
Columbus, county of Franklin, State of Ohio, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Portable Devices for Rolling and Filling 
Cigarettes, of which the following is a full and 
exact description. 
My invention relates to a portable means of 
rolling and filling cigarette-papers, the device 
consisting of a stem or mandrel upon which to 
roll the wrapper into tubular form, and which 
afterward serves as a rammer for the compres 
sion of the tobacco; an outer casing to sustain 
the wrapper while being filled, and a tubular 
mouth-piece serving to clamp the end of the 
wrapper in the mouth of the casing, to keep 
the wrapper open and to permit the supplying 
of tobacco thereto. 
The invention also consists in forming the 
sleeve with a beveled end, whereby it is adapt 
ed to take up the tobacco readily, in providing 
the mandrel with a pen-socket, and in the 
method of forming a cigarette with the afore 
said device. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents my improved device in shape for 
carrying in the pocket; Fig. 2, a similar view, 
but with the outer cylinder and sleeve in sec 
tion; Fig. 3, a view of the outer cylinder and 
the sleeve, as in Fig. 1, with the central stem 
or mandrel withdrawn; Fig. 4, the central 
stem or mandrel; Fig. 5, a view illustrating 
the manner of forming the wrapper into a tube; 
and Fig. 6, a longitudinal central section of 
35 the outer cylinder, sleeve, and wrapper, show 
ing the manner of filling the cigarette and 
compressing the tobacco. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
cheap and convenient device for forming cigar 
ettes which may be carried in the pocket, and 
which may, if desirable, be adapted to serve 
as a pen-holder or pencil. To this end I con 
struct the device in the manner represented in 
the drawings, in which 
A represents an outer tubular casing or cyl 
inder; B, a short tubular sleeve fitting the 
Inouth of said casing or cylinder, and C a cen 
tral mandrel or stem of cylindrical form, said 
parts being adapted to fit successively one 
5o Within another, as represented in Figs.1 and 
2, whereby the device is rendered very com 
pact. . 
45 
40 
When a cigarette is to be formed, the cen 
tral stem or mandrel, C, and the sleeve B are 
withdrawn from the outer cylinder or casing, 5. 
the sleeve being allowed to remain upon the 
stem or mandrel, as indicated in Fig. 5. A 
wrapper, D, is then applied to the stem or 
mandrel, the edge of one of its ends lapping 
over or lying upon the end of the sleeve, and 6. 
is rolled into the form of a tube or cylinder. 
When tlhus rolled into tubular form the Wrap 
per may be moistened along its edge to cause 
such edge to adhere to the body, after which 
the wrapper still upon the maindrel is intro 
duced into the outer cylinder or casing until 
its outer end is clasped or clamped firmly be 
tween the inner wall of the cylinder or casing 
and the outer face of the sleeve, as shown in 
Fig. 6, and the mandrel is then withdrawn. 
As indicated more clearly in Fig. 3, the end 
of the sleeve B is cut off at an angle, thus 
adapting it to scoop up the tobacco with which 
the wrapper is to be filled. The wrapper hav 
ing been rolled into shape and clasped or se 
cured within the outer cylinder, as above de 
scribed, the tobacco is taken up by the bev 
eled end of the sleeve and allowed to fall into 
the wrapper within the casing or cylinder, arid 
when a proper quantity has been thus col 
lected the stem or mandre O is inserted 
through the sleeve, as shown in Fig. 6, and 
the tobacco properly compressed thereby, this 
operation being repeated as often as necessary. 
When the wrapper is properly filled and the 
tobacco rendered sufficiently compact the stem 
or mandrel and the sleeve are withdrawn, and 
the completed cigarette removed from.the cas 
ing or cylinder, ready for use. 
In order to render the implement further 
useful and convenient, the central stem or 
mandrel C, may be provided with a pen-socket, 
E, and thus adapted for use as a pen-holder, 
or it may be furnished with a pencil. In this 
way the device, while occupying but little or 
no more space than an ordinary pocket pen 
case or pencil, may be made to possess the 
usefulness of the same, together with that of a 
cigarette-former. 
Flaving described my invention, I claim 
1. A portable device for forming cigarettes 
consisting of a mandrel upon which to roll the 
Wrapper, a casing to support the Wrapper 
While being filled, and a tubular mouth-piece or 
95 
IOc 
75 
9o 
240,336 
sleeve to clamp the wrapper in the mouth of 
the casing and permit insertion of tobacco. 
2. The tubular mouth-piece B, adapted, in 
connection with the mandrel, to support the 
wrapper while the latter is being rolled into 
cylindrical form, and having its end beveled 
to facilitate taking up tobacco. 
3. In combination with a tubular casing to 
sustain a cigarette-Wrapper, a tubular mouth 
piece having a scoop-shaped end to take up 
tobacco and deliver it into the Wrapper. 
4. A portable pocket implement consisting 
of a casing to sustain a cigarette-Wrapper and 
a stem or mandrel adapted both to compress 
; the tobacco within said casing and to receive 
and carry a Writing-point, whereby the device 
is caused to serve both as a cigarette-former 
and as a writing-instrument. 
5. The herein-described method of forming 
cigarettes, consisting in rolling the wrapper 
upon the end of a tube into cylindrical form, 
inserting the wrapper so formed into a sus 
taining-casing and there clamping its end, 
supplying tobaccothrough the tube, and finally 
compacting the tobacco to the desired degree. 25 
PARLEY P. PRATT, 
Witnesses: 
THEO. H. BECK, 
JNO. J. JOYCE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240436.txt	M. W. MARSDEN. 
Patented April 19, 1881. 
Spool. 
. 
(No Model.) 
No. 240,436. 
   
 
 
7%. 
I 
 
N.PETERs, Photo-uTHoGRAPHER, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARK W. MARSDEN, OF CONNELLSVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SPOOL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,436, dated April 19, 1881. 
Application filed February 1, 1881. (No model.) 
r 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARK W. MARSDEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Con 
nellsville, in the county of Fayette and State of 
5 Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Spools; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
Io pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters or figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
I5 spools and bobbins for sewing-threads; and it 
consists in such spools and bobbins constructed 
of paper-pulp and asbestus compressed into 
the shape of a spool by means of suitable dies, 
and in the dies AA, plungers B and B', cyl 
2o inder C, guide D, and press-blocks EE, and in 
the combination and arrangement of the parts, 
- as hereinafter more fully described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a like view with sec 
25 tion A removed. Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional 
view. Fig. 4 is a detached view of section A'. 
Fig. 5 is a detached view of plunger B'. Fig. 
6 is a similar view of plunger B, showing op 
eration; and Fig. 7 is a view of a series of dies. 
3o A represents a die formed in sections, the 
parts a, a being designed to mold the cylinder of 
the spool, and the more concave parts, bb, to 
stamp out the wheels thereof. The section A 
has cast solid therewith the pins d d, which 
35 are designed to fit, in practice, in the orifices 
e e in section A', to hold the sections rigidly 
together. 
B is a plunger, rigidly secured to the side 
plate, f, and having provided therein the hori 
The guide D has rigidly secured thereto or 
cast solid there with the perforated cylinder 
C, and it is adjustably supported and guided 
by the guide-rods b l'. These guide-rods are 
45 secured to the plunger-plate f, and project 
through orifices provided in the guide, and are 
provided with the heads ele'. 
The plungers B and B are actuated by com 
pression applied to the blocks E. E. 
So The pulp is inserted in the openings pro 
4o Zontal orifice af. 
a 
r 
 
65 
7o 
A gloss is produced upon the spool by com- 75 
vided in the dies AA, and the plungers B and 
B are then forced home by pressure applied 
to the press-blocks EE, and as these dies are 
arranged together in plates, comprising a large 
series thereof, as shown, a large number of 55 
spools are thus formed at each successive op 
eration thereof. 
The perforated cylinder C is provided with 
the small transverse orifices shown, to prevent 
the escape of moisture from the pulp when un- 6o 
der compression, and thus to avoid injury to 
the outside of the spool; and in practice it is 
withdrawn before the plungers are removed, 
to prevent the breaking or fracture of the edge 
of the central orifice of the spool. . 
In the process of constructing or stampling 
out the spools from pulp, as aforesaid, I em 
ploy a number of dies, as shown in Fig. 7, pro 
vided in suitable bed-plates, the plates being 
arranged to disconnect sectionally. 
The pulp may be colored, to obviate the ne 
cessity of staining or painting the spools, or 
the spools may be colored in the manner which 
ordinarily obtains in their construction. 
pression, similar to that produced by the pro 
cess of calendering; and a small quantity of 
asbestus is also thoroughly intermingled with 
the pulp, to prevent combustion thereof, which 
cannot be accomplished with the Wooden spool. 8o 
The naume of the manufacturer, number of 
the thread, its color, quality, and the quantity 
contained on each spool are engraved or raised 
on each die or set of dies for each spool, and 
thereby impressed on each spool as manufac- 85 
tured. 
My spool is designed to supersede the ordi 
nary wooden spool and bobbin, and will effect a 
great saving in material and labor, and there 
by greatly economize the cost of thread pro- go 
ducts for domestic or other purposes. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The die A, formed in sections a C and con 
cave parts b b, in combination with plungers B 95 
and B, substantially as shown and described. 
2. The plunger B, in combination with guide 
D, side plate,f, having therein the horizontal 
orifice a?, and blocks E. E., substantially as 
shown and described. 
O9 
2 
240,436 
3. A spool or bobbin made of asbestus and 
pulp, to prevent combustion thereof, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
4. The plunger B, in combination with guide 
5 D, perforated cylinder C, and die A, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
5. The plunger B, in combination with guide 
D and plunger B, substantially as shown, and 
for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in to 
presence of two witnesses. 
MARK WORSNOP MARSDEN. 
Witnesses: 
B. F. FEAR, 
WM. WANCE, 
y 
s - 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240536.txt	Device for Converting Vibrating into Rotary Motion. 
Patented April 26, 1881. 
No. 240,536. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
s 
 
 
 
  
  
s N 2 a 2A 
N27 2 
Fitz dy 
EIlllllllll-Q 
t 
O 
 
WitNesses: 
2-2 4 6-4. 
2.76.42. 
iNVENTOR: 
%2a44. 
... 
P. PEAR TREE, 
Device for Converting Vibrating into Rotary Motion. 
No. 240,536. 
Patented April 26, 1881. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
 
  
 
 
o o 
3 2 
EE 
EE 
rtz 
ISS 2 a 
24 S B 
s 
 
 
 
S 
VASS 
- A S2% 
Sat  
3 sheets-sheet 3. 
Device for Converting Vibrating into Rotary Motion. 
Patented April 26, 1881. 
No. 240,536. 
P. PEAR TREE, 
, 
- 
 
 
W. 
242 s S s 
w 
a 
y 
WITNEstes: 
(2-2-2-zaa -6 i? a 
Ama-2 %r7%- 
INVENTOR: 
2-&- 2evizzes. 
4 -/-/-i \, a 6 
N. PETERS, Photo-liriographE, wasteron, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER PEARTREE, OF COHOES, ASSIGNOR TO WARREN T. KELLOGG, OF 
LANSINGBURG, NEW YORK. 
DEVICE FOR CONVERTING WIBRATING INTO ROTARY MOTION. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,536, dated April 26, 1881. 
Application filed July 29, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER PEARTREE, of 
the city of Cohoes, in the county of Albany 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
5 Improvements in Devices for Converting Wi 
brating into Rotary Motion, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, Fig. 2 a plan, 
1o Fig. 3 a section at the line & 2 in Figs. 1 and 
4, and Fig. 4 a partial section at the line y) in 
Fig. 3, all of a device embodying one form of 
this invention. Fig. 5 is a side elevation, Fig. 
6 a section at the line aca in Figs. 5 and 7, and 
15 Fig. 7 a section at the line w w in Fig. 6, of a 
device which embodies a modification of the 
same invention. Fig. 8 is a side elevation, 
Fig. 9 a section at the line v in Figs. 8 and 
10, and Fig. 10 a section at the line u u in Fig. 
9, all of a device that embodies another modi 
fication of my said invention. 
Similar parts are marked by like letters in 
the different figures. 
This invention consists of certain improved 
25 devices, hereinafter described and claimed, for 
communicating rotary motion to a wheel from 
a vibrating arm or lever, and is especially suit. 
able for turning a windlass, rotary pump, fly 
wheel gearing of light machinery, or a rotary 
fan or blower, by hand or foot power applied 
intermittingly to a lever or treadle. 
Rotary motion has been heretofore commu 
nicated to a wheel having a lateral annular 
concentric flange from a vibrating arm or lever 
pivoted concentrically with that flange, and 
having in its outer end part a recess with a 
loose griping-piece, roller, or rollers therein, 
and contiguous to the inner concave surface of 
the annular flange, so that while the said arm 
or lever was being moved in one direction the 
said griping-piece, roller, or rollers would 
wedge or bind between and against the outer 
end surface of the arm or lever and the inner 
surface of the annular flange, and thereby turn 
the wheel, and so that while the arm or lever 
was being stopped and turned in the opposite 
direction the same griping-piece, roller, or roll 
ers would then be released, so as to permit the 
wheel to continue to revolve or not turn the 
5o wheel backward. In such cases the Wedging 
35 
45 
or binding of the gripiiig-piece, roller, or roll 
ers between the outer-end surface of the arm 
or lever and the inner surface of the wheel 
flange, in turning forward the wheel, exerted 
an immense outward pressure against the 55 
inner surface only of the wheel-flange, tend 
ing to burst out the latter, and a like inward 
pressure against the arm or lever, causing 
great pressure and friction on its pivot, tend 
ing to break off the latter and to retard the 6o 
forward turning of the wheel. Also, prior to 
my invention, rotary motion had been im 
parted to a wheel having a lateral concentric 
annular flange from a driving-lever pivoted at 
or in line with the axis of the wheel, and ex- 65 
tended radially far outside of the circle of the 
annular flange by means of a griping-lever 
loosely pivoted to the driving-lever at a point 
far outside of the circle of the. wheel-flange, 
and extended inward to and past the latter, 7o 
and movable to and fro in an arc, and endwise 
on and about its pivot in a plane parallel to 
the plane of the wheel, and having opposite. 
to the inner and outer surfaces of a short sec 
tion of the flange two pins or griping-lugs se- 75 
cured to the griping-lever, either rigidly or so 
as to be somewhat movable therein in directions 
transverse to, but not in the circumferential 
direction of, the wheel-flange, as set forth in 
United States Patents Nos. 86,833 and 99,761, 8o 
so that such device could gripe and release op 
posite surfaces of the flange only by reason of 
the vibrating and endwise movements of the 
whole griping-lever about its pivot on the 
driving-lever far outside of the circle of the 
flange, and such outward extensions of the 
driving and griping levers were, in operation, 
liable to strike against outside objects, and to 
materially interfere with the convenient appli 
cation and use of the device on wheels closely 9o 
surrounded by machinery or stationary casings. 
To cheaply and effectually overcome the 
aforesaid defects is the primary object of this 
invention. 
lateral annular flange, b, and mounted to turn 
on or with a stud or shaft, C, concentric with 
said flange, and held by any suitable support, 
D, and I combine therewith an arm or lever, 
E, pivoted upon the stud or shaft C, or other. Ioo 
To that end I provide a wheel, A, having a 95 
85 
240,536 
O 
25 
35 
2 
wise concentrically with the wheel-flange b, all 
in the usual manner; and, in addition, I con 
struct the outer portion of the arm or lever E 
with two lateral lugs, f and g, rigidly fast on 
that arm or lever, and having therein recesses 
h and i opposite to each other and to the inner 
concave surface, j, and outer convex surface, k, 
of the flange b, and I arrange opposite to each 
other in the recesses h and i two loose sepa 
rate griping-pieces, l and m, which are either 
in the form of rollers, as in Fig. 4, or of Wedges, 
as in Fig. 7, or of braces or toggles, as in Fig. 
10, and which are somewhat movable to and 
fro in the recesses in the direction of the cir 
cumference of the flange of the wheel, so that 
in turning the arm E in one direction (indi 
cated by the arrow t) the two separate and op 
posite griping-pieces, l and m, in the recesses 
h and i in the lugs f and g shall then bind be 
tween and against those two lugs and the op 
posite parts of the inner and outer surfaces of 
the flange b, substantially as represented in 
full lines in Figs. 4,7, and 10, and shall thereby 
turn the wheel A in the direction pointed by 
the arrow it, and so that in turning the arm E 
in the opposite direction the two griping-pieces 
land in will then be released in the recesses 
h and i, as indicated by dotted lines, so as to 
let the flange b turn freely between them in 
the direction of the arrow t, and not materially 
tend to turn the wheel in the opposite direction. 
In this improved device the outward press 
ure against the inner surface of the flange b 
by the binding of the griping-piece libetween 
that flange and the inner lug, f, on the arm E 
is counteracted by the simultaneous inward 
pressure against the outer surface of the same 
part of the flange by the binding of the grip 
ing-piece in between that flange and the outer 
lug, g, on the same arm, and consequently all 
injurious endwise inward pressure by the arm 
E against its pivot-support C, and all material 
excess of outward or inward pressure against 
the flange b by the piece l or m, is prevented. 
To render this device suitable for very con 
venient use in operating a rotary fan or blower 
by power applied intermittingly by hand Icom 
bine with the arm E a connecting-rod, N, and 
a hand-lever, O, pivoted at 0 to the support D, 
and I often prefer to construct the wheel A. 
with a toothed rim, p, and combine therewith 
a pinion, Q, fast on a shaft, r, having a fly 
wheel, S, fast thereon, and mounted in the 
stock D, substantially as shown in the draw 
lingS. 
45 
So 
55 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, with the wheel having 
the concentric flange band the arm El, pivoted 
at the axis of the wheel, of two opposite lugs, 
fand g, fast on said arm, and having recesses 6o 
h and i, and griping-pieces l and an in the re 
cesses, and somewhat movable therein in the 
direction of the circumference of the flange of 
the wheel, and arranged to gripe opposite sur 
faces of the same part of the flange, substan- 65 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, with the wheel having 
the concentric annular flange b and the arm E, 
pivoted at the axis of the wheel, of two oppo. 
site lugs,f and g, fast on said arm, and having 7o 
recesses hand i, griping-pieces l and m in the 
recesses, and somewhat movable therein in 
the circumferential direction of the flange of 
the wheel, and arranged to gripe opposite sur 
faces of the same portion of the flange, the 
driving-lever O, and rodN, connecting said arm 
and lever, all substantially as described. . 
Intestimony whereof Ihereunto set my hand, 
in the presence of two subscribing witnesses, 
this 22d day of February, 1879. 
PETER PEARTREE, 
75 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT JOHNSTON, 2d, 
WILLIAM. A. WELLS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240636.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 240,636. 
  
 
 
A. A. AMUED 0. 
Low Water Indicator. 
Patented April 26, 1881. 
22 S2-7 
 
 
A | abz 
 
 
o% - 2/4-26. 
WITNESSES: 
7 
INVENTOR: 
6/Z //new, 
a.e. 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTONIO A. AMUEDO, OF ALGIERS, LOUISIANA. 
Low-WATER INDICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,636, dated April 26, 1881. 
Application filed September 21, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may 00:008, 
Beit known that I, ANTONIO A. AMUEDO, 
of Algiers, parish of Orleans, Louisiana, have 
invented a new and Improved Low-Water In 
dicator, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to that class of de 
vices which are designed to be applied to boil 
ers for automatic extinguishment of the boiler 
fires when the water in the boiler evaporates 
to a point below the low-water line. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in sec 
tion, showing my improvements as applied to 
a boiler; and Fig. 2 is an enlarged sectional 
elevation of a portion of my improvement. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A represents the boiler, 
and a the fire-box thereof, and b b are the man 
holes. 
B is a cylinder, having a bell-mouth, e, sup 
ported in a horizontal position within the 
boiler, at the low-water line thereof, on the 
braces or supports B B', said cylinder B and 
its connections being preferably placed near a 
man-hole, so that it can readily be examined 
and put in order, if necessary, whenever the 
boiler is cooled down. 
D is a perforated diaphragm or valve-seat, 
fixed, by screws or other devices, within the 
cylinder B, and having steam-channels d on 
its face, that the valve may be more sensitive 
or more easy to move. 
E is the sliding valve closing over the dia. 
phragm D, and E is the valve-stem jointed 
to the lever F, and extending down through 
the cylinder B to connect with the valve E. 
F represents the jointed lever fulcrumed on 
the standards F, that extend upward from the 
cylinder B; and G is the ball-float connected 
with the free end of the lever F by a rod, G', so 
that said float G shall rest on the surface of 
the water in the boiler A. Said float-rod G 
and valve-stem E' are made or are designed 
to be adjusted to such lengths that when the 
float G falls, with the water in the boiler, be 
low the low-water line L therein, the weight 
of the float G will operate, through the lever 
F, to lift the valve E from off its seat D, and 
thereby give a passage to steam, through the 
cylinder B and the pipe H, that is connected to 
its rear end, into the fire-box a, to extinguish 
the fire therein. This pipe His provided with 
a globe-valve, I, within easy reach of the oper 
ator, and said valve I is inclosed in a box, K, 
that is designed to be kept locked, so that the 
valve I may not be tampered with, and said 
valvelis to be kept open for the free passage 
of steam. When the boiler-fire shall have 
been extinguished by the steam passed through 
the cylinder. B and pipe H, the operator will 
unlock the box K and close the valve I until 
the boiler is refilled and the valve E replaced 
in its seat D by the lifting of the float G. 
By the application of this device to boilers 
explosions arising from an insufficiency of wa 
ter in the boiler may be entirely prevented. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. A low - water indicator constructed sub 
stantially as herein shown and described, con 
sisting of cylinder B, provided with valve-seat 
D, valve and rod EE", jointed lever F, float 
and float-rod G. G', and valved connecting-pipe 
H, as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the boiler A and 
fire-box a, of the cylinder B, provided with 
valve-seat D, and valve and rod EE", jointed 
lever F, float and float-rod G. G', and valved 
connecting-pipe H, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
ANTONIO A. AMUEDO. 
Witnesses: 
WM. APPLEGATE, 
GEORGE WILLIAM STILES. 
o 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240736.txt	(No Model.) , 
J. W. LEEDs. 
Means for Attaching Rain Spouts to Buildings. 
Patented April 26, 1881. 
No. 240,736. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JEREMIAEI W. LEEDS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MEANS FOR ATTACHING RAIN-SPOUTS TO BUILDINGs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,736, dated April 26, 1881. 
Application filed February 28, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
IS 
To all thon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JEREMIAH. W. LEEDs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain Improvements in Rain-Spouts and in 
Attaching the Same to Buildings, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The main object of my invention is to pre 
vent the wetting of the wall of a building by 
water flowing down the outside of a rain-wa 
ter spout or conductor secured to said wall, a 
further object being to effect the secure at 
tachment of the spout to the wall. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view, of the adjoining ends of 
two sections of spoutconstructed and secured 
to a wall in accordance with my invention; 
Fig. 2, a transverse section on a somewhat 
larger scale; and Fig. 3, a view showing a 
modification of my invention. 
In Figs. 1 and 2, A represents part of th 
wall of a building, and B B sections of rain 
spout, to which, near their upper ends, are se 
cured, by soldering or otherwise, inclined plates 
D, having upwardly-bent portions a, adapted 
to be nailed to the wall A and to properly 
support the sections of spout thereon. The 
lower end of each section of spout is con 
tracted and fits into the projecting portion b 
of the section beneath, so that each section is 
supported near the upper end by the plate D, 
and at the lower end by the section beneath, 
into which it fits. I have found that with 
spout-sections of the ordinary length this 
method of supportis sufficient; but, if desired, 
i. 
25 
35 
each section of the spout may have two or 
more supporting-plates D. These plates D, in 
addition to their supporting duty, serve as 
deflectors to prevent water which flows down 
the outside of the spout from wetting the wall 4o 
to which said spout is attached, the water be 
ing thrown outward and away from the Wall 
by said deflecting-plates. In the winter sea 
son, moreover, the accumulation of ice upon a 
leaky spout is confined to the section in which 
the leak happens to be, and the tearing of the 
spout from its fastenings by the weight of an 
accumulation of ice upon the entire length of 
the spoutis prevented. 
Although I prefer to utilize the deflecting 
plates as a means of attaching the spout to 
the wall, the attachments may, if desired, be 
independent of the deflecting plates or flanges 
D, as shown in Fig. 3, for instance. 
45 
So 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of a rain-spout with de 
flecting-plates D secured thereto at intervals, 
as set forth. 
2. The combination of rain-spout sections 
B with deflecting-plates D secured thereto, 
and having vertical portions a, whereby they 
are attached to the wall of a building, as speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
JEREMIAEI W. LEEDS. 
65 
55 
Witnesses: 
HENRY FULEN WIDER, 
HARRY SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240836.txt	(No Model) 
J. C. MOFFITT. 
Car Coupling. 
No. 240,836. 
Patented May 3, 1881. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
of 
 
NS 
o 
T 
 
is 
Fig. 4 
Witnesses, 
(2&1 u, u?er- 
, 
J 
Fig.5 
K 
- 
Inventor, 
game 6.6 i. 
on tP 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES C. MOFFITT, OF WYOMING, ILLINOIS. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,836, dated May 3, 1881. 
Application filed March 3, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES COX MOFFITT, 
of Wyoming, in the county of Stark, in the 
State of Illinois, have invented an Improved 
Car-Coupling; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription thereof, reference being had to the 
annexed drawings, making a part of this 
specification, in which like letters of reference 
refer to like parts, and in which 
Figure 1 represents a sectional elevation at 
the dotted linea; Fig. 2, a sectional elevation 
at ac, but with the hook-finger HA up instead 
of down; Fig. 3, an end elevation; Fig. 4, a 
plan; Fig. 5, a plan of the link-holder J J K. 
B BT G constitute the frame-work of this 
coupling. The T-shaped bar Mis fastened to 
the sill of the car, and has the different holes 
R. R. R, that the coupling may be adapted 
for different heights of cars by the shifting of 
the bolt R and of the coupling up or down. 
The hook-finger EIA is pivoted at P to the 
lever D, and supported in a raised position by 
the two projections F. F. The lever D is 
pinned at P to the sides B B of the coupling, 
and at P to the end of the sliding rod C. To 
the hook-finger HA at the opening O, a cord 
or chain can be attached, to enable the brake 
man to raise the hook-finger HA without hav 
ing to descend from the top of the car. 
The link-holder J J K (shown in plan by 
Fig. 5) is exhibited as holding the link Sin 
Fig. 1, and in Fig.2 as lying down in the slots 
made to receive it. The notches 1 m in the 
sliding rod Callow the link-holder J J K to be 
lifted up as high as, but no higher than, the po 
sition shown in Fig. 1. 
The right-angled slots E E receive the two 
projections FF when the hook-finger HA is 
moved forward a little, so that it then has 
nothing to support it in the position shown in 
Fig. 2, but it immediately falls. 
The method of operating this car-coupling 
is as follows: When the two cars are to be 
coupled together, the link-holder J J K of one 
O 
25 
35 
45 
coupling is lifted up to the position shown in 
Fig. 1, the link S pressed back - under it, and 
the hook-finger H. A let down to the position 
of Fig. 1. In the other coupling the hook 
finger H A is raised up and back till it is sup. 
ported by the projections FF, as in Fig. 2. 
As the two cars are now brought together the 
projecting link S of the one coupling enters 
coupling No. 2, the end of the link S pushes 
against the end of the sliding rod C, and, by 
means of the lever D, moves the hook-finger H. 
A forward till, the slots E E coming over the 
projections F E, it is no longer supported, but 
falls by its own weight. Now, when the cars 
go to separate from the rebound the link S 
pulls the hook-finger forward till the projec 
tion T is held under the edge of the cross-bar 
T. By this means the hook-finger HA is kept 
from flying up and releasing the link S. A 
pull back and up at an angle of forty-five de 
grees brings the hook-finger to the position 
shown in Fig. 2, thereby liberating the link S 
and setting the hook-finger H. A ready for 
coupling again. 
What I claim as my invention, and for which 
I desire Letters Patent, is as follows: 
1. In a car-coupling, the combination of the 
hook-finger HA, right-angled slots EE, lever 
D, sliding rod C, projections F F, and the 
coupling frame-work B B G, as set forth. 
2. In a car-coupling, the combination of the 
hook-finger HA, lever D, sliding rod C, frame 
work B B G, and the link-holder J J K, as 
set forth. 
3. In a car-coupling, the frame-work B B G, 
in combination with the T-shaped bar M, bolt 
R, and holes R. R. R., substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing in 
vention I have hereunto set my hand this 17th 
day of February, 1881. 
JAMES COX MOFFITT. 
SO 
55 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
J. M. MooRE, 
H. W. WELLS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US240936.txt	(No Model.) 
 
W. G. WARDEN. 
Apparatus for and Process of Cooling and Refining 0il. 
No. 240,936. 
Patented May 3, 1881. 
 
2 
 
 
 
 
SS 77zzreza (o? 
site- Z/29240a/2a(21, 
R ?y fa (246.7 eye 
6/G-4%. 62%g 
4% vac 64. 
-1 
N. PETERS, Photo-LithogRAPHER, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM G. WARDEN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE ATLANTIC REFINING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
APPARATUS FOR AND PROCESS OF COO. NG AND REF NING OL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 240,986, dated May 8, 1881. 
Application filed November 4, 1880. (No model.) 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM G. WARDEN, 
of the city of Philadelphia, in the State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented an Improvement in 
5 Apparatus for and Process of Cooling and Re 
fining Oil, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
The object of my invention is the agitation 
of oils in such manner and by such means that 
Io the temperature of the mass of oil during agi. 
tation is kept at so low a point as to facilitate 
the separation of tar and other impurities there 
from. 
Heretofore the process of agitating oil for 
I5 purifying purposes has consisted, essentially, 
of the following steps, viz: Warm distillate or 
oil from the still is mixed with cold Water in an 
agitator. The mixed mass is agitated by means 
of a blast of air forced through it. The water 
2O is then drawn off from the bottom of the agi 
tator, and the cooled oil is dried or freed from 
moisture, as well as from tar, by the addition 
of Sulphuric acid and by agitation together 
there with by means of a blast of air forced into 
and through the mixture in the agitator. By 
the above treatment the Water and tar have 
been caused to separate from the oil and to 
fall to the bottom of the agitator, at which point 
they are drawn off. In the above operation, 
3o however, the temperature of the oil is gradu 
ally raised by reason of the increase of tem 
perature of the air-blast due to the force and 
velocity with which it is forced into the agi 
tator, and by reason of the action of the sul 
35 phuric acid upon the water or moisture in said 
air-blast, with the result that the separation of 
tar from the oil is rendered more slow and in 
complete as the temperature of said mass in 
CeaSS. 
Myinvention consists in providing a process 
of and apparatus for cooling and purifying oils. 
The drawing is a vertical longitudinal cen 
tral view, partly in section and partly in ele 
Vation, of my improved apparatus. 
A is an agitator, in the present instance 
shown with conical top and bottom, and pro 
vided at its bottom with an outlet and cock, B. 
D is a blower or blast- engine. of any con 
venient construction, upward from which ex 
so tends a blast-pipe, C, which leads into and dis 
45 
 
charges its blast near the bottom of a tightly 
covered acid-proof tank, X, and beneath the 
surface of the sulphuric acid with which the 
tank is nearly filled. 
C, extends to and through the top of the agi 
tator A and downward to within a short dis. 
tance of the bottom of the same. 
From the top of the tank Xan air-blast pipe, 55 
I is an air-valve to regulate the blast. 
J is a water-jacket surrounding the blast- 6o 
pipe C", provided at its lower end with a Water 
inlet, K, and at its upper end with a water-out 
let, L, located upon said blast-pipe between the 
blower D and the acid-tank X, and so arranged 
as to be constantly fed with a supply of cold 65 
Water. 
E is a water-jacket surrounding the blast 
pipe C, provided at its lower end with a water 
inlet, F, and at its upperend with a water-outlet, 
G, and arranged in like manner as is the jacket 7o 
J, to be constantly fed with a cold-water supply. 
In operation, the air-blast is forced by the 
blower through the blast-pipe C", into and 
through the acid in the tank X, and thence 
through the blast-pipe C to the agitator A, with 75 
the result that the airis first cooled and to a con 
siderable extent dried in its passage through 
said pipe C, is further dried in its passage 
through the acid in the tank X, and is again 
cooled and dried in its passage through the 8o 
pipe C. 
The agitator A, blowerD, water-jacket E, and 
blast-pipe C C, above referred to, are shown, 
described, and claimed in an application for 
Letters Patent filed by me of even date here- 85 
with. These devices are not claimed by me in 
this application. 
The acid-tank X, in connection with the de 
vices just named, is shown and described in an 
application for Letters Patent filed by George go 
H. Perkins, of even date herewith. To this 
combination I lay no claim. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
1. The process of cooling and refining oil, 
which consists in agitating it with a blast of 
air, which air has been previously cooled and 
dried by being passed successively, first, incon 
tact with a cooled surface; second, through a I co 
95 
9. 
240,936 
2. An apparatus for cooling and purifying tially as set forth. 
5 containing oil, an air-blower, an air-blast pipe my name this 25th day of October, A. D. 1880. 15 
bath of sulphuric acid; and, third, in contact air-blast pipes being surrounded by a water. 
with a cooled surface, substantially as set forth. jacket adapted to contain water, all substan 
oil, which consists in a vessel or agitator for 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
extending from said blower into a bath of sul- 
phuric acid contained in an air-tight tank, and 
an air-blast pipe extending from the top of said 
acid-tank to a point within said agitator in 
Io proximity to the bottom thereof, each of said 
G. H. PERKINS, 
W. C. STRAWBRIDGE. 
WILLIAM G. WARDEN. 
. 
. W. A 
In presence of - 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241036.txt	(Model.) 
L. J. LYMAN, 
Trache Otomes, 
No. 241,036 
Patented May 3, 1881. 
 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR: 
A 
J 
W. 272 az/ 
t 
TORNEYs, T 
BY 
N. PETERS, Photo-ithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS J. LYMAN, OF MANHATTAN, KANSAS. 
TRACHEOTO ME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,036, dated May 3, 1881. 
Application filed August 21, 1880. 
(Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEWIS J. LYMAN, of 
Manhattain, in the county of Riley and State 
of Kansas, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Tracheotomes, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My improvements relate to surgical instru 
ments for use in opening the trachea in cases 
of membranous croup, or in any case when it 
is necessary to practice tracheotomy. 
The object of my invention is to provide for 
more easily effecting an entrance to the tra 
chea than can be done by instruments hereto 
fore in use, and for retaining the instrument 
in proper place after insertion. 
The invention consists in a blade of pecu 
liar shape upon a spring-arm fitted between 
two spring holding-arms that are formed with 
T ends, and also in a catch for simultaneously 
securing and loosening the spring-arms, all as 
hereinafter described with reference to the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of this 
specification. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved tracheotome in all open position. Fig. 
2 is a side view of the same as closed. Fig. 3 
is a bottom view of the same as closed. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A A' are Spring-arms, at 
tached firmly at the base to a suitable block, 
h, and having their Outer portions curved, as 
shown, for convenience of use. The outer ends 
of arms A are formed with projections at a, 
which give a T shape to the ends, and these 
T ends are beveled upon the outer side, so that 
when brought together upon the blade by com 
pressing the arms there is no abrupt edge. 
B is the spring-arm carrying the blade. This 
consists of a spring-plate attached to the base 
h by a set-screw, l, or similar fastener, which 
passes through a slot in the end of arm B, so 
that the latter can be removed quickly after 
the trachea is opened. The outer end of arm 
B is curved to conform to arms A A', and is 
shaped so that when pressed in Ward the Outer 
end of arm B, carrying bladec, passes between 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
arms A A'. The blade c is made slightly lon 
ger than the T ends of arms A A', and has its 
forward cutting-edge formed with a point, 1, at 
its mid-length, from which point the edge curves 
inward to the ends, thus forming a double-con 
cave cutting-edge, which is most effective for 
slitting the trachea to give entrance for the T 
ends of arms A A', which, when compressed, 
come at opposite sides of the blade. 
Upon the side of one arm, A, there is fitted 
a sliding catch, d, that is formed at the inner 
portions with a projection, 2, for entering an 
eye, e, that is fixed on the inner side of the 
other arm. The arm B is formed with a pro 
jection, f, at its inner side, which passes in 
front of the eyee when the arms are compressed, 
so that the projection 2 of catch d will pass 
above the projection f of arm B, and the three 
arms will thus be held in the compressed po 
sition. To release the arms simultaneously it 
is only necessary to slide the catch d back. 
The instrument is used in the closed position 
for effecting an entrance. After the T ends 
are entered the catch d will be moved to spread 
the arms A A' and the arm B will spring back, 
so that by loosening screw b the arm or blade 
can be removed. The T ends of arms A A' 
prevent the instrument from becoming mis 
placed after insertion by catching under the 
angles of the opening made by the dilation of 
the slit in the trachea, thereby keeping the tra 
chea, open until the tube is introduced. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as lew and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The tracheotome consisting of Spring 
arms A A', formed with T ends, spring-arm B, 
provided with blade c, and catch d, or equiva 
lent device, for retaining the arms closed, com 
bined for use substantially as described. 
2. In tracheotomes, the sliding catch d, 
formed with projection 2, combined with arms 
AA' and B, having eye e and projection f, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
LEWIS JUDD LYMAN. 
Witnesses: 
M. B. WARD, 
GEO. S. GREEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241136.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 241,136. 
F. H. HOLDEN. 
Last. 
Patented May 10, 1881. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK H. HOLDEN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
AST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,136, dated May 10, 1881. 
Application filed August 23, 1880. (No model.) 
O 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK H. HoLDEN, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Lasts; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to lasts adapted to 
the manufacture of boots and shoes having re 
movable and changeable toe parts, whereby 
the principal part or body of the last may be 
used with any one of several forms or styles 
of toe that may be required by a prevailing 
fashion. It consists in the features of construc 
tion hereinafter described, and pointed out in 
the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a last provided with my improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of a toe-piece de 
tached from the last-body. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
longitudinal Section of the last-body and toe 
piece through one of the fastenings, and Fig. 
4 is a top view of the last with the block re 
moved. 
A represents the rear portion or main body 
of the last, B the block, and C the toe-piece, 
each separable from the others. The line of 
division between the parts A and C is trans 
Verse and vertical, and is located at or a little 
forward of the ball of the last, in front of which 
the clanges in form or style invariably appear. 
The toe-piece C is of wood, and D is a metal 
plate, having two tubular projections, F, which 
set horizontally into the toe-piece, and are in 
teriorly threaded to receive the connecting 
bolts G. Said bolts G are attached to the 
last-body A. In this instance they are perma 
nently attached by having the heads or nuts 
H secured thereto by the pins p, which heads 
lie in recesses J of the last-body, and are ac 
cessible when tle block 3 is removed. 
The holes in the last-body through which 
the bolts G pass may be bushed, as shown at 
I, Fig. 3, and, if desired, metal plates may be 
interposed between the heads H and the wood 
upon which they bear in drawing the parts to 
gether. The heads Hare preferably provided 
} 
With holes in their periphery by which to turn 
them, instead of being squared, that the recess 
J may not be unnecessarily large and thus 
Weaken the Wood. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
7 O 
75 
By turning the bolts G the part C may ob 
viously be attached or removed at pleasure. 
Several toe-pieces being provided to fit the 
same last-body, a corresponding number of 
styles of shoes may be made from the same 
last-body. It is believed that in the manufac 
ture of shoes on a large scale this will effect an 
important saving in the cost of the lasts used. 
The metal part D is firmly secured to the 
toe-piece, so as not to be loosened or detached 
by the hammering to which it is subjected, by 
means of the rivets L, inserted vertically 
through the projections F and the Wood sur 
rounding them. Marginal flanges.f, overlying 
the wood, will serve to keep the toe-piece from 
splitting. If preferred, said flanges may be 
extended on top and botton toward the toe, 
and secured by the rivet Li, as seen in Fig. 1, 
instead of riveting through F. 
In the drawings two connecting-bolts, G, are 
slhown. Obviously a single bolt may be suffi. 
cient for strength, and will be more quickly 
manipulated. Dowels or their equivalent would 
in the use of a single bolt be necessary to hold 
the parts ill proper relation, and will be de 
sirable when two bolts are used. 
The bottom plate now commonly applied to 
lasts used in manufacturing boots and shoes 
may be extended from one part centrally upon 
the other, and be screwed thereto, so as to ma 
terially re-enforce the connection herein shown 
and described. 
I am aware that lasts have been made with 
changeable toe-pieces, wherefore I do not 
broadly claim this feature of construction; but 
In combination with the body A and a con 
necting-bolt, G, the Wooden detachable toe 
piece C, provided with a metal part, D, pro 
jecting forward into or upon the toe-piece and 
secured by the rivet Li, said metal part being 
recessed to receive and engage the connecting 
bolt, substantially as described, and for the 
purposes set fortli. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I affix my signature in presence 
of two witnesses. 
Chaim 
9o 
95 
OO 
FRANK. E. HOLDEN. 
Witnesses: 
M. E. DAYTON, 
JESSE COX, Jr. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241236.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 241,236. 
F. A. PRATT. 
Adjustable Lever. 
Patented May 10, 1881. 
 
 
 
Ayz Z72 esses. 
Z72. 2. eZ2 ZZ 7. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS A. PRATT, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
PRATT & WHITNEY COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ADJUSTABLE LEVER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,236, dated May 10, 1881. 
Application filed January 15, 1881. (No model.) 
- 
the body B. This is arranged around the cir 
cumference of the stem D, so that when the 
handle is turned through a small angle the 
parts of the cam moving upon each other force 
the handle outward into the position shown in 
Fig. 3. 
F is a rod or stem, connecting the part, D 
with the plug G, and which moves up and down 
in bearings in the lever B. The part IF is 
screwed into D and G, and the three parts form 
one bar, moving up and down in the interior of 
the lever. 
His a spiral spring, lying in a socket in B, 
and acting downward upon the plug G. 
J is a notched disk, keyed upon the shaft A, 
and furnished with the notches J', into which 
the plug G fits to bolt the lever and disk to 
gether. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
When the shaft A has been placed in any po 
sition, and it is desired to set the lever where 
it can be most conveniently operated, the han 
dle C is grasped and turned slightly to the 
light. This lifts the plug G out of one of the 
notches J. The lever can now be turned to 
the proper position, when the handle is turned 
back to its first position, allowing the plug to 
enter one of the notches J. When it comes op 
posite to it. The lever can thus be stopped 
and held opposite to the notch nearest to the 
desired position. 
55 
75 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANCIS A. PRATT, of 
Hartford, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Adjustable Levers; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, 
whereby a person skilled in the art can make 
and use the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon. 
Like letters in the figures indicate the same 
parts. 
My invention relates to levers attached to a 
rotating shaft for the purpose of giving it any 
desired amount of movement by hand, and it 
is more especially adapted to such shafts or ar 
bors as are first set in Some position at the 
commencement of a mechanical operation and 
are then farther advanced by hand, and where 
it is an advantage to have the lever in a posi 
tion approximately the same with relation to 
the operator, whatever may be the position of 
the shaft-for example, in drilling-machines 
where the shaft is revolved until the drill 
touches the work, and afterward is slowly 
moved by the lever as the drill penetrates. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and easily-operated device for setting 
and holding the lever in any radial direction 
relative to the shaft. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a front view of my 
improved lever attached to a shaft, partly cut 
away, so as to show the interior parts. Fig. 2 
is a side view of the lever attached to the shaft, 
with the interior parts shown in dotted lines. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view of the upper end of 
the lever, with the handle lifted by rotating. 
A is the shaft. 
B is the lever. It has bearings B' fitting and 
turning upon the shaft A. 
C is the handle of the lever. It has a strong 
stem, D, fitting into a socket in the body of the 
lever B, and arranged so as to slide in or out. 
E is a cam-joint, between the handle C and 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination of the rotating handle C 
and the lever B, provided with the can-sur 
face E between them, and adapted to raise the 
plug G, with a locking device upon a rotating 
shaft, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the lever B, the han 
dle C, with its stem D, the rod F, the plug G, 85 
the spring H, and the notched disk J, fixed 
upon the shaft A, substantially as described. 
F. A. PRATT. 
Witnesses: 
THEO. G. ELLIS, 
WILMOT IORTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241336.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 241,336. 
J. G. EBKEN. 
Fifth Wheel for Wehicles. 
Patented May 10, 1881. 
  
 
  
(18- 
 
 
 
P 
 
a- - E s : ------- sesses 
Sss 3.4 --- 
----- - 
z2-2- 
aS2 as e2 Zevezezer 
29.44 -3.3%: 
o/%za & ?ee, 
N. Peters, Picto-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
2.4-, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN G. EBKEN, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FFTH WHEEL FOR VEHICLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,336, dated May 10, 1881. 
Application filed March 11, 1881. 
(No model.) 
55 
to 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN GEORGE EBKEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Fifth-Wheels for Vehicles, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The present invention relates to fifth- wheels 
for vehicles, and is mainly designed to permit 
the front wheels to move in the path of a com 
plete circle, and to obviate the Wrenching or 
straining of the running-gear when one wheel 
of the vehicle runs on a higher plane than the 
other. 
The invention consists in a lower circle-plate 
having a cross-bar or plate which rests upon 
the top of the front axle and is secured thereto 
by clips or other suitable means. The upper 
circle-plate is also provided with a cross bar 
or plate which is secured to the under side of 
the head-block or perch and carries vertical 
rods passing through stirrups secured to the 
Wagon bed or platform. Hooked flanges pro 
jecting from the upper circle-plate embrace or 
fit under the lower circle-plate, and serve to 
hold both plates in contact with each other. 
Offsets or shoulders formed on the axle permit 
these hooked flanges to pass beyond or clear 
the same when the axle is turned. The rods 
or stems rising from the upper fifth-wheel plate 
are connected with each other by a longitudi 
nal brace which passes through the body-sup 
porting spring carried by the head-block. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view, showing the fifth-wheel, front axle, head 
block, and wagon-bed. Fig. 2 is a detached 
view of the front axle carrying the lower cir 
cle-plate and provided with offsets or shoul 
ders for the passage of the hooked flanges of 
the upper circle-plate. Fig. 3 is a detached 
view of the head-block, upper circle-plate, and 
guide-stems carried thereby. IFig. 4 is a per 
spective view of the lower circle-plate. 
The letter. A designates the front or movable 
axle of a vehicle. It carries the centrally-lo 
cated circle-plate or lower section, B, of the 
fifth-wheel, which is constructed with or has 
welded or otherwise secured thereto the trans 
verse bar or plate C. This bar rests directly 
upon the upper face of the axle, and is secured 
thereto by clips a passing around it and said 
axle, The upper circle-plate or top section, D, 
of the fifth-wheel moves upon the lower plate 
in the customary manner, and is also construct 
ed or provided with a transverse bar or plate, 
E, which fits on the under side of the head 
block or perch F, and is secured thereto by 
means of clips b, or other suitable fastening 
devices. The head-block carries an elliptical 
spring, G, of any preferred form or dimensions, 
upon which rests the wagon bed or platform 
H. The spring is secured to the head-block by 
clips c, which also serve to retain the upper 
circle-plate in position. The customary king 
bolt H' passes through the head-block, trans 
verse bars of the fifth-wheel, and axle, and 
serves to hold these parts in proper relation 
to each other. The two circle or turn plates 
comprising the fifth-wheel are also held in fric 
tional or proper contact with each other by 
means of hooked flanges I, which are carried 
by the upper circle-plate and embrace the low 
er plate secured to the axle. Offsets or shoul 
ders J formed on the axle in line with the 
transverse bar of the lower circle-plate, or im 
mediately below said plate, serve to permit the 
passage of the hooked flanges I. In this man 
ner the flanges are permitted to clear the axle 
when the latter is turned, and thus the wheels 
are enabled to move in the path of a complete 
circle. The hooked flanges I may form part 
of a longitudinal brace-bar, K, which extends 
from the front to the rear of the upper circle 
plate, and is secured to the same and to the 
head-block or to the lower leaf of the body 
supporting spring. These flanges, however, 
may also form an integral part of the upper 
fifth-wheel plate or be permanently secured 
thereto by welding or otherwise. 
In order to permit the Wagon-body to move 
up and down in a true vertical plane and pre 
vent the wrenching or straining of the body 
supporting spring when one wheel runs on a 
higher plane than the other, I provide the ver 
tical guide or steadying rods L., which rise from 
the upper circle-plate and extend through eyes 
of stirrups or hangers M, bolted or otherwise 
secured to the under side of the Wagon bed or 
body. These guide-rods are secured to the 
upper circle-plate by screw-shaluks and nuts, 
or they may be permanently secured to said 
plate by welding or otherwise. A longitudi 
nal brace-bar, N, extending from or secured 
to both guide-rods and passing through the 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
45 
SO 
y 
l 
2 
24,336 
space between the upper and lower sections of 
springs, serves to give the necessary degree of 
rigidity or strength to the guide-rods so as to 
maintain the same in an erect position or ol)- 
viate the bending thereof. 
The stirrups M, secured to the wagon-body, 
are free to move up and down on the guide 
rods, and thus it follows that the wagon-body 
must also move in a true vertical plane. 
I have not deemed it necessary to show the 
manner of attaching the reach and draft-pole, 
because this can be effected in any preferred 
hale. 
What I claim is- 
1. In a fifth-wheel for vehicles, the combi. 
nation of the lower circle or turn plate having 
a transverse bar, the upper circle or turn plate 
having a transverse bar and hooked flanges, 
- 
O 
I 5 
and the front axle provided with offsets or 
shoulders, with the head-block, king-bolt, and 
wagon-body, as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the upper fifth-wheel 
plate, provided with vertical guide-rods or 
stems, and the wagon-body having stirrups for 
receiving said rods, with the front axle, lower 
fifth-wheel plate, head-block, and body-sup 
porting spring, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
eSSOS. 
3O 
JOHN GEORGE EBKEN. 
Witnesses : 
II. E. MARCHAND, 
Z. C. MIAIRLATT. 
--- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241437.txt	(No Model.) 
A. STEINHEIL. 
Photographic Camera Lens. 
No. 241,437. 
Patented May 10, 1881. 
Y 
 
 
4. 
YWeave 
74.4- 
- 
wwwo Y 
kaiwiwww 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
m 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPH STEINHEIL, OF MUNICH, BAV ARIA, GERMANY. 
PHOTOGRAPH. C. CAM ERA ENS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,437, dated May 10, 1881. 
Application filed March 2, 18S1. 
(No model.) 
S 
d 
IS 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ADOLPH STEINHEIL, a 
subject of the King of Bavaria, residing at 
Munich, in the Kingdom of Bavaria and Ger 
man Empire, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Photographic-Camera Lenses, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention consists in the combination, 
in a photographic camera-lens, of two pairs of 
lases, the first pair being composed of a bi 
convex flint-glass lens cemented to a biconcave 
crown-glass lens having a strong chromatic 
and spherical aberration and a focus somewhat 
smaller than that required for the complete 
lens, while the second pair of lenses, which is 
placed at a short distance from the first pair, 
consists of a biconcave flint-glass lens cement 
ed to a biconvex crown-glass lens, and has a 
nearly infinite focus and a spherical and chro 
matic aberration equal in strength to that of 
the first pair, but in opposite direction, so that 
it forms a parallel lens which neutralizes the 
aberrations of the first pair. 
This invention is illustrated in the accompa 
nying drawing, which represents a sectional 
side view of my lens. 
It has always been considered to be exceed 
ingly difficult to construct double lenses (or 
lenses composed of two pairs) which produce 
plane images, and the distinctness of these im 
ages diminishes from the center toward the cir 
cumference slower or quicker, according to the 
greater or less degree of perfection in the con 
struction of the lenses. By long-continued cal 
culation I have found that the images produced 
by double lenses are more distinct toward the 
circumference the more unequally the effect of 
the complete lens is distributed between its 
two component parts or pair of lenses. 
The aplanatic lens, named anti-planet for 
groups, which forms the subject-matter of this 
present application, is intended for taking pic 
tures in the open air, in which, on account of 
the reflections, not more than two lenses placed 
separate from each other are admissible, and 
therefore the lenses composing each pair must 
be cemented together. 
The example shown in the accompanying 
drawing has a focus of two hundred and forty 
millimeters and an aperture of forty-three mil 
limeters. The outer pair, which faces the in 
coming light, consists of a biconvex lens, R., of 
flint glass, which is cemented to a biconcave 
lens, R', of crown glass. This combination 
has a focus of about two hundred and sixteen 
millimeters and a strong chromatic and spheri 
cal aberration, also a strongly-curved image 
in the same direction as a single positive lens. 
The second pair, which is placed at a short dis 
tance from the first, consists of a biconcave 
lens, R., offlint glass, cemented to a biconvex 
lens, R, of crown glass. Its focus is nearly 
infinite, and it has a spherical and chromatic 
aberration equally strong to the first pair, but 
in opposite direction, so that it forms nearly a 
parallel lens, which neutralizes the faults of 
the first pair. 
The species of glass used are as follows: 
Crown. 
Refraction for yellow rays................ 51705 
Refraction for violet rays................. 1.33:250 
Light flint. 
15770 
1.602:29 
For a lens of the dimensions above stated I 
use the following elements: 
In these formulas, ddd, d represent the ax 
ial thickness of the respective lenses, and d. 
represents the axial distance between the lenses 
du do, while ' ' ', &c., represent the radii of 
the curves to which said letters are respect 
ively attached in the drawing. 
"liter: Light nint d = 4.92 millimeters. 
R 
& 
8 Crown d = 
4.1 millimeters. 
- 
r 
2' = 
287.2 
98.4 
Distance between the two pairs of lenses d = 
4.1 millimeters. 
- 98.4 millimeters. 
f 34.44 
-- 72.1 
& 
s 
8 Light flint da = 3.28 millimeters. 
Crown dA = 24.6 millimeters. 
?' 
e 
From this description it will be seen that the 
two pairs which constitute my lens contain very 
great but opposite faults, and at the same time 
have very unequal focuses, while the same, 
when combined, accomplish in a high degree 
all the conditions necessary for correct images. 
I do not desire to limit myself to the precise 
species of glass named in the foregoing descrip 
tion, but reserve the right to substitute there 
for other species of glass which will produce 
the same result. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, in a photographic-camera 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
2 
24,437 
and chromatic aberration equal in strength to 
that of the first pair, but in opposite direction, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 
hand and seal in the presence of two subscrib- I 
5 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
ADOLPH STEINHEIL, 
OTTOWERNHARD, 
EMIL HENZEL. 
--- 
lens, of two pairs of lenses, the first being com 
posed of a biconvex flint-glass lens cemented 
to a biconcave crown-glass lens having a strong 
chromatic and spherical aberration and a focus 
somewhat smaller than that required for the 
complete lens, while the second pair of lenses, 
which is placed at a short distance from the 
first pair, consists of a biconcave flint-glass 
lens cemented to a biconvex crown-glass lens, 
Io and has a nearly infinite focus and a spherical 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241538.txt	(No-Model.) 
No. 241,538. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
W. H.A.D DOCK, 
Car Brake. 
Patented May 17, 1881. 
FF sys---F 
Aly Z 
----es 
s 
AS 
 
Z/zzaesses:- 
6%. 
272 
Zau/evada. 
Weezalezazr 
7%, 424/57.3% 
C7% 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model) 
A. 
- 
No. 24,538. 
W. H.A.D DOCK. 
Car Brake. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
Patented May 17, 1881. 
Alidinesses;... 
2/C 224-6, 
5% * 2.2% 
72/e7 oz.:- 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WORCESTER 
HADDOCK, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
EDWARD F. ABBOTT, OF COVINGTON, KENTUCKY. 
CAR BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,538, dated. May 17, 1881. 
Application filed September 30, 1880. (No model.) 
s 
I5 a car. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WoRCESTER EIADDoCK, 
of Cincinnati, in Hamilton, county, and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
5 Improvements in Street-Car Brakes, of which 
the following is a specification. 
A great many accidents occur from the break 
ing of some part of the brake when the car is 
going down an incline, and the object of my 
Io invention is to prevent such accident; and my 
invention consists in such a construction, here 
inafter described, as to accomplish this object. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a central longitudinal section through 
Fig. 2 represents the drum or shaft 
around which the brake-chains wind. Fig. 3 
represents a vertical central section through 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a plan view, showing the ar. 
rangement of the brake rods and levers. 
A is the drum, which is attached to a rod or 
shaft, A', to which latter is attached a hand 
wheel or crank to be operated by the brakeman. 
A rod or pin, I, is screwed entirely through the 
upper end of this drum, and nuts at are screwed 
- 25 onto either end of said pin I. This pin is 
screwed through the drum, so that should one 
end of the pin be broken off the pin cannot 
slip through the drum. 
B is the main brake-chain, one end of which 
3o is connected to one end of the pin I, and be 
tween the drum and the nut af, and the other 
end of Said chain is connected to the brake-rod 
E, which, in turn, is connected to one end of 
the usual brake-lever, E'. The latter is full 
35 crumed to the car by the bolte, provided with 
a suitable head to prevent the lever E from 
falling to the ground. 
C is an auxiliary or safety chain, one end of 
which is connected to the end of the pin I, op 
4O posite the end to which the chain B is attached, 
and this end of the said safety-chain C is be 
tween the drum and nut al. The other end of 
the chain C is connected to the auxiliary brake 
rod D, which latter is attached to the end of 
45 the brake-lever E', and near the point where 
the rod E is connected to said brake-lever. 
The chain C is prevented from dragging on 
the ground by the spiral spring H, which is 
attached to the under side of the car. The 
So spiral spring is preferable to any otherform of 
support, as it will permit the chain C to be 
The manner in which the ends of the chains 75 
drawn forward as it is wound around the drum 
A without breaking it, (the spring,) and Will 
immediately draw the chain C again up toward 
the bottom of the car, and prevent this chain 55 
from dragging when the latter is unwound 
from the brake. 
The brake-shoes F are attached to the rod 
F, which is connected to the brake-lever E' by 
the rod F, in the usual manner. 
The manner in which my invention operates 
and its principal points of advantage are as 
follows: 
The brake operates, in the usual manner, 
through the chain B and rod E, unless one of 65 
these should break, in which event my inven 
tion will come into play. Suppose the car to 
be going down an incline and the chain B or 
rod E to break, the chain C will wind around 
the drum A, and, through the medium of the 70 
rod D, will operate on the brake-lever E' in 
the manner as did the chain B and rod E. 
Thus no accident can occur from the breaking 
of the main brake chain or rod. 
are attached to the drum A is a great improve 
ment over the ordinary method, and forms one 
feature of my invention. Ordinarily the brake 
chain is attached to the drum by means of all 
eye projecting from the drum, and this eye is 8o 
very liable to be broken off. Instead of eyes 
I use a pin, I, as mentioned, which is screwed 
entirely through the drum, and projects a short 
distance from either side of the drum, as shown 
in Fig. 3. The chains B and C are attached 85 
one to either end of this pin I, and held in po 
sition against the drum by the nuts at', screwed 
onto the ends of said pin, as shown in Fig. 2. 
By this construction it will be seen that the 
chains are held closely against the drum, and 9C 
the ends of the pins I are therefore not solia 
ble to break as eyes would be, for in the latter 
case the chains are connected to the eyes at a 
greater distance from the drum than in the 
case of the employment of the eyes, as shown; 95 
but should one end of the pin Ibe broken off 
it will not affect the other end, as the pin, be 
ing screwed through the drum, cannot be 
pulled through. 
by Letters Patent, is 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure I oo 
1. In a car-brake, the combination of the 
2 
24.53S 
main brake-chain B, rod E, and the auxiliary chains B and C, rods E and D, and the brake 
chain C and rod D, substantially as and for lever E, substantially as and for the purposes 25 
the purposes specified. 
specified. 
2. The combination of the brake-lever E', 
Io screwed entirely through said drum, in com- tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
6. The combination of the dram A, connect 
5 rods E and D, chains B and C, and the drum ed with the brake wheel or crank and pro 
A, the latter being connected with the brake vided with pin I, screwed through said drum, 
wheel or crank, substantially as and for the the chains B and C, rods E and D, brake lever 3o 
purposes specified. 
E", brake-shoes, car-frame, and wheels, and 
3. The drum A, provided with the pin I, connecting and operating mechanism, substan 
7. The combination of the vertical drum A 
nected to the drum, on opposite sides thereof 
4. The drum A, provided with the pin I, and in the same horizontal plane, substantially 
combination with the chains B and C, the lat- ls. The combination of the main brake-chain 
ter being held on said pin by the nuts a, brake- B, rod E, and the auxiliary chain C and rod 4o 
shoes and brake-lever E', and connecting and D, and a winding mechanism, for the purposes 
operating mechanism, substantially as and for set forth. 
WORCESTER HADDOCK. 
bination with the chains B and C, the latter 
being held on said pin by the nuts af, substan- and the two brake-chains BC, the latter con-35 
tially as and for the purposes specified. 
I5 screwed entirely through the said drum, in as and for the purposes specified. 
2O the purposes set forth. 
5. The combination of the drum A, connect- 
ed with the brake wheel or crank, and provided 
with pin I, screwed through said drum, the 
Witnesses: 
A. S. LUDLOW, 
E. R. EIILL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241639.txt	 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 241,639. 
W.U. FAIRBAIRN. 
Grate Bar. 
Patented May 17, 1881. 
ce 
aZ - 
2A 
 
 
Fig. 4 
% 2 
3 
a'- 
Fig5. 
Witnesses 
06 6. V. 
& Z 2 a. 
INVENTOR 
/2, 4-N4 
af/ 
perERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM U. FAIRBAIRN, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
GRATE BAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,639, dated May 17, 1881. 
Application filed March 21, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all choin it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMU. FAIRBAIRN, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Grate-Bars, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and accurate de 
Scription, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, forming a part of this speci 
fication in explaining its nature, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective of a grate-bar illus 
trating my invention, with a portion of its web 
broken out to show the interior of the bar. Fig. 
2 is a front elevation. Fig. 3 is a view in per 
spective, enlarged, of the rear part of the bar. 
Figs. 4 and 5 are views representing a modifi 
cation in construction, hereinafter more fully 
described. 
This invention is an improvement upon that 
described in my application for Letters Patent 
filed August 7, 1880. In that application I 
have described a grate-bar having end supports 
for suspending it in the furnace, and a hollow 
Web within and below said supports, having an 
opening at its front end, which is some little 
distance back from the front end of the bar, 
being closed at its rear and opening on one or 
both sides near the rear, whereby air may be 
drawn from the ash-pit through the bar by the 
action of the fire to the rear of the fire, thereby 
providing for a sufficient supply of oxygen to 
properly Support the combustion at that part 
of the furnace. 
I have found in the practical working of my 
invention that owing to the rapidity with 
which the air is drawn through the bar in some 
instances it is desirable to check its flow some 
during its passage through the bar, as by so 
doing the air is more heated in passing through 
the bar than otherwise would be the case. 
I have also found that it is advantageous 
to build a narrow hood or projection over the 
exits to prevent ashes from falling into and 
clogging them or the passage within the bar, 
also to extend the mouth or opening to the pas 
sage, to the end of the bar. 
A is the bar. It has a fire-supporting surface, 
a, the end supports, a', the Web a' within and 
below the end supports, and the passage a' in 
the web, having an opening, a, extending from 
the bottom of the web upwardly and outwardly 
to the end of the bar, forming the narrow pas 
O 
IS 
25 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
sage a in the front end support. The web is 
closed at its rear end, and has one or more 
openings, a, in one or both sides, at or near 
the rear and near the fire-supporting surface. 
a is a hood or projecting portion of the bar 
over each exit, preferably of the same length, 
and slanting outwardly and downwardly from 
the fire-supporting surface, so as not to increase 
its width materially, while it acts as a fender 
in preventing ashes from lodging in the exit 
passage. 
a are lugs, which project horizontally from 
the bar and serve to maintain it in position in 
relation to its companion bars by coming in 
contact with the like lugs thereon. 
To check the flow of air through the passage 
a, and thereby to heat it, a number of devices 
can be employed, and among them I mention 
the use of asbestus or other non-combustible 
material packed lightly in the passage, through 
which, however, air can be drawn. Wire-gauze, 
in one or more layers extending from side to 
side of the bar to retard the passage of air, will 
answer the purposes of this portion of the in 
vention, or a central plate or partition for di 
minishing the volume of air by decreasing the 
size of the passage will perform the same ef. 
fect. By this construction the air is not only 
retarded, but heated more readily, on account 
of its volume being thin and the heat-radiating 
surfaces of the bar being increased. 
One form of the partition-bar is shown in 
Fig. 4, the partition-plate being cast with the 
remainder of the bar. The division-plate, how 
ever, may be made separate and inserted into 
a groove in the bar, as shown in Fig. 5. Any 
other suitable means for accomplishing this de 
vice may be employed. 
It will be observed-that is, in my invention 
already described-the Web is practically sus 
pended in the ash-pit chamber, so that the pas 
sage therein is most advantageously located 
for receiving air, and that, also, the location of 
the mouth of the passage in the ash-pit is that 
best adapted for the purpose, being arranged, 
when the barisin position in the furnace, across 
the line of the principal part of the current of 
air from the ash-pit door to the fire. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
75 
85 
go 
95 
Iod 
2 
241,639 
one or both sides near the rear, the combina 
tion of such passage with means, substantially, 
as described, for checking or retarding the flow 
of air in said passage, all as and for the pur 
poses described. 
WM. U. FAIRBAIRN. 
Witnesses: 
A. J. OETTINGER, 
W. C. FOGG. 
1. In a grate-bar having a web, a, provided 
with a passage, a, through which air may be 
drawn, and having one or more exits, a, upon 
one or both sides of the web, one or more hoods 
5 or projections, a, in combination with said 
exit or exits, all substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
2. In a grate-bar having a passage in its Web, 
through which air may be drawn, having an 
to opening at the front end of the bar, and upon 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241739.txt	 
 
(No Model) 
Strainer for the Outlet of Tubs and Basins. 
W. SLOW. 
No. 241,739. 
Patented May 17, 1881. 
 
Zr(S)- 
1 
SSX % 
N 
.TAllt H2A, 
2.53 3.22. 
BY -luluw dse 
AfroRNEYs, 
- 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM SLOW, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STRAINER FOR THE OUTLETS OF TUBS AND BASINS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,789, dated May 17, 1881. 
Application filed March 9, 1881. (No model.) 
45 
ternally-threaded neck, E, in the threads of 35 
which the threads of the sleeve or flange B 
take. The upper end surface of the sleeve or 
flange B is provided with apertures HEI for 
receiving the studs F of a key, G, for screwing 
the strainer into or out of the neck. 
The strainer may consist of an apertured 
plate, as shown, or of netting, or two bars, as 
may be desired. 
Threads, pieces of paper, cloth, &c., will be 
caught by the strainer and will clog the same 
in a certain time, and these obstructions could 
only be removed with great difficulty hereto 
fore. If my improved strainer is used the 
same need only be unscrewed and can then be 
cleaned very conveniently. The Waste-pipe 
can also be cleaned very conveniently if the 
strainer is removed. The strainer can also be 
held in the washer by means of studs passing 
into suitable grooves or by other suitable 
means. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
The combination, with a washer, D, having 
the internally-threaded neck E, of the strainer 
A, having an externally-threaded vertical 
flange, B, whereby a plug may be inserted 
within said flange, or the strainer may be re 
moved from the washer, as shown and de 
scribed. 
55 
WILLIAMI SLOW. 
Witnesses: 
OsCAR. F. GUNZ, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
O 
IS 
25 
I 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM SLOW, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and Improved Strainer for the 
Outlets of Tubs and Basins, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved strainer which can be re 
moved from the washer of the outlet of a tank, 
tub, or basin, for the purpose of clearing it in 
case it has become clogged. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with a washer having an internally-threaded 
neck, of a strainer having an externally-thread 
ed vertical flange, whereby a plug may be in 
serted within said flange or the strainer may 
be removed from the washer, as hereinafter 
described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a washer of an outlet for tabs 
or basins provided with my improved remova 
ble strainer. Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional eleva 
tion of the same on the line aca, Fig. 1, and 
Fig. 3 is an elevation of the key for removing 
the strainer. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The strainer A is provided with an exter 
nally-threaded flange, B, projecting upward, 
and thus forming a recess to receive the plug 
for closing the outlet of a wash-tub, C, sink, 
wash-basin, &c. 
The washer D, which is fastened in the bot 
tom of the tub or sink, is provided with an in 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241840.txt	(No Model.) 
J. S. BOWEN & E. J. POTTER. 
Fruit and Vegetable Evaporator. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 241,840. 
A 
Patented May 24, 1881. 
 
Azg. f. 
M. al21 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
J. S. BOWEN & E. J. POTTER. 
Fruit and Wegetable Evaporator, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 24,840. 
Patented May 24, 1881. 
AZ (f -2. 4 142 d 
(5 
24tazz, 
Z E: exxxxxwoxXxxxxx % XXXX 
4. 
XXXXX 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
XX) 
KX 
SXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 8& 8. 8X8& 8. 38 8X, 
8 
XXXX 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 38 XXXXXX 
33%xX. 
XXX 
8XXXXXX. 
XXX X&W 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 8 & RX XXX 38 X 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX X. XXX 
OXXXXXXXXXX 8. X. X8. 
  
 
N. PerERs. Photo-ithographer, washington, E. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN S. BOWEN, OF SPENCERPORT, AND ELISHA J. POTTER, OF KNOWLEs. 
VILLE, NEW YORK; SAID BOWEN ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENT, 
TO EUNICE. J. BOWEN, OF SPENCERPORT, NEW YORK. 
FRUIT AND VEGETABLE EVAPORATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,840, dated May 24, 1881. 
Application filed January 26, 1881. (No model.) Patented in Canada October 20, 1880. 
y So 
55 
15 belts for elevating the trays. 
Io the accompanying drawings, in which 
To all whom it may concern: 
passes through the chamber. The boards EE 
Be it known that We, JOHN S. BOWEN, of are loose, but rest on suitable ledges or sup 
Spencerport, Monroe county, New York, and ports, so that as the trays are elevated the 
ELISHA J. POTTER, of Knowlesville, Orleans 
will strike the under inclined edges and lift the 
S County, Same State, have invented a certain 
boards, which latter will then fall to place. By 
new and useful Improvementin Fruit and Vege 
this means a close joint is made, and no dif. 
table Evaporators; and we do hereby declare 
ficulty is experienced in raising the trays, 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
whereas when the boards are fast and rest 
scription of the same, reference being had to 
horizontally the trays must be fitted and held 
exactly in line, and a considerable joint must 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of the 
be left, which allows escape of the air. 
apparatus, Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the 
H and I are two trunks or passage-ways on 
Same in line a v. Fig. 3 is a diagram show 
two opposite sides of the tower and outside the 
ing the arrangement of the endless chains or 
drying-chamber. The one, H, extends up from 
the heating - chamber O and opens into the 
Our improvement relates to fruit and vege 
chamber A about midway of its height, and 
table evaporators in which the trays are ele 
the other one, I, opens from the chamber on 
wated through a tower by means of endless 
the opposite side, and extends up to the top of 
the tower, where it has a free discharge. The 
chains or belts. 
openings of the two trunks are nearly opposite 
The invention consists in the construction 
and arrangement hereinafter described. 
each other, but the one Hopens above the tray 
In the drawings, Aindicates the chamber or 
and the one I below it, as shown in Fig.1. The 
tower in which the fruit is dried, the same be 
trunk I takes the damp air, saturated with 
ing of considerable height, at the top of which 
moisture, from the center of the chamber, al 
lowing it a free escape without passing through 
is a chimney, and at the bottom of which is a 
heating-chamber, C, as usual. 
the upper trays, while the trunk H supplies 
dry hot air to the upper part of the chamber, 
DDD are a series of trays or screens for 
holding the fruit, the same being inserted 
which otherwise would be exhausted by being 
drawn through I. 
through a door at the bottom and removed 
through a door at the top. G. G. are two end 
By the means above described a rapid re 
less chains on opposite sides, consisting of sec 
moval of the damp air is effected without its 
tionshinged or jointed together, similarly to 
passing through the whole stack, and dry air 
is supplied in necessary amount to fill the up 
the sections of strap-hinges. At top and bot 
tom the chains run around square-sided pull 
per part of the chamber. Valves are used at 
ley's ec, attached to shafts, one shaft receiving 
the bottoms of the trunks to control the cur 
rents of air. The boards EEopposite the open 
motion by suitable gearing. To the chains are 
ings of the air-trunks divide the currents of 
attached cross slats or cleats did, extending 
dry and damp air, one passing above and the 85 
across from one to the other and resting under 
the trays. As the chains are turned the trays 
other below the boards. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
will be raised. The back length of the chains 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
runs in boxes or passages exterior to the main 
ters Patent, is 
chamber. 
EE are a series of inclined boards on the 
opening into the chamber A, of the boards EE, 
two sides of the chamber at right angles to the 
serving, together with the tray that fits be 
chains. They alternate on opposite sides and 
tween them, to divide the currents of the dry 
connect with every other tray, by which means 
and damp air, the dry air passing above the 
a zigzag course is given to the air which 
1. The combination, with the air-trunks HI, go 
7 o 
75 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
24, S40 
tray and the damp air escaping from beneath our names in the presence of two subscribing 
it, as herein shown and described. 
2. In a fruit-drier, the combination, with the 
trays D, D, of the inclined boards E E at the 
5 edges of the trays, fitted loosely in place, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
In witness whereof we have here unto signed 
JOHN. S. BOWEN. 
E. J. POTTER, 
R. F. OSGOOD, 
JACOB SPAHN. 
: 
; 
witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US241940.txt	(No Model.) 
H. F. DAMMON. 
Bird Cage Perch. 
No. 241,940. 
Patented May 24, 1881. 
 
Z%zuel- 
Azaenar 
N. Peters, Photo-Khorapher, Washington, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRISON F. DAMMON, OF NEW BEDFORD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
BIRD-CAGE PERCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 241,940, dated May 24, 1881. 
Application filed March 16, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRISON F. DAMMON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Bedford, in the county of Bristol and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Perches for Bird-Cages, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
perches for bird-cages, and the object of my in 
vention is to provide a perch which will be, in 
its elasticity and movement, as near as possible 
like the natural twig or bough. I attain this 
object by the device illustrated in the accom 
panying drawing, in which is seen a view in 
perspective of the device properly adjusted to a 
section of a bird-cage. 
The plate A is furnished with the projections 
did, which projections are perforated to receive 
the perpendicular portion of the spring b. By 
connecting the spring-perch with the plate in 
this way the perch can be readily detached, so 
that it can be conveniently cleaned. The other 
end of the spring b enters a perforation in the 
end of the perch c, whereby the perch c is held 
in a horizontal position. 
To prevent the lateral motion of the perch 0 
other than that allowed by the elasticity of the 
spring b, both the perpendicular portion of the 
spring band the perforations in the projections 
d d are made square. 
O 
25 
The plate A may be inserted in the wires of 
the cage at any point desired. The spring b, 
with the perch cattached, being then adjusted, 
as shown, the device is ready for use and the 
perch has the elasticity and movement of the 
natural twig. 
Prior to my invention a bird-cage has been 
provided with a spring-perch composed of a 
bar provided at one end with a coiled spring 
soldered to a plate, said plate being detacha 
bly secured to the cage by spring-fingers, thus 
requiring the cage to be constructed so as to 
provide supports for the plate. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with a bird-cage, of the 
plate A, having projections d formed with 
square perforations, the perch c, and the spring 
b, secured to said perch and provided with a 
vertical extension passing through the perfo 
rated projection upon the plate, as shown, the 
said spring being detachably connected with 
said plate, for the purpose specified. 
35 
45 
HARRISON F, DAMMON. 
Witnesses: 
F. A. MILLIKEN, 
H. W. MASON, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242040.txt	(No Model) 
G. W. PRENTICE. 
La Cing Stud. 
No. 242,040. 
Patented May 24, 1881. 
Z233. 
-ass/ 
, PerERs, Phoe-thoraptor, washinger, b, c, 
INVENTOR 
6-ye/. ofezze. 
2.7%.6%52uees. 
ATTORNEY 
WITNESSES 
di?ea?u? 
it. ass 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. PRENTICE, OF PROVIDENCE, REODE ISLAND. 
LAC N G a STUD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 242,040, dated May 24, 1881. 
Application filed March 15, 1881. 
(No mode.) 
45 
SO 
55 
ening-plate D, said intermediate neck being 
either suitably rounded or curved upon the 
side edges to prevent friction upon the lacing 
strings, or else provided with the side wings, 
a, which are bent over upon the neck C in such 
a manner as to present smooth edges, as also 
to afford additional strength or stiffness to 
said neck. 
The fastening-plate D may be made either 
round, square, or other suitable shape, and 
provided with the V shape side prongs, b, as 
shown, which are bent down at right angles 
to the said plate D, as fully shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. 
By means of Iny improvements I am enabled 
to produce a lacing-stud adapted not only for 
use on shoes, kid gloves, and corsets, but 
equally applicable to other articles of Wear 
ing-apparel where lacing-strings are employed, 
the construction of the lacing-stud enabling 
the same to be manufactured very cheaply, 
while it possesses the requisite degree of 
strength and durability for the purpose con 
templated. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and useful is 
As an improved article of manufacture, the 
herein - described lacing - stud, formed of the 
blank A, bent into shape so as to provide the 
head B, intermediate neck, C, provided with 
overlapping Wings a, and table d, provided 
with the V-shaped side prongs, b, substan 
tially as specified. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE W. PRENTICE. 
Witnesses: 
D. G. BODMAN, 
FRANKLIN A. SMITH, Jr. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE WHITNEY 
PRENTICE, a citizen of the United States, re 
siding at Providence, in the county of Provi 
dence and State of Rhode Island, have invent 
ed certain new and useful Improvements in 
Lacing-Studs for Wearing-Apparel; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this speci 
fication. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in lacing-studs for wearing-apparel; and the 
present improvements consist of a lacing-stud 
composed of a rounded head or hook portion 
having an intermediate neck connecting said 
head to a fastening-plate, which is provided 
With wings to fold upon said neck to stiffen it 
and reduce friction upon the lacing-strings 
used in connection there with, and further pro 
vided with sharp penetrating-prongs arranged 
at the sides thereof, all as will be hereinafter 
more fully described, and pointed out in the 
claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a per 
spective view of my complete invention; Fig. 
2, a front elevation of the same; Fig. 3, the 
blank from which the complete device is made. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like parts 
in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
blank from which the complete device isformed, 
and which is composed of the rounded or other 
suitable shaped head or hook portion B, con 
nected by the intermediate neck C to the fast. 
O 
15 
20 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242140.txt	(No Model.) 
W. S. LANEY. 
Pump. 
No. 242,140. 
Patented May 31, 1881. 
s 
  
 
 
 
   
nSSSSS 
- S 
Ly XY, 
Sssssars 
SS 
are arraracalataeataeteracterpretarrespecY 
S 
aaaaaaaaaaa- maarararapaavaarara-a- - - - - - - - a-- a 
SS's 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM S. LANEY, OF LITHOPOLIS, OHIO. 
PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 242,140, dated May 31, 1881. 
Application filed IFebruary 2, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
ar, 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
the confluent pipe a' into the extension a', and 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. S. LANEY, a 
is provided with a valve-piston, c'. The lower 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lith 
end of the extension a rests on the bottom of 
opolis, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
the Well, and the piston c is placed so as to be 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
below or very near the surface of the water. 
Improvements in Pumps; and I do hereby de 
If it be arranged to play above the water-level, 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
a check-valve should be placed in the pipe be 
act description of the invention, such as will 
low it, as in the ordinary sucker-pump. A 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
check-valve, d, is placed near the upper end of 6o 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
the extension a and below the end of the con 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
fluent pipe a. 
toletters or figures ofreferencemarked thereon, 
The valve-piston c' on the piston-rod c' plays 
which form a part of this specification. 
in the lower end of the stand-pipe a? and be 
This invention relates to double - lifting 
tween the spout a and the confluent pipe. It 
pumps; and it consists in the construction and 
is arranged above the level of the lower ends 
arrangement of the several parts hereinafter 
of the three pipes at a? a. 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
A check-valve, if desired, may be arranged 
in the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation, 
at d'; but its presence is not indispensable, for 
and Fig. 2 is a vertical section, of a pump con. 
the pump will operate well without it. 
Structed according to my invention. 
The three pipes may be held in place by any 
act are two outer or stand pipes, and a is 
suitable braces--as, for example, the cross 
an intermediate air-pipe placed between the 
bar e. 
Stand-pipes, as shown. The lowerends of these 
The several pipes described hereinbefore may 
three pipes are connected together by a hori 
be of any desired length, the relative arrange 
Zontal confluent tube or pipe, a. 
ment of parts being preserved. 
a' is a supporting-tube made of such length 
The device is specially adapted for deep-well 
that its lower end will reach to and stand on 
service. A double-lift pump is furnished from 
the bottom of the well, or on a base specially 
which an unintermittent flow of Water can be 
provided for it. It is connected so that its bore 
had. 
is in direct line with the bore of one of the 
The operation of the device is readily under 
stand-pipes, so that the piston placed in it can 
stood. The piston c lifts the water into the 
be operated by a rod carried up through stand 
confluent tube. Considerable quantity of the 
pipe above it, 
water will beforced upward into the pipes a. a. 
The upper end of the intermediate air-pipe, 
The water, after it has passed through the con 
a, is closed tight, and serves as a fulcrum to 
fluent tube, is taken by the piston c and lifted 
which the handlebis pivoted. The upper ends 
to the discharge a. If the pump be operated 
of the stand-pipes a a? are closed by caps a, 
very rapidly, much of the water will be lifted 
having vertical holes, through which the piston 
above the discharge a' into the air-chamber in 
rods c c' pass downward into the said pipes. 
the upper end of the pipe a. 
The handle b is arranged inline with the three 
By the construction hereinbefore described 
pipes, and is so constructed that both piston 
it will be seen that I have three air-chambers 
rods are attached to it by means of the con 
into which the air will be compressed as the 
necting-link c*c. The rods c care packed air 
water is drawn upward. This compressed air 
tight in the caps a, so that the pipe a, above 
operates to maintain an unintermittent flow of 95 
its connection with the confluent pipe, and the 
Water. 
pipe af, above the discharge a, become air 
The central stem, a, contains the main air 
chambers, into which the air will be more or 
chamber, from which the chief benefits of the 
less compressed in the operation of the pump. 
compressed air are received. The stem serves 
The centerpipe, a, also is an air-chamber, into 
as a fulcrum for the handle, which is so ar 
So which the water will flow and compress the ranged as to oscillate on its pivotal connee 
air upward, The piston-rode extends below tion and move the pistons cc in opposite di 
90 
45 
35 
40 
OO 
242, f() 
rections at the same instant. When the han 
dle is moved so as to raise piston (' the latter 
acts as a sucker and draws a greater (antity 
of water through the piston c than would other 
wise be brought upward by the said histon c' 
if used alone. 
The central pipe, a, could be dispensed with 
and the handle be pivoted on a suitable fram 
ing connected with the pipes at al. Excellent 
results would be thus obtained; but I prefer 
in all cases to have the central air-bil) ( al 
ranged as shown and described. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters lat 
ent, is 
1. In a double-acting sucker or lift lump, the 
combination of two stand-pipes having air 
chambers in their upper ends, a confluent pipe 
uniting the lower ends of the stand-pipes, a 
supporting-pipe or extension connected to the 
lower end of one of the stand-pipes, a pistol 
placed in the stand-pipe, from which the water 
is disclarged, and arranged above the end of 
I O 
IS 
the confluent pipe, a piston placed in the su). 
porting-pipe or extension below the end of the 25 
confluent pipe, together with the necessary 
check-valves, piston-rods, and operating mech 
allisins, substantially as set folrth. 
2. In a double-acting suckeror lift pump, the 
combination, with the stand-pipes (t (t', having 3o 
their lower ends united by a confluent pipe, (t", 
of the air-tube (t, having its upper end closed 
and its lower end open and connected to and 
opening into the confluent tube (t" at a point 
between the stand-pipes, and having suitable 35 
means on its upper end for holding the level'l 
for operating the piston-rods and pistons in the 
Stand-lpipes, substantially as herein set forth. 
in testinoly whereof I affix iny signature ill 
resence of two witnesses on this 24th clay of 
January, 1 SSl. 
4O 
WALAW1 S. WNEY. 
Wit (esses: 
T. .\. It (;II, 
I. I. S. VIIT II. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242240.txt	(No Model.) 
A. P. WICKERSHAM. 
Pattern Marker. 
No. 242,240. 
 
Patented May 3, 1881. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANGELINE P. WICKERSHAM, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PATTERN. 
MARKER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 242,240, dated May 31, 1881. 
Application filed February 21, 1881. 
(No model.) 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
To all whom it may 000e) : 
Be it known that I, ANGELINE P. WICIKER 
SHAM, of the city and county of Philadelphia, 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented an 
Improvement in Pattern-Markers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to apparatus designed to 
facilitate the cutting and fitting of dresses and 
other garments designed to fit close to the body; 
and it consists of a series of flexible plates, 
bands, strips, or forms capable of being bent 
to the shape of the body, said strips, forms, &c., 
to be provided with a series of pointed prongs; 
further, in securing the said strips, forms, &c., 
together by means of a series of elastic bands, 
or their equivalent, allowing said strips, &c., 
to be properly placed as regards position on 
the form or body; further, providing the elas 
tic bands which encircle the neck and arm with 
plates, or their equivalent, provided with pro 
jecting points; further, in a bust made of heavy 
paper, card-board, or other equivalent material, 
said bust being made by means of the system 
or pattern-marker, each of the seams of said 
bust being provided with a series of project 
ing pointed pins corresponding to the project 
ing points on the pattern-marker when fitted 
to the body; further, in adapting the waist 
band to slide upon the strips, &c., to suit any 
length of waist, and other minor details, all of 
which are more fully set forth in the following 
specification and shown in the accompanying 
drawings. 
Heretofore pattern-markers have been con 
structed to simply take clown or indicate the 
measurements of the body, which were after 
Ward traced upon a paper, which was after 
ward cut to correspond; but in no case, so far 
as I am aware, has a pattern-marker been de 
signed to fit the body and prick the pattern 
out upon a paper without any measurements 
being taken or laid out upon the paper. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
pattern-marker adapted to any shape or form, 
and which will give the exact pattern for the 
body at one operation and sitting; and, fur 
ther, to be enabled to produce by the aid of 
said apparatus a bust of paper or card-board 
upon which the dress may be fitted in the ab 
sence of the original, from which the same was 
designed. 
55 
65 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the front and side of a lady having my 
improved pattern-marker applied. Fig. 2 is a 
perspective view of the back and side of same. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the adjustable 
device for the waistband. Fig. 4 is a cross 
section of same. Figs. 5 and 6 show two meth 
ods of securing the projecting pins or points 
to elastic about the neck and armhole. Fig. 
7 is a perspective view of the top of one strip, 
and shows one of the hooks to support the 
paper or cloth during marking. Fig. S is a 
perspective view of the paper bust, Fig. 9 
ShoWS a Section of one of the scams of same. 
AA are a series of thin flexible strips of 
metal, as brass, tin, copper, or other equiva 
lent material, adapted to conform to the shape 
of the body. These strips correspond to the 
sealms, and down the middle they are provided 
With projecting points or pins I, and are se 
cured together by elastic or flexible bands F. 
There are as many strips A as there are seams 
to the one-half the body, as it is not neces. 
sary to measure both sides; but, if desired, 
the strips may be so arranged as to indicate 
all the seams. The plate G is also flexible and 
corresponds to the darts, and down the two 
Vertical edges are a series of projecting pins, I, 
similar to those on strips A. This plate is also 
secured to the bands F. The chest, back, and 
shoulder strips A are secured to the elastic col 
lar-band C, which is provided with a series of 
metallic plates, J, provided with pins I, as 
shown in Figs, 5 and 6. An elastic band, B, 85 
of similar construction encircles the arms, and 
to it are secured the shoulder-strip, through 
the agency of adjustable slide-plate D and 
the side and back strips, A, as shown. 
or its equivalent, and is secured to the adjusta 
ble slide-plates D, which fit upon and slide on 
strips A and dart-piece G. In the case of the 
dart-plate there is a slotcut therein, into which 
fits the plate D, which is kept from coming out 95 
by bars H, but yet allow it to be adjusted ver 
tically in the slot. By this means the Waist 
may be raised or lowered to suit the person to 
be fitted. The bands IF and E are extended 
to pass around the body and be tied, as shown; IOC) 
or extra pieces for this purpose may be used. 
At the top of each of the strips A, and at 
The Waistband E is made of an elastic band, 9o 
75 
45 
So 
242,240 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
the top, middle, and bottom of the dart-plate 
G, and on any other parts or in any places de 
sired, are secured small hooks K, as shown in 
Fig. 7. In cutting a pattern known as the Ga 
brielle' there is an extra strip, L, used, as 
shown in dotted lines, Fig. 1. This piece L is 
in all particulars the same as the other strips, 
being provided with the pins I, and fitting in 
the dart-piece G by means of a socket or other 
equivalent device. Also, in some cases the 
Second back-seam is to be cut to the shoulder 
strip, as shown in dotted lines M, Fig. 2. This 
strip is in all particulars similar to the extra 
strip L. The slide D allows lengthening or 
shortening of the shoulder-seam, as desired or 
required. 
I do not confine myself to any number or 
shape of seams, as they will change as the 
fashion changes; neither do I limit myself to 
the adjustable slides or the particular method 
of securing them together, for my invention 
comprehends, broadly, any support for the 
projecting or marking points or pins, or their 
equivalent - as, for instance, depressions or 
holes over which a point is passed, breaking 
the paper at these points, so arranged as to 
conform to the shape of the body and corre 
spond to the seams of the garment. 
The bust form shown in Fig. S is made of 
card-board or equivalent flexible material, N, 
which has been perforated by the points I 
when on the body. 
The various parts thus made, instead of be-, 
ing used directly as the pattern, are bent into 
shape by steaming or otherwise, and the two 
edges are lapped, as at O, and a double 
pronged pin, 1", is passed through the holes, 
and one leg is bent down to hold the seam 
closed and the pin in place, and the other leg 
is left standing to be used to mark other pat 
terns. This is shown in Fig. 9. In this case 
the bust is only adapted to fit dresses to the 
person from which it was made, and enables 
that person to have the dress fitted without 
ever putting it on herself. 
This pattern - marker is also adapted for 
marking out sleeves, gentlemen's coats, and 
all other forms where the clothes must fit the 
body closely. 
The operation is as follows: The apparatus 
is placed upon the body, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2, and the bands F and E tied. The strips 
are then adjusted to suit the seams, the shoul 
der-strip is lengthened or shortened to suit, 
and the waist is raised or lowered to fit, and 
if the strips need bending to conform to the 
body it is done. The elastic bands F and E 
cause the strips to fit closely to the form. Now 
the paper, or, if desired, the cloth and lining, 
is hooked upon the hooks K and pressed upon 
the pins I, which mark out a piece between 
any two seams, the hooks K preventing the 
(lisplacement of the paper or cloth. After the 
marking is done the cloth is cut out a little 
larger than the impression to allow for the 
seam, which is made on the line of perfora 
tions. When the parts are sewed together the 
fit will be found to be perfect. In case the 
party cannot go to the seamstress or dress 
maker, a bust is made of card-board, as pre 
viously described, and the paper or cloth is 
marked out from this bust precisely in the 
same manner as has been set forth above. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let. 
ters Patent, is 
1. A pattern-marker which consists of bands 
or strips of metal corresponding to the seams, 
conforming to the slape of the body, and pro 
vided with a series of projecting marking-pins, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. A pattern-marker consisting of bands of 
flexible material provided with projecting 
pins, said bands corresponding to the seams, 
and pressed to the form by bands of elastic 
material, to which they are secured, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a pattern-marker, a seam-marker con 
sisting of a flexible strip or plate of metal pro 
vided with projecting points or pins, upon 
which the paper or cloth is pressed, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
4. In a pattern-marker, flexible strips, bands, 
or plates of metal provided with projecting 
pins, said bands corresponding to the seams, 
and pressed to the form by bands of elastic 
material, and combined with a waistband se 
cured to these strips, bands, or plates, and 
adapted to be adjusted thereon, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
5. In a pattern-marker, metallic strips pro 
vided with projecting pins, said strips corre 
sponding to the seams, combined with suitable 
means to secure them together, and elastic ad 
justable neck and armlhole bands provided 
with projecting marking-pins, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
6. In a pattern-marker, the seam-strips A 
and dart-plate G, of metal or its equivalent, 
provided With projecting pins I and hooks K, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony of which invention I hereunto 
Set my hand. 
ANGELINE P. WICKERSHAM. 
Witnesses: 
R. M. HUNTER, 
IR. A. CAVIN, 
CO 
I o5 
O 
O 
2 5 
35 
45 
SO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242340.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. LIEB. 
Cigar Tip Cutter. 
No. 242,34O. 
Patented May 31, 1881. 
 
Nw 2ese ee 
2Z. -4- 
e4. .9%u. 
Tw ev on1. 
Saw Liveb 
s A6%r/.47 
m 
?tilys, 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. LIEB, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
CGAR-TP CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 242,340, dated May 31, 1881. 
Application filed March 14, 1881. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN A. LIEB, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Newark, in 
the county of Essex and State of New Jersey, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Cigar-Tip Cutters, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
This invention consists in a cigar-tip cutter 
composed of four knives which are pivoted to. 
gether at their ends in the form of lazy-tongs, 
and two handles which extend from the ends 
of two of the knives and are exposed to the 
action of a spring, which has a tendency to force 
the handles apart and to keep the knives open 
for the introduction of the tip of a cigar. 
My invention is illustrated in the accompa 
nying drawings, in which Figure 1 represents 
a plan or top view. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
section in the plane aca, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter. A designates my 
cigar-tip cutter, which consists of four knives, 
ct b c d, which are connected together by piv. 
ots defg in the form of lazy-tongs. The in 
ner edges of the two knives b d are beveled or 
sharpened downward, as shown in the draw 
ings, while the inner edges of the knives at and 
c are beveled or sharpened upward, so that 
when the four knives are connected their cut 
ting-edges work closely against each other. 
Erom the ends of the knives at and l extend 
the handlesh and i, and to each of these han 
dles is secured a spring, j, the loose ends of 
which bear against each other, so that the two 
springs combined practically form one spring, 
which has a tendency to force the handles apart 
and to throw the knives open, as shown in Fig. 
1 of the drawings, leaving a space, k, between 
the cutting-edges of said knives for the recep 
tion of the tip of a cigar. 
When the handles are compressed against 
the action of their spring or springs, the cut 
ting-edges of all the knives move toward the 
center of the opening k with a drawing cut or 
shear cut, and the tip of the cigar previously 
placed into said opening is cut simultaneously 
from four sides, so that a clean cut is produced, 
and the cigar, even if the same should be very 
dry, is not liable to become broken or injured. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
As a new article of manufacture, a cigar-tip 
cutter composed of four knives connected to 
gether in the manner of lazy-tongs, two han 
dles cxtending from the ends of two of the 
knives, and a spring or springs for forcing the 
handles apart and throwing the knives open, 
substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
JOHN A. LIEB. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, 
E. E. KASTENHUBER. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242440.txt	No Mode.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
D, EW ANS. 
Steam Pump. 
No. 242,440. 
Patented June 7, 88. 
(No Model.) 
D. EW ANS, 
Steam Pump. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 242,440. 
Patented June 7, 1881. 
2 
Szy ZN SS 
A. 2. 
 
 
ETEs. Photo-Lithographer. Washingto 
, 0. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID EVANS, OF CONNELLSVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO BOYTS, 
PORTER & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
STEAM - PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 242,440, dated June 7, 1881. 
Application filed March 16, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID EVANs, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Connellsville, 
in the county of Fayette and State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Steam-Pamps, of which the following 
is a specification. 
I have improved the steam pumping-engine 
to effect certain advantages and results in the 
Valve movement by means of an oscillating 
flat-faced valve attachment arranged within 
the side of an auxiliary valve-chest and oper 
ating the slide-valve by a double-ended piston 
Valve arranged Within a main valve-chest and 
communicating with the oscillating flat-faced 
valve. The oscillating flat-faced valve is oper. 
ated from the pump piston-rod by suitable 
mechanism, and the said oscillating flat-faced 
Valve las a balanced action. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure l repre 
sents a partial vertical longitudinal section of 
a steam pumping-engine embracing my im 
provements; Fig. 2, a vertical cross-section 
taken through the oscillating flat-faced valve 
attachment. Fig. 3 is the auxiliary steam-chest 
for the oscillating flat-faced valve; Fig. 4, an 
elevation showing the connection for operating 
the oscillating flat-faced valve attachment. 
Fig. 5 is a top view of the valve-seat. 
The steam-cylinder A has an ordinary pis 
ton, B, connected by a piston-rod, b, to the 
pump-piston. 
On the cylinder A is secured the steam-chest 
C, in which moves the piston-valve D, having 
a head, dd, at each end, and between them 
the slide-valve E (of D form) is connected to 
the piston-valve by an upward projection, e. 
The slide-valve is supplied with the ordinary 
exhaust-cavity, and moves on the valve-face of 
the cylinder, through which the steam-inlet 
and exhaust ports lead to the interior of the 
cylinder. These ports at at are each provided 
with auxiliary or branch ports c c', and the 
usual exhaust-port, fisarranged in the center. 
In the branch ports suitable plug-valves may 
be arranged to close or regulate the ports or 
openings. 
On one side of the main steam-chest C is ar 
ranged an auxiliary steam-chest, F, of circular 
form, and having a flat face, upon which an os 
To the cover of the chest F is secured a lug, 65 
cillating flat valve, G, moves. This valve is 
made of semicircular or circular form, and is 
provided at its rear side with a cavity, g, while 
on its opposite side a stem, g, is attached, 
which passes through a suitable stuffing-box. 55 
on the back or cover E of steam-chest F. The 
valve fits against the cover of the chest, as well 
as the valve-seat, and thus forms a groundjoint, 
but may have springs arranged on its stem to 
force or hold the valve to its seat, if desired. 6o 
In the seat of this valve chest are arranged 
two ports, h. h", through which the steam is al 
ternately admitted to the main chest and valve 
as it is oscillated. 
l, which serves as a guide for the valve stem 
or rod H. This stem is provided with gibs l, 
which alternately strike against a pendentarm, 
I, secured to the stem of the valve G, and thus 
move it in opposite directions, and admit the 7 O 
steam to the outer ends of the valve piston 
heads. 
A small hole, i, is drilled in the seat or chest 
F through to the main chest, to admit steam 
to the space between the two piston-heads of 75 
the main valve, and from here it is admitted 
and exhausted by the D slide-valve to and 
from the main cylinder. 
The valve-stem H is connected at its oppo 
site end to an arm, K, on the cross-head Li, which 8o 
is secured to the piston-rod, and it is guided 
by a guide, M, attached to the stealin and pump 
cylinders. The piston-valve is provided with 
a stem projecting at one end through the head 
of the chest, by which it can be adjusted, and 85 
does not require any packing. 
The auxiliary chest is bored out and faced 
off on the inner side for the oscillating-valve 
seat, and said valve is ground off on both sides 
inside to fit said seat, and outside to fit the 9o 
head, so that there shall be no end-play to said 
valve, and making a balanced valve. This valve 
is also turned off at the circumference to fit in 
side of the auxiliary chest. 
that the oscillating valve, having a flat face and 
moving against flat surfaces, forms a balanced 
valve, allowing the valve to work free when 
under pressure; or the valve can be used 
without admitting any steam to it. Moreover, too 
The advantages of my Valve attachment are, 95 
O 
IS 
35 
45 
So 
2 
- 
- 
242,440 
55 
ranged in horizontal relation to each other, as 
shown in Fig. 3, so as to cause the slide-valve 
E to open the whole length of the port at once, 
and thereby allow the pump to run very slow 
and still change its stroke properly. 
The shape of the cavity g in the valve G is 
made to suit the ports in the seat. 
I claim 
1. In a single-cylinder steam pumping-en 
gine, an oscillating flat valve arranged in an 
auxiliary steam-chest formed upon one side of 
the main steam-chest, and having direct com 
munication with it, substantially as and for 65 
the purpose specified. 
2. In a steam pumping-engine, an oscillat 
ing flat valve arranged in an auxiliary steam 
chest formed upon one side of the main steam 
chest, and having direct communication with 
it, in combination with a piston-valve and the 
steam-cylinder A, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. In a single-cylinder steam pumping-en 
gine, an oscillating flat valve arranged in an 
auxiliary steam-chest formed upon one side of 
the main steam-chest, the seat of said valve 
having the oblong ports hl', whereby to cause 
the slide-valve E to be operated so as to cause 
it to open the whole length of the port at once, 
substantially as described, for the purpose 
specified. 
4. In a steam pumping-engine, the combina 
tion of the flat oscillating valve G, provided 
with a stem, t1, and pendent arm I, with the 
rod H, having gibs ll, and the fixed guide k 
for said rod, all constructed and arranged sub 
stantially as specified. 
5. In a steam pumping-engine, the combi 
nation, With the slide-valve E and its stealin 
moved piston, lhaving piston - beads at each 
end and arranged in relation to such valve, 
substantially as described, of an oscillating flat 
valve provided with a face - recess, and ar 
ranged in an auxiliary steam-chest communi 
cating with the main steam-chest, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my handl in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
75 
95 
DAVID EVANS. 
Witnesses: 
W. T. REID, 
A. A. HOOD. 
O. 
25 
35 
it is not liable to get out of order, as it is very 
simple in construction, avoiding tappets or 
other valve-gear, as well as auxiliary slide 
Valves. It moves very little in either direc 
tion, and, of course, wears very little, as well 
on its faces as on the stem. All its parts are 
easily accessible, and no steam-pressure is re 
(uired to keep the valve against the seat. It 
has no dead-centers, and can be started or 
stopped at any point of its stroke. 
In using the pump under heavy pressure, 
steam is not admitted to oscillating valve. 
When the oscillating valve opens the port at 
one end of piston-valve it frees that end, and, 
there being no packing on the piston-valve, 
the steam passes over the other end of piston 
Valve and causes valve to move to the other 
end, that is free. In using the oscillating valve 
in this way I leave space between valve and 
head, and slip a spiral siring over stem on 
Valve, the spring setting valve against seat. 
In this way the oscillating valve works free 
under any pressure. 
The operation is as follows: Steam is admit 
ted to the auxiliary chest, and through the 
small hole i to the main steam-chest, and as 
the flat valve oscillates and uncovers the ports 
h h' the steam passes alternately to outer ends 
of the piston-valve heads d d" and moves the 
piston-valve and D-valve with it in opposite 
directions. The steam then passes from the 
space between the piston-heads, through the 
regular steam-ports at at', into the main cylin 
der as the ports are alternately uncovered by 
the slide-valve E, which is moved, of course, 
by the two piston-heads, which are moved 
only by steam-pressure, and without outside 
tappets on Valve-gear. 
By arranging the branch ports c c' as shown 
a steam-cushion is formed in the cylinder to 
prevent shocks, and giving a steady move 
ment of the engine and pump. The steam is 
exhausted through the exhaust-cavity of the 
D-valve and central exhaust-port, f, into the 
atmosphere. 
In a circular form of oscillating valve no 
steam is used on said valve, but depends on the 
exhaust. When steam is used on such valve 
small holes are drilled in its face to admit 
Steam to ports. 
It is important that the ports h h' in the 
alve-seat F should be oblong, and be ar 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242540.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 242,540. 
 
 
a 1. 
 
  
 
 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
E. H. JOHNSON. 
Heeling Machine, 
Patented June 7, 1881. 
HIN 
2I 
i 
 
Przasses. 66/247 
al-67%-4, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 242,54 O. 
SS 
Patented June 7, 1881. 
*NSNIH-NN 13. 
%IHIZE 
S 
N 
so 22 
22 
Zzz, Z 
E. H., JOHNSON, 
Heeling Machine, 
 
 
N S. 
N N ar 
72%zevser. 6. 6. 6,42. 
42, -6.2%-6, 
Z722/622427 
T 12, 422, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EDWIN H. JOHNSON, OF BROOKFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
HEELNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 242,540, dated June 7, 1881. 
Application filed April 13, 1881. (No model.) 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
To all chOn it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWINEI. JoHNSON, of 
Brookfield, in the county of Worcester and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Heeling-Machines, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act specification and description. 
The object of my invention is to trim the 
front face of the heel of the boot or shoe while 
it is in position in the machine for having its 
Outer edge trimmed; and my invention is 
adapted to be attached to or connected with 
the machine known as the McKay Heeling 
Machine. 
I accomplish the object above mentioned by 
the mechanism substantially hereinafter (le 
scribed, and illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, making a part of this specification, 
in which 
Figure I is a side view of my invention, 
adapted to be attached to, and operated in 
connection with, the McKay heeling-machine. 
Fig.II is a plan view of the same. Fig. III is a 
vertical section of the knife and gage-carriage 
at line N, Fig. IV, showing a side view of the 
knife, its guide, and its gage pivoted to said 
carriage. Fig. IV is an end view of the knife 
Fig. 
and its gage as pivoted in the carriage. 
Vis a reverse plan view of the horizontal plate 
between the guideways, and which forms a 
part of the frame. Fig. VI is a vertical trans 
verse section at line H of Fig. V. Fig. VII is a 
plan view of the disk or crank-pin which op 
erates the carriage containing the knife and 
guide. Fig.VIII is a vertical transverse section 
at line I of Fig. VII. Fig. IX is a plan view of 
the operating-Wheel, having a segmental gear 
which engages with a toothed wheel, which 
actuates the knife and its carriage. Fig. X is 
a vertical transverse section of the same at line 
A. Fig.XIis a plan view of the toothed wheel 
which actuates the knife and knife-carriage, 
and showing also the lock for locking said 
wheel in a stationary position, and the mech 
anism for operating the lock; and Fig.XII is a 
vertical transverse section of the same atline G. 
In the drawings, L represents what may be 
a part of an ordinary McKay heeling-machine, 
to which is secured a block, B, for supporting 
the heel of a boot or shoe, the latter being 
placed on the top of said block, as shown at F 
in Figs. I and II. In the ordinary McKay 
heeling-machines, this block and the heel to be 
trimmed being stationary, the trimming-knife 
is made to pass around the heel, trimming off 
and shaping the outer edges of the heel, ex 
cept, however, its front end or face, which is 
trimmed by hand, either before or after its 
curved edge is trimmed. 
1 represents two uprights fixed to the part 
L of the machine, and extending upward par 
allel with each other, with a horizontal plate, 
28, secured to and between said uprights. A 
pivot or shaft, 20, (shown in dotted lines in 
Fig. I.) has its bearing at its lower end in the 
part L, and extends up through the horizontal 
plate 28, the crank or disk 13 being secured 
firmly to its upper end, and the toothed wheel 
15 being also firmly secured to the lower part 
of said pivot or shaft. A small portion of this 
wheel 15, at its periphery, is unprovided with 
teeth, as shown af, 35 in Fig. XI, and a yoke 
or latch, as 21, is arranged to slide upon the 
upper part of this toothed wheel, being held 
in place by any suitable guides or flanges, as 
36, one end of this latch being provided with 
a projecting catch, as 22, and the other end of 
the latch being pivoted to a lever, as 16, hinged 
at one end to the wheel 15, and whose free end 
projects out over that part of said wheel which 
is unprovided with teeth, and the movement 
of which lever is limited by a stud or projec 
tion, as 17, on said wheel, all as shown clearly 
in IFigs. XI and XII. 
The horizontal plate 28 has a circular recess, 
as 29, made in its lower side, with a small re 
cess, as 30, extending outward therefrom, as 
shown clearly in Figs. V and VI, to receive the 
projecting catch 22, which is forced into said 
recess by a spring pressing against the latch 
21, or against the lever 16, pivoted to said latch. 
In the drawings, a disk, 13, is shown as se 
cured to the upper end of the shaft 20, with a 
small rectangular disk or plate, 27, pivoted 
thereto, which engages in a straight groove or 
channel, 26, made transversely across the lower 
side of the plate 23, as shown in side view in 
Fig. I, and in dotted lines in Fig. II; but in 
practice an ordinary crank may be used, as 
this disk and its plate 27 perform the same 
function as a crank. The upper plate, 23, may 
have a dovetail projection extending trans 
versely across its upper side, with a corre 
sponding transverse dovetail recess in the 
45 
SO 
y 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
2 
242,540 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
85 
lower side of the knife-carriage 9, so that the 
latter may be moved laterally and secured in 
its desired position by one or more set-screws, 
as 25, turned through the lower part of the 
carriage 9 and against the dovetail projection, 
as shown in Figs. I and II. 
The knife-shanka is pivoted at one end, as 
at 7, in the carriage 9, with a spring between 
the shank and its carriage to press the knife 
upward, and the knife a is made, preferably, 
with its edge from its upper point inclined 
downward and backward, and may be secured 
to the shank at by a slot in the latter, and 
screw turned through it into the knife, as 
shown at a, or in any other convenient man 
ner. The knife-shank a may also be elongated, 
as at a', to assist in holding the knife firm in 
commencing its work. 
The guide 3 is pivoted to the knife-shank a 
at 11, with an adjusting - screw turned up 
through a portion of the shank, or through a 
projection thereon, as at 8, upon which the 
guide rests, so as to adjust the guide to any 
desired height with reference to the upper 
point of the knife a. 
A shaft, 4, has its bearings in the uprights 
1, so that it may be adjusted lengthwise, and 
secured by one or more set-screws turned into 
the uprights and against the shafts, and a 
guide, 5, provided with a slot, 6, in its forward 
end, is arranged to slide along this shaft 4, and 
be secured in any desired position by a set 
screw turned through said guide and against 
the shaft, this guide assisting to steady the 
knife in doing its work. A piece, b, projects 
upward just in front of the heel-block B, leav 
ing a small space, 37, between the heel-block 
and said upwardly-projecting piece b, and in 
front of the knife-shank, of a width to just ad 
mit the latter without much friction. The 
guide 3 is located beneath the shaft 4, and its 
free end is curved upward, so that its extreme 
upper end may be adjusted to the same hori 
zontal plane as the upper point of the knife a, 
as shown in Fig. I. 
The wheel D, provided with the segmental 
gear E, is arranged to turn or rotate upon the 
bed L, the heel-block B remaining stationary, 
and at one end of the gear E a tooth, e, is piv 
oted, at e', to the wheel D, with a small spring 
pressing outward against the inside of said 
pivoted tooth to hold it out, as shown in Figs. 
I, II, and IX, so that when pressed in and the 
pressure removed the pivoted tooth will quickly 
move out again. At the opposite end of the 
segmental gear E is a dog, 14, also pivoted to 
the wheel D, but so as to move in a vertical 
direction with a spring beneath it, so that 
when pressed down and the pressure removed 
the dog will move up again into the position 
shown in full lines in Fig. X. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
The knife-carriage 9 is adjusted along the dove 
tail way 24 to the desired position, and there 
secured by the set-screws 25, and the guide 5 
is adjusted along the shaft 4 to such a position 
that its slot 6 is directly in line with the knife 
a', and the gage 3 is adjusted by the screw 8, 
so that the upper end of the gage shall cause 
the upper point of the knife to pass across the 7o 
heel along the lower surface of the shank of 
the boot or shoe. As soon as the knife of the 
ordinary machine has finished the trimming 
of the curved edge of the heel the wheel D, 
being in the position shown in Fig. II, is turned 
in the direction indicated by the arrow, and 
the pivoted dog 14 first strikes against the 
projecting end of the lever 16, and moves the 
latter over against the pin or stud projecting 
upward from the wheel 15. As the latch 21 is 
pivoted to the lever 16 in this movement of 
the latter the latch is also drawn in the same 
direction, and the catch or projection 22 there 
on is withdrawn from its recess 30 in the lower 
side of the horizontal plate 28, and the wheel 
15 is turned a little, by the pressure of the le 
Ver against the stud or pin 17, until the catch 
22 is carried away from its position in front of 
the recess 30. The wheel 15 is then free to 
turn, and as it is rotated by the rotation.of the 
wheel D it communicates its rotary movement, 
through the medium of the shaft 20, to the 
disk or crank 13, which, by its pin or plate 27, 
causes the carriage 23 to move in the guide 
ways 2 of the uprights 1 forward toward the 
heel-block B, upon which the heel of the boot 
or shoe is placed to be trimmed. As the car 
riage is thus moved forward the upper end of 
the gage 3 strikes against the edge of the shank 
of the boot or shoe on its under side, which 
causes the upper point of the moving knife a 
to strike against the side of the heel, near its 
front face, at the same or at the desired height, 
the guide a' on the knife-shank entering the 
space between the heel-block B and the up 
right part b, and the knife is steadied and 
held firm while making its cut in trimming off 
the front face of the heel. In passing across 
beneath the shank of the boot or shoe the up 
per end of the guide 3, impinging against the IIo 
lower side of the shank, causes the knife to 
make the same movement and trims off the 
front of the heel up to the lower side of the 
shank. 
all its teeth E have engaged with the teeth of 
the wheel 15 the latter will have then made 
one revolution, and the pivoted tooth e on the 
wheel D, which projects out farther than any 
other tooth on said wheel, being the last to I2O 
pass the last tooth on the wheel 15, the said 
last tooth is thrown or moved so far that the 
wheel D may be rotated back again into the 
position shown in Fig. II without its teeth en 
gaging with those of the wheel 15, and in each 
half-revolution of the wheel D and back again 
the wheel15 is caused to make one revolution, 
bringing that part of the latter wheel which 
is unprovided with teeth, as also the lever 16, 
hinged thereto, into the position shown in Fig. 
II, so that the wheel 15 is caused to revolve 
intermittently in the same direction; and at 
When the wheel D has been revolved so that I 15 
I 30 
I 25 
95 
OC 
IOS 
 
242,540 
3. 
IO 
5 
each revolution the knife a is caused to make 
a forward movement to trim off the front face 
of the heel placed on the block B, and then to 
move back again to its position shown in Figs. 
I and II. Every time the wheel D is rotated 
back to the position shown in Fig. II the piv. 
oted dog 14 rides against the under side of the 
end of the lever 16 and springs up again on 
passing it, and is then in position, when the 
motion of the wheel is reversed, to strike 
against the end of the lever 16, to unlock and 
move the wheel 15, to operate the knife-carriage 
and knife. 
It will thus be seen that when the boot or 
shoe is in position on a machine for having 
its outer edge trimmed, by having my inven 
tion attached to the same machine, its front 
face may be trimmed also with little or no 
trouble, and very quickly, and with no change 
in the working parts of the McKay machine 
other than the attachment of my invention, 
and the attachment of the segmental teeth E 
to the Wheel D. 
Of course I do not limit myself to the pre 
cise construction of all the parts as herein 
above described. For example, instead of the 
disk 13 and its plate 27 to engage in the slot 
or groove in the under side of the part 23 of 
the knife-carriage, it may be a simple crank, 
as hereinbefore mentioned, and the mode or 
means of adjustment of the different parts 
may be changed to suit the construction and 
arrangement of the machine to which the in 
vention is to be attached without departing in 
the least from the invention. 
In practice, instead of making the recess 30 
in the lower side of the horizontal plate to re 
ceive the projecting catch 22, this recess may 
be made on the inside of the frame or upright 
1, with an incline on the side against which 4o 
the catch may ride to enter said recess, as 
shown at M, in which case the horizontal plate 
28, and also the disk 13, may be dispensed 
with, and the pin 19, to which the lever 16 is 
hung, may project upward into the groove or 45 
channel in the lower side of the knife-carriage 
and serve as a crank-pin to actuate said car 
riage. 
If it should be desired to give the wheel D 
a continuous rotating movement, instead of 5 
the vibrating rotary movement hereinbefore 
described, it may be done, and the result will 
be precisely the same, in which case, however, 
the tooth e and the dog 14 may be made per 
manent or fixed, instead of being pivoted, 
the tooth e in that case serving to throw the 
tootled wheel 15 far enough around to be 
locked by the latch 22, and the dog 14 serving 
to strike the lever 16 in advance of the teeth 
Eand unlock said wheel 15, so that it may be 
rotated by said teeth. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
In a heeling-machine, the combination of a 
knife pivoted to a reciprocating carriage and 
adapted to move in the plane of the front face 
of the heel, a gage for regulating the path of 
said knife, an operating-wheel provided with 
segmental gear engaging with an intermit 
tently-revolving toothed wheel, and a crank- 7 O 
pin for giving a reciprocating movement to the 
knife-carriage and knife pivoted thereto, sub 
stantially as described. 
65 
55 
EDWIN F. JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
T. A. CURTIS, 
CHAS. H. WOOD. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242641.txt	(Model.) , 
- 
No. 242,641. 
C. C. & J. R. HENDERSON. 
Cloth Measuring Machine. 
Patented June 7, 1881. 
- Y. 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: - 
(6. c1622-244 
6, T race 
ATTORNEYS. 
INVENTOR; 
6%zz earc 
246 2 e(erveze/ 
M 
N. peers. Photo-Lithographer, washington. p. c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES C. HENDERSON AND JACOB R. HENDERSON, OF ARKADELPHIA, 
ARKANSAS. 
CLOTH-MEASURING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 242,641, dated June 7, 1881. 
Application filed November 26, 1880. (Model.) 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CHARLES C. EdENDER 
SON and JACOB R. HENDERSON, of Arkadel 
phia, Clark county, and State of Arkansas, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Machines for Measuring Bagging and 
other Materials, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Our improvements relate to machites for 
winding off and measuring bagging and heavy 
bolt goods, and have for their object to save 
the time and labor required in doing such work 
by hand. Further, the object is specially to 
relieve the counting-shaft of weight from the 
passing Web, and to construct counting mech 
anism adapted for measuring large quantities 
at Once. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of the machine partially in 
section. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the 
same, and Fig. 3 is a face view of the register 
ing-dial. 
Similar letters of reference indicate core 
sponding parts. 
AA are standards fixed to a base, B, or they 
may be otherwise supported. At the upper 
ends of standards A are fixed cross-bars a ca, 
in which tension-rollers b are fitted, there be 
ing two rollers, bat each end of bars a, so that 
there is a pair of such rollers at each side of 
the machine. In the standards is journaled 
a shaft, c, on which is fixed a circular disk, d, 
having pins on its edge. The shaft c is placed 
so that the upper edge of disk d is about on 
a straight line from the front rollers, b, to s 
rollers at the back, the pins being thereby in 
position for being caught by the web passing 
across without there being any weight on shaft 
c from the material. One end of shaft c is 
fitted with a worm, e, projecting outside the 
standard into a box, f, in which box, on an 
arbor, g', is fitted a pinion, g, that engages 
with the worm. On the arborg, at the out 
side of the box, is a loose dial, h, and fixed on 
the arbor is a hand or pointer, i. The dial h 
is marked in yards, and has numerous holes 
near its edge, which allow a pin to be inserted 
into the side of box f, to hold the dial after it 
is turned to bring the Zero-point to the hand. 
This mechanism will register the turns of shaft 
c, and is specially adapted for indicating large 
quantities by a single turn of the pointer. In 
measuring smaller quantities-as, for instance, 
in retailing goods-a quicker-acting counter 
can be used. 
On the lower part of standards A are fixed 
cross-bars k, which carry at the front of the 
machine the windlass-shaft B, by which the 
material is to be wound. The shaft B is made 
in three portions, the two end portions, ll, 
supported in cross-bars k, and middle bar or 
board, m, that is connected removably to the 
ends of the portions ll. The end portions are 
each fitted with two plates, n, having toothed 
edges, between which the end of board or bar 
m is clamped by a screw, n, tapped into the 
plates. This construction permits ready re 
moval of the bar or board in with the roll of 
imaterial. 
The rear ends of cross-bars lc sustain a rigid 
bar, o, over which the material passes to the ten 
sion-rollers b. This bar may be dispensed with 
when the machine is used for heavy material, 
and, if desired, the ends of arms k may have 
pins p, for stretching the bagging while a new 
roll is being attached to the end of an ex 
hausted roll. 
In operation the roll of material is placed 
upon the floor, the end drawn from the inside 
over one of the lower rollers, under and half 
around the adjacent upper roller, across the 
face of the disk, over and half around the other 
upper roller, and over and within the other 
lower roller, down to the windlass-shaft C, so 
that the upper rollers serve to hold said mate 
rial within reach of the pins of the disk with 
out allowing it to bear upon the disk itself, 
while the lower rollers serve to keep the ma 
terial at a greater tension than would other 
Wise be the case. As the material is wound 
on the board in the shaft c is turned and the 
quantity drawn over indicated on the dial. 
The dial is in convenient position for observa 
tion, and the pointer moving slowly a large 
number of yards will be registered in a single 
The separate portions l l of shaft being ca 
pable of end movement in the supports k, a 
bar or board, m, suited to the width of mate 
rial can be used. 
- 
revolution. 
- 
95 
OO 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
242,64. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
The combination, with the disk d, carrying 
5 peripheral pins and arranged upon a rotary 
shaft, c, of the two pairs of rolls b b, arranged 
on opposite sides of the upper part of disks, 
serving both to hold the cloth above the disk, 
but within reach of the pins, and to regulate 
the tension of the cloth, as shown and de- to 
scribed. 
CEIARLES C. HENDERSON. 
JACOB R. HENDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
R. A. LOCKE, 
G. H. LOCKE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242741.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 242,741. 
E. W. BANKS. 
Fire Kindling. 
Patented June 14, 1881. 
 
N. PeFERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EDWARD W. BANKS, OF DECATUR, ILLINOIS. 
FIRE-KINDLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 242,741, dated June 14, 1881. 
Application filed April 26, 1881. (No specimens.) 
O 
2C) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD W. BANKs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Deca 
tur, in the county of Macon and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Improve. 
ment in Fire-Kindlings, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention consists of a fire-kindling con 
structed substantially as shown and described, 
first, by stringing a series of cobs on a wire 
and formed into sticks or bundles, as shown; 
and second, by immersing the device thus 
formed into hot rosin. I attain these objects 
by the devices shown in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a fire-kindler in a twisted 
form. Fig. 2 represents a fire-kindler in a 
spiral form. 
Fig. 3 is an end view of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 represents a fire-kindler in a bundle. 
A represents the cob, and B the wire. The 
wile in each view is shown as a means of se 
curing the cobs together into the various forms 
show in-as in Fig. 1 is shown a series of cobs 
broken in short pieces and strung on the wire, 
the ends brought together and fastened, and 
the two strands are twisted, as shown. In Figs. 
3 and 2 the cobs are strung on wire, as in Fig. 
1, but are formed into a coil or spiral like a 
spring and are made any desired length to suit 
the stove. 
In Fig. 4 is shown a square pile bound to 
gether with wire. This wire is designed in 
each of the various forms to hold the cobs to 
gether until they are consumed, and prevents 
their falling through the grate or packing to-35 
gether and smothering out. 
It is obvious that other forms may be adopted 
for the kindler, such as weaving a number of 
strands together, or stringing them and twist 
ing a number of them together. 
The principle of my device is in the combi 
nations of the cobs and wire strung, woven, or 
bound together, and the articles thus formed 
immersed into a hot bath of rosin, pitch, tar, 
or other combustible substance, so that they 
may be readily lighted. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
cobs strung on a wire and two or more strands 
twisted or braided together, forming a stick, 
substantially as shown, and for the purpose de 
1. A fire-kindling consisting of a series of So 
45 
scribed. 
. 
2. A fire-kindling consisting of cobs formed 55 
into square, cubic, or oblong bundles and bound 
together with wire, and having a coating of 
rosin, pitch, or other combustible substance, 
as set forth. 
with wire into any form desired, for the pur 
pose described. 
3. Colbs strung, bound, or woven together 6o 
EDWARD W. BANKS. 
Witnesses: 
J. GEO. STAUFFER, 
JoHN B. BIXBY. 
 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242841.txt	(No Model.) 
A. G. PAUL, Jr. 
Car Axle Box. 
No. 242,841. 
Patented June 14, 1881. 
  
isy " " 
N 
' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
6 sess 
N 
a - 
N N 
WITNESSES 
74-6-2- 
INVENTOR 
A. G.azz, A. 
, AJ 764 
ATTORNEY. 
 
 
s 
; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTEIONY G. PAUL, JR, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
THIRD TO JAMES B. ARTHUR, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR-AXLE BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 242,841, dated June 14, 1881. 
Application filed March 24, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANTHONY G. PAUL, Jr., 
of Baltimore city, State of Maryland, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Car-Axle Boxes; and I hereby declare the 
same to be fully, clearly, and exactly described 
as follows, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central vertical sectional view 
of the box, the axle and brass being shown in 
elevation; and Fig.2 is a central horizontal sec 
tional view of the device. 
My invention relates to axle-boxes for rail 
way-cars; and it has for its object to provide 
an end bearing for the axle, designed to limit 
the longitudinal motion of the same and obvi 
ate the wear of the shoulders of the axle and 
brass which has heretofore resulted from the 
usual construction and arrangement of these 
parts. 
In the act ompanying drawings, 1 is the axle, 
and 2 the box, the latter being provided with 
the usual hiliged cover and boss 3, that secures 
the brass 4. The construction of the entire de 
vice, as shown, exceptin regard to certain par 
ticulars, hereinafter more particularly pointed in ordinary use. 
out, is of the usual standard Baltimore & Ohio 
pattern. 
slotted on either side, and in these slots fit 
the lugs 6 of the end bearings, 5. The front, 
8, of the box is covered by a plate, 7, having 
a dovetail boss, 9, which slides in correspond 
ingly-formed guides in the front of the box, as 
shown, and is, secured to the box by bolts and 
nuts at either side. The face of the bearings 
5is made convex, by preference hemispherical, 
and brings up, when the axle moves longitudi 
nally with reference to the car, against the in 
ner face of the boss 9. The distance between. 
the ends of the axle-bearings and the bosses 
9 at either side is less than that which sepa 
rates the shoulders of the axle and the brasses, 
so that the cutting of the shoulders, which 
sooner or later resulted from the usual con 
struction of parts, is wholly obviated by my in 
provement. The end-thrust of the axle against 
the boss, which invariably occurs on one end 
of the axle in rounding a curve, is resisted by 
the dovetail conformation of the boss to the 
front of the box, and by the bolt-fastenings at 
either side, so that breakage is practically out 
of the question. The liability of its occurrence 
is manifestly much less than with the usual 
form of box, as in the latter the resistance 
namely, that of the brasses on the shoulders 
of the axle-is above the line of thrust, where 
as with my device it is opposite the same. 
The bearing 5 may be readily removed for 
renewal, it being only necessary to unbolt the 
face 7 and slide it out of its guides, when the 
end of the axle is exposed. 
The improvement 
lossesses one feature of paramountimportance. . 
It involves no revolution of the construction 
of the box, but is readily applicable to those 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1. In combination with the axle having slots 
in its terminal collar, the removable bearing 
5, having lugs 6, and the boss 9, as set forth. 
2. In combination with the axle having slot 
ted terminal collar, and bearing5, provided with 
lugs 6, the box having front plate, 7, and dove 
tail boss 9, bolted to the box, as set forth. 
ANTHONY G. PAUL, JR. 
The flange on the end of the axle is I claim is 
Witnesses: 
- 
MURRAY HANSON, 
CHAS. R. DITMAN, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US242942.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 242,942. 
 
T. W. LANE 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Magnet O Generator, 
- 
Patented June 14, 1881. 
7247 vesses. 
A6/hazazz-1 
/Cf (2-62-27-2 (7. 
Z7zz-e 7zfo/ . 
Z7% o77 a 2-s 14tre 
-6A/-73 
1 Aas. 
T. W. LAN E. 
Magneto Generator, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented June 14, 1881. 
(No Model.). 
No. 242,942. 
 
12 A-7 vesses'. 
A42/zze-1 
7%,762-ea- 
Z7zz-e Zz-Zoz - 
Z 7zozras' Ph. Zaz-e-, 
aw 7-7%r ?o. -- 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS W. LANE, OF BOSTON, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND CHARLES 
WILLIAMS, JR, OF SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
MAGNETO-GENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 242,942, dated June 14, 1881. 
Application filed April 8, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS W. LANE, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain improve 
ments in Magneto-Generators, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to magneto-generators 
of the class used for signaling in telegraphic 
and telephonic circuits, and has for its object 
to provide improved means for automatically 
placing the generator into and out of circuit. 
The invention is designed, particularly, for 
use in a magneto-generator in which a spring 
retracted flexible strip or tape is employed 
to rotate the armature, as shown in Letters 
Patent of the United States issued to me April 
19, 1881, No.240,42S, my presentimprovements 
enabling the knob or handle of the said tape 
at the Salme time it is pulled to rotate the ar'- 
mature, to also open the circuit into which the 
currents generated by the rotation of the ar 
mature are sent, and when released to auto 
matically cut the generator out of the circuit. 
To this end my invention consists in the im 
provements which I will now proceed to de 
scribe and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure I represents 
a plan view of a magneto-generator with the 
cover removed. Fig. 2 represents a section on 
line a ac, Fig. 1, showing the apparatus at rest 
or out of circuit. Fig. 3 represents a similar 
section, showing the apparatus in circuit. Fig. 
4 represents a modification. Fig. 5 represents 
a diagram of the generator and circuits. 
The same letters relate to the same parts in 
all the figures. 
In the drawings, Mrepresents a magneto-gen 
erator of the Siemens armature type inclosed 
in a Suitable box or casing. Between the poles 
of the permanent magnets n n n is the ordi 
nary rotating, Siemens armature, the arbor Al 
of which has at one end the fiction-pulley d, 
and bears at its opposite end upon the spring 
S. The mechanism for rotating the armature 
is the same as that shown and described in 
my above - named application-viz., first, a 
grooved wheel, ct, in frictional contact with 
the pulley d, and supported in a bearing-stud, 
A', and provided on one side with a rigidly 
affixed ratchet, '; second, a drum, B, sup 
ported on the stud A', and provided with a 
dog, S, engaging with the ratchet '', and with 
a spring (not shown in the drawings) connect 
ing the drum to the standard, adapted to ro 
tate the drum backwardly, so that its dog will 
slip over the teeth of the ratchet '; and, third, 
a flexible metallic strip or tape, l, wound 
upon the drum and adapted, when pulled from 
the drum, to rotate the latter forward, so that 
its dog will engage the teeth of the ratchet 
and rotate the same, together with the wheel 
a, pulley d, and the Siemens armature, the 
spring of the drum retracting the tape when 
it is released, so that its knob or lhandle p is 
raised automatically after each operation, and 
is ready for a fresh start. 
e is a metal stop or plate, against which the 
knob p is firmly drawn when the tape is in its 
normal condition-viz., retracted, as last de 
scribed. The knob p is made of hard rubber 
or any suitable insulating material; but its end 
or part p", which bears against the plate e, is of 
metal. 
The operation is as follows: In its normal 
condition (the knob p being in contact with the 
plate e) the generator is out of the main-line 
circuit, and an electric current coming in from 
line 1 (see Fig. 5) would pass through a short 
circuit by the metallic surface of the genera 
tor, arbor A, drum B, metallic tape b, plate 
e, wire w, through a signal-bell, S', into line 2, 
the metallic end of the knob p, held firmly to 
the stop-plate e, making an electrical contact 
with the said plate. When it is desired to 
send a current to line the manipulator pulls 
the knob p outwardly, causing the metallic 
tape b to unwind, and to rotate the armature 
and generate electricity, as described, and at 
the same time automatically, break the short 
circuit and cut the generator into the main 
line, over which the currentis to be sent. For, 
as will be seen by reference to Fig. 5, when 
the knob is pulled out its electrical contact 
with the plate e is broken, and the circuit is 
from the generator M, through the spring S, 
wire ac', through bell S', if desired, into main 
line 2. Thus by one operation the currents 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
7 O 
75 
90 
95. 
2 
242,942 
IO 
are generated and the generator is adapted to 
send said currents into the circuit. It will be 
readily seen that when the knob p is released 
and allowed to rest against the plate e the 
generator is thereby automatically cut out of 
the main-line circuit and the short circuit is 
again established. 
A modification is shown in Fig. 4 which 
enables the tape b to be made of non-metallic 
material, said modification consisting of a 
bell-crank lever, ll, pivoted in a support, h, 
which is fixed to the casing or box. A spring, 
s', bears against one arm, l, of the lever, caus 
ing the other arm, l, to press against the me 
tallic end p' of the knob p, while at the same 
time the arm l rests or bears upon the metal 
lic surface of the generator M. In this form, 
as before stated, the tapel may be of material 
other than metallic, for normally the electric 
path or circuit will be from line 1 by the me 
tallic surface of the generator, arm l, arm l, 
metal end p', to line 2, and when the knob and 
tape are withdrawn in the act of generating 
electricity the part p' parts from the arm l, 
and the spring s" forces the arm l away from 
the contact with the generator, thus causing 
the electric current to pass by spring S of the 
armature to line 2, as before described. 
As I have a pending application for Letters 
Patent of the United States embracing a broad 
claim for an automatically-broken short cir 
cuit around a generator, I do not make such 
a claim in the present application. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A magneto - generator of the class de 
scribed, having a metallic closing plate or 
stop, and a flexible spring-retracted armature 
operating tape or strip having a knob adapted 
to normally make contact with said plate to 
establish a short circuit, and to automatically 
break said circuit when pulled to operate the 
armature, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the generator M, the 
armature-rotating mechanism having the knob 
p, and the closing-plate e, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed inly name 
to this specification, in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses, this 5th day of April, A. 
D. 1SSI. 
THOMAS W. LANIE. 
Witnesses: 
H. G. WADLIN, 
C. F. BROWN. 
35 
45 
SO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243042.txt	No. 243,042. 
P, HAYDEN. 
Bridle Bit. 
Patented June 14, 1881. 
-17 
N. PeFERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
Zeaz-Zazz/6%zo, 
%-6-4-3 
/2-66. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
PETER HAYDEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BRDLE BIT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 243,042, dated June 14, 1881. 
Application filed May 12, 1881. (Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER HAYDEN, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at New York, 
in the county of New York and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Bridle-Bits, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide inn 
proved means for enabling a person to hold a 
horse or other driving animal at the head of 
the latter; also, to adapt said means to consti 
tute a device for guiding the animal to the 
right or to the left, and at the same time to 
prevent the bit from being drawn through or 
one of its ends being drawn into the animal's 
mouth. These objects I attain by means of a 
curved bar that is rigid with the mouth-piece 
of the bit and formed to pass down the sides 
and across the under jaw of the animal, so as 
to form a combined bail, guide, and guard-bar. 
By such means the bail can be grasped and 
held so as to place the animal under subjec 
tion; also, neither end of the bit can be drawn 
into the animal's mouth, and in either riding 
or driving, by simply drawing upon either rein, 
according to the direction in which it is de 
sired the animal shall go, that side of the bail 
at the end of the bit drawn back by the rein 
will press against the side of the animal's jaw, 
which in effect constitutes the fulcrum for a 
lever composed of the bit and the bail, and 
thereby places the animal under easy control 
of the rider or driver, and compels it to turn 
or deviate from the line of travel as desired. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a horse with a bit provided with my 
improvement, said view also illustrating the 
way in which a person will employ the said 
improvement while holding the horse at its 
head. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the bit 
with my improvement applied. 
A indicates an ordinary stiff bridle-bit, the 
mouth - piece B of which can be straight or 
bent, according to the preference of the manu 
facturer. The end pieces, C, of the mouth 
piece are either formed with said mouth-piece 
or secured thereto in any suitable way, and 
are provided With properly-sized perforations 
for the rein-rings D, which pass through them. 
The bail E is made yoke-shaped and secured 
to the mouth-piece bypassing its ends through 
perforations in the mouth-piece, near the ends 
of the latter, and then staving up or heading 
the ends of the bail. The said bail will be rig. 
6o 
idly connected to the mouth-piece and addi. 55 
tionally secured thereto by brazing, which will 
also effectively close any space intervening be 
tween the ends of the bail and the mouth-piece, 
so as to prevent the entrance of moisture and 
consequent oxidation of the metal. 
When the bit is applied to the mouth of the 
animal in the usual way the bail will embrace 
the lower jaw of the animal, the sides ee of 
said bail embracing the sides of the jaw, and 
the curved portion e' of the said device pass- 65 
ing below the under part of the jaw. After 
the bit has been made with my improvement 
the whole can be galvanized, nickel-plated, or 
finished in any appropriate manner. 
of various sizes to adapt it to various-sized 
As illustrated in Fig. 1, the reins and head 
It will be evident that this bail can be made 7o 
stall are connected with the rings, as usual, - 
and the bail falls slightly back of a vertical 75 
plane. 
animals. 
- 
- 
The mouth-piece and bail will be made of 
wrought iron or steel or any other metal suita 
ble for bits, and the lower portion of the bail 
will be at a sufficient distance below the un- 8o 
der jaw of the animal, when the bail is in a 
horizontal plane, to enable a person to grasp 
it, so that he can readily hold the horse at the 
head and place the animal under subjection. 
This is of especial advantage in holding high- 85 
ly-spirited or unruly horses. 
2. The combination, in a bridle bit, of the 95 
What I claim is 
1. In a bridle-bit, the herein-described bail, 
rigid with the mouth'-piece of the bit and 
adapted to pass around the lower jaw of the go 
animal, whereby the animal can be steered by 
drawing upon either end of the bit, so as to 
force one of the sides of the bail against the 
side of the animal's jaw, as set forth. 
mouth-piece B and the rein-rings with the 
herein-described bail E, having its ends passed 
through the mouth-piece near the ends of the 
latter, and secured thereto, substantially in the 
manner and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit. 
eSSeS. 
PETER HAYDEN, 
OC 
Witnesses: 
GEO. S. HICKOK, 
ADAM HILL. 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
a. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243142.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
No. 243,142. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. LOCKHART. 
Railway Rail. 
Patented June 21, 1881. 
A/G 3. 
odd 
idol 
VVITNESSES 
6 Yekakwa 
A $4. 
NVENTOR 
Sessive&av 
Sanakaw 
N. Peters, Photo-thographer. Washington, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 243,142. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
J. LOCKHART, 
Railway Rail. 
Patented June 21, 1881. 
F. G. 5. 
witnesses 
76.. 9..a4- 
t3, * 64-444-4- 
inventor 
Jose lockwax, 
6t/ 4- 9 $4a 4a-, 
(2a, 
N, PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESSE LOCKHART, OF NIANTIC, ILLINOIS. 
RALWAY - RA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,142, dated June 21, 1881. 
Application filed December 16, 1880. (No model.) 
A and B are ends of rails joined together as 25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JESSE LOCKHART, a shown, and provided with slots did to receive 
resident of the town of Niantic, county of Ma- bolts c. c. Bolts c 0 are provided with oblong 
- con, and State of Illinois, have invented cer. heads c' c', which fit against the rail and pre 
5 tain new and useful Improvements in Railway- vent the bolts from turning, thereby keeping 
Rails, of which the following is a specifica- the pins in the lower end of the bolts always di. 3o 
tion, (and which has never been patented to rected across the slots. The rails are formed, 
me nor to others with my knowledge and con- as shown, in such a manner that part of the 
sent in any foreign country.) 
flange of one overlaps a part of the flange of 
Io My invention is an improvement on Patent the other, and when the bolts are secured form 
No. 229,538, granted to me July 6, 1880, for a continuous rail having a degree of lateral 35 
an improvement in rail joints; and it consists expansion and contraction limited by the 
in railway-rails having a flange of double length of slots did. 
I claim 
thickness, and joined together in a manner to 
The rails constructed with flanges of double 
I5 form a continuous rail that will admit a certain 
degree of lateral expansion and contraction in thickness, joined together as shown, and pro- 4 
the individual rails. 
vided with slots extending downward through 
In the drawings accompanying and forming the overlapping flanges, in combination with 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 shows a the oblong-headed bolts, as and for the pur 
is an end view of the rail, showing the con- 
struction of the flange, and Fig. 3 is an under- 
side view. Fig. 4 shows rails detached, and 
Fig. 5 represents the oblong-headed bolt. 
20 section of my device in side elevation. Fig. 2 pose set forth. 
JESSE LOCKEART. 
Attest: 
M. C. LIVINGSTON, 
E. W. WAGGONER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243243.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. GLORE, 
Lines for Driving Horses, 
No. 243,243. 
Patented June 21, 1881. 
2a 
A 
s 
Zz 
a222 
4 4-6 e s 4 - 
ZZ2 Z1 eze 4 oz. 
%a-%26-g 
N. peers hoto-ithographer, Washington. d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. GLORE, OF COVINGTON, KENTUCKY, AssIGNOR OF ONE-BALF 
TO HARLAN P. WHITAKER, OF SAME PLACE. 
LINES FOR DRIVING HORSES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,243, dated June 21, 1881. 
Application filed April 11, 1881. (No model.) 
Io ling horses than now exists. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. GLORE, of 
Covington, Kenton county, Kentucky, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
5 in Lines for Driving Horses, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates particularly to lines 
for driving double teams; and its purpose is 
to provide a more efficient means for control 
My invention is applicable to harness for all 
and any double teams, but is especially appli 
cable to harness for fire-engine horses, as it is 
often very necessary to drive these horses at a 
I5 high rate of speed, and to turn corners with 
out slacking this speed, and where lines as now 
constructed are employed the horses are apt 
to crowd each other, and thus become to a 
greater or less degree unmanageable. My in 
2 o vention obviates this difficulty and places the 
horses entirely under the control of the driver, 
and enables him to turn corners without slack 
ing the speed of the horses, and yet prevents 
the tendency of the.horses to crowd each other. 
The drawing forming part of this specifica 
tion is a plan view, representing the construc. 
tion and arrangement of the lines according to 
my invention. 
A and B are the two lines which the driver 
3o holds, and which each divide, near their for 
ward extremities, into two, the line Ainto the 
lines at a' and the line B into the lines b b'. 
The inner, a b', are made slightly longer than 
the outer lines, a b, so that the horses will be 
A'B' are the bits, which are placed in the 
mouths of the horses. The lines at a? are at 
tached to the bit A', one of said lines being at 
tached to either end of the bit, and the lines b 
4o b' are attached one to either end of the bit B'. 
A connecting strap or rod, C, is attached at 
each end to the bits A, B, the attachment be 
ing made by an appropriate Snap or buckle. 
This connecting-strap may be made of a single 
45 piece or composed of two pieces, as shown, the 
pieces being connected at the center by a snap 
and ring. This latter construction is prefera 
ble for use on fire-engine horses, where speed 
35 continually kept separated. 
25 
in hitching up is very essential. When this 
strap consists of two pieces one piece can be 
left on the bit of each horse when the horses 
are unhitched, and when the horses are to be 
hitched up the snap on the end of one piece is 
snapped into the ring on the end of the other 
piece, which is the only thing required to com- 55 
plete the connection of the lines, and can be 
very quickly done. 
In ordinary harness one of the branches of 
the lines A and B passes to the bit of the op 
posite horse, the line a passing to the bit B' 
and the line b' passing to the bit A'. The ob 
jection to this latter construction and arrange 
ment is that the horses, when driven by such 
lines, are liable to crowd each other, which is 
especially the case when a corner is to be turned, 
for the reason that when the driver wishes to 
turn the team in either direction he pulls on 
the line next to that side-for instance, the 
line B on the right side-and this line, commu 
nicating with both horses, turns them suddenly 
to the right, and the horse on the left is pulled 
over against the horse on the right side. For 
this reason the driver is compelled to slacken 
the speed of the horses before turning a cor 
le, 
The above objection does not arise from the 
use of my invention, as when the driver wishes 
to turn-for instance, to the right-he pulls on 
the line B, and this turns the horse on the right 
side to the right, and this horse, through the 
medium of the connecting strap or rod C, pulls 
the other horse to the right; but the line a pre 
vents the horse on the left from crowding over 
against the horse on the right, and the horses 
can be driven at full speed around a corner 
without danger of crowding. So, also, I am 
enabled to check or stop the horses much more 
perfectly and readily by the use of my inven 
tion than by the use of lines as now construct. 
ed, as, where the latter lines are employed, 
When the driver attempts to stop the team the 
tendency is for the horses to come together, 
whereas my invention keeps them constantly 
apart, and thus the objects for which my in 
vention is designed are accomplished. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
95 
75 
2 
243,924.3 
5 a connecting strap or bar, substantially as or rod C, substantially as and for the purposes 15 
2. The combination of the line A, divided 
I claim as new and of my invention, and de- 
into the lines a a? and attached to the bit A', 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
1. An improved driving-gear for double har- the line B, divided into the lines b b' and at 
ness, consisting of a pair of bits connected by tached to the bit B, and the connecting strap 
shown, each bit being provided with a sepa- specified. 
rate branching driving -line, having opera- 
tive connection with each other only through 
Attest: 
the connecting strap or bar, substantially as 
Io described. 
WILLIAM E. GLORE. 
B. H. TIBBs, 
E. R. EIILL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243343.txt	(No Model.) 
Hollo W. Chilled Bearing for Ball Joints of Stone 
P. W. GATES. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(A 
UNITED STATES 
h 
PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILETUS W. GATES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
HOLLOW CHILLED BEARING FOR BALL-JOINTS OF STONE-BREAKERS AND OTHER MACHINES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,843, dated June 21, 1881. 
Application filed May 21, 1881. (No model.) 
25 low the ball, which is fitted within it. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILETUs W. GATEs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
5 nois, have invented a new and Improved Eol 
low Chilled Bearing for Ball-Joints of Stone 
Breakers and Other Machines, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in a 
To bearing formed of segments separated radially, 
and having unitedly an interior surface which 
approximates very closely to a hollow sphere 
with its upper and lower parts cut off, and 
which surface is chilled, and has a bearing 
I5 contact upon the ball, which is fitted within 
the bearing, both above and below the hori 
Zontal axis of the ball. 
My invention also consists in the bearing 
made with an exterior cylindrical surface which 
2O is unchilled, and an interior chilled surface 
which approximates very closely to a hollow 
sphere with its upper and lower portions cut 
off, said bearing having an interior form which 
gives it a bearing-contact both above and be-, 
My invention also consists in the bearing 
hereinafter described, having its radial match 
ing edges and its outer surface unchilled, while 
its interior surface, fitting upon the ball both 
3o above and below its horizontal axis, is chilled. 
My invention also consists in the bearing 
for a stone breaker or crusher formed of seg 
ments which are cylindrical on their outside, 
and each a part of a sphere on their inside, 
35 said bearing being chilled internally and un 
chilled externally, and the same constituting 
an improved new article of manufacture. 
This construction of bearing is very durable 
and offers but slight friction to the ball which 
4o fits and works within it. Such bearing, when 
used but a short time, becomes highly polished 
on its interior surface, it appearing as bright 
as a mirror, and it is found capable of endur 
ing the most powerful wearing action without 
45 any perceptible diminution of its metallic body; 
whereas with other bearings not chilled, used 
in the same place on a stone-breaker-to wit, 
as a bearing for the fulcrum-ball of the crusher 
shaft-the wear is so great that it has been 
So found necessary to employ a means for compen 
sating for the wear, and even with such com 
pensating device the bearing has been found 
almost impracticable in machines for crush 
ing limestone, and wholly useless for crushing 
granite and metallic ores. And in the manu- 55 
facture of my chilled bearing it only requires 
about one-half day to make it, whereas in the 
manufacture of the unchilled bearing, with its 
compensating means, at least one week's work 
is required to produce the same; and even with 6o 
this extra expense for labor the bearing is of 
but little use, it being necessary to make the 
segments too light, and the metal, on account 
of its softness on the inside of the hollow 
spherical bearing, is soon crushed out by the 65 
great wear and strain brought upon the bear 
Ing. 
To manufacture the hollow spherical chilled 
bearing the means hereinafter described and 
shown by the accompanying drawings may be 7o 
adopted; but these means form no part of my 
claim or invention under this patent, nor is 
my invention confined to the same. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of my improved hollow chilled 75 
ball-bearing as constructed for use in a stone 
breaker or ore-crusher. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view of one of the segments of the bearing shown 
in Fig.1. Fig. 3 is a broken perspective view of 
a pattern first employed to produce the impres- 8o 
sion insand contained in a flaskand cope. Fig. 
4 is a perspective view of a hard-metal chilling 
and pattern-ball and parting-plates which are 
introduced into. the mold after the pattern-in 
pression has been made in the sand and the 85 
pattern is withdrawn. Fig. 5 is a vertical sec 
tion of a sand mold in a flask and cope as it 
appears after the pattern, Fig. 3, is withdrawn. 
Fig. 6 is a top view of the flask or lower sec 
tion of the sand mold and its gates, the cope 9o 
being removed and the hard-metal chilling and 
pattern-ball and parting-plates, with a casting 
for a segmental ball-bearing cast in the mold, 
being shown. Fig. 7 is a vertical section of 
Fig. 6 with the cope-section of the mold in po- 95 
sition. Fig. 8 is a section of the casting for 
the chilled ball-bearing as it appears upon the 
ball on which it is cast after it is withdrawn 
from the mold, and when Babbitt or other suit 
able metal, for sustaining it while centered in Ioo 
a lathe for the purpose of having its cylindri 
cal surface trued, is flowed into its hollowed 
ends and partly into its radial dividing-splits. 
Fig. 9 is a detail side view of a parting-plate 
 
d 
243,343 
used in the casting operation. Fig. 10 is a 
perspective view of a lead tool with iron stem, 
whereby emery and oil are applied in polish 
ing the concave surface of the respective seg 
ments of the said bearing. Fig. 11 is an ele 
vation and partial section, showing a segment 
of the chilled bearing, and also the polishing 
tool and its stock. 
From the figures of the drawings it will be 
seen that the pattern A, for producing the im 
pression in sand contained in a flask, A', and 
cope A, consists of a cylindrical body portion, 
a, with hollowed ends a? a, radial wings a ex 
tending out beyond the circumference of the 
body portion a, partly-spherical end portions, 
a'a, and a centering cylindrical stem, a. This 
pattern is centered by its stem in the mold in 
any suitable manner, and Sand is rammed 
around it until the flask A' is full. Gates b 
are then formed, and the cope A is adjusted in 
position upon the flask A" and sand rammed 
into it until it is full. This operation produces 
a mold in sand consisting of a cylindrical cham 
ber, b', narrow radial channels b, a concave or 
partly-spherical depression, b, a conical seat, 
b", a cylindrical socket, l', a concave or partly. 
Spherical depression, l, and a conical seat, b 
as shown in Fig. 5. 
A perfectly smooth and true ball, B, of suita 
ble hard metal, and having a stem, c, is provided. 
This ball has centering-sockets c'c'; and in con 
nection with the ball metallic parting-plates B", 
made with a concave edge, c', and coated orja 
panned over their surfaces, are also provided. 
These plates are coated in order that the cast 
ing metal shall not stick to them, and they are 
adjusted close to the ball, by hand or otherwise, 
as shown in Fig. 4, so as to be passed into the 
flask portion of the mold without touching the 
Sand Surrounding the radial channels l'. The 
ball and plates are set down into the sand 
mold, the stem of the ball fitting into the socket 
band the plates into the radial channels b, 
While the ball itself stands in the chamber l'. 
Thus adjusted the ball occupies a true central 
position in the chamber, and the plates are ra 
dial to the ball; and when the plates are in the 
mold a slight radial movement outward is 
given to them, so as to set them a little off from 
the ball, and to allow for this adjustment the 
channels l are made of a sufficient depth in a 
radial direction at the time they are made with 
the pattern. By this adjustment of the plates 
narrow webs c' will be formed between the seg 
ments of the bearings in the casting process, 
and the several segments will thus be tempo 
rarily united, notwithstanding the fact that the 
plates keep them separated at all other points. 
It is important to have the segments of the 
Casting remain thus united, as it is necessary 
to center the same in a lathe for the purpose 
of turning off the outside cylindrical surface, 
for the purpose of making it true. 
The casting to form the improved bearing 
D is produced by flowing molten metal along 
the gates b of the sand-mold into the vacant 
parts of the mold. In the casting operation 
the casting for the improved bearing D has its 
outer surface and radial parting-surfaces left 
unchilled, the sand mold and the coated part 
ing-plates not acting to chill these surfaces, 
while its interior or nearly-spherical surface is 
chilled, the hard-metal ball serving to impart 
The casting having been 
the chill thereto. 
molded, is removed from the mold with all its 
segments united in a temporary manner by 
the webs c of metal run in between the ball 
and the inner concave edges of the parting 
plates. The parting-plates are now withdrawn, 
and into the hollows at the ends of the casting, 
as well as into the radial parting-splits l', is 
flowed Babbitt metal b', or other suitable met 
al, for the purpose of forming centering Sup 
ports. Thus prepared, the casting is centered 
in a lathe and its cylindrical surface turned off 
true. The segments of the casting are now 
broken apart at the metal webs c', and the 
rough or fractured edges of the segments 
ground off with an emery-wheel. The sepa 
rated segments are then polished on their con 
cave or partly-spherical surface by means of 
emery and oil, and for doing this a tool, C, 
consisting of a soft-lead head, d, in form of 
part of a sphere, and a steel or iron shank, d, 
is provided, and the same is secured in the 
stock of an ordinary drill. With this tool and 
emery and oil the partly-spherical interior sur 
face of the respective segments is polished for 
a few minutes, and thereby completed. 
The ball-bearing D described is specially 
adapted by its construction and form shown 
for use with a ball on the head of a stone 
breaker or crusher-shaft; but by changing its 
exterior form it might be adapted for other 
machines. 
When the bearing D is used with the ball 
on a stone-breaker shaft, such ball, made of 
forged Wrought iron or steel as a part of the 
shaft, is inclosed by the several segments of 
the improved bearing, and the segments, while 
around the ball, are inserted into a sustaining 
box formed on the arched capping portion of 
the frame of the crushing-machine in the usual 
manner, except that no wear-compensating de 
vice is employed between the improved bear 
ing and the said sustaining-box of the frame; 
but this special mode of employing the bear 
ing in a stone-breaker is not herein claimed, as 
the same has been granted to me in an appli 
cation heretofore made by me. 
Prior to my invention it has been common 
in the arts to impart a chill to bearing and 
wearing surfaces, and therefore my invention 
is not to be regarded as covering this well 
known thing, but as relating to a specific bear 
ing for ball-joints, such bearing being inter 
nally chilled and in form of a hollow sphere 
with its upper and lower ends cut off, and 
formed of a suitable number of segments, which 
bear upon the ball both above and below its 
horizontal axis-in fact, fitting nearly the en 
tire surface of the ball, and giving it an al 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
I 30 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
 
243,343 
3 
most complete circumferential contact and 
bearing-support. 
Another feature of novelty in the bearing 
invented by me lies in its being internally 
chilled and of spherical form internally, while 
it is of cylindrical form externally, and un 
chilled on its cylindrical surface; and another 
feature of novelty is in having the bearing of 
spherical forminternally and chilled internally, 
and also of cylindrical form externally and un 
chilled on such cylindrical surface, and also 
having the radial matching edges of the seg 
ments forming it unchilled. 
; : A ball-bearing such as I have described 
and shown was never before produced or used 
in the arts, and it was only after very consid 
erable thought and study that I was enabled 
to produce the same. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- . 
1. The segmental cast bearing for the ball 
of socket joints, having form which gives it a 
bearing-contact upon the ball above and be 
low its horizontal axis, and also an interior 
chilled surface nearly in the form of that of a 
hollow sphere, and an exterior unchilled sur 
face, substantially as and for the purpose de 
2. The segmental cast bearing for the ball 
Scribed. 
- 
O 
25 
of socket joints, having an interior form which 
gives it a bearing-contact upon the ball above 
and below its horizontal axis, and also an in 
terior chilled surface nearly in the form of that 
of a hollow sphere, and a cylindrical exterior 
unchilled surface, substantially as described. 
3. The segmentalcast bearing having a form 
which gives it a bearing-contact upon the ball 
above and below its horizontal axis, and an in 
terior chilled surface nearly in form of that 
of a hollow sphere, and the radial edges and 
periphery of its segments unchilled, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The improved new article of manufacture, 
consisting of the bearing made of segments 
radially separated, and having unitedly an in 
terior chilled surface which is in form of a 
hollow sphere with its upper and lower por 
tions cut off, while its exterior surface is cylin 
drical and unchilled, the said bearing having 
a bearing-contact above and below the hori 
Zontal axis of the ball, which is fitted in it, and 
adapted to fit in a cylindrical support of the 
machine in which it is placed, substantially as 
and for the purpose described, 
PEIILETUS W. GATES. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE SCOVILLE, 
ROBT. RITCHIE. 
35 
45 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243444.txt	(Model.) 
No. 243,444. 
 
a 
Earl 2 
NANYees, 
 
 
N 
N N 
  
  
 
  
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
M. C. GRITZNER, 
Sewing Machine. 
Patented June 28, 1881. 
f 
  
Z23% 
W Y 2. 
2 
N 
e 
3'32 
2 2 
a 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
As NI 
. 
2 
ASSIs 
S. 
m 
2 
S. 
S 
Nilai 
2. ... 
2222222222 4N 2 
C. C. C. series s 
NSZSU-IPTV 
\ 
n 
S 
N 
--> 
le 
X 
 
N. PeeRS, Phate-lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
 
(Model.) 
No. 243,444. 
 
M. C. GRITZNER. 
Sewing Machine. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 28, 1881. 
   
  
 
  
 
 
 
NS NY W. 
(S 
 
 
 
 
(Model.) 
No. 243,444. 
 
 
9.88 
 
 
 
 
M. C. GRITZNER. 
Sewing Machine, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented June 28, 1881. 
s 
  
 
s 
NSN 
saataas SIN ses as 
 
S is 
 
6. 2. E925N 
E21st 
Hiss-I 
bai 
22222 
uests S z W 
SSS N SS SS 
aga2 %st):N 
tSYY RN 
NS 
N 
NSE 
SN N 
S s 
o 
2 
 
 
 
N. Peters, Photo lithographer, Washington, o, c. 
 
(Odel.) 
No. 243,444. 
M. C. GRITZNER. 
Sewing Machine. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
Patented June 28, 1881. 
 
 
 
| 
 
N. FEERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, i.e. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAX C. GRITZNER, OF BADEN, GERMANY. 
SEW NG-MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 243,444, dated June 28, 1881. 
Application filed June 11, 1880. 
(Model.) Patented in Germany Dccember 20, 1878, and in England August 25, 1879. 
55 
65 
75 
of another form of rotary take-up that can be 
To all whom it may concern: 
used in connection with other parts of the ma 
Be it known that I, MAX CHARLES GRITZ 
chine; Fig. S, an enlarged view of the auto 
NER, of Baden, Germany, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Sewing-Machines, 
matic tension, with an adjusting device; Fig. 
S", a modification of the same; Fig. 9, a series 
which invention is fully set furth in the follow 
of diagrams illustrating the formation of the 
ing specification. 
stitch, and Fig. 10 a form of bobbin-case with 
This invention relates generally to machines 
the open side toward the hook. Fig.11 is a 
for sewing, embroidering, or otherwise stitch 
detail view, showing the end of the main shaft 
ing fabrics, but has special reference to what 
next the hook, with the eccentric-pins for op 
are known as rotary-hook lock-stitch' ma 
erating the feed; and Fig. 12, a detail view, 
chines. In this class of machines the needle 
showing the devices for preventing dancing 
loop is carried around a stationary bobbin or 
of the thread between the take-up and eye of 
shuttle, which is usually contained in a suit 
the needle. 
able case. 
The present invention comprises improve 
The same letters indicate like parts where 
they occur on all the figures. 
ments, first, in the construction of the hook 
A is the frame of the machine; B, the goose 
and bobbin-case, so as to avoid undue strain 
upon the needle-loop in passing over the bobbin 
neck or arm; C, the cloth-plate; D, the vibra 
tory needle-lever; E, the presser-bar; F, the 
case, and thus to enable the finest fabrics to be 
satisfactorily sewed; second, in the devices for main shaft of the machine; G, a secondary 
producing the necessary tension upon the up shaft, and H a fly-wheel on the main shaft. 
per thread to enable the stitches to be properly. These two shafts have their bearings in the 
tightened; third, in the take-up, which is of frame of the machine, and are connected with 
each other by the gears fg, (see Fig.1) of which 
the rotary type; fourth, in the feed mechan 
the former has just twice the number of teeth 
ism; and, lastly, in minor elements of the ma 
of the latter, so that the shaft G. makes two 
chine. 
revolutions to one of the shaft F. The needle 
It is not necessary here to recite the con 
lever is fulcrumed in the goose-neck, and is 
struction of the various machines heretofore 
vibrated by the eccentric d on the main shaft 
known and used, as the invention can be un 
F and connecting-rod d. 
derstood without such explanation, the partic 
At the outer end of the goose-neck, or in the 
ular improvements constituting the same being 
head of the machine, the needle-bar D is free. 
hereinafter fully set forth. 
It is connected 
to move in suitable guides. 
The following description will enable those 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
with the needie-lever by a single pin, d, which 
screws into a hole in the needle-bar, and the 
make and use my invention, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings. which form 
ends of which rest in slots in the needle-lever. 
This pin d projects through a slot in the side 
a part of this specification. 
of the head and prevents the turning of the bar. 
Figure 1 is a view in vertical longitudinal 
Other means, however, might be employed, as 
section, partly in elevation, of a machine em 
a spline on the bar arranged to fit in a corre 
bodyiug the invention; Fig. 2, an end view, 
sponding groove. The needle is secured to the 
partly in section, the rotary hook being re 
bar in any ordinary or suitable way. The nut 
moved; Fig. 3, a perspective view of the feed 
d", as shown, should be small enough in diam 
rocker with the retractile spring and other 
eter to pass readily through the holes in the 
parts immediately connected there with; Fig. 
head of the machine, which serve as guides. 
4, a plan view, partly in section, illustrating 
At the end of the main shaft F the eccentric 
the construction of the take-up; Fig. 4, a per 
pins in n, for operating the feed, are placed. 
spective view of the fly-wheel carrying the take 
F is a rocker turning on the pin 0, attached 
up lever; Fig. 5, an elevation, partly in sec 
to the machine-frame and fitting in a slot in 
tion, on the side opposite to that on which the 
the lower part of the rocker. A large-headed 
operator takes his position; Fig. 6, views of the 
screw, o', prevents lateral displacement of the 
hook and bobbin-case detached; Fig. 7, views 
- 
95 
IOO 
 
IO 
. I5 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
243,444 
Cu 
25 
35 
So 
55 
t 
s 
rocker, while permitting sufficient endwise and so as to guide the two parts of the loop on 
vertical movement by means of a suitable re 
opposite sides of the case and bobbin. On top 
cess or slot in the upper part of the rocker. 
of the case is a small flat spring, i, the free 
The pin or eccentric in works in a slot in this 
end of which bears on a projection on the case, 
rocker and imparts to it the vertical move 
over which the thread from the bobbin is passed 
ment required in feeding. The eccentric-pin 
from the hole i'. A small screw, i, is pro 
in Works against a spring, n, fastened at one 
vided, which bears on the spring, so that by 
end to the rocker, so that it always rests in 
turning it the tension on the under thread can 
contact with the pin n. Upon the side oppo 
be readily changed. A flat extension, i, upon 
site to the latter it is cushioned by leather or 
the upper part of the case directs the loop and 
other suitable material, n. The rocker is moved 
prevents it from catching when drawn up. In 
forward to feed the fabric sewed by the pin in 
this extension are holes i, through which the 
acting against the spring. It is returned by 
under thread is passed. Bypassing the thread 
the spring p. 
The use of the spring in and . 
through several holes the tension will be 
Stronger than if it be passed through one hole 
cushion * is to avoid the noise which would 
be produced by the striking of the pin 7 against 
only. These holes therefore furnish another 
the body of the rocker. A set-screw, q, regul 
means for regulating the tension on the under 
lates the length of the stitch. Other devices, 
thread, which may be employed instead of or 
such as an eccentric on a horizontal axis, 
in addition to the screw i for varying the 
could be used. 
pressure of the spring i. 
The feed-bar F, carrying the feed-surface, 
In order to secure the bobbin in position in 
is attached to the feed-rocker. The feed-sur 
the hook, it is first placed in the bobbin-case, 
face is arched to correspond with the arc in 
and the strip being turned outward, as shown 
which the rocker moves. The cloth-plate C or 
in dotted lines, Fig. 6, the flange it is placed 
the throat-plate is similarly arched on its up 
in the recess g under the projecting or over 
per surface, as indicated by c'. 
hanging edge of the strip g, and the strip g, 
The hook G/ is secured to the end of the 
being turned upward and secured, holds the 
shaft G, and is rotated thereby. Its construc 
case in position on the hook. A projection, 
tion is best seen in Fig. 6. On the face it is 
i", on the case enters a groove on the stop 
recessed at g and at g', from which latter re 
piece c, fastened to the under side of the cloth 
cess an opening, g, extends to the periphery 
plate. The hook is free to revolve, and the 
of the hook. 
bobbin-case is prevented from turning with it 
At g is the hook proper. In plan it approxi 
in either direction by the contact of the pro 
mates the general shape of an oblique-angled 
jection it against the stop-piece c. 
parallelogram, being cut away or inclined in 
The automatic tension is indicated by W. 
(See Figs. 1, S, and St.) 
front and rear. The words front and real' 
are relative to the motion of the lhook. It is 
Upon a Vertical pin, c, fixed on the arm or 
cut away in front on the inside (to the right, 
goose-neck of the machine is a slide, 2.0', which 
Fig. 1) and in the rear upon the outside. On 
is pressed upward by a spring, c'. A collar, 
the top, or side farthest from the center of the 
ac', attached to the rod V, which is reciprocated 
hook, is a triangular-shaped projection, g, 
by an eccentric, , on the main shalt F, en 
which extends backward, and which in oper 
circles the slide l', and by nealus of a circular 
ation catches the loop and prevents it from 
projection thereon depresses it at each down 
being drawn up too rapidly. 
Ward movement of the rod V. The thread is 
Two strips or cap-pieces, gg, are secured 
held between the upper surface of the slide (' 
on the face of the hook Gnear the periphery, 
and the flat surface formed by the bottom of a 
so as to overhang the recess g. One of these 
small cup, ac, held down by a spring, ac", the 
strips, g, is preferably attached so as to be 
pressure of which is adjusted by a set-nut, a. 
readily removed or turned aside, as shown in 
The part a is formed cup-shaped in order to 
dotted lines, Fig. 6. 
hold and conceal the spring. The slide of be 
ing automatically depressed releases the thread 
I is the bobbin or shuttle case, which holds 
the bobbin K and supports it on a central pin, 
at certain intervals and constitutes the auto 
i, whereon it is free to turn. The case is of a 
lmatic tension. By making the part against 
general cylindrical shape. Upon theside which 
which the thread is held adjustable by means 
fits against the hook, around two-thirds of the 
of a set-nut the tension can be readily regul 
circumference, or thereabout, is a flange, i. 
lated while sewing. 
A collar on the pin at 
The side away from the hook is preferably left 
limits the upward movement of the cup ac. 
open, so that the bobbin may be inserted and 
Instead of interposing the spring and cup or 
removed from the case without taking the 
equivalent device, the thread could be held 
latter from the hook. A small wire, i, is pro 
against the lower surface of the set-nut, if de 
vided as a safeguard against accidental slip 
sired. The slide w is preferably in two parts, 
ping out of the bobbin. The bobbin-case may, 
so that the upper may be able to turn freely, 
however, be closed on the outside and open 
while the lower is held by the collar 0. In 
toward the hook, as shown in Fig. 10; but in 
Fig. 8 the movement downward of the part 
that case to take out the bobbin would require 
a is limited. In this case the spring a' should 
be stronger than that marked c'. 
the removal of the case also. At if the side 
of the case is beveled in opposite directions, 
At the back of the machine (see Fig. 5) is 
75 
95 
Cyr 
IO 5 
IO 
II 5 
I25 
 
243,444 
3 
is taken up. When h' strikes the projection 
a plate, y, to which the spring y' (shown in 
hit is slackened again. The shield at the end 
dottedlines) is fastened at one end, thefree end 
projecting through a slot in the plate. This 
which the lever-arm strikes so as to cause the 
arm h to project is preferably cushioned, so as 
spring presses upon the upper thread on its 
way to the eye of the needle and prevents its 
to lessen the noise. 
It is preferred that the projection h' should 
dancing. 
In order to avoid irregularity in the tensin 
catch the thread between the rod 2 and the 
on account of the weight of or inequalities in 
needle, and not that from the automatic ten 
sion. Both threads may, however, be caught. 
the spool, a stiff wire, d', is secured to the 
In Fig. 7 the projection his fixed on the fly. 
needle-lever D, so as to project back of the 
wheel and is arranged to catch both threads. 
automatic tension and by its movement up 
The rod or pin 3", around which the thread is 
ward to unwind thread from the spool. The 
drawn, is placed below the periphery of the 
spool of thread is placed on the rod 2. The 
thread is then passed through the notch 2', 
wheel. With this construction the thread is 
slackened gradually, and not released at once. 
over the wire d", around the pin 0, between 
the slide c' and the cup ac, over the wire d', 
In addition to the automatic tension which 
is placed between the spool-pin and take-up, 
through the notch 2, under the platey, around 
the rod 2, back under the spring gy', through 
an additional tension, W, is placed between 
the take-up and eye of the needle. This ten 
the notch 2, and thence to the head of thema 
sion should be adjustable while sewing, and 
chine, in which it rests in a slot, 2. It is then, 
may be of ordinary or suitable construction, 
after being led between the disks of tension W', 
but is preferably intermittent in its action, so 
hereinafter described, passed through the eye 
as to clutch the thread when it is required to 
of the needle from left to right, Fig. 1: 
act, and at other times to leave it free to be 
The wired' may be shortened so as to act only 
drawn up by the take-up. As shown, this ten 
on that portion of the thread between the 
sion is placed upon the head of the machine, 
notch 2' and the automatic tension; but as the 
and consists of two disks, y', a thumb-screw, 
threading is easier and the danger of the 
y, for attaching them to the head of the ma 
threads coming underneath the wire is avoided, 
chine, and a bent spring or elastic lever, y'. 
the construction shown is preferred. 
The arm or goose-neck of the machine is slot 
The spring or elastic lever is fastened at one 
end to the head of the machine, and the other 
ted, as shown, so that the thread is concealed 
therein and protected. A groove in the upper 
end, being bent back, lies behind the inner ten 
sion-disk. It is so disposed that it is struck 
surface of the goose-neck would serve a similar 
purpose. The take-up is formed by a projection, 
by the end of the needle-lever while the needle 
is below the cloth-plate, and, being pressed 
h', on the side of the fly-wheel H. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 4, 4, and 5, a right 
outward, presses together the tension-disks of, 
angled lever, h, is pivoted in a recess in the 
so that they clutch the thread between them. 
fly-wheel near its periphery, the pivot h being 
The pressure of the disks against each other 
is regulated by turning the screw gy. When 
in line with one of the radii. The thickness 
the end of the needle-lever rises the pressure 
of the wheel is such that the two arms of the 
on the disks is relieved and they are allowed 
lever are on opposite sides. 
to separate and release the thread. 
At his a shield fixed to the machine-frame, 
and at h" is a projection, formed preferably of 
The additional tension W, when made inter 
leather, the two parts being arranged on op 
mittent in its action, as shown, might with 
propriety be called an automatic tension, as 
posite sides of the wheel and close to its sur 
face. In passing by the shield h an arm of 
well as the tension W, since the term auto 
matic, as understood in the art and as em 
the bent lever comes into contact there with, 
ployed in this specification, is intended to dis 
and is held so that the arm h' forms a projec 
tinguish the tension W from ordinary tensions 
tion which is practically stationary on the 
by the devices for automatically applying or 
wheel for the time being. The length of the 
releasing the tensioi upon the thread at the 
shield is calculated so that the slack loop 
thread is taken up when the light-angled le. 
proper times; but for the sake of distinction 
ver has just passed the end of the shield. 
the tension Wis referred to hereill as an in 
The thread yielding no longer, it causes the 
termittent tension. 
The fly-wheel is or may be provided with a 
right-angled lever to turn aside, and the thread 
pulley for a belt. As shown, a pinion, H', is 
is released from the end of the lever. If, in 
also provided, which can be operated by a 
consequence of any accidental resistance in 
larger spur-wheel, with which is connected a 
the fulcrum of the lever, (dirt, dried oil, &c.) 
the lever should not readily yield to the ac 
handle or detachable treadle. His a pin on 
which the bobbin is placed for winding. 
tion of the thread, it passes in the next instant 
At - 
the lower part of the presser-bar E the presser 
the projection h, and, striking it, is turned 
foot E is secured by means of the single screw 
aside so as to permit the thread to slip of the 
c. At the back of the foot is an extension, e", 
lever. The rod 2 is bent so that the thread 
grooved and fitting over a spline, a, on the 
is drawn into the bend, where it is held di 
rectly in the path of the arm or projection h'. 
head of the machine, which prevents the foot 
The thread is therefore caught and the slack from turning and steadies it. The under side 
75 
95 
OC 
O 
II5 
IO 
25 
40 
45 
So 
65 
 
4. 
243,444. 
- 
of the presser-foot is arched, as indicated by 
and the automatic tension, being at that time 
e, so as to correspond with the curved surface 
closed, draws off from the spool, so that the 
of the cloth-plate and of the feed. 
thread required for each stitch is taken from 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
the slack thread thus furnished. When, for 
5 The bobbin Kis filled by screwing it by means 
any reason, it is desired to remove the needle 
of a pivot-screw to the end of the main shaft 
bar to set the needle, or for other purpose, 
and then turning the machine so that the thread 
this can leadily be done by unscrewing the 
coming from an ordinary spool pivoted on the 
pin d8. In passing around the bobbin the loop 
is not pressed or subjected to tension between 
table at a convenient distance behind the bob 
Io bin gradually fills it with the thread, and is 
the bobbin and rotary hook, but moves freely 
then, with its case I, secured in position in 
in the recess g' in the face of the latter. 
the hook G' by means of the strips g g and 
Modifications may be made in the details of 
flange it, as already explained, the thread be. 
construction, as hereinbefore described. 
ing passed from the interior of the case through 
It is obvious that parts of my invention can 
15 the hole i, under the spring i, out at one of 
be used without the others. For example, the 
the lower holes, i, and then back through the 
take-up or feed or improvement in other parts 
highest hole. The upper thread is passed 
could be adapted readily to machines of other 
through the tensions and through the eye of 
wise ordinary or suitable construction; but it is 
the needles, as before stated. The length 
preferred to combine the several parts, as al 
ready explained. 
2 o of stitch is adjusted by the screw q. Mo 
tion being imparted to the main shaft F, 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
the needle is caused to descend to the posi 
tion, and the manner in which the same is or 
tion marked I in Fig. 9. Upon the ascent of 
may be carried into effect, what I claim, and 
the needle the point of the hook enters the 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
25 loop (see position II) and carries it around to 
1. The combination, with a flanged bobbin 
position III, where the loop is turned and di 
case, of a rotary hook provided with a groove 
vided by the beveled side it of the bobbin-case. 
for the flange on the bobbin-case, a recess for 
When the needle has reached its highest po 
the needle-loop back of said groove, and an 
sition the loop, owing to the revolution of the 
opening leading from the aforesaid recess to 
3o shaft G being more rapid than the main shaft, 
the periphery of the hook in front of the hook 
has been carried more than half-way round, 
proper, as set forth. 
as seen in position IV. Instead of dropping 
2. A rotary hook consisting of a disk pro 
off the hook, it is caught by the projection g, 
vided with a groove and a recess back of said 
which retains it until the hook proper, g, has 
groove, as indicated, and the hook proper pro 
35 passed the needle-hole and the needle is about 
jecting from the disk near its circumference, 
to again penetrate the fabric. (See position 
and being beveled or cut away front and rear, 
V.) While the needle is still ascending the 
an opening extending from the said recess to 
feed-surface is raised by the pin m, and before 
the periphery of the disk in front of the hook 
proper, substantially as described. 
the needle has descended to position V the pin 
4o in has moved forward the rocker and advanced 
3. In a rotary hook having an undercut 
groove for the reception of a flange on the bob 
the fabric the distance of one stitch. As soon 
bin-case, a strip or cap-piece pivoted to the 
as the needle leaves the fabric the arm or pro 
jection h on the fly-wheel comes into contact 
hook and adapted to be swung into and out of 
with and begins to draw up the slack thread, 
position, for securing the bobbin-case in the 
45 and continues to do so until the needle just 
hook, or for permitting its removal and re 
begins to enter the fabric again, when the 
placement, substantially as described. 
thread is released. The take-up will not ordi 
4. The combination, with a rotary hook 
narily draw up the loop tight, but nearly so, 
comprising a disk provided with an undercut 
or sufficiently to avoid slack loops, and to 
groove and a recess located back of said groove, 
So tighten the diminutive loop which remains 
and the hook proper projecting from the said 
and to complete the stitch the tension W is 
disk and being beveled or cut away in front and 
rear, of a bobbin-case having a flange, whereby 
employed. When the needle is near the low 
est point of its stroke the disks y are pressed 
it is secured in position in the hook, substan 
together with a pressure adjusted to corre 
tially as described. 
55 spond with the work in hand and clutch the 
5. The combination, with a grooved rotary 
thread between them until the hook, catch 
hook recessed on its face back of the groove, 
ing the next loop presented by the needle, 
and provided with an opening leading from 
tightens the former loop and completes the 
said recess to the front of the hook proper, of 
a bobbin-case of general cylindrical form, hav 
stitch. The automatic tension is raised soon 
6o after the hook has caught the loop, and the 
ing a flange at the end which is to be placed 
thread continues comparatively loose until the 
next the rotary hook, substantially as de 
needle passes out of the fabric. After posi 
scribed. 
tion V the needle descends to position VI, and 
6. A cylindrical bobbin-case and a rotary 
then to its lowest point, or position I, when 
hook, with the hook proper equal in width to 
65 the operations before described are repeated. 
said case, and having on its upper surface a 
When the needle descends the wire d' is lifted, retaining device for catching the needle-loop 
75 
9o 
95 
CC 
IO 5 
O 
I (5 
I25 
I 30 
 
243,444 
5 
sion device acting upon the upper thread be 
tween the take-up and spool-pin, an additional 
intermittent tension acting upon the same be 
tween the take-up and needle-eye, and means, 45 
as indicated, for bringing said additional ten 
sion into action while the needle is below the 
cloth-plate, so that the formation of the next 
succeeding stitch tightens the small loop not 
drawn up by the take-up, substantially as de-50 
Scribed. 
15. The combination, in an automatic ten 
sion, of a stationary pin, a slide, devices for 
moving said slide at intervals lengthwise of 
said pin, a clamping-surface between which 55 
and said slide the thread is held, and a thumb 
nut engaging with a screw-thread on said pin 
and operating to adjust said clamping-surface, 
substantially as described. 
pierced with a needle-hole and arched on the 
bottom in the direction of its length to cor 
respond with the movement of the feed-sur 
face in an arc-of-the-circle feed, substantially 
as described. 
17. The combination, in a sewing-machine, 
with an eye-pointed needle and co-operating 
devices for locking an upper with an under 
thread, of a take-up, an automatic tension ar 
ranged to act upon the thread between the 7o 
spool-pin and take-up, and an adjustable in 
termittent tension arranged to act upon the 
thread between the take-up and eye of the 
needle, substantially as described. 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
16. A presser - foot for sewing - machines, 6o 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 75 
65 
M. C. GRITZNER. 
Witnesses: 
J. ENGLERT, 
EDMUND M. SMITH. 
- - - 
I5 
as it is drawn up, in combination with a nee: 
dle-bar and connecting mechanism, for im 
parting to the rotary hook two revolutions for 
each reciprocation of the needle-bar, substan 
5 tially as described. 
7. In a rotary hook, the hook proper, having 
on top a backwardly-extending projection, with 
its outer end free, substantially as described. 
8. The triangular-shaped overhanging pro 
Iojection on the hook, extending backward-that 
is, in a direction opposite to its rotation-sub 
stantially as described. 
9. A bobbin-case having on the outer side 
a flat extension beyond the periphery of the 
main body of the case, and provided with a 
tension-spring on the top of the case, behind 
the said extension, substantially as described. 
10. The combination, with the fly-wheel of 
a sewing-machine, of a bent lever pivoted 
therein, and means, substantially as described, 
for causing one arm of said lever to project 
during a portion of its revolution, as set forth. 
11. Aflat cloth-plate arched at the throat, in 
combination with a presser-foot having the 
under side similarly arched, and an arc-of-the 
circle feed, substantially as described. 
12. The combination, with the feed-rocker 
and eccentric-pin or device for operating the 
same, of a spring fastened at one end to said 
3o rocker, so as to bear at all times against said 
pin or device, and cushioned at the free end, 
where it comes into contact with the rocker 
through the movement of the pin or device, 
substantially as described. 
13. The combination, with an automatic ten 
sion, of an additional tension adjustable while 
sewing, and arranged to act upon the thread 
between the take-up and eye of the needle, 
substantially as described. 
14. The combination, with the needle, needle 
bar, and take-up of a sewing-machine, of a ten 
35 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243544.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
0. GASSETT & I. FISHER 
Track Drilling Machine. 
No. 243,544. 
Patented June 28, 1881. 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
RHNWFFFF A. S Y 
.. % As 
ERW 
ax S 
S. 
s: 
 
 
- EE 
WiFr. E. S. G E S 
W 
I Iver Forg. 
esca Sasebts had challet 
"'Rs. Photo-Lithographer, washington b.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OSCAR GASSETT AND ISRAEL FISHER, OF BOSTON, MASS., ASSIGNORS TO 
THE UNION ELECTRIC SIGNAL COMPANY, OF HARTFORD, CONN. 
TRACK-DRILLING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 243,544, dated June 28, 1881. 
Application filed April 11, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, OSCAR GASSETT and 
ISRAEL FISHER, of Boston, county of Suffolk, 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Track-Drilling Ma 
chines, of which the following description, in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
is a specification. 
Our invention relates to drilling-machines, 
and has for its object to produce a machine 
that can be readily applied to a railway-track, 
when in position on the road-bed, for the pur 
pose of drilling a hole therein to receive the 
driving-stud of an electric track - connector, 
such as shown and described in Letters Pat 
ent No. 227,104, May 4, 1880, to Gassett and 
Fisher, to which reference may be had. In 
the said patent the driving-stud is shown as 
inserted in a hole at the edge of the flange of 
the rail, and the object of the present inven 
tion is to enable these holes to be quickly made 
on the road-bed. 
The invention consists, mainly, in the combi 
nation, with an ordinary drill operating and 
feeding mechanism, of a suitable frame-work 
therefor, adapted to be quickly placed in prop 
er position upon the rail and properly held 
there while the hole is drilled, without necessi 
tating any clamping or bolting operation to 
enable the thrust or reaction of the drill bear 
ing on the iron to be sustained. 
The entire drilling apparatus is small and 
portable, and the Working parts are mounted 
upon a frame-work consisting mainly of two 
bars connected by cross-pieces provided with 
suitable bearings for the drill-shaft and its op 
erating gearing and feeding mechanism, the 
said main bars having at their end laterally 
projecting thrust-sustaining fingers, which are 
shown as passing beneath the flange of the rail 
opposite to the surface engaged by the drill 
point, the said projections thus receiving the 
thrust or reaction of the drill as it enters the 
iron. The said frame-bars are also provided 
45 with a suitable bracket at one side to rest upon 
the top of and against the side of the head of 
the rail when the said thrust-sustaining fin 
gers at the bottom of the rail are in position 
beneath its flange. This bracket is made ad 
40 
35 
25 
The frame-work consists, essentially, of two 7o 
taining fingers, to enable the machine to be 
used with rails of different height, and it is 
provided with a pivoted holding-arm, which, 
after the bracket has been placed in position 
in contact with the top and one side of the 55 
head of the rail, is turned on its pivot and re 
mains held by its own weight in contact with 
the other side of the head of the rail, thus 
keeping the instrument in proper position, it 
being placed upon the rail and the holding- 6o 
arm dropped without any appreciable expen 
diture of time, and held as firmly as need be 
by the foot of the operator. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a track-rail 
drilling machine constructed in accordance 65 
with this invention; Fig. 2, a longitudinal sec 
tion thereof, showing the instrument in posi 
tion upon the rail; and Fig. 3, a sectional de 
tail thereof on linea ac, Fig. 1. 
bars, at a', connected at their upper ends with 
a cross-piece, b, provided with an internally 
screw-threaded socket, c, to receive the drill 
feeding screw d, operated by the hand-wheele 
or its handlef, the said screw being made tu- 75 
bular, as shown in Fig. 2, to serve as the up 
per bearing for the drill-shaft g, which has an 
other bearing in a cross-bar, h, connecting the 
main pieces a af, the said pieces a a b h form 
ing a rigid rectangular frame for the drill-shaft 8o 
g and its operating mechanism. The upper 
portion of the drill-shaftg, having its bearing 
in the feed-screw d, is of smaller diameter than 
the lower portion having its bearing on the 
cross-bara, and has mounted upon it a sleeve, 85 
i, below the feed-screw d, the said sleeve being 
pressed upon by the said feed-screw d, through 
the intervention of a suitable washer, j, and 
itself bearing upon the hub of a bevel-pinion, 
k, keyed upon the upper smaller portion of the go 
shaft g, and resting upon the shoulder formed 
at the point where the diameter of the drill 
shaft changes. . 
The sleeve is prevented from rotating with 
the drill-shaft g by a yoke, l, resting against 95 
the frame-pieces a a', and the said sleeve is pro 
vided with a pin, In, which serves as a bear 
ing for the driving - gear n, meshing with the 
pinion k and operated by the cranko and its 
So justable toward and from the said thrust-sus handle p. By this arrangement the drill-shaft Ioo 
S 
O 
IS 
 
2 
243,544 
and its operating crank and gears are all fed 
downward together as the screw d is turned in 
its socket c in the cross-pieces b. 
The lower ends of the frame-bars a, a? are 
bent together, as shown in Fig. 1, to bring 
them close to the drill - chuck q, and its drill 
and the said frame - pieces are provided with 
lateral thrust-sustaining fingers r, adapted to 
passbeneath the flange of the rail R, as shown 
in Fig. 2, at either side of the line of action of 
the drill. 
A holding-bracket, s, provided with a bear 
ing-face, 2, parallel with the frame-pieces at a', 
and in such position as to rest against the side 
of the head of the rail when the lower end of 
the said frame-piece rests against the side of 
the flange thereof, as shown in Fig. 2, is con 
nected with the said frame - pieces by bolts t, 
passing through slots 3 in the said brackets, 
so that they may be properly adjusted upon 
the frame-pieces a a to bring the bearing-face 
4 of the arms' perpendicular to the said frame 
pieces upon the top of the head of the rail 
when the thrust-sustaining fingers r bear upon 
the under face of the flange of the said rail, 
the slots 3 enabling the instrument to be used 
with tracks constructed of rails of different 
height. The ends of the arms s' are connected 
by a cross-rod, t, which has pivoted upon it the 
holding-arm U, having a holding-projection, 5, 
that passes under the head of the rail, as shown 
in Fig. 2, and is held there by the weight of 
the handle portion v', and the operator's foot 
thereon, if necessary, the said holding-arm re 
taining the instrument securely in position 
while the hole is being drilled. The handle 
'' and holding-arm being turned up, as shown 
in dotted lines, and the drill being raised by 
its feeding - screw d, so that its point will be 
above the flange, the holding-points 
are 
placed beneath the flange of the rail R and 
the instrument turned toward the rail until 
the faces 24 of the brackets S rest in contact 
with the head of the rail, when the holding 
arm is dropped and the operator rotates the 
drill by means of the handle p, feeding it 
downward in the usual manner by turning the 
feed-wheele. The drill-point, in bearing down 
ward upon the rail to cut it, exerts an upward 
pressure, which is transmitted through the 
shaft g, pinion k, sleeve i, and washer j, to the 
feed-screw d and cross-piece b, whence it is 
transmitted through the frame-piece at a? to 
the thrust-sustaining fingers and the under 
side of the flange of the rail directly opposite 
the point of the drill. When the hole has been 
drilled through the drill is removed therefrom 
by rotating the wheele in the reverse direction, 
thus raising the feed-screw d, which, by means 
of the washer ac, raises the drill-shaft and con 
nected parts, after which the arm v' is raised 
and the instrument at once removed from the 
rail. 
We claim 
1. In a track - drilling machine, the frame 
work consisting of the bars a. a', provided with 
thrust - sustaining projections, and the drill 
shaft mounted between them and provided 
with a pinion fixed thereon, combined with 
the sleeve mounted upon the said shaft, and 
yokeconnected there with, to engage the frame 
work and prevent the rotation of the said 
sleeve, and the driving - gear pivoted on the 
said sleeve and meshing with the said pinion, 
substantially as described. 
2. The drill-supporting frame and its thrust 
sustaining projections, combined with the 
bracket and its bearing-surfaces and holding 
arm pivoted thereon, all arranged as described, 
whereby, when the said projections are placed 
beneath the flange of the rail, the said bracket 
engages the top and one side, and the holding 
arm the other side of the head of the rail to 
hold the instrument in place, substantially as 
described. 
3. The drill-operating mechanism and frame 
therefor, provided with thrust-sustaining pro 
jections to engage the flange of the rail, com 
bined with the bracket and holding - arm ad 
justably connected with the said frame, where 
by the instrument is enabled to be employed 
with rails of different size, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a drilling apparatus, the frame-Work 
and means to secure it to the metal to be 
drilled, as described, and the drill-shaft and 
sleeve thereon, and driving-wheel mounted on 
the said sleeve, combined with the tubular 
feeding-screw engaging a threaded socket in 
the said frame-work, and Serving as a bearing 
for the said drill - shaft, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
. 
OSCAR GASSETT. 
ISRAEL FISHER, 
Witnesses: 
Jos. P. LIVERMORE, 
ARTHUR REYNOLDS. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243644.txt	(No Model.) 
J. STEMMONS. 
Shield for Cattle, 
No. 243,644. 
Patented June 28, 1881. 
 
Zzazezadov 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN STEMMONS, OF EUREKA, CALIFORNIA. 
SHIELD FOR CATTLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 243,644, dated June 28, 1881. 
Application filed February 24, 1881, 
(No model.) 
It will be observed that the structure of the 35 
shield is such that the elastic substance Con 
tained therein is securely held in place by the 
formation of the pouch A', which projects hori 
zontally from the head of the animal to such 
extent as to prevent its horns from being 
brought into contact with its opponent when 
fighting, thus saving the lives of many ani 
mals. Into this pouch is inserted any suitable 
elastic material or such elastic material as may 
readily be procured by farmers or graziers in 
any part of the country. The pouch is manu 
factured and supplied by sale to farmers and 
graziers. 
The pouch. A? may be made of rubber, gutta 
percha, or other suitable material, and formed 
into a single piece. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
As an improved manufacture, the shield A, 
having the pouch A', adapted to be filled with 
suitable material, and provided with straps 
whereby it may be attached to the head of an 
animal, all substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 6o 
45 
55 
JOHN STEMMONS, 
Witnesses: 
M. H. BALDWIN, 
A. W. RANDALL. 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN STEMMONs, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Eureka, 
in the county of Humboldt and State of Cali. 
nia, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Shields or Bumpers for Horned 
Cattle; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to letters or figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
shields or bumpers for horned cattle, especially 
sheep, and it is designed to prevent them from 
being injured by fighting, which occasions the 
loss of very many of the most valuable animals, 
the blooded animals, especially sheep, being 
almost invariably nervous and irritable. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front view of 
my improvement. Fig. 2 is a similar view of 
the reverse side thereof, and Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation. 
A represents a shield or bumper, which is 
made of rubber or any other suitable material, 
to form a pad or cushion, and it is provided 
with the apertures a ain the wings BB, through 
which are inserted the straps b b for securing 
the shield to the horns. When made of leather 
or hide it is cut out and sewed to form the 
padded, as 
shape herein shown, and is then 
aforesaid, to form a soft cushion. 
O 
IS 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243744.txt	G. WILSON. 
PUMP, 
Patented July 5, 1881. 
(No Model.) 
w 
No. 243,744. 
======= 
 
N N 
SN 
| 
A. 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE WILSON, OF WESTMINSTER, ENGLAND. 
PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,744, dated July 5, 1881. 
Application filed July 13, 1880. (No model.) Patented in England November 20, 1879. 
O 
To all clon it may concern : 
Be it known that I, GEORGE WILSON, of 
Parliament Street, in the city of Westminster, 
England, have invented an unproved Appa 
ratus for Forcing or Raising Water, and also 
for other purposes, (for which I have obtained 
a patent in Great Britain, No. 4,733, bearing 
date November 20, 1879,) of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention consists of a wheel inclosed 
in a casing and capable of being rotated by 
steam or other power, this wheel and casing 
being so arranged that there is a cavity or 
channel (or cavities or channels) between the 
periphery of the wheel and casig, this water 
passage between the wheel and casing extend 
ing partly but not completely around the 
wheel, and communicating at one end with a 
supply pipe or conduit and at the other end 
with an exit pipe or conduit, as more particul 
larly hereinafter described. 
The apparatus consists of what I tern a 
wheel having a cavity or cavities sunk in and 
extending around its periphery. The trans 
verse section or sections of the said cavity or 
cavities sunk in the periphery of the Wheel 
may beformed of parabolic, circular, elliptical, 
or of any other curves, either concave or con 
vex or partly concave and partly convex; or 
the form may be angular or partly angular and 
partly curved. The wheel is inclosed and 
caused to revolve around its axis within an air 
tight casing. The flat ends or sides of the 
wheel revolve close to the sides of the casing; 
but the portion of the casing inclosing and ex 
tending around the periphery of the wheel may 
be a plain surface or concave or convex, of a 
circular, elliptical, parabolical, or of any other 
shape. The suction and discharge of the water 
respectively to and from the wheel is through 
a passage or passages in the casing at the pe 
riphery. The waterflows through the same pas 
sages whichever may be the direction the wheel 
is caused to revolve; but the suction and dis 
charge passages for the water to flow through 
When the wheel is caused to revolve in one 
direction respectively become reversed, or dis 
charge and suction passages when the wheel is 
caused to revolve in the contrary direction. 
The action of the apparatus is as follows: 
The air-tight casing inclosing the wheel and also 
the suction-pipe being full of water, (in a sin 
ilar manner to an ordinary centrifugal pump,) 
the wheel is then caused to revolve by steam or 
any other power with the requisite velocity in 
the desired direction, and the action of the cav 
ity or cavities sunk in the periphery of the re 
volving wheel upon the water causes the latter 
to be forced by friction, or by friction and suc 
tion, round in the direction the wheel revolves, 
through the apparatus and discharge pipes or 
passages. 
My said invention, besides being applicable 
as a pump for the purpose of lifting or forcing 
Water or other fluids, is also applicable for forc 
ing Water out of the stern or other part of a 
vessel in any desired direction for propelling 
the same, or out of the side or sides of the ves 
sel for steering the same. 
In order that my said invention may be clear 
ly understood, I will now give general illustra 
tions of the same. 
Referring to the hereinbefore description and 
to the drawings hereunto annexed, Figures 1 
and 2 are sections through the apparatus, in 
which one cavity is sunli in and extends around 
the periphery of the wheel. The solid thick 
black lines show the wheel, which revolves on 
the axis g g on bearings h h. 
), an is the cas 
ing inclosing the wheel, and 0 is the cavity 
sunk in the periphery of the wheel. 
Fig. 3 is a section of a wheel in which four 
cavities, oo, are sunk in its periphery. 
Fig. 4 shows a section of a wheel the cavity 
or cavities of which are partly angular. Sup 
posing that the wheel is caused to revolve in 
the direction shown by the arrows, the Water 
will flow through the suction pipe or pipes at F 
and enter tangentially the cavity or cavities of 
the wheel at Y', and, after being forced through 
the apparatus by the frictional action of the 
revolving wheel, the same will enter tangen 
tially at Yand be discharged through the pipe 
or pipes at G. If the wheel is caused to re 
Wolve in a contrary direction to that hereinbe 
fore lastly described, then G becomes the suc 
tion and F the discharge pipe or pipes for the 
Water. The casing is formed in such a manner, 
as shown at YY, that in either direction in 
which the wheel is caused to revolve the water 
forced partly around the casing by the action 
of the revolving wheel flows tangentially from 
2C) 
25 
35 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
Od 
45 
So 
 
243,744 
the suction pipe or pipes into the cavity or cavi 
ties of the wheel, and also tangentially from 
the latterinto the discharge-pipe or pipes. The 
distance between Y and Y-the tangent-points 
for the entrance and discharge of the water 
into and from the cavity or cavities of the 
wheel-is dependent on the desired arrange 
ment of the suction and discharge pipes with 
regard to the casing. 
Fig. 5 shows the suction and discharge pipes 
H J (one of which is shown straight and the 
other curved) arranged in such a manner that 
the water will be acted upon by the revolving 
wheel and forced round the casing through the 
distance of a semicircle. 
The suction and discharge pipes and also the 
apparatus should be constructed in such a 
manner as to cause the water to flow in con 
tinuous volumes of uniform or nearly uniform 
sectional areas. 
In the application of my improved apparatus 
as a pump for the purpose of lifting or forcing 
water or other fluids, one of the pipes, G or F, 
25 
35 
would be the suction and the other the dis 
charge pipe for the Water, the arrangements 
being as for ordinary centrifugal pumps. This 
pump can also be used for propelling or steer 
ing vessels by forcing the water from the 
stern or other part in various ways. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion and the manner of performing the same, 
I wish it to be understood that I claim 
My improved apparatus,consisting of a wheel 
inclosed in a casing and capable of being ro 
tated by steam or other power, the wheel and 
casing being so arranged that there is a cavity 
or channel (or cavities or channels) between the 
periphery of the wheel and the casing, extend 
ing partly but not completely around the wheel, 
and communicating at one end with a supply 
pipe or conduit and at the other end with an 
exit pipe or conduit, substantially as described. 
GEORGE WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
G. F. REDFERN, 
A. ALBUTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243844.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 243,844, 
FG--- 
 
MACHINE FOR WINDINGELECTRICAL ARMATURES, 
J. BRADY, 
Patented July 5, 1881, 
* 
. 
FG--- 
7 
2. 
FIU X/ V. 
i. 
NL Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES BRADY, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
MACHINE FOR WINDING ELECTRICAL ARMATURES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,844, dated July 5, 1881. 
Application filed October 28, 1880. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 
o 
r 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES BRADY, of Brook 
lyn, Kings county, New York, have invented 
an Improved Machine for Winding Electrical 
Armatures, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This machine is designed specially for the 
winding of what is known as the Gramme 
ring-armatures, consisting of a ring or coil of 
wire forming the core of the armature, on which 
the induction-coils, of copper wire, are wound 
in closely-adjoining sections or segments, each 
one of which is distinct from the other and 
connected at each end with the commutator. 
Heretofore the winding of the coils onto the 
core has been done by hand, which is a slow 
and laborious method, whereas I aim to effect 
the same in a more rapid and perfect manner 
by the present machine, which is of the same 
class as that shown in my former application, 
filed August 14, 1880, but differingin its special 
construction, which hence constitutes the sub 
ject of my present application, as hereinafter 
set forth. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 gives a 
plan view of my improved machine, part there 
of being shown in section, as is also the arma 
ture, which is represented in the act of being 
wound with its first induction-coil. Fig. 2 is 
a side elevation, showing the winding machine 
in cross-section. Figs. 3 and 4 show details 
hereinafter described. 
The core of the armature to be wound is in 
dicated at a, and consists, as usual, of a coil of 
iron wire of oblong section, with rounded ends, 
as seen best in Fig. 1. Before winding this 
core with the copper coils the core is covered 
with a number of segmental blocks, bb, made 
in halves and clamped on the core, as fully 
illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2. These blocks cor 
respond in number with the coils to be wound 
on the core, and when one of them is removed, 
as shown in Fig. 2, it exposes a segmental sec 
tion of the core to admit of the winding there 
on of one of the coils of copper wire, so as to prop 
erly fill the segmental space. The armature 
while being thus wound is clamped on a curved 
bed or rest, c, in the usual manner, (illus 
trated,) and as each coil is wound thereon the 
armature is loosened, turned round on its bed 
the space of one section, again clamped, the 
next block removed, and the next coil wound 
thereon, and so on successively till all the sec 
tions are wound. The wire to form each coil 
is first wound from each end equally on two 
bobbins or reels, and the middle part of this 
wire, between the bobbins, (see Figs. 1 and 2,) 
is placed against the middle of the exposed 
Section of the armature-core, and the bobbins 
are then revolved around the same in opposite 
directions, so as to wrap the wire compactly 
thereon from each bobbin simultaneously, and 
onto and from the center of the section out 
ward, and vice versa, the winding being all, 
of course, on the same pitch, and the opposite 
ends being finally met and twisted together to 
connect With the commutator. This is the 
usual process of winding the armature as just 
described, the bobbins being revolved about 
the exposed section by hand, and it is this lat 
ter operation which my machine is designed to 
accomplish with more accuracy and rapidity. 
In my former machine the bobbins were re 
volved by rigid circular rings revolving in op 
posite directions and passing through the ar. 
mature-ring, the exposed section of which pro 
jected within the rotary rings, so as to wrap 
the wire around the same in the manner al 
ready described. In my present machine I 
employ flexible or jointed endless bands or 
chains of oval continuity corresponding to the 
cross-section of the armature-core, whereby the 
bobbins are revolved about the same in a path 
concentric with and parallel to the core of the 
armature, thus avoiding slack or eccentric 
points in the winding, which almost necessa 
rily exists in the other case. 
in the drawings, AA indicate the flexible 
endless bands or chains, which are mounted 
to freely run in grooves or ways on each side 
of the fixed frame B, the armature being so ar 
ranged that its exposed section to be wound is 
in the center or axis of the system, while the 
frame B passes through and the bands A A', 
with their attached bobbins, revolve through 
the armature-ring and around the exposed sec 
tion thereof, the motion of the bands being 
hence parallel to and concentric with the cross 
section of the armature; hence no slack or ec 
centric points exist in the winding, and the 
95 
OC 
35 
45 
243, S44. 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
9o 
tension or unwinding pull of the wire upon the 
bobbins is regular throughout the revolution. 
In the special case illustrated I prefer to form 
the endless bands as chains composed of broad, 
flat, or thin metal links, all joined together near 
their inner edge, as shown. The joint is a kind 
of rule-joint, the links being halved together 
at the joint and inclosing a beveled-edge roll 
er, e, free to turn on the connecting-stud f of 
the joint, as shown. The edges of these roll 
ers project into a V-groove on the rim of the 
guiding-frame B, while an upright roller, g, 
near the outer end of each link, rolls on a ledge 
near the outer rim of the frame, so that each 
link of the chain is thus properly supported 
and guided by these anti-friction rollers, and 
the motion of the chain rendered smooth and 
easy, and at the same time the chain is pre 
vented from rising out of place. The under or 
inner face of each link (see Fig. 4) is formed 
with rack-teeth, as seen best in Fig. 4, which 
teeth are engaged at one point of the chain by 
a pinion, h, revolving in a suitable bearing and 
cavity in the frame B and driven by suitable 
power, so that both chains become thereby 
rotated simultaneously and at equal speed in 
opposite directions. Now, each chain, of course, 
carries one of the bobbins having one length 
of wire Wound equally thereon, as already de 
scribed, and illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2, these 
bobbins being attached to each chain at dia 
metrically - opposite positions and of a size 
and shape to readily pass through the arma 
ture-ring, as shown. The links on which the 
bobbins are mounted are each formed With a 
conical boss, m, which fits into a conical hub 
on the bobbins, and the bobbin is held in place 
thereon by a central screw, n, screwing into 
the boss, and by a broad washer, o, between 
the head of the screw and the hub of the bob 
bin, which washer is prevented from turning 
by a pin, p, passing through it into the boss, 
as fully shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The bobbin 
is thus not only accurately mounted on and 
connected with the chain, but by tightening 
the screw in the friction between the hub and 
the boss may be nicely regulated to put any 
desired tension on the unwinding wire, so as 
to effect the winding thereof onto the arma 
ture with any desired degree of tautness, as 
will be readily understood. 
I prefer to mount the frame B of the ma 
chine on a broad table-top by means of the 
posts , removably fixed on the table-top, the 
rest c for the armature being also fixed on the 
table, as seen best in Fig. 2. The frame and 
chain of the machine are, of course, so made 
that they may be divided and opened to ad 
mit the internal placement of that side of the 
armature being wound, as shown. The chain 
may, of course, be divided at any link by re 
moving one of the joint-screwsf, and the frame 
B is preferably divided on the center line, aca, 
as shown, the semicircular section being re 
movable from the larger section, which latter 
is preferably fixed permanently to the table 
top. Hence, by detaching and removing the 
semicircular section and separating the chain 
at the line of division the machine may be 
easily opened to admit of the proper place- 7o 
ment of the armature, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2, and may be again fastened together in a 
simple manner. Now, for Winding armatures 
of greater or less width than that shown the 
machine may be readily extended or contracted 75 
to correspond there with. This may be done 
by providing a number of the removable sec 
tions for the frame of variable lengths, and 
the chain may, of course, be extended or con 
tracted to correspond by removing or inserting 8o 
links, so that the revolving chain will always 
be concentric with the cross-section of the ar 
mature, or practically so. 
I prefer the special form of chain illustrated; 
but of course any other suitable form of chain 85 
may be employed, and even flexible bands of 
leather or rubber with the bobbins attached 
thereto in substantially the same manner may 
be employed without departing from the prin 
ciple of my machine. 
The action of the machine in effecting the 
accurate and rapid winding of each section of 
the armature may now be readily understood 
from what has been before stated and a con 
sideration of the drawings without requiring 95 
any further description. 
I do not claim in this application the broad 
idea of using rings rotating through a ring 
armature in opposite directions for the pur 
pose described, as this invention forms the Ioo 
subject of a separate and previous application. 
What I claim is 
1. A machine for winding electrical arma 
tures of the kind described, constructed with 
a flexible orjointed endless band or chain, dis. IoS 
posed parallel or concentric with the cross-sec 
tion of the armature, and arranged to revolve 
about the same, carrying a bobbin containing 
the wire to be wound thereon, substantially 
as herein set forth. 
2. A machine for winding electrical arma 
tures, consisting of two flexible or jointed end 
less bands or chains revolved in opposite di 
rections through the armature-ring and about 
the exposed section thereof in a path con- IIS 
centric with the cross-section of the armature 
core, or nearly so, and each carrying a bobbin 
containing the same length of wire, which be. 
comes wrapped upon the armature-core, sub 
stantially as herein shown and described. 
3. In a machine of the described kind, a 
chain of jointed links, one end of each link 
overlapping one end of the next adjoining link 
at the joint, and forming a recess inclosing a 
roller, substantially as and for the purpose I 25 
specified. 
4. In a machine of the kind described, two 
traveling chains moving in opposite directions, 
one above the other, and having their links 
formed with teeth for engaging with opposite 13o 
2C 
65 
So 
55 
243S44 
3 
sides of the same driving-pinion, substantially non-rotating washer 0, substantially as and for 
as and for the purpose E. f the d 
5. The combination, in a machine of the de 
scribed kind, of a traveling endless band carry- 
Sing a bobbin free to turn thereon, a friction 
seat or axis between said bobbin and chain, to- 
gether with the central adjusting-screw, n, and 
CHAs. M. HIGGINs, 
EDWARD H. WALES, 
JAMES BRADY. 
the purpose set forth. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US243944.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 243,944. 
A. MOORE 
RICE SEPARATOR, 
- 
Patented July 5, 1881. 
 
 
s 
(2 
: m 
va1 
1S2 
2275 1N 
INVENTOR: 
(Z772-ve-d 
BY 4s. (G. 
ATTORNEYs, 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALONZO MOORE, OF BANGKOK, SIAM. 
RICE-SEPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 243,944, dated July 5, 1881. 
Application filed April 2, 1881. (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALONZOMOORE, of Bang 
kok, Siam, have invented a new and Improved 
Centrifugal and Centripetal Rice-Separator, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My improvements relate to machines for 
separating unhulled grains from hulled rice, 
chaff, stones, sticks, and other foreign matter 
from grain and seed, and for separating other 
materials. 
The invention consists in a combination of 
screens and other devices forming an oscillat. 
ing separator, as hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a central vertical section of the machine. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of the separator proper, and 
Fig. 3 is a plan view showing the hopper and 
blower. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A is the frame of the machine, fitted at its 
lower portion with a vertical shaft, a, on which 
is a pulley, b, for connection of power, and car 
rying at its upper end an eccentric, c, for os 
cillating the screens, as hereinafter described. 
B is a hopper suspended at the upper part of 
frame A and formed with a bottom, d, the cen 
tral portion of which is raised in the form of a 
cone. In the outer portion of the bottom there 
are small holes 1 placed equidistant. 
D is a fan-blower on frame A, from which a 
spout, f, passes to the apex of the conical bot 
tom d. 
C is a receiver, the same being a circular 
disk of wood, preferably having its upper sur 
face formed concave, and having a central aper 
ture. 
e is a box corresponding in size to the aper 
ture in disk C, and attached to the disk to 
form a chamber beneath the aperture. On the 
under side of this box there is an annnlar flange, 
e', fitting around the eccentric c. 
The receiver Cissuspended by linksg, which 
are held by screw-bolts h, that pass through 
the upper cross-rails of the frame A. The bolts 
have nuts above the rails, so that the receiver 
can be leveled. Around the receiver is a rim 
or curb, i, that is attached to an annular flange 
projecting from the lower edge of disk C, so 
- 
- 
that there is a space between the rim and disk 
edge. From the curb i spoutsk project for 
delivery of lighter material, as hereinafter de 
scribed. The upper edge of the disk C is formed 
or fitted with a rim, l, beneath which there are 
openings m. Within this rim, and above the 
concave bottom of the receiver, is a coarse 
screen, n, of wire-cloth, the meshes of which 
are of suitable size for allowing the hulled rice 
to pass, and retaining the unhulled kernels or 
paddy. The concave upper surface of disk C 
is fitted also with coarse wire-cloth, as shown 
at 0, which forms a friction-surface to move 
the grain. 
The box e that is beneath disk C is divided 
by a horizontal partition, p, and has two deliv 
ery-spouts, q r, the former above the partition, 
and spout below. From the partition p a 
pipe, s, extends upward through the screen 1, 
and there is a beveled ring, s', around the up 
per end of the pipe resting on the screen. 
Above the pipe s is fixed a cone, t, which is 
within the conical bottom d of hopper B. 
There is a space between the cone t and bot 
tom d, which serves as a passage for the blast 
of air from pipef, and the cone serves to di 
rect and spread the air. 
The operation is as follows: The rice from 
the hulling-mills is fed directly to the hopper 
B, and passing through holes 1 goes upon the 
screen n. The blast of air acts at this time 
to throw unhulled grains and other light mat 
ter outward to the edge of the separator. The 
screen in separates the main bulk of the paddy 
or unhulled rice, and allows the hulledrice and 
smaller grains to pass. The hulled rice, being 
the heavier, is gradually worked to the bottom 
and through the screen, while a portion of the 
lighter materials goes over the rim to the space 
inclosed by curb i, and the balance goes to the 
lower part of the box eby pipes. The second 
separation occurs in the space between screen 
in and diskC, from which the lighter materials 
pass, by the openings m, beneath rim l, while 
the hulled rice goes to the upper part of boxe, 
and is finally delivery by spout q. The un 
hulled and refuse materials pass out of thema 
chine by spoutsk ". 
The advantages obtained by this machine 
are that it will clean rice containing a large 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
OO 
S 
O 
IS 
243,944 
25 
35 
2 
percentage of paddy, thus insuring a larger for oscillating the disk, substantially as shown 
yield with less breakage from the hulling 
and described, for operation as set forth. 
stones. The rice can be run from the sepa 
2. The hopper B, provided with conicalbot 
rator directly to the pearling-mills, and being 
tom d and feed-apertures, blower D, provided 
properly separated, wear and tear on the mills 
with tubef, and the conet, combined with the 
is lessened. The separator delivers the rice in 
oscillating receiver C and screen n, substan 
condition for use as food, without dependence 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
on the pearling-machines for further cleaning, 
3. The receiver C, suspended by links g, 
thus allowing use of the grain with all its nu 
screen n, feed-hopper B, boxe, formed with ring 
tritious portions. 
e', operating-shaft a, and eccentric c, substan 
The separator may be used for separating 
tially as shown and described, combined for 
other materials of varying specific gravity. 
operation as set forth. 
The delivery-opening of the hopper may be 
3. The boxe, provided with partition p and 
fitted with a register-valve in form of a mov. 
spouts q r, and the tubes, in combination with 
able ring, for regulating the delivery by vary 
the centrally-apertured oscillating disk C, and 
ing the size of opening. 
screen n, substantially as shown and described. 
Eaving thus described my invention, I claim 
The above specification of my invention 
signed by me this 8th day of January, 1880. 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination of the suspended disk C, 
ALONZO MOORE. 
formed with a concave upper surface, box e, 
provided with partition p and spouts q', screen 
in, pipes, beveled rings', feed-hopper, supply 
ing the material to the screen, and mechanism 
s 
I. W. ToRREY, 
J. G. TORREY. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244045.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W., & A, GEDDES, 
t 
CHRISTMASTREE CANDLE HOLDER, 
No. 244,045. 
Patented July 12, 1881. 
 
SN)itics scs, 
/. 4.4341,au. 
42,8346 
3-1-uc Vitots, 
W. EODE 
A GED DES 
t3 Xs 
e26 alle-P ea 
Attorgley 
P 
by 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. GEDDES AND ALEXANDER GEDDES, OF BALTIMORE, MD. 
CHRISTMASTREE CANDLE- HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 244,045, dated July 12, 1881. 
Application filed December 7, 1880. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES W. GEDDEs 
and ALEXANDER GEDDES, both of Baltimore 
city, State of Maryland, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Christmas 
Tree Candle-Eolders; and we hereby declare 
the same to be fully, clearly, and exactly de 
scribed as follows, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the device. 
Fig. 2 is a central vertical sectional view, and 
Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view, of the 
Sale. 
Our invention relates to that class of candle 
holders designed for use upon Christmas-trees; 
and it consists in a combined candlestick and 
reflector struck up from a single piece of sheet 
metal, and having a candle-holding device and 
tang for attaching the candlestick to the tree, 
constructed and operating as hereinafter set 
forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, A is the 
back, B the reflector, and C the drip-pan, 
which are struck up from a single piece of tin 
or other sheet metal by means of suitable dies. 
The reflector and pan are made somewhat con 
cave, and are bent forward, as shown, so that 
the pan is substantially at right angles with 
the back, and the reflector at an angle of about 
forty-five degrees therewith. The wings a, a 
are scalloped, and are also bent forward at an 
angle of about twenty-five degrees with the 
back, serving as lateral reflectors. 
Coincidently with the striking up of the parts 
named the back is cutas shown, forming straps 
b c for the attachment of the tangs D and E. 
These consist of narrow strips of tin, such as 
are sheared off the edges of blanks at can-fac 
tories and at present are thrown away as use 
less. These strips or tangs are attached to 
25 
35 
40 
So 
55 
the device by simply thrusting their ends d 
under the straps b c and bending them over. 
The little candles or tapers e are secured by 
bending the ends of the tangs E around them. 
The flexible and inelastic nature of the tangs 
DE admits of the device being made to hang 
vertically from the branch or twig to which it 
is secured, and of the candle being placed cen 
trally over the pan C and under the reflector. 
The latter, in connection with the wings a, 
serves to reflect the rays of light forward and 
to prevent the ignition of the twigs by the call 
dle, which latter is very liable to happen with 
the usual candle-holder, owing to the resinous 
nature of the pine or cedar tree so universally 
used. 
The cup or pan C is made deep enough to 
hold all the wax or spermaceti which is liable 
to drop from the candle. 
The little device is simply and cheaply con 
structed, and the peculiar form of candle-hold 
ing device admits of its use with large or small 
tapers. 
What we claim is 
1. The candle-holder herein described, con 
sisting of the back, reflector, and pan, and pro 
vided with tangs for holding the taper and for 
securing the device to the tree, as set forth. 
2. The back A, having wings a, reflector B, 
and pan C, in combination with the sheet 
metal tangs D and E, as set forth. 
3. The back A, reflector B, and pan C, struck 
up from sheet metal, as described, and slitted 
for the attachment of the tangs D and E, as 
set forth. 
JAMES W. GEODES, 
ALEX. GEDDES, 
Attest: 
R. D. WILLIAMS, 
JNO. T. MADDOX. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244145.txt	(No Model.) 
M, RENZ, 
NUTCRACKER, 
No. 244,145. 
Patented July 12, 188l. 
 
WITNESSES: 
Y-1 
-%2 644 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEY 
BY 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MITCHELL RENZ, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
NUT. CRACKER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 244,145, dated July 12, 1881. 
Application filed May 6, 1881. (No model.) 
Be it known that I, MITCHELL RENZ, of resembles somewhat that of a horseshoe. 
IS 
To all chon it may concern : 
Bridgeport, county of Fairfield, and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Nut - Crackers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention has reference to an improve 
ment in nut-crackers of that class in which two 
movable jaws are jointed together at one end 
and connected to fulcrumed handles at the op 
posite ends; and the invention consists of a 
nut-cracker composed of two movable jaws 
which are jointed together at one end and piv 
oted to inwardly - projecting lugs of hinged 
handles at the opposite ends, said jaws and 
handles being spread apart by a spring inter 
posed between the lugs of the handles. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1 
and 2 represent side views of my improved 
nut-cracker, showing the same respectively in 
open and closed position. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
AA in the drawings represent two movable 
25 jaws, which are jointed to each other at one 
end by means of a connecting-pivot, a, and at 
their opposite inwardly-curved ends, by pivots 
b b, to inwardly-projecting lugs did, of two ban 
dles, BB, which are hinged to each other above 
the pivot-connection with the movable jaws 
AA. The handiles B B are bent from their 
connecting-hinge downward in such a manner 
as to follow the curve of the jaws AA, the 
lower ends of the handles being curved out 
5 wardly and extended below the lower jointed 
ends of the jaws A A. By this arrangement 
the movable jaws are placed entirely between 
O 
the outer curved handles, the shape of which 
The movable jaws are roughened or serra 
ted at their inner faces for properly taking hold 
of the nuts placed between the same. A spiral 
or other spring, e, is interposed between the 
lugs did of the handles B B, and secured in 
any suitable manner thereto, so as to serve to 
open the jaws and handles after they have 
been forced together for cracking the muts, 
which facilitates the use of the cracker. 
I am aware that nut-crackers with two mov. 
able jaws, which are jointed together at one 
end and pivotally connected at their opposite 
ends to fulcrumed handles, have been used 
heretofore, and I therefore do not specially 
claim the same. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
In a nut-cracker, the combination of two mov 
ablejaws, which arejointed together at one end 
with hinged handles, which are provided with 
inwardly-projecting lugs, to which the opposite 
ends of the movable jaws are pivoted, and with 
a spiral or other spring interposed between the 
lugs of the handles, so as to open the jaws and 
handles after the pressure thereon is released, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 25th day of April, 
S81. 
MITCHELL RENZ, 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
CARL KARP. 
45 
55 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244245.txt	(NO Model.) 
W. M. JACKSON, 
RECEPTACLE FOR HOLDING GASEs UNDER PRESSURE, 
No. 244245, 
Patented July 12, 188l. 
 
Zrenewes. 
222 62 e-as-e6 
/ 46% % r 
Zze - e real 
2%aft 222. afo-eso 
4 
N. PEERs. Photo-litiographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER M. JACKSON, OF PROVIDENCE, REIODE ISLAND. 
RECEPTACLE FOR HOLDING GASES UNDER PRESSURE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 244,245, dated July 12, 1881. 
Application filed February 21, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all vion it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WALTER M. JACKSON, 
of Providence, in the county of Providence, 
and in the State of Rhode Island, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Receptacles for Holding Gases Under Com 
pression; and I do hereby declare that the fol. 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, making a part of this specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in receivers or holders in which gas or 
gases of any description can be condensed and 
stored under great pressure. 
Heretofore all receivers or holders for this 
purpose have been constructed of metal, such 
as brass, steel, or iron; but they have proved 
defective and impracticable for the purpose, 
owing to the porosity of the metal, which per 
mits the gas to gradually escape through the 
walls of the receiver, 
The object of my present invention is to ob 
viate these defects and provide a receiver or 
holder that will be almost, if not wholly and 
absolutely, impervious to gas, and in which a 
large amount of gas can be condensed and im 
prisoned and drawn off as required for use. 
To this end my invention consists of a re 
ceiver or holder constructed mainly of paper, 
and saturated with a suitable composition or 
substance to render it impervious to gases, as 
more fully hereinafter specified. 
I accomplish the above-mentioned objects 
by the apparatus illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 illustrates a perspective view of 
my improved receiver or holder; Fig. 2, a de 
tached view of the main portion of the re 
ceiver and its heads, and Fig. 3 a detached 
view of one of the bolts and screw-nuts by 
means of which the heads are bolted to the 
body. 
The letter A indicates the main portion or 
body of the receiver or holder, which is con 
structed, preferably, of one continuous piece. 
This is wrapped around a rotating arbor or 
mandrel, and during the Wrapping is satu 
rated continuously, in any convenient manner, 
with a suitable compound or substance which 
Will fill the pores of the paper, strengthen it, 
and render it impervious to gas. I have found 
in practice that a mixture of gelatine and glyc 
erine, in about the proportions of one part of 
gelatine to twenty parts of glycerine, forms 
a compound well adapted to this purpose for 
general uses; but I do not limit myself to such 
proportions, as they may be varied consider 
ably without departing from this part of my 
invention. 
The arbor or mandrel is preferably disjointed 
or disconnected between its ends, so that after 
the body of the receiver or holder is made it 
can be readily removed. 
The letter B indicates a flange, one at each 
end of the body of the receiver or holder. 
These are preferably turned up during the pro 
cess of rolling, but they may be formed in any 
other convenient manner. To these flanges 
are fitted the heads C. D. The heads C are 
struck up in concavo-convex form out of paper, 
and the heads D of similarly-shaped steel 
disks, and the whole are bolted securely to the 
flanges by means of the longitudinal screw 
bolts E, provided with the screw-nuts F. 
The joints betweentheheads and the flanges 
of the receiver or holder may be made tight 
by means of any suitable cement or composi 
tion. 
The letter G indicates a pipe through which 
the compressed gas may be drawn off for use. 
This is provided with a check or regulating 
valve, H, by means of which the gas may be 
delivered from the receiver or holder at a uni 
form pressure, no matter what the pressure 
may be in the receiver. 
The receiver and holder as thus constructed 
I have found by practice will contain practi 
cally one thousand cubic feet of gas to one 
cubic foot of capacity, which can be delivered, 
by use of the check or regulating valve, at a 
uniform pressure of three inches of Water or 
thereabout, so long as the pressure in the re 
ceiver or holder exceeds three inches of water 
pressure. 
O 
IS 
25 
30 
35 
KO 
45 
55 
75 
85 
go 
95 
2 
244,245 
Having thus described my invention, what of, the steel heads and bolts for securing the 1o 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat- same together, substantially as set forth. 
ent, is- 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
1. A receptacle or holder for compressed gas have hereunto set my hand this 17th day of 
5 or gases, constructed of paper combined with February, 1881. 
gelatine and glycerine, substantially as speci- 
fied. 
2. The combination, with the body of the 
receptacle or holder and the paper heads there- 
WALTER MARSH. JACKSON, 
Witnesses: 
WHIPPLE V. PHILLIPs, 
C. E. WADSWORTH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244345.txt	2. Sheets-Sheet 1 
H. WATERMAN. 
PISTON, 
Patented July 12, 1881. 
(No Model.) 
No. 244,345. 
 
 
  
 
S=SIT IS-S 
  
N -T 
 
 
  
III. It 
s S 
 
WITNESSES: N 
1467, c//aza. 
were 
- 
-6 
2.INVENTOR: 
BY 
volut- 1. 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, Photo-ithographer. Washington.D. c 
(No Model.) 
, 
No. 244,345. 
H. WATERMAN, 
PISTON, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 12, 1881. 
INVENTOR: 
By ste  
ATTORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY WATERMAN, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
PSTON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters, Patent No. 244,845, dated July 12, 1881. 
Application filed May 17, 1881. (No model.) 
- 
O 
IS 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EIENRY WATERMAN, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented a new and Improved 
Piston, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to combine in 
a hollow piston solidity, lightness, and facility 
of adjustment tip compensate for Wear. 
My improvements relate to pistons having 
their main portions formed by expansible rings 
carried by a central hub and face-plates; and 
the invention consists in the combination, with 
these essential portions, of devices that give 
solid and adjustable backing to the rings; 
also, in a metallic packing-disk for the joint 
between the face-plate and rings, all as here 
inafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure is a 
plan view of the piston, with the face-plate and 
packing-disk removed... Fig. 2 is a transverse 
section of the piston complete on line aca of 
Fig. 1; and Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 represent the 
packing devices of the piston. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A is the hub, formed with the face-plate a, 
and with radial arms b, to which the face-plate 
c is secured by screws d. B B are split rings 
3o placed upon a wide inner split ring, C, between 
the plates a c. The ring C is backed at three 
equal-distant points by spring-plates e and 
keys f, and at the side opposite is open ends 
by a curved block or plate, g, and key or keys h. 
35 The arms b of the hub are recessed at their 
outer ends to form lugs i, between which the 
keys.fh enter. The plates eat each point are 
two or more in number, so as to form leaf. 
springs, and are secured by a rivet or other 
wise to the keys. The block g is formed with 
a central hemispherical socket, k, in its inner 
face, and the key h is formed with a hemi 
spherical stud, l, which enters the socketk, the 
stud thus preventing lateral movement of 
blockg, while permitting it to rock. The outer 
convex surface of block g is formed with a 
transverse groove, m, that is engaged by a, 
stud, n, projecting from ring C. By this con 
struction the ring, block, and key are retained 
in their proper relative positions, and the 
block may adjust itself accurately to the inner 
surface of the ring. 
In the recesses of the arms b, behind the 
keys if h, are filling plates or strips o, of any 
So 
45 
75 
desired number, as required, to expand the 55 
ring C. These being placed to fill out the 
space when the piston is set or from time to 
time, as required, furnish solid resistance, and 
unequal wear can be accurately compensated 
for. 
It will be seen that the expansible ring C is 
held rigidly at its middle portion between the 
split ends, while the remaining portion is al 
lowed a limited amount of movement by the 
leaf-springs e. 
Between the plate c and the edges of rings 
B C is the packing p. This may consist of a 
circular plate of spring metal, of convex-con 
cave form, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4, which, 
being clamped by plate c, packs the joints be 
tween the plate and rings, so as to exclude 
steam from the interior of the piston. 
For large-sized pistons I prefer to use pack 
ing-rings or ring-segments. (Shown in Figs. 5, 
6, 7, and 8.) These will be made of spring metal 
and curved transversely, so that when placed 
upon the expansible rings and clamped down 
by the face-plate they insure a tight joint. 
This piston, when fitted with plate g, is espe 
cially adapted for use in horizontal cylinders, 8o 
where, on account of the sag, the wear on the 
packing-rings B is unequal. Such wear can 
be readily compensated for by adjustment of 
the backing without affecting the solidity of 
parts. 
cylinders the plate g is 
For use in Vertical 
not essential. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The piston consisting of split rings BC, 
hub A, formed with recessed arms b, curved 
block g, plates e, keys f h, and face-plates 
a c, combined, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. In a piston, the curved backing-block g, 
formed with ball and socket, and the key h, 
formed with stud l, in combination with the 
hub A. and expansible ring C, as and for the 
purpose specified. 
3. In pistons, the metallic packing-plates p, 
combined with the hub A, face-plate c, ald ex 
pansible packing-rings, substantially as shown 
and described. 
HENRY WATERMAN. 
Witnesses: 
85 
95 
9o 
Od 
C. SEDGWICK, 
a 
J. H. SCARBOROUGH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244445.txt	 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM FRISHMUTE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-TEIIRD TO WICKEIAM B. SPEAR, OF SAME PLACE. 
PROCESS OF PRODUCING ALLOYS FOR ANO DES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 244,445, dated July 19, 1881. 
Application filed January 19, 1881. (No specimens.) 
i 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM FRISHMUTH, 
of the city and county of Philadelphia, in the 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Process of Producing Al 
loys for Anodes, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
material suitable for the formation of anodes 
for the use of electroplaters; and to this end 
my improvement consists in the process of 
producing the same, as hereinafter set forth. 
My improved alloy is prepared from the fol 
lowing ingredients in the following manner 
and proportions, to wit: One (1) pound of 
nickel oxide, one-half () pound of fine carbon, 
two (2) pounds of cryolite, and two (2) pounds 
of a mixture of chloride of potassium and chlo 
ride of sodium, in a dry state, are to be thor 
oughly mixed together and exposed in a cru 
cible to a white heat for a period of at least 
two hours, after which the crucible is removed 
from the furnace, and will be found to contain 
an alloy of nickel and aluminium in balls or 
pellets of a metallic silvery-white appearance. 
These are then to be mixed with carbon and 
borax, constituting a flux, remelted by a white 
heat, and cast in iron ingots or sand molds to 
any size or form desired for anodes or plates. 
The anodes so formed are in condition for use 
by the electroplater, either with a solution of 
the double sulphate or chloride of ammonia, 
and nickel or with the solution of alloy of 
... O 
25 
aluminium and nickel for which Letters Pat 
ent of the United States No. 223,210 were 
granted to myself and H. B. Van Tronk un 
der date of December 30, 1879. 
Articles plated from anodes of my improved 
alloy receive a more perfect and a heavier coat 
ing, and are susceptible of a finer polish and 
finish, than those treated with the use of the 
anodes heretofore employed; and, further, my 
alloy may also beformed into rolled sheets and 
castings for the manufacture of sundry useful 
and ornamental articles. 
I do not claim any White metal other than 
aluminium as combined with nickel; neither 
do I claim any of the fluxes herein mentioned, 
as they are well known; neither do I claim the 
alloy with copper or any other metal. 
v. 
5 
I claim as my invention and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent 
The process of producing an alloy of nickel 
and aluminium consisting in fusing the follow 
ing-named substances in substantially the pro 
portions specified, viz: of nickel oxide one (1) 
pound, offine carbon one-half () pound, of cry 
olite two (2) pounds, of a mixture of chlo 
ride of potassium and chloride of sodium two 
(2) pounds, and finally the alloy being mixed 
with a flux consisting of carbon and borax, as 
set forth. 
WILLIAM FRISEMUTH, 
Witnesses: 
JoHNW. C. MAY WEG, 
JOSEPH. KIRCHHEIMER, 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244545.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 244.545. 
W. CARTER, 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithogra 
plier. Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM CARTER, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
UM B RELLA AN O PARASO L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 244,545, dated July 19, 1881. 
(No model.) Patented in England April 4, 1879, in France October 4, 1879, and in Belgium 
Application filed May 7, 1881. 
October 7, 1879, 
O 
15 
To all pho? it ??? ???cer?: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAME CARTER, of 
London, England, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Umbrellas and Parasols, 
(for which I have obtained a patent in Great 
Britain, No. 1,346, bearing date April 4, 1879, 
a patent in France, No. 133,011, bearing date 
October 4, 1879, and a patentin Belgium, No. 
49,487, bearing date October 7, 1879,) of which 
the following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings. 
Myinvention relates to improvements in um 
brellas and parasols, and is designed to pro 
vide better means than any heretofore in use 
for securing the upper end or tip of the ribs to 
the fixed ring or top notch, and for securing 
the lower end or tip of the stretchers to the 
sliding piece or runner. 
It also relates to forming the lower end or 
tip of such ribs as are made with a groove run 
ning lengthwise, as in the so-called well-known 
paragon-frames," with a flattened portion, 
whereby such ribs will lie closer to the stick 
when the umbrella or parasol is closed than 
heretofore. 
The said invention is illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in Which-- 
Figurel represents a portion of an umbrella 
stick and the top notch and runner, and shows 
my improved ribs and stretchers applied there 
to. Fig. 2 is an interior view of the upper 
end of a rib constructed according to my in 
vention; and Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section 
of the top notch, showing my improved ribs 
attached thereto. Fig. 4 is a side view of por 
tions of a stretcher constructed according to 
my invention, and Fig. 5 is an interior view of 
the same. Fig.6 shows the method of Securing 
the stretchers to the runner. Fig. 7 is a side 
view, and Fig. Sis an interior view, of the lower 
or outer end of an umbrella-rib constructed 
according to my invention. Figs. 2 to 8 are 
drawn to an enlarged scale. 
Like letters indicate the same parts through 
out the drawings. 
a represents the stick of the umbrella, b the 
top notch, and c the runner. dd are the ribs, 
and e e are the stretchers, for the same. 
In carrying my invention into practice, in 
so stead of forming the said ribs and stretchers 
45 
35 
55 
with thin, flat, and elongated ends, to be at 
tached to the top notch and runner, I make 
the said ends or eyes of a round or curved form, 
as shown at de?, and of a comparatively great 
width or thickness-that is to say, consider 
ably thicker than these parts have heretofore 
been made. This form is obtained by turning 
over a portion of the metal of which the rib or 
stretcher is constructed, an aperture being left 
for the passage of the ordinary wire for secur- 6o 
ing the tip to the top notch or runner. These 
eyes or ends d or e' are preferably formed of 
the same or nearly the same width or thick 
ness as the ribs or stretchers, and fit into ap 
ertures b' c', of corresponding width, provided 65 
in the top notch, b, and the runner c. The said 
top notch and runner are somewhat similar to 
those heretofore constructed, but are smaller 
in diameter, the apertures therein are wider, 
and the projections are deeper than those in 
the top notches and runners heretofore em 
ployed. The tips or ends d and e' are secured 
to the said top notch and runner by passing a 
wire, f, through the aforesaid tips or ends in 
the ordinary manner. 
I prefer to form the runner With a curved 
flange or ring, c, upon whose upper edge the 
ends e' of the stretchers rest when secured in 
position, as shown in Fig. 6. 
ends d' and e' as above described, and by con 
structing the ribs or projections b and con 
the top notch and runner deeper than hereto 
fore, I insure a larger bearing-surface for the 
ribs and stretchers than is possible with the 85 
flat thin heads heretofore employed, and the 
ribs and stretchers therefore open and close 
in a direct manner without any liability to be 
come crossed, twisted, or obstructed. More 
over, by forming the top notch and runner of 9c. 
small diameter, as above described, I obtain 
the further important advantage of causing 
the ribs and stretchers to lie closer to the stick 
when the umbrella is closed than heretofore. 
a piece of metal bent or doubled longitudinally 
along its length to form two longitudinal 
flanges; and in order to further increase the 
strength of the ends de' of the said ribs and 
stretchers, I turn over a portion of the flanges Ioo 
Each rib d and each stretcher e is formed of 95 
It will be seen that by forming the tips or 8o 
75 
 
244,545 
Instead of forming the lower end or tip of described. 
of the said ribs and stretchers, as shown at d 
e*, thereby providing a greater thickness of 
metal at those parts. 
the ribs with the usual projecting knobs, Iform 
the same with a knob, d, which is cut away or 
flattened upon the inner side, as shown at d 
in Figs. 7 and 8, so that the rib will lie closer 
to the stick when the umbrella is closed than 
lheretofore. - 
Heretofore umbrella ribs and stretchers have 
been formed with broadened flat-eyed ends 
fitting broad notches in the crown-piece and 
runner, and confined in place by wires, but 
such is not broadly claimed by me. 
What I claim is 
1. The longitudinally-flanged umbrella-rib 
herein described, having an eyed end formed 
of the same width as the rib, and the ends of 
the side flanges of the rib turned or folded in 
Ward toward each other beneath the broadened 
eyed end, substantially as and for the purpose 
2. Alongitudinally-flanged stretcher for the 
ribs of umbrellas, having an eyed end formed 
of the same width as the stretcher, and the 
end portions of the flange of the stretcher 
turned or folded inward toward each other be 
neath the eyed end, substantially as described. 
3. An umbrella or parasol rib having its 
outer free end provided with an enlarged lat 
erally-projecting knob, d, having itsinner side 
formed with a straight flat face, d, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
WILLIAM CARTER, 
25 
Witnesses: 
LEWIS SANDERSON, 
WILLIAMCROSS. 
5 
1 ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244645.txt	(Model.) 
No. 244,645. 
 
w G. MINCHIN. 
TRUNK CATCH, 
- 
Patented July 19, 1881. 
Znvenfor: 
Geoye 76inchin. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE MIN CHIN, OF NEW ARK, N E W J ERs EY. 
TRUNK-CATCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 244,645, dated July 19, 1881. 
Application filed March 25, 1881. (Model.) 
l 
. 
. 
5 and useful Improvements in Trunk-Catches; derstood by referring to Fig. 4. 
To all whom it may concern: 
hooked end being supported on one side by 
Be it known that I, GEORGE MINCHIN, a means of a spring, g, coiled around the poste, 
resident of Newark, in the county of Essex and and adapted to automatically engage with the 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain new tang b when the trunk is closed, as will be un- 55 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
A rod, C, is adjusted transversely in the plate 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven- B, one end of which is bent or otherwiseformed 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the at a right angle therewith, to constitute a thumb 
art to which it appertains to make and use the or finger piece, h, by means of which to manip- 6o 
Io same, reference being had to the accompanying ulate the rod from the outside, Figs. 1 and 5, 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked said rod having its bearings in perforations or 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. recesses i at each side of the plate B, as indi 
This invention relates to that class of trunk- cated in Figs. 1 and 2. At or near the center 
catches in which a tang projecting from a plate of the rod is a recess, j, through which passes 65 
15 secured to the lid enters a socket in a box-like the hooked barf, as indicated in Figs. 2 and 
plate secured to the body of the trunk and en- 4, so that, as will be seen by reference more 
gages with a catch or hook adjusted in said box-particularly to the latter figure, the hooked bar 
like plate for the purpose. 
flies between said rod and the spring. 
The action of the hooked bar is somewhat to 
The object of the invention is to impart in- 
. 
. 
- 
- 
35 described and finally claimed. 
20 creased strength to and to facilitate the manip- peculiar, and is as follows: When the lid is 
ulation of the device. 
being closed and the tang (its end being bev 
In the accompanying drawings,in which simi-, eled) comes in contact with the inclined face 
lar letters of reference indicate corresponding of the hooked bar, as will be understood by 
parts in each of the several figures, Figure 1 reference to Fig. 4, the latter will be forced 75 
25 is a front elevation of a trunk-catch embody-outward against the yielding spring, while the 
ing my improvement. Fig. 2 is a view of the opposite end of said bar will be forced in Ward, 
same, taken from the back, showing the ar- the action of the spring tending to keep it in 
rangement of the parts on the inside. Fig. 4 is intimate contact with the rod, as well as into 
a vertical transverse section of the same taken engagement with the recessed tang. In open- 8o 
3o through line ac, and Figs. 3 and 5 are detailing the trunk the thumb-piece is seized and 
views. 
turned backward or downward, which forces 
The invention consists in the peculiar con- the hooked bar out of engagement with the 
truction, arrangement, and operation of the tang into the position indicated by the broken 
various parts, as will be hereinafter more fully lines in Fig. 4, which position it will retain as 85 
long as desired, if the rod is turned far enough; 
In carrying out my invention I construct a if not it will resume automatically its normal 
plate, A, from sheet or cast metal, having the position when the trunk is open, as indicated 
usual screw-holes, a, and a tang, b, provided in the same figure. 
with a recess, c, as indicated in Figs. 1, 2, and 
4o 3, which plate is intended to be secured to the recessed of necessity, as shown in Fig. 5, as if 
lid or body of a trunk, as will be readily un- one side of it were flat its entire length be 
derstood. I also construct a box-like plate, B, tween the bearings its action upon the hooked 
having the usual screw-holes, adapted to be bar would be the same, though the rod might 
secured to the body or lid of the trupk, and not be quite so stiff. 
45 provided with a socket or opening, d, for the 
reception of the tang b, above mentioned, as in 
the postse and e' imparts great strength to the 
dicated in Tigs. 1 and 2. Said plate B is also 
device, and is, therefore, important. 
provided with two posts or lugs, ee', projecting 
In order to facilitate the adjustment of the 
from the inside thereof, upon which is loosely 
rod C in the box-like plate B the latter is re- Ioo. 
So adjusted a hooked bar, f, the latter being pro- cessed on the inside, at k, so that the rod can 
vided with apertures for the purpose, the be slipped into its bearings, the angle end first, 
95 
The double bearing of the hooked bar upon . 
It will be evident that the rod need not be go 
 
2 
244,645 
5 
O 
IS 
without difficulty, and be prevented from acci. 
dental displacement by the shoulders on the 
bar coming in contact with the sides of the 
plate, as will be readily understood. 
It will be observed that the rod C operates, 
in connection with the hooked bar and tang, 
upon the same principle of an ordinary key in 
a lock, except that it is permanently adjusted 
in the catch. 
Bhaving thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a trunk - catch, the combination of a 
plate provided with a recessed tang, a box-like 
plate having a socket or opening to receive said 
tang, and two posts or lugs projecting from the 
inside thereof, a hooked bar adapted to be 
loosely adjusted upon said posts, as shown, 
and to engage with said tang in closing the 
trunk, a spring adapted to hold the said bar 
and tang into engagement, and means, as de 
scribed, disconnected from said hooked bar 
and tang, for operating the device, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a trunk-catch having a box-like plate 
provided with two posts, a hooked bar adjust 
ed thereon, and a spring arranged and operat 
ing as described and shown, in combination 
with a rod passing transversely through said 
box-like plate, having a flat and rounded sur 
face, and a finger-piece, arranged and opera. 
ting in conjunction with said hooked bar and 
Spring, as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 21st day of 
March, 1881. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE MINCHIN. 
25 
35 
OLIVER DRAKE, 
CHARLES H. PELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244745.txt	(No Model.) 
C. P. GOLDEY. 
GAME CARDS, 
No. 244,745, 
. 
Patented July 26, 188l. 
 
Prefix 
TRANS 
over, cross 
es 
A. 
Micror site of asymg 
ED 
IV 
avtavo quarry out Aewea or 
NG 
Cowayvayg 
ION 
Afore rham owe, Does 
VE 
day 
was on 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
CEIARLES P. GOLDEY, 
GAME 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CARDS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 244,745, dated July 26, 1881. 
Application filed June 16, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
s 
5 
... following is a specification. 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs PIERRE GOL 
DEY, of New York, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
Improvements in Game - Cards, of which the 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
game which shall serve as a means of amuse 
ment, and at the same time as a means of ob 
taining a thorough knowledge of the origin 
and construction of Words in an easy and in 
teresting manner. 
To this end the invention consists in a series 
of cards divided in suits, the suits bearing re 
spectively word roots, suffixes, and prefixes, 
the cards being used under such rules as may 
be adopted by combining different cards in such 
manner as to form by the combination various 
words. For example, by placing in advance of 
the card which bears the root act the pre 
fix trans the word transact is formed, 
and by adding to the cards thus arranged the 
card bearing the suffix ion the word trans 
action is produced, and so on indefinitely. 
The number of cards employed in each suit 
and the particular roots, suffixes, and prefixes 
employed form no essential part of my inven 
tion, the same being selected at will. 
In order to render the game more instruct 
ive, terms explanatory of the words, suffixes, 
and prefixes appearing thereon may be applied 
to them. . 
Prize-cards or other additional cards may 
be also used in addition to the cards above 
named, or certain of the first-named cards may 
be marked as prize-cards. 
In the accompanying drawing, A represents 
a number of the root-cards; B, the cards con 
taining prefixes, and C the cards containing 
suffixes. 
It will, of course, be understood that the 
cards represented would not constitute a de 
sirable game, it being preferable to increase 
their number to fifty or thereabout. It is pre 
ferred to employ sixty-four cards, nineteen 
having three prefixes on each, twenty-five hav 
ing one root on each, fifteen with three suffixes 
on each, and five prize-cards each bearing one 
suffix. Among the roots which I employ are 
tract, gress, sign, fer, pulse, port, 
form, sist, script, pose, press, 
(vert, act, fuse, cede, claim, miss, 
spect, ject, duce, duct, and cess. 
Among the prefixes employ are trans, in, 
pro suf, de, dis, col, se, en, 
im, is di, at, 4 un, ap, sex, pre, 
inter, per, con, (re, se,' op, {{a, 
ab, super, sub, e, intro, ob, 
circum, retro. Among the suffixes Iem 
ploy are ory, (ly, ant, ate, ity, 
able, ion, is est, al, ed, ive, er, 
ence, ment, ing, es ent, ible, 
ance, ure, ness,  ful, ee, or. 
The cards thus prepared may be used under 
various rules for playing different games, all 
of which will embrace the features of combin 
ing two or more cards to form one word. 
It is manifest that the roots may be used 
with cards bearing suffixes only, or used with 
cards bearing prefixes only; but it is preferred 
to make use of both the prefixes and suffixes, 
or the cards bearing the prefixes and suffixes 
may be used without the root-cards, in which 
case the word roots' will be named by the 
player at will. 
It is deemed unnecessary to give herein all 
the rules which may be employed when mak 
ing use of the cards, inasmuch as the adoption 
of one rule or another is discretionary with the 
persons making use of the cards. The use of 
the following rules, however, will afford one 
very amusing and instructive game. Let each 
player draw from the pack one card. The first 
person drawing a prefix deals. If no prefix is 
drawn on the first round the drawing is to be 
continued untilone is drawn. Shuffle the cards 
thoroughly and let each player in turn act as 
dealer. Deal four cards at a time to each 
player, and lay four cards, one at a time, face 
up on the table; when these have been used, 
four more, one at a time, to each player, but 
hone to the table, and proceed in this manner 
until the pack is consumed, laying the odd 
cards, if any remain, face upward upon the 
table. Beginning at the left of the dealer, each 
person plays in turn. For example, A sits at 
the left-hand of the dealer and the four cards 
ing re port, ion lie on the table. A 
having arranged his cards so that he alone can 
see them, plays either a root or a prefix or a 
suffix, so as to make a word from one or limore 
cards on the table, and when a word is formed 
it is taken from the table and called a trick. 
Every word formed should contain a root, and 
. 
- 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
OO 
 
 
2 
244,745 
can be made of two or more syllables. Each 
player has but one turn and can play but one 
card from his or her hand at a time, and is al 
lowed one minute and a half. If you cannot 
make a word, or do not wish to form, as will 
be explained later, you must play one card 
from your hand to the table, face up. A player 
can use any one, but only one, of the three 
prefixes or suffixes on the same-card. After a 
prefix, root, or suffix has been played, and only 
when the player is removing from the table a 
trick that he has made, the next player may 
add a suitable prefix or suffix, and take it from 
him, and the next player, in turn, may take it 
by still adding, and so on. For example, A 
forms the word trans-act,' and is about to 
take it from the table when B, looking over 
his cards, sees the suffix ion, and says: I 
make it trans-action by adding the suffix 
ion,' and is about to take the trick when C 
says: I make it trans-act-ion-s by adding 
the suffix s, and takes the trick. The final 
e is dropped before a suffix beginning with a 
vowel, as cede-ed-ceded. When the lastlet 
ter of a root or suffix should be dropped by 
adding an additional syllable according to the 
above rule a dash before that letter will be 
found, and the card played should be placed 
upon it, covering it from sight, as in the word 
confusing from confuse-ing. The player 
should endeavor to make words of the great 
est number of syllables, as a word of four syl 
lables scores one point; five syllables, two 
points; six syllables, three points. 
A sceep.-The player who takes all the cards 
from the table makes a sweep and scores one 
point, The next player must play one card to 
the table, face up. 
The prizes used in this game are to secure 
Io 
15 
25 
35 
40 
the greatest number of points, and they will be 
found valued, respectively, one, two, and three. 
When all the cards in the pack are exhausted, 
the player taking the last trick takes all the 
cards remaining on the table. 
Making an incorrect word or spelling in 
correctly, forfeits the player's turn, and the 
first card of the incorrect word is taken by the 
player who first detects the error. If more 
than one detects it at the same time the card 
is played to the table. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The herein-described game apparatus, the 
same consisting of a series of cards divided into 
suits, the suits bearing, respectively, word 
roots, prefixes, and suffixes. 
2. A pack of cards containing a suit pro 
vided with prefixes and another suit provided 
with suffixes, the same being adapted, as de 
scribed, for use with word-roots either written 
or unwritten. 
3. A game consisting of three suits of cards, 
the cards of the first suit provided each with 
a root, the cards of the second suit provided 
each with two or more suffixes, and the cards 
of the third suit provided each with two or 
more prefixes. 
4. A pack of cards divided into suits, the 
cards of the respective suits bearing prefixes 
and suffixes and words explanatory thereof. 
5. In a game apparatus, the combination of 
the cards bearing, respectively, the roots, suf. 
fixes, and prefixes, and prize cards, substan. 
tially as shown. 
CHARLES PIERRE GOLDEY. 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
FRED. A. THURBER, 
WM. H. GOLDEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244845.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 244,845, 
 
J. BOWLEs. 
ROTARY. CUTTER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 26, 188l. 
w --- 
- 22% 
- 
---- 
(No Model) 
> 
. 
No. 244,845. 
J. BOWLES, 
2. Sheets-e-Sheet 2. 
ROTARY CUTTER. 
Patented July 26, 1881. 
N. FEERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BOWLEs, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, ASSIGNOR OF 
THREE-FOURTHS TO ASA WHITE HEAD, OF SAME PLACE. 
RoTARY cuTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 244,845, dated July 26, 1881. 
Application filed May 31, 1880. (No model.) 
w 
. 
. 
. 
. 
55 
. 
. 
. 
To all whom it inay concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHNBOWLEs, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Washington, 
in the county of Washington and District of 
5 Columbia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Machines for Slitting 
Sheets of Paper; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
to skilled in the art to which it appertainstomake 
and use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to letters or figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a longitudinal 
sectional view of my improved machine taken 
through the line aca of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a front 
view of the same, partly in section. Fig. 3 is 
a side view, showing the operating-gearing. 
2O Fig. 4 is side and sectional views of the circu 
lar cutter. Fig. 5 is an enlarged view of a 
single tooth of the circular cutter and sections 
of the same. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
25 ments in machinery adapted for slitting paper 
commonly called perforating' for example, 
sheets of stamps, check-books, and other arti 
cles of like nature in which it is desirable to 
make one part easily separable from the re 
3o mainder, and by means of which the paper can 
subsequently be separated along the line of 
slits by hand. . 
The paper-perforating machines now in use 
are faulty and are not entirely satisfactory. . 
In the Howard machine an upper roller pro 
vided with a plurality of punches arranged on 
the periphery, in combination with a lower 
roller having a plurality of holes for the re 
ception of the punches, and a horizontal strip 
per are employed. This machine is objection 
able for several reasons, among which may be 
stated, first, that the sheets are perforated 
thus: OOO-3-causing the sheetstostickorcatch 
in packing upon each other by the burrs on the 
under side projecting into or sticking upon the 
burrs on those above; second, the punches do 
not always remove the wads from the sheets; 
third, the holesin the lower roller wear and be. 
come too large in a short time for the punches; 
So and, fourth, the metallic strippers arranged be 
tween the rollers are subject to great friction 
and wear out in a few days. 
In the McAleer machine two disk-knives 
having their peripheries broken by radial slots 
and arranged on parallel shafts so that they 
shall overlap and penetrate the interposed 
sheet from opposite sides and produce a shear 
ing cut are used. This machine is also objec-. 
tionable for the reason that the disk-shaped 
knives, being alike, have to be nicely and ac 
curately adjusted, so that the radial slots for 
forming the partitions between the cuts may 
evenly register with each other in their rotary 
motion, also when either of the cutters becomes 
drunk or out of true on the shaft they 
will fail to coact in producing a meat cut, and 
the corners of the radial slots are liable to lock 
and break the intermediate portions, thereby 
destroying both cutters. 
Again, a machine has been patented in which 
the combination of a lower grooved wheel and 
an upper roller with a series of M-shaped 
teeth for punching the paper, so that in making 
a perforation-thus: DJ-the ends of a tooth 
will cut across the paper at the ends of the 
perforation previous to punching out the in 
termediate portion. A machine of this con 
struction, to the best of my knowledge, has not 
been adopted, for the reason that the perfora 
tions produced by it do not suit the taste of 
the trade. 
Also, a patent has been granted for a rotary 
or circular cutter having saw-shaped teeth 
with incisions at intervals, and of a depth ex 
tending below the teeth to cause filaments 
between the line of incisions, thus 
for the purpose of retaining the 
sheets together during the process of folding, 
and to facilitate the opening of the folded 
sheets by simply passing the finger or hand 
between the same and separating the fila 
ments that hold the sheets together. It is 
obvious that a rotary cutter of this construc 
tion could not be used on fine work without 
incurring the danger of tearing the sheets and 
causing a loss. 
In view of the facts that the present ma 
chines are liable at times to tear and destroy 
the sheets (during the operation of perforating 
them) and that the recent demands of post, Ioo 
35 
95 
45 
90 
AO 
75 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
2 
244S45 
O 
IS 
3o 
masters, pension-agents, and internal-revenue 
officers require material of the kind to which 
this invention relates to have the separating 
or parting line formed by means of slits instead 
5 of the ordinary perforated line, the main ob 
ject of my improvementistoproduce, by lancet 
pointed teeth, a series of narrow slits or cuts 
barely visible to the naked eye in a sheet of 
paper, and which renders it capable of being 
readily severed on the line of consecutive in 
terstices, and also delivering the slit sheets 
from the machine in condition to be compactly 
packed upon each other, and be easily handled 
and readily counted without sticking or catch 
ing to one another. 
The improvements therefore consist in a ro 
tary cutter having teeth of a peculiar construc 
tion. 
It also consists, in combination with the ro 
tary cutter, of elastic bands arranged on the 
periphery of the roller on opposite sides of the 
cutter in such a manner as to form an elastic 
feeding-surface and to strip the sheet from the 
teeth. 
It also consists in the combination and ar 
rangement of parts, as will be hereinafter more 
fully set forth and specifically claimed. 
A is the bed of the machine, to which side 
frames, BB, are attached. These frames carry 
in suitable journal-boxes the shafts C C and 
D D'. The first of these shafts, C, is prefera 
bly that to which the power for propelling the 
machine is applied, and this may be by means 
of a hand-crank or any other device by which 
it can be connected to a suitable motor. Upon 
this shaft C are secured the rollers or rolls E, 
in number suited to the work required, by 
means of set-screws a', passing through a hub 
upon one side of the roll, or they may be held 
in place by any equivalent device. 
The letter to represents my improved cutter 
formed from an annulus of steel, and having 
upon its periphery the triangular-shaped teeth 
b'. Each tooth is sharpened to a cutting-edge 
from the base to the point, being dressed to 
ward the edges from a line running through 
the point and center of the base, and also 
dressed from the sides of the annulus from the 
line of the base of the tooth in the direction 
of the point, so that the tooth tapers to a point 
from all points of its base, as seen in Figs. 4 
and 5 of the drawings. This dressing of the 
tooth on the sidespresenting curved surfaces, 
as shown in the cross-sections of Fig. 5, is 
similar to the dressing of lancet-points; hence 
the term lancet-point in this specification. 
These lancet-shaped teeth easily but lightly 
penetrate or puncture the sheet, making rows 
of clean cuts in and through the paper with 
out removing any particles thereof. The cut 
ter is placed upon the shaft C against the 
straight side of the roll-section E, and held in 
place by the collar E', an additional part of 
the roll, which is brought against the perfora 
65 tor, and the whole securely clamped together 
by the screws a, which pass through the col 
lar and cutter and screw into the part E, thus 
35 
45 
So 
55 
95 
forming a slitting-roll with the lancet-shaped 
teeth of the cutter, which is of greater diame 
ter than the roll projecting fromits periphery. To 
Around the periphery of each roll-section 
E and collar E is arranged an elastic band, 
as indicated by dark lines, the thickness of 
which, when arranged on opposite sides of the 
cutter, shall correspond with the height of the 75 
teeth or slightly below, as shown in Figs. 1. 
and 2 of the drawings, and act as strippers in 
throwing off the sheet from the teeth of the 
cutter, substantially as shown in Fig 1. The 
rubber bands arranged on opposite sides of 8o 
the rotary cutter, as described and shown, also 
constitute an elastic feeding-surface for the 
roller, thereby preventing any possible liability 
of the rollers tearing or destroying the sheets 
being acted upon. The arrangement of the 85 
rollers is such that the pressure at the point of 
contact compresses the elastic band, so as to 
allow the teeth to protrude. It is obvious that 
as the teeth act upon the material the elastic 
band yields to allow the teeth to perform their 
duty, and as the material, after slitting, ad 
vances with the roll it is removed by the band 
returning to its normal condition, substantially 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
By the employment of a rotary cutter hav 
ing its teeth arranged and shaped as described 
and shown I am enabled to make clean cuts 
in the sheet without the formation of objec 
tionable burrs and make the slits so close and 
narrow that When the sheet is torn apart at 
the line of separation the edges of the pieces. 
will be comparatively smooth. 
The shaft C is placed beneath the shaft C 
and carries the receiving-rolls F, in number 
corresponding to the number of slitting-rolls 
employed. These rolls are also secured upon 
their shafts by set-screws a? in the same man 
ner as the slitting-rolls, so that they may be 
readily moved and secured at any desired dis 
tance from each other as the requirements of IIo 
the work to be done may demand. In the 
periphery of each of these rolls F is formed 
the annular groove b, which, when the ma 
chine is in operation, receives the projecting 
teeth of the cutter b. It will therefore be ap 
parent that when a sheet of paper or other 
material is passed through the rolls, as shown 
in Fig. 3 of the drawings, the lancet-shaped 
teeth of the cutter will pass through the paper 
into the groove l', forming a line or series of 12o 
slits, and that any failure of the roll F to reg 
ister with the slitting-roll in its rotation will 
not endanger the teeth of the cutter, as they 
will always enter the groove, no matter what 
the relative speed of the rolls may be; but in 
order to secure as near an equal rotation as 
possible the shafts C and C are provided with 
and have firmly secured thereto the gear-wheels 
G and G', the teeth of which engage, and, were 
it not for the lost motion or backlash accom 
panying the use of such gears, would secure 
Erectly Synchronous movement of the two 
Shafts, 
The drawing-rolls H. H. are mounted upon 
130 
I 25 
II5 
IOS 
IOO 
244S45 
3 
9. 
55 
2. In combination with a circular cutter, one 
or more elastic bands arranged on one or both 
sides of the circular cutter, serving a twofold 
purpose-to Wit, an elastic feeding-surface and 
a stripper-substantially as hereinbefore de- 5o 
scribed. 
3. The combination of the lower periphe 
rally-grooved receiving-roller and the upper 
roller carrying a centrally-arranged circular 
cutter having a series of slitting or punctur 
ing teeth of the construction described, and 
provided with elastic bands arranged on oppo 
site sides of the circular cutter, serving a two 
fold purpose-to wit, an elastic feeding-surface 
to the roller, and strippers for removing the 
sheets from the upper roller-substantially as 
described. 
4. A combined feeding and slitting roller 
having the centrally-arranged circular cutter 
provided with the lancet-shaped teeth and elas 
tic bands arranged on opposite sides of the 
circular cutter, the upper surfaces of which 
are flush with or extend slightly beyond the 
point of the teeth, as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
5. In combination with the lower periphe 
rally-grooved receiving-roller and the upper 
roller carrying the centrally-arranged rotary 
cutter provided with the slitting or punctur 
ing teeth of the construction described, and 
having elastic bands arranged on oppositesides 
of the rotary cutter and acting as elastic feed 
ing-surface and strippers, the drawing-rolls 
arranged in rear of the slitting-rollers for the 
purpose of reducing the burrs formed by the 
cutters, and other results, as herein before de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
7o 
75 
JNO. IBOWLES, 
Witnesses: 
A. G. HEYLMUN, 
D. D. KANE. 
O 
I5 by steam or gas. 
the shafts DD", placed a short distance in the 
rear of the slitting-rolls. These drawing-rolls 
are rotated by means of the gear-wheels II, 
secured to the shafts D D, through the idle 
Spinion J, turning upon a stud, c, attached to 
the side frame of the machine, said idler re 
ceiving its motion from the gear G upon the 
shaft C. The object of these rolls is to draw 
the paper from the slitting-rolls and to pre 
vent its adhering to the latter, thereby becom 
ing torn and arresting for a time the opera 
tion of the machine while it is cleared from the 
fragments, and reduce any burr that may be 
made by slitting-rollers, and may be heated 
A feeding-table or other suitable apparatus, 
K, is attached to the frame in front of the slit 
ting-rolls, from which the sheets of paper are 
fed to the machine, either by hand or one of 
2O the many feeding devices heretofore employed 
for similar purposes. 
It will be seen that the journal-boxes of the 
shaft C are provided with adjusting-screws d, 
by which they are so adjusted as to cause the 
surfaces of the slitting-rolls and rolls F to 
bear upon the material passing between them 
with sufficient force to make them act as feed 
ing-rolls; and, as their peripheries move at the 
same speed as that of the drawing-rolls, it is 
evident that the paper or other material will 
be kept straight in its course through the ma 
chine and be delivered by the drawing-rolls 
without danger of mutilation and consequent 
loss during its passage. 
35 What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The rotary cutter hereinbefore described, 
having its slitting or puncturing teeth sharp 
ened to a cutting-edge from the base to the 
4o point, dressed toward the edges from a line 
running through the point and the center of 
the base, dressed on the sides of the annulus 
from the line of the base of the teeth to the 
point, whereby each tooth tapers to a point 
45 from all points of its base, as described, 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US244945.txt	(No Model.) W. H. H. STEVENSON & J. SOLTER, 
No. 244,945. 
CUTTING AND PUNCHING PRESS, 
w 
Patented July 26, 1881. 
 
 
II 
Peters, how-torpe. Waager, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. H. STEVENSON AND JOHN SOLTER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, 
ASSIGNORS TO STEVENSON & PLUNKETT, OF SAME PLACE. 
CUTTING AND PUNCHING PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 244,945, dated July 26, 1881. 
Application filed April 7, 1881. (No model.) 
2O by which the sliding head is moved. 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM. H. H. STE 
VENSON and JoHN SOLTER, of Baltimore, 
and State of Maryland, have invented a new 
5 and useful Improvement in Cutting and Punch 
ing Presses; and we do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same. 
Our invention is an improvement upon ma 
Io chines for cutting, pressing, drawing, or punch 
ing metal plate of that class in which the re 
ciprocating head is operated by a lever, and is 
connected generally to a treadle. 
The principal object of our invention is to 
15 secure adjustability in the sliding head or plun 
ger which carries the upper die or punch. 
It also has for its object to furnish inexpen 
sive and conveniently - operating adjustable 
connections and stops for the operating-levers 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows a side ele 
vation of the press. Fig.2 shows a front view 
of the adjustable plunger detached. 
In these drawings, Fig.1 shows an ordinary 
25 form of machine in its general construction, 
which general construction, therefore, need not 
be particularly described. 
The first part of our invention relates par 
ticularly to the construction of the plunger A, 
3o which carries the upper die or punch. Here 
tofore this head or plunger has been made of 
one piece, and could be moved toward the low 
er or fixed die only by means of the lever by 
which it was operated. This improved part 
5 of the machine is shown more clearly in Fig.2. 
In this figure the main body of the plunger is 
represented at A. It may be cast in one piece, 
and externally is of the ordinary shape, being 
provided with flanges, preferably of V shape 
4o in cross-section, by means of which it is accu 
rately held in guides which permit free verti 
cal movement. This plunger is chambered, as 
shown at a. a, the chamberextending from front 
to rear. Within this chamber is fitted a yoke, 
45 B, fitting accurately, but loosely, at the sides, 
but made shorter than the chamber of the plun 
ger in which it is placed. The yoke B is re 
cessed also from front to rear, as shown in Fig. 
2 in full lines bb, and in dotted lines c cin Fig. 
5o 1. This recess receives the end of the lever C, 
. 
- 
SS 
with or without its fiction-wheeld. The wheel 
d is pivoted between two prongs, ee, of the le. 
ver C, and bears against the inner surface of 
the block above and below, being fitted accu 
rately thereto. The pronged end of the lever, 
as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1, is reduced 
in depth, so as to be less than the vertical 
measurement of the recess in the yoke, in or. 
der to prevent the lever from binding against 
the top and bottom of the recess in its move- 6o 
ment. 
Fixed to the sliding yoke B are two rods,f 
g. The rod f is fixed in the upper end of the 
yoke, and extends through a sleeve, h, in the 
upper cross-bar of the plunger, through which 
it slides freely. It is threaded, and is provided 
with nutsii, which, when turned to bear against 
the ends of the sleeve h, hold the yoke B in 
any required position within the plunger, or 
the position of the yoke may be shifted at pleas. 7o 
ure, within the limits of the chamber of the 
plunger, by movement of the nuts ii. The rod 
g is fixed in the lower part of the yoke B and 
passes through a hole in the lower part of the . 
plunger, serving simply as a guide for the yoke, 75 
and may be dispensed with. 
It will be understood that the plunger A 
may receive any suitable die, such as are ordi 
narily used on this class of machines, and when 
ever, for any reason, it be desired to raise the 8o 
plunger or to lower it, in order to increase or 
diminish the space between the lower limit of 
its motion and the lower die or bed-plate, it 
can be readily accomplished by turning the 
nuts i. i. 
In machines of this class, in which the lever 
directly operating the plunger is moved by a 
treadle-lever, such as that shown at D, it is 
necessary to have an adjustable stop with a 
leather or rubber bumperfor the treadle-lever, 
and adjustable connection between such trea 
dle-lever and the lever directly operating the 
plunger, in order that the movement of the up 
per die may be accurately determined. We 
have provided special devices for this purpose, 
as shown in Fig. 1. The adjustable stop con 
sists of a piece, E, formed substantially of T 
shape, as shown in the figure. It is attached . 
to the lever by means of the pivotal bolt which 
passes through its longer arm l, while the up- po 
95 
2441945 
1. In a metal press, the combination of the 25 
sliding head A, carrying a die, the operating 
lever C, and the block B, adjustable within 
said sliding head A, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with a reciprocating 
slotted head, A, carrying a die, and with the 3o 
lever C, of the yoke B, having the screw-rodf 
and the adjusting-nutshi, as described. 
3. The adjustable stop E, in combination 
with the rod n, nuts o o, and treadle-lever D, 
substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the reciprocating head 
A, the adjustable yoke B, the operating-lever 
C, and the friction-roller d, as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 4o 
two subscribing witnesses. 
35 
WILLIAM. H. H. STEVENSON, 
JOHN, SOLTER, 
Witnesses: 
JNO. T. MADDOX, 
D. H. MEAD. 
per arm, k, rests against the flange of the leg. 
A horizontal arm, n, extends directly over the 
treadle-lever D, and is provided with a rod, n, 
which passes freely through a vertical hole in 
the said horizontal arm. The rod n is threaded, 
and is held in any position by nuts 00, and is 
provided with a head, p, with a leather or rub 
ber bumper, which bears directly against the 
treadle-lever and limits its upward movement. 
Connection between the levers C and D is 
formed by a bar, FG, the two parts of which 
F. G. are provided with right and left hand 
screws q r, which work in nuts ss fixed upon 
a hollow sleeve, t. The sleeve it is provided 
with a hand-wheel, at, and by turning this hand. 
wheel the connecting-barl G. may be readily 
lengthened or shortened. 
We are aware that adjustable connecting 
rods are commonly used for various purposes, 
as well as adjustable stops, and upon these 
points we desire to have it understood that we 
limit our claims to the precise devices shown. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim is 
O 
IS 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245045.txt	(Model.) 
A. S. BAKER, 
SEEDING MACHINE, 
No. 245,045. 
Patented Aug. 2, 1881. 
 
 
 
 
 
-- 
, 
E. 
WF 
, 
LEF a. 
, 
 
W. 
, , 
9 
 
a. 
y 
7. 
f 
2 
Y 
s 
2 
A. 
'. 
N 
2. 
- 
N 
W 
I B 
% 
a. 6 
Fag 
Rialty: 
P 
24. 
s 
--------- 
S 
s 
t 
32 
2 
2 
es o Co 
G 
e 
O 
c) 
d 
s' 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
ABNER. S. BAKER, OF KALAMAZOO, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-TEIIRDS 
TO HEMAN M. BROWN AND CHARLES D. SWEETLAND, BOTH OF SAME 
PLACE. 
. 
SEEDING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 245,045, dated August 2, 1881. 
Application filed January 11, 1881. (Model.) 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
5 which the following is a specification. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ABNER. S. BAKER, of 
Kalamazoo, Michigan, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Seeding-Machines, of 
My invention relates to the lever and feed 
devices of wheel-harrows and seeders. It has 
for its object to provide a leverage device for 
raising the frame in the use of which the re 
io sistance to the leverage-power is the same at: 
all angles of the lever-arm, by the construction 
hereinafter set forth. 
Another object is to construct an improved 
feed for a seed-box in which the delivery of 
15 the grain and the control of the same are greatly 
facilitated, and all straw and like substances 
in the grainis sustained above and forced away 
from the delivery-orifice. 
The construction embodying my invention 
consists in a lever-arm-supporting plate se 
cured to the share-frame, said plate being slot 
ted and having a grooved vertical way formed 
on its rear face, the slot of said plate being lo 
cated in the center of said way. To this sup 
porting-plate is fulcrumed a lever-arm having 
an eccentric grooved way composing a part of 
its construction. To the side of the share 
frame a grooved vertical way is secured, in 
which is loosely located a shaft adapted to 
conform to said way, the lower end of which 
terminates with the axle of the transporting 
wheel, and its upper end bears an axle pro 
vided with two friction-wheels, one of said 
wheels in the operation traversing the vertical 
way of the plate to which the lever-arm is full 
crumed, and the other the eccentric way of 
said arm. 
A further construction consists in providing 
the seed-box with grain-agitators, (located ver 
4o tically,) said agitators being blocked out of 
sheet metal, or cast with upward-projecting 
horns or flanges on each edge. These agita 
tors are operated by bevel-gearing connecting 
with their upper ends, and with the horizontal 
45 shaft of the seed-box. The grain-pockets are 
constructed in the form of cylindrical boxes 
inclosed at the bottom, which are screwed up 
through the bottom of the seed-box even with 
its inner face. Said pockets are provided 
35 
3O 
7o 
55 
with a hole in the side at the lower end of their 5o 
body for the escape of the grain, and have a 
movable thimble, also provided with a hole cor 
responding with the hole through the body 
surrounding said cylindrical body, for closing 
the orifice when stopping the flow of grain, and 
also to gage the amount of grain sown. This 
thimble connects with an arm secured to the 
indicator-bar, and said bar has a lever-arm 
connecting with it, whereby all the shut-offs 
are operated in unison. 
A further construction is set forth in con 
nection with a description of the drawings form 
ing a part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of the seeder, show 
ing a front-face view of the lever device; Fig. 
2, inside view of seed-box, showing the con 
Struction of the agitators and grain-pockets; 
Fig. 3, top view of seed-box bottom; Fig. 4 
edge view of lever device; Fig. 5, grain-tube; 
Fig. 6, a tooth; Fig. 7, enlarged view of grain 
pocket; Fig.8, top view of grain-tube and pock 
et; Fig.9, face view of lever device, with arm at 
a horizontal angle; Fig. 10, rear view of lever 
supporting plate, and Fig. 11, a perspective of 
grain-box bottom, showing alternate planes 75 
and inclines. 
b His the share-frame; T, teeth, and D seed 
OX. A is the lever-supporting plate, perforated 
around its top for locking the lever by means 8o 
of bar on. 
L is the lever-arm, and hits eccentric grooved 
way, in which friction-wheelf runs. The fric 
tion-wheelf traverses the grooved vertical way 
of the plate A, Fig. 10. The axle of the two 
wheels f and f' moves up and down in slot o 
when raising or lowering the lever-arm L, 
which is fulcrumed on a pivot at a? to plate A. 
s' is the standard or bar, terminating with 
axle v, in the top of which bar the axle of the 
friction - wheels is secured. The standards 
moves vertically in ways, secured to beam H. 
By this construction of a leverage device it 
requires no greater degree of power to move 
lever I in continuing to raise the wheel and 
axle than is required to start it, the leverage 
being the same at all points, Less power, also, 
is required to raise a given weight than with 
90 
95 
 
245,045 
. . 
2o. pocket C to close orifice a. . 
To bar 'arms t t are pivoted, said 
2 
levers having the point of the weight's connec 
tion located in changeable relationship with 
the fulcrum and at greater distance apart; 
hence its great utility in harrows, seeders, and 
devices of like requirements, especially those 
in which the frame to be raised bears the 
driver's seat, In all devices requiring a lever 
for operating a shaft or plunger this device 
will also be found of great utility. . 
lo R is the drive-wheel, and Jandy the driven 
wheels, the latter of which is secured to the 
horizontal shaft which operates the agitators c 
c. e'e are the bevel-gear, arranged in this con 
is struction to propel alternating agitators in op 
posite directions. The upper bearing of agi 
tator c is in bar I, and the lower in the bottom 
inclosure of pocket C, (shown in Fig. 2, at c'.) 
B is the movable thimble constituting the 
shut-off, constructed to turn on the body of 
arms be: 
ing secured to thimbles B. (Illustrated in Figs, 
3 and S.), F is the arm operating said bars, 
and is pivoted to the bottom of the seed-box 
and to bar '. 
Secured to the under side of seed-box D, 
and surrounding the pockets C, are the grain 
tubes E. These tubes are constructed with 
lips at their lower ends for Seattering the grain 
broadcast, and have a mortise or notch, X, in 
their upper ends, on rear side, to accommodate 
the bars tit. 
Bar r is provided with an indicating-scale. 
The indicating-point is secured to rear side of 
seed-box D, Fig. 11. 
I construct the covering-teeth T, I prefer to 
use, from a flat strip of metal, twisting the 
lower end nearly half around, and shoulder 
ing the upper end at n, to prevent its drawing 
out of its fastenings. 
In operation the agitators c keep the grain 
in great commotion from the bottom of the 
seed-box to the upper surface of the grain, 
causing it to readily flow down, keeping the 
pockets C always filled. It also agitates the 
25 
. 
. 
. 
; 
: 
30 
35 
45 
grain in the pockets, forcing it evenly through 
orifice a. The projections on the agitators as 
sist in stirring the grain, and all straw and 
like litter is caught by them and supported 
above and forced away from the pockets. Le So 
ver F moves laterally in closing the orifices aa, 
Fig. 8 showing said orifices partially closed. 
In the operation of the lever, when arm L is 
in position shown in Fig. 9, the frame H, seed 
box, and driven wheel J will be in position in 
dicated by dotted lines in Fig. 1. This raises 
the teeth from the soil and throws the feeding 
device out of gear at the same time as it dis 
engages gear-wheels R and J. 
55 
Go 
: 
: 
* 
; 
: 
; 
. 
What I claim, and desire to secure, is 
1. The lever-supporting plate having verti 
cal sloto and grooved vertical way oil its rear 
face, the operating-arm having the groovedec 
centrie way h, and the axle of the friction 
wheels,ff, secured to the weight-shaft and 
located in sloto, said friction-wheels f"f trav 
ersing the ways o and h, all in combination, 
: 
: 
substantially as set forth. . 
2, In a seeding-machine, the vertical grain 
agitators having the outward and upward ex 
tending projections on the edges of said agita 
tors, substantially as specified and shown. 
3, The vertically-located grainpockets, con 
sisting of the body inclosed at the bottom and 
surrounded with the movable thimble, said 
thimble connecting with the operating-levert, 
and said body and thimble provided with ori 
ficea, in combination with a grain-box, all 
substantially as set forth. 
4. In a seeding-machine, the vertically-lo 
cated grain-pockets, consisting of the body C, 
inclosed at the bottom, and the movable thim. 
ble, and having orifices a, said thimble con 
necting with lever-armt, in combination with a 
grain-tube having mortise X, to accommodate 
said lever t, all substantially as specified. 
- 
- 
- 
ABNER, S, BAKER, 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. D. SWEETLAND, 
HEMAN M. BROWN. 
75 
85 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245145.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 245,145, 
 
H. F. EMMONS. 
DINNER PAIL, 
Patented Aug. 2, 1881. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HERMAN F. EMMONs, OF TROY, NEW YORK. 
I 
DINNER-PAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 245,145, dated August 2, 1881. 
s 
Application filed July 17, 1880. (No model.) 
65 
- 
w 
. . 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
and 4, the lowermost inner vessel, C, being 
supported within body by flanged rim resting 
Be it known that I, HERMAN F. EMMONs, 
of the city of Troy, in the county of Rensse. 
upon upper edge of same, as shown in Fig. 2, 
the space unoccupied thereby forming one of 
laer and State of New York, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Dinner-Pails, 
the compartments before mentioned. 
of which the following is a specification, refer. 
The improved pail is designed to operate as 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
follows: By removing the cover B, and con 
drawings. 
sequently therewith the dish D and vessel E, 
Thisinvention relates to that class commonly 
access may be had to the lower vessel, C; and 
known as the compartment-pail;' and it con 
by also removing the latter to the space or 
sists in the construction and arrangement of compartment beneath, access may likewise be 
exterior fittings and in the combination of in 
had to vessel E by disengaging the rim of 
terior vessels, my object being to perfect and 
dish D from rivet-heads h and k k, or both 
simplify the same, as hereinafter more fully 
may thus be removed from cover when desir 
able to use the same as a drinking-vessel. 
described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
The following advantages are derived from 
view, showing exterior of my improved de 
the construction herein described: The double 
vice. Fig. 2 is a full vertical section, showing 
use of ears as bail attachments and retaining 
the same internally. Fig. 3 is a partial verti 
clutches; the double use, also, of rivets for at 
cal section, and Fig. 4 shows enlarged or de 
taching outer fixtures and securing vessels 
tail views, partly in section, which three latter 
within cover; the auxiliary vessel that may 
views are taken respectively where shown by 
thus be carried for use as a dish or dining 
plate, and the increase of capacity within main 
dotted lines acac and y y in Fig. 1 and 22 in 
portion of pail by extending cover above the 
Fig. 3. 
same, so as to afford space for an additional 
Similar letters of reference in each indicate 
vessel or compartment therein. 
corresponding parts. 
A represents the outer and main portion or 
I do not claim, broadly, a dinner-pail con 
body of pail, and B an outwardly-surrounding 
structed with outwardly-surrounding covernor 
cover, extending slightly above and below the 
in Wardly-fitting dishes or vessels, as I am 
upper edge of same. 
aware that similar devices have been used be 
C, D, and E represent various sized and 
fore in pails of this class; but 
shaped inner vessels, which, when arranged 
What I do claim, and desire to secure by 
as, shown, in conjunction with the main por 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In dinner-pails, the combination of dish 
tion A and cover B aforesaid, form three dis 
tinct compartments to receive different articles 
D, having notched rim, and the vessel E, so 
constructed that the former may support the 
of food. 
Frepresents the usual spring-wire bail hung 
latter within cover B when inserted from be 
neath, and engaged by inwardly-projecting 
in recessed or socketed ears G. G., from which 
project vertically-flanged extensions or prongs 
heads of rivets h and k k with said cover and 
gg, notched to receive bail when in an upright 
with each other, substantially as shown and 
position, to prevent objectionable swinging, as 
described, for the objects herein set forth. 
shown in Figs.1 and 2, said ears being riveted 
2. In combination with the body A and 
spring-bail F, the recessed or socketed ears 
or otherwise attached to opposite sides of 
G. G., provided with notched extending prongs 
body, as likewise shown, the cover aforesaid 
gg, as and for the purpose specified. 
being provided with handle H, to facilitate the 
use of same as a drinking-vessel, and also with 
3. In combination with cover B, notched 
loop or socket K, wherein knife and fork may 
dish D, handle H, and loop K, the rivets h 
be carried, which are, respectively, attached by 
and kk, with inwardly-projecting heads, as and 
for the purpose specified. 
rivets li and k k with heads projecting in 
wardly, so as to form stops or catches to sup 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
port the vessel or dish D within said cover, 
hand this 23d day of June, 1880. 
the rim or edge of said dish being notched to 
admit of passage over the same and securing 
by partial rotation the vessel E being sup 
ported above thereby, all as shown in Figs, 3 
H. LISLE FLEMING, 
ROBERT S.MAYER. 
EERMAN F. EMMONS, 
Attest: 
- 
. 
M 
o 
15. 
2O 
25 
4O 
45 
SO 
S5 
OC 
IOS 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245245.txt	(N0 Model) 
A, WHILER) , 
N0, 245,2,4,5, 
PAINTS 
Patented Aug: 
2 
1881, 
 
F*222222222223RKRR3:32:22222222222 
>N3 
N. PETEfis, Photo-Lithographer, Washingdom- B, C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST WEILER, OF MOUNT GILBAID, OHIO. 
PAINTS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 245,245, dated August 8, 1881. 
Application filled iMay 4, 1881, (No model.) 
T0 (ttll uph0m it mu(t? 60m06)"m : 
be it known that I, AUGUST WIEILER, of 
Mount Gilead, in the county of Morrow and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
TISeful Improvements in Paints; and I do here 
by declare tle following to be a full; clear, and 
exact description of the inventiou, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to Willich it: 
pertains to make and use it, reference being 
had to the accompany iug drawings, which form 
part of tluis Specification. 
My in Vention relates to an improvelinelt in 
the leg'S all (l Sleeves of gall'Inents; and it con 
SiStS ill making l),0tll the leg or Sleeve alld its 
lining Soline What longer" thall the garmelt is 
to be made up, and thell doubling the en(l of 
the leg or sleeve upon itself and the lining 
IIpoh itself, all'd thell Sewing the lower edge 
(}f the lilling to the illuside of the leg or sleeve, 
aS Will be Inor'(x fully (lescribed hereinafter, 
The Object of Iny in Velution is t() make the 
Sleeves and leg's Of garments Son) eWhat longer 
than tley are to be Inade up, S? that in case 
either othe should prove to be too short for the 
perSOIll buying, the tailor las only to rip out) 
the Sticles which fasteln the lining to the leg 
Or Sleeve, lengthen tle leg or sleeve the de 
Sired amount, preSS OtIt, the crease Where tle 
tur'Illeti-in part, Was mad(", all (l tle garment is 
ready for use Without the necessity of tle 
tailor la Villng to remove anything more tillath 
a few stitches, 
l'igure I l'el)resents a Veitical Section of a 
]):air of l)aults, ShOWing the leg all'd tle lining 
turlued in War(l and ready to be Sewe{! in posi 
tion. Fig, 2 ShoWS a similar View, showing 
the leg Wilhell finisled. IFig, 3 is a similar 
View, showing the leg when lengthene(l out, 
Instead of cutting the garment the length 
it is to be lna(le, it is cut all inch ()r Inoue lon 
ger, and the lilling A. is also cult longer than 
is necessary. Tle garmelint is then made up 
in the usual Ilanner; but just before tle leg's 
are finished tle cloth is (loubled upon itself, 
as Sh0Will ill l'ig, l, and tille lining is also 
doubled upon itself a coll'responding distance. 
The (listallice this cloth and lining are to be 
(doubled in Ward depends entirely upon how 
much limit the tailor Wishes to give himself 
in lengthening the garment in case it should 
be found too short after it is finished for the 
purcha,Ser, 
-After the clothing and the lining |- 
have been turned inward upon themselves, as 
ShoWn in IFig, 1, the lower edge of the lining 
" " 
1 O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
SO 
is then sewed to the inside of the cloth at lD, 
as ShoWn in Fig, 2, and the garment is then 
ready for the market or purchaser. 
In case it should be found that the leg or 
sleeve is too short, the tailor has only to rip) 
out the stitches at ID, which bind the lining 
to the cloth, draw do Will the cloth and lining 
either the full distance that they have been 
turned in, or any distance that may be found 
necessary. After" both the lining and the cloth 
are drawn down to their full length, the tailor, 
after he lhas drawn out tille stitches lD, has 
Simply to preSS Out the creaSe Which Was 
tor'Illed by the turluilug ill of tle cloth, all'd the 
garment is ready for use immediately . This 
can be done in a few Inomelnits and While the 
}}urchaSer is Waitiug, instead of having to Sellul 
back the garmelt, to the tailor to be length 
e}}e(l Out in the usual Inauller". 
Where a tuck is simply inade in the lilling 
itself it has beel) found illupracticable, or Very 
undesirable, and where the garment is made 
in the usual lnallhell' there is too much tillne 
all (d trouble require (l to lengthen the leg or 
sleeve. IBy this alrraugement of parts it is 
Only necessary to reino Ve a feW Stiticles and 
press out the crease Which call be done Willil () 
the custoliner is Waiting, 
I alm a Walre that it is not new to take olhe 
or Inore tucks or reefs in the lining of a leg or 
sleeve, and this ll (disclaim, My in vention 
differ's from tllis in (loubling the Inaterial and 
lining togetller and thell Sewing their lower 
edges together, So that Willen it is desired to 
lengthen the gartnelt, it is olly lecessary to 
gut the row of Stitches at ID, 
Having thus described my invention, I 
clainu 
Tle method of lengtlelliug alld Shortenilug: 
Sleeves all'd leg's Of garIntelltS, Which colnSiStS 
in Sewing the lining to the lower edge of the 
material 0[It of Willi{ill tle garmelit is unade, 
thell (doubling tille material in Ward upon itself, 
then doubling tle lower e(lge of the lining 
Out, Wall'd upon itself a correSpolding (distallt'e, 
and finally Sewing the lower edge of the fold 
in the lining t() the nuaterial at lD, Substian 
tially as ShoW'll and described, 
l testimony whereof I aftiX my signature in 
presenge of two Witnesses, 
|AUGUST WIE}}ILE},B, 
Witnesses : 
JOHN J. GURLEY, 
A. A. CARDNER, 
55 
TO 
75 
9O 
05 
If O O 
& 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245345.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 245,345. 
H. BRISTOL, 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
Patented Aug. 9, 1881. 
7, 
. 
/24. / 
H 
 
NS 
lae 
y itnesses 
2227 
Invenir 
273 
PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY BRISTOL, OF WESTVILLE, CONNECTICUT, 
FIRE-ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 245,345, dated August 9, 1881. 
Application filed April 12, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY BRISTOL, of 
Westville, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Automatic 
Fire-Escapes, of which the following is a de 
Scription. 
My invention belongs to that class of fire 
escapes which are attached to buildings and 
furnish means of escape through the windows. 
The invention consists in the arrangement 
of a shaft under the roof and near the plate, 
provided with reels on which rope ladders 
are Wound, and in automatic devices for re 
leasing the shaft in case of fire, as hereinafter 
more fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view of the front of a building and of the 
ladders in front of the windows. Fig. 2 is a 
view of the shaft, reels, winding device, and 
brake; and Fig. 3 is a vertical section, as indi 
cated by the broken line in Fig. 2. 
To enable others to make my improved es 
cape so that it will operate in the manner con 
templated, I will describe it in detail. 
A, Fig. 2, is an iron shaft, which extends the 
whole length of the building, and is free to 
turn in boxes which are attached to the upper 
floor. It is placed near the side of the build 
ing or plate. On the shaft the reels at are 
fastened, which equal in number the windows 
on one side of a floor of a building, and are 
made with large flanges on their ends, as shown 
in Fig. 2. The brake-wheel b is fastend to the 
shaft near one of its ends. The bevel-gear. 
wheel c is also fastened to the shaft for the pur. 
pose of turning it. 
The shaft d is a small rod, and is free to 
turn in boxes which are fastened to the upper 
It has the bevel - gear wheel e on one 
floor. 
of its ends, which meshes in the wheelc on the 
shaft A and the winding - Crank k on its other 
end. 
The brake g is a lever of the first kind, and 
has its short arm fitted to the wheel b. It is 
pivoted to a stud, the pivot being the fulcrum. 
To its long arm the wire a is attached, which 
extends through the rooms of the building, or 
to as many rooms as is desired. The wire is 
m 
divided into pieces, the ends of which are 
flattened. Holes are made in the flattened 
ends, and rivets of an easily-fusible alloy are 
put through them and riveted to form the 
joints 0. The lower end of the wire is fast 
ened to any convenient part of the building, 
with sufficient strain on the same to prevent 
the turning of the shaft A. The spiral spring 
y is of sufficient strength to raise the longer 
arm of the brake when the wire a is discon 
nected. 
The cylindrical rollers in equal in number 
the reels on the shaft A, and the journals on 
their ends turn in boxes which are attached to 
the building. 
The ladders M are ordinary rope ladders, or 
the side ropes may be wire ropes. Suitable 
pieces of wood or iron are fastened between 
the side ropes to keep them apart. The upper 
ends of each ladder pass through the open 
ing in in the covering of the building, and the 
lower ends of all the ladders are fastened to 
the rod N. 
If it is desired to regulate the descent of the 
ladders, the crank k, when the ladders are 
wound on the reels, may be removed from the 
shaft d and a fan attached to the shaft in its 
place. 
The escape, being constructed as above de 
scribed and as shown, operates as follows: 
The ladders being wound on the reels and the 
wire a having its lower end fastened to the 
building, and preventing the turning of the 
shaft A, as soon as the heat of the fire melts 
the rivets holding the wire together, or as soon 
as the wire is disconnected by any cause, the 
shaft is released, and the weight of the rod 
N causes the shaft to revolve and the ladders 
descend in front of the windows on the side 
of the building to which the escape is at 
tached. 
Having described my improved escape and 
its mode of operation, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The automatic fire - escape herein de 
scribed, consisting, essentially, of the shaft A, 
provided with the brake-wheel b, bevel-gear 
wheel c, and one or more reels, ct, one or more 
rollers, m, one or more ladders, M, the shaft 
75 
9o 
95 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
2 
- 
245,345 
d, provided with a gear-wheel and crank, k, which are connected by rivets of an easily 
the spiral spring y, the brake g, and wire ac, fusible alloy, to release the brake-wheel and 
divided into pieces, which are connected by shaft, substantially as set forth. 
rivets of an easily-fusible alloy, all arranged 
2. The spiral spring y and brake g, in com- 
bination with the wire ac, divided into pieces, 
5 and combined substantially as set forth. 
HENRY BRISTOL. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE TERRY, 
HIRAM. O. GRAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245445.txt	 
 
 
  
(No Model.) 
I. CARLIER, 
ICE MACHINE, 
No. 245,445. 
Patented Agr 9, 1881. 
 
 
a 
 
 
 
NamN 
N N 
NaNN 
NNE 
NRN 
NN 
WITNESSES: 
 
w 
BY 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer washington, c. 
INVENTOR 
ATORNEYS, 
 
JNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IVAN CARLIER, OF HOT SPRINGS, ARKANSAS. 
CEMACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 245,445, dated August 9, 1881. 
Application filed June 9, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, IVAN CARLIER, of Hot 
Springs, in the county of Garland and State 
of Arkansas, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Absorption Ammonia Ice 
Machines, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The object of my invention is produce cer. 
tain new and useful improvements in absorp. 
tion ammonia ice-machines for the purpose of 
preventing steam or vapor from being mixed 
with the ammonia-gas which is produced in 
this machine, and for the purpose of avoiding 
an undue pressure in the ammonia-boiler. 
The invention consists in combining a small 
er boiler with the main liquor ammonia-boiler, 
these two boilers being connected by top and 
bottom tubes. 
In the accompanying drawing, a cross-sec 
tional elevation of my improved ammonia 
boiler for ice-machines is shown. 
The ammonia - boiler A of a Carr ice-ma 
chine is connected with a sun aller similar boiler, 
B, by a pipe, C, leading from near the bottom 
of the boiler A to a point in or near the upper 
third of the boiler B, and by a pipe, D, lead 
ing from the top of the boiler B to or near the 
top of the boiler A. The boiler B rests on a 
furnace, E, and is provided with an exhaust 
pipe, G, extending down to within a short dis. 
tance from the bottom of this boiler. The am 
monia-gases escape through a pipe connected 
with the boiler A at H, and the strong liquor 
ammonia enters at J. As the two boilers are 
connected the level of the liquor will be the 
same in the two boilers. 
The operation is as follows: The liquor am 
monia in the boiler A is first heated slightly 
until ammonia-gas, which is absolutely pure 
and devoid of any vapor or steam, is obtained; 
but the liquid in the boiler B is heated much 
more and converted into ammonia-gas, which 
passes through the pipe D into the boiler A, 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
and off through the pipe connected with the 
collar or neck H. As the liquor ammonia in 
the boiler B is gradually evaporated a fresh 
quantity of strong liquor aminonia flows from 
the boiler Ainto the boiler B through the pipe 
C, and the weakened or diluted liquor of alm 
monia passes off through the pipe G, and is 
again strengthened in the ordinary manner of 
the Carr apparatus. With the above-de 
scribed improvements the gas obtained is very 
pure, will have greater absorbing-power, and 
consequently a considerable quantity of fuel 
is saved; and as only a small part of the en 
tire quantity of the ammonia is heated I can 
attain a very high temperature of the ammo 
nia, being heated, and will obtain great quan 
tities of gas, but the pressure in the apparatus 
will not be augmented correspondingly. 
This apparatus can be used for any absorp 
tion-machine independently of the gas used, 
which may be ammonia-gas or some other gas. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In an ice-machine, the combination, with 
the ammonia-boiler A of an additional ammo 
nia-boiler, B, connected there with, substan 
tially as herein shown and described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. In an ice-machine, the combination, with 
the ammonia-boilers A and B, of the connect 
ing-pipes C and D, and of the furnace E, sub 
stantially as herein shown and described, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
3. In an ice-machine, the combination, with 
the ammonia-boilers A and B, of the connect 
ing-pipes CD, the furnace E, and the exhaust 
pipe G, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
IWAN CARLIER, 
Witnesses: 
J. A. POLHAMIUS, 
MICHAEL SEEA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245546.txt	O. J. MURRAY & H. KEATING, 
COMBINED SEED PLANTER AND GUANO DISTRIBUTER, 
No. 245,546. 
. 
Patented Aug. 9, 188l. 
 
'. 
 
 
7 
 
 
 
N. A 
N. 
A 
/ 
 
/ 
1, 
(N 
2 NN'? a LSNS 
SNY as SS3 affaz, 
sess 
a 
Sa 
O 
A. 
s 
Y24 
A. 
ASEet 
% 2 
&23% 
e??f725?seaasegaae. 
2 
52 
Ssss as 
1 // / / / / / / 
am 
22, 
 
 
 
 
 
IP 
 
 
i. 
th H 
 
 
V 
I 
is 
I 
T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ORRICK J. MURRAY AND HENRY KEATING, OF MILLEDGEVILLE, GEORGIA. 
COMBINED SEED-PLANTER AND GUANO-DISTRIBUTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 245,546, dated August 9, 1881. 
Application filed February 24, 1880. (Model.) 
2O in which 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ORRICK JACKSON 
MURRAY and HENRY KEATING, both citizens 
of the United States, residing at Milledge 
5 ville, in the county of Baldwin and State of 
Georgia, have invented an Improved Com 
bined Seed-Planter and Guano-Distributer, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Our improvement consists in combining a 
1o wheel of spokes having horizontal stud-pins 
for sweeping over the bottom of the hopper, 
and beaters for loosening the seed, with a rock 
shaft by which the wheel is vibrated, a hop 
per for receiving the seed, and crank-arms, 
15 rod, and shaft for connection to the ground 
wheel, as hereinafter described. 
In order that our invention may be fully 
understood, we will proceed to describe it 
with reference to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section on the line 
11, Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a front view. Fig. 3 is 
a detached view of measuring-wheels with 
different numbers of cups. Fig. 4 is a top view 
of the vibrating wheel of spokes in the hopper, 
and exhibiting the notched seed-slide. 
AA are different parts of the frame of the 
planter; B, the draw-bar; C, the ground-wheel, 
and D the shaft thereof. 
E is a toothed wheel for discharging cotton 
seed from the hopper. 
E E are measuring-wheels having differ 
ent numbers of measuring-cups applied equi 
distantly around their peripheries, for drop 
35 ping corn, pease, or other seeds at different 
distances, as required. Any one of the said 
wheels is applied to the shaft D. They are 
readily changed by detaching the shaft or axle 
from the frame. A single wheel may be used 
4o for dropping corn, pease, or other large seeds 
from eighteen inches to six feet apart. Sup 
posing four holes to be arranged for eighteen 
inch distances, two opposite holes are stopped 
for dropping at three-feet distances, and all 
45 the holes but one for dropping at six feet apart. 
F is a furrow-opener; F F, coverers, and 
G. G., handles of ordinary construction. 
H is the seed-hopper, within which is a 
horizontal rock-shaft, I, on which is mounted 
25 
65 
a wheel of spokes, J, armed with horizontal so 
stud-pins jj, for sweeping over the bottom of 
the hopper, and beaters or paddles jij", for 
keeping the seeds loose and preventing their 
clogging. This rock-shaft has a crank-arm, 
K, which is connected by a rod, L, with an 55 
arm, M, on the shaft, D, the parts being so 
proportioned that the continuous rotation of 
the ground-wheel C will impart a vibratory 
motion to the rock-shaft I. In the bottom of 
the hopper H is a slide, N, formed with a re- 6o 
cess or excavation, n, to furnish a small orifice 
through the slide when desired, and operated 
by a rod, O, furnished with a handle, Q, which 
may be fixed in any position by a catch, R., of 
any suitable construction to admit of closing 
the opening in the hopper-bottom completely 
when the discharge of seed is to be stopped 
by regulating the capacity of the opening as 
required, a number of notches, q, being pro 
vided in the handle Q for the purpose. 
S is a roller having a wide groove at its 
central part, adapting it, while pressing the 
earth on the seed, to form a ridge, on the sum 
mit of which the plants will grow so as to be 
removed from danger of injury from cultiva 
tion while small, and be better adapted for 
chopping Out. 
The machine, though primarily intended for 
planting cotton-seed, is well adapted for plant 
ing corn, pease, and other large seeds, also for 8o 
small seeds of any or all kinds, and for distrib 
uting guano and other fertilizers in any quan 
tities, from the smallest to the largest amount 
required. It is especially valuable as a cotton 
plainter by reason of the uniform distribution 
insured by the wheel of spokes and beaters 
and the toothed wheel E, which latter Works 
in the throat of the hopper and drags the seed 
out, and thus prevents clogging and missing, 
which are liable to cause irregularity in the 9o 
work of cotton-planters in common use. 
We are aware that the devices employed in 
our machine separately considered are not new, 
and we do not therefore claim them broadly; 
but our improved planter consists in the ar 
ranging and the combining of the Various parts 
in such a manner as to produce a compact and 
useful machine. 
85 
2 
245,546 
Having thus described our invention, the D, and ground-wheel C, all constructed and 
following is what we claim as new and desire arranged substantially as set forth. 
to secure by Letters Patent 
is firing 
The wheel of spokes J, armed with horizon- 
5 tal pins jj, for sweeping over the bottom of 
the hopper, and the beaters j' j', for loosening 
the seeds, in combination with the rock-shaft 
I, hopper H, crank-arms K M, rod L, shaft 
Witnesses: 
YV 
HENNING G. GRIEVE, 
L. J. LAMAR. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245646.txt	(Model.) 
A. F. MARTEL, 
MAIL, BAG, 
No. 245,646. 
W 
Patented Aug. 16, 1881, 
 
772.est: 
also 
Inventor: 
writes. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADELARD F. MARTEL, OF MONTREAL, QUEBEC, CANADA, ASSIGNOR OE ONE. 
FOURTH TO CHARLES AUGUSTE MARTEL, OF SAME PLACE, 
MAll BAG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 245,646, dated August 16, 1881. 
Application filed December 24, 1880. (Model.) 
5 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, ADELARD F. MARTEL, of 
Montreal, Province of Quebec, Canada, have 
invented certain Improvements in Mail-Bags, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to mail-bags; and it 
consists in providing the same with a jointed 
mouth-frame consisting of two parallel end or 
side sections and a series of intermediate sec 
tions jointed together and arranged to fold in 
ward between the end or side sections, said 
joints being furnished with stops, whereby they 
are prevented from coming into line with each 
other, and are consequently caused to fold 
readily inward. 
The invention further consists in a tongue 
applied to one of the folding sections and ar 
ranged to close the passage through which a 
seal is applied to the lock, the lock-case being 
specially adapted to receive said tongue. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a perspective view of my improved 
mouth-frame expanded; Fig. 2, a perspective 
view of the same folded; Fig. 3, an interior 
view of the lock. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
mail-bag which may be properly closed and 
fastened without the delay and bother incident 
to those commonly in use, and one in which 
the threading of bands, chains, or other fast 
enings through eyes or staples may be avoided. 
To this end I provide a mouth-frame consist 
ing of two parallel end sections connected by 
shorter intermediate sections jointed to the 
end sections and to each other, and adapted 
to fold alternately in opposite directions, the 
shorter sections forming the two sides of the 
mouth-frame. By referring to Fig. I this con 
struction will be readily understood. 
A represents the frame as a whole, consist 
ing of end sections, a, b, and jointed side sec 
tions, cc. The sides are composed of short 
sections, preferably a little less than one-half 
the length of the end sections, and are hinged 
or jointed to fold alternately inward and out 
ward, the hinges being placed alternately on 
the outer and inner faces of the sections for 
this purpose, as shown. Thus constructed, the 
frame may be folded into a compact shape, 
In order the more perfectly to close the space 65 
bringing all the short sections constituting the So 
sides face to face with each other and between 
and within the end sections, as shown in Fig.2. 
B represents a staple, firmly secured to the 
inner face of the end section b, and projecting 
therefrom toward the opposite end section. 55 
This staple is of such length that when the 
frame is folded, as in Fig. 2, it shall extend 
into the case of a lock, C, applied either to the 
outer or inner face of the end section, a, the 
staple passing between the two folded sides, 6o 
which, being composed of sections a little less 
than half the length of the ends, do not meet 
when folded, and consequently leave a suffi 
cient space between them to receive the staple. 
between the ends of the folded sections they 
may be notched or recessed slightly to receive 
the edges of the staple B, as indicated in Fig. 
2; or the staple may be turned edgewise or 
with its flat faces in a vertical plane, in which 7o 
case, being of slight thickness, but little space 
would be required for it. 
In order that the sides may fold readily, 
each section in the proper direction, the joints 
or hinges d are arranged to stand out of line 75 
with each other when the frame is distended, 
as shown in Fig. 1, this result being conven 
iently attained by forming saidjoints or hinges 
each with a shoulder or stop, e, by which the 
sections are prevented from opening out fully 8o 
and forming a straight line, 
In the drawings, the hinges are shown as 
applied separately to the joints, and in some 
cases it may be desirable in practice to follow 
this construction. 
sections will be made from sheet or plate metal, 
and the joints or hinges will be formed directly 
thereon, in which case stops will be formed to 
prevent them from opening out straight. When 
constructed as shown in the drawings, the 9o 
ends of the sectious will be beveled and caused 
to form stops, as shown. 
The locking device may be of any desired 
mechanical construction; but the case C will be 
formed with a passage, f, through which a seal 95 
may be inserted to cover the key-hole, as is 
well understood. For the purpose of closing 
this passage or opening and preventing the re 
Ordinarily, however, the 85 
25 
35 
45 
2 
245,646 
25 
I am aware that jointed sections have here 
moval of the seal, one of the sections of the 
frame, preferably the one adjoining the end sec- tofore been arranged to fold inward between 
parallel ends or sides, and I do not broadly 
tion to which the lock is applied, is provided 
with a tongue, D, which enters the lock-case 
claim such construction. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
and extends across the passage f, as shown in 
Fig. 3. 
I claim is 
1. A mouth-frame for mail-bags, consisting 
It is obvious that the ends instead of the 
of two parallel end or side sections connected 
sides may be jointed and adapted to fold, in 
by intermediate jointed sections adapted to 
which case a single joint at the middle, to 
fold inward between them, the joints being fur 
gether with joints or flexible connections with 
nished with stops, whereby they are prevented 
the sides, would be sufficient, 
from coming into line with each other, sub 
The bag material may be applied in any con 
Stalntially as and for the purpose set forth. 
venient manner; but if made to encircle or en 
2. In combination with a folding mouth 
velop the frame, the joints of the latter should 
frame, a lock provided with a seal-passage, 
afford sufficient space between the faces of the 
and a tongue secured to the mouth-frame and 
sections to accommodate the material. 
adapted to close said passage when the frame 
The frame thus constructed is simple, cheap, 
and strong, and may be closed in an instant. 
is folded. 
When distended or opened it affords a large 
opening of convenient shape to receive the mat 
ter to be placed in the bag. 
Other fastenings may be employed, if de 
sired, either in lieu of or in addition to that de 
scribed. 
ARCHIBALD STEWART, 
H. GARON. 
O 
IS 
Witnesses: 
A. F. MARTEI. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245746.txt	(Model.) 
No. 245,746, 
A, C, R, OD GER, S, 
SLEEPING CAR, 
Patented Aug. 16, 1881. 
727. Z. 
2 
sE--- 
 
WTTWESSES 
z (aszz6 
Segis' 
v 
By 22er Attorneys 
C2-6 - 
(2-4-6, 
I WWE WTOR 
A. %3. t 
N. PETEFS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AMOS C. ROL)GERS, OF CHELSEA, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF 
AND SUEL A. STEVENS, OF SAME PLACE. 
SLEE PING-CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 245,746, dated August 16, 1881. 
Application filed March 23, 1881. (Model.) 
e. 
2d 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AMOs C. RODGERs, of 
Chelsea, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Sleeping-Cars; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
Io reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to railway sleeping 
cars; and it consists in inclosing the berths or 
sections of such cars by means of removable 
15 sliding partitions, as hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the annexed drawings, in which similar 
parts are indicated by like letters in the seve 
ral views 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of part of 
a sleeping-car, slowing a front view of the 
berths partly inclosed. Fig. 2 is a top and bot 
tom detail view of a guide-bar which fits be 
tween the top and bottom berths; and Fig. 3, 
25 a plan view of the car-floor, showing guide 
Ways, and a detail view of a transverse end 
guide. 
A represents the floor of the car; and B is a 
chair, two of which form a section. 
Resting on the floor of the car and extending 
between the seats is a grooved rail, C, that 
may be either fixed or movable. 
Grooves c care also formed in the car-floor, 
at the outer sides of the seats, or grooved rails 
35 may be attached at these points. These grooves 
and rails are for the reception of the lower ends 
of the sliding partitions or doors D D, that are 
used instead of curtains to inclose the lower 
berths. After the doors or partitions D D 
4o are put in place they are secured by a brace or 
rail, E, that rests at each end upon a station 
ary transverse partition, F, at or forming the 
back of the car-seat. 
The rail E is grooved on its upper and lower 
45 surfaces in a suitable manner, so as to fit over 
the upper ends of the partitions D D, and also 
serve as a support for the sliding doors or par 
titions G. G., that inclose the upper berths. 
These partitions G. G. are held at the top by the 
So grooved under surface of a rail, H, that is sus 
3o 
 
65 
pended from the car-ceiling in any suitable 
Ahorizontal slator cross-piece, F, rests upon 
the top of the adjacent transverse partitions 
FF, and serves as a support for a grooved rail, I, 55 
that, when placed in position, holds the doors 
G G in place and prevents those of adjoining 
sections from coming in contact with each 
other. 
The rail I supports an upper transverse par- 6o 
tition, K, that separates adjoining sections. 
The lower berths are formed by the reversi 
ble seats B B in the usual manner, and the 
upper berths by slats or rails Li Li, that rest at 
each end on the cross-pieces F. F. 
The removable parts above described may 
be easily taken down or readjusted, as required; 
and during the day the shorter pieces may be 
packed in boxes or pockets M, that are formed 
between the transverse partitions F F, while to 
the longer ones are secured beneath the car 
ceiling in suitable supports in Such a manner 
as not to detract from the appearance of the 
car. In this way a space is also provided above 
the suspended parts, that may be conveniently 75 
used for packing the bedding. The ends of the 
pockets M are provided with doors N, so that 
the contained material is completely concealed. 
By this construction of the sections in a sleep 
ing-car a more perfect degree of privacy is se- 8o 
cured and the comfort of travelers greatly pro 
moted. 
The operation of forming the berths is as 
follows: Reverse the seats and put in the aux 
iliary pieces; place the strip or guide in posi- 85 
tion upon the floor of the car between the seats, 
and the guide I upon the transverse cap F. 
The bottom boards of the upperberth are then 
placed in their rabbets so as to rest upon the 
seat-backs, and the guide-bar E placed in po- 9o 
sition as in Fig. 1, so as to rest upon the parts 
D, and the sliding doors positioned so as to 
slide in the ways back of the parts D. 
The upper doors, G, are of two kinds, the 
outer two not being adapted to slide in their 95 
guides, while the inner two may be forced in 
either direction at will. The upper end boards, 
K, are placed in position after the doors G are 
properly in their guides. 
Having thus described my invention, what I Ico 
g 
245,46 
panels and doors DG, all operating as and for Io 
the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
iny own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
AMOS CHARLES BODGERS. 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD BUTLER, 
JAMES S. GREEN. 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In a sleeping-car, the combination of the seats 
B, having reversible bottoms and auxiliary fill 
5 ing-pieces, the removable grooved rails C and 
E, the latter marking the partition between the 
upper and lower berth and Serving as guides 
for sliding doors above and below, the grooved 
removable bar I, transverse partition K, and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245846.txt	F. M. MACK & J. R. RHEUBOTTOM. 
FLY NET FOR HORSES. 
Patented Aug. 16, 1881. 
(Model.) 
No. 245,846, 
 
WZZ726.9Ss. 
Z72Ze/2(27.8 
N. Pereas, Photo-lithographer, Washington, E. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK M. MACK AND JAMES R. RHEUBOTTOM, OF WEEDSPORT, NEW YORK. 
FLY-NET FOR HORSES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent. No. 245,846, dated August 16, 1881. 
Application filed May 11, 1881. 
(Model.) 
shown in Fig. 4. In applying these fasteners 
the prongs of the fastener shown in Fig.2 are 
bent at right angles to the central portion or 
body of the fastener, so that each prong can 
be brought into an angle between the rib and 
the lash, after which the prongs are bent in 
wardly and down upon the rib, as in Fig. 4, 
the lash in this instance being between the rib 
and the body d of the fastener. The prongs 
are then clamped down so that they will hold 
the lash and rib securely together and pre 
vent the lashes from slipping on the ribs. 
In employing this fastening device the tying 
of the lashes in knots to secure them to the 
ribs is avoided, and also no holes through the 
ribs for the lashes to pass through will be re 
quired. 
The fasteners can be punched out of 
a metal plate into the form shown in Fig. 2, 
and hence can be rapidly and cheaply made. 
In Fig. 1 we have shown fastening devices 
F at the ends of the ribs, these fasteners con 
sisting of metal plates bent around the ribs, 
and serving to strengthen and prevent the 
same from unrolling at such points. F. F. in 
dicate the buckles usually employed in fly-lnets. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim is 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a fly-net having its longitudinal ribs and trans 
verse lashes secured together by means of the 
clasp or device C, whereby a rigid connection 
is effected without puncturing or perforating 
the parts, all substantially as set forth. 
2. A fly-net having its intersecting parts se 
cured together by the clasp C, and its longi 
tudinal ribs provided with the end fastening 
device, F, all substantially as set forth. 
ERANK. M. MACK. 
JAMES R. REIEUBOTTOM. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. LAWRENCE, 
PETER B, DECKER. 
45 
So 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, FRANK M. MACK and 
JAMES R. RHEUBOTTOM, both citizens of the 
United States, and residents of Weedsport, 
Cayuga, county, and State of New York, have 
jointly invented a new, useful, and Improved 
Method of Constructing Fly-Nets for Horses, 
which improvements relate to better and more 
desirable methods of attaching the various 
parts of the net, and also to ornamental effects, 
which we specify as follows: 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
cheap, simple, and efficient fastening device 
for securing together the longitudinal ribs and 
the transverse lashes of a fly-net. This object 
we attain by means of the device hereinafter 
described, and illustrated in the drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the fly-net. 
Fig. 2 shows the fastening device with its 
prongs spread out. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of the same with the prongs bent at right 
angles to the body of the fastening, and Fig. 
4 illustrates the way in which a lash and rib 
are secured together by our improved fasten 
ing device. 
In the drawings, AA indicate the longitudi 
nal ribs, and B B the transversely-arranged 
lashes, of a fly-net. These ribs and lashes can 
be composed of leather or of any suitable fibrous 
material. 
C indicates the fastening devices which are 
employed to secure the ribs and lashes together 
at the points where they cross each other. 
Each fastening device consists of a netal plate 
formed with a body or central portion, d, and 
with the four radial spurs or prongs e, which 
are adapted to be bent at right angles to the 
said body or central portion of the fastener, 
as illustrated in Fig. 3, and also adapted to 
be bent inwardly and down upon the rib of the 
net, so as to secure the same to the lash, as 
5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
h 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US245946.txt	(No Model.) 
A., GOOD, 
DAMPER PLATE AND REFLECTOR, 
No. 245,946, 
Patented Aug. 23, 1881, 
2222222 
2.T. 22 
22222 
222 D22 
22s22 
22222 
2 
y2TD 2 
NS22 
22 
27tle 22 
S2's 22 
24A 22 
1722 
It is 2% 22 2222 
 
 
 
2 
222 
222 
222 
1222 
222 
II - 22 
LEETE 
Wazz2 
NHT22 
SS 4222 
NSET22 
2 
222 
Fig. 3. 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
Witnesses: 
26% 
 
2222 
22222 
X2 
2 
Juvenigr: 
Ziyi says,ses:tise, 
N. PeFERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADAM GOOD, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
DAMPER-PLATE AND REFLECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 245,946, dated August 23, 1881. 
Application filed January 6, 1881. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ADAM GooD, of the 
city and county of San Francisco, in the State 
of California, have made and invented a new 
and useful Improvementin Damper-Plates and 
Reflectors; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
device for application to and insertion in the 
throats or chimney-openings of grates and 
fire-places, for the purposes of preventing ex 
cessive draft and the escape and loss of heat 
from the fire, of curing back-drafts and the 
drawing down of smoke into the apartment, and 
of bringing the combustion of fuel in grates 
and fire-places under perfect control. It is 
particularly adapted for use in chimneys of 
defective construction. 
The following description and the accompa 
nying drawings clearly explain the construc 
tion and application of my improvement. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my attach 
ment. Fig. 2 is a cross-section taken on line 
at a of Fig.1, with the dampers removed. Fig. 
3 is a sectional view of a fire-place, showing 
the application of Imy invention. 
In Fig. 3, a represents the throat of a chim 
ney, y its breast at the front of the outlet, and 
& the space wherein the grate is placed. 
A is my improved plate and damper, which 
I place in the throat or opening between the 
breast and the back part. of the chimney, so 
that the opening is entirely filled up and closed 
by it. This device consists of a metal plate, 
A, of a height and length to extend across the 
opening a both vertically and horizontally, 
and close it up. The top of the plate fits 
against the breast of the chimney, and its 
lower edge rests upon the back ledge, w, of 
the chimney. In it is provided, also, an aper 
ture, b, fitted with an adjustable damper, C. 
The bottom of the plate has legs or projec 
tions did on the back, which are provided for 
supporting and steadying it, and at the top of 
the plate A is a ledge or projecting part, e, 
which extends forward horizontally, so as to 
55 
rest against the chimney-breast. This hori 
Zontal extension is provided for the purpose 5o 
of permitting the plate A to have a substan 
tially perpendicular position when its bottom 
edge rests upon the forwardly-projecting part 
of the chimney-back, and for closing up the 
opening or space that may exist between the top 
of the plate A and the breast of the chimney. 
For the application to and use in chimneys 
Where the grate-space is deep and the chim 
ney-throat is open this extension e will be 
nearly as broad as the plate A, so that it will 
entirely close the space that would otherwise 
be left between the top edge of the plate A 
and the breast at of the chimney. 
I provide in the horizontal extension e of 
the plate A an outlet, f, fitted with an ad- 65 
justable damper, g, which I employ, in addi 
tion to the regular damper C, for the purpose 
of regulating the escape of heat and gases at 
the upper part of the grate-space, where they 
would otherwise be retained by that portion of 7o 
the plate A and extension e above the princi 
pal outlet, b. 
The openings bf have on each side an ear, 
l, to receive and serve as a bearing for the 
pintles i of the dampers Cg, said ears or bear 
ings for the pintles being open to permit the 
dampers C and g to be taken out, when re 
quired, for removal of the soot or other mat 
ter from the horizontal extension e or other 
portions of the attachment. 
As thus constructed and applied the plate 
A forms a reflecting-surface to radiate and 
throw into the apartment the heat that ordi 
narily escapes directly up the chimney and is 
lost, while the damper provided in the plate 
affords a ready and perfect means of regulat 
ing the draft and the consumption of fuel. 
No change of grate or alteration of chimney 
is required in placing my improvement. It is 
easily regulated as required, and its action 
upon defective flues and imperfect draft is ef. 
fective under all conditions. 
It is not at 
tached to or secured permanently in place it 
the chimney, and can be readily taken out to 
clean the chimney or to replace it with a new 
one when injured or worn out, 
75 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
245,946 
Having thus fully described my invention, removable dampers Cg, substantially as and 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters for the purpose specified. 
Patent, is- 
A reflector and damper-plate for fire-places, 
5 consisting of the plate A, detachably con- 
nected thereto, and having the horizontal ex- 
tensione and legs or projections d, and the 
Witness my hand and seal. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARDE. OsBoRN, 
WM. F. CLARK. 
ADAM GOOD, L. s. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246046.txt	(No Model.) 
S, STUTZ. 
CLASSIFYING AND FEEDING APPARATUS FOR OREs, 
Patented Aug. 23, 188l. 
 
 
 
  
 
SS 
X S 
k 
"U- 
O 
MO 
a 
t 
w 
S.S.S.G. Googoologio 
"Tressessessesses 
 
 
 
5 O Go O Olo'o e o O 6 
give a 
a tag 
 
 
 
 
O c 
o c 
o o o c 
 
s 
- 
SS RS 
53. 
Sex 
 
 
//VAA/V 7/7A7: 
7%-2- 76.5 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
 
 
  
sa 
o og Alping mmMmm 
r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SEBASTIAN STUTZ, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CLASSIFYING AND FEED ING APPARATUS FOR ORES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,046, dated August 23, 1881. 
Application filed January 10, 1881. (No model.) 
So 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SEBASTIAN STUTZ, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and useful 
Classifying and Feeding Apparatus for Ores, 
&c., of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
classifying and feeding machines for coal, coke, 
ore, &c., operated in connection with breaking 
and crushing machines; and the object of my 
improvements are, first, to arrange the mate 
rial into classes or grades; second, to feed into 
the breaking or crushing rolls only pieces which 
have greater size than the pieces required; and, 
third, to regulate the feeding of the material 
into the rolls. I attain these objects by the 
mechanism illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of the entire 
machine connected with a breaking and crush 
ing apparatus. Fig. 2 is a vertical cross-sec 
tion on the line acac of Fig.1, and Fig. 3 is a top 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The apparatus is adapted to a breaking aud 
crushing machine for which Letters Patent 
have been granted to me May 14, 1878, and 
consists of a movable screen, C, arranged be 
tween the crushing-machine and the storage 
bin holding the material. The screen is pro 
vided with three sides, i, in the shape of a box, 
the front side being left open to terminate in 
an inclined plane or spout, k, It is supported 
by wheels w standing on rails r. The latter 
are slightly inclined toward the rolls. The 
screen-bars c are fixed upon cross-pieces E, to 
gether with the sides and the spout of the box. 
A yoke, e, guided in the frame H and provided 
with a spiral spring, n, is attached to the rear 
of the screen-box by means of the pin a. The 
shafts has cams d, working in the yokee, and 
receiving movement from the crushing-rolls by 
means of the pulley g and belt f. The space 
between the screen-bars c depends on the num 
ber of screens superposed and the size of the 
view. 
- 
material required. If more than one screen is 
used the meshes of the lower screen must al 
low pieces corresponding to the required size 
of the material to pass through it. In the case 
represented by the drawings three screens are 
superposed. The upper one receiving the full 
charge from the bin F will feed only the large 
lumps into the breaking-rolls AA, while the 
smaller pieces go to the middle screen, to be 
grated again. The part remaining upon the 
screen is fed into the rolls A' A', while the 
third class will fall upon the lower screen and 
is divided again. The pieces resting upon this 
screen are fed into the lower rolls, A' A', 
while the material already small enough will 
pass through the meshes upon the inclined 
plane p, and thence to the elevator. 
The operation of the machinery is as follows: 
The cam d, revolving in the proper direction, 
causes the yoke e and the screen attached 
thereto to move backward a distance equal to 
its stroke, and while this is done the spring . 
Will be compressed together. As soon as the 
point of the camd escapes the yoke the power 
stored into the spring a reacting upon the 
yoke will draw the screen forward with great 
speed; but the momentum thus imparted to 
the screen is met with a sudden stop by the 
legulating-screw 0, leaving only the loose ma 
terial on the screen to be drawn forward into 
the rolls. As the cam is double this is done 
twice per revolution. The length of the stroke 
and the power necessary to the spring in may be 
easily regulated by means of the screw-nut 0, 
to suit the quantity to be fed at each stroke. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
A classifying and feeding apparatus for 
crushing-machines consisting of one or more 
screens, C, supported by wheels w, and provided 
with mechanism for moving the same back 
ward and forward upon rails r, substantially 
as described, and for the purpose specified. 
SEBASTIAN STUTZ, 
Witnesses: 
Jos. D. WEEKs, 
J. C. ARMSTRONG. 
75 
85 
EO 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246146.txt	(No Model.) , 
No. 246,146, 
J. H. KELLEY. 
BRACELET 
Patented Aug. 23, 1881, 
Fig. . 
Fig. 2 
of 
. . 
the 
. 
2's Ney 
N'-(2-aze 
.NE 2 
. 
WITNESSES: 
%. 22.4 
INVENT OR; 
cause & 64, 
   
k 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. KELLEY, OF PROVIDENCE, REIODE ISLAND. 
BRACE LET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,146, dated August 23, 1881. 
Application filed May 27, 1881. (No model.) 
35 
bracelet. b b are the hinges. c is the central 
ornament, forming a hollow box, having two 3o 
slits, through which the levers d dare inserted. 
e is a piece of rubber or similar material, which 
presses against the face of the levers did, and 
thereby keeps the wings of the bracelet closed, 
forming a simple, cheap, and durable spring. 
As the ends of the Wings at the hinges are 
rounded, and as the slots in the central orna 
ment are immediately back of the linges, the 
joint is not visible, and as the elastic material 
is confined in the central box or ornament, the 
pressure exerted in the levers d increases as 
the wings are opened. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
The bracelet composed of the wings a, binged 
to the outside of the central ornament, c, and 
provided with the levers dd, extending inside 
the central ornament, in which also is arranged 
the springe, fitting closely against said levers, 
substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set iny 
hand. 
45 
JAMES H. KELLEY. 
Witnesses: 
WM. L. CooP, 
J. A. MILLER, Jr. 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMEs H. KELLEY, of 
the city and county of Providence, and State 
of Rhode Island, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Bracelets; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification. 
This invention has reference to an improve 
ment in the class of bracelets in which the two 
wings are hinged to a central ornament; and 
it consists in providing such wings with levers 
inserted into the central ornament beyond the 
hinge, and placing between these two levers a 
spring made, preferably, of rubber or similar 
elastic material. 
Figure1 is a perspective view of my improved 
bracelet, showing the Wings hinged to the out 
side of the central ornament. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged sectional view, showing the central 
ornament, the Wings hinged thereto in the 
position when the bracelet is closed, and the 
elastic spring placed between the short levers 
forming part of the wings. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tional view, showing the wings when open and 
the levers compressing the elastic material. 
In the drawings, a a are the two wings of a 
IS 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246247.txt	i 
(No Model.) 
C. A., TRPISCH, 
BROOCH. 
No. 246,247, 
Patented Aug. 23, 1881, 
 
Y. 
- Z 274. 
WITNESSES: 
6eye e/e- 
1. 
INVENTOR: 
BY Muel- G. 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL A. TURPISCE, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
BROOCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,247, dated August 23, 1881. 
Application filed April 16, 1881. (No model.) 
held in position on the wire by two studs or 
projections, G. G.; but these may be omitted, 
if desired, as the device is also operative if the 
sleeve D slides on the wire. The pin E is 
passed through the article to which the brooch 
is to be attached, and then pressed through 
between the heads or buttons B B until the 
point of the pin rests in or against the cap C. 
As the outtons Snap together as soon as the 
point of the pin E has passed, the pin will be 
locked between the cap C and the heads or 
buttons. If the brooch is to be opened, the 
pin is pushed in the reverse direction of the 
arrow, causing it to force the heads B apart, 
So that it call S Wing OutWard. 
The special advantage of this brooch is that 
no hook for receiving the end of the pin is re 
Quired, as in ordinary brooches, and it can be 
opened and closed much more easily. 
This device is also applicable for chatelaines, 
ear-rings, or clasps. 
If desired, the pin can be hinged to the wire 
in the ordinary manner; but the construction 
described is preferred. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. A brooch made substantially as herein 
shown and described, and consisting of a wire 
bent so that the ends are in contact, combined 
with a cap attached to one of the ends and a 
pin articulated on the wire, as set forth. 
2. The combination, in a brooch having the 
wire A bent so that the ends are in contact, 
of the cap C, attached to one of these ends, 
the sleeve D, loosely mounted on the wire, and 
the pin E, attached to the sleeve D, substan 
tially as herein shown and described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
CAER. A. TURPISCE, 
45 
So 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
OsCAR F. GUNZ, 
C. SEDGWICR. 
To all ch012 it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARLA. TRPISCH, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and Improved Brooch, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
My invention consists in a new and improved 
brooch formed of a wire bent in the form of a 
ring or in a similar manner, so that the two 
ends will be pressed against each other by the 
spring of the wire, to one of which ends a cap 
is attached in such a manner that it overlaps 
the point of contact of the ends of the ring, 
upon which ring a short sleeve is loosely 
mounted, and has a pin attached thereto, this 
pin being passed through the article to which 
the brooch is to be attached, upon which the 
end of the pin is forced through between the 
ends of the wire into the cap, in which it is 
retained as the ends of the ring snap together, 
thus locking the point of the pin between the 
cap and the ends of the ring. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of the inner side of my improved 
brooclu. Fig. 2 is a sectional elevation of the 
same on the line at a, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The brooch is formed of a wire, A, which is 
bent in the shape of a ring, of all oval or an 
oblong with rounded corners, in such a man 
ner that the ends, provided with buttons or 
heads B B, will be pressed against each other 
by the spring of the wire. A cap, C, is at 
taclhed to one of the buttons B in such a man 
ner that it overlaps the point of contact of the 
two heads or buttons BB. This cap may be 
replaced by a small strip of metal or a small 
button. A short sleeve, D, is loosely mounted 
on the wire A, and to this sleeve D a pin, F, 
is attached, of such length that it extends across 
the ring formed by the wire. The sleeve Dis 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246347.txt	(No Model.) 
F. H. SCHWEIGER 
No. 246,347, 
METHOD OF CASTING CHAINs. 
Patented Aug. 30, 188l. 
 
With El 
-6. dy -6-7-12. 
4./ ve/2u24 
E is , 
I rve For, 
2%ez.e4 % de4ezer. 
Vro-ly 6-ye7 4 
N, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK H. SCEIWEIGER, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
EDDY T. THOMAS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
METHOD OF CASTING C-ANS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,847, dated August 30, 1881. 
Application filed July 15, 1881. (No model.) 
SO 
45 
55 
45 of the link-pattern, as in Fig. 1, and fill 
and tamp the flask part c, and apply dividing 
sand; then apply the part d of the flask and 
fill it with loam, tamp it down, and make run 
holesh, to communicate with each pattern-link. 
After this the three-part flask will be separated 
and the pattern-link be withdrawn in pieces, 
when the flask will be again put together, as 
in Fig. 1, the pattern -link being, however, 
omitted, and the hole previously occupied by 
it will be filled with molten metal, forming a 
link the counterpart of the pattern-link, which 
will connect with it two cast-metal links, f, 
previously made, and then contained in the 
loam of the part c of the flask. 
In this way I 
am enabled to cheaply produce a chain all the 
links of which are of solid cast metal. 
The shapes of the links and pattern-links 
may be variously modified without departing 6o 
from my invention, as may be the number of 
sections into which it is divided. 
I claim 
That improvement in the art or method of 
producing cast-metal chains which consists in 65 
the following steps, viz: forming a part of the 
mold for each link of a series, embedding in 
the mold material a series of cast links So that 
each link will surround a portion of two of 
such mold portions, then molding the remain- 7 O 
der of the series of link-molds, removing the 
pattern, and finally pouring the metal, thus 
casting a series of links which inclose within 
them as one chain the previously-made metal 
links, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
FREDERICK H. SCHWEGER. 
75. 
Witnesses: 
E. T. THOMAS, 
JOHN E. HOGAN. 
I O. 
IS 
2 O 
25 
To call thon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FREDERICK H. SCHWEI 
GER, of Brooklyn, Kings county, State of New 
York, have invented an Improvement in the 
Method of Casting Chains, of which the fol 
lowing description, in connection with the ac 
companying drawings, is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved method 
of casting chains, whereby the same may be 
made rapidly and economically. 
In the practice of my invention I first cast 
a number of links separately, and when molded 
into the loam of the flask cast other links 
through and about and to connect them all as 
one chain. 
Figure 1 represents, in vertical longitudinal 
section, part of a three-part molding-flask cons 
taining some cast links connected by a divided 
pattern-link, the latter being also in section; 
and Fig.2 shows one of the cast-metal links 
removed from the flask. 
The bottom board, a, and parts b c d of the 
flask are as usual. The pattern-linke is com 
posed of four pieces, 2 3 4 5, suitably con 
nected together by dowel-pins, as shown at 
the ends of the pattern-links in Fig. 1, in or. 
der that it may be separated in line with the 
partings of the flask, as under such condition 
the impression in the loam can be made with 
greater accuracy. 
The links fare cast links, which it is desired 
to connect in series by other links to be cast 
in the spaces formed by the divided pattern 
link e. This I do in the following manner: 
I first stand the parts 23 of the pattern-link 
in the loam of the part l of the flask, packing 
it to the level of the top of part b, when I ap 
ply dividing-sand; then apply part c of the 
flask, partially fill it with loam, place the cast 
metal links therein about the upwardly-ex 
tended parts of the link-pattern, apply parts 
- 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246448.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 246,448, 
J. AUG SPURGER 
SAWING MACHINE, 
Patented Aug. 30, 1881. 
 
  
w 
o ess X 
1. 
 
 
 
SSSSS 
SSS 
N. F.R.S. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. E. C. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN AUGSPURGER, OF TRENTON, OHIO. 
SAWENG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,448, dated August 30, 1881. 
Application filed May 20, 1881. 
(No model.) 
O 
25 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN AUG SPURGER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Tren 
ton, Butler county, Ohio, have invented new 
5 and useful Improvements in Sawing-Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
sawing-machines for cutting standing timber, 
its object being to provide a practicable, effi 
cient, and economical machine for the purpose, 
to be operated by manual power and be easily 
transported from place to place. 
My invention is embodied in mechanism 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
Which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my apparatus 
Complete; Fig. 2, a longitudinal sectional ele 
Vation of the same; Fig. 3, a cross-sectional 
elevation of the same, and Fig. 4 a detail cross 
Section through the cross-head and saw-clamp. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts in both specification and drawings. 
Referring to the drawings to illustrate the 
following description, A. A designate the lon 
gitudinal bars, and B B the cross-bars, of a 
rectangular frame, which is supported adjust 
ably upon four posts, p, by suitable clamps and 
Set-screws in any convenient manner. Upon 
the supporting-frame a guideway, C, is ar 
ranged to rest and be adjustable horizontally 
in the following manner: It is held by a pivot 
bolt, a, passing vertically through near its rear 
end, and through a slot, S, extending longi 
tudinally through the cross-bar B', from end 
to end, between the bars A. By this con 
Struction the guideway is adjustable from side 
to side and held pivotally by a thumb-nut, n, 
upon its pivot-bolt in any desired position. 
The forward end of the guideway is free to 
move laterally on rollers , journaled in cleats 
or brackets attached to the guideway C, the 
Cross-bar B being sufficiently wide to form a 
support and roadway for the rollers. Atongue, 
t, projects forward beneath the cross-bar B, to 
hold the guideway to the cross-bar in its lat 
eral movements. 
The guideway consists of two parallel guide 
rails, c, mounted upon a supporting-piece, be 
tWeenand upon which guide-rails moves a cross 
So head, D, constructed in the ordinary manner 
With side cleats projecting over above and be 
4.d 
45 
 
low the guide-rails, to hold and guide the cross 
head. A handle, H, is attached by a hook-and 
eye connection to the cross-head for its manip 
ulation, and to the forward end of the cross- 55 
head the saw E is secured in any convenient 
manner, riding upon a supporting-block, e, or 
roller secured upon the guideway Catits front 
end. To the guideway C is also attached a 
rope or chain, F, which is carried under a 6o 
sheave, f', and thence over a sheave, f', jour 
naled in a double-armed bracket, G, secured 
upon one of the side bars, A. The bracket G is 
secured in position removably upon either of 
the bars A, as may be required, and by means 65 
of a weight, 20, at the outer end of the rope or 
chain the saw-guideway and the saw are drawn 
to that side, the fall of the weight being pro 
vided for by the upwardly-extended arm of 
the bracket G. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
The frame being placed on the ground in 
proper relation to the tree to be cut down and 
adjusted to the required height, the guideway 
is adjusted by means of the pivot-bolt a to the 
position required, the bracket G attached to 
the proper side bar, A, and the rope and weight 
adjusted in position to hold the saw to its work. 
Then by means of the handle EI the operator 
reciprocates the saw, which, by adding more 
or less weight, is caused to cut as may be de 
sired. 
The saw-guideway may be adjusted at will 
during the progress of the work, to suit the cut 
Baving described my invention, I claim and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a drag-sawing machine, the combina 
tion, with a supporting frame-work, of a lat 
erally-swinging saw-guideway, sustained by 
the frame-work, and carrying a sliding cross 
head to which the saw is connected, the rear 
pivoted end of said guideway, being adjust 
able transversely across the supporting frame 
work, substantially as and for the purposes 
2. In a drag sawing machine, the combi. 
nation of a supporting frame-Work having a 
transversely-slotted portion, S, with a later 
ally-swinging saw-guideway, sustained by the 
frame-work, and carrying a sliding cross-head 
to which the saw is connected, the rear end of 
described. 
desired. 
go 
75 
OO 
m 
m 
2 
246,44S 
said guideway being pivoted on a bolt or pin, 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
which is transversely adjustable in the slotted hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
portion of the frame-work, substantially as and nesses. 
for the purpose described. 
3. In combination with the guideway C, the 
rollers , cross-bar B, pivot-bolt ac, and slotted 
cross-bar B, substantially as specified. 
L. M. HOSEA, 
C. P. DOOLITTLE. 
Witnesses: 
. 
JOHN AUGSPURGER. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246548.txt	(No Model.) 
A. PEARL 
TOBA000 CASING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 246,548, 
A. PEARL, 
TOBACCO CASING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 30, 1881. 
 
 
 
-/ZZZ? ???, 
w -??????", 
4 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPH PEARL, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE PEARL MANU. 
FACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TOBACCO - CAS NG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,548, dated August 30, 1881. 
Application filed July 16, 1881. (No model.) 
S5 
To all pho? ?? ??? ???cer?: 
Be it known that I, ADOLPH PEARL, of the 
city and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in To 
bacco-Casing Machines; and I hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription thereof, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, making part of this 
specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the entire 
machine. Fig. 2 is a partial section. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in machines especially 
designed for removing or throwing off the sur 
plus water, flavoring-liquor, or fluid used in the 
process of casing or moistening leaf tobacco 
preparatory to manufacturing cigars and chew 
ing and Smoking tobacco; and to this end the 
invention consists in a novel construction and 
combination of parts, all as will be hereinafter 
fully described, and specifically pointed out in 
the claims. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will proceed to de 
Scribe the exact manner in which I have car 
ried it out. 
En the drawings, A represents a water-tight 
circular vessel, mounted or supported on the 
legs a, two of which are connected by a cross 
bar, af, having mounted centrally thereon a 
vertical spindle, B, passing up through the 
vessel A, its upper portion being hollow and 
perforated and surrounded by a perforated 
drum, O, and having mounted thereon a cir 
cular table, C, having on its under surface a 
series of radial wings, pp, of a smaller diam 
eter than the interior diameter of the vessel A. 
The upper end of the spindle B, projecting 
above the table C, is provided with a screw 
thread, b, upon which is secured a screw-clamp, 
D, for radially securing upon the table the to. 
bacco to be cleansed. The top of the vessel 
is provided with a circular flange, a', project 
ing in Ward a short distance over the outer pe 
riphery of the table C, so as to prevent the 
moistening-liquids from being thrown out of 
the vessel by centrifugal force as the table is 
revolved. The table C is revolved through 
the medium of a pulley, b', on the spindle and 
endless band passing around said pulley, and 
the pulley see mounted on the horizontal shaft 
e' secured to one of the legs of the vessel, and 
thence over a large band-wheel, E, which can 
be operated by hand or by any other desired 
or convenient motive power, or the power may 
be applied directly to the spindle. 
The operation of my improved machine is as 
follows: The dry leaf-tobacco in hands' is 
moistened either by first dipping at random in 
a tub containing the flavoring-liquid and then 
putting the hands on the table C, with the tied 
ends toward the center, until the whole table 
is entirely covered to any desired depth, the 
bunches of tobacco on the table being secured 
thereto by screwing the clamp D down on the 
spindle until the inner ends of the bunches are 
secured between the clamp and table; or the 
hands are clamped on the table while dry, and 
moistened by means of the liquid being forced 
through the hollow shaft and out of the per 
forations t t to the tobacco. The table being 
then rapidly revolved, the centrifugal force 
will throw the liquid into the folds or wrinkles 
of the leaves of the tobacco and force out all 
the surplus liquid, dirt, and sand, and leave the 
tobacco bunches in a uniform state of dampness 
and cleanliness. The surplus liquid is thrown 
off from the table, and passes down below 
the table into the lower part of vessel A, from 
which it can be drawn off into another vessel 
by a spout or pipe, h, leading from the bottom 
of the vessel and controlled by a stop-cock. 
If found desirable, I can introduce the liquid 
by means of a force-pump and hose within the 
clamp B, the hose being attached at a tap, T. 
Short tobacco or fillers cannot be success 
fully clamped under the clamp B for drying 
purposes, and I provide in the machine the 
following means for accomplishing the drying 
Of this class of tobacco. 
Fitted to the upper edge of vessel A is a 
Square box, Li, having a series of shallow draw 
ers, l, l, provided with screen-bottoms. The 
area of the box is a square of such a size that 
the circumference of the vessel A. can be de 
scribed therein and projecting corners of the 
box afford air-passages. When the short to 
baccois to be dried it is placed upon the screens 
l; the circular table C is lifted of the spindle 
and reversed, so that the wings pp are on its 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
246, 541S 
2 
upper side; box L is placed on vessel A, and with the flange a', revolving table C, clamp 15 
the table C is revolved. This passes a current 
of air up through the screens and dries the to 
bacco on them. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The revolving table A, screw-threaded 
spindle B, and screw-clamp D, in combination 
With a central liquid supply, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
2. The herein - described machine for uni 
formly dampening and cleansing tobacco, con 
sisting of the water-tight vessel A, provided 
and central spindle, and mechanism for oper 
ating said spindle and table, substantially as 
specified. 
3. The reversible rotating table C, provided 
with wings pip, in combination with the vessel 20 
or casing A and the superimposed box Lu, pro 
vided with the series of screensl, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
R. K. Ev ANS, 
WARREN PARSONS. 
? ? 
ADOLPHI PEARL. 
Witnesses: 
???? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246648.txt	KNITTING MACHINE, 
 
ITNESSES: 
%5/4/-, 
Inventor 
&autec et Weex. 
X 
memora-sa-classmeerammammar 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL L. WILCOX, OF PAWTUCKET, REODE ISLAND. 
KNITTING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,648, dated September 6, 1881. 
Application filed May 21, 1881. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL L. WILCOX, of 
Pawtucket, in the county of Providence and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented a new 
and useful Improvementin Knitting-Machines; 
and I hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
This invention has reference to improve 
ments in what is known as the spool-knit 
ter, in which a number of pins are stuck 
around the central hole of a spool or a perfo 
rated cork; and it consists in certain novel 
constructions and combinations of devices, 
which will be hereinafter fully described, and 
pointed out in the claim. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of one of my 
improved double knitters, showing the same 
secured to a table with the large knitter in 
use. Fig. 2 is a sectional view, showing the 
support of the knitter and the manner of se 
curing the same. Fig. 3 is a top and side view 
of the improved knitting-pin; and Fig. 4 rep 
resents the pin, partly in section, showing the 
knitting-hook in the act of raising one strand 
of yarn over the other. 
The object of the invention is to facilitate 
the kind of knitting for which the machine is 
intended. 
In the drawings, A is the standard. B is 
the supporting-bracket secured on the stand 
ard, so that it can be swung around its sup 
port. C is the large knitting-spool secured in 
the bracket B, so as to revolve freely in the 
support. D is a smaller knitting-spool, also 
supported in the bracket B and free to revolve. 
E is the knitting-hook. 
The standard A is constructed in a peculiar 
but simple manner, consisting of the clamp 
piece?, having the clamp-screw f", the sleeve 
g, the screw-pin h, having the guide-eye h' se 
cured to its upper end, the bracket B being 
held between the shoulder on the screw-pin 
and the sleeveg, as is clearly shown in Fig. 2. 
The bracket can swing around the screw-pin 
h, and, if desired, can be firmly held by screw 
ing down the pin h, so as to bear more tightly 
on the bracket. 
25 
35 
DANIEL L. WILCOX. 
Witnesses: 
J. A. MILLER, Jr., 
WM. C. COLT, 
So 
55 
65 
The knitting-pins i i are formed, as shown 
in Fig. 3, of two wings placed at an angle and 
curved at their edges to support the yarn and 
allow the knitting-hook to pass behind the 
yarn, and in the act of raising the lower yarn 
to press the upper yarn into the angle formed 
by the two Wings lic le. By this construction 
the raising of the lower yarn over the upper 
yarn and over the pins is much facilitated. 
By this construction the whole forms an at 
tractive and convenient machine. The knit 
ting-spool is supported on the standard and 
can be swung into any desired position. The 
yarny, held in the central guide, h', is not in 
the way of the work and cannot become en 
tangled. Two or more knitting-spools of dif. 
ferent diameters can be supported on one stand 
ard and a variety of work done on the ma 
chine. 
When the machine is to be used it is clamped 
to a table, the ball of silk or worsted is placed 
on the table, one end is passed through the 
guide l', as shown in the drawings, and then 
to commence the work the yarn is wound once 
around each one of the pins ii, and the end is 
dropped through the center of the knitter in the 
same manner as in using the ordinary straight 
pin spool-knitter. The knitter is now revolved 
and the lower yarn passed over the upper and 
over the pins into the center in a manner 
known to children who understand how to use 
spool-knitters. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
A spool-knitter consisting of the standard 
A, the shouldered screw-pin h, provided with 
the guide l', and the bracket B, arranged to 
turn on the standard or be confined, as de 
sired, and carrying a knitting-spool at each 
end, substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto affixed 
my name. 
75 
85 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246749.txt	(Model.) 
I, GERARD & P. TREMBLAY, 
No. 246,749, 
 
WASHING MACHINE, 
Patented Sept. 6, 1881, 
I 
fill 
zt"Hur ISI 
it 
7 
6-cy-vee- 
a 1.3 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithagrapher, Waslinsion, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISIDORE GERARD AND PETER TREMBLAY, OF NEWTON, KANSAS, 
WASHING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,749, dated September 6, 1881. 
Application filed March 15, 1881. (Model.) 
S 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ISIDORE GERARD and 
PETER TREMBLAY, of Newton, in the county 
of Harvey and State of Kansas, have invented 
a new Improvement in Washing-Machines, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The object of our invention is to provide an 
improved washing-machine which is simple in 
construction and convenient and effective in 
Se. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of our invention with the cover 
removed, and Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section 
of the same, taken on linea: a of Fig. 1. 
A represents the body or water-reservoir of 
the machine, which is rectangular in form and 
supported upon suitable legs, BB, at each cor 
ner, Journaled in the boxes C C, formed on 
the side boards of the reservoir A, is the shaft 
D, which carries the cylinder E, which latter 
is formed of the circular end disks, FF, and 
the rollers.ff, which are loosely pivoted to and 
between the disks at equal distances from the 
centers thereof, as shown. The circular disks 
are tied together within the series of rollers 
on opposite sides of the shaft by the bars e. e. 
The ends of the shaft D are provided with the 
cranks G G, through which motion is imparted 
to the cylinder E by means of the foot-levers 
H, which are pivoted ath h to the rear legs of 
the machine, near the floor, and connected to 
the cranks by the pitmen J J, and connected 
together in front of the machine by the foot 
board K, and one end of the shaft is provided, 
also, with the fly-wheel L. 
The wash-board is formed of the bent bars 
in n, which are hinged to pieces n' n' at the 
front of the reservoir, and the board N, which 
is screwed or otherwise secured to the bent 
bars in such manner as to form a concave por 
tion, N, immediately under the cylinder. The 
25 
35 
55 
wash-board is vertically adjustable by means 
of the rocking bar or shaft P, which is jour 
naled in the sides of the reservoir in rear of 45 
the cylinder and attached to the cross-bar d 
of the wash-board by the lhorizontal arm p and 
hooked connecting-like. The shaft Pis moved 
to adjust the board by means of the vertical 
arm p' and the operating-rod R, which is piv. 
oted to the armp', and extends to the front of 
the machine, and is provided near the front 
end with the offsets, which engages with the 
notched rack T, secured to the side of the res 
ervoir. By this means the adjustment of the 
board is under the instant control of the per 
son using the machine, and can be adjusted 
with every variation in size of the garments 
or articles being Washed. 
The top of the reservoir is covered with the 
removable cover S, which prevents the water 
in the reservoir being splashed out, and it is 
provided with the hinged door W near the 
rear end, as shown. 
Though we have described our invention as 
being operated by foot-power, it is obvious 
that it night be operated by steam or horse 
power, in which case suitable pulleys would 
be attached to the shaft D and the foot-oper 
ating mechanism would be dispensed with. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The combination, with a pivoted bed of a 
washing-machine, of the rocking bar P, the 
cross-bar d, the arms p p', the hook-link e, and 
the rod R, pivoted to said arm p', whereby the 
pivoted bed may be readily adjusted by the op 
erator, as described. 
75 
ISDORE GERARD. 
PETER TREMBLAY. 
Witnesses: 
FELIX P. SWEMBERGH, 
FRANK ZURCHER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246849.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 246,849, 
E. WILLIAMS, 
SHOWER BATH ATTACHMENT, 
Patented Sept, 6, 1881. 
 
WITNESSES: 
0%-- We/624. 
-6 ever 
INVENTOR: 
6.7% 
BY www. f6 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD WILLIAMS, OF GRIFFIN, GEORGIA. 
SHOWER-BATH ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,849, dated September 6, 1881. 
Application filed June 13, 1881. 
(No model.) 
Be it known that I, EDWARD WILLIAMS, of centrally over the tub A. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Griffin, in the county of Spalding and State of 
Georgia, have invented a new and Improved 
Shower-Bath Attachment, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
convenient portable showering device to be 
applied to any Washing or bathing tub. 
The invention consists of a pump provided 
with a clamp for securing it to the edge of the 
tub, and of a perforated pain or sprinkler and 
an upright pipe connecting the same with the 
pump, SO that a person standing in the tub 
can operate the pump to force water up into 
the sprinkler, whence it will fall upon the op 
erator. 
The drawing represents a perspective eleva 
tion of the device applied to a tub. 
In the drawing, A represents a tub for con 
taining the water. B represents the pump, 
provided with a clamp, C, by means of which 
and a set-screw, D, passing through said clamp 
C, the pump B is secured in an upright posi 
tion to the edge of the tub A, as shown. B' 
is the pump-handle. The connecting-pipe E 
projects laterally about two inches from the 
pump-barrel B, and then is carried vertically 
upward to about twelve or fifteen inches above 
the head of a person standing in the tub A. 
and then is bent at a right angle, and carries 
IO 
25 
on its end a perforated pan or sprinkler, F, 
The operator standing in the tub A, by grasp 
ing the pump-handle B' and moving it up and 
down, will force water from said tub. A up 
through the pipe E into the sprinkler F, whence 
said water will shower on the said operator. 
This device is easy to transport and to ap 
ply, and can be used in any room without in 
convenience. 
I am aware of the English Patent No. 9,747 
of 1843, which shows a force-pump adapted to 
be supported upon a platform in the bottom 
of a tub; and I am also aware of the patent 
of Dodge, No. 195,105, which shows a clamp 
composed of a U-shaped bar, through one arm 
of which passes a thumb-screw, and I there 
fore do not claim such; but 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
As an article of manufacture, the force-pump 
B, provided with the pipe E, the sprinkler F, 
and the clamp C, consisting of a horizontal 
arm having two downwardly-projecting lugs, 
and the set-screw D, whereby the pump is 
adapted to be attached to a tub, Substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
EDWARD WILLIAMS, 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
Witnesses: 
R. F. M. MANN, 
H. B. WHITE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US246950.txt	(No Model.) 
A. H.A.R. CUM. 
No. 246,950, 
ADJUSTABLE CAP FOR LAMP CHIMNEYS, 
Pate inted Sept. 13, 1881. 
2E72 
 
es 
s S 
s 
s S 
S 
N 
N 
N 
R N N 
N 
N 
N 
 
 
a ser 
g 
. Peters. Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ANDREW HARCUM, OF SCOTT TOWNSEIIP, ALLEGHENY COUNTY, ASSIGNOR 
TO HIMSELF AND JAMES L. IRWIN, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ADJUSTABLE CAP FOR LAMP. CHMNEYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 246,950, dated September 18, 1881. 
Application filed May 5, 1881. (No model.) 
Io specification, in which 
2O in each. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW EIARCUM, of 
Scott township, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
5 and useful Improvement in Adjustable Caps 
for Lamp-Climneys; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription thereof, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of this 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved lamp 
chimney and cap. Fig.2 is a longitudinal sec 
tion of the same, showing the cap inverted in 
the chimney. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of 
I5 the cap. Fig. 4 is a top view of an oval cap 
adapted for use, with an oval or flat chimney, 
and Fig, 5 is a perspective view of another form 
Of Cap). 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the chimneys used With lamps for 
burning refined petroleum and other hydro 
carbon oils; and its object is to provide a means 
25 whereby a short straight chimney may be used 
in burning these oils, and to guard the flame 
against the outer currents of air, as well as to 
arrange the ordinary lamp for heating purposes. 
My invention consists in a glass lamp-chim 
3o ney having Straight or approximately-straight 
sides, in combination with a removable metal 
lic ring or cap fitting on top of the chimney, 
and provided with a large Central opening, 
and a series of perforations or slots around Said 
35 opening to regulate the draft of the chimney, 
and to prevent the passage of any outer air 
current down the chimney to cause the flicker 
ing or extinguishment of the flame, said cap 
being reversible and provided with lips to se 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe its con 
struction and operation. 
In the drawings, A represents the lamp 
45 burner, which is of any desired construction, 
the one shown being the usual Sun-burler with 
a flat wick. The burner is arranged on a lamp 
and the flame regulated in the usual manner. 
The chimney B is formed of a straight cyl 
So inder of glass, being, when round in cross 
4o cure it to the chimney in either position. 
6o 
Section, of the same diameter throughout, or 
at least of such construction from the burner 
to the top, and secured to the burner in any 
desired manner. As its sides are straight the 
glass is of the same thickness throughout, and 55 
is consequently affected by the heatin the same 
manner at all points, thus overcoming in a great 
measure the liability to break on account of 
the unequal expansion and contraction of the 
parts. 
C is my improved ring or cap, this cap being 
formed of sheet brass, tin, or other suitable 
metal, and having a large central opening, c, 
through which the greater portion of the draft 
and products of combustion pass, and the se. 65 
ries of smaller openings d between the central 
opening and the rim of the cap to aid in carry 
ing of the draft. These openings d may either 
be made in the form of perforations, as shown 
in Figs. 1 to 4, or in the form of slits extend- to 
ing in from the rim, as shown in Fig. 5. The 
cap is secured to the top of the chimney by 
means of the spring-lipse, formed around the 
rim, the lips being generally made in the form 
of serrations, as shown, to give the cap a strong 75 
hold on the chimney and impart a neat finish 
to its edge. 
The cap is generally made oval in cross-sec 
tion, to add to its appearance on the top of the 
chimney, though a straight cap or even a de- 8o 
pressed cap serves well to guard the lamp-flame 
from outer air-currents. Some of the serra 
tions around the cap are formed long, and 
turned over so as to extend upward above the 
edge of the cap, as at f, these lips serving to 85 
secure the cap upon the chimney in an inverted 
position, and thus form a rest for a cup or like 
small vessel, when it is desired to use the lamp 
for heating purposes. In this case the cap is 
secured upon the chimney by the lips f, and the go 
cup or other vessel supported on the lipse, the 
draft of the lamp passing out between the lips. 
The operation of my improved lamp-chimney 
is as follows: The draft supplying air to the 
flame passes up under the burner in the usual 95 
way. After passing the flame it is carried tap 
ward and passes out through the central Open 
ing and perforations or slits d, the greater por 
tion of the draft and products of combustion 
passing out through the central opening, but Ioo 
2 
246,950 
a portion passing out through the perforations 
or slits around it, so as to secure an even up 
ward draft throughoutthewholechimney-space, 
and consequently an even-burning flame. The 
burning flame also causes an upward draft, 
which draws in all around the burner, and next 
to the chimney-walls a thin film or current of 
cold air, which does not approach the flame, 
and, on account of the perforations or slots in 
the cap, passes out around the edge of the 
chimney without being highly heated, and this 
surrounding film or current prevents the flame 
when turned high from coming in contact with 
the chimney and cracking it. Where also the 
flame of the lamp is turned high, instead of 
striking the contracted top of the chimney and 
causing it to crack from the sudden heat the 
flame comes in contact with the cap and has 
no injurious effect upon it. The perforated or 
slotted cap, while in no way impairing the draft 
through the chimney, forms also a very effect 
ive guard against side and downward currents 
or drafts of air, and prevents their passage 
down the chimney and the consequent flicker 
ing or extinguishment of the flame. It thus 
causes the flame to burn evenly, where with the 
ordinary chimney it would be so uneven as to 
prevent reading, and consequently enables me 
to use a wide chimney and obtain a wider flame, 
and to shorten the length of the chimney with 
out fear of its being affected by the outer air 
currents. 
Where it is desired to use the lamp for heat 
ing purposes the cap may be inverted, as 
above described, and in that position serves 
to guard equally well against outer air-cur 
rents and impart an even draft for the flame, 
and the chimney, being a strong straight cylin 
der, will sustain a heavier weight. 
Od 
25 
35 
Where it is desired to use a wide flat burner 
to obtain a broad flame the chimney may either 
beformed oval in cross-section throughout and 
fit an oval seat on the burner, or it may be 
formed circular below the burner and flat above 
it, the sides in both cases being straight from 
the burner to the top, and an oval perforated 
or slotted cap, as shown in Fig. 4, being em 
ployed with the chimney. 
The caps can be rapidly and cheaply formed 
by stamping in dies, and the chimneys blown 
in wooden or other molds to the exact size, so 
that any cap will fit them, both parts being in 
terchangeable, and being cheaply made. As 
the chimney-walls are of the same thickness 
throughout, they are stronger and more dura. 
ble than the common lamp-chimney. Being 
short and broad, they are also very easily 
cleaned-an advantage appreciated by all users 
of oil. They also present a very neat appear 
ance, the cap imparting a fine finish to the 
chimney. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Iuetters Patent, is 
In combination with the lamp-chimney B, 
the reversible cap C, provided with the central 
opening, c, surrounding perforations or slits d 
and lips ef, for securing the cap on the chim 
ney in either position, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I, the said ANDREW 
HARCUM, have hereunto set my hand. 
45 
55 
65 
ANDREW HARCUM. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES II. IRWIN, 
JAMES I. KAY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247050.txt	L. M. HAM, 
HANGER FOR SUSPENDING BEAMS, 
Patented Sept. 13, 1881. 
(No Model.) 
No. 247,050. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEMUEL M. HAM, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
HANGER FOR SUSPENDING B E AMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,050, dated September 13, 1881. 
Application filed April 25, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LEMUELM.HAM, of Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of Massa 
chusetts, a citizen of the United States, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Hangers for Suspending Beams, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and accu 
rate description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of this 
specificationinexplaining its nature,in which 
Figurelis a perspective view of my improved 
hanger. Fig. 2 is also a view in perspective 
of the hanger, with the step detached and re 
versed. Fig. 3 is a perspective of the old form 
of hanger. Fig. 4 represents my hanger. Fig. 
5 is a vertical section further illustrating the 
method of using my invention. Fig. 6 repre 
sents still another view of my invention, and 
Fig. 7 a modification, which will be hereinaf. 
ter more fully described. Fig. 8 is a front ele 
vation of the old form of hanger shown in Fig. 
3. Fig. 9 is a perspective view of the shoe. 
This invention has for its object the within 
described hanger or stirrup for suspending 
beams, joists, &c. 
Heretofore it has been common to make 
hangers for this purpose of flat iron, shaped 
substantially as shown in Fig. 3 and twisted 
at some point of its length, so that the under 
portion shall have its widest part in a horizon 
tal plane, or substantially horizontal, and the 
upper portion, or that which rests upon the 
cross-beam or support, shall also have the wid 
est portion in a horizontal plane. To accom 
plish this it is necessary that there be a twist in 
each arm of the hanger at some point between 
the lower and the upper ends. This construc 
tion of hanger is objectionable for two rea 
sons: first, it is comparatively expensive, and, 
second, it cannot be used in its most perfect 
way without an additional bolt and nut or tie 
of some description for fastening the end of 
the suspended beam to the beam or support 
from which it is suspended. Without such a 
45 tie there is always a liability of the suspended 
beam drawing away from the supporting-beam 
or other support. 
I overcome these objections by making my 
hanger or stirrup of round or square iron in 
5o the first instance, and by, shaping it substan 
tially as represented in the second instance, 
35 
55 
whereby the beam, when suspended thereon, is 
always drawn toward the sustaining beam or 
support and never tends to swing from it, 
thereby insuring a safe construction and avoid 
ing the necessity of using an additional bolt and 
mut or other device for locking the abutting 
end of the suspended beam to the supporting 
beam or other support. 
I can practice my invention in any of the 
Ways in which it is shown in the drawings; but 
whichever form is used it is desirable generally 
to employ a shoe having a long and wide bear 
ing-surface between the bottom of the hanger 
and the supported beam, and upon which the 
beam shall rest, thereby providing a much 
greater bearing for the beam than is obtained 
by the flat iron hanger and preventing the 
round iron from sinking into the beam, as it 
otherwise might, 
A represents the support or supporting-beam. 
A' is the suspended beam, and A* the hanger 
or stirrup. 
The hanger consists of the vertical armsa and 
a horizontal portion, af, either with or without 
the ends a. The lower ends of the arms at are 
bent so as to be slightly inclined in relation to 
the vertical parts, substantially as shown, pref. 
erably at a point higher than midway of their 
length, so that when the hanger is in position 
upon the beam from which it is suspended the 
upper portion is vertical and the lower partis 
inclined away from the beam, the lower end 
being entirely removed from it. This construc 
tion causes the hanger to act to draw the sus 
pended beam toward the supporting-beam with 
a continuous strain, thereby serving to lock the 
two beams together as well as in suspending one. 
The hanger may be in one piece, as shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6, in which case the 
lower connecting portion, a, supports the shoe 
B, which preferably is grooved upon its un 
der surface and sides to fit that section; or the 
arms may have screw-threads c at their lower 
ends, substantially as shown in Fig. 7, in which 95 
case the shoe is fastened thereto by means of 
the ends c', the ends of the arms extending 
through holes, in the shoe, as represented. 
This form of construction provides for the 
adjustment of the size of the hanger to beams loo 
of varying thicknesses, and is of considerable 
value for that purpose, as beams very often 
75 
 
247,050 
or curved from a vertical line, substantially as 
shown, and for the purposes described. 
2. A metallic hanger consisting of the par 
allel arms a, the parallel horizontal extensions 
a', and the shoe B, all substantially as described. 
3. The combination, in a metallic hanger, of 
the parallel arms at and the parallel extensions, 
the shoe B, and means for adjusting the shoe 
Vertically upon the arms at, all substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
4. As a means of suspending one beam or 
joist from another beam or other support, a 
metallic hanger having its lower portion bent 
outwardly from the supporting-beam or other 
Support, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
5. The shoe B, formed as an angle-iron at 
its rear end, substantially as described. 
LEMUEL. M. HAM. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
- 
F. F. RAYMOND, 2d, 
W. C. FOGG. 
O 
vary from one-sixteenth to one thirty-second 
of an inch to an inch in thickness, and by mov. 
ing the ends the shoe can be raised or lowered 
upon the arms, as the case may require. 
I prefer to make the hanger of round iron; 
but of course iron of any other section may be 
used without departing from the spirit of my 
invention. 
Of course, these hangers may be made double, 
one on each side of the beam, forming What is 
technically termed a  saddle,' instead of a 
stirrup, as the single hanger is called. 
By making the step or sleeve as an angle 
iron, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6, a somewhat 
firmer bearing is obtained, and if a counter 
sunk hole (shown at b) be made, the shoe can 
be tacked to the joist before it is hoisted to 
place, and thus the work facilitated. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. A metallic hanger having the arms a bent 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247150.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 247,150, 
E. R. BEACH, 
LAMP WICK. 
Patented Sept. 20, 188l. 
 
 
-- 
t s 
N 
 
 
 
4-cal 
%.7%.2e2. 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN R. BEACH, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
2 
LAMP-W CK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,150, dated September 20, 1881. 
Application filed July 27, 1881. 
(No model.) 
S 
O 
5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN R. BEACI, of 
Jersey City, Hudson county, New Jersey, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Lamp-Wicks, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My improvement aims to increase the sup 
ply of oil to the flame; and it relates to that 
class of devices which employ a secondary 
wick additional or auxiliary to the flame-wick 
to bear against the latter and convey a greater 
capillary feed of oil thereto. 
Several devices of this class have been 
heretofore presented; but in most cases the 
burner is specially formed with some addi. 
tional construction or attachment to receive 
the additional wicks. In one case an endless 
wick traveling over rollers and pressing against 
the flame-wick as the same is moved by the 
wick - adjuster has been employed. In an 
other case an auxiliary wick is attached to the 
burner or to the flame-wick at the base of the 
wick-tube and on either side of the flame 
wick. In all of these cases, however, the con 
structions are comparatively complex, and 
burners of special forms are required or double 
or triple wicks are used. 
My improvement is distinct, in that it lies 
entirely in a single wick itself, and is adapted 
for direct use in any ordinary burner, and is 
at the same time very simple, inexpensive, 
and efficient, and thus marks a material im 
provement in this line. 
My invention may therefore be briefly stated 
to consist in constructing the wick in the form 
of a loop or slip-noose, with the traveling or 
flame end passing through a knot or slot in 
the opposite or stationary end, which knot lies 
at the base of the wick-tube, while the loop or 
noose hangs in the oil, as hereinafter fully set 
forth. 
Figure 1 of the annexed drawings presents 
an elevation of my improved form of wick as 
it appears in the lamp, which is shown in sec 
tion; and Fig. 2 presents a plan view of my 
preferred form of wick spread out lengthwise. 
The wick may be made of any of the usual 
or suitable fabrics, either from felt or from a 
woven cotton web, preferably the latter. 
Referring now to Figs. 1 and 2, the wick is 
formed in about the usual manner from the 
flame end throughout its main length, being 
made, however, much longer than ordinary 
wicks or more than twice the usual length; 
and at the end opposite to the flame end the 
wick is formed with a slot, clasp, or any other 
device which will admit of passing the flame 
end of the wick therethrough, in the manner 
of a slip-noose, as shown in Fig. 1. When 
the wick is thus doubled or looped upon it 
self, as seen in Fig.1, the flame end being drawn 
through the slotted end for a short distance, the 
projecting portion thus drawn out is then 
passed through the wick-tube, while the knot 
ted or slotted end at the opposite extremity 
of the wick rests against the base of the wick 
tube, and the loop or noose hangs in the oil, 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
Hence two branches of 
wick, a b, supply the flame, and the flame 
branch a is free to be moved through the slot 
or knot of the auxiliary supply-branch b as 
the wick elevators or ratchets draw on the 
same to raise the wick as it becomes burned 
away or as the adjustments of the flame re 
quire, while the entire looped wick is of course 
free to descend in the oil when depressed by 
the ratchets in the usual manner. 
It will hence be seen that this construction 
is peculiarly simple and efficient, for the wick 
is complete in itself and is adapted for direct 
use in any ordinary burner, while it insures 
nearly double the supply. of oil to the flame, 
rendering the same more bright and steady, 
and preventing to a great extent the sudden 
decrease in its brilliancy due to the regular 
descent of the oil. 
At the same time the cost 
of the improved wick is nothing, or almost 
nothing, more than that of the common wick, 
thus presenting an obvious improvement. 
In case of a woven cotton wick, I prefer to 
form the slot 0 in the act of weaving and ar 
range it transversely, as shown in Fig. 2; but 
it may be arranged longitudinally, as indi 
cated in dotted lines. In case of a felt wick, 
the slot may be cut therein, and preferably in 
a longitudinal direction. 
My improved wick is, of course, equally 
adapted for stoves as for lamps or other simi. 
lar purposes. 
What I claim is 
1. Alamp-wick having one extremity forme 
with a slot, loop, or slip-knot, with the other 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
2 
or flame extremity passed through the same, wick, substantially as and for the purpose set 
whereby the entire wick forms a simple single forth. 
slip-noose, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a wick 
or wicking formed with a slot or loop at one 
end, adapted to admit the opposite end of the 
CHAs. M. HIGGINs, 
JNO. E. GAWIN. 
Witnesses: 
5 
24, 50 
EDWIN, R. BEACH 
.7, 
w 
- 
& 
! 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247250.txt	(Model.) 
J. L. HALL, 
ANGLE BAR FOR PERMUTATION LOCKS, 
No. 247,250. 
Patented Sept. 20, 1881, 
 
 
I NY S. 
s Ti, 
R2 s 
S2122, 
9) 
I 
an 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH Li, HALL OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
ANGLE-BAR FOR PERMUTATION-LOCKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,250, dated September 20, 1881. 
Application filed May 31, 1881. (Model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSEPEI L. HALL, of 
Cincinnati, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Combination Locks, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to permutation-locks 
designed more especially for use in connection 
with time attachments, though the invention 
may, if desired, be applied to permutation 
locks which are to be used separately or in the 
usual manner; and the invention consists in 
providing the angle-bar with a series of ad 
justable pins or projections, which can be ad 
justed or arranged in various positions, and 
which will enter the notches of the rotating 
tumblers when said notches are not arranged 
in line with each other, as hereinafter more 
fully described. 
Figure 1 is a face view of the lock with the 
back plate removed. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view of the angle-bar detached; and Fig. 3 is 
a rear-face view of the same, showing the cam 
or projection on which the disk operates to 
release the dogging-latch or the time attach 
ment, as the case may be. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 
represent modifications of the projections used 
on the angle-bar. 
In the drawings I have represented my in 
vention as applied to an ordinary permutation 
lock, as that will suffice to illustrate the inven 
tion fully. 
In Fig. 1, A represents the case, and B the 
bolt of the lock, while T indicates the tum 
blers and Lthe dogging-latch, which is provided 
with the usual hook or shoulder, n, to engage 
with the hook J of the spindle-disk to with 
draw the bolt, as is usual in this class of locks, 
these parts being made in the usual manner. 
The angle-bar C is made as shown in Fig. 
2-that is, with a laterally-projecting arm, b, 
which is provided with a series of holes in 
which are fitted a number of screws, pins, or 
studs, e, corresponding in number with the 
tumblers used in the lock. The holes, it will 
be observed, are more numerous than the pins 
or studs, and are so arranged that the pins or 
studs e may be set to form irregular rows or 
parts of rows, so as to compel the setting of 
the tumblers in such a position that their 
notches shall not be in a right line in order to 
- 
have the pins or studs enter the notches of the 
tumblers. By this construction it will be seen 
that not only will the notches of the tumblers 
be made to occupy different positions in rela 
tion to each other, but also that by changing 
the position of the pins or studs e on the arm 
b the combination on which the lock can be 
opened will also be changed, thus imparting 
to the lock an additional capacity and security. 
While I have shown but two rows of holes 
for adjusting the pins, it is obvious that by 
making the arm b wider a much greater num 
ber of holes may be provided, and thus a 
greater number of changes or combinations 
be effected by means of the adjustable pins 
on the angle-bar; and as these changes are en 
tirely independent of those which are usually 
produced by adjusting the tumblers on their 
hubs, it follows, necessarily, that a lock con 
structed on this plan will be susceptible of a 
much greater number of changes or combina 
tions than is the ordinary permutation-lock. 
having the same number of tumblers. So, 
too, it will be seen that by this construction a 
given number of changes or combinations can 
be produced with a less number of tumblers 
than in the ordinary locks of this class. 
In this case I have shown the angle-bar C 
as being pivoted below the tumblers instead 
of above them, as is usual; but that is simply 
because it is so located for convenience when 
the lock is to be provided with two separate 
angle-bars, both operating in connection with 
the same set of tumblers, as described and ill 
lustrated in the Patent No. 212,610, granted 
to Kook and Hall February 25, 1879. This lo 
cation of the angle-bar is also more convenient 
when the lock is to be used in connection with 
a time attachment, as illustrated in said pat 
ent, and for which purpose this lock is more 
especially designed. It is, however, obvious 
that when it is desired to make a lock on this 
plan to be used separately as ordinary permu 
tation-locks are used, the angle-bar C may be 
located above the tumblers in the usual man 
ner, in which case the connecting-bart may be 
omitted, as in that case the angle-bar and the 
dogging-latch I will be connected in the usual 
manner. When, however, it is desired to use 
this lock in connection with a time attachment 
for the purpose of disconnecting the latter in 
S 
d 
25 
35 
45 
So 
9o 
IOO 
24,250 
case of accident or stoppage, then the bar l 
will be made to extend up or down through an 
opening in the case, as indicated by the dot 
ted lines in Fig. 1, to any distance required to 
form a suitable connection with the time at 
tachment, one form of such connection being 
shown in Patent No. 212,610, hereinbeforemen 
tioned. 
The projection o (shown in Fig. 3) is de 
signed to operate in connection with a cam 
groove made in the face of the spindle-disk 
for operating the angle-bar C in the same man 
ner as that described in Patent No. 212,610; 
but this, of course, will not be required in 
those cases where the angle-bar C is located 
above the tumblers in the ordinary manner, 
and is used without the addition of a second 
angle-bar. 
With reference to the pins or projections e, 
I would further remark that instead of using 
a series of separate pins a single detachable 
lug or projection, f, may be substituted, as 
shown in Figs. 4, 5, and 6, it being arranged 
to be detached and to have its position changed 
or reversed, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6. This 
IO 
IS 
25 
3O - 
is but a modification of the plan shown in Fig. 
2, and is not preferred, because it is not capa 
ble of as great a variety of changes or adjust 
ments, and is only added for the purpose of 
more fully illustrating my invention. 
I am aware that a lock has been patented in 
which a series of tongues or projections are 
attached rigidly to the sliding bolt of the lock, 
and so arranged or located as to require the 
notches of the tumblers to be brought to dif. 
ferent positions in order to open the lock, and 
therefore I do not claim that; but, 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
What I claim is 
The combination, in a lock, of two or more 
rotating tumblers, with an angle-bar, provided 
with adjustable pins or equivalent device, sub 
stantially as described, whereby the combina 
tion may be changed and the lock opened only 
when the notches of the tumblers are out of 45 
line with each other, as set forth. 
35 
40 
JOSEPEI L. HALL. 
Witnesses: 
W. C. DODGE, 
WALTER. S. DODGE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247350.txt	(No Model.) 
T. HOFSTATTER, Jr. 
SOFA AND LOUNGE, 
No. 247,350, 
Patented Sept. 20, 1881. 
 
 
INVENTOR: 
/ 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
s 
THEODORE HOFSTATTER, JR, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SO FA AND OUNGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,350, dated September 20, 1881. 
Application filed February 10, 1881. (No model.) 
d 
To all chom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THEODOREHOFSTATTER, 
Jr., of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Sofas and Lounges, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to sofas and lounges 
having their head or end portions adjustable 
for varying the inclination. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
such adjustable lounges with simple and dur 
able mechanism, which I accomplish by the use 
of pivoted latch-bars, racks, and cams, com 
bined with a head-frame fitted to swing on the 
main frame of the lounge or sofa. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a vertical longitudinal section of one end of a 
lounge containing my improvements; and Fig. 
2 is a vertical transverse section on line at a 
of Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of leference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
at a are the side rails, and b b the end rails, 
of the main frame. 
A is the adjustable head or end, composed 
of side bars, c c, and outer cross-bar, d. The 
side bars, c, have their lower ends formed to 
enter between the rails at of the main frame, 
and are attached thereto by pins e, so that the 
head may swing from a vertical to a horizontal 
position, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
There may be a similar head at each end of 
the main frame, so that the article shall serve 
with both ends raised as a sofa; or either end 
may be turned down to the horizontal position 
to form a lounge, either right or left hand, as 
required. 
f fare the latch-bars, hung at the inner sides 
of barse by pivot-pins f'. The bars care formed 
with grooved lugs that receive the latch-bars, 
and through these lugs the pivot-pins f" pass. 
gg are curved racks, fixed on side rails, a, 
in position for being engaged by the bent lower 
ends of bars f. 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
75 
h is a shaft, fitted in bars c, across the outer 
part of head A, and carrying cams i i contig 
uous to the tipper ends of latch-bars f. As 
shown, the shaft h passes through latch-bars 
f, but that is not essential. 
lic k are springs, fitted between bars c and 
latches.f, and tending to move the latter into 
engagement with racks g. The cams i are 
shaped to move the upper ends of latch-bars 
f outward when the shaft l is turned. To 
adjust the head A the shaft will be turned to 
disengage the latches from the racks, and the 
head can then be swung on its pivote. Then by 
turning the shaft a quarter-revolution latches 
fare released and engage with racks g. For 
convenience of operating the shaft it is pro 
vided with knobs or handles l. 
This mechanism is of durable character and 
is not liable to get out of order. The lounge 
or sofa will be suitably upholstered, so that 
the adjustable head may move as described, 
and in such manner that when the head is hori 
Zontal it forms an extension of the lounge on 
the same level. This may be readily done. 
The cams may be of different form from those 
shown, and the shaft h placed in a different 
position with relation to the latch. bars. I do 
not limit myself in these particulars. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent-- 
The combination, with the head A, adapted 
to swing on the main frame, of the end-bent. 
spring-held latch. bars f. fulcrumed on the inner 
sides of bars c, the curved racks g, fixed on the 
sides of rails a, and the shafth, carrying cams 
i in contact with the upper ends of said latch 
bars, as and for the purpose specified. 
THEODORE HOFSTATTER, JR, 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS MCARDLE, 
C. SEDGWICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247450.txt	(Model.) 
No. 247,450, 
E. G. WEST 
STOWE PIPE THIMBLE, 
Patented Sept. 20, 188l. 
 
 
WITNESSES 
IWWEWTOE 
N-Attorneys 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELBRIDGE G. WEST, OF CANANDAIGUA, NEW YORK. 
STOVE - PIPE TH MBE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,450, dated September 20, 1881. 
Application filed July 27, 1881. (Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ELBRIDGE. G. WEST, of 
Canandaigua, in the county of Ontario and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Stove-Pipe Thim 
bles; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to stove-pipe thim 
bles, and has for its object to combine simplic 
ity in construction, saving of material, and 
effectiveness against fire or other dangers and 
inconveniences apt to arise when the stove 
pipe comes in direct contact with the wood or 
metallic casing; and to that end it consists in 
certain improvements in the construction and 
arrangement of parts, substantially as will be 
hereinafter more fully described, and particu 
larly pointed out in the claim. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a plan view; Fig. 2, a vertical sectional 
view; and Fig. 3, a horizontal sectional view 
on the line at ac, Fig. 2. 
Corresponding parts in the figures are de 
noted by the same letters of reference. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates a double cylindrical 
casing, constructed of tin, malleable or wrought 
iron, or any suitable material, and composed 
of the outer circular wall, B, and inner circular 
Wall, C, leaving an air-chamber, D, between 
said walls, which are connected by circular top 
and bottom plates, E F, respectively. These 
circular plates are provided with perforations 
G, to allow free circulation of air through the 
air-chamber between the outer and inner walls 
of the casing A, and have their inner edges 
beveled inward, as shown at H, over which 
beveled ends the edges I of the inner wall are 
turned or bent, thus effecting a saving in ma 
terial. 
J J are fluted rings, (which rings may as 
well be corrugated or beaded,) depending by 
means of hangers or brackets a from the plates 
E F inside the inner Wall, C, of the casing, and 
serving to keep the latter in position, against 
Which rings the stove-pipe Krests when it is 
inserted through the thimble, thus also leav 
ing an air space or passage between the stove 
pipe and inner casing, and keeping the former 
from direct contact with the latter. 
o 
20 
25 
45 
SO 
SS 
By reference to the foregoing description, 
taken in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, the advantages and uses of my in 
Vention will be readily understood. 
In cases where it is desired to pass a stove 
pipe through the ceiling of a room to the floor 
above my invention will be found especially 
useful. Heretofore in such cases, owing to de 
fects in the arrangement and construction of 
the thimbles, the wood-work has frequently 
caughtfire from the heatin parted by the stove. 
pipe to the casing and from thence to the wood; 
but my invention obviates all liability of such 
accidents, there being two air-passages between 
the stove-pipe and wood-one between the 
stove pipe and inner wall of the casing, formed 
by the interposed fluted, corrugated, or beaded 
ring, and the other between the inner and 
outer walls of the casing, by means of the per 
forations in the top and bottom thereof. . 
The depending ring may be dispensed with 
altogether at one end of the thimble, as may 
also the circular bottom plate of the casing, 
without materially affecting the nature of my 
invention. And my improved thimble will be 
found to be very effective in its objects, and at 
the same time inexpensive, durable, and sim. 
ple. 
I am aware that a fluted ring is old in com 
bination with a stove-pipe thimble, as shown 
in the patent to Woodruff, No. 106,528. I am 
also aware of the patents to Brooks, No.38,727; 
Pierce and Smith, No. 109,838; Harris, No. 
71,300, and Buttles, No. 131,846; and I claim 
nothing therein shown; but, 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
As an improvement in stove-pipe thimbles, 
the combination, with the herein - described 
double drum or casing, of a fluted ring sus 
pended detachably between the said double 
drum and the stove-pipe, substantially as 
herein described, for the purpose shown and 
specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have lhereto affixed my signature in 
presence of three witnesses. 
ELBRIDGE G. WEST. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN S. CoE, 
WILL.W. KENFIELD, 
A. S. COOLEY. 
6o 
65 
7o 
75 
95 
Oo 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247550.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 247,550. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
W, P. FEST. 
CARRIAGE TOP, 
Patented Sept. 27, 188l. 
zgg. A. 
4, 1842 
Air A. 2Z 
- 2a. Co 
4.Y-zzle 4 
 
(No Model.) 
m 
No. 247,550, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W, P. FEST. 
CARRIAGE TOP, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1881. 
Z72222 e is use us, 
Afs%ry 
4. 
: 
g 
Z2a2-e2-2227. 
22e. 
77%. 374 Z. 
V%.ocre 46-, a 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM P. FEST, OF SOUTH BEND, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO THE STUDE. 
BAKER BROS. MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CARRAGE-TOP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,550, dated September 27, 1881. 
Application filed July 26, 1881. (No model.) 
15 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMP. FEST, a citi. 
zen of the United States, residing at South 
Bend, in the county of St. Joseph and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Carriage - Tops; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters or figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form apart of this specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
canopy-tops for vehicles; and its objects, are 
to dispense with a certain top joint, usually 
necessary in bowed vehicle - tops, to facilitate 
the spreading and stretching of the top, and to 
construct a top of great lightness and strength. 
I attain these objects by the means illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 presents a side view, in elevation, 
of a carriage-top, showing, in connection there 
with, the improvements, and, by dotted lines, 
the operation of the false bow and the position 
and appearance of top when collapsed. Fig.2 
shows arear elevation of the top, with the same 
partly lowered. 
A represents the seat or body, to which the 
bows B C are hung by a common joint, d, in 
the usual or other convenient manner. The 
bows B C are also pivoted at ee to a semi-top 
frame composed of two transverse bows, E. E. 
These two parts of the said frame are united at 
35 the center of the top at f, and also at the same 
point are pivoted the supplementary or false 
bow G and the jointed upright brace H. The 
ends of the said false bow G, bent at right 
angles there with, form the pivots on which the 
4o two parts of the frame EE, sleeve K, and brace 
Hare hung, as shown in Fig. 2, and by which 
construction the united parts are free to turn 
independently of each other or together. 
The false bow G constitutes the center of 
45 the arrangement of bows, and the semi-trans 
25 
 
verse frames E. E. collapse upon it, together 
with the bows B and C, when the top is folded 
together. The bow G always preserves its 
relative position to the common joint?, thereby 
insuring an equal and uniform draw or exten- 5o 
sion to the material with which the top is 
trimmed. 
By uniting the jointed brace H with the other 
parts at f, as described, one or more additional 
top joints, generally employed on bowed ve- 55 
hicle - tops, and usually located on the trans 
verse bow between the front and the back bow, 
are dispensed with. 
By my construction, as may be readily seen 
the top-drop may be wholly or partly collapsed 6o 
and the same spread and stretched, as desired, 
in the most satisfactory manner. 
The upright bows BC, the frames E. E., and 
false bow G may be made of wood or metal, 
and when of metal the said frames and bow 65 
may be made tubular, as of gas-pipe, whereby 
great strength and lightness will be gained. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A canopy - top for vehicles, consisting of 
the combination of bows, jointed side braces, a 
semi-top frame, and a false bow, the said frame, 
false bow, and jointed braces being pivoted at 
a common center, substantially as described. 75 
2. A canopy-top for vehicles, provided with 
a false bow pivoted to a semi-top frame, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a vehicle-body, of 
bows BC, jointed brace H, top-frame EE, and 
false bow G, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the semi-top frame, 
false bow, andjointed side braces, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
7 o 
WILLIAM P. FEST. 
Witnesses: 
W. MACK, 
A, H. KELLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247651.txt	(Model.) 
O, JENKINS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 
REPEATING APPARATUS FOR CLOCKS AND WATCHES, 
No. 247,65l. 
Patented Sept. 27, 1881. 
 
o SS6S, 
'3; 
Azave 72 ?on 
2-6-6-2 
(Model.) 
0, JENKINS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
REPEATING APPARATUS FOR CLOCKS AND WATCHES, 
No. 247,65l. 
Patented Sept. 27, 1881, 
 
St. (.4. 
2 
(Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
O. ENKNS. 
REPEATING APPARATUS FOR CLOCKS AND WATCHES, 
No. 247,651, 
7. 
Patented Sept. 27, 188l. 
A3 
z fa 
Sl 
Widze gases, 
- 17C//e/e/or 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
& 
OSMORE JENKINS, OF MELROSE, MASSACEUSETTS. 
REPEATING APPARATUS FOR CLOCKS AND WATCHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,651, dated September 27, 1881. 
Application filed May 23, 1881. (Model.) 
I5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, OSMORE JENKINS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Melrose, 
in the county of Middlesex and State of Massa. 
5 chusetts, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Striking Apparatus for 
Clocks or Watches; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
lo Others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
or figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to spring - balance 
Watches or clocks, and is designed to indicate 
by strokes of a bell the hours and fractions of 
an hour; and it consists in certain details of 
mechanism, as hereinafter explained. 
2O The drawings accompanying this specifica 
tion represent, in Figure 1, a front view of a 
clock containing my improvements, the outer 
case and the dial being removed. Fig.2 rep 
resents a rear elevation of the same. Fig. 3 
25 represents a side elevation of the same. Fig. 
4 in such drawings is a section through the 
hands, arbor, and the parts immediately adja 
cent thereto. Fig. 5 is a section through the 
mechanism for actuating the hour-hand striker. 
3o Fig. 6 is a view of a portion of said mechan 
ism. Fig. 7 is a plan of the minute hand 
striker and its trip mechanism, and Fig. 8 an 
end view of the same. Fig. 9 is a view of the 
ratchet-wheel, the spur-gear, and the pawl of 
In the above-named drawings, A represents 
the body or frame of the clock, the same con 
sisting of a top plate, C, and upright front and 
rear plates, D and E, with cross-bars BB, &c., 
4o the usual mainspring, barrel, and train of driv. 
ing-gears being contained between the plates 
and the escapement. The hands-arbor is shown 
at 0, the minute-hand at b, its supporting-sleeve 
at b', and the hour-hand at c, all the above 
45 parts being arranged in manner similar to 
Spring-balance clocks in general. 
In carrying my improvements into practice 
proceed as follows: 
To the sleeve b' of the minute-hand b, and 
So immediately in front of the front plate, D, of 
the clock, I secure a flat eccentric or snail. 
35 the hour-hand striking mechanism. 
Above and somewhat in advance of the snail 6o 
shaped plate, d, the periphery of which is di 
vided into a series of steps, ee, &c., which are 
practically in the form of ratchet-teeth sloping 
away from the smallest diameter of the plate, 55 
these steps being twelve in number, and serv. 
ing to determine the extent of movement of the 
Sectoral toothed rack which actuates the min 
ute-hand striker, as hereinafter explained. 
d, I secure to a short horizontal arbor, f, which 
is stepped at rear in the plate D, and at front, 
in a bridge, g, secured to such plate, a second 
eccentric or snail plate, F, the periphery of 
which is divided into a series of twelve steps, 65 
a'a, &c., similar to those of the snail d, but . 
sloping in an opposite direction, as for several 
reasons I prefer to reverse the relative posi 
tions of the two snails and allow them to travel 
in opposite directions. The snail F serves to 7o 
determine the extent of movement of the sec 
toral toothed rack which actuates the hour 
hand striker; hence the number of steps of 
this snail should be twelve, to correspond to 
the twelve hours of the dial. 
In rear of the snail F, I secure to the arbor 
if a star toothed wheel, G, the concentric range 
of peripheral teeth of this wheel being twelve 
in number, and operating with a spring-latch, 
g, and serving to lock the hour-hand snail in 8o 
position until the expiration of each hour, as 
hereinafter explained, as I prefer that the ad 
vances of the said snail F shall be by a series 
of sudden impulses from hour to hour rather 
than by a continuous rotation. 
h in the drawings represents a horizontal ar 
bor disposed to one side (the right hand, in the 
present instance) of the hands-arbor, and sup 
ported in bearings in the two plates DE, which 
it spans, this arbor being connected with one go 
end of a volute spring, i, placed in rear of the 
plate D, while the opposite end of such spring 
is secured to such plate, this spring serving as 
a motive power to actuate the mechanism which 
effects the movements of the strikers. 
To the front end of the arborh, as it protrudes 
in front of the plate D, I affix a peripherally 
toothed wheel or pinion, i, and in rear of such 
pinion, and between it and the said plate, I affix 
to the said arbor a wiper-cam or finger, c. . 
H in the drawings represents a spur-gear, 
mounted loosely upon the arbor h in front of 
85 
75 
95 
Ioo 
2 
24,651 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the rear plate, E, while I represents a ratchet 
wheel secured to such arbor h, and operating 
with a spring-impelled pawl, l, pivoted to the 
front of the gear H in such manner that as the 
arbor is rotated in one direction with the in 
tent to wind up its Spring the ratchet slips 
over the pawl l without effect upon the gear 
H, and upon a reverse rotation of the arbor by 
the impulse of its spring the ratchet engages 
the pawl and rotates the said gear by and with 
the arbor. 
To the extreme rear end of the arbor h, in 
rear of the plate E, I affix a wheel, n, the pe 
riphery of which, for about one-half its extent, 
is connected with a range, n, of twelve ratchet 
teeth, oo, &c., corresponding to the steps of the 
hour-hand snail, these teeth operating with a 
spur or tooth, p, erected upon a hub or sleeve, 
q, which is mounted loosely upon a horizontal 
stud, r, projecting rearward from the plate E, 
immediately below the mutilated ratchet-wheel 
on, this tooth p being placed so as to intercept 
Some one or more of the teeth of the ratchet 
during the return or active movement of the 
latter by the impulse of the spring i. A sec 
ond tooth, s, depends from the under side of 
the hub and bears againstallateral pin or tooth, 
t, extending forward from the upper part or 
head of a pendent vibratory bar, t, which is 
pivoted at its upper extremity to the rear end 
of the stud r, this bar carrying at its lower end 
a hammer or striker, , which operates with a 
volute-spring bell, c, properly secured to the 
plate E. 
A plate-spring, ac, is secured at its base to 
the lower part of the plate E, and with its up 
per and free end wiping against the side of the 
tooth Sopposite the pint, while a second spring, 
y, is secured to the plate E, and with its upper 
end bearing against the periphery of the hub 
q, these two springs serving to impel the striker 
toward and against the bell at after each as 
cent of the striker by a tooth of the ratchet in. 
To operate the pinion j to an extent corre 
sponding to the position of the hour-hand snail 
F, I employ a sectoral plate, J, the horizontal 
body portion a? of which is disposed above the 
said snail, and is pivoted at its base to the left 
side of the plate D, as shown at b, while its 
opposite and vertical portion or head c' has a 
rack, d, of peripheral teeth e? e?, &c., which 
engage the teeth of the said pinion j. 
To depress the toothed sector J, and there 
by rotate the pinion i and arbor h in a direc 
tion to wind up the motor-spring i, I employ 
a vertical rod or push-pin, f', wbich plays 
loosely in a bearing rearward to the upper part 
of the plate D, the upper end of this push-pin 
protruding through the top of the outer case 
of the clock, and having a thumb-knob, h. 
The lower end of the push-pin f' bears upon 
the top of the sector J, while depending from 
such lower end of said pin, in front of the sec 
tor, Iform a tooth, i, which operates with some 
one of the steps as of the hour-hand snail F. 
Hence the extent of descent of the push-pin, 
and consequent winding up of the spring i 
and rotation of the ratchet n is determined by 
the distance of such one of the steps a from 
the pivot of the snail as the tooth i' may be in 
contact with. 
The striker of the minute-hand is shown at 
k' as secured to the lower end of a vibratory 
bar, l, which is secured at its upper end to a 
horizontal arbor, n', that spans the parts of 
the plates DE and finds bearings therein, the 
front end of this arbor in having a crank-pin, 
b', protruding through the front of the plate 
ID and bearing against the upper horn or spur, 
n", of a trip plate, 0', which is pivoted to the 
plate D, immediately below said arbor, the horn 
Ol' Spur n' being pressed against the crank-pin 
by a spring, p', secured to said plate. The op 
posite or lower horn or spur, ', of the tripper 
o' operates with some one or more of a range, 
s', of ratchet-teeth tt, &c., cut upon the pe 
riphery of a second sectoral plate, L, which is 
disposed in rear of the sector J, and is pivoted 
at its inner end to the plate D, to one side of 
the minute-hand snail d, as shown at it'. The 
lower end of the sector L has a lateral tooth, 
'', which is kept in contact with the wiper-cam 
k by a spring, c', secured to the plate D, and 
bearing at its free end against the inner end of 
such sector. As the sector J is lowered by the 
push-pin f in the act of ascertaining the posi 
tion of the hour-hand snail, the pinioni is ro 
tated in a direction to wind up the spring i, 
thereby raising the wiper k, while at the same 
time the sector L is raised by the action of its 
spring it', and a portion of its teeth t pass 
Over and engages the tripper-cam 0'. 
A vertical curved horn or spur, ac', is formed 
upon the inner end of the sector L, above its 
pivot at', and the point of this horn when the 
sector is raised abuts against some one of the 
stepse of such snail, and thereby governs the 
number of teeth engaged by the tripper of, and 
the subsequent corresponding blows of the 
striker k upon its bell or gong, which is shown 
at y' in the drawings. 
lt will be seen that the position of the hour 
hand snail F determines the extent of drop of 
the Sector J, and consequently the number of 
teeth of the ratchet I, upon the arbor it caused 
by the rotation of such arbor to engage the 
pawl upon the gear E. 
The relative positions of the parts when the 
mechanism is at rest are as follows, supposing 
the time to be six minutes past twelve, mid 
night: In this case the hour-hand is practi 
cally vertical, while the minute-hand has some 
what passed beyond the one-o'clock division 
of the dial. The last step, 12, of the snail F 
(which is the step nearest the pivot of the 
snail) now stands directly beneath the tooth if 
of the push-pin f', while the minute-hand snail 
d is in such a position that the horn a? of the 
Sector I stands opposite to, but does not touch, 
the third step, 3, of such snail. The two sectors 
are in their idle or lowest positions, the motor 
spring i is run down, and the tooth of the 
75 
95 
of 
O 
If 5 
I 25 
I 30 
24,65i 
3 
ratchet-wheel on first in advance of the spurp 
of the hub q stands in such a position rela 
tively to such spur that, as the sector J is low 
ered by the descent of the push-pin until the 
spur if of such pin abuts against the step 1 of 
the snail F, the said tooth of the ratchet-wheel 
in engages or passes beyond the spur p. 
As the minute-hand snail d is divided into 
twelve steps, each stroke of its striker repre 
sents a passage of five minutes past the hour, 
and but twelve steps on this snail are neces 
sary, as said minute-hand striker has to record 
but fifty-five minutes to the full twelve hours 
of the hour-hand striker. 
To ascertain the time in the dark by this 
clock it is only necessary to depress the push 
pinf" (supposing, as before premised, the time 
to be six minutes past twelve, midnight) until 
its tooth it brings up against the step 12 of 
the hour-hand snail F, and leave it in this po 
sition, the result being that upon the depres 
sion of the push-pin the sector J is lowered by 
the direct action of such pin, and through the 
agency of the pinion j, arbor h, with its 
ratchet-wheel I, and the spur-gear H, with its 
pawl l, winds up the spring i and rotates the 
ratchet-wheel in until all the teeth of the lat 
ter engage or pass by the spur p of the hub 
q, while simultaneous with the depression of 
the sector J the cam k rises by and with the 
rotation of the pinion, and permits the spring 
'0' to elevate the sector Luntil the horn ac' of such 
sector brings up against the step 3 of the minute 
hand snail d, and ome tooth t of such sector 
has passed beyond and engaged the spur r" of 
the tripper o'. The adjustment of the two see 
tors with respect to the two snails and the ar 
bor h, the pinion j, and the cam k are such 
that upon the depression of the sector J the 
said cam lic rises to such an extent as to permit 
of an elevation of the sector Lu through such 
a distance that all its teeth t may, if neces 
sary, pass beyond and engage the tripper 0", 
in order that the fullfifty-five minutes may be 
struck by the minute-hand striker in whatever 
position the hour-hand snail may be. As soon 
as the pressure upon the pin f" is removed the 
power of the contracted spring i operates to 
rotate the arbor i, thereby rotating the pinion 
j and restoring the sector J to its normal or 
idle position, and at the same time rotating 
the ratchet-wheel m, and through the medium 
of its entire range of teeth acting in succes. 
sion upon the spur p of the hub q, and by the 
latter upon the head of the striker-bar u effects 
twelve blows of the striker upon the bell ov, 
thus plainly indicating the time in hours. As 
the sector J completes its ascent, the cam k 
wipes against the tooth v' of the sector Land 
lowers such sector L, the result being that the 
last tooth of the latter passes by and trips the 
plate o', and such plate, through the agency 
of the arbor an and its crank-pin b, effects one 
blow of the striker k' upon the belly', thus in 
dicating the time by minutes within four min 
utes of the true time-that is, between five 
and ten minutes past the hour, 
To insure certainty of operation of the min 
ute-hand snail d, I employ an independent or 
auxiliary sectoral plate or pallet, (shown at a 
in Figs. 1 and 4 of the drawings as disposed 
in front of the snail d and pivoted at its head 
loosely to the minute-hand sleeve,) this plate or 
pallet a, when the minute-hand is between the 
twelve and one o'clock divisions of the dial, 
dropping to such a point that a portion of its 
periphery-as at b, for instance-extends be 
yond or below the highest point of the minute 
hand snail d, and provides a stop to the horn 
ac of the sector L, to prevent too great an ele 
vation of the latter in such rare instances as 
the point of the snail may not drop low enough 
to intercept such horn. The pallet a is sus. 
ceptible of a slight rocking motion upon the 
minute-hand sleeve, and with respect to the 
snail d, and the limit of this play is governed 
by a concentric slot in the snail, which receives 
a pin from the rear side of the pallet. 
It is essential that the pallet a shall drop 
and cover the point of the snail d before the 
minute-hand passes the twelve-o'clock division 
of the dial, and to compel this dropping of the 
pallet at such time I employ a stud, (shown at 
c in Fig. 1 of the drawings,) which projects 
laterally from the front of such pallet and op 
erates with the teeth of the star-wheel G. As 
the minute-hand immediately approaches the 
twelve-o'clock division of the dial, the tooth c 
wipes against and passes by the next preced 
ing tooth of the wheel G, and thereby partially 
advances the hour-hand snail one step-that 
is, one hour-while, as the said tooth cpasses 
by and leaves said tooth of the wheel G, the 
advance of such wheel is completed with a sud 
den throw by the action of the spring-latch g, 
and this sudden termination of the advance of 
said wheel G. causes its tooth next in rear of 
the tooth c of the pallet to abut, with a quick 
blow, upon or against the rear side of such 
tooth c', and cause the pallet to drop and cover 
the point of the snail and intercept the horn a? 
of the sector L, as shown in Fig. 1 of the draw 
ings. In order that the next succeeding tooth 
of the star-wheel may act upon the rear side of 
the pallet-tooth c to give a fillip to the latter, 
as explained, the said tooth should be oval or 
oblong in cross-section, as shown; or, in place 
of such a tooth, two pins may be employed. It 
will be seen that the stud c' operates to effect 
a one-step advance of the snail F with each 
complete revolution of the minute-hand-that 
is, during the passage of an hour of time; and 
that the hour-hand is not changed to indicate 
the next succeeding hour until the minute-hand 
passes the twelve-o'clock division of the dial. 
The arbor m' has a torsional spring, n', com 
bined with it and the plate E in such manner 
as to tend to rotate it (the arbor) against the 
stress of the spring p', as shown by the arrow 
in Fig. 8 of the drawings. 
A proper train of gears and pinions, a b c 
de, and a balance-wheel, f, is to be employed 
in connection with the arbor h and pinion H. 
To adapt my mechanism to indicate quarters 
O 
IS 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 20 
I 2S 
 
247,651 
hours instead of five minutes, as explained, it which throws said sector into engagement with 
is only necessary to divide the minute-hand 
the alarm mechanism, and the wiper l, which 
snail d into four steps and reduce the number 
is carried by arbor h and acts on tooth o' to 
of teeth upon the periphery of the sector L to 
Cause the Sounding of the alarm. 
three. In this case I propose to employ but 
3. In combination with the hour-land snail 
one bell and make the impelling-power of the 
and the sector J, the airbor l, with ratchet I, 
pinioni, spring i, spur-gear H, with its pawl l, 
lour-hand striker more powerful than that of 
the minute-hand striker, the difference in vol. 
and the mutilated ratchet-wheel n, the whole 
ame and of sound being sufficient to discrimi 
constituting mechanism to actuate the hub 
which connects with the suspensory of the 
nate between the strokes of the two hands. 
hour-hand striker, substantially as hereinbe 
fore described. 
4. In combination with the houl'-land snail 
and the sector J, the arbor h, with its ratchet 
I, pinioni, spring i, spur-gear H, with its pawl 
l, mutilated ratchet - wheel on, hub (1, with its 
spurs or teeth ps, bar at, with its pint, and the 
Striker , substantially as set forth. 
5. In combination with the arbor h, pinioni, 
and cam l, the sector L, with its tooth v', sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
I claim 
1. The sector L, provided with alarm - actu 
ating teeth t', lateral tooth ', and horns act a?, 
in combination with spring 0, which throws 
teeth t into engagement with the minute-alarm 
mechanism, shaft h, and its wiperk, which act 
on tooth of to cause the sounding of said alarm, 
and snail-cam d and its pawl c, which co-op 
erate with horns act a', as stated, to regulate 
the motion of said sector L and the number of 
strokes sounded by the alarm, substantially as 
Set forth. 
2. The push-pin f', pivoted toothed sector J, 
and pinioni, engaged and turned thereby, in 
combination with the spring-rotated arbor h, 
carrying said pinion, the sector J, which oper 
ates the minute-alarm and is provided with 
lateral tooth o' and horns ca, the spring no', ; 
OSMORE JENKINS. 
Witnesses: 
H. E. TODGE, 
F. G. SIMPSON. 
35 
45 
So 
S 
IO 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247751.txt	D, DURAND, 
PLATE GLASS BEWELLING MACHINE, 
Patented Oct. 4, 1881. 
ATTORNEYS, . 
Washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
| | 31??mfr??1??Tr???????????????????=???? M. PETERS, Phcio-Lithographer, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DOMINIQUE DURAND, OF MAMARONECK, NEW YORK. 
PLATE - G LASS BE WELI NG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,751, dated October 4, 1881. 
Application filed February 10, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
frame. A rack, M, extends longitudinally along 
Beit known that I, DOMINIQUE DURAND, of 
the under side of the carriage, and the teeth of 
Mamaroneck, Westchester county, New York, 
this rack engage with those of a geared wheel, 
have invented a new and Improved Plate-Glass 
N, mounted on a shaft, O, provided with the 
Beveling Machine, of which the following is a 
belt-pulleys PP. A cog-wheel, Q, is mounted 
specification. 
on the end of the eccentric-shaft E, and this 
The object of the invention is to provide a new 
wheel Q engages with a pinion, R, which is 
and improved machine for making on glass 
mounted on the same shaft with a cog-wheel, 
plates bevels of any desired width or inclina 
S, which engages with a pinion, T, mounted on 
a shaft provided with a crank, U, so that a ro 
tion. 
The invention consists in a table, upon which 
tation of the crank U will produce a slight rise 
the glass plate to be beveled is placed, support 
and fall of the table A, and the same can be 
ed upon a series of eccentric-wheels mounted 
raised or lowered distances that are hardlyper 
on a shaft passing along that edge of the table 
ceptible by moving the crank short distances. 
adjoining the grinding-wheel, which eccentrics 
A spring-pawl, a, engages with the teeth of the 
can be rotated gradually by means of geared 
wheel S to hold the table in the position to 
which it has been adjusted. 
wheels, whereas the opposite edge of the table 
rests upon ball-and-socket joints; and it also 
The grinding-wheel Cismounted on the shaft 
consists in a grinding-wheel the shaft of which 
V, passing through the journal W, and resting 
rests in a pivoted bearing, thus permitting the 
in the pivoted step bearing X. A segmental 
ly-slotted plate, Y, is fastened to the journal 
inclination of the shaft to be adjusted accord 
ing to the desired bevel, all as hereinafter more 
W, and by means of the nuts to b, passing 
through the slots of the plate Y, the journal 
fully described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
may be locked in positions to suit any incli 
a longitudinal sectional elevation of my im 
nation of the shaft V. A belt-pulley, Z, is 
proved glass-beveling tumachine on line 0e Qc, Fig. 
mounted on the shaft V. The bearing and 
journal of the driving-wheel C are fastened to 
2. Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional elevation of the 
same on line y), Fig. 2; and Fig. 3 is a detail 
a suitable frame. 
front elevation of the gearing for operating the 
The operation is as follows: The glass plate 
A having been placed upon the table B, the 
eccentrics. 
shaft E is rotated until the longest radius of 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
the eccentrics extend upward. The shaft Wis 
The glass plate A, the edge of which is to be 
inclined more or less until the inclination of the 
beveled, is placed upon the table B, preferably 
wheel C is precisely the same as the inclination 
or angle of the desired bevel. Thus, if a very 
made of iron, and is held thereon by suitable 
weights. This table B is supported along the 
flat bevel is desired, the wheel C, and accord 
edge adjoining the grinding-wheel C by a se 
ingly the shaft W, are but slightly inclined; 
but if a steeper bevel is required the inclina 
ries of eccentrics, DD, mounted on a shaft, E, 
which is journaled in arms FF of a carriage, 
tion of the grinding-wheel C and the shaft W 
G, or in the carriage itself, whereas the oppo 
will have to be increased. The angles of the 
site edge of the table is supported by a series 
bevel are affected by the inclination of the 
wheel C and shaft Vonly, and not by the effect 
of ball-and-socket joints, H, also attached to 
the carriage G. The longitudinal end of the 
of the inclination of the table B. The wheel C 
having been adjusted, the power is applied. 
table, supported by the eccentrics D D, is 
guided by a series of studs, I, or projections 
The belts passing over the pulleys PP also 
fitting in between two plates, JJ, projecting 
pass over some suitable devices for reversing 
upward from the top of the carriage G and 
the motion at the end of each trip, so that the 
wheel N will rotate in opposite directions alter 
separated a distance equal to the thickness of 
nately, and thus propel the carriage to and fro 
the stud I. 
longitudinally. The edge of the glass plate is 
The carriage G is provided with wheels K, 
rolling on the tracks Li, resting upon a suitable drawn over the grinding-disk C at each trip, 
O 
I5 
2 ? 
25 
35 
4. ? 
SO 
55 
?? 
75 
85 
95 
OG 
 
247,75? 
grinding is completed, a smoothing - disk is 
mounted on the shaft V, and finally a polish 
ing-disk is mounted on this shaft. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a plate-glass-beveling machine, the 
combination, with the carriage B. and the ta 
ble A, of the ball-and-socket joints H, support 
ingone edge of the table, and the eccentrics D D, 
supporting the opposite edge, adjoining the 
grinding-wheel, substantially as herein shown 
and described, for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a plate-glass-beveiling machine, the car 
riage G, constructed, substantially as herein 
shown and described, with a series of eccen 
trics for supporting one edge of the table, 
mounted on a shaft passing along that edge of , 
the carriage adjoining the grinding-wheel, as 
Set forth. 
3. In a plate-glass-beveling machine, the 
combination, with a grinding-wheel, C, which 
can be adjusted in inclination, of the table B, 
the carriage G, having the shaft E, with the 
eccentrics D, mounted along the edge adjoin 
ing the grinding-wheel C, and pinions and 
geared wheels for gradually rotating the shaft 
E, substantially as herein shown and described, 
and for the purposes set forth. 
4. In a plate-glass-beveling machine, the 
combination, with the grinding-wheel C, and 
with its i sbaft V, of the journal WV, time seg 
mentally-slotted plate Y, the bolts b, and the 
pivoted step-bearing X, substantially as here 
in shown and described, and for the purpose 
set forth, 
DOMINIQUE DURAND. 
4.O 
45 
SO 
55 
?? 
7 o 
Witnesses: 
OsOAR. F. GUNZ, 
C. SEDGWICK, 
S 
O 
and after a certain time the edge of the plate 
will have been ground off to such an extent 
that the grinding-wheel cannot attack or abrade 
the Same. The crank U is then rotated more 
or less, as may be necessary, to move the eccen 
trics D a short distance, whereby the front edge 
of the table B and of the glass plate resting in 
it are slightly lowered, so that the grinding 
disk can attack and abrade the edge of the 
glass. In a short time the grinding-wheel C 
will again fail to attack the edge of the plate 
A, and the crank U must again be rotated, and 
So on until tle bevel has the (lesired widtln. 
I am aware that eccentrics mounted on a 
shaft have been used in glass-grinding tables, 
and I do not intend to claim this invention, 
broadly; but heretofore the eccentrics did not 
Support that edge of the table adjoining the 
grinding-wheel, but the opposite edge, and the 
eccentries have not been used to gradually lower 
the plate upon the grinding-disk as the opera 
tion progressed, but have been used to vary the 
inclination of the bevel of the plate. The grind 
ing-wheel has not been adjustable in inclina 
tion, and the various incli1ations of the bevel 
have been obtained by giving the glass greater 
or less inclinatiol. 
As has been stated, I produce bevels of clif. 
ferent angles by varying the inclination of the 
grinding-wheel, and this is not slow ni in a ny 
of the glass-grinding machines made hereto. 
fore. 
If the grinding-stone becomes worn off, the 
table can conveniently be readjusted, so that 
the edge of the plate will rest on the stone in a 
different place by inclining the table either for 
ward or backward and rotating the shaft Eun 
til the largest radius of the eccentrics extend 
upward, as in the first instance. When the 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247853.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
No. 247,853, 
 
- - 
J. C. SCOTT, 
DIVIDING ENGINE, 
Patented Oct. 4, 1881. 
-62.ae 
y 
 
INVENTOR: 
Les 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES C. SCOTT, OF MANCHESTER, COUNTY OF LANCASTER, GREAT BRITAIN. 
DIVIDING - ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,853, dated October 4, 1881. 
Application filed January 28, 1881. (No model.) Patented in England March 15, 1878. 
IO 
To all whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, JAMES CUTIBERT SCOTT, 
of Manchester, in the county of Lancaster,Great 
Britain, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Apparatus for Setting Out, Marking, or 
Cutting Divisions of Circles or Straight Lines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My inventiou consists in an arrangement 
whereby I am enabled to dispense with change 
wheels, and to secure an increased accuracy of 
division. To accomplish this I cause the han 
dle which gives motion to the movable part 
always to start from the same point and to fin 
ish after the required number of turns and frac 
tion of a turn against an adjustable stop on a 
graduated disk, after which it is turned in the 
reverse direction back to the starting-point. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of the apparatus, partly in section. 
Fig. 2 is another plan view, not in section, and 
omitting a portion of Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 a face 
view of Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
-spondit)g parts. 
At a is a fixed bearing, which may be at 
tached to any suitable frame of the machine to 
which the dividing apparatus is to be applied. 
This bearing is formed hollow, and through it 
there passes a shaft, b, one end of which is pro 
vided with a worm, c, in gear with a wheel, d, 
which is mounted so as to be capable of turn 
ing upon a center, e. Upon the other end of 
the axis b is mounted loosely a handle,f, but 
it is capable of being made fast with the shaft 
b by means of a clamp, g, and in the following . 
anner: 
The handle fextends from an arm, h, which 
is provided with two jaws, ii, which embrace 
the shaft b, and these jaws are capable of be 
ing tightened on the shaft b by means of a han 
dle, k, which carries a screw, l, working in the 
said jaws i. 
From the arm h extends a boss, m, and upon 
an extension, a?, of the bearing a there is a disk, 
in n', mounted loosely, but capable of being made 
fast with the said parta' by means of a thumb. 
screw, o. The said disk is formed with a circu 
lar slot, p, within which is adapted a stop, q, 
capable of being fixed in any position around 
So the circle by means of a set-screw, r, and the 
25 
45 
55 
face q of this stop may therefore be made to 
represent any one of the divisions marked up 
on the periphery of the disk n', as shown in 
Fig. 2. These divisions, however, are only 
partially shown; but they extend around the 
entire circumference of the disk. 
The handle f is provided with a groove, s, 
within which is situate a trigger, tt, capable 
of turning upon a center, u, the part it being 
forced inward by a spring, v, carried by the 
groove of the said handle, and when so forced 
inward it takes into a notch, c, formed on the 
edge of the disk n'. 
The operation is as follows: The attendant, 
by tightening the clamp ig, makes the handle 
f fast with the shaft b, and the stop q is ad 
justed, so that when the trigger t arrives in 
contact there with the trigger will be forced by 
the spring into the notch w, and thus the 
starting-point, which is constant, is attained. To 
Suppose, now, that an entire revolution of the 
handlefis desired, the triggert is moved from 
the notch wrby pressing the part it against the 
force of the spring v, and the said revolution 
is performed, the stop q being turned upward 75 
upon a center to admit of the said entire revo 
lution, after which the trigger t again passes 
into the notch w, and so on for any required 
number of whole revolutions. Supposing, now, 
however, that, say, three and a portion only of 8o 
fourth turn are required, then the calculation 
is made in the ordinary manner in order to as 
certain what portion of a revolution in addition 
to the three whole revolutions is required, and 
the stop q is set upon the disk n' by means of 85 
the graduations marked thereon, so that the 
actual stopping part will bring the Zero line. 
to coincide with that graduation which corre 
sponds to the fraction of a circle beyond the 
whole revolutions through which the handle. 
is to move. This having been done, the clamp 
k is tightened and the handle f is turned the 
required number of whole revolutions, the stop 
q, as before, being turned out of the Way upon 
its center; but when these whole revolutions 
have been made the trigger t is allowed to ar 
rive in contact with the stop q, and then the 
shaft b will have been turned through a de 
termined space. When this has been done the 
clampg i is loosened and the handlefisturned too 
95 
 
g 
24, S53 
tion may be adapted generally to machines for 
cutting, marking, or setting out divisions of 
circles; but none of such arrangements con 
stitute any part of my invention. 
In marking or setting out divisions in Straight 
lines, as in the case of rules, the worm or screw 
0 may be continued for the necessary length, 
and constitute the ordinary screw for travers 
ing the cutting or marking tool. 
Having thus fully described any invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
In apparatus for Setting out, cutting, or Work 
ing divisions on circular or straight lines, the 
handlef provided with trigger tt, clamp ig, 
graduated disk n', provided with groove p 
and notch 70, and the stop 1, combined to 
gether on shaft a, Substantially as shown and 
described for operation as specified. 
35 
JAMES C. SCOTT, 
Witnesses: 
E. ROBINSON WALIKER, 
W. T. CHEETHAM, 
Solicitor, 10 St. Ann St., Ianchester. 
Patent Agent, 18 St. Ann St., 1anchester. 
in the reverse direction back to its notch c, and 
the same operations are repeated, the said notch 
always being the starting-point, and, therefore, 
in this apparatus there is one notch only, the 
finishing points for parts of a circle being an 
adjustable stop. 
In order to prevent ally undue motion of the 
worm cabinding-screw, as at ac, may be adapt 
ed and tightened between each working of the 
handle.f. 
My invention is adapted to be applied to a 
variety of purposes. It can be used for giving 
intermittent motion to the pattern of a molding 
machine of that class in which a segmental 
pattern is used and which is carried by a radial 
arm, as is well knowl, then the said radial arm 
will be connected to the wheel d, and the seg 
mental pattern will be caused to move at inter 
vals through the necessary spaces for molding 
successive teeth of wheels. In like manner the 
wheel d may give motion to the mold-box in 
stead of to the pattern, such motion of the 
mold-box being well known. 
In lashes for cutting wheels or setting out, 
the wheel d may be placed belind the face 
plate, and after the same manner my inven 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US247953.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 247,953. 
 
H. SEAMAN. 
CHILDS CARRACE, 
Patented Oot. 4, 1881. 
WITNESSEs: 
4. rea . 
INVENTOR: 
BY Mull- (7G 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HIRAM SEAMAN, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
CHILDs CARRIAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 247,958, dated October 4, 1881. 
Application filed August 4, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HIRAM SEAMAN, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Chil 
dren's Carriages, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact specification. 
The object of my invention is to prevent the 
accidents which frequently occur to children's 
carriages from the wheels running over ob 
structions, and also by rolling down inclines 
when unattended. For that purpose I fit the 
forward axle of such a carriage for revolution 
on a horizontal spindle, so that either side can 
rise as the wheel passes over an obstruction 
without raising or jarring the carriage, and the 
axle can also be swung to a vertical position 
for supporting and anchoring the carriage. 
My invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction, whereby the objects 
named are attained without complicated mech 
anism. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a carriage containing my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a front view of the same, 
with the forward axle turned in a vertical po 
sition. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section of the front. 
axle and forward gearing, and Fig. 4 is a plan 
view of the forward gearing. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A is the body, supported on springs (t. b is 
the rear axle; and c the rear wheels, all of which 
are of usual construction. 
d is a cross-bar supporting the forward ends 
of springs a, and connected 
to the rear axle 
by reaches e. e. 
f is a fixed rod extending from the rear axle, 
- 
IO 
3o 
b, to and through the bar d, and on the end of 
this rod, in front of bar d, is the forward axle, 
g. The axle g is held on the end of the rod by 
a nut and washer, and the end thus serves as 
a spindle on which the axle may turn, 
On and 
between the axle and bar are bearing rings or 
plates h h, which steady the parts. 
It will be seen that with this construction 
either forward wheel, i, is free to rise in pass 
ing over an obstruction without tilting or jar 
ring the carriage-body; and, further, that the 
axle g can be turned to a vertical position, as 
shown in Fig. 2, and in that position supports 
the forward part of the carriage independently 
of the forward wheel. In this last-named po 
sition of the axle and forward wheels the car 
riage is securely anchored, and may be left un 
attended without fear of its moving. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a child's carriage, the fixed rod f, ex 
tending from the rear axle through a cross-bar, 
d, and having on its forward end a spindle on 
which the front axle turns, as described. 
2. The combination of the rod f, rear axle, b, 
cross-bar d, and axle g, hung on the forward 
end of the rod, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with the axleg and cross 
bar d, of the plates h h, arranged as and for 
the purpose specified. 
HIRAM SEAMAN. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES M. HENLEY, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248053.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
No. 248,053, 
  
R. C. NUGENT, 
MACHINE FOR BEVELING PLOW COLTERS, 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 11, 1881. 
AA E. 
al 
2,217 WN th. 
NADP S2 S ONKS 
  
HII 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
Nace 
  
 
| 
Hell 
 
(E(St. 
E\SU 
tly % 
 
 
al 
 Y. 
N 
W 
W 
W 
WITWESSES a 
- 1 
IWWEWTOR 
4% :^Sz6, By z's "// 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer wastington, D.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
R. C. NUGENT, 
MACHINE FOR BEVELING PLOW COLTERs, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 248,053. 
Patented Oct. ll, 1881. 
H. 
H. H. 
. . A TN Hill 
, 
 
h - . 
NAP 
In IR N 
TTI 
III si 
 
 
 
s 
  
 
 
 
 
 
Illi 
IIHL 
II 
 
 
N 
N 
 
-- 
Mr. E. 
EE Y 
tn 
N 
W 
Es 
s 
WITWESSES 
IWWE WTOR 
4%. ^aszz6 
S2. " 7%.1 
By A is Attorney 
. 
y 
N.ETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Waslington, d.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
4. sheets-Sheet, 3. 
R. C. NUGENT. 
. 
MACHINE FOR BEVELING PLOW COLTERs. 
No. 248,053. 
Patented Oct, ll, 1881. 
5 
S 
WZZ 
  
 
 
 
 
. 
 
S 
" 
s: 
2 
N 
a N N N 
N. 
i s 
3 
i 
Y N 
S 
N. N. N 
as -s, , W. 
 
W 
  
s s 
N 
W Will 
SS 
  
 
in s 
N 
as 
 
N 
SCN1 
re 
s 
- 
IWWEWTOR. 
/24.2.6/2. 
By A-Z's Attorney 
44%z 
Photo-lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
WITWESSES 
%A t 
26 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
R. C. NUGENT. 
w 
MACHINE FOR BEVELING PLOW COLTERS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 248,053, 
Patented Oct. 11, 1881. 
- 
s 
 
 
  
 
 
H 
 
 
r 
1. His 
WITWESSES 
. . 
. 
w 
. I wVEWTOR 
M624-44 a. 
4% 4-Sz6. BA as Attorney 
SZa 
41 
sees 
N, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD C. NU GENT, OF PITTSBURG, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
MACHINE FOR BEVELNG PLOW. COLTERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,053, dated October 11, 1881. 
Application filed May 27, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
ture of colters and similar articles having cut 
To all whom it may concern: 
ting-edges. 
Be it known that I, RICHARDC. NUGENT, 
of Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
To enable others skiiled in the art with which 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
my invention is most nearly connected to make 
and useful Improvementin Machines for Form 
and use it, I will proceed to describe its con 
ing Cutting-Edges on Colters and other Arti. 
struction and operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
cles; and I do hereby declare that the follow: 
part of my specification, Figure 1 is a top view 
ingis a full, clear, and exact description thereof, 
or plan of my improvement in machines for 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked forming bevel-edges on colters and other arti 
cles. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same. 
thereon. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Fig. 3 is a vertical and longitudinal section of 
machines for forming cutting-edges on colters 
the same. Fig. 4 is an end elevation of the 
or other articles; and it consists in securing 
S. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
the article to be finished with a cutting or bev 
eled edge in a central position between pivoted 
sents the frame of the machine, in which are 
clamping-disks held in an adjustable frame sus 
pivoted shafts B, C, and D, the shaft Bhaving 
ceptible of being moved in a horizontal plane 
secured thereon a wheel, E, which meshes into 
from or toward and between revolving dies, 
a wheel, F, on shaft C, which wheel F meshes 
which, by compression on the periphery of the 
into a wheel, G, on the shaft D. The shafts 
C and D are furnished with wheels H and I, 
colter or other article, will rotate it and the 
clamping-disks, and by said compression and 
which mesh into each other. On the ends of 
rotation form a uniform bevel and cutting-edge 
the shafts C D are circular dies J and K, 
having beveled edges L., which form a V-open 
on said colter, as will hereinafter more fully 
ing, M, between, corresponding to the bevel 
appear. 
The means heretofore employed for forming 
desired for the cutting-edge of the colter. The 
cutting-edges on colters and other similar arti 
shafts CD for the circular dies J K are fur 
nished with adjustable bearings ab, between 
cles are as follows: first, subjecting the disk to 
which are placed spiral springs c. In the frame 
the action of a hammer or press and rotating or 
are adjusting-screws N, for moving vertically 
turning the disk with relation to the hammer 
the bearings at of the shaftD, thereby causing 
by means of tongs; second, by pivoting the disk 
upon or by a center-pin and subjecting the disk 
the die J to impinge upon the upper and outer 
edge of the colter, which will cause the outer 
to the action of an eccentric roll or rolls, the 
disk being rotated by the operator; third, by fre 
and lower edge of the colter to impinge upon 
quent passing of the edge of the blank or colter 
the die K. 
between beveled rolls; fourth, by grinding the 
To the frame A is secured a frame, B', hav 
periphery of the colter; fifth, by forming the 
ing in it an opening, X, in which is secured an 
adjustable frame, A', having detachable parts 
bevel by means of a turning process, all of which 
methods are objectionable and have been found 
Z and Y, furnished with screw-threads g and 
impracticable for many reasons, among which 
, and a screw-nut, U. The parts Z and Yare 
may be stated, first, requiring skilled and ex 
furnished with screws R ST. In the part Z. 
perienced labor; second, liability of warping 
is an opening, in which is placed a detachable 
cylindrical step,f, for the axis e of the detach 
the colter, which is usually formed from a thin 
able clamping-disk P. The upper end of the 
disk of metal; third, a tendency to destroy the 
cenferopening of the colter, giving to said open 
axis of the disk, P extends up into an opening 
ing an oval form; fourth, a tendency to form in the center of the clamping-disk O, the axis 
an irregular cutting-edge; fifth, said methods of which is pivoted upon the lower end of the 
adjusting-screw R. The frame A' is fitted to 
requiring too much time in the production of 
a colter with a true cutting-edge; sixth, said 
and held in the frame B through the medium 
of the plate W and screw-nut U, and is moved 
methods involve a loss of time and greater ex 
from and toward the dies J and K by means 
pense than should be incurred in the manufac 
75 
9o 
95 
do 
5 
TO 
IS 
25 
35 
49 
45 
So 
 
2 
24S,053 
of the screw T. The disks and their axis re 
volve on coniform centers. (Clearly shown in 
Fig. 3.) 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The operator, through the medium of the screw 
R, elevates the champing-disk O, and then places 
the colter-blank h between the clamping-disks 
O and P, with the axis Q of the disk P in the 
opening of the colter-blank, as shown in Fig. 
3. The clamping-disk O is then, by means of 
the screw R, lowered, so as to clamp the blank 
h firmly between the clamping-disks O and P. 
Motion being given to the shaft B, it will be 
transmitted by the wheels E, F, G, H, and I 
to the shafts C and D, and thereby revolve the 
dies J and K. The operator then, by means 
of the screw T, moves the frame. At and its 
clanping-disks O and P, with the blank l, to 
ward the dies J and K, forcing the periphery 
of the blank into the recess M formed by said 
dies, which impinging on the blank will cause 
it and the clamping-disks OP to revolve, and 
the forward pressure caused by the screw T 
and the impinging of the dies J and K on the 
blank h will form the cutting-edge on said 
blank, as shown in Fig. 3. The frame A is 
then, by reversing the motion of the screw T, 
drawn back. The clamping-disk O is then, by 
screw R, elevated and the colter removed. The 
O 
is 
25 
machine is then ready for the reception of an 
other blank. The clamping-disk P can be ad 
justed with relation to the recess M between 
dies J and K by means of the screws S. By 
means of the nachine hereinbefore described 
colters can be furnished with cutting-edges 
with great facility and diminished cost by un 
skilled labor. 
Having thus described my improvement, 
what i claim as of my invention is 
1. In a machine for forming the cutting 
edge on colters or similar articles, the combi. 
nation of the frames A and B, clamping-disks 
O and P, screws R ST, dies J K, and their 
operating mechanism, substantially as herein 
described. 
2. In a machine for forming the cutting 
edge on colters or similar articles, the combi 
nation, with the revolving dies J K, of the 
recessed clamping-disk P, provided with the 
axis Q, and the clamping-disk O, provided 
with a recess for the reception of said axis Q, 
Substantially as and for the purpose hereil 
shown and described. 
35 
45 
RICHARD C. NUGENT, 
Witnesses: 
A. C. JoHNSTON, 
D. H. CHAMBERS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248153.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OTTO FISCHER, OF MUNICH, BAVARIA, GERMANY. 
PROCESS OF PRE PARING LEUCO-BASE OF ANILINE-BLUE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,153, dated October 11, 1881. 
Application filed March 24, 1881. (Specimens.) 
of solid zinc chloride. From the smelt thus 
obtained I separate the leuco-base in a manner 
well known to chemists, and oxidize the same 
to aniline-blue by well-known oxidizing agents, 
such as manganese dioxide and lead dioxide 4o 
or chloranil. 
I am aware of the work which has already 
been done by Girard and Delaire and Hoffman 
in regard to diphenylamines and their com 
pounds, and therefore do not desire to claim 45 
their processes; but 
I claim as my invention 
1. The mode herein described of producing 
the leuco base of aniline-blue by the reaction of 
para-amidobenzaldehyde on mixtures of di- So 
phenylamine and methyl-diphenylamine, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The mode herein described of producing 
the leuco-base of aniline-blue--that is, by first. 
dissolving para - nitrobenzaldehyde in alco- 55 
hol and muriatic acid, then dissolving zinc pow 
der in this solution and distilling off the alco 
hol, then mixing the product with diphel)yla 
mine and methyl-diphenylamine and zinc chlo 
ride, and finally separating the leuco-base from 6o 
the compound, all substantially in the manner 
and proportions set forth. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
OTTO FISCHER. 
Witnesses: 
A. SPIEGEL, 
K. BUCEKA. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, Dr. OTTOFISCHER, a sub 
ject of the King of Bavaria, and a resident of 
Munich, in the Empire of Germany, have in 
S vented an Improved Process of Manufactur 
ing the Leuco-Base of Aniline-Blue, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention consists in the production of 
the leuco-base of aniline-blue by the reaction 
Io of the para-amidobenzaldehyde on a mixture of 
diphenylamine and methyl-diphenylamine in 
various proportions. This leuco-base, as is well 
known to chemists, can be converted into ani 
line-blue by oxidizing agents. The para-almido 
I5 benzaldehydeis produced by reducing the para 
nitrobenzaldehyde by means of tin dichloride 
and muriatic acid in aqueous solution, or also 
by means of tin, iron, or zinc in alcohol solu 
tion containing muriatic or acetic acid. 
In the following example I explain the pro 
duction and subsequent treatment of the para 
amidobenzaldehyde, the method of produc 
ing the latter being similar to that described 
in an application filed by me March 19, 1881, 
25 serial No. 28,695. I dissolve ten parts of para 
nitrobenzaldehyde in fifty parts of alcohol, 
and I add fifty parts of muriatic acid. To this 
solution I gradually add twelve parts of Zinc 
powder, and I heat this until the zinc is dis 
3o solved. Afterward the alcohol is distilled off 
and the yield thickened on a water bath. The 
product thus obtained is heated to 1200 to 1400 
centigrade (2480 to 2840 Fahrenheit) with 
thirty-three parts of a mixture of diphenyla 
35 mine and methyl-dephiny lamine and ten parts 
2 O 
N 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248253.txt	(NO Model.) A M, BURRITT & L, D, CASTLE, 
No. 248,253, 
FIRE EXTINGUISHER, 
Patented 00t, ll l881, 
/9 / 
 
4 2n Y 
a  / 
 
.1 
v9.2. 
C) 7 
77; 7: --- 
a 7- a 22. 
1747-22. 3.r. a. 
al 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
. 
. 
i 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT M. BURRITT AND LEWIS D. CASTLE, OF WATERBURY, CONN., ASSIGN 
ORS TO THE A. BURRITT EARDWARE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FIRE-EXTINGUISHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,258, dated October 11, 1881. 
Application filed August 22, 1881. (No model.) 
I5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, ALBERT M. BURRITT 
and LEWIs D. CASTLE, of Waterbury, in the 
county of New Haven and State of Connecti 
5 cut, have invented a new Improvement in Fire 
Extinguishers; and we do hereby declare the 
following, when taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, and the letters of ref. 
erence marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and 
Io exact description of the same, and which said 
drawings constitute part of this specification, 
and represent, in 
Figure 1, a longitudinal section; Fig. 2, a 
transverse section. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
that class of fire-extinguishers which consist 
in openings or nozzles arranged at different 
points in a line of supply-pipe, and in which the 
flow is prevented by a plug fasible at a low de 
20 gree of heat, so that when fire occurs near the 
nozzle the water will be liberated by the heat 
arising from the fire and flow through the noz 
zle to extinguish the fire. 
In some cases the plug is of fusible metal 
25 entirely. In others it is a metal plug secured 
by fusible metal. In either case the plug re 
quires renewing after it shall have been once 
removed or destroyed by heat. Again, a dis 
tributer is necessary, in connection with such 
3o plugs, in order to throw, the water in the form 
of spray. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
plug which shall simply open by the applica 
tion of heat, and in so opening will form a pas 
35 sage for the water, through which it will be 
forced in the form of spray, and also to hold 
the plug or limit its movement, so that it will 
move from its seat only sufficiently far to per 
mit the requisite flow of water, and also so that 
4o after the flow the opening may be temporarily 
closed by the plug itself, as more fully herein 
after described. 
A represents the nozzle, which is connected 
with the supply-pipe in the usual manner. Its 
45 outer end, B, is made in the form of a conical 
valve-seat, and so that the plug C, which is 
made of hard metal, may fit close thereon. 
Within or across the nozzle is one or more 
bridges, D, through which a spindle, E, passes, 
having a head, e, in rear of the inner bridge, 5o 
and so that it may take a bearing thereon and 
prevent the spindle from being drawn out 
ward. The outer end, a, of the spindle is 
screw-threaded, and the plug C is tapped cor 
respondingly, so as to be screwed onto the 55 
spindle E, and it may be screwed on so as to 
draw the plug down tight upon its seat; but 
ordinarily, and for use as an extinguisher, when 
the plug is upon its seat the head e lies away 
from the bridge D, as seen in Fig. 1, and the 6o 
plug is secured in its seat by solder or other 
connection fusible at a low degree of heat. 
Thus arranged, when the plug is liberated by 
heat it is quickly thrown outward by the press 
ure of water thereon, as seen in broken lines, 65 
Fig. 1, until the head of the spindle comes 
against the bridge. There the plug will be 
arrested and stand, leaving a thin opening en 
tirely around it, through which the water will 
freely pass-the space so thin that the water 7 o 
will quickly break into spray and be thrown 
in all directions, so that no perforated distrib 
uter is necessarily required. After the plug 
has been liberated and the fire extinguished, 
the plug may be forced to its seat by screwing 75 
it onto the spindle E until it bears hard against 
its seat and shuts off the further flow of wa 
ter. There it will remain until it may be coln 
veniently soldered and arranged as before. 
- 
shape, as seen in Fig. 2, or constructed so that 
the plug may be turned without turning the 
spindle, in order that the plug may be ad 
justed thereon relatively to its seat either to 
bring it to a bard bearing thereon, to close the 85 
passage, or to adjust the thickness of the open 
ing. Thus the plug will not be so far dis 
placed as by any possibility to be lost or de 
stroyed. 
applied outside the plug, into which the water 
will flow and be distributed in the usual man 
ner; but such perforated distributer is unnec 
essary. 
If desired, a perforated distributer may be 9o 
The spindle should be made of irregular 8o 
95 
 
We claim- 
1. The nozzle A, constructed with a conical 
seat, combined with the plug C, constructed 
to fit said seat, and secured in said seat by a 
- 
g 
24 S, 253 
fusible connection, and the headed spindle E, zle, and connected to the said plug by a screw. Io 
attached to said plug and supported in the thread, whereby said plug may be drawn upon 
nozzle to arrest the outward or opening move. its seat, substantially as described. 
ment of the plug, substantially as described. 
5. 2. The combination of the nozzle A, con- 
structed with the conical seat, combined with 
the plug C, constructed to fit said seat, and se- 
cured therein by a fusible connection with the 
headed spindle E, supported in the said noz- 
EFTRETT 
P 
Witnesses: 
A. C. BURRITT, 
D. E. WEBSTER, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248353.txt	(No Model.) 
A. SCHILLING, 
LABEL, HOLDER, 
No. 248,353, 
Patented Oct. 18, 1881. 
 
ln Entor; 
By his fill yssire-Sea. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST SCHILLING, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
ABE - HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,853, dated October 18, 1881. 
Application filed April 26, 1881. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUST SCHILLING, of 
the city and county of San Francisco, in the 
State of California, have unade and invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Label-Holders; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of my said 
invention, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings. 
My invention relates to a label holding and 
exhibiting device for boxes, cans, cases, and 
packages in which articles and substances of 
food, medicine, and like matter are generally 
put up or contained for sale, consumption, or 
ll Se. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
holder for receiving and exhibiting a change. 
able label that when fixed or attached to the 
outside of a portable box, case, or package for 
containing merchandise will permit the label 
to be changed or adjusted as often as the con 
tents of the receptacle are changed, so that a 
convenient and ready means of designating 
the contents is provided on the outside of such 
receptacles, and the same is rendered service 
able for various purposes, or to contain differ 
ent articles or substances by simply changing 
the label. 
As hereinafter more particularly described, 
my invention consists, essentially, of a label 
holder to be fixed or attached to or formed on 
the outside of a portable box, case, or other 
receptacle for containing merchandise, and a 
changeable or adjustable label adapted to be 
used there with, so as to be securely held in a 
position to disclose to view the part of its face 
having the name or matter to be exhibited, 
while its remaining portion, which may con 
tain other names or matter to be used at other 
times, is covered up, concealed, and protected 
by and within the holder. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows the application of my invention to a can 
or box. Fig. 2 is a view of the changeable la 
bel removed from the holder. Figs. 3, 4, and 
6 show different forms in which my invention 
can be employed, Fig. 4 being a vertical sec 
tion through the holder and label, Fig. 3; and 
Figs. 5 and 7 show forms of multiple labels to 
be used in such holders. 
In applying my invention I fix or attach in 
a permanent manner upon the outside of the 
case, package, or other receptacle, a holder 
A. This can be made of pasteboard, card, 
board, or like material gummed, glued, or oth 
erwise secured on the outside of the receptacle, 
but in a much better and more durable man 
ner by being cut or stamped out of sheet metal 
and then secured in position. It can be made 
of any desired shape to receive a label of any 
suitableform, and when placed and fixed against 
a surface a pocket or inclosed space is provided 
in which the label is inserted and held. 
In the different forms of labels shown in the 
drawings a polygonal shape is used for provid 
ing a number of spaces to receive and show 
the names of several articles for which the box, 
case, or package can be used as a receptacle 
at different times, and for the purpose of dis 
closing and exhibiting one of such names or 
descriptive matter at a time and covering or 
concealing the remainder I cut out or provide 
an opening in the front of the holder, as at Cl, 
Figs. 1, 3, and 6, so that the portion of the la 
bel immediately behind this point or opening 
will not be covered. 
The principal part of the label is held and 
contained between the front A and the Surface 
behind it, against which it is fixed, and the la 
bel is secured and caused to remain in place 
until changed by making it of a thickness to 
fit closely into the holder, or by slipping behind 
the label after it is adjusted to a piece of card 
board or metal to act as a spring or a wedge 
to retain the label in proper position. 
In applying the holder to cans, cases, or other 
packages where it is desirable or important to 
have the contents kept in a sealed or tightly 
closed condition, or where such receptacles are 
used for liquids or substances kept in liquids, 
the holder is adapted to be secured in place 
without cutting into, piercing, or making any 
opening in or through the sides or other part of 
the receptacle, or otherwise affecting the serv 
iceableness of the same. As the holder is ap 
plied also upon the outside of the can or other 
receptacle, none of the interior space is taken 
up or the capacity of the receptacle in any way 
reduced. 
The label B is made to contain and present 
to view, as required, a number of names, titles, 
or descriptive matter to designate such arti 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
2 . 
24 S,353 
35 
45 
So 
55 
1. In combination with a polygonal label ar 
ranged to contain names and other descriptive 
matter on its several sides or faces, the holder 
A, of corresponding shape, adapted to be fixed 
and secured on the outside of a portable box, 
case, or other receptacle for containing mer 
chandise, and having an opening, a, arranged 
to expose one of the names or other matter on 
the label, and to cover and conceal the remain 
ing ones when the label is placed therein sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. In combination with a portable box, case, 
or other receptacle for containing merchandise, 
having a pocket or holder, A, upon the outside 
thereof, in which is an opening, a, the remov 
able and changeable label B, of a shape to fit 
and be received into said holder, provided with 
a number of names or other descriptive mat 
ter arranged around the outer edge, each of 
which can be brought and retained in front of 
the opening, to be exposed in succession, while 
the remainder of the sections are covered and 
concealed from view, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
Witness my hand and seal. 
AUGUST SCHILLING. L. s. 
In presence of - 
EDWARD E. OSBORN, 
WM. F. CLARK. 
cles or substances as may from time to time be 
put into or kept in the receptacle, and it can 
be made of card-board or of metal suitably 
marked, engraved, or stamped with the re 
quired names. 
If desired to furnish a larger number of names 
on one label, both sides can be utilized, thus 
giving a multiple label capable of indicating 
a variety of articles or substances. 
This invention is applicable to many useful 
purposes, and it is of value, particularly in its 
application to cans, boxes, or cases in which 
articles and substances of food, and for house 
keeping purposes, medicines, drugs, and the 
like, are put up or kept on land for sale and 
for household use, where one receptacle is re 
quired to contain at different times a variety 
of substances both to economize space and to 
dispense with the use of a number of separate 
receptacles. 
Metal boxes, cases, and like 1)ackacres in 
which many fine qualities of goods are put up 
to be used from the original packages can be 
made to serve a variety of useful purposes after 
, the original contents are consumed by having 
my invention applied thereto aid furnished 
with each one, so that such receptacle would 
then be available and quickly used in house 
keeping, where now it is cast aside as of no use 
or value. 
Having thus fully described my invention 
y 
s 
what I claim, and desire to secule by Letters 
Patent, is 
y 
I 
y 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248453.txt	(No Model.) 
A, GUNDERSON, 
CHURN COWER, 
N0, 248,453, 
Patented 00t, 18, 1881, 
t1. 
Z7zzevedoy 
 
Rs7 
3 
a 
a 
7 66GS423 
Z52 3A Z. 
Sig.222E.2e3es -o 
2SS7. 
NSS 
N S s 
 
 
r 
Y 
IIM a 11 S 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
Vizzzzesses. 
& ? -(2-2222-24 
76%icz ess RJs. 
PETERS, Ploto-uthegrapher, Washington, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT GUNDERSON, OF SEABBONA, ILLINOIS, 
CHURN - COVER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,453, dated October 18, 1881. 
Application filed December 27, 1880. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT GUNDERSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Shab 
bona, in the county of De Kalb and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Churn-Covers; and I do here. 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters or figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in ro 
tary churns; and it consists, essentially, in pro 
viding the mouth of the churn with cork or 
other elastic packing, which is adapted to re 
ceive a locking-cover of novel construction, 
whereby the churn is rendered air-tight, all as 
will be hereinafter more fully described, and 
pointed out in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a per 
spective view of my invention; Fig. 2, a detail 
sectional view of the locking-cover and mouth 
of the churn. 
Similar letters of reference occurring on the 
several figures indicate corresponding parts. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
churn, which is provided upon two sides with 
projecting lugs or axles B, which are secured 
to the central part of said churn, as shown. 
D represents aframe composed of standards 
C and cross-beam E. connecting the two stand 
ards, which are forked at their upper ends to 
receive the axles B of the churn A, as fully 
shown in Fig. 1. Around the upper outside 
part of the churn is provided a circular band, 
F, having raised portions a upon its rim, and 
which are provided with square openings b, 
as shown. 
G represents an inner circular band, which 
is so arranged with relation to the outer band, 
1", as to leave a space or Iecess between the 
two, in which is provided a cork or other suit 
able elastic packing, c. 
H represents the circular cover, which is pro 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
S5 
75 
vided upon its circumference with a down 
Wardly-projecting flange, d, and with a central 
locking device, I, which is composed of a cen. 
tral cog-wheel, e, journaled in the overlapping 
bandsfsecured to the top of the cover, and 
wedge-shaped bolts.g., having lugs or serrations 
h upon their inner ends, which mesh into the 
cogs of the central wheel, e, as shown. The 
ends of the bolts 9 pass through staples i, at 
tached to a circular rim, J, secured to the outer 
upper edge of the cover H. 
In the operation of my invention the lid or 
cover H is placed over the mouth of the churn 
with the ends of the wedge-shaped bolts g in 
juxtaposition with the square openings b on 
the band F, and by turning the crank L, which 
operates the cog-wheele, the cogs of said wheel 
push forward the bolts g, which, as they enter 
the openings b, force the downwardly-project 
ing flanged of the cover into the elastic pack 
ing c, thereby effectually sealing the contents 
of the churn. The bolts g are prevented from 
slipping by means of the clamping-screw n, 
which passes through the overlapping bands 
fand rests upon the top of the wheel e, and 
keeps the same from moving when pressed down 
thereon. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and useful, is 
In a rotary churn, the cover H, provided with 
the flanged and with the locking device I, com 
posed of the central cog-wheel, e, journaled in 
the bands f, wedge-shaped bolts (), having lugs 
h, which engage with the cog-wheele, in com. 
bination with the mouth of the churn A, which 
is provided with the bands F and G, having an 
elastic packing, c, between the two, said band 
F having slotted lugs at upon its rim for the re 
ception of the bolts g of the cover H, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ALBERT GUNDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
C. W. HuBBELL, 
G. W. KITTELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248555.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 248,555. 
W. M, CLARKE. 
HOSE NOZZLE AND SPRINKLER, 
Patented Oot, 18, 1881. 
2 
e 
S 
2. 
2. KS 
NS NS NS 
 
  
 
 
2 
 
A 
Emirtlife 
S 
S 
p 
4.i. 
f 
172(e?sess 
raz-e 
64.4%a. 
770/eafoya 
V/22 are 77. earie 
2/ (29.262, 
arouorney 
ERs. Photo-Lithographor, wishington oc 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. CLARKE, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
HOSE NOZZLE AND SPRINKLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,555, dated October 18, 1881. 
Application filed September 2, 1881. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM M. CLARKE, 
a resident of Newark, in the county of Essex 
and State of New Jersey, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Hose 
Nozzles and Sprinklers; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal cross-section of 
a nozzle embodying my improvements; and 
Figs, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are detail views, similar 
letters of reference indicating like parts in each 
of the several figures. 
The object of this invention is to render a 
nozzle, at a comparatively sin all cost, capable 
of throwing Water from a single outlet therein 
in a strealm or jet or in a spray, at the pleas 
are of the operator. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction, combination, and operation of the 
several parts comprising the device, all as will 
be hereinafter set forth and finally embodied 
in the claims. 
In the drawings, A represents the Outer cas 
ing of the nozzle; B, the spigot; C, the spout; 
and D, an elbow projecting from the outer cas 
ing or shell, A, adapted to be screwed or other 
wise coupled to the hose. 
In carrying out my invention I cast the said 
outer casing and elbow in one hollow piece, 
the end of the elbow a, which is designed to 
connect with the hose, being enlarged and pro 
vided with a screw-thread for the purpose of 
such connection, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The spigot B is slightly tapering, as usual, 
and passes through the outer shell, the pro 
jecting end, b, being provided with a screw. 
thread on which the spout C, which has a cor 
responding screw-thread, is secured, as shown 
in Figs, 1 and 5. Through the wall of the 
spigot is an oblong aperture or port, c, adapted 
to coincide, when required, with a similar aper 
ture, c', opening from the elbow into the outer 
casing or shell, A. The water passage or out 
let through the spigot and spout is round and 
tapering to a comparatively Small exit, d. 
It should be observed that a spring-washer, 
e, separately and clearly represented in Fig. 
Io 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
S 5 
65 
75 
4, is interposed between the ends of the spout 
and the outer shell, where the two are con 
nected, as shown in Fig. 1, in order to facili. 
tate the safe turning or operation of the spigot, 
as will be readily understood. 
A projecting lug, f, operates as a stop to 
limit the movement of the spigot by coming 
in contact with the shoulders s of a recess in 
the casing, as indicated in Figs. 1, 2, and 5. 
The operation of my improved jet-nozzle and 
sprinkler is as follows: By turning the water 
full on-that is, by turning the spigot so that 
the two apertures or ports at c, Fig. 1, exactly 
and fully coincide-the water will be thrown 
out of the spout in a single jet or stream; but 
by turning the spigot so that the two aper 
tures only partially coincide, the water is 
forced against the circular side of the Water. 
passage in Such a manner as to cause it to ro 
tate violently in its passage through the spigot 
and spout and to emerge from the latter in a 
spray. It is evident, however, that the water 
may, by various changes in the form of con 
struction, have imparted to it previous to its 
exit from the spout the rotary motion herein 
described, and I do not, therefore, limit myself 
to the exact form of construction herein shown. 8o 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and wish to secure by Letters Patent, 
IS 
1. A combinedjet and spray u0Zzle composed 
of the outer casing or shell, A, provided with 
the elbow D, the spigot B, adapted to pass 
through the shell A, the spout C, adapted to 
screw upon the spigot B, all the parts being 
arranged to operate substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
2. In a nozzle, a hollow plug or spigot open 
at the smaller end for an outlet, and having 
the inlet-port at the side, in combination with 
a shell or casing of any suitable form arranged 
and adapted to deliver the water or fluid from 
one and the same aperture in the form of either 
a jet or stream or of a spray, at the will of the 
operator, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth and shown. 
have hereunto set my hand this 17th day of 
August, 1881. 
Witnesses: 
WM. M. CELARKE, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I Ioo 
95 
OLIVER DRAKE, 
CHARLES WINTERS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248655.txt	(No Model.) 
L. J. E. JACQUET, 
FLUID METER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 248,655, 
Patented 00t, 25, 1881. 
 
  
O N 
N 
Sai NiN 
. A. A 
6 
3. 
See 
22 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
l, 
i 
 
 
AN N 2 
S; 
 
C 
I 
WN 
All 
I 
l. 3' " 
AN, WA-2 
rift, 
N 2 
A HITUIH II N N 
NSSNs 2 NNN 
2 --- 
 
WITNESSES. 
 
PETCTS, Photo-Lithographor, Washington. D. C. 
L. J. E. JACQUET. 
FLUID METER, 
(No Model.) 
No. 248,655, 
 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oot, 25, 1881. 
Aiy. 7 
A y. 9. 
2 
SE IS 
WITNESSES 
a/6/6-2. 
save teamxow) 
64-4, 32-/6-2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEON J. E. JACQUET, OF PARIS, FRANCE, 
FLUID-METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,655, dated October 25, 1881. 
Application filed June 25, 1881. (No model.) Patented in France April 1, 1881. 
O 
O is a shell or casing mounted on the top of 55 
In the cylinder plays a piston, N, which may 
Be it known that I, LONJULES EDOUARD be constructed of two cupped leather disks 
placed back to back and clamped between 
metal disks. 
the cylinder L, and containing the valve mech 
anism and the several receiving and discharg 
ing chambers for the fluid. This chamber is 
readily removable, whereby the interior mech 
anism may be the better got at and examined. 6o 
A is a chamber which communicates directly 
with the cylinder L. above the piston. D is a 
chamber which communicates with the cylin 
der, below the piston, through a passage, H. 
B is the induction-chamber, which is in direct 65 
communication with the induction pipe or in 
let E, and C is the eduction-chamber, which is 
in direct communication with the eduction pipe 
or outlet G. These chambers communicate 
with each other through valve-orifices o 0 o' o', 7o 
which are controlled by puppet-valves K. k K' 
k', mounted adjustably on valve-stems E. E., 
which play through the axes of the valve-ori 
fices. The valves K lic? are seated inside the 
induction-chamber B, the valve K in the cham- 75 
ber A, and the valve k in the chamber D. The 
arrangement is such that the valves k and lic 
seat simultaneously, and the valves K and K 
simultaneously-the two former seat and the 
two latter lift at the same time, and vice versa. 8o 
The valve-stems have bearings in screw-sockets 
b b in the outer Wall of chamber D at their one 
end, and bearings in bushed sockets c' c at 
their other end, and they are connected rigidly 
together by a cross-head, F. (Shown in eleva- 85 
tion in Fig. 9.) Thus it will be seen that the 
two valve-stems and the cross-head form a rigid 
frame, and the valves are unable to move in 
dependently of each other. With the valves 
standing in the position shown in the drawings 90 
the fluid from the cylinder above the piston 
(which is depressed) is free to pass out through 
the chamber A, through one of the valve-ori 
fices 0, into the chamber C, and thence through 
the eduction pipe or outlet G.; and the fluid 95 
entering at the induction pipe or inlet E is free 
to pass into the chamber B, thence through 
one of the valve-orifices o' into the chamber D, 
and thence to the cylinder under the piston 
through the passage H. Thus the piston will I oo 
To all whom it may concern: 
JACQUET, a citizen of the French Republic, 
residing at Paris, France, have invented cer 
tain Improvements in Fluid-Meters, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of fluid 
meters in which the fluid is received and dis 
charged from a cylinder on each side of a pis 
ton which plays therein. The capacity of the 
cylinder and the number of strokes of the pis 
ton therein determine the quantity of fluid 
which has passed through the meter, and the 
movement of the piston is utilized to register 
the quantity passed through by its action on 
the registering mechanism. The apparatus 
comprises three features-the measuring-cyl 
inder and its pistons, the receiving and dis 
charging chambers, with their valves and other 
mechanism, and the registering mechanism. 
The latter forms no part of my present inven 
tion, except so far as will be hereinafter dis 
tinctly set forth. 
In the drawings which serve to illustrate my 
invention, Figure 1 is a vertical section taken 
in the plane of the line i 1 in Fig. 2. Fig. 1's 
is a cross-section of the piston-rod Onlinea ac, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section through 
the casing, taken in the plane of the line 22 in 
Fig.1-thatis, in the plane of axes of the valve 
stems. Fig. 3 is a vertical section through the 
valve casing and chambers, the half on the 
right being taken in the plane of the line / ) 
in Fig. 1, looking to the right, and the half on 
the left taken in the plane of the line & 2 in the 
same figure, looking to the left. Figs. 4 and 
5 are respectively a side and front elevation, 
and Fig. 6 is a plan, of a seat or chair, which 
will be referred to more particularly hereinaf 
ter. Figs. 7 and S are respectively a front and 
side elevation of a knife-edged lever, which 
will be more particularly referred to hereinaf. 
ter. Fig. 9 is a front elevation of a tie which 
connects the valve-stems. All of the detached 
views are on a larger scale than Figs. 1, 2, and 3. 
L is a cylinder, which may be of cast-iron, 
with a thin lining-cylinder, ct, of copper, brass, 
or other non-oxidizable metal or material. This 
lining may be simply soldered or otherwise se 
cured to the main cylinder at its upper end. 
25 
35 
45 
2 
24S,655 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
I o5 
be lifted by the incoming fluid, and in lifting 
will force out the fluid above it. When it 
reaches the end of its upstroke it shifts the 
valves (by mechanism which is hereinafter de 
scribed) and changes the direction of the cur 
rents. The fluid will now be free to pass from 
the chamber B, through one of the valve-ori 
fices o', into the chamber A, and thence to the 
cylinder above the piston, while the fluid below 
the piston will be free to pass out through the 
passage H to the chamber D, and thence 
through one of the valve-orifices 0 to the cham 
ber C and outlet G. 
I will now describe the mechanisin for shift 
ing the valves through the medium of tappets 
on the moving piston-rod. 
Referring to Figs. 4, 5, and 6, P is a chair or 
bearing-piece, mounted at three points on the 
casing O. This chair has guides M M to re 
ceive guide-flanges did, Fig. 1's, on the piston 
rod Q, and a re-entering angular bearing, e, to 
receive the upper edge or ridge of a blade-sup 
port, f, on an elbow-lever, W. (Shown enlarged 
in Figs. 7 and 8.) The lower edge of the sup 
port frests on a spring, (1, (see Figs. 1 and 3,) 
which is suspended by two rods, h. h, hung on 
knife-edge supports ll, which reston provisions 
on the casing O. Thus it will be seen that the 
spring g serves to press the supportf upward 
and keep it firmly seated in the angle e of the 
chair P. 
The lever W has two arms, I and J, arranged 
at right angles to each other, the vertical arm I 
being arranged to engage an aperture in the 
center of the cross-head F, and the horizontal 
arm J being arranged to alternately engage 
shoulders or projections R. R. on the piston-rod 
as it moves up and down. The bearings l l of 
the suspension-rods are arranged vertically 
over the axis of the lever W. On each side of 
the lever W are arranged elbow-levers XX, 
pivoted loosely to said lever on a pin, m. These 
elbow-levers have broader arms than those of 
the lever W, which arms are lettered i and j. 
So far as described the operation is as fol 
lows: The piston (see lig. 1) is supposed to 
have reached the end of its downstroke and 
shifted the valves. As it rises again and nears 
the end of its upstroke the shoulder R takes 
under the arms j j of the side levers, which 
hang a little below the arm J of the central 
lever. These are lifted until they are level 
with the arm J, when all rise together. This 
pressure upward under the arm J serves to 
swing the spring g until the blade-supportf 
stands vertically. In assuming this position, 
however, the spring () is distended, and the 
blade f and lever W, to which it is secured, 
placed in a position of unstable equilibrium, as 
o will be well understood. In bringing the arms 
j of the side levers up to a level with the arm 
J, as above stated, the arms i of said levers are 
advanced beyond the arm I, and they now, as 
the piston continues to rise, strike the front 
5 side of the openings in the cross-head F and 
push the valves slightly from their seats. The 
fluid now rushes through the openings thus 
made, and an equilibrium is established which 
relieves the pressure on the valves. At this 
moment the piston reaches the end of its up 
stroke, the last movement being sufficient to 
disturb the unstable equilibrium of the blade 
support f and permit the spring to act upon 
the valves through the arm I with sufficient 
force to push the valves k k' off their seats far 
enough to seat the valves K K firmly. Thus 
it will be seen that the spring g serves to seat 
two of the valves, while the movement of the 
piston-rod serves to unseat the other two. 
In its downward movement the shoulder R' 
on the piston-rod acts on the upper side of the 
arms Jiji, and by a downward pressure pro 
duces a reversal of the operation last described, 
as will be well understood. At the moment 
the valves are so shifted the parts will assume 
the position shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
It may be well to remark that the levers X 
are not absolutely necessary; but in the larger 
meters, where the pressure on the seated valves 
is great, the strength of the spring g should be 
proportionately increased. This may be reg 
ulated by means of the nuts on the suspension 
rodsh. Other forms of springs than that shown 
may be employed-as, for instance, g may be a 
rigid bar suspended by or arranged to rest on 
Springs. 
V is a ratchet-wheel arranged to be rotated 
by means of pawls T pivoted to the piston-rod, 
and by this means to communicate motion to 
some goodform of registering apparatus, which 
may be placed in a suitable casing, Y. 
All of the parts exposed to the fluid should 
be non-oxidizable, and I prefer to construct 
the valves, valve-stems, &c., of brass. 
My meter opposes very little obstruction to 
the passage of the fluid, and the valves shift 
so quickly as to prevent any leakage of fluid 
not measured. This is one of the most impor 
tant features of my meter. 
I am aware that there are various forms of 
spring-valve movements used in fluid-meters, 
the valve being held in place by means of 
latches while the spring is being compressed 
by the movement of the piston; and I am also 
aware that an oscillating weight arranged to 
topple over when brought to a vertical posi 
tion by the movement of the piston has been 
used, and I make no claim to these features, 
broadly. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
1. A fluid-meter comprising the following 
named elements-that is to say: a cylinder, a 
piston which plays or reciprocates therein, 
chambers A and D, which communicate with 
opposite ends of the cylinder and also with the 
induction and eduction clambers by four ori 
fices controlled by valves, the said induction 
and eduction chambers, the four valves, two 
in the induction-chamber, one in the chamber 
A, and one in the chamber D, and all arranged 
to move together in unison, the elbow-lever W. 
claim- 
- 
II5 
I 25 
I 3o 
 
24S,655 
3. 
O 
and its spring, and the piston-rod provided 
with projections to actuate said lever and thus 
shift the valves, all combined and arranged to 
operate substantially as set forth. 
2. In a fluid-meter, the mechanism for first 
lifting the valves slightly from their seats by 
direct pressure of the piston, whereby pressure 
is removed from the said valves, and then shift 
ing them suddenly by spring-pressure inde 
pendent of the piston, which consists of the 
elbow-lever W, mounted on the spring g, the 
elbow lever or levers X, mounted on the lever 
W, and the bar or cross-head which couples 
the valves together, provided with an aperture 
to engage the upright arms of the levers W 
and X, all arranged to operate substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the cylinder and 
its inclosed piston, of the chambers A, B, C, 
and D, the inlet and outlet E and G, the valve 
stems EE", mounted in the casing of the said 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. M. HoOPER, 
CHARLES MARDELET. 
chambers, the valves Kle K' l', fixed to said 
stems, and arranged to close the valve-orifices o 
o', the cross-head F, the chair P, elbow-lever 
W, blade-supportf, and spring g, hung as 
shown, all arranged to operate substantially 
as and for the purposes Set forth. 
4. A fluid-meter comprising a cylinder, L, 
piston N, piston-rod Q, provided with projec 
tions R and R', the casing O, chambers A, B, 
C, and D, inlet E, outlet G, valve-stems EE, 
cross-head F, valves Kk K' k", spring g, sus 
pended as shown, elbow-levers WXX, blade 
bearingf, and chair P, all arranged to oper 
ate substantially as herein set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses, 
LEON JULES EDOUARD JACQUET, 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248755.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 248,755. 
. 
N. C. JESSUP. 
LIFE BOAT, 
Patented 00t, 25, 1881. 
. 2 &s X 
 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
NATHAN C. JESSUP, OF SOUTHAMPTON, NEW YORK. 
FE-BOAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,755, dated October 25, 1881. 
Application filed February 1, 1881. 
(No model.) 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NATHAN C. JESSUP, of 
Southampton, in the county of Suffolk and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Surfor LifeBoats, 
of which the following is a specification. 
In the drawings annexed, Figure 1 presents. 
a side elevation of my improved boat; Fig. 2, 
a plan view. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section; 
lig. 4, a cross-section on a se, and IFig. 5 a. 
Cross-section. On O O. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
surf or life boat which shall possess great 
strength against strains or the shock of waves, 
great impenetrability as regards leakage or 
punctures, and at the same time be very light 
and buoyant, and also self-righting and self. 
bailing in a certain manner, even in very rough 
SeaS. 
To this end I construct the hull of about the 
usual form, but with an inner and outer shell, 
the inner one, a, being constructed of light, 
strong Wood or similar material, built up in 
about the usual manner, while the outer one, 
b, is made of thin tenacious sheet metal, pref. 
erably steel or copper or tough iron. This 
metal shell may be formed in plates riveted or 
otherwise secured together, and fixed close on to 
the wooden hull or inner shell, the metal being 
galvanized, and all joints and nail or rivet 
heads being soldered over, so as to make the 
metal shell absolutely water-tight. By gal 
Vanizing the metal plates they can be more 
easily soldered at the joints, and are better pro 
tected from oxidation. This shell, however, as 
may be observed from the drawings, does not 
fully inclose the inner hull, but rises thereon 
only to a level with the deck, or thereabout, 
which is a little above the water-line. It may 
now be seen that these two shells mutually 
complement and re-enforce each other, and give 
to the boat a combination of important quali 
ties. Thus the inner wooden hull, while being 
quite light, has great stiffness compared with 
its weight, and it hence stiffens and supports 
the thin outer metal shell, which would other 
wise be readily collapsible; while, on the other 
hand, the inner wooden shell, which would be 
liable to Spring a leak from Opening of joints, 
or be easily punctured by sharp contacts, is 
thoroughly protected from this by the outer 
shell of thin metal, which makes the boat alb 
solutely water-tight and impenetrable to punc 
tures or the shock of waves under all ordinary 
conditions; and it may be readily understood 
that these several qualities are more perfectly 
obtained with less weight by this combination 
of the two shells than could be obtained with 
a boat made of either material alone. 
It may be understood that the effect of hav 
ing the metal shell terminate at the deck-line 
is that this disposes the center of gravity Well 
down in the boat, so that it is thus more cer 
-tain to right when capsized, and also that it 
increases the capacity and buoyancy of the 
boat. To further increase the buoyancy and 
tendency to right I curve the bow and stern 
ends of the boat a little higher than usual,"so 
that the inclosed space below the deck, which 
constitutes an air-chamber, rises higher in each 
end of the boat than usual, thus bringing the 
points of greatest buoyancy higher up at the 
extreme ends, so that when the boat is turned 
over these ends will possess greater leverage 
to right the boat than would be otherwise the 
CaSe. 
As before mentioned, the entire inner hull 
may be made of wood, the keel and ribs being, 
say, of oak, while the planking is preferably 
of cedar; and I would note that by means of 
the outer metal shell this Wood-work may be 
made much lighter than is usual, yet the boat 
will be far stronger, stiffer, lighter, and more 
impenetrable than ordinary metal or wooden 
boats. Furthermore, the inner hull may be 
made of paper, in some cases, if found desir 
able. I generally prefer, however, to make the 
keel and stem and stern of oak, the ribs of steel, 
of T form in cross-section, as shown in Fig. 3, 
and the side planking of cedar, as represented 
in the drawings. The combination of the steel 
T-ribs with the wooden keel and planking is, 
however, particularly good, as the T-ribs give 
the boat much greater lateral stiffness than 
would be possible with Wooden ribs. The en 
tire frame, including the keel, Inay, however, 
be made of steel, of T-section, and I prefer to 
fix along the keel, on the inside of the boat, a 
45 
 
2 
24 S,255 
form of hog-beam, c, in about the common 
manner, to give the boat longitudinal stiffness 
against "hogging. 
The deck in d crosses the lullabout midway, 
as shown, or a little lower than half the depth 
thereof, and curves longitudinally about par 
allel with the gunwale of the hull, as shown. 
A peculiar feature of this deck, however, is 
that it is concave in cross-section, so that any 
water that the boat may ship will always tend 
to accumulate at the center, and thus keep her 
on an even keel. Furthermore, the deck is so 
curved lengthwise that the lowest point is near 
the stern, so that the Water shipped tends to 
ward the stern and elevates the bow. Now, on 
this lower part of the deck are formed depres 
sions or pockets.ff on each side, as shown in 
Figs. 2 and 4, which depressions are abrupt on 
the line g, which line presents an upright face 
or abutment in transverse view, as seen in Fig. 
4, while these pockets incline gradually from 
the lines h. h outward and backward toward the 
sides of the boat and toward the abutments (1 (1. 
In the sides of the boat opposite these depres 
sions ports are formed, which are provided 
each with a hinged door or valve, i, which open 
outward, and are hinged on spring-hinges or 
their equivalents, with a constant tendency to 
open. A line, , however, extends from these 
valves and rises through an opening in the 
seat, so that by pulling on said line and twist 
ing it around a cleat the person sitting on the 
seat may thus close the ports, and on the other 
hand, by relaxing the line, the ports will at once 
open, as will be readily understood. It will 
now be seen that any water which the boat may 
ship in going through a heavy sea will run 
down the center of the concave deck into the 
pockets.ff, and be there deflected toward the 
sides by the upright faces g g of the pockets, 
and as soon as the Valves i i are opened by 
the occupant on the seat this Water will at once 
escape overboard, thus immediately relieving 
the boat of the water, while the valves may 
be again immediately closed to prevent the en 
trance of any water through the ports. 
It may be noted from the drawings that the 
deck is also formed in two shells, similar to the 
hull, the lower shell, m, being of light cedar 
or other Wood, supported on cross-beams and 
center stanchions, as usual, while the upper 
shell, d, which is closely laid onto the former, 
is made of the same material as the outer shell 
of the hull, preferably sheet-steel, galvanized, 
and soldered over all joints and rivet-heads, 
thus giving the deck the same qualities as the 
hull, as already described-viz., strength, light 
ness, and impenetrability. 
The metal sheeting of the deck is curved 
well up around its edge, where it meets with 
the sides of the boat, as shown best in Fig. 5, 
so as to insure Water-tightness at this part. 
It may now be readily appreciated that the 
Several features described combine to form a 
greatly-improved surf or life boat whose supe 
rior lightness enables it to be readily handled 
and launched through the starf, and gives it 
buoyancy when afloat, while the compound 
nature of its hull gives it great power of re 
sisting waves, leaks, and punctures, and thus 
enabling it to retain its buoyancy. These 
qualities are hence not only of intrinsic value, 
but possess an extrinsic value also, as they 
inspire greater confidence in the crew, which 
gives them greater audacity and courage in the 
dangerous work of reaching Wrecks and sav 
ing life. 
It may be noted, on reference to Fig. 1, that 
the sheets or plates forming the external metal 
shell are arranged vertically or parallel with 
the ribs and at rightangles to the wooden plank 
ing of the inner shell, which insures greater 
strength. 
I am aware that it is not new to sheath 
wooden vessels with metal plates which have 
been applied in sheets, each sheet being nailed 
separately to the vessel, that life-boats have 
been provided with valves to allow the escape 
of water, and that it is not new to construct 
vessels with angular iron ribs, and therefore 
I do not broadly claim either of these con 
structions. In my invention I make an outer 
shell of thin steel plates or sheets, which are 
all riveted together and soldered at the joints, 
thereby making a complete shell or vessel of 
sheet-steel practically in one piece, which fits 
closely to a complete non-metallic shell which 
forms the vessel proper. The deck of my boat 
is formed in substantially the same manner as 
the hull, and its steel layer is provided with 
an upturned edge, by which it is securely fast 
ened to the sides of the hull. Turning up the 
edge of the steel layer is far preferable to 
fastening a separate angle-plate to its edge, 
as the fastenings used to connect said angle 
plates would weaken the layer, and also leave 
places at the joint which would be liable to 
leak. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A sarf or life boat constructed with an 
inner shell of light non-metallic material and 
an outer shell of thin sheet metal, said metal 
shell being composed of galvanized sheets of 
thin steel fastened and soldered at its joints, 
as described, and completely inclosing the 
lower part of the inner shell, and terminating 
at or near the deck-line thereof, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
2. In a surf or life boat provided with bail 
ing pockets and ports, as described, and in 
combination therewith, the hinged valves i i, 
one at each side of the boat, and opened out 
Wardly by Springs, and a rope or band, r, con 
nected to both valves, and adapted to forcibly 
draw either or both of said valves to the port 
or ports of the boat to close the same, substan 
tially as specified. 
3. In a life-boat, the deck d, made concave 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
I o5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
15 
 
24S55 
3 
in cross-section and curved lengthwise to bring and backwardly to the sides of the boat and 
the lowest point near the stern, whereby the toward abutments g, as described. 
shipped Water may run to the stern and there 
by raise the bow, as described. 
4. In a life-boat, the valved pockets f, ar- 
ranged at the lower part of the deck, and in- 
clined gradually from the lines h outwardly 
CHAs. M. EIIGGINs, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
NATEAN C, JESSUP. 
Witnesses: 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248855.txt	(Model.) 
J. J. GREEN OUGH 
APPARATUS FOR PIER, CING EARS AND INSERTING EAR RINGS, 
N0, 248,855, 
Patented Nov. 1, 1881, 
2 
it' 
s 
TW 
I. 
yr; Araxxary H 
YNE 
. 
V 
Aza. 6. 
2 
 
f 
 
NEEzza 
al 
s 
77/zzesses 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN JAMES GREENOUGH, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK. 
APPARATUS FOR PIERCNG EARS AND INSERTING EAR-RINGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,855, dated November 1, 1881. 
Application filed August 1, 1881. (Model.) 
A 
: 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN JAMES GREEN 
OUGE, of Syracuse, county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, have invented a certain new 
and useful Instrument or Apparatus for Pierc 
ing Ears and Inserting Ear-Rings therein, of 
which the following is a description, with refer 
ence to the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a general view of the instrument; 
Fig. 2, a longitudinal section through the axis; 
Fig. 3, atop plan with the cover removed, show. 
ing the drum d and eccentric-groove cam d'; . 
Fig. 4, the inside of the cover with piercing 
needle in place; Fig. 5, enlarged view of the 
point of the needle, with the end of the ear 
Iring in its recess ready for insertion; Fig. 6, 
forceps for holding the ear-ring while being in 
serted; Fig. 7, a modified construction of the 
apparatus, showing a different arrangement of 
well-known mechanical elements for effecting 
the same purpose. 
The purposes of my invention are, first, to 
pierce the ear for the insertion of an ear-ring 
or other proper object, and then to instantly 
withdraw the needle or piercer by the single im 
pulse of a spring, by which the needle is pro 
jected through the ear and retracted so quickly 
as to be painless; secondly, to insert with the 
piercing-needle an ear-ring or other object by 
the same impulse or at the same instant of 
time that the hole is punched therefor, and to 
permit the ear-ring, &c., to remain lodged in 
the incision. The hole is bored, the ear-ring 
inserted, and the needle withdrawn at a single 
instantaneous operation. 
The apparatus shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4 con 
sists of a cylindrical case, a, at or near the cen 
ter or axis of which there is a stud, b, that pro 
jects through the bottom of the case and forms 
the shank of handle l', by which the stud can 
be revolved to wind up the coiled spring c, af. 
fixed by its inner end thereto. Just outside 
the case there is a ratchet-wheel, b', affixed to 
and turning with the handle that is stopped 
by a spring-pawl, b. A hollow drum, d, is cen 
tered and turns on the stud b within the case, 
and incloses the coiled spring c, the outer end 
of which is affixed to the rim of the drum. On 
the face of this drum (seen in Fig. 2) there is 
an eccentric or cam groove, d', into which a stud, 
e', (see Fig. 4) fits. This stud is on a slide, to 
which the needle or piercer e is attached, so 
that when the drum d makes a revolution, im 
pelled by spring c, the needle is driven forward 
radially and back to its former position in a 
To prevent the drum from making 
right line. 
more than a single revolution there is a mov 
- able guard-catch or stationary projection, f, 
from the inside of the case, (see Fig. 3,) that 
comes in contact with a projection, f', on the 
drum and stops it. Before the drum is ready 
for action it must be turned back or released 
from projection f and be held by the spring 
catch or trigger, g, in contact with f', as in Fig. 
3, by which the drum can be released for an 
other revolution. To give the spring proper 
tension it is wound up by turning the handle 
b', like a watch. 
The cover h, Fig. 4, is hinged, or otherwise 
attached to the case, having a projection or 
slide-block,h', affixed to itsinner surface, form 
ing a guide, through which the needle slides. 
The needle is cylindrical and has a groove or 
slot formed in one side (see Fig. 5) from the 
point backward. The point may be made coni 
cal or triangular, with lancet-shaped point, or 
of any other form found best for easy piercing, 
and it should be quite sharp. Directly over 
the piercere there is a radial slot through the 
cover in the line of motion, which serves as a 
guide to the needle-slide e, and in which slides 
the forceps-block i, that is carried forward by 
the needle-slide. This block i has a groove in 
it to put the ear-ring in, where it is held by the 
movable eccentric jaw of the forceps, or other 
suitable device that will firmly hold the point 
of the ear-ring in the groove of the needle until 
it is inserted in the ear, and then instantly re 
lease it from the instrument, while the needle 
retreats without carrying it back. The instru 
ment, being entirely freed, can be instantly re 
moved from the ear, leaving the ear-ring in 
place. 
To hold the ear firmly while being pierced I 
employ a spring-forceps, m, hinged in proper 
position to the case so as to embrace the lobe 
of the ear at the point opposite the point of 
the needle with a proper pressure to resist the 
thrust of the needle through it. A soft cap 
or pad may be placed loosely upon this, into 
75 
95 
OC) 
IO 
25 
35 
So 
 
2 
24 SS55 
35 
40 
This cap can slip piercing-needle, and having a reciprocating 
movement, with a spring by which the needle 
is made to move in both directions by the con 
tinuous action of the spring in one direction, 
substantially as and for the purposes specified. 
2. The grooved or recessed needle, as de 
scribed, in an ear-piercing apparatus formed to 
receive the point of the ear-ring, &c., to be in 
serted with the needle, as above specified. 
3. The combination of an ear-ring with an 
ear-piercing needle, substantially as described, 
by means of a holder that unites them, and 
moves forward with the needle, so as to carry 
the ear-ring through the ear at the same time 
that it is pierced, substantially as herein speci 
fied. 
4. The detached movable forceps for holding 
the ear-ring in the groove of the needle, in com 
bination with the needle-slide, substantially as 
and for the purposes specified. 
5. The forceps or holder for holding the wire 
or shank of an ear-ring to be inserted with the 
needle, as described, in combination with a 
stud or projection by which the forceps are 
opened to release said ear-ring after it is in 
serted, substantially as specified. 
which the needle is thrust. 
off when the instrument is removed, if found 
desirable. 
I contemplate other modified applications of 
the impulse of a spring to thrust forward and 
retract a needle or piercer-such, for instance, 
as otherwise connecting the slide of the needle 
with the drum by a pitman instead of the cam 
groove. Another type is shown in Fig. 7, where, 
instead of using a drum, the needle-slide e is 
attached to a toggle-joint, n, the upper end of 
which is jointed to the case properly formed 
therefor. The center joint of the toggle is 
coupled with a slide-rod, p, that extends into 
the hollow handle q, where it is surrounded by 
aspiral spring, by whichitisforced forward, car 
rying this joint past the center to the same dis 
tance on the opposite side of the center line as 
it starts from. This movement causes the nee 
dle-slide to move forward and back by the single 
impulse of the spring, as in the other figure. 
The collar on rod p has a stud, r, on it, that 
works in a slot, 8, in the case-handle, and when 
set, as in the drawings, may have a bayonet or 
other catch to hold it ready for action. The 
other details are similar to those first described, 
and need not be repeated. 
I claim the following as my invention in the 
above: 
1. The combination, by mechanism substan 
tially as herein described, of a slide bearing a 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT B. MoRGAN, 
JESPER. C. MORGAN. 
JOHN JAMES GREENOUGH. 
45 
So 
55 
IS 
2 d 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US248955.txt	 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 248,955, 
J. H. SANDERSON. 
CANOPY STANDARD, 
Patented Nov. 1, 1881. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN H. SANDERSON, OF GREENFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CANOPY-STANDARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 248,955, dated November 1, 1881. 
Application filed August 15, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN HORATIO SAN 
DERSON, of Greenfield, in the county of Frank 
lin and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
certain Improvements in Canopy-Standards, 
of which the following is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to canopy-standards for 
use on carriages and vehicles of all descrip 
tions; and it consists in forming the standard 
in two parts, and connecting said parts by a 
large stud or rivet having a neck or body to 
receive an annulus formed upon one of the sec 
tions of the standard, in coinbining with the 
annulus means for regulating at will the fric 
tion between it and its pivot or journal, and 
in other details hereinafter explained. The 
standard may be used singly at the middle or 
side of a seat or at the rear of a vehicle, or there 
may be two standards, one at either side. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figurel rep 
resents a perspective view of a canopy provided 
with my improved standards; Fig. 2, a verti 
cal central section through the joint of one of 
the standards. 
The object of this invention is to simplify 
and cheapen the construction of canopy sup 
ports or standards and to render their adjust 
ment more expeditious and easy. To this end 
the joint is so formed that the friction between 
the two parts of the standard or between the 
moving portion and its pivot or journal shall 
be sufficient to retain the canopy in any posi 
tion to which it may be adjusted, yet not so 
great as to prevent the ready change of adjust 
Inent by applying a moderate pressure to the 
upper portion of the standard. 
The construction will be readily understood 
by referring to the drawings, in which A rep 
resents the standard, composed of a base-sec 
tion, ct, and a swinging or adjustable section, 
b; and B, the stud or rivet connecting said parts. 
The stud or rivet B is designed to connect the 
tWO Sections of the standard and at the same 
time to form a journal for an annulus, c, formed 
upon one of said sections, and in its preferred 
form consists of the journal or neckd, provided 
at its outer face or edge with a radial flange, 
e, and having a stem or stud, f, projecting from 
its inner face, as shown in Fig. 2. When the 
stud or rivet is thus formed the annulus of the 
one section is arranged to encircle the journal 
d, and the stemf is-inserted through an open 
ing in the other section and expanded, headed, 
or otherwise secured against removal and also 
against rotation. 
It is apparent that the stud may be of uni 
form diameter from end to end, if desired; but 
the construction described and shown is pre 
ferred for the reason that the flange e cannot 
be caused to bear directly upon the side of the 
annulus c, or to press thereon with any con 
siderable force or friction, it being desired that 
the friction shall be produced and regulated 
solely by the binding or clamping of the annu 
lus upon its journal. The annulus is made to 
fit so closely upon its journal or pivot d as to 
produce a considerable degree of friction be 
tween them, which may be augmented to any 
desired extent by means of a screw or other 
clamping device, the annulus being open at One 
side, as shown atg, to permit it to be contracted 
or expanded, as may be found necessary. 
In practice, that section of the standard upon 
which the annulus is formed is preferably bi 
furcated, the opening between the two stems 
or branches extending some distance from the 
open side of the annulus to afford sufficient 
elasticity to render the clamping or release of 
the annulus certain and easy. Thus formed, 
the two branches can be drawn together and 
the annulus be made to bind upon its journal 
to any desired extent by means of a bolt or 
screw, B, passing through both branches, as 
shown. 
In order that the degree of friction between 
the hub or journal and annulus may be varied 
at will without the aid of special tools, the 
screw is formed with a button or thunb-piece, 
by which it may be turned when necessary. 
In the practical use of the standards it is in 
tended that the screws or clamping devices 
shall be set to produce a proper degree of fric 
tion and then left at such adjustment, the top 
or canopy being moved to any point or position 
desired by simply applying pressure sufficient 
to overcome the friction, which, after the press 
ure ceases, will retain the canopyin its adjusted 
position. It is, however, apparent that the 
screws or clamping devices may be loosened 
in adjusting the top or canopy when desirable 
SO to do. 
While I have described the journal or con 
necting-rivet as being made solid, it is obvious 
that it may be formed of sheet metal spun up 
95 
Od 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
24S,955 
standards, consisting of a hub or journal and 
a continuous unbroken encircling annulus fit 
ting closely thereon, substantially as set forth. 
2. A joint for canopy-standards, consisting 
of a hub or journal, an elastic encircling an 
nulus, and means, substantially such as shown 
and described, for causing the annulus to bind 
upon the hub, as explained. 
3. A joint for canopy-standards, consisting 
of a hub or journal and an unbroken encir 
cling annulus held in place by a flange project. 
ing radially beyond the circumference of said 
journal. 
4. A canopy-standard consisting of the sec 
tions a b and the connecting stud or rivet, 
constructed and applied as shown. 
5. In combination with the standard-section 
a, laving an opening to receive a rivet, and 
the section b, having the annulus c, the stud 
or rivet B, provided with the journal d, flange 
e, and stem f. 
JOEN E ORATIO, SANDERSON. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
E. P. MARSH, 
F. M. THOMIPSON. 
or drawn up in dies, or it may be cast hollow 
in order to render it light and cheap. It is 
likewise obvious that the journal may beformed 
directly upon either section of the standard 
and a flanged cap or plate employed to retain 
the annulus in place thereon. These and like 
modifications will readily suggest themselves 
to the practical mechanic. 
I am aware that a standardjoint has been 
inade in which a grooved hub or disk was em 
braced and clamped by a two-part clamp ell 
circling the same, and I do not claim such con 
struction. In my device the annulus is con 
tinuous and unbroken, and opens or springs 
from the lub or journal by reason of its inhe 
rent elasticity when the clamping device is 
loosened. Having no loose or detachable parts, 
there is no rattling or noise produced by its 
movement, and since the annulus cannot open 
sufficiently to pass over the flange of the hub 
or journal, it is impossible for it to become dis 
placed, even though the clamping-screw be en 
tirely removed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1. The herein - described joint for canopy 
5 I claim is 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249055.txt	W. H. JANNEY. 
GRAIN SEPARATOR 
No. 249,055, 
Patented Nev., 1, 1881, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
E::::: 
9. 
I 
sC. C. 
EHESH 
 
 
222222222222222S 
N. PeFERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM H. JANNEY, OF MARTINSBURG, WEST VIRGINIA. 
GRAIN-SEPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 249,055, dated November 1, 1881. 
Application filed December 1, 1879. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM E. JANNEY, of 
Martinsburg, in the county of Berkeley and 
State of West Virginia, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Grain-Sepa 
rators; and Idohereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accoln 
panying drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
thrashing - machine. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
section of the same, and Fig. 3 is a detail view 
of the shalkers. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the class of grain-separators which include a 
traveling endless-band elevator and a 'shaker' 
or means for separating the oats from the straw 
and conveying the latter away from the ima 
chine, while the grain passes downward and is 
winnowed by a fall-blast. 
My improvement relates to the construction 
and arrangement of the parts by which the 
course of the falling grain and blast is directed, 
the result attained being that the grain is more 
thoroughly cleaned, and without the aid of vi 
brating or other screens. 
A in the accompanying drawings marks the 
feed-cylinder, and B the straw or grain eleva 
tor, with a series of transverse slats attached 
thcreto. 
C is the fan, located in rear of an inclined 
board, D, with its upper end separated by a 
blast-passage, d, from the under side of the 
grain-elevator, and its lower end provided with 
a rearward extension, d", separated from a 
rearwardly - extending board, d, by a blast 
passage, d. The blast from the passage dacts 
upon the grain passing from the elevator B 
upon the shakers, while the blast from the pas 
saged acts upon the grain returned from the 
shakers by the inclined board E, and escapes 
downward through the opening d". 
E is the picker, disposed so as to take the 
grain from the elevator B and pass it upon the 
shakers. The teeth of the picker are tangen 
tial to its periphery to permit the ready re 
moval of the grain, &c., therefrom, which fall 
upon the shalkers, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
E F are the shakers, two in number, and ar 
ranged each upon rolls e e, and so as to have 
a limited back-and-forward motion. These 
shakers are connected to a double-crank shaft, 
G, which acts upon the said shakers so as to 
catase them to move simultaneously in oppo 
site directions, and thus enable them to effect 
the separation of the grain falling thereon. 
These shakers are armed with teeth gg. The 
grain, after leaving the shakers, is returned 
upon an inclined board, H, and, falling upon 
the incline D and within the mill, is subjected 
to a second blast, as aforesaid, and is then 
passed down through opening d" into a suit 
able receptacle, (not shown,) being first blown 
against the inclied board I, down which it 
slides, while the chaff, short straw, and other 
light particles are carried on by the blast over 
tle top of the board. 
The elevator B consists of a slatted apron, 
with the under side of the upper portion rest 
ing upon or passing over an imperforate sur 
face or board, as seen in Fig. 2, while to the 
under side of the machine are fastened boards 
l, to catch and conveniently hold any fine par. 
ticles or refuse matter passing off at that point. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
The combination of the inclined board D, 
having the horizontal portion d', the horizon 
tal part d', having a downwardly-inclined front 
portion, and said part d being separated from 
part d' and from the base of the fan-box by 
narrow blast-spaces, the inclined guard-board 
I, separated from part d by opening d, the 
fan, shaker F, and return-board H, all arranged 
as shown and described, whereby a portion of 
the blast acts on the grain as it falls from the 
shaker and return-board, another portion as it 
passes over boards D d' d', and a third portion 
as it escapes downward into opening cl, as set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 17th day of 
November, 1879. 
WILLIAM E. JANNEY. 
Witnesses: 
E. S. TROXELL, 
JNO. A. BOYER, 
55 
9 O 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249156.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 249,156. 
 
 
 
C, M, BURGESS, 
FIRE IRON HOLDIER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet. 1, 
Patented Nov. 8, 1881. 
N. PETCRs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C 
(No Model.) 
No. 249,156, 
 
 
 
C. M. BURGESS, 
FIRE IRON HOLDER. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1881. 
feeRs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, n, c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEs M. BURGESs, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
RUSSELL & ERWIN MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FIRE-RON HOLDER. 
s 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 249,156, dated November 8, 1881. 
Application filed September 18, 1880. 
(No model. 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES M. BURGESS, 
of New Britain, in the county of Hartford and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Fire-Iron 
Holders, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
fire-iron holders in which a base, uprights, 
sides, and a fastening device are so constructed 
and combined that the parts may be readily 
set up and firmly secured together by means 
of the single fastening device at the upper 
ends of the uprights; and the objects of my 
improvements are to cheapen the construction 
and to make it so simple and convenient to set 
up that it may be transported in the knock 
down form. I attain these objects by the 
mechanism illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation; Fig. 2, a ver 
tical section. Fig. 3 is a top view with the 
ornamental top removed; Fig. 4, a horizontal 
section on line aa of Fig. 1; Fig. 5, a vertical 
section on line y 2) of Fig. 3; Fig. 6, a plan 
view of the base; Fig. 7, a front elevation, 
showing the inside of the lower end of one 
upright; and Fig. 8 is a side view of the same. 
A designates the base, consisting of a thin 
plate mounted upon suitable legs, and having 
openings (t, Fig. 6, at each corner, to receive 
the lower ends of the uprights B. These lower 
ends are each provided with an outwardly 
projecting hook or lug, b, which passes through 
the openings at and takes under the base, as 
shown in Fig. 2. The inside of the uprights, 
at their lower ends, are provided with grooves 
ec, to receive and hold the ends of the sides C, 
which form a box just above the base A. The 
upper ends of the uprights B curve inward to 
Ward each other, and are provided with up 
 
 
 
45 
55 
wardly-projecting lugs d. These upper ends 
are connected together by a circular plate, D, 
having openingse, Fig. 3, which receive the 
lugs d, and recesses fin the under side of said 
plate, which receive the upper ends of the up 
rights B, as shown in Fig. 5. The parts thus 
arranged can be detached only by throwing 
the upper ends of the uprights outward. They 
are held in place by an ornamental top piece, 
E, which surmounts the circular plate D and 
covers the lugs d, and a smaller ornament 
placed under the plate and upper ends of the 
uprights B, the same having a threaded rod 
in one part, which passes through the plate D 
and into a threaded hole in the other part, as 
shown in Fig. 2. 
The sides C are of such length, and the up 
rights are so formed, that the upper ends of 
the latter have to be sprung in a little in or 
der to connect them to the plate D, whereby 
the hooks at the lower end are always held in 
engagement with the base, so as to hold the 
parts together. 
Although I have shown a triangular base 
and three uprights, it is evident that the same 
invention may be embodied in a holder having 
a base of other form and a different number 
of uprights. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination of the base A, having open 
ings a, the uprights B, having hooks b at their 
lower ends and grooves c in their sides near 
their lower ends, the sides C, and a fastening 
device in which the curved upper ends of the 
uprights meet, substantially as described, and 
for the purpose specified. 
CHARLEs M. BURGESS. 
75 
Witnesses: 
THEO. E. SMITH, 
M. S. WIARD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249257.txt	2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
A, C, RICE, 
RAG ENGINE, 
Patented Nov. 8, 188l. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
- 
222222aves, 
r 
6 l? M6 u04/ 
Z722ez27 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 249,257, 
A. C. RICE. 
RAG ENGINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1881, 
 
 
 
 
" 
. 
y 
N - 
S 
Y 
t N 
W 
 
f . Ele -S- to HE1 - 
W 
A "S N 
te f 
| ZW. 
II 
- ?lali 
| 
2N 
N -: 
W 
: 
 
  
 
 
hars --------T 
 
 
 
 
S. 
 
 
W. 
Effeters 
E12 Af i His 
- grics A-El. 
 
E. 
N 
N 
r 
w 
4 
WWZZzzax sas, 
t 26 e- ca. 722, 
Zzzazzaz7. 
N. PEERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALVA. C. RICE, OF HOLYOKE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
RAG ENG NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 249,257, dated November 8, 1881. 
Application filed August 17, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
- 
. 
. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
I pivot a roll, as 8, and I secure a cam, as 7 
Beit known that I, ALV AC. RICE, of Hol 
whose outline is shown in Fig.V-firmly to the 
yoke, in the county of Hampden and State of 
shaft 17, at a point directly beneath each roll. 
roll bearing upon 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and useful 
8, with the periphery of the 
Improvement in Rag-Engines, of which the 
the periphery of the cam. . 
following is a specification and description. 
The upper ends of two or more rods, as 9, 
The object of my invention is to construct a 
are secured firmly in each upper block, 10, and 
rag-engine so that the beating-cylinder may be 
these rods extend down and their lower ends 
easily adjusted vertically to any desired point 
are firmly secured to or in the block13, as shown 
of proximity to the fixed plates or knives be 
in Fig. I. 
neath it and parallel thereto by the manipula 
It will thus be seen that the upper and lower 
tion of a single shaft, and I accomplish this 
blocks in each upright are firmly and securely 
by the mechanism substantially as hereinaf. 
connected by the rods 9, and that, both blocks 
ter described, and illustrated in the accompa 
in each upright are free to move in a vertical 
nying drawings, in which- 
. 
direction; but that the horizontal shaft 17 is 
Figure I is a side view of a rag-engine made 
arranged to revolve in fixed or stationary bear 
according to my invention. Fig. II is a plan 
ings in the uprights. 
view of the bearing-block containing the jour 
. It will also be seen that as the lower block, 
inal-boxin which the main shaft revolves. Fig. 
13, is suspended from the upper block, 10, and 
III is a vertical section of the same at line B. 
the latter or the roll 8 pivoted therein rests 
Fig. IV is a vertical section through the worm 
upon the can 7 in each upright, and as these 
pinion and operating or lifting cam at line A 
two cams, one beneath the block10 in each up 
of Fig. I. Fig. V, is a side view of the oper 
right, are fixed to the shaft 17 in a position co 
ating or lifting cam. Fig. VI is a transverse 
incident with each other, it is evident that if 
section through the vat, showing an end view 
the shaft 17 and its cams 7 be revolved, the 
of the engine; and Fig.VII is a vertical trans 
cams will operate to raise or lower both blocks 
verse section through one end of the frame, 
10 and 13 in each upright to precisely the same 
showing two small friction-rolls secured therein 
degree, or exactly the same distance, accord 
to take the side bearing of one of the bearing 
ing as the shaft 17 is revolved in one direction 
blocks. 
or the other. 
In the drawings, 11 represents the two up 
The main shaft 12 of the engine (the latter 
rights, forming a frame with a rectangular 
being of the ordinary construction) is hung or 
opening, as 30, in the lower portion of each, 
has its bearings at each end in the boxes 14, 
in which is fitted to slide vertically a block, 
which rest upon or are swiveled in the blocks 
as 13, provided with suitable guide-flanges to 
13. The shaft 17 projects at one end through 
keep it in its proper vertical position, and a 
the upright 11, and upon this projecting end I 
journal-box, as 14, is swiveled in each block, 
firmly secure a worm pinion or gear, as 6; and 
preferably by protuberances, as 25, resting in 
in suitable bearings bolted to the upright at 
recesses, as 26, whereby the journal-box may 
that end I secure a horizontal shaft, as 4, pro 
adapt itself to any irregularity in the move 
vided with a worm, as 5, to engage with said 
ment of the shaft independently of the block. 
pinion or gear, said horizontal shaft 4 being 
The middleportion of each upright 11 is pref. 
connected by a bevel-gear, as 3, with a verti 
erably cast solid, and a shaft, as 17, has its 
cal shaft, as 1, provided with a hand wheel or 
bearings at the upper part of this solid por 
winch, as 2, by which to turn it. By turning 
tion of the frame, as shown at 27 in Figs. IV 
the hand-wheel in one direction the shaft 17, 
and VI, and this shaft may also have a bear 
with the cams thereon, is made to revolve in 
ing in the upper end of a steady-frame, as 28, 
one direction through the medium of the bev 
at any desired point between the uprights 11. 
eled and worm gears, and the cams 7, by rotat 
Arectangular opening, as 31, is made in the 
ing against the periphery of the rolls 8 in the 
upper end of each upright 11, and in each said 
blocks 10, operate to raise the latter, together 
opening is fitted to slide freely a block, as 10, 
with the lower blocks, 13, and with them the 
similar in form to the lower block, 13, in which main shaft 12 and engine-cylinder thereon, and 
. 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
249,257 
bind in the frame in their movement therein. 
by turning the hand-wheel in the opposite di- I just themselves to the shaft if the blocks should 
rection the cylinder, with the shaft 12, is low 
ered. The cylinder being provided with knives 
Having thus described my invention, what 
which revolve past stationary knives or plates 
I claim as new is 
1. In a rag - engine, the combination, with 
fixed in the bed beneath the cylinder, it is evi 
the supporting-frame, of an operating-shaft 
dent that by this device for raising or lowering 
having its bearings in said frame, two operat 
the cylinder the knives at each end of the cyl 
ing-cams secured to said shaft, one at each end, 
inder Will be moved farther from or nearer to 
two blocks adapted to move vertically in each 
the fixed knives, precisely alike, and the cylin 
der will always remain perfectly parallel with 
end of said frame, one above each cam and 
supported thereby, and one below each cam, 
the bed, whether in a more or less elevated po 
and both blocks rigidly connected by suitable 
sition. It is also evident that this operation 
of elevating or depressing the cylinder may be 
rods or connecting medium, and the lower 
blocks adapted for the bearings of the main 
performed much more quickly than by the use 
shaft to which the rag - cylinder is secured, 
of the ordinary winch at each end of the shaft, . 
whereby the main shaft and cylinder may be 
or on each side of the vat, and much more ac 
adjusted vertically with reference to the bed 
curately than by such use of two Winches, and 
the adjustment of the cylinder to the station 
beneath by the rotation of said operating-shaft 
ary knives may be made absolutely parallel and 
and cams, substantially as described. 
perfect, and very easily. 
. 2. In a rag-engine, the combination, with 
the supporting - frame, of two bearing-blocks 
As the belt which is connected with the pull 
adapted to have a free vertical movement, one 
ley 32 to drive the main shaft 12 and the cyl 
inder usually runs from a driving pulley and 
in each end of the frame, and each supported 
by a vertically-movable block resting upon a 
shaft at nearly the same height, and would nat 
cam secured to the operating-shaft, and a self. 
urally draw the shaft 12 and the block 13, which 
adjusting journal-box swiveled in each bear 
supports the shaft, against the inside of the 
ing-block for the bearing of the main shaft, 
frame in a lateral direction, I pivot two fric 
substantially as described. 
tion-rolls, as 18, into the frame in such manner 
that the periphery of the rolls may just be flush 
3. In a rag-engine, the combination, with 
the supporting-frame, of two bearing-blocks 
with the bearing end of the block 13 in that 
adapted to receive the main cylinder-shaft and 
end of the frame nearest the pulley 32, as shown 
in Fig. VIII and in dotted lines in Figs. I and 
to have a free vertical movement, one in each 
end of the frame, an operating-shaft having its 
WI, so that the end of the block may bear against 
bearings in said frame and provided with cams 
said rolls in moving up or down, and much of 
supporting and adapted to operate two blocks 
the friction be removed thereby. 
above said, cams rigidly connected with said 
It is evident that the single horizontal shaft 
bearing-blocks, a gear or toothed wheel secured 
17, which I denominate the operating-shaft, 
to said operating-shaft, and a screw or worm 
may be rotated by any other suitable and equiv 
adapted to be operated in suitable bearings 
alent mechanism of sufficient power, which will 
and engaging with said gear or toothed wheel, 
cause the two cams, one in each frame or up 
whereby said operating-shaftis rotated in either 
right 11, to revolve with the same speed and 
direction to raise or depress said bearing-blocks 
to the same extent, to raise or depress each 
and the main cylinder-shaft resting therein, 
block 10 simultaneously and the same dis 
substantially as described. 
tance. 
The machine would be operative if the main 
shaft 12 rested in suitable bearings made in 
the upper side of the blocks 13; but I prefer 
to use the self-adjusting boxes, as they will ad 
T. A. CURTIS, 
C. S. EURLBUT. 
ALWA. C. RICE, 
Witnesses: 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249359.txt	 
(No Model.) 
M. R. HUTCHISON & J. L. WILEY. 
a 
CHURN, 
No. 249,359. 
Patented Now, 8, 1881, 
  
as - S. 
s 
 
a 
S. 
S S. 
 
37 ES 
2%a. 
INVENTORS 
22, 
2 (&e?. As 
"-ers, Photo-Lithographer, whistop. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MILES R, HUTCHISON AND JOSEPH L, WILEY, OF SEARON, OHIO. 
CHURN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 249,359, dated November 8, 1881. 
- 
Application filed May 4, 1881. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that we, MILES R. HuTCHISON 
and JOSEPH L. WILEY, both citizens of the 
United States, residents of Sharon, in the 
county of Noble and State of Ohio, have in 
vented a new and valuable Improvement in 
Churns; and we do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the construction and operation of the same, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to the 
letters and figures of reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a vertical sectional view of our improved 
churn. Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the 
same, and Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are detail views. 
Fig. 6 is an enlarged detail. 
This invention has relation to barrel-churns 
which are centrally pivoted and operate by vi 
bration; and the invention consists in the con 
struction and novel arrangement of parts, all 
as hereinafter shown and described. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
designates a folding stand or support, having 
on the upper ends of its branches the journal 
seats a, for the reception of the journals b of 
the barrel B, said journals extending from 
bracketplates or bases which are secured to the 
sides of the barrel. 
To the under side of the barrel are fastened 
the angular bracket-plates c, which are pro 
vided with squared holes d in their downturned 
ends, to receive the squared endse of the spring 
branches or hangers C, to which the weight D 
is secured. This weight is made of inexpen 
sive metal, and the hangers C have bent lower 
ends, which are embedded in the upper por. 
tion of the weight, the points at which they 
are embedded being some distance apart. The 
space between these hangers allows them full 
play without interference or danger of wrench 
ing out of the weight. When the weight is to 
be connected to the barrel the hangers are 
pressed toward each other at their upper ends 
and sprung into engagement with the brackets 
c by their outwardly-turned ends e. 
Any ordinary well-hooped keg or barrel may 
be employed for the churn-body. A rectangu 
lar opening is made in its upper portion for 
access to the interior, as shown in the draw 
ings, 
In the concave sides of the barrel-chamber 
O 
IS 
20 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
are fitted, by their curved edges g, the perma 
.nent side sections, D', of the middle transverse 
partition. The inner edges, 2, of these side sec 
tions extend downward vertically from thesides 
of the opening in the top of the barrel, and 
are grooved in V form to receive the angular 
sides s of the middle section or slide, E. This 
partition is slotted for action on the milk as 
the barrel is vibrated, and the middle section 
is inade removable to facilitate the removal of 
the butter, as well as to render the churn easily 
cleaned. The loweredge of the middle section 
or slide, E, is curved to fit the bottom of the 
barrel, as indicated ath. 
Findicates the cover for the opening in the 
top of the barrel. This is sawed out of the 
barrel in forming the opening; and in order 
to fill the kerf made by the saw, and to keep 
the cover in shape and prevent warping, it is 
provided with a flanged metallic margin, k. 
A stud, l, is formed on this margin or framek, 
, which is designed to engage with a recess, r, 
in the edge of the opening of the barrel, and a 
button, m, is pivoted to the barrel on the op 
posite side of the cover, so that it can be fast 
ened securely in place. . 
In order to provide the air-passage and at 
the same time to prevent splashing, two holes, 
v, are bored through the cover at a little dis 
tance from each other, and these holes are cov 
ered by the base or block u of the handle P, 
said base being recessed at a to form a com 
munication between the holes and with the 
intermediate outer hole, b', which is made from 
the recess through the base v. 
In order to operate the churn, a handle-crank, 
H, is provided. . 
Having described this invention, what we 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
The curved cover F, having the metallic mar 
ginal frame k and stud l, in combination with 
the recess r in the edge of the barrel-opening, 
and the fastening m, substantially as specified. 
Intestimony that we claim the above we have 
lhereunto subscribed our names in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
S- 
- 
. 
. 
. 
MILES IR. EHUTCEISON. 
JOSEPH L. WILEY. 
Witnesses: 
RUFUS WILEY, 
WILLIAM J. WALTERs. 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249461.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 249,461. 
J. DEAN, 
BOAT, 
Patented Nov. 15, 1881. 
  
 
eteteezette2e22222222222222222227 
 
WITNESSES 
;3 
- - 
d7ares2E 
es. Ale (272, 
1232T2. 
4 6%pe4Arroner. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- 
JAMES DEAN, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
BOAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 249,461, dated November 15, 1881. 
Application filed July 11, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES DEAN, of Detroit, 
county of Wayne, State of Michigan, have in 
vented a new and usefullmprovementin Boats; 
and I declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
pertains to make and use it, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to the hulls and seats 
of boats; and it consists in certain novel com 
binations of devices for securing and permit 
ting the ready removability and replacement 
of boat-seats, and also in a novel construction 
of the hull, whereby its stability and buoyancy 
are greatly enhanced, all of which will be here 
inafter particularly described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of a boat with a part of the outer 
sheathing of the hull broken away, showing 
portions of the inner sheathing and the inter 
mediate lining. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal cen 
tral section of the boat. Figs. 3 and 4 are 
cross-sections of one side of the boat, showing 
a portion of a seat and the devices for secur. 
ing and permitting the ready removability of 
the same. 
Myinvention is designed to overcome one of 
the greatest faults in small boats, and which 
has often led to loss of life. No matter how 
tight a boat's seams are when it is turned out 
of the shop, if it is not used in the water, but 
allowed to lie dry, often exposed to the heat of 
the sun, it is sure to become leaky and unfit 
for use. In many cases the boats upon large 
vessels lie upon the decks and are seldom used, 
and are consequently found unfit for use when 
urgently required. Moreover the number of 
boats usually carried upon large vessels, ow 
ing to lack of room, is quite inadequate to the 
wants of most of them. This I also propose to 
remedy incidentally by enabling smaller boats 
to be stowed in larger ones, while at the same 
time providing the seats with means by which 
they are rendered capable of being easily re 
moved and replaced and also well secured 
against displacement and loss in case of cap 
sizing or rough Weather. 
Referring to Fig.1, A is the hull of the boat, 
of which A' is the outer sheathing, A the in 
ner sheathing, and B an intermediate lining 
of canvas. The Outer sheathing is composed 
of planks running longitudinally from stem to 
stern in the usual manner. Upon the inner 
surface of this outer sheathing I arrange a lin 
ing, B, of canvas, cloth, or similar strongflexi 
ble material, which may be painted or cement 
ed, if desired, and against this lining I place 
the inner sheathing, A, composed of two sets 
of boards arranged obliquely with respect to 
the boards of the outer sheathing, the boards 
of one set inclining in an opposite direction 
from those of the other, and the ends of a por 
tion of the boards of the two sets abutting 
against each other on a median transverseline, 
d, from which they diverge upwardly and out 
Wardly to the gunwale, while the opposite ends 
of the remaining boards abut respectively 
against the gunwale and keel, the entire inner 
sheathing thus forming, in effect, a truss which 
firmly braces the hull. 
The intermediate lin 
ing serves as a permanent calking, and will pre 
ventleakage to a very greatextent, even though 
the seams should be considerably opened by 
exposure. 
Referring to Figs. 3 and 4, the letter C de 
notes one end of the boat-seat, the other por. , 
tion being omitted. Each of the boat-seats I 
make removable, so that they may be taken 
out, in order that one or more boats of smaller. 
size may be placed inside of the larger boat, so 
as to economize deck-room, allowing a vessel 
to carry more boats than would otherwise be 
practicable. In the under side of each seat, near 
its ends, I form transverse dovetail grooves, 
as shown at c', to receive correspondingly 
shaped cleats c, preferably of metal, which are 
secured to and project above supports c, se 
cured to the ribs, or longitudinally, at proper 
height, inside the boat, in any convenient man 
ner. These cleats may be recessed in their up. 
per edges and extend the whole length of the 
boat, to allow the seats to be dropped in posi 
tion for the grooves to slide over the dove 
tailed upper edges of said cleats. 
To prevent the seats from sliding out of place 
when in use I provide in both ends notches, 
into which may be turned latches, such as 
shown at E, Fig. 4, hinged to opposite ribs of 
the boat. 
. 
75 
 
85 
90 
95 
OC) 
O 
is 
25 
35 
So 
249,461. 
35 
45 
So 
The knees or braces D are also removable nation with the dovetail cleats sectired inside 3o 
and attached to the upper sides of the seats, 
preferably by hinging, as shown at e, so that 
they may be turned over upon the seats, and 
thus take up less room when stored away out 
of use than if they were rigidly attached, 
Across the free end of each brace or knee 
D, I form a dovetail, d, which fits into a cor 
respondingly-shaped groove formed in a cleat, 
D', secured to the inner side of the gunwale 
and properly notched, so that the knees or 
braces may be engaged therewith at the same 
time that the seat is slid into position. 
In most boats heretofore used at sea or for 
business purposes the seats have been made 
stationary. Now, when a boat either propelled 
by oars or sails is used to convey goods to mar 
ket, or as a ferry-boat, the seats are almost al 
ways in the way, there being usually three or 
four, while perhaps only one is necessary, so 
that it will be seen that my improvement in 
the seats gives great convenience in arrang 
ing the interior of the boat as desired for spe 
cial purposes. . 
Having now fully described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a boat, the seat provided with the dove 
tail grooves in its under side and the hinged 
knees or braces upon its upper side, in combi 
. 
the boat for entering said grooves, and suita 
ble devices for detachably engaging the free 
ends of said lxinees or braces, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a boat, the combination, with the cleats 
D', provided with the dovetail grooves and se 
cured to the inner side of the gunwales, and 
he dovetail cleats c, secured to and projecting 
above supports attaclhed to the inside of the 
boat, of the seat provided with transverse dove 
tail grooves in its under side near its ends, and 
the hinged knees or braces on its upper side 
having the dovetail d, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. A row-boat made with an external sheath 
ing of horizontal boards and a contiguous in . 
ternal sheathing of diagonal boards diverg- . 
ing upward and outward from a median trans 
verse line, with a layer of fabric between the 
inner and outer sheathings, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two Witnesses. 
JAMES DEAN, 
Witnesses: 
W. M. PoRTER, 
WILLIAM E. HOIT, 
O 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249562.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
H. J. WHITE. 
PEPPER BOTTI.E. 
No. 249,562. 
Patented Nov. 15, 1881, 
2//znesses; 
... 
77a vetov; 
 
 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
HIRAM J. WHITE, OF SPRING FIELD, MASSACEIUSETTS. 
PEPPER BOTTLE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 249,562, dated November 15, 1881. 
Application filed April 13, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EIIRAM. J. WHITE, o 
Springfield, in the county of Hampden and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Pepper-Bot. 
tles, of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
pepper-bottle with means of connecting the 
cover thereon in a simple, cheap, and conven 
ient manner, as hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and set forth; and it consists in the 
construction, combination, and arrangement of 
a spring-catch within the cover and an exter 
nal groove around the neck of the bottle, near 
the mouth of the same, as hereinafter more fully 
described. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of my 
invention. Fig. 2 represents a vertical central 
section of the same. 
A represents a bottle, formed of glass or other 
suitable material, having an external groove, 
B, formed around the neck, near the mouth of 
the same; and P represents a perforated cover, 
formed of metal or other material, and having 
a vertical flange, E, adapted to fit over the neck 
of the bottle, and is provided at one side in its 
lower edge with a projection, C, formed inter 
nally or bent in Wardly, so as to engage into 
the said groove B when the cap or cover is 
placed over the mouth of the bottle. This cap 
or cover is provided opposite the projection C 
with a spring-catch, D, and an internal curved 
TO 
IS 
25 
or semicircular spring, H, which rests within 
a slight groove formed circumferentially within 
the cap or cover, and has one end bent out. 35 
wardly and projected through the vertical 
flange Ethereof, and has a bearing against the 
inner face of the thumb-piece. G of the said 
catch D, which is hinged or loosely connected 
with the said flange E by projections tt, which 4o 
are passed through holes therein, and are bent 
Over or in any suitable manner. 
It will be seen that if the thumb-piece G be 
pressed upon inwardly the catch or hooked end 
D will be freed from the groove B by com- 45 
pressing the curved spring Ed, and when re 
leased therefrom the cap or cover may be raised 
at that side and removed from the bottle when 
required to cleanse or fill the same. 
Having thus described my invention, what so 
I claim is 
The combination, with the bottle A, having 
the groove B, of the perforated cover P, having 
the vertical flange E, provided with the projec 
tion C and the semicircular spring H, and piv. 55 
oted thumb-piece G., having a catch, D, all be 
ing constructed and arranged substantially as 
shown and described, as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
HIRAM. J. WHITE. 
Witnesses: 
EDMUND P. KENDRICK 
CHARLEs FAY. 
-8 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249662.txt	(No Model.) 
D, B, OLIVER, 
ROLLING MILL 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 249,662, 
Patented Nov. 15, 1881. 
I 
s 3. 3. 
s 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
"I 
 
  
/ 
It 7 P. H. 
-2 IIH Gr 
 
-h1 
Li 
litresses. 
24/7%l-z 
- 
2. 
az p 2. 
| 
2 
I 
lverior. 
(9avtz /2 (24ve. 
424-6-4-e6 72-4- 
M, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. D. c. 
(No Model.) 
D, B, OLIVER, 
ROLLING MIT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 249,662. 
Patented Nov. 15, 1881, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
s\ 
 
 
a242 
e 
 
3 
 
Silasses. 
24%/aeez 
cf. 6.5%teer 
3%,3, 
Swetv. 
*4-vtz /2. (24 le. 
4, 42 2-2-27. 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID B. OLIVER, OF ALLEGEIENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RONG. M. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 249,662, dated November 15, 1881. 
Application filed June 23, 1881. (No model.) 
Be it known that I, DAVID B. OLIVER, of in each. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
To all whom it may concern: 
The finishing-rolls a and at are mounted in 
Allegheny, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new housings b of the usual construction. Mounted 
and useful Improvement in Rolling-Mills; and in the bed-plate c or otherwise is a roller, d, 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, which is driven by power from one of the rolls 
clear, and exact description thereof. 
by means of a belt, e, and pulley f. Pivoted 
My invention relates to improvements in to a suitable bearing, g, is a lever, h, carrying 
mills for rolling skelp and band iron. One a loose roller, i, on one end, an adjustable 
form of mill for this purpose consists of a train counter-weight, j, on the other end, and with 
of non-reversing two-high rolls, in which the a handle or arm, k, extending from its side, 
iron is drawn out by passing through in one preferably at right angles to it, for operating 
direction, and hence requires to be transferred it and bringing the roller i down upon the 
after each pass from the delivery side to the roller d. Extending from the roller d, under 
feed side, in order to be again entered into the and to the other side of the rolls a af, is a 
rolls. This transfer has heretofore been made trough, l, and on the delivery side of the rolls 
by the workmen on the delivery side taking 
is a delivery-trough, m, which extends prefer 
hold of the piece with their tongs and pushing 
ably beyond the rollers d and i, 
The operation is as follows: The piece, af. 
it back under the rolls. The workman on the 
ter being delivered from the last grooved pass 
feed side then takes hold of the end and in 
serts it into the rolls. The pile from which 
of the train, lies on the floor, a long, thin, wide 
the skelp or band is made weighs from fifty 
band of hot iron, with its end at one side of 
to four hundred pounds, according to the size 
the rollers di. It is seized by the workman 
of the skelp required, and at the final grooved 
and dragged sidewise onto the roller d, which 
pass generally obtains a length of sixty feet 
is an easy operation. The Workman then takes 
Or more. After this pass it is so long and thin 
hold of the handle k and draws the roller i 
that it is very difficult to push through under 
down upon the piece. This causes the piece 
the rolls to the feed side for the finishing pass; 
to be fed back through the troughl under the 
but the chief difficulty is to start it as it lies 
rolls a af. When its end passes beyond the 
on the floor. To do this two men take hold of 
end of the trough the workman seizes it with 
it at the back end and push, and two others 
his tongs and turns it backward and inserts it 
take hold of it at the center and pull. Once 
into the rolls at a', as shown by dotted lines in 
started it slides over the polished floor-plates 
Fig. 3, which then give it the finishing pass, 
with comparative ease; but it is very difficult 
The end of the trough l is turned up slightly 
to start, as it is not only heavy and unwieldly, 
at l', to give an upward direction to the end of 
but, being very thin, buckles or bends up in 
the piece, so that it may be more easily caught 
the middle, and requires to be again flattened. 
by the workman. When tle roller iis brought 
The operation is consequently laborious to the 
down on the piece the weight j slides inward 
Workman, and the delay causes a loss of heat, 
along the lever h, and when the roller is thrown 
and thereby reduces the production and in 
up the weight, sliding back to place, holds the 
rollers apart. The use of my improvement not 
creases the cost of manufacture. 
Myinvention relates to mechanism for trans 
only saves time and labor, but increases the 
ferring the piece from the delivery to the feed 
product of the mill. 
side of the finishing-rolls, whereby reduce 
If preferred, the upper roller, i, may be driven 
the labor and increase the product. 
by power and the lower roller, d, turn loosely 
To enable others skilled in the art to make by friction; or power may be applied to drive 
and use my invention, I will now describe it by 
both rollers. It is necessary that a power. 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in driven roller be present to move the piece, and 
which- 
that a pressure-roller be used to hold the piece 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, showing my im- against the actuating-roller, in order that the 
provement. Fig. 2 is a plan view, and Fig. 3 friction of the latter upon the piece may be 
a vertical longitudinal section. 
sufficient to move it. 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
too 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
249,662 
5 ranged on the delivery side of the finishing- 
3. The combination, with the skelp or band 2 o 
What I claim as my invention, and desire arranged below the work-rolls and extending 
from the transfer-rollers to the feed side or 
1. The combination, with a pair of skelp or front of the work-rolls, substantially as and 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
band iron rolls, of a pair of transfer-rollers ar. for the purpose specified. 
rolls and adapted to return the skelp or band iron rolls and the transfer-rollers, of a return 
to the feed side of the work-rolls, one of said trough having its delivery end turned up, sub 
transfer -rollers being power-driven and one stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
being a movable pressure-roller, substantially 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
2. The combination, with a pair of skelp or 
band iron rolls, of a receiving-trough arranged 
on the delivery side of said rolls, a pair of 
transfer-rollers arranged near the delivery end 
I 5 of the receiving-trough, and a return-trough 
Io as and for the purpose specified. 
DAVID B, OILIVER, 
my hand. 
Witnesses: 
T. B. KERR, 
JAMES H. PORTE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249762.txt	(No Model.) 
J, HAWER, STCK, 
OIL CLOTH WARNISHING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 
 
 
 
(No Mode.) 
No. 249,762. 
J. HAWER, STCK, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
OIL CLOTH WARNISHING MACHINE, 
Patented Nov. 22, 1881, 
 
???? 
W? 
r 
sear-e-a- 
??! 
?? ? 
?{---------- 
- - - - - !? ? - - - - - - - - - - - 
-------- ??-------- 
s 
m 
? 
- 
Gowa fo. 
??????? 
(No Model.) 
J. HAWER, STCK, 
0IT C0TH WARNISHING MAGHINE, 
4 sheets-sheet 3. 
No. 249,762. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1881. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. HAWER STICK, 
SNSlle et 4, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4 
OIL CLOTH WARNISHING MACHINE, 
 
2,222s2H2 TF 
 
2 
2 
2: 
2 
2 
3 
2. 
2 
2 
4 
2. 
2 
2 
2 
3 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2, 
2 
2 
% 
2 
% 
 
RYN 
eLiiiLiiLiiiLiiLiiiLiiLiiiLiiLiLqiLiLiLiqiLiqLiLiLiLiL 
s 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN HAVERSTICK, OF PEIILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO GEORGE W. BLABON, GEO. C. BLABON, AND JOHN C. S. 
DAVIS, ALL OF SAME PLACE. 
OIL- CLOTH-WARNISHING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 249,762, dated November 22, 1881. 
Application filed June 17, 1881. (No model.) 
So 
55 
?? 
5 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
varnished. 
- 
Be it known that I, JoHN HAVERSTICK, a nish from the tube through the slot. 
To all pho? ?? ??? ???cer? : 
citizen of the United States, residing in Phila 
delphia, Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
Improvements in Oil. Cloth-Warnishing Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specification. 
iThe main object of my invention is to so con 
struct an oil-cloth-varnishing machine that a 
smooth and uniformly-distributed coating of 
varnish can be applied to the surface of the 
cloth as the latter is drawn through the ma 
chine, a further object being to prevent the 
raveling of threads at the edges of the strip 
or sheet of oil-cloth after the latter has been 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, 
Sheet1, is a sectional perspective view of my 
improved varnishing-machine; Fig. 2, Sheet 2, 
a front view of the same; Fig. 3, Sheet 3, an 
end view; Fig. 4, Sheet 4, a view showing the 
arrangement of the machine in respect to the 
drying-racks and drawing mechanism; and 
Figs. 5 to 9, detached views of parts of the ma 
chine. 
AA' are the opposite end frames of the ma 
chine, which are connected together by suita 
ble transverse beams and braces, the structure 
being mounted upon wheels adapted to a track 
on the floor of the room or apartment in which 
the machine is situated. 
Extending longitudinally from the front to 
the rear of the machine is a table, B, over 
which the oil-cloth is drawn, and upon which 
it rests during the varnishing operation. To 
bearings on this table are adapted a pair of 
shafts, a a', the Shaft a being arranged above 
and the shaft a beneath the table, which is 
slotted at this point for the reception of rotary 
cutters b, carried by said shafts a, a', and ad 
justable longitudinally thereon, for a purpose 
rendered apparenthereinafter. 
To bearings in the end frames, A A', are 
adapted the opposite ends of a varnish-recepta 
cle, D, which consists, in the present instance, 
of a tube having in the top a longitudinal slot, 
d, formed by first making an incision in the 
tube, and then bending inward the metal of 
the tube on each side of the incision, these in 
wardly-bent portions forming shields or guards 
d', which prevent the accidental escape of S. 
ee 
Fig. 8.) Varnish is introduced into the a??????? 
tacle D through a central funnel, d, and is dis 
charged therefrom through one of two sets of 
perforations,ff', arranged on opposite sides of 
the center of the tube, the perforations f be 
ing less in size than the perforations.f, so that 
the amount of varnish delivered from the re 
ceptacle will be dependent upon the direction 
in which the said receptacle has been tilted. 
Thus, when the receptacle is tilted in the di 
rection shown in Figs, 1 and S, the varnish 
will escape through the fine perforations f", 
but when the receptacle is tilted in the opposite 
direction a greater quantity of Varnish willes 
cape through the coarser perforations f. The 
slot d in the receptacle D permits access to the 
interior of the same for cleansing or other pur 
poses, and enables the attendant to ascertain 
at any time the exact quantity of varnish con 
tained within the receptacle. 
To suitable bearings on the end frame A 
are adapted two vertical crank-shafts, E. E.', 
and to bearings on the end frame A are 
adapted similar vertical crank-shafts, FF, the 
shafts E' and F being geared to the shafts E 
and F, respectively, so as to turn in unison 
therewith, and the shafts E and F being driven 
by means of bevel-gearing from a transverse 
shaft, G, a belt passing around a pulley on the 
latter and around another pulley on a suitably 
located power-driven shaft. The crank-shaft 
F is adapted to a box, e, at one end of a bar, I, 
to which is secured a series of brushes, g, the 
opposite end of the bar having a slot, e", for 
adaptation to the crank-shaft E at the oppo 
site end of the machine. A precisely similar 
brush-carrying bar, I', is used in connection 
with the crank-shafts E' and F, and said bars 
II' are capable of vertical adjustment on the 
crank-shafts, in order that the brushes may 
be caused to bear upon, or may be elevated so 
as to be free from contact with, the surface of 
the oil-cloth drawn over the table B. This 
vertical adjustment of the bars II is effected, 
in the present instance, by means of sliding 
frames H. H., which are adapted to vertical 
guides in the end frames, A A', and are raised 
7 ? 
75 
85 
95 
- 
- 
and lowered by means of a treadle, J, which is 
connected to a transverse bar, J', extending 
from one frame H to the other. 
A transverse bar, K, carrying brushes h, is 
adapted to vertical guides in the end frames, 
AA', and is hung by means of cords or chains 
to a pivoted frame, L, at the top of the ma 
chine. The brushes h of the frame K, are ar 
ranged closely together, so as to present a con 
tinuous brushing-surface from end to end; but 
the brushes of the frannes II" are spaced, for a 
purpose described hereinafter. 
The machine is arranged in front of the door 
way of a drying-room containing a series of 
racks, M, each of the latter consisting of a 
number of horizontal platforms arranged one 
above the other, as usual. The oil-cloth in its 
passage from the machine to the racks is sup 
ported upon a frame, T, one end of which is 
supported by the machine, and the opposite 
end by notched frames m, arranged on oppo 
site sides of the doorways of the drying-room, 
so that this end of the frame T can be adjusted 
vertically to coincide with either of the plat 
forms of the drying-racks. 
The mechanism for drawing the oil-cloth 
through the machine consists, in the present 
instance, of a clamp, s, attached to one end of 
a cord, ac, which, after passing around pulleys 
at the rear of the drying-rack, is carried to the 
front of the same, and is secured to a wind 
lass, /. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
A roll of oil-cloth is deposited in the trough 
formed by the series of transverse rollers cat 
the front of the machine, and the clamps of 
the drawing mechanism is brought forward 
over the table B and secured to the edge of 
the sheet of oil-cloth, which occupies a posi 
tion in advance of the cutter-shafts a a'. The 
drawing mechanism being put in operation, 
the oil - cloth is drawn between the cutter 
shafts a af, the cutters l of which trim the 
edges of the strip, said cutters having been 
previously adjusted on the shafts a, a? in ac 
cordance with the desired width of the strip. 
After the forward edge of the strip has been 
drawn some distance beyond the varnish-re 
ceptacle D the latter is tilted, so as to permit 
the varnish to escape from one of the sets of 
perforationsff", and the brush-bars I, II', and 
K, which had been previously elevated, are al 
lowed to descend, in order that their brushes 
may act upon the surface of the oil-cloth as the 
latter is drawn beneath the same. As the 
crank-shafts E E and E E are rotated the 
brushes (1 are caused to move in circular paths 
over the surface of the oil-cloth, the brushes 
of the bar I moving in one direction and those 
of the bar II" in the opposite direction. The 
bars II' and the brushes of each bar are so 
spaced that the path of each brush will over 
lap the paths of adjacent brushes on the same 
bar, and the paths of the brushes of one bar 
will overlap the paths of those of the other 
bar, so that a thorough and uniform distribu 
tion of the varnish over the entire surface of 
the oil-cloth is insured. As the oil-cloth is 
drawn beneath the brushes h on the bar Kall 
streaks, bubbles, or brush-marks which may 
have resulted from the action of the brushesg 
are removed, and a smooth and uniform ap 
pearance is imparted to the coating of varnish. 
As the rear end of the strip of oil-cloth ap 
proaches the varnish-receptacle the latter is 
turned up, so as to prevent the escape of var. 
nish from either of the sets of perforations f 
f. The brush-bars I, I', and Kare next elle 
vated, and the strip of varnished oil-cloth is 
then drawn onto the horizontal platform of the 
drying-rack and the clamps detached from the 
front end of the same prior to being passed 
over the next platform above and clamped to 
the front edge of a new strip of oil-cloth, which 
has in the meantime been deposited on the 
rollers c. The end of the platform T is then 
adjusted to coincide with the proper platform 
of the rack, and the machine is ready for a 
repetition of the above-described operation. 
Heretofore it has been the practice to trim 
the edges of the oil-cloth after the warnishing 
operation has been completed, and as a result 
the strip or sheet of oil - cloth is liable to be 
come frayed at the edges. By trimming the 
edges of the strip prior to the application of 
varnish to the surface of the same, said edges 
become coated with varnish during the var 
nishing operation, and the threads of the fab 
ric are firmly retained or cemented thereby 
and fraying prevented. 
When one of the drying. racks M has been 
filled the varnishing - machine is moved later 
ally on its rails until it is in line with another 
of the drying-racks, which is, in turn, filled, and 
SO O. 
It is advisable, in carrying out my invention, 
to use bars II having rows of brushes about 
as long as the width of the strip of cloth to be 
varnished, the bars being changed when a 
wider or narrower strip is to be treated. The 
construction of the bars with a capped bear 
ing at one end and a slot at the other end per 
mits this changing to be readily effected, and 
the slots serve to prevent slight inequalities in 
the throw of opposite crank-shafts from inter. 
fering with the proper working of the machine. 
In carrying out my invention more or less 
than two bruslu-bars II" may be used in some 
cases, although two bars haye been found to 
give good results in practice, and this number 
is preferred for general work. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the table or bed, the 
Varnish-receptacle, and the drawing mechan 
ism, with a bar extending transversely across 
the table and carrying a row of brushes, and 
with vertical crank-shafts connected to the op 
posite ends of said bar, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the table or bed, the 
varnish-receptacle, and the drawing mechan 
ism, with two brush-carrying bars extending 
transversely across the table, and with two 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
?? 
65 
7 ? 
75 
9o 
95 
?. ? ? 
IOS 
IO 
IIS 
pairs of vertical crank-shafts connected to the 
bars and geared together, as set forth. 
3. The combination, in an oil-cloth-varnish 
ing machine, of a table or bed, a trough for 
holding the roll of cloth, edge-trimming knives, 
a varnish-receptacle, distributing-brushes, and 
drawing mechanism, all arranged and operat 
ing as described, whereby the cloth is first cut 
or trimmed, then drawn through the stream of 
varnish from the receptacle, and finally sub 
jected to the action of the distributing-brushes, 
as set forth. 
4. The combination of the varnishing-ma 
chine, thedrying-racks M, drawing mechanism, 
and an adjustable platform, T, as set forth. 
5. The within-described varnish-receptacle, 
consisting of a tube, D, having on one side of 
the center a row of perforations, f, and on the 
opposite side of the center a row of finer perfo 
rations, f', as set forth. 
O 
IS 
Witnesses: 
JAMES F. ToBIN, 
HARRY SMITH, 
forth. 
- 
3 
6. The tube D, having openings ff" in the 
under side, and in the top a longitudinal slot, 
d, bounded by inwardly-bent flanges d", as set 
7. The combination of the opposite crank- 25 
S. The combination of the table or bed B, 3o 
shafts with a brush-carrying bar having at one 
end a box adapted to one of said crank-shafts, 
and slotted at the opposite end for adaptation to 
the opposite crank-shaft, as set forth. 
the crank-shafts EE and FF, the brush-bars 
II', the frame H, the treadle J, and the bar J", 
as set forth. 
in testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub- 35 
scribing witnesses. 
JOHN HAVERSTICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249862.txt	(Model.) 
J. H. WELCH, 
CUT GLASS CLOCK CASE, 
No. 249,862. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1881, 
  
is 
 
 
since 
st N's 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
aslingtol. t. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. WELCH, OF HARTFORD, ASSIGNOR TO E. N. WELCH MANUFAC. 
TURING COMPANY, OF FORESTVILLE, CONNECTICUT. 
CUT-GLASS CLOCK-CASE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 249,862, dated November 22, 1881. 
Application filed February 16, 1881. (Model.) 
O 
IS 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES H. WELCH, of 
Hartford, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Clocks, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
clocks in which the sides of the case and all 
but the middle portions of its back and front 
consist of a cut-glass block which incloses the 
movement; and the objects of my improve 
ments are, first, to produce a more attractive 
clock having clear cut-glass sides, partial back, 
and front all in one piece, so as to display the 
movement in the most attractive manner; sec 
Ond, to so mount the movement within said 
clear cut-glass case as not to mar the beauty 
of either the Works or the case, or to place any 
unsightly fastenings within the same; and, 
third, to get the complete clockinto such form, 
shape, and size that it may be used as a pa 
per-Weight. I attain these objects by the sim 
ple construction illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a horizontal section of the case 
and back, and a plan view of the other parts; 
and Fig. 2 is an elevation of the back side. 
I make the sides A of the case in any desired 
design and of clear cut-glass. The block which 
forms the sides A also forms the outer edge of 
the whole front and back, and has a central 
perforation, a, extending through it from front 
to rear. In Fig. 2 a portion of the back B is 
broken away in order to show one side of the 
perforation (t, and one of the movement-plates 
CC, both of which, as illustrated in the draw 
ings, are of circular form. 
I have only shown a part of the clock-move 
ment, as the same may be of any ordinary con 
struction. The movement is centered in the 
case by means of the edges of the movement 
plates C C, which bear against the side walls 
of the perforation a. This perforation and the 
movement-plates may be round, as shown, or 
octagonal or other desired form. 
To the front plate, C, I secure an ordinary 
dial and a proper sash or ring, D, for holding 
the dial and its glass cover. I secure said ring 
by means of lugs b b or other suitable connec 
. 
. 
7 O 
tions, and the ring is provided with a flange, 5o 
c, of larger diameter than the perforation a, so 
as to take over the front of the block A, as 
shown in Fig. 1. 
The rear ends of the movement-posts d are 
provided with threaded holes to receive fast. 55 
ening or binding screws e. . The back B is of 
struck-up metal of the style known as the 
sunken or depressed back, and it is pro 
vided with a flange, g, of about the same size 
as the flange c at the front. The parts are se- 6o 
cured together by first slipping the movement, 
with the flange cattached thereto, into the per 
foration in the block A. from the front, and 
with the edges of the plates CC governing the 
position of the movement, The back is then 65 
put in place and the screws e passed through 
the same into the respective posts d, so as to 
bind the flanges c and g firmly upon the front 
and back of the sides A and secure the Whole 
together. 
The winding-key h is pivoted so as to turn 
down out of the way, and none of the parts 
project beyond the rearmost point of the back, 
so that it is adapted to lie down flat upon a 
desk, which, in connection with the Small glass 75 
block, makes the complete clock of a form, size, 
and heft that adapts it for use as a paper-weight, 
or rather for simultaneous use as a clock and 
paper-weight both, the latter use not interfer 
ing in the least with its constant use as a clock. 8o 
As before intimated, in order to be adapted 
for a paper-weight, the clock should have no 
projections which will prevent it from lying 
flatly upon its back. The shape of the sides 
also should be such that it will stand firmly 85 
upon the desk, and preferably when either side 
up, while the size and heft should be such that 
it may be readily handled with one hand, and 
so as not to be too bulky and occupy too much 
room upon a desk. 
The cut-glass sides make a neatlooking case 
and display the Works to good advantage, while 
the various facets of the cut-glass case show 
separate reflections of the works, making them 
appear more nulmerous than they really are. 
The movement and dial may give the time 
of day merely, or may be provided with a cal 
endar attachment. 
90 
95. 
35 
45 
249, S62 
I am aware that clock-movements have been 
secured within marble cases substantially as 
herein shown and described, and therefore I 
make no claim to the manner of securing the 
movement within the case. 
I am also aware that prior patents show 
(lock-cases in which the sides and main por 
tion of the front are formed of a mere shell. Of 
pressed and uncut glass, and therefore I do 
not claim the employment of glass in the man 
ufacture of clock-cases. 
O 
I claim as my invention 
As an article of manufacture, a clock-case of 
cut-glass having polished facets on its exte 
rior, substantially as described. 
JAMES EI. WELCH. 
Witnesses: 
G. E. MITCHELI, 
W. R. HURI), 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US249963.txt	(No Model.) 
C, H, L00MIS. 
TOY PUZZLE, 
No. 249,963. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1881. 
 
N. PeFERS, Photo-lithograph.cr. Washington, B, C, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. LOOMIS, OF NEW HAVEN, ASSIGNOR TO CLINTON BROTHERS 
& CO., OF NORTH HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
TOY PUZZLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 249,963, dated November 22, 1881. 
Application filed October 11, 1881. (No model.) 
The boat is here represented as arranged on 65 
A represents the one bank to which the par 
ties arrive; B, the river, and C the opposite 
bank, to which they desire to go. D repre 
sents boat. a. a' represent the positions indi- 55 
cating the first husband and wife; b l', the 
positions indicating the second husband and 
wife, did indicating the positions of the third 
husband and wife, as they are on the bank A, 
and as they will be on the bank D. These po- 6o 
sitions are best indicated by holes made on the 
respective sides, or may be other means by 
which the respective parties may be properly 
located. 
a sliding rod, e, from which a knob, f, extends 
up to a convenient position on one bank, so 
that by placing the finger upon the said knob 
the boat may be readily moved from one bank 
to the other, as seen in broken lines; but in. To 
stead of the slide a cord may be attached to 
the boat, extending through perforations in 
the respective sides, so as to be readily drawn 
across from one bank to the other, or the cord 
may be arranged to draw it in one direction and 75 
a spring to return it, it only being essential 
that the boat shall be arranged so as to be 
moved from the one side of the stream or space 
B to the other. 
across the stream may represent men and 
women, as here shown, or other devices may 
be employed-as, for instance, pairs of pins of 
different colors, or pairs of animals; but each 
pair should be colored or shaped so as to dis- 85 
tinguish the male and female, and the one pair 
from the other, so that by the term three 
pairs of figures I wish to be understood as 
embracing any representation which may indi 
cate the three men and their respective wives. 9o 
The figures which are to be transported 8o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES H. LooMLs, 
of New Haven, in the county of New Haven 
and State of Connecticut, have invented a 
5 new Improvement in Toy Puzzles; and I do 
hereby declare the following, when taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
and the letters of reference marked thereon, 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
Io same, and which said drawings constitute 
part of this specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a perspective view; Fig. 2, alon 
gitudinal section. 
This invention relates to a device for work 
I5 ing out a puzzle, the puzzle being based upon 
the supposed condition of three men with 
their wives, traveling, to wit: The three men 
with their wives come to the bank of a riv 
er, where they find the means of crossing lim 
2O ited to a boat which will take but two per 
sons at a time. The condition of these par 
ties is such that neither man will permit his 
wife to cross in the boat with the husband of 
another lady, and neither wife is to be left on 
25 the bank of the river with a man not her hus 
band, and yet they must cross the stream. 
The solution of the puzzle is as follows: First, 
two wives- say the first and second-cross in 
the boat; the second wife, leaving the first, 
3o returns and takes the third across; the third 
wife goes back with the boat; then the first 
and second husbands cross the stream to their 
respective wives on the opposite side. Now, 
the second man and wife go back in the boat, 
35 the wife going ashore, the two men cross, (the 
second and third;) then the first woman takes. 
the boat and goes back and returns with the 
second wife, which leaves the wife of the third 
husband alone on the bank. The first and 
4o second wives go ashore, the third husband 
now takes the boat leaving the first and sec 
ond husbands and Wives on shore, goes across 
and brings over his wife, which accomplishes 
the puzzle. 
This invention consists in a device repre 
senting the two banks of a river, with the 
boat movable between the two banks, and fig 
ures representing the three husbands and 
wives movable from their positions on the bank 
So to the boat, and to the opposite side, as more 
fully hereinafter described, 
45 
I claim 
The herein-described puzzle, consisting of 
the representation of two sides or banks, AC, 
of a river or space, B, with the representation 
of a boat, D, movable across from one side of 95 
the space B to the other, combined with three 
pairs of figures, substantially as described. 
CHARLES H. LOOMIS. 
Witnesses: 
JoHNE, EARLE, 
TILLIAN ID. ROGERS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250063.txt	(No Model.) 
L. L. GANs, 
PARASOL LINING AND THE METHOD OF APPLYING THE SAME, 
No. 250,063, 
 
Patented Nov. 29, 1881. 
WITNESSES: 
%, 74. 8e7 az-ul- 
INVENTOR 
a?s 4. aris. 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, 0.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEVI L. GANS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PARASOL-LINING AND THE METHOD OF APPLYING THE SAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,063, dated November 29, 1881. 
Application filed October 5, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEWI L. GANs, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Lin 
ings for Parasols and Methods of Applying 
Same, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
lining for parasols which may be easily, cheaply, 
and strongly applied, which economizes mate 
rial, and which shall serve as a substitute for 
the lining commolnly employed. 
The invention consists in strips of fabric 
which are attached to the under side of the 
parasol-cover by paste, sewing, or other suita 
ble means at the places and in the manner here 
inafter set forth. 
Parasol-linings have bitherto been formed 
of fabric cut into gores and sewed together, as 
are the similar parts of the cover. This lining 
is attached beneath and completely covers the 
under side of the parasol. When the cover of 
the parasol extends over the ends of the frame 
ribs, and thus forms short curtains or flaps, the 
lining is similarly arranged, and the double 
fabric then produces a richer and more orna 
mental effect, especially when the lining is of 
a different material or different color from the 
cover. I find that this effect can be obtained 
by the use of a lining which does not extend 
entirely over the under side of the cover, and 
that at the same time such a lining can be ap 
plied in the novelmanner hereinafter described 
very easily and cheaply. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents my new method of arranging and ap 
plying the lining to the cover fabric, showing 
the disposition of cover and lining strips. Fig. 
2 is a single-cover gore with the lining-strips 
attached thereto; and Fig. 3 is the parasol com 
pleted, showing the position of the lining on 
the under side. 
A, Fig.1, represents the piece of fabric from 
which the cover is to be cut, spread out flat. 
B and C are strips of lining material of equal. 
width. The absolute width of these strips with 
relation to that of the cover fabric, and conse 
quently, as will be seen hereinafter, to the 
depth of the gore, I do not fix, as this will, in 
large measure, depend upon the value of the 
lining fabric used and the judgment of the 
manufacturer. It should be understood, how 
ever, that Ilimit myself to such width of strips 
that the combined width of the two strips shall 
not equal the depth of the cover - gore meas 
ured from apex to outer edge. One edge of 
each strip is pinked or otherwise prepared to 
prevent fraying and improve the appearance. 
The strips are then attached to the cover fab 
ric, near the edges of the same, by a line of 
sewing, or by paste or other fastening applied 
at or near the pinked edges of the strips, which 
edges, as shown in Fig. 1, are turned toward 
each other. The outer edges of the strips are 
left free, so that the strips form flaps. 
By the aid of a suitable pattern the gore 
shaped pieces which unite to form the cover 
are cut from the fabric A, as indicated by the 
dotted lines a, b, a c, d c, d e, &c., each gore be 
ing a triangle, as a c l, a cd, de c, &c. The 
outer edges, b c, a d, e c, &c., of the gores may 
be cut in curved shape, as shown, or left 
straight. It will be evident that in this way 
both lining and cover strips are cut simulta 
neously and in a manner involving very little 
waste. The outer edge of each gore is then 
pinked, both lining and cover being pinked at 
the same time, whereby the serrations or in 
dentations of the pinking in both are caused 
accurately to correspond. The completed gore 
is shown in Fig. 2, D being the double-pinked 
outer edge. 
It remains only to sew the gores together in 
the usual way to form the cover and apply 
them to the frame. The lining-strips B then 
come together to form a nearly circular patch 
inside the parasol, and the strips C meet to 
form the continuous-edge lining, all as shown 
in Fig. 3. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the cover of a para 
sol, a lining-strip of fabric attached at the un 
der side and near the outer edge of said cover, 
substantially as described. 
2. In combination with the cover of a para 
sol, a lining-strip of fabric attached at the un 
der side and at the center of said cover, sub 
stantially, as described. 
3. A parasol-lining consisting of two strips 
m 
75 
90 
Oc 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
250,063 
of fabric applied to the under side of the cover, 
substantially as described. 
4. The method of producing a parasol cov 
ering consisting in, first, the attaching of the 
5 lining strip or strips to the cover fabric in the 
piece; second, the cutting out of the mate 
lials thus combined in the shape of gores; and, 
third, the uniting of these gores to form a para 
sol-cover, substantially as described. 
LEWI L. GANS, 
Witnesses: 
P. BENJAMIN, 
EUGENE BAUTA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250163.txt	s. s. NEWTON. 
BOTTILE STOPPER, 
No. 250, 163. 
Patented Nov, 29, 188l. 
?X 
ozzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZ) 
/7zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz 
Z7zzezzzor 
/*///4za 
N. PEERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington D.C- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
STEPHEN S. NEWTON, OFBINGHAMTON, NEW YORK. 
BOTTLESTO PPER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,163, dated November 29, 1881. 
Application filed February 26, 1878. 
O 
To all vhom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, STEPHEN S.NEWToN, of 
Binghamton, in the county of Broome and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Bottle-Stoppers; 
and I do hereby declare that the followingisa 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which willenable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawing, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which forma part of this specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
cheap, compact, and effective construction of 
bottle-stopper especially adapted for bottles 
used for perfumery, tooth-washes, and other 
toilet articles from which it is desirable to dis 
charge the liquid in drops or fine jets. 
Such devices have been usuallyso construct 
ed that the caps or stoppers proper lhave been 
made detachable from the other part. More 
recently, however, caps or stoppers have been 
permanently attached, although capable of ad 
justment to allow discharge of the contents of 
the bottles; but the construction or means 
whereby such permanentattachmentis effected 
have certain defects, whichitis the object of my 
invention to remedy. To this end I construct 
my bottle-stopple as shown in the accompany 
ing drawing, in which 
A represents the body of the bottle; B, a 
cork fitting tightly within the neck and pro 
vided with a central opening, in which is in 
serted a discharging-tube, E, preferably pro 
vided with an external screw-thread atitslower 
end. . 
D is a flange, projecting horizontally from 
the central part of the discharging-tube and 
covering the top of the cork and bottle-neck. 
C is a flange orskirt, depending from flange 
D in such manner as to inclose the neck of the 
bottle and hide the cork, thereby adding to the 
appearance of the bottle. 
The extreme upper end of the discharging 
tube is formed into a circular head, f, the 
contracted neckfof which is provided with a 
numberofports, f', opening into the discharge 
tube. The discharge-tube is expanded imme 
diately below the ports, as at F, and screw 
threaded at this point. G is a cap or cover, 
provided at its upper endl with a port or open 
ing, g, and is of such internal conformation as 
to form a valve-seat, which fits accurately the 
partf of the discharging-tube. This cap is 
screw-tapped internally, so as to engage with 
the enlarged screw-threaded part F of the dis 
charging-tube. After the cap Gis screwed 
upon the discharging - tube its lower end is 
turned inwardly, (by spinning orotherwise,) so 
asto form a lip, g, adapted to engage with the 
lower side or shoulder of the part Fas the cap 
is screwed up Wardly, and thus prevent the cap 
from being removed from the discharging-tube. 
When preferred a washer orother packing, 
H, may be employed to prevent leakage be 
tween the lower part of the cap Gand the dis 
charging-tube. By turning the cap in one di 
rection it is screwed down on the upper end or 
head, f, of the discharging-tube, and thus pre 
vents the discharge of the contents of the bot 
tle, and by turning it in the other direction it 
is screwed up or out and opens the discharge 
passage more orless to allow the escape of the 
contents of the bottle. 
What I claim is- 
The improved stopper ?ormed of the screw 
tapped cap G, ha ving a port, g, and the in 
wardly-turned lip gat its lower end, and the 
tube E, havinga screw-threaded enlarged part, 
F, forming a circular shoulder, with which said 
lip engages When the capis screwed out to 
open the discharge-orifice, substantially asset 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affiX my signature in presence of two 
Witnesses. 
STEPEI EN S. NEWTON. 
V 
Witnesses: 
JEROMEDE WITT, 
ELLA NEWTON. 
25 
- 3o 
35 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250263.txt	A. KRAUSE, 
OIL STOWE, 
Patented Nov. 29, 188l. 
(No Model.Y. 
No. 250,263. 
 
WITNESSES: 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST KRAUSE, OF SALINA, KANSAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JOHN 
F. LAUTH AND JOSEPH N. SCEIWARTZ, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
O L-STOVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,268, dated November 29, 1881. 
Application filed August 22, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUST KRAUSE, of 
Salina, in the county of Saline and State of 
Kansas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Oil-Stoves, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of oil-stoves in which the chimney 
flues for the lamps are formed in a water-res 
ervoir arranged over the lamps; and it con 
sists in providing the water-reservoir with a 
series of flues, one for each wick-tube, and ar 
ranged each immediately over a wick-tube, 
and hinging the water-reservoir to the oil-re 
ceptacle along one of its shorter sides, the ma 
jor axes of the wick-tubes and flues lying in 
the longitudinal direction of the water and oil 
reservoirs, and the flues fitting over the wick 
tubes, and the bottom face of the Water-reser 
voir fitting tightly against the upper face of 
the air-chamber, whereby the water-reservoir 
can readily be swung over to trim the wicks 
or for other purposes, and can be as readily 
swung back and guided to its proper place with 
the flues over the wick-tubes. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional perspective view of an oil-stove 
containing my improvement; and Fig. 2 is a 
perspective view of the stove as combined with 
a steamer, which is broken open to show the 
iuterior. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A is the base and oil-reservoir; a, the air 
chamber. l are the wick-tubes, the major axes 
of which are arranged in the longitudinal di 
rection of the air-chamber a ; and c, the wick 
raisers of an oil-stove of usual construction. 
B is the water-reservoir, having tubes d 
formed in its middle portion, the major axes 
of which are arranged in the longitudinal di 
rection of the water-reservoir and fit snugly 
over the wick-tubes, and provided at its up 
per side with a ring, g, that is adapted to re 
ceive the usual cooking attachments. The res 
ervoir B is attached to base A by a hinge, f, 
SO 
55 
and rests on the top plate of the air-chamber 
a, so that its chimney-tubes d lap over the 
wick-tubes b. There will be one or more tubes 
d, according to the number of burners, and it 
will be seen that they are surrounded on all 
sides by the water contained in the reservoir. 
By this construction the heat at the ouside of 
the chimney-tubes will heat the water in the 
reservoir, and at the same time the conven 
ient use of the stov for cooking purposes is 
not hindered. A supply of hot water is thus 
always at hand, and is to be drawn for use 
through the cocke, provided at the side of the 
reservoir. 
In Fig. 2 a steamer, C, is shown as con 
nected by a pipe, h, with reservoir B, so as to 
receive the steam therefrom. The pipe h has 
a section, i, of rubber tubing, to allow conven 
ient separation. In this manner the conven 
ience of the oil-stove is greatly extended. 
I am aware that the chimney-flue of a lamp 
has heretofore been formed in a water-reser 
voir over the wick-tube of the lamp, and I 
therefore lay no claim, broadly, to such con 
struction, my invention being confined to the 
precise construction and compact arrangement 
of the parts, whereby the water can be readily 
heated, and at the same time the water-reser 
voir, with its chimneys or flues, be readily 
turned at one operation by means of its hinge 
to trim the wicks or for other purposes. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
In an oil-stove, the combination, with the 
oil-reservoir A and air - reservoir a secured 
thereto, and having the wick-tubes b, of the 
water-reservoir B, hinged to the top of the air 
85 
chamber at f and provided with the flues or 
chimneys d, substantially as described, and . 
for the purpose set forth. 
75 
AUGUST KRAUSE, 
Witnesses: 
E. H. GIBBs, 
W. R., GEIS, 
5 
IO 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250364.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 250,364, 
 
J. H. IRWIN. 
IAMP BURNER. 
Patented Deo. 6, 1881. 
2CZ72.4, 
(b) - 
i. 
22%reew 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer. Washinston. D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. IRWIN, OF MORTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
LAMP BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,864, dated December 6, 1881. 
Application filed August 27, 1881. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN H. IRWIN, of Mor 
ton, in the county of Delaware and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Lamp-Burners, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and the letters marked 
thereon. 
My invention relates especially to that class 
of burners employed in lamps consuming hy 
drocarbon oils, and has for its object the pro 
duction of a simple, cheap, and effective de 
vice, the merit of which consists in safety in 
use, all danger from explosion being obviated; 
and my invention involves certain novel and 
useful combinations or arrangements of parts 
and peculiarities of construction and opera 
tion, all of which will be hereinafter first fully 
described and then pointed out in the claims. 
It is a well-known fact that serious accidents 
often occur, involving loss of property and life, 
from the use of inferior lamp-burners, the lamp 
exploding and scattering its burning contents 
upon surrounding objects. Such accidents are 
mainly due to the formation of gases within 
the body of the lamp, the space therein not oc 
cupied by the oil becoming filled with vapor or 
gas generated by the heat of the flame, or with 
air from the surrounding atmosphere, or a mix 
ture of both. When air is mixed with the 
gases and the flame is reversed by wind blow 
ing down the chimney, or from any other cause, 
this mixture is ignited, a sudden expansion 
takes place, and sufficient means for escape 
not being provided the lamp often bursts, caus 
ing damage to life and property. By the use 
of my improved burner accidents of this na 
ture are impossible. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation 
and partial section of a lamp to which is at 
tached a burner (shown in section) illustrat 
ing my invention, and Fig. 2 is a modification 
of the burner shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
plan view of the bottom of the burner. 
Like letters of reference wherever they occur 
indicate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
A is the oil-fount or body of the lamp, the 
same being shown as provided with a handle, 
A', for carrying the lamp. At the top of the 
oil-fount is located the usual screw-threaded 
collar, B, for the reception of the burner. 
C is the base or outside of the burner, formed 
in the usual manner. 
C'C' are perforations supplying air to the 
under side of the burner-cone to support com 
bustion. 
D is a wick-tube of requisite shape and di. 
mensions, and E is the ratchet for operating 
the wick. 
CC are holes cut through the metal of the 
burner-shell, at the bottom thereof, upon each 
side of the wick-tube. By careful experiment 
I have determined the relative dimensions nec 
essary to give these perforations with respect 
to the size of the oil-fount. If the interior 
measurement of the oil-fount be about fifty 
cubic inches, the united area of perforations C 
should be about one-fourth of a square inch, 
and this relative proportion should be followed, 
whatever be the number of perforations em 
ployed. 
F is a cone fitting into the shoulder a formed 
within the base C. Said cone covers the ratchet 
wheel and shaft, as shown, and is cut away 
around the wick-tube at f, the area of this 
perforation upon the outside of the wick-tube 
substantially corresponding to that shown at C. 
G is a perforated plate, extending across the 
burner in the usual manner, said plate being 
cut away at G' upon each side of the Wick 
tube, as before described in cone F. 
His the burner-cone, the edges of the same 
forming the support for the chimney. In the 
drawings I have shown it as provided with 
spring-catch I, hinge J, and screw K, for hold 
ing the chimney in place, but it is obvious that 
my device may be applied to any style of 
burner. 
The oil-fount is perforated at Li, and a collar, 
l, formed around the perforation, over which 
fits a cap, M, the whole constituting a simple 
filler. 
The burner shown in Fig. 2 is the same in 
construction as that shown in Fig. 1, with the 
exception of cone F and plate G. In this form 
said cone, as well as plate G, are filled with Da 
Wy's safety-lamp perforations, instead of being 
cut away around the wick-tube. 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
O 
IS 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
i 
 
250,364 
2. In a lamp-burner for hydrocarbon oils, 
the combination, with the outside shell thereof 
cut away at bottom, of the cone thereabove, 
open around the wick-tube, and the perforated 
plate located below the burner-cone and cut 
away around the wick-tube in like manner, the 
whole adapted and arranged to relieve the oil 
fount from pressure and extinguish the flame 
of the lamp in case of ignition of gas gener 
ated in the body of the lamp, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. In a lamp-burner for hydrocarbon oils, the 
outside shell thereof cut away at bottom around 
the Wick-tube, the foraminated wall or cone, 
and the perforated plate thereabove, the whole 
Combined and arranged to operate substan 
tially as shown and described. 
4. In a lamp-burner, the base C, cut away 
around the wick-tube, cone F, and perforated 
plate G, the whole combined and arranged to 
operate substantially as and for the uses and 
purposes shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I have 
hereunto set my hand in the presence of two 
witnesses. 
JOHN H. IRWIN. 
Witnesses: 
F. W. HANAFORD, 
A. M. PIERCE. 
35 
45 
SO 
Should gas be generated within the oil-fount 
and from any cause become ignited, the per 
Eorations Cf (or in the burner shown in Fig. 
2, the small perforations in F) and G' form a 
passage of sufficient capacity to carry away 
the carbonic-acid gas, relieving the oil-fount 
of pressure, while at the same time the flame 
of the burner will be instantly smothered out 
or extinguished. 
It will thus be seen that my improved burner 
practically overcomes the danger which has 
always existed in the use of lamps burning 
hydrocarbon oils, and even when careless at 
tempts are made to extinguish the light by 
blowing down the chimney no evil results will 
follow. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new therein, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. Alamp-burner for hydrocarbon oils, where 
in the outside shell or base is cut away at bot 
tom around the wick-tube and the directing 
cone F and plate G are cut away in like man 
ner, leaving a direct passage from the interior 
of the oil-fount to the under side of the burner 
cone, adapted and arranged to relieve the fount 
from pressure and extinguish the flame at the 
wick in case of explosion, substantially as 
shown and described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250467.txt	(Model.) 
M 
No. 250,467. 
 
S, WHEELER 
PORTABLE WRITING CASE. 
Patented Deo. 6, 188l. 
7%zzee see 
ever 
... agrers. Phcio-it-ognohar, weshistor. C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
SETH WHEELER, OF 
ALBANY, NEW YORK. 
PORTABLE WRING CAS E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,467, dated December 6, 1881. 
Application filed September 23, 1881. 
(Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SETH WHEELER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of Al 
bany, in the county of Albany and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Portable Writing-Cases, 
of which the following is a specification. 
These improvements relate, first, to a com 
bination of a case for retaining a roll of con 
tinuous sheets of note or letter paper with a 
Writing-tablet,on which such paper is unwound, 
as may be desired, for use; second, to the com 
bination of the case for retaining a roll of note 
or letter paper and the writing-tablet with a 
knife-edge cross-bar, on which the portions of 
the paper Written upon may be severed from 
off of the roll of paper; third, to the combina 
tion of a roll of note or letter paper with a 
case in which it is contained and a tablet 
over which the paper is drawn for use. 
In the drawings, Figure l is a perspective 
view of a portable writing-case constructed 
according to my improvements. Fig. 2 is a 
modification of such a portable case as shown 
in Fig. 1, also in perspective. Fig. 3 is a lon 
gitudinal cross-section taken through the line 
aca of Fig. 1. 
A is a tablet. 
B is a roll of continuous single sheets of 
note or letter paper drawn from a case, A', 
connected to one end of the tablet A. 
C is a knife-edge cross-bar placed across the 
other end of the tablet, on which the portion 
of the paper written upon (sufficient to make 
up one sheet of note or letter paper) is severed, 
as seen in Fig. 1. 
D is a pad or piece of blotting-paper, which 
may, if desired, be placed underneath the 
sheet Writtell upon, So that after severing the 
sheet from the roll it may be relieved of sur 
plus ink. 
E is the cover to the opening in the case A', 
thirough which the roll of paper is inserted in 
the said case. The paper is drawn by its end 
out through a slot, ac, in the lower portion of 
the case onto the tablet A. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 2 the pa 
per may be cut off by means of a cutter, F, at 
tached by pivot to the lower portion of the , 
case A'just above the opening where the pa 
per runs out from the said case, the cross-bar 
C being pivoted at I, so as to be swung off to 
one side of the tablet A, in order to release 
the portion of paper Written upon for that pur 
pose. 
N is a socket, into which the free end of 
the cross-bar rests and is retained, in order 
to keep down the sheet of paper. The outer 
edge of the paper is beneatla the cross-bar 
While it is being Written upon. 
These portable Writing-cases are for use in 
the dra Wing-room, in the counting-house, or 
in car, boat, or open field. For artist tour. 
ists the note-paper may be replaced by sketch 
ing-paper. The tablet portion can be con 
structed of flexible material, so that after use 
it may be folded up around and be concentric 
with the roll-case, in order to allow of greater 
Compactness for stowage away. 
Some of the advantages of these improve 
inents are as follows: Quite a large amount of 
note-paper can be very compactly stored ready 
for use at all times, in a convenient form. The 
paper is perfectly protected from dust, dirt, 
and dampness. More than double the amount 
of paper can be so stored than is bound in the 
Ordinary paper pads, and no annoyance is ex 
perienced from gummed or pasted edges. 
When folded up the writing-case can be eas 
ily, by reason of its cylindrical form, carried 
in the pocket. A portable ink stand may be 
attached to one of its ends. 
I claim 
1. The case for the roll of writing or sketch 
ing paper, in combination with the writing 
tablet on which said paper is unwound and 
sustained while in use, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The case for the roll of writing or sketch 
ing paper and the tablet on which said paper 
is unwound and sustained while in use, in com 
bination with the knife-edge cross-bar, on 
Which to sever the portion of paper contain 
ing the Writing or sketches from the rest of 
the roll, substantially as described. 
3. As an article of manufacture, a portable 
Writing-case consisting of the case or paper 
receptacle and the attached tablet, all ar. 
ranged and adapted for use substantially as 
described. 
SETH WHEELER, 
Witnesses: 
JAS. MOORE, 
R. M. HAMILTON. 
55 
75 
95 
O 
25 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250569.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 250,569. 
 
P. O'REILLY. 
HYDROCARBON FURNACE, 
Patented DeC, 6, 1881. 
". 
tecos 
C. S. Savic- 
6, 
6. INVENTOR 
2.. (Sea 
de&&. 
ve 
N. Peters Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PATRICK OREILLY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
- HYDRO CARBON - FURN ACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,569, dated December 6, 1881. \ 
Application filed July 27, 1881. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
: Be it known that I, PATRICK OREILLY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
provements in Hydrocarbon-Furnaces; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, forming part of the same. 
The object of my improvement is to render 
the process of heating and vaporizing more 
rapid and perfect, and also to provide means 
for consuming the waste tar; and to attain this 
end myinvention consists, first, in heating and 
vaporizing tanks provided with a series of 
stairs, over which the liquid fuel is conveyed, 
with means for heating the same; secondly, in 
mealms for facilitating the removal of the tar 
residuum and reducing it to a liquid state; and, 
thirdly, in the general construction and combi 
nation of devices hereinafter more fully set 
forth. 
My invention is fully illustrated by the ac 
companying drawings, in which Figure 1 is a 
vertical section of the retorts and connecting 
parts, and Fig. 2 a plan view of the same. 
a b represent two retorts, similar in general 
construction and preferably of cylindrical form, 
each being cast solid in one piece. Both are 
designed as heating and vaporizing tanks, one 
for oil and the other water, and the operation 
of each is separate and independent. 
c indicates a pipe through which the retort 
at is charged with hydrocarbons. A cock or 
valve, d, regulates the flow of liquid to the re 
tort. A similar pipe, e, leads into the retort b 
for conveying water thereto, the supply being 
controlled by valve f. 
With the oil-supply pipe c is connected a 
pipe, g, which leads into a hollow open pan, h, 
arranged beneath the retorts, through which 
oil may be conveyed directly to the pan when 
required for starting the fire, the flow being 
regulated by a valve, i. 
Each of the retorts a b is provided with a 
ZigZag partition or stair-casei, extending from 
the top at a point directly beneath the supply 
pipes to the bottom of the tank, so that the 
liquid, as it flows in from pipes cande, will first 
fall upon the upper stair, and from thence 
trickle slowly down the zigzag way, the stairs 
k is a pipe provided in the top of the retort 55 
being kept at a high degree of heat by means 
hereinafter to be described. 
a which leads down beneath the retort and 
into a hollow, circular, pan, l, arranged cen. 
trally under both retorts. Through this pipe 
all the oil vapor or gas generated in the retort 
a is conveyed to the vapor-pan l. The steam 6o 
generated in the water-retort b is conducted 
through pipe in to the top of the pan l, where 
it mingles with the oil-vapor and is burned. 
The steam-pipe in leads down to and under 
neath the pan l, and thence through it cen- 65 
trally, discharging the steam at the top of the 
pan. Here the oil-vapor issuing from the pan 
l through the annular opening in, which sur 
rounds the stealin-pipe, unites with the steam, 
and in this condition is burned at a high de- 7o 
gree of heat. 
In the bottom of the oil-retort a is provided 
an opening, o, through which the tar and other 
similar matter evolved during the process of 
heating may escape from the tank into a pan, 75 
h, arranged beneath the retorts. As the tarry 
matter accumulates in the pan, steam is ad 
mitted into the pan through a pipe, p, which is 
connected with the pipe m, the flow being reg 
ulated by a cock or valve, q. By the action of 8o 
the hot steam the tar is reduced to a liquid 
state, in which condition it is burned beneath 
the retorts and is made thereby a heating agent. 
In the bottom of each retort, behind the 
stairs.j, is provided an opening, r, and in the 85 
outer side is made a similar opening, s, the 
purpose of which is to permit the flame beneath 
to enter the retorts and pass up and out at 
the side, behind and in direct contact with 
the stairs j. A current of flame is thus con- go 
stantly passing through the retorts, and the 
stairs are kept in a highly-heated condition as 
the liquid trickles over them, and thus the 
process of vaporization is greatly facilitated. 
by side, but with sufficient space between to 
permit the flame beneath to encompass their 
entire surface, and thus keep all portions of 
the cylinders at a uniform heat. 
having been admitted to pan h, it is lighted 
and the retorts become hot, Walves d andf 
being then opened, oil and water will flow into 
the respective retorts a, b, and the gaseous 
The retorts a b are arranged preferably side 95 
The operation is as follows: A supply of oil too 
25 
35 
45 
So 
250, 
569 
products rising will be conveyed by pipes lic 
and m down to the pan l, at the top of which 
they unite and are burned. 
My device is more particularly adapted for 
burning crude petroleum; but it may be used 
with equal advantage to burn any one of the 
carbon oils. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a hydrocarbon-furnace, a heating-retort 
having a continuous stairway arranged there 
in, and having openings in the walls thereof, 
whereby the flame is caused to impinge di 
rectly upon said stairway, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. A heating and Vaporizing tank having a 
ZigZag partition or series of stairs arranged 
thereit), and having an opening in the bottom 
and side of said tank, whereby the flame is 
caused to pass through the tank and in direct - 
contact with the stairs, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination of two separate and in 
O 
IS 
25 
dependent retorts, having suitable supply-pipes 
in the top thereof, with a vapor - vessel ar 
ranged centrally beneath said retorts, a steam 
pipe leading from one retort through said pan 
and discharging at the top thereof, and an oil 
vapor pipe discharging into said pan, the said 
pan being provided with an aperture surround 
ing the steam-pipe for the escape of the oil 
vapor, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a hydrocarbon-furnace, an oil-heating 
tank provided with an opening in the bottom 
for the escape of tar, in combination with a 
suitable receptacle arranged beneath said tank 
for burning the tar, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with the retorts a and 
l, supply-pipes ce, and vapor-pipes k m, of the 
pan h. and pipes p and g, all arranged to op- ?o 
erate substantially as set forth. 
PATRICK OREILLY. 
Witnesses: 
K. NEWELL, 
H. S. ADAMS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250670.txt	(No Model.) 
W. LYON. 
BIT AND DRILL STOCK, 
. 
No. 250,670. 
Patented Dec. 13, 1881. 
 
 
 
 
s 1S, 
 
lily 
1. SS 
 
 
Fig. 2. 
 
% 
772. 
H. Za 
k 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
a/6%22 
Sse Seomyey 
NVENTOR; 
(644ae. 46 ye 
By his Attorneys, 
4-76, 72-/6-2. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALLACE LYON, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO MILLERS 
FALLS COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BET AND DRILL STOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,670, dated December 13, 1881. 
Application filed August 2, 1881. 
(No model.) 
S 
... O 
IS 
35 
45 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALLACE LYON, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at Bridge 
port, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Connecticut, have invented a Combined Bit 
Stock or Brace and Multiplying-Drill Mechan 
ism, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a combination of a 
bit brace or stock provided with a socket for 
an auger-bit and multiplying-gear mechanism 
and socket or chuck, which may be rotated 
independently of the bit-stock for use in drill 
ing metals. The same socket serves for the 
auger-bit and the drill, or a drill-chuck may be 
fitted to the socket. 
In the drawings which serve to illustrate 
my invention, Figure I is a side elevation of 
the combined tool, complete, and Fig. 2 is a 
plan or end view of the rotative portions of 
the tool. Fig. 3 is a sectional view, showing 
the mode of mounting the removable bevel 
Wheel of the multiplying-gear. 
Tet A represent a brace or bit stock of the 
usual kind, but provided with a rotative socket 
or chuck, B, instead of a fixed one, as is usual 
in such tools. This socket has a spindle, a, 
which has bearings at b b in the stock, and on 
this spindle is fixed a bevel-pinion, c, arranged 
to mesh with a larger bevel-wheel, d, mounted 
in bearings in the bar of the stock at e. The 
socket is provided with a circular projecting 
flange, f, in which is formed a notch or recess 
capable of being engaged by a spring-detent, 
g, as shown. The bevel-wheel dis removable, 
and by reference to Fig. 3 it will be seen that 
it is secured to the end of a spindle, h, which 
has formed on it an enlargement, i, in which is 
cut a circumferential groove. This enlarge 
ment rests and revolves in an enlargement of 
the bearing-socketin the brace-bar, and a screw, 
j, with a cylindrical shank, is arranged to screw 
into the bar in such a manner that its shank 
engages the groove in the spindle or arbor, as 
shown. This screw prevents the wheel and its 
spindle from being removed, but permits it to 
revolve freely, as will be readily understood. 
When the tool is to be used as a bit-stock the 
wheel d may be readily removed by first re 
moving the Screw i and then slipping the spin 
SO 
55 
dle from its socket or bearing. The auger-bit 
may then be inserted in the socket B, secured 
in place by the screw k, and used as with an 
ordinary bit-stock. 
When the tool is to be used as a drill, es 
pecially when the drill is small and rapid ro 
tation is desired, the wheel d is replaced, the 
detent g drawn back out of the notch in the 
flangef, and retained in that position by turn 
ing it axially until the pin l at its rear end is 
released from its notch and rests on the higher 
part of the bearing m, and the tool is ready for 
SE, 
The drills may in some cases be secured di 
rectly in the socket B; but ordinarily where 
they are slender, as in the case of small twist 
drills, they will be secured in a chuck, and the 
spindle or shank of the chuck will be fitted 
into the socket B, and secured by the set-screw 
in the manner of an auger-bit. 
In addition to the function of the detent g, 
above described, it also serves as a spring-pawl 
to engage ratchet-teeth on the flangef, where 
by the tool may be employed as a ratchet-drill. 
To enable the detent to perform this function, 
its tip is beveled off, and it is made to turn on 
its axis, so that the beveled end is properly pre 
Sented to the ratchet-notches, and it is retained 
in this position by the engagement of the pin 
with a suitably-arranged notch or recess in 
the bearing m. The flange fmay be provided 
With a double set of ratchet-notches, arranged 
oppositely, as shown, and the pawl-detent may 
be arranged to turn axially, so as to present 
its beveled end properly to either set, whereby 
the tool may be used as a right-hand or left 
hand ratchet-drill at will. This feature of the 
ratchet is not my invention however, and I 
make no claim to it as a distinct device, 
Any form of detent or fastening may be em 
ployed to prevent the independent rotation of 90 
the socket B when used as a bit-holder, and 
it is not necessary that the bevel-wheel d be 
removed when not in use for drilling. It is 
preferably removed, however, as it encumbers 
the tool. 
Other methods than that shown for securing 
the Wheel d in place may also be employed in 
lieu of that shown-as, for instance, a stud or 
95 
75 
2 
250,670 
S 
O 
pin with a head on its outer end may be passed 
through the wheel into the socket and there 
held by a set-screw. 
C is the crank for rotating the wheel d. I 
prefer to attach this to the wheel by screwing 
it onto the end of the spindle h, to which the 
wheel is fixed. This enables me to employ 
more or less leverage for larger or smaller 
drills, as the crank is or may be provided with 
two or more holes, in , to engage the end of the 
spindle h, whereby its throw may be varied, 
as will be readily understood. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination of the brace A, rotative 
socket B, bevel-pinion c, fixed to the socket, 
larger bevel-wheel d, notched ratchet-flangef, 
fixed to the socket, and a spring-pawl arranged 
to engage the said flange and form a shifting 
automatic ratchet-detent to prevent the ro 
tation of the socket except as desired by the 
operator, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
2. The combination, with the brace, the in 
dependently-rotating socket, the locking de 
vice, and the pinion on the socket-spindle, of 
the wheel d, the spindle h, provided with a 
peripherally-grooved enlargement, i, and ar 
ranged to fit into a bearing in bar of the brace, 
and the screw i, all arranged to operate sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination of the brace, the socket 
mounted rotatively therein and provided with 
anotched flange or projection, f, the Spring 
detent 0, arranged to engage a notch in the 
flange, and provided with a pin, l, the notched 
or recessed bearing m, pinion c, and wheel d, 
all arranged substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of the subscribing 4o 
witnesses, 
35 
WALLACE LYON. 
Witnesses: 
CURTIS THOMPSON, 
P. KANE, 
CARL WAR.TH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250771.txt	(Model.) 
No. 250,771, 
J. YOUNG, Jr. 
HORSE BOOT, 
Patented Deo, l3, 188l. 
aggins sis 
 
702Avesses. 
Z. 
77zvezdor. 
'3' 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
s 
e 
3. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JEFFERSON YOUNG, JR, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO HENRY 
L. BUTLER, JR, AND WILLIAM H. GOLDEY. 
HORSE-BOOT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,771, dated December 18, 1881. 
Application filed April 20, 1881. (Model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JEFFERSON YOUNG, Jr., 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain Improve 
5 ments in Horse-Boots, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to a horse-boot de 
signed to prevent and cure the habit commonly 
known as interference. Many boots have 
Io been designed for this purpose, but as hitherto 
made they have been open to one or another 
of the various objections that they turn upon 
the foot, that they would chafe the opposite 
leg or fetlock of the animal, and that when 
I5 wet they lost shape and stiffness, and became 
practically useless. 
The object of this invention is to produce an 
exceedingly light horse-boot for use in curing 
the habit commonly known as interference, 
20 the design being to produce a boot which be 
ing applied to one foot shall slightly touch the 
other when the two are brought too near each 
other, and to adapt this boot for successful use 
when subjected to moisture. 
25 The invention consists in various details of 
construction, hereinafter described, consisting 
mainly in braiding the manila upon tarred 
marline, and covering the latter with leather 
or felt. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of my 
boot; Fig. 2, a cross-section of the same. 
A represents the manila or fibrous material; 
B, the tarred rope or marline upon which the 
35 same is braided; and C, the leather or felt ar 
rainged upon the inside of and covering the 
D represents the widened ends of the leather, 
and E buckles attached to one end of the 
4o leather, and engaging with the Straps upon the 
opposite end of the same, whereby the boot 
marline. 
3o 
w 
In use the boot will touch the opposite foot so 
may be fastened snugly around the leg or foot 
of the animal. 
The manner in which the fiber is braided 
around the marline is clearly represented in 45 
the cross-section. It will be seen that the 
fibers radiate or stand outward around the ex 
terior of the boot, and that they form a thick 
brush-like mass. 
of the animal lightly, and with just sufficient 
force to cause the animal to separate his feet, 
the animal being in this manner trained to 
carry his feet in the proper position without 
the danger of having the foot chafed or cut, 55 
or of having his gait destroyed by the appli 
cation of excessive weight, as is the case with 
the leather boots. 
The right to take a future patent covering 
the boot constructed of manila fiber is hereby 6o 
reserved. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a horse-boot, the combination of the 
rope or marline, the fiber braided thereon, and 65 
attaching devices, substantially as described 
and shown. 
2. The combination of the rope or marline, 
the fiber braided thereon, and a leather cover 
ing applied thereto, in the manner described 7 O 
and shown, and provided with fastening de 
WCS 
3. The horse-boot consisting of the brush 
like body, and the interior supporting-strip, 
having its ends widened in the manner de- 75 
scribed and shown, and provided with fasten 
ing devices. 
JEFFERSON YOUNG, JR. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. MURPHY, 
WM. W. CAIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250871.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 250,871, 
 
J. BANIGAN, 
RUBBER RING, 
Patented Dec. 13, 1881. 
A2Z-zesses: 
97% of 73ate). 
Zzz are 7-26 2. 
%22e. 
A. 4% 7224. A. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH BANIGAN, OF PROVIDENCE, REODE ISLAND. 
RUBBER RNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,871, dated December 13, 1881. 
Application filed May 27, 1881. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH BANIGAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Provi 
dence, in the county of Providence and State 
of Rhode Island, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Flexible Rubber-Surfaced 
Rings, of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to give in 
creased strength to this class of rings, while 
preserving their surface elasticity. Such rings 
have heretofore been made entirely of india 
rubber, and so made will stretch too much for 
general use in thearts when subjected to strain, 
and are easily broken. 
In my improvement the rubber surface tends 
to preserve the shape of the ring, to protectit 
from the effects of moisture, and renders it 
agreeable to the grasp of the hand when used 
as a pull-ring, and also capable of use as a 
teething-ring, while an inner core of fibrous 
cord enables it to withstand great strain. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of my improved ring, with part of 
the rubber surface removed to show the core. 
25 
35 
40 
Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the same. Fig. 3 
shows the ring applied to use as the pull-ring 
of a boot. 
In constructing my improved ring AI first 
form a core of fibrous cord consisting of sev 
eral spirals or coils in one piece, as shown at 
a, Eig. 1, and then cover this core with a cov 
ering, b, of sheet or plastic india-rubber by 
any of the well-known modes. When sheet 
rubber is used I may vulcanize it either before 
or after placing it on the core. Forming the 
core of several spirals or coils in one piece 
gives it greater strength, and renders it more 
flexible than would be a large single cord, and 
also renders unnecessary the fastening to 
gether of the ends of the cord. 
What I claim is 
Aring composed of a core formed of several 
spirals or coils of fibrous cord in one piece and 
a complete covering of india-rubber. 
JOSEPE BANIGAN. 
Witnesses: 
WM. L. Coop, 
J. A. MILLER, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US250971.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 250,971, 
F. RICHARDSON. 
RUBBER SHOE, 
Patented Dec. 13, 1881. 
Fig. l. 
%f 6 9. 
i. 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICKRICHARDSON, OF PROVIDENCE, REIODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE REVERSIBLE HEEL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
RUBBER SHOE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 250,971, dated December 18, 1881. 
Application filed May 9, 1881. 
(No model.) 
d 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICKRICHARD 
SON, of the city and county of Providence, and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented a new 
and useful Improvementin Rubber Shoes; and 
I hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
This invention has reference to an improve 
ment in rubber shoes, and is particularly de 
signed for rubber overshoes. 
Rubber overshoes designed to be worn over 
the ordinary leather shoes have soles of nearly 
uniform thickness, and the heel is but little 
thicker than the sole. In use the rear portion 
of the heel is subjected to the most wear, and 
when worn makes the Whole shoe useless. 
To 
prevent this rapid wear and to strengthen the 
shoes is the object of this invention. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a rubber 
overshoe. Fig.2 is a plan view of my improved 
heel-guard. Fig. 3 is a sectional view of the 
same. Fig. 4 represents sheets of rubber ce 
mented into the openings in the heel-guards; 
and Fig. 5 is a sectional view of the heel por 
tion of a rubber shoe, showing the heel-guard 
secured therein. 
In the drawings, A represents the shoe, B 
the heel, and C the heel-guard, which consists 
of arms did, radiating from the center to the 
edge of the heel, where they unite with a curved 
rim, leaving triangular open spaces ffbetween 
the arms. The arms d d are curved so as to 
conform to the shape of the rubber to which 
they are to be cemented, and in their upper 
surface the groovese e are made to form vents 
for the escape of the air. A strong projecting 
rim, g, extends from the curved rim downward 
to form the rear portion of the heel and pro 
tect the heel against Wear. 
35 
45 
So 
55 
- 
h h are triangular pieces of rubber or rubber 
covered cloth cut to fit the spaces ff, and i is 
a piece of rubber or rubber-covered cloth placed 
on the heel in front of the guard. 
When the rubber overshoe is made and the 
sole has been placed on and cemented to the 
upper the heel-guard C is pressed into the soft 
rubber. This should be done so as to carefully 
expel all the air, and the guard is therefore pro 
vided with the grooves e e, so that the air can 
readily escape. After the guard has been se 
cured the pieces h. h. are cemented into the 
spaces.ff and the piece i is secured to the heel, 
and the shoe is ready for vulcanization, dur 
ing which process the soft-rubber surfaces flow 
together and become one mass, which, as soon 
as the sulphur melts, commences to harden. 
The metal guard, by its peculiar construc 
tion, becomes firmly embedded in the rubber 
mass and forms one whole with the same. 
The 
protecting-rim g guards and protects the weak 
est part of the shoe, and thus more than doubles 
the wearing quality of the shoe. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a metal heel-guard constructed to be 
secured by cementation in the heel, as de 
scribed, the groovese e, constructed for the es 
cape of the air, as described. 
2. The combination, with the sole of a rub 
ber overshoe, of the heel-guard C, consisting of 
the arms d and projecting rim g, the pieces h. h. 
and i, and the piecek, all secured together by 
cementation, as described. 
FREDERICK RICEHARDSON. 
Witnesses: 
J. A. MILLER, Jr., 
WM. L. COOP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251071.txt	(No Model.) 
E. W. SMITH, 
ELECTRICAL CABINET, 
No. 251,071. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1881. 
 
u 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELPHALET W. SMITE, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
ELECTRICAL CABINET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 251,071, dated December 20, 1881. 
Application filed April 11, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELIPHALET W. SMITH, 
of Newark, in the county of Essex and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in an Electrical Cabinet, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a cabinet for holding 
money or articles of value, with which an elec 
trical alarm is connected to prevent the open 
ing, breaking through, or carrying away of the 
same without an alarm being sounded; and it 
consists in double e'ectrical envelopes insulat 
ed, forming interlinings throughout the whole 
of the body and the door; in having all the ap 
paratus for operating contained within the 
cabinet; and in the arrangement of the circuit 
closers, as herein set forth. 
Figure 1 is a plan below the top. Fig. 2 is 
a side elevation, showing a cabinet open. 
In my construction, A is a switch connected 
with the outer envelope, B, ati, which, by clos 
ing the door, forms a contact with a button, C, 
which is connected by a wire, D, with the spring 
E, which forms a contact with a plate, ct, united 
with the inner envelope or lining, Fate. These 
two, when closed, connect the outer and inner 
linings and allow the current to pass from the 
battery G through the bell H to ring it, and 
back to the battery again in the manner follow 
ing: passing from the pole I of the battery on 
a wire, 0, through the top hinge, K, to the bell 
on the door; thence through the bell to the in 
ner lining, which, being connected with the in 
ner lining of the body through the lower hinge, 
K', allows a current to pass to the inner lining 
at L, and through it to the point e, thence on 
a wire to the plate at, across the spring E, and 
through the wire D to the button C, and across 
the switch Ato the outer lining at is and thence 
through the outer lining to the point d, and 
thence by a wire to the other pole, N, of the bat 
tery. The electrical envelopes or linings may be 
of any metallic-covered paper, wire-cloth, tin 
foil, or any other conductor of electricity. Thus 
it will be seen that by closing the door the switch 
A is thrown on the point C, while the spring 
E, by the same, is thrown off from the plate a, 
breaking the connection between theinner and 
the outer linings, and therefore breaking the 
circuit. On opening the door the switch. A re 
mains on the point C, while the spring E comes 
forward and forms a contact with the plate a, 
thereby completing the circuit and causing the 
bell to ring; and it will be seen that any attempt 
to bore through the cabinet with a metal tool 
will make a connection between the inner and 
outer linings and ring the bell. 
In addition to the above I have an auxiliary 
attachment, which, indeed, may be used inde 
pendently, consisting in a gravity circuit-cos 
er, as follows: I have a small metallic ball, O, 
resting in a metallic cup, P, and covered with 
an inverted metallic cup, Q, so arranged that 
the moment the cabinet is tilted or thrown off 
from a level the ball will form a contact be 
tween the two cups and allow the current to 
pass through the bell and ring it, as follows: 
assing from the pole I, through the wire o, and 
through the hinge K, and again the wire o, 
through the bell to the inner lining of the door, 
and through the inner lining to the hinge K, 
and thence to the inner lining of the body at 
L; thence through the inner lining, at the point 
R, through the wire S to the cup Q, through the 
ball O to the cup P; thence through the wire 
T to the other pole, N, of the battery. 
The middle hinge, A', serves to connect the 
outer lining of the door with the outer lining 
of the body. 
This cabinet will work in connection with any 
burglar-alarm system at the houses, and may 
work independent of them while so connected, 
and is adapted equally well to desks, closets, 
safes, &c. 
- 
I claim 
1. An electrical cabinet having within itself 
a battery and bell, a gravity circuit-closer, a 
spring and switch for the door, and two sepa 
rate and distinct conducting-linings, the whole 
forming an open circuit which may be closed 
by the slightest inclination of the cabinet from 
a perpendicular in any direction by opening 
the door, or by piercing or otherwise bringing 
in contact at any point the two conducting-lin 
ings, substantially as specified. . 
2. Two separate plates or sheets of conduct. 
ing material under a non-conducting exterior, 
each sheet being prevented from forming a con 
tact with the other by a perfect insulator placed 
between them, and the two, in connection with 
the hinges of the door, forming two separate 
conducting-envelopes for sounding an alarm 
upon being compressed or pierced. 
3. In a cabinet having the combination of 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC) 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
251,071 
N 
5. In a cabinet constructed and arranged Io 
substantially as described and shown, the 
switch A and spring E for closing and open 
ing the circuit by closing and opening the door, 
substantially as specified. 
IELIPEALET. W. SMIT. 
Witnesses : 
FIORACE HARRIS, 
S. R. STEADMAN. 
the two separate conducting-linings, the switch 
A and spring E, and the battery and bell form 
ing an open circuit, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
4. In a cabinet substantially as described, 
having the combination of the battery and bell, 
the ball O, inclosed between the two circular 
cups P and Q, forming an open circuit, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251171.txt	(No Model.) 
N. H. BORGFELDT. 
TOBACCO STEM FLATTENER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 25ll 71, 
Patented Dec. 20, 1881, 
 
 
  
  
  
 
O 
s 
KS 
S 
r 
 
N N 
S r 
3. SN 
d 
al 
1Sr. 
N. HU - 
 
y1 
 
Hit 
A. 
1 
(1. P 
w 
 
 
 
2. 22 All 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 251,171, 
 
TOBACCO STEM FLATTENER, 
Patented Dec. 20, 1881, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NICHOLAS EI. BORGFELDT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TOBACCO. STEM FLATTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 251,171, dated December 20, 1881. 
Application filed September 28, 1881. 
(No model.) 
IO 
25 
IS 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NICHOLAS H. BoRG 
FELDT, of New York, in the county and State 
of New York, have invented an Improved To 
bacco-Stem Flattener, of which the following 
is a specification. 
Figure 1 is a sile view of my improved to. 
bacco-stem flattener. Fig. 2 is a top view of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a vertical longitudinal cen 
tral section of the same; Fig. 4, a perspective 
view of the chute, and Fig. 5 a detail sectional 
view of the bearings for the flattening-rollers. 
This invention relates to a new construction 
of tobacco-stem flatteners; and it consists, first, 
in making the cross-bar that holds the upper 
scraper in one piece with the side wings by 
which it is fastened to the frame, said side 
wings also constituting the caps for the bear 
ings of the rollers and the holders for the ad 
23 justing-screws by which the position of the 
upper roller is regulated. 
The invention also consists in a new con 
struction of chute for feeding the tobacco to 
the rollers, with, which the chute is combined, 
which chute is raised in the center, so as to 
guide the tobacco equally to the ends and mid 
dle of the rollers. 
Finally, the invention consists in combining 
this convex-bottomed chute with a lower plate 
and with adjusting-screws, by which the con 
vexity of the chute may be regulated. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
represents the frame of my improved stem-flat 
tener. This frame is made in one piece, hav 
ing the side plates, a, with obliquely and up 
wardly projecting wingsb, and the cross-pieces 
c and d, all of which are cast or made in one 
piece. This frame is supported on suitable 
legs or supports, B. In the wings b of the 
frame A are oblique slots, that are intended to 
receive the bearing-blocks C and D for the 
flattening-rollers E and F. The flattening-roll 
ers are of suitable construction. Their end 
gudgeons hang in the boxes or bearings C and 
D, respectively, which boxes or bearings are 
inserted in the slots of the frame A, that are 
provided for their reception. A spring, G, is in 
terposed between every pair of blocks or bear 
ings C and D, as indicated more clearly in Fig. 
5, and its power is so regulated by a set-screw, 
e, that it will hold the two rollers E and Fjust 
out of contact, to prevent their surfaces being 
| ground away when nothing is between them. 
Each set-screw e which bears upon the upper 
block, D, is held in a cap, f, that is screwed 
upon the upper portion of each wing b, there 
being two such caps connected by and to a 
cross-bar, g. 
The scraper H for the upper roller, F, is 
fastened to the cross-bar g, as shown. Thus 
the said cross-barg serves as a brace for the 
upper part of the frame, as the connection for 
the caps.f, as a support for the upper scraper, 
H, and its wings, prevent the removal of the 
boxes D and C, and hold the set-screws e, by 
means of which the tension of the springs G 
is regulated. 
The scraper I for the lower roller, E, is held 
on the cross-piece d of the frame A, which 
cross-piece therefore serves not only as a brace 
for the lower part of the frame, but also as a 
support of the scraper. 
Iregard this construction of the frame-work 
with reference to the utilization of the braces 
as supports for the scrapers as very important 
and advantageous, as it saves much labor in 
the construction of the machine, much labor 
in putting it up, in keeping it in order, and is 
therefore a source of economy in the making 
and in the use of the machine. 
The rollers E and F receive rotary motion 
with varying speeds by suitable mechanism. 
The tobacco-stems to be flattened are fed to 
the rollers by a chute, J, which is either piv. 
oted or otherwise fastened to the frame in front 
of them. The bottom I of this chute J is con 
vex laterally, as shown in Fig. 4-that is to 
say, it is raised in the middle and slopes down. 
ward toward the sides. This sloping or con 
vex bottom h of the chute is above a lower 
false bottom, i, with which it is connected by 
suitable screws, j. By turning these screws 
the convexity of the bottom h can be altered 
to suit the convenience of the operator. The 
object of making the bottom of the chute con 
vex is to prevent the chute from feeding all the 
stems to the center of the rollers. The usual 
flat-bottomed chutes labor under this defect, 
that their tendency is to collect the stems in 
the middle, feed them to the middle of the 
rollers, and hence cause the rollers to wear out 
in the middle sooner than at the ends. By rais 
ing the bottom in the middle the tobacco-stems 
will be more evenly distributed throughout the 
45 
So 
7 o 
75 
95 
OC 
35 
 
2 
251,171 
f 
2. The combination of the frame A, having 
rollers E and F, and their bearings C and D, 
fitted in the slotted wings b, with the caps.ff, 
that carry the adjusting-screws e, and are con 
nected by the cross-barg, to which the upper 
scraper, H, is attached, substantially as speci 
fied. 
3. The clute J, made with convex bottom h, 
combined with the rollers E F, in front of 
which said chute is placed to feed its contents 
to them, substantially as described. 
4. The chute J, made with convex bottom h, 
in combination with the false bottom i and ad 
justing-screws j, substantially as specified. 
NICEIOLAS H. BORGFELDT. 
Witnesses: 
2d 
25 
WILLY G. E. SCHULTZ, 
WILLIAM H. C. SMITH, 
length of the rollers, and the uneven wearing 
out of the rollers is thus avoided. 
The chute J may receive a hopping motion 
by suitable connection with the operating-gear, 
or it may be Stationary, as may be desired. It 
can be of considerable length, as indicated in 
Fig. 3, constituting the main feed-chute of the 
machine, or it may be quite short, placed near 
the rollers, and receive its charge from a suit 
able apron, or otherwise. 
I claim 
1. In a machine for flattening tobacco-stems, 
the combination of the supporting-frame A 
with the upper cross-bar, g, having wings ff, 
and with the upper scraper, H, all arranged 
so that said wings f shall constitute the caps 
for the roller-bearings and the attachment for 
the upper scraper, substantially as described. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251271.txt	(Model.) 
No. 251,271. 
 
R, MILLS. 
GANG PLOW. 
Patented Dec. 20, 188l. 
Z. 
 
 
INVENTOR: 
(6,772ea 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD MILLS, OF BUFFALO, ILLINOIS. 
GANG PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 251,271, dated December 20, 1881. 
Application filed July 22, 1881. (Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
lower parts of the standards J are bent for 
Beit known that I, RICEARD MILLs, of Buf. 
ward, and are slotted or made double to re 
falo, in the county of Sangamon and State of 
ceive the rotary colters K. The lower parts 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im 
of the standards J are bent or twisted to one 
provement in Gang-Plows, of which the fol. 
side to bring the colters Kinto an inclined po 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
sition, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3, so that the 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
edges of the furrow-slices will be beveled to 
a plan view of my improvement. Fig.2 is a sec 
prevent the said furrow-slices from being ob 
tional side elevation of the same, showing one 
structed when being raised, and to prevent 
plow in working position and another raised 
the said furrow-slices from being turned in the 
from the ground. Fig. 3 is a front elevation 
wrong direction when leaving the mold-board. 
of three plows, the plow-beams being shown 
L is a hand-screw, which passes through a 
in Cross-section. 
screw-hole in the middle parts of the bars I, or 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
in nuts secured to the said bars I. The for 
Sponding parts. 
ward ends of the hand-screws L are swiveled 
The object of this invention is to increase 
to the plow-beams H, so that the plows D and 
the efficiency of gang-plows and simplify their 
the colters K can be raised and lowered by 
Construction. 
turning the said screws L., and thus caused to 
The invention consists in a novel construc 
work at any desired depth in the ground. The 
tion and arrangement of parts, as hereinafter 
forward end of each plow-beam EI is placed in 
fully described. 
a notchin the rear cross-bar of the frame C, to 
In the drawings, Arepresents the wheels, to 
hold it from lateral movement, and is secured 
the axle B of which is attached the frame C. 
to and between the rear ends of a pair of lon 
The frame C is formed with as many pairs of 
gitudinal bars of the said frame C by a bolt, 
parallel longitudinal bars as there are plows 
M, so that the plows can have a free vertical 
to be used, connected at their front and rear 
movement. 
ends by cross-bars. The wheel A upon the 
To the longitudinal bars of the frame C are 
plowed-land side of the machine is placed be. 
attached the lower ends of pairs of upright 
tween the first and second pairs of longitudi 
bars or standards N, the upper ends of which 
nal bars, so that both wheels will run upon the 
are attached to and connected by a cross-bar, 
unplowed land and no leveling mechanism 
O. The outer bars, N, of the series are made 
will be required. 
stronger than the others, and are strengthened 
D are the plows, which are formed of mold 
in position by braces P, attached to them and 
boards extended forward and flattened hori 
to the outer longitudinal bars of the frame C. 
Zontally to form shears, and having parallel 
To the upper sides of the forward ends of 
prongs or fingers E formed upon or attached 
the plow-beams H are attached the rear ends 
to their forward ends. 
of the bars or levers Q, which project upward 
To the plowed-land edges of the plows D, or 
and forward at an angle of about forty-five de 
to studs or angle-irons attached to the said 
grees, (450.) 
edges, are attached guides or guards F, to pre 
To the forward end of each lever Q, at the 
vent the furrow-slices from slipping of the 
forward side of the standard N, is hinged the 
said mold-boards before reaching the proper 
rear end of the bar R, in such a manner that 
point. 
it cannot be lowered quite into line with the 
To the rear parts of the plows D are at 
said lever Q, but can be turned back freely. 
tached the standards G, which pass up through 
To the middle part of each hinged bar R is 
holes in the rear ends of the plow-beams H, 
attached, or upon it is formed, a projecting hook 
and their upper ends are attached to the rear 
or pin, S, which, when the plows are in Work 
ends of the bars I. The bars I are placed 
ing position, can be hooked upon the cross-bar 
above and parallel with the plow-beams B, 
O, and will lock the plows in place. To the 
forward ends of the hinged bars R are hinged 
and to their forward ends are attached the 
upper ends of the standards J, which pass 
loops or links T, which, when the plows are 
through holes in the plow-beams H. The raised from the ground, can be hooked upon 
55 
65 
o 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
IOO 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
251,27. 
45 
So 
55 
furrow edges of the said plows, substantially 
as shown and described, whereby the furrow 
slices are prevented from slipping off the mold 
boards before reaching the proper point. 
2. In a gang-plow, the plows D, constructed 
with forwardly-projecting prongs E upon their 
shears and guards F upon their mold-boards, 
substantially as herein shown and described, 
whereby the furrow-slices will be raised and 
kept upon the mold-boards till they reach the 
proper point to be turned, as set forth. 
. In a gang-plow, the combination, with the 
plow-beams E, the plow-standards G, and the 
colter - standards J, of the bars I and the 
swiveled screws L, substantially as herein 
shown and described, whereby the said plows 
and colters can be adjusted to work at any de 
sired depth in the ground, as set forth. 
4. In a gang-low, the combination, with the 
plow-beams H, the frame C, the pairs of stand 
ards N, and their connecting-bar O, of the 
rigid inclined levers Q, the hinged bars R., hav 
ing hooks S and links T, and the pins U, 
substantially as herein shown and described, 
whereby the plows can be locked in either 
a Working position or when raised from the 
ground, as set forth. 
5. In a gang-plow, the combination, with the 
side bars, C, of the frame, the standards N, 
and the rotary colters K, of the levers V, the 
link W, and the longitudinally-slotted verti. 
cal colters X, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
RICHARD MILLS. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. FIDLER, 
T. E. WASON. 
O 
pins U, attached to the forward cross-bar of 
the frame C, to support the plows in position. 
To the upper parts of the side standards, N, 
are pivoted levers V, to the rear ends of which 
are connected, by rods, links, or chains W, the 
upper ends of the straight colters X, which are 
slotted longitudinally to receive the pins or 
bolts, by which the said colters are kept in 
place against the sides of the rear ends of the 
side longitudinal bars of the frame C while 
moving up and down. The right-hand colter 
X is designed to cut off the beveled edge which 
the rotary colter would leave in cutting the 
first furrow in a field, so as to remove an ob 
s 
struction which the said right-hand plow would 
otherwise encounter in turning the said first 
furrow. The left-hand colter X serves as an 
ordinary colter to separate the furrow-slice to 
be turned by the said left-band plow from the 
unplowed land. 
The draft can be connected with the for 
ward part of the frame C by a tongue, Y, or 
other suitable means, as the character of the 
power to be used may require. 
The driver's seat Z, can be connected with 
and supported from the frame C by standards 
or other suitable means. 
I am aware that a cutter has heretofore been 
employed on the furrow side of a mold-board; 
and I am also aware that a conveyer has also 
been employed on the mold-board of a plow ; 
and I am further aware that adjustable rotary 
and vertical colters are not broadly new; and 
I therefore lay no claim to them; but 
What I do claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a gang-plow, the combination, with 
the plows D, of the guards F, secured upon the 
35 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251371.txt	(No Model.) 
E. H. T. LIWEING 
SPIRIT THERMOMETER, 
No. 251371. 
Patented Dec. 27, 188l. 
 
N. Peers. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD H. T. LIVEING, OF QUEEN ANNE STREET, CAVENDISEI SQUARE, 
COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR TO JAMES JOSEPH 
HICKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
SPIRT - THERMO METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 251,371, dated December 27, 1881. 
Application filed August 31, 1881. (No model.) Patented in England September 29, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD BENRY TOR 
LESSE LIVEING, a subject of the Queen of 
Great Britain, residing at Queen Anne Street, 
Cavendish Square, in the county of Middlesex, 
England, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Thermometers, (for which 
I have received Letters Patent in England, 
No. 3,939, dated September 29, 1880,) of which 
the following is a specification. 
The invention has for its object improve 
ments in thermometers, and relates to means 
whereby greater distinctness in reading and a 
novel and more ornamental appearance are ob 
tained than in thermometers of the description 
heretofore in use. For this purpose, instead 
of supplying the tube with mercury or with 
spirit colored as heretofore, I supply it with 
alcohol colored with a body known to chem 
ists as fluorescine, with the addition of a 
small quantity of some alkali, and I employ in 
combination with the salme a black or other 
very dark background. 
In order that my said invention may be more 
clearly understood and readily carried into ef. 
fect, I will proceed more fully to describe the 
method of carrying the same into effect, refer 
ring to the accompanying drawing, which rep 
resents a front view of my improved ther 
In Ometer. 
A is a thermometer-back; B, the tube, hav. 
ing a dark or black background, b, and C, the 
spirit within the tube, colored with fluorescine 
and alkali, so as to present a translucent am 
ber-colored appearance in the bulb portion c 
and an opaque deep-green-colored appearance 
to the column portion c'. 
The fluorescine (which may be obtained from 
chemical dealers under that name) is to be dis 
solved in the alcohol (the strength of which is 
not important, and methylated spirit of com 
merce answers well) in the proportion of about 
one-third of a grain to the fluid ounce of spirit. 
This proportion can, however, be varied con 
siderably without much alteration in effect. 
The liquid thus produced is scarcely at all flu 
orescent, but on the addition of a small quan 
tity of an alkali it becomes intensely so. For 
this purpose I employ strong ammonia solu 
tion, in the proportion of one drop to the fluid 
ounce of spirit; but other alkalies may be used 
and the exact proportion is not at all mate 
rial. The fluid thus obtained is introduced 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
into the thermometer-tubes in the usual man 
ner, these tubes being preferably made with 
bulbs of various ornamental forms, such as 
spiral, helical, or any other form that may be 
found convenient; but no form is here claimed, 
the object of such bulbs being to display to 
the best advantage the double color possessed 6o 
by the fluid, which reflects a green light but 
transmits a yellow light. Tubes thus made 
and supplied with the colored fluid above de 
scribed are, according to my invention, to be 
mounted against a black or other very dark 
colored scale (with white figures) as a dark 
background for the fluid; or the dark back 
ground may be produced by varnishing the 
back of the tube with black or other very dark 
colored varnish, or by a band of black or other 7 o 
very dark enamel drawn within the glass of 
the tube or on the back thereof, in place of the 
ordinary white enamel used for this purpose. 
If the thermometer be intended for a reg 
istering one, the index or needles must be 75 
made of some reflecting material in order to 
show within the fluorescent fluid. In place of 
those of black glass commonly employed, I 
find white enamel-glass answers well for this 
purpose. 
Having thus described the nature of my said 
invention and the mode in which I carry the 
same into effect, I would have it understood 
that what I claim is 
spirit colored with fluorescine and alkali, as set 
forth. 
2. Athermometer provided with a tube hav. 
ing its contained spirit colored with fluorescine 
and alkali, as set forth. 
3. A thermometer-tube having a dark back 
ground and its contained spirit colored with 
fluorescine and alkali, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
A tube B, dark background b, and a spirit 
filling, C, adapted to present a translucent 
amber-colored appearance to the bulb portion 
0 and an opaque deep-green-colored appear 
ance to the column portion c', as set forth. 
EDWARD H. T., LIVEING, 
1. An indicator-tube having its contained 85 
4. A thermometer constructed with a back, 95 
- 
9o 
Witnesses: 
R. W. MASON, 
C. M. WHITE, 
8 Hatton Garden. 
23 Southampton Buildings. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251472.txt	(No Model.) 
L. SCHMETAER, 
CARRIAGE TOP, 
2. Sheets-Sheet . . 
No. 251,472, 
Patented Dec. 27, 188l. 
 
INVENTOB 
BY 23 2-6 % e. 
ATTORNEY 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithcarapher, Washington. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
L. SCHMETZER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 251,472. 
 
CARRIAGE TOP, 
Patented Dec. 27, 1881. 
WITNESSEs: 
4. (53 22 
US 
ATTORNEY 
i. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
a 
LOUIS SCHMETZER, OF ROTHEN BURG-ON-TEE-TAUBER, BAVARIA, GERMANY. 
CARRAGE-TOP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 251,472, dated December 27, 1881. 
Application filed October 22, 1881. (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS SCHMETZER, re 
siding at the city of Rothenburg-on-the-Tauber, 
in the Kingdom of Bavaria, German Empire, 
5 have invented Improvements in Carriage-Tops, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The tops of children's and other carriages 
are generally supported in their raised state by 
means of straps or cords or by means of hinged 
brace-rods. The straps are objectionable in 
children's carriages, as they are in the way and 
inconvenient in use, while the hinged braces 
not only get soon worn and shaky by use, but 
can only support the top in a single fixed posi 
tion. 
This invention relates to an improved car. 
riage-top which can be locked at any suitable 
position, and which is adapted equally well for 
children's and large carriages. 
The invention consists of a carriage-top the 
yokes of which are pivoted to side plates of 
the carriage-body and secured by an adjustable 
locking device, which is arranged in connection 
with the ends of the front yoke, so as to retain 
the top in any desired position. The front 
yoke may also be arranged with springs at the 
ends, by which the top is automatically folded 
when the locking device is released. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a side view of a childs carriage with 
my improved top. Figs. 2 and 3 are detail 
side views of the locking and adjusting mech 
anisms of the top. Figs. 4 and 5 are respect 
ively a vertical transverse section of Fig. 2 
and an end view of Fig. 3; and Figs. 6, 7, 8, 
and 9 are side views of different modifications 
of the locking device of the top. 
- 
Similar letters of reference indicate the same 
parts. 
In the accompanying drawings, ct a' repre 
sent the supporting -yokes, which, together 
with the cover b, to which they are attached, 
form the top of the carriage. The yokes at a 
are pivoted to side plates, d, which are perma 
inently secured by means of screws or other. 
wise to the body of the carriage. 
To the front yoke, a', is applied my improved 
locking and adjusting mechanism by which the 
top of the carriage is to be retained in a raised 
In Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 5 a more complicated 
5o or lowered or intermediate position. 
45 
form of locking device is shown, while in Figs. 
6, 7, 8, and 9 the simpler forms of the same are 
shown. In Figs. 7 and 9 the front yoke, af, is 
provided at both ends with an extension, f, of 
less thickness, so that it has a certain spring 
action. A bead, i, projects from the extension 
f toward the plated, so as to engage into in 
dentations or holes o of the same, which holes 
are arranged concentrically to the pivot of the 
yoke af. 
Any desired number of holes may be ar 
ranged, so that the top can be retained at any 
desired position, according to the angle at which 
the front yoke, a', is locked. As the cover b 
connects the front yoke, a', with the remaining 
yokes, a, the entire top is thus securely held in 
a position corresponding to that of the front 
yoke. 
In Figs. 6 and 8 the spring-tension f of the 
front yoke, af, carries a small anti-friction 
roller, i, which sets into indentations 0 of the 
plated in the same manner as the bead i into 
those shown in Figs. 7 and 9. 
. When it is desired to arrange the top so that 
it may be lowered automatically whenever the 
front yoke is released from its locking device, 
a spiral spring, g, is applied with its inner end 
to the pivot h of the front yoke, af, and with 
its outer end to a shoulder of the same, as 
shown in Figs. 2 and 4. The spring g imparts 
thereby to the yokes a tendency to move in 
the direction of the arrow shown in Fig. 2 
whenever the locking device is released. The 
ends of the front yoke, a?, are enlarged and 
made of disk shape, the circumferences of the 
disks being toothed so as to form a kind of 
ratchet, l, into which a spring-pawl, l, is thrown. 
By this device the front yoke, af, and conse 
quently the entire top, may be retained at any 
desired position, the ratchet and pawl forming 
the equivalents of the locking devices shown 
in Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9. 
In place of applying the ends of the yokes a 
a to the fixed side plate, d, of the carriage, 
they may also be applied to an intermediate 
and oscillating plate, m, as shown in Figs. 3 
and 5. 
The auxiliary oscillating plate in turns around 
the pivot in, (shown in Fig. 3,) and is retained 
by a double spring - pawl, p, which passes 
through slots of the side plate, d, and engages 
55 
75 
85 
95 
Ioo 
2 
251,472 
one or more recesses of the front yoke, c', and 
of the plate n, as shown clearly in Fig. 3. 
The plate m is acted upon by a strong band 
spring, r(shown in Fig. 3,) or by a spiral spring, 
s, applied to the pivot in and the plate on as 
shown in Fig. 1, by which the oscillating plate 
in is moved in the direction of the arrow When 
ever it is desired to lower the top of the car 
riage by releasing the locking part p. The last 
arrangement has the advantage that the yokes 
of the top can be folded closer together and 
nearer to the body of the carriage, so as not to 
be in the way and exposed to injury in ship 
ping the carriage. 
What is claimed as the invention is 
1. In a carriage-top, the front yoke provided 
with flexible extensions, in combination with 
rollers attached thereto and plates provided 
O 
IS 
with holes adapted to receive and hold the 
rollers, substantially as described. 
2. The cover and yolkes a, in combination 
With the front yoke, c', ratchets and spring 
pawls, and coil-springs surrounding the pivots 
that connect the yokes and side plates together, 
Substantially as described. 
3. The combination of fixed side plates, the 
intermediate plates,n, theyokes attached there 
to, and the coil-springs, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
LOUIS SCHMETZER. 
25 
Witnesses: 
CARL FEHLERT, 
CARL NEUFER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251572.txt	(No Model.) 
P. GOLDMANN. 
CAP, 
Y, 
No. 251,572. 
Patented Dec. 27, 188l. 
vs... 
 
 
  
 
 
  
WSvrves. 26. 
7(644- 
Sw)ewvor. 
kiv Govduwaww 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D, C, 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
2 
PHILIPP GOLDMANN, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 251,572, dated December 27, 1881. 
Application filed November 11, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILIPP GoLDMANN, a 
citizen of the German Empire, residing at New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Caps, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
that class of caps which are provided with a 
protector capable of being lowered to cover the 
ears and neck, or raised and adjusted upon the 
rear of the cap body or crown, and to improve 
ments in that class of caps which are provided 
with a front piece that can be drawn down to 
cover the cheeks and chin. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
cap-body with an attached ear and neck pro 
tector and a swiveled chin and cheek pro 
tector, which are both capable of being folded 
or otherwise disposed around and upon the ex 
terior of the cap body or crown in the form of 
a continuous folcled band, or dra Win downward 
to protect the ears, neck, chin, and cheeks. 
These objects I attain by the construction and 
arrangement of parts illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section, showing 
the protectors folded on the cap-body. Fig. 2 
is a side view thereof. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal 
section, showing the protectors unfolded. Fig. 
4 is a side view of the same. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
The letter A. designates the cap-body, B the 
cheek and chin protector, and C the ear and 
neck protector. The cap-body A is equipped 
with the usual visor, D, and the opposite ends 
of the protector B are fastened at the sides of 
the cap-body to the free-end portions of the 
protector C by buttons E, or other equivalent 
devices, the intermediate portion of the pro 
tector B being left entirely detached. The 
protector B, however, can also be fastened to 
the cap-body A instead of to the protector C. 
The protector C serves to cover the ears and 
neck, and it is so formed that it can be folded up 
ward around the exterior of the cap body or 
crown, as clearly shown in Fig. 1. The pro 
tector B swings on the buttons E, and is thus 
adapted to be adjusted to any desired portion 
of the face, and especially to the cheeks and 
chin, when it has been drawn to a lower posi 
tion, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4, while it is also 
adapted to be adjusted to the front portion of 
the cap-body, as shown in Eigs. 1 and 2. The 
buttons E, or their substitute, are located near 
One of the longitudinal edges of the protector 
B, and by this arrangement the latter is ren 
dered capable of being folded when it is ad 
justed to the position shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
It should be remarked that the protector B 
can be made detachable. 
The ear and neck protector C is composed of 
a band terminating at the sides of the cap, ap 
proximately opposite to the ends of the visor 
D, and it is secured to the cap-body, on its up 
per edge and throughout its entire length, by . 
a continuous line of stitching which is curved 
upward from the back toward the front of the 
cap, on both sides thereof, or, in other Words, 
from the middle toward both ends of the pro 
tector, as indicated in Fig. 4. The effect of this 
arrangement of the attaching stitches is to 
draw the ends of the protector C upward and 
inward when it is brought to a lower position, 
and hence the effect of the protector is thereby 
materially increased. 
If desired, that part of the protector C di. 
rectly attached to the cap-body may be com 
posed of a separate piece of material. 
It will be observed that both the ear and neck 
protector C and the swiveled chin and cheek 
protector B are capable of being folded around 
and upon the cap body or crown A, and thereby 
constitutea practically continuous band around 
the same, thereby ornamenting the cap, and 
at the same time being adapted to be drawn 
downward to cover and protect the neck, ears, 
chin, and cheeks, as hereinbefore described. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A cap body or crown provided with the 
attached ear and neck protector carrying a 
cheek and chin protector swiveled thereto, said 
ear and neck protector being capable of fold 
ing up into a band around the exterior of the 
crown, and the swiveled cheek and chin pro 
tector carried thereby being capable of folding 
upon the front portion of the cap body or crown 
and to form a continuation of the folded ear 
and neck protector, substantially as described. 
2. A cap body or crown provided with an at 
95 
CO 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
251,572 
tached ear and neck protector and a swiveled 
cheek and chin protector, both of which are 
capable of being folded to form a band around 
the exterior of the cap body or crown, or be un 
folded downward around the neck and ears 
and chin or cheeks, respectively, substantially 
as described. 
3. A cap consisting of the body or crown, the 
neck and ear protector C, attached thereto and 
capable of being folded around the exterior 
thereof, and a chin and cheek protector attached 
to the free-end portions of the neck and ear pro 
tector and adapted to swing thereon, said pro 
tectors being capable of adjustment upon and 
around the exterior of the body or crown, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
O 
IS 
4. A cap consisting of a body or crown, all 
attached neck and ear protector, and a chin 
and cheek protector swiveled in position, both 
of said protectors being capable of adjustment 2 o 
upon and around the exterior of the cap-body, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
PHILIPP GOLDMANN. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 
- 
- - - 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251672.txt	J. L. BARKER. 
WAGON BRAKE LEWER 
Patented Dec. 27, 188l. 
(No Model.) 
No. 251,672, 
 
II. 
- 
772Ae ecs secs, 
L. HAT 
vs. 
2 
2 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN L, BARKER, OF RACINE, WLSCONSIN, ASSIGNOR TO FRANK K. BULL, 
". 
OF SAME PLACE. 
WAGON BRAKE L EVER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 251,672, dated December 27, 1881. 
Application filed May 17, 1881. (No model.) 
- 
Io part of this specification. 
To all chom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoEIN L, BARKER, of Ra 
cine, in the county of Racine, and in the State 
of Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Lever-Locks; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, making a 
This invention has for its objects to provide 
a brake which shall be simple in construction 
and which will operate without the use of 
springs, which are liable to get out of order, 
I5 rendering the brake inoperative. These ob 
jects I attain by the devices and mechanism 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of my 
improvement; Fig. 2, a top view of the same, 
and Fig. 3 a detached view of the pawl for lock 
ing the brake-lever. 
The letter A indicates a curved bracket, cast 
in one piece, and adapted to be attached to a 
wagon-body, B, at the points C by means of 
bolts D extending through the standards E, 
which bear against the wagon - body. The 
bracket at its lower end is provided with a 
socket or recess, F, in which the lower end of 
the brake-lever G is pivoted or fulcrumed. The 
said lever passes upward between the upper 
ratcheted portion of the bracket and the wag 
on-body, and through a vertical slot, H, in a 
curved pawl, I, which is pivoted at K to said 
brake-lever in such position that its free end 
will engage the ratchet-teeth L. The said pawl 
is also slotted at M, through which the upper 
or ratcheted portion of the bracket passes, the 
25 
33 
35 
So 
45 
pawl being adapted to work back and forth 
thereon. The upper end of the pawl is pro. 4o 
vided with a slot, N, in which is pivoted the 
lower end of a bar, P, the upper end of which 
is loosely attached to the brake-bar by means 
of an inclined link in such manner that when 
the upper ends of the bars are grasped so as 
to be brought together the pawl will be dis 
engaged from the ratchet, leaving the brake 
bar free to be oscillated, and when released 
the weight of the bar P will throw the pawl 
into engagement with the ratchets and lock 
the brake-bar in any desired position. 
The letter R indicates a whip-socket which 
may be cast on the forward standard, E; but 
this may be omitted, if desired. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
The cotubination, in a wagon-brake, of the 
bracket A, having a ratchet, Li, on its upper. 
part and a socket, F, at its lower end, the 6o 
brake-lever G, fulcrumed in said socket, the 
slotted pawl through which the brake-leverand 
ratcheted portions of the bracket are passed, 
the said pawl being pivoted to the brake-lever, 
and the bar P, pivoted to the pawl and loosely 65 
connected to the brake-lever by an inclined 
link, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand and seal this 3d 7o 
day of May, 1881. 
55 
- 
JOHNL, BARKER, 
L. S. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK A. JILLSON, 
ED. C. HART. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251772.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN ECKART, OF MUNICE, BAVARIA, GERMANY. 
COMPOUND FOR PRESERVING MEATS AND FISH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 251,772, dated January 8, 1882. 
Application filed November 18, 1880. (Specimens.) 
O 
(5 
To all whom it may concern: 
valve is opened and the pressure relieved, and 
Be it known that I, JoHN ECKART, of Mu 
the cover removed and the contents taken out. 
nich, Kingdom of Bavaria, Germany, have in 
The gut or cases may then be strewn over with 
vented a certain new and useful Preserving 
more of the salt in a dry condition and stored 
Compound, of which the following is a speci 
in vessels for shipment, and may be covered 
fication. 
with a solution of the preserving-salt in water. 
Instead of the solution mentioned in my 
By this method of packing the flesh of fish 
United States Patent No. 194,550, dated Au 
or other substances they are thoroughly satu 
gust 28, 1877, in which a half-pound of sali- rated and the air is entirely excluded there. 
cylic acid in one hundred pounds of water was 
from under all circumstances during. the stor 
used for preserving animal or vegetable mat 
age in the vessels and transportation. 
ter, I use the following preserving-salt, con 
I call such fish, preserved, filled, and packed 
sisting of a mixture of fifty per cent. of con 
in the manner described, rolled fish. 
mon salt, forty-seven and one-half per cent. of 
Other meats may be treated in a similar 
chemically pure boracic acid, two per cent. of 
way, and the effect will be as satisfactory. 
tartaric acid, one-half per cent. of salicylic 
I do not herein claim the gelatine solution, 
acid. This salt is applicable to preserving any 
as I propose to make it the subject of a sepa 
sort of meats for food, but particularly so for 
rate application for patent. 
fish. The flesh of fishes immediately after 
Modifications may be made in the propor 
they are caught is separated from the skin and 
tions to a limited extent. Parts of the inven 
bones. I mix the flesh with my preserving 
tion may be used without the others. 
I can 
salt in the proportions of about twenty grams 
omit the packing in gut. I can omit the ad 
of the salt with one kilogram of flesh. The 
dition of gelatine; but I prefer the whole used 
together. 
flesh is afterward filled into gut or artificial 
25 cases of parchment or other flexible material. 
I am aware that salt and the acids named 
These flexible cases are then packed or filled 
herein have been used as preservatives sepa. 
into casks or other vessels, after which these 
rately and in other combinations, and I do not 
casks are filled up with a gelatine solution, 
claim them except as herein set forth. 
made in the proportion of about fifty grams of 
gelatine, twenty grams of the preserving-salt, 
ld one thousand grams of water, and sub 
itted to a pressure in the following manner: 
The casks being strong and tight, their inte 
rior is put in communication with the press 
ure-pipe of a pump and hermetically closed, 
more of the solution is pumped into the cask 
until the pressure-gage with which it is supplied 
- shows a pressure up to twelve atmospheres 
or more. This presure is maintained from fif 
teen to thirty minutes, more or less, according 
to the requirements of the case, until the con 
tents are completely saturated. Then an air 
I claim 
1. The preserving-salt composed of chloride 
of sodium and boracic acid with the smaller 
quantities of tartaric and salicylic acid, sub 
stantially as herein specified. 
2. The sausage described, having a filling 
of meat saturated with the preserving-solu 
tion, as herein specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
WILHELM WIESENHTTER, 
MARTIN KRNER. 
JOHN ECKART. 
my hand. 
- 
45 
55 
75 
35 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251872.txt	(No Model. ) 
2. 
C. B. HAL STEAD &. J. A. CARPENTER. 
 
No. 251,872, 
L0G SAWING MACHINE, 
Patented Jan. 3, 1882. 
Wa?,72-6S S6S 
Cvil &Arce, 
// 2.6% 
77 verseer, 
6a-e 6, 2442-4, 
/2 easte 
 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CLARK B. HALSTEAD AND JAMES A. CARPENTER, OF MARION, OEIO. 
LOG-SAWING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 251,872, dated January 8, 1882. 
Application filed September 28, 1881. (No model.) 
X 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CLARK B. HALSTEAD 
and JAMES A. CARPENTER, of Marion, in the 
county of Marion, and in the State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
mentsin Log-Sawing Machines; and we do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, making a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in log-saws; and it has for its object to 
provide an apparatus which may be cheaply 
constructed, which will be durable and not lia 
ble to get out of order, and which may be read 
ily and conveniently operated by one person. 
These objects we attain by the apparatus illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which- 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of the 
apparatus entire, and Fig. 2 a detached view 
of the guide for guiding the free end of the 
SW 
The letter A indicates the frame ef the ma 
chine, and is composed of the inclined beams 
a, af. Between the upper parts of the beams 
a', which are connected at the top and bottom 
by means of the cross-pieces b, is journaled the 
upper end of a swinging bar or sweep, B, 
which is adapted to swing between the beams 
a. To the lower end of the said bar B is piv 
oted a head, D, by means of the segmental 
connections d and the pivot-pin e. 
The letter E indicates a loosely-connected 
bar, which is located between the beams a and 
extends toward the front ends of the same. 
The front end of the bar is provided with a 
hanger, e", which has a vertical slot, h, and 
friction-wheelinear its lower end, to guide the 
free end of the saw. The rear end of the saw 
is secured to the pivoted head D, so as to be 
moved back and forth by the oscillation of the 
bar B. 
The letter Findicates two prongs at the 
front of the beams a, which are inserted in the 
log to be cut, and serve to hold the forward 
ends of the beams securely in place. 
G indicates a pair of tongs or bent levers 
fulcrumed to the forward end of one of the 
beams a at one side, and connected by linksH 
55 
to a bar or rod, I, extending backward to the 
operator, the said bar having serrations or 
teeth adapted to engage a staple, M', driven 
into one of the beams a, by which the tongs G 
are made to clamp and secure the machine to 
the log. These levers or tongs serve to clamp 
the apparatus to the log, and act in conjunc 
tion with the prongs to hold the forward end 
of the apparatus to its work. 
The letter Kindicates two curved braces for 
strengthening the apparatus. I indicates a 
handle attached to the rods M, which are se 
cured to the sweep B. 
The operation of the above invention will be 
readily understood from the above description. 
The forward end of the apparatus is secured 
to the log, as set forth, the rear end resting 
upon the ground. The saw is then adjusted 
in its guide, and by means of the handle and 
swinging beam B is traversed back and forth 
over the log. 
The apparatus may be arranged to suit the 
size of the operator by changing the height of 
the handle, so that it can be used by a grown 
person or child, which is done by changing the 
respective lengths of the pieces MM which 
form the handle, making their point of union 
higher or lower, as the case may be. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is- . 
In combination with the supporting-frame, 
constructed as described, and provided with 
prongs to enter the log, the oscillating sweep, 
carrying a saw Working through a suitable slot 
in a hanger secured to a bar loosely connected 
to the supporting-frame and against a friction 
roller mounted in an opening in said hanger, 
and the tongs and their operating mechanism, 
adapted to work in connection with the prongs 
on the frame to hold the log, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 21st day of 95 
September, 1881. 
75 
. 
CLARK B. EIALSTEAD. 
JAMES A, CARPENTER, 
Witnesses: 
CLAUDE DRAKE, 
J. JOE, MCCARTHY: . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US251972.txt	(No Model.). 
3 Sheets-Sheet i. 
W. H. H. TRACY & G. E. STILLMAN. 
MACHINE FORTURNING AND PRESSING WOVEN FABRICS, 
No. 251,972, 
Patented Jan, 3, 1882. 
LI 
III/ 
Fill" 
sy () as 
 
 
 
c 
bi-li has I 
vir 
in 
IE 
S 
w 
s 
 
nig 
N. 
t 
f 
^ 
Ns 
NS SD | C Sl 
2 & 
y --- C. 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. H. H., TRACY & G, E. STILLMAN, 
MACHINE FORTURNING AND PRESSINC wOVEN FABRICs. 
No. 251,972, 
Patented Jan, 3, 1882. 
-(test 
N. peers, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
W. H. H. TRACY & G. E. STILLMAN, 
MACHINE FORTURNING AND PRESSING WOVEN FABRICs. 
No. 251,972, 
Patented Jan, 3, 1882, 
  
   
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. H. TRACY AND GEORGE 
E. STILLMAN, OF TROY, NEW YORK, 
ASSIGNORS OF ONE-THIRD TO JOSIAH L YOUNG, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR TURNING AND PRESSING woven FABRICs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 251,972, dated January 3, 1882. 
- 
Application filed October 18, 1881. (No model.) 
- 
. 
--- 
, 
15 
Io this specification. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, WILLIAM. H. H.TRACY 
and GEORGE E. STILLMAN, both of Troy, in 
the county of Rensselaer and State of New 
5 York, have invented a Machine for Turning 
and Pressing Woven Fabrics; and we do here 
by declare that the following is a full and ex 
act description thereof, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, making part of 
Our invention relates to machinery for turn 
ing and pressing woven fabrics, and more es 
pecially to such as are used in the manufac 
ture of collars and cuffs. 
In the manufacture of collars and cuffs it 
has been customary, prior to our invention, to 
form the turned-in and stitched edges of such 
articles according to one or the other of two 
well-known plans-viz., either that plan in 
20 which the several plies of the material were 
run (or sewed) together and then turned, 
and the article finished so as to present an 
edge having the run seam in it, or that other 
plan, in which what is known as a guttered' 
25 edge is formed-i.e., an edge having the near 
est line of stitches so far from it that the 
turned edges of the united plies may be sepa 
rated, showing a sort of groove or gutter when 
pulled away from each other. In the manu 
3o facture of such articles as referred to by either 
of the plans mentioned the turning and sew 
ing have been done sometimes by hand and at 
other times by the aid of machinery; and of 
the two kinds of turned and stitched edges re 
35 ferred to, that known as the guttered edge 
is decidedly the more preferable now with the 
trade and market, because of its acknowledged 
superiority over the other kind. 
Our invention has for its object to provide 
4o mechanical means for the rapid production of 
that kind of work in which is involved the gut 
tered edge; and it consists in an organized 
mechanism adapted to turn over the edge of a 
blank composed of one or more thicknesses of 
45 woven fabric, and at the same time flatten 
down the folded-over edge in a manner to in 
sure the retention of the fold until the folded 
blank shall have been stitched down. 
Our invention further consists in a novel 
so combination of devices for flattening down the 
65 
folded stuff in a perfect manner, to be herein 
after more fully described and specifically 
claimed. 
Our invention further consists in the com 
bination, as hereinafter to be more fully ex-55 
plained, of means for breaking down and flat 
tening the folded stuff and means for smooth 
ing it out, so that the folded blank shall be in 
good condition for the stitching together of 
the folded blanks. 
Our invention further consists in certain 
novel details of construction in the device or 
mechanism for turning the fabric, all of which 
will be hereinafter more fully explained and 
specifically claimed. 
To enable those skilled in the art to make 
and use our invention, we will now proceed to 
more fully describe it, referring by letters to 
the accompanying drawings, in which we have 
illustrated a machine embodying the several to 
features of our invention in the form in which 
we have so far successfully practiced the same. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a top view of 
the machine. Fig. 2 is a side elevation. Fig. 
3 is a detail vertical section at the line at a of 75 
Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a detail cross-section aty 2), 
Fig. 1, showing merely the construction of the 
hemmer or turning mechanism. Fig. 5 is a 
detail top view of the hemmer mechanism sepa 
rated from the rest of the machine, and with 8o 
the hemmer device properturned or swung out 
of its working or operative position. Fig. 6 is 
a side or edge view of the parts seen at Fig. 
5, viewed from the direction indicated by the 
arrow at Fig. 5; and Fig. 7 is a detail vertical 85 
section, showing a modification of the system 
of rollers for flattening down and smoothing 
out the turned-over edge of the fabric. 
In the several figures the same parts will be 
found designated by the same letter of refer- 9o 
eCe. A represents the main frame or table-like 
supporting-platform of the machine, on top of 
which is secured the work-table B, on which 
the blanks are placed or rested as fed by hand 95 
into the hemmer or turning mechanism, which 
latter is supported, as shown, by said Work 
table. This turniug mechanism is composed 
essentially of a plate, C, one edge of which ex 
tends upward and over, as seen at D, and an ico 
 
255,972 
w 
2 
adjustable double spring-former, E, pivoted at 
a, and held to its work by a spring-latch, b. 
The top of the housing or space within which 
this former E is located (when at work) is 
5 formed, partially or wholly, of glass, as seen 
at c, for a purpose to be presently explained, 
and the said former is composed (see Figs, 3 
and 6) of a solid rearmost portion and two 
yielding plates, 1 and 2, extending thence for 
Io ward, by which construction the upper and 
lower portion or leaves, so to speak, 1 and 2, 
are rendered capable of slight movements to. 
ward each other to increase the spaces be 
tween the top and the bottom of said former 
I5 and the adjacent surfaces, respectively, of the 
housing, for the accommodation of and proper 
action on blanks of different thicknesses. The 
said former, being pivoted at a and held with 
in its housing in plate C D merely by the 
2O spring b, can easily yield bodily and laterally 
to adapt its working-edge to a proper action 
on blanks of different thicknesses. 
On the main frame A is mounted a plate, G., 
provided with upwardly-projecting stands H 
5 H, in which are formed bearings for the three 
2 
shafts I, J, and K, of which the latter, K, is 
the main driving-shaft. The main shaft K is 
shown provided with a pulley, L, to which the 
motive power is applied, and it has a spur 
3o gear which engages with and drives each of 
the pinions M N of the other shafts. 
On the inner end of the main shaft K is fast 
ened a short roll, d, the periphery of which is 
- clothed with a covering, e, of vulcanized rub 
ber, for the purpose of making said periphery 
35 
slightly elastic or impressionable, while on the 
inner ends of shafts I and J are secured re 
spectively a metallic-faced fluted roll, f, and 
a metal smooth-faced roll, g, both of which rolls 
4o have their faces working in forcible contact 
with the rubber-covered periphery or face of 
roll d. (See Figs. 2 and 3.) 
The inner end of shaft I is free to move up 
and down slightly in its bearing-box in stand 
45 E, and is provided, as shown, with a small 
grooved face-pulley, l, over which passes a 
round belt, i, that also passes beneath the pull 
ley j. (See Fig. 2.) This pulley j is hung in 
the upper end of a stirrup, k, the lower end of 
So which is pivoted to a lever, O, the fulcrum l 
of which is in the lower portion of a stand, P, 
that projects downward from the lower side of 
the platform A, and said lever O is provided 
With an adjustable weight, Q, all as clearly 
55 shown. From this it will be seen that by set 
ting the Weight Q at any given point in lever 
O the endless belt i will pull down on the pull 
ley h with more or less force, and the fluted 
rollf may be thus caused to act with more or 
6o less pressure on the material passed between 
its face and that of the rubber-covered roll d. 
The operation of the machine may be thus 
explained: Power being applied by a driving 
belt to the pulley L, the moving parts are put 
in motion at a proper speed and the operative 
starts in the blank to be turned, forcing the 
edge through the interior of the turned-over 
65 
part D of plate C (in the direction of feed in 
dicated by the arrow at Fig. 3) and past the 
working-edge of former E, and thence into the 
bite of rolls d and f. In starting in the blank 
the operative guides it from the rear in such 
manner that the edge turned upward and over 
on top of former Eshall be turned over to just 
the rightextent, and the properextent is known 
by causing the edge of the blank to come up to 
the shoulder indicated by the lowermost one 
of the two dotted lines seen at Fig. 1, said 
shoulder and line being the gage-line. The op 
erative can easily know when the edge of the 
blank is traveling exactly in contact with or 
up to the gage-line, (not falling short of it or 
crowding beyond it,) because the part c of the 
housing within which the blankis being turned 
over the former E is perfectly transparent, be 
ing made of glass, and hence the edge of the 
blank is always in sight at the locality at which 
it must be seen in order to know by visual ob 
servation that the turning is being done just 
right. As the turned-over and double portion 
of the blank passes into the bite of and along 
between the fluted rollf and the soft-faced roll 
d the folded fabric is broken down at the edge 
of the fold by a sort of crimping operation, 
which has the effect to render the folded blank 
capable of retaining its fold until it shall have 
been stitched to its mate or counterpartin the 
completion of the cuff, collar, or other article. 
The object and effect of having the roller f 
fluted, as shown, are to draw the folded-over 
flap portion of the fabric away from the edge 
of the fold, and thus insure the crimping of the 
blank properly and a perfect parallelism be 
tween the hinge-line of the fold and the edge 
of the folded-over flap of the blank, and the 
flutes or corrugations of roll f must, of course, 
run in the direction shown in the drawings in 
order to exert properly this drawing tendency. 
The degree of obliquity of the flutes of rollf 
is not very important. We have found that 
shown in the drawings to answer well the de 
signed purpose in a working machine. Nor 
is it indispensably necessary to use this ob 
liquely-fluted roller fand soft-faced roll d in the 
manner shown, as a roll having flutes or ridges 
made parallel with its axis, but having its shaft 
set obliquely to that of roll d, would answer 
the purpose; and perhaps the described (and 
necessary) drawing action in the folded-over 
flap might be effected by the use of a rubber 
faced roll without flutes, in place of the rollf, 
and arranged obliquely to the co-operative face 
of the roll d. As the folded-over and broken 
down or crimped blank passes from between 
the rolls f and d it travels along into the bite 
of and between the peripheries of rolls g and d, 
the operation of which is to smooth out the 
crimps or crinkles made in the necessary op 
eration of crushing or breaking down the edge 
of the fold, (or the hinge-line of the folded-over 
flap,) in order that the blank may be in a more 
desirable condition for union with the other 
part of the article by stitching, as usual. 
Of course other arrangements of rolls than 
75 
95 
TOO 
IOS 
ILO 
IIS 
I25 
251,972 
- 
- 
3 
- 
. 
... 
5 
that shown and so far described may be used. 
For instance, in the mere modification seen at 
Fig. 7 two sets of rolls, dande to break down 
the fold and g h to smooth it out, are used; and 
other arrangements may be used, if deemed ex 
pedient. 
In lieu of the adjustable weight and its at 
tachmentsfor gaging the yielding pressure with 
which the upper roll, facts, a spring-tension 
device may be employed, or other means for 
effecting the desired end, and in lieu of having 
the under roll, d, rotated by the main shaft, it 
or a series of lower rolls (where more than one 
be used, as seen at Fig. 7) may be mounted 
on stationary axes or studs and be rotated by 
the turning action of the upper roll, (or rolls,) 
as the judgment of the builder may suggest 
would be best. 
It will be understood that it is important 
that the former E possess the described ca. 
pacity for contraction in the direction of its 
thickness and movement bodily on its pivotal 
point of attachment to plate D, as described, 
because not only is the turning mechanism 
thus rendered capable of acting properly and 
similarly on blanks of different thickness, but 
it is made capable of yielding to permit the 
easy passage and proper turning over of the 
corner portions of collar and cuff blanks, where 
the stuff is much thicker than at other points 
in the same blank; but in lieu of the precise 
construction shown for the accomplishment of 
these ends, other and equivalent constructions 
may of course be adopted-such, for instance, 
as one in which. that part of the plate CD in 
Casing the Working - surfaces of the former E 
should be made to expand while the former re 
mained rigid and immovable. 
It will be seen that the first part of our in 
vention may be practiced without restriction 
to either the particular form of turning mech 
anism or the precise kind of breaking down 
and crimping or flattening devices shown, the 
gist of this part of our invention resting in an 
organism embracing a turning mechanism and 
means for fixing or setting the turned-over flap 
in the manner and for the purpose explained; 
is and it will also be seen that it is not material 
to the second part of our invention whether 
the obliquely-fluted roll and under roll, d, be 
So 
used or some other devices capable of perform 
ing the functions of these rolls, as described. 
Nor is it indispensable in practicing our inven 
30 
35 
45 
 
 
55 
75 
tion that the form of smoothing devices shown 
be employed, so long as the proper means be 
incorporated for smoothing out the folded-over 
flap and its underlying portion of fabric. 
Of course one or more of the several fea 
tures of our invention may be used without 
the others, and we do not therefore wish to 
be understood as restricting the scope of our 
invention to a machine embodying these sev 
eral features. 
Having so fully explained the several parts 
of our invention and the mode in which we 
have so far practiced them that any one skilled 
in the art can make and use the same, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a mechanism or 
device for turning over the edge of the fabric 
drawn through it, of means for drawing the 
turned-over fabric and at the same time flat 
tening down the fold and breaking the edge 
thereof, substantially as set forth. 
2. In combination with means for turning 
over the edge of the blank, a set of drawing 
and flattening rolls adapted to also exert a 
drawing tendency in the direction of the edge 
of the folded-over flap, so as to keep the said 
edge parallel with the hinge-line of the flap. 
3. In combination with a set of rolls for flat 
tening and crimping, means for smoothing out 
the folded and crimped portion of the blank, 
as set forth. 
4. In a turning mechanism or device, a former 
adapted to contractin the direction of its thick 
ness, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
5. In a turning mechanism or device, a former 
adapted to yield bodily to permit the passage 
between its working - edge and the adjacent 
surface of its incasement of different thickness 
of material, as set forth. 
6. In combination with the former and the 
partially-surrounding case of a turning mech 
anism, a transparent top portion, in the man 
ner and for the purpose specified. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto set our 
hands this 12th day of October, 1881. 
r 
W. H. E. TRACY. 
GEO, E, STILLMAN. 
In presence of 
ROBT. H. McCLEHAN 
JOHN E. KELLY. 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252072.txt	 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
C. ELTON BUCK, OF WILMINGTON, DELAWARE, ASSIGNOR TO WALTON 
- 
WHANN & CO, OF SAME: PLACE. 
BAG OR SACK FOR STORING OR TRANSPORTNG FERT LZERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,072, dated January 10, 1882. 
Application filed October 6, 1881. (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
burlaps, or finished bags are first immersed in 
Be it known that I, C. ELTON BUCK, of Wil. 
the solution for from four to five minutes, and 
mington, county of New Castle, State of Dela 
are then compressed or wrung between rub 
Ware, have invented a new and useful article 
ber rolls, so as to express the excess of the so 
of manufacture, a bag, sack, or kindred cover 
lution. The bath is then repeated for a sec 
ing, envelope, casing, or integument made of 
ond period equal to the first, in order to in 
burlaps, gunny-baggings, or other textile or 
sure thorough saturation, the saturated mate. 
fibrous material coated or impregnated with 
rial again passed through the rolls, and after 
soluble silicate, to be employed to contain and 
the excess has been thus again squeezed out, 
incase for storage and transportation super 
dried. When dry the material, if thread or 
phosphates, guanos, or other fertilizers, of 
fiber, is manufactured into bagging, or if bur 
which the following is a specification. 
laps, bagging, or other fibrous or textile fab 
Beretofore manufacturers, dealers, and con 
ric, into bags. When manufactured bags or 
sumers of artificial fertilizers have experienced 
sacks have been treated they are, when dry, 
constant losses by reason of the rotting of the 
ready for use. 
sacks in which said fertilizers have been in 
By the treatment by saturation and press 
cased and shipped, the decay being frequently 
'ure above described, in addition to thorough 
rapid and the sacks, falling to pieces in a 
permeation, there results or is left upon the 
comparatively short time. Many expedients 
fiber when dry a film of solid silicate, which 
against this result have been unsuccessfully 
forms a protective covering to the entire inte 
resorted to, no practical method of prevention 
rior surface of the fibrous fabric of the bags 
being at this date known. 
or sacks, capable of resisting all corrosive or 
After special study, investigation, and ex 
disintegrating action incident to contact with 
perimentation I have devised a method of fertilizing material. 
treatment which has proved practically and 
When material is treated as above in the 
successfully a preventive of the evil. 
piece it is obvious that the twine or thread 
I have discovered that by saturating, coat 
employed to unite or sew said material into 
ing, or otherwise treating burlaps, gunny 
bag form must likewise be treated to render it 
equally acid-proof. 
baggings, or other textile or fibrous materials 
suitable, perse, for the purpose, either in the 
Instead of resorting to saturation as a 
thread or fiber, prior to weaving, in the woven or 
means of applying the silicate, I call mani 
fibrous piece, or in the form of manufactured 
festly make the application by coating, paint 
bags or sacks, with a silicate solution-such, 
ing, or otherwise superficially applying the so 
for instance, as a solution of silicate of soda, 
lution upon the material to be rendered proof, 
or of silicate of potassa, (otherwise known as 
not so readily, however, to the thread or fiber 
soluble glass? or liquid quartz,) or of an 
as to the fabric or completely formed bag. 
admixture of the two-the material treated is 
It will be also comprehended that the pur 
rendered proof against the destructive action 
poses of my invention will be attained by the 
treatment of any fit material to be applied as 
under consideration. 
In the application of the discovery named 
an inner lining or integument to the sacks or 
my invention resides. 
bags, the latter not being directly treated. 
For the better comprehension of my inven. 
The gist of the invention lies in the appli 
tion I will proceed to describe a convenient 
cation of soluble silicate or chemically-equiva 
method by which it can be carried into prac 
lent solutions, without restriction as to specific 
tice, although I may premise that many other character or mode or vehicle of application to 
and perhaps equally practical applications of finished material suitable for making into bags, 
the discovery may be made. 
or to manufactured bags, whereby the latter 
I employ the silicate solution, preferably of | are rendered proof against the direct corrosive 
a strength of 240 to 269 Baum, although action or the fumes of superphosphates, guanos, 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 
so this is not a restrictive. limit. The thread, or other fertilizers. 
2 
- 
252,022 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
As a new article of manufacture, a textile 
or fibrous sack or inclosing integument for in 
5 closing phosphates, guanos, and fertilizers, the 
threads, fibers, or substance of which is coat 
ed, saturated, or impregnated with a soluble 
silicate. 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto signed 
my name this 28th day of September, 1881. 
C, ELTON BUCK. 
In presence of - 
LEVIA. BERTOLETTE, 
WM. W. PRITCHETT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252172.txt	 
(No Model.) 
W. BIRSS 
STONE CUTTING MACHINE, 
No. 252,172, 
Patented Jan, l0 l882. 
Z727. Z. 
2. 
 
 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
%2. rzyev, 
ttorneys 
rITWESSES 
w 
4x4-Sz4 
(Ness..? 
Yv 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
W. 
WILLIAM BIRSS, OF LONG COVE, TENANT'S HARBOR, MAINE. 
STONE-CUTTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,172, dated January 10, 1882. 
Application filed July 22, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM BIRSs, of 
Long Cove, Tenant's Harbor, in the county of 
Knox and State of Maine, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Stone 
Cutting Machines; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, which will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
stone-cutting machine. Fig. 2 is a side view, 
partly broken away, showing the lathe or cut. 
ter operating screw; and Fig. 3 is a detailplan 
view, ou an enlarged scale, of the top of the 
sliding and adjustable carriage which carries 
the rotary cutter. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
stone-cutting machines, particularly for cut 
ting round or cylindrical stone-surfaces; and 
it consists in certain details of construction 
and operation of parts, substantially as here 
in after more fully set forth and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, A 
is a bed-frame, preferably supported upon legs 
a. a. Journaled in bearings b b, fastened at 
one end of the frame A, is a shaft, c, having 
a driving-pulley, c', between said bearings, a 
second pulley, d, at its outer end, and a disk 
or plate, e, at its inner end, having facial pins 
or studs e", which fit into cavities in the end 
of the stone to be operated upon and assist to 
hold it. At the opposite end of the frame A 
is a sliding block, f, having feet adapted to fit 
into and slide in grooves in that end of the 
frame which is provided with a hand-crank 
screw, g, adapted to bear in a cavity in that 
end of the stone or block of granite to effect 
the holding thereof. This block, it will there 
fore be seen, can be moved up to and away 
from the stone or block, as may be desired, in 
adjusting it in position to be cut and remov 
ing it after the completion of the cutting oper 
ation. 
B is a carriage, which is adapted to travel 
by means of and upon the screw-rod C, extend 
ing the entire length of the frame and parallel 
with the line or plane of cutting the stone. It 
is driven by a pulley, hat one end and a belt 
encompassing the latter and the pulley d upon 
the shaft c. The upper part of this carriage, 
B', is capable of having a motion toward and 
from the work or at right angles to the plane 55 
of cutting the stone, to permit of the adjust 
ment of the tool or cutter, accordingly as oc 
casion may require. To effect this adjustment, 
a hand-screw, i, engaging a female screw. 
threaded eye or tube in the under side of the 6o 
slide B of the carriage B, is employed. 
It will be observed that the top part, B, of 
the carriage B is of circular shape and pro 
vided with two segmental slots, ii, through 
which project studs or guide-pins if', affixed 65 
in the carriage-block B, upon which the cir 
cular top is pivoted by a central pintle, n. To 
relieve the latter from strain the under side of 
the top part, B', has a central dovetailed re 
cess, o, of circular shape, which fits upon a 7o 
projecting stud or button, p, of corresponding 
shape, forming part of the carriage B, thus 
permitting of ready rotary adjustment of the 
top part, while at the same time relieving the 
central pintle, n, from Strain, and also pre 
venting the top from coming off of the bottom 
part, B. 
The shaft i has a small pinion, l, covered by 
a box or casing, l, which engages with a 
cogged section, n, upon the top of B' for ef 
fecting the rotary adjustment of said part with 
its cutter k. 
It will be observed that this machine is 
adapted to cut cylindrical or round surfaces 
upon stone or blocks of granite, such as col 
uinns, vases, urns, &c. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
In a machine for cutting or dressing stone, 
the combination of the sliding carriage B, hav 
ing central dovetailed button, p, and guide 
studs j if on opposite sides of said button, 
pintle n, and circular top part, B, having seg 
mental slots jj, and central circular dovetailed 
recess, o, as shown and described, for the pur 
pose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
95 
WILLIAM BIRSS. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN H. LONG, 
HENRY F. KELLOCH. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252272.txt	G. F. SPEER, 
DRYING KILN, 
Patented Jan. 10, 1882. 
--" " 
(No Model.) 
No. 252,272, 
 
 
3. * ... * 
-3. 
A ARIE Copy 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GARETT F. SPEER, OF PEIILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DRYING-KILN. 
- SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,272, dated January 10, 1882. 
Application filed Novembir 5, 1881. (No model.) 
SS 
6o 
65 
70 
, 
. 
. 
pressure. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GARRETT F. SPEER, of . 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvementsin Dying-Kilns; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a vertical central section of my 
improved kiln, or drier. Fig-2 is a plan or top 
view of the same with the roof removes. Fig. 
3 is detail of the nozzle and gutter. 
The same part is indicated by the same let. 
ter wherever it occurs in the drawings, 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
economical and efficient apparatus applicable 
to all the purposes to which driers are com 
monly applied, from the drying of lumber in 
large kilns to the drying of fruits in smaller 
chambers. . 
The principle of my invention consists in 
using the same cold air which produces the cir 
culation in the drying-chamber to cool the con 
densing-surfaces which extract the moisture 
and give direction to the air-currents, and in 
the saving of heat by the indefinitely repeated 
leating, circulation, and drying of the same 
air and its confinement in the kiln until a pre 
determined limit of pressure has been reached 
and a relieving-valve opened. 
My invention consists in confining the mat 
ters to be dried in a close chamber heated by 
airpassing around and between steam-pipes, 
and forcing into said chamber, by means of a 
condensing-fan or air-pump, atmospheric air 
through a broad flat metallic tuyere or nozzle, 
whose surface forms a condenser upon which 
the injected air, after being heated by passing 
between steam pipes and circulating among 
the matters to-be dried and depriving them of 
their moisture, impinges and parts with the 
water it has absorbed, and is again heated, cir 
culated, and dried, the operation being con 
tinuous, the fan keeping up a constant and 
regulated pressure within the kiln, the co 
densed air only escaping through the safety 
valve when the fixed limit of pressure has been 
reached, all as hereinafter more specifically set 
. 
fort, 
In the accompanying drawings, which rep 
resent a lumber-drying kiln with my improve. 
ment, S marks the walls or sides of the kiln; 
R, the roof; C, the chimney; and V, the relief 
or safety valve, loaded to any desired limit of 
K is the drying - chamber, having sliding 
doors D at either end for the entrance and ex 
it of cars bearing lumber. The floor. of this 
chamber is composed of the longitudinal steam 
pipes P, communicating at the ends with the 
manifolds' MM'. The steam enters through 
inlet-pipe I, manifold M, and exhausts through 
manifold Mi' into a suitable steam-trap. (Not 
shown.) 
F is a condensing-fan, driven by any suita 
ble power, and communicating with a chamber, 
A, below the floor of chamber K, by means of 
a nozzle, N, which is flattened and broadened 
as it approaches and enters the kiln in the man 
ner represented in Fig. 2, the area of the noz. 
zle being the same at the delivery end as at its 
junction with the fan. The part of the nozzle 
within the kiln is equal in width to the width 
of the kiln, and has a downward inclination, 
as shown in Fig.1. Its lower margin forms a 
gutter connecting by trapped pipe O with a 
well or tank, W. The delivery-opening of the 
nozzle is below the gutter G, as shown in Figs. 
. . 
1 and 3. 
The operation is as follows: The lumber be 
ing introduced into chamber K and the steam 
let into the pipes P, the fan F is set in opera 
tion, and sends a uniform current of air into 
the chamber A. This current fills all parts of 
the chamber and passes up between the pipes 
P, by which it is heated, into chamber Kwhere 
it soon becomes loaded with the moisture it 
draws from the green lumber. A portion of the 
air thus laden with moisture comes into con 
tact with the upper surface of the flattened me- . 
tallic nozzle N, which is kept at a low tempera 
ture by the cold air constantly flowing through 95 
it. The air thus dried and partially cooled de-, 
scends into chamber A, and is again driven 
along with the entering current, again heated, 
loaded with moisture, and relieved of it by con 
densation as before, the operation being indefi 
nitely repeated, and the water of condensation 
75 
. 
. 
85. 
90 
Ioo 
15 
25 
35 
40. 
iso 
2 
252,222 
running off by gutter G and trapped pipe O in 
to the well or tank W. The constant action 
of the fan keeps up a pressure in the kiln, which 
is relieved, whenever it reaches a prescribed 
5 limit, by the automatic action of the loaded 
valve. W. It is only when the valve acts that 
any portion of the heat supplied by the steam 
escapes and is lost. The economy of heat 
in this direction is therefore obvious. It is still 
Io further enhanced by the fact that, owing to tie 
ceaseless flow of the air into the revolving car. 
rents indicated by the arrows, the work can be 
done at a much lower temperature than in killis 
of the ordinary construction. I use a tempera 
15 ture of from 1300 to 1400 Fahrenheit, as against 
a temperature of from 1750 to 2500, used in 
Besides the saving of fuel in. 
common kilns. 
cident to this, there is a great advantage aris 
ing from the gradual character of the heating, 
which prevents the surface of the wood from 
becoming baked and sealed, while much of its 
moisture remains within to expand and check 
the wood by its escape through the dried and 
clogged surface. 
it should be observed that when from any 
25 
30 
cause it becomes desirable to increase the con 
densing power of the flattened nozzle the air 
for the supply of the fan may be drawn from 
a refrigerating-chamber of any suitable con 
struction. 
I am aware that close kilns have been used 
and water-cooled condensers have been em 
ployed in them. Such a combination I do not 
claim; but 
Wiat I do claim, and desire to secure by 35 
Letters Patent, is 
The combination, in a drying apparatus of 
a close chamber controlled by a relief. valve, 
steam-heating pipes, a condensing-fan or air. 
pump, and an air-cooled condenser formed by 
the flattened nozzle or tuyere of the fan, all 
constructed and arranged for conjoint opera 
tion, substantially in the manner described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own invention affix my signature in pres- 45. 
enee of two witnesses. 
40 
GARRETT. F. SPEER, 
Witnesses: 
L. C. YoUNG, 
CFIAS. F. STANSBURY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252372.txt	  
 
(Model.) 
- 
No. 252,372, 
D. D. H.A.R.DY, 
ROTARY ENGINE, 
Patented Jan. 17, 1882. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
6. 
S. 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
% 
F2R % 
 
 
2 A3%z 
 
. 
NN 
 
 
 
- 
 
  
2% 
W 
W W3 
3 % 
% 
4. 
... 
47% Ni Dek ?tart, 
Y.M. 
Per Cirkmas Elihany 
(c.140.9%44. . 
PeF 
3E3 venter, 
A ty 
3 
. 
. 
 
rvey. 
 
. 
. . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DEXTER. D. HARDY, OF HAVANA, ILLINOIs, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CHARLES G. KREBAUM, OF SAME PLACE. 
ROTARY ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,372, dated January 17, 1882. 
Application filed June 27, 1881. (Model.) 
IO 
2O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DEXTER. D. HARDY, of 
Hayana, in the county of Mason, in the State 
of Illinois, have invented an Improved Rotary 
5 Engine; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the annexed 
drawings, making a part of this specification, 
in which like letters of reference refer to like 
parts, and in which 
Figure 1 represents a sectional plan aty y, 
and Fig.2 sectional side view at a a. 
This engine consists essentially of a tubular 
axle, an eccentric fastened thereto, a toothed 
wheel revolving upon said eccentric, a cylinder 
having teeth to fit those of said wheel, and a 
Crescent filling the space between the wheel 
and cylinder. In this engine the axle is firmly 
held while the cylinder revolves about it. 
AA is the cylinder, with heads FF, and E. 
E is the tubular axle about which the cylinder 
rotates. On the inside of this cylinder A are 
cut the cogs or teeth, (shown in Fig. 1 in sec 
tion,) running the full length of the cylinder. 
Through the center of the cylinder A and cyl 
inder-heads FF is passed the tubular axle E 
E, firmly held to prevent rotation by the sup 
ports G. G. Upon this axle E is firmly fast 
ened the eccentric D, just fitting between the 
cylinder-heads F F, and provided with two 
ports, P and P, opening into the tubular axle 
E, and extending to the outer circumference 
of said eccentric. D. One of said ports P is 
nearer one cylinder-head, F, and the other port 
nearer the other cylinder-head, F. In the tubu 
lar axle EE, between the inner ends of the two 
ports PP, is fastened the plug or bridge L, to 
prevent the steam from rushing straight 
through said axle E. E. . 
About the eccentric D, and concentric with 
it, rotates the gear-wheel C, with its teeth work 
ing exactly into the inside gearing of the cyl 
inder A, as shown in Fig. 1. The radius of 
the pitch-circle of said wheel C plus the eccen 
tricity of the eccentric D just equals the ra 
dius of the pitch-circle of the inside gearing of 
cylinder A. This leaves a crescent-shaped 
space not swept over by the teeth of the wheel 
C or cylinder A. 
Into this space I fit the cres 
5o cent B, not tight, but just loose enough to al 
45 
35 
65 
low both the wheel C and cylinder A to revolve 
easily past it. To prevent this crescent B hav 
ing any tendency to wedging between said 
wheel and cylinder, I attach said crescent to 
the disk R secured firmly to the axle E E and 55 
eccentric D. This obliges said crescent B to 
remain immovable with the axle E E while the 
teeth of the wheel C and cylinder A revolve 
past it. This disk R. revolves in a circular re 
cess in the cylinder-head F. If the distance 6o 
between the two cylinder-heads F E is some 
what far, I may put a disk, R., at each side of 
the crescent B. If the machine is well con 
structed, it may run all right without the cres 
cent B being attached to the axle E by the disk 
R. Radially through this wheel C, from its in 
side circumference to the space between each 
or every other tooth, extend the holes P, two 
to each space or two to every other space, so 
that there shall be a series of holes P' to each 
of the ports P. 
The axle E E is provided with packing WW 
at each side of the cylinder-heads FF, to pfe 
Went loss of steam. 
While in operation the cylinder A rotates 
together with the gear-wheel C, while the axle 
E E and crescent B remain stationary. The 
steam, being let on at one end of the tubular 
axle E. E., rushes on through one port P of the 
eccentric D, through a port, or hole P of the 
wheel C, and into whatever space it finds be 
tween the teeth to which it has thus come. As 
the only way for this space to be enlarged is 
for the wheel C and cylinder Ato revolve in the 
direction of the hands of a watch, supposing 
the steam to enter from the left hand, then the 
expansive force of the steam would make the 
said wheel and cylinder revolve in that direc 
tion. As soon as one hole P of the wheel C 
has passed beyond the port P of the eccentric 
D the steam continues to expand and force 
said wheel and cylinder around until the teeth 
confining it come onto the crescent B. Just 
before one hole P. passes beyond the port P 
another hole P comes into position to receive 
the steam from said port, and so continue the 
force of rotation. The exhaust-steam continues 
on around, being carried between the teeth of 
both the wheel C and cylinder A and the cres 
cent B, and is discharged, when it comes be- IOC 
90 
95 
75 
. 
. 
. 
2 
... 
" 
252,372 
O 
yond the other end of the crescent B, through holes or ports P, the eccentric D, with two 25 
the holes P of the wheel C and the port P at 
the other side of the bridge L. In this way 
the rotation is kept up as rapidly as the steam 
is allowed to enter. To change the direction 
of rotation of this cylinder is to let the steam 
enter at the right-hand end of the axle E. E. 
and exhaust at the left-hand side, instead of 
as it was before. The gear-wheel C, rotating 
on the eccentric c, and the cylinder A rotat 
ing about the axle EE, cause the ends of said 
wheel C to wear uniformly on the inside of the 
cylinder-heads FF and disk R, as their relative 
motion is similar to the well-known Bogardis 
principle of grinding. 
In Fig. 2 of the drawings the cylinder A is 
represented as crowning. This is for the pur 
pose of attaching a belt directly to the cylin 
der as a pulley. 
What I claim as my invention, and for which 
I desire Letters Patent, is as follows: 
1. The cylinder A, provided with uniform 
and regular inside teeth, and the crescent B, in 
combination with the spur cog-wheel C, with 
ports, PP, and the tubular axle E, with bridge 
Lu, substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The cylinder A, provided with regular and 
uniform inside teeth, and the spur-gear wheel 
C, with holes or ports P', in combination with 
the eccentric D, with ports PP, the crescent 
B, disk R, attached to said crescent, and ec. 
centric D, and the tubular axle E. E., fastened 
to supports G. G., substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
3. The cylinder A, provided with regular and 
uniform inside teeth, and with cylinder-heads 
FF', and the wheel C, with holes or ports P', 
and with regular and uniform teeth to gear in 
with the inside teeth of said cylinder A, for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing in 
vention I have hereunto set my hand this 16th 
day of June, 1881. 
JUDSON STARR, 
C. N. MIHIGAN, 
- , 
35 
Witnesses: 
DEXTER, D. EIARDY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252472.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 252,472. 
C. A JUDD. 
SASH HOLDER AND TIGETENER, 
Patented Jan. 17, 1882. 
Z7e were Zar 
7 /e-C cc eC 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES: A JUDD, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN. 
SASH HOLDER AND TIGHTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,472, dated January 17, 1882. 
Application filed November 11, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs A. JUDD, of 
Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented a new and 
useful window-spring to prevent rattling and 
for other purposes, specially adapted to use 
on car and carriage windows which let down 
into cells in the body of the car or door; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full 
and accurate description of the same. 
The rattling of the loose sash in the windows 
of public vehicles, especially cars and omni 
buses, is a great and objectionable annoyance, 
and it is also well known that the glass is fre-. 
quently broken in car-windows in consequence 
of the ignorance or awkwardness of persons who 
endeavor to raise the sash but release the hold 
before the bottom of the sash has been swung 
aside so as to descend into its seat; and my 
invention is designed to obviate this accident 
by causing the sash to swing aside automati 
cally when it has been raised to the proper 
height; and to this end it consists in an elas 
tic device which is preferably attached to the 
Sash, and projects therefrom on opposite sides 
and at different points of elevation, which, 
when the said sash is raised to its full height, 
Will engage with the casing, and by its elas 
tic pressure cause the sash to swing aside into 
the desired position. An elastic device capa 
ble of this service may be made in a variety 
of Ways, and a simple spring may accomplish 
it; but I prefer, for other reasons, to employ 
a pair of elastic rollers set upon pivots at dif. 
ferent elevations, one on each side of the cen 
ter of thickness of the sash, so that one shall 
project from one side and the other from the 
other side. By this means the sash will have 
an elastic bearing upon the casing it front and 
back of the sash, and at different elevations, 
so that while said elastic bearings will quiet 
the rattling of the sash they will also tend to 
deflect the sash from the perpendicular, so 
that it will drop into its seat without special 
care on the part of the person moving it. 
That others may fully understand my im 
provement, I will particularly describe it, hav 
ing reference to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, showing my 
wherein- 
- 
- 
- 
invention in operative position. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section of the same. Figs. 3, 4, 5 rep 
resent the device in detail. 
A is the sash, and B is the casing provided 
with the cell or case C, into which the sash 55 
may descend when the window is to be opened. 
At the top of the cell C the sash way is wid 
ened, so as to form a seat, b, to hold the lower 
edge of the sash when the window is closed. 
This structure is in common use, and will be 6o 
understood. 
It is well known that when the sash is raised 
its bottom edge must be pushed outward, so 
that it may descend into the seat b. The top 
part of the sashway in the casing B is wide 65 
enough to accommodate the thickness of the 
sash, while the bottom of said sashway is in 
width more than twice the thickness of the 
sash, so that when the sash is pushed up its 
upper edge is confined in the sash Way. 
By my invention the sash is provided with 
an elastic device which engages with the cas 
ing at the inner side of the sash and causes 
the bottom to swing outward, so that it can 
descend into the seat b. 
I prefer to employ on the inner side of the 
sash an elastic roller, E, of india-rubber, for 
this purpose, and the effect is improved by 
placing a similar roller, F, on the outside a 
little higher than the roller E. One of said 
rollers will therefore push the bottom of the 
sash outward, and the other will push the top 
inward, and they will therefore co-operate to 
produce the desired result. 
Springs of other forms may be employed, if 85 
desired, such as flat metallic springs, &c. 
The elastic rollers E.F are mounted in a 
small frame or fixture, as shown, so that they 
may be readily attached to the sash. This 
elastic attachment not only serves to direct the 
sash into its seat properly, but it also prevents 
the sash from rattling. 
" 'O 
Having described my invention, I claim as 
0W 
1. A sash-frame broad at the bottom and 
provided with a cell, C, and seat b, and a sash, 
A, adapted to move therein, combined with an 
elastic device attached to said sash at or near 
its top, projecting from said sash on opposite 
sides at different points of elevation, and adapt: Ioo 
95 
75 
Io 
IS 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
252,472 
ed to press the bottom of the sash outward to- so as to project from opposite sides at differ. 
NA its seat E. st y 
le ent elevations, as and for the purpose set forth. 
rame except along the bottom edge, substan 
CHAS. A. JUDD. 
tially as set forth. 
2. The elastic rollers EF, having their piv. 
ots in different planes vertically and horizon. 
tally, attached to and combined with a sash, 
CHAs. LITZKY, 
FRANK W. WEBSTER, 
5 
 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252572.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 252,572, 
 
W. B. YOUNG, 
CULTIVATOR, 
Patented Jan, l7, l882, 
Witnesses. 
. . . . 
263. 2646-4- 
2%an 4%- 
. 
- 
Inventor. 
7" 
2/71-73, 2, own a 
%. 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM B. YOUNG, OF ALTON, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO HAPGOOD PLOW 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,572, dated January 17, 1882. 
Application filed November 7, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WM. B. YoUNG, of Al 
ton, in the county of Madison and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im 
5 provement in Cultivators, which improvement 
is fully set forth in the following specification 
and accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to that class of culti 
vators known as straddle-row walking-culti 
Io vators; and the object is the construction of 
a coupler and coupling device which shall 
hold the plows rigidly in an upright position, 
while permitting both lateral and perpendicu 
lar play to the rear end of the plows. 
I5 My invention consists, first, in a double 
headed coupler having two open-ring clasps 
in a cross direction to each other, made solid 
in one piece, with mouthed ends and perforated 
lips; and, second, in the combination of the 
2O parts of the coupling device, as hereinafter 
specified. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like let 
ters refer to like parts, Figure 1 is a side view 
of the entire coupling device, showing how 
25 the parts are arranged, and showing how my 
improvement-tbe double-headed coupler A 
has mouthed ends, which embrace the two 
thimbles at and b, in a cross direction to each 
other. Fig. 2 is a top view of same, taken on 
3o the dotted line a ac, Fig. 3 is a front view, 
showing how the two thimbles a and b are in 
a cross direction or right angle with each other. 
A is my improved double-headed coupler, 
consisting of two open-ring clasps, in and n, in 
35 a cross direction to each other, made solid in 
one piece, with mouthed ends embracing the 
two thimbles a and b, and with lips 1122, 
in which there are perforations in which the 
bolts d and e are seated, as shown in the draw 
4o ings. The clasp in clasps around and is ad 
justable on the thimble a, and the screw-bolt 
d compresses the lips 11 together, embracing 
and clasping rigidly to the thimble a, and the 
clasp in clasps around and is adjustable on the 
45 thimble b, and the screw-bolt e compresses the 
- 
So 
lips 22 together, embracing and clasping rig 
idly to the thimble b. 
C is a yoke with arms y gy, between which 
the thimble b is loosely secured on the bolt c, 
as shown. 
D is the drag-bars or plow-beams, united to 
the yoke with bolts at h h. 
The relative position of the thimbles a and 
b is shown in Fig. 3, in which thimble a is 
shown horizontal, and the thimble b is shown 55 
perpendicular, crossing each other at right 
angle, and in Figs. 1 and 3 is shown how the 
coupler A couples the two thimbles a and b 
together. The thimble a rotates on the axle 
arm B, and the thimble b rotates on the bolt 6o 
c, by which the rear ends of the beams have 
lateral and perpendicular play while being 
held rigidly upright. 
EIaving thus described and set forth my in 
vention, I claim- 
1. In a cultivator, the double-headed coup 
ler A, having two open-ring clasps in a cross 
direction to each other, made solid in one 
piece, with mouthed ends and perforated lips, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 7o 
2. In a cultivator, the double-headed coup 
ler A, having two open-ring clasps in a cross 
direction to each other, made solid in one 
piece, with mouthed ends and perforated lips, 
and held in place by clamping-bolts with nuts, 75 
in combination with the thimble a and thim 
ble b, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. In a cultivator, the combination of the 
double-headed coupler A, having two open. 8o 
ring clasps in a cross direction to each other, 
made solid in one piece, with mouthed ends 
and perforated lips, with compression-bolts 
and with thimble a, thimble b, axle-arm B, 
yoke C, having the arms yy, and with bolt c, 85 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
WM. B. YOUNG. 
65 
Witnesses : 
F. H. FERGUSON, 
CHAs. S. PHILIPs. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252672.txt	(No Model.) 
L. K. JEWETT. 
WRECKING AND CONSTRUCTION ARE 
No. 252,672. 
4. Sheets-sheet 1 
OR RAILROADs. 
Patented Jan. 24, 1882. 
 
(No fodel.) 
L. K. JEWETT. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
WRECKING AND CONSTRUCTION CAR FOR RAILROADS, 
No. 252,672, 
2. 
Patented Jan, 24, 1882. 
 
 
Wi 
-6 - 
 
a. 
G 
s S3 
2 s 
Syl 2 S 
EinauS 2. 2"Smiri, Al 
by &34 Ar W. 
% 
3 & 334 A 2N. 
K 
i?Ny ferti 
NNY 
N S A. -- 
a 
al 
(No Mode.) 
L. K. JEWETT. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
WRECKING AND CONSTRUCTION CAR FOR RAILROADS, 
No. 252,672, 
Patented Jan. 24, 1882. 
Pr 
SS 
22. 
2 
s 
s 
2 
al 
2 
2 
2 
2. 
s 
(guitz %3ENS S 
snSSE SSNs NSSN, 
24 
a? "Sols 
2% 
& 
  
 
  
2 
S 
S. 
a. 
s 
2. 
g 
2 
catas 
71E 
 
 
 
 
Inventor 
(No Model.) 
L. K. JEWETT. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
WRECKING AND CONSTRUCTION CAR FOR RAILROADS, 
No. 252,672. 
Patented Jan. 24, 1882. 
N 
E. -(i. al 
r 
SE22 sC) 
 
E.2f ), 
 
Inventor 
2.4-? 
2. 6, -6, 6-77 
  
 
 
RJNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUTHER. K. JEWETT, OF FITCHBURG, MASSACEUSETTS, 
wRECKING AND construction CAR FOR RAILROADS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,672, dated January 24, 1882. 
Application filed October 31, 1881. (No model) 
2d 
To all achon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LUTHER. K. JEWETT, of 
Fitchburg, county of Worcester, State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Wreking and Construction Cars for Railroad 
Work, of which the following description, in 
connection with tie accotilaying drawings, 
is a specification. 
Tbisinvention has for its object the construc 
tion of a car for wrecking or lifting cars which 
have been derailed, and also for haiding heavy 
articles it railroad construction. 
In this my invention have provided a car 
with a tipping counterbalanced mast and con 
15 nected boom, and have shown the said mast, 
as I prefer, mounted directly on a turn-table 
carried by the said car, such construction en 
abling me to use a mast longer than would be 
possible were the said mast always held in 
upright position, for when the wrecking-car is 
being moved on the track the Inast is turned 
down in early horizontal position, thus ell 
abling the car to readily pass under bridges. 
... As soon as the car is brought in position near 
:25 a wreck, or on a part of the track when the car 
is to be used, the car is locked to the track, its 
frame is braced so that it cannot sag or tip, a 
suitable strong step for the mast is brought 
into position, the mastis released, turned into 
3o upright position with its lower end on the said 
step, and the turn-table is braced or secured 
so that it has only a rotating movement. In 
this indition the car is in readilless to have 
the boga tarned day. and, with the usual 
ropes, chains, and grappling-hooks, be used to 
lift into position the car to be handled. In 
connection with the ear I have provided a se. 
ries of braces to afford additional strength and 
stability to the car when a wrecked car is to 
4o be lifted from a ditch up a steep embankment. 
Figure i represents in side elevation a car. 
enabodying my invention as it will appear when 
running on the track, the dotted lines, how 
ever, showing the mast elevated and boom 
turned citat, the said figure also slowing in clot 
ted lines the leveling-blocks, which will be laid 
on the ties to receive the lower elids of the 
jack-screws when the car is brought to rest and 
the mast is elevated. Fig. 2 is a vertical lon 
so gitudinal section of the car with the mast ele 
wated, its foot being supported on the step. 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
Fig. 3 is a top view of Fig. 2; Figs. 4 and 5, 
partial cross-sections of the car, the parts be 
ing enlarged and in different position of ad 
justment; Fig. 6, a top view of the step for the 
Inast and the step-sill; IFig. 7, a section of Fig. 
6; Fig. 8, a partial end view, showing the car 
as braced to take a wrecked car from a ditch 
at the left; and Fig.9, a side elevation thereof, 
the mast and boom being, however, omitted. 
The car-body A, of suitable shape to support 
the working parts, is mounted on sitable 
trucks, not necessary to be described, which 
run on the track as usual. The car-body, in 
practice about twenty feet long, is provided 
substantially at its center with a strong ring, 
l, having journals 2, mounted in bearings a', 
held on the side sills of the car, the central 
part of the car below alil about the said ring 
being open. This ring at its front and rear 
sides has flanges a, (stiown clearly in Fig. 2,) 
under which may be moved the ring-timbers a 
when it is desired to hold the ring so that it 
cannot tip or turn of its journals, it being nec 
essary to hold the ring firmly when, the car is 
being used to lift a wrecked car. When the 
car is being run on the track and the mast li 
is turned down, as in Fig. 1, the ring-ti?nbers 
are renoved from below the flanges of the ringa, 
permitting the ring to be tipped up at one end, 
The top of this ring, made flat, 
as shown. 
serves as a track for the anti-friction wheeled 
ring c, (shown clearly in Fig. 2.) which is ii. 
terposed between the turn-table datid the ringa, 
the wheeled ring c sustaiting the turn-table on 
the ring a, permitting the turn-table to be cas 
ily moved to enable the boom l' of the mast to 
be projected in any desired direction from the 
car A. These ring-timbers at are shown as pro 
vided with worm-gears a, which engage each 
with the teeth of a worm-rack, such as shown 
at a'. By turning the worm-gears in one or the 
other direction, their teeth acting on the saitt 
rack, the ring-timbers inay be moved under or 
from under the ring a. Each timber will have 
two gears, a, and each gear will have on its 
shaft a chain-wheel, ai, to receive a suitable 
chain, rope, or cord connected with a sla?t, a, 
whicli, when rotated in one or the other direc 
tion, will move the chain or cord and turn the 
worm-gear simultaneously in the proper direc 
tion to move the ring-timbers in the direction 
9o 
OO 
2 
252,672 
- 
IO 
IS 
(kesired. The tull-table at its lower side las 
a depending annular collar, which fits inside 
the ring (t. 
The mast b is rigidly connected with the turn 
table d, and at its lower end is provided with 
a connected counterbalancing - upright, l, in 
practice of several tons The lower end of this 
weigl l' serves as the foot for the upright 
mast, and in practice will be made to rest upon 
the step e, as shown in Fig. 4. 
The step e is shown as provided with jour 
nals 4, (see Fig. 6,) which rest npon a step 
bearing, c', made adjustable vertically at each 
end with relation to the step-sill e' by means 
of screws e", and made horizontally adjustable 
by means of the screws c'. The step-sill e' is 
suitably secured to the track so that it cannot 
move, and by adjusting the screws of the step e 
may be nore or less raised to cause it to re 
ceive and sistain more or less of the weight of 
the mast and turn-table. 
To prevent the unast from being tipped out 
of vertical position I have provided it, at its 
lower end, with a locking device,f, (slown in 
Fig. 2,) as a pin connected with an arm of a 
rock-shaft, f', another arm, 5, of the said rock 
shaft being joined with a link or rod, f", ex 
tended above the turn - table, to thus perinit 
the locking device to be lifted or moved at the 
propertilines. 
The mast has pivoted upon it a boom, b', 
which may be of any usual construction. This 
boom will be raised and lowered through a 
rope or chain, h", on a drum or windlass, l, 
35 operatedlin any usual manner. Suitable other 
chains and grapples will be attached, as usual, 
to the end of the boom to be connected to the car 
or other thing to belifted. Supporting the mast, 
as described, on the car so that it may be turned 
or tipped down enables me to use a long mast, 
one which could not be used if connected with 
and extended rigidly above the car-body, for 
when turned down it does not interfere with 
the passage of the car under bridges. The 
mast l is made of such length as to permit me 
to grapple a car or car-body and readily lift it 
at one operation ligh enough to be swung onto 
a flat car on the track ready to be taken away. 
The end and side sills of the car A have con 
nected with them a series of jack-screws, gh 
ij. The screws g are pivoted to the corners 
of the car, and those h a short distance there 
from on the side sills. These sciews (1 h are 
made to rest upon the leveling-blocks g, laid 
upon the ties g, outside the rails g', the said 
leveling-blocks being placed in position when 
the car is brought to rest, the screws g h being 
then turied in to prop or steady the car, so 
that it cannot tip or sag. The screws i are 
connected with the side sills of the car near 
their centers, and act upon the ends of the 
step-sill e', as shown in IFigs. 4 and 5, to con 
fine the step-sill to the track and prevent the 
central part of the car from sagging. These 
screwsi have long leads, which are extended 
through the ends of the step - sill, and have 
suitable nuts ind washer's or collar's connected 
85 
r 
The coupling n' for the end of the track- 95 
there with below the step-sill, so that when it 
is desired to luntle car on the track the said 
screws may be moved to lift the step-sill from 
contact with and above the track, the step-sil 
being thus permanently connected with the car. 
With a heavy car at the side of a track in 
a ditch or down an embankment, the wreck 
ing-car must frequently be braced laterally, or 
at its side next the wreck. To do this effect 
ually the car has as part of its equipment a 
ground timber, l. (Shown in Figs. 8 and 9.) 
Upon this is mounted a brace, l, preferably 
made extensible in the direction of its length. 
This brace l has at its top guides m, which 
receive and hold a track - timber, m, which is 
long enough to extend beyond the opposite 
side of the track, as in Fig. 8, where it and 
another like track - timber resting on-alike 
brace, l, are joined by means of a coupling, 
on'. These track-timbers , at their tuider 
sides, are provided with suitable metal chairs 
to fit over and embrace the tracks. The lower 
ends of the loraces leach have a jack-screw, go 
l, by which to li?t them and the track-timbers 
supported by them to their proper level, and 
the braces also have locking-pins l to prevent 
lateral movement. . 
timbers next the wreck supports a jack-screw 
na, the upper end of which comes in contact 
with a post, ', having a head, n, and a shoul 
der, n, the latter engaging the under side of . 
the side sill of the case, so that as the jack- bo 
screw n is turned it lifts and at the same tinae 
presses the post against the side of the car, 
The provision of side braces for the car, as 
shown in Figs. S and 9, insures the greatest. 
steadiness for and enables the car to be main 
tained securely in position on the track, not: 
withstanding the boom is projected at right 
angles from the car, and strain at such time on 
the boom tentls to turn the car over. Were 
it not for these side braces a heavy weight or 
body could not be lifted from a ditch at the 
side of the car by means of a single car. The 
braces increase, the efficiency of the ear over 
fourfold, as I have found in practice. The 
jack-screw may be used without the track 
timbers and braces, the coupling on then rest. 
ing on any suitable flat timber. 
The step-sill e' may be braced laterally by 
the braces p, the ends of which are guided oia 
pits p, so that the braces can rise and fall 20 
with the step-sill as it is raised and lowered. 
The mast, when turned down as in full lines, 
Fig.1, by the employinent of suitable tackle, 
will be locked in such position in any suitable 
way-as, for instance, the pin f may be made 
to rest on the top of the cross-beam r of the ea 
I claim- 
1. The combination, with the car, of a piv 
oted mast provided with a boom, counterbal 
anced mast ll, provided with a pivoted boom, 13o 
l', the mast being adapted to be turned down 
nearly horizontally when the car is to be run 
on the track, substantially as described. 
2. The car and the weighted or counter. 
I 15 
tos 
Io 
45 
55 
65 
g 
- 
 
252,62 
3. 
balanced mast and its turn-table, combined 
with the pivoted ring a, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The car and the pivoted ring a to support 
the mast, combined with the ring-timbers to 
lock thering q substantially as described, when 
the mast is to be retained in upright position. 
4. The car and counterbalanced mast, piv. 
oted ring to support the mast, and the step 
Io sill, combined with a locking device to engage 
the lower end of the mast with the step-sill, 
substantially as described. 
5. The car and its attached rack at and the 
pivoted ring a, combined with the ring-timbers, 
their worm-gears, and the cords or chains con 
15 nected with the shaft of the worm-gears to op 
erate them and the ring-timbers, substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination, with the car, of the 
20 jack-screws.g, pivoted to the corners of the car, 
substantially as described. 
7. The combination, with the car, of the 
jack-screws gh, pivoted thereto, substantially 
as described. 
8. The combination, with the car and its 
25 pivoted jack-screws, of the leveling-blocks g, 
- 
adapted to be sustained by the ties, substan 
tially as described. 
9. The car and turn-table and tipping mast, 
combined with the step-sill, step thereon, and 3o 
means, substantially as described, to adjust. 
the step on the step-sill. 
10. The car, turn-table, and tipping mast, 
combined with the step, step-sill, and jack 
screws connected with the car and with the 35 
step-sill, to operate substantially as described. 
11. The car, its tipping mast, and boom coin 
bined with the track-timbers on, post, a, and 
jack-screw n, to operate substantially as de 
scribed. 
12. The car, its tipping mast, boom, and 
turn table, combined with the track-timbers 
m, braces i, and suitable screws to hold the 
said braces and car in proper position, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed tny name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. LUTHER K, JEWETT. 
Witnesses: 
- 
45 
. 
Jos. P. LIVERMoRE, 
A. A. SIGSTON, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252772.txt	(No Model.) 
M. A. HUNT, 
SPRING BED BOTTOM, 
No. 252,772. 
.. 
Patented Jan, 24, 1882. 
 
 
3. 
of 
2. arrrrr, 
CO-O-(6-O-O-O-O. 2 
CG-G-G-GO-O-O. 
55 
(6) 
SS 
9 We? W \SYW \y Vya 
  
 
 
CG-G-G-G-G-G-6 
se O-C) 
C. 
ICICICICICIC-7s-1. 
RRf RRS re. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARCUS A. HUNT, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
SPRING B E D BOTTOM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,772, dated January 24, 1882. 
Application filed July 2, 1881. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Beit known that IMARCUSA. HUNT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Cincinnati, in the county of Hamilton and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Spring Bed-Bottoms, of which 
the following is a specification. 
. My invention relates to an improvement in 
spring-beds. 
It consists, first, in providing a suspended 
spring-bed which is formed of a series of rows of 
double spiral or hour-glass springs. The top 
and bottom coil of the springs each have an 
end of the spring locking into the adjacent coil 
and forming rings of each end of the coils. 
These hour-glass springs are then secured to 
each other by transverse links connecting 
the outer rings together, forming a chain or 
hook connection of the springs. These series 
of woven or chain hoir-glass springs are then 
suspended within an open quadrilateral frame 
by a series of spring-links, cQunecting each 
spring of the series at its top and botton to. 
the top and bottom sides of the suspending 
frame or arch. 
Another feature of my invention consists of 
a double coiled adjusting spring-link the coils 
of which are of woven form and turn one into 
the other over a supporting-spool, and forming 
a compound interworking adjustable tension 
Spring. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
spring bed without supporting cross-slats 
which can be easily constructed and secured 
35 in position; also, in providing means for ad 
justing the spring-link connection to the frame 
of the bed, so that the stretch of the springs 
may be readily taken up; also, in providing 
an adjusting spring-link, so that the links con 
necting the springs to the bed may be readily 
adjusted to fit the varying width and distance 
of the parts which are to be connected by the 
spring links; also, to allow the tension of the 
spring-bed to be readily adjusted to any de 
sired degree of flexibility or tautness to suit 
the wishes of the user. 
Other features of my invention will be more 
fully set forth in the description of the accom 
panying drawings. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
So a plan view of my improvement. Fig. 2 is a 
45 
40 
side elevation of the sides or ends of the sus 
pending-frame. Fig. 3 is a cross-section on 
line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is an elevation of the 
adjastable spring-link. Fig. 5 is a perspective 55 
view of a modified form of spring. Fig. 6 is 
a detail perspective of one of the connecting 
rings. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of one cor 
ner of the suspending-frame. 
Fig. 1 is a plan view of the preferred form 
of constructing my improved suspended spring 
bed, which is shown to have a series or rows 
of spiral springs, BB, in the central portion 
of the bed. A A represent the frame between 
which the springs forming the bed are sus 
pended. B B represent rows of spiral or hour 
glass springs. C C represent rows of rings 
linked to the springs B B upon their inner sides 
by connecting links or hooks c. DDD Drep 
resent adjustable link - springs by which the 
series of springs and rings are connected to 
and suspended upon the frame-pieces which 
form the outer boundary of the bed. These 
springs are of the peculiar form as shown in 
Fig. 4. 
In order to provide means for adjusting the 
tension of the springs and tautness of the bed, 
it is desirable to provide some means for ad 
justing the length of the spring-links, as well 
as to increase or adjust their tension. This is 
accomplished by making the spring-link D in 
two sections, having a hook, d, at one end and 
a series of worms or spiral coil, d', at the op 
posite end, and to intertwine in the form of 
worm-threads the spring end of the links. 85 
In order to make the suspension more complete, 
a spool, D', is placed within the coils of the 
intertwined spring D and effectually prevents 
their Sagging, Supporting the coils of the spring 
links and keeping them in proper shape. This 9o 
adjusting spring-link is a particular feature of 
my invention and adds much to the durability 
and ease of adjustment of the spring - bed, 
which forms a special feature of the invention. 
might be substituted for the spring-links D in 
constructing the suspended spring-bed forming 
the first feature of my invention, which would 
secure many advantages over other spring-beds 
in common use. 
Figs. 2 and 7 represent an improved form of 
making the side and end pieces of my suspend 
It is obvious that other connecting - links 95 
75 
IOO 
2 
252,772 
the vertical springs with the upper and lower 
edges of the surrounding frame, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
2. The combination, with a series of verti. 
cally-arranged springs, B, and a surrounding 
frame, A, of the adjustable link-springs D, con 
sisting of two sections, each provided with a 
hooked end, d, and a spiral coil, d, the said 
coils intertwining with each other and the 
hooks of the two sections being connected re 
spectively with the vertical springs and the 
surrounding frame, substantially as described. 
3. In combination with the vertically - ar. 
ranged spiral springs and surrounding sup 
porting - frame, the adjustable intertwining 
spiral coils d", each provided at its outer end 
with a hook, d, which are connected respectively 
to the vertical springs, and the spool arranged 
entirely within the coils d' d', substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
4. A quadrilateral suspending - frame of a 
spring bed-bottom, composed of slats EE, at 
tached to corner supporting-blocks, F, and sep 
arated by blocks f, substantially as herein set 
forth. 
5. A spring bed-bottom composed substan 
tially of the frame A, a series of vertically-ar. 
ranged spiral springs attached transversely to 
each other by two series of transverse hooks 
or links, c, and all connected to the said frame 
by the adjustable spring connecting -links D, 
as herein set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my. 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit. 
MARCUS A. HUNT. 
SSS. 
Witnesses: 
EUGENEL. FIRNKOESS, 
J. H. CHARLES SMITH, 
s 
45 
So 
55 
o 
5 
ing-frame. E E represent two parallel strips 
of wood, half-tenoned at their ends and nailed 
or fastened to a corner supporting - block, F. 
ffrepresent supporting - blocks placed in the 
slot or opening between the frame-pieces EE, 
and serve to prevent the springing of the frame. 
This form of making the suspending-frame has 
several advantages. It is quickly and easily 
constructed and possesses greater strength to 
amount of material employed than any other 
form of quadrilateral open frames. 
Instead of employing double hour - glass 
springs, spiral springs like that shown in Fig. 
5, supported on slats, may be employed in com 
bination with my improved frame and adjust 
ing spring connecting - link, and still contain 
the substantial parts of the second and third 
features of my invention. 
Instead of the rings C, the lhour-glass springs 
might be continued to the outer edges; but 
two rows of rings at each end can be used at 
considerable saving of cost and still obtain a 
very superior bed-bottom. 
Abed-bottom made as shown possesses very 
many advantages over other forms in use. It 
can be made of much less weight of wire 
springs, which are arranged so as to secure a 
great amount of flexibility and wear. 
This bed, upon each side, has in substance a 
spring fabric formed by the rings, being supe. 
rior and much cheaper than woven-wire mat 
tresses. 
I claim 
1. A suspended spring-bed consisting of a 
series of vertically-arranged hour-glass springs 
connected to each other at the top and bottom 
by hooks or links, in combination with a sur 
rounding quadrilateral frame and links con 
necting both the upper and lower portions of 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252872.txt	(No Model.) 
s 
No. 252,872. 
T. R. FERR ALL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
ANTI FRICTIONAL BEARING. 
Patented Jan. 31, 1882. 
2.SSa Na sa 
1. . 
N 
N 
Witresses. 
26.4%. 
(7.62 
Iyellor. 
CW-2 62.4 
J 
4, 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 252,872, 
 
 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
T. R. FERR ALL 
Anir FRIOTIONAL BEARING, 
- 
Patented Jan. 31, 1882. 
 
s s 2 VVV VVVVVVVVVVVV 
2. 2x N a 
Es s 
2". 
N-a" 
 
 
 
st t 
s 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS R. FERRALL OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ANTI-FRCTIONAL BEARING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,872, dated January 31, 1882. 
Application filed December 3, 1881. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
is 
25 
To all choin it may concern: 
smooth part of the end of each regulator, and 
Be it known that, TIOMAS R. FERRALL, thereby causing frictional as well as wearing 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bos- out resistance, and when the heads of such 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of Mas 
stays or rivets become worn the rollers get 
Sachusetts, have invented certain new and use 
loose from the regulators, and the anti-friction 
ful Improvements in Anti-Frictional Bearings; 
all bearing is useless. The regulators c 0 are 
and I do hereby declare that the same are fully 
kept from moving too far end wise in the di 
described in the following specification and 
rection of the shaft d by the outer annular por. 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings. 
tion of the ends a' a' of the shells at a', re 
This invention relates to improvements in 
spectively, either by being made as shown in 
anti-frictional bearings; and it is carried out as Figs. 3 and 4, where the outside of each regu 
follows, reference being had to the accompany 
lator c stops directly against the inside of one 
ing drawings, on which-- 
of the end caps, a'a', or by providing each 
Figurel represents an end view of the bear. 
regulator with a suitable number of radial pro. 
ing with bored-out ends ready for use. Fig.2 
jections, c'c', (shown in Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8,) lo 
represents an internal view of the same, show 
cated between two or more of the cylindrical 
ing the end as being removed. Fig. 3 repre 
projections c' c' and on the inside of each of 
Sents a longitudinal section on the line AB, 
said regulators, as shown in the said figures, 
shown in Fig. 1, and showing one end of the 
the outer ends of which projections serve as 
cap Solid before being bored out and the oppo 
stops against the inside of the respective end 
site end open after being bored out for the in 
caps, a' or af'. 
sertion of the shaft. Fig. 4 represents a per 
In making this my improved anti-frictional 
spective view of the regulator. Fig. 5 repre 
bearing, I cast the shell and cap a. a' in one 
sents an end view of the bearing with bored 
piece, and the shell a? a' also in one single 
out ends. Fig. 6 represents an interior view of 
piece, their ends being made solid, as shown in 
the bearing with its end cap shown as being 
Fig. 7 and in the right-hand side of Fig. 3, The 
removed. Fig. 7 represents a cross-section of 
rollers b bl and regulators c care then placed 
the bearing on the line CD, shown in Fig. 5, 
in the space bounded by the parts a, a? a' a', 
showing, however, the end caps solid before 
as shown in Figs. 3 and 7, after which molten 
being bored through for the insertion of the 
metal e is cast around the shells act', as shown 
shaft; and Fig. 8 represents a perspective view 
in said Figs. 3 and 7, by which arrangement 
of one of the regulators shown in Figs. 5, 6, 
the rollers b b and regulators c care inclosed 
air-tight within said shells, which may now be 
and 7. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts wher 
galvanized or pickled without injury to the 
ever they occur on the different parts of the 
inclosed rollers bb and their regulators. After 
drawings. 
the aforesaid shells and end caps are properly 
a and a' represent the caps or shells, within 
finished and cleaned I remove the central por 
tions of the said end caps, a'a', by meals of 
which the anti-frictional rollers l l l are locat 
a boring or drilling tool for the reception of the 
ed. Each roller l is provided in each of its 
ends with a cylindrical central recess, l', into 
axle d, as shown in the left-hand end of Fig. 3, 
which each of the cylindrical projections c' of 
by which means I dispense with the usual 
the regulator c is made to fit loosely. I use 
method of rattling the bearings within the 
one regulator c with its cylindrical projections 
usual rattling-drum, which latter method is ob 
jectionable on account of the wearing off of 
c' c' for each end of the bearing, as shown in 
the roller-bearings by the sand and grit used 
Figs. 3 and 7. The rollers l l l are the only 
in such rattling-drums. 
connecting devices used between the regula 
By making the central parts of the end caps, 
tors c c, and it will be seen that I dispense eln 
a' af', very thin and outwarilly projecting, 
tirely with the usual stays or livets for secur. 
ing the regulators together at their proper dis 
as shown in Fig. 7, such central parts may 
tance apart, such rivets being objectionable on 
Casily be removed after the outer case is gal 
vanized or pickled, by making a single circu 
account of their heads projecting outside of the 
55 
65 
o 
75 
85 
90 
95. 
- OO 
45 
So 
2 
252, S72 
lar incision in each end by means of a suitable 
cutting-tool, the bearing being held and rotated 
in a suitable lathe-chuck during this operation. 
What I wish to secure by Letters Patent, 
and claim, is 
1. In anti-frictional bearings, the shells at a' 
a' a' and the rollers b b, in combination with 
the regulators c c and their radial intermediate 
projections, c' c' c', adapted to serve as stops 
for the said regulators against the inside of the 
flanges a' a', as herein shown and described. 
2. In anti-frictional bearings, the shells a. a' 
a' a', the rollers b b, with their cylindrical re 
cesses b l', the regulators cc, with cylindrical 
projections c' c', and radial intermediate pro 
jections, c'c', as and for the purpose set forth. 
O 
3. The herein-described method of making 
anti-frictional bearings, consisting in casting 
the shells a a? with solid ends a' a', inserting 
therein the rollers and regulators, then casting 
around the abutting shells a a? the metal ring 
e, and finally boring out or removing the cen 
tral parts of the ends a' a', for the insertion 
and reception of the shaft d, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
| nature in presence of two witnesses. 
. 
25 
THOMAS R. FERRALL, 
Witnesses: 
ALBAN ANDREN, 
EDWARD O. LOUD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US252972.txt	(Model.) 
N, SANDERS. 
PLOW, 
No. 252,972, 
Patented Jan. 31, 1882, 
 
/72Z72-esses, 
2.2 104 
Z727-'ezzzzz: 
M, PERS, Photo-lithographer, Washingtan, 0, . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NEWELL SANDERS, OF CHATTANOOGA, TENNESSEE. 
PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 252,972, dated January 31, 1882. 
Application filed October 6, 1880. (Model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NEWELL SANDERs, of 
Chattanooga, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Tennessee, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Turning-Plows, which 
improvement is fully set forth in the following 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings. 
The object of my invention is to combine the 
cutter and landside of a turning-plow in one 
piece in such a way as to have the cutter well 
supported without combining it with the share 
or mold-board or making an additional part in 
the construction of the plow, at the same time 
having the two sides of the cutter in the same 
general lines with the landside and mold-board 
sides of the plow, all of which is shown in the 
accompanying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a general view of a mold-board 
side of a plow; Fig. 2, of the landside side of a 
plow; and Fig. 3 is a view of the landside with 
cutter attached. 
A is the landsicle. B is the cutter. C is the 
share. D is the standard, and E is the mold 
board. 
My invention relates particularly to that 
class of plows the faces of whose cutters cor 
respond to the general curvature of the mold 
board and surface of the landside. 
Now, it is found in practice that the heel of 
the landside is a vital point in a plow and in 
time wears off, so that a new landside has to 
be obtained. It is further found that the cut 
O 
25 
ter will last about the same length of time as 
the heel of the landside. My cutter and land- 35 
side being cast in one piece therefore is a great 
improvement. The cutter adds very little ex 
tra cost to the landside and has to be renewed 
only when the landside requires renewal. It 
is also stronger and better attached than any 4o 
other, resting, as it does, on the front edge of 
and being bolted at top and bottom securely 
to the standard. The strain on the cutter 
which is in line with the landside is conveyed 
to that part. It leaves the share, which needs 
renewing oftener than any other part, in one 
piece, entirely separate from any other part. 
It leaves no difficulty in the way of making and 
using steel shares. 
What I claim is 
1. The landside A, having the forward notch, 
(t, and the upward extension, B, the latter hav 
ing a sharp cutting-edge, and curved to be flush 
with the mold-board and share, and provided 
with the ear b, substantially as shown and de-55 
scribed. 
2. The landside A and colter-extension B, 
as described, formed in one piece, in combina 
tion with the mold - board E, share C, and 
standard D, substantially as shown and de- 6o 
scribed. 
45 
So 
NEWELL SANDERS. 
Witnesses: 
E. D. GHALT, 
C. P. ROBERTSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253072.txt	2. Sheets-Sheet . 
W. T., LARIMORE, 
SPRING MOTOR FOR CARs, 
.3 
Patented Jan. 31, 1882, 
A. 
HII IIH 
r 
ST 
A/C 2. 
(No Model.). 
No. 253,072, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
l 
Egling 
e-matern May, 
e. 
beft titler 
Egilt 
AI 
A. SGEOI-A - C 
W7/YASSA5. 
$75. J.E.40 
92%. 272 
/ 7 C41 2x2- 
UI 
M4 
/777/4//WOAA 
272/e/2707, 
/2A 
76-74/6%z. 
4770/77e/3 
(No Model.) 
W. T. LARIMORE, 
SPRING MOTOR FOR CARS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 253,072, 
Patented Jan. 31, 1882, 
 
 
 
SR S. 
sease S r 
-as-a-M 
 
4 
2 R 
 
W/7/ASSAs, 
7 (6.7- ckoe. 
2:32%as 
2. 
%7/AAimoff 
/verfor 
AA /6ave /52 
4770 veys 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM T. LARIMORE, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
SPRING. MOTOR FOR CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 253,072, dated January 31, 1882. 
Application filed November 25, 1881. 
(No model.) 
IO 
IS 
25 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM T. LARIMORE, 
of St. Louis, in the county of St. Louis and 
State of Missouri, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Spring-Motors for 
Cars, &c., of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
This invention relates to mechanism for 
horse-cars, to assist the horses in starting of 
the same, and otherwise in the running of the 
cars-as, for instance, in ascending inclines; 
and it consists in a spring band or bands ar. 
ranged to be coiled from the running of the 
Wheels, and to uncoil, and as it uncoils to work 
upon the Wheels, and thus assist in the move 
ment of the car, all substantially as hereinaf. 
ter described. 
In the accompanying plates of drawings, 
Figures 1 and 2 are side and plan views, re 
spectively, of the body of a horse-car having 
my invention attached thereto. Fig. 3 is a 
cross section on line 33, Fig. 1, enlarged; Figs. 
4 and 5, detail views, enlarged, in elevation; 
Fig. 6, a detail elevation, Fig. 7 a detail plan 
view, and Fig. Sa detail sectional view, all en 
larged. 
In the drawings, A represents a horse car 
body arranged to run upon wheels B, all as or. 
dinarily. 
The axle a of one pair of wheels is provided 
with a gear-wheel, C, with which meshes a 
pinion-wheel, b, carrying a sprocket-wheel, D, 
arranged to turn as one in suitable learings of 
the car-body. 
- E is an endless clhain connecting the sprock 
et-wheel D with another sprocket-wheel, F, on 
a horizontal shaft, d, turning in suitable bear 
ings on the car-body, and thus the shaft d is 
driven from the revolution of the car-wheel 
axle (t. This shaft d carries another sprocket 
wheel, G, arranged to turn there with, and to 
slide lengthwise thereon, the connection be. 
tween the two being a horizontal spline, f. 
H is an endless chai), connecting sliding 
sprocket-wheel G with another sprocket-wheel, 
J, arranged to turn loosely upon another shaft, 
g. This chain H runs lengthwise of the car 
and intermediate of the two sproclet-wheels 
G and J. It passes in one length, h, between 
So the grooved rolls K of an upright post, L, and 
45 
35 
in its other length, l, between grooved rolls Mof 
an upright post, N. Each post is arranged to 
be moved vertically in a separate stationary 
vertical socket, m, and to be lowered against 
a spring, n, in its respective socket, and the 55 
two posts are arranged out of a longitudinal 
line with each other, and one upon one side 
and the other upon the other side of a com 
mon longitudinal transverse shaft, O, arranged 
to turn in suitable bearings on the car-body. 
This transverse shaft carries a loose sprocket 
wheel, P, which is provided with a spring 
pawl, o, engaging with a latchet-Wheel, p, of 
the shaft O, and another loose sprocket-wheel, 
Q, in line with the post N. 
R is a sliding clutch collar on shaft O, ar 
ranged to clutch with the vertical face of the 
sprocket-wheel Q, and to be held to such clutch 
by a spiral spring, q, on the shaft O, having 
its bearing at one end against collar R and at 
its other against an adjustable nut, r, of the 
shaft (). This clutch turns with the shaft O 
and can slide lengthwise thereon. The sprock 
et-wheel P is in line with the length h, and the 
sprocket-wheel Q is in line with the length l of 75 
the chain l. 
65 
- 
T is a ratchet-wheel secured on shaft O, and 8o 
S is a spring-band coiled around the shaft 
O, and attached at one end thereto and at the 
other to the car-body. 
S is a spring-pawl engaging there with. This 
pawl is attached to the car-body, and has an 
arm, t, in position to be struck by an arim, t, 
of the sliding post, L when such post is de 
pressed against its spring. 
U is a line leading from the post L. under a 
pulley-wheel, c, and thence over a pulley-wheel, 
ac, of the car-body, to a drum, V, to which it is 
secured, which drum is arranged to be turned 
by a crank-handle, a. 
W is a line leading to the drum W, similarly 
to line U, y 2 being the pulleys therefor. The 
turning of the crank-handle in one direction 
pulls the line U in a direction to depress the 
post L, and in the other direction it pulls the 
line W in a direction to depress the post N, 
and in either case it leaves the opposite post 
free to lift under the action of its spring. The 
depression of the one post I puts the length 
h of chain H which passes between its pull- I co 
9 O 
2 
253,072 
leys into connection with its sprocket-wheel, 
and places the other length, l, out of connec 
tion with its sprocket-wheel. When the length 
of the chain H is in connection with its 
sprocket-wheel Q the spring S is caused by 
the revolution of the car-axle to be wound up, 
and when the length h of chain is in connec 
tion with the sprocket-wheel P connection is 
made for such wound spring to operate upon 
the car-axle by its unwinding, provided the 
holding-pawls is released, which is done by the 
abutment of the arm at of the post L against 
the arm t of the pawls, and the consequent re 
lease of such pawl from its engagement with 
its ratchet-wheel T, and then the shaft O is 
set free to rotate under the action of the spring, 
and through the connections described the 
power of the spring is communicated to the 
car-axle. 
In the operation of the car the chain H, when 
connected, is in constant motion, and when the 
line of chain l is engaged with the sprocket 
wheel P, if the spring catch or pawls is not 
released from the ratchet, wheel T, then the 
sprocket-wheel P will turn on the shaft O, its 
spring-pawl O slipping over its ratchet-wheel 
p; but as the spring-pawl S is released the 
spring S will then, in its unwinding, turn the 
sprocket-wheel P through its pawl and ratch 
et-wheel connection. 
To carry out this invention more fully, an 
endless chain, H, with its sprocket-wheels, can 
be arranged on each side of the car and in be 
tween the same series of springs S, and shafts 
can be located as the space will permit, which 
Springs can be arranged to operate as above 
described, each chain and its connection oper 
ating independent springs, or in a series, as 
desired; also, in lieu of winding up the springs 
S by the turning of the wheels in the running 
of the cars, they can be wound by independent 
lmeans, such as a steam-engine or any power 
located at different points on the line of travel. 
By arranging the endless chain H on each 
side of the car the wheels at each end of the 
car can be connected so as to operate, thereby 
increasing the power over the same. 
In the use of this invention in descending 
hills, the momentum can then be used to wind 
up the spring S, obviating to some extent the 
use of the brake, thereby utilizing the power 
that otherwise would lave to be used in brak 
ing the car. 
The clutch R is arranged to slip or pass over 
its connection with the sprocket-wheel Q, to 
prevent the breaking of any of the connecting 
parts should the chain-connections continue to 
w 
O 
25 
35 
4 O 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
operate on the shaft after the spring has been 
fully wound, such slip being regulated by the 
spring q and screw-nut r. 
The sprocket-wheels G and J, being loose on 
their respective shafts, can move thereon lon 
gitudinally, according to the line of direction 
in which the chain H is operating, the spline 
f, however, making a positive connection of 65 
the sprocket-wheel G with its shaft for the pur. 
pose of operating the chain. 
As is obvious, this invention is applicable to 
the running of the cars in lieu of horses or other 
motive power. 
Flaving thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The coil-spring S, endless clhain H, run 
ning in line with sprocket-wheels G, P, Q, and 
J, of which two, PQ, are upon a common shaft, 
O, in combination with the posts LN and their 
connections for operating the same, and with 
sprocket-wheels D F and endless chain E, con 
nected to a car-axle, all substantially as de- 8o 
scribed, for the purpose specified. 
2. The coil-spring S, endless chain H, run 
ning in line with sprocket-wheels G PQ J, of 
which two, PQ, are upon a common shaft, O, 
ratchet-wheel T, and pawls, in combination 
with the posts LN and their connections for 
operating the same, and with sprocket-wheels 
D F and endless chain E, connected to a car 
axle, all substantially as described, for the pur 
pose specified. 
3. The coil-spring S, endless chain H, run. 
ning in line with sprocket-wheels G. PQ J, of 
which two, PQ, are upon a common shaft, O, 
having sliding clutch R, ratchet-wheel T, and 
pawls, in combination with the posts LN and 
their connections for operating the same, and 
with sprocket-wheels D F and endless chain 
E, connected to a car-axle, all substantially as 
described, for the purpose specified. 
4. In combination with the coil-spring S, end 
less chain H, running in line with sprocket 
wheels G. P. Q J, of which two, PQ, are upon 
a common shaft, O, in combination with the 
posts LN and their connections for operating 
the same, the sprocket-wheel G, connected to 
its shaft by a spline, f, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
eSSGS, 
85 
95 
W. T. JARI MORE, 
OO 
I o5 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN W. BROWN, 
WM. S. BELLOWS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253173.txt	(No Model) 
W. F. H. AMWAKE. 
DOOR, SPRING, 
No. 253,173, 
Patented Feb. 7, 1882. 
H 
2 cover 
22, 22.74. 
late-11 
Yaa . 
 
722-2225 
43. 37 2-zea 
1-2.22-24 
323 62% 
62 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM F. H. AMWAKE, OF LANCASTER, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DOOR- SPRING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 253,173, dated February 7, 1882. 
Application filed October 13, 1881. (No model.) 
w 
In order to vary the tension of the spring, 
the fast-pin P is pulled up, as shown by the 
dotted lines, the lower flange of the same fit 
ting into the corresponding countersink in the 
under side of the flange F, and the stem is 
then turned by means of a pin inserted in the 
horizontal openings in, When the tension is 
increased or diminished, as desired, the pin is 
dropped, and, engaging one of the lugs L., pre 
vents further movement of the stem. 
The advantage in my arrangement is the se 
curing of the pin to the bracket and the ease 
and facility with which it can be made to pre 
vent or allow the movement of the stem. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
A flange, F, of a bracket, B, having an open 
ing, O, parallel with an opening in the same, 
through which the stem S passes, and having 
a countersink at its lower side, in combination 
with a fast-pin, P, having a head at its upper 
end, and a flange about the lower correspond 
ing with the countersink aforesaid, and lugs 
L., projecting from the collar C, all as and for 
the purpose specified. 
WILLIAM F. H. AMWAKE. 
Witnesses: 
A. F. SHENCK, 
WM. R. GERHART, 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
5 
IO 
25 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. F. H. AM 
WAKE, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Lancaster, in the county of Lancaster and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
Improvements in Door-Springs, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to door-springs in which 
the tension of the same can be regulated; and 
the object of my improvement is to facilitate 
the manner of securing the stem of the spring 
after the tension of the latter has been in 
creased or diminished. I attain this object by 
the mechanism illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawing, which is a view of the entire mech 
S. 
The top bracket, B, of a coiled door or gate 
Spring, of any of the old and well-known forms, 
is cast with a pin-opening, O, through its flange 
F, parallel with the opening through which the 
stem S of the spring A passes, the said pin 
opening having a countersink at its lower end. 
Working through this opening O is a fast-pin, 
P, With a head at its upper end, and a flange 
at its lower, corresponding with the counter 
sink at the bottom of the opening O. The 
stem S has a collar or flange, G, cast on it just 
above the point of its connection with the 
spring A affording a continuous bearing 
against the lower surface of the flange F, with 
lugs I projecting therefrom, which engage the 
pin P. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253273.txt	(No Model.) 
T, FITZSIMMONS 
CUTTER HEAD FOR WOOD WORKING MACHINES 
No. 253,273, 
Patented Feb. 7, 1882. 
7722azzaze 
7/4 as 
i. (A. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS FITZSIMMONS, OF BURLINGTON, VERMONT. 
CUTTER HEAD FOR WOOD WORKING MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 253,273, dated February 7, 1882. 
Application filed November 10, 1881. 
(No model.) 
55 
IOC 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS FITZSIMMONs, a 
citizen of the United States of America, residing 
at Burlington, in the county of Chittenden and 
State of Vermont, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvementsin Cutters and Plates 
for Planing and Molding Machines; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer. 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to letters or figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
cutter heads and plates for planing and mold 
ing machines; and the objects of my improve 
ments are, first, to provide a device by which 
the cutter may be readily attached to the cyl 
inder without a possibility of displacement in 
the act of setting the same; second, to so ar. 
range its attachment to the cylinder that it 
cannot yield to any obstruction which may 
arise in its operation; and, third, to afford - 
facilities for keeping the cutter in line and 
clearing the groove ate the side of the head, 
thereby leaving the bead always of a uniform 
size, and avoiding any liability of heating the 
cutters, and thus drawing their temper. I at 
tain these objects by the mechanism illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a side cutter 
blade and plate attached to the cylindler. Fig. 
2 is a detailed view, in perspective, of a side 
cutter blade and plate. Figs, 3 and 4 are simi 
lar views of a center cutter and plate in detail. 
Similar letters indicate like parts through 
A is a side cutter-blade, slotted at a, as is 
customary, to receive the bolt E, by which it 
and its plate B are rigidly attached to the usual 
slotted square cylinder, G. Along the entire 
length of its lower face and parallel with the 
cutting-edge projects a lip, which is a contin 
uation of the interior knife of the cutter-head, 
and is designed to fit into a corresponding 
groove in the upper face of the plate B, so that 
when in position the exterior edges of the cut 
ter blade and plate shall correspond. The plate 
B is of the same length, as well as width, of 
out the several views. 
w 
65 
the cutter-blade A. On its under face is a 
transverse projection, b, of a width sufficient 
to closely fit into the upper part of the slot EI 
of the cylinder G. The two plates A and B 
are held together by a bolt, E, whose head is 
designed to fit into the lower and elongated 
portion of the slot E of the cylinder G. A 
nut, F, and Washer serve to attach them rig 
idly to each other and to the cylinder G after 
the cutter is slid forward to its desired projec 
tion beyond the edge of the cylinder, The 
center cutter, C, and its plate D are of similar 
form as the side cutter, A, and its plate B, ex 
cept that an additional lip projects from the 
under face of the cutter-blade, being the con 
tinuation of the line of the outside knife, and 
an additional corresponding groove near the 
outside edge of thre upper face of the plate D. 
To better brace and support the cutters they 
are made to project beyond the full width of 7o 
the plates A and C only that distance which is 
absolutely essential to their practical opera 
tion. 
In operation the head of the bolt E is slid 
into the slot E of the cylinder G. The bolt is 
then passed through a hole in the plates B or 
D, which brings their respective projections, bor 
d, into the upperpart of the slot H. The cutters 
A or C are then placed upon their respective 
plates, B or D, their lips sliding into their 
corresponding grooves. Then by screwing 
down the nut E and washer of the bolt E, 
which passes through the slot c or c of the 
cutters, both the blades and their respective 
plates become easily and rigidly attached to 
the cylinder G. To set the cutter no care is 
required to prevent its being turned or moved 
out of line on the cylinder, as would be nec 
essary if it were directly attached to the cylin 
der in the ordinary manner, as its lip or lips, 
moving in the fixed grooves, a plate which is 
always kept in place by the projection on its 
under surface, retain it absolutely in place. 
For the same reason it cannot be displaced by 
any obstruction it may meet with in its work 
ing-a liability to which it is often subject 
when it is only held by the bolt. A great ad 
vantage also is found in the presence of the 
lip, which continually clears the groove of any 
fuzz or shavings along the side of the blade. 
95 
75 
45 
So 
 
2 
253,273 
2. The combination of the grooved cutter. 
head, the plate B, provided with the projec 
tion b, and having one or more grooves made 
in its outer surface, the bolt E, nut F, and cut 
ter having a bead or beads on its inner surface, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
IS 
2 d 
THOMAS FITZSIMMONS, 
Witnesses : 
CHARLES E. ALLEN, 
ALBERT N. PERCY, 
This leaves the bead always of the same uni 
form size, keeps the cutters of the same shape, 
and effectually prevents their heating. The 
result is that by means of my improvements 
not only much time and labor are saved in set 
ting the cutters, but also the work performed 
is of a more perfect and satisfactory character. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the grooved cutter, 
with a plate,B, having a projection on its inner 
side to catch in the slot, a clamping-bolt, and 
a cutter-head, substantially as shown. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253373.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 253,373. - 
 
M 
. 
. . 
C. J. GUSTAVIESON, 
HOPPLE. 
. 
w 
Patented Feb. 7, 1882. 
Este, 
Z% az 
J%42.4 
* * 
 
. 
% INWENT0R: 
C?IZT. 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES J. GUSTAVESON, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH TERRITORY. 
HOPPLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,373, dated February 7, 1882. 
Application filed October 26, 1881. (No model.) . 
 
". 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES. J. GUSTAVE 
SON, of Salt Lake City, in the county of Salt 
Lake and Territory of Utah, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Hopples, of || 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
descriptioin, reference being had to the an 
nexed drawings, forming part of this specifi 
cation. 
My invention consists of a hopple provided 
with curved plates for inclosing the legs of an 
animal, and a detachable chain connecting the 
plates, as will be hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of my improved hopple; Fig. 
2, a plan view of the curved plate and swivel, 
and Fig. 3 is a modification. 
The chain A is constructed of links a, which 
are twisted in the ordinary manner and pro 
vided with a swivel, b, at each end, connect 
ing the chain to rectangular end links, c, by 
means of which the chain is to be secured to 
the hopple-straps. 
lt will be observed that 
while the twisted links form a clhain of suffi 
cient flexibility to allow the animal to walk 
with ease"the chain cannot readily be caught 
upon any obstruction whereby the animah shall 
be prevented from ranging at large. 
As a means of connecting the chain to the hop 
ple-straps, I provide a curved plate, d, which 
may be adapted to extend either partly or en 
tirely around the animals leg, and is provided 
with perforations by means of which it shall be 
riveted between the hopple-strap and leg-band, 
which latter parts are not shown. The center 
I O 
I 5 
25 . 
s 35 
------ TCS: 
of the plate d is curved so as to form a cylin 
drical bearing, e, for the end link, c; and for 
the purpose of making these parts detachable 
for the convenience of shipment I construct 
the end link, c, with its outer side formed of a 
removable bolt or screw, f, which is adapted 
to engage with the end link and the bearing in 
the plate. With this construction the hopple 
straps are held in proper shape and strength 
ened, while the end links are allowed to oscil 45 
late forward and backward  with - the move 
Instead of securing the 
ment of the animal. 
plate d under the hopple-strap it may be riv 
eted to the outside, as well. I may also use a 
simple roller, g, with or without a bolt, in the 
end link, and secure the link to the hopple by 
passing the strap through the said link. 
I am aw?re that a hopple having a chain with 
a swivel at each end has before been used, and 
therefore I do not broadly claim such a con 
struction. 
Having-thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
A hopple consisting of the curv?d plates dd, 
6 
adapted to inclose, or partly inclose, the legs of 
an animal, and having perforations whereby 
they shall be secured to hopple-straps, in com 
bination with the - detachable chain A, having 
twisted links a and swivels b b connecting said 
plates, substantially as shown and described. . 
65 
. 
55 
v 
Witnesses : 
CEHARLES JOHN GUSTAWIESON, 
- 
- JoHN LEWIS GRUNDHAND, 
NIELS CHRISTENS CHRISTENSEN, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253473.txt	(Model.) 
No. 253,473, 
G. GOUGH, 
JEWEL BOX. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1882. 
 
WITNESSEsfia 2-1 V-E DVENTOR: 
BY lus b 
ArroRNEY. 
64%-vee- 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE GOUGH, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO ELIZUR. G. WEBSTER AND 
ADELBERT A. WEBSTER, BOTH OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
JEWEL-Box. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 253,473, dated February 7, 1882. 
Application filed November 25, 1881, 
(Model.) 
2O from being opened too far. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE GOUGH, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented a new and Improved 
5 Cover Attachment for Jewelry-Cases and other 
Boxes, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. . 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved cover attachment for jew 
Io elry-cases, butter-dishes, sugar boxes, bonbon 
nieres, and other like articles, whereby the cover 
can be raised by pushing backward the bail 
handle of the case or box. 
The invention consists in a bail pivoted to 
15 the box or casing and resting against or em 
bracing studs...projecting from the sides of the 
lid or cover, which is hinged to the box or 
casing. The bail is provided with a check 
button or projection to prevent the lid or cover 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a jewelry 
case provided with my improved cover attach 
ment. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional eleva 
tion of the same. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal ele 
Vation of a modification of the same. 
The lidor cover A is hinged to the box or 
casing B in some suitable manner, as shown, 
and is provided with two lateral studs or pins, 
C, one on each side, which studs or pins C 
pass into or through the longitudinal slots D 
35 of a curved bail, E, which is pivoted to the 
casing or box B. If the bail E is swung back 
ward-that is, in the direction of the arrow a'- 
the studs or pins C must move with it, and as 
the cover or lid Aishinged on the box or cas 
4o ing B this cover will turn on its hinge and 
will swing open, as indicated by the arrow b'. 
To close the cover or lid the bail E is moved 
in the inverse direction of the arrow a'. To 
prevent the cover from being swung open too 
45 far, and for the purpose of holding it open the 
bail E is provided with check knobs or but 
tons F, against which the studs C rest when 
the lid is open. 
be slotted 
It is not necessary that the bail E 
25 
So 
If the 55 
longitudinally, although that construction is 
preferred. For instance, if the bail consists 
of a plain wire, E', as shown in Fig. 3, pro 
vided with check stud or projection F, the 
cover A will be opened by swinging the bail 
E in the direction of the arrow al. 
cover is to be closed, the bail is simply swung 
in the inverse direction of the arrow a? and 
the cover drops of its own weight. 
- 
This cover attachment can be applied to 
jewelry-cases, sugar and candy boxes, butter 
dishes, and other like articles. It can be made 
of metal, porcelain, glass, &c., or partly of one 
material and partly of another. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 65 
Patent 
1. The combination, with a box and its 
hinged lid or cover, of a bail pivoted to the 
box, and of studs or pins projecting from the 
sides of the hinged lid or cover, stubstantially 7o 
as herein shown and described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. The combination, with the box B and the 
hinged lid A, of the longitudinally-slotted bail 
E, pivoted to the box B, and of the studs or 
pins C, projecting from the lid. A through the 
slots of the bail E, substantially as herein 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. The combination, with a box and its 
hinged lid or cover, of a bail pivoted to the 
box, of lateral studsor pins on the lid or cover, 
and of a checking device on the bail, against 
which checking device the pins are to strike 
to prevent the cover from being opened too 
far, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with the box B and its 
hinged lid or cover A, of the bail E, pivoted 
to the box, the studs C on the lid A and the 
check button or knob F on the bail E, sub 
stantially as herein shown and described, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
GEORGE GOUGE, 
Witnesses : 
G. A. WEBSTER, 
C. C. LUCKEY, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253573.txt	(No Model.) 
C. E. BAILEY & W. R. TALBOT, 
a 
No. 253,573, 
BUTTON, 
Patented Feb, l4, l882. 
FGs' 
F1 1. 
- 
- 
, 
- 
WITNESSES 
22, 22. 
Silah Sojas 
INVENTORS: 
Choosrales'.S.S. 
SSS... ATTORNEY 
RS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES E. BAILEY AND WILLIAM R. TALBOT, OF PROVIDENCE, R, I. 
BUTTON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 253,573, dated February 14, 1882. 
Application filed December 7, 1881. 
(No model.): 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CHARLEs E. BAILEY 
and WILLIAMIR.TALBOT, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Providence, in the county of 
Providence and State of Rhode Island, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Buttons; and we do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters or figures of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
Our invention has for its object to provide 
an improved method of forming the metallic 
eyes or shanks of buttons; and it consists in 
first molding, casting, or compressing the 
button-head upon and around the head of a 
metallic nail or pin, and then bending the pro 
jecting end of the said nail or pin around upon 
itself beneath and into the said button-head 
to form the eye or loop, all as will be herein 
after more fully described, and specifically des 
ignated in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a side 
view of our improved device; Fig. 2, a sec 
tional view; and Fig. 3, a sectional view of the 
button-head provided with the headed nail or 
pin from which is formed the eye or shank of 
the button. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in the several figures. 
In carrying out our invention the button 
head A, which may be of any suitable mate 
rial, is molded, cast, or otherwise compressed 
upon and around the head of the metallic nail, 
tack, or pin B in such a manner as to firmly 
secure the two parts together. The lower or 
O 
25 
35 
projecting end of the said nail, tack, or pin is 
then bent or curled around upon itself by 
means of any suitable die, tool, or machine to 
form the open eye, loop, or shank C, as fully 
shown in the drawings. In the operation of 
bending the said nail, tack, or pin into the 
form of an eye or shank, the lower end or 
point of the same is forced a short distance up 
into the under surface of the button - head, 
when the material of which said button-head 
is made will admit of it. 
We do not wish to confine ourselves to the 
precise form or arrangement of the parts (de 
scribed, as equivalent means may be employed 
for attaching the button - heads to the leaded 
nails, tacks, or pins, and such changes or modi 
fications thereof are hereby contemplated by 
S. 
By means of our improvements we are en 
abled to provide buttons with an eye or shank 
which is strong and durable, and will with 
stand great strain without pulling apart from 
the button-head. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new and useful is 
That improvement in the art of forming the 
eyes or shanks of buttons consisting ill em 
bedding the head of a metallic ail or pin 
within the body of the button and then bend 
ing the projecting end over upon itself and 
into contact with the button-head to for in an 
eye or shank, all substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses, 
CHARLES E. BAILEY. 
WILLIAM R, TALBOT, 
45 
50 
55 
6. 
Witnesses: 
W. M. BAILEY, Jr., 
J. T. RICH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253674.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 253,674, 
 
E. J. BROOKS, 
METALLIC SEAL, 
Patented Feb. 14, 1882, 
WITWESSES 
w 2164 
s: 
IWFE. WTOR. 
Azouzord, J. Erdocs 
--a 
8. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washingtor. D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD J. BROOKS, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO E. J. 
BROOKS & CO, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
METAL LIC SEAL 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 253,674, dated February 14, 1882. 
Application filed September 14, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
25 
view from below, of the same seal pressed. Figs. 
To all whom it may concern: 
6 to 10, inclusive, are like views" in series of 
Beit known that I, EDWARD J. BROOKs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at East another of my cast-in lead and wire seals as it 
appears before and after the pressing opera 
Orange, in the county of Essex and State of 
tion, illustrating modifications of my inven- 55 
5 New Jersey, have invented a new and useful 
tion, Fig. 6 being a perspective view, Figs. 7 
Improvement in Metallic Seals, of which the 
following is a specification. 
and 9 face views, the former in section, and 
Figs. 8 and 10 edge views from below. 
The presentinvention relates to the construc 
Like letters of reference indicate correspond 
tion of the seal-disks of lead and wire seals 
ing parts in the several figures. 
and the mode of securing the ends of the shackle 
SS represent manufactured shackle-wires 
wires therein for sealing the doors of railway 
freight-cars, and for like purposes. 
of different varieties, and D D' seal-disks of 
different patterns, cast upon the respective 
When a seal-disk is cast on one end of a 
shackle-wires in suitable molds. The shackle 
shackle of my indented detective wire pat 
wire S is of the variety patented by me June 
I5 ented June 27, 1876, or a shackle of cable-wire 
27, 1876, and known as indented detective 
or the like, as heretofore proposed by me, this 
wire. In the example it is united with a 
end is rendered absolutely secure, and this 
seal-disk, D, having in substance the charac. 
cast-in style of seal has recently become popu 
teristic of my improved seal-disk patented 
lar, owing to the facility it affords for carrying 
March 30, 1875, the straight ends a b of the 
and rapidly applying the seals, as set forth in 
shackle-wire being crossed at or near the cen 
the specification of my cast-in lead and tin seal 
ter of the disk in the act of threading the last 
patented August 23, 1881, Letters Patent No. 
end, b, owing to the arrangement of the thread 
246,068; but prior to my present invention 
ing-aperture c, formed in the seal-disk for its 
seals of said description were peculiarly liable 
reception, as illustrated by Fig. 2, which shows 75 
to be left with the threaded end of the shackle 
said aperture c in the plane of section with the - 
insecure, owing to the great power required to 
compress the nearly-solid seal-disk sufficiently 
threaded end b therein, so that when the seal 
disk is properly pressed the crossed shackle 
to cause its metal to flow into the indentations 
ends will by their indentations interlock with 
of the threaded shackle end. Attempts have 
in the disk, as indicated in Fig. 4. The shackle 
heretofore been made to avoid this difficulty; 
S is of cable-wire-such as is commonly used 
but, so far as I am aware, they have invariably 
and is shown in connection with a seal-disk, 
involved an abandonment of the said advanta 
D', having its aperture c for the reception of 
geous cast-in characteristic, besides rendering 
the threaded end l of the shackle-wire paral 
the seal much more expensive and complicat 
lel to the cast-in end a; but either variety of 85 
shackle-wire, or any other having indenta 
My invention, hereinafter described and 
tions or any equivalent thereof adapting one 
claimed, consists in a seal-disk of novel con 
end to be simply cast in for securil)g it, may 
struction, in combination with a shackle-wire 
be used in connection with either pattern of 
of the aforesaid description, for rendering a 
seal-disk; and the latter, as regards the form 9o 
cast-in lead and wire seal free from the aforesaid 
of threading-apertures and means, if any be 
objections, and at the same time lighter, and 
used, for interlocking the threaded shackle 
consequently in this respect cheaper, and in 
end with the cast-in end or with a locking 
its preferred forms materially easier both to 
piece of hard metal, may be of other styles. 
thread and to press. 
For securing the threaded shackle end b or 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
l within the pressed seal-disk, with or without 
a perspective view of one of my cast-in lead 
the aid of interlocking, as above described, 
and wire seals as furnished for use. Fig. 2 is 
and for lightening the seal-disk and facilitat 
a sectional face view thereof threaded but un 
ing the threading and pressing operations, the 
pressed, and Fig. 3 a view of the same from 
seal - disk of either pattern or style is con- Ioo 
5o below; and Fig. 4 is a face view, and Fig. 5 a. 
35 ing the sealing operation, one or both. 
95 
2 
253,674 
the saving in metal, can be furnished as cheap 
ly or nearly as cheaply as those of common 
make. 
Having thus described my present inven 
tion, I claim as new 
1. In combination with a suitable shackle 
wire, as herein specified, a soft-metal seal-disk 
cast on one end of said wire, and constructed 
with a threading-aperture to receive its other 
end, and with a recess in one of its lateral 
edges, into which the threaded shackle end is 
readily bent by a simple lateral movement, 
substantially as herein described. 
2. The combination, in a metallic seal, of a 
soft-metal seal-disk constructed with recesses. 
in its respective lateral edges, and with a 
threading-hole which extends into one of said 
recesses, and a suitable shackle-wire, as herein 
specified, having a straight cast-in end held in 
a solid portion of the seal-disk, substantially 
as herein described, for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EDWARD J. BROOKS, 
Witnesses: 
JAS. L. E WIN, 
L. FARLEY HOVEY. 
35 
45 
SO 
IO 
structed with recesses de or dein its respect 
ive lateral edges, and substantially in the plane 
of the threading-hole c or c, said recesses be 
ing adapted to be readily formed in connection 
with the threading-aperture by a core-bar or 
core-bars at the casting operation. One of 
these recesses, d or d, is in communication with 
said threading-aperture c or c at the lower 
end of the latter, and in the examples serves 
to shorten said aperture, which facilitates 
threading, while the threaded end b or l) is 
readily bent into it by a simple lateral move 
ment, which is customary in temporarily se 
curing ordinary seal - disks preparatory to 
pressing, and the whole depth of the seal-disk 
is utilized as anchorage for the cast-in end. 
The other recess, e or e, serves in connection 
with the former to lighten the seal-disk and 
to facilitate the plessing operation, while in 
pressing the bent threaded end b or b is se 
curely embedded in the walls of said recess d 
or d, so that stripping it is effectually pre 
vented. At the same time both faces of the 
unpressed seal-disk are smooth, and the disk 
expands and receives a sharp impression, 
which may be of any description, as perfectly 
as if it were not recessed, as illustrated in the 
drawings; and the improved seals, owing to 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253774.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. SECOR. 
No. 253,774. 
DEVICE FOR OPERATING TOOL, HOLDING TURRETS. 
Patented Feb. 14 
1882. 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 253,774, 
DEVICE FOR OPERATING TOOL, HOLDING TURRETS, 
Patented Feb. 14, 1882. 
J. B. SECOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
s us 
sN 
- Na s a. s 
s cer e H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
& 
  
 
3 Z . 
% eg 
 
 
 
s 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
- 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JEROME. B. SECOR, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
DEVICE FOR OPERATING tool-HOLDING TURRETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,774, dated February 14, 1882. 
Application filed August 3, 1881. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Be it known that I, JEROME. B. SECOR, of connected to a fixed pivot. 
- 
tion. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Bridgeport, Fairfield county, Connecticut, have 
invented an Improvement in Lathe Attach 
ments, of which the following is the specifica 
My invention consists of devices whereby 
the turret of a lathe may be moved back and 
forth, revolved, and locked and unlocked with 
facility. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional plan, 
showing the turret, slide, and bed with attach 
ments; Fig. 2, the same as Fig. 1, the parts in 
a different position; Fig. 3, a sectional eleva 
tion; Fig. 4, a plan of parts detached. 
A is the bed, in which the slide B, carrying 
the turret C, moves, at and a? being the guides, 
one of which is provided with teeth, forming 
a rack, b. The shank c of the turret extends 
through an opening in the slide, and carries at 
the lower end a ratchet . wheel, d, and an an 
nular flange, f, projecting from the under side 
of the head of the turret, enters an annular re 
cess, e, in the slide. In the flange fare notches 
g, adapted to receive the end of a bolt, D, 
which slides in a groove in the upper face of 
the slide B, and is pressed toward the turret 
by a spring, l. The under face of the slide B 
is recessed to receive a segment, E, which is 
secured to a spindle,j, turning in the slide B, 
and provided at the upper end with a handle, 
l. The segment is toothed, the teeth meshing 
with those of the rack b, so that by pushing 
the handlel in one direction or the other the 
slide B will be carried back or forth between 
the guides at al. 
In a recess in the slide B, 
above the segment E, is pivoted by a bolt a 
lever, F, the long arm p of which bears upon 
a pin, In, of the bolt D, while the short arm p' 
is in a position to be struck by a stud, q, on 
the segmentE when the latter swings upon its 
pivot. 
An arm, G, with an end stud, engages with 
the teeth of the ratchet-wheel d, and serves to 
turn the latter and the turret a partial revolu 
tion as the slide moves back. This arm may 
be pivoted at the opposite end to a fixed stud; 
but I prefer to pivot it to the segment E, as 
shown, so that as the segment is moved, car 
rying back the slide, it also pushes forward 
the arm, giving thereby a more extended move 
ment than would result from the use of an arm 
The turret is provided with means for secur 
ing any of the desired tools or operating de 
vices, and when in the position shown in Fig. 
1 is locked securely by the bolt D. By now 
swinging the arm l in the direction of the ar 
row 1, Fig. 1, the segment, acting on the rack 
as a fulcrum, is turned and carries the slide 
and turret back from the face-plate of the lathe 
without any variation of the leverage. After 
the slide has been thus carried a short dis 
tance the lever F is brought with its arm p' 
against the lug q, the lever being thereby 
swung round in the direction of the arrow 2, 
until the arm p' escapes from the stud, and the 
bolt D being thereby pushed back until its end 
passes from the recess g in which it was situ 
ated. The continued backward movement 
brings the tootha of the ratchet-wheeld against 
the stud or end of the arm G and revolves the 
turret. As the turret is turned the arm p of 
the lever Fescapes from the pin m of the bolt D, 
which is then thrown forward by its spring un 
til it strikes the flange fand slips into the next 
notch (), when the latter is brought opposite 
the bolt by the continued revolution of the tur 
ret. The parts will now be in the position 
shown by Fig. 2. The turret is moved back 
by swinging the lever l in the direction of the 
arrow 3, when the slide B will move forward, 
the arm p' will strike the lug (, turning the le 
ver in the direction of the arrow 4, and finally 
passing from the lever, and all parts will as 
sume the position shown in Fig. 1. The slide 
B and its turret are thus carriedback or forth. 
The turret is locked most securely until it is 
to be turned, when it is unlocked with facility, 
and the turning is effected in the proper time 
and to the exact extent required, the whole re 
sult being secured by a single movement of 
the lever l. 
It will be obvious that the lever l may be re 
placed by any equivalent device for swinging 
the segment. I further contemplate the use 
of different devices for drawing back the bolt 
D on the movement of the segment, It will 
also be apparent that some of the devices de 
scribed may be used without the others on ap 
plication to machines of ordinary construction. 
Instead of a toothed segment and rack, a seg 
95 
IOO 
2 
253,774 
ment with crossed flexible bands bolted to the 
segment and to the guide a? may be used. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with a slide, B, and its 
bed A and turret, of the rack b on the bed and 
segment E, pivoted to the slide, and segument 
lever l, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the slide, turret, 
and segment E, of the arm G, adapted to en 
gage with the ratchet-wheel d, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the slide, segment, 
and turret having a ratchet - wheel, d, of the 
arm G, adapted to the teeth of said wheel and 
pivoted to the segment, substantially as set 
forth. 
Io 
4. The combination, with the slide and re 
volving turret having notches g, of a spring 
bolt, D, carried by the slide, a lever, F, engag 
ing with said bolt, and a segment, E, provided 
With a stud, q, arranged to strike and turn the 
lever to retract the bolt as the segment is 
turned, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub- 25 
scribing witnesses. 
J. B. SECOR. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs E. FoSTER, 
H. F. NORCROSS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253874.txt	(No Model.) 
J. L. MACD ON AI.D & G. E. SLY. 
. 
. 2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 253,874, 
 
THRASHING MACHINE, 
Patented Feb. 21, 1882. 
(No Model.) 
J. L. MACDONALD & G. E. SLY. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
THRASHING MACHINE. 
No. 253,874, 
Patented Feb. 21, 1882. 
 
 
 
-TT Hill ed 
H s: a 
as 
- 
e 
Y 
w 
 
N N 
es 
Z 
ES 
 
 
NE-3 
S 
Lir 
Sas 
th 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN L. MACDONALD AND GEORGE E. SLY, OF SEAKOPEE, MINNESOTA. 
THRASHING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,874, dated February 21, 1882. 
Application filed October 31, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, JoHNL. MACDONALD 
and GEORGE E. SLY, of Shakopee, in the 
county of Scott and State of Minnesota, have 
invented certain Improvements in Thrashing 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
Our invention relates to grain thrashing and 
separating machines; and the improvements 
consist in various features and details of con 
struction, hereinafter fully set forth. 
The various improvements will be pointed 
out in the course of the following description 
and claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figurel rep 
resents a side elevation of our improved ma 
chine, partly in section, to show the internal 
construction; Fig. 2, an enlarged sectional 
view of the cylinders and concaves, showing 
also the dust-boards. Fig. 3 is a rear end view 
of the machine; Fig. 4, a side view of the 
mechanism employed for operating the screen 
ing-shoe and in some cases the straw-carrier; 
Fig. 5, a view showing in detail the construc 
tion of the rear thrashing-cylinder. 
It has been found in the practical use of 
thrashing-machines that a considerable amount 
of grain remains attached to the stalks and 
passes from the machine with the straw to the 
stacker, thus materially lessening the yield of 
grain. To remedy this difficulty two cylinders 
have been employed, arranged to act succes 
sively upon the grain, and the result has been a 
considerable increase in the quantity of grain. 
Ashitherto constructed, however, the detached 
grain collected in the space between the con 
caves, and, besides being broken and injured, 
tended to clog the passage of the straw through 
the machine. To overcome this difficulty we 
employ between the two concaves a slatted 
or perforated botton or connecting-section, 
through which the loose grain may fall, but by 
which the straw is held up from the grain-con 
veyer and caused to pass under the second 
cylinder to the straw-carrier. 
It is desirable in thrashing-machines to im 
part to the straw-carrier a shaking motion 
which shall serve to loosen up the straw and 
55 
65 
permit the detached grain to fallout, and which 
shall also cause the straw to move toward the 
delivery end of the carrier as rapidly as is con 
sistent with a thorough accomplishment of the 
above-stated object. For this purpose the car 
rier has been hung or mounted upon cranks; 
but it is found in actual use that in order to 
secure the necessary vertical movement of the 
carrier by this means it is necessary to give so 
great a throw thereto in the direction of its 
length that the straw is discharged before the 
grain is thoroughly shaken out of it. Refer 
ring now to the drawings, these and other fea 
tures of construction will be more fully ex 
plained. 
A represents the framing of the machine, of 
substantially the ordinary form and construc 
tion, and BC the thrashing-cylinders, working 
in conjunction with adjustable concaves D and 
E, pivoted at their rear sides, and resting at 
their forward sides upon eccentrics a, carried 
by cross-shafts b, furnished with levers c, which 
move over and lock fast to segments d, to hold 
the concaves at any desired adjustment. 
Between the concaves D and E is a station 
ary slatted section, e, over which the straw 
passes from one concave to the other, and 
through which the detached grain may fall to 
the carrier below, thus preventing the accu 
mulation of grain between the concaves. In 
passing successively under the two cylinders 
the grain is completely detached from the 
straw, and a large proportion of the detached 
grain is delivered through the perforated or 
grated concaves and the intervening grated 
section, the second cylinder serving in a great 
measure to shake out the loose grain, thus 
leaving a comparatively small quantity to be 
subsequently shaken from the straw by the 
straw-carrier. 
Above each cylinder, and in front of the 
same, are dust-boards f and g, preferably ad 
justable, which serve to prevent the dust from 
being blown out into the face of the man op 
erating the machine. The second cylinder also 
tends to overcome the blowing outward of the 
dust by creating a downward draft through 95 
the slatted section between the concaves, and 
go 
75 
25 
35 
45 
2 
253, s?4 
thus arresting the dust which otherwise would 
follow around the cylinder B and be thrown 
over its top. The second cylinder, C, is formed 
with the usual central shaft or arbor, carrying 
heads at its ends, and the teeth are secured to 
longitudinal bars a', which are retained in 
place by annular bands or rings b'. In order 
that the cylinder may present a smooth exte: 
rior, and thus afford but little resistance to the 
wind, the bars at are grooved or beveled to re 
ceive curved plates c', of sheet metal, which 
are of proper width to fill the space between 
the bars and to bear against the ring, in which 
position they are held by bolts passing through 
the ring and into the head, as shown in Fig. 5. 
This arrangement also serves to prevent the 
straw from winding in upon the cylinder-shaft, 
and overcomes in a measure the fan action of 
the cylinder. 
In rear of the second cylinder, C, there is lo 
cated a horizontal rotary beater, F, beneath 
which the straw passes from said cylinders to 
the straw-carrier G, and by which the straw is 
straightened out and thrown upon the carrier. 
The straw-carrier G consists of a trans 
versely-slatted bed or platform, suspended by 
four arms or levers, h, two at or near each end, 
on opposite sides, which arms are so actuated 
as to give to the platform a motion upward 
and forward, downward, and backward, the 
upward and downward movement consider. 
ably exceeding the forward and backward 
movement. To produce this action the arms 
or levers l are attached to cranks or eccen 
trics of cross-shafts i, journaled in boxes in 
the upper part of the framing of the machine, 
and are also arranged to swing upon a shift 
ing fulcrum at a point between their ends. 
This may be accomplished in either of two 
ways, which are to a certain extent equiva 
lents of each other, but one of which possesses 
advantages not afforded by the other. These 
two plans are, first, pivoting the arms or levers 
h each to a swinging arm or bar, k, pivoted at 
one end to the framing, as shown in Fig.1; sec 
ondly, slotting the arms or leversh and caus 
ing them to rise, fall, and swing about a fixed 
stud or pin, l, as shown in Fig. 4. The first 
mentioned plan possesses all the advantages 
of action found iu the second, yet is perhaps 
a trifle more expensive, though it is not merely 
the equivalent of the second form, but is a de 
cided improvement, thereon, since by adjust 
ing the pivot in up or down, for which purpose 
the arms hand post of frame A are furnished 
with series of holes, the horizontal throw of 
the platform or carrier may be regulated or 
varied at will, the throw of the operating 
cranks, and consequently the rise and fall of 
the platform or carrier, remaining unchanged. 
The peculiar action of the straw carrier or 
platform is of great importance, as it violently 
shakes or agitates the Straw without too rap 
idly carrying it from the machine, and thus 
effectually shakes out the loose grain. 
The crank-shaftsjare eachformed with three 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
cranks-two at opposite sides of the machine, 
to carry the arms or levers l, and the third 
one, n, at right angles, or substantially so, to 
the first two, as shown. 
One crank, i, of each shaft is connected by 
a pitman, 0, with the corresponding crank of 
the other shaft, and the cranks 
of the two 
shafts are similarly connected by a pitman g, 
to cause the shafts to rotate in unison, and in 
order to prevent one shaft from merely rock 
ing while the other rotates. . 
The shafts are provided with balance-wheels 
', weighted on the side opposite the cranksi, 
in order to counteract the descent of the plat 
form or carrier G, and to cause an even and 
regular motion of the parts of the machine. 
The grain which falls through the concaves 
and the intermediate slatted section, and that 
which is shaken from the straw and falls 
through the straw-carrier, is received upon a 
platform beneath an open-slatted rake, which 
travels about drums or pulleys s and delivers 
the grain to the shaking-shoe H, where it is 
properly screened and separated, during which 
operation it is subjected to the action of the 
fan I. 
The screens may be varied accordin g to the 
quality or kind of grain operated on, and the 
shoe has imparted to it a motion similar to 
that of the straw-carrier. For this purpose 
the forward or receiving end of the shoe is sus 
pended by links t, while its rear end is carried 
by arms or levers at, attached at their upper 
ends to crank-wheels v, and each slotted about 
its middle to play about a fixed stud, l, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 3, and in connection with 
the straw-carrier in Fig. 4. The studs are ad 
justable to vary the throw of levers u. This 
motion causes the grain to be agitated and to 
travel over or fall through the sieves or screens. 
It also causes the straw or other matters which 
pass off at the tail of the upper screen to travel 
over the hinged rake at to the extension a of 
the shoe, which contains a series of transverse 
ribs or corrugations, as shown, by which the 
matters delivered thereon are prevented from 
moving back again toward the screens, but 
are caused to move to the end of said exten. 
sion, whence they fall upon the stacker belt or 
apron. 
Beneath the screen of the shaking-shoe is a 
chute-board, y, which delivers the grain falling 
through the screens to a spout or trough, &, 
containing a spiral conveyer, 2'. At the lower 
and rear side of the shoe is a tailings-trough, 
J, carried at one end by an elbow-lever, K, 
pivoted to the framing of the machine at the 
junction of the two arms, which arms are con 
nected, one by a link, L, to the crank-pin of 
wheel , and the other to one end of the tail 
ings-trough. The delivery end of said trough 
is supported upon an upright rocking stand 
ard or leg, M, and discharges into an elevator. 
trunk in the ordinary manner. The bottom of 
the trough is stepped or corrugated, as shown 
in Fig. 3, so that the grain thrown toward the 
I5. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
65 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
1.5 
O 
I IS 
I 25 
S 
 
258, S74. 
3 
O 
- 
delivery end of the trough while the latter 
moves forward is prevented from moving back 
as the trough returns. 
Such parts as are not specifically explained 
may be of ordinary construction. 
If desired, the arrangement of levers shown 
in Fig. 1 for operating the straw - carrier may 
also be employed for imparting motion to the 
shoe. 
The shafts of the cylinders BC are furnished 
respectively with pinions d'e', both of which 
receive motion in the same direction from a 
gear-wheel, f', on the main driving-shaft g'. 
Power may be applied to the machine from 
any convenient prime motor by wire rope, 
chain, belt, or tumbling-rod, though in prac 
tice we prefer to employ wire rope, in which 
case the shaft g' is furnished at one end with 
a V-grooved band-wheel, l'. 
The tailings-elevator is driven by a belt from 
a pulley on the shaft of cylinder B, and the 
grain-conveyer is driven from another pulley 
on the opposite elid of the same shaft by a belt. 
The rotary beater F is driven by a belt from a 
pulley on the shaft of cylinder C, and the for 
Ward counterbalanced wheel of the straw 
carrier mechanism is driven by a belt from a 
pulley at the opposite end of this shaft. The 
fan I is driven by a belt from a pulley on the 
main shaft g', and the conveyer 2' is driven by 
a belt from a pulley on the fan-shaft, 
The rear counterbalanced wheel is belted 
to a pulley on the rear drum-shaft of the grain 
conveyer. 
It is apparent that the straw-carrier may be 
located above the arms or levers h and the 
crank-shafts below the same. 
The stud may be provided with an anti 
friction ferrule or collar. 
We are aware that a transverse grain trough 
or spout at the rear end or side of a shaking 
shoe has been provided with a series of steps 
or abutments to prevent the backward move 
ment of the grain therein; but we are not 
aware that a shaking-shoe has ever before been 
provided with a ribbed and imperforate exten 
sion such as we have shown and described." 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim is- 
- 
1. In a thrashing-machine, the combination 
of two thrashing-cylinders, one arranged to de 
liver the straw directly to the other, concaves 
located beneath the respective cylinders, and 
an intermediate slatted section, substantially 
as described. 
2. In combination with the cylinders BC, 
concaves D. E., the dust-board g, located be 
tween them and serving to direct the dust 
downward, and the slatted section between the 
respective concaves, substantially as shown 
and described. 
3. In a thrashing-machine, the combination 
of the two thrashing-cylinders BC, arranged, 
as described, to act conjointly upon the grain, 
and independently-adjustable concaves DE, 
for the respective cylinders, substantially as 
shown and described. 
4. In combination with the cylinders BC, 
the independently-adjustable concaves DE 
and the wind-boardsfand g, all combined and 
operating as set forth. 
5. In a thrashing-machine, the combination 
of revolving cranks or eccentrics, a straw-car 
rier, sustaining and operating arms or levers 
connected at one end to the carrier and at the 
opposite end to said revolving cranks or eccen 
trics, said arms having a shifting fulcrum at a 
point between the two points of attachment, 
and the parts being combined and operating 
substantially as described. 
6. In combination with the straw.carrier, sus 
taining-arms jointed thereto, revolving cranks 
carrying said arms, and pivoted arms jointed 
at one end to the Sustaining-arms at a point 
between the ends of the latter, and pivoted at 
the opposite end. 
7. In combination with a straw carrier or 
platform and cranks i, arms li, provided with 
perforations, connected at their opposite ends 
with the cranks i and the straw - carrier, re 
spectively, and the arms lic, jointed to the arms 
h, and pivoted to the framing of the machine, 
8. The combination, in a thrasher, of a straw 
carrier or platform, G, sustaining and operat 
ing arms h, swinging arms lic, jointed to arms 
h, shafts j, provided with cranks i and n, and 
the pitmen 0 and q, all arranged and operat 
ing as set forth. . 
9. In combination with the armsh, connected 
with cranks at one end, the arms k, adapted 
and arranged to be adjusted substantially as 
shown and described. 
10. In combination with a screening-shoe, a 
revolving crank or eccentric, a lever connected 
at one end with said revolving crank or eccen 
tric and at the opposite end with the shoe, and 
arranged to oscillate and move endwise upon 
its fulcrum, whereby an elliptical motion in a 
vertical plane is produced. 
11. In combination with the shaking-shoe 
of a thrashing-machine, the slotted levers at 
crank-wheels , and studs or pins l, located 
between the crank-wheels all the shoe, as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
12. In combination with the straw ... carrier 
G, the arms h and k, cranks i and it, and pit 
men 0 and q, the weighted wheels ', applied 
to the crank-shafts as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
13. A shaking-shoe provided in rear of the 
tailings-trough with a corrugated or ribbed ex 
tension, closed on its lower side to prevent the 
return of matters to the screens or tailings 
trough. 
14. In a thrashing-machine, the combination 
of a tailings-trough, an upright pivoted prop 
or support at one end thereof, and an elbow 
lever connected with the opposite end and with 
a rotating crank, substantially as shown, 
15. The herein-described thrashing and sepa 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
9o 
OC 
IOS 
I IO 
IIS 
I 25 
65 
 
4. 
253, S74 
rating machine, consisting of the cylinders B 
C and concaves DE, beater F, straw-carrier 
G, sustaining and operating arms h, cranksi, 
carrier-belt, screening-shoe H, and fan I, all 
combined and operating as set forth. 
16. In a thrashing-machine, the combination, 
with a vertically - moving straw ... carrier and 
screening devices, of a crank or eccentric, and 
one or more slotted arms connected at one end 
with the crank or eccentric and at the other 
with the screening devices, and arranged to 
move about a fixed stud extending through its 
slot. 
17. In combination with a screening device, 
a crank or eccentric, and a slotted lever con 
O 
IS 
nected positively at one end with said crank 
or eccentric and at the other end with the 
screening device, a pin or stud extending 
through the slot and adapted to be adjusted 
therein and to be secured rigidly in its adjust 
ed position, substantially as set forth, whereby 
an elliptical movement of varying scope may 
be imparted to the end of the lever connected 
with the screening devices. 
JOEN I. MACDONALD. 
GEORGE E. SLY. 
Witnesses: 
TIEODORE WELLAND, 
RODERICK O'DOWD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US253974.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 253,974, 
 
A. H. CAMIPBELL. 
MILLING MACHINE. 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 21, 1882. 
NVENTOR 
A. H. CAMPBELL, 
BYaa. f3eade-fc. 
ATTYS 
(No Model.) 
No. 253,974, 
s 
A. H. CAMPBELL. 
MILLING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 21, 1882. 
WITNESSES: 
6.2% w 
M 2G tr-, 
y 
A. H oRMEEL 
BY aff u?, /34 elect. & 
ATTY S. 
m 
 
(No Model 
. 
s 
No. 253,974, 
w 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
A. H. CAMPBELL. 
MILLING MACHINE. 
Patented Feb. 21, 1882, 
WITNESSES: 
662- 
2)-6- 
NVENTOR 
A. H. CAMPEELL, 
BY/?a/, /3eade-Y G. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. H. CAMPBELL, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, 
Milling-MACHINE. 
sPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,974, dated February 21, 1882. 
Application filed October 8, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER. H. CAMP 
BELL, of Hartford, county of Hartford, and 
State of Connecticut, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Milling-Machines; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full and exact description of the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
This invention is specially designed for the 
purpose of repairing corroded steam-chest 
seats; and it has for its novelty certain specific 
combinations, hereinafter fully described, by 
means of which it is adapted to perform prop 
erly and advantageously its special work. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents an end 
elevation of the improved machine; Fig. 2, a 
similar view with certain parts in section; 
Figs, 3, 4, and 5, various views of the gearing 
by means of which revolution is given to the 
feed-screw for moving in a longitudinal direc 
tion the frame carrying the milling-tool; Fig. 
6, views of the hand-wheel by means of which 
the mainshaftis revolved; Fig. 7, a front eleva 
tion of the improved machine; Fig. 8, a plan 
view, illustrating the capacity of the frame 
work for lateral adjustability; and Fig. 9, a 
perspective view, illustrating the practical ap 
plication of the machine. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
my improved machine and properly use the 
same, I will proceed to describe fully its con 
struction and the manner of its operation. 
A, Fig. 9, represents the steam-chest seat, 
having the usual openings, a, for holding the 
screws which secure the chest in place. 
a'a', Figs. 1, 2, and 9, represent screw. 
standards, four in number, which are adapted, 
by means of the threads and nuts at their lower 
ends, to be strongly secured to the chest-seat 
plate, as shown. 
a a represent nuts by means of which the 
slotted arms B of the frame-work hereinafter 
described are secured at any desired height 
above the chest-seat plate, as shown. These 
arms B B, before referred to, are provided 
with the long slots b b, Fig. 8, adapted to per 
mit the lateral adjustment of the screw-stand 
ards a when such adjustment is necessary. 
b' represents an enlargement of the arm b, 
55 
d', Fig. 9, represents a bevel-gear keyed to 7o 
which is provided with a dovetailed recess, b, 
as shown. 
C represents the main beam of the frame 
work, having a projection, c, corresponding to 
the recess b of the arms b, as shown. By 
means of this construction the main beam is 
strongly secured to the supporting-arms with 
out interfering with the capacity of the latter 
for adjustment in a longitudinal direction. 
c' c', Figs. 7 and 9, represent arms or stand 
ards rising from the beam C, which are pro 
vided with proper bearings for supporting the 
main shaft D, as shown. 
drepresents a band-wheel by means of which 
the main shaft is revolved, and d a pinion by 65 
means of which movement is communicated 
from the main shaft to the gearing which act 
uates the feed-screw for moving the frame of 
the milling-tool in a longitudinal direction. 
the main shaft in such manner as to move 
freely thereon in a longitudinal direction while 
revolving rigidly with it. 
E represents, the frame-work carrying the 
milling-tool, which is provided upon one side 7 
5 
with the lateral extension e, having a bearing, 
e', for the gear d, Fig. 9, upon the main shaft, 
and a bearing, e, Fig. 1, for the shaft of the 
bevel-gears Ff, and upon the other side with 
lateral extensions ee e for supporting the 
shaft of the milling-tool and the vertical screw 
for feeding the same. 
e, Figs. 1, 2, and 7, represents a main verti. 
cal portion, having a dovetailed recess, by 
means of which it is strongly secured to a cor 
responding projection upon the main beam in 
such manner as to move freely thereon in a 
longitudinal direction. 
e', Fig. 2, represents a threaded ear or sleeve, 
by means of which the frame E is united to 
the feed-screw, hereinafter referred to. 
F, Fig. 1, represents a bevel-gear engaging 
with the bevel-gear dupon the main shaft D, 
the shaft of which is supported in the bearing 
0', as shown. 
frepresents also a bevel-gear on the other 
end of this shaft, which engages with a corre 
sponding gear upon the shaft of the milling 
tool, as shown in Fig.1. 
. 
90 
95 
G, Fig.1, represents a feed-screw, supported Ioo 
o 
25 
35 
SO 
 
2 
258,924 
55 
75 
frame E, carrying the milling-tool shaft, will 
be moved in the direction of the full arrow, 
Fig. 7, because the movement of the main shaft 
will be communicated through the pinion to 
the shaft of the feed-screw. When the handle 
i is in the position shown in Fig. 5 the frame 
E will be moved in the direction of the dotted 
arrow, Fig. 7, because the movement of the 
main shaft will be communicated through the 
pinions to the shaft of the feed-screw. 
Some of the advantages of the described 
construction are as follows: The steam-chest 
seat, when corroded by the action of the heat 
upon the tallow, may be readily repaired with 
out the expenditure of the time and labor re 
quired when the groove is cut with a chisel. 
The mechanism is simple in its construction, 
and yet very effective in action. Its capacity 
for adjustment adapts it for ready attachment 
to any steam-chest seat. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the main beam C, 
the slotted arms B B and the independent 
threaded standards a? a', the construction be 
ing such that adjustment to chests of different 
sizes may be made either in a Vertical, lateral, 
or longitudinal direction, according to the ne 
cessities of the case. 
2. In combination with the beam C, having 
the projection c, the slotted arms BB, having 
a recess corresponding to said projection, as 
described, 
3. In combination with the beam C and the 
mechanism, substantially as described, for se 
curing the beam to any desired base, the tool 
carrier E and the feed-shaft J, for actuating 
the same. 
4. The milling-macline described, lavin 
the standards a? a, the slotted arms B B, the 
main beam C, the main shaft D, with gearing 
d, the tool-carrier E, with gearing, and the 
feed-shaft J, as described. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
29th day of August, 1881. 
A. H. CAMPBELL. 
g 99 
95 
Witnesses: 
E. E. MARWIN, 
W. L. FAY, 
by the threaded extension e' of the frame E, 
which is provided at its upper end with the 
usual handle for revolving the same and at its 
lower end with a recess adapted to receive a 
corresponding projecting portion upon the up 
per end of the shaft H, as shown. By means 
of this construction the shaft is properly sup 
ported without interfering with its freedom of 
revolution. This shaft EI is further held with 
out interference with its freedom of revolution 
or with its movementin a vertical direction by 
the extensions e'e' of the frame E, as shown. 
h, Figs, 1 and 7, represents any suitable mill 
ing-tool, which is properly secured to the lower 
end of the shaft. 
The mechanism before described is adapted 
to give the milling-tool its necessary revolu 
tion and also movement in a vertical direction. 
The mechanism for giving the milling-tool 
movement in a longitudinal direction will now 
be described. 
I, Fig. 5, represents a sleeve loose upon the 
main shaft, which is provided with arms hav 
ing bearings for the pinions i i", and with a 
handle, i, as shown. 
J represents alongitudinal screw-shaft, held 
in proper bearings in the frame D, which is 
provided at one end with the gear-wheel i, as 
shown, This gear-wheeli engages with the 
pinion d upon the main shaft, and also with 
the pinion it, as shown. The relation of the 
pinions i it to the gear-wheel j is such that 
either one of them may be thrown into gear 
with it, or both may be disengaged from it by 
the proper movement of the lever, 
The operation is substantially as follows: 
The machine may be properly secured to the 
steam-chest plate, the proper adjustment hav 
ing been made, by means of the threaded stand 
ards a? af. The milling-tool then, when lo 
cated at the proper point, 1may be given rev 
olution by revolving the main shaft, its verti. 
cal position being determined by the position 
of the vertical feed-screw in the manner Well 
understood. When the handle is in the posi 
tion shown in Fig. 3 the milling-tool will have 
no movement in a longitudinal direction, be 
cause both of the pinions i and it are disengaged 
from the pinion of the feed-screw. When the 
handle iis in the position shown in Fig. 4, the 
O 
fS 
3O 
40 
AS 
So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254074.txt	K. WALKER, 
DRESS CUTTING AND FITTING MOLD. 
Patented Feb. 21, 1882, 
(No Model.) 
No. 254,074, 
 
Witnesses. 
7 
w 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographe 
r. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
KATE WALKER, OF INDIAN APOLIS, INDIAN A. 
DRESS CUTTING AND FITTING Mold. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,074, dated February 21, 1882, 
Application filed November 14, 1881. (No model.) 
25 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, KATE WALKER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Indian. 
apolis, in the county of Marion and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Molds for Cutting and Fitting 
Dresses; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to the letters or figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to a mode of cutting 
out dresses for ladies from a mold so construct 
ed that it can be made to fit upon and conform 
to the shape or form of the person being fitted; 
and it consists in the formation or construc 
tion of such mold and means of fitting it to the 
form of the person, as will be fully hereinafter 
described. 
It has been customary heretofore to fit 
dresses to ladies by the use of a mold applied 
to the person and afterward removed to serve 
as a guide for forming the dress, such a device 
being shown in a patent, No. 56,892, to S.O. 
Brigham, of August 7, 1866, and in one, num 
bered 207,880, to H. Lingen, of September 10, 
1878, and also in No. 109,076, to G.P. Sweezy, of 
November 8, 1870; but mine differs essentially 
from these in that it is capable of being made 
to more perfectly fit the person. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a front 
view of the mold, and Fig.2 a back view of the 
Sale. 
A represents the clothor foundation of which 
the mold is formed. 
A represents the front lap-seam where the 
edges of the foundation overlap, so that the 
same mold may be used and adjusted upon per 
sons having different forms and sizes of busts. 
at a ct at are slits cut into the front of the foun 
dation A, from the bottom of the mold upward, 
45 not in straight or parallel lines, but in such di 
rection on curved lines as will give the form 
upon which the mold is applied. These slits 
are called darts, and their edges are bound 
or hemmed at af, and beyond such binding or 
hems, on both sides of the slits, are a series of 
lacing-eyelets, a', in which are placed lacing 
cords af', as seen in Figs. 1 and 2. 
So 
35 
- 
O 
IS 
 
b b b are a series of slits severing the foun 
dation-cloth in curved lines from the arm-holes 
B to the bottom of the mold, their edges or 55 
margins being bound or hemmed, as at l', and 
outside of the binding or hems are a series of 
lacing-eyelets, l', with the lacing-cords b', the 
same as described for the slitsa. 
C is a straight slit on the back of the mold, 
and extends from the neck to the bottom there 
of, bound or hemmed on its edges, as at c, and 
having the lacing-eyelets c' and lacing-cords 
c', the same as slits at and b. 
D D are the shoulder-slits, one over each 
shoulder, and extend from the neck-opening B 
to the arm-holes B. These slits are bound or . 
hemmed, and on each side have the lacing-eye 
lets d' and the lacing-cords d", the same as the 
other slits described. 
The mold is furnished with the lacing-cords 
in position in the eyelets and placed upon the 
person to be fitted. The cords are then drawn 
alike taut in opposite slits until the mold is 
made to tightly fit the person over the worn 75 
dress, when they are secured at the bottom of 
the slits, and the front part of the mold brought 
to a proper size to fit the bust easily, and se 
cured so that the size and form are known. The 
lacings on the shoulders also draw the mold 
at the shoulders untila perfect fitishad. When 
this is all accomplished, so as to know exactly 
where the size and form of the person leave 
the edges of the slits apart, and so that the ex 
act position can be had when the mold is off 
the person, it is removed by unlacing the shoul 
der-slit on left side of mold D and one of the 
dart-slitsa. After the mold has been removed, 
as above described, it is to be spread upon the 
material or cloth to be cut, and the spaces be 9o 
tween the darts of the molds are to be marked 
or traced-the unlaced spaces to have margins 
for the seams about equal to the other spaces 
after which the mold is removed and the ma 
terial or cloth cut to the form indicated. The 
spaces must be of sufficient width to allow the 
required seams to be made in uniting the parts 
of the cloth. The arm and neck holes are to 
be marked or traced in the same manner as the 
other parts. In this manner a perfectly-fitting 
dress-waist can be cut without taking measures 
of the person other than that indicated by the 
mold and without trying on the dress after the 
parts have been united by basting or otherwise. 
95 
IOO 
2 
254,074 
Having thus described my invention, what I mold, furnished with lacing-eyelets and lacing 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, cords, and shoulder-slits D D, also provided 
with eyelets and lacing-cords, all substantially 
is- 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
A mold forfitting dresses, consisting of a foun- as and for the purposes specified. 
5 dation, A, having a front overlapping seam, A', 
E; slits, a. a. a. a, in the bottom part of the presence of two witnesses. 
mold, their edges being provided with lacing 
eyelets a', in which are placed lacing-cords a', 
curved slits l l b, also furnished with lacing- 
Io eyelets l' and lacing-cords b', a rear slit, C, 
extending from the bottom to the top of the 
KATE WALKER, 
Witnesses: 
ISAACL, BLOOMER, 
JOHN V. MARTIN. 
I5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254174.txt	(No Model.) 
W. W. STE WAR.T. 
FOUNTAIN PEN. 
No. 254174, 
Patented Feb. 28, 1882, . 
 
A2uevador: 
7% afzed a 2-2 
A. 
532. 
N. PEERS. photolithographer. Washington. D. c. 
 
- 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. STEWART, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FOUNTAIN, PEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,174, dated February 28, 1882. 
Application filed March 16, 1881. (No model.) 
IS 
. 
. 
25 
2O 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM WASHINGTON 
STEWART, of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented new and 
5 useful Improvements in Fountain-Pens; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full 
and accurate description of the same. 
This invention relates to that class of fount 
ain-holders which are adapted to use common. 
Io or split-nib pens, and the object of it is to au 
tomatically regulate and control the flow of 
ink from the reservoir, while at the same time 
a bath or supply of ink is maintained in con 
tact with the pen, from which the immediate 
Supply is drawn in the act of writing. . 
. 
The basis of this improvement is the gutter 
or bath, which is placed directly below the 
pen to receive ink from the reservoir and de 
liver it to the pen. 
Heretofore the supply or ink flow from the 
reservoir has been regulated by a cut-off or 
stop-cock, which was controlled at will by the 
user. For the non-automatic stop Isubstitute. 
automatic devices. The use of my automatic 
devices also imparts other functions of which 
the non-automatic holder was not capable. 
That others may fully understand my im 
provement, I will more particularly describe 
it, having reference to the accompanying draw 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of my pen 
holder, showing the pen flexed in the act of 
Writing. Fig. 2 is a similar section of the lower 
end enlarged, showing the pen at rest. 
A is the gutter under the pen P. It is a 
vessel shaped like the half of a boat, with the 
proW or pointed end outward, and extending 
nearly to the point of the pen. At its base 
the gutter A is joined to the end section, Q, 
4o which in turn is screwed into the end of the 
reservoir or barrel I. The open side of the 
gutter A is toward the pen. 
X is a slit or seat to receive and hold the 
base of the pen. 
45 C is the supply-tube, through which ink de 
scends from the reservoir to the gutter A. 
R is a rod, which passes lengthwise through 
the tube C, and carries at the outer end of said 
tube a valve orgate, D, which closes said tube 
5o When pressed upward against its open end. 
3o ings, wherein 
35 
s 
7 
The rodR, outside the gate D, is bent upward, 
and formed so as to constitute a light or deli 
cate spring, F, which rests and presses against 
the nibs of the pen. The extremity of the 
spring F is secured in a little hole or cavity, 
B, at the extremity or point of the gutter A, 
and the spring F is adjusted to bear against 
the pen, so as to close the gate D when the 
nibs of the pen are at rest in their normal po 
sition; but when in use the nibs are caused to 6 
bend backward, the spring curves in the same 
direction and opens the gate, so that ink is 
permitted to descend into the gutter during 
the time when it is being delivered to the pa 
per. At the completion of the downstroke and 6 
during the upstrokes, when the nibs of the pen. 
are together and in their normal position, the 
consequent depression of the spring F causes 
the gate D to close and arrest the outflow of 
ink. 
The rod Rhas near its upper end within the 
barrel a shoulder or cross-pin, f, to engage 
with a tube or rod, L, which passes up through 
the head J, where it is provided with a screw 
thread, N, so that by turning said head said 7 
rod may be moved longitudinally and the gate 
D caused to open by pushing the rod R. To 
facilitate this movement the head J is provided 
with a knurl for the easy grasp of the fingers. 
The head J may be inserted in the end of the 8 
barrel with merely a ground or friction joint, 
or it may be fitted with a screw, in which case 
said screw-thread and the screw N will be dif 
ferential as to each other, so that the turning 
of the head J backward will force the rod L. 8 
forward. 
M is a packing of soft rubber to prevent the 
ink from gaining access to the screw N. 
KK are slots in the barrel I to make the 
same compressible, and at that point said bar- 9 
relis provided with flexible lining i, of soft rub 
ber. These slots are not essential, but have 
a utility which will be explained. 
When the pen is in use bubbles of air enter 
the reservoir as the ink flows out, and to pre- 9 
vent these bubbles from accumulating and ob 
structing the flow I insert a small open capil 
lary tube formed by a coil, S, of fine non-cor 
rodible wire, which will serve to collect and 
conduct the little bubbles rapidly away from I 
- 
a-re-r 
 
 
2 : 
254,174 
: 
so 
the vicinity of the supply-pipe C; and said coil against the inner side of the nibs of the pen, 35 
may be protected within the rod L, which may as set forth. 
be made tubular for the purpose. 
In practice I prefer to make the rod R. of 
gold wire, and constitute the spring F by beat 
ing the same out flat at part p. 
In using this pen, at the commencement the 
gutter may be charged with ink by opening 
the gate D with the rod L, as described, and 
the ink will thus descend to the gutter. This 
movement of the link may be facilitated by 
Squeezing the barrel at its slotted part. When 
the gutter has been charged the rod L is with 
drawn, and while writing the supply of ink will 
be automatically providedly, the movement 
of the gate.D., controlled by the pen, as set 
forth. After use the gate D is again opened 
by the rod L, and the pen being held with the 
point upward the barrel is gently squeezed to 
expel a part of its inclosed air, and upon re 
laxing the pressure the ink in the gutters is 
drawn again into the reservoir. 
G is a jacket which surrounds and protects 
the base of the pen, and His the tip or remova 
ble cover fitted to the end of the jacket to cover 
and protect the point of the pen while not in 
Se. 
Having described my improvement, what I 
claim as new is 
1. The gutters A and supply-tube C, com 
bined with the valve D and spring F, one end 
whereof is connected to said valve and the 
other end attached to the point of said gut 
ter, and the middle portion adjusted to bear 
2. The supply-tube Cofa fountain pen-holder, 
with a valve, D, and spring F, combined with 
a rod, R, extending from said valve up through 
said supply-tube, and a tube or rod, within the 
reservoir, whereby said valve may be opened 
independently of the pen, as set forth. 
3. A supply tube or port provided with a 
reciprocating valve opening outward, and kept 
closed by pressure from the pen, and means, 45 
substantially such as described, whereby said 
valve may be opened at will, combined with 
an ink reservoir or barrel, provided with walls 
made elastic by slots K, or otherwise, as set 
forth. 
4. In a fountain-holder, a reservoir and a 
supply-tube, C, combined with an open capil 
lary tube, constituted by a coil, S, of fine non 
corrodible wire, extending from said supply 
tube upward into the reservoir, to conduct 55 
away the little air-bubbles without impeding 
the flow of ink. 
5. In a fountain pen-holder, a reservoir and 
a supply tube or port, C, whereby ink may 
pass from the reservoir to the pen, combined 
with an open capillary tube, constituted by a 
coil of fine non-corrodible wire, extending up 
ward from said supply-tube, and a tubular rod, 
L to inclose and protect said coil, as set forth. 
WILLIAM W. STE WAR.T. 
Witnesses: 
D. A. SAYRE, 
W. WOHLMACHER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254274.txt	A. 
S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH P. CARD OF ST. LOUIS, MISS O U R I. 
PRESERVING WOOD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,274, dated February 28, 1882. 
Application filed June 15, 1881. (No specimens.) 
o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JosePH. P. CARD, of St. 
Louis, Missouri, have made a new and useful 
Improvement in Preserving Wood, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription. 
Wood when impregnated with a soluble an 
tiseptic, such as chloride of zinc, while remain 
ing sound at the center, is apt to decay at and 
near the surface. Railway-ties, for instance, 
which have been treated with chloride of zinc, 
and then laid in a trackway, decay at and near, 
and sometimes to a depth much beneath, the 
surface where they come in contact with the 
ground. On the other hand, wood treated with 
oil remains sound even to the surface. The oil 
treatment, however, is much more expensive 
than the soluble antiseptic, and to that extent 
undesirable. 
Attempts have been made to combine the 
advantages of the two treatments by applying 
the soluble antiseptic to the interior of the 
wood and the oil to the outside of the wood. 
For instance, wood has been inclosed from the 
Outer air in a vessel, and a soluble antiseptic 
introduced into the wood. Then, without re 
lieving the pressure upon it, the wood has been 
subjected to tar orbituminous oil. The effect, 
so far as the oil is concerned, is to confine its 
application practically to the outside of the 
Wood. It may enter endwise into the pores 
somewhat, but so far as the lateral surfaces of 
the wood are concerned the application is vir. 
tually nothing more than painting or coating 
them with oil, and insufficient for the preserva 
tion of wood. 
To provide an improved mode of preserving 
wood when both a soluble antiseptic and an 
oil treatment are employed, and one by which 
the entire interior of the wood can be impreg 
nated with a soluble antiseptic or mineral salt, 
and in conjunction therewith the entire outer 
portion from end to end of the various pieces, 
and to beneath the surfaces to a depth vary 
ing from, say, an eighth or tenth of an inch 
inward to, but not into, the central portion of 
the wood, especially in such forms of wood as 
railway ties, longtimbers, and piles, can be 
filled with oil, and one by which the introduc 
tion of the oil into the wood to beneath the 
lateral surfaces can be controlled and directed 
to the desired depth, is the aim of the present 
improvement, which consists substantially as 
follows: First, in impregnating the entire wood 
with a soluble antiseptic, then removing the 
moisture from the entire outer portion of the 
wood to beneath the surfaces, (lateral as well 
as end,) to a depth varying from about an 
eighth or tenth of an inch inward to, but not 
into, the central portion of the wood, to effect 
which removal the wood must meanwhile be 
relieved from or be free of any pressure which 
operates to retain the moisture within the 
wood, and then introducing the oil or other 
moisture-repellent into and throughout such 
outer portion of the Wood from whence the 
moisture has been removed. 
Zinc chloride is the antiseptic preferably 
used, and the oil is one that vaporizes above 
the boiling-point of water, and preferably creo 
sote dead-oil. 
The wood, either with or without prelimi 
nary steaming, is treated in the usual manner 
with the soluble antiseptic, taking, by weight, 
about two parts of chloride of zinc to ninety 
eight parts of water. After this solution has 
been injected into the wood-and the more thor 
oughly it is injected the better the result-the 
moisture is expelled from or got out of the 
entire outer portion of the wood above de 
scribed, during which stage of the operation 
the wood must be free of any pressure, hydro 
static or gaseous, which would prevent the 
moisture from leaving said outer portion of the 
wood, and for this purpose the preferable prac 
tice is to open the vessel in which the wood is. 
being treated to the open air. The removal 
of the moisture is hastened by the application 
of heat to the wood. The oil is then applied 
to the wood, preferably in a heated state, the 
preferable degree ofheatbeing 270Fahrenheit. 
The heat of the oil also serves to expel the 
moisture from beneath the surface of the wood, 
especially from beneath the lateral surfaces, 
for in practice the heat passes transversely into 
the wood, heating the wood all along between 
its ends, and between the ends of the pores, to 
beneath the surface, and driving the moisture 
out therefrom the entire length of the Wood, 
and, according to the duration of the operation, 
to any desired depth beneath the lateral sur 
faces. The heat passes transversely through 
O 
IS 
25 
30 
45 
So 
55 
65 
85 
95 
IOO 
2 
254,274 
S 
O 
the pores into the wood, but the moisture is 
expelled longitudinally through the pores to 
the outer ends thereof, and thus out of the 
wood. The oil then can and does enter beneath 
the entire surface of the wood and into and 
throughout the entire outer portion of the wood 
from which the moisture has been expelled. 
In practice I do not need to heat the wood 
between the introducing of the soluble anti 
septic and the subsequent application of the 
oil. The oil is applied hot, as stated, and suf. 
ficiently so to vaporize the moisture within the 
wood; but while the moisture is being thus 
vaporized the wood must be free of any press 
ure which would prevent the moisture from 
leaving the wood. After the moisture is re 
moved the usual hydrostatic pressure is pro 
duced within the vessel, and the oil forced into 
the wood. In place of employing hydrostatic 
pressure in the final introduction of the oil into 
the wood, the oil may be introduced therein 
by means of a vacuum formed within the wood. 
I claim 
25 
35 
1. The herein-described mode of preserving 
wood, which consists in impregnating the wood. 
with a solution of a mineral salt or a soluble 
antiseptic, then removing the moisture from 
the entire outer portion of the wood to beneath 
the surfaces, (lateral and end thereof,) the wood 
meanwhile being free of any pressure operat 
ing to retain the moisture in such outer por 
tion, and then introducing the oil or other 
moisture-repellent into and throughout such 
outer portion, substantially as described. 
2. Wood impregnated throughout with a min 
eral salt or soluble antiseptic, and its entire 
outer portion, including its lateral as well as 
end surfaces, and to beneath such surfaces to 
a depth varying from about an eighth or tenth 
of an inch inward to, but not into, the central 
portion of the wood, with oil or other moist 
ure-repellent. 
Witnesses: 
JOS. P. CARD. 
C. D. MooDY, 
BRANDT W. B. DIXON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254374.txt	(No Model.) 
J, PUVREZ, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FORMALTING CEREALS, 
No. 254.374, 
7 
Z27. / 
Patented Feb. 28, 1882, 
| 
, 
- 
e 
 
. 
4 e 
2 
 
 
EZEZEZA 
 
  
2ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ2ZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
4 
| 
 
 
  
 
 
: 
Z 
Z 
2 
2 
: 
a 22- 
3AZN2-N 
Z22ZZZZZZZZZZXZZZAZZ2ZZZZZZZZ2ZZZZZZ2ZZZZZZZZ%722 
7 
NVENTOR: 
1:Z 
7 WITNESSEs: 
6&zZazzzz 
/2 , i 
7 
Z 1 
Zi 
2 
Z 
2 
Z 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D.C. 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J, PUVREZ, 
APPARATUS FORMALTING CEREALS, 
No. 254.374, 
Patented Feb, 28, 1882. 
Z 
Z2 
2: 
22ZZZZZZZZZ2. 
Az4a AzzazZ3444444442 
z 
: 
z 
- zz 
 
2 
ZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ%ZZZZZZZ22ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 4 
Z 
Za 
i: 
 
WITNESSES; 
( Sara 
z= 
v 
INVENTOR; 
YZw 
BY 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
. UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIEN PUVREZ, OF LILLE, FRANCE, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELFAND NARCISSE 
PIGEON, OF NEWYORK, N. Y. 
APPARATUS FORMALTING CEREALs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,874, dated February 28, 1882. 
Application filed March 10, 1881. (No model.) Patented in France March 15, 18S0. 
O 
IS 
35 
To all vhom it may concern: 
France, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Apparatus for Malting Cereals, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relatesto certain new and 
useful improvements in apparatus for germi 
nating and drying malt, whereby the maltis 
obtained in a better state in a much shorter 
time and more economically than with the do 
vices in use at present. 
These improvements will first be described 
in connection with the drawings, and then 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figue is 
a plan view of my improved malt-chamber, 
showing the severalmodifications of the germi 
nating and drying floor. Fig. 2 is a longitudi 
nal sectional elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is 
a cross-sectional elevation of the same. Fig. 
4 is a longitudinal elevation of the refreshing 
and moistening chamber ofmy improved malt 
house, showing parts broken out to show the 
construction. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The floor of the malt-chamber A is about 
five to six inches above the ground, and is 
formed of a series of strips, B, of wood and 
erforated metal strips B, which arearranged 
alternately, as shown in Fig. 1. The advan 
tage of this alternate arrangement of wooden 
and metallic strips is that it prevents a too 
rapid distribution of heat, and prevents the 
malt from being two quickly heated. 
A ventilating-chimney, G, is located at the 
end of the ventilating-channel, and is provided 
with a small furnace for creating a draft. The 
walls D of the ventilating-channel Eare pro 
vided with apertures I, which increase in size 
from that end of the channel E provided with 
aventilating-chimney, G, toward the otherend, 
for the suction is much greaterat the end near 
the chimney, and therefore smaller apertures 
I will answer at this end. 
The steeped grainis placed upon the floor of 
themalt-chamber, abouttwelveto fifteen inches 
high, and the ventilating ordrying air passes 
through this layer of grain and through the 
slots or perforations in the floor of the malt 
chamber, and then passes through the aper 
Beitknown that I, JULIEN PUvREZ, of Lille, tures I in the ventilating-channel. E and the 
chimney G, as is indicated by the arrows. But 
it is necessary that the ventilating-air that 
passes into the malt-room shall be moist and 
fresh-that is, contain a quantity of ozone 
and for this reason one or two moistening and 
refreshing chambers, J, are arranged at the 
end of the malt-chamber opposite to the ven 
tilating-chimney G. A Water-tube, K, with 
small perforations on top, passes through the 
top of the chambers J, and through these per 
forations of the tube K'the water spouts upon 
a plate, W, directly above the tube K, Where 
by the water is atomized and converted into 
spray. From this plate, W the water runs 
down a series of strips of cloth or linen, M, sus 
pended from a frame, L. These strips of cloth 
may be replaced by linen sheets or pieces of 
cord or rope. From the lower ends of these 
cords, ropes, or sheets Mthe water drops upon 
a quantity of sponges, N, on a perforatedshelf, 
O, in the bottom of the chamber J, and from 
this shelf the water drops upon the sponges N' 
on the next lower shelf, O', and so from one 
shelfupon the other. The wateristhus spread 
upon a vast surface, and the air which enters 
the chamber J through the bottom aperture, 
P, and leaves it through the upper aperture, P, 
Will be saturated With moisture when it enters 
into the malt-house through this upper aper 
ture, P; but the air will not only have ab 
sorbedmoisture; it willalso beslightlyimpreg 
nated with ozone, and will be cooled. Cooled 
fresh air which is moistened and is ozonized 
greatly facilitates the germinating of the ce 
reals. 
The moisture-chambers Jare provided with 
vertical openings Q, extending from top to 
bottom on the front side, and these openings 
are closed by means of sliding or swinging 
shutters Q'. These openingsare provided to 
permit the quantity of sponges and the strings 
or strips M. to be regulated and keptin proper 
order. 
A portable sheet-iron stove, R, which is cov 
ered with some non-conducting material, can 
be connected with the malt-chamber for par 
tially drying the malt in the same room in 
which it is germinated. This stove Ris pro 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
45 
 
254,374 
vided with a perforated horizontal plate, S, 
some distance above the fire, to prevent sparks 
and cinders from entering into the malt-room. 
Asmaltrequires a certain quantity offresh air 
while drying, an aperture, T, is provided in the 
stove directly above the plate S, and through 
this aperture the fresh cool air enters. 
A series of plates, U, are suspended verti 
cally in the upper part of the stove R, and as 
the cold and hot air pass up between these 
plates, they will be subdivided into so many 
layers, and will be thoroughly mixed above 
these plates. The warm air from the stove R 
also enters into the malt-room on top. 
The operation in the malt-germinating cham 
ber is as follows: The steeped grain is placed 
upon the perforated or slotted floor of the malt 
house A, about twelve to fifteen inches deep. 
The air passes into the moistening-chamber 
J at P, passes into the malt-germinating cham 
berat P/through the moistened grain, through 
the apertures II into the channel. E, and up 
through the chimney. After the grain has 
germinated sufficiently, which, according to 
circumstances, may require from six to ten 
days, it is brought into the kiln to be dried. 
I am aware that a malting apparatus has 
been provided with a perforated bottom in the 
malt-chamber, a ventilating-channel beneath 
it, a ventilating-chimney at one end, and a 
O 
25 
35 
40 
moistening-chamber at the other end of chan 
nel; but 
What Iclaimas new, and ofmyinvention, is 
1. In a malt-chamber, the floor constructed, 
substantially as herein shown and described, 
with alternating strips of wood and of perfo 
rated metal, as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The moisture-chambers J, provided with 
vertical openings Q, extending from top tobot 
tom on the front side, whereby the sponges 
may be regulated, as described. 
3. In a malt chamber, the combination, with 
the air refreshing and moistening chamber, of 
the perforated tube K, and of the atomizing 
plate Warranged above it, substantially as 45 
herein shown and described, and for the pur 
pose of atomizing the water, so that the air 
that passes through the chambers JJ will be 
slightly impregnated with ozone. 
the air refreshing and moistening chamber, of 
the water-tube K, the atomizing-plate W, the 
cloth strips M, and the sponges N, substan 
tially as herein shown and described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. In a malt-chamber, the combination, with 5o 
JULEEN PUVREZ. 
VVitnesses: 
C. A. DE SURMONT, 
ED. MILLE. 
4 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254474.txt	A. A GOUBERT 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
(No Model.) 
AUTOMATIC. DISCHARGING APPARATUS FOR BONE BLACK KILNs, &C. 
No. 254,474, 
Patented Mar. 7, 1882, 
 
22E. 
(NVENTOR 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
A. A. GOUBERT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
AUTOMATIC DISCHARGING APPARATUS FOR BONE BLACK KILNS &c. 
Patented Mar, 7, 1882, 
No. 254,474, 
SNYASSSSSSSS s 
S 
 
2 
NSNS N 
SSSSSSSS 
1. 
EllittleS 
III, H 
l S" S. 
N 
T 
WITNESSES 
&%ae- 
NVENTOR R 
--- 
o 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTE. A. GOUBERT, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
AUTOMATIC DISCHARGING APPARATUS FOR BONE-BLACK KILNS, &c, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,474, dated March 7, 1882. 
Application filed July 9, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, AUGUSTE. A. GOUBERT, 
of Jersey City, State of New Jersey, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Auto 
matic Discharging Apparatus for Bone-Black 
Kilns, &c., of which the following is a specifi 
cation, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
My invention relates to that class of appa 
ratus used for discharging in uniform quanti 
ties granular or doughy materials from pipes, 
bins, or tanks; but I will describe it more 
particularly in its application to certain kilns 
for the revivification of bone-black or animal 
charcoal, in which vertical retorts are made to 
revolve upon their own axis. On these kilns 
the apparatus heretofore used for discharging 
the retorts has been that described in Letters 
Patent No. 150,821, granted to Buchanan and 
Vickers, dated May 12, 1874. , 
My improvement, as applied to these kilns, 
consists in one or more arms or blades secured 
to the revolving shaft or spindle and inclined 
backward from the direction of motion, and 
which as they revolve push out the coal over 
the edge of a stationary disk on which it is 
constantly resting. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
elevation of my apparatus. Fig. 2 shows the 
apparatus with the upper part cut off, and 
illustrates the mode in which the material is 
forced over the edge of the disk. Fig. 3 is a 
vertical section through a bone-black kiln, of 
which the retorts are revolved upon their own 
axis through the shaft or spindle C, showing 
my apparatus in connection with such a kiln. 
A is a worm-wheel, keyed on the spindle C, 
and through it imparting motion to the vertical 
retort, and also to the whole apparatus. 
BB are sheet-iron pipes called coolers, in 
which the charcoal is cooled after it leaves the 
retort and before it comes in contact with the 
air. 
D is a disk on which the column of charcoal 
E E are. wings or arms bent backward from 
is resting. 
- 
... 
" 
the direction of motion and moving with the 
spindle C. 
The operation of the apparatus is as follows: 
The charcoal contained in the coolers BB falls 
through the wheel A upon the disk D and 
spreads out around the rim of the wheel or its 
projection until it forms an angle of about 
thirty-five degrees, and there remains station 
ary. Now, if we revolve the apparatus in the 
direction shown by the arrow, the arms E. E. 
act as rotating wedges and push out the coal 
toward the edge of the disk, over which it falls 
continuously as long as the machine rotates. 
The arms EE are shown on the drawings as 
being curved; but they may be straight with 
similar effect. 
Modifications of this apparatus can of course 
be made to suit various purposes, and the arms, 
if revolved in the opposite direction, could be 
made to discharge at the center of the disk. 
Instead of the shaft C being inside of the 
arms E. E., it may be enlarged considerably, 
so as to form a pipe, and the arms E be fast 
ened to that pipe on the inside. It would be, 
notwithstanding, but a modification of my in 
vention. 
The wheel and coolers are merely shown so 
as to illustrate one application of my inven 
tion, but are notessential parts of the apparatus. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an automatic discharging apparatus, 
the wings or arms EE, bent backward from 
the direction of motion, in combination with . 
the disk D and the revolving shaft C, substan. 
tially as herein specified. 
2. The arms EE, substantially as herein de 
scribed, in combination with the wheel A, the 
disk D, and the coolers B B of a revolving 
charcoal-kiln. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand, this 8th day of July, 1881, in the presence 
of two subscribing witnesses. 
AUGUSTE A, GOUBERT. 
Witnesses: 
D. B. PRESTON, 
ARTHUR KRAUSE. 
- 
55 
o 
75 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254574.txt	(No Model.) 
R. A. SMITH & G. CHASE. 
No. 254,574, 
GRAIN SEPARATOR, 
Patented Mar, 7, 1882. 
 
 
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ 
oooOOooOoOoOGGOGO 
GO 
OGOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
GOQQ 
QQQ Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q &@ @ @ @ @ @ @ 
@@@@@@@@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @@@@@@@ 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
OGDO O 
 OoooOOOO @ O O CO GO Gc) G OOG) GO GOOG 
OGOG) 
Azzsz. 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RODERICK A. SMITH AND GEORGE CHASE, OF OKOBOJI, IOWA. 
GRAN-SEPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,574, dated March 7, 1882. 
Application filed June 23, 1881. 
(No model.) 
40 
45 
?? 
To all whom it may concern: 
s 
Be it known that we, RODERICKA. SMITH, 
and GEORGE CHASE, of Okoboji, Dickinson 
county, Iowa, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in GrainSeparators, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to that class of grain 
separators, such as was patented to us on the 
22d day of October, 1878, in which revolving 
rollers catch and throw out the extraneous 
matter; and our invention consists of certain 
appliances combined with recessed rollers for 
rendering the operations more effective than 
those heretofore used. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a transverse 
sectional elevation of our improved grain-sep 
arator, and Fig. 2 is a plan view. 
The frame consists of uprights and cross 
pieces supporting the bearings of a driving 
shaft, a, and two inclined roller-shafts, b, each 
carrying a roller, A, containing pits or inden 
tations e in the surface, and each having a 
bevel-gear, g, meshing with a bevel-pinion, d, 
on the driving-shaft. Above the highest ends 
of the rollers is a hopper, B, and at the outer 
side of each roller is a parallel inclined plate, 
f, arranged below a wire, i, drawn tightly by 
turn-pins h passing through the frame, said 
wire being parallel to the face of its adjacent 
roller and a short distance therefrom. Be 
neath the rollers is a receptacle, D, and out 
side each plate f is a receptacle, E. The roll 
ers are geared to both, and revolve in the di 
rection shown by the arrows, Fig. 1, and the 
pits are of such a depth and shape as to re 
ceive the extraneous matter, as cockle, but not 
the Wheat or other grain from which such mat 
ter must be separated, and the wires i are ar. 
ranged at such distances from the rollers as 
to permit the particles projecting in the pits 
to pass freely beneath them, when they will 
be carried round below the plates fand de 
posited in the receptacle D. 
Should a grain of wheat get endwise into 
one of the pits it may be carried round with 
the cockle, in which case the projecting end 
will pass under the wire i, drawing the latter 
slightly downward, so that in flying back to its 
position, as it does when the grain passes from 
it, the wire will release the grain so suddenly 
that it will fly laterally into the adjacent re 
ceptacle, E. By this means, without the bear 
ings, shafts, beaters, and driving-gear hereto 
fore employed, we are enabled to separate one 
class of particles from the other rapidly, 
cheaply, and effectively. 
Any suitable wire-tightening devices may 
be used for keeping the wires i taut, and the 
rollers may be corrugated or indented in any 
manner that the substances operated with ren 
der desirable. 
We claim- . 
1. In a grain - separator, the combination, 
with the pitted rollers, of wires i, stretched 
parallel to the faces of the rollers, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the inclined pitted 
rollers AA, wires i i, and receptacles D and 
E, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
. 
RODERICK A. SMITH, 
GEORGE CHASE, 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM CHASE, 
W. F. PILLSBURY. 
5 
O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254675.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 254,675 
- 
 
v 
A. McKELLAR, 
AMALG AMATOR, 
Patented Mar. 7, 1882. 
of a to ze 
z-a-20 
z-zags. 
--- 
* , 
INVENTOR: 
u/ M. 16-ee 
CBy>1%. 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANGUS McKELLAR, OF FORT DOUGLASS, UTAE TERRITORY. 
AMAL.GAMATO R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,675, dated March 7, 1882. 
Application filed December 5, 1881. 
(No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANGUs McKELLAR, of 
Fort Douglass, Utah Territory, have invented 
a new and Improved Amalgamator; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation with the rake 
raised, and showing in dotted lines the posi 
tion of the rake when let down into the pan. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the pan. 
Myinvention relates to an improved machine 
for amalgamating ores for the separation of the 
precious metals from the wastemineral matters; 
and it consists in a frame carrying a circular 
pan, combined with a horizontally - revolving 
rake fixed upon the lower end of a vertical 
shaft, which shaft rotates in a vertical bearing 
and carries a horizontal bevel-wheel adapted 
to rest above and engage with another bevel 
wheel on a horizontal shaft, the said vertical 
rake-shaft being arranged to slide perpendicu 
larly upward to disconnect its bevel-wheel from 
the other driving-wheel, and at the same time 
to lift the horizontal rake out of the pan. 
The invention also consists in the peculiar 
construction of the frame-work, in combination 
with the aforementioned parts, a detachable 
pan provided with a step for the vertical shaft, 
and a lever for lifting the vertical shaft with 
its gear-wheel and rake, as will be hereinafter 
more fully described. 
P is a platform, that is preferably mounted 
on wheels P', whereby the amalgamator may 
be moved about at will. 
The settling and amalgamating part of the 
device consists of a double standard, Q, sup. 
porting in a central sleeve, n, an upright verti 
cally-adjustable shaft, Q, on the top of which 
is keyed a bevel-gear wheel, Q, and in a socket, 
O, on the bottom of which is held, by a set-screw, 
O', a rake, Q, consisting of cross-bars p, hav 
ing fixed in them downward-projecting teeth p'. 
In an upright arm of the standard Q is piv 
oted a lever, R, whose forked end embraces the 
shaft Qjust below the wheel Q, whereby said 
shaft and rake Q, Q can be elevated above the 
settling and amalgamatingpan S, and the bevel 
wheel Q be thereby ungeared from the bevel 
wheel T, that is keyed on the horizontal crank 
i0 
shaft T', which is journaled on standard Q, 
and through which power is applied for operat 
ing the rake Q. 
Set loosely upon platform P' is the settling 
and amalgamating pan S, having fixed in its 
center a step, q, to receive the lower end, Q, of 
the rake-shaft when the rake Q is in operation. 
Secured to the upper edge of the rim of pan 
S is a discharge-spout, s, for the purpose of car 
rying off muddy water and light sand, over the 
inner end of which spouts is a sieve or screen, 
s', to prevent the escape of the larger particles 
of sand or metal during the amalgamating pro 
CeSS 
The auriferous sand, earth, or ore, being re 
duced to a powder, is delivered into the pan S. 
This pan S is designed to be about three feet 
six inches in diameter and from nine to twelve 
inclues deep, and is to contain from one-eighth 
to one-fourth inch of quicksilver when ready 
for work, and during the amalgamating process 
sulphate of copper and common salt or other 
suitable chemicals for facilitating the process 
will be added from time to time as conditions 
require. The powdered sand then being, de 
livered into the pan S, containing the quick 
silver, a small jet of water from, say, a one 
fourth-inch pipe is also introduced at the cen 
ter of the said pan S, and the rake Q' turned 
by means of the crank-shaft T. until the mate 
rials in said pan Shave been mixed to the con 
sistency of thin mud or mush. Then the supply 
of powdered sand to the pan S is shut off, but 
the supply of water continued, and the rake Q 
rotated in opposite directions until muddy 
water ceases to flow out of the spouts. By 
this time the upper layers of sand or ore in the 
pan S are free from gold, all or most of the par 
ticles of gold having by gravity worked down 
to the quicksilver and been there with amal 
gamated. The rake Q is then elevated by 
means of the lever R, and held suspended by 
passing a pin, v, through a corresponding hole 
through said lever R, near the upright standard 
arm, in which the latter is pivoted. Then the 
operator skims off and throws away the upper 
layers of the sand or ore that are free from gold. 
More ore or sand is then supplied from the mill, 
and the rake Q is then lowered and rotated 
again for further agitating the mass, and then 
raised again, while the operator removes more 
90 
95 
Od 
254,675 
of the surface, sand, or ore, and so the opera 
tions or manipulations are successively repeat 
ed until the cleaning up at the close of the day's 
work. Then the washing and skimming are 
several times repeated, so as to skim or re 
move the sand close to the quicksilver. Then 
the pan S is removed and its contents taken 
out and submitted to the usual operations for 
separating and saving both the gold and the 
quicksilver. 
With this apparatus but a very small amount 
of water is required-say about one hundred 
gallons of water for thirty to fifty tons of sand 
or gravel passed through the machine. This 
quantity of water can be easily brought on 
mule-back for several miles, and the water 
flowing from the pan can be arrested in set 
tling-pans and used over again after it has de 
posited its sediment. Hence it will be seen 
that this process and apparatus can be used 
with good effect at many mines or places that 
are unworked because of an insufficient supply 
of water to operate the Ordinary stamps and 
pans. 
. I am aware of the Patents Nos. 185,921 and 
241,045; but in each of these cases the vertical 
wheel on the horizontal shaft has to be first 
adjusted by a separate lever away from the 
horizontal wheel on the vertical shaft before 
the vertical shaft with its rake can be raised, 
and which latter is effected by a separate 
movement. In my invention it will be seen that 
I preserve the drive-wheel Tin a fixed position 
as regards its plane, which permits of a better 
transmission of motive power, and by fixing 
O 
23 
35 
45 
the horizontal wheel Q above wheel T and 
rigidly on the vertical shaft, with nothing to 
preclude its upward movement, I secure the 
disconnection of the gears Q and T simulta 
neously with the elevation of the rake and by 4o 
the same movement, thus dispensing with the 
lever which is ordinarily employed for shifting 
the wheel T and securing a double function for 
the lever R. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. An amalgamating device consisting of a 
pan, a frame-work carrying a horizontal shaft, 
with rigid vertical gear-wheel T, and adjusta 
ble vertical shaft O, with a rake at its lower 
end and single gear-wheel Q at the top, rest. 
ing above the wheel T, and means, substan 
tially as described, for simultaneously raising 
the rake and disconnecting the gears by one 
and the same movement, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the platform P', the 
detachable pan S, frame Q, horizontal shaft 
T', with rigid vertical gear-wheel T, vertically 
adjustable shaft O, with rake Qat its lower 
end and a gear-wheel, Q, at the top, resting 
above gear-wheel T, and the lever R, fulcrumed 
on a standard from the frame Q, and having its 
end arranged beneath the wheel Q, for simul 
taneously disconnecting the gears and raising 
the rake, substantially as shown and described. 
ANGUS MCKELLATR. 
So 
Witnesses: 
Jos. F. SIMMONs, 
A. STAYNER, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254775.txt	(No Model.) J. L. JUDSON & W. A. COGSWELL, 
'' 
GOVERNOR, . 
- 
No. 254,775. 
Patented Mar. 7, 1882. 
() 
 
 
 
 
sis 
Ely W. 
W 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
re 
s 
L 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN L, JUDSON AND WILLIAM A. COGSWELL OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, 
ASSIGNORS TO JUNIUS JUDSON & SON, OF SAME PLACE. 
GOVERNOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,775, dated March 7, 1882. 
A 
Application filed May 31, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHNL. JUDSON and 
WILLIAM. A. COGSWELL, both of Rochester, 
Monroe county, New York, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvement in Gov 
ernors; and we do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation, partially in section, 
of a governor showing our improvement. Fig.2 
is a plan of the same, one of the balls being in 
section to show the cross-bar and its attach 
ments. 
Our improvement relates to what is known 
as the Judson' governor; and it consists of 
an arrangement of springs and adjustable cross 
bars connecting the balls, constructed, ar 
ranged, and operating as hereinafter more fully 
described. 
The governor is of ordinary and well-known 
construction, and does not require special-de 
scription. 
A A are the balls, which are flattened on 
the sides, instead of being spherical, as is ordi 
narily the case. In these balls are made hori 
Zontal slots or passages ct a, extending through 
the balls, and being of considerable width, as 
shown. In these slots rest cross-bars BB, 
through which pass screws CC, turning loosely 
in the ball. The cross-bars form nuts, and as 
the screws are turned said cross-bars will be 
moved out or in, as the case may be. The 
ends of the cross-bars project some distance 
beyond the sides of the balls, and have hooks 
b b formed thereon, as shown in Fig. 2. 
D ID are coiled springs, made of light spring 
wire, and having loops c c, which rest on the 
hooks bb, and the springs thus form a connec 
tion between the cross-bars on opposite sides 
of the balls. 
It is found that cross-bars passing through 
slots in the balls, projecting on opposite sides 
and made adjustable forward and back, are 
convenient attachments for the springs, as the 
O 
IS 
2S, 
35 
45 
latter can be attached and removed with the 
greatest facility, and the tension can be ad 
justed with great accuracy on both springs at 
once, so that the governor can be adapted to 
the work for which it is intended without dif 
ficulty. 
If desired, one only of the balls may be pro 
vided with the slot and adjusting-screw, the 
cross-bar being made fixed and stationary in 
the opposite ball. 
By the use of two coiled springs on opposite 
sides of the balls connected directly from one 
ball to the other, and adjustable to different 
tensions, the action is balanced, and the balls, 
while speeding the governor, (or requiring an 
increased speed before commencing torise,) are 
at the same time much more sensitive to vari 
ations than the ordinary weighted balls, or 
those balls which are attached to elliptic or 
other flat springs whose tension increases by 
centrifugal action. 
By the use of springs extending directly from 
ball to ball the tendency is to reduce the fric 
tion on the pivots of the arms, as the springs 
draw against the centrifugal action and draw 
up toward the pivots, instead of throwing out 
sist the pivots, as where weighted balls are 
Se(, 
We disclaim springs connecting the balls 
and attached to bearings on top of the balls. 
What we claim as new is 
In a governor, the combination, with the 
balls AA, of cross-bars B B, attached to the 
balls and made adjustable forward and back, 
and coiled springs D D, connecting the cross 
bars, as shown and described, and for the pur 
pose specified. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto signed 
our names in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses, 
. 
JNO. L. JUDSON. 
W. A. COGSWELL, 
Witnesses: 
R. D. ROBINSON, 
C. JUDSON. 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254875.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
C, O KANOUSE, 
COLLAR AND CUFF, 
No. 254,875. 
Patented Mar, 14, 1882. 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEY, 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington D.C.. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- . 
CHARLES O. KANOUSE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
COLLAR AND CUFF. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,875, dated March 14, 1882. 
Application filed December 16, 1881. (No model.) 
- 5 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES O. KANOUSE, 
residing in the city, county, and State of New 
York, have invented certain Improvements in 
Zylonite Collars, Cuffs, &c., of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention pertains to the manufacture 
of collars and cuffs for wearing-apparel, made 
chiefly from a substance known as Zylonite, 
celluloid, or a preparation of pyroxyline, 
which permits the article to be cleaned with 
soap and water when soiled; and the inven 
tion consists in forming the collar or cuff of a 
single sheet of the material cut or molded to 
the proper form, but as much larger than the 
required size as one-half, or nearly so, of the 
desired seam to be formed on the article, then 
applying a strip of linen or similar fabric of a 
width equal to twice the width of the seam 
upon one side only, and near the outer edge of 
the sheet, and causing it to adhere by pressure 
when slightly warmed, then folding over the 
entire edge of the article to form the seam, 
doubling the woven fabric upon itself, so that 
it is completely covered by the Zylonite, and 
finishing the same by pressure in a slightly 
heated state, as will hereinafter appear. 
At A, Figure 1 of the drawings, is shown a 
portion of a collar formed of the required 
shape, and with the strip of woven fabric, B, 
applied upon one side only to form a lining for 
the seam, and represented in section at Fig. 3. 
At Figs. 2 and 4 the same strip, B, and the edge 
of the Zylonite are shown as folded over to form 
the seam, with the woven strip doubled upon 
itself, as plainly seen in the section at Fig. 4, 
and ready to be compressed or finished by 
pressure to any degree of thinness desired. 
Dies may be used to inclose the edge of the 
fold to imitate the ordinary stitching on a 
seam, if desired; but this forms no part of the 
invention. 
The button-hole at C is formed between the 
inner edges of the folded fabric, so that it is 
thereby strengthened by a double thickness of 45 
the woven goods; and its edges may be em 
bossed by the dies at the same time the rest of 
the collar is finished. 
It must be evident that cuffs may be formed 
in the same manner from the same materials. So 
By forming collars and cuffs in this manner 
only one thickness of the Zylonite is required 
where two thicknesses are now used, thus sav 
ing greatly in the quantity of material and 
making the articles much lighter; but the 55 
greatest advantage is that a complete hem is 
formed without any raw or cut edge of either 
the woven or plastic substance, and a double 
strength is given where it is most required. 
I therefore claim- 
1. The method of forming collars and cuffs 
of a single sheet or thickness of Zylonite, cellu 
loid, or analogous matelial, which consists in 
first catting the article to the desired shape 
from a single sheet, then strengthening by 65 
strips of woven fabric applied at the edges 
upon the sides and ends only of the plastic 
sheet, then folding the strips and edges of the 
body material to form a seam, and finally fin 
ishing the article by heated dies, as hereinbe. To 
fore set forth. 
6o 
 . 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a collar 
or cuff formed of a single sheet of Zylonite, 
celluloid, or analogous substance, and strength 
ened by strips of woven fabric applied at the 75 
edges of the body material, the strips and edges 
being folded, cemented, and finished by heat 
and pressure, as set forth. 
In Witness whereof I have hereunto sub. 
scribed my name and affixed my seal in the 8o 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES O. KANOUSE, L. s. 
EUGENE N. ELIOT, 
BOYD ELIOT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US254976.txt	(No Model.) 
G, H, HURD, 
REFRIGERATOR, 
No. 254,976. 
Patented Mar, 14, 1882, 
2 Zzz, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
3 
2 (N.L.) 
E. 
 
 
- 
 
- LI 
WITNESSES: 27, 
-6 yace 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. HURD, OF KIOWA, KANSAS. 
REFR GE RATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 254,976, dated March 14, 1882. 
Application filed August 2, 1881, (No model.) 
: 
Io 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. HURD, of 
Kiowa, in the county of Barbour and State of 
Kansas, have invented a new and Improved 
Refrigerator, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved refrigerator or milk-cooler, 
so constructed that the articles contained 
therein are cooled by a current of cooled air 
circulating around the cooling-box. 
The invention consists in a sheet-metal box 
contained in a larger wooden box, from the 
top of which a draft-pipe leads to the roof of 
the house, and is provided with two branch 
pipes leading from the inner metal box into 
the draft-pipe. A pipe extends from the bot 
tom of the outer box down to a flat tank con 
taining water and located in the cellar of the 
building, the lower end of this pipe being lo 
cated a short distance above the surface of the 
water, so that the air that enters into this pipe 
will be moistened and cooled. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a horizontal sectional view of my improved 
refrigerator or milk-cooler. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal sectional elevation of the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A sheet-metal box, A is surrounded by a 
larger wooden box, B, whereby an air-space, 
C, is formed around the box A. A pipe, D, 
leads from the top of the box B to the roof of 
the building containing the refrigerator or 
milk-cooler, and projects a short distance 
above this roof, whereby a strong draft is 
created. This pipe D is provided with two 
branch pipes, E, leading into the top of the 
box A. A pipe F, projects downward from 
the bottom of the box B into a flat vessel, G, 
located in the cellar and containing water, the 
35 
So 
55 
lower end of the pipe F being a short distance 
from the surface of the water, so that all the 
air that enters into the pipe F will be moist. 
ened, cooled, and refreshed. 
The box A is provided with a door, H, and 
with a number of slats, J. As there is a strong 
draft in the pipe D, the air is drawn out of the 
air-space C through this pipel), and is replaced 
by fresh, cool, and moistened air, entering the 
box B through the pipe F, thus causing a cir 
culation of cool and moistened air around the 
box, and thereby cooling the articles contained 
ill this box A. Any Warm or hot or foul air, &c., 
that is formed in the box. A passes off through 
the pipes E E and D. 
If the pipes ID, E, and F are removed and 
the apertures in the boxes closed, the air-space 
surrounding the box A will prevent the arti 
cles in the box. A from freezing if the exter. 
nal temperature does not drop too low. 
Having thtas fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a refrigerator or milk-cooler, the combi 
nation, with the interior box, A and the larger 
exterior box, B, of the draft-pipe D, leading 
from the exterior box, B, and the branch pipes 
EE, leading from the interior box, A, into the 
draft-pipe D, substantially as herein shown and 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a refrigerator or milk-cooler, the com 
bination, with the interior box, A, and the ex 
terior box, B, of the draft-pipe D, the branch 
pipes E E of the same, the pipe F, and the 
tank G, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
GEORGE HENRY EHURI). 
Witnesses: 
- 
E. J. KERCHNER, 
M. MALE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255076.txt	 
No. 255,076. 
Patented Mar. 14, 1882. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
ul 
MACHINE FOR FEEDING AND SETTING LACING HOOKS, 
A. EPPLER Jr. 
(No Model.) 
No. 
255,076. 
A. EPPLER, Jr. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2 
MACHINE FOR FEEDING AND SETTING LACING. HOOKS, 
Patented Mar, 14, 1882. 
 
 
SY 2 
 
N 
 
?uaeis 
- 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW EPPLER, JR, OF QUINCY, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO DAVID 
WHITTEMORE, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR FEEDING AND SETTING LACING -HOOKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 255,076, dated March 14, 1882. 
8 
Application filed January 31, 18S2. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
IS 
25. 
v 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ANDREW EPPLER, Jr., 
of Quincy, in the county of Norfolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain Im 
provements in Machines for Feeding and Set 
ting Lacing-Books, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
animproved machine for securing lacing-hooks 
or equivalent fastening devices to the material 
or article to which they pertain, the hooks be 
ing automatically fed from a reservoir and 
conducted automatically to the setting or coin 
pressing device. 
The invention consists in the improvements 
which I will now proceed to describe and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figures 1 and 2 rep 
resentelevations of opposite sides of a machine 
embodying my invention. Fig. 3 represents a 
side elevation of the reservoir. Figs. 4 and 5 
represent sections on line acac, Fig. 3. Figs. 6 
and 7 represent perspective views of lacing 
hooks in different positions on the arm of the 
feed-plate. Fig. 8 represents a perspective 
view of another form of hook adapted to be 
used by the machine. Figs. 9 and 10 repre: 
sent respectively sections on lines y y and & 
3, Fig. 1. Fig. 11 represents an enlarged top 
view of a part of the machine. Figs. 12 and 
13 represent sections on line a? ac, Fig.11. 
Fig. 14 represents a section on line y' y', Fig. 
11. Fig. 15 represents a bottom view of the 
feed-operating mechanism. Fig. 16 repre 
sents a section on line a' 2", Fig. 14. Fig. 17 
represents a section onlinea'a', Fig.1. Figs. 
18 and 19 represent sections on linea'a', Fig. 
11, showing the adaptation of the machine to 
the hook shown in Fig. 8. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in all the figures. 
In the drawings, A represents the support 
ing-frame of the machine, adapted to be se 
cured by its base a to a table or support. 
B represents the setter or compressor to se 
cure the fastening devices to thematerial. The 
setter is supported on the end of a lever, C, 
which is pivoted at D to the frame A, and is 
55 
So 
oscillated by suitable means to alternately 
raise and lower the setter. 
E represents the roadway or guide for the 
lacing-hooks, said roadway being composed of 
a metallic guiding-strip, secured to an inclined 
flange, F, formed on the fraine A. Said guide 
is set edgewise on said flange, at its upper end, 
as shown in Figs, 1 and 9, so that a lacing 
hook, G, may bestride its upper edge, the hook 
being in a vertical position. Part-way down 
the guide is given a quarter-twist, so that it lies. 
flat upon the flange F, as shown in Fig. 10, 
and changes the position of a hook slidling upon 
its edge, so that the hook becomes horizontal. 
The flange F is provided with a channel under 
the flat portion of the guide E, for the recep 
tion of the outer arm of the hook. 
E represents the reservoir for the lacing 
hooks, said reservoir being secured to the frame 
A at the upper end of the guide or roadway E, 
the latter projecting into an orifice, I, in the 
One side of the reservoir is pre?er 
reservoir. 
ably flat and the other side dish-shaped, as 
shown in Figs, 4 and 5. Witbin the reservoir 
His a rotary feeding-plate, J, which is rotated, 
step by step, by a shaft, K, journaled in the res. 
ervoir, a ratchet, L, on said shaft, a dog, M, 
pivoted to an arm, N, journaled on said shaft, 
and a connecting-rod, O, which cennects the 
arm N with one of the arms of an operating. 
lever, P, which is pivoted at Q to the frame A. 
The plate J is provided with a series of arms, 
R. One edge of each arm is curved, so that it 
meets the adjacent edge of the next arm with 
out an angle, such adjacent edge being approxi. 
mately straight. The plate J rotates in the 
direction of the arrow in Fig. 1, and the for. 
Ward curved edge of each arm R, passing 
through the accumulated lacing-hooks in the 
lower portion of the reservoir, engages with 
one or more hooks which best ride said edge. 
As the plate rotates and the arms move up 
Wardly, so that the curved edges become in. 
clined downwardly, the hooks slide inwardly 
by gravitation, and finally slide outwardly upon 
the straight rearedges of the arms. Said edges 
are arranged to coincide with the guide E when 95 
they attain a considerable downward and out. 
75 
35 
45 
 
 
2 
255,076 
d 
ward inclination, as shown in Fig. 1, so that 
the hooks will slide from each arm R onto the 
guide and pass down the latter. It will be seen, 
therefore, that the front or curved edges of the 
arms act as collectors and the rear or straight 
edges as chutes to discharge the hooks upon 
the guide E, the hooks being thus supplied to 
the inserting mechanism with sufficient rapid 
ity. 
One variety of lacing-hook G is secured to 
the material or article to which it belongs by 
means of prongs SS. (See Figs, 6 and 7.) In 
another variety the hook is secured by means 
of a tubular shank, T, (see Figs. 8, 18, and 19,) 
which is inserted into the material and upset 
like an eyelet. Each of these varieties can be 
used in this machine. The pronged hook is 
liable, however, to bestride the arms R of the 
rotary feed-plate in the improper position 
shown in Figs. 5 and 7, instead of the proper 
position shown in Figs. 4 and 6. When the 
hook is thus improperly placed one of its edges 
projects laterally toward the flat side of the 
reservoir H farther than the head of the book 
projects when properly placed, as will be seen 
by reference to Figs. 4 and 5. 
U represents an inwardly-projecting piece 
or shoulder attached to the flat side of the res 
ervoir H, in the position shown in dotted lines 
in Fig. 3, and in section in Figs. 4 and 5, and 
arranged to collide with the projecting edges 
of improperly-placed hooks and dislodge them. 
from the arms of the plate J, thus preventing 
such hooks from reaching the roadway E. The 
properly-placed books pass by the shoulder U 
without touching it. 
VV represent tufts of bristles set in one side 
of the lower portion of the box H, to prevent 
the hooks from becoming cloggedorinterlocked 
in the lower portion of the reservoir. 
The reservoir H is composed of two parts 
viz., the concave or dish-shaped side 2, which 
constitutes the body of the reservoir, and is 
attached to the support A, and the flat side or 
cover 3, which is detachably secured to the 
part 2 by screws 4. The dish-shaped part 2. 
has a groove, 5, at the margin of its concave 
side, in which groove the outer ends of the 
arms R move when the plate J is rotated. Said 
groove prevents any portions of the lacing 
hooks from lying in such position that they 
will get between the outer ends of the arms R. 
and the proximate surfaces of the reservoir 
over which said ends move when the plate J 
is rotated. The groove therefore makes it im 
possible for the hooks to clog or obstruct the 
plate and to wear the outer ends of the arms: 
R. The inner sides of the arms of the plate J 
bear against the shoulder formed by the groove 
5, as shown in Figs. 4, 5, and 17. When the 
tubular-shanked lacing-hooks shown in Fig. 
8 are employed, the projection U (shown in 
Figs. 3, 4, and 5) is not used, and only suffi 
cient space is provided between the outer side 
of the plate J and the cover 3 of the reservoir 
to properly receive the head or outer portion 
of the hook. This space may be varied to suit 
different-sized heads or hooks by tightening 
or loosening the screws which secure the cover 
3 to the part 2, suitable washers being inserted 7o 
between the part 2 and cover 3 to hold the cover 
at the desired distance from the part 2. 
At the lower end of the roadway E and un 
der the setter B is a disk or plate, a, attached 
to a vertical spindle, b, which is adapted to 75 
rotate in a bearing in the frame A. The plate 
a is provided with a series of radial recesses 
or pockets, c, each of which is of sufficient size 
to receive the neck and head of one of the 
hooks G, as shown in Figs. 12 and 13. The 8o 
spindle b is provided with mechanism, whereby 
it is rotated step by step, and each step or ro 
tation is of sufficient length to move a recess 
or pocket, c, of the plate a from the lower end 
of the roadway E to a point under the setter 85 
B. The mechanism employed in the present 
instance for rotating the spindle and plate is 
composed of a ratchet, d, rigidly attached to 
the lower end of the spindle, a segmental pin 
ion, e, journaled to rotate loosely on said spin- go 
dle, and having an arm, f, to which is pivoted 
a pawl, g, engaging with the teeth of said 
ratchet, and a reciprocating rack, l, sliding in 
a fixed guide, i, and engaging with the teeth 
of the pinion e. The rack h is connected by a 95 
rod, j, with the three-armed operating-lever. 
P, and is reciprocated by the oscillation of said 
lever on its pivot. The lever P is provided 
on one of its arms With a curved groove, k, 
which receives a stud or friction-roller, l, on Ioo 
the rear end of the setter-carrying lever C. 
The third arm of the lever P is connected with 
a treadle or other device by which said lever 
is oscillated. The setter and the feed-plate are 
therefore both operated by the lever P. 
in represents a thin metal plate attached to 
the flange F, and having its outer end in close 
proximity to the plate a, as shown in Fig. 11, 
and occupying such a position that it will force 
the hooks G into their proper place as they IIo 
come under the setter, as hereinafter described. 
in represents an arm resting upon the upper 
surface of the plate a, and adapted to oscillate. 
thereon, said arm being attached to a rod, o, 
which is journaled in lugs pp on the frame A. II.5 
q represents a spring adapted to rotate the 
rod and impel the arm in the direction indi 
cated by the arrow in Fig. 11. The outer end 
of the arm in has the form of a thin wedge, as 
shown in Figs. 12 and 13, and this wedge. I2O 
shaped portion is adapted to support each of 
the pronged hooks when it is brought under 
the setter, as hereinafter described. 
The operation is as follows: The setter be 
ing raised, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the plate 125 
a is held so that one of its recesses or pockets 
will receive a hook from the roadway E, as 
shown in Fig. 11. The lever P is then turned 
on its pivot, so as to force the setter down 
wardly upon the prongs or the tubular shank (30 
of the hook, upsetting said prongs or shank, 
as shown in Figs. 13 and 18, The lever P is 
. 
IOS 
25 
35 
45 
55 
255,076 
3 
- 
J 
the setter, as said mechanism is shown and 
claimed in another application. 
then turned so as to raise the setter, and at the 
same time moving the rack h in the direction 
indicated by the arrow in Fig. 16. The rack 
I claim- 
1. In a machine for feeding and attaching 
is thus caused to rotate the pinion e, and cause 
lacing-hooks, the reservoir having the rotary 
the pawl g, pivoted to the arm of said pinion, 
feeding-plate provided with arms, substantially 
to engage with the ratchet d, and rotate the 
as described, adapted to collect and discharge 
latter a distance equal to the length of one 
lacing-hooks, as set forth. 
tooth, thereby giving the plate a a sufficient 
2. The reservoir having upon one of its 
rotation to simultaneously bring to the front 
sides an in Wardly-projecting shoulder, where 
the recess or pocket containing the hook last 
by the lacing-hooks, when improperly placed 
secured, so that the button can be removed, 
upon the rotary feeding-plate, are dislodged 
move the pocket which last received a hook 
from said plate, as set forth. 
from the roadway into position (under the set 
ter, and move another pocket into position to 
3. The combination of the reservoir having 
an aperture, I, the inclined guide or roadway 
receive a hook from the roadway. In case the 
set edgewise and projecting at its upper end 
hook sliding into the pocket of the plate a 
into said opening, and the substantially ver 
from the roadway does not reach the inner end 
tical intermittently-rotating feeding-plate hav. 
of said pocket, the spring in bears against the 
ing arms R, adapted to collect lacing-hooks in 
hook while the latter is being brought under 
the setter, and pushes it properly into the 
the reservoir, each arm coinciding with the 
pocket of the feed-plate. The feed-plate J of 
roadway when in an inclined position, where 
the reservoir H is rotated step by step by its 
by the hooks collected upon said arms are 
caused to slide upon the roadway, as set forth. 
described connection with the lever P. 
4. In a machine for feeding and attaching 
As before stated, the machine is capable 
of operating with either pronged or tubular 
lacing-hooks, the reservoir having the sub 
stantially vertical intermittently-rotating feed 
shanked hooks. 
ing-plate having arms R, and the fixed tufts 
The wedge-shaped arm in, above described, 
is intended for use only in connection with 
of bristles, whereby tie accumulated hooks are 
prevented from interlocking and impeding the 
pronged hooks. When such a hook is being 
action of the feeding-plate, as set forth. 
brought forward to its position under the set 
ter the portion of the hook resting on the up 
5. The combination, with the rotary feeding 
and supporting plates, of the spring-impelled 
per surface of the plate a is moved by the mo. 
yielding wedge, adapted to insert itself under 
tion of said plate upon the inclined surface of 
the neck of a pronged lacing-hook, when the 
the arm n. The entire hook is thus slightly 
latter is moved forward by said plate, and 
lifted, so that the portion of the hook that is in 
thereby firmly hold and support said hook for 
the pocket below the upper surface of the plate 
at is pressed tightly against the upper surface 
the action of the compressor, as set forth. 
of said pocket. The hook is thus firmly held, 
6. The reservoir having the rotary armed 
feed-plate J and a groove, 5, receiving the 
So that its prongs cannot Wabble or be acci 
dentally displaced while the setter is descend 
outer ends of the arms of said feed-plate, where 
by the lacing-hooks are prevented from clog 
ing and curling them over, as shown in Fig. 
13. After the prongs have been upset and 
ging the plate and from Wearing the outer ends 
the setter rises the hook, with the material to 
of the arms thereof, as set forth. 
7. The reservoir having the rotary feed-plate 
which it is attached, may be moved laterally 
J, the groove 5, receiving the outer ends of the 
out of the pocket in which it rested. In case 
arms of said feed-plate, and the cover 3, secured 
the plate a is rotated before the inserted hook 
is removed, the spring q enables the arm n to to the body of the reservoir by screws, where 
yield and move with the plate, so that no in 
by the space between the outer side of the 
plate J and the cover 3 may be regulated, as 
jury is caused to the hook or to the arm. 
The setter used in connection with the pronged 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
hooks has a concavity which acts on the prongs, 
to this specification, in the presence of two sub 
as shown in Fig. 13. 
scribing witnesses, this 30th day of December, 
When the machine is to be used with tubu 
A. D. 1881. 
lar-shanked hooks the arm n is removed and a 
setter such as is used for upsetting eyelets is 
employed, as shown in Fig. 18. 
I do not in this application claim the mech 
anism for operating the rotary feed-plate and 
ANDREW EPPLER, JR, 
C. F. BROWN, 
A. L. WHITE. 
Witnesses : 
O 
IS 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IO 5 
O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255178.txt	(No Model.) 
T, T, MARSHALL, 
MACHINE FOR CRIMPING SEAMLEss B00TS AND SHOEs, 
No. 255,178, 
Patented Mar. 21, 1882. 
/zzzzesses 
2/z. s- 12. 
14- 1 -4444 
Z72 weezzar 
W 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS T. MARSHALL OF JARVIS, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
MACHINE FOR CRI MPING SEAM LESS BOOTS AND SHOES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 255,178, dated March 21, 1882. 
Application filed November 10, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
placed in the mold and hold it against the last 
block C in the operation of crimping. 
To prepare the work for the machine I cut 
a piece of leather for a seamless boot of one 
entire piece, about the form and manner slnown 
at K, Fig. 7. I then cut out a small opening 
about its center, as shown at Li, Fig. S, and 
make a slit, b, a little way down from the said 
opening L. I then place the piece of leather 
as cut from the side in one entire piece in the 
hollow recess B of the machine, then insert 
the last-block C into the recess. A down Ward 
pressure is then brought to bear on the said 
last-block by turning the press-screw F, which 
impinges on the said block and pushes it down 
ward to crimp the leather to the same shape 
as the mold. At the same time a triple-jawed 
heel-laster, M, is affixed to the heel portion of 
the leather and operated by screw N. One 
jaw gripes each side of and one around the heel, 
and are made to clamp on the edge of the 
leather simultaneously, and in consequence of 65 
which the leather around the heel is crimped 
without creases. 
The machine for climping is so simple in 
construction that no skilled labor is required 
to crimp, and it cannot easily get out of Order, 
on account of its strength and simplicity. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMASTINNOCKMAR 
SHALL of Jarvis, in the county of Haldimand, 
in the Province of Ontario, Dominion of Can. 
ada, boot and shoe maker, have invented a 
new and useful Machine for Crimping Seam 
less Boots; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the construction and operation of the same. 
By reference to the drawings forming part 
of this specification it will be seen that Figure 
1 represents one-half of the crimping-machine 
in section. Figs. 2 and 3 are bottom and side 
views, respectively, of the last-block. Fig. 4 is 
another longitudinal section of the machine. 
Figs. 7 and 8 
Figs. 5 and 6 are end views. 
show the leather blank before crimping. Fig. 
9 is the leather after being crimped. Fig. 10 
ls the finished boot. 
A Fig. 1, represents one half of a metal 
machine, which is constructed in two equal 
halves, with a foot-shaped recess, B, made 
therein, as shown, for the purpose hereinafter 
described. 
C is a last-block, cut to correspond and fit in 
the recess B. Fig.2 shows the shape of it on 
the top, and Fig. 3 the side. 
D D are holes through both haives of the 
What I claim as my inventionis 
said block A for screw-bolts EE to pass through 
In a crimping-machine for crimping the up 
to secure both sides firmly together. 
F is a press-screw, adjusted in an upright 
pers of boots or shoes wherein the upper coln 
sists of a single piece, the halved block A, 
position by its frame G, through which it passes, 
having rocess B, in combination with last 
and which is secured to outer edges of the 
block by two screws, a. a. The object of the block C, press-screw F, frame G, screw-bolts 
said screw F is to press the block C down in E E, and screw J, substantially as described. 
Dated at Port Rowan, Canada, this 27th 
the mold on the leather when in the act of 
crimping. 
EH H are nuts on the screws EE, for tighten 
ing the two halves of the crimping-machine 
together. 
I is a screw-plate, set into one end of the de 
vice, through which a screw, J, passes, and 
which is made to impinge on the leather when 
In presence of - 
THOMAS TURNER, 
CECIL DEAN. 
day of August, A. D. 1881. 
W 
THOMAS TINNOCK MARSHAL, 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255279.txt	(No Model.). 
" 
. 
. 
No. 255,279, 
  
 
 
 
R. H. GOLDSMITH. 
COTTON WHIPPER. 
Patented Mar. 21, 1882. 
Nzz N 
 
s 
 
 
2 
 
\ N 
aya 2 S 
H 
cogs. AE2. 
(6/ 
26 
Clz 7teve 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROSE H. GOLDSMITH, OF CHARLESTON, SOUTH CAROLINA. 
COTTON.WHIPPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 255,279, dated March 21, 1882. 
Application filed September 15, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, RosE. H. GOLDSMITH, of 
Charleston, Charleston county, South Caro 
lina, have invented an Improvement in Cotton 
5. Whippers, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The invention consists in combining certain 
instrumentalities, as hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section of 
the machine. Fig.2 is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse section on linea at of Fig.1. 
A represents a box of an oblong form with 
an inclined bottom, a, formed of wire-cloth. 
I5. At the upper end of this box is a feed-spout, b, 
and a shaft, B, carrying the whipper-arms c, 
arranged spirally and extending nearly in con 
tact with the rounded bottom (1. 
On the upper end of shaft B, and within the 
2O spoutb, are arms d, which carry the cotton from 
the spout into the box A, which has a delivery 
opening and spout, e. f is a roller on a shaft, 
g, arranged above and parallel to shaftB, and 
provided with longitudinal blades. The shafts 
25 B g are connected by a belt and pulleys, while 
the shaft B has a bevel-pinion, which meshes 
with a similar one on a cross-shaft, i, which is 
driven by a belt from a main shaft, k. 
The operation is as follows: The cotton is 
placed in the spout b and carried by the feed-3o 
arms d down into the box, where it is thor 
oughly separated by the whipper-arms and car 
ried to the delivery end without cutting the 
staple. The dust escapes through the wire 
cloth bottom, while the roller f serves to press 
the cotton into contact with the whippers. 
Having thus described all that is necessary 
to a full understanding of my invention, what. 
I claim as new is 
The combination, with the shaft B, provided 
with the whipper-arms c, and the box A, of the 
longitudinally-bladed parallel and superposed 
rolf, and suitable mechanism for rotating the 
same, whereby the said roll is caused to press 
the cotton to the whipper-arms, as described. 45 
35 
ROSE H. GOLDSMITH. 
Witnesses: 
How ARD JACKSON, 
A. A. GOLDSMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255380.txt	(No Model.) 
W. P. DODSON, 
- 
BROITER, 
No. 255,380, 
Patented Mar. 21, 1882. 
  
ge 
f\?. VVVV VVf Vf 
2 
2 
/ 4- 27. 
WITNESSES 
IN VENTOR 
d6-2%.1-R) 
"Sv-staxas. 
AT7 OANEY 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILSON. P. DODSON, OF PEIILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
F. HOWARD ELDRIDGE, OF SAME PLACE. 
BROLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 255,880, dated March 21, 1882. 
Application filed February 14, 1882. (No model.) 
25 
35 
The meat is placed in one of the plates and 
the other is closed upon it, and the broiler is 
put over the fire. The juices from the meat then 
fall into the grooves of the corrugations, and 
are there retained. The broiler being turned 
over, these juices fall upon the meat and are 
absorbed in it, and the same action takes place 
on the other side, and so on until the meat is 
cooked. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A broiler consisting of two corrugated 
plates, in which are perforations in the upper 
part of the corrugations, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. The corrugated plates AA, in which are 
perforations in the upper part of the corruga 
tions, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
WILSON. P. DODSON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. B. CoopFR, 
SAML. P. EIANSON. 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILSON. P. DODSON, of 
the city and county of Philadelphia, and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a Broiler for 
Meats and other Substances, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention consists in constructing a broil 
er of two plates, which are ribbed or corrugat 
ed, and in which on the corrugations are per 
forations, the purpose of the perforations be 
ing to allow the direct rays of the heat from 
the fire to reach the article broiled, and that of 
the corrugations at once to hold the exuding 
juices and to give a larger heating surface, 
with the further advantage that they give room 
for the expansion and contraction incident to 
the use of the broiler over a hot fire, and so 
prevent the warping of the plates. 
In the drawings, Figurel represents abroiler, 
2 o constructed according to my plan, of two plates, 
AA, with the plates open. Fig. 2 is a verti. 
cal cross-section of a plate, showing the corru 
gations with the holes a in the tops of them. 
IS 
r 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255480.txt	(No Model,) 
W, K WEBB. 
DEVICE FOR CONNECTING BOOTS OR SHOEs, 
No. 255480, 
Patented Mar. 28, 1882. 
 
Z72272es so. 2. 
24?&62 eve() 
26, 26 -66-664-1. 
| Zzzrez262: 
SAuzz, 12%, 
? 72%%2% 
-2%7726-27 
-au-all 
N. pett Rs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM K. W. EB B, OF NORTH BRIDGETON, MA IN E. 
DEVICE FOR CONNECTING BOOTS oR SHOES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 255,480, dated March 28, 1882, 
Application filed January 16, 1882. (No model.) 
IS 
To all chom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. K. WEBB, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at North 
Bridgeton, in the county of Cumberland aud 
5 State of Maine, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in a Device for Connect. 
ing together Boots or Shoes; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, reference 
being had to the annexed drawings, making a 
art of this specification, and to the letters and 
figures of reference marked thereon. 
Figure I of the drawings is a perspective 
view of a pair of shoes, showing them connected 
together by my improved fastening device; 
and Fig. 2 is a detail view of the fastening de 
Wes. 
O 
25 
The present invention lhas relation to 
tain new and useful devices for connecting to 
gether the rights and lefts of boots and shoes. 
Previous to my invention it was usually the 
custom to connect the boots or shoes together, 
after being finished, by a string or cord of 
suitable length, knotted at its ends to prevent 
it drawing through the holes in the heels. 
This method was a very tedious one, taking 
considerable time, and frequently the knots 
would pull through the holes and the rights 
and lefts become separated from each other; 
and, further, when trying on the boots or shoes 
it was found necessary in some cases to cut 
the string in order to separate them. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
string whereby the boots or shoes can be con 
nected together much quicker than heretofore 
and detached without the necessity of destroy 
ing or cutting the string, as will be hereinaf 
ter described, and subsequently pointed out 
in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, A B repre 
sent respectively the right and left of a pair 
of shoes connected together by a cord or string, 
C, of any suitable material and of the required 
length. To the ends of the string Care attached 
45 bars a, preferably of sheet metal, stamped out 
So 
55 
75 
and bent into shape and around the ends of 
the string, so that the bars will be crosswise 
or at right angles to the length of the string 
when in the boot or shoe, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The bars a may be slightly pointed or rounded 
at one end, so as to facilitate their entering 
the holes in the heel. The bars a, as will be 
noticed, are tubular a portion of their length 
for the attachment of the ends of the cord or 
string, and semi-tubular the remainder of their 
length to form seats b for the string to rest in 
when the bars are brought on a line there with, 
so that the bars can be passed through the 
holes their entire length without any incon 
Venience. 
In fastening or connecting the shoes together 
the bar at is turned down on a line with the 
string C, so that the latter will rest in the seat 
b. and be out of the way. The pointed or 
rounded end of the bar is theninserted through 
the hole in the heel of the slhoe from the out 
side and the opposite bar connected in like 
manner to the other shoe, thereby securely 
connecting the rights and lefts of each pair 
together without danger of their becoming 
separated, as would be the case were the ends 
of the string knotted. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
A device for connecting a pair of shoes, con 
sisting of a cord or string provided at each 
end with a bar, a, which is tubular a portion 
of its length and semi-tubular the remainder, 
and having the cord or string secured to said 
bars, and adapted to be used substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM K WEBB, 
Witnesses: 
JACKSON CLARK, 
FRANK SEAVEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255580.txt	(Model.) 
S. BORTON & C. H. WILLCOX. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
MACHINE FOR, SEWING WELTS OR HEMS ON FABRICS, 
No. 255,580. 
 
Patented Mar. 28, 1882. 
Azz7zesses 
&,111o osov 
C.J4& 
Z7zzvezdors: 
44, 47%at-3, 
S-77% z, 
(Model.) 
2 sheet-sheet 2. 
S. BORTON & C. H. WILLCOX. 
MACHINE FOR SEWING WELTS OR HEMS ON FABRICs, 
No. 255,580. 
Patented Mar, 28, 1882, 
 
 
 
W 
zo 
1 se 
1iza 
 
 
F (SNS 
fast 2 N See 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STOCKTON BORTON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, AND CHARLES H. 
WILLCOX, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., ASSIGNORS TO THE WILLCOX & GIBBS 
SEWING MACHINE COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
MACH NE FOR SEWiNG WELTS OR HEMS ON FABRICS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 255,580, dated March 28, 1882. 
- 
Application filed January 10, 1882. (Model.) 
 
Io in the following specification. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, STOCKTON BORTON, of 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
and State of Pennsylvania, and CDARLES EI. 
5 WILLCOX, of New York city, in the county and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Machines for Sewing 
Welts or Hems on Knit Goods and other 
Fabrics, which improvement is fully s-t forth 
This invention is designed for use in form 
ing Welts upon hoisery, underwear, and other 
knit goods by stitching through a fold in the 
main body of the fabric, and also through the 
15 portion turned over to form the welt or hem, 
and by trimming the edge of the said turned 
Over portion simultaneously with the stitch 
ing. The said invention may, however, be 
used upon other fabric, and, at least in part, 
2O for other purposes and in other connections. 
It may be considered as an improvement upon 
the apparatus described in our application filed 
July 8, 1881, and numbered 37,422. In said 
application is described a guide for the folded 
25 edge of the material, combined with a sewing 
and trimming mechanism, and arranged be. 
tween the line of trimming and the line of 
sewing. 
The present invention comprises the conn 
3o bination, with a sewing and trimming mechan 
ism, of an overhanging guide adapted to be 
in contact with the inner surface of the fold 
in the material, and also of a guide to regu 
late the width of the hem or welt, the two 
35 guides being preferably connected and made 
of one piece of metal. 
It further comprises, first, the combination 
and arrangement of the overhanging guide and 
the folded-edge guide, and the combination of 
4o the same with the sewing and trimming mech 
anism; second, the construction of said guides 
So that seams or thick portions may pass be 
tween the two guides without interfering with 
their efficient action; and, third, certain pecu 
45 liarities of construction, hereinafter indicated, 
whereby the efficiency of the guides and other 
devices is increased. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a plan 
showing the cloth-plate of a sewing-machine 5o 
with the trimmer and improved guides at 
tached; Fig. 2, a front elevation, showing 
cloth-plate and needle enlarged; Fig. 3, an end 
view; Fig. 4, a plan of presser-foot and guides, 
with the needle shown in cross-section; Fig. 5, 55 
a sectional view, illustrating the formation of 
the welt or hem; Fig. 6, a perspective view of 
one of the guide-pieces; Fig. 7, a plan of the bar 
for carrying the guides; Fig. 8, a bottom view 
of the lever for adjusting the guides on the 6o 
cloth-plate; Fig. 9, a perspective view of a 
somewhat modified form of guide; Fig. 10, a 
perspective of the presser-foot, and Fig. 11 a. 
perspective of the lower part of holding-finger 
for clamping the edge to be trimmed off, 
A is the cloth-plate of the sewing-machine, 
on which the trimmer and guides are placed. 
The trimmer represented is that for which an 
application for Letters Patent was filed by us 
October 14, 1880, No. 18,811, and it comprises to 
a vibratory blade, B, and a stationary cutter 
bar, B', as fully described in said application. 
C is the needle of the sewing-machine, C 
the needle-bar, and D the feed-surface, the 
parts being of any ordinary or suitable con- 75 
struction. The presser-foot is of half-width, 
with a turned-up toe, e, and an upright curved 
projection, e, in front of the needle-hole, which 
extends laterally also, the bottom of the lat 
eral extension e' being flush, or nearly so, with 8o 
the bottom of the presser-foot, as shown in 
Fig. 10. 
E is a holding-finger for holding down the 
trimmed-offstrip, and adjustable on the presser 
bar. 
right angles to the line of stitching, and has 
its guiding-edge f oblique to the said line, and 
is in some other respects like the folded-edge 
guide in our application No. 37,422; but it 9o 
differs therefrom in the following particulars: 
It is located entirely in front of the needle, so 
that the folded edge is left free after stitching, 
and a cutter-bar, B, of full width may be used. 
The guiding-edge is also brought nearer to the 95 
needle in front. The upper surface at g is 
curved upward, corresponding with the toe e 
of the presser-foot. The bar F is made sep 
8 
The folded-edge guide F is adjustable at 5 
65 
. 
255,5S0 
out the overhanging guide ki, and is not pro 
arate from the guide proper, F, which is de 
tachably connected therewith by the screws ll, 
vided with the curved recessf. 
so that guides with different depth of guid 
The manner of sewing a welt or hem is as 
ing-edge may be substituted for one another, 
follows: The edge of the fabric is folded over 
according to the thickness of the fabric. The 
to give a hem of the desired width and leave 
a margin to be trimmed off. The fold is then 
lever G, instead of having an eccentric boss, has 
inserted under the overhanging arm k, around 
on the bottom a sot, h, in which the pin h on 
guide i, into bend it, leaving the main body of 
the bar F works. The guide F is also specially 
adapted at the front to co-operate with the 
the goods folded over the guide i, with the fold 
overhanging guide. The overhanging guide 
against the edge of guide F and the free edge 
of fabric projecting over said guiding-edge, as 
for the inside of the fold, which keeps the 
work against the folded-edge guide E, is formed 
The machine, being started, 
shown in Fig. 5. 
by the edge i of an arm, k, overhanging the 
sews through the upper layer of fabric and the 
cloth-plate. 
This arm forms part of the bent fold beneath, which is held in position by the 
strip H, and serves also as the guide to regul- edge of guide F. The surplus material on the 
free edge is removed by the trimmer. The 
late the widtl of the welt or hem, its length 
only care required on the part of the operator 
from the extreme point of the edge i to the 
is to keep the fabric straight and well into the 
bend it being equal to said width. 
bend it. The curved passage around the guide 
The strip H is attached to a raised portion, 
m, on the guide F, and is held in place by the 
i allows seams to pass without difficulty, while 
screw l', which passes through the guide F, 
the extension e' of the upright on the presser. 
and is tapped into an arm, f', of said bar, and 
foot takes out the curl in the edge of the fabric. 
by ears or lugs l', which prevent it from mov. 
It is obvious that modifications may be made 
ing horizontally. The guiding-edge i is curved, 
in the details of construction without depart 
and the opposite edge of the folded-edge guide 
ing from the spirit of the invention, and por 
tions of the latter can be used separately. For 
F is cut away or recessed at f, concentric there. 
example, the guide-strip H might be used with 
with, so as to leave a curved passage of uni 
out the guide F, or other suitable overhanging 
form width between them. The strip H being 
guide adapted to enter the fold could be em 
attached to an elevation, n, space is left be 
ployed; but the same should then be placed 
low for the edge of the material to pass. 
The upper surface of the folded-edge guide 
in closer proximity to the needle and the press 
adjacent to the needle is cut away or provided 
er-foot should be adapted to receive it. The 
with a curved or segmental groove, f', just be 
curved form of guiding-edge i would not of 
low the lateral extension e' of the upright e. 
course be required in such case. 
w 
The object of this groove is to allow the press 
Having now fully described our said inven 
tion and the manner of carrying the same into 
er-foot to bear upon the thinnest fabric, the 
extension e sinking more or less into the 
effect, what We claim is- 
groove when the bottom of the presser-foot is 
1. The combination, with sewing and trim 
ming mechanism, of an overhanging guide 
below the top of the adjacent guiding-edgef. 
The upright ef prevents the fabric from curling 
adapted to enter the fold of a Welt or hem and 
arranged with respect to said sewing and trim 
over and being caught by the needle, while 
ming mechanism substantially as described. 
the extension eis always close to if not scrap 
ing the free edge of the fabric, and effectually 
2. The combination, with sewing and trim 
ming mechanism and a folded-edge guide, of 
takes out the curl. 
an Overhanging guide adapted to enter the 
The position of the guides with respect to 
fold guided by the aforesaid folded-edge guide, 
each other and to the needle-bar and presser 
foot of the machine for medium-weight goods 
substantially as described. 
is shown in the drawings-that is to say, the 
3. The combination, with sewing and trim 
extreme points of the folded-edge guide F and 
ming mechanism, of means for controlling the 
of the curved-edge guide i are in line with each 
width of a welt or hem folded as described, 
other and lie in the same, or approximately 
and for guiding said Welt or hem to the afore 
said mechanism, substantially as set forth. 
the same, vertical plane, with the axis of the 
4. The combination, with an edge-guide 
needle slightly oblique to the direction of the 
having its guiding-edge arranged relatively to 
feed, the extreme point of the guide F at the 
the stitching mechanism of a sewing-machine 
rear being just in front of the needle. For 
as described, of an overhanging guide adapted 
heavier work the carrying-bar F, with the 
guides, will be adjusted the required distance 
to enter a fold and having its guiding-edge in 
front of the guiding-edge of said edge-guide 
to the right. 
and substantially in line there with, so as to 
It will of course be understood that the 
crowd the fold against the latter, substantially 
guides are selected with reference to the work 
to be performed. There is no need of having 
as described. 
the strip H adjustable with reference to the 
5. The combination, in a machine for sewing 
welts or hems on fabrics, of the folded-edge 
guide F; but, if desired, the connection be. 
tween the parts could be adjustable by having 
guide and the overhanging horizontal arm 
adapted to form a guide within the fold guided 
a slot in the strip H. 
by the aforesaid folded-edge guide, and also by 
The guide shown in Fig. 9 is to be used with 
w 
a 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
255,5S0 
3 
35 
40 
45 
guiding or supporting the welt or hem itself to 
11. A presser-foot having an upright pro 
control the width thereof, substantially as de-jection in front of needle- hole, with lateral 
scribed. 
extension flush, or nearly flush, at its lower 
6. The combination, with a guide formed by edge with the bottom of the presser-foot, sub 
an overhanging arm adapted to enter a fold, stantially as described. 
12. The combination, with a presser-foot hav 
of a guide recessed opposite the end of said 
arm, substantially as described. 
ing a lateral extension, of the folded-edge guide 
7. The combination, with a guide formed by cut away or grooved, as described, beneath 
an overhanging arm adapted to enter a fold, said extension, as set forth. 
13. The combination, with a presser-foot 
of an edge-guide recessed opposite the end of 
the arm and provided with a guiding-edge in such as described, of a folded-edge guide adapt 
line or approximately in line with said end, 
ed to guide the outer edge of the told and lo 
substantially as described. 
cated adjacent to and alongside of said presser 
S. The combination, with a presser-foot hav- foot, and an overhanging guide supported in 
ing a turned-up toe, of an edge-guide alongside front of the presser-foot and adapted to enter 
of said foot with its upper surface curved up- the fold guided by the aforesaid edge-guide, 
ward corresponding with said toe, substan- substantially as described. 
tially as described. 
14. The combination, with an overhanging 
9. A sewing-machine guide adapted to guide guide, of a folded-edge guide having its guid 
the outer edge of a fold and located adjacent ing-edge of considerable depth opposite the 
to and alongside of the presser-foot, and hav. said overhanging guide and diminishing in 
ing a guiding-edge entirely in front of and in depth beyond the same, substantially as de 
close proximity to the needle and slightly scribed. 
oblique to the line of stitching, substantially 
In testimony whereof we have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
as described. 
10. A set of guides for Welting or hemming 
ing witnesses. 
fabric,and comprising, in combination, a folded 
STOCKTON BORTON. 
edge guide and an overhanging guide attached 
CEIAS. H. WILLCOX 
to an elevation on the folded-edge guide back 
from the guiding-edge, the said edge being re 
cessed or cut away opposite said overhanging 
guide, substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN C. PURKIs, 
GILMAN E. JoPP. 
O 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255680.txt	J. SCHMIDT, 
APPARATUS FOR FILLING CAPSULES, 
Patented Mar. 28, 1882, 
(No Model.) 
No. 255,680. 
 
Witnesses: 
6, 727 6 (23 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHANN SCHMIDT, OF NUREMBERG, BAWARIA, GERMANY., ASSIGNOR TO 
VERGHO, RUHLING & CO., OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
APPARATUS FOR FILLING CAPSULES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 255,680, dated March 28, 1882. 
Application filed September 29, 1881. 
No model.) 
IS 
2 o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, Jo IANN SCHMIDT, of the 
city of Nuremberg, in the Kingdom of Bavaria 
and Empire of Germany, have invented a cer. 
tain new and useful Improvement in Apparatus 
for Filling Capsules, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to devices for enwrap 
ping medicine so as to be swallowed without 
Io experiencing the offensive taste of the same; 
and it is my object to produce a simple appa 
ratus by which the medicine may be inclosed 
between two wafers formed of a circular and 
concave shape, and that will enable anybody 
to make their own capsules as they are required. 
For this purpose my invention consists of 
the method and devices as hereinafter described 
and specifically claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a sectional view of a stamp having a 
wafer attached that is to form the cap portion 
for a capsule; Fig. 2, a cross-section of a shal 
low box containing a pad of hair or felt or 
other moisture-absorbing and elastic material; 
25 Fig. 3, a plan view of a plate of rubber that is 
perforated for supporting a series of concave 
wafers on their edges; and Fig. 4, a sectional 
view of the rubber plate with a ready-formed 
capsule placed thereon, and with the stamp in 
3o position for disengaging the wafer that forms 
the upper half of the capsule. 
Like letters represent corresponding parts 
in all the figures. 
A denotes the stamp, which is secured to the 
shank a of a knob, b. The shank a of the 
knob is surrounded by a sleeve, B, and the 
hole in said sleeve through which the shank a 
is passed is counterbored for forming an an 
nular chamber around said shank that will ad 
mit of a coil-spring, d, which surrounds said 
shank and presses the knob b upward in said 
sleeve. 
Into the bottom face of sleeve B, and near 
the exterior edge of the same, are secured 
45 three (more or less) pointed wires, g, that pro 
ject through corresponding holes in plunger 
A near the periphery of the same, and the bot 
tom face of said stamp A is concaved to corre 
spond with the shape of the wafers e. 
5o D is a plate of rubber or other elastic mate 
35 
, 
55 
rial, having a series of circularholes, fpunched 
therein, which are sufficiently smaller in diame 
ter than the wafers, each of said holes being 
intended for receiving and holding one of these 
wafers while they are filled with powdered 
medicine. For this purpose these wafers e are 
made concave at one side and convex at the 
other, with a straight flange or edge, so as to 
somewhat resemble a miniature soup-plate in 
shape, and they are composed of a paste of 6o 
flour that is pressed and baked between heated 
molds. 
E is a shallow box or pan that contains a pad 
of hair, felt, or other absorbent, and which is 
to be soaked with water. 
For making capsules I place as many wafers 
as capsules are desired, with their concaved 
sides up, in as many holes in rubber plate D, 
and fill each with the required amount of pow 
dered medicine. Then I place the same num 
ber of wafers with their convex side up on a 
piece of thick pasteboard. Now I grasp the 
sleeve B of stamp A with the hand and pick 
up one of the wafers on the pasteboard by 
pushing the points g through the edge of the 
same, when the convex side of said wafer 
will enter the concave portion in the stamp, as 
shown in Fig. 1. The edge of this wafer I 
moisten on the dampened hair pad E, and next 
I press the wafer down upon a wafer that has 8c 
been previously filled with medicine, when the 
edges of the two wafers will stick together, 
entirely inclosing the medicines; and, finally, 
I press the forefinger down upon the knobb 
while I slowly raise the sleeve, whereby the 
spring d is compressed and the points g are re 
tracted into the stamp A, when the capsule 
will drop off, 
The wires g are provided near their points 
with a small annular groove for better holding 
the wafer e. 
Heretofore gelatine capsules have been in 
general use, which, however, will not always 
dissolve in a sick stomach, while flour-paste 
wafers will be dissolved without difficulty by 
simply becoming moist. 
As will be noticed, the method and appa 
ratus above described for making capsules is 
very simple, and will be desirable for every 
family. 
95 
75 
. 
t 
OG 
2 
255,680 
I am aware that it is not new to mold the 
2. The stamp A, with shanka and knobb, 
two sections of capsules by means of a spring- and the sleeve B, with spring d and points g, 
stamp having concaved lower end; and I am in combination with the rubber plate D, hav. I5 
also aware that it is not new to tunite such sec-ing perforations fall substantially as and for 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
and then pressing them together. I therefore 
make no claim thereto. 
have hereunto set my hand this 3d day of Au 
gust, 1881. 
5 tions after filling by first moistening the edges the purpose described and shown. 
JOHANN SCHAIDT. 
What I claim is- 
1. The stamp A with shank a and knobb, 
Io in combination with the sleeve B, spring d, . 
and points g, all substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
Witnesses: 
LEONH H AHN, 
MAX LEWINGER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255780.txt	(No Model. ) 
No. 255,780, 
S. GISSINGER, 
NUT LOCK, 
Patented Apr, 4, 1882. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
SAMUEL GISSINGER, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
NUT. LOC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 255,780, dated April 4, 1882. 
Application filed February 7, 1882. 
(No model.) 
f 
45 
55 
O 
'f 
steel or semi-steel or other sheet metal having 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL GISSINGER, of elasticity, and is bent into the form indicated 
in Figs. 1 and 2, so as to form the locking-plate 
F and spring G, with the knuckle H, for form 
ing the binge, in combination with the pintle E. 
I am aware that hinged plates have been 
used in connection with fish-bars for locking the 
nuts upon the bolts; but such hinged plates 
have been found objectionable, which is due 
to the fact that the jarring action of the cars 
upon the rails very frequently displaces said 
plates, and thus allowing the nuts on the bolts 
to be jarred off. 
By constructing the locking-plate as herein 
before described, and providing it with the 
hinge G, said plate will be held firmly in its 
proper position between the nuts with sufficient 
force to prevent any displacement of it, and 
Set can be readily turned out, as indicated by 
the dotted lines in Fig. 2, when necessary so to 
do, for the removal of the nuts off of the bolts. 
The line of force of the spring G upon the 
knuckle H is above the axis of the pintle, as 
indicated by the line I, and therefore it will 
require considerable force to turn the hinged 
locking-plate F out, as shown by said dotted 
lines, and it will be impossible for any jarring 
of the rails to displace said plate. 
Having thus described my improvement, 
what I claim is 
The locking-plate F, having spring G, and 
hinged on the rod or pintle E, in combination 
with the fish-bar B, bolt or bolts C, and nut or 
nuts D, substantially as herein described, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and State 
of Pennsly vania, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Nut-Locks; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
nut-locks; and it consists of a hinged spring 
holding-plate for locking the nuts on the bolts 
of the fish plate or bar, the pintie of said hinge 
being connected to two of said bolts, all of 
which will hereinafter more fully and at large 
appear. 
To enable others skilled in the art with which 
my invention is most nearly connected to make 
and use the same, I will proceed to describe 
its construction and operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of my specification, Figure 1 is a vertical 
and transverse section of a rail for railways, 
fish-bar, and hinged spring holding-plate; Fig. 
2 is a transverse section of: a fish-bar, hinged 
spring holding-plate, and its pintle. Fig. 3 is 
a face view of the fish-bar, hinged spring hold. 
ing-plate, and its pintle. Fig. 4 is a face view 
of a blank for forming the locking-plate. 
Reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, A represents the rail for railways; B, 
the fish-bar for coupling rails together; C, the 
bolt, and D the nut for attaching the fish-bar to 
the rails. To two of the bolts C is attached a 
rod, E, in the mannerindicated in Fig. 3-that is 
to say, bending each end of the rod around the 
bolts and slightly bending the rod outwardly 
from the fish-bar, as indicated in the accoun 
panying drawings. 
The blank in Fig. 4 is formed from sheet 
SAMUEL GISSINGER. 
Witnesses: 
A. S. H. JoHNSTON, 
W. S. COLWELL. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255880.txt	No. 255,880. 
R. MOODY. 
MILLSTONE, 
Patented Apr, 4, l882. 
 
UOta Ozole SS ey. 
- 
///evay o/Coogez, 
ZZ toye7c-7. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
s 
RUFUS MOODY, OF NORTH MONMOUTH, MAINE. 
MLLSTONE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 255,880, dated April 4, 1882. 
Application filed February 26, 1880. 
from the periphery of the stone to the eye. 
The intermediate ridges consist of the outer 
facets or skirts, c, which are level, and from the 
inner margins of which the said ridges slant 
down toward the eye, as at d, Fig. 2. 
In Fig. 1 the facets a, c, and d are indicated 
by 1, 2, and 3, respectively. The facets d (or 
3) are furrowed tangentially, as shown. 
A' is the bed-stone, which is level and pro 
vided with radial furrows. 
Having now described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
As an improvement in millstones, the com: 
bination of the plane or level bed-stone with 
the runner, having slanting radial furrows, and 
intermediate ridges, having level or plane skirts 
and slanting tangentially-furrowed facets, as 
herein shown and specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
RUFUS MOODY. 
- 
- 
35 
40 
Witnesses: 
- 
D. Y. MooDY, 
JOSIAHL. ORCUTT. 
o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RUF US MOODY, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at North 
Monmouth, in the county of Kennebec and 
5 State of Maine, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Millstones; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to letters or figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a bottom plan view of the run 
ner. Fig.2 is a section on the line acac, Fig.1; 
and Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional view of the 
bedstone. 
Corresponding parts in the several figures 
are denoted by like letters of reference. 
This invention relates to millstones; and it 
consists in certain improvements in the same, 
which will be hereinafter fully described, and 
particularly pointed out in the claim. . . 
In the drawings hereto annexed, A repre 
sents the runner-stone, having the eye b and 
furrowed with radial grooves a, which slant 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US255980.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
C. W. HENSHAW. 
MACHINE FOR SHARPENING. MOWER AND REAPER KNIVEs. 
No. 255,980. 
 
Patented Apr. 4, 1882. 
21-4. A 
A. E. 
T 
ea 
... 
N, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
H 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CEIARLES W. HENSEIAW, OF MIDDIEWAY, WEST VIRGINIA. 
MACHINE FOR SHARPENING MOWER AND REAPER KNiVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 255,980, dated April 4, 1882, 
Application filed February 14, 1882. (No model.) 
So 
55 
To all vion it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs W. HENSHAW, 
a citizen of the United States, residing as Mid 
dleway, in the county of Jefferson and State of 
West Virginia, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Sharpen. 
ing the Knives or Cutting-Biades of Mowing 
Machines; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to the letters alld figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to a portable implement 
for sharpening or grindling the knives or cut 
ters of mowing-machines without the necessity 
of removing the same from the mowing-ma 
chine; and the invention consists in the con 
struction and arrangement of parts, as herein 
after more fully described and claimed. . 
In the annexed drawings, which fully illus 
trate the invention, Figure l is a side elevation 
of my improved sharpening-machine, showing 
the same in position for operation. Fig. 2 is a 
plan of the same, and Fig. 3 is a sectional de 
tail. 
Like letters indicate like parts in the several 
A represents a flanged clamping - bar, to 
which the adjustable bed or block B is attached. 
This block is recessed on its under side for en 
gagement with the flange a on the bar A, upon 
which it is thus adapted to slide to vary the 
position of the operative mechanism. The 
block B carries an upright threaded standard, 
C, to which is attached a bifurcated bearing, 
D, in which is journaled the shaft E. The arms 
of the bearing D are connected on one side by 
a bar, D', having a stud, upon which is jour 
naled the gear F. This gear meshes with a 
pinion, e, on the shaft E, and is provided with 
a handle,f, by which it may be turned so as to 
rotate said shaft. 
It will be seen that the engagement of the bi 
furcated bearing D with the threaded stand 
ard C is such that by simply turning the bear 
ing it may be raised or lowered upon said stand 
views. 
ard to any desired position. A handle, d, is 
attached to one arm of the bearing, by means 
of which it is held while operating the gear F 
with the other hand. The bearing may thus 
be turned upon the standard C, so as to vary 
the direction of the grinding or sharpening as 
required, and this without intermitting the ro 
tation of the shaft IE. 
To the end of the shaft E is fixed a cone, G, 
of emery or other suitable grinding material. 
This cone may be held in place by means of a 
nut, g, so as to be readily renewed when de 
sired. 
By referring to Fig. 3 it will be observed that 
the connection of the lower end of the standard 
C with the block B is such that said standard 
may be inclined to any desired position by sim 
ply turning the set-screw b. This set-screw 
passes through the block B and supports the 
standard, the lower end of which is threaded 
to correspond with similar threads formed on 
the inner end of the set-screw. 
It is obvious that by turning the screw b the 
standard C will be tilted forward or back to a 
corresponding degree, so as to vary the inclina 
tion of the shaft E and its grinding-cone G. 
Near the outer end of the shaft E may be at 
tached a loose-fitting handle, c, which is de 
signed to be used, instead of the handled, when 
it is desired to exert a greater grinding-press 
ure on the knife or blade to be sharpened. 
At the forward end of the bar A is a clamp, 
A', by means of which (it being provided with 
a set-screw, (t) the apparatus is attached to 
the cuttel-bar of a mowing-machine, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2. 
It will thus beseen that the 
sickle-bar, knives, or cutters of a mower may 
be readily sharpened and ground without re 
moving them from their position in the mow 
ing-machine. 
. The operation of my grinding and sharpen 
ing machine is as follows: The cutter-bar of 
the mowing-machinehaving been first elevated 
and secured in a convenient position, the bar 
A is attached thereto by means of the clamp 
A'. The block B is adjusted upon the bar A, 
and the set-screw b is turned so as to incline 
the standard C and shaft E in such a manner 
as to bring the inner cone, G, in proper con 
75 
95 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
2 
255,9so 
O 
IS 
standard secured to said block and adapted to o 
tact with the teeth of the sickle-bar. The gear 
wheel F is now revolved, so as to rotate the be inclined forward and back, a bearing ad 
shaft E and its grinding-cone, the apparatus justable upon said standard and carrying a 
gear-wheel, and a shaft having a pinion mesh 
being held meanwhile by means of the handle 
ing with said wheel and a grinding-cone se 
5 d, attached to the bearing D, or by means of 
cured to the end of said shaft, substantially as 45 
the handle c, that is fitted loosely upon the op 
erating-shaft, the latter handle being especi 
shown and described. 
2. In a sharpening-lmachine, the combina 
ally designed for the purpose of exerting an 
tion, with the flanged bar A, having clamp A', 
increased pressure of the cone G upon the sur 
of the recessed block B, adjustable upon said 
face to be ground. By means of the handle 
bar, the threaded standard C, secured thereto, 5o 
d the bearing D is turned so that the direc 
and the set-screw b, for adjusting the inclina 
tion of the shaft E may be varied from side to 
tion of said standard, substantially as shown 
side as required. This handle may also be 
and described. 
used to move the parts back and forth upon the 
3. In a sharpening-machine, the combination, 
bar A as required. 
with the bar A, block B, and threaded stand 
During the operation of grinding or sharp 
ard C, of the adjustable bearings D D, gear 
ening the sickle-bar may be shifted within 
wheel F, and shaft E, having pinion e and 
its guard as required, and by loosening the 
grinding-cone G, substantially as shown and 
clamp A' the grinding apparatus may also be 
described. 
shifted upon the cutter-bar from time to time 
4. In a sharpening-machine, the combination, 
as the operation of grinding progresses. 
of the bar A, having flange ( and clamp A', the 
By this method of sharpening or grinding 
recessed block B, adjustable thereon, and pro 
the knives or cutters of mowing - machines 
vided with threaded standard C and set-screw 
without removing them therefrom it is obvious 
b, for adjusting the inclination of said stand 
that a great saving of time and labor is effected. 
ard, the adjustable bearings D D, attached to 
The machine is also adapted to sharpen said 
said standard and provided with handled, 
cutters after the same have been removed from 
gear-wheel F, journaled in bearing D' and 
the mower. In this case the cutter is clamped 
having handlef, and the shaft E, journaled in 
to a suitable board or other support, to which 
bearing D, and provided with pinion e, loose 
the grinding apparatus is also secured, or the 
fitting handle c, and grinding-cone G, substan 
latter may be furnished with a separate sup 
tially as shown and described. 
port, the operation of the machine being in 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
other respects the same as already described. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
presence of two Witnesses. 
35 I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a sharpening-machine, the combina 
tion of a flanged clamping-bar, a recessed 
block adapted to slide thereon, a threaded 
CEIARLES W. HENSHAW. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP MAURO, 
A. R. BROWN. 
25 
70 
W 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256080.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 256,080. 
 
R. P. VALENTINE, 
FEED WATER HEATER, 
Patented Apr, 4, 1882. 
INVENTOR, 
BY Vulco. e. 
AITORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD P. VALENTINE, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO PETER COLLAMORE, 
FEED WATER HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,080, dated April 4, 1882. 
Application filed December 16, 1881. (No model.) 
- 
I5 leakage. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RICELARD P. VALEN 
TINE, of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Feed-Water 
Heaters, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The objects of my improvements in feed 
water heaters are. to obtain the best possible 
Io heating action from the exhaust-Steam, there 
by raising the temperature of the Water to a 
point which will secure precipitation of for 
eign matters, and to allow expansion and con 
traction of the tubes without risk of causing 
To that end my invention consists in the 
novel construction hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
2 o drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
heater, and Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the 
A is the Water-chamber, consisting of a lhol 
low cylinder provided with heads a (t. 
B is an outer cylinder, forming a jacket 
around the water-chamber, closed at its ends 
3o by heads b b, on the bottom one of which the 
cylinder A is separated by legs ( c. 
C C C are tubes bent in U form; and secured 
at their ends in the lower head a of the cylin 
der A. 
35 d is the .inlet Water-pipe, passing through 
cylinder B to the inner cylinder, and e is the 
outlet water-pipe extending from the upper 
end of cylinder A. 
f is the exhaust-steam pipe, passing through 
the bottom of cylinder B, and coupled by a 
slipjoint to head a of the inner cylinder, so 
as to communicate with tubes C at one end. 
i is the exit-pipe for steam at the top of cylin 
der B. 
45 g is the blow-off pipe from the water-chapm 
ber for draining off precipitated matter, and 
h is a drip pipe and cock for relieving cylin 
der of water. All the pipes are to be provided 
with stuffing-boxes, to prevent leakage and 
25 same. 
So allow for expansion and contraction. 
4 O 
w 
In operation the steam entering by pipe f 
rises in the U-shaped tubes C, and descend 
ing in the outer legs enters cylinder B below 
the water-chamber, from whence it rises nat 
urally in the space between the two cylinders 55 
to the discharge-pipe i. 
The water entering chamber Aby piped comes 
into intimate contact with the pipes C, and also 
the surface of the cylinder, which is heated by 
the steam in the jacket. It is thus possible 6o 
to heat the water to or above a boiling tem 
perature, at which mineral and other impuri 
ties will be precipitated. The water-chamber 
being entirely inclosed, loss of heat by radia 
tion is avoided. Further, it is to be observed 65 
that there being no rigid connection between 
the two cylinders they are free to expand and 
contract independently, and the U shape of 
the pipes allows of their expansion and con 
traction without loosening the joints. At k 7o 
on the outer cylinder is a hand-hole plate, 
covering an opening which gives access to the 
inside of the outer cylinder and to the mid 
hole plate of the inner cylinder. 
the top of the heater When exhaust-steam is 
alone used; but in cases when a higher ten 
perature is required in order to settle the im 
purities in the water, a live-steam coil may be 
introduced in the upper part of the heater, as 8o 
shown by dotted lines. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
the jacket B, provided with the heads b and 
the steam-exit pipe i, the inlet Water-pipe d, 
and the outlet water-pipe e, of the Water-cham 
ber A, provided with the heads a, the feet c, 
and the U-shaped pipes C, having their ends 
received in the lower head of the said water 
chamber, and the exhaust. pipe f, passing 
through the head of the jacket and coupled by 
a slip-joint to the head of the said water-cyl 
inder directly under the end of the said tubes, 95 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In a feed-water heater, the combination, with 85 
The U-shaped tubes C will extend to nearly 75 
90 
RICHARD P. WALENTINE, 
Witnesses: 
E. J. HADLEY, 
L. E. CRANE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256180.txt	- 
(Model.) 
No. 256,180. 
I. D. W. WARNER. 
MANUFACTURE OF CORSETs, 
Patented Apr. 11, 1882. 
/zzzzzz: 
 
 
2. 2. 2. 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer. Washington. . C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
1. DE VER WARNER, OF BRIDGELORT, CONNECTICUT. 
MANUFACTURE OF CORSETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,180, dated April 11, 1882. 
Application filed Jantary 1, 18S 1. (Specineus.) 
 
d 
75 
My invention consists in a node of natufac- 
To all achon it may concern: 
l, are sewed together along the linea, a jib, a 
Be it known that , i. DE WER WARNER, of is placed between the sheets close to the stitch 
Bridgeport, Fairfield county, Connecticut, have ing, and another line of stitches formed at a 
invented certain Improvements in the Manu- close to the edge of the rib, another rib is 
5 facture of Corsets, of which the following is a placed between the sheets and stitched, and 
specification. 
so on until the requisite number is inserted. 
Many advantages result from this nude of 
turing corsets, boson-pads, &c., whereby to se. inserting and securing the ribs. In the first 
cure a better set and shape, impart greater ri- place, no more title is required than usually 
to gidity and stiffness, reduce the cost of making beetled to form the ordinary pockets, thus sav 
the articles, aud secure greater durability. 
iing the time, labor, and expense of inserting the 
Beretofore it has been common ill making bones longitudinallyinpockets already formed; 
- 
corsets to nuake the entire corset of cloth in secondly, the ribs serve as guides after one is 
sectious pieced together, forting the pock- inserted to insure straight lines of stitching 
is ets in each section, and inserting the bones or with but little care on thc part of the operator; 
ribs separately, either in the pockets before the thirdly, sheets of fabric are drawn by the stitch 
connection of the sections together or after ing close over the bones, so that the latter are 
each connection is made. This mode of manu- held so tight in the pockets that there can be 
facture is open to serious objectious. Thus the no play and wear, nor can the corset wrinkle 
to insertion of the ribsorbones is tedious, delays up on the ribs, while the rigidity of the article 
the manufacture, aid consequently increases is greatly increased without detracting from 
the expense, unless the pockets are male so its flexibility. Another important advantage 
large that theribs can bestipped in quickly; but of themode of inserting the ribs results from 
a rib lying loosely in a pocket will not ii) part the ability to use rib material formed in con 
, , such stiffness to the corset as one which is tinuous lengths and drawn from a reel and cut 
closely confined, and is at to work in the off at the extreme edge of each section. Thus 
pocket until the end forms a hole in the cloth, a reel, IB, supplied with a coil of rib material, 
and, further, is liable to break, while the cor- (as tampico fiber fortuned into a continuous 
set is apt to creep up and wrinkle upon the strip,) is mounted in learings adjacent to the 
3o bones and lose its shape. Another objection sewing machine, and the operator, taking the 
to the ordinary methods of manufacture arises loose end, inserts it between the fabrics of a 
from the difficulty of pressing, condensing, and corset-section, A, sews along a line close to the 
finishing an article so irregular in shape as a lib, then places another section, A, on the 
corset is when all the sections are counected work-plate, and adjusts the rib between the 
and boned. I overcome these objections in sleets and sews it, and after this is completed 
the manner which I will now describe and by does the same with a third scction, A, and so 
the means shown in the drawings, in which- ou with succeeding sections, as many as may be 
Figure 1 is a transverse section, showing tie desirable, and after the rib is secured in the 
thanner in willich the bones are laid in the sec. last section, A, cuts it close to the edge at y, 
4o tions. Fig. 2 is a view slowing the manner of and carries the loose elict to the first section, 
manufacture where continuous rib imaterial is and repeats the operations again and again 
used. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal seetiola through until the requisite number of ribs are in each 
section. The ribs are then cut close to the 
the boned corset-section. 
I diseard the ordinary method of forming edges y of each scution, thus forming sections 
45 pockets and of inserting the bones or ribs lon. in which the ribs are closely confined in the 
gitudinally, and instead thereofplace cach boile pockets in the act of forming the latter, aud 
or rib in position between the two sheets of in which such ribs extend fully to the edges, 
fabric constituting the front and back portions The latter fact is one of nucla iunportance, as 
of the sections or corset, and then sew the two when the binding b, Fig. 3, is applied aud 
5o together by a line of stitches as close to the rib sewed along the lite e to the edge of the sec 
or bone as possible. Thus the sheets bc, Fig. tion the ribs are sewed firmly to the binding 
3 S 
95 
co 
and to the cloth pieces bc, the stitclies passing 
through the ribs, so that it is impossible for 
the ribs to slip or work loose, while their elids 
bear on the bilding, and thoto2 the body cloth, 
5 and cannot work through the latter. The curl 
ing of the edges of the corset, which results 
when the ribs extend only a part of the length, 
is also prevented. 
In place of sewing the ribbed sections to 
Io the other sections, and thus forming the body 
of the corset, and then pressing the latter, as 
is ordinarily done, I press each section while 
it is flat, and before sewing it to the other parts, 
thus avoid the difficulties of finishing an ir 
5 regularly-shaped article, and an enabled to 
place a number of flat sections upon the flat 
plate of a press, and at one operation apply 
such a powerful pressure as will contense and 
solidify the sections, imparting great stiffness 
zo and elasticity, giving a fine finish to the stir. | 
face, and it the case of the use of tampico ribs 
or others of like character flattening and cou 
solidating the latter in the pockets and ten 
pering the tampico, if the press-plate is hot, 
25 After the sections thus firmed are sewed to 
gether the corset may be ironed to flatten and 
finish tie seams. 
I have found that by the operatious above 
described I am enabled to greatly reduce the 
3o cost of making the corset and the length of 
time required, and make it corset which is 
 
more rigil, more di rable, aid cleaper than 
those made in the ordinary way. 
clain 
1. The within-described improvement in the 35 
Inaufacture of corsets, the same fonsistiugin 
bothing the corset by placing the supporting 
boiles, or ribs between the outer a tid inner 
sheets of fabric, and then sewing the latter to. . 
gether close to the edges of the ribs, thereby lo 
securing the ribs in the pockets as the same 
are made, substantially as set fortli. 
2. The hole of bothing corset sections lerei 
set forth, the same consisting in insertiug the 
entl portion of a continuous stiff supporting 45 
strip or rib between the outer and inner faces 
of the section, sewing the same together along 
the edge of the rib, and then sewing the rib 
prior to again itserting and sewing it in place, 
susta litially as set furth. 
3. it the natuficture of corsets the node 
of fluisling (lescribed, consisting in inserting 
tle bones in pockets in the separate sections, 
(pressing the same, and then sewing then into 
the corset, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed inly name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
- 
SS 
SO 
I. i.) E VER WARNER. 
Witnesses: 
CHARIES E. FosTER, 
F. O. AICCLEARY. 
It is hereby certified that in Letters Patent No. 256, LSO, grantel April 11, 18S, ti 
I. De Ver Warner of Bridgeport, Conii., for an improvenient in the Manufacture i? 
Corsets, the word severing, in line 48, page 2 of the printed specification attached 
to and forming a part of said Ietters Patent, was erro Leously printel 'sewing;" that 
the proper corrections have been inade y the files and records if t ( 
'it it () ti?t, in it 
are lucroloy made in said Ietters lite Lt. 
Signed, countersigned and sealed this 18th day of April, A. I. SS2. 
(SEAL.) 
Countersigned: 
E. M. MARIL), 
Commissioner of I feet is. 
A. E. E. 
.cfing Src tetry of the Interior. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256280.txt	(No Model.) 
F. BROWN. 
COUPTING, 
No. 256,280. 
Patented Apr. ll, 1882. 
 
Awww.csv 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FELIX BROWN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,280, dated April 11, 1882. 
Application filed December 31, 1881. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FELIX BROWN, a citizen. 
of the United States, residing at New York, in 
the county and State of New York, have invent 
ed new and useful Improvements in Couplings, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention"relates to couplings for shaft 
ing and the like; and it consists in a recessed 
body provided with clamps and a pair of wedges, 
each having at one end a screw.bolt adapted 
to receive a tightening-nut, all constructed and 
arranged as hereinafter more fully described. 
This invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which Figure l is a sec 
tion in the plane 22, Fig. 3. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tion in the planey y, Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tion in the plane a ac, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter A designates the 
body of the coupling. 
C is the opening for the shafting or axis, 
which opening is bounded on one side by the 
body A, while on its other side it is bounded 
by the clamps B B. These clamps rest with 
one of their sides against shoulders or recesses 
in the body A. The free ends of the clamps 
B are subjected to the action of wedges E, 
which wedges are provided with or form part of 
screw-boltsD, onto which nuts F can be screwed. 
These nuts F rest against the faces of the body 
A and against the outer faces of the clamps B, 
as shown in Fig. 2, and by tightening the nuts 
F the wedges E are caused to press against 
the free ends of the clamps B, thus diminish 
ing the size of the opening C and firmly clamp 
ing the ends of shafting or of axles that may 
be placed in said opening. By this arrange 
ment the clamps B, of which there are two, 
are also prevented from falling out of the body 
A or from becoming displaced. By unscrewing 
the nuts F the clamps Band all the parts with 
45 
So 
55 
in the body A can be removed from out of the 
same, and if any of the parts should break or . 
become worn out they can thus be readily re 
placed. 
I am aware that couplings have been made 
provided with clamps in connection with tight 
ening-screws-as, for example, in the patent 
of Charlton, No. 126,183, of April 30, 1872; but 
the disadvantage of these couplings is that if 
the clamps should become worn or broken they 
cannot be taken out and replaced by new ones, 
because these claimps form part of the body. 
By my device, on the contrary, any part which 
is broken or worn can be removed and replaced 
in a very short time, saving labor and expense. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a coupling, of a re 
cessed body with the clamps B, located with 
in the same, and the devices for tightening up 
the clamps, consisting each of a wedge having 
at one end a screw-threaded bolt adapted to 
receive the tightening-nut, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, in a coupling, of the 
recessed body A, with the clamps B, each hav 
ing a portion of one of its sides resting against 
a shoulder within the said body, and the de 
vices for tightening up the clamps, each con 
sisting of a wedge applied against one side of 
the clamps and having at one end a screw 
threaded bolt, whereon the tightening-nut is 
fitted, substantially as described. 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 75 
FELIX BROWN. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
J. WAN SANT VOORD, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 
I 5 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256380.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL RUMPFF, OF APRATH, NEAR ELBERFELD, PRUSSIA, GERMANY. 
MANUFACTURE OF DYE STUFF OR COLORING - MATTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,380, dated April 11, 1882. 
Application filed January 13, 1882. (No specimens.) Patented in England March 21, 1881, in France March 31, 1881, in Belgium 
April 15, 1881, and in Germany October 11, 1881. 
preferably in the form of its soda salt, although 
other similar salts of my new acid may be used, 
dissolved in five hundred liters of water to 35 
which had been added one hundred and forty 
kilograms of ammonia often percent. strength. 
The new coloring-matterisimmediately formed, 
as shown by the following equation: 
CHA-3 chan-Not-Cio Ha-36Ra --2NH3= 
Ms 
- 
Monosulphonic acid of 
SO3H 
- 
ONa, 
diazoazo-benzole. 
--wr--- 
Sodium salt of 
beta-naphthol. 
Alpha-monosul 
pinonic acid. 
New coloring-matter. 
The coloring-matter is precipitated by the 
addition of common salt, and is purified by re 
dissolving and reprecipitation. 
The proportions of the ingredients named 
in the foregoing description are susceptible of 
considerable variation without materially af. 
fecting the result. 
I claim- 
As a new product, the new scarlet dye-stuff 
which results from the reaction of diazoazo 
benzole with alpha-monosulphonic acid of beta 
naphthol, substaintially as described. 
CARL RUMPFF. 
4o 
45 
So 
55 
Witnesses: 
J. FERD. KEDENBURG, 
J. BOCK, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CARL RUMPFF, residing 
at Aprath, near Elberfeld, in the Kingdom of 
Prussia and Empire of Germany, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in the Manu 
facture of Dye-Stuffs or Coloring-Matters, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a new scarlet dye 
stuff which results from the reaction of diazo 
aZ0-benzole-monosulphonic acid with the soda 
salt of my alpha-monosulphonic acid of beta 
naphthol. 
The preparation and properties of my alpha 
monosulphonic acid of beta-naphthol, and also 
of its sodium salt, are described in my applica 
tion for patent filed April 8, 1881. 
I prepare my new dye-stuff as follows: I dis 
solve fifty kilograms of the monosulphonic acid 
of the amidoazo-benzole in five hundred liters 
of water, to which the necessary quantity of 
ammonia has been added, and cool the mixture 
to about 50 centigrade. To the cooled mix 
ture I add eighty kilograms of muriatic acid 
and fifty kilograms of pure nitrite of soda of 
one hundred per cent. strength, and then I al 
low the whole to stand at rest for several 
hours, when the transformation into diazoazo 
benzole will have been completed. In the next. 
operation I slowly pour the mixture prepared 
as described into a solution composed as fol 
lows: seventy-five kilograms of my crystallized 
alpha - monosulphonic acid of beta-naphthol, 
O 
25 
l 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256480.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 256,480. 
J. HOWES. 
FAUCET. 
Patented Apr. 18, 1882. 
, - 
 
| 
IE 
tI ESSES 
l?e 
???. ?. ?, 
F7 
ITVE 
Il tOr 
oohn JHowe 5. 
(a 
?? 
N. PETERs, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.c. 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HOWES, OF WORCESTER, MASSACEUSETTS, 
FA U CET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,480, dated April 18, 1882. 
Application filed November 10, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all who? ?? ??? ???cer? : 
Be it known that I, JoHN HOWEs, of Wor 
cester, in the county of Worcester and State. 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Faucets; and I 
declare the following to be a description of my 
said invention sufficiently full, clear, and ex 
act to enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification. 
The object of my presentinventionis to pro 
vide a desirable and practicable faucet for wa 
ter- service, &c., which shall be economical in 
manufacture, simple and durable in construc 
tion, easy of operation, and convenient and 
efficient in use. I attain these objects by a 
faucet the mechanism of which is constructed 
and organized as illustrated and described 
herein, the particular subject-matter claimed 
being hereinafter definitely specified. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front view of 
my improved faucet. Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
tion through the same at line at it, Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a horizontal section at line v 
Eig. 4 is 
a horizontal section at line it v. Fig. 5 is a 
horizontal section at line aca, Fig. 6 is a hori 
Zontal section at line gy). Fig. 7 is a side view 
of the valve-piece. Fig. 8 is a sectional view 
at line & 2, looking toward the top end of the 
valve-piece; and Fig. 9 is a sectional view at 
line ZZ, looking toward the lower end of the 
valve-piece. 
Referring to the drawings, A denotes the 
body of the faucet, which is composed of the 
hollow neck portion, having a suitable con 
necting-nipple at one end and provided at its 
other end with a vertically-chambered head, 
A", containing the horizontal valve-seat a, and 
a depending hollow projection, af, having a 
coarse screw-thread formed on its exterior sur 
face for receiving the nozzle or thimble B, as 
illustrated. 
The upper opening of the head-chamber is 
closed by a screw-cap or hollow nut, A*. The 
valve-seat at is formed by an annular flange or 
bevel about the central bore or passage, as 
shown. The head is recessed or under-grooved 
at its junction with its lower threaded portion, 
as at b, for the reception of the top end of the 
thimble B, which is made so as to match said 
. 
groove or offset b and to form a close joint 
there with, when it is screwed up on the part 
a', so that there will be no liability of water 
escaping at that point by being forced out be 
tween the screw-threads by the back-pressure 
occasioned when a hose or filter is attached to 
the faucet-nozzle. A packing-ring may be in 
serted in said recess b, if desired, or a close 
fitting surface formed therein to match the 
top end of the thimble. 
The valve-piece D, which is made in the 
form shown in Fig. 7, is arranged within the 
chamber of the head portion A' to act in Ver 
tical direction and to be closed by the press 
ure of the water. Its face or packing D' rests 
upon the seat (, while its body portion, which 
is provided with twisted ribs or flanges d', 
passes down through the passage or bore of 
the part a' below the seat, and its reduced end 
or stem disguided by the flanges or ribs d', 
fitting within the hollow of the parta', or by 
a small eye-bar, f, fixed across the lower end 
of the passage, as illustrated. 
A spring, E, may be fitted within the cap to 
press the valve downward upon its seat. Said 
spring is of coiled wire, and is made to fit 
closely within the cavity of the cap A, and 
around the top projection of the valve D, so as 
to give a direct downward pressure and to ob 
viate any liability of shaking or rattling. 
Lugs and grooves l are formed on the valve 
ID and shell A, which intermesh and retain the 
valve from turning on its axis, and a rotative 
strain is put upon the valve by deflecting the 
current of water toward one side, and produc. 
ing a wluirl or spiral action within the head 
chamber by means of a boss or projection, l, 
located at the junction of the neck and head 
within the shell, and formed on one side of the 
passage only, so as to direct the flow of water 
toward the opposite side, causing it to impart 
its rotative tendency to the valve always in 
one and the same direction, and thus prevent 
ing any tendency of the valve to shake or vi-. 
brate by the action of the waterflowing through 
The twisted flanges d also serve 
the faucet. 
to give rotative strain for holding the lugs and 
grooves in contact toward one side, and there 
by preventing any rattling or noise when draw 
ing water from the faucet. 
A lip or projection, In, is formed within the 
I. ? 
IS 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
95 
I OO 
 
 
is liently operated. 
: 
; 
; 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
passage for deflecting the Water upward from 
the seat a, and thereby obviate any tendency 
of the stream of water to force itself beneath 
the rear edge of the valve more than at any 
other portion of its circle, and thereby cut or 
wear off the valve ol' seat unequally at its op. 
posite sides, 
The thimble B is fitted internally with a 
bridge or bearing step, c, that strikes the valve 
stem di and raises the valve from its seat when 
said thimble is turned on the screw-threaded 
projection af. A handle, I, is arranged on the 
thimble, by means of which it can be conven. 
A stop-pin, K, is fixed in the under side of 
the neck for arresting the movement of the 
handle I and thimble B when the valve is 
, closed. : Said stopisin the present instance pro 
vided with a hingejoint to permit of its being 
raised, as indicated by dotted lines, Fig. 2, thus 
allowing the handle to be swung completely 
around when desired. . 
The faucet is opened by swinging the han 
dle tothe front and closed by swinging it back 
against the top. When the faucet is com 
pletely opened the top end of the thimble 
makes a tight joint against the head at b, and 
prevents any leakage at that point when a hose 
is used on the faucet, as it may be by making 
the end of the thimble with a screw-coupling, 
as indicated in dotted lines, Fig. 2. 
At the lower part of the thimble or nozzle 
Bone or more thin bridges or plates, e, arear 
ranged across the passage, extending vertically 
for some five-eighths of an inch, more or less, 
These plates serve to prevent 
as indicated. 
the spiral action of the water from continuing 
to the exit-opening, and cause the delivery of 
the Water in a straight smooth stream. These 
plates may be put in in the form of a cross, as 
in Fig. 5; or a single plate may be formed 
across the passage, or two parallel plates may 
be employed, as preferred. 
By making the valve independent of the 
thimble or sleeve, and arranging it for action, 
as set forth, a free and easy working faucet is 
produced, and it is impossible to crush or in 
jure the valve face or packing by force of the 
screw, as with some of the ordinary-constructed 
faucets. The opening and closing action of the 
valve, being governed by the screw - threads 
without connection of the parts, gives all the 
advantages of a compression-cock without the 
disadvantages incident thereto. 
By removing the cap A ready and conven 
ient access is obtained to the chamber for re 
moval of the valve or any foreign substances 
which may be admitted through the pipes and 
find lodgement in the chamber. 
If desired, a wheel or circular rim could be 
employed in lieu of the handle I; but I pre 
fer the construction showu. 
I do not desire to claim broadly a valve closed 
by the pressure of the water, as I am aware that 
such feature is old. I am also aware that a ro 
| tating thimble-nozzle has been used for operat 
ing a faucet, but in a different construction 
from that herein shown and described. 
Certain features of my improvements in fau 
cets having been described and claimed in an 
application for separate Letterslatent bearing 
even date here with, it will be understood that 
I do not include herein such features of inven 
tion as form the subject-matter of the claims 
embraced in liny said accompanying applica 
tion. 
What I claim as of my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters. Patent, is 
1. The combination, substantially as herein 
before described, of the body or shell A, hav 
| ing the externally-screw-threaded i projection 
a' and valve-seat a, formed as shown, the in 
dependent valve-piece D, provided with the de 
pending stem d, supported and guided within 
the part a? of said shell, and the screw-threaded 
thimble or nozzle B, having the bridge bar or 
plate e across its interior below the end of the 
valve-stem, the parts being constructed and 
adapted for operation as and for the purposes 
set forth. . . 
2. The combination, as hereinbefore de 
scribed, of the body A, having the screw 
threaded extension a?, provided with an offset 
rim or groove, b, at the junction thereof with 
the head, and the screw-threaded valve-oper. 
ating thimble B, having its top end fitted to 
and adapted for making a close joint at said 
offset or groove when in its elevated position, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The shell A, provided with the deflecting 
lug or flange m, located within the neck-passage 
adjacent to the valve-seat a, whereby the cur 
rent of water is deflected upward, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. In a water-service faucet, the combina 
tion, with the shell A and valve D, having in 
termeshing lugs and grooves h for preventing 
rotation of said valve, of an inclined projec 
tion, l, or deflector, whereby a whirl or spiral 
action is imparted to the water in contact with 
said valve, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
5. The combination, with the rotating screw 
threaded thimble B, provided with the handle 
I, of the hinged stop-pin K, fixed in the under 
part of the shell A, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
Witness my hand this 5th day of November, 
A. D. 1881. 
. 
. 
 
JOHN HOWES. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. H. BURLEIGH, 
R. A. MORGAN. 
| ?? 
2 ? 
i 
25 
45 
So 
55 
?? 
70 
is 
O 
II 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256580.txt	(Model.) 
H. MAUL & F. LANDENBERGER. 
No. 256,580. 
 
PARASOL, 
Patented Apr. 18, 1882. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HUGO MAUL AND FREDERIK, LANDENBERGER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PARASOL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,580, dated April 18, 1882. 
Application filed February 21, 1882. (Model.) 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that we, HUGo MAUL and 
FREDERIK LANDENBERGER, of New York, 
county and State of New York, have invented 
an Improvement in Parasols, of which the foll 
lowing is a Specification. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of our im 
proved parasol, showing it spread open. Figs. 
2 and 3 are side views of the same, showing 
it contracted or folded. Fig. 4 is a detail sec 
tional face view, on an enlarged scale, of the 
parts used for holding the parasol contracted. 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
convenient apparatus or attachment to para 
sols, umbrellas, and the like for holding them 
folded together and permitting them to be 
readily spread open. 
Heretofore means have been devised for 
holding parasols closed, either in form of elas 
tic bands slipped over them or in form of me. 
tallic rings adapted to receive the ends of the 
ribs. The sliding bands were unsightly and 
apt to be lost, and the metallic rings were not 
only expensive attachments, but, moreover, 
required the ribs to project beyond the cover 
ing, in order to be enabled to engage into the 
metallic receivers, thereby to an extent also 
making the parasols unsightly. 
Our invention consists in placing on the 
Outer side of the parasol-covering a pair of 
crossing cords provided with a slide, through 
Which they both pass in such a manner that 
when this slide is moved toward the center of 
the covering-that is to say, toward the stem 
of the parasol-the latter can be opened; but 
When the slide is pulled down on the closed 
parasol, the parasol will thereby be held 
closed. These cords, with their slide, consti 
tute an ornamental attachment to the para 
sol, making it look handsome in every respect, 
are inexpensive, and absolutely effective for 
the purpose for which they have been designed. 
In the drawings, the letter A represents the 
stem of the parasol. 
B is the silk or other covering of the para 
Sol. 
D and E are the two cords which are fast 
ened to the upper part of the stem, or to the 
covering where it joins the upper part of the 
stem, and which are crossed and passed 
through a slide or button, F, as shown in Fig. 
4. The lower ends of these cords are at G 
fastened to the covering B of the parasol. 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
The point of attachment G is diametrically op 
posite the point of attachment a of the upper 
ends of the cords to or near the parasol-stem, 
So that When the parasol is expanded, as in 
Fig. 1, the top of the stem. A will protrude 
through the loop made by the cords D E. 
When the parasol is contracted it is only nec 
essary to pull the slide F downward, thereby 
increasing its distance from the point of at 
tachment a until the slide F is nearly oppo 
site the point of attachment G. (See Figs. 2 
and 3.) The lower parts of the cords DE, 
which are between the slide F and the point 
of attachment G, now form a small loop, which 
will hold the parasol contracted. 
For releasing the parasol it is only neces 
sary to raise the slide F toward the upper part 
of the stem A, thereby relieving the cover 
from all interference by said cords D and E. 
The slide F may be a perforated button or a 
ring, as shown in Fig. 4, or plate, and has for 
greater convenience, and also for improving its 
appearance, a suspended tassel d, which will 
also answer as a handle for readily moving it. 
In like manner the cords D E may have tas 
sels b b at their lower ends, beyond or near 
the point G of attachment, to heighten the ef. 
fect of the attachment as far as appearance 
goes. 
We have said that the cords D and E are 
attached at a but it is quite clear that in 
stead of using two separate cords, D and E, 
the two strands D and E may be parts of the 
same cord, which may be tied around the up 
per part of the parasol and stitched or other 
Wise fastened thereto, as is clearly indicated 
in Fig. 4, and when we speak of the two cords 
D and E we desire to embrace also the two 
strands D and E when part of one and the . 
same cord. . 
We claim- 
The parasol attachment consisting of the 
two strands or cords DE, connected to the 
parasol at at and at G, and combined with the 
slide F, through which said cords or strands 
are passed, and in which they are crossed, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
- 
HUGO MAUL. . 
FREDERIKLANDENBERGER, 
. 
Witnesses: 
GUSTAV SOHNEPPE, 
WILLY G. E. SCHULTZ. 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256680.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 256,680, 
 
D. M. HEMING WAY, 
I 
FLOOD GATE, 
Patented Apr. 18, 1882. 
za Z 
S 2 a 2 ZZAZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
1 
DAVID M. HEMING WAY, OF Newport, MISSISSIPPI. 
FLooD-GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,680, dated April 18, 1882. 
Application filed December 12, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
5o 
ficiently above tho bottom of the race to per 
mit the ordinary volume of water passing 
through the raceto escape underit. Thegates 
Band Gare connected by a chain or cord, K, 
which passes under the guide I and over the 
notched portion of the standard E, the said 
cord being detachably secured to a pin, L, 
driven in the gate B. The function of the 
guide or block I is to take up the slack of the 
cord K When the gates are in a horizontal po 
sition, the distance between the termini of 
the cord then beingless than When the gates 
are in their normal position, and also to make 
the draw of the cord or chain at an angle to 
the standard E. 
The operation of my improved flood-gate is 
as follows: As long as the pressure or volume 
of Water is in a normal condition the water 
will passover the head-gate and escape under 
the other gate. In case of a flood or an un- 65 
usual volume or pressure of water, the lower 
gate will be pressed outward, opening the 
lead-gate and permitting the excess of water 
to escape. 
. 
closed and unaffected by the pressure of the 
water, the rope may be detached, so that it will 
not be operated by the lower gate. 
Having thus described my invention, What 
I claim, and desire tosecure by Letters Patent, 
The combination, with the head-gate and 
its notched standard, hinged in the race, as de 
scribed, of the lower gate, similarly hinged, 
and provided with a suitable guide, and the 
connecting rope orchain, the whole adapted 
to operate substantially as specified. 
In testimony Whereof I affix my signature, 
i in presence of two witnesses, this 15th day of 
October, 1881. 
In case it is desired to keep the head-gate 7o 
75 
IS- 
DAVLD M. HEMING WAY, 
VVitnesses: 
W.T. BRoWN, 
M.V, WYNN, 
W 
A 
V 
T 
O 
To all vhom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID M. HEMING. 
WAY, ofNewport, in the county of Attala, and in 
the State of Mississippi, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Flood-Gates; 
and Ido hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to the letters of I eference marked tlnere 
| 
on, making a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in flood-gates; and it has for its objects 
to provide certain means whereby the gates 
will be automatically opened in case of an un 
usual pressure or quantity df water and re 
5 lieve the race, as more fully hereinafter speci 
These objects I attain by the apparatus 
fied. 
illustrated il the accompanying drawings, in 
Which 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
my improved flood -gate, and Fig. 2 a longi 
tudinal vertical sectional view of the same. 
The letter Aindicates a portion of the race, 
and B the head-gate, which is pivoted so as 
to swing freely upon a transverse rod, C, and 
which abuts at its lower end against a trans 
verse beam, D, secured to the bottom of the 
race. This gate bas a board alongits opper 
edge, hinged or otherwise flexibly connected 
thereto orto the standard E, which may be 
raised from the gate proper when itis desired 
to allow the water to escape before it risessuf 
ficiently high to passover the upper part of 
said auxiliary board. 
35 The letter E indicates a vertical standard 
' forming part of the gate B, the said standard 
being provided with an angular notch, F, at 
its upper edge. 
The letter G indicates a gate pivoted to a 
transverserod, EI,below thegate B, and Iaguide 
secured to one side of said gate, for the pur 
pose more fully hereinafter specified. The 
gate B is of such height that when closed, or 
in its normal position, the water Will flow over 
45 its upper edge, and the gate Gis elevated suf 
3o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256780.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
W. WILSON. 
No. 256,780, 
ADWERTISING TABLE, 
Patented Apr. 18, 1882. 
 
W LL CURE 
EVERY 
FoRM OF DISEASE 
twvesva 
(to JA, 
S 
24.4- 
- 
wi:"...a 
WWW YY We ow 
by E. 
Wve wity's 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM WILSON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
ADVERTISING-TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,780, dated April 18, 1882. 
Application filed July 12, 1881. (No model.) 
- 
5 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM WILSON, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Advertising-Tables, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
simple and comparatively inexpensive table for 
advertising purposes, whereby a single trans 
parent plate is utilized to cover the table-top, 
and through which the advertisements can be 
inspected, said plate being capable of conven 
ient removal and replacement by a simple 
sliding movement for changing the advertising 
sheets. 
The invention consists, in an advertising-ta 
ble, of a top provided at its ends with projecting 
guide-bars act, arranged parallel to each other, 
in combination with a transparent plate adapt. 
ed to be held and to slide longitudinally be 
tween said guide-bars and to retain an adver 
tising-sheet in position to be seen through the 
plate on the table, as and for the purpose here 
in after described. 
This invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which Figure 1 repre 
sents a vertical section of my table. Fig. 2 is 
a plan or top view. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter A. designates a 
table, which is provided on its top with guide 
bals ( a to receive a transparent plate, B. 
These guides are arranged respectively at op 
posite ends of the table, and are beveled in 
wardly, as clearly shown in Fig. 1, and the 
transparent plate is beveled at its edges and 
adapted to slide longitudinally between said 
guides for the purpose of removing it from or 
inselting it in the same, the latter serving to 
retain the transparent plate in proper position. 
Witnesses: 
- 
W. HAUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 
Beneath this transparent plate is formed a 
space for the reception of one or more sheets, 
b, of paper or other suitable material, on which 
are printed or otherwise marked one or more 
advertisements. 
The space beneath the transparent plate 
i may be made deep enough to receive a series 
of superposed advertising-sheets, so that dif 
ferent advertisements can be displayed by 
changing the order of the sheets. 
The table constructed as described is in 
tended particularly for hotels and restaurants, 
and it serves to keep the advertisement per 
manently before the eyes of the parties using 
the table, while the advertising-sheets can be 
changed with ease and convenience, it simply 
being necessary to slide the transparent plate 
from between the guide-bars on the table-top. 
I do not broadly claim a table provided with 
movable transparent plates covering adver 
tisements, whereby the latter can be inspected 
through the plates, as such is not new with 
me; but 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
In an advertising-table, a top provided at its 
ends with projecting guide-bars a.a., arranged 
parallel to each other, in combination with a 
transparent plate adapted to be held and to 
slide longitudinally between said guide-bars, 
and to retain an advertising-sheet in position 
to be seen through the plate on the table, as 
and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
WILLIAM WILSON. L. s. 
45 
So 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256880.txt	(No Model.) 
G, CASE, 
BARBED FENCE WIRE, 
No. 256,880, 
Patented Apr. 25, 1882. 
 
A 2, 3. 
A. 
2 
A 24 
C 
F-Se-= 
A.' 2, 2. 
2. 
427,6 
A2, 6 
l/l/ it resses. 
(244. 4.643. - 
2, 2-.7Al-1) 
live tutor. 
PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, o, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE CASE, OF DE KALB, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO LESLIE E. SUNDER 
TAND, OF SAME PLACE. 
BARBED FENCE WIRE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,880, dated April 25, 1882, 
Application filed January 3, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE CASE, of De 
Kalb, in DeKalb county, State of Illinois, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Barb-Fences; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional view thereof. Figs, 3, 4, 
5, 6, and 7 are detached views of the same. 
Corresponding parts in the several figures 
are denoted by like letters. 
This invention relates to a certain improve 
ment in barb-fences; and it consists in the pe 
culiarity of the fastening for securing the barb 
to the wires of the fence, substantially as here 
inafter more fully Set forth and claimed. 
In the annexed drawings, B refers to one of 
the wires of the fence. 
D refers to a plate, preferably of a rectangu 
lar shape and having a central opening or ori 
fice, the office of which will be seen herein 
after. 
C is the barb, both ends of which may be 
sharpened or pointed to prick the animal in 
the event of contact there with, to prevent his 
further approach, and thus avoid the breaking 
of the fence or other damage thereto. The 
fastening of the parts together is accomplished 
as follows: The wire barb is bent, as shown in 
the drawings, so as to receive the wire of the 
fence. Its ends are then passed through the 
orifice or opening of the plate, uniting the lat 
m 
IC 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
ter thereto, after which they are hammered 
straight in any known way, so as to stand ver 
tically, as shown, to project above and below 
the wire of the fence, or stand at right angles 
to the wire. It will be seen by thus hammer 
ing the barb the plate is bent or bowed, as 
shown, as is also the wire of the fence, thus 
clamping or securing each part firmly in place 
and all the parts together. 
The chief or characteristic feature of my in 
vention is the plate, which, it will be observed, 
not only furnishes a broad bearing-surface 
against which to fasten the parts, but also par 
tially takes up the space between the wires, 
and can readily be seen by the approaching 
animal, to prevent coming up against the barbs 
and being severely wounded, as frequently oc 
curs in the use of barb-fences as heretofore 
constructed, because of the absence of this 
feature-the plate-and its arrangement as 
shown in my invention. 
This invention is also characteristic for its 
simplicity, is easy of construction, and cheap. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S-le 
The combination and arrangement, substan 
tially as shown and described, of the upright 
perforated plate D, barb C, and fence-wire B, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
GEORGE CASE, 
Witnesses: 
A. M. UPSON, 
LUCY R. GEORGESON, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US256980.txt	fNo Model.) 
 
No. 256,980, 
P. H. COTTON. 
LAMP AND REFLECTOR FOR SAME, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PATRICK II. COTTON, OF DALL AS, TEXAS. 
LAMP AND REFLECTOR FOR SAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 256,980, dated April 25, 1882. 
Application filed February 3, 1882. (No model.) 
5 
Figure 1 is a perspective of my invention, solder a short piece of sheet metal, the edges 65 
and at another corner with a screw-threaded 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PATRICK H. CoTTON, a collar, C, adapted to receive an ordinary burn 
citizen of the United States of America, resid-er, C. 
To adapt the lamp for suspension against a 
ing at Dallas, in the county of Dallas and State 
of Texas, have invented certain new and use. perpendicular surface, there is applied a strap, 55 
ful Improvements in Lamps and Reflectors for D, secured by solder at the back and over the 
Same; and I do hereby declare the following seama in the band a, and extended upwardly 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the a desired distance, and then slanted downward 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in ly and secured to the top plate a short dis 
the art to which it appertains to make and use tance back of the burner-collar C. The up. 6o 
the same, reference being had to the accompa- right portion of strap D is perforated for the 
nying drawings, and to letters or figures of reception of the nailor screw from which the 
reference marked thereon, which form apart of lamp is to be suspended; and upon the slant. 
this specification. 
ing portion of the strap, at E, is secured by 
part of the body of the lamp being broken of which are turned to form flanges e, project 
away; and Fig.2is a central transverse section. ing inwardly and parallel with the body of the 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts same, which piece of metal I shall term a 
in all the figures. 
grooved clip, and which is adapted to re 
My invention has for its object the produc. ceive the tongue F, soldered to the reflector G. 7o 
tion of a lamp and reflector adapted the one 
The object and advantage of constructing 
to the other, and in such points of construction the clip E in this manner are to adapt it to be 
as shall contribute to the effectiveness of both, soldered to the strap without liability of the 
in that no part of the former obstructs the solder running into the clip, so as to impede 
rays of light reflected by the other, and both the passage of the tongue therein, as is coin- 75 
shall be of simple and cheap construction; monly the occurrence when simply a loop of 
and my invention consists in certain devices metal is soldered to the strap. 
The reflector G is the frustum of a cone, the 
and combinations of devices, hereinafter fully 
described and specifically claimed. 
top of which is covered by a concavo-convex 
consists of the top and bottom plates, a af, of h, soldered or otherwise attached thereto upon 
the form of an equilateral triangle having the the outside. The bottom of the frustum is in 
corners rounded, and the band a, of uniform a plane other than parallel to its top, and its 
width, beaded at each edge, at a', and joined at profile may be in straight, curved, or combined 
its ends in a seam, a, at the center of one of straight and curved lines, provided always 85 
the sides of the triangle, which preferably con- that the lower side of the reflector shall termi 
stitutes the back of the lamp-body. The seam nate beneath the burner and in close proximity 
being made, the edges of the triangular plates to the burner-collar C, as shown. The upper 
are sprung into the beading and soldered there- side of the reflector is perforated for the easy 
in, as shown at a. This manner of construct- passage therethrough of the chimney D. By 9o 
ing the joints of the body facilitates the solder. constructing the reflector of the shape shown, 
ing of the parts together in a satisfactory man- supporting it upon a slanting strap, locating 
ner and results in a construction that protects its lower side below the burner and closely 
said joints, as the edges of the band and not thereto, and constructing the lamp-body in the 
the joint bear the weight, abrasion, and wear form shown and locating the burner at one 95 
occasioned when the lamp is set upon a table corner thereof the maximum quantity of light 
or other support and the exposed sides are is derived and reflected over the largest possi. 
seamless, 
ble area and the minimum of shadow produced 
The hody is provided at one corner of the by the lamp itself is projected, while at the 
top plate with a screw-capped filling-hole, B, same time the reflector can be removed with- I oo 
A represents the body of the lamp; and it disk, g, having a ring or other suitable handle, 8o 
256,9so 
out removing the chimney, the chimney re 
moved without removing the reflector, the 
lamp can be filled without removing either, 
and it has a broad base for contact with a wall 
when suspended, and its seams are fully pro 
tected from abrasion and wear. 
To remove the reflector without removing 
the chimney, the tongue F is withdrawn and 
the reflector lifted above the chimney, the 
opening in the top of the reflector being suffi 
ciently large to permit the withdrawal or par 
tial withdrawal of the tongue with or without 
a slight tipping of the chimney, and the flexi 
bility of the tongue permitting a slight circu 
lar movement of the base of the reflector dur 
ing its removal from the clip. 
It is evident that by making the profile o 
the frustum curved at the lower edges the re 
flector may be adapted to permit more or less 
light to pass sidewise, as it is curved in out 
line, either inwardly or outwardly at said edges. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The lamp-body consisting of the triangu 
lar plates ct a', the beaded band a, seamed at 
a', and provided with the suspension and re 
flector-supporting strap D and at one corner 
with the filling-opening and at the corner op 
posite the seam a with the burner C, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
O 
25 
3O 
35 
2. The strap D, provided with the clip E, 
having its edges turned inward, in combina 
tion with the tongue F, secured to the reflector 
G, substantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination of the reflector-support 
ing strap D, slanted as shown, with the re 
flector G, consisting of a frustum of a cone, 
the lower shorter side of which terminates be 
low and beneath the burner, and the upper 
longer side of which projects beyond the chim 
ney and is perforated for the passage there 
through of the chimney, substantially as shown 
and described. 
4. The reflector G, consisting of a frustum 
of a cone, the top of which is closed by a con 
cavo convex disk provided with a handle and 
with a tongue, F, the upper side of which ex 
tends beyond and is perforated for the passage 
of the chimney, the lower side of which ex-5o 
tends and terminates beneath the burner, in 
combination with a lamp-body provided with 
a slanted strap, D, having a clip, E, thereon, 
substantially as shown and described. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 55 
45 
PATRICK H. COTTON. 
Witnesses: 
- 
W. A. TRAMMELL, 
J. Y. SANSOM, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257080.txt	(No Model.) 
C. T. SCHOEN. 
DIE FOR MAKING ELLIPTIC SPRINGS. 
No. 257,080, 
Patented Apr. 25, 1882. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CEI ARLES T. SCEIOEN, OF PEIILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALE TO CHARLES SCOTT, OF SAME PLACE. 
DE FOR MAKING ELLPTIC SPRINGs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 257,080, dated April 25, 1882. 
Application filed December 15, 1881. 
No model.) 
O 
5 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEST. SCEIOEN, of 
Philadelplbia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in the Manufac 
ture of Elliptic Springs; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, which will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
The leaves of elliptic or semi-elliptic springs 
when grooved or ribbed have heretofore been 
shaped and grooved, so far as I am aware, by 
bending them to shape, at one operation, groov 
ing one end of the leaf at another operation, 
and grooving the other end by still another 
or third operation; and it has been usual first 
to form the main leaf to a pattern of proper 
shape, and then to form each succeeding leaf 
to or on the one on which it is to lie, the formed 
s one being cold, and the one to be formed be 
ing hot. 
25 
My invention consists in an improved con 
struction of dies, whereby insteadofrequiring, 
as heretofore, so many operations and heat 
ings, each leaf may at one heating and by a 
single operation be formed into its desired 
bent or arched shape, and be also ribbed or 
grooved in each of its ends. 
Figure 1 illustrates in front elevation a pair 
of dies for practicing my invention, and a 
hydraulic press is shown for operating one of 
the dies; but any appropriate drop or screw 
press or power hammer or other power may 
be used, and the upper or lower die may be 
movable, or both, if desired. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective view of the dies; Fig. 3, a leafor plate 
as it comes from the dies, and Fig. 4 a com 
plete spring with its ribs or grooves as made 
by my process. 
The dies A and B are made the one convex 
and the other concave, and with their oper 
ative surfaces conforming to each other, the 
convex one having on its top surface a central 
rib, c, at each end, and the die B has a cor 
responding groove, d, at each end, so that 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
when the machine is operated to act upon the 
steel which is to be converted into a leaf of a 
spring the dies shall by one action shape or 
bend the spring to its arch form and at the 
same time strike up the rib or groove at each 
end, thus by a single action and at a single 
heating of the steel forming and ribbing the 
leaf complete. 
By this invention it will readily be seen that 
the cost of manufacture and of labor is very 
greatly reduced, and the fact of needing to 
heat the metal only once in practicing my new 
invention is of great importance, as it is an 
established fact that frequent heating of steel 
is injurious to it and impairs its quality, and 
every separate heating requires a separate 
handling and manipulation, if not separate 
machines also, for the different steps, and each 
of the separate steps would require as much 
time as is needed to make the complete leaf 
by my process. 
The groove or rib, when so desired, may be 
put into the leaf throughout its whole length 
by making the dies respectively with a con 
tinuous rib and groove. 
It will be evident that in operating on leaf. 
springs already bowed or bent to the required 
curve my apparatus would make the groove 
or rib in both ends, as above described. 
I am aware that springs have been made 
with a rib or groove in the ends, but I do not 
desire to claim broadly a spring having this 
feature; but I am not aware that the ribs or 
grooves have been made in both ends of the 
leaves of elliptic springs at one act and simul 
taneously; nor am I aware that the bow or 
bend and the ribs or grooves have all been 
made at one operation. 
I claim as now 
The improved dies described, having curved 
faces, the one grooved and the other ribbed, 
substantially as set forth, and adapted for 
shaping the plate and for making the grooves 
or ribs therein by one operation. 
CHARLEST, SCEIOEN. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. M. LUKENS, 
MILLER, F. SHOCK, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257180.txt	(No Model.) 
o 
F. M. MULLEN. 
CAR COUPLING, 
No. 257,180. 
Patented May 2, 1882. 
 
 
 
 
rawcus uu. MutwiNVENTOR 
M7TWASSAS. 
4.4%-24 by 
4-6-3 Yaw. Y.S& 4 7TORAAY 
w 
N, PEERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS M. MULLEN, OF MILROY, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
DAILY C. ALDRIDGE AND MARSHALL H. ALDRIDGE, BOTH OF SAME 
PLACE. 
CAR-couplin G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 257,180, dated May 2, 1882. 
Application filed March 6, 18S2. (No model.) 
TO 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCISM. MULLEN, of 
Milroy, in the county of Rush and State of In 
diana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Car-Couplings, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My improved car-coupler can be used in con 
nection with a mate of similar construction or 
in connection with an ordinary link-coupling. 
Used in pairs, it is an automatic coupler. Its 
general form is such that in altering cars hav 
ing the usual link-coupler to the improved 
style no change need be made in the accesso 
ries of the coupler, it is not liable to derange 
ments, and its cost is no greater than common 
link-couplers when the usual loss of coupling 
pins is considered. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view, part sec: ion; Fig. 2, a side view; 
Fig. 3, a front end view, part section; and Fig. 
4, a top view. 
A is the draw-bar; B, the link-socket; I, the 
link, and E the pin. In the rear of the link 
socket are cast lugs D, which have a space, C, 
between their bottom surface and the floor of 
the link-socket of sufficient height to admit the 
end of the link freel', but not of sufficient 
height to permit the outer end of the lik to 
sag materially. The link, being inserted in the 
socket B and back into the space C, will be 
supported in proper position to enter the coup 
ling of the next car. 
Fis a horizontal block, pivoted over the draw 
bar, and united to it by the pivot it. To the 
- 
35 
SS 
forward end of this block is pivoted the coup 
ling-pin E, suspended by its pivot, as shown, 
so as to stand vertically across the link-socket, 
as shown in Fig. 3. The pin, when in the verti 
cal position shown in Fig. 1, is prepared to re 
ceive the strain of the link, as with the com 
mon coupling, the abutting shoulders K in the 
draw-bar serving to relieve the pin-pivot of 
any strain. The pin is lifted to permit un 
coupling by raising the block F by means of a 
cord, chain, handle-lever, or any other suita 
ble device connected with it at G in an obvi 
ous manner. The pin E normally hangs ver 
tically, as shown, and the slots J in the draw 
bar permit the pit to swing back and up when 
pressure is applied upon its front. Thus the 
link I of Fig. 2, upon entering the socket in 
Fig. 1, would push the pin backward and up 
ward till the link end could pass under the pin, 
after which the pin would fall again into its 
normal position, but inside the link, ready to 
receive the strait of draft. If the lugs D are 
onitted, the link in tist in the act of coupling 
be sustained by hand, unless soline equivalent 
be provided in their stead. 
I clain as my invention 
The combination of draw-bar A, having lugs 
D, recess C, and slots J, pivoted block F, and 
pivoted pin E, substantially as set forth. 
FRANCIS M. MULLEN. 
Witnesses: 
Jose.PEI F. ALDRIDGE, 
RANSOMA. DUDGEON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257282.txt	(No Model.) 
E. S. BOYNTON, 
STATION INDICATOR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 257,282. 
Patented May 2, 1882. 
12.2 
AA 
z2, 4 
s 
2. 
3:23 
: 
S. f 
N 
Iss 
E EIR 
- 
essareers 
as 
LANSDOWNE 
aerers 
are sear-e-r-se 
z KELLYVILLE D 
CLIFT ON z 
(Z SPRING HILL D 
2 
2S 
32%z 
 
J12/rzesses, 
s: 4-1- 
22, 
Mavera Zaz 
-123 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 257,282. 
 
E. S. BOYNTON. 
STATION INDICATOR. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented May 2, 1882. 
NNN 
N 
S 
SS 
S 
N 
N. PEERs. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 257,282. 
   
E. S. BOYNTON. 
STATION INDICATOR. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented May 2, 1882, 
NSNS 
SO-O-O-O-CA 
al 
a 
at 
 
 
 
area 
Saa 
5% 2e. 
22 S2 77 2 3 
% fe' 
o || 
? 
% 
  
 
%& 2 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
Vitnesses g 3/02//w 
selecasaa 
Z 
 
 
 
sett? 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD S. BOYNTON, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, 
STATION-INDICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 257,252, dated May 2, 1882. 
Application filed September 28, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD STANLEY 
BOYNTON, a citizen of the United States, re 
siding at Bridgeport, in the county of Fairfield 
and State of Connecticut, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Station 
Indicators, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of indicators for which Letters Pat 
ent of the United States of America were 
granted to me, bearing date the 10th day of 
May, 1881, and numbered 241,283, in which 
the power for operating the mechanism for 
changing the position of the cards or indicat 
ing-surfaces is operated by means of a bellows 
or compressible chamber, which is collapsed 
from time to time by means of the vacuum ob 
tained from the steam-motor. 
According to the first part of my present in 
Vention the vacuum bellows or cylinder is ar. 
ranged in a horizontal instead of a vertical 
position, one end of the said cylinder being 
affixed to the exterior case and provided with 
a suitable pipe-connection leading to the vac 
uum-chamber, while its opposite end is con 
trolled in position by a rod sliding in suitable 
bearings formed on the opposite side of the ex 
terior case, the piston-rod being extended suf. 
ficiently through the casing to allow of the ap 
plication of a knob or handle for the purpose 
of operating the bellows or cylinder independ 
ently of the vacuum. The vertical motion to 
the card-elevator is obtained from the hori. 
Zontal bellows or cylinder by means of com 
pound levers operating in a manner similar to 
what are commonly known as lazy tongs. 
The second part of my invention relates to 
improvements in the construction and arrange 
ment of the card-stops. 
The accompanying drawings form part of 
this specification and describe what I consider 
the best means of carrying out the invention. 
Figure 1 represents a front view of my im 
proved device with the door removed, and 
showing the cards in working position. Fig. 2 
is a vertical section on the line a ac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a front view of the case with the 
cards removed and showing the card-elevator 
in its lower position. Fig. 4 is a similar sec 
tional view, showing the card elevator up. Fig. 
5 is a horizontal section on the line gy y of Fig. 
2, illustrating the construction and operation 
of the parallel levers. Fig. 6 is a detailed sec 
tion, illustrating the construction and opera 
tion of the card-stops. Fig. 7 is a sectional 
view of a portion of the lower part of the ex 
terior case, showing the folding corners. Fig. 
8 is a partial front view of the exterior case 
closed. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
A represents the exterior box or casing, and 
B B the doors thereof, which are held in po 
sition by set-screws ll). 
C is the center case. 
C C are guards secured to cross-bars a a to 
protect, the bellows from the action of the ris 
ing and falling cards. 
D is the card-elevator, held in position by 
the operating-levers d. 
: G is the vacuum bellows or cylinder, which 
is arranged in a horizontal position, one end 
or cap, g, being rigidly affixed to one side of 
the case A, while its opposite cap, g, is con 
trolled in position by a rod, f, sliding in suit 
able bearings, if, formed in the opposite side 
of the exterior case, A. The piston-rod g is 
extended sufficiently through the case A to 
allow of the application of a knoll) or handle, S 
g', for the purpose of operating the bellows or 
cylinder G independently of the action of the 
WC, 
J is the air-passage leading from the bellows 
or cylinder G to the vacuum-chamber. 
G is an extension formed on the end cap, 
g', of the cylinder G, and adapted to be em 
braced by the forked end of the arm d of the 
L-lever d, which is pivoted at did to cross 
bars act, forming part of the main case A. The 
forked end of the arm d is connected to the 
extension G' by means of a screw-pin, d. The 
long arm d of the L-lever d is provided with 
lateral bearings did, Fig. 5, adapted to re 
ceive a central pin, d", which also passes 
through bearings f" f', formed centrally in 
parallel bars f f, the upper ends of each of 
which are connected to a cross-piece, f', pro 
vided with pinions f, working in bearings 
formed in opposite sides of the card-elevator 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O . 
as 
35 
So 
257,2s2 
other either one or other of the stops E E will 45 
be drawn out of action, as desired. The ex 
tent of motion of the short shafts Mis limited 
by means of pins or stops in, working in slots 
a', formed in the bearings A*. 
Although I have specially described my in 
vention as adapted to be operated by means 
of vacuum, it will be readily understood that . 
by very slightly modifying the apparatus it 
may be readily adapted for use with pressure. 
The apparatus may be also employed for other 55 
than station-indicating purposes. 
The operation of this machine is similar to 
the operation of the machine described in Let. 
EE are the card-stops, which in the presters Patent No. 241,283, hereinbefore referred 
to. 
So 
6o 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a station-indicator or similar instru 
ment, the combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of a card-elevator, a vacuum or press 
ure cylinder, a lever connected to the piston or 65 
piston-rod of said cylinder, and lazy-tongs con 
necting such lever with the card-elevator. 
2. In a station-indicator or similar instru 
ment, the combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of a series of hinged cards and the 
spring card-stops E. E", constructed with in 
clines at their lower sides and with square 
shoulders above, so as to permit the ascent 
but prevent the descent of a card. 
3. In a station-indicator or similar instru 
ment, the combination, with a series of hinged 
cards, of the card-stops E. E., controlled in 
position by eccentric - pins in, operated by 
shafts M and thumb-screws on, substantially 
as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand, at New York city, this 21st day o 
September, 1881. 
- 
EDWARD STANLEY BOYNTON. 
W. L. BENNEM, 
JOHN W. RIPLEY. 
Witnesses: 
75 
iS 
D, while the lower ends are connected to a bar, 
f, working in slots at a', formed in the cross 
bars a. a. The extreme end of the long arm d 
of the L-lever d is provided with a cross-bar, 
d", formed at each end with studs or pins d', 
working in slotted bearings D', formed in the 
card-elevator D, 
H H represent the cards, which are formed 
and hinged together in a similar manner to 
io that described in Letters Patent No. 241,283, 
hereinbefore referred to. 
II, Fig. 7, represent the folding corners, 
which are also described in the said specifica 
tion. 
ent instance are in pairs on opposite sides of 
the apparatus, each pair being formed of two 
slotted plates so constructed as to work side 
by side within boxes or cases A', forming part 
of the main case A. The two stops EE are pro 
vided with a spiral spring, e, so arranged that 
the tendency of the same shall be to cause the 
beveled ends e e' of the stops E E to bear 
against the front or rear of the case at will 
and hold the cards in position. One only of 
each pair of stops is employed at a time, ac 
cording to the direction of motion of the cards, 
the stop E or E' from time to time being held 
out of position by means of a pin, m, formed 
eccentrically on the end of a short shaft, M, 
working in bearings A, formed on or affixed 
to the main casing A. The short shafts Mare 
retained in position by means of screw-pins m', 
passing through the bearings A and received 
in circular slots in in the short shafts M. The 
short shafts M are provided with thumb 
screws on', for the purpose of imparting a par 
tial revolution to the shaft, when desired, in 
order to alter and control the position of the 
card-stops EE, as desired. The eccentric-pins 
m, formed on the ends of the short shafts M 
and received in slots e 6', so formed in the 
ends of each pair of card-stops E E that by 
turning the shafts M in one direction or the 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257382.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 257,382. 
F. W. QUITMAN, 
SASH HOLDER. 
Patented May 2, 1882. 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
BY 3. 2 2 7. 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FREDERICK W. QUITMAN, OF SOUTH NORWALK, CONNECTICUT. 
SASH - HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 257,382, dated May 2, 1882. 
Application filed January 27, 1882, (No model.) 
5 
Io 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FREDERICK. W. QUIT 
MAN, of South Norwalk, in the county of Fair 
field and State of Connecticut, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Win 
dow-Sash Fasteners, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention has reference to an improved 
Sash-fastener for the windows of railroad-cars 
and other purposes; and the invention consists 
in certain peculiarities of construction herein 
after pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a front elevation of my improved win 
dow-sash fastener with the covering-plate re 
moved, and Fig. 2 an end view of the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A in the drawings represents the casing of 
my improved sash-fastener, which is screwed 
to the window-sash. The casing A is open at 
both sides, but closed by top and bottom walls, 
ah, the former of which is extended inwardly, 
so as to form a finger-rest, while the latter 
serves as a rest for a locking-bolt. A lever, 
B, is fulcrumed to the casing and extended at 
both sides of the same. The inter end of the 
lever B forms a handle, af, which is arranged 
below the finger-resta of the casing. The outer 
end, b, of the lever B is made of segmental or 
Cam shape and provided with a recess or socket 
for the insertion of an elastic jaw, d, of rubber, 
cork, or other suitable material. This jaw dis 
carried into wedge contact with the window 
frame by the weight of the sash. By taking 
hold of the finger-rest a and handle a' of the 
lever B the segmental or cam-shaped end b 
of the lever B is drawn away from the win 
dow-frame, so that the elastic jaw or facing 
40 clears the latter and permits the raising or 
lowering of the sash. A spiral spring, e, which 
is seated in a socket, e', of the casing and ar 
ranged to press upon the cam end of the lever 
B, serves to force the cam end of the same in 
outward direction when the handle end is re 
leased by the fingers. The sockete' for the 
spring is preferably cast in the casing, and is 
provided with an upwardly-inclined arm, e, 
35 
25 
So 
55 
75 
85 
which protects the spring, and with a horizon 
tal arm, e, which serves as a guide for a slid 
ing latch. 
At the lower part of the casing is guided a 
sliding latch, C, by which the sash may be 
locked to the window-frame when in closed po 
sition, the latch entering either a socket or 
engaging a lip or projection, f, of the window 
frame, as customary in sash-fasteners of this 
class. 
When it is desired to open the sash the latch 
is first withdrawn and then the inner or handle 
end of the lever taken hold of, in connection 
with the finger-rest of the casing, so as to with 
draw the jaw of the lever from contact with 
the window-frame. . 
The sash may belocked at any desired height 
by simply releasing the fulcrumed lever as the 
spring forces the elastic jaw of the lever against 
the window-frame, the jaw then binding upon 
the latter and holding the sash securely in po 
sition. 
I am aware that sash-holders have bereto 
fore been made with an inwardly-projecting 
finger attached to the case and with a spring. 
actuated cam-lever which is adapted to be 
grasped in connection with said finger. 
I am also aware that it is not new to provide 
sash-fasteners with an independent supple 
mental sliding bolt, 
IIaving thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
A sash-fastener consisting of the plate A, 
provided with a horizontal rearwardly-extend 
ed finger-rest, a, a horizontal slotted wall, h, 
and a socket, e', the lower side of which forms 
a bolt-guide, the pivoted cam-lever B, provided 
with a handle, af, the spring e, interposed be. 
tween the socket e' and lever B, and the hori. 
Zontal bolt C, having a downwardly-projecting 
handle, k, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim theforegoing as my 
invention I have signed my name in presence 
of two subscribing witnesses. 
FREDERICK W. QUITMAN. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
CARL KARP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257482.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 257,482. 
 
E. W. DURAND, 
CRATE FOR FRUIT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 9, 1882. 
N. PETERS. Photo-ithographer, washington, p. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 257,482. 
E. W. DURAND. 
CRATE FOR FRUIT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3 
Patented May 9, 1882. 
 
O fire-Is- O 
 
WZZ72 esses. 
Q-- 
fs. Sowuk 
62% le??a 
Z72-Z/e72Zoz 
itles had out 
(b1 & all 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIAS W. DURAND, OF IRVINGTON, NEW JERSEY. 
CRATE FOR FRU T. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 257,482, dated May 9, 1882. 
Application filed July 8, 18S1. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELIAS WADE DURAND, 
of Irvington, in the county of Essex and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Crates or Carriers for 
Fruit, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, making a part of 
this specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
crate or carrier for fruit, well ventilated, light, 
strong, durable, and inexpensive, in which all 
the parts are united and held together in one 
package, and so arranged as to open and close 
in the most simple and direct way, either to 
receive or display the fruit, and when open 
that all the baskets of fruit are at once fully 
disclosed, ready for inspection or removal. 
The crate or carrier being thus connected to 
gether in one package is less liable to loss or 
breakage, as a whole or in any of its parts, and 
is always ready for immediate use and trans 
portation. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
use of a revolving platform or a revolving tray. 
platform adjusted to revolve or turn in the 
Crate or carrier on a rod secured in a perpen 
(licular position in the center of the crate or 
carrier, or on pivots, as may prove most ad 
Wantageous, the said platforms to be one or 
lmore, and in any appropriate position as to ele 
vation in the crate or carrier, and adjusted to 
turn when the vertical hinged slats or front 
lid and vertical pivoted slator back lid of the 
Crate or carrier are open; or, in case a tray 
platform only is employed, as hereinafter de 
scribed, the said vertical front and back lids 
are dispensed with, the whole constituting a 
new device of its class, denominated by me a 
revolving crate or carrier. 
In the drawings the same letters indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
Figure is a front perspective view of the 
revolving crate or carrier, with the top lid, D, 
and vertical hinged slats or front lid, J, and 
vertical pivoted slator back lid, F, open, show. 
ing the upper permanent or stationary plat 
form, W, and the revolving platform Xpartly 
turned, and exhibiting the baskets ss of fruit, 
the central rod being shown at R. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the crate or 
carrier closed, containing a bottom tier of 
baskets, 8 s, and showing, as in Fig. 1, the 
stationary platform W, the revolving platform 
X, the central rod, IR, the sliding rods n, to SS 
which the landle A is attached, and by which 
it is elevated or depressed as the rods in 
are 
slid up or down through the upper permanent 
cross-piece, H; also, the small lid E to close 
the aperture TB in the lid D when the handle 6o 
A is pressed down in contact with the cross 
bar H. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the back of . 
the crate or carrier, with the top lid, D, verti 
cal hinged slats or front lid, J, and vertical 65 
pivoted slator back lid, F, open, showing the 
central platform, X, on the rod R. partly re 
volved, the handle A depressed, and the nar 
row slot B in the lid D to close over the han 
dle when the same is depressed, as in the fig- 7o 
ure, and the lid is closed. 
Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the crate or 
carrier closed, showing the central rod, R, and 
having the central revolving platform con 
structed in such a way as to dispense with the 75 
vertical hinged slats or front lid and vertical 
pivoted slat or back lid, and in place thereof 
having the side slats in 
in permanently at 
tached to the said revolving platform X", con 
verting it into a tray, as shown, which, when 8o 
closed, is secured in position by the hook ti 
also showing a flexible handle, A', attached 
to the permanent cross-bar H in place of the 
extension-handle A, Figs. 2 and 3. The bot 
tom tier of basketS is shown at 8 8. 
Fig. 5 is the revolving central platform, X, as 
in Figs, 1, 2, and 3, but shown separate and 
apart from the crate or carrier, having the pro 
jection 2 at the ends of the bottom central 
slat of the said platform X to bear upon the 9o 
end cross-pieces, ee, Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, When 
the platform is closed within the crate or car 
rier, preventing the said platform from Sag 
ging at the ends from the weight of the bas 
kets; also showing a portion of the central rod, 95 
R, upon which the platform X is adjusted to 
turn, said rod passing through the cross-pieces 
Ki K K, attached to the uprights hi? h' h h. 
Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the tray-plat 
form X, separate and apart from the crate or Ioo 
carrier, constructed as shown in the figure, and 
as shown in a closed position in the crate or 
85 
3O 
35 
45 
2 
25,4S2 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
7 O 
75 
carrier, Fig. 4, having a portion of the central 
rod, R, cross-pieces K. K., projection 2 of the 
bottom central slat, and the upper side slats in 
on, each of the said side slats in in projecting 
at one of its ends on opposite sides of the tray, 
and having the slots o o for the staple in the 
crate or carrier, and hooks t t to secure the 
tray in a closed position in the crate or car 
rier, as shown at to, IFig. 4. 
Fig. 7 is a perspective view of two revolving 
crates or carriers hinged together aty 21, show 
ing the central rods, R. R, and platforms XX, 
having a lid of double width, D, in order that 
When the crates or carriers are closed and se 
cured togetherin any convenient way-by hook 
and staple or otherwise-the lid will cover 
both crates or carriers, and having on one of 
the crates or carriers the central projection, i. 
at the bottom, and on the other the recess p, to 
lock and hold the crates or carriers together 
when closed. The handle, flexible or other 
Wise, may be attached or adjusted in any con 
Venient way to the upper permanent central 
cross-bars, and reached through the slot B in 
the lid D'when the crates or carriers are closed. 
In this arrangement the vertical hinged slats 
or front lid of each crate or carrier are dis 
pensed with, and in case the tray-platform X', 
Figs. 4 and 6, is employed in place of the plat 
form X, the vertical pivoted slats or back lids 
are also dispensed with. 
The immovable portions of the crate or car 
rier are formed of the rod R, upper platform, 
W, corner-posts act, longitudinal slats b b, and 
end slats, c c, bottom slats, dd, interior cross 
pieces, ee, rests g, central sectional uprights, 
h h, and cross-bars K K, connected thereto, 
cross-bar H, and flexible handle A', Fig. 4. 
The movable parts of the crate or carrier are 
the top lid, D, Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, the lid of 
double width ID', Fig. 7, and small lid E in the 
lid D, Fig. 2, vertical hinged slats or front lid, 
J, Figs. I and 3, vertical pivoted slat or back 
lid, F, Figs. 1, 2, and 3, extension or sliding 
handle A, Figs. 2 and 3, and rods in n, attached 
thereto, hooks t t, Figs. 2, 3, and 4, and hooks 
tt, Figs. 4 and 6, and the revolving platform 
X, Figs. 1, 2, 3, 5, and 7, and the revolving 
tray-platform X, Figs. 4 and 6. 
In order to secure ventilation from the bot 
tom of the crate or carrier, the bottom, side, 
permanent longitudinal slats b b are made to 
project on their lower edges Somewhat below 
the permanent bottom slats did of the crate 
or carrier, Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, so that the crate 
or carrier will rest upon the edges of the bot 
tom slats b b, preventing the bottom slats d 
d from coming in contact with the ground or 
floor, thus permitting free passage for the air 
underneath the crate or carrier and up through 
the same, ventilating and preserving the fruit 
as well from the bottom as from the sides and 
ends of the crate or carrier. 
The cleats.ff, Fig. 3, employed to strengthen 
the lid D, are placed as near to the ends of the 
lid as possible, in order that when the lid is 
down they may not interfere with or crush the 
fruit, and are chamfered on their outer sides. 
The tops of the upright permanent posts at a 
are also chamfered, as shown at 0 , Fig. 3, to 
correspond with and meet the cleats.ff when 
the lid is closed, thus avoiding contact either 
with the fruit or the baskets. 
The handle A, Figs. 2 and 3, is connected to 
the upper permanent cross-bar H by means of 
the bent rod or wire in n, extending longitudi 
nally through the handle A, and sliding up 
and down through the cross-bar H, the bottom 
ends of the wire being turned up, as shown, to 
prevent their being drawn through the bar H 
when the handle is elevated, as in Fig. 2. The 
said handle may thus be elevated or depressed 
at pleasure, and when depressed it is either 
closed in upon by the narrow aperture B in 
the lid D, Fig. 3, or the said aperture B, when 
wider, is entirely closed by means of the small 
lid E in the lid D, Fig. 2. 
In Fig. 4 a flexible handle, A', is employed, 
made of leather or other flexible material, and 
securely tacked or riveted, as shown, upon the 
permanent cross-bar H, the object being that 
when the crates are closed and packed or 
stored one upon another the said handle, by 
reason of its flexibility, will be depressed into 
the slot within the lid, and will in no wise in- 95 
terfere with the nice adjustment and fitting of 
the crates or carriers together. At the same 
time the said handle is light and strong, not 
liable to disarrangement, and readily accessi 
ble when the crate or carrier is required to be 
handled. 
In order properly to support the lid D on 
each side of the slot B when the flexible han 
dle A' is used and the lid is shut, it is desira 
ble to have the cross-bar H somewhat wider 
than the flexible handle A', so that the lid at 
the slot on each side of the handle may rest 
on the cross-piece H, which is adjusted in the 
crate or carrier on a level with the under side 
of the lid when closed, 
The rod R, upon which the platform X and 
the tray-platform X are adjusted to move, 
passes, in the first instance, through the cross 
pieces H and K of the upper central frame, 
IFig. 1, to which the rod is attached; thence 
down through the cross-pieces K K of the 
central frame of the revolving platform and 
tray-platform; thence through the upper cross 
piece Kof the lower central permanent frame, 
one end of which cross-piece is shown in Fig. 4, 
and is shown in dotted lines K in Fig. 5. To 
this lower cross-piece the rod is also secured. 
The platform X and tray-platform X are ad 
justed to move freely on the rod R; but it is 
evident that the rod may be permanently se 
cured to the cross-pieces or frame of the plat 
form X or tray-platform X and adjusted to 
turn in the cross-pieces of the permanentframes 
above and below; or the platforms or trays may 
be arranged in such a way as to turn upon 
pivots or between centers, but substantially 
the same in effect as if adjusted upon the rod 
I 25 
IOC 
IO 
Il 5 
25,4S2 
3 
O 
25 
35 
45 
R. The middle bottom slat of the platform X 
and tray-platform X projects at both ends, as 
represented at e, somewhat beyond the ends 
of the platform or tray, Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 
and 6. This projection & 2 is for the purpose 
of preventing the platform or tray, when in a 
closed position in the crate or carrier, from 
sagging at either end from the weight of the 
fruit, as when in such position the projections 
& 2 rest upon the permanent cross-pieces e e. 
(Clearly shown in Figs. 2 and 4.) The restsgg 
in the interior of the crate or carrier, Figs. 1, 
2, 3, and 4, are for the purpose, in like manner, 
of Supporting the upper permanent platform, 
W, and to prevent the same from sagging at 
the ends from the weight of the fruit, and at 
the same time do not interfere with the fruit 
or the movement of the revolving platform or 
tray-platform underneath. 
When the platform X, Fig. 1, is moved into 
position within the crate or carrier, Fig. 2, the 
vertical hinged slats or front lid, J, Figs. 1 and 
3, may be closed and secured by the hooks 
shown in Fig. 3, and the vertical pivoted slat 
or back lid, F, Figs. 1, 2, and 3, is also closed 
and secured by the hook t, as shown in Fig. 
2. The said vertical back slat, F, is adjusted 
to move on the pivots or pins ll. (Shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3.) 
The permanent central frames of the crate 
or carrier are formed, as shown in the figures, 
of the uprights l, h, cross-pieces H and K of 
the upper frame, and cross pieces K K of the 
lower frame, and the central frame of the re 
volving platform X is formed, in like manner, 
of the uprights l'h' and cross-pieces K K', 
and the platform proper attached to the frame 
is formed of the side and bottom slats and end 
pieces plainly shown in Fig. 5. 
The central frame of the revolving tray-plat 
form X?, Fig. 6, is formed of the uprights li?h 
and cross-pieces K. K., and of the side and 
bottom slats and end pieces, the same as the 
platformX, Fig. 5, but, in addition, has the end 
uprights and cross-pieces shown in Fig. 6, and 
also the upper side slats in an eachi of said up 
per side slats projecting at one end on oppo 
site sides, as in Fig. 4, and more plainly shown 
in Fig. 6. These projections, Fig. 6, having 
the slots o otherein, are for the purpose, when 
the tray is closed within the crate or carrier, 
Fig. 4, of resting on opposite sides against the 
corner-posts at a, the staples in the corner-posts 
passing through the said slots o 0, and the 
tray secured in a closed position by the hook 
t, Fig. 4. 
65 
If desired, one of the side slats an of the 75 
When the crate or carrier is open, FigS. 1. 
and 3, the vertical hinged slats or front lid, J, 
and the lid D, resting against each other, will 
remain in an upright position, as in Fig. 3, and 
the vertical pivoted slat or back lid, F, is re 
tained in an open position by means 0f the 
hook t, (shown in dotted lines, Fig. 3,) passing 
behind and binding against the upper side 
slat b of the crate, the said hook, when the 
crate is closed, securing the vertical pivoted 
slat F in the closed position shown in Fig. 2. 
When the tray-platform, Figs. 4 and 6, is 
employed, having the end frame shown and 
upper side slats in in, the use of the vertical 
hinged slats or front lid, J, and the vertical piv 
oted slator back lid, F, Figs. 1, 2, and 3, is dis 
pensed with, and the crate or carrier, when 
closed, presents the appearance shown in Fig. 4. 
tray-platform X, Fig. 6, on the front side of 
the tray, may be dispensed with, and the ver 
tical front slats, J, Figs. 1 and 3, must then be 
employed in connection with the tray-platform, 
in order properly to close the crate, the same 8o 
as when the platform X only is used. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, with a crate, of a hori 
Zontally-revolving platform pivoted therein, 
the arrangement being such that on revolving 85 
the platform it projects outside of the crate, 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a crate or carrier for fruit, the combi 
nation, together with a revolving platform, of 
the rod R, upper permanent cross-bars H and go 
K, and lower permanent cross-bar, K, substan 
tially in the manner and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
3. In a crate or carrier for fruit, the combi 
nation of the door having the cleats.ff with 
the corner-posts a ct, having the chamfered 
ends, for the purpose described. 
4. The combination of two crates together, 
each having a horizontally-revolving platform 
pivoted therein, and means for securing them 
together, substantially in the manner and for 
the purpose described. 
5. The combination of the single lid D', of 
double width, to cover two crates combined 
together, with the crates, each having a hori- IOS 
Zontally-revolving platform pivoted therein, 
substantially in the manner and for the pur 
pose described. 
OO 
ELIAS WADE DURAND. 
Witnesses: 
ABIGAIL B. ToMPKINS, 
DANIEL F. TOMPKINS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257583.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 257,583. 
 
J. H. HAYES. 
SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR RAILROAD OROSSINGs. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 9, 1882. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. HAYES, OF CERRO GORDO, ILLINOIS. 
SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR RAILROAD-CROSSINGs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 257,583, dated May 9, 1882. 
Application filed October 17, 1881, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES H. HAYES, of 
Cerro Gordo, in the county of Piatt and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful.Improvements in Signaling Apparatus for 
Railroad-Crossings; and Idohereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of this 
Specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view; Fig. 2, a sec 
tional view taken on the linea'a, Fig.1; Fig. 3, a 
sectional view taken on line of y, Fig. 1. Fig. 
4 represents the device applied to a double 
track road. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures denote the same parts. 
My invention has for its object to provide an 
improved signaling apparatus for railroad 
crossings, which will give timely warning of 
the approach of trains, and thus serve to pre 
vent accidents; and it consists in a novel con 
struction and combination of parts, which I 
Will now proceed to describe. 
In the drawings, A represents a shaft run 
ning transversely of a railroad-track, B, and 
mounted in suitable bearings, and having se 
cured rigidly to it a ratchet-disk, C, the same 
consisting of a disk having a single ratchet 
tooth, c, as shown. Mounted upon this ratchet 
disk is a weighted operating-lever, D, con 
Structed With an opening, D', larger than the 
diameter of the ratchet-disk, so as to permit of 
considerable play on said disk, and having a 
ratchet-tooth, d, which is adapted to engage 
With the tooth c on the ratchet-disk when the 
lever is rocked in one direction, but to ride 
over said tooth e when the lever is rocked in 
the opposite direction. The lower end of the 
lever is Weighted for the purpose of maintain 
ing it normally in upright position, while its 
upper end projects up in close proximity to one 
of the rails of the railroad-track, and on the 
outside thereof, so as to be struck by the pro 
45 jecting rim of the wheels of a passing train. 
A suitable stop, E, is provided, against which 
the lower Weighted end of the operating-lever 
D strikes to disengage said lever from the 
ratchet-disk, as will be presently explained. 
Secured to the inner end of the shaft A is a 
weighted shaft-setting lever, F, the function 
50 
35 
 
7o 
75 
55 
The main part of my apparatus is intended 65 
of which is to bring the shaft and ratchet-disk 
thereon back to normal position, after being 
rocked by and released from the operating 
lever. To the upper end of this lever may be 
connected any suitable form of signaling mech 
anism, though by preference I connect a cord, 
g, attached at the other end to an arm on a 
shaft on which a bell, G, is hung. When the 
shaft-setting lever is rocked in one direction 
the string is pulled and the bell rings, and 
when rocked in the other direction a spring, 
H, connected to the lower arm of the bell-shaft 
operates to again ring the bell. 
to be located on the railroad at some distance 
from the crossing, in the direction from which 
the train is approaching, and the bellor other 
signaling device is arranged at the cross-road, 
the string or wire g connecting the two being 
conducted over pulleys on suitable posts, or 
passed through tubes in or on the ground, as 
desired. Let it be supposed that a train is ap 
proaching in the direction indicated by the 
arrow. As the rims of the wheels strike the 
upper end of the operating-lever D said lever 
is vibrated or rocked, and by the engagement. 
of its tooth d with the tooth c of the ratchet 
disk the shaft A is rocked, thereby causing the 
bell to be rung. Each time the operating-lever 8o 
is fully depressed its lower weighted end strikes 
the stop E, which lifts the lever out of engage 
ment with the ratchet-disk, whereupon the 
weighted shaft-setting lever F operates to 
quickly bring the shaft and ratchet-disk back 
to normal position, while the released operat 
ing-lever is itself also restored to its first posi. 
tion by the weight of its lower end. At each 
complete vibration or reciprocation of the op 
erating-lever, therefore, the shaft is rocked 
and the bellis rung twice-once by the rocking 
action of the shaft and the second time by the 
operation of the spring H---and as such com 
plete vibration of the lever takes place upon 
the striking of the wheels of every truck of the 
train a continuous ringing of the bell takes 
place while the train is passing, thus afford 
ing a sufficient warning to persons at the cross 
ing that it is dangerous to proceed till the train 
goes by. 
Where there are a number of tracks at a cross 
ing, and it is desired to have the trains pass 
85 
95 
Oc 
2 
> 
O 
IS 
ing on each of the tracks produce signals, it is 
only necessary to extend the shaft A Way 
across and provide a ratchet-disk and operat 
ing-leverateach track. With such an arrange 
5 ment each operating-lever acts entirely inde 
pendently of the others, and a train passing 
on any one of the tracks will produce the de 
sired signals without affecting the position of 
the operating-levers at any of the other tracks. 
From this independence of action it follows that 
although any one or more of the operating 
levers may be held depressed by a standing 
train or trains a passing train over an open 
track will operate upon the lever at that track 
and produce a signal without fail. 
I do not wish to confine myself to the pre 
cise form of ratchet-disk and operating-lever 
here shown, as equivalents of these co-operat 
ing parts may be devised somewhat different 
in construction. For instance, the lever, in 
stead of encircling the disk might be arranged 
alongside of it, and the ratchet-teeth of both 
lever and disk located on the side of each of 
these parts. So, too, other forms of signaling 
devices may be employed in place of the bell, 
as hereinbefore suggested. 
The operating-lever is preferably prevented 
from lateral movement of the ratchet-disk by 
the side walls, II, of a casing in which it is 
placed, and a guard or shield, K, is secured to 
it, so as to move with it, for preventing the en 
trance of dirt, rain, &c., into the casing. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, is 
1. The combination of the shaft, the ratchet 
disk thereon, the vibratory operating-lever co 
operating with the ratchet-disk, and weighted 
to bring it back to normal position, and a 
stop for disengaging the lever from the ratchet 
disk at the proper time, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination of the shaft, the ratchet 
disk thereon, and the vibratory operating-lever 
co-operating with the ratchet-disk, and weight. 
45 ed to bring it back to normal position, with a 
stop for automatically disengaging the lever 
from the disk, and means for automatically re 
35 
25 
SO 
setting the shaft and its disk after they have 
been released from the operating-arm, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of the shaft, the ratchet 
disk thereon, and the vibratory operating-lever 
co-operating with the ratchet-disk, and weight 
ed to bring it back to normal position, with a 
stop for disengaging the lever from the disk, 55 
means for resetting the shaft and disk, and a 
signaling device operated by the rocking of 
the shaft, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the shaft, the ratchet 
disk thereon, the vibratory operating-lever co 
operating with the ratchet-disk, as described, 
and weighted to bring it back to normal posi 
tion, and a stop for disengaging the lever, with 
the Weighted resetting-lever and a signaling de 
vice connected to the resetting-lever, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. The combination of the shaft, the ratchet 
disk thereon, the vibratory operating-lever co 
operating with the disk, as described, a stop 
for disengaging the lever, the weighted reset 
ting-lever for bringing the shaft back to nor 
mal position, the bell, and the connecting-cord 
and spring, Substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination of the shaft, a series of 
ratchet-disks mounted thereon, and a series of 75 
operating-levers co-operating with said disks, 
as described, with means for disengaging said 
levers from said disks, means for resetting the 
shaft after each partial rotation, and a signal 
ing device operated from the shaft, whereby 8o 
the operating of any one of the operating-levers 
will cause the shaft to be rocked and the sig 
nal to be made without the disturbance of any 
of the other levers, substantially as described. 
the lever, and the casing, of the guard moving 
with the lever for preventing the entrance of 
dirt, water, &c., into the casing, substantially 
as described. 
7. The combination, with the ratchet-disk, 85 
JAMES H. HAYES, 
Witnesses: 
T. J. WIMMER, 
E. M. GREEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257683.txt	UNTTED STATEs PATENT OFFICE? 
LoUs FINGER,OF MELROSE,ASSIGNOROF ONEHALFTOLEWISS.JUDD, 
OF NEW BEDFORD,MASSACHUSETTS? 
ALARMF0RDETECTNGDEFECTSN NSULATINGC0NDUCT0RS 
8PECTProATroNformingpatof Letters Patent No.257688,dated May9,1882, 
Amaton aed September38,1881?(Nomodel.) 
? 
 
 
- 
- 
r5thisspecification? 
T0l?ph0m itndyGoncern: 
Beitknown thatI,LoUIs FrNGER,acitizen 
of the United States,residingat Melrose,in 
the County of Middlesexand State of Massa 
5ghusetts,have invented certainnewanduse 
fullmprovementsinAutomaticAlarmsforDe 
tecting DefectsinInsulated Wire BeltsorCa 
bles;andIdo herebydeclarethefolowingto 
beaful,clear,andexactdescription ofthein 
ro vention,Such as wilenable others skiledin 
theart towhichitappertainsto makeanduse 
the Same,referencebeinghadtothe accompa 
nyingdrawings,andtolettersorfguresofref 
erence marked thereon,whichformapart of 
Thisinventionisanaccessoryto machinery 
for manufacturinga Glass 0finsulated tele 
graphortelephone or kindredwires orcables, 
which are Composed ofacluster of wiresem 
2o beddedorenvelopedinacompoundofrubber 
0r other insulating material,and insulated 
from eachother bysuch material,the Durpose 
Of my invention beig to provide such ma 
ebinerywithadeviceorapparatuswhielsbal 
25antomaticalygive notice of the inclosingin 
theinSulating envelope oftwoor more wires 
which mayaccidentallygetin Contactorelec 
tricconnection priortoorwbilebeinginclosed, 
aswelastogive like notice upon Stripping of 
3otheinSulating materialfrom oneormorewires 
inanygiven Spot;and ICarryout my Object 
byalternatelypolarizingthewires by Connect 
ingtheir front ends,astheyare about to be 
run upon the reelintbe completed cable,al 
35ternatelytoopp0sitepoles ofabattery,and L 
polarizethecompressing-rolsin pairs bysuit 
able COnnectionswith the Same battery,butto 
polesofthe latter opposite thosetowhich the 
,wires passing between Said pairsofrolsare 
4o Conuected,asitis necessarytotheoperation 
ofmyinvention thatthe wiresshalbe of op 
positepolaritytothe rolsthroughwhichthey 
pass,the whole beingSoarranged thatupou? 
,accidentalelectric union oftwoor more ofthe 
45telegrapl-wires,orthe Stripping of a portion? 
ofanyone ofthem,an electriccirenitisclosed 
and the belrung,thusgivingasignaiwhich 
shalenable theattendant todetectand Cor 
recttheevilbeforethewiresbeconeembedded 
to any extent in the insulating material,0r5o 
beforetheexposedwirespassonandarestored 
uponthe reel,without detection? 
Telegraphor kindredwiresorcablesforun 
dergroundandotherserviceare now made to 
aconsiderable extent byinclosingaCluster0f55 
singlewireswithinamassofrubber Compound 
orothersuitableinsulating material,the mode 
of manufacturingtheseinsulated wires orea 
bleswhich I have Selected in the presentin 
stance toillustratethe applicatio110f1nyin 
vention beingtoemploytw0C0ntiuous bands 
orstrips of the Suitable insulating material, 
SeCured togetheratone endand wound upon 
areeltogether,with the wiresinclosed be 
tweenthem,andthe wholeboundtogetherby 
theadhesionorincorp0ration0fthetw0bands, 
the wires beingstored nponasuitable_spool 
or drum,andintroduced between the bands 
asthe latter Dass through the CompreSSing 
rolls,Inthe manufactureofthisclassofwireS 
or cablesit often ocCursthat twoor moread 
jacent wires become connected,while being 
buried orinclosedin the insulating-envelope, 
and when put to use the Cableisimpaired, 
andthisevilisuot detected nutilt001ate to 
remedyitatthe Dropertime?Again,thein 
Sulating-Covering may beCOme Stripped in 
placesfrom thewiresin passingthe Conpress 
ing-rolls,therebyexposingthe wiresto Corro 
sion and destruction when laid? 
Myinvention is intended to obwiate these 
objectionable results bythe etnployment,in 
Combination with the machine which efectS 
the enveloping ofthowires,ofadevice orap 
paratuswhich shalloperateantomaticaly,by 
theestablishmentofanelectrie eircuit,togive 
an alarm whentwoor morewires Comein Con 
tact,orarestripped of any portion of thein 
sulating-covering,therebygiving theattend 
aut of the machine notiee that S0methingis 
The drawings aCCompanying thisSpecifica 
tion represent,in Figure1,a plan view of a 
machine providedwith myinvention;Fig.2, 
aside elevation ofthe Same?Fig.3isa hori 
Zontalsectiontakentlroughthe hubandShafb 
ofthestoriug-reel,Big.4isa Cross-Section of 
said sbaft auditselectric Connectious?Tig, 
wrong? 
95 
75 
8o 
- 
9o 
3 
75? 
15 
20 
35 
45 
50 
pole-cup m,conductors MO,and bel-wire?, 
Asasequence,therodorpolejConnectswith 
the pole-cup?conductors NP,andwire0,and 
the pole?with enp m,Conductors MO,and 
wiren.(See Fig.6 ofthe drawings) 
Underthe above-describedarrangement of 
parts,ifany oftwoadjacent wires d become 
aceidentalyconneeted(whichisoftenthecase 
bya sliver from one touching the other,or 
onewire being bentandgettingaccesst0an 
other)astheyarebeinginelosed betweenthe 
bandsBCofinsulatingmaterialintheir Das 
Sagebetween theseries G Hof compressing 
rols,anelectric circuitin whichthe bellQis 
includedisinstantlyclosedandthe belrung, 
Eorinstance,ifwirelgetin contactwithwire 
2(ofoppositepolarity)acircuitisclosed,for 
thereason that the wire1,as beforestated, 
connectswith ouepole of the battery byway 
0ftherodorpolej,oup?,conductorsNP,and 
wire 0,while wire2 connects,by?way ofthe 
Dole orrod ?,Cup n,Conductors MOandwire 
h,with the bel,while the bel,inturu,is 
Counected with the opposite pole of the bat 
tery bythe wireT,as beforestated,thus clos 
ingthe circuitandringingthe bel,and this 
ringingwilcontinueuntilthe machine-winder 
SeparateSand properlyrearrangesthe wires? 
ThusfarI have described myinventionas 
adaptedt08oundanalarminthe eventoftwo 
or morewiresgettingaccidentalyfouledwhile 
beinginclosedintheinsulating-bands,Asit 
may happenthat one or both of these bands 
beCometorninpassingbetweenthecompress 
ing-rols,andtherebyexpose one or more of 
the wires,I have adapted myapparatus to 
Soundanalarmat thisjuncture,and I carr 
Outthisfeature of myinventionasfollows: 
Tothe outer end of the hub Dofeach rol 
VM,ISecure a circular hnb,for 1,of eon 
Qugtigg metal,and?in Conneetionwiththese 
hubsleuploytwoplatespringsorgonductors, 
??g,whichareinsulatedfronthe housing F, 
andare mountedat their basesto acommon 
Dole-Cup,a,whiehis Secured tothesaid hons 
ing I and Conuects by a wire,7c/,with the 
eleCtric bellQ,whilethe free endsofthecon 
ductors 070restrespectivelyin contact with 
theperipheriesofthe hubst?,Continuing,I 
$ecuretothfrontendofeach shaftG/H?as 
it protrudes beyondthe hubtor1,acircular 
hub,?0r3,9fCQnductingmetal,andinconnee 
tioutherewith Lemployasecond pair,e//,of 
plate-SpringCOnductors,whicharesecuredat 
their basest0apole-Cup,g",insulatedfromthe 
h9usingFagdalsosecuredtoit,andeonnected 
withonepoleofthe batterybyawire,?join 
ingthewire 0,before named,thefreeensof 
the Condgctorse//bearingrespectiveyupon 
theperipheriesofthe hubs3/2, 
Hubst1are0fthe Same polarityasandare 
inglectrie Connectionwith therols/0W ? 
andwires(,whiethe hubsy3 arein con 
negtion witland ofthe Samepolarityastbe 
 
COnnection with the bel, and the hub83/3, 
rolsy0?,wiresa/awithonepoleofthe 
battery?Underthese circumstances,if wire 
0/0,whichisin connection with the battery, 
as-before explained,becomes exposed while 
passingthe rols/9?/?,anelectric circuit 
isClosedatonce byway of Saidwirea/or a", 
rols/ory,Wor?,hubst u,conductors??p, 
Dole-Cup a,andwire70/tothe belland from 
the bel bywirertothat pole ofthe battery 
Oppositethe pole connected with the wire a/, 
the bel beingtherebysounded aud continu 
ingtoSounduntilthemachineisstoppedand 
thefracturedinsulationrepaired, 
?n Order that the apparatus shal bevery 
Sensitivein detectingtheconuection between 
thewires ortheexposureofoueormorewires 
and instantaneonsin Sounding the alarm,L 
Droposetoineludeintheelectriccircuitagal 
vanometer which possessesa Coi of large re 
sistance, 
Inlienof mountiugtleseriesG?of pls 
upon theirshaftsandSecuringthe dtalSpring 
platecondnetors??ce//topole-cupssecured 
tothehousing Randbearingupon theperiph 
eries ofthe hubst7/3/2,asexplained,the en 
tire Series of compressing-rols may be insu 
lated from.theirshafts and from each 0ther 
and the spring-plateconductors placed over 
and belowsuch rolsandsupportedupon barS 
spanningthe housings,Inthiscase(see?gs? 
7,8,and9ofthe drawings)two pairs,?? 
",of plate-springsare combinedwiththe up 
per compressing-rols,9,andtwoSimilar pairs 
ofplate-springs,m?y mh",withthelowerof 
suchrols,I,Thesprings?bear_uponthe 
rols/gandthe springs ?upontherolsg 
W?The springshmbear upon therols/ 
Wandthespringsm*m"upontherols *h*? 
Thesprings??areunitedattheir bases bya 
plate,7',ofwhichthey constituteapart,and 
thesprings H ? byasimilar plate,"?The 
plate7issupported bya horizontal bar,? 
spanning the honsings F Ey,andthe?plate* 
byasimilar bar,0,The springs nTn" are 
nnitedattheir bases byaplate,2,0f which 
theyconstifnte a part,andthe Springsh?h" 
byasimilar plate,0,The plate?is Sup 
porteduponahorizontalbar?spanni?g?e 
ionsings F F,andthe_plateq"byasimiar 
bar,g",Thesprings??areconnected with 
thespringsm?bywires7stQ?ake elec 
tric gonneetion,andthe spriggs?*ae99n 
nectedwiththespringsm"m"bywires*2for 
thesame pnrpose,The wiro 0rs"is Con 
nectedwith the polegup?andthewire *gr 
1withthepolecupg",Thisarrangementis 
moresimpleineonstructionand_directinoper 
ation thanthat beforedescribed 
- 
- 
IClaim? 
 
1,In combination with machineryfor Coil 
ingwiresintoacable and the wires operated 
onthereby,a battery,a_signal,and elegtric 
counections betweeg saidsignaland battery 
and betweenthese latter parts,respectivey, 
andthealternatewiresaforesaid,wherebythe 
90 
95 
T00 
IT5 
r25 
25?,683 
4 
Contactoftwoofthesewirescompletesthe Cir 
cnitandoperatesthe signal,Substantialyas 
Setforth? 
2?Thecombination of a battery with com 
pressing-rols electricaly Counected to one of 
its poles,aniusnlated wire electricaly con-? 
nectedtoitsotherpole,and asignalforming 
partofthecircuit,wherebythecontactofsaid 
wire with saidrols conscquenton the uncov 
eringof8aidwire willoperatesaidsignal,snb 
Stantiallyassetforth, 
3.The SeriesG H of rols,in Combination 
withabatteryandwirespassing between the 
rols,eachwirebeingofdiferent polarityfrom 
tbe rols between whichit passes,and the al 
ternaterolson thesame shaft being of the 
Same polarity, 
4,In combination with the wires a and ? 
andabatteryand signal,thereel I,Support 
ingSaidwiresdatoneendandmakingapart 
oftheelectriccircuit,substantiallyassetforth, 
5?In Combination with the Series G H of 
rols,the wires a,the reel T,the batteryand 
wirestoconstituteanelectric circuit,andthe 
belorsignal Q,snbstantialyassetforth, 
15 
25 
 
6,The wiresa,polarizedalternatelyin pairs 
of oppositepolarityand Connectedat One end 
with thereelI,in combination with Saidreel, 
the battery,wires@,andelectricalconnections, 
Substantialyassetforth, 
7,In combination with a battery,a signal 
and cable-wires electrically connectedtosaid 
battery,therolsformingseriesGH,eachrol 
beinginsulatedfromtherol nearestit,each 
alternaterol beinginsulatedfromit88haft, 
andSaidrolsbeingpolarizedalternately,sub 
Stantiallyassetforth, 
S?In Combinationwithwiresdand the bat 
tery,Signa,andelectricalConnections,apair 
of shafts and the rols thereon,each Shaft 
being Connectedtothe]}ole of a batteryand 
Servingthepurpose0fpolarizingtherols,sub 
Stantialyassetforth, 
Intestimonywhereof?afixmysignaturein 
Dresence oftwowitnesses, 
 
30 
35 
40 
LOUIS FINGER? 
Vithesses: 
H.E.LODG_, 
T,G,SIMPs* 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257783.txt	(Model.) 
No. 257,783, 
- 
F. W. SUTTON. 
C, OTHES POUNDER 
Patented May 9, 1882, 
s 
' 
- - - - - 
- a as us - - - - - 
- - - 
. 
. 
. war. 
 
sus 
MH 
 
 
 
III 
E. 
y 
E 
4, 7-1 
 
 
A. 
22222 
(771-4/// 
7-- 
4 (-?( al 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANKLIN W. SUTTON, OF ANGOLA, INDIANA. 
CLOTHES-POUNDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 257,783, dated May 9, 1882, 
Application filed March 6, 1882, 
(Model.) 
55 
65 
75 
The pounder rod or handle His made bifur- 6o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, F.W.SUTTON, of Angola, 
in the county of Steuben and State of Indiana, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Clothes-Pounders; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it per 
tains to make and use it, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
clothes-pounders; and it consists, first, in a 
clothes-pounder having two or more chambers, 
and provided with tubes which extend down 
into each chamber, and a groove around its 
top, in which to catch water that is forced up 
from below; second, in a clothes-pounder hav 
ing a groove or channel formed in its top, and 
provided with tubes which extend downward 
into each chamber, in combination with the 
guide or guard which is secured around the . 
pounder, all of which will be more fully de 
scribed hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
clothes-pounder which will catch a portion of 
the water which is displaced in its downward 
movement upon its top, and which will then 
allow this water which has been caught to run 
back upon the clothes while the pounder is be. 
ing raised upward. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical cross-section 
of the pounder. Fig. 3 is an inverted view of 
the pounder. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the op 
erating lever or frame. 
A represents a suitable base or stand, upon 
which the tub containing the clothesis placed, 
and from the top of which base rise the two 
standards B, which are braced together at 
their ends by the cross-bar C. Secured to the 
top of these two standards B are the horizon 
tal supporting-arms D, which are provided with 
slots E of suitable length, in which the ends of 
the operating lever or frame F can be adjusted 
back and forth for the purpose of moving the 
pounder over the top of any part of the clothes 
in the tub. The ends of this operating frame 
or lever may have small tenons formed upon 
them, so as to pass through the slots; or each 
end may be provided with a suitable roller, so 
that the frame or lever will move more easily, 
The lever is here preferably shown in the form 
of a frame, so that both hands can be applied 
to the handles, which are formed upon its cor 
ners. Secured to the center of this frame is a 
suitable metallic hook or catch, in which the 
upper end of the hook G, attached to the 
pounder-rod, is made to catch. 
cated at its lower end, so as to catch upon op 
posite sides of the pounder, instead of being 
fastened to it at its top, as has heretofore gen 
erally been the case. The pounder itself con-- 
sists of a circular vessel, I, which is divided by 
means of the partitions J into a number of 
chambers, K. Passing down through the outer 
edge of this pounder are a number of pipes, In, 
which have their upper ends made just flush 
with the groove or channel N, formed in the 
top of the pounder, while their lower ends ex 
tend downward in the chambers K to or al 
most on a level with the bottom edge of the 
pounder. In order to form the groove or chan 
nel around the top of the pounder, as shown 
in Fig. 2, the outer edge of the pounderis made 
to project upward any suitable distance, ac 
cording to the depth which the channel is to 
have, and then the center of the pounder is 
raised upward, as shown.. 
Secured around the pounder, at any suitable 
distance from it, and extending a suitable dis 
tance above its top, is the circular guard or 
guide O. When the pounder is forced down 
ward upon the clothes a portion of the water 
which is displaced by its downward movement 
rises through the tubes into the groove or chan 
nel, while the water which would have a tend 
ency to move outward toward the sides of the 
tub is caught by the guide or guard, and is 
carried up between the inner sides of the guide 
and the outer sides of the pounder, and runs 
into the groove or channel. When the pounder 
is raised upward the water which has been 
caught in the groove or channel at once runs 
downward through the tube upon the clothes 
at the same time that a sufficient amount of . 
air passes through them to prevent too great 
an amount of suction when the pounder is 
raised up. By thus having a considerable quan 
tity of water pouring downward upon the 
clothes through these tubes the water is kept 
agitated to such an extent that the clothes 
have the dirt much more thoroughly washed 
95 
to 6 
iO 
35 
4O 
45 
So 
2 
25?, sa 
out of them than where the simple action of 
the pounder alone is used. 
When it is desired to remove the pounder 
from the tub the operating frame or handle 
can be turned backward, so as to rest upon the 
top of the cross-piece C, which unites the up 
per ends of the two standards B together, and 
thus be entirely out of the way while moving 
the tub into place, or in removing the tub af. 
ter the washing is done. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. A clothes-pounder having two or more 
chambers, and provided with tubes which ex 
tend down into each chamber, and also having 
O 
a groove or channel upon its top, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination of the clothes-pounder 
having a groove or channel formed in its top, 
and provided with the tubes which extend 
downward into each chamber, with the guide 
or guard which is secured around the pounder, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRANKLIN W. SUTTON. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM JENIER, 
WILLIAM. H. WALLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257883.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 257,883. 
M. F. MoMAHON, 
TAIL STOCK FOR LATHES, 
Patented May 16, 1882. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
27, 2, 
 
 
Z 
e 
---f 
1st 
2. 
I.5.23 29 
be 
F G A 3.S. 
It fit, 
% - 2. 24 2-LL2 
it 
 
 
 
 
 
 
YK. 
6- 
3. ". 
a''. 
XX 
, 
' ' 
' 
. . 
. 
. 
/ 
6/ 
W 
Ivetoe" 
22.4%-24 
Sitti ESSES. 
272,2 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographar. washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL F. McMAEION, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, 
TAIL-STOCK FOR LATHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 257,888, dated May 16, 1882. 
Application filed September 28, 1881. (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MICHAEL F. MCMAHON, 
of the city and county of Worcester, and Com 
monwealth of Massachusetts, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Tail 
Stocks for Lathes; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 represents a side view of a lathe 
tail-stock embracing my aforesaid improve 
ments upon the same. Fig. 2 represents a 
cross-section through the Ways and part of the 
bed of a lathe, showing an end view of the 
tail-stock shown in Fig.1, looking in the direc 
tion indicated by arrow a of said Fig. 1. Figs. 
3, 4, and 5 represent sections through the tail 
stock, taken onlines A,B,C,D, and E, respect. 
ively, showing in detail my aforesaid improve 
ments, which will be hereinafter more fully 
described. 
My invention relates to improvements in the 
manner of binding or clamping the tail-stock 
proper to the bed of a lathe and of binding 
the spindle of a tail-stock. 
To enable those skilled in the art to which my 
invention belongs to make and use the same, 
I will proceed to describe it more in detail. 
In the drawings, the parts marked E' repre 
sent the ways, which are formed on the bed 
E of a lathe for the tail-stock E to slide back 
and forth upon. 
G represents the cricket-block of the tail 
stock, which is grooved upon its under side to 
fit upon said ways E E', and made hollow or 
in shell form, as represented in Figs. 3 and 4, 
to receive the tail-stock binding or clamping 
device, hereinafter described. 
The tail-stock is clamped to the bed of the 
lathe, so as to rigidly hold the same in posi 
tion when in use by means of a rocking cam 
shaft or spindle, K, (shown by dotted lines c 
in Figs. 1 and 2, and full lines, Figs. 3, 4, and 
5,) hanger L, rods MM, binding-shoe N, and 
curved handle O. The part of spindle K be 
tween the points d and e being formed upon 
an eccentric, and hanger L, fitted upon the 
same, it will be seen that by turning handle O 
up into the position represented by full lines 
in Figs. 1 and 2 the binding-shoe N will be 
55 
raised so as to clamp or bind the tail-stock to 
the lathe-bed, said eccentric being off of cen 
ter upon the same side and same radial line 
from the center of the spindle as handle O, as 
is represented by dotted linesfin Figs. 1 and 
2. As will be observed by Fig. 4, the cam 
spindle Khas a bearing at both sides of hanger 
L, thereby greatly stiffening and strengthen 
ing it over the old method of providing a bear- 6o 
ing only at m, with no bearing at the end of 
the spindle at 1. 
In practice handle O is made of the proper 
form to fit the surface of the part P when 
swung up to lock or clamp the tail-stock, as 65 
before described. Therefore it will be seen that. 
the cam-spindle K may be stopped when the 
handle is thus swung up at exactly the right 
place every time to properly clamp said tail 
stock, whereas by the use of the old form of 70 
handle considerable care lhas to be taken to 
stop the spindle at the right place and not to 
draw over the handle so far as to pinch the 
fingers between the same and the tail-stock dr 
knock the knuckles against the latter, which 
has been quite a serious objection in the old 
form of tail-stocks. 
The spindle H, in the end of which is held 
the center I, is operated forward and back by 
means of handle J in the ordinary manner. It 8o 
is held rigidly in the part P, when in use, by 
means of a friction-block, Q, which is forced 
against the surface of the spindle, one side of 
said block being cut away to fit the curved 
surface of the spindle, as is fully represented 85 
in Fig. 5. Said block Q is pressed against the 
spindle by means of a holding and compress. 
ing bolt, R, which is provided with threads g 
upon its lower end, so as to turn up and down 
in the part P of spindle-casing P', and with 
a shoulder, h, for bearing upon the upper side 
of block Q when said bolt is turned down by 
means of its handle S. In practice friction 
block Q is fitted against the spindle, with a 
hollow space, k, between its lower end and 
part P', so that as its curved surface wears 
away it may drop down and continue to fit the 
surface of the spindle. 
The old method of holding the spindle H 
has been to split one side of the part P for a 
considerable distance from the end and spring 
the parts together, so as to bind and hold said 
95 
75 
IOO 
it d 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
2 
25?, SS3 
spindle by means of a similar compressing 
hand-turning spindle to that before described 
for pressing friction-block Q against the spin 
dle. This method, although it answers the 
purpose, is not entirely satisfactory, for the 
reason that in a comparatively short time the 
spindle and its casing will wear away so as to 
bring the spindle and its center out of its true 
central line, as is well understood by those 
using said lathes. 
Myinvention is more especially designed for 
engine-lathes, although it is equally as appli 
cable in the construction of other lathes. 
I am aware that a tail-stock-binding device 
similar to mine, yet different in construction, 
has already been patented, a patent having 
been granted to S. W. Putnam, June 19, 1877, 
No. 192,129, for metal-working lathes, which, 
although producing the same results, is differ 
ent in construction (as will be seen) from that 
hereinbefore set forth. I therefore make no 
claim broadly to a tightening device with two 
binding-bolts, but limit myself to the construc 
tion and combination of parts substantially as 
shown and described. In the said Putnam 
patent it will be noticed that there is no hanger 
employed at all upon the horizontal longitudi 
nal spindle of the tail-stock, which corresponds 
with the spindle K before described; neither 
is said spindle in the Patnam patent made a 
cam-spindle. It is instead provided upon its 
end with a worm-screw, g, which turns a 
 pinion, G., which is fastened to a short lat 
O 
2O 
25 
erally-arranged horizontal spindle. Instead of 
there being a hanger suspended from the lon 
gitudinal spindle, as before described, another 
additional and differently-arranged eccentric 
shaft, f is suspended from hangers formed on 
the body of the tail-stock. It will thus be seen 
that there are not only more parts employed 
in the Putnam patent (which has the greatest 
similarity to my invention of any device now 
patented) than in my binding device, but said 
parts are differently constructed and combined 
together, 
Having described my improvements in tail 
stocks for lathes, what I claim therein as new 
and of my invention, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the part P of spin 
dle-casing P and spindle EI, of friction-block 
Q and its holding and compressing bolt R, sub 
stantially as shown and described, for the pur. 
pose stated. 
2. The combination of a horizontal longi 
tudinal cam-spindle, K, provided with a turn 
ing-handle, O, and so formed as to raise and 
lower a hanger, L, when said spindle K is 
turned, tie-rods MM, and binding-shoeN, sub 
stantially as shown and described, for the pur 
pose stated. 
MICHAEL F. McMAHON. 
35 
45 
So 
55 
Witnesses: 
WALTER B. NoURSE, 
FRANKL. WHEELER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US257983.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 257,983. 
L. T. SCOFIELD, 
PIPE COUPLING, 
Patented May 16, 1882, 
  
  
  
  
 
N 
sission 
SriSrces 
N 
 
WITNESSEs 
& cut S&o-e-k'o - INVENTOR, 
AITORNEYS 
 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographer. Washington . . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEVIT. SCOFIELD, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
PIPE-COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 257,983, dated May 16, 1882, 
Application December 13, 1881. (No model.) 
45 
So 
55 
- 
what position the plug C may be turned, or 
the communication between the pipe A and 
plug C may be secured in many other ways, 
another manner being shown in Fig. 5, which 
will be readily understood without any ex 
planation. 
To the open end b of the plug C, is con 
nected the pipe D, to which the pipe A is to be 
attached, and thus communicationisestablish 
ed between them. The contents of the pipe 
A flow from said pipe into the interior of the 
plug C, through the opening c, and from thence 
through the open end b, into the pipe D. 
Instead of connecting the end b of the plug 
C to the pipe D, it may be connected directly 
to any vessel, tank, boiler, or like supply or 
receiver. 
What I claim is 
A coupling for Securing communication be 
tween a pipe and a vessel, or between two pipes, 
consisting of a hollow plug open at one end 
and closed at the other with a hexagonal cap, 
so that it can be turned with a wrench, the 
outer surface of Said plug being a male thread 
of tapering form and provided with a hole on 
its side, so that when screwed tight in a valve, 
vessel, or socket forming a part of the coup. 
ling, the opening will be the only communica 
tion between the pipes or pipe and vessel 
through the plug, said socket being provided 
with a grooved chamber encircling the plug at 
the opening, substantially as and for the pur. 
pose set forth. 
In testimony whereof, I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
LEVIT. SCOFIELD, 
75 
Witnesses: 
W. E. DoNNELLY, 
EMMA. C. WRIGHT, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LEVIT. SCOFIELD, of 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pipe-Couplings; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to pipe-couplings, and 
is more particularly adapted to couple pipes 
that run at an angle to each other; and it con 
sists in the peculiar construction of the same, 
as will be hereinafter fully setforth and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view show. 
ing my coupling as adapted and applied to a 
steam-radiator. Fig. 2 is an enlarged view of 
my hollow plug as preferably constructed. 
Fig. 3 is a longitudinal vertical sectional view 
of the same. Fig. 4 is a sectional view of the 
interior of the socket or head through which 
the plug passes. Fig. 5 is a modification show 
ing another manner of constructing my coup. 
ling. 
A is a pipe the upper end of which is pro 
vided with a head or socket, B, the orifice of 
this socket being at an angle to the orifice of 
the pipe A 
C is a hollow plug, which is closed at one 
end, a, and open at the other, b, and adapted 
to fit in the head or socket B in such a man 
ner that its end b extends somewhat beyond 
the said head or socket. The interior of the 
plug C is made to communicate with the in 
terior of the pipe A, by providing it with an 
opening, c, (see Figs, 2 and 3,) and providing 
the interior of the head or socket B with a 
groove, d, which extends around the inner cir. 
cumference of said socket directly over the 
pipe A, and thus Secures communication be 
tween the pipe A and plug C, no matter in 
O 
I5 
2d 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258083.txt	(No Model.), 
A. LATHROP, 
COMBINED WEATHER STRIP AND DOOR SPRING, 
No. 258,083. 
. 
. 
Patented May 16, 1882, 
 
 
1. 
E. 
s 
  
 
Z7 
 
V 
2. 
S) 
 
WITNESSES: 
zSz6 32 
INVENTOR. 
1s22%iz2.4 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDERSON LATEIR OP, OF WAN HORN ESV ILLE, NEW YORK. 
COMBINED WEATHER-STRIP AND DOOR- SPRING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,083, dated May 16, 1882. 
Application filed March 14, 1882. (No model.) 
the position shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDERSON LATHROP, where it will be out of the way of travel, in 
of Van Hornesville, in the county of Herki. sweeping, &c. When the hold on the door is 
lmer and State of New York, have invented released it is caused to spring back by action 
certain new and useful Improvements in Com- of the spring device to its normal closed posi 
bined Weather-Strips and Door-Springs; and tion. The tension on the cord is thus released 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, and the weather-strip, by reason of its gravity, 
clear, and exact description thereof, which will drops down to its normal position. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap- 
pertains to make and use the same, reference and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
United States 
which form a part of this specification. 
1. The combination, with the gravity weather. 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
strip on the door, of the spring device secured SO 
simple, durable, inexpensive, and efficient com 
to the door-frame and adapted to raise the 
bined weather-strip and door-spring. 
weather-strip when the door is opened, as set 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front view; 
Fig. 2, a vertical sectional view; Fig. 3, a per 
2. The combination of the spring device se 
spective view with the door open, and Fig. 4 a cured to the door-frame, and having connect 
sectional view of the spring device. 
ing-cord C, adjustably secured to one end of 
Referring by letter to the drawings, A des. the weather - strip, with the weather-strip 
ignates the door-frame, at the side of which is 
hinged to the door at the bottom thereof, as 
secured a suitable spring device, B, to the lower 
herein shown and specified. 
end of which is secured a cord, C, which passes 
3. The combination of the spring device se 
down through a staple, D, secured to the door. 
cured to the door-frame, the connecting-cord 
frame across to and through a staple, E, affixed 
secured to the lower end thereof and passing 
to the door F, and from thence down through one 
down through staples or their equivalent af. 
of a series of perforations, G, in the end of the 
fixed to the frame and door, its lower end being 
metallic plate H, forming the weather-strip, on 
secured to the weather-strip, and the metallic 
the under side of which the cord is secured by 
plate forming the Weather-strip, substantially 
means of a transverse pin, I, or in any other 
as and for the purpose specified. . 
suitable manner. The weather-strip plate H 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
is hinged at its upper end to the bottom of 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the door, and brackets carrying pulleys over 
presence of two witnesses. 
which the cord C can run may be substituted 
ANDERSON LATEIROP. 
for the staples D and E. 
It will thus be seen that when the door is 
opened the tension of the spring on the cord 
will cause the weather-strip to be elevated to 
JAMEs H. SMITH, 
MILTON COUNTRYMAN. 
Witnesses: 
forth. 
- 
55 
. 
IO 
IS 
25. 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258185.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 258,185. 
z Villa 3 
- 
J. D. WILSON. 
CAR COUPING, 
s May 16, 1882, 
 
t 
 
 
 
  
  
  
S 
 
 
 
WI t 
  
WITNESSEsty if 
N N 
6. 
". 
 
 
a 32 E. 
RI 
 
f 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
-i-ruminiu-unmu.-----...-- 
JOSEPH D. WILSON, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE HALF 
- 
TO FRANK J. MITCHELL, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,185, dated May 16, 1882, 
Application filed February 23, 1882. 
(No model.) , 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, Jose PH DOAN WILSON, 
of Kansas City, in the county of Jackson and 
State of Missouri, have invented a new and 
useful Improvementin Car-Couplings, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
Self-acting car-couplings which are adapted to 
Io be attached to and used with the ordinary link 
and-pin draw-heads in common use. 
Myinvention consists principally of suitable 
collars adapted to be attached to the draw. 
heads by pins passing through the collars and 
down through the ordinary pin-holes in the 
draw-heads, or by other suitable means, the 
collars being provided with suitable locking 
devices, and adapted to be rocked or partially 
rotated upon the draw-heads, preferably by 
means of shifting or movable counterbalance 
weights or pivoted weighted levers for coup 
ling and uncoupling the cars. 
My invention also consists of the special con 
struction and operation of the locking devices 
and of the means for unlocking the same, and 
also of the construction, arrangement, and 
combination of parts, all as hereinafter fully 
described. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my new and im 
proved car-couplings as they appear when in 
locked position. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation taken 
on the line at a of Fig. 1, the weighted lever 
being turned so as to hold the collar in po 
sition for coupling the cars; and Fig. 4 is a sec 
tional elevation taken on the line y y of Fig. 1, 
the weighted lever being turned so as to hold 
the collar in position for uncoupling the cars. 
AA represent the collars, which are attached 
to the ordinary draw-heads, BB, by the pins C 
45 C, which pass down through the holes a a and 
bb in the upper and lower parts of the collars 
and through the ordinary pin-holes in the 
draw-heads, as clearly shown in the drawings. 
The collars are formed upon the inside with 
so the projections c c, which rest upon the draw 
35 
3O 
3. 
40 
. 
o 
heads and support the collars, and the holes 
through the collars, through which the pins 
pass, are elongated laterally, or to the right 
and left from the pins, as shown clearly in Fig. 
1, to permit the partial rotation or rocking 55 
movement of the collars upon or around the 
draw-heads for bringing the collars into posi 
tion for coupling and uncoupling the cars. 
This partial rotation or rocking movement of 
the collars is produced by the weighted levers 6o 
DD, which are pivoted upon the upper side of 
the collars to the lugs did, formed thereon, as 
shown in the drawings. 
The collars are formed with the catches FF, 
which are upon opposite sides of the collars 
as the collars face each other, and the collars 
are provided upon the side opposite to that up 
on which the catches are formed with the piv 
oted and hooked levers or arms E. E., which 
are held in horizontal position by the spring 
rodsee, and are adapted, when the weighted 
levers are properly placed for the purpose 
that is, when they are so placed as to hold 
the collars square upon the dra W-heads, as 
shown in Fig. 3-to automatically drop over 
the catches FF when the cars are brought to 
gether, and thus couple the cars. 
To the outside of the spring-actuated hooked 
arms E E are pivoted the levers G. G., and in 
rear of the latches EE are pivoted, to the side 
of the collars, the beveled blocks H. H. The 
levers G. G. are attached to the weighted levers 
D, between the pivots of the latter and their 
outer ends, by the rods.ff, bell-crank levers 
II, and the rods gg, as clearly shown in the 
drawings, and the blocks H H are attached to 
the weighted levers, below the pivots thereof, 
by the rods li ll, bell-crank levers JJ, and the 
rods i i, also clearly shown in the drawings. 
The forward ends of the levers G G are adapt 
ed, when the cars are coupled, to rest upon the 
upper edges of the catches FF, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, and when the weighted levers 
are thrown over to unlock the hooked arms E 
E for uncoupling the cars the rear ends of the 
levers G G will be raised through the medium 
of their connections with the weighted levers 
just described, which will throw the forward 
. 
ends of the said levers downward against the . 
catches FF, and thus serve to raise the hooked too 
75 
. 
... 15 
2d 
...: 
O 
- 
arms and insure their disengagement from the 
said catches; and the pivoted blocks HBI have 
an upward movement upon their pivots when 
the weighted arms are thrown over for uncoup 
ling the cars, and come against the lower diago 
nal faces of the hooked arms and serve as ad 
ditional means for insuring the disengagement 
of the hooked arms from the catches. 
In the bottom and to one side of the collars 
are placed the set-screws lic k, by which the 
level of the collars may be adjusted, so that 
their movement upon the draw-heads will not 
be too great when the weighted levers are 
shifted for bringing the collars into position 
for coupling, but will cause the collars to be 
held on a level, or nearly on a level, with the 
draw-heads, as shown in Fig. 3. 
To bring the collars into locking position the 
weighted levers must be shifted to the side of 
the collars opposite to that upon which the set 
screws lik are placed. When in this position 
both collars will be held square upon the draw 
heads, so that when the cars approach each 
other the hooked arms will automatically ride 
over and engage with the catches FF, and 
thus connect the cars. 
For uncoupling the cars it is only necessary 
to throw or shift the weighted levers to the op 
posite side of the collars, which may be done 
from the top or platform of the cars by means 
of the chains or other suitable connections, jj, 
reaching to the top or platforms of the cars, 
or from the ground between the cars, by throw. 
ing or tossing one lever over by hand-and draw. 
ing the other over by pulling upon the chain 
or other connection, which shifting of the le 
vers will partially rotate, rock, or tilt the col 
lars upon the draw-heads in opposite directions 
and bring one of them to the position shown 
in Fig. 4, which will correspondingly elevate 
the hooked arms and depress the cafches suffi 
ciently to disengage the arms from the catches 
The action of the le. 
and disconnect the cars. 
vers G. G. and the pivoted blocks H H will in 
sure and cause the simultaneous disengage 
ment of the hooked arms from the catches, as 
above described. 
In most instances the collars will be made 
of such size relative to the size of the draw. 
heads, and be adapted to such distance of rock 
ing movement, that the throwing over of one 
of the weighted levers will rock or rotate the 
collar sufficiently to completely disconnect both 
hooked arms from the catches. 
Infront of the bell-crank levers II are placed 
the blocks L T, which protect the bell-crank 
levers and the rods connected there with from 
all danger of being bent, misplaced, or other 
wise injured. 
By this construction of the couplings it will 
be seen that they are adapted to be easily at 
tached to and used with the ordinary draw 
heads; that the coupling is entirely automatic 
and certain; that the uncoupling can be quickly 
5 and easily performed, and that the couplings 
do not interfere with the use of the link and 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
S5 
pin for coupling, in case one of the cars should 
not be provided with my improved coupling. 
For cars of medium height the collars will 
have the catches and the hooked arms made 
upon and attached to them about midway of 
the sides of the collars. For cars lower than 
the medium height the arms and catches will 
be made and attached higher up upon the col 
lars, and for cars higher than the medium the 
hooked arms and catches will be made lower 
down on the sides of the collar, so that cars 
of all heights may be coupled with my im 
proved couplings. 
It will be understood that the blocks H EI 
and the levers G. G. are not indispensably essen 
tial to the successful operation of my improved 
couplings, and that they may be omitted, if 
desired. 
It will be noticed that the springs e e, be 
sides holding the hooked arms EE, of which 
they are a rearward extension, in position for 
engaging with the catches F, are also designed 
and calculated to support the collars and the 
hooked arms in proper position to meet each 
other evenly for coupling. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In car-couplings, a collar provided with 
suitable locking devices, and adapted to have 
a partial rotation or rocking movement upon 
the draw-heads, for coupling and uncoupling 
the cars, substantially as described. 
2. The collar A, provided with the hooked 
arm E upon one side and the catch Fupon the 
other, in combination with the pivoted weight 
ed lever D, for partially rotating or rocking 
the collar, substantially as described. 
3. The collars AA, adapted to be attached 
to the ordinary draw-heads, and adapted to 
have partial rotation or a rocking movement 
upon the draw - heads, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The collar A, formed with the elongated 
holes a, and b, and with the projection c, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
5. The collar A, formed with the elongated 
openings at and b, and with the projection c, 
in combination with the shifting weighted le 
ver ID, as and for the purposes set forth. 
6. The partially-rotating or rocking collar 
A, provided with the set-screw k, and with the 
shifting weighted lever D, as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
7. The combination, with the collar A, pro 
vided with the hooked spring-actuated arm E, 
of the lever G, pivoted to the arm E and at 
tached to the weighted lever D by the rods 
fg, and bell-crank lever I, substantially as de 
scribed. 
8. The combination, with the collar A, pro 
vided with the hooked arm E, of the pivoted 
block H, attached to the weighted lever D by 
the rods hi, and bell-crank lever J, substan 
tially as described. 
9. The car-couplings herein shown and de 
lo 
75 
85 
95 
Od 
IOS 
d 
IIS 
I 25 
 
scribed, consisting of the rotating, or partially the draw-heads, in combination with the piv 
rotating, collars AA, each provided with the oted hooked arm E, and the spring e, for hold- Io 
hooked arms E E and catches FF upon oppo-ing the collar and arm evenly upon the draw 
sitesides, and each provided with the weighted head, substantially as described. 
5 shifting-levers DD and with the set-screwsk 
k, the collars being adapted to be attached to 
the ordinary draw-heads, as described. 
10. The collar A, adapted to be placed upon 
J. B. HAMNER, 
GEORGE E. SWAN. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH D. WILSON. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258285.txt	(No Model) 
No. 258,285, 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
a 2.2%. 
- 
. 
2. 
J. DENVER, 
BRAKE SHOE, 
Patented May 23, 1882, 
 
 
 
 
 
(Z3. W 
a 
N N 
7 
7 
2. 
INVENTOR: 
-? / 
2 . 
c 4-c. AITORNEY. 
A 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES DENVER, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
BRAKE SHO E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,285, dated May 23, 1882. 
Application filed August 4, 1880. (No model.) 
opened after insertion. In all these methods 
it was necessary that the nut, key, or other 
mode of fastening should be removed before 
the worn shoe could be taken out and replaced 
after the new shoe was in position. These con 
trivances were all more or less complicated and 
troublesome in practical use, and the objec 
tionable features thereof are obviated by my 
device, which requires no special tools or the 
removal of any part to replace the shoe. 
Its operation is as follows: Brake-head IF 
being attached to the brake-beam of a truck, 
pressure-lever J is turned up. Shank B is 
then inserted in receiving-boxG, and pressure 
lever J being brought down against shoulder 
E, shoe A is held securely in position. This 
movement of the pressure-lever J turns its 
threaded shank in the nut I and causes the 
lever to bind upon the shank G. Any loose 
ness or wear can be taken up by adjusting the 
nut L. upon the shank in the manner before 
To remove the shoe, the lever J is turned up, 
as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 1 in the draw. 
ings, and the shoe and its shank are at once 
released. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination of shoe A, shank B, receiv 
ing-box G', and pressure-lever J, its shank K, 
and nut L, constructed and operating together 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
described. 
- 
JAMES DEN WER. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
GEO. GREGORY, 
E. B. NOBLE. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMEs DENVER, of New 
Haven, county of New Haven, State of Con 
necticut, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Brake-Shoes for Car-Wheels, 
which is fully set forth in the following specifi 
cation and accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of my improved 
shoe; Fig. 2, a back view of the same; Fig. 3, 
a section on line a ac, Fig. 2. 
The object of this invention is to facilitate 
the quickremoval of a brake-shoe and the sub 
stitution of another, as occasion may require, 
without starting any nuts or changing the re 
lations of any other parts or pieces. 
A represents the shoe; B, its shank; D, a slot 
or recess therein to prevent its movement; E, 
the shoulder to prevent lever J from turning 
the wrong way; F, the brake-head; G, the 
shank-receiving box; I, the shoulder or key 
fitting recess D, to prevent movement of 
shankB; J, the pressure-lever holding shank 
B in place; K, its shank; Li, the pressure-lever 
nut; M, the recess for lever J, so as to release 
nut Land adjust lever J without removal; N, 
the recess for securing nut L when lever J is 
adjusted. 
Prior to my invention devices for removing 
brake-shoes were in use, by loosening the 
brake-bar connections, springs, &c., and tak 
ing out the bolts which fastened the shoe to 
the brake-head, consuming much time; also, 
by a bolt or bolts passing through the shank 
and head and kept in place by set-nuts; also, 
by a slot and wedge fastened by a key-bolt; 
and in some cases by a split key, which was 
TO 
15 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258385.txt	(No Model.) 
A. DAWIS. 
WAPOR BURNER, 
No. 258,385, 
Patented May 23, 1882, 
 
  
C- 
(2 
INN-IL - le. 
s S. NASA 
San SS 
s S: 
- - S - - - 
au- 
m 
-zza: A 
. /2.. 
m 
 
 
  
 
 
AAN 
II. X t 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ZEBULON DAVIS, OF CANTON, OHIO. 
WAPO R. BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,385, dated May 23, 1882, 
Application filed February 18, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beitiknown that I, ZEBULON DAVIs, of Can 
ton, in the county of Starke and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Vapor-Burners; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it per 
tains to make and use it, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form part 
of his specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
vapor-burners; and it consists in pivoting to 
the under side of the burner an induction-tube, 
which is connected, by means of a rod which 
passes up through the burner, with the cap of 
the burner, so that when the induction-tube is 
moved partially around by means of its han 
dle the cap will be moved back from over the 
top of the burner. The olject of this part of 
my invention is to connect the induction-tube 
and the removable top of the burner together 
by means of a rod which passes up directly 
through the burner, and thus protect the rod 
from the heat of the flame to which it is ex 
posed when the rod passes up upon the out 
side. 
The second part of my invention consists in 
forming an inclined plane or deflector upon one 
side of the induction-tube, so that when the 
tube is turned to one side the deflector will 
guide a portion of the flame or vapor directly 
into the bottom of the burner. The object of 
this part of my invention is to form a deflector 
upon one side of the induction-tube, so that 
when the tube is swung around sufficiently far 
to one side the deflector will guide a portion 
of the flame directly into the bottom of the 
burner, while enough of the flame will be di. 
verted against the fluid-pipes to maintain the 
heat of vaporization, and thus keep the burner 
ready for instant use. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same. 
Fig. 3 is an inverted view of the burner, taken 
on the line a b, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a detail view 
of the induction-tube, connecting-rod, cap, and 
lever. Fig. 5 is an inverted view of the burner, 
showing the deflector moved to one side, so as 
to only slightly expose the opening into the 
burner. Fig. 6 is a side elevation of the cap 
the connecting-rod, induction-tube, and de 
flector, taken at right angles to Fig. 4. 
A represents the inlet pipe or tube, through 
which the fluid is passed toward the burner, 
and upon which the burner B is placed. From 
the pipe. A the fluid passes through the small 
pipe C, which is provided with the regulating. 
screw D in the usual manner, which screw has 
the lighting-cup attached to it. 
Pivoted upon the bottom of the burner is 
the induction-tube E, which has the inclined 
plane F formed upon one side for the purpose 
of forming a deflector. 
The pivotal rod G, 
upon which this tube is fastened, passes up 
directly through the burner, and is connected 
to the top of the burner at its upper end in 
Such a manner that when the induction-tube is 
moved the top or cap V of the burner will be 
moved at the same time. This pivotal rod is 
passed up through the burner for the purpose 
of protecting it from the heat of the flame to 
whiclh it is subjected when placed outside of 
the burner. This inlet-tube and cap of the 
burner are connected together, so that when 
either one is moved the other will be moved 
at the same time; or, if so desired, the induc 
tion-tube and the cap may be hinged sepa 
rately and each one provided with a handle or 
other means for moving it, instead of being 
connected together, as shown; or the cap or 
top of the burner may be formed solidly with 
the reservoir, and the induction-pipe alone may 
be moved for the purpose of deflecting all of 
the vapor and flame against the fluid-conduct 
ing pipe for the purpose of maintaining the 
heat of vaporization and keeping the burner 
always ready for instant use. The object in 
making the cap or cover of the burner mova 
ble is to move it to one side, so that the flame 
is guided up through the burner and burns 
through the opening which is made by mov. 
ing the cap, instead of buriling through the 
small openings made in the side of the burner 
in the usual manner. Where the cap is thus 
made movable a smaller heating-flame can be 
maintained with safety in the burner than can 
be done where the cap is formed as a part of 
the burner, and the flame must be burned 
through the small holes in its sides at the same 
time that the flame can be brought up nearer 
to the object which is to be heated, and thus 
7 
75 
85 
90 
95 
O 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
eless,8ss 
25 
35 
and cap being connected directly and rigidly 
together, substantially as shown. 
2. In a Vapor-burner, the combination of a 
pivoted induction-tube, a movable cap or top, 
and a connecting-rod which passes up through 
the burner, whereby the cap and induction 
tube are made to move together, substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination of a vapor-burner with 
a pivoted induction-tube, the induction-tube 
having a deflecting-surface, F, formed upon 
its side, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the vapor-burner with 
an induction-tube having a deflector formed 
upon its side, and a movable cap, whereby an 
auxiliary heating-flame may be maintained at 
the top of the burner, substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony, whereof I. affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ZEBULON DAVIS. 
Witnesses: 
E. A. LEEIMANN, 
W. W. MoRTIMER. 
5 
O 
23 
used more directly and advantageously. When 
the cap is cast solidly as a part of the burner 
the induction-tube will be made movable and 
have the deflector formed upon its side suffi. 
ciently flaring or large so that when the tube 
is moved laterally upon its pivot the deflector 
will cover the opening into the bottom of the 
burner, and thus prevent the passage of any 
of the vapor into the burner, and hence cause 
it all to be burned upon the outside, where it 
will maintain the heat of vaporization and keep 
the burner ready for instant use. Where the 
cap is not made movable the vapor is not al 
lowed to enter the burner when a fall flame is 
not wanted, for the reason that there will not 
be sufficient gas to support a positive and safe 
flame, and hence will cause an unpleasant 
smell to be emitted from the burner by the un 
consumed vapor. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. A vapor-burner having an induction-tube 
pivoted to its under side, in combination with 
a connecting-rod and movable cap, the tube 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258487.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 258,487, 
J. W. SMITH, 
SUSPENDER, END, 
Patented May 23, 1882, 
YWC7tesSeS 
A22% a. 
 
Azzezdz77 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH WILLIAM SMITH, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SUSPENDER - END. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,487, dated May 23, 1882. 
Application filed Novemb:r 2, 1881. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
15 
25 
35 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoSEPII WILLIAMSMITH, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Suspender-Ends, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention consists in a button-strap cir 
cular in cross-section, except where the button 
holes are made, with a short strip of leather 
or other flexible material of proper strength 
passed around it and secured in loop shape by 
a metallic clasp, which is provided with an eye 
or the like, for attachment to the suspenders. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate a suspender-end embodying my inven 
tion, Figure 1 is a front view, and Fig. 2 is a 
section through the clasp, loop, and button 
strap, of my improved suspender-end on line a 
a. Fig. 3 is a diagram, half-size, showing the 
manner of cutting the button . straps from 
leather. 
The button-strap A is made circular at and 
near its middle, so that it may render freely 
through the loop B, which is made by bending 
a strip of leather or other suitable flexible ma 
terial around the strap A, then bringing the 
ends together and securing them by a metallic 
clasp, D. The button-strap A has at each end 
button-holes act. The metallic clasp ID, which 
secures and holds together the ends of the strip 
B after it is bent around the circular part of 
the button-strap A, is provided with an eye or 
the like, as shown in the drawings, or it may 
be part of or attached to a buckle or link, or 
adapted in other ways to be attached to the 
suspenders. 
In practice the button-straps A are cut from 
leather, as shown in Fig. 3, and the strip a', 
between the parts, cut out to form the straps, 
is used to make two of the loops B. This strip 
45 
So 
55 
at has heretofore been thrown away as useless. 
By now utilizing it I obtain my strips for the 
loops practically without cost. 
Suspender-ends have been heretofore con 
structed by looping a flexible strip over around 
strap, one end of the loop being made long 
enough to pass through a buckle or the like 
and fold back over the other end, thus mak 
ing three thicknesses of material, which were 
Sewed together by one or more rows of stitches. 
Rigid longitudinally-curved passages have also 
been used for the circular strap of the sus 
pender-ends to slide in, as shown in Patent No. 
161,111 of March 25, 1875, to S. W. Fisk, re 
issued September 30, 1879, No. 8,912, and in 
Patent No. 227,183, May 4, 1880, to A. Shen 
field. 
In my improved suspender - ends a flexible 
strip, which can be made from the waste ma 
terial left after cutting out the button-straps, 
is bent around the circular part of the button. 
strap,its ends laid together and secured by the 
metal clasp, thus saving material and also time 
and labor, since bending the flexible strip 
around the button - strap and attaching the 
clamp to secure the ends are quickly and easily 
accomplished. My device is also much lighter, 
and more sightly, and less expensive than the 
stitched flexible loop heretofore used. 
I claim as my invention 
The improved suspendler - end above de 
scribed, consisting of the button-strap A, cir 
cular in cross-section at and near its middle, 
the flexible strip B, looped around it, as shown, 
and with its ends laid together and secured by 
the metal clasp D, all as set forth. 
JOS, WMI, SMITH. 
7 O 
75 
Witnesses: 
- 
G. B. MAYNADIER, 
J. R. SNOW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258587.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 258,587. 
 
C. MAS CHMEYER, 
SHADE HOLDER, 
Patented May 30, 1882, 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CEARLES MASCHMEYER, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE CRAIGHEAD & ELWELL MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, 
N. Y. 
SHADE-HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,587, dated May 30, 1882. 
Application filed February 24, 1882. (No model.) 
So 
65 
turned or bent inward, and spurs or guides 0 
To all whom it may concern: 
are extended above the bearings, so that when 
Beitknown that I, CHARLES MASCHMEYER, 
of Bridgeport, in the county of Fairfield and the fingers are allowed to descend through the 
relaxing of the chains D, or like suspending 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Shade-Fold 
devices, the bent ends will come in contact 
with the guides, and will cause the hook-shaped 
ers, of which the following is a specification, 
One object of my improvements is to pro 
lower ends to swing inward away from the 
vide a simple and cheap means of fastening a 
shade, so as to release them from the latter. 
The fingers must of course work somewhat 
shade in its holder. I am also desirous of pro 
loosely in their bearings to permit of their act 
Io ducing means for fastening the shade in its 
support which can be easily and quickly op. 
ing in this manner. 
To secure a shade in place it is only neces 
erated. 
sary to slip its upper edge between the holder 
The improvements consistin the combination, 
A and finger C, while there is no tension on 
with a shade-holder having a rim or flange for 
the chains or like suspending devices, then a 
15 bearing against one side of a shade, of fingers 
or fasteners adapted to bear against the other 
tension is exerted on the chains or like de 
vices, and the fingers are drawn upward, so 
side of the shade, and chains or other means 
that their hook-shaped lower ends will bear 
for suspending the shade connected directly 
against the interior of the shade. The fingers 
with said fingers or fasteners in such manner 
will then be held against the shade with a 
2O that the tension of the chains or like means 
will cause them to be held against the shade, 
force due to the tension on the chains or like 7Q 
devices. To remove the shade it is only nec 
and that they will be released from the shade 
essary to relieve the chains or like devices of 
when the chains or like means are relaxed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
tension, so as to allow the fingers to descend 
and release the shade, whereupon the shade 
25 a central vertical section of a shade-holder 
embodying my improvements, and also of a 
may be taken frohn the holder. 
It is obvious that the holder, instead of be 
shade and a lamp holder; and Fig. 2 is an 
ing made in the form of a crown, might be 
under side view of the shade-holder. 
made with a rim or flange that would fit in 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
side instead of outside of the shade, and that 
in such case the fingers could be made with 
A designates a shade-holder, which may be 
in wardly-extending hook-shaped lower ends 
made of cast metal or other suitable material, 
adapted to engage with a bead or outwardly 
and as here shown is made in the form of an 
projecting bead on the exterior of the shade. 
ornamental crown adapted to receive the up 
Then the upper ends of the fingers would pref. 
35 per edge of the shade B within it. This shade 
erably be made to extend or bend outwardly, 
may be of opal glass or other approximate ma 
and their guides would be arranged at their 
terial. 
outer sides, so that on the descent of the fin 
C designates a number of fingers or fasten 
gers in their bearings their lower ends would 
ers consisting, as here shown of slider-bars 
be swung outwardly to release the shade. 
4o having outwardly - extending hook - shaped 
The chains D or like suspending devices 
lower ends, a. They are adapted to slide up 
pass over pulleys on a hanger of any suitable 
and down in bearings b in the crown, and at 
form, and thence to a counter-weight. 
the upper end they are connected directly to 
E designates a holder for a lamp-reservoir 
the chains D or like devices whereby the lamp 
connected by arms F with the shade-holder A. 
45 is suspended. Preferably these fingers are 
These features may or may not be used With 
polygonal in the cross-section at that portion 
my shade-holder and its appurtenances. When 
which fits in the bearings, so that they cannot 
used their weight and the weight of the lamp 
be accidentally turned around out of their 
proper positions. At the upper ends they are 
reservoir and counter-balance exert a tension 
23 sponding parts in both figures. 
75 
8c. 
85 
95 
O 
on the chains or like device. Before a shade 
can be taken off and replaced in this example 
of my improvements the arms connecting the 
lamp-reservoir holder with the shade-holder 
must be detached from the latter. This can 
easily be done, as they are only attached by 
means of nuts dapplied to their screw-threaded 
upper ends. 
By my improvements I am enabled to pro 
duce a shade-holder wherein the shade may 
be fastened and unfastened with great facility, 
and one which can be manufactured very 
cheaply. I may apply jackets of india-rubber 
to the hook-shaped lower ends of the fingers 
C to preclude them from entailing any possi 
ble injury to the shade. 
In lieu of the sliding fingers, pivoted fingers 
may be used; but in such case the shape of 
the upper ends must be modified so that the 
2o chains will tend to hold the lower ends in con 
tact with the shade. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a shade. holder 
30 
having a rim or flange for bearing against one 25 
side of a shade, of fingers or fasteners adapt. 
ed to bear on the other side, and chains or 
other means for suspending the shade, con 
nected directly with said fingers or fasteners, 
substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the shade-holder 
A, of the fingers C, having hook-shaped lower 
ends, and attached to the chains D or like de 
vices, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with the shade-holder 
A, of the fingers C, made polygonal, fitting in 
corresponding bearings, having hook-shaped 
lower ends, and attached to chains D or like 
devices, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination, with the shade-holder 
A, of the fingers C, having hook-shaped lower 
ends and reversely-bent upper ends, the bear. 
ings a, the guides b, and the chains or like de 
vices, substantially as specified. 
35 
CEHARLES MASCHMEYER. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED B. BEERs, 
JACOB DURYEE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258687.txt	(Model.) 
No. 258,687. 
 
C. YOUNG. 
GRAIN BINDER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 30, 1882. 
Z72 vezzzz 
(64.1 (4- 
, -4-4 
(((5-tz'-3. 
a22, 1-r-zr 
(Model.) 
No. 258,687, 
C, YOUNG, 
GRAIN BINDER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented May 30, 1882, 
s 
t g G 
 
A-5SANaeges 
PYzizzesses : 
D? 
97.67%-4-3 
e 
Z7zze7zzozr: 
4, 4% arez 
(Model.) 
No. 258,687, 
C. YOUNG, 
GRAIN BINDER. 
w 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
Patented May 30, 1882, 
 
SSass O 
SS3 
sasssssset 
ES 
Azeeze.jses: 
9,324- 
/zrezzoe 
5 4:3 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CALVIN YOUNG, OF AUBURN, NEW YORK. 
GRAN. BNDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,687, dated May 30, 1882. 
Application filed July 16, 1881. (Model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
by me, and will therefore be described only so 
far as is necessary to an understanding of my 
Be it known that I, CALVIN YOUNG, a citi 
improvement. 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
of Auburn, county of Cayuga, State of New 
In the accompanying drawings, D repre 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
sents the frame-work upon which the binding 
provement in Grain-Binders, of which the fol 
mechanism is supported, and through which 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
it is connected with the harvester-frame. 
- reference being had to the accompanying 
O' is the horizontally-oscillating knotter-car 
drawings, making part of this specification, in 
rying arm; G, the needle and cord carrying 6o 
Which 
arm; and S, the rack and switch frame, through 
Figurelis a perspective view of a grain-binder 
which, with its attachments, the necessary 
movements are imparted to the knotting de 
attachment to harvesters, or so much thereof 
as is necessary to show my improvement, the 
vices during the outward movement of the 
binding-table being removed for the purpose. 
arm O over said frame. The switch-frame is 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the switch-frame de 
provided with a pendent track or cam plate, 
tached with my improvement applied, and Fig. 
D, which in previous constructions to mine 
3 is a side or front elevation of the same. Fig. 
has been made in the form of a rigid vertical 
4 is a side elevation of my improved swinging 
rib, formed on the lower face of the switch 
track or cam plate detached from the switch 
plate, and which operated (while the knotter 
frame, and Fig. 5 is a plan view of the same. 
spindle was being rotated through the pinion 
Figs. 6 and 7 are side elevations of the links 
on its lower end engaging with the rack on the 
by which the swinging track is suspended, 
switch-frame for the purpose of Wrapping the 
and Fig. S is a front elevation similar to Fig. 
cord upon it) to hold the knotter-hook open 
3, but showing in addition thereto a knotter. 
in the position shown in Fig. S; but said track 
hook and its connections adapting it to be op 
being made rigid, the hook was necessarily 
erated by the swinging cam or track. 
thrown open into the position shown during 
The invention relates to that class of ma 
the return movement also, of the knotter-arm, 
chines in which the knotting devices are car 
rendering it liable to catch the cord in the ro 
tary movement of its spindle and to displace 
ried back and forth underneath a slotted plat 
form or table on which the grain is bound by 
or become entangled with it. To obviate this 
a horizontally-oscillating arm moving over a 
difficulty I suspend the track or camway D' 
stationary rack and switch plate, through 
in a curved slot in the switch-frame by means 
which plate and its connections the necessary 
of two pendent links, A and B, which act. 
movements are imparted to the knotting de 
like the links of a parallel ruler, allowing the 
vices during the movement of the carrying 
cam track D to rise and fall while maintain 
arm over said plate; and it consists in provid 
ing the parallel relation of its lower cam-face 
ing the stationary switch-plate referred to with 
to the lower face of the switch-frame. These 
a pendent SWinging track or cam-plate ar 
links are suspended in slots in the frame, 
ranged to act upon the knotter-hook for open 
which allow them to swing up inward, or to 
ing it only in the outward throw of the knot. 
ward the inner side of the switch-frame, until 
ter-carrying arm, said track or cam swinging 
the lower face of the cam-track is in the same 
up out of the way of the devices operating 
plane with the lower face of the switch-frame, 
said hook and permitting the latter to remain 
while they are prevented, by coming in con 
closed during the inward or return movement 
tact with the outer end of the slots, when mov. 
of said arm, thereby obviating the liability of 
ing in the opposite direction, from swinging 
cord being caught and entangled or displaced 
beyond a vertical position, or one about verti 
by said hook during such movement. 
cal, in which position the cam-track Dis held 
The knotting mechanism, together with the 
suspended below the switch-frame in position 
knotter and cord carrying arms and the means 
to act on the rollergy, causing the latter, through 
for operating the same, aside from the swing 
its connecting devices, to operate upon the 
ing track or cam referred to are not claimed hook for opening it, as shown in Fig. 8, The 
95 
90 
75 
7 O 
ICC 
O 
15 
O 
25 
45 
So 
2 
25s,6s2 
So 
75 
switch and rack frame provided with a track 
or cam suspended from said frame by swinging 
links adapting it to rise and fall bodily. 
2. The combination, in a grain-binder, of a 
switch-frame, a pendent swinging track or cam 
suspended therefron, a fixed lower track or 
cam, and mechanism for actuating the knotter 
shaft. 
3. The combination, in a grain-bindler, of a 
switch-frame, a movable track or cam connected 
with said frame by swinging links, a fixed lower 
track or cam, a horizontally-vibrating knotter. 
shaft and mechanism for actuating said shaft. 
4. The combination, in a grain-binder, of a 
switch - frame, a horizontally - vibrating arm 
moving over said frame and carrying the knot. 
ting devices, mechanism for actuating the 
knotter-shaft, a movable track or cam sus 
pended from the switch - frame by swinging 
links, and a fixed lower track or cam operating 
in connection with the swinging track or cam 
for actuating the knotter-hook. 
5. The swinging track or can plate, sus 
pended in a vertical slot in the switch-frame 
by means of parallel links, substantially as 
described, whereby it is adapted to be lifted 
or swung up out of the way for allowing the 
knotter-hook to remain closed on the return 
or backward movement of the knotter-carry 
ing arm, in combination with the spring for 
throwing said cam-plate into position for act 
ing on said hook on its outward movement, 
substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with the switch and 
rack frame for actuatiug the horizontally-oscil 
lating knotting devices, of the swinging track 
or cam plate D, pivoted thereto by the parallel 
links A and B, the spring F, and the fixed 
lower track, H, having the inclined ends I' 
and J', all arranged and operating substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 7th day of July, A. D. 1881. 
CALVIN YOUNG. 
Witnesses: 
C. WHEELER, Jr., 
C. W. UPHAM. 
inner end of the swinging track D is inclined 
or beveled to permit the roller to run readily 
and easily down under the track in its outward 
movement for opening the hook, and its outer 
end also may be beveled or inclined, if desired, 
so as to allow the roller to pass off the track 
without jar. On the inward or return move 
ment of the knotter-carrying arm the rollery 
comes in contact with the outer end of the 
swinging track or cam plate D', and causes 
the latter to swing inward and upward out of 
the way, allowing the roller to follow the lower 
face of the switch-frame, and the pivoted knot 
ter-hook is thus allowed to remain closed dur 
ing such movement, and the danger of its 
catching the cord referred to is obviated. 
The link B has an ear, G', formed upon it, 
to which one end of the spring Fis connected, 
the other end of said spring being connected 
with the pivot of link A'. The tension of this 
spring serves to hold the end of the cam-plate 
D against the outer end wall of its slot when 
not overcome by the action of the rollery on 
its inward or return movement, and said plate 
is consequently always in position to act upon 
said roller, and through it upon the knotter 
hook on the outward or operative movement 
of the knotter-arm. 
A lower fixed track, H', provided with down 
wardly - inclined deflecting ends I and J is 
bolted to the switch-frame near its outer edge, 
said track serviug to insure the closing of the 
knotter-hook for the completion of the knot. 
The inclined end I' forces the roller upward 
after it has passed from the swinging track D 
and so closes the hook, while the outer inclined 
end J allows the roller to be depressed by a 
can at the outer end of the throw of the knotter 
carrying arm for the purpose of opening the 
hook to release the knot, at the same time in 
suring the lifting of the roller and the closing 
of the knotter-hook as the arm O starts upon 
its inward or return movement. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new is- 
1. In a grain-binder, the horizontally-vibrat 
ing knotting devices, in combination with a 
o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258787.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 258,787, 
R. MOSHANE 
GONG. BET, 
Patented May 30, 1882, 
 
WITNESSES:S 
o%.-7-62% 
/6.6% wer 
INVENTOR: 
(7.77%a-e-r 
By-last 46 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT McSHANE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
GONG. BEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,787, dated May 30, 1882, 
Application filed February 27, 1852. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT MOSHANE, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Gong-Bells, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to furnish a 
double-stroke gong-bell that can be readily 
changed for right or left hand connections, as 
required by the location of use; and it con 
sists in an operating-lever trip and pivoted 
hammer, combined and arranged as hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of leference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a face view of my improved bell 
mechanism arranged for right-hand connec 
tions, and Fig. 2 is a similar view, showing the 
parts arranged for left-hand connections, the 
gong being removed in both figures. 
A is the supporting-plate, provided with a 
post, a, for supporting the going, as usual. 
B 
is the hammer, pivoted on a stud, b, and ar 
ranged for striking on the outside of the gong. 
C is the hammer-spring. ID is the operating 
lever, lung on a stud, c. E is a spring con 
nected from lever D to a stud, d, on the plate, 
and F is a trip or dog pivoted on a stud, e, be 
tween the inner end of lever D and the han 
mer B. f. fare stops limiting the movement 
of the lever. 
The trip or dog IF is formed with three arms 
or projections, g g g', one of which, g, projects 
for engagement by the eld of lever ID, while 
35 
the projections g g are normally in contact 
with the hammer-arm; but in case it is desired 
to give only one stroke one arm or projection, 
g' org, will be removed. 
At l in Fig. 1 right-hand connections are 
shown at the outer end of the operating-lever, 
and in that case the spring E, as shown, en 
gages a lug or connection, i, near the inner 
end of the lever. 
To arrange the bell left-handed, the spring 
E is simply to be disconnected from lug i and 
connected to a lug, i, that is on the lever at 
the other side of the fulcrum-stud c. The inner 
end of the lever is thereby carried to the re 
verse side of the dog, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The first movement of the operating lever 
turns the dog and raises the hammer until the 
lever end clears, when the trip is released and 
the hammer is brought down with a blow upon 
The return movement is given by 
the bell. 
spring E, which, by carrying the lever back 
to the first position, moves the clog and causes 
the second stroke of the bell. The movement 
is easy, and but slight power is required on ac 
count of the double leverage. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
In a door -bell, the combination, with the 
hammer B and the spring C, of the lever D, 
provided with the lugs i i", the spring E, and 
the dog F, provided with the projections g g g, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
ROBERT MCSHANE, 
Witnesses: 
GEO. D. WALKER, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
45 
55 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258887.txt	a 
J. CARPENTER, 
BARBED FENCE STRAP, 
Patented June 6, 1882. 
 
R 
I 
(No Model.) 
No. 258,887, 
(III) 
 
 
WITNESSES - 
& eS Neocult 
 
Invent or - 
4-6,2- 
N. PEEERs, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES CARPENTER, OF MORAVIA, NEW YORK. 
BARBED FENCE-STRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,887, dated June 6, 1882. 
Application filed February 4, 1882. (No model.) 
The nature of this invention consists in a 3 of the drawings, then passing this band be. 6o 
To all whom it may concern: 
of the re-enforced edges of the strap nearly or 
Be it known that I, JAMES CARPENTER, of quite at right angles from the plane of the 
Moravia, in the county of Cayuga, in the State strap, and projecting alternately in opposite 
of New York, have invented new and useful im- directions and respectively from the convex 55 
5 provements in Barbed Fence-Straps, of which side of the corrugations. 
This barbed corrugated strap I construct 
the following, taken in connection with the ac- 
companying drawings, is a full, clear, and ex- by first rolling out a band of iron having en 
act description. 
larged or re-enforced edges, as shown in Fig. 
Io novel construction of a metallic strap having tween corrugated rollers rror corrugated dies 
enlarged or re-enforced edges and transversely pressing against opposite sides of the strap, 
crimped or corrugated surfaces and barbs and simultaneously bringing to bear against 
pressed laterally out of said re-enforced edges the two edges of the strap two rollers, ss, as 
alternately at opposite sides of the strap and illustrated in Fig. 4 of the drawings, the roll- 65 
15 from the convex side of the corrugations, said ers r r producing the corrugations or crimp 
strap being secured edgewise on the fence and ing of the strap, while the rollers ss, in con 
presenting straight or unbroken top and bot-junction with the projecting edges of the afore 
tom edges. The strap constructed as afore. said rollers, press out of the re-enforced edges 
said retains itsfull width throughout its length. of the strap the barbs b b. The projecting to 
2 o The barbs pressed or struck out of the enlarged edges of the rollers r are provided with rab 
edges of the strap, and being nearly or quite bets c c of proper size to allow portions of the 
at right angles to the plane thereof, stiffen enlarged edges of the strap a to pass between 
the strap, and the projection of the barb from the rollers without distorting or pressing the 
the convex sides of the corrugation renders the same. Said rabbets are arranged in such rela- 75 
25 same more prominent, and thus requires less tive positions as to produce by the interven 
length of the barb. The corrugations allow ing solid projections of the rollers r the barbs 
the strap to expand and contract under the b b alternately at opposite edges of the strap 
variations of the temperature of the weather, and outward from the convex portions of the 
and thus prevent excessive sagging, as well as corrugations, thereby making them more promi. 8o 
nent and effective. The described strap at is 
The invention also consists in a novel method secured to the fence-post by staples d driven 
of forming the aforesaid barbed strap, all as into the post and striding the concave por 
tions of the corrugations thereof, thereby pre 
hereinafter fully explained. 
Eaving described my invention, what I claim 
Fig. 2 is an edge view of the same. Fig. 3 is as new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
a transverse section of the strap, showing its is 
form as it issues from the rolls of the rolling- 
1. The strap a, having enlarged or re-en 
mill; and Fig. 4 illustrates the mode of form-forced edges and transversely crimped or cor-. 9o 
rugated surfaces, and barbs b b, pressed or 
4o ing the barbs, 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre- struck out of said re-enforced edges, substan. 
tially as set forth. 
sponding parts, 
a represents the metallic strap or band, hav- 
2. The strap a, formed with enlarged or re 
ing enlarged or re-enforced edges, as shown in enforced edges and with crimped or corrugated 95 
45 Fig. 3 of the drawings. The body of said strap surfaces, and the barbs bb, pressed or struck 
is bent serpentine, as best seen in Fig. 2 of out of said enlarged edges at the convex side 
the drawings, so as to present crimped or cor- of the corrugations and alternately in opposite 
rugated surfaces and straight or unbroken top directions from the plane of the strap, sub 
and bottom edges, as illustrated in Fig. 1 of stantially as described and shown. 
3. The within-described method of forming 
bb denote the barbs pressed or struck out barbed fence-straps, consisting in first rolling 
35 front view of my improved barbed fence-strap. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is venting the strap from slipping endwise. 
85 
3o undue tension of the strap. 
So the drawings, 
 
tes 
2 
25 S, SS7 
out thestrap with enlargedorre-enforcededges, of two attesting witnesses, at Syracuse, in the 
then corrugating said band and pressing out county of Onondaga, in the State of New York, 
of the enlarged edges thereof barbs standing this 11th day of January, 1882. 
in opposite directions from the plane of the 
Intestimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name and affixed my seal, in the presence 
JAMES CARPENTER. L. s. 
5 strap, substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. DUELL, 
WM. C. RAYMOND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US258987.txt	(No Model.) 
W. L. CASADAY. 
m 
SULKY PLOW, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 258,987. 
s 
Patented June 6, 1882, 
ity 
ITNESSES. 
$70016 
- 
INVENTOR 
Ul" &J Caaaaaa 
(sels-parrier. 
N. perERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, .. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 258,987, 
W. L. CASADAY. 
Y 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
SUKY PLOW, 
Patented June 6, 1882. 
s 
& A 
. Gwendraw. 
' 
weto 
1-060Attem 
Attorney 
N. Peters. Photo-lthographer, Washington. O. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 258,987, 
6. 
s 
W. L. CASADAY. 
SULKY PLOW. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3: 
Patented June 6, 1882, 
N 
s 
N N. N 
is 
S 
 
A 
al 
N 
| 
S. 
S. S. 
s 
s 
id 
& 
s 
"Y"; 
25-y 
AMS. 2 
not 
: 
 
(No Model.) 
W. L. CASADAY, 
SULKY PLOW. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 258,987. 
 
Patented June 6, 1882, 
A. 
v. 
A. 
A. 
A 
t/ 
3 
3f 
- 
ac, p call a fill 
B 
- CT A 
7 
e-E 
4 
f 
f 
/ 
sa 
S 
77 
Q 
S& 
X 
S. 
W 7. w/ 
a 7. 2...a 
6tw.noaa. 
N, PEERS. photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR 
U-8). Caaaaa. 
. 
(.40 
y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM I. CASADAY, OF NEW CARLISLE, INDIANA. 
SULKY-Plow. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 258,987, dated June 6, 1882. 
Application filed March 14, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
75 
She 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM L. CASADAY, 
of New Carlisle, in the county of St. Joseph 
and State of Indiana, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Sulky-Plows; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as Will enable others slkilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use the 
My invention relates to sulky-plows, the ob 
ject being to so construct a plow of this char 
acter that the adjustment of the plow will be 
facilitated, its arrangement and operation sim 
plified, and the whole rendered durable and 
reliable in operation. 
With these ends in view the invention con 
sists in the features of construction and com 
binations of parts hereinafter fully described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a sulky-plow constructed in accord 
ance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a view in 
side elevation. Fig. 3 is a plan view; and Fig. 
4 is a detached view of the inclined wheel, a 
portion of the axle, and devices for adjusting . 
the inclined wheel. 
A represents a crank-axle provided with the 
outwardly-projecting arms at al. 
B represents the rear section of the plow 
beam, to the rear end of which is secured the 
plow C. The forward end of this section B is 
provided with outwardly-curved arms b b, 
which embrace the crank A' of the axle, and 
are perforated to receive a pivot-bolt, which 
passes through said arms and through a per 
foration of the crank, and is provided with a 
nut, b, which holds the bolt in position, 
D represents the forwardsection of the plow 
beam, perforated at its rear end to adapt it to 
be pivoted at a central point upon the crank 
A", which is annularly recessed to receive the 
section D. 
Upon the rear section, B, of the plow-beam 
is provided an upwardly-projecting bracket, 
d, to which is pivoted a locking-brace, E, 
whose forward end is provided with a down 
wardly-projecting lip, e, adapted to engage 
with a catch, ef, formed on the forward section, 
D, of the plow-beam, and thus rigidly connect 
the beam-sections together, and with a lever, 
E, for disengaging the brace. To the rear end 
of the forward section, D, is pivoted in a 
bracket, f, a plunger, F, extending rearwardly 
within the rear section, B, and provided with 
a laterally-projecting stud, f', adapted to ex 
tend through an elongated slot, f', formed in 
the side of the section B. 
Upon the arm a? of the axle A is mounted a 
sleeve, G, to the inner end of which is con 
nected one side, h, of a seat-frame, H, the op 
posite side, h', of the latter being perforated 
to fit upon the inner end of the arm a of the 
axle. The cross-bar h of said frame is adapt. 
ed to support a seat, H', and is provided with a 
rearwardly-projecting bracket, h, to which is 
pivotally secured one end of a notched bar or 
latch, I, the latter being adapted to engage 
with a laterally-projecting stud or catch, i, on 
the rear section, B, of the plow-beam. 
J represents the tongue of the plow, secured 
to the sleeve G by a plate, J, and a bolt, i, 
and to the seat-frame by a diagonal brace, j', 
secured at one end by a bolt, j', which passes 
through said brace, tongue, and plate, and at 
its opposite end to the side h of the seat-frame, 
in any suitable manner. 
Krepresents a stud projecting laterally from 
the inner side of the tongue J to form a foot 
rest for the driver. Upon this stud Kare piv 
otally supported two guide-links, lc k, connected 
at their upper ends by a perforated head, k, 
and provided with elongated slotsk. Between 
the links k l is guided the front end of the for 
ward section, D, of the plow-beam, the latter 
being provided with a bolt, k, passing through 
said section D and through the elongated 
slots of the links k k, and having heads or 
washers k. The latter may be formed inte 
gral with the beam-section, if preferred, in 
stead of using a bolt. The links lic k are nor 
mally held at the same degree of inclination 
relative to the beam as the crank A is to the 
tongue when the plow is level with the fur 
row-wheel. The section D of the beam is pro 
vided with depending brackets l, within which 
is secured a draft-rod, L. 
Upon the outer end of the arm a of the axle 
is pivoted a land-lever, M, and adjacent thereto 
is mounted a sector, N, to which is rigidly se 
cured the outer end of a-diagonal brace, O, the 
inner end of which is secured to the outer end 
of the foot-rest K. 
Upon the arm a? of the axle Ais mounted the 
m 
go 
95 
CO 
IS 
25 
40 
. 45 
So 
 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
- 
land-spindle sleeve P, to which is connected 
by a curved brace, p, the land-spindle P', upon 
which is journaled the land-wheel P. 
To the outer end of the sleeve P is secured 
an arched frame or guard, Q, having lugs or 
stops q. A coiled spring, R, surrounds said 
sleeve, and is secured thereto at its inner end, 
while its outer end is bent to engage with the 
land-lever M, which is arranged between the 
stops q of the guard Q, so that its movement 
is limited by said stops, and the spring is thus 
protected against undue strain. 
The diagonal brace O serves to securely 
brace the land-wheel side of the axle to the 
tongue, and by the li?ting-lever M the land 
wheel may be readily adjusted. 
S represents a slotted frame, pivoted at its 
outer end to the plate J', secured to the under 
side of the sleeve G, while its opposite end, 8, 
is adapted to slide within a guide, s', of said 
plate, and is provided with an elongated slot, 
s", within which is arranged a cam, T, secured 
to the lower end of a vertical rotating shaft, 
U. The latter passes through a perforated 
lug, u, projecting from the plate J, and is piv. 
otally secured at its upper end to a perforated 
and indented plate or sector, V, rigidly mounted 
on the furrow side of the frame EI, and is pro 
vided with a hand-lever, v, to engage sector 
W. The frame S is provided with two horizon 
tal elongated slots, t, arranged parallel with, 
but diagonally opposite to, each other. With 
in these slots t are secured bolts ac, which con 
nect the armW of the furrow-spindle X to said 
frame. The spindle X is arranged at an angle 
to the axle A, and carries the furrow-wheel Y 
at an angle to the ground. 
Upon the outer end of the sleeve G is rig 
idly mounted a sector, Z, while upon the end 
of the arm a of the axle A is rigidly mounted 
a lifting-lever, Z', provided on its inner side 
with a hand-lever, 2, to which is connected a 
rod, &, the lower end of which is connected to 
a dog, 2', having a coil-spring, 2, surrounding 
it, and working in perforated lugs a of the 
SectOr. 
The plow as thus constructed is adapted to 
operate as follows: When the plow is at work 
the two sections of the beam are connected and 
held rigidly together by the locking-brace E. 
When it becomes necessary to pass an obstruc 
tion the driver disengages the brace E by 
means of the lever E, when the rear section, 
B, of the plow will fall and the point of the 
plow be tilted up out of the ground. The latch 
I will then engage the catch i on the section B 
and hold the plow until the lifting-lever Z is 
drawn back to lift the plow, when the latch I 
will be automatically thrown out of engage 
ment with its catch i by means of the studf 
of the plunger F. These devices constitute an 
automatic lift for the plow, and are fully de 
scribed and claimed in a separate application 
for Letters Patent signed by me the 31st day 
of January, 1882. Hence a fuller and more de 
tailed description of such parts is deemed un 
necessary in this application; and I would have 
- 
it understood that I reserve to myself the right 
to claim in separate application such parts of 
the present device as are herein shown and de 
scribed, but not claimed. 
The combination of the plow-beam sections 
with a crank-axle enables said sections to be 
moved independently of each other, and the 
slotted links between which the forward end 
of the beam is guided enable the heel and point 
of the plow to be raised vertically until the 
crank of the axle passes the center, when the 
heel of the plow will be raised higher than the 
point. 
By the improved adjusting devices connected 
with the furrow-wheel frame the furrow-wheel 
may be easily adjusted to run either parallel 
with the land-wheel or at an angle thereto, as 
may be found necessary to properly adjust the 
plow. 
It will be apparent that many changes and 
modifications of the details of construction of 
my improvement may be resorted to without de 
parting from the spirit of my invention. Bence 
I would have it understood that I do not limit 
myself to the exact construction shown and de 
scribed, but reserve to myself the right to make 
such alterations in form and construction as 
may properly fall within the scope of my in 
vention. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with a 
crank-axle, of a plow-beam consisting of two 
independent sections pivotally connected to 
the crank of the axle, substantially as setforth. 
2. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with a 
crank-axle, of a plow-beam made in sections, 
one section being pivoted to the crank and the 
other section pivoted on a bolt extending 
through the crank, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with a 
crank-axle, of a plow-beam having a rear sec 
tion provided with arms which embrace the 
crank of the axle and are pivoted thereto, and 
a forward section adapted to be centrally piv 
oted to said crank, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with a 
crank-axle, of a plow-beam consisting of a front 
and a rear section, said sections being pivotally 
connected with the crank of the axle, and suit 
able means for connecting and disconnecting 
the sections of the beam, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with a 
crank-axle and a frame, of a plow-beam con 
sisting of a rear section and a front section 
pivotally connected to the crank of the axle, 
and a depending notched bar or latch pivoted 
upon said frame and adapted to engage a 
catch on the rear section of the beam, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with a 
crank-axle and a seat-supporting frame, of a 
plow-beam consisting of a rear section and a 
front section pivotally connected to the crank 
of the axle, a locking-brace pivoted to said rear 
75 
85 
OO 
IOS 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
I 30 
 
Section and adapted to engage a catch on the 
forward section, a depending notched bar or 
latch pivoted upon said frame and adapted to 
engage a catch projecting laterally from the 
adjacent side of said rear section, and a plunger 
pivoted to the rear end of said forward sec 
tion, and having a stud arranged to project 
laterally through a slot in said rear section to 
automatically disengage the latch from its 
catch, Substantially asset forth. 
7. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with a 
crank-axle and a sectional plow-beam having 
the adjacent ends of the forward and rear sec. 
tions pivoted to the crank of the axle, of a 
guide adapted to receive the forward end of 
the front section of the plow-beam and allow 
of a limited vertical movement thereof, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
8. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with 
the tongue and forward end of the plow-beam, 
of a stud or foot-rest projecting laterally from 
Said tongue and pivotally supporting slotted 
guide-links, within which are supported later 
ally-projecting studs of the plow-beam, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
9. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with a 
Crank-axle, ofa plow-beam having its rear sec 
tion pivotally connected to the crank of the 
axle and its forward section pivoted at one 
end to said crank, while its opposite end is 
provided with laterally-projecting studs which 
receive slotted guide-links, the latter being piv. 
oted to a projecting stud of the plow - beam, 
Substantially as set forth. 
10. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with 
an inclined spindle secured at one end to an 
oscillating plate connected with the axle, of a 
vertical shaft and a cam or eccentric for im 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
parting an oscillating movement to said plate, 
and thereby adjusting the position of the wheel, 
substantially as set forth. 
11. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with 
the furrow side of the axle and with the tongue, 
of a sleeve or box mounted on said axle and a 
plate secured to the under side of said sleeve 
and tongue, the frame of the furrow-wheel piv. 
oted at one end to the outer end of said plate, 
while its opposite end is adapted to slide in a 
guideformed on the inner side of said plate, and 
is provided with an elongated slot, within which 
is arranged an operating-cam connected to a 
rotating shaft adapted to be operated by the 
driver, substantially as set forth. 
12. In a sulky-plow, the combination, with 
the axle, of a seat-supporting frame secured 
thereto at one end, while its opposite end is 
secured upon a sleeve mounted on said axle, 
a plate or bracket secured to the under side of 
said sleeve and to the tongue, a furrow-wheel 
axle-frame pivotally connected to the outer 
end of said plate, while its inner end is adapted 
to a guide formed on the inner side of said 
plate, and is slotted to receive an operating-cam, 
the latter being connected to a rotating verti 
cal shaft which extends through a perforated 
and indented plate secured to the adjacent 
side of the seat-frame, and is provided with a 
hand-lever or dog whereby the furrow-wheel 
may be adjusted, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
WILLIAM L. CASADAY. 
Witnesses: 
F. C. NIPPOLD, 
E. K. LINDSAY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259087.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
E. L. BRY ANT. 
HANGING AMP. 
No. 259,087. 
Patented June 6, 1882, 
PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
EDSON L. BRYANT, OF ANSONIA, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-EIALF 
TO WALLACE & SONS, OF SAME PLACE. 
HANGING LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,087, dated June 6, 1882. 
Application filed March 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDsoN L. BRYANT, of 
Ansonia, in the county of New Haven and State 
of Connecticut, have invented a new Improve 
ment in Hanging Lamps; and I do hereby de 
clare the following, when taken in connection 
With accompanying drawings and the letters 
of reference marked thereon, to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, and which 
said drawings constitute part of this specifi 
cation, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a sectional face view; Figs. 2, 3, 
4, 5, and 6, detached views enlarged. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
that class of lamp-holders designed to suspend 
the lamp from the ceiling, commonly called 
harp burners, becauseoftheir peculiarshape, 
and such as are usually suspended by weight 
or otherwise, so as to be adjusted to different 
elevations. Heretofore these fixtures have been 
made from cast metal, usually cast-iron, be 
cause they are of the cheaper class of fixtures. 
In such construction the surfaces are neces 
sarily rough and the ornamentation must be 
of a coarse character. To obviate these un 
sightly qualities of the fixture they have been 
made with wire connections from the lamp 
holder to the shade-ring above; but such wire 
connections are necessarily plain, without orna. 
mentation, and too light to give the appear 
ance of stability desirable in such fixtures, 
The object of my invention is to produce the 
fixture from sheet metal in such manner that 
the extra cost of sheet metal over common 
cast-iron is more than counterbalanced by the 
saving of labor in the construction of the de 
vice; and it consists in the construction of a 
fixture from sheet metal, as more fully herein 
after described, and particularly recited in the 
claims, 
A represents the lamp-support, which is of 
usual cup shape, struck from sheet metal; B, 
the shade-ring; C C, the side connections be 
tween the lamp-holder and shade-ring. These 
connections are cut from sheet metal by dies, 
and may be of any desirable ornamental shape, 
one shown detached in face view, Fig. 5, and 
in edge view, Fig. 6. 
The surface may be ornamented by swag 
- 
w 
55 
25, 1852. (No model.) 
ing - dies to any desired extent, the sheet 
metal surface forming all the finish that is re 
quired, which may be plated or otherwise orna 
mented. The surface will be always smooth 
and finished, easily cleaned, and stronger than 
cast metal. 
At the lower end of the connections C, and 
at their junction with the lamp-holder, studs 
or projections a are formed as a part of the 
connections-that is to say, they are cut on 
the lower end of the connections, like tenons 
and in the edge of the holder. A corresponding 
apertures or mortises are cut, through which 
the studs a extend, and are riveted upon the 
inside, which makes a firm union between the 
connections C and the holder A. The upper 
ends of the connections have a similar stud, 
d, cut therein, which extends through the 
flanges in the ring B, and perforated for the 
attachment of the chains or cords by which 
the fixture is to be suspended. 
In order that the riveting of the studs a 
upon the inside shall not make a projection 
upon the inner surface which will interfere 
with the proper introduction of the lamp-fount, 
Istrike a vertical recess, e, in the side of the 
cup and in line with the lower end of the con 
nections C, and make the openings for the 
studs into that recess, as seen in Fig. 3. 
As a furtherstrengthening between the lamp 
holder A and the connections C, Iturn a flange, 8o 
f, from the upper edge of the holder A out. 
ward, and cut a radial slot, h, therein, as seen 
in Fig. 4, corresponding to the thickness of 
the connection C, and into which the con 
nections pass to bring the studs a into the 
perforations in the side of the holder. This 
extension from the holder out onto the arms 
insures the bringing of the connections into 
the same plane and prevents the possibility 
of their being bent out of that plane. 
The holder A is struck from sheet metal, as 
is also the ring B, thus making the entire fix 
ture from sheet metal, the surface of which 
may be ornamented by striking them in orna 
menting-dies. The fixtureis very much stronger 
than the common cast-iron construction, light 
er and neater in its appearance, and costs lit. 
tle, if any, more. 
75 
85 
90 
95 
C 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
259,0s? 
ing through corresponding perforations in the 
holder and into the recesses e and there riv 
eted, substantially as described. 
3. The lamp-holder A, constructed with the 
flanges f and radial slots li therein, and the 
sheet-metal connections C, set into the slots h 
and secured to the holder, substantially as de 
scribed. 
EDSON I. BRYANT. 
Witnesses: 
F. L. GAYLORD, 
T. J. WOOD. 
I claim 
1. Alhanging-lamp fixture consisting of the 
lamp-holder A and the connections C, the said 
connections constructed from sheet metal cut 
with studs or projections at to pass through 
corresponding holes in the lamp-holder and 
serve as rivets for securing the two parts to 
gether, the said connections also secured to the 
shade-ring above, substantially as described. 
2. The lamp-holder A, constructed with the 
vertical recesses e upon its inside, and the con 
nections C, constructed with studs a, extend 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259187.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 259,187. 
... 
C. McINTIRE. 
BRACELET, 
. 
Patented June 6, 1882. 
2.2. 
a 
& O 
artsSNs 
zigZ2NS 
s es 
 
 
y Ya. 
NS s SN is ZerSss 
S K&S 
SS Sn 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES McINTIRE, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
BRACE LET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,187, dated June 6, 1882. 
Application filed January 28, 1882. 
(No mode.) 
So 
E may be so arranged that it will engage the 45 
stop just at the point when the two ends will 
be on the same line, the ends being ornamented 
and made to just meet each other-too short 
to lap. 
When the spring is in place and the joint 
ends together, the stop resting in the notch, 
a slide, H, is put over the joint and soldered 
or brazed to the collar D. The opposite end 
of the slide is provided with an inner flange, 
I, made to catch against a fixed collar, K, on 
the end of section C; and this connection holds 
the joint ends together, making a swiveljoint, 
the sections being left to swing laterally in 
opening and closing the bracelet. This spring 
is not necessarily of wires twisted together, 
for a single steel wire having in it the requisite 
twist will perform the same service set forth, 
making a bracelet entirely free from a liability 
to work open and be lost from the wrist of the 
Weae, 
I have described bracelets only; but my in 
vention has equal adaptation to rings and ear 
rings embraced in this application. 
55 
65 
I claim 
1. In a bracelet, the combination of the sec 
tion B, provided with the fixed collar D, and 
the section C, provided with the tube F and 
collar K, the spring A, and the slide Ed, hav 
ing the flange I, adapted to slip onto the sec 
tion C, so that the flange I shall engage the 
collar K, and the opposite end of said sleeve 
or slide be soldered fast to the collar K, all sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination of the section B, having 
the collar D and notch E, the section C, car 
rying the collar K and tube F, said tube sup 
porting the stop projection G, the slide H, with 
its flange I, and the spring A, all substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
CHARLES MCINTIRE, 
75 
Witnesses : 
. 
HoRACE HARRIs, 
T. W. MORRISON. 
s 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
. 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES McINTIRE, 
of Newark, in the county of Essex and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Bracelets, Rings, and Ear 
Rings, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
joint-bracelets, &c., in which the opening is 
by a lateral movement of the closing ends of 
the sections; and it consists in the devices 
substantially as hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 is a plan or side view, partly in 
section. Fig. 2 is a view from the inside of 
the bracelet, showing a stop arrangement in 
the joint. Fig. 3 is a detailed view. Fig. 4 is 
a perspective view of the joint ends of the 
bracelet detached. 
In my construction I make a spring, A, the 
ends of which to extend through about half the 
length of each section of the bracelet, usually 
of twisted steel wires, being itself set on a twist, 
which, when put in the joint portion of a brace 
let, forces the two closing ends of the sections 
B C together laterally, when they will ordi 
narily lap onto each other side by side, as at 
L. To secure the joint the section B has near 
the joint end a fixed collar, D, and in the end 
a notch, E, taking out a quarter (more or less) 
of the end. The section C is provided with an 
inner tube, F, made to enter and turn loose 
in the end of section B, and a stop projection, 
G, on one side of the tube, made to enter the 
notch E for the purpose of regulating the dis 
tance the bracelet may be opened. The notch 
and stop are so arranged that when the stop 
strikes one side of the notch it will leave the 
closing ends of the bracelet just at the point 
of contact or of closing against each other, and 
the other side of the notch will engage the 
stop when the bracelet is opened as far as re 
quired for putting on or taking off-usually 
about one-quarter open; or, instead of the 
ends of the bracelet lapping onto the side of 
each other in closing, the one side of the notch 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259288.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 259,288, 
J. F. CANNEY & D. F. TOUCEY, 
STEAM BOILER. 
Patented June 13, 1882, 
I 
i 
y 
| 
7 
Fitz. A. 
a? 
4. 
s 
se 
-gs 
Z 
a 
A. A. 
Aftesia. . 
 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. CANNEY AND DONALD F. TOUCEY, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. 
STEAM - BOLE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,288, dated June 13, 1882. 
Application filed March 13, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JoHN F. CANNEY and 
DONALDF. ToUCEY, of Minneapolis, in the 
county of Hennepin and State of Minnesota, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Steam - Boilers; and "we do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication. 
Our invention relates to steam-boilers; and 
it consists in automatically regulating the 
pressure of steam on the boiler by permitting 
the same to escape through a pipe running 
from the dome to the smoke-stack, for the pur 
poses hereinafter set forth. 
We desire to term our invention an au 
tomatic steam - blast damper, from the fact 
that the steam discharged in the stack when 
the valve is open passes downward and ar 
rests the upward draft, the one neutralizing 
the effect of the other. The valve, acting au 
tomatically, will close when a sufficient amount 
of steam has escaped, thus shutting off the 
downward discharge of steam in the stack 
and permitting the draft to resume its func 
tion. Assuming the valve to be set to open 
at one hundred and thirty pounds pressure to 
the square inch, the natural draft on the fire. 
box and through the flues and up the stack 
would continue until that pressure has been at 
tained on the boiler. The valve would then 
open and permit the steam to rush through 
the pipe leading to the stack and pass down 
ward, immediately checking draft and arrest 
ing further pressure on the boiler. By thus 
automatically permitting the steam to escape 
at a fixed point and simultaneously checking 
the draft the liability of boiler explosion is 
lessened in a manifold degree. 
We attain the foregoing results by the mech 
anism illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal section, 
showing a steam-boiler provided with our im 
provement. Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a nozzle and its attachment, 5o 
partly in section. 
The letter A. represents the dome of the 
boiler. B is a cage with valve - seat and 
thread to screw into the dome. B is the 
valve, held in its seat by the spiral spring m. 55 
C is a pipe running from the dome to the stack. 
D is a nozzle on the end of pipe C. G is 
a semi-spherical plug, having its upper side 
beveled, which fits into the end of nozzle D. 
ff are the braces, riveted to the nozzle and se. 6o 
curing the plug G. H. represents the boiler; 
I, the fire-box; K, the smoke-box, and M the 
Stack. 
We are aware that it is not new to conduct 
steam from the dome to the smoke-box and 65 
discharge the same therein. This has been 
done to get rid of the objectionable noise pro 
duced by steam as it escapes from the safety 
valve. We not only attain this result, but 
we produce a damper working automatically 7o 
by means of a steam-blast. We desire par 
ticularly to call attention to the peculiar con. 
struction of the nozzle we employ to accom. 
plish these purposes. It projects downward 
in the stack, and flares outward to receive the 75 
beveled side of the semi-spherical plug held 
therein by means of riveted braces. The ob. 
ject of said plug in the nozzle is to partially 
check the discharge of steam in the smoke 
box. It causes the steam to flare outward 8o 
conically and downward into the stack. This 
obviates the rush that would occur through 
an open or perforated nozzle. The damper is 
not to take the place of the safety-valve, but 
is to be used in connection with it, so that if 85 
one gives out the other can be used. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
valve to and through and opening in the stack, 
and being bent downward therein, the end or 
nozzle of said pipe flaring outward, and hav 
ing an inner beveled-edge surface, in combi 
nation with a semi-spherical plug having a 95 
flat top with beveled edge, said edge being 
equidistant from the beveled edge of the noz 
zle, the plug being suspended in the mouth 
The steam-pipe C, leading from the safety- go 
25 
35 
5 
O 
IS 
45 
2 
259,2SS 
of the nozzle by braces riveted through the as our own we have hereto affixed our signa 
nozzle and projecting inward and downward tures in presence of two witnesses. 
to the center of the flat surface of the plug, 
at which point they meet and are united and 
5 secured to said plug, all arranged in the man- 
ner and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing 
JOHN FRANKLIN CANNEY. 
DONALD FERRIS TOUCEY. 
Witnesses: 
S. B. CHASE, 
A. B. CHASE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259388.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 259,388, 
J, HAWLOWETZ, 
MACHINE FOR, DRYING. FEATHERS, 
Patented June 13, 1882, 
 
We 
a 
 
 
 
 
  
| -- 
d 
/% 5. 
: 
FR-RP or s 
2 2 e-le 2 
- 
- 
W 
% 
Y 
al 
S 
 
WITNESS 27, 
zz 22.6 
R 
BY 
ATTORNEY 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, O.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H A WLOWETZ, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MACH NE FOR DRYING FEATHERS. 
- 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,388, dated June 18, 1882. 
Application filed April 21, 1882. 
(No model.) 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
- 
The thickest ends of the quills are further- to 
the drying - chamber B are arranged with 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN HAWLOWETZ, of hinged doors having glass windows, so as to 
the city, county, and State of New York, have give access to the interior of the frames and ad 
invented certain new and useful Improvements mit of the progress of the drying process to be 55 
in Machines for Drying Feathers, of which observed from the outside. 
the following is a specification. 
Ostrich and other feathers, which are used 
to a great extent for the trimming of ladies' 
hats, require to be carefully cleaned by wash 
ing, after which they are sized and dried, and 
then dyed or otherwise prepared and finished 
for use. The drying operation was heretofore 
accomplished by hand by taking hold of the 
feathers with the right hand and expelling the 
adhering water and size by striking a few 
blows on the left arm, whereby the surplus 
size is removed and the vanes of the feathers 
spread, the feathers being then completely 
dried by being hung up in a hot room. 
The object of this invention is to substitute 
for the hand-labor heretofore required an im 
proved machine, whereby the drying of a large 
Inumber of feathers may be accomplished in a 
quicker and more perfect manner; and the in 
vention consists of a closed drying-chamber, 
which is provided at its interior with fixed in 
clined transverse wire frames or gratings that 
are arranged at both sides of oscillating beater 
frames, to the opposite ends of which the wet 
and sized feathers are applied, so that by the 
oscillations of the beater-frames the feathers 
are struck against the inclined wireframes, and 
thereby the moisture and surplus size removed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a vertical longitudinal section of 
my improved apparatus for drying ostrich and 
other feathers, Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec 
tion of the same on linea ac, Fig. 1, and Figs, 
3 and 4 are respectively a detail top view and 
a section of that portion of the beater-frame 
which holds the feathers in beating. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The ostrich or other feathers are applied, af. 
ter being cleaned and sized in the usual man 
ner, by their quills to the opposite ends of the 
oscillating beater-frames A, which are ar. 
ranged at the interior of a closed drying-cham 
ber, B, the center shafts of the beater-frames 
A turning in suitable bearings in the side walls 
of the drying-chamber B. The end walls of 
The oscillating motion is imparted to the 
beater-frames A, either by hand or power, the 
shafts of the frames being for this purpose ex 
tended to one end through theside wall of the 
drying-chamber B, and provided with cranks 
which are connected by a crank-rod to an ec 
centric of a driving-shaft, supported in bear 
ings at the top of the drying-chamber. The 
beater-frames A are arranged at their opposite 65 
ends with a number of transversely-stretched 
retaining-wires, at a, through which the quills 
of the feathers are alternately passed, as shown 
in Figs. 3 and 4. 
- 
more secured by means of twisted binding 
strings and fastening-wires l to side hooks b' 
of the beater-frames A. By the pressure of 
the stretched transvere wires and the retain 
ing action of the twisted binding-strings the 
feathers are securely held parallel to each 
other at both ends of the beater-frames, so that 
by the oscillations of the same they are brought 
with considerable force into contact with fixed 
inclined wire frames or gratings C at the in 
terior of the chamber B. 
Two wire frames C are arranged at each 
end of a beater-frame-one above the other be 
low the same-at such angles of inclination as 
correspond to the terminal positions of the os 
cillating beater-frames. Each beater-frame A 
works consequently in connection with four 
fixed wire frames C, so that the feathers are 
thrown at each oscillation against two wire 
frames located diagonally to the shaft of the 9o 
beater-fraine. 
Tosoften the blow of the beater-frames upon 
the fixed wire frames C, one of each pair of 
beater-frames is provided with rubber cushions 
d, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The interior of the drying-chamber is heated 
by steam or otherwise, and the surplus moist: 
ure drawn off to the exterior by means of a 
suction-fan or other ventilating device oper 
ated by a belt and pulley in connection with 
the driving-shaft of the beater-frames, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
8o 
75 
95 
Ico 
45 
So 
2 
259,3ss 
2 
Cy 
In this manner a large number of feathers 
may be quickly freed of the adhering size and 
moisture by the beating action of the oscillat 
ing frames upon the fixed wire frames, and 
then dried by exposure to the high tempera 
ture kept up in the interior of the drying 
. 
. 
chamber. 
The feathers are thus dried in a more uni 
form manner and at less cost than by hand 
labor, without exposing the workmen to the 
high temperature in which they are now re 
quired to work in order to properly heat up 
and dry the feathers. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. An apparatus for drying ostrich and other 
feathers, consisting of a tightly-closed drying 
chamber, fixed interior wire frames arranged 
at a suitable angle of inclination, and of inter 
mediate oscillating beater-frames provided 
with means to attach the feathers to their op. 
posite ends, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of a closed drying-cham 
ber having fixed interior wire frames, the lat 
ter being provided with rubber cushions, with 
Oscillating beater-frames having means to at 
tach the feathers to their opposite ends, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In an apparatus for drying ostrich and 
other feathers, a beater-frame, A, having 
transverse retaining-wires at a. at opposite ends, 
and transverse binding-strings b, applied to the 
frame back of the retaining-wires, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
25 
35 
JOHN HAWLOWETZ. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
CARL KARP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259488.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MEL WIN B. CHURCH, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICH IGAN. 
COATING AND PANTNG EXTERIOR SURFACES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,488, dated June 13, 1882. 
Application filed J.anuary 13, 1882. (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MELVIN B. CHURCH, of 
Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent and State 
of Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Coating and Painting Exte 
rior Surfaces; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same. 
My invention relates to the covering of ex 
terior walls, and is also applicable to other sur 
ES wherever the ordinary coats of paint are 
Se(.. 
It consists in covering or coating exposed 
walls, first, with a preparation of finely-pull 
verized gypsum and glue, or a material known 
as alabastine, and an exterior coating of or 
dinary paint, all as hereinafter fully explained 
and distinctly claimed. 
The object of my invention is to obtain a 
body or foundation for the surface coating of 
paint of cheaper material, whereby a substan 
tial firmly-united covering is secured for walls, 
the outside of houses, carriage-bodies, or wher 
ever ordinary coats of paint are used, with the 
ordinary exterior surface of paint. 
In carrying out my invention I use for the 
foundation or first coat a mixture of finely-pull 
verized calcined gypsum mixed with very finely 
pulverized glue in a dry state, in the propor 
tions of from five to ten pounds of the best 
glue to one hundred pounds of the gypsum. 
The amount of glue to be used between these 
extremes will depend upon the hardness de 
sired in the foundation coating. These ma 
terials are mixed thoroughly, and require only 
the addition of water in order to prepare them 
for use. I dissolve them in hot water, adding 
preferably enough to reduce the material to a 
liquid or semi-liquid condition. 
For coating the exterior walls of buildings 
I reduce the materials to a liquid condition 
and apply them with a brush, as ordinary 
whitewash or like coating is applied. The 
number of these foundation coats will depend 
upon the condition of the surface to be cow 
ered as to Smoothness, and upon the kind of 
finish required. Each coat should be allowed 
to set before another is applied. 
When this coating of the calcined gypsum 
so and glue has firmly set it forms a tough, hard, 
and sufficiently porous foundation on which to 
apply the paint. 
I may use, as before stated, for the first or 
foundation coat an article known in the mar. 
ket as alabastine, for whicle Letters Patent 55 
of the United States were granted me April 
6, 1875, numbered 161,591, preferably adding 
thereto a small quantity of finely-pulverized 
glue of the best quality-say from one (1) to 
fifteen (15) pounds to each hundred-weight of 6o 
the alabastine. 
For ordinary surfaces, such as the exterior 
surfaces of walls of houses, I apply the paint 
directly to the foundation prepared as above 
described. For this purpose I use any of the 
ordinary kinds of paints and apply them in 
the ordinary manner. A single coat is usually, 
sufficient; but two or more may be used, if de 
sired. 
For work requiring a very smooth and fin 
ished surface I modify to some extent the 
mode of applying the foundation coating of 
gypsum and binding material. This modifi 
cation consists in adding less of the hot wa 
ter, so as to reduce the pulverized materials 
to a semi-liquid or plastic condition, in which 
they may be applied, either with a trowel or 
brush, to the surfaces to be covered, giving 
to such surfaces a body thicker than the cover 
ing which would be applied by using a brush 8o 
and the ordinary liquid form of the substance. 
After this coating is set it retains the rough. 
ness imparted to it by the tools used to apply 
it, and I proceed to reduce it to a smooth sur 
face by means of sand-paper or some equiva 
lent material, by which it is rendered smooth 
and fine. I then, either by rubbing or wash 
ing, remove all the dust and apply the paint, 
This mode of coating is practicable to the in 
terior finish of cars or buildings, or to their go 
external surfaces, and it may be used advan 
tageously in covering the bodies of wagons, 
carriages, sleighs, and the like. The founda. 
tion coating of gypsum and binding material 
gives a solid firm body, which the paint pene. 95 
trates, and with which the paint unites, making . 
a very firm, tough, and solid coating, with as 
E. a finish as can be given by using paints 
aOne. 
There is another advantage in this, that if too 
35 
yo 
O 
IS 
25 
45 
 
259,4ss 
5 paper and by repainting. 
2 
by any blow or abrasion any part should be. 
, come injured it can be repaired by adding 
some of the plastic material, then subsequently 
reducing the surface to a uniform level by sand 
The materials used for the first coat may be 
colored to any desired shade by mixing there 
with any suitable coloring material. 
Although I have mentioned various sur 
Io faces, my invention is more largely-applicable 
to the exterior surfaces of buildings, whether 
of wood or of brick. On such surfaces it is 
used with excellent effect, since the cheap ma 
terial which constitutes the foundation of the 
I5 coating fills all the crevices and forms a com 
paratively smooth surface, at little expense, to 
receive the paint. 
I am of course aware that it is not new to 
paint plastered surfaces; but the merit of my 
2o invention consists in uniting the special kind 
of finish with an outside coat of paint, the 
glue on the special kind of finish rendering it 
porous, so that the paint partially penetrates 
and adheres firmly, making the entire coating 
fit for an outside surface. The object is not 25 
to ornament the alabastine surface, but to 
make it weather-proof. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is-. 
The improved process of covering exposed 
surfaces or walls, consisting in first coating 
said surfaces or walls with the described mix 
ture of pulverized gypsum and glue, and then 
painting them, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
M. B. CHURCE. 
35 
Witnesses: 
E. A. DICK, 
DAVID E. MEAD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259589.txt	(No Model.) 
C. H. RUDD. 
ELECTRIC RAILWAY. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 259,589, 
Patented June 13, 1882. 
4. 
 
 
A 29.3 
2. 
WITNESSES 
7.6.24% 
Azaz (24%ayee, 
INVENTOR 
Czas, A. Zizzac, 
Valolory/7/8. 77 for. 
By as Affor 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
C. H. RUDD. 
ELECTRIC RAI, WAY, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 259,589, 
 
Patented June 13, 1882, 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
w 
7% - 
2 (C 
------- 
26oe/ 6%e2e2. 
- 
(2.a.s. A. Azza, 
w Af 
fhleton fe;2. 76. 
Meys 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CEIARLES H. RUDD, OF EVANSTON, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TOJAMES W. WEIITE, 
M. LEWIS, TRUSTEES, OF PHILADEL 
JAMES CLARENCE WHITE, AND H. 
PHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ELECTRIC 
RALWAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,589, dated June 13, 1882. 
Application filed April 6, 1882. (No model.) 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs H. RUDD, of edge view of one form of rail which may be so 
To all whom it may concern: 
Evanston, in the county of Cook and State of used. 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
5 Improvements in Electric Railways, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to propelling cars, car 
riages, or vehicles upon railways by means of 
electro-magnetism; and its object more espe 
Io cially is to propel upon a railway light car 
riages or vehicles particularly useful in trans 
porting light packages or articles rapidly, safe 
ly, and economically from one place to another. 
The object of my invention also is to improve 
I5 electric railway propulsion generally; and it 
may be stated here at the outset that some of 
the improvements hereinafter described and 
claimed may be used without the others, and 
also in systems differing in some of their ?ea 
20 tures from that herein particularly described. 
The subject - matter claimed is distinctly 
pointed out at the close of the specification. 
In the accompanying drawings, which show 
so much of my improved apparatus as is nec 
25 essary to an understanding of my invention, 
my improvements being organized in the best 
Way now known to me, Figure 1 is a plan or 
top view of the earriage or vehicle and the sys 
tem of rails upon which it runs, a portion of 
30 the body of said vehicle being broken away to 
show the driving-wheels mounted upon the un 
der side thereof. Fig. 2 is a transverse sec 
tion through the apparatus on the line a ac of 
Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is a similar section on the 
35 line 2/2) of said figure. Figs. 4 and 5 are side 
views of the interior of the respective driving 
wheels for producing backward and forward 
movement of the carriage over the rails. Fig. 
6 is a view of the interior of one of the sup 
40 porting-wheels of the carriage, which is also 
particularly useful for signaling or reporting 
purposes, in order to indicate to the operator 
at a fixed station the speed of the carriage and 
its position upon the track. Fig. 7 is a view 
45 showing a spring or yielding bearing for the 
fixed shaft, around which the driving-wheels 
turn, and Fig. 8 is a similar view of a similar 
bearing for the revolving axle of the main sup 
porting-wheels. Fig. 9 shows a plan and an 
Fig. 10 is a diagram of the system of 
rails and methods of running the circuits both 
to the driving and to the reporting or signal 
ing wheels, and Fig. 11 comprises a plan view 
and a side elevation of a modified form of ap- 55 
paratus. 
The body or frame A of the car, vehicle, or 
carriage may be of any suitable construction, 
and is mounted in this instance upon four 
wheels, B B B B, each of which in the or. 6o 
ganization shown in Figs, 1, 2, and 3 runs 
upon its respective rail C C C C, said rails 
constituting the track over which the carriage 
is propelled. The wheels B B are fixed upon 
an axle, D, so as to turn with said axle in bear. 65 
ings EE, suspended or connected to the un 
der side of the carriage, car-body, or truck 
frame, as clearly shown in Figs. 3 and S. The 
bearings E E of said axle D are yielding bear 
ings, and preferably consist each of a bearing- to 
block, e, movable up and down in a bracket 
frame or box, et, fixed to the car body or truck 
by a metallic girder or frame, e, a spiral or 
other suitable spring, e, being interposed be 
tween said block, which rests upon the axle D 75 
and said box so as to support the Weight of 
the carriage or car-body, as clearly shown in 
Figs. 3 and 8. 
The wheels B and B are what I term the 
main supporting-wheels of the carriage or 8o 
car A. Said wheel B is preferably a plain me 
tallic wheel; orit may be composed of metallic 
side plates with a felly clamped between them 
having a continuous metallic tire or band, as 
shown in Fig. 3, while the wheel B or its tire 85 
or tread is constructed preferably in sections 
electrically insulated one from the other. I 
prefer to construct said wheel B of two cir 
cular metallic side plates or disks, bb', having . 
suitable enlargements at their centers to af. 9o 
ford proper strength in their connection with 
the axle D, with which they turn, said plates 
having securely clamped or fastened between 
them in any proper way, so as to project be 
yond their peripheries, a circular rim or felly, 95 
b-say of wood or some other suitable insulat 
t 
 
2 
259,5S9 
O 
75 
ing material-which acts mechanically some 
what in the manner of an ordinary wagon 
wheel felly. A metallic tire, b, nearly sur 
rounds this rim or felly l, said tire being con 
structed, say, in two parts, 12, having their 
adjacent ends divided and insulated, as clearly 
shown in Figs. 1 and 6. One section-say part 
1-of said tire b is electrically connected with 
one of the metallic side plates or disks, b b', 
and through it to the axle D, as shown in Figs. 
3 and 6-by means of a wire, 3, for instance 
while the other part, 2, of said tire b will be 
electrically disconnected from said axle D by 
reason of the interposed non-conducting rim 
or felly l, the object of which construction 
will presently appear. 
The Wheels B? B3 are what I call the driv 
ing - wheels,' and they are preferably con 
structed somewhat similarly to the wheel B 
that is to say, they preferably consist each of 
two circular metallic side plates or disks, bb', 
having clamped or otherwise securely fastened 
between them at their edges a circular rim or 
felly, b, of wood or some other suitable non 
conducting material, said rim or felly extend 
ing out beyond the circumference of said side 
plates or disks, so as to electrically insulate 
said disks and the shaft F, upon and around 
which they turn, from the rails upon which 
said wheels run. The rims or fellies of the 
wheels B'B' are provided on their peripheries 
with sectional metallic tires, each tire prefer 
ably consisting of four sections, 1234, the ad 
jacent ends of which are separated and insu 
lated from each other, as clearly shown in Figs. 
1, 4, and 5. Said wheels B B3 are fitted by 
their side plates to turn independently upon a 
fixed or non-rotating shaft, F. Said shaft F 
rests in bearings or blocks f, which have up 
and-down play in brackets or boxes f', spiral 
or other suitable springs, f', being interposed 
between the blocksfand said boxes f" in order 
to support the front end of the body or truck 
of the car or carriage and afford yielding bear. 
ings for the shaft of said wheels B B8 corre 
spondently with those of the wheels BB. The 
metallic frame or girders f of the bearings 
of the shaft F are in electrical connection by 
contact or by connecting pieces or wires (not 
necessary to be shown) with the similar frame 
or girders, e, of the bearings of the axle D; 
or the respective girders e may be formed in 
one piece with the respective outside girders, 
f, if desired, so that a continuous metallic or 
5 conducting frame is formed between the axles 
D F and the platform or body of the car. 
The metallic side plates or disks, bib', of the 
driving-wheels B'B' should be sufficiently sep 
arated by their rim or felly b as to form be 
tween said rim and the shaft F, around which 
said wheels turn, a circular chamber, G. 
Within the chamber G of each of the wheels 
B'B', I preferably mount and secure equidis 
tant from one another four electro-magnets, 
H H H H, as clearly shown in Figs. 2, 4, 
and 5, the poles of which face the fixed shaft 
F, which is provided at one point within each 
chamber G with an armature, I, the shaft it 
self, other than its armatures II, being prefer 
ably constructed of non-magnetic metal. From 
each insulated section 1 2 3 4 of the metallic 
tire of each of the driving-wheels B'B' an in 
sulated wire is run to one of the electro-imag 
nets H B E H8, the method of running the 
connections being clearly shown in Figs. 4 and 
5. It will thus be understood that the electro 
magnets are firmly fastened upon the interior 
of the wheels B B, and that each section of 
the divided tire of each wheel B'B' is connected 
with its respective magnet. Said wheels B 
B, as I have before stated, are the driving 
wheels of the car or vehicle. Their construc 
tion and action are similar, save in so far as 
the electrical connections between the tire and 
magnets are concerned. These connections 
are run differently, as clearly shown in Figs. 
4 and 5, the object of which is to rotate the 
wheel B in one direction when its magnets are 
successively excited by a current of electricity 
traversing their coils, so as to propel the car 
or vehicle in one direction along the track, and 
to rotate the other driving-wheel, B', in the op 
posite direction when the coils of its magnets 
are successively excited, so as to propel the 
car or vehicle in the other direction along said 
track, the rotation of said wheels B B being 
due to the successive attractive action of the 
electro-magnets exerted upon their fixed arma 
tures, each magnet of each wheel being excited 
in its turn as its section of the tire comes upon 
the track to act upon the armature and make 
the motion of the wheel constant about its 
shaft F by a current conveyed along the rails 
of the track, as will be fully explained. 
The rails on which the carriage runs in the 
organization shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 10 are . 
four in number, and are preferably made in 
the form of the usual street-car rail, although 
it will be obvious other forms of rails may be 
used and the wheels of the car or carriage 
provided with the usual flanges. These rails 
are all insulated, so as to be good conductors 
of electricity, and are the medium through 
which the electric current is conveyed, which 
is converted into electro-magnetism at the ve 
hicle to propel said vehicle. 
The arrangement on circuit is clearly shown 
in Fig. 10. A generator or source of electrici. 
ty, J, has its negative pole connected with the 
rail C', while the positive pole of said genera 
tor may be connected by a switch, J', with either 
of the rails C'C', accordingly as it is desired 
to propel the carriage in one direction or the 
other. A second generator or source of elec 
tricity, K, has its negative pole connected with 
the rail C', while its positive pole is connected 
with the rail C, it being thus understood that 
I prefer to utilize the rail C as a common re 
turn-Conductor for the currents of both the 
generators J and K, which are employed for 
different purposes, the generator J being util 
ized to propel the car or vehicle, while the 
25 
35 
45 
So 
V 
65 
95 
IOO 
IO 
IIS 
I 3G 
- 
s 
259,5s9 
generator K is utilized for reporting purposes, 
so as to indicate by suitable apparatus, L, the 
speed of the car and its location upon the track. 
The operation of the apparatus is as follows: 
Suppose the car or vehicle is at one end of the 
track, and it is desired to propel it forward to 
the other end or to any intermediate station. 
The engineer in control of the switch J will 
now turn said switch so as to make contact 
with the connection of the insulated rail C8 
and throw a powerful current along said rail. 
The insulated section of the tire of the driv 
ing-wheel B, resting upon the track, will con 
duct said current to its respective electro 
magnet, which, being thereby excited, will ex 
ert its attractive action upon the armattire I 
of the shaft F, and will pull said wheel around, 
turning it in a forward direction, as indicated 
by the arrow, Fig. 5. As soon as the section 
of the tire passes from the track the electrical 
connection between the rail and the magnet 
which has just been at work is broken, while 
the next magnet is simultaneously thrown into 
action to exert its action upon the armature 
and make the motion of the wheel constant, 
and so on. The circuit is completed from the 
rail C'successively through each working mag 
net of the wheel B to the return conducting. 
rail C by means of the sectional tire, the con 
nections i i", the metallic side plate or disk of 
the wheel, the shaft F, the metallic bearings 
of said shaft, a metallic connection (or frame 
fe') connecting said bearings with the metal 
lic bearings E of axle D, said axle D, and the 
wheel B'. It will be understood, however, that 
the connections from the magnets of the driv 
ing wheel or wheels to the return-conductor 
may be organized in many different ways. 
When the movement of the carriage is to be 
reversed the switch J is shifted so as to with 
draw the current of the generator from the 
rail C and throw it upon the rail C and 
through the magnets of the wheel B, the con 
nections between the sectional tire of the 
wheel B and its magnets being run so that the 
direction of rotation of the wheel B will be 
the reverse of that of the wheel B. (See Figs. 
4 and 5.) 
From what has been said it will be seen that 
the operator or engineer may at Will produce 
either forward or backward motion of the car 
riage from the station at which he is situated 
by throwing into action either one of two mo 
tors carried by the vehicle, and this control is 
very desirable. 
In order to indicate the speed of the carriage 
along the track and to show its position to the 
operator, I have organized the wheel B, as here 
in before described, to run upon the conducting 
rail C. The current of the battery or gener 
ator K is thrown upon said rail C when the 
circuit is closed. At the times the section 1 
of the tire of the wheel B is on the rail the cir 
cuit of the said generator K will be closed, a 
conducting-connection being formed by the tire 
section 1, its wire 3, the plate or disk b' of the 
wheel B, the axle D, and wheel B to the return. 
conductor C, which, as before stated, is con 
nected with the negative pole of the generator. 
In the circuit of the generator K, place a 
suitable apparatus, Li, to denote the presence 
or absence of a current of electricity. Any 
suitable apparatus, of which there are many 
forms well known to electricians and in com 
mon use, may be employed for this purpose, 
and I have therefore not shown any particular 
one in detail. From what has been said as to 
the construction of the wheel B it will be ob 
vious that during its rotation the circuit of the 
battery K will be made and broken, and this 
will cause electric impulses or waves to be 
thrown upon said circuit and indicated or re 
corded at Li, the rapidity of which impulses or 
waves will be an index as to the speed of the 
velhicle. 
In order to indicate the position of the car 
riage on the track, sections or portions of the 
surface of the rail C (see Fig. 9) for any de 
sired lengths may be electrically insulated in 
well-known ways, so as to prevent the current 
of electricity of battery K from passing to the 
wheel B, but not preventing said current from 
being conducted to other sections of the track 
which permit the closing and breaking of the 
circuit through the Wheel B, as before de 
scribed. This construction causes the waves 
of electricity produced by the wheel B to cease 
at intervals, and by noting or recording these 
intervals the distance the carriage has traveled 
may be readily ascertained. Other ways of in 
sulating particular sections or lengths of the 
track obviously may be employed. 
In Fig. 11. I have shown a modified organi 
zation of apparatus, and these modifications or 
changes I will describe. 
In the organization shown in Fig. 11 the 
wheel B is constructed so that it (or its pe. 
riphery) is insulated entirely from its axle D 
in well-known ways, and said wheel runs upon 
the same rail, C, as the driving-wheel B, there 
being in this organization but three rails, as 
will be clearly seen on inspecting the drawing. 
The driving-wheel B runs upon its rail C', as 
in the organization first described, while the 
supporting-wheel B is a plain metallic one in 
electrical connection with its axle D, and runs 
upon the rail C, which in this modified organi. 
zation is the return-conductor for both the gen 
erators J and K. In lieu of the conducting 
rail C of the organization first described, there 
is connected with the generator K a rod or 
wire or other conductor, M, suspended over 
head from suitable posts or supports, N, along 
the line of the track, said conductor M having 
suitable contact points or places, m, along its 
length to make contact at determined inter 
vals with a contact piece or spring, a, placed 
on the carriage or car A, said contact-spring 
a being electrically connected with the axle D, 
and through its wheel B with the return-con 
ductor C. By knowing the number of electric 
waves or impulses to be produced by the con 
Io5 
O 
II5 
2O 
I 25 
I 30 
O 
25 
35 
SO 
55 
 
4 
259,589 
tact of the conductorM with the contact-spring 
a to the mile the position of the carriage on 
the track may be constantly known, together 
with its rate of speed, and these indications 
may be indicated or recorded by suitable ap 
paratus, well known to electricians, as before 
stated. 
From the foregoing description of my inven 
tion it will be understood that an operator sta 
tioned at a fixed point may operate and con. 
trol one or more cars or carriages upon an 
electric railway, while as the carriage moves 
along the track it reports itself to the operator, 
and the operator is therefore constantly in 
formed as to the speed and position of the car 
riage. 
I wish it understood that I do not limit my 
self to the details of construction which I have 
described and shown. 
I do not claim herein any of the improve 
ments shown and described by me relating to 
the apparatus and organizations for recording 
the speed and position of the car or train upon 
the track, as these improvements will consti 
tute the subject-matter of a separate applica 
tion. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a carriage with one or more 
of its supporting-wheels divided at its pe 
riphery into electrically-insulated sections. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a wheel divided into elec 
trically-insulated sections with electro - mag 
nets carried by said wheel and electrically con 
nected with said sections. 
3. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a wheel divided into elec 
trically-insulated sections, a non-rotating shaft 
around which said wheel turns, electro-mag 
nets carried by said wheel and electrically 
connected with its insulated sections, an arma 
ture fixed upon the said non-rotating shaft, and 
circuit-connections, including a source of elec 
tricity, to convey current to excite said electro 
magnets and cause them to act upon said ar 
mature. 
4. A. Wheel composed of a body portion, a 
rim or felly of non-conducting material to in 
sulate said body portion from a rail upon 
which the wheel runs, and a sectional conduct 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
ing-tire, one or more of whose sections are in 
electrical connection with said body portion, 
and through it with the axle or shaft of said 
wheel. 
5. The combination, substantially as herein 
before setforth, of a non-rotating shaft, a hollow 
wheel fitted to turn around said shaft, elec 
tro-magnets carried by and inclosed within 
said wheel, and an armature fixed upon said 
shaft within said wheel, so as to be acted upon 
by said electro-magnets when excited. 
6. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a carriage, a track upon 
which said carriage runs, two electromotors 
forming part of said carriage, one to move 
said carriage in a forward direction and the 
other to move said carriage in a backward di 
rection, a generator of electricity, circuit-con 
nections, and switch mechanism forming part 
of said connections to throw either one of Said 
motors into action. 
7. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a railway-carriage having 
two electromotors, separate insulated rails for 
the driving-wheels of said carriage, an electric 
generator to throw current upon either of said 
rails to propel said carriage, and a separate 
return or third conductor for the current trav 
ersing either one of said insulated rails. 
8. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a vehicle, a shaft of said 
vehicle, an electromotor - wheel revolving 
around said shaft to propel the vehicle, and a 
rail between the main rails of the track upon 
which said motor-wheel travels. 
9. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a vehicle, electro-magnetic 
mechanism mounted on said vehicle so as to 
propel it, a generator at a fixed station sup 
plying electricity to said mechanism, and a 
switch device by which said propelling mech 
anism is controlled, so as to enable the opera 
tor at a fixed station to produce either forward 
or backward motion of the vehicle at will. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 22d day of March, A. D. 
1SS2, 
CHARLES E, RUDI). 
75 
95 
Witnesses: 
. 
GEORGE WALKER, 
CARL FOCKE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259689.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
C. W. HUBBARD, 
ELECTRIC DETECTING APPARATUS FOR WATCHMEN, 
No. 259,689, 
Patented June 20, 1882, 
Witnesses: 
er 
Inventor: 
- 
A. A127 
in perERs, photo-Lithographer. Washingto: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. HUBBARD, OF BOSTON, MASSACEUSETTS. 
o 
ELECTRIC DETECTING APPARATUS FOR WATCHMEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,689, dated June 20, 1882. 
Application filed December 5, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
supposed to be in each of the rooms to be vis 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs W. HuB 
ited by the watchman, and each switch-board 
BARD, of Boston, in the State of Massachu 
containing a hand-switch, s', and two contact 
setts, have invented a certain new and useful 
points, a' and b'. 
Improvement in Electric Detecting Appara 
The contact portion of each hand-switch is 
tus for Watchmen, of which the following is a 
of such width that it must strike one of its 
specification. 
contact-points before it leaves the other, and 
The invention consists in the combination, 
both contact-points of each switch-board have 
with an open electric circuit, an alarm or re 
flanges at their outer edges, as shown, so that 
cording instrument in the circuit, an automatic 
the switch cannot be cleared from both at any 
circuit-closer, and suitable contact-points, of 
One time. 
one or more switches, also in the circuit, the 
The contact-point a of the automatic cir 
whole so arranged that when the automatic 
cuit-closer is connected by a wire, w', with all 
circuit-closer acts to close the circuit a signal 
the a' contact-points of the several switch 
will be given or a record made by that alarm 
boards, a wire, v', in like manner connecting 
or recording instrument unless the circuit be 
the contact-point b with all the l' contact 
points. 
broken at each and every switch. The auto 
matic circuit - closer has two contact-points, 
B is the battery, one pole of which is con 
with each of which a pointer, revolved by a 
nected by wire w8 with the pointer s of the 
clock or other suitable mechanism, makes con 
automatic instrument, while wire w', by means 
tact once in each revolution, and in each room 
of branches, as shown, connects the other 
which the watchman is required to visit there 
pole with all the switchess'. 
is a switch-board containing a switch to be 
E is an alarm or recording instrument in 
operated by hand, and two contact-points, 
the circuit, as shown, and operated by an elec 
each of which is connected by wire with a sep 
tro-magnet embodied therein in any ordinary 
arate contact-point of the automatic circuit. 
hale. 
closer. The pointer of the automatic circuit. 
It is obvious that when the pointers strikes 
closer is connected by wire with one pole and the contact-pointer a the circuit will be com 
the hand-switches are all connected by a wire pleted and an alarm given or a record made 
or branches thereof with the other pole of a 
at the instrument E, if at that time any one of 
battery, there being an alarm or recording in 
the s' switches is on its a? connecting-point, 
strument in the circuit. If, then, the pointer 
and that the same result will follow if any 
of the automatic instrument makes contact 
one of the s' switches is on its l' point b. 
with one of its contact-points while any one 
The watchman accordingly must visit the sev 
of the hand-switches remains in contact with 
eral boards R,R,R, and R and move the 
a contact-point which is in connection with 
switches from a to b while the pointer of the au 
the said contact-point of the automatic instru 
tomatic circuit-closer is traveling from b to a, 
ment, the alarm will be given or a record 
and must visit them again and shift the switches 
made. 
from b to a while the pointer travels from a 
The accompanying drawing sufficiently ill 
to b. 
lustrates the construction of apparatus em 
The pointer may be made to revolve at any 
required rate of speed. In the apparatus illus 
bodying my invention, and serves for a dia 
gram illustrating the mode of operation. 
trated it may be considered as having the rate 
A is an automatic circuit-closer, consisting 
of the minute-hand of a clock, and the watch 
of two contact-points, at and b, in a dial, d, 
man will be obliged to visit all the switch 
and a pointer or circuit-closer proper, s, re 
boards once during each half-hour, or his neg 
volving by means of clock-work (not shown) 
lect to do so will be made known by the appa 
behind the dial. 
R, R', R', and R are switch boards, one 
I claim 
ratus. 
. 
- 
. 
So 
55 
90 
95 
o 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
2 
259,6S9 
The combination, with an alarm or record. riodic action of the circuit-closer is counter 
ing instrument, an electric circuit, and an au- acted by a corresponding periodic movement 
tomatic circuit - closer closing the circuit at of all the switches. 
regular intervals, of suitable contact-points 
5 and a series of hand-switches, substantially 
as described, so that an alarm will be given 
or a record made periodically unless the pe- 
CHARLES. W. HUBBARD. 
Witnesses: 
J. G. AHEARNE, 
W. W. SWAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259789.txt	E, ANTHONY. 
TENSION DEVICE FOR UN WINDING ROLLS OF PAPER, 
Patented June 20, 1882. 
sheet-sheet 1. 
(No Model) 
No. 259,789, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 259,789, 
TENSION DEVICE FOR UN WINDING ROLLS OF PAPER. 
Patented June 20, 1882. 
E, ANTHONY, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
4.g. 5. 
 
Peters, Photo-lithographer. Washington). C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWYN ANTHONY, OF HEREFORD, COUNTY OF HEREFORD, ENGLAND, 
ASSIGNOR TO R. HOE & Co., OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TENSION DEVICE FOR UNWINDING ROLLS OF PAPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,789, dated June 20, 1882. 
Application filed August 7, 1880. (No model.) 
SS 
Io drawings, forming a part of the same. 
To all whom it may concern: 
trating a modified arrangement of some of the 
Beit known that I, EDWYN ANTHONY, a sub 
parts. These figures represent but one side of 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland 
a machine; but it will be readily understood 
and Empress of India, residing in the city of 
that the opposite side frame may be a dupli 
5 Fereford, county of Hereford,England, have 
cate of that shown. 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
2 is a tension-roller, which may freely move 
in Tension Devices for Unwinding Rolls of 
up and down in guide-slot 3, provided in the 
Paper, fully described and represented in the 
side frames, A, of the machine. This roller is 
following specification and the accompanying 
constructed so that it may be weighted at 
each end, according to the amount of tension 
In what are known as web" printing-ma 
desired. On opposite sides of this guide-slot 
chines, in the machines used for damping long 
guide-rollers 6 and 7 are journaled. The shaft 
rolls of paper for printing purposes, and in 
of the paper-roll 5 is provided with a pulley, 
machines connected with the manufacture of 
12, over which a friction-strap, 13, is led, said 
15 paper, a web of paper wound round a shaft is 
strap being fast at one end to a bracket, 14, 
unrolled by the motion of the machine, which 
and at the other to a brake-lever, 4, that is 
continuously pulls the free end of the roll, and 
fulcrumed at one end on said bracket and coll 
thus gradually unwinds it. The tension on the 
nected at the other end to the projecting jour 
paper, as it passes from the roll, depends on the 
nal-box of the tension-roller 2 by means of a 
cord or chain, 16. This lever 4 is provided 
2O amount of resistance to motion offered by the 
roll. This quantity is usually regulated by a 
with an adjusting-weight of any common form, 
as the sliding weight 15. With this arrange 
brake at one or both ends of the said shaft, 
and it varies a great deal from many causes. 
ment of devices it is apparent that as the ten 
For instance, the resistance increases as the 
sion-roller 2 rises the brake-lever 4 will be 
25 diameter of the roll decreases, it changes with 
raised, while the downward movement of said 
any change in the velocity of the machine, and 
roller will lower the brake-arm. In the modi 
fied arrangement shown in Fig. 2 the brake 
it likewise depends on the condition of the 
brake, which is, of necessity, not uniform from 
lever is so connected to the tension-roller 2, by 
day to day. 
means of the cord, chain, or strap 16, that the 
3o My invention consists in making the tension 
upward movement of said roller, which takes 
of the brake, is aided by a spring, 19, that is 
of the roll automatic-that is to say, in caus 
ing it to fluctuate within narrow limits about 
attached to the end of the lever 4 and to a 
any required mean amount, and to be practi. 
bracket on the side frame. 
cally independent of the size of the roll, of the 
It being understood that the adjuncts of the 
35 velocity of the machine, and of the variations 
tension-roller2should be applied either to both 
in brake-power. I effect this result as follows: 
ends or to the middle part of said roller, in or 
der to secure uniformity of movement through 
I conduct the web under a tension-roller capa 
out the roller, the operation of the machine will 
ble of rectilineal or curvilinear motion to and 
fro at right angles to its axis. This tension 
now be described. 
The paper passes from the roll 5 over the 
4o roller is connected with the roll-brake in such 
guide-roller 6, thence under the tension-roller 
a way that its movements cause the brake al 
ternately to act and not to act on the shaft 
2, then over the guide-roller 7, and from there 
upon which the web is wound. Thus the ten 
through the rest of the machine, which is not 
sion oscillates about some mean point, and its 
shown, because its particular form and the Op 
45 amount depends on the weight of the tension 
erations it performs on the paper do not af. 
roller and its appendages. 
fect the invention. The brake is arranged so 
In Figure1 Ihave illustrated a sideelevation that when in action the force requisite to make 
of a machine embodying my invention in one the roll 5 rotate is greater than that which, 
of its forms, Fig. 2 being a similar view illus. I acting at 10, would cause the roller 2 to rise 
r 
75 
85 
95 
2 
259,7s9 
1 and 2 the horizontal space between the guide 
rollers 6 and 7 equals the diameter of the ten- 45 
sion-roller 2. The web, therefore, in entering 
upon and leaving the tension-roller 2, is par 
allel to itself, and the tension (except as re 
gards the brake) is independent of the posi 
tion of the roller 2 in the guide-slot 3. It may 
Sometimes be advisable to make the tension 
dependent on the position of the tension-roller 
2-a result attainable in various ways. For 
example, the horizontal space between guide 
rollers 6 and 7 may be greater than the diame. 55 
ter of the tension-roller 2, as in Fig. 4. The 
tension will then increase with the rise of the 
roller 2. If the aforesaid space is less, it would 
in like case decrease. A similar result may be 
effected by making the slot curvilinear instead 6o 
of rectilineal, the shape of the curve depend 
ing on the particular object in view. Thus 
in Fig. 5 the tension would begin very small, 
gradually increase for a certain time, and then 
remain constant; or, again, the end may be 
reached by causing the tension-roller 2, the 
slot remaining rectilineal, to press as it rises 
against a spring which offers a constantly-in 
creasing resistance to its motion. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination, with a shaft carrying a 
roll of paper and brake acting thereon, of a 
tension-roller connected to the brake-lever and 
freely movable in a guiding-slot, whereby va 
riations in the tension of the paper cause move 
ments of the tension-roll, and the latter in turn 
acts upon the brakes, substantially as de 
scribed. 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit. 
TheSSS. 
EDWYN ANTFIONY. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 8o 
65 
fo 
75 
Witnesses: 
T. H. PALMER, 
GEO. H. GRAHAM. 
I5. 
O 
in the guide-slot 3. The machine, on starting, 
gives the paper a pull, and consequently the 
tension-roller 2 rises, which motion takes off 
the brake. The resistance to rotation of the 
5 roll 5 thus becomes less than that offered by 
the weight of the tension-roller 2. Hence the 
roll 5 begins to turn and the tension-roller 2 
immediately falls. Thereupon the brake is re 
applied and the tension-roller 2 again rises. 
This continues so long as the machine is in 
motion, with the result that the tension of the 
paper alternately somewhat exceeds and falls 
short of half the weight of the tension-roller 2 
and its adjuncts. 
It is plain that the above method is applica 
ble whatever be the kind of brake used, the 
principle of the invention consisting in the 
employment of a moving tension-roller whose 
movements are caused by the paper itself, and 
which have the effect of putting the brake on 
and taking it off. It is also clear that the con 
nection between the brake and the tension-roll 
er 2 may be made in an indefinite number of 
ways. For example, this connection may be 
a cord or strap, and the relative positions of 
the tension-roller 2 and of the roll of paper 5 
may be any whatever. When it is desired to 
reduce to a minimum the fluctuations of the 
tension the tension-roller 2 may be arranged 
So that its movements make and break an 
electric circuit which produces the magnetism 
of an electro-magnet fixed so that when in ac 
tion the brake is applied, and when not, not, 
or the reverse. 
When it is required to have the tension very 
small the tension-roller 2 may be partially coun 
terpoised; or the slot 3, in which it oscillates, 
may be inclined to the vertical, as in Fig. 3, so 
that it will bear a portion of the weight of the 
In Figs. 1 and 2 the guide-rollers 6 and 7 are 
horizontal and equal in diameter. Obviously 
they need not fulfill either condition. In Figs. 
4o tension-roller 2. 
35 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259889.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 259,889, 
A. MoDOUGALL, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
TOW BOAT, 
Patented June 20, 1882, 
- 
... '" 
al-RAH-e- 
Cit 
4-4- 
 
 
2. , 
- 
- - ZNY a.a. 
. 
/ 
/ RSS Ss 
hit ... 
i? 
WITyESSES 
26, 
Aaz 6. 
... 
N, PEERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
IWVEWTOR, 
artist. 
Attornel/S. 
(No Model.) 
No. 259,889. 
  
 
 
 
 
A. MoDOUGALL. 
TOW BOAT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 20, 1882, 
 
2 
2 
2 
%rs 
at 6 
Y 227 
2 Y2 2 2 2 a a. 
a a 2 2 M 
W 
A -A-A 
 
2. I 2 IWWEWTOR, 
Out coal, her-d 
u-21 a "C" Attorneys, 
2 
al 
 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 259,889, 
 
A. MoDOUGALL, 
TOW BOAT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, . 
Patented June 20, 1882. 
Witoesses. 
- 6 6a 
Zezezio; . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. McDOUGALL, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
TOWBOAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,889, dated June 20, 1882. 
- 
Application filed April 4, 1882, (No model.) 
55 
75 
hereinafter to be more fully described. 
To all whom it may concern: 
My invention proposes to obviate these dis 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER. McDou. advantages by making the tow-boat of iron or 
GALL of Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga steel instead of wood, by dispensing entirely 
and State of Ohio, have invented a new and with masts, spars, sails, and bulwarks, and by 
useful Improvement in Tow-Boats; and I do adopting a form of hull best suited to be towed 
hereby declare that the following is a full and easily in all sorts of weather and to make the 
exact description of the safme, reference being least deviation from the line of towage. The 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the construction required to secure these advan 
letters of reference marked thereon. 
tages constitutes the invention which is the 
One style of tow-boats at present in use upon subject of this application; and it consists, first, 
the great lakes of the country is constructed of in the shape of the hull; second, in placing 
wood in a manner and of a form like the sail- decks elevated on turrets above the hull proper 
ing-vessels, and for purposes of safety when for the guidance and management of the Wes 
separated in transit from the towing-steamer sel; third, in the construction of the hull; and 
have masts, spars, and sails, so as to be prac- fourth, in various details of construction, all 
tically independent, These masts, spars, and 
sails are not only expensive of first cost, but 
For the better comprehension of my inven 
of renewal, and require for their management tion reference is to be made to the accompany 
a considerable crew at such time as their use ing drawings, in which 
is needed. In addition, these masts, spars, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation broken out in 
and sails are of very considerable weight and the center; Fig. 2, an end elevation; Fig. 3, 
offer a large area of resistance to the air or a central vertical section of the bow; Fig. 4, a 
winds, so that a considerable proportion of similar section of the stern; Fig. 5, a vertical 
the motive force applied in moving the vessel cross-section of the hull, and Fig. 6 two views 
is expended in moving such masts, spars, and showing a modification of the bow and stern. 
Like letters represent the same parts in all 
sails. In the construction of these vessels 
very expensive bows and sterns are required, the figures, 
supporting stems and stern-posts, supposed 
In the drawings, A represents the hull, which 
to be essential in order to enable the vessel to is preferably in extreme length about ten times 
cut the water smoothly and leave it in like the breadth of the beam, and the depth of the 
fashion, and high and strong bulwarks flaring hull is aboutfour-fifths of the breadthofbeam 
outwardly at the bows to keep the water off 
that is to say, in a tow-boat two hundred feet 
the decks, and for the same reason the deck is 
long I prefer to have the same about twenty 
given a sheer or is raised both fore and aft, 
feet wide and sixteen feet deep. The frames 
both of which tend to retain water coming in 
which constitute the ribs are precisely similar 
on deck, whereby much additional -weight is 
in size and shape throughout about three 
imposed upon the craft and an increased power 
fourths of the entire length of the hull. In 
is required for towage. The vessels spoken of, 
this extent of the hull vertical sections would 
being made of wood, speedily decay in the fresh 
show a bottom, a, nearly flat, or preferably 
waters of the lakes and require frequent and 
With a rise to the floor-timbers of not over a 
expensive repairs. In addition, from the form 
half-inch to the foot. From this bottom the 
of the hull, they tow badly, as well as heavily, 
sides b, with a slight curvature at the point 
requiring constant labor and watchfulness on 
where they meet the bottom, rise in substan 
the part of the helmsman, and are inclined, 
tially vertical lines to a point about half the 
especially in stormy weather, to sheer out of 
depth of the hull. Above this the top sides, 
their proper course, which results often in the b', rise preferably in a true semicylindrical 
breaking of the tow-line, and consequently in form. Thus the lower half of the hull has sub 
vexatious and expensive delays, and in such stantially vertical sides and a flat horizontal 
stormy weather are towed with great expendi. bottom and the upper half a semicylindrical 
ture of steam-power and at a very low rate of form with a top in the same horizontal plane. 
By reason of this particular form of the lower 
speed. 
95 
OO 
O 
15. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
s 
 
2 
- 
259, SS9 
half of the hull there are obtained the greatest 
degree of buoyancy and the largest capacity 
for carrying weight with a given depth of sub 
mersion, and at the same time the most con 
5 venient form for the storage of cargo, while 
the upper half, from its arch-like form, gives 
the greatest possible power of support to the 
remainder of the hull with the least weight of 
metal. In the construction of this portion of 
Io the hull described I propose to use ribs, keel 
sons, covering-plates, &c., in ways now well 
known in building iron vessels. 
The bow B and stern Care built and shaped 
alike, tapering in regularly outwardly curving 
15 lines at the sides and from the bottom upward, 
so that vertical sections of the bow and stern 
at a little distance from the hull proper assume 
forms nearly cylindrical. Both the bow and 
stern, at their upper parts, are nearly horizon 
2Otal and in line with the line of the upper part 
of the hull, and the extreme ends, c c', of the 
bow and stern are preferably flat or bluntly 
rounded. This exterior tubular form of the 
hull, it will be seen, permits the vessel to 
25 be submerged to a great depth, as there are 
no openings for water to enter, and at the 
same time offers little resistance to the air or 
winds. It permits a great cheapness of con 
struction, as it employs similar frames through 
3o out the body of the hull and the correspond 
ing frames at the bow and stern are precisely 
alike. It avoids the difficult and expensive 
system of a great number of dissimilar frames 
as ordinarily used, and particularly those in 
35 connection with the stem and stern - post, 
which from their form make it difficult and 
expensive to bend and secure the covering 
lates. By my plan the covering-plates would 
have to be bent very slightly at any point, and 
From the rounded form of the bows, with. 
out a stem, I have demonstrated by experi 
ment that there is the least tendency to devi 
ate while the vessel is under towage, whether 
45 the sea be heavy or otherwise, and this tend 
ency to follow exactly the line of strain is in 
creased by the fact that the tow-line is made 
fast to the central extremity of the vessel. 
The interior of the hull is strengthened by 
S stanchions D and cross-beams E, preferably 
to every second frame, as usual, secured at 
their respective ends to angle-irons and ar 
ranged so as to come in contact, and then se 
cured together, as shown at d d. 
I prefer to place a deck about four feet below 
the center horizontally of the top of the hull, 
extending from the bulk-head of the cabin to 
that of the forecastle, (shown by Figs. 3 and 
4 in the drawings,) and having access both to 
6o the cabin and the forecastle by means of 
proper man holes with water-tight covers, 
(marked 22 in the drawings,) and to have the 
hold below this deck unobstructed except by 
the beams and stanchions. The purpose of 
65 this deck will be to give a covered passage 
Way in extremely severe storms between the 
4o could be bent cold. 
S5 
Upon the forward end of the deck suitable 8o 
cabin and forecastle, and also to prevent the 
cargo, under any stress of weather, from shift. 
ing, and also in some degree to have a cham 
ber nearly air-tight in the extreme upper part 7o 
of the hull, the better to preserve the equilib 
rium of the same under all conditions. 
Upon the top, or what corresponds to the 
deck, are several hatchways, E'E', capable of 
being closed water-tight in any well-known 75 
way. When the hatchways occur I prefer to 
use the dependent sides of the hatch-combing 
e as an angle-iron, to which the upper ends of 
stanchions are secured. 
tow-posts, FF, are placed, and similar ones, F. 
E", at the after end of the deck. Between 
these and the extreme bow and stern c. cf. there 
is inserted a hawse-pipe, f, or some equivalent 
means, by whicb the tow-lines G. G' pass down 85 
below the level of the deck and out of the ex 
treme ends, c c', one of these tow-lines being 
commonly used to draw the tow-boat along and 
the other for attachinent to another tow-boat 
which follows. At various points along the go 
deck are shown timber-heads H. Ed, for secur. 
ing lines to the hull for various well-known 
purposes. Near the bow of the vessel is a 
turret, I, which rises above the deck a suffi 
cient distance to be above the reach of the 95 
waves, preferably about eight feet for lake 
navigation. This turret is an iron cylinder of 
a size sufficient to permit of a stairway, g, 
down to the decli. of the forecastle, J, and 
also to permit of a capstan, K, which may loo 
operate a suitable windlass. In this forecastle 
are placed suitable chain-boxes or other con 
venient receptacles for the chain cables, which 
lead up through the deck to the anchors L. L., 
which are secured upon the deck. I prefer to Ios 
have this windlass (marked 3) journaled in 
hangers 4 bracing inwardly and secured at 
their upper ends, and to have the chain-box 
(marked 7) under it. The chain cable then 
passes up from the chain-box over the wind- I to 
lass and along the upper portion of the fore 
castle and near to or between the lower exten. 
sion, 5, of the tow-posts FF and into a hawse 
pipe, (marked 6,) which is suspended from the 
roof of the forecastle and should have suit- i. 15 
ably-tight plugs to prevent the inflow of wa 
ter. To these tow-post extensions suitable 
cable-nippers can be secured, so as to take the 
strain of the cable of the windlass when the 
tow-boat is riding at anchor in a seaway. rad 
These hawse-pipes terminate in a proper open 
ing (marked 6) in the bow of the vessel. The 
anchors should lie with a fluke against the 
side of the turret and be lashed to the same 
in such a way that the lashing can be released 125 
from the deck of the turret, and then the 
anchor can be displaced by a hand-spike from 
the same deck, when it will, from the sloping 
character of its resting-place, fall by gravity 
into the Water. 
Upon the top of the turret is placed a suitable 
deck, M, protected by railings. At the stern 
f30 
7. 
 
259, SS9 
of the boat is a similar, but preferably a little 
larger, turret, I, having a stair-case,g,leading 
down to the floor of the cabin J", and a capstan, 
K', and a deck, Mi', upon its top, with suita 
ble railing, having a steering-wheel operating 
a rudder-post, N, which in turn operates the 
rudder O. This forecastle J, as well as the 
cabin J", is placed in the upper portion of the 
hull, preferably near the bow or stern, and is 
protected on all sides from the entrance of 
water, thereby, in case of leakage in the hull, 
acting not only to prevent the vessel from 
sinking, but to preserve its proper vertical po 
sition. 
Suitable railings, PP, inclose a central walk 
along the deck of the vessel from end to end, 
in which are placed ladders, which give access 
to the tops of the turrets, 
From the deck M a small boat, Q, may be 
conveniently hung by davits. 
The hull of the vessel is provided with wa 
ter-tight bulk-heads near the tow-posts, and 
preferably between them and the extreme ends, 
c c', of the vessel, and other bulk-heads may be 
used in other portions of the hull, as desired. 
I have described two turrets, which I prefer 
for convenience; but it is evident that a greater 
or less number could be used, or they could be 
placed in positions upon the deck different from 
those indicated, without departing from the 
spirit of my invention. 
In Fig. 5 is shown a modification of the bow 
and stern wherein the sides of the vessel only 
are narrowed down, while the lines of the top 
and bottom are unchanged. This modification 
I do not prefer; but it may be employed to 
advantage under certain circumstances. 
The advantages attending my construction 
have been so fully explained throughout this 
specification as to require no further enumera 
tion of them. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein is- 
. 
. 
O 
25 
35 
k 
de-55o 
45 
55 
1. A tow-boat having a flat bottom and ver. 
tical sides, except at the ends, a semicylindri 
cal upper portion throughout its entire length, 
and having the bottom and sides toward the 
ends tapering in outwardly-curved lines to the 
extremities, so as to form a precisely similar 
conical bow and stern, substantially as 
scribed. 
2. A tow-boat, substantially as described, 
having turrets rigidly secured to the same, 
each turret supporting a separate open work 
ing-deck, upon which is placed and worked the 
steering and hauling-in gear, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a tow-boat, substantially as described, 
in combination with the turrets, and communi 
cating with them, a water-tight cabin and fore 
castle arranged on the upper part of the hull 
and communicating with each other by means 
of a passage-way in the upper central portion 
of the hull and separated from the cargo-space, 
substantially as described. 
4. The skeleton of a tow-boat, substantially 
as described, consisting of numerous rib 
frames, precisely alike in size and form, each 
with substantially flat lower parts and vertical 
sides and rounded tops throughout the body 
of the hull, bow and stern frames nearly an 
nular and precisely alike in size and form at 
equal distances from the extreme ends, and 
cross-beams and stanchions secured together 
at their points of contact, whereby a keel, 
keelson, and stem and stern-post are dispensed 
with. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
23d day of December, 1881. 
ALEXANDER. McDoug ALL. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN C. SCHROEDER, 
J. ELLS. CLARK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US259989.txt	(Model.) 
No. 259,989, 
 
G. PICKHARD T. 
WIRE NETTING, 
Patented June 20, 1882. 
1 za2 a. 
WITNESSES: 
 fz 
6. 4. tie (M. 
INVENTOR: 
% ye?/ 
(G, 
BY 
t 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAv PICKHARDT, OF LIAGEN, ASSIGNOR TO CARL RULP, OF DARM 
STADT, GERMANY. 
WIRE-NETTING. 
f 
, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 259,989, dated June 20, 1882. 
Application filed April 21, 1S2. 
(Milt'. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GUSTAV PICKHARDT, 
of Hagen, in the Empire of Germany, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Wire-Netting, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved wire-netting, which is strong 
and durable and of simple construction, and 
in which the edges are finished and made 
strong and in such a manner that they cannot 
catch on objects. 
The invention consists in wire-netting formed 
of a series of united link-sectious each formed 
of one or more spirals screwed into each other, 
the spirals of one link-section being screwed 
into the spirals of the next sections and wires 
being passed through the loops formed by the 
overlapping parts of the spirals. 
The invention further consists in bending 
the ends of the spiral wires and the connect 
ing-wires over on the ends of the sections for 
the purpose of finishing the edges of the net 
ting. . . 
The invention also consists inspirals screwed 
into the adjoining edges of two link-sections, 
made of spirals, for the purpose of uniting 
these two edges. 
Reference is to be had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming part of this specifica 
tion, in which similar letters of reference in 
dicate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
ligure f is a front, elevation of a piece of 
my improved netting. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
Sectional elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
longitudinal elevation of one of the spirals. 
The netting is formed of a series of longi 
tudinal link-sections, A, formed of one or more 
circular or flat spirals, made of wire and screwed 
into each other. The spirals of the several 
link-sections are screwed into each other 
that is to say, the upper ends of the spirals 
of one section pass through the lower ends of 
the spirals of the next higher link-section, and 
Wires B are passed through the spirals longi 
tudinally in such a manner that these wires 
alternately pass through the upper end of a 
spiral or spirals of one link-section and then 
through the lower end of the spiral or spirals 
of the next link-section, whereby the spirals 
Will be more ?iruly united. As is shown in 
Fig. 2, the spirals pass through each other 
and the wires 13 pass througll the eyes formed 
by the overlapping parts of the spirals. The 
ends of the spirals C are bent over against the 
ends of the sections, and the ends of the coup 
ling-wires 3 are also bent over on the cinds of the 
sections, so that the edge of the netting will 
be finished and will have no projecting parts 
ola which oljects might catch. In the speci 
men represented each link-section is formed 
of three spirals screwed into each otler. In 
stead of three, any number of spirals may be 
provided in each link-section, and the pitch of 
the spirals call be varied according to the de 
sired finelness or coarseness of the netting. 
If desired, two wires, l3, may be used at each 
joint, which construction is of special advan 
tage if very strong netting is to be made. If 
ends of such letting or several pieces of net 
ting are to be united, one or more circular spi 
als, l), are screwed into the two longitudinal 
edges of the link - sections Atlat are to be 
united, as shown in Fig. 1. All the spirals 
may be made circular, but this makes the net 
ting very thick and cumbersonne, and for that 
reason I prefer to use flattened spirals, as 
shown. The cross-section of the wires may 
be circular, square, oblong, polygonal, and in 
fact may have any desired cross-section with 
out altering or affecting the construction of 
the netting. The width and length of tie 
link-sections inlay l) (, varied ns circt instances 
inlay 'euil'. 
The herein-described wire - netting is to be 
used for making elevator-belts, driving-belts, 
metal cloths, &c., for making safes and chests, 
shot-proof fabric for lilitary use, armor, roll 
ing shutters, fire-proof theater-curtains, which 
may be provided with a covering on one or 
both sides. 
This letting can also be used as an arianor 
for vessels, or as a torpedo-protector. 
IIaving thus fully described uny invention, I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
latent 
1. Wire-netting made, substantially as here 
in shown and described, of a series of spirals 
screwed into each other and having connect 
ing-wires passed through the loops formed by 
the overlapping parts of the spirals, as set, 
fortli. 
S 5 
() 
65 
7 o 
75 
So 
85 
CO 
2 
259,989 
5 and the ends of the connecting - wires being 
2. Wire-netting made of spirals screwed into into the meeting ends of two sections for the 
each other and united by wires passed through purpose of uniting them, substantially as here 
the loops formed by the overlapping parts of in shown and described, and for the purpose I5 
the spirals, the ends of the wires of the spirals set forth. 
In testimony whereof Ilhave signed my name 
bent over against the ends of the link-sections to this specification in the presence of two sub 
formed of the spiral wires, substantially as scribing witnesses. 
herein shown and described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. The combination, with a wire. netting 
formed of sections made of spirals screwed 
into each other, of one or more spirals screwed 
CARL FERI, 
EDUARD KNEREL, 
' 
Io 
GUSTAV PICKIARDT. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260089.txt	(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MECHANISM FOR FORMING TYPE CASES FROM PAPER PULP OR OTHER 
Patented June 27, 1882, 
J. T. EDSON. 
No. 260,089. 
PLASTIC MATERIAL 
 
 
S 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
T 
 
 
AIIII 
NT 
 
. 
E. 
-- 
w 
1. 
 
r 
 
e E 
NSES 
SSSSS 
SSRISASR:At AS20 
ve 
a 
B 
6 
I 
2 
2 
2 C % % -22A 
 
 
 
. 
- 
tift 
1. 
V ( HES 
SS 
N 
4. 
TTIN 
| - - - f 222222 
. . 
3.22%22% NSN 
: 
 
s 
: 
? 
 
c) 
Y 
INVENTOR 
(71-2 ATTORNEYs 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C 
(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
MECHANISM FOR FORMING TYPE CASES FROM PAPER PULP OR OTHER 
J, T, EDSON. 
PIASTIC MATERIAI, 
No. 260,089. 
  
Patented June 27, 1882. 
H 
I y 
I 
 
y 
- 
Y 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
2: 
 
 
 
 
 
A." 
 
4 
YYY's 
S N N 
s S 
NE1 f He 
2. 2 
t F 
I IZ2 
EEE 
 
Za 
 
! H 
i 
 
A. 
24- 7&al 
3/ (2. 
INVENTOR 
AORNEYS 
.. 
ris PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d, C. 
أXae.<<<<<<<<<<<<<SSSSSSSSSS? 
?~~~~); Z& 
??SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS? 
E | 
 R 
 
 
MECHANISM FOR FORMING TYPE CASES FROM PAPER PULP OR OTHER 
PLASTIC MATERIAI, 
No. 260,089, 
Patented June 27, 1882. 
?N``````````````.========= 
2? 
- -$-======= 
- ?No. 
), 
 
?zz 
???<<<<<<<<% 
. 
? 
RSSNNSN:NORRNINNS``````% 
%$||||||||||||||||---.-^-^----- 
|||||||||||||? 
wTNESSES 
(60 Cadw. 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEYS 
N. Peterts. Photo-tithographer. Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS T. EDSON, OF CLEVELAND, OFIIO. 
MECHANISM FOR FORMING TYPE-CASES FROM PAPER-PULP OR OTHER PLASTIC MATERIAL 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,089, dated June 27, 1882. 
Application filed November 9, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
IS 
25 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JULIUST. EDSON, of 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Mechanism for Form 
ing Type-Cases from Paper-Pulp or other Plas 
tic Material; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it pertains to make 
and use it, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form a part of this 
specification. 
Myinvention relates to mechanism for form 
ing type-cases from paper-pulp or other plastic 
material. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a front 
elevation, partly in section, of my device for 
manufacturing type-cases. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation of the same, also shown partly in sec 
tion. Fig. 3 shows the manner of joining the 
plates by halving; also, the grooves or depres 
sions in the plates, which allow the water to 
pass down. IFig. 4 represents detached sec 
tional views of the die, plates, and lower platen. 
Fig. 5 is a detached sectional view, showing 
the pulp pressed down by the upper platen, 
with the lower platen in position to move up 
ward to complete the case. Fig. 6 is a view 
similar to Fig. 5, with the lower platen raised. 
Fig. 7 is a part of the case in section. Fig. 8 
is a view of the same, showing its form when 
completed. Fig. 9 is a view of the reducing 
dies. 
The frame of the machine consists of its bed 
A, the pillars A', and the cross-head A. The 
pillars are secured at the base to the bed of 
the machine and at the top to the cross-head. 
Between the pillars A', and loosely attached 
to them, is a reservoir, B, which is adapted to 
be raised and lowered by means of a rack, a, 
and pinion b, the rack being permanently se 
cured to the side of the reservoir. The pin 
ion b is attached to a shaft, c, at ends of which 
are hand-wheels d. 
In the reservoir is a closely-fitting platen, C, 
to which is attached a ram, C. This rani 
passes into the cylinder D, from whence it re 
ceives hydraulic pressure, which forces the 
So platen down. The platenis raised by means of 
the Weight E, which is connected to the platen 
C by means of a cord, e, which passes over the 
rollers E. E. 
F is the lower platen, which has brackets 
extending from it, which slide upon the pillars 
A' A'. To this platen are attached arms.ff, 
which in turn are secured to the shaft?, which 
is operated by the hydraulic pump D'. The 
platen F has holes drilled in it to admit the 
passage of the dies G. 
In the drawings is shown one form of die, 
the upper portion being square with the top, 
tapering so as to form the shape shown in 
Fig. 7. The lower part of the die is cylindri. 
cal and passes through the openings h, which 65 
are somewhat larger than the die, so as to al 
low the Water to pass through. It then passes 
to the Suppleinentary bed H, to which it is sc 
cured. In the bed of the machine, and sur 
rounding the supplementary bed, is a groove 
or recess, I, which receives the water that flows 
from the pulp and passes it off into a waste 
plpe. 
Upon and permanently secured to the platen 
IF rest plates IF, which form a recess adapted 
to fit closely around the dies G. These plates 
are provided with grooves or corrugations i, 
through which the Water that is pressed from 
the pulp is permitted to pass to the recess I, 
which surrounds the supplemental bed-plate H. 
In the drawings I have shown one process 
by Which the pulp may be fed into the reser 
voir. It consists of a hopper, J, with a de 
tachable spout, j, which may be placed into an 
opening in the reservoir whenever it is desira 
be to allow the pulp to pass into it, the valve 
Kanswering the purpose of checking the pulp 
whenever the spout j is not connected with the 
GSeWOl. 
I will now proceed to describe the operation 
of my device. 
The reservoir being filled with the amount 
of pulp necessary, the platen C is forced down 
upon it, pressing it down, as shown in Figs. 1. 
and 5. The upper part of the pulp is now 
firmly packed, while the lower partis still soft. 
Therefore the lower platen, F, is forced up un 
til it comes in contact with the reservoir, and 
forms the case, as shown in Fig. 6. The platen 
C and the reservoir B are now raised, and the roo 
platen F is forced up a trifle more, which will 
loosen the pulp from the dies. It can now be 
95 
o 
75 
9o 
35 
40 
45 
2 
260,089 
taken of and put in a larger set of dies, (rep 
resented in Fig. 9,) and be compressed, so as 
to form the case, as shown in lig. S. 
If it is found that the pulp is of so thin a 
consistency that it enters the groovesi, herein 
before described, and thus prevents the drain 
age of the water, said grooves may be covered 
by a gauze or equivalent covering to prevent 
the pulp from entering and clogging the water. 
passages. 
What I claim is 
1. In a machine for the manufacture of type 
cases from paper-pulp, the combination, with 
the frame, of a movable reservoir, an upper 
and a lower platen, each adapted to be moved 
independently of the other, and means, sub 
stantially as described, for increasing or di 
minishing the pressure of the platen, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In a machine for the manufacture of type 
cases from plastic material, the combination, 
with the frame, of an upper and a lower platen, 
each adapted to move independently of the 
other, and a reservoir for containing the plastic 
material, and within which the upper platen 
moves, substantially as set forth. 
O 
15 
25 
3. In a machine for the manufacture of type 
cases from paper-pulp, the combination, with 
the platens and frame, of a movable reservoir 
adapted to contain the pulp before molding, 
and to be raised out of the way to permit the 
withdrawal of the type-case after it is molded, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. In a machine for the manufacture of type 
cases from plastic material, the combination, 
with the forming-dies, of movable grooved 
casings, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a machine for the manufacture of type 
cases from paper-pulp, the combination, with 
the upper and lower casing, adapted to move 
independently of each other, of a series of 
forming-dies and grooved casings surrounding 
the latter, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub. 
scribing witnesses. 
JULIUS T. EDSON. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
JNO. CROWELL, Jr., 
ERNEST O. ORSBURN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260189.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
R. P. GERLACH, 
FLUE CEANER, 
No. 260,189. 
Patented June 27, 1882. 
2 z7. 
7IBA 
(?' 
Z Ze 
Z7 Faye 
27 
- l 
6 
7 
7 
Z 
Y 
u/. 
A. 
7/7, 7. 
Z Z 
  
 
(s 
 
wn 
7 
r - as 
- 
A 
6. 
Z/zzesses 
36t, 
//ay 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. washington. D. c. 
Zoroazec 
72/264-6 
1 z 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUDOLPH. P. GERLACH, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
FLUE-CLEANER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,189, dated June 27, 1882. 
Application filed February 25, 1882, (No model.) 
O 
20 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, RUDOLPHP. GERLACH, 
of Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Flue-Cleaners; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and complete description thereof. 
The improvement above alluded to influe 
cleaners consists of a new and novel device 
for attaching the spring-arms of the cleaner 
to the head of the implement, so that the said 
arms shall be strong and durable in their con 
nection there with and not liable to break at 
their junction with the head. 
A full and complete description of the im 
5 provement will be found in the following speci 
fication and illustrated by the annexed draw 
ings, making a part of the same, in which 
drawings 
Figure 1 represents a side view of the im 
proved flue-cleaner. Fig. 2 is an end view of 
the head of the cleaner, and showing a trans 
verse sectional view of the arms attached 
thereto. Fig. 3 is a detached section. Fig. 4 
is a longitudinal transverse section. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts in 
the several views, 
Inasmuch as the scrapers, guides, and spring 
arms of the implement form no part of the 
improvement above referred to, a brief de 
scription only of said parts is deemed essen 
t 
in this place, which is substantially as fol 
OWS: 
A are the spring-arms, to the extreme ends 
of which are secured the scrapers B by means 
of angle-irons C. To said scrapers are at 
tached respectively guides D, provided with 
wings, whereby they are riveted to the scrap 
ers, substantially as shown in Fig.1. 
4o The head of the implement consists of a tri 
angular-shaped block, F, in each side of which 
is a recess adapted in width and depth to re 
ceive the end of a spring-arm, as seen in Figs. 
2 and 3, in which it is close-fitting. 
From the center of each recess projects a 
stud, a, which may be either round, oblong, 
or of other form, and made to fit closely in a 
corresponding hole in the spring-arm, through 
which the stud projects far enough to permit 
of its being riveted down upon the spring for 
securing it to the head, as seen in Fig. 3. It 
is not essential, however, that the stud be riv 
eted for the purpose specified. 
It will be observed that upon the head, 
35 
45 
So 
Witnesses: 
W. H. BURRIDGE, 
J. H. BURRIDGE. 
65 
which is tapering, is fitted a ferrule, G. On 55 
the inner side of the ferrule are arranged lon 
gitudinally three ribs, H, corresponding to the 
three sides of the triangular head F, against 
which sides and the springs secured thereto 
the three ribs respectively press on forcing 
the ferrule onto the head by means of the nut 
I, screwed upon the screw-stem. J of the head, 
thereby firmly binding the ends of the spring 
arms between the said head and the ribs of 
the ferrule, so that they cannot become dis 
placed laterally from the head, nor be with 
drawn therefrom nor pushed inward, for rea 
son of the stud a being in the hole in the 
spring-arm, as above mentioned, which effectu 
ally secures the spring-arms in place. 
Heretofore the spring-arms have been se 
cured to the head by being dovetailed or mor 
tised therein. To do this requires a portion 
of the edges of the arm to be cut away to 
form the dovetail or mortise, thereby narrow- 75 
ing the spring at its junction with the head, 
at which point is exerted the greatest strain 
upon the springs, causing them to break at 
that particular place. This liability to break 
is wholly avoided by connecting the spring. 8o 
arms to the head, as above described, and 
shown in the drawings, as the full strength of 
the metal of the arm is left to resist the strain 
to which it may be subjected. No part of the 
arms subject to strain is weakened by being 
cut away to make its connection with the head, 
which head and stem J are cast in one piece. 
It is not essential that the head and stem 
be in one piece. The stem may be of Wrought 
iron and inserted in the head in any suitable 
Way. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
In flue-cleaners the ferrule G, with interior 
longitudinal ribs, H, forming an integral part 
thereof, a triangular-shaped block, F, having 
a recess in the sides thereof to receive the 
edges of the spring-arms, and a stud, a, ex 
tending therefrom and through said arms, in 
combination with the nut I and stem, arranged 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in , 
presence of two witnesses. 
85 
95 
OO 
RUDOLPH. P. GERLACH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260289.txt	(N0 Model.) 
No. 260,289. 
 
G. W. EDDY. 
TOY FIRE, ARM, 
Patented June 27, 1882, 
-a- CN2 2E 
S 
SSSSSSSSSSSS SN M. states 
 
st SS 
 
Witnesses, 
% Ca24 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. EDDY, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT . 
AND MESNEASSIGNMENTS, TO STEPHENS. TALLMAN, OF EAST ORANGE, 
AND GEORGE D. TALLMAN, OF LONG BRANCE, NEW JERSEY. 
TOY FIRE ARM, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,289, dated June 27, 1882. 
Application filed March 10, 1882. (No model.) 
25 verse section on linea a of Fig. 2. 
tion a. Other means may, however, be em. 
ployed to secure the respective parts together, 
or the parts inay be cast or formed in a less 55 
number of pieces, even to casting them all in 
one piece, if desired; but I prefer to make 
then in the manner first described. 
It will be seen that the inner end of the false 
barrel C, which is secured in the perforated 6o 
disk, is directly in alignment with the bore of 
the barrel-section a, which receives the car 
tridge and constitutes an obstruction for pre 
Venting the charge from passing directly out 
ward, as in ordinary fire-arms, while the phs 
sages through which the charge escapes are 
out of alignment with said bore. 
When the hammer is drawn back, as indi 
cated by broken lines in Fig. 1, a blank car 
tride (this arm is not intended for any but 
blank cartridges) may be inserted into the bar 
rel-section at at its rear end. When fired the 
discharge enters the distributing-chamber or 
interior of the case B, strikes the axial ob 
struction, and passes first through the perfo 
rated disk b at the several perforations, and 
then through the annular space at the mouth 
of the case, the flange e having a tendency to 
spread it as it leaves said moutli, so that there 
is no danger from the disclarge of injury to 
person or things. 
Other forms of distributing-chambers might 
be formed or placed in a pistol-barrel to break 
up the charge in the same way. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. EDDY, of 
New Britain, in the county of Hartford and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Toy Fire 
Arms, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
toy fire-arms for firing blank cartridges, the 
barrel of which arm is provided with an axial 
to obstruction; and the objects of my improve 
ments are to furnish a barrel which may be at 
tached to any ordinary breech-loading toy fire 
arm, which shall receive the charge and so ob 
struct, scatter, and distribute it before it leaves 
15 the barrel that it can do no possible harm. I 
attain these objects by the mechanism illus. 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure I is a side elevation of the complete 
2o arm. Fig. 2 is a vertical and longitudinal sec 
tion of the outer end of the loarrel and distrib 
uting-chamber, as detached from the other 
parts, which are shown in elevation. Fig. 3 is 
a front view of the barrel, and Fig. 4 is a trans 
The handle A and the pistol-lock may be of 
any ordinary construction. At the front end 
of the handle A, Isecure or have made thereon 
a short barrel or section of a barrel, a, bored 
3o through longitudinally, as indicated by broken 
lines in Fig. 2, so that it may receive a car 
tridge from the rear. The front end of the 
I claim as my invention 
barrel-section a is screw-threaded, as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
1. The herein - described toy fire-arm, in 
B designates a cylindrical case, the rear end 
which the barrel is provided at its rear end 
of which is provided with a screw-threaded with the barrel-section containing a bore for 
the reception of the cartridge, and directly in 
hole to receive the threads on the barrel-sec 
tion a, whereby the case is attached thereto. 
front of Said bore an obstruction to receive the 
charge, and one or more discharge-passages 
Within the case B there is a perforated disk, 
which are out of alignment with said bore, sub 
4o b, and to the central portion of this disk the 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
false barrel C is secured. This false barrel 
specified. 
has a surrounding flange, c, which, When the 
false barrel is in place, partially covers the 
2. The herein - described toy fire-arm, in 
mouth of the case B, leaving only an annular 
which the barrel consists of the section con 
taining the bore, the cylindrical case contain 
45 space for the open mouth of said case. The 
ing the perforated disk, and false barrel with 
barrel-section a, case B, and false barrel se 
its surrounding flange, substantially as de 
cured thereon constitute the complete barrel. 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
These may be secured together by riveting the 
end of the false barrel to the perforated disk, 
so forcing or driving the disk into the case B with 
sufficient force to make it stay in place, and 
then screwing the case upon the barrel-sec" 
Witnesses: 
JAMESSHEPARD, 
JoHN EDWARDs, Jr. 
GEORGE W. EDDY. 
35 
75 
85 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260389.txt	APPARATUS FOR AMAL.GAMATING GOLD AND SILVER ORES, 
Patented July 4, 1882. 
7 Mai 
6 
A 
vaz. / 
z 
Af 
2. 
-772 
6 
(No Model.) 
No. 260,389. 
W. HAMILTON, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
/6 
0 
a- 
2. 
/ 
7% 
 
1. 
WITNESSES : 
%, 
%re 
e 
7 
E. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington., C. 
e 
N 
NVENTOR: 
gase 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
No. 260,389. 
APPARATUS FOR AMAL.GAMATING GOLD AND SILVER OREs, 
. 
Patented July 4, 1882. 
W. HAMILTON, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
WITNESSEs: 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
P 
WALTER HAMILTON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
APPARATUS FOR AMALG AMATING Gold AND SILVER or Es. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,889, dated July 4, 1882. 
Application filed November 8, 1881. (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WALTER HAMILTON, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and Improved Apparatus for 
Amalgamating Gold and Silver Ores and other 
Substances, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1, Sheet 1, is a sectional side eleva 
tion of my improvement. Fig. 2, Sheet 1, is a 
bottom view of a part of one of the flaring dis 
tributing-plates. Fig. 3, Sheet 1, is a bottom 
view of a part of one of the tapering distribut 
ing-plates. Fig. 4. Sheet 2, is a plan view of 
the improvement. Fig. 5, Sheet 2, is a side 
elevation of the bucket-tripping mechanism. 
Fig. 6, Sheet 2, is a plan view of the same. 
The object of this invention is to facilitate 
the amalgamation of gold, silver, and other 
substances, 
The invention consists in an apparatus for 
amalgamating gold and silver ores, constructed 
with two vessels, placed one above the other, 
and connected by a pipe for the passage of the 
amalgamating substance from the upper to the 
lower vessel, an elevator for raising the amal 
gamating substance from the lower to the up 
per vessel, a furnace to keep the amalgamat 
ing substance molten, a funnel for introducing 
theoreinto the descending column of the amal 
gamating substance, a valve to regulate the 
descent of the amalgamating substance, and 
peculiarly-constructed plates for distributing 
the ore through the amalgamating substance 
and removing the refuse, as will be hereinafter 
fully described, and pointed out in the claims. 
A represents a vessel of sufficient size to con 
tain ten tons (more or less) of molten lead or 
other metal or composition of metals capable 
of amalgamating gold and silver. At a suit 
able distance above the vessel A is placed a 
corresponding vessel, B. From an aperture 
in the bottom of the vessel B a vertical pipe, 
C, leads.down into the vessel A and extends 
nearly to the bottom of the said vessel A. 
Within the vessel B is placed a funnel, D, 
the lower part of which extends down concen 
SO trically through the upper part of the vertical 
45 
35 
pipe C. The funnel D is suspended by a bridge, 
E, or other suitable means from the rim of the 
vessel B or other suitable support. The ore 
from which the metal is to be amalgamated is 
introduced into the funnel D through an in 
clined spout or chute, F, passing in through 
the wall G, that surrounds the vessels AB, and 
their connecting-pipe C. The pulverized ore 
can be fed into the chute F by a screw or other 
suitable means, which feed mechanism is not 
shown in the drawings. 
Within the lower tubular part of the funnel 
D is placed a feed-screw, H, the shaft EI of 
which passes up through the top or cover of 
the chamber I, that contains the vessels A B 
and pipe C, and is driven by gear-wheels J or 
other suitable means from a steam-engine or 
other convenient power. The screw H forces 
the pulverized ore down through the funnel D 
in uniform quantities. With this construction, 
as the molten lead descends through the pipe 
C from the vessel B to the vessel A, it tends to 
form a vacuum at the lower end of the funnel 
D, and thus carries the ore with it into the 
said lower vessel, A. 
The rapidity of descent of the molten lead, 
and consequently of the ore, is regulated by a 
valve, K, placed in the upper end of the spout 
L, that conducts the molten lead from the up 
per vessel, B, into the ring-space in the upper. 
part of the pipe C, around the lower part of 
the funnel D. The stem K of the valve K 
passes up through the top or cover of the 
chamber I, and is connected with a lever, M, 
or other suitable means for operating the sai 
valve K. 
To the bottom of the lower vessel, A, directly 
beneath the lower end of the pipe C, is secured 
a cone, N, of metal or other suitable material, 
the apex of which projects centrally into the 
lower end of the said pipe C, as shown in Fig. 
1, so as to divide the descending stream of ore 
and molten lead and distribute it equally to 
all parts of the vessel A. As the ore escapes 
from the lower end of the pipe C it rises 
through the molten lead in the vessel A and 
passes outwardly along the lower surface of 
the outwardly and upwardly inclined ring 
plate O. The ore escapes around the outer 
edge of the plate O, and, rising, comes in con 
tact with and passes inward and upward along 
95 
Od 
55 
65 
75 
85 
() 
260,359 
the lower surface of theinwardly and upwardly 
inclined plate P. The ore escapes around the 
inner edge of the plate P, rises to and passes 
outward along the lower surface of another 
5 plate O, and so on through a series of any de 
sired number of plates. As the ore rises 
around the inner surface of the last plate P 
of the series it comes in contact with the lower 
surface of the dish-shaped plate Q, and passes 
to upward and outward along the said surface 
until it falls over the rim of the vessel A into 
the lower part of the chamber I, whence it is 
removed as refuse by a carrier, R., or other 
suitable means. The lower surfaces of the 
15 plates O P are divided into ring-spaces, and 
the said spaces are grooved radially, as shown 
in Fig. 2, so that the ore will be expanded or 
spread as it passes outward along the flaring 
plates O, and contracted as it passes inward 
2o along the tapered plates P. The outer edges 
of the plates P have upwardly-projecting 
flanges S formed along them, whichfit against 
and are firmly bolted to the sides of the vessel 
A. The inner edges of the plates P are con 
25 nected by radial arms Twith a collar, U, which 
fits upon the pipe C, so that the said plates P 
will be firmly held against the upward press 
ure of the molten lead and the ore. The inner 
edges of the plates O have collars V formed 
3o upon them, which fit upon the pipe C between 
the collars U of the plates P, so that the plates 
O will be held against the upward pressure of 
the molten lead and the ore by the plates P. 
The lower plate O and its collar V, or all 
35 the plates O and their collars, can be made in 
two parts, as shown in Fig. 2, and bolted or 
riveted around the pipe C, an asbestus pack 
ing being interposed between the said collar 
and pipe to make a firm connection. By this 
4o construction every particle of the pulverized 
ore will be brought into contact with the molten 
lead, so that all the gold or silver will be re 
moved. The molten lead from the vessel A 
flows through a pipe, W, into the lower end of 
45 an elevator-well, X, and is raised by an end 
less chain of buckets, Y, the chains Z of which 
pass around chain-Wheels a, pivoted to the 
Walls of the said elevator-well. As the buck 
ets Y pass over the upper chain - wheels a 
5o their contents are dumped into the enlarged 
upper end of a pipe, b, which passes into the 
chamber I and extends down into the upper 
vessel, B, so that its lower end will be below 
S. surface of the molten lead in the said ves 
To the side of each bucket Y is attached an 
arm, c, which, as the said bucket passes over 
the upper chain-wheels a, comes in contact 
With an arm, d, attached to the upper end of 
6o a bar, e, so that the said bucket will be tilted 
and will discharge its contents into the pipe 
b. The lower end of the bare can be attached 
to the side of the upper end of the pipe b, or 
to Some other suitable support, 
The well X is placed within a stack, f, of a 
larger interior diameter than the exterior diam 
SS Sel. 
65 
eter of the said well, so that there will be a 
space all around the said well for the passage 
of the products of combustion from the furnace 
(1, placed beneath the said well X, to keep the 
lead molten while being carried up the eleva 
tor. The products of combustion pass from 
the stack f into a flue, h, by which they are 
conducted into the smoke-stack, which is not 
shown in the drawings. The lead in the ves 
sels A B and pipe C is melted and kept molten 
by the products of combustion which pass in 
to the lower part of the chamber I, below the 
vessel A, through a flue, i, leading from a 
large furnace, which is not shown in the draw 
ings, but which is constructed in the ordinary 
manner. The flue i is made with a branch 
fluej, leading into the chamber I above the 
vessel A. The flues ij are provided with damp 
ers k, l, so that the products of combustion can 
be sent through the flue i or through the flue 
j, or partly through each flue, as may be re 
quired. The products of combustion pass from 
the chamber I into the smoke-stack through 
the flue in. When the molten lead has taken 
up as much of the gold or silver as it readily 
will it is drawn off through a discharge-pipe, 
n, and a fresh supply of lead is put into the 
vessel B to be melted and used. 
I am aware that it is not broadly new to use an 
elevator in an amalgamator, the same having 
been used for conveying the quicksilver from 
a tank below the tub containing the ore to a 
tank above the tub, from whence it flows into 
the said tub, and Itherefore do not claim such; 
but 
What I do claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters latent, is 
1. In an apparatus for amalgamating gold 
and silver ores, the distributing-plates. O IP, 
having their lower sides divided into ring 
spaces and grooved radially, substantially as 
herein shown and described, whereby the ore 
will be spread as it passes outward, and drawn 
together as it passes inward, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the radially-grooved 
plates OP, substantially as herein shown and 
described, whereby the material is alternately 
spread and condensed by the radial grooves, 
as set forth. 
3. In an apparatus for amalgamating gold 
and silver ores, the combination, with the 
lower vessel, A, and the pipe C, of the dis 
tributing-plates OP, having their lower sides 
divided into ring-sections and grooved radi 
ally, as set forth. 
4. In an apparatus for amalgamating gold 
and silver ores, the combination, with the 
lower vessel, A, the pipe C, and the distribut 
ing-plates O P, of the dish-shaped plate Q, 
substantially as herein shown and described, 
whereby the refuse is removed from the said 
vessel, as set forth. 
5. In an apparatus for amalgamating gold 
and silver ores, the combination, with the up 
per vessel, B, the pipe C, and the ore-funnel 
D, of the valve K and spout Li, substantially 
I 30 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
IIS 
260,3S9 
3 
as herein shown and described, whereby the said stack, and communicating with the said 
descent of the lead can be regulated, as set vessels by the pipes b W, substantially as and 
forth. 
for the purpose set forth. 
WALTER, EHAMILTON, 
6. In an apparatus for amalgamating gold 
5 and silver ores, the combination, with the ves- 
sels A B, the elevator YZ, and the furnace- 
stack f, of the elevator-well X, placed in the 
Witnesses: 
JAMEST. GRAHAM, 
C. SEDGWICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260489.txt	(Model.) 
F, MACHOLDT, 
APPARATUS FOR FUMIGATING AND PRESERVING FOOD, 
No. 260,489, 
Patented July 4, 1882 
 
ATTORNEf 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS MACHOLDT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
APPARATUS FOR FUMIGATING AND PRESERVING FooD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,489, dated July 4, 1882. 
Application filed April 18, 1882. (Model.) . 
m 
m 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS MACHOLDT, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Preserving-Safes, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention has reference to an improved 
preserving-safe for victuals, fruit, and other ar 
ticles; and the invention consists of a preserv 
ing-chamber which is closed by an air-tight 
cover and provided at the inside with a recep 
tacle for burning sulphur after the safe is 
closed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a perspective view of my improved pre 
serving-safe, and Fig. 2 is a vertical transverse 
section of the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate the cor 
responding parts. 
In the drawings, A represents a preserving 
chamber of any desired size, which is provided 
with a front opening, with interior perforated 
or wire shelves, and with a bottom, B, having 
an inclined rim. A cover, C, of the same size 
as the preserving-chamber A, is tightly fitted 
over the same, and can be readily raised there 
on, as far as required, to remove any of the ar 
ticles in the preserving-chamber, as shown in 
Fig. 1; or it can be entirely removed therefrom 
when the preserving-chamber is desired to be 
cleaned. It is for this purpose provided with 
a button or handle at the top part, or with 
side handles, as desired, according to the size 
of the preserving-safe. 
In place of making the cover C like a hood, 
extending over the entire preserving-chamber, 
it may be arranged simply as a slide in front 
of the opening of the chamber, in which case 
it has to be guided in hermetically-packed 
ways at both sides of the chamber A and 
closed in a similar manner at the top and bot 
tom. The cover C is tightly closed at the 
lower part either by means of a hydraulic seal, 
which is obtained by filling the bottom B of 
the preserving-chamber. A with salt-water, or, 
if water should not be desired, by filling it with 
sand or any other suitable packing-such as 
felt and tallow-provided that the cover is her. 
metically closed at the lower part to the bot 
tom B, so as to prevent the ingress of air. 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
The preserving-safe is used in the following 
manner: From time to time-say once every 
day-a small quantity of sulphur or any other 
chemical substance of similar antiseptic prop 
erties, which may be arranged either in the 
form of a match or as a strip of sulphur-pa 
per, or otherwise, is burned at the inside of 
the preserving-chamber A, the cover being 
quickly placed over the preserving-chamber 
after the sulphur or other equivalent material 
has been ignited. The burning of the sulphur 
absorbs the oxygen of the air contained in the 
preserving-chamber andfills the interior space 
with the fumes of sulphurous acid, which fumes 
are a well-known preserving agent. The small 
quantity of funes of sulphurous acid which is 
diffused in the interior of the preserving-safe, 
together with the exclusion of the air from the 
articles stored in the safe, tends to preserve 
them in a perfectly-reliable manner with less 
expense than is incurred for ice in the refrig 
erators in general use. 
Actual tests have shown that but a small 
quantity of sulphur has to be burned each day 
to preserve the meat, food, and other perishable 
articles for several days without imparting the 
least deleterious or objectionable smellor taste 
thereto, the sulphur-fumes acting in the same 
manner as when employed in casks for pre 
serving wines and other liquids. 
Having thus described my invention, claim 
as new and desire to secure by LettersFatent 
In a preserving-safe, the combination of a 
preserving-chamber, being open at one side, 
and having an interior receptacle for burning 
sulphur or any other equivalent chemical, With 
a sliding cover, and with means whereby the 
cover is hermetically secured to the preserv 
ing-chamber when closed, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
invention I have signed my name in presence 
of two subscribing witnesses. 
FRANCIS MACHOLDT. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
LOUISO, RAEGENER. 
55 
75 
90 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260589.txt	(Model.) 
A. MAYER, 
ORNAMENTING FUR AND OTHER GOODS. 
No. 260,589. 
Patented July 4, 1882. 
N N N N N N N N N N N N N 
3. 
 
WITNESSES: 
w 
64-ver 
INVENTOR; 
(7aw? 
r2s ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETEas. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
' 
 
UNITED STATES 
a. 
PATENT OFFICE. 
AMALIA MAYER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ORNAMENTING FUR AND OTHER GOODS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,589, dated July 4, 1882. 
Application filed June 5, 1882. (Model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AMALIAMAYER, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Or 
namenting Furs and other Goods, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
This invention relates to the ornamentation 
of fur, plush, rough or open felt, and other 
goods having the filaments on their exterior 
surfaces free and projecting by what is known 
in fur goods as pointing'-that is, by the in 
sertion, at numerous points throughout the 
fur, of hair different from the fibers or fila 
ments of the fur. 
The invention consists in pointing such fur 
or fluffy goods with hairs having beads or 
bugles' attached to their outer ends, and in 
the material or article thus decorated or orna 
mented. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 represents an outside face, or sur 
face view of a piece of fur ornamented in ac 
cordance with my invention, and Fig. 2 a. 
transverse section of the same upon an en 
larged scale. 
Ain the drawings indicates the skin or back 
ing of the piece of fur, and b b the fur fibers or 
filaments projecting from the surface thereof. 
The pointing-hairs are indicated by the let 
ters c c. These hairs may be of any desired 
description, length, and color. Before point 
ing the fur with them said hairs are tipped on 
their outer ends with beads or bugles d d, 
which may be of any desired shape, color, size, 
and material. The beads or bugles may be 
secured on the outer ends of said hairs bypass 
ing said ends through the beads or bugles and 
IO 
25 
35 
 
fastening them thereto by any suitable adhe 
sive material, or otherwise. After the point 
ing-hairs 0 c have been thus tipped with the 
beads or bugles d d they are dipped at their 
inner ends or portions in adhesive material of 
a fluid or plastic consistency, and inserted, by 
blowing between or separating the fibers or 
filaments b b in the fur, at numerous points 
thereof, and in which they are secured by the 
adhesive material e on them; or said hairs c c 
may be secured to the fur by crocheting or oth 
eWSe. 
Goods or trimmings thus pointed with hairs 
having beads or bugles on their outer ends pre 
sent a very striking and highly-ornamental ap 
pearance, and may be used for various articles 
of dress, including ladies hats, cloaks, and 
other garments. The beads or bugles, with 
their attached pointing-hairs, have a pendent 
or drooping effect, which adds very materially 
to the decorative aspect of the goods. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The improved mode of ornamenting, by 
pointing, fur, plush, and other goods or mate 
rials by inserting at numerous points in said 
goods, among the protruding fibers or fila 
ments thereof, hairs having beads or bugles 
attached to their outer ends or portions, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. A fur, plush, or other fluffy material hav 
ing hairs provided with beads or bugles on 
their outer ends or portions, inserted at nu 
merous points throughout the protruding fibers 
or filaments of thematerial, essentially as shown 
and described. 
AMALA MAYER. 
Witnesses: 
A. GREGORY, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260689.txt	(No Model.) 
G. B. KELLY. 
REED ORGAN STOP ACTION, 
No. 260,689. 
A/C.I. 
e 
Patented July 4, 1882. 
A. 
 
 
 
 
assigni O 
g a 
 
 
2. 
lf a 
E 
Enrt 2 
S. Sl ES 
aft 1 2 
E. I 
 
  
 
 
st 
Yi 
y 
w 
 
 
C . 
A/ 
Cr- - 
O 
E 
R22s 
2 is 
22222 
(521 
 
 
 
s 
s.S. i 
 
Y 
S 
 
  
 
2 
2777/YASUAS 
7%-326.2ee-a- 
in 9 Mau d2- 
a 
Aytro 
a s 
A//arveys 
AA /6 ove * 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE B. KELLY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE MASON 
& HAMLIN ORGAN COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
REED ORGAN STOP-ACT ON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,689, dated July 4, 1882. 
Application filed December 16, 1881. No model.) 
25 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE B. KELLY, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvementsin Stop-Actions for Reed 
Organs, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
This invention consists of mechanism con 
nected in One part to the stop-knob and in the 
Io other part to the valve or mute of the stop or 
swell; also, of mechanism constructed and ar 
ranged to operate simultaneously a series of 
valves to organ stops or swells, and of other 
features, as will hereinafter fully appear. 
In the accompanying plate of drawings, Fig 
ure 1 is a plan view. Fig. 2 is a transverse 
vertical section on line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is 
a transverse vertical section on line 33, Fig. 
1. Fig. 4 is a horizontal section on line 4 4, 
Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a front view. Fig. 6 is a side 
view of the mechanism to operate simultane 
ously a series of valves to organ-stops. Fig. 
7 is a view in detail of the arm directly con 
nected to the valve of the organ-stop. 
In the drawings, A represents an organ-stop, 
(two being shown,) consisting of a knob, c, and 
a shank or bar, b, arranged to move through 
the name-board B, against which the knob at 
rests when the valve or mute C to the stop is 
closed, all as usual. The stop-shank b inside 
of the name-board B is pivoted to the upper 
end of a vertical lever, D, of the first order, 
which has its fulcrum upon a horizontal rod, 
c, arranged to act as such fulcrum to levers D 
for a series of stops A, and secured in posi 
tion to a fixed horizontal rail, E, crossing at 
right angles the line of movement of the stop 
shank b through the name-board B. In either 
position of the organ-stop-that is, either in 
its position when the Valve to the stop is closed 
or in its position when the valve to the stop is 
opened-the lever D at rest is at an angle of 
inclination to the line of movement of the stop. 
rod, and when the stop is closed the portion d 
of the lever below its fulcrum is forward of 
the portion f of the lever above the fulcrum, 
and vice versa when the stop is opened. 
F is a vertical lever of the second order, 
turning at its lower end upon a fulcrum-rod,g, 
arranged horizontally and in position to act as 
such fulcrum for a series of levers, F. The 
fulcrum-rod g is secured to a fixed horizontal 
rail, G, below the rail E. The upper and free 
portion h of the lever F is back of the lower 
arm, d, of the stop-lever D, and in the verti. 55 
cal plane thereof, and the front edge, l. of this 
portion of the lower or rear lever, F, has an 
incline, m, which meets the rear edge of the 
stop-lever D at an angle of inclination to its 
length, and otherwise is situated and of a di- 6o 
lection that the stop-lever D, in both of its 
movements to open and close the valve C, will 
ride upon, and when the valve is opened will 
have a rest by its lower end upon, such inclined 
face m of the lower lever, F, and in the latter 65 
instance in a downward direction, thereby 
confining the lower lever, F, against move 
ment under the return action of the spring in 
to the stop-valve C to close such valve, as will 
hereinafter more fully appear. 
The stop-valve C is connected to the lower 
lever, F, and in the drawings are shown two 
arrangements of such connecting mechanisms. 
One arrangement of such mechanism consists 
of a horizontal pitman-rod, H, hung at one end 5 
directly to the lever F, and at the other end 
by a cross wooden pin, 0, in the look or eye p 
at the upper end of a vertical rod, L, fastened 
at its lower end to the stop-valve, and passing 
for such connection through a slotted open- 80 
ing, q, of the swell valve or lid M for the reeds 
of such stop, this slotted opening having the 
proper direction to permit of the movement of 
the rod L in the operations of opening and 
closing the stop-valve, as will hereinafter ap- 85 
pear. In the other arrangement, shown in 
connection with another stop-valve C, the pit 
man-rod His connected to a horizontal lever, 
O, of the first order, and of a direction cross 
ing that of the pitman-rod H, aud this lever 9o 
O in turn is connected to one end of a hori 
Zontal pitman-rod, P, running more or less 
parallel to the pitman-rod B, before described, 
and hung at its other end to the upright rod 
L of the stop-valve C, as explained for the 95 
first arrangement of connecting mechanism. 
The valves to the stops are opened by pull 
ing upon their respective knobs, and under 
this pull the lever connected to the shalalk of 
the knob works against the lever connected to Ioo 
the valve, and swinging it upon its fulcrum, 
causes, through the mechanism above de 
30 
45 
2. 
260,659 
O 
20 
35 
40 
45 
So 
SS 
75 
scribed as connecting it with the valve, the 
opening of such valve, when by the then rest 
or bearing of the lower end of the stop-lever 
D upon the incline face of the valve-lever F 
the valve is maintained in its open position 
against the tendency of the valve-spring to 
close it. 
The valves to the stops are closed by the 
action of their respective springs in, and for 
such action to occur it is only necessary to 
push upon the stop-knob sufficiently to re 
move the stop-lever D from its rest upon the 
incline of the valve-lever F, as is obvious with 
out further explanation. 
Obviously the arrangement of mechanism 
herein described for opening and closing the 
stop-valves to reeds may be used as well for 
swell valves or lids. 
In addition to the above-described mechan 
ism for opening a stop-valve each in a sepa 
rate and distinct manner, mechanism, to be 
now described, is provided, through which a 
series of stop-valves may be opened simulta 
neously and by operating one stop only. This 
mechanism, as illustrated, is operated through 
a lever, R, located in a position to be conven 
iently worked by the knee of the player. This 
lever R is under the organ body or case, and 
it is connected by a horizontal pitman-rod, S, 
to the lower end of the downward-projecting 
lever-arm r at the front end of a horizontal 
rod, T, running from the front to the rear of 
the organ, and arranged to turn in fulcrum 
blocks, and at its rear end provided with a 
crank and lever arm, u, to which is hung the 
lower end of a vertical pitman rod, U, hung at 
its upper end to the crank-arm Y of a horizon. 
tal rocker-shaft, W, arranged to turn at each 
end in stationary bearings v. This rocker 
shaft Wis back of the stop-levers D, and it has 
a spring, v, applied to it in a manner for the 
shaft to work in one direction against it and 
in the other direction with it. The former move 
ment is when the knee-lever is operated to 
open the stop-valves, and the latter is when 
the stop-valves are set free to be closed by the 
reaction of their separate springs in. The 
rocker-shaft V has a projecting radial arm, 
W, one for each stop intended to be operated 
through it. These arms all project in the same 
direction, and this direction is such that in the 
rock of the rocker-shaft V, under the move 
ment of the knee-lever to open the stop-valves, 
they will respectively abut against a pin, ac, 
which projects horizontally from each of the 
pitman-rods H connected to the stop-valve le. 
vers D, and through such abutment and the 
continued movement of the knee-lever in the 
same direction such rods are drawn or moved 
in the proper direction to open the stop-valves 
with which they are connected, as described. 
The stop-valves, opened as above-described, 
are held so opened by a button-lever, X, which 
is arranged in position to be dropped or 
placed in an abutment against the knee-lever 
at such time. On a release of this button-le 
wer X from the knee-lever R the knee-lever is 
The wooden pino is secured to the pittman- 85 
A rod, C, and also a rod, g, each arranged as 8o 
returned to its normal position of rest by the 
reaction of the spring of the rocker-shaft W, 
which releases the stop-valves to the action of 7o 
their respective springs to be closed by them. 
The arrangement of mechanism above de 
scribed for operating a series of stop-valves 
simultaneously in no manner interferes with 
the operating of the stop-valves separately, as 
described; and, again, it is such as to operate 
only upon such of the stop-valves of the series 
as are closed, and in no manner to affect those 
valves which are at the time opened. 
described, form a most convenient and simple 
way of suspension, the one, c, of a series of 
stop-levers D and the other, g, of a series of 
valve-levers F. 
rod H, extending across an open slot in its end, 
on which pin is suspended, by its hook end p, 
the arm L of valve, which suspension and 
bearing render the connection noiseless, easy, 
and free, while the open slot allows of a ready 
attachment and detachment of the arm L to 
the rod H, and is a simple and convenient mode 
of making the joint, and the hook end of the 
lever I, enables it to be readily attached and 
detached. 
In the operation of the two levers D and F 
the incline in on the lever F may be dispensed 
with; but it is preferable to have it. 
I am aware that it is not broadly new to op 
erate the stop or swell valve of an organ by a 
sliding pitman connected therewith, and that 
the mute of an organ has been provided with 
an eye to engage the hooked end of a rod 
which is operated by the organ stop-key; but 
such features are not broadly claimed by me. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The leversD, connected to organ-stops A, 
and the levers F, each connected, through a 
pitman-rod, H, and arm L, to a stop or swell 
valve, constructed and arranged to operate to 
gether substantially as described, whereby 
when the stop is open the levers D will rest 
upon levers F at an angle to a straight line 
between their respective fulcrums, in combina 
tion with an abutment, ac, of the pitman-rods 
H and arms W of a rocker-shaft, V, which is 
connected, through a crank-arm,Y, pitman-rod 
U, lever-arms 's, and pitman-rod S, to a knee or 
stop lever, R, all for operation of the arms W 
of rocker-shaft V upon the abutments at of pit. . 
man-rods H, as and for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination, with an abutment, ac, of 
the pitman-rod H, connected to a stop or swell 
valve of arms W, of a rocker-shaft, V, which 
is connected, through a crank-arm, Y, pitman 
rod U, lever-arm's, and pitman-rod S, to a knee 
or stop lever, R, all for an operation of the arms 
W of rocker-shaft V upon the abutments at of 
pitman-rod H, substantially as described, for 
the purpose specified. 
3. In a reed or other organ, the combination, 
substantially as hereindescribed, ofthehinged 
95 
IOO 
TIO 
IIS 
I 25 
260,6S9 
3 
stop or swell valve, provided with an upward 
projecting lever-arm,L, having the hooked end 
p, with the sliding pitman-rod H, having its 
end constructed with an open-ended slot and 
5 provided with a pin, o, extending across said 
slot for the ready attachment and detachment 
of the hooked end of the lever-arm on the stop 
or swell valve. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing Io 
witnesses. 
GEORGE B. KELLY. 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN W. BROWN, 
WM. S. BELLOWS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260789.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 260,789, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
H. S. SAR ONI. 
HYDROCARBON FURNACE. 
Patented July 11, 1882. 
Ai, 2. 
awaaaawaaaaaaa2%aaaaaaaaaa 
 
75 
he he sease 
ecozoo Co 
2 
 
 
 
Her N 
 
A. 
O. 
N. 
W 
Wiz SSs 
A 
(C) CO 
Z27, 3. 
ZV 
Witnesses. 
1/. (aced, 
26. gaze- 
Azvezzor. 
ACrymaz A.S. A5270/zz. 
76eet. 24. 
M. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, . C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERRMAN s. SARONI, OF ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA. 
HYDROCARBON-FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,789, dated July 11, 1882. 
Application filed March 25, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HERRMAN SANDER SA 
RONI, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at St. Paul, in the county of Ramsey and State 
of Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Hydrocarbon-Fur 
naces; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to letters or figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to furnaces adapted 
to the use of liquid hydrocarbons as fuel, and 
has for its object to insure the more perfect 
combustion of the fuel, particularly the heav 
ier particles of hydrocarbons, such as exist in 
crude petroleum, tar, and similar liquids. 
My improvements consist in various details 
of construction of the furnace and the manner 
of connecting the same with the liquid-fuel 
supply, as hereinafter described. 
The drawings accompanying this specifica 
tion represent, in Figure 1 a plan, and Fig. 2 
a vertical longitudinal section, of a boiler-fur 
nace containing my improvements. Fig. 3 is 
an enlarged view of the perforated-pipe sys 
tem for supplying superheated steam, and Fig. 
4 a view of the oil-atomizer. 
Reference being had to these drawings, A 
will be seen to represent a fire-box or furnace 
of proper form, while B represents a grate 
composed of a series of tubes pierced at the 
top with fine perforations, and located at the 
lower part of the furnace, this grate being cov 
ered with broken fire-brick, soapstone, or other 
refractory material, to present ample surface 
for reception of the heavier products of the 
fuel, and present the latter in the most favora 
ble condition for effective combustion. 
Within the lower part of the furnace, and 
'surrounding the grate B, I arrange a coil of 
pipe, C, one end of this coil connecting with a 
suitable steam-supply-a steam-boiler, for in 
stance, as shown at P in the accompanying 
drawings, as heated by the furnace A-and be 
ing provided with a valve, D. After coursing 
about the interior of the furnace A to the de 
sired extent the pipe C makes exit therefrom, 
as shown at A', and divides into two branches, 
B'C', each of which has a valve, that of the 
pipe B' being shown at E and that of the pipe 
C at F. 
The central tube of the grate is shown at C? 
as extending preferably through the front of 
the furnace, and is there provided with a reg 
ister-gate, H, which operates with correspond 
ing peripheral apertures, ee, &c., in the pipe, 
this register being to regulate admission of at. 
mospheric air to the interior of the grate. 
The branch steam-pipe C connects with and 
discharges into the outer end of the central 
portion, C, of the grate. The branch steam. 
pipe B terminates in a nozzle, c, which con 
nects with and discharges into the interior of 
an atomizer in the form of a chamber, K, open 
at front, as shown at d, this chamber beinglo 
cated in the upper part of the furnace, above 
the grate B. 
The tank for containing the hydrocarbon 
fuel supply is shown at O, while O' represents 
a pipe leading from such tank and provided 
with a valve, N, the outlet of this pipe being 
a nozzle, M, which enters the atomizer K, the 
two nozzlesc and M being arranged preferably 
at right angles to each and closely together, 
in order that their contents may intercept each 
other. 
The operation of this device is as follows, 
it being understood that the boiler P is sup 
plied with water and the tank O with hydro 
carbon, the valves N, E, D, and F being closed: 
The valves E and D are now opened and satu 
rated steam admitted to the interior of the 
grate B and of the atomizer K. When the 
condensed water has been expelled from the 
superheater O the valve N is opened, which 
permits liquid fuel from the tank O to issue 
from the nozzle M and be intercepted by the 
steam escaping from the nozzle c, the fuel by 
the force of the steam being driven in a spray 
over and upon the refractory material upon 
the grate B, and being ignited by suitable 
means. The heat from the burning fuel speed. 
ily heats the coil C to such a degree as to su 
perheat the steam passing through it and heat 
the refractory material upon the grate to in 
candescence, or partially so. With the lighter 
hydrocarbons this would be sufficient to insure 
perfect combustion; but when crude petro 
leum or similar hydrocarbons are used the 
lighter portions only will be vaporized and be 
90 
95 
IOC 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
2 
260,7s9 
utilized inflame, while the heavier properties- grate located thereit), and a refractory mate 
such as tar or similar residuum-cool off and 
rial upon such grate, at coil of steam-pipe sur 
run to waste. In order to utilize this tar or other 
rounding or combined with the same, substan 
residuum, when the refractory material upon 
tially as stated. 
the grate has become heated to the requisite 
3. In combination with a furnace, a tubular 
degree I open the valve F of the pipe C", which 
grate located therein, a refractory material dis 
allows superheated steam from the coil C to 
posed upon such grate, and a steam-coil sur 
enter the tubular grate B, while at the same 
rounding or combined with such grate, an atom 
time air by way of the openings e enters such 
izer supplied with steam from such coil and 
grate and is taken up by and joins the jet of 
with liquid fuel from a suitable tank, substan 
steam arising from such inspirator C and the 
tially as and for purposes stated. 
whole projected at a high temperature into the 
4. In combination, a furnace, a tubular grate 
vapor created by the dripping of the heavier 
located therein, a refractory material upon such 
particles of the hydrocarbon upon the ican 
grate, a Superheating steam-coil surrounding 
descent refractory material, thereby effecting 
or combined with such grate and delivering 
perfect combustion of such particles and util 
steam to the interior thereof and to an atom 
izing the entire fuel-supply. 
izer, and provision for supplying the interior of 
I do not restrict myself to the precise con 
the grate with air, substantially as described. 
struction and arrangement of the details of my 
5. In combination, the furnace, the tubular 
apparatus, as these may be varied without los 
perforated grate therein, with provision for an 
ing sight of the essential feature of my inven 
air-supply, the superheating steam-coil sup 
tion, which I consider to consist in a process 
plied with steam from a suitable source and 
of mixing air and steam at a ligh temperature 
communicating with and supplying the tubu 
with the vapor arising from the escape of the 
lar grate, and a liquid-fuel tank delivering its 
heavy hydrocarbons. 
fuel to an atomizer connected with the said st1. 
I therefore claim, and desire to secure by 
perheating - coil and located in the furnace 
Letters Patent of the United States, the fol. 
above the grate, and a refractory material 
lowing: 
placed upon the grate to provide a distribut 
1. The combination of tubular grate B with 
ing-surface for the heavier particles of the fuel, 
a steam-supply pipe, C, air-inlets e, and incan 
substantially as stated. 
descent refractory material arranged on said 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
grate, the latter being provided on its upper 
presence of two witnesses. 
side with perforations, through which the com 
bined steam and air areapplied to liquid hydro 
carbons distributed over said refractory ina 
terial. 
2. In combination with a furnace, a tubular 
HEIRIRMAN SANDER SAIRONI. 
H. E. LODGE, 
F. CURTIS. 
Witnesses: 
45 
55 
Go 
O 
23 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260889.txt	 
WZ72 esses. 
. 
. ." 
eters. Photo-Lithos"." washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SALATHIELT, NORTHCUTT, OF MARION COUNTY, OREGON. 
GRAN-ADJUSTING BELT FOR HARVESTERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,889, dated July 11, 1882. 
Application filed November 7, 1881. 
(Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SALATIIIELT, NORTH 
CUTT, a citizen of the United States, residing 
in the county of Marion and State of Qregon, 
have invented a new and useful Grain-Adjust 
ing Belt for Harvesters, which is fully set 
forth in the following specification and accom 
panying drawing, which is a general view of 
lmy device. 
The belt is constructed of ordinary leather. 
B B B are sole-leather strips, fastened with 
copper rivets and clout-nails on the grain side 
A of the belt. The inside F is provided with 
strips D D D, extending the whole length of 
the belt, and having buckles C. C. The belt 
is also furnished with lacing-strings EE, for 
extra fastening when buckled together. 
t 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In a harvester, the grain-adjusting belt 
composed of leather and provided with the 
sole-leather strips B B, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. The leather grain-adjusting belt provided 
with the sole-leather strips BB, in combina 
tion with the leather strips D D, having the 
buckles C C, and with lacing-strings EE, sub 
stantially as described. 
25 
SALATBIELT, NORTHOUTT. 
Witnesses: 
A. W. WANDoRSTON, 
SETH. R. HAMMER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US260989.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 260,989, 
 
D. M., JOHNSON, 
ROTARY ENGINE, 
Patented July 11, 1882. 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVIDM, JOHNSON, OF TRINITY COLLEGE, NORTH CAROLINA, ASSIGNOR 
TO HIMSELF AND DAVID M. PAYNE, OF SAME PLACE, 
ROTARY ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 260,989, dated July 11, 1882. 
Application filed April 13, 1882. No model.) 
My invention consists in a steam - wheel of rima in succession. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID M. JoHNSON, of 
Trinity College, Randolph county, North Car 
olina, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Rotary Engines, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
O 
formed with cavities in its rim to receive the 
steam, and provided with a steam chest or bon. 
net and cut-off devices, as hereinafter de. 
scribed and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both figures. 
Figure 1 is a side perspective view of the 
engine with the chest or bonnet partially re 
moved, and Fig. 2 is an interior face view of 
the steam-bonnet. 
A is the wheel, having a solid linn, a, that 
may be of either rounded or angular form, and 
having cavities b formed in the rim on both 
sides at regular distances apart, and alternat 
ing on the opposite sides. 
B is the steam chest or bonnet, made for 
convenience of application in two portions, and 
snugly fitted to the face and sides of the wheel 
rim, so as to cover the cavities b. This bon 
net is of a length to cover about one-third the 
periphery of the wheel. At one end it is 
formed with an interior chamber, c, to which 
steam will be supplied by the opening at d, 
and from the steam-chamber ports ee pass to 
the inner surface of the bonnet in contact with 
the wheel-rim a. 
f is a cut-off slide fitted transversely in the 
bonnet in openings that connect with ports e, 
and hung on one end of a lever, g, the outer end 
of which is formed with beveled lug h, lying 
25 
30 
35 
40 
close to the rim of the wheel A. The beveled 
pins ii on the wheel correspond in number with 
cavities b, placed to act alternately on opposite 
sides of the lug h, so as to swing the lever 9 
first to one side and then to the other, there 
by projecting the slide f into the parts e and 
cutting off the steam from the opposite sides 
In operation the jets of steam pass from the 
chamber c to the cavities b in succession, al 
ternating from one side to the other, as the 
cut-off is moved, and there is consequently 
continuous steam-pressure on the wheel. The 
steam exhausts as soon as the cavities pass 
the end of the bonnet, and there is therefore 
no loss of power from back-pressure. 
It will be seen that but little gearing or 
other mechanism is required in connection 
with this engine. The wheel is to be upon a 
shaft fitted for revolution in suitable bear 
ings, and the bonnet is to be sustained by suita 
ble supports. There may be two steam chests 
or bonnets, with space between for packing, 
the steam being in that case supplied sepa 
rately to the chambers. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The wheel A, alternating side cavities, 
b, tangent ports e, slide-valve or cut-off, os 
cillating lever 9, provided with the lug h, and 
valve-operating pins i, as shown and described. 
2. In rotary engines, cut-off and lever 9, 
provided with lugh, in combination with chest 
B and wheel A provided with pins i, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
DAVID M. JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
J. K. HARRIs, 
E. P. HAUSER, 
45 
55 
7 o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261089.txt	J. S., GOLD, 
BULLETIN BOARD, 
Patented July ll, 1882, 
(Model.) 
No. 261,089, 
-22-4 
  
  
 
 
A. 
s 
72zzazzazz 
7.7 oz. 
4.2% & 
N, PETERs, Photo-Authographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. S. GOLD, OF COLUMBUS, OEIIO, ASSIGNOR OF TWO - THIRDS TO 
GEORGE W. BALL AND RIPLEY C. HOFFMAN, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
BULLETN BOARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,089, dated July 11, 1882. 
Application filed January 17, 1882. (Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, Jose PHS. GOLD, of Co 
lumbus, in the county of Franklin and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
5 ful Improvements in Bulletin-Boards; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, reference 
to being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
bulletin-boards; and it consists in the combi. 
nation of a central frame which is adapted to 
15 hold the signs which are not in use, and to 
which are pivoted the two bulletin-boards in 
which the different signs are arranged, as will 
be more fully described hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
2O portable folding lulletin-board for different 
kinds of business, by means of which the mer 
chant can indicate to passers-by particular 
kinds or brands of goods which he has for 
sale, or of which he makes a specialty. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of my inven 
tion ready for use. Fig. 2 is a side elevation 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail view. Fig. 4 
is an enlarged detail view. 
A represents a suitable frame, which has 
the merchant's name and number or any suita 
ble advertisement painted or otherwise marked 
upon opposite sides of its upper end. This 
frame is provided with a door at one end, so as 
to allow the different sign-boards C to be read 
ily removed from the frames when they are 
wanted for the bulletin-boards, or to be re 
turned when not in use. Pivoted to opposite 
sides of this frame are the two bulletin-boards 
D, which are intended to be inclined slightly 
outward at their lower ends, so as to act as 
braces for the frame and preventit from blow 
ing over. Each one of these boards can be 
arranged at any desired angle to the frame A, 
and held in that position by means of screws, 
catches, or any other suitable devices, F. Each 
one of the bulletin-boards will preferably be 
made rectangular and have a suitable orna 
mental molding formed around its sides, so as 
to hold the sign-boards in place and hide the 
25 
45 
40 
35 
 
o 
55 
SC 
ends of the different sign-boards C, and one 
part, V, of this molding, upon one of the sides, 
will be hinged, so that it can be turned back 
ward to expose the ends of the sign-boards 
when it is desired to remove or place them in 
the bulletin to indicate the various articles for 
sale. This hinged part of the molding will 
be held over the ends of the signs by means 
of a suitable hook, catch, or other similar de 
vice, B. These sign-boards C will preferably 
have certain articles painted or otherwise 
marked upon one side, while their opposite 
sides will be painted black, so that they can 
be written upon by a piece of chalk. Should 
there not be a sufficient number of marked 
sign-boards C to indicate all the different arti 
cles, any one of the boards can be reversed 
and have the name of some article written upon 
its back, and then inserted in the bulletin along 
with the others. 
In order to prevent the sign-boards from 
slipping downward in the bulletin-board, each 
one of them has a recess, E, made in its end, 
so as to catch over a stop or projection, I, 
which are secured to opposite sides of the bul 
letin-board D. By having these recesses in 
the end of the sign-boards and the stops to 
hold them in place, any one or more of the 
sign-boards can be removed from the bulletin 
without having the other boards become dis 
placed. 
These bulletin-boards are intended to be 
placed upon the sidewalk in front of the store, 
and will be placed so as to face both up and 
down the street, so that persons coming from 
either direction will have the different signs 
exposed before them. When it is designed to 
take the bulletin-board in at night, or to trans 
port it from place to place, the two bulletin 
boards will be closed inward upon the frame, 
and thus a much smaller package be formed 9o 
than when they are spread out, 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a bulletin-board, the combination of 
a frame, A, adapted to hold sign-boards C, 95 
with one or more bulletin-boards, D, attached 
thereto, substantially as shown. 
2. A bulletin-board having suitable stops 
75 
2 
26,0s 5 
or projections, I, in combination with sign- 
boards C, having recesses E in their ends, presence of two witnesses. 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in Io 
JOSEPH S. GOLD, 
3. The combination of a bulletin-board pro- 
5 vided with stops or projections I, and having 
one side of its molding or edge adapted to be 
turned backward, with the sign-boards C, 
adapted to be removed from or inserted there- 
in, substantially as set forth. 
Witnesses: 
F. A. LEHMANN, 
W. W. MORTIMER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261190.txt	(No Model.) 
N. U W AKER, 
SECTIONAL PIPE 
No. 261,190, 
ty 4 
Patented July 18, 1882, 
a 3. 
WAvesses, 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NATEAN U. WALKER, OF WALKERS, OHIO. 
SECTIONAL PPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,190, dated July 18, 1882. 
Application filed February 15, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
fo 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
O 
25 
30 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, NATHANU. WALKER, of 
Walker's P. O., in the county of Columbiana 
and State of Ohio, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Sectional Pipe; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof. 
My invention Irelates to the construction of 
pipe and pipe-joints made of clay, cement, com 
position, iron, or other materials, which are 
united by means of a socket or bowl made on 
end of each section; and it consists in center 
ing pipe-sections one with another by means 
of curved inclined surfaces on the inner side of 
the socket or bowl. 
By constructing the pipe with longitudinal 
external ribs or bands I am enabled to get the 
requisite strength without any great increase 
of material, and at the same time obtain wedges 
to operate in connection with the curved in 
clines on the inner surface of the socket of the 
next Section. 
As heretofore constructed the sockets of the 
pipe, which were made largerfor the reception 
of the cement necessary to make tight joints, 
have had no provision for raising the end of 
the entering pipe so as to bring its bore to the 
same level as that of the socket-pipe, and con 
sequently the end of the entering pipe would 
drop below the level of the socket-pipe, forming 
a recess for the accumulation of sand and other 
material, increasing the friction upon the fluid 
passing through the pipe, and often making 
defective joints by the sinking of the entering. 
pipe in the cement while still soft or under the 
pressure of superposed earth. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my improvement, I will now describe 
it by reference to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of two sections of 
pipe, the bowl of one being formed in section 
a ac, to show how the small end of the other 
Figs, 2 and 3 are cross-sec 
Section enters it. 
tions on the liney y of Fig. 1, illustrating the 
manner of centering the pipe. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in each. 
Two sections, a, b, of pipe are shown in Fig. 
1. These sections are each provided with a 
bowl or socket, c, on one end and with longi. 
tudinal ribs d, extending from the bowl to the 
other end. The corners of the ribs d are 
rounded off, as at d", for the purpose of fitting 
them to operate more perfectly with the in 
clines on the inner side of the socket. 
Inside of the socket c are three or more in 
clined surfaces, f. The thick parts e of the 
socket are arcs of the true circle of the socket, 
and the diameter of such circle is larger than 
the diameter of the pipect between the strength 
ening-ribs d, SO that Spaces () are left between 
them for the reception of cement. 
Between the parts e are curved inclines f, 
which are deepest at the point et and grow 
shallower until they reach the abruptincline.f. 
When the pipe-sections are brought together 
the small end of one is inserted into the socket 
of the other, with the ribs d in the position 
shown in Fig. 2, and then they are rotated on 
their axes in opposite directions. This causes 
the ribs d to ride up upon the inclines funtil 
they come into contact with the abrupt in 
clines f', when the end of the entering-pipe 
will be centered with that of the receiving-pipe. 
In this way I obviate the difficulties arising 
from the former construction, and I obtain a 
strong, light pipe, which is as easily made as 
the old form, the Sections of which are cen 
tered perfectly when put together. If desired, 
the ribs d may be caused to extend spirally 
around the outer surface of the pipe-section. 
After the sections are put together the joints 
are made tight by cement placed in the space 
g and g in the bowl c around the end of the 
entering-pipe. 
If desired, the ribs or bands d may be omitted 
and lugs or projections made on the periphery 
of the small end of the pipe to act with the in 
clinesfin centering the sections. 
I am aware that lugs having inclined sides 
have been formed on the extremity and within 
the bowl of a pipe-section in order to obtain what 
is termed a bayonet lock or coupling, and 
do not herein claim such a construction. It is 
evident that the object and results, as well as 
the construction of my devices, differ essen 
tially from such devices, as the inclines are 
upon the inner and Outer surfaces, and not on 
the sides of the projections or lugs. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
45 
So 
air. -...-- 
2 
26,90 
1. A pipe - Section having a socket or bowl 
provided with inclines or eccentric inner sur 
Jaces, and having a series of longittadinal ribs 
on its exterior surface, said ribs corresponding 
in number to the inclines within the bowl, 
whereby duplicate sections may be centered 
in laying a line of pipe, substantially as speci 
fied. 
2. A socketed pipe-section having inclined 
inner Surfaces designed to co-operate in cen 
tering the entering pipe, which has projections 
or wedges on its outer surface to coact with 
the inclines of the socketed section, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
O 
3. A socketed pipe-Section laving inclines 
on the inner surface of the socket, in combi 
nation with the entering pipe having projec 
tions on its side, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 14th day of IFebruary, A. ID. 
SS2. 
IS 
NATEAN U. WALKER. 
Witnesses: 
T. B. KERR, 
JAMES H. PORTE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261290.txt	(No Model.) 
T. H. WYKE & J. BANCROFT, 
FLYING WEI,00IPEDE. 
No. 261,290, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Patented July 18, 1882, 
2 
SS 22 
SANAA 
Z32 
AM i . 
: i 
A 
M 
s 
; 
- 
| 
S. g g s t 
Rss 
s SSNes S. 
S. 
S. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
a 
- - ---- 
THOMAS H. WYKE AND JAMES BANCROFT, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
FLYING veloci PEDE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,290, dated July 18, 1882. 
Application filed June 5, 1882. (No model.) 
- . 
p 
lings. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, THOMAS BAND WYKE 
and JAMES BANCROFT, of Boston, in the county 
of Suffolk, State of Massachusetts, have in 
5 vented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Flying Velocipedes, of which the following 
is a description sufficiently full, clear, and ex 
act to enable any person skilled in the art or 
science to which said invention appertains to 
Io make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is an isometrical perspective view; 
Fig. 2, a vertical transverse section of one of 
15 the posts, and Fig. 3 a view of one of the 
boxes detached. 
Like letters of reference indicate correspond. 
ing parts in the different figures of the draw 
20 Our invention relates to a mechanism which 
we term a flying velocipede, designed to be 
used for exercise or purposes of amusement in 
place of the device commonly known as fly 
ing horses; and it consists in a series of sin 
25 gle-wheel velocipedes mounted on a circular 
rail or endless track and so connected as to 
form a continuous frame-work or support to 
keep them in position for use. 
The nature of our improvement will be read 
3o ily understood by all conversant with such mat 
ters from the following explanation, its ex 
treme simplicity rendering an elaborate de 
scription unnecessary. 
In the drawings, A represents the veloci 
35 pedes, B the frame, and C the track. Each 
of the velocipedes consists of a wheel, O, pro 
vided with a pedal-crank, P, the plate a, hand 
rest or support Q, and spring-seat T. The 
plate is constructed with an elongated slot, d, 
4o to receive the wheel O, and attached to its 
lower side, near the center, are a pair of boxes, 
S, in which the crank is journaled, and on 
which the plate is supported or disposed on 
the crank. 
The hand rest or support Q. consists of a bi 
furcated bar having a cross-bar or handle at 
the top, and is rigidly connected to the boxes 
S or to the plate a in the immediate vicinity 
of the boxes. 
So The spring-seat T consists of a curved spring, 
g, attached to the plate at and provided with 
4.5 
5S 
65 
The track is preferably grooved on its upper 7 o 
an ordinary pad or saddle-seat, h, as shown, 
the free end of the spring passing between the 
forks of the support Q, and being kept in po 
sition thereby. 
The plates at a are rigidly connected tog ther 
end to end, in any convenient and workman 
like manner, to form the frame B, which is pro 
vided with a brake, U, designed to be operated 
by the person tending the machine or by a pas- 6o 
senger. 
The frame B, instead of being composed of 
the plates a. a, may be constructed of tubing, 
if preferred, or in any other proper manner to 
support the wheels in position for use. 
It will also be obvious that any desired num 
ber of the velocipedes may be employed in ac 
cordance with the length of the track or size 
of the machine. 
edge or surface to receive the peripheries of 
the wheels of the velocipedes; but, if desired, 
the wheels may be grooved around their pe 
ripheries and the track so formed as to fit the 
Sane, 
Attached to the track are a series of brack 
ets or lugs, D, fitted to receive the vertical 
posts or rods E. These posts are bored longi 
tudinally and provided with screws G, squared 
at their upper ends to receive the wrench H, So 
by which the screws may be turned up or down, 
as required. A serrated spline or toothed fin, 
J, projects from one side of the post into the 
upwardly-tapering slotkin the lug D, a toothed 
key, M, being inserted in the slot to lock or 85 
fasten the post in any desired position. 
The lower end of the screw E is supported 
by the plate a resting on the ground, the ver 
tically-adjustable post and its screw being used 
to raise and lower or level the track C on an 9o 
uneven surface. 
It will be understood that each of the ve 
locipedes is designed to be occupied by a pas 
senger, who will operate or propel it, but not 
steer it, and that additional passengers may 95 
be carried, if desired, in the seats N and box 
R provided for that purpose. 
One or more of the boxes R., designed more 
especially for the use of ladies and children, 
may be employed with each complete machine roo 
by being arranged on the frame between any 
two of the velocipedes. 
75 
- 
. 
. . . . 
- 
---r 
261,290 
If desired, the frame B may be supported B, and track C, constructed and arranged to 
2. The post E, screw G, and key M, con 
principally on wheels which are independent operate substantially as specified. 
or separate from the velocipedes and supplied 
with seats for passengers, one or more veloci. structed and arranged to operate substantially. 5 
pedes being used for propelling or revolving as set forth. 
the frame over the track, without entirely de 
parting from the spirit of our invention. 
Having thus explained our improvement, 
TEHOMAS HAND WYKE, 
JAMES BANCROFT, 
5 
what we claim is- 
1. The flying velocipede or device described, 
the same consisting of the velocipedes A, frame 
O 
Witnesses: 
C. A. SHAW, 
H. E. METCALF. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261390.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 261,390. 
D. A. SCHUYLER. 
DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINE, 
Patented July 18, 1882. 
 
ATEST: 
N. PerERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL A. SCHUYLER, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
DYNAMO - ELECTRIC MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,390, dated July 18, 1882. 
Application filed December 27, 1881. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL A. SCEIUYLER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Dynamo-Electric Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention consists in a novel arrange 
ment of the armature-coils in a dynamo-elec 
trical machine and a new plan of connecting 
the coils to one another and to the commutat. 
ing devices of the machine. 
The exact nature of my invention will be 
readily understood from the annexed descrip 
tion and drawings. 
I propose in carrying out the invention to 
divide the armature coils or helices into sets 
of four, the coils of each set being disposed 
symmetrically with relation to one another in 
such a way that each coil is placed at an an 
gle of ninety degrees to the coils of the same 
set upon either side of it and diametrically 
opposite to the remaining coil of the set. If 
the armature contain eight bobbins or coils, 
there would be two sets of coils of four bobbins 
each, and the bobbins or helices of one set would 
be placed between bobbins or helices of the 
other. If the armature be divided into twelve 
bobbins, its bobbins would be arranged in 
three sets, and any three contiguous bobbins 
would belong each to a separate set or group; 
but in every case the bobbins of each group 
would be spaced and disposed With relation to 
one another in the manner already described. 
Each set or group is provided with a separate 
commutator ring or cylinder, and one end of 
each helix or bobbin in a set is connected to a 
separate plate or segment of the commutator. 
With the arrangement of field-of-force poles 
herein indicated diametrically-opposite bob 
bins would be connected to diametrically-op 
posite segments. The remaining ends are 
bunched or in permanent electrical connection 
with one another. Commutator-brushes are 
so applied, or the segments of the commutator 
are of such length, that each bobbin or helix 
is connected to the commutator-brush during 
the greater part of its movement from one neu 
tral point to another of the magnetic field, and 
if the magnetic field beformed by two curved 
pole-pieces only, placed diametrically oppo. 
site, each coil or helix would be connected to 
the outside circuit through approximately one 
hundred and thirty-five degrees (more or less) 
of its revolution, and would be disconnected 
from the commutator-brushes entirely as it ap 
proaches the point where the polarity of the 
current generated in it is reversed-that is, as 
it approaches the neutral point. 
The armature-coils may consist of any de 
sired number of bobbins that is capable of di 
vision by the factor 4. I have found, how 
ever, that excellent results are attained, when 
the form of machine having two field-of-force 
poles is employed, by dividing the armature 
into two sets of bobbins or helices of four each 
and connecting the two sets, in the manner 
described, to two independent commutator 
rings or cylinders, each having the ordinary 
positive and negative collecting-brushes. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
illustrates diagrammatically my invention. 
Fig. 2 shows an end view of one form of a com 
mutator-cylinder with brushes applied thereto, 
SO as to preserve the continuity of the circuit 
and to preserve the connection of a segment or 
plate of the commutator with the outside cir. 
cuit during the time that the coil with which 
it is connected is generating useful current 
or is passing from one neutral portion of the 
field to the other. As here shown, connection 
is preserved through about one hundred and 
forty degrees of revolution of the armature 
coil. 
Fig. 3 shows an equivalent arrangement 
for preserving the connection and preventing 
break of contact as the brushes shift from one 
plate to another. Fig. 4 shows the method of 
connecting up the brushes of the separate com 
mutator-cylinders for producing intensity ef. 
fects. 
Referring to Fig.1, A B C D represent four 
bobbins or helices of a revolving armature, 
and a b c d commutator plates or segments, to 
which the same ends of the bobbins are con 
nected, as indicated. The remaining or free 
ends of the bobbins are joined together in one 
common electrical connection. The bobbins 
A B C D are disposed symmetrically, and oc. 
cupy positions upon their carrier at angles of 
ninety degrees from one another. The bob 
bins A C are diametrically opposite one an 
other, and so also are the bobbins BD. These 
bobbins are supposed to revolve in the ordinary 
way between curved pole-pieces, (indicated by 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
65 
7 c. 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
OO 
261,390 
2 
the letters NS,) so that the single bobbin, or a hypothesis it would be necessary to so con 
the two contiguous bobbins which are at any struct the commutator that each segment 
time to the right of the line X X, will be should be connected to a commutator-brush to 
through an arc of revolution of one hundred 
generating current of one polarity, while the 
and thirty-five degrees. 
Each bobbin would 
bobbin or bobbins on the other side will be 
then be in circuit only with its opposite bob 
generating current of the opposite polarity. 
bin in the central forty-five degrees of its cir 
If the armature contained eight independent 
cular path opposite the commutator-brushes. 75 
bobbins, and were divided, as I propose, into 
In the forty-five degrees preceding the cen 
two sets of four each, the remaining bobbins 
tral portion of the whole arc it would be con 
would be located symmetrically with relation 
nected simultaneously with the bobbin ahead 
to one another and to the bobbins A B C D, 
and would occupy the positions E. F. G. H. 
of it to the commutator-brush. In the forty 
five degrees following the central portion it 8o 
They would be in a similar manner connected 
would be connected simultaneously with its 
to the plates of an independent commutator, 
following bobbin. 
This will be readily seen - 
the segments or plates of which would be dis. 
from a mathematical consideration of the con 
placed with relation to those shown by all arc 
of forty-five degrees upon the armature-shaft. 
ditions. If the commutator be so constructed 
that a segment will be connected through a 85 
If the armature contained twelve bobbins, each 
longer arc, the arc in which it and its joined 
set of four Would be connected in a similar 
way to its independent commutator, which, to 
bobbin will be connected to the outside circuit 
independently of the contiguous bobbins of 
gether with its set of connected bobbins, would 
in this case be displaced from its neighboring 
the set will be shorter. I do not, however, 
limit myself to any particular proportions. . 
set by an arc of thirty degrees, as will be 
readily understood. 
The relation of the bobbins to one another 
in the various positions of the armature will 
In Fig. 2, 55 and 66 represent the double 
be readily understood from a consideration of 
commutator-brushes of one commutator-cylin 
the diagrams, the dotted curved lines indicat 
der, 55 being electrically connected to one 
ing the curved pole-pieces and the arrow the 95 
another in the well-known way, and consti. 
tuting, for instance, the negative brush, and 
direction of revolution. 
In the operation of the machine it will be 
66 the positive brush. If the armature-coils 
readily understood that the circuit of but a 
A B C D thus connected to one another and 
single pair of bobbins is broken at a time, and 
to the commutator revolve between two curved 
that It is practically impossible to interrupt the 
pole-pieces of field-of-force magnets, the coils 
current generated in more than one bobbin at 
BD or A C will, when generating current at 
all, be generating currents of opposite polarity, 
the same time, since it is impossible to so con 
struct the parts that the opposite plates of the 
and will be connected simultaneously to the 
opposite brushes, while either pair of bobbins 
commutators shall leave their brushes at ex 
actly the same moment. In practice, one will 
as, for instance, B D-is opposite the centers 
of the curved pole-extensions, and for a con 
leave at an instant before the other; but the 
current from the bobbin whose plate remains 
siderable portion of their movement in ap 
proaching and leaving that point the other 
for the instant connected is not broken at the 
pair, A C, will be cut out, the first pair only 
same time, because its current finds a path 
through the common neutral connection to 
being connected to the outside circuit. As, 
however, each bobbin B D approaches the 
that bobbin of its set which is for the time be 
ing generating an opposite current. It will be 
point where it will becutout, and for a portion 
observed, also, that with this arrangement of 
of its movement preceding that point, the bob 
the bobbins the total current generated or sup 
bins AC, if the movement be in the direction 
plied by the machine is never interrupted at 
of the arrow, will respectively be connected 
simultaneously with them to the brushes, the 
the commutator, and the formation of large 
and injurious sparks is impossible. 
latter bobbins having during this portion of 
the revolution just left the neutral point and 
In Fig. 4, I have shown the manner in which 
the independent sets of four are connected for 
begun to generate useful current. 
supplying an intensity current, The positive 
The lengths of time during which a single 
and negative brushes of the separate commu 
bobbin is connected to a brush and during 
tators are indicated by the usual signs, - and 
Which two contiguous bobbins are simultane 
ously connected to a brush obviously depend 
- and the positive brush of one commutator 
upon the length of the commutator-segments 
is connected to the negative brush of the next, 
By this arrangement I am enabled to greatly 
and the compass of the brushes. I find that 
good results are attained by constructing and 
increase the efficiency of the machine in the 
practical operation of running a number of 
proportioning the parts of the commutator so 
electric lamps. If quantity effects are desired, 
that each pair of opposite bobbins is in circuit. 
alone during, say, forty-five degrees of revolu 
the two positive brushes are connected to one 
another, and also the two negative. 
tion at the center of the arc of revolution op 
If desired, two brushes broad enough to 
posite the field of force in which the current 
cover both commutator-cylinders may be em 
generated is taken off from the armature, two 
bobbins being connected simultaneously in 
ployed instead of the four brushes just de 
the remaining portion of the arc, Under such 
Scribed. 
O 
II5 
it 25 
I 3G 
O3) 
IO. 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
S5 
 
261,890 
3 
O 
15 
35 
In Fig. 3 the plates of the commutator over 
lap one another, so that if single brushes be 
used instead of the double brushes shown in 
Fig. 2 contact will be made with a following 
plate before contact is broken with a preced 
ing plate connected to the brush. The plates 
as thus extended by their overlapping por 
tions are long enough to preserve the connec 
tion of their bobbins with the commutator dur 
ing the proper extent of revolution of the arma 
ture, 
My invention is readily applicable to exist 
ing forms of machine-such as the Gramme. 
In applying it to these machines as at present 
constructed I generally prefer to use two or 
more of their bobbins as a single bobbin, one 
end of the two connected bobbins being con 
nected to the commutator-plate and the other 
to the common or neutral connection. 
My invention may be also applied to ma 
chines of the Siemens type and to other con 
structions. 
I do not limit myself to what are known as 
dynamo electric machines or self-accumu 
lators, as I may also apply my invention to that 
class of machines in which the field of force is 
maintained by permanent magnets, or by elec 
tro-magnets energized by a currentindependent 
of that generated in the armature. I may even 
include all the coils of the armature in the four 
separate bobbins, using of course only the one 
commutator cylinder, with its four plates or 
segments. I generally prefer, however, to di 
wide the coils into two or more sets of bobbins 
of four each. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, with four armature-bob 
bins within a magnetic field formed by a posi 
tive and negative pole-piece and disposed 
symmetrically with relation to one another 
within the limits of that field, of a commuta 
tor-cylinder provided with separate plates or 
segments, to which the same ends of the bob 
bins are separately connected, positive and 
So 
negative collecting-brushes arranged, as de- 45 
scribed, so as to collect the two opposite cur 
rents simultaneously generated in all the four 
bobbins, or in two of them only, and supply 
the same to a single outside circuit, and a com 
mon electrical joint for the other ends of the 
four bobbins, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the armature coils 
or bobbins of a dynamo-electric machine di 
vided into groups of four bobbins disposed 
symmetrically with relation to one another, as 
described, of sets of commutator plates or seg 
ments, one set for each group, each set con 
taining four plates or segments, electrical con 
nections from one end of the bobbins of each 
group to the separate plates or segments of its 
commutator set, and a common electrical joint 
for the other ends of the bobbins. 
3. The combination, substantially as de 
scribed, with two or more sets of armature 
bobbins, said bobbins being disposed sym- 65 
metrically with relation to one another insets of 
four, in the manner described, of two or more 
corresponding commutator-cylinders, to which 
the sets of bobbins are independently con 
nected, two positive and negative collector 
brushes for each commutator. cylinder, and 
electrical connections from the positive brush 
of one cylinder to the negative brush of another, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
4. An al'mature for a dynamo-electric ma 
chine whose bobbins are divided into sets, each 
of which contains four bobbins, the bobbins of 
each set being disposed symmetrically with re 
lation to one another within the circumferen 
tial space included by all the bobbins, and pro- 8o 
vided with independent connections to a com 
mutator-cylinder having four independent sec 
tions or segments. 
75 
55 
7 O 
IDANIEL, A, SCEIUYLER, 
Witnesses: 
H. C. To WNSEND, 
THOMAS TOOMEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261490.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet, i. 
E. T. STARR & W. J. PEYTON. 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTING SYSTEM, 
No. 261,490. 
Patented July 18, 1882, 
 
IWWEWTOR S 
AZ Z. Sacy: 
By their 4ttorney, T Zey/A.or 
N. PEERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
E. T. STARR & W. J. PEYTON, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTING SYSTEM, 
No. 261,490, 
Patented July 18, 1882, 
Q) 
7%g C. 
-- 
IWVE.WTORS 
A//z ZaSaezy, 
JBy their Attornel/ 447. Zeyzoz, 
 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington. ... 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIT. STARR, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, AND WILLIAM J. PEYTON, 
OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING AND POWER - DISTRIBUTING SYSTEM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,490, dated July 18, 1882, 
Application filed June 20, 1882. (No model.) 
2 
To all chon it inctly concern: 
Beit known that we, ELIT. STARR, of Phila 
delphia, Pennsylvania, and WILLIAM J. PEY 
TON, of Washington, in the District of Colum 
5 bia, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Electric Lighting and Power. 
Distributing Systems, of which the following 
is a specification. 
Our invention relates more especially to cer 
1o tain improvements in distributing electricity 
as a source of power and for lighting dwelling 
houses and other buildings, Street-larmps, &c., 
it being our main object to provide a safe, eco 
nomical, and reliable system or method of and 
15 means for electric lighting, in order to displace 
to a great extent the use of gas and similar 
artificial illuminators. 
The objections to the use of gas for illumi 
nating purposes in dwellings, other buildings, 
2O Street-lamps, &c., are well known. Gas is dan 
gerous, it poisons the atmosphere in closed 
rooms, and does not give a steady, pure, and 
brilliant light. The electric light, on the con 
trary, does not vitiate the air, while its purity 
25 and brilliancy meet the requirements of arti. 
ficial illumination. 
The systems of electric lighting heretofore 
introduced are objectionable principally on ac 
count of the liability of highly-heated conduct 
3o ors or apparatus to set fire to buildings or in 
flammable substances in their vicinity, and on 
account of the cost of producing and maintain 
ing the lights. 
We are not aware that heretofore a prac 
35 thcal and successful system of electric lighting 
has been invented or devised so as to super 
sede the use of gas for domestic lighting. 
One of the principal objects of our invention 
is to substitute the electric light in place of 
4o gas for domestic purposes in a safe, desira 
ble, and economical manner. 
The subject-matter claimed by us as of our 
invention is first fully described, and then par 
ticularly pointed out at the close of the speci 
The accompanying drawings show our im 
proved apparatus as organized in the best Way 
Inow known to us. It is to be understood, how 
ever, that some of our improvements may be 
5o organized in ways differing from that shown, 
45 fication. 
One or more steam-engines or other form of to 
and that some of our said improvements may 
be used without the others. 
Figure 1 is a diagram of one way of organ 
izing our improvements, the view showing a 
main conducting-wire through which a current 55 
of electricity to charge a series of secondary 
or storage batteries and to supply current to 
a series of street-lamps passes, there being also 
shown another circuit by which the storage 
batteries may be thrown into or out of the main 6o 
circuit, so that they may be charged and then 
cut out, and the current of the charging-line 
made to flow through the street-lamps to work 
them direct while the storage-batteries are 
working the lamps of the houses, halls, or other 65 
places in which they may be placed; and Fig. 
2 is a diagram showing our improvements as 
organized in a way somewhat different from 
the organization exhibited in Fig. 1. 
motor, A, (not necessary to be particularly de 
scribed or shown,) are used to drive one or more 
dynamo-electric machines or mechanical gen 
erators of electricity, B, the form or construc 
tion of which is immaterial so long as it is 75 
suitable for generating electricity of the req 
uisite tension or strength to charge second 
ary or storage batteries, so as to convert said 
batteries into independent sources of electrical 
supply. The electric current generated by the 8o 
generator is conducted over a main circuit-wire, 
C, which is preferably laid under ground, run 
ning lengthwise of the street upon which the 
houses to be lighted face, in the manner of an 
ordinary gas-pipe main. The main circuit-wire 85 
C, or a branch thereof, is preferably run under 
ground from the street into the lower room, 
hall, passage, cellar, yard, ou thouse, or back 
building of each house to be lighted, in order 
to charge a storage-battery or series of batter- 9o 
ies, D, in such cellar or other place, as clearly 
shown in the drawings. The line C, or branch 
thereof, over which the charging-current passes, 
is provided near each battery with a switch, 
E, which may be organized as shown in the 95 
figures, whereby any one or more...of said bat 
teries D may be put in the circuit of the main 
line, or of its branch, to be charged without 
affecting the others. 
It will thus be understood that we have a loo 
2 
261,490 
main line over which the charging- current 
passes, a series of independent storage-batter 
ies to be charged, and a series of switches, 
whereby any one or more of said batteries may 
be charged without affecting the others, or 
whereby all of said batteries may be charged 
simultaneously by being thrown into the cir 
cuit of the main line. One or more of the 
batteries may thus be cut out for an indefinite 
period without affecting the capacity of the 
charging-line to charge the others. 
The switches E, which control the connection 
of their respective batteries with the main or 
charging line, may be located in the respective 
houses, and protected by a locked box or cas 
ing, so as to be accessible only to the proper 
person or officer in charge of the batteries; or 
they may be outside, for example, in an open 
ing in the sidewalk, under cover, in a manner 
somewhat similar to the organization of the 
cocks or valves by which gas is cut off from 
or turned on to houses from the outside. 
The simple form of switch E shown in the 
drawings consists of a conducting-lever piv 
oted ate and electrically connected at the butt 
end with the wire C, and making contact at 
its opposite end with the wire leading to the 
battery, so that the switch forms part of the 
circuit over which the charging-current passes. 
The switches, when in the position shown in 
full lines in the figures, close the circuit of the 
main line or its branches through the batteries 
D, the current, after its passage through one 
of said batteries, returning to the street and 
passing to the next battery or series of batter 
ies, and so on, the arrangement on circuit being 
sufficiently illustrated in the drawings. When 
one or more of said switches E are in the po 
sition shown in dotted lines in Figs. 1 and 2 
the respective battery or batteries D of the 
house or houses to which said switches belong 
are cut out, and no current flows thereto, inas 
much as the circuit through the battery will 
be broken. 
In Fig. 2 the connection of the secondary 
batteries with the charging-line C depends 
wholly upon the switches E, each of which 
may be operated by band to determine whether 
its respective battery or batteries shall be 
charged to form an independent source of elec 
tricity, or whether it shall be cut out without 
affecting the others. In Fig.1, however, while 
we provide the switches E, in order that we may 
cut out any particular battery for an indefinite 
period without affecting the others, we have 
shown an organization of switches, F, whereby 
the storage-batteries may be simultaneously 
thrown into or cutout of circuit from the station 
at which the generator is located, or from any 
other point desired, so that they may be charged 
When desired and then cut out. Each of said 
switches F may consist of an armature pivoted 
at one end and electrically connected to the 
wire leading into the battery, and acted upon 
by a spring, f, to normally close the circuit of 
the main line through the armature, the con 
tact-point 1 and the wire returning from the 
75 
battery, so as to cut out the battery and pre 
vent the current passing thereto. The circuit 
to the storage battery or batteries of eachhouse 
therefore is kept open until the time for charg 
ing the batteries arrives, when the circuit is 
c...mpleted and the current conducted through 
the batteries to charge them. 
In order to close and open the circuit to the 
storage-batteries, We employ electro-magnets 
G, placed so as to act, when excited by a cur. 
rent of electricity traversing their coils, upon 
the switches or armatures F, to attract them 
and close the circuit to the batteries through 
said armatures, the contact-points Q, and the 
wires leading to and from the batteries. The 
controlling-magnets G are excited by the cur 
rent of an electric generator passing over an 
independent circuit, H, in which the electro 
magnets G are included. A switch or key, I, 
is included in the circuit H, by which said cir 
cuit may be made and broken at will, in order 
to throw the batteries in or cut them out of 
the main charging-circuit C. The switch I of 
any particular charging station or district into 
which a town or city may be divided for con 
venience is preferably located at the office of 
the station, so as to be under the immediate 
control of the engineer or electrician in charge. 95 
It will be evident that as soon as the circuit 
of the line His broken the armature-switches 
will be returned by their springs to their nor 
mal position in contact with the contact-points 
1, and thus cut out the secondary batteries, 
which are now to be used as independent 
sources of supply at night for the purpose of 
running the lamps with which the houses may 
be supplied. 
The generator to furnish current to operate 
the armature-switches F may be a galvanic 
battery or a charged storage-battery; or, if 
preferred, a portion of the current of the gen 
erator B may be utilized to excite the electro 
magnets G. 
From each storage-battery or series of bat 
teries D circuit-wires d are run throughout the 
house to all points requiring lamps, the lamp 
or lamps Jbeing suspended or mounted and 
connected in circuit in well-known ways, so as 
to receive the current of the battery, or a por 
tion thereof, to produce the lights. The lamps 
may be either arc or incandescent lamps, of 
well-known or any approved construction, and 
the number which may be run by the storage 
battery or batteries D of any one house or 
building is determined by the capacity of said 
battery or batteries. It will be understood 
that the circuit of the battery is completed 
through the lamp or lamps J only when light 
is desired, and this is accomplished by switches 
or buttons which may be organized so as to be 
operated somewhat like the thumb-piece or 
button of the ordinary gas-bracket by which 
the flow of gas is turned on or shut off. In the 
drawings we have shown a simple switch, d", 
to complete the circuit of the storage-battery 
through the lamp or lamps, 
In Fig. 2 one of the houses in the row of four 
I. O 
IIS 
I25 
OO 
O 
IS 
25 
45 
So 
65 
S 
26,490 
- 
3 
5 
IO 
25 
30 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
illustrated is shown as provided with circuit 
connections d, leading from the storage bat 
tery or batteries D to two lamps, J J. 
We contemplate in our system to charge 
storage or secondary batteries of a large num 
ber of dwellings or other buildings during the 
day from stations at which the generators will 
be situated, and then cut out said batteries, 
so that they will be independent sources of 
electric supply to run the lamps during the 
succeeding night. The generator or genera 
tors B may then be employed at night to run 
a Series of lamps direct-such as street-lamps 
whereby it will be understood that by our sys 
tem of lighting we store during the day sec 
ondary batteries to be independent sources of 
light at night, and run a system of lamps at 
night directly by the current evolved by the 
generator or generators. 
In Fig. 1 we show the lamps that are to be 
run directly by the current of the generator 
that charges the storage-batteries as consist. 
ing of street-lamps K, which, like the storage 
batteries D, are preferably each provided with 
a switch E to cut them out indefinitely, if de 
sired, and also with armature-switches F, the 
action of which is the reverse of that of the 
corresponding switches for the storage-bat 
teries-that is to say, said armature-switches, 
when attracted by the excited electro-magnets 
G, will break the circuit to the lamps and cut 
them out, while the armature-switches of the 
storage-batteries D will complete the circuit 
to the storage-batteries, as hereinbeforestated, 
so that said batteries will be charged. When 
the circuit H is broken, however, the arma 
ture-switches will be no longer attracted, and 
the storage-batteries will be cut out, as before 
described, while the circuit through the lamps 
K will be established, so that said lamps will 
be run directly by the current of the generator. 
In Fig. 2 we have shown a second main line, 
C", leading to the series of street-lamps K, 
which may be either arc or incandescent lamps, 
and the current of the generator at night is 
thrown upon said line without affecting or 
throwing current upon the main line C. 
In order to readily switch the current of the 
generator B from one main line to the other 
to do the work required, we have provided a 
switch arrangement which we prefer to be or 
ganized as shown in Fig. 2. The terminals of 
the main lines C C are connected with con 
tact-pieces. The positive pole of the genera 
tor B is electrically connected with a pivoted 
Switch, L, capable of being turned to make 
contact with the positive terminal c of the 
main line C, while the negative pole of the 
generator is likewise connected with a switch, 
M, capable of being turned to make contact 
with the negative terminal c' of said main line 
C. The main line C thus constitutes a colm 
plete metallic circuit. When the generator is 
throwing current upon the line C, including 
the storage-batteries, the said batteries will be 
charged, while when the switches L. Mare con 
nected with the terminals of the line C, as 
shown in dotted lines, said line C will be cut 
out and the lamps in the line C' only will be 
operated. 
it will be understood, of course, that a switch 
or switches, b, may be made part of the main 
line C at or near the generator B, in the or 
ganization shown in Fig. 1, so as to break the 
circuit of said generator, if desirable or neces 
sary. It will also be evident that it is not 
necessary to establish the current through the 
lamps K in Fig. 2 at the time of cutting out 
the charged secondary batteries, as the switches 
may rest at a point intermediate of the termi 
nals of the main lines C. C. 
By the organization we have described we 
largely increase the capacity of a generator 
for giving light at the time light is required. 
For example, we will suppose the dynamo elec 
tric machine or generator B to be of light giv. 
ing capacity equal to five hundred horse-power, 
and that it is capable of storing one thousand 
secondary or storage batteries of light-giving 
capacity equal to one horse-power each dur 
ing, say, seven hours of daylight. The storage 
batteries are then disconnected and constitute 
independent sources of power or light, while 
the generator may be employed to run direct 
during the period the light is required, say, five 
hundred lights equal to one horse-power each. 
We thus get at the period the light is to be 
used light equal to fifteen hundred horse-power 
from a five-hundred-horse-power generator. 
It will be understood that any form or con 
struction or arrangement of secondary batter 
ies suitable for the purpose may be used in 
our system, the particular form, construction, 
or arrangement of battery or batteries consti 
tuting no part of our present invention: 
From what has been said it will be seen that 
we have invented a system of electric lighting 
that is safe, desirable, and economical. Cur. 
rents of electricity of high tension can pass 
into the houses or other places no farther than 
the batteries D, which, as before stated, should 
be, for absolute safety, located in the cellar, 
lower portion of the house away from inflam- . 
mable material, or in an out house. Each house 
with its source of light or power is iudepend 
ent, and each house, moreover, is not depend 
ent for its light at night upon the action of a 
generator of large capacity which is employed 
to run a large number of lights for other houses, 
as in the systems heretofore proposed. Con 
sequently, should the action of the generator 
B be interrupted at night from any cause, it 
will affect the lamps only which are being sup 
plied directly by it. 
We disclaim herein all the patentable sub 
ject-matter described, shown, or substantially 
indicated in this case, save the subject-matter 
recited in the two following clauses of claim, 
this present application being a division of our 
application filed January 9, 1882. 
The said improvements claimed herein, to 
which this present application is restricted, 
and for which we desire to secure Letters Pat 
ent, are 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
2. 
1. 
261,490 
1. The combination, substantially as herein- throw said batteries into the circuit of the 
charging-line, a single independent line, in 
cluding electro-magnets to operate said series 
of switches, and a second series of switches, 
one for each of said batteries, by which any 
one or more of said batteries may be cut out 
from the main line for an indefinite period 
without cutting out the others or interfering 
with their operation. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto sub 
scribed our names this 2d day of June, A. D. 
1S82. 
before set forth, of a dynamo-electric machine 
or generator, a mainline to receive the electric 
current of said generator, a series of independ. 
ent storage-batteries electrically connected 
with said main line to be charged therefrom, 
a working-circuit for each of said independent 
batteries, including electrical apparatus to be 
operated by the energy of said batteries, and 
a switch for eaclh of said batteries, whereby 
any one or more of said batteries and the ap 
paratus worked by it may be cut out from the 
main line for an indefinite period without cut 
ting out the others. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a dynamo-electric machine 
or generator, a main line over which the cur 
rent of said generator is conducted, a series 
of independent storage-batteries to be charged 
from said main line, a series of switches, one 
for each of said batteries, to simultaneously 
ELIT, STARR, 
WM. J. PEYTON. 
25 
30 
- 
Witnesses to signature of Wm. J. Peyton: 
L. B. WIGHT, 
GEO. F. GRAHAM. 
Witnesses to signature of Eli T. Starr: 
SAMUEL STARR, 
JOHN A. WALLACE. 
3. 
O 
JS 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261590.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 261,590, 
J. S. DAWIS. 
GRAIN BINDER, 
8 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 25, 1882. 
 
2 
2 
WITNESSES 
72? 60, 2. r 
INVENTOR 
Jo/72. S. Zavris 
By his Attorneys. 
N. PETERs, Photo-uthographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. S. DAWIS, 
GRAIN BINDER. 
. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
s 
No. 261,590, 
Patented July 25, 1882, 
s 
nS 
s 
 
 
% wear 
INVENTOR 
/o/22 AS Zooves. 
By as Attorneys, 
24.1%. 22 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 261,590, 
J. S. DAVIS. 
GRAIN BINDER. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented July 25, 1882. 
  
WITNESSES 
72 a. oe/ 
%/ %da, ce. 
 
26- 
INVENTOR 
/o/v/. S. Aage as, 
By / is Aftorneys 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, washington.c. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOEIN S. DAVIS, OF TOLEDO, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE TOLEDO MOWER AND 
REAPER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
GRAN-BINDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,590, dated July 25, 1882. 
Application filed February 1, 1882. (No model.) 
65 
25 anism. 
view, partly in elevation and partly in section, 
Beit known that I, JOHN S. DAVIS, of To- of apparatus for supplying the binding mate. 
rial under tension. Fig. 6 is a section, as in 
dicated by the line 6 6 of Fig. 1, showing in . 
detail the manner of supporting a tripper 55 
which is actuated by an attachment of the 
My invention chiefly relates to improvements: binder-arm to release the binding material 
from the rocking clamp by which it is held 
until after the binding mechanism is thrown 
into action and the binder-arm commences its 6o 
movement. Fig. 7 is a view of a portion of 
the twine-holding box with one side removed, 
showing a slight modification of the tension 
apparatus; and Fig. 8, a plan of the same 
with the box-top removed. 
As my present improvements are in this in 
stance shown as organized for usein connection 
with a machine similar in many respects to that 
embracing prior improvements of my inven 
tion as set forth in my before-mentioned ap- 7o 
plication, particular reference is hereby made . 
to said application for illustration and descrip 
tion of such mechanism not hereinafter speci 
fied or in detail described as may be required 
to convey a proper understanding of my im- 75 
provements as adapted for operation in con 
nection with all essential features of a suita 
ble grain-binding machine. 
The grain is forced or delivered under press 
ure to a binding-receptacle at A and against 8o 
the binding material a, the end of which is 
properly held, as at af, in suitable position rela 
tively to knotting and severing mechanism. 
Abinder-arm, A', is fixed, as by a sleeve, b, 
and set-screw, to a rock-shaft, B, mounted to 85 
oscillate in a long bearing or tubular frame 
support, B, connecting at one end with the 
standard or upright portion B of the frame. 
The binding material is supplied under suit 
able tension to the binder-arm, being first 90 
passed through a rocking cord-clasper or OS 
cillating arm for holding and releasing the 
binding material, to be fully described farther 
on. The binding material shown as employed 
in this instance is cord; but wire may, if pre- 95 
ferred, be employed in accordance with my in 
vention in connection with any suitable mech 
anism for supplying it under tension and for 
twisting and severing the band ends. 
To all chon it may concern: 
ledo, in the county of Lucas and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve. 
5 ments in Grain-Binders, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
in grain-binders of the class in which binding 
mechanism is automatically thrown in action 
to by the strain upon the binding material of the 
grain as it is accumulated in gavels. 
My invention also relates to certain improve 
ments in mechanism for supplying the binding 
material under tension. 
I5 The subject-matter deemed novel will here. 
inafter be distinctly claimed. 
The accompanying drawings show a suita 
ble organization of mechanism in accordance 
with my invention especially adapted for use 
20 in connection with a grain-binder such in 
many features of construction, as shown and 
described in my application for United States 
Letters Patent filed April 23, 1881, and en 
titled Improvements in Grain-Binding Mech 
Only such parts of a fully-organized 
grain-binding machine are shown as are deemed 
requisite to an adequate illustration of the 
preferred adaptation of the various improve 
ments constituting my invention. 
3o My improvements, in whole or in part, may 
be ingrafted upon machines differing more or 
less from that shown in my above-mentioned 
application. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, with some parts 
35 broken away and others in section, the posi 
tions in which the parts are shown being those 
occupied while the grain is accumulating 
against the binding material as it is supplied 
under tension in limited quantity. Fig. 2 is a 
4o plan or top view, with parts in section. Fig. 
3 is a view partly in side elevation and partly 
in section on the line 33 of Fig. 2, the parts 
shown being represented in the positions oc 
cupied by them shortly after the binding mech 
45 anism has been set in motion and the binder 
arm commenced its descent. Fig. 4 is a view 
in elevation of the rock-shaft and attachments 
thereof, by the actuations of which the bind. 
ing mechanism is thrown into operation by 
So strain on the binding material. Fig. 5 is a 
M. 
The oscillating cord-clasper or rocking arm IQo 
261,590 
5 
O 
IS 
2 5 
35 
45 
So 
55 
for holding and releasing the binding mate. 
rial, and by the range of movement allowed 
which the sizes of gavels may be determined, 
is, as in this instance shown, constructed and 
adapted for operation in connection with 
mechanism for throwing the binding mechan 
ism into and out of action, as now to be ex 
plained. 
The rocking arm proper, main member, or 
lever C of the clasper is fixedly connected at 
itsinner or heel end to arock-shaft, D, arranged 
close to and parallel with the binder-arm rock 
shaft B. 
An angular bracket, C', serves to connect 
the clasper-lever and rock-shaft D, the bracket 
being provided at one end with a sleeve or 
socket, by which it may be secured in suitable 
way, as by a set-screw, to the inner end of the 
rock-shaft, and the lever C being secured by a 
bolt in a seat in the other end of the bracket 
so as to project at a right angle to the rock 
shaft and in or about the vertical plane of the 
binder-arm A'. 
The rock-shaft D is mounted near its ends so 
as to oscillate in bearings shown as formed by 
lugs or brackets did of the tubular frame-sup 
port B. 
A torsional spring, D', secured at one end to 
the rock-shaft D and at the other to the sup 
porting-lug d', acts constantly with a tendency 
to oscillate the rock-shaft in a direction such as 
to rock the upper end of the lever Caway from 
the binder-arm and into the position in which 
it is represented in Figs. 2 and 3, or else to 
hold the lever in such position. 
A pendent trip-arm or tappet-rod, D, is 
loosely supported upon the outer end of the 
rock-shaftD, and normally rests near its lower 
end against or close to a stop, d, on the frame B. 
A downwardly-projecting perforated bracket 
or segment, E, is fixedly attached to the rock 
shaft D between its bearing d and the arm ID'. 
A stud or short pin, e, is secured in any one 
of the series of holes e' in the bracket E by 
means of a nut fitted to the reduced threaded 
end of the pin which passes through the se 
lected hole. This pin projects by the side of 
and beyond the tappet D', and serves to im 
part to it an oscillating movement with the 
rock-shaft D during a portion of the movement 
of this rock-shaft, for a purpose farther on to 
be explained. 
The movement of oscillation of the rock-shaft 
D in one direction-that in which it is moved 
by the spring D'-is limited by the contact of 
the perforated bracket E with the under side of 
the binder-arm-supporting tube B', and move. 
ment of the rock-shaft in the opposite direc 
tion is positively imparted by the strain on the 
binding material as it is drawn from the source 
of supply by the pressure of the grain in the 
receptacle upon the binding material. That 
this movement of the rock-sihaft may be given 
it with certainty to the desired extent (accord 
ing to the amount of grain to be accumulated 
against the binding material to form a gavel) 
and the rock-shaft then be left free to assume 
its normal position as acted upon by its spring, 
the binding material is automatically clamped 
and released at the outer end of the rocking 
clasper by the actuations of a novable member 
of the clasper, which movable member is show in 
as formed by an endwise-sliding clamping-rod, 
F, guided inits movements relatively to the fixed 
main member C of the clasper by a perforated 
lug, f, on the main member and a guide-open 
ing, f', in the bracket C. The outer end of 
the fixed member or lever C of the rocking 
clasper is forked or otherwise suitably re 
cessed, and the upper end of the rod Fis hooked 
or bent to form a lateral projection, f', enter 
ing the space between the forks of the clasper 
lever. These forks are perforated above the 
bottom of the recess formed between them, 
and the cord or other binding material passes 
through these openings. The bent end of the 
movable or clamping section of the clasper 
crosses above the cord. A spring, G, secured 
at one end to the shank of the clamp and bear. 
ing at its opposite end against the guide-lug 
f, acts constantly with a tendency either to 
draw down the clamp so as to clasp the cord 
by its hook f', or to hold the clamp-hook down 
so as to press the cord against the bottom and 
sides of the recess between the forks of the 
clasper-lever and securely hold the cord, so 
that strain upon the cord sufficient to over 
come the force of the spring D' of the rock 
shaft D will rock this lever at its outer end, 
at the point where it engages the cord, a dis 
tance determined by the amount of cord drawn 
out or supplied under tension to the binder-arm. 
The clamp-rod F is bent or otherwise formed 
at its lower end, g, so as to present a sufi 
ciently wide surface to insure the engagement 
therewith of an automatically-actuated tripper, 
which, as hereinafter will fully be explained, 
soon after the commencement of movement by 
the binder-arm, lifts the rod Fagainst the ac 
tion of its spring and frees the cord from the 
clamp of the rocking clasper, thus allowing 
the rock-shaft D to be oscillated by its spring, 
and also admitting of the passage of the bind 
ing material under tension to the binder-arm 
for encompassing and securing a gavel. 
As binding mechanism suitably organized 
to be thrown into operation by tripping and 
clutch mechanism connected with and actu 
ated by the rocking movements of the cord 
clasping lever is shown and described in my 
before-mentioned application, description is 
herein given only of those features of suitable 
clutch mechanism and its controlling or trip. 
ping mechanism actuated by the cord-clasper, 
through or by way of the rock-shaft and its 
attachments, explanation of the construction 
and operation of which will be sufficient to 
slow how the binding mechanism is thrown 
into and out of action so as to operate as fully 
explained in my aforesaid application. 
As the grain, when packed into the binding 
receptacle against the cord a, presses against 
75 
95 
CO 
fo5 
O 
I 15 
I 25 
26,590 
8 
the cord with force sufficient to draw it through 
ing into action of the binding mechanism, the 
the binder-arm from the source of supply and 
cord is released from the rocking clasper and 
positively rock the cord-clasper (by which the 
left free to be supplied under tension in any 
cord is now firmly held) and its shaft D, the 
desired quantity by the action of a rocking 
tripping-arm or tappet ID will sooner or later 
tripper, Li, which, as in this instance shown, 
(according to the amount of movement of the 
is actuated by a heel attachment of the binder 
bracket E required to bring the pine against 
arm and formed by a curved arm pivoted at 
the tappet) be set in motion and caused to 
its inner end to a lug or bracket, M, on the 
swing with the rock-shaft. 
frame-tube B', by means of a socket, l, a thim. 
ble or bushing, In, fitted therein, and a headed 
When the desired amount of cord has been 
supplied, as pressed upon by the accumulating 
bolt, m', passing through said thimble and 
grain, to give the requisite a mount of move 
bracket M, and provided with a washer and 
ment to the clasper-lever to rock the shaft D 
nut. The tripper is curved and crosses the 
frame-tube B', resting in its normal position 
to a sufficient extent to cause the tappet to 
actuate the clutch-tripping mechanism to start 
upon this tube. The outer end or toe, l, of 
the binding mechanism, the tappet strikes 
the tripper, when not in action, rests beneath 
against an arm or heel projection, H', of a 
and clear of the lower end, g, of the sliding 
tripping-lever, H, and vibrates this lever on 
clamp of the cord-clasper. The tripper is pro 
a pivot, h, by which it is supported in the 
vided with a laterally and downwardly pro 
frame B. The outer bent or cateh end, h', of jecting heel attachment or tappet-like arm, n, 
this lever is thus rocked against the pressure 
to be operated upon by the heel attachment of 
of a spring, l', away from a stud, i, at one end 
the rocking binder-arm, consisting of a seg 
of a lever, I, pivoted at if on the inner face of 
mental flange or curved guide, N, concentric 
an intermittingly - actuated gear - wheel, J. 
with the axis of the binder-arm and on that 
The opposite end of this lever I engages a stud 
side of its heel next the tripper. This guide 
which passes through a slot in the gear-wheel, 
N is formed with a lip, N', at its lower end, or 
and is fixed on a spring-actuated clutch-bolt or 
where it first begins to act upon the tappet in, 
adjustable tooth, J, mounted on the outer 
as soon to be explained. This lip inclines out 
face of the gear-wheel, so that it may be slid 
ward or away from the axis of the binder-arm. 
endlwise in radial guides thereon. When free 
An inclined ended rib or projection, in', is also 
to move by the release of the lever I, as above 
provided upon the binder-arm heel near the 
explained, this clutch-bolt is acted upon by its 
lip N. 
springi, and is thus thrust forward to engage 
From the above description it will be under 
one of two spurs or teeth, k k, projecting from 
stood that upon the commencement of the down 
the outer face of a continuously-rotating driv 
ward movement of the binder-arm the tappet 
ing-gear, K. 
in will be struck by the incline or lip N and 
Sufficient motion is communicated to the 
directed inside the guide. N, thus rocking the 
normally stationary gear J by the engagement 
tripper upward at its nose to bear against the 
of its clutch-bolt with the gear K to bring the 
lower end of the clamp-rod F, and by positive 
pressure move this rod upward against the 
circumferential teeth of the two gears into con 
action of its spring to release the cord from the 
tact, and thus at each action a complete revo 
lution is imparted to the gear-wheel J. 
clamp formed by the upper end of the rod IF 
When the gear-wheel J is at rest its tooth 
and the forks of the clasper-lever C. 
less portion k is opposite the driving-gear K. 
It should be noticed that the end g of the 
clamp-rod, when elevated by the tripper, is in 
The above-described gears J K, the clutch 
mechanism thereof, and the tripping mechan 
line with the axis of the rock-shaft D, thus 
preventing cramping or interference with the 
ism by which the gears are thrown into mesh 
by actuations of the clutch mechanism are all 
oscillating movement of the rock-shaft by the 
the same as or substantially correspond with 
action of its spring. 
features more clearly shown and fully described 
The cord is left unclamped by the rocking 
in my above-mentioned application, and, as 
clasper-lever C until by the upward movement 
shown and described in said application, a 
of the binder-arm the tappet of the tripper I 
is released by the guideway N. N. Should not 
fixed can on the frame B serves to retract 
the tripper fall by its own weight or yield to 
the clutch-bolt J by acting on its lever I, and 
leaves this bolt dogged by the catch of the 
the pressure of the spring G of the clamp, it 
tripping-lever H at the end of a revolution of 
will be positively rocked downward into its 
the gear-wheel J. 
normal position by the action of the incline m' 
The binder-arm is rocked and controlled by 
on the binder-arm heel, as will readily be un 
mechanism connected with and actuated by 
derstood. 
the gear-wheel J, as shown and described in 
. The binding material a is supplied from a 
my aforesaid application, and consisting in 
ball, O, (or, if preferred, from a spool, as usual,) 
located by preference in a box, O', provided 
part of a sector-crank, K', and pitman K', 
Fig. 1, and this wheel serves also, as fully set 
with a hinged door and suitable fastening de 
forth in said application, to operate all other 
vice, and supported upon an arm, O', bolted 
parts of the binding mechalnism proper. 
to the tubular frame B. The desired tension 
After the binder-arm starts, upon the throw. is exerted upon the cord as drawn from the 
w 
- 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
OC 
IO5 
..IO 
IIS 
I 25 
261,590 
o 
75 
 
o 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
box by the action upon the cord of two rollers, 
PP, between which it is passed and compressed 
to exert friction upon it after being threaded 
through a guide slot or eye in a fixed cross 
bar or bracket-arm, p, which prevents the cord 
from slipping along the rollers or off them at 
their ends. 
One of the rollers is mounted to 
rotate in fixed bearings, and the other is mount 
ed in spring-actuated bearings, so that it may 
be held against the cord with sufficient force to 
bear it against the fixed roller with the press 
ure desired to produce that amount of frictional 
resistance to the passage of the cord between 
the rollers which will give the tension required. 
In Figs, 1, 2, and 5 the spring - actuated or 
yielding roller is shown as mounted in box 
lbearings p' p', movable in suitable guideways 
toward or away from the fixedly-supported 
roller, and acted upon by the free ends of up 
right spring-arms q q., fixedly attached at their 
lower ends to the inside of the box O'. The 
spring-arms are connected at a suitable distance 
above their lower fixed ends by a cross-bar, Q, 
which is acted upon by a set-screw, Q', so that 
the spring-arms inay becaused to yieldingly 
bear with the desired pressure upon the roller 
boxes. The cord passes from the box through 
the slot o' to the rocking clasper 
and binder 
arm, as before explained. 
Figs. 7 and S show a modification of the 
tension apparatus, coiled springs SS being 
employed to act upon the adjustable roller in 
stead of the plate springs or arms gg, before 
described. The set-screw and cross-bar serve 
to adjust the pressure upon the Springs, and 
so regulate the grip upon the cord in a man 
ner readily understood. 
The above-described tension apparatus, when 
suitably adjusted to cause the desired bite upon 
the cord, will obviously produce a practically 
uniform tension upon the cord, regardless of 
the size or weight of the ball of cord or the 
amount of cord which may be wound upon the 
spool, when a spool is employed. 
It will further be obvious that the convex 
rolling surfaces between which the cord passes 
will not cut or injuriously abrade the cord as 
angular or broad bearing-surfaces would, and 
that the rollers will readily accommodate in 
equalities in the cord. 
It should be noticed that the strain exerted 
by the grain upon the binding material is posi 
tively imparted to the starting mechanism, as 
the binding material is firmly gripped by the 
clasper during the accumulation of the grain. 
I thus avoid irregular work or uncertainty of 
action, such as occasioned by the slip of the 
cord around the starting - pulleys heretofore 
employed. 
I am further enabled by means of my in 
provements to cause the binding material to 
act upon the starting mechanism with any re 
quired force by making the clasper of the 
proper length to exert the leverage desired, 
and this without crowding or interference with 
other parts. 
I do not broadly claim mechanism set in 
motion by the strain exerted upon the binding 
material by the accumulating grain and serv 
ing to start binding devices; nor do I broadly 
claim the combination of starting mechanism 
actuated by the strain produced upon the bind 
ing material and binding mechanism thrown in 
to action by the starting mechanism and auto 
matically thrown out of action after a bundle is 
bound; nor do I broadly claim such starting 
mechanism when adjustable to operate in such 
manner that the binding mechanism may be 
thrown into action by the accumulation against 
the binding material of a greater or less amount 
of grain, so that gavels of varying sizes may be 
bound; nor do I broadly claim such starting 
mechanism when adapted to release the binding 
material or allow it to be freely supplied after 
the binding mechanism is thrown into action; 
nor do I unqualifiedly claim a tension device 
consisting of the combination of a fixedly-sup 
ported roller and a movable spring-actuated 
roller, as all of said mechanisms and combi 
nations, unless properly restricted, are older 
than my improvements hereinafter claimed. 
I do not, however, wish to be understood as 
confining my invention to mere details, either 
of construction of parts or arrangements of 
devices, as hereinbeforeparticularly described; 
nor as limiting my improvements in starting 
mechanism to use in connection with an organi 
zation of devices, such only as serving to act 
uate the particular binding 
mcchanism de 
scribed. 
I claim as of my own invention 
1. A clasper clamping the binding material 
during the accumulation of the grain to form 
a gavel, and positively actuated by the pull of 
the binding material as it is strained by the 
pressure of the grain to throw binding mech 
anism into action with certainty when a suf. 
ficient quantity of grain has been accumulated 
to form the gavel, substantially as hereinbe 
fore set forth. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of apparatus for supplying 
the binding material, a receptacle in which 
the grain is accumulated under pressure against 
the binding material, and a clasper gripping 
the binding material and positively actuated 
by the pull of the binding material as strained 
by the pressure of the accumulating grain to 
throw binding mechanism into action, and au 
tomatically actuated to release the binding 
material and leave it free to be supplied under 
tension to secure the bundle. 
3. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a receptacle in which the 
grain is accumulated under pressure against 
the binding material, a binder-arm from which 
the binding material passes under tension to 
the receptacle, an oscillating clasper clamping 
the binding material before its passage to the 
receptacle by way of the binder-arm and act 
luated by the strain exerted upon it by the 
binding material to throw binding mechanism 
99 
95 
OO 
d 
IIS 
I25 
I 30 
261,590 
5 
into action upon the accumulation of a gavel, 
and tripping mechanism for releasing the bind. 
ing material from the clasper after the start 
ing of the binding mechanism, for the purpose 
described. 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a receptacle in which the 
grain is accumulateds under pressure against 
the binding material, a binder-arm from which 
the binding material passes under tension to 
the receptacle, an oscillating clasper clamping 
the binding material before its passage to the 
receptacle by way of the binder-arm and act 
uated by the strain exerted upon it by the 
binding material to throw binding mechan 
ism into action upon the accumulation of a 
gavel, and mechanism by which to vary the 
amount of movement which is required to be 
imparted to the clasper to start the binding 
mechanism, for the purpose described. 
5. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a clasper clamping the 
binding material and rocked in one direction 
by the pull of the binding material as it is 
strained by the pressure of the grain, a rock 
shaft with which the clasper is automatically 
rocked in the opposite direction when the bind 
ing material is released, a binder-arm, and 
tripping mechanism actuated upon the move 
ment of the binder-arm to release the binding 
material from the clamp of the clasper, for the 
purpose described. 
6. The combination of the clasper, the rock 
shaft to which it is secured, the spring acting 
upon the rock-shaft, the tripper acting on the 
clasper-clamp, and the binder-arm acting by 
its heel attachment upon the tripper, substan 
tially as and for the purpose hereinbefore set 
forth. 
7. The combination of the binder-arm, its 
heel attachment provided with the guideway, 
the tripper provided with the tappet actuated 
by said guideway, the clasper, and the spring 
actuated clamp of the clasper acted upon by 
the tripper, substantially as and for the pur 
pose hereinbefore set forth. 
8. The combination of the rocking binder 
arm, its heel attachment provided with the 
guideway, the tripper, its tappet acted upon 
by said guideway, the clasper, its spring-actu 
ated clamp acted upon by the tripper-nose, 
the rock-shaft to which the clasper is secured, 
the spring acting on the rock-shaft, and the 
trip arm or tappet on the rock-shaft acting up 
on tripping mechanism to throw the binding 
mechanism into action. 
9. The binder-arm having the heel attach 
ment provided with the curved guideway hav 
ing the inclined end or lip N', substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
10. The combination of the tripper and the 
binder-arm having the guideway and the in 
clined rib or projection n/, substantially as and 
for the purpose hereinbefore set forth. 
11. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the rocking clasper 
clamping the binding material and actuated by 
the strain on the binding material to rock it 
positively in one direction, the rock-shaft up 
on which the clasper is mounted, the spring 
acting on the rock-shaft to rock it in the di 
rection opposite to that in which it is rocked 
by the movementimparted to it by the clasper, 
the trip-arm or tappet-rod on the rock-shaft 
acting upon tripping mechanism by which 
clutch mechanism for throwing binding mech 
anism into action is operated, and means by 
Which to vary the amount of movement re 
quired to be imparted to the clasper to cause 
the tappet-rod to actuate the tripping mech 
anism, for the purpose described. 
12. The combination of the rocking clasper 
clamping the binding material, its rock-shaft, 
the perforated bracket on the rock-shaft, the 
trip-arm or tappet-rod loosely mounted on the 
rock-shaft, and the adjustable stud of the 
bracket for acting on the tappet-rod, substan 
E. as and for the purpose hereinbefore set 
orth. 
13. The combination of the cord-holding box, 
the rollers between which the cord passes, 
the springs acting upon one of said rollers, the 
bracket-arm or guide-bar through an eye in 
which the cord is threaded before being passed 
between the rollers, and the binder-arm, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose hereinbefore 
set forth. 
14. The combination of the roller mounted 
to rotate in fixed bearings, the roller mounted 
to rotate in sliding bearings, the springs act 
ing on said sliding bearings, the cross-bar Con 
necting the springs, the set-screw acting on 
said cross-bar, and the cord-guide beneath the 
rollers, as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name. 
JOEIN. S. DAVIS. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE W. BUMPHREY, 
MAGGIE E. HUMPHREY. 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
SS 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261690.txt	- - 
B. D. EATON, 
FASTENING FOR GLOVES, &c. 
Patented July 25, 1882. 
 
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
... 
No. 261,690. 
 
A- 
is 
3. A hit El 
Q list 
S. 
- 1 
M 
w 
- 
- 
- - - - - 
a 
- - 1 
- - 
- 
- 
- 
m 
Cls 
a 
WITWESSES 
- 
24.2% 
- za. 62-7% 
/... ."W22. 
/h)-c a? (2. '4. 
A1ttorney, 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN D. EATON, OF JOHNSTOWN, NEW YORK. 
FASTENING FOR GLOVES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,690, dated July 25, 1882. 
Application filed May 8, 1882. (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
- 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
plates are separated still farther the bar c 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN D. EATON, a 
passes above the pina, and the tension of the 
citizen of the United States, residing at Johns 
spring will then be exerted to keep the plates 
town, in the county of Fulton and State of . 
apart. When the plates are brought together 
New York, have invented certain new and use. the tension of the spring exerts itself in the 
ful Improvements in Fastenings for Gloves 
opposite direction until the bar passes the pin 
and Mittens, of which the following is a speci 
a, when the spring in straightening itself draws 
fication, reference being had therein to the ac 
the plates together. 
companying drawings. 
The fastener is attached to the glove in the 
My invention relates to glove fasteners; and 
ordinary manner, as shown in Fig. 1 of the 
it consists in the construction and arrangement 
drawings. 
of its several parts, as will be hereinafter fully 
The advantages I secure by the use of the 
set forth, and pointed out in the claim. 
spring and connecting-bar are that there being 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view of a 
but little friction between the parts they will 
glove, showing my fastener applied to it. Fig. 
not wear away, as is the case where a cam ac 
2 is a perspective view of the fastener, and 
tion is employed, and that by reason of the 
Fig. 3 a front elevation of the sanae. 
direct leverage secured upon the plates by the 
AA are narrow metal plates curved to con 
attachment of the spring and bar above the 
form to the outline of the wrist. They are 
pivoted point of the plates the action of the 
hinged together at one end by the pivot-pin 
device is strong and quick. 
a, and the free ends have cut through them 
suitable holes by which the fastener is attached 
to the glove. 
b is a steel spring. It is secured to one of 
the plates A near its free. end, and extends 
along said plate to a point slightly above the 
pin a, as shown. Pivoted to the end of the 
spring is a bar, c. It extends across, slightly 
above the pin a, and is pivoted to the other 
plate. 
In the operation of the fastener, when the 
free ends of the plates A are drawn apart the 
bar 0 will draw the spring binwardly and cause 
the tension to be brought upon it. As the 
What I claim is 
The plates A, pivoted together at a, the 
spring b, secured to one of said plates and ex 
tending to a point slightly above the pivotal 
point a, and the bar c, pivoted to the spring 
and extended across above the point a, and piv 
oted to the opposite plate, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
BENJAMIN D, EATON, 
JAMES M. DUDLEY, 
HARWOOD DUDLEY. 
Witnesses: 
35 
4C) 
45 
So 
55 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261790.txt	(No Model.) 
E, THOMSON, 
ELECTRIC ARC AMP, 
3 Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 261,790, 
Patented July 25, 1882, 
o 
Fig.1. 
\ . 
E 
(E 
Yo 
w 
YSLE 
Q 
Q 
frth A 
KSE: 
Six 
E 
EB 
  
s 
II - N } 
S2 
Cy 
e 
sle C II 
SS2. 
Y. 2 
HIII 
R s 
 
Niverse 
2%z- 
\weve 
60.6%. 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 261,790, 
E, THOMSON, 
ELECTRICARO LAMP, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 25, 1882, 
(No Model.) 
E, THOMSON. 
ELECTRO ARO LAMP, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
 
 
New w a s wa. 
2.2%-e- 
Va. v wa WVya 
82.3. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIHU THOMSON, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
AMERICAN ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRC - A R C LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,790, dated July 25, 1882. 
Application filed December 17, 1880. 
(No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELIHU THOMSON, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at New Brit 
ain, county of Hartford, State of Connecticut, 
5 have invented certain Improvements in Elec 
tric-Arc Lamps, of which the following is a de 
scription. 
My invention relates to that class of electric 
lamps which may be termed drop and lift,' 
Io in which a readjustment of the position of the 
carbon electrodes takes place at intervals dur 
ing burning by a fall of the upper electrode 
aid in mediate lift of the same. 
The object of my invention is to obtain in 
I5 such lamps the greatest certainty of operation, 
especially when several of them are used upon 
a single circuit, also to simplify construction 
and to compensate for slight changes in the 
current strength operating them. For this pur 
2O pose I employ chiefly an electro-magnet oper 
ating to lift the upper carbon electrode through 
the agency of a clutch mechanism, to be de 
scribed, a shunt electro - magnet, or magnet 
piaced in a derived circuit around the carbon 
25 electrodes, said shunt-magnet operating to cut 
out the lifting-magnet in accordance with patent 
to Thomson and Elouston, No. 223,646, Janu 
ary 20, 1880; but the novel features embraced 
in the present invention relate to certain means 
3O of compensation applied to both the lifting 
magnet armature and to the shunt-magnet ar 
mature, by means of which an automatic adap 
tation to varied current strength is secured, a 
safety magnetic attachment brought into ac 
35 tion to cause the carbon electrodes to descend 
into contact in case of the failure of the ordi 
nary operation of feeding, and minor improve 
ment in the disposition of the parts. 
Figure 1, Sheet I, shows a side elevation of 
4o the lamp with the working parts uncovered, 
as shown. Fig. 2, Sheet I, is a sectional view 
of the adjustable clutch used in the operation 
of lifting the upper carbon electrode. Fig. 3, 
Sheet II, is a side view, intended to show more 
45 distinctly the connections used in Fig. 1, and 
a minor modification in the arrangement of 
parts. Fig. 4, Sheet II, is a side elevation of 
the lower-carbon-electrode holder and clamp 
ing device. Fig. 5, Sheet II, is a view of the 
5o removable clamp for fastening the lower-car 
bon holder to the base of the lamp, also shown 
in Fig. 4. Fig. 5 shows the removable clamp 
and the flange or plate upon which it locks 
detached. Fig. 6, Sheet III, is a sectional view 
of the lifting-magnet M, Fig. 1, showing the ar 
rangement of its parts. Figs. 7, 8, and 9, Sheet 
III, show a form of contact mechanism for cut 
ting out or short-circuiting the lifting-magnet 
M, Fig. 1, and corresponds to the contacts pq, 
as hereinafter described. Fig. 10 shows the 
application of what I term a safety-magnet, 
which operates on the failure of the ordinary 
regulation to force down or jar the electrodes 
into contact, and thus prevent a break in the 
circuit caused by abnormal arc length. 
I will now proceed to describe my inven 
tion in detail. . 
In Fig. 1 EE' are two carbon electrodes in 
juxtaposition, the rod R being that by which 
the upper, E, is supported. Upon this rod is 
placed an adjustable self-locking clutch, C, the 
detailed construction of which is described in 
connection with Fig. 2. Two parallel rods, G. 
G, connect the jaws of the clutch with a mova 
ble armature, N, placed under the base-plate 
D D, and arranged to be attracted by the elec 
tro-magnet M, through whose coils the direct 
current operating the lamp passes. Fig. 6 
shows in section the form preferably given to 
this magnet, and which will be described. 
Springs of brass or steel, BB, attached to the 
armature N, and bent at the ends into a curve, 
concave upward, as shown, serve to give to 
the armature N an elastic seating against the 
magnet M when attracted by it. 
K, Fig. 1, is one leg of an electro-magnet, 
placed in a derived circuit around the elec 
trodes E. E", the other leg being removed to 
show the clutch C in position. The shunt 
magnet K attracts its armature L whenever 
the arc resistance increases, thus closing the 
contact p q, which short-circuits the lifting 
magnet M, and said magnet K operates as in 
patent to Thomson and Houston, above re 
ferred to. The contact-point p is upon a spring 
attached to the armature-lever, while the con 
tact q is stationary, being attached in any 
suitable manner to the frame-work of the lamp. 
The circuits through the magnet K, the lift 
ing-magnets, and the shunt are substantially. 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
26,290 
25 
O 
75 
By the action of the current the magnet M 
as indicated in Fig. 3, where the current en 
attracts its armature N to a position more or 
tering at post a divides, one portion passing 
through the derived-circuit magnet Kandout less near to it, according the current strength, 7o 
at post y, the other or principal portion going this variability being imparted by the curved 
5 to the lifting electro-magnet M, and through springs BB, yielding more orless readily. The . 
upward motion of the armature N and rods G 
the frame of the lamp to the upper carbon, 
G, attached thereto, locks the clutch Cupon the 
where in passing to the lower carbon it forms 
rod R and lifts it, thus establishing the arc be 
the arc, thence to the insulated supports for 
tween the carbons. The carbons continue sep 
the lower carbon and to the postly, where it 
arated until by their consumption the resist 
joins the derived circuit passing through K. 
ance of the arc has increased sufficiently to 
The shunt-circuit for electro-magnet M, which 
bring the shunt-magnet into action, which, at 
is closed by p q, passes to the armature-lever 
tracting its armature L, closes the contact p q, 
L, contact p to contact q, which is supported 
cuts out the lifting-magnetM, drops the clutch C 
by the frame of the lamp where it rejoins the 
and armature N, frees the rod R., (the clutch C 
principal circuit and passes through the car 
striking the extension of M below it, its jaws 
bons, and so to the post gy in the manner just 
being opened by a continued descent of the 
described. The stop V limits the play of the 
rods G. G.) the carbons approach, lessen the 
armature L, which armature is supported upon 
arc resistance, render inactive the shunt K, 
a lever pivoted at I, and insulated from the 
the spring S opens the contact p q, and the 
other parts of the lamp. A coiled spring, S, 
current, again traversing the magnet M, relocks 
is attached to the shunt - lever, and acts to 
the clutch, and again holds the carbons apart. 
hold the armature L away from the electro 
This readjustment of the arc length or feed 
magnet K. A small triangular piece of ma 
takes place so quickly that but little effect is 
terial, T, to which one extremity of the slunt 
produced upon the steadiness of the light, The 
spring S is attached, as shown, is free to move 
adjustment of the spring S requires to be such 
around a pivot, as shown, and actuated by a 
that it shall hold the armature L away from 
small pin or lug, Z, moving with the clamp, 
the magnet K with a force increasing as the 
placed upon one of the rods G, so that when 
current in the arc increases, and increasing in 
the armature N rises the spring S is tightened, 
accordance with a change in the length of the 
and, conversely, when the armature N fallis the 
arc produced by increased current independ 
spring S is slackened. 
ently of waste of carbon by consumption. 
Many other devices that shall cause an in 
Since the armature N, elastically held by the 
crease oftension in the retracting-spring Sinac 
springs B B and oscillating with every change 
cordance with the movements of the armature 
of current strength, controls the length of arc 
N may be used in place of that here described. 
between the electrodes by the amount of lift 
One other device for accomplishing the same 
imparted to the clutch C, it is easy to cause 
object is described farther on. In describing 
the elastic force of the spring S to increase or 
the operation of the lamp the action of these 
decreasein accordance withincrease ordecrease 
novel features will be explained. 
of current strength by connecting it indirectly 
FF is the frame of the lamp, and is made 
to the armature N. This is accomplished by 
preferably of brass or cast-iron. 
the piece T, which tightens the spring Swhen 
P is the pillar, supporting the lower elec 
the armature N is lifted and releases said 
trode, E'. 
spring when the armature N is released or 
The current enters at the binding-post X, in 
falls, the clamp serving to communicate mo 
sulated from the frame F, from thence to the 
tion to the piece T from the armature N and 
coils of the magnet M, but branches at O to 
rod G. This feature enables me to adjust a 
the shunt-lever and its contact p, and when 
lamp so that it will operate on any strength of 
and n are closed it continues through in to the 
current within practicable limits. This is due 
metal work of the lamp, to which n is attached, 
to the peculiar action of the springs B B in 
there rejoining the circuit through the lifting. 
conjunction with the shunt-spring S, as de 
magnet in the manner already described with 
scribed. 
relation to Fig. 3. Passing through the coils 
Fig. 2 shows in section the form of clutch 
of the magnet M, it reaches the metal work of 
which I have found to be more certain in its 
the upper part of the lamp, and thence passes 
action, little subject to derangement from dirt, 
down the rod R to the arc between E E to the 
opening freely, and closing securely. There 
pillar P, frame F, and out at the post Y. In 
have been employed in drop and lift lamps 
sulation is interposed at all points where nec 
many forms of clutch; but I have not found 
essary to prevent the current from connecting 
any possessing the advantages of the clutch, 
the posts X and Y, except as described. The 
Fig. 2. The body of the clutch C is made of 
magnet K of high resistance-say three hun 
sufficient weight to cause the jaws J J to drop 
dred ohms-is in a derived circuit around the 
in against the carbon rod R, Fig. 1, when the 
arc, as before described. When the contacts 
outer extremities of said jaws are moved up 
p q are closed by the action of the magnet K 
ward, as by the rods G. G., Fig. 1. The release 
the director lifting magnetMis cut out or short 
of said clutch is effected by its coming into 
circuited. 
contact with any support under it while the 
It will be convenient now to describe the 
outer ends of the jaws JJ are being depressed. 
operation of the lamp as shown in Fig. 1. 
63 
35 
45 
So 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
IIS 
I25 
261,290 
IO 
15 
25 
The body C is made extensible by a movable 
bushing, A, screwed into it or otherwise, and 
serves to adjust the position of release of the 
clutch when used in the position C, Fig. 1. 
By shortening the body of the clutch C the lift 
of the carbon E is increased. By lengthening 
it is diminished. It is essential to the opera 
tion of the clutch C that the jaws be pivoted 
to the body of the clutch between their inner 
and outer ends, and that their inner faces fit 
a portion of the carbon rod R at a position in 
clined, as in Fig. 2, above the body of the 
clutch, the points of contact with the rod be 
ing adjusted so that a secure hold, is effected 
when the clutch is raised, and a free release 
occurs when it is dropped. 
Fig. 3 shows a modified arrangement of 
parts serving the same ends as in Fig. 1. The 
clutch C is lifted by the armature N, attracted 
to the magnet M, which magnet is cut out at 
intervals by the shunt K and contacts p 1, as 
before; but in this case one extremity of the 
spring S is attached to the shunt-lever L at a 
point below the pivot I, and at the other ex 
tremity to a toggle-joint, B' B', one end of 
which is fixed to the lifting mechanism of the 
clutch C, and the other to a fixed pivot, as 
shown. The action of the spring S is thus a 
double one. As before, it serves to hold the 
shunt-magnet armature away from said mag 
net K, and in addition, by the flexing it gives 
to the toggle B'B' or knee-joint, it serves to 
hold the armature N in proper relation to the 
magnetMduring variations of current strength. 
Thus the springs B B, Fig. 1, are dispensed 
with, as also the piece T, Fig. 1, while the ac 
tions and relations of parts are still preserved. 
The peculiar feature of the knee-joint B'B', 
Fig. 3, is that, as the attraction of the armature 
N toward the magnet M increases, the resist 
ance of the spring S is made to increase like 
wise from the gradual straightening of the 
knee-joint as the armature N is drawn toward 
the magnet M. At the same time the straight 
ening occurs the tension of the spring S upon 
the lever L is also increased. Thus the effects, 
as before described in connection with the 
springs B B and S, Fig. 1, are obtained like 
wise by the arrangement shown in Fig. 3. 
At W, Fig. 3, is shown a narrowing of the 
rod R, so that when the carbon electrodes are 
nearly consumed the narrowed portion of the 
rod enters the clutch, which fails to grasp the 
the rod. Hence the electrodes fall together 
and the light is extinguished, thus showing 
that a renewal of the electrodes is needed. The 
same effect is produced by limiting the length 
of the rod R, so that it shall all have passed 
through the clutch C before the carbons are 
totally consumed. This arrangement only dif 
fers from that of patent to Thomson and Hous 
ton, No. 223,646, January 20, 1880, in that a 
self-acting clutch is employed instead of the 
roller-support of said patent, 
Fig. 4 represents the arrangement of the 
lower - carbon holder which I find advanta 
geous. The pillar P has at its upper extremity 
a split-tube, one half being a part of said pillar 
and the other or movable portion being pivoted 
to the end of a lever, H, rocking in an open 
ing in a horizontal plate or similar support, 
and having at its lower end a screw, d. Upon 
placing the lower carbon in the holder a sim 
ple movement of the screw d, imparting motion 
to the lever H, forces the portion a laterally 
against the carbon pencil. When a glass globe 
is used to surround the luminous point or arc 
it is not necessary to remove said globe to re 
plenish the carbon in the lower holder; but 
the clamp is operated below the plate upon 
which said globe rests. This I find to be a 
very convenient device in the use of the lamp. 
As it is desirable to make the pillar P mov 
able sidewise, so as to adjust for exact juxta 
position of the electrodes, and also to make it 
easily removable from the lamp, I accomplish 
both ends by the removable lever-clamp shown 
in Figs. 4, 5, and 5, and designated m. In 
Fig. 4 the pillar P is shown having a cylin 
drical extension, l, through the base of the 
lamp-frame, and which extension does not ex 
actly fit the frame, and is so formed as to have 
locked to it a rocking lever having a bearing 
upon l on opposite sides, while its extremities 
bear upward firmly upon the base of the lamp 
frame. The screw b is used to tighten and 
loosen the lever m and pillar P. By tighten 
ing the screw b the lever in draws the pillar P 
firmly against the part of the lamp-base upon 
which it rests, (indicated by dotted lines.) The 
lever m is constructed as shown in Fig. 5, so 
that a loosening of the screw b and change of 
position of on ninety degrees around the axis 
of the pillar P make the part in readily de 
tachable from said pillar. To this end the ex 
tension l of the base of the pillar P is provided 
with lateral extensions ee ee, Fig. 5, between 
which exist two notches to receive angular 
projections 
from the lever m, which is 
formed, as shown, of a circular ring with dia. 
metrically-opposite lugs, one of which receives 
the fastening-screw b. The angular portions 
v extend inward from the circular ring, and 
are large enough to be caught in the notches 
between ee, as shown, without slipping through 
said notches, at the same time that the lever in 
is free to rock upon them. By loosening the 
parts and turning the ring in through ninety 
degrees, as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 5, the 
projections a come opposite open spaces on 
each side of the ears e. e. e. e, and the ring in 
may now be freely detached from the pillar. 
The letter l represents the lower end of the 
pillar. 
Fig. 6 is a section of the lifting-magnet M, 
Fig. 1, which is shown to consist of a U-shaped 
piece of iron, with an iron tube, M, extending 
downward from its center. Around this iron 
tube are wound the convolutions of insulated 
wire conveying the current. I prefer to sur 
round the tube M, in addition to the wire, by 
a copper tube or other conducting-casing placed 
either outside or inside the wire, as shown at r. 
This casing acts to prevent spark at the con 
- 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
jo 
75 
95 
OO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
- 
1. 
4 
261,290 
O 
IS 
2 o' 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
. 
tact p q, Fig. 1, by absorbing the extra current 
set up in the lifting-coil. I also modify the 
contacts p q to secure the same result at the 
same time that their action in short-circuiting 
the lifting . magnet is made gradual. This 
modification is shown in Figs. 7, 8, and 9. The 
spring p is divided into a comb or brush, the 
several teeth of which come successively into 
contact with the surface q, which consists of 
carbonor other equivalent conducting material, 
according to the varied strength of the current 
actuating the shunt-magnet which closes said 
contact. The contact pol, b'ing a shunt around 
the li?ting-magnet, is thus made to vary its re 
sistance, and the lifting-magnet is gradually 
cut out thereby. This form of the contact p q 
has the property of less sudden action of the 
moving parts of the lamp, and is applicable 
where a gradual and quiet motion is desired. 
The spark at the contact p q is imperceptible. 
Fig. 10 shows the application of what I des. 
ignate as the safety electro magnet, called 
into action to thrust the carbon electrodes to 
gether in any suitable manner when the regu 
lation fails; and I do not limit myself to the 
employment of any particular device to effect 
In patent to Thomson and Bous 
such fall. 
ton, No. 223,646, January 20, 1880, the shunt 
electro-magnet serves this purpose; but I find 
it preferable to call into action an electro 
magnet controlled by the shunt-magnet, so 
that when the arc resistance abnormally in 
creases the shunt-magnet opens a contact, so 
as to divert a portion of the current of the 
lamp through the safety-magnet, whose action. 
upon its armature jars loose the parts of the 
lamp, unlocks the clutch, or forces the ap 
proach of the electrodes, thus avoiding the 
danger of extinction of a series of lamps when 
one only is faulty, at the same time that the 
light is continued in the faulty lamp. When 
the action of the safety-magnet takes place it 
can also be made to occur so suddenly as to 
give an audible signal of the faulty action of 
the lamp, or its armature strike a sounding 
surface for the same purpose. It may, if de 
sired, be operated by a current other than the 
lamp-current; but such an arrangement af. 
fords no special advantage. 
lFig. 10 shows one of the ways in which the 
said safety-magnet may be applied. The ac 
tion of the shunt-magnet K first closes the con 
tact p q, as before described, cutting out the 
lifting-magnet M. If, however, the arc fails to 
be shortened thereby, the shunt increases in 
power, due to increased arc resistance, finally 
opening a contact at t it, which has up to this 
moment been closed. The safety-magnet M! 
is thus called into action, as the contact it is a 
shunt around its coils, and said contact t t hav 
ing been opened by the action of the shunt, 
due to abnormal arc resistance, the current 
passes through M', which attracts its armature 
N. The motion of the armature N then 
strikes the clutch C open and violently jars 
the working parts free. 
I do not claim the application of clutches to 
the carbon rod of an electric lamp, as their use 
is very old. My invention relates to the de 
scribed improvements designed to render the 
action of the drop and lift lamps more steady 
and certain, not withstanding changes in cur 
rent strength and neglect to keep all the parts 
clean and free. 
I do not claim herein, broadly, the combina 
tion, with the derived-circuit electro-magnet, 
of an adjustable resistance automatically con 
trolled thereby, and acting to divert the cur 
rent in varying amounts from the feed-regulat 
lug electro-magnet, as this forms the subject 
of another application filed by me. The claims 
herein which apply to this portion of the lamp 
are limited to a special adjustable resistant de 
vice controlled by the derived-circuit magnet. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with an armature of an 
electro-magnet placed in a derived circuit 
around the electrodes, a retractile spring con 
nected to devices moving automatically in ac 
cordance with changes in the direct current 
operating the lamp. 
2. In an electric lamp, the combination of a 
shunt-controlling electro-magnet in a derived 
circuit around the electrodes, an armature, a 
retractile spring therefor, an armature and 
ali electro-magnet in the direct circuit, and de 
vices acting upon the retractile spring, where 
by its tension is automatically varied in cor 
respondence with the movements of the arma 
ture of the direct-circuit electro-magnet. 
3. In an electric lamp, the combination of a 
lifting-armature, springs serving as an elastic 
seating for the same, a retractile spring con 
nected to the armature which controls the feed 
'according to the consumption of the electrodes, 
and intermediate devices whereby the lifting 
armature automatically varies the tension of 
the retractile spring. 
4. In an electric lamp, a clutch for lifting 
the carbon-carrier to form the arc, consisting 
of a movable body with adjustable portion A, 
in which are pivoted clamping-jaws JJ, whose 
inner clamping ends rest upon the carrier at 
points above the line joining their pivots, 
whereby a moverinent of the outer ends of said 
jaws upward, imparting a downward move 
ment to their inner ends, locks said clutch, 
winile a downward movement of the outer ends. 
reverses said action, substantially as described. 
5. In an electric lamp, the combination, with 
the rectractile spring of an electro-magnet, of 
a compensating knee or toggle joint, BB', sub-; 
stantially as and for the purpose described. . 
6. In an electric lamp, in combination with 
a pillar supporting the lower electrode, a de 
tachable foot-clamp consisting of a lever, m, 
provided with projections v. , screw b, and 
plates e e upon said pillar, cut away at their. 
sides, whereby said clamp-lever may be re 
leased by a partial rotation, substantially as 
described. 
7. The combination, with the derived-cir 
cuit electro-magnet and the electro-magnet 
controlling the feed mechanism, of a derived 
- - 
. 
. 
. . . . . 
. . 
. 
- 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
261,290 
5 
O 
circuit to said feed-regulating electro-magnet, 
a carbon or other resistance-surface in said 
derived circuit, and a slit spring or comb whose 
teeth are arranged to successively make con 
tact with the carbon, as or for the purpose de 
scribed. 
8. In an electric-light regulator, a supple 
mental tripping electro-magnet acting upon 
the clutch devices of the carbon-holder, and 
switch devices controlling the flow of current 
through said electro-magnet, operated by an 
electro-magnet in a derived circuit around the 
carbons, and adjusted to be called into action 
only by an abnormal increase of the current in 
said derived-circuit electro-magnet consequent 
upon an abnormal increase of resistance in the 
C. 
9. In an electric-light regulator, the combi 
nation of a supplemental safety electro-mag 
net acting upon the clutch devices of the car. 
bon-feeding mechanism to trip the same, switch 
devices controlling the flow of current through 
said electro-magnet, and devices operating the 
switch and adjusted to be called into action 
only by an abnormal increase of the arc re 
sistance, substantially as described. 
10. In an electric-light regulator, a supple 
mental tripping electro-magnet whose termi 
nals are connected to the main circuit, in com 
bination with a normally-closed shunt-circuit, 
including contact-points under the control of 
an electro-magnet in a derived circuit around 
the carbons, substantially as described. 
25 
ELIHU THOMSON. 
Witnesses: 
G. W. HART, 
E. W. RICE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261890.txt	(No Model.) 
J. WILSON. 
STUMP EXTRACTOR, 
No. 261,890. 
 
Patented Aug. 1, 1882, - 
VV27 erae, 
- 
 
772. 
e-zz 26 
N. PEERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
 
12 or sy. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB WILSON, OF ST. CEIARLEs, MICEIGAN. 
STUMP-EXTRACTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,890, dated August 1, 1882. 
Application filed April 14, 1882. (No model.) 
?lo all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JACOB WILSON, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at St. Charles, 
in the county of Saginaw and State of Michi. 
gan, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Hoisting Mechanism Especially 
Adapted to the Removal of Tree-Stumps; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention consists of an improved mech 
anism for pulling stumps. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a view in perspective of 
my improved device; Fig. 2, a detached view, 
to be hereinafter referred to: 
A A' A' is a tripod-frame adapted to be set 
over the stump which it is desired to pull. To 
the upper end of the leg A, and on the under 
surface, is bolted a piece of iron, a, provided 
at its lower.end with an eye, in which is sus 
pended the U-shaped linka'. On this link are 
two movable rings, a, adapted to receive the 
upper ends of detachable legs A' A', one on 
each side of the leg A. The legs A' A' are 
connected by a horizontal bar, A', which rests 
on the ground. The leg A is also supported 
by a horizontal bar, A. The legs A' A' are 
connected with the leg. A by horizontal braces 
A. The ground-bars A' A' are adapted to be 
secured to the ground by stakes. At the upper 
end of the leg Aare secured, on the under sur 
face, four eyebolts, b c de, one under the other. 
Fis a link suspended from a pin, which closes 
the ends of the U-shaped link af. This link F 
is provided upon the inner surface of one side 
with a series of hook-shaped notches, f, which 
point upward. Connected with this link F is 
a supplemental link, f", for a purpose herein 
after described. 
Within the tripod-frame is suspended, in a 
substantially horizontal position, the bar G, 
connected at one end to the link F by means 
of a U-shaped link, g, which is pivoted at g' to 
said bar G. The other end of the bar is sus. 
pended from the top of the leg A. by means of 
a rope or chaim, E, which, being secured to the 
eyebolt c, connects a series of pulleys, I, on the 
end of the bar G, with the tackle-blocks B and 
D, which latter are suspended from the eye 
bolts, b and d, respectively. Thence the rope 
or chain passes through the block J, secured to 
the ground-piece A', to any preferred winding 
mechanism. The chain may, however, be taken 
up by hand or horse power. 
The bar G is con 
structed so as to have a vertical central slot, 
as shown in Fig. 2. This can be accomplished 
by constructing the bar of two pieces connected 
at their ends so as to leave a space between 
them, as shown in the drawings, or by making 
a slot in a solid bar. Through this slot passes 
the vertical bar K, one edge of which is pro 
vided with the hook-shaped and downwardly 
turned notches lic, by means of which it can be 
supported upon a pin, g, which passes hori 
Zontally through holes gin the bar G. A series 
of such holes g permit the adjustment of the 
bar Knearer to or farther from the point g', ac 
cordingly as it is desired to increase the power 
of the tackle BD HIJ, or, on the other hand, 
to increase the vertical distance which the bar 
K traverses, and the quickness with which the 
stump is pulled. To the lower end of the bal 
K is attached the chain L, by means of which 
the stump is drawn. 
A means for lowering and hoisting the bar 
K and chain Lindependently of the bar G is 
provided, consisting of the tackle-block E, 
which is suspended from the eyebolt e, the 
block E, which latter is secured to the upper 
end of the bar K, and the rope E, which passes 
through said blocks. This tackle is of light 
construction, as it is only intended, after low 
ering the bar Kenough to secure the chain L. 
to the stump, to pull said chain taut. As soon 
as this is done the ping is passed through one 
of the series of holes g, and placed in one of 
the notches k on the bar K. The pulling of 
the stump is then effected by means of the 
heavy tackle B D H I J. After hoisting that 
end of the bar G to which this tackle is secured 
as far as may be advantageously done the bar 
K is connected at that height with the link F 
by means of the supplemental link f", which is 
placed in the hook-shaped notches of Said bar 
K and link F. The bar G is then lowered, 
leaving the bar Ksuspended by supplemental 
link.f. The pin f is then placed in a lower 
notch on bar K, when the stump may be pulled 
a farther distance by applying the power, and 
so on until it is extracted. As the link g is 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
 
26S, S90 
2 
vertically adjustable in the notches f, the bar the tripod-frame, of the vertically-adjustable 
K and the stump may be raised a distance bar G, provided with the pulleys I, link F, pro 
vided with hooked-shaped notches f, connect 
equal to the length of the series of notches f 
ing links a' g and supplemental link f", bar K, 
plus that of the series k, after having once con 
provided with hooked-shaped notchesk, tackle 
nected the bar K with the stump. 
blocks EE', and chain or rope for connecting 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
the upper end of said bar K with the frame, 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
tackle-blocks B D, pulley J, and a hoisting 
1. In a stump-puller, the combination, with 
rope H, the several parts arranged and oper 
the tripod-frame, of the vertically-adjustable 
ating substantially in the manner as and for 
bar G, provided with the pulleys I, link F, pro 
the purpose herein shown and described. 
vided with hooked-shaped notches f, connected 
to the frame and bar G, bar K, provided with 
presence of two witnesses. 
hooked-shaped notchesk, detachably connected 
to the bar G and to the tackle-block E by chain 
or rope E, and the hoisting rope or chain E, 
substantially as and for the purpose herein 
shown and described. 
2. In a stump-puller, the combination, with 
JAMES EDWARD WHALEY, 
WILLIAM CLARKE CUNNINGHAM, 
JACOB WILSON. 
TO 
IS 
25 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 3o 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US261990.txt	(No Model.) 
- N. A. BOIES 
No. 261,990. 
SAFETY DEVICE FOR HORSES, 
Patented Aug. 1, 1882, 
 
WITNESSEs: 
22a 2% 
at: 
INVENTOR: 
72, (2, 6&zes - 
BY vector de 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NOBLE A. BOIES, OF EAST PALESTINE, OHIO. 
SAFETY DEVICE FOR HORSES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 261,990, dated August 1, 1882. 
Application filed May 25, 1882. (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, NOBLE A.BoIES, of East 
Palestine, in the county of Columbiana and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and Im 
proved Safety Device for Horses, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention is intended to be used with 
kicking horses and horses having other vicious 
habits, with the object to allow them to be 
successfully worked; and it consists of a safety 
bar which is attached to the bridle of the 
horse and to the pole or shaft, as hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawing, wherein my safety device is shown 
as applied to one horse of a team. 
The device may be used with one horse or 
two. 
It consists of a rigid bar, A, of suitable ma 
terial, provided with rings or hooks a a at its 
ends. 
When used with two horses, as shown, one 
end of the bar A is attached to the ring on the 
end of the bit, and the other end of the bar is 
25 hooked to an eye, b, that is attached upon the 
Witnesses: 
). P. ROTHWELL, 
JosEPH BRITTAIN. 
3o. 
pole B at a suitable distance back from the 
forward end. A similar bar is used in con 
lection, with each horse, and the bars serve to 
keep the lhorses in their roper places. 
For a single horse two of the bars. A will be 
used, one at each side, attached to the bit and 
to the holdbacks on the shafts. This allows 
the horse to go forward without hindrance, but 
prevents him from backing, 
With this device applied the horse is pre 
vented from backing. He cannot run away, 
cannot kick when properly reined up, and can 
not nip or bite other horses; and in this man 
ner horses having these and other vicious hab 
its can be worked without trouble. 
Having thus described my invention,I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
The combination, with ordinary harness, of 
the rigid bar A, attached at its forward end to 
the bit-ring and at its rear end to the pole or 45 
shaft, substantially as shown and described. 
NOBLE A, BOIES. 
s 
40 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262091.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 262,091, 
T. A. MYERS 
WATER HEATER AND FILTER, 
Patented Aug. 1, 1882. 
|| 
| 
AG 
g@ 
Sz 
VVITINIEEESIES 
??r?????? INY ENTOR. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lilhographer. Washigton, D.C. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODORE A. MYERS, OF WHEELING, WEST VIRGINIA. 
WATER HEATER AND FILTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 262,091, dated August 1, 1882. 
Application filed December 31, 1881. 
(No model.) 
I. ? 
40 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THEODORIE A. MIYERs, 
a resident of Wheeling, in the county of Ohio 
and State of West Virginia, have invented cer. 
5 tain new and useful Improvements in Water 
Heaters and Filters for Boilers; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement on 
I5 the appatatus shown in Letters Patent No. 
241,5U6, granted May 17, 1881, for condensing 
the exhaust-steam of the engine to heat the 
water, extract the sediment therefrom, and pre 
cipitate the soluble matter held in suspension. 
In the former invention the stand-pipe into 
which the water is pumped from the heater was 
simply an upright tube secured to the side of 
the filtering-vessel by means of bolts and strap 
connections, having a spout at the top passing 
through the side of the same for the admission 
of water. The outlet-pipe, extending from the 
base of the filtering-vessel to the mud-drum, 
was also attached to the outside of the vessel, 
entering the same at a point about half-way 
between the bottom of the vessel and the water 
line. This mode of construction was found to 
be objectionable in several ways, viz: The 
pipes, being exposed to the air, chilled the wa 
ter as it passed through them to a greater or 
less extent, according to the temperature of the 
atmosphere to which they were subjected; sec 
ond, it was not convenient, besides being very 
expensive, to resort to boiler-coverings to pro 
tect the pipes; third, in the construction of the 
apparatus it was found impracticable to con 
nect the stand-pipes with the filter or put the 
apparatus together complete before sending it 
to its destination from danger in transporta 
tion, and from inconvenience in adjusting the 
relative positions of the various parts. To over 
come these difficulties I now construct the fil 
tering-Vessel with the stand-pipe on the inside 
of the same, passing up through the bottom of 
the vessel to within a short distance of the top. 
So The outlet-pipe from the filter to the mud 
35 
drum also passes through the bottom of the 
filter and extends upward in the water about 
half-way to the water-line. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a vertical central section of the filtering-.55 
vessel and an end view of the boilers and steam 
pipe connections. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of 
the same. 
The letter A represents the filtering-vessel; 
B, the stand-pipe, through which the water 6o 
flows into the filtering-vessel. The stand-pipe 
is preferably made an oval shape on the cross 
section at the top, and tapering to a circle at the 
bottom, as shown in Fig. 2, in order that the 
heat of the filtering-vessel can be more readily 65 
imparted to the entire column of water in the 
stand-pipe, and thus increase its temperature 
while passing through the same. The pipe is 
secured to the bottom of the filter by means of 
a screw-thread connection or any other equival. To 
lent manner. The upper end is provided with 
a lip, in the manner of a pitcher, to guide the 
contents practically to the center of the vessel. 
G is a pipe from the pump to the stand-pipe. 
e is a check-valve. 
at at a represent a series of pans for catching 
the water, and by means of the overflow over 
the edges dividing the column of water into a 
series of thin sheets. The pans are disposed 
#???? the stand-pipe in the manner shown in 8o 
ig. 2. 
C is the dutlet-pipe through which the water 
is fed to the boilers after it has been filtered 
and heated to the required temperature. It 
may be secured to the bottom of the vessel by 85 
screw-thread connections or any other well 
??????wn means. b is a stop-valve to regulate the 
OW. 
D is a steam - pipe from boilers, having a 
stop-valve, c. 
E is the boiler; F, mud-drum; H, steam 
drum. 
By this mode of construction I utilize the 
heat of the steam and water in the filter to 
maintain and increase the temperature of the 
water while passing through the stand-pipe 
into the filtering-vessel, and while it is passing 
from there through the outlet-pipeinto the mud 
drum. The pipes, being on the inside, are not 
exposed to the air, and consequently do not I oo 
95 
9o 
75 
 
2 
262,09. 
by the shelves to admit water to a point above 
the said shelves, a live-steam pipe, D, entering 
the shell above the perforated distributer, and 
a discharge-pipe. 
2. In a feed-water heater constructed sub 
stantially as described, the stand-pipe having 
the tubular elliptical upper portion tapering 
to a cylindrical section at the lower end. 
In testimony that I do claim the foregoing 
as my own I hereunto affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
20 
25 
THEODORE A. MYERs. 
Witnesses: 
H. E. FICKEz, 
GEO. K. STORM. 
have to be covered to prevent the consequent 
decrease in temperature. Another advantage 
is that the filter can be finished entire with the 
stand-pipe and outlet-pipe before it leaves the 
shop. The pipes, being inclosed in the vessel, 
are not liable to damage in transportation, and 
the convenience in setting up the apparatus and 
making the attachments is at once obvious to 
those versed in the art. 
Ilaving described my invention, what I claim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States, is 
1. The described feed-water heater, consist 
ing of a cylindrical shell, having an upper per 
forated distributer, series of shallow pans hav 
ing overflow-openings, a stand-pipe surrounded 
1 O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262191.txt	(No Model.) 
H. WAGNER, 
DEWICE FOR TEACHING ARTHMETIC, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
N. PEERS, Photo-lithograpier. Washington., c. 
(No Model.) 
H. WAGNER, 
w 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
DEWICE FOR TEACHING ARITHMETIC, 
- 
No. 262,191, 
Patented Aug. l. l882, 
 
 
 
WITNESSES; 
INVENTOR 
ATFORNEY.5 
perers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HER MANN VV AGN ER, O F E L I Z A B E 'T EH, N E VV J IEFR S E Y. 
DEV CE FOR TEA CHING ARTHM ET C. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed April 
Patent No. 262,191, dated August 1, 1882. 
22, SS2. (No modlcl.) 
5 5 
To all ncho? ?? ??? ????cern : 
Be it known that I, II ERMANN WAGNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Eliza 
beth, in the county of Union and State of New 
Jersey, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Apparatus for Teaching Arithmetic, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to a device which, while 
it serves as a toy, assists in teaching arithme 
tic. 
The peculiar construction of my toy, which 
forms the subject-matter of my invention, is 
fully pointed out in the following specification, 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I rep 
resents a front view of the interior mechanism, 
the face-plate having been removed. Fig. 2 is 
a transverse Vertical section of the entire de 
vice in the plane a ac, Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a face 
view of the same. Fig. 4 is a face view of the 
carrier on a smaller scale than the previous fig 
ures. Fig. 5 is a transverse section of the same. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter A. designates a 
box made of wood or any other suitable ma 
terial, the face-plate or cover B of which is pro 
vided with a series of openings, ct, over which 
are placed a series of figures, as shown in Fig. 3. 
In this figure I have shown ten openings a, and 
the figures placed over them run from 1 to 10; 
but the number of the openings and the figures 
placed over them can be changed. For in 
stance, instead of placing the figures from 1 to 
10 over the openings (t, the figures from 10 to 
20, or any other figures, can be selected, and 
for this purpose I propose to provide trans 
verse slides on which the different series of fig 
ures are marked, so that by changing these 
slides different quantities can be multiplied or 
divided, as will be hereinafter explained. 
In the interior of the box A is situated a rack 
bar, C, which is guided in a metallic frame, D, 
and extends down into the hollow handle E of 
the box A. To this rack-bar is firmly secured 
a carrier, F, which is made of a flat plate of 
sheet metal or any other suitable material, pro 
vided at its edges with lips bb, (see Figs. 4 and 
5,) between which the tables G are placed. 
The sides of the carrier rest upon the sides c c 
of the box, the cover or face-plate B being ele 
vated above these sides, so as to leave slots d, 
Fig. 2, in which the carrier moves, and through 
which the tables G can be introduced. 
The rack-bar C is moved up or down by means 
of pinions e e, Fig.1, which are geared together 
with the driving-shaft?, and also with an ar 
bor, g. The driving-sha?t extends through the 
face-plate B, and on its ou ter end is mounted 
a crank, l, by means of which said slatt call 
be turned in either direction. Tle arborg also 
extends through the face-plate, and on its outer 
end is mounted an index, i, which travels over 
a dial, j, marked on the face-plate. When the 
crank h is turned in the direction of arrow 1, 
Fig. 3, the carrier F is raised and the index i 
turns in the direction of arrow 2. 
The tables G., which are placed on the car 
rier IF, are marked with different figures, ac 
cording to the quantity to be multiplied. One 
of the tables-for multiplication, for instance 
is marked with ten rows of figures, as indicated 
in Fig. 1, the figures in each row being in such 
positions that they will show through the open 
ings ( in the face-plate of the box A as the 
table containing them is moved up by the car 
rier F. If the carrier is clear down, the index 
i points to the figure 10 (or Zero) on the dial i, 
Fig. 3. If the crank h is turned in the direc 
tion of arrow 1, the carrier is elevated, and 
when the index i points to the figure 1 on dial 
j the first row of figures on the table G shows 
through the openings at (, and so on. When 
the carrier is raised to the position shown in 
Fig. 3 the third row of figures on the table G 
show through the openings (t (t, and the index 
i points to the figure 3, which, in this instalnce, 
is the multiplier, while the figures 1 2 3 4 5 
marked on the face-plate are the multiplicants, 
and the products show through the openings 
( 0. 
With the driving - shaft f is combined an 
alarm, H, which is sounded whenever said shaft 
has completed one revolution, and the shaft.f 
is geared together with the shaft g in such a 
manner that the index i travels from one figure 
on the dial j to the next for each revolution of 95 
posi 
the shaft.f. By the alarm, therefore, the 
tion of the carrier is indicated. 
The carrier is divided by a stop, m, Fig. 4, 
so that one table G can be inserted from One 
side and another table from the other side; 
- 
9 ? 
7 ? 
So 
OO 
IO 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
262,191 
1. The combination of the case A, having its 
face-plate provided with openings a, the car 
rier F, the shaft f for raising the carrier, the 
index i, and the diali, substantially as and for 
the purposes described. . 
2. The combination of the case A, having its 
face-plate provided with openings a, the car 
rier F, the shaft f for raising the carrier, the 
index i, the diski, and the alarm, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
EHERMANN WAGNER, 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 
L. S. 
25 
and in Figs, 3 and 4 I have shown a multipli 
cation-table on one and a division-table on the 
other side. In Fig. 3 the index i points to the 
divisor 3, and the figures exhibited through 
the opening a show 6 divided by 3 equal to 2,7 
divided by 3 equal to 2, and so on. From these 
examples it will be obvious that by the aid of 
the proper tables addition, multiplication, divi 
sion, and other mathematical operations can 
be performed, and if the figures 1 to 10 which 
are marked on the face-plate B are placed on a 
slide instead of marking them directly upon 
the face-plate, and different slides with differ 
ent figures are provided, the capacity of my 
machine can be increased to any desired de 
gree, as already stated. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
O 
IS 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262291.txt	H. GRAWES, 
EEWATOR, 
Patented Aug. 8, 1882. 
(No Model.) 
No. 262,291. 
 
 
 
SSG asyearys 
SeSeSSS 
assassssssssssssssssarasssssssssssssss Sys assss SSSSSSssss SSS 
a 
2 ls 
a. 
O 
O 
C 
Y 
  
 
 
WTN ESSE -- 
- see s.vassal. 
N. PeFRS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HIRAM GRAVES, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK. 
ELEVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 262,291, dated August 8, 1882. 
Application filed April 24, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom at may concern: 
Be it known that I, HIRAM GRAVES, of Syr 
acuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the State 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
5 Improvements in Elevators, of which the fol 
lowing, taken in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
In order to avoid the danger of entangle. 65 
the drum or pulley which carries or transmits 
motion to the elevating-cable in the following 
manner: I wind the counterpoise-rope at around 
the drum D in a reverse direction from that of 
the elevating-cable r and extend it over a pul. 55 
ley, B, at the top of the elevator-shaft, and con 
nect to its free end a weight, c, as heavy or 
even heavier than the car A, so as to effectu 
ally relieve the motor of all the dead weight 
of the car, and, if desired, also of a portion of 6o 
its load. It will be observed that by this ar. 
rangement the elevating-rope r is maintained 
at a uniform tension and the car is allowed to 
descend by gravity. 
ment of the cable r, incident to accidental stop 
page in the descent of the car and simultane 
ous continuation of the rotation of the drum 
iD, I make the elevating-cable r and counter. 
poise-cable at of one continuous piece, wound 
around the drum Da sufficient number of times 
to obtain the requisite frictional hold thereon, 
said drum being deprived of all rigid fasten 
ing for the cable. If then the car encounters 
obstructions in its descent, the resultant slack 
on the cable r at allows the drum D to rotate 
without carrying with it the said cable, the 
latter slipping on the drum and remaining dor 
mant in its position. 
accidental breakage or disconnection of the 
elevating-cable, I employ the following instru 
mentalities: To the end of the elevating-cable 
, I connect a pendent double strap or stirrup, 
b, which passes between the usual double head 
block of the car and rests with its lower end 
against the bottom of an expansive spring, s, 
upon the top of which the car A is supported 
by its head-block. Through the upper end of 
the doubled strap b passes a rope, c, which is 9c. 
extended over pulleysh h upon the head-block 
at opposite sides of the strap b, and thence 
down the uprights or posts of the car and 
through the bottom of the same, underneath 
which said rope is connected with a lever, d, 
hinged to the under side of the car or platform 
A. This lever dis bifurcated to reach around to 
opposite sides of the vertical guide-rail R, and 
upon each of the extremities of the bifurcated 
lever rests the free end of the dog e, pivoted Ioo 
To arrest the descent of the car in case of 8o 
75 
The nature of this invention consists in 
Io novel arrangement, with a power-elevator, of 
a counterpoise operating directly on the drum 
or pulley which transmits the elevating power 
to the car or platform, by which arrangement 
the weight of the car or platform can be over 
I5 balanced without affecting the tension of the 
elevating-cable. 
The invention also consists in a novel ar 
rangement of a safety-clutch for arresting the 
descent of the car or platform in case of acci 
2O dental breakage or disconnection of the ele 
vating-cable, all as hereinafter more fully ex 
plained, and set forth in the claims. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a front 
view of an elevator provided with my improve 
25 ments; Fig. 2, a side view of the same, and 
Fig. 3 an enlarged plan view of the under side 
of the safety-clutch. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A denotes an elevator car or platform of or 
dinary construction, and r is the elevating 
cable, which is connected to the top of the car 
A and extended over a pulley or pulleys, P, at 
the top of the elevator-shaft, and thence to the 
drum D, upon which it is wound, and which, 
by suitable gearing, receives motion from the 
motive power and transmits motion to the ele 
vating-cable. 
The car A of all power-elevators has hereto 
fore been counterpoised by means of an extra 
rope or cable attached to the top of the car and 
extended over pulleys at the top of the eleva 
tor shaft or way and provided on its free end 
with a weight which had to be somewhat lighter 
45 than the car in order to maintain the elevat 
ing-cable at a tension and allow the car to de 
scend by its gravity. Hence more or less dead 
weight had to be carried and a corresponding 
extra amount of power was required. To ob 
5o viate this defect I apply the counterpoise to 
3O 
35 
40 
2 
262,991 
and safety-grips adapted to engage the two 
guide-rails of the elevator-way, of the strap b, 
spring s, pulleys h h, and the rope c, passed 
through said strap and over the pulleys h h, 
and connected at its two extremities with the 
safety-grips respectively at opposite sides of 
the car, substantially as set forth and shown. 
2. The combination, with the car A and ca 
ble r, of the strap b, springs, pulleys h h, bi 
furcated levers d d, dogs e e, resting on the le 
vers d and adapted to engage opposite sides 
of the guide-rails R. R., and the rope c, passing 
through the strap and over the pulleys h h, 
and connected at its extremities with the le 
vers d d, all constructed and combined sub 
stantially in the manner described and shown. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name and affixed my seal, in the presence 
of two attesting witnesses, at Syracuse, in the 
county of Onondaga, in the State of New York, 
this 14th day of April, 1882. 
HIRAM GRAVES. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. DUELL, 
WM. C. RAYMOND. 
35 
45 
to a stout metal bar, f, which is rigidly secured 
to the bottom of the car and is provided at its 
center with suitable bearings against opposite 
sides of the guide-rail, so as to effectually guide 
the bottom of the car. 
The operation of the described safety-clutch 
is as follows: The car A, being supported by 
the spring s, causes a compression of said 
spring, and thus allows the strap b to draw 
partly up above the head-block of the car. In 
case the elevating-cable breaks or becomes 
disconnected from the strap, the springs is al 
lowed to distend and the liberated lower half 
thereof draws down the rope c, which passes 
through the strap and over the rollers h h, as 
before described. Said draft on the rope c 
draws up the free end of the lever d, and this 
in turn throws up the dogs e, which are sharp 
ened on the extremities and engage the sides 
of the guide-rail R and grip the same to such 
an extent as to effectually arrest the descent 
of the car A. 
Having described my invention, what I 
1. The combination, with the car A, cable r, 
claim is 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262391.txt	(No Model.) 
E. M. FORD. 
PORTABLE FURNACE TO FACILITATE THE MEANS OF FIRING DECORATED 
No. 262,39. 
Z 267. Z. Patented Aug. 8, 1882, 
CHINA, GLASS, &c. 
II -- 
| s 
| S s 
esses 
SS 
- - - 
seas 
WZZ/2 esses. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELLEN M. FORD, OF PORT RICHMOND, NEW YORK. 
PORTABLE FURNACE TO FACILITATE THE MEANS OF FIRING DECORATED CHINA, GLASS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 262,391, dated August 8, 1882. 
Application filed October 9, 1880. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELLEN MARIA FORD, 
of Port Richmond, in the county of Richmond 
and State of New-York, have invented a new 
and useful portable furnace to facilitate the 
means of firing decorated china, glass, earth 
enware, pottery, or other articles on which 
mineral or vitrifiable paints are used; also for 
firing such articles in any process of their man 
ufacture, whether decorated or not, a descrip 
tion of which is set forth in the following speci 
fication and accompanying drawings. 
Until within about two years there has been 
no suitable means by which persons engaged 
in the art of decorating china, glass, &c., or 
any process of manufacturing pottery, &c., 
could themselves perform the operation offir 
ing, it having been necessary for them to send 
the articles to large kilns or furnaces, which 
are principally located in large cities, not easily 
accessible by any but near residents, and which, 
from the nature of their construction and use, 
can only fire the articles in large lots and at 
Stated times. About two years ago invented a 
box or pot of fire-clay or other suitable material, 
(a patent for which, No.215,815, was granted me 
May 27, 1879,) in which such articles could be 
fired by the artist by placing the said box, in 
closing the articles to be fired, in an ordinary 
Stove or furnace, such as in use for various do. 
mestic and heating, purposes. The object of 
my present invention is to provide a suitable 
portable stove or furnace in which the afore 
said box or pot can be used, mainly with in 
tent to facilitate the use of said box by per 
sons who cannot conveniently use the ordinary 
stoves for it, especially its larger sizes, and at 
the same time providing for combinations of 
both box and furnace in such forms as the 
needs of various persons require. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the furnace; Fig. 2, a plan of the ar. 
rangement of the lower course of fire-bricks in 
the furnace; Fig. 3, the box or pot and cover, 
and Fig. 4 a sectional side view of the fur 
Inace and pot combined. 
The furnace may be made of iron, or fire 
clay, or brick, or a combination of all, or of any 
material of which heating apparatus can be 
made. It may be of various designs, plain or 
Ornamental. It may be adapted to the usual 
domestic purposes-such as heating irons or 
Wash-boilers, or cooking, or to serve as an or 
dinary heater-in connection with its special 
use, as indicated above; orit may be constructed 
solely with a view to its use for firing china, 
&c. It may be made to burn any kind of fuel; 
may have a closed top, with pipe, &c., or an 
open top, for use out-of-doors, as in case of burn. 
ing charcoal. 
The box or pot to contain the articles to be 
fired may be movable, or permanently attached 
to or connected with the furnace. It may also 
be inade square, or of any other shape, with the 
opening on the side instead of the top, the fur 
nace being constructed accordingly for access 
to it-for instance, with a door in front. 
As made for use in a residence and adapted 
to domestic uses, the furnace is described by 
reference-letters, as follows, the same letters 
indicating same parts in all the figures. 
A is the movable lid; B B B B, lining of 
fire bricks; BB BB, same, alternate bricks in 
this course being thicker than those above and 
between them, thus extending inward to serve 
as a support for movable pot E, and leaving 
Spaces between them, as shown in pian, Fig. 
2, for the fire to pass up and around the pot. 
The same purpose may be served by construct 
ing any other kind of support-as an iron grat 
ing from side to side-the bricks being of uni 
form size and thickness. C is the fire-cham 
ber; D, grate, which may be made movable 
by slide, hinge, or other convenient arrange 
ment; E, ash-chamber; F, opening for same 
and draft; G, opening for pipe; B, pot for 
china, &c., in position for firing. 
The arrangement as described in drawings 
is used substantially as follows: The fire hav. 
ing been kindled, the pot (covered) containing 
the articles to be fired is placed on the stove 
to heat gradually, and when partially heated 
is placed inside the stove on the supports BB 
BB, and the top of the stove is closed. After 
the pot has remained there from forty to sixty 
minutes, so that it is partly red-hot, the fire is 
dropped into the ash-chamber and removed 
from the stove, leaving the latter and the pot 
to cool together, thus allowing the ware to cool 
as gradually as it was heated, the whole pro 
cess Occupying about two or three hours ordi 
narily. After becoming cool the pot may be 
taken from the stove and the Ware removed. 
- The above-described process would be va. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
 
2 
262,391 
which case the glaze is added to the ware over 
the decorations by an additional firing-a pro 
cess which has heretofore been restricted en 
tirely to kilns of a special plan of manage 
ment; and, finally, this furnace supplies the 
needs of very many persons (especially those 
living in remote parts of the country) who do 
not possess ranges or other heaters adapted to 
use of the box or pot mentioned; and it is no 
small advantage to an artist anywhere to have 
the means of acquiring practice in firing, thus 
being able to accomplish the entire work of 
decorating from beginning to end, and in 
creasing his own abilities and talents by the 
additional knowledge which such experience 
affords. 
I am aware that portable furnaces are al 
ready made for use by assayer's, enamelers, 
jewelers, dentists, &c., but only to contain 
muffles, and the shapes and sizes of even the 
largest muffles are such as to be entirely un 
suitable for service as an inclosure for firing 
pottery; and to the best of my knowledge and 
belief there has been no article known prior to 
iny invention of this furnace and combination 
which could supply the want, though the de 
mand for such an article is large and increas 
ing. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A portable furnace or stove in or with 
which a pot or box or other suitable inclosure 
may be constructed or placed to contain arti 
cles of pottery, porcelain, glass, &c., for being 
fired at any time during the process of manu 
facture or decoration. 
2. The combination of the said furnace or 
stove with the said pot or box or other inclos 
sure, for the purpose described. 
EIILEN MIARIA FORI). 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD ST. JoHN, 
M. LOUISE FORD. 
45 
55 
65 
75 
ried somewhat if the furnace were constructed 
differently-as, for instance, when made with 
an open top; or when the box or pot is perma 
ently attached to the furnace the ware would 
le placed in position before kindling the fire, 
and the fire might be allowed to die out with 
out removing it from the grate, &c. The man 
agement of the fire would differ also according 
as coal, wood, charcoal, coke, or other fuel 
should be used, and the general process could 
be varied as experience would tend to improve 
ment in details of effecting the most satisfac 
tory firing of the Ware. 
The advantages of this invention are: a 
great saving of time, the process being simple 
and easily learned, and the same results ob 
tained as from the large kilns, (in many cases 
better;) an artist is able to proceed at once 
with the firing when the ware is ready, accom 
plishing promptly successive paintings and 
firings of the same ware, whereas without such 
means he would be obliged to await transpor 
tation to and from an established kiln, where 
firings usually are limited to a given day per 
week or month; the saving of expenses of 
packing, transportation, and the fee at the kiln; 
the avoidance of risk of breakage or other 
damage in transportation; the greater cer 
tainty of the firing being adapted to the special 
requirements of the ware, depending on qual 
ity of the ware, and, when decorated, nature 
of the different colors used, &c., no one being 
so competent a judge of all such conditions as 
the artist, whereas in a large kiln containing 
a variety of work of different artists the firer 
must adapt the process to the majority, often 
to the serious detriment of the minority, re 
sulting frequently in complete destruction of 
some valuable article, the loss for both ware 
and labor falling on the artist. Further, this 
invention is successfully used for firing in all 
the processes of under - glaze painting, in 
5 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262491.txt	(No Model.) 
H. E. SMITH, 
IRONING MACHINE. 
 
 
vitiys, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HAMILTON E. SMITH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
RONING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 262,491, dated August 8, 1882. 
Application filed October 11, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
rially facilitating that operation, while it does 
Be it known that I, HAMILTON E. SMITH, 
not interfere with the progress of a large piece 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
of clothes through the machine. For this pur 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
pose the guard-plate H and the roller C are 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
moved back away from the polishing-roller, 
in Ironing-Machines, of which the following is 
the cloth is drawn out of the basket and spread 
a specification. 
over the guard-plate, so that its edge hangs 
This invention relates to that class of ma 
down over the inner edge of the guard-plate, 
chines for which Letters Patent of the United 
and if the roller Cand the guard-plate are then 
States were granted to me October 1, 1878, 
moved toward the polishing-roller the depend 
No. 208,643; and it consists in certain novel 
ing edge of the cloth is caught between the 
combinations of parts, hereinafter fully de 
apron and the roller A and carried into the 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
machine without further assistance. 
This invention is illustrated in the accom 
At the receiving end of the machine is lo 
panying drawings, in which Figure 1 repre 
cated a basket, J, which is attached to the 
sents a vertical cross-section. Fig. 2 is a front 
machine-frame, and is constructed with open 
elevation. 
bearings c for the reception of a spindle, d, 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
having wound thereon large pieces of clothes 
The polishing-roller A, the apron B, and the 
to be ironed, as sheets, table-cloths, &c. In 
apron - supporting rollers C C CC are ar. 
practice the clothes are laid on a table, and 
ranged substantially in the manner shown and 
one or more pieces rolled up on the spindle d. 
described in my before-mentioned Letters Pat 
The latter is then placed in the bearings c, and 
ent. The journal-boxes G, carrying the apron 
the clothes are withdrawn therefrom for intro 
supporting roller C at the receiving end of the 
duction into the machine. The basket J is 
machine, are set or manipulated by means of 
preferably made of wire-cloth, with solid ends, 
a lever-frame, G', which has its fulcrum on 
and it is of such size as to form a receptacle 
pivots b, secured to the machine-frame on its 
for small pieces of clothes, as well as the spin 
opposite sides, and which is connected to the 
dle and its contents. 
journal-boxes. In this example the connection 
In connection with the apron B, I employ a 
of the lever-frame G' with the journal-boxes 
secondary apron, B', the latter being outside 
G is effected through the journals of the roller 
of the main apron and running over the apron 
C; but, if desired, independent pivots may be 
supporting rollers C C, &c., but being de 
employed for this purpose. The lever-frame 
tached from the main apron. This secondary 
G' is swung in one or the other direction for 
or outer apron, B', consists of fine felt or 
the purpose of setting the journal-boxes G to 
other material suitable to render the same a 
the desired position, and it is so shaped that 
polishing-surface, and by making the same 
when, as in Fig. 1, the roller O is thereby 
independent of the main or inner apron, B, it 
brought to bear against the polishing-rollier A, 
is not liable to wrinkle or puckeras it passes 
the lever-frame retains its position, and, act 
over the rollers. Both the aprons B B have 
ing on the journal-boxes, retains the latter in 
tightening-rollers II', which are mounted in 
their positions by its inherent gravity. In this 
independent boxes, both fitted loosely into a 
manner the lever-frame G' is made a medium 
slot, e, in the machine-frame. 
not only for adjusting the journal-boxes G, but 
If desired, the outer or polishing apron, B', 
also for keeping the roller C in its working 
may be furnished with independent support 
position. 
ing-rollers on the lower part of the machine, 
Above the roller C is situated a guard, H, 
as indicated in Fig. 1 in dotted outline, the 
which is attached to the journal-boxes G, so 
result of such an arrangement being that the 
as to move there with, and which is a segment 
two aprons come in contact only in their pas 
of a circle having a common axis with the 
sage around the polishing-roller. 
roller. This guard H affords a protection to 
I make the apron or aprons B or B in sec 
the hands of the operator in introducing to the 
tions when required, as at f, Fig. 2, and provide 
machine the clothes to be ironed, thus mate- the tightening roller or rollers with flanges i 
- 
? ? 
is 
25 
3 ? 
35 
45 
So 
55 
?? 
75 
go 
95 
I OO 
 
35 
40 
45 
moving with the journal-boxes, serving to sup. 
port and guide the material to be introduced 
into the machine, all substantially in the man 
ner and for the purpose described. 
4. The combination, with a polishing-roller 
and apron-supporting rollers, of an inner or 
main apron and an outer or polishing apron, 
both running over the rollers, substantially as 
shown and described, but detached from each 
other for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination, with a polishing-roller 
and apron-supporting rollers, of an inner or 
main apron and an outer or polishing apron, 
both running over the rollers, substantially as 
shown and described, but detached from each 
other, and independent tightening-rollers, one 
to each apron, for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination, with a polishing-roller 
and apron-supporting rollers, of an apron or 
aprons made in sections, and a tightening 
roller or rollers having flanges for separating 
and guiding the sections of the apron, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
Scribing witnesses. 
55 
IIAMILTON E. SMITH. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. EIAUFF, 
lC. l. KASTENTIUBER. 
for the purpose of guiding the sections in 
straight lines. These flanges i are formed at 
the opposite ends of the tightening roller or 
rollers and intermediate of such ends between 
the sections of the apron, and the tigh tening 
rollers being distant from the polishing-roller, 
the flanges do not interfere with the correct 
operation of the machine. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Tetters Patent, is 
1. In an ironing-machine, the combination, 
with a polishing-roller and an apron, ofimova 
ble journal-boxes G, carrying the roller which 
supports the apron at the receiving end of the 
machine, and a lever-frame connected with 
the journal-boxes for manipulating the same, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. In an ironing-machine, the combination, 
with a polishing-roller and an apron of mova - 
ble journal-boxes G, carrying the roller which 
supports the apron at the receiving end of the 
machine, and a gravitating lever-frame con 
nected with tle journal-boxes and acting by 
gravity to retain the apron carrying the roller 
in proper working position, substantially in 
the manner shown and described. 
3. In an ironing-machine, the combination, 
with a polishing-roller and apron, of movable 
journal-boxes carrying the roller which sup 
ports the apron at the receiving end of the 
machine, and a segment-guard attached to and 
I. ? 
(5. 
2 ? 
25 
30 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262591.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 262,591. 
E. A. & S. B. HILDRETH. 
WOOD SPLITTING MACHINE, 
  
 
 
 
A 
W 
.N 
g 
 
d 
t 
i 
- - 
Y. I 
Inventors, 
(idon (0.964//i. 
da-6, 3% 
 
 
- - - 
- 
Witnesses, - - - - 
4, 5, 
16- 62%-26- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN A. EIILDRETH AND STANLEY B. HILDRETE, OF HARVARD, MASS. 
WOOD- SPLTTNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 262,591, dated August 15, 1882. 
Application filed February 21, 1881. 
(No model.) 
S 
d 
To all whom it may concern: 
and STANLEY B. HILDRETH, both of Earvard, 
in the county of Worcester and State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvementsin Wood-Splitting Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to that class of wood 
splitting machines in which a single knife plays 
up and down upon tracks or ways provided for 
the purpose, the wood to be split being held in 
the hands of the operator and resting upon a 
table below the knife referred to. 
The nature of our invention consists in the 
construction of the various parts of a wood 
splitting machine in such a manner that the 
connection between the pitman and the sliding 
ax-head may be capable of resisting the great 
strain to which these machines are subjected; 
also, in so constructing the table (and its con 
necting parts) upon which the Wood is placed 
to be split that it can easily and quickly be 
raised or lowered to accommodate different 
lengths of wood and still be sufficiently strong 
to resist the great strain of splitting the hard 
est, toughest, and most knotty Wood; also, in 
so constructing the screw - table that when 
screwed down to the lowest point to which it 
can go in the Supporting bed-nut the table can 
not become set or bound against the top of the 
bed-nut; also, in so clamping the screw of the 
table that the table will not turn down tander 
the force of the blows of the ax, all as more 
fully set forth and described in the following 
specification and claims. 
In the accompanying, drawings, in which 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure 1 is a front view of a wood-splittingma 
chine embodying our invention. 
Fig. 2 is a 
sectional view upon the line acy of Fig.1, show 
ing the screw-table upon which the Wood is 
placed to be split, the supporting bed-nut, and 
its connection to the main frame-rods. Fig. 3 
is a side view of the main frame-rods, the screw 
table with its supporting bed-nut, and the 
splitter ax-head, also showing the pivoted con 
nection between the pitman and the sliding 
ax-head, the section of the ax-head being taken 
in a vertical plane through the center of the 
pivots and aX. 
A represents the mainframe of ourimproved 
wood-splitting machine. 
B is the cap-piece to the main frame, and B 
Be it known that we, EDWIN A. EIILDRETH represents a crossbar or rod sill directly be 
neath the cap-piece B. 
RR are large strong iron rods, which we call 
the frame-rods, extending through the cap 
piece Band through the boxin which the main 
shaft, which carries the balance - wheel, re 
Wolves. The frame - rods R. R. also extend 
through the sill cross-bar B', and are secured 
by nuts resting upon the box above and by 
nuts beneath the sill cross-bar B', these nuts 
fitting upon threads cut. on each end of the 
frame-rods R. R. To these frame-rodsRR are 
secured the track-head and the tracks which 
guide the sliding ax-head. The table T, upon 
which the Wood to be split is placed, is also se 
cured to the main frame-rods RR, bringing all 
the various strains of the machine directly onto 
the frame-rods R. R. 
When a tough knotty stick is placed upon 
the table T to be split the knife a, as it descends, 
is forced downward by the pitman h, which 
connects the ax-head k with the crank-wrist 
and balance-wheel. The resistance of the wood 
brings a great pressure upward upon the knife 
and downward upon the table. If the con 
necting parts are all sufficiently strong, the 
upward and the downward strains will all be 
conveyed to the rods R. R., and the wood will 
be forced asunder. The downward pressure 
of the pitman h upon the journals e e' on the 
ax-head is so great as to cause danger of break 
ing the journal when tough, cross-grained, and 
knotty blocks are inserted under the knife. If 
the operator places such a block of Wood on 
the outer edge of the table, all the strain of 
splitting the block comes upon the outer end 
of the knife a. Under these circumstances the 
journal e receives all or nearly all the down 
ward thrust of the pitman. 
To guard against the possible danger of 
breaking the outer journal, e, upon the ax-head, 
we place an auxiliary support, f, upon the ax 
head, upon which supportf the end of the pit 
man h is formed to rest, relieving the journal 
e of a portion of the strain and avoiding all 
danger of breaking the journale, even although 
tough knotty blocks are placed under the outer 
end of the knife a. By this arrangement a 
journal, e, corresponding in size with the jour 
male', is sufficient under all circumstances, and 
it is much more convenient to form them of 
25 
35 
45 
So 
SS 
85 
95 
OO 
- 
2 
262,591 
7 O 
75 
equal size, and it is not desirable to be obliged 
to increase the size of either journal, as the 
pitman swings upon them and a small journal 
allows more stock to remain in the pitman 
without increasing the Weight. 
h' represents the cap of the pitman, secured 
to the main body of the pitman h, by boltsi, 
and held in place by a small rib, i, to relieve 
the boltsi of the shearing strain. 
T represents what we call a screw-table. 
It is formed with a broad flat surface above, 
preferably round, as it is intended to be re 
volved to raise and lower the table; but it 
might be of any other shape, if desired. Upon 
the broad flat surface of the table T the wood 
to be split is placed and held by the hands of 
the operator. The table T is formed of cast 
iron, With a large stout stem or central col 
umn, t, extending downward from the center 
of the lower side of the table T. The table T 
and column t are all cast in one solid piece. 
Upon the column t we cut a large strong screw 
, thread, as shown in Fig. 3. 
N is a large, deep, and strong nut, fitted with 
a thread corresponding to and fitting easily 
upon the screw upon the column t. This nut 
N we call the supporting bed-nut. The bed 
nut N is formed with projecting arms having 
cylindrical grooves therein, which fit onto the 
main frame-rods R. R., as shown in Figs. 2 and 
3. A back clamp, C, as shown in Figs. 2 and 
3, is firmly bolted to the arms of the bed-nut 
N by bolts gg, which are tapped into the arms 
of the bed-nut N. Thie frame-rods R. R. are 
firmly clasped between the arms of the bed 
nut N and the back clamp, C, when the bolts.g 
g are tightened. The bed-lnut N can be raised 
or lowered and secured in any desired position 
upon the frame-rods, being held in position by 
the grip of the cylindrical recesses in the arms 
of the bed-nut and the back clamp upon the 
frame-rods. The bed-nut N being firmly se 
cured in position, the table T can quickly and 
easily be raised or lowered by turning the ta 
ble T around. By revolving the table T it 
can be screwed upward in the bed-nut N until 
the table comes almost in contact with the 
knife a for very short wood; or it can be 
screwed down until the base of the table Tal 
most rests upon the top of the bed-nut N. By 
this arrangement the table T can in a moment 
be adjusted to different lengths of wood, and, 
if a stick comes shorter than the other sticks 
which are being split, the operator can quickly 
; adjust his table to suit his convenience with 
out moving from his seat, and can also adjust 
the table for a stick longer than usual, if re 
quired. 
If the knife enters a tough knotty stick and 
does not split the stick, the table can be re 
volved once or twice, so raising the table that 
the stick will be rentasunder without difficulty. 
When the table T is screwed down in the bed 
nut N until the base of the table approaches 
the upper surface of the bed-nut N, and should 
these two surfaces be allowed to come in con 
tact, a blow from the ax upon a tough knot 
might set the screw down so tightly as to reth 
der it almost impossible to loosen the table 
again. To avoid all danger of setting the table 
when screwed down to its lowest point, we pro 
vide a stop, n, having a vertical face upon the 
bed-nut N. 
Upon the lower surface of the table T we 
form a projection, n', also having a vertical 
face at an equal distance from the center of 
the screw t with the stop in. When the table 
is turned down as far as possible, and just be 
fore the base of the table T comes into contact 
with the upper face of the bed-nut N the ver 
tical face of the stop in comes into contact 
with the vertical face of the stop in and prevents 
the table T from turning any lower. In this 
position the table can never set down onto the 
nut, as the base of the table never comes in 
contact with the upper face of the bed-nut. 
When from this position the table T has been 
revolved once in the direction to raise the table 
the table T and screw t will have been raised 
one thread upon the screw. If the stop in does 
not lap onto the stop a more than the distance 
from one thread of the screw to the next, the 
stop in will turn over the top of the stop in when 
the table is revolved one turn upward. 
To prevent the screw-table from turning too 
loosely in the nut N in case the screw should 
be a loose fit, or in case the screw should be 
come worn from use, or to fasten the screw 
table at any desired height, if required, we pro 
vide a screw-bolt, b, turning in a thread formed 
in the side of the nut N, as shown in Fig. 2. 
A small wheel, b', is secured to the set-bolt b, 
by means of which the bolt b is turned. The 
bolt b presses against a brass or copper block, 
c, which in turn presses against the screw-col 
umn tof the screw-table T. By turning up the 
set-bolt b any desired degree of friction may 
be brought against the screw-column it, and the 
table T can be prevented from turning too 
freely in the bed-nut, N; or the table T may be 
fastened at any desired height. 
Having thus described the nature and oper 
ation of our invention, what we claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a Wood-splitting ma 
chine, of the balance-wheel, crank-shaft, and 
pitman driving the reciprocating ax a, the 
crank-box in which the crank-shaft revolves, 
main frame-rods R. R., passing through said 
crank-box and connecting the same with the 
bed-nut N, which is rigidly secured to said main 
frame-rods below the table T, and the adjust 
able screw-table adapted to be raised or lowered 
in relation to the reciprocating knife a by re 
volving the screw-table in the bed-nut N, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, in a wood-splitting ma 
chine, of the reciprocating knife a for splitting 
the wood, the adjustable screw-table T, upon 
which the wood to be split is placed, said table 
T being set nearer to or farther from the re 
ciprocating knife a by revolving said screw 
table and its supporting screw-column it in the 
bed-nut N beneath, and a suitable locking de 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
262,59. 
3 
vice to fasten the screw-table at any desired 
height to prevent it from Working downward 
under the repeated blows of the ax a, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, in a wood-splitting ma 
chine, ofthe adjustable screw-table Tit, adapted 
to be raised or lowered by revolving the same 
in a bed-nut, N, and stops in in to prevent the 
face of the bed-nut from coming in contact 
with the base of the revolving table T, pre- to 
venting the screw-table from setting when 
down, substantially as described. 
EDWIN A. HILDRETH. 
STANLEY B. EIILDRETE. 
Witnesses: 
JANE D. FULLER, 
MARY G. HILDRETH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262691.txt	W, S. OVENS, 
MACHINE FOR MAKING PIES, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.). 
 
 
 
A72 Vezz ?oz* 
/2ZZer.S. (2-eras 
? ?edge, 
??? 
(No Model.) 
No. 262,691. 
W. S., OWENS, 
MACHINE FOR MAKIEC PIES, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 15, l882, 
BELI DILIllu 
Till 
z zy. - 9 %2,7 
 
 
?? 
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
N. PeFERS. Photo 
Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
W. S. OWENS. 
s 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING PIES, 
No. 262,691. 
Patented Aug. 15, 1882, 
 
/12Z/zesses 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER, S. OVIENS, OF BUEFALO, NEW YORIK, ASSIGNOR TO CHARLES E. 
BENEDICT AND GEORGE B. WEBSTER, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING PES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 262,691, dated August 15, 1882. 
Application filed October 3, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may ????er?: 
Be it known that I, WALTER. S. OVENS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Buf. 
falo, in the county of Erie and State of New 
York, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvements in Machines for Making Pies, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
machine for rolling out a sheet of dough and de 
positingit onto the pie-plates as they move along 
on an endlesspie-plate carrier, then filling the 
plates with the required quantity of fruit or 
other material, and then covering them with 
another sheet of dough, which is firmly fastened 
to the first at the edges, after which the pies 
are perforated, their edges trimmed, and then 
delivered from the endless apron or carrier to 
the operator, as will be more clearly herein 
after shown by reference to the drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the machine. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged front view of the mech 
anism for operating the fruit-box plunger, (or 
a part of said mechanism.) Fig. 3 is a section 
through line XX, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 represents 
an enlarged view of a cross-section through 
the fruit - box and plunger, showing also a 
side elevation of a portion of the mechanism 
for Operating the plunger. Fig. 5 is an en 
larged vertical section through the center of 
the brush for moistening the edge of the pie 
preparatory to fastening the upper crust in 
place, showing also a portion of the mechanism 
for operating it. Fig. 6 is a plan or top view 
of the same. Fig. 7 is an enlarged side ele 
Vation of the device for perforating the pie, 
showing also a modified device for trimming 
the edge of the pie. Fig. 8 is a bottom view of 
the same. Fig. 9 is an enlarged section 
through one of the pie-plate holders, showing 
also a section through a pie-plate, and a roller 
for showing the manner of trimming the edge 
of the pie. Fig. 10 is an enlarged side eleva 
tion of the adjustable cam for regulating the 
In OWeinents of the valves or knives on the 
bottom of the fruit-box. Fig. 11 is a face 
view of the same. Fig. 12 represents a de 
tached side elevation of the mechanism for re 
ceiving, holding, and delivering the pie-plates; 
and Fig. 13 is a plan or top view of the same, 
A represents the frame of the machine. It 
is constructed preferably of cast-iron, as be 
ing the cheapest and best material, and is held 
together by the usual binding-rods, a. It is 
provided with the usual tightening device, a 
A', for tightening the belt or endless pie-plate 
carrier, one being arranged on each side of the 
machine in the ordinary way. The frame is 
also provided with a bed, A, securely fast 
ened to it, for the purpose of supporting the 
endless carrier as the upper moving portion 
slides along overit. (See Fig. 12.) The endless 
pie-plate carrier a is supported on the rollers 
BB', and it consists of the chain-gearb l' and 
a series of plate - holders, C, fastened to the 
chain-gear by rivets or screws c. (See Figs. 
Each plate - holder is provided 
12 and 13.) 
with a cutting rim or ring, C, formed in one 
piece with it or securely fastened thereto, and 
as the endless carrier passes along the upper 
edge of the cutting-ring C passes close to and 
under the roller c'. (Shown in Figs. 1 and 9.) 
It will now be seen that as the endless carrier 
moves forward it carries the covering sheet of 
dough D along with it and under the rollerc, 75 
and that as the cutting-edge of the ring C 
passes under and in contact with said roller 
the dough within the ring C will be pressed 
closely to the top of the pie, while the portions 
of the dough outside of said ring will be cut 
off, thereby triunming the edge of the pie. 
A modification of the device for trimming 
the edge of the pie and pressing the upper 
crust close to the lower crust, D, is shown in 
Figs. 7 and 8. It consists of aflat annular rim, 
D, fastened to the perforating mechanism by 
arms d, so that when the perforating device 
makes a downward movement it will at the 
same time trim the edge of the pie and press 
the upper and lower sheets of dough together 
at or near the periphery of the pie. 
The endless plate-carrier and chain-gearing 
b b are operated by means of the ratchet 
wheel E, arm E", pawl E, and connecting-rod 
F, which is connected to the wheel F by a 
crank-pin, E'. It is obvious that as the wheel 
F revolves the connection F will operate the 
pawl and turn the roller one tooth forward in 
the direction of the arrow, (see Fig. 1) and 
Will consequently move the chain-gear and 
95 
7 ? 
OO 
S 
1 ? 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
So 
262,691. 
The perforating device d receives its move. I2O 
r is the 125 
L represents the circular brush for moisten- 75 
e represents the first pair of rollers, which it to move and open the valve, and that in pro- to 
2 
pie-plate carrier one step ahead for every revo- quired. It will now be seen that as the cam 
lution of the wheel F. 
turns under the end it of the arm it will cause 
are all geared together and operated by belts portion to the length of the top J the valve 
5 in the ordinary way. e' is the dough-box for will be held open, and as soon as the part J. 
said rollers. The first sheet of dough, D, is passes the spring K will reverse the motion of 
rolled out by these rollers. The fruit-box G is the arm and close the valve. 
rigidly fastened to the vertical side frames, 
F', (see Fig. 1,) and is provided with an ordi-ing the rim of the pie before the upper sheet 
Io nary piston or follower, f, for forcing out the of dough, D', is placed on it. This brush is 
fruit or other material from the opening f" made of soft bristles or other similar material. 
when the valves f* are opened. The follower It has both a vertical and a slight reciprocat 
f is operated by the rackg and pinion g'. (See ing turning movement, and is connected to the 8o 
Fig. 4.) The shaft g', to which the pinion g frame of the machine by supports ll, and re 
I5 is connected, is supported in bearings or boxes ceives its movements from the angular arm L', 
f on the top of the vertical side frames, F, jointed to the frame by a pin, L. Its upper end 
(shown in Fig. 1) and is provided with a box, is provided with a forked portion, m, and its 
e, into which is nicely fitted a block, e, hav- lower end is jointed to the rod m', which is con- 85 
ing a short shaft, g, which passes through the nected by a short connection, n, to the swing 
2 o cap h. (See Fig. 3.) The shaft g is provided ing arm M, which arm is jointed to a support 
with an arm, G', through the end of which by a pin, M', and it receives its movements 
the upper portion of the rod G' passes, and from a connecting-rod, M, jointed to it and to 
can move freely until stopped by either the the pin F on the wheel F. The construction 9o 
nut g or H. The opposite end of the rod G of the brush will be better understood by ref. 
25 is connected to the crank-pin F on the wheel erence to Fig. 5, in which L is the brush. It 
E, from which it receives its motion. A front is connected to a hollow spindle, N, having a 
view of the block eis shown through a por- vertical shaft, N, provided with a head, N, 
tion of the cap which is broken out, and partly arranged to have a free up-and-down move- 95 
in dotted lines. (See Fig. 2.) It is provided ment within the spindle N, but is prevented 
3o with openings h', into which are fitted small from turning in it by a groove, n', and a pin or 
rollers h, having springs i to force them for-. feather on the head N. The upper end of N' 
ward toward the narrower portions of the fits into the support l, and is kept in place by 
openings h". The effect of this arrangement, 
a pin, O, fastened to the shaft N', and projects roo 
through the groove O', which is straight at its 
it will be readily seen, is that the arm G will 
35 move or turn easily in the direction of the ar 
upper end and made to incline toward the bot 
row without moving the shaft G*; but if moved 
tom, as shown in said Fig. 5. The shaft is pro 
in the opposite direction the rollers h will be 
vided with shoulders PP, between which the 
forced against the inclined portions of the block 
forked end m fits. The sleeve N is also pro- I o5 
e and bind or grip strong enough to move 
vided with shoulders Q Q', to limit its up-and 
4o said shaft. The nut EI is rigidly fastened to 
down movement. The brush (see Fig. 5) is 
the rod G', and the nuts g are adjustable, so 
represented at the lowest part of its vertical 
movement and in position to be in contact 
as to allow more or less lost motion to the rod 
G' between them, which can be regulated so 
with the first sheet of dough on the plate. It IIo 
as to give more or less motion to the arm G, 
will now be seen that if the end on continues 
45 and thereby adjust the movement of the fol 
to move downward the pin O, as it moves down 
the slot O', will give the brush a slight rotary 
lowerf downward. The followerf is raised 
up out of the box G by the usual means and 
movement sufficient to moisten the dough, as 
moved out in the position of the dotted lines 
before mentioned, and that an upward move- IIS 
H while refilling or cleaning it. (See Fig. 4.) 
ment will reverse its action. The brush is kept 
moist by a sponge, Q, arranged above it, the 
5o The mechanism for operating the fruit-box 
moisture from which passes through the per 
knives or valves f' will be understood by ref. 
erence to Figs. 1, 4, 10, and 11. The valves f* 
forations R to the brush. 
are connected by a small arm, i', to the verti 
cal portion of an angular arm, i, which is 
ments from the angular forked arm S, which 
is jointed by a pin, '', to a support on the 
55 jointed to the frame, as shown in Fig. 1, at or 
frame, the lower end being jointed by a pin, 
about" the point i. The outer end of the hori 
S', to the rod m'. (See Fig. 1.) It is supported 
Zontal portion i of the arm i rests on the cam 
J, (see Fig. 10,) which cam is keyed or other 
in a frame, T, by the vertical shaft t, 
perforating-pin. Its operation will be easily 
wise fastened to the opposite end of the shaft 
6o to which the gear-wheel F is fastened. The 
understood from the drawings. (See Fig. 1.) 
cam-wheel J is composed of two parts, J J', 
Trepresents the second pair of rollers. They 
arranged side by side on the shaft, J being 
are provided with the usual dough-box, t, and 
keyed to the shaft, so that by turning J and 
are operated in the well-known way by belts I3o 
fastening it by the set-screw Jthe top J of the and pulleys or their equivalents. 
I claim as my invention 
65 cam may be made longer or shorter. Either 
one valve f' or two may be used; but when 
1. An endless belt or chain gear and its op 
two are used two adjustable cams will be re-erating mechanism, having a series of attach 
262,691 
3. 
25 
O 
ments for receiving, holding, and delivering endless plate - carrier, substantially as de- 20 
the pie-plates, in combination with a pair of 
rollers for rolling out the first sheet of dough, 
a fruit-box and its operating mechanism for sup 
plying the fruit or other material, and a roller 
for trimming the edge of the pie, substantially 
as described. 
2. The endless belt or chain gear and its op 
erating mechanism, having a suitable device 
for receiving and holding the plates, substan 
tially as specified, in combination with a pair 
of rollers for rolling out the first sheet of dough, 
a fruit-box for supplying the fruit, a circular 
brush for moistening the dough around near 
the edge of the pie, a second pair of rollers for 
rolling out the covering-sheet, and a roller for 
trimming the edge of the pie, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a pie-machine, the combination of an 
scribed, a pair of rollers for rolling out the first 
sheet of dough, a fruit-box, and a second pair 
of rollers and their operating mechanism for 
rolling out the second sheet of dough, the whole 
being combined and arranged for joint opera 
tion substantially as described. 
4. A pie-machine having a first and second 
pair of rollers, a fruit-box arranged between 
the first and second pair of rollers, and an end 
less plate-carrier and their operating mechan-3o 
ism, in combination with a perforating device 
and a trimming - roller and their operating 
mechanism, for the purposes described. 
WALTER, S, OWENS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMESSANGSTER, 
H. SANGSTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262791.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN LANDENBERGER, JR., OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MANUFACTURE of DYED FABRICS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 262,791, dated August 15, 1882. 
Application filed April 22, 1882. (No specimens.) 
The yarn is then dried and sub- 5o 
I5 possible. 
2O piece or the articles made therefrom. 
Be it known that I, MARTIN LANDENBERG 
The cotton is first dyed with alizarine dye 
To all whom it may concern: 
by saturating the yarn with a compound of 
ER, Jr., a citizen of the United States, and a one pound of Turkey-red oil A to ten pounds 
resident of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have of water. 
5 invented certain Improvements in the Manu-jected for six or eight turns to the action of 
a red-liquor preparation consisting of thirty 
facture of Dyed Fabrics, of which the follow 
six pounds of alum, twenty-one pounds of 
ing is a specification. 
white sugar of lead, and twelve gallons of 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
water, the preparation being heated to about 55 
the manufacture of that class of fabrics which 
1700 Fahrenheit. After being Wrung out and 
Io are made of undyed woolen yarn and after 
dried the yarn is treated with a solution of 
ward dyed in the piece or after manufacture 
biarseniate of soda, the yarn being given six 
into different articles of wearing-apparel, the 
or eight turns. The yarn is then finished in 
object of my invention being to obtain a greater 
variety of color in the pattern than is now 
the alizarine bath, entering at 1100 Fahren- 6o 
heit, and the temperature being raised in an 
hour to 1700 Eahrenheit. After leaving this 
In the manufacture of some fabrics it is a 
bath the yarn is Wrung out and given two or 
common plan to knit or weave the piece with 
undyed woolen yarn, or, as it is termed, yarn 
three turns in the Turkey-red oil solution, and 
is finally steamed for about two hours prior to 65 
in the grease, and to afterward dye the 
Scouring. 
Hitherto the only attempt to produce pat 
The wool is dyed in the usual manner by a 
combination of indigo, yellow, and orange dye 
terns infabrics of this class has been by combin 
in proper proportions to produce the required 
ing undyed cotton yarn or mixed yarns of un 
bronze shade, this dye having no effect on the 7o 
dyed cotton and wool with the woolen yarn in 
25 the weaving or knitting operation, the cotton 
cotton yarn dyed in the manner above set 
being unaffected by the subsequent operation 
forth. 
of dyeing the wool, so that in the piece or the 
article of manufacture when completed the 
cotton threads appear white and the woolen 
3o threads colored. The range of patterns possi 
ble under this plan is necessarily very limited, 
and the patterns lack boldness and effect. 
My invention consists in using dyed cotton 
yarns in connection with the undyed Woolen 
35 yarns in the production of the fabric, the dye 
used in treating said cotton yarns being such 
that the latter will not be injuriously affected 
by the subsequent operations resorted to for 
dyeing the wool. I am thus enabled to pro 
4o duce a much greater variety of patterns than 
has hitherto been considered possible in the 
manufacture of fabrics of this class. 
As illustrating my invention, I will describe 
a method of proceeding when it is desired to 
45 combine Turkey-red cotton with wool which 
is afterward to be dyed to a bronze color. 
I claim as my invention 
As an improvement in the manufacture of 
figured composite fabrics of cotton and Wool, 75 
the mode herein described of imparting Val 
riety to the patterns produced, said mode con 
sisting in first imparting to Cotton yarn a dye 
which will not be affected by the dye for the 
wool, combining such dyed cotton yarn with 8o 
the undyed woolen yarn in the manufacture 
of fabric, and subsequently subjecting the fab 
ric to the action of a dye for the Wool, as set 
forth. 
to this specification, in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 85 
MARTIN ANDENBERGER, JR, 
Witnesses: 
HARRY DRURY, 
HARRY SMITH, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262891.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 262,891. 
 
 
E. R. EDWARDS, 
BOOK SEWING. 
Patented Aug. 15, 1882, 
 
 
| 
N. PERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washing 
tion. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD R. EDWARDs, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
TEOMAS CHESHIRE, OF SAME PLACE. 
BOOK - SEWNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 262,891, dated August 15, 1882. 
Application filed December 3, 1881. (No model.) 
15 
d 
Io all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD R, EDWARDs, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Cincinnati, in the county of Hamilton and 
5 State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Book - Binding, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved method 
of sewing books; and it consists in securing 
together the folded sheets or signatures com 
posing a book by the ordinary binding twine 
or cord arranged in notches cut in the back 
of the signatures, and the longitudinal thread 
passing within the fold of each signature and 
up through the same, the binding-cords and 
longitudinal thread being united together by 
means of a loop-thread passing alternately 
over the binding-cords from side to side, and 
looping with the longitudinal parallel thread 
within the signatures, so that with each alter 
nate pass of the lock-thread over the cord it 
loops with the longitudinal or signature thread, 
thereby firmly uniting the three threads and 
forming a superior method of sewing books, 
especially adapted to being performed by a 
machine employing straight needles for mak 
ing the loop-stitch. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view, showing several signatures 
of a book attached together by my improved 
method of sewing. Fig. 2 is a skeleton plan 
view, showing the arrangement and combina 
tion of the twine and threads comprising my 
invention. 
A represents a book incomplete, but show 
ing the manner in which the different signa 
tures are connected by my improved method 
of sewing. 
a 0 are the signatures or folded sheets com 
BB represent binding-cords, which rest in a 
series of saw-cuts or notches made in the folded 
backs of each of the signatures a. 
bb represent slits made in both ends of each 
OC represent a series of threads forming 
loop-stitches e o around longitudinal thread D, 
and combining its parallel series with binding 
cords B. The longitudinal thread D passes 
within the fold of each signature and in par 
allel array from signature to signature through 
the slits lb b. 
In the operation of my method of sewing 
books the signatures are all properly sawed to 
receive the binding-cords B and slitted in the 
ends. Then they are taken, one at a time, and 
spread partly open on a suitable oparating 
table, the needles, with loop-threads C, are then 
passed into the fold of the signature on oneside 
of the cord B and form loops c within said fold, 
through which passes the longitudinal thread 
D. The thread D then passes through the slit b 
in one end of the signature and into a similar 
slit in the succeeding signature in position for 
its passage through loops formed in a like man 
ner to those above described, except that in 
making the loop-stitches in the second signa 
ture the cords B are shifted a trifle to one side 
of the path of the needle containing the loop 
threads C, so as to pass the threads C over 
them and make the loops con the opposite sides 
thereof to those of the first signature, and so 
on from signature to signature until the book 
is completed. 
Instead of the binding-cords B, strips of parch 
ment attached in the usual manner may be 
used, and the book sewed as herein described. 
I claim 
The method of sewing books, consisting in 
placing the transverse binding-cords in notches 
on the folded side of the signature, running a 
thread longitudinally in the fold of one signa 
ture, and then passing said thread up through 
the signature and carrying it over to and into 
the fold of the next signature, and looping a 
thread around the said transverse cord and 
longitudinal thread, as set forth. 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
eSSeS. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD R, EDWARDS, 
. 
J. H. CHAs. SMITH, 
JNO. E. JoNES, 
4o posing the same. 
45 signature. 
25 
35 
So 
55 
75 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US262991.txt	(No Model.) 
R. H. SMITH, J, GOLD THORP & W. J. FAWCETT. 
No. 262,991. 
CARBURETOR, 
Patented Aug. 22, 1882, 
2. 
- 
- 
I 
i. 
n 
2 
W 
----- 
6 
EEEa. 
te 
was EEA sea 
- 
- 
- - - - - - 
- 
a' - - - - - - 
62 - F - - 
- la - Aest 
- 
- - - -- 
22. 
ea - 
5.2. Y. 
- 
a 
3. 
6 
4. 
-- 
- 
- - - - /-4 
TTT 
- - 
- 
2- 
- - - - - - 
- - -- 
  
h A 2. 
B 
I 
DQ 
 
 
 
  
W 
W 
W 
W 
Mrs 
S 
S 
as 
s 
N 
s 
% 
s3.D 
f 
1.1 
42%zzza2- 
- 
\ 
a-dy. Sol ( i t . 
Nweve dissing a degTirth 
V\ \\\owev ::: e?t, 
- \ w?',: 1, (of Yi (7. 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROLAND H. SMITH, JOSEIUA GOLDTEIORP, AND WILLIAM J. FAWCETT, OF 
PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CARBURETOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 262,991, dated August 22, 1882. 
Application filed January 9, 1882. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ROLAND E. SMITH, 
JOSHUAGOLDTHORP, and WILLIAM J. FAW 
CETT, all of Pittsburg, county of Allegheny, 
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented or dis 
covered a new and useful Improvement in Car 
buretors; and we do hereby declare the fol. 
lowing to be a full, clear, concise, and exact 
description thereof, reference being had to the 
Io accompanying drawings, making a part of this 
specification, in which-like letters indicating 
like parts 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical sectional 
view of our improved carburetor. Fig. 2 is a 
15 rear end view in elevation. Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view, partly in section, of one of the 
inner drums. Fig. 4 is a vertical sectional 
view to an enlarged scale of the recarburetor 
or upper carbureting-chamber; and Fig. 5 is a 
2 overtical sectional view to an enlarged scale of 
the valve device for regulating supply of hy 
drocarbon material or gasoline. 
Our invention relates to apparatus for car 
bureting air for illuminating purposes and sup 
25 plying the same for use under pressure; and 
it consists in certain combinations of carburet 
ing-chambers with apparatus for producing 
pressure therein and devices for regulating 
automatically the supply of hydrocarbon ma 
3o terial, and also supply and discharge of air, as 
hereinater described and claimed. 
In the drawings, A represents a carbureting 
chamber, by preference cylindrical in form, 
made of any suitable sheet metal and supported 
35 by any convenient frame or foundation A'. 
Within this chamber is journaled a shaft, ct, on 
which are secured two rotary drums, BB, simi 
lar in construction, and arranged on the shaft 
with a little space between their adjacentends. 
4o In Fig. 1 we have shown one of these drums 
in elevation and one in vertical section, and in 
Fig. 3 one is shown by a perspective view, the 
outer shell, b, being in section in order to ex 
pose the interior, These drums are employed 
45 to produce air-pressure within the apparatus, 
and their construction is somewhat similar to 
the drums in rotary meters. Each drum is 
inclosed by a cylindrical shell, b, and heads or 
disks DDD. The heads DD" are constructed 
5o somewhat like the cutting-blades of an earth 
55 
auger, consisting of separate segments d ord, 
which are slightly spiral in position or inclined . 
to a plane at right angles to the axis, and are 
overlapped, as illustrated in Fig. 3, thus pro 
ducing wedge-shaped openings c and c' be 
tween the segments for entrance and discharge 
of air. The interior of the drums is divided 
radially by plates b' into separate chambers C. 
These plates b' have a spiral form and inclina 
tion around the shaft a, extending from the 6o 
rearedge of one segment, d, to the forwardedge 
of the next succeeding segment, d, in the oppo 
site end or head. We have shown four seg 
ments in each head and four spiral division 
plates, thus dividing each drum radially into 65 
four separate chambers. This number is not 
material, however, as it may be increased or 
diminished at pleasure. The drums are se 
cured on the shaft by straps d', which are sol 
dered or otherwise fastened to the segments of 7o . 
the heads D D, and perforated in the axial 
line of the drums to receive the shaft at. The 
center or core b of the drums is open for free 
passage of hydrocarbon liquid, which is sup 
plied as hereinafter described and maintained 75 
at sufficient height in chamber A to cover such 
core or central passage. The levelator about 
which we prefer to maintain the liquid in this 
chamber is represented by the letterB, Fig. 1. 
The inclosed space above the liquid is occupied 
by air, supplied as presently described. The 
two drums are constructed substantially alike, 
except that they are made as rights and lefts, 
having inlet-openings c at the forward angle 
of chambers C and outlet-openings c at the fol- 85 
lowing or rear angle diagonally opposite the 
inlet, thus taking air at their adjacent ends 
and passing it in opposite directions toward 
the ends of the main chamber A. These drums 
are also secured on the shaft in Such relation 
ship that they take air alternately and dis 
charge it alternately-that is, the openings c c' 
in one drum alternate with or divide the spaces 
between the openings c c' in the other drum. 
By this means a constant pressure is main- 95 
tained in the service-pipe, one or the other of 
the drums being operative at all times in main 
taining such pressure. Assuming these drums, 
in operation, to be rotated over from right to 
left, air will enter the openings c between the Ioo 
 
 
262,991 
O 
segments d, filling the chambers C above the journaled on bracket A'. A ratchet, v, fixed 
liquid. As the rotary movement continues the 
on shaft a, and pawl v', pivoted to the upper 
entrance-passage c will be closed or sealed by 
bar of the bracket, prevent backward motion 
dipping under the surface of the liquid, and 
of the gear as the cordais wound on the spool 
the inclosed air will be passed over the surface 
by crank A. 
Also, a ratchet, v', secured to 
of the liquid and forced out of the succeeding 
the inner face or end of the spool, and a spring 
openings c'. 
pawl, , pivoted to the adjacent face of ratchet 
The shells b extend beyond the heads D', 
wheel , communicate motion from the spool 
their outer ends being closed by disks or heads 
to the gear as the cord is unwound. The cord 
D, the central openings, d, of which are below 
is passed over the usual pulleys used in such 
the surface of liquid. Also, transversely across 
apparatus, and carries at its end a counter 
the drums, between heads D and D', are 
weight sufficient in heft to impart the desired 
stretched one, two, or more cloths, C', of cot 
degree of rotary power to the drum. The rate 
ton or other fabric or porous material, adapted 
at which the weight will run down and the 
to retain or become saturated with the liquid, 
drums B be rotated will depend upon the rate 
and in such condition to permit passage of air 
of consumption of carbureted air, alnd the press 
under pressure as it is discharged from open 
ure of carbureted air in the apparatus will de 
ings c'. As the air is thus passed over the liq 
pend upon the rate of use and the effective 
uid and through the cloths it becomes charged 
power of the weight. These elements may 
(more or less) with inflammable vapors. For 
readily be adjusted by any skilled mechanic, 
convenience in securing the cloths C in place, 
so as to secure the desired pressure in the serv 
ice-pipe. 
they are stretched on hoops c, which fit closely 
in the interior of shells b. By causing the air 
As carbureted air enters the dry-wells E. 
supply to pass through the saturated cloths 
under pressure it rises through pipes et and en 
instead of over or around them its entire body 
ters chamber F. In this vertical movement 
is exposed uniformly to the liquid, and in the 
free liquid, which may be carried out of cham 
finely-divided condition required for passing 
ber A, will settle to the bottom e, from which 
through the cloths it takes up a large and uni 
it may be drained by cocks e. Across the 
form quantity of vapor. The pressure imposed 
chamber F is stretched a number of cloths, I, 
by the drums is an important factor in this 
using hoops i, on which the cloths are tacked. 
connection, as it insures the passage of the air 
This chamber is also partially filled with hy 
through the cloths to effect such carburation. 
drocarbon liquid, so that the cloths become 
Outside these cloths are secured guards or per 
saturated there with. The carbureted air, en 
forated plates C, one in each drum, to prevent 
tering at the ends, passes through these Satta 
the cloths under the pressure to which they 
rated cloths, and thereby becomes fully charged 
are exposed from covering and choking the 
with the vapors of the liquid. 
escape-pipes, and between these plates and the 
If desired, the cloths I may be mounted by 
heads or disks D* are down take escape-pipes 
any suitable frame-work either transversely on 
C, which, passing under the surface of the liq 
or more or less spirally around a shaft pass 
uid through openings d, discharge the carbu 
ing through the longitudinal axis of the cham 
reted air outside the chamber Ainto dry-wells 
ber, and rotary motion be given them by belt 
E, one at either end of the apparatus. These 
ing from this shaft to the shaft al. Ordina 
Wells consist of an enlarged end or box, e, ex 
rily, however, stationary cloths, as shown, 
tending below the mouth of pipes c, and an 
will answer every purpose; but in order to 
uptake-pipe, e", leading to an upper recarbu 
secure the best results we prefer to use quite 
reting-chatmber, F. The degree of pressure 
a number of such cloths, arranged at a little 
imparted to the carbureted air by the rotary 
distance apart, as shown in Fig. 4. 
drums B B depends in part upon the rate of 
At or near the center of chamber F is a dis 
use compared with the capacity for supply and 
charge-port, k, Fig. 4, leading by pipe K, Fig. 
in part upon the effective power applied to ro 
2, to a governor or regulator, N. Across the 
tate the drums. Rotary power is applied as 
case of this regulator, above the inlet k", is se 
follows: 
cured a diaphragm, n, in the center of which 
One end of shaft at is carlied through the 
is fixed a vertical stem, n', having a valve, n, 
well e into an inclosed gear-box, A, a tubular 
on its lower end, adapted by upward movement 
passage, c', being made through the well, as 
of the diaphragm and stem to close the port 
in Fig. 1, to prevent liquid from entering the 
in seat n, and thus arrest passage of carbu 
well. A pinion, a, on the extended end of the 
reted air to service-pipe N, which latter leads 
shaft gears with a larger wheel, a, on shaft a'. 
off from the bottom of the regulator. The 
The position of shaft a' is above the level of 
valve is held open by the weight of the valve 
liquid, and it is journaled in the walls of the 
and stem; or, if this is not sufficient, the stem 
box in ainy convenient way. One end is ex 
may be loaded by additional weights, as de 
tended outside the box and packed in any suit. 
sired. If pressure of carbureted air or gas be 
able way, as indicated at a, to prevent acci. 
low the diaphragum exceeds such weight, the 
dental escape of liquidor vapor. The extended 
diaphragm will be raised and the port in wholly 
or partially closed, thus preventing pressure 
end of this shaft enters a socket, a, in the end 
of a spool or drum, A, the shaft at of which is 
in the service-pipe from rising above a pre 
35 
45 
So 
75 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
262,991 
3 
I 
25 
45 
So 
This same gov-T bers A and at the float falls and the supply 
port S is opened. In order to insure such 
downward movement of the float and preserve. 
an equilibrium of pressure thereon, communi 
cation is afforded by pipe u from case M to 
chamber Aabove the level of liquid. By pref. 
erence this pipe opens into case M directly 
over the lever, near its lower end. (See Fig. 2.) 
The manner of operating this apparatus will 
be understood from the above description. 
Very little attention is required in use, the 
principal work being to provide in the feed 
reservoir a supply of gasoline or hydrocarbon 
liquid such as is ordinarily employed for kin 
dred purposes, and to wind up the weight when 
necessary. 
It is obvious that if a sufficient number of 
cloths C be used in drums B B the air may be 
sufficiently charged with vapor therein and 
the chamber F be used wholly or principally as 
a gas-holder, or may even be omitted alto 
gether; or, on the other hand, chamber A may 
be filled to or about the level B with water, 
the cloths C be omitted, and the chamber and 
drums B B be employed for supplying pure air 
under pressure to carbureting-chamber F; also, 
various modifications may be made in the de 
tails of the apparatus without departing from 
our invention. For example, instead of per 
forated plates C, wire or lattice guards may be 
employed, the principal object being to pre 
vent the adjacent cloths, when saturated and 
stretched, from being carried over the mouth 
of pipes c by the air-pressure; also, other 
forms of divisions f and openings cc'in drums 
B may be employed, such that the drums may 
take air from the interior of chamber A at the 
forward angle and discharge it under pressure 
outside of chamber A. from the rear. or follow 
ing angle. 
Instead of making open communication 
around shaft a from chamber A to gear-box A, 
the shaft-passage through Anhay be packed in 
any convenient Way, and in such case the gear 
box may be omitted; but for convenience of 
construction we prefer the form shown. The 
opposite end of shaft a may be journaled in 
any suitable bearing, h; also, one drum, B, may 
be used in chamber Ainstead of two, as shown; 
but in such case we prefer to make it larger 
and with more chambers C. 
determined or normal degree. 
ernor is also made to regulate the air-supply 
to the chamber A, as follows: A bar, o, fixed 
rigidly to the upper end of stem in', projects 
through slotted openings o' o' into the vertical 
air-inlet pipe P. In the end of bar 0, within 
pipe P, is fixed a vertical stem, p, carrying a 
valve, p", which, by the movement of dia. 
phragmn, opens and closes air-passage through 
port p. Thus a tendency to excess of press 
ure in the service-pipe is counteracted not 
only by diminishing the flow of carbureted air, 
but also the supply of fresh air to chamber A 
is diminished accordingly, and an equilibrium 
of air-supply is maintained through the whole 
apparatus. 
In order to provide a self-regulating device 
for supplying hydrocarbon liquid to both cham 
bers A and F, we supply chamber A. from cham 
ber F by a pipe, R, leading from F at a point, 
, corresponding to the desired height of liquid 
therein. The port r is by preference guarded 
by a shield, ', extending downward into the 
liquid. (See Fig. 4.) The pipe R opens into 
a trap or bowl, R', from which a pipe, r, leads 
to chamber A. In order to prevent a siphon 
action in this pipe-connection, the pipe 7' is 
carried up into the bowl, as in Fig. 1, so that 
its upper open end may be on a level with the 
port r. 
Chamber F is supplied through a pipe, T, 
leading to an elevated tank or other source, 
affording sufficient pressure to overcome the 
carbureted-air pressure in the chamber. In or 
der to regulate such supply we pass it by port 
a0 into a valve chamber or case, W, and thence 
through a valve-governed port, s, to pipe T 
and chamber F. We prefer to make use of a 
slide-valve, s', to open and close the ports, 
the seats of which is raised, (see Fig. 5,) so 
that it may easily be ground in to refit the 
valve when worn. The cap w of this cham 
ber is screwed to the periphery of seats', and 
the seat is cast integral with the lower rim, c'. 
By unscrewing the cap 0' access may be had 
readily to the valve, when desired. The valve 
is held to its seat by a stop-spring, s, secured 
to the inner wails of the cap, and motion is 
given the valve to open and close the port by 
a bent lever, m, pivoted to post 20. The up 
per end of this lever passes through the valve 
We claim herein as our invention 
seat and enters a recess, m', in the face of the 
1. The combination of chamber A, two in 
valve. 
closed rotary drums, B, having closed outer 
Below the valve-case the lever is inclosed in 
ends, D, spirally-divided chambers C in their 
a case, M, which extends downward in a curved 
adjacent ends, with inlets c 0 and outlets c' c' 
direction corresponding to the curve of the 
to such chambers, which are arranged in suc 
lever. The lower end of this case is enlarged 
cession or alternate in the two drums, cloths 
into a chamber, t, which is supplied with liq. 
C, stretched transversely across the passage 
uid from chamber A by pipe it. A float, In, 
turough the drums between chambers C and 
attached to the lower end of the lever, rests 
ends D, pipes c and E, and common reser 
in the liquid in chamber it. 
voir F, substantially as set forth, whereby uni 
As liquid in chambers A. and it rises above 
form pressure and supply of carbureted air is 
a certain level (the normal height) the valve 
ports will be wholly or partially closed and 
- maintained in the reservoir. 
2. The combination of chamber A, interior 
the supply to chambers F and Abe reduced or 
arrested. As liquid is exhausted from cham- rotary drum, B, having spirally-divided cham 
w 
75 
85 
IOO 
Ios 
IIo 
II5 
I 25 
k 
r 
 
262,991 
bers C in one end, with openings c c' for inlet 
and outlet to the chambers, as described, a 
disk, D', for seating the opposite end of the 
drum, one or more cloths, C, mounted trans 
Versely across the drum between chambers C. 
and end D, outlet-pipec, adjacent to end D', 
and guard C, between the cloths and outlet. 
pipe, Substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
3. A rotary drum, B, having one sealed end, 
D', aud spirally-divided chambers C in the 
other end, with inlet-openings c in the outer 
end of such chambers at their forward angle 
and outlet-openings c' in the inner end of such 
chambers at their following angle, in combi 
nation with one or more cloths, C, stretched 
O 
IS 
across the drum between chambers C and end 
D, outlet-pipe c, surrounding chamber A, 
shafta, and power mechanism outside of cham 
ber A for rotating the drum, substantially as 
described, whereby air is taken from chamber 
A forced under pressure through the cloths, 
and discharged outside chamber A. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands. 
A. 
ROLAND E. SMITH. 
JOSHUA GOLDTEORP. 
WILLIAM J. FAWCETT. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. WHITTLESEY, 
C. S. PARKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263091.txt	(No Model.) 
D. R. ASHTON & J. N. SPERRYN. 
. 
ra- - - 
000K AND WAVE. 
No. 263,091, 
  
Patented Aug. 22, 1882, 
a 
2 
2E. 
E7. 
ENE NE y 
2 N Fi 
TNESSES: 
TESEs 
statuexona. 
INVENTORs: 
se-EYENTOR 
ATTORNEYS, 
"Rs Photo-Lithographer, who 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
DAVID R. ASHTON, OF OLAPTON, COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, AND JAMES N. 
SPERRYIN, OF BRIXTON HILL, COUNTY OF SURREY, ENGLAND. 
COCK OR VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 263,091, dated August 22, 1882. 
Application filed March 20, 1882. (No model.) 
- 
2 o 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, DAVID REGINALD 
ASHTON and JAMES NEVILLE SPERRYN, sub 
jects of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
5 respectively at Clapton, in the county of Mid 
dlesex, and Brixton Hill, in the county of 
Surrey, both in England, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Cocks and 
Valves, (which has not been patented to them, 
Io nor to others with their knowledge and con 
sent, in any country,) of which the following 
is a specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
bib-cocks, stop-cocks, ball-cocks, and other 
I5 cocks or valves for controlling the passage of 
gas, steam, Water, and other fluids. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction and arrangement of parts, as herein 
after fully described. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
cock. Fig. 2 is a central longitudinal section 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail view, partly in 
section. Figs. 4 and 5 are sectional views of 
modifications of the invention. 
c is the body, of any suitable form, and hav. 
ing the inlet and outlet in any convenient po 
sition relatively to the valve and valve-seat, 
according to the purpose for which the cock 
or valve is intended. 
b is the barrel portion of the body, cast in 
one there with, through which the valve-spindle 
passes axially, the barrel being large enough 
to permit of the valve passing through it. 
c is the valve, preferably of the usual disk 
35 form, or it might be conical, and closing down 
upon a corresponding seat formed in the body 
a, as usual. 
d is the valve-spindle, and e is a cupped 
plunger or piston, of metal, leather, india-rub 
4o ber, vegetable fiber, or other suitable material, 
fixed upon the spindled, this plunger or pis 
ton fitting in the barrel b and moving up and 
down therein with the spindled. The plunger 
e is secured upon the spindled, as shown in sec 
45 tion in Fig. 3, between a shoulder, d, formed 
on the spindle, and a nut, d, screwed upon a 
part, d, and forming a head for the spindle, 
etween which and the shoulder d the plunger 
3o 
25 
is tightly clamped. The barrel b is turned 
true internally and the plunger fits accurately 5o 
therein. 
f is a cap inclosing the top of the barrel b, 
and formed with a quick, coarse, internal screw 
thread, which works upon a corresponding 
screw-thread cut upon the exterior of the bar. 55 
rel b. , 
65 
g is a set-screw in the cap, the point of which 
comes under an external shoulder on the bar 
rel to prevent the cap being unscrewed too far. 
The cap is provided with a cross-handle, h, by 6o 
which it is turned; but it might be a knob or 
a wheel-handle; or, in the case of a ball-cock, 
the ball-arm would take its place and the 
axis of the valve Wuuld be horizontal instead 
of vertical. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 the cup fis wholly sepa 
rate from the spindle e and merely presses 
upon the top of the spindle in order to force 
the valve down upon its seat, the valve being 
intended to be raised off its seat by the press- to 
ure of the fluid, alone. Eig. 4 shows a pre 
cisely-similar cock, except that the spindle 
is provided with an extension, i, which enters 
loosely a hole in the cap, and has a neck or 
groove, j, at its upper end, in which the point 75 
of a set-screw, k, in the handle is received, in 
order to so far connect the cap to the spindle 
that, although the forme; turns independently 
of the latter, as before, the valve will be raised 
off its seat by the cap when it is unscrewed, 8o 
instead of by the fluid-pressure, as before. 
Instead of the groovej and set-screw k, the 
part i. of the spindle might be continued quite 
througll the handle and have a nut upon it 
above the handle. 
Fig. 5 shows a cock differing only from that 
shown in Fig. 1 in the position of the valve 
and screw-cap relatively to the inlet and out 
let, the term screw down being herein in 
tended to include a screwing in any direction. go 
Elaving described the nature of the said in 
vention and the manner of performing the . 
same, I declare that what I claim is 
1. The combination, with the body a, pro 
vided with the externally-screw-threaded bar. 95 
rel band the internally-screw-threaded cap 
85 
A. 
b. 
2 
263,09 B. 
f, of the valve-spindle d, provided with the shoulder of the valve-spindle, substantially as lo 
shoulder d and the screw-threaded extension and for the purpose set forth. 
d, the cup-shaped plunger e, resting on Said 
shoulder, and nutd, substantially as and for 
5 the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, with the valve-spindle 
d, provided with the shoulder d' and the 
screw-threaded extension d, and the nut d, 
of the cup-shaped plunger e, resting upon the Both of 17 Gracech trch St. London, E. C. 
EYE SEESA,ASIS 
Witnesses: 
JNO. DEAN, 
H. E. DALE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263191.txt	(No Model) 
No. 263,191. 
W. MASON, 
BREECH LOADING FIRE ARM, 
Patented Aug. 22, 1882. 
A. 
V 
  
 
T 
Ef 
 
 
 
R 
 
 
z22 
 
S. 
22 & 
s 
 
 
 
Nes Yay, 4 
- - - 
AESN 224 2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM MASON, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE COLTS 
PATENT FIRE-ARMS MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BREECH-LoADING FIRE-ARM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 263,191, dated August 22, 1882. 
Application filed March 25, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WM. MASON, of Hart 
ford, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented a new Improve 
5 ment in Breech-Loading Fire-Arms; and I do 
hereby declare the following, when taken in 
connection with accompanying drawings and 
the letters of reference marked thereon, to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
Io and which said drawings constitute part of 
this specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1 a sectional side view, the parts in 
their normal condition; Fig. 2, the lock mech 
anism. With the barrels opened and the han 
15 mercocked; Fig. 3, the lock mechanism with 
the barrels closed, the hammer left at full-cock; 
E. 4, a top view of the bolt and its operating 
BWe, This invention relates to an improvement in 
2O that class of breech-loading fire-arms in which 
the barrels tilt up at the breech to open the 
chambers for theinsertion or removal of the car 
tridges, commonly called breakdown arms, 
and particularly to that portion of this class 
25 of arms in which the hammer is arranged en 
tirely within the receiver and cocked in the 
act of opening the breech-such as commonly 
called concealed hammers-parts of which 
are applicable to other classes of arms, 
3o The lock mechanism is an improvement on 
the device for which Letters Patent were 
granted to me dated September 20, 1881, No. 
247,373. 
The object of the invention is to simplify the 
35 construction, whereby the breaking down of 
the barrels will set the hammer at full-cock, 
compressing the mainspring, partly by the 
opening of the breech, and completing its ap 
plication on the return of the barrels, also to 
4o retract the hammer after it has imparted its 
blow by the locking mechanism which secures 
the barrels in their closed position; and the 
invention consists in the details of construc 
tion, as more fully hereinafter described, and 
A represents the receiver or frame, of sub 
stantially the usual construction, with the bar 
rels B arranged in the usual manner and hung 
upon a rock-shaft, C, so as to engage said 
so shaft in tilting up to open the breech or re 
turning to close the breech, substantially as in 
45 particularly recited in the claims. 
my former patent, and whereby an oscillatory 
movement is imparted to the rock-shaft C. 
D is the hammer, hung upon a pivot, a E, 
the mainspring, arranged in a recess forward 55 
of the hammer, one end, b, taking its seat in 
the receiver, the other end, d, bearing on the 
hammer forward of its pivot. 
F is the connecting-link between the rock 
shaft and hammer. It is engaged with the 6o 
rock-shaft above its center, as at e, and its 
rear end is hook-shaped, as at f, and stands, 
when in its normal condition, as seen in Fig.1. 
in rear of a stud or pin, g, on the hammer, be 
low its pivot. By this connection, when the 65 
barrels are turned upward to open the breech 
the rock-shaft C is also turned from its posi 
tion as seen in Fig. 1 to that seen in Fig. 2, 
and because of this partial rotation of the 
rock-shaft the connection F is drawn forward, to 
and, being engaged with the hammer below its 
pivot, correspondingly turns the hammer back 
ward to its position of full-cock, where it is 
caught by the nose of the sear G, as seen in 
Fig. 2. Then as the barrels are returned to 75 
their closed position, as seen in Fig. 3, the con 
nection also returns away from the studg on 
the hammer, leaving the hammer at full-cock, 
from which it is released by pulling the trig 
ger H in the usual manner, the shoulder or 8o 
hooked end f of the connection F being at 
that time so far to the rear as to be out of the 
way of the hammer. 
The doubled or heel end h of the mainspring 
is made fast to the connection F, so as to move 85 
back and forth with the connection. In the 
forward movement the hammer raises the arm 
d of the mainspring, which bears thereon, work 
ing upon an inclined surface, i, at that end, 
as froni the position in Fig. 1 to that seen in go 
Fig. 2, and passing over this incline the move. . 
ment imparted to that end of the mainspring 
is less than the actual movement of the ham 
mer. Then when the barrels are returned, and 
with them the connection F and the main- 95 
spring, the incline i rides up upon the bearing 
on the hammer to the position seen in Fig. 3, 
thereby completing the compression of the 
mainspring. Thus the main spring is partly 
compressed in the opening of the barrels, the loo 
compression completed by the return of the 
barrels. 
g 
263,9. 
o 
In this class of arms the nose of the ham 
mer necessarily strikes forward of the front 
face of the recoil-plate I, as seen in Fig. 1, 
and if the hammer remains in that condition 
the rear end of the barrels cannot be raised 
to open the breech. Hence before the barrels 
are raised it is necessary to give to the ham 
mer a retreating movement, 
To do this I 
make a connection with the bolt L by which 
the barrels are locked in their closed position, 
this bolt being arranged to move longitudi 
nally toward and from the locking-lug M on 
the under side of the barrel by means of a le 
ver, N, on the upper tang of the frame through 
a cam-shaft, P, which extends down into en 
gagement with the bolt in substantially the 
usual manner. To the rear end of this bolt 
I attach a spring-link, R. This is best done 
by constructing the bolt with a cross-piece, S, 
extending to the right and left in rear of each 
hammer, and to this cross-piece the spring 
link is attached, as seen in Fig. 1, and extends 
up over the hammer. The back of the hammer 
is constructed with a projecting lug or stud, l, 
and the spring-linkR has a corresponding per 
foration, m, which, when the hammer is forward 
and the bolt in its locked position, as seen in 
Fig. 1, engages the projection l on the hammer. 
Thus engaged, when the boltis drawn backward 
to release the barrels, as seen in broken lines, 
Fig. 1, the link R will, because of its connec. 
tion with the hammer, draw it backward to 
the same extent, as indicated in broken lines, 
Fig. 1. 
The rear face of the lug l is inclined, 
so that when the rear end of the barrels is 
raised, as before described, to draw the ham 
mer backward, the incline on the back of the 
lug l will permit it readily to pass out beneath 
the spring-link R. to its position of full-cock, 
leaving the link R. in its place, as indicated 
in broken lines, Fig. 2. Then when the bar 
rels are closed and the locking-bolt in its prop 
erly-engaged position the spring-liink R. is also 
in its most forward position. Then when the 
hammer is discharged the lug lwill strike upon 
the under side of the link R, easily raising the 
free end of that link until the lug passes with 
in the opening m in the link. 
While I prefer to make the lug l on the ham 
ner and the opening in the link, it will be un 
derstood that this order may be reversed. 
To make this arm perfectly safe as against 
accidental firing, I construct one of the trig. 
gers, which are hung upon a pivot, n, with an 
arm, 0, above its pivot and in rear of the bolt 
L, so that when the bolt is forward in its 
locked condition the arm is so far in rear of 
the bolt as to permit the free play of the trig 
gers; but when the bolt is thrown backward, 
as seen in Fig. 3, it strikes the arm o of the 
triggers and turns the rear end, r, downward, 
as also seen in Fig. 3. In rear of the arm r of 
the triggers is a lever, T, hung upon a pivot, 
t, with an arm, u, forward of its pivot, lying 
beneath the arm r of the trigger, and above 
the pivott of the lever T is another arm, ac, i. 
constructed with a shoulder, a. A third arm, 
2, of the lever Textends rearward and is hung 
to a finger-piece, 2, which extends up through 
the rear tang of the frame, where it presents 
a head, 3. When the bolt is thrown back, as 
before described, and turns the triggers, as 
seen in Fig. 3, the arm r of the trigger strikes 
the arm at of the lever T and turns the arm ac 
of that lever forward, bringing the shoulder a 75 
over the arm r, at the same time the arm 2 of 
that lever throws the finger-piece 2 upward, as 
seen in Fig. 3-that is to say, from the posi 
tion seen in Fig. 1 to that seen in Fig. 3. As 
the finger-piece 3 rises a shoulder, 4, on the 
under side of the head is forced by a spring, 
5, over onto the upper surface of the tang, 
forming a latch, which will prevent the return 
of the lever T. Hence the trigger cannot be 
pulled until the lever T is turned to take the 
shoulder a from over the arm r, and this can 
not be done until the bolt is turned, because 
the arm u. of the lever T below will strike the 
under side of the arm r, but when the bolt is 
in its completely-locked position, then the op 
erator may force forward the head 3 of the fin 
ger-piece 2 until the shoulder 4 will escape 
from the tang, then press the head down into 
the tang, as seen in Fig. 1, which will turn 
the lever T and take the shoulder a out of 95 
the way of the trigger and leave it free to be 
pulled. Thus the finger-piece becomes an in 
dicator, to show whether or not the arm is in 
proper condition for firing-that is to say, 
whether the bolt is properly engaged with 
the barrels, and also whether the triggers are 
locked or unlocked. By this arrangement of 
the safety-catch the sportsman may at any 
time set his triggers at safety-catch without 
opening his barrels-that is to say, by throw 
ing the trigger forward, as seen in Fig. 3, it 
will turn the lever T on its pivot and bring 
the shoulder a over the arm r of the trigger 
and throw up the finger-piece, the same as if 
done by the operation of the bolt, and this I Io 
may be without any necessary connection be 
tween the bolt and trigger. 
While I prefer the mechanism shown for oper 
ating the bolt, it will be understood that any of 
the known mechanisms for so doing may be elm IIS 
ployed, it only being essential that there shall 
be some mechanism arranged to impart longi 
tudinal movement to the bolt to disengage the 
barrels. 
I also prefer the spring-link R as a connec 
tion between the bolt and the hammer, whereby 
the longitudinal movement imparted to the 
bolt in releasing the barrels may be communi 
cated to the hammer, and thereby impart a 
corresponding rear movement to the hammer; 
but other connections for so doing may be em. 
ployed. I therefore do not wish to limit my 
invention to the precise construction and ar 
rangement of parts whereby the objects of this 
invention are accomplished. 
I3o 
I claim 
1. In fire-arms in which the breech is opened 
I 25 
OO 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
t 
263, 191 
. 3 
by the barrel tilting up at the breech, the com 
bination there with of the transverse rock-shaft 
C, arranged at the axis upon which the barrel 
turns, and with which the barrels engage in 
opening and closing to impart a correspond 
ing oscillation to the said shaft, the hammer 
I), the connection F between said shaft above 
its pivot and the hammer below its pivot, the 
mainspring, its doubled end bearing on said 
connection forward of the hammer, one end of 
said main spring taking its bearing on the 
frame, the other end, d, constructed with an 
incline, i, upon its under side, and arranged 
to bear upon the hammer forward of its pivot, 
substantially as described. 
2. In fire-arms in which the breech is opened 
by the barrels tilting up at the breech, the com 
bination there with of the longitudinally-mov 
able locking-bolt I and a cam lever arranged 
to impart to said bolt the longitudinal move 
ment to permit the opening and closing of the 
3) 
IS 
Witnesses: 
JOHN E. EARLE, 
JOS. C. EARLE. 
barrels, a link, R, in connection with said bolt 
and constructed for engagement with the ham 
lmer, whereby the rear movement of the bolt 
impaits a corresponding rear movement to the 
hammer, substantially as described. 
3. In fire-arms in which the breech is opened 
by the barrel tilting up at the breech, the com 
bination there with of the bolt to lock the bar 
rels in their closed position, and mechanism, 
substantially such as described, to impart to 
said bolt longitudinal movement, the trigger 
constructed with an arm, o, extending above 
its pivot and in rear of the bolt, and with an 
arm, ', extending to the rear, with the three 
armed lever T and finger-piece 2 hung thereto, 
extending up through the tang of the frame, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
WILLIAM MASON, 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263291.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 263,291. 
 
C. W. LEWALLEY. 
MOWING MACHINE 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 22, 1882, 
\\\\\\esses, 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, O.C. 
(No Model.) 
C, 
LEWALLEY, 
MOWING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
 
i. PETERs, photo-thographer, Washington, C.C. 
(No Model.) 
. C. W. LEWALLEY. 
MOWING MACHINE, 
4. sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 263,291, 
Patented Aug. 22, 1882, 
N N N 
N 
PP E 
r e 
 
g 
ZS 
ra 
2<ressess2. 
2 
SaaaaaaaaaaaaaSC2 E 
%2 
22 
O 
asszz222s2 
s 
ze N22 
2 
is A. 
ce 
eates 
SEFIFR 
 
a 
- a s 
S. 
elaasaas 
EEEEEEEEEE 
se 
& 
se 
s al 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
 
C. W. LEWALLEY. 
MOWING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 22, 1882, 
7 
N. PETERS. Photo-shographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CEIRISTOPHER W. LEVALLEY, OF ST. PAUI, MIINNESOTA. 
VO WING - VACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 263,291, dated August 22, 1882. 
Application filed January 7, 1882. 
(No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHRISTOPHER W. LE 
WALLEY, a citizen of the United States, and a 
resident of St. Paul, in the county of Ramsey 
and State of Minnesota, have made certain 
new and useful Improvements in Mowing-Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to mowing-machines 
for grass or grain; and it consists in the arrange 
ment, in connection with a centrally-pivoted 
cutter-bar frame, of a draft-chain, whereby a 
lifting force is exerted upon the cutter-bar and 
its attached parts at the same time that the 
machine is drawn ahead, as hereinafter shown. 
The invention also consists in the construc 
tion and arrangement of the several parts of 
the machine, whereby they are strengthened 
and made adjustable to render the machine 
more easy of operation and without adding to 
its weight, as hereinafter shown. I attain 
these objects by the use of the mechanism ill 
lustrated by the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side view, partially in section, 
of a mowing-machine having my improve 
inents attached thereto. Fig. 2 is a front view 
of a portion of the axle-frame, tongue-frame, 
and driving-shaft, illustrating their construc 
tion. Fig. 3 is a detached side view of the 
dogs and pawl' mechanism for elevating 
the cutter-bar. Fig. 4 is arear view of the upper 
portion of the cutter-bar lifting-lever detached. 
Fig. 5 is a detached detail view, illustrating 
the construction of the axle, ratchet, and pawls. 
Fig.6 is a detached sectional view of the axle 
frame, main driving-shaft, and cutter-bar 
frame sleeve, illustrating their construction. 
Fig. 7 is a front view of Figs. S and 6, show. 
ing the Oscillating cutter-bar frame in its cen 
tral position; and Fig. 8 is the same with the 
oscillating sleeve turned around for remova: 
from the axle-frame. Fig. 8 is a detached de 
tail view of the draft-plate. Fig. 9 is a plan 
view, partially in section, and with the tongue 
and tongue-frame removed. Fig.10 is a front 
view of the cutter-bar detached. Fig. 11 is a 
Sectional view of the axle-frame detached. 
Fig. 12 is a view of the pitman detached. Fig. 
13 is a side view, Fig. 14 is a plan view, and 
Fig. 15 is a rear view, of the tongue-frame de 
tached. Fig.16 is a side view, and Fig. 17 is 
a plan view, of the gearing housing or cover. 
Fig. 18 is a rear view, and Fig. 19 is a front 
view, enlarged and detached, of a portion of 
the driving-gear and clutch. Fig. 20 is a de 
tached sectional view through the axle-frame 
and axle, illustrating the manner of securing 
the parts together. 
A is the axle, and BBthe carrying-wheels, 
(having the usual ribs upon their rims to pre 
vent slipping,) journaled upon the ends. The 
hubs B B are formed with hollow cavities 
within their inner faces and with square-sided 
teeth a? in the rims of said cavities, in which 
dogs a a upon the gear C upon one side, and 
in a sleeve, D', upon the other side, are adapted 
to fit. The gear C and sleeve D are both at 
tached to the axle A, and the dogs a care set 
so that they engage with the 1atchet-teeth a', 
when the wheels B B are revolved forward, 
and slip over them when the wheels are re 
volved backward. Hence when the machine 
is drawn forward the wheels will be automati 
cally connected to the axle and revolve it with 
them, but will not affect the axle when back 
ing. By arranging the dogs and ratchets upon 
both ends of the axle the latter will be re 
volved as well when the machine is turning 
corners or short curves as when running 
straight ahead. It will be readily seen, there 
fore, that the gear C, being attached to the 
axle, will be revolved with it, the object of re 
volving the axle being to secure the necessary 
movement to the gear C. By forming the 
ratchets a? square or alike on both sides the 
dogs a a will act equally well upon both sides. 
Hence the drive-wheels may be made inter. 
changeable and prevent the necessity for right 
and left hand wheels. 
Encircling the central part of the axle A is 
a tubular frame, E, in the ends of which tubes 
E E, also encircling the axle A, are secured 
by keys and set-screws, as shown in Fig. 20, 
the outer ends of the tubes being secured in a 
like manner in small sleeves E. E., encircling 
the axle. A just inside of and butting against 
the sleeve ID' and the gear C', respectively, as 
shown, the nuts or keys for holding the wheels. 
B B upon the axles thus binding the whole 
axle-frame, axle, and drive-wheels in position, 
as well as holding the wheels B'B' in position, 
O 
IS 
3O 
35 
4. O 
45 
So 
55 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
263,29. 
O 
3O 
35 
AC 
So 
By this arrangement the entire axle is covered 
and no revolving part left exposed to catch 
and wind up the grass or grain or endanger 
the life of the operator. The central tubular 
frame, E', tubes E E, and sleeves E E may 
be cast in one piece, if desired, or constructed, 
as shown, of several parts. When constructed 
as shown the frame E and sleeves E E will 
tisually be made of cast-iron and the tubes E 
E of wrought-iron. An enlarged portion, E, 
on the end of the tubular frame E forms an oil 
cavity, whereby the central portion of the axle 
may be lubricated. 
Branching outward from the tubular frame 
E is a hollow stem, E, through the center of 
which a shaft, F, passes, the hollow being 
above the main frame E, to permit a bevel 
inion, E, to be attached to the outer end of 
the shaft F, as shown in Fig. 6. 
G' G' are brackets or arms projecting up 
ward and backward from the central frane, 
E', and sleeve E, through both of which a 
shaft, G, is journaled. Upon one end of this 
shaft G is secured a pinion, C', adapted to en 
gage with the gear C, and upon the other end 
is a bevel-gear, F, adapted to engage with the 
bevel-pinion F, so that the revolution of the 
axle A will be communicated to the shaft F. 
Encircling the shaft G, between the arms 
G' and G', and with its ends firmly secured 
therein in a similar manner to the tubes E E8 
in the axle-frame E, (see Fig. 20,) is a tube, 
E, to serve as a protector to the shaft G', and 
also to stiffen the gear-frame. 
The bevel-gear F is loose upon the sla?t G8, 
and is provided with a hub having ratchet or 
clutch teeth l' upon one side, adapted to en 
gage with similar teeth, l', upon the adjacent 
side of a grooved collar, G, having a feather 
fitting into a groove in the shaft G, whereby 
the collar G is free to be moved along the 
shaft and revolved with it, and a clutch 
formed for connecting and disconnecting the 
shaft G9 from the gear F. 
H' is a short shaft, carrying a friction-roller, 
H', (see Figs. 18 and 19,) mounted upon a pin 
eccentrically projecting from the end of said 
shaft, so that when the latter is oscillated the 
friction-roller will describe the segment of a 
circle. Hence when the friction-roller is placed 
in its position within the groove in the collar 
G and the shaft H' oscillated the collar will 
be moved back and forth along the shaft G8 
and throw the clutch b'l' in and out of gear. 
The shaft. His mounted in a hanger or bracket, 
H', attached to the tubular frame E', and said 
hanger is also provided with a projecting 
curved plate, H, extending beneath the lower 
portion of the gear F, to protect it from the 
straw and dust from below. The guard H 
and hanger H are thus formed in one piece. 
A short Weighted arm, H, upon the end of 
the shaft H enables the latter to be easily os 
Cillated back and forth, the weight being heavy 
enough to hold the clutch in whichever posi 
tion it may be left. 
Projecting upward and backward from the 
center of the tubular frame E' albove the sten 
E is a plate, E9, to which the springs c' for sup 
porting the seat I are secured, this arrange 
ment thus bringing the weight of the driver 
behind the axle to assist the balancing of the 
cutter-bar frame, the seat being adjustable to 
vary the weight. Small ribs c will be formed 
upon the side of the seat-bracket to support the 
springs c' and prevent side-play. 
Surrounding the stem E, and adapted to 
oscillate thereon, is a skein or sleeve, J', across 
the lower front side of which a tubular hanger, 
J, is constructed, the two parts J J' being 
cast in one piece. The hanger J has a tube, 
K", passing through it, and is formed with a 
split through one side and with small lugs d 
d upon opposite sides of the split, through 
which small bolts did are placed and screwed 
up to draw the sides of the hanger together 
and pinch' and firmly hold the tabe K in the 
hanger. Bolts will also be placed through the 
branches J' and tube K, to more firmly secure 
them together. Upon the outer ends of the 
tube K, just forward of the wheels B B, are 
tubular pieces K K', also formed with splits 
through one side, so that bolts did pass 
through the sides of the tubular pieces and 
tube K will hold them firmly together. Branch 
ing from the rear sides of the tubular pieces 
K8 K, at an angle, are shorter tubular arms 
KK", in which bracing arms or tubes K K' 
are secured by splits through their sides and 
bolts did passing down through them in the 
same manner as in the tubular pieces J'K' 
K', the splits for the angular portions K. K. 
being continuations of the splits in the tabu 
lar pieces KK'. The braces KK' pass back 
ward aud in Ward, and are connected by bolts 
e' e to ears ee' upon the sides of the rear end 
of the skein J. Connected by webs K9 K' 
to the front sides of the tubular end pieces, 
K. K', at right angles to them and tending 
forward and downward at an angle, are two 
other tubular pieces, K. K', in which short 
tubes K K are secured by the splits and 
bolts, in the same manner as the tube K' in 
the pieces K. K. Upon the lower ends of 
the tubes K K the shoes L' LP, connected 
to each other by the cutter-bar M', are secured, 
as shown. The skein J J', tube K', corner. 
frames K. K. K9 K10 Kil K, braces K. K", 
tubes K. Kl', shoes L'L', and cutter-bar M' 
thus form a stiff, strong frame, free to be oscil 
lated upon the stein E, to permit the cutter-bar 
to be raised at either end in running over un 
even ground, or oscillated upon the axle A 
when the Whole cutter-bar is to be elevated. 
Cast upon the side of the tubular piece K. 
is the base g of a journal-box, having a cap, 
g, in which one end of a rock-shaft, f, is 
mounted, the opposite end being similarly 
mounted in a box, 0, upon a standard, f, ris 
ing from the shoe l'. This rock-shaft is set 
On a line parallel to the stem E, and is pro 
vided upon its upper end with a crank-arm, 
75 
go 
95 
IOC 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
263,29 
3 
g, having a crank-pin, g, upon which the lower lugs E E also prevent the side thrust or 
end of a connecting rod or pitman, F, is jour 
twisting strain of the frame when turning cor 
naled. The upper end of this pitman is con 
ners from coming upon the stem E and shaft F. 
nected by a crank-pin, F, to a crank-plate, 
Upon the lower end of the shaft of a crank 
F, screwed upon the lower end of the shaft F. 
arm, g, similar to the arm g, is formed and 
By this arrangement the revolution of the shaft 
projects downward, and is provided with a 
F', through the gears FF CC, as before 
stud, g, upon which a roller, g', is mounted. 
(See Fig. 10.) 
described, will be communicated to the shaft 
g is an auxiliary arm or brace branching 
gf8 and oscillate it, the throw of the crank plate 
from the crank-arm of and running upward 
of course being shorter than the throw of the 
crank-arm (?. The pitman F is formed with 
and backward, and ends alongside of the end 
its ends split or sawed asunder at F in Fig. 
of the pitman Fopposite to the end of the crank 
arm g, so that the pivot g will pass through all 
12, and these split portions cut out in elon 
gated diamond shapes, in which wedge-shaped 
three parts, the brace g thus serving as a 
support to the pivot and preventing the rapid 
blocks F are adapted to fit, with their broad 
motion of the pitman from bending or break 
ends toward each other, and made concave, to 
ing the pivot, and at the same time strength 
embrace the sides of the crank-pins g and F. 
Bolts F9 pass down through the ends of the 
ening the crank-arm. A similar brace, g, is 
pitman, and also threugh the Wedges F, the 
attached to the lower crank-artn, g, to sup 
latter being provided with slots, through which 
port the pin (9. 
the bolts pass, so that a small degree of end 
N7 are the fingers of the cutter-bar, at 
play will be permitted to them. By this ar 
tached to the under side of the cutter-bar M", 
rangement the screwing of the bolts F9 to 
and having the sickle N lying in notches 
gether will draw the split parts toward each 
across them, and with its back edge against 
other and cause the wedges to be forced in 
the face of the cutter-bar, as shown. 
ward, and thus take up any wear that may oc 
N is a metal bar resting across the rear up 
cur and keep the parts tight and prevent rat. 
per sides of the knives, upon the end next the 
tling. 
shoe L, and secured thereon by rivets or 
It frequently occurs that the throw of the 
bolts h", passing down through said bar, the 
sickle requires adjustment to cause the knives 
sickle-knives, and the sickle-back, whereby 
to pass through the fingers N' the proper dis 
they are all firmly secured together. 
tance, especially in first setting up' the ma 
Projecting upward from near the outer end 
chine, and by means of the adjustability of the 
of the bar N are two prongs or standards, l' 
wedge-shaped blocks Fendwise I am enabled 
h', between which the friction-roller go upon 
to alter the throw of the sickle to any required 
the crank-arm g is adapted to rest, so that 
extent to adapt the cutting-knives in the proper 
When the rock-shaft g is oscillated the vibra 
Inanner to the fingers N. 
tion of the crank-arm g will move the sickle 
back and forth, the friction-roller causing it to 
Attached to the face of the central tubular 
frame, E', are two hook-shaped lugs, E E, 
act with less noise and friction. 
adapted to inclasp two lips, El E', upon the 
Through the upper ends of the prongs l'h', 
sides of the rear part of the skein J. By this 
at a sufficient distance above the friction-roller 
means the skein is held in position upon the 
to prevent interference with it, is a bolt, h", 
stem E, but is free to oscillate upon it, the 
having a small tube, h, (or other means for keep 
ing the prongs apart,) encircling it. By this 
lips El E' being wide enough to allow for all 
the necessary oscillation in operating the ma 
means the prongs are held by the bolt to pre 
vent their being spread by the vibratory mo 
chine without passing beyond the hooks E 
E"; but when it is desired to remove the skein 
tion, so that they can be made much lighter 
than if no such support existed. 
J from the stem E the former is turned around 
until the lips El E' pass beyond the lugs E8 
The weak points of the bar N3 are where 
E", as shown in Fig. 8, when the skein may 
the prongs l'h' branch from it, and to strength 
be drawn off from the stem, (the crank-plate 
en the bar without adding to its weight I ex 
E and pitman IF having of course been first 
tend the sickle-back as far as the outer end of 
the plate N and place the outer prong, h, 
removed from the shaft F.) By this means 
all the end and side thrustis borne by the lugs 
far enough inward to enable me to place one 
or hooks E. E. and lips El E, and no strain 
of the rivets hf through the plate and sickle 
endwise permitted upon the crank-plate For 
back outside the prongs. By this means the 
pinion F, while at the same time a very se 
whole plate is supported by the sickle-back, 
cure, yet easily connected or disconnected, 
especially the outer end, where its weakest 
part exists, and all danger of breakage re 
joint is formed between the sleeve and stem. 
Another advantage of this arrangement is that 
moved. 
when the machine is backed up, which very 
The forward ends of the shoes L'I are pro 
frequently occursin turning corners, the weight 
vided with upright standards Li Li, having 
of the cutter-bar and its frame is borne by the 
slots i? cut through them, in which bolts i. i* 
lugs EE", and not by the screw-thread by 
are inserted. In the inner faces of the stand 
which the crank-plate Fis secured to the shaft 
ards LLP, upon either side of the slots i', 
F', as it would if the lugs were not used. These 
shoulders are formed to receive the square 
O 
2O. 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
5 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOC 
I OS 
IO 
I 15 
J 25 
I 30 
4 
2C3,291 
O 
I 5 
35 
4.O 
45 
semicircular hoods, (38C, adapted to fit over 
heads of the bolts i' is, to prevent their turn 
the upper and lower halves of the pinion and 
). is L are the is grass-wheels, jouinaled upon 
gear and the arm G', and with their edges 
large collars it upon the bolts i i, so that a joining each other and secured by a bolt, c, 
passing through lugs c c on the hoods C'C', 
large bearing-surface may be obtained for the 
and also through the arm G. By this means 
wheels. 
the gears are protected from dust and dirt, and 
The shoe L is provided with a brace, L, con 
all danger of accident prevented, and, by sim 
necting the standard L with the rock-shaft 
ply removing one bolt, c, the whole hood may 
standard g, to stiffen and strengthen them, 
while the shoe L' is provided with a similar 
be removed. 
R is the tongue, attached at its rear end, by 
but smaller brace, L', connecting its stand 
bolts in n, to two hounds, R. R', upon either 
ard II' with the tubular portion of the shoe, in 
side. These hounds are bolted to a frame con 
which the lower end of the tube K is secured. 
sisting of a top plate, R, having cross-bars R' 
Small lugs k' k are formed upon these braces 
and two downwardly and backwardly branch 
L'L', in which the ends of rods L. L are se 
ing legs, R. R. The lower ends of these legs 
cured, and, passing backward and in ward in 
are formed to encircle the rear half of the outer 
curved lines, are connected to the bolts did of 
ends of the axle-frame E', and provided with 
the branches K K of the corner-frames of the 
caps R. R', inclasping the axle-frame on its 
cutter-bar frame, the rod L being curved up 
forward half, and the two parts of each leg se 
ward over the pitman F, so as not to be struck 
cured together by bolts p' p' p' p'. By this 
by it. These rods are intended to serve as 
arrangement the tongue-frame is connected to 
guides to turn the grass or grain inward as it 
the axle-frame E loosely, so that the tongue 
is cut and prevent its falling upon or coming 
is free to oscillate around it when the tongue 
in contact with the bitman or rock-shaft or 
is raised or lowered, or when the cutter-bar 
side frames, and to pass it between the carry 
frame is elevated or depressed, and can be 
ing-wheels B B. 
easily removed. A plate, R', is attached to 
Small lips L. L are formed upon the rear 
the hounds R*R, across their frontends, and 
lower sides of the shoes L' L, on which two 
the tongue, and a similar plate, R', is attached 
il wardly and backwardly trending track-clear 
ers, Y'Y', are pivoted, and are left free to play 
to the under side of the bounds beneath the 
rear end of the tongue, to assist the bolts n' in 
upward as far as the cutter-bar frames will al 
and prevent the whole strain coming upon 
low, but are prevented from falling downward 
them. Small ribs n' will be formed upon the 
below the line of the cutter-bar by small lips 
edges of the frame R', around the rear and 
L'L', projecting beneath them, as shown in 
outer parts of the hounds R. R., to support 
small detached rear view of one of the track 
them and prevent side-play. Wrought-iron 
clearers in the lower part of Fig. 1. By this 
braces R. R will be connected to the tongue 
means, when the cutter-bar is elevated the 
R by the bolt n, and to the lower end of the 
track-clearers will be elevated with it, but are 
tongue-frame by the bolts p' p', to stiffen and 
free to play upward when running over uneven 
support the tongue-frant. 
ground. The grass or grain is thus guided 
Projecting down from the forward end of 
inward as it falls backward over the sickle and 
the top plate, R', upon either side, are ears or 
cutter-bar, and formed into wind rows between 
lugs)'', through which a shaft, T', is journaled. 
the driving-wheels, so that neither the team 
nor the wheels pass upon the cut grass. 
The ear r is carried downward and outward 
and upward again, and is formed into a seg 
Upon the end of the sickle next the shoe L', 
mental ratchet-toothed disk, T', through which 
and opposite to the rock-shaft g', are a number 
the shaft T also passes, as shown in Figs. 2, 
of inclined teeth, m', with their inner sides per 
pendicular, adapted to pass back and forth 
3, and 14. 
upon the 
with the sickle through a slot, m, in the brace 
shaft T is another segmental disk, T, keyed 
L' of the shoe L. By this means the perpen 
or otherwise secured to the shaft and provided 
dicular front edges of these teeth m? catch the 
with a notch, t, in its upper part; and cutside 
grass or grain as it falls and draw it inward 
the disk T' is another segmental disk, T, pre 
away from the shoe L' at the inner stroke of 
cisely like the disk T, except that it is loose 
the sickle, but pass beneath it without affect. 
upon the shaft T and is cast in one piece with 
ing it at the backward or outward stroke, by 
or otherwise firmly attached to a segmental 
reason of the inclined rear edges of the teeth, 
thereby preventing the grass clogging the shoe 
grooved cam, T, also loose upon the shaft T', 
but prevented from coming off from it by a 
and permitting it to be carried inward between 
pin or collar or other suitable device. Upon 
the wheels. The vibrating crank-arm g and 
prongs l'h' perform the same office for their 
the opposite end of the shaft T is another 
grooved segmental can, T, fast upon the shaft. 
end of the machine. The grass-wheels, by be 
ing moved up or down in the slots i in the 
T T are chains attached to the cams TT 
by pins or other suitable means, and, running 
standards Li Li, adjust the cutter-bar higher 
downward, are connected to hooks t t upon 
or lower for a low or high cut. 
cover for the gears C, C, consisting of two T is an arm encircling the shaft T between 
In Figs. 16 and 17 is shown a housing or collars K. Kit, encircling the tube K. 
Between the disk T and ear 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
I O5 
Cy 
II 5 
 
263,293 
5 
'. IO 
- the disks T? T, and projecting upward and 
provided with a socket, T., in which a wooden 
hand-lever, T, is secured. Upon either side 
of the socket T0 are fourlugs, at latt', through 
which bolts at a pass, and are provided with 
coiled springs to hold them down in place. 
The lower ends of these bolts at at are adapted 
to fit into the notchest in the disks TT, 
while their upper ends are connected by rods 
at u0 to hand-levers V. V., pivoted upon either 
side of the hand-lever T, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 4. By this means either or both of the 
bolts at 
it may be withdrawn from contact 
with the disks TT by pressing inward upon 
the levers W. W., 
ul is a dog or pawl pivoted, at it', upon the 
front of the socket T', and adapted to engage 
with the ratchet-teeth of the disk T, and is 
connected by a rod, t, to a third hand-lever, 
V, pivoted to the same handle, Til. By this 
arrangement, if the hand-lever W. be pressed 
inward and the hand-lever W permitted to re 
main outward, the bolt at will be withdrawn 
from contact with the disk T, while the bolt 
will still be connected to the disk T, so that 
if the handle Till be drawn backward the disk 
T will not be affected, while the disk T4 will 
be turned around the shaft T by the bolt al., 
and being loose upon the shaft T and attached 
to the cam T, the chain T will raise that end 
of the cutter-bar and leave the other end un 
affected, and then, if the hand-lever W be 
drawn inward and hand-lever VP left undis 
turbed, the chain-cam T will be turned and 
the other end of the cutter-bar elevated. If, 
however, both ends of the cutter-bar are to be 
raised at once, both the hand-levers W. W. are 
left unmoved with the bolts at 
at both in Con 
tact with both their respective disks and the 
handle T. pulled backward, when both chain 
cams will be revolved, the dog at at all times 
catching upon the ratchets of the disk T and 
holding the lever Til wherever it may be left 
until released by pressing the hand-lever V8 
inward. 
Projecting from either side of the front eiges 
of the ratchet-disk T are stops at, against 
which the disks TT strike at their lowest 
forward position, to prevent them going too 
far, and T is a coiled spring encircling the 
shaft T between the ears ' ', and secured to 
said shaft at one end and to the plate R at the 
other, to serve as a holdback to the lever 
and its attachments, to prevent the jarring and 
shaking of the machine affecting them. 
Attached to the upper side of the tongue 
R", forward of the hounds R*R, is a plate, W, 
having a slot throughout nearly its entire 
length, in which bolts WW are inserted, with 
square lower heads resting beneath shoulders 
along the lower edges of the slot, so that while 
free to play back and forth in the slot they 
cannot be lifted out of it. 
W is another plate, resting upon top of the 
plate W, and through which the bolts W W 
pass, S0 that Said plate is free to play back and 
forth upon the plate W as far as the slot will 
permit to take up the slack of the chain when 
the cutter-bar rises over an elevation. Rising 
from the plate Wis a lug having wings W7 W8 
upon either side, and with a forwardly-project 
ing top part, W9, through whose forward end 
the bolt W passes. Through this frame, be 
tween the plates W. and W9, the double-tree 
or evener is placed, the bolt W serving as a 
king-bolt thereto, and the wings W. W.8 act. 
ing as stops to prevent the evener from being 
thrown backward too far and to prevent the 
horses backing up against the sickle. 
Upon the rear of the wings, in the center, is 
an eye, WI, in which a chain, Wil, is hooked 
and passes backward down over the end of the 
tongue between the hounds to a bail, X, upon 
the skein J", and beneath which it passes, and 
thence back to a hook formed on the end of One 
of the bolts c, which secures the seat-springs of 
to the seat-bracket E9, to which one of its links 
is hooked. By this means the draft comes 
wholly upon the chain Wil, and by passing it 
beneath the bail X before it passes to the hook 
cal lifting force is exerted upon the cutter-bar 
frame at the same time with the forward move 
ment, which greatly assists the operation of 
the machine and prevents the cutter-bar plung 
ing into every little declivity, or rising and 
falling too suddenly in running over uneven 
ground. 
The bail X is attached to the skein J by cap 
screws fly, tapped into the skein, and by pro 
viding a number of screw-holes, f', upon each 
side the bail may be adjusted to adapt the 
draft-chain to the Weight of the machine or 
the Work being done or the nature of the ground 
operated upon. 
The draft-chain may be shortened or length 
ened by hooking its links forward or backward 
upon the hook c, to adjust the chain. 
Upon the front end of the tongue R is a 
hook, R', across which the neck-yoke R is 
laid, and held thereon by a loop, R, passing 
under, the hook R4. The neck-yoke, and also 
the evener, will be long enough to cause the 
horses to travel one between the WindroWs 
formed by the track-clearers and the other in 
the edge of the uncut grass or grain, and both 
in front of the grass-wheels L. L and drive 
Wheels B B, 
F is a guard or shield to protect the under 
side of the crank-plate and pitman from the 
grass and dust or dirt. 
R is a hook pivoted to the tongue R and 
hanging down therefrom, and adapted to be 
caught under the rear edge of the cutter-bar 
M' when the latter is lifted up, to hold the 
frame when not in use, or, when moving from 
place to place, to prevent the strain coming 
Constantly upon the lifting mechanism. 
In place of the tube h, encircling the bolth', 
to keep the prongs lili from spreading, the 
bolt may be supplied with nuts l 
l inside 
the prongs, by which they may be prevented 
from spreading, or may be drawn nearer to 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
I 25 
263,291 
gether in event of the wear of the friction 
roller or prongs. These nuts li?h answer the 
same purpose as the tube h, with the addi 
tional advantage of possessing adjustability. 
The hub of the bevel-gear F is hollowed out 
beneath the teeth b', as shown in Fig. 9, to pro 
vide room for a pin to be inserted through the 
shaft G' to hold the wheel and shaft in place. 
The throw of the sickle will be sufficient to 
carry the knife-sections through two of the fin 
gers N' at each stroke, thus reducing the num 
ber of strokes one-half, and the power required 
to drive the knife is much less, because the 
stopping and starting again at each Stroke 
occurs only one-half as often. 
The cutter-bar M is made verythin and flat 
to enable it to slip under the cut grass more 
easily than it would if it were thicker or had 
an angle edge. 
The fingers N are of any preferred style, 
but should be as thin as possible. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. An axle carrying the drive-wheels, a tubul 
lar frame encircling said axle loosely midway 
between said drive - wheels, a hollow stem 
branching from the center of said tubular 
frame, and a skein or sleeve encircling said stem 
and carrying a cutter-bar frame, whereby said 
cutter-bar frame is free to oscillate upon said 
hollow stem to permit the sickle to follow the 
shape of the ground independently of the drive 
wheels, in combination with a draft-chain cen 
trally located between the drive-wheels, and 
means for connecting the motive power which 
propels the machine with the above-described 
oscillating skein, whereby a lifting force is ex 
erted upon the cutter-bar frame at the same 
time that the machine is drawn forward, with 
out interfering with its oscillatory motion, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. An axle carrying the drive-wheels, a tubu 
lar frame encircling said axle loosely midway 
between said drive - wheels, a hollow stem 
branching from the center of said tubular 
frame, a skein or sleeve encircling said stem 
and carrying the cutter-bar frame, whereby said 
cutter-bar frame is free to oscillate upon said 
hollow stem to permit the sickle to follow the 
shape of the ground independently of the drive 
wheels, and a tongue-frame attached loosely 
to said axle-frame, whereby the said axle-frame 
is free to oscillateindependently of said tongue 
frame while being drawn forward, in combina 
tion with a draft-chain attached to the axle 
frame and adjustably coupled to the foregoing 
described skein and oscillating frame, said 
draft-chain passing upward and forward, and 
being attached to the evener or other means 
for connecting the horses or other power to 
propel the machine, whereby a lifting force is 
exerted upon the cutter-bar frame at the same 
time that the machine is drawn forward, with 
out interfering with the oscillatory motion of 
the cutter-bar frame around the said stem or 
the motion of the axle-frame around said axle, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. An axle carrying the drive-wheels, a tubu 
lar frame encircling said axle loosely midway 
between said drive - wheels, a hollow stem 
branching from the center of said tubular 
frame, a skein or sleeve encircling said stem 
and carrying the cutter-bar frame, whereby 
said cutter-bar frame is free to oscillate upon 
said hollow stem to permit the sickle to follow 
the shape of the ground independently of the 
drive-wheels, and means, substantially as de 
scribed, for connecting said drive - wheels in 
their motion with and disconnecting the same 
from the sickle-operating mechanism, it coin 
bination with a centrally-applied draft-chain 
and means for connecting the motive power 
which propels the machine with the foregoing 
described skein and oscillating frame, where 
by a lifting force is exerted upon the cutter. 
bar frame at the same time that the machine 
is drawn forward without interfering with its 
oscillatory motion or the sickle-vibrating mech 
anism, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
4. The rock-shaft g', crank-arm g, auxil 
iary brace g', friction-rollerg, and studg", in 
combination with the sickleN', plateN', prongs 
h' h", and bolt h", substantially as set forth. 
5. A cutter-bar, a frame for supporting said 
cutter-bar and adapted to be oscillated upon a 
central pivot back of said cutter-bar, and means 
for elevating either or both ends of said cut 
ter-bar, in combination with a centrally-seated 
spring, T', by which said elevating mechanism 
is adjustably controlled, whereby the forward 
movement and jarring of the machine is pre 
vented from displacing the adjusting devices, 
as set forth. 
6. The combination of the tubular frame E', 
stem E, sleeve J, having the cutter-bar frame 
attached thereto, and means for elevating said 
cutter-bar frame, and a draft-chain, W, cen 
trally located midway between the driving- . 
wheels, said draft - chain being immediately 
connected to the axle-frame E', substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
7. The combination of the shaft T, cams T. 
T, with means for operating them independ 
ently, and a spring, T', substantially as set 
forth. 
8. The tongue-frame having the base R', to 
which the hounds R'R'' are secured, and legs R 
R, branching downwardly and loosely con 
nected to the axle-frame E, in combination 
with braces R' R', connecting said hounds 
and tongue-frame with the lower rear portion 
of the legs R R, whereby the hounds and 
tongue-frame are supported from both sides 
and are enabled to resist the stress of the 
draft-chain W, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
9. The tongue-frame consisting of the base 
R", to which the hounds R. R. and tongue R' 
are secured, and legs RR', said legs branching 
O 
IS 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
I o5 
O 
IIS 
s 
263,291 
- 
7. 
downwardly, and adapted to clasp half of the 
axle-frame E', and secured on the opposite 
side by removable caps R. R., whereby the 
tongue-frame is adapted to freely oscillate 
5 about the axle-frame and to be easily attached 
and detached therefrom, substantially as set 
forth. 
10. The axle-frame having a central stem 
branching therefrom, a skein encircling said 
Io stem and carrying the cutter-bar frame, and a 
draft-chain connected to said skein, incombina 
tion with the hounds RR', and a tongue-frame 
consisting of a base, R, and downwardly 
branching legs R R, with their lower ends 
I5 attached loosely to said axle-frame to permit 
11. A centrally-located draft-chain, in com- 20 
oscillation, said draft-chain passing upward 
and forward centrally, whereby the draft of 
the machine is opposite the center of the cut 
ter-bar and axle, substantially as set forth. 
bination with the skein J", which carries a cut 
ter-bar frame, said skein having the adjustable 
bail X, for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 25 
Witnesses. 
CHRISTOPHER, W, IEWALLEY. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. O'BRIEN, 
R. M. KIEFER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263391.txt	(No Model.) 
W. L., COOK & S. E. MOWER 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 263,391, 
B00K STAPLING MACHINE, 
Patented Aug. 29, 1882, 
 
WITNESSES 
NW ENT ORS: 
4 shy-6 a A & 
(No Model.) 
W. L. COOK & S. E. MOWER 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
BOOK STAPLING MACHINE, 
No. 263,391, 
Patented Aug. 29, 1882, 
WITNESSES 
INVENT ORS: 
  
 
(No Model.) 
W. L., COOK & S. E. MOWER 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 263,391. 
Fig. 4. 
BOOK STAPLING MACHINE, 
Patented Aug. 29 
Fig. 5. 
Fig. 5. 
1882, 
 
NVENT ORS, 
7's 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Wa 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM L. COOP, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND, AND SAMUEL E. 
MOWER, OF MILFORD, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNORS TO HENRY G. 
THOMPSON & SON, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
BOOK STAPLNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 263,891, dated August 29, 1882. 
Applicatiou filed June 17, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern : . 
Beit known that we, WILLIAML, CoOP, of 
the city and county of Providence, and State 
of Rhode Island, and SAMUEL E. MoWER, of 
Milford, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Machines for Binding 
Books with Wire Staples; and we hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon. 
Corresponding letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the drawings. 
This invention has reference to improvements 
in machines used for securing paper pam 
phlets or books together by means of wire sta 
ples made from a coil of wire and driven by 
the machine. 
The invention consists in the novel construc 
tion of the various parts, as will be more fully 
set forth hereinafter, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the im 
proved machine, showing the wire in position. 
Fig. 2 is a front view, showing a full-size ma 
chine, parts of the frame and the front plate 
being removed so as to show the operating 
parts more fully. Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional 
view, showing most of the parts in their rela 
tive positions when the actuating - lever is 
raised to its highest point. Fig. 4 is a per 
spective view of the lower part of the front 
cover, showing the wire-cutting lever provided 
with circular cutters and the anvil over which 
the staple is bent. Fig. 5 is a perspective 
view of the presser and staple-bender, showing 
the cut length of wire placed ready for bend 
ing and a bent staple placed ready to be driven 
by the descending driver. Fig. 6 is a view of 
the anvil-plate and a fixed plate provided with 
beveled horns or guides by which the arms 
of the staple are held so as to enter the groove 
under the driver, as is shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 
7 is a view of the end of the driver, showing 
the convex end thereof bearing on the center 
of the staple, and thereby holding the ends of 
45 
35 
25 
So 
55 
the staple against the sides of the driving 
groove. Figs. 8, 9, and 10 are sectional views 
of the clinching-plate, showing the staples 
in contact with the same, Fig. 10 represent 
ing the staple turned inward until the ends 
are at or nearly at right, angle to the curved 
surface of the plate, when by the exertion of 
additional pressure the staple is bent, as is 
shown in broken lines. Fig. S represents the 
effect of the plate on the staple after it is so 
bent, and Fig. 9 shows the ends of the staple 
driven into the material and the staple firmly 
clinched. 
In the drawings, A represents the base or 
table on which the paper or other material to 
be secured together is placed. 
B is a hollow standard, to which and within 
which the various parts of the machine are 
Secured. 
c is the front plate, constructed so as to be 
readily removed to give access to the interior 
parts. 
ID is the wire-cutter hinged to the plate c 
on a pin provided with a thumb-piece, so that 
it can be readily withdrawn and the cutter re 
moved. 
E is the actuating-lever, by the vertical piv 
otal movement of which all the various parts 
of the machine are operated, so that at each 
downward motion a length of wire is deliv 
ered, a staple formed, and a staple driven, 
while at each upward motion a length of wire 
is cut. F is the feed-lever by which the wire is fed, 
and G is the spool containing the wire from 
which the staples are formed. 
- 
H is the staple former and presser. 
I is the driver provided with a beveled cam, 
against which a projecting arm of the hinged 
cutter D bears, so that in ascending the driver 
forces the upper end of the cutter outward and 
the lower inward to cut the wire, while in de 
scending the opposite motion is performed, 
and the wire is free to enter the groove of the 
cutter to be cut on the next ascent of the 
driver. K is the clinching-plate. 
Referring now more particularly to the de 
65 
o 
75 
85 
75 
O 
IS 
O 
263,89. 
g 
tails of the machine, reference is made to 
Figs. 2, 4, and 5, in which the circular steel 
cutters a, at are shown. They consist of short 
cylinders of steel, held in place each by a 
screw, the cylindrical cutters on the cutter 
plate D having their axes at right angles to. 
the cutters on the face of the machine. Each 
cutter can be turned on its axis when the cut 
ting-edge becomes worn and a new cutting 
edge presented, so that the One set of cutters 
will last an indefinite length of time. In a 
machine, as the present, which is intended for 
use in offices, and not under the care of a me 
chanic, the use of these cutters is an impor 
tant improvement on this class of machines. 
The cylindrical cutters are ground to a true 
face on both ends, and when in time the whole 
of one circular end has been worn the other 
face can be presented and used around the 
whole circle of this end. 
l) is the anvil over which the wire staple is 
lent by the projecting sides h. h of the presser 
II. The anvill forms part of the front plate, 
c, and is provided with the extension b', which 
forms a guide for the staple, and holds the 
staple under the driver until it has entered 
the material to be bound together. 
c' is a spring secured in the front plate, c, 
the lower end of which spring bears upon the 
formed staple and holds the same until the 
driver in its descent compresses the spring c' 
and forces the staple downward to drive the 
SO. 
To the lower end of the presser H the plate 
h' is secured, and this plate is provided with 
beveled horns or guides l'. The inner face of 
this plate h' is slotted, so as to receive the an 
vil b and form a bearing for the extension b', 
as is shown in Fig. 6. Considering, now, that 
the presser H has in descending bent a staple 
over the anvill, which staple is held by the 
spring c', as is shown in Figs. 4, 5, and 6, then 
as the presser ascends the horns or guides h 
of the plate h' will come in contact with the 
ends of the staple, and will force these ends 
against the all vill). The driver I now ascends 
independent of the presser, and a new piece 
of wire is cut, the cutter pushing the first sta 
ple into the groove under the driver by which 
it is driven. 
In machines as previously constructed the 
staple would not readily enter under the driver 
and Would become cramped, so that the oper. 
ation of the machine stopped, and the staple 
was obliged to be removed, causing loss of 
inne and annoyance to such an extent that 
such machines were not adapted for practical 
general use. 
To feed the wire to the machine automati 
ally, We provide the actuating-lever E with the 
ame and the feed-arm F with the camf, and 
rovide both of these with springs, by which 
hey are returned to their points of rest after 
hey have been operated. 
When, now, the act 
atilig-lever E is moved downward the can 
comes in contact with the cam f and moves 
the end of the arm F toward the cutters, and 
when the actuating-lever is raised the arm F 
returns to its place of rest against the adjust 
able stop f", formed by a threaded screw, which 
can be turned and made to project more or less, 
so as to regulate the length of wire to be fed 
to the cutters. 
To simplify the construction of the machine, 
and facilitate the adjustment of the wire in the 
machine, we provide the lower part of the arm 
F and the frame c with the hinged pawls (l, 
and hold the same with a spring against the 
plate d', so that the wire will be firmly held in 
one direction and free to pass between the 
pawl and plate in the opposite direction. The 
ends of the plate d' are slotted, so as to guide 
the wire and retain the same under the pawl. 
The clinch-plate R forms part of the table A, 
on which the material to be secured together 
rests, and its peculiar configuration produces 
novel and valuable effects on the staple. It 
consists in a raised rim or edge, 1, forming a 
parallelogram of a length, as shown in con 
nection with the staples in Figs. S, 9, and 10, 
and of a width, as shown in Fig. 3, of practi 
cally a depth equal to the thickness of the sta 
ple, thus forming a groove with a raised edge 
on which the sheets of paper are compressed 
by the follower on the edge 11, and the staple 
is driven through this tightly-compressed pa 
per or other material, striking first the con 
caves 22, on which the ends slide toward the 
convex center 3, until the ends of the staple 
are at or nearly at right angles with the sur 
face of the plate, when the wire will bend, as 
is shown in broken lines in Fig. 10. The bent 
ends now follow the curved surface, as is 
shown in Fig. 8, and will enter the material, 
as is shown in Fig. 9, firmly clinching the 
staple and securing the sheets together; or 
the convex surface may be omitted, if the ends 
are not to enter the material. It must be re 
membered that during the driving of the staple 
the material is firmly compressed on all sides 
around the staple between the end of the 
presser and the raised edge 1. 
I is an adjustable guide, against Which the 
material to be bound together is held. The 
guide can be adjusted readily by drawing the 
same in or out, and can be quickly Secured by 
means of the clamp-screw l. 
The driver I is connected by means of a link, 
as shown in Fig. 2, with the actuating-lever 
E, thereby giving a positive motion to the 
driver, which is followed up until the staple is 
driven home and clinched. The presser is not 
directly connected, but has a yielding connec 
tion consisting of the rod 0, around which the 
spring p is coiled. The rod 0 passes through 
a bracket on the rear of the presser, and the 
strain of the spring p is partially resisted by 
the coiled spring 1 on the lower end of the rod 
o, which also acts as a cushion against the 
presser when the actuating - lever is raised, 
causing the horns of the plate h' to bend the 
legs of the staple close to the anvill and hold 
I 25 
95 
OO 
IO 5 
O 
I5 
263,391 
3 
5 
O 
the presser in position while the cutter forces 
the staple into the groove to be driven. The 
presser can thus adjust itself to the thickness 
of the material independent of the driver, which 
can be forced down to complete the driving and 
clinching, and the stored-up force of the spring 
p will assist the raising of the actuating-lever. 
This machine is designed for hand use in 
offices, and for such purposes as it is adapted. 
It can be conveniently used by any one, and is 
not liable to get out of order. 
We do not claim to be the first and joint in 
ventors of the combination of a spool of wire 
and an automatic wire-feeding device, a wire 
cutter, a staple-former, a presser connected 
with the driver by a yielding connection, a 
clinching-plate, and a single operating-lever, 
all connected and arranged so that one up 
ward and downward movement of the single 
operating-lever will communicate the neces 
sary movements to the other parts for feeding 
the wire, cutting the same, forming, inserting, 
and clinching a staple, as this is the sole in 
vention of William L. Coop. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The combination, with the presser and the 
driver, of the clinching-plate K, consisting of 
the raised edge 1, the concaves 22, and the 
convex surface 3, constructed to bend the ends 
of the staple inward, as and for the purpose 
described. 
2. The combination, with the presser pro 
vided with the shoulders h h and the driver, 
of the anvil b, provided with the downward 
25 
35 
projection b', depending in front of the presser, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the presser H and 
anvil b, of the plate h", attached to the front 
of the lower end of the presser, and provided 
with the horns h, arranged to press the ends 
of the staple closely upon the sides of the an 
vil as the presser ascends, substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a machine for binding books with wire 
staples, the combination, with the wire-cutter 
and staple-former, of the anvil and the spring 
c', constructed to hold the staple until it is re 
leased by the driver, as described. 
5. In a machine for binding books with wire 
staples, the combination, With the presser, of 
a driver, the end of which is formed with a 
convex surface to bear against the staple near 
the center, as described. 
6. The combination, with the actuating-le 
ver E, the driver I, operated directly, and the 
presser H, connected by means of the rod O 
and spring p, of the spring q, constructed to 
counteract the force of the spring p and cush- 6o 
ion the presser, as described. 
hands. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto set our 
S5 
A5 
5 
WILLIAM L. COOP. 
SAMUEL E. MOWER. 
Witnesses for Coop: 
J. A. MILLER, Jr., 
JOSEPH. C. BOMS. 
Witnesses for Mower: 
HENRY G. THOMPSON, 
H. GRANT THOMPSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263493.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 263,493. 
B. DOBBAS. 
MINER'S LAMP, 
Patented Aug. 29, 1882, 
 
- 
Arvizzassas, 
6...f6 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BERNARD DOBBAs, OF GREEN WOOD, CALIFORNIA. 
MNER'S LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,493, dated August 29, 1882. 
Application filed April 8, 1882. (No model.) 
d 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BERNARD DOBBAs, of 
Green Wood, in the county of El Dorado and 
State of California, have made and invented a 
certain new and useful Improvement in Min 
ers' Lamps; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings. 
My invention relates to an improved lamp 
for laborers' and miners' use under ground, 
and in similar localities where it is subjected 
to rough usage. 
It has for its object to produce a strong, 
durable, and cheaply-constructed lamp, capa 
ble of being suspended or set up in any de 
sired position for service, and, when not in 
use, being adapted to be readily carried about 
by the Workman from place to place upon his 
person. 
The following description clearly sets forth 
the nature of my invention and the manner of 
carrying out, applying, and using the same. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical Section taken longitudinally through 
the body of the lamp across the center. Fig. 
2-shows the lamps suspended in position for 
service. Fig. 3 is a top view of the front half 
of the body, where the inlet and the wick tube 
are located. 
The lamp-body A has in cross section the 
form of a double-convex disk, hollow within, 
and having an opening in the uppermost side 
to permit the introduction of oil and the in 
sertion of a wick into the chamber. It has 
somewhat the shape of a canteen with the 
neck taken off, and when in service it is held 
in a horizontal position. 
At opposite sides, and projecting above the 
top face, are two lugs or ears, bb, to receive 
and form points of connection for the ends of a 
bail or handle, C. These ears are placed dia 
metrically opposite to each other, and have 
the ends of the bail connected to them by a 
hinge-joint, c, so that the lamp-body is main 
tained in a horizontal position, whatever may 
be the conditions under which it is employed. 
This construction also permits the body A to 
be turned flatwise into the space between the 
side bars of the bail when being carried about 
from place to place and not in use, or when 
packed for shipment. 
The aperture E in the top of the body is 
closed by a cap or plate, G, in which are fixed 
a wick-tube, g, and an air-vent,g'. By means 
of a thumb-screw, I, that passes down through 
the plate and takes into a bridge piece or 
bar, k, this covering-piece is held down in 
place within the rimi of the opening E. The 
object of this construction is twofold. It af. 
fords a large opening in the lamp-body, of 
suitable size for readily removing a core from 
the interior space, so that the body A can be 
easily cast in one piece, and it enables the 
wick and vent tubes to be readily replaced 
when worn out or broken, and to be removed 
for cleaning purposes. 
The body A can be produced either by 
casting it in one piece or by brazing together 
two saucer-shaped disks, rim to rim. The 
ears b b can also be formed either by casting 
them integral with the body or by attaching 
them in position in slots cut into the sides of 
the body and securing them all together by 
brazing the joints. 
This lamp is especially adapted for rough 
usage and handling. It is cheap and durable, 
and is readily placed or suspended in any re 
quired position for service. 
The swivel H at the top of the bail forms a 
place of attachment for a suspension-hook or 
a chain. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The lamp-body A, having the ears b b, 
for attachment of a bail or handle, and the 
aperture E in its top, in combination with a 
cap or cover, G, having wick and vent tubes g 
g', and a screw, I, and bar k, having a screw 
threaded hole, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the lamp-body A, 
having the aperture E in its top, with a sur 
rounding rim, j, and the plate G, with vent 
tube and wick-tube gg', and the fastening de 
vice consisting of the thumb-screw, and the 
bridge-piece fixed across the aperture E, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The improved miner's lamp herein de 
scribed, consisting of the body A, of double 
convex shape, having ears b b, the bail or 
handle C, attached by hinge-joint to the ears, 
the aperture E in the top of the body, the 
bridge-piece, and the plate G, with tubes g g', 
and fastening-screw, substantially as set forth. 
BERNARD DOBPAS, 
Witness my hand and seal. 
In presence of - 
EDWARD E. OSBORN, 
D. SELLECK. 
L. S. 
6o 
65 
7o 
75 
8o 
85 
9o 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263593.txt	(Model.) 
I, A, ROWELL, 
ADJUSTABLE MOP HOLDER. 
No. 263,593, 
Patented Aug. 29, 1882 
 
WITNESSES : 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC A. ROWELL, OF NEW PARIS, INDIANA. 
ADJUSTABLE MOP. HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,593, dated August 29, 1882. 
Application filed May 9, 1882. (Model.) 
65 
7 O 
75 
IC 
IS 
s 
between which and the cross-bar O (dotted, 
Be it known that I, ISAAC A. ROWELL, of Fig. 1) a thin metal toothed plate, comb, or 
scraper, B, may be gripped by the spring of 
the coils, for scraping floors, stretching carpet, 
and other like uses, and the jaw H has a half. 
round coil, Q, in which to hold the handle of 
a whitewash-brush, feather-duster, and other 
like implement, by gripping it against theside 
of jaw I. 
It will be seen that the improved holder 
thus constructed may be employed for hold 
ing a considerable variety of objects in differ 
ent ways for various useful purposes. 
By shifting the part E around in part A on 
the axis of the key the clamps may be set at 
any angle desired between the shoulders a b 
of the rim of part A. 
The interlocking ribs and grooves of the 
ratchets hold the parts substantially to pre 
vent turning. 
I propose to construct the toothed carpet 
stretching plate P with a knife-edged notch, 
d, in the middle, or thereabout, to enable it to 
be used for pruning currant, berry, fruit, and 
other trees, and for a device to pick fruit by 
cutting the stems, thus providing a convenient 
implement for various household uses, with 
which a lady may also trim brier and other 
garden shrubs and vines without injury to the 
hands. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The improved adjustable key ratchet 
holder, consisting of handle-cup A, having 
ratchet-bottom C, and being rimless in a por 
tion of its circumference, and the shank-Cup 
E, having ratchet-bottom F, and carrying the 
springjaws HI and fastening device M, said 
cups being detachably fastened together by a 
key, G, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a pair of spring 
clamps, HI, and an adjustable ratchet-holder, 
A E, one of said clamps having gripping-coils 
N, arranged with respect to cross-bar O, sal). 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of a pair of spring 
clamps, HI, and an adjustable ratchet-holder, 
A E, one of said clamps having a half-coil, Q, 
substantially as described. 
To all chon it may concern: 
New Paris, in the county of Elkhart and State 
of Indiana, have invented a new and Improved 
Adjustable Mop-Holder, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My improved mop-holder consists of clamps 
adapted for holding a mop, sponge, scraper, 
carpet-stretcher, broom and brush handles, 
and other objects for which the said clamps 
are specially contrived, the said clamps be 
ing attached to an adjustable key and ratchet 
holder, by which they can be readily shifted 
into different positions required by the dif. 
ferent objects to be held and the different 
kinds cf work to be performed, as hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
Which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure l is a perspective view of my im 
proved mop-holder. Fig. 2 is a plan view of 
a part of the holder. Fig. 3 is a plan view of 
another part of the holder, and Fig. 4 is a trans 
verse section of the holder in the condition for 
use, as represented in Fig. 1. 
A represents a cup-shaped device. having a 
handle, B, and a ratchet-bottom, C, with a 
key-hole, D, through the center of the bottom, 
and also with a part of the rim cut away from 
(t to b on one of the quarters. 
E represents another cup, sufficiently smaller 
than A to be set bottom up within it. It 
also has a ratchet-bottom, F, similar to ratchet 
C of cup A; and it also has a key-hole, D', 
coinciding with hole D of cup A. These two 
cups are to be fastened together by a key, G, in 
the manner clearly shown in Figs. 1 and 4, 
the key being used for readily detaching and 
fastening them, so that they can be easily taken 
apart and put together for shifting the parts 
with respect to each other. 
- 
The part I of the holder has a pair of 
spring-wire clamping-jaws, H and I, attached 
to it by their shanks K. L., on which there is 
a slide, M, for closing them together to cause 
them to grip a sponge, mop, or other like ob. 
ject between them, for holding it to be used 
for mopping, scrubbing, and other purposes by 
the handle B. 
The jaws HI are in the main part like rect 
angular frames, made by bending the wires of 
the shank suitably therefor; but in addition 
thereto the one I is constructed with coils N, 
ISAAC. A. ROWELL, 
Witnesses: 
R. M. JOHNSON, 
MAX DEMBUFSKEY. 
yo 
95 
CO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263695.txt	(NO Model.) 
No. 263,695, 
W. GLOVER, 
REST FOR COTTON BALES, 
Patented Sept. 5, 1882, 
3-...-- 
  
 
ITNESSES 
- 
P 
/ 
f 
p 
5 
INVENTOR 
Attorney 
N Peters. Photo-ithograp 
her, Washington, 
D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILSON GLOVER, OF CHARLESTON, SOUTH CAROLINA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
HALF TO J. L. ROXBURGH, OF SAME PLACE. 
REST FOR COTTON-BALES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,695, dated September 5, 1882. 
Application filed August 2, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILSON GLOWER, of 
Charleston, in the county of Charleston and 
State of South Carolina, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Rests for 
Cotton-Bales; and I do hereby declare the foll 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it pertains to at one side of the block by a screw a, or in any 6o 
make and use the same. 
O 
65 
2 represents a detached view of one of my im- . 
proved rests secured to a portion of the bag 
ging of the bale. Fig. 3 is a similar view of a 
. 
modification. Figs. 4 and 5 are modifications. 55 
A represents a block of wood, metal, paper, 
or any other suitable material, preferably 
rounded at its upper end to receive a band, B, 
preferably of spring metal, which is secured 
other desired manner. This band Bisadapted 
to pass through a portion of the bagging C of 
the bale, as shown in Figs, 2 and 3, and se 
cured at its opposite end to the adjacent side 
of the block A in any desired manner. 
I have shown in Fig. 1 my preferred con 
struction of the band B, in which the free end 
b of the latter is provided with a longitudinal 
slot, l', adapted to take over a button or screw 
eye, b, secured to the adjacent side of the 7o 
block A. I do not, however, limit myself to 
any particular form of devices for securing the 
end of the band to the block. Modifications 
of the fastenings are shown in Figs. 3 and 4. 
Neither do Ilimit myself to the use of the band 75 
B as a retaining device for the block, as it will 
be apparent that many other equally suitable 
devices may be employed to secure the blocks 
in position. For instance, as shown in Fig. 5, 
I may use a spiral screw, Z, driven into the 8o 
upper side of the block, and adapted to be 
screwed into the bagging of the bale. Ordi. 
narily four blocks are used with each bale, as 
shown in Fig. 1; but I do not restrict myself 
to the number shown, as more or less than 85 
four may be employed, and, as shown in Fig. 
4, instead of forming the blocks of the nearly 
square form shown, the same may be made 
longer, so that only two will be required, one 
on each side of the end of the bale. 
It is obvious that my invention admits of 
many alterations and modifications without 
departing from its scope and spirit. Hence I 
would have it understood that I do not limit 
myself to the specific devices herein shown 95 
and described, but reserve to myself the right 
to make all such changes as the nature of my 
invention Warrants. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters IOO 
Patent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a rest or 
90 
My invention relates to rests for bales of cot. 
ton. 
It is well known that a large amount of cot 
ton is damaged after baling by the contact of 
the bale with damp floors or muddy ground. 
It frequently happens that the bales are de 
livered at a wharf or warehouse during a 
shower of rain, and are stood up on their ends 
and allowed to remain for a while, and in such 
instances the bale will be found to be dam 
aged at the end upon which it rested. 
The object of my invention is to obviate the 
difficulty above noted by providing a bale 
with removable and portable rests adapted to 
be readily secured to the bale, so that the lat 
ter will be supported above the ground or 
floor, and thus protected. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with a bale, of rests or supports adapted to be 
removably secured thereto, as fully described 
hereinafter. 
The invention further consists in the combi 
nation, with a bale, of rests or supports pro 
vided with devices for securing the same to 
the bale. 
The invention further consists in the combi. 
nation, with a bale, of rests or supports pro 
vided with devices for engaging the bagging 
of the bale, as hereinafter set forth. 
The invention further consists in the combi. 
nation, with a bale, of a rest or support pro 
vided with a metallic band secured at one end 
to one side of the rest, and adapted to pass 
through a portion of the bale and be detacha 
bly secured at its opposite end to the adjacent 
side of the rest. 
The invention further consists in a portable 
rest or support for cotton-bales, adapted to be 
removably secured to the bale. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a bale 
of cotton provided with my improvement, Fig. 
m 
25 
35 
4 O 
45 
 
2 
263,695 
O 
IS 
portion of the bagging of the bale, of devices 
for detachably securing the free end of the 
band, substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination, with the block, of a 
band of spring metal secured at one end to 
one side of the block and adapted to pass 
through a portion of the bagging of the bale, 
while its free end is slotted and adapted to 
engage a stud or other retaining device on the 
adjacent side of the block, substantially as set 
forth. 
8. The combination, with a block or support, 
of a spiral screw adapted to be screwed into 
5. The combination, with a bale, of a block the bagging of a bale, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed this speci 
fication in the presence of two subscribing wit 
support for bales provided with devices for se 
curing it to the bale, substantially as set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a block 
or rest for bales, provided with a grasping and 
clamping device, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a bale, of rests or 
supports provided with devices for removably 
securing the same to the bale, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. The combination, with a bale, of rests or 
supports provided with devices for engaging 
the bagging of the bale, substantially as set 
forth, 
or support provided with a band secured at 
one end to one side of the block and adapted 
to pass through a portion of the bagging of messes. 
the bale and be detachably secured at its op 
posite end to the adjacent side of the block, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the block and the 
band, the latter being adapted to engage a 
E. A. BALAGNER, 
F. C. BLACK. 
WILSON GLOWER, 
- 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263795.txt	(No Model.) 
A., MELZER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
LOOM FOR WEAWING NETTED FABRICS, 
 
No. 263,795, 
Patented Sept. 5, 1882, 
INVENTOR: C/ 
de 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
- 
A. MELZ.E.R. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
LOOM FOR WEAVING NETTED FABRICS, 
No. 263,795. - 
Patented Sept. 5, 18 
. . . 
//-4 
N 
8) 
s 
BY 
- 
INVENTOR: 
(2. 727/ 
vlev. 
ATTORNEYs, 
. 
- 
- - 
- 
- 
si 
WITNESSES: 
/ 
SAA2A, 2A42 
) . 
. . 37 
u 
(63. 42- S s 6 A 4. RS 
AA Saf'AAA 
-6 - a vore, 
zygy 
& 
as 
4. 
a- 
l 
WV 
x 
- 
. 
s 
SS 
N 
S 
& SS 
hoto-Lithographer, Washington.o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ALEXAN DER MEL ZER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
LOOM FOR WEAVING NETTED FABRICS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 263,795, dated September 5, 1882. 
Application filed September 7, 1881. (No model.) 
Io of any desired pattern. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER MELZER, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and Improved Loom for 
5 Weaving Netted Fabrics, of which the follow. 
ing is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved loom which can be adjust 
ed to be adapted for weaving netted fabrics 
The invention consists in a loom provided 
with a loosely-mounted twister for each pair 
of warp-threads, the warp-threads passing 
longitudinally through the twister and through 
I5 opposite eyes at edges of one end of the twister, 
whereby the Warp-threads will be twisted when 
the spool is rotated. Around each twister a 
cord is coiled having a weight attached to its 
lower end and having its upper end attached 
2O to a pivoted lever connected with a treadle, 
whereby all the twisters connected with this 
treadle will be revolved when the treadle is 
depressed, and all the corresponding warp 
threads will be twisted, the combination of 
25, the twisters and treadles being varied as the 
design may require. 
The invention further consists in a separate 
pair of heddles for each pair of warp-threads, 
which heddles areformed of two vertically-slid 
ing and longitudinally-slotted bars connected 
by a cord passing over a pulley of the loom 
frame, one of the bars being connected with a 
pivoted lever connected with a treadle, the 
other bar being provided with a weight for 
35 drawing it downward. In the slot of each slid 
ing bar a hook provided with a bend or swell 
ing in its shank is pivoted and is pressed into 
the slot by a spring. The hook of one sliding 
heddle-bar is pivoted in the upper end of the 
slot, and the hook of the other bar is pivoted 
in the lower end of the slot in the said bar, so 
that when the heddle-operating treadle is de 
pressed the hooks will be forced outward by 
the swelled portion of the hooks striking the 
edges of apertures of the platform or guide 
frame, and will catch the warp-threads and sep 
arate them. 
Theinvention further consists in the arrange 
ment and construction of parts and details, as 
So will be more fully described hereinafter, and 
pointed out in the claims, 
45 
m 
to: 
55 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
ligure 1 is a sectional plan view of my im 
proved loom for weaving netted fabrics. Fig. 
2 is a longitudinal sectional elevation of the 
same on the line aa of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation of the heddles. Fig. 4 is alongitudi. 6o 
nal sectional elevation of one of the heddle 
bars on the line & 2 of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a lon 
gitudinal sectional elevation of a twister. Fig. 
6 is a front end elevation of the same. Fig. 
7 is a cross-sectional elevation of the same on 65 
the line y y of Fig. 5, showing also the cord 
and weight by which it is rotated. Fig. 8 is 
a plan view of a sample of a certain pattern 
of the netted fabrics made with my improved 
loom. 
Each pair of warp-threads T T is wound 
on one of a series of spools, A', loosely mount. 
ed on transverse rods or shafts A of the loom 
frame B. A cord, B', is attached to and wound 
several times around each spool, and has a 75 
Weight, B', at its lower end, and thus keeps the 
Warps taut. From the spools At the pairs Aof 
warp-threads pass through guides C, and from 
these guides each pair A is passed longitudi 
nally through the central longitudinal aperture, 8o 
c', of a separate twister, D, loosely mounted in a 
standard, E, and provided with a flange, D', 
at the end farther from the spools A. Each 
twister D is further provided with a circular 
rib, D', at the end toward the spools A', and 85 
With a circular rib, D, resting against the 
standard E, the twister being held in the ap 
erture in the standard E by the flange D and 
the rib D', as shown in Fig. 5. The end of 
the twister D farther from the spools A' (which 9o 
shall be known as the front' end) is provided 
with two central wire loops or eyes, F. F., 
through which the threads T. T. pass, one 
thread passing from the center of the twister 
through an eye or loop, G', near the circum-95 
ference of the front or flanged end of the 
twister, and the other thread passing through 
an eye or loop, G', near the circumference of 
the front or flanged end of the twister D and 
diametrically opposite the loop G. The flange Ioo 
D' is provided with a notch, E, in its edge, 
and a spring, E, attached to the standard E, 
263,795 
O 
(5 
2O 
25 
3. 
35 
45 
SO 
55 9. 
rests against the edge of this flange, as Fig.6 
shows. A cord, H, is coiled one or more times 
around the twister D, between the ribs D'D', 
and a weight, H', is suspended from the lower 
end of this cord EI, the upper end of this cord 
being attached to one end of a lever, J., piv. 
oted on the top of the frame B of the loom. 
The other end of this lever is connected by a 
cord, K, with a treadle, L'. One or more 
cords, H, may be attached to the lever J', the 
remaining cords H being attached to a likele 
ver, J, connected by a cord, K?, with a treadle, 
I?. More treadles L. L and levers J J', &c., 
may be provided, and the several cords H may 
be connected with the various levers JJ, &c., 
as the pattern of the netted fabric may re 
quire. As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, there are 
six twisters D, three being connected with the 
lever J and three with the lever J. The sev. 
eral standards E rest on and are secured on a 
platform, M, resting on the loom-frame B. 
From the twisters D the threads TT pass to 
the heddles N. Each pair of heddles consists 
of two vertically-sliding bars, NN, guided by 
the apertured platform M and an apertured 
frame, O, these bars N N being both sus 
pended from a cord, P, passing over a pulley, 
Q, suspended from the upper part of the frame 
B. One bar-for instance, N'-of each pair of 
heddles is connected by a wire or cord, M', 
with a lever, P', pivoted to the frame, and hav 
ing its free end connected by a cord, Q', with 
a treadle, L. The other bar, N, of each pair 
of heddles has a weight, R, suspended from 
its lower end. Each bar N or N is provided 
with a longitudinal slot, S, in which a heddle 
hook, T, is pivoted, this hook being pressed 
into the slot S by a spring, S', attached to the 
bar N or N2. 
The shank of the hook T is pro 
vided with a bend or swelling, S', extending in 
a direction opposite to that in which the hook 
extends. The hookT of one bar-for instance, 
N*-is pivoted at the upper end of the bar, 
and the point of the hook projects upward, and 
the hook T of the other bar, N, is pivoted at 
the lower end of the bar, and the point of the 
hook projects downward. Each pair Aof warp 
threads has a separate pair of heddles, N, con 
structed as described, and the threads rest 
against the edges of the bars N N, as shown 
in Fig. 1, from which edges the hooks T will 
project when the loom is operated, as will be 
fully set forth hereinafter. After passing the 
heddles N the threads T. T. pass through 
uides V and through a batten or reed, U, at 
tached to the lower end of a lever, U?, pivoted 
to the top of the frame B, and having its up 
per end drawn to the rear of the frame B by 
a spiral or other spring, U*, whereby the bat. 
ten is forced to the front of the loom-frame. 
The completed fabric W passes over a roller, 
V, and is wound on a beam, Y. 
The operation is as follows: I will first de 
scribe the operation of the twisters D, then 
that of the heddles N, and then the various 
modifications in the combinations of the twist 
ers D. If the treadle L' or LP is depressed, the 
front end of the corresponding lever, J or J', 
will be lowered and the rear end will be raised, 
and consequently all the cords H attached to 
the lever that is operated will be pulled up 
ward, and as these cords pass around the twist 
ers D the corresponding twisters will be re 
volved in the direction of the arrow a', Figs. 
6 and 7, the weights H being raised accord 
ingly. When a twister has made one revolu 
tion in the direction of the arrow at the spring 
E snaps into the notch E' again. When the 
treadle L' or IP is released the weights H' will 
pull the cords H downward again, and would 
rotate the twisters in the reverse direction to 
that indicated by the arrow a'; but as each 
twister is held by its spring E such re 
verse movement of the spool is prevented, and 
the cords B, which are drawn downward by 
the weights H', slide or slip over the surface of 
the twisters D, thereby lowering the rear end 
and raising the front end of the lever J and J 
and raising the corresponding treadle, L' or L. 
Every time one of the treadles L' or L is de 
pressed the above operation is repeated. When 
the treadles L' or L* are operated the threads T. 
T of the warps are not to be separated by the 
heddles. Every time a twister D is rotated the 
threads T. T. will receive one twist, for the 
threads TT pass through diametrically-oppo 
site eyes G' G on the twisters D, and as the 
ends of the threads are held firmly (at the end 
of the completed part of the fabric) it is evi 
dent that a rotation of a twister D will cause 
twisting of the corresponding threads T. T. 
These threads will, however, not become so 
tightly twisted in the rear of the twister-that 
is, between the twister and spool-but what the 
tension of the said threads will be sufficient to 
cause them to pass through the said twister in 
the operation of the loom. 
In the case shown three and three twisters 
are combined; but, if desired, each twister may 
be operated independently. Two and two may 
be combined, or two and four, or three and 
two, or four and two, or one and five-that is, 
the twisters may be combined in any desired 
manner, so that a certain number of them will 
be revolved simultaneously, according to the 
pattern desired. As has been stated, the 
threads TT rest against the edge of their 
corresponding pair of heddles, which draws 
them apart when desired. If the treadle Lis 
depressed, as shown in Fig. 2, the heddle-bars 
N7 are lowered and the bars N are raised, and 
the threads TT are separated. If the treadle 
L is released, the weights R will pull the bars 
N downward and the bars N' will be raised, 
as the bars N and N are connected by the 
cord P passing over the pulley Q. When the 
treadle L is at rest the bar N' is in the posi 
tion shown in Fig. 4 in relation to the aper 
tured guide-plate O, the spring S' pressing the 
hook T into the slot S; but when the treadle 
L is depressed and the bar N* is raised the 
swelled part S of the hook T strikes the edge 
of the aperture of the guide-frame O, and the 
hook T is pressed out of the slot S, catches 
85 
95 
OO 
Ios 
d 
IIS 
N 
263,295 
3 
O 
the thread T or T, and raises it. The hookT 
of the bar N', which is lowered, is pressed out 
ward by striking the edge of the aperture in 
- the platform M, and catches the other thread 
and passes it down, as shown in Fig. 3. When 
the treadle Lis released the bars N N return 
to their original position, (by the action of the 
weight R,) the hooks T are pressed inward by 
their springs S', and the threads TT are re 
leased. The above operation of the heddles 
is repeated every time the treadle L is oper 
ated. The platform. M and the frame O are 
at such a distance apart that the swelled part 
of the hook T of the bar N does not come in 
contact with the aperture in the platform M 
until the hook has passed the upper thread, 
T', and the swelled part of the hook T of the 
bar N' does not come in contact with the aper 
ture of the frame O until the hook has passed 
the lower thread, T, whereby the hooks are 
caused to engage with their proper threads of 
each pair of warps. 
To make the netted fabric the operation is 
as follows: The twisters D having been com 
bined according to the desired pattern, the 
operator first pushes back the reed U, then de 
presses and releases the treadle L' or L, (ac 
cording to the pattern desired,) whereby the 
corresponding threads, TT, are twisted; then 
the treadle L is depressed for the purpose of 
separating the threads TT; then the shuttle 
is passed through between the separated 
threads TT, the reed N is released and drives 
the we?t home, the reed is again pushed back, 
&c. The weft may consist of a single or mul 
tiple thread of one or more colors and of vari 
ous materials. 
In the specimen of netted fabric shown the 
first, third, and fifth pairs of warps are twisted 
at the same time, and the second, fourth, and 
sixth pairs are twisted next time. If this is 
the case, it is evident that the weft cannot cross 
the warp on a straight line, but must form a 
Waving line, as it is held by alternate pairs of 
warps; or, in other words, if the weft is passed 
through the warp, and then the first, third, and 
fifth pairs of warps are twisted, the weft will 
be held by these warps, and the next time it 
will be held by the second, fourth, and sixth 
pairs of warps, &c.; but, as has been stated, 
the arrangement of the warps may be modified 
as may be desired. If a pair of warps are 
twisted two or more times before passing the 
Weft through it, it is evident that the serpen 
tine lines of the weft will be more distinct than 
if the warps are twisted once only. 
45 
So 
55 
25 
35 
m 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with the twister D, pro 
vided with the flanges DD and the treadle 
L', of the cord H., coiled around the said twister, 
the weight H', the centrally-pivoted lever J, 
and the cord K", substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, with the twister D, pro 
vided with the notch E, the standard E, and 
the treadle L', of the spring. E, the cord H, 
the weight EI, the centrally-pivoted lever J, 
and the cord K", substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the apertured plat 
form and frame, of the vertically-reciprocating 
heddle-bars, hooks pivoted in said bars, and 
mechanism for operating said heddle-bars, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with the treadle L, the 
cord Q, the lever P', the cord M', and the pull 
ley Q, of the reciprocating bars N' N, the cord 
P, and the weight R, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination, with the apertured plat 
form M, the apertured frame O, the treadle L, 
the cord Q', the lever P', the cord M', the cord 
P, and the pulley Q, of the reciprocating bars. 
NN, the pivoted hooks T, the springs S', and 
the weight R, substantially as and for the pur. 
pose set forth. 
6. The combination, with the apertured plat 
form M, the apertured frame O, and the oper 
ating mechanism, of the slotted reciprocating 
bars NN, the pivoted hooks T, provided with 
the swelling S', and the springs S', substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
7. The combination, with the heddle-bars N. 
N', of the cord P, the pulley Q, the guide 
framesMO, the lever P', the cordM', the weight 
R, the connecting rodor cord Q', and the treadle 
Li, substantially as herein shown and described, 
and for the purpose set forth. ' 
8. The combination, with the reed U, of the 
heddle-bars N' N, the cord P, the pulley Q, 
the cordM', the leverP', the cord Q, the treadle 
Li, and the weights R, substantially as herein 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
ALEXANDER MELZER, 
Witnesses: 
OsCAR. F. GUNZ, 
GEO. D. WALKER. 
6a 
75 
OO 
IC 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263898.txt	(No Model.) 
E. M. HALLOCK, 
SMOKESTACK FOR MARINE WESSELS. 
No. 263,898, 
Patented Sept., 5, 1882. 
 
 
 
Z 27. / 
2 
NY 
 
N 
WITNESSES 
42% ver 
INVENTOR: 
BY Mull- de 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDGAR. M. HALLOCK, OF HUNTINGTON, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND 
JOSEPH W. DAVIS, OF PORT JEFFERSON, NEW YORK. 
SMOKE-STACK FOR MARINE VESSELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 263,898, dated September 5, 1882. 
Application filed March 31, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDGAR. M. HALLOCK, 
of Huntington, in the county of Suffolk and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
Improved Smoke-Stack for Marine Vessels, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved smoke-stack for marine 
vessels which prevents backdraft and does 
not interfere with the sails and booms. 
The invention consists in a longitudinal 
box adapted to be fastened on the deck of a 
vessel, which box is provided with a horizon 
tal transverse partition having an aperture 
for receiving the upper end of the stove-pipe, 
the edge of this aperture being provided with 
teeth or serrations. The smoke passes into 
the upper part of the box, and is carried off at 
the ends of the same by the draft through the 
recesses between the serrations of the edge of 
the stove-pipe opening in the horizontal trans 
verse partition in the box. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both the figures. 
Figurel is a cross-section of a part of a ves 
sel, showing the improved smoke-stackin cross 
section. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the smoke 
stack, parts being broken out. 
A longitudinal box, A-that is, a box with 
a U-shaped cross-section--is secured inverted 
on the deck H, and is secured on the deck by 
means of screws or nails driven through the 
longitudinal bottom flanges, B, or by means 
of bands or clips passed over the box A, and 
secured on the deck. At or a short distance 
above the middle of its height the box A is 
provided with a transverse horizontal partition, 
C, extending throughout the length of the box 
A. This horizontal partition C is provided at 
or near its middle with an aperture, D, adapt 
ed to receive the upper end of the stove-pipe 
E, which passes into the upper compartment 
of the box A. The edges of the aperture D 
are serrated or provided with a series of 
tongues, ct, which rest against the outer sur 
face of the stove-pipe E. The stove-pipe E 
passes through a deck-pipe, F, provided with 
flanges G, resting on the deck, and of the 
usual construction to prevent the water that 
65 
sweeps over the deck H from flowing down 
into the cabin on the outside of the pipe E. 
The smoke issuing from the top of the stove- 55 
pipe E passes into the upper compartment of 
the box A, and escapes at the ends of the 
same. The stove-pipe heats the air in the 
lower compartment of the box A, and creates 
a current of air, which, passing through the 
apertures between the tongues a from the 
lower into the upper compartment of the box 
A creates a draft, which assists in carrying 
the smoke through the upper compartment of 
the box A, and is also assisted by the wind 
which passes through the box A. A back 
draft cannot occur from whatever direction the 
wind may blow, and the smoke-stack never re 
quires adjustment. It is out of the way, can 
not be blown over, does not interfere with set 
ting the sails, and it cannot be upset by being 
struck by a sail or boom. The box A is to be 
made of metal. 
In place of the serrated edges of the open 
ing D, a circle of small apertures may be ar 
ranged around the edges of this opening D, 
which apertures serve for the same purpose as 
the spaces between the tongues a. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A smoke-stack for marine vessels, made 
substantially as herein shown and described, 
and consisting of a longitudinal box adapted 
to receive the upper end of the stove-pipe, and 
provided with a transverse borizontal partition, 
as set forth. 
2. In a smoke-stack for marine vessels, the 
combination, with the box A, of the horizontal 
transverse partition C, provided with an aper 
ture, D, for the stove-pipe, substantially as 
herein shown and described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. In a smoke-stack for marine vessels, the 
combination, with the box A, of the horizontal 
transverse partition C, provided with an aper 
ture, D, having the edges provided with serra 
tions or tongues a, substantially as herein 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
95 
75 
EDGAR. M. EIALLOCK. 
Witnesses: 
C. SEDGWICK, 
D. M. HOLDREDGE, 
( ) 
25 
30 
35 
45 
SO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US263998.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. R. TOYE, 
SIZING OR PAINTING MACHINE, 
No. 263,998. 
7a. 7. 
Patented Sept. 5, 1882. 
e 
a . 
HILIII ol 
 
| 
ul-- 
', 
 
HHMIE El 
e Init 
C-H.I. 
A 3 
al 
VITMESSES 
%raz afay? -rr 
IBy a. Aff of nelf 
IWWEWTOI 
7rz//zane ZAZ ove 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. R. To Y E, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SIZING OR PANTING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 263,998, dated September 5, 1882. 
Application filed April 25, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM E. R. To YE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of New York, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
and useful Improvementin Sizing or Painting 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the construction of sizing machinery; 
and the object of the invention is to provide a 
machine for applying a uniform and continu 
Ous Coating of size, varnish, glue, or other such 
substances to irregular or uneven surfaces of 
paper, cloth, tin, glass, wood, and other mate. 
rials. 
In the machines heretofore employed in the 
process of applying size or warnish to the sur 
face of paper and other like fabrics it has been 
usual to cause the material to pass beneath or 
between rigid rollers which are sufficiently 
Well adapted to apply the glutinous or viscid 
substance to uniform plane surfaces. Such 
machines are not, however, well adapted for 
applying size or varnish to any other than 
plane surfaces-such as are offered by flat 
sheets of cloth or paper-and hence cannot be 
successfully employed for coating irregular 
surfaces-such, for example, as are presented 
by moldings, glass of varying thickness, &c. 
My invention consists in employing, in con 
nection with a series of elastic compressible 
distributing-rollers, a corresponding series of 
rigid pressure-rollers capable of being adjusted 
to or from the distributing-rollers with refer. 
ence to the thickness of the material to be op 
erated upon, and in adapting thereto a fount 
ain or reservoir for containing the size, var. 
nish, or other liquid or viscid substance to be 
applied to the surfaces to be operated upon, 
and suitable devices for conveying the same 
to the distributing-rollers. 
The sizing or distributing rollers are pref. 
erably made of an elastic compound and 
yielding material, to the end that they may 
better adapt themselves to any irregularities 
in the surface of the material to which the size 
is to be applied, and two or more distributing 
rollers are employed to insure a uniform coat 
ing of glutinous substance over the entire sur. 
face. 
7 o 
75 
55 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a sizing-machine embodying my 
improvements, and Fig. 2 is a side elevation of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a detached view, showing 
certain details of construction. 
Referring to the figures, A represents the 
frame-work for supporting the various portions 
of the machine. 
A receptacle or fountain, a, for containing 
the liquid sizing or other like substance to be 
applied to the surface of the article or mate 
rial to be operated upon, is supported above a 
system of rollers for distributing thesizing. 
The receptacle or fountain a may be divided 
by means of suitable partitions into two or 
more compartments, a (t, for containing sizes 
of different colors when required. 
IB represents a fountain or duct roller placed 
in close proximity to the discharge-opening of 
the fountain a, which roller is caused to re 
volve in the direction indicated by the arrow 
by means of the ratchet-wheel b, mounted upon 
the end of its supporting-shaft b'. The wheel 
b is caused to advance step by step by means 
of a pawl, b, operated through the reciprocat 
ing pitman b, which bears at its lower ex 
tremity against a cam, b, carried upon the 
main shaft of the driving-pulley C. The cam 
b' also serves to give a reciprocating motion to 
a second pitman, d', which is pivoted at its 
upper extremity to a rocker-arm, e, upon which 
is supported the axis of a vibrating distribut 
ing-roller, E, which is thus brought alternately 
into contact with the duct-roller B and with 
two other rollers, G and G4. 
An idle-roller, E', corresponding to the roller 
E, is mounted in stationary bearings in the 
frame A, and constructed to revolve in contact 
with the roller G' and a third roller of the same go 
series, G'. 
Beneath the intermediate rollers, G, G, and 
G', is arranged a series of distributing-rollers, 
H, H, H, and H', upon which the sizing ma 
terial is evenly distributed from the respective 
rollers G, G', and G, which may be caused to 
revolve by friction therewith or by any suita 
ble mechanical device of well-known character. 
The vibrating roller E, the idle-roller E, and 
the distributing-rollers H H H H8 are pref. 
erably constructed of a compound of glue, mo 
lasses, and glycerine, such as is commonly em 
95 
tod 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
2 
263,99S 
ployed in the so-called composition rollers' 
employed in printing-presses, which forms a 
compressible and elastic compound. The roll 
ers G, G', and G' are preferably constructed 
of Wood. 
IBeneath the series of distributing-rollers H 
are placed four corresponding pressure-rollers, 
K KKK, revolving in suitable bearings upon 
two horizontal bars, one of which is shown at 
L. Each of these bars is supported upon two 
parallel upright links, kk. The parallel links 
k are pivoted to the bar and to the frame-work 
A in the manner of an ordinary parallel ruler. 
A hand-lever, M, is attached to the shaft n, to 
which the upright arm k and the correspond 
ing arm at the opposite end of the roller Kare 
rigidly attached. By means of this lever the 
supporting-bars I may be raised or lowered 
accordingly as the parallel upright arms k are 
caused to assume a more or less vertical posi 
tion. The lever M projects beyond the frame 
A at the front of the machine, and is provided 
with an adjustable supporting-stop, m, for se 
curing the lever in its proper position, as best 
seen in Fig. 3. The stop is held in its required 
position by means of bolts in', extending 
through a slot, n', in the frame-work A, and 
the lever M has a sufficient lateral flexibility 
to permitits being sprung out beyond the catch 
27. When it is desired to raise or lower the roll 
GS. 
Suitable tables and receiving-shelves, N and 
O, are provided for holding the articles or fab 
rics to which the sizing is to be applied. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The material to be sized is placed upon the 
table N, and is thence moved forward contin 
uously between the series of compressible roll 
ers H H H H and pressure-rollers KKKK, 
the position of the latter having previously 
been adjusted with reference to the thickness 
of the material to be sized. If that material 
presents an irregular or uneven surface-such, 
for example, as is frequently the case with 
moldings or of glass ware-the composition 
rollers H will, under the pressure of the rigid 
rollers Kyield to the irregularities of the ma 
terial and adapt themselves to the recesses, 
thus causing the size to be evenly applied to 
the entire surface. 
By employing two or more compressible roll 
ers, a more even distribution of the sizing ma 
O 
IS 
25 
3 or 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
terial is secured, and glutinous substances 
such as varnish or paint-may be applied in 
such a manner as not to run or flow into any 
cavities or hollows before setting' or becom 
ing dry. 
The materials and proportions of materials 
employed for the compressible rollers may be 
varied as found desirable, and in cases where 
the size or other substance is to be applied to 
uniform plane surfaces rigid unyielding rollers 
may be substituted. 
I do not desire to confine myself to the par 
ticular method which I have herein described 
of adjusting the vertical position of the roll 
ers K, as it is evident that various equivalent 
mechanical devices may be employed in lieu 
thereof; nor is it necessary that the particular 
arrangement of intermediate and distributing 
rollers be conformed to in all cases, as any ar 
rangement whereby the size may be evenly 
distributed overall the rollers and any arrange 
mentallowing of a variable but regulated press 
ure being applied to the sizing-rollers may be 
substituted therefor without departing from 
the principle of my invention. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a sizing or painting machine, the com 
bination, substantially as hereinbefore set 
forth, of a series of distributing-rollers, a se 
ries of pressure-rollers, and means for adjust 
ing the distance between the two series of roll 
e.S. 
2. In a sizing or painting machine, the com 
bination, substantially as hereinbefore set 
forth, of the compressible distributing-rollers, 
the rigid pressure-rollers, the parallel movable 
links for supporting said impression-rollers, 
and the movable lever for adjusting the verti. 
cal position of the pressure-rollers. 
3. In a sizing or painting machine, the com 
bination, substantially as hereinbefore set 
forth, of two or more compressible distribut 
ing-rollers, two or more rigid pressure-rollers 
movable toward or from said composition roll 
ers, a fountain or reservoir having two or more 
separate compartments, and a series of interior 
rollers. 
- 
WILLIAM E. R. TOYE. 
95 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs A. TERRY, 
MILLER. C. EARL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US264099.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 264,099. 
 
E, NORTON. 
SHEET METAL CAN, 
Patented Sept. 12, 1882. 
N. PETRS, Pho 
to-Lithorapher, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN NORTON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
SHEET-METAL CAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 264,099, dated September 12, 1882. 
Application filed August 7, 1882. (No model.) 
S 
d 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it knowif that I, EDWIN NoRTON, of Chi 
cago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve. 
ments in Sheet-Metal Cans, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of sheet-metal cans wherein the cap 
or cover is united to the body of the can with 
out the use of solder by what is commonly 
known as a double seam, and the same re 
lates more particularly to improvements on 
the can heretofore patented to me by Letters 
Patent of the United States, No. 255,012, under 
date of March 14, 1882. 
The olject of the present improvement, 
which is adapted more especially for large 
cans, is to provide a stronger can, and thus 
produce the effect of a wired pail or can, and 
at the same time unite the seamless flange to 
the can-body by a firm interlocked soldered 
seam in such way that there will be no dan 
ger of the subsequent action of the double 
seaming rollers in uniting the cover to the 
seamless flange breaking or disturbing such 
soldered seam, and thereby causing a leak in 
the can; and the present invention consists in 
turning an interior flange or shoulder on the 
can-body, over which the interior edge of the 
seamless flange is folded and soldered, thus 
forming on the can-body an interior right-an 
gle strengthening-fange composed of three 
thicknesses of the sheet metal soldered to 
gether, and thus producing a can almost, if 
not quite, as strong as if it were wired at the 
top like a pail, while the exterior edge of the 
seamless flange constitutes an element of the 
double seam by which the cover is united to 
the can-body. 
Where an inner cover made of 
taggers' tin or thin sheet metal is used in 
connection with a slip-cover I turn a shoulder 
on the top of the can, so that the exterior 
double seam will fall within the line of the 
can-body, and thus permit the slip-cover to fit 
Over it the same as if no inner cover were used. 
By uniting the seamless flange in this way to 
the can-body all danger of the double-seaming 
rollers disturbing the soldered seam which 
unites the seamless flange to the can-body 
Will also be obviated. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, and in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate like parts, Fig 
ure 1 is a central vertical section of my im 
proved can. Fig. 2 is a similar view, showing 
the can before the inner cover is double seamed 
on; and Fig. 3 shows a modification where no 
slip-cover is designed to be used. 
In the drawings, A represents the can-body, 
which is provided with an interior flange or 
shoulder, a. B is a seamless flange, the inner 
edges, b, of which is folded over and soldered 
to the flange a on the can-body, thus forming 
a solid interior right-angle flange composed of 
three thicknesses of the tin soldered together. 
The exterior edge, b', of the seamless flauge is 
united by a double seam, c, to the thin cover 
C, which is shown in black lines in Figs. 1 
and 2. The top of the can-body A is turned 
in, as shown at A', so that the double seam c. 
will fall within the circumference of the can 
body, and thus permit the slip-cover D to fit 
over it in the ordinary manner. Of course it 
will be understood that the double seam c is 
formed without solder, and ordinarily after the 
can is filled. 
In the form shown in Fig. 3 the interior 
shoulder A' is not used, as only a single cover 
or cap, C, is employed, and in Fig. 3 the stam 
less flange B is slown in black lines. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with the can-body pro 
vided with an interior shoulder, a, of a seam 
less flange, B, having its inner edge, b, folded 
over and soldered to said interior shoulder, (, 
and its outer edge, l', folded, with cover C, into 
a double seam, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with a can-body, A, hav. 
ing its top turned in, a seamless flange, B, united 
to the can-body, a thin inner cover, C, united 
to said, seamless flange by a double seam in 
side the exterior circumference of the can 
body, and a slip-cover, D, adapted to fit on the 
can-body over said seam, substantially as speci 
fied. 
EDWIN NORTON. . 
Witnesses: 
HENRY M. NoRTON, 
HENRY F., AKIN. 
SS 
65 
75 
9 O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US264200.txt	(No Model.) 
T, SHAW, 
METHOD OF COOLING CANS OF FRUIT. 
No. 264,200, 
Patented Sept. 12, 1882, 
N 
fiti is first 
WITNESSES: 
f* CAA. Sr. 
12.INVENTOR 
4 TTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS SHAW, OF PEIILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
METHOD OF COOLNG CANS OF FRUIT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 264,200, dated September 12, 1882. 
Application filed March 10, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS SHAW, of the 
city and county of Philadelphia, and the State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
improved method of cooling cans containing 
animal or vegetable substance without injury 
to the cans or their contents; and I hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawing, which forms 
part of this specification. 
In the drawing is shown in vertical section a 
process kettle or boiler of any suitable material, 
formed with perforated bottom c. Its shell is 
Open at top, and is secured to the flanged col 
lar in about an inch from the outside of shell 
a, and also secured to collar an is placed the 
shell b, the tight bottom of which extends a 
short distance below the perforated bottom c, 
forming a collecting-chamber for condensed 
vapor, which is provided with discharge-cock 
for removing accumulations. e is a strong re 
movable cover, which is bolted or otherwise 
secured in position on the flange m. The valve 
f is for regulating the exit of vapor, as de 
scribed. g is a strong metallic reservoir for 
containing and retaining compressed air. h. 
is the pipe leading to the source of supply, and 
i is a regulating-valve placed in a suitable 
pipe connecting the reservoir g with kettle and 
jacket a b. k is a regulating-valve placed in 
the pipe leading to a steam-generator. 
The operation is as follows: The covere hav 
ing been removed, tightly-closed cans of ani 
mal or vegetable substance are placed in ket 
tle a until it is filled, covere is replaced and 
secured to flange m, valve i is closed, valve f 
is partially opened, and steam is admitted 
through valve k into the space between shells 
at and b, from which, through the perforations 
in bottom c, it rises aunong the cans in kettle 
a, driving before it the air, which escapes 
through valve f. I prefer to use steam at a 
pressure of about sixty pounds to the square 
inch, which enables me to maintain a pressure 
of from one to twenty pounds in the kettle, 
which is to be continued from twenty to fifty 
minutes, according to the material being oper 
ated upon. The compressed air may be used 
at any desired tension above that of the atmos 
phere. The greater the pressure of the air used 
the more rapid will be the absorption of heat 
and consequent cooling of the cans and con 
tents. By the use of an ordinary gage the 
pressure within the kettle, and consequently 
the heat applied to the cans, is readily observed, 
and is to be regulated by the operator by 
means of valve k. When sufficient amount of 
heat has been applied to the cans the supply 
of steam is stopped, and before flhe pressure 
is materially lessened compressed air of about 
equal or higher pressure to that of the steam 
is admitted between the shells, and, passing 
up through perforated bottom c, it replaces 
the steam, and, being allowed to expand some 
what by its property of absorbing heat during 
expansion, it rapidly cools the cans, and while 
maintaining a sufficient pressure prevents 
them from being distorted or injured by ex 
pansiou of the steam and other gases gener 
ated inside them by the heat previously ap 
plied. The heated air is being constantly 
driven out through valve f by the supply from 
reservoir g, and with the assistance of the 
steam-gage the supply is regulated by valve i. 
The accumulations of condensation are dis 
charged through a suitable cock located in the 
bottom d. 
By the use of my improvement the cans are 
heated and cooled in the same vessel, thus 
avoiding the frequent handling necessary when 
the cooling is by immersion in tanks of water, 
and saving the cost of the immense a mount of 
fresh water previously used, as well as the 
time consumed in transferring from one ves 
sel to another, during which transfer the cans 
being particularly exposed to the risk of bulg 
ing and bursting by the steam and other gases 
generated inside them. 
It will be noted that the air is admitted at 
about the same pressure as the steam. Con 
sequently the tendency of the liquid contents 
of the vessels to rupture the latter is averted. 
The air is also expelled as it becomes heated, 
thus rapidly conveying away the heat and cool 
ing the cans and contents. 
I do nothere claim the apparatus shown and 
described, as it may form the subject of a sepa 
rate application. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The process of heating and cooling canned 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
OO 
r 
2. 
264,200 
articles, the same consisting in first placing cans of animal or vegetable matter under press- Io 
the filled cans in a closed vessel, admitting ure by surrounding the cans with compressed 
steam thereto under pressure until the contents air and permitting the same to expand in con 
are cooked, then cutting off the steam and tact there with, and then escape, as described. 
passing air under pressure into the vessel, and 
THOMAS SEIAW. 
then passing the air through the vessel, gradu 
ally reducing the pressure until the cans and 
contents are cooled, substantially as set forth. 
2. The herein-described method of cooling 
WM. F. GIRIN, 
WM. GARWOOD. 
Witnesses: 
7. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US264301.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
W. JOHNSON. 
WARIABLE WAWE GEAR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 
No. 264301. 
Patented Sept. 12, 1882, 
 
s 
N 
Y 
N-s- 
WITNESSES: 
hide? so 
: %iA%, 79.a. 
Attorne 
(No Model.) 
ar. 
- 
No. 264,301. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. JOHNSON, 
WARIABLE WALWE GEAR. 
Patented Sept. 12, 1882, 
 
 
 
S. 2N 
N 
(No Model.) 
No. 26430, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
W. JOHNSON, 
WARIABLE WALWE GEAR, . 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Sept. 12, 1882. 
-N? ,$ 
| 
N VEN TOR: 
/N 
9). 
18 
0. 5. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILBERFORCE: JOHNSON, OF LIVERPOOL, COUNTY OF LANCASTER, 
ENGLAND. 
VARABLE VALVE GEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 264,801, dated September 12, 1882. 
Application filed March 20, 1882. 
(No model.) Patented in England March 23, 1881, No. 1,280. 
55 
75 
sired angle for working the valves; D, collar 
To all chon it may concern: 
or strap in which pins FF are inserted; E, 
Beit known that I, WILBERFORCEJOHNSON, 
of Liverpool, in the county of Lancaster, in the link of valve-crank lever; G, valve-crank; K, 
valve-rod ; H, guide; I, quadrant on which Ei. 
Kingdom of England, have invented a new 
slides, thus causing the collar D to change its 
and Improved Variable Valve-Gear, (for which 
position with the disk C, and thereby creating 
I have received Letters Patent in England, 
the desired amount of lead; Li, handle for 
No. 1,280, dated 23d March, 1881;) and I do 
working guide H; M, sleeve counected with 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
disk-C by link P; R, cut-off and reversingle 
clear, and exact description of the same, which 
ver; N, strap of sleeve M, carrying two pins 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
which work into cranks of lever R, in Figs. 5 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
and 6; N', quadrant or link connected to the 
This invention relates to improvements on 
link E and pivoted in P; M', slide-block moved 
the variable valve-gear for which I obtained 
to and fro on quadrant N by handle IR; O, 
Letters Patent on the 9th January, 1877, No. 
quadrant-lever; P, bearing for lever O. 
186,135; and it consists, first, in swiveling a 
In carrying out my invention I piefer to fix 
ring or its equivalent upon tWO points or pins 
a pin, B, forming the shaft-pins projecting on 
(hereinafter called shaft-pins') on opposit. 
both sides at right angles right through the 
sides of a shaft, upon which another ring or 
its equivalent, armed with two projections or 
crank shaft or axle on the shaft A, with bear 
ings on the shaft-pins 13. A ring, C, made 
catches, (hereinafter called ring -pins,) is 
in two parts bolted together, is placed around 
free to slide, and by interlocking with its ring 
the shaft, but with internal diameter larger 
pins into the valve cranks or links causes the 
valve-rods to travel; second, in so connecting 
than the diameter of the shaft A, so as to leave 
plenty of play. Sliding in a groove on the pe 
one of the ring-pins or its equivalent with a 
reversing-screw or equivalent apparatus that 
riphery of the ring C, I place a second ring, 
by moving the reversing-handle the inner ring 
D, like the strap of an eccentric, and upon the 
periphery of this weld or otherwise, fix two 
and the ring-pins aforesaid are male to stand 
pins, F and F, in ordinary pairs of engines. 
at right angles to the shaft and parallel to a 
line joining the two points or pins aforesaid, 
The pin F works into the lead-motion, (her 
inafter described,) and each of them works into 
or at an angle with that line on either side, 
a slot of a link forming one arm of a bell-crank 
and thus reverse or stop the valve-motion; and, 
lever, E, each working the valve - rod of one 
third, in arranging a lead-motion by which the 
positions of the outer ring and ring-pins are 
of the two coupled engines. I sometimes use 
three separate pins, as shown in Fig. 3. Se 
caused to vary, and thus the amount of lead is 
changed. 
cured to each of the pins by a nut is a thimble, 
Referring to the drawings, Figures 1 and 2 
F', to facilitate their working. 
The lead mechanism is a guide, E, or other 
are transverse and longitudinal sections of va 
riable valve-gear as applied to a single-acting 
apparatus linked to the handle L, Working on 
one of the ring-pins F., a fulcrum or quadrant, 
reversible engine; Figs. 3 and 4, tranviserse 
I, and is so arranged that by moving the lever 
and longitudinal sections of variable valve 
gear as applied to a double-acting reversible 
Lu or a screw the outer ring or strap, D, is 
caused to slide on the ring C, and the position 
engine; Figs. 5 and 6, transverse and longi 
of the outer and inner rings relatively to each 
tudinal sections of variable valve-gear as ap 
plied to engines where the space of the main 
other is changed. The best form of mechan 
ism, perhaps, for this purpose is shown in Figs. 
shaft is confined, and here the ring D is keyed 
3 and 4, in which a bell-crank lever, H, is piv 
to the shaft instead of swiveling thereon. 
oted on the crank-shaft A or its bearing. The 
In these drawings like letters apply to like 
parts. 
position of one arm H of the bell-crank lever 
is regulated by a screw or handle, L., (not 
A is the main shaft; B, shaft-pin, on which 
shown in Figs. 3 and 4) while the other arm 
the disk C is moved so as to produce the de 
O 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
So 
95 
CO 
2 
264,30 
I claim 
1. In combination with the longitudinally 
reciprocating valve - rod, the operating-gear 
therefor, consisting of the disk revolving with 
the driving-shaft obliquely to its axis, combined 
with the non-rotating ring or strap encircling 
said disk, and an arm for reciprocating the 
valve-rod attached to and vibrated by means 
of the non-rotating ring, substantially as de 
scribed and Slhown. 
2. The rotary main shaft and the disk carried 
thereby, and adjustable as to its obliquity 
thereon, in combination with the external ring, 
D, and the external link or strap, E, the latter 
having at right angles to each other a pivotal 
support and a pivotal connection with the ring 
D, substantially as described and shown. 
3. The pivoted ring C, made in two halves 
and bolted together, thus inclosing the ends 
of the pivots, in combination with the sliding 
ring D, fitting into the groove formed by the 
two halves of C, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
4. The combination of the ring C, adjusted 
or adjustable so as to stand obliquely to the axis 
of the shaft, and the sliding ring D, carrying 
pins F, actuating the valve-gear, with the ad 
justable guide H, regulating the angle that the 
pins F shall make with the pivots B, for the 
purposes described. 
5. The combination of the ring D, sliding on 
a path adjusted at or adjustable to an angle 
oblique to the shaft, with the pins F and slot 
ted frame E, actuating the valve-gear, substan 
tially as described. 
6. The combination of the lever R, sliding 
ring N, sleeve M, and connecting device P 
with the pivoted disk C. 
7. The combination of the lever R, the slide 
M', the quadrant or link N', the quadrant-lever 
O, and the link E with the disk C. 
WLBERFORCE JOINSON. 
Witnesses: 
I. O, OBRIEN, 
JOHN HAYES. 
w 
SO 
55 
75 
85 
O 
carries a fork or slotted link or guide, H, fit 
ting round the aforesaid pin F. By regulat 
ing the handle or equivalent screw the bell 
crank lever or link H moves with it, and with 
it moves the outer ring, D, on the inner, C, 
and consequently the ring-pin F; or I may 
adopt the plan shown in Fig. 1, where the guide 
II slides on a quadrant, l. The rings C and 
D are preferably made, the outer one, D, like 
an eccentric-strap with two or more pins, F 
and E, aforesaid, the inner one, C, formed of 
two rings bolted side to side and grasping the 
shaft-pins on the shaft between them. The in 
ner ring has a connecting arm or link, P, to 
One side, at a point equidistant from the ends 
of the shaft-pins B, and connected to the re. 
versing or cut-off lever by mechanism that will 
permit of the inner ring revolving with the 
shaft. One plan of doing this is to link the in 
ner ring, C, near its periphery to a second ring 
or wasber, M, sliding on key or feathers on the 
shaft A, which ring has a strap, N, round it 
linked to the reversing-lever, so that by mov 
ing the reversing-lever the ring C is drawn to 
one side, or rather turns on its pivot, (the 
shaft-pin B.) 
In Figs. 5 and 6 the valve rods K are actu 
ated through a slide, M', which moves on a 
quadrant or link, N, pivoted in P, and swiv. 
eled to and fro by the motion caused by the 
angular position of the ring C on the shaft. A 
as it rotates. 
The mode of action is as follows: To cut off 
steam or reverse the engines shown in Figs. 1, 
2, 3, and 4, the ring or washer M is moved on 
the crank-shaft by means of a handle, thus al 
tering the angular position of the ring D and 
giving greater or less travel to the valves, or 
reversing the engine. The engine shown in 
Figs. 5 and 6 is reversed by moving the slide 
block M' by means of the handle R, along the 
quadrant N. To alter the lead, the position of 
the strap or ring D on ring C is regulated by 
means of the guide H, which is actuated by a 
handle or screw. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US264401.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
. 
. 
No. 264,401, 
C. BARBER, 
SHAFT COUPLING. 
Patented Sept. 12, 1882, 
A. 2 
S S S t 
Ele 
A S. 3 3 
NS y W N N SN 
A N 
s 
N 
P 
  
 
A 7. 
Z2. 
22 
S 2.2% 2. N3% 
PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
v-up 
CHARLES BARBER, OF MEAFORD, ONTARIO, CANADA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
EIALF TO THOMAS HARRIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
SHAFT COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 264,401, dated September 12, 1882. 
Application filed March 7, 1882. (No model.) 
S 
IO 
15 
25 
55 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES BARBER, of 
Meaford, in the county of Grey, in the Prov 
ince of Ontario, in the Dominion of Canada, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Shaft-Couplings; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, afd ex 
act description of the same. 
The object of this invention is to make an 
elastic coupling for line-shafting which will 
overcome backlash in gearing and other irreg 
ularities of motion caused by the driving 
crank of steam-engines or other motors, or the 
throwing in and out of gear of machinery 
While running, or concussion caused by Sud 
den stoppage, or any other cause having a 
tendency to disturb the regular motion of ma 
chinery. 
My invention consists of a two-part box 
coupling, one part having an elastic cushion 
or packing of rubber in concentric or other 
suitable recesses and the other part moving 
concentrically therein, having arms in contact 
with said cushion or packing, whereby the said 
two parts of the coupling will yield impulsively 
to the concussion or sudden impact caused by 
irregular motion, as before described. 
Figure 1 is a section of my improved coup 
ling applied to a line-shaft. Fig. 2 is a plan 
of one part of the coupling or box or shell, 
showing the concentric recesses, packing, and 
noiseless cushions. Fig. 3 is a plan of the other 
part of the coupling fitting into shell, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a plan of the two parts in concen 
trical position, and Fig. 5 is a plan of an an 
nular ring to cover the open portion seen in 
IFig. 4. 
A is the shell or case, having the rim B of 
sufficient depth to take the necessary thick 
ness of india-rubber cushions or other elastic 
packing C, which fits into concentric recesses 
formed by casting the shell at intervals with 
concentric arc-shaped sections G, and said 
shell is keyed on the end of one of the sections 
of the shaft, to be coupled by a feather, H. D 
is the other part of the coupling, fitting into 
and working concentrically in the shell A with 
in the concentric sections G, and is cast with 
concentric arc-shaped arms D', fitting between 
the arc-shaped sections G, the extremity of the 
arms cushioning against the elastic packing 
C. The part D is keyed through its hub to the 
other sections of the line-shafting by a feather, 
I, the ends of the two sections of the shafting 
being disconnected. Each section or part of 
the coupling AID can have a concentric move 
ment to the extent of the yielding of the pack 
ing C, with which the arms D have contact, 
and such yielding will be effected by any sud 
den impact or concussion of the parts from 
backlash or other causes previously stated 
herein, and break the force of the irregular 
motion or overcome its defect in Operating ma 
chinery. 
J is an annular ring fitting over the hub-sec 
tion D to cover the elastic packing, and is 
fastened by screws or bolts passing into or 
through holes G' at the closed end of the pack 
ing recesses. E are elastic cushions, of rubber 
or packing, interposed between the elbow of 7o 
the arms D and sections G to prevent rattling 
and noise resulting from concussion of the 
parts by reaction. If desired, the ring may 
have other forms of fastening and be applied 
in other ways to cover the recesses and cush 
OS, 
I am aware of a device for preventing back 
lash in which the wheel is constructed with a 
rim having circumferential flanges projecting 
upward from the outer and inner edges, re 
spectively, to form a circular clhannel for hollow 
rubber springs, said springs being secured to 
gether by a circular rod, and having at each 
end a washer, against which the arms or spokes 
of the wheel operate, and such I do not claim. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The part of shell A having at intervals 
therein the arc-shaped concentric sections G, 
forming concentric recesses a, the elastic cush 
ions or packing C, and part D, or hub, fitting 
into the unoccupied part of the shell, and hav 
ing concentric arc-shaped arms D fitting be 
tween the sections G, the extremity of said 
arms cushioning directly against the elastic 
packing C, said shell A being keyed on the 
end of one of the sections of the shaft and said 
75 
90 
95 
35 
40 
45 
 
26440. 
part D being keyed to the other sections of and cushions E, interposed between the arms 
the shaft, to admit of said parts AD having D and sections G, arranged to operate sub 
concentric movement, as set forth. 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
C. BARBER. 
2. The combination of the shell A, having 
5 the arc-shaped concentric sections G formed 
at intervals therein, and recesses a, elastic 
packing C, hub D, having arc-shaped arms D', 
Witnesses: 
JOHN IFEAR, 
JOHN IANG MAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US264501.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 264,501. 
ID, WISER, 
SPARKARRESTER, 
Patented Sept. 19, 1882. 
& 
- 
R - 
N \ is 
 
 
 
 
loo 
O (O) 
O (O) 
: O O 
O O 
: O O 
(O (O) 
O (O) 
 
 
s 
SySBLINILINELINILEN SNS s 
O 
aS s 
S-6-4-2- 
67 
Z722/e7e/27. 
W. 
N. PeFERs, photo-lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
-1- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID WISER, OF PLYMOUTH, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF TWO THIRDs To 
THOMAS J. HUPP AND LORIE G. CAPRON, OF SAME PLACE. 
-SPARK-AR RESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 264,501, dated September 19, 1882. 
Application filed May 15, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID WISER, of the 
city of Plymouth, in the county of Marshall 
and State of Indiana, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Spark. Arresters, of 
which the following is a full and true descrip 
tion and specification. 
My invention relates to a process of catch 
ing and arresting the sparks and cinders which 
usually escape from the smoke-stack of loco 
Inotive and stationary steam-engines, thereby 
preventing all danger from setting fire to any 
combustible material in the vicinity of such 
engines. 
The drawings attached hereto and signed 
by me show the principle of my invention, and 
the same are hereby made a part of this speci 
fication. 
Figure 1 in said drawings is a transverse 
vertical section of the device embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a front view of the same, 
showing the position of the wire screen in the 
breech of the smoke-stack and the manner of 
constructing and attaching the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like parts 
in said drawings. 
Letter A in said drawings represents a por 
tion of a section of an ordinary flue-boiler of a 
Steam-engine. 
Letter B represents the breech of a smoke 
stack of such boiler. 
Letter C represents the smoke-stack. 
Iuetter D represents the wire screen in posi 
tion in said breech when operating as a spark 
arrester. 
Letter E. represents the curved deflector or 
guide which directs the sparks and cinders 
into the cinder-box. 
Letter F represents the mouth or orifice in 
the face of the breech through which the cin 
ders pass into the cinder-box. 
Letter G represents the cinder-box, con 
structed of sheet-iron or other proper material. 
Letter Hrepresents the partition, extending 
entirely across the cinder-box and downward 
at Some distance below the mouth F. 
Letter Irepresents the vent-pipe, connecting 
the cinder-box with the smoke-stack and enter 
ing the smoke-stack some distance above the 
upper end of the cinder-box. . 
Letter Krepresents the stays, riveted to the 
inner sides of the breech, which prevent the 
screen from being bent or curved by the draft. 
Letter L. represents the handle to the screen, 
by which it is moved backward and forward. 
My invention consists of the arrangement of 
the wire screen D, hung on hinges at the upper 
end, with the curved deflector E, and the cin 
der-box G, and the mouth F, and the vent-pipe 
I, substantially as shown in the drawings; and 
the manner of the construction and the opera 
tion of the different parts of my invention are 
as follows: 
The screen D is of wire-cloth or perforated 
iron, and cut to exactly fit in the space as 
signed for its work in the breech. 
The deflector E is of sheet-iron, slightly 
curved, and is a continuation of the screen, ex 
tending across its entire top, and is firmly riv 
eted to the side of the breech. 
The mouth or orifice F is a narrow opening 
across the face of the breech, through which 
the deflector Edirects the sparks and cinders. 
The cinder-box G is of sheet-iron or other 
proper material, of any required size. It is 
riveted to the face of the breech and the joints 
closed so as to be as nearly air-tight as possi 
ble. A door or slide opens in the bottom, from 
which the ashes and cinders are emptied when 
necessary. Across the box is the hanging para 
tition H, and from the top of the box is the 
sheet-iron vent-pipe I, connecting the box with 
the smoke-stack. This pipe is of any required 
size, but should be of sufficient capacity to 
carry freely the heated air and gases that pass 
through the mouth Finto the cinder-box. 
These several parts, being in place as shown 
in the drawings, operate substantially as fol 
lows: The powerful draft of the smoke-stack 
draws a great quantity of live sparks and cin 
ders from the fire-box through the flues up the 
breech. They strike against the slanting side 
of the screen, and, carried by the ascending 
current, they glide up its surface until they 
strike against the solid curved to or deflector 
E, by which, with some aid from the draft 
through the mouth F, they are carried into the 
cinder-box G. The partition H guides them 
down toward the center of the box, where they 
are out of the line of the draft, and they drop 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
264,50 
diagonally across the inner space of the breech, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. In spark-arresters, the cinder-box G, with 
partition H and the connecting vent-pipe I, 
arranged and operating substantially as shown 25 
and described. 
3. In spark-arresters, the combination of the 
screen D, the deflector E, the mouth or orifice 
F, the cinder-box G, partition H, and vent 
pipe I, with the breech and smoke-stack of a 3o 
steam-engine-boiler, all constructed, arranged, 
and operating substantially as shown, and for 
the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 35 
Witnesses. 
DAVID WISER, 
In presence of - 
A. C. CAPRON, 
CHARLESRICEIARDSON, 
to the bottom and burn to ashes. The heated 
air, gas, and smoke that enter the cinder-box 
Fare drawn through the connecting-pipe I in 
to the smoke-stack, and this draft aids mate 
5 riallyincarrying the cinders through the mouth 
F into the cinder-box. 
In wet weather, when the condition of the 
atmosphere is such that the draft is lessened, 
the screen may be pulled to the front side of 
Io the breech and there held, thus giving free 
draft throughout the entirelength of the breech 
and smoke-stack, and in case the screen itself 
should partially clog with ashes and cinders 
it can easily be cleared by shaking it. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and what I desire to secure 
herein by Letters Patent of the United States, 
is as follows: 
1. In spark-arresters, the wire screen D, or 
2O, its equivalent, hung on hinges and extending 
15. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US264601.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 2646 Ol, 
 
A., ANDERSON, 
ORGAN CASE, 
Z/Patented Sept. 19, 1882, 
WITNESSES: 
-644evee/6 
INVENTOR: 
BY Mull-de 
ATTORNEYS, 
Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
- 
m 
1. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW ANDERSON, 
OF MOLINE, ILLINOIS. 
ORGAN - CAS E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 264,601, dated September 19, 1882. 
Application filed April 19, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all chor it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW ANDERSON, 
of Moline, in the county of Rock Island and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful improvements in means for pro 
tecting organs and other wind - instruments 
from the ravages of vermin, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to the pedals of or. 
gans, and has for its object the prevention of 
injtly to the bellows, Sounding-board, key 
pins, reed-cells, or other parts of the interior 
of the instrument by the ingress of mice or 
other vermin, without affecting or injuring the 
sound or quality of tone of the instrument, and 
by means which add little or nothing to the 
cost of it, and are applicable to organs and 
other like instruments as now constructed. 
The invention consists in a certain combi 
nation of peculiarly-constructed pedals, frame 
or jamb thereof, and pedal-frame with bottom 
and sealing piece over the pedals, whereby all 
openings about the pedals or their connec 
tions for the entry of vermin are closed on re 
moval of the foot from the pedals, and the ac 
tion of the pedals is noiseless and simple. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both the figures. 
Figure represents a front perspective view 
of the lower portion of a cottage organ or 
other like instrument in part, showing the 
construction and arrangement of the pedals 
and frames connected there with in accordance 
with my invention; and Fig. 2 is an inverted 
plan of the bottom of the organ-case, with 
its covering-screen and bottom of the pedal 
frame. 
In the drawings, A A are the pedals, (one 
of which is represented as partly depressed.) 
which, when not pressed down by the foot, 
are Self-closing up against a frame or jamb, B 
3, Without noise or shock, by the application 
to their faces, which come in contact with said 
frame, of felt or other soft clothing, b. 
C is the bottom of the pedal-frame. 
D is the rope or webbing attached to each 
pedal, and arranged to run over a pulley, d, to 
transmit the power to the bellows. 
E is a sealing-piece, arranged between the 
front of the organ-case G and the top of the 
pedaljamb, for completely closing, in connec 
tion with the pedal frame and jaub, all open 
ings whatever about or around the pedals 
when closed, to the exclusion of vermin of all 
kinds. 
The instrument rests, by rollers or feet e e, 
On the floor, so that a space is left below the 
bottom of the case G for the aciinission of air, 
Covering this raised open bottom of the case 
is a perforated plate or screen, H, of wire or 
any other suitable material that will exclude 
mice and other verinii). This screen, instead 
of being arranged directly on the bottom of the 
organ-case, may be placed Somewhat higher up 
within the case to have a like effect. 
By the combination of the pedals and their 
frames, constructed as described, and the 
screen or netting covering the botton of the 
organ-case, the most perfect security is af. 
forded in a very simple manner against the 
entry of mice or vermin without impairing the 
sound of the instruinent, the raised screen 
covered bottom of the case admitting of a free 
supply of air to the interior of the case. The 
pedals, too, closed as described, are noiseless, 
and there are no arms Working through slots 
or other openings besides those closed by the 
pedals themselves for vermin to work their 
way through. In these and other respects my 
construction of the pedals and their frames 
differs from other pedal-box arrangements, in 
some of which the pedals are self closing, 
while in others a lid is specially provided for 
closing the box. Nor does the screen which 
is here used merely protect the leed-cells, as 
in the case of a simple air-filter, which offers 
no protection to the more vital parts-such as 
the pins that act upon the air-Valves of the 
reeds, the sounding-board, and the bellows 
as the screen in the arrangerient I have de 
scribed does. Neither does it affect the qual 
ity of tone or produce a tone similar to that 
produced by leaving the knee-swell closed, but, 
as it leaves the reeds entirely open, provides 
for the full resonant sound known as forte, 
and the knee-swell is only applied as requied. 
Baving thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
IS 
3O 
45 
SO 
95 
IOC 
g 
264,60. 
The combination of the self-closing jedals 
AA, having clothing b applied to their closing 
surfaces, the frame or jamb B B, against which 
said pedals close, the pedal-frame, having a 
5 close bottom, C, the organ-case G, the sealing- 
piece E, arranged between said case and jamb, 
the bellows-operating rope or web, attached to 
either pedal, and the pulley or pulleys d, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
ANDREW ANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
P. S. McGLYNN, 
GUSTAF SWENSSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US264702.txt	(No Model.) 
J. JOHNSON, 
ROTARY WATER METER, 
No. 264,702, 
Patented Sept, l 9, 1882, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 f 
3.B. 
O) 
3 
 
  
 
 
N, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. D, c. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JONATEAN JOHNSON, OF 
LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ROTARY WATER METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 264,702, dated September 19, 1882. 
Application filed March 7, 1882. No model.) 
My invention relates to that class of fluid- justment. 
Io meters in which a bladed wheel is revolved by 
To facilitate adjustment, the caps h may be 55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JONATHAN JOHNSON, a combined with appliances for moving them. 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of from outside of the meter. I have devised 
the city of Lowell, in the county of Middlesex different means for this purpose. That shown 
5 and State of Massachusetts, have invented cer. consists of spindles l, secured to the caps and 
tain new and useful Improvements in Fluid- extending to the outside of the casing, each 6o 
Meters, of which the following is a specifica- with a square head or slot to receive a key. 
Seals may be placed over the heads after ad 
tion. 
To insure accurate measurement the strength, 
the force of an injected current, and by its mo- size, or velocity of the working stream or 65 
tion drives the registering mechanism; and my streams injected against the wheel C should be 
invention consists of appliances constructed, in proportion to the Water discharged through 
as fully (lescribed hereinafter, so as to avoid the meter, for which purpose I use valves E 
I5 friction, insure great accuracy, and facilitate for regulating the amount of water passing to 
adjustment to vary the action according to the and through the tubes D D, and a regulator 7 o 
pressure. 
whereby these valves are opened as the amount 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional ele- of water required is increased. Each valve is 
vation of a fluid - meter with my improve- a flat sliding plate with an opening, m, Which 
2O ments. Fig. 2 is a part sectional plai. Fig. may be brought to coincide with the opening 
3 is an inverted plan in section on the line 12, in the tube below. The valve is guided by a 75 
Fig. 1. 
rod, n, extending through an opening much 
The general features of my improved meter iarger than the rod in a post, F, and by a blade, 
are similar to those of the meter patented to p, which extends into a wide slot in the plate 
25 me April 23, 1878, there being a box, A, com- below. These guides prevent the valve mov 
posed of a case, A, and cap A', and inclosing ing laterally to any great extent, but allow 8o 
two chambers, XX', and a closed box, A', at such play that there is practically no friction 
the top, covering suitable registering mechan- on the guides, the pressure of the Water main 
isun. The inlet-opening a communicates with taining each valve upon its face-plate. These 
3o the chamber X, and the outlet b with the cham- valves are set according to the discharge by a 
ber X, and in the latteris arranged the bladed piston, G, moving in a cylinder, E, secured to 85 
wheel C, the spindled of which communicates the partition f, one end of the cylinder coln 
motion to the registering apparatus and turns municating around the stem q of the piston 
in bearings in the partition f, separating the with the chamber X and the other end through 
bar, t. The blades g of the wheel C are con- A curved weighted lever, I, is pivoted at y 9o 
structed as shown, being inclined to one side, to some part of the case, and is provided with 
so that the wheel will turn in that direction crank-arms S', which carry a cross-bar, I', ex 
with but little friction under the influence of tending through notches it) the blades p p, 
Ao streams of water directed from tabes D D, and in the piston-stem q, and tends by its de 
from the oppositesides into the pockets formed scent to draw lback the valves and maintain 95 
by the blades. The tubes I) D' communicate them in a position to close the tubes DD with 
the piston at the left-hand end of the cylinder. 
With the chamber X, and project, as shown, 
So long as the discharge is closed or nearly 
into the chamber S', and each is provided with 
closed the position of the parts will not be Va 
a cap, h, having an opening or nozzle, S, which 
ried; but when the outlet is opened so as to Ioo 
cap may be adjusted so as to alter the angle 
at which the stream strikes the wheel, thereby 
withdraw the water from the chamber X" faster 
than it is supplied, there will be an excess of 
varying the speed of the latter, so that by a 
pressure on the outer or left face of the piston, 
little manipulation the register will be made 
the latter will slide to the right, tilt the lever 
to indicate with precision the quantity of Water 
passed through the meter. It will be appar 
I, and move the valves to uncover to a greater Io5 
or less extent the tubes D D, thus permitting 
ent that one, two, or more tubes D may be 
used in proportion to the quantity of water to 
the water to flow into the chamber X until the 
pressures are equalized, when the piston Will 
be measured. 
35 chambers X X", and in a step, f', on a cross- a tube, r, with the chamber X. 
SO 
2 
264,702 
iO 
IS 
25 
35 
So 
55 
remain in its position, shifting, however, and 
thus regulating the valve-openings with every 
change in the position of the discharge-cock. 
By this means the force of the streams that 
actuate the wheel C is proportioned to the 
amount of water drawn, and the velocity of 
the wheel increases with the increased dis 
charge, insuring accuracy of measurement and 
registration. 
I do not limit myself to the precise regulat 
ing device described, as others might be used 
as, for instance, a flexible diaphragm in the 
partition f, or a cylinder containing a piston 
arranged vertically in said partition, and other 
devices. 
I do not always arrange both valves to open 
to the same extent simultaneously, as one may 
be set ahead of the other, so that they will 
open in succession, and valve-cocks or rotating 
disks may be used in place of sliding valves. 
As it is difficult to adjust any valve mech 
anism to operate accurately to regulate both 
large and small streams, such as result from 
slight leaks or partly - opened cocks or fau 
cets, I use a supplemental passage, which will 
permit the flow of a very small stream of 
water without affecting the regulating mech 
anism, but securing registration. 
For this 
purpose I insert a small tube, J, in the parti 
tion f and provide it with a perforated cap, 
it, (like the caps h,) to discharge a minute jet 
against the wheel C at such an angle as will 
propel the wheel somewhat faster than nec 
essary to measure the actual quantity dis 
charged, thereby affording a special inducement 
to consumers to arrest leaks and the dropping 
at faucets, which is ordinarily a source of great 
Waste. 
By the use of two independent motor streams, 
one of slight capacity to operate the register 
ing mechanism and indicate the passage of 
small amounts of fluid, and the other auto 
matically regulated to measure and register 
the main volume of fluid discharged, I avoid 
the inaccuracies in measurement which have 
hitherto resulted from the attempts to register 
both small and great discharges by the same 
I transfer the motion of the spindled to the 
registering mechanism L by a spindle, N, 
which has a square or flattened lower end fit 
ting a socket in the hub of one of the train of 
wheels M, gearing with a pinion on the spin 
dled. This permits the spindle N to be read 
ily removed in taking the instrument apart. 
To pack the spindle without creating undue 
friction, I provide the partition f with a hol 
low stud, P, and between a shoulder of the 
latter and the top of the cap A', I interpose a 
packing, 20, an extension of the stud project 
ing through an opening in the casing and car 
rying a screw follower and packing. The 
passage of fluid from the chamber X to the 
chamber X around the spindle is thus pre 
vented, as is also the passage of fluid from the 
chamber X to that containing the registering 
mechanism. 
ea, S. 
- - 
I claim 
1. A fluid-meter provided with a bladed 
wheel gearing with the registering mechan 
ism, with two or more independent passages 
of different sizes for injecting streams of wa 
ter upon said wheel, and valves controlling 
the flow of water to the larger passage only, 
and an automatic device whereby the said 
larger passage is opened in proportion to the 
amount of water required, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination, witb a fluid-meter pro 
vided with registering mechanism and a driv. 
ing-wheel actuated by the passage of fluid 
through the meter, of a supplemental tube, 
affording a passage for a small stream, where 
by the wheel is revolved when the main pas 
sage is closed, for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, in a meter, with one or 
more valves controlling the main fluid-pas 
sage, of a regulating device communicating 
with the chambers connected by such passage, 
and provided with a piston and with open 
ings whereby the pressure of fluid in the two 
chambers is brought upon opposite sides of 
the piston, for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, in a meter, of register 
ing devices operated by a stream flowing 
through the meter, a valve controlling the 
said stream, and an independent regulating 
device connected to said valve and constructed 
to be operated by the varying pressure in the 
meter, as set forth. 
5. The combination of the valves E, con 
trolling the main fluid-passages, and the cylin 
der, piston, and ports by which communications 
are established between the opposite ends of 
the cylinder and the chambers connected by 
said passages, and a weighted lever connected 
to the valves and piston, substantially as set 
forth. 
6. The combination, in a fluid-meter, of the 
valves regulating the flow of fluid between the 
chambers connected by the main passages, an 
operating-wheel, (), and an independent tube, 
J, connecting the chambers, substantially as 
set forth. 
7. The combination, with the tubes through 
which the operating-streams are injected upon 
the register - operating wheel, of adjustable 
nozzles and devices extending to the outside 
of the case and constructed to move said noz 
zles, substantially as described. 
8. The case A', provided with a hollow 
stud, P, in combination with the perforated 
case A, packing 20, arranged between a shoul 
der on the stud and the top of the case A, 
and screw-cap and packing upon the upper end 
of the stud, all in combination with the spin 
dle N, driving-wheel and train, and register. 
ing devices, as specified. 
Intestimony whereof Ilhave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
JONATHAN JOINSON, 
Witnesses: 
W. J. NEWTON, 
A. E. S. HANSMANN. 
75 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
IIS 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US264803.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 264,803, 
 
A. WARTH, 
REIN CONTROLLER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 19, 1882. 
WITNESSES: 
g?-ce--- 
26.4 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, C. 
INVENTOR 
Wow Woww. 
BY 44-7, 6 
ATTORNEY 
(No Model.) 
No. 264,803, 
A, WAR.TH. 
9 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
REIN CONTROLLER, 
Patented Sept. 19, 1882, 
 
s 
WITNESSES: 
&c. 44-4 e-c 
26.----4- 
67 
O g O 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR 
Ww Yo:W 
BY 44. 6 
AITORNEYs 
(No Model.) 
A, WAR.TH, 
REIN CONTROLIER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 264,803. 
Patented Sept. 19, 1882. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
tcca 44-f-ce--- 
2%-64- 
N. PETERS, Photo-ithographer, Washingtors: C, 
3. 
3. 
5 
SS 
s 
S 
 
 
S. 
 
 
of o 
INVENTOR 
w Yaw 
BY 4%r-6, 
ATTORNEY: 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 264,803. 
A. WAR.TH. 
REIN CONTROLLER 
9 Sheets-Sheet 4 
Patented Sept. 19 l882. 
WITNESSES: 
2%. ,-4/ 
INVENTOR 
By 4% z. 26% 
ATTORNEY: 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 264,803, 
 
A, WAR.TH. 
REIN CONTROLLER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
Patented Sept. 19, 1882, 
INVENTOR 
Abiw at 
ATTORNEY: 
(No Model.) 
A. : WAR.TH. 
REIN CONTROLLER 
9 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 264,803, 
Patented Sept. 19, 1882. 
 
 
s 
WITNESSES.O. 
Ya 
tfit -444- 
26-46 - 
w 
INVENTOR 
JWw YNow 
By 41%.7/. 6 
ATTORNEYs 
N. PETERs. Ploto-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
A WAR.TH. 
REIN CONTROLIER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
No. 264,803, 
Patented Sept, 19, 1882, 
22 SS YNN: 
). E&SSS 
s NS S 
222222222222 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
(Gita44s---U 
2%-464- 
N. (ETEhs, Photo-Lithographer, washington.D. c. 
 
INVENTOR 
AVbiw Yaw 
BY 46%.7/.2 
ATTORNEY 5 
(No Model.) 
A, WAR.TH. 
REIN CONTROLLER. 
9 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
No. 264,803. 
Patented Sept. 19, 1882, 
 
WITNESSES; 
(to 14.46 
24. 44. 
INVENTOR 
W 
Ww YNYW 
BY 4%z 2. 
ATTORNEYs 
N. PETES. Photo-Lithographet, Washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
A, WAR.TH, 
REIN CONTROLLER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 9. 
No. 264,803. 
Patented Sept. 19, 1882, 
WITNESSES: 
it 4/4-c-C- 
2%. 4.- 
 
esses 
N, PEreRs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
INVENTOR 
Wow Wow 
BY A.%-44% 
- ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBIN WARTE, OF STAPLETON, NEW YORK. 
REIN-CONTROLLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 264,803, dated september 19, 1882. 
Application filed May 20, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBIN WARTH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Staple 
ton, in the county of Richmond and State of 
New York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Rein-Controllers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to mechanical means 
for supporting the reins by which horses are 
driven; and it consists of certain combinations 
of devices, which, while supporting the reins, 
permit the driver to draw in one or more reins 
and to let out one. or more other reins by turn 
ing his land at the wrist axially with the fore 
The invention is applicable to the control of 
one or more pairs of reins, and the said com 
binations are recited in the claims at the end 
of this specification. 
In order that the invention may be fully 
understood, I have represented in the accom 
panying drawings, and will proceed to de 
scribe, my invention as applied to the control 
of three pairs of reins such as are used for 
driving three pairs of horses, it being under 
stood that the mode of application of the in 
vention may be varied according to the num 
ber of pairs of reins to be controlled and ac 
cording to the views of different users or differ 
ent circumstances. 
represents a side elevation of my rein-con 
troller as constructed for three pairs of horses, 
or what is commonly called six-in-hand. 
Fig. 2 is a plan or top view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a sectional front view of the same. Fig. 4 
is a vertical section in the plane aa, Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a horizontal section in the planey gy, 
Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a portion of the clutch mech 
anism for connecting the reel to its shaft. Fig. 
7 is a vertical section of my rein-holder when 
constructed for guiding one or two horses, the 
line & 8, Fig. 8, indicating the plane of section. 
Fig. 8 is a front view of the same. Fig. 9 is 
a vertical section of a modification, the line 
act act, Fig. 10, indicating the plane of section. 
Fig. 10 is a plan or top view of the same. The 
remaining figures are details and modifications, 
which will be referred to as the description 
progresses. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In these drawings, the letter A designates a 
rein-holder, which may be made in the form of 
a double-flanged drum, (see Figs. 1, 3, 5, 9, and 
10,) or in the shape of a cross, as shown in Fig. 
11, or in any other form or shape suitable for 
tle purpose. This rein-holder, as shown in 
Fig. 9, is hollow, and is mounted loosely on an 
upright arm, B. A bevel-wheel, a, is cast solid 
With or otherwise firmly attached to the rein 
holder A, and gears into a bevel-wheel, b, 
mounted on a horizontal shaft, C, Fig. 10. This 
shaft has its bearings in a head, D, secured to 
the upper end of the upright arm B, and on its 
inner end is firmly mounted a handle, E. To the 
circumference of the rein-holder is secured, at 
about the middle of its length, the loop of the 
pair of reins F, Fig. 5, and the portions of the 
reins extending forward from the rein-holder are 
guided between rein guides co, which are pref. 
erably constructed as rollers, mounted between 
plates d d, which are connected at their outer 
ends by the axles of the rollers ec, while the 
inner end of one of said plates is secured to the 
head ID, and the inner end of the other plate 
embraces the hub of the rein-holder A. The 
upright arm B is secured in a socket, G, Fig. 
3, which is connected to the vehicle in any suit 
able position to bring the handle E in conven 
ient reach of the driver, and if the driver takes 
hold of this handle and turns it in either di 
rection the rein-holder A is correspondingly 
turned through the intervention of the connect 
ing-gearinga, b, the rein at one side of the rein 
holder is drawn in, and that at the opposite 
side is let out, and by these means the horse 
or other draft-animal can be controlled. 
It will be easily understood that this device 
can be used also for a team of two horses. 
Instead of a single rein-holder, as above de 
scribed, two reels, EIH, may be used, as shown 
in Figs, 7 and 8, with the capacity to control 
the horse or horses, and also to shorten or 
lengthen either rein separately, so as to adjust 
its working length. These two reels EE are 
mounted loosely on horizontal arms II, Fig. 
8, which extend from the head D, that is 
mounted on the upper end of the upright arm 
B, and forms the bearing for the sihaft C, that 
carries the handle E. On each of the horizon 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
Oo 
64, S63 
To 
75 
tal arms II is mounted loosely a bevel-wheel, 
f, which can be coupled to the corresponding 
reel H, and to the handle-shaft () is firmly se 
cured a bevel-wheel, b, which gears into the 
bevel - wheels ff, Fig. 8. When the bevel 
wheels,ffare coupled together with the reels H 
H and the lhandle is turned the two reels re 
volve in opposite directions, drawing in one 
rein and letting out the other. The bevel 
wheels thus constitute gearing by which the 
said reels are connected with the handle E. 
For the purpose of coupling the bevel-wheels 
ff and the reels AA, I use plates (, Fig. 6, 
and pinsh, Figs. 3 and 8. The plates g are 
firmly connected to the bevel-wheels ff, and 
they are provided with a number of holes, as 
shown in Fig. 6. The pins h extend through 
the reels and are subjected to the action of 
springs i, Fig. 3, which have a tendency to 
drive the same inward, so as to engage with 
one of the holes in the corresponding plate g. 
If one of the pins his drawn out, the corre 
sponding reel can be turned on its arm inde 
pendent of the corresponding bevel-wheel f, 
for the purpose of shortening or lengthening 
the effective length of its particular rein; but 
if the pins are permitted to follow the action 
of their springs they engage with the plate g 
and the reels and bevel-wheels are coupled to 
gether. When one of the pinsk has been drawn 
out it is retained in this position by a spring 
latch, i. (See Fig. 1.) I do not wish to confine 
myself, however, to this precise coupling de 
vice, since various other coupling devices can 
be substituted for those shown in the drawings 
without departing from my invention. 
To each of the reels EI is secured a strap or 
rein, J, Figs. 1 and 2, and these reins serve to 
guide one or two horses. The inner ends of 
the reins J may be secured to the reels H. H. 
in various ways. In Fig. 4 the rein extends 
into the inside of the reel and is fastened by a 
screw. In Fig. 11 the rein is fastened by 
means of a screw to one of the arms of the 
reel. From the head D extends an arm, k, 
across the faces of the reels H. H., and on each 
end of this arm is mounted loosely a roller, l, 
which forms a rein-guard to prevent the rein 
from jumping off from the reel. 
If the reins 
are made in sections, the ends of the rein-sec 
tions J* nearest the driver pass beneath the 
reels H, (see Figs. 1, 2, and 4,) and they rest 
upon rein - supports m, which are formed by 
arms extending from the head D. (Best seen in 
Fig. 3.) By these means these rein-sections 
are kept in the proper positions, and the driver 
is at all times enabled to grasp them if he de 
sires to hold back one pair of horses independ 
ently of the others, or for any other purpose. 
In order to make my rein-controller applica 
ble to a team of four-in-hand, Icombine the rein 
holder A and the reels HH, as shown in Fig. 
3, the bevel-wheel d on the handle-shaft being 
geared together by the bevel-wheel a with the 
rein-holder A and by the bevel-wheels.ff with 
the reels H. H. The rein F, secured to the 
rein-holder A, is used to guide the pole-horses, 
and in order to affect the leading horses in ad 
vance of the pole-horses (which is principally 
necessary in turning corners, but is also re 
quired to some extent whenever the team is to be 
directed to one side or to the other) the rein 
holder A is so proportioned and geared together 
with the handle-shaft that it turns faster than 
the reels H. H. For a team of six-in-lh and I add 
the additional rein-holder K, Figs. 1, 2, and 3. 
This rein-holder turns freely on a pivot, 12, se 
cured in the upper end of the head D, and in its 
ends are secured the reins L for the pole. horses, 
while the reins J go to the middle pair and the 
reins F to the leading horses. The driver con 
trols the pole-horses by operating the rein 
holder K with one hand, while he controls the 
middle pair and the leaders by means of the 
handle E. 
The arm B, which supports the reel or reels, 
is fitted into a socket, G, as already stated, 
and it is so arranged, by preference, that it can 
turn freely in this socket. (See Fig. 7.) The 
socket G may be connected to the vehicle in 
many different ways, and the arm and socket 
constitute the support for the rein-holder and 
reels above described. In Fig. 12 I have shown 
the socket secured to the end of an arm, M, 
which is jointed to a second arm, M*, and this 
second arm is firmly connected to rod N, which 
fits a socket, G*, and is so arranged that it 
can be turned axially in this socket, said socket 
being formed in the upper end of a standard 
which is firmly secured to the vehicle. The 
rod N and socket G* constitute a swivel-sup 
port for the rein-controller and its various rein 
holders or reels. The rod N is provided at its 
lower end with a head, o, Fig. 13, which pref. 
erably engages with a slide, p, that can be ad 
justed in the socket G* by a set-screw, q. A 
section of this slide is shown in Fig. 13, a top 
view in Fig. 14, and a front view in Fig. 15. 
By combining this slide with the rod N said 
rod can be raised and lowered as well as turned 
axially in the socket G* without being liable 
to become detached. To the upper end of the 
rod N is secured a friction-support, , so that 
when the arm M is swung around upon this 
support it is retained in position. 
The socket G* may be secured to the dash 
board O by means of a bracket, P, and braces 
Q, as shown in Figs. 16 and 17. The bracket 
P, instead of being secured to the bottom part 
of the dash-board, as shown in these figures, 
may be connected to the bolster R, which is 
supported by the spring S, as shown in Figs. 
18 and 19. In applying my rein-holder to a 
sleigh, I secure the socket G* directly to the 
body of the sleigh in the manner shown in Fig. 
20. 
Instead of the jointed arms MM* shown in 
Fig. 12, various other devices may be used 
such, for instance, as the telescopic bars M' 
M'* shown in Figs. 21 and 22, or the lazy 
tongs M shown in Figs. 23 and 24. The bar 
M', Figs, 21 and 22, is square, and slides be. 
9 O 
95 
OO 
Io5 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
13o 
S 
O 
25 
35 
SO 
55 
 
- 
264, SO3 
- 
3 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
85 
tween guide-rollers SS, which are mounted in 
cheeks secured to the rod N, while the socket 
G is secured to the outer end of the bar M'. 
The lazy-tongs M are connected to the rod N, 
and to their outer ends is secured the socket G. 
Instead of the telescopic bars M. M'* shown 
in Figs. 21 and 22, a sliding frame, M', may 
be used, such as shown in Figs. 25 and 26. 
This frame consists of two bars, which are con 
nected at their ends and guided between roll 
ers S s, which are mounted in cheeks secured 
to the rod N. All these devices are mechani 
cal equivalents for the jointed arms, for the 
purpose of supporting my rein-controller with 
the capacity of moving it to and fro. By com 
loiting either of these devices with the socket 
G, which supports my rein controller, I am en 
abled to give to the rein-controller the requi 
site freedom of motion, so that the driver can 
easily execute all the operations requisite in 
driving. If the socket G is firmly attached to 
the vehicle, my rein-controller can be used for 
guiding the horse or horses; but it cannot be 
used for holding them back, and for this pur 
pose the rein-sections J*, Figs. 1 and 2, must be 
used; but if therein-controller is combined with 
the socket G or G* by jointed arms or any other 
equivalent mechanism, the driver can guide 
the horses and hold them back with much 
greater ease than he can do by the ordinary 
arrangement, because the hand (or hands) 
which he uses for operating my rein-controller 
is supported by the handle or rein-holders of 
the apparatus, while in the ordinary manner 
of operating the reins the hands are entirely 
unsupported and have to sustain the whole 
weight of the reins. 
In order to make my rein controller still 
more convenient, I secure to the ends of the 
rein-holders Karm-rests U, as shown in Figs. 
27 and 2S, upon which the driver may rest his 
arms while grasping the reins in advance of 
the rein-holder K in the ordinary way. The 
arm-rests U are fastened in the handle K, so 
that they can freely swivel therein. 
In the above-descrlbed rein-controller the 
rein-holder A is made in the form of a drum; 
but by making it in the form of the upper rein 
holder, K, and arranging it far enough from the 
a'eels El H to admit the fingers between them 
and it, it may be used as a handle to turn the 
reels, thus avoiding the necessity of using the 
handle E. 
In the above-described rein-controller the 
recls are mounted upon horizontal axles; but 
they may be mounted, if preferred, upon up 
light axles, and the gearing may be corre 
spondingly modified. For guiding the horses 
the reels may also be turned simultaneously in 
the same direction, provided the reins be wound 
in opposite directions upon the reels. in the 
latter case, also, the reels, suitably connected by 
clutch mechanism, may be turned directly by 
a handle without the interposition of gearing. 
An example of such a modification is repre 
sented at Figs. 29, 30, and 31, where Fig. 29 
represents a vertical section; Fig. 30, a plan 
or top view; Fig. 31, a side view. In the ex 
ample shown by these figures, the reels H El' 
are mounted on the vertical axle I' and the 
handle E is firmly connected to one of the 
reels. The reins J J are wound on the reels 
in opposite directions, so that if both reels are 
turned in the same direction one rein is drawn 
in and the other is paid out. The upper reel, 
H, is mounted on a sleeve, n, on the inner end 
of which is secured a disk, o, with boles to re 
ceive the clutch-pin p. The lower reel, H', is 
mounted on a sleeve, q, on the inner end of 
which is secured a disk, '', with holes to re- 8o 
ceive the clutch-pin s. The disks o and rare 
geared together by a footh, t. When both 
reels are coupled together with their disks and 
the upper reel is turned by the handle E' one 
of the reins is drawn in and the other paid out. 
If the lower reel, H', is uncoupled, the upper 
reel can be turned separately. 
It is obvious that the device herein described 
can be turned upside down or in a horizontal or 
inclined position, as may be most convenient, 
under certain circumstances. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of a rein-holder, a pro 
jecting handle arranged to turn in its support 
ing-bearings, and a gear-connection between 
the handle and the rein-holder for transmit 
ting a turning movement from the handle to 
the said rein-holder, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a rein - holding reel, 
a rotary handle, and a gear-connection be 
tween the handle and the reel for transmitting 
rotary motion from the handle to the reel, Sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of two rein-holding reels, 
a handle, and a gear-connection between the 
handle and the two reels for transmitting ro 
tary movement by the handle to both of the 
reels, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with a rein-holder, of 
the support for the rein-holder and jointed or 
swiveled artins for carrying said support, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination of a rein-holder, a han 
dle, and intermediate gearing for transmitting 
novement from the handle to the rein-holder, 
with a support for the rein-holder and jointed 
or swiveled arms for carrying the said support, 
substantially as described. 
6. The combination of a turning rein-hold 
ing reel, a turning-handle, and intermediate 
gearing between the handle and the reel, with 
a support for the reel and jointed arms for car 
lying said support, substantially as described. 
7. The combination of two rein-holding reels 
with an intermediate handle geared together 
with the two reels to turn them in the same 
or in reverse directions, substantially as de 
scribed. 
8. The combination of two rein-holding reels, 
a handle for rotating said reels, and a clutch 
mechanism, whereby one reel can be rotated 
s 
I 25 
OO 
IO 
4 
264,903 
independently of the other, substantially as 
described. 
9. The combination of two independent rein 
holding reels, a handle, and intermediate gear 
ing connecting the handle with both reels, and 
a clutch mechanism for each reel, whereby 
both reels can be simultaneously or independ 
ently rotated, substantially as described. 
10. The combination of a rein-holder, a ro 
tating handle-shaft, a gear on the handle-shaft, 
and a gear on the reel, substantially as de 
scribed. 
11. The combination of two rein-holding 
reels, each provided with a gear, and a rotat 
ing handle-shaft provided with a gear engag 
ing the gears on the two reels, substantially 
as described. 
12. The combination of two reels arrangel 
to rotate on fixed bearings, the gear-wheels 
loosely mounted on the said bearings, the 
clutch-plates attached to said gear-wheels, the 
clutch pins carried by the reels, and the han 
dle-shaft interposed between the reels and pro 
vided with a gear-wheel engaging both of the 
gear-wheels ou said reels, substantially as de 
scribed. 
13. In combination with the rein - holder 
mounted on a vertical axis, two rein-holdiers 
mounted on a horizontal axis, a handle geared 
to all of said holders for rotating the same, and 
a head supporting the said vertical and hori 
Zontal axes, substantially as described. 
O 
IS 
2 o 
25 
14. The combination of the two reels rotat 
ing in a vertical plane, a head supporting said 
reels, a handle-shaft arranged in bearings in 
gear with all of the reels, and a handle pivoted 
to the upper end of the said head, substan 
tially as described. 
15. The combination of the reel mounted on 
a vertical axis, two reels mounted on horizon 
tal axes, a rotating handle in gear with all of 
the reels, a head supporting the vertical and 
horizoutal axes of the reels, and a handle piv 
oted to the upper portion of the said head and 
provided with rests for the drivers arms, sub 
stantially as described. 
16. The combination, with a vehicle, of a 
swivel-arm with arm-supports, substantially 
as described. 
17. The combination, with a vehicle, of a 
swivel-arm with swiveling arm-supports, sub 
stantially as described. 
1S. The combination, with a vehicle, of a 
Swivel-arm, arm-supports, and jointed arms, 
substantially as describe (i. 
In testimony whereof Iiaveller cuinto set 
my land and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
- 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
ALBIN WAR.TH. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, . 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US264903.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 264,903. 
 
R. SMITH, 
RECIPROCATING PROPELLER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 26, 1882. 
Yn 
Ss 
s 
R ; 
Witnesses 
76 (53-4 21. 
st 
 
SS 
R 
Ss 
II. 
S in 
d" 
N 
/rivenfor 
Azcara Smith, 
276ere?a, wit/z. 
(No Model.) 
No. 264,903, 
 
R, SMITH, 
RECIPR,00ATING PROPELIER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 26, 1882. 
s 
I III 
AF 
A. 
s 
A2Z/e72/27 
Zee (/avaz Sz7/72, 
7 &eezi, 2% 
f 
y 
R, SMITH 
RECIPROCATING PROPELLER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Sept. 26, 1882, 
 
 
 
 
 
WZ/7Zesses, 
(52. 
/7ZZ78724(27. 
/tze/Zaray AS722/7. 
(No Model.) 
No. 264,903. 
R. SMITH, 
s 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
RECIPROCASING PROPELLER, 
Patentd Sept. 26, 1882, 
s s 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s Air 
 
 
s 
I 
II. 
 
- 
S 
N 
2. 
1. 
e 
S 
 
W7/72 esses, 
- 
/7/We/7/07) 
Aze/arez Sar (7. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICEARD SMITH, OF SEERBROOKE, QUEBEC, CANADA. 
RECIPROCATING PROPELLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 264,903, dated September 26, 1882. 
e 
Application filed January 9, 1882. 
(No model.) 
EC 
25 
35 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RICHARD SMITH, a citi. 
Zen of the Dominion of Canada, residing at 
Sherbrooke, in the county of Sherbrooke, Prov 
ince of Quebec, Canada, have invented certain 
neW and useful Improvements in Reciprocating 
Propellers; and I do hereby declare the fol. 
lowing to be a full clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the acompanying drawings, and to letters 
or figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention is to be considered in the 
light of an improvement upon. a class of pro 
pelle's shown and described in Letters Patent 
of the United States issued to myself on the 
7th day of June, 1881, in which one or more 
folding blades or vanes, expanding when 
driven in one direction, create resistance upon 
or to the Water to propel the vessel, and fold 
ing on the return or retreat stroke to offer no 
resistance to the progress of the vessel, are 
linged at their bases or pintles to the outer 
end of the propeller-shaft, which in turn is se 
cured to the outer end of the piston-rod of a 
steam-cylinder, the edges of the blades or 
Vanes being pivoted by suitable connectiug 
links to the end of the piston-rod of a second 
Steam-cylinderindependent of but cooperating 
With the first. 
In the pratical working of the propeller as 
above patented I have encountered several 
serious obstacles, which my present improve 
ments are intended to correct, First, the action 
of the blades as they close upon the water in 
folding as the propeller completes its active 
Stroke in driving the vessel forward tends to 
neutralize the legitimate functions of the pro 
peller by exerting a resistance to the water in 
the Wrong direction, thereby inducing a re 
tarding motion or backward draft upon the 
vessel ; second, the shocks or thrust upon the 
vessel and machinery from the pounding 
of the propeller-that is, the sudden resistance 
to the Water on the starting of the propeller 
in its active stroke to drive the vessel ahead 
as its blades expand and bring up against their 
bearings. I obviate the objection first named 
by cutting off steam from the primary or main 
cylinder before the piston of the auxiliary cyl 
55 . 
65 
75 
inder reaches the end of its stroke, and ad 
mitting steam to the said side cylinder coinci 
dent with the completion of the stroke of the 
main piston and as the traverse of the pro 
peller bodily ceases, by which means the blades 
are fully closed as the outgoing stroke termi 
nates and offer no resistance to the water on 
the return-stroke. Therefore the final act of 
closing the blades becomes a means of aiding 
rather than retarding the propulsion of the 
vessel, as the tendency is to crowd the water 
rearward from before the blades, in lieu of 
drawing it forward into them, when the pro 
peller is under rapid headway in its return 
stroke. I obviate the second-named objection 
by first admitting live steam to the primary 
cylinder at the beginning of the active stroke 
(when propelling the vessel ahead) and ad 
vancing the cross-bead to which the blades are 
pivoted until such blades are nearly open, and 
then admitting live steam to the side cylinder 
or cylinders, and exerting the full power of the 
combined cylinders to advance the propeller 
bodily and permit the resistance of the water 
to complete the unfolding of the blade or 
blades with an easy motion and allow the 
cross-head to gradually overtake the blades, 
thereby avoiding the shocks and thrusts inci 
dent to the sudden full opening of the blades 
against the cross-head. 
My improvements further relate to means 
for converting the reciprocating rectilinear 
movements of the piston-rods into continuous 
rotary motion in one direction of the cam-shaft 
which operates the various valves of the en 
gine, the same being a clutch-feed mechanism 
consisting of a horizontal rock-shaft composed 
of a spiral bar arranged in longitudinal align 
ment with the auxiliary cylinder (which is dis 
posed to one side of the main cylinder) and 
rocked on its axis in alternately opposite di 
rections to the extent of one-half a revolution 
in each direction by the traverses in right 
lines of a cross-head which surrounds the 
spiral bar or shaft and unites the propeller 
shaft and main piston-rod, these intermittent 
semi-rotary movements of the rock-shaft being 
converted into continuous rotary movements 
of the cam-shaft by a series of gears and dogs 
as hereinafter explained. 
My improvements further relate to means 
for absorbing or greatly relieving the shocks 
9o 
95. 
do 
g 
- 
264,903 
IO 
45 
55 
75 
3O 
35 
and thrusts to the vessel and machinery, which 
would otherwise naturally result from suddenly 
arresting the momentum and changing the di 
rection of stroke of the propeller in the absence 
5 of a crank-motion, this feature in my improve 
ments being accomplished by the employment 
of dash-pots between each end of the cross. 
head which connects the propeller-shaft and 
main piston-rod and the standards or bearings 
which support respectively the outer end of 
the frame and inner portion of the latter. 
My improvements further relate to the pecu 
liar or novel construction of the cylinders and 
their ports and valves, whereby steam is first 
admitted to the primary cylinder at the begin 
ning of the active stroke of its piston in pro 
pelling the vessel ahead until the propeller. 
blades are nearly open, and then admitted to 
the side cylinders, whereby the latter operate 
with the first or main cylinder in advancing 
the propeller bodily and allowing the resistance 
of the Water to gradually close its Vanes, as be 
fore premised, and also whereby admission of 
steam to the main cylinder is cut off and its 
25 piston (during the active stroke of the latter in 
driving the vessel forward) brought to a stop 
before the propeller-blades begin to close, the 
auxiliary pistons advancing to close the blades, 
while thfe main piston remains idle. 
My improvements further consist in a single 
cam-shaft rotating continuously in one direc 
tion and carrying a series of cams, and operat 
ing with the series of valves and valve-levers 
to actuate the entire series alternately when 
advancing or backing the vessel, the shaft be 
ing shugged endwise to one or the other of its 
extremes of position, according to the neces. 
sity for opening or closing the valves, to effect 
the advance or the backing of the vessel, as 
the case may be. 
My improvements further consistin the novel 
construction of the cams for actuating the valve 
levers, in which each cam is a plate independ 
ent of the hub which carries it, and is secured 
to the end of the hub in an adjustable manner, 
a sectoral plate, also secured adjustably to the 
hub, being employed, in order that the valves 
which govern the admission of live steam to 
the cylinders may be adapted to cut off such 
steam at any point in the traverse of a given 
piston, it being borne in mind by the reader 
that the live-steam ports are always live-steam 
ports, while the exhaust-ports are at all times 
exhaust-ports, and the two are not used alter. 
nately in common, as in ordinary steam-engines. 
Minor details of my improvements will ap 
pear during the following description of the 
various parts of the apparatus. 
The dra Wings accompanying this specifica 
tion represent, in Figure 1, a plan, in Fig. 2 a. 
vertical section, in Fig. 3 a side elevation, 
and in Figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 cross 
sections, of an engine and propeller contain 
ing my invention; and Fig. 12 is a horizon 
65 tal section of the three cylinders of a steam 
engine and propeller containing my improve 
ments or invention. Fig. 13 in said draw. 
ings represents a vertical longitudinal section 
through one of the cross-heads of the propel 
ler shaft. Fig. 14 is a side view of the cam. To 
shaft and its cams. IFig. 15 is a face view of 
one of the cams. Fig. 16 is a plan of the cyl 
inders, showing the various valve-passages in 
dotted lines. Fig. 17 is a section of one of the 
cams. Fig. 18 is a vertical cross-section of the 
cross-head of the propeller-shaft. Fig. 19 is a 
side elevation. Figs. 20 and 21 are sections of 
the train of reversing-gears, to be explained. 
Fig. 22 is a section of one of said gears. Fig. 
23 is a section of one of the cams and cut-offs. 8o 
Fig. 24 is a side view of one of the cut-offs. 
Reference being had to the above-nanied 
drawings, it will be seen that A represents a hor 
izontal steam-cylinder, which constitutes the 
primary or main cylinder of the engine, and is 
provided with a piston, B, and piston rod C in 
the usual manner. No general steam-chest is 
employed in this engine, as in ordinary steam 
engines; but the body of metal of which the 
cylinders are cast is reduced to a flat surface 
or table upon the top at each end, as shown at 
D or D', and each valve is contained in a 
chamber in an independent boss erected upon 
the table. 
B B in the drawings represent two lesser 
or auxiliary steam-cylinders, arranged paral 
lel with and upon opposite sides of the main or 
center cylinder, A, the combined area or ca 
pacity of these auxiliary cylinders being pref. 
erably somewhat in excess of that of the said 
main cylinder, in order to obtain a preponder 
ance of power over the latter for purposes 
hereinafter explained. The cylinders B. 
B. 
are virtually one, as they have free intercolm 
munication by passages ZZ. (See Figs. 5, 10, 
and 12 of the drawings.) The pistons of the 
side cylinders are shown at E. E.', respectively, 
and the rods of such pistons at W. W. The 
piston-rod C of the main piston B plays within 
a guide or standard, C, erected upon the bed- IIo 
plate D7 of the engine, immediately in rear of 
the three cylinders, the outer end of this rod O 
being secured to the inner end of a horizontal 
tubular cylinder or cross-head, c, which is sup 
ported at bottom upon and slides to and fro of 115 
ways or guides t upon the base-plate before 
named. The two auxiliary piston-rods W W 
are connected at their outer ends to opposite 
ends of a horizontal bar or yoke, V, which in 
tercepts the cross-head c of the main rod C at 
right angles to the latter by passing through 
longitudinal slots b b in opposite walls of said 
head c, the length of these slots b, as in my 
patented propeller above alluded to, being such 
as to permit of the requisite play of the aux 
iliary piston-rods in opening or closing the 
vanes of the propeller. 
From the yoke V the construction of the 
propeller itself is in this instance substan 
tially the same as that shown in my patent al 
luded to; but to properly explain the opera 
tion of my present invention it will be essen 
tial to describe briefly the construction of the 
propeller, which is as follows: 
I25 
P 
95 
IOC) 
IOS 
264,903 
3. - 
25 
O 
IS 
To the outer end of the piston-rod Cof the 
main or center cylinder, A., I secure, by the in 
termediate slotted head or hub, c, the inner end 
of a tubular shaft, D, which I term the pro 
peller-shaft, as it drives the expanded propel 
ler rearward to forge the vessel ahead; and to 
the outer or rear end of the said shaft D, and 
at right angles to the axis, I secure a vertical 
cross head or bar, d, which is guided at top 
and bottom by and plays between parallel hori. 
zontal ways or guides, which constitute the 
upper and lower boundaries of a rectangular 
oblong opening in the dead-wood of the vessel, 
the outer or rear end of the shaft D being jour 
maled in a standard, C, erected upon the bed 
plate D of the engine, in manner similar to 
the standard C, before named. 
To the center of the cross-head d, I pivot the 
adjacent inner edges or pintles of twin flat, thin 
blades or wings ee, which, combined, consti 
tute the body of the folding propeller, these 
blades being preferably oblong rectangles in 
outline, and being of a length and width ac 
cording to the nature and capacity of the ves 
sel they are to drive. 
In some modified forms of my propeller I 
employ but one piston and cylinder to open 
and close the blades and drive the propeller; 
- but as shown in the present instance the pis 
ton-rod of the center cylinder and the propel 
ler-shaft Dare in axial alignment. Hence, in 
order that the side cylinders and their pistons 
may function to aid in operating the propeller, 
it becomes necessary to divert the rods of the 
said cylinders from the axes of the latter in 
order to operate upon the propeller through 
the tubular shaft I); and to this end I employ 
the transverse yoke or bar V, before men 
tioned as connecting the outer ends of the two 
piston-rods.W. W. The yoke V is connected 
at its center to the inner end of a rod or shaft, 
(t, contained within the propeller-shaft ID, such 
yoke playing within the slotl) of the cross-head 
C and operating to open and close the blades 
of the propeller through the medium of the 
shaft a. 
To the outer end of the rod or shaft a, Ise 
cure at its center a vertical bar, G, and 1 cre 
ate in opposite walls of the shaft ID slots or 
openings ff, which together form a common 
passage to receive the head G and permit of 
play of such head by and with the said rod a 
and to and fro of the shaft D. 
To each ex 
tremity of the head or bar G, I pivot one end 
of one of twin links, gg, the opposite or inner 
ends of these links being pivoted respectively 
to the outer edges of the blades ee of the pro 
peller. 
Returning to the construction of the cylin 
ders and their adjuncts, it will be seen that the 
inner table, D, has upon each side two ports, 
those upon one side being represented by Q' 
and K and on the other by G' and S', these 
ports being placed alternating or obliquely 
65 with respect to each other, in order that their 
respective operating-levers shall not interfere. 
The valves of the ports are ordinary drop 
So 
35 
45 
55 
check-valves, the valve of the port Q being 
shown by the letter Q', of the port K by the 
letter K', of the port G by the letter G', and 
of the port S by the letter S'. The ports K Q' 
are always live-steam or inlet ports, while the 
ports G'S' are always exhaust-ports. The ports 
KK communicate with the adjacent or in 
ner end of the center cylinder, A, by a passage, 
L'. The port Q' connects with the adjacent 
or inner end of the side cylinder B' by a ver 
tical passage, Q, directly beneath it. The ex 
haust-port G. makes exit from the adjacentorin 
nerend of the opposite side cylinder, B9, by a di 
rect passage, a, while the exhaust-port S'makes 
exit from the adjacent or inner end of the center 
or main cylinder, A, by a passage, b, and is al 
ways full open while the vessel is backing. Upon 
the opposite or outer table, D', the above ar 
rangement of ports and valves is duplicated 
that is, U and R represent live-steam or inlet 
ports upon one side of such chest, which are al 
ways inlet-ports, and T' H' exhaust-ports upon 
the opposite side, which are always exhaust 
ports. The valve of the port U is shown at U", 
of the port Rat R', of the port T at T', and of 
the port H' at E'. The port U communicates 
with the adjacent or outer end of the side cyl 
inder B' by a vertical passage, d, directly 
beneath it. The port R' communicates with 
the adjacent or outer end of the main or cen 
ter cylinder, A, by a passage, g. The port T. 
makes exit from the adjacent or outer end 
of the side cylinder B by a passage, f', and 
the port H makes exit from the adjacent or . 
outer end of the center cylinder, A, by a pas 
sage, c'. Each valve of the entire series is 
lowered (when permitted to do so by the re 
cession of its actuating-cam) by a coiled spring, 
l, which encircles its stem and exerts its stress 
between the top of the valve and tihe under 
side of the cap-plate i, which constitutes a 
guide to the upper part of the stem of each 
valve and serves to close the top or mouth of 
a hollow boss, k, erected upon the table D or 
D', the interior of this boss constituting an in 
dividual valve-chamber, and the various valve 
chambers thus provided communicating re 
spectively with the inlet and exhaust ports of 
the engine, as hereinafter explained. 
In order to a clear understanding of the com 
plex arrangement of the valves and adjuncts 
in this engine, I have shown the valve-cham 
ber of the valve K" at n and its stem at 8, of 
the valve Q' at n. and its stem at it, of the 
valve G' at 0 and its stem at ac, of the valve 
'' at p and its stem at ac, of the valve U" at 
g and its stem at y, of the valve R' at land 
its stem at 2, of the valve T''' at s and its 
stem at a, and of the valve H' at t and its 
stem at l'. 
It is to be understood that these 
individual valve-chambers are to be supplied 
with steam from a common supply-pipe, as 
shown in Figs. 14, and 6 of the drawings. As 
before stated, each Valve is lowered and closed 
by the function of a spring, and to raise and 
open the various valves I proceed as follows: 
With each valve I employ a horizontal lever, 
75 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
I O 
IIS 
I 25 
 
4 
264,903 
IO 
25 
35 
So 
55 
75 
85 
c', arranged transversely of the table D or D' 
and pivoted at its base to the top of a post, 
d", erected upon said table to one side of the 
latter, these levers being arranged necessarily 
alternately in opposite directions, and the nose 
of each extending through an eye or guide, e, 
formed upon or secured to the top of each 
valve-stem. The center of each lever c' car 
ries an anti-friction bowl, f", to bear upon the 
periphery of the cam below it. The various 
cams for operating the levers c' are of equal 
capacity, but differentially disposed, and are 
secured to a common horizontal shaft, g, lo 
cated longitudinally and centrally over the 
main cylinder A, and mounted in bearings or 
brackets l', secured to the outer ends of said 
cylinder, continuous rotary motion in one di 
rection being imparted to this shaft by means 
hereinafter explained, and it being journaled 
in its bearings in such manner as to be sus 
ceptible of shortendwise movements or shug. 
To shug the shaft g', I employ an upright 
reversing-lever or shipper, (shown at i in the 
drawings,) which is pivoted at its lower end to 
the top of the main cylinder A, and carries up 
on one side a sliding bolt, j, for locking it in 
position, the lower end of which bolt operates 
with two notches, k l', created in the upper 
edge of a sectoral plate, m, secured to or form 
ing the upper part of a vertical post, , erect 
ed also upon the top of the cylinder A and 
alongside the lever i, a suitable hand-latch, o, 
being pivoted to the upper end or handle of 
the lever i, to control the movements of the 
bolt, after the manner of reversing-levers of lo. 
comotive-engines. 
The series of cams for operating the valve 
levers and valves when the vessel is to be pro 
pelled ahead are as follows: the cam for op 
erating the valve G' at J and for operating 
the valve S' at X". The inlet-valve U is com 
pelled to remain closed by its spring during 
the entire time the vessel is being propelled 
aihead, and to accomplish this I employ, in 
place of an active cam, a concentric circular 
disk or head, U*, which I term a dummy," 
since its action upon the valve-lever does not 
fluctuate, the diameter of this dummy being 
equal to or preferably slightly less than the 
smaller diameter of a cam, in order to have no 
effect in lifting a valve-lever. The cam for op 
erating the valve R' is shown at R. The valve 
T' is compelled to remain full open against the 
stress of its spring during the time the vessel 
is driven ahead, and to effect this I employ, in 
place of an active cam, a concentric circular 
disk or dummy, Y', the diameter of which is 
equal to or preferably slightly greater than the 
largest diameter or swell of a cam. 
The can 
for operating the valve H' is shown at Li'. 
The cams that come into use when the shaft 
is shugged, preparatory to backing the vessel, 
are as follows, (see Figs.2 and 14:) The can for 
operating the valve Q' is shown at Easformed 
upon or secured to the opposite end of the hub 
E, which is common to it and the cam P. The 
valveK" is compelled to remain closed during 
the entire time of backing the vessel, and for 
this purpose no cam is employed to act upon its 
lever, but in place of the calm a dummy or con 
centric circular head ordisk, C, is formed upon 
the opposite end of the hub F, which contains 
the cam J., which dummy C", as its diameter 
is less than the smallest diameter of a cam, 
has no effect to raise the valve. The valve G' 
is operated by a cam, K, secured to or formed 
upon the end of the hub G, which carries the 
cam J. The valve S' is compelled to remain 
open during the time the vessel is being backed 
by the employment of a second dummy or con 
centric circular disk or head, D, formed upon 
or secured to the opposite end of the hub H', 
which contains the cam X", the diameter of 
this dummy D being equal to or somewhat 
greater than the largest diameter of a can. 
The valve U" is operated by the cam A', se 
cured to or formed upon the hub I, which car 
ries the dummy U, before explained. The valve 
R is operated by the can F, secured to the 
opposite end of the hub J, which carries the 
cam R. The valve T' is operated by the catn 
B, secured to the opposite or inner end of the 
hub K?, which carries the large dummy Y'; 
and the valve H' is operated by the cam l', 
formed upon or secured to the opposite or in 
ner end of the hub L, which carries the cam L. 
When the vessel is to be driven ahead the 
shaft g' and the cams carried by it stand in 
the relative positions shown in Figs 2, 4, 5, 6, 
7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 of the drawings-that is, in 
their extreme inward positions-in which case 
the cams J, X', P, J, L', and R and the 
dummies Y'U' are brought into action. When 
the vessel is to be backed the lever or shipper 
i is to be reversed and the cam-shaft and its 
cams brought to their extreme outer positions, 
in which case the cams E, K, I', F, B, and 
A and the dummies UD are brought into 
US, The center cylinder and the side cylinders 
are of equal length, but are not arranged in 
the same plane longitudinally-that is, the 
center cylinderstands in advance of the side 
cylinders a distance equal to that necessary 
for either the center or side pistons to travel 
in order to open or close, the vanes of the pro. 
peller, for the reason, as before stated, that 
the pistons of the side cylinders continue to 
advance in the act of closing the blades as the 
propeller completes its outgoing stroke (when 
the vessel is driven forward) after the piston 
of the center cylinder has completed its trav 
erse, whereas in the act of backing the vessel 
the center piston continues on as the propeller 
completes its inward traverse to close the 
vanes after the pistons of the side cylinders 
have completed their strokes. I prefer, for 
convenience of construction and neatness and 
compactness in appearance, that the three cyl 
inders shall outwardly present an appearance 
of equal length, and to this end I close up the . 
outer or rear end of the main cylinder and the 
inner or front ends of the side cylinders, as . 
shown at p and q', respectively, (see Fig. 12;) 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
J 25 
I30 
264,903 
- 
5 
25 
... 
but these spaces between the outward bound 
ary of the center cylinder and the inner 
boundaries of the side cylinders are of greater 
length than is necessary to permit of the con 
Stinued movements of the piston named, in or 
der to allow a cushion of live steam to be in 
troduced between each piston as it completes 
its stroke and the respective head of its cyl 
inder, My object in employing this cushion 
Io of steam is to aid in absorbing or lessening 
the strain and thrusts upon the engine inci. 
dent to the arrest and reversal.of the strokes 
of the pistons in the absence of a crank-mo 
tion. 
15. To convert or transform the reciprocating 
movements of the pistons into continuous ro 
tary motion in one direction of the cam-slhaft 
g', I proceed as follows: 
M in the drawings denotes a narrow flat bar 
or shaft of uniform thickness and width and 
of a length fully equal to the extreme length 
of the stroke of the pistons, this bar, which is 
in effect a rock-shaft, being journaled at each 
end in the bearings or standards C C, before 
alluded to, and being parallel with the three 
piston-rods and to one side of the center rod, 
C, this bar or shaft M being given a twist of 
one-half a turn in its effective length. 
Upon the top of the cross head c, I erect a 
3o block or head, N, which has a longitudinal 
horizontal passage, O, to receive securely the 
bar M; and it is obvious that, as the block N 
follows the movements of the cross-head c dur 
ing flie'reciprocations of the latter, it will im 
part alternating intermittent torsive or rock 
ing motions to the bar M upon its journals to 
the extent in each direction of a half-turn, or 
one hundred and eighty degrees of a circle. 
Moreover, to the inner end or journal, D, of 
the spiral rock-shaft M, I secure a spur-gear, 
C9, and I inclose the adjacent end or journal 
E of the cam-shaftig in a sleeve or tubular 
shaft, C, which is secured to such shaft, and 
I mount loosely upon the outer end of this 
sleeve C two spur. gears, A' A', each of 
which operates upon or takes holl of the 
sleeve at times by a spring-impelled dog, m', 
or n, (see Figs. 20, 21, and 22.) pivoted at one 
end to the gear and contained in a pocket in 
so the end of such gear, as shown at 0, the nose 
of each dog taking into or operating with one 
of two notches, p and q', in the periphery of 
the sleeve or a swell or hub, g, of sail sleeve, 
these dogs talking hold of and acting upon the 
55 sleeves in the same direction through the gears 
carrying them advance intermittently in op 
posite directions. The dogs in n' and the 
notches p q are arranged diametrically oppo 
site each other, and each gear A9 and A 
advances intermittently a half-revolution with 
each half-turn of the rock-shaft; and to effect 
these alternating semi-rotations in opposite 
directions of the said gears A A', I proceed 
as follows: The teeth of the driver C9 extend 
65 preferably, though not necessarily, entirely 
across its face. The gear A' engages and is 
driven by the said gear C9; and in order that 
35 
45 
 
 
90 
95 
the inner adjacent ends of the gears A9 Al 
may stand closely together, I remove the teeth 
from the outer half of the gear A9, and as it to 
is essential that the gear Ashall not engage 
the gear C9, I also remove the teeth from the 
inner half of the said gear A1, and I dispose 
the Outer half of the latter to one side of the 
said gear C9. Furthermore, the gear C9 en- 75 
gages and drives an intermediate spur-gear, 
D', which is pivoted to a bearing, E9, in rear 
of the said driver C9, and this intermediate D9 
in turn engages and drives the gear A9. The 
sleeve C has a flange or shoulder, r, upon 
its inner end, to bear against the adjacent end 
of the bearing or bracket h of the center 
cylinder, while the outer gear, Al, is prevented 
from slipping off the sleeve C10 by a screw 
passing through a washer, s', overlapping its 
outer end and screwing into the end of the 
said sleeve. The gear A is retained in place 
by the bearing h upon one side and the end 
of the swell of the sleeve C1 upon the other. 
With each traverse of the cross-head c in 
ward, as shown by its arrow ), (see Fig. 13,) 
the readler being supposed to face the outer 
ends of the propeller, the rock-shaft M is 
rocked to the extent of one-half turn to the left, 
which necessarily rotates the gear C9 to the left 
an equal distance, or half-turn, and this semi-ro 
tation of the gear C9 rotates the gear A9 to the 
right also a half-turn. As the gear A9 thus de 
scribes a semi-rotation its dog in takes hold 
upon the sleeve Cand rotates the latter also a 
half-turn to the right, and this imparts a semi 
rotation in the same direction to the cam-shaft. 
As the gear A9 advances and rotates the cam 
shaft, as last stated, the gear A', by reason of 
the intermediate D9, is driven a half-turn in the 
opposite direction, or to the left, and its dog 
slips over the periphery of the sleeve C with 
out effect upon the latter-that is to say, the 
gear A" and its dog retreatin readiness to act 
in their turn upon the sleeve to advance the 
calm - shaft a half-revolution. upon the return 
or outgoing traverse of the cross-head c. As 
the cross-head c returns-that is, executes its 
outgoing stroke-the gear A9 is idle, and the 
gear A" is active; in other words, the rock 
shaft is rocked or rotated a half-turn to the 
right, the gear C9 a half-turn in the same di 
rection, and the gear A', by means of the in 
termediate D9, is rotated a half-turn to the 
right, and its dog n takeshold upon the sleeve. 
C and advances the latter and the cam-shaft 
a half. turn to the right, or in the same direc 
tion as driven by the gear A9 at first, the said 
gear A9 during the active advance of the gear . 
A, as last stated, returning or retreating to 125 
the left, in readiness to again take hold of the 
sleeve upon the ingoing of the cross-head. 
The alternating semi-rotations of the gears A9 
A and their dogs thus become continuous, 
and the eam - shaft is rotated continuously in 13o 
one direction so long as the cross-head c re 
ciprocates. The cross-head c, spiral rock-shaft, 
M, gears C9, A9, A, and D9, and dogs on.' 
' 
constitute, in effect, a simple and effective 
IIS 
O 
OO 
IOS 
6 
264,903 
IS 
25 
O 
double-treadle motion, whereby the reciproca 
tions of the pistons of the engine are converted 
into continuous rotations of the cam-shaft. 
To absorb or relieve to some extent the 
S shocks and thrusts consequent upon the arrest 
of the momentum and the reversal of the stroke 
of the pistons, in the absence of a crank-ino 
tion, I employ  dash - pots of ordinary con 
struction, which I provide in the present in: 
stance by creating a pocket, s, in each stand 
ard C C and adapting the ends of the cross 
head c to enter and fill these pockets with an 
air-tight joint. The dash-pots operate as with 
such devicesin general. As the end of the cross 
head completes its traverse in one or the other 
direction and enters the pocket the air in the 
latter is compressed with greater or less power, 
according to the distance the cross-head pene 
trates, and offers a resistance to the cross-head, 
thereby cushioning the cross-head and absorb 
ing to a great extent the shock and concussion 
which would otherwise ensue upon its arrest 
and reversal. IFor similar reasons, I add a 
dash-pot to the interior of the cross-head c by 
adding to the inner end of the shaft at a pluth 
ger, t, adapted to closely fill the outer end of 
the said cross-head. This dash-pot aids to ab 
sorb or relieve the thrust consequent upon the 
resistance of the water to the propeller, as the 
propeller executes its outgoing traverse and 
its lolades unfold. 
The operation of this engine and propeller 
is as follows, premising the description by the 
statement that the pistons and the valves and 
their operative cams are in the relative posi 
tions shown in the drawings, with the excep 
tion of valve K", which is shown as closed, but 
is to be open, and the intention being to propel 
the vessel ahead: Both the main piston and 
auxiliary pistons are at their extreme positions 
at the inner or front ends of their respective 
cylinders, as shown in Fig.2 of the drawings. 
The inlet-valveK' is to be open by the shortest 
side or diameter of its cann J' being uppermost 
and permitting the spring of said valve to hold 
it closed npon its seat. The valve Q" is closed, 
and soon to open, as the shortest of its cams, P', 
is uppermost. Valve S' is closed as the short 
est diameter of its cam X" is uppermost, the 
valve U" being permanently closed while the 
vessel is driving ahead by its dammy at. The 
exhaust-valve T' is held permanently open 
while driving ahead by its dummy Y'. The 
valve R' is closed by the smallest side of its 
cam R* coming uppermost. The exhaust-valve 
H' is open by the superior side of its cam L', 
and, finally, the exhaust-valve G' is closed by 
the smallest side of its cam J. The propeller 
is closed and necessarily stands at its extreme 
inner position. Steam, being let on, enters the 
inner end of the main cylinder A through the 
passage L and starts the piston B of this cyl 
inder outward, or in the direction of its arrow 
l, at same time putting the cam-shaft in rota 
tion until the blades of the propeller are near 
ly open, at which point the said piston B ar 
rives opposite the pistons E E of the side 
cylinders, B' B, (though this exact relation of 
these is not important,) and the cam P pre 
sents its longest diameter uppermost and to 
opens the inlet-valve Q', and live steam is ad 
mitted to the adjacent or inner ends of the 
side cylinders through the passage Q, and the 
three pistons traverse their respective cylin 
ders in company until the end of the outward 75 
traverse of the center piston is about reached, 
when the inlet-valve K closes by the smallest 
side of its cam J and the inlet-valve R' is 
opened by the superior side of its cam R, and 
live steam is admitted to the outer end of the 8o 
center cylinder, A, in advance of its piston B 
to cushion the latter. The valve K't remains 
closed until the pistons E E complete their 
strokes and the blades of the propeller are fully 
closed, (owing to the momentum of the pro- 85 
peller and its adjuncts and the superior area 
of the two side pistons which together oper. 
ate to overcome the pressure of live steam 
upon the center piston admitted through the 
port R', just opened,) it being understood that 9o 
during this outward traverse of the propelier 
the completion of the opening of its blades has 
been effected gradually and quietly by the re 
sistance of the water, without shock or strain 
to the vessel or machinery, and by the dash- 95 
pot in the cross-head c; and it being also un 
derstood that while the pistons are executing 
these traverses in company the center cylin 
deris exhausting from the port H. by way of its 
passage g, and the side cylinders from the port I oo 
Tby way of the passage? from the cylinder B. 
Simultaneous with the completion of the 
traverses of the side pistons last explained 
and the opening of the valve R' the exhaust. 
valve S' of the center cylinder opens (by the Io5 
longest side of its camX acting upon and rais 
ing the lever of such valve S'') in readiness to 
permit of exit of exhaust-steam from this end 
of said center cylinder by way of the passage 
8. 
its cam P. simultaneously with the opening of 
the exhaust-valve S' and the inlet-valve R/", 
while with the closing of the valve Q' the ex 
haust-valve G opens by the superior side of 
its cam J acting upon its lever. The propel- 1 15 
ler now stands at its outward extreme with 
its blades closed. The propeller now returns 
in its folded state as follows: The main piston 
B moves in Ward by steam admitted to the 
outer end of the center cylinder by the port I2O 
R', opened as last explained, (the valve U?', 
as stated, remaining permanently closed and 
the tendency to a vacuum in the side cylinders 
being relieved by the exhaust-port. T of the 
cylinder B', which, as stated, is also perma. 125 
nently open, while the vessel is being pro 
pelled ahead,) and completes its stroke, carry. 
ing with it in the same direction, by means 
of the yoke V', the side pistons and their rods, 
such pistons being passive for the reason that 13o 
the valve U" is closed, as stated, for the pur. 
pose of preventing premature opening of the 
propeller and the tendency to a vacuum in the 
side cylinders being relieved by the open ex 
The valve Q' closes by the lesser side of 1 Io 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
264,903 
75 
O 
25 
30. 
haust-port T of the cylinder B. As the three 
pistons complete their strokes in company, the 
center cylinder exhausts by Way of its passage 
b and port S', and we are brought to our start 
ing-point. Now, to back the vessel, supposing 
the ports, valves, and cams to be in the posi 
tions first assumed, and as shown in Fig. 12 
of the drawings, the engineer seizes the re 
versing lever or shipper i and reverses its 
position and shugs the cam-shaft g', thereby 
throwing the cams J, X', P, J, I', and R, 
and dummies Y and U out of action, and 
bringing into action the opposite cams, E, K, 
I, F, B, and A', and dummies C and D', 
the dummies. Y and U being replaced by the 
cams A* B and the cams Ji X' by the dum 
mies C. D', while the cams R P are replaced 
ly the cams EF, and the cam J by the cam 
K', and the cam Li' by the cam I. In this 
change of cams the valves stand in the follow. 
ing positions: The valve K' is closed by its 
dummy C, and remains closed while the ves 
sel is backed. The valve Q' is closed as be 
fore. The valve S' is held full open, and re 
mains open while backing by the dummy D. 
The valve U" is closed by the smaller side of 
its cam A' being uppermost. The valve G' is 
closed by the lesser side of its cam K'coming up 
permost. The exhaust-valve T" opens by the 
longestside of its cam B' being uppermost. The 
valve H' opens by the superior side of its cam I' 
being uppermost. The live-valve R' is closed 
by the shortest side of its cam F being upper 
most. The steam being let on or already on, the 
inlet-valve Q' opeus by the largest side of its 
cam E. coming uppermost, and steam is ad 
mitted to the inner euds of the side cylinders 
by the port Q' and passage Q, (it being re 
membered that these two cylinders are in free 
communication,) and impels the pistons E. E.' 
outward, carrying with them by means of the 
yoke V the center piston, B, which is at this 
time idle, owing to the fact that its valve K", 
as before stated, is closed by its dummy C, 
and remains thus closed while the vessel is 
backing to prevent premature opening of the 
blade of the propeller, the tendency to a vac 
uum in the cylinder A being relieved by the 
exhaust-port S', which, as before stated, re 
mains open by its dummy D' during the time 
the vessel is backing. The pistons B and E. 
E travel together, as stated, until they reach 
the extreme of their outward traverse, the side 
cylinders meanwhile exhausting from the cyl 
inder B through its passage f and port T', 
when the inlet-valve Q' closes by the reces 
sion of its cam E. and cuts off steam to the side 
cylinders, while simultaneous there with the 
valve U" opens by the superior side of its cam 
6o A* to admit steam to the side cylinders through 
the port O' and passage di. The exhaust-port 
G' also opens by the superior side of its cam 
K", and the exhaust-valve T' closes by the re 
ceding of its cam B, and the side pistons be 
gin and continue their return or inward active 
stroke for a short distance until the propeller. 
blades are full open, when the yoke W takes 
65 
55 
d of the cross-head c and the inlet R' is 
opened by the superior side of its cam F, and 
the exhaust-valve H' closes by the receding of 
its cam l', and the three pistons move inward 
in concert, carrying with them the open propel 
ler, until the side pistons reach the extremes 
of their strokes in this direction, (the side cyl 
inders meanwhile exhausting from the cylin 
der B through their common passage, a, and 
port G',) when the inlet-valve U" closes by the 
receding of its cam A' and steam is cut off 
from this end of the side cylinders, and simul 
taneous there with the exhaust-valve T' opens 
by the ascent of the longest side of its calm B 
and the valve Q' opens by the ascent of the 
superior side of its cam E', and steam is ad 
mitted to the inner ends of the side cylinders. 
Each can of the series is of like form and 
construction, and is constituted as follows, 
(see Figs. 15, 16, 17, and 23:) A circular hub, . 
it, is employed, which is secured to the shaft 
g' by a set-screw or otherwise, in order that it 
may be changed in positi in axially upon such 
shaft, if necessary; and the said hub is prefer. 
ably formed in halves, in order that the posi 
tion of one cam may be changed upon the hub 
with respect to the cam upon the opposite end. 
One of the cams, as an illustration, is shown 
at if in the drawings as a flat plate having a 
circular concentric opening to inclose a shoul 
der upon the hub, and is to be secured to the hub 
by a set-screw or otherwise. Moreover, with 
each cam I employ a cut off, which is a thin, 
flat plate, v', inclosing an eccentric shoulder 
upon the end of the hub, and adjustable upon 
such shoulder with respect to the cam, a set 
screw passing through a slot, c, in such cut 
off, and screwing into the end of the hub, 
serving to hold the cut-off rigidly to the hul) 
when its position upon the latter is deterined. 
The cut-off  is segmental in form, and its 
longest diameter orportiona, which is immedi 
ately in rear of the swell of the cam, serves to 
hold open a valve the requisite length of time, 
By changing the position of the cut-off with 
respect to the cam the admission of steam to 
the cylinders is cut off at any desired point in 
the strokes of the pistons. 
By the employment of two auxiliary cylin 
ders and pistons operating upon each side the . 
main cylinder and connecting the rods of 
said cylinders by a yoke secured to the shaft 
which operates the edges of the propeller 
blades, as stated, I am enabled to exert the 
power of the auxiliary piston edinally upon op 
posite sides of the propeller-shaft, thereby ob. 
viating one objection found in my patented 
propeller before named-that is, the one-sided 
or unequal direction of the effort of the engine 
when transmitting power through the medium 
of such side cylinders to open the propeller 
blades at the beginning of the active stroke 
when backing the vessel, when but one side or 
auxiliary cylinder is employed. It is for this 
reason I employ two auxiliary cylinders, situ 
ated upon opposite sides of the main cylindler; 
but these two cylinders arein effect one, as they 
95. 
IOO 
IOS 
IO 
is 
I 25 
8 
264,903 
IO 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
have free intercommunication, and one of them 
could be omitted and the whole apparatus would 
be operative, the only change necessary being to 
group all the ports in one cylinder. The em 
ployment of two auxiliary cylinders carries the 
entire device to a point of extreme perfection; 
but since one alone may be employed without 
invalidating the operation of the propeller I 
do not restrict myself to the arbitrary use of 
two. So, also, with regard to the blades of the 
propeller, I have described a pair; but it is 
evident that one alone may be employed with 
out calling in the skill of an experienced me. 
chanic to make the change. In fact, in prac 
tice shall probably use but one blade and em 
ploy a pair of propellers reciprocating alter 
nately. 
Owing to the absence of the dead-point of a 
crank-motion or other indirect connection be 
tween the cylinders and propeller, the pressure 
of steam upon the latter is in my system con 
stant and uniform. Hence when the momen 
tam of the vessel is augmented during the act. 
ive stroke of the propeller the momentum or 
speed of the latter increases in proportion with 
that of the vessel, and therefore exerts a uni 
form power during its entire stroke. 
By bringing the combined power of the three 
cylinders into action to drive the propeller in 
its active stroke and but a portion of them on 
the return or idle stroke, I economize steam 
and avoid much of the shock resulting from 
the overcoming of the inertia in reversing the 
stroke of the propeller. 
An obvious modification of the details of my 
mechanism, involving no invention, would be 
to connect the piston-rod of the main cylinder 
with the edges of the vanes and the rods of 
the side cylinders with the bases or hinge of 
such vanes. 
I claim- 
1. In combination with a folding propeller 
blade or blades, a cylinder-piston and piston 
rod operating on the linge of the blade or 
blades, an auxiliary cylinder-piston and pis 
ton-rod, or more than one, acting on the outer 
part of the blade or blades, and valves and 
mechanism whereby the motion of the piston 
rod attached to the hinge of the blade or blades 
is caused to stop before that of the rod or rods 
attached to the outer part of each blade, in or 
der that the blade or blades may be fully closed 
before the return-stroke begins. 
2. In combination with a folding propeller 
blade or blades, a cylinder-piston and piston 
rod operating on the hinge of the blade or 
blades, an auxiliary cylinder-piston and pis 
ton-rod, or more than one, acting on the outer 
part of each blade, and valves and mechanisin 
whereby the rod attached to the hinge is first 
caused to advance to partly open the propel 
ler blade or blades, and then both the rods or 
all the rods are caused to advance together, in 
order that the opening of said blade or blades 
may be effected gently by the pressure of the 
Water and the shock of sudden forcible open 
ing avoided, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a propeller com. 
posed of one or more folding Vanes, operated 
by a main and one or more auxiliary steam-cyl 
inders, pistons, and valves to expand on the 
active stroke and close on the return, and the 
various ports and valves of said cylinders, of 
two sets of cams and passive hubs for control 
ling the positions of the valves, these cams 
and hubs being carried by a common rotary 
shaft susceptible of end shug, and one set of 
cams and, hubs being brought into use when 
the vessel is driven ahead and the other when 
the vessel is backed. 
4. In propellers for navigable vessels, com 
posed of one or more folding Vanes adapted 
to expand on the active stroke and close on 
the return, and operated in these movements 
by two steam-cylinders and pistons, the rod of 
one of which is connected with the outer edge 
of the vane and the other with the hinge of 
such vane, substantially as explained, and the 
arrangement of the various ports and valves 
of the conjoint cylinders, substantially as speci 
fied and shown, whereby live steam is admit 
ted to the inner ends of the auxiliary cylinders 
in front of their pistons to cushion the latter 
as they reverse their motion. 
5. In propellers for navigable vessels, com 
posed of one or more folding blades expand 
ing on the active stroke and folding on the re 
turn, and operated in these movements by 
main and auxiliary steam-cylinders, pistons, 
and rods, the combination, with the various 
valves and ports of the cylinders, and operat 
ing such valves, of two series of cams secured 
to a single shaft which has provisions for end 
shug, one set of such cams actuating the valves 
to drive the vessel alhead and the other to back 
the vessel, and both actuated by a suitable 
hand-lever which controls the end wise adjust 
ment or shug of the shaft. 
6. In reciprocating propellers for navigable 
vessels, main and auxiliary cylinders, (one 
main and one or two auxiliary,) and pistons 
and rods, in combination with the propeller 
blades hinged at their inner edges, the piston 
rod of the main cylinder being connected with 
the hinge of the blades and the rods of the aux 
iliary pistons being secured to opposite ends 
of a yoke which intersects the main piston-rod 
and is connected with the rod which actuates 
the outer edges of the blades. 
7. The combination, with a propeller com 
posed of one or more folding blades or vanes 
adapted to expand on the active stroke and 
fold on the return, of two steam-cylinders with 
their pistons and rods, and arranged upon op 
posite siles of the first, the piston-rod of one 
cylinder being connected in direct line with 
the propeller - shaft and the other with the 
shaft which actuates the Vanes by an inter 
mediate or bar, which intercepts the piston 
rod of the first in such manner that the coin 
bined power of the two auxiliary pistons is 
exerted equally upon opposite sides of the 
latter-named shaft. 
8. In combination with a folding propeller 
. 
7 O. 
75 
85 
OO 
ICS 
IO 
II5 
I25 
264,903 
O 
I5 
blade or blades, a main steam-cylinder, two 
auxiliary steam-cylinders, and the pistons and 
piston-rods of these three cylinders, the two 
auxiliary cylinders operating together, and all 
the rods being connected to the vanes. 
9. The combination, with a reciprocating 
propeller for navigable vessels, composed of 
a pair of folding blades adapted to expand on 
the active stroke and fold on the return, of a 
main central cylinder and a pair of auxiliary 
intercommunicating cylinders disposed upon 
opposite sides of it, the combined capacity of 
the two auxiliary cylinders exceeding that of 
the main cylinder, for purposes stated. 
10. In propellers for navigable vessels, com 
posed of one or more folding blades adapted to 
expand on the active stroke and close on the 
return, and operated by two or more steam-cyl 
inders, with their respective pistons and rods, 
as stated, the combination, with the various 
valves and ports of said cylinders, of circular 
hubs for operating upon a portion of said 
valves and active cams operating upon others 
of said valves. 
1. In combination with the wane or vanes 
of a propeller, and as a means of converting 
the rectilinear reciprocating movements of the 
piston-rods into continuous rotary motion of 
the cam-shaft, the spiral rock-shaft playing 
3o within and rocked by the cross-head of one 
piston-rod, and connected with the cam-shaft 
- 
12. In combination with propeller-blades 35 
by two alternately-operating gears carrying 
spring-impelled pallets or dogs to take hold of 
and advance such shaft. 
and cylinders, pistons, and piston-rods oper 
ating said blades, as stated, a shaft and set of 
cams for operating the valves and ports of 
said cylinders, each cam being adjustably at 
tached to a hub secured to the said shaft, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
13, In combination with the propeller-blades 
and the cylinders, pistons, and piston-rods 
whereby they are operated, a set of cylinder 
valves, valve-rods, operating-levers, and a 45 
shaft carrying cams which actuate said levers, 
substantially as set forth. 
14. In combination with a pair of folding 
propeller blades or vanes, three cylinders, 
with their pistons, piston-rods, and valves, 
and mechanism whereby the motion of the 
piston-rod attached to the hinge of the blades 
is caused to stop before the rods attached to 
the outer edges of the blades, in order that 
the blades may be fully closed before the re 
turn-stroke begins. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
RICHARD SMITH. 
55 
So 
Witnesses: 
H. E. LODGE, 
F. CURTIs. 
A. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265004.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. BEARDSLEE, 
DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, i. 
No. 265,004, 
 
Patented Sept. 26, 1882, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
G. W. BEARDSLEE, 
DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 265,004. 
Patented Sept. 26, 1882, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 265,004, 
G. W. BEARDSLEE. 
DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINE 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Sept. 26, 1882, 
 
saw a di go-6-va 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE W. BEARDSLEE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM 
F. JOBBINS, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY. 
DYNAMO EECTRIC MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 265,004, dated September 26, 1882. 
Application filed May 29, 1882. 
(No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. BEARDS 
LEE, a citizen of the United States, and a resi 
dent of Brooklyn, New York, have invented 
5 certain Improvements in Dynamo-Electric Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention consists of certain improve 
ments in the construction of dynamo-electric 
machines, as more fully described hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, 
Sheet , is a longitudinal section of my in 
proved machine. Fig. 2, Sheet 2, is a section 
on the line 12, Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a section on the 
line 3 4, Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a diagram of the com 
mutator, wires, brushes, and connections; and 
Fig. 5, diagrams of a modified arrangement of 
field-magnets and commutator and brushes. 
M is the base of the machine, and AIM are 
two end frames, provided with bearings in for 
the shaft A, which carries the armatures or 
generating-wheels and commutator and driv 
ing-pulley, while the field-magnets are secured 
to the end frames, M?. In this machine there 
are two sets of field-magnets, two armatures, 
and one commutator between the two arma 
tures. The spools H of the field-magnets-six 
in each set in the present instance-have their 
cores secured to or they form part of a ring, 
N, of iron, which is secured to the end frame, 
M', by bolts m', while adjusting-screwsm, bear. 
ing on the ring, permit any desired adjustment 
of the ring N and field-magnets toward or from 
the armature-wheel with its electro-magnets 
D. The cores of the electro-magnets D com 
posing each armature are secured to or form 
part of an iron disk, C, which is mounted on 
the shaft A, being secured with intervening 
washers l l between a shoulder. On the shaft 
and a screw-nut, B. 
The commutator S consists of a shouldere 
sleeve, v, secured to the shaft by a Screw, 4, 
or other means, and the commutator-plates S, 
arranged racially around the sleeve, and held 
in place with their insulating-pieces between 
the shoulder on the said sleeve and a screw 
nut, y, on the end of the sleeve. In the pres 
ent instance I have Show in Six Commutator 
brushes, ' ', held by slotted bolts 1, carried by 
but insulated from the arms of the Spider P, 
So which is mounted on the standard O, fixed to 
45 
35 
7 O 
65 
the base M. The wires from the united termi 
nals of the magnets of both armatures are con 
nected to the same commutato-plates, S. These 
wires d pass through insulated passages d in 
the disks C, and in the case of the wheel ad- 55 
joining the standard O the wires then pass 
through holes in an insulating-disk, g, thence 
through the insulating-sleeve in, which is se 
cured to the shaft, and runs clear of the Stand 
ard O. The wires also preferably pass through 6o 
holes in an insulating guide-disk, n', and are 
then secured to their commutator-plates. The 
wires from the other disk C pass directly from 
the insulated passages d to the same commu 
tator-plates. 
As shown in Fig. 2, the inner terminal of 
one coil of one magnet of each generating 
wheel is connected to the outer terminal of the 
next, making one continuous spool of the whole 
series, and the united wires of each pair lead 
off to the commutator. In the present instance 
I have shown each wheel as having eighteen 
spools, making thirty-six spools connected to 
the eighteen commutator-plates. 
As I have already said, there are six spools 
in each set of field-magnets, connected as shown 
in Fig. 3, the terminal wires a y being connect 
ed to suitable binding-posts, and the outer 
coils of the first and second spools being con 
nected, while the inner coils of the second and 
third are connected, and so on alternately, 
In machines where the spools of the arma 
ture are connected up in a continuous series, 
as described, it has been usual to employ only 
one pair of commutator-brushes, thus giving 
to the induced current the full intensity of one 
half of all the spools of each generating-Wheel. 
By using two or more pairs of commutator 
brushes and arranging the field-magnets into 
a corresponding number of pairs, however, I 
can vary the intensity of the current in rela 
tion to the volume at pleasure. 
In the arrangement shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 
4 of the drawings there are three pairs of north 
and south poles of field-magnet coils in each 
set and three pairs of commutator-brushes, and 
on the other hand eighteen poles on each gen 
erating-wheeland eighteen commutator-plates. 
The six brush-holders, as shown in Fig. 4, are 
connected together alternately-that is, the Ioo 
85 
90 
95 
2 
265,004 
IS 
O 
first, third, and fifth are connected and the 
second, fourth, and sixth are connected, while 
the terminal wires ff are connected to the 
first and sixth. With the arrangement de 
scribed the intensity is only that of three 
spools, while the volume is that given by six 
groups of three each. This arrangement has 
also the advantage of enabling me to use as 
fine wire for the spools of the generating-wheel 
as would be used in a much smaller machine 
that is, one with fewer spools. To change the 
... relative volume and intensity of the current in 
the machine it is necessary to change the num 
ber of pairs of brushes and also the number of 
pairs of poles in the field-magnets; but no 
changeis made in the generating-wheel, whose 
coils remain connected up in continuous series, 
as described. In practice I change the num 
ber of poles by substituting other sets of field 
magnets for those on the machine, the spools 
also being wound with proper-sized wire to 
giveanincreased resistance where the change 
is required to increase the intensity, for in 
stance, or to give a less resistance where an 
increased volume is required. This change is 
readily accomplished, as the rings N, carrying 
the Spools, can be easily removed and replaced 
by others having the desired number of poles 
and character of wire. For instance, I have 
shown in the diagram, Fig. 5, an arrangement 
of two pairs of brushes on the commutator, 
and of field-magnets with a like number of 
pairs of poles, there being two of the eight 
spools E to each pole-piece. No change, how 
ever, is made in the connections of the gener. 
ating-Wheel or armature. 
I am aware that the subdividing of spools 
and pairs of poles has been carried out in ma 
chines where the terminals are connected to 
25 
35 
the rings of a commutator having alternating 
projections or teeth overlapping and corre 
sponding with the spools of a generating-wheel; 
but in my machine I use two or more pairs of 
poles and brushes in connection with a Com 
mutator which has separate insulated Seg 
ments or plates for the wires from the united 
terminals of the armature-spools, and the lat 
ter are connected together in continuous series. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a dynamo-electric machine, the con 
bination of an armature or generating-wheel 
having its spools connected up in continuous 
Series, and a commutator having separate in 
sulated plates or segments, with two or more 
pairs of commutator-brushes, and field-magnets 
having a corresponding number of pairs of 
poles, all substantially as described. 
2. A dynamo-electric machine having two 
sets of field-magnets and two armatures with 
one commutator, the terminals from both ar 
matures being connected to the same commu 
tator-plates. 
3. The combination of field-magnets, arma 
ture, and commutator with standard O and 
insulating-disk (, and sleeve in for the wires, 
substantially as specified. 
4. The combination of the armature or gen 
erating-wheel and end plate, M', with ring N, 
carrying the field-magnets, and screws in for 
adjusting said magnets toward or from the ar 
mature, all substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
GEO. W. BEARDSLEE. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER. K. FREEMAN, 
EUGENE. E. BARNES. 
45 
55 
7 O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265105.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 265,105. 
W. LAPHAM. 
REAPING OR MOWING MACHINE KNIFE. 
Patented Sept. 26, 1882. 
N a lavaya 
Z SNN 
2a22ZZZZZZZ 
- 
rzvesses - 
Czeal ex%e2. - - - 
//6.4 
- Z722-epz-467, 
?ay? at 
 22' 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALENTINE LAPHAM, OF MARION, ASSIGNOR OF TWO THIRDs TO JOHN s. 
FRANZ, OF SAME PLACE, AND J. B. FRANZ, OF MANSFIELD, OHIO. 
REAPNG O R. MOWING MACHINE KNIFE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 265,105, dated September 26, 1882. 
Application filed January 3, 1882. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALENTINE LAPHAM, 
of Marion, in the county of Marion, and in the 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Knives for Reaping 
Machines, Mowing-Machines, and Machines. 
for Mowing Lawns; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description thereof, reference being had to the 
Io accompanying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, making a part of 
this specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in knives for mowing-machines, and it 
I5 has for its objects to provide an improved 
means whereby a series of detachable knives 
Or Cutters may be secured in the cutter-head 
in such manner that one or more may be re 
noved for sharpening or in order to be re 
2o placed in case of injury. These oljects I at 
tain by the devices illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a top view of my device 
complete; Fig. 2, a longitudinal horizontal sec 
25 tional view of the cutter-head, taken on a line 
just above the upper faces of the knives; Fig. 
3, a detached longitudinal vertical section of 
a portion of the device, showing the latch for 
locking the knives or cutters in the cutter-head, 
3o and Fig. 4 a detached view of one of the knives. 
The letter Aindicates two flat parallel bars, 
and B and C two interposed metallic plates. 
These plates are placed between the bars, one 
at each end, the plate Bat the inner end be. 
35 ing inclined on its inner face, as indicated in 
Fig. 2, and the plate C at the outer end being 
curved on its inner face, as shown. The plates 
are firmly secured together by means of bolts 
D passing through then at equidistant points, 
4o the ends being riveted in countersunk aper 
tures, so that the cutter-head upon its upper 
and lower surfaces will be perfectly smooth. 
The letter Eindicates the detachable knives 
or cutters. The said cutters or knives have 
45 angular cutting-edges, as usual, and near their 
rear edges, on one side, are provided with 
. 
. 
. 
. 
55 
curved recesses F, and on the other side with 
curved lugs G, which are adapted to enter and 
interlock with the recesses, as indicated, the 
said lugs extending and locking under the SO 
transverse bolts also. The lug of the outer . 
knife-section locks under the curved plate at 
the outer end of the cutter-head, as shown in 
Fig. 2, and the inner cutter is locked at its re 
cessed side by means of a plate, H, which is 
provided at one end with a curved lug, h, the 
other end being beveled, so as to fit against 
the inclined edge of the plate B. The plate H 
is provided with a lug, i, at its upper outer 
corner, by means of which it may be removed 
from between the bars. 
The letter I indicates a block mounted upon 
the upper side near the inner end of the cut 
ter-head. This block has a transverse aperture, 
K, for the reception of the pin L of the pitman, 
M. To the said block is pivoted a latch, N., 
provided with a projection, n, which is adapt 
ed to pass through an opening, P, in the up 
per bar of cutter-head and enter a slot, m, in 
the plate H, so as to hold said plate in place 
and lock the parts firmly together. The latch 
is provided with an aperture, p, through which 
the pin of the pitman passes when the latch is 
down, thus locking the latch in place. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
is 
In combination with the bars AA, the con 
necting-bolts D, the knives E, provided with 
the curved lugs G, adapted to engage under 
the said bolts, and with curved recesses F, into 
which the said lugs are adapted to set, the 
plates B and C, and the locking-plate H, and 
locking device N, all arranged substantially as 
and for the purposes specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 17th day of 
December, 1881. 
WALENTINE LAPHAM. 
Witnesses: 
CASS WILSON, 
J, T, MATTEIEWS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265206.txt	(No Model.) 
T. A. WILLSON, 
LENS AND MANUFACTURE THEREOF, 
No. 265,206, 
Patented Sept. 26, l882, 
 
  
 
 
 
Af 
7.2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TEIOMAS A. WILLSON, OF READING, PENNSYLVANIA. 
LENS AND MANUFACTURE THERE OF. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 265,206, dated September 26, 1882. 
Application filed March 20, 1882. 
(No model) 
55 
65 
75 
To all chon at may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS A. WILLSON, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Reading, Berks county, Pennsylvania, have 
invented certain Improvements in Lenses and 
in the Manufacture of the same, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the economical man 
ufacture of lenses for spectacles, eyeglasses, 
&c.; and it consists in so molding a lens-blank 
that it can be finished by grinding and polish 
ing the faces only, the edge of the lens being 
finished in molding the blank, so that the said 
edge does not require to be ground. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a transverse section of a mold for carrying my 
invention into effect; Fig. 2, a longitudinal 
section of the mold; Fig. 3, a plan view; and 
Figs. 4, 5, and 6, sections of different forms of 
lenses. 
In carrying out my invention I prefer to use 
the mold illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and 
consisting of two parts, A A', hinged together 
at One eld, and confined at the opposite end 
by any suitable device which will serve to 
bring the two parts of the unold together and 
perlait the mold to be opened, the device for 
effecting this purpose consisting in the pres 
ent instance of a cam-lever pivoted to one 
part of the mold and having a curved slot 
adapted to a pin on the other part of the mold. 
Each part of the mold consists of two bars, a 
and b, secured together by set-screws, cavi 
ties (three in the present case) being so formed 
in the bars that when the mold is closed the 
said cavities will form chambers, one half of 
each chamber in one part and the other half 
in the other part of the mold. Each chamber 
is of such shape as to exactly define the edges 
of the lens and the faces of the lens-blanks, 
but is of such a depth that the blank will be 
somewhat thicker than the finished lens, to 
allow for glinding and polishing. A recess, 
(), is formed, one half in one part and the 
other half in the other part of the mold, for 
the reception of the plunger h, and this recess 
Communicates with the aforesaid chambers 
through gates d, one for each chamber. The 
glass is poured into the recess, and is forced 
into the chambers through the gates by the 
plunger, the latter being afterward withdrawn 
and the mold opened, thereby releasing the 
lens-blanks, which are complete after removal 
from the face of each blank of the glass whicll 
adhered to it at the point where the gate oc 
curred. 
It should be here understood that I do not 
desire to claim in this application the above 
described mold, a description of which has 
been introduced for the purpose of showing an 
example of the manner in which my improved 
lens-blanks and lenses may be made. 
After a lens-blank has been thus completed 
its opposite faces are ground and polished in 
the usual manner; but as these faces are, by 
molding, made of a shape and thickness ap 
proximating to that to which they have to be 
reduced, but little grinding will be necessary 
compared with that which has to be resorted 
to when crude slabs of glass of uniform thick 
ness have to be ground to the desired concave 
or convex forms. 
As in molding the blank the glass is intro 
duced at a point away from the edge, and as 
the latter receives the desired conformation 
from the chamber of the mold, no finishing of 
the edge will be required, excepting it be the 
removal of slight local imperfections, the usual 
tedious and costly plan of shaping and coin 
pleting the edges by grinding being thus ob 
viated. 
- 
I claim as my invention- 
1. The mode herein described of manufac 
turing lens-blanks, the said mode consisting 
in press-molding glass so that the blank shall 
have a continuous mold-finished edge to form 
the finished edge of the lens without grinding, 
the faces of the blank approximating in for in 
to those of the finished lens, all Substantially 
as set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, the 
within-described lens-blank, the same having 
a continuous mold-finished edge, forming the 
finished edge of the lens without grinding, and 
faces approximating to those of the finished 
lens, as set forth. 
3. The mode herein described of manufac 
turing lenses, the said mode consisting in first 
press-molding glass into a lens-blank having 
a continuous mold-finished edge, and subse 
O 
25 
4. 
45 
SO 
90 
95 
O) 
s 
265,206 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
. . 
. 
TEIOMAS A. WILLSON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. W. EssICK, 
M. L. MILLER. 
quently grinding and polishing the opposite 
faces only of the blank, as specified. 
4. As a new article of manufacture, a pressed 
glass lens having ground and polished oppo 
5 site faces and a continuous mold-finished un 
ground edge, as set forth. 
Intestimony whereof I have signed my name 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265307.txt	2 
265,307 
l, the eccentric roller d, having the curved ex 
tension f and the lever l, of the socketed or 
othersupport, provided with the recessi, and the 
gripping-plate e, the pivoted lever and the said 
projection being carried by said gripping-arn 
bellow its pivot, substantially as set forth. 
3. In combination, the pivoted arm b, the ec 
centric d, having the curved extension f the 
cam-leverk, the fixed gripping-plate e, and the 
stop j, the several parts being constructed andl 
arranged substantially as described, for the pur 
pose specified. 
4. In a rein-holder, the combination of the 
pivoted arm b and the fixed gripping-plate e 
with the eccentric d, pivoted within a recess in 
said arm, and having the curved extension f 
whereby to limit the turning of said eccentric 
and to forma shield thereto, substantially as 
Set fortl). 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
35 
40 
45 
SERVOOD VVILLIAAI DAY. 
SS2S. 
Witnesses: 
C. C. MECHAM, 
VV. D. EDGAR. 
5 terial, and arranged as stated orotherwise. 
be dispensed with, and that the spring maybe 
such as to give the required holding force to 
the pivoted arm. 
The device maybe made of any suitable ma 
The gripping-surfaces are held in contactun 
der the force of the spring, and thus prevent 
rattling when the device is notused. Theshield 
f of the eccentric d acts against the gripping 
Io arm b and forms a stop to limit the turning of 
the eccentric as the reins are drawn in and 
then gripped, as shown in Figs. 7 and 8, in 
which the function of the stop is shown in both 
positions to limit the turning of the eccentric. 
Asthe gripping-arm yields When inserting the 
reins, the wear upon the lealther is lessened. 
I claim 
1. The combination of the pivoted arm b, hav 
ing the projection h, and the eccentric gripping 
roller d, formed with a curved extension,f, car 
ried by said arm, with a socketedor other sup 
port having the recess i, the fixed gripping 
plate e, the spring g, and the stop j, substan 
tially as described, for the purposespecified. 
2. In a rein-hclder, the combination, With 
pivoted gripping-arm b, having the projection 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265407.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 265,407. 
W. W. GOOD WIN. 
GAS COOKING STOVE OR RANGE. 
. 
Patented Oct. 3, 1882. 
222222222222222222222222442 
N 7 
a 
R 
    
  
a 
1. 
2 
o 
6. 
r 
42a4 
% 
2 
35 
tasy L 
2 2. 
t 2 
IZZI-P-RT-I. 244 
(2S, 
L 
4 
sfs, 
N 
RS 
s 
N 
NYSaaSWa 
WITNESSES : 
/Co (2.7% 
8 & 24-g 
 
N. PETRs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR: 
924 &zeta 
"els's 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, OF PEIILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
GAS COO KNG STOVE OR RANGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 265,407, dated October 3, 1882. 
Application filed June 30, 1882. 
(No model.) 
So 
55 
6o 
the escape-pipe b. The plate f is formed at 
To all whom it may concern: 
the edges of its openings g with depending 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, 
of Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia, 
flanges h h, within which are the gas-burners i, 
to which the gas is supplied by a pipe extend 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Gas Cooking 
ing through the front plate of the stove. These 
gas-supply pipes are provided with suitable 
Stoves or Ranges, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
valves, as shown at , for admission of pure 
The object of my improvements is to con 
gas or gas mixed with air, as described in my 
struct gas cooking stoves and ranges in such 
Letters Patent aforesaid. 
a manner as to give the greatest facility and 
It will be seen that the gas-burners are sur 
rounded by a casing that prevents the heat 
convenience for cooking Operations, and at the 
same time insure the escape of the waste pro 
from escaping directly to the fuel beneath 
ducts of combustion to the chimney or escape 
the plate f, or, in other words, a downward 
draft is prevented by the flanges of the platef, 
fue. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
which inclose the burners. The burners be 
struction and arrangement of the top plates of ing directly below the openings in the top plate 
c, and the openings being adapted for receiving 
the stove and the burners, as hereinafter de 
sauce-pans, steamers, and other utensils used 
scribed and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
in boiling and steaming, the heat is utilized 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
to the greatest possible extent. At the same 
time there is no space left open for escape of 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both the figures. 
the products of combustion into the room, and 
they will pass through the escape-fitle b. The 
Figure l is a sectional front elevation of a 
gas cooking-stove of my improved construc 
space between the two plates of thus be 
comes a heating-chamber, l, distinct from the 
tion, and Fig. 2 is a transverse section of the 
combustion-chamber and flue-passages in the 
Sale. 
lower part of the stove, having also a separate 
The body of the stove is of the construction 
exit to the chimney. 
shown in the Letters Patent granted to me De 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
cember 20, 1SS1, No. 251,215. 
A represents the top plate of the oven, over 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
which the products of combustion from the 
Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with the gas cooking-stove 
oven-burners 0 pass through the flue a to the 
escape-pipe b at the back part of the stove. 
herein described, provided with the burners 0, 
the flue ct, the escape-pipe b, and the apertured 
c is the top plate of the stove, provided with 
top plate c, of the chamber e, forming two pas 
circular apertures and covers d, as usual. 
sages for the escape of the products of com 
Above the flue ct, through which the pro 
bustion in pipe b, and provided with an aper 
ducts of combustion from the lower burner 
tured top plate f, having depending circular 
pass, is a chamber, e, projecting into the es 
cape-pipe and forming two passages for the 
flanges h, upper burners, i, and auxiliary heat 
ing-chamberl, the whole constructed, arranged, 85 
products of combustion of the lower and up 
per burner, hereinafter described. The top 
and Operated in the manner set forth. 
plate fof the chamber e is provided with aper 
tures g beneath the openings in the top plate 
c. The space between these two plates of 
communicates at the back of the stove with 
WM. W. LUYSTER, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
WM. W. GOOD WIN. 
Witnesses: 
65 
7 o 
75 
O 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265507.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RAPHAEE, JOSIA, OF FLORENCE, ITALY, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM REY AND 
C. DE VARIGNY, BOTH OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
COMPOSITION FOR TREATING SULPHATES OF LIME FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF ARTIFICIAL MARBLE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 265,507, dated October 3, 1882. 
Application filed August 9, 1882. (No specimens.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RAPHAEL JoSIA, of Flor 
ence, Kingdom of italy, have invented or dis 
covered a new and useful Improvement in Com 
5 positions for Treating Sulphates of Iime for 
the Manufacture of Artificial Marble; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
concise, and exact description thereof. 
In an application for Letters Patent of the 
Io United States filed March 2, 1882, I have de 
scribed and made claim to an improved process 
of treating or preparing gypsum (calcic sul 
phate or sulphate of lime) in the making of 
articles of a material which I have termed 
15 certaldite without pulverization of the gyp 
sum. In said application I described briefly 
certain of the compounds or compositions which 
I employ to produce certain effects and the 
manner of using them, but stated that sepa 
2o rate applications would be made for patents 
for such compositions. 
The present application relates to one of the 
compositions (a double or two-part one) so re 
ferred to, the two parts being designed for al 
25 ternate use as two separate baths in the pro 
cess herein described for making yellow cer 
taldite. 
In carrying out the process referred to a 
suitable piece of gypsum (calcic sulphate) is 
3o first formed into the desired shape, or approxi 
mately such, by the use of suitable well-known 
tools. The gypsum employed may be the or 
clinary native gypsum of commerce, though I 
prefer that which is comparatively pure or free 
35 from other matters of different composition. 
Such gypsum is usually obtained hydrated, or 
containing a certain percentage of water in its 
composition; and the second step in the opera 
tion has reference to depriving the gypsum 
4o under treatment of a considerable part or the 
whole of such water. This is done by subject 
ing it to the action of a gradually-increasing 
heat, varying by preference with the size and 
quality of the material, from 2600 to 3000 
45 Fahrenheit, for about twelve hours, or until 
the desired partial or complete dehydration 
is obtained. The length of time, as well as 
the degree of heat required to effect this re 
sult, will vary somewhat with the size, charac 
So ter, and purity of the gypsum employed; but 
the temperature should not exceed 5000 Fahr 
 
55 
65 
75 
enheit, and both it and the time of exposure 
should be regulated and limited with reference 
to securing unifornity of treatment through 
out the whole mass or body. This operation 
may be known to be complete when a fracture 
of a test block presents a uniform white color. 
Any suitable drying or baking apparatus may 
be employed for this purpose, many such be 
ing known in kindred branches of the arts; 
but it should be of such construction that the 
material under treatment shall not be lorought 
into direct contact with the fire. When the 
desired delhydration has been effected the fur 
nace is allowed to cool gradually, in order that 
the material ulider treatment may be cooled 
gradually; or the material may be removed, 
with due care to prevent breaking and expos 
ure to moisture, and allowed to cool outside 
the furnace gradually until it is reduced in 
temperature sufficiently to permit handling 
with safety in its subsequent treatment, which 
is designed to impart to it the desired color or 
tint and a high degree of insolubility and hard 
ness throughout its mass. This step involves 
the use of the two-part composition which 
forms the subject-matter of invention in the 
present application. The parts of this composi 
tion areformed of the following elements:... First 
part: water, by weight, two hundred parts; 
sulphate of iron, by weight, six parts. Second 
part: water, by weight, two hundred parts; 
alum, by weight, four to five parts; oxalic 
acid, by weight, two to two and a half parts; 
bichronate of potash, by weight, two parts. 
The ingredients of each of these part composi 
tions, being mixed in about the proportions 
named, form solutions which are used as sepa 
rate baths; and to this end they are placed in 
separate vessels of proper shape to receive the 
article to be treated, which is dipped or in 
mersed first in one and then in the other any 
desired number of times, and then is permitted 
to remain in the bath containing the sulphate 
of iron until the article has acquired the de 
sired degree of hardness and color. The length 
of time required to effect this result will depend 
somewhat upon the strength of the ingredients 
composing the baths or solutions, the porosity 
and nature or physical and chemical condition 
of the article under treatment; but usually 
twelve hours (more or less) will suffice. In the 
9o 
95 
O 
i 
265,50? 
55 
75 
9 O 
intended use, which may be done by any of the 
methods practiced in kindred arts. 
No claim is made herein to the process set 
forth, as that, with various modifications of 
the same, as circumstances may require, forms 
the subject-matter of the first application here 
in referred to. Neither do I limit my present 
invention to the particular way herein described 
of applying it, though I now believe this way 
or process to be the best. I also believe the 
proportions of ingredients which I have named 
in forming my in proved composition to be the 
best for the purposes stated, and, among oth 
ers, to secure a uniform degree of hardness and 
color throughout the mass of the article. If 
the solutions be very strong, there is great dan 
ger of rendering the surface of the article hard 
very quickly, and thereby preventing proper ac 
tion of the bath upon the interior substance of 
the article; or if the solutions be very weak 
too much time is required, and even then a 
proper degree of hardness, density, and in solu 
bility is not secured; also, by the conjoint ac 
tion of all the elements of the two baths much 
better results are secured, especially upon na 
tive gypsums, than by Solutions formed of a 
part of the elements. For these reasons I pre 
fer to employ all the elements of the two-part 
composition in substantially the proportions 
named; but such limits, though affording the 
best results, may be varied or exceeded some 
what and still obtain favorable results under 
skillful manipulation, and all such modifica. 
tions employing the elements substantially as 
herein described in about the proportions set 
forth I consider as coming within my inven 
tion and claim. 
I claim as my invention 
The two-part composition in erein described 
for treating delay drated gypsum in separate 
baths, each part consisting substantially of the 
following elements: in the first part water and 
sulphate of iron, and in the second part water, 
alum, Oxalic acid, and bichromate of potash, 
in about the proportions set forth. 
In testimony where of I have here unto set my 
hand. 
RAPIHAEL JOSIA. 
Witnesses: 
3UIDO PANTALIONY, 
IR. II. WHITTLESEY. 
alternate treating of the article in the separate 
baths above described I prefer repeated dip 
pings-two, three, or more-Say two or three 
seconds at first, and increasing gradually to 
ole, two, three, or more minutes, more or less, 
with drying intervals of like increasing length 
between dippings, for half or three-quarters of 
an hour or so, after which the article may re 
main in the bath containing the sulphate of 
iron eleven or twelve hours, more or less. 
While I do not limit my invention by any 
particular theory of chemical or physical reac 
tions involved in the use of these baths as 
above described, I believe, with my present 
knowledge, that the metallic salts held in so 
lution in each bath, by talking the place of the 
molecules of Water displaced in the previous 
dehydrating Operation, act clheinically or playsi 
cally upon the calcic sulphate and render it 
more coinpact, in arder, and less soluble, and 
that the Oxalic acid acts in like manner upon 
the impurities or matters of other composition, 
(carbonates, &c.,) which are usually contained 
in greater or less quantities in native gypsums, 
and produce like indurating effect upon them, 
though the salts may have an indurating ac 
tion upon the impurities present, and the acids 
may act in like manner more or less upon the 
calcic sulphate. 
By the alternate application of the sulphate 
of iron and bichromate of potasl in the two 
baths as above described a beautiful yellow 
color is imparted to the calcic sulphate through 
out its mass, which will usually be variegated 
more or less, however, by irregular lines, veins, 
or markings of darker shades, and perhaps of 
other tints, due probably to impurities present 
in the calcic sulphate. The article (certaldite) 
thus secured is a valuable material for various 
uses in the arts, both on account of its beauti 
ful and highly-ornamental appearance and also 
on account of its high degree of hardness, in 
solubility, and susceptibility of taking a fine 
polish. 
When the article has been treated in the 
bath as above described it is removed and 
dried by exposure to the sun, or to an equiva 
lent furnace-heat, for one or two hours, or by 
ordinary atmospheric exposure for two or three 
days, When it is ready for polishing and such 
Other manipulation as may best fit it for its 
O 
25 
35 
SO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265607.txt	(No Model.) , 
No. 265,607, 
P. E. JAY, 
PUMP, 
Patented Oot, 10, 1882, 
sk ZP 
tyre, - 
. 
z.e. 62iz. 
 
 
-X 
INVENTOR: 
Verre Syravel e?y 
AATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PIERRE E. JAY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PUM. P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 265,607, dated October 10, 1882. 
Application filed July 12, 18S2. (No model. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PIERRE E. JAY, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
5 Pumps, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The invention relates to the construction of 
pumps having reciprocating plungers or pis 
tons, and more especially to that class of pumps 
Io in which a single plunger moves in two cylin 
ders having their opposite ends in juxtaposi 
tion, and the axial line of one cylinder being 
a prolongation of the axial line of the other. 
The object of the invention is, first, to pro 
I5 vide a snug packing for the plunger, consti 
tuting the only bearing of the latter during its 
motion, and, second, a detachable stuffing-box 
at the outer end of the cylinder, by removing 
Which access is easily had to the interior of 
the pump-cylinder or to the plunger, and to en 
able the latter to be taken out. 
The invention consists in a novel combina 
tion of parts, whereby the packing may be 
easily adjusted to fit the circumference of the 
25 plunger, or whereby the packing may be con 
veniently removed and replaced, and also in the 
detachable stuffing-box, as before described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is a 
side elevation of the pump with certain portions 
broken away and shown in section. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal vertical section on linea'a of Fig. 
3, through the inner ends of the cylinders, 
glands, and collars, showing also the plunger 
in place. Fig. 3 is a vertical transverse sec 
tion on line a? act of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a vertical 
longitudinal section of the detachable stuffing 
box. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
A and A' are the pump cylinders or barrels, 
placed horizontally with their inner ends fac 
ing, and arranged the one on a prolongation 
of the axial line of the other. Said cylinders 
communicate with the valve-chambers B B', 
and are substantially formed in and with said 
chambers, as shown. C is the suction-pipe. D 
D are the valves in chamber B. E is the de 
livery-pipe. Fis the plunger-rod, and G is the 
plunger, which is contained in both of the cyl 
inders A and A' and reciprocates therein. The 
inner ends of the cylinders A and A are pro 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
vided with flanges, and are enlarged to receive 
the packing H H' anti glands or covers I I'. 
The gland I is funnel with a screw-threaded 
portion, J, a collar, K, and a plain portion, II, 55 
the last-mentioned part entering the cylinder 
end, as shown in Fig. 2, and pressing with its 
inclined edge upon the packing H. The gland 
I' has the parts J, K, and I' constructed simi 
larly to the parts J K L of the gland I, except 
that the screw-thread on the part J is in a re 
verse direction from the screw-thread on the 
part J. Around the edge of the collars KK' 
are formed recesses MI, and in the flanges on 
the inner ends of the cylinders A and A' are 
made numerous holes, N, Fig. 3. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown by dotted lines at O 
pins or bolts passing through the holes N and 
entering the recesses M. The olject of these 
pins is, when they are inserted, as shown, to 73 
prevent the turning or rotating of the glands 
I and I'. The screw-threaded ends J J' of the 
glands II enter in opposite sides of a nut, P. 
Said nut is also formed with a collar having 
recesses around its periphery to conveniently 75 
receive a spanner or other implement for turn 
ing the nut. 
The packing H H' may be of any suitable 
material capable of being expanded against 
the periphery of the plunger when the glands 
are forced inward to compress it. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
The pins O being inserted, as described and as 
shown in Fig. 2, and the glands II being thus 
prevented from rotating, the nut P is turned. 
The screw-threads on the parts J J entering 
said nut being in opposite directions, it follows 
that when the nut is rotated in one way both 
glands II will be forced outward or into the 
cylinders A and A', and when it is turned the 
other way said glands will be drawn inward or 
out of the cylinders. Hence in order to com 
press both packings H H uniformly and si 
multaneously, thus expanding the same to 
press tightly around the plunger G, it is sim- 95 
ply necessary to turn the nut P in the proper. 
direction. 
At Q. Qare shown detachable stuffing-boxes, 
the interior construction of which is plainly in 
dicated in the sectional view Fig. 4. Through 
each box the plunger-rod F passes. Each box 
is provided with a flange, R, and a circular por 
85 
90 
OO 
 
265,602 
1. The combination of two pump cylinders 
or barrels placed with their ends injuxtaposi 
tion and arranged one on the prelongation of 
the axial line of the other, the glands inserted 
in the proximate ends of said cylinders and 
provided with reverse screw-threads, the pack 
ing between said glands and the cylinders, and 
the nut receiving the screw-threaded portions 
of both glands, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the two pumps, bar. 
rels, or cylinders, as described, the glands, the 
packing, the nut, and the pins O, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a pump, the combination of the two 
pump-cylinders A A', the glands II'', packing 
HH', and nut P, substantially as described. 
IPIERRE EYMARI) JAY. 
25 
35 
Wiesses: 
G. MORGAN ELDRIDGE, 
GEORGE H. BENJAMIN. 
O 
tion, S, which enters a circular aperture in the 
adjacent valve-chamber, said aperture having 
its center coincident with the axial line of the 
cylinders. Bolts T pass through the flange R. 
and into the side of the valve-chamber B and 
secure the box in place, and similar devices 
are arranged with the box Q". By removing 
said bolts the box is easily taken off, when ac 
cess may be had through the circular opening 
to the interior of the valve-chamber and cylin 
der, thus enabling the plunger to be removed 
therefrom when desired. 
It will be seen that a pump thus constructed 
insay have its plunger-packing kept tight with 
out necessitating the removal of any parts or 
interfering with the working of the machine, 
while access is had to the interior for clean 
ing, renoval of obstructions, repairs, &c., with 
great ease. 
What I claim as Iny invention is 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265707.txt	(No Model.) 
e 
R. E. M. SCHUBERT & E. T. CARSWELL, 
LAMP AND LOCOMOTIVE HEADLIGHT, 
No. 265,707. 
Patented Oct, 10, 1882, 
\ 7 
MWM 
 
N 
9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
C=E=C 
2 
N. 
N S NN 
N.N. 
N. 
NN 
NS 
SN 
y (LElk s 
i 
IES 
A. 
3. 
% 
% 
E. 
RE 
N ? 
 
- UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT E. M. SCHUBERT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, AND EDWIN 
T. CARSWELL, OF WILMINGTON, DELAWARE. 
LAMP AND LocoMotive HEAD-LIGHT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 265,707, dated October 10, 1882. 
Application filed May 3, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
25 
. 
To all chom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ROBERT E. M. SCHU 
BERT, of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, and ED 
WIN. T. CARSWELL, of Wilmington, Delaware, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Lamps and Locomotive Head-Lights, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the an 
nexed drawing, making part hereof. 
The nature of our invention will be fully set 
forth in the following description and claims. 
The drawing represents a vertical sectional 
view of the lamp, lens, reflector, and the stem 
valve, showing the oil-feed pipe and oil-reser 
voir in elevation. 
A is a movable lens in front of the light; B, 
a hinge for directing the rays of light through 
the lens upward or downward, which is ac 
complished by inclining the lens backward or 
forward; B', a curved support or bracket to sus 
tain the lens; C, a hinge to enable it to be moved 
from side to side to throw the rays of light side 
wise. D is a glass or transparent shield or in 
verted cup enveloping the burner, having an 
upper opening for the flame, which, while serv 
ing the usual purpose of shaping or giving 
form to the flame, also permits the rays of light 
to pass through it, whereby no shadow is cast. 
The metal shields of the same form are old, 
but are objectionable because of their opaque 
ness. E is a stem-valve, connected by means 
of a short pipe with the reservoir I, to regu 
late and control the flow of oil from the reser 
voir I through the tube E to the wick-cham 
ber F; G, the air-supply openings for sustain 
ing combustion; H, the ordinary head-light re 
flector. I is the oil-reservoir, having a screw 
cap, J, in the bottom of a funnel-neck, K. L. 
is the lamp; M, the flame of the same. N are 
slides round the openings G, which can be made 
to envelop the same by pushing them back 
more or less, the amount of air passing through 
openings G being regulated thereby... O O" are 
wick-tubes formed of concentric double-walled 
cylinders. The cylinders contain the concen 
tric tubular wicks, and between these cylin 
ders, and in the interior of the smallestone, are 
air-spaces PP, which communicate with the 
openings G, for the purpose of supplying air 
to the flame M. Q is the lamp-chimney. R 
is a thumb.wheel furnished with the ordinary 
ratchet or spur wheels to turn the wicks. The 
outer concentric tube, O', and its wick are 
pierced with a long vertical slot near the bot 
tom, to permit the passage through said outer 55 
tube or cylinder of the shaft of the wick-ele 
vator or spur-wheel R., by the turning of which 
the interior wick is turned up. 
For increased power we have shown a double 
lens, AA, although one lens may be used, if 6o 
desired. The joint C enables the lens to be 
turned from side to side, so as specially to illu 
minate one or the other side of the track, 
though thisjoint will be seldom used. We find 
that the joint B is all that is absolutely necessa- 65 
ry, as by throwing the lens slightly forward, so 
that the ray of light is deflected until it strikes 
the ground closely in front of the engine, it will 
be broad enough where it strikes the track to 
illuminate both rails thereof, so that the en- to 
gineer is thereby enabled to judge or to see 
exactly what distance he has passed a switch, 
and obviates the necessity of his going back a 
considerable distance to make sure that he has 
passed it sufficiently to enable it to be closed 75 
or changed, which he would have to do if he 
were compelled to back until the reflection from 
the head-light struck the switch. Thus con 
siderable valuable time is by our device saved 
in making up and shifting trains and cars and 8o 
in changing from one track to another. 
The concentric tubular wicks, each having a 
full supply of air, enable us to produce a solid 
intense white light, having equal illuminating 
power or capacity on every side because of its 85 
roundness. 
We construct the transparent shield D of 
glass. It is of the ordinary form of burner 
shields, and fulfills its office in the same way 
as other shields, but from its transparency 9o 
does not intercept the rays of light or cast a 
shadow. 
We have made the joint B in the form of a 
curved rack and bolt, as shown, for the pur 
pose of locking the lens at any desired angle, 95 
The joint C may be constructed in the same 
manner, as desired. 
f 
What we claim as new is 
1. in combination with a stationary head 
light box and lamp L, the lens A, supported on I Oo 
30 
35 
4 O 
45 
So 
 
2 
265,263 
a standard or bracket, B', and provided with can be thrown to either side, substantially as 
a hinge, B, which permits the lens to be de 
described. 
flected so as to throw its face downward, or 
3. In combination with a lamp, L, the lens 
vice versa, whereby the rays of light from the 
A, supported on a standard or bracket, B', and 
lamp may be thrown downward or upward in 
provided with a hinge, B, for the purposes de 
their passage through the lens, substantially 
scribed, and the stationary reflector H in the 
as described. 
head-light box, substantially as set forth. 
2. In combination with a lamp, L, the lens 
A supported on a standard or bracket, B, and 
provided with a hinge, C, adapted to permit 
the bracket of the lens to be noved around 
laterally in either direction, whereby the rays 
of light in their passage through the lens A. 
ROBERT. E. M. SCHUBERT. 
EDWIN T. CARSWELL. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE E. BUCKLEY 
WM. H. CARSON. 
d 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265808.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 265,808. 
J. C., HINCHMAN. 
TIME STAMP. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 10, 1882, 
J. C. HINCHMAN, 
TIME STAMP, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 265,808. 1,: 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. HINCHMAN, OF SUMMIT, NEW J ERSEY. 
TIME STAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 265,808, dated October 10, 1882. 
Application filed August 25, 18S0. (No model.) 
IO 
2C) 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN C. HINCHMIAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Sum 
mit, in the county of Union and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Time-Stamps, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to furnish a 
machine for hand printing or stamping, which 
shall, when operated, record by a single move 
ment of a platen or impression-pad the pre 
cise hour or minute of the day at which such 
impression was taken, so as to adapt it to such 
purposes as stamping messages which are re 
ceived or sent at telegraph - stations, tickets 
sold at railway-stations, time-checks for em 
ploys of manufacturing-establishments, and 
other analogous uses. 
My invention consists of a stereotyped rep 
resentation of the face of a clock or time-dial 
affixed to a bed-plate and firmly supported, 
preferably in a horizontal position. A disk 
or plate carrying a representation of a land or 
pointer is arranged to revolve upon the face of 
the dial by means of a time-train connected 
there with, which pointer indicates the hour in 
the salme manner as the hour-hanti of an ordi 
nary clock. In most cases I prefer to employ 
two such pointers-one for indicating hours 
and the other minutes-arranged upon inde 
pendent concentric axes, each being connected 
with the time-train by appropriate nechan 
isn. Above the stereotyped dial is a movable 
platen or impression-pad provided with a band 
or other suitable inking device and a knob or 
handle, by means of which handle the platen 
may be forced down and made to produce an 
impression upon an interposed sheet of paper 
of the characters upon the stereotyped dial 
and also of the pointer or pointers, in which 
impression the latter will appear in the posi 
tion which they happen to be at the moment 
when such impression is taken. 
My invention further consists in combining 
with the hereinbefore-described mechanism cer 
tain devices for preventing the shocks caused 
by the blow of the platen upon the indicating 
or printing devices from being transmitted to 
the time-train, and also for disconnecting the 
So indicating or printing devices from the time 
train for the purpose of adjusting the same, 
40 
45 
h 
55 
7 O 
and in certain other minor details, whereby 
the effectual action of the mechanisin is se 
cured, as will be hereina?ter more particularly 
set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of an apparatus ein bodying my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the 
same; and Figs. 3 and 4 are vertical transverse 
sections of portions of the indicating and print 
ing mechanism, showing certain details of the 
mechanism. 
In the figures, A represents a base, of any 
suitable material, to which is secured a metal 
lic bed-plate, (t. 
B is a frame containing a time-train, which 
latter may consist of an ordinary chronometer 
movement, b, driven by a coiled spring, l'. 
C is a plate or platform mounted upon pil 
lars c e directly over the time-train, and upon 
this platform is supported a top plate, D, upon 
short pillars d d. Upon the upper surface of 
the top plate, D, is secured a stereotyped rep 
resentation of a time-dial, E, consisting of a 
circle of characters denoting the hours of the 
day, from I to XII, these characters being ar 
ranged in the manner of an Ordinary time. 
piece, but in the reverse direction. The char. 
acters are engraved in relief, so as to be capa 
ble of printing an impression upon a sheet of 
paper when brought forcibly in contact with 
then. Within the circle formed by the char 
acters of the time-dial a shallow circular re 
cess is formed, as best seen ate in Fig. 3. With 
in this recess a disk or plate, F, is fitted, car. 
rying upon its upper surface an engraved rep 
resentation of a hand or pointer, f. The plate 
F is mounted upon a sleeve or hollow shaft, f", 
to which a rotary motion is communicated by 
the toothed wheel f', fixed thereon. With 
in the hollow shaft f" is a smaller hollow shaft, 
g', carrying another hand or pointer, (1, and 
also a toothed pinion, g', from which it re 
ceives its motion. The hollow shaft g' re 
volves upon a stationary pin, G, which is se 
cured or otherwise permanently attached to 
the stationary plate C. The pinion g is like 
Wise hollow and rests upon a spiral spring, H, 
within and beneath it, which spring in turn 
rests upon the fixed plate C. Normally the 
elasticity of the spring EI is exerted to raise 
the hollow shafts f" and f', so that the disk i 
CRC 
2 
265, SOS 
O 
30 
O 
45 
So 
55 
may rotate freely without touching the bottom 
connection it between the wheel i and its axis, 
which takes up the lost motion and restores 
of the recesse, and the hand g will in like man 
the proper relation of the parts the instant the 
ner rotate freely without touching the disk F, 
pointers are relieved from the pressure of the 
as seen in Figs. 2 and 3, except when an im 
platen. In many cases this provision Would 
pression is to be printed, as will be hereinafter 
not be necessary, and in such cases the device 
explained. The toothed wheelf" and pinion 
might be advantageously dispensed with. 
g", which communicate a rotary motion to the 
pointers f and g respectively, are driven by the 
In order to disconnect the pointers and the 
mechanism immediately connected there with 
time-train b, through the intervention of a pin 
from the time-train, in order to regulate then 
ion, i. The pinion i is attached to its axis by 
or set them to the correct time when required, 
means of a coiled spring, i, placed within ald 
the plate C, upon which this portion of the ap 
beneath it, the object of which arrangement 
paratus is mounted, is capable of a slight holi 
will be hereinafter explained. The relation of 
Zontal movement upon its supports by means 
the wheelf' and piniong' to the time-train l 
of a slot and thumb-nat, c', by which the pin 
is such that the former is caused to make One 
ion g may be thrown out of gear with the 
revolution in twelve laours, and the latter one 
wheel i and the pointers f and g adjusted inde 
revolution in each hour, so that the pointer f 
pendently of the time-train. 
constitutes the hour-hand and the pointer g 
The platen K and its attachments are ar. 
the minute-hand of the time-dial E; and it is 
ranged so as to turn horizontally upon a point, 
to be understood that these are moved by the 
o, Fig. 1, so that it may be swung away from 
time-train in such manner as to indicate the 
the dial E, as in Fig. 1, to permit the adjust 
time upon the dial E in precisely the same man 
ment of the latter, or placed in position for 
ner as the hands of an Ordinary time-piece. 
In order to provide for taking an impression 
printing, as shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 4, and by 
the dotted lines in Fig. I. 
of the time-dial E and its handsfand g at any 
required moment, I make use of a platen, K, 
It is obvious that fixed or movable ty)es. Or 
having a stem, l, surmounted by a handle or 
characters for printing dates, numerals, or any 
knob, l', and capable of sliding vertically in a 
desired information, may be combined with the 
suitable support, L, secured to the base A. M. 
hereinbefore-described apparatus, so that an 
impression may be taken thereof by the same 
is an ilking band or ribbon wound upon roll 
ers in 972. The arrangement and operation of 
platen and at the same moment that an in 
pression is taken of the time-dial. 
these devices is the same in all respects as the 
similar parts of an ordinary hand-stamp, and 
I do not claim herein the combination of a 
bed-plate, a stationary type-dial allixed there 
need not therefore be more particularly de 
to, types represelting pointerS movable Con 
scribed. 
centrically within the stationary dial, time 
The mode of operation of my improved ap 
mechanism for rotating said pointers, and a 
paratus will be easily understood. A sheet of 
platen for simultaneously taking an impres 
paper is inserted between the platen K and 
sion of Said dial and its pointers, as this is in 
the ink-ribbon M. The platen is then forced 
tended to form the subject-matter of a Separate 
down by striking the knob k' by the hand, by 
division of this application. 
Which means the paper and the ink-ribbon are 
brought forcibly against the face of the time 
I do not claim the combination, in a chron 
ometric stamp, with the time - dial, pointer, 
(lial E. The pointer q is pressed to a solid 
time-train, and platen, of a vertically-yielding 
bearing against the plate F, a sufficient ver 
tical movement being permitted by the yield 
connection between said pointer and its mo 
ing of the spring H, ald in like manner, by a 
tor. Neither do I claim the combination, in a 
further compression of the same spring, the 
stamp of the above-described character, with 
the dial or fixed characters upon the bed-plate 
plate F comes to a bearing in the recesse, 
which forms a seat for that purpose. In this 
in line above the clock mechanism and case 
position, as seen in Fig. 4, the upper or print 
and concentric with its driving-spindle, of an 
impression-pad for indicating the time of an 
ing surfaces of the pointers f and g are level 
impression upon a document. 
with the printing-surface of the dial E and an 
impression is made upon the paper, which im 
I claim as my invention 
pression represents the position of the hands 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of a stationary stereotyped 
in relation to the dial at the moment of time 
representation of a time-dial, a disk or plate 
at which it Was made. As the movement of 
revolving concentrically upon the face of said 
the pointers f and g, being derived from the 
dial, and carrying a representation of a point 
time-train, is necessarily continuous, it is ob 
er, a platen for simultaneously taking an in 
vious that the action of the platen upon them, 
pression of said dial and its pointer, a Seat for 
in taking an impression in the manner herein 
Supporting said disk when struck by the plat 
before described, will momentarily arrest their 
en, and a spring for supporting said disk out 
movement, and if the operation were repeated 
with considerable frequency would interfere 
of contact with its seat, except at the moment 
of taking an impression. 
with the accurate movement of the time-train, 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
which is desirable and necessary. This source 
of irregularity is provided against by the spring. set forth, of a stationary time-dial, movable 
7 o 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
IO5 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
 
265, SOS 
3. 
in said dial, a time-train for moving said point 
er, a platen for simultaneously taking all in 
pression of said dial and pointer, and an elas 
tic mechanical connection between the said 15 
pointer and its motor. 
Signed by me this 24th day of August, A.D. 
SS0. 
JOHN C. HINCEMAN. 
Witnesses: 
J. A. HYLAND, 
FRANKL. POPE, 
hands or pointers indicating hours and min 
utes respectively, a time-train for communicat 
ing motion to said movable hands or pointers, 
and mechanism for disconnecting. the point 
ers from the time-train in order to adjust the 
position of the former without interfering with 
the movement of the latter. 
3. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a stereotyped representa 
tion of a time-dial, a type or character repre 
senting a pointer movable concentrically with 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US265908.txt	(No Model.) 
D. WILCOX. 
3. Sheets-Sheet i. 
DIE FOR MOLDING. HORSESHOE BLANKS. 
No. 265,908. 
Patented 00t, 10, 1882, 
---- 
-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
---- 
 
2%r. 
20%4 7% 
(No Model.) 
No. 265,908, 
Patented Oct. 10, 1882. 
D. WILCOX. 
DIE FOR MOLDING HORSESHOE BLANKS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3 
 
 
A 
 
N 
-Za', 
4.%.4. 
/2/ 6, 
2 
Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washingtor, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DARIUS WILCOX, OF DERBY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO ISAAC P. HOWE, 
OF BIRMINGHAM, CONNECTICUT. 
DE FOR MOLDING HORSESHOE-BLANKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 265,908, dated October 10, 1882. 
... Application filed February 24, 1882. (No model.) 
15. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DARIUS WILCOX, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Derby, 
in the county of New Haven and State of Con 
5 necticut, have invented new and Improved 
Dies for Making Horseshoe-Blanks, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to make a 
horseshoe-blank in such complete and sym 
Io metrical form that when bent into shape it will 
produce a finished horseshoe without the ne 
cessity of final swaging and forming in finish 
ing-dies, as in the common practice with ma 
chine-made horseshoes. 
In my Patent No. 223,12S, dated October 12, 
1880, I make claim to the process of forming 
fifth-wheel blanks by Swaging one end and the 
central portion in dies constructed substan 
tially alike, and then changing the partly 
2O formed blank end for end and swaging its sec 
ond end in the same or corresponding dies, so 
as to gage the length of the second end from 
the center first formed and produce ends of 
precisely corresponding shape. This broad 
25 idea of shaping or swaging a bar of metal is 
also embodied in the present invention, which 
consists in forming a horseshoe-blank by 
stamping its ends successively between dies 
formed with two pairs of matrices which are 
3o counterparts of each other, (with the neces 
sary reversion in position,) so that a horseshoe 
blank is formed one half or more in one ma 
trix, and is then turned end for end for the 
striking or stamping of its other part to accu 
35 rately corresponding shape in the second ma 
trix. In connection with a bed-die of the char-, 
acter specified I use an adjustable gage, by 
which the required length of the blank can be 
accurately measured in the act of final stamp 
4o ing. I prefer to swage each end of the blank in 
successive die-cavities having creasing-tongues 
of different height, so that the said creases 
may be partially formed in the first cavity and 
completed in the second. The creasers are 
45 made removable, and may be in the bed-die, 
but are preferably applied to the top die, be 
cause it is thus exposed to heat for a shorter 
time. 
In order that the invention may be fully un 
5o derstood, I will proceed to describe it with 
- 
A represents the upper die; B, the bed-die, 65 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a pair of dies 
such as are employed in carrying out my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is an end view of the same. 55 
Fig. 3 is a plain of the bed-die. Fig. 4 is a face 
view of the upper die. Fig. 5 is a perspective 
view of the blank. Fig. 6 is a perspective view 
of trimming-dies employed to remove the fins. 
Fig. 7 is a transverse section of the same. 6o 
Figs. S and 9 are face views of a pair of dies 
(for one end of the blank) of the preferred form 
of dies used in carrying out my invention. Fig. 
10 is a transverse section of the same. 
and C a gage-bar fixed to the bed-die by a 
screw, b, or otherwise, and having adjustably 
attached to it a gage, B, made of Tor L shape, 
to adapt it to extend across or partially across 
the open ends of one or both of the matrices to 
M. M'. The shank d of the gage is slotted, as 
represented, to receive a guide pin or screw, E, 
and a clamp-screw, F, permitting its move 
ment in a right line and its fixture in any po 
sition to which it may be set in the required 75 
proximity to the face of the die. 
The matrices M M in the dies A B are made 
of the required shape to form the respective 
ends of the horseshoe-blank, each pair of 
matrices being somewhat more than half the 8o 
length of the blank, so as to extend beyond 
the middle. In the present illustration the 
matrices in the bed-die form the upper half of 
the blank, while the lower half is formed in the 
matrices of the upper die, which are made with 85 
pockets PP for the reception and shaping of 
the leel-calks T T. 
In operation the blank is first formed by 
rolling to approximately the required shape, 
with protuberances for the calks TT. One 
end of the blank is then placed in the matrices 
MM' of the upper and lower dies, with the calk 
projection T in the pocket P, and rather more 
than one-half of the blank is thus stamped 
and finished. The gage D is then accurately 95 
set at the required distance from the inner ex 
tremity of the matrices in the bed-dies to agree 
with the required length of blank. The fin 
ished end of the blank is then placed against 
the gage D and the unfinished end in the ma- Ioo 
265,90s 
S 
s 
O 
25 
g 
trix M. The top die, A, is again placed in po 
sition and struck with a drop-hammer, which 
finishes the blank with ends precisely alike, 
and by the described use of the gage D insures 
the swaging of it to precisely the required 
length. The nail-creases are produced in the 
same operation by projecting tongues f on 
plates or blocks F, which are made removable, 
so as to permit their ready repair or renewal 
when worn. 
I prefer to form the dies for the stamping of 
the respective ends of the blank each with two 
pairs of cavities, so that the first end of the 
blank may loe formed at two operations, and 
so with the second. This preferred mode of 
carrying out my invention is illustrated in Figs. 
9 and 10 by views of the dies employed for one 
end of the blank, those for the other end be 
ing precisely similar, excepting that the cavi 
ties are reversed in shape and the dies em 
ployed for the first end do not require the gage. 
By thus using two matrices in the dies for each 
end I am enabled to bring the blank to the re 
quired form and produce the nail-creases with 
less violence and strain. The punch or die 
which is to form the under surface of the shoe 
(being preferably the top die or punch) has in 
its cavities creaser-blocks FF, with tongues 
if f' of different depth, so that in first stamp 
ing the end of the blank in the matrix M' the 
smaller tongue f" will produce a rudimentary 
crease, which crease will be completed by the 
second and more prominent tongue, f', in stamp 
ing the same end of the blank in the second 
matrix, M. One end of the blank having been 
thus completed, (except needful trimming,) its 
other end is formed in like manner by twice 
stamping in the second pair of dies by the aid 
of the T-shaped gage D, as already described 
with reference to the L-shaped gage of the sin 
gle-cavity dies, and the blank is thus passed 
through the trimming-dies TT, Figs. 6 and 7, 
for removing the fins. 
The gage may be attached in any suitable 
position, either to the die or the die-holder, as 
most convenient. 
The nail-holes may be punched in the same 
operation, if desired, or by a subsequent opera 
tion, in customary manner. 
Having thus described my invention, the fol 
lowing is what I claim as new therein and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent: 
The combination of the lower die, having 
the matrices M M and adjustable gage D, and 
the upper die, A, provided with the matrices 
MM', having the pockets PP and creaser 
tongues f, as and for the purpose set forth. 
DARIUS WILCOX. 
8 
Witnesses: 
OCTAVIUS KNIGHT, 
WALTER ALLEN. 
35 
45 
SO 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266009.txt	(No Model.) 
A. M. BARRETT, 
COMBINED SPOOL AND THIMBLE HOLDER AND THREAD CUTTER, 
Patented Oot, 17, 1882. 
No. 266,009. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTONIO M. BARRETT, OF IONE CITY, CALIFORNIA. 
COMBINED SPOOL AND TH MBLE HOLDER AND THREAD - CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,009, dated October 17, 1882. 
Application filed July 25, 1882. 
(No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANTONIO M. BARRETT, 
of Ione City, county of Amador, State of Cali 
fornia, have invented an Improved Combined 
Spool and Thimble Holder and Thread-Cutter; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof. 
My invention relates to a new and useful de 
vice, which I call a combined spool and thim 
ble holder and thread-cutter. 
My invention consists of a suitable spindle 
or shaft for receiving the spool, of a standard 
for supporting the thimble, of a cutter for sev 
ering the thread, and of a hook or pin for affix 
ing the device in convenient position. These 
are the lesults of a construction as follows: A 
single wire is bent to form a cross above and 
an open base below, one end of the wire fitting 
into a hook on the other end at one corner of 
the base and forming the spindle for the spool. 
Upon the front of the cross above is soldered a 
wire, the upper portion of which is bent out 
wardly and receives one end of a small blade 
extending from the main piece. Upon the 
back of the cross is affixed a bent pin or hook, 
which sustains the device, and forms, with the 
top of the cross, a secure resting-place for the 
thimble. This will be more fully seen by ref. 
erence to the accompanying drawings, in 
Which 
Figure is a perspective view of my device. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view, showing the ap 
plication of my device. 
Let A represent the vertical or central por. 
tion, and B the arms, of a cross having an open 
base, C, at right angles. These parts are 
formed of a piece of wire bent double to form 
the center A and arms B. At the base of the 
center the wire extends in opposite directions, 
thence downwardly, where one end is bent to 
form a hook, (t. The other end extends across 
to it and lies in the hook, thus forming a par 
allelogram, the base of which is the spindle c, 
which may be released from the hook when 
necessary. To the center A, in front, is at 
tached a small piece of metal, b, here shown 
as a bent wire, the upper portion of 
which 
diverges from the center wire. 
D is a small steel cutting-blade, one end of 
which is secured to the center A and the other 
to the top portion of piece b. 
To the back of the centerpiece is secured by 
v 
one end a wire, E. Its top is free, and diverg 
ing slightly from the main center A. Its end 
is bent down and sharpened to form a pin or 
hook. 
The use of this device is shown clearly in 
Fig. 2, and is as follows: It is intended to be 
secured to the garment of the person using it, 
in some convenient position, by simplyinserting 
the pin or hook E. To insert the spool F the 
end of the spindle c is released from the hook 
a, and the spool fitted upon it, after which it is 
rehooked and the thread may be drawn from 
the spool, which is thus secured. The thread 
may be cut upon the blade D above, and when 
it is necessary, for any purpose, to lay aside the 
thimble G, it may be fitted upon the top of the 
center A. Its edge will pass down between 
the loose top of the pin E and the back of the 
center A and belheld securely and prevented 
from falling off. 
The cross-arms B and the wide base C lendl 
stability to the device and cause it to lie in 
convenient position. 
I may make several sizes, if necessary, and 
the finish of the wire may be according to fancy, 
though I prefer it to be nickeled. 
The device is useful for persons who do any 
kind of hand-sewing. Its convenience and ef. 
fectiveness, together with its small cost, will 
render it a desirable article. 
It is obvious that the blade ID might be omit 
ted and there would still be a convenient and 
useful device. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to. Secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A spool and thimble holder constructed 
of a piece of wire bent to form a vertical cen 
ter, A, upon top of which the thimble is sus 
tained, and an open base, C, in one corner of 
which one end of the wire is formed into a 
hook, a, and receives the other end from the 
spindle c, upon which the spool is fitted, and a 
hook or pin, E, upon the back of the device to 
secure it, the top of said pin being separated 
from the center A to receive the rim or edge of 
the thimble, substantially as herein described. 
2. A combined spool and thimble holder and 
thread-cutter, constructed of wire bent to form 
a vertical center, A, upon top of which the 
thimble is sustained, cross-arms B, and wide 
open base C, in one corner of which one end of 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
2 
266,009 
the wire is formed into a hook, a, and receives cross-arms B, open lower portion, C, having a 
the other end forming the spindlec, upon which hook, a, at one corner, and a spindle or base, c, 
the spool is fitted, the cutting-blade D, sup- adapted to rest in said hook or to be removed 
ported from the front of the device by a strip therefrom, a cutting-blade, D, in front, and a 15 
5 or piece, b, and the pin or hook E, secured to pin or hook, E, behind, all arranged and used 
the back of the center A, and having its up. substantially as herein described. 
per portion free to receive between it and the 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand. 
center A the rim or edge of the thimble, sub- 
stantially as herein described. 
Witnesses: 
3. A combined spool audl thimble holder and 
thread-cutter, consisting of a central piece, A, 
C. F. WILLIMUS, 
THOS. P. STEWAR.T. 
Io 
ANTONIO M. BARRETT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266109.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 266,109, 
J. B. DAWIS & W, WALKER, 
AIR INJECTOR FOR FURNACES, 
Patented Oct, 17, 1882. 
ZA 
1. 
M Z c 
Z 
727 Z 
2 
(2 
 
$N C 
2ZN - 
3AAAAA 
m 
A 
WITNESSES : 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, d, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. DAVIS AND WILLIAM WALKER, OF GLEN WOOD, PENNSYLVANIA. 
A Ro NJECTOR FOR FURNACES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,109, dated October 17, 1882. 
Application filed June 16, 1882. (No model.) 
- 
O 
IS 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN B. DAVIS and 
WILLIAM WALKER, of Glenwood, in the coun 
ty of Lackawanna and State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented a new and Improved Air-In 
5 
jector for Furnaces, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
Our invention consists in an air-blast or 
injecting apparatus for use with blacksmiths 
forges and furnaces for the supply of air there 
to by means of a steamjet, whereby the air is 
applied in a moist condition, or in the pres 
ence of moisture, to facilitate combustion, as 
hereinafter fully described, and poiuted out 
in the claim. 
The invention is especically applicable to 
furnaces and forges in which anthracite and 
bituminous coal and culm are burned. 
The construction and operation are set forth 
in detail hereinafter. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation, showing 
our improved air-injector as applied in con 
nection with a forge. Fig. 2 is a plan view of 
the injector. 
A represents a forge to which the air is ap 
plied by a nozzle, a. B is a trunk of wood or 
metal, to the lower end of which is connected 
the nozzle ct, and which is fitted at the upper 
end with a stealin-jet pipe, b. The upper end 
of the trunk B is open for the inlet of air 
around the pipe b, and the pipe b is to be sup 
plied with steam from a suitable generator. 
The successful operation of this apparatus 
is dependent upon the length and proportion 
ate size of the trunk B. From its outer and 
inlet end the sides of the trunk are drawn in 
Ward and focused to a point, c, beyond the 
end of the steamjet b. From that point the 
trunk gradually enlarges to the outlet end, 
which is slightly smaller than the inlet-open 
ing. The length between the throat c and 
the connection of the nozzle a should be such 
as to insure the passage of the air through the 
trunk, as if Such length be made too short it 
Will not give the steam the required room for 
eXpansion, and the air Will not pass through. 
Further, the nozzle at being of small diame 
ter, a pressure is maintained in the trunk, in 
Suring a steady and uniform blast of air to the 
forge or furnace. 
In operation the steam passing through the 
apparatus with the air becomes partially con 
densed, so that it enters the forge or furnace 
in the form of fine particles of moisture, which 
aids the combustion of the fuel and prevents 
furnace-bars, forge-boxes, and grates from 
burning, and is especially advantageous in 
burning culm for generating steam and con 
Suming the sulphur in anthracite and bitumi 
nous coal. The nozzle a passes through a wa 
ter-box, as illustrated at C, for insuring the 
Condensation of the steam to the desired ex 
tent, 
With this apparatus a more advantageous 
blast is insured than can be obtained by a 
blower or fan, and it is also more economical 
in operation. In the burning of anthracite 
and bituminous coal the steam has the effect 
to remove or insure the combustion of all the 
sulphur, which, unless removed, interferes with 
welding operations. This has heretofore been 
found to be the disadvantage of using anthra 
cite or bituminous coal containing sulphur in 
welding operations; but by our apparatus, 
which supplies steam with the air, the sulphur 
is entirely consumed. 
The tube Eprojects downward from the noz 
Zle ct, and is to receive the condensation-wa 
ter. At its lower end it is provided with a 
plug, E', Which can be opened to draw off this 
condensation - water, which is condensed by 
the water C surrounding the nozzle ct, whereby 
this condensation-water will not be forced into 
the fire. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
We claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent 
In an air-injector, the combination, with the 
trunk B, of the outlet-nozzle a, the water-box 
C, and the condensation. Water receptacle E, 
extending downward from the nozzle a, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
JOHN BENSON DAVIS. 
WILLIAM WALKER, 
Witnesses: 
P. F. MoFFITT, 
J. B. GILPOOL. 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
So 
55 
75 
85 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266209.txt	F SCHUBERT, 
BOOK SUPPORT, 
Patented Oct, 17, 1882, 
(Model.) 
No. 266,209, 
 
Z719-es-2..--Ns M 2 2 
WITNESSES: 
Z27, 
-6 2.2. 
INVENTOR: 
Co 
BY clusiv 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FERDINAND SCEIUBERT, OF HIGGINSPORT, OEHIO, 
BOOKSUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,209, dated October 17, 1882. 
Application filed April 27, 1882. 
\?odel.) 
55 
IO 
Be it known that I, FERDIN AND SCHUBERT, 
To all whom it may concern: 
or rod A will be balanced and each end will 
be about the same distance from the base and 
of Higginsport, in the county of Brown and the pages will be level, as shown in Fig. 1. If 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and Im- a number of leaves are turned from the right 
proved Book-Support, of which the following 
hand cover G upon the left-hand cover G, the 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
left-hand end of the rod or bar A Will gradually 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
descend and the right-hand end of the rod or 
new and improved device for supporting one 
bar A will gradually rise. Finally, if all or 
end of a book in such a manner that both sur 
nearly all the leaves rest on the left-hand cover, 
faces of the opened book will be about level. 
the left-hand end or arm of the bar or rod A 
The invention consists in an angular rod or 
will rest on the base and the right-hand arm 
bar pivoted on a base at its angle, the arms of 
or end will be raised, as shown in Fig. 2. In 
this bar or rod resting on springs fastened on 
all cases the upperpages or leaves on each cover 
the base below the arms, which arms have 
will be level, or nearly so, and this adjustment 
anti-friction wheels or pulleys pivoted in the 
is automatically made-that is, the cover's rise 
ends. One end of the book is placed on the 
or descend accordingly as the leaves are folded 
support in such a manner that the back of the 
from or upon them. The books need not be 
book is on the angle of the rod or bar and the 
blocked to keep them level, and this device 
covers rest on the ends of the rod or bar, where 
prevents any undue stcain on the binding. 
by the leaves of the opened book will be held 
Entries can be made or lines can be drawn 
level. 
very conveniently, as the surfaces of the opened 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
book are level, or nearly so, from right to left. 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
The anti-friction wheels D protect the covers 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
from being injured by the ends of the bar or 
responding parts in all the figures. 
rod A. This device can be used for small or 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal elevation of my 
large books. 
improved book-support. Fig. 2 is a longitudi 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
nal sectional elevation of the same, showing a 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
modified construction of the springs. Fig. 3 
Letters Patent, is 
is a plan view of the same. 
1. A book-support having an angular rod 
A bar or rod, A, is slightly bent so as to 
or bar pivoted at its angle, and provided with 
form a very obtuse angle, and at this angle, 
arms resting on springs fastened to the base, 
which is to be at the middle of the bar or rod, 
anti-friction wheels being pivoted in the ends 
it is pivoted to the top of a base, B, of wood, 
of said arms, substantially as shown and de 
metal, or other suitable material, which is par 
scribed. 
allel with the bar or rod and of about the same 
2. In a book-support, the combination, with 
length. The two arms of the angular bar or 
the base B, of the angular bar or rod A, hori 
rod will be slightly inclined to the base, or one 
- Zontally pivoted thereol) at its angle, aud the 
arin rests on the base and the other is inclined, 
springs C, interposed between the rod or bar 
as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Springs C, of any 
A and the base B, substantially as herein 
desired or suitable construction, are attached to 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
the upper surface of the base B below the arms 
forth. 
of the rod or bar A, which arms rest on the 
3. In a book-support, the combination, with 
free ends of the springs, or the springs can be 
the base B, of the angular bar or rod. A hori 
attached to the lower edges of the arms. 
Zontally pivoted thereon at its angle, the 
Small anti-friction wheels or pulleys D are 
springs C, and the anti-friction rollers or pull 
pivoted on the forked ends of the rod or bar A. 
leys D, pivoted in the ends of the bar or rod A, 
One end of a book, E, is placed on the rod or 
substantially as herein shown and described, 
bar A in such a manner that the back F rests 
and for the purpose set forth. 
on the base B at the middle or angle of the 
bar or rod and the covers G rest on the anti 
friction rollers D. The other end of the book 
rests on the desk or table. If about an equal 
number of leaves rest on each cover G, the bar 
ALFRED LOUDON, 
JOHN W. GALBREATH, 
FERDIN AND SCHUBERT, 
Witnesses: 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
25 
30 
- 35 
SO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266313.txt	S. H. RAYMOND. 
No. 266,313. 
MACHINE FOR UPSETTING, TIRES, 
Patented 0ct, 24, 1882, 
 
 
aevesses: 
- Zzzaze/c2. 
Mimamamanmamma-ur 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SILAS H. RAYMOND, OR GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO CEIARLES 
H. SOUTHWICK, OF SAME PLACE. 
VACHINE FOR UPSETTING T RES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,313, dated October 24, 1882. 
Application filed January 17, 1880. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SILAS H. RAYMOND, of 
the city of Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent 
and State of Michigan, have invented a new 
5 and useful Tire-Upsetting Machine, (for which 
I have never obtained a patent in this or any 
other country,) of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Io tire-upsetting machines in which the tire is 
held by eccentries; and the object of my in 
vention is to provide a machine with two ec 
centrics so arranged as to hold the tire with 
out the aid of evers or springs, the eccentrics 
moving at right angles with the tire. I attain 
this object by the mechanism illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
lFigure l is a perspective view of the ima 
chine complete, with a tire in position to be 
20 upset; and Fig. 2 is one of the eccentrics de 
tached from the machine, showing the form of 
the lower part of the eccentrics, which form, 
however, may be varied. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through. 
out the several views. 
The machine is composed of the bed-piece B, 
two upright posts, CC, and two eccentrics, 
D D. The bed-piece B and posts C C may be 
castin one piece, as shown in the drawings. The 
25 
In presence of - 
CHARLES CHANDLER, 
CHARLEs SHUSTER. 
eccentrics are each attached by a bolt, on 
which they turn, to the upper end of the posts 
C C, and have a motion at right angles with 
the tire and bed-piece B. Attached to or inte 
gral with each eccentric is a lug, E, as shown. 
When a tire is being placed in position on the 
bed of the machine the eccentrics D ID are 
turned back, so that their lugs E will rest upon 
or against the backs of the posts C C, thus 
leaving the bed free and permitting the tire 
to be readily adjusted. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
The tire is bent and placed on the bed-piece B 
and the eccentrics brought down upon the tire 
and tightened by a stroke of the hammer. The 
tire is then hammered down to the bed-piece, 
and is thus straightened. 
I claim 
The eccentrics D D, provided with the lugs 
or rests EE, in combination with the posts 
CC and bed-piece B, so constructed and ar 
ranged that the movement of the eccentries 
is at right angles with the bed-piece and tire, 
substantially as described. 
SILAS II. RAYMOND. 
So 
35 
40 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266414.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BARKER 
RUBBING MECHANISM FOR, CARDING MACHINES, 
No. 266,414, 
 
Patented Oct. 24, 1882, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES BARKER, OF PEI ILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
RUBB ING MECHANISM FOR CARDING-MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,414, dated October 24, 1882. 
Application filed June 9, 1882. 
(No model.) 
25 
O 
To all chon it may COC6, 
My invention consists of the combination, apron to traverse faster than the first. 
have found two pairs for each set of strands 
Be it known that I, JAMES BARIKER, a citi 
sufficient. Each apron being short, it can be 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
made of better leather than a long apron, which, 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented an 
owing to its extended area, must necessarily 
Improvementin Rubbing Mechanisms for Card 
be composed in part of inferior portions of a 
ing-Machines, of which the following is a speci 
hide. The strands, moreover, can be subject 
fication. 
ed to more or less draft by causing the second 
described hereinafter, of two pairs of endless 
In carrying my invention into practical ef 
rubbing-aprons of leather as a substitute for fect, however, I obtained much better results 
the ordinary rub-rolls of carding-engines or for 
as regards the perfection of the strands than I 
the single pair of endless rubbing-aprons here 
originally anticipated, and this I attribute to 
tofore used in connection with carding-ma 
the following cause: In using a single pair of 
chines. 
long aprons any local imperfection in the leather 
The object of my invention is to obtain 
had a detrimental effect on a strand or strands. 
strands more perfectly rubbed and more free 
While there are comparatively few defects in 
from defects than those produced by ordinary 
the short aprons, owing to the selected leather, 
rub-rolls or by a single pair of long aprons. 
yet local imperfections must necessarily occur; 
Rubbing-aprons have been heretofore ap 
but whatever imperfection may be imparted to 
plied to carding-engines with the view of ob. 
a straud or strands when subjected to the first 
taining extended rubbing-surfaces, two long 
pair of aprons, it will, with rare exceptions, be 
aprons of leather, one above the other, having 
removed by the second pair, as an imperfection 
been used for this purpose. The objection to 
in the second pair is not likely to take effect on 
this plan has been the difficulty of obtaining 
that part of the strand which was injured by 
from a hide perfect leather of sufficient length 
the first pair. A strand or strands, moreover, 
and breadth to make an apron of the desired 
which have passed between the first pair of 
length, local imperfections in the leather in 
aprons without receiving any injury cannot be 
ducing the warping and sagging of the aprons 
seriously damaged, because the first rubbing of 
and causing the irregular rubbing of the 
the strands has reduced them to a condition 
strands. No draft on the strands, moreover, 
which enables them to resist the injurious ef. 
could be obtained by a single pair of aprons. 
fects of imperfections in the second pair of 
In order to overcome these difficulties, I 
aprons. 
adapted two pairs of aprons, BB, D D, for 
A short rubbing apron is not new of itself, 
each set of strands, which passed between the 
for two such aprons have been shown in com 
first pair, BB', across the spacea, and between 
bination with rub-rolls for the purpose of ob 
the second pair of aprons, l) D', as shown in the 
taining the drawing effect of the rolls with the 
the vertical section, Figure 1, and sectional 
superior rubbing effect of the aprons; but by 
plan, Fig. 2, of the accompanying drawings. 
two pairs of aprons the desired drawing effect 
The mechanism used for rotating the rollers 
can be obtained without resorting to rub-rolls. 
round which the aprons pass, and for recipro 
I claim as my invention- . 
cating the same, may be similar to that used 
A rubbing mechanism for carding-machines 
for operating ordinary rub-rolls, and hence need 
in which short endless aprons B B are com 
not be described, a means for reciprocating said 
bined with a second pair of aprons, D D, ar 
rollers being shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings, 
ranged at a short distance from the first pair, 
which figure is designed to illustrate a plan 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
view of my invention. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
Supporting-rollers), similar to those used 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
in connection With the usual large aprons, are 
scribing witnesses. 
placed in Such a position as to prevent ally 
sagging of the aprons in the middle. 
Although I have shown two pairs of aprons, 
additional pairs may be used, if desired; but I 
HARRY DRURY, 
HARRY SMITH, 
JAMES BARKER, 
Witnesses: 
45 
So 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
85 
90 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266514.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 266,514, 
D. B. PIPER. 
CLOTHES WRINGER, 
Patented 0ct, 24, 1882, 
SSR 
Y 
 
YZ2 
St 
S. A. 
24 
2. 242 
Z2326 2 
2 23223 3. 
2 RYale, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
E 
AS 
A 
 
  
a\) N.2 2 
 
 
NEN 
As 
Z72e222 or 
(21.96 
zcs. 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DENNIS B. PIPER, OF KEENE, NEW HAMPSHIRE, ASSIGNOR TO THE VICTOR 
WRINGER COMPANY. 
COTHES-W RINGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,514, dated October 24, 1882. 
Application filed September 2, 1882. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DENNIS B. PIPER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Keene, in 
the county of Cheshire and State of New 
Hampshire, have invented a new and useful 
Clothes-Wringer, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my in 
proved wringing-lachine. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
sectional view taken longitudinally through 
the rollers. Fig. 3 is a vertical cross section, 
and Fig. 4 is a detail view, of the spring fast 
ening device. 
Corresponding parts in the several figures 
are denoted by like letters of reference. 
This invention relates to wringing-machines; 
and it consists ill certain improvements in the 
construction of the same, which will he here 
inafter fully described, and particularly pointed 
out in the claim. 
The frame of my improved clothes-wringer 
consists of two side pieces or castings, A, hav 
ing permanent bearings for the shaft B of the 
lower roller, which is provided with a crank, C. 
The upper ends of the castings A are forked, 
to provide bearings for the boxes D, in which 
the shaft E of the upper roller is journaled. 
F is an elastic bar or brace, placed over the 
upper roller, and resting upon the boxes ID, 
which are provided with upward - projecting 
pins G, passing through holes El in the ends of 
said brace, which is thereby kept in position. 
Brace F serves to support the flat bent springs 
II, the ends of which are provided with holes 
J, fitting over the pins or studs G, which thus 
letain the outer ends of the springs in position. 
K is a bail or staple secured centrally to the 
brace F. 
5 
IC 
IS 
25 
35 
L. L are plates or washers provided on their 
inner sides with flanges M, to accommodate the 
inner bent ends of the springs I, on opposite 
sides of which they ar: placed. Said plates or 
washers are connected by a screw, N, passing 
through the bail or staple K, and thus serve 
to secure the plates L and springs I firmly in 
position. 
Pivoted at the upper forked elds of the side 
pieces or castings, A, are cam-lever's O, Serv 
ing to regulate the tension of the springs I. 
The side pieces or castings, AA, are pro 
vided on their rear sides with brackets P, un 
der which are pivoted bell-crank levers Q, pro 
vided at their lower ends with loose pivote 
clamps R. Set-screws S, mounted in the brack 
ets P, are arranged to operate the levers Q, 
Which form clamps or holder's for securing the 
machine to a wash-tube for operatin. Springs 
T are arranged to force the lower ends of the 
level's Q in an outward and rear ward direction, 
as shown. 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States 
The combination, with the frame, of the ver'- 
tically-sliding boxes D, having up ward - pro 
jecting is G, the rollers, one of which is 
journaled in said boxes D, the brace F, having 
stable IS, the springs I, the plates L., having 
flatges M, the screw N, and the cam-levers O, 
as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
45 
SO 
55 
7 o 
DENNIS B. PIPER 
 
Witnesses: 
R. J. HoLT, 
DON H. WOODWARD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266615.txt	(No Model.) 
D, DRAWBAUGH, 
TELEPHONE TRANSMITTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 266,615, 
Xx 
 
Patented 00t, 31 1882. 
S 
Y 
S 
S S N 
ITNESSES 
C-6.2a. 
2%, 47 24-4-2-1-1 
INVENTOR 
-Zaniel Wrawbaagh. 
'-(2-c/8-ya. Y6a 
ATTORNEYS 
(No Model.) 
No. 266,615, 
D. DRAWBAUGH, 
TELEPHONE TRANSMITTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 31, 1882, 
NS 
 
ITNESSES: 
Ze/e772 
4.Y.6 
z, 
(2% % 76.42% 
N 
s's 
:S 
N. peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR 
- Zarlie Zrawbagh 
'6e?sa, 
ATTORNEY S. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL DRAWBAUGH, OF EBERLY'S MILL PENNSYLVANIA. 
E. LEPHONE-TRANS VITTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,615, dated October 31, 1882. 
Application filed August 9, 1SS2. 
No model.) 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, DANIEL DRAWBAUGH, 
of Eberlys Mill, Cumberland county, Penn 
sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provementin Telephone-Transmitters, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The invention consists in a telephone hav 
ing two diaphragms, inclined to one another, so 
that the line of junction of their edges shall 
bisect the mouth-piece orifice. 
Sound-cham 
bers are formed between these diaphragms and 
the exterior case of the instrument, and be 
tween the two inclined diaphragms arearranged 
series of low conductors, which are put under 
compression simultaneously on opposite sides 
by the vibration of both diaphragms. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of the instrument. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view of the rear of the base, showing the 
lead of the conducting-wires. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse section on line a a of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is 
a partial section on line y y of Fig. 7. Fig. 5 
shows the inner side of one of the diaphragms 
with its attachments. Fig. 6 shows the inte 
rior of the instrument with one of the covers 
and one diaphragm removed. Fig. 7 is a ver 
tical section on the line acac acic of Fig. 1. Fig. 
S shows one of the carbon-holders, brackets, 
and carbons detached; and Fig. 9 represents 
one of the carbon rollers. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts. 
A is he base-board of the instrument. The 
exterior cover consists of the two side pieces, 
BB', top and bottom pieces, C C, and front D. 
In the frent is formed the mouth-piece orifice E. 
The interior case consists of a back piece, F, a 
front piece, G, and the two diaphragms H H'. 
The top and bottom pieces, C C, are shoul 
dered, so that the diaphragms EIH' rest against 
them in inclied position. The front piece, G, 
is suitably shouldered, as shown in Fig. 3, to 
receive the upper edges of the diaphragms, and 
has two inclined sides, which are prolongations 
of the outer surfaces of said diaphragms. It 
should be understood that this front piece, G, 
is used as a Support for the two diaphragms, 
and that I regard the apex of the angle of its 
inclined surfaces as substantially the apex of 
the angle formed by the diaphragms with each 
other; or, in other words, I might omit this 
piece G and cause the diaphragms actually to 
meet along their upper edges without depart 
ing from the invention. Hence, in stating that 
the line extending along the apex of the angle 
formed by the inclined diaphragms bisects the 
mouth-orifice, I mean the line extending along 
- the summit I, Figs. I and 3, of the front piece, 
G, which, it will be seen from Fig. 1, bisects 
the mouth-piece orifice E. 
It will be seen that outside the diaphragms 
H and H', and between them and the side 
pieces or covers BB, two chambers or compart 
ments, JJ, are formed. These I term sound 
receiving chambers, inasmuch as they serve 
the function of receiving and preventing dif 
fusion of the sound-waves uttered in the mouth 
Orifice. 
It will also be apparent that by rea 
Son of the apex of the diaphragms bisecting 
the said orifices the said sound-waves will en 
ter both chambers J J simultaneously, and 
therein will act upon both of the diaphragms 
H. H. at Once, so that both of these diaphragms 
will be caused to approach or recede from each 
Other by the action of the said sound-waves at 
one and the same time. Consequently any ob. 
ject placed between these diaphragms and in 
contact with both of them will thus be subjected 
to compression or extension from two opposite 
sides. 
The diaphragms and other parts thus far de 
scribed make preferably of wood. The inte 
rior mechanism of my device upon which these 
diaphragms act is as follows: 
On the inner side of each diaphragm I at 
tach a wooden block, K. K. To each block I 
affix a series of metal brackets, L. L. L. L. L.' 
L, the brackets Lu, L, and L being on block 
K and the brackets L', L, and LP being dis 
posed opposite them on the block K. One of 
these brackets is shown detached in Fig. 8. 
Each bracket contains a prism-shaped piece 
of carbon, M, M', M', M', MI, and Mi, and in 
sulating material N, Fig. S, is placed between 
the Said piece of carbon and the ends of the 
bracket. As is clearly shown in Figs, 3 and 
7, these carbons do not come in contact, there 
being an air-space left between then. Rest 
ing against the opposite inclined sides of each 
carbon is a carbon roller, O O". O', shown 
separately in Fig. 9. From this construction 
it will be evident that when the diaphragms 
H and H' are caused to approach each other 
by sound-waves acting upon them they will 
cause a compression of the rollers O O'O' be 
tween the carbons M M M M9 M4 M5, and the 
degree of this compression will depend upon 
the amount of movement of the diaphragins, 
55 
75 
9 O 
IOO 
 
266,615 
O 
and as this movement is caused by sound 
waves the compression of the carbons will be 
in proportion thereto, and hence the resist 
ance offered by said carbons to the passage of 
an electric current through them will be cor 
respondingly modified, rendering said current 
undulatory and capable of transmitting the 
characteristics of vocal speech, so that a suit 
able receiving-instrument may reproduce the 
Sale. 
The mechanism for conducting the current 
through the carbons and to the line is as fol 
lows: 
P P. P. are: binding-posts, communicating 
with the switch-levers Q Q Q, which levers 
can be moved into and out of contact with the 
contact-points R. R. R. A battery-current 
entering at the post P proceeds through the 
switch-lever Q to the contact-point R, and 
thence by wire a, Fig. 2, to contact-piece b. On 
the diaphragm B' is a contact-piece, c, which, 
when said diaphragm is in place, comes in con 
tact with the piece b, so that the current passes 
from piece b to piece c, and then proceeds by 
the wired, Fig. 5, to the bracket L and carbon 
M, thence through the carbon roller O to carbon 
M' and bracket L', and then through the pri 
mary wire of the induction-coil T. The pri. 
mary wire of said coil extends from the coil, as 
shown at e, Fig. 6, to a wire shown at U, Fig. 4, 
and this wire connects with the spring-lever W. 
Returning now to the binding-posts PPP', 
another current or branch current of electricity 
enters at the post P', passes by the lever Q 
to the contact-point R', and thence by wire a 
to contact-piece b', then to the contact-piece c' 
on diaphragm H', Fig. 5, then to the carbons 
M? O M8, then to the primary of induction 
coil T", and then by the wire e' to the wire U 
and spring-lever V. Similarly another cur 
rent or branch current enters at the post P 
and proceeds by lever Q, contact-point R*, 
wire a, contact-piece l', contact-piece c, car 
bons M! O' M, primary of induction-coil T, 
wire e, to wire U and spring-lever V. Thus, 
it will be seen, each current traverses a sep 
arate set of carbons and the primary of a sep 
arate induction-coil, and that the three cur 
rents are then united upon the wire U and 
conducted to the spring-lever V. The lever 
V is secured at one end by the screw W, Fig. 
4. Near its free end it is provided with a pro 
jecting piece, X, which extends through the 
case, as more plainly shown in Fig. 6. To 
the case is attached a hook, Y. Inside the 
case is secured the contact-piece Z, one end of 
which is beneath the free end of the lever V, 
so that normally there is contact between the 
lever V and piece Z, and the current passing 
from the former to the latter proceeds by the 
wire?, Figs. 4 and 5, to the binding-post P, 
and thence the circuit is completed to the bat 
tery, as shown in Fig. 1. The arrows in this 
figure indicate the path of the current leav 
ing and returning to the battery. When it is 
desired to break this current, and so throw the 
instrument out of operation, a receiving-tele 
I do not claim herein the particular arrange- 95 
phone or other object may be hung upon the 
hook Y, so as to push up or in the piece X, thus 
forcing the lever V and piece Z out of contact. 7o 
The secondary wires g g of the coil T are 
united with the binding-posts 1 2. 
To the 
same posts are led the secondary wires of the 
coils T and T. These posts 1 2 communi 
cate by the wires h. ht, Fig. 2, with the bind- 75 
ing-posts 3 4, one of which posts communi 
cates with earth, the other to the main line, 
as shown in Fig. 1. Leading from the posts 
3 4 are two wires, i i", Fig. 2, which commu 
nicate respectively with a receiving-instru- 8o 
ment, as indicated in Fig. 1. 
The operation of the instrument will now 
be readily understood. Sound - waves enter 
ing the mouth-orifice E simultaneously affect 
the two diaphragms H. H', and these in turn 85 
act on both sides of the series of carbons be 
tween them. As each set of carbons is trav 
ersed by an independent current, all three 
currents are thus simultaneously modified in 
the same way, thus greatly augmenting the 9o 
effect caused in an instrument containing but 
oue set of carbons, and rendering the instru 
ment much more sensitive or more efficient in 
its capability of transmitting speech. 
- 
ment of each set of carbons here shown, these 
features being the subject of another appli 
cation now pending. Neither do I broadly 
claim herein a series of sets of carbons affected 
by a single diaphragm; but, 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim as new and original is- 
1. In a telephone, the combination of a 
mouth-piece and its orifice, and two diaphragms 
relatively inclined to one another so that the Io5 
line of junction of their edges or the line ex 
tending along the apex of the angle formed 
by the inclined diaphragms shall bisect the 
orifice of the mouth-piece, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. A telephone having a mouth - piece and 
mouth-piece orifice and two diaphragms rela 
tively inclined to one another so that the line 
of junction of their edges or the line extend 
ing along the apex of the angle formed by 115 
the inclined diaphragms shall bisect the orifice 
of the mouth-piece, in combination with two 
sound-receiving chambers formed between the 
diaphragms and the exterior case, each cham 
ber communicating with the same mouth-piece I2O 
orifice, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the single mouth-piece 
Orifice with the two diaphragms and the ex 
terior sound - chambers, as herein described, 
and with a series of low conductors arranged 125 
between the two diaphragms aud connected 
to each diaphragm so as to be put under com 
pression simultaneously on opposite sides by 
the vibration of both diaphragms, substantially 
as described. 
DANIEL DRAWBAUGEI. 
Ico 
. 
. 
IO 
Witnesses: 
D. BENJAMIN, 
M. F. BURNS, 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266715.txt	(No Model.) 
H. NIEHOFF, 
PORTABLE MUSIC STAND. 
No. 266,715, 
Patented Oct, 31, 1882, 
af 
 
as 
y 
A.' 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
E. 
B 
ArroRNEY 
ga 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY NIEHOFF, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PORTABLE MUSIC-STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,715, dated October 31, 1882. 
Application filed March 16, 1882. 
(No model.) 
35 
4.O 
45 
per end of the extension-rod A' carries the 
folding music-rack B. 
When the music-stand is to be used without 
the legs the standard A is applied by bracket 
arms E, having bent ends, to the side sockets, 
d, of the standard A, and to sockets g at the 
sides of U-shaped clamp-pieces E', which are 
secured by set-screws g either to the piano, 
bench, table, or other suitable point of Sup 
port, one of the sockets, g, of the clamps being 
at right angles to the others, so that the clan p 
pieces can be used horizontally or vertically, 
as required. In this manner the stand may be 
used with equal facility at indoor and outdoor 
Occasions, it being adapted for application to 
any support not liable to be blown down by 
wind, and very conveniently carried, as it can 
be folded up, after use, into a smail and easily 
Ehandled package. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
The combination of a music-stand having a 
standard, A, with fixed side sockets, dd, Sup 
porting bracket-arms E, having bent ends, and 
clamp-pieces E', having sockets g g and set 
screws g', substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
invention I have signed my name in the pres 
ence of two subscribing Witnesses. 
HENRY NIELIOFF. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
CARL KARP. 
To all chon it may concern : 
Be it known that I, HENRY NIEHOFF, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
yepted certain new and useful Improvements 
in Portable Music-Stands, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention has reference to an improved 
portable music-stand which can be attached on 
removing the legs, to a piano, railing, bench, 
or other suitable support, and which can, after 
use, be folded away into a very small and com 
pact space; and the invention consists of a 
music-stand made of a standard with detach 
able legs and a folding rack, said standard 
having sockets for attaching the ends of brack 
et-arms, the outer ends of which are provided 
with detachable clamp-pieces, whereby the en 
tire stand may be attached to any suitable 
point of support. 
| 
In the accompanying drawings, Eigure rep 
resents a perspective view of my improved 
music-stand, shown in position for use as a 
common stand; and Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view, shown as applied without legs to a piano 
or other suitable support. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A represents the hollow standard of my im 
proved music-stand, which is provided at the 
lower end with sockets and detachable legs in 
the usual manner. The tubular standard A is 
provided at one or more points with side sock 
ets, d, and at the upper end with a clamp-screw, 
e, for Securing the extension-rod A'. The up 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266815.txt	(No Model.) 
H. HARRIS. 
EASEL. 
No. 266,815, 
Patented 00t, 31 l882. 
npeters. Photo-uthcgraphor. Washingto: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE HARRIS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
EASEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,815, dated October 31, 1882. 
Application filed August 11, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EIORACE HARRIs, of 
New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Easels, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
easels made from wire for holding pictures, 
palettes, shells, or other articles, and they may 
be provided with an expansive feature for 
holding pictures, &c., of different sizes; also, 
they may be converted into frames for holding 
pictures, &c., to be hung on the wall, and they 
are made adjustable also, that they may stand 
at different angles relatively to a shelf or 
table on which they are placed ; and the in 
Vention consists in the devices substantially 
as hereinafter set forth. 
Figures 1 and 2 are a front and side eleva 
tion of an easel having one form I adopt. Figs. 
3 and 4 are a front and side elevation of an 
easel having doublings in the standard, pro 
viding for adjusting it to pictures of different 
sizes, and doublings over and forward in the 
to) of the frame, or portions thereof, to engage 
the top of a picture. Figs. 5 and 6 are sub 
Stantially the same, and showing a loop on 
the top of the frame, by which the easel may 
be hung on a wall; and Fig. 7 shows an easel 
with the support bent up back, and forming a 
contact with the standard, leaving the whole 
in condition by the loop B to be hung on a 
Wall. 
One feature of my invention found in all 
the modifications is that the support for the 
Standard is formed by the connecting portions 
lbeing bent out and back from the lower end 
of the standard. My easels will usually be 
made from one piece of wire, but not neces 
sarily so, for two or more may be used and the 
Sane principles he carried out. 
In Figs, 1 and 2 the easel frame or standard 
A is made from one piece of wire bent together 
at B, forming two side sections, C. These, as 
here showu, have no doublings in the wire to 
provide for extending the length for pictures, 
&c., of different sizes. In this and if all the 
forms and variations there are bends D, to 
form rests for the picture, &c., and below these 
rests the sections of the wire, at the point I, 
are bent back to form the brace-support E for 
s 
 
the standard. The ends of the support or 
separate sections may be united, as at F, or 
be made to extend back nearly parallel and 
be united by an end bar, or otherwise. The 
wires admit of being bent at I to give more or 
less inclination, as desired, to the frame. 
Figs. 3 and 4 show the ease with the parts 
as above stated, but having the top of the 
standard, or portions thereof, bent over and 
forward to form holders G to engage the top 
of the picture H, &c. When these holders are 
used there will ordinarily be doublings Kin 
the sections of the standard, which will be of 
use in allowing them to be extended or con 
tracted to meet pictures, &c., of different sizes. 
Figs. 5, 6, and 7 show how the easel may be 
converted into a frame to be hung on the wall. 
In this order the bend B forms a loop for 
hanging it up. The support E is bent at I 
up back against the standard, or hooks into 
it, and is out of the way for hanging up. (See 
Fig. 7.) 
Other forms of general construction will be 
readily suggested, and be embraced in my in 
vention under the special features herein set 
forth. 
Any variety of wire may be used, either 
plain or covered, as with celluloid, cloth, or 
other material; and the wire may be flattened, 
or flat strips of metal may be used, con 
forming to the general order of construction 
herein set forth, and be within the design and 
provision of my invention. 
I claim 
1. The easel having the frame or standard 
A with the rests D, and supported by por 
tions E of sail frame bent back from the lower 
end thereof, constructed and arranged sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination of the support E and 
standard A, said standard being provided with 
the rests D, doublings K, holders G, and loop 
B, and said support being adapted to be bent 
up at I to connect with the standard, to allow 
the easel-frame to be hung on the wall, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
HORACE IARRIs. 
Witnesses: 
I. W. CONSELYEA, 
R. S. STEADMAN. 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
9 O 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US266915.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
H. C. F. STORMER, 
APPARATUS FOR THE RECOVERY OF SODA 
No. 266,915. 
Patented 0ct, 31, 1882. 
N 
 
 
Kes 
8.2% 4. 
2. Zafaz, s 24, tes 
 
 
 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HENRIK C. F. STORMER, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
APPARATUS FOR THE RECOVERY OF SODA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 266,915, dated October 31, 1882. 
Application filed March 24, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
95 
- 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRIKC. F. STRMER, 
a citizen of the Kingdom of Norway, residing 
at the city of Paris, in the Department of Seine 
and Republic of France, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Appa 
ratus for Recovering the Soda and other Lyes 
Used in the Manufacture of Wood and Straw 
Pulp; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
cou]panying drawing, which forms a part of 
this specification. 
In treating wood fiber, straw, corn-husks, 
Spanish grass, and other materials capable 
of forming pulps for the manufacture of pa 
per, soda or potash is used, in a manner well 
known, to make the pulp of homogeneous con 
sistency, the lye being afterward washed out 
and drawn off from the mass of pulp, as it 
would operate to deteriorate the quality of 
paper or board made from the pulp. The ob 
25 ject of my invention is to recover the soda or 
potash used in the lye in a calcined state, so 
that it may be used over and over again in 
the treatment of successive batches of pulp, 
thus effecting a great saving in the manufac 
ture of the pulp by reducing the actual loss or 
Waste of lye to a minimum. 
which repre 
sents an elevation of the complete apparatus, 
B denotes a boiler, which may be of any de 
sired construction or shape, and is heated by 
a reverberatory furnace, A, of suitable con 
Struction. 
B' is the steam dome or drum, from which 
a steam-pipe, C, leads to a second boiler, D, 
which has likewise a steam-dome, D', from 
which a steam-pipe, E, leads to a third boiler, 
F, having a steam-dome, F. A fourth and 
fifth boiler may be used, if desired; but, as a 
rule, a series of three boilers, only the first one 
of which is set over a furnace, will be found 
sufficient. 
The black lye, as it is called, which has 
been washed from the pulp, and contains par 
ticles of wood, straw, or other pulp fiber in a 
In the accompanying drawing, 
B through a pipe, M, the flow being regulated 
by a faucet or stop-valve, n. 
In this boiler 
the water contained in the lye is partly evap 
orated, and passes as steam through pipe C 
into the second boiler, D, the concentrated 
lye entering the same boiler through pipe N, 
which has a valve, n. In boiler D the lye is 
further concentrated by further evaporation 
by the heat of the steam in the boiler, the 
volume of steam passing through pipe E into 
the third boiler, F, in the series, while the 
concentrated lye enters boiler F through the 
pipe N, which is provided with valve m'. 
Here further concentration of the lye takes 
place, the steam engendered in this boiler, as 
well as the heating-steam carried into it from 
boilers B and D, finally escaping through the 
outlet or blow-off pipe G. From this boiler, 
in which the lye has assumed a highly-con 
centrated state, containing a minimum of Wa 
ter, it is carried by a pipe, O, back into the 
reverberatory furnace A, where the impurities 
contained in the lye are reduced to ashes, 
while the soda or potash is calcined by the 
heat and ready for use, after cooling, in the 
treatment of another batch of pulp. 
By the combination and arrangement of a 
series of boilers or evaporators in the manner 
herein described I avoid a high pressure in 
any on 3 of the boilers, besides utilizing the 
heat of the steam of evaporation to its fullest 
extent, the steam, as it escapes from the last 
boiler in the series, being comparatively cold 
or dead steam. The concentration of the lye 
takes place successively and by degrees, thus 
avoiding incrustation of the boilers or pipes, 
while the reverberatory furnace A serves the 
double purpose of raising steam from the black 
lye in the initial boiler B and calcining the 
soda in the highly-concentrated lye. fed to it 
through pipe O. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
The herein-described apparatus for recover 
ing soda and other lyes used in the manufac 
ture of wood pulp, straw pulp, and other fiber 
pulps for paper-manufacture, the same consist 
ing of a set or series of boilers, B D F, coln 
35 
40 
45 
- 
5o finely comminuted state, is fed to the boiler nected by steam-pipes C and E, and having loo 
2 
266,955 
- 
escape-pipe G, in combination with the rever- 
beratory furnace A, feed-pipe M, connecting- my signature in presence of two Witnesses. 
pipes N and N', and pipe O, for returning the 
ORMER 
concentrated ye from the ist boiler in the se- 
HENRIK CHRISTIAN EREDRIKSTORMER, 
5 ries to the reverberatory furnace under the 
first, substantially as and for the purpose here- 
in shown and set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereto affixed 
Witnesses: 
L. GUDMAN, 
ROBT. M., HOOPER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267016.txt	(No Model.) 
F. PRINZ. 
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF FLOUR, 
Patented Nov. 7, 1882. 
is us - - -----, 
No. 267,016, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
ear 
w 
w 
t 
 
WNV tSS$ 4. 
&vierz ? 
s, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FAUSTIN PRINZ, OF ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA. 
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF FOUR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,016, dated November 7, 1882, 
Application filed December 16, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FAUSTIN PRINZ, a sub 
ject of the Eniperor of Germany, and a resi 
dent of St. Paul, in the county of Ramsey and 
State of Minnesota, have invented a certain 
new and useful Process for the Manufacture of 
Flour, set forth in the annexed specification. 
This invention relates to the method of man 
ufacturing flour known as the gradual-re 
duction process;' and it consists in the process 
comprising the several steps hereinafter par 
ticularly described, and then sought to be spe 
'cifically defined by the claims. 
For the purpose of illustrating this process 
I have shown in Figure 1 in the drawings an 
outline representation of the rolls and bolts as 
used in a gradual-reduction mill where four 
. (4) reductions are made, aid in Fig. 2 an out 
line-section of a portion of a pair of rolls hav 
ing the smooth surface. 
In the gradual-reduction process the wheat 
passes from the bin A to the first set of rolls, 
B, through which it passes and is merely 
cracked or split to permit the germ and some 
loose middlings and bran to escape, and the 
product carried, as indicated by dotted lines 
a, to the first scalping-reel, C, to separate the 
germ, coarser middlings, and bran, and the 
coarser particles, consisting of the loose germ, 
middlings, and bran, carried to an 'aspirator, 
while the tailings (by which I mean the clean 
cracked wheat and coarse middlings, separated 
from the dust, fine middlings, and bran) are 
returned to the second set of rolls, D, as indi 
cated by dotted lines b, and so on through the 
remaining rolls, E. F., and bolts. G H I, as in 
dicated by dotted lines cd e, all the said rolls, 
after the first set, being fluted or furrowed, as 
heretofore. 
As before stated, the first reduction is merely 
intended to crack or split the berries of the 
wheat, and has heretofore been accomplished 
by furrowed rolls; but these have a tendency 
to cut the wheat up into too small particles, 
and also to cut the bran; and to avoid these 
objections I use smooth-surfaced rolls at the 
first reduction, set far enough apart to Crack 
or split the berries and loosen the interior 
structure, but without cutting the bran or 
crushing the germ. This action also prepares 
the wheat in better shape for the further re 
- 
ductions, so that a less number of rolls will be 
required to produce the same grades of flour 
than in the old method. The smooth rolls also 
require less power to drive them than the 
scratched or fluted rolls, and as the first re 
duction always requires more power than the 
after reductions I can thus do the same work 
with less power or more work with the same 
power. 
...Any number of sets of rolls may be used; 
but I have found by experiment that with my 
process four (4) sets of rolls will do the work 
of five (5) in the furrowed form. After the 
cracked wheat leaves the rolls B, and before 
it is passed through the scalping-reel C it 
may be passed through a brushing-machine, 
K, to more thoroughly separate the loosened 
particles, if desired. 
What I claim as new is 
1. The process herein described for reducing 
wheat to flour, consisting in first cracking the 
wheat by passing it between smooth-surfaced 
rolls set far enough apart to merely crack the 
wheat without crushing the germ ; secondly, 
in separating the germ, coarser middlings, and 
bran by passing the product of the first step 
through suitable bolts or screens; and, thirdly, 
in cracking or crushing the cleaned wheat and 
coarse middlings of the second step by pass 
ing them between corrugated rolls, as set forth. 
2. The process herein described for reducing 
wheat to flour, consisting, first, in cracking the 
wheat by passing it between smooth-surfaced 
rolls set far enough apart to merely crack the 
wheat without crushing the germ or cutting 
the bran; next, in separating the germ, coarse 
middlings, and bran by passing the product 
of the first step through a brushing or rubbing 
machine, and afterward through suitable bolts 
or screens, and then cracking the cleaned 
wheat and coarse middlings of the Second step 
by passing them between corrugated rolls, as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
neSSeS. 
FAUSTIN PRINZ. 
Witnesses: 
C. N. WooDWARD, 
EDWARD ROTERT. 
25, 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267116.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 267,ll 6. 
M, W, SMITH, 
FURNACE FOR MELTING GLASS, &c, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 7, 1882. 
 
SN 
, 
2 4 
% 
 
 
 
 
 
ea 
e 
2 
2 2 C. 
2 se gzR 
C 
2 Hz 22 
22 
S 2 
2 
2. 
4 2 2. 
S 
S 
K . 
- 
A. 
. 
. 
. 
As 
& 
s 
s 
, 
5 
  
IWWEWTOR 
Zez, 14.4 
Attorney 
% 
% 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
2 
 
WITYESSEs 
24/ 6/2-44/ 
 
(No Model.) 
w 
M. W. SMITH, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
FURNACE FOR MELTING GLASS, &c, 
No. 267,116. 
Patented Nov. 7, 1882, 
  
 
 
 
 
 
% 
2 
AITWESSES 
r 
IWVEWTOR 
at 
C % w 
W 
Attorney. 
(No Model.) 
No. 267,116. 
M, W, SMITH, 
FURNACE FOR MELTING CLASS, &c, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Now, 7, 1882, 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
WITWESSES 
c4/  7744, 
?ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ?I-Ezzzzz 
S222 
SZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
N 
0 
No.zzz!!!! 
222 
a 
ea 
2ZZZZZN 
saaSaaSasas 
SMS 
IWVEW TOR 
2.73% 
Attorney 
N.'pet ERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN V. SMITH, OF TYRONE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FURNACE FOR MELTING GLASS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,116, dated November 7, 1882. 
Application filed September 9, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARTIN V. SMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ty 
rone, in the county of Blair and State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Furnaces for Melting Glass 
and other Purposes; and I do declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal sectional 
view. Fig. 2 is a plan view, partly in section, 
of the gas and air flues. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
sectional view at right angles to Fig. 1. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
furnaces for melting glass or metal, and for 
melting or heating other substances requiring 
an intense heat; and it consists in placing the 
regenerators above the ground or floor level. 
It consists, further, in extending the checker 
work of the air-flues up above the point at 
which the gas enters the melting-tank or com 
bustion-chamber. 
My invention consists, further, in the ar 
rangements of the regenerators, so that the 
roof of the furnace will form the covering for 
the checker-work, thus dispensing with a sepa 
rate arch for inclosing the same. 
My invention consists, further, in forming 
the gas-ports by placing tiles over the gas 
checker-work, the ends of the tiles resting on 
the side walls of the gas-flue, the inner wall of 
which is provided with orifices or openings, 
which enter the melting-tank or combustion 
chamber. 
It consists, further, in placing the valves 
which control the gas and air currents on the 
floor-level and at the opposite side or rear of 
the furnace to that occupied by the workmen, 
which will obviate the intense heat to which 
the workmen are ordinarily exposed when the 
valves are under the floor. 
It consists, also, in having the gas and air 
supply pipes to enter through the valves to 
the flues leading to the regenerators in a ver. 
tical line. 
6o 
Referring to the drawings, A indicates the 
melting-tank, which may be of the ordinary 
or any other convenient or desirable form, 
constructed of metal or other suitable support 
ing-base lined with fire-brick or other refrac. 55 
tory material. The melting-tank is supported 
by ally suitable number of piers a. a, so as to 
admit of a free circulation of air thereunder 
to keep it cool and prevent in a measure the 
rapid disintegration of the same by heat. 
The regenerators B B and B B', of which 
the former, BB, are for the gas and the latter, 
B' B', for air, are arranged in pairs at each 
end of the combustion-chamber, and are lo 
cated above or on the floor-level and embraced 65 
or covered by the same roof or arch which cov 
ers the melting-tank or combustion-chamber. 
The regenerators are composed of the ordi 
nary checker-work of fire-brick, arranged in 
the ordinary manner, the brick which compose to 
the checker-work being preferably beveled on 
their upper edges, so as to prevent the lodg 
ment of Soot and ashes, and the consequent 
stopping up or choking of the regenerators. 
The regenerators may vary in size, the smaller 75 
being for the passage of the gas and the larger 
for that of air, their proportions varying to 
correspond to the quantity of air and gas re 
quired to insure complete combustion in the 
melting-chamber. The regenerator-walls are 8o 
or may be made of fire-brick or other refactory 
material, and are made gas-tight, so that no 
leakage may take place from one chamber to 
the other. The checker-work of the air-regen 
erators extends up to or nearly to the arch of 85 
the combustion-chamber, thus greatly increas 
ing the superficial area of the fire-brick com 
posing the checker-work, and consequently in 
creasing the heating capacity, so that when 
the direction of the gas and air is reversed, as 90 
is common in this class of furnaces, the air will 
be more perfectly heated and a better combus 
tion effected; and, furthermore, by extending 
the checker-work of the air-fues above the 
point of entrance of the gas the air is caused 95 
to enter the furnace above the gas, and by rea 
son of the superior specific gravity of the air 
and the inclined construction or arrangement 
of the arch of the furnace tends to sink or be 
deflected through the gas, which enters the Ico 
25 
35 
Mo 
45 
So 
 
267, 6 
melting or combustion chamber in a horizontal 
direction, so that the air and gases become 
thoroughly intermixed and complete combus 
tion is effected. 
As before intimated, the regenerators are 
placed above ground and on a level with the 
floor and under cover of the arch or roof of the 
melting-tank or combustion-chamber. The ad 
Vantages of this construction are obvious 
first, the expense and labor of constructing 
separate arches for the regenerators are dis 
pensed with ; second, the furnace is made more 
compact, and of course does not occupy so 
much space; third, the heat from the regener 
ators is confined within the walls of the melt 
ing-furnace or combustion-chamber, and not 
distributed through the floor of the works to 
the annoyance and discomfiture of the work 
le 
The inner Walls of the gas-generators are pro 
vided with openings b at their upper ends, and 
fire-proof tiles b are laid from the division 
Walls between the gas and air compartments, 
which form openings in a horizontal plane for 
the entrance of gas into the melting or com 
bustion chamber, and bring the point of com 
bustion forward and nearer to the material to 
be acted upon, thereby avoiding any loss of 
heat. 
The valves C and C, for controlling the ad 
mission of gas and air to the furnace, are located 
at the opposite side or to the rear of the work 
ing-face of the furnace, and as they are on a 
level with the floor of the furnace will prevent 
the intense heat heretofore referred to from in 
terfering with the operations of the workmen. 
As heretofore constructed the gas and air 
ports and valves for controlling the flow of gas 
and air have been placed below the furnace 
level and the supply of gas and air introduced 
in a horizontal line, while, on the other hand, I 
introduce the gas and air through vertical 
pipes D D, which obviates the settling of soot 
and ashes, so as to interfere with the operations 
of the valves. 
The gas and air supply pipes are provided 
with valves E. E., operated by weighted levers 
F, which facilitate the operations of supplying 
the products of combustion to the furnace or 
combustion-chamber. 
The valves C C are of the ordinary construc 
tion, and need no further mention in this con 
nection. 
The operation of my furnace is much the 
same as others of this class; but for the pur 
pose of making it more clear I will describe 
the mode of operation. 
On first lighting the fires of the furnace the 
gas passes through the valves and flues into 
the bottom of the regenerator-chamber B, while 
the air enters through corresponding valves 
and flues into the chamber B. 
The currents 
of gas and air both rise separately through the 
chamber B and B and pass up into the melt 
ing or combustion chamber, where they meet 
and are ignited, producing a moderate heat. 
The products of combustion pass over through 
a similar set of flues at the other end of the 
furnace into the regenerators B and B, and 
thence through properly-constructed flues and 
valves to the chimney-flue, (not shown, but of 
the ordinary construction.) The waste heat is 
thus deposited in the upper courses or check 
ers of open fire-brick, heating them up to about 
the temperature of the products of combustion. 
After a suitable intervalhas elapsed the valves 
C and C, through which the air and gas 
are admitted to the furnace, are reversed and 
caused to enter through the regenerators, 
which have just been heated by the waste pro 
ducts of combustion, and in passing up through , 
the checker-work they become heated, and 
then, on meeting as they enter into the melt 
ing or combustion chamber A, they produce a 
very high degree of heat, and thus an accumu 
lation of heat is obtained step by step by al 
ternately reversing the direction of the gas 
and air currents until the desired heat is at 
tained, while the heat is thoroughly abstract 
ed from the products of combustion by the re 
generators, so that but little or no heat is al 
lowed to go to Waste. 
In the manufacture of glass the advantages 
of my furnace are obvious, the principal one 
being that the glass is pure and free from soot 
and smoke and a better quality produced. 
I do not wish to be understood as limiting 
myself in the use of my furnace to glass-manu 
facture alone, as it is obvious that it is well 
adapted for all metallurgical operations. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a furnace for melting glass, or for melt 
ing or heating other substances, the combina 
tion of a melting-tank with the gas and air 
heating devices, substantially such as de 
scribed, located above the ground or on the 
floor-level of the furnace and in juxtaposition 
to said melting-furnace, as set forth. 
2. In a furnace for melting glass or metal, 
the checker-work of the air-heating compart 
ment arranged S0 as to extend above the point 
at which the gas enters the combustion or 
melting chamber, as set forth. 
3. In a furnace for melting glass or metal, 
the combination of the melting-tank with re 
generators arranged at each end thereof in 
close proximity thereto, and all inclosed with 
in or under a common roof or arch, whereby 
the construction of separate arches for the re 
generators are dispensed with, as set forth. 
4. In a furnace for melting glass or metal, 
the combination of the openings b in the walls 
of the melting-tank with the slat b' for cover 
ing the checker-work of the gas-regenerator, 
whereby the gas is directed into the melting 
or combustion chamber in a horizontal line 
and direct from the regenerator, as set forth. 
5. In a regenerator-furnace for melting glass 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I25 
5 
O 
25 
35 
4O 
45 
50 
65 
267, 16 
3 
or metal, the valves for controlling the direc- with weighted levers to facilitate the opera- Io 
tion of the air and gas, located within vertition of said valves, as set forth. 
cal supply-pipes on or above the floor-level and 
to the rear of the Working-face of the furnace, presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
5 for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a regenerative furnace for melting glass 
or metal, the valves for controlling the in- 
gress of air and gas to the regenerators, locat- 
ed within vertical supply-pipes, and provided 
MARTIN V. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
WM. KENT, 
M. P. CANFIELD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267216.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 267,216. 
 
C. W. JONES. 
CARPET STRETCHER, 
Patented Nov. 7, 1882. 
Peters, Photo-Lithographer washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
CHARLES W. JONES, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS, 
CARPET-STRETCHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,216, dated November 7, 1882. 
Application filed September 26, 1882. (No model.). 
O 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES W. JoNES, of 
Lowell, in the county of Middlesex and State 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Carpet-Stretchers, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This invention consists in a carpet-stretcher 
(if novel construction, which not only provides 
for stretching the carpet, but for holding it 
while being tacked to the floor, and which is op 
erated in a very easy manner by a sure and posi 
tive gear movement, also which comprises a 
novel anchoring device and a swiveling stretch 
ing-head capable of being set at different angles, 
to workinjogs or curved spaces of a room and in 
narrow places, the whole forming a light, sim 
ple, and durable device which may readily be 
operated by a single person. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure represents a view in perspective of 
my improved carpet-stretcher, and Fig. 2 an 
end view of the stretching-head with wire card 
ing applied to its under surface. 
A represents the stretching-head, which may 
consist of a narrow strip of wood of any de 
sired length, and which is faced on its under 
side with wire carding, b, to grip or hold upon 
the carpet. Said head, or a plate, c, thereon, 
forming part of the head, is pivoted interme 
diately of its length, as at d, to the outer end 
of a bar, B, having a rack, e, along and within 
the one side of it. This attachment of the 
head A provides for swiveling it horizontally 
on or under the end of the rack-bar B. Said 
rack-baris fitted to slide longitudinally through 
a saddle or guide, C, which is mounted on the 
forward end of the base or floor board D. Ein 
gaging with the rack e of the bar B is a pinion, 
E, the pivot of which has its bearing in the 
guide C, and may be operated by a crank or 
hand-wheel, F, (shown by dotted lines in Fig. 
1,) to work the rack-bar B in or out. 
Connected in a free manner, by a loosely 
fitted link, f, to the forward end of the guide C is 
a vertically-bent anchoring-arm, G, which ter 
minates at its outer end in a downwardly-pro 
jecting sharp tooth, g. If desired, there may 
be two or more of such arms, and instead of 
55 
6 o 
being attached to the guide C, they may be 
directly attached to the floor-board or plate D. 
His a pawl, pivoted to the floor-board D, and 
controlled by a spring, h, so as to engage with 
or be held disengaged from a rack, i, having 
ratchet-shaped teeth and arranged along the 
outside of the rack-bar B. When the pawl is 
engaged with the rack-bar the said bar is re 
strained from moving back. The head or outer 
end of the rack-bar B is provided with a series 
of locking-projections, k, between any of which 
a stop, l, jointed to the plate c of the head A, 
is free to enter or engage for the purpose of 65 
holding the head A in any position in which 
it may be swiveled or adjusted on its pivot d. 
To use the stretcher, the stretching-head A is 
run back as far as it will go by turning the 
pinion E through the wheel F, after which the 
tooth g of the arm G is driven into the floor 
close to the mop-board, a single light blow 
being sufficient to secure its hold in the floor. 
This anchors the whole device and puts it in 
position ready for operation. 
To stretch the carpet, the pinion E is turned 
to work the rack-bar Band its attached stretch 
ing-head A outward, and after the carpet has 
been sufficiently stretched the pawl H is put 
into engagement with the rack i on the exten 
sible bar B, which prevents the stretching 
head from being drawn back. The carpet is 
then tacked down the length of the stretching 
head, after which the anchoring-arm G is 
slightly raised to relieve the tooth g of its hold 
on the floor, the pawl H released from the rack 
i, the stretching-head A drawn back, and the 
whole device moved along the floor the length 
of the stretching-head, when or after which the 
apparatus is anchored again and operated as 
before to produce another stretching action 
on the carpet, and so on until the whole car. 
pet is stretched and secured. 
To release the tooth g of the arm G from its 
hold on the floor it is only necessary to put one 
end of the tack-hammer or its handle under 
said arm, near its tooth, and pry or lift the 
tooth out of the floor. Said tooth 9, being very 
small and fine at its point, makes but a little 
larger hole in the floor than does a tack, and 
the arm G, being curved vertically, gives plenty 
of room to turn the edge of the carpet under it. 
The device can be used in any space which 
is within the compass of the stretching-head, 
95 
Od 
25 
35 
45 
So 
- 
2 
and will be found very convenient where there 
are jogs in a room, or in narrow hallways and 
places; also in stretching a carpet to fit the 
corners of a room. By the swiveling connec 
tion of the stretching-head, too, the device will 
be found very serviceable in stretching car 
pets to fit the space left by bay-windows in a 
room, or other angular or curved spaces. 
Instead of the pinion E being arranged to 
rotate about a vertical axis, it might be dis 
posed to have a horizontal one and the rack 
e be arranged along the bottom of the bar B; 
or in some cases a lever mechanism might be 
substituted for the rack and pinion; also, vari 
ous other devices than the pawl El and rack i 
might be used for locking the bar B and its 
attached stretching-head when extended; but 
I prefer the combinatlon and arrangement of 
parts which are here shown and described. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a carpet-stretcher, the combination, 
with a base or floor board, D, an extensible 
stretching-head A, and mechanism connecting 
said head with said board for operating the 
head, of one or more anchoring-arms, G, hav 
ing teeth g, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
5 
TO 
25 
'', 262,216 
. 
2. The combination, with the floor-board D, 
the bar B, and mechanism for working said bar 
in or out, of the stretching-head A, pivoted in 
termediately of its length to said bar, whereby 
it may be swiveled or adjusted to occupy dif 
ferent angular positions relatively to or across 
said bar, essentially as and for the purpose 
described. 
3. In combination with the extensible bar 
B and swiveling stretching-head A, of the 
locking-stop l, arranged to engage with notches 
or between teeth on said bar, substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
4. The sliding rack-bar B, in combination 
with the pinion E, engaging there with, the 
base or floor board D, and the stretching-head 
A, essentially as shown and described. 
5. The combination of the holding-pawl Fi 
with the rack-bar B, the floor-board D, mech 
anism for operating said bar in or out, and the 
stretching-head A, substantially as specified. 
CHARLEs W. JONES. 
. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
AZRO M. DOWS, 
CHARLES NAYLOR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267316.txt	(N0 Model.) 
No. 267,316, 
 
A, Q, ALLIS, 
MATTRESS 
Patented Nov. 14, 1882, 
Fig. l. 
ATTEST: 
INVENTOR; 
6 A2-, O2, 
N. PETERs, Photo-uthographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAM Q. ALLIS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MATTRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,316, dated November 14, 1882. 
Application filed June 30, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
55 
6o 
will form an acute angle, (see Fig.1) and thus 
To all whom it may concern: 
act as a brace to prevent any longitudinal 
Be it known that I, ABRAM Q. ALLIS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
movements of the slats. 
I am aware that spring-mattresses having 
city and State of New York, have invented 
5 new and useful Improvements in Spring-Mat 
coiled springs and parallel slats at the bottom 
with jointed arms have been heretofore pat 
tresses, of which the following is a full and 
clear specification. 
ented, as shown in patent to Le Quesne, No. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming part 
184,880, where the springs are held together 
of this specification, Figure 1 represents a top 
on the top by means of chains or links. This 
mattress is open to the objection that the 
view or plan of my mattress when extended, 
springs are free for lateral movement when the 
and Fig. 2 a side elevation. 
mattress is partly compressed, and the springs 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
usually upset and become destroyed, while in 
sponding parts. 
my mattress the springs are held in position 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
by being secured to the slats both at the top 
mattress that is capable of being fitted to any 
size bedstead and which can be readily trans 
and bottom. 
I claim that my mattress is less liable to get 
ferred from place to place, and one that has 
out of order, owing to its simplicity, and it is 
all the advantages of similar-constructed mat 
more durable and less expensive to make. 
tresses, and yet can be manufactured for less 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
CoSt. 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
My invention consists of a series of parallel 
of the United States, is 
slats both on the top and bottom of the mat 
1. A spring-tmattress composed of a series 
tress, and having between them the coiled 
of parallel slats, ct, forming the bottom, and a 
springs ordinarily used. The top slats are 
like number of parallel slats, a?, forming the 
connected together by means of jointed arms 
top, and having between them the coil-springse, 
pivoted to the slats. The lower slats are con 
in combination with the jointed arms attached 
nected together by means of jointed arms the 
to the top and bottom row of parallel slats, as 
same as the top one, the jointed arms of the 
described and specified. 
bottom being longer than those of the top. 
2. In a spring-mattress, the combination of 
In the drawings, a designates the parallel 
slats of the bottom, and at the parallel slats of the parallel slats a, and a with the long jointed 
arms c, attached to the bottom slats, the short 
the top. 
jointed arms c', attached to the top slats, the 
c represents the jointed arms which are piv 
coil-springs e, and the corner-bracing springs 85 
oted to the bottom slats, and c' the jointed 
e', all as described, and for the purpose set 
arms which are pivoted to the top slats. 
e represents the coil-springs, which are placed 
forth. 
3. The slats at and a', in combination with 
between the top and bottom parallel slats and 
the long jointed arms at the bottom and shorter 
held in their place by means of rivets or any 
jointed arms at the top, the coil-springs e, and 9o 
suitable device. 
the bracing-springs e', having one end secured 
At each corner of my mattress, to the first 
to the lower jointed arm and the other end se 
joint of the arms which are secured to the bot 
cured to the top outside slat, as described and 
tom row of slats, is attached one end of a 
specified. 
curved spring, e', the other end of which is se 
cured to the outside top slat, as hereinafter 
provement in spring-mattresses, as above de 
In constructing a mattress of this descrip 
scribed, I have hereunto set my hand. 
tion it is preferable to make the jointed arms 
which are attached to the lower parallel slats 
longer than those which are attached to the 
5o top slats, so that the curved spring attached 
to the first jointed arm, as above described, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing im- 95 
SAM, TRO. SMITH, 
T. C. JOHNSON. 
ABRAM Q. ALLIS. 
45 described. 
65 
7o 
75 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267416.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 267,416. 
L. B. FULTON 
GAGE COCK, 
Patented Now, 14, 1882, . 
 
 
 
 
ZSSS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
wiTNESSES 
-/64.4/7%. 
c64 /6 J%-?ivEvzor, 
/N 
24z Cat-3 4-4. 
477 OAAWAYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICF. 
LOUIS B. FULTON, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
GAGE-COCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,416, dated November 14, 1882. 
Application filed May 2, 1882. (No model.) 
25 
EO 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LOUIs B. FULTON, of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Gage-Cocks; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of my im 
proved gage-cock. Fig. 2 is a side view of the 
valve and stem; Fig. 3, an end view of same. 
Fig. 4 is a side view of modified propeller on 
stem, and Fig. 5 an end view of same. 
This invention has for its object the construc 
tion of a self-grinding gage-cock, adapted es 
pecially to locomotive and other boilers where 
in the valve is seated by direct movement of a 
handle, and the further object of providing 
means for remedying the annoyance of a leak 
in the Valve or seat during a trip of the loco 
motive or steamboat, or while steam is up in a 
stationary boiler. 
The invention consists in constructing the 
cock with two valves closing respectively with 
and against the pressure, and two correspond 
ing valve-seats; further, in the construction 
and combination of parts, substantially as here 
inafter described and claimed, 
A is the section which is to be screwed into 
the boiler-head. Another section, B, screws 
into the outer end of A, and both sections are 
recessed to form the chamber a, at whose inner 
end I form the Valve-seat b in section A and at 
the outer end the valve-seat c in section B. 
The latter section has a passage, d, outside the 
seat c, which communicates with the exterior 
through the transverse passage e, passage d 
being larger than the valve-stem. Section B 
has the projecting end f bored centrally for the 
passage of the valve-stem g. Stem g is rounded 
at its outer end, and at its inner end is en 
larged, and at each end of its enlargement h, I 
form the valves i and k, respectively, as shown. 
About the center of the enlargementh, Icon 
struct the rotating collar l, playing freely with 
the valve-stem in the chamber a, and having 
the spiral holes or slits m, as shown. I bore 
out the enlargement h. at its inner end to form 
the cavity n, which not only serves to lighten 
the body, but also to center the stem by the 
action of the steam against the edge formed by 
the conical valve i. 
The end f of section B is threaded to receive 
the threaded and recessed nipple P, which is 
provided with a hand-wheel, Q, or similar de 
vice for operating. I place a hard-metal plate, 
r, in the end of recess s to withstand the wear 
of the stem g. 
Thus constructed, the operation is as follows: 
For locomotive and other boilers subject to vi 
bration it is desirable to close the valve posi 
tively. For this purpose I screw the handle Q 
inwardly until the plater forces the stem gin 
Wardly far enough to close the inner valve, i, 
against the seat b, as shown in Fig. 1. When 
the cock is to be tried the handle Q is un 
screwed slightly, and the pressure of steam 
forces it open, causing the end of stem g to rest 
against the plate or the end of recess s. In 
this position, if the parth of the stem has the 
collar l, the steam or Water escaping through 
the spiral openings will cause the stem and 
valve to rotate, and this rotation continues till 
it is checked by grinding against its seat in the 
act of closure. If, while the locomotive is run 
ning or the steam still generating in a boiler, 
the valve i becomes leaky, and troublesome 
thereby, I unscrew the handle Q till the valve 
k closes against the seat c, and I aim thus rid 
of the annoying leak till an opportunity is pre 
sented of repairing the valve i. I thus nor 
mally use the valve i positively, and in case of 
leaks bring the valve k into action. 
For some boilers I can use the valve le nor 
mally, effecting the closure by steam-pressure, 
and in emergency use the valve i, the reverse 
of that just described. When the valve k is 
seated the cock is tried by screwing in the han 
dile Q, thus pressing the valve lc off its seat c 
and allowing the steam or water to escape at 
e. In this case, also, if the collar l be on the 
part h, the stem g will be set in rapid rotation. 
I have thus always an extra Valve and seat to 
do duty in case of an accident happening to the 
one in use. Where the Water used is apt to 
form scale it is important to be able to imme 
diately stop a leaky gage-cock, as, if the leak 
be not controlled, the outlet of the cock will, 
unless the latter is very frequently tested, be 
come covered with mud or sediment, which soon 
45 
55 
7 p 
75 
85 
95 
2 
267,416 
bakes into an impenetrable mass and renders 
the cock useless until repaired. 
Instead of screwing the nipple IP over the 
end f, it may be so fitted as to screw into the 
latter. This form would take less metal for its 
construction. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A gage-cockprovided with two valves and 
corresponding seats, both said valves being on 
a single stem, one valve arranged to close posi 
tively and the other to close by the boiler 
pressure, substantially as described. 
2. In a gage-cock, the combination of the sec 
tions A B, having the respective valve-seats b 
c, chamber a, and outlet de, with loose recipro 
cating or sliding stem (), having the valves i 
IO 
and k, the former arranged to close positively 
and open by the boiler-pressure, and the lat 
ter arranged to open positively and close by the 
boiler-pressure, substantially as described. 
3. In a gage-cock, the combination of the ro 
tating valve-stem (1, nipple P, having recess S, 
and hard-metal plate r, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
LOUIS B. FULTON. 
Witnesses: 
T. J. McTIGHE, 
THOMAS J. PATTERSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267516.txt	(No Model.) 
C. L. GRATIOT. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MILLING, 
 
 
 
FVITA"ESSES 
2% Z 
VJA" VIEW"TOR 
Charzes Z. Gratoi 
By as Attorne 
9, 
????, /foff???l, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographe 
r. Washington, D.C. 
w 
(No Model.) 
C. L. GRATIOT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MILLING, 
. 
No. 267,516, 
Patented Nov. 14, 1882. 
 
fi'i I. YES.S. f.\, 
?? CC- 
???? 
?? ????????des Z, 6rd? 24 
.By 
hes attorneys 
?? 
- 
7,A"VEVTOR 
(N0 M0 del.) 
C. L. GRATIOT. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MILLING. 
No. 267,516, 
Patented Nov. 14, 1882, 
 
Z: 
. 
????? 
?? ? 
I 
7 ? 
Z 
WITWESSES 
???? (Z &? By azs 
y 
?? 
VM 
4t 
torneys, 
II, WWE, WTOR 
Charles I, Grazdoza 
v 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES L. GRATIOT, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
VETHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MILN G. 
SeECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,516, dated November 14, 1882, 
Application filed June 19, 1882. (No nodel.) Patented in England July 11, 1882, No. 3,283. 
55 
?? 
75 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, CHARLES II, GRATIOT, 
of Chicago, in the State of Illinois, have in 
vented certain new and useful in provements 
in Method of and Apparatus for Milling, of 
which the following is a specification when 
read in connection with the appended draw 
ings. 
My invention relates to a new method and 
a new mechanism for degerminating, cleaning, 
and reducing wheat. I have recently patented 
in the United States an improved mill operat 
ing by an improved method for breaking or 
splitting grains of wheat longitudinally and 
cleaning the divided kernels of the germs, fuZZ, 
and crease-dirt, so far as practicable, by one 
operation, which invention I have termed im 
provements in a method and an apparatus for 
degerminating wheat. In connection with 
such a mill, which is illustrated as heretofore 
patented on Sheets 1 and 2 of the appended 
drawings, I use other mills of similar charac 
ter, but differing in the dress of the Tolls and 
cases, in depth and number of furrows, in rate 
of speed of Working, and in adjustment, as set 
forth below, by means of which other mills I 
carry the breaking, reducing, or granulating 
operation further than il my said patented 
mill, and also continue the rubbing and de 
germinating operation with good results. 
In the appended drawings, Figure 1 is an 
elevation, partly in vertical section on the line 
11 of Fig. 2, of a complete primary breaking, 
cleaning, and degerminating machine such as 
I have patented. Fig. 2 is a plan or top view 
of the same. Fig. 3 is an elevation of a frustum 
shaped roll of the primary mill; and Fig. 4 is a 
section of the roll and case, showing their fur 
rows. These four figures are the same as the 
drawings of my said patent. 
IReferring to the letters upon these figures 
of the drawings, A indicates a main support. 
ing-frame, of any suitable construction, having 
an annular flat top, B. 
C indicates a vertical burr spindle or shaft, 
resting upon its lower end in a suitable verti 
cally-sliding bearing-socket, D, within a lat 
erally-adjustable bearing, D', mounted in an 
opening through a cross-beam, E, of the main 
frame. The socket D is supported upon a lever, 
E. The spindle is provided with a belt-pulley, 
F, and with two ordinary adjustable journal 
bearings, G. G., movable laterally in the bracket 
II and in the top cross-beam, I, whereby the 
Vertical shaft inay be always positively main 
tained in a perpendicular position. IFixed and 
truly centered upon the upper end of the shaft 
is a hollow frustum-shaped metallic cracking 
roll, K, fitting within a corresponding case, L. 
The operating-faces of the roll and case are 
preferably of chilled iron or porcelain. The 
case is provided with a flat annular bottom or 
bearing, M, which rests over the flat annular 
top of the frame, and is made adjustable ver 
tically and horizontally by means of screws, so 
that its inner inclined surface shall be at equal 
distances from the Outer Surface of the frustum 
roll at all points. 
NN indicate set-Screws passing through the 
annular top of the table and bearing against 
the case-bottom. There should be at least 
three of these Screws, and there may be more. 
OO indicate screwspassing through lugs PP, 
which serve to adjust the case horizontally. 
There should be at least three of these screws, 
and four may be employed. 
Q Q indicate screws and nuts, which, when 
the case has been duly adjusted vertically and 
horizontally with respect to the roll, serve to 
hold the case firmly to the table-top in the ad 
justed position, the screw-holes through the 
bearing M being large enough to permit sufi 
cient lateral adjusting movement, 
The operation of these parts for the adjust 
ment of the roll and roll-case into proper rela 
tions to each other is as follows: The case is 
first suspended, as it were, upon the roll, the 
screws Q. Q being retracted and the lever IE 
being operated by means of the hand-wheel or 
nut Q to lift the roll and case, so that the an 
nular bottom bearing of the case shall be clear 
of its bearing on top of the frame. As the case 
exactly fits the roll, this will insure the ad 
justment of the interior inclined surface of the 
case exactly parallel with the outer surface of 
the roll. Then the screws N N and O O are 
to be merely set up snugly in contact with the 
bottom of the case. 
The roll is then lowered 
by the operation of the lever E and hand 
wheel to the proper position for spacing the 
9 O 
95 
OO 
O 
I 5 
30 
40 
45 
SO 
:"mu. 
267,516 
7 ? 
roll and its case, according to the size of the 
kernels of grains to be cracked. This having 
been done, the holding-screws () () are advanced 
so as to firmly clamp the case down upon the 
ends of the screws N N, when the mill will be 
in condition for work. Ally othel' suitable 
means of adjustment may be employed. 
IR indicates a lopper secured in a bracket, 
S, on top of the case. This hopper deliver's 
the grain into a sacer-like l'eceptacle, T, se 
cured on top of the spindle, and surrounded 
by a glass globe, U, resting on the case. From 
this receptacle the grain falls over on the top 
surface of the roll, which preferably inclines 
outward, as shown in the du'a Wings, and thence 
is fed down by gravity between the 'oll and 
(3:?SC. V indicates an exterior Casing, which in ay 
be of Wood Ol' sleet metal, Surrounding the 
case. A ?ter tille gl'aill is passed through the 
nil it is delivered into an allular receptacle, 
W, thence out at one side through the inclined 
delivery -spout N. The receptacle \V is se 
cured to the bottom of the case Li, so as to 
move with it during its adjustments, and thus 
always be ill position to receive the products 
of the mill al}(l permit their removal by a suit 
alole ordinary brush or scraper. The operat 
ing-face of the roll is preferably slightly bev 
eled or 1)nore inclined, as at X, near its tol), as 
indicated in Figs. I and 3, in older that the 
grain may more readily find its way, end fore 
most, between the roll and its case. 
In order to effect the chief object of my in 
vention, I provide furrows Y in the frustun 
roll, of a depth of about three-eighths of an 
inch at the deepest part, extending from top 
to bottom upon an inclitation with reference 
to the axis of the frustum of about thirty de 
grees, more or less. These furrrows, however, 
T prefer not to have run around upon the same 
incline from the top to the bottom, but to in 
clineless from the perpendicular for about one. 
fifth of the way from the top, and then to in 
crease their inclination the balance of the way 
to the bottom, substantially as illustrated, 
These fun'rows in this mill should be, say, about 
three-fourths of alm inch wide at the top and 
about al) inch and a half wide at the bottom 
in a full-sized roll, leaving corresponding oval 
cleaning-surfaces, Z, between the shallowest 
parts of the fun'rows. These cleaning-surfaces 
or ridges Z of the firrows, being rounded 
slightly, do not cut, but simply break, and then 
ftcrward run lo ol ' Wear and clea] ) the bon'okon 
grain, with only very slight, if any, flouring. 
The roll of this machine I prefer to make 
about fourteen inches in length, sevel incies 
in diameter at the top, ?orteen incles in di 
ameter at the bottom, and )'ovided with about 
twenty-five ?urrows. These figures may be val 
lied Somewhat in the construction of the ima 
cline; but the roll must not be too long, on 
account of danger of heating and flouring the 
grain, or too slot, on account of dager of" (ht, 
doin y its bije Work effect i V el A. 
The case is provided with corresponding 
shaped ?urrows and ridges, except that they 
are reversed with respect to those of the roll. 
The result of this construction is that as the 
grain is delivered between the roll aid its case 
the kernels will assume with great regularity 
a position to eter the furrows end foremost. 
In this position they will first, by the action 
of the upper part of the roll, be cracked or 
broken apart longitudinally through their 
creases, the grain by preference having been 
previously screened or sized, and the case hay 
ing been previously trued and set in place 
about the roll accordingly at a suitable dis 
tance for accomplishing this result. The 
cracked and divided kernels will then pass 
'apidly (lown the ?tarrows. Between the point 
lai) ( the bottom the half-sections of the ker 
nels will be turned over and thoroughly rabbed 
on all sides, and their fuzz, crease-clirt, and 
exposed germs are disconnected from then 
without breaking the germs. 
Instead of having the case adjustable ver 
tically, as described, I may adjust the roll ver 
tically within a fixed case by means of lever 
I;* at the botton of tle frame. 
Instead, also, of having the angles of the 
furrows changed, as described, I may have 
the furrows of the same angle of inclination 
With respect to the roll-axis from end to end. 
I am aware that it is not new to split or 
break kernels of wheat longitudinally through 
their creases, and that methods and apparatus 
have been devised to degerminate and clean 
Weat. 
I am also aware that frustun-shaped roll 
el's with diagonal ?urrows have been used for 
grinding coffee and other substances. 
I am also a Wai'e that horizontal disk-rolls 
with radial furrows and rounded ridges, and 
that parallel cylindrical rolls with similar fur 
rows and ridges, have been employed for crack 
ing kernels of wheat, as a step toward coin 
plete degermination and cleaning of the half. 
sections of the grain; but I am not aware 
that a degel'naminating - I'oll has been made of 
frustum sia pe, With proper inclined furrows 
and ridges, adapted not only to crack the grain, 
but after Ward, luring its gradual passage 
downward uitler the action of gravity, to turn 
it repeatedly in the continuous operation of 
til e mill and 'b) off and release the germs and 
crease-lit ?h'on their attaclinent to the ker 
nels, and finally (leliver the products uncut 
ad un ground out of the mill at, tle bottom 
of the roll. The practical results of the use of 
such a fst un or early conical slaped dc 
ge'minating-'oll a'e (lemonstrated ly (xperi 
ment to be liglily sat isfactory. 
It will be readily understood that by my 
lethod the kernels, in meliately after being 
broke along their creases, are subjected to 
the influences of gravity and centrifugal ?orce, 
by Which treatment tile too rapid discl:rge of 
the lk e' els is p'e vent (ed by their beeing over 
LSL 
S0 
SSSLSS SSSL S SLLLSSS LL 
LLLLS SLLLL S 
95 
OO 
OS 
1 ? 
| 
I 5 
5 
O 
15 
2 5 
45 
(, o 
6 : 
267,516 
centrifugal force. and against the case, with a 
tendency to turn over in being thrown off and 
to rub against each other as well as against 
the roll and case, and that the half kernels, in 
falling from the case downward against the 
roll, are gradually fed along or caused to ap 
proach the point of discharge in constant rub 
bing motion, tending to clean all their sufaces. 
It will thus be seen that I have provided a 
new method as well as an improved appara 
tus for longitudinally dividing and then turn 
ing, rubbing and cleaning kernels of wheat 
without grinding either the grain or its germs, 
the operation of which is continuous, speedy, 
economical, and thorough. 
The foregoing is a description of my said 
patented invention, with which II employ other 
mills that I will now set fortin. 
Fig. 5 is an elevation of a frustum-shaped 
roll such as I employ in the second nll, tO 
which the screened products of the first mill 
are delivered in any usual way in common 
practice in connection with gradual-reduction 
milling, in which a series of mills successively 
operate to reduce the grain and produce flour 
and middlings. 
Fig. 6 is a section of the second roll illus 
trated in Fig. 5, and its case, showing their 
furrows. This second roll and case may be, 
and in practice in accordance with my inven 
tion are preferably, set up in a similar frame 
and provided with adjusting and operating 
mechanism like that above described and illus 
trated with respect to the primary mill, and 
not necessary to again illustrate and describe 
in detail. 
The products of the first mill are delivered 
directly to a screen or scalping-reel' and 
screened, and then the split grains are ele 
vated into a bin above the second machine, to 
be fed through it. I do not describe in detail 
and illustrate this screening and elevating 
mechanism, because it is old and well known, 
and I do not confine myself to the use of any 
particular variety of mechanism of that kind. 
I may use any well-known kind merely to se 
cure the feeding of the products of the first 
mill to the second, the second to the third, and 
so on, in order that I may conveniently secure 
the successive operation of my mills, the prac 
tical advantage of which is due to the con 
struction of the cones and shells and their em 
ployment in a series, as set forth, by the aid 
of ordinary connecting and driving mechan 
S. 
Fig. 7 is an elevation of a frustum-shaped 
roll such as I employ in the third mill, to 
which the screened products of the second 
mill are delivered in the same way as from the 
first to the second. Fig. 8 is a section of the 
third roll illustrated in Fig. 7, and its case, 
showing their furrows. All three of the rolls 
are of about the same length and the same 
top and bottom diameters. The second roll 
differs from the first (and its case correspond 
ingly differs) in having more furrows-say 
about twenty-nine-and in having its furrows 
more shallow-say about five-sixteenths of an 
inch at the deepest part-and also in having 
its furrows less inclined from the axis of the 
- roll-say about twenty-five degrees, more or 
less. The third roll differs from the second 
(and its case correspondingly differs) in having 
more furrows-say about thirty-five-and in 
having its furrow's more shallow-say about 
one-fourth of an inch at the deepest part-and 
also in having its furrows less inclined from 
the axis of the roll-say about twenty degrees, 
more or less. The Second roll should be more 
closely adjusted to the case than the first and 
the third more closely than the second, to ac 
cord with the reduction of the wheat or the 
diminished size of the granulations. The rate 
of speed I have found preferable for the rolls 
although this is capable of considerable varia 
tion, and must be left somewhat to the obser 
vation and judgment of experienced millers 
is about three hundred revolutions per minute 
for the first roll and about four hundred per 
minute for the second and third rolls. 
The operations of the second and third milis 
upon the broken or granulated parts of the 
grain under centrifugal force and the force of 
gravity, causing the utmost change of position 
of the granular parts and constant rubbing 95 
action at all points, are the same in the second 
and third rolls as above described With re 
spect to the first, and whatever cleaning or de 
germinating, if any, is not perfectly acconn 
plished by the first mill is finished by the sec 
ond and third. These second and third mills 
have only a breaking or cracking and then a 
gentle rubbing action, so that they do but very 
little flouring. 
I have found the use of three mills differing 
in their rolls and cases, their adjustments and 
speeds, as above set forth, gives exceedingly 
good results in degerminating, cleaning, granu 
lating, and reducing willeat. They show re 
markably good capacity so far as both amount 
and quality of work are concerned; but the 
new method of milling wheat I have invented, 
and which is well carried out by employing a 
series of such mills having frustum-shaped 
spirally-furrowed rolls and corresponding but 
oppositely-furrowed cases, does not depend ab 
solutely upon the use of three such mills. A 
greater or less number in series may be used 
with good effect; but I find three sufficient for 
all ordinary purposes and generally necessary, 
and Irecommend that number constructed and 
operated as above set forth. If more are em 
ployed to further reduce the grain, they should 
follow albot the relative (lifferences of con 
struction and adjustment above indicated; 
but while three mills in series, as above de 
scribed, fully indicate and operate my inven 
tion, in practice it will be found that the pro 
duct of the first mill, even after screening, will 
largely exceed in bulk the grain originally fed 
to that mill. Again, on account of the closer 
adjustment of roll and case of the second mill, 
I 25 
T OO 
IO 
II5 
267,516 
35 
45 
What I claim herein as new, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The herein-described improved method 
of degerminating, cleaning, and reducing wheat 
by a continuous operation, consisting in pass 
ing it through a series of mills, whereby it is 
first cracked longitudinally through the creases, 
the germs, fuZZ, and crease-dirt released and 
again successively cracked, reduced, and the 
granules rubbed clean of flour and impurities, 
the granulated parts in each mill being sub 
jected to the influences of gravity and centrifu 
gal force, whereby they are thoroughly agi 
tated, repeatedly turned and rubbed, and 
gradually fed along, substantially in the man 
ner set forth. 
2. The combination of a series of mills hav 
ing frustum-shaped furrowed rolls and furrowedl 
cases, as set forth, constructed and arranged to 
successively reduce, agitate, and rubo first tilhe 
natural kernels and then the successive granu 
lated products, as and for the purposes speci 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 7th day of June, A. D. 
1882. 
fied. 
- 
SO 
55 
CHARLES L. GRATIOT. 
Witnesses: 
MARCUs S. HoPKINS, 
WM. J. PEYTON. 
IO 
its capacity is not so great as that of the first 
mill. The same is true upon a comparison of 
the third mill with the second. Therefore, in 
practice, in order to work the first mill con 
stantly at its full capacity, it will be necessary 
to have two of the second mills and three, or 
even four, of the third mills in place to work in 
concert with the first mill. After the opera 
tions of these three mills any ordinary grind 
ing-mills-preferably roller-mills-in common 
use may be employed to finish the further re 
ductions, so that the flour and middlings will 
be free from bran. 
My improved method of cleaning and reduc 
ing wheat may be practiced with benefit with 
frustum-shaped rolls and corresponding cases 
with furrows of different inclinations from those 
above mentioned. For instance, the furrows 
of the rolls might radiate from the top of the 
roll to its base-that is to say, run fan-like in 
straight instead of spiral lines- while the fur 
rows of the case might be inclined or spiral, and 
vice versa; or the furrows of both the roll and 
case might even be straight or fan-like in their 
spread from top to bottom of the roll and case; 
but the construction I have first above described 
is preferable. 
I claim nothing herein upon the primary de 
germinating-mill or method of degerminating, 
3 O pei se, as set forth in my said patent and illus 
trated upon Sheets 1 and 2 of my appended 
dira Wings ; but 
o 
? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267616.txt	(No Model.) 
J, TOMLINSON, 
BUTTER PACKAGE, 
No. 267,616, 
Patented Nov. 14, 1882, 
12, 
2 
 
A. 
A. 
B } Y . 
A. 2 3. 
sizers e 
21.21 
Z. 
N 
&we sw 
Sws N. evavysson 
a 24-yay 
Qy. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES TOMLINSON, OF CHATEIAM, ONTARIO, CANADA, ASSIGNOR TO FRANK 
G. SMITH, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
BUTTER PACKAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,616, dated November 14, 1882. 
Application filed August 25, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES TOMLINSON, of 
Chatham, in the county of Kent and Dominion 
of Canada, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Butter-Packages; and Idohere 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification. 
The nature of this invention relates to cer 
tain new and useful improvements in the man 
ufacture of cylindrically-shaped packages made 
of wood, and more especially adapted for but 
ter, cheese, lard, and other articles which are 
apt to be affected in their flavor when kept any 
length of time in contact with the wood. 
Figure 1 is a view in section of my improved 
package adapted to be used as a butter-firkin. 
Fig. 2 is a detail showing a removable cylin 
der, which is designed to fit within the butter. 
firkin. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the top, the 
cover being removed, of one of my improved 
butter-firkins when filled. 
In the accompanying drawings, A represents 
a cylinder formed of two or more thicknesses of 
veneers. If of two thicknesses, the grain of one 
should run at right angles, or nearly so, to that of 
the other veneer. If of three thicknesses, the 
grain of the intermediate veneer should run at 
right angles to that of the outer and inner ve 
neers, to afford requisite strength. Abotton is 
inserted in the cylinder, and secured in any de 
sired and convenient way. The interior of the 
cylinder is then coated with a thin and even 
coating of the following compound: about four 
parts of paraffine. Wax and one part of resin, 
melted and thoroughly mixed together. The 
cover B fits the top of the box, and is the full 
size of the diameter of the cylinder A, and the 
under side of the cover is rabbeted to fit the 4o 
interior of the cylinder. I employ a cylinder, 
D, without heads, and made from a single 
piece of veneer, and of a little smaller diam 
eter than the interior of the cylinder A, and a 
. 
little shorter than that cylinder, and insert it 45 
within the cylinder A. The butter is then 
packed within the inner cylinder, and when 
this is filled the top is covered with the com 
pound, when the package is ready to receive 
the cover. When it is desired to remove the so 
the contents intact the cover is removed and 
the box turned upside down, and then raised, 
when the inner cylinder, with its contents, will 
slip out and be left standing. The inclosing 
cylinder D may then be easily slipped off or 55 
otherwise removed from the mass, leaving the 
- 
contents in a compact form. 
What I claim as my invention is 
The combination of the cylindrical box or 
package, the movable cylindrical inner cas- 6o 
ing, made somewhat shorter than the depth of 
the package as shown and the rabbeted head 
adapted to be supported partly on the walls of 
the package and partly on the inner casing, 
whereby an angular bearing is formed for the 65 
head that may be tightly closed by a film of 
plastic material, while retaining the casing and 
contents in position, Substantially as Set forth. 
JAMES TOMLINSON, 
- 
Witnesses: 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
W. W. MANN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267716.txt	(No Model.) 
F, PRINZ, 
No. 267,716. 
MIDDINGS PURIFIER, 
- 
Patented Nov. 21, 1882. 
L'IT 
is 
ASs as 
See 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
Wvel 'B' 
 
 
  
 
 
 
--- - 
i 4. 
- - 
a 
  
N (e) (s) S RS (e) 
N 
WyEsses, 
-?tee 28s. 8. 'w w8, 
&azz/ 22} 
A 
WEvows & Suuluut 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FAUSTIN PRINZ, OF DUNDAS, MINNESOTA. 
MIDDLINGS-PURI FER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,716, dated November 21, 1882. 
- 
Application filed July 23, 1881. No model.) 
5 
O 
is 
To all whom it may concern: , 
Be it known that I, FAUSTIN PRINZ, a sub 
ject of the Emperor of Germany, and a resi. 
dent of Dundas, in the county of Rice and 
State of Minnesota, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Middlings-Puri 
fiers, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to machines for puri. 
fying middlings; and it, consists in the con 
struction and combination of parts, hereinafter 
particularly described, and then specifically 
defined by the claims. 
I attain my proposed objects by the use of 
the mechanism illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partially in sec 
tion, and Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional view. Fig. 
3 is a detail view of the feed-plate; Figs. 4, 5, 
and 6, enlarged detail views of the wiping 
strip; Fig. 7, perspective view detached of a 
portion of one end of the double shaker and 
hopper frames, illustrating the manner of con 
structing them and arranging an air cut-off. 
Fig. 8 is an enlarged detail view of a portion 
of one of the shaker-frames, illustrating the 
manner of securing the cloth thereto, 
A is the frame-work, made in any desired 
manner, and provided near the top with a 
shaker-frame, B', supported upon springs a, 
and adapted to be vibrated by an eccentric, b, 
as shown. Beneath this shaker-frame B is a 
second shaker-frame, B, and beneath the sec 
ond shaker-frame is a similarly-shaped frame, 
B', in which hoppers c' c c' care arranged to 
convey the middlings after it leaves the shak 
ers into the separating apparatus. 
All three 
of the frames B. B B are connected together 
at suitable intervals by straps e, so that they 
will all vibrate together. The lower ends of 
the springs a are connected to hangers d by 
bolts d', passing through slots in the springs, 
so that the latter may be adjusted higher or 
lower by a set-screw, d, to alter the inclina 
tion of the frames B BB3. The hangers d 
are provided with ribs d, adapted to fit into 
corresponding grooves in the springs, (see 
small detached perspective view at the right 
of Fig. 1) so that no side motion will be per 
mitted to the springs. 
E is a thin, flat, slightly-inclined plate, at 
55 
tached by one end and its sides to the upper 
end of the upper shaker-frame, B', beneath the 
feed-spout F, which thus forms a feed-plate 
over which the chop is fed in an even, regu 
lar stream. Across the frame B', above the 
lower end of this feed-plate E, is a bar, g, 
through which a screw, g, passes and is con 
nected to the lower edge of the plate E, so that 
by turning the screw up or down the plate E 
may be drawn up in a curve, as shown in Fig. 
3, or allowed to assume a horizontal position 
to regulate the flow of the chop, as hereinafter 
shown. 
About one-third of the cloth of the upper 
shaker, B', will be of a rather fine mesh, while 
the middle third will be of coarser mesh, and 
the tail third will be of a still coarser mesh. 
The second shaker-frame, B', is provided with 
boards or chutesh h' habove its cloth, and 
with their upper ends beneath the points of di 
vision of the different numbers of the cloth of 
the upper shaker. The second shaker-frame 
B is also covered with three or more numbers 
of cloth similar to the upper shaker, B', while. 
the lower ends of the chutes h hh are adapt 
ed to deliver the middlings that fall through 
the shaker-fame B at the proper points upon 
the different sections of cloth of the lower 
shaker-frame, B', as hereinafter explained. 
The hoppers c' ('c' care arranged similar 
to those shown in my application for patent, 
No. 11,546, filed June 11, 1880. 
Beneath each of the shakersB'B' are wooden 
trough-shaped strips i 
, arranged to slide 
back and forth from side to side of the ma 
chine upon rods i. (See Figs. I, 4, 5, and 6.) 
Within these trough-shaped strips smaller flat 
wooden strips are set and held up against the 
cloth by springs i, so that when moved back 
and forth across the machine the upper strips, 
i", will rub against the cloth and remove the 
adhering dust therefrom. 
is is a large sheave or cord-pulley attached 
to the side of the machine outside of and op 
posite to the center of the shakers B. B, and 
of a size equal to the space between the lower 
sides of the shaker-frames, so that if a cord, i', 
be attached to the center of the trough it be 
neath the upper shaker, B', and carried around 
the sheave i and back to the trough it beneath Oo 
75 
s 
25 
35 
45 
 
g 
267,216 
75 
the lower shaker, B, the two lengths of cord 
will be parallel with each other, as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
i i are two smaller sheaves or pulleys at 
tached opposite to the centers of each of the 
shakers B'B' and on the other side of the ma 
chine from the sheave i, whilea fourth pulley, i, 
is attached to the machine near the bottom and 
on a line beneath the pulleys i is, so that the 
cord i may be continued on over the pulley i 
from the upper wiper, down around the pulley 
i", and up over the pulley i, and thence into 
the lower wiper. By this arrangement it will 
be seen that if the cords between the pulleys 
i and 9 and pulley it be pulled up and down 
the Wipers will be drawn back and forth be 
neath the shakers. 
Outside the machine, near the lower part, is 
a gear-wheel, k', mounted upon a shaft or stud, 
and adapted to be revolved by a pinion, lc, 
upon another stud, carrying a ratchet-wheel, k, 
the pinion and ratchet being adapted to be re 
volved together. 
k' is an arm, pivoted at lc to the side of the 
machine, and connected at k" to one of the 
lengths of the cord i running between the pull 
leys i, i, and it, and provided at the other 
end with a slotted arm, k". 
The gear k is provided with a crank-pin, k, 
which fits into the slotkin the arm le. When 
the gear k is revolved its pink will not affect 
the arm kWhile running through the slot; but 
(the length of the slot being less than the di 
ameter of the revolution of the crank-pin) 
when it strikes the upper or lower ends it will 
raise or lower the arm k and leverk' and leave 
them stationary for some time at both the up 
ward and downward strokes, or while the 
crank-pin is passing through the slot ki. 
The troughs it will be so placed that they 
are upon opposite sides of their respective 
shaker-frames, as shown, so that if the length 
of the cord i running over the pulleys is or 9 
be pulled up or down by the arm lic the wip 
ers will be drawn back and forth beneath the 
cloth. The wipers will be so arranged that 
they will be drawn out beyond their respect 
ive shaker-frames at the end of each stroke, 
and remain outside during the time of their 
rest, so that they will present no obstruction 
to the flow of the middlings. Small holes will 
be formed through the bottoms of the troughs 
it to permit the escape of the middlings that 
may Work in beneath the wiping-strips. Rub 
ber tubes or plates, bristles, fur, sheep-skin, or 
any other suitable material may be used in 
stead of or attached to the wiping-strips i, if 
desired. By thus attaching the shaker-frames 
and wipers to each other, so that they vibrate 
together, no horizontal fiction occurs between 
the cloth and wipers except in passing from 
side to side. Hence at least one-half the wear 
on the cloth is prevented and the cleaning ac 
complished in an equally satisfactory manner. 
This is a very important feature, as it reduces 
very materially the wear and friction upon the 
expensive bolting-cloth, 
Beneath the frames B B'B' are arranged 
two cases or boxes, G, G, having open cen 
tral spaces and chutes and wings in m mm, 
arranged similar to those shown in my appli 
cation for a patent, No. 11,546, filed June 11 
1880, above referred to, except that the angul 
lar chutes in are cut away at their inner ends 
to form hopper-shaped cavities between them 
and the inner inclined chutes m, to assist the 
middlings in falling through. 
H' H are two frames, adapted to be raised 
and lowered and set inside the casings G' G* - 
between the chutes n and central open spaces, 
and provided with cross slats or bars m, adapt 
ed to fit up against stops in on the chutes m, 
so that when the frames H H are lowered 
down open spaces will occur between the cross 
bars m and stops m, through which the air 
passes, and when the frames EI H' are raised 
up until the cross-bars in come in contact with 
the stops in the air-currents may be entirely 
cut off; or by adjusting the frames H'B' up or 
down the force of the air-currents may be 
easily regulated and controlled. 
Beneath the casings G. G' three conveyers, 
G. G. G., are arranged, the central one being 
connected by hoppers, &c., with the dust-col 
lectors, while the side ones are connected with 
the middlings-hoppers, by which the middlings 
and dust may be removed from the machine. 
Spouts or other devices may be substituted for 
the conveyers, if desired. 
Across the center of each of the cases G. G.' 
are dust-collecting balloons G. G7 and fans I' 
I, arranged as in my application for a patent, 
No. 37,281, filed July 7, 1881. 
Along the edges of the shaker-frames B'B' 
pins n' are inserted, (see Fig. 8,) and through the 
edges of the bolting-cloth binding n' eyelets 
are formed, through which and over the pins 
in a cord, n, is alternately run and adapted 
to be drawn taut, and thus stretch the bolt 
ing-cloth upon the shaker-frames. This is a 
very convenient and thorough manner of Se 
curing the cloth, as it not only stretches every 
part equally, but allows it to be readily and 
easily tightened when it has become slack, and 
without removing the shaker-frames from the 
machine or disfiguring the cloth or frames with 
tacks or nails. 
The spaces between the shaker-frames may 
be provided with hoodst, (see Fig. 7,) so that 
the air may be shut off at these points and 
forced to pass upward through both shaker 
frames, as under some circumstances this may 
be found necessary. 
Across the frame A, above. the shaker-frame 
B', are one or more air-trunks, L' LP, provided 
with extensions LL', leading downward and 
into the casings G' G between the balloons 
GG", and having open lower sides connected 
to hoods B. B upon the shaker-frame B by 
loose cloth joints ' ', so that the vibrations 
of the shaker-frames and hoods will not affect 
By this arrangement a current of 
the trunks. 
air may be drawn up through the shaker-frames 
by the same fans, II, that furnish the currents 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
65 
26,76 
- 
3 
for the dust-collecting ballons G. G", and doing 
away with the necessity of extra fans being 
arranged for the shaker-frames. 
The first section of the cloth. upon the upper 
shaker-frame, B', from y' to y, as before de 
scribed, is covered with bolting-cloth of a rath 
er fine mesh, usually about No. 5, while the re 
maining two sections, from y to y and from of 
to y, are covered with cloth of an increasing 
degree of coarseness, usually about No. 4 and 
No. 2, respectively, while the lower shaker 
frame, B, is similarly covered with sections of 
cloth 2/2) and y if and fly, of an increasing 
degree of coarseness from the head' to the 
tail, usually Nos. 6, 5, and 4, the upper sec 
tion, y), being the finest in the machine. 
The chop is fed to the first shaker-frame, B', 
over the feed-plate E, which, by means of its 
delicate adjustment, may be so set with refer 
ence to the machine as to feed the chop in a 
regular, even stream over the whole width of 
the shaker-frame. The middlings is then 
caused by the rapid vibratory motion of the 
shaker to flow down over the bolting-cloth, 
the finer heavier particles sinking to the bot. 
tom, the larger lighter particles rising above 
them, while the fine bran and dust rise to the 
surface. The particles of middlings finer than 
the meshes of the first cloth, y if, fall through 
and are conveyed by the chuteh? to the upper 
end of the first section, y y, of the second 
shaker, B, over which it flows, and its parti. 
cles finer than the cloth upon this section fall. 
through and are conveyed by the hopper c' to 
the first set of separating-chutes, in m m. m. 
Some of the fine middlings that should pass 
through the first section, y'?, of the upper sec 
tion of the shaker B will usually be carried 
over upon the second section, yy; and to con 
vey these back upon the first section, yy, 
of the second shaker, B, the second chute, h, 
is extended at its lower end to overlap the sec 
tion y gy, and thus convey all the middlings 
that fall through the section fly upon the sec 
tion yay, where the fine middlings that have 
escaped the section y' y' will be sifted through 
into the hopper c', while the particles too coarse 
for section yy will be sifted through section y 
y. The chute h will overlap the section y 
gy in the same manner as the chute h overlaps 
the section of y, to convey the middlings that 
are fine enough for the section gy, but that 
have been carried over upon the section gy, 
to Section y), where they belong. By this 
arrangement the middlings are very evenly 
graded as to size, so that in passing down 
through the ZigZag separating-chutes in n n 
in each section of chutes will be supplied 
With middlings of a uniform size. Hence a more 
perfect action of the air-blasts may be secured 
and a better quality of middlings. This ar 
rangement also secures a very large extent of 
cloth-surface without enlarging the machine, 
which is a very desirable advantage in mills 
which are cramped for room. The middlings 
passing down over the zigzag chutes in mm 
m are subjected to the inwardly-flowing cur 
rents of air, the dust and adhering brai), &c., 
removed therefrom, and the clean middlings 
only delivered to the conveyers, the dust-laden 
air at the same time being carried through the 
dust-collectors and purified. The bran and . 
heavy dust are carried over the tail 2' of the 
upper shaker, B', while the very coarse mid 
dlings and tailings of the second shaker 
only find their way to the fourth hopper, c'. 
The blast of air through the trunks LLP will 
be just sufficient to exert a slight lifting effect 
upon the bran, &c., and not sufficient to carry 
it upward. Thus only the very finest dust 
will be carried off by the trunks into the cas 
ings G. G. 
What I claim as new is-- 
1. In a middlings-purifier, the combination, 
with a shaker-frame and a hopper, of an inter 
mediate feed-plate connected at its sides and 
one end to the shaker-frame, and at its lower 
end to an adjusting-screw, whereby the plate is 
adapted to Vibrate with the shaker-frame and 
be adjusted from its center to its sides, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a middlings-purifier, the combination 
of a vibrating bolting-cloth frame and a wiping 
or brushing device for removing the dust from 
the cloth, adapted to be reciprocated across the 
the bolting-cloth at right angles to the flow of 
the middlings thereover, and to be vibrated 
there with and drawn out beyond the sides of 
the shaker-frame, stubstantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
3. In a middlings-purifier, the frames B, B, 
and B9, arranged one above the other, con 
nected together, and provided with chutes and 
hoppers, so that the middlings may pass from 
one frame to the next, in combination with the 
feed-plate E, connected at its sides and one 
end to the upper shaker-frame and its lower 
end to an adjusting-screw, and a single shaft 
and eccentric for vibrating the feed-plate and 
a series of frames, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a middlings-purifier, the combination of 
a shaker-frame provided with a hood, a casing 
beneath the shaker-frame, a dust-collecting 
balloon located therein, a tube or flue having 
a flexible connection to the hood of the shak 
ing-frame and leading therefrom into the bal 
loon-casing, and a fan, located substantially as 
described, whereby the several parts will oper. 
ate as set forth. 
5. The combination of the shaker-frame B/, 
trough shaped strips it, strips it, springs i, 
and rods i, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the shaker-frame. 
B B and cloth cleaning-strips if i i", of the 
rods i, sheaves it is ii, cord i, operating 
leverski, and gears k is, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. The combination, with framea, hanger 
d', formed with a tongue, and shaker-frames B 
B', of spring a, provided at its lower end with 
a groove fitted to the tongue on the hanger d, 
and a screw, d, by which said spring is ren. 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
(45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
Io5 
O 
I 25 
4 
267,736 
5 collectirg ballons C", and fans i? I, substan- nesses. 
8. The combination of chutes in m in m', 
dered vertically adjustable, substantially as set passing over the pins and through the eyelets, to 
forth. 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
adjustable frames H' H m, steps m, dust-hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
tially as set forth. 
9. The shaker-frame of a middlings-purifier, 
provided with pins 7', in combination with the 
bolting-cloth provided with eyelets, and a cord 
. Witnesses: 
C. N. WooDWARD, 
LOUIS FEESER, Sr. 
FAUSTIN PRINZ. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267816.txt	No. 267,816. 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
E. L. ZALINSKI. 
MANUFACTURE OF IMITATION BULLION CAP ORNAMENTS, 
Patented Nov. 21, 1882. 
 
 
 
iSN 
NGH 
H 
y d ld 
 
s 
 
 
SSSs 
 
 
x 
INVENTOR deluk 
ATTORNEY 
Rs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, b.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDMUND L, ZALINSKI, OF THE UNITED STATES ARMY. 
MANUFACTURE OF IMITATION-BULLION CAP-ORNAMENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,816, dated November 21, 1882. 
Application filed August 15, 1881. (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDMUND L. ZALINSKI, a 
citizen of the United States of America, United 
States Army, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Making Imitation-Bul 
lion Ornaments and Insignia; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to letters or figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica. 
tion. 
My invention relates to imitation - bullion 
ornaments for caps, shoulder-straps, badges, 
and the like, and the nature thereof will be 
fully hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 is a face view of a cross-cannon 
constructed according to my invention on a 
fabric base. Fig. 2 is a central transverse sec 
tion; Fig. 3, a back view of ornament and 
fastenings; and Fig. 4, a partial section on 
line aca. 
Heretofore the finer class of ornaments for 
officers wear, society, and other insignia-as 
crossed cannon, bugles, &c., for caps, shoul 
der-straps, &c.-have been made of what is 
known as bullion,or gold lace,having a film 
of gold on a textile foundation. This is frail, 
and soon becomes shabby from brushing. Or 
naments of this character have also been cast 
in metal, and a cheaper class are struck up 
from thin sheet metal; but these all have a 
cheap and unsatisfactory appearance. 
To carry out my intention, I take a bullion or 
nament as a pattern-as, for example, a cross 
cannon-and from this secure a casting in brass 
or other suitable metal. This casting, while 
having a general resemblance to the original, 
is lacking in the perfection of details. It is 
therefore chased and engraved by a skillful 
engraver, so as to perfect the resemblance to 
the original. This brass casting is made for 
the reason that bullion is not hard enough to 
form a perfect mold, and the plastic material 
ordinarily used in making molds for electro 
deposition will pass in between the threads of 
the bullion, thereby producing imperfections 
in the mold when the pattern is withdrawn. 
From this a mold is made by embedding in wax, 
plaster, or other plastic material. In this mold 
I make an electro-deposit of gold, as at 1, or 
other metal, in the usual manner of electro 
. 
. 
O 
15 
25 
: 3o 
40 
45 
So 
55 
plating. The deposit of gold being made first 
directly in the prepared matrix gives a more 
sharply-defined copy of the details of the orna 
ment. I back up the gold with nickel, as at 2, 
Fig. 4, by the usual electroplate process. The 
object of this is to give a harder backing to 
the original gold or silver deposit than would 
be given by copper or other soft baser metal, 
gold or silver electro-depositions being more 
or less permeable to atmospheric influences, 
and nickle being less subject to oxidation by 
these than copper or other base metal, the or 
nament will retain its primitive brightness 
longer, not being so readily tarnished or dead 
ened in its coloring. The nickel may be again 
backed by copper or other baser metal, to fur 
ther strengthen the ornament. 
In the drawings, I have shown, in Fig. 1, a 
face view, and in Fig. 2, a transverse section, 
of cross-cannon ornament made according to 
my invention. At the intersection of the can 
non a depressed space is left to receive a letter 
or figure, and I fit therein a small disk of metal 
which may be covered with cloth, like a button 
mold. A metallic letter or figure, c, (letter or 
device,) is applied above this fabric, havingpins 
at its back, which extend through the cloth, 
disk, and plate. The parts are secured to each 
other by bending the pins or attaching a screw 
Washer. The cross-cannon or ornament may 
be attached to the cap or other garment by 
screw-washers or other device, and correspond 
ing pins, as shown in Figs, 2 and 3. 
I claim 
1. The method herein described for produc 
ing cap-ornaments in imitation of bullion, &c., 
which consists in making a solid metallic copy 
from a bullion ornament, as described, perfect 
ing the same by chasing, again making a mold 
and electro-depositing a falc-simile thereof in 
said mold. 
2. The method of producing ornaments here 
tofore described, which consists in making a 
mold indirectly from a bullion pattern, sub 
stantially electro-depositing a film of gold or 
silver therein, backing the same with an elec 
tro-deposit of nickel, and this again with a 
baser metal. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EDMUND L, ZAINSKI. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. BARTLETT, 
LOUIS W. MAXSON. 
90 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US267916.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 267,916, 
G. W. MILTIMORE, 
CAR, WHEEL. 
Patented Nov. 21, 1882, 
  
  
 
 
C/C/ 24. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. MILITIMORE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
CAR-WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 267,916, dated November 21, 1882. 
Application filed September 26, 1882. (No model.) Patented in England August 15, 1882, No. 3,885. 
s 
15 
5 
IO 
25 
To...all whom it may concern: 
twisting, and Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. MILTIMORE, 
finished spoke. 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
The spoke, and also the wheel shown in the 
city of Chicago, county of Cook, and State of 
present case, are, in their general construction, 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
the same as those shown in the Letters Patent 
Improvements in Car-Wheels, fully described 
referred to. A very brief description, therefore, 
and represented in the following specification of those features common to both will suffice. 
and the accompanying drawings, forming a 
The rim 1 of the wheel, which is of cast or 
part of the same. 
wrought iron or steel, is of the usual shape, 
Wheels for railway-cars were formerly al 
and is provided around its inner periphery with 
most universally made of cast-iron and in a sin 
the series of mortises 2, to receive the tenons 3 
gle piece. To obviate many disadvantages at 
of the spokes. 
tending the use of wheels made of this mate 
The spokes 4 are made from common commer 
rial and in this manner, principal among which 
cial bar-iron cut to the properlengths, beveled at 
is their liability to crack, particularly in cold 
their inner ends, and twisted by a quarter-turn, 
weather, it has in recent years been found de 
to provide the shoulders 5 on both sides for 
sirable to make these wheels by building them 
the hub-plates 6, which are seated against these 
up from separate parts-that is to say, mak 
shoulders and secured in position by the bolts 
ing the rim, spokes, and hub in separate pieces, 
7, passing through holes S, all as fully described 
The present invention relates to this last 
in the Letters Patent referred to. 
named class of wheels, and particularly to a 
It will be readily seen that in the construc 
wheel of the construction shown and described 
tion shown, as the rim 1 becomes enlarged by 
in United States Letters Patent Nos. 261,944, 
reason of the drawing process hereinbefore re 
262,909, and 262,910. 
ferred to, it will, unless compensated for, move 
It is well known to those familiar with the 
away from the shoulders 9 of the spokes, so as 
art that the rim or tire of a car-wheel, when in 
to make the whole structure loose and unsafe. 
use, is gradually drawn or enlarged by reason 
To compensate for this enlargement of the rim 
of the constant concussion to which it is sub 
and to make it certain that the spokes shall al 
jected in passing over the rails of the track. 
ways be firmly seated against it, the spokes 
When, as is the case with all wheels of the class 
are provided with holes 10, located as shown 
of that shown in the Letters Patent referred 
in Figs, 2 and 3, so as to cut the columns of 
to, the rim and the interior parts of the wheel 
metal forming the longitudinal axes of the 
are not integral, this gradual enlargement of 
spokes. From this it results that when the 
the rim, unless compensated for, becomes a se 
mandrel is forced between the converging ends 
rious defect, as thereby the spokes become 
of the spokes to seat them against the rim, as 
loose and the wheel is rendered unsafe. 
fully set forth in the Letters Patent referred 
It is the object of the present invention to 
to, it acts, not against the resistance of the 
provide a means whereby this gradual enlarge 
straight columns of metal, but against the re 
ment of the rim of the wheel is compensated 
sistance of the curved portions or wings 11, 
for and the spokes are always held tightly in 
which, as will be readily understood, will spring, 
both the hub and rim. 
so that the spokes will be slightly shortened 
To that end the invention consists in certain 
by the pressure applied. The force thus ex 
details in the construction of the spoke, sin 
pended in springing and shortening the spokes 
gly and in combination with the other parts of 
will of course be constantly exerted in tending 
the wheel, all of which will now be fully de 
to restore them to their normal length and 
scribed and particularly pointed out. 
shape, so that as the rim of the wheel is gradu 
In said drawings, Figure l is a transverse 
ally enlarged the spokes will constantly press 
vertical section of a wheel of the construction 
outward and remain firmly seated against its 
shown in the Letters Patent referred to, and 
inner periphery. 
So provided with spokes embodying the present 
invention. Fig. 2 is a plan of the spoke before 
What I claim is 
1. A spoke, as 4, made of bar metal twisted 
40 
45 
55 
75 
85 
Od 
- 
26,96 
s 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
by a quarter-turn, and provided with a hole, as 
10, located so as to cut the longitudinal axis hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
of the spoke at the point of the twisting, sub-nesses. 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the rim and the 
hub-plates, of the series of spokes, made of bar 
metal twisted by a quarter-turn, and provided 
with holes, as 10, located so as to cut the lon- 
gitudinal axes of the spokes at the point of the 
THos. E. PATTERSON, 
DANL, MCBAIN. 
Io twisting, substantially as described. 
5 
GEORGE W. MILITIMORE, 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268016.txt	( N 0 Model.) 
" 
No. 268,016. 
F. A. HARDY, 
- 
- 
0PT0 METER. 
, 
 
Patented Nov. 28, 1882. 
j 
". . 
. . . . 
. 
. 
3. - - 
- - - 
N. PETERS, Fhcto-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS A. HARDY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
O PTO METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,016, dated November 28, 1882. 
Application filed May 22, 1882. (No mod?l.) * 
5 
I O 
l 5 
25 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS A. HARDY, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Optometers, of which th 
M 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
devices for measuring optical defects or irreg 
ularities for the purpose of readily selecting 
proper glasses or lenses to suit different indi 
viduals. 
Heretofore optometers have been construct 
ed for measuring the degree of myopia or hy 
permetropia-short or long sightedness-with 
which any particular individual may be af 
fected, and provided with a scale indicating 
the number of the convex or concave lens 
which will compensate for the optical irregu 
larity. These irregularities-long and short 
sightedness-are due to the abnormal or un 
natural configuration of the eye, in the former 
the retina being too near and in the latter too 
far back from the lens of the eye; and the in 
struments commonly in useforselecting glasses 
or lenses have heretofore been constructed on 
the principle or theory that suitable glasses 
for all persons, young or all, may be indicated 
by an instrument designed to measure the de 
gree of the supposed improper position of the 
retina in relation to the lens of the eye-wheth 
er it is too close or too far back. It has been 
found, bowever, that optical defects commonly 
due to old age, technically called presbyopia, 
are occasioned not by any change in the rela 
tive position of the retina and lens of the eye 
or any supposed flattening of the eye-ball, but 
to the fact that the lens of the eye, while it re 
mains the same as. to its mormal shape and dis 
tance from the retina in old age, loses in part 
its power of contractility, or power to accommo 
date its focus to objects at different distances; 
and the object of the present invention is to 
provide an instrument for measuring the de 
gree of this defect, or loss of power of contrac 
tility of the optic lens, in connection also with 
a device for indicating the degree of long o 
short sightedness. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, and in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate like parts, Fig 
ure 1 is a side elevation of a device embodying 
'. 
my invention. Fig.2 is an end view of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a central vertical longitudi 
nal section, and Fig. 4 is a cross-section on 
line a ao of Fig. 3. 
In the drawings, A. and A" represent a pair 
of telescoping tubes. The outer tube, A, is 
provided with a transverse slot, a, cut about 
half-way throgh the tube, so that the lens B, 
mounted in the frame b, may be inserted in 
place in the tube through the slot. a' is a ring 
or band, provided with a similar slot, a, for 
securing the lens in the tube. To insert the 
lens in the tube, the ring is to be turned until 
its slot and that of the tube are coincident, 
when the lens may be inserted, and then se 
cured by turning the ring half around, which 
also serves to exclude from the lens external 
light through the slot. 
C is a br?ce or arm secured to the tube A, 
upon which is mounted the graduated disk ID 
and the pinion E. This pinion projects through 
a longitudiual slot, c, in the tube A, so that its 
teeth engage with the rack c' on the inner tube, 
A', whereby tle inner tube is moved in or out. 
F is an object-disk fixed in the inner tube, 
consisting preferably of rows of different-sized 
light letters on a black background or surface 
as to one half and of light radial lines on the 
other half, for detecting the existence of astig 
matism. The frame b of the lensis made pref 
erably of hard rubber, and is provided with a 
black disk shade or object, b', at its - end for 
the other eye, so that the instrument may be 
used without closing either eye, which would 
tend in some degree to impair or affect the 
power of the eye being tested, and thereby oc 
casion errors. By simply turning the lens 
around it will be observed the instrument may 
be used for testing either eye. 
The disk ID is provided with an outer grad 
uated scale, d, for indicating the number of the 
convex or concave lens needed to supplement 
the particular degree of hypermetropia ormy 
opia that may be indicated by the pointer, and 
an inner graduated scale, d', for indicating the 
number of the conv?x lens that will be proper 
for the particular degree of presbyopia that 
may be indicated by the pointer. 
The manner of using the instrumentin cases 
of presbyopia is to first move the object in 
close to the lens, and then slowly move it out 
65 
7 o 
75 
9o 
95 
t.) O 
2 
VK 
268,016 
by turning the disk D until the person can see 
the object distinctly, when the pointer will in 
dicate on the inner scale the number of the 
convex lens suitable for the person to use. In 
cases of myopia and hypermetropia the instru 
ment is used in the ordinary manner-viz., by 
first moving the object out, and then slowly 
drawing it in nearer to the lens by turning the 
disk ID until the person can see distinctly, when 
the pointer will indicate on the outer scale the 
number of the concave or convex lens, as the 
case may be, suitable to be used. 
By reason of the graduated disk D, I am 
enabled to use a much more powerful lens 
without crowding or too much condensing the 
graduations and figures of the scale, which II 
find of great advantage, as the lens thereby 
magnifies and renders more distinct optical 
peculiarities of the eye. - 
The pointer is indicated by the letter k in 
the drawings; and K represents the handle 
or pedestal upon which the instrument may be 
W 
O 
( 5 
2 O 
mounted. The point marked O on the scale 
represents the principal focus of the lens. 
What I claim is 
1. In an optometer, the combination of the 
tube A, provided with transverse slot a, ring 
a', provided with corresponding slot, a, lens 
B, secured in said tube by said slotted ring 
and provided with shade b', telescoping tube 
A', provided with the object-disk F, and rack 
c, and graduated disk D, and pinion E, mount 
ed on stud C, all arranged and operating sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. The combination of the lens, the movable 
object, and a graduated disk for indicating the 
amount of said movement, substantially as " 
specified. 
25 
35 
EFRANCIS A. EHARDY. 
Witnesses: 
T. EVERETT BROWN, 
EDMUND ADCOCK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268116.txt	(No Model.) 
C. H. McKEEHAN. 
AUTOMATIC FAN COMBINATION STAND, 
No. 268 
16. 
 
Pa ented Nov. 28, 1882. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
CHARLES H. McKEEEAN, OF MINERAL WELLS, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE 
HALF TO MADISON F. PRUITT, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC-FAN ComBINATION-STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,116, dated November 28, 1882. 
Application filed August 26, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs H. McKEE 
HAN, of Mineral Wells, in the county of Palo 
Pinto and State of Texas, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Auto 
matic-Fan Combination-Stands; and Ido here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, which 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, and Fig. 2 is 
a side view. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in both figures. 
This invention relates to an improved stand 
or support for an automatic fan, which said 
stand shall be portable, so as to be conven 
iently set up wherever desired, and which shall 
contain various hooks, brackets, shelves, and 
other conveniences, as will be hereinafter more 
fully described. 
A. A represent two uprights, each mounted 
On a base, B, and having at its upper end a 
cross-piece, C. 
DD are hooked rods or braces, hinged to 
the base and cross-piece of one of the uprights, 
and adapted to engage staples E on the base 
or cross-piece of the other, thus connecting 
the two uprights and forming a complete 
frame, as shown in the drawings, which may 
be conveniently set up over a bed, hammock, 
or wherever it may be wanted. 
FF are wire trusses or braces connecting 
the centers of the uprights AA with the ends 
of the bases B and cross-pieces C, thus mak 
ing the construction light, yet sufficiently 
strong. 
Secured to one of the uprights A is a case, 
G, inclosing a suitably - constructed spring 
motor adapted to drive the fan-shaft H, one 
end of which is journaled in said upright A. 
The outer end of shaft H, which carries the 
fan I, is journaled in a hanger or bracket, J, 
which is constructed of wire in the following 
manner: One end of the wire K is attached 
- 
So 
to and coiled around one of the rods D, which 
connect the cross-pieces C. It is then extend 
ed laterally, so as to form the curved bracket J, 
on which an eye, L, is formed to form a bear 
ing for the fan-shaft I. The end of bracket J 
has a hook, M, adjustable upon the other rod 
D. It will thus be seen that the hook M may 
be disengaged and the rods D on one side of 55 
the frame disconnected for the purpose of mov 
ing said frame, while the spring-bracket J still 
supports the fan-shaft. 
N N are rods or wires secured to the sides 
of one of the uprights A by screws O, passing 
through eyes P formed upon said wires. The 
ends of the latter pass through perforations Q 
in a pair of shelves, R, and are joined under 
the latter, which are thereby supported. 
These shelves, which may be used as lamp and 
book supports, may, when not in use, be fold 
ed up, as shown in dotted lines, 
S is a bail forming a newspaper-rack. TT 
are clothes-hooks; U, a fruit-basket, and V a. 
boot-jack, all conveniently attached to up 
right A. 
This improved combination - stand may be 
manufactured at a small expense. Its con 
venience and general utility will be readily ap 
reciated, 
) 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States 
1. The herein-described portable frame, con 
sisting of the uprights A, baving bases B and 
cross-pieces C, in combination with the de 
tachably-connected braces or rods D, as set 
forth. 
2. The combination, with the frame con 
sisting of uprights A, having bases B, cross 
pieces C, and connecting-rods D, of the spring 
bracket, consisting of a wire attached to and 
coiled upon one of the rods D, and having eye 
L and hook M, the fan-shaft H, journaled in 
the eye L and in one of the uprights A, and 
mechanism for operating said fall-shaft, as set 
forth, 
3. The herein-described portable frame, em 
bodying the fan - shaft, spring - supporting 
bracket, and operating mechanism, and pro 
9 o 
75 
- 
- 
80 
15 
25 
35 
49 
45 
s 
2 
26S, IE 6 
vided with the shelves, hooks, and brackets N In testimony that I claim the foregoing as Io 
RSTUV, all substantially as and for the my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
purpose set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
4. The combination, with the upright A, of 
5 the rods N, having eyes P, the screws O, and 
the shelves R., having perforations Q to re 
ceive the ends of rods N, which are joined un- 
der the shelves, so as to support the latter, as 
Set forth. 
CHAS. HOUSTON MICKEEEAN. 
Witnesses : 
J. C. SON, 
R. I. IATHROP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268216.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDGAR G. FRISBIE, OF MONROE, MICHIGAN. 
COMPOUND FOR LIN ING VESSELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,216, dated November 28, 1882. 
Application filed September 13, 1882. (No specimens.) 
The mixture may be applied to the vessel on 
To all choin it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDGAR G. FRISBIE, of the inside like any paint or liquid, and forms 
Monroe, in the county of Monroe and State of a coating or lining which I have found by 
Michigan, have invented a new and Improved actual experiment to be air-proof, water-proof, 
Compouild for Lining Wessels; and I do here. 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same. 
The object of the invention is to form, for 
Coating the inside of vessels which are in 
tended to contain butter, lard, oils, beer, wines, 
liquors, or mineral waters, a compound that 
will be in soluble by any of these liquids, and 
at the same time imperineable to fluids, so that 
the pail, barrel, box, tub, or other vessel shall 
be provided with a durable coating or lining 
impenetrable by air or water, and also to pre 
pare wrapping-paper by the use of said coin 
pound to render it impermeable to water or 
grease, and so adapt it for wrapping butter, 
lard, meat, &c. 
The compound which I have discovered by 
numerous experiments to be the best adapted 
for my purpose consists of shellac, beeswax, 
whiting, and alcohol. I first take the bees. 
wax, slice it very thim, and boil it in alcohol. 
I then allow it to cool, and preferably repeat 
the process of boiling and cooling three times, 
when it is kept in an air-tight vessel until 
wanted for use. The whiting is mixed with 
alcohol and is ready for use after standing for 
twenty-four hours. I then employ, for every 
gallon of my compound, shellac, one pound; 
beeswax boiled in alcohol, one-half pound; 
whiting in alcohol, one-fourth pound; alcohol 
sufficient to make up the gallon. 
and insoluble in butter, lard, or any of the 4o 
liquids specified. 
I am aware that an enamel has been formed 
on the inside of casks by the application of 
successive coatings of gum-shellac and char. 
coal mixed with a large proportion of alcohol 45 
which requires to be burned or set fire to after 
the coatings have been applied. As I require 
no fire to form an enamel, I merely use the al 
cohol as a solvent and diluent, while the bees 
wax is mainly employed to give the lining an 5o 
elasticity which makes the compound applica 
ble to wood which shriks and swells. This 
elasticity, forms one of the chief and most val 
uable qualities of my compound. 
to a full understanding of my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
A compound for coating or lining the inside 
of vessels intended to contain butter, lard, oils, 
beer, wines, liquors, or mineral waters, and for 6o 
preparing wrapping-paper to be used for wrap 
ping meat, lard, butter, &c., consisting of shel 
lac, beeswax, whiting, and alcohol, in about 
the proportions specified. 
Having thus described all that is necessary 55 
R. E. PHINNEY, 
THOMAS PLUES. 
EDGAR, G, FRISBIE, 
Witnesses: 
O 
IS 
30 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268316.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 268,316, 
A. W., TIPTON. 
WAGINAL ELECTRODE. 
Patented Nov. 28, 1882, 
Z% Z 
 
Z 22, 2 
S NY 
WITNESS : 
21- 
- 
- 
INVENTOR: 
By Mull- f : 
ATTORNEYs, 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographr, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT W., TIPTON, OF JACKSON VILLE, ILLINOIs. 
VAGNAL ELECTRODE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,816, dated November 28, 1882. 
w 
Application filed May 10, 1882. (No model.) 
2 d 
25 
O 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERT W.TIPTON, of 
Jacksonville, in the county of Morgan and 
State of Illinois, have invented a new and Im 
proved Vaginal Electrode, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved electrode for harmonizing 
the electrical or relaxed and contracted states 
of the uterus and for bringing it to the nor 
mal state. 
The invention consists in an electrode formed 
of a tube made of a metal section and a hard 
rubber section placed parallel to each other and 
united, to which tube a bell or cup is hinged, 
which is formed of a metal section and a hard 
rubber section united to each other. The tube 
is provided with devices for receiving or at 
taching an electrical conductor. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference iudicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal elevation of my 
improved vaginal electrode. 
Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal sectional elevation of the same on the 
line yy, Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the 
cup or bell. Fig. 4 is a sectional plan view of 
the tube on the line aca, Fig. 2. 
A cup-shaped vessel or bell, A, is formed of 
two sections, A' A', which are secured to a 
stud, a, projecting from a metal ball, B, fitting 
within a socket, C, of a bail-and-socket joint. 
The section A' is made of hard rubber and the 
section A is made of metal, which is prefera 
bly nickel-plated. The socket C is provided 
with a threaded sien, c, screwed into a block, 
D, in the upper end of a tube, E, formed of 
two united semi-cylindrical sections, E' E, of 
which the section E is made of hard rubber 
and the section E is made of metal, prefera 
bly nickel-plated. A socket receptacle or tube, 
F, for receiving a conducting-wire or the metal 
plug at the end of an electrical conducting 
cord, is attached to the lower end of the tube 
E. A pin, G, is passed through the socket C 
and a slot of the ball B, so that the cup can be 
inclined on the transverse line gy of only, and 
not on a line at right angles to this line by y. 
The operation is as follows: In case of re 
troversion the electrode is introduced into the 
vagina until it comes in contact with the os 
uteri and the metallic part A of the cup or 
bell is in contact with the contracted muscles 
of the uterus, which is easily ascertained by 55 
digital examination before introducing the 
electrode. The electric conductor connected 
with the negative pole of the generator is at 
tached to the electrode by being passed into 
the tube or receptacle F. The electric con- 6o 
ductor, connected with the positive pole of the 
generator, is attached to a sponge cup or holder, 
which is applied to the cerebellum, the nerve 
centers between the upper parts of the shoul 
ders, and to other parts of the body. During 65 
this operation the electrode is turned more or 
less one way or the other, so as to bring the 
metallic part of the cup or bell A in contact 
with all the contracted muscles while treating 
them. Then the positive conductor is con- 7o 
nected with the vaginal electrode and the elec 
trode is introduced so that the metallic part 
of the cup or bell will be in contact with the 
relaxed muscles of the uterus. The negative 
conductor is connected with the sponge-cup, 75 
and this sponge-cup is applied on the abdo 
men for about ten minutes, and to other parts 
of the body, as the circumstances or special 
case may require. 
used for correcting the electrical or relaxed 
and contracted states in ante version and retro 
version or anteflexion and retroflexion of the 
uterus, whereby the contracted muscles will be 
relaxed and lengthened, the relaxed muscles 85 
will be contracted and strengthened, and the 
electrical states of the muscles will be brought 
to the normal condition. 
I am aware that electrodes have before been 
used for a similar purpose, some in the form 
of a ball to act in the orifice of and others in 
the form of a ring to act around the os uteri, 
but all having flexible or elastic bodies, which 
I do not claim; but 
What I claim, and wish to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In a vaginal electrode, the combination, 
with a tube formed of a metal section and a 
hard-rubber section placed parallel to each 
other and united, of a bell or cup pivoted to loo 
The above - described instrument is to be 8o 
9o 
95 
- 
35 
40 
45 
So 
g 
26S, 36 
- 
forth. 
One end of this tube, substantially as herein 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
2. In a vaginal electrode, the combination, 
with a tube formed of a metal section, E, and 
a hard-rubber section, E', placed parallel to 
each other and united, of the cup A, hinged to 
one end of this rod and formed of a metal sec 
tion, A', and a hard-rubber section, A', sub 
Io stantially as herein shown and described, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a vaginal electrode, the combination, 
with the tube E, of the cup or bell A, hinged to 
one end of the same, and the tube or recepta 
cle F for the electrical conductor, substan 
tially as herein shown and described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
ALBERT W., TIPTON. 
I5 
Witnesses: 
W. A. BROWN, 
CHARLES II. HASTINGS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268416.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 268,416. 
 
Patented Dec. 5, 1882. 
E 
N N IL?THTTUTTI 
 
w???ssEs* 
???ze? || 
|| 
BISA 
?esc Kickr - 
vino 
 7 
4.- *** 
OP-A,  
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIAN LANE, OF MOSS RUN, OEHIO. 
C H URN. 
SPIE?IFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,416, dated December 5, 1882. 
Application filed March 7, 1882. (No model.) 
I O 
I 5 
25 
To all uchom ut may concer'in : 
Be it known that I, JULIAN LANE, of Moss 
Run, in the county of Washington and State 
of Ohio, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Churns; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part of this specification, in which-- 
Figure 1 is a side elevation. Fig. 
is a 
horizontal section on line av av, Fig. 1. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
simple means for securely holding churn 
bodies of different diameters upon the frame 
of the operating mechanism of a churn, and 
to allow the latter to be readily inserted in 
place and quickly removed therefrom ; and it 
consists of an adjustable and hinged holder 
extending transversely across the base-frame, 
and adapted to securely hold churns of any 
diameter or height in the operation of churn 
ing, as hereinafter more fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, a repre 
sents a frame erected on the base-frame b. 
In the rear of the frame a is journaled a 
crank - shaft, c, carrying a geared wheel, d, 
which meshes with the cog-gear d' on the hori 
Zontal shaft e, journaled in the frame a, and 
provided with a crank, f, or other suitable de 
vice, by means of which motion is imparted 
to the operating mechanism of the churn. 
To the crank of the shaft c is pivotally se 
cured the pitman g, the upper end of which is 
pivotally secured to one end of a walking 
beam, h, having its fulcrum in the churn 
frame, and provided at its opposite end with 
the two parallel plates l, l, secured to the two 
opposite sides of the walking - beam. The 
plates l l are each provided with a longitudi 
nal slot, m, for the passage of set-screws in, 
which pass thence into the walking - beam. 
By this construction the plates l l can be ad 
, justed in or out, as desir?d, by loosening the 
screws and sliding out or in the plates, as de 
sired, and securing them in any position by 
tightening the screws an, the heads of the 
screws bearing on the plates l. 
o represents a vertical dasher - shaft, pro 
vided with a series of spaced holes, o', in its 
upper end. The upper end of the dasher 
shaft o passes between the projecting ends of 
the plates l. 
p represents a removable pin, adapted to 
pass through the opposite holes, q q, in the 
ends of the plates l, and also through any one 
of the lholes o' in the upper end of the dasher 
shaft, whereby the dasher shaft can be ad 
justed horizontally with great nicety by ad 
justing the plates, and the dasher-shaft can 
be adjusted vertically in the holes q q in the 
plates, so that churns of different diameters 
and heights may be employed in connection 
with my improved churn-holder, hereinafter 
described. 
To the horizontal transverse bar r of the 
frame a is hinged the transverse holders, hol 
lowed out semicircularly on the side next the 
churn-body, so as to embrace and hold the 
latter, and adapted to fold down on the upper 
face of the frame b or to be raised therefrom 
on its hinged connection. After the hinged 
holder has been turned down on the frame b 
it is held in place by means of hooks t, hinged 
to the sides of the holder s, engaging with 
staples secured to a sliding holder, which I 
will now proceed to describe; or any other 
equivalent device may be employed to secure 
the hinged holder s to the frame b. 
u represents an angular holder, adapted to 
fit around the angular end of the frame b, and 
provided with slots v in its longitudinal arms 
(?? ??. 
a'' a' represent set-screws inserted in the 
slots v, and passing thence into the sides of the 
frame b. 
The upper face of the sliding holder u is 
hollowed out semicircularly in order to em 
brace a circular churn resting on the upper 
face of the frame b, andl lheld in place by the 
holders. The upper edges of the longitudinal 
arms ac w of the sliding holder ut are sunk be 
low or are not fidush with the upper face of the 
frame b, so that a churn of large diameter will 
not rest on the saidl arms and impede the move 
ment of the holder ut in sliding in or out. 
b represents a churn-body resting on the 
upper face of the frame b, and held securely 
in place thereon by means of the hinged and 
sliding holders s ut. By this construction a 
churn - body of any ordinary diameter and 
N 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7 S 
85 
O O 
 
2 
2 (GBS, fl. 6 
lheight is securely held in place by the holders 
during the churning operation, and can readily 
be inserted between the holders or removed 
therefrom by raising or lowering and fasten 
ing the hinged holder, and at the same time i 
5 
by the employment of the adjustable sliding || || 
i holder churn-bodies of different diameters can 
readily be employed. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the base-frame b, 
carrying the operating mechanism of a churn, 
of a hinged holder, s, and adjustable sliding 
O 
holder u, adapted to receive and i hold churn 
bodies of different diameters, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination of the base - frame b, 
semicircular hinged holder s, having hooks t, 
sliding and adjustable semicircular i holder ut, 
having slotted arms w nv, and set-screws a' a', 
substantially as described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
Witnesses: 
JULIAN LAN E. 
DAVID MARTIN, 
WILLIAM MCCLINTOCK. 
15 
2 O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268516.txt	(No Model.) 
E. MICHBACH. 
ROCKING CHAIR. 
No. 268,516. 
Patented Dec. 5, 1882. 
 
 
 
2 
Sa- 22 
2 
7232 1. 
2 rast 
 
SW 
 
 
- 
- 
Azasz 
Arz 575 IzgaZ 
2/3424/ew/ 
y 
A 
e 
Z7 *. 
AzazizZZr 
A7/7//7//7/A (A 
A. Kiss R 
ay 
co's 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington.D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMII. MICHBACH, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
RocKING-CHAIR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,516, dated December 5, 1882. 
s 
Application filed August 2, 1ss). (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EMILMICHBACH, of Cin 
cinnati, Eamilton county, Ohio, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Rocking 
Chairs, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. , 
My invention, as to its principal feature, re 
lates to a fanning attachment for rocking 
chairs, which is operated automatically by the 
action of the chair in rocking the same. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure is 
a side view of a chair embodying my inven 
tion, the chair being shown in its inactive coll 
dition and with its foot-restfolded back. Figs. 
2 and 3 are vertical sections of the chair in the 
forward and backward extremes, respectively, 
of its rocking action. Fig. 4 is a top view, the 
back and arms being omitted. Fig. 5 is an en 
larged view of one of the confining-gudgeons, 
its leather sleeve being shown in section. Figs. 
6 and 7 are a vertical section and an under-side 
view of the inlet-valve in its open and closed 
conditions respectively. 
A may represent any suitable rocking-chair 
mounted upon a customary platform, B, to 
which it is confined by gudgeons at a', that oc 
cupy V-shaped slots in slotted brackets D D, . 
which project upward from the platform. These 
gudgeons are preferably clothed in leather or 
rubber sleeves E, as shown in Fig. 5. The 
part of the chair beneath its seat is furnished 
with a double-chambered bellows, C, similar 
in principle to those used for blacksmiths 
forges, the same being constructed as follows: 
Secured rigidly to the chair, underneath its 
seat, is a sloping board or plate, F, having an 
orifice, f, guarded by an upward-opening valve, 
G. To this board two flaps, H and I, are se 
cured by hinges J and K, and by customary 
leather membranes LM, so as to constitute 
two chambers, NO. The lower flap, H, has an 
orifice, h, guarded by an upward-opening valve, 
P. The upper flap, I, is pressed toward the 
intervening board F by a spring, Q, which is 
attached to the under side of the seat S. The 
free edge of flap H has toggle-connection TT 
with the platform. Spouts or nozzles U U. 
conduct air from upper chamber, O, to any con 
venient place to fan the user. 
- 
Io 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
so 
55 
65. 
75 
- 
desired. 
A screw, V, may be added to enable the in 
let-valve P to be held open, so as to tempora. 
rily disable the bellows when no air-draft is 
It is apparent that the described system of 
bellows performs the double duty of fanning 
the occupant and of cushioning the chair-oscil 
lations, so as to prevent their becoming too ex 
treme, and so as to store up a portion of the 
momentum of one oscillation to expedite the 
return movement of the next. 
Associated with the above may be an elas 
tic foot-rest, W, whose frame X may be capa 
ble of being secured by pivots Y to any one 
of a number of pairs of sockets, Z, in the plat 
form to suit the convenience of the user. (See 
Figs. 2 and 3.) 
For compact stowage or transportation of 
the article of furniture, the foot-rest, with its 
supporting-frame, may be folded to the position 
indicated in Fig. 1. 
I claim as new and of my invention 
1. The fanning and cushioning attachment 
for rocking-chairs, consisting of double-cham 
bered bellows C, springs Q, shackle-connec 
tion TT, and the discharge pipes or nozzles 
WW, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. The self-fanning rocking-chair consisting 
of chair proper, A, having gudgeons a a' in W 
slotted bearings D D, attached respectively 
to the chair-rocker and base B, and bellows C, 
connected by board H, toggles TT, and spring 
Q to platform B and seat S, respectively, and 
provided with discharge-nozzles V V, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. In combination with rocking-chair proper, 
A, and socketed platform B Z, the folding and 
shiftable elastic foot-rest W, and hinged sup 
porting-frame X, having pivots Y, substan 
tially as represented. 
In testimony of which invention I hereunto 
set my hand. 
EMIL MICHBACH. 
Attest: 
GEO. H. KNIGHT, 
DANL, KELLY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268616.txt	(Model.) 
No. 268,616, 
H. E. BROWN. 
ADJUSTABLE TABLE. 
Patented Deo. 5, 1882. 
2B DN EstateNE2 
R 
NY7-z 
  
 
 
WITNESSES 
/Czvor Zz 
r 
 
INWENTOR: 
ATTORNEYs. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY E. BROWN, OF LANSING, MICHIGAN. 
ADJUSTABLE TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,616, dated December 5, 1882. 
Application filed December 15, 1880. (Model.) 
55 
the upper edge, as this edge is pressed down 
Be it known that I, HENRY E. BROWN, of ward. A screw, R, passes through the lower 
clamp-arm, Q, and by means of these arms 
Q and Q and the screw R. the double ratchet, 
bar N is attached to tables, chairs, or project 
ing parts of any other piece of furniture. 
The sliding latch K is drawn in the direc 
tion of its length in order to disengage the 
tooth L. from the segmental rack I), upon which 
the board B is inclined, as may be required, 
and the latch K is then released and engages 
the tooth L with the segmental rack D, again 
thereby locking the table or board B in the 
inclined position. As the annular top plate, 
I, fits loosely in the flanged ring Ed, the board 
or table B can be turned on this top plate, I. 
The pawl-arm O is raised more or less as the 
circumstance may require, and the pawl-clamps 
Q' or Q are also adjusted higher or lower on 
the bar N, as may be necessary, and then the 
same are fastened to a chair, table, or any 
other suitable projection by means of a screw, 
R. The board or table can thus be adjusted 
at any desired height or inclination with the 
greatest care and in a very short time, and 
will always be held firmly. 
I am aware that a desk has been provided 
with a spring-pawl on its under side to work 
in a rigid rack on the desk-standards; but 
To all whom it may concern: 
Lansing, Ingham county, State of Michigan, 
have invented a new and Improved Adjusta 
ble Book-Support; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the same. 
The object of my invention is to provide a new 
and improved adjustable book-support which 
can be attached to a chair, table, or any projec 
tion of a piece of furniture, can be adjusted 
higher and lower, and to have any desired incli 
nation. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction and arrangement of parts, as herein 
after more fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of my improved book-support, 
showing the manner in which it is attached 
to a chair or other object. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal sectional elevation of the device for 
holding the table in the desired position. Fig. 
3 is a plan view of the same. Fig. 4 is a lon 
gitudinal elevation of the pawl-arm and clamp 
arm of the device. 
An inwardly-flanged ring, H, is fastened to 
the under side of the table B, and an annular 
flange of the top plate, I, of the lugs J J fits 
into the space between the under side of the 
table B and the upper side of the flange of the 
ring E, as shown in Fig. 2, thus permitting 
the table to be turned on the top plate, I. A 
shaft, C, passing transversely through a seg 
mental rack, D, on a rod, E, is also pivoted in 
the lugs J J. A sliding latch, K, with a wedge 
shaped tooth, L, on the under side and lugs a 
at at the ends, is mounted in the top plate, I, 
directly below its flange. A spiral spring, M., 
acts upon this latch, drawing the tooth Linto 
the teeth of the segmental rack D. A flanged 
bar, N, is provided with teeth b b on the inner 
sides of the flanges, as shown in Fig. 1. A 
pawl-arm slides up and down on this bar N, and 
can be held at any desired height. The rod E. 
passes through two guide-rings, P, of the bar 
N, and its lower end rests upon the pawl-arm 
O, as shown. The pawl-clamps Q and Q slide 
vertically on the bar N, and can be held at any 
desired height in the same manner as the pawl 
arm O, for they are also provided with the 
fulcrum-lugs ce; but on the arm Q, they are 
on the lower edge, as this arm receives an up 
ward pressure; but on the arm Qthey are on 
GEO. W. PARKER, 
JAS. T. ZEALY. 
What I claim as new is 
1. In an adjustable table, the combination, 
with a sliding latch, K, provided with a wedge 
shaped tooth, L, on its under side, sector-rack 
D, spring M, and shaft C, of the flanged top 
plate, I, provided with the lugs J J, and 
flanged ring H, secured to the table, whereby 
the table can be tilted in any direction and 
firmly secured at any angle, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a book-support, the combination, with 
the flanged bar N, provided with the guides 
PP, and with teeth on two opposite sides, of 95 
the vertically-adjustable pawl-clamps Q and 
Q, the screw R, the vertically-adjustable pawl 
arm O, the rod E, and the table B, pivoted to 
the top of the rod E, all substantially as herein 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
HENRY EDWARDS BROWN. 
9o 
Witnesses: 
- 
7 o 
75 
- 
Ioo 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268717.txt	(No Model.) 
E. H, ODEND'HAL, 
No. 268,717. 
COFFEE POT. 
Patented Dec. 5, 1882. 
gzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz!!!!= 
??????%=?????? 
Z ?? 
??? 
I 
WITNESSES : 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD H. ODENDHAL, OF NORFOLK, VIRGINIA. 
COFFEE POT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,717, dated December 5, 1882. 
Application filed June 16, 1882. (No model.) 
S 
fo 
IS 
To all ????? ?? ??? ???cer? : 
Be it known that I, EDWARD BH. ODENDHAL, 
of the city of Norfolk, in the county of Norfolk 
and State of Virginia, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Coffee-Pots; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements 
in coffee-pots, and has special relation to ap 
pliances therefor, its object being to fully ex 
tract the strength of the coffee and to free the 
liquid coffee or beverage of groundsorsediment. 
The nature of this invention consists in the 
employment of a bottomless chamber or base, 
having tubes or pipes passing through it from 
a point on a plane a little above its lower end 
to a suitable height above it, whence they 
are connected to a bottomless cylinder, on 
which is fitted a perforated or punctured 
vessel or strainer, said base or chamber also 
having a tube arranged in its center, sub 
stantially as hereinafter more fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional view, showing my improvement as 
applied for use in a coffee-pot; and Fig. 2 is a 
side view of my improvement removed from 
the coffee-pot. 
In carrying out my invention, I employ a 
bottomless chamber or base A, which may be 
a section of a cylinder, and is adapted to fit 
snugly or closely in the coffee-pot B and rest 
upon the bottom of the latter. The upper sur 
face or top of the base A is preferably con 
vexed or sloped to its sides. 
CC are pipes or tubes, preferably of goose 
neck shape, and passed through the top of the 
base A, to which they are fastened, from a 
plane a little above its lower edge to a suitable 
height above it. This arrangement of the 
lower ends of the pipes C permits the entrance 
of the boiling water and steam thereto. At 
their upper ends they enter and are connect 
ed to a bottomless chamber or cylinder, which 
may have an attached ring or bail, a, for 
conveniently lifting the appliance out of the 
b is a central pipe or tube, fixed to the top 
coffee-pot. 
. 
. 
. 
?? 
55 
?? 
of the base around an opening therein, and 5o 
reaching down to the same plane occupied by 
the lower end of the pipes C, and for the same 
The purpose of this pipe is to eject 
purpose. 
the steam and boiling water against the bot 
tom of the strainer or perforated vessel, pres 
ently described, which holds the coffee. 
E is the strainer, a serially perforated or 
apertured vessel, adapted to tightly fit on 
the bottomless cylinder D, as against its be 
coming accidentally detached from or falling 
off the cylinder by the weight of its contents, 
but capable of being forced off said cylinder 
when it is desired to remove its contents. 
Into this strainer or vessel the coffee is 
placed from which it is intended to extract the 
strength. 
It will be observed that, with the required 
quantity of water put into the coffee-pot, 
after the removal of the appliance, and the 
required quantity of ground coffee put into 
the vessel E, and then replacing the appli 
ance, it is ready for operation. By placing 
the pot on the stove or other heater the steam 
and water in ebullition will ascend the pipes 
C C in a heated state and saturate the coffee 
in the vessel or strainer E. As the boiling 
water acts on the coffee its strength will be 
extracted, and the water be consequently con 
verted into liquid coffee, which will pass 
through the vessel or strainer Einto the coffee 
pot. As the action of the boiling water upon 
the coffee in the vessel E continues, the 
strength of the coffee will be further extract 
ed, which is kept up until it is fully devel 
oped. The boiling water and steam ejected 
up through the central pipe, b, into the per 
forated vessel E, into contact with its con 
tents, will cause the swelling of the coffee in 
the latter, and the increased development of 
its strength. 
???? 
From the foregoing it will be observed tha 
the full strength of the coffee is extracted, 
while the liquid or beverage is produced free 
of all grounds or sediments, which are great 
desiderata in making coffee. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
95 
75 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
 
2 
26s,717 
In an appliance for coffee-pots, the combi- and the strainer or perforated vessel, sub 
nation, with the bottomless base or chamber, stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
of the central pipe or tube, and the upright 
tubes or pipes extending from plane a little 
EDWARD H. ODEN DEAL, 
above its lower edge and to a suitable height 
above it, the bottomless cylinder or chamber 
affixed to the upper ends of the aforesaid pipe, 
E. M. BAUM, 
GEO. D. PARKER. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268819.txt	?? 
??? 
?? 
??????? 
?? 
?? 
???? 
???? 
: ; , 
?? 
??? 
?? 
* : ; ?? 
???? 
?? 
: 
??? 
????? 
| \ 
: 
???? 
?? 
?? 
?? 
TED CERCES, 
(No Model.) 
No. 268,819, 
? 
? 
? 
? 
--F 
?? 
J. H. N0LAN, 
FIRE PRO OF CHEST, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 12, 1882, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
N N & 
s 
NESTERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
AND RELATED DEVICES. 
84 
(No Model.) 
No. 268,819. 
 
J. H. N0LAN, 
FIRE PR.00F CHEST, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Deo. 12, 1882. 
" 
? 
?? 
? 
???? 
. AND RELATED DEVICES, 
?? 
8 
31 
??? 
1 * 
: 
: 
4 
? 
?? 
? 
 
? 
UNITED STATES 
JOHN H. NOLAN, OF BOSTON, MAss, 
PATENT OFFICE. 
TO THE MAGNESO CALCITE FIRE-PROOF COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, 
FIRE PRO O F CHI EST. 
sPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,819, dated December 12, 1882. 
Application filed March 27, 1882. (No model.) 
2 ? 
'O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
my former inventions upon analogous sub 
Beit known that I, JoHN H. NoLAN, of the 
jects, particularly to my improvement in fire 
city of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and 
proof material for which my application for 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
Letters Patent of the United States was filed 
5 and useful Improvement in Fire-Proof Chests 
February 23, 1882. The fire-proof material 
or Boxes, of which the following is a full, clear, 
therein described I intend to use in this im 
and exact description, reference being had to 
proved box which forms the subject of this 
the accompanying drawings, in which like let 
present invention. Of course a lining could 
ters indicate corresponding parts. 
be used other than the one described in my ap 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the box 
plication.just referred to. For instance, the fire 
with cover lifted. Fig.2 represents a cross 
proof lining described in the Fowler magneso 
section of the box midway of its width, at 
calcite patent, or other similar non heat-con 
point indicated by p, in which the top plate, E, 
ducting fire-prooflining, could be used. 
and bottom plate, A', are shown. It also repre 
By reference to Fig. 1, A is the box; A', the 
sents the general arrangement of the sheets of 
front sheet; A, the end sheet. Eis the cover; 
incombustible fire-proof material overlaid with 
b', a rim which sets over the top edge, c, of the 
the carbonizable material, as usually construct 
box and rests upon the molding b'. The metal 
ed by me. Fig. 3 is a corner section of the 
plates of the box are turned in at right angles 
metal plates and fire-proof material enlarged. 
at the top edge to give additional strength, 
Fig. 4 is a side and end elevation of a sheet of 
prevent warping, and to protect the fire-proof 
the carbonizable material, showing the general 
lining. This turned or folded upper edge or 
manner of its use in overlapping the non-com 
top is shown by c 0, and is an important part 
bustible fire-proof material shown in Fig. 5. 
of my present invention. The edge of the cover 
Fig. 5 represents the fire-proof material, which 
b', which sets over the box at c, also tends to 
is formed in layers or sheets, and which is prevent the warping and twisting of the ends 
placed inside the carbonizable material, as or sides by the heat, and the molding or bead 
shown in Fig. 4.- : Fig.6 represents a sheet of upon which the top rests protects the top as it 
the metal as cutoutpreparatory to being folded sets over. Where light plates are used this 
and lapped together to form the cover to the 
form is quite important. The edges or corners 
bix. Fig. 7 represents the manner of folding 
of the sheet E composing the cover-top are 
the sheets for the cover and the device em 
held together by the small pieces d' d', which 
ployed to secure the folded laps at the corners. 
are slipped into slots left for the purpose and 
Fig. 8 represents a section of the box and 
fastened in place by rivets, (represented by X 
- cover, in which are shown a modified form of 
X.) The parta ofthecoveris fastened to the top. 
securing the metal plates when heavy material 
by rivets and cement or other suitable means, 
is used, also the mode of securing the fire-proof 
and when the lid is closed fits closely inside 
lining by the use of metallic flanges or angle 
the top of the chest, (represented by a?.) 
irons sustained in place by bolts or appropriate 
By referring to Fig. 6 a. sheet of the metal 
: securing devices. . . . . 
will be seen, in which E is the sheet itself. b 
The object of my invention is to furnish a 
b b are edge flaps, which lap over and form the 
substantial fire-proof box or chest for the hold 
joints and edge of the cover, as shown in b, 
ing of papers and other valuables, made from 
Fig. 1. d is a piece which comes out from the 
metal plates fastened and connected in a new 
waste metal. The plate is cut into the form 
and improved manner, and combined with a 
shown in Fig. 6, and after the plate E is folded, 
45 lining of indestructible fiber incased in carbon 
as shown in Fig. 7, the parts or flaps bbb take 
izable fiber, making alight, strong, and con 
the position as therein shown, and the holes 
venient fire-proof box or chest, and which can 
or slits (represented by d in Fig. 6) core to 
be made at a much less cost for material and 
gether in the corner of the plate, and the piece 
labor than the ordinary boxes or chests used 
d is bent to an angle of forty-five degrees and 
slipped into the hole or slit d, as shown in 
This invention is intimately connected with 
Fig. 7. 
5o for a similar purpose. 
35 
. . 
. 
r 
95 
OC) 
55 
75 
85 
2 
26S,S 19 
 
25 
35 
75 
5 
O 
The dotted lines in Fig. 7 indicate the way the sheets of the carbonizable fiber, a tight 
the box-cover is constructed and the manner joint will be formed without creasing or over 
lapping, and the sheets of carbonizable fiber 65 
of introducing the corner-stays d', as already 
thus inclosing the non carbonizable fire-proof 
described. The piece d is secured in its place 
material thus nicely fit inside the outside metal 
by a bolt or rivet,X. (Shown also in the cover 
plates, 
of the box, Fig. 1, X.) 
The manner of wrapping the carbonizable 
The box proper is formed of five plates of 
filver about the non-carbonizable fire-proof ma- 7o 
metal-A' A' the sides, A' A' the ends, and A 
terial is shown in Fig. 4, and the position of 
the bottom plate. The side and end flates 
both as laid in the metal sheets of the box is 
are united at the corners by lap joints, and the 
fully shown in the sections, Figs. 2, 3, and 8, 
bottom sheet, A, being folded in its edges, is 
Fbeing the carbonizable fiber, and D the non 
also lap-jointed to the side and end sheets, as 
combustible fire-proof material. 
shown at c, Fig. 2. In order to square out the 
It will be observed that my manner of con. 
corner upon the outside, the corner-piece 0, 
structing the box effectually protects the ex 
Fig. 3, is soldered or riveted on. This also 
posed ends or edges of the fire-proof material. 
finishes the box and makes the symmetrically 
In the light-metal-plate boxes the protection 
formed panels, as shown in Fig. 1. The box 
is afforded by the folded and lapped edge (, 8o 
and cover-plates are further strengthened by a 
Fig. 1, and by b in the cover, while in the 
small angle-iron placed in the corner of the 
heavy-metal-plate boxes the same protection 
edge of the plates, Fig. 1, b b c 0, and this 
is afforded by the angle-irons eeee, Fig. 8, 
iron or brace is held in place by rivets or bolts 
Thus I form fire-proof boxes or chests of 
XXX X". One of the small angle-irons is 
metal plates, inclosing substances to render 85 
shown in each corner edge of the cover, and 
the box fire-proof, and only vary the mechani 
indicated by did. When heavier plates of 
cal construction of the top edge of the box and 
metal are used in constructing the box, the 
Warping or twisting can be prevented by plac- of the cover to correspond with the varying 
ing braces or irons inside, near the top, extend-thickness of metal plates used. In either case 
the box can be made safe, strong, and light, 
ing all around the box, and which will be un 
of elegant appearance, and at a very moderate 
derstood by reference to Fig. 8, hereinafter 
more particularly explained. 
C0St. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
In Fig. 8 I show a section of a modified con 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
struction of the cover and box in which the 
Patent of the United States, is 
angle-irons ee ele' are represented, and which 
1. In a fire-proof box, the plates A.A.A., 
are so connected with the outside metal plates 
united by lapjoints, and the plate E, forming 
as to make a very strong and substantial box, 
the cover E, combined with sheets of fire-proof 
but still of exceedingly light weight. The out. 
material D F, substantially as and for the pur 
side frameplates of the box are bolted to the 
poses set forth. 
inside work, as shown in Fig. 8. The bolts or 
2. A fire-proof box formed of plates A. A 
large rivets are renresented by m n. The space 
A, with bead b', a cover, E, having an over. 
allowed for expansion is also shown, and is in 
lapping edge formed of the plate E, with laps 
dicated by h. h. The angle-irons or metallic 
b b and openings or slits d', folded, joined, and 
flanges e e e'e' protect the ends of the com 
secured at the corners of the plate by the pieces 
bined fire-proof material FD. A metal piece, 
d' d' and the rivets XX, all combined with a 
k, Fig. 8, is placed beneath the edge of the 
fire-proof lining, as and for the purposes sel 
cover-plate E, and which also extends under 
the edge of angle-irone e and tends to support 
forth. 
3. In a fire-proof box, the plates AA, with 
it. The piece k is secured to plate E by bolt 
top edges, c 0, formed by the folding or lap 
or rivet in, space being left for expausion, as 
ping of the upper edge of the plates, the head 
already described. 
b', and corner-pieces, oo, all combined substan 
The front of the plate to the box is repre 
tially as and for the purposes, set forth. 
sented by A', upon the top of which rests the 
4. In a fire-proof box, a cover formed of the 
cover-plate E'. This construction is used with 
metal plate E, arranged by doubling the edge 
heavy plates and when the cover to the box 
of the metal sheet by folds b b to make the 
does not overlap, as shown in Fig. 1, but sim 
overlapping edge b, and secured in position 
ply rests on the top of the box, as shown in 
by the insertion of bent pieces d' d' and the 
the section, Fig. 8. 
rivets XX, all substantially as and for the 
The form of the non-carbonizable or fire-proof 
purposes specified. 
material is shown in Fig. 5. It will be seen 
JOHN H. NOLAN. 
that it is made to conform to the shape of the 
?? metal plates out of which the box is construct 
ed, the holes or slits d' being made in such 
a position that in folding, when placed between 
F. F. RAYMOND, 2d, 
BOWDOIN. S. PARKER. . 
Witnesses: 
55 
45 
90 
95 
' ' .. 
I OO 
s 
CS 
C 
I (5 
R. 
R 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US268919.txt	(Model.) 
No. 268,919, 
 
L. B. McNUTT. 
BENDING MACHINE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Deo, 12, 1882. 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. 
(Model.) 
No. 268,919, 
 
L. B. McNUTT. 
BENDING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Deo, 12, 1882. 
WITNESSES: 
2.2%.24 
5647-se 
BY 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR: 
4.7% 
ti- se 
ATTORNEYs, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LINDSAY B. McNUTT, OF ASHTABULA, OEIO. 
BENDING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 268,919, dated December 12, 1882. 
Application filed June 27, 1882. (Model.) 
O 
To all chon, it may 0000en: 
Beit known that I, LINDSAY B. McNUTT, of 
Ashtabula, in the county of Ashtabula and 
- State of Ohio, have invented a new and Im. 
proved Bending-Machine, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention consists of a former and ma 
chinery for use in connection there with for 
bending buggy-shafts, carriage-poles, pole 
bars, &c., the apparatus being arranged for 
the application of steam or compressed-air 
power, or to be worked by hand, as may be 
preferred, as hereinafter fully described. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
... bending-machine as arranged for the use of 
steam or other power to operate it, a part of 
the frame being sectioned. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view. Fig. 3 is a transverse section on the 
lirie a ac, and Fig. 4 is a plan view as arranged 
for being Worked by hand. Fig. 5 is a detail 
view in side elevation of the cross-head and 
its connections. . 
The essential feature of the invention con 
sists of a former and attachments where with 
a pair of carriage-shafts or couple of poles, 
pole-bars, or other like pieces of carriage or 
wagon stock may be secured by one set of ap 
paratus and be bent at the same time. 
The former consists of the bar a, not quite as 
long as the shafts b or other pieces to be bent, 
the two upper corners of the said bar being 
rabbeted, as shown in Fig. 3, to suit the form 
and size of the pieces l to be placed thereon 
one each side of the rib or tongue c between 
the rabbets. The bottoms of these rabbets 
are shaped to the longitudinal curved form to 
which the shafts bare to be bentin one direction, 
as shown by the line at d, Fig. 1. At the left 
hand end of this former, which terminates at e, 
(dotted in Fig. 1 and solid line Fig. 2,) a steel 
strap, f, is attached in the plane of each side 
of the tongue c, said straps extending as much 
beyond the end of the former as the required 
length of the heel bend g of the shafts. At 
their outer ends these straps terminate in 
shouldersh, with heok-points i. At the oppo 
site end, where the tip-bendi is to be made, 
there is a steel strap, k, lying over each rab 
bet and extending from the end of the former 
along it about as far as the length of the tip 
bend to a point where the said straps hook on 
to a short cross-head, l, traversing the former 
in a slot under the rib c, and with which a gib, 
m, and key in are arranged to draw said straps, 
which are shouldered at 0, against the ends of 
the shafts, and subject then to an upset strain 
against the shoulders h of the straps fat the 
other end of the former. Two clamp frames 
or formers, p, shaped on the under side to cor 
respond with the upper side of the tip bend, 
are hinged at q to the shoulders o, so as to act 
on the upper side of the shafts to press them 
down onto the bed of the former by the ram t 
of a steam, compressed-air, or hydraulic cylin 
der, at, located over the bed-frame V, on which 
the former is placed for bending the shafts. 
These two clamp-formers p are coupled to 
gether on the top of rib c by the strap-hinge 
plate w for most of their length, but near the 
face ends a gap is left, through which the but 
ton a connects with them after the formers 
have been pressed home to hold the shafts un 
til they set. Buttons y and 2 are employed 
to fasten on the shafts by their respective ec 
centric levers a?, suitably fixed to studs rising 
up from the former, and the former is confined 
laterally by the claimps b', which are also the 
formers for the heel bends g of the shafts, said 
clamps being arranged on the cross-Ways c' of 
the bench to close on the former and the shafts 
preparatory to the action of ram t, and being 
operated by the levers d and toggles e', to the 
latter of which suitable lever-connections are 
to be made for shifting them up in the posi 
tions represented by the dotted lines, Fig. 3, 
to release the clamps, and down into the posi 
tions of the full lines to cause the clamps to 
grip the former. The former being secured 
by these clamps and by the ram t the pointed 
head f" of a ram, g, actuated by a steam, com 
pressed-air, or other cylinder, h", is driven for 
ward between the ends of the two shafts, as 
represented in Fig. 2, to bend them against 
the forms of clamps b', after which the rodsh, 
pivoted to the sides of the former at it, are 
hooked onto the hooks i to hold the bends g 
it represents a rest pivoted at t between the 
until set. 
m 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55. 
7 o 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
w 
2 
268,959 
25 
O 
15 
beams of the bench V and containing-rollers lc 
3. The combination, with the bar a, having 
for the former to rest on, which is thrust up 
the two upper corners rabbeted in a curved 
into the position represented in dotted lines, 
form to suit the pieces to be bent, and provided 
Fig. 1, by the lever m and pusher in for the 
between the rabbets with a rib, c, of the steel 
discharge of the former and the bent pieces 
straps.f, one arranged on each side of the rib, 
extending the required length of the heel bend 
on it after clamp b' and ran t are withdrawn, 
and terminating in hook-pointed shoulders h, 
which may then be quickly effected by hook 
ing the former a c to the ram g' by any suit 
whereby the heel bend is formed, as described. 
able hooked rod or chain and quickly opening 
4. The combination, with the straps shoul 
dered at 0, of the couple-clamps pp, hinged at 
the valve for the quick withdrawal of ram g', 
whereby the former will be shot forward over 
q to said shoulders, the ram t, and the frame 
the ram-cylinder h onto a bench, suitably lo 
v, as shown and described. 
5. The combination, with the bench V, of the 
cated to receive it. 
By the use of the cam-levers A B, Fig. 4, 
rest j', pivoted between the beams thereof and 
sockets k, attached to the steel straps fand 
provided with rollers k", the lever n, and the 
pusher n', whereby the former and bent pieces 
the hooks '', to connect said straps to the cain 
levers, the heelbeuds g may be made by 
may be raised, as shown in Fig. 1 of the draw 
ings, and for the purpose specified. 
hand, the clamp-formers b' and the rang' be 
iug dispensed with. . 
6. The combination, with the bar a, having 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
a rib, c, a slot under the rib and a rabbet on 
each side of the rib, of the steel straps k, lying 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat. 
over each rabbet and extending the length of 
ent- , 
1. The eccentric levers af, the clamps b' b', 
the top bend, and the cross-head l, connected 
the bench having crossways c', the levers d, 
with the straps, arranged in said slot under 
and the togglese', combined as and for the the rib and shouldered, at 0, whereby the top 
purpose specified. 
bend may be formed, as described. 
2. The combination, with rabbeted bar a, 
ribbed at c, of the sockets k, overlapping the 
rabbets of bar, the cam-levers B, and the hooks 
' 
', engaging shoulders on the bottom arm of 
30 
said levers, as and for the purpose specified. 
CHARLES E. SHERMAN, 
F. A. PETTIBONE. 
LINDSAY B. MCNUTT. 
Witnesses: 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269019.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 269,019, 
L. C. CROWELL, 
DELIVERY APPARATUS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 12, 1882. 
3.91. 
TUtest, 
&A %.a. 
C2C-6 4- 
Irwercar, 
Zucker C. Crowed, 
sy c 16-  C W. a 
Ways, 
 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 269,019, 
a. 
L. C. CROWELL, 
DELIVERY APPARATUS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 12, 1882. 
 
N 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
DELIVERY APPARATUS, 
No. 269,019, 
Patented Dec. 12, 1882. 
| 
| 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
y 
Zvezvoz 
Zvote?ter C. Crowed 
-6.1 (2% 
an 
Zzys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUTHER C. CROWELL, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO R. HOE & Co., OF NEW 
YORK, N. Y. 
DELIVERY APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 269,019, dated December 12, 1882. 
Application filed May 29, 1882. (No model.) 
Io 
IS 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, L. C. CROWELL, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
of Brooklyn, county of Kings, and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use. 
ful Improvements in Delivery Apparatus, fully 
described and represented in the following 
specification and the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of the same. 
In the production of ordinary newspapers, 
and particularly of those which are to be sup. 
plied to news-dealers and carriers, it is often 
desirable that they should be delivered from 
the printing mechanism in such form as to be 
readily separated into lots containing any de 
sired number without the necessity of counting. 
This result has heretofore been attained in a 
variety of ways, but always by the use of 
mechanism more or less complicated, by which 
the piling-table or other surface upon which 
the papers were lodged as they passed from 
the machine was shifted or changed in its po 
sition at regular intervals, so that the irregu 
lar piling marked divisions in the pile, each of 
Which contained a certain predetermined num 
ber, or by devices which operated at regular 
intervals to shift a single paper so that it 
Would project beyond the edges of the others 
in the pile, and thus mark the divisions con 
taining the predetermined number. 
It is the object of the present invention, 
among other things, to dispense with all mech 
anism for shifting the piling-table or the posi 
tion of single papers in the pile, and yet to 
mark the regular divisions in the pile of pa. 
pers, so that any predetermined number can 
be taken from the pile without the necessity 
of counting. 
To this end the invention consists in a meth 
od of dividing the sheets delivered from a 
printing-machine into quires or lots containing 
predetermined quantities, which method con 
sists in printing or placing upon or in certain 
of the papers an indicating-mark by which they 
will be readily distinguishable from the others. 
The invention also embraces certain mech 
anisms for carrying this nethod into operation, 
and also certain features of the delivery appa 
ratus, both singly and in combination, all of 
which will be hereinafter fully explained and 
pointed out. 
In said drawings, Figure 1 shows in front 
elevation a mechanism embodying the present 
invention. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical 
section of the same. Fig. 3 is a vertical sec 
tion upon an enlarged scale, showing the de 
livery apparatus. Fig. 4 is an enlarged view, 
partly in section, showing the apparatus for 
placing the indicating-lmarks upon the papers. 
Fig. 5 is a view showing one of the papers af. 
ter it has received the indicating-mark. Fig. 
6 is an elevation showing the pile of papers 
as they will appear upon the carrying-tapes; 
and Fig. 7 is a similar view of a like pile of 
papers, but showing the indicating - marks 
placed in a different position. 
The apparatus illustrated in the drawings is 
designed and adapted to manipulate a double 
width web so as to deliver the printed product 
in the form of quarto or eight-page papers hav 
ing one longitudinal fold. The double-width 
web of paper, having been perfected by any or 
dinary form of printing mechanism, the last 
type and impression cylinders, 4748, of which 
are shown in Fig. 2, passes over the roll 1, 
where it is split by the slitter 2, after which 
the two halves of the web pass around the 
turning-edges 3 of a longitudinal folder, by 
which they are associated in the well-known 
manner, so as to pass between rolls 4 5 in the 
form of a two-ply web. The folder by which 
the two parts of the Web are associated may 
be of the construction shown in United States 
Letters Patent No. 233,997, or of any other ap 
proved form, but is here shown as constructed 
according to the plan described in my appli 
cation for Letters Patent filed December 10, 
1881. From the rolls 45 the web, now of one 
half its original width, passes around the turn 
ing-edges 6 of a second longitudinal folder, 
which is of the same construction as the first, 
but arranged at right angles thereto, by which 
it isfolded longitudinally, so as to pass between 
rolls 78 in the form of a four-ply web. It only 
remains now to sever the folded web into 
sheets of the proper length to complete the 
product, and this is done by cutting mechan 
ism carried upon cylinders 910. The cylinder 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
 
2 
- 
269,09 
75 
8 
9, which is of a circumference equal to the the rear end of the sheet off from the cylinder 
length of two sheets, is provided with two cut-- 10 and against the surface of cylinder 24, 
where it will immediately be caught by one of 
ting-blades, 11, which coact with grooves 13 
the sets of grippers 25, the arm 27 of which 
of the cylinder 10, which latter is of a circum 
will at that point be released from the cam 28, 
ference equal to three times the length of the 
so as to permit the grippers to close. The 
severed sheet. The cylinder 10 is provided 
sheet thus released from the cylinder 10 will 
with three sets of sheet-holding pins, 16 1718, 
have its rear end carried downward by the 
located just in the rear of the cutting-grooves, 
cylinder 24 until it is brought nearly into con 
and pivoted to the ends of arms 19, which pro 
tact with the traveling tapes 30, when the cam 
ject from rock-shafts 20, journaled upon the in 
28 will operate to open the grippers 25 and re 
O terior of the cylinder. 
The rock-shafts 20 are 
lease the sheet, which will then drop onto the 
als provided with arms 21, the ends of which 
tapes, to be conveyed away from the machine 
carry bowls, which travel upon the periphery 
in the usual manner. The cylinder 24 is so 
of the fixed can 22, which operates in the usual 
timed that it makes one-quarter of a revolu 
manner to rock the shaft 20 and cause the pins 
tion while the cylinder 10 is making one-third 
to protrude through openings in the cylinder. 
of a revolution, so that when the rear end of 
The pins 16 17 18 are provided with coiled 
the sheet carried by the pins 17 has advanced 
springs 45, which, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, 
to a position opposite the cylinder 24 it will 
encircle the pins and bear against the arms 19 
in like manner be thrown off from the cylinder 
and seats upon the interior of the cylinder, so 
by its set of fingers 12, and be caught by the 
as to normally hold the pins in a retracted po 
next succeeding set of grippers 25, to be car 
Justin advance of the cutting-grooves 
sition. 
ried around and deposited upon the tapes in 
13 the cylinder 10 is provided with recesses, in 
like manner, and so the operation will continue 
which lie series of fingers 12, which are fixed 
to be repeated, the tapes 30 being timed so 
to shafts 14, provided with arms 15, which ex 
that the papers deposited upon them will fall. 
tend inward and carry bowls, which travel upon 
only slightly in the rear of each other and as 
the periphery of a fixed cam, 23, which is so 
sume the position in the pile shown in Figs. 6 
formed as to cause the fingers 12 to be thrown 
and 7. 
outward from the cylinder at certain points, 
Although it is preferable that the cylinder 9 
for a purpose hereinafter to be explained. The 
should be of a circumference equal to the length 
shafts 14 are provided with coiled springs, (not 
of at least two sheets and the cylinder 10 of 
shown,) which operate in the usual manner to 
a circumference equal to the length of at least 
hold the fingers normally within the surface of 
three sheets, and that the cylinder 24 should 
the cylinder. 
carry at least four sets of grippers, these pro 
Located just below the cylinder 10, and at a 
portions are not essential. The cylinder 9 may 
short distance therefrom, is the small cylinder 
be either larger or smaller than the size shown 
24, provided with four sets of grippers, 25, the 
and carry a correspondingly increased or di. 
shafts 26 of which are provided with coiled 
minished number of cutting-blades, while the 
springs, which operate in the usual manner to 
cylinder 10 may also be increased or dimin. 
hold the grippers in the closed position, and 
ished in size and carry a proportionately in 
with arms 27, which are operated upon by the 
creased or diminished number of pins and 
fixed can 28 to open the grippers at the proper 
fingers. The cylinder 24 may also carry more 
time. Just in advance of the grippers 25 the 
than four sets of grippers, or may be provided 
cylinder 24 is provided with rubber cushions 
with only two or three sets. 
29, so positioned that as the grippers are 
As before stated, the printed product, as de 
closed their points will rest upon said cush 
livered by this mechanism, is in the form of a 
ions, and thus secure a firm hold upon the sheet, 
quarto or eight-page paper folded once longi 
and at the same time yield sufficiently to pre 
tudinally, from which it results that the fold 
vent the possibility of the sheets being torn. 
made by the turning-surfaces 6 and rolls 78 
As the leading end of the web arrives at the 
is upon the blank space between the pages of 
bite of the cylinders 9 10 it will be impaled 
printed matter, and that such fold and blank 
upon the pins 16, which will be protruded 
space will fall at the side of the papers as they 
at that point by the cam 22, and will be car 
fall onto the tapes 30. 
ried around upon the cylinder 10. When this 
For the purpose of indicating regular divis 
cylinder has made one-third of a revolution 
ions in the papers, so that any desired number 
one of the cutting-blades, 11, coacting with 
can be taken without the necessity of counting, 
groove 13, will sever the web, and the freshly 
an apparatus is arranged at some convenient 
cut end will at the same time be impaled upon 
point to print or otherwise make an indicating 
the pins 17, to be carried forward in like man 
mark upon this blank space upon certain of 
ner. When the cylinder 10 has advanced to 
the papers, which mark can readily be seen as 
such a position as to bring the rear end of the 
they emerge from the machine or lie in the 
sheet carried by the pins 16 opposite to the 
pile. It will readily be seen that this mark 
cylinder 24, the cam 22 will permit the pins 16 
may consist of a number, as 10 or 50, or 
to be retracted so as to release the head of the 
of any arbitrary sign that may be selected; 
sheet, and the fingers 12 will be at the same 
or it may be made by cutting or embossing the 
time operated by the cam 23 so as to throw 
55 
So 
45. 
35 
95 
IOC 
... O 
I 15 
I25 
269,019 
3 
O 
2 O 
25 
paper, or by pasting or otherwise attaching a 
small strip or tag; and that said mark may be 
made either before or after the sheets are fold 
ed or at the same time they are printed. 
It is 
also apparent that the apparatus for accom 
plishing the marking may be located in or 
upon the type-cylinder or elsewhere, so as to 
operate upon the web or sheets at any con 
venient point during its or their passage 
through the printing or delivery apparatus, 
and that a great variety of mechanisms may 
be used for the purpose without departing 
from the present invention. 
For the purpose of illustrating the invention, 
there is shown in the present case a simple 
form of apparatus for making the indicating 
mark by printing, said apparatus being locat 
ed so as to operate upon the center or blank. 
space of that portion of the web which, after 
it is split and associated, becomes the outer 
ply as it is passing over roll l, before passing 
around the turning-edges of the first longitudi 
nal folder. This apparatus consists of a short 
roll, 31, mounted upon the shaft 32 of the slit 
ter, so as to revolve continuously there with. 
This roll is provided with an ink-receptacle, 33, 
which is covered by a plate, 34, upon which is. 
a projection, 35, of suitable size and form to 
print the indicating-mark desired. This pro 
3ojection is provided with one or more slots, or 
openings, through which project the wedge 
shaped ribs 36 of a spring-seated plunger, 37. 
The journal 38 of the shaft 32 is so constructed 
as to allow said shaft to oscillate slightly, while 
the journal 39 at its opposite end is made ca 
pable of slight vertical movement. The out 
wardly-extending end 40 of the shaft 32 is sup 
ported by a rod, 41, the lower end of which is 
bifurcated and embraces the shaft 42 of a cam 
disk, 43, the rod being also provided with a 
stud, 44, which projects into the cam-groove 
50 of the disk. 
The groove 50 is of such 
form that during the greater part of the revolu 
tion of the cam the rod 41 will be held in such 
position as to keep the projection 35 of the 
roller 31 out of contact with the passing web; 
but at one point it is so formed that the rod 41 
will be lowered so as to bring the projections 
36 of the plunger 37 into contact with the web, 
thereby forcing such plunger inward and per 
mitting ink to flow through the openings in 
the projection 35 onto the web, thus printing 
the desired mark, as 46, upon the blank space 
and the fold-line between the pages, immedi 
ately after which the cam will, through rod 41, 
again raise roller 31 out of contact with the 
web. 
The gearing by which the cann-disk 43 is 
driven will be so proportioned and timed that 
said disk will operate to lower the roller 31, so 
as to make an impression upon every tenth, 
twenty-fifth, fiftieth, one hundredth, or other 
paper, according to the number which it is de 
sired that the divisions in the pile shall con 
tain; and the gearing by which the shaft 32 is 
driven will be so proportioned and timed that 
- 
35 
(45 
55 
the printing projection 35 will always be in po 
sition to make an impression when the roll 31 
is lowered. These gears, as well as the gears 
for driving the other moving parts of the ma 
chine, are not illustrated in the present case, as 
their construction and arrangement is only a 
matter involving ordinary mechanical skill, 
which is within the knowledge of all persons 
familiar with the art. 
Instead of placing the indicating-mark upon 
the blank space of the web between the printed 
pages so that it will fall upon the fold-line at 
the side of the pile, it will readily be seen that 
the mechanism for making said mark can be 
so positioned and operated as to print said 
mark upon the blank margin of the paper, 
either at the top or bottom of the page, so that 
instead of appearing at the side of the pile it 
will appear upon the projecting ends of the 
papers, as seen upon the top of the pile, as 
shown in Fig. 7. In some cases it may be 
found desirable to cause the indicating-mark 
to be placed upon several sheets in succession, 
so as to make the mark larger and more easily 
detected. 
It is to be understood that the herein-de 
scribed method of indicating the divisions in 
the pile of papers is not confined in its appli 
cation to a delivery apparatus which delivers 
the printed product in the form of that herein 
shown. The method may be practiced with 
equal facility in connection with mechanisms 
which deliver the printed products unfolded 
or with those which impart more than one 
fold, it being only necessary that the appara 
tus for making the indicating-mark should be 
so located and operated as to make said mark 
upon some part of the sheet where it can be 
seen, so as to readily distinguish the sheet 
bearing it from the others. 
- 
What I claim is 
1. The herein-described method of dividing 
the sheets delivered from a printing mechall 
ism into quires or lots containing predeter 
mined quantities, which consists in marking 
certain ones of the successively-produced 
sheets during their passage through the ma 
chine, so as to form an index of division by 
making them readily distinguishable from the 
others, substantially as described. 
2. The herein-described method of marking 
regular divisions in the pile of sheets delivered 
from a printing mechanism, which consists in 
printing an indicating-mark upon the blank 
margin of certain of the successive sheets in 
such position that it can be seen, so as to make 
such sheets readily distinguishable from the 
others in the pile, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a mechanism for 
printing the body of newspapers or other sheets, 
of a mechanism imparting a distinguishing 
mark to certain of the successively-produced 
sheets, all substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with mechanisms for 
printing the body of newspapers or other sheets 
and for delivering the same, of a mechanism 
75 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
4 
269,019 
5 
O 
for printing an indicating-mark upon the blank 
margin of certain of the sheets in such posi 
tion that it can be seen, so as to make such 
sheets readily distinguishable from the others 
in the pile, all substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with a mechanism for 
folding and delivering newspapers or other 
printed sheets, of a mechanism for placing an 
indicating-mark upon or in the fold-line of cer. 
tain of the sheets in such position that it can 
be seen, so as to make such sheets readily dis 
tinguishable from the others, all substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination, with mechanism for 
printing the body of the sheets and mechan 
ism for feeding them continuously forward, of 
a rotary mechanism for printing an indicating 
mark upon certain of the sheets, and mechan 
ism for bringing its printing-surface into oper 
ative position at proper intervals, all substan 
tially as described. 
7. The combination, with the roll, as 31, pro 
vided with an ink-receptacle, and the printing 
plate, as 35, having openings for the emission 
of ink, of the spring-seated plunger provided 
With ribs, as 36, and means for moving said 
25 
roll into and out of contact with the paper, 
all substantially as described. 
8. The combination, with the cylinder or car. 
rier, as 10, provided with sheet-retaining de 
vices, of the cylinder or carrier, as 24, provided 
with grippers which operate to seize the rear 
ends of the sheets upon the first carrier, and 
the slow-moving carrying-tapes 30, arranged to 
receive the sheets one upon another, all sub 
stantially as described. 
9. The combination, with the cylinder or 
carrier, as 10, provided with sheet-retaining 
devices and fingers, as 12, for throwing the 
rear ends of the sheets away from its surface, 
of the cylinder or carrier, as 24, provided with 
grippers which operate to seize the rear ends 
of the sheets upon the first carrier, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit. 
neSSeS. 
35 
45 
LUTEER. C. CROWELL, 
Witnesses : 
GEO. H. GRAHAM, 
J. A. HOWEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269119.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 269,119. 
C. A. R, ODNEY. 
COMPOSITE WASHER, 
Patented De0, 12, 1882 
 
 
  
 
|PITA'ESSES 
IWWEWTOR w 
Caesar // Aodzew, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CAESAR A. RODNEY, OF WILMINGTON, DELAWARE. 
COMPOSITE WASHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming. part of Letters Patent No. 269,119, dated December 12, 1882, 
Application filed October 16, 1882. 
(No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CAESAR. A. RODNEY, of 
Wilmington, in the county of New Castle and 
State of Delaware, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Composite Wash 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the class of compos 
ite washers particularly useful as locks for 
bolt-nuts which have an elastic ring or body 
inclosed in a metal casing. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved composite washer of the type men 
tioned, which is not only simpler than those 
which have preceded it, as far as I am aware, 
but which is also more durable and effective 
in its operation. 
My said invention consists of a washer com 
posed of an elastic or compressible ring or body 
seated in a stiff metal cup, the rim of which is 
fitted into the rim of another stiff metal cup, 
so as to be held therein by friction with the 
elastic ring or body contained within and be 
tween said cups, the said cups being capable 
of telescoping or sliding one within the other 
without rigid obstruction when subjected to 
pressure which compresses the inclosed com. 
pressible ring or body. 
The accompanying drawing represents a sec 
tional perspective view taken through the cen 
ter of one of my improved washers. 
An elastic or compressible ring or body, A, 
is seated in a stiff metallic cup, B, so that the 
limb of said cup surrounds the periphery of 
said ling or body. The depth of the rim b, 
however, is less than the thickness of said ring 
or body A, and it is fitted into the rim b' of 
another stiff metallic cup, B, said rim b' of the 
cup B' being likewise preferably of less depth 
than the thickness of the elastic ring A. 
The rims of the two cups B B are fitted one 
into the other sufficiently tight to be held to 
gether by friction with the ring or body A 
contained within and between the cups, while 
the cups are capable under pressure of tele 
scoping or sliding one within the other with 
out obstruction from rigid contact, so as to 
permit the elastic body A to be compressed 
without permitting it to spread under com 
pression. 
The improved washer is provided with the 
usual bolt-hole or opening, O, to permit the 
washer to be passed on over the bolt in ad 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
. 
ll)9. 
vance of the nut. As the nut is screwed home 
upon the bolt it will bear against the outer 
side of the composite washer, while the inner 
side thereof will be forced against the surface 
for iustance, the fish - plate connecting the 
adjacent ends of track - rails, through Which 
the bolt is passed. As the screwing home of 
the nut is continued the stiff metal cups will 
telescope or slide one within the other under 
the pressure, and will compress the elastic ring 
or body A, which cannot spread laterally, as 
it is firmly retained by the double walls formed 
by the overlapping rims of the containing-cups. 
When the limit of compression is reached or 
the nut has been firmly screwed up, said nut 
will be firmly locked upon its bolt by the elas 
ticity of the ring or body A, which will press 
with such force through its containing-cup 
upon the nut as to prevent said nut from turn 
I prefer the stiff metal cups B B to be of 
comparatively thin steel and the inclosed elas 
tic body or ring to be of the material now well 
known in the arts as vulcanized fiber. Vul 
canized fiber, by its tenacity, strength, dura 
bility, elasticity, and comparative economy, is 
especially desirable as the inclosed ring or body 
of my improved composite washer, and par. 
ticularly when said washers are applied to the 
bolts of railway - track joints-for instance, 
where the washers are subjected to heavy and 
unequal pressure. 
I claim as my invention 
The improved composite washer, consisting 
of a cotihpressible ring or body contained with 
in stiff telescoping metal cups, said cups being 
united together with the compressible ring be 
tween them by the frictional contact of inter 
fitting rims, substantially as described, where 
by, while the cups are capable of telescoping 
one within the other under the compression of 
the nut, there is at the same time a double wall 
to prevent spreading of the inclosed elastic 
body. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 14th day of October, A. 
D. 1882. 
C. A. RODNEY. 
. 
- 
7 
-8o 
go 
95 
Witnesses: 
WM. J. PEYTON, 
LLOYD, B. WIGHT, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269220.txt	(No Model.) 
P. W. MoD ON ALD, 
APPARATUS FOR, ENT, ARGING AND REDUCING TRANSFERS. 
No. 269,220, 
Patented Dec. 19, 1882. 
  
 
A. t 
0. S 
 
 
 
W227cesses. 
- 
77tzevedov, 
244c/,27.2%z. 
6. w %. oCullek. 
2e2ez ((-269ZZonada. 
& 62 euzeeze'-12. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER W. McDONALD, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
APPARATUS FOR ENLARGING AND REDUCING TRANSFERs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 269,220, dated December 19, 1882. 
Application filed February 10, 1882. (No model.) 
f 
2 5 
30 
O 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER. W. McDoNALD 
of Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and useful 
Apparatus for Enlarging and Reducing Lith 
ographic Transfers, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention relates to an apparatus for 
transferring designs or drawings to lithograph 
ic stones, as hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of the above-mentioned ap 
paratus. Fig. 2 is a detached view of the gear 
at the corner of the main frame for operating 
the expanding-screws, (enlarged.) Fig. 3 is an 
enlarged detached view of one of the corner 
blocks of the expanding frame, showing man 
ner of attaching the elastic sheet to said frame. 
A is a frame, which supports all of the work 
ing parts. It is provided with legs at the four 
corners for supporting it over a stone while 
operating the apparatus. In the inside of said 
frame A are arranged four long right and left 
handed screw-threaded rods, B B, journaled in 
suitable boxes near the corners. These screw 
rods are made to revolve in concert by means 
of gear with pulleys and chain-belts arranged 
in the outside of said frame A. The screw-rods 
B pass through the rails of the frame A to con 
nect. One of rods B is provided with gear and 
sprocket wheel C and a hand-crank, c. The 
gear C meshes with a similar gear set in a 
bracket, b, on the corner of the frame. The 
shaft of this gear carries a bevel-pinion, d, 
which operates a bevel-gear, D, on the screw 
rod at the right side of the frame. Sprocket 
wheel C is connected to a similar wheel, E, on 
the end of screw-rod, at the farther side of the 
frame, by a chain-belt, F. Bevel-gear D also 
has a toothed periphery, and is connected to a 
sprocket-wheel on end of screw-rod at left side 
of the frame. By this means the crank oper 
ates all the screws alike and all at the same 
time. Upon each of the said rods B are two 
traversing nuts, G, having armsg, with slots 
or sockets, in which the ends of the rods of the 
expanding frame rest. 
The expanding frame consists of four rods, 
H, having a button on each end to hold the 
rods in the slots of the arms g. The rods Hare 
passed through blocks I, in which they slide 
when in the act of stretching or contracting 
the said frame. Upon each of the rods H, be 
tween and attached to the said sliding blocks 
I, is placed an elastic or rubber sleeve, J, in 
which is secured the elastic transferring-sheet 
K by means of small staples and pins lic, put 
through eyelets in said sleeve and sheet, as seen 
in Fig. 3. This sleeve holds the sheet securely 
throughout its length along the edges, and 
perfectly stretches the sheet as well along the 
edges as the central or other portions. The 
sliding blocks I are provided with vertical 
thumb-screws L for the purpose of binding the 
corners of the frame together, when desired to 
remove the same from the main frame. The 
blocks I are also provided with vertical screws 
M, which are for the purpose of adjusting the 
frame to the surface of a stone, and for the 
purpose of raising it from the stone when it 
has received or given an impression. 
The elastic sheet K is made of india-rubber, 
and for the purpose of making it susceptible 
of receiving impressions I coat the transfer. 
ring surface with a thin coat of a mixture of 
glycerine and dextrine, which makes it suffi. 
ciently sticky to take up and retain the ink 
from an engraved stone or plate, and give off 
the ink when applied to a fresh or clean stone. 
From the foregoing the operation of this ap 
paratus is seen to be as follows: For reducing 
and transferring a design, the elastic sheet, be 
ing previously prepared to receive the impres 
sion, is first expanded or stretched to the re 
quired limit by turning the crank c, which 
operates the screw-rods B, carrying the trav 
ersing nuts G outward, thus drawing the rods 
H with them and enlarging the elastic sheet, 
which then may be pressed down upon a stone 
and receive the ink-impression. The sheet is 
thus carefully raised from the stone by turning 
the screws M until it is free, then removing 
the whole apparatus from over the stone. The 
sheet is again contracted by turning the crank 
back until the sheet has resumed its normal 
size. Now, the apparatus may be set over an 
other stone, and the transfer made by suitable 
means. Thus the design is transferred, is re 
duced in size and in exact proportion, and is 
ready for printing. For enlarging, a reverse 
operation is required. 
Having described my invention, I claim as 
An apparatus for expanding an elastic sheet 
follows: 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OC 
269,20 
for transfer purposes, consisting of frame A, the elastic sheet K, constructed, combined, and 
right and left hand screw-threaded rods BB, operating substantially as and for the purpose 
gears C D d, sprocket-wheels C D E, chain. specified. 
PETER. W. McDONALD. 
belts F, traversing nuts G, having slotted arms 
5 g, eXpanding frame H, with blocks I, having 
vertical screws l M, and the flexible sleeves J, 
provided with staples and pinsk for securing 
GEO. W.T.BBITTs, 
E. W. LARD, 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269320.txt	(No Model.) 
C, B, POST 
WIND ENGINE, 
 
3 Sheets-Sheet li, 
 
 
  
 
 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
C, B, POST, 
WIND ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 269,320, 
Patented Dec. 19, 1882, 
 
 
EE 
(No Model.) 
C. B. POST. 
WIND ENGINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 269,320, 
Patented Dec. 19, 1882, 
 
 
 
 
----2 6S2) M/... 
l 
N ? 
* 
HH*Swartama ?? 
2282 
??l. ?? /??????? ????? 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES B. POST, OF NEW LONDON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
JOHN D. OLCOTT, OF SAME PLACE. 
WIND ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 269,320, dated December 19, 1882. 
Application filed - October 14, 1882, 
(No model.) 
To all upho? ?? ??? ???cer? : 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs B. POST, of 
New London, in the county of Huron and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Wind-Engines; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it Pertails to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to wind-engines; and 
it consists in the parts and combination of 
arts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth and 
(lainei. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in front 
elevation of my wind-wheel. Fig. 2 is a verti 
cal section taken through the wind-wheel, and 
also through a portion of the supporting frame 
Work and turn-table. Figs. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, S, and 
9 are views showing more clearly the construe 
tion and operation of some of the parts of any 
device. 
A represents a shaft, On the Outer end of 
which is secured the wind-wheel. This wind 
wheel consists of a hub, B, from which extends 
a series of radial arms, B. B. 
Pivotally secured between the outer ends of 
the arms B B are a number of bars, C C, to 
which in turn are secured a series of inclined 
Valles, placed in such a position that when 
they are parallel to the face of the wheel the 
wind, as it passes between them, will act to 
revolve the wheel, but when they are turned 
st) as to be at right angles to the face of the 
wheel they will allow of the free passage of 
the Wind, ald the Wilheel Will remain at a stand 
Still. This is an old and well-known construc 
tio !), alnd no part of my invention. 
Extending downward from the bars C C are 
lugs C. C., to which are pivotally secured rods 
D D. The inner ends of the rods DD are at 
tached to springs EE, which in turn are se. 
cured to the Outer ends of a series of radial 
arms, F. F. The arms F E are secured to the 
circumference or periphery of a brake-wheel, 
G, which is sojournaled on the shaft A as to 
be allowed to have a free horizontal and re 
Volving movement to the extent desired. The 
inner edge, b, of the circumference of the brake 
Wheel G is formed beveled at an angle of about 
ninety degrees. 
H is a brake-rod, which is provided at one 
end with a brake-shoe, H', said brake-shoe be 
ing adapted to engage with the beveled por. 
tion l of the brake-wheel G. The other end of 
the brake-rod is provided with a hole, c, in 
which a cord or wire, d, is secured for operat 
ing the brake. This cord or wire d passes 
downward through the hollow pitman of the 
el gine. 
are a series of ratchet-teeth, which are 
| formed on the hub of the brake-Wheel G. 
These 
ratchet-teeth are adapted to engage with ratch 
et-teeth J, formed on the inner face of the lub 
of the wind-Wheel. (See Fig. 5.) 
K is a crank-wheel, which is secured to the 
inner end of the shaft, A. The Wrist e Of this 
crank-wheel engages in a horizontal elongated 
slot or recess, f, formed in a head-piece, Iu, 
which is secured to the pitman M. Thus it 
will be seen that as the crank-wheel revolves 
it will impart to the said pitman a vertical re 
ciprocating motion only, which obviates the 
lnecessity of using a joint in the pitlnan-rod, 
wihich would otherwise be necessary. This 
construction is shown more clearly in Fig. 7 of 
til e drawings. 
N represents the upper portion of my tur 
table, which rests on a cap-piece, O. This Up 
per portion, N, of the turn-table is provided 
with a shak, N, which is journaled at its up 
per end in the cap-piece O and at its lower end 
in a collar, I, said collar being provided with ra 
dial arms or rods g g g g, which in turn are pro 
vided with screw-threads and extend through 
to the braces h. h. h. ii., and act in connection 
with nuts ii. i*i; as a means whereby the lower 
end of the shank N may be adjusted SO as to 
center it. (See Fig. 9.) The upper ends of the 
legs ij of the supporting-frame are secured to 
gether by means of the cap-piece O, which is 
provided with depending plates killi, which 
form recesses, into which the ends of the legs 
jj fit, and are secured by means of screws Ol' 
looltis li, l l l. 
The operation of Iny device is as follows: 
When the vanes are in the position shown ill 
Fig. 1 the wind, when it strikes said vanes, will 
cause the wind-wheel to revolve. Now, if the 
wind is very strong and causes the Wheel to 
revolve at too great a speed, the centrifugal 
force will tend to bring the vanes to the posi 
tion shown iun l?Fig. 4, and thus allow the wind 
55 
7 ? 
95 
CO 
IS 
25 
4.O 
45 
???? 
- 
 
a series of pivoted vanes, of regulating-rods at 
tached to said vanes at their outer ends and 
provided with springs at their inner ends, said 
springs in turn being secured to a brake-wheel, 
substantially as and for the purpose shown 
and described. 
2. In a wind-engine, the combination, with 
a brake-wheel, said brake-wheel being pro 
vided with ratchetteeth adapted to engage 
with ratchet-teeth securel to the wind-Wheel, 
of the springs and rods, the outer ends of said 
rods being pivotally secured to a series of 
vanes, substantially as and for the purpose 
shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
(CEHARLES B, POST. 
25 
35 
A. M. BEATTIE, 
J. D. OICOTT. 
269,320 
5 
to pass through without acting. As the wheel 
revolves slower the springs E E on the end 
if the rods DD will resume the normal posi 
ton, (see Fig. 3,) thus bringing the vanes par 
allel to the face of the wheel, as shown. 
When it is desired to stop the wheel it is 
only necessary to cause the shoe H of the 
brake-rod FI to engage with the edge b of the 
brake-wheel G. This will act to push the 
brake-wheel G toward the hub of the wind 
wheel and cause the ratchets J J to engage, 
thus stopping the wheel. The engaging of the 
shoe Ell with the brake-wheel G also acts to 
stop it to a certain extent. This will in turn 
cause the vanes to come to the position shown 
in Fig. 4. Thus when the wheel is stopped by 
the brake H the vanes will be in such a posi 
tion that the wind will not act on then. 
What I claim is 
1. In a wind-engine, the combination, with 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269420.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 269,420. 
A. HUSS. 
BEER COOEER, 
Patented Deo, 19, 1882. 
77 Ze-A 
777. ZG 2. 
 
|| 1 
e 
S 
|| Shi 
-I 
| | | 1 
 
 
Az II, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
III ETT t 
 
W. 
H.A. 
SS 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPH HUSS, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
BEER COOLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 269,420, dated December 19, 1882. 
Application filed September 18, 1882, (No model.) 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ADOLPH. HuSS, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Cincinnati, in 
the county of Hamilton and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Beer-Coolers, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to those refrigerators 
or cooling appliances which include one or 
more horizontal shelves or tables arranged to 
revolve around or with a vertical shaft located 
in the center of the apparatus; and my im 
provement comprises a novel combination of 
devices whereby such coolers are especially 
adapted for holding kegs of beer, ale, and 
other liquor on tap. Said combination con 
sists of a tubular shaft, a fixed collar, a turn 
table or shelf, a ring, and a system of tie-rods, 
which latter connect the turn-table and ring, as 
hereinafter more fully described, and pointed 
out in the claim. 
is a 
front elevation of my improved beer-cooler, the 
doors that afford access to the turn-table be 
ing removed. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of 
the cooler, the turn-table and its accessories 
being shown in elevation, and a stationary 
ice-tray being represented in the upper part 
of the apparatus. Fig. 3 is an enlarged ver 
tical section of a modified form of the turn 
table, a revolving ice-tray being shown in con 
nection there with. 
Fig. 4 is a plan of said 
table, the positions of the various kegs or bar 
rels of liquor being indicated with dotted cir 
cular lines. 
In its preferred construction my cooling ap 
paratus consists of three sections or compart 
ments, A B C, arranged one above another, 
the lower section, A, serving for general stor 
age, while the other compartments, B and C, 
contain respectively the turn-table and ice 
tray. Furthermore, these several sections are 
furnished with customary hinged or removable 
doors, D. 
Located axially within the cooler is a ver 
tical shaft, E, which is hollow or tubular, said 
shaft being secured to the floor of the appa 
ratus by a collar, e, while its upper end is 
screw-threaded at e, to engage with a plate, F, 
attached to the frame of the apparatus. 
Se 
cured to this shaft at the proper elevation is 
a fixed collar, G, that supports the turn-table 
H, the periphery of said table being sustained 
by the inclined tie-rods h, the upper ends of 
the latter being attached to a ring, I, turning 
on another fixed collar, G'. The turn-table 
may be a solid disk of Wood or metal; but I 
prefer the construction seen in Figs. 3 and 4, 
where a hub, J, rests on the lower fixed collar, 
G, and carries radiating spokes or arms K, 
the outer ends of said spokes being attached 
to an annulus, L, supported by the ties h. 
When on tap the kegs, barrels, or other liquor 
receptacles, N, are set on these spokes, and 
are pierced near their lower ends at n to ad 
mitfaucets, where with the liquor can be drawn 
off as called for. 
O represents a tray or shallow tank, having 
a rack, P, to support ice, and a neck, R, to 
discharge the drippings from said tray into 
the pipe E. As seen in Fig. 2, this tray is 
stationary with reference to the apparatus; 
but said tray may be mounted on small rollers 
S, adapted to run on a circular track, T, fitted 
in the upper chamber, C. (See Fig. 3.) 
An apparatus constructed as above de 
scribed will contain eight kegs of beer or ale, 
&c., and several dozen bottles of wine, ale, 
&c., four kegs being stored in the lower com 
partment, A, and four more on the turn-table 
H, while the bottles are stowed away in the 
ice-receptacle O. The various kegs are so 
placed on the table H as to dispose two of 
them at the front side of the cooler, in order 
that the proper faucets may beinserted through 
the doors of the central section, B, and as soon 
as these kegs are emptied said faucets are with 
drawn and the table is turned around so as to 
bring the two full kegs to the front and allow 
them to be tapped. As soon as these last 
kegs are exhausted the four empty ones are 
removed from the table Hand the full kegs in 
chamber A are taken out and set on said table. 
As the wheel or table Hturns freely on its sup 
porting-shaft E, the kegs can be shifted around 
with the utmost facility, thereby allowing the 
saloon-keeper to dispense with an extra at 
tendant, 
The provision of the revolving ice-tray is 
another advantage of my cooler, as said device 
affords the most convenient access to every 
bottle, &c, placed therein. The tubular shaft 
. 
55 
65 
85 
95 
Oe 
O 
IS 
3). 
35 
So 
2 
269,420 
E allows all water from tray O to flow off freely, 
and thereby keeps the interior of the cooler per- presence of two witnesses. 
fectly dry. Finally, two or more tables or wheels 
may be journaled on shaft E. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination, in a cooler, of tubular shaft. Witnesses; 
. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in Io 
E, fixed collar G, turn-table B, ring I, and tie- 
rods h, which latter connect said table and 
ring, as herein described. 
JAMES H. LAYMAN, 
RANKIN D. JoNES. 
ADOLPH HUSS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269520.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 269,520. 
M. G-ANDY. 
BELT WINDING AND STRETCHING MACHINE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet l, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1882, 
s 
Witwe'sses 
A%-44 
Walearn? 
- 
//WYA W7OA 
4%zuez, 27. s 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
BELT WINDING AND STRETCHING MACHINE. 
No. 269,520. 
Patented Deo, 26, 1882. 
M. G ANDY. 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
ZZ 7zesses 
yy 
,3- 2.23 
27z Zrzezzzo 7 
41 co- 2z4 
- 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 269,520. 
M. G-ANDY, 
BET WINDING AND STRETCHING MACHINE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented DeC, 26, 1882, 
  
St. 
N is Z% 
 
 
( 
2 % 
Z 
Ele- 
22222222222222222222222222222222ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZaza 
Liz as gEN 
%zzS 
2 C sease -- referrera-ra-A-I-O Ces 
-- - - A - - - 
- - - 
o 
O 
A 
 
W/TWESSES 
try: 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
(NO Model.) 
No. 269,520, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1882, 
M. G-ANDY, 
BELT WINDING AND STRETCHING MACHINE, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
 
W/7/WASSES 
Waeca. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AIAURICE. GANDY, OF LIVERPOOL, COUNTY OF LAN CASTER, ENGIAND. 
BELT WINDING AND STRETC HENG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 269,520, dated December 26, 1882. 
s 
Application filed November 4, 1881. (No model.) 
O 
Go 
ers c 0 and the spring-retained plates did and 
To all chon it may concern: 
the rollers e. e. The belt is then wound on the 
Beit known that I, MAURICE G ANDY, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, and a resi- barrelf, as illustrated, being kept in position 
during the winding by the roller h, which is 55 
(lent of the city of Liverpool, in the county of 
adjustable between two swinging arms, i, the 
Lancaster, in that part of the United King 
5 
guides being gaged on the roller h to suit the 
dom of Great Britain and Ireland called Eng 
width of the belt being Wound. By this ma 
land, manufacturer of cotton belting, have in 
chine the belt B is evenly coiled on the roller 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
f, the slight tension of the mechanism insur 
in Winding under stretch Cotton-Canvas and 
ing a compact coil. 
other Machine Belts and Apparatus therefor; 
and the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Under my invention I so construct a Wind 
ing-machine that I can, when winding, so coil 
description of my invention in such full, clear, 
belts that any elasticity that they may have 
and exact terms as to enable any one skilled 
is, so to speak, nullified or killed by windling 
in the art to which it appertains or is most 
nearly connected to make and use the same, 
the belts on a barrel under stretch from the 
pressure of heavily - weighted nipper-plates. 
reference being had to the sheets of drawings 
annexed to this specification, and to the fig 
The belt remaining under this extreme stretch 
in the coil or parcel is, when opened and used, 
ures of reference marked theneon. 
My invention has for its object the nullify 
found to be free from elasticity, the same hav 
ing or killing of the elasticity of machine-belts, 
ing been, so to speak, nullified or killed. 
The machine by which I accomplish the ob. 
especially cotton-canvas belts constructed of 
jects of my invention is illustrated in plan at 
cloths stitched together, as patented to me in 
Fig. 2. Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation through 
the United States of America on the 1st day 
ZZ, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is an end elevation of Fig. 
of June, 1880, No. 228,186. . 
Itis within my knowledge that belt-stretching 
2. Fig. 5 is a detail in section of the wind 
ing-barrel. Fig. 6 is an end view of the swing 
machines of certain constructions are known in 
ing bearing. Fig. 7 is an end view on a larger 
the United States of America. For example, 
scale of the press-plates. 
I am aware that stretch-machines on the lever 
principle are in use for stretching the strips of 
The machine consists of the expanding-bar 
rel A, which is formed of the four segments 
leather used in the manufacture of leather belts; 
encircling an inner barrel and driving-shaft, 
and I am also aware that machines have been 
D. These segments are expanded by the cones 
constructed to wind leather belts under a mod 
erate stretch; but it is within my knowledge 
IEEE, which are operated by the shaft F and 
the screw-nut F, and bear against tapered 
that such machines are incapable and inade 
stepsin the mid-feathers of the segments. This 
quate for so winding cotton - canvas belts or 
winding-barrel A has one bearing in the fixed 
other belts as to nullify or kill the elasticity 
by the stretching process to which the belts 
and main frame H, which also carries the driv 
are subjected. 
ing-gear. 
The other bearing of the barrel A 
is in a swinging bracket, J, provided with the.go 
In the drawings, Figure l is a sectional side 
locking-collar K. (See Fig. 6.) 
elevation illustrative of a machine used for 
The belt B is 
fed to the widing-barrel A. through the gaged 
Winding belts under a slight tension, used 
solely for the purpose of winding the belt into 
guide L and the press-plates M. M', which are 
a compact coil or parcel for sale. This ma 
removable and interchangeable and sized to 
chine is of known construction, and is only 
suit the different widths of the belt being op 
erated upon, the plates gripping the belt equal 
here used by me to point out the state of the 
art prior to my present application for Letters 
ly over its entire width. The seat of the un 
der press-plate, M, is rigid, and the upper press 
Patent. In the drawings, B is the belt, which 
plate, M', is operated by a hinged plate, M', to 
is led between the plate and roller a, and the 
which the pressure-power is applied to any re 
rollers b b, the upper of which is carried on the 
swinging arm b and weighted by the weight 
quired extent by the lever N. 
From the press-plates M M the belt passes 
l'. The belt B then passes between the roll 
95 
75 
OO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
269,520 
45 
Io 
IS 
25 
under the roller P, which is provided with the plates, under maximum tension, upon an ex. 35 
adjustable guides Q. Q, the adjustment being 
performed through the central screw-rod and 
hand-wheel, R. 
The gaged guide, which is an essential fea 
ture of the machine, is detailed at Fig. 7, and 
consists of the gage-pieces L. L', which travel 
on the bar S, and are adjustable by the right 
and left hand screwed rod T, worked by the 
wheel U. 
By winding the belt on the expanding-roller 
A from the press-plates M. M', which are sub 
jected to an extreme nipping-pressure, I am 
enabled to wind the belts under such extreme 
tension that the belt is coiled under its maxi 
mum stretch, and the storing of the coiled 
belt under such maximum stretch kills the 
elasticity of the belt. To remove the belt from 
the barrel A, after it has been wound into the 
coil, I release the cones E, so that the Seg 
ments close in and release the coil, whiclh can 
be then withdrawn from the barrel A by open 
ing the swinging bracket and bearing J, form 
ing a gate. 
Eaving now described iny invention, I would 
have it understood that I disclaim the stretch 
machine as shown at Fig. 1 of this specifica 
tion; but 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The method substantially herein described 
of winding and maintaining the belts under 
tension, which method consists of winding the 
belt directly from the tension-nippers or press 
panding-barrel for the purpose of nullifying 
or killing the elasticity, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. A belt winding and stretching machine 
having an adjustable guide to gage the width 
of the belt, and the nipper-plates to hold the 
belt against the winding of the barrel, sub 
stantially as shown and described, for the pur 
poses specified. 
3. In a belt winding and stretching machine, 
the interchangeable press or nipperplates made 
of separate pieces of steel or other suitable 
metal, and combined with the nipper jaws and 
levers to hold and force the nippers together, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a belt winding or stretching machine, 
the press or nipper plates constructed with the 
lower plate rigid and the upper plate hinged, 
and provided with pressure - power, substal 
tially as herein described and shown. 
5. In a belt winding and stretching machine, 
the winding-barrel made of segmental pieces, 
expanded and contracted by cones, substan. 
tially as shown and described. 
6. In a belt winding and stretching machine, 
the combination of a winding-barrel, A, with 
a fixed and swinging bearing, substantially as 
described, for the purpose specified. 
MAURICE GANDY. 
FREDERICR JOHN CHEESBROUGEI, 
JOHN HAMILTON REDMOND, 
IBoth of 15 Water Street, Liverpool, England. 
Witnesses : 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269621.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. BATT. 
CAR SIGNAL. 
No. 269,621. 
Patented Deo. 26, 1882. 
 
6. 
3. 
ve 
A 
22. 23, A/ O. 4, 
7. A 
----1 
.9 
uttgalist st-2s 
252474 -2- 
- 24 
/, as 
& ) 
Z 
- is 2 
WZif 
WEA 
A teNe 
4. 
la 
- 
 
 
 
 
777/7cesses. 
l/Zareezy. 
reuers, photo-Lithographer. Washingto 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B, BATT, OF WILLIAMSVILLE, NEW YORK. 
( ; 
CARs SG NAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 269,621, dated December 26, 1882. 
Application filed July 24, 1882. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, JOHN B. BATT, of Will 
iamsville, in the county of Erie and State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Railway-Signals, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of rail 
way-signals which are designed to give notice 
of a locomotive or train approaching a street 
crossing or other place where the track is lia 
ble to be obstructed, and which are audible 
for a suitable length of time before the loco 
motive or train reaches such crossing or place, 
and which consist of a stop located near the 
track at the proper distance from the street 
crossing or other place in the direction from 
which the trains approach the same, and of 
mechanism which is operated by the stop on 
the track, as the locomotive passes over the 
stop, in such manner that the whistle is there 
by sounded automatically. 
My invention consists of the particular con 
struction of the mechanism whereby the whis 
tle is automatically sounded, as will be here 
inafter fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a fragmentary elevation of a locomotive pro 
vided with my improvement. IFig. 2 is a ver. 
tical section, showing the mechanism in the 
position in which the whistle is sounded. Fig. 
3 is a front elevation, on an enlarged scale, of 
the mechanism whereby the whistle is oper. 
ated. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the stop 
secured to one of the rails. 
like parts 
Like letters of reference refer to 
in the several figures. 
A represents the rails of the track, and B 
represents a stop secured to the outer side of 
the rails and projecting slightly above the 
tread of the rails, but not high enough to 
come in contact with any of the ordinary parts 
of the locomotive or cars running on the track. 
C represents a steam-whistle, which may be 
arranged in front of the smoke-stack, as shown 
in the drawings, or in any other convenien 
place upon the locomotive. 
c represents an arm secured to the plug of 
the whistle C for the purpose of turning the 
plug, and d represents a rod which extends 
from the end of the arme downwardly and con 
nects with a weighted lever, D, underneath 
the front platform, E, of the locomotive. The 
lever ID is pivoted at its front end, by means 
of a bracket, e, or other suitable means, to the 
under side of the platform E. 
frepresents an arm which engages against 
the under side of the lever D, and which sup 
ports the latter in a position in which it closes 
the whistle C by means of the connecting-rod 
d. The armf is mounted on a rock-shaft, g, 
which turns in bearings h, secured to the un 
der side of the front platform of the locomo 
tive. 
i is an arm secured in a depending position 
to the outer end of the shaft g, so that the 
lower end will come in contact with the stop 
B on the track as the engine passes over the 
Sale. 
j represents a rod which is attached to the 
arm i, and which extends from the latter to 
the cab of the locomotive, where it terminates 
in a bandle, k, in convenient reach of the en 
gineer or fireman. 
The stop B is secured to the track at such a 
distance from the street-crossing or other point 
where the train is required to signal its ap 
proach that ample warning is given of the 
approach of the train. If the railway has but 
a single track, over which trains move in both 
directions, a stop B is secured to the track 
on both sides of the street-crossing, at proper 
distances from the same, and in either case on 
that side of the track where the stop willcome 
in contact with the depending arm i of the 
alarm mechanism on the locomotive. As the 
arm i strikes the stop B the arm is turned 
backwardly, whereby the arm f, which is 
mounted on the same shaft, g, with the arm i. 
is swung forwardly and away from under the 
weighted lever D, as shown in Fig. 2. The 
lever ID now descends by gravity and draws 
the rod d downwardly, whereby the steam 
cock attached to the whistle C is opened and 
the latter is sounded. The parts remain in 
this position, with the whistle blowing, until 
a sufficient signal has been given, when the 
attendant in the cab of the locomotive pushes 
the rodj forwardly, whereby the supporting 
armf is swung back under the lever D, there 
by raising the latter and shutting the steam 
cock of the whistle by the rod d. The lever 
D is preferably provided on its under side with 
a notch or depression, in which the end of the 
supporting-arm f engages to more securely 
 
35 
So 
SS 
7 O 
75 
90. 
95 
OC 
269,621 
S 
O 
15 
, 
support the lever on the arm. The latter is 
preferably provided with a weight, l, to retain 
the same in an inclined position when disen 
gaged from the lever ID., 
Suitable stops, in on, may be provided on the 
frame or some other suitable part of the loco 
motive, whereby the movement of the mech 
: 
anism is limited. 
By my invention the signal is given auto 
matically at the proper place, and the engineer 
and fireman are thereby relieved from the duty 
of observing the signal-posts and other de 
vices now used on railroads for calling the at 
tention of the engineers to the fact that they 
are required to give a signal in passing such 
place. These signals are now frequently omit 
led or given too late, because the engineer did 
not notice the sigual-post in time, when the 
failure to give the signal at the proper place 
may cause an accident. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with a locomotive-whis 
tle, of a weighted lever, D, a rod, d, connect 
ing said lever with the whistle, a horizontal 
25 
3 ) 
35 
4 O 
shaft, (, provided with an arm, f, supporting 
said lever, and a depending arm, i, attached to 
said shaft and adapted to come in contact 
with a stop on the track, whereby the arm fis 
withdrawn from the weighted lever and the 
latter caused to descend, thereby sounding the 
whistle, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a locomotive-whis 
tle, of a weighted lever, D, a rod, d, connect 
ing said lever with the whistle, a horizontal 
shaft, (1, provided with an arm, f, supporting 
said lever, a depending arm, i, attached to 
said shaft and adapted to be operated by a 
stop on the track, and a rod, j, extending from 
one of the arms secured to the shaft (1 to within 
reach of the attendant, whereby the shaft and 
arms can be readily returned to their former 
position after the alarm has been sounded, 
substantially as set forth. 
JOHN B. BATT. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. J. BONNER, 
CHAS, F. GE YER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269721.txt	UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
MAYER. M. SCHWARTZ, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MANUFACTURE OF ORNAMENTAL METALLI C F O L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 269,721, dated December 26, 1882. 
Application fied September 5, 1882. (No specimens.) 
S 
O 
S 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MAYER. M. SCHWARTZ, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in the Manufacture of Orliamental 
Metallic Foil, of which the following is a speci. 
fication. 
My improvement relates to metallic foil 
which is printed upon or colored, and is de 
signed to produce new ornamental effect upon 
the colored or printed portion of the foil. 
The improvement can be carried out with 
the aid of the presses or apparatus usually en 
ployed to print or color metallic foil; and it 
may be briefly stated to consist in printing the 
metallic foil between a plater), which has what 
may be termed a recticulate surface, and a 
bed which carries the inked or colored type 
block or plate, which is to be impressed upon 
the surface of the foil. By bed and platen I 
intend the two printing instrumentalities by 
which the impression is inade upon the foil, 
whether in all oscillating press or a rotary or 
other type of press. The effect of pressing the 
foil between the reticulate face of the platen 
and the inked face of the bed is to reproduce in 
color on the foil the reticulate pattern carried 
by or formed on the platen. 
The plate can conveniently and cheaply be 
provided with what I have termed a reticu 
late surface. Suppose, for instance, it be de 
sired to carry out my improvement in an os 
cillating printing-press of the ordinary kind, 
all that is needed is to cover the face of the 
platen with an open-work fabric or its equiv 
alent-such as lace, tarlatan, bobbinet, &c. 
This material can be held in place on the platen 
in any suitable way. The result will be that 
the pattern of the fabric will be reproduced in 
color on the foil by and during the act of print 
ing the latter, the threads of the fabric appa 
rently acting as minute ribs or ridges, before 
which the iuk, when pressed upon the face of 
3o 
40 
the foil, yields, with the result of producing in 
the colored or printed portion of the foil cor 
responding lines of lighter color than the body 
of the printed portion. 
The impression-block carried by the bed may 
be inade SimOOth and unbroken, so as to print 
the Whole of the foil in one or more solid cul 
ors; or it may be formed with raised letters, 
figures, or other characters, which alone are 
printed on the foil; or the letters, figures, or 
other ornamentation may be sunken, in which 
case the groundwork alone will be colored. It 
each and every case, however, the pattern of 
the fabric or reticulant surface of the platen 
will be reproduced in the colored portion of 
the foil by and during the act of printing the 
latter. 
By the Words reticulate surface' I do not 
Wish to be understood as confining myself to 
a strictly net-Work pattern or pattern in which 
the lines cross one another, for it is mani 
fest that the same may be considerably varied 
without departure from my invention. Nor 
do I restrict myself to the use of open-work 
fabrics or equivalent material for the purpose 
of imparting a reticular surface to the platen. 
What I claim as new and of my invention 
S 
The improvement in the art of printing me. 
tallic foil, which consists in pressing said foil 
between a bed which carries the inked impres 
sion plate and a platen which is provided with 
a reticulate surface, substantially as described, 
Whereby the surface-pattern on the platen is 
reproduced on the printed surface of the foil 
by and during the act of printing said foil, sub 
stantially as hereinbefore set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 4th day of September, 1882. 
MAYER. M. SCHWARTZ. 
45 
50 
55 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR HURST, 
JAMES S. LEHMAIER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269821.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 269,821. 
D, BATEMAN. 
CARD GRINDING ROLL. 
Patented Jan. 2, 1883, 
d 
 
Wzzelle?. 
(S. Sol 
J%azz. 
7%. 627.4 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL BATE MAN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CARD GRN DING RO. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 269,821, dated January 2, 1883. 
Amplication filed June 5, 1882. (No model.) 
35 
45 
My improved roller may be used in connec 
To all whom it may concern: 
tion with the ordinary traverse notion, as illus. 
Be it known that I, DANIEL BATEMAN, a 
trated in Fig. 1. 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain and Ire 
The shaft A of the roller is mounted in bear 
land, and a resident of Philadelphia, Pennsyl 
ings a on the frame, and has a rotary motion 
vania, have invented certain Improvements in 
imparted to it by a belt passing over a pulley, 
Jard Grinding Rolls, of which the following 
is a specification. 
P, at one end of the shaft A, and on the other 
end is a worm, F, gearing into a worm-wheel, 
The object of my invention is to construct a 
grinding-roll which will grind the teeth of card- D, mounted in a bracket, E, in which the shaft 
fillets more effectually than those of the ordi. A may turn. On the stud of this bracket is 
nary form. This object I attain by providing formed an eccentric acting on the yoke G, car 
the roller with annular grooves and making lied by the step H, which is fixed to the frame 
the ridges thus formed of alternately different of the machine. As the shaft with its worm 
heights. 
F rotates a slow longitudinal reciprocating 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is motion will thus be imparted by the eccentric 
a view of my improved grinding-roller with and yoke to the roller across the face of the 
devices for imparting to it a traverse motion; cards. I find that by providing the grinding 
Fig. 2, an enlarged view of a part of the roller. surface with these alternately high and low V. 
My inproved roller may be constructed of shaped ridges the teeth of the card, as the 
any of the well-known materials used in con- roller traverses across the cylinder, will be more 
structing card-grinding rolls; but I prefer to effectually ground than with a grooved roller 
make it by applying a layer of plastic emery I whose ridges are all of about the same height. 
I claim as my invention 
to the surface of a metal cylinder, and I then 
A card-grinding roller having annular V. 
form on the surface of this emery, while still 
plastic, annular V-shaped grooves, whose depth shaped grooves, with ridges, of which every 
will vary according to... the character of the alternate one is slightly higher than those in 
card-teeth to be ground. I prefer to make all termediate, substantially as described. 
the grooves of about the same depth; but the 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
ridges I make of different heights, every alter- to this specification in the presence of two sub 
nate ridge being about one-sixteenth of an scribing witnesses, 
inch higher than the intermediate ones. In- 
stead of forming these ridges in the plastic 
emery, they may be formed by turning, and of 
any suitable material. 
HARRY DRURY, 
HUBERT HOWSON. 
DANL, BATEMAN. 
Witnesses: 
O 
15 
3O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US269921.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 269,921. 
 
J. DEMAREST. 
CISTERN FOR WATER CLOSETS 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan, 2, 1883. 
(No Model.) 
No. 269,921. 
J. DEMAREST. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
CISTERN FOR WATER CLOSETS 
Patented Jan. 2, 1883. 
Z2 57%z 2S 
- a 5 
%NS2. S 
S4 N6sh 
SaSassy& 2 
9. =s Citi 
 
 
 
 
 
Say2 SX2 
3. 
SS S S 
?y 
 
Y 
 
 
2 
 
SSSSSSSSSSS322 
22 
S NSS 2 
2x 
 
 
2 Ng SS 2S3% 
S&2S 
2S 2Y 
SD 
  
S. 
SNSSys 
s 
S. 
E. 
 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J O HN DEMAREST, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CISTERN FOR WATER CLOSETs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 269,921, dated January 2, 1888. 
Application filed August 21, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
To (till whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN DEMAREST, of the 
city and State of New York, have invented an 
Improvement in Cisterns for Water-Closets, 
of which the following is a specification. 
In Letters Patent No. 260,952, granted to 
me, a cistern is shown with a pipe leading to 
the Water-closet and a valve seat at the upper 
end of said pipe and within the cistern, and a 
valve at the lower end of a tube that is guided 
by a ring and held up when lifted by the ac 
tion of a float and lever, the valve dropping 
when sufficient water has run from the cistern 
to allow the float to descend and liberate the 
tube and valve. 
My present invention is for producing a pre 
limilary and after wash to the closet by com 
bining with the cistern two of said valves and 
arranging them in such a manner that one 
valve is open as the water-closet seat or plat 
form is depressed, and thereby producing a 
preliminary wash, and it closes automatically 
as the water descends to a predetermined level. 
The other valve is opened when the water. 
closet seat or platform rises and the water 
flows until the valve closes automatically, 
Washing or flushing the closet. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
the cistern and valves. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
section at the line at ac, and Fig. 3 is a detached 
view of part of the valve-tube and float. 
The cistern a, pipe d, leading to the water 
closet, valve-seats e, valves i, tubes f, ring 
guides m, standards e', levers u', and floats 
are substantially the same as shown in the 
aforesaid patent, to which a reference is here 
by expressly made. I have, however, im 
proved upon the same by providing a neck, 3, 
aroulid the tube?, and forming the end of the 
lever it? as a pawl to engage the upper offset 
of the neck and support the tubular valve by 
a positive device, instead of depending on 
friction. When the valve is allowed to close 
upon its seat there is a column of Water in the 
pipe below the valve, and this runs down rap 
idly into the closet, and air is drawn in at the 
upper end of the tubular valve-stem. In prac 
tice I found that when the tubular valve-stem. 
was made parallel, or nearly so, as in my afore 
said patent, the rush of air into this pipe pro 
duced a very disagreeable whistling noise. By 
flaring the upper end of this tubular valve 
stem, as shown at f', the aforesaid difficulty 
is removed, or nearly so, as the air passes into 
the pipe with but little noise; I also provide 
a passage-way in the cistern or a branch pipe 
below the same at H, uniting the pipe that 
leads to the water-closet with the two valve 
seats. Both valves, levers, and floats are the 
same, except that in the valve appliances at 
the right in Fig. 2, and designated R, the 
float-lever is bent so as to stand at a higher 
elevation than the float of the left-hand appli. 
ances marked L, and these are to be so con 
structed, proportioned, and arranged that the 
right-hand valve, when raised, will be allowed 
to drop automatically when the water has de 
scended to a given level, (here designated 
as 10.) The float at L will still be operative, 
and its lever will hold up the left-hand valve, 
if raised, until the water has still further de 
scended in the cistern-say to the level marked 
11. Hence, if the valve at R is raised just be 
fore the closet is used, water will run out of 
the cistern as a preliminary wash, and then 
automatically stopped by the valve being 
dropped when the water has descended to 10, 
and if the valve of L is raised after the closet 
has been used water will be allowed to run out 
until the lowest level, 11, is reached, and the 
valve of L will then be dropped automatically 
and the flow of water to the closet stopped. 
I remark that, although I prefer the tubular 
valve-stems shown, the operation will be the 
same if the valve-stems are solid; and I am 
not limited to any particular kind of valve or 
stem or appliance for holding the valves up by 
the action of the floats or dropping the Same 
automatically by the descent of such floats. 
In order to operate the valves at R and L. 
by the movement of the Water-closet seat, or 
by a platform or step on the floor, or by the 
opening and closing of the door of the water 
closet, any suitable mechanical appliance may 
be resorted to, as valves for closet-cisterns have 
heretofore received motion from such sources. 
I, however, prefer and use the devices next 
described. 
in is a lever upon a fulcrum, O, with a Weight, 
17. At the other end of the lever there is a 
link, s, to the wire or chain leading to the seat 
or other source of motion. 
35 
40 
65 
o 
75 
90 
f OO 
2 
9269,92 
Upon the lever n are double-acting latches 
2. The combination, with the cistern-valve, 45 
3. The combination, in a water-closet cistern, 5o 
1. The combination, with a water-closet cis 
20, pivoted at their upper ends to the lever tern, of two valves, mechanism for raising such 
and having catches 21 at their lower ends valves, floats, and levers for holding up such 4o 
adapted to grasp the collar 22 at the upper valves and for allowing the same to drop auto 
end of the valve-stem. Hence, when the link matically when the water in the cistern descends 
s is pulled upon by depressing the seat or plat. to the two different levels, substantially as set 
form, the lever n is moved, the weight 17 lifted, forth. 
and the valve at R, lifted to allow the aforesaid 
preliminary wash to run. It is, however, nec. of a stem having a neck, a guide for such stem, 
1o essary to automatically disconnect the catches a float and a lever having a pawl to engage 
21 as the lever and latches 20 approach the such stem and support the valve, substantially 
end of the upward movement. This is effected as set forth. 
by the cam - projections 23 on 20 coming in 
contact with the cross-bar S', and moving 21 of two valves, two floats, and means for hold 
15 away from 22, and leaving the valve R under ing up the valves and for allowing the valves 
the control of its lever and float. As the le- to drop automatically at different levels of the 
ver n is moved and the weight raised as afore-water, a lever and weight and catches on the 
said, the latches 30 (at the opposite side of the lever at opposite sides of its fulcrum for alter. 55 
lever-fulcrum to the latches 20) descend and nately raising the valves and means for dis 
2O their catches 31 come below the collar 32 of connecting the catches, substantially as set 
the left-hand valve-stem L. Hence when the forth. 
the closet-seat is liberated by the person rising 
4. The combination, with the water-closet 
from the same the lever-weight falls, and by cistern, of a valve, a stem, a guide for the stem, 6o 
the latches 30 and catches 31 the collar 32 and latches for lifting the valve and stem, a float, 
25 its valve are lifted, allowing the after flow of lever, and pawl for holding up the valve and 
water to take place to wash out the closet, the for allowing it to drop automatically, substan 
catches 31 are disengaged automatically from tially as specified. 
32 by the cams 33 on 30 coming in contact with 
the cross-bar S. 
may be mortised for the catches to pass through, purposes set forth. 
or the cross-bar inay be notched or have pins 
or projections that act against the cams 23 and D. 1882. 
33 to move the latches as the lever reaches its 
35 extreme movement in one direction or the 
tern and the valve, the tubular stem to the 
It is to be understood that the cross-bar S' valve having an open flaring upper end, for the 
Signed by me this 15th day of August, A. 
JOHN DEMAREST. 
5. The combination of the water-closet cis- 65 
5 
3o 
other. 
claim as my invention- 
Witnesses: 
MAX GOEBEL, 
JOHN REID. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270023.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 270,023, 
W. E. CRAND ALL. 
R00KING HORSE AND GIG, . 
Patented Jan, 2, 1883 
WITNESSES: - 
INVENTOR 
* 
: 
ha of 6rua 
BY 
N. peers, Photo-lithographer, washington, d. c. 
 
> 
22 
se 4 N 
ATTORNEY 
 
. 
. 
. 
. 
I5 
! 
s- 
; 
* , 
. 
al 
s 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. CRANDALL OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ROCKING HORSE AND G|G. 
: - 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,028, dated January 2, 1883. 
Application filed November 20, 1882. (No model.) 
5 in a Rocking EIorse and Gig; and I do hereby 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM E. CRANDALL, the braces c, or in some other convenient man- 45 
To all whom it may concern: 
be suitably upholstered, if desired. To one of 
of the city, county, and State of New York, ner, may be attached reins e, extending back 
have invented a new and useful Improvement to the gig-body. 
The horses may have straps f to simulate 
is 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and traces and other parts of a harness; and it 
exact description of the same, reference being will be observed that the wheels have no axles, so 
had to the accompanying sheet of drawings, and therefore do not turn. 
Now, when a child is seated in the gig F and 
forming part of this specification. 
to This invention has for its object an improved draws upon the reins e the horses D at once 
rocking toy for children; and the invention con- cominence to oscillate on the springs C, which 
sists in Oue or more horses combined with a motion is communicated to the rockers A, 55 
spring gig and rockers, for the purpose herein-causing the gig F to rock with them, while at 
after fully described. 
the same time the horses not only rock in uni 
In the accompanying drawing the figure is son there with, but have an oscillating motion 
, 
on their springs independently of the rockers, 
a perspective view of my invention. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like parts. so that a fair semblance of a gig and team in bo - a 
As is well known, spring-horses on a plat- motion is produced to afford infinite amuse- 
form and horses without springs mounted on ment to the child in the gig, while the exertion 
2O rockers have heretofore been made for the required to keep the device in motion imparts 
amusement of children; but of these the child healthful exercise. 
soon tires, for the reason that they either cost 
too much effort to impart motion to them, or instead of two with the same result. 
because they lack in some particular an ele- 
interest. 
ment on the foregoing, a pair of rockers, A, horses, in combination with a pair of rockers, 
are made, of any convenient size and curve, and a gig-body with fixed wheels, which unite 
3o placed parallel to each other and united by a the gig to the rockers, substantially as and for 
platform, B. To each of these rockers are firmly the purpose described. 
bolted springs C, either to their forward part, 
2. In a toy, the combination of one or more 75 
as in the drawing, or otherwise. These springs spring-horses with a gig having fixed wheels, 
may be either flat or spiral, but preferably the a pair of rockers, and reins, substantially as- 
springs are securely fastened either the front 
3. In a toy, one or mote horses, in glombina 
legs, a, or the hind legs, b, of toy horses D, tion with springs C, rockers A, a gig-body, F, 8o 
made of wood or any other suitable material. and wheels E, substantially as ant for the 
These horses are secured together by braces c. purpose described. 
- 
WM. E. CRANDALL. 
4o Also fixed to the rockers A, at or near their 
rear ends, are two wheels, E, and to the upper 
segments of these wheels is fixed a gig-body, 
F. This body may have a seat, within it, and 
It is apparent that one horse may be used 65 
Having now described my invention, what 
25 ment that will lend to them a lasting source of I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
35 former, and to the other or upper ends of these and for the purpose described. 
1. A toy consisting of one or more spring- 7 or 
. 
Witnesses: 
G. M. PLYMPTON, 
JNO. N. BRUNS. 
4. 
To construct my toy, which is an improve- . 
-? 
. . ." 
-- 
Patent, is 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270123.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 270, 123. 
J.REIMERS. 
FANNING APPARATUS, 
Patented Jan. 2, 1883, 
22 
ZZZZAZZZAZZZWZZZZZZZMZZZZZAZZZZZZZZA vV 
 
 
 
 
 
 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzza 
/??  
ZZ 
2 
7 
Cz Z 
- 
I 
WITNESSESi4ta 
6&azie 
 
e 2 Z : z ZZI 
INVENTOR; 
BYesse 
ATTORNEYS, 
J 
9 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D. 
JACOBREIMERS, OF DAVENPORT, IoWA. 
FANNING APPARATUS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,128, dated January 2, 1883. 
Application filed September7, 1882. (No model.) 
To all chom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, JACOBREIMERs, ofDav 
i enport, in thecounty of Scottand State of Iowa, 
have invented a new and Improved Fanning 
Apparatus, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved device for supplying rooms 
with a supply of cool and refreshing air. - 
The invention consists in a fan-blower pro 
vided with a series of tubular arms for con 
ducting the wind or air in different directions. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similarletters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
. 
Figure lisa longitudinalsectional elevatio 
of my improved fanning apparatus. Fig. 2 is 
a longitudinal sectional elevation ofa modifi 
cation, showing the same attached to the un 
der side of a table. Figs. 3 and 4 show cross 
sectional elevations of my improved fanning 
apparatus. Fig. 5 is a longitudinal sectional 
elevation of the same. Fig. 6 is a sectional 
plan view of a modification. 
A series of wings or blades, A, are mounted 
on a horizontal shaft, B, within a cylindrical 
casing, C, provided with a series of tubular 
arms, D, which may project upward, down 
ward, sidewise, or diagonally, as may be de 
sired, andi according to where the current of 
air is to be delivered. The casings Care sus 
pended by means of bails E and rods orchains 
E' from the ceiling; or these casings are at 
tached to the under side of a table, F. The 
shaft B can be rotated by means of a clock 
work operated by a spring or weight in a box, 
G; or this shaft can be rotated by means ofa 
treadle, H. In the modification shown in Fig. 
I C 
IS 
2O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
, 
2 the tubular arms D project upward into an 
ornamental standard, J, on the table, and the 
upper ends of these tubular arms are benthori 
zontally. If the shaft Bis rotated, the wings 
or blades A operate like a rotary an and pro 
duce strong currents within the casings C, from 
where the currents ofair pass through the tubu 
lar arms D, and issue from the outer ends of 
the same and cool the persons below the ap 
paratus or at the side ofit-for instance, when 
it is secured on the table. 
lf desired, the shaft B canbe arranged above 
the table, and the blades are contained witlin 
a box provided with a seriesofarms, D, through 
which the air escapes. 
The said box is to rest 
on a heavy base resting on the table F; orthe 
shaft B can be arranged below the table, and 
the arms D of the box extend to the edges of . 
the table, and then project upward, as shown 
in Fig. 6. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claimas new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patenti, is 
1. A fanning apparatus made substantially. 
as herein shown and described, and consisting 
of a series of fan wings or blades mounted on 
a rotary shaft, and contained within a casing 
provided with a series of tubular armsfor con 
ducting the air in different directions, as set 
forth. 
2. The combination, with the shaft B, of the 
fan wings or blades A, the casing C, a series 
of tubular arms, D, and a clock-work for rotat 
ing the shaft, substantially as herein shown 
and described, and for the purpose set forth. 
JACOB REIMERS. 
Witnesses: 
FRED. HEINZ, 
OTTO SMITE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270223.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 270,223, 
C. A., INGLIS, 
ROAD GUIDE, 
Patented Jan. 9, 1883, 
A 424ow ca/or o7 
& a 22 or ?aaze a 7 
2724.7% ca 724 Z72ace 
224-222 eo as preaeaea 
 
 
Z72 -eza 42 
1-2 4-2- - 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. O. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. INGLIS, OF LANCASTER, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
FOURTH TO HENRY ROHRER AND JACOB FETTER, OF SAME PLACE. 
ROAD - GUIDE. 
s 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,228, dated January 9, 1883. 
Application filed August 14, 1882. (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
- 
To all choin it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHAs. A. INGLIS, a citi 
zen dif the United States, residing at Lancas 
ter, in the county of Lancaster and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Road-Guide, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
road-guides, in which the roads are indicated 
by particular colors or shapes of objects for 
showing the places to which certain roads lead. 
It is well known that the ordinary guide 
boards at the intersection of roads frequently 
get twisted out of place and thereby become 
useless, and that private or by roads not deemed 
sufficiently important to mark mislead trav. 
elers. The object of my improvement is to over 
come these difficulties. I attain this object by 
the mechanism illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view of a road-guide at the in 
tersection of roads, and Figs. 2 and 3 are views 
of one of the inter mediate road-guides. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts in the 
several views. 
The guide-board A for the intersection of 
roads can be made of any suitable material, 
though prefer sheet metal. Above the guide. 
board is a plate, P, containing directions, viz: 
Follow color of ball or shape of mark until 
the place named is reached. Each end B of 
the guide - board itself has the ?name of the 
place to which it directs painted upon it, a 
colored ball or other figure, C, and a mark, n, 
both different for each road, being placed at 
the outer end. 
At a short distance beyond the main guide. 
board A on the road is an upright with a small 
auxiliary guide, D, the shape and color of the 
auxiliary guides indicating the direction shown 
on the main guide-board A. At such distances 
along the road, particularly at points just be 
yond those at which small or private roads 
lead off the same, auxiliary guides D are 
erected to guide the traveler. 
The directions on the plate P and the mark 
in are painted with luminous paint, in order to 
render them visible at night. If preferable, 
shapes in luminous paint can be used alone; 
but I prefer the colors in combination with the 
shapes as being most easily seen during the 
day. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Pattent, is- 
A guide-board apparatus, consisting of the 
combination of a guide-board, A, having a 
suitable shape, object, or color, C, for each 
road, and directing-plate P, with the auxiliary 
guides D, corresponding in shape and color to 
the object C, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
- 
- 
CHARLES A. INGLIS, 
45 
so 
55 
Witnesses: 
E. CARPENTER, 
WM, R. GERHART. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270323.txt	(No Model). 
No. 270,323, 
W. I. MANN. 
HOSE AND PIPE COUPLING, 
Patented Jan. 9, 1883, 
() 
No. 
 
%) 
7%726sses. 
<a 24-7 
au 
17%zzzzzz Z.1%zzzz, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. I. MANN, OF BRADDOCK, PENNSYLVANIA. 
HOSE AND PIPE COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,323; dated January 9, 1888. 
Application filed August 25, 1882. (No model.) 
To all choin it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. I. MANN, of 
Braddock, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have iuvented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Hose and 
Pipe Couplings; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, which will enable 
others skillel in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a view of the adjoining ends of 
two pipe sections or couplings, with the tighten 
ing-nut partly in section. Fig. 2 is an end view 
of the nut. 
This invention relates to the construction of 
pipe-couplings, and has for its object the pro 
duction of a device which shall be cheap and 
easily inade, and shall enable the sections of 
pipe to be readily coupled and uncoupled, and 
when in use make and preserve a tight joint. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts, substantially as 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, A and C are the respective 
sections of the coupling device. Section A has 
its coupling end trued off or faced, and back 
of this is formed with a coarse screw-thread, b. 
Upon this plays the nut B, threaded to corre 
spond. 
Beyond the threaded part of nut B, I con 
struct an annular recess, c, ending with the 
in Wardly-projecting lugs d, arranged equidis. 
tantly around the circumference of the nut, and 
leaving equal spaces e between them. The 
inner face of the collars or lugs d is trued off 
to a common plane. The other coupling-sec 
tion, C, has its end faced off, and is provided 
around that end with the equidistant lugs f, 
each corresponding in size with the spaces e 
between the lugs d of the nut B. The lugs f 
are somewhat shorter than the recess c of the 
nut, and have their rear ends or faces trued 
off to a common plane, as shown, and their ra. 
dial height is such as to enter and revolve in 
recess c of nut B. 
In setting the nut for coupling it is adjust 
ed so as to have the recess formed between 
lugs d and the end of section A slightly great 
er than the length of lugs f of section C. Sec 
tion C is then set so that its lugs feorrespond 
with spacese of the nut, whereupon it is pushed 
into the nut until the plane ends of the two 
sections meet, after which a partial revolution 55 
of nut B causes its lugs d to pass behind the 
lugs f of section C, and the screw-thread then 
forces the sections into close contact, making 
an extremely tightjunction. To uncouple, the 
nut B is turned in the opposite direction a 6o 
part of a revolution till the spacese of nut B 
correspond, with the lugs f of section C, when 
the two can be separated. In use the nut B 
is never removed from the section A. In the 
drawings I have shown on nut B three lugs 65 
and three spaces, and the same on section C. 
Thus made, one-sixth of a revolution of nut B 
suffices to couple or uncouple; but the parts 
can be made with two lugs each and two 
spaces, which will require one-fourth of a rev. 7o 
olution to couple and uncouple. , 
To facilitate the setting I place on the sec 
tion A two lugs, g, a little over a sixth of the 
circumference apart, and on the end of nut B 
a pill, h, so set as to strike the lugs g at the 7 
5 
limits of motion required for the nut B. 
pin, k, for a spanner-wrench is made on nut B; 
or, instead, a handle may be fitted to it. 
The faces of the sections A C may be made 
true enough to fit Water-tight; or a gasket may 8o 
be used between them. 
To prevent the sections. A C or either of 
them froin revolving while operating the nut, I 
make a slight projection on one of them, as at 
in which fits a corresponding recess on the 85 
other, so that, when the parts AC are pushed 
together the projection m will lock both parts 
against revolution separately. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a pipe-coupling, the combination of the 
section A, having thread b, threaded nut B, 
having recess c and two or more overhanging 
equidistant lugs, d, and section C, having equi 
distant lugsf, Corfesponding to the spaces be 
tween lugs d of the nut, and adapted to pass 95 
through the spaces between the lugs d and 
engage with the latter on a partial revolution 
of the nut, substantially as described. 
2. In a pipe-coupling, the combination of 
section A, having thread b, threaded nut B, Ioo 
having recess c and two or more overhang 
ing equidistant lugs d, and sections C, hav. 
8 
C 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
- 
270,323 
ing equidistant lugs f, corresponding to the 
spaces between lugs d of the nut, both said 
sections AC having their adjacent ends faced 
true, but one provided with a projection and 
the other with a recess, substantially as de 
scribed, whereby when set together said sec. 
tions are locked against separate revolution. 
3. The combination of section C, having 
lags f, threaded nut B, having recess c and 
lugs d, and pinh, with section A, having thread 
b and lugs gg, substantially as described. 
4. In a pipe or hose coupling, the nut B, 
having slots e and recess c, in combination 
O 
d 
IS 
with the coupling-section C, having the cor 
responding lugs, d, adapted to pass through 
said slots and engage the outer edge of said 
recess upon a partial revolution of the nut, 
substantially as specified, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony that if claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM. I. MANN. 
Witnesses: 
T. J. PATTERSON, 
T. J. MCTIG-BE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270423.txt	(No Model) 
D. GROES BECK. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
SPARK ARRESTER FOR LOCOMOTIVES, 
No. 270,423. 
Patented Jan. 9, 1883, 
 
( 
P 
acces 
assegi 
N 
S 
A 
s 
Vla 
exas 
n 
n 
: 
s 
4/z(zzesses; 
y 
- 
24-24-222e2. 
/zzezzaz; 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
D. GROES BECK. 
SPARKARRESTER FOR LOCOMOTIVES, 
No. 270,423, 
Patented Jan, 9, 1883, 
errace 
orror-re 
 
A 
 
6/2ZZz6sses, 
gas. 
Zzzzzezy 
% 92%, 7%l 
N. PeTERS. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IDAVID GROES BECK, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE GROESBECK 
& W RIGHT SPARK ARRESTER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SPARK-AR RESTER FOR LOCOMOTIVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,423, dated January 9, 1883. 
Application filed October 5, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To till whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, DAVID GROESBECK, of 
New York city, county and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Spark-Arresters for Locomo 
tives, of which the following is a specification. 
My improvement relates more especially to 
locomotives and similar engines of that class 
provided with means for deflecting the sparks 
into a receptacle arranged below the smoke 
stack; and it consists in the peculiar construc 
tion and arrangement of parts, as hereinafter 
more fully described, and then pointed out in 
the claims. 
Figure in the annexed drawings presents 
a lougitudinal section of an ordinary type of 
locomotive provided with my improvements. 
Fig. 2 is a fragmentary plan of the front end, 
and Fig. 3 a sectional plan on line acac of Fig.1. 
The engine is presumed to be of the ordinary 
construction throughout, except at the front 
end or in the smoke-arch, where my improve 
ments are embodied, as will be hereinafter de 
scribed. 
On reference to the drawings, more particu 
larly Fig. 1, it will be noted that I construct 
the smoke-arch at with an inclined partition or 
hood, b, arranged about diagonally therein and 
extending completely across the chamber, as 
seen in Figs, 2 and 3, its upper end or edge 
being joined with the tube-sheet just above the 
upper line of tubes, c, while its lower end curves 
downwardly near the front or lower corner of the 
smoke-chamber and extends into a depressed 
trough or water-tank, d, which depends from 
the front end of the smoke-chamber down be 
tween the cylinders and truck-wheels, as shown 
in Fig. 1, and contains a charge of water up to 
about the level indicated. The partition b 
does not dip into the water of the tank, but 
terminates above the water-level, as shown in 
Fig. 1, at such a distance as to leave a free 
space between the two equal to the combined 
area of the flues. It will hence be observed 
that this partition compels the draft or gases 
from the flues to take an indirect passage to 
ward the stack-that is, diagonally downward 
from under the partition-thence down toward 
or into the water-tank, and thence up and out 
through the stack, as indicated by the arrows. 
Consequently any sparks or live coals or cin 
ders discharging with the draft from the flues . 
will be effectually arrested by this partition, 
and thence deflected forcibly down into the wa 
ter of the tank, thus extinguishing and retain 
ing the same and preventing their discharge 
from the stack, thereby accomplishing a most 
important result heretofore much sought for. 
By the peculiar form of division-plate em 
ployed there is a free passage for the gases 
out of the tubes, and the diagonal position of 
the upper part of the plate gradually turns the 
draft and sparks downward until near the bot 
toum, when the sparks are deflected downward 
into the water by the nearly-vertical part of 
the plate, whereas with the division-plate ver 
tical the draft would not be so gradually de 
flected, and there would be a greater hinderance 
to the passage of the gases from the flues. 
In order to allow a direct draft from the flues 
to the stack when the fire is first started, the 
partition b is formed with an opening, e, at its 
upper end, near where it joins the tube-sheet, 
in which opening is pivoted a nicely-fitting 
damper, f, from the cranked axis of which a suit 
able operating-bar, g, extends to the cab, so that 
it may be opened when the fire is first started 
and closed when it is under sufficient headway, 
or when the exhaust is discharging. It will 
be noted that the damper is so arranged that 
when fully shut it has an inclination similar 
to the partition.b, or downward and forward, 
so that even when opened or partially opened it 
will always present such an angle to the draft 
as will tend to deflect the sparks down Ward in 
the same manner as the partition b. 
Now, h indicates the exhaust-nozzle, which 
rises from the steam-chests of the cylinders 
through the base of the smoke-arch in the usual 
way, and extends up through the partition b, 
terminating just above the same, as seen best in 
Fig. 1, and at a point under the center of the 
stacki. Hence, when the exhaust-jets are thus 
discharged above the partition b and into the 
stack, the air is forcibly ejected from the stack 
and from the upper half of the smoke-arch on 
the well-kDown inducting action of steamjets, 
thus producing a suction or partial vacuum 
therein, which is supplied by the air and gases 
which are drawn from the furnace through 
95. 
OO 
5 
O 
IS 
35 
45 
So 
 
27023 
7 O 
75 
8o 
9 O 
S 
C 
5 
the flues, and thence from under the partition cient combustion at any rate may be obtained, 
l, and finally discharged from the stack, there 
while it is equally obvious that by the former 
by producing a strong draft on the fire in the 
system the regulation was merely fitful, and 
great waste of unconsumed gases produced. 
well-known manner, as before described. Now, 
iFurthermore, the fire may be nearly as quickly 
according to the main feature of my inven. 
tion, in order to prevent all of this induced 
reduced willien required as would be the case by 
draft from being drawn through the furnace 
opening the furnace-door, but without the se 
rious objections which apply to that action. 
and flues, as heretofore, and in order to enable 
the draft on the fire to be regulated as may be 
Thus when the furnace-door is opeted, where 
required, I provide the smoke-box with an in 
all the draft is drawn through the furnace, as 
dependent air. inlet at Some convenient point, 
leretofore, it will be observed that the highly. 
preferably in the top and near the front, as 
heated fire-box and fillies are suddenly sub 
jected to a comparatively cold stream of air, 
shown best at le in Fig. 1, through which more 
or less air may be admitted Whell desired, thus 
which subjects the metal of the boiler to sud 
partly or wholly supplying the suction created 
den changes of temperature, which is very in 
jurious thereto, tending to impair its strength 
by the exhaust-jets, and thereby enabling the 
and to start leaks; besides, all the gases, which 
draft oil the fire to be reduced or increased, 
and the fire kept steadily at a high or low 
are low rising rapidly from the fire, are leav 
state of activity for any length of time, a C 
ily diluted by and carried off with the onrush 
cording to the amount of steam required, with 
ing stream of air, as well as the smaller un 
out the objectionable necessity of opening the 
consumed coals from the top of the fire, thus 
wasting a large quantity of fuel, and tending 
furnace-door, and thereby wasting fuel and 
subjecting the boiler to injurious and fitful 
to increase the discharge of sparks. In coin 
changes, as heretofore. The air-inlet is pref 
tradistinction from this, by my improvement 
erably formed on the top of a low dome rising 
the fire when reduced is reduced, as it were, 
from the smoke-box, as illustrated in Figs. 1 
by gradually turning down the heat instead 
and 2, which top is preferably perforated with 
of suddenly turning on the cold, by reducing 
a radial series of segmental openings, similar 
the draft or flow of air and the generation of 9 
to an ordinary register, as best seen in Fig. 2, 
gas in the furnace, instead of increasing the 
and is covered by a similarly-perforated regis 
flow of air and carrying off the gases in an un 
ter-plate, which is pivoted at the center to the 
consumed and diluted state. Hence the fire 
perforated top of the inlet-dome, and connected 
box and flues and other metal parts of the 
by a tangential operating-rod, l, with the cab, 
boiler are kept in a more equable condition, and 
so that by moving this rod back or forth the 
are not subjected to the injurious strains, as 
register may be opened more or less to admit 
heretofore, and the fire is regulated in an even 
more or less air to supply the suction of the 
economical manner. Furthermore, by this same 
exhaust, and thus correspondingly reduce the 
action the foul-smelling gases which are now 
(draft through the furnace. It may therefore 
discharged in great volume from the stacks of o5 
locomotives, to the great annoyance of passen 
be understood that when the fire is low, or 
when the engine is ascending a grade, where 
gers, are prevented almost entirely, for the 
tie greatest fire and steam power is required, 
reason that by the simple improvement de 
the inlet k may be entirely closed, thus bring 
scribed the generation of gas in the furnace 
ing all the draft to bear upon the fire, and there 
and the amount of air admitted are regulated 
by raising it to its highest activity. When, 
as circutstances require, and these gases are 
however, less fire and steaming-power is re 
retained sufficiently long in the furnace and 
quired, the inlet is partly or entirely opened, 
flues to burn perfectly before they reach the 
which will soon reduce the fire to the desired 
stack, and hence issue there from in an almost 
point without opening the furnace-door or sub 
odorless condition, instead of foul-smelling and 
jecting the walls of the furnace and the tubes 
unconsumed, as heretofore, which in itself forms 
So to ally sudden change of temperature, or wast 
a most valuable improvement in the working 
ing the heat of the furnace. When the fire is 
of locomotive - engines. Another advantage 
thus brought to the desired state-suitable, say, 
which this air-ill let has, and especially when 
for regular running on ordinary grades-it may 
in the location shown in the drawings, is that 
be kept uniformly in this condition for a length 
should it be found that under certain circuin 
of time by closing the inlets to the proper ex 
stances and with peculiar fuel the drat may 
tent, as Will be understood, for by this regu 
be so St 'ong that some of the lighter sparks 
lation of the draft the gases will rise from the 
are drawn up over the water instead of being 
fire in sufficient volume, and will be retained 
driven into it, the engineer, by opening said 
sufficiently long in the fire-box and flues, and 
inlet, may so lessen the draft that none of the 
will meet with the right proportion of air to pro 
sparks will be drawn over the water, but will 
duce perfect combustion before the gases reach 
all be driven into the reservoir, and thus the 
ther stack, thus producing practically a gas 
air-illet and its regulator becomes an essential 
part of the spark-arresting apparatus. 
burning furnace, which has been a desidera 
tum heretofore much sought for in locomotive 
The air-illet might be arranged on the front 
engines. Hence it is readily apparent that by 
of the smoke-arch, so as to open in the dire:- 
this simple means the fire may be kept steady 
tion in which the engine advances; but this 
at any rate of activity desired, and that effi- would not be so desirable, for the rapid move 
1 25 
I IS 
I 3o 
d 
CO 
O 
2 5 
35 
 
2 (9,423 
3. 
yo 
ment of the engine through the air would of 
itself tend to forcibly induct the air to the 
smoke-arch, which would in some cases tend 
to produce a back-draft in the furnace, which 
would be particularly objectionable at the time 
of opening the furnace-door for the purpose of 
firing. 
I divide up the water-tank d into a number of 
Somall cells by cross-partitions an im, as shown 
in Figs. 1 aid 2, which device effectively pre 
vents the swashing of the water and its es 
cape out of the tank into the smoke-box, yet 
offers, no obstruction to the draft, and, if any 
thing, tends to better catch and retain the 
sparks. These partitions in an have their lower 
edges under water, and yet out of contact with 
the bottom of the tank, by which arrangement 
the sparks Striking the said partitions are de 
flected, and, by force of gravity, will be dis 
charged from a single opening at the bottom 
of the tank. The water in the tank d is of 
course kept at a uniform level, or nearly so, 
by the action of a float-valve governing the 
supply from the Water-tank of the tender or 
other source in the well-known manner, which 
needs no further description here. The base 
of the tank d is also provided with a tight-fit 
tig valve, which may be opened by operat 
ing a rod, o, from the cab, thus discharging the 
water and accumulated cinders or coals when 
necessary, which valve may be again, tightly 
closed, as will be understood, when the tank 
will again quickly fill with Water to the desired 
level by the action of its float-valve. 
Instead of admitting the air directly to the 
smoke-arch, it might be admitted in the ?un 
nel, provided the exhaust-jet were discharged 
directly in the funnel; but in practice the air 
should always be admitted as near as possible 
to the initial point at which the exhaust-jet is 
It may be also noted that by the construc 
tion shown the Water, tank depends from the 
base of the Smoke-arch at the front end and 
hangs down between the cylinders and truck 
wheels of the engine, so that the tank does not 
obstruct the Sinoke-box or reduce its internal 
capacity at all, and its position is quite con 
venient and admits of using a tank of large 
capacity without Occupying valuable space or 
interfering with any of the other parts of the 
engine, which is quite an important practical 
point. 
It will be also seen that the water-level in 
the tank is placed well below the base of the 
smoke-box and below the discharging end of 
the deflector. This not only prevents the water 
from being easily Splashed up into the snoke 
arch, lut. lt allows the discharging end of the 
deflector to make a considerable downward 
turn over the surface of the water, which causes 
the sparks to be projected straight down into 
the Water, and thereby arrested and extin 
guished with certainty. At the same time the 
draft is hardly obstructed at all, owing to the 
large free space between the mouth of the de 
flector and the surface of the water and be 
emitted. 
r 
w 
tween the deflector and the front end of the 
smoke-box, so that the area of the draft-passage 
is nowhere less than the combined area of the 
flues, and this passage is entirely free or open 
By the same. 
without any screens whatever. 
means there is little or no chance of carrying 
out any sparks with the draft over the surface 
of the water, for the reason that the sparks 
are deflected straight down in the water with the 
full velocity of the draft, while the draft, as 
soon as it strikes the water, suddenly decreases 
in speed relatively to the sparks, owing to the 
large free space between the deflector and the 
water into which it spreads, and has thins little 
or no tendency to carry out sparks, even though 
small. I therefore find that the spark-extin 
gnishing function of this eonstruction is very 
effective without interfering with the draft and 
steaming power of the engine, which, if any 
thing, is appreciably increased by reason of the 
removal of the usual obstructing-screens from 
the smoke-arch and funnel. 
It may be also remarked that by the con 
struction shown the exhaust-jet is discharged 
entirely above the deflecting-partition band at 
a point remote from where the sparks and cin. 
ders are arrested and accumulated, and hence 
there is no liability of cinders being drawn into 
the steam-chests through the exhaust-nozzles, 
as occurs in present engines, with great injury 
to the valve-surfaces. 
I make no claim here for the air-inlet, as a 
separate application for this feature will be 
hereafter filed. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a smoke-box, of an 
inclined downwardly-turned spark conductor 
or deflector projecting out from the fue-sheet, 
including the flues, in combination with a 
water-box depending from the base of the 
smoke-box below the discharging end of said 
deflector, with a free or open space between 
the deflector and the water-level, and between 
the deflector and the front of the smoke-arch, 
equal to the area of the flues, or thereabout, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a locomotive-boiler, the combination, 
with a smoke-box extended forwardly beyond 
the stack, of a water-tank arranged in the base 
and front end of the Simoke-box, and a spark 
deflector extending out from the tube-sheet 
over the flues a ud discharging downwardly 
into said tank over the middle thereof, or 
nearly so, and remote from the stack, with an 
exhaust or steam jit discharging above the 
said deflector directly under the stack and re 
mote from the discharging end of the deflector, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the suoke-box of 
a locomotive-engine provided with a down 
wardly-turned spark-deflector, of a water-tank 
affixed to its frol)t end below said deflector 
and depending from the base of the smoke 
arch down between the cylinders and truck. 
wheels of the engine, substantially as herein 
set forth. 
4. The combination, with the smoke-box of 
95 
IOC 
ICS 
TO 
IIS 
I 25 
13c 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
45 
So 
6 S 
lhaust jet or nozzle rising through said partition 
and discharging above the same into the stack, 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
6. The combination, with a smoke-arch, of a 
spark collecting and extinguishing tank pro- 2 o 
vided with a series of partitions having their 
lower edges out of contact with the bottom of 
the tank, whereby the sparks will readily be 
discharged by gravity, from a single opening, 
substantially as described. 
DAVID GROESBECK. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. M. HIGGINs, 
JNO. E. GAVIN. 
S 
a locomotive-boiler, of a Water-tank affixed to 
the front end thereof and depending from the 
base of the same, with its water-level arranged 
below the base of the smoke-arch, in combi 
nation with a spark-deflecting partition in 
said smoke-box extending forward and down 
wardly from the tube-sheet and discharging 
above the water-level in said tank, substan 
tially as herein shown and described. 
inclined defect 
ing or spark-al'resting partition arranged (ii. 
agonally in the box aid terminating at right 
angles, or nearly so, to the Water in a tank be 
low it, and forning an indirect passage for the 
draft through the same, with a steam or ex 
5. The combination of all 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270523.txt	(No Model.) 
E WEBBER, 
CAR COUPLING, 
No. 270,523. 
Patented Jan. 9, 1883. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELBRIDGE WEBBER, OF GARDINER, MAINE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CHARLES GIFFORD, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR-couplin G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,588, dated January 9, 1883. 
Application filed August 18, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
IS 
25 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, ELBRIDGE WEBBER, of 
Gardiner, in the county of Kennebec and State 
of Maine, have invented certain new and use 
5 ful Improvements in Car-Couplings, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The present invention relates to the class of 
self-coupling devices for railway-cars in which 
is employed a link or shackle capable of being 
retained in an elevated position until the coln 
cussion of the draw.heads liberates said shackle 
and causes it to drop over a horn-shaped catch 
on the draw-head of the adjoining car. 
The invention consists in providing a draw 
head with a guard or lock, which is pivoted at 
the top of the horn or catch that receives and 
holds the link of an adjoining draw-head. The 
function of said guard is to prevent the disen 
gagement of the link in case the same should 
glide up on the horn-shaped catch from any 
cause whatever; and this result is achieved 
by extending the guard in a rearward direction 
from the link holding or bearing face of the 
horn. The guard or lock is pivoted so as to 
swing in a rearward or downward direction 
and permit the link to clear the same. It is 
also extended in front of its pivot and pro 
vided with an apertured foot or plate for the 
passage of the ordinary coupling-pin. 
The invention, also consists in a coupling 
link consisting of U-shaped side bars and toe 
portion and a transverse bar, the latter hav 
ling a curved or convex inner edge, which foll 
lows the contour of the side bars, the trans 
verse bar being also provided with a straight 
bottom edge, which is adapted to rest on a ledge 
or bearing of the draw-head, and serves, in con 
junction with lugs or projections on the sides 
of the draw-head, and the side bars of the link, 
4o extended beyond the cross-bar thereof, and 
engaging with the lugs or projections, to hold 
the link in position ready for coupling. 
The invention also consists in a link-trip 
ping device consisting of a sliding bar or 
45 plate which moves in the top of the draw-head, 
and has a bottom lug or projection that serves 
to throw the cross-bar of the link from its sup 
porting-ledge, and disengages the side bars 
of the link from the lugs or projections of the 
So draw-head, thus permitting the link to drop 
down for effecting the coupling operation. 
35 
55 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of a draw-head, showing the coupling-link 
in a raised position, ready for coupling. Fig.2 
is a longitudinal sectional view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a side elevation, showing two draw 
heads coupled together. Fig. 4 is a detail view 
of the coupling-link. 
The letter A designates the draw - head, 
which in the present instance is provided with 6o 
a mouth or chamber, a, for the reception of 
an ordinary coupling-link, and with a ver 
tical opening for the pin b. A horn or hook 
shaped extension, B, surmounting the draw 
head, has a rounded or convex inner face, d, 6 
s 
for receiving and holding the curved toe por. 
tion of the coupling-link of an adjoining car, 
as is fully shown in Fig. 3. Below the faced 
is a recess or chamber, e, the front wall, f, of 
which is rounded or curved, so as to conform 7o 
to the contour of the heel portion of the coup 
ling-link E. The bottom of the recesse is also 
curved for properly holding the link when it 
is not in use. 
The coupling-link employed by me may be 
described as consisting of a U-shaped frame 
and a transverse bar, E, located near the ends 
of the side bars of said frame. It will be per 
ceived from Fig. 4 that said transverse bar has 
a curved or concave inner edge, which, together 
with the side bars and curved toe portion, 
forms an oval opening in the link. The outer or 
bottom edge of the bar E is made flat, for the 
object hereinafter stated, and the ends of the 
side bars of the link extend beyond said bar 
E and form bearings which are adapted to en 
gage with lugs or projections G, extending 
from the sides of the draw-head in rear of and 
on a level with the link-chamber e. The up 
per face of the draw-bar is provided with a go 
groove which leads into the link-chamber and 
contains a slide or bar, H, the frontend whereof 
extends into a recess or socket made in the 
draw-head at a point below the faced thereof. 
This slide or bar has a lug or pin, h, on its lower 95 
side, which extends in rear of the transverse 
bar of the link and enters a seat or cavity at 
the rear of the link-chamber when the parts 
are in position for coupling, as shown more 
fully in Fig. 2. A ledge, m, having a trans 
verse front groove, n, is provided at the rear of 
the link-chamber e, and this ledge and groove, 
75 
IOO 
 
20,523 
45 
So 
55 
I am aware of the patent of Charles Gifford, 
dated May 28, 1878, No. 204,212, in which a 
coupling-link curved at both ends is fitted into 
a recessed draw-head having semicircular bear 
ing for the heel of the link, and is adapted to 
engage with an adjoining draw-head provided 
With a horn with a semicircular face for re 
ceiving the toe of the link. Another patent 
granted to said Gifford, January 25, 1881, No. 
236,943, involves the employment of a sliding 
plate or bar for tripping the link when the 
two draw-heads come together. 
I am also aware of the patent of A. Heb 
bard, dated April 13, 1858, No. 19,925, which 
exhibits a pivoted coupling-link held in posi 
tion for coupling by a fastening device that is 
liberated by the concussion of the cars, so as 
to cause the link to drop for performing the 
coupling operation. 
I clain 
1. The draw-lhead A, provided with a horn 
or catch, B, for receiving and holding a coup 
ling-link of an adjoining car, and with a pivot 
ed guard or lock, M, extending in rear of said 
horn at the top thereof, and adapted to be vi 
brated by the link upon its passage over the 
same to reach its seat in rear of the horn, as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a car-coupling, the link E, having the 
transverse bar E, with outer straight edge, 
and side arms extending in rear of said bar, 
in combination with the draw-head having side 
lugs or projections, G, and the link-recess pro 
vided with a notched ledge at its rear, and 
sliding bar II for tripping the link, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
IELBRIDGE WEBBER. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY FARRINGTON, 
CH AS, GIFFORD. 
75 
IO 
together with tie lugs on the draw-head, serve 
to hold the link in an inclined position, ready 
for coupling. It is manifest that the straight 
edge of the transverse bar of the link will be 
properly seated on said grooved ledge, and 
that the side extensions or arms of the link 
will rest against the oblique bottom faces of 
the lugs or projections on the draw-head. 
When two adjoining draw-heads are brought 
together after the coupling-link has been prop 
erly set, as shown in Fig. 1, the impact or con 
cussion will jar the slide H to such an extent 
as to cause the pin h thereof to force the link 
from its supporting-ledge and lugs and permit 
it to drop over the horn or catch of the adjoin 
ing draw-head. The slide H is retracted or 
drawn to its normal position by a pin or pro 
jection, h, on its upper face, and the slide it 
self is retained in its seat or groove by a turn 
button or plate, K, on the top of the draw.bar. 
In order to prevent the casual disengage 
ment of the coupling-link from the horn or 
catch of the draw-head with which it is coupled, 
I provide the top of said horn with a guard or 
lock, M Which consists of an arin pivoted in a 
slot in the center of said horn, at the top there 
of. This arm extends beyond the face of the 
horn that supports or holds the link, and in 
this manner it will be seen that should the 
o link slide vertically from any cause whatever 
3 
it cannot become released from the horn, be 
cause the arm will act as a stop and arrest the 
upward movement of the link. 
A foot or plate, N, of the guarl M has an 
aperture for the passage of the ordinary coup 
ling-pin, and this foot rests upon a flat ledge 
below the top of the horn of the draw-head. 
When the link drops into position for effecting 
the coupling operation it will depress the guard 
or lock so as to clear it or pass below the same, 
and then the preponderance of weight below 
the pivot of the guard will carry it back to its 
normal position. 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270624.txt	No Model.) 
No. 270,624. 
S. W. BARNETT, 
BROOM. SUPPORT, 
Patented Jan. 16, 1883. 
Fig.1. 
7'ig2. 
Z'eg.3. 
-, 
4 
a 
C 
2. 
C 
H-C 
a 
2- 
y 
ot 
t 
- 
f 
| 
l 
W. 
| A. Oy 
y 
a 2 
Z 
(WII) 
"| NY 
("L. 
: I 
| if 
WITWESSES. 
IWWEWTO f. 
64-e 3 C26.2%P 
 
%27-2467. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL W. BARNETT, OF GREENFIELD, INDIANA. 
BROOM-SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,624, dated January 16, 1883. 
Application filed October 7, 1882. (No model.) 
So 
7 o 
S 
O 
IS 
3O 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL W. BARNETT, 
of the city of Greenfield, county of Hancock, 
and State of Indiana, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Broom-Sup 
ports, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
As is well known, brooms when permitted 
to rest upon the brush end when not in use 
will soon become bent out of proper shape, 
and their value and efficiency thus seriously 
impaired. 
The object of my said invention is to obviate 
this difficulty; and it consists in an attach 
ment which may be adjusted to support the 
broom entirely from the floor, or to permit it 
to come in contact there with in the ordinary 
manner, as will hereinafter be more particu 
larly described. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which are made a part hereof, and on which 
similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts, Figure 1 is a front elevation of a broom 
provided with my attachment, said attach 
ment being in position to keep the broom off 
the floor; Fig. 2, a side elevation of the same; 
and Fig. 3, a view like Fig. 1, except that the 
attachment is raised, so that the broom may 
be used without being affected thereby. 
In said drawings, the portions marked A 
represent the broom-handle, B the broom, and 
O my attachment. 
The several parts are or may be of any or 
dinary or approved form, except as hereinaf 
ter specified. 
Eyes or loops a? a are secured to the han 
dle A, through which to pass the stem of the 
attachment C. These are preferably common 
screw-eyes, which enter the wood of the han 
dle, and are thus secured in position. The 
eye a? should be screwed in a little farther 
than the eye a', as shown, so as to bear tightly 
against the attachment C, for the purpose 
hereinafter explained. 
The attachment or support C is formed of 
heavy wire, preferably of a quality that will 
spring somewhat without bending, and should 
be bent into a loop, c, at the upper end, which 
loop is adapted to surround the broom-handle. 
The arrangement is preferably such that when 
the attachment is in position on the broom 
handle the loop c and eye a? shall hold it to 
ward the handle, while the eye a shall hold it 
away from said handle, thus giving the re 
quired friction to hold the attachment in what 
ever position it is placed, or, in other words, 
to prevent it from slipping up and down to 6 
easily. 
My invention constitutes a cheap and con 
venient means of keeping brooms off the floor 
when not in use, and fully accomplishes the 
object specified. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion, what I claim as new, and desire to secur 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a broom, of a Sup 
porting attachment, C, secured to the broon 
handle, and adapted to slide up and down on 
said broom-handle, and be thus caused to 
project beyond the lower end of the broom or 
be withdrawn above it, substantially as set 
fortl. 
2. The combination, with a broom, of the at 
tachment C, having loop c, and the eyes Or 
loops a? a on the handle, through which the 
stem of said attachment passes, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a broom, of a Sup 
porting attachment passing through eyes or 
loops attached to the broom-handle, said eyes 
or loops being arranged, as specified, to press 
upon the stem of said attachment and prevent 
it from slipping up and down too easily, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal, at Indianapolis, Indiana, this 
4th day of October, A. D. 1882. 
SAMUEL W. BARNETT. 
In presence of - 
C. BRADFORD, 
E. W. BRADFORD, 
L. S. 
35 
45 
A. 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270724.txt	(Model.) 
M. O. BALDWIN, 
RECLINING CHAIR 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 270,724, 
Patented Jan, l6, 1883. 
wz, 26SS eS. 
8-14-2-2-e- 
W 
Zvere 12 
 
N. PETERs, Polo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
M. O. BALDWIN, 
RECLINING CHAIR, 
Patented Jan, 16, 1883. 
(Model.) 
No. 270,724, 
 
|| [] | [] [] [] 
 + 
A2. 
ZZeasses 
Zzzvezz foz 
noto-Lithographor, Washinator. D. C. 
(Model.) 
- 
M. O. BALDWIN, 
RECLINING CHAIR, 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 270,724. 
- 
Patented Jan. 16, 1883. 
Tg 3. 
Wiesses' 
2.7%e2ee- 
ZZ v2z/z or 
2%--ee-6-2 (7 /6-((co 
 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
(Model.) 
M. O. BALDWIN, 
RECIINING CHAIR 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 270,724, 
Patented Jan. 16, 1883. 
722/zzesses 
ase-6-772-24 
67%zee- 
 
Z2 yeaz for 
24-ceez. Gi ?-6-6-2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARCELLUS O. BALDWIN, OF KANSAs CITY, MISSOURI. 
RECLINING-CHAIR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,724, dated January 16, 1883. 
Application filed June 10, 1882. 
(Model.) 
To all whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, MARCELLUs O. BALD 
WIN, of Kansas City, in the county of Jackson 
and State of Missouri, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Reclining-Chairs; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming part 
of this specification. 
The object of my invention is to afford a 
novel and convenient reclining-chair with head 
and foot rest, and so adapted that the declen 
sion of the back of the chair may be adjusted 
from the arm of the chair and will automati 
cally throw the head-rest forward to give in 
creased comfort for the head, and an extension 
foot-rest which is supported in the same plane 
with the seat and is returned within and con 
cealed by the chair seat and back when not in 
use; and it consists, first, in a movable hinged 
head-rest attached by suitable devices to the 
chair-seat, and the means for throwing said. 
head-rest forward by an opposite declension of 
the chair-back when extended; second, in the 
arrangement horizontally of the foot support 
and its flexible extension within the chair seat 
and back; third, in the arrangement of the 
slotted plate in the back of a chair to regulate 
the extension of the foot-rest and its easy ad 
justment in line with the chair-seat; fourth, in 
the means for securing the foot-rest from free 
movement orin a fixed position when extended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the chair. Fig. 2 is a front view of 
the chair, showing its several parts with its 
back and foot-rest extended as in use. Fig. 3 
is a side elevation of the chair. Fig. 4 is a 
side view of the extension foot-rest. Fig. 5 is 
a plan view of the foot-rest and flexible exten 
sion of the same. Fig. 6 is a rear view of the 
back of the chair, showing the means for hold 
ing the foot-rest from movement. 
A A are the ordinary braces to a chair, and 
joined to the seat-frame by pivots d d. 
B is the seat of the chair, having frame a 
slotted at p to receive the extension foot-rest F. 
C is the arm of the chair, pivoted to the chair. 
back at f and to the standard G at . 
Disthe head-rest, pivoted upon rod or bar h, 
which passes through the chair-back. 
- 
tached. 
E is a slotted plate secured to the back of the 
chair, or forming part of said chair-back, and 
having slot a to receive the bolt or thumb 
screw connection on plate g. 
F is the foot-rest, having cross-pieces SS and 
extension I, constructed with flexible joints t, 
G is a standard attached at 7 to the arm and 
at e to the side of the chair. 
His a chair-support to which the seat is at 
K is a plate on foot-rest F for concealing 
slot p in the chair-seat. 
b is a rod or bar attached to the head-rest 
at at and to the chair-frame at c by means of 
projections.j. 
g is a plate forming a slot or guide for the 
flexible extension of the foot-rest. 
0 0 are slots or guides in which foot-rest F 
is held within the Seat. 
i is a thumb-screw or bolt secured to the 
plate q on the foot-rest. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the declension of the chair-back a rigid 
rod or bar, b, is hinged to the head - rest at a 
suitable distance in rear of its connection within 
the back of the chair to afford the requisite le 
verage and concealment, and also rigidly con 
nected in a parallel line with the back to the 
seat. By this means the upper end of the head 
restis thrown forward automatically, in the de 
clension of the back, with economy of space, 
and in this result a more useful and practica. 
ble adjustment of the head-rest is attained. 
The seat of the chair-frame is formed with 
a lateral opening, p, to a certain width to re 
ceive the foot-rest F. To maintain the said 
foot-rest, when extended, always in the same 
horizontal plane with the chair-seat, I form 
across the said seat suitable guideways, o, in 
the direction of the back of the chair, in which 
the foot-rest moves. In the back of the chair 
similar guides, gg, are formed, and may be at 
tached to the side of the chair-back. The foot 
rest as far back as the depth of the seat is 
made of rigid materials, and may have cross 
bars to strengthen the same, as seen at S. The 
rear flexible extension end of the foot-rest, 
which is designed to be concealed by or enter 
the chair-back when closed, I form with a 
number of stop joints, t, which, when extended 
into the guides on the back of the chair, will 
O 
2 o 
35 
45 
6 S 
75 
9 O 
Ioo 
 
w 
220,72 
pivoted directly to the lower posterior part of 
the head-rest, and also to the back of the chair 
seat in a parallel relation to the chair-back and 
within the same, for the purpose described. 
2. In a chair provided with a foot-rest ar 
ranged to slide under the seatin suitable guides, 
the combination of a rear flexible extension 
adapted to form a rigid connection with and 
a support to the foot-rest when the latter is 40 
extended, for the purpose set forth. 
3. In combination with the seat and back of 
a chair hinged together and provided with 
grooves, a foot-rest provided with a rear flexi 
ble extension, 
in said grooves in the seat and back when the 
back is erect or inclined at any angle, as shown 
and described. 
4. In combination with the seat and back of 
a chair hinged together and provided with So 
grooves, and a foot-rest provided with a rear 
flexible extension which is adapted to enter 
said grooves in the seat and back when the 
back is erect or inclined at any angle, a lock 
ing device constructed with the rear flexible 
extension of the foot-rest and the back of said 
chair, for the purpose described. 
said foot-rest may slide 45 
35 
55 
MARCELLUS. O. BALDWIN. 
Witnesses: 
T. E. KENNEDY, 
IDESHLER BEESON. 
w 
pass the curved projection at the lower end of 
guides g and enter said guides either vertically 
or at any angle in which the chair-back may 
be adjusted. In extending the foot-rest out 
5 wardly each joint is held by the stop ac, in fol 
lowing guides g g, in the same plane with the 
rigid portion of the foot-rest. The stops may 
be extendedl across the flexible extension of 
the foot-rest, or constructed of separate pieces 
IO hinged in a suitable way to accomplish the 
same results. 
To withdraw the foot-rest into the back of 
the chair, as indicated by dotted lines, a plate, 
E, is attached perpendicularly to the chair 
15 back and slotted to receive a bolt or thumb 
screw attached to the plate q of the flexible 
end of the foot-rest. I am enabled thereby to 
extend the foot-rest at any relative distance 
horizontally to the width of a chair-seat or 
2 O withdraw the same from view. This seat may 
be extended in width to afford all the conven 
iences of a lounge or bed without any modifi. 
cations. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
25 claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a reclining-chair having an adjustable 
back hinged to the back of the seat and an 
adjustable head-rest hinged at its anterior and 
3o lower part to the back of the chair, the coin 
bination of an independent rigid rod or bar 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270824.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 270,824. 
 
M. S. MICHAELIS, 
COTTON CHOPPER, 
Patented Jan, 16, 1883. 
WITNESSES : 
BY 
INVENTOR: 
tlessor 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN S. MICHAELIS, OF BENTON, LOUISIANA. 
COTTON CHOPPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,824, dated January 16, 1883. 
Application filed July 25, 1882. (No model.) 
S 
O 
IS 
25 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARTIN S. MICHAELIS, 
of Benton, in the parish of Bossier and State 
of Iouisiana, have invented a new and Im 
proved Cotton-Chopper, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention consists principally of a slot 
ted bell-shaped cutter, adapted to be attached 
to any plow, and to receive rotary reciprocat 
ing motion from a drive-wheel attached to the 
plow, and in providing the cutter with an ad 
justable knife for closing more or less the 
slot in the cutter, so that the latter will leave 
a greater or less number of plants in the stand, 
as desired. 
The invention also consists of the construc 
tion, arrangement, and combination of parts, 
- 
all as hereinafter more fully described. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure l is a perspective view of a plow hav 
ing my new and improved cotton-chopper at 
tached thereto. Fig. 2 is a sectional elevation 
of the bell-shaped cutter. Fig. 3 is a plan 
view of the under side of the cutter, showing 
the position of the adjustable knife, and Fig. 
4 is a plan view of the crank secured to the 
upper end of the shaft G of the cutter. 
A represents the plow, which may be of any 
approved construction. 
B represents the cutter, which is by prefer. 
ence made bell-shaped, and is formed with the 
slot C; and D is the drive-wheel, attached near 
to the forward end of the beam of the plow ; 
aud E. represents the adjustable knife, placed 
inside of the cutter, and F is the connecting 
rod that connects the crank d of the drive 
wheel with the crank f of the shaft G of the 
cutter. The cutter is attached to the plow by 
means of the journal-plates h h, in which the 
shaft G of the cutter is journaled at or near 
its upper end, and the rearwardly-extending 
plate or bar J, which is formed with a socket 
near its rear end to receive the lower end or 
point,g, of the shaftG, as shown in Fig.2. The 
plates h. h. are secured to the rear end of the 
beam of the plow by means of the band H, or 
any other similar means may be used, and the 
rearwardly-extending bar, J., is bolted or oth 
erwise secured to the rear end of the landside 
of the plow. When the cutter is put in place 
it should be so arranged in the plates h. h. and 
rod or plate J that the slot C will stand to. 55 
ward the left side of the plow. 
By the means described for attaching the 
colter it will be seen that the shaft G of the 
cutter will be held in line with the landside of 
the plow, so that one-half of the diameter of 6o 
the cutter will reach outside of the plow to 
the left, and will reach over the row of plants 
being chopped out. 
In use, the rows or drills of cotton are first 
furrowed off along one side by the plow, or a 
plow without the cutter attached. The cutter 
is then attached to the plow, and the plow is 
run along the other or unfurrowed side of the 
rows. The cutter, reaching over the row, will 
cut out all of the plants in the roW until the 
slot C is brought by the rotary reciprocating 
movement which the cutter receives from the 
drive-wheel in line with the row of plants. 
When in this position the cutter will skip the 
plants in the row until it is turned back SO 
that the slot C is no longer in line with the 
row, when the cutter will again cut all of the 
plants in the row. . The cutter having a regu 
lar rotary reciprocating motion, the plants 
will be skipped regularly, making hills at reg 
ular intervals along the row, provided with 
standing plants opposite the slot C in the ro 
tary reciprocating movement of the cutter B. 
The distance between the hills may be in 
creased or diminished, as desired, by chang 
ing the connecting-rod F in the series of holes 
i made in the crank F. 
The rod or plate J is braced by the rod T, 
reaching from near its outer or near end to the 
mold-board or share of the plow, as shown in 90 
Fig.1. 
The knife E is secured to the cutter by the 
bolts ee passing through the slots e'e' in the 
knife. These slots adapt the knife to be ad 
justed for closing more or less the slot C in 
the cutter, so that the colter will skip a greater 
or less number of plants, as desired. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
l. In a cotton - chopper, the combination, 
with the bell-shaped cutter B, provided with 
7o 
95 
EOO 
75 
40 
So 
2 
20, s24 
the slot C, of the drive. wheel D, cranks dif, cured to the landside, of the bell-shaped cutter 
rods FG, and bar J, substantially as described, B, provided with the slot C, having adjustable 
and for the purpose set forth. 
knife Etherein, shaft G, and means, substan 
2. The combination, with the cutter B, pro- tially as set forth, to impart a rotary recipro. 
5 vided with the slot O, of the knife E, adjust. cating movement to the cutter, substantially 15 
-- 
- 
able in said slot, substantially as specified, as described. 
whereby a greater or less number of plants 
will be left in the stand, as described. 
Witnesses: 
3. The combination, with the plates h h, se- 
Io cured to the plow.beam, and the bar J, se- 
F. A. LEONARD, 
W. G. BERRY. 
MARTIN SANUE, AICHAELIS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US270924.txt	(No Model.) 
T. T. & E. BARBER, 
WAGON JACK, 
No. 270,924, 
62 Patented Jan, 23, 1883, 
  
 
SS 
 
SaS 
22 
S 
2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS T. BARBER AND EDWARD BARBER, OF HOPKINTON, R. I. 
WAGON-JACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 270,924, dated January 23, 1883. 
Application filed November 18, 1882. (No model.) 
50 
55 
To all chon it inctly concern: 
Be it known that we, THOMAS T. BARBER 
and EDWARD BARBER, of Hopkinton, Wash 
ington county, Rhode Island, have invented 
new and valuable Improvements in Wagon 
Jacks, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the annexed drawings, making part thereof, 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
simple and cheap implement for giving a lim 
ited vertical lift to a wagon axle and wheel 
or to other articles requiring a temporary Sup 
port. 
The distinguishing peculiarity of our device 
lies in the cramping action of a loose collar on 
the lifting-rod when lifted from one side only, 
and in the like action of a cross-bar when sup 
ported from one side only. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view, showing the lifted position of the parts 
in full lines, and their position permitting the 
plunger to descend in dotted lines. Fig. 2 is 
a transverse section of the upper part of the 
device at the line & of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tion of same part at line ac, showing the plunger 
supported by the oblique bar. 
The implement has a strong frame, A B C 
DE, preferably of the A form shown. 
F is the lifting-lever, pivoted at G in the 
frame, and provided at its short end with the 
connecting rod, link, or chain H. 
I is the plunger or lifting rod, passing loose 
ly through the horizontal top bar, E, and the 
middle bar, D, which serve as guides and 
maintain the rod I in vertical position. The 
top and bottom of this rod are sufficiently 
enlarged to prevent passing through the bars 
E. and D, respectively. Between these two 
horizontal bars a loose collar, K, surrounds 
the plunger I. This collar has a hook or han 
dle projecting at one side, to which is connected 
the lower end of the chain depending from 
the short arm of the lever F. When this arm 
is raised, by depressing the long arm of said 
lever, the collar is lifted obliquely, or from one 
side only, causing its corners to nip or bind 
on opposite sides of the plunger, as indicated 
in Fig. 2, and thus to seize and lift the plunger 
vertically. 
Just beneath the top bar, E, is an oblique 
supporting-bar, L, perforated for the passage 
of the plunger I. This bar is supported at 
one end only by the frame, while its other end 
has a limited vertical play, and, being unsup 
ported, drops down, as shown, until, being quite 
oblique to the plunger, the edges of the per 
foration nip the opposite sides of said rod and 
hold it supported at the height at which it 
has been raised. This permits one or more 
additional lifts by the lever, chain, and col 
lar, the latter sliding freely downward on the 
rod I, when slackening of the chain deprives 
it of its support, but nipping or cramping 
and holding the rod at any upward movement. 
So when the rod is forced upwardly it will 
slightly raise the lowest end of the oblique 
bar L. until its nip is overcome by said parts 
being nearly at right angles to each other, in 
which position the rod passes freely through 
said bar. The plunger is released, and its 
descent permitted by raising the lever, as 
denoted in dotted line, Fig. 1, until its upper 
edge or side strikes the lower outer end of the 
oblique bar L, and lifts it enough to relieve 
the nip or cramping action described in sup 
porting the rod. The parts are so propor 
tioned that this extreme elevation of the long 
arm of the lever permits the collar K to have 
a horizontal rest on the cross-bar D, so that 
the descent of the rod I is unobstructed. 
When, however, it is desired that the descent 
shall be gradual, the rod is engaged by the 
collar, with the hand of the operator on the 
lever. Then the nip of the cross-bar L is re 
lieved by an upward movement, so that the 
plunger is free to descend slowly at the will 
of the person holding the lever, and the free 
end of the bar L. may be dropped again to 
permit a new hold with the lever, chain, and 
collar, as desired. An oblique piece, M, pre 
vents the short end of the lever from disturb 
ing the operations of the cross-bar L. 
We am aware that the principle of the-sliding 
collar and rod is not broadly new, but, under 
75 
90 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
2 
270,924 
5 
- 
a wholly different arrangement, has been util- ver, link, and gripping-collar K, and with the Io 
ized in Stump-pullers. Hence we do not claim oblique bar L, supported from one end only, 
such principle. 
substantially as and for the purposes herein 
Having thus described our invention, we set forth. 
THOMAS T. BARBER, 
claim- 
EDWARD BARBER. 
The improved wagonijack herein described, 
having a plunger with two distinct bearings 
in the frame to insure a vertical position and 
movement thereof, in combination with the le 
J. G. PERRY, 
HOWARD B. PERRY. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271025.txt	(No Model.) 
D, BOURGEOIS, 
FEED WATER HEATER AND PRECIPITAT0R, 
No. 271,025. 
Patented Jan. 23, 1883. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
E?),~~~~!?z?*********~~~~); 
<<<<<<<=&www. 
Rssssssssssssssssssssss 
? 
2.E 
H 
H 
I 
HS 
VW 
HS 
S N N 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithograp 
her. Washington, D.C. 
M7ezezza2 
z 46ezzazee/s 
22 
a 
1. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID BOURGEOIS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE - HALF TO 
KROESCEIELL BROTHERS, OF SAME PLACE. 
FEED-WATER HEATER AND PRECIPITATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271,025, dated January 23, 1883. 
Application filed November 20, 1882. (No model.) 
So 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID BOURGEOIs, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Feed-Water Heaters and Pre 
cipitators; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accomp 
nying drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this speci 
fication. 
This invention has for its object to produce 
an apparatus in which the feed-water for boil 
ers by the otherwise wasted heat of the exhaust 
steam is brought to a highly-heated tempera 
ture, and in which such water is separated from 
all impurities and sediments before entering 
the boilers; and it consists of the novel de 
vices and combinations of devices hereinafter 
described and specifically claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figurel rep 
resents a vertical section through the center 
line of the apparatus, and Fig. 2 a sectional 
plan of the feed-water heater. 
Corresponding letters in the several figures 
of the drawings designate like parts. 
A denotes the cylindrical heater-shell, that 
has flanges to its ends for securing the cap-plate 
B, to which the exhaust-pipe C of the engine is 
connected, and the base-plate D, to which the 
exhaust-steam escape-pipe E is connected, and 
to which are secured legs a, that support such 
heater in an upright position. This shell A 
has a top diaphragm, F, and a bottom dia 
phragm, G, and both these diaphragms F and 
G. are connected by a series of boiler-flues, H, 
through which the exhaust-steam on its pas 
sage from pipe Otopipe Emust pass. Through 
the side of the shell and through the center of 
the bottom diaphragm, G, is inserted a pipe, I, 
which extends upward to near the top dia 
phragm, F, where it is provided with a funnel, 
b, for collecting and drawing off from time to 
time any vegetable or animal impurities that 
will float on the surface of the water, and that 
would be liable to create foaming in the boilers. 
Externally of the heater this pipe I should be 
provided with a suitable blow-off valve. 
K is the cold-water feed-pipe, that is tapped 
. 
into the bottom of the shell A, close above dia 
phragm G, and connects with the feed-pump 
or injector. This pipe K is provided with valve 
c for shutting off the feed, and with a branch 
having a valve, d, for blowing off any sedi 
ments that may collect in the bottom of the 
heater. 
L is a pipe leading from near the top of the 
heater downward into and through the bottom 
of a smaller cylindrical vessel, M, which I call 
the precipitator. This pipeL reachestonear 
the top in vessel M, where it is provided with 
a perforated head that will eject the feed-water 
in a spray, and into the cap of the vessel M is 
tapped the end of a pipe, P, which is to con 
nect with the steam-space of the boiler that is 
to be fed With the Water. 
A pipe, N, connects the upper end of the ves 
sel M with the water-space in the boiler, and 
a pipe, O, is for blowing off the mineral and 
alkaline sediments that will be precipitated. 
Such pipe O for that purpose is to be provided 
with a cock or valve. 
The cold water entering the bottom of ves. 
sel A, while the exhaust-steam enters the top 
of the vessel and passes downward through 
the flues, the water in such yessel will not be 
agitated or caused to circulate, but will rise 
slowly, and will be brought to a higher de 
gree of temperature proportionately as it ap 
proaches the top of the heater, whence it is 
drawn off into the vessel M, thereby separat 
ing all impurities according. to their specific 
gravity, which then can be drawn off from time 
to time-the scum through pipe I and the sedi 
ments through valve d. The feed-water thus 
having been brought in the heater to a tem 
perature within a degree or two of the tem 
perature of the exhaust-stam, and having been 
cleared of the scum and earthy impurities, it 
is passed into the vessel M, where it enters in 
an upward spray that is brought in direct con 
tact with live steam from the boiler, thus rais 
ing its temperature to that of the water in the 
boiler, and precipitating all alkaline substances 
that are contained in the water before such 
water is allowed to enter the boilers, whereby 
the boilers not only are fed with boiling water 
under pressure, but also are kept free from in 
75 
9o 
95 
O 
20 
25 
35 
40 
- 45 
2 
2,025 
crustation that very seriously affects the con 
duction of heat, and is the frequent cause of 
boiler explosions. 
The escape of the exhaust-steam in its pas 
sage through the flues in the heater is not only 
not to any extent obstructed, but such steam, 
in yielding its heat to the feed-water, will be 
condensed in a certain measure, and will be 
come less in volume, so as to reduce the back 
pressure on the engine piston. 
With introducing the steam into the heater 
from above in a manner to bring it in close 
proximity with the hottest water first, the tem 
perature of such water can be raised faster and 
higher than when such steam is introduced 
into the bottom of the heater. 
The vessel M can be applied without the 
heater A, particularly with boilers that furnish 
steam for condensing-engines. 
What I claim is 
1. A heater consisting of shell A, cap B, 
with exhaust-pipe connection C, base D, with 
exhaust-nozzle E, diaphragms F and G, with 
flues H, scum-pipe I, water-inlet pipe K, and 
water-escape pipe L, all constructed and ar 
ranged substantially as described, to operate 
as specified. 
2. The feed-water heater and precipitator M, 
- 
IO 
15 
25 
3O 
35 
provided with perforated heade, that connects 
with the water-supply pipe L for injecting water 
in a spray, and having pipe P that connects 
with the steam-room of the boiler and brings 
live steam from the boiler in direct contact with 
such spray of feed-water, all substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
3. The precipitator M, having feed-water in 
let-pipe L, with perforated heade and blow-off 
pipe O, and being connected with the boiler 
by water-pipe N and steam-pipe P, the same 
being constructed and arranged to operate sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with a feed-water heater, 
of the precipitator M, having feed-water inlet 
pipe L, with perforated head e and blow-off 
pipe O, and being connected with the boiler 
by water-pipe N and steam-pipe P, the same 
being constructed and arranged to operate sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
invention I affix my signature in presence of 5 
two witnesses. 
4O 
45 
5o 
DAVID BOURGEOIS. 
Witnesses: 
H. W. HUEHL, 
R. G. SCHMID, 
1 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271125.txt	(No Model.) 
S. B. R O BBINS, 
HARWESTER REET, 
No. 271125, 
Patented Jan, 23, 1883. 
WITNESSES : 
 
 
 
 
/26 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SYLVAN B, ROBBINs, OF LAWRENCEBURG, INDIANA. 
HARVESTER - REEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271,125, dated January 23, 1883. 
Application filed June 10, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
rollers O, which are secured in pairs at points 
near the ends of the bars LM and the cam A, 
with opposite sides of which the pairs of roll 
ers engage during a part of each revolution of 5o 
the reel. With this construction each beater 
N is made to move horizontally while in con 
tact with the grain, as indicated in dotted lines 
in Fig. 2, and thus the grain will be inclined 
toward the sickle and held in that position un 
til severed, when it drops upon the table. The 
advantage of so holding the grain is to facili 
tate the cutting of it, as well as to secure its 
falling upon the table in perfect order. 
It is evident that such a reel is specially 
adapted for use where the grain from overripe 
ness or any other cause has become tangled or 
bent over. As the reel moves horizontally near 
the ground for a considerable space, any such 
grain will be straightened out and inclined 65 
toward the table by the raking effect of the 
beaters. 
Eaving thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S- 
1. The combination, with a suitable cam, of 
the reel having the short cross-bars rigidly con 
nected to the shaft and provided with loops at 
the ends, and the sliding bars arranged across 
each other within the said loops, respectively, 75 
and having means for engaging with the cam, 
whereby an eccentric movement shall be given 
to the beaters, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
beaters adapted to move eccentrically during 
revolution, of the cam, consisting of a sinuous 
strip of metal supported by a sleeve having 
radiating fingers secured to the strip, in such 
manner that a series of rollers connected to the 85 
reel shallengage with the cam on opposite sides 
thereof, substantially as shown and described, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, with the reel having the 8o 
7c 
SYLVAN B. ROBBINS. 
Witnesses: 
, 
SoLON C. KEMON, 
JOHN T. LAWRENCE. 
O 
- 
sickle. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SYLVAN BALDWINROB. 
BINS, of Lawrenceburg, in the county of Dear 
born and State of Indiana, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Harvester 
Reels, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the annexed drawings, forming part of this 
specification. 
The object of this invention is to give a hori 
Zontal raking. movement to the beaters of a 
harvester-reel, whereby the grain shall be held 
back over the table while being severed by the 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a portion of a harvester, showing my 
invention. Fig. 2 is an end elevation of the 
reel, showing a cam for giving the desired 
movement thereto; and Fig. 3 is a sectional 
view of the reel. 
My invention consists in providing a reel 
having sliding bars for the beaters and a sta 
tionary cam, with which the bars are adapted 
to engage to give a definite movement to the 
beaters. To this end a cam, A, formed of a 
sinuous bar or strip of metal, is supported 
above and at the sides of the axis of the reel 
by means of a sleeve, B, secured to the stand 
ard C, and having a series of radiating fingers, 
ID, connected to the strip of metal. The said 
fingers are made of such relative lengths that 
the surface of the cam shall present three dis 
tinct protuberances, E FG, as shown. 
The shaft H of the reel, which is supported 
within the sleeve B, is rigidly connected at the 
end to the center of two short cross-bars, IJ, 
which latter, if desired, may be slightly mor 
tised into each other. 
The bars I J are pro 
vided at their ends with loops K, of sufficient 
size to receive the bars LM, to the ends of 
which the beaters N are connected. The bars 
L M are laid across each other at or near the 
center, in which relative position they are held 
by the loops K, and are adapted to slide upon 
each other in their respective loops. This slid 
ing movement is accomplished by means of 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271225.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 271225, 
 
F. H. DANIELS. 
ROLLING METAL, R, ODS AND BARS, 
Patented Jan. 30, 1883, 
2. 
/N2 
12 N 
Witnesses 46%.4,Cu 17/cito/ea/ J(Danie As 
42. 2. /2- 6% C64%-46%. 
N. perERs, photo-Lithographer. Washingto", 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED H. DANIELS, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, 
s 
RONG METAL RODS AND BARS. 
S2ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271,225, dated January 30, 1888. 
Application filed August 20, 1881. (No model.) 
. 
To all chon it may concern : 
Be it known that I, FRED. H. DANIELS, of 
Worcester, in the county of Worcester and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful improvements in the method 
of and mechanism for preventing the forma 
tion of fins on rolled metal bars and rods by 
continuous process of rolling; and I declare 
the following to be a description of my said 
invention sufficiently full, clear, and exact to 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification. 
In the operation of continuous-rolling mills 
as ordinarily constructed and arranged for 
rolling metal bars or wire rods, the action of 
the mill, while it effects the proper shaping, of 
the rods throughout the greater portion of 
their length, fails to impart the required per 
fect shape to portions of the rod near its ends 
or to so much of the rod as escapes the maxi 
mum pulling action or tensile strain of the sev 
eral consecutive pairs of rolls while the ends 
of the rod are passing into or out of the ima 
chine, so that in ordinary practice in the roll 
ing of wire rods by continuous process there are 
about four feet or the first end and eight feet 
on the last end (more or less) of each rod 
whereon side fins are left by the rolls. These 
fins are very objectionable in the finished pro 
duct, as they prevent the subsequent cold draw 
ing of the rods through dies. . Consequently 
the imperfect or finned portions require to be 
cut off and rejected, thus causing a loss or 
waste of some two or three per cent, in the 
production of the mills, and also requiring la 
bor and expense for handling, cutting up, and 
reconverting the wasted portions. 
The object of my present invention is to ob 
viate the above-mentioned defects in the con 
struction and operation of continuous-rolling 
mills and to provide a method of rolling metal 
bars or rods by continuous process whereby 
uniformity of action or result throughout the 
entire length of rod can be attained, the finning 
or irregularities near the ends of the rods pre 
vented, and the consequent loss and waste 
avoided. 
... The nature of my invention consists in a 
method of rolling wherein the bar or rod is 
subjected during its passage through the con 
- 
IO 
25 
So 
tinuous-rolling mill to the action of one or 
more pairs of fin-repressing rolls located in 
mediately following or working auxiliary to 
the ordinary rod-reducing rolls, or any particu 
lar pair of them, and adapted for pressing in 
the fins or projections without materially 
changing the sectional area of the body of the 
rod. 
It also consists in the combination, with the 
series of rod-reducing rolls, of fin-repressing 
rolls, auxiliary thereto, provided with grooves 
that in size substantially correspond in sec 
tional area with the grooves in their preceding 
pair of rod-reducing rols, said auxiliary rolls 
being operated at a speed practically the same 
or slightly in excess of said preceding reduc 
ing rolls, as hereinafter explained. 
In the accompanying drawings are illus 
trated, the relative arrangement of the reduc 
ing-rolls and fin-repressing rolls, and the rei 
ative shapes or sections of the rod, both at its 
central and end portions, as imparted by the 
mechanism at the various stages of its action 
and by my improved method; also the corre 
sponding shapes of the rod as made by the 
ordinary practice. The set of sections No. 1 
show the forms of the grooves and the shape 
of the rod as in the four last rolls of a Con 
tinuous-rolling mill for rolling wire rods in 
ordinary use. The views in sets No. 2 and No. 
3 illustrate the arrangement of rolls and shapes 
imparted to the rod by ny improved method, 
No. 2 and No. 3 being equivalent views to each 
other, one showing a mill with the rolls all ar. 
ranged parallel and the other with its rolls 
alternately horizontal and vertical. The rolls 
are shown drawn to a simall scale, and the sec 
tions of the rod to a scale double the full size 
of an ordinary wire rod. 
The sections marked C are shapes at the 
central portion of the rod, and those marked 
E are shapes near the end of the rod or of the 
finned portions. The numerals indicate the 
number or location of the pairs of rolls in the 
continuous-rolling mill and the corresponding 
section or shape imparted thereby to the rods. 
The letter R. denotes the rod-reducing rolls, 
and A denotes the auxiliary rolls or fin-re 
pressing rolls. 
It will be understood that the supporting 
frame and gearing for mounting and operating 
the rolls R and Acan be constructed and organ 
75 
OO 
2 
f 
27,225 
5 
O 
IS 
3O 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
- 
ized substantially in the ordinary manner, and 
are not therefore herein shown. 
The series of reducing-rolls R are of the 
usual construction, each pair being made with 
grooves of smaller area and being operated at 
higher speed than the next preceding pair, 
so that the sectional area of the rod will be 
proportionally reduced by each pair of rolls 
R, as it passes through the machine to be de 
livered at the end of the series of the proper 
size required. 
The auxiliary or fin-repressing Tolls A are 
preferably introduced near the last end of the 
machine, or as final rolls, although said rolls 
can be used to follow any or all of the pairs of 
reducing-rolls, if desired. Said rolls A are 
made with grooves a of a size that will main 
tain the rod at practically the same sectional 
area as imparted by the preceding pair of 
rolls, while the speed of said rolls A is also 
the same as the speed of the preceding re 
ducing-rolls R or with just sufficient excess of 
speed to avoid any sagging of the rod between 
the pairs of rolls. This excess of speed, if 
required, can be attained by a slight increase 
of diameter in the rolls A over that of the rolls 
R, or by an extra tooth in their driving-gears. 
In the operation of the mill these rolls A act 
upon the fins or projections e, and press them 
down, but do not materially change the size 
or area of the body of the rod, which is reduced 
only by the rolls R in their regular order. By 
thus arranging the auxiliary rolls A, in com 
bination with the ordinary reducing-rolls in a 
continuous-rolling mill the fins e are repressed 
into the body of the rod as soon as formed, 
and no excess of metal is permitted to accu 
mulate by the retarded action near the ends 
of the rod. Consequently the end portions of 
the finished rod are as perfectly formed as its 
central, and but little, if any, waste occurs in 
the subsequent use of the rods. Another ad 
vantage is that by avoiding the formation of 
fins it is practicable to roll the rods to a smaller 
size, and thus save time and labor heretofore 
required in the subsequent operations of re 
duction by cold-drawing through dies. 
One, two, or more pairs of fin-repressing 
rolls A may be used in an ordinary-sized con 
tinuous-rolling mill. In the present instance 
I have shown two pairs as following the twelfth 
pair in a fourteen-reduction mill, and a single 
pair, 14 A, following the final-reduction rolls 
14 R. 
I do not, however, desire to confine 
myself to this particular location and arrange 
ment, as said rolls A may be arranged auxili 
ary to any of the rolls R, as desired. 
I am aware that mills for rolling metal rods 
by continuous process have heretofore been 
invented and described, as in the French 
patent to Levy, dated June 23, 1854, and in 
the English patent to Bedson, No. 1,935 of 
1862, and in which a series of grooved rolls 
are arranged for successively reducing the 
size or sectional area of the rod as it passes 
through the machine; also, that such series 
of rolls have been arranged both with their 
75 
85 
several axes parallel to each other and with 
the axes of alternate pairs of rolls at right 
angles to each other. I do not therefore desire 
it to be understood that I herein make claim 
broadly to such features, or to the principle 
of the continuous rolling of metal rods, my 
invention being an improvement in this sys 
tem of rolling, whereby certain defects here 
in before mentioned are obviated, and which 
improvement is distinguished by the employ 
ment, in addition to the ordinarily-arranged 
reducing - rolls heretofore used, of certain 
other rolls formed and speeded to substan 
tially conform to the pair next preceding 
them, and introduced to act auxiliary thereto, 
or arranged in such manner that they exert no 
appreciable effect or reducing action on por 
tions of the rods that have received normal 
reduction or are of proper form due to the 
respective position in the mill, but which 
auxiliary rolls are effective to act upon the 
finned or distorted portions of the rod, serv 
ing to correct distortions, to reduce the fins, 
and to maintain uniformity of size throughout 
the length of the rod, by subjecting it, or the 
distorted portions thereof, to a duplex or sec 
ond rolling action without a material change 
in the size or sectional area of the body of 95 
the rod as it passes said auxiliary rolls. 
What I claim as of my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The method of preventing the formation 
of fins on continuous rolled or finished metal 
bars or wire rods, which consists in subject 
ing the bar or rod to the action of one or more 
pairs of fin - repressing rolls intermediate to 
or immediately following the ordinary reduc 
ing- rolls, said fin - repressing rolls having 
grooves of practically the same area or size 
and being operated at practically the same 
or at slightly-accelerated speed, as their pre 
ceding pair of reducing-rolls, as herein before 
set forth. 
2. The combination, with the final or any 
preceding pair of rod - reducing rolls in a 
continuous-rolling mill, of one or more pairs 
of fin - repressing rolls working auxiliary to 
said pair of reducing-rolls, and adapted for If 5 
rolling down the fins without materially chang 
ing the sectional area or size of the body 
of the rod, substantially as herein before set. 
forth. 
3. The combination, in a continuous-rolling 
mill for rolling metal bars or rods, of a series 
of rod-reducing rolls and a series of fin-re. 
pressing rolls, said fin-repressing rolls having 
grooves substantially of the same sectional 
area as their preceding pair of reducing-rolls 
and operating at a speed substantially corre 
sponding there with, as and for the purpose 
herein before described. 
Witness my hand this 10th day of August, 
A. D. 1881. 
IOS 
I 25 
FOO 
IO 
FRED. H. DANIELS, 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. H. BURLEIGH, 
S. R, BARTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271325.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 271325. 
C, FLETCHER 
MACHINE FOR COMBING WOOL, &c, 
Patented Jan, 30, 1883, 
Y\\\esses 
YN ent) 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES FLETCHER, OF PROVIDENCE, REIODE ISLAND. 
MACHINE FOR COMBING WOOL, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271325, dated January 30, 1883. 
Application filed March 10, 1882. (No model.) 
65 
Having thus described the principle upon 65 
To all whom it may concern: 
of the city of Providence, in the State of Rhode fective operation of the more elastic parts of 55 
Island, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Machines for Combing Wool, &c., 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of ma 
clines, known as  combing, carding, and 
drawing' machines, for preparing the sliver 
of wool fiber. In such machines front and back 
draft-rolls have heretofore been used in a well 
known manner, and an apron bas been used 
with and passing between the front draft-rolls 
in a well-known manner, to aid in the drawing 
process, such apron having been constructed 
with a seam or joining across it where the 
ends were brought together. 
My invention consists in making this apron 
end less and seamless transversely of it, and 
using and applying it in the same place and 
position as before in the machine, substantially 
so as to constitute a combination of the apron 
with its co-operating rolls, substantially as 
hereinafter described and claimed; and the 
principle upon which it operates is that, be. 
cause there is no such joint or seam in such 
apron, the fiber, in passing through between 
such apron and the draft-roll pressing upon it 
and against the other roll, will grasp and draw 
the fiber evenly at all parts of the impact of 
the apron against it, because all parts of the 
apron passing between the draft-rolls are of 
substantially the same texture and elasticity, 
owing to the manner in which I construct it, 
as described. Besides, the grease or oil ex 
pressed from the fiber while passing between 
the draft-roll and apron does not operate to 
destroy the apron for use by penetrating into 
and acting upon to harden or destroy any glue, 
cement, or joining material used to unite the 
ends of the apron in a suitable manner for use 
with such draft-rolls, because there is no such 
joining of ends and consequent joining mate 
rial used with my apron upon which it can act. 
It is of course understood and well known in 
practice that the apron passes between the 
craft-rolls under tension, and that this tension 
must be greater to promote its effective opera 
tion the harder and less elastic the material 
of the apron is, and if any part of an apron is 
harder and less elastic than another the ten 
sion necessarily applied to the entire apron 
to cause it to work effectively at these harder 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs FLETCHER, parts is greater than is necessary for the ef. 
the apron; and as any practicable joint formed 
by the uniting of the ends of such apron is 
necessarily much harder and less elastic than 
the other parts, it is obvious that my seamless 
apron requires less tension to cause it to work 
effectively and evenly in drawing the fiber in 
all its parts than a jointed apron, and this en 
ables the entire machine to be operated witly 
less power and wear of parts. 
which my invention operates, I will now pro 
ceed to describe its construction as used upon 
a wool-combing machine. 
The drawing represents the draft-rolls of a 
Combing-machine and adjacent parts of the 
machine to which my invention is applied. 
AA are the front draft-rolls of the combing 
machine. ID ID are the back draft-rolls. 
E. 
are the faller - gills. The fiber passes first 
through the back draft-rollers, thence over the 
faller-gills, and thence between the front draft 
rollers, which run at such a relative speed as to 
draw out the sliver as it passes through them. 
These parts of the machine are well known 
and of the ordinary construction, and need no 
further description to be understood. The 
other parts of the machine to which they are 
connected are also of the ordinary construc 
tion and well known, and therefore are not 
shown in the drawing. 
At some distance below the lower draft-roll 
A, and parallel thereto, is mounted the roller 
B, of equal length with the former. Around 
the lower roller A and the roller B is passed 
the endless apron C, which has a breadth equal 
to the length of these rolls, and is pressed 
upon by the upper draft-roll as it passes the 
nip of that and the lower one. This causes 
the apron to traverse continuously around the 
roller B, which is allowed to revolve freely for 
that purpose, and to present constantly a dif 
ferent part of the apron to the nip of the rolls 
A. A. The fiber to be drawn out passes be 
tween the upper draft-roll A and the surface 
of the traversing apron C, thus forming an elas 
tic grip upon the fiber, which is necessary to 
properly draw it out. The apron C is made of 
endless material, so as to have no seam or 
joining across its breadth. It thus presents 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
45 
 
27,325 
What I claim as new and of my invention 
between the rolls A A a substantially-uniform 
structure at all points of its traverse, which is 
In combination with the drawing-rolls AA, 
takes hold of the fiber constantly pressed 
against it at all points alike, and thus draws the endless traveling cushion or apron C, pass. 15 
it out with the greatest degree of evenness and ing between them, formed of an endless piece 
regularity, which is essential to the perfect of material without joining or seam, substan 
preparation of the sliver. After passing the tially as described. 
CHARLES FLETCHER. 
rolls AA and apron C the sliver may be either 
conducted to a can or into other parts of the 
- 
C. L. EATON, 
machine, to be further operated upon, accord- 
ing to its construction. 
DAVID HALL RICE. 
Witnesses: 
5 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271425.txt	(No Model) 
No. 271,425. 
G. W. COOK, 
EEWATED RAWAY, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
at ented Jan, 30, 1883. 
 
 
l 
IX 
2 
4 
s 
6 - A 
A 
II 
\ 
, EI 
FE ISS 
NEX 
in IM 
 
 
  
 
I 
We 6 rve is ses, 
oil 
- 
- 
a 
Z7 ve 7/7 or, 
eye 20. Oa a 76 
zer, & 2&y Y- 6 
ai-476 for 7- e vs, 
olithographer, Washingtail, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
NO, 2.7l 425, 
G. W. COOK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
ETEWATED RAILWAY, 
Patented Jan, 30, 1883. 
 
A. 
o 
z 
i Ali 
III. I-II 
fitten-m s 
& frve is ses 
Zr ve 7/27ar. 
26. 27.5 6 r < ca, ty 2 
6 e- or a e 2' 6' ea . 
4,777 rveys 
Y 
7 
e. 
20-73-() 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE W. COOK, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ELEVATED RA LWAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271,425, dated January 30, 1883. 
Application filed June 19, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
to 
75 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that, I, GEORGE W. COOK, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resid. 
ing at Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Elevated Railways, of 
which the following, in connection with the ac 
companying drawings, is a specification. 
In the drawings, Figure 1, Sheet 1, is a side 
elevation of a street-railway embodying my in 
vention. Fig. 2, Sheet 1 is a like representa 
tion of the upper part of a station, enlarged. 
Fig. 3, Sheet 2, is a section in the plane of the 
line acac of Fig. 1, Viewed in the direction indi 
cated by the arrow there shown; and Fig. 4, 
Sheet 2, is a top or plan view of a portion of 
the railway. 
Iike letters of reference indicate like parts. 
My invention relates to that class of street 
railways which are elevated above the streets 
or roadways. An objectionable feature of street 
railways of this class is that property-owners 
along the line of the railway are seriously in 
convenienced and annoyed by the obstruction 
caused by the railway, as well as by the noise pro 
duced by passing cars, and by the heavy steam 
motors employed for drawing them. The street 
or roadway is also to a great extent obstruct. 
ed, so that traffic thereon is impeded. Besides 
this the streets are darkened to a great extent 
by such superstructures. These are some of 
the chief objections urged by the public against 
such railways. Another objection affecting the 
public as well as the owners of the railway is 
the fact that heavy and expensive motors have 
heretofore been required, and consequently 
correspondingly heavy or strong supports for 
the railway have been necessary. These rail 
ways, therefore, have not only been objection 
able to the public, but the construction and 
operation of them have required the expendi 
ture of a large amount of capital. 
My object is either wholly to avoid or greatly 
diminish these objectionable features; and to 
that end my invention consists in the means 
which I employ, for purposes set forth, and 
hereinafter stated in my several claims. 
In the drawings, A represents a station, 
which is a superstructure supported upon posts 
at a, erected at the corners or intersections of 
the streets, one station being located at each in 
tersection. 
- 
B is the floor or platform of the station. 
This floor is sufficiently elevated not to ob 
struct the street, and is of such length and 
width as to permit a double track to be laid 
thereon, and also to receive two or more cars 
at the same time. The floor B is reached by 
stairways C C extending to the street or side 
Walk. 
ID represents a car in One of the stations A. 
It is to be understood that the rule of travel 
ing upon the right-hand side of the road in 
going in either direction is to be observed. 
For example, let E represent the down? 
track, and F the up' track. As a minor fea 
ture of my invention, I have made provision 
for having both tracks laid on a slight down 
grade in the stations, the declination or de 
scent being in the direction of the movement 
of the cars. This downgrade is most clearly 
represented in Fig. 2. My object in making 
this reverse downgrade of the tracks in the 
stations is to aid the starting of the cars after 
they have been stopped either to receive or 
discharge passeugers. 
G. G. G. are cables suspended from station to 
station, and H H are cable-supports located 
between the stations. These cables are curved 
or slackened between the stations and the 
posts H H and between the posts H EI, as 
shown, and the sagging or tension may be 
about as usual in suspension-bridges or simi 
lar structures. 
II are tie-rods depending from the cables 
G. G. G., and J is that portion of the track which 
is suspended between the stations and between 
the intermediate cable-supports. The tie-rods 
II support or suspend the tracks, the latter 
of which have a downward curvature, which, 
however, is not equal to that of the cable. 
These downward curvatures occur between the 
cable-supports, as is clearly indicated in Fig. 
1; in other words, both of the tracks have an 
up and also a down grade between each suc 
ceeding two cable-supports, and one grade 
runs gradually into the other. The supports 
H H may also aid in supporting the tracks. 
A railing, K, may be made along the sides 
of the tracks, as shown. 
At the terminals of 
the tracks the cables should be anchored in 
the usual manner. 
I have not here attempted to describe in de 
tail or particularly many of the minor features 
So 
 
95 
o 
2.425 
7 o 
75 
) 
of construction incident to a structure of this tial movement. After the car is well started, 55 
kind, as those familiar with the art of build 
ing suspension-bridges and similar structures, 
aided by the foregoing description and by 
reference to the drawings, will be sufficiently 
instructed to reduce the essential features of 
my invention to practice. 
Upon the cars, preferably upon an extended 
platform thereof, I have made provision for al 
lowing an attendant to ride, and this platform 
may be inclosed and coni municate by a sliding 
door with the interior of the car. 
As a motor, compressed air may be employed, 
this air being supplied from cylinders under 
neath the car. These cylinders may be sup 
plied from stationary reservoirs or engines at 
the terminals of the tracks, or at other suitable 
locations. 
It is to be understood, of course, that each 
car, besides carrying one or more cylinders of 
compressed air, also carries a suitable driving 
apparatus under the control of the attendant 
or operator, and adapted to be driven by the 
escaping of the compressed air. I do not, 
however, here intend to restrict myself either 
to any particular form or construction of the 
car's or to compressed air as a motor, as an 
electric motor or other light driving motor 
unay be employed instead of compressed air. 
It is my intention to run only one car at a 
time upon each track and between each two 
cable supports-that is, I deem it best to have 
each dip or span of the caule sustain only one 
car as a moving load. 
- 
In running the cars the operation is substan 
tially as follows: For example, suppose that 
the car ID is ready to leave a station. The 
brakes are of course loosened, and the car, 
Owing to the fact that it stands upon a down 
grade of the track, will move forward out of 
the station, where the downgrade is still more 
steep. By the time the car bas reached the 
center of the first span it will have acquired a 
momentum equal to its speed multiplied by its 
weight less the friction. This momentum will 
carry the car up a portion of the upgrade be 
yond the center of the span. I aim aware that 
the momentum alone will not carry the car 
Wholly up a grade equal to the downgrade on 
which the momentum was acquired. I pro 
ceed therefore as follows: If the car, when the 
brakes are released in order to allow it to start, 
does not start at once, sufficient power may 
be allowed to exertitself to give the car its ini 
I apply an amount of driving force which, to 
gether with the momentum, will be sufficient 
to carry the car to the decline or downgrade 
of the Second span, and so on to the next sta 
tion, a portion of the driving-power, which in 
the case supposed is compressed air, being ap 
plied on each downgrade. As the momentum 
is equal to the speed multiplied by the weight 
less the friction, I utilize the compressed air 
for increasing the speed, and as soon as the 
speed acquired becomes sufficient to carry the 
car over each upgrade I discontinue using the 
compressed air for the purpose referred to. It 
will be perceived, therefore, that by utilizing 
the compressed air or other motive power while 
the car is passing down the downgrade the 
action of the air will be aided by the momen 
tum in obtaining a suffi'iently high rate of 
speed to carry the car over the pgrades. The 
air - motor therefore is utilized only during 
a portion of the trip from station to station, 
and only when the car has other aids to impel it. 
By employing a series of up and down grades 
I am enabled not only to effect rapid transit, 
but the railway structure may be made com 
paratively light, and hence comparatively in 
expensive, and the objectionable features of 
level elevated street-railways are to a great 
extent, if not wholly, overcome, and the public 
as well as the proprietors of the road are there 
by benefitted. 
In the example shown I have employed three 
cables parallel to each other; but under some 
circumstances only two need be employed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An elevated street-railway suspended by 
depending cables supported on and between 
fixed supports resting on the street, and hav. 
ing a track with both an up and down grade 
between said supports, substantially as and 
for the purposes specified. 
2. The combination of the supports H. H., 
cables G. G., tie-rods II, and track J, having 
both an up and down grade between the sup. 
ports El H, substantially as shown aud de 
scribed. 
A. CEIAPMAN, 
N. COWLES. 
GEORGE W. COOK. 
Witnesses: 
85 
95 
CO 
5 
O 
( 5 
3o 
3. 5 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271526.txt	(No Model.) 
R. W. SCOTT. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
STOCKING AND MEETHOD OF MAKING THE SAME 
No. 271,526. 
Patented Jan. 30, 1883. 
WZ ceases 
uwenz, 
N. PETERs, Photo-tithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
R. W. SCOTT. 
STOCKING AND METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME, 
No. 271526, 
Patented Jan. 30, 1883, 
24avy Ovy 
2.7, 
N. PETERs. Photo-lithographer, washington, D.C. 
S. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT W. SCOTT OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
STOCK NG AND WETHOD OF WAKNG THE SAW. E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271,526, dated January 30, 1888. 
Application filed March 13, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
O 
To all whom it may concert: 
The difference between the heel-piece and 
Be it known that I, ROBERT W. SCOTT, a that described in my former patent will be un 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of derstood by reference to Fig. S, in which the fold 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
ing of the projection g is made on a diagonal 
certain Improvements in Socks and Stockings 
line instead of being folded in the direction of 
and in the Method of Malking the Same, of 
the arrow, Fig. 5. The wings ii of the pres 
which the following is a specification. 
ent heel-piece are, moreover, both of the same 
My invention consists of an improvement, 
shape and dimensions, their edges i i being 
fully described hereinafter, in cheap socks and 
made of the same length as the edges h. h of 
stockings and in the mode of manufacturing 
the leg or projection g, Fig. 3. 
the same, the object of my invention being the 
The toe of my improved stocking is made in 
formation of rounded heels and toes having 
substantially the same manner as the heel, 
the seams so disposed that they will not inter 
the upper half of the tube A terminating in a 
fere with the comfort of the Wearer, 
T-shaped continuation or toe-piece, D, Fig. 4, 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1 
of knitted fabric, and the projections of the 
and 2, Sheet 1, are perspective views of a tube 
toe-piece being turned down, and its edges at 
of knitted fabric, illustrating the preparatory 
( being united to the edges a a of the projec 
steps in carrying out my invention; Figs. 3 
tions (1 g of the toe-piece, thus forming a pock 
and 4, views of the T-shaped heel and toe 
et, p, Fig. 6, the edge gy of which is united to 
pieces; Figs. 5 and 6, Sheet 2, views showing 
the edge 2 of the tube, after which the stock: 
the manner of forming the rounded pockets 
ing is pressed in the usual manner, and is then 
for the heel and toe; Fig. 7, a view of the foot 
ready for the market, 
of the completed sock or stocking; and Fig. 8, 
The stocking thus constructed is rounded at 
Sheet 1, a view of the heel and toe piece de 
the heel and toe, and the seams are so arranged 
scribed in the patent, No. 234,075, granted to 
that they will not interfere with the comfort 
me November 2, 1880. 
of the wearer. 
A tube, A, Fig. 1, of knitted fabric, is partly 
Although I have referred to the stocking as 
severed on the line (, so that when it is bent 
being made of a tube of knitted fabric, it may 
to the condition Fig. 2 there will be a cavity 
be made of a flat web of fabric of a shape ad. 
at A', where the heel of the stocking has to be 
mitting of being formed into a tube, the same 
pockets formed of T-shaped pieces being re 
made. This cavity I fill, so as to complete the 
heel, by a pocket formed of the T-shaped heel 
sorted to in forming the heel and toe. 
piece B, Fig. 3, the edge c of which is united 
to the edge l of the cavity of the tube A, Fig. 
2. The fabric of the heel-piece is preferably 
inade a continuation of the fabric of the tube 
by adapting the loops on the edge b of the cav 
ity in the tube to the needles of a suitable knit 
ting-machine, and forming the heel-piece by 
the latter. When this has been done the un 
finished heel of the stocking will be in the con 
dition shown in Fig. 5. The legg of the heel 
piece is now turned in the direction of the ar 
row, and the edges h h of the said leg are 
united to the edges i i of the projections jj of 
the heel-piece, thus forming a rounded pocket, 
f, Fig. 6, the front edge, n, of which is united 
to the edged of the cavity A', Fig. 2, thereby 
filling said cavity and completing the heel, as 
shown in Fig. 7. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A sock or stocking in which a cavity, A', 
made in the fabric by partly severing the same, 
is combined with a T-shaped heel-piece folded 
and formed into a pocket, f, and united to the 
edges of the cavity, all substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The mode herein described of forming a 
heel on a partly-severed tube of knitted fab 
ric, the said mode consisting in making a cav. 
ity, A', in the said tube, forming a T-shaped 
projection on one edge, b, of said cavity, fold 
ing and forming said T-shaped projection into 
a pocket, f, and uniting the front edge, n2, of 
the pocket to the other edge, d, of the cavity 
A', all substantially as set forth. 
3. A sock or stocking in which the tubular 
foot is combined with a T-shaped toe-piece 
9 O 
9. 
25 
40 
45 
So 
 
2 
27 1526 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
4. The mode herein described of forming a name to this specification in the presence of 
folded and formed into a pocket, p, the edge to the edge 3 of the other half of the tube, as io 
of which is united to the edge of the tubular set forth. 
foot, all substantially as specified. 
toe upon the tubular foot of the stocking, the two subscribing witnesses. 
5 said mode consisting in forming a projecting 
T-shaped toe-piece on one half of the tube, fold- 
ing and forming said T-shaped toe-piece into a 
pocket, p, and uniting the edge y of the pocket 
HARRY DRURY, 
HARRY SMITH, 
- 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. W. SCOTT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271626.txt	(No Model.) 
W. A. GREENE. 
C00 KING STOWE, 
No. 271,626, 
E: 
 
l - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
5 Sheeti s-Sheet li. 
Patented Feb. 6, 1883. 
S 
WA 
S 
 
LSL0SLLSLLSLSLLSLLSLYSLSLSLLLLLSLLLLLSLL LSLLLLL LSLSLSL LSLSLLASALSLSYLLLSLLAA qqSqSqqAqLM 
NKRA 
S 
| NVENTO R ; 
torneys, 
(No Model.) 
No. 271,626. 
W. A. GREENE. 
COOKING STOWE, 
5. Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 6, 1883. 
NYAYANA 
LLLLqqLLJLLLLALALLLLLLLLhLLLLLLLLLLAqqLLLLALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL 
 
FTi 
- 4 - 
WITNESSES: 
27/, g?. 
INVENTOR: 
?? his littorneys, 
???? 
??????? 
? 
k /voaal^ 
N. Peters. Photo-lthographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
W, A, GREENE, 
COOKING STOWE, 
5 Sheets-e-Sheet 3. 
No. 271,626, 
Patented Feb. 6, 1883, 
Z 
2 
Y 
? 
2 
2 
ra 
r 
As 
e/7 
r 
? 
AWAYAVAM 
y 
* 
 
V 
??? 
 
 
 
  
  
  
N ???? 
??????? N 
2 
N 
? 
ANTN N N. N.N. N. N 
V 
NA 
R 
Q 
VA 
Q 
A 
 
  
 
 
NX  ??*?? 
????? 
Z 
????? 
????? 
Z7 
????? 
????? 
???? 
???? 
???? 
?????? 
???? 
?? 
???? 
????? 
????? 
72, 
2 ?S A 
Z 2 
N 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographor, washington, D. c 
(No Model.) 
W. A. GREENE, 
COOKING STOWE, 
5. Sheets 
Sheet 4. 
 
No. 27,626, 
Patented Feb, 6, 1883. 
% 
N 
LLSLSLL LLLL LL LSLSLSL LSL L L L L L L L LSLSLSL LSLSSL L LSLSLSSSL L L L L L SSSSLSL LL LSLSL LL LLS SLLL LSLSLSLSLSLSLS S LSLSL LSLSSLSLSSLSLSSLSLSSLSL 
277AAAZZZ 
2 
WITNESSES 
????e 
By his Attorneys, 
(No Model.) 
W. A. GREENE. . 
C00 KING STOWE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
No. 271,626. 
Patented Feb. 6, 1883. 
WITNESSES : 
AS 
????N2 
INVENTOR 
??x 
X???/w O?. ????uvu) 
By his Attorneys, - 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. A. GREENE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
COOKING STOWE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271,626, dated February 6, 1888. 
Application filed August 31, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
?? 
65 
? ? 
25 have charge of such stoves. 
similar to Fig. 2, but showing a modified con 
To all whom it inctly concern: 
struction. Fig. 9 is a horizontal section thereof, 
Ee it known that I, WILLIAM. A. GREENE, 
a resident of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
cut in the same planes as Fig. 4; and Fig. 10 
is a plan of the stove shown in Figs. 1 to 7. 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
5 Improvements in Cooking-Stoves,and in Stoves 
I will first describe the construction shown 
in Figs. I to 7. 
for other Purposes, of which the following is 
Let A designate the outer shell or casing; 
a specification. 
B, the oven; C, the ash-pit; D, the grate or fuel 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
bed; E, the fuel-chamber, and FF the gas 
stove or range for burning soft or bituminous 
Io coal in a convenient, cleanly, and economical 
combustion chambers. 
The general construction and arrangement 
manner. Bituminous fuels afford a high de 
of the oven, ash-pit, grate, and fuel-chamber 
gree of heat when so burned that all or a high 
percentage of their combustible constituents 
are much the same as heretofore commonly em 
are utilized; but as ordinarily burned a large 
ployed in cook-stoves. 
The fuel-chamber is of 
15 proportion of the fuel passes off in the form 
leSS than the usual depth, and the gas-com 
bustion chambers or flame-passages FF ex 
of smoke and unconsumed hydrocarbon gases, 
thereby vitiating the atmosphere, filling the 
tend from it directly over the oven to the flues, 
chimneys and fues with soot, and Wasting con 
their bottoms or floors being nearly on the same 
siderable fuel. Many smoke-preventing stoves 
level as the grate. The chambers F E are 
separated by a central longitudinal dividing 
2 o have been designed, working on Various 
wall, G, which is hollow for its entire length, 
principles; but all have either failed in their 
being made of two vertical plates, a ct, prefer 
primary object or been too expensive, trou 
ably corrugated, as shown in Fig. 4, and it ex 
blesome, complicated, or inconvenient to be 
successful in the hands of those who usually 
tends from the left-hand end of the stove to 
the chamber E, over the grate, where it stops, 
I have aimed in 
my present invention to accomplish a thorough 
being terminated by a curved perforated end 
consumption of the fuel, and consequent avoid 
plate, l. (Seen in Figs. 2 and 4.) The shell 
ance of smoke, by means which it is beyond 
A, at the left-hand end of the stove, is formed 
the power of the operative to derange by bad 
with an aperture, c, opposite the end of the 
hollow partition G, thereby rendering the lat. 
3o management, and to render the stove as sim 
ple in construction and as easy to operate as 
ter an air-fline, which I shall refer to as the 
are the anthracite-stoves now commonly used. 
flue H. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
The stove is shown as formed with six stove 
holes, dd, having the usual covers fitting be 
a front elevation of my improved stove in its 
35 preferred form, partly broken away to show 
tween the usual short and long crosses. There 
are two long crosses, e and f, the former ex 
the construction. Fig. 2 is a vertical section 
thereof, cut in the plane of the lines 22 in 
tending across the stove, or from front to rear, 
between the center and right-hand pair of 
Fig. 4, and viewed from the front. Fig. 3 is 
holes d d, and the latter extending longitudi-, 
a similar section of the upper part of the stove, 
nally of the stove from its left-hand end to the 
4o cut in the same plane, but viewed from the 
long cross e, on Which it rests. These long 
rear. Fig. 4 is a horizontal section cut in two 
crosses are both fixed in place, so that the cook 
different planes, as indicated by the dotted 
line 4 4 in Fig. 5, the rear half of the stove 
cannot remove them, the cross f forming the 
being cut in the plane of the line 4 4 in Fig. 
top of the flue H. There are also three short 
452, and the front half being cut in the plane of 
crosses, gg, one over each chamber F, between 
the line 4 4 in Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a vertical 
the left-hand and mildle holes d, and the 
section, looking from the left-hand end, and cut 
third over the chamber E, between the front 
in the plane of the lines 55 in Figs, 2 and 4. 
and rear right-hand holes. 
Fig. 6 is a detailed view. Fig. 7 is an enlarged 
The bottom or floor of each chamber F is 
5a fragmentary section cut in the plane of the 
formed by the plate h, which forms also the 
line 77 in Fig. 4. Fig. 8 is a vertical section roof of the oven and the bottom of the fue H. 
85 
OO 
 
22,623 
75 
85 
Thus the chambers FF have an imperforate oven, and forming an extension of the ash-pit. 
The bottom of this chamber has a sloping floor, 
floor or hearth, and on this are placed baf. 
so inclined that any ashes that may fall through 
fle-bricks i i, one directly beneath each hole 
(l, and each extending back transversely across 
the slit o will slide into the ash-pit. Air from 
the ash-pit ascends through the chamber C 
the chamber and projecting up about one-third 
and slit o, becomes thereby highly heated by 
the height thereof. Between each two holes 
d d the upper part of the chambers is simi 
contact with the hot bricks in, and enters the 
larly obstructed by an air-bridge, j, which is a 
chamber F just in advance of the elevated 
portion of the brick i, so that in passing over 
hollow plate or casting of trough shape, fast 
that brick the current of burning gases is 
ened to the under side of one of the crosses g 
or e, and so extending transversely of the 
brought into contact with the stream of air. 
At this point the chamber F is slightly sepa 
claimler. The effect of these obstructions ar 
ranged thus alternately above and below is to 
rated from the chamber E by a contraction or 
throat, formed by the brick n below and the 
cause the products of combustion to take a 
air-bridge i above, thereby slightly impeding 
sinuous course through the chambers, as indi 
the passage of gases from the chamber E and 
cated by the arrows in Fig. 2, thereby retard 
ing their passage, causing then to give up a 
insuring their mingling with the air admitted 
through bridge j and slit o. 
greater portion of heat proportioned to their 
The interiors of 
the two bridgesii forming these throats com 
retardment, and deflecting them upwardly 
municate by openings through the plates a a 
against the stove - holes, thus accelerating 
cooking over the holes, and causing them to 
with the flue H, as shown in Fig. 4, and con 
iningle with air entering through the air 
stitute branch flues H. H'. Their ends at the 
bridges ji, as will be presently described. 
front and back Walls of the stove are closed. 
Air enters at the aperture c, flows through 
From the lett-hand end of the twochambers 
fue H, tibereby becoming heated by contact 
F R dhe draft-flue I leads down to the bottom 
with the plates at a, and serving also to cool 
of the stove, and to the right beneath the oven. 
these plates and prevent their destruction, and 
Both chambers communicate with this flue, 
on ar i ving at the end of this fue di vidles and 
whicln in its clownward passage contracts to 
flows in opposite directions into the flues H' H', 
one-half the depth of the shell, and extends 
along the front of a vertical partition, k, Fig. 
whence it enters the chanbers IF F througla 
numerous perforations in the bottom of the 
5, un til beneath tlhe oven, w lhe it extends back 
bridges jj. Air also enters from title H into 
and up the rear side of this partition, as usual, 
the chamber E through perforations in the 
whence it communicates through an aperture, 
end plate, l. The left-hand bridges, j, crossing 
l, with an outside flue, J, from which leads the 
collar on, which connects with the stove-pipe. 
the middle of the two chambers F, do not 
From the top of the partition k a valve, K, 
communicate with the flue H, but with flues L. 
L., close to the front and rear walls A of the 
extends to the rear wall of the stove, and in 
ordinary burning this valve is closed, compel 
stove, their interiors forming flues L'L'. These 
ling the gases to pass through the flue Iaround 
flues L. L are formed by keeping the fire-bricks 
or tiles p p, lining the outer side of the cham. 
the ovel; but when a direct draft is required, 
as when kindling the fire, it is opened by its 
bers FF, out of contact with the walls AA, 
so as to leave an air-space between the two, as 
stem K', which extends through to the front 
of the stove, whereupon the gases pass through 
best shown in Fig. 4. This is accomplished by 
forming the wall A with flanges, spur's, or other 
its seat directly to the aperture l and into the 
projections q, against which the backs of the 
flue J. The partition G serves in either posi 
tiles pp may rest. The tiles are held back 
tion of the valve K to compel the stream of 
against these projections by plates M M, one 
burning gases to pass beneath all the stove 
holes, instead of flowing in a direct line toward 
of which fits between each two tiles and at the 
end of each bridgei, and each of which has a 
the front or rear left-hand corner of the stove, 
flange, r, on one or both sides exteriding in 
whichever passage would afford then the more 
front of the adjoining tile. The plate M is 
direct escape, as they would do were the lar 
drawn back toward the wall A by a bolt, 8, 
titions onitted. Thus the front and rear stove 
Fig. 7, or by other means, and has spurs or 
holes cook alike whether the valve K be open 
flanges q on its back to keep it from being 
or closed. 
I provide meafs for supplying to the burn 
dawn too close to the wall. 
ing gases and products of combustion at suc 
The flue L in front receives air through an 
aperture, t, whence the air flows, as indicated 
cessive points in their travel a considerable 
(uantity of lighly-heated air, in order that the 
by the arrows, into the flue L' and down 
through the perforations into the combustion 
soke and carbonaceous products slhall be tlhor 
chamber. In its passage through the flue I 
Oughly Oxicli Zed or consumed. 
To the right of the right-hand baffle-brick, i, 
it absorbs heat from the tilles pp. The flue L 
in the rear receives air through an aperture, 
in each chamber is another and lower brick, n, 
t'. (Shown in Fig. 4.) 
whose edge nearly meets that of the brick i, 
From another aperture, u, in the rear wall 
leaving a narrow crack or slit between the two. 
Beneath this slit is an aperture in the plate h, 
of the stove an air-flue, N, extends between 
the outer wall and lining-tiles to and across 
and beneath this is a chamber, C, over the 
95 
. ? ?, 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
I 3O 
5 
 
4. 
2 ? || 2626 
- 
ber F, leading therefrom, baffle-bricksii there. 
each of said bridges, with air-inlet perforations 
in, beneath the stove-holes, perforated air 
through said bridges admitting lheated air to 
pass from the flues to the chambers, substan- bridges ji, depending thereinto between the 
stove-holes, and air-heating files extending 
tially as set forth. 
through the heated walls of the stove to and 
3. The combination, in a stove, of a fuel 
communicating with the interior of said 
chamber, a gas-combustion chamber leading 
bridges, substantially as set forth. 
therefrom and extending beneath the stove 
6. The combination, with chambers E and F, 
holes, a contraction or throat at the entrance 
of tiles p p, lining the sides thereof, the outer 
to said chamber, an air-bridge extending across 
shell, A, having projections of q to keep said 
said chamber between two stove-holes, an air 
tiles out of contact with it, and thereby form 
lheating fue extending through the space be 
an air-beating space, and plates M. M., having 
tween the lining-tiles of said chamber and the 
flanges for engaging said tiles and holding 
shell of the stove, a branch flue extending 
them back against said projections fastened to 
therefrom through said air-bridge, and perfo 
the shell A, substantially as set forth. 
rations in the latter admitting air from said 
7. The combination, with chambers E and F, 
branch flue into said chamber, substantially as 
of side lining-tiles, pp, outer shell, A, having 
set fortl). 
projections 1 (1, flanged plate M, and air-bridge 
4. The coalbination, in a stove, of a fuel 
j, its interior communicating through an open 
chamber, two gas-combustion chambers lead 
ing in said plate with tle air-hea ting space or 
ing the refroii aid separated by a dividing-par 
flue between said tiles and shell, substantially 
tition, an air-bridge crossing said fuel-cham 
ber and forming a partial continuation of said 
as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
partition, an air-heating flue extending through 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
a heated wall of the stove, a branch fline lead 
ing therefrom through said bridge, and perfo 
Witnesses. 
rations in said bridge admitting air from said 
flue into the fuel-chamber, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. A cook-stove consisting of the combina 
tion of fuel-elhamber E, gas-combustion cham 
BELLE F. GREENE, 
ARTEIUR. C. FRASER. 
WILLIAM A. GREEN E. 
Witnesses: 
- 
- 
35 
40 
So 
O 
2 ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271726.txt	(No Model.) 
C. C. MILLER. 
PLATFORM SCALE 
No. 271,726, 
Patented Feb. 6, 1883, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES C. MILLER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO E. & T. 
FAIRBANKS & Co., OF ST. JOHNSBURY, VERMONT. 
PLATFORMS CAE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271,726, dated February 6, 1883. 
Application filed July 25, 1882. (No model.) 
SO 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES C. MILLER, 
of Brooklyn, Kings county, New York, (as 
signor to E. & T. FAIRBANKS & Co., of St. 
Johnsbury, Vermont,) have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Platform 
Scales, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates generally to the ordi 
nary form of portable platform-scales, which 
are mounted on wheels and adapted to be 
easily moved from place to place; and it has 
more especial relation to such scales of this 
kind as are intended to be used out-of-doors, 
about Warehouses, or on wharves, levees, or 
in similar public places, where they are more 
or less exposed to the attacks of mischievous 
or dishonest persons. 
In the ordinary portable platform-scale used 
for these purposes, as is well known, a hollow 
pillar rises from the neck of the platform-cas 
ing in central position, and the pillar is capped 
by a light overhanging arm, which projects 
laterally from one side of the pillar, while the 
graduated scale-beam is hung in the fulcrum 
loop directly from the top of the pillar, where 
the short arm of the beam projects over the 
hollow of the pillar, and is connected with 
tle steelyard-rod, which rises through the 
same, while the long graduated arm of the 
beam projects outward under the overhang 
ing arm of the pillar. The loose weights are 
placed upon a bail projecting from the side of 
the pillai. Hence in this construction the 
beam projects altogether from one side of the 
pillar, which is unsymmetrical, and, moreover, 
causes the beam and its projecting arm to ex 
tend beyond the base outline of the scale on 
one side, and thus renders its position some 
times unhandy and incommodious. The chief 
objection, however, is that this construction 
leaves the beam, its adjuncts, and the weights 
entirely exposed and likely to be injured by 
mischievous persons; or such of the parts as 
are loose or capable of being detached are 
likely to be abstracted by petty thieves, par 
ticularly the beam, which is a heavy brass 
piece having considerable value in their eyes. 
To prevent these attacks the beam, &c., have 
sometimes been boxed in by fixing an im 
provised case or box to the pillar and over 
hanging arm around the beam; but this forms 
a clumsy expedient, is a foreign addition to 
the scale, and is inconvenient and not always 
SeCle. 
Now, the aim of my invention is to so con 
Struct the scale at the OttSet as to overcome 
the aforesaid objections and thoroughly pro 
tect the aforesaid parts of the scale by a con 
venient, simple, and effective construction; and 
to this end I modify the construction at the 
top of the pillar considerably-that is, I make 
the pillar considerably shorter than usual, and 
entirely dispense with the usual overhang 
ing arm, and in its place I surmount the pillar 
With a neat casing, which rises to about the 
usual height of the pillar. This casing is pref. 
erably placed centrally on the top of the pil 
lar, so as to render the construction symmetri 
cal and convenient, and it is sufficiently large 
to freely inclose the beam, which is not hung 
from the pillar, as heretofore, but from the 
said case, preferably from the top of the case, 
Across the . 
which overlies and incloses it. 
case, near the bottom, is extended a partition 
or shelf, which divides the case into two com 
partments, the upper and larger of which coln 
tains the beam, &c., while in the lower and 
Smaller one is hung an intermediate lever, 
which is connected at its middle with the steel 
yard-rod, which rises out of the pillar, while 
the free end of said lever connects to the short 
arm of the beam. On the top of the shelf, in 
the upper and larger compartment, is placed a 
bail or rack to receive the loose weights, and 
one side of the case over the upper compart 
ment is linged or made movable, so as to 
swing down or open outward, and thus per 
mit access to the beam and weights when the 
scales are in use, but which may be closed 
and locked When the scales are out of use, thus 
completely inclosing and protecting all the 
usually vulnerable or abstractilole parts of the 
Scales. My invention therefore lies mainly in 
the features here outlined, and also consists 
in certain minor features of construction, as 
hereinafter fully set forth. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 presents 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2? 226 
a perspective view of my improved scales, 
viewed from the platform or loading side, 
which is the rear side of the beam-casing. 
Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the beam-case 
with the lid and side plate removed to expose 
the internal mechanism. Fig. 3 is a front ele 
vation of the lid and fixed side plate removed. 
Fig. 4 is a sectional elevation on line ac a' of 
Fig. 2, looking to the right, 
In the drawings, a indicates the platform 
frame or casing, which is mounted upon the 
usual wheels, as illustrated. l indicates the 
platform; c, the neck of the platform-casing, 
and d the pillar, which rises centrally there 
from, as usual. All these parts are presumed 
to be of the ordinary construction, as is also 
the internal platform-lever mechanism, which 
of course need no description here, as they 
form no part of the present invention. 
Now, in my improved construction I much 
prefer to make the pillar of cast - iron, in the 
form of a square tube, as usual; but this pillar 
is made much shorter than usual, and it is sur 
mounted by a neat casing, A, which is prefer 
ably of about square proportions on the broad 
side, as shown in Fig. 2, but oblong in cross 
section, with a flat base and an arched top, as 
seen in Figs. 1 and 4, and is of ample size in 
ternally to freely inclose the beam, as seen in 
Fig. 2. This case is preferably set in central 
position on the top of the pillar, so as to ren 
der the construction even or balanced, as well 
as more compact and symmetrical; and this 
case is preferably made of metal, similar to the 
pillar, so as to possess strength and rigidity to 
sustain the inclosed parts and deter and pre 
vent thievish attacks when closed. The case 
A is preferably made in a number of parts, 
mostly of cast-iron and partly of sheet - iron. 
The base or bottom side,f, of the case is a flat 
plate of cast-iron, with a short central neck 
or sleeve, f', projecting downward therefrom 
to fit into the top of the hollow pillar, to which 
it is screwed or bolted, as best shown in Fig. 
2. The end pieces, (1 g, are also flat cast-iron 
plates of oblong form, with the top rounded 
or arched and the flat bottom provided with 
interually-projecting earsg', which are screwed 
or riveted to the base-plate, as seen in Fig. 2. 
The top piece, h, is a strong casting of concavo 
convex form in cross - Section, its under side 
being concave and its upper side arched or 
curved like a roof, as it does, in fact, form the 
roof of the case, and is hence so curved as to 
quickly shed the rain which may fall on the 
case when the scales are left out-of-doors. 
Grooves are formed across each end of the top 
piece, in which the top edges of the end pieces 
() are socketed, as seen in Fig. 2, and are there 
held by suitable screws or rivets. The tops of 
the end pieces are not completely rounded or 
arched; but the extreme top is cut off flat, as 
indicated by the dotted line in Fig. 4, so as to 
obtain a better bearing in the grooved ends of 
the top piece. 
is formed narrower than the baself, and has 
overhanging lipsi, which form the eaves of the 
roof, and these eaves are formed with under 
lying grooves, in which the top edges of the 
broad sides i and k are fitted, as seen in Fig. 
4. The sides thus curve inward under the 
eaves of the top, which hence overhang the 
sides, so that the rain will readily drip from 
the overhanging edges of the top and run down 
the curved sides without tending to run into 
the joints of the case. 
Near the bottom of the case a shelf or par. 
tition, , extends across the interior parallel 
with the base, and is made of a strong cast 
iron plate screwed to ears projecting from the 
end pieces, g, as shown in Fig. 1. This shelf 
thus divides the interior of the case into two 
compartments, n. 1, the upper and larger one 
of which incloses the beam at, with its several 
adjuncts, and the stack of loose weights t', 
while the lower and small compartment, n, in 
closes an intermediate lever, 0, which is hung 
or fulcrumed at one end in a loop depending 
from one end of the shelf v, while the free and 
opposite end of said lever is connected by the 
chain p with the short arm of the beam at, 
which chain rises through an opening in the op 
posite end of the shelf, as fully shown in Figs. 
2 and 4. The middle of this intermediate le 
ver, 0, lies directly over the top of the hollow 
pillar d, and is there connected with the steel 
yard-rod ', which rises through the pillar from 
the platform mechanism below. The lever 0 and 
chain p form the indirect connection between 
the steelyard-rod and beam, which is rendered 
necessary by the symmetrical arrangement of 
the case and beam relatively to the pillar, for 
it will be seen that if the case and beam were 
arranged all to one side of the pillar the short 
arm of the beam would be brought directly 
over the pillar and might be coinected directly 
with the steelyard-rod, as is the case in the 
more common construction. The intermediate 
lever and its connections relatively to the beam, 
&c., are not of course here claimed to be new 
in themselves, Now, the beam at, as will be 
noted, is not hung or supported from the pil 
lar, as usual, but from the inclosing-case A, 
which surmounts the pillar, and preferably from 
the top piece, h, of the case, which is formed 
with an inclined downwardly-projecting lug, 
8, (see Figs. 2 and 4) having a curved hook, 
s', protruding laterally there from. The full 
crum-loop at of the beam is slipped over this 
hooks' and lies against the inclined lug s, as 
seen best in Fig. 2, thus hanging and sustain. 
ing the beam in firm position in the top of the 
One end of the case is provided with an or 
dinary cam or holder, at', to hold down the 
free end of the bean when out of poise. 
On the top of the shelf , about the middle 
thereof, is fixed an elongated H-shaped rack, t, 
on which the usual loose weights, t, may be 
conveniently and securely stacked, as shown 
CaSe. 
- 
It will be seen that the top piece or roof, h, in Figs, 2 and 4. 
d 
25 
35 
So 
55 
65 
yo 
90 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
IIS 
I 30 
27,726 
3O advantage in many businesses. 
The side i of the case, which is the rear or 
fixed side, is made in one piece, of strong sheet 
iron, screwed or riveted to marginal ears on 
the end pieces, (1, the shelf ', and the base-plate 
Sf Tbe opposite or front side, is k', which is 
the opening side, is made in two sections, kk', 
the lower section, l', being formed of cast 
iron, screwed or riveted over the compartment 
in to ears oil the ends and base at the four 
Io points shown in Figs. 2 and 3, while the upper 
section, k, is preferably made of sheet-iron, 
hinged to the lower section, k'. The upper 
section, k, thus forms a down-swinging door or 
lid, which may be readily unlocked or opened 
I5 when desired, as shown by full lines in Fig. 1 
and dotted lines in Fig. 4, thus exposing the 
interior of the upper compartment, n, and 
thereby affording ready access to the beam and 
weights when it is desired to use the scale in 
2O any weighing operations. On the other hand, 
when the weighing is concluded the lid k may 
be closed and locked, as seen in Fig. 4, thus 
completely inclosing the beam and weights, 
&c., and protecting them from mischievous or 
25 dishonest attacks, as well as from exposure to 
the Weather. By this means the scales may 
be left out-of-doors-on wharves, levees, or 
other places-Over night without danger of loss 
or injury, which is a great convenience and 
The lid of the case, as may be noted, is 
locked by a padlock, c, (see Figs. 2 and 4) 
which may be passed through a staple, y', 
which extends from a lug, ), cast on the mid 
35 dle of the top piece, h, and Which staple pro 
jets through a slot, 2, Fig. 3, in the lid of the 
case when closed, as seen in Fig. 4. 
The lower section, k', on the opening side of 
the case is provided with the hinge-leaves k', 
4o cast thereon, and the hinge-leaves k' of the 
lic k are jointed to the former by bolts, as 
shown. These hinge-ears' are cast separate 
ly and fixed to the outer end of the lid k, while 
along the inside of the lid extends a strong 
45 cast-iron bar, ac, which is fastened to the hinge 
leaves ic' through the lid, thus strengthening 
and bracing the lid. This brace-bara, as may 
be noted from Figs. 4 and 3, is so placed and 
formed as to overlie the stack of weights t 
to when the lid is closed, thus holding them 
firmly in their place, and the bar is also 
formed with an overhanging horn, ac', which 
projects therefrom in coincident position with 
the pendent counterpoise or weight-receiver q 
55 of the beam, so that when the lid is closed, as 
seen in Fig. 4, this horn bear's upon the Weight 
receiver, aud thus holds it down and prevents 
it from swinging out of position within the case 
when the scales are moved about. The closing 
60 of the lid thus holds both the weights and the 
counterpoise firmly in stationary position. 
What I claim is 
1. A weighing-scale substantially such as 
set forth, constructed with a casing mounted 
65 upon the top of the pillar, with the beam and 
its adjuncts hung in and inclosed by said case 
7 O 
above the pillar, and a movable door or lid on 
one side of said case, provided with suitable 
locking or fastening devices, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A platform pillar scale constructed with 
an inclosing - case mounted upon the top of 
the pillar and placed centrally thereon, or 
nearly so, with the scale-beam hung in the up 
per portion of said case above the pillar, and 75 
an intermediate lever hung in the lower part of 
the case over the pillar and connected with 
the beam and steelyard-rod, the said case in 
closing said beam, lever, and connections, 
&c., and provided on the graduated side of 8o 
the beam with a movable lid or door, substan 
tially as and for the purpose herein set forth. 
3. The combination, with the pillar of a plat 
form-scale, of a beam-inclosing case nounted 
on the top of the pillar in central position, or 85 
nearly so, and formed with a partition or shelf, 
v, extending across said case, dividing it into 
upper and lower compartments, an in, with 
the beam at and its adjuncts hung in said 
upper compartment and the intermediate le- 9o 
ver, o, hung in said lower compartment, and 
connected with the beam and steelyard-rod, 
with a movable door or lid, l, provided with 
locking or fastening devices arranged to close 
the upper compartment or permit access there- 95 
to, as desired, substantially, as herein shown 
and described. 
4. The combination, with the pillar of a plat 
form-scale, of a rigid beam sustaining and 
inclosing case mounted on the top thereof, IOO 
having on one side a movable door or lid pro 
vided with fastening devices, with the scale 
beam bung within and from the top of said 
case, and connections extending through and 
within said case from the beam to the steel- 1 O5 
yard-rod, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
5. The combination, with the pillar of a scale, 
of the beatin-inclosing case A, mounted thereon, 
and formed with the shelf a extending across I O 
said case, with the intermediate lever, o, hung 
below said shelf, the beam at and its adjuncts, 
hung above said shelf and connected with the 
said lever, with the side plate, l', fixed over 
the compartment below said shelf, and the II 5 
hinged or movable lid ic, arranged to cover or 
uncover the beam - compartment above said 
shelf, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed. 
as set forth, a beau-inclosing case formed with 
a rigid top piece constructed with a dowl 
wardly-projecting hook or lug, from which the 
beam is directly fulcrumed or suspended, sub 
stantially as herein shown and described. 
7. The combination, in a scale substantially 
such as set forth, with a beam-inclosing case 
and a hinged or movable lid arranged to open 
and close the case of a projecting horn or 
claw on said lid, coincident with the pendent 130 
Weight-pan of the scale-beam, adapted to press 
upon said pan when the lid is shut, and there 
6. In a weighing - scale substantially such I2O 
2 5 
A. 
2 
( 
by prevent its Swinging or moving out of place ik bent or curved at the top into said grooves 
When the case is closed, substantially as here- under the lips, substantially as and for the 
in set forth. 
S. In combination with a scale-beam, the 
inclosing-case A, formed with the top piece, 
h, constructed with the overhanging lips i, 
With underlying grooves, and with the sides 
ARTHUR. J. WESTERSIAYER, 
JNO. E. GAVIN. 
CEARLES C. MILIER. 
purpose set forth. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271826.txt	(No Model.) 
M. FLAMMANG. 
PLATE HOLDER FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERAS. 
No. 271826, 
Patented Feb. 6, 1883, 
S. 
A. 
N 
     
 
 
 
% Zazakasazzb 
3. SES seiz 22 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MATHIAS FLAMMANG, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
PLATE HOLDER FOR PHOTOGRAPHC CAMERA.S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271,826, dated February 6, 1883. 
Application filed December 28, 1881. 
(No model.) 
To all clion it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MATEIIAS FLAMMANG, 
of Newark, in the county of Essex and State 
of New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Plate-Holders for Pho 
tographic Cameras, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The object of my present improvements is 
to produce a photographic-plate holder neat 
and compact, and having as few projections as 
possible, so that it may be conveniently cal'. 
ried in the pocket of a photographer. 
To this end the improvements consist in the 
combination, with the frame and dark-slide 
of a photographie-plate holder and a head or 
stopper. attached to its outer end, of a spring 
catch adapted to be operated by the hand in 
grasping the head or stopper aid a device on 
the frame of the holder for engaging the catch. 
They also consist in a photographic - plate 
holder frame, a door fitting snugly within the 
same at opposite edges, a tongue and groove 
or recess for securing said docr to the frame 
at one of the intermediate edges, and means, 
which do not project beyond the side of the 
door and frame, for securing the door at the 
other of the intermediate edges, all being so 
combined and organized that the door may be 
detached without any edgewise movement, ex 
cept in the direction of the depth or width of 
said tongue and groove or recess. Both inter 
mediate edges of the door are preferably se 
cured by tongues or their equivalents and 
grooves or recesses, and in such case one of 
the tongues and its groove or recess may be 
deeper or wider than the other, so that the 
door may be engaged with the frame by first 
placing the deeper tongue or equivalent in 
its groove or recess, then pressing the door 
into its frame, and finally sliding the door edge 
wise to effect the engagement of the opposite 
tongue or its equivalent with its groove or re 
cess, as more fully hereinafter described. 
They also consist in the combination, with 
the frame and door of a photographic - plate 
holder, of means for fastening opposite edges 
of the door to opposite edges of the frame and 
a spring acting against the inner face of the 
door, whereby when the door is released at 
one edge it will be pushed outward from the 
frame, so that it may be easily grasped. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a back view of a photographic-plate holder 
embodying my improvements. 
Fig. 2 is a 
horizontal section of the same, and IFig. 3 is a 
transverse section thereof. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A designates the frame of the photographic 
plate holder. It is provided with a rabbet, a, 
for the reception of a photographic plate, B, a 
rabbet, b, in rear of the for iner, for the recep 
tion of the door C, and a slideway, c, forward 
of the rabbet (t, for the reception of the dark 
slide D. The door C may be made of any suit. 
able material, and fits snugly between the ends 
or opposite upright edges of the fraine. At 
one intermediate or longitudinal edge it is pro 
vided with a deep or wide tongue, d, and at 
the opposite intermediate or longitudinal edge 
with a shallower or narrower tongue, e. The 
corresponding edges of the frame have grooves 
or recesses de?, corresponding with the said 
tongues. To fasten the door in the frame, the 
tongue d is inserted in the groove d', and the 
door is pressed into its rabbet b. Then the 
door is moved edgewise transversely to the 
length of the tongues and grooves or recesses 
to cause its tongue e to engage With the groove 
e'. The tongue d and groove d' are deep or 
wide enough to remain in engagement after 
the tongue e and groove e' have thus been en 
gaged. It will be observed that in removing 
or replacing the door no movement thereof 
lengthwise of the tongues and grooves or re 
cesses is necessary. 
E designates a spring, which acts directly 
between the frame and door to force the lat 
ter in such direction as to effect and maintain 
the engagement of the tongue and groove ce'. 
It is obvious that the grooves may be in the 
door and the tongues on the frame with like 
results. On the inner side of the door is a 
spring, f, which bears on the photographic plate 
and holds it snugly in its rabbet. This spring 
acts against the inner face of the door and sub 
serves the additional purpose of pushing the 
door outward when it is slid transversely in 
such direction that its tongue e will be disen 
gaged from the groove e'. When this takes 
place the door may be easily grasped to lift it 
out. It will be observed that I thus provide 
55 
6 5 
75 
So 
85 
IO 
IS 
45 
So 
OC 
27, S26 
means for fastening the door which do not pro 
ject beyond the side of the plate-holder. This 
is very desirable, as the plate-holder may then 
be carried more conveniently in the pocket of 
the photographer. The same result may be 
obtained, at least to some extent, by provid 
ing the door with countersunk catches, but 
tons, or bolts, which may be manipulated 
through indentations in the door; but the 
tongues and grooves are more desirable, as 
they form lap joints, whereby light is effectu 
ally excluded. 
The dark-slide D is provided at the outer 
end with a head or stopper, D'. This head or 
stopper is provided with a spring-catch, (1, 
whose free end is adapted to engage with a 
staple, strap, or like device, h, on the frame. 
By p1'essing the free end of this catch toward 
the head or stopper when the latter is grasped 
it may be disengaged from the staple, strap, 
or other device, h. The end of the catch inay 
be lounded, so as to automatically engage with 
the said device when the head or stopper is 
pushed toward the frame. This fastening is 
much preferable to one which projects beyond 
the sides of the frame, as it better adapts the 
plate-hoider to be carried in the pocket of the 
photographer, and it is often very desirable to 
so carry a plate-holder when dry-plates are 
used. 
I do not wish to claim broadly the combina 
tion, with the frame and dark slide of a pho. 
tographic-plate holder, of a self-acting spring 
catch or lock, whereby the slide will be auto 
matically locked when inserted in the frame. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the frame and dark 
slide of a photographic-plate holder and a head 
or stopper attached to its outer end, of a spring 
catch adapted to be operated by the hand in 
O 
25 
30 
35 
grasping the head or stopper and a device on 
the frame of the holder for engaging the catch, 
substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the frame A of a 
photographic-plate holder, provided with a sta 
ple or strap, h, of a dark-slide, D, provided 
with a head or stopper, D', and a spring-catch, 
g, substantially as specified. 
3. A photographic-plate-holder frame, a door 
fitting snugly within the same at opposite 
edges, a tongue and groove or recess for secur 
ing said door to the frame at one of its inter 
mediate edges, and means, which do not pro 
ject beyond the outer side of the door and 
frame, for securing the door at the other of 
the intermediate edges, all being so combined 
and organized that the door may be detached 
without ally edge wise movement, except in the 
direction of the depth or width of said tongue 
and groove or recess, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination of the frame A, provided 
with grooves or recesses d'e', the former being 
deeper or wider than the latter, the door C, 
provided with tongues de, or their equivalents, 
the former being deeper or wider than the lat 
ter, and the door being made to fit snugly be 
tween the sides of the frame, which are unpro 
vided with grooves or recesses, substantially 
as specified. 
5. The combination, with the frame and door 
of a photographic-plate holder, of means for 
fastening opposite edges of the door to oppo. 
site edges of the fratne and a spring acting 
against the inner face of the door, whereby 
when the door is released at one edge it will be 
pushed outward from the fraue, so that it may 
be easily grasped, substantially as specified. 
M. FLAMMANG. 
Witnesses: 
T. J. KEANE, 
JAMES R. BOWEN. 
45 
50 
55 
65 
75 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US271926.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 271,926, 
P. SCHRAG, 
LEAD AND CRAYON HOLDER. 
Patented Feb. 6, 1883. 
 
WITNESSES: 
s 4-6- 
INWERTOR, 
ATTORNEYs 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
PHILIP SCHRAG, OF NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO EBEREIARD FABER, OF PORT 
RICHMOND, N. Y. 
EAD AND CRAY ON - OLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 271,926, dated February 6, 1888. 
. Application filed September 21, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILIP SCHRAG, a citi. 
zen of the United States, residing at New York, 
in the county and State of New York, have in 
5 vented new and useful Improvements in Lead 
and Crayon Holders, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention consists in the combination, 
with a hollow handle, of a clamping-cap secured 
to to the front end of the handle, a ferrule pro 
vided with a screw-thread secured to the rear 
end of said handle, a lead-receiving tube ex 
tending through the handle, lead-retaining 
jaws formed at the front end of this tube, and 
I5 a screw-cap, which is secured to its rear end 
and is adapted to engage with the screw-thread 
formed on the ferrule which is secured to the 
hollow handle, so that by turning this screw 
cap in one direction the lead-containing jaws 
2e are moved forward and caused to close up by 
the action of the clamping-cap, and by turning 
this screw-cap in the opposite direction the 
lead-retaining jaws are drawn inward and al 
lowed to open. 
25 . In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a longitudinal section. Fig.2 is a hori 
Zontal section in the plane an ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
is a similar section in the planey y, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter Adesignates the 
handle of my lead and crayon holder. This 
handle is made of wood or any other suitable 
material, and it is provided with a bore ex 
tending throughout its entire length. To the 
35 front end of this handle is firmly secured the 
clamping-cap B, which is made of sheet metal 
and fastened to the handle by a pin, a, Fig. 3. 
To the rear end of the handle A is firmly se 
cured a ferrule, C, which is by preference made 
of sheet metal and fastened to the handle by a 
pin, b, Fig. 2. On the outer end of this fer. 
rule is formed a screw-thread, c. 
D is the lead-receiving tube, which fits the 
bore of the handle easily and extends through 
out its entire length, and also through the 
clamping-cap up to its front end, as shown in 
Fig.1. To the rear end of the tube D is firmly 
secured a cap, E, which is by preference made 
of sheet metal and provided at its open end 
5o with a screw-thread, d, adapted to engage with 
45 
the screw-thread c of the ferrule C. By turn 
ing the cap E in one direction the lead-receiv 
ing tube, which is carried by said cap, is ad 
vanced in the bore of the handle, and by turn 
ing the cap E in the opposite direction the 55 
lead-receiving tube is retracted. The front 
end of the lead-receiving tube is split, so as to 
form the lead-retainingjawse. When the tube 
D is advanced by the action of the screw-cap 
E, the jawse are closed by coming in contact 6o 
with the inner conical surface of the clamping 
cap B, and the lead is firmly retained. If the 
screw-cap E is turned so as to retract the lead 
receiving tube D, the jaws e are free to open 
and the lead is released, so that it can be ad- 65 
vanced in the tube D to the desired extent. 
It will be seen from this description that the 
means used for retaining and releasing the lead 
are similar to those described in Patent No. 
33,034, granted to Johann L. Faber August lo 
13, 1861. In this patent the clamping-cap is 
made to engage with a screw-thread formed 
upon the inner end or body of the lead-retain 
ving jaws or the split tube. 
My device can be 
made at less expense, since I am enabled to 75 
form the screw-threads c. d, used for operating 
the clamping device, of sheet metal, and, fur 
thermore, in my device the lead is supported 
uniformly throughout its entire length, and the 
operation of adjusting the lead is facilitated, 8o 
since the point of the lead remains fully ex 
posed to view when the screw-cap is manipu 
lated. In addition thereto in my device the 
diameter of the screw-cap can be made and, in 
fact, it must necessarily be made larger than 85 
the diameter of the handle, so that a greater 
purchase is obtained and the lead can be more 
firmly clamped than it can be by the clamping 
cap of the old device, the diameter of which 
must necessarily be smaller than that of the go 
handle, for if it should be made larger the ar 
ticle would become clumsy. 
I do not broadly claim the longitudinal ad 
justment in hollow handles of tool-holding 
shafts or gutting-blades through the medium 95. 
of rotating caps and screw-threads, said caps 
being applied to the rear ends of the handles; 
nor do I claim a pencil-holder consisting of a 
handle having a slitted end, a clamping-fer 
rule applied thereto, and a spring at the upper Ioo 
 
2 
27,926 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 15 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by rear end of said tube. 
The combination, substantially as hereinbe- hand and seal in the presence of two subscrib 
end of the pencil-cavity in the handle, which the lead-retaining jaws formed at the front end 
operates to project the pencil. 
of this tube, and the screw-cap secured to the 
Letters Patent, is- 
fore described, of the handle having a bore ing witnesses. 
throughout its entire length, the clamping-cap 
secured to the front end of the handle, the fer- 
rule provided with an external screw-thread 
secured to the rear end of the handle, the lead- 
receiving tube extending through the handle, 
PEIILIP SCHRAG. L. S. 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER, 
O 
M 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272029.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 272,029, 
H. F. CAMPBELL, 
BARREL HOOP PLANING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1883. 
 
 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
H. F. CAMPBELL, 
s sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 272,029, 
BARREL HOOP PLANING MACHINE. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1883. 
  
  
 
 
 
S. 2. S S 
I 
 
 
 
 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY F. CAMPBELL OF CONCORD, NEW HAMPSHIRE, 
BARREL-HOOP-PLANING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 272,029, dated February 18, 1883. 
Application filed March 31, 1882. (No model.) 
w 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY F. CAMPBELL, 
of Concord, county of Merrimack, State of New 
Hampshire, have invented an Improvementin 
5 Planing-Machines, of which the following de 
scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification. 
This invention is an improvement on United 
States Patent No. 248,021, granted to me Octo 
ber 11, 1881, and is more especially adapted, 
as herein embodied, to the class of planing-ma 
chine for dressing barrel. hoops; but some of 
my improvements, to be hereinafter described 
as, for instance, the presser-bar-may be gen 
erally applied to wood-planing machines with 
good results. In my patented machine referred 
to all the hoops being dressed were acted upon 
by one long presser-bar, which made it diffi 
cult, when running more than two hoops simul 
taneously, to properly act upon a third thinner 
one, which thinner one was apt to be notched, 
and in case of a crook or knot to be injured or 
broken, because its knot or crook was not prop 
erly embedded into the elastic roller below the 
cutter. In this, my present invention, I have 
divided the presser-bar to form a series of 
presser-feet, and have provided a foot for each 
individual hoop, so that its knots or crooks will 
be properly embedded into the surface of the 
elastic bed-roller D, no matter what may be the 
thicknessorshape of the hoop next to it, orofany 
other hoop being dressed simultaneously by the 
said revolving cutter-head. These presser-feet 
are so shaped and mounted with relation to the 
35 center of rotation of the revolving cutter-head 
that the presser-feet rise independently in the 
arc of a circle eccentric to the axis of the cut 
ter-head; but the lower extremity of each foot, 
or where it bears upon the hoop, will, as it rises, 
be maintained at the same uniform distance 
from the cutting-edges of the knives of the cut 
ter-head, thus better insuring a smooth, even 
surface, especially in cross-grained gnarly wood. 
In practice, I have found such movement of the 
45 presser-feet to be of great value, not only with 
the class of wood mentioned, but also aiding 
materially instraightening crooked hoops, such 
as sawed by a machine described in my appli 
cation No. 47,697, filed December 12, 1881, to 
So which reference may be had. On the occur. 
55 
rence of a sharp crook in any one hoop the 
presser-foot (it bearing thereon immediately in 
front of the cutter - head) rises as the abrupt 
part of the crook arrives in front of the cutter 
head, which enables the cutter - head to dress 
the hoop evenly at the crook, while the fluted 
drawing-rollers at the rear of the cutter-head 
draw and straighten the hoop over the elastic 
bed-roll as soon as the hoop is rendered suffi 
ciently thin and flexible by the action of the 
knives of the cutter - head, so that the upper 
side of the boop as it passes under the cutter 
head and between it and the elastic bed-roller 
presents a plane surface, and renders it almost 
impossible to injure the hoop, as would be the 
case on the occurrence of a crook which was 
not thus straightened. Each presser - foot is 
held down upon the hoop by a suitable lever, . 
the power of which may be chal)ged at will, 
according to the work being done. In my pres 
ent machine I have provided a series of guides 
having independent rollers to act upon the 
edges of each hoop as it passes into the ma 
chine to be dressed, thus dispensing with the 
necessity of guiding the hoops by hand in their 
passage through the machine, thus making the 
machine practically automatic after the hoops 
are entered between the feed-rollers. 
Figure 1 represents in front elevation a plan 
ing-machine embodying my present invention. 8o 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical section thereof 
on the line aca, Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a side elevation 
on a larger scale of one of my improved presser 
feet, the curved guide for it being shown in sec 
tion; Fig. 4, a rear side elevation of a presser- 85 
foot. Fig. 5 is an enlarged detail of part of 
the hoop-guide detached from the machine. 
In the drawings like letters denote like parts. 
The frame-work A, the elastic bed-roller D, 
the feed-rollers H and A', the drawing-rollers 
GF, the rear presser-bar, O, the revolving cut 
ter-head B, the bed which holds the bearings 
for the rollers A D F G, and the means for 
elevating and depressing the said bed are sub 
stantially as in my patent referred to, where 
like parts are designated by like letters and 
need not be herein described. Instead of the 
upper smooth drawing-rollers shown in the said 
patent, I have herein employed two rollers, a 
b', which are corrugated longitudinally to en- I co 
95 
92 
75 
22,029 
- 
75 
85 
2O roiler. 
ure of the feet upon the hoop beneath them, the 
able them to take firm hold of and draw the 
thicker the hoop and the largeritsknots, warts, 
, crooked hoops so as to straighten them while 
and crooks the greater pressure necessary to 
passing over the bed-roller D, after, however, 
be applied, and vice versa. 
they have been reduced in thickness by the 
The operator, on the occurrence of a large 
5 action of the usual knives of the cutter-head B. 
knot or bad crook in a hoop, may press upon 
Infront of the feed-rollers A'H, I have placed 
the lever of the presser-foot holding that hoop 
a hoop guide, it being composed of a rectan 
while the said large knot or crook is passing 
gn lar frame, C, properly secured to the adjust 
between the cutter-head and bed-roller. 
able bed, which I have marked d, and of a se 
This my present machine will have the car. 
Io ries of vertically-placed rollers, e, the said roll 
rier-bar o', on which the presser-feet are hung 
ers, by their location in the frame c, forming 
and guided, supported on india-rubber blocks, 
as many spaces or passages as there are hoops 
such as shown in Fig. 5 of my patent referred 
to be dressed when the machine is performing 
to, and marked by the letter i, to thus enable 
its maximum work. These rollers will fortin 
me to carefully adjust the lower extremities of 8o 
15 the sides of each of these guide-passages, and 
the presser-feet when at rest, to thus place 
will turn independently upon their axes, there 
them in their proper position with relation to 
by forcing the hoops from side to side and 
the arc described by the edges of the revolv. 
guiding them in the proper channel to the feed 
ing knives; but thereafter in operation the 
rollers and between the cutter-head and bed 
pressers actindependently, as stated, and adapt 
themselves to any variation in the hoops un 
The presser-feet are composed of curved 
metal plates f', dressed smoothly upon their 
der them. 
Instead of employing several independient 
concaved faces and shaped as shown in the 
presser-feet side by side on one common car 
drawings, Fig. 3. Each presser-foot has at 
rier-bar, o', as described, I might, for use in 90 
25 tached to the lugs g, at its rear side, by suit 
an ordinary wood-planing machine, employ the 
able screws 2, two curved arms him, which 
said carrier-bar and place on it bat one press 
receive between them two rollers, l n, and 
er-foot to bear upon and hold down the work 
each curved arm has an ear, 3. 
to pass under it. So I do not limit my inven 
Attached to and extended across the frame 
tion to the width of my presser-foot. 
3o work A, from side to side, is a strong curved 
The rollers F. G., by their rubber surfaces, 
metal bar or presser-foot carrier, o, upon which 
prevent marring the bark On the hoops. 
each presser-foot is placed, the said bar being 
I claim 
extended through the curved slots p of the 
1. The cutter-head and elastic bed-roller, 
presser-feet, the said slots being longer than 
combined with the india-rubber-covered draw 
35 the said bar is wide, so that the said presser. 
ing-rollers FG and the corrugated drawing 
feet are free to rise and fall, independently 
rollers b a above said rollers F. G., respect. 
guided, however, in a curved path correspond 
ively, substantially as and for the purpose de 
ing with the curve of the carrier or baro, the 
latter being so shaped or curved, substantially 
scribed. 
2. The cutter-head, bed-roller, and feed-roll 
4o as shown, with relation to the arc described 
ers, combined with the guide having a series 
by the edges of the knives of the revolving 
of passages and provided with guide-rollers 
cutter-head that the lower end of each presser 
to bear against opposite sides of and direct 
foot, whatever may be its degree of elevation, 
each hoop independently, substantially as de 
by reason of the thickness or crookedness of 
45 the hoop beneath it, will always leave the same 
scribed. 
3. The presser-foot provided with the curved 
or a like space between the edges of the said 
plate f, the friction-rollers in, and arranged 
Eyes and the lower extremity of the presser. 
upon the curved supporting-bar o' to rise and 
oot. 
fall under the guidance of said rollers, com 
The rolls lin' of each presser-foot are of 
bined with the cutter-head, and means to sup 
So such diameter with relation to the thickness 
port the material while being planed, substan 
of the curved arms h in that the said rollers 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
and not the arms come in contact with the 
4. The combination of a presser-foot hav 
convexed side of the carrier or bar o, thus 
ing a curved plate, f', curved arms h n, se 
permitting the easy rise and fall of each press 
cured thereto, rollers la, curved supporting 
S5 er-foot With the minimum of friction. The 
bar 0, upon which the presser-foot rises and 
ears 3 of the arms lin have connected with 
falls under the guidance of said rollers, and 
them by a pin, 4, a link, 5, which, at its up 
the cutter-head and an elastic hed-roller, sub 
per end, is joined with a lever, 6, pivoted at 
stantially as shown and described. 
7 to a suitable standard, ', rising from the 
5. In a planing-machine, the presser-foot, 
6o side of the frame-work A, there being one such 
its carrier-bar, and ears 3 on said presser-foot, 
standald at each end of the carrier-bar. The 
combined with the lever 6, fulcrumed at 7 to 
fulcrum 7, a rod, is common to all the levers 
the standard , and connected by link 5 to 
6, there being one lever for each presser-foot. 
The levers 6 have on them adjustable weights the ears 3, and carrying an adjustable weight 
658 of suitable capacity to maintain proper press- to vary the pressure of said presser-foot, the 
- 
95 
d 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
22,029. 
3. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
6. Ele cutter-head, elastic bed-roller, the 
construction and arrangement being and op- 
erating substantially as shown and described. to this specification in the presence of two sub- Io 
ries of presser-feet, the curved carrier-bar, an 
5 means to vary the pressure of the said feet on 
the material being planed, combined with the . Witnesses: 
guide having a series of passages and rollers, 
to operate substantially as described. 
G. W. GREGORY, 
W. H. SIGSTON. 
HENRY F. CAMPBELL, 
scribing witnesses. 
. 
1 A Mi 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272129.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. EDMONDS, 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
No. 272,129, 
Patented Feb. 13, 1883. 
INVENTOR: 
MZ 6%zter 
BY-4-ca. f G, 
ATTORNEYs, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOEIN A. EDMONDs, OF DOVER, DELAWARE. 
FIRE - ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 272,129, dated February 18, 1883. 
Application filed April 8, 1883. (No model.) 
s 
. 
O 
25 
30 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN A. EDMONDs, of 
IDover, in the county of Kent and State of 
: Delaware, have invented certain new and use 
5 ful Improvements in Combined Fire-Escapes 
and Elevators, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a view in perspective, 
upon a reduced scale, of my improved appa 
Fig. 2 is a similar view of a 
ratus. as in use. 
body - support composed of straps or ropes, 
with certain attached conveniences, designed 
to be used in connection with a lowering and 
raising rope and windlass device for control 
ing descent or ascent by said rope. Fig. 3 is 
a view in perspective, upon a larger scale, of 
said device, and Fig. 4 a side view of a ratchet 
and brake attachment to said windlass coin 
trivance. 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
wire or other rope fire-escape, which, while it 
forms a ready and safe means of escape from 
a burning building, subject to control by the 
person descending by it, and provides for the 
secure attachment of the person, together with 
other conveniences and safeguards, admits of 
being used as an elevator for ascending by 
means of the main rope to assist in the rescue 
of persons or recovery of property from the 
building, or for any other purpose that may 
To these and other ends the invention con 
sists in the peculiar construction and arrange 
ment of parts, as hereinafter more fully set 
In the drawings, A is the main wire or other 
rope, provided with a hook, b, at its one end for 
fastening it onto the window-sill, or to any suit 
able article or structure within the room of a 
burning building. The opposite end and body 
or main portion of said rope is secured to and 
wound upon the barrel c of a windlass device, 
B, which is made up in part of a frame, d, of 
any suitable description, and that may have 
roller-guides e for directing the rope and keep 
ing the whole contrivance in a proper position 
when in use. This windlass device serves for 
the person using the apparatus to control his 
descent, or for a firelman or other individual 
to ascend by means of the apparatus, and to 
give an increased purchase the rope A, in its 
attachment to the building, may be passed 
around suitable pulleys or pulley-blocks; also, 
if desired, multiplying-gearing may be ap 
plied to operate the barrel c, but said barrel is 
here shown as being rotated by cranks f - 
that is, one on either end of it-similar to the 
cranks used in boring-machines, and arranged 
on opposite sides of the frame d, and on the 
same side of the axis of the barrel to prevent 
Wabbling. 
Suitable devices may be attached to the 
lower end of the frame d, whereby the person 
using the apparatus may stand or sit, and have 
the mechanism by which the lowering or rais 
ing action is effected attached to or connected 
with him. In the arrangement represented in 
the drawings this is provided for by a body 
support or gear, composed in part of a strap 
or rope, g, which is made to form a shoulder 
and body brace that passes over the shoulders, 
under the arms, crosses on the back of the 
body and centers in front by snap or other 
hooks, i i", arranged to engage with a ring, k. 
For this purpose the said ropeg is looped or 
doubled within or over the ring k and fastened 
at its one end to a link, l, while the other 
doubled portion is twisted through said link l, 
passed through a back crossing-ring, m, from 
thence passed down loosely through the eye 
of the hook i and back through the crossing 
ring m, from whence it is continued to the 
hook it, which engages with the front center 
ing-ring, k, 
Connected with the ring it, by snap-hooks n n 
or otherwise, are ropes or straps o 0, provided 
with suitable stops, on which may rest a seat, 
p, for the person using the apparatus to sit 
upon, and which may be looped and connected 
at their lower ends to form a stirrup, r, in 
which the foot rests; or the seat-ropes oo need 
not be so extended. Thus equipped and pro 
vided with supporting means, the person using 
the apparatus attaches the lower end of the 
framed of the windlass device by a hook, s, to 
the ring k, when, if escaping from a burning 
building, he is prepared to descend, the upper 
end of the rope A being suitably secured, as 
hereinbefore described. He may control his 
descentexclusively by the crank-handlesf; but 
forth. 
So 
35 be desired. 
45 
" 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
- 
 
22, 29 
O 
-2C 
(5 
to more perfectly do so a brake-wheel, D, is 
applied to either or both ends of the barrel c, 
and a spring-brake strap, E, made to encircle 
such wheel, and attached at its ends to a lever, 
F, on a shaft, t, that fits through a lower tubu 
lar brace, u, of the frame d, and which lever 
should be arranged to be within convenient 
reach of the operator. By means of this brake 
attachment the person using the apparatus 
may regulate the speed of his descent as re 
quired, or may wholly stop himself on the way, 
or return, if desired. 
Upon either or both ends of the barrel, also, 
is a ratchet-wheel, G, with which a pawl, H, 
fast on the shaft t of the lever F, engages 
when the brake-strap is released, said brake 
strap, by its elasticity, operating to throw the 
pawl into gear with the ratchet, thereby hav 
ing a double function. 
The pawl H is thus 
engaged with the ratchet-wheel G. to act as a 
stop to the windlass-barrel against back mo 
tion when working the apparatus as an eleva 
tor; and when the brake-strap E is put on the 
wheel D to check or control descent by the ap 
paratus the pawl H is thrown by the same 
motion out of gear with the ratchet-wheel G. 
Thus the brake and ratchet are automatically 
alternate in their actions. 
Instead of the lever F and pawl H being ar. 
ranged on the shaft it, they may be pivoted on 
the tubular brace it, which then will be fitted 
to turn upon said shaft. 
Provision may readily be made for attach 
ment to the apparatus of additional means of 
35 escape, whereby the same rope A will answer 
for two or more persons to make their escape 
at the same time. Trunks, valises, and other 
articles may also be attached for removal from 
the burning premises. 
When not required to be used the rope A 
may be wholly wound upon the barrel c and 
the entire contrivance packed in a small com 
pass, the framed being constructed to double 
up, if desired, in direction of its length-that 
is, the two bail-like ends of it may be made to 
fold, and the seat p be constructed with a hinge 
to fold to save space when packing away the 
apparatus in a valise or elsewhere. 
Phaving thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the windlass, of 
a brake-wheel and a ratchet-wheel for control 
ling the motion of its barrel in reverse direc 
tions, a pawl arranged to engage with the 
ratchet, and a spring brake-strap having an 
attached operating-lever and arranged to con 
trol said pawl, whereby, when the strap is 
applied to the brake-wheel to control the mo 
tion of the barrel in one direction, the pawl is 
released from the ratchet-wheel, and when the 
brake-strap is released the paw is thrown into 
action with its wheel to arrest the motion of 
the barrel in a reverse direction, substantially 
as specified. 
2. The rope or strap g, provided with hooks 
i. i., in combination with the ring k and loop l, 
the whole forming a body brace or support 
that meets in front of the person for attach 
ment to a lowering or hoisting windlass, es 
sentially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination, with the rope or strap 
body-support g, i. i., k, and l, of the seat rope or 
ropes o o, having attached hooks, and the seat 
p, substantially as shown and described. 
4. The ropes 00, connected to form a stir 
rup or foot-rest, in combination with the seat 
p, and rope or strap body-support g, i, it, k, 
and l, essentially as specified. 
JOHN A. EDMONIDS. 
Witnesses: 
I. N. LEMMON, 
A. H. PRINCE, 
45 
So 
55 
65 
... --------- 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272229.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
H. FRIEND. 
STRAW BRAID, 
- 
* 
No. 272,229. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1883. 
WITNESSES 
 
2 
INVENTOR 
* (2-c24. 
ATTORNEY 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERRMAN FRIEND, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STRAW BRAID. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 272,229, dated February 13, 1883. 
Application filed September 27, 1882. (No model.) 
namental appearance is imparted to the straw 
braid. A variety of designs may be produced 
thereby, which render the straw, when so cov. 
ered by braided threads, applicable to a num 
ber of fancy articlesfor summer use. 
The straw employed for the straw braid or 
body A is preferably of the usual yellow color, 
as the different colors of the threads braided 
over the same appear thereon to better ad 
Wantage. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a straw 
braid provided with an open-meshed braiding 
of suitable threads, substantially as set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a straw 
braid provided with an open-meshed braiding 
of plain and ornamental threads or cords, sulb 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony that Iclaim the foregoing as my 
invention I have signed my name in presence 
of two subscribing witnesses. 
35 
to 
45 
HERRMAN FRIEND. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
SIDNEY MANN. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BERRMAN FRIEND, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Straw Braid, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention has reference to an improved 
ornamental straw braid for ladies hats, waist 
belts, hat-bands, and other articles; and the 
invention consists of a straw braid which is 
covered by an open braiding of plain or orna 
mental threads. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1, 
2, and 3 represent side views of my improved 
straw braid braided in different designs. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A in the drawings represents a straw braid 
of flat or other shape and of any desired width. 
This straw braid is covered on a braiding-ma 
chine of any approved construction with six, 
eight, or more threads, BB', which intermesh 
in such a manner as to form an open orna 
mental braiding over the straw braid A. 
By using chenille, silk, or other ornamental 
cords B in braiding, and plain binding - off 
threads B, of silk or other material, a very or 
O 
20 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272329.txt	(No Model.). 
No. 272,329. 
- - - - 
A. W. ROSE & C. A. CHEEVER, 
ELECTRIC SPEAKING TELEPHONE, 
. 
. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1883. 
- -4 
as ESNS S S 
 
 
% 
WITWESSES 
72 4. 
ae 2/ (6-efs: 
tf (Aafa-4-/6. 
IWVEWTORS, 
By Aheir attorneys 
42&e. 772. Aoye. 
C2ardes 4.67% eee-er 
Steway--wl.' 'J-(o- 
N. peers, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALLEN W. ROSE AND CHARLEs A. CHEEVER, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., ASSIGN. 
SNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO SAID CEIEEVER AS, 
ORS, BY DIRECT AND ME 
TRUSTEE. 
ELECTRIC SPEAKING-TELEPHON E. 
SPECIFICATION forming 
part of Letters Patent No. 272,829, dated February 18, 1888. 
Application filed October 26, 1880. (No model.) 
W. RosE, a connection with any of the well-known. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
Be it known that we, ALLEN 
To all whom it may concern : 
citizen of the Dominion of Canada, residing in 
the city, county, and State of New York, and 
S CHARLES ACHEEVER, a citizen of the United 
States, residing in New York city aforesaid, 
jointly have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Electric Speaking-Tele 
phones, of which the following is a specifica 
. . 
tion. 
Our invention is based and constitutes an 
improvement upol certain new and usefulim 
provements in electric telephony and trans 
mitting-telephones made by the aforesaid Rose, 
the distinguishing characteristic of which is 
the suspension of magnetic filings in the mag 
netic field of a speaking-telephone, through. 
which field a galvanic current passes. 
The object of our invention is, more espe 
cially, to adapt such a telephone for operation 
both as a transmitter and as a receiver. 
The subject-matter claimed is designated at 
the end of this specification. 
. 
The essential features of our improved tele 
phone are a magnet, a helix constituting part 
of a galvanic circuit and enveloping the core 
of the magnet or a portion of it, filings of met. 
als susceptible to magnetic action, suspended 
in the magnetic field of the magnet, but not 
necessarily in the circuit, and a diaphragm, 
preferably of non-magnetic material, between 
which and the magnet the filings are inter 
posed. The diaphragm is thrown into action 
as a receiver by the inductive action of the 
magnet upon the filings. The variations in 
the strength of the current produced in the 
transmitter by sound-vibrations cause correla 
tive variations in such current in the magnet 
of the receiver, which variations are reproduced 
through the intervention of the filings upon 
the diaphragm, by the vibrations of which 
sounds are reproduced. 
Our improvements may readily be adapted 
to most of the various forms of transmitting 
telephones shown in sundry applications for 
Letters Patent of the United States filed by 
the said Rose simultaneously herewith, We do 
not therefore claim anything shown in said 
applications, but limit ourselves to the im 
, 
- 
so provements thereon herein set forth. 
w 
55 
6o 
65 
70 
75 
Our improved receiver can be operated in 
bat 
tery-telephone transmitters. 
The magnetic filings may be of any mag 
netic materials, such as iron, steel, aluminum, 
cobalt, or nickel; but the latterispreferred, as 
being less. liable to oxidation from moisture. 
The filings may be employed in the form of a 
coarsepowder; but we prefer slivers or filings 
of a length three or four times greater than 
their width or thickness, as they interlace 
more perfectly, and consequently respond to 
slighter vibrations. A mixture of filings of 
different magnetic metals, or of powder and 
filings of homogeneous magnetic metals, or of 
dissimilar magnetic metals, may be used with 
good effect. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a central longitudinal section 
through our improved telephone organized for 
operation both as a receiver and as a transmit 
ter, with an induction-coil included in the cir 
cuit. . Fig. 2 shows a Rose transmitter ar 
ranged on circuit with our improved receiver, 
the line being organized for transmission in 
one direction only. 
The drawings show a permanent magnet, 
M, provided with an enlarged head or plate, 
m, constituting one of its poles, and properly 
secured in the case or handle C. An ordinary 
coil or helix, H, surrounds this core near the 
enlarged pole. The wires of the helix termi 
nate in binding-screws SS, in the usual way. 
A diaphragin, D, of some non-magnetic ma 
terial, is secured in the case in the usual way, 
so as to leave a space between the enlarged 
pole of the permanent magnet and the dia 
phragm, which space or magnetic field is sup 
plied with magnetic filings such as herein re 
ferred to. 
The apparatus thus described (and also par 
ticularly shown in Fig. 2) is adapted for oper 
ation as a receiver, R., only, and may be placed 
upon the line in combination with a transmitter, 
T, such as those described in the Rose applica 
tion above mentioned, or any other suitable 
The diaphragm D, when used as a transmit 
ter, must be of some conducting material, not. 
'necessarily magnetic. One terminal of the 
transmitter. 
" 
- 
... 
9o 
95 
OC 
 
-- 
 
22,3:2) 
S 
O 
IS 
transmitting-wire, t, is connected with this dia 
phragm, and the other, t', with the enlarged 
pole of the magnet, and said transmitting-wires 
are connected with a battery, B, and the pri 
mary wire of the induction-coil I in usual well 
known ways for this class of instruments, the 
current passing through the filings. The helix 
H is connected with the secondary wire of the 
induction-coil and with the line in usual Well 
known ways. Using this instrument as a 
transmitter, it operates precisely like the Rose 
transmitter above referred to. The diaphragm 
D is thrown into vibration by sound-waves. 
These vibrations of the diaphragm produce 
corresponding variations in the condition of 
the magnetic filings through which the trans 
mitting-current passes, thus causing correlated 
variations in the strength of the current, which 
are reproduced upon any suitable receiver in 
any well-known way. When used as a receiver 
the vibrations transmitted through the line act 
on the helix of the magnet, thereby causing 
the magnet to act inductively upon the filings, 
producing vibrations therein corresponding 
with those received through the helix. The 
vibrations of the filings impart correlative vi. 
brations to the diaphragm, thus producing 
sound-waves. The vibrations of the diaphragm 
are produced mechanically by direct action of 
the vibrating filings. 
Fig. 2 is a diagram showing a transmitter 
and receiver as arranged on circuit and adapt 
ed for transmission in one direction only. 
With the line equipped with two instruments 
such as above described, messages could be 
sent either way. 
Our improvements may be applied to vari. 
ous forms of transmitters shown in the appli 
cations of Rose above mentioned, which in 
volve the use of a diaphragm or plunger, it 
being only necessary, to adapt them for use as 
receivers as well as transmitters, to put a helix 
around the pole of the magnet, so as to act in 
ductively on the filings in a manner similar to 
that described in Fig. 1. 
A diaphragm of non-inductive or even of 
non-conductive material-such as mica-may 
be used as a receiver. The transmitting-dia 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
85 
phragm, as before remarked, need not be of 
magnetic metal. 
We claim as of our own joint invention 
1. The combination, substantially as herein 
set forth, of the magnet, the inducing-coil con 
nected in circuit, the diaphragm, and the mag 
netic filings interposed in a loose condition in 
the magnetic field between said diaphragm and 
pole of the magnet, and acted upon by induc 
tion to reproduce sound-vibrations transmit 
ted through the circuit. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
set forth, in a galvanic circuit, of a transmitter 
having the capacity of varying the strength of 
the current by changes in the condition of the 
metallic filings included in the circuit, and a 
receiver consisting of a magnet acting ill 
ductively upon magnetic filings interposed 
between said magnet and the diaphragm, and 
thus varying the intensity of the magnetic field 
in which they are included. 
3. The transmitting and receiving telephone 
hereinbefore described, consisting of the com 
bination of the magnet, the helix, its circuit 
counections, the diaphragm, the magnetic fil 
ings interposed in the magnetic field between 
the magnet and diaphragm, and the transmit 
ting circuit-connections, one wire of which is 
connected with the diaphragm and the other 
with the magnet, the transmitting - current 
passing through the filings, upon which the re 
ceiving-current acts inductively. 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
set forth, of the magnet, the helix and its cir 
cuit-connections, including the secondary helix 
of an induction-coil constituting part of the 
line-wire, the diaphragm, the magnetic filings 
interposed in the magnetic field between the 
magnet and diaphragm, and the transmitting 
circuit-connections, (one of which is connected 
with the diaphragm and the other with the 
magnet,) including the primary helix of said 
induction-coil. 
A. W. ROSE. 
CHAS. A. CHEEVER, 
Witnesses: 
WILLARD L. CANDEE, 
E. C. DAVIDSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272429.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 272,429, 
H. W. GURNEY. 
MOTOR. 
Patented Feb. 20, 1883. 
IITT, it 
vv. .. 
 
- 
72 
i TTT 
 
  
 
 
 
  
/yToys 
 
 
2. 
Sces 
 
  
fe Ors 2NZSy 
 
 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY W. GURNEY, OF EAST NODAWAY, IOWA, 
MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 272,429, dated February 20, 1883. 
Application filed May 4, 1882. (No model.) 
- 
. 
- 
So 
AA, over a loosely-turning wheel, a, journaled 45 
in suitable bearing on frame BB, from thence 
under and engaging with the sprocket or chain 
at East Nodaway, in the county of wheel G, and thence up and over a second 
loose wheel, a, similar to the one a referred 
to above. 
The operation is as follows: The chain Ed, 
passing over the loose wheels a, and a' and un 
der the chain-wheel G. in the manner above 
described, and as shown in Fig. 2 of the draw- - 
ings, is attached on oppositesides of a field, or at 55 
any points between which it is desired to draw 
a load. The plows, wagons, or whatever is de- - 
sired to be drawn is attached to the motor and 
the engine started through the agency of the 
pulleys P and P and belts D. The axle E, car 
rying the chain-wheel G, is revolved, and, en 
gaging with the chain H, propels the notor 
and load, the wheels W W, as well as those 
W. W., turning loosely on their axles. 
used, if desired, a corresponding number of 
chains being provided. 
It is obvious that the engine may be em. 
ployed as an ordinary portable engine for draw 
ing any kind of machinery by simply remov 
ing the belts D and applying a belt to the fly 
wheel pulley F. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination of the engine A, frame B, 
crank-shaft C, having fly. wheel F and pulleys 
PP, rear axle, E, having pulleys P. P. and 
chain or sprocket wheel G, loosely journaled 
wheels a a', placed at the front and back of 
said sprocket-wheel, belts D D, chain H, and 
wheels WW, all constructed and arranged as 
and for the purpose described. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY W. GURNEY, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding 
Adams and State of Iowa, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Motors, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
motors. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
motor to be used for plowing, drawing heavy 
loads, &c., and so arranged that it may be used 
as an ordinary portable engine for thrashing 
or any other purpose for which such engines 
are used. 
To this end my invention consists in the con 
struction and arrangement of parts hereinaf. 
ter described with reference to the accompa 
inying drawings, ill which 
Figure 1 is a top view or plan of my im: 
proved motor. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of 
the same, partly in section on the line a a of 
Fig. 1. 
Like parts are referred to by similar letters 
of reference throughout the several views. 
in the said drawings, A A represents a steam 
engine and boiler, constructed and arranged 
in a similar manuer to an ordinary portable 
engine of any of the well-known styles, and 
inounted on a suitable frame, BB, supported 
On the wheels W. W. W. W. 
C is the crank-shaft of the engine, provided 
with the customary fly-wheel and pulley, F, 
and carrying at or near each end a wheel or 
pulley, P, which are connected by belts D D 
or equivalents to similar wheels, PP, secured 
on the rear axle, E, on which the wheels WW 
are loosely placed. . 
Secured rigidly on the axle E at any con 
venient pointin its length is a chain or sprocket 
wheel, G. 
His a chain, which is designed to be secured 
at each end on opposite sides of a field or oth 
erwise, and passes under the engine and boiler 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR ATKINSON, 
F. H. SMITH, 
Two or more of the chain-wheels G may be 65 
HENRY W. GURNEY. 
\ 
. 
. 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272529.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 272,529, 
W. CARTER, 
KNITTING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 
Patented Feb. 20, 1883, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Witnes s E. s. 
& 1 -6.1-2- 
 
. 
i. 
. 
5 St. 
A Tz SE 
(S), 
is 
 
If 
Still 2 
SCE. I. A R2 
\, 
 
 
  
 
 
evens, photo-Lithographer, Washington, PC, 
(No Model.) 
No. 272,529, 
Fio: A. 
 
W. CARTER, 
KNITTING MACHINE, 
Paten 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Feb. 20, 1883, 
id: p 
Witness E. s. 
-3 (7 -6-4----- 
Inventor 
%rsy %y 7. 
(No Model.) 
No. 272,529. 
W. CARTER, 
KNITTING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 20, 1883. 
 
 
ZE 
 
 
 
Wit. E S S E E 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C., 
W. CARTER, 
KNITTING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Feb. 20, 1883, 
(No Model.) 
No. 272,529. 
 
With ES S E S 
Over For. 
% 67-6, 7-1 %yaz, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM CARTER, OF HIGHLANDVILLE, MASSACEUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO 
GEORGE A. LEIGETON, OF MANCEIESTER, NEW HAMPSEIIRE. 
a 
KNITTING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 272,529, dated February 20, 1883. 
Application filed December 29, 1880. (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM CARTER, of 
Highland ville, county of Norfolk, State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented Improvements in 
Knitting-Machines, of which the following de 
Scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification. 
This invention in knitting-machines is en 
bodied in that class of machioes known as 
circular, and employing two series of latched 
needles. 
The object of my invention is the production 
of a circular-ribbing machine capable of knit 
ting what is known as cardigan' and one. 
and-one rib-stitch-such as used for the cuff 
of a cardiganjacket, or the ends or small parts 
of leggings, or the cuffs of shirts, bottoms of 
drawers, and tops of stockings-the machine 
being capable of finishing the small or first 
made end of the said cuff or like part in a novel 
ae 
My invention consists in a series of horizon. 
tal or plate needles, means to actuate them, 
and a thread-guide to supply with thread only 
the hooks of the plate-needles, combined with 
a series of vertical needles, their holding-bed, 
and actuating cam-cylinder, and a thread-guide 
to supply with thread only the hooks of the 
vertical needles, and means to move the said 
thread-guide for the vertical needles into and , 
out of action or position with relation to the 
vertical needles when it is desired to change 
to cuff. Work, as will be described. 
My invention also consists in combinations 
of mechanisms which will be hereinafter de 
scribed, and fully set forth at the end of this 
specification. 
Figure 1 represents in top view a circular 
knitting machine containing my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical section thereof on the dot 
ted line a ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail repre 
senting the devices employed to raise and lower 
the stitch-forming cam for the vertical needles. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation, showing the plate 
needle-thread guide, the support for outer ends 
of the plate-needles, and the rod for moving 
the switch, the under view shown in said fig 
ure being top view of the said parts below the 
dotted line yy. Fig. 5 is a detail showing the 
cam-cylinder for moving the vertical needles 
as laid out flat. Fig. 6 is a vertical section of 
the said cam-cylinder and needle-bed, one nee 
dle being shown. Fig. 7 is a section of Fig. 6 
on the dotted line a. Fig. 8 is an under side 
view of the cam-plate for moving the plate 
needles. Fig. 9 is a section of Fig. 8 on the 
dotted line aca; and Fig. 10 is a partial hori 
zontal section immediately above the top of 
the plate a of the machine, to show in position 
at the center of the machine the parts shown 
in Fig. 4. 
The cam-plate a for the plate-needie d, its 
needle-drawing-back cam a?, lever a for mov 
ing it, the plate-needle bed a cylinder a, and 
the spindle a are as common in other knit 
ting-machines. The cam-plate at in this my 
machine has two grooves to receive the butts 
of the needles d, the latter traveling at times 
in the said grooves, except in that small part 
of groove b between the drawing-back cam at 
and throwing-out cam l', pivoted at l', the cam 
bhaving connected with it a lever, l, by which 
to move it at the proper times into its full or 
dotted line position, (see Fig. S.) the said cam 
occupying its dotted-line position when knit 
ting full cardigan and its full-line position 
when knitting cuffs or half-cardigau. Two 
threads are used in half-cardigan and full car 
digan and one in one-and-one or cuff work. 
The usual throwing-out cam common to other 
well-known machines is in this my invention 
shown as a pivoted cam, c, its pivot being at 
('on plate a, and above the said plate the said 
cam is connected with a lever, c, by which to 
move it at the proper times from its full to its 
dotted line position, (see Fig. 8,) the said cam 
being in its dotted-line position when the ma 
chine is doing cardigan, cuff, or half-cardigan 
work, and in its full-line position only when 
the butts of the plate-needles are to be drawn 
back into the outer groove, l', in order that 
they may hold loops of thread in their hooks 
while the cylinder for the vertical needles is 
shogged after the completion of the so-called 
binding course, or that course which forms 
the first row or course at the commencementofa. 
cuff or other part of the article being produced, 
which part is to present a finished end, or one 
which will not ravel or show loose loops, or 
need to be bound by a regular binding or by 
75 
90 
95 
CC 
5 
O 
25 
30 
50 
3 
22,529 
O 
40 
SO 
55 
hand-crocheting. The plate a has also con 
lected with it, at its under side, a curved slide, 
c, it being placed in a wide space where the 
two grooves, bb', unite or form one open space. 
This slide is made radially movable from its 
full to its dotted line position by the knob c', 
it occupying its full and dotted line positions 
Only at such times as the came occupies like 
positions, it being in its full-line position only 
when the needle-cylinder a' is shogged, as be 
fore described. 
The plate-needles are designated by the let 
ter d and the vertical or cylinder needles by 
e. The plate-needles receive yarn from the 
yarn-guide d', secured to the machine by screw 
2, (see Fig. 1) as usual. The butts of the ver 
tical needlese travel in the upper groove, ef, 
during such times as full or half cardigan work 
is being done, the hooks of the said needles 
then receiving yarn from the vertical-needle 
yarn carrier e, herein shown as attached to 
the lower end of a lever, e", pivoted at e on a 
stand, e, connected with plate (t, the said nee 
dles drawing the yarn received by them down 
between and over and across the shanks of the 
plate-needles, they then being thrown toward 
the center of the machine by reason of their 
butts being in the groove b. If half-cardigan 
work is being done, the plate-needles directly 
contiguous to the vertical needles then being 
drawn down by the stitch-forming cam f will 
be held back (their butts then resting in groove 
l') and the loops of yarn in the hooks of the 
vertical needles will be drawn directly through 
the loops then held by the said vertical nee 
diles or loops of the same thread. The butts 
of the vertical needles travel in the groove e 
of the vertical-needle cam-cylinder a when 
knitting one-and-one or cuff stitch, and at 
such time but one thread is employed, it being 
supplied to the plate-needles by the plate-nee 
dle-thread guide d". 
To change the butts of the vertical needles 
from the groove e' to the groove e, and vice 
versa, at the propertimes, I have grooved the 
said cylinder vertically or transversely to the 
direction of the grooves e'e', and have fitted 
therein a block or switch, g, having inclines 
34 to act upon the butts of the vertical nee 
dles as they pass from under the stitch-form 
ing cam f" and over the point of the usual nee 
dle-elevating cam, l, so as to direct the said 
butts into one or the other of the said grooves. 
This switch has connected with it, at its upper 
side, a lifting-rod, g, and in connection there 
with is a suitable locking mechanism, herein 
shown as notches g in the said rod, and a 
spring deviceg, to enter or engage one of the 
said botches and hold the switch elevated or 
depressed. The under sides of the plate-nee 
dles d, when fully thrown toward the center of 
the machine, rest at their forward ends upon 
the needle-rest i, to keep them at the proper 
level for the action of the usual thread-guide 
and latch-opener. 
To vary the length of the loops of yarn of 
the vertical needles, the camf has connected 
- 
with it a lifting-rod, f', which is extended up 
ward through the top of the vertical-needle 
cam-cylinder above the plane in which the 
plate-needles d reciprocate, to thus enable the 
said rod to be engaged readily and the camf 
to be quickly lifted, avoiding the use of a 
screw-driver to turn a screw to move the said 
cam, as heretofore practiced. 
I have herein shown the machine as pro 
vided with cam-lifter f', shown as a lever piv 
oted at f on a stand, f', secured to the cam 
plate a, the said lifter having at its rear end 
an adjusting device by which to establish the 
initial position of the said cam f with relation 
to the knitting parts, while to vary from the 
long and short stitch-as when changing from 
cardigan to the short stitch employed in cuff. 
work-I employ a pivoted lever, f", (see Fig. 
3,) upon which are formed two or more shoul 
ders or rests, upon one of which the point of 
the screw f is made to rest, the screw being 
held down against the lever by a spring, f. 
The vertical needles, in cuff work, have to 
be lifted far enough to permit their loops to 
bass below their latches, and at such time the 
plate-needles draw their yarn between and 
across the said vertical needles, just below the 
pivots of their latches, thus enabling the saille 
yarn to be engaged by both series of needles; 
and during this operation, to prevent the 
latches of the vertical needles from being acci 
dentally closed, I have provided the machine 
with a latch-guard, h, composed of a block 
having an arm attached at 8, and having a 
wire, h', the latter merely forming a continu 
ation of the block. 
When it is desired to knit full or half cardi 
an the vertical-needle-thread guide e sup 
lies thread to the vertical needles; but when 
a cuff is to be knitted, the yarn for the plate. 
needles being the only one then to be em. 
ployed, the vertical-needle-thread guide is to 
be turned upward on its pivote, in order to 
remove it and its thread from the path of the 
hooks of the vertical needles, so that the hooks 
or tops of the vertical needles, when the butts 
of the said needles are in the lower groove, e, 
will not strike the thread-guide e or receive 
thread from it. When this thread-guide is so 
turned up or back it is caught and locked in 
position by a spring-catch, j. To connect a 
series of tubular articles-such as cuffs, &c.- 
together, just as the article is completed its 
thread is broken off and a piece of cotton or 
snooth thread is tied to the thread extending 
to the fabric, and then two or more courses are 
knitted with such smooth cotton thread pre 
paratory to commencing the new cuff, which 
will be commenced with the cuff yarn, it being 
in turn tied to the end of the cotton thread 
after knitting the two or more courses. These 
courses knitted with the cotton thread are sub 
sequently withdrawn to separate the cuff of, 
say, one sleeve from the large or cardigan part 
of another sleeve and leave the cuff bount or 
finished at its end, as Will be hereinafter de 
scribed. 
7 o 
75 
85 
9 O 
C 
IO 5 
O 
I 15 
I25 
22,529 
3 
75 
9 O 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
O 
-3. 
in cuff-work with one thread, when a verti. 
cal needle is depressed so that its butt lies in 
groove e', the plate-needles immediately at the 
right and left of it are fully drawn back, and 
hold the loops of the plate-needle yarn only in 
their hooks, thus drawing the plate needle 
yarn about the open latches of the cylinder 
needlese. Let it be supposed that the main 
part of a sleeve has been knitted up to the 
shoulder by both series of needles, each with 
its own thread, and operated as usual for the 
production of full cardigan-as, for instance, 
in United States Patent No. 136,012. When 
it is desired to make a cuff for a new sleeve, a 
single thread supplied by the plate - needle 
thread guide being then used, the switch g is 
depressed, the throwing-out cam b' is put into 
its full-line position, Fig. 8, and the machine 
is rotated until the last needle, the butt of 
which is in the upper groove, e', of the cam 
cylinder a, back of the switch g in the direc 
tion of its rotation, has passed the thread-guide 
c, after which the said thread-guide is turned 
up so that it ceases to supply yarn to the hooks 
of the said vertical needles, and the yarn is 
immediately thereafter broken off near the fab 
ric or article being knitted; but the yarn is 
not removed from the eye in the said thread 
guide e. The parts in this condition, further 
movement of the machine will enable one 
and - one or cuff work to be done. I then 
break off the thread being fed to the plate 
needles and tie upon its end connected with 
the knitted goods a smooth cotton thread, 
which is then fed to the plate-needles, and one 
or more courses are then knitted with this cot 
to thread on the plate-needles. In this coin. 
dition of the machine the cuff may be com 
merced with the cuff yarn, which is in turn 
tied to the end of the smouth cotton thread. 
To commence the cuff and manipulate the 
yarn to be used in it so that the first series of 
loops may serve as a binding course for the 
cuff to be knit, I tarn the machine part of a 
revolution and deliver the cuff yarn in the plate 
needle-thread guide, it having, as stated, been 
tied to the end of the short cotton thread into 
hooks of the plate-needles, until in the rotation 
of the machine that one of the horizontal plate 
needles next behind the bed-plate needle to re 
ceive the cuff-yariq is started out. Then Istop 
the machine. Should I continue the rotation 
of the machine beyond this point without 
changing the position of the throwing-out cam 
c, the knitting would be plain one-and-one riu; 
but to bind, as I denominate this first course, 
I stop the rotation of the machine at this point 
and move the cam c into its full - line position 
and move the slide c out into its full-line po 
sition, so that the butt of the first plate-needle 
then drawn back and the butts of all the 
plate-needles drawn back in advance of it in 
the direction of the rotation of the plate a will 
be passed by the throwing-out can c, and will 
not be actuated or thrown toward the center 
of the machine, and the needles so passed over 
will remain held back out of action in the 
groove b', Fig. 8, and retain their loops. All 
the needles of the first course at the rear of 
the first needle passed over by the throwing 
out cam 0 will be drawn back in the regular 
manner by the cam af, and the rotation of the 
machine will proceed until all the plate-nee 
dles are drawn back out of action, when the 
machine will be stopped, and the grooved nee 
dle-bed a', carrying the cylinder or vertical 
needles having on them loops of only the yarn 
of the plate-needle-thread guide, will be turned 
axially in one or the other direction for a dis 
tance equal to the space between one and the 
next plate-needle, the said Vertical needles so 
moved or shogged carrying the loops of yarn 
of the plate-needle-thread guide held by then 
into positions at the sides of the plate-needles 
opposite the sides that the said loops occupied 
before the said cylinder a was so moved, 
which action so places the loops of yarn of the 
vertical needles in such position that when 
the plate-needles d are again thrown into ac. 
tion the stitch will be such as to bind, as 
denominate it, or finish, the end of the cuff with 
a cross-stitch. After the vertical needles have 
been shogged aside, as described, the throw 
ing-out cam 0 for the plate-needles is again 
moved into dotted-line position to operate the 
plate-needles; but by this can c alone, with 
all the plate-needles drawn back out of action, 
as described, I could not knit the first course 
complete, for those needles the butts of which 
are left immediately at the rear of the trow. 
ig-out cam c and in the groove l' of the plate 
a, between the came and the drawing-back 
cam (t/, would not be moved forward to re 
ceive yarn from the yarn - carrier d for the 
plate-needles; but to obviate this and throw to 
ward the center of the machine the said plate 
needles left at the rear of the came soon enough 
to receive yarn from the plate-needle-thread 
guide for the formation of loops, I have pro 
vided the machine with the slide c, which I 
move forward into the dotted-line position, this 
being done at the same time that I move the 
cam c' into its dotted-line position. As this 
slide c is moved forward, as described, into 
the dotted-line position it carries in front of it 
the butts of all the plate-needles then in front 
of it, placing them in such position that their 
hooks may receive yarn from the yarn-carrier 
d during the further rotation of the plate a. 
The butts of the needles in front of the slide c. 
having been so moved forward, the said slide 
is at once returned by hand into full-line po 
sitiori while the plate a is yet at rest, and the 
machine is turned until the butts of all the 
plate-needles at the rear site of the cam 0 and 
between its point and the point of the slide c 
next to it come in front of the slide c, when 
the plate a is again stopped and the slide (; is 
pushed forward into its dotted-line position, 
where it remains. All the plate-needles hav 
ing been properly thrown toward the center of 
the machine, into position to receive yarn from 
the plate-needle-thread guide, plain one-and 
one knitting may be done by them and the 
3O 
35 
SC 
55 
22,529 
4. 
cylinder-needles with one yarn supplied di. 
rectly to the plate-needle by the plate-needle 
thread guide, and may be continued until the 
cufor article being knitted is of proper length. 
While the cuff is being knitted by the plate 
needles, as described, with one thread, the 
thread-guide of the vertical needles has its 
thread disconnected from the fabric, and the 
vertical needles c are held so low by groove e 
as to pass under the vertical-needle. thread 
guide without receiving yarn therefrom, the 
said thread-guide 6 at such time being turned 
up through its handle e', where it is held by 
the catchi. 
If a sleeve or other tubular part of cardigan 
stitch is to follow or succeed the cuff, I lift the 
switch g by its rod g into the position Fig. 5, 
lifting the cylinder or vertical needles then 
above the part 4, usually two or three needles, 
placing them on the line of the upper groove 
e' in the cylinder ct, after which the butts of 
all the remaining vertical needles in the fur. 
ther rotation of the machine will pass from 
under the cam fand be directed positively into 
the upper groove, e', of the said cylinder, which 
will hold the vertical ueedles so high while op 
posite the drawing-in can a' of the plate-nee 
dles that the vertical needles cannot receive 
yarn in their hooks from the plate-needle 
thread guided as they did when knitting one 
and-one work. When the vertical needlese 
are so lifted into groove e' the yarn thereafter 
supplied to the plate-needles will be drawn by 
the plate-needles across the shanks of and into 
the spaces between the adjacent elevated ver. 
tical needlese, below their latches. At this 
time, also, the yarn-guide e', which was turned 
up during cuff-knitting, is turned down into the 
position Fig. 2, and the machine thereafter, if 
revolved, will knit half-cardigan; but if full 
cardigan is desired it would be necessary to 
move the auxiliary cam b' into its dotted-line. 
position, in order to throw toward the center 
of the machine the plate-needles sufficiently 
far to rest in such position that the vertical 
needles, when descending, may draw their yarn 
loetween the plate - needles and across then 
back of their latches. 
Having described the manner of finishing or 
binding cuff work, I will now describe how 
cardigan-work may be bound or finished, as 
for the tops of leggins and the bottoms of 
jackets. 
With the machine set as just above de 
scribed for cardigan-work, it is preferred to 
break and tie upon both of the threads used 
for cardigan-Work a separate smooth thread, 
and turn the machine for, say, one or more 
revolutions, after which the regular yarn will 
be tied to the smooth threadis referred to, and 
one course will be allinost knitted with both 
regular yarns, aid then the machine will be 
stopped to make the changes in the cams and 
slide, as before described, previous to shog 
ging the needle-bed a, as hereinbefore stated. 
The operation of finishing or binding cardi 
gan-work is the same as that described for 
25 
2 d 
35 
SO 
55 
cuff-work, except that the cam b' is moved to 
occupy its full-line position, Fig. 8. The bed 
di has on it the usual lugs, m, which, as the 
said bed is shogged, as described, will be ar 
rested by a suitable stop, m, properly support 
ed from the bed a of the machine. 
The stop in herein shown is connected with 
a lever, n; but that I do not claim specifically, 
as it was applied to my machine by G. A. 
Leighton, instead of a rigid stop. 
In half-cardigan work, two threads being 
used, the yarn supplied to the cylinder-needles 
is manipulated by the said needles as in reg 
ular or plain knitting, with only one set of 
needles; but the yarn supplied to the plate 
needles is at such time held about and between 
the vertical or cylinder needles below their 
latches, so that as the vertical or cylinder nee. 
dles descend with loops of their own thread 
they draw such loops down through the loops 
of their own thread then on their shanks be 
low their latches, and at the same time draw 
the said new loops through the loops of the 
yarn then held by the hooks of the plate-nee 
dles and extended across and between the 
vertical needles, as described, and both of the 
said loops are cast off the tops of the cylin 
der-needles, and the cylinder-needles at the 
termination of their next upward stroke have 
but one loop-viz., that of their own thread 
such loop being below their latches. In full 
cardigan work, however, the yarn supplied to 
the cylinder-needles is drawn over between and 
about the plate-needles back of their latches, 
and the yarn supplied to the plate-needles is 
drawn about the cylinder-needles below their 
latches, as in half-cardigan. In full-cardigan 
each needle of both sets of needles has two loops 
below its latch when descending or drawing in, 
whereasill half-cardigan the plate-needles have 
but one such set of loops. In full cardigan both 
sides of the fabric are alike, the yarn supplied 
to the cylinder-needles appearing on the inner 
side of the fabric and that to the plate-needles 
on the outer side of the fabric; but in half. 
cardigan work the outside of the fabric is 
ribbed and the inner side is flat. Thus, it will 
be seen, to make cardigan or half-cardigan two 
independent threads must always be used, each 
with its own set of needles, each thread hav 
ing its own carrier, and that in one-and-one 
rib but one thread is used, it being introduced 
alternately into the hooks of both sets of nee 
dies. One-and-one or single rib work presents 
single longitudinal rows of knitted loops turned 
in oppositedirections, and double-ribbed work 
presents a series of two adjacent rows of such 
knitted loops turned in one or the same direc 
tion, each series of two loops being separated 
by a single longitudinal row of loops turned in 
the opposite direction. 
I have herein described, though do not in 
this application claim, the novel tubular-knit 
ted ribbed fabrics having their commencing 
course of loops crossed to fortin a finished end 
to avoid crocheting loose loops, as heretofore 
common in this class of work, as such fabric 
75 
95 
Od 
I IO 
I I5 
T 25 
22,529 
5 
forms the subject-matter of an application, No. the knitting-yarns one or more smooth threads, 
47,091, split off from this application. 
to be afterward withdrawn, knitting one or 
more courses with the smooth threads and one 
course with the knitting yarns, and immedi 
ately thereafter shogging one series of needles 
past the other the distance of the space be 
tween adjacent needles, thus crossing the 
stitch, and then knitting on all the needles at 
the next course to finish and lpind the com 
mencing course, substantially as described. 
5. The herein-described method of finishing 
or binding the commencing end of a tubular 
rib-knitted cuff, which consists in tying to the 
yarn of the plate-needles a smooth thread to 
be subsequently withdrawn, knitting one or 
more courses with it, and then attaching to it 
the regular yarn to knit one course only for 
the fabric, and then shogging the needles . 
holding the last course of loops made, crossing 
the stitch, and then knitting on all the needles 
at the next course to finish and bind the com 
mencing course, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
6. In combination, the series of horizontal 
or plate needles, their holding-bed, means to 
actuate the said needles, a thread-guide to 
supply with thread only the hooks of the plate 
needles, a series of vertical needles, their hold 
ing-bed, cam-cylinder to actuate the said ver. 
tical needles, a thread-guide to supply With 
thread only the hooks of the vertical needles, 
means to move the thread-guide for the verti 
cal needles into or out of action or position 
with relation to said needles at certain times, 
the stitch-forming cam for the Vertical needles, 
and the cam-lifting rod f', extended upward 
above the plane in which the plate-needles re 
ciprocate, all as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
I claim 
1. The series of horizontal or plate needles, 
means to actuate them, and a thread-guide to 
supply with thread only the hooks of the plate 
needles, combined with a series of Vertical nee 
dles, their holding-bed and actuating cam-cyl 
inder, and the thread - guide to supply with 
thread only the hooks of the vertical needles, 
and with means to move the thread-guide for 
the vertical needles into and out of action or 
position with relation to the vertical needles 
when it is desired to change to cuff-work, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
2. In an organized circular-knitting machine, 
a cam-cylinder and needle-bed for the vertical 
needles, and a series of vertical needles, com 
bined with a series of plate-needles, a grooved 
plate, ct, and its drawing-back cam, throwing 
out cam, and means to move forward the butts 
of the plate-needles at the rear of the said 
throwing-out cam, whereby the introduction of 
yarn into the hooks of all the vertical and plate 
needles is insured during the first course after 
shogging the vertical needles, to thus bind or 
finish a cuff, substantially as described. 
3. The cam-cylinder and needle-bed for the 
vertical needles, and the vertical needles, the 
series of plate-needles, and two yarn-guides 
one for each set of needles-combined with the 
cam-plate at, its drawing-back can, two inde 
pendent throwing-out cams, and means to 
move forward the butts of all the plate-needles 
left at the rear of the throwing-out cam 0, to 
insure the introduction of yarn into the hooks 
of all the vertical and plate needles during the 
first course after shogging the vertical needles, 
to bind or finish cardigan-work, substantially 
as described. 
4. The herein-described method of binding 
or finishing the commencing course of tubular 
rib-knitted work composed of two threads-one 
for the outer side and the other for the inner 
side of the fabric-Which consists in tying to 
G. W. GREGORY, 
ARTHUR REYNOLDS. 
WILLIAM CARTER, 
Witnesses: 
So 
55 
75 
5 
IS 
25 
30 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272629.txt	(No Model.) 
D. G. BEECHING. 
III, UMINATING TILE, 
No. 272,629, 
Patented Feb. 20, 1883, 
 
2 
1% G 
a 
N. PerERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID G. BEECEING, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
UMINATING T. E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 272,629, dated February 20, 1888. 
Application filed December 15, 1882. 
(No model.) ' 
IO 
IS 
20 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID G. BEECHING, 
of New York city, in the county of New York, 
and in the State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Illu 
minating-Tiles; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the accom. 
panying drawings, making a part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the upper 
'side of my improved tile, one of the lenses be 
ing removed to show the form of illuminating 
opening. Fig. 2 is a like view of the lower 
side of a lens detached from its tile, and Fig. 
3 is a section of said tile upon line a a of 
Fig. l. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
The design of my invention is to render 
practicable and certain the formation of a wa 
ter-tight joint between an illuminating roofing 
or sidewalk tile and its lens; and to this end 
said invention consists principally in an illu 
minating-tile provided around its light-open 
ing with an annular groove, in combination 
with a lens which has an annular flange around 
its edge, that is adapted to fit downward into 
Said groove when said lens is in place, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose hereinafter 
specified. 
It consists, further, in an illuminating-tile 
having a light-opening that is surrounded by 
two concentric curbs, in combination with a 
35 lens which is adapted to fit within said open 
ing, and is provided with a flange that extends 
over the inner curb and into the space be 
tween the same and the outer curb, substan. 
tially as and for the purpose hereinafter shown. 
It consists, further, in an illuminating-tile 
having a light-opening that is surrounded by 
two concentric curbs, the innermost of which 
curbs is higher than the outer curb, in combi 
nation with a lens which is adapted to fill said 
opening, and to project over said inner flange 
into the space between the same and said outer 
flange, substantially as and for the purpose 
hereinafter set forth. 
It consists, finally, in the combination of an 
So illuminating-tile having a light-opening that 
is surrounded by two concentric curbs that 
are separated by an annular space or groove, 
30 
45 
55 
65 
a lens adapted to fill said opening, and to ex 
tend over the inner curb and into said annular 
groove, and cement or other material which is 
adapted for use within the latter in sealing the 
space between the projecting flange of said 
lens and said flanges, substantially as and for 
the purpose hereinafter shown and described. 
In the annexed drawings, A represents a 
metal tile provided with a series of illuminat 
ing-openings, a, each of which is provided at 
its lower end with an inward-projecting flange, 
a', for the reception of the lower end of a lens, 
B, and upon which said lens rests. Surround 
ing each opening c are two concentric curbs, 
a' and a, which are separated by an annular 
groove, a. The inner of said curbs, a, is 
higher than the outer curb, and has its outer 
face preferably formed upon an upward and 
inward curve. 
Within the opening A is placed a lens, B, 
which corresponds to and loosely fills the 
same, and extends upward beyond the curb a, 
and is provided around its upper end with a 
flange, b, which projects outward and down 
ward over said curb a' into the groove a. The 
space between the flange band the contiguous 
sides of the curbs a and a is filled with a ce 
ment, C, which is applied in a plastic state, 
and when hard effectually locks the lens B in 
place, and prevents water or air from passing 
between the same and the tile A into the open 
ing a. Should the seal between said flange 
and said curbs become accidentally broken or 85 
prove defective in construction, the elevation 
of the inner curb above the outer curb will 
prevent water from passing into the opening 
a, as the height to which water will rise with 
in the groove a is governed by the height of go 
said outer curl). 
At the edges of the tile A, where the same 
is joined to other tiles or to the supporting 
frame, I produce a water-proof joint by fur 
nishing the contiguous plate D with a rib or 
flange, d, and providing upon the edge of said 
tile a lip, a, which extends in a curve over 
said rib, and preferably terminates in a hori. 
Zontal flange, a, through which bolts E may 
be passed into said plate D. The space be 
tween said rib d and said lip a being filled 
with suitable cement, an air and water tight 
joint is produced; but should such joint be 
come defective the height of said rib above 
95 
75 
CO 
- 
- 
2 
272,629 
- 
the surface of said plate will prevent water 
from passing over the same. 
Having thus fully set forth the nature and 
merits of my invention, what I claim as new 
is 
1. An illuminating-tile provided around its 
light-opening with an annular groove, in com 
bination with a lens which has an annular 
flange around its edge, that is adapted to fit 
downward into said groove when said lens is 
in place, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. An illuminating-tile having a light-open 
ing that is surrounded by two concentric curbs, 
in combination with a lens which is adapted 
to fit within said opening, and is provided 
with a flange that extends over the inner curb 
and into the space between the same and the 
outer curb, substantially as and for the pur 
pose shown. 
3. An illuminating-tile having a light-open 
ing that is surrounded by two concentric curbs, 
the innermost of which curbs is higher than 
. . 
. 
TC) 
15 
the outer curb, in combination with a lens 
which is adapted to fill said opening, and to 25 
project over said inner flange into the space 
between the same and said outer flange, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of an illuminating-tile 
having a light-opening that is surrounded by 3o 
two concentric curbs that are separated by an 
annular space or groove, a lens adapted to fill 
said opening and to extend over the inner 
curb and into said annular groove, and cement 
or other material which is adapted for use 35 
within the latter in sealing the space between 
the projecting flange of said lens and said 
flanges, substantially as and for the purpose 
shown and described. 
have hereunto set my hand this 17th day of 
October, 1882. 
Witnesses: 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 4o 
DAVID G. BEECEING 
JAMES M. L.A. COSTE, 
CHARLES O'CONNOR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272730.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 272,730. 
T. W. MATHER 
AUTOMATIC BOILER FEEDER, 
Patented Feb. 20, 1883. 
Ma 
/777, arre. 
 
41%zzzz s' 22%. 
3, 62- 
cz-z-zz Z 
-C-D 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
s 
THOMAs W. MATHER, OF NEW HAVEN, CONN., ASSIGNOR TO TEIE AUTO. 
MATIC SAFETY BOILER AND ENGINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMAT C B O LERe FEEDER. 
sPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 272,730, dated February 20, 1883. 
Application filed November 27, 1882. (No model.) 
- 
w 
Section. 
To all whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, THOMAS W. MATHER, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new 
Improvement in Automatic Boiler - Feeders; 
and I do hereby declare the following, when 
taken in connection. with accompanying draw 
ing and the letters of referencemarked thereon, 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
same and which said drawing constitutes part 
of this specification, and represents a vertical 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
apparatus for automatically supplying water 
to a steam-boiler, the objeet being to maintain. 
a constantlevel in the boiler, and if, perchance, 
the water should rise above that level the sur 
plus will be taken from the boiler, or, falling 
below, the deficiency will be supplied; and it 
consists in two pumps acting together, the one 
drawing the water from the supply and deliv 
ering it to the other, the said other pump serv 
ing to force the water into the boiler if there 
be too little or draw it therefrom if the water 
be too high, combined with a valve arrange 
ment whereby the surplus from the boiler and 
the surplus from the suction will be thrown 
to waste, all as more fully hereinafter de 
scribed. 
A is the pump-cylinder, in which works the 
plunger B in the usual manner for plunger. 
pumps; a, the valve, which works in the in 
let water-way b, opening toward the plunger, 
so that as the plunger rises water will pass in 
through the valve-opening, and as the plun 
ger descends the valve will close to prevent 
the return of the water. 
C is the second pump-cylinder, preferably 
arranged in axial line with the plunger-pump 
A, and with a rod, D, extending from the plun 
ger through the cylinder, and provided with a 
piston, E, within the cylunder, so that the pis 
ton and the plunger work together. 
d is a passage leading from the boiler at the 
level of the water-line to the pump C, and in 
this passage, between the pump and cylinder, 
a valve, e, is arranged, opening into a passage, 
f, which leads to the lower part of the pump 
C, so that as the piston E rises it will cause 
. 
So 
55 
the valve e to open and the piston to draw 
from the boiler. 
h is a second valve in the pump C, which 
opens from the passage f into a passage, i, 
leading to the pump C above the piston, and 
so that as the piston E descends the contents 
of the cylinder below the piston will be forced 
up through the passage f, through the Valve 
e, to the space above the piston. The space 
above the piston E in the cylinder is of less 
area than that below. This differential ca 
pacity of the two parts of the cylinder is pro 
duced by making the piston-rod above the 
piston of larger diameter than it is below the 
piston. 
F is the outlet-passage from the pumps, 
which leads directly to the boiler. 
l is a tube opening from the pump C above 
the piston, leading therefrom into a chamber, 
m, adjacent to the boiler-passage F. 
n is a double-ended valve arranged to work 
upon a seat between the chamber on and the 
passage to the boiler, and upon a seat, p, in 
the passage r, which leads from the pump A, 
so that when up it closes the passage to the 
boiler and when down it closes the outlet 
passage from the pump A. The passage 7 
opens, by means of the valve p, into a cham 
ber, s. Between the passage and the cham 
ber in and between the chamber s and the 
chamber n is a valve, t, opening from the 8o 
chamber s into the chamber n. 
H is an overflow-passage opening from the 
chamber n. 
L is a valve seated so that its lower end 
closes the passage H. The upper end, of 85 
larger diameter, is exposed to the boiler-press 
ure in the passage F. 
The operation of the paup is as follows: 
Supposing the pump to start with the plunger 
and piston of the respective pumps both down, go 
as the plunger and piston rise the plunger 
draws from the supply through the valve a. 
The piston E, at the same time rising, draws 
from the boiler through the valve e, and if the 
water in the boiler be too high it will be water 95 
which is drawn from the boiler, or if it be 
too low the cylinder below the piston will be 
filled with steam, in either case a boiler-press 
75. 
cy 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
272,730 
25 
35 
O 
ure-that is, the cylinder below the piston is 
filled with hot water or steam, accordingly as 
the water-level in the boiler rises or falls be 
low the point where the passaged enters the 
boiler. The passage F connects both pumps 
with the boiler at any convenient place for 
feeding, and through this passage all the Wa 
ter for feeding purposes must pass. On the 
return or down stroke, which is the condition 
of the parts in the illustration, the valve a is 
closed, the double-ended valve n is forced up 
ward and closes the passage to the boiler, but 
opens for the outlet of the water from the 
pump A. At the same time the valvet opens 
communication between the pump A and the 
space above the piston in the pump C through 
the tube l, so that water from the pump A is 
forced into the cylinder of the other pump. 
As the piston E descends, the contents of 
the cylinder below, which it drew from the 
, boiler in its upstroke, is forced through the 
passage f and valve hinto the space above the 
piston. If the rise of the piston E has drawn 
steam from the boiler, that steam Will on the 
downstroke be forced into the cylinder above 
the piston, and the Water which is forced into 
the same space by the plunger B will con 
press or condense the steam before it, until the 
whole charge has entered. At the beginning 
of the next upstroke the valve n is drawn 
down upon its seat to close the passage from 
the pump A, and the valve t is also closed. 
The dropping of the valve in opens the pas 
sage F to the boiler. Then the water which has 
been forced into the pump C above the piston 
will return through the passage l, and thence 
through the valve opening into the passage lif 
to the boiler-that is to say, the Water to feed 
the boiler is drawn by the pump A, forced into 
the pump C, and by the pulmp C into the 
boiler. Now, suppose that the Water in the 
boiler is above the water-level, and the pis 
ton E in its ascent has drawn Water from the 
boiler to fill the space below the piston. In 
the descent of that piston water so drawn 
will be forced into the space above the pis 
ton. The pulmp A acts as before, closes the 
passage to the boiler by forcing the valve 2. 
to its upper seat. The water from the pump 
A attempts to pass into the pump above; but 
as that is being supplied by the water which 
it has already drawn from the cylinder there 
is no space for this water to enter. Hence the 
pressure on the Water produced by the descent 
of the two pistons increases until it has risen 
to a point above the pressure of the boiler. 
Then this increased pressure acts upon the dif 
ferential valve L, and causes it to rise and 
open the overflow-passage, so that the Water 
will pass off to waste, or otherwise, and so con 
tinuing, if the water-level be below the entrance 
of the passage d to the boiler, the full amount 
of water drawn by the pump A passes into 
the boiler; but if the level of the water is above 
that point of entrance to the boiler it passes 
through the overflow, 
So 
55 
45 
 
7 o 
The piston-rod above the piston, as before 
stated, is larger than the rod below the piston. 
From this it follows that a full charge of water 
entering the cylinder below the piston on its 
upstroke cannot all be contained in the cham 
ber above. Consequently on the downstroke a 
small quantity of hot water must pass down 
through the passage l and mingle with the 
cold water discharged from the pump A, and 
pass out at the overflow-that is to say, when 
the level of the water is too high in the boiler, 
not only will no fresh water enter the boiler, 
but a small predetermined quantity is actually 
drawn from the boiler and thrown off through 
the Overflow. This predetermined quantity is 
the difference between the space above at d 
below the piston, produced by the different di 
a meters of the piston-rods. 
The overflow-valve Lhas always boiler-press 
ure upon it, and in the chamber in the area 
of the part which closes the overflow-passage 
is less than that part immediately above it. 
Hence when the pressure of water in the cham 
ber m becomes greater than the boiler-press 
ure it follows that the pressure upon the 
valve upward will be greater than the boiler 
pressure downward. Hence the valve will be 
opened so soon as the pressure in the chamber 
in is greater than the boiler-pressure. 
While I have represented the two pistons as 
or the same rod, and prefer this arrangement, 
they may be otherwise arranged-as, for in 
stance, upon opposite ends of a beam-it only 
being essential that the two pistons shall work 
simultaneously, both to draw at the same time, 
the first from the supply and the second from 
the boiler. 
I represents screw-plugs over the valves, by 
the removal of which the valves may at any 
time be examined or repaired should occasion 
require. 
V. 
9 O 
95 
IOC) 
I claim 
1. The combination of two pumps arranged 
with their pistons to Work simultaneously, the 
first provided with an inlet-valve from the wa 
ter-supply, the second connected with the 
boiler at the required water-level, a valve 
opening from the water-level passage into the 
cylinder of the second part on the side of the 
piston corresponding to the draft-stroke of the 
first pump, a passage from such receiving side 
of the piston of the second pump to the oppo 
site side of the same piston, and a valve in 
said passage opening to said opposite side of 
the piston, a passage leading from the first 
pump to the second, a valve opening from the 
discharge-passage of the first pump into the 
passage between the two pumps, a passage to 
the boiler for feeding purposes, and a double 
ended valve arranged between the passage 
from the first pump and the passage into the 
boiler, whereby when the passage from the 
first pump is opened by the descent of the 
plunger the passage to the boiler is closed, and 
vice versa, with an overflow-passage leading 
from the chamber or passage between the two 
IC) 
II5 
I 25 
272,730 
- 
3 
pumps, and a differential valve in the passage pump to the second, a valve opening from the 
from the pumps to the overflow, its smaller 
discharge-passage of the first pump into the 
diameter closing the overflow, its larger diame 
passage between the two pumps, a passage to 
ter open to boiler-pressure, substantially as 
the boiler for feeding purposes, and a double 
described. 
ended valve arranged between the passage 
- 2. The combination of two pumps arranged 
from the first pump and the passage into the 
with their pistons to work simultaneously, the 
boiler, whereby when the passage from the 
first provided with an inlet-valve from the wa 
first pump is opened by the descent of the 
ter-supply, the second connected with the 
plunger the passage to the boiler is closed, and 
boiler at the required water-level, a valve 
vice versa, with an overflow-passage leading 
opening from the Water-level passage into the 
from the chamber or passage between the two 
cylinder of the second part on the side of the 
pumps, and a differential valve in the passage 
piston corresponding to the draft-stroke of the 
from the pumps to the overflow, its smaller 
first pump, a passage from such receiving side 
diameter closing the overflow, its larger diame 
of the piston of the second pump to the oppo. 
ter open to boiler-pressure, substantially as 
site side of the same piston, and a valve in 
said passage opening to said opposite side of 
the piston, the piston-rod on said opposite side 
of the piston of larger diameter than on the 
draft side, a passage leading from the first 
JoEIN E. EARLE, 
JOS. O. EARLE. 
TEOMAS W. MATHER. 
described. 
- 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
lo 
IS 
e 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272830.txt	(No Model.) 
J. FEARN. 
SPRING MOTOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 272,830. 
- Patented Feb. 20, 1883. 
(No Model.) 
No. 272,830. 
e 
J. FEARN. 
SPRING MOTOR, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 20, 1883. 
- 
 
t 
I'm 
N 
fitti 
SR in 
y 
2 
R2 
A. 
N2 S2 IIH 
S sy|Nanyn 
N3 || || 
aS All TTIizes 
". Y 
s 
to rises II 
II. 
...I 
 
I Ee-HEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE::::::: 
'Til L 
I 
'Cir. SFI 
III. HIH 
IIIlli Till till 
s I. El ill it in in 
LIHI 
ill ill I 
Hill 
 
it 
 
I 
 
NVENTOR 
70/77a 7%arre, 
- 
is ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOEIN FEARN, OF WASEINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
SPRING-MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 272,880, dated February 20, 1883. 
Application filed January 13, 1883. 
(No model.) 
To all chon it may concern : 
Be it known that I, JoHN FEARN, a citizen 
of the United States, resident at Washington, 
in the District of Columbia, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Spring 
Motors; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to letters or fig 
ures of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a cross-sectional view of my motor. Fig. 2 
is a side view of the same, part sectional. Fig. 
3 is a perspective view of the double pawl, 
and Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the single 
pawh. 
This invention has relation to spring-motors; 
and it consists in the construction and novel 
arrangement of a series of springs, all con 
nected to the main shaft and independent of 
each other, with reference to a series of wild 
ing devices which are espectively adapted to 
wind one or two springs only of the series; and 
the invention further consists in providing, in 
connection with a series of springs independ 
ently connected to the main shaft, a number 
of ratchet-rings concentric to the main shaft 
and carrying the outer ends of the springs, 
check-pawls, and operating-levers pivoted on 
the main shaft and respectively carrying sin 
gle or double pawls to engage the teeth of a 
single ring or of two rings, all as hereinafter 
set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
designates a cylindrical case, which inay be 
built in sectious in any convenient manner, 
said case being provided with central bearings, 
b, at its ends for the main shaft C, which may 
be directly connected to nechanism. Usually, 
however, it is preferred to provide this shaft 
with a driving toothed wheel, D, which is in 
engagement with other gearing, as indicated in 
the drawings. 
To the shaft C are fastened the springs E, 
each spring being fastened to the shaft inde 
pendently by its inner end, as indicated at if 
The springs are arranged in series along the 
shaft, being coiled in planes at right angles to 
its length. The outer ends, g, of the springs 
are respectively attached each to a ring, Ed, 
having outer ratchet-teeth, k. These ratchet 
rings Hare independent of each other, and are 
O 
IS 
25 
30 
4.O 
45 
So 
55 
guided by the cylinder or suitable bearings. 
Each ring is operated by a lever, L, carrying 
a pawl, p, which engages the teeth of the ring. 
The handle end of the lever extentis through 
a slot, s, in the case-wall, and the inner end of 
the lever is pivoted on the main shaft, as indi. 
cated at r. A check-pawl, v, attached to the 
interior wall of the cylinder, serves to hold the 
ratchet-ring during the winding and after the 
spring has been wound up. In some cases 
each lever L. may be provided with a double 
pawl designed to engage two adjacent ratchet 
rings at the same time. Usually each lever 
is provided with a counterbalance-arm, Z, 
which relieves the operator of the weight of 
the lever in the upward movements, and also 
serves to keep the springs and ratchet-rings 
in relative position; or each ratchet-ring may 
be provided with lateral walls inclosiing the 
spring. 
It is intended by this invention to provide a 
spring-motor of great power, which can be 
easily and readily wound, as in the winding 
each spring (or, when double pawls are used, 
pair of springs) is wound by the operation of 
an independent lever and ratchet-ring. 
In constructing the machine it is preferred 
to provide rib-bearings in the case for the 
ratchet-rings, the teeth of said rings being 
made double, and the parts of each tooth sepa 
rated by an interspace, whereby the rib is en 
gaged. 
Having described this invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
lS 
1. A spring-motor consisting of a series of 
coiled springs, all attached to the main shaft, 
and each having an independent lever winding 
device, substantially as specified. 
2. A spring-motor having, in connection 
with a series of springs independently attached 
to the main shaft, a series of independent 
ratchet-rings respectively attached to the outer 
ends of said springs and concentric to the 
main shaft, a series of independent check 
pawls, and a series of independent operating 
levers pivoted on the main shaft and respect 
ively carrying single or double pawls to en 
gage the teeth of a single ring or of two adja 
cent rings, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN FEARN. 
Witnesses: 
PEIILIP C. MASI, 
THEO. MUNGEN. 
9 o 
95 
OO 
IO 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US272930.txt	(No Model.) 
H. R. W0LIFE, 
SMOKE CONSUMING FURNACE, 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARVEY R. WOLFE, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR TO CHARLES 
A. WOLFE, THOMAS BRENNAN, W. GARNETT MUNN, AND JOEIN LEAMY, 
OF SAME PLACE. 
SMOKE-CONSUM ING FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 272,930, dated February 27, 1883. 
Application filed October 6, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom i? ??? concern. : 
Be it known that I, BARVEY R. WoLFE, re 
siding at Louisville, Jefferson county, Ken 
tucky, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Smoke-Consuming Furnaces, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
smoke-consuming furnaces, in which steam is 
romingled with the products of combustion for 
the purpose of completing and perfecting com 
bustion, increasing the heat, and consuming 
the smoke; and it consists, first, in the novel 
method of injecting the steam into the fire-cham 
I5 ber of the furnace; second, in the col) struction 
of a hollow grate-bar containing compartments 
for conveying and distributing the steam in 
the fire-chamber; third, the steam-boxes along 
the side of the chamber, in combination with 
2o the grate-bar; fourth, an adjustable upright 
arm for conveying heated stealm to the fire 
chamber and throwing it upon the fire super 
heated and in any desired direction; fifth, the 
manner of supporting the adjustable arm and 
Figure 1 is an end view of furnace, partly 
in section. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the bottom 
of the fire-chamber, partly in section. Fig. 3 
is a vertical section of the hollow grate-bar, 
Fig. 4 
is a section of the adjustable arm. Fig. 5 is a 
cross-section of the same, showing the mech 
anism for operating it. 
A is the fire-chamber, below which is the 
B is a boiler of any desired construction, and 
C a steam-dome on the boiler. 
DD are the ordinary grate-bars, only partly 
shown. They extend the entire length of the 
4o chamber, forming part of the bottom of the 
fire-chamber. Beside these ordinary grate. 
bars, there is an additional larger grate-bar, E, 
extending the entire length of the fire-cham 
ber. This bar, which is shown in section in 
45 Fig. 3, is hollow and provided with several 
chambers for conveying steam to the fire-cham 
ber. 
the slots KKK in their. top directly into the 
fire-chamber. These chambers are connected so 
together by the openings in n. The chamber 
K, which is independent of the others, is con 
nected with a hollow upright arm, X, which 
is pivoted to the grate-bar E, as shown at O 
in Figs. 4 and 5. The arm X is thus pivoted so 55 
as to be adjustable backward and forward, for 
the purpose hereinafter described, and the slot 
K', connecting the chamber Kwith the arm - 
X, is segment-shaped, so as to be open and 
afford a free passage for the steam in whatever 6o 
position the arm X may be. The lower end 
of the arm X is provided with the pivoted 
screw-bolt P, one end being pivoted to the up 
right arm X and the other passing through 
the front of the furnace, where it is adjusted 65 
by the nuts ' '. As the lower end of the tap 
right armXis drawn forward, the to is thrown 
back, and vice Versa. 
SS are steam-boxes arranged along the side 
of the fire-chamber, and provided with noZZles 7o 
s s, through which steam is thrown into the 
fire-chamber, mingling with the products of 
combustion, or directly on the burning fuel in 
the fire-chamber. Stealm is conveyed to the 
hollow grate-bar and the steam-boxes S S by 75 
any convenient number of pipes T from the 
steam-dome C. The nozzles ss of the steam 
boxes are so arranged that the jets of steam 
passing through them are thrown back in the 
general line of the draft, as indicated by the 8C 
dotted liness's'. Steam is admitted to the 
chamber F in the hollow grate-bar at F. The 
slots at the top of the chambers F, G, H, and 
I are provided at the front end with an over 
hanging deflector, U, which throws the steam 85 
backward and forms a current; and in order 
to make this current clear, openiugs ) . 
) are 
made in the walls between the chambers, at 
the top, and slanting parallel with the deflect 
ors U, so that the steam passes freely from 90 
one chamber to another and out of these slots. 
The pressure of the steam keeps the slots K 
open. Steam is admitted to chamber K in the 
grate-bar E through the pipe W, and is con 
veyed through the slot K' into the upright arm 95 
The chambers F, G, H, and I open through X. This arm is provided at the top with a hol 
3o taken in a line parallel with the bar. 
w 
. 
25 operating it. 
35 ordinary ash-pit, 
. 
 
low -head, Z, extending across the fire-cham 
ber; or any convenient form of distributer may 
be used. This E-head has either a horizontal 
slot, y, or small perforations for the passage of 
steam. As steam is forced through the pipe W 
into the chamber K and upright arm X, it is dis 
tributed upon the fire or into the products of 
combustion through the slot / or small perfo 
rations, as indicated by the dotted linesy'. 
These jets of steam may be thrown down into 
the fire by shortening the bolt P and throwing 
the T-head back to Ward the rear of the fire 
chamber. They may be thrown upward by 
lengthening the bolt P and bringing the T 
head forward, or they may be thrown horizon. 
tally into the fire-chamber by adjusting the 
boit P so that the arm X is perpendicular. 
The direction of these jets of steam may be 
regulated or changed at any time while the 
furnace is in operation by the bolt P. 
Q Q are cocks for shutting off or regulating 
the steam. 
The upriglat arm X may be located in any 
part of the fire-chamber most convenient, where 
it will be heated by the fire, but preferably as 
shown in the drawings. As it passes up into 
the fire-chamber it quickly becomes heated 
and heats the steam which passes through it, 
so that when the steam is ejected at y it will 
be superheated to a high degree. I am aware 
that steam has been injected into the fire-cham 
ber of a furnace from the walls, and I do not 
claim that; but the steam-boxes S S are set 
out in the fire-chamber, where they become 
somewhat heated, and the steam is thrown 
VWitnesses : 
JAS. T. A. BAKER, 
JAMIES PAUL. 
from them hot and not mingled with air. It 
is also an important advantage to be able to 
adjust and alter the direction of the steamjets 
thrown from the upright arm X. It is not nec 
essary here to explain the effect of mingling 
steam with the products of combustion, as they 
are well known, and I do not claim, broadly, 
the injection of steam into the fire-chamber of 
a furnace; but 
I do claim as my invention 
1. In a furnace provided with means for dis 
tributing superheated steam at varying angles 
to the fire, the hollow grate-bar E, provided 
with the deflecting-chambers F, G, H, and I, 
and independent chamber K, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
2. The steam-conveying armX, provided with 
a regulating and adjusting screw, P, and so 
pivoted as to extend up into the fire-chamber 
of the furnace at or near the front end, in coin 
bination with the grate of said furnace, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a furnace, in combination, the hollow 
grate-bars, provided with deflecting-chambers 
and steam-connections for admitting steam to 
the fire, and the adjustable arm X for admit 
ting superheated Steam at various angles of 
inclination, the steam-boxes S S for admitting 
steam at both sides of the furnace and at an 
angle to the fire, substantially as described. 
HARVEY RUDY WOLFE. 
SO 
55 
45 
?? 
S 
I. ? 
5 
2. ? 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273031.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 273,031. 
J, T, COWES, 
STAND PIPE FOR BUILDINGS, 
Patented Feb. 27, 1883. 
 
 
2 
2 2 
AZNS 
 
NSN 21 
 
 
N N 
? 
52R-2, 
7-28% 
 
 
Wizza esses 
Mr 
46 6-42/ 
a 64-e62 
Z77 we 7-7 to - 
CZ-2T Copy (es 
w 
2-z-z-z / a 
Zy 
2zo77Zeas 
- 
N. PETERS Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. COWLES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. , 
STAND-PIPE FOR BUILDINGs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,031, dated February 27, 1883. 
Application filed March 15, 1882. (No model.) 
". 
To all chon it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN T. CoWLEs, re. 
siding in Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, and a citizen of the United 
States, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Stand-Pipes for Buildings, of 
which the following is a full description, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, ii) which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation, and Fig. 2 a. 
detail section taken on the line a ac, Fig. 1. 
My improvement relates to that class of 
stand-pipes which are attached to buildings, 
the stand-pipe having a hose-coupling at the 
different stories of the building, to which fire 
men can attach their hose for the purpose of 
extinguishing fires in a building, and to which 
ladders are ordinarily attached both for the 
firemen to ascend and for the occupants of the 
building to escape therefrom in case of fire. 
My invention consists in the particular man 
ner of attaching the valve to the stand-pipe, as 
hereinafter more fully described and claimed. 
In the manufacture of these stand-pipes, 
which I have been engaged in making and ap 
plying for several years, they have heretofore 
been made in sections, with a T-valve section 
inserted in the pipe at the different stories 
where it is desired to couple a hose. This T. 
section makes a recess or chamber in the pipe, 
which impedes the flow of water and also makes 
projecting shoulders, to which it is difficult to 
fit a ladder. It is necessary to measure the 
building and have the stand-pipe fitted with 
the T-valves at intervals, according to the dif. 
ferent heights of the stories of the buildings, 
which is quite expensive, in addition to the 
objections above referred to. My improve 
ment enables me to have the stand-pipe in a 
single piece the entire height of the building, 
and I apply the valves to which the hose is 
attached to the stand-pipes after they are put 
in place at such spaces as are desired in order 
to reach the different stories of the building, 
and I am enabled to attach the ladder to the 
stand-pipe throughout its length in the satine 
manner as if no valves were attached to the 
stand-pipe. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
55 
65 
sents a stand-pipe which extends the entire 5d 
height of the building in one continuous piece. 
Dare holes cut in one side of the stand 
pipe, at such points as I wish to attach a valve 
to the stand-pipe contiguous to each story of 
the building. C is the valve-case, with the 
coupling-nozzle D', suitably constructed to ad 
Init of the hose being coupled thereto in the 
ordinary manner. 
E is the valve, which is raised and lowered 
by means of the screw F. The valve-case has 
a flange, G, which fits to the outside surface 
of the stand-pipe, and is bolted to the stand 
pipe by screw.bolts EI. 
I is a packing between the flange and the 
stand-pipe to make a tight joint. This valve, 
with its hose-coupling, can be readily attached 
to the stand-pipe at any point, even after it is 
attached to a building. The valves may have 
the ordinary packing, or . I may make the 
valve-case larger than the hole in the pipe, so 
that the pipe itself may form a valve-seat, the 
valve being also a little larger than the hole 
in the pipe. This construction would prevent 
any leaking around the joint when the valve 
is not in use. 
J is the side piece of the ladder, which is se 
cured to the stand-pipe, and is a straight con 
tinuous piece fitted against the stand-pipe. 
There being no shoulders or T-valves in the 
stand-pipe, it is a straight continuous piece, 
requiring no bending or breaks to fit closely 
This strip 
against the side of the stand-pipe. 
receives the rungs of the ladder in the usual 
ae. 
It will be readily understood that by con 
structing my stand-pipe and ladder in the 
manner above described I am enabled to or 
der a continuous piece of pipe suitable for a 
stand-pipe adapted to reach to the top of a 
building, and apply the valves and the hose 
couplings in a cheap and efficient manner to 
the stand-pipe at such points as may be re 
quired to adapt it to the particular building, 
according to the height that the stories may 
happen to be. There are no recesses or cham 
bers in the pipe to impede the flow of water, 
aud no shoulders or T's on the pipe to inter 
fere with the fitting of the ladder thereto. 
s 
85 
9 O 
95 
75 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
8 
. 
. 
. 
23,035 
Having thus described my improvement, packing I, all constructed and combined - to 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by operate substantially as and for the purpose 
Letters Patent, is- 
herein shown and set forth. 
JOHN T. COWLES. 
The combination, in a stand-pipe for build- 
5 ings, of the pipe A, having apertures D flush 
with its side, valve-case C, having flange G. 
and coupling-nozzle D', valve E, screw F, and 
Witnesses: 
JNo. C. MACGREGOR, 
M. B. GAGE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273131.txt	J. NEMETZ. 
MAGAZINE GUN. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 27, 1883. 
(No Model.) 
No. 273,131. 
stuff 
 
9. (WaA. 
'%. 4, 24, ...es 
(No Model.) 
No. 273,131. 
J. NEMETZ. 
MAGAZINE GUN, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 27, 1883. 
KNS / 
Z 
A. 
 
 
& 
% 
AA 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
Vs wY.Ya 
sa Ai 
YF. 
: 
sists 
 
 
 
 
% 
. y 
 
//zz, e 
2% (7. % 64 re. 
2 
2%. 6. 
(No Model.) 
J. NEMETZ. 
MAGAZINE GUN, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 273,131. 
Patented Feb. 27, 1883. 
 
I 4. B3322 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
/A  2. SY . 
S16Sas 
 
 
a r2 - - - Sassa 
es 
X 
wr 
MMX 
X 
will 3 - 7 
1, 22. HIH2 
AzN- 
O/z (2%6A, 
76/. 4.2a-2, 
- 
 
- A 7 
2 Azeezer 
1/2.2% 
62% ea 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 273,131. 
 
J. NEMETZ. 
MAGAZINE GUN, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Feb. 27, 1883. 
72% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEF NEMETZ, OF VIENNA, AUSTRIA-HUNGARY. 
MAGAZINE GUN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,181, dated February 27, 1883. 
Application filed March 23, 1882. 
(No node.) 
... 
-- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOSEF NEMETZ, a citizen 
of Austria, residing at Vienna, in the Empire 
of Austria, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Breech-Loading Needle 
Guns; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany. 
ing drawings, and to letters or figures of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of breech-loading guns known as 
bolt or needle' guns. 
The object of my invention is to still further 
reduce the movements now necessary to load 
and fire such guns, and further to simplify the 
construction of the various parts of the mech 
anism of the gun, which objects I attain as 
follows: First, by combining with the usual 
bolt or needle and the breech a magazine 
adapted to be moved at right angles to the 
axis of the bolt or needle and barrel to bring 
a fresh cartridge into position to be carried 
forward into the firing-chamber by the said 
bolt; Second, by constructing and combining 
these parts in such manner as to cause the 
bolt, on its forward movement, to carry the car 
tridge from the magazine into the firing-cham 
ber and explode said cartridge automatically 
by the locking of the breech-cylinder, to re 
tract the cartridge-shell from said chamber on 
its backward movement, open the breech and 
deposit said shell into the magazine-chamber 
from whetice it was taken, move the magazine 
laterally a distance sufficient to bring a fresh 
cartridge into position to be carried forward, 
and lock the firing-pin ready for firing, thus 
reducing the movements necessary to load and 
fire the gun to two, as hereinafter more fully 
described; third, by constructing the sear 
Spring and breech-frame strap in such manner 
as to dispense with the usual screw whereby the 
parts are attached; fourth, by constructing the 
breech-frame Strap and trigger-guard strap in 
Such manner that but a single screw is needed 
to attach the trigger-guard strap, the maga 
Zine, the firing mechanism, and its frame to 
the stock of the gun. 
In the specification and drawings of Letters 
Patent granted to me under date of March 7, 
1882, No. 254,681, I have described and shown 
a gun provided with a magazine adapted to 
be moved at right angles to the axis of the 
barrel, the magazine constituting the breech 
or firing-chamber. In such a construction it 
is necessary that the magazine should be made 
Sufficiently strong and heavy to resist the 
shock resulting from the explosion of the car 
tridges, and consequently the weight of the 
magazine considerably increases that of the 
gull). 
The further object of my present invention 
is to so construct the gun and its firing mech 
anism as to adapt them for use in combination 
with a magazine interposed between the breech 
and the bolt and firing-pin, said magazine be 
ing constructed of such light material as not 
to materially increase the weight of the gun. 
The invention consists in the mechanism 
and combination of mechanisms alnd construc 
tion of parts whereby the above-described re 
sults are obtained, as fully described herein. 
after, and pointed out in the claims, and as 
shown in the accompanying four sheets of 
drawings, in Willich 
Figure 1 is a sectiolaal side elevation of a 
magazine needle-gun adapted for automatic 
firing by the locking of the bolt, or for firing 
by means of the trigger. Fig. 2 is a longitudi 
nal section of a magazine needle-gun to be fired 
by means of the trigger only, the parts being 
shown in the position ready for firing; and 
Fig. 3, a similar view with breech open. Fig. 
2 is a part thereof enlarged. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tion of the gun, taken on line t c of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is a section of the gun, taken on line at a 
of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 6 is a section of the gun, taken 
oil line y if of Fig. 2. Fig. 7 is a section of the 
gun, taken on line 23 of Fig. 2. Fig. S is a rear 
view of the breech-frame. Figs. 9, 10, and 11 
are detail views of the bolt-carrier. 
Fig. 12 is 
a top plan view; Fig. 13, a longitudinal sec 
tion; Fig. 14, a side elevation; and Fig. 15, an 
under side view of the breech-frame, the latter 
figure showing the magazine applied. Fig. 16 
is an under side view of the rod and Wedge 
employed to move the cartridge-magazine. 
Fig. 17 is a perspective view of the cartridge 
carrier. Fig.18 is a longitudinal section there 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
70 
95 
CO 
 
223,13 
SO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
of, and Fig. 19 is a perspective view of the 
cartridge-magazine. 
In the above figures of drawings like letters 
of reference indicate like arts wherever such 
may occur. 
B is the barrel; B', the receiver; M, the maga 
zine abutting against the receiver; C, the bolt, 
carrying at its forward end the breech-block 
B, or of which said block forms the forward 
end, the breech - block being perforated, as 
usual, for the passage of the firing-pin or nee 
dle N. The latter is, as usual, impelled by a 
coiled spring, S, one end of which abuts against 
a collar, n', on said pin and the other against 
the rear end of the bolt, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The firing-pin N slides freely in the bolt, and 
its rear end is attached to the carrier or ham 
mer H, apertured to receive the rear end of 
the bolt C. The hammer is provided on its 
under side with a stop or shoulder, h, adapted 
to engage with the mechanism whereby the 
hammer and bolt are locked into position for 
firing, as hereinafter described. The maga 
zine M is moved laterally by means of a wedge, 
W, attached to a bar, D. 
L is the handle or locking-lever, attached to 
bolt C, by means of which the latter is locked 
into position before firing, and through the 
medium of which the gun may be automatically 
fired, as will be presently explained. 
The combination of the magazine M with the 
firing mechanism is such that at each forward 
movement of the bolt it will pass through the 
magazine and carry a fresh cartridge into the 
breech or firing-chamber. Hence the maga. 
zine does not constitute said firing-chamber, 
and may therefore be constructed of any suit 
able light material. 
Referring more particularly to Figs. 1, 2, 3, 
15, and 19, the magazine M is constructed of 
sheet metal, and is composed of a bottom, 1, 
having its front and rear edges struck up to 
form vertical flanges 2, and of two sides, 3, 
having their front and rear vertical edges 
turned inward to form the flanges 4. To this 
box or frame, which is open at top and in front 
and rear, is hinged a lid, M', having its op 
posite side edges turned down to form flanges 
5. The sides 3 of the magazine are provided 
at their upper front corners with lugs or pivot 
bearings 6, and the corresponding edges of 
the lid M are provided with like lugs or bear 
ings, whereby the two may be hinged together, 
as shown in Fig. 19. The two parts that con 
stitute the magazine may each be struck from 
a single piece of sheet metal. Upon opposite 
sides of the bottom 1 of the magazine are at 
tached springs 7, for ejecting the cartridge 
carrier when all the cartridges have been fired. 
Upon the under side of the magazine is at 
tached a bar or plate, 8, provided with as many 
pins 9 as the magazine will contain cartridges. 
As shown, it is provided with six pins, the 
magazine being of such size as to contain six 
cartridges. Of course it will be understood 
that a magazine containing a greater or less 
number of cartridges may be employed. The 
magazine is fitted in a recess in the breech 
frame F, that has a dovetailed groove or way, 
13, in which fits the plate 8 on the under side 
of the magazine, the bottom of said groove 
being recessed, as shown at 14, to allow the 
pins 9 to pass when the magazine is moved 
laterally. The magazine is securely held in 
the breech-frame by means of said groove 13, 
on the one hand, which may be dovetailed, as 
described, or of the form shown, and on the 
other by means of a lug, 16, on said frame. 
The bar 8, being attached to the magazine at 
or near its forward edge, will therefore hold the 
magazine at that edge against vertical dis 
placement, while the lug 16, bearing on the 
free end of the lid M, not only prevents the 
springs from exerting their power against the 
carrier E and lid, but also holds the rear edge 
of the magazine against vertical displacement. 
As more plainly shown by Figs. 12 and 14, 
this lug 16 is formed on or attached to the 
face of one of the cheeks forming the rear wall 
of the recessfin the breech-frame F, in which 
the magazine slides. When the last cartridge 
has been fired the magazine will have moved 
from left to right sufficiently to clear the lug 
16 and release the lid. The springs 7, being 
now free to act, eject the carrier and the latter 
throws open the lid M, leaving the magazine 
ready to be reloaded. This is effected by intro 
ducing a fresh carrier, E, the heavy or ball end 
thereof being placed toward the front or upon 
the free end of the springs 7 of the magazine, 
the lid (and with it the cartridge-carrier and 
springs) being then pressed down and the 
magazine pushed from right to left until the 
first cartridge on the right is in front of the re 
ceiver B'. The magazine Mis moved laterally 
a distance equal to that between the centers 
of two cartridge-chambers at each backward 
movement of the bolt by the following mech 
anism, constructed and operating upon the 
same principle as that deseribed in my Let 
ters Patent herein before referred to. 
A bar, D, carries a wedge, W, pivoted upon 
said bar at 17. The rear end of the bar is 
bent at rightangles to form the catch or lug 18, 
that lies in a recess, c, of the bolt C, as shown 
in dotted lines, Fig. 1, and in full lines, Figs. 
2 and 3. The wedge W., as shown in Fig. 16, 
is held in proper position by means of a spring, 
s', attached to the bar D, the free end of which 
exerts its power upon a pin, 19, on the wedge. 
This spring also serves as an abutment for the 
wedge during its action. When the bolt is 
moved backward the bar D is moved with it, 
and as soon as said bolt has moved out of the 
magazine the outer end of the inclined plane 
20 of the wedge comes in contact with one of the 
pins 9 on the under side of the magazine and 
moves the latter from the left toward the right 
a sufficient distance to bring a fresh cartridge 
in front of the breech, to be carried forward 
into said breech at the next forward move 
ment of the bolt, the forward end or breech. 
55 
 
...--"-" ------- 
O) 
7 o 
75 
90 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
223,3 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IO 5 
I 25 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
block, B, of which carries the extractor-hook 
b and the spring b'. The extractor and spring 
are of usual construction, and are secured in 
recesses formed in opposite sides of the part B? 
of the bolt, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. The 
spring b is used as a bearing for the flange of 
the cartridge on the side opposite to that where 
it is seized by the extractor, to maintain said 
cartridge in a true horizontal position and 
avoid any tendency of the cartridge-shell to 
become Wedged in the firing - chamber or re 
ceiver when the bolt moves backward. Thus, 
when the magazine has been moved laterally 
to bring a fresh cartridge on a line with the 
axis of the barrel, as described, and the bolt 
is moved forward by means of the lever L, the 
point of the extractor b and spring l' will first 
perforate that part of the strip of paper 11 
that covers the rear face of the compartment 
of the cartridge which has just been brought 
into proper position. The bolt then breaks 
said paper and moves the cartridge along 
with it, the ball thereof breaking the paper in 
front of said compartment, and said cartridge 
is thus carried into the firing-chamber t, its 
flat) gelying against the annular shoulder that 
serves as a bearing therefor, and the extractor 
b and spring l' in engagement with said flange, 
as shown in Fig. 2. To insure the engagement 
of the extractor-hook and that of the spring 
with the flange of the cartridge as it is carried 
into the firing-chamber, and to cause said hook 
and spring to release the cartridge-shell when 
the bolt is drawn back, and deposit said shell 
into the magazine, I make the annular cham 
ber of the receiver B tapering from oppo 
site ends toward the center, as shown at b'l', 
Fig. 3, at which latter point said chamber is 
narrowest. As will be readily seen, when the 
cartridge has reached the firing-chamber the 
extractor b and spring b are held to the flange 
of the cartridge by said narrow part of the 
chamber, and on withdrawing the bolt the hook 
and spring are gradually released from the 
shell as the bolt recedes through the gradually 
widening rear end of the receiver - chamber 
until said shell again lies within the compart 
ment of the magazine from which it had been 
previously taken, when the extractor devices 
will be entirely disengaged from the flange. 
The bolt then moves backward, leaving the car 
tridge-shell behind. 
In order to distribute the force of the recoil 
more evenly over the breech-frame F, I form 
on or attach to the bolt C, opposite the locking 
lever I, a lug or block, l, that lies in a recess, 
f', of the breech-fraune, Figs. 3, 6, 12, and 14, 
when the bolt is locked into position for firing, 
and I obtain in this manner a so-called bolt 
On the retraction of the bolt the lug 
lock. 
serves as a guide for the bolt to properly guide 
it along the frame F. 
The lock of the gun is composed of a trig 
ger, T, having a fulcrum-pin, 22, htung upon 
hooked cheeks 23, formed on the rear strap, 
F', of the frame F, instead of being pivoted on 
a screw, as usual. The upper arm, t, of the 
trigger is provided with a shoulder that en 
gages the full-cock notch or catch it on the bolt 
Carrier H. A Secolled artin, 24, projects later 
ally from the arm t, and is provided with a 
vertical pin, 25. The arm 24 moves in a re 
cess, l', formed exactly in the center of the 
bearing - face of the locking - lever L, that 
serves to lock the bolt C, of which latter said 
lever forms a part, or to which it is attached. 
This bearing-surface of lever L is provided 
with a slide, 27, adapted to cover the recess l' 
under certain circumstances, and instead of 
the slide a catch or pawl or analogous device 
may be employed. 
The sear-spring s is not secured to the lock 
case by means of a screw, as usual, but simply 
inserted, whereby the screw is dispensed with, 
the breech-frame strap F being provided with 
a dovetailed groove, 28, and the heel end of 
the Spring being constructed to fit said groove, 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
When the slide 27 is in the position shown 
in Fig. 1 the in 25 can penetrate into the re 
cess when the bolt is locked into the position 
for firing. Consequently the firing cannot be 
effected except by pulling upon the trigger T, 
which movement disengages the upper arm, t, 
thereof from the catch I of the .hanner E and 
simultaneously withdraws the pin from the re 
cess l', as shown in Fig. 1. When, however, 
as shown in Fig. 4, the slide is pushed in to 
cover the recess l and tle bolt is rotated to 
lock it it to position for firing, the said slide, 
when the locking is effected, will bear upon 
the pin 25, depress the same, and with it the 
trigger-arm t, to automatically throw the lat 
ter Out of disengagement with the full-cock 
catch. On the hamme'. This releases the ham 
mer and its needle N, which, by the tension of 
the spring S, are thrown forward to explode 
the cartridge. The position of the pin and 
trigger when automatically disengaged from 
the hammer is shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1, 
and in this manner the gun may be automati. 
cally fired by the locking of the bolt. 
In Figs. 2 and 3 I have shown a slight modi 
fication in the construction of the gun-lock, 
which is not designed for automatic firing. 
The trigger Thas a rearwardly-projecting arm, 
t', provided on its lower face witi, an abut 
tnent, 29, that holds the arm in proper position 
by contact with the trigger.guard strap T. 
The arm terminates in an upwardly-projecting 
nose, 30, that engages a do will wardly-project 
it g arm, i, of a two-armed lever, I, pivoted at 
31. The horizontal forward arm, i, of the lever 
I terminates in a spherical head, 32, that lies 
within a recess of the slide-catch K. Upon its 
upper face the airin it has also an abutment, 
33, that bears against the under face of the 
breech-frame F, to hold the lever in proper 
relation to the slide-catch, the sear-spring s 
holding the parts in proper position for engag 
ing the shoulder h on the hammer H, as shown. 
It will be seen that when the trigger is pulled 
SC 
55 
65 
 
4 
233 
S 2 and 3. 
O 
15 
its nose 30 raises the arm i of lever I and cor 
respondingly depresses the arm if thereof 
This moves the slide-catch R downward to re 
lease the hammer, as plainly shown in Figs. 
Instead of a cross bolt or screw, as shown 
in Figs. 2 and 3, for securing the breech-frame 
and guard-straps to the stock, I preferably em 
ploy a post, 42, formed on or attached to the 
guard-strap T', the upper end of which has 
two lugs, 43, adapted to engage hooked cheeks 
44, formed on the frame-strap T, as shown in 
Fig. 1. It will be seen that by means of this 
construction but a single screw is necessary to 
attach the breech-frame, the firing mechanism, 
the magazine, and the trigger-guard strap to 
the stock. 
From what has been said above, it is under 
stood that but two movements are necessary 
to unlock the breech, extract the exploded 
shell, carry a fresh cartridge into the firing 
chamber, lock the breech, and fire the gun, as 
follows: Assuming that the gun has just been 
fired, a quarter-turn is imparted to the bolt 
by means of the lever or handle L to unlock 
the breech, when the bolt and needle are re 
tracted, and with them the empty cartridge 
shell, through the medium of the extractor b 
b', and said shell deposited into the magazine. 
The backward movement of the bolt also causes 
a lateral movement to be imparted to the maga 
zine, which brings a fresh cartridge on a line 
with the breech. The completion of the back 
ward movement of the bolt effects the engage 
ment of the trigger with the full-cock notch 
on the hammer, and this completes the first 
movement. 
The second movement consists 
in moving the bolt forward again to carry a 
fresh cartridge into the firing-chamber and 
completing the movement by imparting a 
quarter-turn to the bolt to lock the breech, 
and at the same time fire the gun, as herein 
before set forth. 
Of course it will be understood that the gun 
may be used as an ordinary breech-loader by 
removing the magazine, and, instead of using 
the cartridge-carrier E in combination with 
the magazine, the former may be dispensed 
with and the latter provided with chambers 
to receive each a cartridge. In this case each 
chamber is provided with the spring and pin 
shown as applied to the carrier E, to prevent 
the cartridges from falling out. 
It is obvious that the use of a case contain 
ing all the cartridges the magazine will hold 
is more advantageous, as the magazine may 
be provided with a full complement of car 
tridges in the same time it would require 
to load one of its chambers when said car 
tridges are to be be inserted one by one, while 
an additional loss of time would result in the 
corresponding removal of the shells, as it would 
not be practicable to provide each chamber 
with an ejector-spring. 
When the gun is constructed for automatic 
firing by the locking of the breech the form of 
7 O 
9 O 
95 
the trigger may be so modified as to dispense 
with the finger-piece, and, if desired, the mag 
azine may be removed and the gun used as a 
single-loader. 
As hereinbefore stated, the cartridges are 
preferably contained in a case or carrier, E, 
Figs. 17 and 18, isolated from each other by 
partitions 10. The case E is made of card 
board and of such form as to fit the inside of 75 
the magazine, where it is securely held by the 
flanges 2 and 4 and the lid thereof. The front 
and rear ends of the case may be closed by a 
strip of paper, 11, as shown by Fig. 17, or 
these ends may be left open and each cartridge 
held within its compartment by means of a 
spring, s, and a pin, 12, as shown in Fig. 18, 
the free end of the spring bearing upon the 
cartridge to prevent its moving in one direc 
tion and the pin holding the cartridge against 
movement in a reverse direction, as plainly 
shown in said Fig. 18. If desired, both the 
above-described means may be employed to 
prevent the cartridges from falling out of the 
carrier while handling the latter. 
Instead of making the cases E of card-board, 
they may be constructed of any other suitable 
light material-such as thin sheet metal-and 
when so constructed the carrier may be used 
repeatedly. 
Flaving now described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a bolt or needle gun, the combination, 
with the barrel, the breech or receiver, the 
breech-frame, a magazine arranged in said 
frame in rear of the receiver, and mechanism, 
substantially as described, to impart a lateral 
movement to the magazine, of a bolt adapted 
to traverse the magazine and carry a car. 
tridge into the receiver at each forward move 
ment, remove the empty shell from the breech, 
and move the magazine laterally at each back 
ward movement to bring a fresh cartridge on 
a line with the receiver; substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a bolt or needle gun, the combination, 
with the barrel, the receiver, the breech-frame, 
a chambered magazine carried by said frame 
in rear of the receiver, and mechanism, sub 
stantially as described, for imparting lateral 
motion to said magazine, of a bolt adapted to 
traverse the magazine, carry a cartridge from 
One of its chambers into the breech at each 
forward movement, extract the empty shell, 
and deposit it into the chamber from which it 
was taken, and move the magazine laterally 
to bring a fresh cartridge on a line with the 
breech at each backward movement, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a bolt or needle gun, the combination, 
with the barrel, a magazine, and a chambered 
cartridge - carrier contained therein, of the 
breech-frame mechanism, substantially as de 
scribed, for imparting a traversing motion to 
said magazine, and appliances whereby the 
carrier is automatically ejected from the mag 
azine when the latter has reached the limit of 
O 
I 25 
I 30 
Io 5 
O 
I IS 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
 
273, 31. 
- 
5 
IO 
lS 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
. 
its traversing motion in one direction, sub- with the bolt, the breech, and breech-frame, 
of the cartridge-magazine M, composed of the 
stantially as described, for the purposes speci. 
frame 13, having flanges 34 and a hinged lid, 
fied. 
M', a cartridge-carrier, E, contained therein, 
4. In a bolt or needle gun, a magazine, M, 
and mechanism, substantially such as de 
arranged transversely of the breech, and open 
scribed, for imparting a traversing motion to 
in front and rear, and having a movable lid, a 
said magazine in rear of the breech, as and for 
chambered cartridge-carrier located within the 
the purposes specified. 
magaziue, and the breech-frame provided with 
a lug to hold the magazine-lid closed, all com 
12. The combination, with the breech-frame 
F, the recess fof which is provided with grooves 
bined for co-operation substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
13 and 14 and a lug, 16, and the bolt C of the 
lmagazine M, having plate 8, carrying pins 9, 
5. In a bolt or needle gun, the combination 
and mechanism to move the magazine later 
of a magazine open in front and rear, located 
ally through the medium of the bolt, as de 
transversely of the breech, a chambered car. 
tridge-case having the front and rear ends of 
Scribed. . 
13. The combination, with the magazine MI 
the chambers closed by a diaphragm, and the 
and bolt C, of the bar D, wedge W., provided 
bolt provided at its forward end with perfo 
with a pin, and the springs', all constructed 
rating devices, whereby when said bolt is 
and arranged for co-operation substantially as 
moved forward to close the breech the rear dia 
and for the purposes specified. 
phragm is first perforated and then ruptured, 
14. The combination, with the bolt, its spring 
the cartridge moved forward with and by the 
actuated needle, the operating-leverlu, recessed, 
bolt, and the front diaphragm of its chamber 
ruptured by the ball of the cartridge, and the 
as at l, the slide 27, and hammer Ed, having 
shoulder h, of the trigger T, having armst 24, 
latter carried into the firing-chamber, as set 
and the pin 25, said parts being arranged for 
forth. 
co-operation as described. 
6. In a bolt or needle gun, the combination, 
15. The combination, with the bolt, its op 
with the bolt and breech-frame provided with 
erating-lever, recessed at l, the slide 27, the 
a lug, 16, of a magazine operated to move at 
hammer H, and spring-actuated needle N, of 
right angles to said bolt, said magazine being 
the pivoted lever-armst 24 and the pin 25, said. 
open at both ends and provided with a mov. 
parts being arranged for co-operation as de 
able lid, and a spring-actuated cartridge-car 
rier fitted into said magazine, said parts oper 
scribed. 
ating to hold the magazine closed until its lid 
16. In a gun of the class described, the coin 
bination, with the barrel, its breech, a maga 
has cleared the lug on the frame, as and for 
zine having a traversing motion in rear of said 
the purposes specified. 
breech, a bolt arranged to traverse the maga 
7. The cartridge-carrier E, divided into a se. 
zine, and having an operating-lever, recessed 
ries of chambers open at both ends, as de 
as at , and means to close said recess, a 
scribed, in combination with the springs S and 
spring-actuated needle, and a hammer provid 
pins 12, substantially as and for the purposes 
ed with a full-cock notch, of a trigger adapt 
set forth. 
ed to engage said full-cock notch, and carry 
8. The combination, with the magazine M, 
ing a pin arranged to project into the recess 
its actuating-springs 7, and lid M/, of the 
of the operating-lever for the bolt, whereby 
breech-frame F, having lug. 16, as and for the 
purposes specified. 
the gun may be fired in the usual manner when 
said recess is uncovered, or whereby it may be 
9. In a bolt or needle gun, the combination 
of a magazine having a hinged lid, M', and 
fired on rotating the bolt to lock the breech 
actuating-springs 7, and a cartridge-carrier 
when said recess is covered, substantially as 
contained therein, with the breech-frame mech 
described. 
anism, substantially as described, for impart 
17. The combination of the receiver B', hav. 
ing its axial passage made to taper from op 
ing a traversing motion to the magazine, and 
appliances for releasing the magazine-lid and 
posite ends toward the center, in combination 
with the bolt and its breech-block B, carry 
to allow the springs to eject the carrier when the 
ing the extractor b and bearing-spring b', as 
magazine has reached the limit of its travers 
and for the purposes specified. 
ing motion, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
10. The combination of the breech-frame and 
presence of two witnesses. 
its lug 16 and grooves 13 and 14 with the 
magazine M, having plate 6, carrying pins 9, 
and the hinged lid M of said magazine, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
11. In a bolt or needle gun, the combination, 
HANS KOTTAS, 
JAMES RILEY WEAVER. 
JOSEF NEMETZ. 
t 
Witnesses: 
65 
85 
CO 1. 
95 
IO 5 
O 
II 5 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273231.txt	(No Model.) 
ELECTRIC MECHANISM FOR CONTROLLING THE HANDs of clocks, 
Patented Feb. 27, 1883. 
No. 273,231. 
J. HAPPERSBERGER 
 
Witnesses: 
. 
Inventor: 
. v. 
"ters, Photo-Lithographer. washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HAPPERSBERGER, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE CINCIN 
NATI ELECTRIC CLOCK COMPANY. 
ELECTRIC MECHANISM FOR CONTROLING THE HANDS OF CLOCKS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 273,231, dated February 27, 1883. 
Application filed July 31, 18S2. 
(No model.) 
- 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN BAPPERSBERGER, 
of the city of Cincinnati, in the county of Ham 
ilton and State of Ohio, have invented a new 
5 and useful improvement in Electric Mechan. 
ism for Actuating the Hands of Large Clocks 
or of Dial-Plates, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to that class of clock 
to mechanism having the motive power for actu 
ating the hands separate and distinct from that 
which operates the time-controlling mechan 
ism, while the regular and proper, application 
of the motive power to the hands is controlled 
15 by means of an electric current operating 
through electro-magnets. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
cheap and effective means whereby the move 
ment of the clock-hands of one or more time 
2O dials, however large and wherever located, 
may be readily and accurately controlled by 
another time-piece of any desirable location, 
acting through the agency of an electric cur 
rent. I attain these objects by the mechanism 
25 illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section, 
and Fig. 2 is a plan view, of a device illustrat 
ing my invention. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts in the 
different drawings. 
A indicates a frame, which supports the 
clock-work, which in turn operates to turn the 
hands of the dial-plate. This frame. A may be 
35 of any suitable dimensions and shape in order 
to support the particular form of clock-work 
employed. . 
The clock-work is operated by any suitable 
motive power-as, for example, a spring or a 
4o weight. Where the hands are heavy a weight 
is preferred. In the present illustration the 
motive power consists of a spring, B, coiled 
around the arbor D,journaled in the sides b ly 
of the frame-work. The outer end of this 
45 spring is attached to the stud a. and the inner 
end to the arbor D. This arbor carries the 
gear-wheel E. concentric there with, and also 
carries the ratchet-wheel F, fixed to and con 
centric there with. The pawl G, pivoted at d 
So to the wheel E, engages the ratchet-wheel F, 
and is pressed down upon the latter by the 
spring e at one end upon the pawl and else 
where, at points e' and e, fixed to the wheel 
E. The teeth of the gear-wheel En?esh with 
the teeth of the pinion H, Fig. 2, fixed upon 55 
and concentric with the arbor I, journaled in 
the sides l l of the frame. This arbor I car 
ries the gear-wheel J, fixed to and concentric 
there with, which in turn engages the pinion 
K, fixed to and concentric with the arbor II, 6o 
journaled in the sides b l'. This arbor L car 
lies a gear-wheel, M, fixed concentric with it, 
and this gear-wheel M engages the pinion N, 
fixed to and concentric with the arbor O, and 
this latter spindle carries the gear-wheel P, 65 
fixed to and concentric with the said arbor O. 
Spindle O also carries a disk, R, fixed to and 
concentric with it, and provided at its periph 
ery with a notch, f, for the engagement of the 
transverse end (1 of the pawl S at each revo- 7 O 
lution of said disk. The gear-wheel Pengages 
a pinion, T, fixed to and concentric with the 
arbor V, journaled in the sides b l' of the 
frame. The arbor V carries the gear-wheel W., 
fixed to and concentric there with, and this lat- 75 
ter gear-wheel engages a pinion, X, fixed to 
and concentric with the arbor Y journaled in 
the sides l l of the frame, and carrying the 
fly-wheel Z, fixed thereto and adjusted ceil 
trally thereon. 
The side of gear-wheel W is provided with 
a stud, h, arranged to engage with the upward 
bent endi of the pawl m. The rear end of the 
pawls and the rear end of the pawl in are each 
fixed to the shaft , pivoted at either end in 85 
the sides of the frame-work. To this shaft al. 
is also fixed the brass lever p, carrying at its 
free end the iron armature t, arranged in con 
nection with two electro-magnets. Nos.1 and 
2 indicate these electro-magnets Secured in any go 
suitable manner and here secured to the frame 
A by means of the arm 3 and the bolts 4 4. 
The usual wires, 5 and 6, for conducting the 
electric current to and from the magnetic coils 
(electro-magnets) 1 and 2 are present. One 95 
of these wires-Say No. 5-is connected to 
the battery. The other wire, 6, and a second 
wire from the battery are so connected to a 
time mechanism, as that the action of the time 
mechanism shall operate to unite the circuit I Co 
for an instant or short period of time, alld 
then break said circuit for a longer and definite. 
23,233 
IO 
15 
3O 
35 
So 
55 
period of time. Any desired form and con- minute. In this manner the minute-hand Oil 
struction of time mechanism to accomplish 
the arbor I and its accompanying hour-land, 
this purpose may be employed. One form of 
&c., are caused to accurately record the time 
such mechanism is shown in the Letters Pat 
of day without being furnished with the ex 
pensive portions of a complete clock mechan 
ent of the United States No. 226,401, dated 
April 13, 1880, for improvement in electric 
ism-as, for instance, the escapement and 
clocks, granted to John Edappersberger. 
pendulum, &c. 
The arbor I is adapted to carry a clock minute 
The particular amount of space passed over 
hand, and the usual mechanism for moving the 
at any one continuous movement by the min 
hour-hand (and, when desired, a second-hand) 
ute-hand may be and is varied according to 
in connection there with is to be employed. 
the desire of the constructer and the particul 
The mode in which my invention operates 
lar object for which the time is furnished. 
is as follows: Let us premise that the mech 
For example, in tower-clocks one-half minute 
nism has been arranged to move the minute 
is as much a space as it would be desirable for 
hand or arbor I forward over one minute-space 
the minute-hand to pass ovel' at each Succes 
at each successive movement of said hand. 
sive movement. The length of space traveled 
The weight or spring B being wound up and 
over by the minute-hand may be varied by a 
the battery being filled to create an electric cur 
change in the size or number or arrangement 
rent, and the time-piece which is to alternately 
of wheels employed in the train, and may be 
close and break the current being set to close 
varied by a change in the time-controlling 
the circuit, say, once in a minute, as soon 
mechanism, so as to cause the time of opening 
as said time-piece connects the circuit the 
and closing the circuit to be changed. 
electro-magnets are rendered magnetic and 
By means of my invention the clock-hands 
draw up the armature t, thereby depressing 
of a large number of very large clock-dials 
the pawls in and S and disconnecting the end 
may be simultaneously, effectively, and cheaply 
of pawl in from the stud or stoph and the end 
operated by one small clock or equivalent time 
of pawls from the notch in disk R. This op. 
controlling mechanism, constructed to close 
eration leaves the Various train-wheels and the 
and break the electric circuit for the trains of 
fly-wheel Z, free to revolve in accordance with 
wheels respectively operating the hands of 
the power exerted by the weight or spring B. 
said clock-dials. 
Inasmuch as the circuit is closed only once a 
I do not claim, broadly, the train of wheels 
minute, the train-wheels are arranged as to 
above described, nor the device for checking 
size and number so that one revolution of the 
and releasing the same by meals of the disk R, 
disk JR will cause the arbor to move so as to 
with its notch f, the wheel W, with its stud h, 
carry the minute-hand forward one minute. 
and the pawls S and m, they being all well 
The train-wheels are now rotated through the 
known to clock-makers and used ol'dinarily in 
action of the Weight or spring 3 until the 
the striking mechanism of clocks; but 
minute - hand has passed over one minute 
What I do claim as my invention, and desire 
space, as marked on the dial, and by this time 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
the disk l has made One revolution. In the 
1. In combination with the actuating mech 
meantime, and, in fact, immediately after 
anism of a clock-clial, the electro-magnets 1 and 
the circuit was closed and the pawls was dis 
2, the armature t, the arm p, the shaft n, the 
connected from the disk R and the pawl in 
pawls s and n, the wheel W, with its stud h, 
from the stud h, the circuit is broken, and the 
and the disk R, with its notch f, substantially 
electro-magnets being no longer magnetic the 
as and for the purpose specified. 
armature has, by its own weight, (or by the 
2. In combination with the actuating mech 
action of a spring, if so desired,) fallen and 
anism of a clock-dial, the spindle O, with disk 
thrown up the free ends of the pawls s and in 
R, having notch f, the gear-wheel P, the wheel 
until the transverse end g of the pawls comes 
W, having stud h, the pawl 8, the pawl in, the 
in contact with the revolving edge of the disk 
shaft n, the arm p, the armature t, and the 
R, in which position it remains until the notch 
electro-magnets 1 and 2, substantially as and 
f is brought by one revolution of the disk op 
for the purpose specified. 
posite to the said transverse end (1 of the pawl 
3. In combination with the actuating mech 
s, when the end g, still actuated by the weight 
anism of a clock-dial, a releasing mechanism 
of the armature, (or by a spring, as the case 
formed by the spindle O, the pinion N, the 
may be,) is pushed into the notch f, and at the 
disk R, with notch f, the gear-wheel P, the 
same time the pawl in is raised, so that its up 
wheel W, with its stud h, the pawls, the pawl 
ward-bent end j intercepts the stad h, and all 
m, the shaft n, the arm p, the armature t, and 
movement of the train of wheels thus stopped. 
the electro-magnets 1 and 2, substantially as 
As soon as another minute has passed, the 
and for the purpose specified. 
time-controlling mechanism closes the electric 
The foregoing specification of my invention 
circuit, and in the manner aforementioned 
signed by me this 26th day of July, A. D. 1882. 
allows the train of wheels to revolve, and the 
JNO HAPPERSIBERGER. 
minute-hand on arbor I to record another 
minute, when the pawls will again stop the 
movement of the train-wheels, in readiness to 
be again started at the expiration of another 
JOHN D. GALLAGHER, 
JOHN W. KIRK. 
Witnesses: 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
l OS 
IO 
1. I5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273331.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 273,331. 
 
J. B. WILSON. 
UMBRELLA RUNNER, 
Patented Mar. 6, 1883, 
z7 -e 
4-see 
s 
a. 
(96.6------ee- 
, 
INVENTOR 
242. 2 
4 TTewEry - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES BERNARD WILSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
UMBRELLA --RUNNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 273,331, dated March 6, 1883. 
Application filed June 9, 1882. 
(No model.) 
5 
35 
40 
Io companying drawings, where 
Figure 1 is a plan of the slide-blank. 
I5 tion. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES BERNARD WIL 
soN, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Umbrella 
Runners; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, reference being had to the ac 
Fig. 
2 is a side elevation of stick (partly broken 
away) with my improved runner applied. Fig. 
3 is a top view of same. Fig. 4 is a side eleva 
stick below notch. Fig. 6 is a side elevation 
of lever; Fig. 7, a perspective of spring, and 
Fig. 8 a like view of catch-pin. 
My invention has relation to umbrella-run 
ners of that class in which a locking-lever is 
employed. 
My improvements have for their special ob 
ject to simplify the construction, reduce the 
expense, and increase the efficiency of the de 
25 vice. My improvements consist in the peculiar 
- construction and combinations of parts herein 
after referred to, having reference, principally, 
to the following points: first, to constructing 
3o the sleeve from a plate having lugs or projec 
tions on two of its edges, said plate being 
folded or bent to form a slotted tube, with the 
lugs thrown out to form bearings for the lock 
ing-lever; second, to the retracting-spring for 
the lever, which is made of a piece of wire bent 
into the peculiar form hereinafter set forth; 
third, to the combination, with the sleeve, of 
the spring fastened to said sleeve by means of 
lugs or lips struck up from the latter and bent 
over or clamped on the ends of said spring; 
fourth, to the combination, with the umbrella 
sleeve or slide and notch, of a lever having two 
heads or catches on the upper side of the full 
crum of said lever and between said fulcrum 
and notch. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, A 
represents a plate of metal, of the shape sub 
stantially as shown, its two sides, a a, being 
of less length or extent than a line parallel 
So there with through the middle of the plate, ex 
tending from the side a' to the opposite side, a, 
Said plate is bent or folded to form a tube, B, 
having a slot, b, extending the complete length. 
Said slot is formed by bending the plate so 
that the edges a a do not meet, but are slight. 55 
ly apart and parallel. The metal adjacent to 
said edges is struck up or thrown out, so as 
to form flanges b'b', which are radial, or nearly 
so, to the tube. These flanges form supports 
for the locking-lever and its retracting-spring, 
as hereinafter fully described. 
The lever is shown at C, having its fulcrum 
at 0, said fulcrum consisting of a pin having 
bearings in the flanges b' b', as shown. Said 
lever is formed with a thumb-piece, c', at one 65 
Fig. 5 is a transverse section through end and two heads or catches, cc, respective 
ly, both of said heads being on the same side 
of the fulcrum of the lever. The runner has 
a notch, D, and the lever is arranged so that 
both its heads shall be below this notch, or on 
the same side of the latter. 
E represents a retracting-spring of approxi 
mately U form, having two sides, ee, and a 
cross-piece, e', uniting said sides. The sides 
e are preferably formed with return-piecese, 75 
made by bending said sides backwardly at or . 
about their middles. The ends or sides of the 
spring E are secured to the slide B, the cross 
piece e' passing under the lever C,just back of 
or below the fulcrum, the tendency and opera- 8o 
tion of the spring being to throw the opposite 
end of the lever, or that carrying the heads 
c c, down or inwardly toward the stick F, in 
side of the runner. To fasten the spring in 
place, the slide is provided with lugs or lips 
bl, formed by cutting U-shaped slits in the 
plate A, as shown at a, and striking up or 
pushing out the metal to produce projecting 
lugs, which are bent over upon the sides e, or 
their return-bends e, clamping the same firmly go 
in position, as shown. By this method of fast 
ening the expense of soldering or of riveting 
is avoided, while increased security is obtained. 
G G' represent catch-pins in the stick-one 
near the handle of the latter, the other near the 95 
opposite end of the stick. These pins consist of 
shanksg, with triangular heads g', of approxi 
mately Vishape, as shown. When the umbrellais 
closed the pin Genters the slot band is engaged 
by the head cofthelever C. Tofacilitate theen. Ioo 
trance of the pin to said slot the latter is flared, 
as shown, this shape being produced by round. 
45 
. 
. 
. 
jo 
 
2 
273,331 
ing the corners of plate A, as shown at a. a. 
When the umbrella is opened the pin G' en 
ters the slot b and engages with the head cof 
lever C. An opening, d, is made in the notch D 
for the passage of the pin, and to facilitate en 
trance to this notch the latter is made flaring. 
The notch-opening is of course in alignment 
with the slot b in the tube B, and with the le. 
ver C, located over said slot. To prevent the 
lever from bearing on the stick and scratch 
ing the latter when the runner is moved up 
and down, said lever projects sufficiently for. 
ward to have its free end rest upon the notchD. 
To operate the runner, the lever is depressed 
by pressure on the thumb-piece, lifting the op 
posite end of said lever off the notch and raising 
the head, then in engagement with the catch 
pin, above said pin. The runner is then moved 
up or down, accordingly as it is desired to 
open or close the umbrella. The locking of 
the lever on the catch-pit is is effected automati 
cally by the entrance of the pins (one at a time 
of course) to the slot b and the engagement 
thereof with the lever. 
It will be noted that the manipulation of the 
runner is similar to that of a common runner 
that is to say, there is a depression by the 
thumb, then a sliding movement of the run 
ner and an automatic locking. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. An umbrella-slide having a longitudinal 
slot, b, extending its entire length, the metal 
adjacent to the edges of the slide being bent 
radially outward, whereby bearings or sup. 
ports are afforded for a locking-lever, said sup 
ports being integral with said slide, substan 
tially as set forth, 
2. The combination, with an umbrella slide 
and notch, of a lever having two catches or 
heads, said lever being fulcrumed on said slide, 
and having both its heats between its fulcrum 
and the notch, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with an umbrella slide 
and notch, of a lever having two catches or 
heads on the same side of its fulcrum, saidle 
wer having a support on said notch, and said 
heads being located between the notch and 
Yafulcrum, substantially as shown and set 
Orth. 
4. The combination, with the slide B andle 
ver C, of the spring E, of U-shaped or approxi 
mate form, having its sides attached to the 
slide, its cross-piece passing beneath the lever, 
substantially as shown and described. 
5. The combination, with an umbrella-slide, 
B, and a lever, C, carried thereon, of a spring, E, 
secured to said slide by lugs or lips struck up 
from the metal of said slide, substantially as 
shown and set forth. 
6. The combination of sleeve B, having ra 
dial flanges l'b', locking-lever C, having two 
heads or catches, c' c, spring E, secured un 
der or in lips or struck-up portions of said 
sleeve, notch D, having flaring opening d, and 
catch-pins G. G', substantially as shown and 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have here unto set my hand this 7th day of 
June, 1882. 
JAMES BERNARD WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
ANDREW ZANE, Jr., 
WILL H. POWELL, 
40 
45 
So 
55 
65 
S 
IO 
25 
. 35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273431.txt	(No Model.) 
E. ANTHONY, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 273,431. 
 
PRINTING, 
Patented Mar, 6, 1883. 
till 
ill 
IIlli 
l 
ill fill 
lift 
l 
lili 
till 
lit 
iii 
lili 
III 
till till 
till 
?ilt 
till 
t 
Hill 
till 
III.iii.1 
Illilill 
Illilili 
Illiitiiti Hillllllllll 
titliltilit 
lili III 
 
 
s 
PEERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 273,431. 
E. ANTHONY. 
PRINTING, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar, 6, 1883. 
<SSSSSSSS 
No.No.``````~~~~)--2) 
<SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS}}#, 
=E= - 
 
peters, photo-Lithographer, Washingto: 
 
 
(No Model) 
 
No. 273,431. 
E, ANTHONY. 
3. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
PRINTING, 
Patented Mar. 6, 1883. 
N. PETERs. Photo-lithographer Washington, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWYN ANTHONY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PRINTING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,431, dated March 6, 1883. 
Application filed December 14, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWYN ANTHONY, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful improve 
ment in printing from cylindrically-set type 
and stereotype taken from papier-mach mat 
rices from the type set with such cylindrical 
surfaces, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
Heretofore the said matrices have been ob. 
tained from type fixed in flat chases resting on 
a plane, so that the surface of the type is a 
plane. Consequently, if it is afterward re 
quired to place the type on a rotary printing 
press-i. e., on one on which the type is put 
On one or more cylinders-it is necessary to 
take the type out of the said chases and re 
arrange it in movable type-beds. This opera 
tion consumes considerable time-in fact, as 
much as is required to produce several stereo 
type-plates. By my invention the just men 
tioned delay is avoided. On the removal of 
the matrix from the surface of the type it (the 
type) may be placed directly on the printing 
cylinder, so that one machine may be printing 
from type before the stereotype-plate is cast, 
and when the latter is finished it can be placed 
on a second machine. Thus by the time one 
set of plates is ready two machines would be 
running, one printing from type and the other 
from stereotype, the former having been started 
just so long as it takes to produce a finished 
stereotype-plate from the papier-mach matrix. 
I am thus enabled, where the circulation is 
large enough to require the simultaneous use 
of two or more machines, to go to press con 
siderably later than when the matrices are 
obtained from a flat surface. My invention 
is also useful where only one machine is used, 
but more than one edition is printed, for 
the pages in which alterations are to be made 
can be stereotyped and the plates put on the 
machine. The type will thus be free for the 
making of alterations while the first edition is 
being printed, and the next edition can be 
printed from the type thus altered. But had 
the matrices been taken from a flat surface it 
would be necessary, after obtaining the mat. 
rices, to remove the type into type-beds be 
fore it could be placed on the printing-cylin 
der, and even when stereotyping is not em 
ployed, the curved chase and the improved 
type-bed hereinafter described are more con 
venient than the type-beds heretofore used, 55 
on account of their less weight and consequent 
facility in handling. 
Figure 1 is a cross-section partially in view 
of the curved chase hereinafter described. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view, and Fig. 3 a longitudi- 6o 
nal section, of the same. Fig. 4 is a cross-sec 
tion on the line a b of the rolling apparatus, 
showing behind the pressing apparatus. Fig. 
5 is a longitudinal section of the rolling and 
pressing apparatus; Fig. 6, a perspective view 65 
of the curved imposing-table. Fig. 7 shows 
the shape of the brush. Fig. 8 is a section of 
a portion of a printilig-cylinder with a curved 
chase on it, and Fig. 9 shows a section of a 
portion of a printing-cylinder with the curved to 
movable type-bed thereon hereinafter de 
scribed. Fig. 6 is the imposing-table with a 
curved chase on it filled with type. 
The said table should be securely fastened 
on any strong suitable frame, and so that the 75 
height of the surface of the table may be con 
venient for the purpose of lifting the type in 
and out of the chases. The table itself should 
be of iron, and the form of its upper surface 
should be accurately that of a portion of a cyl- 8o 
inder of the same curvature as the printing 
cylinder. The curvature of this last cylinder - 
will of course depend upon the amount of 
curvature which it is desired the surface of the 
type should have. This being fixed, the diam- 85 
eter of the printing-cylinder (and of the upper . 
surface of the imposing-table) will be less than 
the diameter of the cylinder of which the up 
er surface of the type forms part by twice 
p 
the height of the type. When, in lieu of the 9o 
chases, the hereirafter-described movable type 
beds are employed, the imposing-table is not 
required, and the diameter of the printing-cyl- . 
inder will be less than it was in the previous 
case by twice the thickness of the lower parts 95 
of the said movable type-beds. My invention 
is applicable whatever kind of rotary printing 
press be used, and no alteration therein is re 
quired, except in the printing cylinder or cyl 
inders, as the case may be. 
CC 
O 
IS 
2O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
2, 3,431 
70 
75 
2o invention 
3o forms part. 
The movable type-beds of the usual con 
struction really form a portion of the printing 
cylinder and receive the pressure which the 
type undergoes in the act of printing. In my 
5 case the irremovable parts of the cylinder 
must be able to resist this pressure, and there 
fore the surface of the said printing-cylinder, 
or, rather, of that portion of it on which the 
chases or the hereinafter-described movable 
Io type-beds rest, should be continuous-that is to 
say, it should be a smooth cylindrical surface 
similar to that of a cylinder intended to receive 
stereotype-plates, and of course it must be ac 
curately made, inasmuch as when the curved 
15 chases are used it forms the bed on which the 
type rests, similarly to the case of flat-surface 
printing. For example, Fig. S shows a por 
tion of a printing-cylinder with a curved chase 
fastened thereon. Considerations outside this 
determine the curvature of the 
surface n n of the type, the fraction the arc 
m is of the whole circumference, and the 
lumber of printing-cylinders used. All that 
need be considered is that r, Fig. 8, must be a 
25 continuous plate of metal of sufficient thick 
ness, and that its upper surface must be ac 
curately that of a cylinder whose axis is g, and 
radius less by the height of the type than that 
of which the upper surface, in 2, of the type 
When, instead of the chases, the 
curved movable type-beds are used, then (Fig. 
9) the printing-cylinder will be as before, ex 
cept that the radius of the upper surface of r 
will be less by the height of the type plus the 
35 thickness h of the type-bed than that of the 
cylinder of whose surface the upper surface, 
in n, of the type forms part. 
I will now more particularly describe the 
curved chase C, which is shown separately in 
4o Figs. 1, 2, and 3. c' cc c form its four sides. 
c' and care straight in the direction of their 
length, while c and care curved. The under 
surface of the chase should be a portion of a cyl 
inder whose axis is parallel to c' or c, and whose 
45 radius equals that formed by the upper sur. 
face of the imposing-table, Fig. 6. Thus its 
under surface will restin contact with the sur 
face of the imposing-table just as a flat chase 
does on the surface of a flat table. The thick 
So ness of the chase should be a little less than 
the height of the type, but only sufficiently so 
to prevent the chase from blackening the paper 
in its passage through the machine. The sides 
c' c' should be some two inches or more broad 
5 for strength's sake. The breadth of c and c'. 
will be limited by considerations of margin, 
(if a chase is to be placed on the machine to 
the right of c and one above c',) as any one 
skilled in the art will readily understand with 
The rules q are of 
similar shape to those used in the ordinary 
movable type-beds; but they lack their bottom 
projecting pieces-that is to say, their sides, 
Fig. 1, are inclined to one another, so that the 
65 sides facing one another of any two consecu 
tive rules are approximately parallel. The 
6o out further explanation. 
height of the rules is the same as that of the 
type t. At one end the rule has a T-shaped 
prolongation, q', Figs. 2 and 3, which can be 
inserted in the recess 0, Fig. 2, and which is 
made to slide in the groove feut for the pur 
pose out of the side c of the chase. This 
groove should follow the curve of the chase, so 
that the bottoms of the column-rules are al 
ways in contact with the surface of the im 
posing-table, and of course of the printing-cyl 
inder when on the machine. The purpose of 
the prolongation and groove is to keep the 
rules upright when the chase is empty or in 
course of being filled. 
The other ends of the S 
rules may be secured to the chase by any con 
venient or well-known means. The type t may 
be secured in the chase in any suitable way. 
The means used in an ordinary movable type 
bed, for instance, may be adopted. 
ss' are screws which pass through the side 
c of the chase. The turning of the screw s' 
causes the triangular pieces w w to slide upon 
one another, and thus produces pressure 
against the sides c' c. of the chase, while the 
turning of the screws ss, &c., causes the re 
spective columns of type to press against the 
sides c' c of the chase. The type having been 
thus locked up and its surface planed in the 
usual way, the chase C, with the type in it, is 
removed and fastened on the rolling appara 
tus, Figs. 4 and 5. The surface of the bed A 
of the rolling apparatus is cylindrical and of 
the same curvature as the surface of the im 
posing-table, and it is heated by steam or in any 
other suitable way. The various layers of 
paper, &c., which make up the papier-mach 
matrix, having been put one over the other on 
the type, similarly to what is done when the 
surface is flat, the matrix is formed by passing 
the cylinder B over it and back again, thus 
causing the papier-mach. D to receive an im 
pression of the type. The motion of B may 
be produced in any suitable way. For exam 
ple, the to-and-fro motion of its axis may be ef 
fected by the arms ll, l receiving its motion 
from a crank and loscillating round the axis e. 
The rotation of the cylinder B round its own 
axis may be caused by a cog-wheel, b, and 
curved rack b', the pressure it exerts on the 
matrix being regulated by the adjusting device 
K. After the matrix has been thus formed it 
may be beaten in any places that may require 
it, justasis done in the usual flat process. Itis, 
however, convenient to use for this purpose a 
brush whose surface is of the same shape as 
is the surface of the type, like the brushi, Fig. 
7. If preferred, the matrix may be entirely 
formed by beating the papier - mach with 
brushes such as described, and without rolling 
it. After the matrix is completed the chase C 
is unfastened from the surface of A, and with 
out being lifted it may be pushed along until 
it is on the bed A' of the drying-press. The 
surface of A' is of course of precisely the same 
shape as that of A. In fact, they would form 
one continuous surface except for the small in 
95 
ICO 
ITO 
I 5 
I2O. 
I 25 
st 
273,43 
3. 
terval necessary for the passage between them 
of one of the arms, l. By causing the motion of 
the cylinder B to be otherwise communicated A 
and Almight be made with no interval between 
them and form one continuous bed. The fol 
lower E, which is supported by and guided in 
the frame P, is now brought down on the ma 
trix by turning the wheelp. The said follower 
Eisheated by steam or by other suitable means, 
and its under surface is cylindrical, its radius 
being very slightly greater than that of the 
cylinder formed by the surface in in of the type, 
in order to allow for the thickness of the ma 
trix, &c. As soon as the matrix becomes dry 
the follower, E is raised and the matrix re 
moved from the surface of the type. It may 
now be placed (just as when taken from a flat 
surface) in a mold of any desired curvature 
and stereotype-plates of any shape required 
obtained from it in the usual way. Indeed, a 
matrix obtained from a cylindrical surface in 
the manner herein before explained is for all 
practical purposes the same as one obtained 
from a flat surface. On account of the greater 
expansibility of type metal than of iron or steel 
under the action of heat it will be well not to 
lock up the type too tightly, and to further 
tighten it after the matrix is taken, but before 
beginning to print. 
1n some cases- when, for instance, a page is 
of unusual breadth or occupies an unusually 
large arc of the circumference of the printing 
cylinder-it will be better to use the movable 
type-beds shown,in Fig.9, instead of the curved 
chase. 
The column-rules, locking-up devices, &c., 
may all be constructed as in the well-known 
type-beds at present in use; but its under sur 
face cannot be so made. 
The said under sur 
face, m' n', Fig. 9, must be a continuous portion 
of a cylinder, and the thickness of the bed h 
55 
must be as small as conveniently can be. Nor 
need this thickness be great, because the press 
ure caused by printing will be transmitted to 
the surface r of the herein before - described 
printing-cylinder, which surface may be made 45 
as strong as desired, since the thickness of 
may be taken at pleasure. What are called 
the movable type-bed' (shown in Fig. 9) are 
therefore substantially curved chases with a 
thin bottom. The disadvantage of this mov 
able type-bed as compared with the curved 
chase is that it is heavier and the matrix takes 
longer to dry. The rolling apparatus and the 
drying-press, &c., will be just the same as when 
curved chases are used, except that the radius 
of the upper surface of A and A must be less 
than the radius of the upper surface of the 
type by the height of the type plus the thick 
ness of h, Fig. 9. 
In the drawings I have shown A A' and E 
hollow and heated by steam-pipes; but since I 
do not claim any particular mode of heating, 
and the way indicated is well known in the or 
dinary flat process, it is unnecessary to more 
particularly describe them. A similar remark 
applies to many other details. 
What I herein claim as my invention is 
An improvement in the art of printing on 
cylindrical surfaces, consisting in first making 
up the type-form on a chase or form curved to 
fit the cylinder of the printing - press, and 
adapted to the rapid drying of the matrix, in 
making from said curved form a matrix and 
drying it in contact with the form, in casting 
a stereotype-plate from said matrix, and finally 
in using both the type-form and the stereotype 
in printing, substantially as described. 
EDWYN ANTEONY. 
- 
Witnesses: 
H. S. MITCHELL, 
CHAS. RAETTIG. 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
AO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273531.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 273,531, 
J. C., H0 ADLEY, 
SHOE SEWING MACHINE, 
Patented Mar. 6, 1883. 
r 
 
 
  
 
2 % 2N. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNE5ates 
CO, O.---- 
NMENT OFr. 
Johar C/loadzey 
(A72/s. 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
' 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C, HOADLEY, OF BOSTON, MASSACEUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO GORDON 
McKAY, OF NEWPORT, REODE ISLAND. 
SHOE-SEWING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 273,531, dated March 6, 1883. 
Application filed August 8, 1881. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN C. HoADLEY, of 
Boston, Suffolk county, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvement in Sew 
5 ing-Machines, of which the following descrip 
tion, in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, is a specification. . 
This invention in sole-sewing machines em 
ploying a hooked needle, a horn to support the 
Io work, and a thread-carrying whirl has for its 
object to increase the working speed and ca 
pacity of the machine, and make it run more 
steadily and With less breakage of parts. 
Prior to my invention the whirl of the well 
15-known McKay machine has had a rotary re 
ciprocating movement imparted to it by mech. 
anism which was frequently broken because 
of its sudden starts and stops and reversals 
of movement, and by reason of such mechan 
ism the speed of the machine has been limited. 
It has been attempted to move the whirl con 
tinuously forward at a variable speed, neces 
sitating irregular gears with irregular strains; 
and it has been attempted to employ a con 
tinuously-rotating whirl in connection with a 
hooked needle actuated by a crank, and with 
such needle, without a period of rest at the end 
of its downstroke, it has been proposed to 
employ a whirl having from four to five rota 
tions to each stroke of the needle, and to actu 
ate the said whirl by a complicated and very 
rapidly moving gearing. When the needle 
does not dwell at its downstroke to afford-time 
for the whirl to lay its thread in the hook of 
the needle, it is obvious, to insure the placing 
of the thread into the hook of the needle, that 
the whirl must have one or more complete ro 
tations while the hooked needle is passing 
through that very short space of its movement 
4o represented by the time that the needle is be 
low the supporting-surface of the horn, and to 
do so, as the needle does not rest, a very high 
speed must be given to the whirl, and as there 
is a practical limit to the speed at which the 
whirl can be run it follows that excessive speed 
of the whirl necessitates a slower motion of 
the needle for its whole stroke. 
In this my invention I do away with all 
complicated and expensive mechanism for 
so operating the whirl, and impart to the latter 
by simple gears a uniform, steady, continu 
ously forward movement, preferably at a speed 
which gives two rotations of the whirl to one 
descent, and rise of the needle and needle-bar, 
and the hooked needle, after penetrating the 55 
stock and passing below the supporting-sur 
face of the horn, dwells to permit the whirl to 
deliver its thread to the hook with certainty. 
Figure 1 represents in side elevation a suffi 
cient portion of a well-known McKay sole- 6o. 
sewing machine, I having selected that form 
of machine to illustrate my invention; and 
Fig. 2, a detail of the horn to be referred to. 
Referring to the drawings, the rotating horn 
a, whirl b, shaft c, bevel-gears d e, shaft f, 65 
gears gh, shaft i, gearsjk, shaft l, gears in , 
shaft 0, gears p p, hooked needleg, needle-bar 
r, its actuating-lever ID, movable fulcrum-rod 
a? therefor, friction device a to bear upon and 
hold the needle-bar at rest while the variable 7 o 
fulcrum-bar a is being moved longitudinally 
in its bearings, and cam-shafts and frame 
plates t is are and may be all as common to 
sole-sewing machines, and substantially shown 
in Patent No. 201,987. 
At the rear of the bevel-gear p, and on the 
shaft which carries the said bevel-gear, I have 
placed a pinion, a, and on the cam-shafts, which 
acts, as does the cam-shafta in the said patent, 
to operate the needle-bar lever and reciprocate 8o 
it and the hookeul needle so that it dwells at 
its lowest point, I have placed a toothed gear, 
b', twice the size of the pinion a, which, 
through bevel-gear p, shafto, and the parts be 
fore described between it and the whirl, re. 85 
volves the said whirl twice during each rotation 
of the cam-shaft and each down and up move 
ment of the needle-bar and hooked needle, the 
movement of the said whirl being in but one 
direction and at a constant uniform speed, 9o. 
without shock or jar. The speed of the whirl 
and its position with relation to the descent of 
the needle are such that the whirl carries its 
thread about and into the hook of the needle 
q as soon as the needle passes sufficiently be 
low the stock to receive thread into its hook. 
The needle then, having a period of rest for 
its upward movement, is temporarily checked, 
although the eccentric for moving it continues 
to rotate. The whirl delivers its thread to the 
needle only at each alternate revolution of the 
whirl and while the needle is below the stock. 
45 
95 
25 
30 
35 
75 
OO 
Making the movements of the whirl constant 
and uniform enables the machine to be run at 
higher speed with less liability of injury, im 
perfect stitching, or breakage of parts. 
I wish it to be understood that I do not limit 
my invention to revolving the whirl but twice 
during each rotation of the cam-shaft, as I may, 
if desired, rotate it three times. 
In Fig. 2, on an enlarged scale, I have shown 
the whirl b and the shaft c, with its beveled 
gear c to move the whirl, the train of gearing 
actuating the whirl being such as to rotate the 
latter twice to each complete movement of the 
needle-bar and hooked needle. 
I claim 
In a sole-sewing machine, a horn to support 
the material being sewed, a hooked needle, 
O 
Witnesses: 
G. W. GREGORY, 
L. F. CONNOR. 
and mechanism to reciprocate it and cause it 
to dwell at the end of its downstroke with its 
hook below the material, combined with a 
whirl having imparted to it at least two com 
plete revolutions to each up and down move 
ment or complete reciprocation of the hooked 
needle, the said whirl being moved continuously 
in one direction at substantially uniform speed 
to operate in connection with the hooked nee 
dle, as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
- 
JOHN C. HOADLEY. 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273631.txt	(No Model.) 
H. T. STOCK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
RAILROAD DITCHING AND EXCAVATING MACHINE, 
No. 273.631. 
Patented Mar. 6, 1883. 
& 
& 
 
- 
- - 
- - 
S 
gates in 
y: 
ss R \\ \ 
RS exeKe 
N\} : 
S. 
S / 
8 
o 
EE 
Es: 
OE 
//za7 (esses. 
2, 4, fig. 
77 gayev (ZOZ: 
264/e6-0 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
H. T. STOCK. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
RAILROAD DITCHING AND EXCAVATING MACHINE. 
No. 273,631. 
Patented Mar. 6, 1883. 
  
 
 
- 
- 
% 
72227 zesses. 
ZZzZye7zzoz. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOSEA. T. STOCK, OF TOLEDO, OHIO. 
RAILROAD DITCH ING AND EXCAVATING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,681, dated March 6, 1883. 
Application filed August 30, 1882. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HosEA. T. STOCK, of 
the city of Toledo, Lucas county, Ohio, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in IRail 
5 road-Ditching Machines and Excavators, which 
improvement is fully set forth in the following 
specification, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part thereof. 
My invention relates to a device designed 
Io for railroad-excavating work, as well as for 
making and cleaning ditches along railway. 
tracks. The machine is mounted in and upon 
a railroad-car, and is provided with the en 
gines, boilers, hoisting machinery, chains, 
I5 swinging crane, shovel or dipper, and its han 
dle usually found in excavating-machines. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to pro 
vide such machine with mechanism by means 
of which its crane, with its shovel or dipper, 
2O may at pleasure be easily and quickly shifted 
from side to side, or to the front of the machine, 
in order that the crane may be brought to 
overhang, or nearly so, the ditch upon which 
the work is to be performed, so that ditching 
25 may be done on both sides of the track with 
the same crane, and so that the machine may 
also be used for ordinary excavating-work; 
second, to provide such machine, in which the 
crane is swung by the ordinary chain and hori 
3o zontal wheel or swinging circle, with a de 
vice by means of which such chain may be 
kept equally taut and made to run uniformly 
from the fixed hoisting machinery or drum in 
any position to which the crane may be shift. 
35 ed; (in this specification I use the terms shift 
ing and swinging as applied to the crane 
in different senses, the former denoting the 
moving of the crane relatively to the car bodily 
from point to point, the latter meaning the 
4o motion of the Crane upon its own mast or cen 
ter;) third, to provide such machine with a de. 
vice by means of which the chain or rope de 
signed to pull the dipper upward and forward 
and to lower the same shall, at whatever point 
45 to which the crane may be shifted, lead 
from its drum or hoisting apparatus Without 
entanglement, rubbing, or undue twist; and, 
fourth, to provide means for securing the lon 
gitudinal thrust and travel to and fro of the 
So shovel-beam or dipper-handle uniform in any 
position to which the crane of the machine 
may be shifted. I attain these objects by the 
mechanism illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my device. Fig. 
2 is a plan of the same above its roof. Fig. 3 
is a cross-section through the machine behind 
the crane. IFig. 4 is a plan of the mechanisin 
designed for shifting the crane, and Fig. 5 is 
a view of a portion of the same. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several figures. 
A is the mast, B the jib or brace, and C 
the tie or boom, of the crane. The crane is 
provided with a shovel, scoop, or dipper, D, 
having a handle, E. The mast of the crane at 
bottom rests upon a stout arm or support, F, 
and at top the mast enters and is held upright 
by the arm or support G. 
H is a stationary post. At bottom post H 
passes through arm F, and at top passes 
through piece G, thus forming a pivot or full 
crum for radial arms G and F, both of which 
pieces, carrying with them the crane, rotate 
horizontally, describing the arc acac. 
On the floor of the machine, under the piece 
F, is secured a segmental rack or frame, J, hav 
ing teeth or cogs on its upper side, the center 
of its circle being post H. Pinion k, attached 
to arm F, engages the rack J, and may be 
revolved by means of levers inserted in the 
holes in shaft l of pinion k, causing the pinion 
to travel around segmental rack J, carrying 
with it the radial arms F and G and crane A 
B C and its appendages, thus bringing the 
crane to a Working position at aliy desired 
point on the dotted line a. I do not, however, 
limit my invention to this method of rotating 
pinion k, as equivalent means will readily sug 
gest themselves to persons skilled in the art, 
Under the swinging support G is secured to 
the roof a segmental bar, M. J and M form 
supports and ways for arms F and G. Arms 
F and G are provided with holes in, which co 
incide with corresponding holes in J and M. 
By inserting pins in in these coincident holes 
the radial arms IF and G are securely held in 
any position to which they may be shifted. 
With reference to the mechanism h9re (le 
scribed by which the crane is shifted from point 
to point, I do not confine my invention to the 
means of shifting the crane in the arc of a cir 
cle, as obviously a straight rack and pinion, 
or their equivalents, may be employed to move 
8 S 
90 
IOO 
 
2 
23,63. 
O 
35 
the crane from side to side of the car in a 
straightline,though I prefer the method shown, 
as affording a simpler way of connecting the 
digging and swinging apparatus by chains, &c., 
with the fixed drums and engines. 
O is a horizontal wheel or swinging circle 
provided for swinging the crane. O is a chain 
leading from a drum, (actuated by the steam 
engines of the machine,) and passing around 
the periphery of the wheel O, causing the wheel 
O to turn, carrying with it the crane to the 
right or left, according to the direction in which 
the chain O is wound up and paid out. 
at aa are horizontal pulleys or guides between 
which chain o passes, as shown in Fig. 2. 
Guides or pulleys a are supported upon and 
braced by piece P, which rests at one end upon 
the upperend of the gudgeon of post H, (which 
also serves as an axle for the middle pulley, a,) 
and at its other end-upon the roof of the ma 
chine, leaving space between P and the roof for 
the arm G to swing through. By this arrange 
ment the chain oat all times runs to its proper 
groove on wheel O, and is nearly equally taut 
at any position to which the crane may be 
shifted. 
R is the rope or chain designed to pull the 
shovel or dipper upward and forward. In or 
der that this chain R may accommodate itself 
to the varying locations of the crane, it passes 
from its drum to two pulleys or guides, bb, on 
post H, thence between the guides b b, through 
post Ed to pulley or guide c, thence up through 
the center of the hollow mast A and out over 
pulley d to the usual connections and attach 
ments. Mast A is fixed upon the radial arms 
F and G, and does not swing with the crane. 
Hence the groove of the pulley c, in shifting 
the crane, is always toward the opening be 
tween pulleys bb, so that chain or rope R must 
run uniformly without rubbing or becoming 
entangled or unduly twisted. 
In order to accomplish the operation of 
forcing or digging the excavator D downward, 
and to control the longitudinal motion of the 
shovel-beam E, the same is provided with 
toothed rack e, which engages pinion e'. To 
overcome the difficulty of communicating mo 
tion to the rack and pinion e et upon a shift 
ing traveling swinging crane by means of 
the fixed stationary engines of the machine, I 
provide the crane with a small reversible en 
gine, S, which may be actuated by either 
steam or compressed air supplied through a 
flexible tube. Upon the shaft of engine S is 
a pinion, s, which engages a cog-wheel fixed 
on the same shaft with pinion e'. By means 
of this arrangement the excavator D may be 
raised or lowered with as much or little force 
or speed as may be required, in Wluatever di 
rection the crane may be swung Qr to what 
ever point the crane may be shifted upon its 
segmental track. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is- . 
. 
So 
55 
65 
 
. 
75 
. 
1. A railroad ditching. or excavating ma 
chine provided with a crane, A B C, and ex 
cavator ED, arranged to be shifted from side 
to side, or to the front of its car, substantially 
as shown and described, for the purposes set 
forth. 
2. In a railroad ditching or excavating ma- . 
chine, the horizontally-rotating radial arms or 
supports F and G, in combination with post 
H, crane A B C, and excavator D, substan 
tially as shown and described, for the purposes 
set forth. 
3. The combination of the radial arms F and 
G. and rack and pinionik with crane ABC. 
4. The combination and arrangement of 
post H, radial arms F and G, crane A B C, 
and the segmental tracks and supports J and 
M, substantially as shown and described, for 
the purposes set forth. 
5. The combination of radial arms G and 
F. and crane A B C with excavator D, sub 
stantially as shown and described, for the pur 
poses set forth. 
6. The combination of crane ABC and ex 
cavator D with radial arms F and G, post H, 
and segments J and M, substantially as shown 
and described, for the purposes set forth. 
7. The combination of the crane ABC with 
radial arms FG, post H, rack and pinion i k, 
segment M, sockets m, and pins in, substan 
tially as shown and described, for the pur 
poses set forth. 
8. The arrangement of pulleys or guides a 
at a, chain o, and swinging circle O, substan 
tially as shown and described, for the purpose 
set forth. 
9. The combination of circle O and chain o 
with pulleys or guides a. a. a. and support or 
brace P, substantially as shown and described, 
for the purpose set fortb. 
10. The combination of the radial arms F 
and G, circle O, and chain o with pulleys a a 
a and support or brace P, substantially as 
shown and described, for the purpose set forth. 
11. The combination of chain R, with pull 
leys or guides b b c d and the hollow mast A, 
substantially as shown and described, for the 
purpose set forth. 
12. In a railroad ditching or excavating ma 
chine, the combination of crane A B C, ar 
ranged to be shifted from side to side, or to the 
front of its car, with engine S, excavator D, 
and handle or beam E, substantially as shown 
and described, for the purposes set forth. 
13. In a railroad-ditching machine, the com 
bination of post H, horizontally-rotating arms 
FG, segmental supports J. M., crane A B C, 
excavator D, and handle or beam E with en 
gine S, substantially as shown and described, 
for the purposes set forth. 
HOSEA. T. STOCK. 
90 
95 
Ioo 
IOS 
IId 
II5 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK. L. GEDDEs, 
CLARENCE BROWN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273731.txt	B. A. HAR,WBY, 
N0, 273,731. 
Patented Mar, 13, 1883. 
 
UNITED STATES PATEN'T OFFICE. 
HAYWARD A. HARWEY, OF ORANGE, NEW JBRSEY. 
NUT AND BOLT. 
SPECTFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent, No. 278,781, dated. March 18, 1888. 
Application filed February 2, 188B. (No model.) 
5 
| O 
2 O 
I 5 
70 all ?0h0m ?t ?magy c0?ac?*ia :  
Be it known that I, HAYWARD A. HARWEY, 
of Orange, New Jersey, have in wented a cer* 
tain Improvement in Nuts and Bolts, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My in wention relates to the combination of 
a ScreW-bolt with a mut hawing a thread of uni 
form pitch and depth, which thread is trun 
cated in one portion of the mut and merges 
gradually into a V-thread or into a more mar 
roW, truncated thread in the remaining portion 
of the nut. 
In BuetterS Patelt of the United StatesNo. 
224.591, dated February 17, 1880, granted to 
mefor an improvement in lock-nuts, l described 
What I have called a ** Spiral-wedge? nut hav 
ing formed in it a truncated threa(l which 
gradually mergeS into a V-tbread, the grooves . 
of itS truncated thread being progressively 
deepened for the purpose of providing space 
to receive the metal of the bolt-thread, which, 
by the influence of the truncated thread, when 
the auti is applied, is forced laterally outward.' 
 In Fig. 2 of the drawingS of the said patent 
there iSSh0Wnapartially-finished Spiral-wedge 
25 
mut Which is ready for the final operation of 
hawing the groOweS of itS truncated thread 
deepened. It has a thread of uniform pitch, 
whigh at one end is truncated, and which, by 
haWing itS conWolutionS progressively mar 
rOW'ed at their apices, gradually merges into 
a V-thread ; but the thread  is of uniform 
depthThiS unfinished nut of my former patent 
' is applicable to my present in wention, which 
consists in the combination of a spiral-wedge 
nuthawinga thread of uniform depth and pitch 
With a ScreW-bolt the thread of which has the 
Same pitch aS that of the mut, but is in a pre 
Scribed degree of leSS area in Solid cross-sec 
tion than the transwerSe area of the grooves 
between the conwolutionS of the engaging or 
V thread of the nut, and is of the same or 
mearly the Same area in Solid croSS-Section as 
the tranSwerSe area of the grooves between 
the Wider truncated comwolutions of the nut 
The accompanying drawings, illustrating a 
mut and bolt embodying my invention, are as 
Figure 1 is an axial Section of a nut and a por 
tion of a b0lt, ShoWing the bolt partially en 
tered into the mut. Ifig.2 is a Siumilar Sectiou, 
showing the bolt fully entered into thie Iaut 
F'ig. 3 is an axial Section of a mut and a por 
tion of a bolt hawing a V-thread one of the 
sides of which is less steeply inclined than the 
other, showing Such bolt partially entered unto 
the mut. Fig.4 is a Section similar to fig. 8, 
except that it represents the bolt aS fully en 
tered into the mut. F'ig.  is an axial Section 
of anut and portion of a bolt, Showing the 
application. of my invention to a bolt hawing a 
truncated thread with a flat-bottomed grOOWe. 
The section d of the mut is provided with 
What I call the ** engaging threads,' which 
may be of V shape or of any other Suitable 
shape, so that this section of the mut Will fit 
the bolt .. with comparative looseneSS.'." The 
convolutions of the thread of the middle Sec- - 
tion, b, of the nut, by .the progressive widen 
ing of their apices, are gradually merged into 
the truncated thread c. The boltd is provided 
with a thread, , the convolutions of which are 
of less area in solid croSS-Section ' than the 
transwerse area of the grooweS between the 
convolutions of the engaging thread d of the 
nut. This difference in the Solid croSS-area of 
the bolt-thread may be effected aS Sh0Wn in 
F'igs. 1  and 2 of the drawingS, in which, as 
Will be seen, the bases of the convolutions of 
the bolt-thread, prior to the application of the 
mut, are of the same width as the Width of the 
spaces between the apices of the convolutions 
of the V -thread of' the nut ; but the apiceS of 
the conwolutions of the bolt-thread are flat 
tened, making what is known aS a ** trun 
cated? thread. There is thus left an unoccu 
pied space between theapex of the bolt-thread 
and the bottom of the V groowe of the engag 
ing thread d of the nut. 
Another mode of muaking the area of the 
bolt-thread in solid croSS-section less than the 
transwerse area, of the grooves between the 
V-threads of the mut, which may be adopted 
Without departing from my invention, is illuS 
trated in Figs. 8, and 4, in Which, as Wiill be 
Seen, one side of the bolt-thread has the Same 
angle as the side of the V-thread of the mult; 
while the other side of the bolt-thread is leS$ 
steeply inclined, thus leawing an unoccupied 
triangular space bounded by the leSS Steeply 
inclined side of the bolt-thread and a Small 
thread. 
follows: 
~ 
~ 
; 
 * 
3? 
35 
45.. 
5? 
? 
 
9? 
55 
75 
85 
95 
* 
~ 
~ 
~ 
~ 
posited." 
portion of one side and the whole of the other 
$de of the V-thread of the nut. As the mut 
~ is applied to the bolt the bases of the bolt 
thread. are progressively compressed by and 
'exert compreSSion upon the Spiral-wedge Sec 
tion b of the nut-thread, and the metal of both 
threads is thus displaced until, when the mut 
is fully applied, aS ShoWn in Fig.2, the threadS 
. . are so far transformed as to fill or nearly fill 
the grOowes in which they are respectively de 
F'ig. 5 illustrateS the manner in which my 
invention may be employed in commection with 
" a holt) having a, truncated ^ thread with. fiat 
bottomed grooves between its convolutions. 
| 
Referring to the Structures shown in IR'igS. 
1, 2, 8, and 4' of the draWings, it will be Seen 
that the engaging-threads d of the mut, "are 
pointed at their apices and . l1ave V-shaped 
' in the modification illustrated in I'ig., 5 .tble 
engaging threads of the nuf, instead of being 
V-threads, are truncated. The other portions 
of the' 1mut-thread are therefore made corre 
Spoudingly thicker in S0lid  cross-Section as  
compared With the threads of the mutS shown 
in I'igS. 1, 2, 8, and 4.  
'' 
In either of these modes of employing my 
in welution there is a mutuallabrasiora of the 
opposed SurfaceSof the wider truncated thread 
of the mut and the thread of the bolt, with the 
grooveS. 
? 
~ 
? 
~ 
2 O 
25 
 3? 
~ 
result that the mut acquireS Such a firm hold 
of the bolt that no jarring will release it, and 
it can only be unscrewed from the bolt by the 
application of a torsional Strain Substantially 
equal to that employed in Screwing it on the 
bolt in the first instance. 
What I claim as my invention. is- " 
'The mut and bolt mechanism herein Shown 
and described, Which consistSof a nut hawing 
formed in it a. Screw-thread of uniform' depth 
and pitch, the convolutions of Which at one 
'end, 0, are truncated, while in the middle Sec 
tion, b, of the nut, by the progressive marrow 
ing of the apices of the convolutions, the. 
thread gradually mergeS into either a V-thread 
or into a relatively marrower truncated thread, 
a suitable number of convolutionS of which, a, 
are employed as engaging threads for a Screw= 
bolt, the thread of whicia is, in a prescribed 
degree, of leSS area, in Solid croSS-Section than 
tlhe transwerSe area of the grooves between 
the engaging threads at of the nut, and is of 
the same or nearly the Same  area in Solid 
cross-Section - as the transwerse area of the 
grooweS between the truncated conwolutionS c 
of the nut-thread. 
II, A. HARWE}Y. 
35 
4? 
45 
5? 
55 
Witnesses : 
" M. IL. 'ADAMS, 
   ASA. FARR 
~ 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273831.txt	(No Model.) 
P. ELY. 
OIL CAN FAUCET, 
No. 273,831, 
Patented Mar. l3, 1883. 
 
Witwissus . 
twewyor. 
464.6/fees& 
\to\s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP ELY, OF CENTREVILLE, NEW JERSEY. 
O - CAN FAU CE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,831, dated March 18, 1883. 
Application filed December 19, 1882. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it, known that I, PHILIP ELY, of Cen 
treville, in the county of Hudson and State 
of New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Oil-Can Faucets; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full 
and exact description thereof. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
very simple, yet unusually effective, device to 
be soldered upon the tops of petroleum-cans 
and similar articles of tinware, and adapted 
to serve not only as a means for closing the 
same perfectly tight, but also for drawing the 
contents from the can. 
I attach the spout permanently to the screw 
cap of the device, said cap forming a revolv 
ing valve-chamber, so that these parts-the 
spout and valve-chamber-are turned together 
when the faucet is operated. This arrange 
ment does not present any difficulty in the use 
of the faucet, while it greatly simplifies the 
construction. The spout is arranged laterally 
upon the valve-chamber, so as to also form a 
convenient lever for turning said valve-cham 
ber and effecting a tight fit of the valve upon 
its seat. 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 
this specification, and represent what I con 
sider the best means of carrying out the in 
Vention. 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section, slow 
ing the device closed. Fig. 2 is a similar sec 
tion, showing the device open. Fig. 3 is a plan 
view, and Fig. 4 a modification. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A is the base of the device, slightly dished, 
so as to be conveniently soldered upon the top 
of a can, covering an opening provided there 
in. This base A is formed with a hole, a. 
B is a screw-threaded thimble or nipple, 
soldered upon the base A in line with the 
hole (t. 
C is a cap or revolving valve-chamber, be 
ing of larger diameter than the nipple B, so as 
to form an annular space between itself and 
the latter. This cap C carries a laterally-pro 
jecting spout, D, and engages with the nipple 
B by means of a correspondingly - threaded 
So Dutt or ring, c, soldered into the lower opening 
of said cap C. The annular space between the 
45 
4 O 
 
55 
7 o 
75 
nipple B and cap C is important, inasmuch as 
it allows the liberal passage of the oil from the 
mouth of the nipple B to the spout D. With 
out such annular space the opening of the 
spout D into the cap would be partially ob. 
structed by the body of the nipple B, particu 
larly when, by some mistake, the cap is not 
screwed up in opening to the highest extent 
allowed. The upper edge of the nipple B is 
smoothly finished to form a seat for the valve 
E. The latter may be cast of any suitable 
metal-Such as tin, zinc, lead, or an alloy of 
such metals; or it may be turned of brass or 
iron. This valve E is loose in the cap C, but 
it is held in contact with the top thereof by 
means of a spring, F, surrounding the nipple 
B, and abutting against said valve on one side 
and against the ring c on the other. This 
spring insures a liberal passage for the petro 
leum to be poured when the cap C is screwed 
upward, as shown in Fig. 2. The spherical 
bearing-surface of the loose valve E insures al 
ways a tight fit upon the seat, as it allows the 
valve to adjust itself when the valve-chamber 
C is screwed down. I believe, however, that 
with proper care in the manufacture good re 
sults may be obtained with a metallic valve 
fixed to the top of the cap C, thus dispensing 
with the spring. This modification is illus 
trated in Fig. 4. In this figure I have also 
shown a modified construction of the screw 
threads engaging the cap with the stationary 
part. Said threads are here formed in sheet 
metal stamped up and threaded in the ordi 
nary manner. In this case again an annular 
space between the nipple and cap is main 
tained for allowing the passage of the oil froin 
the mouth of the nipple to the spout. 
In the construction shown in Figs. 1 to 3 I 
prefer not to let the thread extend all the way 
up on the nipple B, leaving a smooth space, as 
shown at l; and in Fig. 4 I have shown a flange, 
l, thus preventing in either case the cap C 
from being completely unscrewed, and avoid. 
ing all possibility of its being lost. 
I am aware that caps analogous to mine have 
been provided on oil-cans; but they were dou 
ble or double-chambered, and required to be 
taken off and reversed in position in order to 
open and close. I esteem it an iroportant ad 
vantage that mine is single-chambered, and 
IOO 
273, S3 , 
a base, A, and nipple B, having a valve-seat, 
of a screw-cap, C, having a spout, D, and in 15 
closing a metallic valve, E, and spring F, all 
arranged and adapted to operate substantially 
as and for the purposes herein specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand, at New York city, New York, this 20 
15th day of December, 1882, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
c 
PEIILIP E.Y., 
Witnesses: 
WM. C. DEY, 
W. H. SPRINGMEYER, 
can be opened and closed by simply screwing 
and unscrewing to a sufficient extent without 
taking off the cap. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with a threaded nipple, 
B, of a single-clhambered cap. C c, having a 
permanently attached spout, D, and preserv 
ing an annular space between itself and the 
nipple B, all arranged as shown, so as to allow 
the complete closing and opening of the pas 
sage between the nipple and spout without re 
moval of the cap, as herein specified. 
2. In an oil-can faucet, the combination, with 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US273931.txt	(No Model.) 
C. AMAZEEN, 
LEATHER SKIWING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 273,931. 
Patented Mar. 13, 1883. 
 
 
 
2 22 2E 2 
565)a 
(5. 
 
 
 
  
WITNEE 
Oulad & Jaya. 
C-26. 
INVENTOR 
13-1t 
 
N. Peters. Poto-Lithographer, Washirgon. C. c. 
(No Model.) 
C. AMAZEEN. 
LEATHER SKIWING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 273,931. 
Patented Mar, 13, 1883. 
Fig 6. 
WITNESSEE 
F-7- 
INVENTOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTOPHER AMAZEEN, OF BOSTON, MASSACFUSETTS. 
EATHER - SK V N G MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 273,931, dated March 13, 1883. 
Application filed April 22, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
for the vertical adjustment of the revolving 
Be it known that I, CIRISTOPHER, AIA-cutter. 
ZEEN, of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and 
The shaft c of the cutter has a grooved or 
State of Massachusetts, a citizen of the United recessed collar, c', which is keyed to the shaft 
States, have invented a new and useful Im 
to revolve with it. Into this recess or groove 
provement in Leather-Skiving Machines, of the fork or yoke centers. 
This fork or yoke 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
is secured to the end of the link or arm c', 
description, reference being had to the accom 
which has suitable bearings, c', and which is 
panying drawings, forming a part of this speci. 
moved vertically by means of the lever c, piv. 
fication, in explaining its nature, in which 
oted at c, and the adjusting thumb-screw c 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the machine. 
and spring c' keep the end of the lever in 
Fig. 2 is an elevation and section upon the 
contact with the end of the thumb-screw. The 
dotted line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a horizon 
arm or link c' preferably is slotted, and the 
tal section and plan upon and below the dotted 
yoke is fastened thereto by means of a screw, 
line y) of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a plan view, rep 
c', so that it may be easily adjusted upon said 
resenting one position of the revolving cutter 
arm or link. As the recessed sleeve or grooved 
in relation to the feeding devices. Fig. 5 rep 
collar is fastened to the shaft, the movement 
resents the position of the same parts after 
of the yoke vertically will cause the shaft to 
the revolving cutter has been adjusted to com 
be moved vertically, and therefore the cutting 
pensate for wear. Fig. 6 is a view of the 
disk, and this movement is effected by means 
same parts in elevation, representing the re 
of the set-screw, and of course can be varied 
volving cutter at a considerable inclination in 
at will. The second adjustment, or that which 
relation to the feed-roll, and Fig. 7 represents 
relates to the varying of the inclination of the 
the same parts after the cutter has been ad 
cutting-disk in relation to the feed roll or 
justed to a less inclination in relation to the 
drum, is provided by means of the block F, 
feed-roll, these views (Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7) rep 
which carries the bearings f for the cutter. 
resenting the advantages of the adjustments 
shaft c. This block is fastened to the frame 
hereinafter described. 
F of the machine by means of the screws or 
This invention is an improvement upon that 
bolts if f', and the bolt f' passes through a 
described in my Letters Patent No. 200,682, 
slot, f, in the block or plate. By loosening 
dated February 26, 1878, and No. 220,906, 
the two bolts or screws f"f the block or 
dated October 28, 1879; and it consists in pro 
plate may be moved up or down upon the cen 
viding the revolving cutter with three adjust 
ter f to adjust the inclination of the cutting 
ments: first, a vertical adjustment in relation 
disk, and the right inclination being obtained 
to the feed roll or drum; second, an adjust 
the screws or bolts are tightened. The third 
ment for varying the inclination of the cutting 
adjustment, or that which is provided for the 
disk in relation to the feed roll or drum; and, 
purpose of compensating for the wear of the 
third, an adjustment whereby the cutting-disk 
revolving cutter, is accomplished by making 
as it Wears may be moved horizontally toward 
the block F in two parts, h. h", and hinging the 
the feed roll or drum, so that its cutting-edge 
part h to the parth', so that the part h may 
may always be upon a line substantially par 
be swung horizontally in relation to the frame 
allel with the axis of said roll or drum. 
of the machine. As above described, the part 
In the drawings, A is the feed roll or drum; 
his fastened to the frame of the machine by the 
B, the feed-disk; C, the revolving cutter, 
screw or bolt f". lt has, in addition, a set 
These parts are similar in construction to like 
screw, f', and in order to vary the position of 
parts described in said Patent No. 220,906, and 
the cutting-edge of the disk in relation to the 
are operated in the same manner. Therefore 
feed-roll A as the revolving cutter wears, the 
the specific means of operation need not be 
screw or bolt f" is loosened and the set-screw 
is tightened sufficiently to vary the position 
described here. 
E is the guide, and N the presser, and they 
of the parth in relation to the frame of the 
are like sii)ilar parts described in said patent. 
machine, the loosening of the screw f" allow 
I will first describe the manner of providing 
ing it to be swung away therefrom, and the 
95 
OO 
O 
25 J 
35 
So 
 
2 
273.93 
2. The combination of the revolving cutter 
C, its hinged supporting-block h, and means 
for moving the block laterally in relation to 
the frame F, and for locking it stationary in 
any desired positioi in relation thereto, where 
by the cutter as it is, worn may be moved hori 
Zontally in relation to the feeding devices, all 
substantially as and for the purposes described. 
3. The combination of a revolving cutter, C, 
its supporting-block adapted to be moved 
upon the center f' in adjusting the inclina 
tion of the cutter, and means for locking the 
block stationary in any desired position, all 
substantially as and for the purposes de 
Scribed. 
4. The combination of the revolving cutter 
C, its higed supporth h', substantially as de 
scribed, for providing the adjustment of said 
support with a movement upon the center f" 
and the portion h, with a lateral movement, 
and means for locking then in any desired po 
sition, whereby the cutter C may be both va 
ried in inclination and moved horizontally, 
all substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
CEIRISTOPEIER AMAZEEN. 
Witnesses: 
F. E. RAYMOND, 2d, 
WILLARD C. FOGG. 
35 
So 
tightening of the set-screw locking it firmly 
in its new position. The advantages of the 
adjustment to the range and wear of the ma 
chine are obvious, and need no further explana 
tion. 
It will be observed that the first-named ad 
justment provides means whereby work of 
any thickness may be skived; that the second 
adjustinent provides means whereby the width 
of the skived portion may be varied, and that 
the third adjustment provides means for set 
ting the knife in the proper position in rela 
tion to the feeding mechanism, so that it may 
be used as long as the blade remains thin 
enough for the purpose. 
I am aware that Patents No. 208,955, 
granted M. M. Clough, dated October 15, 1878, 
and No. 228,183, granted W. S. Fitzgerald, 
dated June 1, 1880, describe machines for 
skiving leather; but I do not claim any of the 
devices therein described, as they do not en 
brace the spirit of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. The combination of the revolving cutter 
C, the lever c, connected with the cutter-shaft, 
substantially as described, and the adjusting 
screw c", all substantially as and for the pur. 
poses set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274031.txt	(No Model.) 
 
E. L. REQUA. 
TABLET FOR TEACHING PENMANSHIP, 
No. 274,031. 
t 
Patented Mar. 13, 1883. 
Z'ez. 2 
7%, 7. 
 
 
2. 
WITWESSES 
%27az. oe 
64, a Yaman. M "7% weavy. 
IWVEMTOR 
Alla Zee Zeywa, 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELLA. LEE REQUA, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TABLET FOR TEACHING PENMANSHIP. 
: 
... SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 274,031, dated March 18, 1883. 
Application filed June 1, 1882. (No model.) 
shows a single sheet, A, as perforated with 
figures of different outlines for teaching the 
Fig. 2 shows a 
single sheet with an additional sheet or flap, 
B, secured thereto at one edge, so that a sheet 
of paper may readily beinterposed and clamped 
between them; or the sheet B may be written 
or marked upon, if desired. This sheet may 
have a composition or slate surface, if desired, 
so that the marks formed thereon can readily 
be erased. 
... I have shown the simple elementary forms 
of movements only, these constituting a part 
of a comprehensive system, the remaining 
cards of which need not differin form, save in 
the different forms of the openings cut therein. 
I do not broadly claim a perforated letter 
ing-tablet, as it has heretofore been proposed 
to employ such a device as a guide for form 
ing the lines and angles of letters by sliding it 
about in various positions, as this differs from 
my device, the object of which is not to form 
letters, but to constitute a guide for the pupil 
for training the muscles so as to acquire free 
dom of movement. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ELLALEEREQUA, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of the different movements desired. 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented certain new audi useful Improvements 
in Writing Cards or Tablets, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to train the 
muscles of the hand and arm of the pupil so 
as to accustom them to the free-hand move 
ments required in Writing rapidly, easily, and 
legibly. This end I attain by means of a perfo 
rated card or tablet, the edges of which perfo 
rations constitute the contour or outline of the 
movement desired, and form guides or shoul 
ders to direct the band of the pupil and the 
instrument used for tracing the figure desired. 
By rapidly tracing these outlines the ease of 
motion necessary to produce legibility and 
rapidity of writing is readily acquired. 
The subject-matter claimed is hereinafter 
specifically designated. 
In its simplest form the card consists of a 
single perforated sheet, which may be placed 
over a slate or paper and the outlines marked 
on the card copied thereon. The card may 
then be removed, and the figures thus made 
on the slate or paper may serve as copies for 
free-hand exercise. 
The pattern-card may be pmade of any de 
sired thickness and of well-known materials, 
and is capable of long-continued service. The 
patterns may be readily cut out of the card by 
suitable stamps, and may be thus manufac 
tured rapidly and with great economy. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
I claim as of my own invention 
The combination, substantially as hereinbe 
fore set forth, of the perforated guide or pat 
tern-sheet and the writing-tablet or flap se 
cured thereto. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 29th day of May, 1882. 
ELLA. LEE REQUA. 
Witnesses: 
M. AUGUSTA REQUA, 
GEO. F. WAIL. 
55 
O 
20 
25 
35 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274131.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 274,131. 
F. D. MoDOWELL, 
CARRIAGE SEAT, 
Patented Mar. 20, 1883. 
a 
w 
Y 
wo on\er 
Autov vs. 
M. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, o, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK D. McDOWELL, OF CLINTON, IOWA. 
CARRAGE SEAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 274,181, dated March 20, 1888. 
Application filed January 8, 1883. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK DAVID MC 
DoWELL,of Clinton, in the county of Clinton 
and State of Iowa, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Carriage-Seats; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
To same, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to spring-backs for ve 
hicle-seats, the object of the invention being 
I5 to ease the back from the sudden jar caused 
in riding over rough, uneven places; and the 
invention consists of a seat-back attached to 
spring-supports, removably connected with 
the seat, as hereinafter fully described. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a seat hav 
ing my improvements attached. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section through one of the spring-sup 
ports. Fig. 3 is a plan of one of the devices 
by which the spring-supports are held. Fig. 
25 4 is an enlarged sectional view on line at a of 
Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a side view of one of the hold-. 
ing devices detached. 
AA represent the spring-supports, to the 
upper portion of which the back B is attached. 
3o The spring-plates are bent at bb, forming the 
base parts c c, which are made thinner than 
the supports A, and these base parts are 
adapted to rest upon the botton of the seat 
C, so as to be covered with the seat-cushion. 
35 The forward portion of these parts c are nar 
rowed, forming shoulders at d, and the ends 
are curved upward, forming the hooks b', to 
2d 
be inserted under and to hold against the hold 
ing-bar D, provided with the bearing ends c', 
having holes to receive the screws by which 4o 
the bar is fastened to the seat. 
To adjust the back in place it is elevated so 
as to place the parts c in position shown in 
dotted lines in Fig. 2, and the hooked ends b' 
are inserted under the holding-bar D, and, the 45 
back being then lowered, the parts crest on 
the seat, and the hooks b' and the shoulders d 
hold the spring-supports in place. To remove 
the seat-back it is again elevated in position 
to allow the hooks to be withdrawn from un- 5o 
der the holding-bar. 
The spring-supports may be made of any 
suitable elastic material-preferably of the best 
spring-steel, and, being the proper size to give 
the requisite spring to the back, it is evident 55 
it will be relieved of the sudden jar caused to 
backs without springs in riding over rough, 
uneven places. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is- 
The combination, with the back B, attached 
to the spring-supports AA, having the parts 
e and the hooked ends b', of the holding-bar D, 
fastened to the seat C in position to receive 
and hold in place the spring-supports, sub- 65 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of two 
Witnesses. 
FRANK DAVID McDOWELL, 
6o 
Witnesses: 
W. W. SANBoRN, 
H., F. BOWERS. 
 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274231.txt	 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 274,231. 
 
J. K. STARLEY. 
TRICYCLE 
Patented Mar. 20, 1883. 
% 2 % 
2ZZ 2 
 
SN2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN K. STARLEY, OF COVENTRY, COUNTY OF WARWICK, ENGLAND, As. 
) OF SAME 
SIGNOR TO THE COVENTRY MACE INISTS COMPANY, (LIMITED 
PLACE, 
TRICYCLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 274,231, dated March 20, 1883. 
Application filed November 27, 1882. (No model.) 
Patented in England December 3, 1880, No. 5,046. 
* 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN KEMP STARLEY, 
of Coventry, in the county of Warwick, Eng. 
land, have invented certain Improvements in 
5 Tricycles, of which the following is a specifi 
Cation. 
This invention relates to a novel construc 
tion of tricycle in which the two traveling 
wheels are mounted on an open-fronted bow 
Io frame, and are both driven in such manner that 
one or other of them will be automatically set 
'free from the driving-power during the act of 
turning the vehicle. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
I5 shows in side elevation, and Fig. 2 in partial 
plan view, a tricycle with my invention ap 
plied thereto. 
In these figures it will be seen that I trans 
mit the motion of the crank or pedal shaft to 
20 each of the driving-wheels of the tricycle by a 
chain and chain-wheels, and that I provide a 
clutch arrangement for locking each traveling 
wheel to its chain-wheel. . 
The frame of the tricycle is made as an open 
25 front bow-frame, A, and spine A', permanently 
connected together in order to make them the 
same as one piece. The open-front bow-frame 
A is carried forward and downward toward the 
ground, and the ends of said frame are made 
3o with bearings for the crank-shaft B, and the 
stud-axles CC, for receiving the driving or 
traveling wheels D D, are also placed upon 
and secured to said bow-frame A, as shown. 
The spine A' is: continued out the required 
35 length, and to the end of it is attached the rear 
steering-wheel. The devices for operating the 
steering-wheel consist of an arm, h, and con. 
necting rod or linki, from the pivot of the fork 
k of said wheel to a rack and pinion atl, the 
4o latter being operated by a handle, m. The 
hubs of these wheels (see the enlarged views, 
Figs. 3) are cast with a sleeve-extension, d, in 
ward or toward the center of the machine, and 
they have an annular flange, d", on the same 
45 side of the hub, furnished with internal V 
shaped ratchet-teeth. 
Mounted loosely on the sleeve-extension of 
eachhubisachain-wheel, E, which is in line with 
65 
the chain-wheel F on the crank-shaft, and is 
connected there with by an endless driving 
chain, F. The boss of the chain-wheel E on 
the side adjacent to the hub is made eccentric, 
as at e, and upon this eccentric is mounted a 
clutch, G, formed by a disk, which is set with 
in the annular toothed flange of the hub, and 55 
is furnished with projecting teeth g at its op 
posite edges to fit the internal teeth of the all 
nular flange. This clutch is made so much 
smaller in diameter than the flange of the hub 
that it will only engage with its internal teeth 6o 
when the greatest eccentricity of the boss on 
which the disk is mounted is brought toward 
or in line with the clutch-teeth. Cast on one 
side of this clutch G is an annular flange, g', 
for receiving a metal elastic strap, H, which is 
carried by the frame, and may be made adjusta 
ble, its object being to put a slight friction on 
the flange of the clutch and prevent the clutch 
from rotating with the chain-wheel until it is . . 
locked into the ring of teeth on the hub of the 7o 
traveling wheel. When this takes place the 
flange g of the clutch will turn in the elastic 
strap H, the friction being too slight to inter 
fere with its rotary motion. On starting the 
vehicle both clutches will come automatically 
into action, and thus both traveling wheels 
will be driven; but on turning the vehicle, 
through the action of the steering-wheel I, (the 
forked stem of which is carried by the rear end 
of the frame,) the rotation of one or other of 8o 
the traveling wheels D will be arrested, and 
the clutch of the outer wheel will become dis 
engaged from the internal teeth on the hub 
through the overrunning of that wheel. 
place, and to restore it to an intermediate po 
sition, I cut a slot in the inner face of the clutch 
to receive a pin (see Figs. 3) which projects ra 
dially from the eccentrice, corresponding with 
its largest radius. In the slot on either side 9o 
of the pin lies a coiled spring, the pressure of 
which springs will, immediately the clutch is 
disengaged from the hub of the wheel D, by 
their balanced pressures, bring the clutch into 
the intermediate or non-acting position. 
An obvious modification of the clutch ar 
To prevent the clutch from working out of 85 
75 
So 
, 
95. 
. 
. 
 
2 
2g, 
23. 
rangement, where the tricycle is provided with 
a through - shaft for receiving the traveling 
wheels, is to fit this shaft (which in this case 
will be driven through a chain-wheel) with a 
5 pair of eccentrics to receive the clutches which 
take into the internal teeth of the hubs of the 
traveling wheels. In this modification the ac 
tion will be precisely similar to that above de 
scribed, for as the steering-wheel is turned, 
Io say, to the near side, the outer traveling wheel 
will overrun its clutch and travel freely in a 
curve around the near or driven wheel untila, 
straight course is recommenced. 
I am aware that a tricycle or velocipede has 
15 been made with an oblong frame open in the 
center and provided with projecting arms, to 
which the steering-wheel is attached. 
I am also aware that a tricycle-frame has 
been constructed of several pieces connected 
2O together and secured to the axles of the wheels, 
and that oine of these pieces forms the main 
axle of the machine and supports the seat and 
its springs, and to this axle the backbone is 
permanently connected. My invention differs 
25 from the foregoing, in that I employ an open 
front bow-frame made of one piece bent to 
shape, and to this the spine is permanently 
connected. 
Having now set forth the nature of my in 
3o vention and explained the manner of carrying 
the same into effect, I wish it to be understood 
that I claim 
35 
i. In a tricycle, an open-front bow-frame, A, 
of one piece, bent to shape, extending forward 
and downward, the axles of the driving-wheels 
and the bearings of the crank-shaft being at 
tached thereto, and the spine A' permanently 
connected to the same, in combination with 
the rear steering-wheel and its guiding mech 
anism, the two driving-wheels D, and a crank 
shaft and chain-wheels for operating the driv 
ing-wheels D, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a tricycle, an open-front bow-frame, A, 
of one piece, bent to shape, extending forward 
and downward, the axles of the driving-wheels 
and the bearings of the crank-shaft being at 
tached thereto, and the spine A' permanently 
connected to the same, in combination with 
the rear steering-wheel and its guiding mech 
anism, the two driving-wheels D, a crank-shaft, 
B, and pedals upon the same, the chain-wheels 
E F, chains F, clutch G, and mechanism, sub 
stantially as specified, for engaging or disen 
gaging the chain-wheels F and driving-wheels 
D, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
So 
55 
JOHN KEMP STARLEY. 
Witnesses: 
W. E. HARRIs, 
Notary Public, Birmingham. 
F. BAXTER, 
His clerk. 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274331.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
H. B. HOWARD. 
SPRING BED BOTTOM, 
Patented Mar. 20, 1883. 
MYNA 
?? 
???? 
?? 
?? 
?? 
??/7 
4%8% 
YN 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
42 
() 
$$$$$$888888888888888888888&&&&&&&&&- 
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$ 
3888888888888888888888888888888888888 
?XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
QX)<XXXXXXXXXXXXXX) 
?X{}K) 
xx&xxx& 
[XXXXX}{X}{QKXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX}{X}{X}{X}| | 
?? 
???? 
, 
?? 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 274,331. 
H. B. HOWARD. 
SPRING BED BOTTOM, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Mar. 20, 1883. 
in, FEERs, Photo-lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
H. B. HOWARD, 
SPRING BED BOTTOM, 
3 Sheets-Sheet: 3. 
Patented Mar. 20, 1883, 
(No Model.) 
No. 274331, 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE B. HOWARD, OF BELVIDERE, ILLINOIS. 
S PRING BED-BOTTOM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 274,381, dated March 20, 1883. 
Application filed January 13, 1883. (No model.) 
I. ? 
2 
?O 
35 
To all pho? ??, ??? concer?: 
Be it known that I, HoRACE B. How ARD, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Belvidere, in the county of Boone and 
State of Illinois, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Spring Bed-Bottoms, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of bed 
bottoms known as invalid-beds, in which the 
head portion is made vertically adjustable. 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
bed having a head portion, capable of an up 
ward-inclined adjustment to any probable re 
quired angle without materially changing the 
length of the mattress-bearing surface; and 
my invention is especially adapted to that 
class of bed-bottoms known as the woven 
wire mattress, in connection with which I 
have represented my improvements in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a woven-wire-mat 
tress bed-bottom. Fig. 2 is a plan view of a 
frame of my improved bed-bottom fitted to re 
ceive the woven-wire mattress. Fig. 3 is a 
lengthwise vertical section. Fig. 4 is a side 
elevation of the head portion, in which a por. 
tion of the side rail is broken out to reveal the 
outer face of the raised head. Fig. 5 is an end 
elevation with the head portion raised. Fig. 
6 is a section of one side cut on dotted linea. 
In the figures, A represents side bars or 
beams of a bed-bottom, rectangular in section 
and of proper length, suitably separated and 
fixed in their relative position at their head 
ends and central position by means of trans 
verse bars. B and C, securely fixed to their un 
der edges, and at their foot ends by means of 
a two-part end bar, D, securely fixed to their 
upper edges. This two-part end bar, D, re 
ceives the foot-end portion of the woven-wire 
mattress E between its contiguous edges, 
where it is securely fixed by firmly joining the 
two parts of the end bar to each other by 
nails, screws, or otherwise. 
At a are represented curved ratchet-bars 
provided with a series of holes, b, throughout 
their length, formed in a recess between the 
flanges c and d, which projectinward from the 
perforated plate. These curved ratchet-bars 
are fixed to the inner sarface of the side rails 
at a proper point on the head-end side of the 
center transverse bar, C. 
7 ? 
At F are represented the side beams of the 
At H is represented a two-part end bar, be. 55 
hinged head-end portion of the frame. 
tween the contiguous edges of which is fixed 
the head-end portion of the woven-wire mat 
tress E, in the same manner and for the same 
purpose that the foot end of the woven-wire 
mattress is fixed between the contiguous edges 6o 
of the two-part end bar, D. This two-part end 
bar, with the woven-wire mattress in place, is 
securely fixed to the upper surface of the head 
end portions of the side bars, F, of the hinged 
head-end portion of the frame. To the end 65 
portions of the side bars, F, on their under 
edges, are fixed transverse bars K and II, 
which, in connection with the sides and end 
bar above described, produce the adjustable 
head-end frame of the bed. 
At e are represented foot-plates provided 
with grooved socket end arm, h, adapted to re 
ceive and support a suitable detent to engage 
the holes in the curved ratchet-bars. These 
plates are fixed to the outsides of the lower 75 
ends of the side bars, F, and are provided with 
a roller, i, adapted to engage the inner flange, 
c, of the curved ratchet-bars. The rollers i rest 
and roll upon the ratchet-bars, by which means 
the head-frame is supported by the curved 8o 
plates or ratchet-bars, and are braced and al 
lowed to assume various angles with the bed 
bottom. 
At k are represented lever-detents of the "pe 
culiar form shown, having a hook-end detent, 85 
i, adapted to freely enter and move endwise in 
the grooved socket of the end arm, h, and are 
of sufficient length to extend through the 
socket and enter the holes b in the curved 
ratchet-bars. These lever-detents are fixed in go 
position on the inner face of the side bars, F, 
by means of a staple or staple-formed hasp, m, 
which spans the arm of the lever at its fulcrum 
angle in such a manner as to hold it in posi 
tion and permit it to vibrate on its fulcrum- 95 
support. The free ends of these detent-levers 
are provided with a spring, n, employed to hold 
the detent engaged with the ratched bar. 
At Nisrepresented a lever having a pivotal 
connection with the transverse bar I and rod- loo 
connections 0, with its inner end, and with the 
lever-detents in such a manner that a move 
ment of its free end will operate to disengage 
the detents from the holes in the curved ratch 
So 
 
2 
- 
87??38? 
S 
O 
IS 
2 o 
provements in connection with a Woven-wire 
mattress, to which it is especially adapted; but 
my improved adjustable head-frame is capable 
of use in connection with other forms of spring 
or flexible bed-bottom. 
et-bars. This lever N is supported on the up 
per side of the transverse bars K and I of the 
adjustable head-frame, and is supported to 
move laterally in a guide-loop, p, on bar K, 
and its free end extends over the head-end 
bar B of the main frame, which is provided 
I claim as my invention 
with a hook-catch, p', to receive the free. end 
1. The combination, with the main support. 
of the lever, and serves to hold the adjustable 
ing-frame provided with curved ratchet-bars, 
head-frame in a horizontal position when de 
of a head-supporting frame made vertically 
sired, and is a convenient means of fixing it in 
adjustable, said head-supporting frame having 
position for shipment. 
a pivotal and linked connection with the main 
At P are represented braces having one end 
frame by means of side braces, and its lower 
thereof pivot jointed to the outside of the side 
end having a detent - connection with the 
bars, and the otherends thereof having a pivot 
curved ratchet-bars, below its pivotal connec 
connection with the inner side of the head-end 
tion with the side braces, substantially as and 
portion of the side beams of the main frame. 
for the purpose set forth. 
The end portions of these braces P, which are 
2. The combination, with the adjustable 
connected with the side beams of the main 
head-frame, the side braces or links to which 
frame, are provided with a series of holes, by 
the head-frame is pivoted, and the curved 
means of which the braces may be shortened, 
ratchet-bars fixed to the main frame, of a stup 
which will carry the adjustable head-frame far 
porting-roller mounted upon the adjustable 
ther toward the head end of the main frame 
lead-frame, below its pivotal connection to the 
and Will increase the tension on the woven 
side braces, to engage the stationary curved 
wire mattress. 
ratchet-bars, for the purpose set forth. 
At S is represented a spirally-coiled wire 
3. The combination of the main frame, the 
looped into the coils of the woven-wire mat 
adjustable head-frame, the pivoted side-brace 
tress, on its under side, extending crosswise 
links, the stationary ratchet-bars, the rollers 
thereon in position to receive the chain-links 
secured to the lower end of the head-frame, 
t, or other suitable links, at proper intervals to 
to rest upon the ratchet-bars, and the detent 
connect the Woven-wire mattress to the center 
to engage the ratchets, substantially as set 
transverse bar, C, of the main frame. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that a 
4. The combination, with the main frame, 
movement of the free end of the lever N in 
and with a vertically-adjustable head-frame, of 
the direction indicated by the arrow will op - 
a flexible or, n elastic mattress, said mattress 
erate to disengage its free end from the hook 
having a suitable end connection with the 
catch, and by means of its rod-connections 
main frame and with the adjustable head 
with the lever-detents will disengage the hook 
frame, and a central transverse connection 
detent ends from their connection with the 
with the main frame at a point independent 
ratchet-bars, when the head-frame will be free 
of the connection of the main and head frames, 
and can be raised to any angle within the 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
limits of the devices, and when the head-frame 
5. The combination, with the spring-actu 
is raised to the angle or position desired, by 
ated detents employed to engage the ratchet 
liberating the free end of the lever N the 
bars, of a lever to simultaneously disengage 
springs a will cause the hook-detent ends l of 
the spring-actuated detents, arranged upon 
the detent-levers to engage or enter the holes 
opposite sides of the frame, substantially as 
in the ratchet-bars and hold the head-frame in 
and for the purpose set forth. 
its elevated position. In this construction 
6. The combination; with the detent-operat 
and arrangement the curvature of the ratchet 
ing lever and main frame, of a catch-hook to 
bar and the proportionment of the parts are receive the free end of the lever to fix the ad 
such as to hold the tension of the woven-wire justable head-frame in a horizontal position, 1 O5 
mattress substantially the same at any angle for the purpose set forth. 
or point of elevation within the limits of the 
devices to which the head-frame may be ad 
justed. 
In the foregoing I have represented my im 
HORACE B, FOWARD. 
A. D. BEHEL, 
JACOB BEHIEL. 
Witnesses: 
85 
forth. 
- 
95 
IOO 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
??? 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274431.txt	(No Model.) 
G. WOLFF & M, WIESER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 274,431. 
REGISTERING TURNSTILE, 
Five... Patented Mar, 20, 1883. 
WITNESSES: 
c4. 9%44-l. 
2%-26G.22 
 
(i. 
INVENTOR 
keorce Wok, or 6 
3:33 
BY %r(4 
ATTORNEYS 
(No Model.) 
G., WOLFF & M, WESER 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 274,431, 
REGISTERING TURNSTIE, 
Patented Mar, 20, 1883, 
Fv, 
WITNESSES: 
24a2. CaA412. 
INVENTOR 
George Woss, or a 
vox. We ser, 
ATTORNEYS 
 
(No Model.) 
G., WOLFF & M. WIESER 
REGISTERING TURNSTILE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
No. 274,431. 
say, Patented Mar. 20, 1883. 
HH 
6 E 
22:- TOS H H i H 
Sl 
Sigri 
o 
 
22 
 
 
 
 
 
222222 
A 
% 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7% 2 2 2. 2 2 2 2. 2 2 2 2 2. 2 2 2 2 2 2s 
.C., a -3. 
WITNESSES: 
, 
22-64- 
; 
r 
 
 
 
V 
 
a E-6. 
2 
Z 
2 
2 
a. I E. 
NSS 
A 
C 
4 INVENTOR 
Georde Wolk, area 
" A 4,477, -2, 
is 
ATTORNEYS 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. washington. D. c. 
(No Model.) 
G., WOLFF & M, WIESER 
REGISTERING TURNSTIE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 274,431. 
Patented Mar. 20, 1883, 
 
 
 
 
s S 
2 
2 A 2 3S 
NSSNs 
  
  
  
 
9.3% 
3SN 
WITNESSES: 
seka. 0a 4-11. 
%20re Jo, cra. 
INVENTOR 
: 
; 
ATTORNEYS 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, pro. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE WOLFF AND MAX WIESER, OF NEW YORK, N. 
Y. 
REGISTERING-TURNSTLE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 274,481, dated March 20, 1883. 
Application filed November 18, 1SS2. 
(No model.) 
To all whom at may concern: 
Beit known that we, GEORGE WolPF, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and MAX WIESER, a 
citizen of Germany, both residing at New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Registering-Turnstiles, of which the follow. 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in turn stiles for registering purposes, 
the novel construction and operation of the 
apparatus being fully set forth in the follow 
ing specification. 
This invention is illustrated in the accompa 
nying drawings, in which Figure 1 is a plan 
or top view, partly in section, showing the in 
vention applied to a railway-station. Fig. 2 
is an inverted plan view. Fig. 3 is a longi. 
tudinal section of the railway-track. 
Fig. 4 is: 
a vertical cross-section on the line aca, Fig. 1. 
The remaining figures are detail views of parts 
hereinafter referred to. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
The letter. A designates a platform-as, for 
example, that of a railway-station-having its 
place of entrance provided with two stiles, B 
C, both arranged to act on a registering mech 
anism, as hereinafter described. These stiles 
are situated one above the other, and the 
lower member, B, which, for convenience, will 
be called the main stile, is higher than the 
upper or supplementary stile, C, while it is 
keyed, as at c, Fig. 4, to a hollow shaft, B', 
having fixed to its upper end a ratchet-wheel, 
B', (see Figs. 6, 9, and 14 to 17, inclusive), en 
gaging With a detent, 2. Said ratchet-wheel 
B is perforated with four (more or less) holes, 
it, concentric to each other, and the supple 
mentary stile C is provided with a longitudi. 
nally split or divided hub, C, having its 
branches adapted to enter said holes, the hub 
extending in an upward direction from the 
top cross-bar of the supplementary stile, and 
surrounding, but having a somewhat larger 
diameter than, the hollow shaft B. Said 
branches of the split hub C. embrace or clasp 
upon its edge a cam-wheel, D, which is ar. 
ranged loosely on the hollow shaft B, and 
fitted to a socket, D', in a plate forming the 
bottom of the register-case E, this cam-wheel 
being, moreover, arranged between and in en 
gagement with two spurs, t, (see Figs. 7 and 
14 to 17,) which project from an axial shaft, 
C, combined with the hollow shaft B', and 
which are fitted into a vertical slot, S, in the 
hollow shaft. From the perforated ratchet 
wheel B project downward four (more or less) 
bits or trip-pins, ', which are situated exterior 
of the split hub C and approximately in the 
circular plane of the toes or projections D* on 
the cam-wheel D, said spurs being equal in 
number to the bits. Both the hollow shaft B' 
and axial shaft C are capable of vertical 
movement, one independently of the other, 
and when either shaft is moved in that direc 
tion the spurst of the axial shaft travel in the 
slots of the hollow shaft. 
To each shaft B C is connected one end of 
an adjusting-lever, For F, (see Figs, 2 and 4,) 
the other end of which is connected to a hand 
rod, G or G', and which is hung to a bracket, 
q, beneath the station-platform, the hand-rods 
being arranged to extend up through the plat 
form, and being provided each with a return 
spring, p, while they are placed in such a position 
as to be easily accessible to the ticket agent or 
The springs 
other attendant at the station. 
p of the rods act on the shafts B C through 
the adjusting-levers FF with a tendency to 
draw the shafts downward and when the turn 
stiles are in normal positions the perforated 
ratchet-wheel B of the hollow shaft is brought 
down upon and engages by means of the holes 
at the branches of the split stile-hub C', as shown 
in Figs. 5, 14, and 17, while the cam-wheel D 
sinks into its receiving-socket D', due to the 
action of the spurs t of the axial shaft, and in 
this manner both stiles are locked. 
If the hollow shaft, B is raised by the appro 
priate hand-rod a sufficient distance to bring 
the ratchet-wheel B above and out of engage 
ment with the split hub C', as shown in Fig. 
16, the lower or main stile is free to turn, due 
to the release of the ratchet-wheel and the 
hollow shaft, while if the axial shaft C is 
raised far enough to bring the cam-wheel D 
out of its receiving-socket D', as shown in 
Fig. 17, the upper or supplementary stile is 
free to turn, due to the release of the cam 
wheel, and with it the split stile-hub. 
The main stile is adapted to turn independ 
ently of the supplementary stile, inasmuch 
as the hollow shaft B can be entirely set free 
without freeing the split stile-hub C'; but the 
O 
25 
35 
So 
55 . 
65. 
75 
90 
95 
ICC: 
g 
274,1431 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
SO 
55 
supplementary stile cannot be turned inde- of both gates should correspond to a half-fare. 
To fulfill this condition the register-lever O is 
pendently of the main stile, due to the fact 
arranged to move vertically on its pivot, and 
that it is necessary to raise the hollow shaft 
is provided with an ear, O", (see Figs. 5, 6, and 
in order to free the supplementary stile, where 
11) whereby it engages a vertical slide, I, the 
by the main stile becomes released. 
For the purpose of releasing both stiles, it 
latter having a hook, l, to receive such ear, so 
is only necessary to raise the axial shaft C by 
I that when this slide is drawn upward it car 
ries with it the register-lever, and by moving 
the appropriate hand-rod, as shown in Fig. 17, 
the cam-wheel being thus lifted out of its 
the slide a certain (distance the first arm of the 
lever is brought above the highest position of 
socket, and two stiles remaining connected to 
gether through the ratchet - Wheel and split 
the cam-wheel D, so that this wheel has no 
action on the lever, the bits of the ratchet 
hub. 
wheel, however, continuing their action. On 
When both stiles are turned in unison the 
the slide are marked two numbers, one above 
trip-pins 3' of the ratchet-wheel and the toes 
the other, indicating the different full fares, 
D of the cam-Wheel both act on Olle arm of a 
and the register-case E is provided with a hole 
register-lever, O, (see Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 12,) to 
or opening, n, through which either of said 
impart a vibrating motion to the lever, said 
numbers may be displayed. When the slide is 
pins and toes alternating with each other in 
set to display the number highest in position 
their said action, and the other an of the e 
(which indicates the highest fare) the register 
ver being connected with the registering mech 
lever O is brought to its lower or normal posi 
anism, the latter is actuated twice to each 
quarter-revolution of the stiles, whereas when 
tion, while when tine slide is set to expose the 
number lowest in position (which indicates the 
the main stile is turned without the upper 
reduced full fare) the register-lever is brought 
stile the trip-pins alone act on the register. 
to its upper position. 
lever, and the registering mechanism is actu 
In order to prevent the rotation of the stiles 
ated once to each quarter-revolution of the 
for the entrance of passengers during the time 
stile. 
In applying the apparatus to use the main 
a train is at the station, provision is made to 
automatically prevent the raising of the axial 
stile alone is released and allowed to turn 
when it is desired to register a half-fare, while 
and hollow shafts as follows: Beneath the Sta 
tion-platform is arranged a lever, J., (See Fig. 
both stiles are released and allowed to turn to 
2.) which is adapted to be brought entirely be 
gether when it is desired to register a full 
neath the shaft-adjusting level's FE-namely, 
fare, and, owing to the division of impulses 
produced by the revolution of one or of both 
those arms of such levers which Swing in all 
upward direction-so that the adjusting-levers 
stiles, the proper registry is made. 
The register-lever O is mounted on a verti 
and their connections can be locked by that 
means. To the opposite ends of this locking 
cal pivot, O', rising from the bottom of the 
legister-case, and it is provided on its second 
lever J are connected ropes or chains cle', which 
arm. With a stud, O', which projects upward 
extend over a pulley, l, and are joined to lever's 
J. J., respectively, one such lever being single 
therefrom and engages a sliding spring-pawl 
arm, EI, (see Figs. 5, 12, and 13,) by being fit. 
and the other double. Both these levers J J' 
are arranged along the track of the railroad, 
ted into a slot, o, in said arm. The pawl H' 
of the arm H engages a ratchet-wheel, H, 
one at or beyond either end of the station, in a 
proper position to be acted on by a passing 
whose shaft carries a tappet, EI, (see Fig. 13.) 
adapted to engage a second pawl-arm, H, 
train, and assuming that the train runs in the 
whose pawl gears into a ratchet-wheel, H', 
direction of the arrow shown in Fig. 3, it first 
having its shaft provided with a tappet to en 
displaces the track-lever J. and causes the latter 
gage a third pawl-arm, H, whose pawl meshes 
to act on the locking-lever J through the rope 
k in the proper manner to bring the locking 
into a ratchet-wheel, Ht, so that when a vi 
brating motion is imparted to the register-le 
lever beneath the adjusting-levers FF, while, 
yer O, as before stated, it acts on the first 
when after leaving the station the train reaches 
pawl-arm, E, and the latter in turn acts on the 
the track-lever J', it displaces the latter and 
ratchet-wheel H by means of its pawl H', to 
causes it to act on the locking-lever through 
impart thereto an intermittent revolving mo 
the rope l' in the proper manner to bring the 
locking-lever out of its locking position, either 
tion. Then When the ratchet-Wheel H has 
made a complete revolution its shaft acts on 
track-lever being brought back to a normal 
the second pawl-arm, H, by means of the tap 
position by the action of the other. 
In the place of exit of the station-platform 
pet H', and so on to the end of the train of 
gearing, whereby the desired registry is pro 
is arranged a stile, Q, whose shaft carries a 
duced. This registering mechanism, however, 
ratchet - wheel, Q, engaging with a pawl, i, 
whereby such stile is permitted to turn only in 
can be modified as circumstances or the views 
of Constructers may render expedient. 
one direction. 
When the apparatus is used in the stations 
What we claim as new, and desire to secure 
of elevated railroads or other places where the 
by Letters Patent, is 
fare during certain hours is reduced one-half 
1. The combination, substantially as herein. 
and half-fares are suspended, it is necessary 
before set forth, of the main stile, the vertically. 
that the amount registered in the revolution movable hollow shaft, the perforated ratchet. 
- 
90 
OO 
iOS 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
 
274,43 
3 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 30 
cally-movable register-lever engaging said in 
dicating-slide, the vertically-movable hollow 25 
shaft, the vertically-movable axial shaft, the 
main stile, the supplemental stile, the stile-lock 
ing and register-lever-actuating devices, and 
the registering mechanism. 
set forth, of the locking-lever J and track-le 
vers J J', connected to the locking-lever, with 
the adjusting - levers, the vertically-movable 
hollow shaft, the vertically-movable axial shaft, 
the main stile, the supplemental stile, the reg- 35 
ister-lever, the stile-locking and register-lever 
actuating devices, and the registering mechan 
1S. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in the presence of two subscribing 4o 
Witnesses. 
GEORGE WOLFF, 
MAX WIESER, 
Witnesses: 
W. EIAUFF, 
CHAS. WAHLERS. 
IO 
wheel on the hollow shaft, having the down 
wardly-projecting concentric bits, the supple 
mental stile, the split hub of the supplemental 
stile, having it branches adapted to engage the 
holes of the perforated ratchet-wheel, the cam 
wheel on the hollow shaft engaging the split 
stile-hub, the cam-wheel receiving-socket, the 
vertically - movable axial shaft, having the 
spurs which project through the vertical slot. 
in the hollow shaft and carry the cam-wheel, 
the vibrating register-lever, and the register 
ing mechanism. 
2. The combination, substantially asset forth, 
of the adjusting-levers and the hand-rods, hav 
ing return-springs, with the vertically-movable 
axial shaft, the main stile, the register-lever, 
the stile-locking and register-lever-actuating 
devices, and the registering mechanism. 
3. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the vertical indicating-slide 
having the two numbers, one above the other, 
and the register-case having the display-open 
ing for either of said numbers, with the verti. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274531.txt	No. 274,531, 
Patented Mar, 27, 1883. 
POST HOLE. DIGGER, 
 
WITWESSES 
IWWEWTOI 
t 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. SWITZER, OF COMANCHE, TEXAS. 
Post-HoLE DIGGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 274,531, dated March 27, 1883. 
Application filed December 2, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAAI C. SWITZER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Co 
in anche, in the county of Comanche and State 
of Texas, have invented a new and useful Post 
Hole Digger, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the accompa 
inying drawings. 
This invention relates to post-hole diggers; 
and it consists in certain improvements in the 
construction of the same having for their ob 
ject to produce a convenient, serviceable, and 
inexpensive tool, as will be hereinafter fully 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claim. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure I is 
a perspective view. Fig.2 is a perspective view 
of the head detached, and Fig. 3 is a horizon 
tal sectional view. 
The same letters refer to the same parts in 
all the figures. 
A represents the lead of my improved tool, 
which consists, mainly, of a ring or circular 
casting, B, of soft malleable iron, the upper 
edge of which has three arms, C, formed in 
tegrally therewith, and extending inwardly, 
uuiting at the center, so as to form a shank, D. 
E is a shaft consisting of an ordinary gas 
pipe connected to shank D by a sleeve or coup 
ling, F, and having at its upper end a top or 
casting, G, formed with an eye, H, in which is 
fitted the transverse cross-bar or handle I, by 
which the device is in practice manipulated. 
The ring or casting B is provided in its outer 
surface with a series of, say, three vertical 
dovetailed recesses or grooves, J, to receive 
the upper ends of the cutting-blades K, which 
are secured in place by means of bolts Luy the 
45 
heads of which,M, are countersuluk in and flush 
with the outer sides of said blades, while the 
nuts N are tightened upon the inner side of 
the ring B. 
The blades or cutters K, which are segmental 
in horizontal cross-section, are extended down 
wardly for a suitable listance, forming a basket, 
O. The edges of the blades are sharpened, and 
their lower ends are turned or carvel slightly 
spirally in an inward direction until their points 
nearly meet. 
The operation of my invention will be read 
ily understood. By placing the digger in an 
upright position upon the ground and giving 
it, by means of the handle I, a rotary unove 
ment, it is caused to dig or bore a hole, the 
dirt falling into the basket-like receptacle 
formed by the blades, by which it may be read 
ily lifted out. The construction of the device 
is simple, and the blades may be readily re 
moved for sharpening. 
I claim as my invention 
In a post-hole digger, the combinatio of the 
head, consisting of a ring having vertical dove 
tailed recesses to receive the blades or cutters, 
and provided with converging arms uniting so 
as to form a shank, a shaft connected to said 
shank, a top piece having a transverse open 
ing or eye, and a cross-bar or handle fitted in 
the latter, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses, 
WILLIAM C. SWITZER, 
Witnesses: - 
. 
MILTON BROWN, 
R. E. CARR, 
IS 
2 a 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274631.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MILLER. 
PIPE CUTTER. 
No. 274,631. 
 
Patented Mar, 27, 1883, 
 
 
IITV2 (FOP: 
-1,4- 
22, 22. 
, reitas, Photo-thographer, Washiration, E. C. 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN MILLER, OF CAMBRIDGEPORT, MASSACHUSETTS, 
PIPE CUTTE. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 274,681, dated March 27, 1883. 
Application filed October 12, 1882. (No mode.) 
purpose that I make the side projections, e'e', 
To all whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, JoHN MILLER, a citizen cylindrical, so that the jaw e may be allowed 
of the United States, residing at Cambridge to oscillate on the axis of said cylindrical pro 
port, in the county of Middlesex and State of jections, so as to automatically adjust itself to 
the irregularity of the surface of the pipe that 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pipe-Cutters; and I 
is being cut. To enable the said jaw e to au 
tomatically adjust itself to the surface of the 
do hereby declare that the same are fully de 
pipe operated tipon, it is also essential that the 
scribed in the following specification and illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings. 
upper end of the screw d should be universally 
jointed to the jaw e, and therefore I make on 
This invention relates to improvements in 
pipe-cutters, and it is carried out as follows, 
the under side of it a concave recess, e', some 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
what larger in diameter than the convex head 
d' of the screw d, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, 
ings, in which- 
w 
ligure 1. represents a front elevation of the said head d' being provided with an annular 
groove, d, into which fits loosely the set 
invention, and Fig. 2 represents a longitudi 
nal section. Fig. 3 represents a cross-section 
screw e?', that is screwed through one side of 
the jaw e, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3, and in 
on the line A B shown in Fig. 1. 
this manner. by the universal joint at the junc 
Similar letters refer to similar parts wher 
ever they occur on the different parts of the 
tion of the jaw e, combined with the circular 
projections e'e' on the adjastable jaw e, work 
drawings. 
a is the wise, having loosely journaled to it 
ing in the grooves a', the jaw e is allowed to 
adjust itself automatically to the surface of the 
at its upper curved portion the cutter-wheel b, 
pipe that is being cut. 
that is free to rotate on the pin b', as shown. 
The pipe-cutter may be turned in either di 
The lower ends, at a', of the vise a are provided 
rection, to the right or left, for cutting pipes 
with recesses af' a' for the reception of the de 
to equal advantage. 
tachable nut c, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
d is the adjustable pressure-screw, working 
What I wish to secure by Letters Patent and 
within the nute, which screw is extended out 
claim is 
The herein-described improved pipe-cutter, 
ward as a rod or lever, d, provided in its ex 
consisting of the vise a, with its inner groove 
treme end with a cross-bar or handle, d", by 
a', loosely-revolving cutter-wheel b, and nut 
means of which the pressure-screw is operated. 
c, in combination with the pressure-screw did 
On the interior of the wise a is a groove, a', 
d', the adjustable jaw e, with its cylindrical 
that serves as a guide for the cylindrical pro 
side projections, e'e', and universal-joint con 
jections et e of the adjustable jaw e, as shown 
in Figs. 2 and 3. The pipes to be cut being 
nection to the screw d, as and for the purpose 
often irregular on their exterior surfaces and 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
not perfectly cylindrical, it is essential that the 
adjustable jaw e should be allowed to freely 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
adjust itself to such irregularities to prevent 
the cutter-wheelb from cutting a spiral groove 
on the outside of the pipe and to insure a true 
and continuous circular cut, and it is for this 
ALBAN ANDREN, 
HENRY CHADBOURN. 
JOEN MILLER, 
Witnesses: 
45 
So 
55 
75 
O 
25 
35 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274731.txt	(No Model.) 
i 
No. 274,731. 
J. B. DEEDS, 
LAMP OR TORCH. 
Patented Mar. 27, 1883. 
WITNESSES 
2/66?------, 
y 
a 6-2 
 
N. perERs. photo-lithograph washington, D.C. 
 
 
. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. DEEDS, 
OF TERRE HAUTE, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
WILLIAM MACK, OF SAME PLACE. 
LAMP OR TORCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 274,731, dated March 27, 1883. 
- 
Application filed January 17, 1883. (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
to engage the wick, thus enabling it to be 
Beit known that I, JoHN B.DEEDs, of Terre raised when the handle is pushed upward. 
Haute, in the county of Vigo and State of In- The solid part of its length works between the 
diana, have invented certain new and useful 
neck B and the inner neck, A', while its hollow 
5 Improvements in Lamps or Torches; and I do 
portion, extending over the top of the throat 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
A', works inside and adjacent to the wick. 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
The object of having a portion of the wick 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
raiser hollow is for the purpose of providing 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
means of ventilation for the lamp, which here 
to reference being had to the accompanying draw- tofore has been done by having an opening in 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked the lid or top, which causes a leakage of its 
thereon, which form part of this specification. contents and other disadvantages. The way 
This invention consists in improvements in 
it performs this function is by having a hole, c', 
that class of inventions known as miners' 
in the end, which extends a short way into the 
15 lamps, generally used by miners, engineers, 
lamp, and another hole, c', in the top, where 
and mechanics; and it has for its object to pro 
it is bent around, which communicates with 
vide the neck or spout of the lamp with an 
the external air. Any foul vapor that may 
improved device for raising or adjusting the 
arise therein will be permitted to escape. 
height of the wick therein, the said device 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
2 o adapted by its construction also to serve as a 
When it is desired to raise the wick, by taking 
hold of the small handlea, and pushing it up 
means of ventilation to the lamp or torch. 
In the drawings, Figure 1. represents a per 
ward the projecting teeth on the hollow por 
spective view of the lamp or torch. Fig. 2 is a 
tion penetrate slightly into the wick and raise. 
front view with the neck or spout in section, 
it, and by sliding the handle down it does not 
25 showing the arrangement thereof and the man 
draw the wick back again, owing to the pro 
ner of fixing therein the raising device. Fig. 3 
jections extending upward. Thus in this way 
is a perspective view of the wick-raiser, and 
the hollow end can always be made to extend 
Fig. 4 is a vertical sectional view thereof, both 
a small distance into the lamp, and from its 
of which show the air or vent passage. 
construction facilitate the ventilation of the 
Referring more particularly to the drawings, 
lamp, as described. 
A designates the lamp. 
The wick-raising device can be done up in 
packages for transportation separate from the 
B is the spout or neck, and C the wick. 
A is an inner neck or spout arranged with 
lamp, as an article of trade and commerce. 
in the outer one, B, and is joined or soldered 
I am aware that it is not new to provide the 
35 thereto at the inner end, where it is fitted to 
spout of a miner's lamp or a torch with means 
the lamp. 
for raising the wick, and such do not broadly 
b is the lid, hinged to the lamp in the ordi 
claim; but it is thought that a wick-raiser as 
nary Way. 
herein shown, whereby the additional function 
of ventilation for the lamp is performed, is 
D is the wick-raiser, which works in an elon 
4o gated slot, e, in the spout. This wick-raiseris 
new; and 
formed of a metallic piece made hollow for a 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
portion of its length, and its solid end beint 
ters Patent, is- 
around and brought down the side of the hol 
1. In a miner's lamp, a wick-raiser having 
low portion, as shown, and then bent at right 
vent-tubes, as described, which serves the pur 
45 angles, so as to form a handle, a, whereby it 
pose of raising the wick and as a vent for the 
can be manipulated. The outer surface of the 
lamp, substantially as described. 
hollow portion is made with lateral points c, 
2. A lamp or torch provided with a wick 
raiser made hollow for a portion of its length, 95 
which are bent slightly out and upward, so as 
- 
9o 
75 
: 
274,23. 
and provided with openings at the top and 
bottom thereof, as described, the outer surface my own Iaffix my signature in presence of two Io 
of said hollow portion having lateral teeth for witnesses. 
engaging with the wick, substantially as de 
scribed. , 
3. A wick-raiser for lamps and torches, pro- 
vided with a vent-tube for giving vent to the 
lamp, as an article of manufacture, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
JOHN B. DEEDS, 
Witnesses: 
FRED A. ROSS, 
W. R. LAMPTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274831.txt	(No Model.) 
J. SHANNON. 
SASH CORD GUIDE, 
No. 274,831, 
. 
Patented Mar. 27, 1883. 
 
WITWESSES 
7. ; VTOR 
Attorneis / 
N. FEERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
s 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES SHANNON, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRIOT OF COLUMBIA. 
SASH-coRD GUIDE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 274,831, dated March 27, 1883. 
Application filed September 12, 1882. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES SHANNON, of the 
city of Washington, in the District of Colum 
bia, have invented certain new and useful In 
provements in Guides for Sash and other Cords, 
of which the following is a specification. 
It is well known that frequently, by reason 
of improper arrangement relatively of the size 
of the weight box or channel and the weight 
itself, and of the limit of projection within the 
box of the periphery of the sheave or pulley, 
a side of the weight will strike against a side 
of the box, producing unnecessary noise and 
Wea. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
guide for cords of the description named which 
will admit of the necessary adjustment whereby 
the weight and box may be kept from contact. 
The invention is applicable to window-sash, 
dumb-waiters, elevators, and in any relation 
in which a weight traverses a box or channel. 
The drawing represents a. side view of the 
invention in its preferred form. 
A is the support for the sheave or pulley B. 
The pin or axis a rests in holes or bearings 
drilled or formed in the sides or brackets of 
the support. In order to permit of the lateral 
a justment of the sheave, additional holes, bb', 
are placed at either side of the central hole, to 
which the axis may be transferred when the 
distance of projection of the sheave within the 
box is to be altered, to cause a side of the 
weight to clear a side of the box. 
The number 
FO 
x - 
25 
30 
- 
of the pin-holes. may be varied, and I do not 
limit my invention to any particular number. 35 
It is apparent that vertical or other slots may 
be used, instead of holes, as bearings for the 
pin or axis, and that these may be used with 
out a departure from my invention, the princi 
ple of which consists in providing a support to 
with bearings which admit of lateral adjust 
ment of the sheave. 
This invention is found to supply a want in 
the trade, as it is not ordinarily practicable to 
make the size of the box, the size of the weight, 4.5 
and the limit of projection of the sheave within 
the box agree with such accuracy as to prevent 
the contact of the box and weight. My inven 
tion prevents the necessity of accurate meas 
urement of the parts, and in practical use is 5o 
found convenient and to cheapen the work of 
arranging the weights. 
I claim as my invention 
A guide for sash or other cords, consisting 
of a sheave, removable axis, and a support, 55 
with a series of bearings, to any one of which 
the axis may be adjusted, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have here unto sub 
scribed my name in the presence of two wit. 6o 
nesses. . 
. 
JAMES SHANNON. 
Witnesses: 
- 
GEORGE H. HoWARD, 
W. T. COLE, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US274931.txt	W. GAUSE, 
REAPING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1883. 
s 
N 
R. 
. 
i 
t 
S 
& 
(No Model.) 
No. 274,931. 
s 
gr 
in 
R 
N. 
NN s 
N 
N 
w 
S 
N 
S 
N 
S 
Y 
S S 
N. n 
N 
a. 
y 
w 
N 
a 
r 
m 
R 
n C 
s 
NS 
22Ea 
St S 
--- 
.. 
. 
E. 
t 
N 
nA. 
s 
. 
t 
f 
i 
t 
J 
z. g 
24 
22 
 
N. peers, Polotithographer. Washington, D.C. 
Aitorney 
(No Model.) 
W. GAUSE. 
REAPING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet. 2. 
No. 274,931, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1883. 
is N 
s ; 
re- 
4% 
N 
- 
N 
h 
WS 
n 
N 
| 
" r 
N 
Rya?. HAR 
R - 
O 
s t 
WW 
s s 
R 
s 
is \'s 
i. es 
& 
as 
s 
N 
MS 
S 
NI S. 
Ns 
y 
- 
& 
72222-eyes 
as y 
s 
Z722ree-ee 
62222-22 62, 
 
(No Model.) 
.W. GAUSE. 
REAPING MACHINE. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 274,931, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1883. 
 
 
zx6 
se 
 
 
 
E. I s 28's 
NSNVIII/7Z% 
sease 3 
E. e 
Esso 
R. s SS 
S. 
IWVEWTOR. 
72%22r. 44-ce. 
Attorney 
 
N, Peters. Photo-Lithographer, withington. . c. 
 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM GAUSE, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA. 
REAPNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 274,931, dated April 8, 1883. 
- 
- Application filed December 11, 1882, (No model.) 
O 
25 
is 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM GAUSE, of Fort 
Wayne, county of Allen, and State of Indiana, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Reaping-Machines, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
making part of this specification. 
My improvement relates to a novel construc 
tion and arrangement of the reeling, raking, 
and gaveling mechanisms, whereby the grain 
is drawn in to the cutters, carried inward and 
delivered to the gavel-forming and gavel-dis 
charging devices in a standing position; to the 
means for discharging the gavels or bundles, 
and to certain details of construction and ar 
rangement of parts of the machine, as herein. 
after explained. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a front elevation of a reaping-machine 
with my improvement applied. Fig. 2 is a plan 
or top view of the same. Fig. 3 is a bottom 
view of a portion of the same, and Fig. 4 is a 
rear elevation of the gaveling-platform and its 
attachments. 
A represents the main frame of the machine, 
consisting of a bar or plate of metal set upon 
edge, and with its ends bent at right angles 
to the body portion, which is arranged on the 
stubble side of the wheel B in a longitudinal 
plane parallel with the outerface of said wheel, 
the bent ends a and a crossing the path of the 
wheel, in front and rear thereof, as shown. The 
wheel B is made fast on its axle, and the latter 
rotates in a sleeve-bearing, b, formed upon or 
secured to the longitudinal portion of the frame 
bar, at or near the center of its length. The 
wheel B is provided on its inner face with a 
bevel-geared rim, B', with which a bevel 
pinion, B, engages, said pinion being secured 
to a longitudinal shaft, C, having bearings in 
the bent ends a and at of the frame-bar A, and 
provided on its forward end with a crank wrist 
or disk, from which motion is imparted to the 
sickle-bar. The forward transverse arm, a, of 
the frame extends beyond the bearings for the 
shaft C, and is bent or twisted at a from a 
vertical position, or one on edge, to a horizon 
tal position, its extended horizontal end a 
So forming a support for or point of attachment 
to the frame of the finger-bar D. To the in 
ner end of the finger-bar is secured a small 
35 
30 
4O 
45 
, 
rectangular platform, E, arranged in rear of 
said bar, and serving as the gaveling-platform, 
and as a support for the gaveling and gavel-55 
discharging mechanism, the outeror grain side 
of said platform being secured to a short arm 
or bar, E', rigidly secured at its forward end 
to the finger-bar. This arm or bar E may, if 
preferred, form a heel-extension of the outer 6o 
shoe, and serves, in connection with a heel-ex 
tension of the outer shoe or divider, F, and 
finger-bar D, to form a support for the raking 
and reeling apparatus, which will now be de 
scribed. . 
G. and G' represent two uprights arranged 
perpendicularly to the upper face of the finger 
bar, and rigidly secured at their lower ends to 
said, bar near its rear edge. To the upper end 
of these uprights G and G' is rigidly secured to 
a transverse bar, H, arranged in a horizontal 
plane above and parallel with the finger-bar, 
with its ends projecting beyond the supports 
G. and G7. 
65 
. 
. 
I is an uprightshaft mounted in bearings, one 75 
at its lower end in the arm E and another at 
its upper end in the inner end of the bar H, 
and provided near said bearings with sprock 
et-wheels I and l. The heel end of the outer 
shoe or divider, F, is provided with a short 8o 
upright stub-axle on which a sprocket-wheel 
is mounted loosely, and the outer end of bar 
His provided with a short pendent axle, f, 
arranged in line with said upright axle on the 
divider, and upon which is similarly mounted 85 
a sprocket-wheel, I. Endless chains J and J 
connect the sprocket-wheels on the shaft I 
with the sprocket-wheels on the short shafts 
above named. The shaft I extends below its 
lower bearing in the bar E', and is provided go 
with a bevel-gear, B, meshing with a similar 
bevel-gear, B, on a longitudinal shaft, C', 
mounted in bearings in pendent lugs on the 
arm E. This shaft is provided with a sprock 
et-wheel, C, near the center of its length, and 95 
motion is imparted to the shaft C', and thence 
to shaft I, through an endless chain connect 
ing the sprocket-wheel C with a similar wheel, 
C, on the shaft C. The chains J and J are 
provided on their outer faces with short ver- loo 
tical sleeves, forming bearings for upright rake 
heads or shafts i, of which there may be any 
desired number, the sleeve-bearings of the up 
per sprocket - chain being arranged directly 
2 
274,93 
25 
Cy 
IS 
over those of the lower one, the shafts icon 
necting the chains, as shown. 
The shafts j 
are provided each with a series of teeth, j', 
projecting obliquely forward and inward, (when 
on the forward portion of the chains and mov 
ing inward toward the machine-frame,) and 
by preference made, each lower tooth a little 
longer than the one immediately above it, and 
also bent or curved to form a more acute an 
gle with the carrying-chain, so as to have its 
point or end in advance of or projected be 
yond the tooth or teeth above it, as by this 
arrangement the butts of the grain are first 
seized by the lower fingers or teeth and are 
drawn in to the cutters, and this action serves 
at the same time to draw the upper ends of 
the strawinward and to lay them in the shorter 
upper fingers. The upper ends of the rake 
heads j are extended beyond the chain J, and 
are bent at a right angle, forming on each 
head or shaft a horizontal crank-arm, f', and 
the extreme end of this arm is bent downward 
at a right angle to the arm, and is provided 
with a friction-roller, j, for a purpose which 
will be explained. 
The bar H is provided on its forward edge 
with an upright lip or flange, H', against which 
the rollers f rest when the rakes are moving 
inward, and which serves to hold the rake 
teeth in the position above described during 
such inward operative movement. This lip is 
bent or deflected rearwardly over the sprocket 
wheel I, at its inner end, h, for permitting the 
rake-heads to move around said wheel, and at 
35 the same time to hold the teeth it up to their 
work, and a similar deflection, h', at the outer 
end serves to assist in forcing the roller out 
ward in advance of the rake-head in passing 
said end. A bar, H, is located immediately 
in front of the flange H', supported by the for. 
Ward pendent arms of angular or U-shaped 
(inverted) brackets h h, the rear arms of 
which are secured to the rearface of the flange 
or lip H. The bar His sufficiently removed 
from the flange H' to permit the free passage 
of the rollers between them, and serves not 
only to hold the stalks of grain free from the 
driving-chain, but also to prevent the weight 
of the grain from drawing the upper end of 
the rake-heads forward out of proper working 
position. Similar strips, H'E', arranged be. 
low the bar H, are secured at their outer ends 
to a standard, F, on the outer shoe or divider, 
and extending thence in front of the path of 
the rake-heads, are curved at the inner end of 
such path to conform thereto, to a point where 
the rake-heads begin their outward or return 
movement, where they are deflected rearward 
. from said path and are secured to a standard, 
E, secured to the outer edge of the platform 
E, near its rear outer corner. By this arrange 
ment of the strips or bars H'H' they serve, in 
connection with the bar H', to uphold the grain 
in a standing position against the action of 
the rake-teeth, to clear or strip the latter as 
they start upon their outward or return move. 
ment, and to assist in forming the grain into 
45 
55 
4 O 
gavels, and in holding the grain in an upright 
position until the gavel is completed and ready 
to be discharged or bound. 
The finger-bar D has a strip or plate, D', 
secured to its rear edge, which serves to pro 
tect the lower sprocket chain from the stubble 
and other obstructions, and also at its outer 
end as a support for an angle-iron, D', the 
upright portion or lipe of which serves, as the 
rake-heads approach the end of their outward 
or return movement, to rock the teeth back 
ward, and, in connection with the deflection of 
the lip or flange H', to rock the crank-arms; 
into proper position for holding the rake-teeth 
up to their work on their inward movement, as 
explained. 
To the inner end of the finger-bar, or to the 
end of the arma, to which said bar is con 
nected, is secured an upright, L, provided with 
a series of curved fingers, ll, arranged one 
over another and rigidly secured at one end to 
These fingers project forward 
said standard. 
from the standard and are curved outward and 
rearward, giving them each the form of an ir 
regular U or loop, the arms l l of which are 
elongated and extend obliquely across the plat 
form, terminating near the rear ends of the 
strips H E', and forming yielding arms, be 
tween which and the strips H E the grain is 
left standing in an upright position, the grain 
as it is brought in by the rake-teeth being grad 
ually crowded back on a platform between said 
strips and yielding fingers. The upright L is 
by preference provided with a pivot extending 
through its supporting-bar, and provided with 
a screw-thread and nut on its lower end for 
permitting the adjustment of the upright oil 
such pivot, and thereby adjusting the angle 
of relation of the fingers to the strips II: H', 
as may be required to adapt them to the con 
dition of the grain being operated upon, but 
any suitable means may be employed for ef. 
fecting such adjustment. 
The platform E is provided near its rear in 
ner corner with bearings for an upright shaft, 
M, the upper end of which is squared to adapt 
it to receive and actuate a grain-receiving and 
gavel-discharging device, N. This device con 
sists of a quadrant, or, rather, of a hub,N', hav. 
ing a perforation conforming to the shape of 
the shaft M in horizontal section, and fitting 
said shaft, and provided with three arms, in n 
, the two first-named being connected at 
their outer end by a section of a rim curved in 
the arc of a circle of which the shaft M is the 
center, giving said part of the device a skele 
ton-quadrant form, with the radial arm a dis 
tinct therefrom, and connected with said quad 
rant only through a common. hub or center. 
This arm crosses the space between the fingers 
lf and the bars H8 H near their rear ends, and 
serves to receive and uphold the grain brought 
in by the rakes. The arm n is made in form 
resembling the letter S, the curved portion at 
its outer swinging end being adapted to par 
tially encircle the gavel and to compress the 
same; and it may also serve as the needle-arm 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
I 25 
 
O 
IS 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
274,931 
a ) 
for carrying the end of the binding material Fig. 2.) This gate serves to prevent the butts 
around said gavel, where the grain is to be of the grain from slipping or being crowded 
bound before being discharged. The quad. off the platform until the gavel is completed, 
rant or partial rim in, connecting the arms in 
and then yields to permit the discharge of the 
and n', serves to prevent the incoming grain 
gavel or bundle, or, where the grain is tall and 
from getting behind the arm n' and interfering 
the ejecting device well elevated to accommo 
with its being retracted after it has been oper. 
date such tall grain, the gate serves to trip the 
ated to discharge the gavel or bundle. 
butt-end of the bundle or gavel, causing the 
The shaft M is provided with a number of 
latter to be thrown over on its side. 
holes, and the gavel-discharging device may 
For relieving the machine of side draft or 
be held at any desired height to adapt it to 
the dragging of its outer end, I prefer to locate 
the grain being operated upon by means of a 
the grain-wheel behind the cutting apparatus 
pin passed through one of said holes under 
and the upright raking and reeling device de 
the hub N. The shaft projects slightly below 
scribed at about the center of their length. 
the platform E, and is provided on its lower 
The grain-wheel U is mounted on a short shaft 
end with a crank-wheel, P, from which a con 
attached to the rear end of an arm, W, about 
necting-rod, p, extends to a crank-wheel, P', 
in the same transverse vertical plane with the 
mounted loosely on the rear end of a shaft, C'. 
axis of the main driving-wheel B, the forward 
The hub of the crank wheel or disk P is pro 
end of said arm W being connected rigidly with 
vided on its forward end with a clutch-face, 
the finger-bar at or near the center of its length, 
adapting it to engage with a corresponding 
as shown. 
clutch-face on a collar, c, fast on the shaft C. 
The tongue W of the machine is hinged at 
The said hub of wheel Pis grooved to receive 
its rear end to the inner end of the forward 
the bent ends of a U-shaped loop, q, attached 
arm, at a, of the angular traine-bar, and is pro 
to the outer end of the lever , pivoted at ' to 
vided with a hound or brace, v, extending ob. 
the lowerface of the platform. 
The inner end 
liquely to the outer front corner of said angu 
of the lever r extends past the crank wheel or 
lar frame-bar, and pivoted in a lug, X, and 
disk P, and is connected by a spring, s, with 
said brace, extending through said lug, is bent 
the platform, as shown, the tension of said 
forward and forms a crank-arm, c', to which 
spring being exerted to hold the crank. wheel 
one end of a lever, y, pivoted in any suitable 
Pout of engagement with the clutch-collar c, 
support on the frame-bar, is attached. The 
and loose on the shaft. Midway between the 
lever may be held at any desired adjustment 
pivot and the springs the lever r is pro 
by a toothed rack or other suitable device, and 
vided on its upper face with a friction-roller, 
serves by its adjustment to rock the machine 
', which rests against the disk P; and the 
on its wheels B and V in a manner well un 
latter has a notch or recess formed in its pe. 
derstood. 
riphery at P', in which the roller r rests when 
Having now described my invention, what I 
the gaveling-arin it is in position to receive the 
claim as new is 
incoming grain. As the grain becomes com 
1. In a reaping-machine, upright shafts at 
pressed against said arm n' in quantity suffi 
each end of the cutting apparatus, provided 
cient to form a bundle of the desired size, the 
with sprocket-wheels, in combination with end 
further accumulation of the grain crowds said 
less chains carrying upright rake shafts or 
arm back, partially rotating the disk P and 
heads, and mechanism for moving said rake 
displacing the roller from the notch 
p; and 
heads inward across the path of the cutters 
said disk, crowding the roller back, togeth 
for delivering the cut grain in an upright po 
er with the arm of lever r, to which it is at 
sition upon a gaveling-platform at the inner 
tached, serves to throw the crank-wheel into 
end of the cutting apparatus, substantially as 
engagement with the clutch-collar c; and said 
described. 
crank-wheel, acting through the pitman p on 
2. In a reaping-machine, the upright reeling 
the crank-wheel P and shaft M, rocks the gav 
and raking mechanism consisting of the end 
el-discharger backward, causing the gavel to 
less chains arranged one over another, and 
be thrown over the rear edge of the platform, 
carrying upright lake heads or shafts provid 
discharging it either upon the ground or into 
ed with the teeth or fingers set obliquely, as 
any suitable receptacle. The crank or crank 
described, whereby the points are made to en 
wheel P is of shorter radius than crank-wheel 
ter the standing grain and gather it in to the 
P, and serves merely to vibrate the latterjust 
Cutters. 
enough to cause the ejector in to discharge 
3. The upright rake-heads provided with w 
the gavel or bundle, the roller r', as the wheel 
crank-arms, in combination with the guiding 
P completes its return movement, being drawn 
ledge or track for holding said rake-heads in 
into the notch p', thereby throwing the crank 
working position, and mechanism for moving 
wheel out of action until the grain again presses 
said rake-heads transversely across the path 
the arm n back, as described. 
of the cutters, substantially as and for the pur. 
At that part of the platform where the gavel 
pose described. 
or the bound bundle, as the case may be, is 
4. The upright rake-heads provided with the 
discharged, is a low gate, t, hinged by its 
obliquely-arranged teeth, in combination with 
lower edge to the rear edge of the platform, 
the actuating-chains and the supporting-strips 
and in an upright position by a spring, t. (See arranged in front of the path of said heads, and 
7 o 
CO 
IOS 
IO 
T (5 
I 25 
130 
 
24,93. 
O 
w 
operating, in connection with the rake-fingers, 
to support the grain in a standing position, 
substantially as described. 
5. The upright rake-heads attached to and 
carried by endless chains, in combination with 
the supporting and clearing or stripping bars 
H and H', the yielding fingers l, and the Sup 
porting-arm n of the yielding device N, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. The gaveling-platform located at the in 
ner end of the cutting apparatus, in combina 
, tion with mechanism for delivering the grain 
thereto in an upright or standing position, and 
means for upholding and compressing the grain 
thereon, substantially as described. 
7. The gavel upholding and ejecting device 
N, mounted upon an upright shaft, in combi 
nation with mechanism adapted to be thrown 
into action by the pressure of the grain on the 
gavel-upholding device for effecting the dis 
charge of the gavel or bundle, substantially as 
described. 
8. The combination, with the gaveling-plat 
form E and means for upholding and compress. 
ing the grain thereon, of the pivoted gate cross 
ing the path of discharge of the grain, sub 
stantially as described. 
9. The uprightshaft M, in combination with 
the grain holding and ejecting device N, made 
adjustable vertically on said shaft, substan. 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
. 
25 
35 
49 
SO 
10. The upright L, located at or near the 
heel end of the finger-bar, and provided with 
curved and yielding fingers l, substantially as 
described, in combination with the bars H' 
and H', mechanism for delivering the grain in 
a standing position to said fingers, and mech 
anism for discharging the grain, substantially 
as described. 
11. The upright shaft M, carrying the bun 
dle holding and ejecting device, in combina 
tion with the crank-wheels P and P', arranged 
and operating substantially as described. 
12. The angular frame-bar A, provided with 
bearings for the main drive-wheel axle and 
crank-shaft, and having its forward transverse 
arm turned or twisted from a vertical position, 
or one on edge, to a horizontal position, in com 
bination with the finger-bar, secured to said 
arin, substantially as described. 
13. The linged pole or tongue, in combina 
tion with the obliquely-arranged tongue-brace 
ac, pivoted to the frame, and provided with a 
crank arm or lever, v', and a lever, y, connected 
there with for rocking the frame on its sup 
porting-wheels, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 8th day of December, A. D. 1882. 
WILLIAM GAUSE, 
Witnesses: 
DANIEL SEIORDOR, 
WILLIAM KAOUGH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275032.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 275,032, 
G. E. FLETCHER. 
WIND ENGINE, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1883. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
>>zzzzzz>zzzzzzzzzzzzzzz!ae 
E 
 
SN N 
WITMESSES 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE E. FLETCHER, OF LAMPASAS, TEXAS. 
wiND-ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 275,082, dated April 3, 1888. 
Application filed November 15, 1882. (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
-Be it known that I, GEORGE E. FLETCHER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Lampasas, in the county of Lampasas and 
5 State of Texas, have invented a new and use. 
ful Wind-Engine, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
Io proved wind-engine. Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
tional view, and Fig. 3 is a horizontal sectional 
We W. 
The same letters refer to the same parts in 
all the figures. 
This invention relates to wind-engines; and 
it consists in certain improvements in the con 
struction of the same, which will be hereinaf. 
ter fully described, and particularly pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, A a repre 
sents a sill or base, at the ends of which are 
secured uprights B B, connected by a cap 
piece, C. 
D is a vertical shaft journaled in the cap 
25 piece C and sill A, and carrying the wind-wheel 
or drum E. The latter consists of two disks, 
FF, mounted securely upon said shaft a suit 
able distance apart, and connected by a series 
of three or more pivoted rods, G, (four of 
which are shown in the drawings,) arranged 
equidistantly from each other and from the 
center of the shaft. The upper ends of the 
rods G, which project above the upper diks, 
F, have crank-arms H, adjustable by set-screws 
35 I. The rods G carry the curved wings or 
shields J, which, by turning said rods, may 
be turned outwardly until their outer ends 
bear against the braces K, which connect the 
disks FF at their edges; or they may be 
turned inward until they are folded together, 
as shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings, forming a 
compact cylinder and excluding the wind. 
When the wings are partly or wholly extended. 
the wind, acting upon said wings, serves to re 
Wolve the wheel or drum, the speed being gov. 
erned by the extent to which the wings are 
thrown open or extended. 
The wings are automatically adjusted by a 
governor, the construction of which is as foll 
lows: The upper end of the shaft D is provided 
with laterally-extending brackets L. L., having 
So 
40 
45 
55 
pivoted arms or bell-crank levers M, the lower 
ends of which are loaded with balls or weights 
N, while their upper inner ends are connected 
by pivoted rods O, with a sleeve, P, sliding 
vertically upon the shaft D. Q is another 
sleeve sliding vertically upon shaft D, and 
connected by hinged rods R with the cranks 
H of the rods G. The sleeve Q is held auto 
matically in a raised position by a coiled spring, 
S, interposed between said sleeve and the up 
per disk, F, of the wind-wheel; but when it is 
lowered it serves to operate the crank-arms H 
and close the wings of the wheel. Now, it 
will be seen that when the wind-wheel revolves 
at a high rate of speed the governor-balls are 
thrown outward by the centrifugal force thus 
generated, and the inner upper arms of the le. 
vers M are lowered, thus forcing the sleeve P 
in a downward direction, when it will press 
upon sleeve Q, or upon a washer, T, interposed 
between said sleeves, forcing it downwardly 
and operating to close the wings, the extent of 
this operation being automatically governed 
by the rate of speed at which the wind-wheel 75 
is revolving. 
U is a lever pivoted to one of the uprights, 
B, and having a ring, V, resting upon the 
washer T. The said lever is held automati 
cally in a raised position by a spring-bracket, 8o 
W. By depressing the lever U the ring V 
forces the sleeve Q downwardly, thus closing 
the wings and causing the wheel to stop. A 
spring-catch, X, is provided to hold the lever 
U depressed, when required, as in the case of 85 
a high wind, when it is desired to keep the 
wheel out of gear. 
The operation of my invention will be read 
ily understood. It provides a simple, durable, 
and powerful wind-engine, easily and automati. 9o 
cally regulated, and not liable to get out of 
repair. 
7 O 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with a suitable frame, 
of the shaft D, having wind wheel or drum E, 95 
provided with rods G, having wings J and 
arms or cranks H, and laterally-projecting 
brackets L, having bell-crank levers M, loaded 
at their lower ends, the connecting-rods O, 
sleeve P, washer T, spring S, and the sleeve Q, I Oo 
having pivoted rods R, connecting said sleeve 
with the arms El, as set forth. 
 
2 
75,032 
2. The combination of the frame, the shaft 
D, having wind-wheel E, provided with wings 
J, mounted upon rods G, having crank-arms 
H, the sleeve Q, connecting-rods R, spring S, 
5 washer T, lever U, having ring V, and the 
spring-bracket W, all arranged and operating 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE EPHRAIM FLETCHER. 
R. E. OWEN, 
W. W. CUNNINGHAMI. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275132.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 275,132. 
T. E. BUCK. 
JETTY FOR CORRECTING THE CHANNELS OF RIVERS, &c, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1883. 
777, Z. 
Azu-a2zzzzzy 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washin 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
TEIOMAS E. BUCK, OF 
ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
JETTY FOR CORRECTING TH 
E CHANNELS OF RIVERS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 275,132, dated April 3, 1883, 
Application filed January 13, 1883. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAs E. BUCK, of 
the city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Jetties for Correcting the Chan 
nels of Rivers, &c., of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a top or birds-eye view, and Fig. 
2 a side view. 
My invention relates to a plan for correct 
ing, widening, deepening, and confining the 
channels of rivers and streams; and my inven 
tion consists, broadly, in placing the branches 
of the trees up stream, as more fully described 
hereinafter. 
Referring to the drawings, Arepresents trees 
anchored by means of chains B, or like fasten 
ings, to piles or stones C, as shown in Fig. 2, 
with their branches pointing or projecting up 
stream. My preferred manner is to connect 
the trees together, as well as to the piles or 
stones, thus forming a chain of trees. These 
trees are secured, as before stated, in the nar 
row bends of rivers, and as they overlap each 
other a continuous bar is formed, which will 
prevent the water from washing farther into 
the bend and cause it to cut away the projec 
tion on the other side of the stream, and the 
stream, being thus confined, will deepen by 
washing out dirt in the bottom. By placing 
the trees with their branches projecting up 
stream they are continually more firmly em 
bedded to the bottom of the river by the cur 
rent striking the branches and by the drift 
sand settling around the trunks and branches. 
Instead of securing the trees to piles and 
O 
15 
23 
25 
35 
stones, as shown and described, they may be 
weighted down by means of stones or heavy 4o 
weights; or they may be held in place by any 
suitable means. A single row or chain of trees 
may be used in each bend, as shown in Fig. 2 
and on the left side of Fig. 1, or a series or 
number of said rows or chains may be used in 45 
each bend, as shown on the right side of Fig. 
1, and in this latter case, the rows being a 
little distance apart, the sand is permitted to 
gather around the trunks and branches and 
gradually fill up the intervening spaces, and 5o 
ultimately form a bank. Another advantage of 
placing the trees with their branches project 
ing up stream is that no fish-holes are formed, 
as is the case where the branches project down 
Stream. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a jetty for correcting the clhannels of 
rivers, &c., one or more trees secured in the 
stream with the branches projecting up stream, 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a jetty for correcting the channels of 
rivers, &c., two or more trees with their 
branches projecting up stream, and being fast 
ened together and to anchors in the stream, 
Substantially as set forth. 
3. In a jetty for correcting the channels of 
rivers, &c., the combination, with the trees A, 
with their branches projecting up stream, and 
anchors C, made fast in the bottom of the 
stream, of the fastenings B, securing the to 
trees together and to the anchors, all substan 
tially as shown and described. 
65 
S5 
6o 
THOS, E, BUCK. 
In presence of - 
SAML KNIGHT, 
GEO. H. KNIGHT. 
5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275232.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 275,232. 
 
J. LYNCH, 
CUPEL FURN ACE 
Patented Apr. 3, 1883. 
WITNESSES 
44%.Szc6 
State, d 
Ya 
INVENTOR 
14s, s?, 
4-6 
ATTORNEYS 
N. Perers. photo-Lithographer, Washington, b, c, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN LYNCH, OF ALLEGEENY CITY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CUPEL-FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 275,232, dated April 3, 1883. 
Application filed December 22, 1882. (No model.) 
15. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHNLYNCH, of Alle 
gheny City, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
5 and useful Improvement in Cupel-Furnaces, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the 
annexed drawings, forming part of this speci. 
fication. 
Io This invention relates to the class of fur 
naces employed in assaying and refining pre 
cious metals; and the object of the invention 
is to provide means for a more convenient and 
effective handling of the cupel. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of the furnace, showing the tackle for 
handling the cupel; and Fig. 2 is a vertical 
section through the furnace and cupel. 
A indicates a cupel-furnace of usual con 
20 struction, having a recess, B, formed under 
neath the same, and an opening, C, above the 
recess for receiving the cupel D. Heretofore 
such a cupel-hearth bas been supported upon 
the ends of vertical screws, which are screwed 
25 through cross-bars arranged in the said recess, 
and these screws are to be operated by hand 
to adjust the cupel-hearth in any desired posi 
tion. 
Owing to the heat that is imparted to the 
3o screws and the difficulty of rapidly adjusting 
the screws in the above construction, I use 
only one set of screws, E, which are supported 
in the cross-bar F at one end of the cupel. 
The opposite end of the cupel is provided with 
35 staples G, in which arms Hare inserted; and 
these arms are made to project without the 
recess B, in order that a tackle may be con 
nected thereto for raising and lowering said 
end of the cupel. 
4o The tackle I may be supported either upon 
a standard, J, on the furnace, or suspended 
from a support arranged above the furnace, 
and is connected to the arms H by a cross-bar, 
K, preferably of angular form, as shown, and 
45 the screws L and adjusting-brackets M. By 
means of the screws L., which screw into the 
brackets M, as also of the screws E, the cupel 
may be adjusted with either side lower than 
the other, in order that a new discharge-chan 
nel may be utilized at each operation, as is re- so 
quired in the art. A series of channels are to 
be formed for this purpose, and all but one 
are to be closed temporarily, and the position 
of the cupel is to be varied according to the 
location of the channel that is to be used. 55 
With the use of the tackle the proper adjust 
ments of the cupel may be made with com 
parative ease and dispatch. The ends of the 
vertical Screws Eare to be set in recesses formed 
in a suitable plate secured to the bottom of 6o 
the cupel. 
While preferring the form of the invention 
above described, I may vary the construction 
in various particulars, according to circum 
stances, and therefore do not confine myself 65 
to the exact arrangement of parts shown. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is- 
1. The combination, with a cupel, of the 
screws E, supported in the cross-bar F, near 7o 
one end thereof, and the supporting-tackle I, 
connected to arms H on the opposite end of the 
cupel, substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with a cupel having 
screws E for supporting and adjusting the 75 
same at one end, of tackle I and means for 
connecting the same to the cupel, substantially 
as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with a cupel having 
screws E for supporting and adjusting the 8o 
same at one end of tackle and adjustable means 
K LM for connecting the same with the cupel, 
whereby the position of the cupelmay be equally 
adjusted at each end and in a convenient man 
ner, substantially as specified. 
JOHN LYNCH. 
- 
Witnesses: 
A. G. LYNE, 
SOLON O. KEMON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275333.txt	(No Model.) 
B. F. DILLON & A. GRTNER. 
 
WITNESSES: 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIIN F. DILLON AND ALBERT GRTNER, OF SAVANNAH, GEORGIA. 
RAILWAY CATTLE - GUARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 275,833, dated April 3, 1883. 
Application filed July 24, 1882. 
(No model.) 
To all ????? ?? ??? ??????? : 
Be it known that we, BENJAMIN F. DILLON 
and ALBERT GARTNER, of Savannah, in the 
county of Chatham and State of Georgia, have 
invented a new and Improved Railway Cattle 
Guard; and we do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the same. 
This invention is an improvement in guards 
for railways for preventing cattle straying on 
the latter or passing from or into an inclosure 
at points where the railway enters and leaves 
it, whereby the use of the customary pits as 
now constructed by railroads may be dispensed 
With. 
The construction and combination of parts 
are as hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, IFigure 1 is 
a perspective view of our improved cattle 
guard as applied in actual use, and Fig. 2 is a 
cross-section of the same. Fig. 3 is a perspec 
tive view of a portion of one of the spiked roll 
ers and the metal cap therefor. 
The guard is formed by means of a series of 
spiked rollers A, arranged preferably paral 
lel with the rails B, and journaled in flanged 
plates C, which are attached to the cross-ties 
D. Said plates C are oblong, and provided 
with holes to receive the journals at of said 
rollers A, and with horizontal base-flanges b, 
through which screws are inserted into the ties 
D for securing the plates firmly in place. On 
the ends of the rollers are fitted central caps, 
c, having the journals or gudgeons a cast in 
one piece with them. The pointed iron spikes 
are arranged spirally or in ZigZag relation 
around the rollers A, and project radially there 
from. The latter are placed a few inches apart, 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
and occupy the space between the rails B and 
also the lateral spaces between the rails and 
posts E of the fence, on either side of the track. 
| The space between the rollers should prefera 
bly not be sufficient to allow a bullock's foot 
to pass down between them, although, in case 
this should happen, the leg of the bullock is not 45 
liable to be injured, since the rollers will not 
pinch it nor prevent its withdrawal, as do those 
rollers which are cruciform in cross-section or 
whose transverse diameters are of unequal 
length. 
We are aware that cattle-guards have been 
formed of rotatable bars; but the latter were 
constructed of metal and grooved lengthwise, 
and hence cruciform in cross-section. They 
are therefore dangerous in use, for, when a bul 
lock attempts to cross the guard the application 
of his weight will cause them to rotate and 
pinch his legs so severely as to be liable to 
break them, and in most cases it would be im 
possible for the bullock to extricate his legs, 
even if not seriously injured. In our invention 
the feet and not the legs are pinched, and hence 
injury is not liable to result. 
55 
?? 
What we claim is 
The improved railway cattle - guard formed 
of a series of rollers arranged parallel in the 
close proximity specified, and whose peripher 
ies are formed of a series of plane surfaces, any 
two of those which are adjacent being at an 
obtuse angle to each other, as shown and de 
scribed. 
BENJAMIN.F. DILLON. 
ALBERT GARTNER, 
Witnesses: 
V 
W. E. BEHNKEN, 
J. N. T.INSLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275434.txt	(No Model.) : 
. 
No. 275,434, 
R. L. STOKES, 
LAMP BRACKET, 
Patented Apr. 10, 1883. 
 
te - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT L. STOKES, OF JEFFERSON VILLE, INDIANA, 
LAMP. BRACKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 275,434, dated April 10, 1883. 
Application filed November 23, 1882. (No model.) 
tersect the latter. When this plate is to be fast 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT L. STOKES, a ened to the under side of an exposed sewing 
citizen of the United States, residing at Jeffer- machine table, as seen at G in Fig. 3, screws 
sonville, in the county of Clark and State of EIH' are passed through the holes C C and 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use. engaged with said table, the other holes, D D', 
ful Improvements in Lamp-Brackets for Sew- being now of no service. Socket I of swing 
ing-Machine Tables, of which the following is ing arm J can then be applied to the upright, 
a specification, reference being had therein to pintle E, so as to allow said arm to be turned 
the accompanying drawings. 
around either to the right or left, the set-screw 
The object of my invention is to furnish a K serving to lock the arm when desired. 
swinging lamp-bracket that can be readily at- This arm J may either be cast with the socket 
tached either to the under side of the table of I, or it may be rigidly secured thereto, and car. 
an exposed sewing-machine, or to the vertical 
ries at its free end a cup or holder, L, that con 
tains the lamp M. Said lamp may be of any 
end of the cabinet or case of an inclosed sew 
ing-machine, or to a wall or other support con 
suitable size and shape; but I prefer using one 
venient to the machine. Said bracket con 
having a handle, m, in which event the cup 
sists essentially of an L-shaped plate, from 
should be slotted or notched at l to admit said 
which project two pins or pintles, one of 
handle. This slot l is seen in Fig. 5. My at 
these pins being horizontal and the other verti. 
tachment, however, can be used with an in 
cal, and either of them being used as a pivot 
closed sewing-machine, as seen in Fig. 2, where 
for a bearing or socket at one end of a swing 
the plate A B is fastened to the right end of 
ing arm, whose other or free end carries a cup 
the cabinet or case Y, the screws Ei H' being 
or holder that supports an ordinary lamp. 
now passed through the holes D. D. By this 
When the bracket is to be applied to an in. 
arrangement the limb B of the plate projects 
closed sewing-machine the L-shaped plate is 
laterally from the cabinet, while the pintle F 
so screwed to the cabinet or case as to permit 
assumes a vertical position. The socket I can 
the swinging arm turning on one of these pin 
now be applied to this pivot F, so as to allow 
tles; but when the plate is fastened to the 
the arm J to be swung around for the pur 
under side of a table, this pintle assumes a 
pose of throwing the light either to the front 
horizontal position, and the other pin becomes 
or rear of the sewing-machine, the thumb 
vertical and supports said lamp-arm, as herein 
screw K serving to lock said arm in any posi 
after more fully described, and pointed out in 
tion; but if it should be desired to fasten the 
the claim. 
attachment to a wall or window-casing, as 
ln the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a per- seen at Z in Fig. 4, the plate A B is disposed 
spective view of the plate in position for at 
in the same manner, the now horizontal pin E 
tachment to the under side of a sewing-ma 
being made available for supporting scissors, 
chine table. Fig. 2 is a sectionized elevation, needle-book, and other sewing implements and 
showing the attachment applied to the case of conveniences. 
I claim as my invention 
an inclosed sewing-machine. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation, representing the plates secured to 
A lamp-bracket for sewing-machine tables, 
the under side of a sewing-machine table. consisting of the L-shaped plate AB, provided 
| 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the attachmentap. with vertical and horizontal pivots or pintles 
plied to a wall or window-casing. Fig. 5 is a E F, and two sets of screw-holes, C C, DD", 
side elevation of the slotted cup or holder that arranged at right angles with reference to each 
supports the lamp. 
other, the socket I of the swinging arm J L. 
Referring to Fig. 1, A B represent respect. being applicable to either of said pintles, as 
ively the long and short members of an L- herein described. 
shaped plate composed either of cast-iron or 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
other suitable material, the long link A. being presence of two witnesses. 
pierced with two distinct sets of screw-holes, 
C C and D D, the set C C being vertical, 
while the other set, D D, is horizontal. Fur 
thermore, the holes CC are in different planes 
with reference to the holes DD, so as not to in 
ROBERT L., STOKES, 
. 
S. S. JOHNSON, 
J. JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
70 
75 
90 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275534.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. F. SPEARING, 
MEANS FOR DEEPENING THE CHANNELS OF RIVERs, &c, 
No. 275,534, 
Patented Apr. 10, 1883. 
  
 
ass Gl sa 
re 
a. a AZ Za 2. ZZ at 
Z. a. an Z2 a. 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
I R 
it. 
RH III. || . 
NH|H|| 
AN 
|Aies 
N: 
IEE 
(N EN 
B E 
HE 
SH LE 
A 2 
IWVENTOR 
of 72 A. ayoea repay. 
By his Attorneys 
NPeters. Proto-Lithographer. Wathanktor, b. C. 
(No Model.) 
J. F. SPEARING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
MEANS FOR, DEEPENING THE CHANNELS OF RIVERS, &c, 
No. 275,534, 
Patented Apr. 10, 1883. 
Sa 
 
   
e 
, 
42 
six 
I y A 
s 
SS 
z2. I 
  
  
 
II) 
ZZZZZZ 
 
  
ZZZZ 
M. z 
3. 
is 
W 
W 
2 
2 
s 
Y As 
W s 
2 
1 
2 
W 
s E. S 
: HMZ 
t 
R2 
EW 
. 
W e 
s 
2. 
Li, H2 
2 
M 
(I, II, 
2 H. 
W 
- W 
3H 
W 
W 
HA 
TWZZ ZH H2Z. 
 
WIT.WESSES 
III" 
Bif 7 is 4tton eff's 
J.A. E.WTOf 
/o/n A. Szoea way 
N. PETERS. Photo-thographer, Washington.o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOEN F. SPEARING, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA. 
MEANS FOR DEEPENING THE CHANNELS OF RIVERS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 275,534, dated April 10, 1883. 
Application filed September 12, 1882. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN F. SPEARING, of 
New Orleans, in the State of Louisiana, have 
invented an Improved Means for Deepening 
the Channels of Rivers, Removing Bars, &c., 
of which the following is a specification, 
Owing to the constant deposit of sediment 
in channels of rivers and at their outlets, it 
has become an imperative necessity to provide. 
some way of clearing such deposits away, and 
O various means have been introduced, all of 
which are more or less effective, but are slow 
and expensive. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved organization, involving a vessel car 
rying suitable cutters, which will cut up the 
bed of the channel, or cut a way through a bar 
and thoroughly stir up the deposit loosened by 
the cutters, so that it will be carried out of the 
way by the current or tide. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal section through a vessel provid 
ed with my apparatus, the parts being merely 
indicated and broken away. Fig. 2 is a simi 
lar view of a transverse section. Fig. 3 is a 
detail view, showing one of the cutters lowered 
for work. Fig. 4 is a similar view, showing 
One of the cutters elevated above the water 
line. Fig. 5 is a detailed view of one of the 
cutter-shafts, with the driving-hub and gear 
thereon; and Fig.6 is a diagrammatic plan view, 
merely indicating the relative positions of the 
cutters, the tracks they cut being indicated by 
dotted lines. 
As shown in the drawings, I prefer to em 
ploy two sets of cutters, one being forward 
and the other abaft the center of the vessel. 
The two leading cutters are placed on opposite 
sides of the keel or longitudinal center of the 
vessel, and the rear ones are similarly placed, 
So as to follow at or about in the track of the 
first pair. As illustrated more especially in 
Figs. 1 and 6, the forward cutters are smaller 
in diameter than the rear ones, so that as the 
45 Wessel moves along at work the leading cut 
ters will cut out a small channel, and the rear 
cutters, following in the same line, will enlarge 
it. The cutters are carried upon vertically-ad 
justable shafts, which turn in bearings in wells 
So built in the hull of the vessel, so that the depth 
of cut may be regulated, and the cutters lifted 
up into the wells entirely above the water-line 
for repair, or raised within the line of the hull 
when the vessel is moving from place to place. 
It may be found desirable in operation to ad- 5s 
just the rear cutters to cut deeper than the 
forward ones. The means for adjusting them 
will presently be described. 
Cutters of any suitable character may be em 
ployed; but I pre?er, as shown in the draw- 6o 
ings, a cutter consisting of radially-projecting 
blades a, secured on the end of the rotating 
vertically-adjustable shaft A. 
It will be observed that the cutting-blades 
are inclined somewhat to the vertical plane of 65 
the shaft A; or, in other words, the planes or 
faces of the blades are at an angle to the axis 
of the cutter-shaft, so that when in operation 
the cutters are rotated in the direction of the 
arrows. The blades will not only cut the earth, 
but will stir it and throw it upward into the 
water, so that it will be exposed to the full 
power of the current or tide and carried off out 
of the way. A vessel thus equipped and 
driven by any suitable power, by traveling 
back and forth and by adjusting the depth of 
the cut, may open a channel of any desired 
width and depth, the matter thrown up by the 
cutters being carried off by the current and 
deposited at some unobjectionable point. 
I will now describe the special organization 
of the adjusting mechanism, but first remark 
that the broad principle of my invention is lot 
dependent upon the details shown, although 
the organization illustrated is deemed to be 
practical and efficient and well adapted to 
carry out the invention. 
A water-tight well, B, is built in the hull for 
the accommodation of each cutter-shaft A. At 
the upper or deck end of the well a bearing, 
C, is provided, in which the vertical shaft Aro 
tates. This bearing consists of a hub stayed 
by strong radial beams B", so as to form an 
open support, cover, or spider. The lower 
bearing of the shaft consists of a hub, D, 
formed of a heavy piece of metal, and moving 
loosely up and down on the shaft. This hub 
is suspended from the beams B' by chains d, 
so that it may be raised and lowered. The 
hub is sustained centrally within the Well, so 
as to afford a firm bearing for the shaft, by ra 
dial stays or supports E, which are also formed 
75 
35 
IOO 
IS 
20 
25 
 
- A. 
e 
p 
25,53i 
6o 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
7 O. 
invention. 
25 on the deck of the vessel. . 
of heavy metal, and are strongly hinged to the drawn up so as to permit the stays E to be 
edge or wall of the well, and supported from raised out of the way by the chains e. The 
the timbers B' by chains e. When the shaft 
shaft and cutter may then be elevated and 
is lowered for operation, the stays E embrace 
sustained, as above described. 
5 the hub D, as indicated in Fig. 3, holding it 
Of course the details above described may 
firmly, so as to afford a solid bearing for the 
be changed in a variety of ways without de 
shaft. The shaft A is provided with a series 
parting from the essential principles of my 
of apertures, f, through which pins' or bolts: 
pass. The bevel-gear H on the shaft A is pro 
Instead of forming the spider or open-frame 
Iovided with an elongated hub, h, having notches 
at the top of the well of an independent hub, 
therein, in which one of the pins or boltsg rests, 
'C, and braces B, it might be made of metal 
the hub being held up against the pin by the 
and east in a solid piece. 
'ping at the bottom of the gear. This hub and 
: gear H is loose on the shaft A, so that by re 
15 moving the pins the shaft may be adjusted to 
any height desired. The shaft is driven by 
the pint which rests in the notch in the hub; 
and in order to prevent sudden shocks and 
strains of the apparatus I provide an elastic 
packing, g", in the notch in the hub. The gear 
E is driven by a corresponding pinion, I of 
the power-driven shaft I, which turns in suit. 
able bearings. The bearing i shown may be 
either mounted on one of the timbers B or 
Above the well I provide an upright skele. 
ton frame, K, having a bearing at the top, 
through which the shaft. A passes. A notched 
hub, D', similar to that already described, is 
3o provided on the shaft above the frame, and 
any suitable number of anti-friction washers, l, 
may be interposed between the frame and the 
hub. The cross-ping, resting in the notch 
of the hub, supports the entire weight of the 
shaft upon the frame, as will be well under 
stood. The shaft may be elevated by means 
of a block and tackle hung on the frame, and 
connected with one of the cross-pins of the 
shaft A, as illustrated in Fig. 4. 
As will be observed, the hub Displaced high 
enough in the well to leave sufficient room to 
permit the raising of the cutter into the well 
within the line of the bottom of the vessel 
without moving the hub when the vessel is 
moving from place to place or is returning 
against the tide. When the cutter is to be so 
elevated, the pins (), which hold the gear H 
and its hub, are withdrawn, the shaft elevated 
by the block and tackle by any suitable power, 
and sustained in its elevated position by shift 
ing the supporting-pin f', which rests in the 
notched hub D'. The gear H, in any adjust 
ment of the shaft, may be secured between any 
two of the holes in the shaft by the pins g to 
suit any required depth of cut. 
When it is desired to elevate the cutter 
above the water-line for repair, the hub D is 
What I claim as my invention is- 
1. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of the vessel having the well built there 
in, the vertical cutter-shaft passing through 
the well, its bearings, the movable stays or 
supports sustaining the lower bearing of the 75 
shaft, and mechanism for raising the shaft. 
and its cutter into the well above the stays, 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the vessel having 
the well built therein, the upright vertically-8o 
adjustable cutter-shaft, the movable collar or 
hub which forms its lower bearing, and the 
movable stays which sustain said bearing, sub 
stantially as set forth. . . . 
3. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of the vessel, the forward well or wells, 
the rear well or wells, cutters or stirrers car. 
ried in the Wells on upright vertically-adjust 
able shafts, and mechanism for raising and 
lowering both sets of cutters, so that they may go 
be set to act at a greater or less depth, for the 
purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, as set forth, of the ves 
Sel, front and rear rotary cutters carried on 
do WiiWardly-extending shafts, the forward cut 
ters being arranged to cut a smaller or nar 
rower track than the rear ones, and mechan 
ism for adjusting the cutters, for the purpose 
set forth. 
5. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of the vessel, a well or compartment 
built in the body of the vessel, a vertical ro 
tary shaft carried in the well, a cutter or stir. 
rer on the lower end of the shaft, and mech 
anism for raising the cutter up into the well 
or compartment above the line of the hull or 
bottom of the vessel. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed uny name. 
GEORGE B. MADDEN, 
A. S. PERKINS. 
JOHN F. SPEARING, 
Witnesses: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
. . 
ro5. 
OC: 
40 
45 
So 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275635.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. P. G.ILL. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING LIGHTING OR 
Patented Apr. 10, 1883. 
No. 275,635. 
HEATING WAPORS, 
 
(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING LIGHTING OR 
Apr. 10, 1883, 
HEATING WAPORS. 
J. P. G.ILL. 
Pate it. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPH P. GILL, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING LIGHTING OR HEATING WAPORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 275,635, dated April 10, 1883. 
Application filed March 21, 1881. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
the selection of any one or any combination of 
Beit known that I, Jose PHPEARson GILL, 
the absorbing and conveying gases or vapors, 
of the city of New York, in the county of New 
according to the particular purpose for which 
York and State of New York, have invented 
they are required. 
certain new and useful Improvements in Pro. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
cesses of and Apparatus for Manufacturing 
shows a front elevation of one form of the ap 
Lighting or Heating Vapors; and I do hereby 
paratus in which the vaporizing - retort is 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
adapted to receive a solid hydrocarbon. Fig. 
exact description thereof, which will enable 
2 shows a like elevation of the same form of 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains to 
apparatus with appliances in connection with 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
the vaporizing-retort for supplying thereto the 
the accompanying drawings, and to the letters 
heavy liquid hydrocarbon, such as coal-tar and 
of reference marked thereon, which form a part 
the like. 
of this specification. 
The apparatus shown in these figures is the 
Myinvention includes in part the apparatus 
same as that shown in the application herein 
described in applications filed by me February 
before referred to, entitled Process and Ap 
25, 1881, and March 19, 1881, in the United 
paratus for the Manufacture of Gas, which was 
States Patent Office, said applications bearing 
filed in the United States Patent Office on the 
respectively serial numbers 26,951 and 28,665, 
19th day of May, 1881, with the addition of a 
Which apparatus is modified, as hereinafter de 
number of pipes, which are hereinafter fully 
scribed, to adapt it to the methods set forth 
described. 
hereinafter. 
In the process carried on by the apparatus 
The essential part of the invention consists 
shown herein the fixing of the gas for con 
in passing either a highly-heated air and the 
sumption in a furnace or burners is not con 
Vapor of a hydrocarbon liquid or a non-illumi 
templated. The first bench is provided with 
nating gas or heated air alone through a retort 
a retort, A', which is adapted to hold anthracite 
containing bituminous coal or an equivalent 
coal or any similar hydrocarbon, to make in con 
solid or liquid hydrocarbon in a state of wa 
nection with other substances hereinafter de 
porization at a heat below that of destructive 
scribed a non-illuminating gas, or to heat what 
distillation, whereby a highly-rarefied and 
ever may be passed through it. 
elastic heating-vapor is formed. To a certain 
The apparatus is also provided with a boiler, 
extent the highly-heated air commingled with 
W, for generating steam, which is connected 
the vapor of a hydrocarbon liquid and non 
by a pipe to the superheaters H H K K, said 
illuminating gas, and the highly-heated air 
pipe being provided with automatic regulators 
alone, are equivalents of each other-that is to 
M. N, which regulators are of ordinary con 
say, they will take up the vapors rising from 
struction and need not be herein particularly 
the distillation of the bituminous coal or from 
described. The superheaters KK are directly 
the other specific materials which may be sub 
connected to the retort A' by a pipe having 
stituted for the bituminous coal under the con 
two branches, which enter the retort A' on op 
ditions named, and will produce by the pro 
posite sides. The retort A' is connected by a 
cess hereinafter described a highly-elastic rare 
pipe, E', with the retort B, placed in the sec 
fied heating-vapor; but these different agents, 
ond bench. This retort B is adapted to hold 
which are used to take up the hydrocarbon 
bituminous coal or any similar hydrocarbon 
vapors in the retort to form the heating-vapor, 
and to subject the same to vaporization. 
are each adapted particularly for specific pur 
The apparatus thus far described is capable 
poses, and in the apparatus which I have shown 
of operation as follows: Anthracite coal or any 
in the accompanying drawings and hereinafter 
similar carbonaceous material being placed in 
described any one of these may be used, ac 
the retort A' and subjected to a high heat, 
cording to the particular purpose for which 
steam from the boiler W is admitted thereto 
the heating-gas is required, so that while the 
through the superheaters, and these products 
general method is the same both the method 
are converted in said retort into a non-illumi 
and the apparatus are capable of variation by nating gas, which is passed through the pipe 
75 
90 
95 
Od 
5 
IS 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
275,635 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
E' into the retort B, where it takes up the hy 
drocarbon vapors, and thence is carried through 
the pipe F to the place of consumption; or it 
may pass through the pipes IIK and suitable 
intermediate apparatus to a storage-tank, X. 
In case it be desirable from any reason to 
use some other substance instead of anthra 
cite coal, I may supply the hydrocarbon from 
a liquid source. For this purpose I provide 
the tank T, which is connected by a pipe, a (l, 
to the pipe L, which conducts the steam from 
the superheaters to the retort A', forming with 
the pipe a vaporizer, whereby the steam in a 
highly-heated state carries the vapor of the 
hydrocarbon into the retort A', where they be. 
come a fixed non-illuminating gas, in the man 
ner heretofore described, and is carried on 
Ward, and is used in the same manner as the 
gas produced from the anthracite coal; but in 
case T desire to use steam directly for talking 
up the hydrocarbon vapors in the retort B, I 
may use the boiler W' and its superheater S, 
by means of which superheater steam may 
pass directly to and through the pipe E' to the 
retort B, and there act in connection with the 
hydrocarbon vapors, in the manner heretofore 
described. I do not propose, however, to use 
steam alone to take up the vapors resulting 
from distillation, for the reason that it is liable 
to variation, and thereby is not so well fitted 
to act as an absorbent and conveyer of the va 
pol's; but it may be used directly in connec 
tion. With the air or non-illuminating gas. 
To furnish the air I have provided an air-sup 
plying device consisting of an air-pump, U, 
which is provided with automatic regulators, 
of a construction as shown in the application 
filed by me on the 25th day of February, 1SS1, 
entitled Manufacture of Gases and Vapors. 
This air-supply is connected by a pipe, u, with 
the pipe L, leading to the retort A'. The 
branch pipes connected with the superheater 
S are provided with stop-cocks, so that the 
Superheater may be used or not, as may be re 
quired. The air in automatically-regulated 
quantities may pass through the pipes speci 
fied into the retort A', and there be highly 
heated, and thence be conveyed through the 
pipe E to the retort B, where it commingles 
With the vapors arising from the bituminous 
coal, and, when saturated with such vapors, 
may pass, as before stated in respect to the 
non-illuminating gas, either to the points of 
consumption or through the condensing and 
purifying apparatus c' f' g and meter l to 
the holder X; but the heated air from the re 
tort A' may, in its passage through the pipe E", 
meet with the hydrocarbon liquid passing 
from the tank T through the pipes a b l, and 
the air and vaporized hydrocarbon pass into 
the retort B for conversion into a heating-va 
por. 
The air from the air-supplying apparatus 
may be passed around the retort A' instead of 
through it. For this purpose I use a pipe 
connecting the points at and a', (said pipes 
being shown by dotted lines in the drawings,) 
75 
95 
by which the air may be passed directly to the 
pipe E'. In this case I use the superheater 
S for the air, 
I may also use the apparatus in another 
way, bringing into use at the same time the 
retort C, which, in another application I have 
described as a fixing-retort, using it in this 
connection as a heating-retort. This is ac 
complished in this Wise: I may take a non 
illuminating gas prepared by any one of the 
methods heretofore described and stored in 
the holder X, and from said holder may pass 
this non-illuminating gas through the pipes 
V V to the retort C, where it is heated, and 
thence I may take it through the pipe H H' 
to the retort B, in which it commingles with the 
vapors arising from the bituminous coal, with 
the result heretofore stated. These combined 
vapors may then be taken through the pipe 
F either to a furnace or to burners for light 
Ing. 
The apparatus in Sheet 2 is similar to that 
shown in Sheet 1, except that I provide a small 90 
tank, B', placed on the top of the furnace or 
in some other warm position, where it may be 
suitably heated. This tank I supply with coal 
tar, heavy oils, or resinous or oleaginous sub 
stances, which may be melted and in a melted 
condition fed to the retort B, and used for va 
porizing instead of the bituminous coal. This 
tank B must be of a size sufficient to contain 
a quantity of the material required during a 
charge or run. The liquids are taken to the 
retort B througll the pipe p' gradually and 
uniformly. When the vapor passing from the 
retort B is not otherwise required it may be 
allowed to pass through a condensing-coil, C', 
to a tank, T. 
Heated air from the superheater S or retort 
A? and the superheated steam from super 
heater S may pass together through the pipe 
E' into the retort B in the manner described 
for each, Steam used with the air acts as a 
diluent, and may be employed when a thinner 
or poorer vapor is required. 
I have provided a pipe, E, extending from 
the pipe E around the bench of the retort C 
and connecting with the pipe H, by means of IIS 
which any of the products passing through 
the pipe E may be conveyed to the pipe H 
and its connections without passing through 
the retort B, if it be so desired. 
I do not herein claim the combination of an 
air-supply pipe and regulator and liquid hy. 
drocarbon and steam-supplying devices pro 
vided with automatic regulators, a superheater, 
and vaporizer, said combination being claimed 
in application (Serial No. 28,425) filed March 
16, 1881. 
I am aware that it is not new to pass steam 
over carbonaceous material in process of dis. 
tillation, that having been shown in the pat 
ent of Stevens, No. 3,338, of March 23, 1869, 
as well as elsewhere, and I do not broadly claim 
that process. 
I have described the apparatus and process 
as adapted to produce a lighting and heating 
IO5 
OO 
- 
IO 
I 25 
H 
275,635 
. 
vapor by the direct application of the heated 
air or gas to the distilling hydrocarbon; but 
for the best results I use the liquid hydrocar 
bon in this connection, for the reason that the 
solid hydrocarbon does not give off its vapors 
uniformly in distillation, but in decreasing 
quantities, and the variation may be corrected 
and the result made uniform by the use of the 
vapor of hydrocarbon liquid in the manner 
specified. 
I do not broadly claim the use of steam to 
take up the vapors from the distilling solid hy 
drocarbons, nor the use of air for such purpose 
at ordinary temperatures. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The process of producing lighting or heat 
ing vapors, consisting in combining highly 
heated air or non-illuminating gas (both with 
or without superheated steam) with the vapors. 
arising in a heated retort from bituminous coal 
or other solid or melted hydrocarbons, coal-tar, 
or similar heavy liquids in the process of va 
porization at a temperature kept below that of 
destructive distillation, the combination or mix 
ture being effected by the introduction of the 
air or gas into the vapor above the distilling 
coal, substantially as set forth. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
2. The process of producing lighting or heat 
ing vapors, consisting in combining highly 
heated air or non-illuminating gas, both with 
or without superheated steam, in conjunction 
with the vapor of liquid hydrocarbon, with the 
vapors arising in a heated retort from bitumi. 
nous coal orother solidormelted hydrocarbons, 
coal-tar, or similar heavy liquids in the pro 
cess of vaporization at a temperature kept be 
low that of destructive distillation, substan 
tially as described. 
the retorts A", B, and C, the steam, air, and 
liquid-hydrocarbon supplying apparatus, the 
regulating devices, the connecting-pipes with 
suitable cocks, the tank X, and the pipes VW', 
all combined and operating substantially as 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of two 
Witnesses. 
3. The described apparatus, consisting of 4o 
45 
JOSEPH PEARSON GILL, 
Witnesses: 
B. F. JAMES, 
WM. E. GRENELLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275736.txt	(No Model.) 
J, T, WALKER 
THREAD HOLDER. 
No. 275,736. 
Patented Apr. 10, 1883. 
 
  
Z272 essees. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES T. WALKER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
TH READ HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 275,786, dated April 10, 1883. 
- 
Application filed January 17, 1883. (No model. 
- 
This invention relates to certain improve-. 
Beit known that I, JAMES T. WALKER, a in the respective figures of the drawings. 
or through the loop of the same, as indicated 
To all whom it may concern : 
citizen of the United States, residing at Balti- 
In the modification shown in Fig. 2 the wire 
more, in the county of Baltimore and State of is twisted to form the loop on the arm and give 
Maryland, have invented certain new and use- it the proper elastic pressure. 
ful Improvements in Thread-Eolders; and I 
As indicated in Fig. 3 of the drawings, the 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, frame is formed with a return-bend, e, which 
clear, and exact description of the invention, is bent around the side, so as to form the spring 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to arm, which has the loop formed at its end, 
which it appertains to make and use the same. which bears against the thread. 
The article is applied to the spool as indi 
ments in thread-holders, to be applied to spools cated in Figs. 1 and 2. When in position, by 
around which thread is wrapped; and it has grasping the frame with one hand and upon 
for its objects to secure the free end of the drawing upon the free end with the other, the 
thread at all times and permit the thread to be thread may be freely unwound and a proper 
readily drawn off as required for use, as more quantity broken off, the thread on the spool 
fully hereinafter specified. These objects I being left under the arm or in the loop, ready 
attain by the means illustrated in the accom- to be seized again. 
panying drawings, in which- 
Elaving thus described my invention, what I 
Figure 1 represents an elevation of a spool claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
showing my invention applied thereto; Fig. 2, is 
a similar view, showing a modification of my 1. A thread-holder for spools, consisting of a 
invention; and Fig. 3, a perspective view, show. frame having one side adapted to pass through 
ing my improved device detached. 
the aperture in the spool and the other longi 
The letter A indicates a spool of ordinary tudinally along the outside and provided with 
construction, upon which is wound the thread an arm adapted to bear upon the thread and 
B in the usual manner. 
2. A thread-holder for spools, consisting of a 
holder, which consists of a rectangular metal- frame having one side adapted to pass through 
lic frame, the side a of which is adapted to the aperture in the spool and the other longi 
be passed through the aperture in the spool in tudinally along the outside and provided with 
such manner that the spool may be freely ro- an arm adapted to bear upon the thread, and 
tated thereon, the said side having a hook, b, means for locking it in the spool, substantially 
at its end, by means of which it can be fastened as specified. 
to the end of the frame at one corner, as shown. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
The other side of said frame is adapted to ex 
tend longitudinally along the spool, and is 
bent at about midway between the ends, so as 
to form a spring-arm, c, which is adapted to 
bear against the thread, as shown. The free 
end of the thread is carried under the arm c, 
The letter C indicates the improved thread- 
hold it, substantially as specified. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES D. DAVIS, 
WM. D. ALEXANDER. 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMEST, WALKER, 
. 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
d 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275836.txt	(No Model.) 
N0, 275 
836. 
J. McCLINTICK. 
IR, 0NING B0ARD, 
Patented Apr. 17 1883. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
?? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACKSON McCLINTICK, OF MILLBURY, OHIO. 
RONING BOARD 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 275,886, dated April 17, 1883. 
Application filed March 8, 1883. 
(No model.) 
O 
IS 
To all upli?? ?? ??? ???cer? : 
Be it known that I, JACKSON McCLINTICK, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Mill 
bury, in the county of Wood and State of Ohio, 
5 have invented a new and useful Ironing-Board, 
of which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to folding ironing ta 
bles or stands; and it consists in certain im 
provements in the construction of the same, 
which will be hereinafter fully described, and 
particularly pointed out in the claim. 
In the drawings bereto annexed, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my improved ironing-ta 
ble extended. Fig.2 is a longitudinal vertical 
sectional view of the same. Fig. 3 is a side 
view of the table folded, and Fig. 4 is a longi. 
tudinal vertical sectional view of the same. 
The same letters refer to the same parts in 
all the figures. 
In the drawings, A represents the main or 
vertical standard, which is provided at its up 
per end with a transverse cleat, B. 
} is the top or leaf of the table, which is pro 
vided on its under side, near its rear end, with 
a transverse cleat, D, which is connected to the 
cleat B by hinges E. 
F is a diagonal supporting - bar, which is 
hinged to the side of the upright A, just below 
the cleat B. 
G is a brace hinged to the bar F, about the 
middle of the same, and adapted to rest against 
a transverse cleat, EI, under the top or leaf C, 
near the front end of the latter, thus support 
35 ing the said top or leaf in a horizontal position 
wben the table is extended. 
I is a brace pivoted to one side of the stand 
ard A, near the lower end of the latter, and 
provided with a slot, J, sliding over a stud, K, 
upon the side of the diagonal supporting-bar 
F. The outer end of the said slot has a notch, 
I, by which it may be hooked over the stud 
K, so as to retain the brace in position when 
the table is extended. 
25 
4C) 
55 
The operation of my invention will be read- 45 
ily understood from the foregoing description, 
taken in connection with the drawings hereto 
annexed. To extend the table the free end of 
the leaf is first raised, and the brace G is then 
lifted and placed against the cleat EI. The rear so 
end of the bar F is then lifted, so as to unfold 
the standard A. and brace I. When the table 
is thus extended it is impossible for the brace 
G to become disengaged, partly because it folds 
back and partly because the top leaf rests upon 
the cleat B, and is thus prevented from being 
raised so long as the standard A is in position. 
An exceedingly strong, steady, and well-braced 
table is thus produced. When the table is 
folded the cleats B and D space the standard 
A and top C, so as to allow the braces F and 
G to fold in between them, thus causing the 
table when folded to occupy but very little 
space. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States 
As an improvement in folding ironing 
stands, the combination of the standard A, 
having cleat B, the top or leaf C, having cleat 
D, hinged to the cleat B, and provided on its 
under side, near its free end, with a transverse 
cleat, H, the bar F, hinged to the standard A, 
below the cleat B, the brace G, hinged to the 
bar F, and adapted to rest against the cleat H, 
the stud Kupon the side of bar F, and the slot 
ted brace I, pivoted to the side of standard. A 
and sliding over the stud Kand having a notch, 
L., engaging the latter when the table is ex 
tended, as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
?? 
7 ? 
JACKSON MICCLINTICK. 
Witnesses: 
H. D. GROWE, 
W. J. BAILEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US275936.txt	(No Model.) 
No.275,936, 
E, NORTON & J. G. HODGSON, 
SHEET METAL CAN. 
Patented Apr. 17, 1883. 
127. 
I mm- IE-1 
w I 
A27.7. 
At 2. 
 
 
 
 
 
Meanesses: - 
Aaventory: 
C'7%.s. 
wer 74-day 8-a-6 7 (see c4. 
viet-Zrayu, 
Washington, D.C. 
imumumumum 
f 
1. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN NORTONAND JOHN G. HODGSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNORS 
TO SAID, NORTON AND OLIVER W. NORTON, OF SAME PLACE. 
SHEET-METAL CAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 275,936, dated April 17, 1883. 
Application filed March 5, 1883, (No model.) 
Io by a double seam. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, EDWIN NoRTON and 
JOHN G. HODGSON, citizens of the United 
States, residing in Chicago, in the county of 
5 Cook and State of Illinois, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Sheet-Metal 
Cans, of which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
cans the ends of which are secured thereon 
Heretofore in securing ends or covers on 
cans by means of a double seam difficulty has 
been experienced in making a tight joint at 
the point where the side seam in the body of 
; 5 the can is folded with the flange of the cover, 
owing to the greater thickness and stiffness 
at this point, and consequent difficulty of fold 
ing. This difficulty has heretofore been ob 
viated by providing the can-body with a seam 
2 o less ring, which is folded, with the can-cover, 
into a double seam, as shown in the Letters 
Patent to Edwin Norton, No. 255,012, dated 
March 14, 1882; but this method is of course 
open to the objection of the additional ex 
25 pense attendant upon the use of the seamless 
ring. 
lin the present invention we have devised a 
means whereby the can-body having a sol 
dered side sea in may be folded with the can 
3o cover, so as to form a tight double seam or 
joint; and the invention consists in providing 
the flange of the cover with a slight enlarge. 
ment or lip at the point where it is folded 
over the side seam in the can-body. The can 
body, at the side seam, is of course composed 
of two thicknesses of tin, which is addition 
ally thickened and stiffened by the solder. 
At this point, therefore, when the can-body 
is folded with the flange of the can-cover, as 
heretofore made, said flange is too short to 
form a tight joint, owing to the greater thick 
ness and stiffness of the stock in the side seam 
of the can-body, and the consequent greater 
length of the separate bends or folds compos 
ing the seam and the edge of the flange of the 
cover during the operation of forming the 
seam often comes untucked at this point, ren 
dering the joint defective. By increasing the 
the breadth of the flange at this point this 
difficulty is obviated and a perfect joint is 
made. 
In Figures 1 and 2 of the accompanying 
45 
SO 
35 
O 
Witnesses: 
H. M. MUNDAY, 
T. EVERETT BROWN, 
drawings, which form a part of this specifi 
cation, we have shown in section each of the 
two ways of applying the countersunk or 5 
flanged head to a can-body for forming a double 
seam shown or described in the patent to Wil 
son, Green, and Wilson, No. 24,772, of July 
12, 1859, reissued December 7, 1869, as No. 
3,757, and provided with our improvement. 
Fig. 3 is a similar sectional view of the double 
Figs. 4 and 5 are respect 
seam completed. 
ively a plan and a side view of the cover adapt 
ed to be applied to can-bodies as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, respectively. 
In the drawings, A represents the call-body, 
or a portion thereof. A? is the side seam 
therein. B is the countersunk cover or head, 
provided with a flange, b. The flange b, at 
the point where it is folded with the side seam 
in the body of the can, is provided with an en 
largement or lip, b', which adapts said flange 
to be properly folded with the can-body at 
this point, where it is composed of two thick 
nesses of tin soldered together. The sections 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 are taken through 
the side seam in the body of the can. The 
cover, with its flange b, provided with its en 
largement l', may be applied directly to the 
can-body, as shown in Fig. 1, and then folded 
into the seatin shown in Fig. 3; or a flange, ct, 
may be laid off on the body of the can, as 
shown in Fig. 2, and the cover then applied 
thereto, in which case the flange of the cover 
should be first folded into the form show I in 
Fig. 2. 
It will thus be seen a can cover or head pro 
vided with our improvement may be formed 
into a double seam just the same as the ordi 
nary flange, and in either of the ways indi 
cated in the Wilson, Green, and Wilson pat 
ent before referred to. 
We claim 
The can-body A, in combination with the 
head B, secured thereto by a double seam, 95 
and provided with flange b, having enlarge 
ment b' at the side seam in the body of the 
can, substantially as specified. 
Chicago, February 28, 1883. 
EDWIN NORTON. 
JOHN G, HODGSON. 
7 or 
S. 
85 
9o 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276036.txt	(No Model.) 
W. HEBDON. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
METHOD OF AND MACHINE FOR SHRINKING, DRYING AND 
FINISHING CLOTH, 
No. 276,036, 
Patented Apr. 17, 1883. 
N 
re-re 
  
 
 
 
 
RS S 2. 
A44. Hitti V 
 
 
2. 
Sts. SS 
 
2422.2V 
44 yeave \as 
bill 
  
INVENTOR; 
24%22 
view 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
N. Perers, Photo-Lithograph.cr. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
W. HEBDON. 
- 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
METHOD OF AND MACHINE FOR SHRINKING, DRYING, AND 
FINISHING CLOTH, 
No. 276,036. 
Patented Apr. 17, 1883. 
 
( 
 
Y SSS A 5. 
 
 
 
WTNESSES: 
a 
6.Wyver 
(2-62.2% 
INVENTOR: 
2%- 
BY Mueck. /G 
- 
ATTORNEYS, 
hoto-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HEBDON, OF NEW BRIGETON, ASSIGNOR TO THE AMERICAN 
CLOTH WORKERS COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
METHOD OF AND MACHINE FOR SHRINKING, DRYING AND FINISHING CLOTH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,036, dated April 17, 1883. 
Application filed May 24, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WM. HEBDON, of New 
Brighton, in the State of New York, have in 
vented an Improved Method of and Machine 
for Shrinking, Drying, and Finishing Cloth, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to dampen and 
shrink cloths and other fabrics in such a way 
that the operation will be uniform and rapid, 
then to dry and finish, as hereinafter described. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a sectional view 
On line of y of Fig. 2, illustrative of my appa 
ratus. Fig.2 is a plan view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a side elevation of the drier and the means 
for drawing the cloth through it. Fig. 4 is a 
sectional plan view on line at a of Fig. 3. 
A represents the water-tank; a ct, two rolls 
near the bottom thereof ; b, two pairs of squeez 
ing-rolls arranged over the tank, and a little 
farther apart than the rolls at a. The rolls a ct 
are journaled in the sides of the tank and the 
rolls b in a supporting-frame above the tank. 
In this frame are alsojournaled the rolls ee, 
from the latter of which, as shown in Fig. 1 of 
the drawings, the damping-sheet passes be 
tween the frontpair of squeezing-rolls bb down 
into the tank, around the rolls at a, up to and 
between the second pair of squeezing-rolls and 
to the roll c. At the ends of said supporting 
frame are journaled the friction-rolls dd, the 
one next to the drier not being used when the 
drier is at that end. 
B represents the drier-frame, which may be 
connected by a hook and eye or other detach 
able connection with either end of the roller 
supporting frame on the tank, so that either 
roll c or e will be the winding and the other 
the unwinding roll, as the drier may be con 
nected with one or the other side of the roller 
supporting frame. Thus it will be perceived 
that one of the rolls c e serves to discharge 
one piece of cloth while the other is receiving 
a second piece. 
In the drier-frame B is arranged the tube?, 
which is supplied with steam by a pipe, h, con 
nected by a flexible tube with the steam-space 
of a boiler, the tubef being bent to form spaces 
for the reception of the rolls i i, which are 
journaled in the frame B, and around which 
the cloth passes, and being provided at the 
lowest points of its bends with the pipes g to 
allow the water of condensation to escape. 
Over each end of the tube f is arranged a fin 
ishing or pressing roller, k, the one next to the 
tank being made to press the cloth as it comes 
from the roll e, as shown in Fig. 1 of the draw. 
ings, and both being pressed down on the 
cloth by springs, which act upon their bear 
ings. Over each upward convexity of the tube 
fare arranged the friction-rolls l, which press 
the cloth to the tube. 
D is a frame carrying the roll m, which may 
be operated by a hand-crank to draw the cloth 
from the roll e, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3 of 
the drawings, through the drying-frame and 
to wind up the same. 
In Fig. 3 of the drawings, a represents four 
double pulleys and a belts for connecting the 
said pulleys with the pulley m, the belts being 
so arranged as to rotate the rollers i i in the 
same direction, to assist the forward move 
ment of the cloth which is being drawn through 
the drying-frame. 
The operation by which I shrink, dry, and 
finish the cloth is as follows: As shown in Fig. 
1 of the drawings, the cloth passes from the 
bolt to the roller c, on which it is to be wound 
With the dampening - sheet, is then carried 
over the friction-roll d, around the bolt-board, 
and up again over the friction-roll d to the 
roll c, the bolt being thus hung or supported 
in a bag or loop of the cloth. The damp 
ening-sheet is wound on roll 0 at the same 
time with the cloth, and the roll c, as well as 
the roll e, is provided with a hand-crank on its 
shaft. After the dampening-sheet has been 
drawn through the water and wrapped about 
the fabric the outer end, which has last come 
from the cloth-board, is carried through the 
drier. Here it is first passed under roll, then 
under rolls ii, and then under the second roll 
k to the drawing-roll m, being thus drawn 
through the drying-frame in close proximity 
to the steam-heated tube?, which is provided 
with the spring-valve in and air-inlet valve 0, 
as shown in Fig. 4 of the drawings, to regulate 
the steam-pressure and admit air when the 
steam is cut off. As the cloth is dampened 
when of a single thickness and spread to its 
full width, the shrinking is uniform, while the 
55 
6 
75 
85 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
95 
OC 
 
2 
26,036 
The advantages of my invention consist in . 
the continuity and rapidity of its operations, 
the uniformity in the dampening and shrink 
ing, and in the thoroughness with which the 
cloth is dried and finished. It is also to be 
observed that the dampening, shrinking, dry 
ing, and finishing may all be carried on at the 
same time, while the map may be laid and a 
beautiful finish given to faced goods by pass 
ing them fag end foremost over the heated me 
tallic surfaces; also, that the middle crease in 
the cloth is removed, so that in doubling it for 
cutting the selvages may be placed edge to 
edge and the cloth cut to the best possible ad 
vantage. 
What I claim, as new and of my invention 
S 
1. A method of shrinking, drying, and fin 
ishing cloth and similar fabrics, which consists 
in first rolling a single thickness of material 
in a dampening-sheet, then passing it over a 
heated surface, and finally pressing it, as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination of the rolls a, b, end roll, 
d, and rolls c e, to allow the cloth and dampen 
ing-sheet to be simultaneously wound in alter 
nate layers about the roll c, as described. 
3. The combination, with the roll e, of the 
rolls i kl, the tubef, and the roll m, to enable 
the cloth to be drawn from said roll over a 
heating-surface, as described. 
45 
So 
55 
WILLIAM EEBDON. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. D. WALKER, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
drawing of it through the frame of the drier. 
by the hand-operated roll m. on the frame D 
enables it to be completely dried and perfectly 
finished. The drawing-frame D is now discon 
nected from the drying-frame and the latter 
from the roller-supporting frame, so that each 
may be separately moved around to the other 
end of the roller-supporting frame, where they 
may be again connected with said roller-sup 
porting frame and with each other. That one 
of the rollers ee which was before the winding 
roll now becomes the unwinding-roll, and the 
one which was the unwinding-roll now becomes 
the winding-roll. 
The tank is provided with a central super 
posed roll, 0, for shrinking canvas, duck, and 
linens which require to be saturated. This 
may be done without interfering with the or. 
dinary dampening operation, the material be 
ing wound directly from the tank to the roll 
and there left for the water to drain off from 
it. After remaining over night I usually run 
the canvas, duck, or linen through the drier 
and on the roller in before commencing to 
dampen cloth. 
p represents rollers over which the canvas 
is carried when too wet for contact with the 
tube.f. Then it passes around rollers i i and 
out to the winding-roll m. It is sometimes ad 
visable to pass it a second time through the 
drier. The dampening-sheet r is connected at 
its ends to the rolls c e and passes back and 
forth from one to the other, but sometimes re 
quires to be separated from one roll and passed 
through the drier to prevent it from becoming 
mildewed. 
O 
15 
2 C. 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276136.txt	(No Model.). 
D. DRAWBAUGH, 
ELECTRIO SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR TELEPHONE LINEs. 
No. 276,136, 
Patented Apr. 17, 1883. 
 
 
 
2. 
W YZ 
R V 
 
I 
IHI 
is 
. 
N 
. 
. 
. . 
- is 
\ 
\ V-1 2 
1 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
C63.2 w 
6azel26A26.7% 
/ 764/ 
INVENTOR 
same age Gaugh. 
BY in/lefani -3. 
it? ATTORNEYs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL DIRAWBAUGH, OF EBERLY'S MILL PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE PEOPLE'S TELEPHONE COMPANY, OF NEW YORK. 
ELECTRIC SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR TELEPHONE-LINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,136, dated April 17, 1883. 
Application filed January 18, 1883. (No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL DRAWBAUGH, 
of Eberly's Mill, Cumberland county, State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and . 
useful Improvement in Electric Signaling Ap 
paratus for Telephone-Lines, of which the fol. 
lowing is a specification. 
The invention consists in an electric bell of 
particular construction and an apparatus for 
producing magneto-electric currents for oper 
ating said bell, the arrangement being spe 
cially adapted to serve as a call signal or 
alarm in connection with telephone-lines, al 
though it may be used for other purposes. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows a plan view of the magneto-electric ap 
paratus for producing the current, and also a 
vertical section of the bell on line at a of Fig. 
2. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the bell on line y 
y of Fig. 1, and a side elevation of the mag 
neto-electric apparatus. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like parts. 
A is a compound permanent magnet, which 
here show as formed of two leaves. Between 
said leaves and at the poles of the magnet 
are inserted the flattened ends of two soft-iron 
cores, B, said cores being secured in place by 
screws C. The bodies of the cores project in 
Ward and Stand at right aingles to the arms of 
the magnet. Said bodies are of cylindrical 
form, and between their inner or pole ends, 
D, there is a space, preferably, of about one 
quarter of an inch. Around the cores are 
placed coils of insulated wire, E, the said coils 
being connected. 
IF is an armature - wheel having, as here 
shown, six radial arms, and mounted on a 
shaft, G. The shaft G is held by the pins or 
screws H, entering socketsin its outer extremi 
ties. The screws may pass through brass 
blocks held between the leaves of the mag 
net A. 
J is a pinion on sla?t G, which pinion en 
gages with a gear-wheel, I, the shaft of which 
passes through a sleeve - bracket, K, and is 
provided at its outer end with a crank, M. 
Bracket K is secured to the magnet A by the 
screw L. 
It will be seen that by turning the crank M. 
the gear-wheel I, through the pinion J, rotates 
the shaft G, whereby the arms of the arma. 
5 5 
ture. wineel F are caused to pass rapidly be 
tween the inner ends, D, of the cores B. The 
effect of this is to cause currents of electricity 
to be induced in the coils E, a direct and a 
reverse current being produced on the passage 
of each arm of the armature-wheel F through 
the space between the ends D of the coils. It 
follows, therefore, that with an armattle. Wheel 
having six arms, as here shown, twelve cur. 
rents will be induced in the coils, said cur. 
rents moving alternately in opposite direc 
tions at each complete revolution of sail wheel. 
I do not limit myself to an armature-wheel 
having the particular number of arms here 
shown, inasmuch as that number may be in 
creased or diminished, as desired. Neither do 
I limit myself to the particular arrangement 
of gearing as shown for rotating saiti arina 
ture-wheel, inasmuch as other arrangements 
imay be adopted to secure the same results. 
The electric bell to be operated by the cur. 
rents, produced as above described, is coll 
structed as follows : Q is a base or standard, 
hollowed out in cup form to receive the arch 
of the bent magnet N, which is secured in a 
vertical position by means of the screw O, en 
tering the nut or block Y. In said block Y, 
which may be of brass, is fastened, by Soldier 
or otherwise, the spring S, on the upper end of 8c 
which is attached the armature T. To the ends 
of the magnet N are attached soft - iron cores 
U, which project at right angles to and between 
the arms of the magnet. Surroundling said 
cores are coils V, of insulated wire. P is a 
standard attached by screws or other conven 
ient means to the base Q, and serving to sup 
port the bell W. To the upper end of the ar. 
mature T is fastened, by passing through an 
eye in said amature or otherwise, the bell 
ihammer X. The armature T passes between 
the poles of the cores U. Said cores may be 
brought nearer together or farther apart by 
means of the rod Z, which is fastened in One 
arm of the magnet at a. and passes loosely 
through an aperture in the spring S and in the 
other arm, and is provided with a nut, R., Work 
ing in its threaded extremity. By turning the 
nutlin one direction the two arms of the mag 
net are pressed toward each other, and by turn 
ing it in the opposite direction they are allowed 
to spring apart. The free ends of the wires 
75 
90 
EOO 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
 
A 
55 
gles thereto, coils of insulated wire surround 
ing said pole-pieces and included in the cir 
cuit, and an armature of inductive material ar 
ranged and supported between the inner ends 
of said pole-pieces, substantially as described. 
2. In combination with an apparatus for pro 
ducing alternating currents in an electric cir 
cuit, a permanent magnet of substantially horse 
shoe form having a pole-piece attached to the 
inner side of each of its arms and at right an 
gles thereto, coils of insulated wiresurrounding 
said pole-pieces and included in the circuit, an 
armature of inductive material arranged and 
supported between the inner ends of said pole 
pieces, and a means actuated or controlled by 
the movements of the said armature for pro 
ducing a signal or alarm, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination of a pel'nallent magnet 
of substantially horseshoe form and having a 
pole-piece attached to the inner side of each of 
its arms and at right angles thereto, coils of 
insulated wire surrounding said pole-pieces, an 
armature of inductive material arranged be. 
tween said pole-pieces, and a means for adjust 
ing the said pole-pieces nearer to or farther 
from said armature, substantially as described. 
4. In a magneto electric machine, the coin 
bination of a permanent magnet of substan 
tially horseshoe form having a pole-piece at 
tached to the inier side of each of its arms 
and at right angles thereto, coils of insulated 
wire surrounding said pole-pieces, an arma 
ture of inductive material, and a means for 
moving said armature through the space be. 
tween the inner ends of the pole-pieces, sub. 
stantially as described. 
5. In a magneto-electric machine, the con 
bination of a permanent magnet of substall 
tially horseshoe form and having a pole-piece 
attached to the inner side of each of its arms 
and at right angles thereto, coils of insulated 
Wire surrounding said pole-pieces, and an ar. 
mature of inductive material having radial 
arms and adapted to rotate so as to cause said 
arms to pass successively between the inner 
ends of the pole-pieces, substantially as de.. I oo 
scribed. 
90 
75 
DANIEI, I) RAWBAUGH. 
Witnesses: 
GEO, KUNKEL, 
I, W. JACOBS. 
O 
IS 
forming the coils E of the magneto-electric ap 
paratus are sectured to the binding-screws 12 
of the bell, and said binding - screws are also 
connected, two ends of the wires passing around 
the bell-coils W. The other ends of the wires 
of the coils V are joined together, so that there 
is a complete circuit extending through the 
coils E and the coils V. The cores U of the 
bell. coils V are permanently polarized by in 
duction from the magnetN. Consequently when 
a current is passed through said coils W the 
magnetism of one core is neutralized, while that 
of the other is strengthened, and the latter at 
tracts the armature to Ward it, The movement 
of the armature toward one or the other core 
depends, obviously, upon the direction of the 
current, a direct current causing it to be at 
tracted in one direction, a reversed current in 
the other, 
It has already been explained that whenever 
an arm of the armature. Wheel F passes between 
the cores C two currents are generated in the 
coils E, and hence in the circuit in which they 
are placed, one current being direct, the other 
reversed. The result of these currents alter. 
nately affecting the bell - armature is to move 
it first in one direction and then in the other, 
and thus to cause each end of the bell-hammer 
to strike the bell in turn. There will therefore 
occur for each revolution of the armature. Wheel 
F, having six arms, twelve strokes on the bell. 
It will be seen that inasmuch as by this ar. 
rangement I obtain a peal by single rotation 
of the armature-wheel it is not necessary to ro 
tate the latter at very high speed to obtain a 
continuously-sounding alarm, as is the case 
with other apparatus for making signals by 
magneto-electric currents. The multiplying 
gearing for rotating the armature can conse 
quently be simple and easily unade, and its 
presence for all practical purposes is not a ne 
cessity. I have found that the armature-wheel 
can be rotated by a crank-arm applied directly 
to its shaft with all necessary velocity for sig 
naling purposes; but to Secure a uniformly 
continuous and loud peal multiplying-gearing, 
substantially as shown, is preferably used. 
claim as my invention 
i. In combination with an apparatus for pro 
ducing alternating currents in an electric cir 
cuit, a permanent magnet of substantially horse 
shoe form having a pole-piece attached to the 
inner side of each of its arms and at right an 
45 
SO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276236.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
WAGON JACK, 
Patented Apr. 24, 1883, 
 
As 
 
   
s SS 
FI s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
i 
SE 
SNNXxx 
S 
SS RN 
 
  
E. 
: 
 
ity aia 
27. 
- 
772 Zveza Zaz 
6. 6. e 
RS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
w 
W. G., GARTH, 
No. 276,236, 
 
 
 
 
 
h 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER G. GARTH, OF LODEBAR, VIRGINIA. 
WAG ONJACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,236, dated April 24, 1883. 
Application filed February 20, 1883. (No model.) 
: 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER G. GARTH, of 
Iodebar, Nelson county, Virginia, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
5 Wagon-Jacks; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full and accurate description 
of the same. 
My invention relates to that class of wagon 
jacks wherein the jack is provided with a 
1o rack and latch to hold it at the desired eleva 
tion, and a lever whereby said jack may be 
raised step by step or lowered in the same 
manner; and it consists, first, in a double full 
crum for said lever, whereby a small pivot-pin 
I5 may be employed and the jack not be disabled 
When, by reason of long use, the pivot-pin shall 
be weakened or broken; second, in an ar. 
rangement of step-pins or studs longitudinally 
along the side of the jack for engagement with 
20 the lever, so that said lever may engage or dis 
engage by a lateral instead of a longitudinal 
movement. 
That others may fully understand my inven 
tion, I will particularly describe it, having ref. 
25 erence to accompanying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a vertical central section of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a transverse section. 
A is the jack post or frame, provided with a 
3o central longitudinal cavity, within which the 
jack B may slide. At its bottomitis provided 
with a foot to stand on the ground. 
At the top of the jack-post there is a saddle, 
b, to receive the axle or other object to be 
Along one edge of the jack B there is a se 
ries of ratchet-teeth, d, and in a proper location 
on the jack-post Athere is a pivoted latch, E, 
adapted to engage with the teeth d when the 
4o jack is raised up and prevent its descent until 
the latch has been forcibly withdrawn from 
engagement with said teeth. This may be done, 
when desired, by means of the thumb-piece of 
said latch, the jack having first been lifted out 
35 raised. 
- 45 of engagement by means of the lever F. 
The jack-post A is provided with a trans. So 
The jack is also provided with a series of 
studs or teeth, g, which project from its side 
to furnish points of engagement for the end 
of the lever F. 
verse ledge, h, and above said ledge there are 
sockets to receive the joint-pin i, whereby the 
lever Fis attached to the jack-post. The lever 
F, the joint-pini,and the ledge hare also organ 
ized and arranged with reference to each other 55 
that said lever bears upon the ledge h mainly 
as its fulcrum, but also upon the joint-pin to 
a lesser degree. By this means the pin may 
be made less in diameter than usual, and the 
principal fulcrum for the lever being a rigid 6o 
ledge constituted by a part of the jack-post 
itself, there will never be danger of breaking 
down the fulcrum in lifting heavy loads. The 
joint pin and ledge are longer than the thick 
ness of the lever F, so that the latter may have 65 
a movement and adjustment sidewise to per 
mit it to be easily disengaged from the teeth 
or studs g by a sidewise movement, and, pass 
ing outside others, to engage with another of 
said studs by a counter sidewise movement. 
Having described my invention, what Iclaim 
as new is 
1. The jack-post provided with the solid full 
crum h, and the lever F, pivoted at i, so as to 
rest also upon the fulcrum h, combined with 75 
the jack A, provided along its side with the 
studs g, adapted to engage the short arm of 
said lever E and the latch E, substantially as 
set forth. 
To 
2. In a wagon jack, the post A, provided 8o 
with a lever, F, fulcrumed thereto, so that it 
may move sidewise on said fulcrum, combined 
with a jack, B, provided with studsg, project 
ing laterally from its side, whereby the lever 
may engage or disengage by a sidewise move- 85 
ment upon its fulcrum. 
W. G., GARTH, 
Witnesses: 
R. D. O. SMITH, 
AUG. S. JORDAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276336.txt	(Model.) 
No. 276,336. 
L. BAUMEISTER, 
PORTABLE BRACKET, 
Patented Apr. 24, 1883, 
 
N. ETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
46Zopaez. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEOPOLD BAUMEISTER, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, 
PORTABLE BRACKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,336, dated April 24, 1883. 
- 
Application filed December 18, 1882. (Model.) 
O 
" 
. 
20 
IS 
25 
claims. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LEOPOLD BAUMEISTER, 
a citizen of Baden, Germany, residing at 
Bridgeport, in the county of Fairfield and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Portable 
Brackets; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters and fig 
ures of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to brackets adapted to 
serye as supports for clothing, lights, or other. 
articles. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
bracket adapted to be readily secured to a 
wall, mirror, or other smooth surface to sup 
port a light, or for hanging up clothing or other 
articles. 
The invention consists in the features of 
construction and combinations of parts here 
inafter fully described, and pointed out in the 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of my improvement. Fig. 2 is a reverse plan 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a central vertical 
section of the same when not in use. Fig. 4 
is a similar view, showing the bracket applied 
to a wall, and provided with a candle-holder 
and candle. 
A represents the shell or case of the bracket, 
preferably made of metal. 
B represents a screw arranged within the 
case, and provided at its inner end with a disk, 
B', and at its opposite end with a pin-exten 
sion, I. 
C is a rubber disk pressed to the form shown 
in the drawings, and provided with the ring 
C, adapted to be brought in contact with the 
wall or other surface. 
D represents a thimble or sleeve soldered 
within the outer end of the case A to receive 
a nut, E, which receives the screw B, and is 
pivoted to an arm, G. This arm is provided 
with a slot or recess, K, to receive the pin I of 
the screw, and the outer end of said arm is 
So provided with a screw-threaded extension, L, 
to receive a candle-holder, N, for the reception 
of the candle M. 
F is a collar or ring secured to the. inner 
45 
40 
- 
end of the nut E to prevent the removal of 
said nut from the case. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
The outer exposed edge of the elastic ring C 
is moistened or wet and pressed tightly against 
the wall or other surface to which it is to be 
secured. 
The arm G is then raised and turned 
to turn the nut E, thus operating the screw 
B until the disk B is sufficiently withdrawn 
from the wall to form an air-space, O, thus re 
taining the bracket in place and engaging the 
pin with the recess K of the arm G to hold 
said arm in the position shown in Fig. 4. 
Said arm is then ready to be used as a hanger 
for clothes or other articles, and, if desired, 
the candle-holder N may be screwed onto the 
extension to support a candle, 
The device as thus described is especially 
adapted for the use of travelers or other per 
sons requiring a portable bracket. It is also 
designed to be attached to a mirror for use as 
a light-holder for shaving or other toilet pur. 
It will be apparent that many slight changes 
in the details of construction may be resorted 
to without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention; hence I would have it understood 
that I do not limit myself to the precise con 
struction herein shown and described, but re 
serve to myself the right to make all such al 
terations and modifications in form atnd con 
struction as may properly fall within the scope 
of my invention. 
poses. 
t 
- 
- 
I claim- 
1. The combination of a shellor case, with an 
elastic disk and operating-screw, a nut ar 
ranged within said case, and an arm pivotally 
secured to said nut and provided with the 
threaded extension Li, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the case and elas 
tic disk, of a screw, B, having a disk, B', and 
a pin-extension, I, a thimble, D, a nut, E, 
having a collar, F, and an arm, G, pivoted to 
said nut, and having a recess, K, and a screw 
thread extension, L, adapted to receive a Can 
dile, M, substantially as set forth. . 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
LEOPOLD BAUMEISTER. 
Witnesses: 
- 
ELIN, BALDWIN, 
JULIUS PALM. 
55 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276436.txt	 
 
(No Model.) 
H. S. LORD & R. E. DAY, 
F0AT FOR, WATER CLOSET WAWES, 
No. 276,436. 
. 
Patented Apr. 24, 1883. 
2 3.1% 2 - 
3 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-lithographor, washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY S. LORD AND ROBERT E. DAY, OF HARTFORD, CONN, ASSIGNORS 
TO THE HARTFORD SANITARY PLUMBING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FLOAT FOR WATER - CLOSET VALVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,436, dated April 24, 1883. 
Application filed July 12, 1882. (No model.) 
IO 
I 5 
To all achom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, HENRY S. LORD and 
ROBERTE, DAY, of Hartford, in the county 
of Hartford and State of Connecticut, have in 
vented new Improvements in Floats for Wa 
ter-Closet Valves; and we do hereby declare 
the following, when taken in connection with 
accompanying drawings and the letters of ref. 
erence marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, and which said 
drawings constitute part of this specification, 
and represent, in 
Figure 1, a side view; Fig. 2, a vertical cen 
tral section. 
This invention relates to the construction 
of a float to operate the valve in water-clos 
ets, such as known as the Eartford Sanitary 
Closet,' and in which the inflow of water is 
checked by means of a float arranged in a 
chamber adjacent to and in connection with 
the closet-bowl, whereby when the water in the 
bowl is raised to a certain elevation it will lift 
the float and cut off the inflow; or, when the 
Water is drawn off, the float is of sufficient 
weight to open the inlet-valve and permit the 
inflow of Water. If the float be made in the 
usual manner, from sheet metal, it will cor 
rode more or less, because of its contact with 
tle water, and the unavoidable gases which 
must, to a greater or less extent, enter the 
chamber around the float. This corrosion 
sooner or later destroys the metal to such an 
extent as to permit water to enter the float, 
after which it is useless. A coating upon the 
metal will not prevent such corrosion or in 
jury to the float. 
The object of this invention is the construc 
tion of a float which will obviate these difficul 
ties; and it consists essentially in a float 
4o made complete from glass, which is not af. 
fected by the influences so detrimental to a 
metal float, the said float constructed with 
a neck combined with a metal socket secured 
to the neck, and by which socket it is secured 
to the lever, as more fully hereinafter de 
scribed, and with a neck combined with a 
45 
35 
25 
. 
Witnesses: 
W. L. MATSON, 
J. C. ABBOT. 
- 
metal socket secured thereto for attachment 
to the lever, as more fully hereinafter de 
scribed. 
A represents the float, which is spherical 
in form, or substantially the usual shape for . 
this class of floats. It is blown through a neck, 
B, made as thin as practicable, so as to insure 
the requisite floating property. The neck B 
projects radially from the top, and to this the 
attaching device is applied. This attaching 
device consists of a cup-shaped socket, C, the 
opening of which is a little larger than the 
neck B, so as to set over the neck. The neck 
is preferably made inverted-frustum-of-cone 
shape, as seen in Fig. 2. The inside of the 
socket is constructed with inwardly-projecting 
ribs or lugs a on the upper or closed end of 
the socket. It is provided with a loop, D, or 
other device by which it may be attached to 
the valve-lever. The socket is secured to the 
neck by first placing plaster-of-paris, in a 
moistened state, around the neck, and then 
setting the socket over, the plaster flowing 
around the lugs a, and, because of the inverted 
conical shape of the leck and of the projec 
tions a, so soon as the plaster is set the Socket 
is firmly secured. 
It is well known that water or gases from 
sewers or water-closets have no effect upon 
glass, not even to stain or color it, as is the 
case with porcelain or porcelain-covered arti 
cles; hence this float remains perfectly clean, 
and retains its natural condition so long as it 
is in use, irrespective of water or outside influ 
6C0S 
We claim 
The hollow body A, made from glass, and 
constructed with a neck, B, combined with a 
metal socket, C, secured to said neck, and con 
structed for attachment to the lever, substan 
tially as described. 
HENRY S. LORD. 
ROBERT E. DAY. 
55 
65 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276536.txt	(Model.) 
No. 276,536. 
 
W. S. HOKE. 
CATCH FOR UMBRELLA HANDLES. 
as 
Patented Apr. 24, 1883. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER. S. EIOKE, OF PEIILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
HALF TO CHAS. S. WESTCOTT, OF SAME PLACE. 
CATCH FOR UMBRELLA-HANDLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,536, dated April 24, 1883. 
Application filed May 29, 1882. (Model.) 
5 
O 
IS 
2 
25 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER. S. HoKE, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia, and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and valuable Improvement in Catches for Um 
brella-Elandles; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the construction and operation of the 
same, reference being had to the annexed draw 
ings, making a part of this specification, and to 
the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereol. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a side view of my device. Fig. 2 is also a 
side view. Fig. 3 is a side view of the slide, 
and Fig. 4 is a sectional view of the same. 
This invention has relation to umbrella 
catches; and it consists in the construction 
and novel arrangement of a cylindrical catch 
or sleeve having an annular depression or 
groove around its middle portion formed with 
stop-shoulders, and at each end of said sleeve 
an angular or curved slot, the same to receive 
and engage a collar or ring having around the 
same the annular rib-bearing for the umbrella 
braces, all as hereinafter more fully shown and 
described. 
In the annexed drawings, the letter A indi 
cates an umbrella stick or handle having the 
upper pin, a, and the lower pin, af. 
B designates a sleeve or cylinder catch de 
signed to slide vertically upon the stick or 
handle A, and to have a limited circular move 
inent to enable it to be operated. It is pro 
vided at each end with an L-shaped or curved 
slot, as indicated at bb', to engage respectively 
the pins or stops at or at of the stick when the 
umbrella - frame is raised or lowered. This 
sleeve B is provided with an annular groove, 
depression, or guide, b, around its middle por. 
tion, which fornus the seat for the collar or ring 
C. The collar or ring C is therefore arranged 
to permit the sleeve to turn easily in its bear 
ings in either direction for a short distance, 
and remains stationary during this movement 
of the sleeve upon the stick, being steadied by 
the bracesa', attached to the notched ribc, and 
connecting the same to the ribs a' of the um 
 
55 
7) 
75 
brella-frame. The annular depression, seat, or 
guide b is provided with the shoulders or 
stops b, and the collar C is formed with shoul 
diers or stops c', which are separated by a 
greater interval than that between the stops l'. 
The sleeve is designed to have limited play in 
a circular direction back and forth with re 
spect to the collar C, and its circular play is 
limited by the engagement of its stops or 
shoulders, respectively, with the stops or shoul 
ders of the collar. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
catch for holding an umbrella in a raised or 
closed position, which will dispense with the 
slots and springs, which in the old form disfig 
ure and weaken the stick. By this invention 
it is designed to enable the manufacturer to use 
a more slender and graceful stick, which will 
be strenghtened and rendered durable by the 
bracing action of the sleeve-catclh described. 
A notched revolving ring for the ribs be 
tween two collars of the handle, and a revolv 
ing notched ring on the runner, between two 
collars on it, have been used prior to my in 
vention, and a runner having bayonet-slots in 
its upper and lower end and provided with a 
revolving notched ring is also old, and I claim 
neither of these constructions broadly herein. 
Eaving described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The sleeve B, having groove l', formed 
with shoulders or stops b, and provided with 
the angular or curved catches band b', one at 
each end thereof, in combination with an um 
brella-stick having stops or pins a ca', and a 
brace-collar, C, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination of the grooved sleeve B, 
having groove b, shoulders b, and slots b l', 
with the shouldered collar C having notched 
rib c, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
WALTER S. HOKE. 
90 
Witnesses: 
ALLEN H. GANGEWER, 
HARRY E. HOKE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276636.txt	(No Model.) 
A. T. SCHUESSLER. 
FURNACE FOR, DESUPHURIZING ORES, 
No. 276,636. -- 
% 
( e. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
Pateted May 1, 1883. 
$4 
2 
  
  
2 % 
 
 
 
 
  
  
%%3. 2Z%g  
al 
2 Ga 
% 
  
 
WITNESSES: 
(zo &44-cell-C 
2%. 4. 
. 
INVENTOR 
waws ... ww.sty. 
By 442.47 
ATTORNEYi 
 
perers, photo-Lithographer, Washins." 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
s: ps. 
AUGUST TH. SCHUESSLER, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
FURNACE FOR DESULPHURIZING or Es. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,686, dated May 1, 1883. 
Application filed June 29, 1882. 
(No model.) 
To all chon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, AUG. TH. SCHUESSLER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at lively, with the smoke flues G-G, respectively, 55 
Newark, in the county of Essex and State 
5 of New Jersey, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Furnaces for Desulphurizing 
Ores, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
that class of furnaces which are employed for 
desulphurizing ores; and the invention con 
sists essentially in a furnace composed of a 
series of furnace-chambers connected at their 
bottoms by flues which tap a chimney common 
to all, each chamber having a fire-place, an air 
supply opening above and directly over the 
fire-place, and a steam-pipe in the combustion 
chamber of the fire-place and over the grate 
therein, and having a nozzle projecting into 
the air-opening above the fire-place, the ar 
2o. rangement being such that currents of air are 
directed onto the gases rising from the fire 
places to effect their complete combustion, while 
\ at the same time the sulphur in the ore being 
treated is effectively oxidized and removed. 
- In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a horizontal section. Fig. 2 is a verti 
cal section in the plane at ac, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letters A A' A' A' des 
3o ignate a series of desulphurizing - chambers 
which are grouped around a common chimney, 
B. In the example represented by the draw 
ings I have shown four such desulphurizing 
chambers; but this number may be varied to 
35 suit circumstances. Each of the chambers 
A A' A' A' is provided with a fire-place, C. C. 
C C8, and with a door, DDDD9. The cham 
bers A A' A' A' are grouped round the com 
mon chimney B, and they communicate with 
this chimney by smoke-flues G. G. G. G. Each 
of these smoke-fues communicates with its re 
spective chamber through an opening, c c' cc, 
in the sole of said chamber inside of and be. 
neath the fire-places, and each of the smoke 
45 flues is provided with a damper, d d' d' d', so 
that the communication between each chamber 
and the chimney can be opened or closed, as 
may be required. The chamber. A communi 
cates with the smoke-flue G through an open 
ing, e, in the sole of this chamber, the cham 
ber. A communicates with the Smoke-flue G' 
through an opening, e', in the sole of this cham 
ber, and in the same manner the chambers A2 A3 
communicate through openings e'e', respect. 
and the communication between the smoke. 
flues G." G G* G and the openings e elee, re 
spectively, is controlled by dampers ffff. 
By referring to Fig. 1 of the drawings it will 
be seen that the openings e e'ee are situated 6o 
opposite to the fire-places C C C C, respect 
ively, so that the circulation of the heated pro 
ducts of combustion will take place as follows: 
If all the chambers have been charged, fires 
are built in all the fire-places, the dampers d', 65 
d', d', and fare closed, the dampersff", f, 
and d are opened, and the heated gases of all 
the fire-places pass through flue G to the chim 
ney. When the ore in chamber A has been 
desulphurized the damper f' is closed and to 
damper d is opened, (see Fig. 1,) the fire in 
fire-place C8 is drawn out, and the contents of 
the chamber A* are rapidly cooled by a draft 
of air passing through it and out into the chim 
ney. During the time the chamber A'is being 75 
emptied and recharged the ore in chamber A 
is desulphurized, a fresh fire is built in fire. 
place C, the dampers d and f" are closed, and 
the dampers d and fare opened, the chamber 
A is cut out and ready to be emptied and re- 8o. 
charged, and so on. 
In order to effect complete desulphurization 
of the ore in the chambers A A' A' A' it is es 
sential that a sufficient supply of atmospheric 
air shall be admitted to each chamber to effect 85 
complete combustion of the heated gases rising 
from the fire-places, and also to oxidize or burn 
the sulphur in the ore. This object I have at 
tained by arranging in the walls of each of the 
desulphurizing-chambers one or more air-sup 
ly channels, g, through which extends a steam 
ply 
nozzle, h, the air-supply channels being by pref. 
erence made tapering, as shown in Fig. 2, so 
that by the action of the steamjet a powerful 
current of air is drawn into the desulphurizing- 95 
chamber. The steam-nozzles h connect with 
coils i, situated over the grates in the fire-places 
C C C C, so that the steam becomes super 
heated before it issues from the nozzles and 
the temperature in the chambers is not per 
ceptibly reduced. 
I am aware that kilns have long been known 
in which a series of furnace-chambers are coln 
nected at their bottoms by hot-air flues, each 
90 
OC 
 
 
276,636 
- 
- 
2 
of which taps a chimney common to all. Such, 
therefore, I do not broadly claim. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
A furnace for desulphurizing ore, consisting 
of a series of furnace-chambers, each having a 
fire-place, and all connected by horizontal flues 
communicating with a chimney common to all, 
and which respectively open at one end into 
the bottoms of the several chambers directly 
beneath the fire-place therein, each chamber 
having an air-supply opening directly over the 
fire-place and a steam-pipe in the combustion 
chamber of the fire-place and over the grate 
O 
therein having a nozzle projecting into the air- 15 
opening above the fire-place for supplying cur 
rents of air to effect complete combustion of 
the gases as they rise from the fire-place and 
to oxidize or burn the sulphur in the ore, Sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
hand and seal in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
2O 
Witnesses: 
AUG. TH. SCHUESSLER. (L. s. 
J. HERMANN WAHLERS, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276736.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
- - 
- 
H. B. WALBRIDGE, 
No. 276,736. 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
Patented May 1, 1883. 
A271. 
 
 
S 
 
aSee & Rumor-Pont PPPRRR V s a 
a 2 
Woznesses 
2A-2-2-2%. 
/7 were Zor. 
2. s: - 
id-4 o'-ovac. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HENRY B. WALBRIDGE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FIRE - ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,786, dated May 1, 1883. 
Application filed April 26, 1882. (No model.) 
S 
Io 
. 2S 
35 
- 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
rope, one end of which is fastened to the out 
Beit known that I, EENRY B. WALBRIDGE, a side of the building and the other end to the 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook. cable or rope d, and serves as a means for 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New drawing the fire-escape from the roof when 
York, have invented certain new and useful needed, and may be applied upon the outside 55 
Improvements in Fire-Escapes; and I do here. of the building, as shown, or it may be passed 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, down within the building in any proper man 
and exact description thereof, reference being ner. 
had to the annexed drawings and letters of 
When the several parts are in position, as 
reference marked thereon, forming a part of indicated in Fig. 2, and it is found necessary 6o 
this my specification, in which- 
to use the escape, by drawing upon the expel 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a portion ling-rope f the basket D may be drawn from 
of a building with my improved fire-escape ap- its position shown in Fig. 2, and allowed to 
plied thereto, a portion of the flap-door of the descend to its position shown in Fig. 1, ready 
housing represented in the figures being bro- for use. 
ken away, the view showing the escape down 
When the fire escape is applied within a 
from its position represented in Fig.2 and housing, H, upon the roof the housing may 
ready for use. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of I have its flap-door b held in a closed position, 
the fire-escape in position upon a building and as indicated in Fig. 2, by a latch-bolt, which 
may be set free at the first pulling upon the 7o 
ready to be brought into position for use. 
The object of my invention is the production expelling-rope.fby means of a suitable attach 
of a simple, effectual, and ready means of es 
ment to said rope; or, in order to prevent the 
cape from a burning building, and which shall upwardly-swinging door b from being opened 
be so inexpensive as to warrant its general use. by force of wind, it may be either weighted 
wire cable, and d the pulley-block of the fire- inside which clasp firmly and yet do not latch; 
escape. One end of the cabled (or chain, as and in order to guard against ice formation 
the case may be) is attached to the bottom of preventive of due action, the door and roof of 
the basketD, as indicated, and thence is passed the housing H may be provided with an over 
up through the pulley-block d', and so on down hanging brim. 
to the basket, at the top of which it is secured, 
The state of the art in this class of inven 
as indicated in the figures, the length of the tions shows many devices for projecting a fire 
rope being sufficient when doubled to reach escape car or basket from within a housing in 
from the roof a of the building B to the side- or upon a building, one instance of which con 
walkin front thereof, while the pulley-block is sists in a basket or car secured to a chain or 85 
connected with a chain, d, firmly secured in its equivalent passing over a pulley or wheel 
any manner either to the roof of the building pivoted at or near the outer end of a crane 
or to a housing, H, secured to the roof and em- situated in or on the upper part of a building, 
ployed to protect the fire-escape from the the crane being swung out and the basket 
weather. 
When the fire-escape is in position, as indi- to drop to the foot of the building by mechan 
cated in Fig. 1, it is manifest that the basket lism connected with the crane, said mechan 
can be elevated for the reception of personses-ism being operated by pulling a chain or wire 
caping through the windows, and eased down leading down the building and accessible from 
to the sidewalk by a due manipulation of the the different floors and from the ground; but 95 
rope di and it will also be seen that, as the by my invention many of the appliances here 
fire-escape is located centrally of the width of tofore used and liable to derangement in fire. 
the building, the same will be within easy escapes are dispensed with. 
reach from the windows of its several stories. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire t 
D indicates the escape-basket, d the small sufficiently or held in place by springs on the 75 
chain (wound on a reel) being projected so as go 
In the figures, findicates a wire or metal i secure by Letters Patent, is- 
Ioo 
... . 
 
 
 
2 
26,736 
A fire-escape permanently applied to a build- chain, a releasing-cord, a basket or other re 
ing, and its rope or chain, with basket at. ceptacle, means for holding it in position, and 
tached, held upon the building unwound, and a pulley, all substantially as herein described. 1 o 
the basket and free portion of the rope or chain 
EIENRY B, WAIBRIDGE, 
5 bodily lowered by pulling upon an auxiliary 
rope connected to the fire-escape rope, said 
fire - escape comprising an endless rope or 
CHARLEs E. OTIs, 
E. H. QUANTIN. . 
. . 
In presence of - 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276836.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 276,836. 
 
J. LEE, 
GAGE COCK, 
Patented May 1, 1883. 
? 
? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN LEE, OF HAZLETON, PENNSYLVANIA, 
GAGE ????. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,836, dated May 1, 1883. 
Application filed March 1, 1883. (No model.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 5 ed out in the claim. 
55 
75 
- 
15 
. 
angle, so that when the openings in the upper 
Beit known that I, JoHN LEE, a citizen of and lower portions, CD, of the cock are op 
posite to each other they will coincide, and 
will provide a free passage to the exit-spout 
when the upper portion of the valve is open. 
A represents the upper portion of an ordi 
narily - constructed gage-cock, in which the 
puppet is provided with a packing, which fits 6o 
over or upon the valve-seat b. This packing, 
which is usually of an elastic material, con 
stantly needs renewing, and to do the same 
heretofore it has been necessary to remove the 
whole valve. I am aware that to accomplish 
this end valves of this class have been pro 
vided with stop-cocks at the lower portion, 
which have been found to be objectionable, as 
the joints become glued together by reason of 
sediment and unfrequent use, and cannot be 
turned off without removing the same, and as 
my improved valve can be loosened by turn 
ing the nut B this objection is obviated. 
The joints between the upper and lower por 
tions of the valve CD are ground, and they 
are loosened by turning the nut B, which 
unites the parts, and by turning the parts 
upon each other the opening between these 
parts will not coincide, and consequently the 
passage-way will be cut off. 
... If desirable, instead of forming a flat joint 
between the parts C and D, as shown, I may 
provide the same with conical seats, in which 
the holes for the passage-way may be drilled, 
said holes being at an angle with the main 
portions of the valve. 
Flaving thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A gage-cock provided with a vertical cut- 9o 
off and an outlet-tube, the central valve-seat, 
b, with an angular passage-way, a, below said 
seat, in combination with the base D, having 
a coinciding angular passage-way at its top, 
the joints between the parts being ground and 95 
united by a nut, B, substantially as shown, 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
To all whom it may concern : 
the United States of America, residing at Ha 
zleton, in the county of Luzerne and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Gage-Cocks; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
nd exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
Io it appertains to make and us the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvementsingage-cocks; and it con 
sists in providing a gage-cock, faucet, or simi 
lar cut-off valve, the upper part of which is of 
ordinary construction, with a cut-off located 
beneath the valve-seat, which cut-off has an 
gular perforations or openings, by which the 
way is connected to the opening beneath the 
valve-seat, the said parts being united by a 
nut, as will be hereinafter set forth, and point 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
gage-cock, valve, or spigot by means of which 
the upper operating parts can be detached for 
repair without emptying the receptacle to 
which it is attached. 
In the annexed drawings, which illustrate 
my invention, Figure 1 is a side view of the 
gage-cock or faucet constructed in accordance 
with my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical lon 
gitudinal section. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the 
lower portion of the valve, showing the posi 
tion of the opening. 
In the annexed drawings I have shown a 
gage-cock or spigot, the upper part of which 
4o is of ordinary construction, to which my in 
vention is applied, in which the perforation a 
below the valve-seat b is at an angle with said 
valve-seat, and terminates nearer one side of 
... the circumference of the joint ethan the other. 
is provided at its upper, end with shoulders, 
which are embraced by the nut B, for attach 
ment with the upper portion of the valve C, 
and its lower end is screw-threaded, as shown 
So at E, for attachment to the boiler. The exit 
tube or opening d in the lower portion of the 
valve, adjacent to the nut B, is formed at an 
JOHN LEE, 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS HALL, 
C. BACHIMAN, 
45 
The lower portion, D, of my improved valve and for the purpose set forth. 
presence of two witnesses, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US276936.txt	(No. Model.) 
No. 276,936. 
D, TORREY. 
CAR BRAKE. 
Patented May 1, 1883, 
 
l iISH 
N. 
* 
t 
Ter CCeC 
ETTAIREETI 
S 
722. 
2%. 22. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
: 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DOLPHUSTORREY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CAR-BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 276,936, dated May 1, 1883. 
Application filed February 5, 1883. (No model.) 
Io 
15 
25 
35 
55 
. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: . . 
Be it known that I, DOLPHUS TORREY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York,in the State of New York, have invented 
an Improvement in Railroad-Brake Appara 
tus, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
brake apparatus of the class described in my 
applications for Letters Patent No. 65,510, filed 
the 29th June, 1882, and No. 65,855, filed the 
3d, July, 1882, and is to be understood in con 
In those applications I 
nection there with. 
have described the use of an adjusting-bar 
which controls the operating-lever, determin. 
ing its plane of rotation... I have described 
how, by moving the adjusting-bar longitudi 
inally, the motor and operating-levers are made 
to disengage and take reversed positions, and 
at the same time release the brakes. In those 
cases a stress is transmitted from the brake 
beams to effect this purpose, or else it is effect. 
ed by stress of the draw-bar acting through the 
means of lugs upon the levers, which lugs are 
sloped in excess of their angle of friction. I 
now present in this application another means 
of acting upon the adjusting-bar by draw-bar 
pressure to disengage the motor and operat 
ing levers and permit their reversal in posi 
tion. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of one truck and part of 
the body-frame of a car with the invention 
applied. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional eleva 
tion longitudinal to the car, showing the prin 
cipal Working parts. 
To the draw-bar 1 is pivoted a pitman, 2, 
connected to the receiving or motor lever 3, 
which is thus vibrated in a horizontal plane 
as the draw-bar moves in and out. The motor 
lever 3 engages with an operating-lever, 4, 
through oblique-faced lags on their opposing 
faces, so that lever 4 will partake of the move 
ment of the lever 3 so long as the movement 
of the former is confined to a plane parallel to 
that in which the motor-lever 3 is guided. To 
this end the plane of movement of the oper. 
ating-lever is determined by a guide-bar, 6, 
having a long slot, 9, in which the lever works, 
and a lock-bar, 7, on which the guide-barrests. 
The guide-bar and lock-bar are supported in 
a hanger-frame, 12, having pins occupying ob. 
. 
- 
lique slots 10 in the guide-bar, so that the said 
bar will be depressed by a longitudinal move 
mentin one direction and elevated when moved 
in the other direction. This vertical movement 
of the adjusting guide-bar 6 is permitted by 
lugs 11 on the lock-bar 7, resting on bearings 
in the hanger-frame 12, and having oblique or 
beveled ends, so that said lock-bar is auto 
matically elevated when moved in one direc 
tion and allowed to descend when moved in 
the other direction. The bar is pressed end 
wise to its upper position by a spring, 15. 
The operating-lever 4 is connected to a looped 
brake-chain, 22, passing over a pulley, 21, so 
that the operating-lever is made to pull on 
the brakes in whichever way it is moved, pull 
ing the equalizing-lever 23 forward. A piv 
oted lever, 16, is set so that its lower arm rests 
against the end of the lock-bar 7, its upper 
end being held within a notch or keeper in a 
pivoted latch, 19. The free end of the latch is 
held by a catch, 20, which is controlled by a 
magnet, 77, which, when charged, frees the 
end of the lafch 19, so that it can rise. A 
pull-cord, 27, is employed to retract the catch 
20 when the magnet is not in use. 18 is a 
spring attached to the lower arm of the lever 
16, and the bent extension of which is in front 
of and adjoining the equalizing-lever 23. When 
the lever 23 is pulled forward by the action of 
the draw-bar it transmits, through the spring 
18, a stress to the lever 16. If at this time 
the latch 19 be freed, the pressure of the end 
of the lever 16 against the sloped face of the 
notch or keeper in the latch 19 will compel 
the said latch to rise, and thereby free the 
lever 16, which, being free to turn on its pivot, 
allows the stress upon the spring 18 to be 
transmitted to the lock-bar 7 and will shift its 
position. This lock-bar, in moving, carries 
the adjusting-bar 6 with it, and thereby frees 
the engagement between the motor and oper. 
ating-levers, letting the brakes off. With the 
release of the brakes the lever 23 returns to 
its position, freeing the spring 18, when the 
counter-spring 15 will reset the adjusting-bar, 
lock-bar, and lever 16. By these means it is 
necessary for the purpose of releasing the 
brakes and reversing the positions of the mo. 
tor and operating levers to apply only the 
small force required to actuate the catch 20, 
9o 
95 
IOC 
2 
276,936 
the purposes set forth. 
I do not confine myself to the use of the 
whereby there is given an opportunity for the ing-bar set in a chord of the arc of and for 
stress received from the draw-bar to effect the controlling the plane of rotation of the oper 
desired transformations in the apparatus, re- ating-lever, the combination of the chain 22, 
leasing the brakes and reversing the adjust- spring 18, lever 16, latch 19, and catch 20, for 
linent. 
4. The combination, in an adjusting mech 
form of spring 18, as, by mechanical skill sim- anism in which the actuating mechanism is 
ply, a coiled or other form of spring can be connected with and is operated by the draw. 
leadily substituted. I use, when desirable, a bar, of a receiving mechanism comprising a 
branch chain to connect the chain 22 and the locked lever, 16, subjected to stress through a 
Spring 18. 
spring, 18, and a working mechanism com 
Having thus described my invention, the prising an adjusting-bar, 6, substantially as 
following is what I claim as new therein and and for the purposes set forth. 
desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
5. The combination of a catch, 20, a keeper 
1. A double-acting draw-bar brake with a or latch, 19, pivoted lever 16, and a spring, 18, 
reversing mechanism actuated by stress trans- comprising the receiving elements of an ad 
initted from the draw-bar through a chain-loop justing mechanism. 
connection, substantially as and for the pur 
6. The combination of the catch 20 and the 
magnet 77 with the reversing apparatus of a 
poses set forth. 
car-brake, substantially as set forth. 
2. A double-acting draw-bar brake with a 
reversing mechanism operated by stress from 
the draw-bar or buffer through the medium of 
a spring, and a lever governed by a latch or 
tripping device. 
3. In a brake mechanism having an adjust- 
DOLPHUS TORREY. 
Witnesses: 
OCTAVIUS KNIGHT, 
L. M. HOPKINS, 
35 
- 
id 
25 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277036.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. HYDE, 
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC CONDUCTOR, OR, CABLE, 
No. 277,036, 
 
WITWESSES 
?oyas 76-to-e-ty 
c42, /e/2-22 
Patented May 8, 1883. 
s 
IWWEW 
A 3-2 
4-6- 
Attoriei, u / 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J. BURROWS HYDE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC CONDUCTOR OR CABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,086, dated May 8, 1883. 
Application filed February 7, 1883. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, J. BURROWs FIYDE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in the Construction, Preparation, and Training 
of Underground Electric Conductors or Ca 
bles, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had therein to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
My invention relates particularly to that 
class of underground electric conductors which 
consists of insulated wires covered with an 
arming of lead; and my improvement consists 
in the peculiar structure of such cable, that en 
ables me to form two or more distinct cables 
simultaneously from the same press and die. 
At the same time the peculiar structure of the 
cables affords me the largest number of Wires 
for the like proportion of lead with equal duc 
tility of cable. 
My improvement consists, also, in the eco 
nomical form of the cable in its cross-section, 
and in condensing the lead arming by press 
ure-rollers to insure homogenity of the lead 
and to prevent leakage; and also in covering 
or coating the lead with non-conducting ad 
hesive media as a protection to preserve it 
from decomposition and loss of conducting 
power. 
It further consists in the equilateral config 
uration of the cable approaching a triangle, 
whereby an insulated wire is carried in each 
angle and one in the center, and which, when 
produced, I claim as an article of manufac 
ture, as product of a machine which I propose 
to patent hereafter, and in further details of 
construction, as will hereinafter more fully ap 
pear. 
Figure 1 represents a view in cross-section 
of the cable complete. Figs. 2 and 3 repre 
sent end and plan views of pressure-rollers 
for condensing the lead arming. Fig. 4 is a 
perspective view of the series of rollers with 
the cable passing through them, and lig. 5 is 
a view in cross-section of four cables passing 
simultaneously through a compound die. 
8 shows the cable; a, the wires; b, the insula 
tion; c, the lead arming; d", the adhesive exte 
rior coating; die, the pressure-rollers, placed op 
posite each other in pairs, the bearing-sur 
faces cut away to fit the cable-surfaces and ro 
tated by the friction of the cable as drawn 
through them, or they may be provided with 
toothed wheels upon their axles to be rotated 
by power. 
In the construction of my cable I first pre 
pare the wires, preferring to wind them with 
cotton thread in the usual manner, and satu 
irate this covering with an insulating medium 
or compound, as asphaltum, boiled linseed-oil, 
and waste rubber or other equivalent sub 
stance. Such prepared wires, wound upon 
proper reels, are conducted into a press simi 
lar to those for constructing lead pipe, and 
which are usually employed for making lead 
covered cables, for which purpose the forming 
die is constructed for the especial cable to be 
made. In my own case I prepare a compound 
die that shall simultaneously form four cables, 
each with four wires, constituting sixteen wires 
that pass trom their reels at the same time into 
the press, and which operation, by the peculiar 
structure of my cable, enables me to do, as I 
construct my lead - covered conductor with 
three sides, approximating in their position to 
an equilateral triangle with the angles round 
ed off, and the three sides slightly depressed 
or curved inwardly, the whole being of such 
proportion as will admit of four insulated 
wires, one of such wires being in each rounded 
angle and one in the center of the tree. 
This described construction of the cable ren 
ders it very pliable and convenient in laying 
down for use. It will furthermore carry the 
largest practical number of Wires for its sec 
tional area, being at the same time the most 
economical shape for manufacturing. 
In forming a lead-covered cable the melted 
lead is poured from a proper fountinto the cyl 
inder of the press and forced therefron) through 
the dies by hydrostatic pressure. Two difli 
culties are liable to arise therefrom : First, 
the heat from the lead may liquefy the insula. 
tion, and this in a fluid state be pressed from 
the fibrous covering and accumulate until re 
leased by small openings forced through the 
arming, as pin-holes, which admit moisture 
to the impoverished fiber coating when the 
cable is laid; second, the lead during the last 
working of the charge having lost much of 
its heat tends to solidification, hence when 
O 
25 
3C) 
35 
45 
6) 
7 O 
So 
90 
) J 
2 
27,936 
pressed out will give a coating more or less 
granulated, as lead manipulated by a plumber 
in making a wipe-joint, To obviate this R. 
prefer to subject the cable as it passes from 
the press, or afterward, to a condensing pro 
cess by compression-rollers placed opposite 
each other in three divisions or sections, the 
faces of the rollet's being made to fit the sur 
faces of the cable at their points of contact 
and made smoother or serrated as may be 
found preferable, and by proper gearing made 
to move with the speed of the propelled cable. 
The compound cable should be coated thor 
oughly with a non-conducting adhesive sub 
stance. This may be done by drawing it 
through a sponge or other convenient appli 
cation saturated with melted asphalt and oil, 
or any proper resinous media, and should be 
lepeated where thickness is red tired, to pre 
vent its decomposition. and preserve its co 
ducting power. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1. An electric cable comprising a body of 
metal formed with three concave sides, the 
body approximating in cross-section to an 
equilateral triangle, as described, laving with 
in said body insulated electrical conductors, 
for the purpose set forth. 
I claim is 
O 
25 
2. As an article of trade and manufacture, 
a compound electric cable having three equal 
sides, with angles rounded, and an insulated 
conducting-wire embedded within each angle, 
substantially as described. 
3. The method herein described of solidify. 
ing the lead armor of an electric cable, which 
colnsists in passing the cable through press 
ture-rollers, such pressure being applied si 
multaneously as the cables emerge from the 
press or from reels, substantially as set forth. 
4. A lead-coverel electric cable having an 
exterior covering or coating of non-conduct 
ing adhesive medium to protect the lead against 
decomposition and consequent entrance of 
moisture to the inclosed wires, as described. 
5. An electric lead-covered cable triang 
lar in cross-section, and having conducting 
wires embedded therein, the outer surface of 
Said cable being roughened or serrated and 
coated With an adhesive material, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
35 
4. O 
45 
5 O 
J. BUIRROWS HYDE. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. HARRIS, 
HENRY SMIITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277137.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. KNELL, 
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING 
USORY DRAMATIC EFFECTS, 
No. 277,137. 
Patented May 8, 1883. 
os) ?ysts 
& wowev 
 
N. Pereas. ?hot-is-grapher, wish son, D.C. 
a 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. KNELL, OF BOSTON, MASSACEUSETTS, 
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING LLUSORY DRAMATIC EFFECTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,187, dated May 8, 1888. 
Application filed February 26, 1883. (No model.) 
Io 
15 
2 o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES W. KNELL, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements Pertaining to an Appa 
ratus for Producing Illusory Dramatic Effects, 
of which the following is a description, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, where 
Figure 1 is a front view of a stage set for a 
scene embodying my improved apparatus. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of the stage. Fig. 3 is a plan 
view of the mechanism of rollers and belts 
used in transmitting motion to various parts 
of the device or apparatus. The latter is a 
diagram view, showing the relative parts. 
The object of, my improvements (which re 
late to the matters described in the patent 
granted to me April 4, 1882, and numbered 
256,007) is to produce on the theatrical stage 
the appearance of a person, animal, or Vehicle, 
any or all of them traveling along a road, 
course, or path of considerable length. My 
patented device above referred to accom 
lishes this, but omits certain details which 
aid in the illusion, and these details form the 
main part of my improvements, as hereinafter 
fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter a 
denotes a panoramic scene depicted on an 
endless belt of canvas or other suitable mate 
rial, or on a long roll of the same wound about 
vertical rotary cylinders placed well back on 
a stage, the scene being adapted to move, 
through the agency of suitable machinery, 
across the stage from side to side. 
The Wall or the screen b (see Fig. 2) masks 
the endless path a', as described in my Patent 
No. 256,007, and the scene a extends well into 
the wings; but to guard or screen the ends 
and rolls from view from any part of the thea 
ter trees or other suitable natural objects are 
arranged in the Wings to rotate as the main 
scene moves. They may be arranged singly, 
as at c, or upon an endless chain or belt, as at 
d, as indicated in Fig. 2 of the drawings. To 
further aid in the effect, one or more pipes 
25 p 
35 
50 
55 
from a blower are led to suitable concealed 
positions back of screen b, and currents of air 
from the open ends turned upon the figure or 
person supposed to be progressing across the 
stage, and the hair or parts of the dress, as 
ribbons, are caused to flutter and flap, as in 
actual rapid motion in the open air. The 
board floor of the stage tends to destroy the 
illusion, if left uncovered, and to remedy this 
I use a grass mat in the form of an endless 
belt, e, arranged to cover the stage, and it 
passes over horizontal rollers fg at the wings, 
the motion of the exposed part of the mat be 
6. 
ing in the same direction as the main scene a. 
The mat can be secured at its ends by hooks 
or other suitable devices that will allow it to 
be quickly removed from the stage at the end 
of an act. 
The main moving parts, as vertical or hori 
zontal cylinders or rollers and the rotary trees, 
are connected by any ordinary and suitable . 
arrangement of shafting and cog-wheels or 
belts within the skill of the average stage-ma 
chinist. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the panoramic scene, 
endless path, screen, and moving wing-screens, 
all substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the panoramic scene, 
endless path, screen, moving wing-screens, 
and moving grass mat or equivalent stage 
floor covering, all substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the moving wing: 
screens and moving stage-floor covering, all 
substantially as described. 
4. In a stage set for dramatic and scenic 
effects, the combination of a back piece, an 
endless path, moving screen, moving wing 
pieces, and moving stage-floor covering, where 
by the effect of progressive motion of the main 
background scene and the actors on the end 
less path is produced, all substantially as de 
scribed. 
JAMES WM, KNELL. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. L. BURDETT, 
WM. H. MARSH, 
7 O 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277238.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. I. CRAIG. 
DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINE, 
No. 277,238, 
eig. 
Patented May 8, 1883. 
 
 
- 
1. 
Wy 
 
- Mee 
d % & 
 
r 
 
Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washing" D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH A. I. CRAIG, OF MONTREAL, QUEBEC, CANADA. 
DYNAMO-ELECTRIC MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,238, dated May 8, 1883. 
Application filed November 4, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
I 5 
35 
40 
- 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH. A. I. CRAIG, 
of the city of Montreal, in the district of Mon 
treal and Province of Quebec, in the Domin 
ion of Canada, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Dynamo-Electric Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the same. 
This invention consists, first, in improve 
ments in the construction and arrangement of 
the revolving armature; secondly, in an im 
proved commutator; and, thirdly, in a novel 
construction of field-magnet; and it has for its 
object to provide a dynamo-electric machine 
which will produce a stronger current than 
those at present in use, and thus enable me to 
light more lamps with a smaller and more com - 
pact machine, and at the same time to insure 
the thorough ventilation of the parts to pre 
vent heating and simplify and cheapen the cost 
of manufacture. 
Many other advantages will be derived from 
the use of my invention which it is not neces 
sary to explain here; but for complete com. 
prehension of the principle and construction 
of the different parts reference must be had to 
the accompanying drawings, where letters 
similar to those used in the following descrip 
tion indicate like parts, and in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of a dynamo-elec 
tric machine provided with my newly-invented 
armature or bobbin. Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
side view, partly in section, of said bobbin. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section of same. Figs. 4 and 
5 are enlarged details, showing interior con 
struction of armature-bobbins; Figs. 6 and 7, 
sections of my improved commutator; Fig. 8, 
a section of my field-magnet; Fig. 9, detail 
views of conducting-strips; and Fig. 10 is a 
view showing a modified construction of core 
for armature and magnet. 
A is the bed-plate of the machine, and AA' 
the end standards, and BB the field-magnets; 
CC", the polar extensions; D, the armature, and 
D' its shaft, properly journaled, and revolved 
by a belt and pulley in the usual manner. 
The armature D is constructed as follows: 
On the shaft D' are firmly secured two disks 
or flanges, EE", preferably of brass, the same 
being slotted or perforated, as seen at ee, for 
the purpose of allowing the free circulation of 
air through the interior of the armature. F 
represents the core of the armature, made up 
of an annular coil of iron wire wound upon 
another core or center, F, of pasteboard, wood, 
or other non-magnetic material, which may 
further be left hollow in the center, if desired, 
as shown in Fig. 10. It is apparent from the 
drawings that in winding the iron wire IF 
around the pasteboard ring F, when the point 
indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 4- that 
is, the edge of the non-magnetic ring-is 
reached, in order to cover said edge the iron 
wire must be bunched or wound upon itself, 
the direction of the coil, however, being un 
changed. Thus the non-magnetic ring is com 
pletely enveloped on all sides by said iron 
wires, and the surrounding coils of insulated 
wire will be in contact with the metal of the 
core at every point. I have found that by the 
use of my non-magnetic ring in the interior of 
the core the armature may be made much 
lighter than that of Gramme, and the complete 
envelopment of such ring with iron wire gives 
me a result superior to that produced by ordi. 
nary wire cores in a much cheaper and more 
convenient manner. These coils or bobbins 
are represented at G G, and, as will be seen, 
are wound or placed on the core, made up as 
just described, in such a manner as to form a 
circumferential ring of bobbins, as shown in 
IFig. 3, said bobbins being kept separate from 
each other and the whole kept firmly in place 
within the disks E E by strips or bars H. H., of 
wood or other non-conductor, said bars being 
sunk or foreed between each bobbin, and their 
ends being let into recesses formed therefor in 
the peripheries of the disks E E and held 
thereto by screws or other suitable means. 
The wires g g are brought out through the 
apertures e and connected to the commutator 
I, either as shown in Figs. 6 and 7 or in any 
other approved way. This construction of 
armature-viz., the circumferential arrange 
ment of the bobbins-allows me to have the 
armature open from end to end, and thus per 
mits of a free circulation of air through the 
interior. This I have found to be specially 
necessary and desirable in view of the special 
construction of my armature-viz., with coils 
of iron wire (which are well known to give out 
considerable heat during revolution) arranged 
on the inner as well as on the outer periphery 
7 O 
8 
85 
90 
O) 
2 
27,23S 
of the core. My armature unay be revolved 
very close to the poles C C', and the bars HH 
will absolutely prevent the short-circuiting; 
and from the fact of the mass of iron generally 
being reduced in quantity, magnetization and 
demagnetization are very rapidly performed, 
thus enabling the machine to be run at a very 
high rate of speed with but little expenditure 
of power. 
K. K represent sections of the commutator, 
which is divided not only longitudinally, as 
shown in Figs. 2 and 7, but also transversely 
at the line k, as seen in Figs. 2 and 6, thus 
forming, in fact, two commutators in one, two 
collectors being used when it is desired to send 
the current in different directions, or only one 
extending across the face so as to touch both 
the sections K and those marked K', if the 
whole strength of the current is to go to the 
field-magnets and then to line. 
Each of these 
commutator - Sections 
is insulated from the 
others. 
On the central shaft, D', is slipped a brass 
tube, d, having flanges or collars d' d' at each 
end, attached thereto by screwing or otherwise; 
or one collar may be formed in one with the 
tube d and the other collar screwed thereto, 
as shown. 
d represents an insulating-sleeve, made gen 
erally of wood, surrounding the tubed, on which 
are arranged, as shown, conducting-strips L. 
L., of suitable metal, of the shape shown in 
Figs. 6 and 9-i.e., each with an outwardly-pro 
jecting end, l, and a step, l'. The steps l are 
cut out for about half the length of the strip) 
for the purpose of avoiding contact with more 
than one section K or K', as the case may be, 
these steps being arranged alternately, as will 
be seen in Figs. 6 and 9. Each of the out 
wardly-projecting ends l is in contact with one 
of the sections in of the divided commutator 
disk marked M, to the construction of which 
disk I lay no claim, this connection of these 
parts, however, being slown in Figs. 6 and 7. 
By this arrangement I am enabled, as men 
tioned to collect two currents from the one 
commutator, if desired, for the purpose men 
tioned, thus economizing in the construction 
of a multiple-light machine by avoiding the 
necessity of using more than one commutator. 
Fig. 8 shows a section of a field-magnet, which, 
it will be seen, is precisely similar in construc 
tion to one of the bobbins of the armature 
i. e. with a core made up of iron wire F, wound 
upon another core, F, of pasteboard or other 
non-conducting material, around the whole 
O 
5 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
- 
- 
being wound the lhelix. wire. I have found 
this part of my invention specially valuable 
for magnets as well as for an armature or bob 
bins. I do not, however, claim this construc. 
tion in this case, as I intend to make it the 
subject of a separate application for Letter's 
Patent, it being apparent that the construc 
tion of the supporting-frame and polar exten 
sions would require modification in Some re 
spects to adapt them to this special form of 
field-magnet. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is as follows: 
1. An armature for a dynamo-electric Ina 
chine, made up of the following elements, viz.: 
an annular ring of pastelboard or other non 
magnetic material, iron wire wound on and 
around said non-magnetic ring concentrically 
there with, and completely enveloping the same 
on all sides, to constitute the core of the arma 
ture, and insulated wire coils placed on said 
core to form the bobbins, substantially as de 
scribed and shown. 
2. In an armature for a dynamo-electric ina 
chine, the combination, with the central shaft, 
D', and perforated disks E. E", mounted on 
same, of the bobbins G. G., arranged circum 
ferentially upon an annular core composed of 
a ring of non-magnetic material completely en 
veloped by iron wire, and bars H. H., of wood 
or similar non-conducting material, fastened at 
their ends to said disks to hold them together, 
and passing between the different bobbins at 
the periphery, the whole being constructed 
and arranged so as to permit of a free circula 
tion of air through the perforations in said 
disks to the interior of the armature. 
3. A commutator for a dynamo-electric ima 
chine, made up of two sets of metal strips, KK", 
placed end to end with relation to each other, 
each separate strip being insulated from its 
neighboring strip at sides and ends, and the 
strips in each set being connected alternately 
with the different sections of the commututor 
plate or disk M (and thus forming connection 
with the bobbin-wires) by means of metal con 
necting strips L., constructed with steps l and 
projecting ends l, and arranged between the 
strips KK and the central shaft, but insulated 
from the latter, all combined and arranged sub 
stantially in the manner and for the purpose 
specified. 
JOSEPH A. I. CRAIG. 
Witnesses: 
R. A. KELLOND, 
.E. ARMANT. 
7 o 
75 
90 
IOS 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277338.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. PETELER 
SAIL HANK. 
No. 277,338, 
Patented May 8, 1883. 
WITNESSES: 
7% 2%/-( 
N. pers. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, i.e. 
 
INVENTOR 
YWiaw Patovy 
A/44./ ... 4 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. PETELER, OF NEW DORP, NEW YORK. 
SALHANK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,338, dated May 8, 1883. 
Application filed February 24, 1883 
(No model.) 
O 
IS 
2 5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. PETELER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Dorp, in the county of Richmond and State of 
New York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Sail-Ehanks, of which the follow. 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of sail 
hanks made in two parts or sections, and with 
two loops which are opened for receiving the 
stay and leach rope, respectively, by discon 
lecting the sections. 
It consists in the novel manner of connect. 
ing the sections of the hank, as hereinafter 
fully described, and as illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, showing the 
bank as it appears when applied to use. Fig. 
2 is a side view, partly in section, showing the 
device closed. Fig. 3 is a similar view, show. 
ing a modification. Fig. 4 is an edge view, 
showing the hank open. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
The letter A designates a portion of a sail 
having the usual leach-rope, B, on the edge and 
eyelet-holes C near the edge. 
D indicates a stay, to which the sail is con 
nected by a hank containing my invention. 
This hank comprises two loops, EF-one to 
receive and clasp the stay D and the other to 
receive the leach-rope B-namely, when the 
loop is inserted in the proper eyelet-hole, while 
it is divided longitudinally into two sections, 
G H, each forming a part of both loops. These 
sections are entirely detached from each other, 
and they are provided with a key or fastening 
having in the example shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
and 4 the form of a screw, I, which passes 
through a plain hole, 0, in the section G, into 
and through a screw-threaded hole, s, in the 
Section H, such holes being coincident and in 
that portion of the hank intermediate of the 
loops E F, so that when the screw is turned in 
one direction it draws the sections together 
45 by advancing into the threaded hole, and holds 
them in position, it abuting with its head 
against the section G, while, when the screw 
is turned in the other direction, it frees the 
sections and allows them to be moved apart 
Or away from each other. When the sections 
have been thus disconnected, one may be 
turned on the screw I to a position at right an 
gles to the other, and by this means both loops 
35 
 
55 
7 o 
75 
- 
E F are laid bare or opened. On the end of 
the screw I is a stop, l, serving to prevent its 
complete withdrawal. 
In order to prevent the accidental turning 
of the sections when they are in position, the 
section G is provided with tenons at-one at 
each end-and the section H with mortises ac, 
which receive in them the tenons when the 
sections are brought together, so that the sec 
tions engage each other at the ends. 
In lieu of the screw I, other similar keys or 
fastenings may be used, and I have used suc. 
cessfully a bolt, I, Fig. 3, which is permanently 
connected to one section to extend through a 
plain hole in the other, and which is perforated 
at the proper place to receive a linchpin, p, 
when the sections are in position, this pin pass 
ing through a hole in one section as well as 
through the hole of the bolt. 
It is obvious that my hank can be used for 
connecting the sail to a mast instead of to the 
Stay. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is-e- 
1. A double-looped hank composed of two 
sections, G and H, each forming a part of both 
loops, one section having at each end a tenon, 
at, and the other having at each end a mortise 
to receive the tenons and a device for connect 
ing the sections together between the loops, 
substantially as described. 
2. A double-looped hank composed of two 
sections, G and H, one having a plain orifice, 
0 and the other a screw-threaded socket, s, 
and a screw, I, connecting the sections together 
between the loops, on which screw one of the 
sections is adapted to turn, substantially as 
described. 
3. A double-looped hank composed of two 
sections, G and EH, each forming a part of both 
loops, and each having its ends constructed 
to interlock with each other, and a device for 
connecting the sections between the two loops, 
which permits one section to be turned at right 
angles to the other, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two. Sub 
scribing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. H. PETELER, 
CHAS. WAHLERS, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER, 
L. S.). 
90 
9. 
Od 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277438.txt	(No Model) 
C. A. BAKER, 
COMBINED SOFA AND BATH TUB. 
No. 277,438. 
Patented May 15, 1883. 
 
- e. 
'3", H. 
4, 
* , F , 
R 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
3a C.Y 
  
I 
SIS 
8. 
WZZ72-e-SS e-S." 
6% 
( 
ZOAA-24 
Z724ve 72 fo7. 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES A. BAKER, OF BOULDER, COLORADO. 
coMBINED SOFA AND BATH-TUB. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,438, dated May 15, 1883. 
Application filed September 20, 1882. 
(No model.) 
Boiler B is made of block-tin, with copper 
bottom, made the shape of the sofa-head roll, 
which incases it when the combination is closed. 
It has a capacity of eighteen gallons of water, 
the same, when, beated, being conveyed to the 
bath-tub by means of a faucet, as shown in 
drawings, 
Heater C is an Adams & Westlake No. 3 oil 
stove, the same being inclosed on three sides 
and the bottom by a non-conducting galvan 
ized-iron box, which is attached also to sofa. 
frame. The bottom of boiler B rests upon the 
top of oil-stove C, and completes my arrange 
ment for heating the water. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
. A bath-tub combined with a sofa, with wa 
ter-heating appliances attached, all substan 
tially as set forth by the foregoing specifica 
tion. 
35 
45 
CHARLES ALBERT BAKER. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. F. WRIGHT, . 
W. W. WHITE. 
IO 
which- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHAS, ALBERT BAKER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Boul 
der, county of Boulder, and State of Colorado, 
have invented a new and useful furniture com 
bination-viz., a Combined Sofa and Bath 
Tub-of which the following is a specification. 
My invention combines two useful house 
hold necessities in one, thereby saving house 
room, lessening the expense of bathing facili. 
ties, &c. I attain these objects in the Emanner 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
Figure 1 represents the combined sofa and 
bath-tub when closed and in use as an ordinary 
sofa, being portable and easily moved from 
place to place. Fig. 2 shows the combination 
with head-roll and seat thrown back, which is 
accomplished by the use of hinges attached to 
sofa-frame, presenting to view the position of 
bath-tub A, the boiler B, and the heater C. 
Bath-tub A is made of sheet-copper, is at 
tached to inside of sofa-frame, being supported 
at the bottom the same as the ordinary boxed 
25 bath-tub, and is provided with waste-pipe con 
nections and plug. 
- 
- 
- 
Y 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277538.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 277,538, 
C. H. BAUSH. 
FURNACE GRATE 
Patented May 15, 1883. 
 
41 
2% (f664--- 
/227/34-a 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTIAN H. BAUSH, OF HOLYOKE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
FURNACE-GRATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,538, dated May 15, 1888. 
w 
Application filed March 23, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
Io 
3O 
AO 
45 
. 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, CHRISTIAN H. BAUSH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Holyoke, in the county of Hampden and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented new and use. 
ful Improvements in Farnace-Grates, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of fur 
nace-grates in which loose independent grate 
bars are arranged upon supporting cross-bars, 
the object of the invention being to improve 
the construction of the bearing-frame, where 
by it is made adjustable to furnaces of dif. 
ferent sizes; to improve the construction of 
the grate-bearing cross-bars, whereby they are 
made less liable to warp, and to provide im 
proved intermediate supports for the grate 
bars which are adjustable on said cross-bars. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci. 
fication, Figure I is an elevation partly in sec 
tion, and Fig. II is a plan view, of a furnace 
grate embodying my improvements. 
Fig. III 
is a plan view of one of the grate-supporting 
cross-bars, and Fig. IV is an end view thereof. 
Fig. V is an edge view of one of the legs of 
the frame. Fig. VI is a side view of one of 
said cross-bars. Fig. VII is a plan view of 
one of the grate-bar-dividing teeth. 
In the drawings, ( and l indicate the two 
separate parts of the legs of the grate-frame, 
one, l, being provided with oblong slots, 
through which the screws a pass into the part 
a, whereby said two parts are secured to each. 
other face to face, and provision is made for 
lifting and lowering the parts C, to adjust the 
grates to furnaces of different heights. Said 
legs of the frame are provided each with the 
stop d, adapted to be let into the side walls 
of the furnace, close to the bottom thereof, to 
prevent them from being lifted up, and with 
the catch e, which enters the floor 6 of the 
furnace, to keep the leg close against the 
side wall thereof. The upper end of each of 
the leg parts at is of fork shape, and adapted 
to receive in it one end of one of the bear 
ing-bars A, as shown in Figs. I and II. The 
said legs are tied together by the adjustable 
horizontal string-piece, consisting of the parts 
in and n, which, like said legs, are provided 
s) with slots and screws ac, to provide means for so 
55 
65 
adjusting the frame in the direction of said 
string-pieces, to fit it to furnaces of different 
lengths. 
The bearing-bars A, of which there are two, 
are constructed of the form shown in Figs. III 
and VI, of trough shape, and having through 
the base thereof a series of perforations, , to 
allow of a circulation of air through them 
vertically, and to let ashes and cinders fall 
through them. When said bars A are in place 
resting in the forked ends of the said legs, a 
shoe, D, having a set-screw through each end 
thereof, is placed near each end of said bars, 
and, being pushed closely against the face of 
the adjoining leg, it is there secured by said 
Set-screws, and thus said bearing-bars are re 
tained in place on the frame, and provision is 
made for duly adjusting said bars and their 
bearing-points ou the legs. 
A series of movable teeth, i, is fitted to the 
groove in each bar A, said teeth having bases 
of rectangular form, which prevents them from 
turning it said grooves; but they may be 
moved therein in the direction of the length. 
of the bearing-bars. Said teeth i are taper 
ing from above the side flanges, c, to their up 
per ends, andl are oval in Cross-section, as 
shown, and when placed in the bars A, in posi 
tion to receive the grate-bars l, the lower 
edges of the latter rest upon the flanges at of 
said teeth. 
The teeth i may be made of such tinickness 
as to spread the grate-bars more or less, to 
adapt the openings between them to different 
kinds of fuel-that is to say, fine or coarse 
coal-the frame and bearing-bars requiring no 
change; and since the bars l and their sup 
porting-teeth i are not rigidly attached to the 
frame, less inconvenience from warping bars 
is experienced than when the bar-supporting 
parts are immovable. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a furnace-grate, a supporting-frame 
having legs consisting of the parts at and b, 
adjustably secured one to the other, and hav 
ing the step d and catch e thereon, and fork 
shaped upper ends, and united by a hori 
zontal string-piece consisting of the parts in 
95 
 
2 
and n, adjustably secured one to the other, able teeth i, having bases to fit the grooves in 
in combination with the bearing-bars A and said bars, and of the grate-bars h, substan- Io 
the adjustable sleeves D, substantially as set tially as set forth. 
277, 53s 
Of 
CHRISTIAN H. BAUSH. 
T 
5 
forth. 
2. The combination, in a furnace-grate, of a 
supporting-frame therefor, substantially as de- 
scribed, of the grooved bearing-bars A, hav. 
ing perforations v through them, of the nov- 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. CHAPIN, 
R. F. HYDE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277638.txt	(No Model.) ' 
A, F, WENDT. 
WATER BOSH F OR BLAST FURNACES 
No. 277,638. 
 
 
K 
O All 
Idal. Y 
 
 
 
Z2 l SN ill 
 
-- 
WITNESSES: 
c62-6-4 
Z5 
 
22, 2. 
Z3/ 
 
INVENTOR 
-%. 17% 
ATTORNEY 
N. PETERs. Phot-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR F. W. ENDT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
WATER BOS - FOR BLAST FURNA CES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,638, dated May 15, 1883. 
Application filed August 23, 1882. (No model.) 
crucible the tuyeres are removed, and bars or 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR. F. WENDT, of pipes, cooled by water, are introduced through 
the tuyere-openings. These bars or pipes serve 
to support the charge of the furnace. The 
furnace is then tapped out clean below said 
bars. Fire-clay is then rammed in through 
the narrow annular space between the jack 
ets. In iron blast-furnaces this space is large 
enough to introduce even fire-bricks of large 
SIZe 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to Secure by Letters Patent 
A blast-furnace consisting of a main stack 
provided with a mantle-ring and supported by 
pillars, upon which said ring rests, a jacket 
ed bosh provided with tuyere-openings adapted 
to receive bars for supporting the charge when 
the tuyeres are withdrawn, means for sus 
pending said jacketed bosh from said mantle 
ring, and an independently jacketed crucible 
of larger circumference than the lower outer 
circumference of said jacketed bosh, whereby 
an annular space is formed between said bosh 
and crucible, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
To all chon it may concern: 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Water-Boshes for Blast-Furnaces, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention has reference to an improved 
construction of blast-furnaces, whereby the 
crucible may be readily relined without stop 
ping the furnace. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a side elevation, one-half being in 
section, of a blast-furnace of my improved con 
struction; and Fig. 2 is a horizontal section on 
line at ac, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The shaft A of the blast-furnace is of the . 
usual construction, being provided with a man 
tle-ring, C, and supported by pillars H. The 
bosh B is provided with a water-jacket, B, 
and suspended from the mantle-ring by means 
of angle-irons a or equivalent means. The 
hearth or crucible D of the furnaceis surround 
ed by a separate Water-jacket, D', which is of 
larger diameter than the lower diameter of 
the waterjacket B, so that an annular space, 
a', is formed between said water-jackets. The 
furnace is provided with a common bustle 
pipe, E, and with tuyere-pipes F, one of which 
is shown, and tuyeres G. . 
When it becomes necessary to reline the 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
CARLKARP. 
ARTHUR. F. WENDT. 
35 
40 
45 
So 
O 
IS 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277738.txt	(No Model.) 
T. E. JAMES, 
No. 277,738, 
2 
2 (r. 2. 
RINCINC BURGIAR ALARM, 
Patented May 15, 1883. 
rate 
B 
Fig f 
N i R 
   
 
cA&t c s (, : 
 
m 
2- . 
Inventor: 
a 27. 
cle, 
(3, 67% 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS E. JAMES, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
| RING ING BURG LAR-ALARM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,788, dated May 15, 1888. 
Application filed November 22, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
IS 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS E. JAMES, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Burglar-Alarms, which im 
provement is fully set forth in the following 
specification and accompanying dra Wings. 
The object of my invention is to produce an 
improved burglar-alarm to be connected with 
doors of buildings, which shall be set in motion 
by the opening of the door to which it may be 
connected; and it consists in parts and their 
operations shown in drawings, and hereinbe 
low fully explained. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a front 
elevation of my improved burglar-alarm at 
tached to the casing of a door in position to be 
operated by the latter; Fig. 2, a side elevation 
of the same, viewed as indicated by the arrow 
yin Fig. 1, the door and casing being sectioned 
on the dotted linea, and the case holding the 
alarm mechanism sectioned on the dotted line 
a' in Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a view of the same, look 
ing from above, as indicated by arrow 2 in Fig. 
2, and showing, further, the manner in which 
the door operates the alarm. 
Referring to the parts, A is a door, and B 
the inside casing of the same. 
C is a case or box, inclosing the alarm mech 
anism, which may be made ornamental and of 
ally style to suit the taste. 
D is the alarm mechanism, which consists of 
the driving part b, hammer (t, and gong d, that 
shown being the common alarm device used in 
clocks. The case C, holding the alarm mech 
anism, is designed to be secured to the casing 
B on the inside of the doorway at some con 
venient point up out of the way, as shown. 
fis a separating-piece or separator, by means 
of which the hammer a of the alarm is held 
away from the gong, and while held away, as 
shown, the motion of the driving part l of the 
mechanism is stayed, and the alarm kept silent. 
The separatorf is pivoted at its lower end be 
tween lugs ee, secured to the case C, by means 
of which it may occupy a vertical position, as 
shown in full lines, or be displaced from be 
tween the lhammer and gong by falling to a 
position shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2. If 
the spring of the driving part l be wound up 
and the separator withdrawn from between the 
hammer and gong by any means, the former 
is immediately set in motion by the force of 
the spring and caused to strike the latter and 
sound an alarm. A spring-arm, c, is secured 
to the separatorf, near its upper end, by means 
of a screw, v, and caused to project at right 
angles to said separator over the edge of the 
case C, and in the way of the door A as the 
latter is swung open. By means of the door 
coming in contact with the spring-arm c, as 
shown in dotted position in Fig. 3, the sepa 
ratorf will be carried away from between the 
hammer and gong and the alarm will be set off. 
When the alarm is not in use the spring-arm 
c may be swung around upon the pivot-screw 
, and caused to lie parallel with the separa 
tor, as shown in dotted position, wholly with 
in the case C. The upper end of the separa 
tor is of such a thickness as to enter easily be 
tween the hammer and gong when the former 
is lifted away from the latter by the mechan 
ism operating said hammer, and when the 
... spring is wound up preparatory to setting the 
alarm, as above stated, it is allowed to act up 
on the hammer until the latter is raised from 
the gong sufficiently to permit the separator 
to be inserted between them for the purpose 
stated. 
A simple cover for the case (not shown) pro 
tects the alarm mechanism from the dust, and 
from receiving injury from other causes, a slot 
being provided in the same, through which to 
allow of the separator to fall away from the 
gong, as above stated. 
- 
The arm c. is purposely made to bend, so that 
should the door by accident be swung against 
it in the other direction while being closed it 
Would yield and let the door pass, as shown in 
dotted position at 8, Fig. 3, without injury to 
the alarm. 
It will be understood that my improved alarm 
device herein described may be easily attached 
to a window-sash by any person possessing or 
dinary ingenuity without further invention, so 
as to be operated by the raising of said sash. 
It will be understood that the alarm-case C 
may be located at any convenient point near 
the door or window, or in an upper or distant 
room of the building, with a wire connection 
between said door or window and the separa 
torf, so that the latter may be displaced as 
. 
. 
. 
. 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
S5 
1 od 
2 
277,23s 
above described, when the door or window is door A, the alarm mechanism D, consisting of 
disturbed from without, causing the alarm to the driving part b, hammer a, and gong d, and . 
sound. 
the pivoted separator. f. for the hammer and 
Burglar-alarms consisting of a hammer and gong, provided with the adjustable spring-arm 
5 gong, with actuating mechanism for the ham- c, substantially as shown and described. 
T. E. JAMES. 
Witnesses: 
E. B. WHITMORE, 
L. C. MCCONNELL. 
mer inclosed in a case or box and placed to be 
set in motion by an opening door, are not new, 
and such I do not claim, broadly. 
I claim as my invention- 
In a burglar-alarm, in combination with the 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277838.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
G. W. HEY, 
CHEESE HOOP, 
No. 277,838. 
--------------- 
Patented May 15, 1883. 
 
///7. 
WWE 55E5 
--6 (62. Zee 24-. 
- &ee e. Sawaa A. 
2.2%. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. HEY, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CEIARLES H. DUELL, OF SAME PLACE. 
CHE ESE HOOP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,888, dated May 15, 1883. 
Application filed April 9, 1883. 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
of metal, and having its upper part cut so as 
Be it known that I, GEORGE. W. HEY, of 
to form two adjustable interlocking flaps, 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
which serve to hold the upper edge of the band 
State of New York, have invented new and 
age firmly when the same is applied thereto. 
5 useful Improvements in Cheese-Eoops, of 
On the outer upper side of the hoop-body a 55 
which the following, taken in connection with 
scale is marked, which indicates the desired 
the accompanying drawings, is a full, clear, 
length of top-dressing required. The hoop 
and exact description. 
body is tapered reversely at the top and bot 
. This invention relates to what are known as 
tom. The taper at the top is to allow the ap 
Io self-bandaging cheese-hoops, and is designed 
plication of the filler, which in practice holds 6o 
to afford a receptacle in which the curd can 
the loose bulky curd. This filler is recessed 
be pressed and bandaged in one and the same 
on the interior to bring the inner surface flush 
operation, and the dressing finished without 
with that of the hoop, in order that the down 
removing the cheese from the hoop until the 
ward passage of the follower may be unob. 
IS operation is completed. In the best cheese 
structed. The mouth of the filler is flaring, 6 
hoops of this class the upper end of the cheese 
to allow it to pass over the edge of the band 
bandage is first applied to an expansible rim 
age without-disarranging it. 
or bandager, which stretches the bandage cir 
It also consists in the detail construction of 
cumferentially to its full extent. It is then in 
the blank from which the hoop-body is made, 
2 o serted into a groove or recess in the upper 
and in the combination of the hoop and filler, 
part of the hoop proper and pushed down un 
as more fully described hereinafter, and pointed 
til the lower edge of the bandage comes against 
out in the claims. 
and bears upon the shoulder of the recess. In 
In specifying my invention reference is had 
this construction the bandage is held by and 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
25 between the outer surface of the bandager 
of this specification, in which like letters ill 
and the interior wall of the hoop, and its re 
dicate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
tention in place is solely dependent upon the 
Figure 1 shows a side elevation of a cheese 
snug fit or friction of the parts upon the band 
hoop constructed according to my invention, 
age-cloth which comes between the two sur 
the dotted lines showing the recessed filler in 
3o faces. Now, while these means are usually 
place. Fig.2 shows the blank from which the 
sufficient to hold the bandage firmly, they are 
body is made; Fig. 3, a top plan of the hoop, 
defective and unreliable, because the bandager 
showing the adjustable interlocking flaps open; 
is very liable to be forced out of place by the 
and IFig. 4 is a perspective view of the filler. 
passage of the follower in the operation of 
The letter A represents the hoop-body, made 
35 pressing; and, furthermore, no means are pro 
reversely tapering at the top and bottom from 
vided to regulate the length of bandage re 
a blank, A', Fig. 2. The hoop-body is cut in 
quired for dressing the cheese, which is an 
at c c', and has diagonal edges a , Fig. 2. 
important requisite in the production of what 
The edge a is beveled and b grooved. Two 
are termed fancy cheeses, in which an even 
adjustable interlocking flaps, CD, are formed 
4o and smooth top-dressing is absolutely indis 
by this construction, which serve to retain the 9o 
pensable. 
upper end of the bandage securely. when the 
My invention has for its object the produc 
same is applied thereto. The hoop-body is 
tion of a cheese-hoop in which the top-dress 
provided with a perforated bottom, B, and 
ing can be adjusted and regulated at will and handles H, the perforations in the bottom al 
45 the liability of the bandage to become disar 
lowing the whey to escape as the curd is com 
ranged by the passage of the follower over. 
pacted under pressure. The taper of the lower 
come, and at the same time to simplify and 
part of the hoop should be sufficient to allow 
cheapen the construction of the device. 
the bottom of one hoop to enter telescopically 
To this end, then, it consists of a hoop the 
the mouth of a fellow hoop, the end h of the 
So body of which is formed out of a single piece 
handle H serving as a stop. The upper part Ioo 
95 
75 
8. 
2 
27, S8s 
- 
of the hoop-body tapers in slightly, the object of 
this being twofold-to facilitate the application 
of the bandage and to allow the recessed filler 
F to be slipped onto the hoop-body A without 
disarranging the bandage. The filler F has 
an interior recess, S, which fits over the upper 
part of the hoop-body, as shown by the dotted 
lines in Fig. 1, and its mouth is slightly flar 
ing, so as to facilitate its application on the 
hoop-body, the flare allowing it to pass freely 
over the turned-over edge of the bandage with 
out interfering there with. The interior sur 
face of the filler, in consequence of the recess 
S, comes flush with the interior of the hoop, 
allowing the follower an unobstructed down 
ward passage when the curd is pressed. The 
office of the filler is to afford space above the 
hoop proper for the loose curd, which is bulky 
before it is compacted by pressure. 
The hoop-blank A' is formed as shown in 
Fig. 2, and is cut in diagonally at 6 c', with off. 
sets b'd, which permit the edges to lap and 
make a flush joint at J, Fig. 1, on the exterior, 
so as to leave the exterior of the hoop at its 
upper part flush and smooth to receive the 
filler F. The diagonal edges a l coincide with 
the taper of the hoop when brought together, 
and are arranged to interlock to confine the 
bandage, a being beveled to a sharp edge, and 
b grooved out by sawing in edgewise to re 
ceive a. The blank is then rolled up and riv 
eted, as shown in Fig. 1, and the bottom B and 
handles H are put on. 
The flaps C D form the devices for holding 
the bandage, which is applied as follows: The 
bandage, which is the ordinary tubular cheese 
bandage, is placed over the right arm and 
smoothed out. The two flaps CD are then 
contracted by pressing them in with the left 
hand. The bandage is then swept over the 
flaps with the right hand, and when in place 
the flaps are allowed to expand. They are 
then interlocked by pressing the beveled edge 
a into the groove in b, and the bandage is then 
tucked inside of the hoop. The upper end of 
the bandage is then evened and adjusted to 
the required length of top-dressing by the 
scale i i i", &c., Fig. 1, which is marked on 
the exterior of the upper part of the hoop, 
preferably on one of the flaps, as shown, after 
which the lower end of the bandage is doubled 
in on the bottom of the hoop to dress the 
lower side of the cheese. The filler F is then 
placed on the hoop proper, which is now ready 
to receive the curd. After the hoop is filled it 
is put in the press and the curd compacted. 
Then the filler is removed and the top-dress 
ing turned down over the top of the cheese, 
the filler is again applied and the pressing 
75 
65 
finished, and the cheese is then taken from the 6o 
hoop complete. 
The flaps CD are formed by cutting the 
blank at c c', and the said cuts are preferably 
made diagonally in the blank, as shown in 
Fig. 2, as thereby the flaps are rendered more 
elastic at their free ends and have more ex 
pansive power than if cut in a straight line. 
I do not desire to limit myself to the spe 
cific form of lock shown, as that may be varied 
by employing nibs or notches or other contriv. 
ances well known to the mechanician. 
The scale i i i", &c., is preferably cut in, so 
as not to be effaced by the wear, and may con 
sist of a series of rings cut in and extending 
circumferentially around the upper part of the 
hoop, with appropriate marks indicating in 
inches or fractions thereof the length of band 
age to be allowed for top-dressing. 
It will be observed that the peculiar taper 
ing of the upper part of the hoop-body and 
flare given to the mouth of the recessed filler 
allows the filler to pass freely over the con 
fined end of the bandage without the slightest 
possibility of disarranging it; hence the dress 
ing is effected with absolute certainty. 
The hoop-body proper, consisting of the sin 
gle piece or blank A', is easily, cheaply, and ac 
curately made from the blank, and the whole 
device is compact, simple, and effective. 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A cheese-hoop having its body formed of 
one piece, the upper part thereof cut in to 
form two flaps which interlock, substantially 
as described. 
2. The within-described cheese-hoop, having 
its upper part cut so as to form adjusting-flaps 
to hold the upper end of the bandage, and hav 
ing a scale marked on the upper part thereof, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In combination, the hoop-body A, hav 
ing interlocking adjusting-flaps, and the re 
cessed filler S F, substantially as specified. 
4. The cheese-hoop blank A', having diago. 
nal cuts c c' and offset cuts db', as specified. 
5. The cheese-hoop blank A', having cutsc c', 
diagonal beveled edge a, and grooved edge b, 
substantially as specified. 
my name and affixed my seal, in the presence of 
two attesting witnesses, at Syracuse, in the 
county of Onondaga, in the State of New York, 
this 6th day of April, 1883. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 9o 
In testimony whereof Ilhave hereunto signed IIo 
IOS 
85 
95 
Oc 
GEORGE W. HEY. 
L. S. 
Witnesses: 
WM. C. RAYMOND, 
FREDERICK H. GIBBS. 
IO 
35 
SO 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US277939.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 277,939. 
C. M. RICHMOND. 
ARTIFICIAL DENTURE. 
Patented May 22, 1883. 
 
Yytesvis a 
Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CASSIUs M. RICHMOND, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE RICHMOND 
- 
TOOTHE CROWN COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ARTIFICIAL DENTURE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 277,939, dated May 22, 1883. 
Application filed December 1, 1882. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CASSIUs M. RICHMOND, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
5 in Artificial Dentures, of which the following 
is a full, true, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to an improvement on 
the method of applying artificial dentures for 
Io which application for Letters Patent of the 
United States has heretofore been made by 
Alvan S. Richmond on the 9th day of August, 
1882. In that application a method was shown 
of supporting artificial teeth above the gums 
I5 alone by means of a bridge extending between 
properly-prepared roots. In cases of this kind 
it frequently occurs that the gum between said 
roots from which the teeth have been extract 
ed has shrunk away from its natural position, 
2 o and therefore, if the bridge be constructed as 
shown in said application, there will be a space 
between the gum and the bridge presenting an 
unsightly appearance. In order to avoid this 
difficulty, I proceed as follows: Having prop 
25 erly prepared the roots, I then prepare the 
bridge and teeth in the manner described in 
my previous application, with the exception 
that I prefer to make the backing both of the 
artificial crowns and of the artificial gum, to 
3o be described, of a continuous plate of plati 
num. This platinum is to be soldered to the 
backs of the porcelain teeth, preferably by 
pure gold solder, and then upon the face of this 
is to be applied a continuous gum, preferably 
35 of porcelain. I shall not particularly describe 
the method of attaching such artificial gum to 
metal, the same being well known in the art. 
Instead of porcelain, in certain cases I may 
40 
So 
use hard rubber or celluloid; but I prefer the 
porcelain. 
My invention will be clearly understood 
from the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a section through my arti 
ficial denture and the gum; Fig. 2, a front 
view of the prepared jaw before the bridge is 
applied; Fig. 3, a front view of the bridge and 
artificial gum; Fig. 4, a back view of the same. 
A represents the natural gum; B, the arti 
ficial denture. C shows the continuous metal 
lic backing, preferably of platinum, attached 
to suitable sockets, D, in the manner referred 
to in my previous application. E represents 
the artificial porcelain teeth, and G the artifi 
cial gun, of porcelain or other suitable mate 
rial. This artificial gum, as will be seen, is 
supported upon platinum backing C, and when 
in position overlaps the natural gum, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
Ishall not fully describe the method of prepa 
ration of the bridge and of the porcelain gum, 
the same being known in the art. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination of the metallic bridge C, 
provided with sockets or holding devices D and 
extending between its supports, and free from 
contact with the gum, with the artificial tooth 
E and the artificial gum G, extending above 
the bridge and covering the space between the 
latter and the natural gum, substantially as 7o 
shown and described. 
55 
C. M. RICHMOND. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. EVANs, 
ANTHONY GREF, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278039.txt	(No Model.) 
E. W. OPPE. 
MIRROR ATTACHMENT FOR ROW BOATS, 
No. 278,039. 
Patented May 22, 1883. 
 
WITNESSES: 
'...e.-- 
Yet,4-6. 
- by has 
N, PETERs, Photo-thographer, Washington, (), c. 
INVENTOR 
(22. 
BY 
ATTORNEY 
w 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNEST W. OPPE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., AssIGNOR TO AUGUSTE C. OPPE, 
OF SAME PLACE. 
MIRROR ATTACHMENT FOR ROW-BOATs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,089, dated May 22, 1883. 
Application filed November 3, 1882. 
(No model.) 
35 
means of pivot-screws b l on frame B, so as to 
be set into any desired height and inclination 
as required by the oarsman, according as he 
desires to look to a greater or less distance 
forward. A sunshade or hood, D, is applied 
to the upper part of the mirror to prevent the 
rays of the sun from falling directly into the 
glass and be reflected thereby. The mirror 
attachment forms a great convenience to the 
oarsman, as he can thereby steer the boat and 
proceed on his way with great facility without 
turning his head and looking forward from 
time to time, as has been the case when row. . 
ing without a coxswain heretofore. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with a row-boat, of a 
5. 
supporting-frame at or near the stern of the 
boat, and of an adjustable mirror-supported by 
the frame, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a row-boat, of a 
supporting - frame arranged at or near the 
stern, a mirror applied adjustably to the same, 
and provided with a hood or sanshade, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
45 
55 
ERNEST. W. OPPE. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEI, 
SIDNEY MIANN. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ERNEST W. OPPE, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Mirror Attachments for Row - Boats, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved mir 
l'or attachment to row-boats, by which the 
party rowing can observe directly the objects 
in the way of the boat without turning his 
head and looking forward over the bow of the 
boat; and the invention consists of a row-boat 
which is provided near the stern with an up 
right supporting-frame attached to the gun 
wales, said frame carrying an adjustable mir 
ror with a hood or sunshade applied to the 
upper part thereof. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figurel rep 
resents a perspective view of a row-boat with 
my improved mirror attachment, and Fig. 2 is 
a vertical transverse section of the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A in the drawings represents a row-boat of 
any suitable construction, and l3 an upright 
frame, preferably of yoke shape, which ex 
tends transversely across the boat at or near 
the stern. The frame B is bolted to the gun 
wales of the boat, and braced by an inclined 
rod, B', that extends from the highest point of 
the frame to the keel, to which latter it is se 
curely bolted, as shown in Fig. 2. 
A mirror, C, is adjustably supported by 
- 
IC. 
15 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278139.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 278,139. 
E. HORTON. 
MACHINE FOR ORNAMENTING METAL SURFACES. 
Patented May 22, 1883. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
it: 
it 
iitiitiinii 
ill 
t ESIEEE, LARAL 
 
t thill 
 
6. 
Z - 
 
 
2 2 
 
-76 
- 
6.--a (72-7-- 
2a arraz a 
N, PEFERS, Photo-ithographer, Washington, o, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EVERETT HORTON, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, 
MACHINE FOR ORNAMENTING METAL SURFACEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,139, dated May 22, 1883. 
Application filed March 21, 1883. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EVERETTEIORTON, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new Im 
provement in Machines for Ornamenting Metal 
Surfaces; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing, when taken in connection with accom 
panying drawings and the letters of reference 
marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same, and which said draw. 
ings constitute part of this specification, and 
represent, in 
Figure 1, a top or plan view; IFig. 2, a front 
view; Fig. 3, an end view; Fig. 4, the orna 
mented plate. 
This invention relates to a machine for or 
namenting the surface of metal plates, with 
special reference to the ornamenting of plates 
for the finer classes of clock-movements, but 
applicable to other purposes. The ornamenta 
tion designed to be given to such plates is that 
of a laminated or watered appearance; and 
the invention consists in a platen to carry the 
plate to be ornamented, and having imparted 
to said plate a combined oscillatery and ser 
pentine advancing movement, with a cutter or 
cutters arranged to revolve upon the axis at 
right, angles to said platen, and as more fully 
hereinafter described. 
A represents the frame of the machine, in 
which, in suitable bearings, is a vertical spin 
dle, B. This spindle carries a horizontal bed, 
C, free to turn in a horizontal plane, the said 
spindle being the center of motion. In the 
upper surface of the bed C is a serpentine 
groove, a, running longitudinally from end to 
end. On this bed C the platen Disarranged. 
Upon its under side it is provided with studs 
d, which run in the groove a, the said groove 
forming a guide for the platen. Hence, if the 
platen be moved longitudinally on the table, 
the serpentine groove will impart to the said 
platen a corresponding serpentine movement. 
An oscillatory movement is imparted to the 
bed C-here represented as by means of an ec 
centric, e, connected by a rod, f, to the bed, 
the said eccentric rotated by a crank, as shown, 
orotherwise. Above the bed, in suitable bear 
ings, E, and in a line diagonally across the 
bed, several spindles, h, are arranged so as to 
revolve on an axis at right angles to the plane 
of the platen. At their upper end these spin 
tlles are connected by gears i, and power is 
imparted to revolve the spindles by a pulley, F, 
carrying a pinion, G, which works into one of 
the gears i. By thus connecting the spindles 
together each spindle revolves in the opposite 
direction to the one next to it. At the lower 
end each of these spindles carries a tool, l, the 
lower or working face of these tools adjusted 
and so as to all stand in the same plane. 
The plate, L, to be ornamented is secured to 
the platen ID, the platen being drawn to one 
end for that purpose, and when properly se 
cured the operator pushes the platen toward 
the revolving tools, which are adjusted so as 
to just dress the surface of the plate L, at the 
same time giving to the bed C an oscillatory 
movement, as above described, and which im 
parts to the plate, as it passes beneath the 
cutters, the combined oscillatory movement of 
the bed with the serpentine movement of the 
platen, this movement defining the path in 
which the tools will work on the surface of the 
plate, and this peculiar path gives to the Sur 
face dressed by the tools a laminated or wa 
tered appearance highly ornamental. The pe 
culiar starface is difficult to illustrate; but I 
show in Fig. 4 an illustration of this surface 
as well as it can be done in a drawing. 
The tools which I employ have a mill-like 
face; but substantially the same result is at 
tained by employing a mass of points arranged 
'in a plane, so that the points Work upon the 
surface of the metal. A single tool may be 
employed; but such single tool would necessi 
tate several movements of the plate beneath it, 
whereas by employing several tools and ar 
ranging them in a diagonal line, So that the 
whole width of the plate is covered by the 
tools, the plate is ornamented at a single Op 
eration, and by arranging the tools so that they 
revolve in the opposite direction to those next 
I to them better results are attained than can 
be done by a single tool. 
Instead of gearing the spindles together, as 
shown, the same result will be attained by a 
belt, which will pass around first the pulley on 
the one spindle, then around the next in the 
opposite direction, and so on. I therefore do 
not wish to limit the invention to the gearing 
of the spindles together, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
90 
95 
OO 
 
27s, 39 
While I have represented the oscillation of 
the bed as produced by hand, and also the lon 
gitudinal movement imparted to the platen by 
hand, it will be understood by those familiar 
with the art that these may be done by me 
chanical means, and combined so as to make 
the movement of the bed and platen automatic, 
Without departing from my invention. 
I claim 
1. The combination of a bed, C, arranged 
for oscillatory movement in a horizontal plane, 
the platen l), arranged for longitudinal move 
ment on said bed in a serpentine path, with a 
cutter revolving in a plane parallel with the 
Surface to be ornamented, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination of the oscillating bed C, 
the platen D, arranged thereon to move in a 
IO 
I 5 
serpentine longitudinal path on said bed, with 
a series of tools arranged to revolve in planes 
parallel with the plane of the platen, and in a 
line diagonally across said bed, substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination of the oscillating bed C, 
the platen ID, arranged thereon to move in a 
serpentine longitudinal path on said bed, with 
a series of tools arranged to revolve in planes 
parallel with the plane of the platen, and in a 
line diagonally across said bed, each tool re 
volving in a direction opposite to that of the 
tool next to it, substantially as described. 
25 
EVERETT HORTON. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN E. EARLE, 
JOS. C. EARLE. 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278240.txt	(No Model.) 
G. P. HUNT, 
IIFE PRESERVER 
No. 278,240. 
- 
Patented May 22, 1883, 
 
Eesans c ES 
. Sans 
s s 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE P. HUNT, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CAL., AsSIGNOR TO HIMSELF, AND 
JOSEPH J. WALTON, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
'N 
LiFE-PRESERVER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,240, dated May 22, 1883. 
Application filed October 16, 1882. 
(No model.) 
Be it known that I, GEORGE P. Hu NT, of eel, so that while it will be out of the way of So 
55 
65 
tube is preferably passed through two loops, 
the wearer of the jacket when it is not in use, 
it can be conveniently and instantly brought 
into use for inflating the sack with air. 
To the end of the tube C a mouth-piece is 
secured, which consists of a metal tube, g, in 
which is applied a valve, h, opening in Ward, or 
into the sack through tube C. The stem i of 
this valve works through suitable guides, and 
one end of this stem slightly protrudes beyond 
the end of the mouth-piece, as slnown in Fig. 
4, so that by pressing this stem inward with 
the teeth the valve h will leave its seat and 
the sack B can be quickly inflated with air 
from the lungs. By releasing the valve a light 
spring and the pressure of air in the sack will 
shut the valve against, its seat and prevent 
the air in the sack from escaping. If at any 
time it is desired to empty the sack of air, this 
can be done by pressing on the valve-stem and 
compressing the sack. 
Owing to the peculiar shape of the sack and 
its distribution about the body of a person 
wearing the jacket, it will not incommode a 
bather either when it is inflated with air or 
collapsed; and as the sack is secured to the 
outside of the jacket the latter will form a lin 
ing for it, and protect the breast and back of 
the wearer from sudden chilliness winen enter 
ig or leaving the water. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
The combination of the single-ply jacket A, 
the air-holding band d, the air-holding back 
piece a, the air-holding breast-pieces c c, the 
flexible tube C, the loops e e' therefor, the 
mouth-piece (), tongue-pin i, and a valve and 
spring applied to this pill, all constructed and 
adapted to operate substantially in the man 
ner and for the purposes described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own affix my signature in presence of two 
witnesses. 
GEORGE PURDY HUNT. 
75 
85 
go 
Witnesses: 
C. H. H. HALL, 
JOHN CORWINE. 
15 
2O, 
5 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
San Francisco, in the county of San Francisco 
aDd State of California, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Life-Pre 
serving Jackets; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the jacket 
as applied. Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of the 
same. Fig. 3 shows a form of sack. Fig. 4 
is a central Vertical section of the valve. Figs. 
5 and 6 are transverse sections of the same. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
ordinary bathing-jacket with a light flexible 
air-tight sack, which is suitably adapted in 
shape and size to the front, sides, and back of 
the jacket, and which is provided at the breast 
with a flexible tube and a mouth-piece hav. 
ing a spring-actuated valve in it, whereby the 
Wearer of the jacket to which the sack is se 
cured can easily inflate the latter from his 
lungs, whether he be in the water or on land, 
as will be understood from the following de 
scription. 
In the annexed drawings, A designates the 
body of an ordinary bathing-jacket, which is 
provided with sleeves and adapted to be but 
toned in front, and, if desired, provided with 
buttons around the bottom for the attachment 
of the pants. 
B designates an air-proof sack, which is 
preferably made of india-rubber, of the form, 
when spread out flat, shown in Fig. 3. This 
form gives a broad back portion, a, a trans 
verse bottom or skirt portion, d, and two nar 
row breast portions, cc. This sack is made 
double, and the inner thickness is suitably se 
cured to the cloth jacket, so that it will partly 
cover the back, the sides, and the breast, as 
shown in the drawings, Figs. 1 and 2; but the 
arms should be left entirely free. 
- 
To one of the breast portions c of the sack 
a tube, C, is suitably attached, so as to com 
municate with the interior of the sack. This 
- 
40 
45 
2. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278340.txt	(No Model. ) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C. KELLOGG. 
MACHINE FOR ROLLING TUBES, COLUMNS, &C, 
No. 278,340. 
Patented May 29, 1883. 
 
  
Sin 
 
- 
- 
 
  
N 
m 
F AN 
SN 
N Sv3 
N 
- 
Yy / 
EN s 
W 
NG) 
ar 
 
C. 
s 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
C. KELLOGG. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR ROLLING TUBES, COLUMNS, &c. 
No. 278,340. 
Patented May 29, 1883. 
e -2 
F - 
 
22 2 
as st 
  
 
 
 
 
 
Auvere/30 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
... ." 
, 
 
CHARLEs KELLOGG, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK. 
MACHINE FOR ROLLING TUBES, COLUMNS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 278,840, dated May 29, 1883, 
Application filed Jun 
e 20, 1882. (No model.) . 
s 
5 
To all chon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs KELLOGG, of 
Buffalo, in the county of Erie and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use. 
ful improvements in machinery for manufac 
turing metal tubes and for rolling tubes, col 
umns, shafts, and other hollow cylindrical 
forms from hollow billets and ingots of metal; 
and l hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref. 
erence being had to the drawings which ac 
company and constitute a part of this specifi 
cation. 
In the drawings, Figure l is a sectional view 
of a two-high universal rolling-mill such as is 
in common use, showing a tube or a billet or 
ingot in the position it occupies in being rolled 
by my method, and also showing one of a pair 
of exterior horizontal rolls and a pair of exte 
rior vertical rolls, together with the interior 
rolls, which are carried in the mandrel, herein 
after to be described. Fig. 2 is an end view, 
showing the tube and the vertical rolls in the 
position in which they are when the operation 
is finished. Fig. 3 is an enlarged view of my 
improved mandrel, which carries two pairs of 
interior rolls corresponding to the respective 
horizontal and vertical exterior rolls already 
referred to. Figs. 4 and 5 are enlarged detail 
views of the interior or mandrel rolls. 
This invention consists, first, in a mandrel 
which is provided with two pairs of rolls ar 
ranged in chambers on the mandrel-rod and 
adapted to roll the inner surface of tubes, col 
umns, shafts, and other hollow cylindrical 
forms; and, second, in the combination, in a 
universal mill or other apparatus for rolling 
metal, of two pairs of exterior rolls adapted to 
form the exterior surface of a metallic tube, 
column, shaft, or other hollow works of cylin. 
drical or other desired shape from a hollow 
billet or ingot, or from metal in any other suit 
able condition, with a mandrel adapted to en 
ter the tube or other work, and carrying two 
45 pairs of rolls arranged so as to act upon the 
interior surface of the work at points exactly 
opposite those at which the action of the exte 
rior rolls takes place, and thereby to roll and 
form and consolidate the inside surface at the 
same time that the exterior rolls produce a 
similar effect upon the outside. 
35 
55 
In the drawings, A. A. K.K, Figs. 1 and 2, 
represent the standards of a set of ordinary 
two-high rolls, consisting of a pair of horizon 
tal rolls, B, (of which only one can be seen in 
the figures,) and a pair of vertical rolls, DD. 
These pairs of rolls are arranged at right an 
gles with and at a short distance from each 
other, and are in all respects alike, and are 
constructed and operated in the usual way. 6o 
Both sets of them are provided with screws i i 
for advancing and withdrawing them to and 
from the work in the customary manner. L is 
the bed-plate to which the standards are bolt 
ed. No further description of this portion of 65 
the machinery is necessary, as it is in every 
respect the same as the usual universal mill 
well known to iron-rollers. 
in m, Figs.1 and 3, represent the controlling 
novelty in my invention. It is what may be 7 o 
termed a double hollow mandrel, and it is 
designed to be held stationary while within 
the tube, hollow cylinder, or other work to be 
rolled, and to roll and form the inner surface 
of the work, and to consolidate and refine the 
material while the tube is passing over it at . 
the same time that similar effects are being 
produced by the exterior rolls upon the outer 
surface of it. I construct the slotted chambers 
an an of said mandrel at suitable points on the 
maindrel-rod n, and in each of these chambers 
I arrange a pair of small rolls, FFG G, which 
are adapted to project slightly through open 
ings a a in the walls of the chambers against 
the interior surface of the tube or other article 
to be rolled. The shafts of these rolls have 
short journals at their ends, which are sup 
ported and turn in fecesses in the shell of the 
chambers; but the rolls have their principal 
bearing upon each other, and are always in 
90 
contact, as the interior diameter of the tube 
or other work does not change, but remains . 
the same as that of the billet or ingot or other . 
. 
form of metal from which it is made. It re 
sults from this that the function of these man- 95 
drel-rolls is to serve as anvils for the exterior 
rolls. Like the latter, the respective pairs of 
them are arranged at right angles with and 
at a short distance from each other, and, as 
is represented in Figs. 1 and 3 of the draw 
ings, each respective chamber must be so ar 
ranged and located upon the mandrel-rod that 
so 
75 
too 
27s,840 
O 
the action of the pair of rolls carried in it upon 
the interior surface of the tube or other work 
to be rolled will necessarily be precisely op 
posite the points at which a pair of either the 
horizontal or vertical exterior rolls will at the 
same instant be acting. By this means not 
only is the work suitably sustained from the 
inside against the pressure of the exterior rolls, 
but the inner surface of it is thoroughly con 
solidated as well as made more uniform and 
far more perfect in outline than it could other. 
wise be. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
A hollow billet or ingot of homogeneous. ma 
terial-such as steel, homogeneous iron, or 
other suitable metal, or any other work to be 
rolled-is first prepared in any of the usual 
ways. When at a proper heat for rolling it is 
placed in the mill, and the mandrel is intro 
duced into it and adjusted in the requisite po 
sition to effect the results above referred to. 
The mill being started, the work is rolled with 
the ordinary manipulation, the exterior rolls 
being rotated by gearing, as usual, and the 
mandrel-rolls being operated by the recipro 
catory movement of the work upon them, and 
the process is continued until complete, when 
the work will have become a finished tube, as 
seen in Fig. 2, of uniform diameter and walls 
throughout, or of whatever other hollow form 
the rolls may be adapted to. 
It is believed that by means of this improved 
mandrel tubes and analogous work of large 
diameter can be successfully rolled, and in 
longer lengths than by any other mode of op 
eration, and the interior surface of the work 
will in all cases be far more close and uniform 
ii) texture and its outline far more accurate 
than can be attained by any other system. At 
the same time the combiued operation of the 
interior and exterior rolls will thoroughly con 
: dense the material employed throughout its 
mass, and when billets or piles are used will 
weld their respective constituents solidly to. 
gether and refine and make homogeneous the 
metal of which they are composed. 
I do not claim, broadly, a hollow mandrel 
carrying a pair of rolls, as that has before been 
patented; but my improved mandrel here de 
scribed is designed to roll, form, and condense 
the inner surface of the work, and is to be used 
with two pairs of exterior rolls. It is there 
fore essential to it that the rolls carried by it 
should be in different pairs, and hence in more 
than one clhamber, and that the respective 
pairs of them should be arranged on the man 
drel-rod at right angles with each other and 
at a distance apart corresponding with the dis 
tance apart of the exterior pairs of rolls, so 
that they shall at all times be in such relation 
to and be so combined with therespective pairs 
of exterior rolls that their action will neces 
sarily be precisely opposite the points of action 
of the latter. 
The manner in which I form and combine 
the mandrel-rolls so that they shall roll upon 
each other on a long central bearing, thus in 
suring their durability, is fully shown in Figs. 
4 and 5, but is not here claimed, as it will be 
made the subject of another application for 
Letters Patent. 
Having thus made known my improvements, 
what I claim therein as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A mandrel for rolling and forming the in 
ner surface of metal tubes, columns, shafts, 
and other hollow cylindrical or otherwise 
shaped work, consisting of a mandrel-rod hav 
ing two chambers, in each of which is a pair 
of rolls, which pairs are arranged at right an 
gles with each other and at a distance apart 
corresponding to the distance apart of the 
pairs of exterior rolls of the mill, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, in a mill for rolling iron 
or other metal, of two pairs of exterior rolls 
with a mandrel having two chambers on a 
mandrel-rod provided with pairs of rolls, ar 
ranged as described, the whole operating in 
the manner set forth. 
CHARLES KELLOGG. 
Witnesses: 
. . 
SAMUEL McELROY, 
A. B. DODGE. 
. 
- 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
50 
5 s 
70 
75 
s 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278440.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
DEVICE FOR BLOWING LOCOMOTIVE WHISTLE's AUTOMATICALLY. 
Patented May 29, 1883. 
No. 278,440, 
E. A. LELAND, 
m 
- 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
Eless, 
VA 
 
 
f 
 
 
 
Q 
S. 
2 KQSS 
%2 
Sa 
....... 
N: perers, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
E, A. LELAND, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
wn - - 
- DEVICE FOR BLOWING LOCOMOTIVE WHISTLES AUTOMATICALLY. 
No. 278,440. 
Patented May 29, 1883. 
N 
6 
  
 
 
N SS N 
N2 
 
-1 IAS 
 
NAZ NZ 
N SN 
-Z. S. N 
NMEA, Eas 
1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
E e 
 
 
 
n 
| 
Z 
FIA S 
-r 
 
N. Pet ERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN A. LELAND, OF HOLYOKE, MASS, ASSIGNOR OF THREE-FOURTHs 
TO CHAs. P. LYMAN AND HERVEY K. HAWES, BOTH OF SAME, PLACE. 
DEVICE FOR BLOWING LOCOMOTIVE-WHISTLES AUTOMATICALLY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,440, dated May 29, 1883. 
- 
Application filed July 3, 1882. (No model.) 
. 
. 
Io 
2o mechanism in detail. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWIN A. LELAND, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hol 
yoke, in the county of Hampden and Common 
5 wealth of Massachusetts, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Device for Blowing Lo 
comotive-Whistles, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part thereof. 
Figure 1 is a rear end elevation, partly in 
section, of a locomotive-engine with my inven 
tion attached. Fig. 2 is a side elevation and 
section of a portion of a locomotive-engine. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view of horizontal levers con 
5 necting the vertical shaft C with mechanism 
actuated by the reciprocal levers SS. Fig. 4 
is a view of a step to be affixed to the railroad 
track. Fig. 5 is a front elevation of said step. 
Figs. 6, 7, and 8...are enlarged views of the 
The object of my invention is to cause the 
automatic blowing of locomotive-whistles at 
railroad-crossings and other points where by 
law it is required to blow them, and is espe 
25 cially valuable in case of accidents, as settling 
all question or doubt as to the fact of blowing. 
Fig.1 is a rear elevation and section of the 
cab of a locomotive-engine shown in my inven 
3o A is the whistle, and a' is the rod connect 
ing the whistle-lever with the levera, attached 
to shaft B by set-screw a. 
B is the horizontal shaft, attached to the 
front side of the cab by the stands H. 
Ois the vertical shaft, passing in front of the 
left-hand corner of the boiler down through 
the floor of the cab. 
D is the lever loose on shaft B, for blowing 
the whistle by hand. 
4o E is the lever fastened to the shaft B by 
set-screwe, and to the side of said lever E is 
fastened the rode'. e. passes through the 
holefin lever F. 
e' is a spring arounde', which gives an elas 
F is a loose lever on shaft B, having in its 
outer end the hole.f. 
G is a lever fastened to the upper end of 
shaft C by the set-screw g. The lever G 
45 tic connection between levers E and F. 
tion. 
. 
V 
' 
- 
- 
- 
o 
shaft B. 
of shaft C. 
for levers SS and shaft P. 
affording the 
presses against the lever F, 
means of opening the whistle. 
d is a collar fastened to shaft B by set-screw 
d", and d has a finger, d, against which lever 
D bears or presses when blowing the whistle 
by hand. 
EIH are the stands forming bearings for the 
H is a stand forming bearing for upper end 
H. Hare the stands carrying the bearings 
H' is a shafton which the levers SS swing. 
II' are the inclined levers, against which 
the levers SS', respectively, strike alternately 
to operate my invention. 
II are pieces of plankto which the incline 
levers II are attached by the hinges ii. 
it is a bolt connecting the inner ends of II. 
i is an inverted cylinder passing over the 
i is a boltfastening cylinder i to the plank I. 
Lisa link connecting levers TT by bolts ll. 
N is the stand forming bearing for lower end 
of shaft C. 
P is an upright shaft having the fingers pip' 
near its lower end, which extend horizontally 
from the shaft P, on opposite sides thereof, 
but not in a line exactly transverse to the en 
gine, but symmetrically at a small angle in ad 
vance of such a line, as shown in Fig. 3, and 
to the upper end is fastened the lever T. 
cylinder i and containing the spring i. 
p is a bearing for shaft P. 
R is a friction-bearing near the upper-end 
of shaft P. ris the cap of said bearing, which 
is tightened by bolts r" r". 
SS are levers swinging on shaft H, and 
having at their upper extremity fingers ss'. 
T is a lever fastened near the lower extrem. 
ity of shaft C by set-screw.f. 
T is a lever fastened to the upper extremity 
of shaft P by set-screw f". 
As the engine approaches, for instance, a 
crossing, at a suitable distance therefrom one 
of the levers-say S-encounters the inclined 
lever I, arranged upon the track, and is by it 
swung rearward. Its pins strikes the finger p 
upon the shaft P, pushing it forward and ro- - 
tating shaft P in such direction as to draw the 
. 
75 
go 
s 
'... 
 
 
 
27s,440 
rod L rearward. This rotates shaft C, whose vers SS', as shown in Fig. 6, and the loose le. 
arm G, acting upon the lever F, pushes with ver F in said figure, operated by the lever G. 
against the resisting-spring fin Fig. 2 to 
an elastic pressure (due to the spring e) the 
move the lever E, as and for the purpose set 25 
lever E rearward, so rotating the shaft B, and 
through its connections blows the whistle. 
forth. 
2. The combination of the levers S S with 
The latter continues blowing until, the engine 
the shaft P, having fingers p p', and mechan 
advancing a suitable distance, the lever Sen. 
ism connecting with the whistle for operating 
counters a second incline, I', and, acting upon 
the same automatically, substantially as speci- 3o 
the opposite finger, p', of shaft P, reverses the 
fied. 
above-described movements and shuts off the 
3. The loose lever F, in combination with the 
whistle. 
lever G, the resisting-spring f, lever E, and 
It is obvious that the fingers pp must be 
the shaft B and its connections with the Whis 
arranged on shaft Pas above described in or 
tle, as set forth, to provide an elastic lever- 35 
der that as S acts upon it S may not be acted 
age on the horizontal shaft B, as and for the 
upon by it in a reverse direction, and the con 
purpose set forth. 
Verse. 
, 
o 
15 
I claim as my invention 
1. The step shown in Fig. 4, which may be 
made of band-iron and affixed to the railroad 
track between the rails and fastened to wood 
planks, in combination with the reciprocal le. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN J. REARDDER, 
H. H. TWORGY, 
EDWIN A. LELAND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278540.txt	(No Model.) 
N0,278,540, 
 
0,T,HAM, 
IANTERN, 
Patented May 29,1883. 
???? 
 
C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1 
 
CHA 
RLEsT HAM OF RoCHEsTER,NEw YoRK,AssIGNOR To THE STEAM 
GAUGEAND LANTERN COMPANY,OF SAME PLACE.? 
LANTERN. 
SPEcrFroATroN forming part of Letters 
Patent No.278,540,dated May 29,1888. 
Appicationfled December13,1882.:{No model) 
- 
1 
- 
- 
 
55 
desired. 
,, 
To all whon it haygoncern: 
upper end ofthe tube G witl the airclamber 
Beit known that I,CHARLEsT.HAM,of 
B,and which arearranged on diametricaly 
thecity of Rochester,inthe county of Monroe 
opposite Sides oftheglobe. 
and State of New York,have inveuted new 
1 represents an annular SDring,Whichis at 
5 andusefulImprovementsinLanterus;0fwlich ? 
tacheito the bell F,andwichservesto hold 
thg.folowingis a specification,,,,, 
the upper end of the globe in Such manner 
Thisinvention relates more particularly to | 
that the globe Can be readily detached when 
animprovementinthat elass of lanterns in 
which the globeand the perforated plate or 
K K'representthe lowerlorizontalportious 
o gallery Supporting the globecan beraised,so 
of the air-tubes,which conneet at their inuer 
asto expose theburner-cone forthe purpose 
ends with the airghamber B. The.air-tubes 
of giving access to the burner whenthe wick 
are each comp0Sed of an upper and a lower 
portion,thelatter,ofwhichthe horizontalpor 
is required to be trimmed,or for lighting or, 
extinguishingthe flanewithout requiringthe | 
tion Kforms a part,being firmly Secured to 
15globe to be removed from thelantern.orto be 
the base of the lantern,and the upperportion 
? disconuected from the Darts by which it is 
Deing firmlysecured to the tube Gand bell F, 
* heldin place, 
orthe top of the lantern,and both portious 
The object of Inyinvention is the eonstrue 
being SO connected together that the Iower 
tionofasimpledevigewherebytheseresultsare 
end of the upper portion can slide up and 
2o attained;.and myinvention eonsists,to that 
down on the upright portion K/of the lower 
end, of the particular improvements which 
portiou,iu the manner of a telesCopie joint, 
?will be hereinafterfully described,and point 
without disconnecting the two parts of the 
tubes. The plate or gallery Dis attached to 
- 
ed out in the Claims, 
In the accompanying drawings,Figure lis 
the upper portion,H,0fthe tubes by wires l, 
25 an.elevation of alantern providedwith my 
So thatittakeSpart in the vertical movement 
improvements,witlthepartsarrangedintheir 
of the upper portions of the tubes,thereby 
operative position. Fig.2is a similarview, 
causing the plate Dand theglobe E,resting 
with the globeraised 80asto exposetheburn 
thereon,to rise or desCend as the upper part 
er-cone, Fig.3isa vertical Section,illustrat 
of_the lantern is raised or lowered. 
3oing the spring-catch wherebythe globe is se 
Lisa Spring-catch,which Servs to connect 
cured in place on the burner-cone, Fig,4,is 
the uppermovable portion,H,ofthe side tube 
a horizontal Section inline a p,Fig.l. 
with the lowerstationaryportion thereof when 
theglobeisinitslowestposition. 
Like letters 9frefereuce indicatelike parts 
Thisspring 
in theseveralfgures. 
catch.is composed,as shown in the drawings, 
5 A represents the base of thelantern,con 
of a flat spring,8ecured with its upperend to 
tainingthe oil-reservoira, 
the movable portion H of the tube,and pro 
Brepresents the airchamber,arranged up 
vided nearits lowereudwith aninwardly-pro 
on the oilreservoirand surroundingthe wick 
|jecting Stud or pin,l,which projects through 
openings m my,formed,respectively,in the up 
, 
tube. 
Crepresents the burner,resting upon the 
per movableand the lower Stationaryparts of 9o 
the Sametube,and which coincide when the 
D repreSents the perforated plate or gal 
globe is inits lowest position,The Spring L, 
lerywhichsurroundsthe burner-coneand Sup 
tends to hold the Stud in engagement with 
portsthglass globe E. 
- 
the openings m m/,and the movable portion, 
5 Frepresents the dished plate or bell ar 
0f the lanternis therebyfirmlysecured t0the 95 
ranged overthe upperend ofthe globe, 
lower stationary portion thereof 
%representSathumb-piece,whichisattached 
G represents the airtube,whioh rises from 
the center ofthe bell F. 
to thelowerendofthe Spring L forwithdraw 
H H represent the upper movable portions - 
ing the pin from the openings m m/bypress-? 
? ofthe descendingairtubeswhichconneet the 
ing against Said thumb-piece when itis de- Too 
airchamber B. 
* .,,,- 
- 
7o 
* 
- 
- 
- 
- 
 
- 
- 
- 
- 
 
the lantern. 
sired to raise the upper movable portion of 
o represents a stop,which isattached to the | 
lower stationary portion of the Side tube,and 
5 extends upwardlyalong the lower portion of 
the movable part of the tube,and is bent or 
provided with an enlargement at its upper 
end. 
p represents a Sleeve or strap,which is Se 
cured to the movable portion of the tube H, 
and which Surrounds or runsin ContaCt with 
the Stop oin Such mannerthatwhen the mova 
ble portion of the lantern has been raised to 
the proper height the sleeve or strap p will, 
come in contact with the bent portion or en 
1argement of the Stop 0,and thereby prevent 
the further upward movement of the upper 
movable part of the lantern and its discon 
nection from the lower part thereof 
The upwardly.converging form of the Side 
tubes will Cause the movable parts of the 
tubesto Slightly bind against the stationary 
parts thereof when the movable part of the 
1antern has been raised,wherebythe movable 
part is Supported in itS elevated p0sition. 
By Simplyreleasing the Spring-catgh L and 
raising the upperpartofthelantern the globe 
and its Supporting-plate are raised above the 
burner to a Suficient height to permit access 
to the wick for trimming the Same,and for 
]ighting and extinguishing the fame,and by 
1owering the upperportion ofthelantern until 
theplatesupporting theglobe seatsitselfupon 
the burner theparts are again placedin their 
operative position and Secured therein bythe 
Spring-Catch L,which automatically engages 
whenthe movablepart of the lantern has been 
1owered totheproperposition. Theglobecan 
also bereadilyremovedfrom the lantern,upon 
releasingtheannular Spring-catch I,whenitis 
requlred to be cleaned or for replaCing a bro 
kenglobe. 
The construetion ofthe upperpart ofthelan 
tern herein Shown and deSCribed is of course 
not essential to the operation of my improve 
ment,and may be varied without departing 
from my invention,SO long aS the tubes have 
the telescopic adjustment and the globeis So 
held at its upper end that it Can be removed 
when desired, 
My improvement may also be applied to 
So 
- 
45 
2O 
35 
- 
65 
1amps havingasingle tube by arranging the 
stopand cath on the same tube. 
I claim as myinvention? 
1.The combination,in a lampor lantern,of55 
a base Containing the burner,an air-Supply 
tube Communicatingwith the burner and com 
posedoftwopartscapable ofslidinguponeach 
other,in the manner of a telescopiejoint,the 
10wer part of Said tube being Secured to the 6o 
base of the lantern,a plate or frame adapted 
to support the lowerend ofthe globe and se 
Cured to the upperportion ofthe air-tube,and 
a Catch whereby both portions of the air-Sup 
ply tube are locked togetherfor Securing the 
parts in theiroperativeposition,substantially 
aS Set forth. 
2. The combination,in a lamp orlantern,of 
a base provided with a burner,a tube,K K', 
Secured to the base,andprovidedwith an open 
ing,m/,a tube,H,capable of sliding on the 
fixed tube,and provided with an opening,m, 
a globe-Supporting plate,D,Secured to the 
movable tube H,and a Spring-catch,I,at 
tached to the movable tubeandprovided with 75 
a Stud or pin,l,adaptedto engagein theopen 
ings m m/,Substantially as Set forth. 
3,The combination,ina lamp or lantern,of 
a base provided with a burner,a tube,K K', 
Secured to the base,a tube,H,capable ofslid-8o 
ingon thetube KK',aglobe-Supportingplate, 
D,secured to the novabletube H,a stop-bar, 
0,Secured to the fxed tube,and a strap or 
sleeve,p,SeCured to the movable tube,sub 
stantialyas set forth. 
,4,The Combination,ina lamp or lantern,0f 
a base provided with a burner,a tube,K K', 
secured to the base,a tube,H,eapable0fslid 
ing on the tube K K',and conueetedatits up 
perendwith a bell,F,aglobe-Supportingplate, 
D,Secured to the movable tube H,a catch,I, 
adapted to SeCure the upper end ofthe globe 
to the bell F,a Spring-catch,L,whereby the 
two parts of the lamp or lantern are Secured 
intheir operative position,and a stop device, 
0,wherebythe movement ofthe movablepart 
ofthe lantern is limited,substantialy as set 
forth. 
CHARLES T,HAM. 
85 
- 
9o 
Witnesses: 
- 
P.L,SALMON, 
W,P,MCKILLIP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278640.txt	(No Model.) 
E. WESTON. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
REGULATOR FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES. 
No. 278,640, 
Patented May 29, 1883. 
2. . 
(2-21-22-4 
A 
. 
H 
21-22 to 
344-4-2-4-47. 
Z72Gevador. 
(3. /2/c2, 12c, 72 
 
N. PTERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
: 
E WESTON, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
REGULATOR FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES, 
No. 278,640. 
Patented May 29, 1883. 
 
- 
244-6, Wae (.-- 
A/Zeeva(ov. . 
peers, photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD WESTON, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE UNITED 
STATES ELECTRIC LIGHTING COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
REGULATOR FOR DYNAMO-ELECTRIC MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,640, dated May 29, 1888. 
- Application filed February 23, 1883. (No model.) 
the rotation of shaft. A through the instru- so 
I5 ance of the external circuit varies. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD WESTON, a mentality of a crank-rod, C, pivoted to an ad 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, and a justable slide, c, carried by the slotted disk b 
resident of Newark, in the county of Essex and 
on the shaft A. 
5 State of New Jersey, have invented certain new 
D is an arm or frame, to which is connected 
and useful Improvements in Dynamo-Electric 
one end of an adjustable spiral spring, S, the 55 
Machines, of which the following is a specifica 
other end being attached to a lever, E, pivoted 
tion, reference being had to the drawings ac 
to the frame B. . This lever E carries two 
companying and forming a part of the same. 
arms, ef, provided with hinged pawlse'f'', the 
1 O My invention relates to devices that regu 
arms being bent so that they do not lie in the 
late dynamo-electric machines with respect to 
same vertical plane. Between arms e and f 6o 
the amount of current generated, so that the 
are placed two ratchet-wheels, g d, with teeth 
same volume of current may be produced by 
turned in opposite directions, and so arranged 
the machine at all times, although the resist 
with reference to the pawls eff" that the shaft 
F, to which they are fixed, is turned forward or 
In carrying out my invention I employ as 
backward by the engagement with wheel g of 65 
the generator a dynamo-electric machine in 
pawle', or with wheeld of pawlf', the raising 
which field-of-force magnets are excited by a 
or lowering of lever E determining which pawl 
circuit derived from the main or armature cir 
shall operate. Below the wheels 9 d is an 
20 cuit, and in this field-circuit I insert a variable 
electro-magnet, G, the armature EI of which is 
resistance which is operated by an electro 
carried by a frame swinging on a pivot at h, 7 o 
inagnet included in the armature or main cir 
and connected by a link, b, with the lever E. 
cuit. In this combination-viz., a machine of 
An arm, K, attached to armature H, is pro 
the kind specified and regulating devices ar. 
vided with an adjusting-screw for limiting its 
25 ranged as described-my invention is mainly 
downward movement, and is connected to the 
cylinder of a dash-pot, L, the piston m of which 75 
comprised. 
- 
The mechanism devised by me for carrying 
is hinged to the frame D. An adjustable stop, 
out more practically and effectively the inven 
n, limits the upward movement of the arma 
tion also possesses certain features of novelty 
ture H. The shaft F is operatively connected 
3o which I regard as forming part of my present 
with any ordinary rheostat or adjustable re 
invention, and which are pointed out in the 
sistance, V, so that a movement of rotation of 8o 
claims hereto annexed. 
said shaft in one direction introduces more re 
In describing the principle of the construc 
sistance in the circuit including the rheostat, 
tion and mode of operation of my invention, I 
while an opposite movement cuts out resist 
35 will refer to the accompanying drawings, in 
- 
an Ce. 
which Figure 1 is a side elevation of the mech 
anism for imparting movement or operating 
the adjustable resistance or rheostat. Fig. 2 
is a plan and part sectional view of the same. 
4o Fig. 3 is a view in perspective of the machine, 
the rheostat, and regulator combined for opera 
tion. 
The main parts of the regulating mechanism 
are as follows: 
45 A is a shaft, which is driven at a moderate 
speed from any convenient source of power, a 
band-wheel, a, being fixed to it for this pur 
pose. 
B is a swinging lever or frame, oscillated by 
well-understood conditions the devices de 
scribed may be used in various ways in con 
junction with a dynamo-electric machine as a 
regulator. The purpose for which they are 
more particularly designed is to maintain a 90 - 
uniform flow of current from a machine in the 
circuit of which are included electrical devices 
such as arc-lamps-in series. For this purpose 
I include the magnet G in the main circuit of 
the machine, by which the arc-lamps or sini- 95 
lar devices are run in series, and insert the 
rheostat in a circuit which is derived from the 
main and which energizes the field-magnets 
It is evident that under proper and now 85 
 
2 
27s,640 
of the generator. Under this arrangement the the devices operated by the main circuit. This 
arrangement I have found to be productive of 
quantity of current produced by the machine 
important and useful results. 
will be maintained uniform, for should one or 
In so far as the main features of the inven 
more lamps be cut out of circuit, or should the 
speed of the engine run up, the magnet G be 
tion are concerned, the intermediate mechan 
ism employed in conjunction with the rheostat 
comes more highly excited and draws down 
and electro-magnet may be greatly modified or 
the armature H and the lever E. This causes 
even dispensed with; but that described is both 
pawl e' to engage with ratchet-wheel d, and 
convenient and desirable, as it renders the de 
turns the shaft F so as to bring more resist 
vice capable of a greater range of regulation 
ance into the field-circuit. This continues un 
and produces a more sensitive apparatus. 
til the strength of the magnet G and spring S 
balance. On the contrary, should more lamps 
be added to the circuit, or the speed of the en 
gine run down, the pawl f is brought into 
operation by the force of spring S preponder 
ating over the attraction of magnet G, and 
the wheel d is turned so that resistance is cut 
out of the field-circuit. By this means a sen 
sitive regulation of the current generated is 
maintained, the devices operating to maintain 
a constant current strength for all variations 
in the resistance of the line, and to compen 
sate for changes in speed or other causes which 
tend to vary the current produced. 
In order that the shaft F may not be turned 
by the ratchet-wheels g d too far in either di 
rection, the ratchet-wheels are left blank at a 
point, as it, on each wheel. 
By means of the adjusting-screw s the ten 
sion of spring S is varied, so that the regu 
lator may be set for use with a circuit of any 
given normal resistance. Slight or moment 
ary fluctuations of the circuit do not impart 
a vibration to the lever E on account of the 
retarding influence of the dash-pot L. 
I am aware that the magnetic intensity of 
the field-magnets of dynamo-machines has been 
varied heretofore through the instrumentality 
of an electro-magnet in the main circuit. I 
am also aware that the resistance of the field 
circuits of dynamo-machines has been varied 
by means of electro-magnetic regulating de 
vices operating upon the machine in such man 
ner as to cause it to produce a constant elec 
tro-motive force; but in no instance of which 
I am aware has the exciteinent of the field 
been effected by a circuit derived from the 
main, and the electromagnet, through the in 
strumentality of which the resistance of the 
field is varied, been included in series with 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination of a generator, a main 
circuit, devices included therein in series, a 
derived field-circuit, a variable resistance or 
rheostat included in the field-circuit, and an 
electro-magnet included in series with the de 
vices in the main circuit for varying the resist 
ance of the field-circuit, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. The combination of a generator, a main 
circuit, and a derived field-circuit, electrical 
devices included in series in the main circuit, 
a rheostat included in the field-circuit, an 
electro-magnet included in the main circuit, 
and mechanism for operating the rheostat in 
accordance with the varying attraction of the 
magnet, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of a generator having 
main and field circuits, as described, a varia 
ble resistance or rheostat in the field-circuit, a 
pivoted lever provided with pawls and capa 
ble of a reciprocating movement, a shaft for 
operating the rheostat, ratchet-wheels with 
which the pawls may be caused to engage, 
and an electro-magnet for controlling the posi 
tion of said lever, all substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with a rheostat, of a 
shaft for shifting the contacts of the same, 
ratchet-wheels g d, reciprocating paw-lever E, 
and electro-magnet G, swinging lever or frame 
B, shaft A, and a crank-connection from said 
shaft to the frame B, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 21st day of February, l883. 
EDWARD WESTON. 
EIENRY A. BECKMEYER, 
L. W. E. INNESS. 
Witnesses: 
- 
O 
IS 
3O 
35 
So 
55 
75 
90 
95 
-a -- . 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278740.txt	(No Model) 
H. J. REILLY. 
LAMP STOWIE 
No. 278,740, 
Patented June 5, 1883. 
D 
as Sl J 
J 
S 
77.) 
| \ 
r 
/, 2%ies es 6. , 2. 57. 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY J. REILLY, OF UNITED STATES ARMY 
LAMP. STOVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,740, dated June 5, 1883. 
Application filed March 15, 1883. (No model.) 
Be it known that I, HENRY J. REILLY, of ing a utensil over the chimney of a lamp 45 
5 
O 
To all tuhon, it may concern: 
the United States Army, temporarily stationed 
at Governor's Island, New York, have invent 
ed a new and useful Improvement in Lamp 
Stoves, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
In the annexed drawings, making part of 
this specification, Figure-1 is an elevation, 
partly in section, showing a student's lamp 
with attachment for heating; and Fig. 2 is an 
elevation of the adjustable bracket, also partly 
in section. 
The same letters are employed in both fig 
ures in the indication of identical parts. 
My invention consists in the attachment to 
the standard of a students lamp of an adjust 
able bracket carrying an annular arm for sup 
porting a kettle, pan, or other heating utensil 
over the chimney of the lamp for heating wa 
ter, &c. 
A is the standard of a lamp of the kind com 
monly designated as a students lamp. 
B is the oil-reservoir, connected by a pipe, 
C, with the burner D, and forming the lamp 
proper, which is attached to the standard ad 
justably by means of the set-screw E. The 
ring F in these lamps is screwed onto the top 
of the standard. All these parts are in com 
mon use and well known. 
G is a bracket having holes in the horizon 
tal bars G' to receive the standard, which is 
inserted by removing the ring F and sliding 
the bracket down on the standard, to which it 
is adjustably attached by means of a set-screw, 
H. The same means permit the removal of 
the bracket. The stem G has at the top a 
threaded pintle to receive the socket of an an 
nular arm, I, which is secured in place by a 
nut, I'. This annular arm extends over the 
chimney of the lamp and exposes to the heat 
of the lamp the bottom of the vessel which it 
may carry. 
I am aware that various modes of Support 
have been introduced. Thus they have been 
carried by means of a tubular stem which re 
ceives the end of a rod or standard supported 
on the chimney or on the lamp proper; also, 
independently of the lamp by means of a tripod 5O 
standing on the table around the lamp, or by 
a rod extending from a foot-piece or platform 
on which the lamp stood. My invention is 
distinguished from these in the structure of 
the bracket itself as well as in its combination 55 
with the standard which supports adjustably 
as well the bracket as the lamp, and counter 
poises the utensil by the oil-reservoir. The 
upward extension of the stem G", which car 
ries the arm I, also admits of the elevation of 6O 
the utensil above the chimney, even though 
the standard itself was too short. 
It is not necessary that the bracket should 
be made with the lamp, for it may be made 
and sold separately and attached by the pur 
chaser; but my patentisintended to cover the 
bracket adapted for use in the manner speci 
fied. 
What I claim as my invention, and desiret 
- 
secure by Letters Patent, is- 
The bracket G, formed with a stem, G', car 
rying the annular arm I, and with horizontal 
bars G', having holes to receive the standard 
of a students lamp passing through the brack 
et, and adjustably support the utensil, so that 75 
its weight is counterbalanced by that of the oil 
reservoir, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY J. REILLY. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. H. PEARSON, 
CHAs. F. WILSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278840.txt	(No Model.) 
G, A, WAY. 
FIRE BACK FOR STOWES. 
No. 278,840. 
Patented June 5, 1883. 
 
| 
 
Zazzlezzae ar. 
6ease-2 w Zza27 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. WAY, OF MIDDLEVILLE, MICHIGAN. 
FIRE-BACK FOR STOVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 278,840, dated June 5, 1888. 
- 
Application filed January 31, 1883. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE A. WAY, of 
Middleville, in the county of Barry and State 
of Michigan, have invented new and useful 
5 Improvements in Adjustable Fire-Backs; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in the construction of the 
article known as a fire-back,' such as are 
to be found employed in cooking stoves and 
ranges, by means of which one size only need 
I5 be made, which is readily and easily adjusted 
to the different sizes of such stoves or ranges. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction of the device by means of which this 
adjustability is secured. 
Figure 1 shows a front elevation of my im 
proved fire-back. Fig. 2 is a rear elevation 
of the same, showing the extension at each 
end and the adjustability to different sizes of 
stoves and ranges. Fig. 3 is a detail, show 
ing the recess and vertical breaking-grooves. 
Fig. 4 is a section through the line aca, Fig. 2. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, A represents a 
cast-iron fire-back, which is designed to fit a 
small fire-box of a stove, and, so far as the front 
is concerned, is of the usual construction and 
appearance. Upon the rear side are cast two 
pairs of lugs, a b, the former pair being on a 
lower plane than the latter, whereby the 
35 tongues C and E, hereinafter described, will 
pass each other without interfering when the 
fire-back is fitted to a narrow Stove. 
B represents a slide or a plate provided with 
a tongue, C, of a slightly dovetail form in 
cross-section, which engages with the lugs a, 
so that said plate may be extended or retract 
ed, as may be desired D represents another 
similar plate with a similar tongue, E, which 
engages with the other pair of lugs, b. B 
forming the lugs upon the back of the plate 
so as to form a dovetail receSS Outside of the 
body of the plate itself, the latter is not weak 
ened thereby, as would be the case were the 
dovetail recess formed in the body of the 
5o plate. These plates, it will be seen, can be 
readily extended to the right and left, there 
by increasing the length of the fire-back to fit 
fire-boxes of different lengths. 
It Will be seen 
that the plates BD are provided with recesses 
45 
 
Witnesses: 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
E. SCULLY. 
e to receive the lugs on the back of the fire. 55 
back A, whereby the range of the movement 
of the plates is much increased. In making 
Such extensions they should be equal at each 
end, in order to keep the fire-back proper as 
near the center of the fire-box as possible, for 6o 
A. that point will always be found the hottest 
e. 
It will be noticed that upon the rear side of 
the fire-back A. and of both the extension 
plates grooves care cast. These are for the 65 
purpose of enabling the fitter to break off one 
or more sections to adapt the device to fire 
boxes of differing depths. In the center of 
the top edge of the fire-back A a recess, f, is 
formed to receive a thin projection on the 
back of the fire-box found in some stoves. 
The front of the fire-backis also provided with 
vertical grooves did, corresponding with the 
sides of the recessf, adapting the section F 
to be broken out when the projection on the 
back of the fire-box is too thick to be prop 
erly received by the recess f. By this con 
struction it will readily be seen that this im 
proved fire-back will become an immediate ar 
ticle of commerce, as it will enable a party to 
buy such a device, which he can readily fit 
into his stove without the necessity of skilled 
labor so to do. 
I am aware of Patents Nos. 172,192, 221,513, 
222,183, 159,350, and 211,192, and make no 
claim to the construction shown therein. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The centerpiece, A, provided with longi 
tudinal lugs constructed to form a dovetail re 
cess wholly outside the main body of said 
center piece, in combination with a side piece 
having a dovetail-shaped tongue to fit into 
said recess, having one of its surfaces in line 
with the portion of said side piece that comes 
in contact with the back of the center piece. 
2. The centerpiece, A, provided with longi 
tudinal lugs act and b b, constructed to form 
dovetail recesses outside the main body of the 
center piece and arranged on different hori 
zontal planes, in combination with two side 
ieces, B and D, having dovetail-shaped 
tongues CE, adapted to fit said dovetailed re 
cesses, all constructed, arranged, and operat 
ing substantially as shown and described. 
GEORGE A. WAY. 
95 
IOO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US278940.txt	(No Model.) 
W. HADDEN. 
ELECTRIC RAILWAY SIGNAL 
No. 278,940. 
Patented June 5, 1883. 
 
WITNESSES : 
(O. yaze 
44% 
16 as, tyra?e 
INVENTOR: 
2 %z-o 
c. 
BY -(Culvd 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
WILLIAM HADDEN, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO THE AMERICAN RAILWAY 
SIGNAL COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRIC RALWAY-SIGNAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Fatent No. 278,940, dated June 5, 1883. 
Application filed august 26, 1882. (No iodel.) 
5 
O 
through their connections move the levers b b, 4o 
ers. The halves of the banner C close together 35 
The improvement consists in a divided l, operate the signal, so that a smaller current 45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM HADDEN, of by their own gravity to give the signal, and re 
Brooklyn, Kings county, State of New York, fain closed so long as the electric circuit is 
have invented a new and Improved Railway- open. When the circuit is closed the arma 
Signal, of which the following is a full, clear, tures h are drawn toward the magnet D, and 
and exact description. 
My improvement relates to the class of rail- so as to separate the halves of the banner and 
Way-signals employing electricity as a motive obscure them, leaving the opening B uncov 
agent and using movable banners for giving ered. By making the banner in halves I re 
signals. 
duce the motion of the armatures employed to 
ner the two halves of which are attached to will suffice to operate it, and by employing 
pendulous arms operated by electro-magnets. tubular armature-levers I avoid the inertia of 
The object of the invention is to reduce the a large body of metal and render the signal 
motion of the armatures of the electro-magnets, more sensitive to the electric current. 
so as to admit of having them in the stronger 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
portion of the magnetic field. 
opening B, through which is displayed either 
1. In a railway-signal, the divided pendu 
a clear white light or a light modified by the lous banner, in combination with the electro 
bisected banner C. The halves a a' of the ban- magnets and tubular armature-levers, as here- 55 
ner C are attached to the ends of the levers b in specified. 
2. In a railway-signal, the combination, with 
b', fulcrumed on the pivot c and capable of 
swinging freely, so as to close the halves of the the box A, provided with the aperture B and 
banner Cover the opening B, or separate them, the electro-magnets D, of the levers b b, the 
so as to completely uncover the opening B, as parts act of the banner C, secured to the lower 6o 
shown in the drawing. The upper and shorter ends of said levers, the connecting-rods e e', 
arms, dd, of the levers b b are connected by and the armature-leversiff', substantially as 
short rods e e' with the tubular armature-le 
versff", pivoted at of g, and each carrying an 
armatire, ii. Each irrature is within the in. 
fluence of an electro-magnet, D, and the elec- 
tro-magnets are connected in the signal-circuit, 
in which are placed the necessary circuit-break- 
In the drawing, A is a signal-box having the Patent 
Having thus fully described my invention, I so 
Witnesses: 
C. SEDGWICK, 
A. LURCOTT. 
w 
herein shown and described. 
. 
. At 
At 
WILLIAM HADDEN. 
F. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279040.txt	(No Model.) 
W. B. SWAR TWOUT. 
LUMBER TRIMMING MACHINE, 
Patented June 5, 883. 
No. 279,040 
N SN 
WITNESSES : 
47% 
-6wer 
 
NVENTOR 
BY 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARD B. SWARTWOUT, OF THREE RIVERS, MICHIGAN. 
UMBER RM M iNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 279,040, dated June 5, 1883. 
Application filed January 20, 1883. No model.) 
5 
O 
To all whon it Taly concern: 
Be; it known that I, WILLARD B. SWART 
WOUT, of Three Rivers, in the county of St. 
Joseph and State of Michigan, have invented 
a new and Improved Lumber-Trimming Ma 
chine, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
My present invention is an improvement 
upon the lumber-trimming machine shown in 
Lettel's Patent granted to me November 29, 
1SS1, No. 250,174, in which machine the saws 
are arranged for cutting the lumber or boards 
into standard lengths, certain of the saws be 
ing thrown automatically out of action, accord 
ing to the length of the lumber. 
The object of my presentinvention is to pro 
vide for throwing the automatic mechanism in 
and out of action by hand or foot, as may be 
required; and it consists in the construction 
and arrangement of parts, as hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section of 
my improved machine. Fig. 2 is a transverse 
i 
Section of the same. 
A are the transverse beams, and B are the 
longitudinal rails of the frame. C is the driv 
ing-shaft. FF are horizontal shafts at the ends 
of the frame, carrying sprocket-wheels f and 
the endless feeding-chain G. Hare the saws, 
arried by arbors h, which are journaled at one 
end of pivoted frames J, the frames being hung 
from hangers on the under side of the lails B. 
These parts are substantially the same as shown 
in the Letters Patent aforesaid. The frames J 
are sustained by cords or chains p, that pass 
from the Outer ends of the frames around fric 
tion-rollers to the upper side of the rails B, and 
the ends of the cords or chains are connected 
to slide-blocks P, that are fitted for movement 
lengthwise upon the rails. The cord or chain 
from the frame of the first saw is attached to 
the block P that is upon the rail in which the 
second saw works, and the frame of the second 
Saw is connected to the block on the rail of the 
third saw. At the point in each rail B where 
the block Prests when the saw-frame is down 
Ward is an aperture in which is pivoted atrap, 
R, that is held upward by a coil-spring, ), so 
as to form a support for the block. Beneath 
the trap R is a pivoted latch, T, provided with 
a spring, t, that tends to retain the latch be 
neath the trap, so as to prevent the trap from 
moving down. A rod, rope, or chain, t, is con 
nected to the lower end of the latch T, and 
passed to a convenient place for operation to 
move the latch from beneath the trap. The 
recess in the rail is made large enough to al 
low the block P to turn therein when the trap 
is released. 
In operation the lumber or boards to be 
sawed are carried along by the feeding-chains, 
and if the piece is not of sufficient length to 
reach the second saw the end is cut off by the 
If it is long enough to reach the 
first saw. 
second saw, its end, coming in contact with the 
block P on the second rail, will carry the block 
forward, and thus raise the frame of the first 
saw and depress that saw below the level of 
the rails, so that the lumber will be cut only 
by the second saw; or, in case the piece is long 
enough to reach the third saw, by the same op 
eration the first and Second saw's Will be de 
pressed. In case it is desired to prevent this 
depression of either saw-the first one, for in 
stance-the level or chain at beneath the Second 
saw is to be drawn upon to release the latch T 
from beneath the trap R, so that when the lum 
ber comes in contact with the block P, instead 
of carrying the block along and depressing the 
first saw, the block P is turned down into the 
recess, the trap R giving Way, so that the first 
saw remains in its elevated position and the 
lumber is cut offshortel than it would have 
been if the block had been carried along upon 
the rail. The blockP may be turned down by 
hand for the same purpose, and in this manner, 
while providing for the automatic operation of 
the machine, I also provide for throwing the 
automatic mechanism out of action, which is 
desirable in some cases. 
For holding the lumber down and prevent 
ing it from being raised by the Saw's, I provide 
an attachment consisting of a bal', (t, that may 
be sustained by standards at the ends of the 
frame, or suspended from above, and horizon 
tal shoes c, carried by the irons b, that are fit 
ted to slide through or on the bar. The irons 
b are squared to prevent turning, and have 
2 5 
3 5 
55 
95 
ICO 
 
29,040 
3. The combination, with the swinging saw 
frame J, sliding block P, and cord or chain p, 
connecting said frame and block, of the hinged 
trap R, pivoted latch T, springs 't, the former 
spring, ), bealing against the trap R, and the 
latter spring, t, connecting the lower end of the 
latch with the main frame, and cord or chain 
at, substantially as shown and described. 
4. The combination, with the swinging saw 
frames J and rails B, of the horizontal bar (, 
supported at its ends, squared irons b, passing 
through holes in the bar (, and provided with 
nuts on their upper ends, and shoes c, secured 
to the lower ends of the irons, and spiral 
springs d, forcing the irons and the shoes down 
on the lumber, substantially as shown and de 
Seibed. 
2 5 
3 5 
WILLARD B. SWARTWOUT. 
s 
Witnesses: 
J. P. McKEY, 
C. L. BLOOD. 
IO 
heads or nuts on their upper ends to limit 
their downward movement. Springs d on the 
ilrons force them and the shoes down on the 
lumber and depress the shoes to their place 
after the lumber has passed. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a swinging saw 
frame, a sliding block, and a cord or chain 
connecting said frame and block, of a trap 
adapted to support said block and permit the 
latter to be forced beneath the upper surface 
of the rail when desired, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. In lumber-trimming machines, the com 
bination, with the slide-blocks P, that are con 
nected to the swinging Saw-frames, of the trap 
R and latch T, arranged for allowing the blocks. 
to be forced below the led of the machine 
when the latch is moved from beneath the 
trap, substantially as shown and described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279140.txt	(No Model.) 
J, T, EAST, 
SAW SET. 
No. 279,140. 
A 
Patented June 12, 1883. 
 
INVENTOR 
76/27z Z Z/25Z, 
7%%z. 
ATORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. EAST, OF CASTANA, IOWA. 
SAW-SET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 279,140, dated June 12, 1883. 
Application filed February 28, 1883. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN T. EAST, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Castana, in 
the county of Monona and State of Iowa, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Saw-Sets; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the annexed 
drawings, making a part of this specification, 
and to the letters and figures of reference 
marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
view of my invention; Fig. 2, a side elevation, 
partly insection; Fig. 3, a cross-section through 
line aca, Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a detail view, showing 
the connection of the gage with the standard. 
This invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in saw-sets, the object there 
of being to provide such a device as will be 
simple in its construction, effective in its op 
eration, and readily adjustable to any size saw, 
and to any angle to which the teeth are de 
sired to be set, these objects being attained 
by the construction substantially as shown in 
the accompanying drawings, and hereinafter 
more fully described. 
In the drawings, A represents a suitable 
standard, capable of being readily attached to 
a work-bench or other suitable support, said 
standard being formed with arms BC, between 
which is placed the saw, said arms being pro 
vided at their outer ends with set-screws a b, 
by which the angle of the saw is regulated and 
held. The arm B is formed at its inner end 
with a guide, c, for a plunger, D, having its 
lower end in the shape of a die, d, said plun 
ger working in a groove, e, upon the inner 
face of the standard A, and through a guide, 
f, at the upper end thereof. The upper end of 
the standard is bifurcated, as shown in Fig. 1, 
the bifurcations forming boxes for the bear 
ings of a crank, E, provided with a cam, g, re 
volving between the said bifurcations. Fol 
lowersh, operated by set-screws i, admit of 
the vertical adjustment of the cam-crank to 
regulate the stroke of the plunger D, on which 
55 
it acts, a spring, k, being placed around said 
plunger to carry it up again after the stroke 
has been effected. The arm C, at its point of 
juncture with the standard A, forms an anvil, 5o 
l, and upon the sides of said standard at this 
point are provided dovetailed slots m, for the 
reception of guides u, upon a gage, F, thus 
forming a close connection of said gage and 
standard to prevent lateral displacement or 
unevenness of these parts in relation to each 
other. A set-screw, G, having its bearing in 
a brace, o, of the gage, and entering the rear 
of the standard, serves to secure the adjust 
ment of said gage to any sized saw, said set 
screw being provided with a jam-nut, p. 
In the operation of my invention the gage is 
adjusted to the size of the saw to be set, and 
said saw placed between the arms of the stand 
ard and adjusted to the proper angle by the 
The saw is now moved 
set-screws therein. 
along by the left hand, while the crank is op 
erated with the right, each stroke of the plun 
ger giving the tooth upon which it strikes the 
proper set. 
By the use of the crank the operation is ren 
ar than by the usu 
dered easy and more regul 
ally-employed means of striking the plunger 
with a hammer, or the use of a cam operated 
by the vertical motion of lever-arm. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
In a saw-set, the standard A, formed with 
guide-arms BC, in combination with the cam 
g, crank E, spring k, plunger D, screws a b, 
and adjustable gage F., provided with guides 
u, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
JOHN THOMAS EAST. 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
MARCUs P. HANCHETT, 
WM. T. DAY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279240.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 279,240, 
 
A., I, G-RIGGS, 
STOVE BOARD, 
Patented June 12, 1883, 
Fi. 1. 
WITNESSES: 
cz2%z, 
n 
62 4-v- 
By his tion. 57 
NVENTOR: 
A. 
f 2 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. ?. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
... . A. IRVING GRIGGS OF WESTFORD, NEW YORK. 
stove-BoARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 279,240, dated June 12, 1888. 
Application filed April 11, 1883. (No molel.) 
. 
* 
, 
construction is that the binding-strip is readily 
To all whom it may concern : 
forced off and detached. By seaming the two 
Be it known that I, A. IRVING GRIGGS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at West 
together I obviate this. 
ford, in the county of Otsego and State of New 
In the drawings which serve to illustrate my 
invention, Figure 1 is a cross-section of a stove 
5 York, have invented certain Improvements in 
Stove-Boards, of which the following is a speci 
board embodying my invention inits most ap 
proved form. Figs. 2 and 3 are views illus 
fication. 
trating steps in the construction. Fig. 4 is a 6o 
... My invention relates to that class of stove 
boards in which a sheet-metal face is backed detached fragmentary view, showing the mode 
Io by a filling or body of wood or other material of securing the ends of the binding-strips. 
commonly employed for this purpose. Such Figs. 5, 6, and 7 show various Ways of arrang 
boards have been made by covering the wooden ing the seam. 
backing or body with a sheet of zinc, the edge A represents the wooden or other base or 65 
of which is then spun down over a beveled or backing for the board; B, the tin disk or plate 
I5 molded edge of the wood and under its bottom. which covers the top of A, and C is the zinc 
This is easily done, as the zinc takes shape binding-strip. 
In constructing, my board I may employ a 
readily in spinning; but owing to its soft and 
yielding character the surface upon which the straight strip of zinc of the proper Width, or 7o 
stove stands soon becomes indented and an endless washer-like strip. I will describe 
2O marred. To obviate this, tin-plate has been the operation where a plain straight strip is 
employed to some extent; but it is found to be employed. I cut a sheet of tin-plate of the 
impossible to spin this harder and more re-proper thickness to the shape of the Wooden 
fractory material over the edge of the wooden backing, which is usually circular, and then 75 
backing. Resort has been had, however, to turn down its edge preparatory to seaming, 
25 crimping the tin sheetsin order to cause them and With the usual mechanism. I then take a 
to take over the edge of the wood properly, strip of zinc of the proper length and secure 
and in some cases the sheet has been applied it to the edge of the tin disk by seaming in the 
in quarters or sectors and seamed together. usual way with sheet metals. Fig. 2 shows 8O 
It is desirable, however, that the upper surface the first step in the seaming process; but in 
3o of the board shall be smooth and level, or at the after process the strip C is turned down. 
least devoid of seams and corrugations; that it After the Zinc strip is united to the tin, so as 
shall be made from one sheet; that it shall be of to form a border for the latter, the whole is 
some harder and more unyielding material than placed upon the backing A, and the Zinc bor- 85 
zinc, and that the part of the metal covering der spun down with the usual tools until it as 
35 which binds the edge of the backing shall be sumes the form and position shown in Fig. 1. 
of some metal that may be spun smoothly over The ends of the strip C may then be soldered 
the molded or finished edge of the backing. together or secured to the Wood by a tack, as 
This I accomplish by making the covering- in Fig. 4. 
plate of sheet-tin, either plain, crystallized, 
Fig. 3 shows the zinc strip cut from a sheet 
4o or embossed, as desired, and of the same shape in an annular washer-like form, and its inner 
as the wooden or other backing. To the mar- margin seamed to the tin. The dotted lines 
gin of this tin sheet or disk I attach, by seam- show how it is bent downward in spinning. 
ing, a strip of sheet-zinc wide enough to be 
spun over and to cover the edge of the back- straight strip or an endless annular strip; but 
it may be a strip with curved parallel edges, 
but not endless-that is to say, it may be part 
of an endless annular strip of which the radius 
of curvature greatly exceeds the radius of the IOO 
circular plate B. When this form of strip is. 
adopted it will, after seaming, stand off or 
down at an incline, the angle with the plate B 
depending upon the radius of the curvature, 
Boards have been proposed in which the 
metallic face or top plate has been made sepa 
rate from the binding, and the binding-strip 
bent over around the edge of the backing and 
5o spun down over the edge of the backing and 
the edge of the top plate, the ends of the strips 
being secured by tacks. The objection to this 
I have spoken of the zinc strip C as being a 95 
45 ing. 
55 
9O 
279,240 
In Figs. 5, 6, and 7 I have shown the seam 
arranged in different ways. Fig. 5 shows it 
formed back from the edge of the wooden back 
ing. Fig. 6 shows the Zinc thrown up to a 
level with the surface of the tin-plate. Fig. 
7 shows the seam turned in the opposite way 
from that in the other figures. This forms a 
slightly-raised border around the board. I 
prefer to turn the same in the opposite way, 
as it offers less obstruction to the movement 
of the stove. 
I have shown a plain single seam; but I may 
employ the ordinary double seam as well. I 
have also referred to the plate B as made 
from one piece, and I prefer to make it from 
one piece; but it may be made from several 
pieces seamed smoothly together, with the 
seams turned down. 
Fig. 1 shows any improved mode of attach 
ing the central button or ornamental boss to 
the board. The button a may be of the usual 
kind. These are ordinarily attached by sol 
dering to the under side of the button the 
bow or arch of a staple made from sheet-tin, 
the prongs of which are passed through the 
board and clinched down directly on the non 
metallic backing. In packing, handling, and 
using the boards the solder is apt to give way 
and the button be detached; or the clinched 
prongs may straighten or draw out, being bent 
down on a soft material, which precludes mak 
ing a sharp bend in clinching. I pass the 
prongs of the staple b down through slits in 
the button and through the board, then through 
slits in a metal plate or washer, c, and then 
clinch them down on the said plate or washer 
c. This mode of attachment insures the but 
I prefer to employ sheet-tim for the plate B; 4o 
ton against accidental removal by any force 
less than that which would break the parts. 
but galvanized iron or other iron plate may be 
employed; and for the strips C, I may employ 
other ductile metals capable of being spun 
as copper or brass, for example. 
Having thus described my invention, I 45 
claim 
1. A stove-board comprising a base or back 
ing of wood or other suitable material, a fac 
ing of tin-plate or its specified equivalent, and 
a border of sheet-zinc or other ductile metal, 5O 
Seamed to the margin of the tin-plate and spun 
down over the edge of the backing, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. A metal covering for the wooden backing 
of a stove-board, composed of a sheet of hard 55 
refractory metal-as tin-plate, for example 
to form the facing of the board, and a border of 
sheet-zinc, or other ductile metal capable of be 
ing formed over the edge of the wood by spin 
ning, Seamed to the exterior margin of the tin 
plate, substantially as and for the purposes set 
fourth. 
3. The combination, with a stove-board, of 
the button (, the staple b, secured to or in the 
button a, and the metallic washer-plate c, upon 
which the prongs of the staple are clinched, all 
substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
A. RVING GRIGGS. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR C. FRASER, 
HENRY CONNETT, 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279340.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
D. D. CODDING, 
MANUFACTURE OF ORNAMENTAL CHAINS. 
No. 279,340, 
Patented June 12, 1883. 
... 
" 
Az-Z. 
  
SSS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z23. 
CZ25) 
-Z 
- 
w 
- 
2. 
7766ese 
Zzczercor: 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID D. CODDING, OF NORTH ATTLEBOROUGH, MASSACHUSETTS, 
MANUFACTURE OF ORNAMENTAL CHANS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 279,340, dated June 12, 1883. 
Application filed Janitary 8, 1883. (No model.) . 
To all whom it may concern: 
In Fig. 3I have shown a modification where 
Be it known that I, DAVID D. CODDING, of 
in two short tubes, 22, are inserted into the 
North Attleborough, in the county of Bristol 
tube A, one at each end, each loop being fast 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
ened to one of them. When all the tubes A. 
5 new and useful Improvement in the Manufac 
are in place and fastened together by the loops, 
ture of Jewelry; and I do hereby declare that 
each loop is securely held in place by the ad 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip-jacent loops, which draw upon it equally from 
tion of the same. 
opposite sides. 
The described chain can be formed of any 
desired length, and can be cut up into pieces 
of the proper size for bracelets, shorter chains, 
&c. 
The manner of securing the loops by swag 
ing to a short tube offers many advantages 
over the use of a single loop passing entirely 
through the outer tube, which I am awarehas 
been patented. There is a great saving of the 
valuable gold or plated wire, since the greater 
part of the concealed portion is formed of the 
cheap brass tubing. 
Although I prefer to connect theinner ends of 
the loops to tubes 22 by swaging, yet I may use 
solder for that purpose, in which case the tubes 
might be dispensed with and solid pieces to 
the ends of which the wire loops are soldered 7o 
substituted for them, as shown in Fig. 5. 
65 
- 
55. 
25 
My invention relates to the manufacture of 
Io jewelry, and more particularly to the construc 
tion of ornamental chains and bracelets of that 
class which are composed of laterally-set tubes 
placed closely together and connected by wire 
loops protruding from the ends of the tubes 
and interlocked with adjacentloops. A chain 
of this class has been patented wherein the 
tubes are connected by long loops of wire 
placed loosely in and passing through the 
tubes, a small portion of each loop protruding 
2O from the ends of the tube; and the object of 
my inventionis to greatly lessen the cost of this 
chain by a peculiar construction of the links. 
My invention consists in a chain or bracelet 
formed of laterally-set tubes, two short wire 
loops for each tube, and an independent de 
vice for connecting the inner ends of such loops 
Within the tubes. 
I have shown in the drawings various ways 
of carrying out my invention. 
Figure 1 is a plan view. Fig. 2 is a section 
through one of the tubes. Fig. 3 is a modifi 
cation. Fig. 4 shows the inner tube and loops. 
Fig. 5 is another modification. 
AA represent short lengths of tubular wire, 
of plain or ornamental form and of any de 
sired shape in cross-section. These tubes are 
set closely together and are connected by loops 
11 of wire, as shown in Fig. 1. Each loop 1 
is swaged into the end of a short brass tube, 
2, Fig. 4. The tube 2 is inserted into the tube 
A, so that the loops 1 protrude from the ends 
of such tube. The loops are then bent back 
and passed through the next loop, which is in 
turnbent and threaded through the succeeding 
45 loop, forming the chain shown in Fig. 1. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
An ornamental chain composed of laterally 
set tubes placed closely together, and connect 
ed by interlocking loops of wire formed of 75 
precious or plated base metal, which loops 
protrude from opposite ends of the tubes and 
are secured within them by a connection of 
base metal, the device being so constructed for 
the reason and purpose set forth. 
Intestimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
D. D. CODDING. 
Witnesses: 
H. H. CURTIs, 
FRED. B. BYRAM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279441.txt	(No Model) 
No. 279,44l. 
J. S. SACKETT, 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT. 
Patented June 12, 1883. 
var. 
ul-e- c/zzie 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH S. SACKETT, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO JANE HALLIWELL, OF SAME PLACE. 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 279,441, dated June 12, 1883. 
Application filed April 27, 1883. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH. S. SACKETT, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Conecticut, have invented a new Im 
provement in Mechanical Movements; and I 
do hereby declare the following, when taken 
in connection with accompanying drawings 
and the letters of reference marked thereon, to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
same, and which said drawings constitute part 
of this specification, and represent, in 
Figures 1, 2, and 3, top views of the pawl 
and ratchet in different positions. 
This invention relates to a device for con 
verting reciprocating into rotary movement, 
and may be used as a substitute for the common 
pawl and ratchet, the object of the invention 
being to construct the pawl so that without 
the intervention ofspringsit may operate upon 
the ratchet in both directions in its reciprocat 
ing movement; and it consists in the construc 
tion of the pawl, as hereinafter described, and 
more particularly recited in the claim. 
A represents the toothedratchet, arranged, 
Say, upon the shaft a in the usual manner. 
The pawl consists of two arms, b c, connected 
by a body, d, the nose of one, b, arranged to 
work in one direction, and the nose of the 
other, c, in the opposite direction. The dis 
tance between the nose of the two pawls is less 
than the distance between the point of one 
tooth and the point of the tooth diametrically 
opposite, or less than the extreme diameter of 
the ratchet. 
Suppose the pawl to stand in the position 
seen in Fig.1. As the pawl advances the end of 
the pawl clides up the incline of the next tooth, 
. 
e, and in this movement is thrown away from 
the center, drawing the other pawl, b, into en 
gagement with its next tooth, f, as seen in Fig. 4o 
2. Continuing its movement, the pawlb turns 
the ratchet until the pawl arrives at its ex 
treme movement, as seen in broken lines, Fig. 
2. Then on the return the noseb will ride back 
on the incline of the next tooth, h, that incline 45 
throwing the pawl b outward and drawing the 
other pawl inward into engagement with its 
next tooth, i, as seen in Fig. 3, and when so en 
gaged the movement will continue until it ar 
rives at the opposite extreme, as seenin Fig.1. 
Thus each pawl acts not only to turn the wheel 
in its respective direction, but to draw the op 
posite pawl into engagement as itself is thrown 
out by the incline of the tooth over which it is 
passing, the one pawl, b, serving to turn the 
ratchet one-step, the other pawl, c, on the re 
turn serving to turn the ratchet in the oppo 
site direction, and thus at each free recipro 
cating movement of the pawl the ratchet is 
turned two points. 
SO 
55 
- 
I claim- . 
The combination of the ratchet A, its teeth 
inclined upon their backs, the double pawl b 
c, their respective noses engaging the teeth of 
the ratchet, one in one direction and the other 65 
in the opposite, one drawn into engagement 
by the movement of the other over the incline 
of the back of its next tooth, substantially as 
described. 
JOSEPH s. SACKETT. 
Witnesses: 
JOS. C. EARLE, 
J. H. SHUMWAY. 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279542.txt	(No Model.) 
W. CRAVENS. 
FLEXIBLE LADDER, 
No. 279,542, 
Patented June 19, 1883. 
Z 
2/72664a, 
Arzzzz - 
22cc eel - 4.4-e- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
VINCENT CRAVENS, OF MADISON, INDIANA. 
FLEXBLE LADDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 279,542, dated June 19, 1883. 
Application filed February 27, 1883. (No model.) 
Having thus fully described my invention, 45 
of which, while securely held in proper posi 
tion, may be quickly attached and detached to 
increase or diminish the length of the ladder. 35 
Such a ladder is especially valuable as a fire 
escape, and when hanging against the house. 
the endsa', which form rounds or steps, will be 
held away from the wall to give a perfect foot 
hold with which no swaying of the ladder will 4o 
interfere. 
It is obvious that the ladder is capable of 
being used either end up, and with either side 
toward the wall with equal effect. 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A section for flexible ladders, consisting 
of a rectangular link of metal having one end 
bent back upon itself and then bent outward 5o 
away from the main portion of the link, sub 
stantially as described and shown. 
2. A flexible ladder composed of detachable 
sections or links A, each formed of a single 
piece of metal bent to form a rectangular link 
having the hooks a, and the outwardly-bent 
bar a?, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
55 
VINCENT CRAVENS. 
Witnesses: 
MATTHEW KENNEDY, 
SIMEON E. LELAND. 
15 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, VINCENT CRAVENS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Madi 
son, in the county of Jefferson and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Flexible Ladders, of which the 
following is a specification, to wit: 
The invention relates to an improvement in 
flexible ladders; and it consists of a ladder 
Io each step or round of which is secured to or 
forms a part of a detachable link, whereby a 
ladder of any desired length may be quickly 
formed, which will afford perfect foothold and 
may be quickly and easily adjusted, substan 
tially as will be hereinafter more fully set forth. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
its construction and operation, referring to the 
accompanying drawing, in which the figure 
represents a perspective view of a ladder such 
as will describe. 
A represents a rectangular link of metal, 
formed with one end turned back upon itself 
to form hooks a a upon each side, and then 
25 turned outward to throw the end bar, a?, of the 
link away from the main body a short distance. 
As many of these links may be joined together 
as may be desired by engaging the hooks upon 
one section with the plain end of another. 
Aladder is thus formed which is light and 
strong, may be readily folded up, and the links 
2O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279642.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 279,642. 
S, FOX. 
STUFFING BOX OR PACKING CHAMBER, 
Patented June 19, 1883. 
2 2. 
/777 
 
WZZze eases, 
n/. 
34t &ke T. 
c42e22eey 
as%zeeze/Zale 
-%23-2, 
Zzzezza? 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL FOX, OF TOLEDO, OHIO. 
STUFFING-BOX OR PACKING-CHAMBER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 279,642, dated June 19, 1883. 
Application filed December 6, 1882. No model.) 
c 
O 
15 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL Fox, a subject 
of the Queen of Great Britain, residing at To 
ledo, in the county of Lucas and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain-new and usefullmprove 
ments in a Stuffing-Box or Packing-Chamber; 
and fdohereby declare that thefflowing is 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to the 
letters and figures of referencemarked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
view of the cap, having a series of wedges cast 
thereon; Fig. 2, a similar view of the packing 
chamber or stuffing-box with the cap removed. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation of the various 
parts of my invention when connected together, 
and Fig. 4 a detail view of the metallic pack 
Ing. 
The present invention refers to certain new 
and valuable improvements in stuffing-boxes 
or packing-chambers provided with metallic 
packing to be used for piston-rods, plungers, 
hydraulic rams and elevators, &c. 
The object of the invention is to provide an 
efficient means for packing such rods, which 
will economize space in the direction of the 
length thereof and permit the ready adjustment 
and renewal of the packing and providing 
against leakage. These several objects Iattain 
in a successful and thorough manner by the con 
struction substantially as shown in the draw 
ings, hereinafter described, and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, A represents 
the stuffing-box or casing, preferably cast with 
a suitable sleeve, a, to a barrel or cylinder or 
other containing-vessel. The stuffing box or 
casing A has concentric grooves b, for the re 
eeption of the wedges B and packing C, as 
- 
35 
shown in Fig. 3, the planes of said packing 4O 
conforming to the planes of the wedges. The 
wedges B are preferably cast with the cap D, 
said cap being placed over the stuffing box or 
casing and drawn down upon its bearings by 
suitable screws or bolts, c. Between the wedges 45 
B and packing C are located Suitable springs, 
d, to render the packing elastic and to modify 
the pressure, a confining-ring, e, being con 
nected to the stuffing box or casing by screws 
or other suitable means, to hold or confine the 
packing to the line of its motion. The tend 
ency of the wedges B is to compress the pack 
ing-upon all sides of the plunger, rod, or shaft 
alike, thus holding it upon its proper center 
line. 
In the case of a vertical plunger the Springs 
d may be made of a uniform strength; but for 
a horizontal rod or shaft the springs upon the 
lower half should be strengthened to counter 
act the sagging of said rod or shaft. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is- 
. 
A stuffing box or casing having a series of 
concentric grooves, in combination with a se- 65 
ries of packing-blocks placed therein, and a cap 
secured over said stuffing box or casing, and 
having a series of wedges located within the 
slots and adapted to propel the packing-blocks 
in a lateral direction toward the rod or plunger, 7O 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
55 
SAMUEL FOX. 
Witnesses: 
N. E. OLIPHANT, 
H. B. ZEWELY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279742.txt	(No Model.) 
L. H. GOOD WIN. 
DRIVING CHAIN OR BELT. 
No. 279,742. 
Patented June 19, 1883. 
N. PETERS, Photo-tithographer. washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LEVI. H. GOODWIN, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
DRiving CHAIN OR BELT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 279,742, dated June 19, 1888. 
Application filed March 7, 1883. No model.) 
5 
25 
45 
i 
In the form shown in Fig. 3, instead of the 
Be it known that I LEVI H. GOODWIN, a chain being formed of separate links A, it is 
formed of a single strand or two strands of 55 
wire cord, which are lapped across each other 
in the center of the clip B. Each side of the 
clip-piece B has a depression in the center of 
the groove. The strands A" are forced into 
these depressions when the halves of the clip 
are riveted together, thus locking the clip 
against slipping. It is evident that in this 
form of my invention a cable-belt of any de 
sired length may be made of a single wire cord, 
as follows: The Wire cable is doubled in the 
middle. Then at regular distances apart, com 
mencing from the doubled end, the cable is 
crossed and clips B secured over it. The free 
ends of the cable are united in any suitable 
manner, and the two ends of the cable-belt 
united by the clip B. It is also evident that, 
instead of crossing the cable, the grooves in 
the clips could be given a short curve, so as 
to bring the opposite cables together, or nearly 
so, near the center of the clip; but it is be 
lieved this method is not so desirable where 
heavy duty is required, as the coupling-clip 
would be liable to slip. 
In the form shown in Fig. 5 either form of 
coupling-clip may be adopted, and the Webb', 
uniting two or more of the clips, may be left 
plain or perforated to engage pins upon a 
sprocket-wheel. In making sprocket-wheels 
for my cable-belt I prefer to make depressions 
in the periphery counter to the coupling-clips 
B or B in addition to the projections which 
engage the edges of the clip. These depres 
sions should be deep enough to let the cable 
links rest upon the periphery of the wheel and 
relieve the clips from the strain. 
It is intended to make and sell the coupling 
clips and links. A separately, so that any one 
can readily make a belt of any length desired, 
and quickly repair the belts should any part 
give Way. 
It would of course be a mere modification of 
my invention to omit the coupling pin or rivet 
b' and unite the two halves of the clip by sepa 
late rivets or bolts. 
It is also evident that the form of the clip 
may be changed without departing from the 
principle of my invention, the essential fea 
tures of the clip being to unite or clamp the 
cable-belt at intervals of its length, and to en 
To all lulloi), it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cin 
cinnati, county of Hamilton, State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful In 
provements in Driving Chains or Belts, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The invention relates particularly to end 
less chains or belts fortransmitting power. Its 
object is a cheap medium for communicat 
ing motion, which can be readily put together 
in suitable lengths, and in case of wear or 
accidental breakage quickly repaired. This 
object is accomplished by the meansillustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a section 
of chain embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a perspective view of one-half of one of. the 
clip or coupling pieces, looking at the inside. 
The other half of this piece is shown in posi 
tion on the links in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 shows a 
modified form of my invention. One-half of 
the clip-piece used in this form of my inven 
tion is illustrated in perspective in Fig. 4. 
This view, like Fig. 3, is looking at the inside 
of the clip. Fig. 5 illustrates a method of 
In this view several 
making a wide belt. 
strands or links of wire rope are united side 
by side by a broad clip, which consists of sev 
eral single clips united or cast in one piece. 
In Fig. 1, A representslinks of wire, cord, or 
rope united by clamps B, which are made pref 
The clips are 
erably of malleable cast-iron. 
cast in halves, each half having annular 
grooves b, semicircular in cross-section, to re 
ceive the rounded ends of the links A. Upon 
one side of the clip are cast pins l', which are 
to enter holes l'in the opposite side, and pro 
ject a sufficient distance through the holes to 
admit of the ends being riveted to secure the 
halves together. The outer ends of the grooves 
b are oval and the edges rounded off, so as to 
permit the chains to turn around a small 
sprocket-wheel without cutting or injuring the 
links. 
The links may be made endless or formed 
from pieces cut from a wire cable by brazing 
or soldering the ends together. In the latter 
case a depression in the groove in each half of 
clip B should be made large enough to admit 
jointed end of the link, which should come in 
the center of the clip. 
. 
- 
. 
. 
. 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
279,742 
2. As a new article of manufacture, the ca 
gage with the teeth of a sprocket-wheel to 
transmit power. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by uniting the links together, substantially as 
Letters Patent, is- 
1. The two-part coupling-clip B for cable 
belts or chains, having depressions b to receive 
the cable, and suitable means-such as rivets 
b'-for uniting the parts together. 
ble-chain consisting of links A and clips B for IO 
specified. 
LEWI H. GOODWIN. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED. B. BENEDICT, 
CHAS. F. G ESSERT. 
- 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279842.txt	(No Model.) 
F, TAGGART, 
5 sheets-Sheet 1 
- 
APPARATUS FOR DISINTEGRATING GRAIN, &c. 
No. 279,842, 
Patented June 19, 1883. 
7%z Z. 
O 
o 
- 
2-27 co- 
5v22, 
A. 
7. 
4. 
2 
3-2 
Z. 
\ 
,- 
2= 
z-f Ziffz 
62. 
---. c 
27. 
A 
27 
Z 
: 
At 
v/series 
accC w 
fif 
2,734 
/ 
77 eye (ov: 
42- 24 ce-- /262-1/ 
2. 
24-26 
4 
 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 279,842. 
Patented June 19, 1883, 
F, TAGGART. 
APPARATUS FOR DISINTEGRATING GRAIN, &c. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
F, TAGGART, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
APPARATUS FOR DISINTEGRATING GRAIN, &c. 
No. 279,842, 
Patented June 19, 1883. 
Z29, 2 
C a. 
g% r 
  
 
 
ex2N 25%N 
2 
N22 
SNS 
 
 
e 
Zara 
2.3 
N. PETERS Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
F, TAGGART, 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
APPARATUS FOR DISINTEGRATING GRAIN, &c. 
Patented June 19, 1883, 
Z 
NNNN 
2 S 
N 
ZAS? 
1, R 
>N@ZZZZZZZZZZZZZN 
 
 
N, PEERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
F. TAGGART. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 279,842. 
APPARATUS FOR DISINTEGRATING GRAIN, &c. 
Patented June 19, 1883. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
?ae 
5,222222222222 
A. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithograph 
er. Washington, D.C. 
122---- 
Z77 ve-72. Zoz7. 
2. 22:1 
22 
c1%) 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRANCIS TAGGART, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
APPARATUS FOR DISINTEGRATING GRAN, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 279,842, dated June 19, 1883. 
Application filed November 30, 1881. (Noodl.) 
IO 
20 
35 
55 
- 
To all whom it Tay concern. 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS TAGGART, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Apparatus for Disintegrating Grain 
and other Frangible Substances, of which the 
following is a specification. 
In a patent granted to me October 18, 1881, 
No. 248,52S, I have described an apparatus and 
process for reducing frangible substances to 
particles and collecting the products, consist 
ing in projecting the grains or granules with 
force against a hard abutment or obstacle by 
means of a continuous swiftly-flowing current 
of aeriform fluid under high pressure, into 
which the substance is introduced at a con 
venient point, whereby the latter is disinte 
grated, and then collecting the products, while 
the aeriform fluid is allowed to escape, leaving 
behind the lighter as well as the heavier pro 
ducts of the disintegration. 
My present invention consists in matters of 
construction and of combination by which the 
utility and efficiency of the apparatus is en 
hanced in carrying out such process. As it is 
important to effect a regular and uniform feed 
to the ejector, I use in combination therewith 
a rotating disk feeding device for supplying 
the substance to be disintegrated in proper 
qualntity continuously and unvaryingly to a 
chamber connected with the projecting device, 
while provision is made for the collection of 
the dust and for the separation of the light 
products of the disintegration from the out 
flowing air within a chamber independent of 
that in which the disintegration or comminu 
tion is effected. Provision is also made for 
adjusting the width of the ejector discharging-jet is projected in a thin, wide sheet. 
tube to suit the substance to be treated, and 
thus adapt the apparatus alike for the reduc 
tion of different-sized grain and for the reduc 
tion of ores. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate one 
form of an apparatus in which my improve 
ments are organized and arranged to carry the 
said process into effect, and in which- 
- 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section of the 
apparatus embracing my improvements; Fig. 
2, an enlarged vertical sectional view of the 
ejector device. Fig. 3 shows the ejector-orifice, 
looking at the orifice of the directing and dis 
charging tube; Fig. 4, a partial horizontal sec 
tional view of the same, taken on the linea: a 
of Fig. 2; Fig. 5, a similar sectional view taken 
on the line 11 of Fig. 2; Fig. 6, a vertical sec 
tion taken through the apparatus, showing the 
chamber in which the floating matter is sepa 
rated from the spent air passing from the dis 
integrating-chamber: Fig. 7, an enlarged sec 
tional view of the feeding device, and Fig. S 
the ribbed top surface of the feeding-disk. 
The disintegration or comminution of the 
substance is effected in a practically-closed 
chamber, A, having a hoppered spout, B, for 
the discharge of the heavy portion of the pro 
ducts of the disintegration, while the lighter 
portion, rising with the air, passes out by an 
upwardly-discharging spout or spouts, and is 
conducted into a separating or dust-collecting 
chamber. 
The ejector device and the abutment or sur 
face against which the substance is projected 
are shown as depending within the chamber 
A from the top horizontal timbers, D, in which 
they are secured, while the feeding appliances 
and the chamber C, containing air under com 
pression, are shown as mounted upon the top 
and outside of said chamber A, in proper re 
lation to and in communication with the eject 
or-nozzles. The chamber C is supplied with 
air at a proper pressure by any suitable con 
pressor, and its outlet a is long and narrow 
and preferably invertical line with the ejector, 
the sides b b of which are flat, forming a long 
and narrow orifice, a?, the dimensions of which 
are, say, two hundredths of an inch wide by 
six inches long, and from which orifice the air 
The ejector side plates, bb, are preferably 
cast together with vertical end plates, c, Fig. 
4, by which the ejector is bolted by screws b 
b' to plates c, which are secured to timbers D, 
and also with horizontal top flanges, c'e', Fig, 
2, by which the ejector is joined with corre 
sponding flanges of the compressed-air cham 
ber. A directing and discharging tube or 
chute, d, for the substance forms a continua 
tion of the ejector, and also forms upward 
diverging passages or chutes d' d' for the sub 
95 
IOO 
2 
29, S42 
s 
75 
stance on each side of said ejector-orifice, the 
tube and the said passages being of rectangul 
lar form in cross-section. 
The metal plates e e, which form the tube 
or chuted, are parallel to each other, or nearly 
so, from the rectangular discharge-orifice (t to 
a point near the ejector rectangular orifice (t', 
from which point the plates e e diverge up 
wardly on each side of the ejector-orifice and 
form the feed-passages d' d' to a central jet, 
which draws air and substance on both sides 
These plates, whdn not adapted 
of the jet. 
for adjustment, are bolted to the plates c' by 
flanges. In the drawings these upwardly-di 
verging plates e e are shown as being pivoted 
at e, at or near their upper ends, while their 
lower ends are rendered adjustable by screws 
e' e, so as to increase or diminish the width 
of the discharging-tube orifice a, and thus 
adapt the apparatus for different-sized grains 
and for different substances. The screws e'e' 
for this purpose are pivoted to that portion of 
the plates e e, which form the parallel sides of 
the discharging-tube d, and, passing through 
studs e'e", projecting from a fixed end plate, 
c", are adjusted and set by lock-nuts c, as 
In such adjustment 
shown in Figs. 2 and 5. 
the tube-forming plates e move in equal arcs 
toward or from each other without material 
affecting the parallel relation of the tubular 
forming parts. The pivots e' of these plates 
are formed in flanges, and the ends of the feed 
passages d' d' and of the tube-forming parts d 
are closed by thin polished metal plates c', se 
cured to the fixed plates c, to which the ejector 
forming casting is also secured. These fixed 
plates care bolted in vertical positions to the 
timbers D, and between these plates the ejector 
casting is secured, the closed ends of the latter 
being fitted in recesses in said plates, as shown 
in Fig. 4. 
The interior surfaces of the ejector and of 
the directing and discharging tube or chute 
are lined with smooth plates , of steel or other 
suitable metal, detachably secured in any suit 
able manner, whereby to obtain smooth sur 
faces in the small passages where it would be dif 
ficult to produce such surfaces in the castings. 
These limings afford facility for being renewed 
when worn out, and such renewal of the me 
tallic Walls, subjected to the action of the sub 
stance, is an important matter, and such parts 
as alre subjected to wear are made removable 
to afford facility for such renewal of the worn 
Surfaces. 
In a long ejector-tube, such as that shown, 
it is important that the air shouldflow through 
it with the leastfriction in order not to diminish 
its projecting force. The rough surfaces of 
the casting described would produce such fric 
tion, and to a greater or less extent retard the 
flow of the air under compression, and hence 
I provide thin steel plates for giving smooth 
and polished walls to the ejector, that the air 
mayflow with the least resistance. So, in like 
manner the substance should descend swiftly 
through the converging chutes or passages d 
d' d', with theleastfriction and hinderance from 
rough surfaces, so as to present a contact with 
the air-jet as uniform as possible. Hence I pro 
vide thin steel plates for giving smooth and 
polished walls to the feed-passages back of the 
air-jet and to the discharging tube or chute 
which receives the air-jet and directs the sub 
stance upon the reducing-surface. Moreover, 
it must be observed that the flow of the ail 
and the flow of the substance should be as free 
from resistance as possible, and that the force 
of the air-jet must co-operate with the feed of 
the substance by producing an entraining force 
of air in the feed-conduits-that is, a force in 
ducing particles of substance to follow one after 
another in train-by the application of force 
to give swift motion to the foremost or first 
moving particle; and it is for this reason that 
the smooth thin polished surfaces of the steel 
plates in the ejector-tube and in the commu 
nicating conduits for the substance become in 
portant in the operation of projecting the sub 
stance upon the reducing-Surface, so that each 
particle shall receive the same shattering ac 
tion upon such surface. It is also importalt 
that these polished surfaces should be of plates 
sufficiently thin to be bent to conform to the 
bends or angles of the walls to which they are 
secured as linings. 
The abutment f is secured to the under sides 
of the timbers D by hangers in proper rela 
tion to the rectangular orifice a of the direct 
ing and discharging tube or chute, from which 
the substance carried by the jet is projected 
against said abutment and has its velocity ai'- 
rested and its momentum destroyed so instan 
taneously as to produce the required degree 
of disintegration. 
It will be seen that, the directing alnd dis 
charging tube or chute d having its smallest 
dimensions as narrow as may be and allow the 
passage of the substance to be disintegrated, 
the grains or fragments of wheat or other sub 
stance being reduced impinging upon the abut 
ment in a wide, thin sheet, its particles ar'- 
ranged along a single line, and the disintegrated 
substance having unobstructed liberty to dis 
perse, there will be no retardment and accu 
mulation of any portion of the substance-upon 
the surface of impingement consequent upon 
the destruction or partial destruction of the 
momentum of the Substance. 
The abutment f is preferably of hard metal 
and preferably has a narrow surface equal in 
length to the width of the projected sheet of 
the substance, and is placed a suitable distance 
from said directing-tube. The feed-passages d' 
d" of this directing-tube converge to the ejector 
orifice a, and are erolonged by spouts or cov 
ered slides (79, to feed-chambers EE, which are 
supported on each side of the compressed-air 
chamber. The substance to be disintegrated 
descends by its gravity from the chamber E, 
and, with the air drawn with it, enters the 
swiftly-flowing jet at the ejector-orifice. The 
. 
95 
IOO 
TIO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
15 
45 
55 
 
279, S42 
3 
O 
25 
chamber E is preferably of square form in 
hand-wheel in the opposite direction the space 
cross-section and provided with a cover hav 
will belessened, and the feed ean be thus regu 
ing an upward extension, h, with an internal 
lated as may be required to suit the substance 
screw, into which is screwed a short tube, i, 
to be disintegrated and the force of the air-jet. 
provided with a hand-wheel, j, so that it may 
The disk has a diameter greater than the 
interior diameter of the adjustable tube, so 
be raised and lowered. The lower end of this 
short tubei opens into the chamber E, and its 
that the latter can be screwed down upon the 
vertical adjustment within the cover his in 
disk to cut off the feed entirely. The sub 
stance to be treated rests in a cylindrical col 
relation to a revolving disk, k, which forms 
the bottom of said adjustable tube i and feeds 
umn upon the surface of the revolving disk, 
This feeding-disk ki 
the material therefrom. 
by which it is thrown out in a manner to cause 
has ribs k" on its top surface, and is carried 
the exact supply of the substance to the jet. 
upon the upper end of a vertical shaft, l, 
This exact supply is delivered from the disks 
driven by a pulley, l', and supported in a step 
into the chambers E, so that the latter are al 
on the top of the chamber. A, and a long 
ways free of the packed substance, and always 
sleeve-bearing, m, rising from the horizontal 
insures a continuous and regulated flow of the 
bottom of the chamber E. 
substance to the ejector. 
The disk-shaft is provided with a collar, l, 
The heavy products of the disintegration fall 
at its lower end, and its bearing-step i is 
from the abutment and descend into the spout 
formed with an interior screw to receive a 
B, which may be provided with valves ss, held 
screw-collar, l, bearing upon the shaft-collar, 
closed by the weighted levers tt, and adapted 
and thus prevent the shaft from having any 
to be opened by the weight of the disintegrated 
vertical movement, which would otherwise be 
substance accumulated in the hopper to allow 
liable, and therefore render the feed from the 
it to pass out, while the fine particles floating 
disk unreliable. The disk, by its rotary 
in the spent air will pass out by the top and 
motion and by the surface-ribs shown in Fig. 
into a pipe, F, or pipes, which enter and ter 
S, serves to deliver by centrifugal action the 
minate in a dust collecting and separating 
substance to be disintegrated in a thin hori 
chamber, G, or chambers. The walls of such 
Zontal sheet through the annular space n, be 
chamber G are of woven fabric, such as will 
tween the top surface of the disk k and the 
allow the air to pass, under slight pressure, out 
lower edge of the adjustable tubei, whence it 
through the walls, while retaining within the 
chamber all or nearly all the products of 
falls into the chamber E and thence descends 
the spout or slide g and the feed-passaged to 
disintegration. The pervious walls of this 
chamber are preferably of cylindrical form, 
the directing and discharging tube. 
To prevent the accumulation of matter upon 
closed at the top and opening at the bottom 
into a hopper, H, provided at the bottom with 
the walls of the chamber from the substance 
thrown off by the disk, the latter is prefer 
a spout and valves closed by weighted levers. 
ably arranged within the bottom of the cover 
This dust collecting and separating cylinder 
h, which presents inclined walls h' to receive 
is suitably fastened at the bottom, and sup 
ported at its top by the connecting-pipe F, and 
the substance and direct it down into the 
chamber E, the inclined bottom E of which 
its walls, being accessible at every point, may 
; forms a continuation of the upwardly-diverg 
be cleaned by whipping or brushing to free 
ling spouts or slides g g, which are of rect 
the interior surface thereof from the fine pro 
angular form in cross-section, and preferably 
ducts of disintegration which will accumulate 
are of a width equal to the length of the ejector 
upon them. In order, therefore, to effect such 
cleaning of the walls of the collecting and sep 
nozzle and of the width of said chamber. The 
feeding 
of the substance into the adjustable 
arating chamber, and keep them in proper 
tube i is effected by a vertical pipe, o, of light 
condition for the passage of the air through 
sheet metal, seated upon an annular shoulder, 
them without interrupting the continuous op 
5o p, within said adjustable tube, and made 
eration of the apparatus, I provide a second 
smooth inside and a little larger at its lower 
dust collecting and separating chamber, so that 
end than at its top, so that the substance fill 
the air and floating particles may pass from 
ing the pipe O will not choke and clog, but de 
the chamber A to one or the other by valves 
scend freely from the top to the lower end of 
F', arranged in the air-outlet pipes. By this 
said pipe. The upper end of this pipe slips 
means, while the communication is cut off from 
freely over or inside of the lower end of a 
one of said chambers, the air and fine pro 
fixed pipe, (not shown,) into which the sub 
ducts may pass into the other; or both of said 
stance may be delivered by a screw-conveyer 
chambers may be used at the same time, if 
or otherwise, so that the pipe o is free to rise 
desired. If, however, it should not in any 
and fall with the hand-wheel tube. By turn 
particular case be practicable to make the two 
ing the hand-wheelj in one direction its tube 
dust collecting and separating chambers for 
i will be caused to rise and leave a space, n, 
alternate operation of sufficient capacity for 
between it and the surface of the diskle, through 
the work, then other chambers of like con 
which the substance to be disintegrated will 
struction may be used connectedly. The fine 
be projected in a thin horizontal sheet by the 
products thus separated from the air descend 
action of the revolving disk. By turning the and pass out of the chamber G by the hopper 
35 
45 
. 
55 
75 
SO 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
4 
y 
229, s42 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
9O 
85 
2. The combination, in apparatus for disill 
H and the spout, which is provided with 
weighted valves in the same manner and for tegrating frangible substance, of an ejecto!' 
and a chamber for compressed air, with a lat 
the same purpose as the valves in the dis 
erally-adjustable tube for the substance, means 
charge-spout of the disintegrating-clhamber. 
whereby to effect such adjustment, and an abut 
That portion of the outlet-pipe F which enters 
lment, for the purpose specified. 
the separating-chamber G extends to near the 
3. In combination, the ejector, a chamber 
bottom of said chamber and flares downward, 
for compressed air, the pivoted plates e e, the 
so as to give a free outlet and delivery of the 
converging passages or conduits d' d', and the 
spent air and the light products carried by it 
tube or chuted for the substance, the adjust 
at or near the bottom of said separating-cham 
ing-screws e'e', and an abutment, substan 
ber, so that the particles may fall at once into 
tially as described, for the purpose specified. 
the hopper, and the air rise along and be fil 
4. The combination of an ejector having a 
tered through the walls of the chamber. 
long and narrow orifice, a chamber for com 
Instead of separating the light products 
pressed air, a tube or chute, d, having a long 
from the outflowing air by chambers of per 
and narrow orifice, with passages or chutes d' 
vious walls, such products escaping with the 
d' for the substance, converging to the nozzle of 
spent air may pass in any direction into a 
said ejector, terminating in said tube or chute 
closed chamber or spacehaving pervious walls 
d, and an abutment, substantially as described, 
and of sufficient capacity to allow the finely 
for the purpose specified. 
disintegrated substance to subside, while the 
5. The ejector, in combination with the tube 
air Willipass out through openings of such 
or chute d and the converging conduits d' d', 
form and construction as to allow only the air 
lined with smooth plates of steel or other suit 
to pass out, or as near to that as possible. 
able metal, for the purpose specified. 
The subsided light portions of the substance, 
6. An ejector the air - discharge tube of 
and the coarser and heavier portions may be 
which is lined with thin plates of polished 
Withdrawn and carried away from their re 
hard metal, for the purpose specified. 
spective chambers by screw - conveyel's or 
7. In combination with an air-ejector, a dis 
other mechanical means. 
95 
charging tube or chute for the substance pro 
The arrangement of the feeding devices and 
jected thereby, lined with thin plates of pol 
chambel's so as to give an equal feed upon 
ished hard metal, substantially as described, 
each side of the wide and narrow ejector-ori 
for the purpose specified. 
fice is important in effecting a perfectly-regul 
S. In apparatus for disintegrating frangible 
lar feed of the material to each side of the jet, 
substances, an ejector having a long and nar 
and in securing that a wide, thin sheet will be 
row orifice, a', a tube or chute, d, having a 
conducted equally into the passages d' d' on 
long and narrow passage, and orifice (t, and a 
each side of the ejector, so that the substance 
chamber for compressed air, having a long and 
fed into the chamber E in a thin sheet from 
narrow opening, (, in combination with the 
the disk is delivered therefrom in a thin, wide 
converging conduits d' d', adapted to deliver 
sheet to the ejector, and projected against the 
the substance on each side of a central air-jet, 
abutment in a thin, wide sheet by the ejector, 
and an abutment, substantially as described. 
all combined to produce the most satisfactory 
9. The combination, substantially hereinbe 
results in giving to each grain or particle of 
fore set forth, with an ejector, a chamber for 
ore or other substance the same shattering effect 
compressed air, a supply-conduit, a tube or 
from the impact against the abutment by the 
chute, d, in line with said ejector, and an abut 
use of compressed air. 
ment, of a feed device consisting of a revolv 
In another application for a patent I have 
ing disk, k, and an adjustable tube, i, operat 
(lescribed and claimed a tube or chute for Com 
ing to deliver the substance into said conduits, 
ducting and discharging the substance, hav 
to said ejector, and to said abutment with a 
ing an orifice that is long and narrow, and a 
positive, uniform, and regulated feed. 
jet-mouth for the issuing current of air of cor 
10. The combination, with the horizontal 
responding form, and their combination with 
rotating disk k, the screw-cover h, the screw 
an abutment or surface of impact for the sub 
tube i, having the hand-wheelj, and the cham 
stance, and therefore do notherein claim such 
ber E, of the pipe O, increasing in diameter 
a thing. 
from its upper receiving to its lower end, and 
seated upon a shoulder within said tube, i, 
substantially as described, for the purpose 
specified. 
11. In combination with a supply-pipe and 
an air-ejector for reducing substances by im 
pact, a horizontally-rotating feeding-disk, and 
a suitable conduit connecting the chamber 
thereof with said ejector, for the purpose de 
scribed. 
12. The apparatts herein set forth, (for re 
ducing frangible substances by impact by the 
I claim 
1. In apparatus for disintegrating grail and 
other frangible substances, the combination, 
substantially hereinbefore set forth, of an 
ejector and a chamber for compressed air, 
with passages or conduits for the substance 
converging to the nozzle of said ejector, and 
terminating in a tube or chute having paral 
lel sides in line with said ejector, and an albut 
ment, whereby the substance is fed from con 
verging conduits to a central air-jet and pro 
jected in a line with said central jet, 
IOO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
55 
65 
s 
s 
279, S42 
- 
5 
structed and arranged substantially as de- Io 
scribed, for the purpose specified. 
Intestimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
eSSeS. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS TAGGART. 
A. E. H. JoHNSON, 
J. W. HAMILTON JOHNSON. 
action of compressed air,) comprising a closed 
chamber, A, having a valved bottom, an air 
ejector, and an abutment arranged within said 
chamber, suitable supply-conduits communi 
cating with said ejector, a chamber, G, hav 
ing pervious walls and an impervious valved 
bottom, and a downward-flaring pipe enter 
ing said pervious chamber and communicat 
ing with the said closed chamber, all con 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US279942.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 279,942, 
 
D. S. HAMMOND, 
TRAVELING BAG, 
Patented June 26, 1883, 
 
 
N s 
N-al 
W f7&eSSes, 
Azevezczor 
c47%.-- 
N. Peters, hoto-lithograpie 
r, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
DANIEL S. HAMMOND, OF 
BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
o, 
TRAVELING-BAG. 
O 
2O 
25 
It will be seen that my improved form of 55 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed April 
Patent No. 279,942, dated June 26, 1883. 
17, 1883, (No model.) 
together through holes previously stamped in 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DANIEL S. HAMMOND, 
the metal. 
a citizen of the United States, and residing at 
bar, which is equally as simple to make as the 
Brooklyn, Kings county, New York, have in 
angle-bar alone, dispenses with the binder. It 
vented new and useful Improvements in Trav 
also avoids turning the margins of the bag 
eling-Bags, of which the following is a specifi 
webs up into the planes of the hinge-joint of 
cation. 
the frame, which is somewhat difficult to do, 6o 
My invention relates to the kind of travel 
especially to do it smoothly and neatly at the 
ing-bags known in the trade as swell bags, 
corners. It also affords a simple means of 
Which means that the leather or other web na 
fastening the web to the frame, which is done 
terial of the body is so swelled out and ex 
by simply pressing the sides of the U-barsto 
tended sidewise from the frame as to form, 
gether on the margins of the web and punch- 65 
practically, flat top and bottom shapes with 
ing or indenting the sides with a center-punch 
ends square to them, or thereabout, the web 
or equivalent tool, if desired; and it also af. 
material being comparatively stiff and retain 
folds a simpler, more compact, and neater 
ing the box-like form in which it is shaped 
frame-bar than the common form, all as here 
preparatory to being attached to the frames, 
inafter fully described, reference being made 
as distinguished from the bags of lighter and 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
less rigid material forming sacks that collapse 
Figure 1 is a transverse section of a travel 
when empty, and swell out like a sack when 
ing-bag the frame of which is made accord 
filled. 
ing to my invention, the section being taken 
My invention consists of frame-bars for this 
on the linea a of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a section 
form of bag, consisting of thin flat metal strips 
through one of the sides of the bag parallel to 
bent lengthwise into U form and then bent 
the frame online gy y of Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 is 
sidewise at two intermediate points corre 
a transverse section through the frame and 
sponding to the corners of the top of the bag, 
portions of the bag-web on the linea a of Fig. 
so that U-groove lies in the planes of the web 
2, the frame being opened. 
of the bag, both at the top and ends, the two 
A represents the frame-bars of the satchel, 
bars of the frame being reversed as to each 
and B the leather, canvas, or other web form 
other, so that the groove of one bar fronts the 
ing the body. It will be seen by the cross 
web of one side of the bag, and the groove of 
sections a, Figs. 1 and 3, that these frame-bars 
the other bar fronts the web of the other side 
consist of thin flat strips of metal bent longi- 85 
of the bag, to connect with said Webs by receiv 
tudinally into U shape. It will also be seen 
ing the edges of them directly in their planes 
that the bars are bent sidewise at b, where 
instead of in the planes of the joint of the jaws, 
they turn from the top portion, c, to the end 
as they have been arranged in small pocket 
portions, d, for the top and ends of the satchel, 
bags or sacks for change; but I am not aware 
so that the U-groove of the top is in the plane 
that such frame-bars have been employed in 
of the top part, e, of the bag-Web-that is to 
traveling-bags in any form whatever. 
say, at right angles to the plane of the joint, f, 
Heretofore the swell bags of the form t 
by which the frame-bars are jointed together; 
which my invention belongs have been made 
and likewise the U-groove of the endportions, 
with angle-bar frames, of which one flange is 
d, is in the plane of the end portions,g, of the 95 
in the plane of the joint of the frame-bars, 
bag-web, so that in a bag whereof the body 
and the other extends from the outer edge of 
has a flat top and flat ends Square to the plane 
said flange in the planes of the top and ends 
of the joint of the frame the edges of the body 
of the web, to which bars the Web is connected 
enter the grooves of the frame in the same 
by turning the margins of the web and fitting 
planes, and are thereby connected to the frames 
them upon the side of the aforesaid flange in 
in a simpler and better manner than if the 
the plane of the joint, and fastening them with 
grooves of the bars were in the plane of the 
5o another bar placed over the margins of the 
The respective bars of 
web for a binder, and riveting or sewing the joint of the frames. 
three layers-viz., binder, web, and flange- the frame are arranged reversely to each other 
75 
35 
45 
9O . 
IOO 
 
239,942 
in respect to the opening of the grooves for or at right angles to the plane of the joint of 
the webs of the bag as required for the differ-i the frame-bars, the said frame-bars being made 20 
ent sides, and they are arranged so that one in J form in cross-section, and being bent 
bar shuts inside of the other. Any approved sidewise at the corners b, and so arranged in 
5 form or lock or fastening may be employed to the bag that the U-grooves lie in the planes 
secure the bars of the frame together when of the flat top and ends of the bags, said plane 
shut. 
I am aware that the bag-web of a pocket-joint, and receives the edges of the body-web 
bag for change has been fastened to the frame in the said respective planes to be fastened 
gins of the web; but it is not such method of 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
fastening the bars and the Web together that my name in the presence of two subscribing 3O 
I claim. 
IO by pressinig the sides of the U-bar on the mar- therein, substantially as described. 
being at right angles to the plane of the hinge- 25 
Witnesses. 
DANEL, S. HAMMONI). 
A WWN 
I5 ter Patent, is- 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let- 
In a swell traveling-bag the body of which 
is made of stiff leather or other material in the 
box shape or form, with top and ends square, 
Witnesses: 
W. J. MORGAN, 
S. H. MOIRGAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280042.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
S. E. JARWIS. 
STEAM ENGINE GOVERNOR. 
No. 280,042. 
Patented June 26, 1883. 
 
Zzz-ezzzo 
SZ, /ez-Z'es 
%26%ze 
-zza 1. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL E, JARVIS, OF LANSING, MICHIGAN. 
STEAM-ENGINE GOVERNOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,042, dated June 26, 1888. 
Application filed April 3, 1883. 
(No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern : 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL E. JARVIS, of 
Lansing, in the county of Ingham and State 
of Michigan, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Steam-Engine Governors; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
The improvement herein described relates 
to automatic cut-of-valve governors, and it is 
especially intended to form an improvement 
upon a similar device for which I recently 
applied for a patent, and which was allowed 
and numbered 273,999, March 13, 1883. 
The improvement consists in providing the 
single governor-weight shown in my device 
with a counterbalance - Weight S.O. arranged 
with relation to the Center of motion that it 
will counterbalance the governor-Weight in any 
of its positions, all as more fully herein der 
scribed. 
In the drawings, Figure I is an elevation of 
my single-weight governor as patented to me 
by the above-mentioned Letters Patent with 
my improvement attached thereto. Fig. 2 is 
a section on the line XX thereof. 
The construction and operation of the gov 
ernor shown in the drawings are fully ex 
plained in the above-mentioned Letters Pat 
ent; but I will shortly recapitulate its main 
features and operation. 
A is a disk secured upon the shaft B. 
C is the cut-off eccentric, secured to the disk 
by means of the links D D'. 
Eis the governor-weight; F, a rod by means 
of which the governor-weight is exerting its 
centrifugal force to regulate the relative posi 
tion of the eccentric. 
It is clear that the governor-Weight E is 
not acted upon alone by its centrifugal force 
when the device is in operation, but also by its 
force of gravity, which exerts a constantly 
varying influence and effects the action of the 
governor injuriously, especially when running 
at low speed, and it is to eliminate this factor 
of gravity that...I make use of a counterbal 
ance-weight, G, which is pivotally attached to 
the disk at H, and connected with the gov 
ernor-weight, E, by a link, I, in such manner 
that both weights counterbalance each other 
at any position of the disk and leave the 
weights free to follow the impulse of the cen 
trifugal force alone. In the drawings the 
counterbalance-weight G is so pivoted in re 
lation to the direction of rotation of the disk 
that its centrifugal force at a low speed of the 
governor either counteracts to some extent the 
centrifugal force of the governor-weight E or 
is in a perfect neutral position; but when the 
speed increases its centrifugal force will grow 
rapidly and be added to the one of the gov 
ernor-weightE. This arrangement therefore 
gives to my governor a great sensitiveness at 
high speed with comparatively small weights. 
It has a larger range of governing than With 
out the weight G, as the latter is enabled to 
go beyond its pivotal point. At low speed 
my improved governor, owing to the perfect 
balance of the weights E and G, Will show 
great steadiness in governing. 
I do not intend to limit myself to pivoting 
the counterbalance-weight G back of its cen 
ter of gravity, as by the reverse way the main 
object of my improvement may likewise be 
accomplished. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a single-weight governor, the balance 
weight G, so arranged with relation to the cen 
ter of motion that it will by means of a link 
connection counterbalance the force of gravity 
of the governing-weight E at all positions 
thereof, substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
2. In a cut-off governor, the two governing 
weights EG, one of which forms the actuat 
ing force of a lever of the first degree, the 
other one of the second degree, and in combi 
nation with the connecting-link I, whereby the 
force of gravity of the two weights is counter 
balanced and their centrifugal force directly 
combined, substantially as described. 
3. A cut-off governor in which the two 
governing-weights are connected by a link, 
whereby their force of gravity is balanced and 
their centrifugal forces directly combined, the 
weight G being pivoted behind its center of 
gravity, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
S. E. JARVIS. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. WILCOX, 
W. DONOWAN. 
TO 
25 
45 
55 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280142.txt	(No Model.) 
T. A. DENNIS. 
BOX FASTENER, 
No. 280,142. 
Patented June 26, 1883, 
Z24. 
N 
WITNESSES: 
2 
INVENTOR: 
BY -cluw 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
4. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODORE A. DENNIS, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF 
AND CHARLES A. DENNIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
BOX - FAST ENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,142, dated June 26, 1883. 
Application filed March 12, 1883. (No model.) 
25 
Io for trunks, chests, valises, &c. 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THEODOREA. DENNIS, 
of Newark, in the county of Essex and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and Im 
5 proved Latch for Trunks, Satchels, &c., of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved automatically-locking latch 
The invention consists in a latch constructed 
with a hasp provided with ridges having 
notches in the lower ends, which hasp fits into 
a casing provided at the lower end with a piv 
oted catch having a tongue and two in Wardly 
projecting prongs which pass into the notches 
in the ridges and hold the hasp in the casing. 
A spring attached to the casing acts on the 
catch and presses it against the hasp. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1is a front elevation of my improved 
latch, showing the manner in which it is ap 
plied. Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional elevation of 
the same on the line a ac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a 
perspective view of the skeleton tongue at 
tached to the cover. Fig. 4 is a perspective 
view of the pivoted catch. 
A tongue or hasp, A, is provided on its 
outer surface with a ridge or rib, a, at each 
longitudinal edge, which ribs have their lower 
ends beveled off, and are each provided with 
a notch or recess, b, a short distance above 
the beveled end. The tongue or hasp.A is to 
be attached to the cover B. To the body of 
the chest D, trunk, &c., a casing, E, is at 
tached, which is adapted to receive the tongue 
or hasp A. In the open lower end of the 
middle part of the casing E a catch, F, is piv 
oted to swing toward and from the body of 
chest or trunk, the curved tongue G of the 
catch projecting downward. At each side of 
the tongue G the catch is provided with an 
inwardly-projecting prong, H, which prongs 
are separated the same distance as the ribs (t, 
so that when the hasp A is passed into the 
casing E the prongs H Will be over the ribs a. 
so Aspring, J, secured to the inner surface of 
the middle part of the casing E, has its free 
35 
45 
55 
end resting against the inner or upper edge of 
the catch F, thereby pressing the outer curved 
end of the tongue G against the body of the 
chest or trunk. When the hasp A passes into 
the casing E, the beveled ends of the ridges a 
raise the prongs H, and after the beveled ends 
have passed, the prongs snap into the recesses 
b under the action of the spring J, and thus 
lock the hasp in the casing. If the hasp is to 
be removed, the end of the tongue G is raised 
for the purpose of withdrawing the prongs H 
from the recesses b. As I provide a skeleton 
hasp, but very little metal will be required, for 
the part uniting the ridges a can be made very 65 
thin or dispensed with entirely. If desired, 
the entire hasp may be made the thickness of 
the ridges, and in that case the hasp is pro 
vided at its lower end with a transverse groove 
or notch. I have shown the tongue Gas being 7o 
larger than the prongs; but it can be punched 
out of the downwardly-bent end of the catch, 
in which case the tongue will be smaller than 
the prongs. 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of a hasp having ridges 
notched at the lower end, a tongued catch 
pivoted to case, and provided with two in- 8o 
Wardly-projecting prongs, and a spring adapted 
to act on the catch, as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with the hasp A, pro 
vided with ridges a, having notches at the 
lower ends, of the casing E and the catch F, 85 
pivoted in the lower part of the casing E, and 
provided with prongs H, adapted to pass into 
the notches in the hasp, substantially as herein 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. The combination, with the hasp A, pro 
vided with ridges a, having notches in the 
lower ends, of the casing E and the catch F, 
pivoted in the casing, and provided with a . 
tongue, G, and two prongs, H, substantially as 95 
herein shown and described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 75 
9O 
THEODORE AUGUSTUS DENNIS. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS E. SESSERSON, 
THEODORE E. PITTENGER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280243.txt	(No Model.) 
N0, 280,243, 
 
J. REID, 
CISTERN FOR WATER CLOSETS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 26, 1883. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
J. RED, 
CISTERN FOR WATER CLOSETS 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 280,243, 
Patented June 26, 1883. 
 
 
2 EB2 
2 
 
 
2 is 
eleasa 
H 
 
 
 
 
 
A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2a: 
 
RXi, SS R 
N 
/ 
SS2 . 
2. 
A. 
-- 
2%aea 
2. 
2. 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN REID, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO THE J. L. MOTT IRON WORKS, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CISTERN FOR WATER - CLOSETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,243, dated June 26, 1883. 
Application filed December 15, 1882. 
No model. 
To all whom it n-Culy concern : 
Be it known that I, JoHN REID, of Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented an Improvement in Cis 
terms for Water-Closets, of which the follow 
ing is a Specification. 
The object of this invention is to supply to 
the closet a preliminary wash before the closet 
is used, and an after-wash when the person 
leaves the closets. Devices have been made 
with this object in view. My invention is for 
avoiding unnecessary consumption of water, 
and for rendering the mechanism reliable. I 
employ two pairs of double-acting valves, with 
Water-Way Sand Valve-seats, a main-supply wa 
ter-cisterm, and two flushing boxes or cisterns 
below the main cistern. The pairs of valves act 
in opposite directions, so that when raised the 
supply - opening to the preliminary-flushing 
box is closed, and the escape to the closet 
opened. At the same time the Supply-opening 
to the after-flushing box is opened and the dis 
charge - opening closed. As the valves de 
scend, the reverse movement takes place, so 
that the after-flushing discharges into the 
closet, to thoroughly wash the same when the 
person rises from the seat or leaves the closet, 
the preliminary wash having been given when 
the person entered the closet, or depressed the 
seat by sitting on the same. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a general plan 
of the cistern, and Fig. 2 is a vertical section 
at the line a ce. 
The cistern A is of a suitable size, and pref 
erably of cast-iron. The inlet water-pipe B 
passes up through the bottom, or in through 
the side, in any desired manner. There is a 
valve or cock at C and a float, D. These parts 
are of ordinary construction, and serve to sup 
ply water from a suitable head, and shut off 
the Supply at a given level. 
Beneath the cistern AaretWO Water boxes or 
cisterns-the portion E containing the water 
for the preliminary flushing, and the portion 
F the Water for the after-Wash. These boxes 
will usually be formed of one casting, H, with 
a partition, J, that separates one box from the 
other. The position of this partition is indi 
cated by dotted lines, Fig. 1. The box E, for 
the preliminary wash, is much the Smallest. 
The casting H is preferably bolted to the un 
der side of the cistern A, the joint being made 
water-tight by putty or cement. 
Below the boxes E F there is the Water-way 
K and a pipe, L, leading to the Water-closet. 
At M and N there are two vertical pipes ris 
ing as high as the water-level, and opening 
through the bottom of the cistern A into the 
boxes E.F, so as to admit air and to form over 
flow-pipes to the cistern A-the same as usu 
ally provided in water-closet cisterns and Serv 
ice-boxes. 
There are four valve-seats. Those marked 
a, and b are in the bottom of the cistern A. 
Those marked cd are in the bottom of the boxes 
EF, respectively, and open into the water-way 
K. The seat ( is directly over c, and b di 
rectly overd. The valves e fare on one spin 
dle, and the valves g h are on the other spin 
dle, and both spindles are connected by chains 
to the lever P. The fulcrum 3 Of this level P 
is above the cistern, and there is a chain or 
wire, 4, passing from the end of the lever Pto 
the water-closet door, seat, platform, or pull, 
there being suitable intervening levers, so that 
the lever will be operated in the desired man 
ner to raise the weighted end P, and lift the 
valves when the person commences to use the 
closet, and the lever will fall when the person 
leaves the closet. 
In the normal condition, when the closet is 
not being used, the valvety will rest on its seat 
b, and the valve f will be on its seat c; hence 
the valves hand e will be open. Water can 
therefore flow by the seat ( into the box E and 
fill the same, but the box F will be empty. 
If, now, the lever P is moved, the conditions 
are reversed; the valve e is closed, shutting off 
the inlet to E, and the valve f is raised, so that 
the water from E rushes to the closet, giving 
the preliminary wash. By the same motion 
of the lever P the valve his closed and the Valve 
g opened, so that Water runs into the after 
flushing box F; but it does not escape from the 
same until the level P is allowed to l'eturn to 
its normal position, and the valve of closes, and 
the valve h opens and allows the contents of F 
to flush the water-closet, thoroughly cleansing 
O 
45 
55 
90 
95 
g 
2 so,243 
O 
the same. The valves f and g are ordinary 
weighted valves, with elastic faces closing upon 
circular raised seats; the valve his shown as a 
disk with a leather face closing up against the 
seat d, with a spring, i, to press it to place, the 
valve itself sliding on its stem k. This allows 
for holding the valve to its seat by the spring, 
even if the lever P does not receive its full 
movement, or there is any inaccuracy of adjust 
ment. With the same object in view, the 
spring l is applied between the stem an of the 
valves e. f and the lever P, so that it may yield, 
but also hold the valve e to its seat, when the 
closet is in use. 
I prefer to make the valve e as a segment of 
cylindrical rubber, and to make the seat a 
small and conical, so that the valve e acts as 
an elastic plug to the seat (t. This seat may 
be small, as there is always time for the box 
E to fill with Water while the closet is not in use. 
The usual guides or bridges should be pro 
vided for the valve-stems, and it is preferable 
to employ brass valve-seats secured to the iron, 
as usual. 
25 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the water-closet 
cistern A and the water-boxes E F, of the le 
ver P, the valve (, above the seat b and clos 
ing downwardly, the valve h, on the same stem 
and closing upwardly against the seat d, the 
valve if closing downwardly upon the seat c, 
the valve e, upon the same stem as the valve?, 
closing upwardly against the seat a, and the 
connections between the respective valve-stems 
2. The combination, with the water-closet 
5 and the lever P, substantially as set forth. 
cistern A and preliminary-flushing box E, of 
the valve if and valve e, upon the same stem 
and within the boxE, the valvef closing down 
wardly upon the seat c, and the valve e clos- 4o 
ing upwardly against the seat a, and the con 
nection from said valves to the operating-le 
ver P, as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination, with the water-closet 
cistern A, after-flushing box F, and water-way 45 
K, of the valves g and h, upon the same stem, 
the valve of being within the cistern A, and 
closing downwardly upon its seat b, and the 
valve h within the water-Way K, and closing 
upwardly against its seat d, a spring, i, be 
low said valve h, and connection to the operat 
ing-lever P, as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. The combination, with the cistern A and 
water-boxes E. F., of the valves ef, within the 
box E, and at the inlet and discharge open 
ings of the same, the valve (, above the inlet, 
and the valve h, below the discharge-opening 
of the box F, and the lever P and connections 
to the respective parts, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. The combination, with the cistern A and 
water-box F, of the valve-seats bid, valves g 
and h, above and below the respective seats, 
the valve-stem k, the spring i to the valve h, 
the lever P, and connection from the same to 65 
the valve-stem, substantially as set forth. 
ID. 1882. 
Signed by me this 11th day of December, A. 
55 
JOHN REID. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. E. PALMER, 
MAX GOEBET. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280346.txt	W. S. CANADAY, 
BALANCED WALWE. 
f 
P 
P 
24 
ented July 3, 1883. 
 
secreece 
 
'll 
 
 
f 
A. 
22 
S. 
(No Model) 
No. 280,346. 
Z. A 
70, 
701. 
B 
7. 
N 
 
 
WITWESSES. 
7%x, (2-2-2(z. 
IWWEWTOI 
Ol/2 
Attorneyi 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WINDFIELD. S. CANADAY, OF NEW CASTLE, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO JOHN NELSON WATKINS, OF SAME PLACE. 
BALANCED VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,846, dated July 8, 1883. 
Application filed April 4, 1883. (No model.) 
IO 
15 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WINDFIELDS. CANADAY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Castle, in the county of Henry and State of 
Indiana, have invented a new and useful Bal 
anced Valve, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings. 
This invention relates to balanced valves for 
steam-engines; and it consists in certain im 
provements in the construction of the same, 
which will be hereinafter fully described, and 
particularly pointed out in the claim. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure lis 
a longitudinal vertical sectional view. Fig. 2 
is a vertical transverse sectional view of the 
valve and valve-chest; and Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view of the valve detached, illustrat 
ing its construction. 
The same letters refer to the same parts in 
all the figures. 
A in the drawings designates the steam 
chest; B, the valve, and Cthe valve-stem, which 
is provided at its front end with a rectangular 
frame, D, sliding in a suitable boxing, E, in 
which the main shaft F is transversely mount 
ed, said main shaft being inclosed by the 
frame D. 
G is a disk mounted upon the main shaft, 
and having an eccentric stud or tooth, H, en 
gaging notches or recesses II in the upper 
and lower sides of the frame D. It Will be 
seen from this that When the main shaft re 
volves it serves to reciprocate the frame D, car 
rying the valve-stem and the valve, which lat 
ter is thereby properly. reciprocated in the 
valve-box or steam-chest. A crank upon the 
main shaft is connected, in the usual manner, 
with the piston-stem of the cylinder, which, 
however, is not shown in the drawings. 
O 
The valve B consists of a rectangular base or 
- body, J, fitted between the sides of the steam 
chest in which it slides, and having a longi 
tudinal opening, K, in which is fitted a sleeve, 
L, serving to connect with the body J a top 
25 
35 
45 
55 
plate or cap, M. Packing N, arranged in a 
groove provided for this purpose in the upper 
face of the body J, is interposed between the 
body J and cap M, which by this construction 
are caused to fit nicely and in a steam-tight 
manner against the bottom O and top P, re 
spectively, of the steam-chest. The sides of 
the body J are provided with longitudinal 
grooves Q. Q. The top of the steam-chest has 
a centrally-located opening for the steam-pipe 
R, and one side of the steam-chest has an open 
ing for the exhaust-pipe S. 
TT are ports in the bottom of the steam 
chest connecting the same with the ends of the 
cylinder. 
The operation of my invention will be readily 
understood from the foregoing description 
taken in connection with the drawings hereto 
annexed. Steam is admitted through the cen 
tral longitudinal opening in the valve, and 
finds its way from the cylinder to the exhaust 
pipe through the grooves in the sides of the 
valve-body. 
The construction is simple, and Ihave found 
that by this invention steam is greatly econo 
mized. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States 
The combination, with the steam-chest hav 
ing steam-pipe R in its top and exhaust-pipe. 
7. 
Sin one side, of the valve B, consisting of body 
J, having grooves QQ in its sides, a groove in 
its top or upper face, and a longitudinal open 
ing, K, the sleeve L, the top plate or cap, M, 
connected by said sleeve with the body J, and 
the interposed packing N, all arranged and 
operating substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
6 
WINDFIELD SCOTT CANADAY, 
Witnesses: 
- 
EDWARD C. KLUTER, 
THOS. B. LOW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280446.txt	J. J. CALLOW. 
STENCIL, PLATE FOR GRAINING. 
Patented July 3, 1883. 
(Model.) 
No. 280,446, 
 
%3 assas SalaaaaaSaN 
ZZZZZZZZZ 
WITNESSES : 
INVENTOR, 
... 
N. PETERS, Photo-thographer. Washington, D, C, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN J. CALL O W, OF CLEVEL AND, OHIO. 
STENCIL. PAE FOR GRAINING. 
S. ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,446, dated July 3, 1888. 
Application filed September 24, 1881. (Model.) 
i 
To all whom it may concern, 
Be it known that I, JOHN J. CALLOW, of 
Cleveland, county of Cuyahoga, and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Stencil Graining-Plates; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part of this 
specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
stencil-plate for graining which shall be light 
and strong, yet inexpensive and easily changed 
in any slight detail of its pattern; and it con 
SistS in the construction and combination of 
parts forming a grainer's stencil-plate, here 
inafter fully described and claimed, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figures 1, 2, and 3 illustrate my invention 
as herein described, the letters of reference 
designating the respective parts thereof, as 
hereinafter set forth. 
A represents parts of the figure or pattern 
portion of the plate, made of some thin sheet 
material, such as sheet brass or tin. These 
parts are made in separate pieces, cut out with 
shears; and what is taken from one pattern 
may serve as a pattern in another plate. Thus 
every part of the material may be worked up 
with the greatest economy. 
Brepresents wires or narrow strips of metal, 
bent to form the pattern. Krepresents braces, 
uniting the parts A A and B B together. 
These braces are curved wires, touching and 
joining each other near the middle of their 
convex sides, and joined at their ends to the 
parts A B of the plate. These braces are 
shaped and attached, as described, for the 
purpose of bracing the plate laterally, and for 
serving as parts of the pattern to give variety 
to the design in graining. The plate may 
be wholly composed of the wires or narrow 
strips B, joined by the braces K; or it may be 
wholly composed of the pieces of sheet ma 
terial A, joined by said braces; or it may be 
composed partly of sheet pieces A and partly 
m 
of wires or narrow strips B, joined by the 
braces K; or the plate may be left in one con 
tinuous sheet after cutting out parts to leave 
the form described, the weak lines of the plate 
being strengthened by leaving the X-shaped 
connections and only cutting Out the parts be 
tween them and the rest of the plate. Straight 
line connections would not serve the purpose, 
as they would not assimilate with any pattern 
of wood-grain. Therefore Imake the connec 
tions or braces K to join the pattern. On easy 
symmetrical curves, instead of leaving abrupt 
COS, 
In very large plates I provide an outside 
stiffener, in the form of a frame, J. This 
frame consists of sheet-metal strips, folded to 
inclose the ends of the pattern-pieces, to which 
they may be secured by any usual method, as 
by soldering. The frame J may be joined to 
gether at its four corners, thus keeping the 
pattern in shape. 
The wire parts B may be slightly bent at 
any time to vary their form to suit individual 
taSte. 
As it is my intention to apply, for patents 
for the other inventions shown in this appli 
cation as originally filed, I hereby reserve the 
right to do so. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim, and wish to secure by Letters Patent,is 
1. In stencil-plate made up of Several pat 
tern-pieces joined together, the combination, 
with the pattern-pieces, of curved wire braces 
joining the same, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the pattern-pieces 
joined together by curved wires braces, of the 
sheet-metal frame folded over and secured to 
the ends of the said pattern-pieces, as shown 
and described. 
3. A stencil-plate to imitate the grain of 
wood, having braces K, integral therewith, 
shaped with concave curved edges, forming 
continuous symmetrical lines with the pattern 
parts thereby joined, as and for the purpose 
specified. 
JOHN J. CALLOW. 
Witnesses: 
HILLS. ADNETT, 
JNO. T. SULLIVAN. 
O 
25 
40 
45 
55 
75 
SO 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280546.txt	(No Model.) 
r 
J. WILLETTS & W. BUTTLEAR, 
TOOL FOR FORMING THE OPEN ENDS OF HOLLOW GLASSWARE, 
No. 280,546. 
 
Patented July 3, 1883. 
N. perers. Photo-Lithographer, washington, b, c, 
 
y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESSE WILLETTS AND WILLIAM BUTTLEAR, OF PITTSBURG, PA. 
TOOL FOR FORMING THE OPEN ENDS OF HOLLOW GLASS WARE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,546, dated July 3, 1883. 
Application filed April 30, 1883. 
(No model.) 
- 
To all, whon it naily concern: 
when the forming device is inserted into it is 
Beit known that we, JESSE WILLETTs and round, the expansion of the forming devices 
WILLIAM BUTTLEAR, of Pittsburg, in the transforms it to the figure bounding the form 
county of Allegheny and State of Pennsylva- ers when fully expanded therein. 
nia, have invented a new and useful Improve 
We will now describe the particular modifi 
ment in Tools for Forming the Open Ends of 
cation of our invention which is shown in the 
drawings. 
Hollow Glassware; and we do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
The tongs or shears at are of the usual form, 
scription thereof, reference being had to the 
having a spring-bow, a?, and forming-blades 
accompanying drawings, forming part of this 
a. Secured to a rod, b, which is fastened to 
specification, in which 
the bow a' by nuts b, is a flat stop, plate, or 
Figures 1 and 2 are side and end views of 
head, c, which is screwed onto the threaded 
a lamp-chimney. Figs. 3 and 4 are opposite 
end of the rod b against the nut b. The plate 
side views of our improved chimney - tool. 
c is slotted, as at c, for the passage of the 
Fig. 5 is an edge view. Fig. 6 is a plan view. 
blades a. On the stems of the blades at are 
Figs. 7, 8, and 9 are detail views. 
Figs. 10 
sleeves d, which are provided with blades d', 
extending up a short distance along the outer 
and 11 are views of a modification. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
edges of the blades a, and projecting through 
the outer ends of the slot c'. 
They also have 
in each. 
Broadly stated, our invention consists of a 
plates d extending at right angles and paral 
tool having formers capable of being inserted. 
lel to the plate c, and lugs d" under the plates 
into and shaping the open end of an article of 
d". The plates d are slotted, as at d", and ad 
glassWare by expanding against its inner sur 
justably secured in the slots are two blades, e 
face, whereby the open end is stretched in the 
e', being fastened by screws e and washerse". 
direction of the expansion of the tool. 
The blades e e' extend up through the slots c 
It also consists in combining such a tool 
and c in the plate c. A bolt, f, having a head 
with a pair of ordinary glass-shears. The or 
at one end and a nut, f', at the other, extends 
dinary shears are used to give a round form 
through the lugs d". The spring-bow (ttends 
to the lower end of lamp-chimneys by insert 
constantly to spread the blades at apart, and 
ing one or both the blades into the heated open 
the bolt flimits the movement. The sleeves 
end of the chimney as it is rotated on the arm 
dare adjustably secured to the tongs a by set 
of a chair. The shears are so manipulated as 
screws d, but may be secured permanently. 
to cause the soft glass to assume the form of a 
Projecting up from the plate c are two chim 
plain or flared cylinder. It is practically im 
ney holding and centering devices, g, and two 
possible to manufacture angular or oval-ended 
gage-plates, g and (f. 
chimneys by the use of the shears, for the rea 
The toolthus described is designed for mak 
son that their ability to shape the glass de 
ing a chimney having a rectangular base, the 
pends mainly on the rotation of the glass 
form of the lower end being a parallelopipe 
against their edges, and also because the uni 
don. 
formity of the product must depend solely 
The operation is as follows: The chimney is 
upon the eye of the workman. So far as we 
blown in the usual Way of blowing chimneys 
are aware, no tool capable of being inserted 
without a mold. The lower end is reheated 
into the end of the chimney and then shaping 
and opened on a chair, in the usual Way, by 
it by simply expanding against its inner sur 
means of the blades a, the workmen rolling 
face while the chimney is at rest has ever 
the pipe back and forth on the arms of the 
The shape thus imparted to the 
been devised. 
chair, and while the chimney is thus rotating 
glass being other than round, it is impossible 
inserting the blades' (t", compressed together, 
and then permitting them to expand gradu 
to obtain it if the glass is moved fast or ro 
tated on the forming-surface. It must there. 
ally against the inner surface of the chimney. 
5o fore retain a fixed position relatively to the 
When the end of the chimney is sufficiently 
forming-blades. As the shape of the opening 
large, the tool is compressed and put farther in 
3O 
35 
IO 
45 
55 
95 
CO 
 
250,546 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
until the end of the chimney encounters the 
plate c, and then the tool is permitted to ex 
pand in the openmouth of the chimney. This 
causes the blades or formers dee' to encoun 
ter the plastic glass and cause it to assume the 
form of a parallelopipedon, as illustrated in 
Fig. 2. The long sides of the chimney-base 
are kept straight, or nearly so, by the plates of 
g", one of which comes inside and the other 
outside. 
The modification shown in Figs. 10 and ill. 
is designed for forming a chimney with an 
oval base. Here the sleeves b have circular 
arms h, in which are journaled small friction 
rollers h", having their peripheries projecting 
slightly beyond the sides of the arms. When 
this tool is inserted into the end of the chilm 
ney and expanded, the faces of the roller's 
encounter the glass and are rotated on their 
axes by contact therewith as the arms move 
outward. The purpose of the rollers his to 
prevent the glass from crizzling, as it would do 
if the forming-faces of the jaws h were plain. 
We do not limit ourselves to expanding 
formers attached to the shears, but claim them. 
also when in a separate tool for shaping the 
glass by expanding against its sides, as de 
scribed. Neither do we limit ourselves to the 
spring-yoke a for giving the expanding move 
ment to the formers, as such movement may 
also be obtained by springs of other form, or 
by a cam or a screw device. 
By changing the relative arrangement and 
shape of the formers to suit, any desired form 
other than a circle may be given to the end of 
the chimney-such, for instance, as an Oval, 
square, or other polygonal shape. Hereto 
fore these shapes could be practically made 
only in a mold; but experience has demon 
strated that molded chimneys are much more 
liable to break than those not made in a mold; 
and in the ability to form the lower ends of 
chimneys of these shapes without the use of a 
mold consists the greatest utility of our in 
vention, for we are thereby enabled to obtain 
all the durability of non - molded chimneys. 
We also obtain uniformity of product, because 
they are all made on a common former. 
We have described our invention as ap 
plied to forming the ends of lamp-chimneys; 
but we do not, however, limit ourselves to 
such use, but claimit also for forming the open 
ends of glass articles generally. 
We are aware that machines having rotat 
ing expanding-formers have been devised for 
opening and finishing the lower ends of lamp 
chimneys; but such devices differ from ours in 
that, owing to their rotation, they can commu 
nicate only around or cylindrical shape to the 
chimney, and because they are not fitted for 
use as non-rotatory tools. 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
We are also aware a non-rotatory expansible 
tool has been devised for crimping, flaring, 
and longitudinally fluting the upper ends of 
lamp-chimneys; but such tool differs from our 
invention in that the outer ends of the fluting 
ribs or blades are united at the point of the 
tool, and are made to operate on the glass by 
being opened like an umbrella, so that they 
cause the end of the chimney to have a flared 
form, and cannot possibly be used for finishing 
the lower end of a chimney, which operation 
requires the ends of the blades to be free and 
to be capable of expanding in the chimney as 
far, or nearly so, as at its extreme lower end. 
What we claim as Our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a pair of glass 
maker's shears, of one or more formers at 
tached to the blades or arms of said shears, 
and capable therewith of being inserted into 
and of expanding inside of an open-ended ar 
ticle of glassware, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
2. The combination, with a pair of glass 
maker's shears, of one or more formers at 
tached to the blades or arms of said shears, 
and capable of adjustment thereon either lat 
erally or longitudinally, or both, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
3. The combination, with a pair of glass 
maker's shears, of one or more formers at 
tached to the blades or arms of said shears, 
and a stop for limiting the insertion of Said 
formers into an open-ended article of glass 
Ware, Substantially as and for the purposes de 
Scribed. 
4. The combination, with a pair of glass 
maker's shears, of one or more adjustable form 
ers attached to the blades or arms of said 
shears, and a stop-plate for limiting the in 
sertion of said formers into an open-ended ar 
ticle of glassware, which plate is slotted for 
the passage of the shears and formers, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
5. Anon-rotatory tool forgiving a shape othe)' 
than round to the Open end of glass articles, 
consisting of two or more formers having free 
outer ends capable of being entered into the 
end of the article and of communicating the 
desired shape thereto by simply expanding 
against its inner sides, substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands this 25th day of April, A. D. 1883. 
JESSIE WILLETTS. 
WILLIAM BUTTLEAR. 
Witnesses: 
W. B. CORWIN, 
T. B. KERR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280646.txt	(No Model.) 
M. C. MoDONALD. 
DEVICE FOR INCREASING THE SPEED OF SHIPS, &c. 
No. 280,646. 
Patented July 3, 1883. 
Lull 
 
N 
49% 
N. PETERs. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
44.4% 
"deadligudu, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
M. CHARLES McDON ALD, OF MINERSVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DEVICE FOR INCREASING THE SPEED OF SHiPS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,646, dated July 3, 1883. 
Application filed January 29, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, M. CHARLES MCDON 
ALD, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Minersville, in the county of Schuylkill, 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Devices for In 
creasing the Speed of Ships, Boats, and Simi 
lar Vessels, which improvement is fully set 
forth in the following specification and accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a device for 
increasing the speed of vessels embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a top or plan view there 
Fig. 3 is a front view thereof. Fig. 4 is 
of. 
a vertical section, enlarged, in line acac, Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in the Several figures. 
My invention consists of means, substan 
tially as hereinafter described, whereby the 
frictional resistance of Water on a ship, &c., is 
decreased and the speed of the same corre 
spondingly increased. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
hull of a ship. (Shown in dotted lines.) On 
each side of the hull at the draft-Waterline are 
secured rollers B, which are mounted verti 
cally at or about at a right angle to the plane of 
the water, and arranged from a point at the rear 
of the bow to a point in front of the stern, 
where the resistance of the Water on the hull 
ceases, it however being evident that the roll 
ers may extend a greater or less distance than 
that shown. 
C represents an endless belt which is passed 
freely around the series of rollers B, so as to 
move thereon by frictional contact with the 
water when the ship is in motion. It will be 
seen that as the belt receives the thrust of the 
water and yields, owing to its capability to 
move around the rollers, it relieves the ship 
O 
4 of the frictional resistance or action of the 
water heretofore exerted directly on the sides 
of the hull, whereby the speed of the ship will 
be accordingly increased. 
In order to prevent rubbing or chafing of 
the belt on the sides of the hull, there is se 
cured to each side an additional set of rollers, 
B, which is arranged parallel with the set of 
rollers B, and interposed between the belt and 
5o side of the hull, as most clearly showninFig. 4. 
In order to prevent vertical displacement 
45 
35 
 
of the belt from the rollers B, the upper and 
lower ends of said rollers are flanged, or other 
wise provided with guards to hold the belt in 
position, and the rollers may be made in Sec- 55 
tions, and thereby possess the greatest freedom 
of rotary motions. Furthermore, the rollers 
may be mounted on axes which conform to 
the curvature of the sides of the hull, and in 
creased or decreased in length and diameter 6O 
according to requirements. 
In order to prevent abrupt action of the 
water on the belt and rollers at their places of 
beginning, I secure to the hull, in front of the 
belt, guards D D, which accord with the con- 65 
tour of the hull at their place of connection 
therewith, and project therefrom in such man 
ner that the belt forms in a measure continua 
tions of the guards, the speed of the ship thus 
not being retarded by the angles presented at 7O 
the front end of the belts. 
If desired, guards D' D may be secured to 
the hull at the rear of the belts for preventing 
abrupt action of the Water on the hull at the 
places of termination of the belts. 
The rollers may be secured to the hull in 
various ways, either during the building of 
the ship or after the same is completed, and, 
if desired, power may be applied to the roll 
ers or belts, or both, as auxiliary to the action 8o 
of the water, and positively causing the mo 
tion of the belts. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. Traveling endless belts, in combination 
with supporting-rollers secured to the sides of 
a ship's hull, said belts being operated by the 
action of the water when the ship is in motion, 
substantially as described. 
2. The rollers B B, secured to the sides of 
a ship's hull, in combination with the belts C, 
the rollers B being interposed between the 
belts and hull, substantially as set forth. 
therefor, secured to the sides of a ship's hull, 
in combination with the guards D, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. Endless traveling belts, and supports 95 
85 
75 
M. CHAS. MCDONALD. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
A. P. GRANT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280747.txt	W. M. JACKSON, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
METRICAL REGULATOR FOR DISTRIBUTING HYDROCARBON LIQUID 
Patented July 3, 1883. 
No. 280,747. 
TO GAS OR, AIR. 
III 
e 
we77. 655 6ts 
-Z7eveza 47. 
77 27. 
6%. 2622-2244. 
(2-4-2-27 . 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
METRICAL REGULATOR FOR DISTRIBUTING HYDROCARBON LIQUID 
July 3, 1883. 
No. 280,747. 
W. M. JACKSON. 
T0 GASOR, AIR, 
seis 
R 
 
 
 
N 
N N N N N N N N N 
W 
A. 
i. 
& 
Y s 
$2 Z S. 
S. 
N 
& 
77 
s WS 
 
of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
53. 2 &  
re 4, 
Y11. 2Z) 
is 
SHS 
M 
 
 
-A : 
 
tre (tesses, 
64-ox%roe. 
Z77 were 427. 
2%. 2, 42%rez) 
N. rereRs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, p. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
METRICAL REGULATOR FOR DISTRIBUTING HYDROCARBON LIQUID 
W. M. JACKSON. 
 
(62.2.2 
... 2 
77227zejves, 
a . 
Zzz/e7 727. 
(2%. 24%. 
43/ (2) 27, -Y-a-deu 
N. Peters. Photo-ithograpur, Washington. O. C. 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
(No Model.) 
METRICAL REGULATOR FOR DISTRIBUTING HYDROGARBON LIQUID 
No. 280,747. 
- Z22. Patented July 3, 1883. 
W. M. JACKSON, 
- 
TO GAS OR, AIR 
WITNESSES 
6Cao X2evee. 
27T 
(2%azz 27 r 
Attorney 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER M. JACKSON, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
METRICAL REGULATOR FOR DISTRIBUTING HYDROCARBON LIQUID TO GAS OR A R. 
SRECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,747, dated July 3, 1883. 
Application filed November 27, 1882. (No model.) 
IO 
which- 
- 
25 
- 
The letter M indicates a liquid-induction 6o 
This invention relates to certain improve-S, having a downwardly-extending shank, T, 65 
G, mounted on a shaft, H, journaled in a bear 
To all uhon, it may concern: 
ing, I, at one side of the casing A, the said 
Beit known that I, WALTER M. JACKSON, 
shaft being provided at its outer end with a 55 
of Providence, in the county of Providence, 
cog-wheel, K, which is adapted to intergear 
and in the State of Rhode Island, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements with a cog-wheel driven by the dial-shaft of 
the meter to operate the measuring or dis 
in Metrical Regulators for the Distribution of 
Hydrocarbon Liquids to Gas or Air; and I do 
tributing wheel. 
hereby declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being tube, which is connected with a supply-tank, 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the K", by means of a tube, P. The said tube M 
letters of reference marked thereon, making a extends upward through the casing, and is pro 
part of this specification. 
vided with a conical valve-seat, R, and a valve, 
mentsin metrical governors for the distribution which is pivoted to the short arm of a lever, 
U, fulcrumed between hangers V, secured 
of hydrocarbon fluids to gas or air to be used 
15 for illuminating and heating purposes; and it 
within the upper part of the casing. Thelong 
has for its objects to provide certain improved arm of said leveris pivoted between standards 
means whereby the hydrocarbon fluid may be A', secured to a longitudinal metallic bar, B, 7O 
Supplied in automatically-regulated quantities 
carrying a float, C, of cork or other suitable 
to the air or gas, as more fully hereinafter speci 
material. The said bar has connected to it a 
transverse bar, D', which also embraces the 
fied. These objects I attain by the means 
float, and which is provided with uprights or 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
standards E, which are pivoted to hangers F, 
Figure 1 represents a top view of my im 
secured to the top of the casing. The induc 
tion-tube is provided with external threads, G' 
proved apparatus; Fig. 2, a vertical sectional 
and H', the threaded portion H being secured 
Fig. 3, 
view taken on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
to one end of a pipe, I', coupled to the pipe P, 
a vertical sectional view taken on the line y y 
leading from a supply-tank, K, and to the 
of Fig. 1; and Fig. 4, a view partly in eleva 
smaller screw-threaded portion is Secured a 
tion and partly in section, showing my im 
tubular strainer, L, which prevents any solid 
proved apparatus connected with the liquid 
impurities from coming into contact with the 
hydrocarbon-supply tank. Fig. 5 represents 
a horizontal section of the distributing-cham 
valve. 
The letter Rindicates the dial-shaft of the 
ber; and Fig.6, a view of the meter with the 
meter, which is driven by the usual actuating 
top removed, showing the distributing-cham 
mechanism. (Shown in Fig. 6 of the draw 
35 ber located therein and connected with the 
ings.) The said shaft is provided with a cog 
metrical gearing of the meter. 
wheel, S', which intermeshes with the cog 
In the drawings, the letter A indicates a 
wheel K, to actuate the metrical mechanism of 90 
box or casing, constructed of metal or other 
suitable material, and provided with a rotary 
the carburetOr. 
The operation of my improved apparatus 
4o distributing-wheel, B, mounted on a shaft, C, 
will be readily understood in connection with 
journaled at one end in a bearing, D, in the 
the above description, and is as follows: The 
wall of the distributing-box D', located within 
liquid hydrocarbon flows in from the induc-95 
the casing A, at one side. The said distribut 
ing-box extends within the distributing-wheel, 
tion-tube into the casing, and when it reaches 
the proper level it raises the float and cuts off 
45 which is provided with a series of peripheral 
a further supply. The distributing-wheel, as 
buckets, the open ends of which are beveled, 
it is rotated, takes up and delivers the fluid to 
as indicated, so as to readily take up the fluid 
the chamber at the side of the casing, from IOO 
as the wheel is rotated and deliver it to the 
which it passes out and is delivered to the air 
said distributing-box, which connects by a suit 
or gas to be charged. In order to equalize or 
5o able duct, E, with a pipe, F, leading to the 
balance the pressure between the Supply-tank 
carburetor. Upon the shaft C is mounted a 
and the regulator, the induction-pipe is con 
cog-pinion, F, which intergears with a pinion, 
75 
 
2 so, it 
O 
15 
ducted from the lower part of the tank to the 
distributer, and a pipe, P, is extended from 
the distributer to the upper part of the tank, 
as shown in Fig. 4 of the drawings. 
In Fig. 4 the letter P' indicates the walls of 
a meter, within the upper part of which the 
measuring-chamber may be inclosed. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination, with the metrically-gov 
erned mechanism for distributing hydrocar 
bon liquids to gas or air, of a device for auto 
lmatically regulating the flow of liquid from a 
reservoir to the carburetor, a separate box con 
taining such mechanism, a meter, and an oil 
reservoir and connecting-pipes, substantially 
as specified. 
2. In combination with a meter for measur 
ing gas or air, the metrically-governed mech 
amism for distributing hydrocarbon liquid to 
the gas or air, fixed within the meter-case, and 
consisting of a liquid-receiving box, a distrib 
uting-wheel therein, mounted on a shaft hav 
ing a cog-wheel connected by gearing with a 
cog-wheel on the dial-shaft of the air or gas 
meter, whereby the lhydrocarbon liquid may be 
Supplied to the gas or air in measured and 
propelly-propolitioned quantities, Substantial 
ly as described. 
3. In combination with the liquid-hydro 
carbon-distributing box and the metrically 
governed liquid distributing and measuring 
device therein, a float and valve arranged as 
described, for automatically regulating and 
controlling the admission of liquid to said box. 
whereby the liquid may be supplied to the 
gas or air in regulated and measured quanti 
ties, as specified. 
4. The liquid-hydrocarbon receiving and 
distributing box, having a supply-pipe and a 
discharge-opening, in combination with a float 
and valve properly connected therein, for auto 
matically controlling the flow of liquid to the 
box, and a distributing-wheel provided with 
buckets mounted on a shaft within said box, 
in combination with suitable gearing and the 
dial-shaft of a meter, a liquid-hydrocarbon 
reservoir, and a connecting-pipe, as and for 
the purpose specified. 
5. The liquid-hydrocarbon receiving and 
distributing box, having a liquid-induction 
pipe provided with a valve-seat and a straine', 
in combination with a conical valve seated in 
the pipe, a float located in said box, and a con 
necting pivoted lever, all constructed and ar 
ranged as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, in 
presence of two witnesses, this 23d day of No 
vember, 1882. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER MAIRSH JACKSON. 
J. J. MCCARTHY, 
CHAS. I. CoOM BS. 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280847.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 280,847. 
G, H, MOTLEY. 
BEIT SHIFTER, 
Patented July 10, 1883. 
-Z29. Z. 
9 
 
Z722ve.72ZoZ. 
62-c. 2%-4-72 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. MOTLEY, OF OXFORD, MAINE. 
BELT-SHIFTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,847, dated July 10, 1883. 
Application filed February 23, 1883. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. MOTLEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ox 
ford, in the county of Oxford and State of 
Maine, have invented a new and useful Belt 
Shifter, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
belt-shifters, in which there is a table having 
a space in it for a belt attached to a carding 
machine, and on this table there is a smaller 
table in which is a space for the same purpose 
as that in the under table, the same belt pass 
ing through both spaces, each table having a 
space, corresponding With that in the tables, 
through the outer edge thereof, for the pur 
pose of passing the belt therethrough, the 
space in the upper table being directly over 
that in the under table. The Small table is 
held in position by two rods which pass 
through two grooves in the upper table. The 
rods are fastened in posts in the under table. 
The table is moved backward and forward by 
means of a lever attached to a shaft of a cog 
wheel. The cog-wheel fits in a straight cog 
on the top edge of the small table, and the 
shaft of the cog-wheel fits in two posts in the 
under table. In the under surface is a groove 
which fits in a track in the under table. When 
the shifter is placed in position and the belt 
on the carding-machine is passed through the 
spaces, it is ready for use. When it is desired 
to shift the belt, the person moves the lever 
attached to the cog-wheel to the right or left, 
thereby forcing the belt off of one pulley of the 
carding-machine to another; and the objects 
of my invention are, first, to provide a power 
for shifting belts at a moment's notice; sec 
ond, that the belts may be shifted without be 
ing touched by the hands or feet of the person 
shifting them, thereby lessening the danger 
incident to shifting belts. I attain these ob 
jects by the mechanism illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is the top sections of the entirema 
chine. Fig. 2 is a top view of the machine as 
it appears after the removal of the small ta. 
tS. 
- 
ble. Fig. 3 shows the top view of the small 
table. Fig. 4 shows the under surface of the 
small table. Fig. 5 shows the two posts, shaft, 
cog-wheel, and lever attached to the shaft. 
Fig. 6 shows the two rods. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
Out the Several views. 
The table A, its standards or posts b b bb, 
the posts c c, the feet d, and the small table E 
constitute the frame-work of the machine. On 
the plate or table A moves the smaller table E 
backward or forward by means of the cog-wheel 
if and leverg in Fig. 5; and the small table 
is held in position by the rods in Fig. 6, which 
pass through the grooves h in Fig. 3 into 
the standards b b b b, and are fastened by nuts 
On the end of each rod; and on the outer edge 
of the Small table, Fig. 3, is a straight, cog, i, 
in which fits the cog-wheelf. 
f In the posts c c, Fig. 2, the shafti, Fig. 5, 
Letter k, Fig. 2, shows the track which fits 
Fig. 2 shows the spaces m n in the large 
Fig. 3 shows the spaces m n in the smaller 
I am aware that prior to my invention belt 
shifters have been made. I therefore do not 
claim to be the only inventor of belt-shifters; 
but 
What Ido claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a belt-shifter, of the 
two tables A and E, in which are the spaces m, n, 
the trackle, which fits in the groovel in table 
E, and the rods which hold table E in posi 
tion, all substantially as set forth. 
2. In a belt-shifter, the combination of the 
cog-wheelf, the straight cog i, and the lever 
g, substantially as shown, for the purpose 
specified. 
the groovel in Fig. 4. 
table. 
table. 
GEORGE H. MOTILEY. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGEE, HAWKES, 
A, S, STEVENS, 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
85 
- 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US280947.txt	(No Model.) 
P. C. OHL, 
INSULATOR FOR ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS, 
No. 280, 947, 
Patented July 10, 1883. 
244 
c4roze 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PERCY C. OHL OF PLAINFIELD, NEWJERSEY. 
INSULATOR FOR ELEC TRICAL conDUCTORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 280,947, dated July 10, 1883. 
Application filed November 9, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom, it inay concern. 
Be it known that I, PERCYC. OHL, of Plain 
field, in the county of Union and State of New 
Jersey, have invented an Improvement in In 
sulators for Electrical Conductors, of which 
the following is a specification. 
In telephonic and telegraphic conductors the 
wires that are suspended upon poles are liable 
to be swayed by the wind and to come into 
contact with each other, and with telephones 
the induction produces false sounds, even if the 
wires do not actually touch. For these rea 
sons it is usual to place the poles much nearer 
to each other than is necessary for the support 
of the wires. 
My invention relates to the combination, 
with insulators, of a connecting - stretcher 
whereby the insulators can be kept at the 
proper distance apart, and be placed upon the 
wires at the pole, and then drawn along about 
midway of the poles, and then allowed to re 
main so as to preserve the proper distance be 
tween the wires, and prevent them swaying 
toward and from each other by the action of 
the Wind. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the insulators applied to the wires. 
Fig.2 is a longitudinal section of an insulator; 
and Fig. 3 is a cross-section, in larger size, of 
one of the insulators. 
The insulators at are made of porcelain, glass, 
or other suitable material, and they may be of 
any suitable shape, and they are connected to 
each other by a stretcher, b, so as to be kept 
at the proper distance apart. The insulators 
are placed upon the wires at or near the poles, 
the stretcher b applied to connect them, and 
then they are drawn along by a cord or rope 
to near the middle between the poles, and al 
lowed to remain to preserve the proper dis 
tance between the respective wires. Insula 
tors and stretchers are to be applied to each 
range of wires between the poles whenever 
required. I prefer to employ a small round 
45 insulator of porcelain with a hole through it 
and a peripheral groove, as shown. Around 
the insulator wire is wound, and its ends bent 
to form hooks c, that are passed over the con 
35 
25 
- 
ductor d. Then the insulators are threaded 
upon the cross-stretcher b. This may be a 
piece of wood, or a piece of wire, or a wire 
bent double; and to prevent theinsulator slip 
ping endwise upon the stretcher by the action 
of the wind, I apply any suitable spring, 
such as a piece of wire bent double, laid 
through the hole of the insulator, and then 
turned down at the ends, as seen at i, so as to 
retain the same in place. As the stretcher 
wire is passed through the insulator, these 
spring-wires are pressed aside sufficiently to 
produce a friction on the same. It will be ap 
parent that the parts may be constructed in 
any suitable manner to prevent the insulators 
slipping thereon, and that the insulators may 
be of any suitable pattern. 
The insulators may be secured upon the 
stretcher at distances apart corresponding to 
the wires, and then the insulators may be 
hooked to the wires, or else the stretcher may 
be passed through the insulators after they 
are connected to the line-wires. 
In instances where stretchers have been pro 
posed for keeping the wires apart, the insula 
tors had to be threaded upon the wires, and 
hence could only be applied while the lines 
were being put up. By my improvement the 
hooks allow for the insulators being connected 
upon the wires after they are stretched. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the suspended con 
ductors, of insulators, a stretcher to connect 
such insulators together, and means for re 
movably connecting each conductor with its 
insulator, substantially as set forth. 
2. The insulators a, of non-conducting ma 
terial, and the hooks c for the same, adapted 
to being passed over the suspended electric 
conductors, in combination with the stretcher 
that keeps the conductors at the proper dis 
tance apart, substantially as Set forth. . 
Signed by me this 31st day of October, A. 
D. 1882. 
- 
PERCY C. OHL. 
Witnesses: 
A. D. MALLINSON, 
EP. B. WRIGHT. 
55 
75 
9O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281047.txt	(No Model.) 
- H. FRASCH. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING WHITE LEAD, 
No. 281,047. 
Patented July 10, 1883. 
 
 
; Fiji II: 
Stil f 
SS 
 
 
 
 
R 
- 
- - 
s 
Yss 
SS. Krk is assissis...s. ss. Yrara wrks 
ign (970. 
4. (2-ove4- 
zzi, 2. 
W 
ATTORNEYS 
 
N. Peters. Phata-laegrapher. assington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMANN FRASCH, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
PROCESS OF AND A PPARATUS FOR MAK NG white LEAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,047, dated July 10, 1888. 
Application filed April 21, 1882. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it inctly concern. 
Be it known that I, HERMANN FRASCH, of 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvementsin Processes of and Mech 
anism for Making White Lead; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it per 
tains to make and use it, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawing, which forms 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to the manufacture of 
white lead; and it consists of the following 
15 process and mechanism for the manufacture 
of white lead that I shall proceed to describe. 
In practicing my invention I take lead ore 
(lead sulphide galena) and subject it on the 
hearth of a covered furnace to the flame of a 
petroleum jet, or a jet mixed with enough 
air to produce a neutral or non-oxidizing at 
mosphere. The lead sulphide is volatilized, 
and escapes into the flue on the furnace. 
Here I admit enough air to convert the lead 
sulphide vapors into lead Sulphate, and the 
lead-sulphate particles suspended in the com 
bustion - gases I pass through one, two, or 
more columns of water by means of a steam 
jet. These water columns I prefer to inter 
3o sect with perforated screens of willow-ware 
or any suitable substance to subdivide the 
gases in which the lead is suspended, so that 
all the lead remains in the water, the combus 
tion - gases alone passing on and escaping. 
The lead sulphate thus obtained is in a state of 
fine division, and contains but a small quan 
tity of free sulphuric acid. To convert this (the 
lead sulphate) into white and chemically pure 
lead carbonate, Itreat it with a solution of am 
monium carbonate. This will interchange 
with the lead, and lead carbonate (insoluble) 
and ammonia sulphate (soluble) will be the 
result. I wash the precipitate on suitable fil 
ters, preferably vacuum-filters, and in this 
manner obtain a perfectly pure lead carbonate. 
The ammonia-sulphate solution I introduce 
into a suitable vessel with burned lime. This 
will regenerate the ammonia. With the am 
monia gases mixthe carbonic-acid gases from 
the lime-kiln burning the limestone, and these 
gases absorbed by water furnish the solution 
necessary to decompose the lead sulphate. In 
this manner only limestone, lead ore, and fuel 
are consumed in the process of making white 
lead, as the ammonia is continually regenerated 55 
and needs to be replenished only as the small 
mechanical loss diminishes its quantity. 
The quality of lead carbonate (white lead)is 
as good when produced by this process as any 
produced by any of the old processes. More- 6o 
over, by the method above described the time, 
labor, and expense in producing white lead are 
greatly diminished, nor is it necessary, as has 
heretofore been the case, that lead of any stand 
ard purity should be furnished from which to 65 
make the carbonate. 
I do not limit myself narrowly to the use of 
a petroleum or a gas jet, as above specified, as 
any pure, clean flame may be employed. 
The drawing diagrammatically illustrates a 7o 
system of apparatus for practicing my process. 
A represents a furnace in which the lead ore 
is placed and subjected to the action of aflame 
produced by petroleum and air or steam, the 
petroleum being admitted through the pipe D, 75 
and air or steam through the pipe B. The lead 
sulphide is volatilized, and escapes into the flue 
A, into which air is admitted through the air 
inlet B, and operates to convert the lead vapors 
into lead sulphate, which is, by the action of So 
the exhaust-steamjet B, drawn into the lower 
portion of the water-chamber C, the uncon 
densed products that escape from the chamber 
C passing upwardly through the tank C. By 
passing the combustion-gases and the lead-sul 
phate particles through the columns of water, 
as described, the lead is retained suspended in 
the water, and by admitting a continuous Sup 
ply of water through the inlet C the water 
containing the lead sulphate is caused to pass 
through the overflow-pipes ID' D* and escape 
into the receptacle D, from which the lead is 
collected, as has been described. 
I am aware of a description of a process for 
making carbonate of lead, said process consist 
ing in placing a mixture of sulphate of lead 
and soluble carbonate of soda in a closed iron 
vessel and subjecting it to heat underpressure. 
The product is thrown into a filter and well 
washed. The sulphate of lead is drawn off, 
leaving the carbonate of lead, and I would have 
it understood that I make no claim to such pro 
85 
45 
- 
90 
95 
OO 
 
3 
2 sil,04? 
2. An apparatus for the manufacture of white 15 
lead, consisting of the combination of the closed 
furnace A, means for producing aflame within 
the furnace, escape-pipe A, having an inlet, 
B, liquid-tanks CC, discharge-pipesD'D', pipe 
6 and receptacle D, substantially as set forth. 20 
Intestimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
| 
HERMANN FRASCH. 
Witnesses: 
LEVERETT L. LEGGETT, 
JNO. CROWELL, Jr. 
cess, as my improved process is radically dif. 
ferent therefrom. 
What I claim is 
1. The process of making white lead, substan 
tially as hereinbefore described, consisting in 
subjecting lead sulphide to the action of aflame 
and volatilizing the lead, then admitting air to 
the lead-sulphide vapors and converting them 
into lead sulphate, then passing the lead-sul 
phate fumes through liquid and collecting the 
lead sulphatetherefrom, and afterward treating 
the lead Sulphate with ammonium carbonate or 
other volatile carbonate base, substantially as 
set forth. 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281147.txt	No. 281,147, 
H. R. SILLIMAN. 
Patented July 10, 1883. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERBERT R. SILLIMAN, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO HEMSELF, 
ALONZO H. WHITTEN, AND GEORGE W. LASCELL, OF SAME PLACE. 
LAST - BLOCK FAST ENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,147, dated July 10, 1883. 
Application filed Marcly 31, 1883. (No model.) 
55 
automatic, the attendant having only to press 
To call, Luhon it may concern: 
the block downwardly to its bearing on the 
Be it known that I, HERBERTR. SILLIMAN, 
last. When the block is to be released, a slight 
of Lynn, in the county of Essex and State of . 
pressure on the rearwardly-bent end of the 
Massachusetts, have invented certainImprove 
spring e removes the spring from the projec 
5 ments in Last-Block Fasteners, of which the 
following is a specification. 
- 
tion g and releases the block. 
It will be seen that the plate c protects the 
This invention has for its object to provide 
thin upper end of the block, and also, by sur 
simple and efficient last-block fastening de 
vices, which shall serve also to protect the last- rounding the jack-spindle, prevents the last 
from much of the injury it usually receives 
block and last from injury during the rough 
from said spindle. The recess l; receiving the 
usage to which they are subjected. To this 
spring e prevents the latter from being dis 
end my invention consists in the improvements 
placed laterally, and enables it to hold the 
which will now proceed to describe and claim. 
plate e firmly, so that the orifice c of said plate 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
will not get out of line with the socket d. 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
I do not limit myself to the precise construc 
a top view of a last having my improved block 
tion shown and described of the plate C and 
fastener. Fig. 2 represents a section on line 
the automatic locking device therefor, as it is 
aca, Fig. 1. 
evident that the details thereof may be va 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
riously modified without departing from the 
same parts in all the figures. 
spirit of my invention. The projection i at 
. In carrying out my invention, Iattach rigidly 
the forward end of the last-block is, preferably, 
to the upper end of the last-block b a metal 
plate, c, which projects backwardly from the 
the rounded head of a screw inserted in the 
block. A projection of this form wears the 
block, and is adapted to rest on the upper por 
lastless than a sharp point or brad, such as has 
tion of the last at the rear of the block. The 
been used heretofore. The backwardly-pro 
projecting portion of the plate c is provided 
jecting free end of the spring e is exposed, so 
with an orifice, c, adapted to coincide with the 
that the operator can readily press upon it to 
jack-spindle socket d in the last, l when the 
block is in place on the last. To the last II 
displace the spring and release the block b. 
attach by a screw or screws, at e, a U-shaped 
spring, the body of which is contained in a 
vertical recess, k, in the last, while its free end 
projects above the upper surface of the last 
and is provided with an orifice, f, adapted to 
receive a projection, (), on the rear end of the 
plate c. Above the orifice if the free end of 
the spring e is bent backwardly, as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
In fastening the last-block, a projection, i, 
on the lower or forward end of the block is en 
gaged with a recess in the last in the usual 
manner, and the rear end of the plate c bears 
against the front side of the spring e, and dis 
places or presses the free end of said spring 
backwardly until the projection g snaps into 
the orificef, when the free end of the spring 
resumes its normal position, so that the orifice 
if surrounds the projection g and prevents lat 
eral, vertical, or longitudinal displacement of 
the block. The engagement of the locking de 
vice or spring e with the plate c is entirely 
I claim 
i. A last-block fastener composed of a pro 
jecting plate affixed to the exterior of the 
block, and provided with a projection, g, at 
its rear end, and a yielding spring secured at 
one end to the rear portion of the last, and pro 
vided with a perforation or recess in its free 
end, said spring adapted to be displaced by 
said projection, and to receive the latter into 
said recess when said projection and recess 
coincide, as set forth. 
2. A last-block having a rigidly-attached 
projection - plate, c, projecting backwardly 
therefrom, and provided with the jack-spin 
dle orifice c', combined with the last having 95 
the spindle-socket d, coinciding with the ori 
fice c, and a spring-locking device, adapted 
to engage with the plate c, and prevent dis 
placement of the block in any direction, and 
thereby keep the orifice c in coincidence with 
the socket d, as set forth. 
3. A last provided with a recess, k, extend 
75 
85 
90 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2s, 47 
4. A last provided with a recess, k, extend- 
5 automatically engage with a projecting plate in the last, and provided with a perforation 20 
ing downwardly from its exposed upper Sur- 
5. The combination of a last-block having 
face at the heel, and a U-shaped spring con- the projecting plate c, provided with the jack 
tained in said recess, and having a perforated spindle orifice c and projection g, and a last 
or recessed free end adapted to yield to and having a U-shaped spring, e, set in a recess. 
attached to the last-block, as set forth. 
adapted to receive the projectiong, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Thave signed my name 
ing downwardly from its exposed upper sur- to this specification, in the presence of two sub 
face at the heel, and a U-shaped spring con- scribing witnesses, this 27th day of March, 1883. 
IO tained in said recess, having a perforated or 
HERBERT R. SILLMIAN. 
recessed end adapted to engage with a project- 
ing plate attached to the last-block, said free 
end being extended backwardly to enable the 
spring to be disengaged from said projection, 
I5 as set forth. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. LASCELL, 
L. J. DAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281249.txt	(No Model.) 
G. D'INFREVILLE, 
QUADRUPLEX TELEGRAPH. 
11 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 281.249, 
Patented July 17, 1883. 
 
A/we 
 
Awe 
(No Model.) 
No. 281,249. 
G. D'INFREWILLE, 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH. 
11 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 17, 1883, 
Zava 
 
Zywa 
(No Model.) 
G. D'INFREVILLE, 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH. 
11. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
N 0. 281,249. 
Patented July 17, 1883. 
772eze 4, 
A ve 
 
Azeeze (27 
Ziwa. 
(No Model.) 
No. 281.249, 
G. DIN FREVILLE, 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH, 
11 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented July 17, 1883, 
G. D'INFREWILLE, 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH, 
1 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented July 17, 1883, 
No Model.) 
No. 281.249, 
Azazre 2 
 
(No Model.) 
G. D'INFREVILLE. 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH, 
- 
- - 
11 Sheets-Sheet, 6. 
No. 281.249, 
Patented July 17, 1883, 
 
Ayure 72, 
 
 
 
is 
 
E This 
WHAs 
St 
Y' 
I 
(No Model.) 
No. 281,249. 
G, D'INFREWILLE, 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH, 
11 sheets-Sheet 7. 
Patented July 17, 1883, 
Azere A6 
  
 
as All 
  
- - - - 
/ 
 
 
af 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 281,249, 
7%ure 17, 
-- 
C. D'INFREWILLE, 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH, 
11. Sheets-Sheet 8. 
Patented July 17, 1883. 
7%ave /S. 
NPETERs. Photo-Lithographer,' wishingti.o. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 281,249. 
p72 
Z 6 
a 
Z. A 
-- I - 
a 7 
S. 
S 
Nias 
N 
(ee) 
2 
ap 
 
G. D'INFREVILLE, 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH. 
11 Sheets-Sheet 9. 
Patented July 17, 1883, 
72%re 22. 
AS 
A. 
Z27ure 2/. 
 
 
2 
(No Model.) 
- 
N0, 281.249, 
G. D'INFREWILLE, 
11. Sheets-Sheet 10. 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH, 
Patented July 17, 1883, 
Z27zze 23, 
A. 
B-A 
S 
2 
 
PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 281.249, 
G. D'INFREVILLE, 
QUADRUPLEXTELEGRAPH, 
11 sheets-sheet 11. 
Patented July 17, 1883. 
- 
Azere 26. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGES DIN FREVILLE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
QUADRUPLEX TELEGRAPH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,249, dated July 17, 1883. 
Application filed July 1, 1882. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
2o all, whon, it invay concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGES DIN FREVILLE, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Quadruplex Telegraphs, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, true, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
lingS. 
The method of diplex transmission now in 
use in this country, which, when duplexed, 
becomes a quadruplex, consists generally in a 
method by which one set of signals is trans 
mitted by an increase or decrease in the 
strength of the line-current, and the other set 
of signals is transmitted by reversing the po 
larity of the entire current which may be upon 
the line at the time of transmitting said sig 
mals. Various other methods of diplex trans 
mission have been suggested, such as those of 
Stark and of Zetsche; but, so far as I know, 
they have never been put in practical opera 
tion in this country. By my improved quad 
ruplex herein described I transmit signals 
by variation in the potential of the current 
without reversing the entire current upon the 
line in order to transmit any one set of sig 
mals. I am enabled to use in my invention 
the entire change of potential of which the 
battery is capable, or I need not use so much, 
depending upon which of my transmitting ap 
paratuses is adopted; but in my method no 
key at any time. causes a change from the 
maximum negative potential to the maximum 
positive potential, or vice versa; wherefore it 
follows that the tendency to sparks at one of 
the transmitters is greatly reduced, and also 
the extent of the sudden variations of poten 
tial on the main circuit, thereby reducing the 
evil effects of induction on neighboring wires. 
For my receiving apparatus I employ a new 
polarized relay having a rocking armature 
and several contact-points, which will be here 
inafter more fully described. Although I pre 
fer to use but one receiving-instrument, yet I 
may receive on two polarized relays, as Ishall 
proceed to describe. 
In my drawings similar letters refer to simi 
lar parts. 
Figures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 rep 
resent arrangements of batteries and trans 
mitting-keys. Fig. 11 represents a vertical 
view of part of my receiving polarized relay; 
Fig.1.2, a view at right angles to Fig.11, show 
ing the spring-support of the armature; Fig. 
75 
13, a bottom view of another form of receiv- 55 
ing-relay; Fig. 14, a vertical view of the same 
at right angles to Fig. 13; Fig. 15, a view of 
the method of supporting my rocking arma 
ture; Fig. 16, a view of a slightly-modified 
form of receiving-relay from that shown in 6o 
Fig. 13; Fig. 163, a vertical view at light an 
gles to the view of Fig. 16; Figs. 17, 18, 19, 
and 20, plans of the general arrangement of 
my receiving apparatus, showing the different 
positions; Fig. 21, a view showing a method 65 
of receiving by two polarized relays; Fig. 22, 
a view of a different method of winding of 
the receiving polarized sounder; Fig. 23, a 
view of a modification of the armature of the 
receiving polarized relay by which an inde- 7o 
pendent battery is used for one of the receiv 
ing-sounders; Fig. 24, another arrangement 
almost similar to Fig. 23; Figs. 25 and 26, 
methods of duplicating the receiving polar 
ized sounders to make the Sound of the receiv 
ing-instrument more uniform and certain. 
Two transmitting-keys, K' K', are shown, 
and by the general scheme of my transmitter 
the lowest or most negative potential which 
can occur in any arrangement is to the line 
when both keys are up. When the first key 
is depressed, a move is made toward positive 
potential, and when the second key is depressed 
a still farther advance is made in the same di 
rection, and when both keys are depressed the 
highest positive potential of which any ar 
rangement is capable is attained. Of course 
the advance might be from positive to nega 
tive in the same way without altering the prin 
ciple of my invention. 
In Fig. 1 is shown a transmitter and bat 
teries by which the desired effects may be pro 
duced. Two batteries, B'B', are shown. Of 
these, B is the larger, and we will assume it to 
contain sixty cells, and B the smaller, to con- 95 
tain forty cells. The keys K Kare ordinary 
circuit-preserving keys, S S representing, 
generally, springs bearing upon the contacts 
shown. These drawings will not require de 
tailed description to one skilled in the art. In 
all cases where contact-preserving keys are 
used, it is generally preferable to operate them 
by an independent local battery and magnet. 
When both keys are up, as will be readily seen, 
the negative pole of the battery B is to line. 
When K is down and Kup, no battery is to 
the line. When K is down and K is up, the 
positive pole of battery B" is to line, and when 
90 
IOO 
 
2 
ses, 24.9) 
both keys are depressed the sum of the bat 
teries B'B' is to line by their positive poles 
that is, under the assumptions of batteries 
made, both keys up, minus sixty cells to line; 
K down, K up, nothing to line; K up, K' 
down, plus forty to line; K K down, plus one 
hundred to line. By this arrangement it will 
be observed that there is a constant advance 
of potential by the depression of the keys in 
the order made from the lowest to the highest, 
there being, therefore, four possible conditions 
of current upon the line. In Fig. 2 the con 
nections have been altered, the battery B' be 
ing divided into two equal portions, B' and B, 
as shown. In Fig. 3 two batteries are again 
used. In Fig. 4 duplicate batteries B B are 
shown. In Fig. 5 the battery B" is duplicated 
and the battery B reversed by a circuit-pre 
Selving reversing-key. In Fig. 6 is shown 
the most advantageous method of varying the 
currents, provided continuity-preserving cur 
rent-reversing keys are used. By this arrange 
ment the currents are changed from the high 
est negative to the highest positive by the op 
eration of my keys. In Fig. 7 the battery B 
is duplicated, while but one battery, B, is 
used, a l'esistance, ), being interposed, so as to 
(equalize in a well-known manner the resist 
ance, whatever be the position of the keys. By 
making the batteries B B B and the resist 
ance equal, the resistance to ground through 
the transmitter Will always be the same. In 
Fig. S the batteries are divided into three, B'B' 
B", B and B' being equal, and resistance and 
* are used, so as to maintain equality of resist 
ance through the transmitter. The amounts 
of these resistances will be readily calculated 
by any electrician for any given condition of 
battery. In Fig. 9 the battery B" is duplicated 
and the battery B reversed. In Fig. 10 the 
battery B is reversed, and the resistance , 
equal to the battery B", is interposed, so as 
to equalize resistance to the ground G. 
The following table will exhibit the differ 
ent currents sent to the line, the batteries B", 
B', and B' being assumed to contain the num 
ber of cells set opposite them. Of these it may 
be said that Figs. 1 and 3 illustrate in the most 
simple mannel the theory of my transmitter, 
and Fig. 6 gives the most beneficial results for 
the amount of battery used: 
O 
25 
35 
45 
Relative numbers of cells in the 
batteries. 
55 
g 
| 
8 
5 
22 & 2, 23 33 
clative positions of 
keys. 
. 
g 
2 
a 
Is ... 
B. as 
3 
B : 38 B = 38 & 
32 = 40 
32 - 
50 
1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. B = 30 B4 = 3 
32 - 5 
. 
32 - 
5 
3 - 40 
32 - 38 & 
32 is 
 60 || 0 | +40 +100 
GO 
50 B = 20 B3 - 20 - 80 -20 - 20 - 80 
-100 --50 
50 
- 50 
50 
- 80 -20 - 20 - 80 
- 80 || -20 --20 -- 80 
- 80 -30 -20 -- 80 
- 50 - 
50 -100 
- 40 -20 --20 - 40 
- 80 -20 || --20 - 80 
- 50 || 
--50 || --00 
3 - 
30 
3 = 3. 
B = 0 || 
B - 50 
3 = 0 || 
50 
8. 
O 
0 
0 
r 
10. 
65 
 
f 
--- 
The proportions between the main batteries 
in the arrangement shown in Fig. 6 can be de 
termined by the following formula: Supposing 
it to be desired with this combination to have 
the potential of either polarity represented by 
the larger figure amount to 
times the po 
tential of the same polarity represented by the 
smaller figure, then the following equation: 
(B-I-B)=n (B'B',) which reducesto E-CL, 
which gives the proportion between the Bat 
teries. Should it be desired to make n equal 
to 4, for instance, we have the ploportion 
- E- which has been assumed to be the value 
of the batteries in respect to this figure. I do 
not limit myself of course to the particular 
value just assigned to n in the preceding equa 
tion; but I have obtained good results from 
the use of batteries relatively arranged in the 
proportion just obtained from said value be 
ing assigned to n. 
In describing my receiving apparatus I 
shall call the current on the line, when K and 
K' are up,  Current 1; when K is down and 
Kup, Current 2; when K is up and K' 
down, Current 3; 
when K and K are 
down, Current 4. The general theory of 
my receiving apparatus is best shown in Figs. 
17, 18, 19, and 20, the detail of the polarized 
relay being given in Figs. 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 
16, and 163. 
Referring now to Figs. 17, 18, 19, and 20, 
these apparatuses representin order the condi 
tion of my receiving apparatus when currents 
1, 2, 3, and 4 are upon the line. P R repre 
sent, generally, a polarized relay, the details 
of which will be hereinafter explained. This 
relay is provided with the almature C, which 
may be considered to be supported at the end of 
a flexible spring about its middle-that is, be 
tween the contact-points 2 and 3 shown. This 
armature is also supposed to have a tendency 
to move at its Center toward the contact-Screw 
2, but to have no tendency to revolve about 
its axis by reason of any spring, the pressure 
toward 2 being adjustable by some convenient 
means. The polarized relay is provided with 
four contact-points, 1, 2, 3, and 4, as shown, 
and the end of the al'mature between the poles 
of the magnetis constantly polarized by a suit 
able arrangement. The distance between the 
ends of the armature and the point 2 should 
be equal, while the distance between 2 and the 
end of the armature should be three times 
greater than the distance between 2 and 4. 
Two receiving-instruments or polarized sound 
ers, P S and PS, are shown. Of these, P S is 
a differentially-wound sounder. This sounder 
may either have a single coil upon each leg 
differentially connected, as shown, or may be 
arranged as shown in Fig.22, having two wires 
wound side by side around each pole and dif 
ferentially connected, as shown. Two local 
batteries are provided, l l and I 
b', having 
their poles reversed, as shown. Wires from 
the positive and negative poles of these bat 
SO 
85 
95 
OO 
I IO 
I 25 
2s 1,249 
Io 
25 
3 5 
45 
55 
teries respectively join at m, whenee they pass 
through P.S., thence to the point in, where the 
circuit divides, one part going through each of 
the coils of PS, whence the branch a leads to 
the contact-point 3 and the branch y to the 
contact-point 2. The polarized relay P R is 
so wound and so connected with the main line. 
as that a negative current tends to draw the 
lower end toward the pole P, and as the po 
tential rises the tendency of the said lower end | 
is to move toward the poleR'. Therefore, when 
current 1 is upon the line, the armature G is in 
the position shown in Fig. 17. In this position 
the lower end, L', is strongly drawn toward the 
pole P'. The armature C therefore rests, as 
shown, against the contact-point 4, and the at 
traction of the pole P being sufficient, it rests 
also, as shown, against the screw 3, overcom 
ing, therefore, the tendency of the spring to 
move it toward the point 2. In this condition 
of affairs battery lb has no circuit. There be 
ing no contact at screw L, the current of bat 
tery lib' passes through P. S., and tends to 
hold the armature of the same against its back 
contact. Thence the circuit passes by point 
in to the right coil of PS, which sounder is so 
wound as to cause its armature to rest against 
its back contact when a current passes through 
the branch nac. Thence the current of lib' passes 
by wire a to point 3, through armature to point 
4, and so back to battery. In this condition, 
therefore, when current I is to line, both PS 
and P S are on their rest-contact. Let us now 
suppose current 2 to be caused to flow upon 
the line. The attraction of pole P to the end 
of the armature L is now lessened, and the 
spring therefore takes effect upon the arma 
ture C and moves its center away from contact 
3 against contact 2, the armature pivoting 
against contact 4, and said armature will re 
main against contacts 4 and 2 until some other 
variation in the current occurs. In this con 
dition battery lb is still cut off; but the cir 
cuit of battery lib' has now been shifted from 
branch ac of sounder P S to branch gy of the 
same, and the current of lib' therefore passes 
through point 4, point 2, branch y, to point 
in and m, as before. The direction of the cur 
rent through P S being unaltered, that 
sounder remains as before; but the current 
being caused to flow through the other branch 
of PS, that sounder has its polarity reversed, 
and its armature is shown pressing against its 
working-contact. The sounder PS, therefore, 
has responded to the closure of the key K'. 
Suppose, now, a further increase of potential to 
occur, and current 3 to flow upon the line. In 
this case the movement of the end L of the 
armature C continues to the right, or toward 
the pole R, and the end L therefore leaves 
the screw 4, while the end L comes in contact 
with the screw I. The circuit of L'B' is there 
by opened, and l b is thrown into action. 
Therefore a negative current flows by junction 
in through sounder P' S, and closes said 
sounder; but the direction of flow from point 
in through P S and branch gy having now been 
SO 
95 
reversed, the armature of PS falls back into 
the position shown. Therefore, in this case, 
sounder P S responds to the closure of the 
key K", while the key K" being open or at rest, 
the sounder P S is also at rest. Let us now 
suppose current 4 being sent over the line. 
In this case, the polarized relay P R causes 
the lower end, L, of the armature to move still 75 
farther toward the pole R, the middle part of 
said armature, leaving its contact with point 
2, and making its contact with point 3 by piv 
oting at its end L against Screw-contactI. Af. 
ter this operation, the current flows through 
PS in the same direction as before; but the 
current through P S has been shifted from the 
branch gy to the branch ac, thereby, as before 
explained, reversing the polarity in said 
sounder, and moving the armature of P S 
against its Working-contact. In this condi 
tion, therefore, when both keys K K are 
closed, polarized sounders P S and P S are 
also closed, or in the position of work. The 
armatures of the sounders P S and P S have c 
no tendency to leave the stops against which 
they rest, except as they may be moved by re 
versals of local current. 
It will be of course understood that where I 
have spoken of the attraction of pole Pupon 
the armature C,' I have referred to the mutual 
action of the poles P. R. upon the lower end 
of said polarized armature L. 
In Fig. 21 is shown a variation in which the 
sounder P S is removed and an additional 
polarized relay, PR, is inserted in the circuit. 
The ordinary sounder, S, operated by the local 
battery , is connected to this polarized re 
lay. This relay is so adjusted that its arma 
ture closes only when currents 3 or 4 is 
upon the line. When currents 1 or 2 is 
upon the line, its armature rests against its 
back contact. In certain circumstances both 
the arrangements of Fig. 17 and of Fig. 21 
may be combined, and the sounder S may be 
used as a repeater, &c. In this case the sound 
er PS" (shown in Fig. 17) would occupy a 
position in the line between the points m, n, 
Fig. 21. 
In Fig. 23 is shown another modification, in 
which the sounder to be operated by currents 
3 and 4 is effected by an independent local bat 
tery, , the circuit of which is made and broken 
by a sliding spring-contact. In this arrange 
ment the armature C is provided with the 
Spring g, bearing upon the plate hi, One half 
of which, h, is formed of a conducting-body, 
and the other half of an insulating-body. The 
circuits of the local sounder S and battery v. 
are plainly shown. Whenever the spring g is 
swung upon the plateh, the sounderSwill close. 
Substantially the same arrangement is shown 
in Fig. 24. The spring g is again used to close 
against the point h, whenever currents 3 or 4 
are upon the line. On long lines, in order to 
prevent any shattering or false signals, I pre 
fer to couple the receiving-sounder P S with 
a secondary receiving - sounder, P. S. Ar 
rangements for doing this are shown in Figs. 
O 
II5 
I25 
I3O 
IOO 
 
25,249 
IO 
3O 
45 
55 
25 and 26. By this arrangement the arma 
ture of sounder PS", which is the one used to 
receive by, never leaves the position where it 
happens to be until the sounder PS has com 
pleted its movement to the other point and 
closed the circuit there. The batteries at at 
in Fig.25 are relatively reversed, and the con 
nections are plainly shown. It will be obvi 
ous that the armature of the sounder PS might 
vibrate upon any of its two contact-points 
withgut disturbing the position of the alma 
ture of the sounder PS until it had completed 
its stroke to the other contact-point. In Fig. 
26 is shown another arrangement for accom 
plishing the same result in substantially the 
same way, the only difference being that here 
the sounder P S is differentially wound, in 
stead of using two batteries, as in the arrange 
lment shown in Fig. 25. These arrangements, 
however, I do not claim in my present applica 
tion, having made them the subject of an in 
dependent application heretofore filed. 
I will now describe the mechanical arrange 
ment of the receiving apparatus which I pre 
fer, although other forms might be used. 
I)":l Wings of two slightly-modified forms of 
such l'eceiving apparatus alre shown in Figs. 
3, 14, 15, 16, and 16, and, according to the 
simplest form, (which, however, is not the one 
I prefer to use,) the armature is supported on 
the upper end of a spring. This is shown in 
Figs. 11 and 12. A represents a vertical elec 
tro-magnet, between the upper poles of which 
the armature C vibrates. This armature is 
supported by a spring, e, which should con 
nect with it opposite the points 2 and 3. 
(Shown in Fig. 17.) The tendency of the spring 
e to move the amature toward the point 2 is 
determinable by the adjusting-screw f. The 
armature is pivoted on the upper end of the 
spring, as shown. The al'mature is itself mag 
netized, as are also the cores of the magnet A, 
by the permanent magnet M, the pole-piece or 
termination of which is shown at S', immedi 
ately over the pivot of the al'mature. This 
pole-piece should extend sufficiently on both 
sides across the width and over the pivot of 
said al'mature, so as to exert on it a practical 
ly-uniform influence in whatever position it 
may be while working. The end L of said 
armature may be made of non-magnetic nate 
rial, so as to not unnecessarily dissipate the 
magnetic force derived by induction from the 
pole-piece S. 
In Figs. 13 and 14 is shown a form of the 
practical construction of the said receiving 
magnet. In this case four coils, A. A. A. A., 
are shown. The armature C vibrates between 
the cores thereof, as shown. The method of 
supporting this armature is shown in Fig. 15. 
A light frame, a, is provided, which pivots in 
in the screws did. The armature C is sup 
ported upon the pivot c, which rotates within 
the frame a, as shown. Thereby the armature 
is allowed to rock, and also to be moved in 
either direction. Contact-points are provided, 
as before, the only difference being that two 
points, 3 3 are provided, which are con 
nected together, and in the same Way as point 
3 in Fig. 17. The frame (, with its armature 
C, is drawn toward the point 2 by the springs, 
adjustable by the thumb-piece l. The perma 
ment magnets for magnetizing the cores and 
the armature are shown plainly in Fig. 14, and 
are generally two horseshoe-magnets, uniting 
at the point S. In Fig. 13 the view is taken 
from below, except that the frame ( and the 
spring shave been omitted for clearness. The 
cores and coils supported tupon it are made 
adjustable by the screws H. These screws are 
mounted on yokes V, which connect the back 
ends to the cores of the magnets A A A. A. 
These cores are longitudinally slotted, and are 
prevented from rotating by guides in the yokes 
Springs N are provided for forcing the 
W. 
cores forward, and can be withdrawn by the 
screws H. In this manner an exact adjust 
ment of the contact-points 1 2 3 4 relatively to 
the poles of the magnets may be obtained. 
In Figs. 16 and 16 is shown a slight modi 
fication of the receiving-instrument shown in 
Figs. 13, 14, and 15. The illmature is mounted 
as before. The contact-points 1, 2, 3, and 4 
are mounted upon angle-supports sliding in 
the frames by the sides of the coils. They are 
thus carried in immediate proximity to the 
ends of the magnet-cores, so as to necessitate 
the least possible movement of the armature 
in making and breaking the circuit. These 
contact-points are supported in frames N' 
and in the ears X. They are made longi 
tudinally adjustable by screws J in frames 
N'. The contact-point 2 is mounted on the 
end of the screw k, also suppported in said 
frame. It will of course be understoodl that 
the points 1, 2, and 4 are insulated from each 
other and connected as shown in IFig. 17. The 
magnet-cores are made adjustable by screw's 
4, as before, and the al'mature and magnet 
cores are magnetized by the double-circuit 
magnets MM, which are in this case placed 
at right angles to the magnets M. M., (shown in 
Figs. 13 and 14,) thereby improving the gen 
eral appearance and efficiency of the appara 
tus and making the adjustments more acces 
It will of course be understood, that in 
sible. 
this case as well, the contact-point 3 (shown in 
Fig. 17) has merely been divided into two 
points, 33, for the purpose of regulating the 
play of the armature, and that these points are 
connected together, making, in fact, but one 
connection. 
It is plain that though my apparatus is de 
scribed as a diplex telegraph it can be quad 
ruplexed in the well-known ways for duplex 
ing diplex telegraphs. It is plain, likewise, 
that when I have indicated in my specifica 
tion or claims the use of a battery-current of 
one name a battery-current of the opposite 
name might be used, provided the poles of the 
batteries of the entire system are reversed. 
I have used the words positive and nega 
SO 
90 
IOO 
TO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
2S1,249 
5 
- 
6. A telegraph-transmitter which consists 95 
5. The method herein shown of sending and 75 
tive' as explanatory words; but in all cases 
movement and to the greatest movement of 
the opposite poles could be used, subject to the 
potential in the same direction to receive one 
conditions I have just explained. 
set of signals, and which responds to an inter 
I do not limit myself to the exact forms of 
. 
mediate and to the greatest movement of po- 7o 
5 transmitting or receiving apparatus shown, 
tential to receive the other set of signals, which 
provided my new system of diplex transmis 
intermediate condition of potential does not 
sion be carried into effect by such modified 
cause the apparatus to respond to the first set 
apparatus. 
of signals. 
I do not abandon or dedicate to the public 
Io any patentable features set forth herein and 
receiving two series of signals sent in the same 
not hereinafter claimed, but reserve the right 
direction at the same time, which consists in 
directing currents of three different poten 
to claim the same either in a reissue or any 
patent that may be granted upon this appli 
tials, two of one polarity and one of another, 
cation, or in other applications for Letters 
upon the line by two independent transmitters, 8o 
Patent that I may make. 
either transmitter causing a movement of po 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
tential from the potential of the current normal 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
ly on the line in the same direction, one great 
er than the other, both transmitters together 
1. The method herein described of trans 
mitting two series of signals in the same direc 
causing the greatest movement of potential in 85 
20 tion, which consists in directing three differ 
the same direction, and in receiving said in 
dependent series of signals by an apparatus 
ent currents of different potentials, two of one 
polarity and one of the opposite polarity, to 
which responds to the lowest movement and 
the line by two independent transmitters, the 
to the greatest movement of potential from 
operation of either transmitter singly causing 
the normal current to receive one set of sig. 9o 
a movement of potential from the potential of 
mals, which responds to an intermediate and 
the current normally on the line in the same 
to the greatest movement of potential to re 
direction, one greater than the other, and both 
ceive the other set of signals, substantially as 
transmitters together causing a still greater 
described. 
movement of potential always in the same di 
rection, substantially as described. 
of two independent circuit-preserving pole 
changing transmitters connected together by 
2. The method herein described of trans 
mitting two series of signals in the same direc 
a single connection between the keys, over 
tion, which consists in causing three different 
which all the currents flowing on the line pass, 
potentials to exist upon the line by two inde 
each transmitter controlling an independent IOO 
pendent transmitters, either transmitter caus 
main battery, one of which batteries is greater 
ing a movement of potential from the poten 
than the other, substantially as described. 
7. A receiving telegraphic apparatus pro 
tial of the current normally on the line in the 
Same direction, one greater than the other, 
vided with an armature which is pivoted or 
. 
and both transmitters together causing a still 
supported so as to move toward and away from Io5 
4o greater movement of potential always in the 
the attracting-magnet, and also to rotate or 
same direction, the said potential varying by 
oscillate around its axis of support, and two 
the action of the transmitters from negative to 
or more electrical contact-points against which 
positive, substantially as described. 
the armature is carried, according to the po 
tential and polarity of the current, substan- I IO 
3. The method herein described of trans 
mitting two series of signals in the same direc 
tially as described. 
8. A receiving telegraph-instrument pro 
tion, which consists in causing three different 
potentials to exist upon the line by two inde 
vided with an armature centrally pivoted or 
pendent transmitters, either transmitter caus 
supported, so as to Oscillate or rotate around its 
ing a movement of potential from the poten 
axis of support, and with two or more elec- I I5 
So tial of the current normally on the line in the 
trical contact-points at one side, with which 
same direction, one greater than the other, 
said armature makes electrical connection at 
and both transmitters together causing a still 
different points of its movement, substantially 
greater movement of potential always in the 
as described. 
same direction, the said potential varying by 
the action of the transmitters from negative to 
vided with a rocking armature and the local 
positive, said total variation being the total 
circuit arrangement shown, which is provided 
variation of potential which the battery used 
with two local batteries and a differentially 
is capable of affording, substantially as de 
wound polarized sounder, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
scribed. 
6O 4. In a diplex telegraph, the method shown 
10. The combination, in a diplex telegraph 
of receiving two independent series of signals 
with the same receiving-instrument, of a sin 
gly-wound sounder and a differentially-wound 
which are transmitted by currents varying in 
potential from some negative to some positive 
sounder, with the batteries and connections 
degree, or vice versa, which consists in caus 
shown, whereby either one coil or the other of I3O 
ing the reception of one series of signals by the differentially-wound sounder is alternately 
an apparatus which responds to the lowest put in connection with and made a part of the 
9. The combination of a receiving-relay pro- I2O 
I 25 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
'S,249 
arranged electro-magnets, the cores of which 
are polarized by two permanent magnets, the 
poles of Said permanent magnets uniting to 
form a directing-magnet in immediate prox 
imity to the armature, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
17. An armature for electro-magnetic in 
struments, which consists of a pivoted frame 
allowing the motion of the armature to and 
from the electro-magnet, and an armature piv 
oted in said frame at right angles to the piv 
oted support of the said frame, thereby allow 
ing the armature to oscillate, substantially as 
described. 
1S. The receiving telegraphic instrument 
shown, which consists of two pairs of opposite 
magnets and a central armature, pivoted so as 
to vibrate and to oscillate, the said armature 
making contact with five electric connections, 
three being located on one side of said arma 
ture and two on the other, the said independ 
ent connections being electrically connected, 
Substantially as described. 
19. The receiving telegraphic apparatus 
shown, which consists of four electro-magnetic 
coils and cores, an intermediate vibrating and 
Oscillating armature, the said cores being all 
magnetized with the same magnetism by a 
double permanent magnet arranged in line 
with the armature and projecting over said 
armature, so as to determine the position of 
the same, Substantially as described. 
20. The combination of a receiving polar 
ized telegraphic relay provided with an ar 
mature which both rocks and vibrates with 
an independent polarized soundler for receiv 
ing the messages transmitted, substantially as 
described. 
GEORGES DIN FREVILLE. 
Witnesses: 
ANTHONY GREF, Jr., 
GEO. H. EW ANS. 
45 
5 5 
75 
SO 
O 
15 
25 
circuit running through the singly-wound 
sounder, substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
11. In a diplex or quadruplex telegraph, 
the combination of a single relay and its ar 
mature having three or more contact-points 
and circuits, substantially as described, with 
two polarized receiving-instruments, each of 
which receives an independent series of sig 
mals, substantially as described. 
12. The combination, in a telegraph receiv 
ing-relay, of a suspended polarized armature, 
capable of lateral movement, three or more 
electrical points with which the armature 
makes contact, and circuits, substantially as de 
scribed, and a permanent magnet-pole placed 
over the armature, so as to aid in maintaining 
or Supporting the same normally in a central 
position, Substantially as described. 
13. The combination of a polarized arma 
ture pivoted or supported so as to move lat 
erally, and also to oscillate around a support, 
electrical contact-points, and an overhanging 
magnet adapted to normally aid in maintain 
ing said armature in a central position, sub 
stantially as described. 
14. The combination, in a receiving tele 
graphic instrument, of an electro-magnet, an 
arnature centrally suspended, a single per 
manent magnet connected with the core of the 
electro-magnet, so as to magnetize the same, 
and also projecting with its poles over the ar 
mature for the purpose of determining the po 
sition of the same, and contacts, substantially 
as described, for the purpose specified. 
15. The receiving telegraphic instrument 
herein described, which consists of four elec 
tro-magnetic poles, two of them arranged on 
each side of a rocking and vibrating armature, 
substantially as and for the purposes de 
Scribed. 
16. The receiving telegraphic instrument 
herein shown, which consists of two oppositely 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281349.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
T. A. EDIS ON . 
REGULATOR FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES, 
No. 281,349. 
Patented July 17, 1883. 
(867e.al, 
2.72. 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
REGULATOR FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES, 
T. A. EDIS ON, 
No. 281,349, 
Patented July 17, 1883, 
 
ATTEST 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington. D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS A. EDISON, OF MENLO PARK, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
EDISON ELECTRIC LIGHT COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
REGULATOR FOR DYNAMO - ELECTRIC MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,849, dated July 17, 1883. 
Application filed January 22, 1883. (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, THOMAS A. EDISON, of 
Menlo Park, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Regulating Electric 
Generators, (Case No. 540,) of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to the regulation of 
dynamo or magneto electric generators when 
a number of such generators are placed at a 
Central station to supply current to the trans 
lating devices of a system. Each of such gen 
erators has its field-magnet coils in a circuit 
independent of the field-circuits of the other 
generators, and in each field-circuit is placed 
an adjustable resistance to regulate the gen 
eration of current according to the number of 
translating devices in circuit in the district 
Supplied; and a portion of my invention con 
sists in providing means whereby all such re 
sistances may be adjusted simultaneously and 
to the same extent, it being necessary to do 
this because all such generators feed into the 
same circuit or system of circuits, so that all 
should have the same electro-motive force. 
The object of the second part of my inven 
tion is to provide adjustable resistances for 
use in the field - circuits of the generators, 
which can be adjusted gradually and in the 
proper proportion, and shall be so formed that 
the conducting area of the resistance-coils shall 
be proportioned to the amount of current flow 
ing in the circuit that is, when but little re 
sistance is placed in the circuit and a com 
paratively large current is passing the con 
ducting area of the resistance thrown in will 
be correspondingly large, and as more resist 
ances are thrown in and the current decreases 
the conducting area of such resistances will 
decrease correspondingly. By this means the 
heating of the coils is prevented, as there is 
always sufficient area to convey the current 
which passes. I accomplish this by providing 
a number of resistance-boxes of gradually-di 
minishing conducting capacity and means for 
successively throwing them into circuit. Such 
boxes preferably consist each of an insulating 
frame upon which are wound wire coils. Each 
box is provided with three binding-posts, and 
the coils on said box are separately connected 5o 
to all of said binding-posts, so that such coils . 
are divided into two parts in multiple-arc re 
lation to each other. Suitable connections are 
made between the boxes, as will be explained. 
A commutator is provided having an adjust- 55 
ing-arm connected in the circuit, and from 
each commutator-plate a wire runs to one of 
the binding-posts of a resistance-box. Pref 
erably, to connect the adjusting arm in the cir 
cuit, a ring is provided, upon which said arm 6o 
bears in its revolution, a wire of the circuit 
being connected to said ring. The connec 
tions between the boxes and from the boxes to 
the commutator-plates are so made that when 
it is first commenced to throw resistance into 65 
the circuit several coils in multiple arc will 
be thrown in, so that sufficient current-carry 
ing area is provided. As more coils are thrown 
in the number in multiple arc with each other 
is lessened, until finally coils are thrown in in 7o 
series one after another. 
To allow a still fur 
ther graduation, some of the boxes are Wound 
with two, some with three, and some with four 
strands of wire, and the different kinds are alr 
ranged so that they will be thrown in at the 75 
proper times. 
The above will be better understood by ref. 
erence to the drawings, in which Figure 1 is a 
view mostly in diagram, representing the re 
sistances in the field-circuits of two generators 8o 
and means for regulating them simultaneously; 
Fig. 2, a diagram illustrating the resistance 
connections; Fig. 3, an elevation of one of the 
resistance-boxes, with part of the coils in dot 
ted lines; and Fig. 4, a top view of the same. 85 
Referring to Fig. 1, AA represent dynamo 
electric machines having their armatures in 
multiple-arc circuits b c from the main circuit 
BB. The field-magnets of the machines are 
each connected in a multiple-arc circuit, de, 9o 
from said main circuit. Eachfield-circuit con 
tains an adjustable resistance, C, consisting of 
wire coils,ff, connected to commutator-plates 
g g. A pivoted arm, h, makes contact with 
the plates g, and is also constantly in contact 95 
with a metal ring, i, which ring is connected 
in the circuit, a flat spring being preferably 
attached to the under side of said alm to in 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
2S1349 
ing thrown in with each successive commuta 
to-plate until plate No. 14 is reached. The 
passage from plate No. 13 to No. 14 throw's ill 
in multiple arc to each other half of each of the 
two boxes L and M, this being done because 
the current has now lecreased. So fall that the 
current-carrying capacity may be diminished. 
In order, however, that the change may be 
made gradual, the boxes L and M are wound, 
as indicated, with four instead of three strands 
of No. 19 wire. Beginning with plate No. 1S, 
halves of two boxes of threestlands are used, 
this continuing as far as plate No. 27. From 
plate No. 2S to No. 33, inclusive, halves of 
two boxes of two stands cach are used. With 
plate No. 34 half a box of three stands is 
thrown in in series, and this continues to plate 
No. 45. With 46 to 57 half-boxes of two 
Strands Cach alre thrown in in Series. 
I do not confine myself, of course, to the 
particular number of plates Ol' of boxes and 
coils shown, or to the especial arrangement and 
connections of Such plates and coils. 
I have, 
however, shown an efficient arrangement for 
accomplishing my object-that is, to SO coin 
struct an adjustable resistance that the resist 
ances filst thrown into Cilcuit will be of CO1)- 
paratively great conducting capacity, While 
those afterward thrown in gradually decrease 
in this respect. 
What I clainn is 
1. The combination of two or more dynamo 
or magneto electric machines, each laving its 
independent field - circuit, with an adjustable 
resistance in each of said field - circuits, and 
lmeans for adjusting all of Said lesistances si 
multaneously, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of two or more dynamo 
or magneto electuric machines, a resistance in 
the field-circuit of each machine, an arm for 
adjusting each resistance, and means for nov 
ing all such arms simultaneously, substantially 
as Set forth. 
3. A rheostat composedl of a series of 'esist 
ance-boxes connected together in multiple are 
and series, as described and shown, in (onli 
nation with commutatoir-plates to which such 
boxes are connected, and an adjusting-an, 
substantially as set forth. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
13th day of January, ISS3. 
II IOS. A. E.) IS) N. 
Witnesses: 
H. W. SEELY, 
EIWARD II. IS ATT. 
SO 
OO 
95 
IOO 
25 
IO 
n' 
sure good contact. The movement of the arm 
I, thus varics the resistance of the Circuit. 
Each arm h is placed on a shaft, l, which, for 
convenience, is shown in dotted lines, and both 
5 shafts l are turned by means of bevel-geal's j 
j', the gears j being on a shaft, D, which is 
turned by a hand-wheel, E. A dial, k, is pro 
vided, and a pointer, k", is placed on the shaft 
D, whereby the amount of resistance in circuit 
is indicated. The turning of the hand-Wheel 
E varies the resistance of the field-circuits Of 
both generators. 
The resistance-boxes used are preferably of 
the form shown in Figs. 3 and 4, consisting of 
a wooden top, m, provided with three bind 
ing-posts, 
', Surrounding a frame, O O, 
(shown in dotted lines in Fig. 4.) the edges of 
each frame having grooves in which the coils 
are wound. Such coils are Would all'Ound the 
entire frame, and are connected to all the bind 
ing-posts, there being thus two sections of 
coils in amultiple-arc relation to each othel'. 
The wire used is preferably copper Wire No. 
19, B. W. G., and two, three, or four strands 
twisted together are used on the different boxes. 
Fig. 2 illustrates the preferred arrangement 
of the boxes. The commutatol-plates of 7 aire 
numbered, respectively, from 1 to 57. Wires 
p from binding-posts 
' ' extend to such 
plates, the connections to the plates being, fol' 
convenience, shown by placing the numbers 
at the ends of Said Wires. The clotted lines 
indicate the connections from box to box, the 
connections within the respective boxes not 
being shown, they being made as previously 
explained. When the adjusting-arm rests on 
plate No. 1, which is connected with binding 
post in of box G, it is evident that no resist 
ance is in circuit, the current passing directly 
from binding-post of box F to that of box 
G; but on Swinging the adjusting-alian to plate 
No. 2, which, as indicated, is connected with 
post n of box G, the current will pass through 
half the coils of each of the boxes FG. H., such 
halves being in multiple arc to each other. 
Thus while resistance is placed in circuit suffi 
cient conducting area is provided for the 
large amount of current which so small a re 
sistance allows to pass. The boxes mentioned 
are each wound With three Strands of No. 9 
wire, as indicated. When plate No. 3 is con 
nected, all the coils of boxes F. G. Hare in cir 
cuit in multiple are to each other. No. 4 adds 
half of each of the boxes I, J, and K, and this 
continues, half of each set of three boxes le 
55 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281449.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 281,449, 
W. CARTER, 
GAS REGULATOR. 
Patented July 17, 1883. 
  
 
 
 
EN NSN 
2 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM CARTER, OF OLDHAM, COUNTY OF LANCASTER, ENGLAND. 
GAS-REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,449, dated July 17, 1883. 
Application filed April 23, 1883. (No model. Iatented in England May 27, 1881, No. 2,343, 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM CARTER, of 
Oldham, in the county of Lancaster, England, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
5 ments in Gas-Regulators, (for which I have 
, obtained a patent in Great Britain, No. 2,343, 
bearing date May 27, 1881,) of which the fol 
lowing is a Specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Io gas-regulators which have troughs containing 
mercury for a seal for the gas around the edge 
of an inverted cup or float; and the objects of 
my invention consist, in the first place, of an 
improvement in the form of valves for con 
I5 trolling the flow of gas, known as equilibri 
um-valves, having reference to a combina 
tion of Valves and valve-seats of such form 
that the motion or pressure of the gas passing 
through the valve-seats shall have no tend 
2O ency to open or close or retard the opening or 
closing of the valves; and also in making one 
valve in the combination of such shape as will 
prevent the least tendency of the valves to 
stick in the seat, and the other valve so shaped 
25 as to be a guide to the valve-spindle and float, 
at the same time that the shape of both valves 
is SO arranged as to provide a proportionate 
opening for the passage of the gas with a rela 
tive amount of drop of float. 
The second part of my invention provides 
for a defect in pressure-regulators with a mer 
cury-seal which arises through a cup or float 
being immersed to different depths in the mer 
cury, thereby causing a continually-altering 
35 Weight upon the float, which should be uni 
form. To correct this provide an accelerat 
ing weighting contrivance, formed, by prefer 
ence, of a pivoted lever, the vertical arm of 
which is weighted, and the horizontal arm 
4o rests on or is connected to the valve-spindle, 
so that as the float falls a greater weight is 
thrown upon it, and as it rises the Weight is 
automatically taken off the float and support 
ed by the pivot. 
The third part of my invention has for its 
object making the regulator gas-safe in case of 
accident to the float, or when the mercury, by 
accident, oxidation, or otherwise, gets below 
its proper level, in which case, in regulators 
So hitherto made, the gas would escape around 
the lip of the float, and so might cause a dan 
45 
gerous explosion. I prevent this by contract 
ing the aperture which supplies gas to the float 
to a small opening around the valve-spindle, 
and fixing upon the spindle a washer or disk 55 
which shall (when the float by any of the 
causes above named is not supported by the 
pressure of gas) rest upon the contracted open 
ing, and so far close it that no dangerous es 
Cape of gas can take place. 
The fourth part of my invention has for its 
object the prevention of spilling of mercury, 
either outside of the governor or into the gas 
paSSages. 
I attain these objects by the mechanism 65 
a 
75 
illustrated in the accompanying sheet of draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation, partly in section, 
of the gas-regulator; and Fig. 2 is a detached 
view of the valve-spindle e and valves eande. 7o 
a is the shellor case of a gas-regulator, formed 
of metal or other suitable material, which con 
tains the valves and valve-seatings and forms 
the ingressa and egress a for the gas. On the 
shell a is fitted the circular plate b, through 
the opening in which the gas passes to the float 
or cup c. The floate has a removable weight, 
c, placed upon it. The rim of this float rests in 
mercury contained in a trough or channel in 
the annular casting d, which is screwed to the So 
shell at and secures the plate b. To prevent 
the mercury spilling I make the two sides of 
the channel for the mercury of different heights, 
the inner side, d, being the higher, and I 
curve the outer side outward and upward, so 85 
as to form a relief-space, k, running round the 
outer edge of the channel, below the level of 
its inner side, d. The annular relief-space k, 
thus formed, is above the trough containing the 
mercury, and exteriorthereto. When the reg- go 
ulator is turned upon its side, the mercury fills 
the relief-space ic, and is thereby prevented 
from running into the inner part of the regu 
lator, and so into the gas-pipes. 
equilibrium-valvese' ande". Thefloat disfixed 
to the valve-spindle e and can rise or fall quite 
freely with it. I make the upper valve, e, of 
such shape as will prevent the least tendency 
of the valves to stick in the seat, and for this IOO 
purpose I find that the sides of the upper valve 
should each form an angle of about forty de 
e is the valve-spindle, on which are fixed the 95 
2S1,449 
O 
25 
35 
55 
65 
75 
The lower or guide of gas is increased by a greater number of 
lights being brought into use, the pressure is 
for the moment reduced under the float c, 
which then falls, opens the valves e and e, and 
allows the required quantity of gas to flow 
through. Whenever a reduction is made in 
the number of lights used, the consumption of 
gas decreases and the pressure under the 
float c increases, thereby causing it to rise and 
cut off excess pressure by partially closing the 
valves e' and e, thus tending to equalize the 
pressure of gas at the burners, to maintain a 
steady light, and lessen the consumption of 
gas. I thus obtain a regulator so highly sen 
sitive that if one hundred and ninety-nine 
lights out of two hundred lights governed were 
to be suddenly turned off the one remaining 
light would show no increase of pressure. 
Having stated the nature of my invention 
and described the manner of performing the 
same, what I desire to claim, and secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a gas-regulator, the valve-spindle e 
and the tapering valves e' and e, attached 
thereto, in combination with upper and lower 
valve-seats, the upper valve having a greater 
inclination than the lower valve, and the lat 
ter serving as a guide, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. In a gas-regulator, the combination of a 
valve-spindle, a float attached thereto, and a 
mercury-trough, into which the edge of said 
float dips, as stated, with a lever, g, having 
one end arranged to bear against the top of 
said spindle, and a weight, ty, attached to said 
level, above the pivot thereof, and operating 
to force said end of the lever downward with 
increasing pressure as the float and spindle 
descend, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a gas-regulator, the combination of 
float c and valve-spindle e with washer i, se 
cured to said spindle between the float and the 
opening in the plate below, through which the 
gas passes to act on said float, substantially 
as Set forth. 
The foregoing specification of my improve 
ments in gas-regulators signed by me this 12th 
day of April, 1883. 
grees with the spindle. 
valve, e, is made to taper less than the upper 
valve, e, so as to be a guide for the valve 
spindle e and float c, and for this purpose I find 
that the sides should each form an angle of 
about twenty degrees with the spindie. The 
lower valve, e", is fixed, so that its upper side 
cannot fall below the level of its seating. This 
is to insure its acting as a guide to the valve 
spindle at all times. A disk or Washer, i, Sur 
rounds spindle e just below float c, and closes 
the opening in platel whenever said float, de 
scends sufficiently. Of course this closing 
action takes place. Sooner than if there were 
nothing between said plate and said float, and 
said disk therefore affords a guard against the 
escape of gas under the edges of the fioat, or 
through a fracture in the same. This closing 
is almost instantaneous. When Such facture or 
the giving out of the mercury in the trough 
allows the gas to escape from space j. A 
weighted lever, ty, is pivoted at h' to a projec 
tion on the cross-stay or bridgeh, in which is a 
hole to serve as a guide for the valve-spindle 
e. The cross-stay his fixed on projections on 
the casting d. h" is a projection on the cross 
stay h, which forms a stop for the arm gy, and 
prevents the Weight of from Swinging over its 
center. It is the relief-Space, which extends 
round the casting d, which is connected to the 
top piece, d", which forms part of the relief. 
space, into which the mercury runs should the 
regulator be turned on its side during transit, 
or when being fixed in its place. 
My improved regulator may be made of 
metal or other material, and the float and mer 
cury-channel may be enameled, or may be made 
of glass or earthenware, and the shape may 
be varied, if desired. 
When the gas is admitted at (t", it passes the 
valves e' and e and out at (t. Some of the 
gas enters the chamber j above by passing 
through the opening in the plate b and under 
the disk or washer i, fills the chamber j and 
lifts the float c and valve-spindlee, if the press 
ure be sufficiently great. As the float c is 
lifted it raises the arm of of the weighted lever 
o, thereby throwing the weight on the full 
crum, and thus lessening the pressure on the 
valve-spindle e as the float c is raised farther 
out of the mercury, so that an equal or nearly 
equal weight bears upon the spindle c, to what 
ever depth the rin of the float c is immersed 
in the mercury. Whenever the consumption 
H. B. BARLOW, 
S. WALKEY GILLETT, 
Both of 4 Mansfield Chambers, 17 St. Ann's 
Square, Manchester. 
WILLIAMI CARTER. 
Witnesses: 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281549.txt	(No Model) 
W. NACK, 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
No. 281,549. 
Patented July 17, 1883. 
----- 
  
 
 
2 2% 
% 
 
WITNESSES 
4, 22% 
 
 
INVENTOR 
42, -2. 
26% 
ATTORNEY 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM NACK, OF SHEBOYGAN, WISCONSIN. 
FIRE - ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,549, dated July 17, 1883. 
Application filed March 7, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
To all uhon, it notty concern : 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM NACK, of She 
boygan, in the county of Sheboygan and State 
of Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Fire-Escapes, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention has reference to animproved 
fire-escape of that class in which a steel band 
is used in connection with a winding-drum and 
a brake mechanism, which latter controls the 
unwinding of the steel band in descending from 
the building; and the invention consists of a 
steel band that is wound upon a center spin 
dle of a drum and passed to the outside be 
tween clamping-cheeks of the drum. The 
cheeks are applied to the band by a wedge 
piece and an eccentric on a band-wheel shaft. 
A suspension-hook is applied to the end of the 
steel band and released by means of a spring 
and cord connected to the pivot of the hook 
from the band when the person has arrived on 
the ground, the cord being then wound up si 
multaneously with the winding up of the steel 
band, as will more fully appear hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1rep 
resents a side view, partly in section, and Fig. 
2 an end view, partly in vertical transverse 
section, of my improved fire-escape; and Fig. 
3 is a detail top view of the clamping mech 
amism of the steel band. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
ponding parts. 
In the drawings, A represents a circular cas 
ing or drum of suitable size and strength, which 
is attached by a strong ring, b, to a snap 
hook, or other device on a leather belt, which 
is passed around the breast of the person 
desiring to escape. A steel band, B, of suit 
able size and length, is applied at its inner 
end to the transverse spindle a of the drum A 
and wound up around the spindle by a crank 
handle, a?, applied to the square outer end of 
the spindle. The steel band Bispassed through 
between clamping-cheeks BB, that are formed 
integral with and radially extending from the 
circular wall of the drum A. 
To one clamping-cheek B is applied a U 
shaped frame, C, which passes alongside of the 
cheeks B'B', and supports in bearings, at its 
outer ends, a transverse shaft, e, to which the 
band-wheels e'e' are applied. The transverse 
shaft e is provided at that portion between the 
frame C with an eccentric cam, f, that bears 
on an intermediate Wedge-piece,f, placed side 
wise of the inner cheek B. The wedge-piece 55 
f' has a screw-threaded shank, f, that passes 
through a bridge-piece, f', of the U-shaped 
frame C. The shank is engaged by a screw 
nut, f, that turns by a collar in the bridgef 
and bears by a shoulder at itslower end on the 
under side of the bridge, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The wedge piece f' is set higher or lower by 
the nut.f, so as to apply the second clamping 
cheek B to the steel band, which is set suffi 
ciently tight that the pressure of the cheeks 
with the steel band is capable of resisting the 
weight of an average person. When the eccen 
tric shaft is applied to the wedge-piece, the 
clamping-cheeks are rigidly locked to the steel 
band, and thereby a greater weight suspended 7O 
therefrom. By slightly releasing the brake, a 
slow descending motion is imparted to the per 
son suspended from the steel band. By en 
tirely releasing it, the descent can be made 
with greater speed. 
To the exterior end of the steel band B is 
riveted a fork-shaped end piece, D, to which a 
suspension-hook, D, is pivoted by a detachable 
pivot, g. A spring-strap,g', is riveted at its 
lower end to the end piece, D, applied back of 8o 
the pivot-ping, so as to engage the head of the 
same, and connected at its outer ring-shaped 
end to a releasing-cord, g, which is of the same 
length as the steel band B. The cord g is 
wound up on a reel, g, that is placed on the 
spindle a of the drum A at the end opposite 
to that to which the cranka'is applied. When 
the person who has lowered himself from the 
building by the fire-escape arrives at the 
round, the releasing-cord g is pulled, and 
thereby the pivot-pin g withdrawn from the 
hook D by the action of the spring-strap g. 
The steel band and cord are then wound up 
simultaneously by the turning of the crank a? 
and spindlea, the fire-escape being ready for 
use again after the insertion of another sus 
ension-hook. Before the steel band B and 
cord g are wound up, the clamping-cheeks B 
B have to be released by removing the eccen 
tric from the wedge-key f' and the latter from 
the inner cheek B, whereby the steel band is 
free to pass through between the clamping 
cheeks. 
The drum is provided at both sides with 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
2S 1549 
cast-iron caps, that are riveted down to the 
circumferential wall of the same, as shown in 
Fig. 1. The fire-escape is of compact form, 
and takes up but little room, so that it can be 
carried easily along by travelers in their 
trunks or valises, it being instantly ready for 
use when required. 
Iam aware that fire-escapes in which a drum, 
an unwinding steel band, and a brake device 
are employed are old and well known, and I 
do not claim the same, broadly. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with a winding-drum 
having clamping-cheeks, of a steel band pass 
ing through between the cheeks, a U-shaped 
frame applied to one cheek, an adjustable 
Wedge-piece acting upon the other cheek, and 
an eccentric cam that is adapted to engage or 
release the wedge-piece, So as to rigidly clamp 
or release the steel band, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. In a fire-escape, the combination, with a 
drum having clamping - cheeks extending 
therefrom, of a steel band passing through be 
tween the cheeks, a U-shaped frame applied to 
one cheek, a wedge-piece applied to the other 
cheek, means for adjusting the wedge-piece, 
O 
25 
3O 
35 
a band-wheel shaft turning in bearings of the 
U-shaped frame, and an eccentric on the band 
wheel shaft, substantially as specified. 
3. In a fire-escape, the combination of a 
drum, A, having a reel, f, on its spindle ct, a 
steel band, B, having a forked end piece, D, 
a suspension-hook, D', a detachable pivot-pin, 
g, a spring-strap, ty, connected to the pivot-pin, 
and a releasing-cord, g, connecting the Spring 
strap with the reel on the drum-spindle, so as 
to detach the suspension-hook and then wind 
up the releasing-cord and steel band, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. In a fire-escape composed of a winding 
drum, steel band, and brake device, the com 
bination of a suspension-hook applied to the 
fork-shaped end piece of the steel band, with 
a detachable pivot-pin, a spring-strap applied 
to the head of the pivot-pin, and releasing-cord 
applied to the end of the spring-strap, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres: 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM NACK. 
45 
Witnesses: 
AUGUST H. FRANCK, 
ANTON EXROPP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281649.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 281,649. 
E. T. THOMAS, 
SEWING MACHINE. 
Patented July 17, 1883. 
ES 
if 
SE ' 
 
WTN sists 
(?, O Olue. 
2e2/ (2-ee 
2 SS 
2. 
inven TuFr 
A laziz/ ZYZZwas 
A 67 vsky 6-e-, -7- 
vrr 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDDY T. THOMAS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE NEW HOME 
SEWING MACHINE COMPANY., OF ORANGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SEWING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,649, dated July 17, 1883. 
Application filed January 8, 1883. (No model.) 
- 
w 
IO 
25 
thread. 
To all, whom it. Inazy concern: 
Be it known that I, EDDY T. THOMAs, of 
New York, county of New York, and State of 
New York, have invented an Improvement in 
Sewing-Machines, of which the following de 
scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters on 
the drawings representing like parts. 
This invention in sewing-machines relates 
to improvements in mechanism for automati 
cally lifting the presser-foot while the needle 
is in the goods, and so that the needle may 
serve as a pivot for turning the goods while 
the feed is being lowered and moving back 
ward; also in mechanism for winding the bob 
bin and controlling the tension on the needle 
My improved presser-foot-lifting apparatus 
includes a lever having its fulcrum upon a lon 
gitudinally-adjustable screw-pin placed across 
the head of the machine, the said pin being 
made adjustable toward and from the center 
line of the head and the actuating-cam for 
the said lever, to thus control the throw of the 
lever and the extent of upward movement of 
the presser-foot, the said cam being carried 
by or made movable with the needle-bar-op 
erating shaft. 
The bobbin-winder contains a pivoted frame 
which holds the winding-spindle, and a spring 
O 
3 presser curved to fit the bobbin and its thread, 
and adapted to yield to the increasing diam 
eter of the thread and cause it to be wound 
The bobbin-wind 
smoothly upon the bobbin. 
35 er also has a device by which to effect the stop 
page of movement of the bobbin-winder when 
the bobbin has been filled. 
The tension device is composed of a grooved 
wheel and a stationary disk at one side of it, 
4O and suitable springs to regulate the force re 
quired to turn the said wheel or the pressure 
of the disk against the wheel, the wheel and 
disk being so arranged that the operator may, 
if desired, control the tension on the needle 
thread by winding it once about the wheeland. 
45 holding the wheel frictionally, or by pressure 
between the disk and wheel, as will be de 
Scribed. 
Figure 1 represents in side elevation a sew 
5o ing-machine embodying my invention, with 
the head partially broken away to the better 
show the presser-foot-lifting apparatus. Fig. 
2 shows the interior of the head-plate removed 
from the head of the machine, but with the 
presser-foot and its handlifting-lever in place. 55 
Fig. 3 shows the head of the machine with the 
head-plate removed. Fig. 4 is a detail, en 
larged, showing in cross-section the auxiliary 
presser-foot-lifting lever and the collar which 
carries its fulcrum, and also a part of the 6o 
screw-pin; Fig. 5, a plan or top view of the 
rear part of the machine shown in Fig. 1, to 
illustrate the bobbin-Winder; Fig. 6, a partial 
section of Fig. 5 on the dotted line aca, but en 
larged; Fig. 7, a rear side view of the disk of 65 
the main shaft, and Fig. 8 a detail of the ten 
sion device. 
The frame-work A of the machine, of any 
usual or suitable shape, has in its upper part 
the rotating needle-bar-operating shaft ca, on 7o 
which is placed the usual disk, b, provided with 
a crank-pin, b, to operate the needle-bar, as 
common in the Home sewing-machine. At 
the rear of the disk b is a cam, c, (shown in . 
dotted lines, Fig. 3, and in full lines, Fig. 7,) 75 
which at each rotation of the shafta, and while 
the needle of the machine (not shown) is in the 
cloth or material, strikes the upper end of an 
auxiliary presser-foot-lifting lever, d. This 
lever d has its fulcrum on a pin, d, extended 8o 
from a collar, d", placed, as shown in Fig. 4, 
on a reduced part, 2, of an adjustable screw-pin, 
e, extended transversely across the head of 
the machine, as in Fig. 3. The screw-pine has 
a shoulder (best shown in Fig. 4) to bear against 
the collar d' when it is desired to force the 
lever d toward the center of the head of the 
machine to enable the cam C to act upon and 
turn the lever d more or less, according to the 
position of the fulcrum d with relation to a 
vertical line let fall from the center of the 
shaft a. The screw-pin has at one end a screw 
thread, 3, which enters a threaded hole in the 
head, as in Fig. 3, and at the large end the said 
pin is slotted to be engaged by a screw-driver. 
The lower end of the lever d is curved to ex 
tend under and engage the pin 4 on the usual 
hand operated presser-lifting lever, f, so that 
each movement of the lever d in engagement 
with the said pin causes the lever f to be IOO 
- 
- 
85 
95 
pr 
2 
 
2S,619 
60 
65 
75 
85 
turned and its upper side to act upon the block 
(1, attached, as usual, to the presser-bar h, thus 
automatically lifting the said bar and its foot 
l? from and while the needle is in the cloth. 
5 The lever d might act directly upon a pin in 
serted in the presser-bar; but I prefer to have 
it act upon alpin in the leverf, to give leverage. 
The shaft a has upon it the usual belt-pulley, i, 
over which is passed the usual driving-belt, n, 
Io which acts against and turns the belt-pulley 
in on the spindle of the bobbin-winding de 
vice, the frame in of which is pivoted at 6, 
and which has one spring center, m, of usual 
construction, to hold between it and the spindle 
the shuttle-bobbin in and cause the latter to 
be revolved. 
In Fig. 6 the bobbin is shown as having 
some thread already wound upon it. The 
thread t is led from a spool, B, under a ten 
2O sion-spring, O, (see Fig. 5,) on a lever, o, piv 
oted at 0 on the frame of the machine, and 
adapted, when not in use, to be turned under 
the bed-plate. The thread is taken from the 
tension-spring 0 over the convexed end of the 
25 smoothing or presser spring p, fastened by 
screw p' to a fixed part, p", of the winder, the 
said spring being extended outward under the 
bobbin and up in front of the same, as in Figs. 
1, 5, and 6, and being provided with shoulders 
3o 7 to limit the traverse of the thread over the 
said convex surface. The concaved upper 
side of the spring fits closely against the thread 
on the bolbbin, causes it to be wound thereon 
in compact uniform layers, and yields to the 
35 increasing diameter of the mass of thread as 
it is wound on the bobbin. After the bobbin 
has been filled, the lower side of the spring p 
strikes the free end of the relieving device , 
made as a latch provided with a hook, '', and 
4o causes the hook to be drawn down below the 
cross-piece or projection " of the bobbin 
winder frame, permitting the said frame to 
turn toward the machine-arm, and so lessen 
the pressure of the wheel m' from the belt in 
The tension device for the needle-thread is 
composed essentially of a grooved wheel, s, on 
a spindle, s, and a thin metal disk, s'. One 
side of the wheel S is pressed against a spring, 
5O s, and the disks" is pressed against the other 
side of the said wheel, as in Fig. 8. On the 
spindles is a nut, s', by which to regulate the 
force required to turn the wheel, and also the 
amount of pressure between the disk and the 
The operator may pass the needle-thread 
once about the tension-wheels in its groove, 
and the latter will rotate on the spindle as the 
thread is drawn forward by, the needle or 
45 as to obviate turning the said wheel. 
55 said wheel. 
stitch-forming mechanism; but if the operator 
desires to regulate the tension by the pressure 
of a spring bearing directly upon the needle 
thread, then the needle-thread may be drawn 
between the disks" and the side of the wheel 
s. The wheel-tension is considered best by 
most operators; but some others, for certain 
classes of work and thread, prefer to use the 
disk-tension. 
I claim 
1. The auxiliary presser-foot-lifting lever d, 
having its fulcrum on the block d", and the 
longitudinally-adjustable screw-pin, and cam 
c to move the said lever, combined with and 
adapted to automatically lift the presser-foot 
from the material, substantially as described. 
2. The longitudinally-adjustable screw-pin 
provided with the shoulder, and inserted in the 
head of the machine transversely, and the main 
shaft (t, and a cam, c, moved by it, and the 
auxiliary presser-foot-lifting lever d, and the 
block d, and fulcrum for the said lever, com 
bined with the presser-foot, and intermediate 
connections between it and the said lever d to 
automatically lift the presser-foot, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The combination, with the bobbin-wind 
er frame having the fixed part p, of the spring 
p, fixed to said part, and projecting below and 
curved upward over the bobbin, and provided 
with the convex thread-guiding surface and 
shoulders 77, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
4. The bobbin-winder frame provided with 
the projection ", combined with the fixed 
thread-guiding spring p, the relieving device 
', and the hook '' on said relieving device to 
engage the projection by the descent of the 
Spring p consequent upon the filling of the 
bobbin to relieve the bobbin-windler from the 
rotary action of the machine-belt, substantially 
as shown and described. 
5. The combination, with the bobbin-wind 
er, of the lever 0, having the tension-spring o', 
and the machine-bed to which said lever is 
pivoted, and adapted to be concealed thereun 
der, Substantially as shown and described. 
6. The grooved tension-wheels and disks, 
and Spindle, combined with a spring and ad 
justing nut or device, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
Scribing witnesses. 
. 
EDDY T. THOMAS. 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL TARR, Jr., 
J. M. MONROE. 
95 
IOO 
IIO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281749.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 281,749. 
G, YELLOTT. 
HYDRAULIC RAM, 
Patented July 24, 1883. 
 
() & 
  
  
 
-WITNESSEE au 
/ Ala? 24 
6%(26444.6% 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE YELLOTT, OF TOWSON, MARYLAND. 
HYDRAULIC RAM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,749, dated July 24, 1888. 
Application filed September 11, 1882. 
No model.) 
IO 
15 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE YELLOTT, of 
Towson, in the county of Baltimore and State 
of Maryland, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Hydraulic Rams, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
To fully understand the nature of my pres 
ent invention it must be borne in mind that 
Water moving through the drive-pipe of a hy 
draulic ram and completely filling it acts like 
a Solid body, and that the power of the appa 
ratus is limited only by the length of the pipe, 
the velocity of the moving body of water, and 
the strength of the materials. 
The capacity of a Montgolfier ram is neces 
Sarily limited, in view of the main valve clos 
ing With a sudden collision against a solid sub 
stance-namely, the material surrounding the 
Valve - opening which constitutes the valve 
Seat. 
In my invention, as hereinafter described, 
the collision of the valve and seat is prevented; 
and in view of this a ram can be constructed 
to Work Satisfactorily, of any size or capacity, 
25 and a large body of water elevated as easily 
as a Small one. 
In carrying out my invention I provide the 
ram-chamber with, preferably, a cylindrical 
outlet-pipe, and construct a piston-valve to be 
automatically moved from within the ram 
chamber to the said outlet-pipe, its first posi 
tion allowing of the escape of the water enter 
ing the said chamber, and the second prevent 
ing this escape and obliging the Water to pass 
the Said valve toward the air-vessel and de 
livery-pipe. To the stem of the piston-valve 
I secure a second piston, and provide the ram 
chamber with a supplemental chamber, into 
which the second piston enters and compresses 
4O air as the first piston ascends and cuts off the 
waste or outflow of water. By this means the 
first-named piston is cushioned by compressed 
air, which, in its expansion, re-establishes the 
outflow of Water-a necessary step to effect a 
Second operation of the ram. In the air-com 
pressing operation a small portion of air es 
capes at each stroke of the compressing-pis 
tOn around its stem to the water in the ram 
chamber, and passes thence to the air-vessel, 
5O thereby obviating the necessity of what is 
termed a snifting-valve. 
3O 
45 
35 
55 
In the further description of my invention 
Which follows reference is made to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part hereof, and 
in which 
Figure I is a longitudinal section of theim 
proved ram. Fig. II is a plan of the inven 
tion. Fig. III is a transverse section taken 
on dotted line acy, Fig. II. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts in all the views. 
A is the ram-chamber, and B and C, re 
Spectively, the drive and delivery pipes. 
D is a piston-valve secured to a stem, a, 
suitably guided, and adapted to slide from the 65 
chamber A to an open cylinder, E. 
On the lower end of the stem a is a similar 
piston-Valve, F, adapted in its upward move 
ment to compress air in the chamber G. 
His the delivery-valve, of ordinary descrip 
tion, and I an air-chamber of common con 
Struction. 
Supposing the movable parts of the appa 
ratus to be relatively situated as shown in 
Fig. I, water passing down the drive-pipe B 75 
into theram-chamber Aatfirst escapes around 
the valve D; but almost immediately the means 
of escape of water is cut off by the passage of 
the valve D into the cylinder E. In the move 
ment of the piston-valve D air is compressed 8o 
by the valve Fin the chamber G and all shock 
or jar of the moving mechanism prevented. 
After the pressure in the air-vessel is raised 
sufficiently to overcome further admission of 
water to the said vessel, the valves D and F 85 
assume their first positions by the expansion 
of the air in the chamber G, and the ram op 
eration is repeated. 
It will be understood that a small quantity 
of compressed air passes around the stem (t, to 
the chamber A, and thence to the air-vessel, at 
each stroke of the valves, to maintain the req 
uisite bulk of air in the Said vessel. 
I do not limit myself to any peculiar shape 
of the various chambers and valves; but for 
convenience in construction I prefer, except 
in the case of the ram-chamber, a cylindrical 
form. 
In addition to the purposes for which a hy 
draulic ramis generally used-namely, as a sta 
tionary device for elevating Water-I propose 
to employ my improved ram as a portable appa 
9O 
95 
ICO 
 
2s 1,749 
2 
ratus for extinguishing fires. To admit of this 
use the device would be provided with wheels 
or placed on a wheeled truck, whereby it could 
be transported and connected to a fire-plug. 
In such use of this invention the Water-main, 
or a link of hose connecting the device to the 
plug, would constitute the drive-pipe, and the 
ordinary hose now used as the delivery from 
the fire-engine could be substituted for the 
pipe C shown in the drawings. In cases where 
there is ample water-supply the ram would 
prove an efficient fire-engine. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a hydraulic ram, the valve around 
which the Water passes inits escape, and which 
is closed by the movement of the escaping wa 
O 
ter, combined with an air-compressing valve 
and an air-chamber, the said air-compressing 
valve operating to form an elastic cushion for 
the outflow-valve, and thereby preventing 
shock or jar in the operation of the ram, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. In combination with the chamber A, the 
outlet pipe or cylinder E, and compressed-air 
chamber G, the valves D and F, connected by 
the stem (t, and adapted to operate substan 
tially as specified. 
GEO, YELLOTT. 
25 
Witnesses: 
E. JACK DIGGS, 
H. C. BURKE, 
WMI. GAILLOWAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281849.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN. S. DUNHAM, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. - 
k 
CONFECTION. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,849, dated July 24, 1883. 
Application filed June 19, 1883. (No specimens.) 
45 
ing-powder, which ingredients, so far as I can 
ascertain, have not heretofore been employed 
in the production of any similar preparation. 
When water is added, the gum-tragacanth 
forms a tough elastic body in the paste, similar 4o 
to that of gluten in the flour, and prevents the 
carbonic-acid gas generated from the baking 
powder escaping during the baking process. 
Consequently the cakes or macaroons are light 
and porous and of superior quality to those 
produced by the ordinary process, where about 
one-third of the entire mixture is required to 
be white of egg. 
By this process I can prepare for the mar 
ket a superior article at less cost than a com 
pound requiring to be tightly canned for its 
preservation. Hitherto it has been found 
difficult to use the meat of desiccated cocoanut, 
owing to the oil coming out during the pro 
cess of baking. 
I claim 
1. The described process of combining the 
powdered or grated meats of nuts with sugar 
and starch, by which they are rendered capa 
ble of baking with other ingredients without 6o 
the escape of oil from the mass. 
- 
2. The described mixture with the meats of 
nuts, of sugar, starch, gum-tragacanth, white 
of egg, and baking-powder, in about the pro 
portions set forth, and in the manner de- 65 
scribed. 
55 
JOHN S. DUNHAM. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. KNIGHT, 
SAML. KNIGHT. 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN S. DUNHAM, of 
the city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, 
have invented a certain new and useful con 
fection for the use of bakers, confectioners, 
and families, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
I first take ten parts refined white sugar, 
and add sufficient water to dissolve it, and 
cook to a crack,' when I add and intimately 
mix ten parts finely-grated desiccated cocoa 
nut-meat, or a like quantity of the powdered 
meat of othernuts, to which has been added two 
parts of starch. The mass is stirred until the 
boiling sirup is all absorbed, when it takes 
the form of a dry powder. An additional ten 
parts of refined white sugar and three parts of 
white of egg are now added, and the mass desic 
cated at or below a temperature 140Fahren 
heit, and, when thoroughly dry, repowdered. 
To the powdered mass is added one part pow 
dered gum-tragacanth and two parts of bak 
ing-powder, and intimately mix the mass, 
which consists of a dry powder, that can be 
exposed to the atmosphere and will keep sweet 
for an indefinite period, and, by the addition 
of sufficient water to form a paste, is ready for 
baking. 
The distinguishing features of my invention 
consist of first combining the powdered meat 
of nuts with sugar and starch in such a man 
ner that the oil will not come out while un 
dergoing the baking process and injure the 
other ingredients of the mixture, and the ad 
35 dition of powdered gum-tragacanth and bak 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US281949.txt	(N 0 Model.) 
J. WENZEL, 
STOWIE SHEIF, 
No. 281949, 
- Patented July 24, 1883. 
 
S 
WITNESSES 
(73.72s 
S. 
INVENTOR 
24. /72-126 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, washington. D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN WENZEL, OF VERNON, INDIANA. 
STOVE-SHELF. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 281,949, dated July 24, 1883. 
Application filed April 9, 1883. (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN WENZEL, a citizen 
of the United States, resident at Vernon in 
the county of Jennings and State of Indiana, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Stove-Oven Shelves; and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
or figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a vertical sec 
tional view, and Fig. 2 is a front view. 
This invention has relation to stove-oven 
shelves; and it consists in the construction and 
novel arrangement of parts, as will be here 
inafter fully described, and particularly point 
ed out in the appended claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
designates the Wall of a stove or range, and 
The lower margin of the 
b the oven-floor. 
doorway even with the oven-floor is indicated 
at c. Below the doorway is usually formed on 
stove-castings a bead or ledge, d. 
Journal-seat lugs e are designed to be bolted 
or riveted to or cast upon the wall A of the 
stove at each side of the doorway below the 
level of the oven-floor, and in these seats are 
arranged the journalsh of the shelf G. These 
journals extend horizontally from the angular 
or downwardly turned arms k of the shelf, 
said arms having sufficient length to hold the 
shelflevel with the oven-floorb when said shelf 
is raised into horizontal position. When, how 
ever, the shelf is folded down in vertical po 
sition, so that it hangs against the stove wall, its 
upper edge, l, is considerably below the oven 
TO 
25 
35 
floor or lower margin of the doorway, so that 4o 
it is entirely out of the path of the door, and 
the lower marginal flange of the latter has 
free play in closing against the wall of the 
Stove. 
- 
,- 
In bearings in, on the under side of the shelf, 45 
is arranged the shaft or journals of a swing 
ing prop, P, which may be folded against the 
shelf, or may be turned at right angles there 
to, so as to rest against the oven-wall. This 
prop is provided with a small handle or pro- 5o 
jection v, whereby it may be turned. 
When the oven door is opened, the shelf can 
be quickly raised into position to form a rest 
for such articles as are to be withdrawn from 
the oven. When the shelf is raised, the swing- 55 
ing prop falls automatically into position to 
support it. In order to lower the shelf, the 
prop should be folded up against the bottom 
of the shelf, which can then be folded down 
against the stove-wall, out of the way. 
Having described this invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The combination, with the stove-wall A, pro 
vided with the ledge d, having the journal- 65 
seats e, of the swinging and folding shelf G, 
provided with the bearings an on its under 
side for the reception of the journals of the 
Swinging prop P, adapted to be folded against 
the shelf, or to be turned at right angles there- 7o 
to, substantially as specified. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I. affix my signature 
6O 
JOHN WENZEL, 
 
Witnesses. 
JoHN B. RILLEY, 
A. G. CoTTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282049.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
No. 282,049, 
 
A. CAMPBELL, 
GRENDING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 31, 1883. 
NVENTOR: 
By his Attorneys, 
PETERs, Photo-tithographer, Washington, O.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 282,049, 
 
A. CAMIPBELL, 
GRINDING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 31, 1883. 
WITNESSES: 
eez, 
INVENTOR: 
Ouvidovoy oorvaxS eSSJ 
By his filttorneys, 
N. Peress. Photo-Lithgrapher, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
A. CAMPBELL, 
GRINDING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
? Sssssssssssssssss~No.S 
 
2,32Za:c7, 
- ZZZZ N 
& 
No. 
WITNESSES: 
ag-2. 
NVENTOR: 
SSS) 
Soot 
By his fitto'ne?s, 
m 6, 4-3-2-4- 
6. 
CN 
602-eaee (25 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographar, Washington, D.C. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW CAMPBELL, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO JOHN AND EDMUND 
McLOUGHLIN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
GRINDING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,049, dated July 31, 1883. 
Application filed April 30, 1883. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
- 
55 
chuck, so that it stands up edgewise, whereby 
To all whom it may concern: 
all tendency to sag in the center as it revolves 5o 
Beit known that I, ANDREW CAMPBELL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
is entirely avoided. 
In the drawings, which serve to illustrate 
lyn, Kings county, New York, have invented 
certain Improvements in Grinding-Machines, 
my invention, Figure i is a plan of my im 
proved grinder, the face-plate and grinder 
of which the following is a specification. 
being in horizontal mid-section. Fig. 2 is a 
My invention relates to a machine designed, 
primarily, for grinding down and facing litho 
side elevation. Fig. 3 is a cross-section, drawn 
to a scale double that of Figs. 1 and 2, through 
graphic stones and bringing them to a uni 
the axis of the grinder, substantially onlines 
form thicknes; but it may be employed for 
other analogous purposes-as for example, in 
33 in Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 4 is a view of the 
side of the machine opposite to that in Fig. 2. 6o 
truing up the faces of stones for other uses, and 
in grinding the faces of metal of glass plates. 
Fig. 5 is a front view of the conical-faced 
grinder. Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9 are detached 
The stone or other thing to be ground is mount 
views on a large scale, designed to illustrate 
ed on a revolving face-plate, and the rotating 
the clutch-jaw for holding the article to be 
grinder is fed, across its face and up to it by 
ground. These will be referred to hereinaf 
means of a cross-feed mechanism constructed 
ter. Figs. 10 and 11 illustrate modifications. . . 
similar to the cross-feed of an ordinary metal 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, A is a substan 
lathe. The grinder has a face in the form of 
tial bed-plate, upon which are mounted the 
a very flat cone, the angle of which need not 
main shaft B, bearing tight and loose pulleys 
exceed one degree, and the axis of the grinder, 
C and cone-pulleys D, a counter-shaft, E, 7o 
which is in the axis of the cone, is set at an 
bearing cone-pulleys F, and a pinion, G, and 
angle with the axis of the face-plate which 
a shaft, H, bearing the face-plate I, and a spur 
bears the stone or other thing being ground, 
wheel, J, which meshes with the pinion G. 
this angle corresponding with the angle of the 
The counter-shaft is driven from the main 
cone of the grinder. Thus, the grinder pre 
shaft through the medium of a belt, K, which 75 
sents to the surface to be ground a face that is 
connects the two sets of cone-pulleys, as shown 
nearly flat, and of course continuous, the ef. 
in Fig. 1. 
fect being much the same as that produced 
L represents the bearing-frame, upon which 
with a broad grindstone of several hundred 
is mounted a slide or carriage, M. This slide. 
feet in diameter. Through the hollow axis of 
is operated automatically by means of a gear- So 
the grinder are introduced suitable abrading 
wheel, a, on the main shaft, which meshes with 
substances-assand, glass, or emery-and wa 
another gear-wheel, b, mounted rotatively on 
ter or other liquid. Novel means are pro 
a stud, c, in the frame L. Secured to wheelb 
vided for insuring a positive and accurate 
is a miter-wheel, d, which meshes with one or 
cross-feed, and for clamping the stone or other 
the other of the miter-wheels e and e, connect 
thing to be ground to the face-plate, all as Will 
ed together and splined on the end of the feed 
be hereinafter more fully described. 
screw N, which engages a nut, f, (shown only 
Another important feature of my invention 
in Fig. 3,) on the carriage M. Rotation of the 
is the grinding of the face of a lithographic 
main shaft B imparts slow rotary motion to the 
stone by the application to its face of a rotary 
face-plate I, and a reciprocating motion to the 
grinder, while the stone itself is made to ro 
slide or carriage M on the bearings or shears 
tate with the face to be ground arranged in a 
L. This reciprocating movement is produced 
vertical or nearly vertical plane. Stones of 
by means of mechanism. I will now describe 
this character must have perfectly plane faces, 
with reference to Figs. 1 and 4. As before 
and I find this method of grinding especially 
stated, the miter-wheels e and e are connected 95 
well adapted for producing perfect results. I 
support the stone in a rotating holder oir together by a circumferentially-grooved sleeve, 
 
2s2,049 
IO 
25 
2 
g, and are splined on the screw N. By slid 
ing them on the screw either may be made to 
engage the wheel d, and thus the rotary mo 
tion of the screw be reversed. In order to ef 
5 fect this reversal automatically, I provide a 
fork, h, to engage the groove in the sleeve (1, 
and secure this to a shaft, i, mounted to Oscil 
late in a suitable bearing on L. To the outer 
end of this shaft I secure a weighted arm, j, 
and this I couple to a shifting-rod, k, on which 
are adjustably fixed collars l l in the path of 
the carriage M. Thus when the carriage 
reaches the end of its movement it strikes the 
collar, and through rod k shifts the gears e. e. 
This is a well-known shifting device, and I 
make no specific claim to it. Other well-known 
devices may be employed in lieu of this, or the 
shifting may be effected by hand. 
O is a carriage or slide mounted in guides or 
2O keepers on the slide M, and adapted to be 
moved on the same transversely of the slide M. 
and at right angles to the axis of the feed-screw 
N-that is to say, in a plane parallel to the axis 
of the shaft H, which bears the face-plate I. 
On the carriage O is rotatively mounted a hol 
low shaft, P, which bears the grinding-head. 
This latter comprises a chuck or holder, Q, 
and the conical grinder R. This grinder may 
be of stone, emery, or any suitable abrading or 
polishing material adapted to the purpose. I 
make its face conical, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
3, preferably employing an angle of only one 
or two degrees with the base, or eighty-eight 
to eighty-nine degrees with the axis of the 
cone. In order to bring the face of the cone 
on one side (ac in Fig. 1) parallel to the face 
of the stone or other article, S, being ground, 
*I mount the shaft P obliquely with the axis of 
shaft Has respects the vertical plane; but the 
two are aligned in the horizontal plane. This 
gives a clearance on the opposite side, () in 
Fig. 1) as clearly shown. The comed grinder 
is thus made to present practically a nearly 
flat face to the stone S, and a continuous sur 
face moving always in one direction. As the 
stone S moves slowly on its axis and the ro 
tating grinder R plays back and forth across 
its surface, every part of the surface of the 
stone will be subjected to the same abrading 
action. In order to impart at once a recipro 
cating and a rotary movement to the grinder, 
I provide the mechanism I will now describe, 
with reference particularly to Fig. 2. 
Tis an endless belt, which passes over a pull 
55 ley, U, on the main shaft B, guide-pulleys V V 
on the frame of the machine, a pulley, W, on 
the grinder-shaft P, and a guide-pulley, X, on 
the carriage O. This arrangement permits, 
as will be understood without further expla 
6o nation, the driving of shaft P from the main 
shaft without slackening belt T, in whatever 
position the carriages M and O may stand. 
It is important that the Cross-feed mechan 
ism, whereby the carriage O is moved, and 
65 whereby the grinder R is fed up to the stone 
S, shall be very positive in its action and sen 
45 
35 
sitive to the slightest movement of the cross 
feed screw. To accomplish this I provide the 
said screw with appliances clearly shown in 
Fig. 3, wherein n is the cross-feed screw, 7o 
mounted in the carriage M, and provided with 
a suitable crank, n. To prevent any end-play 
in its bearings, due to wear, this screw is pro 
vided with a fixed collar, o, inside of the bear 
ing, a loose collar, o, outside the bearing, an 75 
adjusting-nut, p, and a spring, g. The spring 
must have strength sufficient to overcome the 
resistance offered by the carriage O. This de 
vice provides against lost motion in the screw 
bearings. To guard against lost motion in 
the nut on the carriage O the following de 
scribed device is employed: Y is a tubular 
shell secured to the under side of the carriage 
O, and ' is a nut, internally and externally 
threaded, which screws into the end of Y, and 
also screws onto the feed-screw n. This nut 
is provided with a set-nut, r. In the other 
end of the shell Y is splined a tubular nut, s, 
which also screws onto the feed-screw m, and 
between the nuts " and s is arranged a spiral 
spring, t. This spring may be adjusted to 
any tension required by Screwing in the nut 
'. This tension must be sufficient to resist 
any opposition due to the inertia of the car 
riage O. The tubular shell need not extend 95 
over the spring t and nut 8, except in so far 
as to provide a splined attachment for the 
nuts to carriage O to prevent it from turning 
with the screw; but as constructed the springs 
and muts are housed and protected from dirt. 
A set-screw might be substituted for the nut'. 
Fig. 10 illustrates this construction. 
Fig. 3 illustrates the means for supplying 
the grinder R. With sand and water or other 
grit and liquid. Through the hollow of shaft 
P extends a tube, t, which has bearings at 0 o' 
in shaft P, and opens into a central cavity, 0, 
in the grinder. This tube u does not rotate 
with shaft P, and is provided with a re 
ceiver or holder, Z, for the grit, and a hose or 
pipe, 2, to lead the Water or other liquid from 
the supply to the tube it. From the rear 
end of tube u depends a branch, a, with an 
eye which engages a stud, b, on the carriage 
O. Behind this arm is a spring, c'. This per 
mits the pipe u to be moved longitudinally 
on its bearings, so that the bearing v', which 
is in the nature of a rawhide-piston, may be 
got at for oiling. This tight-fitting piston pre 
vents water and grit from getting into the shaft 
P and at the bearings. Spring c' retracts the 
parts. On the end of pipe u is a species of 
head or nozzle, c', with a recess at v, in its 
lower lip to prevent the water and grit from 
working back into the bearing. This is not 
very important; but the recess or groove at 
the lower side of the lip, where the gritty 
liquid is apt to collect, serves in some degree 
as a barrier to prevent the liquid from being 
carried back by capillary attraction to the 
bearing in the shaft P. 
I will now describe my improved chuck or 
IO 
II5 
I25 
I3O 
IOO 
2S2,049 
- 
3 
W 
I provide the face-plate I with a raised cup- 7o 
clamp which I employ herein for holding the not, as in that case the two would move in the 
same direction, which is objectionable. The 
stone S in place in the face-plate I. This de 
arrows in Figs. 1 and 2 illustrate the direction 
vice is shown in position in Figs. 1 and 2, and 
in which the rotating parts move. 
is illustrated on a larger scale, detached, in 
5 Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9. I show each jaw of the 
like flange, i, as shown in Fig. 1, to act as a 
chuck constructed double-that is, with two 
guard and prevent the gritty liquid from be 
gripping-teeth; but this is not essential. On 
ing thrown off and among the machinery. In 
the face-plate I are formed two diametrically 
stead of being mounted to rotate, this face 
arranged raised seats, d, which are slotted and 
plate might be arranged to reciprocate, or it 75 
Io undercut, as shown, to receive the heads of the 
might be stationary and the grinder be ar 
clamp-bolts, in the manner of an ordinary 
clamping-chuck. The clampingjawe' of the 
ranged to move over its entire surface. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
chuck is penetrated by an aperture or cylin 
drical bore, f', arranged obliquely and open 
claim 
1. A grinding-machine comprising a suita- 8o 
15 ing out at the top and face of the jaw, as shown 
ble face-plate or chuck to hold the object to be 
in Fig. 6, which is a vertical section on line 6 
ground, a grinder having a slightly-conical 
6 in the plan, Fig. 7. This bore freceives a 
face mounted rotatively on an oblique axis, 
tooth or dog, g, (shown detached in Fig. 8,) 
Substantially as shown, and a feeding mechan- . 
which has its ends beveled, as indicated. A 
ism, substantially as described, for feeding said 85 
2O screw, h", screws through the jaws e' from the 
cone-faced grinder over the face of the object 
back and impinges upon the beveled upper 
to be ground, substantially as set forth. 
end of the tooth g, which is presented to it at 
2. The combination, in a grinding-machine, 
rightangles. The lower sharp end of the tooth 
of a face-plate to hold the object to be ground, 
projects from the face of the jaw adjacent to 
mounted rotatively, a conical-faced grinder 9o 
25 the stone S and bites into the same when his 
mounted rotatively on an axis oblique to the 
brought to bear against its upper end. The 
axis of the face-plate, and mechanism, sub 
pressure on the stone being oblique, it will be 
stantially as described, for imparting a rotary 
seen that the stone will be pressed up firmly to 
motion to said face-plate and grinder, and for 
its bearings d on the face-plate, as well as held 
feeding the grinder up to and across the face 95 
between the converging jaws of the clutch. 
O 
of the object to be ground, substantially as 
3 I prefer to make the teeth g from a cylindri. 
and for the purposes set forth. 
cal bar of steel; but they may be made from 
3. The combination, in a grinding-machine, 
square or polygonal bars as well. . 
of the face-plate I and its shaft H, the car 
Fig. 9 is a cross-section on line 99 in Figs. 
riage M, mounted to slide on the frame or Ioo 
shears L, parallel with the face of the face 
Fig. 11 illustrates a modification of my im 
plate I, the carriage O, mounted to slide on 
proved clamping-jaw. In this construction 
the carriage M, and transversely thereof, the 
screw it does not impinge directly upon the end 
grinder R, with a conical face, mounted in a 
of tooth g', but upon a follower, g, which plays 
holder, Q, and the grinder-shaft P, mounted 
4o in a bore, f', and which has a beveled ex 
obliquely on the carriage O to a degree that 
tremity that impinges on the beveled upper 
will bring the face ac of the grinder into a 
end of g. The construction and operation 
plane parallel to the face of the face-plate I, 
will be obvious from inspection of Fig. 11. 
substantially as set forth. 
I do not limit myself to the precise arrange, 
4. The cross-feed screw m, provided with a 
ment of the parts herein shown-for example, 
fixed collar, o, a loose collar, o, an adjusting 
the shafts H and P may stand vertical or in 
nut, p, and Spring q, substantially as set forth. 
clined instead of horizontal, as shown, in 
5. The combination, with the carriage O 
facing off metals or other surfaces where per 
fect accuracy is not required. For grinding 
and screw m, of the shell Y, secured to car 
riage O, the nuts r and 8, and the spring t, ar. II.5 
the faces of lithographic stones, however, the 
ranged between them, substantially as and for 
stone should stand with the face to be ground 
the purposes set forth. 
in a vertical or nearly vertical plane. The 
6. The combination, with the carriage O, of 
shaft P. might also be mounted on its carriage 
the screw m, provided with the tight and loose 
O, with its axis parallel to the path in which 
collars o o, the nut p, and spring q, and the 
55 said carriage moves transversely across M, and 
shell Y, nuts rands, and the spring t, all ar 
the said carriage Obe mounted to stand and 
ranged substantially as set forth. 
move obliquely on the carriage M. This would 
7. The combination of the hollow grinder 
give the shaft P its proper obliquity. 
shaft and the grinder, the tube u, provided 
The grinder R may be constructed of the 
With bearings in the hollow of the grinder 
proper shape and then set in the holder Q by 
shaft, the holder or hopper Z for the grit, and 
screws or cement, or it may be made from some 
the pipe 2, supplying water or other liquid, 
suitable composition, as emery, sand, and 
hydraulic cement, and molded directly in the 
substantially as set forth. 
8. As a clamp for holding the object to be 
holder. The grinder need not be fed past the 
ground, a block or socket-piece provided with 13o 
65 center of the stone S; indeed I prefer it should 
35 6 and 7, showing the slot in d". 
45 
IO 
I 25 
. 
4 
- - - 
22s2,049 
an oblique bore, f', to receive the tooth, the 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
said tooth g and the screw h' for setting the my name in the presence of two subscribing 
tooth, substantially as set forth. 
witnesses. 
9. A machine for grinding the faces of lith 
5 ographic stones, comprising means for holding 
the stone to be ground with its face to be ground 
in a substantially vertical plane, and means 
for rotating said stone while it is being ground, 
all constructed and arranged to operate sub- 
Io stantially as set forth. 
ANDREW (CAMPBELL. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY CONNETT, 
ARTHUR. C. FRASEP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282149.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 282,149. 
Patented July 31, 1883, 
W. S. G. BAKER. 
CAR AXLE BOX. 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
-----+---+--~~~~!)Q 
|-----} 
XNN 
N 
SNS SS 
TTT 
Z222222222 
s 
2. 
Q27 
is 
2222222222 
ris NNN 
p 
y 
+ 1 ! | | | 
WITNESSES 
A 
N.VENTOR 
AV2 Zezeezza S. GZee Acer 
ada. Aa% 
N. PET 
efs 
Photo 
Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model) . 
W. S. G. BAKER, 
CAR AXLE BOX. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 282, l49. 
Patented July 31, 1883. 
as a a 
 
 
 
 
 
3 
& 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
%9 OC. o6.4% 
w 
2/22 
8 
 
NVENTOR 
7722Zzazz SG Aa/ter 
By Mezs Attorneys 
N 
w 
peters. Photo-uthographer. Washington D.C. 
' 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
". . 
. 
. 
WM. S. G. BAKER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
s 
CAR-AXE BOX. 
spECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 282,149, dated July 31, 1888. 
. Application filed May 9, 1883. (No model.) 
65 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. S. G. BAKER, 
of Baltimore, in the county of Baltimore and 
State of Maryland, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Car-Axle Boxes, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the general class of 
car-axle boxes shown in Letters Patent of the 
United States heretofore granted to me Sep 
tember 20, 1881, and April 24, 1883, respect 
lively numbered 247,236 and 276,210; and the 
object of the invention is, first, to adapt in an 
efficient manner the car-axleboxes of the gen 
eral character shown in those patents to the 
trucks of steam-cars as now in general use, 
and, second, to improve the general construc 
tion. In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an end view, partly in section; Fig. 2, a verti 
cal section on the line 22 of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a 
horizontal section on the line 33 of Fig.1; 
Fig. 4, a detail view of the supporting block 
or step; and Fig. 5 is a longitudinal section 
with some of the parts removed. 
The general construction of the axle-box A, 
the saddle or bearing B, the suspension-link 
E, the wheel-hub F, and the spring-actuated 
washer G, interposed between the wheel-hub. 
and the car-axle box, is substantially like that 
disclosed in the patents above mentioned, and 
needs no description. 
The depending pedestal H, between the legs 
or jaws of which the axle-box. A plays, is rig. 
idly bolted to the framing of the car, and is 
stayed by suitable braces. The link E, sus 
pended from the top of the axle-box, sustains 
the supporting frame or step I, which is pro 
vided with a suitable seat for the link on its 
under face, and is slotted or notched at each 
end for the reception of the upright sides of 
the link. This step or seat is illustrated in 
detailin Figs. 2 and 4, from which it will be 
perceived that guard ridges or projections i 
are formed on its under face along the sides of 
the link-seat, so as to prevent the link being 
displaced. Upright lugs i' are formed on the 
upper side of the step I, near each corner at the 
sides of the slots in the ends of the step, and 
are preferably curved as shown. The spring 
frame fits down over these lugs, as illustrated 
in Figs. 1 and 3, so that lateral displacement 
of the step or spring-frame relatively to each 
other is prevented. The inner walls of the 
legs of the pedestals are formed with vertical 
recessesh, preferably rectangularin cross-sec. 55 
tion, for the reception of the legs of an invert. 
ed U-shaped spring-frame, K, which straddles 
the axle-box and suspending-link, and rests 
upon the ends of the supporting-step I, which 
also fits in the vertical recesses h. It will be 6o 
perceived that as the supporting-step fits in 
the recesses in the pedestal-jaws and the link 
is held in place on top of the axle-box, the axle 
box is held against any horizontal turning mo 
tion. The spring-frame Kisformed on its up 
per face with a seat or socket, k, for the recep 
tion of the end of the spring equalizing and 
Sustaining beam L., the lugs of the pedestalbe 
ing slotted at it to accommodate the beam, 
The opposite end of the beam L is supported 7o 
in the same way upon another axle-box, and , 
the car-body is mounted upon springs S in the 
usual way. A brace-rod, l, extends from the 
pedestal of one axle-box to the other. Under 
this construction the pivot of the suspension- 75 
link E is its bearing on the under face of the 
step I, and the car-axle box can move later 
ally, so as to give ample play to prevent jerks 
or jars in passing curves, the vertical move 
ment of the block I and the spring-frame K8o 
within the pedestal accommodating this action. 
Under the organization described and shown 
it is obvious that the weight of the car-body 
may be applied on a spring interposed be 
tween the body and the upperface of the spring- 85 
frame K within the legs of the pedestal. 
In the construction herein described and 
shown, as well as in my prior patent, No. 
276,210, the axle-box is secured to the axle so 
as to prevent its lateral movement thereon, 90 
and this feature, in connection with the con 
struction and movements above described, con 
stitutes a very superior construction. 
. 
The right to hereafter file other applica 
tions for any subject-matter herein described 95 
or shown but not claimed or fully claimed is 
reserved. 
I am aware that, broadly, it is not new to 
support the equalizing-beams by spring frames 
or boxes placed between the jaws of the ped-IO 
estals and supported by links swung from the 
tops of the axle-boxes. s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
282,499 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of the pedestal, the axle-box, the strad 
dling U-shaped spring-frame placed between 
the legs of the pedestal, the suspension-link, 
upon which the spring-frame rests, the Sup 
porting step or seat sustained by Said link, 
and means for applying the weight of the car 
body at the top of the spring-frame. 
2. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of the pedestal, the jaws of which are 
provided with vertical recesses on their inner 
faces, a straddling U-shaped spring-frame, 
which fits and moves vertical in said recesses, 
the axle-box, the link suspended therefrom, 
the supporting-step, which is sustained by the 
link and receives the weight or thrust of the 
spring-frame, and means for applying the 
weight of the car-body on the spring-frame. 
3. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of the pedestal having vertical recesses 
on the inner faces of its depending jaws, a 
straddling U-shaped spring-frame, which fits 
and moves vertically in said recess, the axle 
box, the link suspended therefrom, and the 
supporting-step, which moves vertically in the 
recess in the pedestal-jaws, and is supported 
by the suspending-link to sustain the weight 
of the spring-frame. 
IO 
25 
4. The combination, substantially as set 30 
forth, of the pedestal, the axle-box, the strad 
dling U-shaped spring-frame, whichfits in the 
vertical recesses in the pedestal jaws, the sus 
pending-link, and the supporting-step having 
a link-seat on its under face and slotted ends 
for the reception of the link. 
5. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of the pedestal, the axle-box, the spring 
frame, the suspending-link, and the support 
ing-step so organized as to hold the axle-box 
against horizontal turning motion. 
6. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of the pedestal, the axle-box, the axle so 
mounted therein as to be held firmly against 
endwise motion, the suspending-link, the 
spring-frame supported by the link, and means 
for holding the axle-box, against horizontal 
turning motion. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 2d day of May, A. D. 5o 
1883. 
45 
35 
4O 
WM. S. G. BAKER. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. W. KOHLMAN, 
J. P. BAKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282249.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 282,249. 
G. WESTINGHOUSE, Jr. 
TRACK CIRCUIT CONNECTOR. 
Patented July 31, 1883. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
Y\\\\ess vs. 
saysayev. &rge/res &nytis 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE WESTINGHOUSE, J.R., OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
TRACK-CIRCUIT connectoR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,249, dated July 31, 1888. 
Application filed May 23, 1883. (No model.) 
: 
- Io 
25 
45 
- connection between such rails I employ a 65 
To all whom it may concern: 
The purpose of my invention is, in part, to 
Beitknown that I, GEORGE WESTINGHOUSE, overcome these and other like difficulties or 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, residing at objections in the class of rail-connectors re 
Pittsburg, county of Allegheny, State of Penn-ferred to, and, in general terms, it consists of a 55 
sylvania, have invented or discovered a new metal rod or wire having its ends bent, forming 
and useful Improvement in Track-Circuit Con- angles for driving the ends into holes in the 
nectors; and I do hereby declare the following rails, and also having at some intermediate 
to be a full, clear, concise, and exact descrip- point in its length a coil or fold to afford elas 
tion thereof, reference being had to the accom- ticity or spring action, as hereinafter more 6o 
panying drawing, making a part of this speci- fully described and claimed. 
fication, which illustrates by a perspective. 
In the drawing, A A represent portions of 
view my improved circuit-connector applied two rail ends connected by the usual splice 
as in use in making electrical connection be: bar, B, and bolts bib'. In making electrical 
tween two consecutive rails of a track. 
In making track or rail circuits for electri- metallrodor wire, C, preferably ofiron or steel. 
cal purposes on railways it is important that The two ends c. c of this rod are bent at or near 
successive rails should be connected by metal- right angles, forming thereby angles or shoul 
lic contact-surfaces of considerable area, and 
ders c' cat a little distance from the ends, to 
that such contact should be protected from rust. 
facilitate driving the latter into holes in the 7O 
or from coating with any substance calculated 
rails, as presently described. At some con 
to retard free passage of electric current. This 
venient point, preferably a central point be 
is especially important in the use referred to, 
tween the shoulders c, the rod or wire is 
because low-tension currents are ordinarily or looped, bent, or coiled with one or more turns 
often employed, and the main reliance for re- or convolutions, as at c, whereby vibration or 75 
taining such currents on the line of track is movement produced in either part or end of 
the Superior conductivity of the track to earth. .the rod will in a great measure be neutralized 
In the class of connectors to which my pres- or taken up by the spring elasticity afforded 
ent invention relates it has been customary by such bend or coil. 
heretofore to drive pins into suitable holes 
drilled in the rails, and to connect such pins cuit it is desirable, in many cases, that the 
electrically by means of a wire wound tightly parts of the rails through which the bolts bib' 
at its ends around and soldered to the pins. pass should be included in the circuit-line; 
Such connectors are good and effective so long or, in other words, that the connections should 
as they remain intact, but severaldifficulties are be made between the bolt. b and the rail ends, 85 
35 encountered in the practical use of the same. so that in case a rail breaks across the bolt 
For example, in manufacturing on a large holes the circuit shall also be-broken and the 
scaleitis very difficult and practically impossi- danger be indicated. To this end Imake the 
ble to remove all trace of the acid employed holes a (, which receive the ends c of the con 
in soldering, and any which may remain is act- nector, in the side of the head of the rails, near 9o 
ive in corroding the wire, and thereby weak-- their ends; and in order to prevent interfer 
ening it, usually, at the point where it leaves ence with wheel-flanges the holes are made in 
the pin; also, in use an active vibration, more the outer side of the rails. The connectors are 
or less constant, is produced inthe connecting- also bent downward and outward by angles c 
wire, whichintimeimparts a crystallinestruct- c', nearly to the level of the foot and away 95 
ure to the metal of the wire near to or at the from the side of the rails-say some six inches 
pin. This also weakens the wire, and is the (more or less)-so as to be out of the way of 
cause offrequent breakage at such points; also, workmen. 
when the vibratory and other movements of 
By these features of construction I am en 
the wire expend their force directly upon the abled to set the connector in such manner that IOO 
pins, as heretofore, they have a decided tend- rotary strain is not imposed upon the ends c 
ency to loosen the pins in their holes. 
by vertical movement of the rail ends, and the 
In connecting the two rails for electric cir- 8o 
- 
 
 
 
2S2,249 
' 
tremors or vibrations caused by these and oth 
er movements in use will in a great measure 
be reduced or neutralized by the coil c. 
Another feature of advantage is secured by 
making the parts c c, which are driven into the 
holes at a, integral with the remaining or con 
necting part of the rod, thereby avoiding the 
expense of soldering and the injury resulting 
from the use of acid. 
By reducing or neutralizing the force of vi 
brations in the connector, as above described, 
the tendency to formation of crystalline struct 
ure is removed, and a fruitful source of break 
ing, with consequent expense and trouble, is ob 
Viated; also, my improved connectoris cheaper 
of construction, easier of application, and more 
durable in use than those of the same class 
heretofore made and used. 
In a separate application filed even date 
herewith I have described a track-circuit con 
nector embodying in part the features of con 
struction described and claimed herein, but 
also having other features of improvement 
by which such connector is adapted to special 
conditions of use. Such features of special 
adaptation are not claimed herein, but form 
the subject-matter of claims in the application 
referred to. The present invention has refer 
ence more particularly to a connector adapted 
by its construction to make attachment to the 
rails between the bolt-holes and ends and to 
the Outside of the rails or track. 
In preparing the ends e for insertion in the 
holes a they may be filed bright or scaled, and 
galvanized, or otherwise fitted to make and 
preserve good metallic contact with the rails. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. A track-circuit connecting-rod of metal, 
having its ends integral with and bent at or 
45 
55 
ea' right angles to the intermediate portion, 
such ends having cleaned metallic surfaces, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. A track-circuit connecting-rod of metal, 
having ends integral with and bent at an angle 
to the intermediate portion, and having a coil 
in such intermediate portion to afford Spring 
action, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
3. The track-circuit connecting-rod C, having 
bent ends c, forming shoulders c' c', for driv 
ing, and a spring-coil, c', at or near the central 
art of its length between ends, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. The rod C for making electrical connec 
tion between railway-rails, having therein a 
central yielding or spring coil, c', bent ends 
c, forming shoulders c, and bendic', setting the 
spring laterally away from the ends c and from 
the rails, substantially as set forth. 
5. The rails AA, having holes a a in the 
head, in combination with a connecting-rod, C, 
having its ends c driven tightly into such holes, 
and having a yielding or elastic coil, c, therein 
at some intermediate point in its length, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. The rails AA, having holes act therein on 
the outer side of their heads, in combination 
with connecting-rod C, having ends c, with 
shoulders c, for driving the ends into the holes 
a, and having a central coil, c, extended later 
ally away from the outer side of the rails, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE WESTINGHOUSE, JR. 
C. L. PARKER, 
R. H. WHITTLESEY. 
IO 
I5 
2 5 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282350.txt	(Model.) 
No. 282,350. 
E METS 
TABLE "Friday all as 
- 
  
 
 
 
 
  
w 
% 
 
Fig. 4. 
 
 
 
 
 
Fritz. His 
5N A. 
III 
E 
UAIt 
 
 
 
* 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELISHA METs, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
TABLE-LEAF SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,350, dated July 31, 1888. 
. . . . 
. 
. " 
Application filed December 1s, 1882. (Model.) 
: 2O 
- - 
- 
- 
, 
15 
To all whom it may concern: 
be bent laterally, as shown in dotted position 
Be it known that I, ELISHAMETs, of Roch 
in Fig. 2, returning again on account of its . 
ester, in the county, of Monroe and State of 
elasticity to its normal position (shown in full 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
lines in said figure) when released. The head 
5 Improvement in Table-Leaf Supports, which 
9 of the spring-brace b, entering the blockd, is 55 
improvement is fully set forth in the follow 
made broad for the purpose of giving it a suf 
ing specification and accompanying drawings. 
ficient bearing to enable it to resist the strain 
The object of my invention is mainly to pro 
due to the lateral bending of said brace just 
duce a table-leaf support which shall, when 
mentioned. A flat spring, h, is secured to the 
p standing under the raised leaf, be rigidly 
under edge of the brace bat k, with its free 6O 
locked into place against any lateral pressure 
end resting at S against a projection, l, of the 
tending to displace it; and it consists in parts 
blockd, as shown, which spring forms means 
and devices hereinafter fully described, and 
by which the brace b is held at all times up 
more particularly pointed out in the claims. 
against the rail C or top A of the table, as de 
- Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a side 
scribed below. 
This spring is formed and at 
elevation of my improved leaf-support in po 
tached to the brace bin such a manner that its 
sition under the leaf of the table, with parts 
action is at all times in a direction at right 
shown in different position; Fig. 2, a plan of 
angles with the direction of the spring action 
the same, viewed as indicated by the arrow Y. 
of said brace b; and the function of the spring 
in Fig. 1, with parts broken away and other his to prevent said brace swinging downward 
parts occupying different positions; Fig. 3, a 
to pend vertically from the pivot-pin a, as it 
detached view of the end of the brace with 
otherwise would when its lower end or foot 
adjacent parts, viewed as indicated by the ar 
C, 
is released from the cavi 
ty or reste for th 
row 2 in Fig. 1, the brace being transversely 
same in operating the support. 
The spring 
25 sectioned at the inner face of the block f for 
is enabled to hold the brace upward, as above 
the purpose of showing its form more fully; 
stated, on account of having its bearing s 
and Fig. 4, a detached view of the parts shown 
against the rest l at a point beyond the point 
in Fig. 3, viewed as in Fig.1, with the lower 
of pivot motion a of the brace, measuring 
end of the brace partially withdrawn from the 
from k-the point of junction between said 
so cavity in which it rests while supporting the 
brace and Spring, as appears from the dotted 
lines in and 0 in Fig.1. The former line passes 8o 
Referring to the parts, A is the top of a ta 
through the pivot a and the latter through 
ble; B, the leaf, joined to the top-A. in the 
the points of bearing of the spring against the 
usual manner, and C the rail, all of common 
rest l, which arrangement of the bearing of the 
construction. 
spring causes it to press upward against the 
b is a brace forming the support proper for 
bracebatik and hold the saidbrace up, as stated. 
- the leaf, attached to the under surface of the 
An offset bend in the brace at P enables the 
latter by means of a horizontal pivot-pin, a, 
latter to move by the end of the block f dur 
held within a head-block, d, secured to the 
ing the descent of the leafB, said brace slid 
leaf. At the other end the brace b is formed 
ing upon the edge of the rail Cat runtil the go 
into a tapering tongue, c, terminating in a 
foot or tongue c reaches the under surface of 
hook, u, as shown in Figs. 1 and 4, which 
the top A of the table, when it slides along the 
tongue in cross-section is dovetailed in form, 
same, the braceb occupying the position shown. 
as shown in Fig. 3, fitting a similarly-shaped 
in dotted lines in Fig. I when the leaf is ver 
45 foot-rest or cavity, e, formed into the block?, 
tical. The foote of the brace is fitted with a 95 
secured to the under edge of the rail C. The 
dovetail to the block?, as above stated, so that 
5 brace b is flattened for a distance at the mid 
it may not be readily displaced by a child 
dle by thereof, having its greater thickness in 
pulling thereat or from other cause, and let 
a vertical plane, by means of which flattened 
the leaf fall undesignedly; or, to more fully 
5o part it acts as a spring, and is made thus to 
describe it, the tongue c is thicker at the left- Ioo 
75 
leaf. 
- 
-- 
2S2,350 
O 
hand side, as it appears in Fig. 3, than at the 
right-hand side thereof, by means of which, 
when in place, it cannot be drawn out of the 
cavity e in the block f in a direction toward 
theright, which will be easily understood from 
the figure. This dovetailed form of the foot 
or tongue c is an essential part of my inven 
tion, for, were it a mereinclined plane or wedge, 
it might be drawn sidewise out of the cavity. 
of the block f by accident, and so let the leaf 
down. When the tongue c is in the cavity e 
of the block, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the 
shoulder i of the brace rests against the side of 
the block to support the leaf, and when thus 
15 locked in the cavity lateral displacement of 
the brace cannot take place, which must occur 
before the leaf can be lowered. By raising the 
leaf slightly upward to the position shown in 
dotted lines at t, the tongue c will be drawn 
partly out of the cavity e, as shown in Fig. 4, 
when the brace may be drawn laterally out of 
the cavity to the position in dotted lines in 
Fig. 2, above mentioned, and the leaf allowed 
to fall. The hook u at the end of the tongue 
25 prevents the latter being drawn entirely out 
of the cavity e by lifting against the leaf, on 
account of said hook coming against the inner 
surface of the block f, as shown in Fig. 4. 
When the leaf Bis raised the brace b slides by 
or past the end of the blockf, as above stated, 
until the bend p in the brace arrives at said 
block, when the brace is bent or sprung later 
ally to the position shown in dotted lines in 
Fig.2by pressing against the end of the block 
as the leaf moves upward, and upon the end 
c of the brace arriving opposite the cavity eit 
is urged into the latter on account of the elas 
ticity of the brace, and becomes automatically 
locked therein, as stated. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with the leaf B and rail 
C of a fall-leaf table, a support for the leaf, 
3O 
35 
consisting of the spring-brace b, attached at 
one end to the leaf at a, with a flexible joint, 
with its opposite end or foot, c, formed to enter 45 
a cavity or rest, e, at the edge of the rail when 
in position to support the leaf, the said brace 
being made thin or flattened at b, to act as a 
spring and be capable of being bent or sprung 
laterally out of the rest e, substantially as 
shown, with means to uphold said brace, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. In combination with the leaf B and rail 
C of a table, the flattened spring-brace b for 
the leaf, attached to the latter by a flexiblejoint 55 
or bearing at a, and the flat spring h, secured 
at the under side of said brace and lying sub 
stantially parallel therewith, and the head 
block d, for holding the head g of the brace b, 
provided with the rest l for the spring h, the 
point of bearings of said spring upon the rest 
l being beyond the pivot or bearing a of the 
brace, substatially as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with the leaf Band rail 
C of a table, of the block.f, secured to the rail 65 
and formed with a cavity, e, and the spring 
brace b, having an offset bend, P, with its foot 
or tongue c fitted to said, cavity or rest e, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
a table, a support for the leaf attached there 
to, and consisting of a brace, b, formed at its 
lower end with a tongue, c, shoulder i, and 
hook u, said tongue being dovetailed in form 
in cross-section, as shown, of the block f, se- 75 
cured to the rail, and having the cavity e, said 
cavity being formed, substantially as described, 
to fit and hold the tongue, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
4. In combination with the leaf and rail of 7o 
E. METS. 
Witnesses: 
E. B. WHITMORE, 
L. C. MCCONNELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282450.txt	(No Model) 4 
: 
: * , , , 
",", 
"" 
, 
" 
No. 282,450. 
, 
 
 
B, K. EMER. S0 N, 
HORSE COLLAR. 
Patented July 31, 1883. 
O  
16:7- 2-- INVENTOR 
z*Torneys 
/6 
Y4- 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN K. EMERSON, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
HoRsE-COLLAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,450, dated July 31, 1883. 
N 
Application filed December 27, i882. - (No model.) 
IO 
I 5 claims. . . 
|- 
| 
- 
* 
To a Zl, avhom, it 7may concern: 
Beit known that I, BENJAMIINIK. EMERSON, 
of Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
- State of Ohio, have invent?d certain new and 
5 useful Improvements Paper. Horse-Collars; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven- || 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use the 
S8l62. 
| 
My invention relates to improvements in 
horse-collars; and it consists in certain fea 
tures of construction and combination of parts, 
hereinafter described, and pointed out in the 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in per 
spective of a horse-collar embodying my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a view in perspective of a 
pair of hames such as forms a part of the de 
vice shown in Fig. 1. 
A represents the collar, which may be made 
whole or in pieces, as desired. . 
B represents a pair of hames, made prefer 
ably of metal, with suitable: attachments 
such as a, at, a*, and af-for attaching the 
traces and other portions of the harness, and 
for holding the pair of hames together, and 
for such other purposes as are necessary for 
attachments to the hames. ` 
The collaris made by pressing papier-mach 
in a suitable mold, with the hames inside of 
the papier-mach, except the ends of the said 
attachments as are necessary to project be 
yond the collar, as shown in Fig. 1, being in 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
25 
35 fact a combined collar and hame. 
If the said attachments a, a, a, and af, or 
any of them, should be broken, these collars 
may be used as ordinary collars are used, with 
h?mes on the outside of them. Therefore Ipre 
fer making a corrugation, as at c, on the out- 4o : 
side of the collar, suitable for engaging ordi 
nary hames, whether there are or are not 
hames inclosed in the collar. 
-- I am aware that a horse-collar has been 
made of paper-pulp, and I- lay no claim to 
Such a collar.. 
45 
- 
. 
. 
" 
. . 
What I claim is 
1. A horse-collar- of papier-mach, having 
inclosed therein hames, and the said hames 
having projecting attachments that project 
outside of the casing of papier-mach, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. The combination, with a horse-colla 
made of papier-mach, of hames inclosed in 55 
said collar, substantially as and for the pur 
| 
pose set forth. 
3. Ahorse-collar of papier-mach, inclosing 
hames, as described, and provided with a cor. . . 
rugation on its outside, whereby detachable 
hames may be applied thereto, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 22d 
day of December, 1882. 
BENJAMIIN K. EMERSON. 
. 
6o 
- 
" 
. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT E. LYNCH, 
C. H. DORER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282550.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 282,550. 
J. H. MOLEAN. 
CARTRIDGE, 
Patented Aug. 7, 1883, 
2222222222222a2a2222222222 
attatas 
AE 
 
 
A 
S N NS Z A 
22222222222222222222222 
N. Peters. Photo-Lahographer. Washington. D. C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES HENRY MCLEAN, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
CARTRIDGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,550, dated August 7, 18S3. 
Application filed May 23, 1881. (No model. 
55 
O 
To all, whon it naty conce77. 
Beit known that I, JAMES HENRYMCLEAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at St. 
Louis, in the State of Missouri, have invented 
Improvements in Cartridges, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My improved cartridge is provided with a 
case of paper, thin metal, or other suitable ma 
terial in cylindrical form, with an open front, 
and a closed back. Within this case I insert 
a saucer - shaped cup having a peripheral 
flange to fit within the case, and employed to 
center and support an axial tube which extends 
forward to the base of the bullet, and is cen 
tered thereon, said bullet having a solid tail, 
to be inserted into the tube, or a hollow tail 
or a cavity in the bullet itself, into which the 
tube may be inserted. The case is the full 
length of the cartridge-that is to say, it ex 
tends forward as far as the front of the ball. 
The primer is placed between the open rear 
end of the axial tube and the interior of the 
imperforate back or base of the case, and is 
ignited by the stroke of the firing-pin against 
the outside of the case. 
My improved cartridge is illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal section 
thereof, the bullet being shown in elevation. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal Section of the case or 
shell. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section of the 
combined tube and centering-cup. Fig. 4 is 
a perspective view of the bullet. Fig. 5 is a 
section of a shot-cartridge. Fig. 6 is a view 
of two bullets, one with a hollow tail and the 
other with a hollow in its base to receive the 
end of the tube. 
The outer case, A, may be made of paper, 
thin metal, or other suitable material, with an 
open front and a closed and imperforate base, 
(t. 
Inserted in the shell or case from the front 
is a cup, C, the sides whereof fit within the 
interior of the case, and serve to center and 
secure the rear end of the central tube, D, the 
front end of which receives the central tail, b, 
of the bullet B. The case A is made of Sufi 
cient length to extend to the front of the bul 
let B, so that the shell after discharge of the 
bullet will be of the same length as the loaded 
cartridge. This enables me to use the empty 
w 
- 
shell as a gage in feeding the cartridges into 
the gun, or the breech-slide thereof, from suita 
ble magazines, as I have described in certain 
applications for patents on improvements in 
breech-loading and magazine fire-arms. 
In constructing my cartridge the connected 
cup C and tube D are inserted within the case 
A, with a primer, E, of any preferred form, in 
position beneath the end of the tube, and be 
tween it and the interior of base (t. The cup 
and tube may be made in one piece, or may be 
separate and secured together by fitting the 
end of the tube within or on the outside of a 
Central collar on the cup. The primer E may 
be of disk form and set in a cavity, as shown, 
or may be of cap form and be fitted on a hip 
ple on the rear extremity of the tube D. The 
tube D and the case A around it are both 
filled with powder, and the tail b of the bullet 
fitted within the end of the tube; or, as shown 
in Fig. 6, the tail of the ball or the base of the 
ball itself may be made hollow to receive the 
end of the tube. When the tail of the la I is 
made solid, I prefer to give it the form (insec 
tion) of a St. Andrews cross, as illustrated in 
Fig. 4, which is highly advantageous in im 
proving its range and accuracy in flight. The 
stroke of the firing-pin, being delivered on the 
center of the base (, acts through the thin ma 
terial of the case on the primer Ewithin, which 
is seated on the end of the tube D, while the 
latter is seated against the base of the ball B, 
so as to provide a rigid and efficient anvil to 
support the primer under the blow and insure 
its ignition. The tube may be without perfo 
rations, so that the powder within it will be 
first burned and the main body of powder will 
then be ignited from the front; or the tube may 
be perforated, so as to ignite the entire body 
as promptly as possible. 
My improved cartridge may be made either 
with or without a flanged base, as preferred. 
The invention is applicable alike to military 
and sporting guns, and may be applied to a 
shot-cartridge, as I have illustrated in Fig. 5. 
Especially for cannon it is found desirable to 
form the case with spiral or other ribs, as illus 
trated at fin Fig. 2, which afford a cushion in 
the first explosion of the charge, and hence 
avoid violence to the gun. After the cartridge 
25 
35 
45 
 
75 
SO 
85 
9O 
95 
OO 
2 
2s 2,550 
cup C, fitting closely at its sides within the 
shell A, and provided with a central aperture, 
the tube D, secured at its rear end to the front 
face of the cup around its aperture, and the ball 
or shot case B, removably attached at its rear 
face to the front end of the tube D, the said 
cup serving through the medium of its sides 
to keep the tube in true alignment, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination, with the hollow shell A, 
of the separate cup C, the primer E, and the 
tube D, attached centrally to the said cup, as 
shown and described, said cup being arranged 
to be removed for repriming the cartridge, as 
set forth. 
JAMES HENRY McLEAN. 
Witnesses: 
- 
CHAs. H. BALLMAN, 
JAS. MILLAN. 
Io 
has been fired, the connected tube and saucer 
DC can be taken out of the case or Shell. A 
reprimed, and put back, and the cartridge re 
loaded a number of times. The facility thus 
5 afforded for reloading the copper shell is a. 
great feature of utility in my cartridge, both 
for military and Sporting purposes. 
I am aware that heretofore centering-rods 
have been employed in the construction of cer 
tain classes of cartridges, and that such devices 
have been combined with a tailed bullet, 
and, furthermore, that removable cups have 
heretofore been used in the construction of 
cartridges; hence, 
Having thus described my invention, the fol 
lowing is what I claim as new therein and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent: 
1. In a cartridge for fire-arms, ordnance, &c., 
the hollow shell A, open at its front end and 
2O closed at its rear end, in combination with the 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282650.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 282,650. 
R, LE BARON. 
SPLINT, 
Patented Aug. 7, 1883. 
 
Sves\, 
ey,7%,72 
f S. 
WSoev Ale Sox ow 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT LE BARON, OF PONTIAC, MICHIGAN. 
SPLINT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,650, dated August 7, 1888. 
Application filed June 9, 1883. (No model.) 
. To all, whon, it naily concern, 
65 
After the fractured limb has been prepared 
for the reception of the splint, the splint is 
Secured to the limb by a roll or bandage, as 45 
in the ordinary manner of adjusting the long 
Splint, the cross-head being adjusted at some 
little distance from the foot. The free end of 
the cord is now secured to the fractured limb 
in the ordinary manner, and in such a way 5o 
that the graduated balance will exert a con 
tinual pull upon the cord, creating what may 
be called an extension' of thefracturedlimb, 
the counter-extension of which is the bandage 
or roll about the thigh. 
By the employment of a splint constructed 
as above, described it can readily be seen that 
the patient can be moved easily without dis 
turbing or in any way hindering the operation 
of the device, and the spring will exert its ex- 6o 
tending force upon the fractured limb no mat 
ter in what position it may be placed. 
I am aware of Patents Nos. 76,382 and 82,478, 
and make no claim to the construction shown 
therein. 
Be it known that I, ROBERT LE BARON, of 
Pontiac, in the county of Oakland and State 
of Michigan, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Splints; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawing, which forms a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in Spring indicating 
counter-extension splints; and the invention 
consists in the peculiar construction, arrange 
ment, and combination of the various parts, 
all as more fully hereinafter set forth, and 
pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawing my improved 
splint is shown in perspective, in which A rep 
resents the splint, which is formed from any 
suitable material. In the lower end of this 
splint is formed a slot, a, in which the cross 
head B slides, so as to adapt the splint to 
a longer or shorter limb, such cross-head be 
ing secured to its adjusted position within 
What I do claim as new is 
the slot by means of the pin, b, which passes 
The within-described splint, consisting of 
through one of the series of holes in the splint 
the body A, having longitudinal slota, with side 
and through the center of the cross-head. holes, the cross-head B, held in an adjusted 
Both arms of this cross-head are slotted longi 
position in said slot by a pin, b, and having 7o 
tudinally, as shown, and in each of these slots 
pulleys C journaled in each arm of said cross 
is adjustably secured a groove-pulley, C, in 
head, one upon either side of the splint-body, 
such manner that the pulleys may be adjusted 
thespring-balance D, secured to one face of the 
to or from the splint by means of the pins b. 
splint-body, and the rope E, leading from said 
the top end thereof, is secured a suitable hook, 
adapted to be secured to the fractured limb 
which engages with the eye upon the end of 
or the bandages thereon, all combined and ar 
the graduated spring-balance D, while the 
ranged for joint operation, as and for the pur 
spring-arm of such balance is secured to one 
poses set forth. 
end of a rope or cord, E, the opposite end of 
which passes over the groove-pulleys in the 
4o cross-head, and is secured to thefracturedlimb 
by means of adhesive plaster, as employed in 
the ordinary method of applying extension. 
Upon the outer face of the splint, and near balance over the pulleys C, its free end being 75 
Witnesses: 
B. S. TREGEND, 
S. E. BEACH, Jr. 
ROBT. LE BARON. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282750.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MILLER, 
DRILLING MACHINE, 
N0. 23,750. 
w 
Patented Aug. 7, 1883. 
u- - - 
EIILLIHEITIn NIH If 
as 
N Lil Silfilli?till:S 
s 
s m s 
A22esses. 
s 
2T 
aeez/62. 
3-4-2 
v6-7%. 
N. pet ERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES MILLER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO CORNE 
LIUS H. DELAMATER AND GEORGE H. ROBINSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
DRILLING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,750, dated August 7, 1883. 
Application filed Lecember 29, 1882. (No model.) 
r 
45 
 
IO 
25 
I5 front or back of the machine. 
To all, whom it may conce77 : 
Be it known that I, JAMES MILLER, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
5 Drilling-Machines, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention consists in a certain improve 
ment in drilling-machines, the main features 
of which are the convenient and simple mech 
anism by which the operator is enabled readily 
to adjust the feed from the drill end of the 
machine Without having to Walk around the 
machine, and to adjust the perpendicularly 
adjustable carriage or slide from either the 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal section through the line 
aca on Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of the 
left-hand side of the machine. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tional detail, enlarged, of the feed-shaft, rod, 
and feed-gears. Fig. 5 is a sectional detail, 
enlarged, of the pinion-box, pinion, and pin 
ion-shaft for adjusting the drill-carriage higher 
or lower. 
A is the perpendicularly-adjustable carriage 
or slide, which supports the drilling mechan 
S. 
B is the stationary dovetailed standard or 
Support, upon which the carriage A and its 
mechanism are adapted to move vertically. 
This support B is provided with a rack, c, 
upon which a pinion, e, is permitted to work 
perpendicularly. The horizontal shaft D, 
which supports the pinion, is itself supported 
35 by a sleeve, f, which is carried by the carriage 
A. This sleeve is enlarged into an open box 
near its center, and is there divided into two 
parts, g and h, which are held together by 
screws i. This box contains the pinione, but 
allows it to have enough play for the same to 
revolve. The pinion e is secured upon an en 
larged portion of the shaft D, which presents 
shoulders k on each side, as shown in Fig. 5. 
The shaft D is revolved, and with it the pin 
ion, for the purpose of adjusting the height of 
the drill-shaft by means of either hand-wheels 
L. L. from the front or back of the machine, 
which hand-wheels are secured to the shaft D 
by means of feathers and grooves. The shaft 
D is also provided at each end outside of the 
wheels L. L with screw-threads, which are 
E is the driving-shaft, which is itself driven 6o 
covered by nuts m, having handles in for the 
convenience of the operator, whether he be in 
front Or at back Of the machine. These nuts 
are used for the purpose of locking the car 55 
riage A at any height by drawing and clamp 
ing either side of the pinion e or either shoul 
der k against its respective side of the box gh, 
according to which nut in is screwed up. 
from above in any appropriate manner through 
gears Or otherwise. Upon the lower end of 
the shaft E is affixed a bevel-gear, F, which 
engages with another bevel-gear, G, upon the 
drill-spindle H. This gear G and the gear I 65 
are not permanently fastened to the shaft H, 
but they are connected by a sleeve, K, which 
turns in the box M on the carriage A, and 
through which the drill-spindle Hslides freely, 
while it is compelled to turn therewith by a 7o 
feather and groove. The shaft or drill-spindle 
H has the box M and the sleeve K for One of 
its bearings, the bevel-gear G being on one 
side, and the spur-gear I on the other. The 
spur-gear I engages with another spur-gear, 75 
N, fastened to the hollow horizontal feed-shaft 
O. This shaft is supported in bearings o o', 
and has at its opposite end three or more spur 
gears, PQR, of different diameter, which are 
adapted to revolve around the shaft O, and 
are retained in their positions longitudinally 
by the support o' and the collar p. A sliding 
rod, S, passes through the hollow feed-shaft O, 
from the front end of which it protrudes, and 
this rod Shas a feather, q, at one end, which 
is adapted to slide in a longitudinal slot, , in 
the shaft, and also into any one of the slots 
s s' s in the gears P Q R. The spur-gears 
PQR engage with other spur-gears, P. QR, 
of relatively different diameter, which are go 
fastened to One end of the feed-screw T. 
U is a carriage fastened to the opposite end 
of the drill-spindle H to that at which the drill 
is affixed. This carriage is adapted to slide 
along a horizontal guide, t, on the carriage A, 
and is provided with a female screw-thread, 
through which the feed-screw passes. When 
the feed-screw Trevolves, the carriage U will 
slide along the horizontal rail b, traveling the 
length of the feed-screw T and feeding the 
drill to the article that is to be drilled. As 
before stated, the degree of feed is regulated 
95 
Ioo 
2 
2S2, 50 
by means of the feather q, entering the slot of 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 35 
one of the gears PQR of different diameter. secure by Letters Patent, is 
Of course when the feather engages with one 
1. The combination, with the drill-spindle 
wheel-say P-said wheel is caused to rotate and an independent feed-screw for feeding the 
with the feed-shaft O, and transmits motion spindle mounted in fixed bearings, of a slotted 
through the wheel P' to the feed-screw T, feed-shaft made hollow from end to end and 4o 
while the other loose wheels, Q R, are rotated geared with the drill-spindle, two or more 
by the wheels Q R independently of or idly gears fast on the feed-screw and two or more 
upon the feed-shaft O. The gear P engages gears loose on the rear end of the feed-shaft, 
with its corresponding gear, P, which will re- and each having a notch or groove in its bore, 
volve the feed-screw T. If the small gear R and a sliding rod, extending entirely through 45 
is brought into action, the feed will be less than the hollow feed-shaft, provided at the rear end 
if either of the larger gears P or Q is brought with a feather adapted to engage with the 
into action. The degree of the feed varies notch or groove in any one of the said loose 
with the diameter of the gear, which is imme- gears, and projecting from the front end of the 
diately brought into action by the rod S. The feed-shaft, so that it may be grasped at the 5o 
larger the diameter of the gear the greater is front of the machine and slid in or out to en 
the degree of feed given to the drill-spindle H. gage its feather with any one of said loose 
The rod S is disengaged from the gears PQR gears, or to disengage its feather from said 
by pushing it until its feather q entel's a slot gears, substantially as herein described. 
in the collar p, as shown in Fig. 4. 
drawings that the rod S, being extended right 
through the front end of the shaft, and being 
furnished with a knob or handle on the pro 
truding end, can be easily manipulated by the 
attendant without requiring him to leave the 
position in which he ordinarily stands while 
attending to the machine. 
I do not broadly claim for working a feed 
screw a hollow shaft furnished with two or 
more loose gears, either of which may be 
coupled with it by a feather and rod within 
the said shaft; but 
It may be understood by reference to the A composed of the stationary rack c, the ad 
justing-shaft D, furnished with a pinion, e, 
and inclosed within the sleeve f and box of h, 
and having at each end a hand-wheel or han 
dle, L or L, and a screw-thread and nut, m, 6o 
providing for locking the carriage by the at 
tendant either at the front or back of the ma 
chine, substantially as herein described. 
2. The adjusting mechanism of the carriage 55 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
ED. I. MORAN. 
JAMES MILLER. 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282851.txt	(No Model.) 
J. DANZ, Jr. 
DECOY, 
No. 282,851, 
Patented Aug. 7, 1883. 
---- 
w 
 
 
 
 
y 
ZZZzzesses. 
SS 
R 
S. 
 
 
EI 
 
Zzzalezza7. 
6 rezoreys. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JACOB DANZ, J.R., OF ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA. 
DECO Y. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,851, dated August 7, 1883. 
Application filed April 3, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
55 
65 
profiles of the decoy firmly in raised position 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB DANZ, Jr., a with relation to the float, each profile is pro 
citizen of the United States, residing at St. vided with a socket-bearing, e, and the float 
Paul, in the county of Ramsey and State of with an aperture, d, and a rod or stake, 9, 
preferably of metal, is passed through the 
Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Decoys; and I do de 
bearings and aperture, and serves to hold the 
parts securely in relative position. The lower 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
end of the stake-fastening is usually extended 
act description of the invention, such as will 
and pointed at its end, so that it may be easily 
enable other's skilled in the art to which it 
forced into the ground when the decoy is used 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
on land. The head and neck portion of the 
profile is designed, usually, to be pivoted to 
and to letters or figures of reference marked 
the body portion, as indicated at h, SO that 
thereon, which form apart of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
it can be turned back against the side of the 
body portion for convenience and protection 
view of my decoy. Fig. 2 is an edge view, 
in packing. A stop, k, serves to hold the neck 
and Fig. 3 is a bottom view folded. 
in proper position when raised. When a re 
This invention has relation to decoys for 
versible decoy is desired, the lower or keel 
sportsmens use; and it consists in the con 
profile may consist of the profile of the upper 
struction and novel arrangement of parts, as 
portion of a fowl of different kind. When so 
will be hereinafter fully described, and partic 
ularly pointed out in the claims appended. 
used, the lower profile should have the head 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter a 
and neck portion bent back under the float. 
designates the float; b, the upper profile, and 
In order to reverse the decoy, the head and 
neck portion of the upper profile is folded 
c the lower or keel profile. The float is made 
back, while that portion of the lower profile 
flat, its upper and lower surfaces being par 
is raised, the stake is reversed in the bearings, 
allel with each other. It may be conveniently 
constructed of a piece of board r other light 
if necessary, and the decoy is turned upside 
down. In this manner a single decoy may be 
material. The upper surface of the float is 
designed to be painted to represent the back 
made to represent either a goose or a brant, 
of the goose or other fowl. When the decoy 
or a canvas-back duck and a mallard. 
In the construction of these decoys the pro 
is made reversible, both surfaces should be so 
files are preferably made of sheet metal; but 
painted, representing the backs of different 
water-proof pasteboard or other light Water 
kinds of fowls. 
proof material may be employed. A groove, 
l) represents the upper profile, which is 
painted to represent the upper portion of a 
2, may be made lengthwise in the float to re 
ceive the stake when the decoy is packed for 
duck, goose, or other fowl, as the case may 
storage or transportation. 
be. This profile is designed to be hinged or 
Having described this invention, what I 
otherwise connected to the top of the float, so 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
that it may be folded down thereon or raised 
in a plane at right angles thereto. The lower 
is 
1. A decoy having in connection with a floa 
profile, c, is connected to the other side of the 
an upper folding profile and a lower folding 
float, and serves, when the decoy is floating 
profile or keel, substantially as specified. 
on the water, as a keel to steady the same and 
2. A decoy having, in combination. With a 
prevent it from being overturned. When 
used on land, the lower profile, c, serves to flat float, upper and lower profiles connected 95 
fill out the form of the fowl, it being then thereto, and a rod or stake fastening, substan- . 
entirely exposed. The lower profile, c, is also tially as specified. 
designed to fold closely against the float (t, for 
3. The combination, with the float and the 
rod-fastening, of two profiles, respectively con 
convenience in packing when the decoy is 
nected to the upper and under sides of the IOO 
not in use. In order to hold the profile or 
75 
85 
25 
35 
45 
 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in IO 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
- 
JACOB DANZ, Jr. 
- 
Witnesses: 
J. O. VERVATs, 
FRANK O. OLIVER. 
- 
ae 
float, and representing different kinds of Wild 
fowl, substantially as specified. 
4. In a decoy, the profile b, having the piv- 
oted head and neck portion, and a stop to 
5 hold the neck in proper position. When raised. 
5. A folding decoy, consisting of the flat 
float having the folding upper and lower pro- 
files, the groove 8, and the rod-fastening, sub- 
stantially as specified. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US282951.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 282,951. 
V. M. BRAFFETT. 
THILL COUPLING CLIP, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1883. 
MTNESSES: 
& &42-66 
46 o?szec, 
- 
NVENTOR 
24.7% 767 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
a 
VOLNEY M. BRAFFETT, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
THILL-coupling CLP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 282,951, dated August 14, 1883, 
- 
Application filed May 25, 1883. (No model.) 
1 
. To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, VOLNEY M. BRAFFETT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at In 
dianapolis, in the county of Marion and State 
of Indiana, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Securing Thill-Couplings to 
Axles, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of my improvement is to pre 
vent the clip, which is usually formed on thill 
couplings for the purpose of Securing them to 
an axle, from moving on and wearing the axle, 
and thereby becoming loose thereon. This 
object I attain by means of the device illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a thill 
coupling secured to an axle by my device. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective of my connecting-bar. 
Thill-couplings are usually formed with a 
clip having two threaded shanks, and are 
adapted to embrace the wooden and iron por 
tions of an ordinary -carriage-axle, and are 
clamped to said axle by means of a short bar, 
through which said threaded shanks pass, and 
are secured by nuts screwed thereon. It has 
been found in practice that by reason of the 
short bearing thus formed on the axle that 
the frequent side strains to which the coup 
ling is subjected cause the clip to twist slightly 
O 
15 
25 
on the axle, thereby indenting the wood, and 30 
in a short time loosening the clip. I have 
discovered that by placing a second clip on 
the axle at a distance of about seven or eight 
inches from the thill-coupling, and connecting 
the two clips by means of a bar adapted to 35 
receive the threaded portions of both clips 
through it, and then screwing nuts on said 
threaded shanks, the thill-coupling is held 
firmly to its position, and does not twist on the 
axle and Wear loose. 
In the drawings, a, b is the axle; c, the thill 
coupling clip; d, the second clip, and e the . 
bar connecting the two clips, which are 
clamped in place by the nutsffff. 
I claim as my invention- 
The combination, with an axle and a clip 
having a thill-coupling formed thereon and 
adapted to embrace said axle and to be 
clamped thereon, of a second clip also adapted 
to embrace and to be clamped upon said axle, 5o 
and a bar, c, adapted to connect the two clips, 
Substantially in the manner and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
45 
. 
WOLNEY M. BRAEEETT. 
Witnesses: 
E. E. SICKLER, 
H. P. HOOD. 
. 
m 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283052.txt	(No Model.) 
C. R. WILSON. 
SIDE SPRING, 
No. 283,052, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1883. 
WITNESSES 
22, 
42--ee- 
IA WENTOR 
424,222 -- 
73 2-2a-2-2. Attorney 
 
N. reters. Photo-Lithographer, wristington. O. C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEs R. WILSON, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
SIDE SPRING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 283,052, dated August 14, 1883. 
- 
Application filed November 24, 1882. (No model.) 
- 
: - 
- 
- 
- 
. . 
. 
claim. 
55. 
of attachment. 
If the spring is at the outset designed for 65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Detroit, county of Wayne, State of Michigan, 
have invented a new and useful.Improvement 
in Springs for Side-Bar Vehicles; and I de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it per 
tains to make and use it, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification. 
My invention consists in the combinations, 
of devices and appliances hereinafter specified, 
and more particularly pointed out in the 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view, 
Fig. 2 a side elevation, and Fig. 3 a perspec 
tive view, illustrating my invention. 
It is the object of my invention to produce 
and combine with a side-bar vehicle a spring 
which shall be composed of the two following 
elements: Allower section extending across the 
vehicle and suitably clipped or otherwise se 
cured to the side bars, and an upper section 
secured along the middle to the lower section 
and diverging therefrom upward and outward, 
and with its extremities turned in a direction 
parallel to the length of the buggy, either 
backward toward the rear of the buggy or 
3o forward toward its front, this portion being 
firmly secured to the buggy-body, the object 
being to secure at the outset all the advan 
tages as to space and action that are pos 
sessed by the ordinary double spring, in which 
35 the upper and lower sections are parallel with 
each other, and the further advantage of a 
greater length of spring in the upper section, 
between the middle and extremity of the 
spring, and without projecting the end of the 
4o upper section beyond the sides of the buggy 
In carrying out my invention A represents 
the side bars of an ordinary side-bar buggy; 
B, the buggy-body; C, the upper, and C the 
45 lower, section of my improved spring. C 
represents the end portions of the upper sec 
tion, which are turned, either forward or back 
ward, beneath the buggy-body in a direction 
parallel to its length. I prefer to slope these 
5o longitudinal portions C so that their extremi 
ties only shall come up beneath the buggy 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs R. WILSON, of body, and to secure these extremities firmly. 
to the body. This construction gives a very 
long, in fact any desired length of spring be 
tween the middle of the spring and its point 
It is apparent..that a spring thus constructed 
will, with a very light load, possess great elas 
ticity, and consequently insure great ease to 
a person riding. On the other hand, if the 6o 
load is heavy, the spring, from its point of at 
tachment to the body, will be pressed up against 
-body through a corresponding 
the buggy 
length, and thus render the spring stiffer. 
heavy loads, the portions C may be made quite 
short, and might be so much shortened that the 
upper section would possess only the elasticity 
due to its diverging portion and the torsional 
elasticity of the material at the base of the 
longitudinal part C. 
I do not limit myself to any particular meth 
od of uniting the two sections C and C. They 
may be made with the lower section bent up 
ward and the upper section bent downward 75 
along the middle, and fastened by a bolt or 
suitable clips at the middle point; or both 
sections may be bowed upward at the middle 
point, or both bowed downward at the mid 
dle point, and secured in any suitable manner, 
so as to lap upon and re-enforce each other as 
the load is increased, or the sections may be 
separated along the middle part by one or 
more blocks, thus preventing them from so 
lapping upon each other; and I would have 
it understood that in constructing my spring 
any of the foregoing constructions are contem 
plated. So, also, Ido not limit myself strictly 
to a construction in which the upper section, 
C, is brought out to the sides over and paral go 
lel to the lower section, for it may be started 
outin that direction and then brought around, 
by an easy curve of greater or less radius un 
til the extremities point to the front or rear, 
while the middle rests upon the lower leaf. 
I am aware that it is not new to construct a 
spring for a vehicle-body of two flexion mem 
bers or springs arranged one above the other 
and connected at their centers, the outer ends 
of the upper member being arranged parallel IOC 
body. 
95 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
." 
. 
2 
with the ends of the lower member and secured center of said upper spring, and side bars or 
to the body of the vehicle, and the ends of the other support, as and for the purpose set forth. Io 
lower member being attached to the side bars 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
or other support, 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
2s 3,052 
CHARLES R. WILSON. 
What I claim is- 
The combination of the upper transverse 
Spring, having longitudinally-turned end por- 
tions, with the bottom spring, secured to the 
Witnesses: 
N. S. WRIGHT, 
WILLIAM. F. FoRD. 
5. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283152.txt	(No Model.) 
C. A. SCOTT, 
No. 283,152, 
. 
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT TRACK INSTRUMENT, 
Patented Aug, l4, 1883. 
: 
- 
Aa' 
?es 2 
- a - 
Y LE % 
- 
2 
--- 
1 
rt 
z/N 
- . 
- 
N\\\ss. 
62%-4. 
- 
\\\\\\s. Cia res a. Sct, 
NSNew %r. e?s l, 
N. PEERs. Photo-lithographer, washington. p.c. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
1 - 
: 
CHARLEs A. SCOTT, OF BOSTON, MASS ACHUSETTs. 
ELECTRIC-CIRCUIT TRACK-INSTRUMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 283,152, dated August 14, 1883. 
Application filed April 26, 1883. (No model.) - 
- 
55 
'... .2O 
... To all whom it may concern: 
when moved such that it will engage the end 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs A. SCOTT, a 
of a tilting lever, e, pivoted to a post, d. The 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
levere has a counter-weight, e, and its possi 
ton, county of Suffolk, State of Massachusetts, 
ble range of movement is limited by suitable 
stops, as at did. 
5 have invented or discovered a new and useful 
Two contacts, ss, are em 
Improvement in Electric-Circuit Track-In 
ployed, of which one, at least, is movable, 
struments; and I do hereby declare the follow 
which in this case, as illustrated, is the spring 
ing to be a full, clear, concise, and exact de 
contacts. These contacts are insulated from 
scription thereof, reference being had to the 
each other except at the contact point or points, 
D accompanying drawings, making a part of this 
and they constitute the terminals of the line 
specification, in which like letters indicating 
wires r , which lead to an electro-magnet 
ifkeparts 
properly arranged in connection with appro 
Figure 1 represents in side elevation my 
priate mechanism to do the work desired. 
improved track-instrument for making and 
The weight e will suffice to keep the termi 
breaking electric circuits applied to a rail 
nals sis' normally in contact, and so keep the 
way-track, and Fig. 2 illustrates a modifica 
circuit closed; but when a wheel, B, tilts or 
tion thereof. 
rocks the post a to the left, the free end of the 
arm a will engage the adjacentend of the le 
My present invention relates to a track-in 
vere, raise it, and depress the opposite end, so 
strument of that classin which the train itself 
is the active or operative agent in operating 
as to clear or move back from the movable 
the electric-circuit make-and-break mechan 
terminals, and allow the latter to spring away 
ism. While not limiting myself as to the uses 
from and break contact with the other termi 
to which it may be applied, I have especially. 
nal, s, and thereby break the circuit through. 
designed it for use in connection with electric 
wires r. r. This circuit is again closed by the 
circuits for setting or shifting signals, oper 
action of the weighte'; but I do not limit my 
ating annunciators or bell-ringers, or for op 
self to the use of the terminals ss of the form 
erating the electric locks of signal, switch, and 
shown, as the free end of the lever e may be 
- lock-bolt levers or their connections, as the 
caused to make and break, the circuit with 
it same are or may be organized for use. On.or 
otherforms or constructions of terminals, fixed 
30 
along and in connection with railway-lines. 
or movable, by moving one into or out of con 
At the proper point in the track, and in 
tact with the other when one or both are mov 
close proximity to one of the rails R of a track, 
able, or by moving into and out of the circuit . 
and on any suitable pedestal, A, I arrange a 
any suitable insulated conductor when the 
vertical post, a, with its upper end in position 
terminals are fixed; and to illustrate the latter 
to be engaged by the car-wheels B as they pass 
construction I have shown in Fig. 2 a top or 
along, moving, say, from the right. This post 
plan view of the lever carrying an insulated 
is pivoted in an insulated support, b, and it 
contact-piece, i, preferably of spring metal, 
has a tail-piece, a, extending out somewhat 
and adapted in one position to close a circuit 
like one of the arms of a bell-crank or bent 
through two fixed terminals, ss'; also, by such 
reversal of the connections as will come with 
lever, which the device act as a whole resem 
bles. This device is held in its normal posi 
in the skill of the constructer, the apparatus 
tion by means of two springs, cc, arranged on 
may be arranged to operate in like manner 
a guide-bolt, c, and the tension of which is 
with a normally open or broken circuit, and 
such circuit be closed by the action of the 
regulated by a screw-nut and washer, c, where 
by the springs bearing on the arma, one above 
wheels on the post a. 
and the other beneath, (or, if sopreferred, act 
In further illustration of the present inven 
ing horizontally on the front and rear edges 
tion, I have shown in Fig. 3 a double-acting 
of the posta,) may keep the posta in position 
track-instrument embracing substantially the 
to be engaged by the wheels and return it to 
same features of construction, but with the ad 
5o position after a wheel or wheels have passed. dition of another armor tail-piece, ct, which, 
The end of the arm a has a path of motion in connection with devices like those already. 
35 
.45 
65 
75 - 
95 
IOO 
. 
. 
2s 3,152 
2 
described, and marked by the same letters of 
reference, operates in the manner set forth, 
but so as to make or break another circuit 
through the wires ' '. In the organization 
5 and with the arrangement of the contacts here 
shown a train going from the right will close 
instead of break the circuit through the wires. 
' '; but as the arma, in such case, will move 
down, no effect will be produced as regards 
the circuit through the wires ' '; but with a 
train moving the other way the circuit through 
wires ' ' will be broken and the other circuit 
through the wires ' ' will be unaffected; but 
the contacts may be arranged so that either or 
both circuits shall be normally open or nor 
mally closed; or either tail-piece a? or a, or 
both, if so preferred, may be arranged above 
the free end of the corresponding lever, e, so as 
to reverse the action described; or one may be 
above and one below, so that both circuits will 
be simultaneously changed; or the other end of. 
each or either tail-piece a? a may engage the 
free end of its lever e both above and below, 
as may be preferred. 
to any suitable device or mechanism for actu 
ating a Visual or audible signal or a lock, or 
for other similar use; but separate applica 
tions Will be made for apparatus so organized. 
One set of springs, c c, will ordinarily be 
enough to restore the part a to a vertical po 
sition, or two sets, as shown, may be used. 
I am aware of the construction of circuit 
closer shown and described in English Patent 
No. 1,375 of 1878, and disclaim the same. 
2. The pivoted bent-lever mechanism aa, 
held in and returned to normal position by 
springs c c, in combination with a weighted 
and pivoted circuit- changing lever, e, and 
stops d' d', substantially as set forth. 
3. The bent-lever mechanism having a ver 
tical arm, at a, pivoted in position adjacent to 
a track-rail, and with its upwardly-projecting 
end arranged in the path of a car-wheel, and 
having arms ca, in combination with springs 
e c and two circuit-changing levers, ele, ar 
ranged to operate the terminals of different 
circuits, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of a pivoted bent lever, 
at a, springs c c', counterweighted levere, stops 
d' d', and terminals S s, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. An electric-circuit make-and-break appa 
ratus having, in combination, the vertical arm 
a of a bent-lever mechanism, pivoted in posi 
tion adjacent to a track-rail and adapted to be 
moved in both directions under train action; 
two arms extending therefrom, one in each di 
rection, and two electric - circuit make-and 
Either of the circuits referred to may lead break mechanisms arranged for operation, one 
by one of said arms, when the train moves one 
way, without affecting the electrical condition 
of the opposite circuit, and the other make 
and-break mechanism being arranged for op 
eration by the other of said arms, when the 
train moves in the opposite direction, without 
affecting the electrical condition of the other, 
circuit, and means for restoring the vertical 
arm to proper position to be operated by a 
train moving either way, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
IO 
3O 
35 
55. 
.75 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. Abent-lever mechanism, at a, pivoted in 
position adjacent to a track-rail, with the end 
of one arm in the path of the car-wheels, so as 
to be engaged thereby, and the end of the oth 
er arm arranged to operate, when moved, a 
circuit-changing mechanism, in combination 
With springs c c, one on each side of one arm 
of the wheel-actuated lever, substantially as 
Set forth. 
CHARLES A. SCOTT. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN V. YoUNG, 
PATRICK JAMES LANE. 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283252.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 283,252. 
Patented Aug. 14, 1883. 
QUAN KAI. 
SEAM FOR UNITING PIECES OF LEATHER, 
 
/g. 2. 
  
 
-- : A 
o: 
. 
. 
. al 
. 
. 
A. 
 
 
: . 
v 
: 
 
 
w 
  
22%2. SSNS 
deveer 
aiwaywaywa 
Z3 
//triejsey. 
/nventor 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
QUAN KAI, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CA LIFORNIA. 
SEAM FORUNTING PIECES OF LEATHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,252, dated August 14, 1883, 
Application filed December 29, 1851. (No model.) 
- 
 
 
4O 
Ing. 
" 
. 
. 
- 
...t 
". 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
and claimed. 
edges form a uniting means of the same thick- 35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, QUAN KAI, of the city iness as the adjoining leather, and the cover 
and county of San Francisco, in the State of ing-piece being set upon the exterior of the 
California, have invented an Improved Seam parts, the interior of the seam is left smooth, 
for Uniting Pieces of Leather; and I do here- and the whole forms a neat and secure fasten 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being 
I am aware that the edges of uniting parts 
had to the accompanying drawings. 
of leather have been beveled and united with 
My invention relates to an improved seam 
a welt-strip beveled on one edge, and also that 
Io for uniting the edges of two pieces of leather, 
a similar construction with a welt-piece bev 
and will be understood as hereinafter set forth 
eled on both edges has been known, and that 
the uniting edges have been folded upon them 
in the drawings, Figure 1 is a view of the 
selves, with a folded strip inserted between 
inside pieces of leather which are united, the 
them and a covering-piece placed over the 
covering-piece being removed a part of the 
folded strip, and I claim none of these; but 
distance. Fig. 2 is a reverse view of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a section of the parts complete. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A and B are the two pieces or parts of leather 
to be united. Along the edges joined they are 
beveled in directions opposite to each other, 
and the beveled portions are overlapped. In 
the middle of the overlapping bevel edges I 
unite the pieces A B by a line of rivets, and 
on either side of the line of rivets c, I join the 
thin edge of one bevel to the thickportion of 
the other by a line of stitches, e'e'. On the 
exterior of the seam I then place the covering 
piece f, which extends out past the bevels on 
either side, and is united to the pieces A, B at 
points where they have the full thickness of 
the leather by lines of stitches ii. Before the 
covering-piecefis set in place the united bevel 
What I do claim is- 
A seam for uniting pieces of leather, con- . 
sisting of the beveled edges of the said pieces 
laid directly upon each other and united by 
a central row of rivets and a line of stitches on 
each side of the line of rivets, the thickness of 55. 
a single piece of leather being preserved in the 
seam, and a covering -piece, f, placed upon 
and extending past the beveled portions of the 
pieces on both sides, and united on both sides 
to the pieces of leather, at a point where they 6o 
have their full thickness, by lines of stitches, 
substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal. 
QUAN KAI. L. s.) 
W. F. CLARK, 
JNo. H. MILLER. 
5O. 
45. 
Attest: . 
- 
a 
. 
: 
. 
. " 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283353.txt	(No Model.) 
W. MUNZ. 
HAT SHADE, 
No. 283,353. 
Patented Aug. 14, 1883. 
 
1ZZeas'd f 
64- 4%, 
1-r a. 
w 
ag 
N. FSTERS, Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELM. MUNZ, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
HAT-SHADE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 283,853, dated August 14, 1883. 
Application filed May 21, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
claims. 
20 
. 
s 
7o - 
, 
, 
65 
that is depressed by the rib (marked D) as the 55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
rib is extended, and which springs upward and 
Beit known that I, WILHELMMUNZ, of the 
engages the rib, as seen in Fig. 4, when it has 
city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have 
attained its outer or fully-extended position, 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
and holds it in that position. The spring 
ment in Hat-Shades, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description, refer catch may be drawn down to release the rib 6o 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings by means of an eye, I', which extends down 
forming part of this specification. 
through the brim, and to which a tassel, J, is 
My invention consists in the construction shown attached for convenience in operating. 
I prefer to hang at the opposite side of the 
hereinafter described, and pointed out in the 
brim a tassel, J', which is held when the tassel 
J is pulled down to prevent the tilting of the 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, showing my 
improved shade upon a hat, the shade being 
hat. 
For convenience in drawing out the rib D', 
in contracted or folded position. Fig. 2 is a 
and to distinguish this rib from the others, I 
perspective view, showing the shade expanded. 
attach to its end a tassel, D'. 
Fig. 3 is an under perspective view of the 
I' is a spring-catch similar to that I, and in 
shade removed from the hat. Fig. 4 is an en 
such a position that the rib D' engages upon 
larged perspective detail, showing the catch 
it when about one-half of the ribs are extended, 
by which the shade is held in extended condi 
the remainder of the ribs remaining in their 
tion. 
contracted position. The eye I of the catch 
A is a hat, that may be of any suitable 
I receives the same tassel-cord as the eye of 
form, having preferably, however, a flat brim, 
the catch I, so that both catches are drawn 
B, about equal in circumference to the periph 
down by a single movement of the tassel. 
ery of the shade when contraeted; but size is 
The purpose of spreading out only one side 
not an essential consideration. 
Cisa metal ring, made preferably with flanges 
of the shade is to enable the hat to be used as 
a sunshade when the sun is continually upon 
ec', fitting, respectively, the brim and the part 
one side, without the possible inconvenience 
of the crown in immediate connection there 
of a broad extension upon the other side. 
with. The vertical flange e has upon it a 
The extension folding over the brim when - 
number of outturned lugs, c, to which the 
contracted in a number of overlapping folds, 85 
inner ends of the metal ribs D are pivoted, so 
forms an ornament to the hat, and a shade, not 
that they can be turned inward to the hat 
only preventing the passage of the sun's rays 
crown when the shade is contracted, as seen 
to the brim, but also protects the part of the 
in Fig. 1, or can be extended, as shown in Figs. 
i crown in contact with the head. 
2, 3, and 4. 
Eis the cover, secured to the crown in prox 
imity to the brim by means of a cord, F, or 
otherwise, and secured to the ends of the ribs 
at or near the periphery, where is a cord, sel 
vage, or hem, G, serving to secure the ends of 
the ribs to each other. 
His an elastic cord or spring (rubber pre 
ferred) tending to hold the ribs in their inner 
position, as seen in Fig. 1, the cord being at 
; tached to eyes d upon the ribs, or otherwise 
connected to them at a distance from their 
hinged ends. 
When one of the ribs-as the one marked D', 
for instance-is drawn to its most extended 
position, (see Fig. 4.) all the ribs, owing to 
their connection G, are also drawn out into 
position shown in Figs. 2 and 3. 
To keep the shade in its extended position 
Isecure to the metal ring C a spring-catch, I, 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a hat-shade, the combination, with the 
spring-pivoted ribs D, of the contracting-cord 
H, located between the ends pf the ribs, as set 
forth. 
2. In a hat-shade, the combination, with the 
brim, of the extension folding over the brim in 
a number of overlapping folds, as set forth. 
3. En a hat-shade, the combination of piv 
oted ribs D, cord G, and rib-retaining catch 
I, as set forth. 
4. The combination of the extension, the 
pivoted ribs, the connecting rim cord, and the 
spring-catches I and I", as set forth. 
SAM L. KNIGHT, 
GEO. H. KNIGHT. 
WILHELM MUN Z. 
Witnesses: 
. 
- 
- 
75. 
9O 
95 
IOO 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283453.txt	G. H. ALTON. 
BUTTON SETTING INSTRUMENT, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1883. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 283,453, 
ae 
ea 
3. c. 
al 
 
Wil in E S S E S. 
2.4% V2.1% 
five 
Or. 
(a -v-241 --rl 
 
N. PeTERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. ALTON, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE BELLE 
PATENT BUTTON FASTENING 
BUTTON-SETTIN 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
G INSTRUMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 283,453, dated August 21, 188?. 
Application filed June 
30, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
15 
To all tuhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE H. ALTON, of 
Lynn, county of Essex, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvement in But 
ton-Setting Instruments, of which the follow 
ing description, in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification, like let 
ters on the drawings representing like parts. 
Myinvention relates to an implement for set 
ting or fastening buttons upon leather or other 
material by a metallic fastening, shown as a 
headed tackhaving a malleable point or shank 
to pierce the material and be clinched about 
the eye of the button. The implement em 
ployed in this instance consists, essentially, of 
two members, shown as jaws pivoted together 
and having handles to operate like pliers, one 
of the said members being provided with a tack 
holding device to engage the head of the fast 
2O ening or tack and holditin proper position to 
pierce the material when the members or jaws 
are forced together by the handles. The other 
jaw or member has an anvil-piece provided at 
its upper face, at opposite sides of the post 
about which the anvil is made to turn, with a 
clinching-surface, and with an opening to re 
ceive the point or shank of the tack, the said 
anvil, when in one position, operating as a sup 
port for the material, as when the tack or 
single-pronged fastening is forced through it 
the tack then entering the said opening, while. 
in its other or second position the anvil-face 
presents a clinching-surface opposite the point 
of the tack, so that when the jaws are again 
35 pressed together, a button having been hung 
upon the tack previously inserted through the 
leather, the point of the tack, by meeting the 
said clinching-surface, will be bent or clinched 
around the shank of the button, fastening it 
4o securely. Allocking or holding device is em 
ployed to retain the anvil-piece in proper po 
sition to co-operate with the tack held by the 
other jaw, and the anvil-pieceisprovided with 
a thumb-nut, by which to turn it. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation and a partial sec 
tion of a button-setting implement embodying 
this invention, the jaws being open; Fig. 2, a 
similar view, partly in longitudinal section, a 
tack having been forced through the material; 
So and Fig. 3 is a face view of the anvil-piece. 
45 
 
-- 
55 
The upper side of the anvil-piece is pro- 7o 
The implement consists, mainly, of two mem 
bers or jaws, a, b, provided with handles cd, 
and pivoted together by a pivot, e, the said 
members being acted upon by a suitable spring 
tending to separate the jaws. 
The jaw ( is provided with a tack-holding 
yice, consisting of a seat, h, to receive the head 
of the tack ac, and a forked spring, i, adapted 
to engage the under side of the said head, em 
brace the shank or point of the tack, and hold 6O 
it securely in the said seat, as shown in Figs. 
I and 2. 
The co-operating jaw b is provided with a 
movable anvil-piece, k, the under side of which 
is seated upon the said jaw, and which is held 65 
thereon by the post m, which receives the 
thumb-nuts, the latter, in engagement with 
the post, serving as the pivot or center of mo 
tion for the anvil-piece. 
vided, at one side of the center of the post n, 
with an opening, n, and at the other side of 
the center of the said post with a clinching 
surface, p, and the said anvil-piece is turned, 
when desired, by the operator engaging the 75 
thumb-pieces. When the anvil-piece is turned 
to place the opening opposite the point of 
the tack held upon the jaw a, as in Fig. 1, the 
said opening will receive the shank of the said 
tack when the jaws are pressed together to 8o 
force the point of the tack through the leather 
or other matrial t, resting against the face of 
the anvil-piece k and supported thereby. 
When the clinching-surface p of the anvil 
piece is rotated to place the said surface oppo- 85 
site the point of the tack held by the jaw a, 
the said point will be curled over or beclinched 
when the jaws are forced together. The hold 
ing or locking device o (shown in Fig. 1) has 
a spring-pressed stud which engages the 
thumb-nuts, holding it in proper position with 
relation to the jaw band the tack held by the 
jaw a. The said holding device yields when 
the anvil-piecek is forcibly turned on its pivot 
by the operator. 
When the apparatus is in use, the post m 
will be substantially in vertical position, and 
the anvil-piece k, supported at its under side, 
so as not to tip or rock, will rotate in a plane 
parallel with relation to the face of the jaw b. Ioo 
95 
90 
2 
- 
2S3,453 
In operation a tack is placed in the tack-hold 
ing device h i, and the material to which the 
button is to be fastened is placed on the face 
of the anvil-piece k, which is then held by the 
device 0, with the opening or passage ninpo 
sition to receive the point of the tack, after 
which the jaws are pressed together, forcing 
the tack through the material and into the pas 
sage in without bending its shank. The jaws 
are then permitted to separate, thematerial re 
maining upon the shank of the tack, and close 
to its head, and the eye of the button-shank 
then placed over the shank of the said tack, 
as shown in Fig. 2. The anvil-piece k is then 
turned by the operator, who engages the 
thumb-nuts, thus presenting the clinching 
surface p opposite the point of the tack, when 
the jaws are again pressed together, and the 
point of the tack, striking upon the said sur 
face p, is clinched or curled over around the 
shank of the button, securely fastening it up 
on the material. A device of this kind oper 
ates equally well with buttons of all sizes, and 
is certain in its operation. 
I claim 
1. A button-setting implement composed of 
two members, one of the said members being 
provided with a tack-holding device, and the 
other with a pivoted anvil-piece, having at its 
face an opening or passage to receive the point 
of the tack without bending it, and a clinch 
ing-surface to operate upon the point of the 
tack and clinch it about a button-shank, the 
said opening or passage and the said clinch 
ing-surface being at opposite sides of the cen- 35 
ter of rotation or pivot of the saidanvil-piece, 
and the latter being arranged to rotate in the 
plane of the face of the jaw supporting it, all 
substantially as described. 
2. In a button-setting implement, the com 
bination of one member or jaw provided with 
attack-holding device, of the co-operating mem 
ber provided with a pivoted anvil-piece hav 
ing a tack-receiving opening, n, and a clinch 
ing-surface, p, at its face, and a holding device, 45 
o, whereby the said anvil-piece is retained in 
proper position with relation to the tack held 
by the other member of the implement, sub 
stantially as described. 
bination of one member or jaw provided with 
a tack-holding device, ofthe co-operating mem 
ber provided with a pivoted anvil-piece hav 
ing a tack-receiving opening, n, and a clinch- 
. 
ing-surface, p, at its face, and having a post 55 
provided with a thumb-nut by which the said 
anvil-piece may be turned, and a locking de 
vice to hold the said anvil-piece in operative 
position, all substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
Intestimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
3. In a button-setting implement, the com- 5o 
GEO. H. ALTON. 
Witnesses: 
JOS. P. LIVERMORE, 
BERNICE. J. NOYES. 
, 
IO 
25 
3O. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283553.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- 
- 
?????. I. ARTZ, OF COLUMBUS, ????. 
.. 
? 
?? ? - PRoP Fo? ?? RRIAGES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 283,553, dated August 21, 1883. 
... - 
|- Application filed June 14, 1883. (No model.) 
i 
... 
I 
5 
. I O 
I 5 
length and thickness, and glined together or 
To all, wholly it may concern.: 
| 
otherwise fastened. This T-head, as shown 
Be it known that I, GEORGE L. ???Z, ? 
i citizen of the United States, residing at Co 
in the drawings, runs the whole length of the 
block, and is preferably of the form shown 
lumbus, in the county of Franklin and State of 
that is, having the cross of the T slightly de 
Ohio, have invented new and useful Improve 
pressed on its top for the rnbler to sink into. 
ments in Top-Prop. Blocks for Carriages, of 
The rubber cushion C is cut or cast of a shape 
which the following is a specification. 
in section so as to be drawn over and bind in 
My invention relates to the class of top 
prop blocks generally sold to the trade, and | with this head-strip. I also slip over the 
which are usually driven over the prop-iron joined sections of the blank a rubber sheath, 
in the construction of the vehicle. When D, as shown clearly in Figs. 3 and 4. 
I may finish the made block seen in Fig. 3 . 
made of wood, they have been found objec 
by varnishing, or by a covering of leather or 
tionable, because of their tendency to split or 
composition. I saw the blank strips out of 
break when driven over the prop-iron. When 
lumber of the proper thickness, groove the 
made of rubber only, they were found anneces 
bottom section, as described, turn into proper 
sarily expensive, and when made with a wood- | 
shape, and cut the strips to the proper length 
en bottom section, having a dovetailed head 
for the block. As is easily understood from 
over the lored prop-hole to receive a rubber 
cushion, these objections were only aggra- | the description and drawings, this method ob 
vated. 
viates all necessity for boring a hole for the 
The object of my improvements is to perfect prop-iron, and that, in connection with fur 
a, prop-block of a construction analogous to i nishing a cushion for the bows of the top to 
this last-mentioned form, which shall avoid rest upon, is the object accomplished by my 
the danger of splitting, and be manufactured improvement. 
at reasonable cost. I do this by making the 
The recessa is lined with strips, c, of ribbed 
wooden part or blank of two sections to avoid or projecting rubber on one or more sides, to 
the boring of the hole, the bottom section grip the iron and avoid splitting, as before 
having a recess grooved out longitudinally, i mentioned. The fibers or grain of the wood 
which is covered by the top section, carrying are crossed in the construction described, ren 
a dovetailed or T. head, over which the rubber | dering it almost impossible to split the block. 
cushion is drawn. I also line the recess, on | The finished block is driven over the prop 
iron, and the connections made in the usual 
one or more sides, with ribbed surfaces of rub 
ber, to prevent the prop-iron from gripping 
or sticking to the sides as the block is driven 
over it, and to produce a firm hold without 
| 35 
binding hard enough to split or break the 
i parts. This construction is fully hereinafter 
described with reference to the accompanying 
drawings, wherein- 
Rigure 1 represents, in longitudinal section, 
a top-prop embracing my improvements; Fig. 
2, a cross-section thereof; Tig. 3, a perspective 
showing the top rubber, and Fig. 4. a perspec 
tive view of the elastic sheath. 
. A is the lower section of the wooden blank, 
and B the upper section, the former being 
grooved to form the recessa, for the reception 
of the prop - iron, and the latter properly 
formed with a longitudinal T-head, b, both 
sections being sawed from lumber of suitable 
manner. 
" I claim- 
1. A top-prop block for vehicles, in which 
the rubber cushion is drawn over and held by 
a T-head on the top section of a wooden blank 
of two joined sections, the lower one of which 
is grooved longitudinally, to form, in connec 
tion with the top one, a hole or recess for the 
prop-iron, the parts being constructed and ar 
ranged substantially as described, for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. In atop-prop block for vehicles, the com 
bination, with the rubber cushion C and the 
top section, B, (of a wooden blank of two sec 
tions,) having a T or dovetailed head, b, of the 
bottom section, A, having the recessa, and an 
elastic sheath, D, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3o 
' 
. 
- 
? 
? 
, , 
---- 
55 
?? 
65 
85 
95 
. 45 
 
9 . 
- 
283, 553 
3. In a top-prop block composed of a top | hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
rubber cushion for the bows, and a wooden | nesses. 
blank having a hole or recess for the prop- 
iron, the said hole provided with a surface of 
5 ribbed or projecting rubber, c, substantially 
| 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
| 
Witnesses: " 
CHARIES TAPPAN, 
J. V. MOONEy. 
, 
. 
v 
? 
? || 
GIEORGE I.. AR TZ. 
3. "I ? 
r 
 
? 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283653.txt	(No Model.) 
E. J. PAXS0N. 
TEMPORARY BINDER. 
 
perers, Photo-ahegraphs, Washirgo. 
(~~~~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
EDWARD J. PAXSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PATENT OFFICE. 
w 
TEMPORARY BINDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent. No. 283,653, dated August 21, 1883. 
Application filed February 1, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
- 
55 
20 
25 
65 
latter. 
15 
key, F, having an internally-threaded open 
?o al/ ?vfu??? ?? ??? concer?, : 
ing adapted for the reception of the projec 
Be it known that I, EDWARD.J. PAXSON, a 
tions.f, so that on applying the key to said 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
projections and turning it the prongs will be 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain Improvements in Temporary Binders, 
contracted and the Stem D released from the 
control of the tube B, from which it may be 
of which the following is a specification. 
: thrust by the key, and then removed from the 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
device whereby sheets of paper or other mate 
When only a few sheets are to be clamped 
rial can be securely fastened together, but in 
together, Iinterpose between the top sheet and 6o 
such a manner that one or more sheets can be 
the head b of the stem D a tubular washer, G, 
readily detached when necessary, and as read 
as shown in Fig. 4. 
ily reinserted after use. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
Different modes of locking the stem D to the 
tube B may be adopted in carrying out my in 
a view of a number of sheets of paper or other 
material secured by my improved fastener; 
vention. For instance, the inner end of the 
stem may be enlarged and threaded for adap 
Fig. 2, a view, on a larger scale, of the two 
tation to an internal thread in the tube, as 
parts of the fastener detached from each other; 
shown in Fig. 5, an opening of suitable form 
Fig. 3, a view of a key for unlocking the fast 
being made in either end of the stem for the 
ener; Fig. 4, a view of the fastener, showing 
reception of a key, whereby said stem can be 
how the same is employed for securing a few 
screwed into or unscrewed from the tube. 
sheets together; and Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8, views 
Another modification is shown in Fig. 6, in 
showing modifications of the invention. 
which the inner end of the stem D carries a 
In Fig. 1, A represents a number of sheets 
lever, i, the arms of which engage with notches 
of paper or other material, in each of which, 
near one edge, is formed an opening, the open 
in the tube B, the lever being operated so as 
ings of all of the sheets coinciding with each 
to withdraw the alms of the same from the 
other, and being adapted for the reception of notches by means of an oval key adapted to 
engage with a pin on the lever and a fixed pin 
a tube, B, having at one end a flange or head, 
on the end of the stem. When the stem is 
a, bearing on the bottom sheet of the series. 
split, as in FigS. 1 and 2, a tapered screw-plug 8o 
3o To the interior of the tube B is adapted a 
may be used, as shown in Fig. 7, to expand 
stem, D, having a head, b, for bearing on the 
the prongs g, so that their lugs di will engage 
top sheet of the series, this stem being split at 
with the internal notches of the tube B, the 
the inner end, so as to form two prongs, gg, 
prongs possessing such elasticity that they will 
each having a lug, d, adapted to notches e in 
be contracted when released from the expand 
35 the tube B. The lugs dare rounded or bev 
ing influences of the tapered plug. 
eled on the under side, so that om thrusting: 
In some cases two or more tubes B or stems 
the stem into the tube the lugs will yield and 
D may be combined with a single head, as 
engage with one set of notches after another 
shown in Fig. 8, a better hold upon the sheets 
until the stem D has been introduced into the 
being thus secured than when contracted heads 
tube as far as the mass of sheets will permit, 
4? the engagement ofthelugs with the notches pre 
are used. . 
By adapting the tube and stem directly to 
venting the withdrawal of the stem D, so that 
openings formed in the sheets neatness and 
the sheets are firmly 
confined between the 
compactness are insured, the sheets thus se 
heads at and b. 
cured together being handled as conveniently 95 
In order to release the fastener, the prongs . 
as a bound book; and in combination with a 
g of the stem D must be contracted, so as to 
book-back the device may be used to perma 
withdraw their lugs from the notches in the 
nently or temporarily bind the sheets into 
tube. To effect this I form on each of said 
book-form. 
prongs a tapering threaded projection, f, the 
So contraction of the prongs being effected by a 
Instead of forming openings in the sheets, IOO 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
75 
85 
90 
 
283653 
the edges of the same may be slotted. for the 
reception of the fastener, and in some cases 
the tube B may be made so as to cut an open 
ing in the sheets for its reception. 
- 
claim as my invention- 
1. In a temporary binder, the combination 
of the tube B, having a head, a, with the stem 
D, having a head, b, and adapted to slide in 
the tube B, the inner end of said stem being 
constructed as described, whereby it may be 
caused to engage with or may be disengaged 
from the tube B, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the tube B, having a 
head, C, the stem D, having a head, b, and 
having its inner end constructed for engage 
W 
ment with the tube, and a key, whereby the 
stem is freed from engagement with the tube, 
as Set forth. 
3. The combination of the internally-notched 
tube B with the stem.D, having elastic prongs 
(, With lugs d, and with a device for expand 
ing or contracting the prongs, as set forth. 
Intestimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
EDWARD J. PAXSON. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS DUGAN, 
HARRY SMITH. 
C 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283754.txt	(No Model.) 
J. CHANDLER 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MEANS FOR STOPPING RAILROAD TRAINS, 
No. 283,754. 
Patented Aug. 28, 1883. 
A 
Exz2zza 
22.SS 2. 
S S. 
22a3S 
S. 2xxz. 37 S 
22 
%22 
5. 
21 
 
 
Seas 
  
 
 
WITNESSES: 
s 
24-4- YENTR 
By his attorneys, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. CHANDLER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MEANS FOR STOPPING RAILROAD TRAINS, 
No. 283,754, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1883. 
Aiz 5. 
 
 
 
 
 
FAAETEAAFIT 
 
 
 
  
235 
 
tes t Sa'a 
WITNESSES: 
272etail 
INVENTOR: 
ez-Z-42-2- 
By his Attorneys, 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN CHANDLER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
MEANS FOR STOPPNG RAILROAD RANS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 283,754, dated August 28, 1883. 
Application filed April 2, 1883. 
No model.) 
65 
cut-off valve, (designated generally by the let 
Be it known that I, JOHN CHANDLER, a citi. ter D in Fig. 1.) This valve comprises a cas 
ing, b, which is tapped by the steam-pipe C 55 
on opposite sides, and which has stuffing-boxes 
C C at its ends exterior to the combustion-cham 
ber. A. Through the stuffing-boxes pass two 
waive-stems, dd, both of which are attached 
to a slide, e, which is adapted to fit and play 6o 
in the chamber, and which is provided with a 
port, g, which may be brought to register with 
the Steam-inlets, so that steam can pass freely 
through, as shown in Fig. 1; but when the 
slide e is moved-to the right in Fig. 1, for 
example-the mass of the valve is interposed, 
and cuts off the steam from the engines at once. 
The valve-stem d is arranged to playin suit 
able bearings, f, and is embraced by a spring, 
h, which abuts against a collar on the stem. 
This spring constantly tends to move the slide 
e to the right and to automatically cut off the 
Steam. Normally, therefore, this spring stands 
compressed, as in Fig. 1, by means of a device 
which I will now describe. The other valve- 75 
stem, d, is arranged to play in a suitable bear 
ing, f', and it has a double eye, i, to one of 
which is attached a cord or wire, k, which 
passes over a sheave or fair leader, j, and 
to a ring on this cord or wire is secured one 8o 
end of a cord, k", which passes over a sheave 
or fair leader, l, and is attached to a bracket 
or fixed arm, in. The cord k is thus held 
stretched in a horizontal or nearly horizontal 
position. 
It is obvious that with the parts arranged 
as just described, and as shown in Fig. 1, if 
the cord k be cut the spring h will be free to 
act, and will act to shift the slide e and in 
stantly cut off the stealm. In order to effect go 
this cutting of cordic' when it is desired that 
the train shall stop on any account, I employ, 
by preference, the mechanism I will now de 
Scribe. 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Zen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, Kings county, New York, have invented 
certain Improvements in Means for Stopping 
Railway-Trains, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
Myinvention relates, in the main, to improve 
ments on the safety-block system and appli 
ances described in my Patent No. 273,465, 
dated March 6, 1883. In my said patent I 
show and describe a mechanism for opening 
the valve in the pipe of the air-brake of the 
Car, and for shutting off the steam from the 
engine of the locomotive, which mechanism is 
under the control of the signal-man. The road 
stands normally closed to the train, and is 
Opened to let the train pass by the signal-man 
at the block. 
My present invention consists in improve 
ments in the means employed for carrying this 
signal system into effect, all as will be more 
particularly hereinafter described with refer 
ence to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of a loco 
motive and truck provided with my improve 
ments, the plane of the section being substan 
tially online 11 in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation of the same. Figs. 3 and 4 are views 
of different forms of the valve-cord cutter de 
tached, which will be referred to more partic 
ularly hereinafter. Fig. 5 is a sectional ele 
Vation, designed to illustrate the application 
of my Valve to the air-brake pipe of one of the 
cars of a train. 
I will first describe my invention as applied 
to the throttling of the steam from the loco 
motive-engines, with especial reference to Figs. 
I to 4. 
Let A. represent the combustion-chamber of 
a locomotive of any kind whatever, and BB 
the engines of the latter. 
I have not shown all the details of the loco 
motive, as these have no special bearing on 
my invention. 
C is the steam-pipe of the locomotive, which 
Connects by branch pipes at a with the engine 
cylinders. The ordinary throttle-valve is at 
the opposite end of the boiler, of course, and 
is not shown. In the pipe C, inside of the 
combustion-chamber, is arranged my safety 
on the road-bed, and set across the track un 
der the rails F. On this shaft is fixed, in the 
proper position to engage the cordic', a cutter 
or cutting-blade, G. On the other end of the 
shaft is fixed an arm, n, from which a connect 
ing-rod, o, extends to and couples with an 
other arm, n, on a shaft, E, mounted rota 
tively in a suitable frame, H, at the side of 
the track. This shaft is provided with an 
E is a shaft mounted to rotate in bearings 95 
85 
OC 
O 
15 
35 
45 
 
2 
w 
2S3,754 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
operating-lever, I, which is normally drawn 
Over by a Spring, p, as in Fig. 2, so as to keep 
the Cutter G. erect. In order that the cutter 
may be held firmly in this erect position, the 
lever is provided with a spring latch or dog, 
q, which engages a notch, ", in the frame H. 
I will now describe the operation. 
When the train is approaching, if the sig 
inal-man wishes it to pass he lifts the dog q 
from the notch r, and pulls over the lever I 
far enough to cause the cutter G. to lie down 
out of the way. He must hold the lever in 
this position, as there is no means of locking 
it fast, and if he releases it the spring p will 
immediately return it and set the cutter. 
After the train has passed he lets go the lever 
and it returns to the position shown in Fig. 2, 
and no train can pass until it is pulled over 
again. - If for any reason it is desirable that 
the train shall stop despite the efforts of the 
engineer to pass, the signal-man simply allows 
the lever to stand. When the locomotive 
reaches the cutter G, the latter severs the cord 
k', and the spring h instantly shifts the slide e 
So as to cut off the steam from the engines, and 
the locomotive must stop until a new cord, le", 
is provided and placed. 
I prefer to provide the cutter G with a 
hooked extremity, so as to make sure of its 
catching and severing the cord; but this is 
mainly precautionary. Where trains are run 
ning in both directions on a single track, a 
cutter with a double edge, as shown in Fig. 
3, may be employed. 
In cases where it is not deemed necessary 
to employ signal-men at intervals along the 
Toad, the engines may be provided with my 
Valve D, as shown, and socket-pieces s, as 
shown in Fig. 4, be secured firmly on the road 
Way at intervals. The trains will then be pro 
vided with cutters having sockets to fit said 
Socket-pieces, as in Fig. 4. Now, if a train 
should break down or be stopped from any 
Cause, it will be the duty of the conductor or 
train-men to take such cutter back on the 
track to the nearest socket-pieces, and fix it 
there, as shownin Fig. 4. Then any approach 
ing train Will be stopped, and accidents from 
collision prevented. This may be, of course, 
before and behind the train, if danger be ap 
prehended from both directions. 
I do not of course limit myself to this pre 
cise construction and arrangement of the valve 
D and its cord and operating mechanism. I 
have shown one construction and arrangement, 
but this might be varied in many ways, ac 
COrding to the taste and judgment of the con 
Structer, Without departing from my inven 
tion. The essential features are the sliding 
valve, held open by a cord, which is to be 
severed by a cutter on the track or roadway, 
and the Spring or its equivalent arranged to 
shift the valve when the cord is cut. 
Some variations from the construction shown 
might be made with respect to the means for 
Operating the cutter G-as, for example, the 
Connecting-rod O might couple directly to the 
- 
lever I, and the cutter be maintained erect by 
some device equivalent to the dog q; or the 
lever I might be mounted directly on the end 7o 
of shaft E, and shaft E, arm in, and rod o be 
omitted. I have not deemed it necessary to 
show every variation in the structure that it 
would be possible to make. As only the short 
bit of cord k is destroyed when the train is 75 
stopped, it is only necessary to supply the en 
gineer with several extra cords which may be 
readily placed. The extra eye on the end of 
of the stem d, Fig. 1, enables the engineer to 
seize and draw out said stem in setting the 8o 
Valve anew. 
I will now refer to Fig. 5, in which I have 
shown my valvelDarranged to control the air or 
vacuum brakes of a car. In this figure I have 
shown the valve as actuated by a different de- 85 
vice from that shown in Figs. 1 and 2. This 
is intended to illustrate the fact that the Valve 
may be tripped and permitted to act by vari 
ous mechanisms, and is not limited to a cutter. 
and cord. I have employed the same letters go 
of reference as in Figs. 1 and 2, as far as pos 
sible, to designate equivalent parts. . 
J. represents a car of any kind whatever, 
provided with the usual air, steam, or vacuum 
brakes, of which Kis the cylinder, Cthe train- 95 
pipe, and D the valve called the conductor's 
valve. This Valve is constructed the Same 
as that shown in Fig. 1, except that the slide 
e need have no port (, as it stands normally 
closed. 
To the stem d is attached a cord, k, which 
passes over a sheave, l, and extends back and 
is connected to a bar, t, mounted to slide in 
fixed hangers v. v. The rear end of this bar at 
has an eye, which is engaged by a pin, t, on Io5 
the end of a curved lever, I', which is pivoted 
at a between brackets of on the car-body. 
It will be obvious that if the curved free 
end of the lever k be pressed upward by any 
obstacle on the track, the pint will be with- IIO 
drawn from the eye in bar I, and the springh 
will be free to act, and will act to raise the 
slide e to the upper end of the valve-casing, 
and thus uncover the end of pipe C. This 
breaks the vacuum and allows the springs to II5 
close the brakes on the wheels in the usual 
Way. 
In order to actuate the lever k, I fix on the 
shaft E a cam, G, which stands normally erect 
in the path of lever k", and is or may be actu- I2O 
ated by a lever precisely as the cutter shown 
in Figs. I and 2 is actuated. I curve the le 
verk, as shown, in order that the cam may act 
upon it to release the bar at in whichever way 
the car may be moving. This is irhportant, as I 25 
such cars are run.indifferently, with eitherend 
ahead. Should it be necessary for the conduct 
or to set the brakes, he may easily effect this 
by means of a lever, c, similar to that shown 
in my patent before mentioned, a spring, l', Igo 
stronger than the spring h, being interposed 
between the stem d and the cord le. 
In order to avoid a too sudden and rigid ar 
rest of the motion of lever k", when it strikes 
IOC 
w 
2S3,254 
. 
6O 
the cam G, I prefer to provide buffer-springs construction differs from this, in that no de 
w ic, of rubber or other suitable elastic mate- pendence whatever is placed upon any one. 
rial, arranged in the stirrup-guide in which 
Unless the signal-man is alert, the train must 55 
the end of said lever plays. 
stop despite the engineer. I employ a cut 
Where cams G are employed in lieu of cut 
off or throttle-valve in the steam-pipe leading 
ters, these may be made to fit socket-pieces set 
to the engines, and the steam will inevitably 
in the roadway precisely as shown in Fig. 4. 
be cut off from the latter unless the signal 
A semaphore may be connected to the lever 
man lowers the cutter or calm. 
I, and be operated by it, precisely as shown 
The lever I, which operates the cutter or 
in my former patent. 
cam G, is locked by a dog, so that the cutter 
It will be seen that I have shown two ap 
or cam must stand normally erect, and When 
plications of my valve D-one to cutting off 
pulled over it will be, when released, drawn 
the steam from the locomotive-engines, and 
back by the spring p. The dog gholds it erect. 65 
one to setting the brakes of the cars; and I 
Having thus described my invention, I 
have shown devices for tripping or actuating 
claim 
1. As a means for stopping a train inde 
the valve. 
I do not wish to limit myself to any particu 
pendently of the engineer, the combination of 
lar device for setting free the slide e, except 
a valve arranged in the steam-pipe leading 7O 
that whatever device may be employed it shall 
from the ordinary throttle-valve of a locomo 
stand normally in a position to free said slide, 
tive to the engines, the said pipe, a spring ar 
and shall be under the control of the signal 
ranged to close said valve by its elastic ten 
man, so that he may permit a train to pass. 
sion, a cord or wire arranged to hold said 
valve open normally by distending said spring, 75 
It will be understood that the valve shown 
in Fig. 5 is arranged to serve as a conduct 
and means, substantially as described, mounted 
or's valve as well as a regular train-Valve. 
on the roadway and arranged to release or cut 
I may, however, place this valve under the 
said cord or wire and permit said valve to 
car and employ a separate valve for the con 
close when the locomotive passes, all arranged 
ductor. It should also be understood that the 
substantially as described, and for the pur 
cutting of the cord k" in Figs. 1 and 2 may be 
poses specified. 
made to cut off the steam from the engines, as 
2. The combination, with the combustion 
shown, and at the same time set the brakes 
chamber A of a locomotive and the Steam 
by opening the valve in the air-pipe. This 
pipe C, of the valve D, mounted in said chalm 
may be readily done by extending a branch 
ber, with the stuffing-boxese c exterior there 
cord or wire from the wire k, Fig. 1, over 
to, the spring h, arranged to act on the slide 
sheaves or fair leaders to a valve, D, in 
e, as described, and the cords k. and k, all al 
the air-pipe under the locomotive. I do not 
ranged to operate substantially as set forth. 
wish it understood that it is necessary to pro 
3. The combination, with the shaft E and the 
vide distinct releasing devices for the air and 
cutter or cam G, mounted thereon, of the le 
steam valves. 
wer I, mounted in a suitable frame and Con 
I prefer to arrange my steam cut-off valve 
nected with the shaft E, the spring 2), al 
in the combustion-chamber of the locomotive; 
ranged to act upon the lever and keep the cut 
but it might be arranged to control the steam 
ter G. erect, and the dog q, arranged to engage 
pipe C at some other point between the en 
a notch in the frame, substantially as and for 
gineer's valve and the engines. 
the purposes set forth. 
I am aware that it is not new to employ a 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
cutter on the roadway to Sever a cord on a 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
passing locomotive, and thus permit a Spring 
witnesses. 
to throw open the whistle-valve; and I am also 
aware that cams have been employed for the 
same purpose. In such cases, however, the 
stoppage of the train depends upon two per 
sons, the signal-man and the engineer. My 
HENRY CONNETT, 
ARTHUR C. FRASER. 
JOHN CHANDLER. 
Witnesses: - 
9O 
95 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283854.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. BLISS, 
SAFETY LOCK FOR FIRE ARMS, 
No. 283,854, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1883. 
WNESSES 
2-e/ (26-62 -- 
 
s 
NVENTOR. 
-- 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. BLISS, OF NORWICH, CONNECTICUT. 
SAFETY - O C K FOR FIRE - A RMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 283,854, dated August 28, 1883. 
Application filed June 20, 1883. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
9O 
95 
ICO 
55 
To aid, whon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. BLISs, of 
the city of Norwich, county of New London, 
and State of Connecticut, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Revolv 
ing Fire-Arms, which improvements are fully 
set forth and described in the following speci 
fication, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings. 
My improvements relate principally to a 
locking device by means of which an arm is 
rendered perfectly safe when in the hands of 
children or others not familiar with or com 
petent to use the same. 
They also relate to certain new and conven 
ient forms of springs for use in double-act 
ing arms, which arms are so constructed that 
they may be used in the ordinary manner, or 
may as readily be used as self-cocking arms. 
My immediate object is to produce an arm 
which may with absolute safety be left in any 
convenient place about the house or office, and 
may be left loaded and ready for use when 
needed, but which cannot be discharged either 
by accident or design if discovered and han 
dled, as above stated, by children. 
In the several figures of the annexed draw 
ings like letters indicate like parts. 
Figure I is a general view of a revolver em 
bodying my improvements, a portion of the 
frame being cut away to show more clearly 
the various parts as they appear in their re 
spective position. Fig. 2 is a detached side 
view of my locking device. Fig. 3 is a rear 
end view of said locking device. Fig. 4 is a 
top or plan view of the same. Fig. 5 is a de 
tached rear view of the trigger of my double 
acting arm, showing the groove to receive the 
spring which actuates the hammer-lifting arm, 
and also shows the pin which holds said spring 
in place in the trigger. Fig. 6 is a top view 
of a part of the revolver-frame, showing the 
groove to receive the locking-slide, and the 
friction device which acts on said slide, the 
spiral spring at being shown removed from 
hole n. 
A represents the frame of my improved form 
of revolver; B, the base-pin on which the cyl 
inder rotates, and Cthe guard which surrounds 
and protects the trigger E. 
D is the hammer; G, the mainspring which 
bears on said hammer, and F is my safety 
locking device. This safety device F is com 
posed, preferably, of a single piece of metal, 
and is located at the top of the frame, at Ol' 
near the point where the nose of the hammer 
intersects said frame. F is constructed (Sub 
stantially as shown in the drawings) With a 
plate, 0, which rests on the upper part of the 
frame, and is held in place and adapted to 
slide longitudinally thereon by means of a rib, 
p, extending downward from 0, the rib p being 
provided with a slot, q, through which passes 
a pin, k, to fasten the locking device F Securely 
in the frame. The elongated slot q allows the 
device to be moved backward or forward a 
sufficient distance to accomplish the desired 
result. For convenience in operating said 
slide I have constructed it with a projection, 
s, on each side, extending slightly below the 
frame. (See Fig. 3.) The outer surfaces or 
ends of s may be checked or knurled, as in 
Figs. 1 and 2, if desired. 
To prevent the slide F from getting out of 
place after the arm has been locked or unlocked 
I insert one or more friction spiral springs in 
holes in in the frame A, immediately under the 
sliding piece. These springs, pressing up 
ward, hold the slide in any position in which 
it may be left. 
The frame A is recessed at t, so that the 
hammer, when forward and at rest, enters the 
frame an eighth of an inch, or thereabout. 
To lock the arm, drop the hammer forward 
into place and slide F rearward over the top 
of the hammer, as indicated by the dotted lines 
in Fig. 1. As the hammer Swings on the pivot 
or stud of its natural limovement as it starts 
backward is also upward; but as the slide F 
is immediately over it, it of course cannot be 
moved until the hammer is released, which is 
done by sliding F forward and away from the 
hammer. The slide F is provided with alon 
gitudinal V-shaped groove, ar, thus forming the 
rear sight of the arm. 
The general principle of the double-acting 
mechanism in my revolver is identical with 
that now used by several manufacturers. It 
is briefly described as follows: Pivoted to the 
rear of the trigger F is a lifting-arm (t, which, 
by its peculiar hook-shaped upper end, is 
adapted to engage the hammer at the opening 
h for the purpose of cocking the hammer when 
the trigger is drawn or forced rearward. The 
75 
2 
2S3, S54 
5 
t 
hand which rotates the cylinder is located, 
preferably, on the hammer, but may, if so de 
sired, be hung on the same pivot on which the 
lifting-arm a Swings. 
Pivoted in the frame, at f, is a sear, b, its up 
per surface being of such shape that it may 
engage the notches i and i? on the hammer. 
The rear end of the sear b is forced downward 
by a spring, d, so that when used as a single 
Io acting arm, or, in other words, when cocked 
by pressure on the hammer, the front edge of 
the sear drops into the usual half-cock or full 
cock notches, and prevents the hammer from 
descending until the sear is released by press 
15 lure of the trigger against an arm of the Sear, 
which extends forward and on one side of the 
trigger. The spring d, near its center, has a 
half-circular bend of the size and shape of 
the hammer-study. The forward end of said 
spring bears on the hand c, the rear end 
bearing on the sear b, as before stated. The 
yoke or half-circular bend in the center pre 
vents the spring from moving endwise or 
getting out of place, but does not interfere 
My trigger-spring w is located under the 
guard C forward of the trigger and bears on 
the front of the trigger in a suitable notch, 
with a lifting effect to return the trigger to its 
In order to provide a suitable spring to act on 
the arm at and throw its upper end at all times 
rearward, Ihave cut in the rear side of the trig 
ger a slot (see Fig. 5) to receive such a spring. 
35 The spring e is made of flatted steel wire bent 
Substantially as shown in Fig. 1, the pin pass 
ing across it, holding it securely in place, and 
leaving the upper end free to act upon a short 
arm projecting downward from the lifting 
3o proper position after the arm is discharged. 
25 with its working freely at either end. 
4O arm (t. 
45 
The springs d and e constitute parts of my 
improvements. 
Having thus described my improvements, 
I claim as my invention and wish to secureb 
Letters Patent- 
l. In combination with the frame and hammer 
of a revolving arm, the locking device herein 
before described, consisting of the plate o, pro 
vided with the slotted rib p, said locking de 
vice being located near the point where the 
top of the hammer intersects the frame, and 
adapted to slide on said frame, for the purpose 
of locking the hammer. 
2. In combination with the hammer and 
frame of a revolving arm, the locking device 55 
having the slotted rib p, side extensions, 88, 
and the sight-groove ac, said locking device 
being located near the point where the top of 
the hammerintersects the frame, and arranged 
to slide longitudinally to lock said hammer, 6o 
as hereinbefore described. 
3. In combination with the frame, hammer, 
and locking device having the slotted rib, side 
extensions, and sight-groove, as described, pin 
k, and friction-springsu, by means of which the 65 
locking slide is retained in any desired posi 
tion. 
- 4. In a double-acting mechanism for revolv 
ing arms, the combination, with the hammer, 
hand, and sear, of a single spring supported 7o 
at or near its center by the hammer-stud, as 
described, one end of said spring bearing on 
said hand and the other end on the sear, for 
the purpose stated. 
WILLIAM. H. BLISS. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK H. ALLEN, 
B. H. WILLIAMs. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US283954.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. BATCHELDER. 
EGG CARRIER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 283,954, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1883. 
(e.g. (U 
66.36,4-ce 
\ 
 
(No Model.) 
J. H. BATCHELDER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
No. 283,954, 
EGG CARRIER, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1883. 
 
YNNY N. 
N N \ N 
N 
. 
N N \ . 
N. N. 
N NSN N N N 
\ 
Na 
\ Y N. 
N NY Sa/ Y Y. 
N 
sy NY 
YN N N N 
N - 
& N. 
s 
s 
N 
WITNESSES 
NVENTOR 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington.D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. BATCHELDER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
EG G a CARRE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 283,954, dated August 28, 1883. 
Application filed September 6, 1882. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMESH.BATCHELDER, 
of Chicago, county of Cook, and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Egg-Carriers, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof, that will enable others to under 
stand and make use of the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, form 
ing a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to that class of egg 
carriers composed of a series of trays ar 
ranged one above the other in any suitable 
packing-case; and it consists of certain novel 
features in the construction and arrangement of 
the parts, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
forth. 
Figure 1 is a top view in perspective of a 
tray embodying my improved features. Fig. 
2 is a view in perspective, showing how the 
tray may be used in an inverted position, the 
top or cover forming the bottom. Fig. 3 
shows one of the four outside strips, and Fig. 
4 one of the series of inside strips. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
tray composed of the four outside strips, B, 
and the series of inside strips, C. DD are 
flaps attached to two of the outside strips, and 
are adapted to fold inward, forming a cover 
and keeping the contents of each tray sepa 
rate. The four outside strips B are of the 
form shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings, one 
end of each being square, While the opposite 
end is cut away to form the head a. The bev 
eled corners b are cut away, as shown, on both 
the inside and outside strips, in order to allow 
the head a to be conveniently inserted in the 
right-angled slots a?... If the corners were not 
cut away in this manner, they would come in 
contact with the joining-strip, as the strips 
must be held at a certain angle when being 
joined together. The outside strips are all 
provided with the right-angled slots a, while 
both ends of the series of strips composing the 
inside of the tray are provided with the heads 
a, as shown in Fig. 4 of the drawings. 
The material entering into the construction 
of the tray is light and pliable, and readily 
permits of the heads being bent so as to enter 
the right-angled slots in the outside strips, and 
 
55 
when united the heads on the ends of the strips 
assume their proper form and securely lock 
the parts together, so that the slats can not 
become separated under ordinary circum 
stances. If the slots in the outside strips were 
of a segmental or circular form, the parts are 
very liable to become disengaged. Practical 
Working has proven that it requires a right 
angled slot to make a perfectlock. The series 
of inside strips running at right angles to each 
other have the alternate edge cut out to form 
the open rectangular slots d, which form per 
mits of the strips interlocking with each other. 
Two of the outside strips are provided with 
the flaps D D, which may be formed of the 
same piece with the strip B, or may be con 
nected by a suitable hinged joint, as shown in 
Fig. 1 of the drawings, so that the flaps can be 
conveniently thrown back or turned down to 
form a cover and divide one tray from the 
other. These flaps are of sufficient width to 
overlap each other, as shown in Fig. 2 of the 
drawings, for the purpose of preventing any 
broken goods from reaching the next tray be 
low. 
If it is desired, the tray may be used in an 
inverted position, the flaps D D' forming the 
bottom, as shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings, 
which change would permit of the tray and 
contents being removed from the packing-case 
as a whole. The flaps now forming the bot 
tom may be temporarily secured at the inner 
edges and retained in place by means of the 
wire fastening d", provided with a hook on each 
end, one end being made to engage with the 
flaps or bottom, and the opposite end hooking 
over the top of the tray. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The combination, with the strips B, pro-. 
vided with the right-angled slots a?, of the 
series of strips C, formed with the heads a, 
and having the beveled cut-away corners b, 
whereby the heads a may be conveniently: 
made to engage with the slots in the outside . 
strips B, substantially as set forth. 
JAMES H. BATCHELDER. 
75 
90 
95 
Witnesses: 
J. B. GOE, 
L. B. COUPLAND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284054.txt	(No Model.) 
W. A. PALMER 
SHEARING, PUNCHING AND RIVETING MACHINE, 
No. 284,054, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1883. 
 
Lic 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
A. 
INVENTOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. PALMER, OF ROME, GEORGIA. 
SHEARING, PUNCHING, AND RIVETING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 284,054, dated August 28, 1883. 
Application filed April 9, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
is intended to return the shank d and its ad 
To all whon, it may concern: 
juncts to their normal position after operating 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. A. PALMER, 
the cam-lever to shear or punch the metal to 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Rome, 
form the ties or hoops. The male die i is se-55 
in the county of Floyd and State of Georgia, 
cured to the top of the base, as shown, and is 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provided near one end with a recess or Seat, 
provements in Shearing, Punching, and Riv 
k, in its face for the reception of the head of 
eting Machines; and I do declare the follow 
the rivet. The plain portion l of this male 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
die i is to be used as an anvil to upset the rivet 6o 
the invention, such as will enable others 
after it has been used to punch the holes 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
through the ends of the overlapped pieces to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
be united. This die i is removable, and is 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
held in its seat by a set-screw, In, so that when 
or figures of reference marked thereon, which 
worn out by use it may be readily replaced by 65 
form a part of this specification. 
a new one. One of the arms fisprovided with 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a front view of 
a vertical recess, n, in which a spring, o, con 
my machine. Fig. 2 is a side view, and Fig. 
nected at its lower end to a pivoted lever, p, 
3 is a horizontal sectional view, of the same. 
is secured, to return the said lever p, which is 
This invention has relation to machines for 
designed, to feed the rivets to the seat in the 7o 
shearing, punching, and riveting bale-ties, 
male die i, to its normal position. The rivets 
iron hoops, and the like; and it consists in the 
are to be placed by hand on the table or plate 
construction and novel arrangement of de 
(1, (secured to the base,) in front of the lever p, 
vices hereinafter fully described, and particu 
(which is pivoted to said table q,) and moved 
larly pointed out in the claims appended. 
thence by the lever p into the recess or seat k 75 
The main object of the invention is to cause 
in the die i. 
the rivet itself to form the punch, which is ef. 
The female die r is detachably connected by 
fected by providing the lower die with a seat 
a set-screw, r", to the heads of the die-carrier 
to hold the head of the rivet in position, and 
e. This die r, as well as the die i, is of steel, 
in providing the female die, which also con 
and the latter one, ), is provided with a ver- 8o 
stitutes the hammer, with an exit for the es 
tical recess, t, conforming to the shape of the 
cape of the metal displaced by the rivet dur 
shank of the rivet, and a curved opening or 
ing the operation of punching the metal. The 
exit leading out therefrom at one side of the 
shearing mechanism and the arrangement for 
die r, through which the metal displaced by 
feeding the rivets to the seat in the lower die 
the rivet escapes, and thereby keeps the fe- 85 
are also of greatimportance, and reference will 
male die always in condition automatically. 
now be made by letter to the drawings, in or 
der that those skilled in the art to which the The face of the female die extends overthean 
vil portion of the male die, so that by operat 
invention pertains may be enabled to construct 
ing the lever the rivet, after it has punched 
and use the same. 
the lapped straps to be connected, can be shift- 9o 
a designates the table, bench, or other founda 
ed and the rivet upset. Between the arm f, 
tion upon which the machine is mounted, and 
opposite the one provided with the spring for 
this may be constructed in any convenient man 
controlling the feed-lever, and the shank dis 
le. 
pivoted a vertical keeper, at, for holding the 
b designates the base of the machine, pref. 
metal strips in place while being punched and 95 
erably rectangular in form, and of cast or 
riveted, said keeper swinging automatically 
Wrought iron, having a central rectangular 
to place after the lapped metal strips have 
vertical slot, c, through which the shank or 
been placed above the male die or upon the 
Stem d of the female-die carrier e works verti 
cally between standards.ff, secured to or ris 
rivet. 
ing from the baseb, and between which stand 
easily operated. One of the blades, v, is se 
ards is pivoted the Weighted cam-leverg. Be 
cured to the inner face of an arm, c, connected 
low the shank d a spring, h, is placed, which 
The shearing mechanism is quite simple and IOO 
- 
. 
- 
y 
aw 
2S4,054 
to one of the standards.f, and the other blade 
is secured in a recess, v', made in the vertical 
face of the heads of the die-carrier next to the 
standard to which the arm nois secured. This 
arm v is located near to the heads when the 
latter is in its normal position, and conse 
quently but a small stroke of the cam-lever is 
required to shear the straps. 
The cam-leverg is pivoted between the up 
Iorights f, near their upper ends, by means of a 
transverse bolt, a, and is provided with a 
Weight, ac, at the end of an arm, a', whereby 
it is located eccentrically to the fulcrum of the 
lever 0, and thereby assists the operator in 
elevating the female die. It is of course ob 
vious that two persons are required to ma 
nipulate the machine-one to feed the metal 
strips and rivets to the dies and one to oper 
ate the cam-lever. The fact, however, that no 
previous punching of the metalis required be 
fore the insertion of the rivets, is of sufficient 
importance, aside from the fact that a simple 
shifting of the strips and inserted rivet enables 
the rivet to be upset, and the tie or hoop to be 
The rivets may be fed to the seatin the male 
die by hand; but the use of the feed-lever is 
preferable on account of its certainty and ra 
pidity. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The herein-described process of punch 
ing and riveting lapped metal strips, consist 
35ing of first inserting the rivet by seating it in 
a recess in a lower die, then placing the strips 
... to be punched upon the point of the rivet and 
forcing a female die down upon the strips to 
cause the rivettopenetrate the metal, and then 
25 connected at the lap and thus completed. 
3O 
shifting the strips and rivethorizontally to the 40 
anvil of the male die, and then upsetting the 
rivet by a hammer forming a part of the fe 
male die, substantially as specified. 
2. In a punching and riveting machine, a 
pivoted Swinging keeper placed above the an- 45 
vil and at the side of the hammer, for holding 
the metal upon the anvil or the rivet-point, 
substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with the male die pro 
vided with the recess for seating the rivet, and 5o 
the anvil for receiving the same during opera 
tion, of the feed-lever p, pivoted to the table 
or plate q, and the spring 0, seated in the re 
cess in of one of the uprights.f, substantially as 
specified. 
4. The metal shearing, punching, and riv 
eting machine herein described, consisting of 
the baseb, provided with a central rectangular 
opening, and uprights or standards ff, the 
spring h beneath said opening, the removable 6o 
dies i and ', operating -lever 9, arm up and 
heads, carrying cutters and v, the swinging 
keeper it, and anvil l, all constructed, com 
bined, and adapted to operate substantially as 
specified. 
5. The combination, with a lower die hav 
ing a recess to seat a rivet-head, of an upper 
die and mechanism to cause the same to be 
brought down forcibly upon the metal strips, 
to cause the rivettopunchits own way through 7o 
the lapped ends or edges thereof that are to be 
riveted together, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
65 
55 
WM. A. PALMER. 
- 
Witnesses: 
THEO. MUNGEN, 
PHILIP C. MASI. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284154.txt	(No Model.) 
R. J. WILSON. 
RELIEF WALWE FOR RAILWAY PRESSURE, BRAKES, 
No. 284,154, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1883. 
  
S 
5 
s 
. 
   
S. 
Ysg 
M-4-7 1. 12Zr2 
re. Azz ess e s - 
-72Z. 
(7 or a ( 5%. 
iCCaC 62.1%-264. 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT J. WILSON, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RELIEF-VALVE FOR RAILWAY PRESSURE-BRAKES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters P 
Application filed March 
atent No. 284,154, dated August 28, 1888. 
22, 1883. (No model.) 
S. 
Io 
25 
To all whom it may conce77 : 
Beit known that I, ROBERT J. WILSON, of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvementsin Relief Valves 
for Railway Pressure-Brakes; and Idohereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
this specification, in 
which form a part of 
which-- 
Figure 1 is an end view of part of a car 
truck and swinging car-bolster, showing an 
application of my invention. Fig. 2 is a ver 
tical section of the relief-valve. 
In the use of railway-car brakes on the con 
tinuous fluid-pressure principle, whether un 
der the compressed-air, vacuum, steam, or 
hydraulic system, it happens often that one or 
more cars of a train are empty or only partly 
loaded, while the rest are full. Such empty. 
or partly-loaded cars will of course have less 
momentum than the rest, and will obviously. 
not require as great a pressure of the brake 
shoes upon the wheels to lock the latter as is 
required by the full cars. Consequently, if the 
pressure required to brake the loaded cars is 
admitted to the cylinders of the empty or light 
cars, the brake shoes of the latter are too 
strongly applied to their wheels, and the re 
sult is, that such wheels become locked, and 
A few 
repetitions of this skidding on the same part 
of the wheel-face produces the defect known as 
a flat wheel, and renders the wheel useless. 
My object is to prevent such injury to the 
wheels, for which purpose. I apply a relief. 
valve, automatically adjustable, so as to re 
lease the pressure at whatever point the car 
at the time requires that is to Say, ISO ar 
range a relief-valve that the pressure at which 
it will open depends directly and positively 
upon the weight of the car. The greater the 
load the higher the pressure at which relief 
takes place, and therein is the essence of my 
invention. 
so The invention can be practiced in a variety 
of ways. For illustration, I show what Icon 
sider the simplest and most practicable, as 
adapted to the air-brake. 
35 repe 
30 
40 
45 
... they slide or 'skid upon the rails. 
. 
. 
. 
55 
The inlet for air is 7o 
To nipple i, I attach a pipe, which commu- 75 
I construct a shell or globe, A, with a valve 
seat, a, and in this fits the valve b, shutting 
against the pressure. Valvebisprovided with 
the stem c, around which is a spiral spring, d, 
as shown. Into the top of shell A, Tinsert the 
threaded bushing e, which is bored out cen 
trally to receive the movable guidef, whose 
central recess, g, receives and guides the stem 6o 
c. Guide f has the flange or liph at its bot 
tom, upon which the bushing e bears for ad 
justment, and the said guide projects up: 
wardly above the top of shell A. The bottom 
of guide f bears against the spring d, as shown, 65 
and, by screwing the bushing eup or down, 
the guide f is pressed more or less power 
fully against the spring, so that the valve b 
may thus be adjusted to normally open to a 
"given degree of pressure. 
in the wall of the shell A, below the valve 
seat a, through nipple i, and the outlet or vent 
k is in the wall above the Valve-seat a, as 
shown. . 
nicates with the brake-cylinder or pressure 
pipe, so that the valve b is exposed to the same 
pressure as the brake-piston. In the draw 
ings I show such a relief-valve set on top of 
the suspension bar or bolster M, and so ar- 8o 
ranged as that when the caris empty the upper 
end of the guide fis nearly or quite in contact 
with the bottom of the swinging bolster N of 
the car-truck. The adjustment is arranged 
normally to allow the valve b to open at the 85. 
pressure which will properly brake the empty 
car withoutskidding the wheels. When the car 
is loaded more or less, the additional weight 
of course causes the swinging bolster Nto sink 
in accordance with such increase of Weight. 
The bolster Ninthus sinking bears down upon 
the guidef, and compresses the spring d more 
or less, according to the amount of additional 
weight in the car; hence with the spring d 
thus forcibly compressed against the valve a 
greater pressure will be required to open the 
latter, which is exactly what is wanted. The 
car and its load thus automatically adjust the 
relief-valve so that it will release the pressure 
exactly at the point necessary to effectually 
brake the wheels without injurious skidding. 
This adjustment of the releasing pressure to 
suit the conditions of load upon the Wheels 
may be effected in a great variety of ways with 
90 . 
95 
OO ... 
. 
. 
, 
 
6. m 
54 
out departing from the spirit of my invention. 
The device may be placed on any of the fixed 
parts of the truck and arranged to be pressed 
upon by some part of the car-body or attach 
ments thereto; or by a system of levers or cords 
the valve may be set anywhere. 
In short, the 
invention may beputin practice by any means 
which will directly communicate the downward 
pressure of the load to the guide for its equiv 
alent, and thereby effect the adjustment of the 
releasing or blow-off pressure at the valve. 
I am aware that it has been proposed to ar 
range a valve in the pressure system adapted 
to be adjusted manually by the brakemen or 
train-men from time to time, according to the 
varying condition of the track and the load, 
such arrangement requiring manipulation for 
every change in said conditions, and being, 
therefore, not automatic. I am also aware 
that it has been proposed to operate a mechani 
cal brake by a friction-wheel applied to the 
car-wheel in such manner that the degree of 
pressure of the friction-wheel upon the car 
wheel depends upon the weight of the car, and 
which is applied and released by means of 
fluid-pressure under control of the engineer; 
but such a device does not embody the use of 
a relief-valve adjusted by the weight of the car. 
I am likewise aware that it has been proposed 
to vary the pressure of the brake-shoes against 
the car-wheels with the varying speed of the 
train by the automatic action of the wheels 
acting as a drag, and thereby moving to a 
greater or less extent a regulating-valve, which 
shall to the extent of such opening vary the 
operative fluid-pressure; but in no case of 
which I am aware has a relief-valve been ar 
ranged to be controlled directly and positively 
by the Weight of the car, so as to open and pre 
vent the effective pressure from reaching a de 
gree at which the wheels would lock, such 
opening pressure being automatically adjust 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
able directly by and in accordance with the 
variation of weight of the car. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In fluid-pressure brake systems, a relief. 
valve applied to each car, in communication 
with the cylinder or pressure-pipe of such car, 
and adapted to open and relieve the pressure at 
a degree automatically adjusted directly and 
positively by the amount of load on such car, 
substantially as described. 
2. In fluid-pressurebrake systems, the meth 
od of independently regulating the pressure 
applied to the brakes of the respective cars, 
consisting in applying to the pressure devices 
of each car a relief-valve adapted to automatic 
adjustment of its releasing or opening press 
ure, and effecting such adjustment directly and 
positively by the varying weight of the load 6o 
upon the car, substantially as described. 
3. Influid-pressure brakesystems, the meth 
od of automatically adjusting the relief-valve 
by the variation of load, consisting in causing 
an increase of load to operate directly and posi- 65 
tively to increase the resisting-power of the re 
lief-valve, and thereby raise the degree of 
pressure at which said valve opens, substan 
tially as described. 
valve applied to the cylinder or pressure de 
vices of each car, capable of pressure adjust 
ment, and adapted to have its releasing press 
ure automatically regulated directly and posi 
tively by the weight of load on such car, sub- 75 
stantially as described. 
Intestimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
own Ihave hereto affixed my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
ROBERT J. WILSON. 
4. In fluid-pressure brake systems, a relief. 7o 
Witnesses: 
T. J. MCTIGHE, 
T. J. PATTERSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284256.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 284,256, 
A. W. STOSSMEISTER, 
STOWE PIPE SHIELF, 
Patented Sept. 4, 1883. 
. 
  
 
ES-23 E3 (XXXXX XXX 
- 
- 
l 
: 
4. a7 a 
4//es/ 
Air 272.222. 
622 a 
. . 
Azzzzy ZAZZ" 
- 
" CAcket-Go-Starsaw.catar 
A. 
35-Kacts. 4.5- 
 
 
  
  
  
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT W. STOSSMEISTER, OF NEWPORT, KENTUCKY. 
STOVE-PIPE SHELF. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 284,256, dated September 4, 1888. 
Application filed May 5, 1883. (No model.) . 
My invention relates to stove-pipe shelves, are dispensed with and three holding-lugs, d, 55. 
To all whom it may concern: 
withdrawal of the shelf by forming a yoke 
Be it known that I, ALBERT W. STOSS- around the pipe, and maintaining the shelf in 
MEISTER, a citizen of the United States, re- a horizontal position by engaging the under 5o 
siding at Newport, Campbell county, Ken-side of the flange b at the opposite side of the 
5 tucky, haveinvented new and useful Improver pipe. The construction is clearly shown in 
ments in Stove-Pipe Shelves, of which the fol- Figs. 1,2,3. A modification of this construc 
lowing is a specification. 
tion is shown in Fig. 5, in which the arms ec 
its object being the construction and arrange- (indicated by dotted lines,) are secured to the 
Io ment of a shelf secured upon the stove-pipe under side of the shelf, extending radially be 
and having a rotative action thereon, enabling neath the flange b, and the shelf is prevented 
it to be rotated out of the way when out of use. from lateral withdrawal by a wire or band, e, 
It also consists in the combination therewith attached to the edges of the shelf and extend- 6o 
of a casing extending downward to the top of ling around the pipe. This construction per 
15 the stove, and constituting therewith a tem 
mits the shelf to be rotated out of the way 
porary oven for warming purposes. 
when out of use, and constitutes the primary 
Myinvention is illustrated in the accompa 
feature of my invention. 
nying drawings, in which Figure 1 is a plan A further improvement consists in provid- 65 
view of the shelf in position; Fig. 2, a partial 
... 
ing a casing of sheet metal, C, secured to the 
Y. I 
2O sectional elevation of the same; Fig. 3, a plan outer margin of the shelf, and extending thence 
and edge view of the holding-arms detached; downward to the top of the stove, provided in 
Fig. 4, a front elevation of the shelf with oven 
front with a suitable opening, and a sliding 
attachment; and Fig. 5, a partial plan view, 
door, C, by which the structure can be con- 7o 
showing a modified form of attaching the shelf 
veniently used as a warming-oven. 
- 
25 to the pipe. 
- - 
- 
- 
I claim as my invention and desire to se 
1. In combination with the shelf A, adapt: 8o 
It is obvious that these features of my inven 
Parts referred to herein are indicated upon tion may be separately used with advantage, 
and need not therefore be used together unless 
the drawings by letters of reference. 
The shelf A is preferably of rectangular desired, but that the rotating action of the 75 
form, with a semicircular recess at one side to 
shelf is equally advantageous with the oven 
3o fit upon the pipe. The pipe B, which forms 
attachment. 
the pivot and sustaining-post of the shelf, is 
preferably a cast section of pipe adapted to fit 
cure by Letters Patent 
the stove and extend upward a sufficient dis 
tance to maintain the shelf at a proper eleva 
ed to fit upon and around the flange b upon 
35 tion above the surface of the stove. Thesee 
the stove-pipe, the arms c c, embracing the 
tion B of pipe is preferably formed, when cast, 
pipe and forming supporting - arms for the 
of two parts, fitted together and constituting a 
shelf, substantially as specified. 
cylinder, and is provided at a suitable height 
with a circumferential flange, b, which forms 
the casing C, constituting, with the shelf, a 
4o the rotating support for the shelf. The shelf 
movable oven, substantially as set forth. 
is recessed around the margin of its semicir 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
cular edge to form a seat upon the flange b, 
and is secured to its position upon the pipe by 
eSSeS. 
two semicircular arms, c c, secured to the un 
45 der side of the shelf at its recessed edge, and 
extending beneath the flangeb, partly or wholly 
around the pipe B, thus preventing the lateral 
2. In combination with the rotating shelf A, 85 
ALBERT W. STOSSMEISTER. 
L. M. HoSEA, . 
. 
ALEX. HAMILTON. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284356.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 284,356, 
G. M. BAKER & W. ABBOTT, 
STEP LADDER, 
Patented Sept. 4, 1883. 
 
 
w 22.2%% 
NSSESSN 
  
 
2 
N4Kizz % 
SSSSS ar. 
72zzz elsea. 
Z722/e72767. 
(Z %34% 
// 7. 
22a2a ca-Z, 
%.4%% 
N. parens, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.c. 
f 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE. M. BAKER AND WILLIAM ABBOTT, OF ESPY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
STEP-LADDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 284,356, dated September 4, 1888. 
Application filed April 17, 1883. (No model.) 
- 
5 
... 
20 
To all whom it nually concern: 
Beit known that we, G.M.BAKER and WM. 
ABBOTT, citizens of the United States, resid 
ing at Espy, in the county of Columbia and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvementsin Step-Ladders, 
of which the following is a specification, ref. 
erence being had thereinto the accompanying 
drawings. 
Io Our invention relates to step-ladders, and 
has for its object the connecting therewith of 
a shelf which will open out for use or close 
up automatically when the ladder proper and 
: its supporting and bracing frame are opened 
15 or closed, as will be hereinafter more particu 
larly described. 
In the accompanying drawings, making a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a vertical section; Fig. 2, a perspective of the 
two stretcher-braces, and Fig. 3 a longitudi 
inal section of the bar carrying the shelf. 
In the figures, A. represents that portion of 
a step-ladder which is provided with the strips 
CC and the crown-piece D. 
B represents the usual supporting and brac. 
ing frame, hinged to the ladder-frame at or near 
its upper end. 
The frames A and B are connected together 
by the stretcher-braces H G a short distance 
3o below their upper ends. The brace G is piv 
oted at one end to the frame A and at its other 
to the brace H, as seen at ac, Fig. 2. Brace H. 
is provided at one end with a square opening, 
I, and at its other with a flange, e, which pro 
35 jects from it at right angles. The inner and 
lower edge of the brace G, near its pivoted 
end, has a portion of its metal cut away, and at 
this cut-away portion it rests when the two 
braces are in line upon the flange of brace H, 
being pivoted to said brace near the outer end 
of flange e. 
F represents a bar or shaft which has bear 
ings in the two side bars of frame B. The 
25 
- - 
- 
- 
- 
- 
4O 
 
- 
- - , 
. 
- 
55 
journals of this shaft are made slightly taper. 
ing. The shaft passes beyond the sides of the 45 
frame, and a portion of its outer end is made 
square, and the balance or extreme outer end 
is provided with a screw-thread. The square 
end of brace His made to fit snugly over the 
square end of the shaft, and is there confined 50 
by means of a suitable nut. When the two 
braces G and Hare pressed downward at their 
centers, the two frames A and B are folded or 
closed together. 
E represents a shelf, which is bolted to shaft 
F by a bolt, d, as seen in Figs. 1 and 3. This 
shelf is made of any suitable and convenient 
size. It is evident that as the shelf has a rigid 
connectiontotheshaft F, and that the shaft must 
partially rotate when the brace His depressed, 6cy 
the shelf will fold up automatically when the 
two frames A and B come together. It will 
for the same reason take a horizontal position 
when the frames are separated and the two 
braces are in line. The braces may be made 
to move upward, if so desired; but this move 
ment is preferred. . 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
The combination, in a step-ladder, of the 
frames A and B, pivoted together at their up 
per ends, the braces G and H, the brace H 
being provided with a right-angled extension, 
e, and a rectangular opening, I, the shaft F, 75 
passing through the opening in said brace, and 
the shelf E, secured to said shaft, the wholes 
adapted to operate substantially in the man 
ner specified. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 8o 
65 
70 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
U. H. ENT, 
G. M. QUICK. 
- 
- 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE. M. BAKER. 
WILLIAM ABBOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284456.txt	(No Model) 
 
No. 284,456, 
J. C. MARTIN. 
AUTOMATIC CASH BOX SYSTEM. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Sept. 4, 1883. 
 .22 
?R R 
?zzzzzzzzzzzzz 
/2Z72 esses: 
N. tigers, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. ' 
J. C. MARTIN. 
AUTOMATIC CASH BOX SYSTEM 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 4, 1883. 
(No Model.) 
 
772272 esses: 
. Peters. Picto-lithographer. Washingtol, D.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. C. MARTIN, OF BURLINGTON, VERMONT. 
AUTOMATIC CASH-Box SYSTEM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 284,456, dated September 4, 1888. 
Application filed July 2, 1883. (No model 
 
 
 
. 
.." 
- 
20 
. . 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
the ends of which are joined to the ends of the 
Be it, known that I, JoSEPH. C. MARTIN, a 
way and cashier's stations, as shown. At in 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bur 
tervals along Said tracks are placed support 
lington, in the county of Chittenden and State 
ing-frames m, therefor, to keep them in line, 
5 of Vermont, have invented new and useful 
and at each end of the way-station, support 
Improvements in Automatic Cash-Box Sys 
ing the wood construction thereof, as described 
tems, of which the following is a specification. 
In my said patent, and the ends of the tracks 
This invention relates to improvements in 
i i", is placed the frame n, the form of which 
automatic cash-box systems, and is in the 
and its relation to the said wood construction 
nature of an improvement upon my patent of 
are shown in Fig. 6. 
April 24, 1883, No. 276,441, the object being 
: The structure is adapted to be suspended by 
to provide for said systems improved box 
suitable devices, as shown in Fig. 1, in stores, 
entering gates for the stations, improved 
as described in said patent. . 
switching devices for the boxes at the way. 
The cashier's station A is built at an incline 
stations, improved intermediate box-tracks 
to the line of the main track, so that boxes 
between stations, and improved cord-support 
arriving from the latter by way of the lower 
ing wheels and hangers, and cord-retainers on 
track, d and iii, will be with facility made 
to slide downward upon a proper receiving 
the tracks. 
In the drawings forming part of this specifi 
table. The aforesaid several cylindrical rods 
cation, Figure i is a side elevation of the 
or tubes, i i i and i i i", are arranged in a 
cashier's and a way station embodying myim 
triangular position, one group over the other, 
provements, the intermediate tracks between 
as clearly shown in Fig. 9, and the box D is 
the stations being broken away. Fig. 2 is a 
provided with circular notches on its bottom 
plan view, partly in section, of a way-station. 
and top, as shown, coinciding with the relative 
25: Fig. 3 is an elevation of one of the track and 
positions of the three rods constituting each 
cord-wheel frames shown in Fig. 1, the full 
track, between which said box is drawn along 
sided box-guides being shown in section. Fig. 
by the corde. 
4 is a sectional view of the box-gate at the 
The box D is made to engage with the cord 
cashier's station, and Fig. 5 is a like view of 
e by the spring-actuated clamp B in the man 
the box-gate at the Way-station. Fig. 6 is an 
ner described in my said patent. Said box is 
elevation of one of the track supporting provided also with the posts. 8, on each end 
frames, the full-sided box-guides being shown thereof, projecting upward, and the clamp B 
insection, and the switch strips therein being 
has thereon an arm, h, and two arms, h. h, 
shown in end view. Fig. 7 is a view of the 
opposite each other and projecting in a direc 
cash-box. Fig. 8 is a side elevation of the 
tion from the ends of the box. 
track intermediate between the stations. Fig. 
The way-station, consisting of that portion 
9 is an elevation of the intermediate track 
of Figs. 1 and 2 located between the frames in 
supporting frame. Figs. 10 and 11 are similar 
n, has a wooden strip at the top, to the under 
views to Fig. 2 and a part of Fig. 1, but show 
side of which are secured by their edges a se 
oing the connection of the intermediate tracks 
ries of metallic switch-strips, o, (see Fig. 6,) the 
number of which is governed by the number 
with the station. 
In the construction herein shown, as in that 
of way-stations, the number decreasing by 
shown in my said patent, a number of cash 
one, going from the station A, until at the 
boxes, D, are employed-one for each way 
outermost or last station only one curved 
switch is so fixed, (represented by the curved 
station-and said boxes are carried back and 
forth on the upper and lower tracks by an end 
line 0 in Fig. 2 in dotted and full line.) 
One 
less cord, e, as there described. In this con 
of said switch-strips thus curves off at each sta 
struction, however, I employ a system of box 
tion toward the edge of the box-table e, at the 
tracks between the stations differing from those 
side thereof. The said switch-strips at each IOC. 
o, shown in my previous patent, said tracks con 
way-station are set in a line with those of the 
stations each side of it. The posts 8 on a box, 
sisting of several cylindrical rods or tubes, ii, 
75 
95 
- 
 
2 
2s 4,456 
I5 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
4O 
O 
D, which is destined to run by the first sta 
tion from station A, are so set thereon as to 
run between the strips which run straight by 
said station; but if the box is to be stopped at 
5 said first station, said posts are so set as to en 
gage with the edge of the switch-strip which 
curves off over the table e of that station, and 
so on for all the stations, each box surely being 
delivered at its proper station. BoxD, when 
guided off onto table e, as above described, 
moves laterally as soon as posts 8 encounter 
the curved part of strip 0, and is carried near 
to and by the clamp-trip e on said table, 
causing arm h on clamp B to strike said trip 
and release cord e from the box, as set forth 
in said patent. 
The downhanging borders shown in Fig. 
6, on each edge of the wooden strip to which 
the switch-strips o are secured, are short 
pieces, as shown in Fig. 1, which serve to aid 
in securing said wooden strip to frame n. A 
strip, c, is placed on the edge of said over 
head wooden strip to partially inclose the box 
way or upper track, d. 
The lower boxway or track, d, is clear from 
one end to the other, and each way-station is 
provided with a box-gate, c, (shown in section 
in Fig. 5,) on the vertical line through cin Fig. 
1. Said gate is of metal, and is of such size 
that box Diseasily pushed through it (its cord 
clamping side foremost) onto the lower track. 
Each side of gate e is provided with an inclined 
clamp guide, 4, against which the arms hon 
the clamp B strike when box D is passed 
through gate c, causing said clamp to open to 
receive cord e, but closing upon the latter as 
soon as said arms run by guides 4, when the 
cord immediately carries the box along to the 
cashiers station. 
A gate, b, similar to gate c, is set in sta 
tion A. at the receiving end of the outgoing 
upper track, through which the boxes to be 
sent out are passed, and on one side of which 
is a clamp-guide, 3, which serves the same 
purpose as the said guide 4 on gate c. 
The structure of the upper boxway or track, 
d, at the Way-stations and at the entrance of 
the station A, as shown in Figs. 6 and 4, is 
similar to that of the lower track, as above 
described, a wooden strip, however, being se 
cured at the bottom of the frames in at the 
way-stations, and extending from one to the 
other, on which the rods i (the two lower ones). 
run, as shown in Fig. 1, and at the entrance 
to station A a wooden strip or floor to the 
lower track begins, as shown in Fig. 3, and 
extends down said incline. 
The frames v v are adapted to the support 
of the track devices with which they are con 
nected, and are also peculiarly constructed to 
constitute noiseless supports for the cord 
wheels ' ', over which the corde runs, and 
by which the latter is supported partially in 
proper line for the purposes aforesaid. Said 
to rotate in ordinary metallie, bearings the 
45 
5o 
55 
noise caused thereby becomes very annoying; 
and to obviate said inconvenience in a device 
which is used mainly in stores and similar 
places, the said frames, wheel-shafts, and the 
bearings of the latter are arranged and con 
structed as follows: Theside bars of the frame 
?y are constructed to receive in transverse 
grooves made in their inner opposite sides 
the blocks 22, made of hard wood or paper, 
or similar non-metallic material, into which 
are fitted the ends of the shaft to wheel ', in 
proper sockets made therein, not permitting 
the ends of said shaft to pass through said 
blocks and hit said frame. Thus arranged the 
wheel v' rotates with very little friction and 
perfectly noiselessly. In running the cord e 
so that it will always be held in proper posi 
tion to be grasped by the clamp on box. D, it is 
desirable that it be steadied and guided at dif 
ferent points alongits course, and for this pur 
pose cord-retainers in are secured to the track 
at points where it becomes necessary for the 
aforesaid purpose. Said retainers are screwed 
to the said track-rods, as shown in Fig. 9, or 
otherwise conveniently attached to the border 
of any wooden part of the track in such po 
sition that the cord e can run back of an up 
standing hook thereon near the track, whereby 
said cord is retained againstany undue lateral 
movement when a box begins to move off onto 
table e and before clamp B has quite let go 
of the cord. Said hookis far enough removed 
from the track to be out of the way of the 
passing box, and the end of the clamp rides 
over and back of said hook. Another form 
of cord-rest, n, of glass or of hard metal, is 
placed at a point on the track at a station op 
posite a gate, c, (see Fig. 2.) to hold up the 
cord, and having its end slightly turned up, it 
helps to keep the cord in position when a box 
is pushed against it to be engaged with it. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In an automatic cash-box system, the 
combination, with an endless motor-cord, e, of 
the station A and of one or more way-stations, 
substantially as described, of intermediate 
tracks between said stations and connected 
therewith, consisting of a series of cylindrical 
rods or tubes, iii, arranged in triangular po 
sition, and of a cash-box adapted to run upon 
and be guided by said rods, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. The combination, with the way-station of 
an automatic cash-box system, substantially as 
described, of a series of switch-strips, o, se 
cured over the boxway therein, of the box D, 
having the posts 8 thereon, and of the endless 
motor-cord e, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the lower box 
way of an automatic cash-box system way. 
station, of the box-gate c, having the inclined 
clamp guides 4 on the opposite sides thereof, 
and of the box D, provided with the clamp 
B, having arms thereon to engage with said 
4. The combination, with the upper box 
. 
65 wheels revolve very rapidly, and if permitted inclined guides, substantially as set forth. 
75 
95 
IOO 
iO5 
IIO 
II5 
I25 
2S4,456 
3 
way of the station A, of the box-gate b, hav- supported in said blocks, combined and op 
ing the inclined clamp-guide3thereon, and of erating substantially as set forth. 
the boxD, provided with the clamp B, hav- 
6. The combination, with the track, the 
ing an arm thereon to engage with said in-motor-cord, and the cash-box D of an auto- 15 
matic cash-box system, of the cord-retainer n, 
5. The improved cord-wheel support for au- provided with an upstanding cord-hook near 
5 clined guide, substantially as set forth. 
JOSEPHC MARTIN. 
tomatic cash-box systems, consisting of the said track, substantially as set forth. 
frame v, having transverse grooves therein, 
the blocks 22, of wood or analogous material, 
Io fitted and secured in said grooves, and the 
cord-wheel v', having a shaft whose ends are 
H. A. CHAPIN, 
C. S. PARKHURST. 
Witnesses: 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284556.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
No. 284,556, 
 
G. M., HOPKINS, 
GAS ENGINE, 
Patented Sept. 4, 1883. 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
Afz22. 
M. aza. 
k2Z% 
27. 
() 
V 
  
N 2/ 
2N 
WITNESSES: 
oval 
44 year- 
N, PETERs. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR: 
v.7% 
By Muw (f(- 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE. M. HOPKINS, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO THE ECONOMIC MOTOR 
. . 
. . 
. 
. " 
. 
COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
GAS-ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 284,556, dated September 4, 1883. 
Application filed March 31, 1883. (No model.). - 
I5 for preventing the heat resulting from the ex- during the return-stroke of the piston. 
so that the valve b is normally open. At the 
To all ulton, it invally concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGEM. HoPKINS, opposite side of the cylinder-bottom a tube, 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State c, communicates with an exhaust-valve, D. 
of New York, have invented a new and Im- consisting of a cylindrical valve-casing, d, and 4o 
5 proved Gas-Engine, of which the following is a cylindrical slide-valve, e, which is operated. 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
by an eccentric on the main shaft of the en 
My invention relates to the class of gas-en-gine. The gas and air are drawn into the cyl 
gines in which a mixture of gas and common inder by the rising of the piston therein until 
air is drawn into the cylinder during the early the explosion takes place, when the flap-valve 45 
Io part of the stroke of the piston and then ex- b closes and prevents the flame and heated . 
ploded for the purpose of propelling the pis- gases from reaching the gas and air valves. 
ton to the end of its stroke; and it consists in After the piston reaches the extreme outward 
a combination of a check-valve with the sup- limit of its stroke the exhaust-valve opens and 
ply-tube leading from the gas and air valves allows the products of combustion to escape 5o 
plosion in the cylinder from heating the gas 
and air check-valves. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section taken on the 
line acac in. Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a horizontal sec- normally-open flap - valve b with the supply- 55 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
tube a, leading from the gas and air valves, as 
Like letters of reference indicate the same herein specified. 
2. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
parts in the two figures of the drawings. 
In my improved gas-engine the gas check- gas-valve A and airyalve B, disconnected and 
valve A and air check-valve B are similar in acting independently, and the normally-open 6o 
25 construction, each consisting of a rubber disk flap-valve b, in combination, as herein speci 
opening inward and closing upon a metal plate fied. 
3. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
having a circular row of holes, which the rub- 
ber valve closes when seated. The gas check- gas-valve A and air-valve B, disconnected and 
valve A and air check-valve B communicate acting independently, the normally-open flap- 65. 
3o with the cylinder-bottom C by means of the valve b, and exhaust-valve D, as herein speci 
supply-tube a, which may be screwed into the fied. 
cylinder-bottom or cast integral therewith. 
On the inner end of the tube a, and within the 
cylinder-bottom, there is a flap-valve, b, which 
35 hangs loosely on its supporting-screw. The 
inner end of the tube a is beveled or undercut, 
B. G. UNDERWOOD, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
2O tion taken on line y y in Fig. 1. 
- 
GEO.M. HOPKINS. 
- 
--- 
- 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284656.txt	(No Model.) 
A., I, OSBORN. 
FENCE, 
No. 284,656, 
Patented Sept, ll, 1883. 
NAZINESSEs. 
 
(24-06-------- 
64-4-4.- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT TRA, OSBORN, OF NEW POINT, INDIANA. 
FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 284,656, dated September 11, 1883. 
Application filed March 26, 1883. (No model.) 
w 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ALBERT IRA OSBORN, 
of New Point, in the county of Decatur and 
State of Indiana, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Fences, which im 
provement is fully set forth in the following 
Specification and accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved fence. Fig. 2 is a portable form of 
the same. Fig. 3 is an enlarged view of links 
in the chain. Fig. 4 is a form of link-hook 
for making connection. Fig. 5 is a view of a 
notched paling. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
light portable fence that can easily be con 
structed, and, when desired, can be detached 
from the posts or other means of support, 
wound or rolled up, and transported to an 
other position, or that can be stowed away for 
future use. 
A are posts of sufficient size, planted firm 
ly in the ground at regular intervals. Near 
the ground, and also at a short distance from 
the top of the post, shafts or hooks are driven 
into or securely fastened to the post. These 
staples or hooks can be made of any suitable 
material, (of Wrought-iron, preferably,) so 
that they may be turned back or clinched, if 
necessary. 
The alternate links B are simply construct 
ed in the ordinary form and of proper length 
to measure the distance between the pallings 
or vertical pieces of the fence. The other al 
ternate links are made of the proper size and 
shape to receive the vertical pieces or palings 
D, and these links are provided with the loops 
C at each end, so that the alternate links B 
may rest in them without coming in contact 
with the palings. These links may also be 
made round to receive poles, if necessary. 
D are vertical pieces or palings to be placed 
in the alternate links C. 
D' is a paling or vertical piece provided 
with notches E. These notched palings are 
to be placed at frequent intervals in the chain 
to keep the chains at a uniform distance 
apart. The link enters the notch while a 
wedge is driven between the end of the link 
and the paling. 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
65 
75 
85 
F is a link with hook attached, to be used 
at the end of Sections to connect them to 
gether. 
G. are forms of Supports that can be used in 
place of posts where a temporary fence is re 
quired, consisting of two upright pieces cross 
ing each other near the top, and secured to 
gether by means of a bolt-pin in the form of 
an X. On this fork the upper chain of the 
fence rests, while the chain next the ground 
may be secured in place by means of stakes 
H, driven over the chain, and a wire is em. 
ployed around the two to hold them securely 
in place, and also to prevent the chain from 
drooping or Sagging the fence. These stakes 
H also prevent hogs or other small animals 
from raising the fence or moving the same 
sidewise, thus keeping the whole firm and 
rigid, while at the same time it may be readily 
taken down, irolled up, and transported. If 
found necessary, posts may also be placed be 
tween the supports G, to make the fence more 
rigid. 
It is designed to make this fence insections 
as long as convenient, and to have the sections 
secured to each other by means of hooks, links, 
or otherwise. 
To furnish greater rigidity to the sections 
between the posts, I prefer to place a hori 
Zontal board or strip, I, along the vertical pal 
ing, directly below the upper chain. This 
board can be attached to each paling by means 
of wire, or to the alternate paling or palings, 
and will be of great service in strengthening 
the fence when lateral pressure is exerted. 
What I claim as new is 
1. The combination of the chain B C, hav 
ing the palings D, with the horizontal stay 
board I, substantially as herein set forth. 
2. The combination of the chain B C, hav 
ing the paling D and the stay-board I, with 
the staying or securing stakes H, substantially 
as herein set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand, this 17th day of 
March, 1883, in the presence of witnesses. 
w 
ALBERT IRA, OSBORN. 
Witnesses: - 
C. D. ZERBE, 
WM. HARTILEY PUGH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284757.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 284,757, 
 
E. E. PRATT, 
STEREOTYPE BLOCK, 
Patented Sept. 11, 1883. 
-/nventor 
Azaesses: 
o/8erea 4-eves 
Aawaz AZ Arad, 
C%-->e- 27 7... a 6-6. f62 e-ce 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN E. PRATT, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO A. N. KELLOGG 
NEWSPAPER COMPANY, OF ILLINOIS. 
STEREOTYPE - BLOCK 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 284,757, dated September 11, 1883, 
Application filed April 30, 1883, (No model.) 
IO 
derstood that when the metal is poured in 5o 
Be it known that I, EDWIN E. PRATT, a upon the blocks it will flow into this T-cav 
ity, and not only fasten the plate to the blocks, 
but also fasten the blocks to each other. 
Instead of the cavity, an L or a V or a Y 
shaped one may be employed, as illustrated in 55 
Fig. 3. If further attachment than that af. 
forded by the forked fastenings lying partly 
in each block is desired, such further attach 
ment may be obtained in various ways. Thus 
the horizontal recess may be enlarged or in- 6o 
clined within the limits of the outside blocks; 
or an additional recess, b, may be formed 
therein. I recommend the latter mode, be 
cause such recess is easily formed in the block 
and permits the ready removal of the metal 65 
when the block has performed its duty. 
In the modifications shown in Figs. 4 and 5 
the fastenings are located wholly within the 
respective blocks, and may be straight and 
vertical or inclined. 
All the recesses I have shown may be made 
by passing the block over a circular saw; but 
if the grooved form thereof is deemed objec 
tionable, the cavities may be made in de 
tached portions distributed along the blocks 
or joints. 
My invention permits the use of very small 
stuff for the backs, without other union than 
that afforded by the plate with which they 
are used, and thereby greatly economizes the 
cost of the wood. It also prevents in great 
measure injury from the shrinkage and the 
curling and warping which attends the use of 
wide or large boards. 
To all whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Stereotypes, of which the following is 
a specification. 
It is now customary to cast stereotype 
plates upon wood blocks as a backing, and 
to secure them together by grooving or re 
cessing the tops of the blocks, so the metal 
will flow thereinto when the casting is done. 
It has never been usual, however, to cast 
stereotypes upon independent separate blocks. 
In my present improvement I unite narrow 
strips or separate independent blocks, so that 
they may form the backing for a wide plate 
by means of the plate itself, which is cast 
upon them and in such manner that the backs 
may be as well formed of small stuff as of in 
tegral pieces. 
The invention consists in a stereotype-plate 
united to two or more separate and independ 
ent blocks by providing each of the blocks 
with suitable recesses or grooves, into which 
the metal of the plate will flow at the time of 
casting the plate, substantially as hereinafter 
set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 shows an 
edge view of a plate united to a backing com 
posed of three blocks in accordance with my 
invention. Fig. 2 is an edge view of the 
blocks, showing the form of the grooves or 
recesses therein. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 show some 
modifications of the form of the fastenings. 
In said drawings, A represents the stereo 
type - plate, which may be of any dimen 
sions required. B B and B are the sepa 
rate blocks which make up the backing for 
said plate. At their adjacent edges these 
blocks are provided With horizontal grooves 
or recesses b, and one or both of them is cut 
away, as at b, to provide a passage for the 
metal into the horizontal groove or recess b. 
When brought together, these grooves and 
passage form a T, of which one horizontal 
limb is in one block and the other limb is in 
the adjacent block. It will be readily un 
I claim 
1. The stereotype-plate provided with a 
wood backing consisting of two or more inde 
pendent blocks united by the metal of the 
plate, substantially as specified. 
2. The stereotype - plate provided with a 9o 
Woodbacking consisting of independent blocks 
united to the plate and directly to each other 
by fastenings located at the joints between 
the blocks, substantially as specified. 
75 
' 
EDWIN E. PRATT. 
Witnesses: 
H. M. MUNDAY, 
T. EWERETT BROWN. 
ra 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284857.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 284,857, 
gs 
J. W. JEFFERS. 
LETTER BOX 
Patented Sept. 11, 1883. 
- P E - 
2.. 
SE 
synases 
Sisyns 
2S 
S2 
C-A-R-2'-- S 
3 
2 
- 
 
 
 
f 
  
RNNNNYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNS 
 
-WITNESSES 
42-4 z. 
INVENT OR 
44.4% 
ra, PEERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
w 
JOSEPH. W. JEFFERS, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
LETTER-BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 284,857, dated September 11, 1883. 
Application filed October 9, 1882. (No model.) 
s 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. W. JEFFERs, 
of the city of Baltimore and State of Mary 
land, have invented certain Improvements in 
Street Letter-Boxes, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
The object of this invention is to construct 
a streetletter-boxin such manner that wrapped 
newspapers, parcels, and other articles larger 
than ordinary letters may be placed therein 
without exposing an opening leading directly 
to the interior of the box of greater width 
than is usually allowed in boxes of this de 
scription; and it consists in locating in the up 
per part of the box, and immediately beneath 
the slot through which letters are inserted, a 
hollow revoluble cylinder having two slots of 
different sizes, one being adapted for letters 
and the other, which is of greater width, for 
newspapers, parcels, &c., as before stated. 
In the further description of my said in 
vention which follows, reference is made to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part here 
of, in which 
Figure I is the vertical cross-section of the 
improved box. Fig. II is the longitudinal sec 
tion of the same. Fig. III is an exterior end 
view of a part of the box. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similar 
Darts in all the views. 
A is the box proper, having the usual door, a, 
to be opened for the removal of letters, and a 
slot, b, in the upper part, provided with a 
hinged cap, as is usual. The slotb differs from 
those ordinarily found in street letter-boxes, 
in that it is of sufficient width to allow of the 
passage through it of newspapers, parcels, &c. 
B is the hollow cylinder, having the slots e 
and d, the former of such width as to admit 
letters only, and the latter corresponding prac 
tically in width with the slot b. The cylinder 
B is susceptible of partial rotation--that is to 
say, it may be revolved so as to bring either of 
the slots directly under the slot b. The means 
which I preferably employ to move the cylin 
der B consists of a handle, e, which projects 
from one end of the cylinder through a semi 
circular slot in the box. A circular plate, g, 
fastened to the handle e, is used to conceal the 
semicircular slot if and prevent water enter 
ing the box. . . When the cylinder is in the po 
sition shown in the drawings, letters may be 
inserted in the box without any movement of 
the cylinder; but a newspaper or parcel enters 
the cylinder only, and is discharged into the 
box by inverting the cylinder through the 
medium of the handle e. The handle e may 
be weighted, so as to maintain the cylinder B 
in an inverted position, in which case it would 
be necessary to turn the cylinder to receive a 
newspaper or parcel, and the discharge of the 
same to the box would be effected automati 
cally. 
I am aware that letter-boxes have heretofore 
been constructed containing a revoluble cyl 
inder having an overbalance to hold it in an 
inverted position, the box and cylinder hav 
ing each a lateral aperture for the reception 
of letters, and which apertures are only inline 
to give free passage to the interior of the box 
when the cylinder is turned from its normal 
position. I do not therefore claim, broadly, a 
letter-box with a revoluble cylinder therein; 
but 
What I do claim as my invention is 
In combination with the box A, with the 
slot b in its upper end, the cylinder B, having 
the slots c and d, situated at practically oppo 
site sides thereof and of different widths, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
J. W. JEFFERS, 
- 
- 
Witnesses: 
W. S. WILKINSON, 
ED J. DIGGS. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US284957.txt	8 sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
MECHANISM FOR STRAIGHTENING AND KEEPING STRAIGHT BAND 
No. 284,957, 
a tented Sept. ll, 1883. 
S, E, & J. E. FUR LONG. 
KNIWES AND SAWS, 
 
   
WITNES5ts 
%-4s (S/2-6, 
SYS.NET 5 
S 2. 
 
(No Model.) 
w 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
S. E. &. J. E. FUR LONG. 
MECHANISM FOR STRAIGHTENING AND KEEPING STRAIGHT BAND 
Patented Sept. ll, l883. 
No. 284,957, 
KNIVES AND SAWS, 
 
 
 
 
f 
f 
Ya 
- 
N s 
/7 
Fig-1- 
S. E. &. J. E. FURLONG. 
(No Model.) 
MECHANISM FOR STRAIGHTENING AND KEEPING STRAIGHT BAND 
Patented Sept. 11, 1883. 
No 284,957, 
KNEWES AND SAWS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
 
 
WITNESSE5 /24. 
3 2.7 
S. 
20 
W-TN 
Nys Ors 
ir i. ity 
ce.2 A- 5,7- 
42. 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMON E. FURLONG AND JAMES E, FURLONG, OF WOBURN, MASS. 
MECHANISM FOR STRAIGHTENING AND KEEPING STRAIGHT BAND KNVES AND SAWS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 284,957, dated September 11, 1883. 
Application filed July 24, 1882. (No model.) 
c in the bearing c", and is driven by the belt 
To all whom, it may concern 
cupon the pulley c from the driving-pulley 
Be it known that we, SIMON E. FURLONG 
c', resting upon the shaft c, and revolved by 
and JAMEs E. FURLONG, both of Woburn, in 
the belt c.". Upon the belt c is placed an 55 
the county of Middlesex and State of Massa 
idler, c'. The grinder C, with its arbor and 
chusetts, citizens of the United States, have 
bearings, is held in position in the bracket.c., 
made a certain new and useful Mechanism for 
Straightening and Keeping Straight Band 
Which is bolted to the frame of the machine D. 
This grinder Cis made adjustable by the screw 
Knives, &c., of which the following is a full, 
c in connection with its bearing-blocks c' and 6o 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, in Which 
the screw is turned by the hand-wheels a, a, 
by Which means the grinder is moved later. 
like letters indicate corresponding parts. 
ally to and from the back of the cutting-blade. 
The nature of our invention appertains mote 
This grinder is preferably placed so that the 
especially to that class of machines in which 
plane of the line of the diameter of the grinder 65 
bands, or band-saws, or band-knives are used 
in cutting, sawing, or splitting leather or other 
shall coincide with the back of the band. Of 
course the grinder may be used in other posi 
articles, and is more particularly confined to 
tions; but the one stated, and represented in 
a novel arrangement of grinders in connection 
the drawings, is preferable. 
with adjustable guides by which the band is 
EE are grinders placed in the usual man 
kept of uniform width throughout, and by 
ner to revolve against the cutting-edge of the 
which means the nicety of adjustment and 
band in order to sharpen it. These grinders 
regulation of the band-knife or band-saw in 
are made adjustable in any convenient man 
relation to the substance to be cut or sawed 
ner to Compensate for the Wear of the circum 
can be regulated. 
ference of the grinders. All of the grinders.75 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a machine in 
are preferably made of emery or a similar 
which the principal parts are shown. Fig. 2 
is an end elevation taken at a a of Fig. 1. Fig. 
SubStance. 
In Fig. 4 is represented insection one of the 
3 represents in detail the grinders in Section a 
adjustable guides through which the band 
ac of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 represents the front grind 
knife passes. d is the guide; d, the opening So 
ers in relation to the adjustable guides in Sec 
Or mouth through which the band. A passes as 
tion aty y of Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is also an end ele 
it is revolved upon the carrying-pulleys B. 
vation of a machine in which the adjustable 
(t" is a screw Working in the body of the guide 
guide and back grinder, in relation to the 
other parts of the machine, are more particul 
d, which is turned by the thumb-wheel a. 
larly shown. 
is of the utmost importance that the band 
The form shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 5 repre 
should run as nearly true and even in rela 
sentsin general structure a machine adapted to 
tion to the work as possible, and as the dis 
carry aband knife or saw such as is in ordi 
tance from the cutting-edge of the band to the 
nary use. 
cutting-table would naturally be a variable dis 
B B are the band-wheels over which the 
tance, on account of the wear of the band, it is 
band A travels and is carried while working. 
customary to provide for a liberal adjustment 
. Upon one edge of the band-wheels B is the rim 
b, against which the back of the band presses 
of the main driving-pulleys Bupon their shafts, 
so that while the back of the band is always. 
and which aids and steadies the band while 
pressed against the shoulder b the cutting 
cutting. The band A is further held in its po 
sition by adjustable guides placed in desig 
edge shall remain at the same distance from 
the cutting-table upon which the leather or 
nated positions, as represented by did did, and 
other article to be cut or sawedisplaced. In 
which guides are represented in detail in Fig. 
cutting or splitting leather particularly it is 
4 and to some extent in Fig. 5. 
of the utmost importance that the cutting 
D is the frame of the machine; e, the main 
edge of the band shall be at a uniform dis 
driving-pulley; f, the belt. The back grind 
ing-wheel, C, revolves on the spindle or arbortance from the cutting-table; but in conse 
In operating a machine of this character it 85 
- 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
N 
r 
2 
2S4,95 
O 
25 
quence of the stretching of the band, the in 
equalities in the temper, and from many other 
causes, it is found that both short and long 
twists or joints are formed in the band. To 
overcome this difficulty the only means here 
tofore known has been to set up the guides 
and to grind off the cutting-edge of the bands 
to form as uniform a cutting-surface as possi 
ble; but on account of the reasons heretofore 
stated, and because the band is stretched very 
tight, and the varying density of the article 
to be cut, and other causes, it has been found 
impossible to keep the cutting-band perfectly 
true and even upon its cutting - edge, and to 
uniformly run at a given distance from the 
cutting-table or article to be operated upon. 
The front grinders are primarily for sharpen 
ing the band, and perform the operation of 
straightening or truling the band incidentally, 
but very imperfectly, as heretofore used. 
We have ascertained that the difficulty of cor 
rectly truling and keeping true a band saw or 
knife in condition to perform fine work is 
probably because the irregularities which 
come by use render the back of the band un 
even, and as it passes over the band-wheels 
and through the guides the cutting-edge is 
constantly varying. After the band has been 
in use any considerable length of time, the 
only way to put it in Working condition, ac 
cording to our experience, is to grind the back 
of the band by the means herein described, or 
by analogous devices. Therefore to over 
come those objections we have found by long 
experience and experiment that by applying 
the device which we have heretofore described 
to the back of the blade while upon the ma 
chine, in connection with the adjustable guides 
and in connection with the band-sharpeners 
4c EE, it is possible to maintain a band knife 
or saw in perfect condition, and with a per 
fect-running cutting-edge in relation to the 
articles to be cut, whereby a large saving is 
made in the band knives and Saws them 
selves, and a great Saving of time in keeping 
the bands in proper condition, and, further, 
in reducing the amount of poor or indifferent 
work to the minimum. 
It will be observed that the adjustable grinder 
C is always placed so that it will operate upon 
the back edge of the band, while the sharpen 
ing-grinders EE are placed upon the opposite 
or cutting side of the band, preferably not far 
apart, and in relation to the adjustable guides 
as heretofore Stated. 
We have found that the only possible mode 
of keeping the cutting-edge of the band in per 
fect condition was by also grinding and truling 
the back as well as the cutting-edge of the 
band. This We are not aware has ever been 
deemed practicable before our invention, or, 
if it could be done, that it would have any de 
sirable effect upon the running of the band it 
self. The device Wehave heretofore explained 
performs this work while the band is upon the 
machine and running, and Overcomes the great 
difficulties hitherto encountered in doing fine 
35 
45 
 
As previously stated, it is important that 7o 
work with a band-knife, substantially as here 
tofore practiced. 
the back grinder should have its cutting-sur 
face contact with the band on the line and 
parallel plane of the diameter of the grinder, 
in order to avoid, as far as possible, the tend 
ency to spring the band, the work being done 
while the band itself is running. There would 
also be danger of springing it unless carefully 
steadied and supported by the adjustable 
guides. The front grinders, working against 
each other to sharpen or bevel the band, do 
not act upon the band with the same effect as 
the backgrinder in its position as shown. The 
tendency of the action of the back grinder is 
to press the band from the band-wheels. This 
is overcome by using the front grinders or 
sharpeners in connection with the back grind 
er. The back grinder is used less than the 
front sharpeners, so that the back of the band 
can be kept straight without wearing away the 
front of the band unnecessarily. It is obvious 
that it is not practicable to operate the back 
grinding device to do any severe work with 
out the support given to the band by the front 
grinders working at the same time. Thus 
while the front sharpeners may be used to 
sharpen the band alone, the backgrinders can 
not be be used, except to a very limited extent, 
Without also using the front sharpeners in con 
nection therewith. This must be apparent to 
any mechanic upon an inspection of the band 
carrying wheels, and the manner in which the 
band is driven and supported on the band 
wheels. 
It will be noticed that in the construction Of 
the backgrinder, as shown, the back of the 
moving band is across the face of the grinder, 
and the tendency of the grinder is to not only 
press the band forward upon the band-wheels, 
but also to press the band either downwardly or 
upwardly, according as the grinderis revolved. 
To overcome this latter vibration it is al 
ways necessary to carefully adjust the guides, 
that the band may not be sprung or broken. 
It is possible that if the back grinder were 
placed flatwise, and made to revolve in the 
same line as the band, the guides might be dis 
pensed with in the same operation; but even 
in this position of the grinder the guides would 
still aid in steadying the band and materially 
assist in truing the same. We prefer, how 
ever, the construction shown in the drawings, 
deeming it the best for many reasons. 
We claim 
1. The combination of the band-wheels and 
means for supporting and rotating them, and 
a band knife or saw, with a grindstone adjust 
ably mounted in the path of the back of the 
knife or saw, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
2. In an organized machine, an adjustable 
revolving grinder adapted to operate upon 
the back of a revolving band-knife, in combi 
nation with the adjustable band-wheels B, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
2S4,957 
Witnesses: 
T. MARION PARKER, 
W. R. MCINTOSHI. 
3 
the adjustable grinder C and the adjustable 
guided, adapted to operate upon the back of 
a moving band-knife, in combination with the I5 
adjustable cutters EE, adapted to operate in 
connection with the back grinder, C, and the 
guides d, all substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
Y 
SIMON. E. EURLONG. 
JAMES E. FURLONG. 
3. In an organized machine, the adjustable 
grinder C, adapted to revolve and operate up 
on a moving band-knife, in combination with 
the adjustable cutters or grinders EE, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. In combination, the adjustable grinder C 
and the adjustable guides d, both adapted to 
operate in combination with each other and 
upon the back of a revolving band knife or 
Io saw, substantially as and for the purposes Set 
forth. 
5. In an organized band cutting machine, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285058.txt	F. A. NICKERSON. 
COMPOUND DIE FOR PLASTIC MATERIALS. 
Patented Sept. 18, 1883. 
(Model.) 
No. 285,058, 
 
 
 
 
N. PeTERS. rhac-lithographer, Washington, , 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRED. A. NICKERSON, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
DICKINSON HARD RUBBER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
COMPOUND DE FOR PAST C VATE RAS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,058, dated September 18, 1883. 
- 
Application filed May 4, 1883. (Model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRED. A. NICKERSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Springfield, in the county of Hampden and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Compound Dies 
for Plastic Materials, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
compound dies for forming, under pressure, 
objects from plastic material; and it consists 
in constructing said dies from two metals of 
different degrees of hardness, and in covering 
their finished faces with an overlying thin 
coating of nickel, the object being to provide 
economical means for making such dies, and 
for preparing their faces in such a manner 
that the action of the heat to which they are 
subjected in working is in no way injurious 
to the articles molded therein, and to pro 
duce upon such dies a face of uniform hard 
heSS. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication, Figure I is a plan view of the face 
of a die constructed according to my inven 
tion. Fig. TI is a sectional view through the 
linea ac, Fig. I. 
Fig. III is a plan view of the 
bottom of the die. 
In the drawings, 2 indicates the die-blank; 
is the figure-bearing core or center, and in 
indicates the nickel coating of the compound 
die. 
In the manufacture of articles from plastic 
materials having the nature of hard rubber, 
which are softened by contact with a heated 
metal plate, a great variety of dies is required, 
and particularly so when such materials enter 
into the formation of buttons and similar ob 
jects, and means have long been sought where 
by the figured portion of such dies may be 
made of a soft and easily-worked metal, and 
then by inclosing Such figured portion in a 
die-blank, 2, make a die which might serve a 
practical purpose and take the place of an 
expensive solid steel die. Such efforts have 
heretofore proved futile, for the reason that a 
... soft-metal center and a steel or hard-metal 
blank present to the plastic material which is 
forced against them with a pressure-power of 
several tons metal faces of such varying capa 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
bilities of resistance that perfect work has 
not been obtainable from dies made of said 
metals. Furthermore, the necessary heat to 
which said dies are subjected in Working-Say 
200 to 300-operates, in dies which are made 
of two metals having differing affinities for 
heat, unfavorably to the production of perfect 
work therefrom when the faces of the two 
metals are allowed to come in contact with 
the pressed article, and such has been the dif 
ficulty in making ordinary compound dies 
practically useful that they have been aban 
doned. 
I have discovered that by applying to the 
face of the metals of a compound die a coat 
ing of nickel, all of the aforesaid objections to 
dies made of two metals of varying hardness 
are obviated, and that the result is a die 
which, in working under the influence of heat 
and pressure, as aforesaid, produces work 7 
equally perfect with that made in a solid har 
dened-steel die. 
In constructing my improved die I make a 
suitable blank, 2, from steel, turning out its 
central portion to receive the figure-bearing 
center , and to support the latter, Said cen 
ter ) is made from brass or metal having a 
similar mature, and which is easily Worked to 
produce thereon, by impress or by cutting, 
suitable ornamental designs which it is de 
sired to reproduce upon said articles of plas 
tic material, and said center is tightly fitted 
into the blank 3, as shown. I then, by electro 
plating-or by other suitable means, cover the 
faces of the blank 2 and the center a with a 
coating of nickel, n, whereby the said faces are 
given a surface of uniform hardness, and a 
compound die is produced having, for plac 
tical purposes, the qualities of a solid steel 
I do not claim, broadly, in this application 
covering the face of a soft-metal die with 
nickel, as and for the object stated, as that is 
the subject of another applicationalready filed. 
I am aware of patent to Hyatt, of October 
2S, 1879, for process of polishing sheets of 
celluloid by means of a flat polished surface, 
preferably of nickel-plated metal. 
Such I 
do not claim. 
die. 
What I claim as my invention is 
- 
- 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
2s 5,05s 
1. The compound diehereinbefore described, recess therein and adapted to fit therein, the 
consisting, of steel blank and removable cent Working-face of said soft-metal inset being Io 
ter piece of softer metal, the working-faces of nickel-plated, substantially as described. 
- 
both parts being nickel-plated, substantially 
2. The compound diehereinbefore described, 
having the external portion of hard metal, the 
inner portion of soft metal, resting in a conical 
- 
FRED, A. NICKERSON. 
5 as described. 
s 
KR 
Witnesses: 
H. A. CHAPIN, 
G. N. BOWERS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285158.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
. 
I. N. PHILLIPS, 
es 
No. 285,158, 
STATION INDICATOR, 
Patented Sept, l8, l883. 
 
 
 
 
 
III 
III 
 
I 
 
Ep sas 
47 re- 
E. 
r (us 2, 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
... - 
f 
t 
ISAAC NEWTON PHILLIPs, OF NASHVILLE, TENNESSEE. 
STATION-INDICATOR. 
ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,158, dated September 18, 1883. 
Application filed January 9, 1883. (No model.) 
55 
- 
To all whom it may concern. : 
Be it known that I, ISAAC NEWTON PHIL 
LIPs, of Nashville, in the county of Davidson 
and State of Tennessee, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Station-In 
dicators, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improve 
ment, parts being broken away. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation of the lever and pawls, and 
showing parts of the inner ratchet-wheel and 
the slide. Fig. 3 is a front elevation of the 
same, parts being broken away. 
The object of this invention is to promote 
convenience and certainty in making known 
to passengers the name of the next station. 
A represents a case, which is designed to 
be secured to the end of a car or other suit 
able support and in bearings, in the sides of 
which revolve the journals of a drum, B. Upon 
the front of the case A, near its ends, are 
printed the names of the stations at the ter 
mini of the line. Upon the face of the drum 
B, and in their regular order, or upon strips 
of paper or other suitable material attached 
to the said face of the drum, are printed the 
names of the various stations of the road, and 
at the end of the name of each station, and di 
rectly under the names of the termini of the 
road, are printed the distances of the said sta 
tion from the said termini, as illustrated in Fig. 
3, the names of the stations being seen succes 
sively through an opening in the front of the 
case A. One of the journals of the drum B 
projects, and to it, at allittle distance apart, are 
attached two ratchet-wheels, CD, arranged 
with their teeth pointing in opposite direc 
tions. 
To the journal of the drum B, between the 
two ratchet-wheels CD, is pivoted the angle of 
a right-angled lever,E, the end of the upper arm 
of which is attached to a cord, F. The lower 
end of the cord F hangsin such a position that 
it can be readily reached and operated by an 
attendant, and its upper end is attached to the 
trip-lever G of the bell H, which is-attached 
to the upper part of the side of the case A. 
I is a rod which passes through and works 
in a hole in the upper arm of the lever E, and 
to its end parts are attached two pawls, JK, 
in such positions as to engage with the teeth 
The pawls J K . 
of the ratchet-wheels CD. 
project in opposite directions as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, so that one of the said pawls 
will be held away from its ratchet-wheel when 
the other pawl is in working position. Upon 
the outer end of the rod I is formed a small 
crank, L, which projects at right angles with 
the pawls J K, and to it is attached the end 
of a spiral or other suitable spring, M. The 
other end of the spring M is attached to the 
lever E. With this construction either pawl 
J K can be brought into working position by 
adjusting the crank L, and will be held in that 
position by the spring M until the crank L is 
adjusted into the other position. The end of the 
lower arm of the lever E has two slotsformed 
in it at right angles with each other, to re 
ceive a slide-bar, N, and a pin attached to the 
said slide-bar. The middle part of the bar N 
is curved downward, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2, to bring it into proper position to engage 
with the lever E. The end parts of the bir N 
are straight and slide through bearings O, at 
tached to the case A. 
To the end of the drum B are attached pins 
P, arranged in a circle to engage with the ends 
of the slide-bar N, and thus stop the revolu 
tions of the said drum. With this construc 
tion, when the pawls J K are arranged as 
shown in Fig. 1, a downward pull upon the 
lever E or cord F will draw the upper arm of 
the lever E downward and cause the pawl J 
to revolve the drum B. The same movement 
of the upper arm of the lever E causes the 
lower arm of the said level to slide the bar N 
back, causing its rear end to project so that 
it will be struck by the next pin P and stop 
the revolution of the drum B at the proper 
point to display the name of the next station. 
At the end of the line the crank L is adjusted 
to bring the pawl Kinto position to engage 
with the ratchet-wheel D, so that the upward 
movement of the cord F, as it is drawn up 
ward by the return movement of the trip-le 
ver G, will revolve the drum B in the opposite 
direction and display the station-names in the 
reverse order. At each downward movement 
85 
90 
95 
ICC 
IO 
25 
 
i 
ES5, a 5S 
2. The combination, with the drum-shaft 
and ratchets thereon, of the angled lever E, 
the cord F, the bell-trip lever G, the rod I, 
carrying the pawls JK, the adjustable crank 
L, and the spring M, whereby the down and 
up movement of the cord will respectively 
cause the drum to move in opposite directions, 
as described. 
3. The combination, with the drum B, hav 
ing a circle of pins, and ratchets C D on its 
shaft, of the lever E, having two slots at right 
angles to each other, the cord F, and the slide 
bar N, carrying a pin, said slide-bar being 
curved in the middle, straight at both ends, 
and arranged in bearings O, whereby the drum 
will be revolved and the slide operated simul 
taneously, as described. 
" 
... 
" 
. 
ISAAC NEWTON PHILLIPS. 
Witnesses: 
T. M. EUBANK, 
N. B. DOSS. 
of the cord F the bell H is struck to call the 
attention of the passengers to the change in 
the indicator. The ease of movement of the 
drum B is regulated by the brake-springs Q, 
5 attached to the ends of cross-bars Q', and which 
rest upon the face of the said drum at its ends, 
and are held down with any desired force by 
the set-screw R, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The operating mechanism at the side of the 
IO case A is covered and protected by a casing, 
S, which is secured to the side of the said case 
A, and is slotted for the passage of the lever E 
and crank L. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
15 claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
1. A station-indicator constructed Substan 
tially as herein shown and described, and con 
sisting of the drum provided with two ratchet 
2O wheels operated by pawls connected with ale 
ver, and stopped by a slide-bar engaging with 
pins attached to the said drum, as set forth. 
ter's Patent 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285258.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 285,258, 
J. A. HAGAN, 
CRAIN CAR DOOR MECHANISM 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 18, 1883. 
 
 
 
 
\, 
W 77. 5. 
press photo-Lithographer, Washing" 
Iae (o: 
(No Model.) 
No. 285,258, 
 
 
  
 
Y 
J. A. HAGAN. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
GRAIN CAR DOOR MECHANISMI. 
767. A. 
Patented Sept. 18, 1883. 
AfAy. 6. 
s 
2 | 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
". 
JOHN A. HAGAN, OF THREE RIVERs, 
MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO THE SHEFFIELD VELOCIPEDE CAR COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
GRAN-CAR-DOOR MECHANISM. 
' SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,258, dated September 18, 1888. 
Application filed February 27, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 p 
lock detached. 
To all, whon, it 71va7? conce7n : 
Be it known that I, JoHN A. HAGAN, of 
Three Rivers, in the county of St. Joseph and 
State of Michigan, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Grain-Door Mech 
anism for use in Freight-Cars, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a part of 
the inside of an ordinary box or freight car 
with my improved door applied. Fig. 2 is a 
perspective view of the door and its hangings 
when not applied. Fig. 3 is a plan view of 
the door in position with part of its hangings 
broken away. Fig. 4 is an elevation of the 
door, showing animproved construction. Fig. 
5 is a plan view of a part of the door, show 
ing an improved door-guide. Fig. 6 is a ver 
tical section on the line ac a' of Fig. 4. Fig. 7 
is a bottom perspective view of a metallic 
grain-door lift. 
Fig. 8 is a side elevation of 
the same, and Fig. 9 is a view of a grain-door 
The object of my invention is to provideim 
roved extra doors to be used in the better 
class of box or freight cars to close the open 
ings in the sides of the cal's tightly when the 
cars are used for transporting grain. 
I construct and apply my improved extra 
doors so that they are permanently attached 
to the cars, and are therefore not liable to be 
lost or stolen, and yet are attached in such a 
manner that when the cars are used for other 
purposes than transporting grain these extra 
doors can be slid out of the way, and neither 
the doors northeir hangings will interfere with 
the use of ordinary freight-car doors. 
My improvements are applicable to any 
kind of cars in which grain can be transport 
ed, and may also be useful elsewhere than in 
cars. Speaking in general terms, they consist 
in improved means for hanging grain-doors, 
by which they can be easily removed from and 
returned to their places in the doorways with 
out being detachable from the cars; of means 
for locking grain-doors in the doorways to pre 
vent the loss of grain; of means for holding the 
doors out of the way of other freight than 
grain when the cars are used for other freight; 
. 
. 
. 
6o 
of an improved way of framing grain-doors; 5o 
of improved grain-door guides, which prevent 
the doors from being jammed by grain getting 
between the doors and guides, and which are 
not affected by the shrinkage of doors made of 
unseasoned lumber; of a door-lift, which, when 55 
used with my improved door, distributes the 
strains in lifting over the whole door, and of 
other improvements hereinafter set forth in 
detail, and intended to be succinctly summed 
up in the appended claims. 
In the annexed drawings, A represents the 
floor, B the side, and C the door-opening, of 
a box-car, all of usual construction. 
Disthe grain-door, used for closing the lower 
part of the door-opening when the car is loaded 65 
with grain, and in Fig. 1 is shown partly raised. 
Its length is something more than the width of 
the door-opening, and my design permits both 
the length and height to be made as great as 
desired without affecting the operation of the 7O 
door. 
a is a rod, preferably of round iron bent at 
its ends in the form of a double crank, and 
pivoted in suitable bearings, bb. These bear 
ings are placed in such a relation to the grain- 75 
door that when it rests upon the floor of the 
car the cranked rod a will rest on its top with 
some pressure and hold it close to the floor. 
The rod a has the further use when in this, its 
lowest position, of forming a metal guard for 8O 
the top of the door, so that it cannot be cut 
down to allow elevator grain-spouts to enter. 
(See Fig. 4.) The rod a may be only a little 
longer than the door in some cases, so as 
merely to provide for raising the door, and not 85 
for sliding it to one side of the doorway. 
c is another cranked rod, pivoted at did in 
suitable bearings, and with its ends turned 
over or suitably and loosely looped to the rod 
a, so that it can be turned freely in the loops go 
and they can slide on the rod. Instead of the 
cranked rod c, two links, or even one central 
link, might be employed; but a cranked rod is 
better. Metallic tubes may be used to form 
the rods a and c. 
gg, Fig. 1, are the grain-door guides, which 
may be of the usual form, but preferably are 
of the form shown in Fig. 5. 
95 
35 
45 
- 
r 
sa 
g 
2s 5,25s 
75 
By means of the handlesh l, the door may hook, although a useful adjunct, is not indis 
be raised to the top of the door-opening, which pensable, because the cranked rod ( of itself 
brings the crank ends of the rod a to a verti 
forms a very good lock for the door, and works 
cal position, when the door may be moved to 
automatically for that purpose whenever the 7o 
one side in the position shown by the dotted 
door is brought down to place. 
lines, Fig. 1, where it is held by the buttonse 
The result of the improved construction 
e and the bottom guide, le. Since the door is 
above described in detail is that I get, first, 
raised vertically, it may have flanged grain 
a set of hangings for a grain-door so constructed 
tight guides or shoes at both ends, a property 
as to automatically lock the door in place When 
not possessed by any hinged or pivoted door. 
in use; second, a set of hangings which form. 
When the grain-door rests on the floor of the 
a guard for the top of the grain-door when it 
car, the rod a is held in position on its top by 
isin use; third, a grain-door hung With a crank 
one or more buttons, in, and by the hook n, 
for elevating it; fourth, a grain-door hung with 
Fig. 9, which is pivoted on the side of the 
a crank to admit of vertical and horizontal 
door-post, as shown at Fig. 4, and thus locks 
motion of the door; fifth, a door combined 
one end of the grain-door, while its opposite 
with hangings permanently connecting it. With 
end is held tightly by its being directly under 
a car so constructed as to admit of the use of 
and in line with the pivoted end of the rod (t. 
door guides or plates at both ends of the door; 
The corners of the door are protected by the 
sixth, a grain-door hung with two cranked 
straps o 0, Figs. 4 and 5, which turn over its 
rods; seventh, a grain-door hung with cranks, 
top, and may be slightly concaved on their up 
so that the door and cranks will clear the door 
per surface to receive the locking-rod (, as 
way when the door is not in use; eighth, an 
improved grain-door having diagonal braces 
shown in Fig. 6. As these cornel-irons rest 
on the ends of the vertical battens, (which do 
resting at their lower ends upon the door-lift; 
not materially shrinklongitudinally,)thetight 
ninth, an improved door-lift; tenth, improved 
ness of the door-lock is not affected by the 
grain-tight metal guideways for grain-doors; 
shrinking of unseasoned lumber of which the 
eleventh, an improved lock for grain-doors; 
door imay be made. 
twelfth, means for putting the door and its 
The door-liftp, Fig. 4, is preferably of cast 
hangings out of the way against the upper side 
iron and of the shape shown in Figs. 7 and S, 
of the car-wall and fastening them there. 
. 
having lifting - recess R. Its flange ' rests 
I am aware that previous to my invention 
against the outside of the door and provides a 
it has been proposed to secure to a door-post 
means of securing it thereto, and its rabbeted 
an angle-iron in which the door shall slide, 
lower edge, p", Fig. 6, allows it to fit over the 
and I do not claim. Such subject-lmatter. 
door - threshold. Its partition p" makes it 
Without intending to confine myself to the 
grain-tight when the door is down. Its use is 
exact details of construction herein specified, 
to provide a convenient means of raising the 
and having thus described my invention, what 
door from the outside when it is desired to al 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
low the grain to escape below it in unloading. 
Patent of the United States, is 
It also serves as a footing for the diagonal 
1. The combination of the pivoted cranked 
braces p" of the door, and through them the 
hanging at, which extends across and beyond 
strain of lifting the door is better distributed 
the door-opening, as described, and the grain 
to all parts of the door, so that it will rise 
door loosely connected to the hanging, whereby 
evenly and not be so apt to bindin its ways. 
the door may have both a vertical and a hori 
The grain-door guides, Fig. 5, consist of a 
Zontal sliding movement, both movements 
flat plate of metal, s, secured to the door-post, 
being in a line parallel with the door-opening, 
and of the angle-piece t, secured to the outside 
substantially as set forth. 
of the grain-door, both of which preferably ex 
2. The combination of the grain-dool', the 
tend from the top to the bottom of the door. 
cranked roda, upon which the door slides hori 
The door-post may be rabbeted to clear the 
Zontally, and the cranked rod c, by which the 
piece t, or the plates may extend beyond the 
door is hinged to the rod (, and which permits 
door-post. In either case the door is held 
the door to have a vertically sliding move 
grain-tight against the plates, and this tight 
ment, both the vertical and the horizontal 
mess is not affected by the shrinking of un 
movements being in a plane parallel with the 
seasoned lumber of which the door may be 
door-opening, substantially as set forth. 
made. It will thus be seen that when the door 
3. The combination of the grain-door, the 
is in its place in the doorway it is tightly 
cranked rod (, loosely connected or pivoted to 
locked therein, and is also grain-tight, and 
the door, so that it may have a horizontal and 
when it is moved to the position shown by the 
a vertical movement in a plane parallel with 
dotted lines, Fig. 1, it and all its attachments 
the door-opening, and the lock n, substantially 
are out of the way of freight and of ordi 
as set forth. 
nary doors, and the trouble of detaching and 
4. The combination of the vertically-sliding 
the expense of housing are avoided. The hook 
grain-door, the vertical metallic plates s, se 
in should be so adjusted and have such a re 
cured to the door-posts, and the angle-irons t, 
silient quality that it will brace the rod a 
secured to the door, which embrace the edges 
down firmly on the top of the door; but this 
of the platess from end to end, as set forth, 
95 
I.IO 
II5 
IOO 
IO 
15 
25. 
35 
45 
65 
2s 5,25s 
- 
: 
forth. 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
so that a grain-tight guide is made for the door 
irrespective of any shrinkage of timber, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination of the vertically and . grain-door with the lift and the diagonal 25 
horizontally sliding grain-door, the cranked 
rod a, by which the door is lifted and on which 
it slides, and means for securing the door at 
one side of the doorway, substantially as set 
6. The combination, with the grain-door, of 
the cranked locking-roda, and the straps oo, 
secured to the door and concaved on their up 
per surfaces to receive the locking-rod a, sub 
stantially as described. 
7. The combination of the door and the 
metalliclift secured thereto, said lift being pro 
vided with flanges , recesses R, and a par 
tition, p", between the recesses, as set forth. 
8. The combination, with the grain-door, of 
the lift constructed substantially as shown, and 
secured to its bottom edge, so as to afford a 
handle on both sides of the door, substantially 
as set forth. . 
9. The combination of the main body of the 
braces p", which are supported by the angular 
sides of the lift, substantially as set forth. 
10. The combination of the vertically-slid 
ing grain-door, the cranked locking-rod, the 
metallic concaved bearing-strapso o, and means 3O 
for locking the rod, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 21st day of February, 
- 
A. D. 8S3. 
J. P. McKEY, 
EDWARD B. LINSLEY. 
JOHN A. HAGAN. 
Witnesses: 
TO 
s 
- 
K 
c 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285359.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 285,359. 
S. Y. LOVE. 
SEWING MACHINE, 
Patented Sept. 18, 1883. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
W. 
 
 
 
bet pe - AI isk 
4. 
fifty "All 
E. H. 
S. 
2se 
222R 
NS 
W- 
( 
R 
s 
Nii 
St. SRN 
Sr. NHS -- 
I 
a 
--------- 
r 
is 
S" 
\\ (wsasiere, C.2-isty 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
SAMUEL Y. LOVE, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SEWING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,859, dated September 18, 1883. 
Application filed April 23, 1883. (No model.) 
- 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUELY. LOVE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Pittsburg, 
county of Allegheny, State of Pennsylvania, 
5 have invented or discovered a new and useful 
Improvement in Sewing-Machines; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
concise, and exact description thereof, refer. 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
Io making a part of this specification, in which 
like letters indicating like parts 
Figure 1 is a transverse vertical sectional 
view of the head of a sewing-machine bracket 
illustrative of my invention, the plane of sec 
15 tion being indicated by the line y), Fig. 2. 
Fig. 2 shows a longitudinal vertical section 
taken in the plane of the line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a horizontal sectional view taken in the 
plane of the driving-shaft, the driving-gear 
2O and mechanism immediately connected there 
With being in plan or top elevation; and Fig. 
4 is a top plan view of a portion of the head, 
needle-bar, and its vertically-actuating bar. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
25 ments in mechanism for changing the plane of 
needle movement in sewing-machines for but 
ton-hole stitching or ornamental sewing; and 
in general terms it consists of certain combi 
nations of a vertically and horizontally mova 
3O ble needle-bar, a vertically-movable plate or 
bar carrying the needle-bar, an intermittent 
ly-rotary wrist working in a groove in the nee 
dle-bar for giving it horizontal movement, and 
gear mechanism for operating the wrist at in 
35 tervals while the needle is raised, as hereinaf. 
termore fully described and claimed. 
In the drawings, A represents a portion of 
the bracket-arm and head of a sewing-machine 
frame, and A the cap or face plate, which is 
4O secured to the face of the head by screws a in 
the usual manner, as illustrated in Fig. 2. 
A needle-bar, B, by preference of rectangul 
lar form in cross-section, is employed, which 
is passed through openings b in the top and 
45 bottom plates of the cap. These openings are 
of greater width than the bar in the direction 
of the driving-shaft D, whereby freedom of 
movement is provided for the needle-bar in 
such openings, not only in vertical direction, 
. so but also horizontally, at right angles to the 
direction offeed. 
6O 
The needle-baris carried inits vertical move 
ment by a vertically-reciprocating plate or bar, 
C, which passes through similarly - shaped 
guide-openings, b, adjoining the openings b. 55 
Vertical movement is given to this bar C by 
the usual cam-block, C, affixed thereto, in the 
groove c of which a wrist-pin, c', works, which 
latter is carried in the usual manner on the 
end of the driving-shaft. 
The plate-bar C and needle-bar B are con 
nected, so as to take vertical movementin uni 
son, by means of pins c, set fast in the plate 
bar, and, extending horizontally from its face, 
pass loosely through holes bin the needle-bar, 65 
thereby causing the needle-bar to move verti 
cally with the bar C, but affording it freedom 
of horizontal movement, sliding back and forth 
on the guide-pins c. This horizontal move 
ment is given to the needle-bar independently 7o 
of the bar C by means of an intermittently 
rotary Wrist, e, carried on the end disk, e, of 
shaft E. This wrist works in a groove, b, cut 
in the side face of the needle-bar, the groove 
being extended vertically to prevent contact 75 
at its ends with the wrist at any part of its 
full stroke. Consequently the wrist will be 
effective only in giving horizontal movement. 
The shaft Eisjournaled in any suitable bear 
ing, as at a, and the wrist e is set out of its 8o 
axial line a distance equal to one-half the 
horizontal movement to be given the needle 
bar, and its normal position of rest between 
successive movements or part rotations is in 
a horizontal planethrough the axis of the shaft, 85 
whereby one half-rotation of the wrist shifts 
the needle-bar to one side of its groove or open 
ing b, and the succeeding half-rotation shifts 
it back or to the other side of the opening. In 
order to impart these movements intermittent- go 
ly while the needle is raised, a gear-wheel, F, 
is secured on the shaft E, which is driven at 
intervals by a mutilated crown-gear, H, which 
makes power-connection with driving-shaftD 
by a feather sliding in the grooveh. The num- 95 
ber of teeth on this crown-wheel is one-half 
the number on the wheel F, so that one full 
rotation of the crown-wheel will give a half. . 
rotation to F, effecting one horizontal move 
ment, as above described, and the succeeding Ioo 
rotation of the crown-wheel will effect the re 
verse horizontal movement. Thus Successive 
 
2 
2S5,359 
. 
IO 
5 
25 
rotations of the driving-shaft and crown-wheel 
will shift the needle-bar horizontally back and 
forth, first in one direction, then in the other, 
at right angles to the line of feed. 
By arranging the toothed part of the crown 
wheel in proper relation to the wrist c, the 
horizontal movement of the needle-bar may 
be given while it is raised and the needle is 
Out of the cloth. In order to effect this move 
ment quickly, or before the needle re-enters 
the cloth, the crown-wheel is made of consid 
erably greater size or diameter than the wheel 
F, so that the toothed part of its periphery or 
crown shall be considerably less than a half 
circumference. This relationship between the 
wheels may be varied considerably, however, 
depending somewhat upon the class of work 
to be done by the machine, and therefore I do 
not Wish to limit my invention to any partic 
2O.ular relative sizes of gears, the principal ob 
ject being to effect the horizontal shift of the 
needle-bar while it is raised, so as to free the 
needle from the fabric and permit of direct 
vertical movement of the needle while in the 
fabric; also, if desired, bevel-gears may be sub 
stituted for the spur and crown wheels FH, 
or other suitable or well-known form of gear 
ing may be employed, whereby one complete 
rotation of the driving-shaft imparts intermit 
tent rotary motion to the shaft E. 
When desired to do straight sewing, the nee 
dle-bar may be moved to one side of its guide 
openings b, and the wheels F H be put out of 
gear. To this end screwss, having cam-shaped 
or one-sided heads, are set in tapped holes in 
the ends of the bar C, so that by turning the 
screws their one-sided heads will press the nee 
dle-bar over to the front side of the guide 
openingsb, and hold it there while the two bars 
take vertical movementinunison; also, to move 
the crown-wheel out of gear, a groove, h", is 
made in the surface of its extended hub, which 
receives the forked ends of a lever, R, such 
lever being pivoted, as at '', to a stud, ', on 
45 the inner face of the head or shell A. The 
lower end of the lever protrudes through a 
notched slot in the shell, as at , which notches 
are in position to take the lever and hold it 
when either in or out of gear. If desired, the 
5O lever may have spring action sufficient to carry 
it into the notches; or a light spring may be 
arranged to bear upon the face of the lever for 
this purpose. 
If desired, other suitable or well-known 
35 
methods of shifting driving mechanism into 55 
and out of gear may be substituted for the le 
ver R, and other similar modifications may be 
made in the details of construction without 
departing from my invention. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. In a sewing-machine, the combination of 
vertically-reciprocating bar C, vertically and 
horizontally reciprocating bar B, and hollow 
inclosing-head having guide-openings b bin 
its ends, the opening b being extended beyond 65 
the thickness of bar B in the direction of its 
horizontal movement, and guide-pins c, Se 
cured to bar C, and extending horizontally 
through bar B, substantially as and for the pur 
pOSes set forth. 
2. The combination of vertically-reciprocat 
ing bar C, guide-pins c', needle-bar B, carried 
by and horizontally movable on the pins, Such 
needle-bar having an extended groove, b, 
therein, and an intermittently-rotary Wrist 75 
working in the groove for giving the needle 
bar its horizontal movement, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. The combination of vertically-reciprocat 
ing bar C, guide-pins c, grooved needle-bar 
B, shaft.E., and driving-gears F H, the gear 
H having teeth on a part only of its circum 
ference, the number being one-half that on 
wheelF, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
4. The combination of driving-shaft D, mu 
tilated gear H, gear F, shaft E, grooved nee 
dle-bar B, guide-pins c, bar C, cam C, and 
wrist c, substantially as set forth. 
B, rotary shaft E, carrying wrist e, and driv 
ing gears F H, the gear H being the larger of 
the two, and having teeth on a part only of its 
periphery or circumference, substantially as 
set forth. 
6. The combination of bar C, needle-bar B, 
guide-pinsc, and screwss, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
7. The combination of grooved needle-bar 
B, shaft E, carrying Wriste, gear-wheels FH, IOO 
and mechanism, substantially as described, for 
putting such wheels into and out of gear with 
each other. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
Witnesses: , 
5. The combination of grooved needle-bar go 
SAMUEL Y. LOVIC. 
hand. 
85 
95 
R. H. WHITTLESEY, 
C. L. PARKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285459.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 285,459. 
(N 
s es 
N 
s 
C. E. BUELL. 
FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM. 
Patented Sept. 25, 1883. 
N 
N 
- 
l, n is 
A. 
) 
x 
: 
, 
isse -le 
SN & 
N 
O 
(x 
S 
s 
& 
S 
- "N-- 
--- 
Y 
is Y 
is 
S 
s 
CA 
S 
f 
peace 
X N 
N 
Y 
sts 
r 
s 
N 
s 
n 
/ 
3 
N 
W 
= 
ressee 
Y- 
| 
/ 
-X-1 
 
 
S 
g 
s 
 
W 
s 
s 
-S 
. Witnesses; 
- 824-e-4 (76.7a-6 
(2-4%-24s 
f 
In v e - to r 
s 
c644 & /34 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, d, c. 
M 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. BUELL, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,459, dated September & 5, 1883. 
Application filed August 6, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
O 
- 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs E. BUELL, of 
the city and county of New Haven, State of 
Connecticut, have invented Improvements in 
Fire-Alarm and Fire-Extinguishing Systems, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention consists, primarily, in the com 
bination, with a normally-closed electric cir 
cuit, of thermostatic devices adapted to be 
made operative by heat to rupture said cir 
cuit, two or more stations on said circuit, each 
provided with apparatus adapted to be made 
operative to give an alarm when said circuit 
is ruptured, substantially as hereinafter de 
scribed. 
My invention further consists in combina 
tions and sub-combinations, which will be 
hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents my invention arranged for opera 
tion. Figs. 2, 3, and 4 represent parts of my 
; invention in detail. 
The same letters and figures indicate corre 
sponding parts in each. 
Referring to Fig. 1, there is shown at sta 
tion 1 the main battery MB, relay electro 
magnet R, and main wire extending through 
a building to be protected, and provided at 
convenient intervals in the building with 
joints 1 2 3 4 5678 of an easily-fused alloy, 
and the said main wire, after passing through 
the building, extends to the remote station 2, 
and after passing through the relay R at sta 
tion 2 connects at g with the earth, or other 
return circuit. By thus duplicating the alarm 
signal at a remote station greater security to 
property is obtained, as a failure of one appa 
ratus to operate does not result in a failure to 
give an alarm, the giving of an alarm-signal 
at one or more stations being certain; or, if 
the alarm at one station is not heard, it will 
be heard at other stations. 
Any preferred form of thermostat may be 
substituted for the joints, and a galvanometer 
with relay-connections may be used in place 
of the relays R. R. 
At each station there is shown a continuous 
vibrating gong, G, in the circuit of local bat 
tery LB, the relays R R being adapted to 
close their local circuits when their armatures 
25 
35 
45 
S 
55 
are retracted to their back contact-stops, as 
they will be when the main wire is ruptured 
by heat or broken by accident or otherwise, 
or when the main battery becomes exhausted, 
and the gongs G will be vigorously sounded, 
so that the system will be known to be in or 
der if an alarm has not been given. 
At station 1, I have shown the main pipe 
MI of a Water-Supply, having one or more 
branch pipes P extending through the build- 6o 
ing to be protected, and provided with valves 
or sprinklers that open by heat, one such be 
ing shown at S and also in Fig. 4. The wa- - 
ter is normally excluded from the pipes P by 
an ordinary gate-valve, V. The valve V is 
shown closed, and a weight, w, attached to 
the valve-lever l, that will open the valve 
when the lever l is released. 
The lever l is 
shown held up by the tube T, which rests upon 
the beam or support b, thus holding the valve 
W closed. The tube Tisa glass tube filled with 
an explosive and properly stoppered. A fine 
wire of platinum passes through the tube, and 
is adapted to become heated and fire the ex 
plosive when the local battery L. B is closed, 
thus bursting and destroying the tube T, and 
releasing the valve V to turn on a water-sup 
ply to pipe P at the same time an alarm is 
sounded on the gongs G. G. 
The gong G at station 1 is shown in a de 
rived circuit from the battery L. B, but may 
have a separate battery, or be directly in the 
circuit with the valve-releasing device. A 
switch, d, is provided for opening the local cir 
cuit. 
The gongs G, relays R, switches d, and bat 
teries are well-known elements that require 
no description. To avoid the multiplying of 
instruments, the gong G may be made to serve 
as both relay and gong. 
Fig. 2 shows the gong G, having the main 
wires a gy connected to its coils. The wire be 
ing normally charged, the armature a is held 
attracted from the contact-spring c. When the 
main wire becomes broken or the current 
charging the main wire falls below normal, the 
armature a is retracted and alternately closes 
and breaks the local circuit. (Shown by dotted 
lines through the coils.) 
A separate and coarser wire may be wound 
90 
85 
95 
75 
IOO 
: S5,459 
upon the cores of the magnet of the gong G, to 
be included in a local circuit when it is de 
sired to use fine wire for the main-wire coils. 
Fig. 3 represents a magnet with wires a gy of 
the main wire connected to its coils, and the 
hammer h. held normally against the bellb and 
away from the contact c. When the main 
wire becomes broken or the charging-current 
falls below normal, the armature a retracts 
against contact c, which closes a local circuit 
over the wires shown inbroken lines at ac, y, and 
2, and causes a continuous ringing of the gong. 
Fig. 41'epresents animproved form of sprink 
ler or distributer. Sis a shell of metal adapted 
to be Screwed or otherwise attached to the base 
or nozzle A, which screws into the pipe. P. 
The spindle n is screw-threaded and passes 
through the nuto, which is soldered onto the 
shell-support S with an easily-fused solder. 
The spindle in can thus be screwed down to 
hold the plate in over the nozzle. The shell S 
is then slitted with slits at and openings that 
open in different directions to effectually dis 
tribute the Water when the nozzle becomes 
open by the unsoldering of the nut o and con 
sequent releasing of the rod in and plate n. 
To exclude dust from the shell S it is incased 
in an easily-removed paper tube or Wrapper, 
or the slits n stoppered with paraffine or wax, 
that will melt out to open the slits. 
I reserve the right to claim in another ap 
plication an invention shown in Fig. 4 and 
not now claimed. 
What I claim is 
1. A closed main circuit, a battery or batter 
ies for charging said circuit, devices in said cir 
cuit adapted to act by heat to open said cir 
cuit, and a series of stations, each provided 
with an alarm appalatus adapted to be made 
operative when said main circuit is open or 
the current charging said main circuit falls 
below normal, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with a normally-closed 
main circuit adapted to be ruptured by heat, 
having two or more stations provided with 
alarm apparatus adapted to be made operative 
when said main circuit is ruptured, of a valve 
mechanism for controlling a water-supply, and 
devices for making operative said valve mech 
anism when said main circuit is opened or the 
current charging said main circuit falls below 
normal, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with a charged 
3. A charged main circuit and devices adapt. 
ed to interrupt said circuit by the action of 
heat, a series of stations along said main cir 
cuit, each provided with a relay electro-mag 
net in the main circuit, a call-bell electro 
magnet in a local circuit, and connections be 
tween said relay and local circuit adapted to 
make operative said local circuit when the 
armature of said relay is retracted, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The combination, with the closed main 
line, including devices adapted to act by heat 
to open said line, of the relay R, battery MB, 
gong G, battery L.B., valve V, and devices con 
trolled by said local battery L. B for opening 
said valve, and a remote station provided with 
alarm apparatus, adapted to be made opera 
tive to sound an alarm when said main line is 
open or the current charging said line is be 
low normal, the whole arranged and operat 
ing substantially as described. 
main 
line, including the relay R, of the battery LB, 
valve V, and tube T, containing an explosive 
substance adapted to be exploded by the clos 
ing of the circuit of battery LB, and make op 
erative said valve mechanism, and an alarm 
mechanism at a remote station adapted to be 
made operative when mainline becomes broken 
or the charging-current falls below normal, 
substantially as described. . 
6. The combination, with a normally-closed 
main circuit composed of lengths of wire not 
easily fused held in electrical continuity by 
easily-fused alloy, of two or more stations, 
each provided with an electro-magnet in the 
main circuit, and an alarm apparatus at each 
adapted to be made operative through the in 
termediate action of said electro-magnet when 
said main circuit is opened or the current 
charging said main circuit falls below normal. 
7. The main line, the relays R R, the sol 
dered joints 1 2 3, the battery MB, the gongs 
G G, with batteries, and connections, as de 
scribed, for Sounding an alarm at the point 
where a fire originates and at one or more re 
mote points. 
CHARLES E. BUELL. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES BUEL, 
WALTER N. RUSSELL. 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
85 
95 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285559.txt	W. S. BISHOP 
POLISHING WHEEL. 
Patented Sept. 25, 1883. 
(No Model.) 
No. 285,559, 
 
2 % % 
a S S2 
2 
SN 2. a 
Na 
2 
M % % % % % % % S % 
WITNESSES: 
4 447 ve 
INVENTOR: 
s 
BY 
-- 
ATTORNEYS, 
r 
N.ETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER. S. BISHOP, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
POLISHING-WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,559, dated September 25, 1883. 
Application filed July 21, 1883. 
(No model.) 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER. S. BISHOP, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Polishing 
Wheels, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
Io in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improve 
ment, partly in section. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
elevation of the same, taken through the line 
15 at ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a face view of the same. 
Fig. 4 is a section of a part of the inner 
leather band, showing the score to receive the 
stitches. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
emery-wheels constructed in such a manner 
that they will not become changed in shape 
from dampness, and which will be strong and 
durable, and less liable to break than emery 
wheels constructed in the ordinary manner. 
My improved wheel is made with a rim, A, 
and a web, B, and is stamped or spun up from 
a single piece of sheet-iron- or other suitable 
metal. The Web B inclines inward from one 
edge of the rim. A nearly to the central plane 
of the wheel, and the part of the said web next 
the arbor-receiving aperture is at right an 
gles with the axis of the wheel, as shown in 
Fig. 3, so that the bearing of the wheel will 
be at or nearly at the center of gravity of the 
The wheel is designed to be secured to the 
arbor by nuts and washers in the ordinary 
The rim A is covered by a leather band, C, 
which is cemented to the said rim A, and is 
further secured in place by wires D, passed 
through holes in the rim A, near its edges, and 
through the said leather band. The ends of 
the leather band C are beveled and slightly 
overlapped, as indicated at the point E in 
Fig. 1. The outer surface of the leather band 
C has an inclined score or groove, F, formed 
in it to receive the wire stitches, as shown in 
Figs. 1, 3, and 4, so that the said stitches will 
be beneath the surface of the leather, and 
when the projecting lip of the score is pressed 
down will leave the said surface smooth. 
wheel. 
a0. 
35 
. 
u 
- 
Upon the leather band C is placed a second 
leather band, G, which is coated with emery 
in the ordinary manner. The band G is ce- 55 
mented to the band C, and its ends are bev 
eled, overlapped slightly, and sewed to each 
other. 
With this construction the shape of the wheel 
will not be changed by shrinking, swelling, 6C 
and warping, as is liable to occur with wooden 
wheels. With this construction, also, when 
the wheel is rapidly revolved, the tendency is 
to throw the free edge of the rim outward by 
centrifugal force. At the same time the press- 65 
ure of the article being polished will force the 
part of the rim with which it is in contact in 
Ward, so that the elastic rim of the wheel will 
accommodate itself to the article being pol 
shed, and thus give the article an even pol- 7c 
Sl. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. An emery-wheel having a metallic rim, 
A bent from one edge inwardly to form a 75 
bracing-web, B, and thus prevent a change of 
shape by shrinking or warping, as described. 
2. The combination, with the outer emery 
band, G, of an interior band, C, having the 
inclined scores F, and wires D, arranged in 8c 
Said Scores, as and for the purpose specified. 
3. In an emery - wheel, the combination, 
with the edge of the rim A, of a web, B, hav 
ing the part next the rim. A inclined inward 
from the edge of the rim nearly to the central 85 
plane of the wheel, and the part of the said 
Web next the center opening at right angles 
With the axis of the wheel, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
with the perforated rim A. and the scored 
leather band C, of the wire D, substantially 
as herein shown and described, whereby the 
said leather band will be held securely in 
place, and will have a smooth outer surface 9t 
to receive the outer or emery-coated band, as 
Set forth. 
4. in an emery - wheel, the combination, 9C 
WALTER S. BISHOP. 
Witnesses: 
- 
JoHN H. BUSHNELL, 
SAMUEL BISHOP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285659.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 285,659, 
F. OSTERHAGE. 
SASH LOCK, 
. 
Patented Sept. 25, 1883. 
(HDI 
%ISS 3. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK OSTERHAGE, OF VINCENNES, INDIANA. 
SASHOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,659, dated September 25, 1883. 
Application filed July 17, 1883. (No model.) 
w 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, FREDERICKOSTERHAGE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Vin. 
cennes, in the county of Knox and State of In 
5 diana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Sash-Locks; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
IO pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters or figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
I5 view. Fig. 2 is a side view, and Fig. 3 is a 
detail view. 
This invention has relation to sash-locks; 
and it consists in the construction and novel 
arrangement of an eccentric wheel, within a 
2O recess in the edge of the sash-frame, upon a 
shaft having a knob or weight on its project 
ing end, by which the eccentric wheel may be 
turned to bear against the window.jamb to 
the window-sash, either in an open or locked 
25 and closed position, as will be hereinafter fully 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claim appended. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, a designates the window-sash, and 
3O b the window.jamb, provided with a vertical 
recess, d, in one of its vertical edges. 
e designates an eccentric wheel provided 
with a perforation, f, eccentrically located, a 
notch or recess, g, in its periphery, and a pin 
35 hole, h, leading from the recess to the perfo 
ration f. 
i designates the shaft for the eccentric wheel 
e, which has its bearings in the walls of the 
recessd, one end of the shaft projecting through 
4O the inner wall of the recess to receive the knob 
k or balance-weight l, as the case may be, the 
balance-weight being used on the shaft in the 
upper sash, and after having been thrown up 
ward adjusts itself by gravity and locks this 
 
45 sash in any desired position. 
5O 
6o 
The knob k is preferably used on the shaft 
i in the lower Sash. 
The eccentric wheel is keyed on the shaft 
by a pin, m, driven into the pin-holeh, lead 
ing from the recess g to the perforation f. 
When the lower sash has been raised, turn 
the knob lic toward the left until the eccentric 
wheel engages the window jamb, when the 
sash will be held in its elevated position. 
When the window-sash has been lowered and 55 
closed, turn the knob to the right until the 
eccentric wheel engages the window-jamb, 
when the sash will be locked in position and 
cannot be raised until the knob has been turned 
to the left to release the eccentric wheel. 
By placing the lock within the recessed por 
tion of the jamb, it will be seen that the same 
will be protected from injury, and the liability 
of any one disconnecting the parts and remov 
ing the knob prevented, all the parts being 65 
s 
concealed from view. 
It is not intended that the balance-weight 
such as shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings should 
be claimed in the present application; but the 
right is herein reserved to make a future sepa- 7O 
rate application therefor. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
the vertical recess d in its edge, of the eccen 
tric wheel e, recessed at g and keyed to the 
shaft i, having bearings in the Walls of the re 
cess d, and provided on its inwardly-project 
E. end with the knob, substantially as speci- 8o 
The combination, with the jamb b, having 75 
O 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FREDERICK OSTERHAGE, 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. HAGEMIER, 
JNO. KRAMER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285760.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 285,760, 
- 
C. Loss OW. 
SAFETY BRAKE FOR ELEWATORS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 25, l883. 
Ef Zieglecticials a 
EE RR a 
Kg2SE --7 
w 
Es 
else is are 
E 
 
WITNESSES 
%. . 
-6e A %t 
6-24- -4-trans 
/6 4.yer v 16ze 
7. ATTORNEYs 
y 7% 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 285,760, 
C. LOSSOW. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
SAFETY BRAKE FOR ELEWATORS, 
. 
Patented Sept. 25, 1883. 
 
z7 2 7. 6. 
4 
WITNESSES 
36. 3-7 ra. 
INVENTOR 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CASIMIR LOSs O W, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
SAFETY - BRAKE FOR ELEVATORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,760, dated September 25, 1883, 
Application filed June 16, 1883. (No model.) 
the weight on the two flanges is equal and 55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CASIMIR LOSSOW, of the roller remains at rest, with studs cin the 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and position shown in Figs. 1, 2, and in dotted 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
lines in Fig. 6, with the slides C in the position 
useful Improvements in Safety-Brakes for Ele 
shown in Figs. 1 and 6, with the attached dogs 
vators; and I do hereby declare the following 
c drawn back, so that they cannot engage the 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
racks b. If one of the cables should break 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
for instance, the right-hand cable-the re 
in the art to which it pertains to make and 
maining or left-hand cable, by means of its 
use the Same. 
attachment to its respective flange, would in 
My invention relates to improvements in 
stantly turn the roller D and press the studs 
safety-brakes for elevators; and it consists in 
c into one leg of the grooves d, as shown in 
certain features of construction, and in com 
Fig. 3, which, by means of the slides C, forces 
bination of parts hereinafter described, an 
the dogs c into an engagement with the racks 
pointed out in the claims. 
- 
b. If the other cable had broken instead of 
In the drawings, Figure is a side elevation 
the right-hand one, the result would have 
of an elevator-platform and guides made in ac 
been the same, except the stud cwould have 
cordance with my invention. Figs. 2, 3, 4, 
been forced into the other leg of the grooved. 
and 5 are detail drawings illustrating different 
In case both cables should break at once, the 
parts of the mechanism. Fig. 6 is a plan view 
spring G would force the roller away from the 
of the bottom of the platform, and Fig. 7 is an 
platform, so that the studs c' would not ex 
end view of the same. 
tend into the said grooves. This would re 
A represents the platform of an elevator, 
lease the slides C, and the spring c' would press 
with the braces as and B, the guides, that are 
them outward until the dogs engage the racks 
four in number, but the device may easily be 
as aforesaid. . In case one of the cables should 
modified so as to use but two. These guides 
be too long, the taut cable would turn the roll 
are provided, in the usual manner, with racks 
er a little, when the pin e, engaging the bev 
b, for engaging the dogs of the safety-clutch. 
eled end of the link, would disengage it from 
Care slides, to which are attached the dogs 
its notch on the flange, as shown in Fig. 5. 
c. These slides are pressed outward by the 
The platform would then stop the same as if 
spring c", and are guided by the pins c. 
one cable had broken. 
To each of the slides C is attached a square 
What I claim is 
stud, c, projecting below and engaging 
1. The rollerD, withits grooves and notched 
grooves d, respectively, in the roller D, as 
flanges, substantially as shown and described. 
shown. This roller is journaled in the boxes 
2. The notched flanges, in combination with 
D', and has a flange, d, attached to each end. 
links E and the pins e', substantially as and go 
(Shown also in Figs. 4 and 5.) 
These flanges 
for the purpose set forth. 
are each provided with a notch to engage the 
links E, to which the cables e are attached 
substantially as shown and described., 
that actuate the elevator. These links have 
each a beveled end, that engages the pins eun 
and the spring c, substantially as described, 95 
der conditions hereinafter shown. These pins 
and for the purpose specified. 
extend from the boxes D', to which they are 
respectively attached. The boxes D'are held 
in position by the guides H, that are attached 
to the platform A. 
G is a spring attached to the said platform 
and pressing against the roller D in a direc 
tion away from the platform. The notches 
on the flanges d are on opposite sides of 
the roller, as shown. When the platform is 
properly supported by the cables and the re 
spective links attached to their respective 
flanges d', as shown in Figs. 1 and 4, 6 and 7, 
5. The spring G, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination of the studs c' and the . 
grooves d, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof Isign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 6th 
day of June, 1883. 
CASIMIR LOSSOW, 
3. The slides C and the attached studs c, 
4. The combination of the slides C, dogs c, 
- 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. H. DORER, 
ALBERTE, LYNCH, 
75 
85 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285860.txt	(No Model.) 
E. D. WASSELL, 
4. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
Z(ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
?zae?z. 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ, 
D?, 
????R?ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
?????LLLLLLLLLLLYLLLL 
/LLLLLLLLLLLLLL 
ZZZZZZZ 
S?OEZZZZ.j?? 
??IZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ) 
(ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
LLLLLLLLYLLLLLLLLL 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 285,860, 
E. D, WASSELL, 
4. Sheets 
Sheet 3, 
METALLURGIC FURNACE, 
Patented. Oct, 2, 1883. 
?L00LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL 
??????zz?zzzzzzzzzzzzzzZzZzZzZzzzZzZzZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZW? SSSSSS 
SS SSS 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR, 
???????? 
perERs, Photo-tithagraphor, Washington, d. c. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 285,860. 
E. D, WASSELL 
METALLURGIC FURNACE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Oct. 2, 1883. 
 
 
 
  
 
s 
SS ? ?????? A. 
 
WITNESSES 
 
, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. . . 
. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN. D. WASSELL, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
METALLURGC FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,860, dated October 2, 1883. 
Application filed October 20, 1882, (No model.) 
. 
O 
To cult, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWIN. D. WASSELI, of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny, State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a certain new 
5 and useful Improvement in Metallurgic Fur 
naces; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full and exact description thereof, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to the lettel's of reference marked thereon. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
metallurgic furnaces; and it consists of a gas 
generator combined with heating-flues, air 
heating chamber, and a means for purifying 
of the gases resulting from the combustion of 
I5 the fuel in Said gas-generator, the whole being 
SO arranged, combined, and operating that the 
gases of the furnace are caused to travel over 
the crown, down the forward side, under the 
bottom, up the side next to said air-heating 
chamber, and then enter the working-chamber 
in a highly-heated and purified state and 
mixed with heated atmospheric air. 
My invention also consists in the peculiar 
construction of the furnace, whereby a triple 
reverberatory action of the heat is obtained, 
and a concentration of it upon the molten 
metal at the point of its greatest depth, which 
is at the side opposite to the charging-door 
and distant from it, all of which will herein 
To enable Others Skilled in the art with Which 
my invention is most nearly connected to make 
and use it, I will proceed to describe its con 
struction and operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of my specification, Figure 1 represents 
a vertical longitudinal medium section of my 
invention; Fig. 2, a horizontal transverse sec 
tion on line atac, Fig.1. Fig. 3, a verticallongi 
4o tudinal section on line ac' ac' of Fig.2. Fig. 4 is 
 a longitudinal transverse vertical section om 
line 22, Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a longitudinal verti. 
cal section on line aca, Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is a 
transverse vertical section on line y), Fig. 3. 
Fig. 7 is a like view on lines y if, looking 
toward the stack; and Fig. 8, a like view on 
line off, looking in the opposite direction. 
Reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, A represents the masonry work of 
5o the furnace, and Bits metal bindings or stays. 
C represents the gas-generator, having a 
3o after more fully and at large appear. 
45 
55 
?? 
charging-hopper, D, grate E, and flueF, which 
communicate with the tubular flue G, which 
opens into the purifying-chamber H, in the 
crown of which is arranged a steam-pipe, 
which may be connected with any suitable 
steam-generator. 
J represents the air-heating chamber, in 
which is arranged an elliptic coil of pipe, K, 
which may be connected with a blast device, 
and may also communicate with a mechanism 
for the purpose of carbureting the air in its 
passage from the blast device to the said pipe 
K. The elliptic coil of pipe K communicates 
with a branch pipe, L, having two outlets, M, 65 
communicating with a chamber, N, in the 
bridge - wall O. The purifying-chamber H. 
communicates with two diving-flues, P, which 
communicate with two horizontal flues, U, ar 
ranged under the working-chamber R. Be 
tween the flues U, and communicating with 
the flueT, is an elongated chamber, Q, the side 
walls of which converge toward the flue T. 
The horizontal flues U, arranged on each side 
of the chamber Q, communicate with the ver 
tical flue V, arranged between the air-heating 
chamber J and the bridge-Wall O. 
By the foregoing arrangement of parts gas is 
generated, purified, heated, and mixed with 
the heated atmospheric air or heated and car 
bureted atmospheric air prior to entering the 
working-chamber R. The crown W of the 
working-chamber is inclined downward to 
ward the center of said chamber, as indicated 
by the arrows marked 3, and is also inclined 
downward from above the charging-doors X 
toward the tap-chamber Y, as indicated by 
the arrow marked 4, the bottom Z of the work. 
ing-chamber having a similar downward in 
clination toward said tap-channel. By this 
arrangement of the bottom Z the greatest 
depth of the molten metal will be next to the 
tap-channel and distant from the charging 
doors, and with the construction described of 
the crown W the heat and flame of the fur- 95 
nace will have a triple reverberatory action 
traveling longitudinally, as indicated by the 
arrows marked 5, indicating a recoil of the 
heat, and flame which is directed downward 
on the molten metalin Said chamber, and is also IOC 
reflected toward the charging-doors X. 
The skillful furnace-builder and metallurgist 
9O 
75 
s 
ses 5, S60 
25 
from the foregoing description will readily un 
derstand the construction of my improvement 
in furnaces. I will therefore proceed to describe 
the operation, which is as follows: 
The fuel is charged into the gas-generator C 
in the usual manner and with Ordinary means. 
The gas, as it is generated, passes up through 
flue or flues Finto the tubular flue G, and from 
it into the purifying-chamber H, where it is 
Io subjected to a steam-jet from the pipe I, which 
steam purifies the gas, and at the same time 
it is converted into vapor, which, combining 
with the gas or gases in chamber H, passes 
down flues Pinto the horizontal flues at, and 
from them passes up through vertical flues V 
and passes overthe bridge-wall O; butinits pas 
... sage over said bridge-wall the heated air, or 
heated air carbureted, which has entered the 
chamber N from the elliptic coil of pipe K, 
passes up through a series of small flues, a, and 
commingles with the highly-heated gasesjust as 
they are entering the working-chamber R, 
thereby insuring a thorough and complete 
consumption of said gases, and the generation 
of an intense heat, which is brought to bear. 
and act upon the charge in the Working-cham 
ber Rina, most thorough manner by the pecul 
liar form of the working-chamber and its crown, 
hereinbefore described. The heat and flame, 
after performing its office in the working 
chamber R, passes out through opening Winto 
and down through flue T, striking the bottom 
of said flue. The heat and flame is in part 
deflected and thrown back into chamber Q, 
thereby heating the side walls, b, of the hori 
Zontal walls U. That part of the heat and 
flame not deflected passes out through neck c. 
into stack S. 
Having thus described the nature, construc 
tion, and operation of my improvement, what 
I claim is 
1. In a metallurgic furnace, the combina 
tion of the gas-generator C, tubular flue: G, 
gas-purifying chamber H, flues IP U, cham 
ber Q, flue V, and working-chamber R, sub 
stantially as herein described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. In a metallurgic furnace, the combina 
tion of the gas-generator C, tubular flue-G, 
gas-purifying chamber H, flues PU, chamber 
Q, flue V, air-heating chamber J, and work 
ing-chamber R, substantially as herein de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a metallurgic furnace, the combina 
tion of the gas-generator C, tubular fue G, 
gas-purifying chamber H, flues PU, chamber 
Q, flue V, air-heating chamber J, chamberN, 
having flues a, and working-chamber R, sub 
stantially as herein described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
4. In ai metallurgic furmace, the combina 
tion of the gas-generator C, tubular flue G, 
as-purifying chamber H, steamjet I, flues 
PU, chamber Q, flue V, air-heating chambers 
65 J, pipe K, flue N, and working-chamber R, 
substantially as herein described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
?? 
, 
45 
35 
55 
- 
M 
85 
95 
75 
5. In a metallurgic furmace, the combina 
tion of the gas-generator C, tubular fue G, 
gas-purifying chamber H, steam-jet I, flues 7o 
PU, chamber Q, flue V, air-heating chamber 
J, pipe K, flue N, working-chamber R, and 
flue T, communicating with the neck c and 
chamber Q, substantially as herein described, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a metallurgic furnace, the combina 
tion of the gas-generator C, tubular flue G, 
gas-purifying chamber H, flues PU, chamber 
Q, flue V, and working- chamber R, with the 
bridge-wall O, and bottom of the working- 8o 
chamber inclining downward and toward the 
tap-channel placed on the opposite side of the 
furnace from the charging-door, substantially 
as herein described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
7. In a metallurgic furnace, the combina 
tion of the gas-generator C, tubular flue G, 
gas-purifying chamber H, flues PU, chamber 
Q, flue V, air-heating chamber J, and work 
ing-chamber R, with the bridge wall O, and go 
bottom of the working - chamber inclining 
downward and toward the tap-channel placed 
on the opposite side of the furnace from the 
charging - door, substantially as herein de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
8. In a metallurgic furnace, the combina 
tion of the gas-generator C, tubular flue G, 
gas-purifying chamber H, flues P.U., chamber 
Q, flueW, air-heating chamber J, chamber N, 
having flues a, and working-chamber.R, with IOO 
the bridge-wall O, and bottom of the work 
ing-chamber inclining downward and toward 
the tap-channel placed on the opposite side 
of the furnace from the charging-door, sub 
stantially as herein described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
9. In a metallurgic furnace, the combina 
tion of the: gas-generator C, tubular flue G, 
gas-purifying chamber H, steam-jet I, flues 
PU, chamber Q, flue V, air-heating chamber 
J, pipe K, flueN, and working-chamber R, with 
the bridge-wall. O, and bottom of the work 
ing-chamber inclining downward and toward 
the tap-channel placed on the opposite side 
of the furnace from the charging-door, sub- 1 15 
stantially as herein described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
10. In a metallurgic furnace, the combina 
tion of the gas-generator C, tubular flue G, 
: gas-purifying chamber H, steamjet I, flues I 2p 
P-U, chamber Q, flue V, air-heating chamber 
J, pipek, flueN, and working-chamber.R, with 
the bridge-wall O, and bottom of the work 
ing-chamber inclining downward and toward 
the tap-channel placed on the opposite side 
of the furnace from the charging-door, sub I 25 
stantially as herein described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
E. D. WASSELL. 
IO5 
IIO 
* 
Witnesses: 
A. C. JoHNSTON, 
A. S. H. JOHNSTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US285960.txt	(No Model) 
J. M. BOYD, 
WIND WHEEL. 
No. 285,960, 
 
Patented Oct, 2, 1883. 
Bay 
Anave 7zfor 
fora 
 
JOHN M. BOYD, OF OAKFIELD, WISCONSIN. 
WND WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 285,960, dated October 2, 1883. 
Application filed November 12, 1 SS0. (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom, it Tay concern : 
Beit known that I, JoHN M. Boy D, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Oakfield, 
in the county of Fond du Lac and State of Wis 
consin, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Wind-Wheels; and I do here 
by 
declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention has for its object to furnish a 
wind-wheel which will possess superior advan 
tages over ordinary wheels; and it consists in 
the peculiar construction and arrangement of 
the several parts hereinafter fully explained, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of my wind-wheel partly in section. Figs. 2 
and 3 are sectional views of the sliding collar. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the sliding collar 
and its attached rim or frame. Figs. 5 and 6 
are detached segments of the wheel, showing 
their construction more in detail than is shown 
in the wheel in Fig. 1. 
A is a tubular shaft supported in bearings 
(ta, fastened to the upright frame B. To this 
shaft are secured a lateral arm or support, C, 
and an upright arm, b, the arm C having 
shaft-bearings c (c. 
D is the wheel-shaft hung in the bearings c, 
with one end connected, by a crankpin or arm, 
d, and other suitable means, to a lever, e. The 
levere is pivoted at one end to a suitable sup 
port upon the arm C, while its other end is 
connected to the upper end of a rod, E, which 
is connected to a tubular extension, E, ex 
tending down into and through the shaft A, 
and swiveled to the piston-rod. 
driven under the shield F and frozen on the 
shaft D. The moment the wheel would be set 
in motion the revolution of the shaft and the 
to-and-fro movement of the sleeve would tend 
to remove instantly the accumulated ice. The 
extension or shield F does not fit snugly against 
the shaft D, but is formed with an enlarged 
opening and stands out from it, so as to pro 
vide an air-space between it and the shaft, as 
shown. The object of this is to prevent ice 
from forming on the shaft immediately against 
the end of the metal sleeve. If the shield Were 
simply an extension of the sleeve F and fitted 
close against the shaft, its end would present the 
same abutting face as the end of the said sleeve. 
If ice form under the shield, it will be in a 
verythin layer as it extends toward the end 
of the sleeve, and will be easily broken by the 
movement of the latter. The extension or 
shield is also slotted longitudinally on its un 
der side, so that any water or snow that may 
be blown under it will readily drop out. 
To the sleeve F is pivoted, at its forked end, 
a lever, G, with its other end connected to one 
arm of a weight-lever, H., hung or pivoted 
upon the arm b. A wire or l'ope, f, is con 
nected to a second arm of the lever Halld 
passed down through the tubular extension of 
rod E, and is provided with a swivel, and con 
nected to a handle within convenient reach of 
the operator or attendant. This arrangement, 
by pulling upon the wire or rope?, permits of 
the elevating of the lever Hand drawing up 
on and sliding rearwardly the sleeve F, which, 
as will be more readily understood herein 
after, adjusts the sails or sections of the wheel 
out of the Wind. 
A vice-versa movement of 
the sleeve has a contrary effect. The sleeve F 
is provided with a circular rim, I, connected 
thereto by radial arms or spokes, two of which 
point outward and downward from the sleeve 
F, one on each side of the support C. This 
arrangement allows the rim I to pass outside 
and underneath the support C. 
The rim I has a peripheral flange or rib, i, 
upon which is fitted, so as to move with the 
wheel, an internally-grooved annulus or ring, 
I", with eyes i'. J J are elbows or bell-crank 
levers pivoted at their angles to the spokes or 
rain which freezes as it falls, or a driving radial arms of the wheel K, with its hub K. 
Snow-storm, prevails, water or snow may be fast upon the shaft D. These levers are con 
e' is a guide for the lever e. 
F is a sleeve adapted to slide on the shaft 
D, with an extension, F, overhanging to pre 
vent the accumulation on the shaft of snow 
and ice, which would interfere with the opera 
tion of the sleeve. 
When the wheel is at rest and a driving 
8. 
95 
IO 
IO 
25 
45 
2 
S5,9 SO 
It will be seen that one roller placed upon 5o 
55 
75 
nected by rods j, entering the eyes i' on the 
rings I, and by means of a small casting, n, to 
rods j', passing through eyeboltsk of bars lc, 
which connect the two cross-bars lc of each 
Sailor section, thus connecting two sails or 
Sections with each of the levers J. Each sail 
or section is pivoted between two of the arms 
or spokes of the wheel Kby means of a bracket, 
l, having a journal formed upon it. There are 
only two of these brackets fastened one on 
each end of the longer cross-bark of each sail 
or section. The journal of the bracket is on 
the under side of the cross-bar and works in a 
bearing formed in an ear, t, attached to the 
end of the arm or spoke K of the wheel, thus 
allowing each sail or section to be thrown out 
of the wind by the centrifugal force as the 
speed of the wheel increases, and also forming 
a tie between the arms or spokes of the wheel. 
This completes the description of the sail-op 
erating mechanism. 
The dotted lines in Fig. 1 indicate the po 
sition given the sails when it is desired to ad 
just them out of the wind, the full lines indi 
cating the reverse. 
L is a vane hung upon the shaft D, and 
Weighted at its lower edge, as at L', to prevent 
its revolving with the shaft. The vane is 
used for the purpose of making the mill shift 
easily and to prevent the wind-wheel from 
getting edgewise to the wind when running in 
a light breeze. The small casting or connect 
ing-piece n is formed with a mortise or cross 
slot, n, on One of its ends and on its opposite 
end with the slot or mortise in at right angles 
By means of this casting, thus 
to the slot m'. 
constructed, I am enabled to give a perfectl 
free play to the levers J and rods j' as the 
sails are thrown in or out of the wind. There 
is no binding between the said levers and rods, 
and consequently no lost power. 
a' is a rod passing from the arm b around 
under the support C and back on the opposite 
side. It helps support the mill. 
O is a roller, of which there are two at 
tached on opposite sides of the tubular shaft 
A, underneath the collar a, to prevent the 
mill from being lifted out of its bearings in a 
gale. 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
45 
- 
the tubular shaft A, underneath the collar a 
and directly under the support c, would an 
Swer the same purpose. 
It will be readily understood that this mill 
is simple in construction and not liable to get 
out of order, shifts easily, governs automati 
cally, and cannot be easily clogged with snow 
O Ce. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
I. In a wind-wheel, the combination, with 
the shaft D and arm or support C, of the sleeve 
or collar F, sliding upon the shaft and provided 
with radial supports, and the rim I, fixed on 
the radial supports, and passing outside and 
underneath the support C. as shown, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In combination with a sliding collar or 
sleeve, F, carrying a rim, I, provided with a 
peripheral flange or rib,i, an internally-grooved 
annulus or ring, I, provided with ears, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the rod f' and 
bell-crank lever J, pivoted to the arms K, 
which support the fan-sections k, of the cast 
ing in, having slots in informed in its opposite 
ends, at right angles to each other, and pivoted 
to the ends of the said lever and rod, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. In combination with the shaftD, the vane 
L, hung upon said shaft in rear of wind-wheel, 
and weighted at its lower edge to prevent re 
volving with said shaft. 
5. The combination, with the shaft D and 
sleeve F, of a shield or extension, F, sur 
rounding or partially surrounding the shaft 
and standing out so as to provide an open 
space or chamber between it and the shaft, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN M. BOY). 
Witnesses: 
WM. T. BOYD, 
F. R. SHEPARD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286060.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 286,060, 
 
K. K. PARKER 
STRAW STACKER 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
Patented Oct. 2, 1883. 
WITNESSES : 
5%'3%ate Azov 
22, Eg 
INVENTOR: 
c/, ofC cA 
BY W. . . 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
f 
(No Model.) 
No. 286,060, 
 
K. K. PARKER 
STRAW STACKER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 2, 1883. 
  
 
E. ea 71 
WITNESSES : 
22:26 
22. 
INVENTOR: 
cog? to % 
-, 
* //, 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
KNIGHT K. PARKER, OF CIRCLEVILLE, OHIO. 
STRAW-ST ACKER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,080, dated October 2, 1883. 
Application filed March 15, 1883. (No model.) 
15 
3O 
To ?till willon, it in?t!/ concern : 
Beit known that I, KNIGHT K. PARKER, of 
Circleville, in the county of Pickaway and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Straw-Stackers, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
forming part of this specification. 
This invention relates to straw-stackers for 
IO thrashing-machines; and the invention con 
Sists of the novel construction hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation of 
a straw-stacker and part of a thrashing-ma 
chine, showing my invention. Fig. 1) is an 
elevation of the same, partly broken away. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical section of Fig. 3 on line at 
0. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view of the supporting 
and driving mechanism of the stacker, partly 
broken away. Fig. 4 is a detail view, partly 
in section. Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are detail views, 
partly broken away; and Fig. S is a part of the 
stacker, broken away in Fig. 1. 
A indicates part of a thrashing-machine, to 
25 the rear of which is pivoted an approximately 
U-shaped frame, B. This frame, at its nar 
rowest part, which is farthest removed from 
the thrasher, is connected to an upright frame, 
C, which rests on the ground and serves as a 
Support for the straw-elevator D. The upper 
part of the frame C consists of the elongated 
bealing E, which is mounted on the pintle F 
and supported on the disk G, to which the 
pintle is secured. 
To opposite sides of the bearing E are se 
cured lateral arms H, extending to the for 
Ward end of the elevator D, and adapted to 
support the shaft I, which carries the travel 
ing aproln J. The forward end of the eleva 
tor is thus supported by means of the shaft I, 
and by virtue of its rigid connection with the 
bearing Ethrough the arms Hit may be swung 
around bodily upon the pintle F, to vary the 
position or direction of the traveling apron 
as may be required. 
Underneath the disk G in the frame C is 
journaled a vertical shaft, K, carrying two 
ioeveled gears, LM, one arranged a short dis 
tance above the other. With the gear Len 
5O gages a beveled pinion, N, mounted on the 
shaft O, which shaft is supported by arms P, 
35 
45 
connected to one of the lateral arms H, and is 
provided with a pinion engaging with the gear 
Q on the shaft I. Motion is thus communi 
cated to the traveling apron from the gear L. 
With the gear Mengages a pinion, R, mount 
ed on a horizontal shaft, S, which is supported 
by arms T, connected to one side of the frame 
B, and is provided with a band-pulley, U, by 
which motion is to be communicated from a 
pulley on the thrasher to the shaft K. The 
standards b b of the frame Care intended to be 
arranged in a plane at right angles to the shaft 
O, in order that the pinion N on said shaft 
may have sufficient movement to the right or 
left as the elevator is turned on the pintle F. 
The frame B is provided with a caster, W, 
which is connected thereto by means of a pivot 
in such manner that it may be thrown from an 
upright position to allow the frame Cto descend 
and rest on the ground when the machine is 
set for operation. A suitable catch of any 
well-known construction is to be provided for 
holding the caster in an upright position when 
the machine is to be moved from one place to 
another. 
The elevator ID is adapted to be folded upon 
itself by means of a hinge-joint, A', to econo 
mize space and Secure convenience in trans 
portation. The elevator is provided with an 
extension, B, arranged on the under side 
thereof, and supported in position by means 
of brackets C, which are adapted to engage 
with and slide along flanges or guides ID' on 
the folding end of the elevator. To support 
the upper and outer end of the extension in 
close contact with the under side of the eleva 
tor, the former is provided with two pins, E, 
at each side of its lower end, which engage 
with bearings F in the sides of a supporting 
frame, G', which is adapted to slide along the 
under side of the lower section of the elevator. 
The bearings are so arranged with respect to 
each other that one will serve as a fulcrum for 
supporting the weight of the outer end of the 
extension, and also that the extension may 
readily disengage from the supporting-frame 
G", and turn over with the outer section of the 
elevator when the latter is folded. 
The extension B is to be provided with a 
traveling apron carried by pulleys I", support 
ed in the ends of the extension, and motion is 
75 
95 
IOO 
2 
2s6,060 
O 
to be communicated to the pulleys I" by a belt, 
J', which is made sufficiently long to pass 
around- a pulley, K, on the shaft at the upper 
end of the elevator. Tohold the belt taut, two 
pulleys, L, supported in arms M, projecting 
downward from the outer end of the elevator, 
are provided. The pulley K is to be loosely 
mounted upon its shaft, so that it will not oper 
ate the belt J' when the extension is notin use; 
but by means of an arm, N', on the shaft, which 
carries a set-screw, adapted to be screwed into 
said pulley, the latter may be made to rotate 
when desired. For adjusting the extension 
outward or inward, a rope, O', is connected to 
cross-bars at or near the ends of the extension 
after being passed around a pulley, P, which 
is supported by the elevator. By turning a 
crank on the shaft of the said pulley the coil 
of rope around the pulley will cause the ex 
tension to move longitudinally along the ele 
VaftOr. 
To the top of the thrasher is pivoted a crane, 
Q, which carries a pulley, R, at its upper end, 
and is supported by two stay-rods, S', which 
are linked together at T', to allow the craneto 
be folded down on the top of the thrasher 
when not in use. A rope passing over the 
pulley R and connected to the lower section 
of the elevator will serve to regulate the ele 
vation of the elevator according to the height 
of the straw-rick. As shown in the drawings, 
I have provided for the support of the pulley 
R at a point directly over the pivotal pintle 
upon which the elevator is supported. The 
object of this is to enable the elevator to be 
swung around with its upper end moving in 
a horizontal plane, instead of describing a 
- 
25 
35 
curve in an oblique plane. An advantage of 
such a movement is that the rick or stack of 
straw may thereby more readily be made of 
uniform height throughout its length. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with the straw-elevator 
and its shafts, of the upright supporting-frame 
C, upon which the elevator is adapted to be 45 
rotated, a vertical shaft in said frame, the gear-. 
wheel L, supported on said vertical shaft, the 
shaft O, having pinions gearing with wheel L. 
and with the pinion Q on the apron-driving 
shaft of the elevator, and means for driving 
wheel L, substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with a straw-elevator, 
of an extension thereof, having an independent 
traveling apron, and adapted to slide along 
the under side of the elevator, a loose pulley 
mounted on the upper shaft of the elevator, 
and means for rigidly, engaging the pulley 
therewith, a belt passing around said pulley 
and the pulleys on the apron-carrying shafts 
of the extension, and the two supplemental 
pulleys for holding the belt taut, substantially 
as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with an elevatorformed 
in two sections, adapted to fold one upon the 
other, of an extension thereof, and a sliding 
supporting - frame for the extension, which 
forms a joint therewith, adapted to allow the 
extension to be folded over with the upper 
section of the elevator, substantially as shown 
and described. 
KNIGHT IK. PARKER. 
65 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE LUDWIG, 
J. L. LUDWIG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286160.txt	(No Model.) . 
A. H. P. S. WORTLEY. 
GAS STOWE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 286, 160, 
Patented Oct, 2, 1883. 
 
No. 286, 60. 
Patented 00t, 2, 1883. 
GAS STOWE, 
Sheet 2. 
 
TERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. O. C. 
' 
(No Model.) 
A, H, P. S. WORTLEY. 
GAS STOWE, 
3 Sheets 
Sheet, 3. 
No. 286, 160. 
 
Patented Oct, 2, 1883. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A. H. P. STUART WORTLEY, OF LONDON, COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND. 
GAS STOVE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,160, dated October 2, 1883. 
Application filed January 23, 1883, (No model.) Patented in England August 18, 1882, No. 3,952. 
6o 
In order that the gaseous products of com- 70 
gas mixed with air is fed through a pipe, I, 
that passes horizontally inward through one 
side of the casing A, which combustible, being 
consumed at said burner, produces heat, that 
causes the air contained within Said box to 55 
have a corresponding degree of temperature, 
and by rarefaction to ascend into and through 
the chamber B, its place being supplied by 
means of fresh air, which enters through the 
flue G. 
The gaseous products of combustion from 
the burner H. pass upward into the flue C 
around the chamber B, and assist to still further 
warm the air within the same, after which 
they escape from said flue into a chimney or 65 
into the air outside of the room in which the 
apparatus is placed by means of a flue, K, 
that passes horizontally outward from or near 
the upper end of said flue C. 
bustion may be caused to circulate alround the 
chamber B, instead of passing directly to and 
through the flue K, a deflector, c, (shown by 
dotted lines in Fig. 5,) is placed within the 
rear portion of the flue C and compels said 75 
gaseous products to pass to the upper end of 
the latter before entering said flue I. The 
upper end of the chamber B is inclosed by 
means of a cover, L, within which is an open 
ing, l, that corresponds in size and shape to 8O 
the opening b between said chamber and the 
box E, and is closed, when desired, by means 
of a plate, M. Said plate is adapted for use, 
also in closing said opening b, so as to prevent 
the passage of air from said box E to said 85 
chamber B. 
Dampers f and k, placed within the flues F 
and K, respectively, a glazed door, N, placed 
within one side near the lower end of the cas 
ing A, feet O at the corners of said casing, and 9o 
a number of openings, a, within the bottom of 
the same completes the device, the operation 
of which is as follows, viz: The stove is ar 
ranged with the cold-air duct F in communi 
cation with the outer air, the flue K in com - 95 
munication with a chimney or with the air 
without the room, and the pipe I in communi 
cation with a gas-supply, after which the gas 
is turned on and ignited at the burner H. Air 
Io tion, in which 
2O parts in each of the figures. 
To all, whom it naily concern: 
Beit known that I, A. H. P. STUART WoRT 
LEY, of Rosslyn House, London, in the county 
of Middlesex, England, have invented cer 
5 tain new and useful Improvements in Gas 
Stoves; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, making a part of this specifica 
Figure is a perspective view from the front 
of my improved stove. Fig. 2 is a like view 
of the same from the rear. Fig. 3 is a per 
Spective view of the burner preferably em 
I5 ployed. Fig. 4 is a vertical central section of 
Said stove upon a line passing from front to 
rear, and Fig. 5 is a like view of the same 
upon a line parallel with the front. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
The design of my invention is to furnish in 
a cheap and convenient form means whereby 
Combustible gases may be economically and 
Safely used for heating and cooking purposes; 
25 and to this end it consists in the construction 
and combination of the various parts of the 
stove, substantially as and for the purpose 
hereinafter shown. 
In the annexed drawings, A represents a 
3O rectangular casing constructed of or from sheet 
metal, and having its lower end closed. 
Within the upper portion of the casing Ais 
a chamber, B, which is formed by the inser 
tion. Within the upper open end of said casing 
35 of a sheet-metal box that corresponds there 
with in shape, but is somewhat smaller hori 
Zontally, so as to leave between the side walls 
of said parts a space or flue, C. The upper 
ends of said casing and chamber are united by 
4o means of a closely-fitting top plate, D, which 
extends between and is secured to the same. 
The lower end of the chamber B is at or near 
the vertical center of the casing A, and at said 
point, by means of an opening, b, communi 
45 cates with a box, E, which is secured upon 
said lower end, and at one side is connected 
with a flue, F, that passes horizontally out 
Ward through said casing A. 
Within the space G, immediately below the 
5o box E, is an annular gas-burner, H, to which from the flue F enters the box E, and, being ICO 
2 
- 
2s6,160 
heated, passes upward into and through the 
chamber B, and, escaping into the room, fur 
nishes the necessary heat, and at the same time 
replaces air which has become impure from 
use. The impure and cold air from the lower 
part of the room is drawn through the open 
ings a into the combustion-chamber G, and, 
mingling with the gaseous products of com 
bustion, passes upward and outward through 
the flue K, a complete circulation of air being 
thus effected, and thorough ventilationsecured. 
By means of the dampers f and k the move 
ments of the currents of air may be readily 
- Controlled, and the best obtainable result Se 
cured for the expenditure of a given amount 
of fuel. 
The chamber B may be used for the warm 
ing and cooking of food, if desired, in which 
event it may be necessary to close the open 
ing b for the admission of fresh air. The 
joints of the stove are preferably riveted; but 
they may be made tight by any other means, 
if desired. 
Having thus fully set forth the nature and 
merits of my invention, what I claim as new 
TS 
IO 
25 
The hereinbefore - described gas - stove, in 
which is combined the following elements, 
viz: the casing A, having openings a for the 
supply of air for combustion, the heating 
chamber B, located within the upper portion 
of said casing, and provided at its lower end 
With the air-inlet opening b, the supplemental 
heating chamber or boxE, placed beneath and 
in communication with said heating-chamber 
B, and having the air-flue F, the combustion 
chamber G, located within the lower portion 
of said casing, and provided with the burner 
H, and the flues C and K, through which the 
gaseous products of combustion escape from 
the stove, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 16th day of 
May, 1882. 
A. H. P. STUART WORTLEY. 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
35 
Witnesses: 
CHARIES JoHN FRY, 
THOMAS GEORGE COLLETT, 
Clerks to Messrs. Milne Riddle & Mellor, Solici. 
to's, Temple, London. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286261.txt	(No Model.) 
G. A. BUSH, 
FOUNTAIN, 
No. 286,261, 
Patented Oct. 9, 1883. 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GRANT A. BUSH, OF CLEAR LAKE, IOWA. 
FO UNTAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,261, dated October 9, 1883. 
Application filed April 19, 1883. (No model.) 
45 
To all tuhon, it invay concern, 
Be it known that I, GRANT A. BUSH, of 
Clear Lake, in the county of Cerro Gordo and 
State of Iowa, have invented a new and use 
5 ful Improvement in Fountains, of which the 
following is a clear, full, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, making a part of this specifica 
tion, in which 
Figure 1 represents the side elevation of a 
fountain with my improvements attached. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section of the same, and Fig. 3 
is an enlarged vertical section of the air-cham 
ber. 
My invention relates to ornamental fount 
ains to be used either in a house or Out of 
doors; and it consists in the combination of 
devices hereinafter explained and claimed. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will proceed to de 
scribe the exact manner in which I have car 
ried it Out. 
In the drawings, A represents the basin of 
the fountain, in and above the center of which 
is secured an air-chamber, B, of any desired 
ornamentalform or figure. From the top of this Patent, is 
figure rises the tube C, through which the water 
issues to form the spray. This tube descends 
through the air-chamber to a point near its 
bottom. From the bottom of the basin. A 
passes a tube, D, down to a point below the 
pump E and connected therewith, so as to 
supply the pump with Water from the basin. 
From the pump a tube, F, passes up to the 
air-chamber B, through which the water is 
drawn from the pipe E, and is forced into the 
air - chamber, whence it escapes in a Spray 
through the tube C. The pressure of the air 
in the chamber B causes a regular flow of the 
water through the pipe E, and avoids the 
pulsation which would otherwise be caused by 
the action of the pump. 
The pump is operated by the well-known 
means of a weight and clock-gearing. If the 
fountain be designed for outdoor use, a hole 
eight or ten feet deep should be made to re 
ceive the weight, and the fountain will play 
for about one hour for every foot of drop the 
weight has. 
The basin A is placed at any desired height, 
and the mechanism below, is inclosed in the 
cabinet G, made of any desired pattern. 
I am aware that a fountain having a hollow 
pedestal containing clock lmechanism for op 
erating a pump-piston Working in a cylinder 
having a bulb connected thereto, and also an 
air-chamber to steady the fow of Water, are 
old, and such I do not wish to be understood 
as claiming, broadly, as of my invention. 
Having thus explained myinvention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
In an ornamental fountain, the basin A, 
air-chamber B, placed above the basin, and 
tube C, in combination with the tubes D and 
F, cabinet G, and the pump E, with suitable 
mechanism for operating the same, Substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
GRANT A. BUSH. 
Witnesses: 
D. W. HURN, 
F. J. BUSH, 
Io 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286361.txt	(No Model.) 
E. H. WISTANCE, 
FERTILIZER DISTRIBUTER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 286,361. 
Patented Oct. 9, 1883. 
WTIESSES 
37. 
ca. 62-2-e--(, 
12A.Z. 
live TOP 
zai.(.7%ia. 
-44.hulz 
Aiforney 
% 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 286,361, 
E. H. WISTANCE, 
FERTILIZER DISTRIBUTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Cot, 9, 1883. 
" 
. 
 
 
 
all fig 22. 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
winesses 
INVENTOR 
Affarney 
M. Peters, Photolithographer, washington, c.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD. H. WISTANCE, OF SPRINGFIELD, OHIO. 
FERTLIZER DISTRIBUTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Fatent No. 286,361, dated October 9, 1883. 
Application filed July 2, 1883. (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whon, it analy concern, 
of Springfield, county of Clarke, and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Improve 
inent in Fertilizer-Distributers, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, making a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
that class of fertilizer-distributters in which a 
revolving hopper is employed and the ferti 
lizing material is fed through the bottom of 
said hopper into the tube or hollow tooth, which 
conveys it to the ground; and it consists in the 
combination, with a suitable frame, of a revolv 
ing hopper having within it, near its bottom, 
several adjustable plates or scrapers for acting 
upon the material contained in the hopper, and 
a stationary bottom to said hopper, provided 
with an opening and an adjustable gate for 
regulating the passage of the grain to the con 
ducting-tube. 
It also consists in a novel manner of adjust 
ing the regulating-gate, and in certain other 
details of construction and arrangement here 
inafter fully described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of nyimproved distributer, show 
ing the arrangement of the scrapers, gate, gate 
adjusting lever, driving-shaft, and also the 
manner of supporting the base-plate of the 
frame. Fig. 2 is a sectional view, showing the 
arrangement of gearing for driving the re 
volving hopper, and the lever and link for ad 
justing the gate of the discharge-outlet; and 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the revolving 
hopper, a portion of the casing removed to 
show the arrangement of the scrapers, their 
retaining-springs, and the interior frame, to 
which they are secured. 
A represents the main frame of the hopper, 
and, as it may be of any suitable or desired 
form, need not be herein described any further 
than is necessary to explain its connection with 
other parts of the machine. 
To the lower edges of two of the sides of 
frame A is attached the base-plate A of the 
frame, of the form shown in Figs. 1 and 2-that 
is, it is provided with four legs or arms, A, 
which extend out beneath the lower edges of 
the two sides of the hopper above amentioned, 
and are secured thereto. Its central portion 
is cylindrical in form, and is curved or pro 
Be it known that I, EDWD. H. WISTANCE, jected up within or between the side walls of 
hopper A, the upper extremity of this curved 
projection having formed upon its inner pe 
riphery two or more lugs, a, as shown in Fig. 
2, and for a purpose hereinafter explained. 
The base-plate A' has further formed upon its 
lower face a bracket, a, Fig. 2, containing a 
bearing, or, if preferred, forming in itself a 
bearing for the driving-shaft of the machine. 
B represents a revolving ring, having a cen 
tral perforation of considerable size, said ring, 
when in motion, revolving around the cylin 
drical projection A', resting on the latter for a 
bearing, as shown at B, Fig. 2, being steadied 
in its movement or revolution by means of an 
annular flange or shoulder, B, which rests in 
contact, or nearly so, with the exterior face of 
the curved projection A. 
Resting upon the rotating circle B is the 
stationary bottom D of the hopper, which is 
held in place by means of bolts or screws at 
tached thereto, and passing through and se 
cured in the lugs (, above referred to. Thus 
it will be seen that the ledge or projection B 
of ring B is interposed and revolves between 
the cylindrical formation of the base-plate and 
the stationary hopper-bottom when motion is 
imparted to it. Upon the under periphery 
of ring B are formed beveled teeth b, adapted 
to mesh with the teeth of bevel-gear wheel C, 
arranged at right angles thereto upon the main 
driving-shaft C of the machine. The bevel 
gear wheel is keyed to the driving-shaft C 
and revolves with it, imparting motion to the 
iting B through its mesh with the bevel-gear 
formation upon the under side of said ring. 
An annular vertical flange, D', is formed around 
the outer periphery of the stationary hopper 
bottom D, for containing within its walls the 
cylindrical hopperle, as shown in the drawings. 
The cylindrical hopper E is not attached in 
any way to the hopper-bottom, but revolves 
above the same, the only office of the annular 
flange D' being to confine the hopper within 
its walls and steady its movements. The cy 
lindrical hopper is connected with the revolv 
ing ring B by means of angle-irons c, secured 
to the hopper by rivets, or in any suitable 
manner, and united to lugsbon the ring Bin. 
a similar manner. Thus when the ring B is 
caused to rotate by means of gearing above re 
9O 
95 
OC 
O 
..I.5 
25 
30 
35 
45. 
 
- 
75 
ferred to, said ring, through the aid of the cured thereon by means of a set-screw, l, 
whereby when the shaft is rocked in its bear 
angle-irons c, will rotate the hopper and its 
ings, which are in the frame of the hopper, 
contained mechanism, which will now be ex 
the crank will be moved with it and will open 
plained. Within the said hopper, and ex 
or close the gate I through the connecting 
tending vertically through its center is a shaft 
link i', according to the direction in which 
or rod, F, of any suitable diameter, and which 
has radiating from its upper extremity a se 
the shaft Lis rocked. The shaft L is rocked, 
for the purpose of increasing or decreasing 
ries of arms, ff. (Shown most clearly in Fig. 
the size of the opening H, by means of a hand 
3.) These arms extend out to and at their 
lever, L, keyed or otherwise securely fast- 65 
outer extremities are fastened or secured to 
ened upon the shaft L, said hand-lever being 
the inner walls of the rotating cylindrical hop 
provided with a longitudinal tooth, l, which is 
per, whereby they form part of the hopper, 
adapted to engage with or between a series of 
and when the latter is rotated they, together 
teeth formed within a slotted guide, M, se 
with the central shaft, F, are carried with it. 
cured to the frame of the machine, thus adapt- 7O , 
15 The shaft or rod F has upon its lower end a 
ing the gate, when properly adjusted, to be 
shank or its equivalent, fitting into a forma 
tion, D., upon the stationary hopper-bottom, 
held at such adjustment while the machine is 
in operation. 
which serves as a bearing for the said shaft F. 
Having now described my invention, what 
when it is rotated. 
G G represent the scrapers contained with 
I claim as new is 
in the laopper. They may be of any desired 
1. In a fertilizer-distributer, the combina 
tion, with a revolving hopper, of a stationary 
form or construction, that shown in the draw 
bottom thereto, provided with an opening and 
ings being preferred, as being cheap and du 
means for increasing or diminishing the size 
rable. These scrapers are hinged at their up 
of Said opening. 
per ends or edges between the central shaft, 
2. The combination, with a revolving hop 
F, and the inner wall of the hopper by pins 9, 
per, of a stationary bottom having an open 
or in any preferred manner, their lower scrap 
ing for the escape of the fertilizer, and a piv 
ing-edges being always in contact with the 
stationary hopper-bottom, and inclining a lit. 
oted gate adapted by suitable mechanism to 
be rocked on its pivot, for the purpose and 85 
tle backward relatively to the direction in 
substantially as described. 
which they revolve. They are held in place 
3. The combination, with the hopper E, of 
and kept to their work by means of suitable 
the ring B, the interposed angle-irons connect 
springs, g, secured in the radiating arms.ff 
ing Said hopper and ring, and means, Sub 
of the central shaft or rod, F, and extending 
stantially as described, for actuating said ring. 
35 down behind the said scrapers, exerting their 
4. The combination, with the stationary bot 
tension upon the latter and keeping their low 
tom D, having the opening Hand regulating 
er scraping-edges always in contact with the 
gate I, of the scrapers G, actuated in the man 
floor. 
ner and for the purpose substantially as de 
H represents the opening in the bottom of 
the hopper, through which the material con 
scribed. 
5. The combination, with the stationary bot 
tained in the hopper is fed to the mouth of 
tom D, having the opening H for the escape 
the tube or tooth, which afterward conveys it 
of the material contained in the hopper, of the . 
to the ground. This hole extends from the 
scrapers G and springs g, operating substan 
central shaft, F, to the inner wall of the cy 
lindrical hopper, or thereabout, and at or 
tially as described. 
6. The combination, with the revolving hop 
near one of its edges is hinged a plate or gate, 
per, of the frame-work Ff f, the pivoted 
I, the purpose of which is to regulate the 
scraper's G, and springs g, arranged and op 
amount of fertilizer which shall be allowed to 
erating substantially as described. 
pass through the opening; and for the pur 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 
5o pose of adjusting said gate With ease I pro 
hand this 28th day of June, A. D. 1883. 
vide the following means: The gate Iis pro 
vided on its under side with a pendent Toop 
or hook, i, for receiving a link or links, i', 
which connect with a crank-arm, K, as shown 
55 in Fig. 2, mounted upon a shaft, L, and Se 
ROBT. C. RODGERS, 
A. P. LINN COCHIRAN. 
EDWARD H. WISTANCE. 
Witnesses: 
95 
OO 
IO5 
-- 
V 
W 
40 A 
IO 
25 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286461.txt	P. & O. H. McOMBER, 
FENCE POST, 
Patented Oct. 9, 1883. 
(No Model.) 
No. 286,461. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
WITNESSES 
????? 
??????? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
PLINY McOMBER AND OTIS H. McOMBER, OF MAPLE GROVE, MICHIGAN. 
FENCE POST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,461, dated October 9, 1883. 
Application filed June 1 5, 1883. Nonace.) 
: 
n 
O 
25 
- 
To all, whom, it may conce7n: 
Beit known that we, PLINY MICOMBER and 
OTES H. MCOMBER, of Maple Grove, in the 
county of Barry and State of Michigan, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Fence-Posts; and wedo hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, which will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a portion 
of a fence provided with our improved fence 
post. Fig. 2 is a side view of the post. Fig. 
3 is a vertical section of the same, and Figs. 
4, 5, 6, and 7 are perspective detail views of 
the different manners of attaching the wires 
to the post. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
Our invention has relation to metallie fence 
posts; and it consists in the improved con 
struction and combination of parts of the 
same, as hereinafter more fully described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter 
A indicates the body of the post, which is flat, 
tapering slightly toward the top, and taper 
ing to a sharp point toward the lower end. 
The edges of the upper portion of the post are 
provided with flanges B, provided with lat 
erally-extending upwardly-bentlugs or fingers 
C and D, and the lower portion of the post, 
35 which is intended to be inserted into the 
ground, is provided with two longitudinal 
ribs, E, extending from the central line of the 
same at right angles to the flat body of the 
post, which ribs are tapering toward the lower 
4o end in the same manner as the lower portion 
of the post. The lugs or fingers C consist of 
a horizontal polition extending laterally from 
the flange of the post, and a short vertical up 
wardly bent portion, and are adapted to re 
45 - ceive the fence-wires F, where continuous 
wires are used in the notch formed between. 
them and the flange of the post, and the wires 
are sect red to the lugs by means of wire loops 
G, which are passed over the wire and under 
So the horizontal portion of the lugs, where they 
55 
65 
are twisted firmly against the said lugs, as 
shown in Fig. 4. The lugs or fingers D con 
sist, likewise, of a laterally-projecting horizon 
tal portion and a vertical upwardly-bent por 
tion; but the upwardly-bent portions of these 
lugs are grooved around their upper ends, and 
adapted to receive the wires twisted around 
them, as shown in Fig. 5. The body of the 
post has a series of longitudinal slots, H and 
I, and there are beside every alternate slot 6o 
two perforations, J, one upon each side of said Y, 
slot and one slightly above the above the 
other. These slots are used when the Wires 
are fastened to the post, forming separate pan 
els, the ends of the wires from one panel be 
ing inserted through the slots from one side 
and bent back through one of the perforations, 
and the wires from the other panel being in 
serted through the slots in the same manner 
from the other side, and their ends being bent 
in the same manner through the holes upon 
the other side of the slots, as shown in detail 
in Fig. 6. When it is desired, furthermore, 
to make the fence impenetrable for smaller 
animals, extra wires may be inserted through 
the slots I, to one side of each of which slots 
is a bail, K, tapering toward the lower end, 
and the ends of these wires are bent at right 
angles to themselves, and inserted into the 
space between the bails and the body of the 
post, and pressed down into the said space, 
the tapering shape of which will clamp the 
wires firmly, holding them in place. 
Where metallic bands are used in making 
the fence, they may either be inserted in the 
lugs D or they may be passed continuously 
through the slots H, secured by wire loops L, 
inserted through the perforations J over the 
bands, and having their ends twisted upon the 
other side of the perforations. 
It will be seen by the foregoing description 
that this post may be used with many differ 
ent ways of attaching the wires, which will 
adapt it particularly to be used where one 
construction of wire fence stops and another 
construction commences, as is often the case, 
either where a place has been fenced at differ 
ent times and by different persons or where 
the place adjoins another place, or in similar 
cases; and as the post by its construction is IOO 
90 
 
286,46 
5 
very strong, and almost any material in the 
shape of flat or round fence-wire may be used 
with it, it will afford a very desirable and 
economical post. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. The combination of the post having the 
longitudinal slots, and having the downward 
IO ly-tapering bails at one side of the slots, with 
the wires having their ends inserted through 
the slots from both sides, and having their 
ends inserted into the tapering bails at the 
other side of the slots, as and for the purpose 
2. A fence-post consisting of a flat body 
I5 shown and set forth. 
having tapering and flanged lower end, hav 
ing flanges upon its edges provided with up 
wardly bent lugs orfingers, longitudinal slots, 
perforations upon each side of every other slot, 2O 
and tapering bails upon both faces of the post 
at the side of the remaining slots, as and for 
the purpose shown and set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereunto affixed our signa- 25 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
PLINY MCOMIBER. 
OTS H. MCOMBER, 
Witnesses: 
HERBERT M. LEE, 
JOSEPH M. WOOD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286562.txt	(No Model.) 
C. M. STRONG. 
COMBINED BUSTLE AND HIP PAD. 
No. 286,562. 
Patented Oct. 9, 1883. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CAROLINE M. STRONG, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, 
coMBINED BUSTLE AND HP-PAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,562, dated October 9, 883. 
Application fied May 12, 1883. No mode.) 
5. 
O 
2 5 
The bustle D is made of the usual crescent 45 
Beit known that I, CAROLINE. M. STRONG, very elastic filling, which is unobjectionable 4o 
of curled hair, which constitutes a light and 
To all, whoma, it may concern, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at respecting ventilation; and said parts 
and 
Springfield, in the county of Hampden and curled haire are united into said pad by sew 
State of Massachusetts, have invented new and ing through them at intervals, as shown, and 
useful Improvementsina Combined Bustle and by uniting the lower edges of said parts v. 
Hip-Pad, of which the following is a specifi- 
shape, and is, like the hip-pad B, filled with 
cation. 
This invention relates to the construction of curled hair, and is attached to the hip-pad at 
an improved bustle and hip-pad combined; and the point of its junction with the waistband A. 
it consists in a hip-pad made as hereinafter de- 
The above-described construction of a colm 
scribed. The skirt of the hip-pad is secured bined hip-pad and bustle provides a light and 5o 
to a waistband and reaches nearly around a easily-compressible article of wearing-apparel, 
person, and has a bustle secured thereto, at but possessing every requisite for imparting to 
the rear, at the junction of said skirt with said the form of the wearer the desired fullness just 
below the waist and around the hips; and the 
waistband. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
blastle D, constituting a part of the combined 55 
article, and also filled with said curled hair 
fication, Figure 1 is a front view of a corset 
having secured around it, in the position in e, serves the usual purpose of said part. The 
which it is worn, a combined bustle and hip- two together conduce to produce a more grace 
pad constructed according to my invention. ful form in or impart to the overlying skirts 
Fig. 2 is a rear view, showing the lower por- of the wearer a more pleasing line of fullness. 6o 
tion of the parts shown in Fig. 1. 
What I claim as my invention is 
transverse section. 
w 
The combined bustle and hip-pad described, 
In the drawings, A is the waistband, B is the 
consisting of the waistband A, having secured 
hip-pad, and D is the bustle, e indicates the 
curled hair in the hip-pad and in the bustle. thereto the hip-pad B, the padded portion of 65 
The hip-pad parts-that is to say, the outer which is adapted to extend above the hips and 
and inner short skirt-shaped pieces-are made well forward around the person of the wearer, 
from any suitable cloth, being adapted by their as shown, and the bustle D, also secured to the 
form to descend and surround, nearly, the waistband, so as to rest above and upon the 
person of the wearer, substantially as shown, rear portion of the hip-pad, all substantially 7o 
so as to nearly cover the hips, or quite so, if as described, and for the purpose set forth. 
desired. The said hip-pad parts i v are sewed 
by their upper edges to the waistband A, (the 
CAROLINE. M. STRONG. 
latter being provided with the usual buckle 
or other suitable fastening device,) and be- 
tween them is interposed a filling, preferably 
Fig. 3 is a than when the bustle is used separately. 
, 
- 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. CHAPIN, 
R. F. HYDE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286662.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 286,662, . 
Z77%. 1 
 
WWEN DELL. 
SEWING MACHINE, 
Patented Oct, 16, 1883. 
Z *%. -2 
C// ozent 
AY d%- (se-2, 
press, Picta-lilographer, Washirate, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WASHINGTON WENDELL OF ORANGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SEWING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,662, dated October 16, 1888. 
Application filed July 16, 18S3. 
(No model.) 
- 
C 
65 
To all whon it. Thalf concern: 
Beit known that I, WASHINGTON WENDELL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Orange, in the county of Franklin and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and usefullmprovements in Sewing-Machines, 
of which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
The object of my invention is to provide the 
presser-bar of a sewing-machine with simple 
and efficient means by which said presser-bar 
and its attached foot may be raised when re 
quired; also means whereby the presser bar 
and foot may be raised to differents heights by 
moving the handle of the lifting-lever in dif 
ferent directions, and to provide a lifting-le 
ver of such construction that, although it is 
pivoted on the presser-bar, the latter may 
have a limited vertical movement without af. 
fecting the former. . 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an inside view of the cap or face plate of a 
sewing-machine having my invention applied 
thereto, the presser-bar and presser-foot being 
represented in their lowest position. Fig. 2 
is a view similar to Fig. 1, representing the 
presser-bar and presser-foot in their highest 
30 position in full lines and in a lower raised po 
sition in dotted lines, the positions of the lift 
ing-lever being indicated by full and dotted 
lines to correspond to the different elevated 
positions of the presser-bar and presser-foot. 
A indicates the cap, or face plate of a sew 
ing-machine; B, the needle-bar, carrying the 
usual eye-pointed needle, b, and C the presser 
bar. 
A presser-foot, D, of any suitable con 
struction, is secured to the lower end of the 
presser-bar by a set-screw, G, or in any other 
proper manner, the presser-foot being yield 
ingly held upon the work by a spiral spring, 
E, the stress of which is regulated by a thumb 
nut, F, all as usual. 
My improved lifting-lever H is connected 
with the presser-bar by a pin, I, secured to 
said presser-bar and entering an inclosed slot, 
J, in the said lever, said slot, when the lifting 
lever is in the position indicated by Fig. 1, 
permitting the presser-bar and its attached 
pin I to move vertically to a limited extent 
without disturbing the lever, the latter being 
provided with a counterbalancing part, K, to 
keep it at rest. As is well known, the feed, 
working in opposition to the presser-foot, 
causes the latter and the presser-bar to rise 55 
slightly at each stitch as the feed rises, prior 
to moving forward to advance the goods, and 
this upward movement of the presser-bar 
causes the lifters of ordinary construction, 
when pivoted to the presser-bars, to vibrate. 
This constant vibrating movement of the lift 
ers, which is deemed to be objectionable, is 
obviated by the construction just above de 
scribed. The side of the face-plate A is cut 
away to form a recess, L, through which the 
handle of the lifting-lever projects, the walls 
or ends of said recess serving as stops to limit. 
the movements of the said handle. The face 
plate is also provided with a block or fixed 
portion, M, which may beformed integral with 7o 
said face-plate, as shown, or may be a sepa 
rate piece secured to saidface-plate by screws 
or otherwise. 
This block or fixed portion M 
is preferably formed with two inclined sur 
faces, m and na', preferably of different dimen- 75 
isions, converging to a point, n, which may 
be slightly rounded. These inclined surfaces 
may be either straight, as shown, or they may 
be formed convex or curved. The lifting-le 
wer is provided on opposite sides of its point 
of connection with the presser-bar, and at 
unequal distances therefrom, with lugs or pro 
jections h and h", which are adapted to bear 
against the inclined surfaces in andm', respect 
ively. The projections i and h' serve as full 
cra for the lifting-lever in raising the presser 
bar, the weight to be raised being sustained 
by the projection h or the projection h", accord 
ingly as the handle of the lifting-lever is ele 
vated or depressed. Thus, if the handle of the go 
lifting-lever be depressed, the weight of the 
presser-bar will be thrown on the lug h", bear 
ing on the inclined surface in, and a continued 
depression of said handle will cause said lug 
to travel up said inclined surface until the 
handle strikes the lower wall of the recess L 
and the lug it has reached the point in, when 
the presser-foot will be raised to the position 
shown by dotted lines in Fig. 2. In thus op 
erating, the lifting-lever, will act as a lever of IOO 
the first order, the fulcrum being between the 
power and the weight. If, however, the han 
dle of the lifting-lever be raised, the weight of 
the presser-bar will be thrown on the lugh, 
95 
- 
35 
40 
- 
, 
- 
2 
. 
- 
S$,662 
IO 
15 
and said lug will be caused to travel up the 
inclined surface in to the point na", as indicated 
in full lines, Fig. 2, raising the presser-foot to 
its highest position, the lifting-lever being 
during this operation a level of the second 
order, the weight being between the fulcrum 
and the power. Thus it will be seen that by 
providing the lifting-lever with two fulcra, 
one on each side of its point of attachment to 
the presser-bar, and at unequal distances 
therefrom, and by providing suitable fixed 
bearing surfaces on which said fulcra can 
travel when the lifting-lever is elevated or de 
pressed, the presser bar and foot may be raised 
to different heights by moving the handle of 
the lever in one direction or the other, thus 
obviating the necessity of too great a 'sweep 
of the handle in securing a variable double 
lift of the presser-foot. 
If it is not deemed desirable to use the con 
struction which admits of the double lift of 
the presser-bar, a lifting-lever having but one 
fulcrum and a fixed bearing-surface having 
... but a single incline may be employed. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
25 
as new and desire to secure by Lettel's Patent 
1. The combination, with the presser-bar. 
of a sewing-machine, of a lifting-lever pivot 
ed to said bar, and provided with a fulcrum 
on each side of its point of attachment to said 
bar, and a fixed block having inclined bear 
ing-surfaces for the fulcra of 
said lever, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the presser-bar 
of a sewing-machine, of a lifting-lever pivot 
ed to said bar, and provided with two fulcra, 
y 
- 
45 
one on each side of its point of attachment to 
said bar, and at unequal distances therefrom, 
and a fixed block having inclined bearing-sur 
faces for said fulcra, substantially as setforth. 4o 
3. The combination, with the presser-bar 
of a sewing-machine, of a lifting-lever pivot 
ed to said bar, and provided with two fulcra, 
one on each side of the point of attachment to 
said bar, and at unequal distances therefrom, 
and a fixed block having two inclined bearing 
surfaces of different dimensions, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the presser-bar 
of a sewing-machine, of a lifting-lever pivot 
ed to said bar, and provided with two fulcra, 
one on each side of its pivotal point, a fixed 
block having inclined bearing-surfaces for the 
said fulcra, and stops or means for limiting 
the movement of said lever when the same is 
turned in either direction, substantially as set 
5. The combination, with a presser-bar hav 
ing a lifting-pin secured thereto, of a lifting 
lever having a slot in which said pin is ar 
ranged, said lever also having two fulcra, one 
on each side of said slot, and a counterbal 
anced portion to hold it at rest during slight 
vertical movements of the said bar and pin, 
and a fixed block having inclined bearing-sur 
faces for said fulcra, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
. 
WASHINGTON WENDELL. 
Witnesses: 
forth. 
A. M. LYMAN, 
T. W. BRIDGE. 
55 
- 
- 
1 
 
Y 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286762.txt	(No Model) 
H, A, BARROWS & R. F. CUMMINGS, 
OILER FOR CAR WHEELS, 
No. 286,762, 
Patented 0ct, 16, 1883. 
 
 
   
(A ZZ % % 
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
7 
Na 
4.2 Ng Ee 
S 
4ffes f. 
2 C /2/2 
3%. 22. 
7% a-e-225. 
rea 2-2- -r-, -67244274, 
N PETERs. Phoe-lahasrahe. wushttston...C 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOWARD A. BARROWs, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, AND ROBERT F. CUM 
M.INGS, OF LANDRUS, PENNSYLVANTA. 
OLER FOR CAR-WHEELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,762, dated October 16, 1883. 
Application filed April 13, 1883. (No model.) 
To all uhon, it invality concer'r, 
Be it known that we, HOWARD A. BAR 
Rows, of Rochester, Monroe county, New 
York, and ROBERT F. CUMMINGS, of Landrus, 
Tioga county, Pennsylvania, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvementin Oilers; 
and we do hereby declare that the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description of the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan of the device. Fig. 2 is 
a cross-section of the same in line at a of Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of a car-wheel 
with the device applied thereto. Fig. 4 is a 
cross-section of a portion of the wheel, show 
ing the device inserted therein. 
Our improvement relates to oilers for car 
wheels, and is of that kind where the cup is 
set into the side of the wheel and remains a 
permanent attachment thereto. 
The invention consists, as an improved arti 
cle of manufacture, of a hollow Cup open on 
its outside, closed on its inside, and threaded 
on its periphery, forming, in effect, a screw 
nozzle, which can be screwed into the side of 
the wheel, so that its outer rim will stand 
flush, and having in its interior a pivoted disk 
capable of being turned around to different 
positions, the disk and the bottom of the cup 
having coincident holes, through which the 
oil can be poured, all as hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, a shows the cup. This 
cup is open on the outside, but has a closed 
bottom, b, and on its periphery is a screw 
thread, e. In this form the device is to be 
screwed into a socket in the side of the car 
wheel till its outer edge stands flush with or 
is sunken below the surface of the wheel, as 
shown in the cross-section, Fig. 4. The de 
vice is screwed in by means of a suitable 
wrench, which fits in notches did in the outer 
edge of the cup. 
fis a disk, which fits closely in the bottom 
of the cup, and turns upon a screw, g, which 
forms the pivot. The disk and the bottom of 
the cup are provided with coincident holes h. 
h, of sufficient size to allow the insertion of the 
spout of an oil-can, to pour the oil. When the 
disk is turned in one position, the holes come 
in coincidence; when it is turned in the other 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
- 
position, they are separated, and the cup is 
closed. The disk is turned by a suitable 
wrench applied in small cavities i i in the face 
of the disk. 
We are aware that a turning disk provided 
with an oil-hole which turns to open and close 
the passage to the wheel is known, and such, 
broadly, we do not claim. 
The novel feature of our invention consists 
of the cup or plug, open on its outside, closed 
at its bottom to receive the interior disk, and 
threaded on its periphery, the whole so ar 
ranged that the plug can be screwed into the 
side of the wheel so that it stands flush with 
the outer surface. By this means the exte 
rior of the wheel has no projection formed by 
the oil-cup. The cup has a hollow cavity, 
which receives and incloses the disk and shields 
it from harm. 
This device is adapted to car-wheels of va 
rious forms, but is specially adapted to the 
wheels of mining-cars, which are of small size, 
and have a hollow hub intended particularly 
for holding a quantity of oil for lubricating 
the axle. Such cars are not provided with 
brakes; but sprags' or short pieces of wood 
are inserted between the spokes and under the 
body of the car, to arrest motion, thus causing 
the wheels to slide and check the speed, and if 
the oiler projects, it is liable to injury; but, be 
ing set in, it is safe from accidental violence. 
Having described our invention, we claim 
As an improved article of manufacture, an 
oiler for car-wheels, consisting of a eup open 
on its outside, closed at its bottom, and pro 
vided with threads on its periphery for screw 
ing into the side of the wheel, said cup pro 
vided at its bottom with a turning disk, and 
the disk and the bottom of the cup provided 
with coincident holes for the insertion of oil, 
as Set forth. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto signed 
our names in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
HOWARD A. BARROWS. 
ROBERT F. CUMMINGS, 
s 
55. 
6o 
65 
75 
85 
90 
Witnesses: 
2: 
J. T. CORBIN, 
W. S. KERSHINER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286862.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 286,862, 
 
J. E. STEPHENS. 
LAMP STOVE. 
Patented Oct. 16, 1883. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN E. STEPHENS, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH TERRITORY. 
LAMP-STOVE. 
specIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,862, dated October 16, 1888. 
Application filed May 19, 1883. (No model.) 
5 ritory of Utah, have invented certain new and In the cover D are cut two holes or apertures, 55. 
to enable others skilled in the art to which it ap- e, and arefurnished with air-holes ff. Around 6o 
15 
This invention relates to certain new and concentrators EE, in order to leave an air-space 65 
D represents the cover, which is placed over 
io all uhon, it inlay concern : 
Beitknown that I, JoHN EDWARDSTEPHENs, the frame C and rests on the flange c. This 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Salt cover D is provided with air openings or holes 
Lake City, in the county of Salt Lake and Ter- d'd aroundits sides for promoting combustion. 
useful Improvements in Lamp-Stoves, named dd, each of which is provided with a collar, e. 
by me and known as The Salamander;' and I Over each collar e is slipped a perforated tube 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and or flame-concentrator, E. These concentrators. 
exact description of the invention, such as will extend a suitable distance above the collars e 
pertains to make and use the same, reference each concentrator E, and concentric therewith, 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and is a sheet-iron drum, F, stalding on legs 9 g, 
to the letters and figures of reference marked attached to the cover D, as shown in Fig. 1. 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. The drums FF are of larger diameter than the 
useful improvements in lamp-stoves for burn- between them. The drums are raised. about 
ing coal-oil or petroleum, the object being to half an inch from the top or cover D by means 
of the legs gg, thus affording openings for air, 
produce a portable stove or heater adapted to 
thereby creating drafts and aiding combustion 
be placed in the fire-box of a cooking or heat 
2O ing stove, whereby the expense of fuel is re 
in the concentrators E. Over each of the con- 7o 
duced, and the inconvenience of undue heat centrators may be placed, if desired, a perfo- 
during the summer months avoided; and it rated flat or cone-shaped cap, h, for the purpose 
of condensing the smoke. A lug, i, is cast on 
consists in the peculiar construction and ar 
rangement of parts, as will be hereinafter 
each end of the frame C, to which lugs a bail. 
or handle, G, is secured, serving to render the 75 
heater portable. 
In the annexed drawings, which fully illus 
The heater being placed in the fire-box of a 
trate the invention, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my heating apparatus. Fig. 2 is a 
stove, the oil-mat B, which is saturated with 
oil from the tank A, is ignited. The flames 
perspective view of the cover. Fig. 3 is a simi 
3o lar view of the device with the cover removed, 
on the surface of the mat will be directed to- 8O 
showing the frame for holding the oil-mat in 
ward and concentrated in the tubes EE by the 
position; and Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section 
draft through the same, and thus concentrat 
ing the heat against the bottoms of the cook 
of the heater. 
The letter A represents a metal tank or res-ing-vessels placed above the tubes on the stove, 
the reservoirisprovided with aflange,a. Over ?tated by the drafts around the tubes E. By 
the reservoir Aresting on the flangea, is placed means of caps or extinguishers the flames can 
an oil-mat, B, which rests on and is supported be extinguished or one side left burning. 
by a wire frame or grate, b, in the top of the 
It will thus beseen thatmyinvention affords 
B is composed of cotton, plaster-of-paris, and and one having no wick or burners. 
asbestus, and is for the purpose of absorbing 
Some of the advantages derived from thisin 
the oil and rendering it non-explosive. The vention are that it does not heat the room in 
mat B is held firmly in place on the reservoir which the cooking is done, the heat being all 
c, which rests on the edges of themat all around, and can be put in operation almost instantly; 
the mat being between the flanges a and c. it can be extinguished immediately, thereby 
The frame C and reservoir A are secured by economizing fuel and heat, and from its con 
bolts or rivets passing through the mat and struction it is perfectly safe, the oil-mat avoid 
4o oil-reservoir, as shown in Fig. 4. This oil-mat a simple, effective, and safe lamp or heater, 9o 
35 ervoir, in which the oil is placed. The top of the concentration and combustion being facili- 85 
25 more fully described and claimed. 
- 
45 by a metal frame, C, provided with a flange, concentrated on the vessels; it is ready for use 95. 
5o the flanges a and c. 
ing any danger of explosion. 
IOO 
- 
t 
i 
-Y 
i. 
w 
6. 
 
2 
2S6, S62 
1. A lamp stove or heater composed of a frame C, in combination with a cover, D, hav- 20 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters stantially as described. 
Patent, is- 
Having thus described my invention, what I rated concentrator-tubes E and drums F, sub 
4. In a lamp-stove, the tank A, mat B, and 
5 tank or reservoir, A, oil-mat B, frame C, hav-ing openings d d, provided with collars ee, 
ing handle G, and the cover ID, provided with concentrator-telbes EE, having air-holes.ff, 
the concentrator-tubes E and drums F, sub- and drums FF, standing on legs of g, and the 
stantially as shown, and for the purpose de- air-holes d' d', substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
2. The combination, in a stove, with a tank 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
.. ER A, having flange a, of an oil-mat, presence of two witnesses. 
and frame C, having flange c, for the pur- 
pose describ ed. 
3. The combination, with the tank A, hav- 
I5 ing flange a, the oil-mat B, and the frame C, 
having flange c, of a cover, D, having perfo- 
Witnesses: 
GEO. B. FLETCHER, 
H. G. MCMILLAN. 
JOHN EDWARD STEPHENS. 
r 
scribed. 
25 
IO 
SV Wy 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US286963.txt	(No Model.) 
T. S. REED. . 
ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR, 
No. 286,963, 
Patented Oct, 16, 1883. 
 
 
Azzz'ezzor." 
ZZo (S/Geez, 
/74/6 
N. PEERS, Photo-ithographer. Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS S. REED, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
BRIDGEPORT BRASS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 286,963, dated October 16, 1888. 
Application filed May 23, 1883. (No model.) 
IO. 
To all thon it in?tity concern : 
Beit known that I, THOMAS S. REED, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Bridge 
port, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful improvements in Electrical Conductors; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
S0, 
My invention relates to certain novel and 
useful improvements in electrical conductors, 
and has for its object to do away with the in 
Sulating of the positive and negative conduc 
tors separately, and then confining them by 
braiding or otherwise, thereby making a dou 
ble cord; and with these ends in view my in 
vention consists in flexibly arranging and in 
Sulating both electrodes around a common 
center, and providing them with suitable tips 
at their extremities, as will be hereinafter fully 
and in detail explained, and then specifically 
designated by the claims. 
In order that those skilled in the art to 
which my invention appertains may more 
fully understand its construction and adapta 
tion, I will proceed to describe the same in 
detail, referring by letter to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming a part of this specifica 
tion, in which 
Figure illustrates the several stops in the 
construction of my improved conductor, and 
Fig. 2 is a view showing the arrangement and 
relation of the electrodes where they branch 
or fork, for the purpose of being connected to 
the positive and negative poles of any electri 
cal instrument. 
Similar letters denote like parts in both 
figures of the drawings. 
A is a flexible core, around which is braided 
or otherwise arranged conducting material B, 
preferably tinsel. This tinsel may form either 
the positive or negative electrode, and is insu 
lated by any suitable flexible material, C, and 
again around this insulator is braided, or in 
any suitable way arranged, another layer of 
tinsel, D, which will form the positive or 
negative electrode, as the case may be, and the 
45 
 
5 5 
whole is enveloped by an outer flexible cover- 5O 
ing of insulating material E. It will be seen 
that an electrical conductor formed in this 
way will have a high degree of flexibility with 
out decreasing its conductivity. 
When it is desired to connect the two elec 
trodes of the conductors with the correspond 
ing poles of an instrument, the inner insulated 
electrode is continued on, and the outer elec 
trode is braided or suitably arranged around 
an independent core, A', and insulated by a 
continuation of the material E, as Will be 
readily understood by reference to Fig. 2. 
The electrodes are then provided with ordi 
nary tips, F. I am enabled thereby to pro 
vide an electrical conductor exceedingly flexi 
ble, which is a great advantage, since the doll 
ble cords now in use are very stiff, and they 
invariably twist and become tangled by usage. 
My improved conductor presents the appear 
ance of a small, round, and neat cord, and is 
entirely different from the bulky and flat cord 
now in use. 
While I have described the pre?el'aible con 
struction of my improved conductor, I do not 
limit myself to any particular conducting ma- 7 
5 
terial; also, the core A may be dispensed with, 
thereby reducing the size of the conductor; 
also, I am enabled to make my improved COin 
ductor triple, quadruple, &c., by simply braid 
ing or arranging the several conductors and in 
sulators in the mannel described and providing 
them with suitable tips, the proper electrodes 
being distinguished by different colors of in 
sulating material. 
I am aware that it is not new, broadly, to 
arrange the electrodes with proper insulators 
around a common center, and I do not wish 
to be understood as laying claim to this con 
struction. 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Lettel's 
Patent, is 
1. In an electrical conductor, a series of flexi 
ble strands composing one electrode, braided 
or otherwise arranged around the insulator of 95 
the other electrode, in combination with suit 
able tips secured to the extremities of the elec 
trodes, substantially as set forth. 
Having thus described my invention, what 90 
SO 
2 
2s 6,963 
2. In an electrical conductor, the electrodes vided at their extremities with suitable tips, Io 
composed of a series of flexible strands of tin- substantially as set forth. 
selor similar material arranged around a com- 
mon center and insulated by any suitable flexi- in presence of two witnesses. 
5 ble material, in combination with tips secured 
to the extremities of the electrodes, substan. 
tially as set forth. 
3. An electrical flexible conductor composed 
of concentric flexible insulated electrodes pro- 
W. W. MoRTIMER, 
ALFRED B. BEERS. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS S. REED. 
--- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287063.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 287,063, 
A. J. SPALDING, 
WEHICLE SPRING, 
Patented Oct, 23, 1883. 
257--- 
  
QS 
ZSSKUSK KSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSAA NaANSAwaaSSSSSanaas (SKS& 
AS 
ass 
azri Arizz/22 
7 NF 
Stated 
72 
 
VITWESSES 
- 
IvrewTOR 
Attorneys 
: 
- 
f : NITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
ALBERT J. SPALDING, OF ALMA CITY, MINNESOTA. 
VEHICLE - SPRNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,063, dated October 23, 1883. 
Application filed June 30, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
2O 
25 
3. 
35 
To all, Luhon, it may concern, 
Beit known that I, ALBERT J. SPALDING, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Alma City, in the county of Waseca and State 
of Minnesota, have invented a new and useful 
Vehicle-Spring, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
Companying drawings. 
Thisinvention relates to springs for vehicles, 
and the object of the same is to provide means 
which will equal the weight of the vehicle, and 
thus all danger of breaking the spring will be 
avoided. 
It consists in certain details of construction 
and combination of parts, as hereinafter fully 
set forth, and particularly pointed out in the 
-- 
claims. 
- 
& 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 
represents a perspective view of my improved 
Spring applied in position. Fig. 2 represents 
a longitudinal sectional view of my improved 
spring detached from the vehicle. Fig. 3 is 
an end View of the same. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
in all the figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
bolster of a vehicle, having a flat metallic 
plate, B, secured to the top thereof. As shown, 
the plate is formed with openings or slots bat 
each end, to receive headed stakes, pins, or 
bolts, which secure the plate to the bolster. 
This fastening is found sufficient to secure 
the two parts together; but it is obvious that 
clips or other fastening means may be added 
to secure the plate more firmly to the bolster. 
To the upper part of the plate B is secured at 
each end a supplemental plate, C, having its 
Outer ends forming journals c for a cranked 
bar or rod, D. The middle portion or crank 
d of said rod passes through the journals. 
Then on each side of the middle portion the 
rod extends downward, its ends being extend 
ed outward, as shown at e. 
Edesignates springs secured at their middle 
portions, by clips FF, to a Wooden frame, G, 
which rests on each spring. The ends of the 
springs are constructed to form journals.f, in 
which the rod D is arranged to swing. 
screw-cap, g, is secured on the ends e of the 
rod, and prevents the journals f from sliding 
off the said ends. The under Surface of the 
frames G, where they connect with the springs, 
are concaved to fit the surface of said springs, 
while the clips Fare either flat or are fitted at 
their upper portions in recesses of the frames, 
SO that the wagon-box will rest smoothly on 
the springs. 
H designates cross-bars, formed, preferably, 
of band-iron, and connecting the ends of frames 
G, said cross-bars having a slot or opening, h, 
formed therein for the attachment of theframes 
to the Wagon-body. Said cross-bars keep the 
Spring in place at the top, so that there is no 
working and getting out of order. 
The operation of myinvention can be readily 
understood from the foregoing description, 
taken in connection with the annexed draw 
ings. While the yehicle is in motion the ac 
tion of the same slides the springs slightly, first 
on One side and then on the other, and this 
sliding movement will distribute the weight 
of the Wagon equally upon the two springs. 
Thus the springs are allowed play to work, so 
that they will not break when a heavy weight 
comes on them, but will equalize the weight 
of the vehicle-box upon the bolsters. It will 
be seen that the weight of the vehicle-box is 
first transmitted to the center of the springs, 
which, by means of the sliding movement of 
the Springs upon the rods D, brings a portion 
of the weight upon the ends of the bolsters, 
and the weight is equalized and the springs 
are prevented from being broken. The 
cranked rod D will always work to the action 
of the springs, and will not get out of order, 
while the connected frames G serve to keep 
the Springs in place. 
My Spring is very simple and durable in its 
construction and efficient in operation. It can 
be easily taken off and replaced, and has other 
advantages too numerous to be recited here. 
It is obvious that various modifications may 
be made of the foregoing construction without 
departing from the spirit or scope of my in 
vention. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
aS new 
In a vehicle-spring, the combination, with 
the bolster, of a plate secured to the top of the 
same, and having a supplemental plate, C, at 
tached thereto at its outer ends, cranked rods 
D, working in journals c of the supplemental 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
2S2,063 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
plate, a pair of springs, E, attached to the ends 
of the rods, and having screw-caps g fitting my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
over the same, a corresponding number of presence of two witnesses. 
frames, G, secured to the middle portion of 
5 each spring, and cross-bars H, connecting the 
frames together, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
EDWD. BEULING, 
WENDELL PIERCE. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT. J. SPALDING, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287163.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 287,163. 
W. F. & H. C. REEWES. 
WEED CUTTER, 
Patented 0ct, 23, 1883. 
 
  
 
  
az 
Kg-sis 
%222 
N 
w 
w 
73-752.e." 
2.2%. 22. 
"...i.2.0-l. & 75-6.3as ca, 27ez ATTORNEYs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. F. REEVES AND HENRY C. REEVES, OF MEREDITH, KANSAs. 
WEED-CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,163, dated October 28, 1883. 
Application filed July 12, 1883. (No model.) 
IO 
: 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WM. F. REEVEs and 
HENRY C. REEVEs, both citizens of the United 
States, residing at Meredith, in the county of 
Cloud and State of Kansas, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Weed 
Cutters for Listed Corn, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had therein 
to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in weed-cutters for listed corn; and it consists 
in the construction and novel arrangement of 
the various parts of which it is composed, all 
of which will be hereinafter more fully ex 
plained. 
The annexed drawings, to which reference 
is made, fully illustrate our invention, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents a vertical sectional 
view. Fig. 2 is a plain view, and Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5 are detail views. . 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A is a broad rectangular board, or 
the body of the machine, which is braced by 
transverse bars at a, secured to the upper face 
thereof, and at the front said body is provided 
with an upwardly-inclined board, b, and eyes 
b'b', to which is attached the draft-bail c, by 
means of which the machine is drawn over the 
ground. 
To the upper face of the body A is attached 
the adjustable handle B, which is provided 
with a strap-hinge, c', at its forward end, that 
engages a raised bar, d, that is securely bolted 
to the body aforesaid. 
Near the rear portion of the body, and on 
the upper face thereof, is hinged thereto a 
bail, d, the center portion of which straddles 
the handle and plays within a guideway, e, 
formed by the upper face of the handle and a 
strap-plate, e, that is bolted to said handle, as 
Within this guideway is arranged a 
shown. 
flat spring, f, that is secured to the handle at 
one end, while the opposite end is provided 
With a downwardly-bent lip, f', designed to 
hold the bail between said lip and plate, as 
shown in the drawings, whereby the tongue 
or handle is secured in an elevated position, 
and the sides f of this bail serve to prevent a 
lateral movement of the handle. At the rear 
of the body of the machine we provide a se 
curing-hook, g, that is pivoted to the rear 
edge of said body. 
To the upper and lower faces of the body 
75 
aforesaid are removably secured triangular- 55 
shaped blocks h h, having in their forward 
ends perforations i i, that register with a per 
foration, i', made through the body A, and 
said perforations i i i" are designed to receive 
a bolt, j, that passes through the perforations 
kic in the forward ends of the two Cutter-bars 
k'k', which latter are bent at right angles, as 
at ll, downwardly, and having the cutting 
portion m in extending rearwardly, as shown 
in the drawings. It will thus be seen that 
the cutting-bars are arranged to swing out 
Wardly, and may be adjusted to different in 
clinations, and when adjusted are held firmly 
in position by means of the bolts in m', passing 
through the bars, and through slots in m'in the 7o 
body and blocks h h, and the depth of the 
knives or cutter-bars may be regulated by 
means of the blocks. Should a greater depth 
be desired for the knives, the upper block can 
be placed on the under side with the under 
block, and if a shallow depth be required the 
under block may be removed and the forward 
portion of the cutter-bars set close to the un 
der side of the body. And it will be further 
observed that by means of the adjusting de 
vices herein shown and described the Several 
parts may be regulated as necessity may re 
quire, and at the same time the device is sim 
ple in operation, durable, and cheap to man 
ufacture. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is- . 
1. The combination, with the body A, con 
structed as described, of the adjustable handle 9o 
B, hinged to the raised bar d, at its forward 
end, and provided with the hinged bail d', 
strap-plate e, springf, and hook 9, the Whole 
operating as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. The combination of the handle B, bail d', 
spring f, raised bar d, hook g, blocks h h, cut 
ter-bars k" k", perforated as described, and 
body A, the whole operating as described, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereofwe affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
a 
WILLIAM. F. REEVES. 
HENRY C. REEVES. 
95 
IOC) 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs H. FLOYD, 
JACKSON NEUKIRK. 
25 
35 
45 
so 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287263.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 287,263. 
 
A. C. FELLOWS. 
COLLAR, 
Patented Oct. 23, 1883. 
V-7 corve Zzou's 
4% -3.2273, 1267. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A. CLARKE FELLOWS, OF TROY, NEW YORK. 
COLLAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,263, dated October 28, 1888. 
Application filed November 28, 1882. Renewed September 8, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Beit known that I, A. CLARKE FELLOWs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Troy, 
New York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Collars, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to the construction of 
a collar in which the plies are so formed that 
when stitched together the finished article 
shall possess the characteristics of both a gar 
rote or Standing and a turn-down collar. 
The objects of my impovement are to form, 
dispose, and stitch together the severalplies of 
which the collar is composed in such manner 
that the collar can be laundered without creas 
ing or Wrinkling, the necktie kept down 
throughout its entire length in position upon 
the collar-band, and a strong, neat, and ser 
viceable article produced. 
To Such end my invention consists in a com 
bined garrote or standing and turn-down collar 
camposed of an outer and an innerply, with an 
intermediate ply which is folded longitudi 
nally and stitched along its edges to the outer 
and inner plies, the said intermediate ply be 
ing also stitched along its line of fold to the 
inner or back ply of the collar, as hereinafter 
more fully described, and illustrated in the an 
nexed drawings, in which 
Figurel represents the inner or backply of 
the collar. Fig. 2 shows the outer ply. Fig. 
3 shows the intermediateply before it has been 
folded. Fig. 4 illustrates the collar with its 
several plies separated from each other at one 
end. Fig. 5 represents the finished collar. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, Ain 
dicates the inner piece or ply of the collar, 
Which said ply is shaped similar to an ordi 
nary garrote or standing collar, Fig. 1 illus 
trating said ply, which can be cut for either a 
low or a high collar, and be made either round 
or angular at its upper corner. 
This piece A, 
which will be cut either straight or curved, is 
formed with the usual ends or tabs, A', in which 
button-holes are provided for fastening the 
collar to a shirt. The outer or exposed piece 
Orply, IB, is cut SO as to represent a combined 
standing and turn-down collar, the standing 
portion b being above the points ac a' at the 
ends of said ply, and the turn-down portion b' 
being below said points. These two plies. A 
and B are stitched together along their upper 
edges, and also along their end edges, down to 
points a on the outer ply, which said points, 
when the plies are thus disposed, will beat or 
near the pointsy, which are at the junction of 
the ends or tabs A and the upper portion of 
the inner ply. 
C indicates an intermediate ply, which is 
formed substantially as shown in Fig. 3, in 
which it will be seen that said piece has its 
band portions c and ends or tabs made in Con 
formity with such portions of the inner ply, 
A, and that its remaining flap portion, c, is 
made to correspond with that portion of the 
outer ply, B, which is below the points ac. The 
said intermediate ply is folded longitudinally 
between its upper and lower edges, and applied 
between the outer and inner plies of the collar; 
its flap c being stitched to the lower or turn 
down portion, b, of the outer ply, B, and its 
ends or tabs and band portion c being stitched 
to the correspondingly-shaped part of the inner 
ply, A. This intermediate ply subserves two 
purposes: First, it thickens and strengthens 
the band and turn-down portion of the collar; 
and, secondly, as its line of fold is continuous 
between points ac and below the standing por 
tion of the collar, a necktie will be held down 
upon the band and prevented from rising upon 
the standing part of the article by reason of 
the flap formed by such turned down part 
c' of the intermediate ply, which is stitched 
to the lower portion of the outerply, as already 
described. The intermediate plyis also stitched 
along its line of fold to the inner ply by a line 
of stitching, D, which prevents any Wrinkling 
or creasing of the collar while being laundered, 
and preserves the shape and proper relative 
position of the parts. The line of Stitching 
which subserves these important purposes is 
concealed by the outer ply, B, and hence does 
not detract from the appearance of the collar. 
The turn-down portion of this collar can have 
pointed or rounded corners, and the tabs or 
extensions of the band portion can be made 
short or long, so as to decrease or increase the 
space between the ends of the body of the col 
lar, as may be desired. 
The collar is provided with a marginalline 
of stitching, which both ornaments the article 
and, serves to hold the plies securely together. 
It will be obvious that any or all of the plies 
of this collar can be duplicated, if desired, so 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
So 
85 
95 
IOO 
2 
2S7,263 
5 I claim is- 
- 
as to produce a heavier collar, or that but three an intermediate ply which is folded longitudi 
plies can be employed, as hereinbefore de-nally and stitched along its line of fold to the 
said inner ply, the intermediate ply being se- 15 
scribed. 
Having thus described my invention, what cured along its edges to the inner and outer 
plies, substantially in the manner described. 
1. A combined standing and turn-down col- 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
lar comprising an inner and an outerply, with hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
an intermediate ply which is folded longitudi- messes. 
nally and secured along its edges to the inner. 
2. A combined standing and turn-down col- 
lar, comprising an inner and an outerply, with 
JAMES L. NoRRIS, 
J. A. RUTHERFORD. 
A, CLARKE FELLOWS, 
Io and outer plies, substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287363.txt	(No Model.) 
P. B. CHARBONEAU. 
SAW SWAGE, 
No. 287,363, 
Patented Oct, 23, 1883. 
 
72zes Z. 
-z. 75a-eze6 
Zzz-azza-7. 
6-42, cz, 22%rrey 
72-seaaZ. 42azozzeeze 
ETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. O. C. . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PASCAL B. CHARBONEAU, OF BAY CITY, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF TWO. 
THIRDS TO H. A. FRASER AND J. B. BARBER, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
- SAW. SWAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,863, dated October 28, 1883. 
Application filed May 10, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
25 
c0arse. 
To all whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, PASCALB. CHARBONEAU, 
of Bay City, in the county of Bay and State of 
Michigan, have invented new and useful Im 
5 provements in Saw-Swages; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention is an improvement in saw 
swages; and it consists in the construction and 
arrangement of parts, as will be more fully 
hereinafter set forth, and specifically pointed 
out in the claims. 
I5. At the present state of the art swaged saw 
teeth are generally formed by upsetting the 
tooth, so as to spread its cutting-edge, or a 
form of punch or striker has been used which 
forms a flattened saw-tooth. The objection to 
2O the method of upsetting the tooth is that the 
steel which forms the cutting-edge of the tooth 
is thereby injuriously affected, as the fibers or 
particles of steel lose some of their cohesion, 
making the steel, as it is technically called, 
Where the saw-teeth are much 
worn, the operation of upsetting has to be pre 
ceded by filing, so as to bring the saw-tooth in 
proper shape for upsetting. The swage-tooth. 
obtained by punching devices is Weak and ne 
3o cessitates much filing. A general objection to 
all present devices of forming swage-teeth is 
that they all affect the cutting-line of the tooth, 
which necessitates a readjustment by filing, 
which in circular saws with inserted teeth is a 
35 serious drawback. With my means for swag 
ing saw-teeth the cutting-line of the tooth is 
never affected, and the tooth is formed by an 
operation which is just the reverse from up 
setting, and tends to refine the steel which 
4o makes up the cutting-edge, instead of destroy 
ing its cohesion, as in the upsetting process. 
Another advantage is that I am enabled to 
form a superior swage-tooth with less loss of 
material, as the amount of filing needed to 
45 perfect my tooth is but trifling, as will be 
shown and explained hereinafter. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows in diagram 
the operation of swaging a tooth of an ordi 
nary mill-saw. Fig.2 shows the operation of 
5o swaging an inserted tooth of a circular saw. 
In Fig. 1, A is the tooth of an ordinary mill- 55 
Fig. 3 is a side elevation and top plan of the 
same tooth after swaging. Fig. 4 is a side ele 
vation of the same tooth when perfected by 
filing. 
saw, which is intended to be swaged. B is a 
bed tool or anvil to support the tooth. C is a 
die, which is provided with a segmental cylin 
drical face, a. This die is forced down by 
pressure upon the tooth, as shown by dotted 6o 
arrow. The action of the die C will be easily 
understood from the drawings. Its rounded 
portion a will forman indentation, b, on top of 
the tooth, pressing a corresponding amount of 
material toward the cutting-edge and produc- 65 
ing the desired spread or display, as the shape 
of the die does not allow the material to es 
cape any other way. To get the proper effect, 
the die C is held in proper guides, or other 
wise, so as to allow it to move only in the di 
rection it is intended to act. The bottom die 
or anvil, B, serves as a rest only, and furnishes 
a large enough support and resistance against 
the pressure brought to bear against the top 
die, so as not to alter or affect the cutting-line 
c of the saw. Its bearing or supporting surface 
does not extend beyond the cutting-edge, there 
by aiding and facilitating the action of the up 
per die, which, with sufficient pressure, can 
now form an almost finished cutting-edge, 
which requires only a few strokes of a file to 
form a perfect chisel-edge. 
. 
In Fig. 2 is shown the arrangement of the 
dies for swaging the teeth of a circular saw. 
The form of the dies is reversed-that is, the 
bottom or stationary die is provided with the 
Segmental cylindrical face, while the top die is 
provided with a plain inclined face. The top 
die is brought down upon the tooth, the same 
as in Fig. 1, but the indentation will now nat 
urally be produced on the leading face of the 
Saw-tooth; but the result is again a swage 
tooth of the same conformation as in Fig. 1, 
necessitating only a few strokes of a file to ac 
quire the chisel-edge. It will be seen that (the 
saw being free to rotate) the top tool merely 
presses the saw-tooth onto the lower, without 
in the least affecting the cutting-line of the 
tooth, if it is given only enough bearing-sur 
face. This is a decided advantage of my pro- Ioo 
95 
75 
9O 
2s 7,363 
cess, especially for swaging inserted teeth. Af. A swage-tooth obtained by the process here 
ter swaging, all the filing needed is simply to 
| in described is easily distinguishable from one 
sharpen the cutting-edge, which generally has obtained by any other way. 
only a little burr, if the operation has been per- 
What I claim as my invention is- 
formed with any care. As the tooth is pro- 
1. The combination of the anvil B and re 
vided with an indentation back of its cutting- ciprocating die C, one having a rounded por 
edge, the filing will produce a regular chisel- tion, as at a, to form a recess in the rear of the 
edge, as seen in the drawings. This is a fea- cutting-edge of the tooth, and the die C adapted 
ture not produced by any other manner of to strike diagonally, on the back of the tooth, 3o 
Swaging. The nature of the indentation, pro- Substantially as described. 
2. The anvil or stationary die B, having the 
duced as it is by a perfectly-smooth die, is of 
itself a desirable feature in my swage-tooth, as rounded portion, as shown, combined with the 
it greatly facilitates the escape of the sawdust, movable die having inclined surface, and the 
its smoothness making it superior to any simi- whole adapted to swage a recess in the face of 35 
lar indentation obtained by the use of a file. 
the tooth in the rear of the cutting-edge and 
The use of the segmental cylindrical die-face spread the metal on either side thereo?, as set 
Iconsider an important factor, as it furnishes forth. 
a tooth that presents a most favorable cutting- 
edge-thatis, achisel-edge-the action of which 
is greatly assisted by the smooth indentation 
into which it leads the dbris. 
PASCAL B. CHARBONEAU. 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
E. SCULLY. 
Witnesses: 
25 
IO 
15 
- 
- 
- 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287463.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 287,463, 
R, L, PHELPS, 
GRAN CUTTING MACHINE 
Patented Oct. 30, 1883. 
 
? :''I 
LLLILL. 
ELLETTI 
-------|- 
L__??H |-# 
___??1H 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
RODNEY L. PHELPs, OF RAVENNA, OHIO. 
G RA N C UT NG MACH I NE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,463, dated October 80, 1883. 
Application filed May 28, 1883. (No model.) 
-- 
IO 
CutteS. 
To all, ??????, i? ??? ??????r?, : 
Be it known that I, RODNEY L. PHELPs, of 
Ravenna, Portage county, Ohio, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Grain-Cut 
ting Machines, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to the use of chisel 
edged cutters in pairs, each pair being beveled 
on the outer sides, and placed beyond and in 
line With a slot in the hopper, through which 
the grain is fed to a roller, grooved lengthwise 
and annularly, that carries the grain to the 
The object of the invention is to prevent 
making fine meal, resulting from crowding the 
particles between the cutters. 
In the drawings forming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a plan, with a part of the 
hopper broken away to show the relative po 
sitions of the hopper-slots and pairs of cut 
ters. Fig. 2 is a section. 
Roller ( is formed with longitudinal grooves 
e and annular grooves s, the latter being of a 
Suitable distance apart to make the particles 
of meal of a desired length. It is supported 
by a suitable frame,f, and is rotated by means 
of pulley p. 
Guides n are inserted in the bottom of hop 
per h, and form slots in, of a suitable width to 
3O permit of but one kernel of oats or othergrain 
to enter and lie lengthwise in each groove e at 
the bottom of the slot. There are two annu 
lar grooves S at the bottom of each slot in, 
25 
and in these two grooves are placed a pair of 
cutters, cc, held in frame f, which is slotted 35 
to receive them. The pair of cutters c c are 
situated beyond guides n, and are beveled on 
the outside back from the edge, in order that 
in severing the kernel the part passing be 
tween the two cutters may not be crushed, and 40 
that the two ends of the kernel may have room 
in groove e to be moved laterally by the bey 
eled sides of the cutters without being crushed. 
The rotating roller a carries the severed par 
ticles until they are discharged by gravity from 45 
the under side of the roller. 
Guides in may be made to extend down only 
to the circumference of roller a, instead of 
entering the annular grooves s, and the grain 
carrier a may be in the form of an endless 
chain, if desired; but the roller form is deemed 
preferable. 
I claim as my invention 
In a grain-cutting machine, a carrier formed 
with longitudinal grooves e and cross-grooves 
s, in combination with a hopper, h, formed 
with slots in and chisel-edged cutters c c, in 
pairs, each pair being beveled on the outer 
sides, and inserted in grooves s, beyond and in 
line with the hopper-slots in, substantially as 
described. 
55 
RODNEY L. PHELPS. 
Witnesses: 
BRADFORD HOWLAND, 
GEO. F. ROBINSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287563.txt	W. S. MORTON. 
EXCAVATING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 30, 1883. 
 
 
 
 
(N0 M0 del. ) 
No. 287,563. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 287,563. 
W. S. MORTON. 
EXCAVATING MACHINE, 
. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 30, 1883, 
-N 
\N\\\sses, 
??8a? 
???? 
??? 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 287,563. 
 
W. S. MORT' 0 N. 
EXCAVATING MACHINE. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Oct. 30, 1883. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
V 
WALTER SCOTT MORTON, OF ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA. 
EXCAVATING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,583, dated October 30, 1883. 
Application filed January 11, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
O 
15 
2o 
 
. 
-- 
- . 
in which- 
To all whom it nai/ concern 
Beit known that I, WALTER SCOTTMORTON, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of St. Paul, in the county of Ramsey, in the 
State of Minnesota, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Excavating-Ma 
chines, of which the following specificationis 
a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being also had to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a semi-sectional side elevation. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view; Fig. 3, a detached view 
of the cutting-cylinder, showing a variationin 
its construction. Fig. 4 is a rear elevation. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional side view; and Fig. 6 is a 
sectional plan view, enlarged, of the excavat 
ing-drum and a portion of the conveyer-belt. 
The main frame-work of the machine con-, 
sists of a base-frame, A, forward uprights, A, 
and rear uprights, A, and top frame, A', 
made in any desired manner and suitably 
braced, and mounted upon wheels B B B'B', 
so that it can be transported from place to 
place or moved ahead as fast as the earth is 
excavated. In the drawings, one pair of these 
wheels, BB, arearranged upon a swivel-axle, 
B', (see Fig. 4.) so that the machine may be 
guided and turned in any direction in the same 
manner as an ordinary wagon. The otherset 
of wheels, B'B', are shown fixed to a cylindri 
cal axle, B, so that the axle and wheels re 
volve together, and one of the wheels, B, is pro 
vided with a ratchet-wheel, a, adapted to be 
acted upon by a bar or dog, b, vibrated in any 
suitable manner by the mechanism that oper 
ates the excavator, as hereinafter shown, to re 
volve the wheels B B and axle B and move 
the machine slowly and steadily forward as 
the excavator cuts into the bank of earth. 
The wheels B B may be firmly fixed upon 
their axles, if preferred, or made to be either 
fixed or swiveled, as desired, and the machine 
may be arranged to be transported from place 
to place by horse, steam, or other power. The 
ratchet-wheel a and dog b may also be dis 
pensed with, and the machine moved forward 
by hand-power or in any other suitable man 
8. 
Arranged between cross-timbers A' A'in the 
rear part of the main frame is a smaller frame, 
D, as shown. This frame D is pivoted at one 
of its upper corners by a pin, c, in the cross 
bar A, and by the opposite lower corner with 
an upright shaft, E, in the cross-bar A, so 
that the frame is free to oscillate back and 55 
forth within its supports A A. 
-- -- 
- 
F is a horizontal shaft journaled in suitable 
boxes on the sides of the frame D, and carry 
ing a drum, F, on its center, and two wooden 
side bars, G' G, outside the ends of the drum, 6o 
and running forward and downward, as shown, 
and two chain - pulleys, H. H., outside the 
wooden bars. Upon the shaft F, nearest to 
the pivoted side of the frame D, is a bevel 
gear wheel, I, adapted to engage with a bevel- 65 
pinion, I, on the upper end of the upright 
shaft E. The shaft E passes down below the 
cross-piece A, and is provided on its lower 
end with a miter-gear, K, arranged toen 
gage with a similar miter-gear, K, on a hori- 7o 
zontal shaft, L, journaled across one of the 
rear uprights, A', and a short upright, A', .. 
and provided with a grooved wire-cable'. 
pulley, LP, on its end outside the upright A'. 
By this arrangement, if motion be applied by 75 
a wire cable to the shaft Li, the miter-gears 
K K will transfer the motion to shaft E, and 
from thence through the bevel-gears II* to 
the shaft F and its drum F and chain-pulleys 
H' H, while at the same time, by utilizing 8o 
the shaft E as one of the pivots of the frame 
D, the latter may be oscillated without in 
terfering with the action of the shafts and 
gears, &c. 
the shaft L than a wire cable; but this power 
will do the work effectually and advanta 
geously. 
Journaled across and beneath the lower ends 
of the bars G'G' is a shaft, F, carrying a drum, 9o 
F', similar to the shaft F, and drum F, over 
which two drums an endless slatted belt, M, is 
adapted to be run. When belts are used to 
support the slats of this belt, the drums FF' 
will be as long as the distance between the 95 
bars G' G'; but when chains are used to sup 
port the slats, chain-pulleys will replace the 
drums. 
Journaled in boxes P. Pupon the upper 
Any other means may be used to revolve 85 
. 
: 
sides of the lower ends of the bars G' G' are IOO . 
two hollow sleeves, RR, through which short . 
shafts N'N'fit loosely, the sleeves being adapt 
25 
30 
35 
4O 
45 
50 
2 
287,563 
I5. 
25 
O 
- 
- 
ed to be revolved around the shafts, while the 
latter are held stationary by dogs or clamps d 
d', which secure the shafts to the bars G. G. 
Attached to the inner ends of the sleeves R. 
5 Rare two sheet-steel or other metallic disks, 
TT, whose outer rims project outward and 
beyond the ends of the drum F" a short dis 
tance, as shown. These two disks TT are 
connected to each other by a sheet-steel cylin 
der, T, through which a number of narrow 
slots, e, Fig. 5, are cut at regular intervals, 
parallel with the shafts N' N. Six of these 
slots e are shown in the drawings; but any 
The cylinder 
desired number may be used. 
T, where the slots are cutthrough, is strength 
ened by strips of L-iron,' e', as shown, the 
adjacent faces of the L-irons forming deeper 
slots than the thickness of the steel of the cyl 
inder. The short shafts N' N pass inward 
through the disks TT, and are provided on 
their inner ends, inside the disks, with crank 
arms N N, the outer ends of the crank-arms 
being connected together by a shaft, N, inside 
the cylinder T. 
The shafts N' N, crank-arms N N, and 
shaft Nare all firmly connected together, and 
held rigidly by the dogs did, the center line 
of the drum F, shafts N' N, and shaft Nall 
being about in the same plane, the crank-arms 
pointing away from the drum F and shafts 
N'N', as shown. 
Encircling the shaft N loosely at its ends 
next the crank-arms NN', and at suitablein 
termediate points, are sets of collars i, to which 
arms in are attached by their inner ends, and 
with their outer ends passing out through the 
slots e'. There will be as many of the collars 
i in each set as there are slots ein the cylinder 
T, and the number will be increased or de 
creased to correspond to the slots in the cyl 
inder. In the drawings, six slots, e, being 
shown, six collars, i, are shown in each set. 
Three sets of the collars are shown, one at each 
end and one in the center of the shaftN, which 
will be enough ordinarily; but the longer the 
cylinder T is made the more sets of collars i 
and arms m will be required, while.a very. 
short cylinder would only require two sets. 
In the drawings, where three sets of collars i 
are shown, three of the arms in pass out 
through each of the slots e", and across the 
outer ends of each set of the arms that pass 
through the same slot a curved sheet-steel 
shovel' or blade, n, is fixed, with small 
sharp-pointed fingers r attached to and pro 
jecting beyond the outer edges of the blades n. 
The outer ends of the sleeves R. R. project 
beyond the bars G' G', and are provided on 
said projecting ends with chain-pulleys HH' 
in line with the chain-pulleys H. H., so that 
endless chains HH, passing over the two sets 
of chain-pulleys, will revolve the cylinder T 
and disks T T around the Shafts N' N N at 
the same time with the slatted belt M. By 
this means the revolution of the cylinder will 
carry the arms an around the shaft N, by rea 
son of the outer ends of the arms passing 
through the slots e, and the collars i being 
loose upon the shaft N. 
The crank-arms N'N' pointing away from 
the drum F, as shown, and the arms m being 
just long enough so that the outer points of 
the fingers r will be flush with or a little in 
side the outer surface of the cylinder T when 
the slots e' pass the drum F, it follows as a 
matter of course (the arms an being all the 
same length) that when the slots e' pass the 
point J, directly opposite the drum F, the 
arms in will project beyond the cylinder T 
their greatest distance. The arms in will 
gradually pass farther and farther out through 
the slots e' as the cylinder, in revolving, car 
ries the slots around from the drum F to the 
point y, and then gradually recede into the 
cylinder again as the slots pass around to the 
drum. The blades n and fingers r, being at 
tached to the arms m, will run in and out with 
them. 
In the drawings, Figs, 5 and 6, one set of 
the arms in and its blade in are shown next the 
drum F and entirely inside the cylinder, and 
the opposite arm and its attached blade and 
fingers at the farthest point of projection, 
while those below the center are shown grad 
ually projecting farther and farther outward, 
and the blades above the center gradually re 
ceding farther and farther inward. 
h are cutting fingers or blades attached to 
the outer rims of the disks TT, to cutgrooves 
in the earth on each side of the cylinder and 
in advance of it, to assist the blades in and fin 
gers ir in their work. 
V is a scraper attached to the bars G G', 
with its upper edge in close contact with the 
outer surface of the cylinder T at the point 
where the fingers rare withdrawn entirely in 
side the cylinder, to remove any adhering 
earth, as shown in Fig. 5. This scraper may 
be placed above the drum F and its slatted 
belt M, if desired, to form not only a scraper, 
but to also act as a chute' to run the earth 
from the cylinder up onto the belt M. 
As before stated, the frame D is free to be 
oscillated horizontally on its pivot c and shaft 
E. This is to permit theside bars, G' G', and 
their attached endless chain M and cutting 
cylinder T to be swept around from side to 
side to increase the scope of the cutting-pow 
er, while at the same time the cylinder Tand 
belt M may be raised and lowered by any suit 
able means to cut upward through a bank. 
Lying along over the top of the cross-bar 
A, with one end pivoted on the pin c and the 
other end free and ending above the drum T, 
is a wooden arm or lever, W. In the free 
end of the lever a grooved pulley, t', is piv 
oted, over which a rope, t, leading from a 
bail, G, on the bars G' G', runs and is carried 
back and around a sheave, t, on the upper 
end of the pivot c, and from thence over an 
angularly-set sheave, t, and down to a wind 
lass, t, on the base-frame A. By this arrange 
40 
45 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
II 5 
I25 
5 
IO 
5 
I 
3 
O 
3 
5 
ment, if the windlass be revolved, the rope t 
will be wound up and raise the lower ends of 
the bars G G' and their attached belt M1 and 
cylinder T upward. 
tt are two other ropes, attacled to oppo 
site sides of the lever W at it", and passing 
in opposite directions over to the sides of the 
upper frame, A', and thence through suitable 
blocks or pulleys, t ti", down to two wind 
lasses, t't", and by revolving either one of 
these windlasses the ropes t t will be wound 
up and draw lever W from side to side, ac 
cording to which windlass is revolved. This 
side movement of the lever W will be com 
municated to the bars G G' and their at 
tached belt. M and cylinder T through the 
rope t, and the cutting mechanism moved 
from side to side on its pivots; c E. 
I have shown the above-described system 
of ropes and windlasses to operate the ma 
chine; but I do not wish to confine myself to 
this specific mechanism, as I am aware that 
many well-known mechanical devices may be 
employed to secure the required movements. 
Steam, hand, or any other power may be em 
ployed to operate the cutting and elevating 
mechanism. 
By this apparatus a bank of earth will be 
cut out by the revolving blades n, carried up 
over the cylinder T", and delivered upon the 
belt, M, and carried by it up over the drum F. 
and dumped into any suitable receptacle or 
car. I have shown a hopper-bottomed dump 
box, X, suspended beneath the upper end of 
the belt M, adapted to receive the earth and 
dump it, when required, into a car or wagon 
placed beneath it. A section of the bank as 
wide as the horizontal sweep of the cutting 
frame may be eut through, and by turning 
and guiding the machine on its wheels B B' 
BB' it may be made to cut in any direction. 
The cutting-cylinder may also be arranged to 
cut, below the level of the cart on which the 
wheels B B B B stand, if required. In Fig. 
1 the dotted line a represents the last line of 
the cut of the cutting-cylinder, and the dotted 
line : represents the cut about to be made. 
The crank-arms N' N may be made adjust 
able, to alter the cutting-point higher or lower, 
if desired. in some kinds of dry sandy soil 
the form of cutting shown in Fig. 3 may be 
used. 
Excavating-machines have before been con 
structed in which a vertically-swinging frame 
carrying an endless apron or endless chain of 
buckets was pivoted to a vertical shaft, and I 
lo not claim Such a construction. 
Having described my invention and set forth 
its merits, what I claim is 
1. !n an excavator, the combination of a 
horizontally - swinging france, a vertically 
swinging frame or bir's pivoted to the said 
franne an e Xeyating-eyilinler ou the lower | 
end of the vertically-swinging frame, and an 
endless apron mounted on the vertically 
5 
5 
60 
fy 
Swinging frame, substantially as and for the 
purpose herein specified. 
2. In an excavator, the combination of a 
horizontally - swinging frame, a vertically 
Swinging frame pivoted thereto, an excavat 
ing-cylinder mounted on the lower end of the 
vertically-swinging frame, and provided with 
a series of blades, means for projecting and 
retracting the blades in the cylinder, and an 
endless apron for receiving and delivering the 
earth from the cylinder, substantially as and 
for the purpose herein specified. 
3. In an excavator, the combination of a 
frame swung at one end so as to have a verti 
cal and transverse movement, a revolving cyl 
inder connected to the free end of said frame 
and carrying a series of blades, and means for 
projecting and retracting said blades, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In an excavator, the combination of the 
frame swung at one end in the pivoted frame, 
the revolving cylinder provided with blades 
and connected to the free end of the swinging 
frame, means for projecting and retracting said 
blades, an endless apron for removing and 
delivering the earth discharged from the cyl 
inder, and the chain and lever for raising and 
lowering and laterally moving the revolving 
cylinder, substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
5. In an excavator, the combination of a 
horizontally - swinging frame, r vertically 
swinging frame pivoted thereto, an excavat 
ing-cylinder mounted on the lower end of the 
vertically-swinging frame, an endless apron 
mounted on the vertically - swinging frame, 
means for driving the cylinder by a shaft on p 
the horizontally-swinging frame, and means 
for driving the endless apron by the shaft 
driving the excavating-cylinder, substantially 
as and for the purpose herein specified. 
6. In an excavator, the combination of a 
horizontally - swinging frame, a vertically 
swinging frame pivoted thereto, an excavat 
ing-cylinder mounted on the lower end of the 
vertically-swinging frame, and provided with 
projecting and retreating blades, an endless 
apron mounted on the verticallyswinging 
frame, and a clearing-scraper located between 
the cylinder and the endless apron, substan 
tially as and for the purpose herein specified. 
7. In an excavator, the combination of an 
excavating - cylinder mounted on the lower 
end of a vertically-swinging frame, and pro 
vided with projecting and retreating blades 
journaled on an eccentric shaft inside of the 
cylinder, and an endless apron mounted on the 
same frame, substantially as and for the pur 
pose herein specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
VALTER SOTT MORTON. 
Vinesses: 
I () is FEESER, 
{'. N. WW ()OI) WAR I). 
75 
90 
IOC 
IIO 
115 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287664.txt	(No Model.) 
W. C. G.ORDON, 
. 
ELECTRIC FIRE ALARM APPARATUS, 
No. 287,664, 
Patented Oct. 30, 1883. 
. 
. 
hill ae 
HG)2 
yaraaf 
WITNESSES: 
, 
- 
7-64. E., 
ATTORNEYS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM CLEATHER GORDON, RESIDING AT THE LANGHAM HOTEL COUNTY 
OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND. 
ELECTRIC FIRE-ALARM APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,664, dated October 30, 1888. 
Application filed April 23, 1883, (No model). Patented in England January 5, 1883, No. 78, and in France January 27, 1883, 
No. 153,384. 
- 
To all whom it may conce77 : 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM CLEATHER 
GORDON, a subject of the Queen of Great 
Britain, residing at the Langham hotel, in the 
5 county of Middlesex, England, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvement in Elec 
tric Fire-Alarm Apparatus, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
Io electric fire-alarm apparatus for hotels and 
other large buildings or structures; and it has 
for its object to enable an alarm of fire to be 
originated at any floor of a building, and the 
locality or floor from which the alarm emanated 
I5 to be indicated upon every other floor, and the 
alarm to be sounded simultaneously in various 
parts of the building, so as to call the atten 
tion of the fireman or other person in charge, 
in whatever part of the building he may hap 
2Open to be, and at the same time convey imme 
diate and precise information of the where 
about of the outbreak. 
- 
It has, further, for its object to enable all 
the indicators which have been so operated to 
25 be returned to their normal position from any 
one of them as an intimation that the fireman 
or other person in charge has heard and at 
tended to the summons. 
In order that the invention may be better 
3o understood, I will describe the same with ref. 
erence to the accompanying diagram. 
In carrying out the invention I provide upon 
every floor of the building, and in any con 
venient place, one or more indicators, A, each 
35 having as many signaling-apertures and cor 
responding signal-disks, a, asthere arefloors or 
parts of the building at which an alarm, of fire 
is to be localized. In the example shownthere 
are supposed to be five floors, and there are 
4o consequently five indicators A, each having 
five signal-disks as and upon every floor or 
other part of a building I fix a push-piece or 
other form of circuit-closer, B, in a prominent 
position to enable any person to give an early 
5 alarm in case of need; and, lastly, in suit 
able parts of the building I provide any de 
sired number of electric bells C. ' 
The electrical apparatus for actuating the 
above-mentioned signaling indicators and bells 
5o in the manner described are of special arrange 
ment, and are as follows: There are as many 
electrical circuits 1 2 3 4 5 as there are signal 
disks at in any one indicator, the said circuits 
corresponding, respectively, to the different 
floors of the building, and each passing suc-55 
cessively through the electro-magnet e in the . 
several indicators of the first, second, third, 
or other signal-disk, denoting the particular 
floor to which the circuit corresponds, and all 
these circuits are connected in multiple are 6o 
with the main leads P and N from the poles of 
the battery or batteries. Each circuit be 
tween, say, its junction with the main lead P 
and the first indicator, is carried to any con 
venient point of the floor which the signal- 65 
disks upon said circuit are appropriated to 
denote, and at this point it is broken and pro 
vided with a push-piece, B, or other contact 
maker, whereby the circuit may be closed and 
the signal-disks denoting that floor brought 7o . 
into view in all the indicators. In the circuit 
of the main lead N, between the last indicator 
of the series and the negative pole of the bat 
tery, I-interpose a number of electric bells C, 
arranged in multiple arc between the two parts 75 
NN' of the negative lead. 
In very large buildings, when it is desired 
to ring bells at opposite extremities of the 
building, I prefer to usetwobatteries, as shown 
in the diagram, and two sets of push-pieces, 
B B, and of electric bells C C, situated at 
opposite ends of the building, in which case 
I connect the positive poles of the batteries 
by a wire, P, and connect the positive leads 
PP* to the said poles and branch the negative 
lead N at a point, n, between the last indica 
tor and the two sets of bells, so that the cur 
rent will divide and pass through both sets of 
bells in returning to the negative poles of the 
two batteries. . 
In the drawing the signal-disks on the third 
floor circuit, No. 4, are represented as having 
been operated by a current whose course is in 
dicated by the dots and arrows on that circuit. 
To enable all the signal-disks which have 
been actuated to be returned to their normal 
position by closing a circuit at any one of the 
indicators, each indicator is provided with a . 
set of reversing-magnets, F, one for each sig 
nal-disk, all these magnets being arranged in IOO 
95. 
85 
- 
90 
 
2 
2s.,664 
ber of signal-disks on any one indicator, and 
series on the same circuit?, and connected at 
circuit-closers equal in number to the number 25 
one end with the lead from the negative pole 
of indicators, each circuit-closer serving to 
of one of the batteries, while a wire, f', from 
operate a signal-disk on each indicator, sub 
the other end is branched at f to push-pieces 
stantially as shown and described. 
or circuit-closers G, one upon each indicator, 
2. The combination, with a series of electri 
a wire, (, connected to the wire P", which con 
cal indicators arranged on the several floors of 3o 
nects the positive poles of the battery, being 
a building and each provided with as many 
similarly branched at of to the said push-pieces, 
signal-disks as there are floors, of electrical 
so that on the circuit being closed at any one of 
circuits corresponding in number to the num 
them a current will be passed through the 
ber of signal-disks on any one indicator, cir 
whole series of reversing-magnets F of all the 
cuit-closers equal in number to the number of 35 
indicators, and will thus return any of the 
indicators and interposed alarms, substantially 
signal-disks at which may have been previously 
thrown over to their normal position. The 
as herein shown and described. 
The foregoing specification of my improve 
signal-disks are carried by polarized needles 
pivoted so as to oscillate between the pairs of ment in electric fire-alarm apparatus signed 
actuating and reversing electro-magnets e F. by me this 28th day of February, 1883. 
WILLIAM CLEATHER GORDON. 
Witnesses: 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a series of electri 
cal indicators arranged upon several floors of 
a building and each provided with as many 
signal-disks as there are floors, of electrical Both of 17 Gracechurch Street, London, Notary's 
circuits corresponding in number to the num 
JNO. IDEAN, 
IPERCY R. GOLDRING, 
Clerks. 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287764.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 287.764. 
C, IVES, 
FIRE ESCAPE, 
Patented 0ct, 30, 1883. 
||||||| 
|||||| 
| | | 
 
 
 
 
S. 
S 
22222222222222222 
- 
- 
SSSSSSSSSSS| 
/7 (C'eve CO7. 
C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLESIVES, OF KIRKLAND, NEW YORK. 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
SRECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,764, dated cctober 30, 1888. 
- 
Application filed June 4, 1SS3. (No model.) 
- 
20 
2o aid, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLESIVES, of the 
town of Kirkland, county of Oneida, and State 
of New York, have invented and discovered a 
new and useful Improvement in Fire-Escapes, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements used 
and operated in connection withhotels and pub 
lic and private buildings of all descriptions 
Where fire-escapes may be necessary or proper, 
to be used to enable people to escape through the 
outer Windows of buildings, when prevented 
from so escaping by the ordinary methods pro 
vided for such buildings in case of fire. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figurel rep 
resents a Cross-section of the upper part of a 
building. Fig. 2 represents a front view of the 
Same. Fig. 3 represents an enlarged size of 
the drum and the fire-escape attached and the 
apparatus for retaining and releasing the fire 
escape. Fig. 4 represents an enlarged section 
of the apparatus for releasing the fire-escape. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
- 
out the Several views. 
The nature and construction of my invention 
coinsists in a flexible ladder, the side bars of 
which are constructed of ordinary chain, con 
structed of steel or wrought or malleable iron 
of sufficient strength to support the required 
weight. The chain is connected by rounds or 
steps fastened to the links of the side bars by 
means of hooks orrings. Thesize of the rounds 
is from three - eighths to one-half of an inch. 
The size can be varied to suit the convenience 
of the person using the same and the purposes. 
for which it is to be used, and about fifteen 
inches in length. This, however, may be va 
ried to suit the convenience of the person using 
the same without interfering with my inven 
tion. These rounds may beformed with a hook 
at each end of sufficient size and strength to 
fasten into the links of the side bars, and com 
pressed so as to embrace the link closely; or 
the rounds may be attached to the side bars by 
having the links of the side bars pass through 
the ends of the rounds which form the ladder 
without interfering with the usefulness of my 
invention; or a wire cable may be substituted 
in place of the chainforming the side bars. A 
So ladder thus constructed may be extended or 
35 
contracted, according to the locality where the 
same is to be used. The end of a ladder thus 
constructed is attached to a revolving drum 
located in the attic or upper part of a building, 
as indicated in Figs. 1 and 2. The drum is con- 55 
structed of wood, of sufficient size to accom 
modate the ladder when wound up. This is 
accomplished by means of a crank attached to 
the end of the shaft which supports the drum. 
The ladder, by means of this revolving drum, 6o 
can be easily taken into the building and dis 
charged from it in case of fire, as hereinafter 
described. The frame supporting the drum 
may be changed by fastening the same to the 
side of the building, or fastening to the floor, 65 
as indicated in Fig. 1, according to the con 
venience of the location where the the same is 
to be used, without interfering with my inven 
tion. The shaft to which the drum is attached 
may be of sufficient length to attach several 7o 
drums to the same, so that a series of fire-escape 
ladders may all be discharged and extended 
at one time by the same operation. The fire 
escape ladder is discharged, in case of fire, 
through an aperture in the outer Wall of the 75 - 
building, as indicated by Fig. 1, by its own 
weight when the ratchet is detached from the 
drum, as hereinafter described. The ladder, 
when attached to the drum, is coiled round 
the drum, by means of the crank attached to 8o 
the shaft, until the end of the ladder is drawn 
inside of the aperture in the outside wall of the . 
building, and is held in this position by means 
of ratchet n. Attached to this ratchet is a 
cord, wire, or rod communicating with the dif- 85 
ferent floors or rooms in the building, where 
the same is readily accessible in case of fire. 
By pulling the connection the ratchet is de 
tached from the drum, which is set in motion . 
by the weight of the ladder, and is instantly 9o 
extended by its own weight and the revolution 
of the drum. The ratchet is kept in position 
on the drum in part by a weight running over 
a pulley, as indicated in Fig. 3, and the ratchet 
is kept from the drum, in case the ladder is de- 95 
sired to be extended, by means of a Spring and 
catch, as indicated by Fig. 4. 
Various devices have been used to provide 
proper fire-escapes for buildingsin case of fire 
which disfigure the outer part of buildings. IOO 
. 
O 
45 
 
2 
e 
By the use of my invention the fire-escape lad 
der is entirely inside of the building when not 
in use, and is readily available at all times, in 
case of fire, to the inmates of the building. 
Having described the nature and construc 
tion of my invention, I will now describe it 
with reference to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
A represents the building. 
B represents the ladder extended. 
Crepresents the opening in the side of build 
ing, through which the ladder passes. 
D represents the drum, around which the 
ladder is wound or coiled when not extended 
for use. 
E represents a door or cover, which opens 
outward by means of a flexible hinge, to allow 
the ladder to escape without obstruction, and 
to close by its own weight when the ladder is 
takenin, forming a complete cover to aperture 
C in the wall. 
K represents the crank attached to the end 
of the shaft which supports the drum or drums, 
by means of which the drum is revolved, so as 
to coil the ladder when taking the same in 
after use. 
L represents a weight attached to the lower 
end of the ladder, so that the same will be read 
ily extended when the ratchet is detached from 
the drum. 
R represents a roller or round to the ladder, 
of about three inches in diameter, which rests 
against the wall at the outer edge of aperture 
C, the purpose of which is to keep the ladder 
away from the building, so that the same can 
be more readily used. 
a represents the frame, attached to the floor 
or to the wall, which supports the drum. 
at represents the weight, attached to the 
ratchet by means of a cord or chain running 
IO 
25 
35 
Over a pulley, to keep the latchet in place 
When the fire-escape is not in use. 
in represents the ratchet in place when the 
eScape is not in use. 
in represent the cord, wire, or rod attached 45 
to ratchet m, and extended to the different 
floors of the building, for the convenience of 
persons desiring the use of the fire-escape. 
frepresents the handle or knob attached to 
7. A person, by pulling handlef, will detach 5o 
ratchet m from the drum, and the fire-escape 
will then be instantly extended. 
p represents the collar attached to it. 
aca represent the spring. 
gy represents the handle of the spring. 
S represents a collar attached to n, which 
passes spring acac when the ratchet is detached 
and the fire-escape extended, and which, by 
means of s and aca, keeps the ratchet from the 
drum while the escape is being extended. 
e e represents a box surrounding n. This, 
however, may be omitted, and in may be put 
inside of the wall of the building, and handles 
so attached as to be readily accesssible to suit 
the convenience of persons desiring to use the 65 
Sae. 
What I claim as my invention and discovery 
S 
Fire-escape ladder B, in combination with 
revolving drum D, aperture C, framea, ratchet 7o 
m, connecting-rod n, handlef, collars s, spring 
aca, provided with handley, weight w, crank 
K, and door E, as and for the purposes speci 
fied. 
Signed at Utica, in the county of Oneida 75 
and State of New York. 
55 
6O 
CHARLES IWES. 
Witnesses: 
C. D. HAYES, 
JAMES I. SCOLLARD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287864.txt	(No Model.) 
OPEN HEARTH STEEL MELTING FURNACE. 
No. 287,864 
- 
Patented Nov. 6, 1883. 
C. M. RYDER. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
mRP Es 
s 
(g) 
 
a. 
S Smi E. 
SR 
ES 
Y 
 
 
* 
WITNESSES 
 
st-2 SAN 
SIEN 
M Ns. 
NSAs 
as 
s 
ANN TS 
 
 
 
% 
st 
s SS i 
25 AS wVAw 
AAASAY NS) re 
s 
A 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
C. M. RYDER. 
OPEN HEARTH STEEL MELTING FURNACE, 
No. 287,864, 
Patented Nov. 6, 1883. 
 
k 4. a 
f 
f 
a 
is 
 
s 
 
s N 
 
six 
...: 
is: s 
%y 
r 
N 
- 
WITNESSES 
ES S;:S N seases N 
s S N N NN 
af. A. a/e/Gyeow 
w 
S S 
s 
11 R, cull 
R 
A iforney. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. M. RYDER. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
OPEN HEARTH STEE, METING FURNACE. 
No. 287,864, 
Patented Nov. 6, 1883. 
 
S 
S 
SS 
af A 7. 
(2. e. 
Torney 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer washington. p. c. 
(No Model) 
... 
 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
C. M. RYDER, 
OPEN HEARTH STEEL MELTING FURNACE, 
No. 287,864. 
Patented Nov. 6, 1883. 
 
 
N 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
25 or ye- A4 
. . . . 
IWWENTOR 
Surud 
Attorney 
N. Petes. Photo-lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES M. RYDER, OF CHESTER, PENNSYLVANIA. 
OPEN. HEARTH STEEL-MELTING FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,864, dated November 6, 1883. 
-- 
. . 
. 
Application filed May 7, 1883. (No model.) 
2O quantities desired. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Chester, in the county of Delaware and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Open-Hearth 
Steel-Melting Furnaces and Casting Attach 
ments therefor; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
Io skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to animprovement in 
open-hearth steel-melting furnaces and casting 
attachments therefor, the object being to adapt 
- 15 this class of furnaces to general foundry use, 
and to simplify all operations of casting small 
articles of structural steel by an arrangement 
whereby the metal of the bath may be with 
drawn from the furnace fractionally and in the 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide means for removing the hearths of this 
class of furnaces not only for the purpose of 
facilitating all operations of repairing them 
. 25 as well as the furnace structure, but also for 
charging them with masses of metal and im 
perfect castings too large to be introduced 
gugh the charging-door of the furnace it 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide the furnace with a skimmer arranged and 
adapted to prevent the slag from being drawn 
off simultaneously with the metal. 
. With these objects in view, my invention 
35 consists in certain details of construction and 
combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in vertical section of a furnace em 
4o bodying my invention and provided with my 
improved attachments. Fig. 2 is a similar 
view, the hearth being shown in its closed po 
sition. Fig. 3 is a view of the furnacein front 
elevation, and Fig. 4 is a view showing a 
45 modified arrangement for removing and re 
placing the hearth. 
The arched roof A, the front wall, B, and 
the rear wall, C, of the furnace are suspended 
from girders D, the ends of which are support 
5o ed by the usual structures, E, embodying the 
flues arranged to convey air and gaS-blasts-to- 
the furnace. This suspension of the roof and 
walls from the girders is effected by means of 
Be it known that I, CHARLES M. RYDER, of hangers F, embracing the walls, the lower ends 
of the said hangers being attached to plates G, 55 
located under the walls, while their upper ends 
are secured to the girders aforesaid by means. 
of inverted stirrups H. 
While the devices above described answer 
all purposes, it is apparent that the suspen- 6o 
sion of the roof and walls of a furnace maybe 
effected in many other ways. 
The hearth is preferably composed of a me- . 
tallic shell, I, having a lining, J, of refractory 
material of suitable character. The shell is 65 
provided with a spout, K, with depending 
bearings L and M, and with a shelf or flange, 
N, the latter being designed to support the 
fore plate, O, constituting the sill of the charg 
ing-door of the furnace. Wheels P, journaled 7o 
in the depending bearings L., are arranged to 
register with and travel upon inclined track 
ways Q, mounted upon the supporting struct 
ure or bed R. These trackways should ex 
tend sufficiently beyond the front line of the 
casting side of the furnace to permit that dis 
placement of the hearth required for all oper 
ations of repairing and charging. The bear 
ings M are designed to be secured by pins S 
to standards T, located upon the highest part 
of the structure R aforesaid. The union of 
these parts forms a fulcrum-bearing for the 
hearth by supporting the charging side there 
of and permitting its casting side to be raised 
or lowered, as desired. These means for full 
cruming one side of the furnace may, how 
ever, be dispensed with and any equivalent 
bearing-as one of the knife-edge type-em 
ployed. While conversion is going on, the 
casting side of the hearth is supported in its 
raised or closed position by means of a plun 
ger, U, playing in a cylinder, V, in which 
hydrostatic pressure is developed by the usual 
means employed for that purpose. After con 
version and during the operation of casting, 
the said side of the hearth is raised and low 
ered, as need be, for withdrawing the metal 
fractionally and in the desired quantities by 
elevating and depressing the plunger by vary 
ing the pressure in the cylinder V aforesaid. IOO . 
For the purpose of skimming the metal as 
it is drawn off, and for retaining the slag and 
kindred impurities in the hearth, a skimmer, 
- 
| W, is employed. It isgisinted in bearings 
75 
95 
- 
Self. 
w 
 
2 
IO 
3O 
35 
X, located on opposite sides of the spout K, 
and consists of a slab of fire-brick or other 
refractory material conforming to the contour 
of the spout, and having its lower edge cut 
away for the escape of the metal. As neither 
lmetal, slag, nor impurity can escape above 
the level of the aperture in the skimmer, the 
lmetal, being of higher specific gravity, and 
Consequently floating the slag, may be drawn 
off without being mingled to any extent there 
With. As a matter of fact, a littleslag escapes 
with the metal; but it floatsin the ladle Y and 
is easily disposed of. When the body of the 
metal has been exhausted, the slag remaining 
in the hearth is withdrawn by depressing the 
Salme and removing the skimmer. 
A metallic shield, Z, suspended in front of 
the casting side of the furnace and adapted to 
be vertically adjusted, is designed to protect 
the foundry-men from the intense and blind 
ing heat thrown out by the furnace when the 
hearth is depressed. As herein shown, the 
shield is suspended by a rod, A, from a lever, 
B, provided with a counterweight, C, the 
the latter being arranged to balance the shield, 
So that it may be readily raised and lowered 
With the hearth. It is obvious that other de 
vices of equal efficiency may employed for 
handling the shield. 
The ladle Y is mounted in a fork-shaped bear 
ing, D', Secured to the underface of the casting 
side of the hearth. Abail, E, arranged to bese 
cured to the ladle in the usual manner, adapts it 
to belifted from its bearings by the craneF, for 
the purpose of conveying it to molds distrib 
uted over the foundry-floor, and for return. 
ing it.S Contents to the metal in the hearth 
when such a course is desirable. The ladle 
is further provided with the ordinary stopper, 
G, fitting into the pouring-hole H', from 
Which the metal issues into the spout I", the 
Same being swiveled upon a column, J, as 
shown. A turn-table, K, elevated above the 
floor of the casting-pit on pillars L(, supports 
the molds M', the table being rotated by any 
suitable means to bring the molds within 
range of the spout. As fast as the molds are 
filled, they are replaced by others, the opera 
tion of pouring and handling thefilled and un 
filled molds being conducted simultaneously. 
In case it is desired to pour very large cast 
ings, the ladle-spout and turn-table are re 
moved, the metal being conveyed directly 
from the furnace to molds located in the cast 
ing-pit by means of suitable conduits or spouts. 
The hearth is operated on the trackways Q. 
by means of a chain, N', connecting it with 
the plunger P of the cylinder Q, which is lo 
cated beneath the charging-floor of the fur 
lnace, and provided with the usual means for 
developing hydrostatic pressure. When it is 
desired to displace the hearth for any of the 
purposes mentioned, the plunger U is de 
pressed to allow the hearth to descend and the 
wheels P to engage with the trackways afore 
said. This done, the pins S, uniting the bear 
ings M and standards T, are removed, leaving 
. 
the hearth free to run down the said track 
ways as the pressure in the cylinder is grad 
ually decreased. When thus displaced the 
hearth may be relieved or otherwise repaired, 
or charged with masses of metal and imper 
fect castings too large to beintroduced through 
the charging-door of the furnace-structure, 
and, although of desirable quality, but little 
used on account of the difficulty of breaking 
them up. This displacement of the hearth 
also accelerates the cooling of the furnace and 
renders it readily accessible for repairs. When 
the object prompting the displacement of the 
hearth has been accomplished, it is drawn up . 
the inclined trackway by increasing the press 
ure in the cylinder Q. When in position unt 
der the furnace-structure, the bearings M and 
standards T are reunited by the pins S, and 
the casting side of the hearth raised to place 
by the plunger U. As the hearth is drawn 
up under the furnace on an incline, masses of 
metal or large castings will not engage With 
the front wall, B, of the furnace-structure and 
injure it. 
Instead of handling the hearth by the plun 
gers shown and described, a hydraulic crane, 
R, and connections S', arranged as shown in 
Fig. 4 of the drawings, may be employed. In 
such case two removable columns T are used 
to support the casting side of hearth during 
conversion. 
If desired, arrangements may be made fol 
conducting the operations of charging and 
casting on the same side of the hearth, either 
side being capable of being so used. Instead, 
also, of employing the power of Water under 
pressure to elevate and depress the hearth, the 
same may be counterweighted and operated 
by a slight expenditure of power applied in 
any desired manner. I would therefore haye 
it understood that I do not limit myself to the 
exact construction shown and described, but 
hold myself at liberty to make such changes 
and alterations as fairly fall within the Spirit 
and scope of my invention. 
I am aware that it is old to suspend the 
hearth of a glass-furnace by chains running 
over pulleys attached to the furnace-structure, 
whereby the hearth is adapted to be lowered. 
in a vertical line from the furnace, and to be 
tilted for the purpose of pouring out its con 
tents. I do not, therefore, broadly claim a full 
nace provided with a hearth adapted to be re 
moved and tilted, but only a specific con 
struction for accomplishing these results. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letter's 
Patent, is 
1. In an open-hearth steel-melting furnace, 
the combination, with a structure forming the 
sidewalls and top thereof, and ahearth located 
under said structure, of fixed bearings adapted 
to have one side of the hearth detachably full 
crumed to them, and means to raise and lower 
the unsupported side of the hearth, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In an open-hearth steel-melting furnace, 
75 
85 
95 
iOO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
I 30 
w 
2s, so 4 
. 
- 
45 
8. In an open-hearth steel-melting furnace, 5O 
3 
ing and lowering the unsupported side of the 
hearth, a ladle to receive the metal running 
from the hearth when lowered, and means to 
lift the said ladle for returning its contents to 
the hearth, substantially as set forth. 
-7. In an open-hearth steel-melting furnace, 
a hearth adapted to be depressed and dis 
placed laterally with respect to the Walls and 
top of the furnace, substantially as set forth. 
the combination, with a hearth adapted to be 
depressed and displaced laterally with re 
spect to the walls and top of the furnace, of 
an inclined trackway located under and ex 
tending beyond the casting side of the hearth, 55 
and means for operating the hearth on the 
said trackway, substantially as set forth. 
9. The combination, with an open-hearth 
steel-melting furnace having a removable 
hearth, of an inclined trackway located under 6o 
and extending beyond the casting side of the 
hearth, and means to lower the hearth upon 
and to elevate it above the trackway, and to 
operate it thereon, substantially as set forth. 
. 
. 
10. In an open-hearth steel-melting furnace, 65 
the combination, with a hearth adapted to be 
depressed and displaced laterally with respect 
to the walls and top of the furnace, of an in 
clined trackway located under and extending 
beyond the casting side of the hearth, and 7O 
means to apply hydrostatic pressure to Oper 
ate the hearth upon the trackway, substan 
tlally as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib-75 . 
ing Witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES M. RYDER. 
- . 
G. F. DOWNING, 
S. G. NOTTINGHAM, 
. 
2O stantially as set forth. 
the combination, with a structure forming the 
side walls and top thereof, and a hearthlocated 
under the said structure, of fixed bearings 
adapted to have one side of the hearth de 
5 tachably fulcrumed to them, and the described 
hydraulic piston impinging on the under face 
of the unsupported side of the hearth, and ar 
ranged to raise and lower the same, substan 
tially as set forth. 
Io 3. In an open-hearth steel-melting furnace, 
the combination, with a structure forming the 
side walls and top thereof, and a hearth located 
under said structure, of fixed bearings ar 
ranged to have one side of the hearth detacha 
I5 bly fulcrumed to them, an inclined trackway 
located under the furnace, and extending be 
yond the casting side thereof, and means to 
lower the hearth upon and to elevate it above 
the trackway, and to operate it thereon, sub 
4. In an open-hearth steel-melting furnace, 
the combination, with the side walls and top 
thereof, of a hearthhaving oneside supported 
and the other free to be raised and lowered, 
25 means to operate the unsupported side of the 
hearth, and a ladle mounted on bearings at 
tached to the hearth, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with an open-hearth 
steel-melting furnace provided with a hearth 
3o having one side supported and the other free 
to be raised and lowered, of means to operate 
the unsupported side of the hearth, a fork 
shaped bearing attached thereto, and a ladle 
removably mounted in said bearing, substan 
6. In an open-hearth steel-melting furnace, 
the combination, with a structure forming the 
side walls and top thereof, and a hearth located 
under the said structure, and having one side 
4o fulcrumed in fixed bearings, of means for rais 
35 tially as set forth. 
- 
N. 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US287965.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 287,965. 
B. F. RIX. 
HARROW. 
Patented Nov. 6, 1883. 
 
(7. 
(7% 
f, as 
Aaa/e772 or 
N. PETES, hat-Lithographer. Washington. E. c. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMEN F. RIX, OF KALAMAZOO, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-THIRD 
TO MARY H, KIPP, OF SAME PLACE. 
HARRow. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 287,965, dated November 6, 1883. 
Application filed May 
19, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern. . . 
Beit known that I, BENJAMIN F. RIX, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Kalama 
zoo, county of Kalamazoo, State of Michigan, 
have invented a new and useful Harrow, of 
which the following is a specification, 
My invention has for its object certain im 
provements in harrow-teeth, and in the means 
for connecting them with the frame. 
In the drawingsforming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a side elevation; Fig. 2, 
a side elevation of a differently-constructed 
tooth, introduced for the purpose hereinafter 
explained; Figs. 3 and 4, broken portions en 
larged, showing a front and rear view in per 
spective; Fig. 5, a section on line 22 in Fig. 
1 in perspective. 
The hinged supporting-bar c, with which 
the tooth is connected, is made all in one 
piece-that is, the upright part, with which 
the tooth is connected by a bolt, e, is provided 
with an integrally-formed base consisting of 
the hinging-eyes t t and the loop v, which sur 
rounds the tooth. The bar c is hinged to the 
25 frame B, in the usual manner, by bolt in. Such 
a construction is easily and cheaply made, 
compared with former tooth-Supports, and 
the operation of connecting the tooth there 
with greatly facilitated. 
In constructing the tooth D a portion of the 
bow a little above the lower end is formed 
vertically concaved from the rear side, with 
the front edge or apex, a, of the convex side 
describing a straight line, Fig. 1, while the 
curved configuration of the edges remains the 
same throughout, as in a bowed tooth not hav 
ing the improvement, Figs. 1 and 2. The 
lower or working end of the tooth is not con 
vexed. The tooth receives its elastic effect 
from the spring on rod A. Many useful re 
sults are attained in the operation of such a 
tooth, aside from ease in draft and beneficial 
effects on the soil, a prominent one of which 
is that the tooth, when intercepting a root or 
45 obstruction, ac, swings back and upward quicker i 
3O 
. 
5 5. 
and farther during a given movement of the 
harrow than a tooth having a like bow, Fig. 
2, without the improvement in Fig. 1. The 
same forward movement of the harrow is shown 
in each of these figures, the dotted position 
showing the normal condition of the parts 
when at rest, with the tooth having just met 
the root ar. Said root is located at the same 
vertical distance below the harrow-frame B. 
The difference in upward swing of the teeth 
is illustrated by the difference in distance be 
tween the dotted line at and the dotted end r. 
When the harrow in each figure is moved 
on ahead, the tooth in Fig. 2 will hang to the 
root ac, while the tooth in Fig. 1 will continue 
to swing up until the working end is met, 
when, owing to the angle of the bow at that 
time, it will readily pass over the root. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
I. In a harrow, a tooth-Support consisting 
of the flat upright portion, provided with a 
base integrally, formed therewith, said base 
having the two lugs on one side horizontally 
perforated, and the loop 
on the other side 
a vertical opening, substantially as set 
having 
forth. 
2. A bowed harrow-tooth having the coln 
vexed portion on the inner side of the bow, 
above the working end, the apex thereof de- 75 
scribing a straight line, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. A bowed tooth vertically concaved from 
the rear, above the working end, forming a 
convex portion on the inside of said bow, the 8o 
apex of which is straight, while the curve of 
the edges of the bow is undisturbed, substan 
tially as specified and shown. 
In testimony of the foregoing I have here 
unto subscribed my name in the presence of 85 
two witnesses. 
7C 
. 
BENJAMIN FRANKLIN RIX. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN H. CHASE, 
N. O. NETEBROCK, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288065.txt	(No Model). 
----- 
J. R. KING. 
COMBINED PAPER WEIGHT, CALENDAR, AND PEN RACK. 
No. 288,065, 
Patented Nov. 6, 1883. 
EOINZLAYZE 
E 5AT.3 UN. MONTUE WED THU Y FRIE 
1. 
8 9 0 11 191514 
15 1617 1819 9021 
 
4 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
WITNESSES : 
(2-, 3-2 
25 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
N. Peters, Photo-ithographer, washington.p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSLAS R. KING, OF ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
RICHARD W. JOHNSON AND NATHAN MYRICK, OF SAME PLACE. 
coMBINED PAPER-WEIGHT, CALEN DAR, AND PEN-RACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,065, dated November 6, 1883. 
Application filed June 1, 1883. (No model.) 
- 
- 
w 
To all whom, it invay concern : 
Beit known that I, JoSIAs R. KING, of St. 
Paul, in the county of Ramsey and State of 
Minnesota, haveinvented a new and Improved 
Combined Paper - Weight, Calendar, Pen 
Rack, &c., of which the following is a fill, 
clear, and exact description. 
- 
This invention pertains to improvements in 
a combined paper-weight, calendar, pin-cush 
ion, pen-rack, &c.; and it consists of the here 
inafter described and claimed combination and 
arrangement of parts. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved com 
bined paper-weight, calendar, pen-rack, &c. 
Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional elevation of the same 
on the line at a, Fig. 1. 
A box or casing, A, is provided with a front 
board, B, which is inclined upward, and from 
the front toward the rear end of the box, on 
which board B a calendar sheet or table is 
produced, which is divided into seven col 
umns, containing the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 
and 7 at the heads, the numbers 8, 9, 10, &c., 
in the second row, and so on. A glass pane, 
D, covers the sheet on board B. At its upper 
end, and directly above the table, the sheet or 
board is provided with a longitudinal slot, E, 
through which a roller, F, can be seen, which 
is journaled in the box directly below the slot, 
which roller is provided at one end with a 
handle-knob, G, for turning it. 
On the sur 
face of the roller F the first syllables or ini 
tials of the seven days of the week are pro 
duced in seven longitudinal rows, the initials 
or syllables being shifted one space for each 
following longitudinal row, so that by turn 
ing the roller F the initial letter or syllable of 
any desired day can be brought above the 
numeral 1, the other initial syllables corre 
 
sponding. At the upper end of the inclined 
sheet or board B a vertical or inclined front 45 
board, H., extends to the top of the box, which 
board His provided with a longitudinal slot, 
J, and is covered by a pane, K, of glass. Be 
hind the slot J a large roller, L, is journaled 
in the box A, which roller is provided at one 5o 
end with a handle-knob, M. On the face of 
the roller the names of the month are pro 
duced in twelve successive longitudinal rows, 
so that by turning the roller Lthe name of any 
month can be brought behind the slot J. A. 55 
longitudinal box, N, is formed on the top of 
the box A along the rear edge of the same, and 
in the said box N a cushion, O, is fastened for 
receiving pins, needles, &c. Two upwardly 
projecting arms, P, are secured to the front of 6o 
the box at the ends, and between the said arms 
and the pin-cushion box. N. pens, pencils, &c., 
can be placed. The box serves as a paper 
weight. The calendar is perpetual, as the 
roller F can easily be adjusted, so that the 65 
initials of the first week of the month will show 
in the slot E. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The combination, with the box A, having 
an almanac-table, B, and a front board, H, 
provided with the slots E. J, respectively, of 
the roller F, journaled in the box and behind 
the slot E, the said roller having produced 75 
thereon the initial letters or syllables of the 
days of the week, and of the roller L, jour 
naled in the box and behind the slot J, the 
said roller having the names of the months pro 
duced on its surface, substantially as herein 8o 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
- 
JOSIAS R. KING, 
Witnesses: 
I. N. CARDOZO, 
ALEX. RAMSEY, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288165.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 288,165. 
 
H. D. COWLEs. 
DIE FOR CUTTING NAILS, 
Patented Nov. 6, 1883. 
 
N. PETERs, Phobo-lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARLEY D. COWLES, OF BRIGHTON PARK, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO F. W. 
BEALE, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, 
DE FOR cutti NGNALS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,165, dated November 6, 1883. 
Application filed August 14, 1883. (No model.) 
2O Fig. 3 is an end view of a single piece or plate, as to cut horizontally. 
7o 
Io the dies for cutting the same; and the objects punch. Each reduced portion of the die- 6o 
5 Illinois, have invented certain new and use- row die-plates from spreadingsidewise. These 55 
a press or other suitable machine, and they 65 
manner as the plates betweenthem, are slabbed 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARLEY D. Cow LEs, a off so as to fit closely to the outside plates of 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brigh- the gang, as shown in said Fig. 2, and there 
ton Park, in the county of Cook and State of by prevent the reduced portions of the aar 
ful Improvements in the Manufacture of Nails, pieces B B are made shorter than the plates 
of which the following is a specification. 
between them, as shown in Fig. 4, so that this 
Myinvention relates to improvements in the gang of dies may enter the spaces between the 
manufacture of cut nails, spikes, &c., and in plates in the companion gang and act as a 
of my improvements are to more conveniently plates acts as a punch, while the space between 
construct the dies, and to cut the nails more each two adjoining die-plates acts as a die. 
expeditiously, and in such manner that the Any suitable arrangement may be provided 
grain of the iron will run lengthwise with the for clamping or holding these gangs of dies in 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure J is may be placed with one gang directly over 
a plan view of the face or cutting end of one the other, so as to cut vertically, as shown in 
gang of my dies. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the Fig. 4; or, if desired, they may be set face to 
non-cutting end of the companion gang of dies. face, with their faces in a vertical position, so 
a series of which form a gang of my dies. 
In forming the die-plates their reduced parts 
will be made thinner at the non-cutting end 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the two gangs o 
than at their faces or cutting end, so that the 
dies in proper position relatively to each other 
spaces between them will free the nails and 
for cutting, and Fig. 5 is a diagram represent 
prevent them from clogging within the die. 75 
ing the manner of cutting the stock. 
I form my dies from steel plates by slabbing These dies may be used for cutting nails from 
off the sides near one edge, so as to leave a a long strip of metal whose width is equal to 
narrow middle portion which in edge view the length of the nail to be cut, and for this 
is substantially of the form of the nail to be purpose gages may be provided substantially 
steel represented in Fig. 3. A gang of these dated December 9, 1873. After the cutting 
plates of any desired number are placed side has commenced, the strip may be placed with 
by side, as represented in Figs. I and 2. In its end projecting over the last die a sufficient 
order to hold the plates in unison, I have distance to form the piece cut off from the end 
splines a, as clearly shown in Figs. 1, 2, and and described in said patent. It is well known 
3. If desired, instead of these grooves and that in plate or sheet metal the grain of the 
splines, the plates, after being properly set iron runs lengthwise with the bars or plates. 
together, may be drilled through transversely If the nails are cut from a strip of rolled metal 
or rods. Upon the sides of one gang I place impaired, and it is necessary to use a superior 
thicker plates A, which are slabbed off, the quality of iron. If the nails are so cut as to 
same as the other plates, but upon one side have the grain of the iron run lengthwise of 
only, which thick pieces perfect and complete, the nail, a much cheaper grade of iron may be 
of the same length as the narrower plates, nails. With the dies arranged in gangs, as here. 
and also forming a part of the cutting-edge of inbefore described, I can easily cut the nails so 
the die. By the side of the companion gang as to have the grain of the iron run length 
of dies I also place thicker plates B, which wise, by first cutting a strip whose width is 
35 grooved the sides of the plates and inserted of the strip into a nail, substantially as shown 85 
3o cut, as shown by the lower end of the plate of the same as shown in my Patent No. 145,336, 8o 
4o and held in proper relative position by a rod crosswise to this grain, their strengthis greatly go 
45 the gang of dies, said thicker plates A. being used and produce equally as good or better 95 
5o plates,instead of being slabbed off in the same about equal to the Width of the gang of dies Ion 
N 
I5 nail. 
S. 
 
 
 
ir. 
 
g 
2ss, 165 
into short pieces of the length of one nail, as 
indicated by the transverse broken lines on 
the metal strip, Fig. 5. These strips are then 
stacked one above the other in a suitable hop 
5 per, and one by one placed between the dies 
and up against the gages, after which the dies 
are brought together and cut the whole piece 
into nails at a single blow, as indicated by the 
broken lines at the left-hand end of Fig. 5. 
Io. In thus cutting the nails with this gang of dies 
part of the nails pass through the spaces be 
tween One gang of dies, and part of them pass 
in the opposite direction through the spaces 
between the companion gang of dies. 
I intend to provide a simple arrangement 
upon the press or machine which will auto 
matically push one plate over the gang of dies 
for every motion of the press or machine; but 
the plates may be pushed over the dies and 
15 
2O up against the gage by hand. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The gang of dies for cutting nails, consist 
ing of a series of plates having a reduced por 
tion whose contourin end view is substantially 
the same as the nail to be cut, said plates be- 25 
ing suitably fastened together, substantially 
as described, and for the purpose specified. 
2. The herein-described dies, consisting of 
two gangs of plates having a reduced portion 
whose contour in end view is substantially the 3o 
same as the nail to be cut, and the thicker side 
plates, A.A. and BB, respectively formed with 
relation to the plates between them, Substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
. . 
. 
- 
HARLEY D. COWLES. : 
Witnesses: 
HARRY A. WILLs, 
MATTHEW LARNEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288265.txt	(No Model.) 
C. F. SHOURDS, 
TOY, 
No. 288,265. 
Patented Nov. 13, 1883. 
A27 A 
22Zzzes:ses 
22% 
--- 
Z722/e7zzaz 
- 
. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
CHARLES F. SHOURDS, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
TOY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,265, dated November 13, 1888. 
Application fled March 22, 1883. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs F. SHOURDs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
ark, county of Essex, and State of New Jersey, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Toys, (described in my application 
dated December 23, 1882,) of which improve 
ments the following is a clear and concise de 
Scription. 
In said application said toy is a device for 
the production of various colors by a disk ro 
tated by the torsion of a string or strings. 
My improvement consists in a method of 
simplifying the means by which this result is 
In the annexed drawings, Ain Figurel rep 
resents a disk, and B a screen or shield, both 
disk A. and screen or shield B being operated 
by the string or stirings CC, as shown in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 2 shows the operation of disk A and 
screen or shield B by the torsion of string or 
strings C C. 
Fig. 3 represents a sectional view, showing 
the arrangement of disk A and screen or 
shield Bupon the string or strings C C. 
Fig. 4 represents the disk A, merely show 
ing an arrangement of colors upon its surface. 
The operation of the toy as shown in Fig. 2 
attained. 
- 
5 
IO 
25 
is as follows: The colored disk. A being secured 
to the string or strings C C and being rotated 3o 
by the torsion of the same, and the screen or 
shield B being also secured to said string or 
strings, in position as shown in Fig. 3, tends to 
produce various combinations of colors by the 
exposure, during the rotation of the disk A 35 
and screen or shield B, of varying parts of the 
colored disk A through the gradual changing . 
of the relative positions of the disk A and 
screen or shield B by the twisting of that part 
of the string or strings between said disk and 4o 
screen, as also shown in Fig. 3. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I desire to claim and secure by Letters Pat 
entis- 
- 
1. The screen or shield B, secured to the 45 
string or strings C C, in combination with 
disk A. 
2. The securing of the gradual changing of 
the relative positions of the screen and shield 
B during the rotation of the same by the twist- 5o 
ing of the part of the string between the disk 
A and screen or shield B. 
- 
CHAS. F. SFOUROS. 
Witnesses: 
F. W. LEONARD, 
F. M. MCDERMIT, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288365.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 288,365. 
J. RISSEY & W. J, HORTON. 
HORSE DETACHEB. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
- Patented Nov. 13, 1883. 
III. 
 
WITNESSES - 
I've Tops, 
Attorney. 
F. peries. Photo-Lithographer. Washingtot.. C. 
y 
(No Model.) 
J. RISSEY & W. J. HORTON. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
HORSE DETACHER. 
Patented Nov. 13, 1883. 
3S3S32,622 
a f 15 
rxxx 
 
 
Attorney. 
N. FEERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN RISSEY AND WILLIAM J. HORTON, 
OF HALIFAX, NOVA SCOTIA, 
r. 
CANADA. 
HORSE-DETACHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,865, dated November 18, 1888. 
Application filed August 17, 1883. (No model.) 
25 
Io 
... operation, and general efficiency. 
To all whon, it Tally concern. 
Be it known that we, JOHN RISSEY and 
Witt AM J. HORTON, subjects of the Queen 
of Great Britain, residing at Halifax, in the 
s 
Province of Nova Scotia, and Dominion of 
Canada, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Horse-Detachers; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable other's skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to devices for detach 
ing horses from vehicles; and its object is to 
provide a device of this class that can be easily 
applied to single or double carriages, sleighs, 
and Cther vehicles now in use, and which pos 
sesses superior advantages in point of sim 
plicity, inexpensiveness, durability, ease of 
... 20. In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the front part of a vehicle equipped 
with our invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view of 
the same, showing the operation of the de 
taching mechanism in dotted lines. Fig. 3 is 
a vertical central longitudinal sectional view 
thereof. Fig. 4 is a vertical transverse sec 
tonal view taken through the whiffletree. 
Fig. 5 is a detail perspective view of one end 
of the whiffletree and the trace-holding mech 
anism. Fig. 6 is a rear view of the front axle 
of the vehicle. 
Referring to the drawings, A. designates the 
front axle of the vehicle, which carries the 
wheels B B, and to which the thills C C are 
connected in any suitable manner. The thills 
carry a transverse bar, D, on which the Whif. 
fletree E is swiveled by a pin, F, on which lat 
ter works a longitudinally-disposed sliding 
bar, G, having the slot H, inclosing the said 
pin, and pivoted at its rear end, I, to a loop 
or collar, J, that is arranged to inclose the axle 
A and slide in a plane at right angles to the 
axle. This collar 
is Secured to a rearward 
ly-bowed brake-spring, K, which extends 
across the rear face of axle A, and is provided 
with slots L at its ends, that accommodate 
guide-pins MM, projecting from the axle, 
whereby the ends of the spring are adapted to 
... .. bind against the inner faces of the hubs NN 
of wheels B B when the device is operated. 
5O. 
30 
45 
aw 
35 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- - 
- 
An operating-lever, O, is fulcrumed, as at 
P, to the body of the vehicle, preferably just 
in front of the dash-board, and is pivotally. 
connected to the bar or rod G, as shown at Q. 
RR are sliding plates that are arranged one 
at each end of the whiffletree, and are each 
provided with end slots, S S, that receive 
guide-pins TT, projecting from the whiffle 
These plates RR are connected at their 
tree. 
inner ends to the rod G by pivoted connecting 
plates or rods U. At their outer ends these 
plates are provided with two downwardly-ex 
tending flanges, VW, the inner one of which, 
V, has a perforation, X, to receive a trace 
pin, Y, projecting from the end of the whiffle 
tree, while the outer flange, W, has a screw 
threaded perforation, Z, in which works the 
stem of a set-screw, A, that has a shoulder, 
B', to limit its inward adjustment against the 
end of the pin Y, and is provided with an end 
plate or head, C. Normally the flange V will 
be against the end of the whiffletree, the trace 
will be connected on pin Y, and the screw. A 
will be adjusted with the plate C against the 
pin Y, to retain the trace on the same. 
DD designate the traces, and Ethe breech 
ing of the harness. The latter is connected to 
a loop or buckle, F, on a ring, G, that is ar 
ranged on the thills, and is formed with a 
convex or rounded inner edge, H, to facilitate 
its sliding off the thills when the horse is de 
tached. The back-band I of the harness, is 
provided with a loop or ring, J, by which its 
is arranged on the thills, and is connected by 
a chain or cord, K, with the breeching-ring 
G. By this arrangement the breeching can 
be more readily slipped onto the thills, its 
movement on the latter being limited by sta 
tionary rings or flanges L. 
The operation and advantages of our inven 
tion will be readily understood. To detach 
the horse in case of accident, or when it is de 
sired to unhitch, it is only necessary to draw 
the lever Otoward one's self, when sitting in the 
seat of the vehicle, when rod G will be carried 
forward with the collar J, the spring-brake K 
will be brought against the hubs of the wheels 
to stop the vehicle, the plates R.R. will be 
forced outwardly by rods U U, so that the 
flanges V V will carry the traces off pins YY, 
55 
75 
90 
IOO 
2. 
2SS,365 
and the horse will be instantly disconnected, axle, substantially as and for the purpose "Set 45 
when the breeching and back-band rings will 
slide off the thills, so that the horse will be 
entirely free from the vehicle. By our inven 
5 tion the horse can be instantly disconnected 
at any time by simply pulling on the lever, 
and the vehicle will be simultaneously braked, 
and the mechanism will not in the slightest 
degree interfere with the free swing of the 
to whiffletree; nor will any movement of the 
whiffletree interfere with the effective opera 
tion of the mechanism. 
forth. 
4. The combination of the axle, the wheels 
thereon, the longitudinally-disposed operat 
ing-rod, the lever connected thereto, and the 
bowed spring extending along the axle, and 5O 
having sliding bearings thereon, so that its 
ends will come against the inner faces of the 
hubs, substantially as and for the purpose set 
5. The combination, with the wheels of the 55 
forth. 
- 
We claim as our invention 
1. A horse - detacher comprising sliding 
15 plates carrying means for retaining and dis 
connecting the traces, a sliding operating-rod 
connected with said plates, and brake mech 
anism secured to the rod and adapted to be 
operated thereby simultaneously with the 
plates, substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
2. The combination of the axle of the ve 
hicle carrying the wheels, the whiffletree, 
plates sliding thereon, and having mechanism 
25 at their outer ends for disconnecting the traces, 
a longitudinally. disposed sliding operating 
rod, rods pivotally connecting the latter with 
the plates, and a rearwardly-bowed brake 
spring secured to the operating-rod, and hav 
ing sliding bearings on the axle, in relation to 
which latter it is arranged longitudinally, so 
that its ends will come against the hubs of the 
wheels, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
3. The combination of the axle having the 
wheels, the whiffletree having the end trace 
pins, plates sliding on the whiffletree, and 
having the end flanges, the loop or collar 
around the axle, an operating-rod pivotally 
4o connected to the collar, rods connecting the 
operating-rod and the plates, an operating 
lever connected with said operating-rod, and 
the rearwardly-bowed brake-spring secured to 
the collar, and having sliding bearings on the 
35 
vehicle, of a brake-spring connected with up 
erating mechanism and acting against the in 
ner face of the hubs, substantially asset forth. 
6. The combination, with the whiffletree 
having a trace-pin projecting from its end, of 6o 
a sliding trace-detaching plate having two end 
flanges, one of which (the inner flange) has a 
perforation to receive the pin, while the outer 
flange has a screw-threaded perforation and a 
set-screw working in the latter to secure the 65 
trace in position, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
7. The combination of the whiffletree hav 
ing the end trace-pins, the plates sliding there 
on, and provided with the end flanges, the lon 
gitudinally-disposed operating rod or bar, the 
pivoted rods connecting the latter to the plates, 
and the operating-lever connected to said rod, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
stationary rings or flanges, the sliding rings 
carrying the breeching, the rings or loops car 
irying the back-band, and the chains or cords 
connecting the said rings, all combined and . 
operating substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
8. In a horse-detacher, the thills having the 75 
JOHN RISSEY. 
WILLIAM J. HORTON. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. H. FERGUSON, 
ROBERT HARRIS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288465.txt	 
(No Model.) 
* 
, 
N0. 288,465, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. L. MATHEWS, 
W00L OILING MACHINE, 
Patented Nov. 13, 1883, 
 
 
| 
 
 
| 
S | 
N 
2See 
? 
A? 
A 
W 
 
 
 
S 
G 
SA 
SISSA 
46/24/26 
673266F2462463124 
57 
V 
7 
A 
Z 
S7/4 
N-Y : INWENTOR. 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERs, Photo-Littographer, Washiristorm. D. G. 
(No Model.) 
No. 288,465. 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
J. L. MATHEWS. 
W 00L, 0 ILING MACHINE, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov, 13, 1883. 
Pi??S||||||| 
FAMILITUMEKUULUKUIHIIRTHEIDINI 
FUNK 
~ 
Y 
- 
NS: 
".JS 
SIS 
SSS 
4 
 
WITNESSES: 
Za: 2%2%6 
Era -- 
AK KAY 
4/44/EEEEEE; 
Rs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D. C. 
J. L. MATHEWS. 
W00 0THING MACHINE 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 13, 1883. 
(No Model.) 
No. 288,465. 
| YN 
YN YNaYa 
 
 
 
// "MY" 
N 
WYAVAM 
NKAY)2 
 
 
 
  
WITNESSES: 
BEHEES. 
1^^*-Ka?gale 
; 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN L. MATHEWS, OF WEST TROY, NEW YORK. 
WOOL- O ILI NG MACH IN E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,465, dated November 13, 1883. 
Application filed March 10, 1883. (No model.) 
?O 
I 5 
25 
. 
, 
65 
To all avhom, ii may concern : 
A belt, f, transmits motion from the flanged 
pulley F to the large pulley. G, and another 
Be it known that I, JOHN L. MATHEWs, of 
West Troy, in the county of Albany, and State 
endless belt or band, e, transmits motion fro?n 
of New York, have invented certain new and } the grooved pulley E to another pulley, H, in 55 
the upper part of the machine, which pulley , 
useful Improvements in Wool- Oiling Ma 
H has a Wrist-pin, h. 
chines; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
Upon the shaft g of the large pulley G is 
fixed a sprocket-wheel, I, and also the rear 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
apron drum or rcller, Q, between which and 
the front apron-roller, Q, the endless apron Q 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying i drawings, which form a 
| is Suspended. 
This apron, which may be of 
part of this specification, and in which  
canvas or any other suitable material, is con 
Figures 1 and 2 are perspective views of my. 
siderably higher at the backpart of the ma 
machine, taken from opposite sides. 
Fig. 3 
chine than at the front, for the purpose of al 
lowing agreaterfall behind, and thereby giving 
is a longitudinal vertical section of the same. 
Fig. 4 is a rear elevation with a portion of the || room for the discharge of a larger quantity of 
back part of the oil-chamber broken away to | wool. The shaft of the front roller, Q', has a 
show the arrangement of the float and s?pply 
sprocket-wheel, J, to which a rotary motion 
valve. Fig. 5 is a detail view of one of the | is transmitted by an endless chain, K, which 7o 
engages the sprocket-wheel I on shaft g. The 
oil-feedingsprings detached from the machine, 
apron, with its drums or rollers, is mounted 
and Fig. 6 is a vertical cross-section of the 
machine through the broken line marked ac ar . 
between the sides S of a casingformed by said 
sides and the back plate, S'. At the top of the 
- in Fig.3. i 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
latter, a little distance below roller Q, is fixed 
sponding parts in all the figures. . . 
the clearer-comb R, the teeth ir of which pro 
ject outwardly, and are for the purpose of 
My invention:relates to machines for oiling 
wool-stock, or  wool-oiling machines, and |clearing the apron of any stock that may ad 
being 
has for its object to provide for an even and 
here to it and prevent the same from 
well-equalized distribution of the oil onto the 
carried under the apron. 
stock, and for the regulation of the quantity 
To the inside of the back plate, S, is fixed a 
bent plate, s, the lower end of which overlaps 
of oil to be supplied to the stock fed to the 
| the removable drip-pain T, which slides upon 
machine according to the nature of the stock 
ways t, bolted to the frame of the machine be 
to be treated. Ina machine of this class these 
are the two most important requirements; and | low the side pieces, S S, of the apron-casing. 
to this end my improvement consists in the || This plate or deflector s conducts the drip 
construction and arrangement of prts where 
pings from the apron, if any, asit passes over 
by I accomplish these results. 
roller Q, down into the drip-pan, which also 
receives the drippings from the apron, if any, 
On the four sheets of drawings hereto an 
nexed, Ais the frame of the machine, which || on its return travelbetween rollers Q and Q'. 
is bypreference of cast-iron, of the shape 
By reference to Fig. 6 of the drawings it will 
be seen that the sides of the dirip-pan Tpass 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2 of the drawings, each 
outside of the casing plates S S, so that there 
side having an extension, A, on which the oil 
tank is supported. Journald in boxes A in | is no possibility of any part of the oil dirip 
| ping outside of the pan intended for its col 
the lower part of the fram?lis the drive-shaft, 
B, on one end of which is a loose pulley, C', 
lection. 
a?d a fixed pulley, C, while upon its opposit | 
U is the oil tank or reservoir, which rests 
upon the extended portions A of the frame. 
end is fixed a sheave or grooved pulley, E, 
and a flanged pulley, F. 
In the top of the tank is fixed a strainer, u, 
D is a belt-shifter, which is operated by an 
through which , the tank is filled, a hinged 
arm, d, extending out Wardly in front of the 
cover, U', being placed over the strainer. In 
the bottom of the tank is a valve, V, through 
machine. 
75 
.. 
95 
IOO 
35 
45 
: 
: 
: 
| 
 
2 SS,465 
3 
W 
er of a wool-oiling machine, of a set or series 
of springs or fingers bearing with their inner 
ends against the roller, agraduated barin front 
of the roller, upon which said springs orfingers 
are fastenedladjustably and removably, adjust 
able bearings in which said bar slides, means 
or mechanism for reciprocating or vibrating 
the bar in its bearings, and a fixed frame or 
support fortheadjustable bar-bearings, where 
by the pressure of the springs or fingers against 
the roller may be regulated by the adjustment 
of the bar and its bearings upon the frame, 
substantially as and for the purpose shown and 
set forth. 
5. The feed-springs k, consisting each of the 
fiat strip 1, pointed at its lower end, arm 2, and 
slotted box 3, having set-screw 4, substantially 
as and for the purpose shown and set forth. 
6. The combination " of the reciprocating 
graduated bar i, means or mechanism for re 
ciprocating said bar, and removable and ad 
justable feed-springs consisting each of the 
fiat strip 1, pointed at its lower end, arm 2, 
and slotted box 3, having set-screw 4, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose shown and 
set forth. 
7. The combination of the oiling-chamber 
W, feed-roller X, cone-pulley L, endless belt 
M, shaft g, cone-pulley N at one end thereof, . 
driving-pulley G at the other end thereof, bar 
i, and feed-springsk, bearing with their inner 
ends against the roller, substantially as and 
for the purpose shown and set forth. 
8. The combination of the endless feed-apron 
Q, rollers Q and Q, apron-casing, composed 
 
of the side plates, S, and back plate, S, hav 
ing bent deflector s, and removable drip-pani 
T, substantially as and for the purpose shown 
and set forth. 
9. The improved wool-oiling machine herein 
shown and described, consisting, essentially, 
of the frame A. A, drive-shaft B, having pul 
leys - C C' and E, F, endless belts e and f, in 
clined endless feed-apron Q, shaft g, having 
drive-pulley G, sprocket-wheel I, apron-roller 
Q, and cone-pulley Lu, endless chain K, apron 
roller Q', having sprocket-wheel J, apron-cas 
ing S S, having drip-deflector s, dirip-pan T, 
clearer-comb R, endless band M, feed-roller 
X, having cone-pulley Lu, removable and ad 
justable feed-springs k, mounted upon the re 
ciprocating bar i, having slotted arm i, 
grooved pulley H, having Wrist-pin h, oil 
chamber W, having longitudinal partition nc, 
supply tank or reservoir U, having discharge 
valve V, and the device for regulating auto 
matically the flow of oil from the supply-tank 
into the oiling-chamber, consisting of the ad 
| justable float Y, army, leyer, Zlink i, and 
valve-arm a, the whole constructed, combined, 
and arranged substantially as and for the pur 
pose shown and set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN L, MATHEWS, 
WitneSSes: 
EDWARD H. LACY, 
THOMAS J. LACY. 
45 
55 
Io 
I 5 
25 
35 
| 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288565.txt	H. N, FRENTRESS, 
FREIGHT CAR DOOR, 
No. 288,565, 
ra, Patented Nov. 13, 1883, 
E % 
2. 
2 
E E 
2 
- 
% % 2 2 2. 2 % % 2 % % 
NNNNNN 
% NYNNNNNNNN SNxN SNY 
31 III || ||2|| || || 3 || || || |3 
2 
 
(No Model.) 
e 2. 
  
 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY N. FRENTRESS, OF EAST DUBUQUE, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF TWO. 
THIRDS TO CHARLES. W. WARE, OF SAME PLACE. 
FREIGHT CAR DOOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,565, dated November 13, 1883. 
Application filed June 9, 1883. (No model.) 
15 transportation of grain and the like. 
D ID represent the inner doors, or those 6o 
To all whon, it may concern: 
of East Dubuque, in the county of Jo Daviess 
and State of Illinois, have invented a new and 
5 useful Improvement in Freight-Car Doors; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
The invention involved in the subject-mat 
ter of this application relates to an improve 
ment in doors for freight-cars, and particu 
larly to that class of cars employed in the 
The object of the improvement is to enable 
the doors to be elevated to a position which 
will place them out of the way when it is de 
sired to load or unload the car; and it therein 
consists in the construction and arrangement 
of a track, and of doors engaging with and 
traveling on said track, all as more fully here 
inafter described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
For the better understanding of the inven 
tion and to enable those skilled in its relative 
art to know how to make and use the same, 
reference may be had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal section of 
the body of a car; Fig. 2, a transverse sec 
tion on the line at a of Fig. 1, and showing 
the doors in a position under the roof of the 
car; Fig. 3, a detail view of one of the doors, 
and Fig. 4 a similar view of one rail of the 
Tack. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in each figure of the drawings. 
A represents the body of a car, provided on 
each side with the usual external door, B. 
Upon the interior of the car, and on each 
side of each doorway, is secured a metallic 
strip, c, which extends from the flooring of the 
car up and across under the roof of the same. 
These two strips constitute the track referred 
to, and for convenience and economy in man 
ufacturing they are each made of a single 
piece of metal, and are bent twice at a right 
angle longitudinally in opposite directions, 
which flanges constitutes the track proper, 
Beit known that I HENRY N. FRENTRESS, and the other means enabling said track to be 
secured to the sides and roof of the car by 
means of bolts or other suitable devices. The 
lower portion of each strip c is widened, as 55 
indicated at a, for the purpose of covering 
the space occurring between the two end 
bearings of each inner door when the same is 
in its normal position. 
which travel on the track formed by the de 
scribed arrangement of the metallic strips. C 
C. Each of the said doors D is solid and pro 
vided near each corner with a bearing, b, by 
means of which arrangement there is insti. 65 
tuted between the two end bearings of each 
door a space which permits the doors to read 
ily pass the curve occurring in the track at 
the point of connection between the roof and 
sides of the car. 
For the purpose of avoiding rapid wearing 
of the bearings b and to enable each door to be 
elevated and lowered with ease, I provide each 
of said bearings with a friction-roller, c, which 
rollers accomplish these objects and take up 75 
all friction incident with the operation of the 
doors. These rollers are mounted upon the 
doors near their corner-bearings for the pur 
pose of leaving a space sufficient to prevent 
the said rollers from coming into contact with 
the floor of the car when the doors fall to 
their normal position, as otherwise the roll 
ers or their bearings would surely break by 
the sudden fall of the doors. 
Each of the door's D may be provided onits 
outer face with a strip, E, or other suitable . 
means for elevating and lowering the same. 
It may be found desirable to modify the 
construction of thestrips C C, and also to corre 
Spondingly change the construction of the 
doors D D, but that herein related will be 
found the most feasible and effective in use. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
is 
1. In a freight-car door, a track for accom 
modating the vertically-sliding doors thereof, 
consisting of two strips of metal, each made 
of a single piece bent twice at a right angle 
5o for the purpose of forming two flanges, one of longitudinally in opposite directions to form IOO 
go 
95 
- 
Io thereon. 
35 
40 
:45 
2SS565 
- 
two flanges, one of which constitutes the bearings, substantially as and for the purpose Io 
track proper, and the other means enabling set forth. 
Said track to be secured to the sides and roof 
of the car, substantially as described and presence of two witnesses. 
shown. 
2. In the device as described, the combi- 
nation, with the track C C and the vertically- 
sliding doors D D, of the friction-rollers c, 
mounted upon said doors near their corner- 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
HENRY N. FRENTRESS. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM GRAHAM, 
MONROE. M. CAIDY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288665.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 288,665, 
| J. W. RENCHARD. 
LUBRICATOR. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Now, 20, 1883, 
i ?? 
 
 
* 
Q 
* 
* 
 
 
 
K? ?3 2 
| 
 
?S ta. 
N 
N 
*/ 
V 
(No Model.) 
No, 288,665, 
 
J. W. RENCHARD. 
LUBRICATOR. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Now, 20, 1883, 
// 
i 
UNITED, STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J. VINCENT RENCHARD, OF WINDSOR, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
LUBRICATOR. 
SPECIFICATroN forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,665, dated November 20, 1883. 
Application filed February 9, 1883. (No model.) 
tion. Fig. 1 presents onlythe leading letters 
ofreference, while the other views relatively 
contain letters of reference which embrace 
principal features and details. 
In all the drawings, E represents the steam 
pipe between the boiler and engine; F, the 
connecting-trunk; G, the condenser; H, the 
oil-magazine; A, the oil-inlet valve; B, the 
water - regulating Valve; C, the discharge 
valve; ID, the filling-plug: R, the steam-inlet 60 
tube; S, a continuation of the latter (or a 
steam-tubei) T, the oil-discharge tube: M. O 
KI, indicator-tube holders; N J, indicator 
tubes, (glass;), P L, indicator-caps; Q, oil-de 
scent tube; a", packing - nut; o and k, pack- 65 
ing-thimbles. 
" 
| 
To all whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, J. VIINCENTRENCHARD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at | 
Windsor, Province of Ontario, Canada, have 
5 invented a new and Improved Lubricator, of 
whichthe following is a specification. 
My improvement in this application is a 
i further concentration into compact embodi 
ment of the warious details entering into the 
fo COnstruction of a lubricator intended for a 
wide range of application, and of such con 
struction as to enable persons who may be 
isolated from the confines of mechanical con 
weniencesto readily replacean indicator-tube, 
I5 or otherwise overcome any trifing contin 
i gency, without the aid of an expert; and as 
| 
these lubricators find sale in mearly all coun 
i tries on the globe, the advantages of a self. 
| contained and easily maintained device is 
ewident. 
From a point of utility the construction of 
my device embracesa, cylinder in one casting, 
which forms the oil-magazine and base of the 
| condenser, and to which are attached, by 
| 25 means of screw-threads, the connecting-trunk 
condenser proper, valve  sockets, glass indi 
cator-holders, filling-plug, and oil-valve. This 
concentration secures an isothermal condition 
in the warious channels-steam, water, and 
oiland in the contents of the deviceWater 
andoil-sothatany changes of temperature or 
pressure whichmayaffect one channel readily 
affects the others, thus permitting by?a single 
adjustment of the regulating-Valves a proper 
and regular feed of lubricant. 
All elaborate projections for display, or in. 
| congruities of construction are in this device 
avoided. Its compactness therefore insures 
cleanliness, ease of application, accessibility, 
| 
i 4o and presents atomce a reduction of experience 
to practice, whileitscost of production is less 
| ened and its adaptability augmented. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
| avertical elevation of my device, viewed atan 
45 angle of forty-five degrees, and shown as at 
tached to a portion of the steam-pipe of an 
engine. Fig. 2 is a plan section through the 
center, horizontaly, of the connecting-trunk 
i F, Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a side vertical central 
5o section. Fig. 4 is a front vertical central sec 
30 
35 
i 
| 
|- 
' . 
ing-rings. 
The four black spaces at the tops and bot 
toms of the indicator-tubes areflexible pack 
kando'are.compression rings, (Screw-thread: 7q 
ed.) The latter converges into an upward 
aperture, and forms an oil-discharge nozzle; 
c, discharge-channel; r", steam-imlet channel; 
b", packing-nut; b, valve-sleeve; b, angular 
water-channel; t, oil-discharge channel; U, 75 
diaphragm separating water - base and oil 
magazine. (See Figs. 2, 3, and 4.) 
Principleofoperation: Upon being attached 
to the steam-pipe of an engine, the device is 
blown through. This is done by opening or 
unscrewing the Valves A, B, and C. Steam 
enters inlet R and oil-outlet T, and finds es 
cape through condenser G and oil-magazine 
H and valve C, after which the valves A, B, 
and Care closed and plug Dunscrewed, and 
wateris poured in theaperture and entersthe 
oil-magazine, filling the latter and the indi 
cator J, also the tube Q and indicator N, after 
which the valve C is again opened, when the 
water in H and indicator Jwill escape, the 90 
tube Qand indicator N remaining filled; clos 
ing valve C, oil is poured into the aperture 
of plug Duntil the magazine Hand indicator 
Jareful. Dis then replaced. By this time 
the condenser G will have become filled with 
| condensed Steam or distilled Water. 
Then, to 
operate the device, the Valve B is opened 
slightly, when the waterin the condenser-base 
willenter the angular channel b, Figs. 2 and 
3, and pass into the oil in the top of the Ioo 
80 
* 
28S,665 
The glass indicators J and N are entered 8o 
glass holder I the oil-magazine has an upward 
cored extension contiguous to the opening. in. 
cored extension, h", above the levelof the dia 
the glass-holder I, and descend in the oil ad 
phragm proper, the object being to enable the 
jacent to the tube Q, but not into the latter. 
The oil in consequence becoming elevated, 
indication of the oil by the indicator Jto the 6o 
lewel of the bottom of the diaphragm proper, 
flows into and through the water in the tube 
so that nearly the last of the oil can beindi 
Q and up into the nozzle o', accumulating at 
cated to insure its presence in the magazine. 
the orifice of the nozzle until suficientlylarge, 
when, by its lesser gravity, it swiftly ascends 
It also enables the inlet-orifice of the oil-de 
scent tube Q to absorb nearly every part of 65 
The 
the Water Contained in the indicator N. 
the lubricant in the magazine. The water 
valve Abeing next opened, the oil enters the 
Valve Benters directly into the water-base, 
channel t", continues through the lower chan 
whereit opensandclosesthe Water-outletchan 
mel in the trunk F, and through the oil-tube 
nel b. This feature has been putin practice 
T: discharges into the current of the steam, 
by myself in the early part of 1877; butin this 
which it infuses with foam of oil, the water 
in the condenser being supplied in ample 
device it is used in combination with the en 
tire cylinder, composing nearly all of the oil 
Quantity by the steam, which has a continual 
magazine and the Water-base. 
inlet thereinthrough the channel R " ". The 
At the bottom of the cylinder H there isan 
upward transit of the oil in drops is visible 
inwardly-projecting bar, which is drilled to 
through the water in the indicator N. 
* 
receive the valve C, and provided with the 
2O - The downward transit of the drops of water 
horizontal and downward discharge-channel 
through the oil might take place in the oil 
e, all confined within the general surface of 
lewel indicator-tube J, similar to the visible 
the cylinder-casting. 
feedin my device patented November 14, 1876, 
No. 184,426; butasa doubly-visible feed would 
through the bottoms of the lower glass-hold 
25 appear Utopian, it is avoided, as it Would not 
ers, Kand O, which holders are internally 
Contribute to the usefullness of the device. 
threaded, enabling the packing of the indica 
The original features patented to me in the 
i 
tor-tubes by screwing up the rings k and o' 
above-mentioned patent, embracing the sin 
against the packing-thimbles k and o, upon 
i gle connecting-trunk having separate steam 
whicharelaid the flexiblewashers, represented 
b and oil channels, in combination with an ele 
by black spaces, theholdersbeingfinally closed 
| vated condenser, a steam-tube therein, and a 
Suspended oil-magazine, a water-feed-regulat 
by the caps Land P. 
Having described my invention, I desire to 
ing Valve, arestill the basic featuresimmy pres 
Secure by Letters Patent the following claims: 
ent device, yet there are novel features which 
time and experience have developed, which 
1. In a lubricator, the combination of the 
oil-magazine H, provided near its upper end 
are herein embraced in such perfect arrange 
| 
With the diaphragm U, its upward continua 
ment as to prove advantageous in points of 
construction and utility, and are contributive tion forminga water-basewhichissurmounted 
In the | with thecondenserG, with the upwardly-cored 
to elegance and symmetry of design. 
4o construction a simple cylinder, H, with in 
extension h", glass indicator-holders I and K, 
andglassindicatorJ, whereby the highest gen 
wardy-projectingbossesor Sockets for receiv- | 
erallevel of the lubricant in the oil-magazine 
ing the glassholdersI, K, M, and O, the Valve 
is shown, substantially as specified. 
sleeve b, thetrunk F, and valve C, and thread 
2. In a lubricator, the oil-magazine H, as 
ed at its upper end to receive the condenser 
described, having an upwardly-cored exten 
G, and provided with a horizontal or trans 
werse diaphragm, U, it is quickly turned and 
sion, h", in Combination with the oil-descent 
tube Q, glassholders O and M, and glass in 
finished, its openingbored and threaded,when 
dicator N, whereby the entire lubricant com 
the finished details are then easily attached 
and subsequent alignment of all the parts as 
tained in the magazine H may be absorbed, IO5 
sured, there being. no organic joints in the 
substantially as specified. 
*- 
main cylinder. Nearly all that portion in the 
cylinder H above the diaphragm. U consti 
tutes the base of the condenser, and effects the 
cooling of the surface of the oil under the dia 
Contiguous to the inward opening of the 
Signed this 27th day of January, 1883. 
Witnesses: 
E. E. RENCHARD, 
A. M. GRAHAM. 
J. VIINCENT RENCHARD. 
95 
IOO 
75 
85 
| 
: C 
| 15 
45 
*5 phragm. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288765.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 288,765. 
J. BOND, Jr. 
SEWING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented Now, 20, 1883. 
Sa 
 
f 
H. 
FS II 
sessert: 
as 
full 
e - Na 
z 
- - - - - aim. 
"Fly Is its 
i", 
"If 
3. 
- - - - - 
FE 
Site 
S 
y 
 
 
 
 
O) 
N-1N 
 
N 
N 
S. 
E. S. N 
N S N N S is 
S NS S 
S. (SIN 
SH 
HN 
I 
TNA s I 
Eisel Sago 
agiler's BY E. 
SHERSSN-5EF Giras 
s ss S's 's 
& 
% 
s 
 
w 
RS 
N 
R 
s 
----------- 
s S 
s 
a 
WITNESSE3; 
;3 3. ii. 
." 
. 
... 
m S 
s 
 
L 
IEer. 
$33. 
(No Model.) 
No. 288,765. 
 
J. BOND, Jr. 
SEWING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Now, 20, 1883. 
M. PeteRS, Phcte-Lithgrapher. Washington.o.c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH BOND, J.R., OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
HALF TO CHARLES M. SWAIN, OF SAME PLACE. 
SEWN G. MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,765, dated November 20, 1883. 
Application filed February 16, 1883. 
(No model.) 
2O 
25 
O 
To all tuion it 7ay concern: 
Be it known that I, JosEPH. BOND, Jr., a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
5 certain Improvements in Sewing-Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the sewing-machine for which Let 
ters Patent of the United States No. 245,771 
were granted to my assignees on the 16th day 
of August, 1881, the presentimprovements re 
lating, first, to the device employed for trans 
mitting motion from the upper to the lower 
shaft of the machine; secondly, to the take-up 
devices, and, thirdly, to the construction of 
the spool-case and spool-case holder. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, 
Sheet 1, is a longitudinal section of the ma 
chine with my improvements; Fig. 2, a trans 
verse section on the line 12, Fig. 1; Figs. 3 to 
6, inclusive, Sheet 2, diagrams illustrating the 
improved take-up mechanism; Figs. 7 and 8, 
views of the improved spool-case, and Figs. 
9, 10, and 11 views showing the relation of the 
spool-case to the spool-case holder. 
His the bed of the machine; II, the sta 
tionary arm of the same; J, the driving-shaft; 
K, the lower shaft for operating the feed-mo 
tion and loop-catcher b, B, the needle-bar, 
and S the presser-bar, all of these parts being 
constructed and operating in the same man 
ner as in the machine shown and described in 
the above-named patent. 
Crank-pins on the shafts J and K are con 
nected by a rod, D, guided in a grooved plate, 
L, capable of moving transversely; but instead 
of securing this plate to a rod adapted to bear 
ings in tubular studs on the opposite sides of 
the hollow post I of the arm, as in the pat 
ented machine, Iform on the back of the plate 
La rib, f, which fits snugly, but so as to slide 
freely, in a groove, g, formed in a transverse 
bar, g, secured within said hollow post I, this 
form of guide being simpler and easier to fit 
up than the rod and tubes formerly used. 
The devices for taking up the slack of the 
needle-thread, after the formation of the loop, 
are the same in principle as those formerly em 
ployed, and comprise the rotating diskII, with 
5o hook a, the thread-retainer c, and the eyes d, 
d", and d"; but in addition to these devices I 
35 
 
55 
now provide the disk L with a lug, In, which 
acts on that portion of the thread between the 
eyes d and d". This lug commences to act be 
fore the hook at has finished taking up the 
thread, and serves to expedite this operation 
that is to say, it insures the rapid taking up of 
the loop of needle-thread as soon as the latter 
has passed from the rear of the spool-case. 
The lug an also serves to impart a certain de- 6o 
gree of tension to the thread as the latter is 
drawn downward, owing to the action of the 
hook b in forming the next loop, the thread 
being thereby prevented from slipping off of 
the hook, and the formation of a perfect loop 65 
being insured. (See Figs. 3 to 6.) 
The spool-case M which I now use is made 
of a single block, instead of being in the form 
of a two-part shell, as before, and in this block 
is formed a slot, h, for the reception of a spool, 
N, which can turn freely on a pin, n, adapted 
to openings in the case, the head of this pin 
being grooved, so that it can be readily caught 
hold of and the pin withdrawn when it be 
comes necessary to remove the spool. 
Tension is imparted to the thread by pass 
ing the same between the end of the spool-case 
and one of the heads of the spool, as before, a 
plate, p, bearing against the opposite head of 
the spool, and this plate being acted upon by 8o 
a spring, S, under control of a screw, s, as 
shown in Fig. 8. 
The spool-case holder comprises two plates, 
P and P, the latter being movable, so as to 
permit of the insertion or removal of the spool 
case, which rests in an inclined position, as 
shown in Fig. 11. Each plate has in front a 
Wing, w, and at the rear a wing, ac, and the 
Spool-case is confined longitudinally between 
these wings, the distance between which, how 
ever,is slightly greater thanthelength of spool 
case contained between them, so that a slight 
longitudinal movement of the spool-case in the 
holder is permitted. 
Before the formation of the loop the spool 
case rests in contact with the wings up, as shown 
in Fig. 9; but as soon as the loop is formed 
over the nose of the spool-case, the tension on 
the thread causes the said case to move back 
Ward in the holder until its rear end strikes 
the Wings a, a clear passage being thus formed 
for the thread between the front end of the 
7 
5 
85 
95 
90 
IOO 
2ss,765 
25 
comprising thread-guides and a rotating hook, 
a, with the lug or projection on, acting in con 
nection with said take-up hook, as set forth. 
3. The combination of the spool-case, the 
Spool N, and the pivot-pin n, with the tension 
device comprising the plate p, spring s, and 
set-screws, as set forth. 
4. The combination of the spool-case Mwith 
the holder having wings wanda, located near 
the opposite ends of the spool-case, and adapted 
to hold the same in an inclined position, but 
permitting a slight longitudinal play, whereby 
the loop is drawn over the spool-case without 
contact with the Wings, as set forth. 
5. The spool-case having openings y, y, and 
y and slots 2, 2', and 2', as set forth. 
Intestimony whereof Ihave signed my name 4o 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing Witnesses. 
35 
- 
JOSEPH BOND, JR. 
Witnesses: 
HARRY DRURY, 
HARRY SMITH. 
O 
spool-case and the wings w, as shown in Fig. 
10. As soon as the loop has passed the center 
of the spool-case, however, in its backward 
Course, Said case again drops down into con 
tact with the Wings c, and opens a passage for 
the thread between the rear portion of the 
spool-case and the Wings ac, as shown in Fig. 9. 
The spool-case has three openings, y, q', and 
f, through which the thread passes, and in 
Order to permit the threading up of the spool 
case withont the necessity of passing the thread 
through these openings, I form in the casing 
three slots, 2, 2', and 2', each extending from 
One of the openings to the edge of the case, so 
that the thread can be readily slipped into the 
openings. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the shafts J and K, 
their crank-pins, and the connecting-rod D, 
With the grooved guide L, having a rib, f, and 
the barg, having a groove, g, for the recep 
tion of said rib, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the take-up device 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288866.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 288,866. 
 
S. R. & A. E. R. UST. 
JOINER's PLANE, 
Patented Now, 20, 1883. 
2% SS a 
SS 2x^2, 
2e. 
a 
6. 
/76 
62.26 gazz 
1.3437. 
2-4 t 
- 17? 
v2. %/6--- 
(2.7%rd 2 
zeera - 
 
... rers, photo thographer, Washington, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SOLON R. RUST AND ARTHUR E. RUST, OF PINE MEADOW, CONNECTICUT, 
ASSIGNORS TO SAID SOLON R. RUST, AND HENRY B. BEACH AND JOHN 
C. BEACH, BOTH OF MERIDEN, CONNECTICUT. 
a 
JOINER'S PLANE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,866, dated November 20, 1888. 
Application filed September 10, 1883. (No model.) 
Io iron. 
to aid tuhot it natzy concern: 
Beit known that we, SoLON R. RUST and 
ARTHUR. E. RUST, of Pine Meadow, county of 
Litchfield, State of Connecticut, have invented 
5 an Improvement in Joiners' Planes, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in that class of joine's planes in which the 
stock is constructed from metal, usually cast 
In the more general construction of this 
class of planes the bed to which the plane 
iron is clamped is arranged in guides or bear 
ings formed in the sides of the stock. These 
I5 require to be planed with great exactness, and 
the bed to be correspondingly fitted. 
The object of our invention is to simplify 
the construction of the plane, so far as the fit 
ting and guiding of the bed are concerned; and 
2O it consists in the arrangement of a guiding 
stud or studs in the stock, midway between its 
two sides, and on an incline corresponding to 
the inclined position required for the bed, 
which stud or studs serve as guides for the sup 
25 port and movement of the bed, and having 
combined therewith an adjusting-screw ar 
ranged in a plane parallel with the said stud 
or studs, and as more fully hereinafter de 
In the accompanying illustration, which 
forms part of this specification, Figure 1 rep 
resents a longitudinal section on line e g; Fig. 
2, a top view; Fig. 3, a transverse section on 
line a ac, and Fig. 4 a transverse section on 
A represents the stock, of the usual form, 
provided with a handle, B. C is the bed on 
which the iron D rests, and is clamped by 
means of the cap E, the cap E provided with 
4o lugs a near its upper end, which pass under 
and embrace the bed, as seen in Fig. 3, the set 
screw F serving to bring the point of the cap 
onto the iron near its edge, and so as to clamp 
the iron firmly to the bed; but this arrange 
45 ment of clamping is immaterial to this inven 
tion, as the cap may be applied in any of the 
usual or well-known methods. 
35 line 2) gy. 
scribed. 
3O 
- 
In the stock beneath the bed a stud, G, is 
arranged in a plane parallel with the position 
required for the bed. This stud is best set by 5O 
drilling into the stock and setting a stud of 
the required diameter therein, as seen in Fig. 
1. On the under side of the bed is a lug, H, 
at right angles to the bed, and through which 
a hole is bored corresponding to the stud G, 55 
and so as to pass thereon and move freely 
toward or from the mouth of the plane, the 
stud serving as a guide for such movement of 
the bed. This stud, placed centrally, as seen 
in Fig. 4 permits the bed to rock from right 60 
to left to adapt itself to the position of the 
plane-iron. The plane-iron, near the mouth 
b, takes a bearing on the stock, as at d, which 
gives the proper transverse position for the 
plane-irons. The bed will therefore adapt it. 65 
self to this position of the stud. The lug H 
extends below the pivot and engages with an 
adjusting-screw, I. This adjusting-screw is 
threaded to fit a corresponding screw-hole, e, 
in the stock, and in a plane parallel with the 70 
axis of the stud G. This screw is. provided 
with a collar, f, which engages a slot, l, in the 
lug H, and so that turning the screw in one 
direction forces the bed and the iron to move 
downward, and in the opposite direction up- 75 
ward, and whereby the edge of the iron may 
be set in the proper relation to the face of the 
plane. The stud G may be of sufficient length. 
to take a bearing near the two ends of the bed; 
but we prefer to introduce a second stud, L, 8o 
into the stock below, as seen in Fig. 1, for the 
support of the bed below; or two studs may be 
introduced, one parallel with the other and in 
the same plane horizontally, which will give 
two supports for the bed; but in such arrange- 85 
ment of studs the advantage of the rocking 
movement is not attained. 
The introduction of the diagonal guiding 
studs into the stock beneath the bed is much 
cheaper than the usual inclined side guides 9o 
formed upon the inner surface of the sides of 
the Stock. 
...What we claim as our invention is 
In a metal plane, the combination of the 
s 
 
2 
2ss, S66 
stock provided with one or more inclined tially such as described, for clamping the plane 
studs, G, beneath the bed, the bed constructed iron to the bed, all substantially as described. 
SOLON R, RUST. 
With a downwardly-projecting lug, H, con- 
ARTHUR E. RUST. 
structed to ride on said stud as a Support and 
5 guide, a screw arranged in the stock parallel 
with said stud and in engagement with the 
bed, the plane-iron, cap, and means, substan- 
GEO. H. RICE, 
EDW. E. KELLOGG. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US288966.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. ARNOLD, 
MUSIC LEAF TURNER, 
No. 288,966, 
Patented NOW, 27, 1883, 
 
/7/7 esses : 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM J. ARNOLD, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
MUSCLEAF UR NER, 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 288,966, dated November 27, 1888. 
Application filed March 26, 1SS3. (No model.) 
IO 
To cult, thon, it inctly CO7 ce17 : 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM J. ARNOLD, 
of the city and county of Providence, and State 
of Rhode Island, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus fol' 
Turning the Leaves of Sheet-Music, of which 
the following is a full and correct description, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
an apparatus by means of which a musical per 
former can turn over the leaves of lais music 
Without interrupting his playing by requiring 
the use of his hands or feet to operate it. This 
is accomplished by means of the mechanism 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 shows a front elevation of the ap 
paratus. Fig. 2 is a top view of the same with 
a part of the frame removed. Fig. 3 is a side 
view from the right of Fig. 1, also having a 
part of the frame removed to show the mech 
anism. 
The frame A is made of sheet-brass or other 
metal in the way that frames for clock-works 
are usually made. 
B is an escapement-wheel, which is madle to 
turn freely on its shaft, which has bearings in 
the two sides of the frane. 
( is a clock-spring placed on the same shaft, 
the inner end of the spring being made fast to 
the shaft, and the outer end attached to the 
wheel B. A ratchet-wheel, , is secured to 
the shaft, and a pawl, n, pivoted to the frame, 
catches into the ratchet-wheel, so that the 
spring may be wound up, to give motion to the 
wheel B, by means of the key c on the outer 
end of the shaft. 
S and s are two levers that act together to 
form an escapement, though hung on separate 
pivots that pass through the upper part of the 
frame. A rod, ), is hung so as to rock on the 
Same pivot as s, and a small curved cross-le 
Ver On the foot of the rod ) is so placed as to 
allow a Small amount of motion to the rod be 
fore the cross-lever will touch the escapement 
8 at either end. 
One or more horizontal grooved pulleys, j, 
are held on a pivot between two ears on the 
left side of the frame A. The number of pull 
leys used may be varied, according to the num 
ber of leaves to be turned, by once setting the 
arms h, there being one pulley-arm to each 
leaf turned. These alms Ol' Odlsh are fastened 
at one end to the pulleys, and have at the other 
end a clasp, P, into which the leaf is inserted. 
Each pulley j is furnished with an elastic cord 
or spring, ee, one end of which is fastened to 
the side of the frame, and the other end is cal 
lied partly around the pulley in the groove 
and fastened near the end of the rodh, so that 
when the lod h is swung around to the right 
the spring e will tend to draw it back to the 
left again. A notch is made in the periphery 
of each pulley just back of the rods h, into 
which the end of the catch-levels l enter, so 
as to hold the rods h. When carried around to 
the right, there being one catch-lever for each 
pulley, which catch-levers are held on a pivot 
between two ears attached to the frame. The 
inner ends of these levers l l are so placed that 
they shall be pushed back by the beveled ends 
of the studs 0 0 in the side of the wheel B in 
passing, and the bent ends of the levers thrown 
out of the notches in the pulleys j. 
Light 
springs 3 under the inner ends of levers throw 
them out, so as to make the other ends of the 
levers catch in the notches in the pulleys when 
the rods h are turned to the right. The studs 
0 0 are arranged in the wheel B in accordance 
with the number of pulleys that are used 
that is, if only one pulley is used, the wheel 
has one Stud to each tooth. 
If thele are two 
pulleys, the wheel will have a stud for each 
alternate tooth, and if three pulleys are used, 
there will be a stud for every third tooth in 
the wheel B, and so on for any number of pull 
leys. A fan, t, which may be made of any 
shape or material preferred, is attached to the 
rod', with its broad side toward the front. 
The operation is as follows: The spring (, is 
Wound up by the key c, the l'ods h are swung 
to the light, so as to be held by the catches l 
in the pulley's notches, and the leaves to be 
turned are inserted in the clasps on the ends 
of rodsh-the first leaf in the clasp on the top 
rod, h, and the other leaves in succession. 
When the performer wishes a leaf to be turned, 
by directing a slight puff of the breath against 
the fant, it will fall back, and the lear end of 
the cross-level on the foot of the rod, striking 
against the back end of lever 8, will cause the 
front end to release one tooth of the wheel B. 
Then the tooth back of levers' strikes against 
5 
3 5 
O 
45 
5 
5 5 
60 
fo 
7 A. 
SO 
90 
OO 
2 
- 
2ss, 66 
passes, and the same stud o strikes the Second 
lever l, which will cause the next leaf to be 
turned over in like manner as the first, and so 
on through any number of pulleys that may 
be used. 
Having thus described my improvements, 
what I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The fant, escapement ss, and wheel B, in 
combination with mechanism for turning the 
leaves of music, substantially as herein set 
forth. 
- 
2) 
WILLIAM J. ARNOLD. 
Witnesses: 
STEPHEN C. ARNOLD, 
A. B. GLADDING. 
the lower end of that lever, and causes its other 
end to fly up against the back end of the lever 
S and throw its front end in to catch the next 
tooth, and also at the same time to throw the 
fan forward again by the cross-lever on the rod 
p'. The motion allowed between the cross-lever 
and lever S enables the fan to start easily and 
attain some momentum before moving the le 
vers. While the tooth is passing the lever 8, 
as just described, the stud 0 next above the 
lever l will strike against the first lever with 
its beveled end and release its catch from the 
notch in the pulley j, when the pulley will be 
free to be drawn around by the spring e, car 
rying with it the rodh and the leaf in its clasp 
to the other side; and when the fan is again 
blown back, another tooth of the wheel B 
IO 
I5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289066.txt	(No Model.) 
M. S. CABELL, 
LUBRICATOR FOR ENGINE SLIDES. 
No. 289,066. 
Patented Nov. 27, 1883. 
Z29. A 
ser- set 
As 
4. 
 
 
UNITED STATES. PATENT OFFICE. 
MILTON S. CABELL OF QUINCY, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
WILLIAM SCEIAEFER, OF SAME PLACE. 
LUBRICATOR FOR ENGINE-SLIDES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 289,066, dated November 27, 1883. 
Application filed August 20, 1883. (No model.) 
45 
length of the slide and to cause it to work 4O 
downward over all the wearing-surfaces. The 
oil-reservoir may be of any ordinary or suit 
able construction. Each cup or reservoir is 
preferably connected with the pipe D by means 
of a screw-joint or other connection which 
will admit of its being readily detached. Each 
of the feed-pipes is preferably provided with 
a cock or equivalent device by which the flow 
of oil may be regulated or stopped. 
The essential feature of the invention con 
sists in combining an oil-reservoir with a dis 
charge-tube and a passage leading through the 
slide, substantially as described. 
The details may be modified provided no 
departure is made from the mode of action 
herein described. 
The present invention is restricted to those 
matters and things which are hereinafter 
claimed, and as to all matters which may be 
described or shown, but which are not claimed, 
the right is reserved to make the same the 
subject of a separate application. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In combination with the reciprocating 
cross-head, the horizontal stationary guides, 
each having an oil-passage extending down 
ward through its upper surface and outward 
through its side, and the elevated oil reservoirs 
or cups connected with said passages. 
2. The combination of the stationary guides 
provided with oil-passages, the reciprocating 
cross-head, and the elevated cups or reservoirs 
connected with the openings. 
55 
MILTON S. CABELL. 
Witnesses: 
I. MoRGAN, 
W.M. SCHAEFER, 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MILTON S. CABELL, of 
Quincy, in the county of Adams and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain Improvements 
in Lubricators for Engine-Slides, of which the 
following is a specification. . 
The aim of my invention is to provide a 
simple and efficient means for lubricating the 
cross-head slides of steam-engines, pumps, and 
similar machinery. 
To this end the invention consists in com 
bining with the slide an oil-reservoir con 
nected to its side and communicating with an 
opening entering from one side and emerging 
from the face of the slide, whereby the oil is 
delivered to the wearing-surface of the slide 
and caused to work thence over all the wear 
ing-surfaces. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section of the 
cross-head and guides provided with my im 
provement. Fig. 2 is a top plan view of the 
Sale. Referring to the drawings, A represents an 
ordinary reciprocating cross-head; B B, the 
two parallel slides by which the ends of the 
cross-heads are sustained; C C, two oil-reser 
voirs, and DD two pipes connecting the res 
ervoirs with the respective slides. It will be 
observed that the pipes D extend downward 
from the reservoirs to the slides, and that they 
communicate with openings E, which enter 
the sides of the slides and emerge therefrom 
on one of the wearing-faces. Under this ar 
rangement it will be perceived that the oil, de 
scending by gravity, will be delivered through 
the opening in the face of the slide in position 
to be acted upon by the cross-head, which 
serves to distribute the same over the entire 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289166.txt	(No Model.) 
W 
4. Sheet S-Sheet 1. 
S, D STROHIM, 
ELECTRICAL CABLE, 
No. 289,166, 
Patented Now, 27, 1883, 
WITNESSES 
J772-2-24 
S 
INVENTOR, 
ATORNEY 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 289, 166. 
S. D, STROHIM, 
ELECTRICAL CABLE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
Patented NOW, 27, 1883, 
z 
 
--- 
WITNESSES 
NVENTOR, 
AITORNEY 
(No Model.) 
S. D, STROHIM, 
ELECTRICAL CABLE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 289,166, 
Patented Nov. 27, 1883. 
 
WITNESSES 
tonnor 
S 
INVENTOR, 
y Stro 
ATTORNEY 
PEERS. Photo-Lithographer. washington, c 
(No Model.) 
S. D. STROHM. 
ELECTRICAL CABLE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 289,66, 
Patented NOW. 27, 1883, 
M 
| 2 
 
  
 
 
tudy 
As 
WITNESSES 
(Yoro A.V. 
t 
INVENTOR, 
Sov. S. S out. 
AITORNEY 
UNITED Sir ATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL I). STROHA, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ELECTRICAL CABLE. 
SPECIFICATX N forming part of Letters Fatent No. 289,166, dated November 27, 1883. 
Application filed September 16, 1SS1. Renewed April 19, ISS3. (No model.) 
IO 
3 
io all vivoT), if in-?ty concei'i 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL D. STROHM, of 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Electric 
Cables; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable other's skilled in 
the art to which it pertains to make and use 
the Salme. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
electric conductors, the object being to pro 
vide a cable which shall be simple and eco 
nomical in its construction, Olne that shall 
comprise any desired number of separate con 
ductors or sets of conductors, and a cable 
wherein the wires or conductors may be readily 
secured in place and be prevented against dis 
placement or the contact of one wire with 
anothel'. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in an electric cable consisting, essentially, 
of a series of wires and insulated disks, rings, 
or supports having open slots for the recep 
tion and support of the wires, and suitable 
supports or devices constructed and arranged 
to engage with the wires and prevent their 
displacement from the slots in which they are 
located. 
Myinvention further consists in an electric 
conductor consisting of two or more series or 
sets of Wires or conductors and separate or in 
dependent insulated disks, rings, or supports 
provided with open slots for the reception of 
the wires, the rings or disks Supporting one 
series of wires serving to prevent the dis 
placement of the wires composing the next 
inner Set. 
My invention further consists in certain 
other features of construction and combina 
tions of parts, as will hereinafter be described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, ligure 1 is 
a transverse section of a cable embodying my 
invention, Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section. 
Fig. 3 shows a detached view of the rings or 
disks, and Figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, S, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 
14, 15, and 16 are modifications. 
A B C represent rings or disks, each pro 
vided with open slots (t. The rings or disks 
may be made of porcelain or any non-con 
ducting material, or may be male of metal or 
other substance or material coated or covered 
with any non-conducting substance. 
A is the small or inner disk, and is provided 
with four open slots, ct, which ale of proper 
width to receive the wires l Snugly therein. 
The next disk or ling, B, is slipped Over the 
wires b, and as the inner periphery, c, of the 
ring bears upon the wires b the latter are pre 
vented from becoming displaced from their 
retaining-slots (t. In the outer periphery of 
the annular disk or ring B are formed any de 
sired number of open slots (t, within which 
are inserted the wires e, which constitute, in 
the present instance, the middle set of con 
ductors. After all of the Wiles elhave been 
inserted the outer ring or support, C. is slipped 
over the Wires e and serves to prevent their 
displacement. The outer periphery of the 
ring C is provided with a number of open slots 
a, within which are inserted the wires?, which 
constitute the outer set of conductors, and the 
latter may be retained in place by means of 
any non-conducting material inserted in the 
outer ends of the slots; or an open ling, E, 
may be clasped around the Outer Wires. In 
the event that the rings or disks are made of 
metal, the walls of the slots in the Outer ring 
or disk, C, may be upset, as at 0, Fig. 4, which 
operation may be effected by a suitable tool; 
or, instead of making the periphery of the outer 
ring circular in form, it may be made pointed, 
as represented in Fig. 5, and the prongs l. 
h", forming the walls of each slot, beforced to 
ward each other, thus closing the slot and pre 
venting the displacement of the wires. The 
disks or rings may be made, as illustlated in 
Figs. 6 and 7, with laterally-projecting flanges 
i, serving to maintain the rings at any desired 
distance apart, and also holding the Wires in 
place. Instead of forming the spacing-flanges 
i cylindrical, they may be made in the form 
of legs, as at j in Figs. Sand 9. If the annu 
lar disks or lings are made of flexible mate 
rial, they may be split and the ends separated 
to allow of the insertion of the next inner set 
of conductors; or the ring may be first made 
of larger diameter and then split and coiled 
into the form of a spiral or Screw, thus allow 
ing it to be leadily placed around the inner set 
of wires without disturbing them. This 
5 5 
Uu 
75 
So 
90 
O) 
2S 9, 166 
O 
2 5 
45 
would facilitate the first construction of the 
cable, and, further, would allow of the un 
limited increase of the capacity of a small ca 
ble. The rings or supports may be made 
round, Square, hexagonal, or other shape, and 
may be flat, concave, convex, or of otherform. 
The cable may be coated with any insulating 
material or compound, and used within a tube 
or pipe; or it may be employed as a regular 
cable without an inclosing-pipe. It will be 
observed that the conductors can be readily 
inserted in place, and in the event that any one 
of the conductors should become impaired it 
may be readily removed and repaired. The 
supporting disks or lings allow the cable to be 
bent at any desired angle without danger of 
impairing its efficiency. 
In Fig. 1. I have shown the outer covering 
of the cable, as at MI, which may be made of 
fibrous material impregnated with any suit 
able waterproofing material. or may be made 
in any desired manner. Instead of covering 
the wires and supports to form a cable, they 
may be inclosed in a tube or pipe, as herein 
before stated. 
In Fig. 10 I have shown another form of 
supports. Niepresents a cross provided with 
open slots in for the reception of wires, and O 
is a disk, the central portion of which is cut 
out in the form of a cross, as at O'. After the 
wires have been inserted in the slots in the 
disk O is slipped over the wires, as illustrated 
in Fig. 11, and as the space between the walls 
of the slots in the disk O is less than the width ; 
of the arm of the cross N the adjacent edges 
of the cross-shaped slot in the disk will pre 
vent the wires from being displaced from their 
slots. In older to prevent the cross N from 
being twisted out of place, the upright por 
tion may be slotted at its ends n' ', which will 
receive pins or studs 0 o' on the disk O, and 
thus retain the parts in place. The disk O 
has its periphery provided with slots p, for 
the reception of an outer series of wires. 
Figs. 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 represent an 
other form of support, the same consisting of 
the plate T, formed with the slots T', the edges 
of which are provided with slots it, for the re 
ception of the Wires, the latter being inserted 
through its narrow slots or passages it in one 
side of the plate. U are retaining-pieces con 
sisting of the portions u, which fit within the 
slots T', and the portion it, that overlaps the 
slotted portions of the plate. The retaining 
pieces are secured in place by means of the 
prongs o' at their upper ends fitting into sta 
ples 
fitting 
in the plate T, and prong 
Within a staple, ', attaching to the lower side 
of the plate or support T. It will be readily 
understood that after the Wires have been ill 
serted in the slots and the retaining-pieces U 
secured in place all displacement of the Wires 
will be prevented. 
I am aware that electric conductors have 
been constructed of several series of bed-pieces 
grooved horizontally and placed one on top of 
the other; also that an electric conductor, has 
been made of a pipe having connected disks 
inserted therein, said disks having grooves 
formed in their peripheries and a single se 
ries of Wires retained within said grooves, and 
hence I would have it understood that I make 
no claim to Such forms of construction. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An electric cable consisting of two or 
more series of wires, one series being located 
Within another series, and independent insu 
lated disks, rings, or supports provided with 
open slots in their outer or inner peripheries 
for the reception of the Wires, and separate 
disks, rings, or Supports, constructed sub 
stantially as described, and adapted to en 
gage with a series of the wires and prevent 
their displacement from their retaining-slots, 
Substantially as set forth. 
2. An electric cable consisting of two or 
more series of wires, one series being encir 
cled by another Series, and rings or disks pro 
vided with Open slots for the reception of the 
wires, the lings, disks, Or Supports of the out 
er series or set of wires being constructed to 
engage with the Wires of the next inner series 
and prevent their displacement from their 
slots, substantially as set forth. 
3. An electric cable consisting of two or 
more series of wires, and rings, disks, or sup 
ports provided with open slots in their pe. 
ripheries, of Outer disks, rings, or supports, 
being constructed substantially as described, 
S0 that they may engage the wires retained in 
the inner disks and prevent their displace 
ment, and a split or open ring or clasp for 
holding the Outer wires in place, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
SAMUEL D. STROHIM. 
Witnesses: 
HERMAN MORAN, 
C. S. DRURY. 
7 5 
SO 
90 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289266.txt	(Model.) 
No. 289,266. 
E. E. HYATT. 
CRANK COUPLING, 
Patented Nov. 27, 1883. 
: 
WITNESSES: 
(e...yz 
(3 & 244-2-4-12C, 
INVENTOR: 
6 & 2646 
BY Mlulu. fe) 
ATEORNEYS, 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELY E. HYATT, OF SALONA, ASSIGNOR TO THE ENTERPRISE MANUFACTUR 
ING COMPANY, OF TROY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
- 
CRANK COUPLN G. 
 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 289,266, dated November 27, 1888. 
Application filed August 2, 1883. (Model.) 
- 
. 
. . . 
. . 
- 
- 
description. 
To all whom it may concern. : 
Be it known that J, ELY E. HYATT, of Sa 
lona, in the county of Clinton and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Crank-Couplings, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
This invention is mainly designed for trans 
mitting motion from the driving-shaft of dog 
and other small powers to machines of va 
rious kinds usually worked by hand with a 
crank, including revolving churns, fanning 
mills, corn-shellers, and grindstones. 
The invention consists in a slotted crank of 
peculiar construction, designed to be secured 
on the end of the driving-shaft of the power, 
or on the end of a counter-shaft driven by gear 
ing or otherwise from the power, for engage 
ment with the revolving hand-crank of the 
machine to be operated, whereby great con 
venience and several advantages are obtained, 
substantially as hereinafter described. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a front end view of an 
endless traveling platform dog or small ani 
mal power and a rotating rectangular box 
churn with my improved crank-coupling ap 
plied to connect the driving-shaft of the power 
with the hand-crank of the churn; and Figs. 
2 and 3 are longitudinal views in planes at 
right angles With each other, and upon a larger 
scale, of the improved crank-coupling or con 
necting-crank detached. 
Aindicates the connecting-crank, having its 
eye or hub b keyed on the one end of the main 
or balance-wheel shaft c of the power B in 
close proximity to the frame of the power; but 
it may be secured on the end of a longer driv 
ing-shaft for working at a distance from the 
power the machine to be driven, or on the end 
of a counter-shaft, as hereinbefore referred to. 
45. This crank-coupling or connecting-crank A. 
is somewhat longer than an ordinary hand 
crank, or than the crank with which it is de 
signed to engage, and is made with an elon 
gated slot, d, extending from its outer or free 
end inward and in parallel relation, or nearly 5O 
so, with the longitudinal axis of the hub b. 
A simple mode of constructing this crank, 
when made of wrought-iron, is to bend it out 
ward in proximity to the eye or hub, and then 
to give the metala right-angled twist, as shown 55 
at e, and to draw out its body and turn or bend 
over the same at the outer end of the crank, 
and afterward to turn down or close the end 
of such turned-over portion against the body 
of the crank to form a guard, f, and the re- 6o 
quired slot d between said guard and body. 
This slot d should be wide enough to admit 
the handle of any ordinary hand-crank within 
it. The rotating rectangular box-churn C or 
other machine to be driven is placed in suita 
ble position to bring its shaft (, on which is 
the hand-crank h, on a line, or nearly So, with 
the balance-wheel shaft c of the power, and so 
that the handle of the crank h will enter freely 
within the slot d of the arm or crank A. 
By means of this crank - coupling A, any 
churn or other machine which has a rotary 
motion and is provided with a hand-crank 
can readily be connected with an animal-power 
without the intervention of pulleys or gear 
ing and without removing the hand-crank 
from the machine, so that when the machine 
is not being driven by the power it will be in 
order to be worked by hand. Again, no nice 
adjustment is necessary to attach the machine 8O 
to the power. If the machine to be driven is 
constructed so that the shaft on which is its 
hand-crank is not at the same height as the 
shaft which carries the connecting-crank A, 
the elongated slot din said connecting-crank. 
will admit of the hand-crank, as it is rotated, 
adjusting itself. It also very frequently hap 
pens, when driving a machine which has a bal 
ance-wheelby other devices than a slotted con 
necting-crank such as I have described, that 90 
the machine, by reason of the momentum of 
the balance-wheel, will at times run ahead of 
the power which drives it, thereby producing 
irregularity, shocks, and jars. This is obviat 
ed by my slotted connecting-crank A, as the 95 
guardif will hold back the machine against 
such tendency to run ahead, and when the 
brake is applied to the power both the power 
75 
... 4O 
2 
2s 9,266 
and the machine driven by it will stop at the 
Same time. 
I do not abandon of dedicate to the public 
any patentable feature set forth herein and not 
hereinafter claimed, but reserve the right to 
claim the same either in a reissue of any pat 
ent that may be granted upon this applica 
tion oir in other applications for Letter's Pat 
ent that I may make. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Lette's Patent 
1. Acrank-coupling for transmitting motion 
from one rotating shaft to another shaft pro 
vided with a hand-crank, the same consisting 
of a connecting-crank having an elongated slot 
in it arranged to run in direction of the length 
of it and in parallel relation with the axis of 
its eye or hub for reception of the handlepor 
tion of the hand-crank within it, substantially 
as specified. 
2. The connecting-crank A, bent and twist 
ed, as at e, in proximity to its eye or hub b, 
and having its outer or free end portion bent 
over and back to form a guard, f, and elon 
gated slot or opening d, in parallel relation 2 
with the axis of the eye or hub of the crank, 
essentially as and for the purposes described. 
ELY E. HYATT. 
2 
O 
Witnesses: 
W. L. MERWIN, 
S. M. MCCORMICK. 
5 
O 
15 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289366.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
- 
N. ZINS, 
No. 289,366. 
CHILL MOLD FOR DOG ERONS 
Patented Nov. 27, 1883. 
N4) 
 
   
s 
 
liter- 
. . .Sea 
24 C 77 
 
 
yNESSES 
2% air 
INVENTOR 
M3ala - 
2-6 cctory/6.76 
42 ATTORNEYs 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
6 
NICKOLAUS ZINS, OF EVANSVILLE, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO ZINS BROTHERS, 
OF SAME PLACE. 
CHILL-MOLD FOR DOG - IRONS. 
--- w 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters ratent No. 289,866, dated November 27, 1883. 
Application filed August 28, 1883. No model.) 
---...-- 
K 
To all tuflon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, N. ZINS, a citizen of the 
United States, residing at Evansville, in the 
county of Vanderburgh and State of Indiana, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Chill-Molds for Dogs; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
Io it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representa 
tion of this invention, and is a top view closed 
over the dog. Fig. 2 is a top view of the 
mold open and without the dog. 
Fig. 3 is a 
vertical section through the mold and the dog. 
Fig. 4 is a perspective detail, showing that 
end of the leg which is inserted in the mold. 
This invention has relation to chill-molds 
for casting and irons or dog-irons to be used 
upon the hearth; and it consists in the novel 
construction and arrangement of devices, as 
will be hereinafter fully described, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claim appended. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, a designates the bed-plate of the 
chilled or cast-iron mold or former, the dog 
iron being made therein, except the leg b, 
which may be cast separately, and inserted 
into the leg-holder c, formed in two sections, 
did, upon the hinged coversee of the mold. 
The coverse e are hinged at f, and swing lat 
erally over the recesses in the bed-plate. 
9 g designate the buttons for securing the 
covers in a closed position, and h are metal 
staples, which may be engaged by a hook or 
otherwise to manipulate the covers while hot. 4o 
i designates the sprue of the chill-mold, and 
k is the vent or riser for the escape of the air 
as the metal is poured in at the sprue. With 
out the covers the casting will be imperfect 
by reason of insufficient metal or other cause, 45 
| and never square, full, and complete as when 
the covers are used. 
an indicates a depression or recess in the 
bed of the mold, centrally beneath the leg 
holder c. When the sections d are closed upon so 
the mold, this recess receives the lower end of 
the said leg. 
The mold-cavity may be ornamented in any 
suitable style to suit the taste of the public. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 55 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with the base a, of the 
chill-mold provided with the mold-cavity, and 
carrying the buttons g g and one-half of the 
sprue i of the hinged laterally-swinging covers 
ee', pivoted at f to the front end of the base 
(, and having each in their inner edges the 
half-riser k, the half leg-holder d, and the sta 
ples h, and the half-cover e' being provided in 
its inner edge, near its rear end, with the half 
sprue i, Substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
NICKOLAUS ZINS. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. L. MESKER, 
I. B. MESKER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289466.txt	(No Model.) 
M 
No. 289,466. 
 
S, STUTZ. 
CONVEYER, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Deo. 4, 1883. 
 
 
 
- 
W E. 
 
YS)as 
.A. 
26%.e. 
 
Nest. Sifascia-St. 
SSNs 2,733 
(No. Model.) 
No. 289,466. 
S. STUTZ. 
CONVEYER. 
8. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 4, 1883 
N. 
W 
s 
r 
w | 
e 
N t 
i 
N 
 
 
9 
  
  
  
 
 
M 
Sy 
S. 
xx 
&S N R 
 
  
 
 
 
g 
S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 289,466. 
S. STUTZ. 
CONVEYER. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Deo. 4, 1883. 
N\,\,\, 
(6.2673.7%. - 
as Scastians...t 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
SEBASTIAN STUTZ, OFALLEGHENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CONVEYER. 
SPECIFICATION forming 
part of Letters Patent No. 289,466, dated December 4, 1883. 
Application filed June 18, 1883. (No model.) 
IO 
15 
- 
To all, whom it malf concern. 
of both, if desired, are mounted by suitable 
Beit known that I, SEBASTIANSTUTZ, a citi 
tongue-and-groove or other guide connections 
Zen of the United States, residing at Alle 
upon a bed-plate, a, and are made adjustable 
gheny, county of Allegheny, State of Penn 
by screws a, working through lugs a' on one 
5 sylvania, have invented or discovered a new, 
side of the pulley-blocks, whereby the shafts 
and useful Improvement in Conveyers; and I 
carrying the sprocket-wheels are made mov 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
able to and from each other to tighten or loosen 
clear, concise, and exact description thereof, 
the chains. On the periphery sides of the 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
sprocket-wheels (see Fig. 10, Sheet 3, and Fig. 
ings, making a part of this specification, in 
5, Sheet 1) are made a double row of project 
which-like letters indicating like parts 
ing lugs or sprockets, e, located at or about the 
Figure 1, Sheet 1, is a view in side eleva 
middle of the side, and, by preference, open 
tion of my improved conveyer, the middlepor 
every other side of the polygonal periphery. 65. 
tion being broken away. Fig. 2 is a top plan 
These lugs are designed to engage the links of 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is an end elevation. 
the carrying-chains and prevent the chains 
Fig. 4 is a detached view of one of the plates 
from slipping in whichever direction the wheels 
employed in the conveyer. Fig. 5 shows in 
and chains may be driven. Two or more end 
top plan a portion of the conveyer, its chains 
less chains are employed, each being composed 7o 
and sprocket-wheels broken away in part. 
of links c. (See Fig.11, Sheet 3.) These links 
Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9, Sheet 2, are views similar 
have an eye, c', at one end, and a socket, c, at 
to Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively, the same 
the opposite end, adapted to receive the eye of 
illustrating certain modifications in construc 
the adjacent link, the several links being con 
tion. Fig. 10, Sheet 3, shows by a view in 
nected, through their pins c, in the usual man- 75 
side elevation, drawn to an enlarged scale, one 
ner. At or in the center of eachlinkis formed 
of the driving-wheels and a portion of the 
a flattened bed-plate or base, c'. These plates 
conveyer. Fig. 11 is an enlarged view in per 
are designed to receive the sheet-metal pans 
spective of one of the links forming part of the 
or buckets of the conveyers, as presently de 
conveyer-chain, and Fig. 12 is a similar view 
scribed. On either side of plate or base c', in So 
of one of the rollers employed in carrying or 
front and rear, are laterally-projecting pins c, 
supporting the conveyer. 
separated from each other about the width of 
My invention relates to certain improve. 
the lugs e on the sprocket-wheel. The lugs e 
mentsinapparatus for conveying minerals and 
are designed to enter between these pins, on 
other heavy substances; and, in general terms, 
each side of the link, and make engagement 
it consists of certain combinations of endless 
therewith to propel the chains, and in order 
chains formed of pivotally-connected links, 
to prevent interference betweenthe bed-plates 
pans, or buckets secured to and carried by the 
c" and the lugse, the latter are hollowed out at 
links, wheels for driving the chains, rollers for 
the center, as at e, Fig. 10, thereby making 
supporting the chains and pans between the 
room for the convex form of the bed-plates or 
driving-wheels, means for adjusting one or 
their under face. 
:- 
4o both the driving-wheels to tighten the chains, 
In Patent No. 251,315, granted to me De 
means for charging material onto the conveyer, 
cember 20, 1881, I have shown and claimed a 
and also in the construction of the several 
link somewhat similar in construction to the 
parts of the apparatus by which they are fitted 
one here shown and described; but in such 
to perform their several functions, as herein 
prior link but one pin was employed, adapted 
after more fully described and claimed. 
to make engagement with sprocketsfor driving 
In the drawings, A represents a frame-work 
the chain in one direction only. - By provid 
of timber, carrying at either end timber-brack-ing two pins, one on either side of the sprock 
ets A, on which are mounted shafts a, jour-ets, provision is made for driving the chain IOC 
naled in pillow-blocks a, each shaft carrying in either direction, as well as for preventing, 
two polygonal sprocket-wheels, E, (see Fig. 5,) slipping; also, in the prior link referred to 
on which the carrying - chains C C are sup- no provision was made for attaching conveyer 
ported. The pillow-blocks of one shaft, a, or buckets to the links. 
85 
35 
. 
. 
45 
90 . 
95 
... 
2s 9,466 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
One feature of improvement in the present 
invention is the bed-plate c', by which I am 
enabled to make secure and convenient attach 
ment to the sheet-metal plates forming the 
conveyers. One form of these plates is shown 
in perspective at D, Fig. 4, and another in 
Fig. 9. Any suitable rivet or bolt holes may 
be formed in the plates, adapted to register 
With the corresponding holes, c', in the bed 
plates, through which rivets or bolts e", Fig. 
10, are passed for attachment. The pans or 
buckets D, Figs. 4 and 9, are in width equal 
or about equal to the length of the links, and 
their length is somewhat greater than the dis 
tance between the two chains C C, by which 
the pans are carried. One feature of improve 
ment in this connection is the covered form of 
the rear edge of the pan, as represented at d, 
whereby a close joint is maintained between 
successive pans as they overlap and turn over 
the angles of the sprocket - wheels. This 
feature of relationship is clearly represented 
in Fig. 10, in which the direction of motion 
for ordinary conditions of work is represented 
by arrows. As there shown, the forward or 
leading edge of each pan overlaps the rear or 
following edge of the preceding pan, and as 
the pans turn the angles of the wheels the 
upper or overlapping edge fits tightly upon 
the under or curved edge of the preceding 
pan, and thereby prevents waste of the min 
eral or earth between the overlapping edges 
by enabling the latter to preserve close con 
tact. In order to provide for these underlap 
ping curved edges d, the shank c of the link 
between the ends c' c and the central bed, c', 
is reduced somewhat in width, so that in ef. 
fect the Socket-joints or pivoted connections 
between links are greater in diameter than 
the width of shank c', and the curved plates 
d may rest thereon without binding upon the 
shanks; also, the bed c' is correspondingly 
elevated above the edge of the shank, and its 
flat face is, by preference, slightly inclined in 
the direction of the length of the link, in or 
der that the pans may overlap, as shown. An 
other feature of improvement in this connec 
tion is the means employed for supporting the 
conveye's between the sprocket-wheels. To 
this end Small rollers i, Fig. 12, in any de 
sired number, Suitably mounted on metal 
frames or plates i', are fastened by rivets or 
otherwise to the upper or carrying face of 
the pans D, (see Figs. 10 and 1,) or to such 
number of the pans as may be desired, and 
these rollers, in the under or lower passage 
of the conveyers from wheel to wheel, travel 
or ride upon a metal or other suitable stringer 
or beam, A, Secured in any suitable manner 
to the frame-work A. I prefer to employ two 
rows of these rollers near opposite ends of the 
pans, or immediately over the carrying-chains, 
and, if desired, they may be fastened either to 
the pans alone; or their fastening bolts or riv 
etS may be passed through the pans and se 
cured to the bed-plates c' of the chain-links. 
The conveyer is supported in its upper pas 
sage from wheel to wheel by rollers n, journaled 
in suitable metal boxes, n, which are secured 
to stringers or beams A", beneath the chains, 
and extend across from side to side beneath, 
and thereby afford bearing for the chains. 
Any desired number of these rollers may be 
employed to afford requisite support for the 
conveyer and prevent Sagging, so as to carry 
the load in substantially a horizontal plane. 
By arranging these bearing-rollers in and i and 
their respective track-beams A' A' under or 
in the vertical planes of the chains direct sup 
port for and steadier movement of the chains 
is secured, and also the pans are supported di 
rectly beneath that part which carries the 
greatest load. This is an important and use 
ful provision in conveyers designed to carry 
heavy matter, as earth or minerals, because 
bending or sagging of pans in the center in 
terferes seriously with easy and proper work 
ing of the apparatus. 
In order to hold the mineral or earth to be 
conveyed upon the pans, side plates, R, may 
be employed, as in Sheet 1, which plates may 
be supported by brackets R', secured to the 
timbers of the frame A. The side plates, R, 
may be of any height, as may be required, suf 
ficient clearance being made between their 
lower edges and the upper surface of the con 
veyer-pans to prevent friction. If desired, 
however, the ends of the conveyer-pans may 
be bent upward at an angle, as represented in 
Fig. 9, and the flanged sides thus formed will 
serve the same purpose as the side plates, R, 
Figs. 1 and 3, in preventing the mineral or 
earth from falling over the edges of the con 
veyer; or in many cases side guards may be 
omitted entirely. I prefer to use the fixed 
side boards, R, when any provision of this 
kind is needed, because the pans are not load 
ed thereby, and they are also free from the 
liability to become choked or bent, so as to in 
terfere with the proper working of the pans or 
bucketS. 
Provision is made for charging the minerals 
or earth upon the conveyel's by means of hop 
pers, (represented in part by the frame-work 
H, Figs 1 and 5, and also Figs. 3 and 7.) h 
represents feed-opening regulated by the le 
ver-governed valve or gate h". The relative 
length and width of this opening, in its pre 
ferred form, is shown in Figs. I and 3 or 5 and 
7, respectively-that is, the length is greater 
than the width in order to secure rapid charg 
ing and depositing of a greater part of thema 
terial in the central line of the conveyer, or 
about midway between the Supporting-chains, 
so that the load may be evenly distributed 
thereon. In many cases side plates, R, or 
their equivalent sides d', may be dispensed 
with; and therefore I do not wish to limit my 
invention to the use of these features of con 
struction; also, various modifications may be 
made in details of construction, which will 
not alter the functions or operation of the sev 
eral parts, and such modifications I consider 
as coming within my invention. 
! 
go 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I25. 
 
2S9,466 
3 
. 
I claim herein as my invention-- 
1. The link c, having thereon a bed or plate, 
6", for attachment of the conveyer-pan, and 
having two pins, c, projecting laterally from 
5 the link on either side of the bed-plate, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. A conveyer-chain, C, composed of pivoted 
links c, havingpinscprojecting laterally there 
fromin front and rear of the center of the links, 
Io in combination with polygonal sprocket-wheels 
E, having sprockets e thereon engaging the 
links between the pins on each side, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination of sprocket-wheels E, 
I5 chains C, pans or buckets D, secured to and 
carried by the links of the chains, bracketsR, 
and side plates, R, secured to the brackets 
above and at either end of the conveyer-pans, 
substantially as set forth. 
2O 4. The combination of frame A A', having 
 
track-beams Athereon, in combination with 
sprocket-wheels E, chains C, the beams Abe 
ing beneath and in the vertical plane of the 
chains, pans D, and rollers i, such rollers be 
ing secured to the inner face of the pans in the 25 
line of or over the chains, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
5. The combination of frame AA, sprock 
et-wheels E, chains C, pans D, track-beams 
A, secured to the frame in the vertical plane 3o 
of the chains, and rollers n, journaled on the 
track-beams beneath, and supporting the 
chains in their upper passage between the 
sprocket-wheels, substantially as set forth. 
hand. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 35 
in SEBASTIAN STUTZ. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. WHITTLESEY, 
C. L. PARKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289566.txt	(Model.) - 
L. S. SAMUEL. 
 
CARD FOR BOOK MARKS AND FOR ADWERTISING MEDIUMS, 
No. 289,566, 
... v. 
Patented Deo. 4, 1883. 
 
4. 
4/. 24%-46. 
92% 4. -e?oay/7 
Inventor 
Zeopoad S.Sazraea, 
afe &a-ee-y (27ze/3 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEOPOLD S. SAMUEL OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
CARD FOR BOOK-MARKS AND FOR ADVERTISING MEDIUMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 289,566, dated December 4, 1883. 
Application filed June 25, 1883. 
(Model.) 
 
 
25 
35 
45 
O 
claims. 
- 
to all, whom it may concei'n : 
a background, g, of some contrasting color, and 
Beit known that I, LEOPOLD S. SAMUEL, a 
with or without a design imprinted thereon, 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
and also lettered papers h, which parts gh 
ark, in the county of Essex and State of New 
are suitably gummed on their reverse sides, 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
and thus adapted to be secured to the card. 55 
Improvements in Cards for Book-Marks and 
From a collection of such parts g h the child 
for Advertising Mediums; and I do hereby 
may select the letters of his name, or make 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
other selection, as he may desire, and secure - 
exact description of the invention, such as 
the same to the card A. 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
. Having thus described my invention, what I 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref. 
claim as my invention is 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
1. An advertising-card, A, provided with 
ings, and toletters of referencemarked thereon, 
colored transparent and adjustable parts e, 
which form a part of this specification. 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth 
I5. The object of this invention is to provide a 
and shown. 
novelty acceptable to young people and adapt 
2. In combination, the card A and pivoted 
ed to meet the wants of advertisers; and it portions of transparent colored matter, sub 
consists in the arrangements and combina: 
stantially as set forth. 
tions of parts, substantially as will be herein 
3. In combination, the card-board A, hav 
after set forth, and finally embodied in the 
ing a perforation therein, and pivoted arms 
provided with differently-colored transparent 
The accompanying drawing indicates aplan 
portions f, substantially as and for the pur 
of an advertising-card or book-mark, A be 
poses set forth and shown. 
ing a card having a suitable amount of space 
4. In combination, a card provided with 
on it for printed matter, such as an adver 
imprinted matter and pivoted arms having dif- 75 
tisement or a motto, b b. Said card is perfo 
ferently - colored transparent matter thereon. 
rated, as at c, and to it is attached, by an eye 
5. An advertising-card having parts g and 
let, d, or other fastener, arms e, adapted to 
h secured thereto, and having a perforation, 
revolve on said eyelet, and carrying disks.f, of 
c, therein and pivoted transparent portion 
glass, gelatine, or other colored and transpar 
thereon, as set forth. 
ent substance. By revolving the arms the 
6. In combination, the advertising-cardhav 
disks may be alternately or together brought 
ing an imprint impressed thereon, and a back 
over the perforation or perforations, so that 
ground, g, and lettered portions I, gummed, 
on looking through the glass or transparent 
glued, cemented, or otherwise secured to said 
material objects will be given the color of the 
card A. by an adhesive substance, as herein 
Said transparent matter, as will be under 
Set forth. 
stood. By combining two or more different 
7. In combination, the parts g h, secured 
colors secondary colors may be produced in 
by an adhesive substance to the card A, and 
almost endless variety. The colors may be at 
said card. A provided with a transparent and . 
tached to the card and be adapted to project 
colored substance, to allow objects to be seen 9o 
over the edges thereof, and the perforation c 
therethrough, as herein set forth, said parts 
be dispensed with, without departing from the 
being arranged and operating for the pur 
spirit of my invention. When gelatine is used, 
poses stated. 
I prefer to cover the same with mica to prevent 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
the hand from marring the surface, and thus 
have hereunto set my hand this 15th day, of 95 
reducing the transparency of the same. 
June, 1883. 
To increase the value of the device in the 
childish mind, so that the same will be re 
tained longer and the value of the device as 
5o an advertising medium beincreased, I provide 
CHARLES H. PELL, 
F. F. CAMPBELL. 
LEOPOLD. S. SAMUEL. 
Witnesses: 
'', 
85 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289667.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 289,667. 
, W. I. LEE, 
BAKING PAN, 
Patented Dec. 4, 1883. 
 
f M 
f 
i 
 
Nu/N. 
urs/ m 
z - 
24. 
2 
22 aff 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WASHINGTON I. LEE, OF PEEKSKILL NEW YORK. 
BAKN G a PAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 289,667, dated December 4, 1883. 
Application filed April 6, 1883. (No model.) 
. 
55 
E are provided with like rabbets, e, in the 
outer surfaces at the free edges, which rabbets 
fit against each other, so that when the sec 
tions D. D. are both swung down the outer 
surfaces of the hinge-pieces will be flush. The 
hinge-pieces E E are each provided at the 
lower ends of the vertical shank with an out 
Wardly-projecting stud, d. In place of the L- 6o 
shaped hinge-pieces EE, straight pieces may 
be used, the horizontal shanks being dispensed 
with; but I prefer to use them as shown, as 
they materially strengthen the corner of the 
cover. To the outer surface of each side of 65 
the pan ajaw-plate, F, is attached, the upper 
edge of which is almost flush with the upper 
edge of the pan, and the upper part of which 
jaw-plate is such a distande from the outer sur 
face of the side of the pan that the side of the 7o 
cover and the hinge-piece E or E can pass in 
between the inner Surface of the jaw-plate and 
the outer surface of the upper part of the jaw, 
as shown in Fig. 4. The bottom of the recess 
thus formed in the inner surface of the jaw- 75 
plate is flush with the top of the bead C. Each 
jaw-plate F is provided in its inner surface 
with a downwardly-curved groove, G, adapted 
to receive the Studs d. Each cover-section D 
is provided near the end with an aperture, 
which can be closed by a valve, J. The pan 
and the cover are provided with suitable han 
dles. If desired, the cover can be made of 
one piece instead of two hinged sections, as 
shown. 
The pan is used in the following manner: 
The cover is placed on the pan, the studs d 
in the hinge - pieces passing into the curved 
grooves G in the jaw-plates, and thereby lock 
ing the cover in place on the pan. The valves go 
are closed, and thus the moisture contained 
in the article being baked cannot escape, and 
the article can be baked very rapidly. In 
baking meats it will not be necessary to add 
Water, as the moisture of the meat, which 95 
moisture is retained, will be sufficient. 
If 
bread, &c., is to be browned, the valves J can 
be opened more Or leSS. One section of the 
cover can easily be opened to examine the con 
tents of the pan, the studs d passing out of Ioo 
the curved grooves G. The stud d of the one 
section D holds it in place on the pan while 
the othersection is being raised. As the lower 
part of the cover overlaps the upper part of 
85 
IO 
25 
To all, whom it nually concern, : 
Beit known that I, WASHINGTON I. LEE, 
of Peekskill, Westchester county, New York, 
have invented a new and Improved Baking 
5 Pan, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved baking - pan for baking 
bread, meats, &c., in the most perfect manner. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal elevation of my 
I5 improved baking-pan, showing half of the 
cover raised. Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional ele 
vation of the same on the line acac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged detail side view of the 
hinge-pieces and locking device of the cover, 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail cross-sectional 
elevation of the cover at the hinge, and Fig. 
5 is an enlarged detail plan view of the valve 
in the cover. Fig. 6 is a face view of the in 
ner side of one of the jaw-plates. 
The baking-pan. A is made of sheet-iron in 
the usual oblong shape, and to the bottom and 
ends of the same a sheet-iron strip, B, or thin 
cast-iron plate is riveted at each side, which 
strips or plates form supports for the pan, so 
that the bottom of the same will not come in 
contact with the hot stove-plate, and the con 
tents of the pan will not be burned. A hori 
zontal bead, C, or ridge isformed in the outer 
surface of the sides and ends of the pan a short 
distance below the upper edge, on which bead 
or ridge the lower edge of the cover D is to 
rest, so that the lower parts of the inner sur 
face of the sides and ends of the cover will rest 
against the outer surface of those parts of the 
sides and ends of the pan above the bead C. 
The cover D is formed of two sections, D'D', 
hinged to each other at the lap of the sections. 
An L-shaped hinge-piece, E, is secured to the 
outer surface of each side of one section D. at 
45 the hinged end of the said section, and ahinge 
piece, E, is secured to the outer surface of 
each side of the other section D at the hinged 
end, which hinge-pieces are pivoted to each 
other at their upper ends, on which pivots the 
5o sections can then swing. The hinge-pieces E 
are provided with rabbets e. On the inner sur 
faces at the free edges, and the hinge-pieces 
35 
 
2 
2s 9,662 
a cover formed of two sections, D', hinged to 
each other, joint-pieces E. E", secured to the 
inner ends of the cover-sections, which joint 
pieces are provided with studs d, and the jaw 
plates F, secured to the outer surfaces of the 
sides of the pan at the middle, which jaw 
plates are provided at their inner surfaces 
with curved grooves, substantially as herein 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
WASHINGTON I. LEE. 
Witnesses: 
ISAAC R. SECOR, 
HARRY M. WEBSTER, 
the pan, a very tight joint will beformed, and 
no moisture nor fumes can escape. 
Having thus described my invention, claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with a baking-pan, of 
a cover formed of two sectionshinged to each 
other, studs projecting from the lower inner 
corners of each section, and of jaw-plates at 
tached to the Outer Surfaces of the sides of the 
pan at the middle, which jaw-plates are each 
provided with a curved groove in the inner 
surface, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, with a baking-pan, of 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289767.txt	(No Model.) 
T. EW ANS. 
FIFTH WHEEL, 
- 
No. 289,767, 
Patented Deo. 4, 1883. 
 
  
TRISS 
TET2% 
M 
 
 
 
 
INVENTOR: 
276.co/224 
7 BY 4s. C. 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS EVANS, OF GRAVESEND, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO WILLIAM H. 
ROBERTS, OF NEW YORK, AND CALEB R. TURNER, OF BROOKLYN, N. Y. 
FFTH- WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 289,767, dated December 4, 1883. 
Application filed April 26, 1883, 
(No model.) 
Be it known that I, THOMAS EVANS, of with the upper portion, C. This portion D is 45 
flanges did, upright, and corresponding in size 
io all Lulon, it inctly conce/72, 
Gravesend, in the county of Kings and State 
also by preference cast of malleable iron or 
steel, and it has the central depression, b', 
of New York, have invented a new and Im 
proved Fifth-Wheel for Wagons, of which the 
formed in it, which corresponds with the Wear 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
ing-surface b of the upper portion, C, for the 
tion. 
anti-friction rollers E to run in. The friction- 5O 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
rollers E are journaled in the side rims, ff, of 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
the circular skeleton frame F, which frame 
fits in the lower portion, D, of the fifth-wheel, 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
as shown clearly in the drawings, and the roll 
Figure l is a sectional elevation, showing 
ers E are made slightly conical or tapering 55 
my new and improved fifth-wheel applied to 
from their outer ends inward, so that they will 
a platform spring-wagon. Fig. 2 is a broken 
roll freely between the circular upper and 
plan view of the fifth-wheel removed from the 
lower portions, CD, without canting or cramp 
wagon, and Fig. 3 is a detailed sectional ele 
ing, as they would be liable to do if made of 
vation taken on the line a' a' of Fig. 2. 
like diameter throughout. Constructed in ?o 
The object of the invention is to reduce the 
this manner, it will be seen the anti-friction 
friction of fifth-wheels to as great a degree as wheels are applied to the fifth-wheel in a prac 
possible, and for that purpose I employ the tical manner, and that they reduce the friction 
means hereinafter described, and pointed out between the upper and lower parts of the fifth 
in the claim. 
wheel, and therefore not only render it more 65 
Referring to the drawings, the wagon-box 
durable, but make the turning of the Wagon 
A and the running-gear B, consisting of the 
much easier for the team. 
wheels, axles, springs, &c., may be of any ap 
Although I have shown and described my 
proved construction. 
invention as applied to platform spring-Wag 
C is the upper portion of the fifth-wheel, 
ons, it is obvious that it may be applied with 7o 
equal facility to otherforms of wagons and not 
which is attached to the box A in the same 
manner that the upper portions of the ordi 
depart from the spirit of my invention. 
nary fifth-wheels are attached; and D is the 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
lower portion of the fifth-wheel, which is at 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
tached upon the cross-pieces act of the running 
A fifth-wheel formed of two circular chan- 75 
gear in the ordinary or in any approved man 
nel-plates, CD, provided with interlapping 
ner. The upper portion, C, is a circular chan 
flanges c d and the corresponding central de 
nel-plate used in an inverted position, and is 
pression and wearing-surface b' b, in combi 
by preference cast of malleable iron or steel, 
nation with the circular skeleton frame F and 
with the central downwardly-projecting wear 
the conical rollers E, journaled in the rims f of 8o 
ing-surface, b, that runs upon the anti-friction 
said frame, as shown and described. 
rollers E, and this portion C is made of a 
width between its flanges c 0 to properly fit 
over and inclose the upper edges of the flanges 
did of the lower portion, D, which portion D 
is also a circular channel-plate, used with the 
THOMAS EVANS. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY L. GOODWIN, 
EDWD. M. CLARK. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289867.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 289,867. 
R., SMITH. 
VIBRATING PROPELLER. 
Patented Dec. ll, 1883. 
Firt. 
 
Wifraesses. 
a-o.2- - 
/avezior, 
/ic/arcaSnazz/z. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD SMITH, OF SHERBROOKE, QUEBEC, CANADA. 
V BRATING PROPELLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 289,867, dated December 11, 1883. 
Application filed January 2, 1883. (No model.) 
25 
- 
To all whon it may concern : 
Be it known that I, RICHARD SMITH, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing at 
Sherbrooke, in the county of Sherbrooke and 
5 Dominion of Canada, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Reciprocat 
ing Propellers; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
IO skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to letters or 
figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
These improvements relate to a class of ma 
rine propellers shown and described in Let 
ters Patent of the United States numbered 
264,903, and issued to myself on the 26th day 
of September, 1882. Under the construction 
shown in said patent the propeller-blades are 
arranged to open and close horizontally, and 
reciprocate in an opening through the stern 
dead-Wood of the vessel, and are greatly ex 
posed to the violence of the sea. In my pres 
ent construction I preserve thestern dead-wood 
or the lower part of the same intact, and Iem 
ploy tWO propellers of one blade each-one 
upon each side of said dead-wood-and I ar 
range the said propeller-blades vertically, so 
as to open and close in vertical planes, in lieu 
of horizontal, as before. 
Each blade lies. 
closely up to the dead-wood, and plays within 
horizontal guides Secured to such dead-wood. 
For this reason the small quantity of broken 
water between the propeller and dead-wood of. 
fers very little friction to the blade on the re 
turn-stroke, and the blades, as before inti 
mated, are greatly protected from the shocks 
and thrusts of the waves. 
The drawings accompanying this specifica 
tion represent, in Figure 1, a side elevation of 
a navigable vessel containing my improved 
propeller. Fig. 2 is an end view of the stern 
of the same. 
In said drawings, A represents the hull of a 
navigable vessel, and B the stern dead-wood 
of the same. 
C represents a vertical cross-head sliding to 
and fro of the dead-wood longitudinally of the 
vessel upon each side the latter, and operated 
by a longitudinal tubular shaft, C, extending 
into the interior of the vessel, and properly 
operated to reciprocate the cross-head. 
- 
- 
35 
40 
45 
65 
DD represent the folding blades of the twin 
propellers, each being pivoted at its base to 55 
one of the cross-heads C, while its outer edge 
is pivoted to one end of a rod, E, the opposite 
end of such rod being pivoted to a shaft, F, 
sliding within the tubular shaft C, and With 
the latter extending into the interior of the 60 
vessel, and operated in suitablemanner. The 
two shafts Cand F are operated in such man 
ner as to cause each blade D to fold during 
the ingoing or idle stroke of the propeller and 
open during the outgoing or active stroke. I 
have not in the present instance shown the en 
gine for operating the two shafts C and F, as 
this engine is fully shown and described in 
my patent before mentioned, and in itself con 
stitutes no novel feature of my present im- 7o 
provements. The cross-heads C C are guided 
by and reciprocate upon parallel horizontal 
ways or slides G. G., secured to opposite sides 
of the dead-wood B. 
I claim 
1. The stern dead-woodB of a vessel, pro 
vided on both sides with longitudinal guide 
ways G, in combination with the vertical cross 
heads C, moving in said guideways, the pair 
of wings D D, pivoted on said guideways and 8o 
opening and closing in a horizontal direction, 
the reciprocating shafts C, respectively at 
tached to said cross-head, and the reciprocat 
ing shafts F, operating on the outer parts of 
said wings, respectively, substantially as set 85 
75 
forth. 
- 
- 
2. A tubular shaft, C, and a vertical cross 
head, C, to which it is attached, in combina 
tion with the stern dead-wood B and guide 
ways on its sides for said cross-head, shaft F, 
reciprocating within tubular shaft C, propeller 
wing or blade D, which is hung on said CrOSS 
head, so as to have a horizontally-opening and 
closing as well as a longitudinally-sliding mo 
tion, and a rod, E, which connects shaft F to 95 
the outer part of said wing or blade D, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
RICHARD SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
H. E. LODGE, 
THos. T. BAILEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US289967.txt	(No Model.) 
C, B, BOYNTON. 
HOT AIR FURNACE. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 289, 967. 
Patented Dec. ll, l883. 
E. r a E 
 
. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) " C. B. BOYNTON. 
HOT AIRFURNACE, 
No. 289967. 
Patented Dec. 11, 1883. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
S 
 
 
 
 
 
Y S 
/ 
(2. Eliza i 
mitz 
A 
r 
Z. 
 
 
M 
N 
N 
N 
S 
N 
Raz 
S. Zial Se/ 
a 
N 
N 
N 
S 42 
Z 4 
WITNESSEs: 
62% 
64-yarse 
-- a-%2%. 
, 
INVENTOR: 
664 (2247 
By M4 G 
ATTORNEYs, 
Nrris Photo-Lithographer washington, D.c. 
 
 
- W 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES B. BOYNTON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
HOT AIR FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION. forming part of Letters Patent No. 2.89,967, dated Dccember 11, 1883. 
Application filed September 12, 1882. (No model.) 
55 
surface of the inner wall, f, of the radiator 
To all wivon, it inctly concern : . 
and the outer surface of the wallf of the ex 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs B. Bo YNTON, 
tension E, is the air-heating space of the ra 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
diator, which space is made larger at the top 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
than at the bottom by making the said walls,ff 
in Hot-Air Furnaces, of which the following 
slightly diverging away from each other from 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying the bottom toward the top, and this diverging 
of the walls.ff at the same time contracts 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
the size of the smoke and flame flues or pas 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
sages FF from the bottom toward the top, as 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure i is a broken perspective view of 
shown. 
The chimney-opening H is formed in the 
my improved hot-air furnace. - Fig. 2 is an 
outer wall of the radiator, a little to one side 
inverted plan view of the radiator. Fig. 3 is 
of the confluence of the passages F F, as 
a sectional elevation of the radiator, taken on 
shown in Fig. 2, and in the passage F, be 
the line acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a plan view 
tween the line of the passage F and the chim 
of the annular bottom or supporting plate of 
ney-opening H, is placed the partition K, thus 
the radiator; and Fig. 5 is a sectional ele 
causing the products of combustion issuing 
vation taken on the liney y of Fig. 4, showing 
from the fire-pot to traverse the entire circuit 
the radiator and bottom plate thereof placed 
of the interior of the radiator, as indicated by 
upon the dome of the furnace. 
the arrows in Fig. 2, before reaching the 
The first object of this invention is to pro 
chimney-passage. 
mote economy in the consumption of fuel in 
The bottom plate, D, of the radiator has 
hot-air furnaces by retarding the products of 
the inwardly-projecting extension D', which 
combustion in their passage to the chimney 
is curved at its end and formed with the lip d, 
until all of the available heat is extracted 
which is adapted to fit in and form a good 
therefrom by the ascending air. This ob 
joint with the upper edge of the dome C, as 
ject I accomplish by means 
f the construc 
shown in Fig. 5, and upon the upper surface of 
tion and combinations of pats, substantially 
this plate are formed the double sets of flanges 
as hereinafter fully set forth and claimed. 
d' d', between which the tongues bb, formed 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
on the lower edges of the radiator E, are adapt 
sheet-metal casing of the furnace, which is of 
ed to fit, as shown in Fig. 5, for forming a 
ordinary construction, and B represents the 
corrugated cast-iron fire-pot, and C the corru-, perfectly gas-tight joint between the radiator 
gated cast-iron dome, which is contracted at and plate, these parts being adapted to be bolt 
its upper end, as shown at c, Fig. 5, for re-ed together by bolts passing through the corre 
ceiving the annular cast-iron top or support-sponding lugs, i i", formed, respectively, upon 
ing plate, D, and radiator E, as clearly illus- the radiator and the plate. 
trated in said figure and in Fig. 1. . 
h h are braces extending from the walls f' 
The radiator E is by preference made of of the extension E of the radiator to the wall 
4o cast-iron, but may be made, of sheet-iron or off thereof, at their lower edges, for strength 
both cast and sheet iron, and is made hollow, ening and rendering the radiator firm and 
and by preference is in general form that of rigid, and N is a covered opening in the outer 
an annulus, but with the inwardly-projecting wall of the radiator, through which the radi-95 
radialextension E, which extensionis rounded, ator may be cleaned. Constructed in this 
45 and is adapted to fit upon or in and to form a manner, the air entering the casing A will be 
good joint with the upper reduced end of the come heated from contact with the body BC 
dome C, as shown clearly in Fig. 5. - The pas- of the furnace and exterior of the radiator E, 
sages FF in the interior of the hollow radia- in the ordinary way, and a portion of the air IOO 
tor E and the extensionEthereofare the pas- will ascend through the central opening, M., 
sages through which the products of combus- of the plate D, into the heating-space J, and 
tion pass from the fire-pot to the chimney- become still further heated from contact with 
opening H, and the space J, between the outer the interior walls of the radiator. This heat 
75 
90 
. 
IC 
2 5 
3 5 
 
2 
2s 9,967 
O 
ing-space, being larger at the top than at the 
bottom, accommodates the increase in volume 
of the air, due to its expansion from the addi 
tional heat which it takes up, and thus does 
not in any manner retard or restrain the up 
ward current of the heated air, but, on the 
Contrary, facilitates and increases it; and 
the products of combustion from the burning 
fuel in the furnace, being compelled to trav 
: 
erse the whole circuit of the spaces FF of 
the radiator, are retarded in their course to 
the chimney and longer exposed to the air to 
be heated, and they heat a greater exposed 
surface of the radiator than they otherwise 
Would, so that the maximum amount of heat 
from the fuel will be utilized, thus greatly in 
creasing the efficiency and heating-power of 
the furnace with a less consumption of fuel. 
Besides these advantages, the flanges d' d' of 
the plate D and the tongues b b of the radi 
ator, and the method of placing the plate and 
radiator upon the reduced opening c of the 
dome C, so that all points are about on a 
level with the top of the dome and below the 
chimney-opening H, render the furnace per 
fectly gas-tight, as the easiest escape for the 
gas will be through the chimney-opening H, 
it being nearer to the top of the radiator, where 
the gas will collect, than any joint in the fur 
nace. Furthermore, the flues or passages F 
F being smaller at the top than at the bottom, 
the Smoke, gases, flame, &c., are caused to 
expand in a chamber gradually diminishing in 
35 
size upward, and are thus most limited and con 
fined in their expansion at the top of the cham 
ber, which causes the products of combustion, 
in their course to the chimney-opening, to hug 
the lower part of the flues or spaces F F, 
thus facilitating and increasing the draft of 
the furnace, while at the same time a consid 
erable annount of heat is retained or retarded 
at the top of the radiator. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
'i. In a hot-air furnace, the dome-like radi 
ator consisting of the annular chamber E, the 
central chamber, E, and passage F, connect 
ing the said chambers together, the sides of 
the said chambers and passages being con 
tracted toward and at the top, whereby the 
air-space between the same is widened at the 
upper end, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. In a hot-air furnace, the combination, with 
the annular chamber E, central chamber, E, 
and passage, F, of the common bottom plate, 
D D, with the grooved flanges d' d', extend 
ing around its edges, and adapted to receive 
the tongues b of the sides of the annular cham 
ber and passage, gas-tight, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
CHARLES B. BOYNTON. 
Witlesses: 
H. A. WEST, 
C. SEDG WICK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290067.txt	(No Model) 
. 
No. 290,067, 
E. J. KRAETZER, . 
GLOVE FASTENER, 
Patented Deo. 11, 1883. 
Nsea. 
s 
I 
Dili, s 
a 
EE 3. 
32 27/ 
 
 
  
  
E. 
i 
 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN J. KRAETZER, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
GLOVEFAST ENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent. No. 290,067, dated December 11, 1888. 
Application filed September 17, 1883. (No model.) 
2O 
To all u'hon, it may concern, 
Be it known that I, EDWIN.J. KRAETZER, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk, State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a certain new 
5 and useful Improvement in Glove-Fasteners, 
of which the following is a description suffi 
- ciently full, clear, and exact to enable any per 
son skilled in the art or science to which said 
invention appertains to make and use the same, 
1o reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, representing 
my improved fastener in use; Fig. 2, a verti 
15 caltransversesection; Fig. 3, a top plan view; 
Fig. 4, a perspective view of the lower portion 
of the eyelet; Fig. 5, a like view of the upper 
portion of the eyelet, and Fig. 6 a perspective 
view of the catch. 
Like letters of reference indicate correspond 
ing parts in the different figures of the draw 
IngS. 
My invention relates to a fastener designed 
for fastening gloves, shoes, cloaks, coats, vests, 
25 and other garments; and it consists in a novel 
construction and arrangement of the parts, as 
hereinafter more fully set forth and claimed, 
by which a cheaper and more effective device 
of this character is produced than is now in 
In the drawings, A represents the lower por 
tion of the eyelet, B the upper portion, and C 
the catch. 
The lower portion, A, consists of a thin me 
35 tallic ring, ac, provided with an upwardly-pro 
jecting and outwardly-inclined ear, d, at either 
side of its central opening, m. 
The upper portion, B, consists of a thin me 
tallic ring, v, preferably corresponding in size 
4O With the ring ac, and provided at either side of 
its central opening with a downwardly-pro 
jecting and inwardly-inclined curved elastic 
flange, i, this portion of the eyelet being rep 
resented as reversed or upside down in Fig. 
455 of the drawings, to more fully show the 
flanges. 
The catch C consists of a small ball, f, plate 
g, neck or shankl, plate n, and stud r. The 
ballf and plate g are connected by the neckl, 
5O which is preferably inclined, as best seen in 
Fig. 2. The stud r has one of its ends sol 
dered or brazed to the plate n, its opposite end 
3O Ordinary use. . 
 
being fitted into and passing slightly through 
a hole in the plate.g., where it is secured, when 
the catch is attached to the glove or other ar- 55 
ticle with which it is used, by heading or up 
setting its protruding end 2. If preferred, the 
stud, may be brazed to the plate g, and the 
plate in furnished with a hole to receive its 
opposite end, in which it may be secured by 6o 
being headed or upset, as described. The stud 
r may also be made integral with the plate in 
org, if desired. 
In attaching the eyelet to the glove, a hole 
is first made near the edge of the flap D, of 65 
sufficient size to receive the elastic curved 
flanges i. The ring visthen placed on the flap 
with its flanges projecting downwardly through 
the hole, one of the spaces t being arranged 
on the side next the flap E, after which the 7O 
ring a is placed under the flap immediately 
beneath the ring , and in such a position that 
its locking-ears d will project upwardly be 
tween the flanges i through the spaces it. The 
ends of the ears d are then clinched or bent 75 
down over the ring v, as best seen in Fig. 3, 
thereby securely attaching both portions of 
the eyelet to the glove. The central opening, 
m, in the ring a is slightly larger than that in 
the ring v, so that when the flanges i are in 8o 
position for use they can be expanded Sufi 
ciently in the opening m to receive the ballf 
without being interfered with by thering a. 
In attaching the catch C to the glove, a small 
hole or perforation is made near the edge of 85 
the flap E, in which the stud risinserted from 
the under side of said flap. The stud is then 
passed through the hole in the plate g, and its 
protruding end headed or upset, thereby se 
curely fastening the catch to the flap, the neck 
of the catch being preferably arranged to in 
cline toward the flap D, as seen in Fig. 2. 
In the use of my improved fastener, the 
flanges i are forced downwardly over the ball 
f, thereby expanding or springing them out 
wardly as the ball passes between them, the 
neck l of the catch resting in one of the spaces 
t. After the ball has entered the eyelet, the 
flanges contract below its center, and thus hold 
it in place or retain it in the eyelet in a man 
ner which will be readily obvious without a 
more explicit description. The distance be 
tween the outer ends of the flanges i is less 
than the diameter of the ball f, thereby ren 
90 
95 
ICO 
2 
290,067 
dering it necessary to exert a slight amount of a stud connecting said plates, and a shank at 
tached to the outer plate provided with a ball, 
force to insert the ball in the eyelet and inter 
substantially as described. 
lock the two sections of the fastener, and also 
2. The combination of a catch consisting of 
a like amount of force to disconnect the Sec 
an inner and an outer plate, a stud connect 
tions. 
ing said plates, and a shank attached to the 
It will be understood that the strain is not 
outer plate provided with a ball, and a spring 
entirely on the flanges i when the glove is fast 
flanged eyelet adapted to receive the ball of 35 
ened, but mostly on the ring v, the principal 
said catch, substantially as described. 
office of the flanges being to retain the ball in 
3. The combination of an eyelet consisting 
the eyelet through which it protrudes, as seen 
of a flat ring for the inner side of the glove, 
in Figs. 1 and 2, the holes in the eyelet-plates 
boot, or garment, provided with ears at its in 
being sufficiently large to permit the ball to 
ner edge, and a ring for the outer side of the 
be passed through them. 
garment, provided at its inner edge with in 
I prefer to incline the shank l slightly to 
Wardly-inclined spring-flanges, the ears of the 
ward the flap D, as shown in Fig. 2; but it 
inner ring being adapted to pass through the 
may be arranged vertically or may incline in 
spaces between the flanges of the outer ring 
the opposite direction, if desired. 
and fold down on the latter, and a catch con 
The flanges i are formed integral with the 
sisting of an inner plate provided with a stud, 
ring ) and the flanges d with the ring ac, but 
and an outer plate adapted to turn on said stud, 
may be made separately, if preferred. 
provided with a projecting shank at its outer 
I hereby reserve the right to obtain a sepa 
edge, having a ball, substantially as described. 
rate patent on a subsequent application for the 
eyelet herein shown and described. 
EDWIN J. KRAETZER. 
Having thus explained my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A catch for glove, boot, or garment fast 
eners, consisting of an inner and an outer plate, 
C. A. SHAW, 
L. J. WHITE. 
Witn CSSeS: 
IO 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290168.txt	(No Model.) 
C. B. BASFORD, 
COMMODE ATTACHMENT FOR WASHSTANDS. 
No. 290,168, 
Patented Dec, ll, 1883, 
 
in. PETERs. Photo-Lahographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES, B. BASFORD, OF MALDEN, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF TWO. 
THIRDS TO JOHN W. DUNHAM, OF LIVERMORE FALLS, MAINE, AND 
CHARLES H. DUNHAM, OF BOSTON, MASSACEUSETTS. 
COMMODE ATTACHMENT FOR WASH-STANDS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 290,168, dated December 11, 1883. 
Application filed July 13, 1883. (No model.) 
To ali, whon, it half concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES B. BASFORD, 
of Malden, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
5 Improvements in Commode Attachments for 
Wash - Stands, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
an improved commode attachment adapted for 
Io use with a wash-stand or other like article of 
furniture, said attachment comprising an 
apertured seat, a support for a vessel, legs or 
supports for the seat, and pivoted links con 
necting thie seat with the interior of the stand, 
I5 whereby the seat is enabled to be wholly in 
closed in the stand or to be withdrawn there 
from and rest on its supports at the front of 
the stand, the links preventing the seat and 
vessel from tipping while in transit, and co 
2O operating with the supports in holding the at 
tachment in an upright position when it is re 
moved from the stand, all of which I will now 
proceed to describe and claim. . 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
25 part of tiais specification, Figure 1 represents 
a perspective view of a wash-stand provided 
with ny in proved attachment, the same being 
shown in position for use. Fig. 2 represents 
an end view, showing by dotted lines the at 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
Same parts in both figures. 
In the drawings, a represents a wash-stand 
having the usual receptacle, ', underitstop and 
My improved attachment is composed of 
an apeitured Seat, c, having a support, d, for 
a chamber - vessel, e, legs or supports ff, 
adapted to rest on the floor and support the 
4o seat, and two pairs of links or stiff metal rods, 
g g g g, which are pivoted at their opposite 
ends, respectively, to ears i , attached to the 
seat, and ears i i", attached to the interior of 
the stand (t. 
It will be seen that said links 
5 enable the seat to assume the position shown 
by dotted lines in Fig. 2, (the seat being wholly 
contained in the receptacle r.) and also to be 
moved outwardly, as shown in Fig. 1, until 
the supports.ff rest on the floor. The ar. 
35 a door, b, covering said receptacle. 
3o tachment moved back into the stand. 
. 
. 
. 
 
rangement of the links in pairs, as shown, so 
keeps the seat and vessel in a level position 
at all times, so that there is little or no liability. 
of spilling the contents of the vessel in mov 
ing it out or in. When the seat is moved out, 
as shown in Fig. 1, the links co-operate with 55 
the legs ff in supporting the seat. I do not 
limit myself, however, to the employment of 
two links at each side of the seat, for a single 
link may be employed at each side; but the 
seat would be liable to tip or work on its 6o 
pivotal connections with the links; hence I pre 
fer two links at each side, as shown. 
It will be observed that when the seat is in 
position for use, it is elevated above the floor. 
to such a height that it enables the user to sit 6 5 
comfortably. 
What claim is 
1. A commode attachment consisting of a 
holder for a chamber-vessel, having an aper 
tured seat at the top, legs or supports at the 7o 
bottom, brackets for attachment to interior of 
the wash-stand, and two links pivotally con 
nected at each side to the holder and brackets, 
as set forth, whereby the holder may be placed 
within the wash-stand or withdrawn for use, 75 
and the legs afford a support for it in either 
position, as and for the purposes stated. 
2. The combination, with a wash-stand or 
similar article of furniture, having a recep 
tacle, as , of a commode attachment consist- 8o 
ing of a holder for a chamber-vessel, having an 
apertured seat at the top, legs or supports at 
the bottom, brackets for attachment to the in 
terior of the receptacle, and two links pivot 
ally connected at each side to the holder and 85 
brackets, as described, whereby the holder 
may be placed within the receptacle or with 
drawn for use, and the legs afford a support 
for it in either position, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name. 
to this specification, in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses, this 11th day of July, 
1883. 
CHARLES B. BASFORD, 
90 
Witnesses: 
C. F. BROWN, 
T. T. MCNULTY, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290268.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J. READ. 
WHIP RACK, 
No. 290,268, 
Patented Dec, l8, 1883. 
3. aS2 
- Tit Fig. A 42. Inventor: 
2724. 
4 52.24 
/% -72. 
47.4%zed) 
% 
(22 
2-4 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES J. READ, OF CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
WHIP-RACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 290,268, dated December 18, 1888. 
Application filed March 19, 1883. 
(No model.) 
IO 
To ?till whom it may concern : 
Beit known that I, JAMESJ.READ, of Cam 
bridge, in the county of Middlesex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented a new and 
5 useful Improvement in Whip-Racks, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
device which is capable of holding a large 
number of common whips and any desired 
number of that class of whips known as 
bow-whips or English coach-whips in a 
small and compact space without interfering 
with each other, each whip being capable of 
removal without disturbing the others, and 
the bow-whips being so hung that the delicate 
bowed lash in which they terminate will be 
preserved in its proper shape while suspended 
from the rack. The device by which I accom 
plish these results is shown in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents an inverted plan of my 
improved whip-rack as it is fastened to the 
wall, and Fig. 2 shows a front elevation of the 
Sale, 
As will be readily seen from the drawings, 
this whip - rack consists of two parts-a. 
grooved base-piece, A, and a spurred crown 
piece, B. 
This base-piece consists of a thick i 
disk of any desired circumference, and upon 
3o its periphery are formed a number of grooves, 
bb, as shown in Fig. 1. 
Of course it is not 
necessary to make this base-piece of wood, 
though I have found wood to be a very light, 
handsome, and popular material (pr this part 
35 of the rack; nor is it necessary that more than 
the upper half of this base-piece should have 
a circular periphery. The lower half may be 
of any shape desired. The crown-piece is 
25 
Witnesses: 
W. P. PREBLE, Jr., 
WILLIAM. S. ROGERS. 
preferably made of cast-iron or other metal, 
the shape being substantially as shown, in that 4O 
it is desirable to have the small spurs at a, be-, 
tween which the common whips are placed, 
project considerably from the center of the 
crown. I have therefore placed these spurs 
upon the outer edge of a semicircular sweep, 45 
C, leaving the space D inside the sweep open. 
In the center of this crown-piece B is a long 
screw, c, preferably cast solid with the crown, 
and this screw passes through the center of the 
base-piece A, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 5C 
1, to bite into the wall, post, or other support 
on which the rack is hung. The length of 
this screw will obviously depend upon the 
thickness of the base-piece A, which in turn 
depends upon the number of grooves b b to be 55 
provided for bow-whips. Where four or five 
grooves are made therein, the screw will be 
much longer than that shown in the drawings, 
where two bow-whips only are used, and must 
be in all cases of sufficient length to pass 6o 
through the base-piece and bite the wall firmly. 
I do not intend to limit myself to the exact 
shape of the crown and base-piece, as it is ob 
vious many convenient shapes may be usedin 
stead of those shown; but 
65 
I clain 
The above-described whip-rack, consisting 
of a grooved base-piece and a semicircular 
spurred crown held together by the screw by 
which said rack is fastened to the wall or other 
support, substantially as hereinbefore de 
Scribed and shown. 
JAMES J. READ. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290368.txt	(. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED W. SPERRY, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF 
AND THOMAS J. MONTGOMERY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
COV POST ON FOR SHARPENING AND GRINDING METALS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 290,868, dated December 18, 1883. 
Application filed July 20, 1883. (No specimens.) 
To ?t7, Luhon, it 777?. If conce77, 
Be it known that I, ALFRED W. SPERRY, 
of Hartford, in the State of Connecticut, have 
invented a new and Improved Composition 
5 for Sharpening and Grinding Metal Wares, of 
which the following is a specification. 
It is common to employ sticks surfaced with 
emery for sharpening knives, scythes, and 
other cutting implements, and emery wheels 
IO to grind, polish, and sharpen metal goodsgen 
erally. I employ emery with oxide of iron in 
a finely-pulverized condition, with adhesive 
material-Such as glue-toform a grinding and 
polishing substance. These materials have 
I5 been used separately; but I find that the oxide 
of iron modifies the actions of the emery by 
lessening the scratching of the material that 
is being ground and polished. I addlinseed 
oil to the composition to prevent the adhesion | 
2O of the particles of metal that are ground off, 
and also use milk, which aids in preventing 
injury to the grinder by the action of water. 
In my improved composition I make use of 
the following ingredients: glue, boiled lin 
25 Seed-oil, milk, oxide of iron, and emery. The 
quantities of these several ingredients and 
their manipulation are as follows: I take, say, 
one and three-fourths pound of fine glue, and 
twelve Ounces of boiled linseed-oil, and add 
3O to them two quarts of milk. This mixture is 
cooked at as even a temperature as possible 
for eighteen hours in a water bath, and at the 
end of this time I add ten ounces of oxide of 
iron, and mix and thoroughly stir the mass 
35 while hot. To this aforesaid hot mass I add 
about seven pounds of emery, or in that pro 
portion. Care is to be taken not to mix to 
gether too much of the materials at one time, 
because the mass is liable to harden rapidly 
AO after the emery is added. It is preferable to 
mix together from time to time the hot semi 
liquid material With the emery in the propor 
tion of One pound of emery to one-seventh of . 
Such hot semi-liquid material and to place it 
in the mold or molds to set and harden. Af. 45 
ter the composition has been placed in the 
molds, said molds should be placed in cold 
Water for the composition to set and harden 
Sufficiently to allow the molds to be removed 
and the composition, in its desired form, to be 5o 
set aside for a few days to season before being 
used. This composition is exceedingly hard 
and tenacious. It is to be understood that the 
amount of material mixed at once will vary 
according to the size of the grinder that is to 55 
be molded. 
I may find it advantageous to increase or 
diminish some or all of the proportions of 
these ingredients, and I hereby reserve the 
right to so do without altering my said inven- 6o 
tion. The material spoken of as oxide of 
iron' is an iron ore treated by heat the same 
as in the manufacture of rouge and crocus, 
but subjected to a higher temperature, so as to 
make it of a darker color, and the same is pull- 65 
verized to a fine powder. 
The oil in the aforesaid composition appears 
to prevent the surface glazing by the adhesion 
of particles of the substances acted upon, and 
the milk and oil prevent injury to the grinder 7o 
by Water. By increasing the proportion of 
pulverized oxide of iron, the grinding qual 
ities of the material Will be lessened and the 
polishing qualities increased. 
I claim as my invention- 
The grinding or polishing wheel or surface, 
formed of emery, oxide of iron, glue, linseed 
oil, and milk, mixed together substantially as 
set forth. 
ALFRED W. SPERRY. 
75 
Witnesses: 
DAVID L. ABERDEIN, 
HUGH. O'FLAHERTY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290468.txt	(No Model.) 
C, G, PERKINS, 
AUTOMATIC REGULATOR FOR STORAGE BATTERIES, 
No. 290,468, 
" 
Patented Dec. 18, 1883, 
f 
O 
o 
l 
| l| | 2 
2Y-2 Ye 
ill " th 
b 
Sre. 
2 
ATTEST 
YCW wal 
9erw 7./Caye. 
V 
& 
b 
, 
/ 
77 
ASs if 
? 
it. i. 772. 
f' 
i. 
3.23. - - 
. 
J72 
INVENTOR 
/6/iau/ ,/2. Aa? 
a prev, 
l 
t 
N. PETERS. Phokolithographer, Washington D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES G. PERKINS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE IMPERIAL 
ELECTRIC LIGHT COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC REGULATOR FOR STORAGE. BATTER E.S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 290,468, dated December 18, 1883. 
Application filed May 18, 1883. (No model.) 
To all whon, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that l, CHARLES G. PERRINs, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of New York, in the county of New York and 
S State of New York, have invented a certain 
new and useful Automatic Regulator for Stor 
age-Batteries, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to an automatic elec 
JO tric regulator which, when connected with 
storage-batteries, coupled up in the usual Way, 
and a dynamo-electric machine, will enable 
the generator to charge the batteries during 
the illumination of the lamps in the battery 
15 circuit without interfering with the illuminat 
ing power thereof. 
The first part of my invention consists of 
arranging a series of storage-batteries in the 
main circuit of a dynamo-electric machine and 
2O arranging an electro-magnet of low resistance 
in said electrical circuit between the dynamo 
electric machine and the storage-batteries, said 
magnet operating a circuit closing and break 
ing device mechanically connected with a 
25 Switch or cut-outplaced in the circuit between 
the batteries and lamps. 
The second part of my invention consists of 
arranging a high-resistance magnet in the de 
rived circuit between the low-resistance mag 
3O net and the dynamo-electric machine, said 
high-resistance magnet operating the core of 
the former so as to bring the low-resistance 
magnet into the main circuit of the dynamo 
electric machine. 
The third part of my invention consists of 
an electro-magnet of the solenoid type, having 
its core connected with levers rigidly fixed to 
a shaft supported by bearings diametrically 
opposite each other, said shaft carrying an in 
sulated disk mounted with two metallic plates 
on the periphery thereof, one of the plates be 
ing shorter than the other, and two upright 
Springs bearing against the periphery of said 
metallic plates. Said springs are in the main 
circuit of the generator when they are bothin 
contact with one and the same metallic plate. 
The fourth part of my invention consists of 
a cut-out SWitch mounted on a base of insulat 
iug material, provided with metallic plates in 
- 5 
45 
 
. 55 
The sixth part of my invention consists of 7O 
sulated from each other, each of which are 5O 
separately electrically connected with a posi 
tive pole of the batteries. The aforesaid Switch 
is mechanically connected with level's, one of 
which is rigidly fixed to the shaft carrying the 
insulated disk heretofore mentioned. 
The fifth part of my invention consists of . 
an electro-magnet of high l'esistance, electri 
cally connected with the shorter metallic plate 
of the insulated disk lleretofore mentioned. 
By means of one of the aforesaid upright 
springs said plate is electrically connected 
with the positive wire between the circuit 
closer and generator by means of a horizontal 
spring, which is in constant contact with the 
shorter metallic platementioned above, and is 65 
in the derived circuit when the generator is 
first started. The negative end of the Wire is 
electrically connected with the negative wire 
of the generator. 
connecting the lower end of the core of the 
low-resistance magnet with the core of the 
high-resistance magnet by a rod. Said mag 
nets are arranged on the same perpendicular 
alignment. Both cores are suspended by a 
retracting-spring connected with an adjusting 
screw supported by a frame resting on the top 
of the low-resistance magnet. The frame is 
provided with an adjustable screw on the side 
thereof, which regulates the throw of the le 
vers connected with the core of the low-lesist 
ance magnet. 
In the drawing the batteries are represented 
as being cut out of the main circuit of the gen 
erator and are discharging a current of elec 
tricity through the incandescent lamps placed 
in the main circuit thereof. The machine is 
supposed to be at a Standstill, and in this con 
dition the circuit-closer, switch, and the coln 
trolling mechanism thereof are in their normal 
positions. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through. 
out the drawing, in which 
a represents the storage-batteries; b, the con 
ductors electrically connected with the metal- 95 
lic plates c, one of which is at all times in con 
tact with the Switch-spring d whenever the 
The remaining ends 
generator is not in use. 
90 
290,468 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
of the conductors b are connected with the posi 
tive poles of the batteries. 
b'is the line-wire, electrically connected with 
the aforesaid switch-spring di l', the negative 
line-Wire of the series of storage-batteries (t. 
b' are the incandescent lamps in multiple 
arc, placed in the main circuit of the batteries (t. 
e is the generator, and fis the main positive 
conductor extending therefrom to the upright 
spring (1, forming a part of the circuit-closer 
A, to which it is electrically connected. Said 
Spring g is in constant contact with the metal 
lic plate h, mounted on the insulated disk i, 
which is rigidly fixed to the shaft k, resting 
on bearings I, arranged opposite each other 
and supported by an insulated base, k". 
(f is the second upright spring, which is 
brought in contact with the metallic plate h 
when closing the main circuit of the genera 
tor. The upright spring of' is electrically con 
nected with the main-circuit wire fat g. Said 
Wire f forms the helix of the low-resistance 
lmagnet m, and extends therefrom to the posi 
tive pole of the batteries at at a. 
n is the core of the low-resistance magnet 
connected with the levers 0, which are rigidly 
fixed to the shaft le. 
o' is a lever, which is also rigidly fixed to the 
shaft k. Said lever o' is connected with two 
other levers, o' 0". The latter is connected 
with the switch-spring d. 
p is the frame, provided with the adjusting 
Screw q, and is set to regulate the throw of the 
levers o. 
r is the adjusting-screw, having the springs 
connected therewith, said spring suspending 
the core ?, connected with the core 'by means 
of the rod t. The core n is operated by the 
high-resistance magnet m'. One end of the 
Wire f', forming the helix thereof, is electri 
cally connected with the spring of', which bears 
against the short metallic plate h", which is at 
all times in contact with the horizontal spring 
g", electrically connected with the high-resist. 
ance wire f', leading therefrom to the positive 
Wiref, with which it is also electrically con 
nected. The negative end of the wire form 
ing the helix of the high-resistance magnet is 
electrically connected with the negative wire 
of the generator. 
Mode of operation: The lamps are now burn 
ing and the storage-batteries have nearly ex 
hallsted themselves, consequently it becomes 
necessary to recharge them, and at the same 
time allowing the lamps to continue their illu 
To accomplish this the machine is 
amination. 
started, and being of the shunt-wound type 
will enable the field-magnets to become mag 
netized slowly. The current then flows through 
the conductor f' to the spring g', thence to the 
plate l', to the spring g', from which it passes 
to the Wire forming the high-resistance mag 
net back to the negative main-line wire of the 
machine, the result of which causes the mag 
net to draw down the core n', which neces 
sarily callies the core in with it, and in doing 
SO the level's O descend and turn the insulated 
disk i until the metallic plate h comes in con 
tact with the spring of', the result of which 
breaks the shunt-circuit and closes the main 
circuit. The current then passes through the 
positive wire f to the spring 0, to the plate h, 
thence to the spring of', to the wire forming the 
helix of the low-resistance magnet in, through 
which it passes to and through the batteries 
back to the generator. The electro-motive 
force of the generator is greater than that of 
the batteries. Consequently the increasing cur 
rent of the generator will cause the core in to 
descend, carrying with it the levers 0, which 
movement causes the disk i to turn, thereby 
carrying the levers o' 0" o' with it, the result 
of which swings the switch-spring d around 
until a sufficient number of batteries shall have 
been cut out of the battery-circuit, whereby the 
electro-motive force is regulated. Whenever 
the batteries shall have been properly charged, 
the circuit of the generator is broken by turn 
ing a switch commonly used on electric-dyna 
mo machines. This operation prevents any 
part of the battery-current from affecting the 
generator. After the circuit of the generator 
shall have been broken, as stated above, the 
mechanism controlling the circuit-closer and 
switch will have assumed their normal posi 
tion, after which the machine is stopped. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of a series of storage 
batteries and a generator of electricity, the 
circuit-closer in the main electrical circuit be 
tween the generator and batteries, said cir 
cuit-closer closing and opening the circuit all 
tomatically by means of electro-magnets in 
the main electrical circuit of the generator, 
and a circuit-closing switch and cut-out in the 
lamp-circuit of the batteries, said circuit-clos 
ing switch and cut-out suitably connected with 
the aforesaid circuit-closer of the generator 
circuit, so as to be operated automatically and 
simultaneously therewith, thereby causing it 
to cut out a number of the batteries, in accord 
ance with the electro-motive force of the gen 
erator. 
2. In combination with a generator of elec 
tricity, and a series of storage-batteries, a cir 
cuit-closer in the main electrical circuit of a 
generator, said circuit-closer adapted to be 
operated automatically by electro-magnets, 
one of which is in the main circuit of the gen 
erator, the other in the derived circuit thereof, 
the whole connected and operating automati 
cally and simultaneously with a circuit-clos 
ing switch and cut-out engaging with a series 
of metallic plates electrically connected with 
one pole of each battery, the whole forming a 
complete device for regulating the current 
charging the storage-batteries during the il 
lumination of the lamp in the battery-circuit. 
3. In an automatic circuit-closer and circuit 
closing switch and cut-out, the combination, 
substantially as shown and described, of the 
storage-batteries (, generatore, contact-spring 
75 
9O 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I25 
 
- - - - - rar (1 
(, metallic plates h h", disk i, contact g'g', 
electro-magnets on 7", core it, springs, screw 
', frame p, regulating-screw q, levers 0, shaft 
l, levers o' o' 0", circuit-closing switch, and 
cut-out d, conductor b, metallic plates c, and 
conductors b, all forming a complete device 
for the purpose herein set forth. 
4. In combination with a circuit-closer op 
erated automatically by electro-magnets, both 
in the main electrical circuit between the gen 
erator and a series of storage-batteries, a cir 
cuit-closing switch and cut-out in the lamp 
circuit of the batteries, said circuit-closing 
switch and cut-out connected with the afore 
said circuit-closer of the generator-circuit by 
means of levers, so as to be controlled thereby 
and operated automatically there with, said cir 
cuit-closing switch and cut-out engaging With 
metallic plates, each of which is electrically 
connected with a pole of the batteries. 
5. In combination with an automatic cir 
cuit-cioser in the main electrical circuit be 
tween a generator and a series of storage-bat 
teries, the circuit-closing switch and cut-out 
d, levers o o' 0", metallic plates c, conductors 
b and b, substantially as shown and described. 
5 
IO 
25 
6. In combination with a series of stor; ge 
batteries having an automatic circuit-closing 
switch and cut-out in the main electrical cir 
cuit thereof, a circuit-closer operated auto 
matically by electro-magnets, one of which is 
in the main circuit between a series of Stor 
age-batteries and generator, the other placed 
in the derived circuit thereof. 
7. In combination with a series of storage 
batteries having a switch in the discharging 
circuit of the battery and the connecting-links 
o' o' 0", the level's or links 0, the springs (1, (f', 
and g, and the circuit-connections f f', me 
tallic plates h h", insulated diski, shaft k, elec 
tro-magnet m in', cores in n', Spring S, Screw 7", 
frame p, adjusting-screw q, substantially as 
shown and described. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 14th day 
of May, A. D. 1883. 
3 5 
45 
CHARLES G. PERRNS. 
Witnesses: 
J. A. HURDLE, 
GEORGE BECKER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290568.txt	(Model.) 
H. F. GEIST. 
WINDOW SCREEN, 
Patented Dec. 18, 
1883, 
No. 290,568, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
N S 
% Z 
?? 
WITNESSES % 
27*Ironser 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMAN F. GEIST, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
wNDOW.SCREEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 290,568, dated December 18, 1883. 
Application filed July 24, 1883. 
C 
3O 
Sio CatZZ zuj7h,oF?a, i; Hina/atg/ cO72.-Ce7?7a, r 
Be it known that I, HERMAN F. GEIST, of 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful.Improvements in a Combined Sash-Bal 
ance and Window-Screen; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as Will 
enable others skilledin the art to which it per 
tains to make and Ise the Same. 
My invention relates to improvements in a 
combined sash-balance and window - Screen; 
and it consists in certain features of construc 
tion and in combination of parts hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
spring-rollers to sustain the weight of win 
dow-sash, instead of the cord and weight in 
common use, and to attach thereto Screens, 
preferably of wire-gauze, in such a manner 
that when the window is opened the opening 
may be covered with the said screen. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical cross 
section of a window provided with my new 
balance and screen. Figs. 2 and 3 are longi 
tudinal sectional views of the rollers shown in 
Fig. 1. 
A represents the top sash or upper part of 
the window, and is supported from the spring 
rollers B by means of the Screen a. When the 
sash is closed, as shown, the Screen is Out of 
sight, nothing pertaining to it appearing ex 
cept the strip b, to which the screen is at 
tached, and the catchi', that attaches the strip 
to the sash. The stops d, that separate the 
sash have narrow grooves on their faces that 
embrace the edges of the screen, so that there 
is no opening at the sides through which in 
sects can pass. 
A is the lower sash with the Strip b and 
the catch battached, the same as is shown on 
the sash above. 
B is a spring-roller similar to B, except in 
the tension of the spring, that Only requires 
sufficient force to rol up the screen af. The 
weight of the sash. A is sustained by the roller 
C above, and connected with the sash, prefer 
ably by small wire cables. When the sash. A 
is raised, it draws the screen after it, so that 
the opening exposed by raising the Sash is 
covered by the screen a'. 
Fig. 4 is a detail drawing. 
. 
The construction of the roller C is shown in 
Fig. 2, and the construction of the rollers B 
and B are shown in Fig. 3. A suitable con 
struction of the catches b is shown in Fig. 4; 
but other kinds might be used. The roller C 
has a spool-like depression at each end, on 
which to Wind the wire cables D. Inside of 
the roller is the rod or spindle c, around 
which is coiled the spring c', one end of which 
is attached to the rod c on the right hand, 
while the other end of the spring is secured 
to the block F. This block is made fast to 
the roller, so as to turn with it, either by a 
snug fit in the roller or in any other manner. 
The block, as shown, has a hole in which the 
rod c fits loosely, and a coil-spring, f, that 
presses the rod c endwise and causes a clutch 
attached to the other end of the rod G to en 
gage the cap H on the end of the roller C. 
The outer end of the rod c is squared, and 
when in place engages a square socket in the 
flange G, that is made fast to the window-cas 
ing. 
At the left-hand end of the roller C is the 
cap H, with a central hole therein, to engage 
the plug k, upon which the roller turns. This 
plug is attached to the support K, as shown, 
and has a groove where it is embraced by the 
spring it, that forces the plug lic forward, as 
shown. The plug may be forced back to the 
left until it is flush with the right-hand side of 
the part K, to admit the roller. When the 
roller C is in place, the spring l'holds the plug 
k forward to its pivotal engagement with the 
roller; also, when the roller is in position, it 
about fills the space between the parts G and 
K, so that the end of the rod c, coming in con 
tact with the bottom of the socket in G, is 
pressedinward, compressing the Spring fand 
relieving the clutch h. This part of the de 
vice operates as follows: When the roller is 
out ofits bearings, the springfkeeps the clutch 
it to its engagement with cap H and prevents 
the roller from turning in one direction, and 
that is in the direction that releases the ten 
sion of the Spring. A wrench may be applied 
to the end of the rod c and the rod turned SO 
as to cause any desired tension of the spring, 
the clutch h holding the rod from being turned 
back by the spring. When, however, the 
roller is placed in its bearings, as aforesaid, 
? 
55 
7? 
7 5 
85 
90 
95 
OO 
 
2. 
290,568 
I) 
25 
the rod c is pressed inward, breaking the en 
gagement of the clutchh, and leaving the roller 
actuated in one direction by the recoil of the 
spring and in the other direction by the 
weight of the sash. If the spring has been 
'Wound up to its proper tension, these two 
forces will balance each other, and the sash 
will remain at any position in which it is 
placed. The roller shown in Fig. 3 is made 
of equal size the whole length of the roller 
part, and is therefore suitable for attaching 
the screens, and may be used at B or B. The 
Clutch is intended to be the Same as Shown in 
Fig. 2, but is here shown in section. To the 
right in this figure is shown a bracket-bear 
ing, g, with a square socket, similar to that 
shown at G,Fig. 2. When it is desired to use 
bracket-bearings, a cap like J may be used, 
having a pivot, j, for a bearing, attached. In 
such case a bracket for the end may be like 
ordinary brackets for window-shades, with a 
slot that admits of the pivot being placed in 
position. These bracket-bearings will be used 
only when the rollers and screens are applied 
to old window-frames, and will have to be modi 
fied according to circumstances. These brack 
ets must be placed so near together that the 
bracket g will force the engaging-rod c far 
enough endwise to disengage the said clutch h. 
In all cases where the brackets are not used the 
cap H and its attendant device Kwill be used 
in place of the cap J and its slotted bracket 
above referred to. 
When desired, by means of the catches b', 
the strips brmay be disconnected from the sash 
and the Sash operated or taken out of the win 
dow-casing without disturbing the screens or 
rollers. 
What I claim is 
1. Inawindow-screen, the combination, with 4o 
2. The combination, with a spring-roller 5o 
the upper and lower sashes, of a spring-actu 
ated roller situated in the frame above the up 
per sash and provided with a screen, a spring 
actuated roller situated in the frame above . 
the lower sash and provided with sash-hold- 45 
ing wires or cords, and a spring-actuatedroller 
situated in the frame below the lower sash and 
provided with a screen, all of the above parts 
adapted to operate as described. 
above, provided with a suitable connecting de 
vice, and adapted to balance the lower sash, 
of a spring-roller below, provided with a screen, 
also attached to the sash, and adapted to cover 
with the screen any opening made by raising 55 
the sash, substantially as described. 
3. In combination with a spring-roller pro 
vided with a screen, the strips band the catches 
b', adapted to form a detachable attachment be 
tween the screen and sash, substantially as 6o 
shown and described. 
4. In a combined Sash-balance and window 
Screen, grooved stops between the sash, adapted 
to embrace and guide the edges of the screen, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 65 
5. In the bearing K, the combination of the 
plug k and the spring Ik', substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 17th 7o 
day of July, 1883. 
HERMAN F. GEIST. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT E. LYNCH, 
CHAS. H. DORIER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290668.txt	J. Q. DAVIS & N. O. PYLES 
BLOTTER, 
Patented Dec. 25, 1883. 
(Model.) 
No. 290,668. 
 
- 
71zz-z-esses: 
5. 2. 
I-verezor's 
e 122. 2.----- 
242 2221. 
42-4-4-2-2-2-4- 
N. PeFERS. Photo-Lithographer. Wa?hington, D.C. . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES Q. DAVIS, OF WINNSBOROUGH, AND NEWTON O. PYLES, OF 
CORONOCO, SOUTH CAROLINA. 
BLOTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 290,66S, dated December 25, 1883. 
Application filed October 25, 1882. (Model.) 
thereof. The blotting-paper is about one 
Be it known that we, JAMES Q. DAVIs, of quarter (3) of an inch narrower than the 
plate A and the edges of the plate projecting 
over it, and, being held by it above the sur 
face intended to be ruled, become available as 
rulers, and, being left clear, may be used as 
paper-cutters. In the center of plate A is a 
small knob-handle, f. 
We claim as our invention and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent 
1. The blotter herein shown and described, 
consisting of the plate A, having slots bin its 
ends, and raised capse, covering said slots, as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The device herein shown and described, 
consisting of the plate A, which carries the 
narrow blotting-paper, said plate having slots 
b and raised capse, and the edges of the plate 
extending beyond the blotting-paper, where 
by they serve as a paper cutter, ruler, and 
measuring-scale. 
To ail, whon, it naily concern. : 
Winnsborough, Fairfield county, State of South 
Carolina, and NEWTON O. PYLEs, of Corono 
co, Abbeville county, State of South Carolina, 
both citizens of the United States, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in a 
Blotter; and we do declare that the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, which will enable other skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the Same. 
Figure 1 is a top view of the invention, 
Fig. 2 a longitudinal sectional view, and Fig. 
3 a cross-sectional view. 
We take a thin metal plate, A, Fig. 1-say 
about ten inches long and three inches wide 
larger if desired. Across this plate, near each 
end, is a narrow slot, b, through which the ends 
of the blotting-paper c are inserted from the 
lower side, as shown in Fig. 2. Covering 
these slots are narrow metal strips, with about 
one-eighth () of an inch at each end bent at 
a right angle and fastened to the plate A 
forming cape, which turns the end of the 
blotting paper as it is inserted through the 
slot and holds it securely in place. The caps al 
so strengthen the plate where theslots are cut. 
Along the edges on the upper side of plate A 
is a scale, d, measuring inches and fractions 
Witnesses as to James Q. Davis: 
O. W. BUCHANAN, 
J. A. HINNONT. 
Witnesses as to Newton O. Pyles: 
J. D. CoLEMAN, 
J. B. BARKSDALE. 
JAMES Q. DAVIS. 
NEWTON O. PYLES. 
35 
45 
so 
IO 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290768.txt	(Model.) 
D. H. GRANT. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
NO, 290,768. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING MITERs. 
. 
. 
. . 
Z727. Z 
s 
... 
", LZITH". In 
a tented Dec. 25, 1883. 
Pat 
0. 
II 2 
EEEsessessesEEEstriart 
5 
ausu 
u 
 
  
S2 
 
sfy 
 
S. 
INVENTOR, 
% 97%az-C 666-6- 
AORNEY . 
 
 
  
 
s 
7. 
NS 
NSal A.sa s 
27 
s 
WITNESSES 
297 d 
 
(Model.) 
No. 290,768, 
D. H. GRANT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING MITERS, 
Patented Dec, 25, 1883. 
 
  
 
 
 (NI 
G =1. 
siz 4. 
E; NE ww.e-lug-antinuity 
1732 Hii 
- 
A. tle 7" 
Z' Q Si 
7 N22 
syS37 
Eser Se Naze 
R 
ES 2 S3H2O2 
S 
 
s 
  
27 
WITNESSES: 
732...) 
 
asavac 
R 9) effect C 
INVENTOR, 
2-aw 
is 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
DAVID H. GRANT, OF WALTON, NEW YORK. 
MACHINE FOR CUTTING MITERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 290,768, dated December 25, 1883. 
Application filed August 21, 1883. (Model.) 
S 
O 
35 
45 
95 
OC 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it invally concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID H. GRANT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wal 
ton, in the county of Delaware and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Cutting 
Miters; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
This invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in the class of wood-work 
ing machines more especially designed for 
cutting miters at any desired angle; and the 
invention consists in a novel means for mov 
ing the table which carries the work secured 
to it to the chisel or cutter, and keeping the 
work at all times in true relation with the sur 
face of the table and in proper position as 
the gage is connected to and moves with the 
table; also, in a novel construction of the chisel 
or cutter and its head, by which the chisel or 
cutter can be adjusted or changed so as to cut 
in either direction; and, finally, in novel means 
for operating the cutter-head, all as will be 
hereinafter fully described, and set forth in 
the claims hereto annexed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a plan view; Fig. 2, an end view. 
Fig. 3 is a detail sectional view online ac, Fig. 
1. Fig. 4 is a detail view of shaft C, and Figs. 
5 and 6 are detail views of the cutter-head. 
In the drawings, A represents the frame of 
the machine, which may be of any suitable 
construction, and provided with side ways, a 
a, upon which slides the table B, said ways 
and table being respectively provided with 
interlocking flanges a? and b', by which they 
are secured in proper relation to each other. 
Crepresents a transverse shaft journaled in 
and through the side ways, a. a, and provided 
with right and left hand screw-threads, and 
upon which is mounted blocks c c, having cor 
responding interior screw-threads, and which 
blocks are pivotally connected to the table by 
bars c' c', so that by turning shaft C in one di 
rection or the other (through the medium of a 
crank or handle connected thereto) the table 
carrying the work will be moved toward or 
from the cutter-head. 
To define the angle at which the material is 
to be cut, and for cutting in either direction, 
the table is provided with segmental slots bb, 
and up through one of said slots passes the 
screw-threaded end of a headed bolt, d, and 
which also passes up through the sectional and 
adjustable guide-bar D, and secured in posi 
tion by a thumb-screw, d. This guide-bar D 
is composed of two longitudinal sections, d. 
and d, the section d'having side flanges, d", 
and a longitudinal slot, d, through its bot 
tom, and which section fits over a lug, b, at 
either of the inner corners of the table, and 
said lug forming the pivotal point upon which 
the guide-bar may turn. The section d fits 
inthesection d, and by loosening up the thumb 
screwd the sectional guide-bar may be length 
ened or shortened, and also turned at any de 
sired angle, which may found by either one 
of the scale-plates E. E., adjacent to the seg 
mental slots b, b on the upper surface of the 
table. The material to be cut is placed along 
side of the guide-bar and secured in position 
by the screw -bolt e, passing through the 
flanged blocke', which is adapted to be moved 
across the table in the transverse slotted guide 
bar F, supported above the table on standards 
ff, having flanges f' at their lower ends pro 
jecting inwardly and above and below the side 
edges of the table, and said guide-bar F may 
be adjusted or moved longitudinally of the ta 
ble, as may be found or deemed expedient, the 
screw-bolt e, when engaging the work placed 
on the table, securing the several parts in po 
sition. 
G represents a transverse movable bed car 
rying the cutter-head, which bed has side 
flanges, gg, engaging a transverse slotted guide 
bar, g, secured to the frame A. The bed Gis 
provided with a rack-bar, I, with which a pin 
ion, J, engages for moving said bed. Thispin 
ion J is journaled in a standard, A, and is op 
erated by a bifurcated handle, i, loosely mount 
ed on the shaft of the pinion, and having a 
sliding pawl, i, which can be forced into en 
gagement with the teeth of the pinion by the 
hand of the operator in taking hold of the han 
dle, and through the medium of which the 
pinion may be turned, and when said pawl is 
released from the hand of the operator it will 
be thrown out of engagement with said pinion 
by a retracting-spring, j'. The cutter-head H 
is adjustably connected to the curved standard 
2 
290,768 
IO 
l' of the bed by a slotted curved bar, h, and a 
set-screw, h, by which the cutter-head can be 
adjusted, so that the chisel or knife may be 
presented at any inclination desired with re 
lation to the bevel desired to be cut out of the 
work. The cutter-head is composed of a double 
cap, so that the cutter or chisel K may be re 
versed, and thereby adapted to cut in either 
direction, the reverse segmental slots through 
the table B permitting the guide-bar D to be 
changed to correspond with the direction the 
cutter-head may be moved. The cutter or 
chisel holder k is provided with a pivoted can, 
k', which, engaging a lug, l, on either One of 
the vertical bars l l at the ends of the cutter 
head, will secure said cutter or chisel block or 
holder le in position, said cutter-holder and 
cutter passing between the vertical bar in and 
either one of the vertical bars in m', with the 
forward end of the cutter or chisel block : 
abutting against One of said bal's m. 
The operation of my improved machine is 
obvious from the foregoing description. 
I do not wish to be understood as claiming, 
broadly, a table with guides thereon to locate 
the work, and a sliding cutter to cut the work 
upon the angle indicated by said guides, nor 
a table arranged on a bed and carrying one or 
more cutters, with a stationary rack on bed, 
and a corresponding rack on the table, and a 
pinion between the two said racks, through 
which longitudinal movement is imparted to 
said table, and with guides on said bed to lo 
cate thematerial to be cut, as such, I am aware, 
are not new; but, 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a miter-machine, the combination, 
with the frame A, of the sliding table B, right 
and-left-hand screw-threaded shaft C, having 
the blocks c e mounted thereon, and the piv 
oted bars c' c', for connecting the blocks with 
said table, substantially as and for the pur 
pose herein shown and described. 
2. In a miter - machine, the combination, 
with the slotted sliding table B, of the longi 
tudinally-adjustable sectional guide-bar D, 
adapted to be adjustable in relation to said 
table by means substantially as and for the 
purpose herein shown and described. 
3. In a miter - machine, the combination, 
with the slotted table B, provided with the 
lug or lugsb", of the longitudinally-adjustable 
guide-bar D, composed of the slotted and 55 
flanged section d and section d, the headed 
Screw-bolt d, passing through said bar and ta 
ble, and thumb-screw d", adapted to clamp the 
bar to the table, substantially as and for the 
purpose herein shown and described. 
4. In a miter - machine, the combination, 
with the table B, of the slotted guide-bar F, 
Supported above said table by means substan 
tially as described, and provided with the mov 
able flanged block e', carrying the screw-bolt 65 
e, for engaging the work placed on the table, 
and the Several parts in position, substantially 
as and for the purpose herein shown and de-- 
scribed. 
5. The combination, with the frame A, hav- 7O 
ing the longitudinally-movable table B and 
transverse guide-bar g', of the transverse mov 
able bed G, provided with the rack-bar I, the 
pinion J, for engaging said rack-bar, and the 
handle i, provided with a retracting spring- 75 
pawl, j, Substantially as and for the purpose 
herein shown and described. 
6. In a miter-machine, the combination, with 
the slotted table having an adjustable and re 
versible guide-bar, D, and means for securing 
it to the table, of the transverse movable cut 
ter-head H., having the reversible cutter or 
chisel K, means for moving said cutter-head, 
substantially as and for the purpose herein 
shown and described. 
7. In a miter - machine, the combination, 
with the table B, of the transverse movable 
bed G, provided with the curved standard h", 
and the adjustable cutter-head provided with 
the slotted curved bar h, and a securing or set 
screw, h, passing through said bar h, for se 
curing it in position, substantially as and for 
the purpose herein shown and described. 
8. In a miter - machine, the combination, 
with the table B, of the transverse movable 
double-capped cutter-head H, provided with 
the vertical bars ll, having bearing-lugs ll, 
vertical bars an in n', the reversible cutter or 
chisel holder, and a pivoted cam for securing 
said holder in position, substantially as and 
for the purpose herein shown and described. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
95 
OO 
DAVID H. GRANT. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT H. SEWELL, 
E. EP. HOYT. 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290868.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 290,868, 
J. T. DILLEHAY. 
WEHICLE BRAKE. 
Patented Deo. 25, 1883. 
 
N WITWESSES 
g7-(G2a-f 
(WPEMTOR 
\$of 7. (9&ky 
a Heless, v. 
Attorney 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. DILLEHAY, OF BEECH GROVE, KENTUCKY. 
VEH CLE - BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 290,838, catel December 25, 1883. 
Application filed October 29, 1883. 
(No model.) 
5 
25 
45 
6O 
out the Several views. 
- 
To all wivon, it inctly concer'7. 
Be it known that I, JoHN T. DILLEHAY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Beech 
Grove, in the county of McLean and State of 
Kentucky, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Vehicle-Brakes, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had thereinto the accompanying drawings. 
Io automatic vehicle-brakes; and it consists in 
the novel arrangement and combination of 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully described, 
and specifically set forth in the claims. I at 
tain these objects by the mechanism illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a longitudinal view of 
a vehicle having my automatic brake attached; 
Fig. 2, an inverted plan view of the same, 
and Figs. 3 and 4 enlarged views in detail. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
A represents the body of an ordinary vehicle, 
mounted upon the axles and wheels B B. 
Suitably attached to the front of the vehicle 
is an ordinary tongue, D, to the under side of 
which is loosely secured a rod, E, made of any 
suitable material-such, for instance, as steel, 
cast or wrought iron, and the like-and which 
is adapted to have a sliding movement both 
backward and forward through the staples E. 
The front of the rod E terminates in a loop, to 
which are secured the ordinary straps or chains 
connected to the collars of the harness. The 
rod, when it reaches the forward axle, termi 
nates in an oblong loop, e', through which the 
pin orboltb", connecting the axle to the body of 
the vehicle, is allowed to pass, said loop being 
bent at right angles and over the axle, as 
shown. The end of the loop e' is connected 
by a rod, E", to the double toggle-joint K, con 
sisting of the pivoted arms K" K" K", which 
are in turn pivoted to suitable projecting 
pieces, LL, secured to the under side of the 
body A. 
To the arm IK of the toggle K is pivoted at 
its end an angle-bar, I, screw-threaded at its 
ends, by which means it is firmly secured to 
the cross-bar C, carrying the brake-shoes C 
C upon each of its outer ends, and which is 
5o adapted to have a longitudinal play in the 
loops or staples C", secured to the body of the 
vehicle. 
To the forward and under side of the forked 
projecting piece Fis secured a pawl, O, held in 
the position shown in Fig. 3 by a pivoted 55 
hook, O", adapted to engage with a perfora 
tion, O'. The rod E has secured to or formed 
with it a short horizontal rack-bar, h, the ob 
My invention relates to improvements inject of which will be hereinafter more fully 
described. 
On the cross-bar C, and in rear thereof, is 
adjustably secured a spring, n, which has a 
bearing on the short bar L, the purpose of 
which is to normally keep the brake-shoes C 
on the cross-bar Caway or from contact with 65 
the periphery of the rear wheels. 
I will now proceed to describe the opera 
tion. The several parts being in the position 
shown in Fig. 2, as the vehicle is about to de 
scendan incline, and the rod E suitably at- 7o 
tached to the draft-animals, it will cause said 
rod to be forced backward, and at the same 
time cause the arm K' of the toggle-joint to 
be pushed backward, bringing forward the 
arm K'and throwing back the end of the arm 
K", which at the same time will draw upon the 
rods I, connected to the cross-bar C, thereby 
effectually locking the wheels, and as the de 
scent to be made be of a greater or less incli 
nation, so will the force exerted upon the rods 
and brake-shoes be correspondingly greater or 
less. The end of the incline being reached and 
the power exerted upon the rod being with 
drawn, the spring in will tend to release the 
brake and throw it away from engagement 
with the periphery of the wheels. 
To back the wagon for any purpose, the 
hook O' will be withdrawn from the pawl O, 
which will, by means of the spring O", come 
in contact and engagement with the rack-bar 
h, thus locking the rod and thereby prevent 
ing it from having a backward movement. 
I have here shown my device adapted for 
use on a double-team vehicle; but I may also 
effectually employ it to a single-team convey- 95 
ance by simply providing rods E on each side 
parallel with the shafts, and then connecting 
them together in the rear in any suitable man 
ner to the toggle-joint and cross-bar above de 
scribed. 
3 5 
236), S&S 
Having thus fully described my invention, nected by diagonal screw-threaded rods to the 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters sliding cross-bar C, having brake-shoes C'C', I5 
Patent, is- 
spring m, adapted to hold the cross-bar in an 
1. In an automatic vehicle-brake, the slid- open position, and the pawl O, hook O', and 
ing rod E, Connected to a toggle-joint, having spring O', whereby the pawl is adapted, when 
Suitably Secured thereto the cross-bar C, pro- disengaged, to lock the rod E, all substantially 
vided with brake-shoes and kept normally in as set forth, and for the purpose described. 
an Open position by the Spring in, substantially 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
as described, and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In an automatic vehicle-brake, the sliding 
rod E, rack-bar h, and oblong loope", the con- 
necting-rod H, pivoted to the toggle-joint K, 
consisting of the pivoted arms K'K' K', con- 
MORTON WATKINs, 
E. G. ADAMS. 
Witnesses: 
presence of two witnesses. 
JNO.T. DILLEHAY. 
20 
5 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US290968.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 290,968, 
A. BURGESS, 
MAGAZINE FIRE ARM, 
Patented Deo. 25, 1883, 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
AZ / 
  
(S. 
222222222 SeaS 
O O O 
s 
 
 
 
See are 
   
 
A. 
 
 
Sg N 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ANDREW BURGESS, OF OWEGO, NEW YORK. 
WAGAZINE FREARV. 
is is " 3PIECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 290,968, dated December 25, 1883. 
Application filed November 1, 1883. 
(No model.) 
5 
25 
To (t/ It'. Oil it 7 (it? coice, 'I 
Be it known that I, ANDREW BUR(; Ess, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Owego, 
in the county of Tioga and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Niagazine-Guns, of which the follow 
ing is a specification, reference being had there 
in to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to magazine-guns of 
1 O the character hereinafter described; and it 
consists in certain details and combinations 
as hereinafter pointed out and claimed. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
magazine-gun of easy manipulation. 
Parts of my invention are illustrated in an 
application for a patent filed by me July 27, 
JSS3; but the parts claimed herein are not 
claimed in said application. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
2O section of the breech mechanism of a maga 
zine-gun according to my present construc 
tion. Fig. 2 is a similar view of a modifica 
tion. Fig. 3 is a similar view, showing a slot 
and-pin connection between the draw-rod and 
locking-brace. Fig. 4 is a reverse detail. Fig. 
5 is a section of the ejector, and Fig. 3 is a de 
tail of the same. 
A represents the frame of a gun; B, the bolt, 
which reciprocates in the frame in line with 
B is a locking-brace pivoted in the bolt, 
near its front end, so as to swing into a recess 
or cut-away portion in the bottom of the bolt 
when unlocked, but to swing clownward from 
the bolt, so as to 'est at its real end against 
an abutment, I, to lock the bolt forward in 
firing position. The abutment IP may be a 
pin passing through the frame from side to 
side, or may be a piece cast on the frame, or 
Figs. 1 and 2 show the locking-brace con 
nected by a link with a draw-bar, R, in one 
case extending forward to a sliding sleeve 
under the barrel, in the other to a lever piv 
oted in the frame behind the guard. I do not 
claim this link - connection specifically in the 
present application, as it is elsewhere claimed 
by me. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 I show the draw-bar R, 
5O connected to the locking-brace by means of 
an inclined slot and pin. I deem it immate 
rial whether the slot be in the brace and the 
pin in the lar or vice versa. The slot is in 
4O projections from the sides thereof. 
3O the barrel, as usual. 
45 
35 
6) 
65 
clined with reference to the body of the lock 
ing-brace, as shown, so that the longitudinal 
rearward movement of the draw-bar limoves 
the pin lengthwise of the slot, and thus lifts 
the rear end of the brace 3' from its engage 
ment with the abutment IP and closes it into 
the bolt. The further baci ward movement Of 
the draw-bar carries the bolt along with it. 
Projecting from the sides of the frame are 
ribs or guides (1, extending back from the abut 
ment P. These ribs serve as guides or sup 
ports for the bolt in its backward movement, 
and also support the locking-lever 13, Whell 
it is closed into the bolt, the locking-lever 
being at its rear end substantially as wide as 
the diameter of the bolt. These guide-ribs (7 
serve also as supports to sil'engthen the abut 
ment P. and may be made to serve as the abut 
lmelnt. 
The draw-bar IR, as I desire to claim it here 
in, extends backward in the frame, and is piv 
oted to a lever, F, which lever is pivoted in 
the lower part of the frame in rear of the po 
sition of the trigger-guard, as usually con 
structed. The oscillation of the level. IF on 
its pivot will therefore move the bar R in a 
direction nearly longitudinal to the frame. 
The trigger-guard T is made to slicle length 
wise of the frame by a dovetail connection or 
other similar motle of engagement with the 
bottom of the frame. A link, L, is pivoted to 
the rear end of the trigger-gua'd, and also to 
the outer end of the lever F. 'ihis link may 
be widened and rounde(l at the front to form 
a hand-grasp somewhat like a pistol-grip, and 
is slottetl at L at the rear, to permit lever F to 
fold into it. The likiL or level F may have a 
knob Ol' projection, K, which screws into a 
threaded hole in the end thereof, as shown, or 
is otherwise removably attached. The recip 
rocation of the trigger-gua'? may be effected 
by grasping the guard or by a grasp on lever 
L. In either case the back-and-fourth move 
ment of the guard serves to oscillate the lever 
IF, and through it and its connections will op 
erate the bolt. 
I have shown in Fig. 1 how the gliard may 
form part of a link or slide. connecting for 
ward to a sleeve, S, under the barrel. The 
trigger t is pivoted in the guard and partakes 
of its movement. When the gua' is moved 
forward, the trigger is out of contact with 
Seart", and the arm can only be dischargel by 
SO 
5 
O) 
290,96S 
5 
O 
a pull on the trigger when the guard is fully 
back to the position which closes the breech. 
The inner part of the tang or top strap of the 
gun is arched at a', to give room for the up 
Ward extension of the lever F. 
In the front face of the bolt I bore an ob 
lique hole in which I place an inclined spring 
ejector-pin, TE. This pin is hollow and con 
tains a spiral spiring, c, the rear end of the 
pin being closed by a screw, c'. A slot, e", 
passes through the pin from side to side. 
When the pin E is put in place, it is there se 
cured by a piece, 6", passing through the slot 
in rear of the spring and into the metal of the 
bolt. This piece thus serves to secure the 
ejector in place, and forms a bearing for the 
Spring, so that the tendency of the spring is to 
thrust the pin E forward all the time. When 
the head of the cartridge is held back against 
the face of the bolt by its hook, it will hold the 
pin E back against the force of its spring, and 
the rear end of the pin will project into groove 
i at the side of the bolt or into a groove in the 
frame. 
To insure the movement of the ejector 
should the spring fail to force it forward, a 
screw pin or projection, c', is placed in the 
frame in the path of movement of the pin E, 
and as the bolt moves back this will strike the 
pin and move it smartly forward to eject the 
shell. 
2 5 
I claim 
1. The reciprocating bolt, a locking-brace 
pivoted therein and adapted to lock against 
an abutment in the frame below the bolt, 
and to unlock by closing into the bolt, so as 
to ride over said abutment, a lever pivoted 
in the frame in rear of the trigger-guard, and 
having an operating-handle, and a draw-rod 
connected to said level and to the locking 
brace, all in combination, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. A reciprocating bolt, a locking-lolace piv 
oted therein and adapted to lock against an 
abutment in the frame below the bolt, and 
to unlock by closing into the bolt, so as to 
ride over said abutment, said brace having 
an extension, as described, a draw-rocl con 
nected to said extension of the brace by a 
slot-and-pin connection, and a lever pivoted 
in the frame behind the trigger-guard, and 
connected to said draw-rod, said lever having 
an operating-handle, ail combined, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. A reciprocating bolt, a locking-brace piv 
oted therein and adapted to lock against an 
abutment in the frame below the bolt, and to 
unlock by closing toward the bolt, so as to 
pass over said abutment, said brace having 
an extension. as described, a draw-rod coln 
nected to said extension by slot-and-pin con 
nection, and operative anechanism, Substan 
tially as described, by which the draw-rod is 
reciprocated, all in combination, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. The combination, with a reciprocating 
breech-bolt and suitable locking mechanism, 
substantially as described, of a lever pivoted 
in the frame in rear of the trigger-guard, Con 
nected, substantially as described, to said 
trigger-guard, said guard being constructed 
and adapted to move with the lever, all ar 
ranged to co-operate, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with a reciprocating 
bolt and its locking mechanism, arranged sub 
stantially as described, of a level pivoted in 
the frame in rear of the trigger-guard and 
connected to said locking mechanism, a slid 
ing trigger-guard, and a link connecting said 
guard and lever, all arranged substantially as 
set forth. 
6. The combination, with a trigger-guard 
constructed, substantially as described, so as to 
slide lengthwise of the frame, of a trigger, 
pivoted in said guard so as to move there 
with, and a seal and hammer arranged, Sub 
stantially as shown, so that the Sear may be 
engaged by the trigger only when the guard 
is in proper position therefor. 
7. The combination of the tang or top strap 
of the frame, arched, as described, at the small of 
the stock, in the lateral central portion thereof, 
and having side portions which extend down 
to the general level of the top of said stock, 
with an operating-lever pivoted in the lower 
part of the frame in the rear of the trigger 
guard, and suitable connections from said le 
ver whereby the breech is operated. 
S. The combination of the reciprocating 
trigger-guard, the lever in rear thereof, hav 
ing operative connections, substantially as 
described, to the breech mechanism, a link 
connecting the guard and lever, and a remov 
able piece, K, forming an extension of said 
link, to Serve as a grip. 
9. The reciprocating bolt, a locking-brace 
pivoted therein and adapted to bear against 
an abutment in the frame, as described, and 
guide-ribs in the frame, below and parallel 
with the line of movement of the bolt, serv 
ing as guides for the bolt and supports for 
the locking-brace when the bolt moves back, 
all in combination, substantially as described. 
10. A reciprocating breech-bolt having an 
oblique perforation leading from the face there 
of, and a spring-pin in said perforation to 
serve as an ejector. 
11. A reciprocating breech-bolt, having an 
oblique hole leading from its face, a spring 
pin in said hole, and a retaining-piece which 
passes through slots in the spring-pin behind 
the spring, all in combination, substantially 
as described. 
12. A reciprocating breech-bolt having an 
oblique perforation leading from its face, a 
spring-pin secured in said perforation, Sub 
stantially as described, and a stol in the 
frame in the path of movement of said pin, 
all in combination, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. BARTLETT, 
TB. F. MoRSELL. 
ANDREW BURGESS. 
90 
IOO 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291068.txt	(No Model.) 
C, MEYER & W. H. LAUFERSICK. 
HYDRANT, 
No. 291,068, 
Patented Jan, l, 1884, 
G 
G 
f 
Z77ZG.7. 
Z, 
 
A 
-Z 
fy 
Z7 
777 
it ------------T's 
| Z2 
Azvezza (2Zs. 
2.522. 
22, 
vz 
aaates t. 
&g 37 as 
 
reRs, photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL MEYER AND WILLIAM. H. LAUFERSICK, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
HYDRANT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 291,068, dated January 1, 1884. 
Application filed June 19, 1883. (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CARL MEYER and 
WILLIAM. H. LAUFERSICK, both citizens of 
the United States, residing at Cincinnati, in 
the county of Hamilton and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and usefullmprove 
ments in Non-Wasting Hydrants, of which 
the following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to those devices com 
monly known as non-wasting and non-freez 
ing hydrants; and the first part of our im 
provements consists in providing the piston 
or plunger with a hollow or tubular rod, in 
Order that the air may readily escape from the 
chamber at the base of the hydrant when the 
plunger is depressed, the upper or exposed 
end of this hollow piston-rod being perforated, 
so as to allow a free ventage of the air, as 
hereinafter more fully described. 
The second part of our improvements com 
prises a novel combination of pulley, rope, 
and lever, where with the piston can be oper 
ated by a person in one of the upper rooms 
or flats of a building, as hereinafter-more 
fully described. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a sec 
tionized elevation of the more simple form of 
our hydrant, the valve being shown elevated 
So as to permit a free passage of water through 
the stock. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the head 
of the more complex construction of the hy 
drant. 
The hydrant-stock A is of such a length as 
to insure its base being at all times below the 
frost-line, at which point said stock is screwed 
into the neck B of cap C, the latter being 
bolted to the open upper end of a chamber, 
D, closed at bottom. Chamber D is traversed 
with a piston or plunger, E, adapted to play 
water-tight therein, said piston being attached 
to a rod, F, that is hollow or tubular, as more 
clearly seen in Fig. 4. The upper end of this 
piston-rod may be attached either to a hand 
wheel, or crank, or lifting-lever, G, but must 
be provided with a suitable ventage, f. Fur 
thermore, said hollow piston-rod carries a cyl 
inder-valve, H, adapted to close the inlet I of 
the hydrant. 
The hydrant just described is designed to 
be placed in the ground the ordinary distance 
and to discharge water only at the spout a. 
Consequently chamber ID must be of such a 
capacity as to hold the water that would oth 
erwise remain in the stock when the hydrant 
is closed. When lever G is elevated, piston E 
is drawn up to the top of chamber D, and the 
lower end of valve H is above the inlet I, 
thereby allowing water to enter the stock 
A, flow freely through said valve, and finally 
be discharged at the spout a. To close the 
hydrant, lever G is forced down, thereby driv 
ing the piston E to the bottom of chamber D, 
as indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 1, 
which act causes valve H to cover the end 
of inlet I, and thus effectually cuts off the Sup 
ply of water. It is evident the piston E. could 
not be forced down unless Some arrangement 
was made to prevent the imprisonment of air 
beneath said piston; but this difficulty is over 
come by the provision of the tubular rod F, 
which allows such air to pass through it and 
escape at the ventage f. Consequently the 
piston is depressed with the utmost ease, the 
space above said piston serving to retain the 
water that would otherwise remain in the stock 
and be liable to freeze up in the winter season 
and burst the hydrant. In Fig. 2 the hydrant 
is arranged to discharge Water either at the 
spout at or to carry it through a pipe, J, to the 
upper rooms of a building; hence the cham 
ber for such a hydrant must be sufficiently 
capacious to retain not only the Water in stock 
A, but also all that may collect in the pipe J 
and its attachments. This pipe is to have On 
every floor a faucet or cock similar to the One 
K, the simple opening of which will furnish 
water, but in order to close the hydrant at 
night, and without being compelled to descend 
to the yard, a person can pull the rope or chain 
Lin the direction of the double-headed arrow, 
which act will force the piston down within 
its chamber, and thus drain the stock A and 
all its connections. 
The hydrant can be opened in the morning 
by pulling said rope or chain in the direction 
of the single-headed arrow. This rope passes 
around a sheave, N, journaled in the hydrant 
head, and also around a similar sheave secured 
near the top of the house, the opposite ends 
of said rope being fastened to loops g g of 
lever G. 
We claim as our invention 
1. In combination with the stock AI, cham 
75 
go 
95 
LOO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
. So 
 
2 
29,06S 
spout (t. K. pipe J, level G, l'ope L, and sheave 
bel D, and piston E, of a non-wasting hydrant, 
the hollow piston-rod F, carrying the cut-off N, which lever, l'ope, and sheave enable said 
piston-rod to be operated from the upper sto 
H, and having near its upper end a ventage, 
ries of a house, substantially as explained. 
f, that permits the escape of air from chamber 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
5 D when said piston is depressed, as herein 
in presence of two witnesses. 
described. 
2. In combination with a non-wasting hy 
CARL AEYER. 
drant having a hollow piston-rod, F, provided 
WILLIAMI H. A.UFERSICK. 
with a plunger, E, cut-off H, and ventage f, 
IO which ventage permits escape of air from the 
chamber D, as herein described, the valved 
JAALES II. LAYMAN, 
SAML. S. CARPENTER. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291168.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES B. DUDLEY, OF ALTOONA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
METHOD OF PURIFYING WATER FOR BOLER USE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 291,168, dated January 1, 1884. 
Application filed August 25, 1883. (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs B. DUDLEY, 
of Altoona, county of Blair, and State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in the Art of Purifying Waters; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full and exact description of the same. 
This discovery relates to the art of purify 
ing waters for boiler use; and it consists in the 
use of caustic baryta followed by carbonate of 
soda, the whole process being in one operation. 
It is well known that certain waters which 
it is desired to use for boilerpurposes contain 
such large amounts of mineral matter-such 
as sulphates and carbonates of lime and mag 
nesia--that their use is followed by serious in 
crustations, causing loss of heat and damage 
to the boilers, and that certain other waters 
notably, those mixed with the drainage of 
mines and pickling-liquors from galvanizing 
works, &c.-contain such large amounts of 
corrosive constituents-such as sulphuric acid 
and sulphates of iron and alumina-that they 
cannot be used without great loss and damage 
to the boilers. 
The object of this discovery is to render all 
these waters fit for use in steam-boilers by re 
moving the objectionable material from the 
WaterS. 
The method of carrying my discovery prac 
tically into effect is as follows: The water hav 
ing been analyzed to ascertain its constituents, 
is treated with caustic baryta in sufficient 
amount to combine with the carbonic acid, both 
free and as bicarbonates, the sulphuric acid 
and the chlorine combined with lime and mag 
nesia, iron and alumina, provided any or all 
of these are present. The water is then agi 
tated for an hour (more or less) to effect thor 
ough mixture and allow the remaining chemi 
cal reactions to take place. Carbonate of soda 
is then added in sufficient amount to precipi 
tate, as carbonates, any lime or baryta salts that 
may be in solution in the water. This agita 
tion is then continued sufficiently long to al- 45 
low the necessary reactions to take place. The 
water is then allowed to settle, when the clear 
water above the precipitate is ready for use. 
The principal chemical reactions which take 
place in the above-described method are prob- 5O 
ably as follows: The carbonic acid, both free 
and as bicarbonates, combines with the baryta, 
forming carbonate of baryta, which precipi 
tates. The sulphuric acid combines with the 
baryta, forming sulphate of baryta, which pre- 55 
cipitates. The chlorine will probably unite 
with the caustic baryta, forming chloride of 
barium, which will remainin solution. The car 
bonates of lime and magnesia held in solution 
by carbonic acid will be precipitated by the 6o 
combination of the carbonic acid with the caus 
tic baryta. The lime and magnesia, iron and 
alumina, combined with sulphuric acid, will 
separate as hydrates. Of these the iron, alum 
ina, and magnesia will precipitate. The lime- 65 
at least a portion of it--will remain in solution. 
This caustic lime and the chloride barium are 
precipitated as carbonates by the carbonate of 
Soda. 
those above given may take place; but the 
above are the principal reactions, and the re 
sult of the whole is that by far the largest por 
tion of the objectionable impurities originally 
in the water are removed and the water ren- 75 
dered alkaline and fit for boiler use. 
Having thus fully described my discovery, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
waters, consisting in treating the same first 
with caustic baryta and then with carbonate 
of soda, the whole process being in one oper 
ation, as set forth. 
It is possible that some other reactions than 7o 
The herein-described method of purifying 8o 
CEHAS, B. DUDLEY. 
Witnesses: 
THEODORE S. WEST, 
WM. T. EMERSON, 
O 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291268.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 291,268, 
F. ARMSTRONG. 
DIE STOCK, 
Patented Jan, l, 1884. 
  
Z7 ozze7c6oz: 
72-azz, 7-zes/regg 
4, 24 7--e. 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
v: 
FRANK ARMSTRONG, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
DiE-STOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 291,268, dated January 1, 1884. 
. . . . . . 
Application filed June 27, 1881. (No model. Patented in England July 15, 1881, No. 3,099. 
supports the vise H. J is the pipe secured in 
To all uphon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANKARMSTRONG, of the wise. d is a screw for tightening the pipe 
Bridgeport, in the county of Fairfield and State within the vise. e is the screw for raising and 
of Connecticut, have invented a niew and use- lowering the gate c. f is the yoke attached to 
5 ful Improvement in Die-Stocks; and Idohere 
the Vise H. g are projections, having sockets 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, to receive handles which are now used to op 
and exact description of the same, such as will erate die-stocks. 
Fig. 2 represents a front elevation of Fig.1. 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap- 
pertains to make and use the same. 
K is the cutter-head, having the gear B cut on 
Io Myinvention relates to that class of die-stock 
its periphery. h. h. are the cutting-dies. ii are 
operated by hand for cutting pipes or rods, and 
the adjusting-screws for the dies h. h. iij are 
is more especially intended for cutting threads 
projecting lugs, holding the screws ii. k is the 
On pipes. 
screw for holding theyokeffirmly to the viseH. 
Prior tomyinvention it was customary, in the 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the vise H, 
15 earlier history of the art, to cause the rotation and showing more clearly the manner of at 
of the die-stock by the employment of radial taching the yokef to the same. llare the jaws 
arms or levers, which required the services of for clamping and holding the pipe while in the 
two operatives; and, in order to overcome this operation of being threaded. m. is a lug or sup 
necessity for the labor of two men, it was sub-port for the screwe, used for raising and low 
20 sequently suggested to rotate the die-stock ering the gate c. 1 m n n are holes by which the 
through the medium of a pinion geared with chair I, holding the vise H, is secured to the 
the periphery of the die-stock, and several dif- bench. 
ferent constructions were devised, one of which 
The construction and operation are as foll 
involved the employment of a threaded hub ar- lows: The cutter-head K, with the diesh h, and 
25 ranged on the pipe to be cut, which served as the manner of adjusting them, the stock A, 
a lead for the die-stock, so that a given hub having the socket g for handles, and the wise 
and die-plates were required for different H, with its jaws l, are what are now employed 
threads. Other constructions were suggested for cutting or threading pipes, and are there 
involving comparatively complex mechanism fore not new. When cutting smallpipes it re 
quires comparatively little labor, with the aid. 
Myinvention has for its object simplicity of of the handle, to form the thread; but when 
construction and ease of operation in that class necessary to cut pipes of large diametersitre 
of machines involving the employment of a quires the service of from two to four men to 
driving-pinion; and it consists in the peculiar operate it, making it a difficult and tiresome 
35 construction and arrangement of parts here 
operation; but by means of the gear and pinion 
inafter described and specifically claimed. 
one man can easily cut the largest pipes. The 
To more clearly understand my invention, 
pipe J is placed within the jaws l l of the vise 
reference is had to the drawings accQmpanying 
H, and held firmly there by the tightening 
this specification and forming part of the same, 
screw d. The stock A, with the cutter-head B, 
is slipped on the pipe, and the shaft Dinsert 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
ed in its bearings in the ears FF, and the 
die-stock. A is the portion of the stock which 
pinion and gear brought in contact, and by 
slips over the pipe. a is one of a series of thim 
means of the handle E the cutter-head is made 
bles used for different sizes of pipes. b is a 
to revolve. When the pipe is threaded up far 
45 thumb-screw for securing the same. Bis the 
enough, instead of reversing the cutter-head 
gear cut on the periphery of the cutter-head. 
or turning it backward by means of the handle 
C is the pinion engaging therein; D, the shaft 
E, the shaft Distaken from its bearings in the 
for the pinion. E is the handle for operating 
ears FF. The shaftD, having the handle and 
the same. FF are projections or ears, having 
pinion attached, is laid aside for future use. 
5o bearings for the shaft D. c is a sliding gate, 
The cutter-head is then whirled back quickly 
to which the ears FF are attached. EI is the by hand and removed from the pipe. 
vise for holding pipes. I is the chair which 
In cutting pipes extremely large or small it 
3O and proportionately increased power. 
O in which 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
 
will become necessary to employ different-sized 
jaws in the vise, and as the axis of the gear B 
will be higher or lower, according to the size 
or height of the jaws of the vise, the relation 
s 
between the cogs on the periphery of said gear 
and the pinion C will vary, thus rendering it 
necessary to provide for adjustment for the 
pinion C, which I accomplish through theme 
This latter is threaded 
dium of the screw e. 
in the gatec, in the ears F of which the pinion 
shaft has its bearing, so that as the screw e is 
turned in one or the other direction the gatec 
and pinion Care accordingly raised or lowered. 
The yoke f, as seen more clearly at Fig. 3, 
and to which the gate e is attached, is secured 
to the vise H by means of the screwk, and may 
be thus secured at any point required. 
It will be observed that the die-stock is pro 
vided with the usuallhandle-sockets, ty, and also 
the gear B, so that either means may be used at 
pleasure for operating the die-stock, and it will 
also be observed that the pinion-sha?t D moves 
longitudinally in its bearings on the gate c, so 
that the shaft may be instantly drawn from its 
25 bearings when it becomes desirable to use the 
15 
; 
; 
; 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
" 
. 
29,268 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
- 
: 
. 
. 
; 
: 
: 
: 
: 
: : 
: :T. . 
hat I 3o 
stock in the ordinary way with handles, or when 
a thread has been cut and it is desired to run 
the stock back quickly, and the disengagement 
of the gear and pinions thus becomes desirable. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In combination with the die-stock A, pro 
vided with the gear B, the operating-pinion C. 
having its shaft Darranged in bearings F JF 
upon a vertically-movable gate, c, and adapt: 
ed to slide longitudinally therein, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The die-stock A, provided with a gear, 
B, adapted to be operated by a pinion, and 4o 
also provided with handle-socketsg, substan 
. 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. . . 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing, I 
have set my hand in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
35 
' . 
; 
. 
. 
. 
; 
: 
FRANK ARMSTRONG. 
Witnesses: 
NATHANIEL W. VANDEGRIF7, 
HENRY E. BowsER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291368.txt	 
 
UNITED STATES 
JOHN H. LUX AND PHILIPLUX, OF EARLVILLE, IOWA. 
PATENT OFFICE, 
HAY ELEVATOR AND CARRIER. 
SPEIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 291,868, dated January 1, 1884. 
Application filed November 5, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
I5 
55 
To all whon, it notty concern. : 
PHILIPLUX, citizens of the United States, and extremities. 
residents of Earlville, in the county of Dela 
ware and State of Iowa, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Hay 
Elevators and Carriers; and we do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, and in 
which 
Figure 1 is a sectional side elevation of our 
improved hay elevator and carrier, showing 
the interior construction and arrangement of 
parts of the carriage after the fork-sheave has 
reached and interlocked with it, and is ready 
to start off on the track; and Fig. 2 is a simi 
lar view, showing the carriage in its position 
after it has passed the triangular latch-block 
H, and is in position to receive and interlock 
with the fork-sheave suspended below the car 
riage. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in both the figures. 
Our invention consists in certain new and 
useful improvements upon the hay elevator. 
and carrier for which Letters Patent No. 
260,697 were granted to us, bearing date of 
July 4, 1882, as will be hereinafter more fully 
described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, the track 
beam, carriage proper, and hoisting-pulley or 
fork-pulley are precisely the same as those de 
scribed and shown in the above-mentioned 
Letters Patent, and do not therefore require 
any description. 
F represents the cup or bell shaped catch, 
which has its fulcrum upon one of the bolts 
a, which connect the sides A A', and which 
is of the shape shown in the drawings, hav 
ing a shoulder or step,F, upon its upper side, 
with which one end of the lever D engages in 
order to lock the sheave-frame Min its raised 
position. Above this catch is pivoted, at a, 
the lever D, the long arm D of which extends 
partially over the catch F, and is provided 
near its extremity with a step or shoulder, 
E, for the purposehereinafter described. The 
shape of this lever is clearly shown in the 
drawings, both of its arms being beveled or 
Be it known that we, JoHN H. LUX and partially rounded upon the upper side of their 
The operation of this improved locking de 
vice is as follows: This locking device particu 
larly adapts the carrier to be used for loading 
hay out of the mow onto the wagon, as well 
as for unloading from the wagon onto the mow 6o 
or stack. This is done by placing a latch 
block on the track over the mow, and another 
on the track over the wagon. As the carriage 
travels along the track-beam to receive a load 
from the Wagon, block H will, as it passes un- 65 
der it, strike the lip or short lever-arm D', 
and thus tilt the long arm D in an upward di 
rection, which releases catch F from the ex 
tremity of the said long arm, thus releasing 
ball m, which is clamped between the sock-7o 
eted catch F and studs E, when the hoisting 
pulley L will drop down upon the load by its 
own weight and that of the fork. After the 
fork has been charged, it is elevated by pulling 
on rope R until ball m, entering the bell- 75 
shaped mouth B in the bottom of the carriage, 
strikes and tilts catch F, the socket of which 
it enters, and is held therein between it and 
the studs E by lever D falling back into its 
locking position; but before ball in reaches 8o 
its socket, and while the load is being eleva 
ted from the wagon to the carrier, the latter is 
held in place upon the track-beam by the 
block H abutting against the abrupt side of 
step or shoulder F, which it cannot pass un- 85 
till ball m, entering the socketed catch F, 
throws this and lever-arm D up sufficiently 
to dip arm D', so that the carriage may pass 
under block H on its return trip to the mow. 
When the carriage reaches that part of the 9o 
track which is above the mow, the beveled or 
rounded end of the short arm D' strikes 
against the other block H, which is secured 
upon the under side of the track just above 
the mow, thereby opening the locking uevice 95. 
in the manner just described, and allowing 
the hoisting-pulley L and fork to fail down up 
on the mow by their own weight. 
It is obvious that the carrier can also be 
used to loadhay from the mow upon the wagon, IOC 
in a similar manner, if desired. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
the construction of our invention, as well as 
35 
g 
29,36S 
its maner of operating, will readily be under 
stood without requiring further explanation. 
It will be seen that the carrier can be easily 
and readily changed to work from opposite 
ends of the track by simply removing it from 
the end of the track and reversing it. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
The improved locking device for hay ele 
vators and carriers of the described class here 
in shown and described, consisting of the piv 
oted catch F, having shoulder F, and the piv 
oted lever D, having long arm D', provided 
IO 
with a step or shoulder, E, and having the 
upper side of its extremity beveled or par 
tially rounded, and short arm D', having the 
upper side of its extremity beveled or round 
ied, as and for the purpose shown and set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereunto affixed our signal 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN H. LUX. 
PHILIP LUX. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. DIETRICK, 
ALEX. SAFSTROM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291468.txt	 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD CHAPMAN BLACKWELL, OF HENDERSON, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNO 
OF ONE-HALF TO GEORGE DELKER, OF SAME PLACE. 
I 
WAGON RUNNING - GEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 291,468, dated January 1, 1884. 
Application filed April 28, 1883. (No model.) 
-n. 
? 
65 
raised or bail-shaped in the center above the 
To all whom it may concern : 
tongue, so as to allow the forward end of the 
Be it known that I, RICHARD CHAPNIAN 
said tongue a free movement a sufficient dis 
BLACKWELL, a citizeneof the United States, 
and resident of Henderson, in the county of tance upward. An opening is made in the cen 
Henderson and State of Kentucky, have in- ter between the axle and the head-block, 55 
through which opening the forward end of the 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
reach projects in front of the axle, and is piv 
in Wagons, of which the following is a speci 
oted to the rear end of the tongue, a bolt, f, 
fication. 
passing through the reach and through lugs 
Myinvention relates to wagons of that class 
h h", which lugs are secured, respectively, to 
in which the tongue is flexible-that is, 
the lower and upper surfaces of the tongue; 
pivoted between the hounds, so as to allow it 
but the lug his bent upward and then rear 
vertical oscillation upon said pivot-as a con 
ward, so that the distance between the two 
tradistinction to wagons of another class hav 
lugs h h' at the point at which the boltfisin 
ing a stiff' tongue, or where the tongue is 
Serted through them is much greater than at 
rigidly secured between the hounds, so as not 
the point at which they are attached to the 
to allow of the aforesaid oscillation with rela 
tongue, or in this case greater than the thick 
tion to the hounds. 
ness of the tongue, thereby allowing the rear 
The object of my invention is to allow of piv. 
end of the tongue to be depressed and its for 
oting the forward end of the reach to the rear 
end of the tongue, while providing for said 
ward end to be raised, as it needs be-for in 
stance, in driving up hill-the bolt-plate a, 
oscillatory movement of the tongue, the fea 
forward of the pind, presenting no hinderance 
ture of pivoting the reach and tongue togeth 
er being known before this invention. 
to such movement, while a movement of the 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure1 rep 
forward end of the tongue too far downward, 
or near to the ground, is prevented and 
resents a longitudinal vertical section of the 
stopped by the straight plate at engaging with 
front part of a wagon, taken on the line 2: 2 of 
the upper surface of the tongue in the rear of 
Fig. 2, and seen in the direction of arrow 1. 
the pivot. By the aforesaid construction of 
Fig. 2 is a top view of the same. Fig. 3 is de 
the coupling h if the reach can be pivoted to 
tail cross-section on the linea: a of Figs. 1 and 
the tongue when desired, while yet allowing 
2. Fig. 4 is a partial section of the bolster and 
the tongue to be oscillated upon the pivot d 
sand-board, taken on the liney y of Fig. 2. Fig. 
5is a perspective view of a hinge-bolt for con 
to raise or lower its forward end. 
Ilay no claim to coupling tongue and reach 
necting the bolster and the sand-board. Fig. 
together by means of lug and pin, but to the 
6 is a rear view of the front portion of a wag 
construction, in combination with the reach 
on, partly in section through the line y), and 
illustrating the intended operation of my pres 
and pivoted tongue, which allows of raising and 
lowering the latter. 
ent invention when the wagon is tilted. Fig. 
7 is a top view of the bolster with the hinge 
In order to enable the bolster to retain a 
comparatively horizontal position during the 
bolt applied. 
A designates the axle; B, the head-block or tilting motion of the axle A, I have provided 
sand-board; C, the bolster; D, the tongue; E, means for making the bolster laterally oscil 
lable upon that surface around the pivot of the 
the hounds, and ethe bolt connecting their rear 
ends; F, the reach. The tongue D is pivoted 
sand-board upon which the bolster rests. For 
this purpose the hole in the bolster by which 
between the forward ends of the hounds by a 
the latter is pivoted upon the pinb, secured in 
bolt, d, passing through the said forward ends 
the sand-board, is made widening upward to 
and the tongue simullaneously. The forward 
ward the upper sides of the wagon, while the 
ends of the hounds in front and rear of the 
pivot d are connected together on the upper 
front and rear sides of the hole are parallel 
sides by cross-plates act, the plate a being flat 
with each other, suitably to receive a metal 
and straight and the forward plate, a?, being 
thimble, c, of the aforesaid shape-or, that is 
75 
9O 
95 
?? ? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
?? 
so 
2 
291,46s 
O 
to say, of the shape of a flattened hollow trun- hinge as in Fig. 6, allowing no other oscilla 
cated cone inverted, and placed so that the long 
tion of the bolster than sidewise, the head 
axis of its base coincides or is parallel with the 
g" of the bolt G is made oval or oblong, and 
center line drawn through the length of the 
countersunk into a similar-shaped recess in 
bolster, as shown in Figs. 2 and 4. The lower 
the bolster C, as shown in Fig. 7. 
opening in the thimble fits snugly, though not 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
tightly, around the pivot b, while the upper 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
end of the thimble is suitably widened later 
In combination with the tongue D, pivoted 
ally, thus allowing of free oscillation of the 
at d in the hounds E, the reach F, loosely con 
bolster C upon the surface of the head-block 
nected to the rear end of said tongue by the 
or sand-board B adjacent to the pivot b, on 
parts h h' f, the flat platea, and the bail-plate 
which the bolster rests. 
a', for allowing play to the tongue, as set forth. 
Instead of the thimble c and a rigid bolt, b, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
a flexible bolt, G, formed of two rigidsections, 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
gy, hinged together, as shown in Fig. 5, may 
ence of two witnesses, this 20th day of Novem 
be used, in which case the hole in the bolster 
ber, 1882. 
may be made cylindrical, and fitting the bolt, 
as shown in Fig. 6, the hinge in the bolt allow 
ing of the oscillatory movement before stated. 
To insure, however, that the bolt shall be re 
tained in the proper position to present the 
A. F. KENNIED, 
ED. MARRION. 
RICIARI) Cll APA AN BLACKWELI. 
Witnesses: 
25 
- 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291568.txt	(No Model.) 
H. BORCHARDT. 
ROCK DRILL. 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
HUGO, BOR 
PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARDT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE PARSONS 
HAND ROCK DRILL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
R O C K 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
-DRILL, 
, 
Application filed June 20, 1881. Patent No. 291,568, dated January 8, 1884. 
Renewed July 20, 1SS3. (No m???el.) 
O 
15 
. 
To all typhi ???, it ??? ?????????, : . 
Beit known that I, HUGO BORCHARDT, of 
the city and State of New York, have invented 
Improvements in Rock-Drills, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My improvement relates especially to the 
class of drills used for drilling rock in which 
the work of boring is done by successive blows 
of the drill; and my invention consists in the 
peculiar construction and in the combination 
of parts, as more fully hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
The accompanying drawings, representing a 
drill embodying my invention, are as follows: 
Figure 1 is an elevation of my improve 
ment represented as being clamped in a chuck 
and provided with a device for supplying it 
with Water. Fig. 2 is a transverse section 
through the line a a on Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
transverse section through the line y if on Fig. 
1; and Fig. 4 is a transverse section, showing 
a modification in the exterior form of the tubul 
lar diril]. 
The drawings represent a drill, A, made of I duce. 
. . . 
. . 
seen, the lower end, a, of the tube a is slightly 5o 
diminished in diameter. This upsetting of 
the metal has two advantages besides enlarg- ". 
ing the diameter of the drill: It slightly closes 
up the lower end of the water-channel and 
condenses the metal at the cutting-edges, thus 
making it better fitted for standing the shocks 
to which it is subjected when in operation. 
. The advantages of partially closing in the 
bottom of the hole are that the acting face of 
the drill can be larger, and, the hole being 6o 
smallest at the point where the drill comes in 
contact with the rock, nothing can get into the 
hole that will stop the passage of the water 
downward, because, should a small piece of 
stone get accidentally into the hole, the next 65 
blow would drive it into the larger part of 
the channel, where the water could readily 
pass it. 
The drill may be made of any desired shape 
in cross-section. The form shown in Fig. 3 
is, however, that which I have found specially 
convenient in practical use and easy to pro 
Another form which may be used is 
shown in Fig. 4. Both of these forms have 
the advantage of leaving metal extending be- 75 
yond the body of the drill, on which the ex 
iterior edges of the cutters of the drill can be 
formed. The ribs also form shoulders to keep 
the collar C in position, the latter being held 
between the ends of the ribs and the chuck B. 8o 
In manufacturing my drill I adopt the 
method employed in rolling gun-barrels, by 
rolling skelps of steel upon a mandrel, using 
for the finishing operation two rollers having 
grooves corresponding in shape to the cross-85 
section of either half of the exterior of Fig. 3 
above or below the dotted line & 3. 
Except when waterisinjected into the drill, 
it is mot essential to the practice of the main 
part of my invention that the hole a shall ex- 9o 
tend entirely through the drill, nor that water 
or other liquid shall be injected into the hole a. 
A central hole extending only a short distance 
inward from the working-face of the drill will 
impart those advantages of my invention 
which consist in the facilitation of the temper 
ing operation and the increase of the dura 
bility and working capacity of the drill. Such 
35 
a tubular bar of steel, and clamped at its up 
per end in the chuck B of a steam rock-drill. 
The hole at extends longitudinally through the 
center of the drill-bar A, preferably from one 
end to the other. The upper portion of the 
drill is turned in cylindrical form to fit the end 
of the chuck B, and also to form a shoulder, 
A, for the support of the loose collar C. The 
interior of the collar C is provided with the 
annular recess c, and a hole is tapped in its 
periphery to form the nozzle C, upon which 
the end of the flexible pipe D is secured. 
Water introduced through the pipe D makes 
its way through the perforated nozzle C into 
the annular recess c, and thence into the in 
terior of the hollow drill through the hole a' 
tapped laterally through the drill-bar, as 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1 and in longi 
tudinal section in Fig. 2. 
The cutting end of the drill is upset in the 
45 usual way, in order to enlarge its diameter, 
and is formed into four cutting-chisels resem 
bling, but for the absence of metal in the face, 
the drill commonly used. 
In the act of upsetting the metal, as will be 
 : 
? 
 
 
 
 
2 
29,56s 
a comparatively shallow hole or recess might 
be formed by boring out the center of the drill 
bar to any desired depth. 
I am aware of the English Patent No. 3,012 
5 of 1878, and make no claim to anything shown 
therein. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A drilling-tool having spiral external 
ribs and a longitudinal central channel, the 
Io said channel terminating at the junction of 
cutting-edges formed on the face of said drill 
upon the continuation of said ribs, and said 
cutting-edges extending inward to decrease 
the diameter of the channel and outward to 
the extremities of said ribs to increase the act 
ing parts of the tool, substantially as specified. 
2. A. dirilling-tool having a central longi 
tudinal channel, a, connecting with a trans 
verse water - Way, a?, and having external 
flanges or ribs extending lengthwise of the 
drill, forming bearing-shoulders, combined 
with a collar, C, resting on said ribs, having an 
nular water-chamber c and pipe-connections 
thereto, as set forth. HUGO BORCHARDT. 
Witnesses: 
M. L. ADAMS, 
WM. RUMBILE. 
t 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291668.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 291,668, 
S. & S. L. BARKER 
SELF CLOSING FAUCET, 
Patented Jan, 8, 1884, 
NWesses 
wa. 
6. M at- M 
woke 
4- 6a-e-. 
4-4-26 -3621-7eel. 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographer. Washington, D. c. 
- 
o27. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
SILAS BARKER AND SAMUEL L. BARKER, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, 
SELF-CLOS ING FAUCET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 291,668, dated January 8, 1884. 
Application filed April 18, 1883. (No model.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, SILAS BARKER and 
SAMUEL L. BARKER, of Hartford, in the 
county of Hartford and State of Connecticut, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Self-Closing Faucets; and we 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, whereby 
a person skilled in the art can make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon. 
Like letters in the figures indicate the same 
parts. 
Figure 1 is a top view of our device. Fig. 
2 is a view in longitudinal vertical section on 
plane denoted by line XX of Fig. 1, show 
ing valve closed. Fig. 3 is a view in longi 
tudinal section, showing valve open. Fig. 4 
shows detail sectional views of one form of 
valve and packing. Fig. 5 is a detail view 
of an alternate form of valve. Fig. 6 is a 
detail view of the adjustable valve-operating 
al 
Our invention relates to the class of fluid 
cocks known as self-closing;' and it con 
sists of the improved combination of parts by 
which the valve is automatically closed with 
out the use of a spring. 
The accompanying drawings represent our 
invention as applied to a faucet of ordinary 
construction; and the letter a denotes the 
body of the faucet as a whole, attached by 
means of screw-threads to the plug b, which 
bears a stop-cock, c. The faucet is provided 
with the branch d, through which the operat 
ing parts may be inserted within the faucet, 
and is closed by a screw-cap, e, suitably 
packed. The spindlef, in the form shown, 
is arranged transversely of the branch, bears 
on its outer end the operating-handleg and 
within the faucet the crank h, which is fast 
ened to the spindle by means of a key or the 
clamp-screw i, as shown. 
To the lower end of the crank is pivotally 
connected a rod, j, having stop k, and at its 
outer end the adjustable arm l, the end of 
which is in contact with the face of the disk 
shaped valve m. The rod j slides in, the 
.45 
socket or guide a, fast to the body of the 5o 
faucet, and its play is limited by means of 
the shoulder in contact with the face of this 
guide. 
The valve m is preferably circular in form, 
and is provided on its face with an annular 55 
packing, m, of soft material-as leather or 
the like-which packing is held in place by 
means of the radial pins driven through the 
flange of the valve into the packing. The 
valve may be made wholly of soft material, 
strengthened or re-enforced by the pins driven 
through and into it radially and edgewise. 
This valve is arranged to operate in a cham 
ber, al", formed between the valve-seat in and 
the end b of the plug. 
The operation of our device is as follows: 
When it is secured to a line of water-pipe, the 
water forces the valve to its seat, as shown in 
Fig. 2, and closes the faucet. The faucet is 
opened by turning the handleg in such a way 
as to push the valve back from its seat by 
means of the rod and arm, as shown in Fig. 
3. The amount of play of the valve is de 
termined by means of the adjustable arm l, 
which is provided, preferably, with a rounded 
head, as shown. 
The valve-operating spindle may be ar 
ranged vertically, if desired, and we do not 
limit ourselves to the special arrangement and 
combination of parts here shown, as the main 
feature of our invention consists of the loose 
valve m, operated in closing and held to its 
seat by the pressure of the water. 
The plug and stop-cock c are not essential 
parts of our invention, but are convenient 
when it is desired to remove the faucet to re 
pair the valve. 
75 
. 
- 
We claim as our invention- 
1. In combination, the faucet-body a, hav 
ing the valve-chamber a' and the seat in, the 
disk-shaped loose valve m, and the valve 
operating mechanism, all substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In combination, in a self- closing fau 
cet, the body a, loose valve m, rodi, with ad 
justable arm l, and valve-operating mechan 
ism, all substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
. . 
. 
. 
95 
2 
29,668 
3. In a self-closing faucet of the kind here 
in described, in combination, the faucet-body 
a, provided with guide a, spindlef, bearing 
crank h, and the rodi, having stop k, all sub 
4. The loose valve in, having a mortised 
face, in which annular packing in is secured 
by means of radial pins or the like, all sub 
5 stantially as described. 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
SILAS BARKER. 
SAMUEL L. BARKER. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. L. BURDETT, 
H. C. YOUNG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291769.txt	(No Model.) 
A. PORTILL0. 
STEAM (AGE AND ALARM. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 291.769, 
Patented Jan. 8, 1884, 
 
 
 
 
 
2Z,2eez, 
** to 4- 3.43 
atzoseces Zorezeo, 
(No Model.) 
No. 291,769, 
 
A PORTILL, O, 
STEAM G. AGE AND AIA.R.M. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 8, 1884. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTUS PORTILLO, OF LOWELL, MASSA CHUSETTS, 
STEAV GAGE AND A ARV. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 291,769, dated January 8, 1884, 
Application filed October 18, 1883. 
(No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
55 
a laterally-extending pin, K, and at its end 
To a 27, whom it Tray concer'7. 
with an angular shoulder for the attachment 
Be it known that I, AUGUSTUs PORTILLO, 
of the secondary index-hand L, which projects 
a citizen of Mexico, residing at Lowell, in the 
over the pin, and for the application of a key 
county of Middlesex and State of Massachu 
to turn the post. While the post may be 
setts, have invented new and useful Improve 
turned by the application of a key or other 
ments in Steam Gages and Alarms, of which 
tool, still it fits tight enough not to be acci 
the following is a specification. 
dentally turned, and for those purposes it may 
My invention relates to steam - pressure 
be secured either by fitting snugly in the open- 6o 
gages, and has for its object to produce, by a 
ing made in the back therefor, Or by the appli 
simple and efficient construction, a gage that 
cation thereto of a spring pawl and ratchet, or 
will both indicate the pressure in the boiler 
otherwise, as may be found most desirable; 
aiad sound an alarm when the pressure ex 
but in every case the spring-plate will be free 
ceeds a predetermined limit, the construction 
to slide to some degree thereon. A pinion, M., 
being such that it may be applied to steam 
is fitted loosely around the post between the 
gages already in use; and it consists in a pri 
pin Kithereof and the spring-plate, so as to be 
mary and a secondary index-hand and an alarm 
free to turn without moving the post, and its 
bell, combined in such a manner that the sec 
teeth mesh with those of the segment-rack. 
ondary hand may be set to indicate the pre 
This pinion is provided on its face with a col- 70 
determined pressure, and the alarm sounded 
lar, N, the exposed face of which is either in 
when the primary hand reaches on the scale, 
by reason of the steam-pressure, the pounds 
contact with the under side of pin K or in 
close proximity thereto, and provided with a 
pressure indicated by the secondary hand, the 
lug or cam, n, the face of which cam is pref. 
details of which means I will now proceed to 
erably flattened; but it may be made pointed 75 
describe. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a front view of 
or arounded. 
the gage with my improvements applied; Fig. 
If desired, a spring, b, may be made to en 
circle the post J between the plate i, below 
2, a similar view with the face of the gage re 
the dial-plate, and a collar, j', on the post just 
moved; Fig. 3, a detailed perspective view of 
: 
the spring - plate, pinion, Scapement-wheel, 
below the dial-plate, so as to have a tendency 
to press the port upward, and thereby hold its 
and pallet, 
head l; tightly against the back plate of thc 
In the drawings, the letter A indicates the 
case provided with the face B, having thereon 
case, so as to increase the friction between the 
the scale of pressure, and containing the two parts and render the post more difficult 
spring-tube C, segmental rack D, connecting- to turn; but such construction is not essential, 
link E, pinion F, meshing with the rack, and and may be omitted. 
A post, O, is pivoted in the case, and is 
primary index-hand G, all of which parts are 
provided with a tripping - arm, P, which non 
of the ordinary construction and application, 
Imally bears against the side of pin I on the 
and therefore need not be more fully described. 
spring-plate; and it is further provided with 
I secure, by screws or other means, to the in 
side of the back of the case, and in proximity 
an arm, Q, at the end of which is a hammer, 
(1, that strikes against a gong, R, Secured, pref 
to the segmental rack, a spring metallic plate, 
erably, to the periphery of the case. The post 
H, which is curved or formed so that it will 
O is also provided with the verge S, which 
be slightly above the back of the case and 
engages with the scape-wheel T, which forms 
free from contact therewith from its riveting 
45 point, or a point in advance thereof, forward 
one member of a train of clock-work mech 
anism of ordinary and well-known construc 
to its front or free end, where it is provided 
tion, and embracing the cog-wheels U and V, 
with a pin, I, which projects at right angles 
the barrel-pinions at , and spring W. If de 
to the face of the spring-plate. A post, J, 
sired, the cog-wheel V might be omitted and 
is passed through the back of the case and 
the cog-wheel U made to mesh directly with 
So through the spring-plate intermediate of its 
the pinion l; but, as stated, any ordinary 
ends, and is provided near its inner end with 
So 
90 
95 
O 
OO 
2 
29,769 
Sis 
75 
OO 
O 
clock-alarm mechanism suitable for the pur 
pose may be employed, and therefore it need 
. not be described in detail. 
The secondary index-hand Lhas on the face 
of the case a dial corresponding in scale to 
that of the primary index-hand. In this in 
stance both scales registering one hundred 
and eighty pounds pressure, and the connec 
tion of the pinions of the two index-hands 
With the Segment-rack is such that the pri 
mary index-hand being opposite zero of its 
Scale, and the cam on the pinion of the Sec 
Ondary hand being opposite Zero on its scale, 
the rack when moved will turn the two pin 
ions So that the primary index-hand and the 
cam of the secondary hand will indicate on 
their respective scales the same pressure. 
The operation of the gage is as follows: As 
Suming that the primary index-hand and the 
cam of the secondary hand are in their normal 
positions opposite Zero of their respective 
Scales, and that the limit of pressure, for pur 
pose of illustration only, is thirty pounds, the 
primary index-hand will be set opposite the 
scale of 30 on its dial by means of a key or 
Other means. Then if the pressure of steam 
be raised to thirty pounds, the primary index 
hand will indicate that pressure on its scale, 
and the cam on the secondary index-hand pin 
ion Will be forced against the pin extending 
laterally from the post of the secondary hand, 
and, as such is rigid and immovable as against 
the pressure of the cam, the latter will be 
pressed under the pin and force down the pin 
ion so as to depress the spring-plate and free 
the pin at the end thereof from contact with 
the arm extending from the pallet-post. The 
resistance to the pressure of the clock-work 
Spring being thus removed, that spring exerts 
its motive power on the train of clock-work 
and sets the same in motion, so that through it 
the verge and its post are oscillated and the 
hammer caused to strike the bell and sound 
the alarm. The alarm continues to be sound 
ed until the cam passes from under the pin, 
When the spring-plate will throw upward its 
pin into the line of movement of the arm ex 
tending from the verge-post, so as to check 
its Oscillation and stop the sounding of the 
alarm. The length of time that the alarm. 
Will be sounded depends on the length of the 
calm or on the time taken to reduce the steam 
pressure. 
Instead of forming the can above the face 
of the collar, the latter may have a notch or 
recess made in its face and the spring con 
structed and applied so as at all times to ex 
ert an upward pressure against the laterally 
extending pin, and the pin at the end of the 
plate applied so as to extend downwardly and 
bear against the verge-post arm, instead of 
upWardly. Under Such modification when the 
notch should reach the lateral pin the spring 
Would force the pin upward, the pin at the 
55 end thereof would be carried from the verge 
post arm, and the verge allowed to oscillate to 
give the alarm, as in the other case. 
There may be departures from the construc 
tion of the several parts described and from 
their arrangement without departing from the 
spirit of my invention, which consists, mainly, 
in combining a Bourdon steam-tube, a pri 
mary indeX - hand, a secondary index-hand 
adapted to a predetermined pressure and alarm. 
mechanism in such manner that the alarm will 
be sounded when the primary index-hand reg 
isters the pressure at which the secondary 
index-hand has been set. One modification, 
as illustrated in Fig. 4, consists in extending 
the post of the verge through the dial-plate 
and securing thereto the secondary index 
hand, which will have the scale as in the other 
form. The verge and hammer will be con 
nected with the post, so as to turn therewith. 
The index-hand in this modification will be 8 
connected with a sleeve encircling the verge 
post, to the lower end of which sleeve there 
will be attached a bevel-gear, a, which will 
mesh with a bevel-gear, b, connected to the 
case by an arm and collar or fork, so that.it 
may be free to revolve and Oscillate, but not 
to slide vertically. Through the gear b' a 
threaded shaft, c, will pass and then extend 
through the verge-post and be permitted to 
slide but not turn therein by means of a pin 
passed through the post and into a groove 
made longitudinally in the shaft, and when 
the gear b is revolved by turning the index 
hand to set it, the shaft c will be caused to rise 
or fall, according as the index-hand is turned 
in One direction or the other. There will be 
rigidly connected to the expansible steam-tube 
an arm, d, which will extend into such prox 
imity to the shaft c that the latter cannot os 
Cillate until the arm is moved above the end 
of the said shaft. The length of the shaft c 
and its adjustments with reference to the 
movement of the secondary index-hand are 
Such that the distance the arm will have to 
travel to pass the end of the shaft will be in 
proportion to the pressure of steam requisite 
to reach the number of pounds pressure in 
dicated by the secondary index-hand on its 
dial. When the arm passes the end of the 
shaft, the verge will oscillate and the alarm be 
Sounded. It will be observed that the second 
ary index-hand in this modification will be set 
and remain fixed as in the first-described con 
struction. When this modified construction 
is used, the spring-plate, pinion, and arm con 
necting the pallet-post with said place are 
omitted. 
Such is the case also when the con 
struction in Fig. 5 is used. In this last modi 
fication the verge-post shown in Fig. 3 will be 
used and there will be extended upwardly from 
it an arm, e, against which there will abut or 
extendlin close proximity thereto arearwardly 
extended arm connected with the secondary 
index-hand. The index-handlin this case will 
be connected by a thumb-screw, f, to the ver 
tical arm (, connected rigidly to the steam 
tube, and a vertical slot in the dial-plate of 
the case will permit the index-hand to be ad 
justed higher or lower upon said arm, so as to 
5 5 
3 5 
 
29,769 
3. 
- 
bring the rear end of the index-hand nearer to 
or farther from the upper end of the arm e. 
A scale corresponding in divisions to the other 
scales, but in this instance made vertical in 
stead of circular, will be formed along the 
edge of the slot, and will descend numerically, 
so that, for instance, if the alarmis to be given 
at thirty pounds pressure, the index-hand will 
be set opposite the figure 30 on the scale, and 
then the pressure of steam must be sufficient 
to expand the tube so as to raise the index 
hand from 30 to zero, when the index-hand 
will have passed the end of the arm e and the 
alarm sounded by the oscillation of the pallet. 
It will thus be seen that in this form, as the 
secondary index-hand moves with the expan 
sion of the gage-tube and the hand is set to a 
predetermined pressure, the approach to that 
pressure will be indicated by the approach of 
the hand to Zero on the Scale. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The combination, with a Bourdon press 
ure-gage and its primary index-hand, of a 
secondary index-hand adapted to be set at a 
predetermined pressure, an alarm, means for 
connecting both hands with the extensible 
steam-tube of the gage, and means for releas 
ing the striking mechanism when the pri 
mary index-hand registers the pressure at 
which the secondary index-hand has been Set, 
whereby the movement of the primary index 
hand and the sounding of the alarm are coln 
trolled from the expansible steam-tube, Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, with a Bourdon press 
ure-gage and its primary index-hand, of the 
movable post provided with a secondary in 
deX - hand adapted to be set at a predeter 
mined pressure, a pinion mounted loosely on 
said post and meshing with the sector-rack of 
the gage, a cam operated from the loose pin 
ion, an alarm and mechanism for striking the 
same, a plate engaging with a portion of the 
alarm mechanism to prevent its movement, 
and a projection for the Said calm to operate 
on to release the alarm mechanism and cause 
the alarm to be sounded when the prede 
termined pressure is reached, Substantially as 
described. 
3. The combination, with the primary in 
dex-hand, its pinion, steam-tube, and sector 
rack of a pressure - gage, of a post, a pro 
jection extending laterally therefrom, a sec 
ondary index-hand mounted on the post over 
the said projection, a pinion fitted loosely on 
the said post, a can between the pinion and 
projection of the post, adapted to vary the 
distance between the pinion and said pro 
jection, a spring - plate beneath the pinion, 
provided with a pin at one end, a post carry 
ing a hammer, verge, and arm engaging With 
the pin on the spring-plate, the gong, and the 
train of clock-work mechanism, substantially 
as described. 
4. The post provided with the lateral pro 
jection and secondary index-hand adapted to 
be set to a predetermined pressure, the pin 
ion mounted loosely on the post and carrying 
the cam, and the spring-plate, in combination 
With the primary index-hand, an alarm, and 
mechanism for operating the several parts 
when the predetermined pressure is reached, 
substantially as described. 
5. The combination of the sector-rack, the 
primary index-hand and its pinion meshing 
with the rack, the post carrying the second 
ary index-hand, the pinion mounted loosely 
on said post and meshing with the Sector 
rack, the cam operated from the pinion, and 
a projection for the cam to operate to slide 
the said pinion for the purpose of operating 
an alarm-striking mechanism, substantially as 
described. 
6. The combination, with a Bourdon steam 
gage, of the post provided with the hammer 
and tripping-arm, an alarm -gong, a Scape 
wheel operating the verge, a secondary in 
dex-hand adapted to be set at a predeter 
mined pressure, a primary index-hand Con 
nected with the expansible tube of the gage, and 
means operated from the said expansible tube 
for tripping the arm to cause the alarm to be 
sounded at a predetermined pressure, indi 
cated by said secondary index-hand, Substan 
tially as described. 
7. The combination, with a Bourdon steam 
gage, of an alarm, a primary index-hand. to 
indicate the varying pressure of the steam, a 
secondary index-hand to designate the point 
at which the alarm shall be sounded, means 
for connecting the primary index-hand with 
the steam-gage tube, and means operated from 
said expansible tube for releasing the strik 
ing mechanism of the alarm, whereby the ex 
pansion and contraction of said tube will con 
trol the sounding of the alarm, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
A. PORTELLO. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES I. NORRIS, 
JAMES A. RUTHERFORD. 
65. 
75. 
90 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
IO 
25 
SO 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291869.txt	(No Model.) 
E. E. BOSTWICK. 
HARROW. 
No. 291,869, 
Patented Jan, 15, 1884, 
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
 
5 
 
 
 
a 
N S 2 
as 3 \ N S. SV) 
N 
R) 
N 
a 
S 
a 
IWWEWTOR 
22-veerez Z2, Zesz--ac/6. 
^*6%e2%/6-4. 
--all 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EDWARD E. BOSTWICK, OF UNION CITY, MICHIGAN. 
HARROW. 
SPs 
CIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 291,889, dated January 15, i884, 
Application filed October 25, 1SS3. (No mode.) 
5 
25 
Io all luh OI72, it 12-?tly conce71, 
Be it known that I, EDWARDE. BOSTWICK, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Union 
City, in the county of Branch and State of Michi 
gan, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Harrows; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being had 
to the annexed drawings, making a part of this 
Io specification, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked therein. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
view of a portion of a harrow-frame, show 
ing my invention applied thereto; Fig. 2, a 
longitudinal section of Iny improved flexible 
shaft with the harrow-teeth attached; Fig. 3, 
a detail view, in perspective, of a portion of 
the flexible shaft; and Fig. 4, a similar view of 
one of the clamping-blockS. 
The present invention has relation to cer 
tain new and useful improvements in rotary 
harrows; and the object thereof is to provide 
a flexible shaft and means for attaching the 
harrow-teeth thereto, Said shaft being rotated 
in the ordinary manner by gear or belt power, 
thereby rendering the harrow more elective 
in pulverizing the soil. The shaft, being colm 
posed of links and joints, will more readily ad 
mit of the teeth conforming to the uneven sur 
3O faces of the ground, tilus materially increasing 
the successful action of the teeth upon the soil. 
These several objects I attain by the construc 
tion substantially as shown in the drawings, 
and hereinafter (lescribed and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents a portion of the frame of a harrow, pro 
vided with the usual drive-wheels, B, having 
connected to it a suitable sprocket-wheel, ct, 
over which passes a Sprocket-chain, b, extend. 
4o ing from a smaller sprocket-wheel, c, rigidly 
connected to one end of a flexible shaft, hay 
ing its bearings in the sides of the frame. This 
flexible shaft consists of a Series of links, 
d, and clamping-blocks e, into which blocks 
are inserted the screw-threaded shanks of 
teeth C, said teeth being arranged at right an 
gles to each other throughout the length of 
said shaft. These teeth may be of any desira 
ble form-either round, square, or diamond 
So shaped-in cross-section, and may be curved or 
straight, as found preferable, and the flexible 
45 
35 
55 
75 
shaft may be driven by any suitable power, 
either by gearing or belts and pulleys, as I do 
not confine myself to the means shown, and 
therefore reserve the right to substitute any 
of the Ordinary or Well-known mechanism or 
means usually employed for such purpose. 
The clamping-blocks e of the flexible shaft 
have each two grooves, f, formed upon their 
inner sides, to provide seats for the outer sides 
of the links cl, and the blocks have also notches 
(7 on theil' edges, for the ends of the links to 
a but against, as show a more clearly in Fig. 3. 
When the link d is placed upon the block e, 
so that it will rest in the grooves.f, and in like 
manner the upper one ol' opposite block se 
cured in place upon the side of the link, and 
the screw-threaded shank of the tooth Cpassed 
through the holeh in the lower clamping-block, 
and inade to engage with the opening or hole 
h in the upper block, which is screw-threaded, 
by continuing to screw up the shank of the 
tooth, the uppyr one of the blocks will be 
drawn firmly down against the link, and thus 
securely clamp it between the blocks, and by 
a series of these links and blocks a continu 
ous flexible shaft is obtained, the links through 
out the length of the shaft being coupled with 
each other. 
The special feature of lay invention is a 
flexible transverse shaft carrying harrow 
teeth, and capable of being rotated by means 
of suitable drive belts and pulleys or other 
gealing. 
The end links of the shaft may be connected 
to a convenient device for tightening the shaft 
When it sags or it is necessary to regulate the 
tension, as found desirable, and I provide the 
shaft with wheels D, of any suitable form and 
size. These wheels I arrange at intervals 
along the shaft, and connect them. So that they 
will freely rotate independent of the rotary 
motion of the shaft, the object thereof being 
to gage the depth of the teeth, and to keep 
the flexible shaft from dragging on the ground, 
as well as lifting it over obstacles. 
I am aware that harrow-teeth have been con 
1nected to a flexible belt, and a Series of such 
belts arranged upon druins suitably located in 
a frame, the belts revolving as said frame is 
propelled along the ground; but ilay no claim 
to Such construction. 
95 
ICO 
291, S69 
Having now fully described my invention, 
4. The combination, with a flexible harrow 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by shaft composed of a series of links connected 
together, of notched and grooved clamping 
Letters Patent, is- 
1. A flexible shaft for harrows, consisting of blocks provided with means for attaching 
5 a series of links connected together and hav- thereto the harrow-teeth, substantially as and 25 
ing harrow-teeth attached, in combination for the purpose specified. 
with means for imparting to said shaft a ro- 
5. A revolving flexible shaft for harrows, 
tary motion, substantially as and for the pur- consisting of suitable clamping-blocks, to 
pose set forth. 
which the harrow-teeth are connected, a se 
a Series of links connected together, and pro- ranged between the links at intervals along 
vided with blocks, nuts, or other like devices, the shaft, substantially as and for the purpose 
and harrow-teeth detachably connected there- set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
to, substantially as and for the purpose speci- 
2. A revolving flexible shaft consisting of ries of links, and a series of gage-wheels ar- 3O 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 35 
IO 
I5 fied. 
EDWARD E. BOSTWICK. 
3. A revolving flexible shaft for harrows, of two witnesses. 
consisting of a series of links connected to- 
gether, and held between suitable clamping- 
blocks, to which the harrow-teeth are secured, 
2O substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. E. SMITH, 
CHARLES JOHNSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US291969.txt	(N0 Model.) 
m 
B. S. WHITE HEAD. 
d 
INKING ATTACHMENT FOR PRINTING PRESSEs, 
  
 
Patented Jan. 1523. 
COOOOO Z. 
--. 
)--(-)-4-(-> 
93. 
(xx) 
--- Y 
a 
f 
S. 
W 
. 
No. 291,969, 
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
f 
w 
Ya -?S s 
w 
? 
-- 
ww 
aw 
w 
\ N-1 Ya- ^ & 
d 
N 
724 
O 
C. G. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJ AMIN. S. WHITE HEAD, OF NEW ARK, NEW J ERSEY. 
NK NG ATTACHMENT FOR PRINTNG PRESSES 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 291,969, dated January 15, 1884. 
Application filed June 30, 1882. 
No model.) 
O 
30 
fo (alt, tulioT), it in(I) concefit: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN S. WHITE 
HEAD, of Newark, in the county of Essex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvementin Inking Attachments for 
Printing-Presses, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
This invention relates to inking attachments 
for printing-presses, whereby several colors 
may be printed at a single impression of the 
type, the object of the invention being to more 
perfectly spread the ink, to simplify and re 
duce the cost of construction, and to other 
Wise more perfectly adapt the attachment for 
the purposes for which it is intended. 
-Referring to the accompanying drawings, in 
which similar letters of 'eference indicate like 
parts in each of the figures, Figure 1 is a plan 
view of my improved attachment. Fig. 2 is a 
side view of the same. Fig. 3 is an inverted 
plan, partly in Section. FigS. 4, 5, and 6 are 
detail views of certain parts of the device, and 
Fig. 7 is a side view of one of the intermedi 
ate disks. 
In carrying out the invention I arrange be 
tween two plates, A, B, held apart by shoul 
dered posts C, whereby a frame-work is formed, 
a series or collection of cog-wheels in parallel 
rows, running at right angles to the axis of the 
inking-rolls P, the cogs of one row engaging 
with those in the laterally-adjacent row or 
rows and with each other, as shown, so that 
power transmitted to one cog will actuate all 
simultaneously, and a positive motion be main 
tained throughout the inking-surfaces of the 
attachment. Said cogs operate intermittently, 
actuated by a ratchet-wheel, E, and pawl F, 
said ratchet being hung on the lower end of 
the shaft G of One of the cogs, and supported 
by the strap H, Fig. 3, secured to the plate B. 
The frame AB is secured to an ordinary print 
ing-press by means of a bar, I. The pawl is 
operated by a projection on the back of the 
press striking the arm or lever K at the end 
I, which lifts the said end and draws the pawl 
forward, causing the ratchet, and with it the 
collection of cogs, to revolve a fraction of a 
revolution. When the projection has passed 
the end of the arm, the said arm drops by its 
own weight, and causes the pawl to engage 
with another tooth of the ratchet for a repeti 
tion of the movement. The pawl may be Op 
erated by some other device to accomplish the 
same result. Into each of the cogs is inserted 
the shank M of an inking-disk, N, the feather 
O causing the disk to revolve with the cog in 
termittently a fraction of a revolution at each 
movement, the combinations of surfaces being 
practically never the same, as the adjacent 
cogs and the accompanying inking-disks move 
in opposite directions, as indicated. The ink 
is thus perfectly spread upon the rolls P, and 
by them the type is furnished therewith. 
It will be apparent from the above descrip 
tion and the drawings that the parallel rows 
of inking-disks are arranged in bearings or 
seats that are fixed and permanent in their re 
lations each to the other, so that when the at 
tachment is once properly arranged on the 
press (thelines of separation between the rows 
of disks being straight lines at right angles to 
the axes of the inking-rolls, a position neces 
sary to give a perfect outline between the col 
ors) no subsequent care need be exercised in 
placing the disks individually to obtain the 
The revolving inking-disks are 
best results. 
arranged with their smoothinking-surfaces, 
which engage with the rolls P, above the plate 
A, so that said revolving inking-disks alone 
engage with said rolls, to spread the ink when 
a sharp outline between the colors is desired. 
The peculiar arrangement of the revolving 
disks in parallel rows, with engaging periph 
eries above any surrounding and stationary 
surfaces, secures not only a perfectly-solid 
body of color, but also, by this arrangement, 
the area of inking-surface engaging with the 
rolls increases toward the center of the IOW. Of 
inking disks or plates, (or the line of disk 
axes.) The ink is thus prevented from gath 
ering in too profuse quantities on the rolls P, 
near or at the line which separates the two 
colors, and thus the said two colors are effect 
ually prevented from mixing, although no 
intervening uncolored or uninked portion is 
allowed to remain on the roll caused by a sepa 
ration of the inking disks or plates. When 
found desirable, the disks Q are employed, 
which are removably secured in the spaces be 
tween the rotating disks N, for the purpose of 
more closely joining the ink at the lines of con 
tact. These disks are of similar construction 
s 5 
65 
S 5 
90 
95 
IOC 
2 
29,969 
to the larger disks N, and their shanks are de- of revolving inking-disks arranged in parallel 
signed to be inserted in perforations in the 
rows above the frame-work in or on which 
they revolve, the peripheries of the disks of 
top plate of the frame in a removable positiola. 
adjacent rows engaging with one another, all 
The rolls P coagt with the revolving smooth 
substantially as and for the purposes herein 
faced inking plates or disks, to spread the ink. 
From the rolls the ink is delivered to the type 
Set forth and shown. 
2. The disks N, having the shoulders N', the 
in the usual manner. The arrangement of the 
disks or plates upon the frame-work and their 
shanks M, and feathers O, in combination with 
cogs D and a frame-work, substantially as and 
relations to the cogs are such as that they may 
be individually removed from their several 
for the purpose set forth and shown. 
3. The inking attachment consisting of a 
seats without disturbing adjacent disks Ol' 
other parts of the device, there being no parts 
collection of disks arranged in parallel rows 
on the disk or its connections projecting into 
to form the entire table-surface, each disk hav 
ing a shoulder resting on its driving-cog, in 
undercut parts of the frame. Thus, should any 
combination with said cogs, adapted, substan 
one of said disks be accidentally marred or 
tially as described, to be intermittingly oper 
discolored, the same can be readily raised from 
its seat, be cleaned, and replaced in its bear 
ing or seat in the frame, a shoulder, N, raising 
4. In combination with the frame-work A. 
Bof an inking attachment for a printing-press, 
the inking-surface above the plate provided 
the collection of inking - disks arranged in 
with said bearing, and a shank, MI, entering 
the cog D, and being prevented from turning 
parallel rows, the line of contact of the pe 
ripheries thereof being straight lines, said 
therein by any suitable device or arrange 
disks being arranged and adapted to be with 
ment, such as the feather. 
drawn individually without disturbing the 
I am aware that, broadly, inking-disks ar 
adjacent mechanism, substantially as herein 
ranged in rows are not new, and also that 
brushes have been used in block-prilnting, ar 
Set forth. 
5. The collection of disks arranged in paral 
ranged in a collection and actuated simulta 
lel rows, and removably mounted on rotating 
aneously by means of a corresponding Series of 
cogs, in combination with the stationary disks 
cogs and a hand-crank, and therefore such fea 
removably fixed between the rotating disks, 
tures I do not wish to be understood as claim 
ing, broadly. 
as and for the purpose Specified. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
BENJAMIN. S. WHITE HEAD, 
claim is 
1. An inking attachment for a printing 
press, consisting, substantially, of a collection 
HORACE FIARRIS, 
IP. G. BECKLEY. 
Witnesses: 
ated. 
- 
45 
65 
) 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292069.txt	(No Model.) 
C, F, TELLER 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
COMBINED LETTER BOX AND MAIL BAG, 
No. 292,069, 
Patented Jan, 15, 1884. 
7%. 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
42% -% 
4 yie 
-64 a? 
rt lie, 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
C, F, TELLER 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
COMBINED LETTER BOXAND MAIL BAG, 
No. 292,069, 
Patented Jan, 15, 1884, 
 
WITNESSES: 
22%2% 
4 ye.ce 
INVENTOR: 
of c 
BY luse, 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL FRIEDRICH TELLER, OF OFFENBACH-ON-THE-MAIN, GERMANY., 
ASSIGNOR TO CARL OTTO WEBER AND THEODOR MAYNZ, BOTH OF 
SAMIE PLACE. 
COMBINED LETTER-BOX AND MAIL-BAG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,C69, dated January 15, 1834. 
Application filed November 13, 1883. (No model.) 
- 
So all tuft. O77, it inctly concern 
which latch is acted on by a spring, F. The 
Be it known that I, CARL FRIEDRICH TEL 
bottom edge of the rear Wall, G, of the box is 
LER, a subject of the Emperor of Germany, 
provided with a notch, g, on the edge of which 
and a resident at Offenbach-on-the-main, Ger 
the latch F can Catch. The free end of the 
latch Fis held in a casing, H, made integral 
many, have invented new and useful Improve 
With a casing, H, in which a pin, J, is held 
ments in Letter Boxes and Bags for Emptying 
the Same, of which the following is a specifi 
parallel with the rear edge of the bottom, 
which pin J is made integral with or secured 
cation. 
My invention relates to an improved letter 
to the latch F. A loop, K, is secured to the 
box and bag; and it consists in the peculiar 
rear edge of the bottom B, parallel with the 
arrangement and construction of the parts, as 
She 
hereinafter more fully set forth, and pointed 
In the inner surface of that part L of each 
Side of the box projecting below the bottom 
Out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
a groove, M, is formed, which is open at the 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
front end, and is bent upward and forms a 
downwardly-projecting pocket or recess, M", 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
slightly contracted at its top. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
To the top of the mail-bag N two frames, O 
proved letter-box and the emptying-bag held 
and P, are secured, which fit on each other. 
The frame P is provided with two notches, P', 
to the same, the bag and box being closed. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view, the box and bag be 
and at each end with a flat pin, Q, adapted to 
ing opened. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the slid 
pass into the grooves M. The frame O is pro 
ing bottom. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the un 
vided with a key-hole, m, and with a longi 
der side of the same. Fig. 5 is a perspective 
tudinally - sliding bolt, R, from which two 
view of the bag-frame. Fig. 6 is a rear per 
hooks, S, project upward. The front of the 
letter-box is provided with a small door, T, 
spective view of the under side of the letter 
below the sliding bottom. 
box. Fig. 7 is a sectional plan view of the 
latch of the sliding bottom. Fig. 8 is a lon 
The operation is as follows: If the box A is 
gitudinal elevation of one of the bag-frames. 
to be emptied, the bag N, which is locked is 
Fig. 9 is a longitudinal elevation of the other 
passed under the bottom B in such a manner 
bag-frame. Fig. 10 is a perspective view of 
that the pins Q on the bag-frame Ppass through 
the end of the frame shown in Fig. 9. Fig.11 
the grooves Minto the pockets M'. The door 
T is then opened and the rod D is pushed in 
is a longitudinal view of the inner end of the 
Ward until the key D' passes into the key-hole 
bottom part of one of the sides of the box. 
The mail-box A is provided with a sliding 
m, and then the rod D is turned, whereby the 
bottom, B, adapted to be drawn through a 
bolt R is moved in the direction of the arrow 
a'. One hook, S, passes into the loop K, and 
longitudinal slot in the front of the box, which 
the other passes into the casing H and strikes 
bottom is provided with transverse ribs B on 
the end of the pin J, and disengages the latch 
its upper surface. 
F from the edge of the notch g. If the slid 
From the under side of the bottom B two 
ears or jaws, C, project, in which a rod, D, is 
ing bottom is then drawn outward, the frame 
held to slide transversely to the front of the 
O is moved outward with it, and the bag is 
opened, as the frame P is held by the pins Q 
box and to turn, which rod has a knob, D', 
formed on the front end, and a key, D, on 
in the pockets M, the letters dropping into the 
bag. By drawing the frames O Papart the 
the rear end. A spiral spring, E, surround 
ing and Secured to the rod D, presses the same 
pins Q of the frames are brought into the po 
sition shown in Fig. 11 in the pockets, thus 
toward the front of the box. 
preventing the said pins from being removed 
On the under surface of the bottom Bahook, 
bolt, or latch, F, is pivoted at the inner edge, from the pockets as long as the bag is open. 
IO 
2 5 
45 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
92,069) 
When the box A is emptied, the botton B is 
pushed back into the box, the bag is closed, 
the rod D is turned, and thereby the key D' 
locks the bag and withdraws the hooks SS. 
The latch F is released and catches on the 
edge of the notch g. The bag which is locked 
is then removed, and the door T is closed and 
locked. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Lettel's 
Patent, is 
1. A letter-box provided with a sliding bot 
tom and with a door, T, in the front and be 
low the sliding bottom, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
2. A letter-box provided with a sliding bot 
tom, on the under side of which a key-rod is 
held, substantially as herein shown and de 
Scribed. 
3. In a letter-box, the combination, with 
the sliding bottom B, of the ears or jaws C, on 
the under side of the same, the rod D, held in 
the said jaws, the knob D on the front end of 
the rod, the key D' on its rear end, and of the 
spring E, for pressing the rod in the direction 
IO 
25 
4. 
toward the front, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
4. In a letter-box, the combination, with 
the sliding bottom B, of the latch F, the pin 
J, connected with the same, the loop K, and 
the casing H', substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
5. A bag having a frame, O, provided with 
a sliding bolt, R, having upwardly-projecting 
hooks S, substantially as herein shown and 
described. 
6. The combination, with a letter-box pro 
vided with a sliding bottom and grooves M, 
terminating in pockets M', of a bag provided 
with a frame, P, with pins Q on its ends, and 
a frame, O, provided with a sliding bolt, R, 
having upwardly - projecting hooks S, Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub- 45 
scribing witnesses. 
CARL FRIEDRICH TELLEIR. 
Witnesses: 
, 
FRAN Z HASSLACIIIER, 
JOSEPH PATRICK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292169.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. MAC GREGOR. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 292,169, 
 
 
PRESSURE GACE. 
Patented Jan. 22, 1884, 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
2 is 77 
 
 
WITNESSES 
shua ( 6. '. 
INVENTOR 
fig-4- %22:27 
1 
2.c &/- 
fy 
pereas. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
W. H. MAC GREGOR, 
PRESSURE GAGE, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 292,169, 
Patented Jan. 22, 1884. 
2 r 
2 
2. Zez-7 
NS2N 
witnesses 
%tta-0 (, i. 
 
 
N. perets. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model) 
. 
. 
No. 292, l69, 
W. H. MACGREGOR. 
PRESSURE GAGE, 
4 sheets-sheet 3. 
Patented Jan, 22, 1884. 
MTN Esses 
9|allad & sig. 
INVENTOR 
fig-7 2. 2.r 
 
-N 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
W. H. MACGREGOR. 
PRESSURE GAGE, 
Patented Jan. 22, 1884. 
> a 
INVENTOr 
12. 2fer 
. (No Model.) 
No. 292, 169. 
WTNESSE5 
Shitted 69. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAMH. MACGREGOR, OF EAST BRAINTREE, ASSIGNOR TO THE ASHCROFT 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
PRESSURE-GAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,169, dated January 22, 1884. 
Application filed December 18, 1882, 
(No model.) 
15 
O 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. MACGREG. 
OR, of East Braintree, in the county of Nor 
folk and State of Massachusetts, a citizen of 
the United States, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Pressure - Gages, of 
Which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this speci 
fication in explaining its nature, in which 
Figure I is a front elevation of a steam-gage 
manufactured by the Ashcroft Manufacturing 
Company. With my improved attachment, the 
dial and indicator being removed. Fig. 2 is 
an enlarged view, representing in front eleva 
tion a portion of the same gage, the link con 
necting the Bourdon spring, with the move 
inent being broken off, to show the application 
of my invention to this form of gage. Fig. 3 
is a vertical section of the casing, representing 
in plan a portion of the gage shown in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 shows, in vertical section, a take up for 
means for Varying the tension of the spring, 
hereinafter described. Fig. 5 is an elevation 
of a gage With the dial removed, representing 
another method of employing my invention. 
Fig. 6 is a section upon the line of y of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 is an elevation representing the use 
of a coiled spring. Fig. S shows the employ 
ment of a Volute spring. Fig. 9 is a gage hav 
ing two Bourdon springs containing my im 
provement. Fig. 10 shows another mode o 
attaching the regulating-spring. 
- 
This invention relates to that class of press 
utre-gages which employ a pressure-spring; 
and it consists in the application of an inde 
pendent co-operating spring at or near the free 
end of the Bourdon spring. 
Insteam-pressure gages employing the Bour 
don-tube spring the pressure of fluid within 
the bent flattened tube has a tendency to con 
vert the tube from its oval to a more cylindri. 
cal form, and in so doing to straighten out the 
Curves of the Spring. The twisted spring de 
scribed in the English patent to Cowper is now 
Seldom, if ever, used, the ordinary spring be 
ing the flattened spring bent into a circular or 
segmental form; and it is therefore with refer 
ence to gages employing this Bourdon spring 
5O that my invention will be described. Under 
heavy pressures, and particularly when the 
45 
25 
3 5 
spring is hot, it is apt to take a permanent Set, 
the temper of the spring being drawn at such 
high heats. This set of the spring is not un 
common on portable engines where the steam- 55 
gage is applied directly to the outside of the 
boiler, instead of to a wall or post at some dis 
tance from the boiler, with a column of con 
densed water interposed between the boiler 
and the gage; for when placed directly on 
the outside of the boiler the temperature of the 
gage is much higher than atmospheric temper- . 
ature, and the temperature within the sealed 
case of the gage is higher even than upon the 
exterior, from which heat is comparatively 65 
rapidly radiated into the atmosphere. This 
tendency to set may be in partorin whole coun 
teracted by employing an independent spring 
within the caseofthegage, preferably of a differ 
ent metal from that of which the tubeis formed, 7 
which shall actin aid of the tube and restore it 
to its normal position at the close of work, thus 
reseating the hollow spring at its initial-point 
before it begins to slowly cool. The position 
to be adopted for this spring is one involving 
As the free end of a Bour 
considerable care. 
don spring moves in an evolute of a peculiar 
character, and differing in some degree for al 
most every length and strength and curvature, 
and as the independent co-operating Spring 
ought to be of such a character as to pull in 
every position of the end of the hollow spring, 
in describing its evolute, at a tangent to the 
direction of the evolute, this would seem to be 
a work of considerable difficulty. As, how 
ever, the motion of the free end of the hollow 
spring is in any instance exceedingly Small 
never for the highest pressures in practice ex 
ceeding half an inch, and generally very much 
less-it has been found in practice that the evo 
lute described by the free end of the spring 
in actual work does not differ much from an 
arc of a circle the radius of which does not 
exceed the diameter of the circle on which the 
curved hollow spring is struck, and for prac: 
tical purposes may be assumed as an arc of a 
circle whose radius is as small as half the ra 
dius of the circle on which the springis struck. 
If, therefore, the evolute described by the free 
end of the spring for a given pressure be de- IOO 
termined, and the center of a circle of conven 
ient radius substantially coincident at its ends 
95 
85 
9O 
75 
 
292, 69 
with said evolute be formed, a radius-bar may 
be pivoted on this center, and also to the free 
end of the spring, without interfering with the 
freedom of motion of the free end of the spring, 
5 except by the mere impediment of its weight; 
and if a volute, helical, or other torsional 
spring be placed on the central arbor of the 
radius-bar to counteract the unfolding motion 
of the free end of the hollow spring, a very 
to accurate counterpoise can be effected. I have 
also discovered that if, in lieu of this radius 
bar with a helical spring on the pivot, or the 
same bar with a spring attached to the case, and 
acting either by compression or extension to re 
I5 seat the hollow spring, I employ a leaf-spring 
centered at this center of motion, and fastened 
to the radial bar or to the end of the Bourdon 
spring, the result does not substantially differ. 
I have also found that if a spiral spring be ex 
2O tended from the end of the hollow spring to 
some point in the case in a line substantially 
tangential to the curve of the spring at itster 
minus, the resultis substantially the same if the 
spiralspring be of sufficiently large diameter 
25 say a quarter or three-eighths of an inch-and 
the points of attachment be not made too fine, 
because the tangent of the evolute between the 
shortest and the longest point on practical 
work will lie wholly within the helix; and be 
3o cause, also, by the use of loosely fitting inter 
locked hook attachments to the case and to the 
end of the hollow spring a compensation in the 
direction of the pull of the spring is made. 
This, therefore, appears to be the best method 
35 of applying the compensating-spring, which I 
prefer, as the simplest and cheapest. There 
should be at Some point in the length of this 
compensating-spring a means of adjustment, 
so that in case of emergency its tension may be 
4o increased or diminished. Such a means of ad 
justment would be represented by an ordinary 
take-up link; but perhaps a still better method, 
because cheaper, would be to make the hook, 
which is attached to the case, to pass entirely 
45 through the case and have a take-up nut upon 
the outside, so that the spring could be reset 
at its initial point, if desired, and the gage re 
seated without opening the case. 
It is well known that the tempers of steel and 
5O brass vary differently according to tempera 
tures, and by proper selection of material, or 
the temper of this compensating or co-operat 
ing or Supplemental Spring the proper compen 
sation can be made. It is also true that corro 
55 sion changes the tension and character of the 
hollow Spring, and this corrosion cannot well 
be prevented, particularly upon the interior of 
the hollow spring, by any method known to 
the arts. But it is easy to protect the exte 
.6O rior of this supplemental spring from corro 
sion either by lacquering or plating; and by 
means of the take-up its power can be brought 
into play to supplement the action of the hol 
low spring, and so compensate for any loss in 
65 tension from change either in the temper or 
structure of the hollow spring. 
I am aware that small volute springs of low 
 
85 
tension have been used on the pinion-arbor of 
a gage-movement for many years; but these 
are only employed to keep the pinion-teethin 
contact with the segment gear or rack and 
eliminate backlash. This invention places a 
strong spring in direct connection between 
the free end of the Bourdon tube and the 
fixed case of the gage, whereby the deteriora 
tion in strength of the Bourdon spring may be 
compensated from time to time, and a conn 
paratively weak Bourdon spring made at first 
to show the indications of a stronger one. 
This auxiliary spring would never, in any 
case, be in the movement unless applied on 
the arbor or arm of the segment-gear to resist 
its forward revolution, or on the connecting 
rod from the Bourdon tube to the segment 
gear for the same purpose. 
It is obvious that instead of connecting this 
auxiliary spring from Bourbon tube to case of 
gage it will serve its co-operative purpose 
equally well if connected from one tube to 
another oppositely-curved tube in a gage of 90 
the same type, and be within the specified in 
vention. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
single Bourdon tube; B, the gage-casing; C, the 
link connecting the free end of the Bourdon 
tube with the gage-action; D, the auxiliary or 
supplemental spring, which in this instance is 
attached to the free end of the Bourdon tube 
and to the casing of the gage. E represents a 
hook, to which the spring D may be fastened, 
and which is capable of being moved or ad 
justed in relation to the casing of the gage by 
means of the screw-sleeve F, the sleeve being 
secured to the casing so that it can be revolved, 
and having a screw-thread which engages with 
a screw-thread upon the shank of the hook. If 
desired, the sleeve can extend through the cas 
ing of the gage, so that an adjustment of the 
spring D may be made from the outside. 
In Fig. 5 I show my regulating or adjusting 
spring attached to the casing of the gage and 
to the end of the lever G. This lever is piv 
oted at g to a fulcrum, which maybe movable, 
if desired, and it is connected with the free 
end of the Bourdon spring by means of the link 
g. In Fig. 6, Ishow insection a fulcrum-post, 
g, movable in ways g, and the fulcrum is mov 
able in the slot of in the lever. The fulcrum 
post is locked in any desired position by means 
of a nut. By changing the fulcrum of course 
the amount of stress or resistance upon the end 
of the Bourdon spring is varied. In Fig. 7 I 
represent a spiral spring, H, which is attached 
at its lower end to a post, h, fastened to the 
casing of the gage. Its free end is secured to 
the free end of the Bourdon spring. In Fig. 
S, I represent a volute spring, M, the free end 
of which is fastened to the free end of the Bour 
don spring. In Fig. 9 Ishow a gage having 
two Bourdon springs, which are connected to 
gether by means of my regulating or auxiliary 
spring, as represented. In Fig.10, Ishow the 
auxiliary or regulating spring as operating 
upon a Bourdon spring through the Segment 
IOO 
IIO 
292, 169 
5 
35 
. 
. 
" 
25 
3. 
Nandlink C, this spring being attached at one not embody my invention, which is defined in 
end to the casing of the gage or other proper the following claims. 
place of fastening, and at the other to the seg- 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
ment. These modifications in Figs. 5, 7,8,9, claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent of 
and 10 only represent a few of the many ways the United States 
for applying my invention to get the results 
1. In a steam or pressure gage, the combi 
desired, and it is obvious that there are many nation of a Bourdon tube with a short-range 3o 
other modes of attaching a spring to the free preponderating direct-action spring attached 
end of the Bourdon spring to obtain the result to the free end of the said tube, and adapted 
IC desired, and that a great many other forms of to resist by its tension the movement of the free 
elrd thereof, and thereby weighing the press 
Springs can be used for the purpose. 
1872, to Ashcroft, No. 148,673, of 1874, to Cros-. 
2. In a steam or pressure-gage, the combi 
by, for registering-gages, and of the use of nation of a Bourdon tube, a short-range direct 
I5 Weak and long-range take-up springs on the acting spring attached to the free end of said 
registering-movement; but this is not my in-tube, of sufficient strength to counteract its 
Vention, which requires a constant tension of tendency to set under pressure, all substan- 4O 
AS range and comparatively strong spring tially as described. 
irectly applied without regard to a register- 
I am also aware of the Patent No. 42,873, of 
1864, to Ray, which has an adjustable take-up 
to the backlash-spring; but this, again, does 
I am aware of the Patents No. 126,247, of ure therein, all substantially as described. 
F. F. RAY MOND, 2d, 
WILLARD C. FOGG. 
WILLIAM. H. MACGREGOR. 
2O ing attachment. 
. 
Witnesses: 
s 
f 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292269.txt	UNITED STATES 
PATENT 
OFFICE. 
JOSEPH WARREN WATTLES, OF CANTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
COMPOST ON - FOR. SZING Y ARN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,269, dated January 22, 1884. 
Application filed June 20, 1883. No specimens.) 
IO 
20 
to all, whon, it nually concern : 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH WARREN WAT 
TLES, of Canton, in the county of Norfolk, of 
the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Com 
positions for Sizing Yarn; and I do hereby 
declare the same to be described as follows: 
My present invention relates, especially, to 
those described in the United States Patents 
Nos. 168,435 and 172,216, granted to me, one 
of such patents covering a liquid and the other 
a dry composition of starch and acetic acid. 
My present invention is a composition of 
starch, acetic acid, and a fat or oil, or matter 
of a greasy or oily nature. I prefer to use an 
animal oil or fat; but in some cases a mineral 
or vegetable oil may be used to advantage. 
The composition may be composed of two 
parts, by weight, of starch, one part, by Weight, 
of acetic acid, and one part, by weight, of the 
grease, lard or lard - oil. These are to be 
heated and thoroughly mixed or combined to 
gether, water being used in sufficient quantity 
when it may be desirable to render the com 
position sufficiently liquid for use; but the 
water may be used by the yarn-dresser before 
using the compositionin the dressing-machine. 
The addition of oil or grease to the acid and 
starch produces a composition which is par 
ticularly valuable for sizing woolen yarn, 3O 
though applicable to advantage to other kinds. " 
of yarn. 
The yarn dressed with the composition 
works better in the loom, will not readily mil 
dew, and is less liable to fermentation than is 35 
a dressing of acetic acid and starch alone. It 
can be used in a wet or damp state, and when . 
dry will not easily separate from the yarn. 
I do not intend to confine my yarn dressing 
or sizing composition to the precise propor 
tions of its ingredients as hereinbefore stated, 
for such may be somewhat varied withoutma 
terially affecting the character or utility of the 
composition. 
| sisting of starch and acetic acid, or such and 
water, having claimed such in liquid and dry 
states in the aforementioned patents. 
I do not herein claim a yarn-dressing con- 45 
I claim- 
A yarn sizing or dressing, Substantially as 5O 
- 
described, composed of acetic acid, starch, 
and grease or oil, mixed or combined essen 
tially as set forth. 
JOSEPH WARREN WATTLES. 
R. H. EDDY, 
E. B. PRATT. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292369.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 292,369, 
F. SCHLUCHTNER, 
SAW ENVELOPE, 
Patented Jan. 22, 1884. 
WITNESSES: 
C6, 13 
447te, 
- 
1,2'2" 
rolea-2 
by Music, so 
ATTORNEYs. 
NETERS, Phate-lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK SCHLCHTNER, 
OF EAST NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SAW-ENVELOPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,369, dated January 22, 1884. 
Anplication filed November 13, 1883. 
(No model. 
To all who in it nvoy concern : 
Beit known that I, FREDERICKSCHLCHT. 
NER, of East New York, Kings county, and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Saw - Envelopes, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improve 
ment, shown as applied to a saw, and part be. 
ing broken away. Fig.2 shows the envelope 
reversed. Fig. 3 shows a modified form of the 
same. Fig. 4 shows a modification of the fast 
ening-strap. 
The object of this invention is to prevent 
envelopes from dropping off saws when the 
said saws are handled. 
The invention consists in a Saw-envelope 
made with a fastening-strap provided at one 
or both ends with a cross-head to engage With 
slits in the said envelope and fasten the said 
envelope in place upon a saw. In the side of 
the envelope is formed an aperture to display 
the figure indicating the number of teeth to 
an inch in the saw, as will be hereinafter fully 
A represents a saw-envelope, which is made 
of such a shape and size as to fit loosely upon 
the saw-blade B. 
Upon one side of the open larger end of the 
envelope A is formed a strap, C, which is 
passed through the saw-handle D, and has a 
cross-head, E, formed upon its free end. The 
ends of the cross-head E are inserted in slits 
F, made in the side of the envelope A, as 
described. 
- 
. 
O 
35 
45 
O 
55 
shown in Fig. 1, so as to fasten the said en 
velope in place. 
The strap C may beformed in one piece with 
the envelope A, or it may be cemented at one 
end to one side of the open larger end of the 
envelope, as shown in Fig. 2, or it may be de 
tachably secured at both ends to the sides of 
the envelope A. by cross-heads E and slits F. 
In the envelope A is formed an aperture, G, 
in such a position that the figure indicating 
the number of the Saw-teeth to an inch can be 
seen through it, as shown in Fig. 1, so that it 
will not be necessary to remove the envelope 
to see what grade of teeth the saw may have. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. A saw - envelope made substantially as 
herein shown and described, with a fastening 
strap detachable at one or both ends, for secur 
ing the envelope in place upon the saw, and 
provided with an aperture to display the figure 
indicating the number of teeth to the inch in 
the saw, as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a saw-envelope, A, 
of the fastening-strap C, provided at one or 
both ends with a cross-head, E, to engage with 
slits F. in the said envelope, substantially as 
herein shown and described, whereby the said 
envelope will be held securely in place and 
can be readily detached, as set forth. 
3. A saw-envelope provided with an aper 
ture...G., for displaying the figure indicating 
the number of teeth to an inch in the saw, as 
Set forth, 
FRED. SCHILUCHTNER. 
Witnesses: 
FREDRICKLUBS, 
GEORGE SCHIELILEIN. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292469.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARD E. CASE, OF AUBURN, NEW YORK. 
SECONDARY...BATTERY ELEMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,469, dated January 9, 1884, 
Amplication filed February 10, 1883. (No specimens.) 
55 
75 
s 
to a 22 whom it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLARDE. CASE, of 
Auburn, Cayuga county, New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Sec 
ondary-Battery Elements, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The invention consists in the electrode for 
storage-batteries, and in the process of making 
the same, more particularly hereinafter set 
forth. 
The electrode consists of an amalgam of lead 
and mercury, or of an amalgam of mercury 
with an alloy compounded of lead and any 
other metal or metals, to which amalgam I add 
any substance capable of being acted upon in 
the said storage-battery to store electrical po 
tential, and also any substance which is elec 
trically inert in the said battery, and also has 
the property of occluding gases. The elec 
trode thus formed is molded into shape in any 
Suitable manner. 
The best process which I now know of mak 
ing said electrode is as follows: Ifirst melt the 
lead, to which, while in a molten state, I add 
sufficient mercury to make a pasty amalgam. 
While this mass is still hot Tadd any suitable 
substance capable of storing electrical poten 
tial in the storage-battery, such as oxides or 
salts of lead, or finely-pulverized lead. To the 
resulting compound I add any substance which 
is inert in the battery, and at the same time is 
capable of occluding gases-such as pulverized 
charcoal or carbon-taking care to mix the 
several materials thoroughly together. The 
amount of mercury added to the lead should 
only be such as will completely amalgamate 
the metal. With regard to the proportions of 
lead, active material, and inert material, these 
should be such that the electrode, when cold, 
will be a firm coherent mass without tendency 
to crumble or crack. So much of the lead 
oxide or other active material should be added 
as that the compound shall still retain its pasty 
state while hot; and I have obtained very good 
results by adding to the mass thus formed a 
quantity of carbon about equal in bulk (pull 
verized) to the lead oxide. I do not limit my 
self to these, nor to any exact proportions of 
the ingredients, as I find that considerable 
latitude is possible in making the mixture, 
and that the above instructions are sufficient 
m 
- 
forth. 
to secure good results. The electrode com 
pounded as above stated is formed into proper 
shape in a suitable mold. 
Instead of first melting lead only, I may be 
gin by preparing a lead alloy consisting of lead 
and any suitable non-oxidizable metal or met 
als-such as antimony-which tends or tend 
to lower. the fusing-point of a lead alloy con 
taining it or them. To this alloy I add mercu 
ry to form an amalgam, as before, and then an 
active and an inert substance, as already set 
I am aware that an electrode for a second 
ary or storage. battery, consisting of an amal 
gam of lead and mercury and any substance 
active in said battery added to said amalgam, 
(the said electrode.therefore consisting of two 
elements-namely, the lead amalgam and the 
active substance,) is not new, and an electrode 
thus compounded I do notherein claim. 
My electrode consists of at least three ele 
ments-namely, lead, an active substance, and 
an inert Substance, which is also capable of 
occluding gases-and may consist of four ele 
ments-namely, the three above stated and 
the non-Oxidizable metal or metals first com 
bined with the lead to make an alloy before 
amalgamating. The function of the inert sub 
stance is not that of a mere diluent to increase 
the bulk of the electrode; but it serves several 
particular purposes therein-namely, it acts 
as a means of absorbing the hydrogen from the 
negative plate and the oxygen which escapes 
from the positive plate, and thus in a great 
measure prevents polarization; or, in other 
words, I take advantage of the well-known 
property of carbon and certain other sub 
stances for occluding gases. The effect of the 
carbon in this combination is also to render 
the electrode more porous, so as to allow ac 
cess to the exciting-liquid to all parts of the 
electrode, and it furthermore acts as a con 
ductor of electricity and diminishes the inter 
nal resistance in the electrode. 
It will be apparent from the foregoing that 
an electrode containing the three elements 
aforesaid-namely, lead amalgam, active sub 
stance, and carbon-will be different in opera. 
tion and results from an electrode containing 
only the first two elements, in that the forma 
tion of gas-bubbles on the exterior of the elec 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
45 
 
2 
292,469 
lead and mercury, any substance capable of 
being acted upon in said battery to store elec 
trical potential, and carbon in pulverized or 
commiuted form, substantially as described. 
3. The process of making electrodes for a 
secondary or storage battery, consisting in, 
first, preparing an amalgam of lead and mer 
cury; second, then adding any substance ca 
pable of being acted upon in a secondary bat 
tery to store electrical potential; third, then 
adding any substance inertin said battery and 
capable of occluding gases; and, fourth, form 
ing the electrode in suitable shape, substan 
tially as described. 
WILLARD E. CASE. 
Witnesses: 
How ARD E. CASE, 
EWA. F. CASE. 
IO 
trode is prevented, which gas-bubbles, as is 
well known, largely increase the internal re 
sistance of the cell; and this gas, which un 
der the above conditions would not only be 
wasted, but also exercise an injurious ef. 
fect in the cell, becomes utilized in the inte 
rior of the electrode. In this way the electrode 
will give forth a stronger current for a longer 
time. 
I claim as my invention 
1. An element or electrode for a secondary 
or storage battery, composed of an amalgam 
of lead and mercury, any substance capable of 
being acted upon in said battery to store elec 
trical potential, and any substance inert in 
said battery and capable of occluding gases, 
substantially as described. 
2. An element or electrode for a secondary 
or storage battery, composed of an amalgam of 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292569.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW M. MURRAY, OF RICHMOND, INDIANA. 
ARTI FCAL SLATE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,569, dated January 29, 1884, 
Application filed October 20, 1883. (No specimers ) 
To all whon, it nudy concern: 
consistency of ordinary paint when intended 
Be it known that I, ANDREW M. MURRAY, to be applied with a brush. This compound 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Rich- may be used upon a smooth surface of wood or 
mond, in the county of Wayne and State of metal, or on ordinary walls, or on paper. For 3o 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use- other color than black, the desired color may 
fullmprovements in Artificial Slates, of which be produced by using such coloring-matter as 
the following is a specification. 
may be required to produce the color wanted. 
My invention relates to an artificial-slate This mixture will dry readily after being ap 
material which may be used in the ordinary plied, and, if found necessary, the surface may 35 
manner for blackboard and school-slate pur- be smoothed by rubbing with fine emery-pa 
poses. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
matter, more fully described herein, and which, tion, what I claim as new, and desire to secure 
when prepared, allows the marks made by by Letters Patent, is- 
steatite, chalk, or slate-pencil to be readily 
A composition composed of two (2) parts of 
and perfectly removed by the use of an ordi- lamp-black or drop-black, one (1) part of rot 
nary cloth or sponge eraser, either dry or ten-stone, one (1) part flour of emery, one (1) 
damp. 
part mineral - brown, one part ultramarine 
My invention consists in a composition of 
per, or in other suitable manner. 
My slate composition is made and prepared blue, mixed with oil-shellac to consistency of 45 
u 
4O 
- 
in the following manner: For a black slate, I stiff paste. 
use two (2) parts of lamp-black or drop-black; 
one (1) part rotten-stone; one (1) part flour presence of two witnesses. 
of emery; one (1) part mineral-brown; one 
(1) part ultramarine - blue. Mix these ele- 
ments with oil-shellac to the consistency of a 
stiff paste when used with a trowel, and to the 
JoHN T. DEAL, 
W. T. DENNIS. 
Witnesses: 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
- 
ANDREW M. MURRAY. 
w 
- 
O 
15 
25 
R. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292669.txt	s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
W ILLIAM FITZ CHARLES MASON McCARTY, OF AIX-LA-CHAPELLE, GERMANY. 
PROCESS OF SOLDIFYING LIQUID OR SEM -LIQUID FATTY ACIDS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,669, dated January 29, 1884. 
Application filed August 7, 1883. (No specimens.) 
m 
w 
. 
. 
acids. 
To all tuflot, it naty coicei'i, 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMFITZ, CHARLES 
MASONMCCARTY, a citizen of the United States, 
and a resident of the city of Aix-la-Chapelle, 
5 in the German Empire, have invented certain 
new and useful improvements in processes for 
solidifying liquid or semi-liquid fatty acids, 
mineral, vegetable, and animal oils, and the 
transformation of the said oils into fatty acids, 
Io fully set forth and described in the following 
Specification. . 
This invention relates to improvements in 
processes for solidifying liquid or semi-liquid 
fatty acids, mineral, vegetable, and animal 
I5 oils, and also to the transformation of the said 
mineral, vegetable, or animal oils into fatty 
In searching for means for utilizing the oleine 
obtained according to the process described in 
2O the Letters Patent granted to me under No. 
282,547, and dated August 7, 1883, and No. 
283,003, dated August 14, 1883, I have studied 
the various processes employed heretofore for 
solidifying liquid fatty substances, as well as 
25 for transforming the same into Solid fatty acids; 
but none of the processes known to me up t 
this day, show any practical results. . 
. The numerous experiments which I have 
. 
made, and specially those made for the pur 
3o pose of enabling me to utilize the oleine ob 
tained by my aforementioned process, have 
enabled me to perfect the processes known and 
to correct the errors in defective processes. 
Through a series of operations constituting 
35 a process composed of known and unknown 
means of treating such said substances as above 
mentioned, and which form the basis of the 
present process, I have succeeded in obtaining 
the following results: (A) the solidification 
4o and transformation not only of the oleine above 
named, but of all fatty acids with low melting 
points, into solid fatty acids with very high 
melting-points; (B,) the solidification and 
transformation of mineral, vegetable, and ani 
In order to carry my said process into effect, 
Iemploy the following preliminary treatment: 
When fatty substances are used, I commence 
by freeing the said fatty bodies (oleine or fatty 
So acids) of the acids which they may have taken 
up during the manufacture. It must be re 
45 mall oils into solid fatty acids. 
 
marked that this first treatment is not neces 
sary when fatty bodies are employed, which 
are obtained by processes when no acids are 
made use of, and specially such as are obtained 
by my patented process as mentioned above. 
When mineral, vegetable, or animal oils are 
employed, I first saponify the same or give 
them a gelatinous consistence by employing 
processes already known. Having thus puri 
fied the fatty substances, or partially solidified 
the oil employed, Isubject the same to the fol 
lowing treatment: 
I. First transformation.--The material to be 
treated is introduced into a vessel lined with 
lead, provided with a serpentine tube or coil 
for free steam and a central tube ending in a 
system of injector-nozzles for producing a 
strong agitation by employing a suitable 
blower. The temperature of the material is 
raised to about 100 centigrade, after which 
the product is agitated or thoroughly stirred 
by means of the air introduced through the 
injector-nozzles, and eight to ten per cent. of 
the weight of the material in ordinary nitric 75 
acid, or about five per cent, concentrated nitric 
acid, added in small quantities. The agitation 
of the mass and the temperature of 100 is 
kept up for about an hour, after which the 
agitationis continued, and about one per cent. 
of the weight of the mass starch or other pro 
duct of like nature added little by little, in 
order to carbonize the material-such as, for 
instance, tragacanth gum. The agitation is 
continued for two hours, during which the 
temperature is raised to about 120 centigrade, 
and is then reduced to about 70 centigrade. 
In this manner the first transformation of the 
material is produced. 
II. First washing.-After this operation, the 
materialis washed until all trace of acid has 
been eliminated. 
III. Second transformation.-After, the ma 
terial has been rendered neutral, the same is 
introduced into an apparatus provided with 
an agitating apparatus, With a like quantity, 
in weight, of water strongly saturated with 
lime, caustic potassium, ammoniac, or other 
like matter. The temperature is now raised 
to 300 centigrade, and this heat maintained 
for about four hours. The employment of my 
apparatus with automatic circulation working . 
. 
: 
w 
So 
IOO 
292,669 
55 
and then treating them according to my said 
process, so that the same are converted into 
solid fatty acids, substantially as set forth in 
the foregoing specification. 
3. The improved process for solidifying and 
transforming liquid or semi-liquid fatty acids 
into Solid fatty acids, consisting of (a) heating 
the fatty acids by means of free steam under 
continuous agitation of the mass by means of 
air; (b) successively adding about eight to ten 
per cent. common or five per cent. concen 
trated nitric acid during the agitation of the 
mass; (c) maintaining a temperature of about 
100 centigrade for the space of about one 
hour under a continuous agitation of the ma 
terial; (d) successively adding about one per 
cent. of starch or other similar product and 
continuing the aforementioned agitation; (e) 
continuing the agitation for about two hours, 
raising the temperature to about 120 cen. 
tigrade, and then reducing the same to about 
70 centigrade; (f) washing the product so 
obtained until all trace of acid is eliminated; 
(0) treating the material with a like quan 
tity, in weight, of water strongly saturated 
with lime, caustic potash, ammoniac, or other 
equivalent material: (h) heating the product; 
(i) Washing the product so obtained, then al 
lowing the water and chemical products to 
settle or subside out of the same; (j) treating 
this product with about one per cent. of sul 
phuric acid and energetically agitating the 
same; (k) distilling the product in a continuous 
vacuum, thus obtaining a pure white mass with 
very high melting-point, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The application and employment of the 
transformed and solidified oleine and the so 
lidified and transformed mineral, vegetable, 
or animal oils for themselves alone or suitable 
admixtures of the same for the manufacture of 
candles and other industrial purposes, sub 
stantially as set forth in the foregoing speci. 
fication. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM FITZ, CHARLES MASON McCARTY, 
EDWIN A. BRY DG Es, 
ANTIONY STEFFEN. 
So 
90 
IO 
15 
25 
under a vacuum permits me to work at a tem 
perature of 160, and gives the best results. 
For this operation the apparatus is lined with 
lead or tin, or is galvanized with iridium, and 
the tubes and valves or cocks must be treated 
in a like manner. 
IV. Second cashing. --This second transfor 
mation being completed, the material is again 
placed in a vessel provided with a suitable 
water-jacket, and allowed to stand until the 
chemicals and water employed have settled to 
the bottom of the vessel. 
V. Acidification.-After the second washing, 
about one per cent. of the Weight of the ma 
terial sulphuric acid of sixty-six degrees 
strength is added, and the entire mass thor 
oughly agitated. 
VI. The so acidified mass is now distilled, 
for which purpose I prefer to employ my pat 
ented distilling apparatus, which said appa 
ratus works under the influence of vacuum. 
The product of this distillation is white, has 
a very high melting-point, gives, when made 
up into candles, a beautiful flame, and can com 
pete with the stearine candles of first quality. 
The stearine-like product of the mineral 
oils is of a comparatively weaker kind; but 
when mixed with the oleine products or treated 
direct with the oleine in suitable proportions 
it has a like high melting-point with stearic 
acid of the first quality. 
- 
It is evident that my said process can be 
modified in various ways without departing 
from the tenor of my said invention. 
Having described my said invention and 
the manner in which the same is to or may be 
carried into effect, I wish it to be understood 
that what I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The transformation of oleine into a solid 
fatty acid with high melting-point, so that the 
same can be employed to like purposes as 
stearic acid of first quality, substantially as 
set forth in the foregoing specification. 
2. The transformation of mineral, vegetable, 
and animal oils into a solid fatty acid by first 
saponifying or otherwise treating the same 
until they obtain a gelatinous-like consistency, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292769.txt	No Model.) 
w 
No. 292,769, 
F. J. UNDERWOOD, 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
Patented Jan. 29, 1884, 
 
- 
SS 
ael N 
s 
SA 
M 
p 
- 
Lllinesses 
&aaaa-46fable. 
Inuel 
7% vs. 724 nea 
N. PETERS, Phati-lithographer, Washington, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FLAVIUS J. UNDERWOOD, OF NORTH SPRINGFIELD, MISSOURI. 
FIRE-ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,769, dated January 29, 1884, 
Application filed May 21, 1883. (No model.) 
IO 
I5 
35 
- 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FLAVIUS J. UNDER 
WOOD, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at North Springfield, in the county of Greene 
and State of Missouri, have invented certain 
new and usefullmprovementsin Fire-Escapes; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
Myinvention relatestoimprovementsin fire 
escapes. The objectis to provide an easy, con 
venient, safe, and at the same time rapid means 
of descending from a burning building. I 
attain these objects by means of the device 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which- 
Figure i is a view of the entire device ex 
cept the attachment. Figs. 2 and 3 show the 
attachment. Figs. 4 and 5 show the attach 
ing-arm when open. 
The device consists of an arm, E or F, to 
which is attached a rope or wire, A. Upon 
this rope is placed a slide or tension, B, made 
of wood, iron, or other suitable material, hav 
ing the holes b, which may be of any number 
to produce the desired tension by friction to 
regulate the speed in descent, but best with 
but four, as shown, and made a little slanting 
the way the rope works through. On this 
tension is attached a piece, B, best made a 
part of the tension, as shown, leaving a space 
between it and the tension, (for the purpose 
hereinafter explained,) together with a har 
ness, CD. 
E is an arm of iron attached at e' to the 
window-sill, and having the holes or rings e" 
e', and a hook in the wall e, through which 
the rope passes, and thus the weight of itself 
swings between the windows to descend. 
When it is not convenient to attach the arm 
at e, the arm is made with an elbow-joint, as 
shown in Figs. 3 and 4, in which case it is at 
tached to the casing of the window at f, and 
the weight on the rope opens the elbow-joint 
5Of", and thus swings the descending object be 
tween the windows. 
C is an endless loop or band, made of leath 
er, cloth, or other suitable material, and of 
sufficient size to be placed around the largest 
person. It is attached to the slide around 
55 
45 
the piece B, thus permitting it to freely pass 
from end to end when the slide is reversed. 
Over this endless loop is slipped a ring, d, 
to which is attached an adjustable loop, D, 
made of similar material to C, and adjusted 
by a buckle, d, or other suitable device. 
I operate my invention as follows: The de 
vice, as shown in Fig. 1, is placed in a room 
or place desired for use. One end of the rope 
A is then attached to a substantial place or to 
the arm, as described, in case of fire bursting 
out from the lower windows. The endless 
loop C is then placed around the body just 
under the arms, while the ring d is brought 
to the chest, the adjustable loop D drops lower 
to serve as a seat, and, if a child or other ob 
ject is to be sent down, the loop D is adjusted 
by means of the buckle d', so that the weight 
in loop D tightens the hold in loop C by draw 
ing up ring d, thus enabling children, babes, 
valuable furniture, &c., as well as grown per 
sons, to reach the ground quickly and safely 
by means of this device. On reaching the 
ground the ring d drops back and the whole 
harness will drop off. If more than one per 
son or object is to be lowered, (as is gener 
ally the case,) the person above draws up 
the rope and attaches the free end and frees 
the one attached, and it is then ready for an 
other descent; and this may be repeated ally 
number of times until all have gone down. 
The piece B of the tension is necessary to 
the self-reversal of the harness, to obviate the 
necessity of pulling the rope back through 
the tension, which otherwise would be neces 
sary, as the tension will not work except With 
the weight at the lower end. 
The tension or tent-slide' is old; but 
What I do claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a fire-escape, an adjustable self-tight 
ening harness, CD, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. In a fire-escape, the combination of a 
tension with holes bupon a rope, A, having the 
piece B, and an adjustable self-tightening 
harness, CD, all substantially as shown and 
- described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signaturein 
presence of two witnesses. 
FLAVIUS J. UNDERWOOD. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. R. MILNER, 
JAS. ANTHONY. 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292869.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 292,869. 
MACHINE FOR WASHING, SCOURING AND BURRING WOOL, 
Patente 
d Feb. 5, 1884, 
 
J. E. SINCLAIR. 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
No. 292,869, 
 
 
  
(No Model.) 
J. E. SINCLAIR. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
MACHINE FOR WASHING, SCOURING AND BURRING WOOT, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1884, 
Z 
PzzZarzrzyczepy 
LS 
D 
AITORNEYS, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithograpier. Wa 
shinggini 
..), C 
(No Model.) 
" 
* 
* 
. 
MACHINE FOR WASHING, SCOURING AND BURRING W0OL, 
J. E. SINCLAIR. 
- 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
No. 292,869, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1884, 
WITNESSES : 
 
 
  
ATTORNEYs 
N, PETERS: Photo-Lilliographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. E. SINCLAIR. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
MACHINE FOR WASHING, SCOURING AND BURRING W0OL, 
No. 292,869, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1884. 
 
 
AA 
 
SN 
?? 
 
|y 
III 
UHUVI N 
|| o o o o o o o oo ? ?????? 
o o o o-oo-oooooooooo 
do o or do o o o O OO o O O O 
o, o do o o O did od Odo o 
WITNESSES 
- 
? 
ATTORNEYs, 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. SINCLAIR, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
MACHINE FOR WASHING, ScouRING, AND BURRING wool. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,869, dated February 5, 1884. 
Application filed March 2, 1883, (No model.) 
55 
... 
" 
15 
To all, ??h???, it, ??? ??? ????, : 
of strips, g, provided with teeth g, and sup 
Be it known that I, JAMES E. SINCLAIR, of 
ported on springs g and cross-bars gin such 
Baltimore, in the State of Maryland, have in 
manner that they may be depressed to with 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Ma 
draw their teeth from the wool, to prevent the 
chines for Washing, Scouring, Burring, and 
Wool from accumulating thereon. I also pro 
Picking Wool, of which the following is a full, 
vide a concave plate, g, arranged inside the 
apron G, and having perforations of, through 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the annexed drawings, forming part of 
which the teeth g project when the strips g 
this specification. 
are not depressed, and which plate is adapted 
This invention relates to machines for wash 
to hold the wool while the teeth are being 
ing, scouring, burring, and picking wool by a 
withdrawn therefrom. 
continuous operation, and the invention con 
Various means may be employed for giving 
sists of the novel construction hereinafter de 
a regular sinking and rising movement to the 
strips g by the rotation of the drum. 
scribed and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
I have shown the drum provided with pro 
jectionsg, arranged on its periphery in spiral 
section of the machine. Fig. 2 is a plan view 
lines, (see Fig. 6,) and corresponding projec 
of the Same. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are parts of a 
longitudinal section of the machine enlarged; 
tions, f, on the stripsg, against Which the pro 
and Figs. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 2, 13, and 14 are 
jections on the drum will strike and depress 
the strips. When the plate gis used, it is to 
detail views. 
In treating wool preparatory to carding, I 
be provided with slots g, through which the 
first pass it through a Washing apparatus, A, 
projections.fmay extend, as shown in Figs. 7 
in which the fibers are thoroughly separated 
and 8. The projections may be arranged in 75 
and agitated in cold water to remove all for 
any desirable manner to give the necessary 
25 eign substances, such as grit and sand, and 
movement required for releasing any tufts of 
also lime, where the wool has been obtained 
wool that may adhere to the teeth. 
from pelts. From the Washing apparatus the 
To prevent the wool from adhering to the 
wool is pumped into a scouring apparatus, B, 
teeth of the drum a brush, H, is arranged at 
where it is treated with hot water and sub 
the rear of the latter, which is to be rotated 
stances for removing the animal grease. As 
by suitable connections to clean the teeth and 
the wool is thoroughly separated before it 
force the wool downward into the water. A 
reaches the hot water, it need not be subjected 
pipe, I, entering the receptacle D at one side, 
to the heat long enough to injure the fiber, but 
will keep up a supply of water, which filters 
may be quickly scoured, and pumped into the 
through the perforated cover h and the false 
35 burring and picking apparatus C, where it is 
bottom hinto the still-water chamber h", from 
rinsed in cold water, and burred and picked, 
which it is let off by means of the cock h. 
and finally discharged from the machine in 
The grit and sand will also drop through the 
condition to be dried, and then carded. 
false bottom h" and leave the main part of the 
receptacle D comparatively clean. At the 
The machine for carrying out the end I have 
in view includes, then, the Washing appara 
opposite end of the receptacle D from the 
tus A, the scouring apparatus B, and the burr 
drum F are arranged two upright pumps, J, 
ing and picking apparatus C, as above indi 
by which the wool is to be elevated to the 
cated. The Washing apparatus. A comprises 
traveling apron Koutside of the said recepta-95 
a tank or receptacle, D, having a hopper, E, 
cle. This apron is formed of suitable net- : 
leading thereto, and a drum, F, provided with 
work to allow the water from the wool to drip 
teeth for feeding the Wool from the hopperinto 
through into the trough L, which has a false 
the receptacle. 
bottom, i, and an overflow - channel, i, by 
To facilitate the complete separation of the 
which the overflow water is conducted to the 
fibers of wool as they are drawn into the bath, 
hopper E. With this construction a complete 
So I provide a concave apron, G, at the front 
circulation of the water in the Washing appa 
lower side of the drum, extending down from 
ratus is provided for. From the traveling 
the hopper, which apron is formed of a series apron K the Wool passes between the two 
3O 
90 
IOO 
: 
2 
- 
292,869 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Wringing-rollers M, and is brushed downward 
by the rotary brush N into the scouring appa 
ratus B. The Scouring apparatus comprises a 
conical hopper-shaped receptacle, O, and an 
upright (Onical drum, P, arranged therein. 
The inner surface of the receptacle O and the 
periphery of the drum are corrugated, so that 
as the drum is rotated and the wool drops 
down around the drum into the hot water 
which envelops it, the Wool will be subjected 
to a rubbing operation, which, together with 
the effect of the cleansing compounds used, will 
remove all animal grease therefrom. The hot 
Water is supplied by a pipe, i, entering the 
receptacle Q at one side thereof, which recep 
tacle is provided with a false bottom, j', leav 
ing Open communication below with the pas 
Sage k, along which the wool is forced as it 
passes from the scouring-drum. The passage 
lc has a perforated false bottom, k", leading to 
a still-Water chamber, l, from which the dirt 
and Water are drawn off through a cock, k". 
The Scouring apparatus is likewise provided 
With a pair of pumps, R, arranged in all re 
Spects like those in the Washing apparatus for 
pumping the Scoured Wool to a traveling 
apron, S, similar to the apron K. The water 
dripping from the wool is run back into the 
Scouring apparatus by means of the pipe om, 
from trought. From the traveling apron S 
the Wool passes between the two wringing 
rollers T, and is brushed downward by the 
rotary brush U into the burring and picking 
apparatus C. At the front of this apparatus 
is a toothed drum, D, fitted to revolve in a 
semicircular basin, E, and above the drum is 
arranged a rinsing device, F, consisting of a 
Series of perforated cross-pipes adapted for 
Spraying Or jetting cold water over the said 
drum. As the water accumulates in the basin 
E it discharges through an overflow-pipe, I, 
arranged on the outside of the machine and 
communicating With the receptacle of the 
Washing apparatus already described. As the 
drum Drotates, a brush, G', removes the wool 
from the teeth of the drum and brushes it into 
a receptacle, H', which has a drum, I, and a 
concave apron, J, similar to the drum and 
apron of the Washing apparatus. Here the 
wool is again thoroughly separated, and as it 
is carried up by the drum it is met by the 
burring-drum K, which rotates in the oppo 
site direction to that of drum I and separates 
the burrs from the Wool. 
Underneath the drum K is a false bottom, 
L', through which the burrs will fall, while 
the Wool passes on to the picking-drum M'. 
To prevent the teeth of the burring-drum K. 
from acting on the Wool longer than neces 
Sary, this drum is formed of two parts-an 
outer cylindrical shell, p, having perforations 
therein, and an inner drum, p", formed of bars 
q, havingpins secured thereto, which are adapt 
ed to project through the perforations of the 
Outer shell. The longitudinal axis of the in 
ner drum, p", is located outside of the longi 
tudinal axis of the outer shell, p", (see Figs. 13 
and 14) and the ends of the bars q are adapt 
ed to move in a cam-groove, q, in the walls 
supporting the drum, so that the teeth of the 
drum Will be drawn inward and within the 
outer shell as they pass to the rear, in the act 
of rotation. The teeth will thus cease to act 
On the wool when the latter reaches the up 
right grating N'. The slots in the grating N' 
are made narrow at the front side, as shown 
in Fig. 12, and flaring at the rear, to prevent 
the wool from wedging therein as it is drawi 
through the same by the picking-drum M. 
The drum M consists of two wheels, having 
bars, secured thereto in a twisted or spiral 
form, as shown in Fig. 9, and provided with 
teeth which are slightly hooked at the ends. 
These teeth are adapted to extend partially 
through the grating, in order that they may 
reach the wool and draw it through. To the 
spokes of the two wheels of the drum are se 
cured bars or blades s, which are to serve as 
fans for expelling the Wool from the machine. 
Owing to the great quantity of water that 
is required in Washing and scouring wool, it 
is of the greatest importance that the Water 
shall be utilized to the fullest extent. 
It will be seen that I provide for the run 
ning of the water from the rinsing device to 
the Washing apparatus, whereby it is made to 
do double duty, and by the arrangement of 
the troughs and pipes above described the 
water that is pumped up out of the Washing 
and the scouring apparatus is returned to the 
same, respectively. A. current is thus pro 
duced through both the Washing and the scour 
ing apparatus, which serves to carry the wool 
along until it is brought Within the suction of 
the pump?. 
The special construction of the scouring and 
the picking and burring apparatus will be 
made the subject of Subsequent application for 
patent. 
What I claim is 
1. A machine for treating wool, having a se 
ries of connected receptacles in which the wool 
is successively treated, and which receptacles 
are combined with one or more pumps for ele 
vating the wool and water from one recepta 
cle to another, and aprons and troughs for re 
turning the elevated Water to the receptacle 
from which it was drawn, whereby a circula 
tion of the Water in said receptacle will be pro 
duced to assist in carrying the Wool through 
the machine, Substantially as specified. 
2. A machine for treating wool, having a se 
ries of receptacles in which the wool is suc 
cessively, treated, which receptacles are com 
bined with pumps adapted to elevate the wool, 
traveling aprons, Wringers, and brushes, the 
latter delivering the wool from the wringers, 
and pipes or troughs for returning the elevat 
ed water for repeated use, substantially as 
specified. 
3. The machine herein described, consisting 
of the Washing apparatus comprising a recep 
75 
85 
95 
OO , 
I IO 
 
 
292, S69 
3. 
tacle and revolving toothed drum and elevat- | ed to operate substantially as shown and de 
ing-pumps, the scouring apparatus connected scribed. 
to the Washing apparatus by a traveling apron 
5. The combination of a pump adapted for 
and Wringers, and comprising a corrugated elevating the wool and water, with the wool 
5 conical drum and corresponding receptacle and and water receptacle, a trough for returning 
elevating-pumps, and the burring and picking 
the water, and a Wringer for separating the 
apparatus connected to the Scouring appara 
water from the wool, substantially as shown 
tus by atraveling apron and Wringers, and com 
and described, whereby a circulation of the 
prising a receptacle and a series of toothed 
water shall be obtained, for the purpose speci 
Io drums, all arranged and adapted to operate 
fied. 
substantially as shown and described. 
JAMES E. SINCLAIR. 
4. The apparatus consisting of the toothed 
drum, the wool and water receptacle, the con 
cave apron formed of movable toothed bars, 
15 and the rotary brush, all combined and adapt 
A. G. LYNE, 
SOLON C. KEMON. 
 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US292969.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. WHITNEY. 
DEVICE FOR POISING TREADLE AND CRANK MOWEMENTS 
No. 292,969. 
Patented Feb. 5, 1884. 
Azo. 7, 
2 l 
WITNESSES: 
27. 
44-- 
&- 
42%22-2-2.-- 
67. 
5*. 
INVENTOR 
16 22-y 
BY-470%-4 
ATTORNEY 
N. PEERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
: JAMES H. WHITNEY, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
DEVICE FOR POSING TREADLE-AND-CRANK MOVEMENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 292,969, dated February 5, 1884. 
Application filed July 6, 1883. (No model.) 
2. 
55 
To all who7, it Tuay concern : 
f, of the pitman as compared to the shorter 
Beit known that I, JAMES H. WHITNEY, a 
leverage of the part of the treadle forward of 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
the shaft F. When this is properly done, the 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
crank-pin (although, of course, its natural tend 
New York, have invented a new and useful Im 
ency is to stop on the dead-center) will not 
provement in Sewing-Machines, of which the 
have such a tendency, as heretofore, to stick 
following is a specification. 
on the said center-that is, to require much 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
force to move it over the center; but it will, 
simple and efficient mode of poising the treadle 
when left to itself, stop about the dead-center, 
and-crank movement for running sewing-ma 
either upper or lower, as the case may be, and 
chines in such a manner that the balance-wheel, 
require an exceedingly slight force to move it 
When operation has ceased, shall always stop 
from the said point. In order, now, to insure 
normally in such a position that the crank has 
that the fly-wheel B will always finally come 
passed the dead-point. The tendency of the 
to rest in such a position that the crank has 
crank to stop on the dead-point is in a meas 
progressed opposite the dead-point, giving Suf 
ure relieved or decreased by giving the fly 
fiient leverage to turn it with the first press 
wheel an elastic bearing, as descfibed and 
ure on the treadle, I secure, preferably, to the 
claimed in my patent numbered 275,966, dated 
inner side of the rim of the wheel B a weight, 
April 17, 1883, inasmuch as the unevenness in 
G, which is thin and crescent-shaped, to con 
movement of the operator's feet upon the 
form with the shape of the rim, and in order 
treadle, and consequent more or less concus 
to be able to adjust the position of the weight 
sions or unevenness in the movement is taken. 
to a great nicety, I provide it with slots 9, by 
up in the yielding of the said bearing; but the 
means of which and headed screwsH, passing 
said elastic bearing will not prevent the stop 
through the said slots and threaded into the 
ping of the crank on the dead-center when op 
rim of the wheel B, it may be slid backward 
teration ceases. 
or forward a little to ascertain the best poised 
Myinvention consists in the mode and means 
position, and then secured in said position by 
for balancing the treadle, pitman, crank, and 
the Said Screws. 
fly-wheel for regulating the movement of the 
Aglance at Fig. 1 of the drawings will make 
elastic bearing. 
the construction and operation clear. The 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
dotted position E D C of the treadle, pit 
resents a sectional elevation of a sewing-ma 
man, and crank-pin indicates that in which 
chine stand, showing the entire crank-motion 
they will naturally be brought by the effect of . 
as poised according to my present invention. 
the balance-weight e, this position being on 
Fig. 2 is a top view of an adjustable weight ap 
the dead-point and rearward of the position 
in which they ought to be stopped; but if, 
plicable to the fly-wheel. 
- - 
A is the frame of the stand, and a the elas 
now, the weight G be placed in the dotted po 
tic bearing in the same, to which the fly-wheel sition G', which is at a similar angular distance 
is pivoted. B is the fly-wheel, and bits cen 
rearwardly in the movement of the vertical 
ter. C is the crank-pin, D the pitman, E the 
line from the center in which line the weight 
then naturally will finally stop, it is evident 
treadle, and F the treadle-shaft. 
In order to prevent any limping or uneven- that the said weight, in moving from the posi- . 
ness in the motion by the weight of the pit- ition G' to assume its normal position, will turn 
man, crank, and treadle, I cast or attach upon the wheel B in the direction of arrow 1, and 
the underside of the forward end of the treadle 
thus move the crank-pin from the position C 
E, a weight, e, the size of which is carefully as 
to C, in which it will be in readiness to enable 
certained and adjusted, so as to counterbalance 
the operator to start the machine with the first 
the weight of the crank-hub, crank-pin, pit 
pressure on the treadle in the direction of ar 
man, and the gain in their weight due to the 
row 2. If the wheel should stop when the 
greater leverage or the greater distance be 
crank is in its lower position on the upward 
tween the treadle-shaft F and the lower pivot, movement, the motion should, of course, be 
- 
85 
95 
ICO 
I O 
20 
25 
35 
 
2 
92,969 
5 the neatness of appearance. 
started by pressure on the forward end of the 
treadles By placing the weight e underneath. 
the forward end of the treadle it is entirely 
out of sight, and thus does not marin the least 
Instead of poising the wheel by the detach 
able weight G, the same effect may be pro 
duced (when the exact location of the center 
of gravity of the weight is determined) by sim 
IO ply coring the mold for the casting in the rim. 
of the Wheel diagonally opposite to the weight, 
thus making the rim hollow and consequently 
lighter when the core has been removed from 
the casting. 
In order to limit the downward movement 
of the elastic bearing a, while yet allowing the 
Supporting-springs i to be made light, and con 
sequently sensitive, I enter through the frame, 
directly underneath the bearing a, centrally 
between the said springs i, a set-screw, I, 
against the upper end of which screw the bear 
ing a will be stopped when having moved 
downward to its determined limit. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The mode herein shown and described of 
balancing the crank-motion for sewing-ma 
chines, which consists in equipoising the 
Weights acting on oppositesides of the treadle 
fulcrum by weighting the forward end of the 
treadle, and then applying to the fly-wheel a 
preponderating weight, G, for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. The combination of the treadle E, pro- 4o 
4. In combination with the fly-wheel of a 45 
2. In a crank-movement for sewing-ma 
chines, a treadle, E, provided beneath its for-35 
ward end with a weight, e, in combination 
with the pitman ID and with a fly-wheel, B, 
having a counter-weight, G, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
vided at its forward end with a weight, e, the 
pitman D, and the fly-wheel B, having a coun 
ter-weight, G, said weight being adjustable in 
position. 
Sewing-machine, the weight G, provided with 
slots (1, and the screwsH, passing through the 
Said slots into the rim of said wheel, for Secur 
ing and adjusting the position of the said 
weight, for the purpose set forth. 
5. In combination with the frame A of a 
sewing-machine stand, and with the fly-wheel 
bearing (, having elastic support i, an adjust 
able stop, I, limiting the downward movement 
of the said bearing. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 30th day of April, 
S83. 
55 
JAS. H. WHITNEY. 
Witinesses: 
A. W. ALMQVIST, 
A. WAHLBERG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293069.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 293,069, 
D. PATTEN. 
HYPOTENUSE CALCULATOR AND INDICATOR. 
Patented Feb. 5, 1884, 
 
a T. 
9 dule.- 
.N. a. 
2, #f7; 
tJNITED STATES PATEN'T OFFICE. 
DANIEL PATTEN, OF CALISTOGA, CALIFORNIA. 
HYPOTENUSE CALCULATOR AND INDICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 293,069, dated February 5, 1884. 
Applicatio filed February 18, 1882, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
s 
To all whom it TCity concern: 
tion of any line or surface. By applying either 
Beit known that I, DANIEL PATTEN, of Cal 
of the edges be c to any such line or surface 
istoga, in the county of Napa and State of Cali 
and allowing the swinging arm to take the Ver 
fornia, have made and invented an Improved 
tical position, which it will do by virtue of the 
Hypotenuse Calculator and Indicator; and I 
action of gravitation, the edge of the arm will 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
mark on the scale D the number of degrees 
clear, and exact description of the same, refer 
or angle of the surface from the horizontal or 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings. 
perpendicular. 
In addition to this, I provide. 
My invention relates to a device or instru 
a means of ascertaining and determining the 
ment for the use of the surveyor, draftsman, 
length of any such inclined line or surface 
and carpenter in measuring lines and angles. 
without actual measurement, of lines and an 
in plotting and in calculating the length and 
gles, and independent of complicated mathe 
proportion of the hypotenuse and the base or 
lmatical calculation. This consists of the scales 
side of any given triangle, the object being to 
G. G., of equal parts, marked upon the face of 
enable these operations to be performed with 
the plate A, and a similar scale, g, upon the 
accuracy, and without complicated and tedious 
Swinging arm E. The graduations. G. G. are 
upon two straightlines extending from a point, 
mathematical calculations or the use of other 
instruments. 
t; upon the centerlinea'ain opposite directions, 
In the said drawings, Figure 1 is a front 
making each an angle of forty-five degrees 
view of my improved instrument. Figs. 2 and 
with this line, and terminating at or near the 
3 illustrate the manner of applying and oper 
edges of the plate A. They are of equallength, 
ating it to obtain the inclination of a line or 
and compose two sides of a square, of which 
surface. 
the remaining two sides are formed by the 
The plate A is formed of sheet metal, of con 
edges of the plate, or by two lines, w c, drawn 
venient size to be readily handled. It is of 
parallel thereto. The point of oscillation of 
quadrant shape, with the curved side replaced 
the arm is located at the outer corner of this 
by three straight edges, b c c. The edges A 
square, and the length of the principal un 
A meet at an angle of ninety degrees at the 
graduated portion of the arm, as from s to t, is 
point a. The perpendicular line aca, which 
equal to any one side of the Square. 
From this 
passes through point a, divides the square of 
point t the outer end of the arm is graduated 
which AA form two sides in an exactly diag 
into equal parts), corresponding to the gradu 
onal direction, and the edges AA will be at 
ations of the scales G. G. The arm E there 
an angle of forty-five degrees to the said line. 
fore indicates the exact length of the diagonal 
From the ends of the sides A the edges c e are 
of the square w w G. G. Each line Gis divided 
carried inward at right angles to meet the side 
into one hundred equal parts, and from the 
b. With a center, as A, all arc, D, is de 
point t to a suitable distance down a scale with 
scribed upon the face of the plate within the 
divisions of the same size is indicated upon the 
angular edge b c c, and this arc is divided from 
The edge carrying this scale 
end of the arm. 
the center both ways into degrees and frac 
is set in, so that it coincides with a centerline 
tional parts. At this center a swinging indi 
passing through the pivot. Now, by the ap 
cator arm or finger, E, is pivoted, so that while 
plication and relative position of the several 
resting on the plate it is free to swing over the 
scales and the try-edges b c c, it follows that 
whole face. 
The center of suspension, A, is 
the swinging arm will indicate upon scale D 
located upon the diagonal line a ac, which 
any inclination taken by the plate A, and the 
passes through the angle a of the plate and 
degree of inclination of the surface to which 
through the zero or middle of the scale of de 
one of the edges bor c is applied will be shown 
grees D. 
The indicating-finger is mounted on 
by the arm E. The relative length of the 
its pivots, so that it has free Oscillation, and 
hypotenuse of a triangle of such degree is 
will take a true vertical position at all times 
then readily measured by setting the arm E to 
when the plate is held upright on edge. Now, 
such degree upon the scale, for when the 
these several parts and features produce a sim 
arm is brought into such position the lines 20 
ple indicator to obtain the angle or inclina- G will give two sides of such a triangle, and 
9O 
IOC 
 
2 
i)3,069 
IO 
the arm will indicate the hypotenuse. One 
side of such triangle being divided into equal 
parts, the proportionatelength of the hypote 
nuse is shown by the scale (7. 
To illustrate by a practical application of 
the instrument, Z, Fig. 2, may represent an 
inclined line or surface to be measured, the 
horizontal being known. One of the edges of 
the plate is placed against the surface and the 
arm E allowed to come to the vertical. The 
degree of inclination or angle of the surface is 
then read on the arc D. This being given, it is 
only necessary to place the plate in horizontal 
position, Fig. 3, and set the arm, by means of 
a small knob, In, on the end, so that it shall 
mark the given angle on the arc D, as before. 
This position of the arm will then give the 
hypotenuse of a triangle of which one side 
will be indicated by the side at and the re 
maining side by the line G. The relative 
lengths of the lines are then shown by the 
Scales G and Eg., Thus the base or side will 
be indicated by the line ac, which, being of 
same length as G, may, according to the scale 
here given, be counted one hundred. The 
perpendicular or other side will be read on 
scale G, and the hypoten use will be the length 
of E from s to t (which here equals 100) -- 
the number indicated on the scale of from the 
3o point t to the point where of crosses scale G. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The herein - described instrument, con 
sisting of the plate A, with the edges be c, and 35 
Scales D and G. G., and swinging pendulum E, 
Substantially as set forth. 
2. In an instrument of the kind described, 
the combination, with the swinging pendulum 
E, having the scale, of the graduated lines or 40 
scales G. G. upon a plate or surface over which 
the pendulum is adapted to swing, said lines 
forming the adjacent sides of a square having 
the pivot of the pendulum situated at the op 
posite angle, substantially as described, to oper 
ate as set forth. 
3. The hypotenuse-indicator consisting of 
the plate or surface A, with its scales D, and 
having the angular sides or faces c e b, the 
swinging pendulum E, having the scaled, and 
the scales or graduated lines G. G., substan 
tially as described, to operate as set forth. 
In witness that I claim the foregoing I have 
heretinto set my hand and seal. 
45 
- 
- 
- 
- 
IDANIEL PATTEN. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD E. Os BORN, 
T). SELLECK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293169.txt	(No Model.) 
G. E. H.A.R.T. 
COMPENSATION WATCH BATANCE, 
No. 293,169, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1884. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE E. HART, OF WATERBURY, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WATERBURY WATCH COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
COMPENSATION WATCH-BALANCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,169, dated February 5, 1884. 
Application filed September 10, 1 S83. 
(No model.) 
IO 
5 
I 
To all illion, it may concein, 
Be it known that I, GEORGE E. HART, of 
Waterbury, in the county of New Haven, and 
in the State of Connecticut, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Watch 
Balances; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, making a part of this specifica 
tion, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the upper 
side of my improved balance, and Fig. 2 is a 
like view of the bottom side of the same; and 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section of Said balance upon 
a central line. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
The design of my invention is to enable 
Watch-balances to be more easily and cheaply 
constructed than has heretofore been practi 
cable; and to this end said invention consists 
in a Watch-balance composed of brass, with 
the inner half of its rim coated with deposited 
nickel or platinum, substantially as and for 
the purpose hereinafter specified. 
In the construction of my balance A, the 
rim ( and arm a? are formed from brass, in the 
usual manner. The said rim is then provided 
with radial threaded openings for the recep 
30 tion of adjusting-screws a', and said balance 
2 5 
3 5 
is then coated with nickel or platinum, pref. 
erably deposited by an electric battery. The 
balance is next placed in alathe, and the plat 
ing removed from the periphery and from a 
portion of the edge. of the rim (, after which 
said rim is cut and the screws inserted. The 
portion of the rim (, covered with nickel or 
platinum is less easily affected by changes of 
temperature than is the portion where the 
brass is exposed, and by properly proportion- 4o 
ing the areas of the plated and plain parts of 
said rim the greater expansion and contrac 
tion of the latter can be made to so change the 
form of said rim as to preserve the general 
size of the balance and prevent changes in the 
time-rate of a watch to which it is applied. 
Having thus fully set forth the nature and 
merits of my invention, what I claim as new is 
A watch-balance composed of brass, with 
the inner surface and a portion of the edges 
of its rim coated with deposited nickel or 
platinum, Substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I have 
hereunto set my hand this 20th day of July, 
ISS3. 
(EORGE E. HART. 
J) 
- 
Witnesses: 
E. L. BRONSON, 
e 
GEO. S. PRINDI.E. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293269.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 293,269. 
G. S., NORRIS, 
BOTTLE STOPPING DEWICE, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1884, 
 
  
 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
SAS 
NSR S2 al S. 
222 4 A3 
 
7zzzzesses. 
626% 
Zzzavezzar. 
67eorye-?/Zottes, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE S. NORRIS, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
BOTTLE-STOPPING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 293,269, dated February 12, 1884, 
Application filed November 9, 1883. (No model.) 
A represents the neck of the bottle, and B 
Zo all whon, it indif concern, 
Beit known that I, GEORGE S. NORRIs, a the rubber plug. It is made with a collar, B, 
to rest upon the edge of the bottle-mouth, and 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bal 
has a hole, b, in its top surface, eccentrically 
timore, in the county of Baltimore and State 
to the center thereof, as shown in Figs. 2 and 
5 of Maryland, have invented certain new and 
5, and concentrically, as shown in Fig. 6, lead 
useful Improvements in Bottle-Stopping De 
ing into a circular cavity in the center of the 
vices, of which the following is a specification, 
plug. To connect the plug with the stopper 
: reference being had therein to the accompany 
fastenings and furnish it with a support hav 
ing drawings, in which 
ing some degree of elasticity to press against 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
io 
the floor of the center cavity, the cap Disused. 
. . provement applied to the neck of a bottle 
This cap is stamped out of sheet metal, and is 
closed thereby. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of 
circular, with two lugs, d, projecting diametri 
the same, showing the mouth of the bottle 
cally from the periphery thereof, and out of 
Open. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the 
the center is cut a disk, d, having an arm, d. 65 
15 sheet-metal capturned upside down to show 
that connects it permanently with the body of 
the inner disk cut therefrom. Fig. 4 is a per 
the cap. After the cap's blank has been 
spective view showing a modification of the 
stamped or cut out of a flat sheet of metal, the 
sheet-metal cap. Fig. 5 is a perspective view 
arm d is bent downwardly at the point where 
of the rubber plug. Fig. 6 is a vertical sec 
it is united to the cap, and horizontally again 7O 
2O tion of the rubber plug constructed according 
at the point where it joins the disk d, so that 
to my invention and secured to a cast-metal 
said disk will occupy a position parallel with 
cap. Figs. 7 and S are perspective views of 
the bottom surface of the cap, and about three 
the neck-band and a modification thereof. 
sixteenths of an inch therefrom. The disk d 
My invention relates to bottle-stopping de 
and arm dare thus in position, after having 
vices in which a rubber plug is compressed 
been inserted within the plug B, to press 
over and within the mouth of a bottle by means 
against the floor of the cavity b, upon a cen 
of a combined stopper cap and bail adapted to 
tral elevation, b, projecting from its interior 
be connected at one end, by means of a link 
surface, to partly distend it downwardly and 
and a hinged lever, to a band secured to the 
laterally when forcing the plug within the 8O 
neck of said bottle, and to the other end by 
bottle-mouth. While releasing the bottle of 
means of a link pivoted to the coiled or looped 
its fastenings this downward distention of the 
portion of said band, and is an improvement 
bottom of the rubber plug has, by its resilience, 
upon the construction of the stopper, cap, and 
a tendency to throw the cap D upward, and 
rubber plug shown in my Patent No. 272,081, 
the latter carries the plug in its flight clear 
of 13th February, 1883; and the objects of my 
off the bottle-mouth. With this objectin view 
improvements are, first, to provide the stopper 
the thickness of the upper portion, b, of the 
With a cap that can be struck out of sheet 
plug covering its cavity is only about one 
metal, and have its rim rest uniformly upon 
eighth of an inch, and consequently less than 
the stopper-plug when locked thereon while 
the length of the arm d, carrying the disk d of 90 
the bottle is closed; and, second, to give such 
the cap-plate. The rectangular opening bin 
a form to the cavity within the plug as to cause 
the top of the plug is of such size as to easily 
it to expand laterally within the bottle-mouth 
receive the disk d of the cap. The disk or 
when the bottom of said cavity is subjected to 
button of the cap-plate may be stamped out of 
vertical pressure, and also cause the stopper 
said plate in two halves, each having a stem, 95 
45 to jump clear over and to one side of the bot 
as showninFig. 4. Thelugs d, projecting from 
tie, and thereby release the stopper-plug of all 
the edge of the cap, are bent underto form eyes 
compression and allow it to resume its primi 
to receive the links f and f', that unite the cap 
tive form while the bottle is open. I attain 
to the neck-band E. The latter is made of a 
these objects by the construction illustrated 
piece of wire bent first upon itself at ein the IOO 
5O in the accompanying drawings, in which 
75 
25 
I. 
. 
I. 
 
293,269 
25 
35 
- 
1. Abottle-stopper cap consisting of a sheet 
metal plate having two peripheral lugs, a disk, 
and an arm carrying said disk, stamped from 
said plate, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
2. The combination of a bottle-stopper cap 
with a rubber plug having a central cavity, 
the floor of which cavity has a central projec 
tion resting against the end of the device 
forming a part of the stopper-cap, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination of a bottle-stopper cap 
with a rubber plug having a central cavity 
and an opening, d, in the top surface of said 
plug, leading into the side of said cavity, or 
eccentrically to said top, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses: 
GEORGE S. NORRIS. 
Witnesses: 
MURRAY HANSON, 
JOS. M. WINKLER. 
5 
O 
middle of its length, and that 
part coiled to 
form an eye or bearing, e", of suitable length 
to receive and keep steady a portion of the 
link.f, and each branch of the wire forming 
the neck-band is bent in a semicircle to fit 
the neck of a bottle, and furthermore bent 
outwardly to form a bearing for the link f", 
and again bent inwardly to form a journal for 
the locking-lever G. The construction and 
operation of this lever, laving been fully de 
scribed in my Patent No. 272,081, will not re 
quire now any further description. 
The rubber plug B, having the central ele 
Vation, b, projecting from thefloorofits cavity, 
can be used in connection with a cast-metal 
cap, D, having a central stem and button, d, 
and substantially the same results be obtained, 
as said button will press upon the elevation b 
of the rubber plug and diffuse or spread it 
downwardly and laterally against the interior 
of the neck of the bottle in the act of closing it. 
Having now fully described my invention, I 
claim 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293369.txt	(No Model.) 
F ST. AMANT, 
PIANO ACTION. 
No. 293,369, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1884, 
WITNE55E5 
24a/ -6. -- 
4.4/4. 
Y Alan 
 
Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washing 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS ST. AMANT, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
PIANO - ACTION. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 293,369, dated February 12, 1884, 
Application filed November 22, 1882. (No model.) 
- 
IO 
25 
To all whom it inval/ concern : 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS ST. AMANT, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, a subject of Victoria, Queen 
of England, &c., have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Grand or Square Piano 
Forte Actions, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part of this specification, in explaining its 
nature, in which- 
Figure I represents in side elevation an ac 
tion containing my invention, showing the 
hamler at rest. Fig. 2 represents the posi 
15 tion of the parts of the action immediately 
after the string has been struck. Figs. 3 and 
4 represent in perspective details, hereinafter 
referred to. 
This invention is an improvement upon that 
described in my Letters Patent No. 201461, 
dated March 19, 1878. In said patent I de 
Scribe a piano-action which is substantially all 
that is desired, except in one particular, and 
that is the connection between the hammer 
elevator and the hammer stem or flange. The 
Connection represented in the patent consists 
of a projection on the hammer-elevator, cov 
ered with leather, felt, or other flexible or soft 
material, and a wooden surface or shoe on the 
hammer, which rests on the projection on the 
hammer-elevator, and receives the impulse 
from it. The projection, however, on account 
of the hard usage to which it is submitted, 
Soon wears off and causes a change in the rela 
tive position of the parts of the action to such 
an extent that its efficiency is impaired, and 
it is not easily put in order again, it being 
necessary to renew some of the parts, and gen 
erally to overhaul the entire action to put it 
4o in good working condition. Moreover, it re 
quires considerable skill and expenditure of 
labor and material to properly adjust the rela 
tive position of the hammer-elevator to the 
hammer stem or flange in the first instance. I 
45 have ascertained, however, that by interpos 
ing an adjustable metallic connection between 
the hammer stem pr flange and the hammer 
elevator that these objections are entirely ob 
viated, so that if from wear or any other rea 
5o son the action needs setting up it can be done 
by means of this adjustable device, and the 
action is also correspondingly improved. 
Witnesses: 
F. F. RAYMOND, 2d, 
WILLARD C. FOGG. 
Referring to the drawings, A is the hammer 
stem or flange. 
B is the hammel-elevator, which is operated 55 
in the manner described in said patent. 
C is the interposed regulating device. It 
is preferably made of iron or steel, with a 
head, c, rounded or curved upon its contact 
ing-surface, and a shank, c', having a screw- 6O 
thread, c'. When this device is attached to 
the hammer-elevator, it is screwed into the 
projecting portion b thereof. The head has 
recesses c, for the reception of a Spanner, 
whereby it may be turned and the position of 65 
the head in relation to the hammel-elevator 
varied. When the regulating device is at 
tached to the hammer-stem or flange, its shank 
projects through the hammer-spindle, as shown 
in Fig. 4, and a recess, c', is cut across its end 
for the reception of a screw-?lriver. The por 
tion of the action with which the rounded head 
comes in contact should also be rounded, and 
preferably should be of some flexible or soft 
material, like felt or leather. For the best 75 
effect it is perhaps desirable that the regulat 
ing device be applied to the hammer-elevator. 
By making the upper surface of the device 
rounded or curved there is less friction be 
tween the parts, and by making it of metal 
great durability and strength in a light and 
compact form are obtained. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. The combination, in a piano-fourte action, 
of the hammer-stem, the hammer-elevator B, 
and the interposed adjustable regulating de 
vice C, made of metal, and having the regul 
larly rounded or curved head c and the thread 
ed shank c', all substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a hammer-stem, the 
hammer-elevator B, and the curved or rounded 
metallic bumper C, arranged between the ham 
mer-stem and the hammer-elevator and fast 
ened to one of them, and adapted to contact 
with a rounded or curved leather or cloth 
covered bumper or projection upon the other, 
all substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
9O 
SO 
95 
FRANCIS ST. AMANT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293469.txt	- 
-- 
G, JAQUITH, 
CLOTHING FOR PULLEYs, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1884, 
Z 22, Z 
 
 
 
 
. 
- - - 22 
(No Model.) 
. 
. 
. 
No. 293,469. 
  
a. 
2- - - 
 
(e...s 64 
Ele 
fir?t 
se 
. 
. 
. 
. 
42 
" E 
(Luly 6 
ATTORNEYs, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GILMAN JAQUITH, OF 
MAYSVILLE, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR TO JANUARY & 
WOOD, OF SAME PLACE. 
Clothi NG FOR PULLEYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,469, dated February 12, 1884, 
Application filed July 20, 1883. (No model.) 
- 
To adzuhon, it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, GILMAN JAQUITH, of 
Maysville, in the county of Mason and State of 
Kentucky, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Clothing for Pulleys, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This invention mainly has reference to 
small pulleys having rapid motions, including 
the small pulleys or whirls on bobbin and 
other spindles, when driven by flat bands or 
ribbons arranged to run between flanges or 
protuberances on the sides of the pulley. 
The object of the invention is to produce 
increased friction on the driving - surface of 
the pulley and better bite or hold for the band, 
thereby preventing slipping of the band with 
out having resort to tightening up the same. 
This result I accomplish by first cutting or 
forming a female thread around the driving 
surface of the pulley, which may be of metal, 
then applying to said surface a composition 
coating in a heated or soft condition, prefer 
ably of pitch and glue or other like sub 
stances, next winding strong thread around 
such spirally-grooved and coated surface of 
the pulley, and afterward applying to the ex 
terior of the thread-covering an outer thin 
coating of the composition, although this sec 
ond coating may be omitted, if desired. This 
clothing, when dry or hard-that is, after the 
composition has set-will be found to have 
the desired effect, the thread combining with 
the composition to produce it, and the thread 
being prevented from getting loose or slip 
ping, in part by the spirally - grooved sur 
face of the pulley, within which the thread 
Wedges, and in part by the composition. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar lettel's of reference indicate 
- 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a partly-sectional side 
view of a pulley having my improved cloth 
ing applied; Fig. 2, a section of the same on 
the line at a in Fig. 1; and Fig. 3, a sectional 
View, upon a larger scale, of a portion of the 
pulley, showing the spiral groove in the driv 
ing-surface thereof and the thread as wound 
thereon and therein, with composition hold 
ing the same. 
55 
A is the body of the pulley, which may be 
of metal, and have side flanges, bb, of any de 
sired shape and construction. The exterior 
of its body, on which the driving-band runs, 
may either be straight, slightly convex, or 
concave, and has a V-shaped female thread 
or spiral groove, s, formed or cut therein and 
around it, said groove being of a width to 
correspond with the size of the thread. On 6o 
this grooved surface I apply, by a brush, an 
adhesive composition, while hot or in a suffi 
ciently soft condition to be so worked, and on 
or around this coating c, before the same has 
fully set, spirally wind within the female 
thread sewing or other strong thread or twine, 
forming a fine, close, circular or spiral rib 
like covering, d, after which another thin coat 
ing, e, of the composition may be applied by 
brush to and around the exterior of the thread 
covering; or this second coating may be alto 
gether omitted, if desired. 
The adhesive composition which I prefer 
to use for the coating or coatings, and which 
serves to bind or hold the thread, is made of 75 
pitch and glue in about equal proportions, 
more or less. When fully set, the clothing 
presents a pulley-surface that will have all the 
necessary friction and hold to prevent the 
band from slipping, and will be found both 
durable and cheap. The spiral groove Saround 
the pulley is an important factor in the con 
struction, inasmuch as it not only directs and 
facilitates the close winding of the thread d 
around the pulley, but, by the thread wedg 
ing within the same materially aids the com 
position in holding the thread to its place. 
I do not abandon or dedicate to the public 
any patentable feature set forth herein and 
not hereinafter claimed, but reserve the right 
to claim the same either in a reissue of any 
patent that may be granted upon this appli 
cation or in other applications for Letters Pat 
ent that I may make. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
. 
Patent, is- 
1. A clothing for Whirls and pulleys, com 
posed of an adhesive composition applied to 
the band-driving surface of the pulley, and a 
spirally-wound thread or twine covering 
around the same, arranged to enter a female 
- 
90 
95 
Ico. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
- 
293,469 
same and within said female thread or groove, 15 
5 glue, and a covering, d, of thread or twine 
thread in the driving surface of the pulley, thread or twine wound spirally around the 
substantially as specified. 
2. A clothing for whirls and pulleys, con- and an outer adhesive coating, e, substantially 
sisting of a coating, c, composed of pitch and as Specified. 
4. A whirl or pulley having a spirally 
wound spirally around the same, and within grooved driving-surface and a clothing com 
a female thread cut in or formed around the posed of an adhesive composition and spi. 
driving-surface of the pulley, essentially as rally-wound thread or twine, essentially as 
described. 
IO 3. A clothing for whirls and pulleys, con- 
sisting of an adhesive coating, c, applied to 
the band-driving surface of the pulley, hay- 
ing a female thread, s, in it, a covering, d, of 
GILMAN JAQUITH. 
shown and described. 
Witnesses: 
A. GREGORY, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293569.txt	(No. Model) 
. 
No. 293,569. 
- 
I. S. FILBERT, 
SNOW PLOW. 
Patented Feb. 12, 1884, 
A7aye7 foa. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC. S. FILBERT, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
SNOW-PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,569, dated February 12, 1884. 
Application filed July 27, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
My invention has for its object to so con- 
To all whom it inval/ concern: 
the landside, and the rear ends are joined and 
Be it known that I, ISAAC. S. FILBERT, a braced by a brace or back-piece, C, the gen 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wash-eral design being, as clearly shown at Fig. 2, 
ington city, District of Columbia, have in- a right-angle triangle. 
vented new and useful Improvements in Snow- 
In practice I have joined the mold-board, 
Plows, of which the following is a specification. landside, and back in such manner with a 
My invention relates to certain new and use- suitable bottom to form a triangular box with 
ful improvements in Snow-plows, and partic- a cross-brace or partition, D, and posts E, the 
ularly to that class designed for cleaning the rear portion of the box forming a receptacle 
gutters, or those portions of the streets adja- for stones or other suitable weights, F, de 
signed to hold the bottom of the plow in con 
Cent to the curbs. 
It is well known that as a result of the tact with the surface of the street or gutter. 
cleaning of the foot-pavements by occupants 
G is a beam arranged at right angles to the 
of houses along the line thereof the snow is landside of the plow, and extending through 
thrown in the street-gutters and piled up, thus and beyond the mold-board, as clearly shown 
forming a dam against proper drainage of the in both figures of the drawings, and adapted 
Street. These heaps are, when the fall of snow to receive a suitable clevis, H, which is se 
is heavy, of such a character that it is impos- cured to said beam by bolts passing through 
sible to drive the horses attached to any clean- vertical holes a, a series of which may be 
'ing device through them and close to the curb. made to provide for adjustment of the clevis. 
I is a pole or tongue connected to the clevis 
struct a plow that it shall be capable of being Hby a vertical pivot or bolt, b, in such man 
drawn along close to the curb to clean the gut- ner that the pole or tongue is free to swing 
ters, while the draft-horses are free to walk horizontally in the are of a circle, in order 
outside of the snow heaps or embankments; that the horses hitched thereto, may travel out 
and with this end in view my invention con- side of any ridge or bank of snow, while the 
sists of a snow-plow having a straight land-plow remains close to the curb; and in order 
side, adapted to travel close to and in paral- that the pole or tongue may not swing too far 
lelism with the curb of the street, a mold-board outward, and thus cause the heel of the plow 
oblique or at an angle to the landside, forming to swing outward from the curb when resist 
at its junction therewith an acute angle, while ance is offered to the point of the plow, I pro 
the rear end of the landside forms a right vide a guard-chain, J, connected, respectively, 
angle with the back end of the plow, the plow to the pole and point of the plow. This chain 
being provided with a beam projecting from may be of a suitable predetermined length and 
the mold-board and connected with a hinged permanently fastened, or it may be perma 
or swinging tongue, as will be hereinafter nently fastened at one end and adapted to be 
more fully and in detail described. 
adjustably connected at the other. The effect 
In order that those skilled may know how of this chain-connection between the point of 
to make and use my improved plow and fully the plow and the pole or tongue is to counter 
appreciate its advantages, I will proceed to act the tendency of the heel of the plow to 
describe the same, referring by letters to the move away from the curb, as will be fully 
accompanying drawings, in which- 
I have shown the connection J as consisting 
proved plow in proper juxtaposition with the of a chain; but it may be a rigid rod provided 
curb for effective work, and Fig. 2 is a top or with a series of holes, by means of which and a 
plan view of my improved plow. 
drop-bolt the outer end may be adjustably con 
Similar letters of reference denote like parts nected to the tongue, thus forming a rigid con 
in both figures. 
nection, which is desirable in passing street 
A represents the landside of the plow, and crossings, to avoid any sidewise or Wabbling 
Bthe mold-board, which arejoined at the front motion of the plow; either the chain or rigid 
at an acute angle to form the points. The bar, or both, may be used. 
mold-board is of course arranged oblique to 
In operation, when the plow is drawn for 
Figurel represents a perspective of my im- 
underst9od without further explanation. 
- 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
90 
IOO 
293,569 
IO 
15 
ward, the landside A is in contact with the 
curb, the snow is deflected from the curb by 
the oblique mold-board B, and a channel or 
furrow is cleaned equal in extent to the dis 
tance between the rear ends of the mold-board 
and landside. The snow deflected or pressed 
away from the curb has by its weight a reac 
tionary effect, operating to hold the landside 
against the curb, irrespective of the position 
of the draft-horses. 
As before stated, I have in practice formed 
my plow in the shape of a triangular box with 
vertical sides, and loaded it with stones or 
other suitable weighty material, the point and 
bottom being suitably protected by iron shoes; 
but I do not wish to confine myself to these 
details of construction, as the plow proper 
may be made with a curved or rolling mold 
board, and the parts may be made of any suit 
able material and assembled in any proper 
manner, so long as the idea is preserved of a 
landside parallel with the line of draft, a 
mold-board oblique thereto, and a pole or 
tongue connected with the plow in such man 
ner as to admit of the horizontal swinging 
movement, as before explained. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A snow-plow adapted for cleaning Street 
gutters, consisting of a landside, A parallel 
with the line of draft, a mold-board, B, oblique 
thereto, a receptacle for the weights F, and a 
stiff pole, I, connected by a pivoted clevis to 
the beam G., projecting laterally from the mold 
board, substantially as shown and described. 
2. In combination with the plow AB and 
tongue or pole I, connected by pivoted clevis 
to the mold-board in rear of the point of the 
plow, the guard chain or Tod J, having one 
end secured to the point of the plow and the 
other to the pole or tongue in advance of 
clevis attachment, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two Subscribing 
Witnesses. 
ISAACS. FILBERT. 
45 
Witnesses: 
MURRAY HANSON, 
JOSEPH M. WINKLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293669.txt	(Model.) 
No. 293,669. 
 
  
H, PACKER 
CORN SHIELTER, 
2 sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1884. 
17ts gas Vis es ess 
A2ZZzesses." 
 
- ZZzzvezza27: 
-%2%.e. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
H, PACKER 
CORN SHELLER, 
Patented Feb. 19, 1884, 
2 
(Model.) 
No. 293,669, 
2 N N N N 
N Nye 
N 
 
 
NS NIJA 
N 
 
2 
WITWESSES 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARVEY PACKER, OF ROCK FALLS, ASSIGNOR TO THOMAS A. GALT AND 
GEORGE s. TRACY, BOTH OF STERLING, ILLINOIS. 
CORN-SHELLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 293,669, dated February 19, 1884. 
Amplication filed August 21, 1883. 
(Model.) 
To all, w/on, it may conce7n 
the partitions Einto compartments F, of such 
Be it known that...I, HARVEY PACKER, a citi 
width as to receive the ordinary ear of corn 
Zen of the United States, residing at Rock 
when lying lengthwise therein. In the bottom 
Falls, in the county of Whiteside and State of 
f each compartment F is placed the flat lon 
gitudinally-reciprocating bar G, consisting of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Corn-Shellers; and Idohere 
the plate Hand spurs LL, attached at suitable 55 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and | 
intervals lineally on the upper surface thereof. 
The spurs L may be constructed of any suit 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
able shape; but it is preferable that their front 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
walls should be perpendicular, and they should 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
be of sufficient height to readily engage the ears 
to letters or figures of reference marked there 
of corn lying in the compartments F. Any de 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
sired number of compartments F and bars G. 
Myinvention has reference to corn-shellers; 
may be used. The bars G are given a recipro 
and it consists more especially of certain novel 
cating motion to and from the throat of the 
mechanism for feeding the ear - corn to the 
sheller by means of a laterally-bent pitman, N, 
sheller. 
pivotally connected at its frontend to the under 
As the application to the usual shelling de 
side of such bars, and having a crank attach 
vices of my improvements will be obvious, I 
ment at its rear end on the shaft of the main 
do not deem it necessary to show or describe 
picker-wheel; or such bars may be reciprocated 
a complete sheller, but only so much thereof 
in many other obvious ways by divers different 
as will exhibit the application and mode of 
connections to other parts of the machinery of 
operation of my invention. 
the sheller. The bars G are reciprocated either 
together or alternately, as may be preferred. 
Figure 1... is a side elevation of a machine 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan of 
The lower ends of the legs or braces DD are at 
the same. Fig. 3 is a front elevation with the 
tached, respectively, to the corner-post of the 
feed-hopper removed. Fig. 4 is a central ver 
sheller-frame by removable bolt a, passing 
through such post and brace. 
tical longitudinal section. 
Each of the 
A is the main frame of the sheller, contain 
braces D is provided with a series of holes for 
ing the usual shelling devices. 
the reception of the bolta, whereby the front or 
BB are transverse shafts placed, respective 
outer end of the feed-hopper C may be held at 
ly, above and below the throat of the sheller, 
any desired altitude. The bars G have width 
and between which the corn passes to reach 
sufficient to extend laterally entirely over the 
bottom of the compartments F, respectively, 
the shelling mechanism. 
The shafts B B are 
rotated in any suitable manner, so that their 
and as the outer ends of such bars never pass 
adjacent surfaces move in the same direction 
entirely within the hopper C, such bars in 
and toward the shelling devices. 
themselves form a bottom for the hopper C 
C is a feed-hopper, of any desired length, 
from the outer end thereof to the point of outer 
- having one closed and one open end. Thein 
movement of the inner ends of such bars; but 
ner or open end of the hopper C communicates 
without some supplementary provision an open 
with the opening between the shafts B, and is 
interval would exist between the inner ends of 
supported at that end by being suitably at 
such bars G and the sheller. I therefore place 
tached to the front end of the sheller-frame. 
the transverse board d across the bottom of the 
The outer end of the hopper C is supported 
hopper C at the inner end of the latter, which 
by the diagonal legs or braces DD, the lower 
board dextends outwardly under the bars G. 
ends of which are adjustably attached to the 
beyond the point of the outer withdrawal of 
front end of the sheller-frame near the base 
the inner ends of such bars. The board d ex 
of the latter. The bottom of the feed-hopper tends inwardly nearly to the inner end of the 
C is divided longitudinally by the partition or hopper C, and there forms a close junction 
- 
75 
95 
so 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
293,669 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
75 
1. In a 
all shelled corn in the hopper C is discharged 6o 
with a board, MI, (without openings therein,) 
extending diagonally downward and inward down over the board M into the sheller, and . 
from the inner edge of the board d to the in- cleaned and discharged with the corn shelled 
terior of the sheller. Therefore the bars G, thereby. . 
board d, and board M. collectively formanen-Fourth. In the operation of my invention . . 
. . 
tirely-closed bottom for the hopper C, and a the back action and jar of the bars tend to give 65 
continuous platform for the passage of the the overriding ears a backward movement, 
I grain, extending from the outer end of such and it is only the lower stratum of ears which 
hopper to the interior of the sheller. The have a continuously forward progress, so that 
Io board d forms the support for the inner ends the discharge into the throat of the machine is 
of the reciprocating bar's G, and the residue of more uniform than heretofore and of but one 7o 
such bars is supported by transverse stripse, stratum of ears. 
fastened at suitable intervals to the bottom of What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
the hopper C. The partitions E are attached secure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
between the bars G to the stripse and board is-i 
corn-sheller, the compartments F, 
d. The outer or front end of the pitman N is 
having a width, but slightly greater than the 
pivotally attached to the lower side of the 
s 
transverse diameter of the ears of corn, the 
I bars G in one of the intervals between the 
bars G, arranged in compartments F, and pro 
strips e, such interval being of sufficient width 
vided with spurs L, in combination with means 
to permit the reciprocating movement of such 
for imparting to said bars reciprocating move 
point of attachment. 
ment in the line of Such sheller, Substantially 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
as shown, and for the purpose described. 
The ear-corn is shoveled into the hopper C at 
2. The combination of the hopper C, com 
or near its outer end, and by the joint action 
partments F, partitions E, and the reciprocat 
of thesides of such hopper, the partition E, and 
ing bars G, the whole placed and operating in 8 
bars G the ears of corn are adjusted length 
the line of such sheller, substantially as shown, 
wise in such hopper, and by the intermittent 
and for the purpose specified. 
forward action of the bars G delivered between 
3. In a corn-sheller, the feed-hopper C, hav 
the transverse shafts BB, and by means of the 
ing its outer end adjustable vertically, and 
provided with the partitions E and compart 
The advantages of my invention are several: 
ments IF, the bars G, arranged to reciprocate 
First. The feed, while it is continuous, is not 
so positive or rigid as in the usual sprocket 
in the line of such sheller, and the transverse 
shafts B, incombination Substantially as shown, 
chain feed, as in the propulsion given the ear. 
and for the purpose mentioned. . 
by the bar. G the ear passes slightly ahead of 
I 
4. In a corn-sheller, the combination of the 
the spurs upon the bar, and may retire some 
hopper C, provided with partitions E and 
what if the interval of entrance be insufi 
compartments F, the board ML, the bars G, 
cient at the time. 
and means for imparting to such bars recipro 
Second. By reason of the ability to alter the 
height of the outer end of the feed-hopper it 
cating motion in the line of such sheller, sub 
stantially as shown, and for the purpose de 
is rendered practicalble to regulate the feed, be 
cause the more incline given to the feed-hopper 
Scribed. 
5. The hopper C, provided with a closed 
the less rapidly will the bars G discharge the 
bottom, consisting of the bars G and board d, 
corn into the sheller. In former feeds the in 
clination of the feed-hopper was immaterial, 
in combination with the board M. and a corn 
sheller, relatively arranged as hereinbefore 
because the action of the elevating devices was 
described, whereby an uninterrupted and en 
continuous and carried the corn with a posi 
tirely closed surface is provided for the pas 
tive forward movement. 
Sage of the loose corn from such hopper to 
Third. In all elevators or feeds in which an 
endless apron or carrying-chain is employed a 
such sheller, substantially as shown, and for 
the purpose specified. 
sufficient opening in the bottom of the hop 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
per at its upper end was necessary to permit 
presence of two witnesses. 
the passage of the carrying devices and their 
upward projections, and through such open 
ings the shelled corn, which was intermixed 
with the ears or shelled in the operation of 
shoveling into the hopper, would drop and fail 
to reach the cleaning mechanism of the sheller, 
and was often wasted, while in my invention 
O latter conveyed into the shelling devices. 
JoHN B. WARD, 
W. S. FERGUSON. 
HARVEY PACKER. 
Witnesses: 
I IO 
OO 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293769.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 293,769. 
 
 
P. NORDEN. 
MUFF, 
Patented Feb. 19, 1884. 
a - % Y 
;, EW a 
75% 3. 
2 
w 
 
 
% W2; % E. W.7 SW 
W. 31% a 
W % 
% % 
LE, 
  
%roor. 
4%%. 
Zzzzzzzer. 
2, 33. 
parts. Peto-Lithographer, Washistor, c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIPP NORDEN, OF LEIPSIC, GERMANY. 
MUFF. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,769, dated February 19, 1884. 
m 
Application filed May 25, 1883. (No model.) 
To prevent the soiling of the exterior of the 35 
To all, whom, it inctly concern 
Be it known that I, PHILIPP NORDEN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city of Leipsic, in Germany, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Muffs, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
arrangement of a bag to a muff, for the pur 
pose of using the same for warming the feet. 
while traveling. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front view of a muff open to be used as a 
foot-Warmer. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the 
same. Fig. 3 is an end view of the same. Figs. 
4, 5, and 6 are front view, section, and per 
spective end view of a muff without the foot 
bag attachment. 
A is the muff, with the usual opening, B, for 
the hands. On one side of this muff a pocket, 
T, is made, for the purpose hereinafter de 
Scribed, and on the opposite side a large bag 
shaped opening, S, for the insertion of the 
feet. The material forming the outside of the 
opening S is made with an elongation, V, of 
Such a length as to pass around the other side described. 
of the muff, and is fastened by means of its 
loops a a to buttons b, attached to the body of 
the muff. On the opposite side of the open 
ing a projection, v, is provided, to act as a 
strap for pulling the muff over the feet when 3o 
the same is used as a foot-warmer, and in which 
use the elongation V will cover up some dis 
tance of the limbs, keeping at the same time 
that part of the body warm. 
muff, a suitable covering may be made, which, 
when the muff is used for the hands, can be 
carried in the pocket T; but that part of the 
muff where said pocket T is situated does 
not require to be covered with that finemate- 4o 
rial usually used for covering muffs, but that 
material need only be placed at the outside of 
that part of the muff where the bag S is ar 
ranged and at the outside of the elongated. 
part V, as this elongated part will be turned 45 
around the other part of the muff, when the 
same is used for the hands, as above described. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
In combination with a muff, A, the pocket 5o 
or bag-shaped opening S, with the elongated 
part V, and projection or strap40, arranged to 
operate as and for the purpose substantially as 
PHILIPP NORDEN. 
25 
- 
Witnesses: 
G. J. MLLER, 
A. F. ASTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293869.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. HARMAN & H. G., SKIDMORE, 
No. 293,869, 
WATCH CASE, 
Patented Feb. 19, 1884, 
12-4- 
Aziz 5-giga 2 
26246-4-4 
11 
6 
Azzzzz A7. 
&\\\\Sosnow 
onaco (i. Skidm's 
37-yaw No. 425's. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT 
C. WESLEY HARMAN AND HORACE G. SKIDAIORE OF (INCIN NATI, OHIO. 
WATCH-CASE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 293,869, dated February 19, 1884. 
Applieation filed November 21, 1883. 
(No model.) 
5 5 
IO 
15 
- 
5 
To all Luhon, it may concer, 
Be it known that we, C. WESLEY HARMAN 
and HORACE G. SKIDMORE, both of Cincin 
nati, Hamilton county, Ohio, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Watch 
Movement Boxes, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Our invention relates to an inclosing box or 
shell for a watch-movement so constructed as 
to be completely and permanently dust and 
moisture proof, and to constitute, from and 
after completion of the movement, a protecting 
envelope thereto for storage or shipment, and 
finally as a constituent part of the completed 
Watch, whose mechanism thus becomes her 
metically sealed, irrespective of any dust-proof 
qualities of the external case, and whether 
such case be, in fact, dust-proof or not. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of our movement-box 
viewed on its frontside. Fig. 2 is a perspec 
tive view of the same without the front cover. 
Fig. 3is a profile of thering or body, taken on its 
rear side. Fig. 4 is a real view of the box in 
place within a watch-case, portions of the rear 
cover being broken away to expose a pair of 
fastening-screws, of which one is shown in the 
effective orlocking position. Fig.5is a section 
on the line a y 2 of Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is an en 
larged representation of the cover-fastenings. 
Fig. 7 is an enlarged representation of one of 
the locking-screws. 
A may represent the central rim ( center') 
of the external watch-case, of any customary 
or suitable style or patterm. 
B is an annular piece of metal that consti 
tutes the body of our movement box o' shell. 
That margin of said body which in use corre 
sponds to the dial. or front face of the move 
ment has a step or labbet, b, Spiral grooves 
b' in which receive studs c, that project from 
the metallic portion (bezel) C of the front 
cover, CD, of the said box, in which D rep 
resents the glass or crystal. The action of 
said studs in said grooves is such that a short 
turn to the right of said cover closes it down 
hermetically upon said body... The rear edge 
of said body has a rabbet, l', which, fitting 
against lip at of the Watch-case proper, serves 
to support the movement-box in the said case, 
and has concentrically within said rabbet an 
. 
3 5 
45 
| other rabbet, b", spiral grooves b in which 
receive studs c, that, projecting inwardly from 
the lear cover, C, enable its attachment to the 
body in the same manner as that described for 
the front cover. A small hole, b, in the in 
ner wall of the body, near its front edge, re 
ceives the customary projection from the move 
lment-frame to prevent any circumferential 
shift thereof. For a like purpose the move 
ment-box has an external projection or stud, 
b', to occupy the notch ( (see Fig. 5) in the ex 
ternal case, which, in the customary form of 
watches, receives the aforesaid projection from 
the movement. To prevent the thus-inserted 
movement-box dropping out through the front 
of the Watch-case, we tap into the body B two 
half-head Screws, e d', which, when placed in 
the position that e is shown in, permit the in 
Sertion into the Watch-case of the movement 
box, and which, when placed in the position 
that e' is shown in, serve to lock said box se 
curely to the case. 
Such of our boxes as are intended for stem. 
Windel's may have a circular orifice, F, closed 
temporarily by a plug, G. Through this ori 
fice (after removal of the plug) the winder 
stem is inserted. A similar olifice may be 
provided in the lear cover, C, for the key-pipe 
in key-winding movements; but we prefer to 
leave this perforation for the jeweler to make 
when applying the movement-box to its pel'. 
lmanent case. The construction will be seen 
to be such as to permit removal of either cover 
CD or C and of the movement itself without 
removing the body B from its place in the 
Watch-case. 
The above-described preferred form of our 
invention may be varied in Solme of its details. 
For example, either or both covers may be at 
tached to the body by screw-threads. A glazed 
bezel, like CD, may be substituted for the all 
metal cover C. The shoulder which supports 
the movement-box within the case proper may 
be located near the fi'ont instead of at the real' 
of Said case. 
Sc) 
We claim as new and of Oul invention 
1. A movement-holding ring for watches, 
adapted to be held from movement in the case. 
center, and having the bezel and back secured 
to it by being turned on, as by a screw or bay 
onet-joint connection, So that access can be 
IOC) 
293, S69 
2 
had to the movement without removing it from nular body B, having rabbets b b'l', the spiral 
the case-center, said ring being adapted for grooves l', the hole b, and the stud b", and I5 
use as a movement-holding box, as set forth. 
the covers CD and C, turned thereon inde 
2. The watch-movement box or receptacle pendently of the case-center, having studs c 
5 in three parts, consisting of annular body B, to engage in the spiral grooves, as set forth. 
In testimony of which invention we here 
having rabbets b l'b'", the spiral grooves b, 
the hole b", and the stud b, in combination unto set our hands. 
with the separately-attached covers CD and 
C, having inwardly-extending studs c, as and 
3. The combination of a watch-case center, 
A having recess a' and lip (t, a movement box 
or receptacle in three pieces, consisting of an 
IO for the purpose set forth. 
Attest: 
- 
GEO. H. KNIGHT, 
SAMIL. S. CARPENTER. 
W 
to:REY SFSR, 
"W 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US293969.txt	(Model.) 
No. 293,969. 
E. LEONARD, 
CORSET, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
I 
Patented Feb. 19, 1884, 
Art?raesses 
eye?, 
t 
 
- 
Madeva?or 
4y co-azz-4ta 
Az Zarzer A. govaar 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithgsapher. Washington, D.C. 
(Model.) 
No. 293,969, 
E. LEONARD, 
CORSET, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 2 
Patented Feb. 19, 1884, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SSSSSSSSSSKS 
 
 
i. Peters. Phatt-Lithographer, Washingto... e. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELMER LEONARD, OF BRIDGEPORT, ASSIGNOR TO L. HARVEY LOOMER AND 
ANDREW F. LOOMER, BOTH OF BIRMINGHAM, CONNECTICUT. 
CO RSET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 293,969, dated February 19, 1884. 
Application filed September 28, 1883. 
(Model. 
Be it known that I, ELMER LEONARD, a its shape, which causes sagging. 
To all whom it nay concern : 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bridge 
port, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Corsets; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
. My invention relates to certain novel and 
useful improvements in corsets, and has for 
its object to provide a hip-piece which shall 
be constructed Without any horizontal Stitch 
ing or boning, thereby greatly facilitating its 
manufacture and cheapening the cost, while 
at the same time great flexibility is obtained; 
and with these ends in view my invention 
consists in providing a central perforated pl 
and cording the same transversely, then stitch 
ing in the proper stay for the bones, and bon 
ing vertically through shirr-pockets formed 
by stitching through the several plies, all 
as will be hereinafter fully and in detail ex 
plained, and then specifically designated by 
the claim. 
In order that those skilled in the art to 
which my invention appertains may under 
stand more fully its construction and adapta 
tion, I will proceed to describe the same in 
detail, referring by letters to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming a part of this specifica 
tion, in which 
Figure 1 is a view illustrating a female fig 
ure with my improved corset fitted thereto; 
Fig. 2, a view of the central perforated ply 
with the cording therein partially completed; 
Fig. 3, a view showing the bones inserted 
within the vertically-stitched shirr-pockets; 
Fig. 4, a vertical section taken at the line a 
ac of Fig. 2, and Fig. 5 a transverse section 
taken at the line y y of Fig. 3. 
Similar letters denote like parts in the sev 
eral figures of the drawings. 
Prior to my invention hip-pieces for cor 
sets have been boned Within transversely 
stitched shirr-pockets; but while flexibilit 
to a considerable degree has been thereby ob t 
55 
The cord is run through 7o 
C is the cord which is run through the per 
E is a stay-pocket stitched onto the said 
tained the corset frequently cockles and loses 
Also, the 
bones have been inserted in shirr-pockets so 
as to cross each other diagonally, and in this 
case they eventually crowd each other so as to 
E. out the stitches, and thereby become use 
eSS 
In constructing my improvement, I perfo 
rate the under-arm' and shoulder pieces 
A B before or after they are stitched together, 
as may be found most convenient. These per 
forations may be stamped out with a die or 6o 
made simply with an awl or punching-tool. 
forations in the central ply, D. 
ply, as shown at Fig. 2, and within which the 65 
upper ends of the bones are inserted. 
F are the shirr-pockets, made by vertical 
Stitching through the outside ply, H, central 
ply, D, and inside ply, I, and G the bones 
inserted therein. 
the perforations in the ply D, as hereinbe 
fore set forth, the stay-pocket E is stitched 
on said ply, and the outside and inside plies, 
HI, secured thereto by means of vertical rows 
of stitches, forming pockets F. The bones 75 
are then inserted within said pockets up into 
the stay-pocket E. The upper portions of 
the under-arm and shoulder pieces are stiff 
ened, and kept in shape by bones extending 
diagonally across the Said pieces, the pecu 
liarity of this boning being that each piece 
does not have a separate series of bones ex 
tending diagonally toward each other. 
I have found by actual experiment that by 
boning this particular part in the manner 85 
specified and shown the corset will stand more 
strain and wear at this point without break 
ing down. 
By the use of my improvement, I am en 
abled to do away with stitching in two direc 
tions, while at the same time all the strain 
on the bones is exerted upon the latter in 
the direction of their length, and the cording 
transversely serves to retain the shape of the 
COrSet. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
90 
95 
5 
IO 
I5. 
25 
35 
45 
2 
293,969 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
In a corset, the central ply of the hip-sec 
tion, perforated and corded transversely, as 
5 described, and secured within the outside and 
inside plies by stitches extending vertically, 
whereby vertical pockets are formed between 
the rows of stitches for the insertion of the 
bones, substantially as shown and set forth. 
Intestimony whereof I affix my signature in Io 
presence of two witnesses. 
ELMER LEONARD. 
Witnesses: 
F. W. SMITH, Jr., 
S. S. WILLIAMSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294069.txt	(No Model.) , 
- 
No. 294,069, 
A cy.z. 
D. W. PAYNE & C. R. WILLIAMS. 
STEAM GOVERNOR OR SHIFTING ECCENTRIC, 
Patented Feb. 26, 1884, 
 
 
  
2 
%2- I T 
15% 
TLE, g 
3.SSE3, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
1DAVID W. PAYNE AND CHARLES R. WILLIAMS, OF CORNING, NEW YORK, 
ASSIGNORS TO B. W. PAYNE & SONS, OF SAME PLACE. 
STEAM - GOVERNOR OR SHIFTING ECCENTR. C. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 294,069, dated February 26, 1884. 
Application filed February 24, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
To all whom it inctly concert : 
Be it known that we, D. W. PAYNE and 
CHARLEs R. WILLIAMs, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Corning, in the county of 
Steuben and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Steam 
Governors or Shifting Eccentrics, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
Our invention relates to that class of shift 
ing eccentrics which are employed as govern 
ors for steam-engines, and which comprise in 
their construction means for giving to the 
main or valve operating eccentric an angular 
motion relative to the shaft upon which it is 
mounted, said means consisting in some in 
stances of a carriage upon which said eccentric 
is secured, and both being slotted for the em 
bracement of the shaft to permit angular move 
ment of the carriage and eccentric, while in 
other instances the main eccentric. has been 
mounted upon a secondary eccentric; and in all 
instances above indicated centrifugal weights 
and counterbalancing-springs have been em 
ployed. 
Our improvements have reference to this 
class of governors or eccentrics, and their na 
ture, operation, advantages, and novelty will 
be hereinafter fully described and specifically 
set forthin the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion, Fig. 2 a horizontal section, and Fig. 3 
a detail, of a governor or shifting eccentric 
constructed in accordance With our invention. 
Fig. 4 is a detail showing interior bearing 
surfaces which do not project bodily or ab 
ruptly inward, as hereinafter described. 
Like letters refer to like parts in all the 
figures. 
A represents a wheel (or it may be any suit 
able frame-work adapted to the operative ele 
ments employed) secured to the shaft B. 
Adjacent to the hub of wheel A is rotatably 
mounted and secured against longitudinal 
movement by a collar, B, a secondary eccen 
tric, C, which in this instance is a single cast 
ing comprising the eccentric and two oppo 
sitely-projecting lugs, c, e, adapted to be piv 
otally connected with links D, which are in 
So like manner connected with weights E, secured 
to arms F, pivotally secured to the frame-work 
35 
45 
55 
In constructing our governor the fitting of 75 
or wheel, as at f. The links D may be con 
nected with either the weights or arms. Re 
tractile springs G are secured to the arms F 
at f', and adjustably connected to the frame 
work' or wheel in any suitable place, as at 9. 
As thus far described, it will be seen that as 
the shaft and wheel or frame-work revolve 
with varying velocity, the weights E are, by 
centrifugal force, thrown more or less away 6c 
from the center of motion and against the ten 
sion of the springs G, and by means of the 
links D and lugs c the eccentric C is caused to 
rotate slightly upon the shaft, its center being 
moved from a to y, thus projecting its longest 65 
radius from the shaft and toward the line of 
motion of the valve-stem, which line may be 
assumed, as at a, b, a central horizontal line 
through Fig. 1. 
Upon the secondary eccentric C is mounted 7 
the main or valve-operating eccentric H, the 
inner bearing of which in this instance com 
prises solely two projections, h, arranged op 
posite each other. 
the main upon the secondary eccentric requires 
merely the planing off of the faces of projec 
tions h h, and thus reducing the cost of manu 
facture in this respect and securing desired 
advantages in operation and use, as hereinaf 
ter set forth. The main eccentric His pivot 
ally suspended to the wheel or frame-work in 
this instance, at i, by an arm, I, which permits 
a movement of the eccentric only in a direc 
tion across the shaft and line of movement in 
substantially a line at right angles thereto. 
Whenever the link I and longer radius of the 
inner eccentric, C, coincide with Orare brought 
into the line (ab) of motion, said radius pro 
jects into the space between the bearings or go 
projections h h. A third retractile spring 
may, if desired, be secured to the eccentric H, 
or to the arm I and to the wheel or frame 
Work, to take up any wear or looseness of the 
eccentrics upon each other. 
It is apparent that when the secondary ec 
centric is operated by the weights and links, 
as above described, the main eccentric as well 
as the valve, connected therewithin any of the 
well-known modes, are also affected in their Ioo 
operation-that is to say, the point of cut-off 
is automatically varied as the labor required 
95 
294,069 
of the engine is increased or diminished. As centric, may be substituted therefor; but we 
shown in Fig. 1, the eccentric Hhas its great 
deem such and similar variations as compre 
est travel with an existing tendency to in 
hended by our invention. 
creased speed of rotation, arising from a re 
The modification shown in Fig. 4 has been 
duction in the amount of labor required of the 
heretofore used in connection with gearing 
engine or otherwise, whereby the weights are 
formed integral with the inner eccentric, which 
thrown out and the eccentric H is carried in 
gearing has been operated by hand to valry the 
the direction from a to y more or less, and 
position of the main eccentric, and so far the 
the Valveis thereby operated to secure a proper 
same is disclaimed as of our invention. 
regulation of the admission of steam into the 
Having described our invention and its op 
cylinder in accordance with the labor to be 
eration, what we claim is 
performed. An increase of steam-pressure 
1. An eccentric provided with interiorly 
produces a like action of the elements of the 
projecting bearing-surfaces, as h h, substan 
governor, and an opposite action thereof oc 
tially as specified. 
curs when reduced speed of rotation is occa 
2. The combination of an outer eccentric 
Sioned by an increase of the labor required or 
having interiorly-projecting bearings hl. With 
by a reduction in the pressure of steam. By 
an inner eccentric mounted loosely upon a 
suspending the eccentric from the frame-work 
shaft, and having a continuous bearing upon 
Or wheel all movements of the same, except at 
said interiorly-projecting bearings, substan 
right angles to the line of motion, are avoided, 
tially as specified. 
and this, in connection with the constant con 
3. The combination of an outer eccentric 
tact of the Secondary eccentric, so far relieves 
adapted to be suspended to a wheel or disk, 
the Springs from the resistance of the valve 
and provided with interiorly-projecting bear 
Stem that they have only the function of coun 
ing-surfaces arranged opposite each other and 
terbalancing the Weights to perform, and may 
on opposite sides of the line of suspension, 
thus be much lighter than hitherto, where, in 
with an inner eccentric mounted loosely upon 
slotted eccentrics and similar devices, in order 
the shaft and adapted to bear continuously 
to overcome the strong tendency to jumping, 
- upon said oppositely-located bearings, and to 
irregularity of motion, and vibrating or trem 
be automatically rotated upon said shaft, sub 
bling of the eccentric against the shaft, the 
stantially as specified. 
Springs have been necessarily of very strong, 
4. The combination of a shaft, and an inner 
heavy material and high tension. The pro 
eccentric mounted loosely thereon and connect 
jections h upon the inner bearing of the main 
ed to centrifugal weights, with an outer eccen 
eccentric aid materially in securing a film 
tric mounted upon said innel eccentric, sus 
ness of construction, which obviates all tend 
pended upon a wheel or disk and connected 
ency to such a vibration of the eccentric. 
with the valve, substantially as specified. 
If desired, many minor variations in the con 
5. The combination of the wheel A, shaft 
struction of the parts may be made. Com 
B, eccentric C, and eccentric H, having inte 
pressible instead of retractile springs G may 
riorly - projecting bearings h h, substantially 
be employed. The projections h h may be of 
as specified. 
steel or other suitable bearing material, and 
6. The combination of the wheel A, shaft B, 
made separate from and dovetailed into the 
and eccentric C, having lugs c c, connected to 
main eccentric, and secured therein adjustably 
centrifugal weights, with eccentric H, having 
to take up the natural wear thereof; or said 
interiorly-projecting bearings h h, and arm I, 
projections may be formed of, set into, or se 
substantially as specified. 
cured upon, the secondary eccentric and adapt 
7. The combination of wheel A, shaft B, 
ed to fit a continuous eccentrical contour or 
centrifugal weights E, links D, and springs G, 
bearing formed in the main eccentric. So far 
with eccentrics Cand H, the latter having in 
as relates to the particular form of eccentrics 
ternal projections, h. h, and an alm, I, pivot 
herein shown as adapted to each other, the pro 
ally secured to the wheel, substantially as 
jections being upon either of the two, they are 
shown and described. 
of themselves sufficient as independent ele 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
lments for operation jointly with other centrifu 
gal weights and Springs than those constructed 
and arranged as herein shown; and also the 
suspended eccentric may be set aside and one 
not so suspended, but adapted by projections 
to be in constant contact with a secondary ec 
w 
DAVID. W. PAYNE. 
CHARLES R. WILLIAMS. 
E. C. POND, 
CEIAS. W. HUCHINS, 
in presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
SO 
90 
95 
OO 
IO5 - - - - - 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294169.txt	(No Model.) 
A. G. WATER HOUSE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
REGULATOR FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES, 
No. 294,169, 
Patented Feb. 26, 1884, 
Az Z. 
a 
: Gls 
N 
3 
 \\ . 
2 
-- 
a s 
3-4 
TN 
is 
4, 
3 
=\ 
i. 
Z%. 2 
-- 
= 
 
 
 
1722 esses: 
as?er 
-z. gZ 7 
Z724veez722. 
2/73 2% 
4-4. zorzvez. 1644 /A-7--1-2-241-24 
N. PETERS Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
A. G. WATER HOUSE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
REGULATOR FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINEs. 
No. 294,169, 
Patented Feb. 26, 1884, 
A 267.3 
-saf 
= 
: 
H 
je O 
----- 
- 
- 9 e st 
- ef 
||| 
Errect 
- 
Y. t 
O 
- - -2/ 
- 
A. 
olo 
-- 7 E 
A 
E- 
e 
3. 
- 
- am= 
-6s 
is NH Ho 
s 
------ 
Z 
S S = 
SO 
- 
- 
OA-24 
ZO FE 
a 
s 
E 
G 
= 
-- 
rel 
 
-- 
H 
| El 
J/goesses. 
Z22 ve???or: 
(2.7 
Z27 As p/Z/oroveev, 16-6 2-ce--- 
N: Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
A. G. WATER HOUSE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
REGULATOR FOR, DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES. 
No. 294,169, 
Patented Feb. 26, 1884, 
J/2/22 (SSCS. 
 
Z222/e/7/07: 
e-7-2 2%-44/e 
2 
-4%rs 17272/wee. 162, 2-z-ea-21 
F. PETERS. Photo-ilhagraphur, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADDISON G. WATERHOUSE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR, BY AIESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE SCHUYLERELECTRIC LIGHT COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
REGUATC R F OR DYNAMO EEC TRC JAC - NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 294,169, dated February 26, 1884. 
Application filed June 12, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
To all, uhon, it may conce77 : 
Be it, known that I, ADDISON G. WATER 
HOUSE, a citizen of the United States, and a 
resident of New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Regul 
lators for Dynamo-Electric Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the regulation or 
adjustment of the currents of dynamo-electric 
machines to suit changes in the external re 
sistance; and it consists in a novel combina 
tion of apparatus, whereby the polarity of the 
field-of-force pole-pieces may be shifted or dis 
torted so as to vary the electro-motive force 
of the current generated by the armature. 
In carrying out my invention, I propose to 
vary the distribution of the current magnetiz 
ing the field-of-force magnets, without, how 
ever, increasing or diminishing the total mag 
netizing-current in such a way as to cause a 
shifting or distorting of the consequent points 
in the field-magnet, or the points of greatest 
lmagnetization. 
My invention is distinguished from other 
regulators, in that the total magnetizing-cur 
rent flowing in the field-magnet coils of my 
machine is constant; but its distribution in 
the Several coils is varied, so as to cause a 
shifting of the consequent points, whereas in 
other inventions the strength of the magnet 
ism is varied by increasing or diminishing the 
magnetizing influences that work upon the 
field-magnet core to produce magnetism there 
in. The shifting or distortion of the magnet 
ism, or of the consequent points, may be made 
to take place in such a way that the two con 
Sequent points of an ordinary field-magnet 
shall approach to or recede from one another; 
or the two points may be shifted together in 
the same direction, either forward or back, 
according to the necessities of the case. 
Some of the various ways in which my in 
vention may be carried into practice are shown 
in the accompanying drawings. 
Figures 1, 2, and 3 show in skeleton the 
frame of a dynamo-electric machine, and illus 
trate the manner in which the field-magnet 
coils are subdivided to produce the desired ef. 
45 
55 
fect. Fig. 4 illustrates a modified manner of 5o 
carrying out the invention, in which the cur 
rent-distributing apparatus is dispensed with, 
and the desired change in distribution of cur 
rent in the field-magnet coils is effected auto 
matically by the changed relation of the resist 
ances in one set of coils in local or derived cil 
cuit, and the other set of coils in main circuit 
with the working-resistances, which occurs by 
reason of changes in the number of lamps or 
other apparatus in circuit. 
Fig. 5 is a side 
view, partially in section, of a form of a current 
regulator or distributer which governs the dis 
tribution of current in the field-magnet coils. 
Fig. 6 is an edge view of the regulator-magnet, 
Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a diagram illustrating the 
arrangement and connection of the complete 
apparatus. Fig. S is a modified plan of vary 
ing the distribution of magnetizing-current in 
the field-coils. 
Referring to Fig. 1, Aindicates the frame or 
field-of-force magnet of an ordinary dynamo 
electric machine, having the four coils 1, 2, 3, 
and 4 wound thereon in such manner as to pro 
duce the desired consequent poles or points in 
the field-of-force pole-pieces N. S. 
R indicates the current-distributer, to be 
presently described, through which the cul 
rents which pass through the several coils 12 
34 are taken. As will be seen, coils 1 and 2 
are in one branch and 3 4 in another branch. 
The regulator R serves to increase the flow in 
one branch simultaneously and equally with 
decrease in the other, and vice versa. This 
distribution takes place without changing 
the total amount current flowing in the two 
branches. Let it be supposed that the conse 
quent points, or the points of maximum polar 
ity, are on the line (, a, the current flowing 
in the two branches is equal, and the current 
generated by the armature is at its maximum. 
If, now, the current flowing in 3 4 be in 
creased, and the current in 12 be simultane 
ously diminished by R, the consequent points 
will be shifted toward the points b b, and a 
diminution in the electro-motive force of the 
current generated will be effected thereby. 
If, now, the distribution be again changed, so 
as to tend toward an equality of flow in the two 
So 
90 
29A, 169 
TO 
25 
3 5 
40 
55 
branches, the consequent points will change 
back toward their normal point, or the point. 
of greatest efficiency, where the current Sup 
plied by the armature is normal. 
In Fig. 2 coils 1 and 4 are in one branch and 
coils 2 and 3 in the other; but the effect is, 
upon an increase of currentin one branch and a 
simultaneous and equal decreasein the other, to 
shift the consequent points, or points of great 
est magnetization, both in the same direction, 
but away from the line at a, either forward or 
backward, as the case may be. The result is 
to diminish the strength of the current Sup 
plied or generated by the armature. 
In Fig. 3 coils 1, 3, and 4 are supposed to 
be in one branch and coil 2 in the other. The 
same effect of a distortion or shifting of the 
field magnetism would be produced in this 
case, but the arrangement would be some 
what less efficient than in the previous in 
Stancs. 
In the arrangement of Fig. 3 the resistance 
of coil 2 should be as nearly as possible the 
same as that of coils 134. This may be ac 
complished in any desired manner known in 
the art. 
Having described the general principles of 
my invention, I will proceed to describe some 
of the special means that may be employed 
for carrying the same into effect. 
Fig. 5 shows a current-distributing device 
arranged to be operated or controlled by an 
electro-magnet, whereby an automatic regula 
tion may be effected; but it will of course be 
understood that the current-distributer might 
he worked by hand without departing from 
the invention. 
Referring to Fig. 5, C indicates a brass or 
metal tube mounted on a suitable support, 
and D an interior tube or lining of slate, 
Within which are contained two series of car 
bon disks or plates, as indicated, between 
which is supported a lever, E, carrying con 
tact-pins e, bearing against terminal plates of 
the two series, and arranged, as shown, so 
that if it be moved in one direction it will 
compress the one series of plates, thus dimin 
ishing the resistance therein, while simulta 
neously the pressure upon the other series will 
be relieved, thus increasing the resistance in 
the latter series. One series of these plates is 
to be included in one of the field-magnet 
branches, and the other series in the other 
branch. The electrical connections are made 
through the lever E.to the terminal plates ff 
of the two series of carbon resistances, thence 
through either one of the series of carbon 
plates to the terminal plates g, and thence by 
Suitable electrical connections to the field 
magnet coils. 
Hindicates an electro-magnet, whose core 
is provided with the rectangular polar exten 
sions h, acting on an armature, G, to swing 
the same into line with them and parallel to 
the magnetic axis, Said armature being con 
nected by a suitable link, k, with the lever E, 
SO as to act on Said lever in opposition to a 
retracting-spring, l. When the attraction of 
the armature and the spring are balanced, the 
lever E will occupy a central position between 
the two carbon resistances, the resistances will 
be equal, and the flow of current through the 
two field-magnet branches will be the same. 
Electro-magnet H may be connected to the 
working-circuit in any suitable manner, so as 
be affected by changes of working-resistance. 
By preference it is placed in a derived cir 
cuit around the working-resistances. It might, 
however, be placed in direct circuit or ar 
ranged in other ways. 
Fig. 7 shows the circuit connections of the 
magnet, the carbon resistances, and the field 
magnet coils and armatures. 
R. R. R. indicate the working-resistances 
such as electric lamps-and MMI the ordinary 
commutator-brushes of the machine. Mag 
net His included in a branch wire, 5, around 
the working-resistances. The general circuits 
are as follows: Starting from lower commuta 
tor-brush, M, the current divides at 7, one por 
tion passing through coilsland 2, and one set of 
carbon plates, and the other through coils 4 and 
3, and through the other set of carbon plates, to 
lever E, from which connection is made to the 
general circuit containing the lights R. R. and 
back to the other commutator-brush. When 
the whole number of lamps are in circuit, the 
amount of current diverted through magnet 
His just sufficient to keep the magnetism at 
its normal, and of such strength as to hold the 
lever E in position where the resistance of the 
two portions of the current-distributer will be 
equal, and the flow of current in coils 1 2 
will be equal to that in 3 4. The consequent 
points will then be upon the normal line (ta, 
and the armature will generate its proper 
amount of current. If, now, the number of 
lamps be diminished, thus decreasing the re 
sistance, less current will flow in magnet H, 
and the lever E will be acted upon by its re 
tractor in such way as to decrease the flow of 
current in one field-magnet branch and simul 
taneously increase it in the other, so as to 
cause a shifting or distortion of the points of 
greatest magnetization. The effect of this will 
be, as before explained, to cut down the elec 
tro-motive force, to correspond with the dimi 
nution of external resistance. On the other 
hand, if the number of lamps be now increased 
to the original number, more current will flow 
in H, and the distribution of current in the 
two branches will return to its normal. When 
the field-coils are wound in two sets, arranged 
as in Fig. 2, the current-distributer is so ar 
ranged as to shift the consequent points back 
ward, or in the direction reverse to the direc 
tion of revolution of the armature, when the 
number of lamps increases and the electro 
motive force or current strength is to be di 
minished. 
I do not limit myself to any particular meth 
od of distributing or varying the relation of 
75 
SO 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
IIS 
I25 
294,69 
3. 
7 5 
SO 
85 
90 
IOO 
O 
i 15 
O 
the currents flowing in the two branches; and 
I may, instead of varying the resistance in a 
field-magnet circuit, vary the number of mag 
netizing-coils in circuit by such an arrange 
ment as is shown in Fig. S. In this arrange 
ment loop-connections are taken from the field 
magnet coils to sets of insulated plates R. R., 
over which move a circuit-closing arm, S, act 
luated by the core of a magnet, H", or by any 
other suitable means. When the magnet H 
and the retractor for S are balanced, the cir 
cuit-closer S occupies such a position that the 
number of magnetizing-helices in 1 will be the 
same as in 4, the circuit being taken, as indi 
cated, to S, from which it branches to the 
coils 1 and 4 through the contact-plates R'R''. 
If the arm S be moved to one side or the other, 
the number of coils or convolutions in one 
field-magnet bobbin will be increased, while, 
simultaneously, the number in the other will 
be decreased, and the same effects may be pro 
duced as when the flow of current in two coils 
the convolutions of which are all in circuit is 
varied by the adjustable resistance. 
I have herein described the current distrib 
uting device as arranged in direct circuit 
with the field-magnet coils; but it is obvious 
that it might be arranged to shunt or divert 
the current from such coils. I have also de 
scribed the field-magnet coils as in circuit with 
the working-resistances; but they might obvi 
ously be arranged in derived circuit and the 
current distributed through them in the man 
ner herein before set forth. 
To effect an automatic change in the relation 
of magnetizing effects in the vario as field-coils, 
any other means or any other controlling or 
operating devices might be used, provided 
they be properly arranged to respond to va 
riation of resistance in the working-circuit. 
In Fig. 4 the distribution is effected automati 
cally, without the use of resistances or addi 
tional appliances, by merely modifying the 
winding of the field-magnet coils of the ma 
chine. In this case one pair of coils on a field 
magnetis arranged in a derived circuit around 
the working-resistances, and the other in a di 
rect circuit With them. Thus coils 1 and 2 
are in a derived circuit, and coils 3 and 4 in 
the working-circuit, as indicated. The effect 
of this is that when the working-resistance 
diminishes less current flows in coilsland 2 and 
more in coils 3 and 4, so that, all of said coils 
being arranged to produce magnetism in the 
ordinary Way, the consequent points, or points 
of greatest magnetization, will be shifted or 
distorted. If the coils were divided, as in Fig. 
2, and coils 1 and 4 were placed in the derived 
circuit, the effect would be, upon a diminution 
of working-resistance, to shift the consequent 
poles backward in a direction contrary to the 
direction of revolution of the al'mature, and 
the electro-motive force would be diminished 
correspondingly. If, now, lamps or other de 
vices be introduced into circuit, so as to raise 
the resistance to its normal, the flow in 1 and 
4 will increase and in 2 and 3 diminish, thus 
restoring the polar conditions of the magnet 
to their proper state. The coils in the derived 
circuit are of fine wire, and are sufficient to 
produce magnetism, or to have the Salme linag 
netic effect under normal conditions of the 
working-circuit, as the main-circuit coils. In 
this case, as before, it will be observed that the 
regulation is effected, not by changing the 
total magnetizing-current for the field-magnet 
coils, but merely by changing or varying the 
distribution of the magnetism in the field-mag 
net, without necessarily varying its strength. 
I make no specific claim herein to the ar 
rangement shown in Fig. 4, as it forms the 
subject of a separate application for patent 
filed by me June 12, 18S3, Serial No.97, S61. It 
is merely described hereinas illustrating one of 
the ways in which the broad invention herein 
claimed may be carried out. Nor do I make 
any specific claim herein to shifting the Con 
sequent points, or points of greatest magneti 
zation, backward or forward simultaneously in 
the same direction, as this also will be claimed 
specifically in another application, although 
it is one phase of the broad invention hereill 
claimed. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, with a dynamo-electric 
machine having two field-magnetizing current 
coils or sets of coils working in harmony to 
produce the field magnetism in which the ar 
mature moves, of means for increasing one 
magnetizing-current and simultaneously de 
creasing the other magnetizing-current to the 
same extent, so as to keep the total magnetiz 
ing influence of the currents or coils the same, 
whatever the adjustment, but at the Same time 
to shift the poles of the field-magnet. 
2. The combination, with a dynamo-electric 
machine having two paths or circuits in its 
field-magnet carrying currents that actin coll 
junction in producing the field magnetism, of 
means for increasing the flow of the current 
in one circuit and simultaneously decreasing 
the flow in the other to the same extent, with 
out varying the total magnetizing - current, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination, with a dynamo-electric 
machine-having two field-magnet circuits, of 
a reciprocating adjustable resistance device 
interposed in said circuits, and arranged and 
constructed in the manner described, to in 
crease the resistance in one circuit simultane 
ously with producing a decrease in the other, 
without, however, disturbing the total amount 
of current-circulation in the two circliits. 
4. The combination, in a dynamo-electric 
machine, of two field-magnet circuits and all 
automatic current - distributer, whereby the 
magnetizing effects of one circuit may be in 
creased simultaneously with a corresponding 
decrease in the other circuit, as and for the 
purpose described. 
5. The combination, with a dynamo-electric 
machine, of two sets of field-magnet circuits 
65 
 
4 
294,369 
carrying currents that act in conjunction to 
produce the field magnetism in which the ar 
mature moves, and a current-regulator for in 
creasing the magnetizing action in one circuit 
and simultaneously and to the same extent de 
creasing the magnetizing effects in the other, 
and Vice versa. 
6. The combination, with two sets of field 
magnet coils acting in conjunction to produce 
consequent polarity in the field-of-force pole 
pieces, of two adjustable resistances, one for . 
each set, and means for increasing one resist 
ance and simultaneously and to a correspond 
ing extent decreasing the other. 
: 
O 
7. The combination, with two sets of field- I5 
magnet coils, of the two carbon resistances 
and the intermediate pressure-bar, E, as and 
for the purpose described. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 4th day of 20 
June, A. D. 18S3. 
AIDDSON G, WATERHOUSE. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. TOONLEY, 
ERNEST ABSHAGEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294269.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 294,269. 
E. W. QUINCY, 
CHECK ROW CORN PLANTER, 
Patented Feb. 26, 1884, 
 
EC: 
- C.44 
. 
. 
/nventor, 
" a 2. 
1/4 orvey crv7 eled 
... 
Ficy. 2. 
N, PETERS Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EDMUND W. QUINCY, OF PEORIA, ILLINOIS. 
CHECK-ROW CORN-PLANTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 294,269, dated February 26, 1884. 
Application filed September 5, 1883. (No model.) 
s 
5 
IO 
15 
To all, Luhon, it 7ay concern: 
Be it known that I, EDMUND W. QUINCY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Peoria, 
in the county of Peoria and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Check-Row Corn-Planters, of which 
the following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to that class of ma 
chines which are known as check-row corn 
planters, and particularly to pivoted-cup ma 
chines, certain features of my invention being 
applicable to check-row planters generally, 
and other features thereof relating exclusively 
to pivoted-cup machines. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to so 
arrange the parts of the machine that the check 
row cord or line shall enter the machine at one 
side of and clear from the team, and shall pass 
thence in a direct line diagonally across the 
machine-frame, whereby the progress of the 
team drawing the machine shall be unimpeded 
by the check-line, and whereby, also, the re 
sistance of the check-line to the progress of 
the machine shall be reduced to the minimum; 
secondly, the object of my invention is to so 
arrange the seeding mechanism that its mem 
bers actuated by Said diagonally - arranged 
check-line shall be operated thereby in a di 
rect and positive manner; thirdly, my inven 
tion relates to a peculiar and novel arrange 
ment, in a pivoted-cup seeder, for delivering a 
regulated quantity of seed at each discharging 
movement of the seeding devices. 
To the above ends my invention consists in 
a machine constructed and arranged in the 
manner substantially as hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
In order that my invention may be fully un 
derstood, I will proceed to describe it with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure I is a plan view of my improved ma 
chine. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal section 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a vertical longitudinal 
section of the seed-dropping devices. 
In the said drawings, U, U, U, and V desig 
nate the vehicle-frame, and R designates one 
of the shoes (of which there are two-one at . 
either side of the vehicle) upon which the said 
frame is mounted. 
M 
-- 
55 
T designates the tongue, to which the team 
is hitched. 
P designates the check row line, which is 
stretched across the field, and P' designates 
the knots, projections, or enlargements upon 
said line. Upon each of the two forward cor 
ners of the frame is mounted a bracket, S, (one 
of which is shown in Fig. 1) which projects 
obliquely outward and forward, as shown, and 
upon the outer end of which is mounted a pair 
of sheaves or pulleys, O, between which passes 
the line P. Upon the transverse beam U of 
the frame are two pairs of sheaves, O O", each 
pair being situated near one extremity of said 65 
beam, as shown, and the line P passes from the 
sheaves O diagonally acroSS the france and be 
tween the sheaves O'. 
O' designates a similar pair of sheaves, 
mounted upon the rear beam, V, of the frame, 7o 
between which pulleys or sheaves the line P 
passes diagonally from the sheaves O', and 
from thence between a similar set of sheaves 
or pulleys mounted on a sulky-follower. (Not 
here shown.) Thus it will be seen that the 
pulleys or sheaves are arranged in such a way 
that the Wire P passes into the machine par 
allel to the tongue T, but entirely clear of the 
team, and, furthermore, that by this arrange 
ment the twisting strain upon the machine is 
greatly decreased. 
M designates a rock-shaft, which is set trans 
versely of the vehicle-frame in front of the 
rear beam, W, and between it and the beam 
U. This shaft carries two rigidly-attached 
arms or forks, N, having bifurcated and taper 
ing upper ends, as shown. The line P passes 
between the bifurcated end of either arm, and 
the knots Pride over its tapered portion af. 
ter having thrown said bar or fork backward, 
as hereinafter described. Each bar or fork N 
is connected with the transverse beam U by a 
spring, S, which serves to retract said fork to 
its normal position after the passage of the 
knots P. 
L designates an arm or barrigidly attached 
to the shaft M, and extending normally down 
ward and rearward from said shaft. At its 
lower end the arm L is jointed to one end of 
a link, K, the opposite end of which is simi. IOc 
larly jointed to a crank-arm, J, rigidly secured 
to the extremity of a short rock-shaft, D, set 
85 
95 
m 
25 
35 
.15 
w 
transversely behind the shoe R. Upon the backward movement, acting through the me 
rear side of each shoe R is secured a cup, A, 
dium of rock-shaft M, arms L., and links K, 
having an aperture, A, in its bottom, and a 
Serves to rock the short shafts; D: a quarter 
turn, and imparts to the finger Ba correspond 
mouth, A, at its forward side. The cups. A 
ing movement forward, by which means the 
are attached to the shoes by a rod, G, extend 
charge of seed is thrown out of the mouths A* 
ing transversely of the machine from shoe to 
of the cups A and downward upon the ground, 
shoe, and also by the shafts D, as indicated in 
Fig. 3. 
the amount of seed delivered by the finger at 
H designates a spout, which extends upward 
each movement thereof being regulated by the 
adjustment of screw F. After each knot has 
from the cup A to the shank of the shoe R. 
thus acted upon and escaped past the fork N, 
Upon each extremity of the transverse beam 
the latter is retracted to its normal position 
Wis mounted a hopper or seed-box, Q, one of 
by the spring S, and the fingers B are corre 
which is shown in Fig. 1, and said boxes are 
each provided with an aperture, Q, in its bot 
Spondingly retracted, in readiness to receive a 
tom, which aperture is covered by a slide, Q, 
new charge. The slides Q are to be so set that 
having a stem, q, by which the position of the 
the quantity of seed delivered to the fingerSB 
will correspond to the quantity of seed which 
slide is regulated. The seed passes through 
the apertures Q of the hoppers and is directed 
the cavities of said fingers will contain at the 
given time. 
by the shanks of the shoes R and by the spouts 
Without intending to confine myself exclu 
H to the cups A. 
B designates a finger-bar, which is rigidly 
sively to the precise details of construction 
here shown and described, for my invention is 
secured by its shank C to the short shaft D, 
and passes upward into the cup A through 
capable of various modifications, what I claim 
the aperture A. At its upper end the finger 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
B is formed with a cavity, E, to receive the 
S 
1. The combination, with the machine 
Seed from the cup or spout. 
frame, of the line-guiding sheaves arranged 
In order to regulate the capacity of the cav 
diagonally upon said frame in line one with 
ity E to accord with different kinds of seed, 
or different quantities of the same kind of 
the other, whereby the check-line may be con 
ducted in a direct line diagonally across the 
seed, to be planted, a screw, F, is inserted in 
to said cavity E, the head of said screw being 
machine. 
of such size as to accurately fit the cavity, and 
2. The combination, with the machine 
frame, of the line-guiding sheaves O O" and 
the shank of said screw passing from the bot 
intermediate guiding-sheaves, O', arranged 
tom of the cavity into the finger B. Thus the 
diagonally upon said frame, and the rock 
head of the Screw F constitutes a false bottom 
for the cavity E, so that by turning the screw 
shaft, carrying the rock-arms, arranged rela 
tively to the sheaves O', to be engaged posi 
in one direction the depth of the cavity is less 
ened, and by turning said screw in the oppo 
tively by the diagonally-passing check-line. 
site direction the depth of the cavity is in 
3. The combination, with the machine 
frame, the line-guiding sheaves, and the rock 
creased. 
In order that this description may be per 
shaft carrying the rock-arms, of the pivoted 
fectly clear, only one of the dropping mech 
cup secured upon a counter-shaft, the seed 
Cup, and the Seed hopper and spout, substan 
anisms is described. There are two, however, 
both being precisely alike. 
tially as and for the purposes, set forth. 
The operation of the above-described ma 
4. The combination, with the frame, the 
projections or brackets S, carrying sheaves O, 
chine is as follows: The check-line P is strung 
the sheaves O', mounted upon said frame, and 
across the field, and is placed between the 
the bracket carrying the sheaves O', of the 
sheaves O O". O' and between the bifurcations 
of one of the forks N, such line passing also 
rock-shaft M, the rock-arms LN, the springs, 
between the sheaves upon the sulky-follower. 
the link K, shaft D, arm J., cup A, and the 
seed-cup B CF, substantially as and for the 
(Not shown.) The team is hitched to the pole 
purposes described. 
or tongue T, and draws the machine along the 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
AS before stated, it will be seen that the 
field. 
team is always clear of the lineP, which is not 
presence of two witnesses. 
the case where the line passes between the 
team. As the machine is thus drawn along, 
the knots P come successively in contact with 
the forward side of the fork N, throwing it 
backward, and then escaping past it. Each 
WALTER. S. LOWER, 
AIBERT G. WEBBER. 
EDMUND W. QUINCY. 
Witnesses: 
65 
75 
9O 
95 
OO 
O 
IO 
25 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294369.txt	(No Model.) , 
C, H, CRAMER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
No. 294,369, 
WIND ENGINE, 
Patented Mar, 4, 1884. 
(No Model.) 
, 
. 
, 
2 Sheets 
IND ENGINE. 
 
 
 
1. : 
  
 
 
l 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. CRAMER, OF LAKE MILLS, WISCONSIN. 
WIND - ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 294,869, dated March 4, 1884. 
Application filed March 5, 1883. 
(No model.) 
as 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES H. CRAMER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lake 
Mills, in the county of Jefferson and State of 
5 Wisconsin, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Wind-Engines; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
Io appertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters or figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
I5 my invention. Fig. 2 is a front view with the 
margin of the wheel removed. Figs. 3 and 4 
are detail yiews. 
Like parts are represented by the same ref. 
erence-letters. 
2d The wheel isformed in sections A, which are 
adapted to turn on the rods B when desirous to 
throw the sections out of the wind. The rods 
B are supported at their ends by radial arms 
C, which arms are rigidly attached to the hub 
25 D. The hub Dispermanently attached to the 
shaft E. 
F is a movable collar, which is loosely fitted 
to the shaft E. The collar Fis provided with 
radial arms G, which are connected with the 
3o respective sections A by rods H. The collar 
Fis provided with recesses b for the reception 
of lugs a, formed on hub D, the lugs at a be 
ing brought into said recesses as said hub 
and collar are brought in contact, as shown in 
I is a friction-wheel, to which the brake J 
is applied when desirous to stop the wheel. 
The brake J is actuated by lever K and cord 
M, said lever being pivoted to the bracket L. 
N" is a spring by which the brake is thrown 
out of contact with the wheel when the cord 
M is released. 
When desirous to stop the wind-wheel the 
brake J is thrown in contact with the wheel I, 
45 whereby its motionis arrested, when by the con 
tinuous forward movement of the wind-Wheel 
the lower ends of the respective sections A are 
thrown outward by the rods H, thereby bring 
ing the sections into a horizontal position, 
5o whereby the Wind ceases to act on them and 
35 Fig. 4. 
w 
8O 
v 
- 
65 
the wheel ceases to revolve. When the mo 
tion of the collar F is thus arrested, the lugs 
at a on the hub move forward in the recesses 
b b until they come in contact with the end of 
the recess, when they arrest the forward move- 55 
ment of the wind-wheel and relieve the rods H. 
N is a tension-spring, which is attached at 
one end to one of the arms C, and its other end 
is connected with the collar F by chain or 
other flexible attachments, O. The object of 6o 
the spring N is to stop the motion of the wheel 
gradually, thereby preventing injury to the 
machine, which would occur were the wheel 
instantaneously stopped as soon as the brake 
is applied. 
It is obvious. that when the collar F is 
stopped by the brake the further forward 
movement of the wheel is resisted by the spring 
N, and the spring is gradually drawn out until 
checked by contact of the lug a with the end of 7o 
the slot b. 
When desirous to start the wheel, the brake 
J, being released from contact with the wheel 
I, the collar F is drawn forward by the spring 
N, when the arms G and rods H, which are con- 75 
nected with said collar, are drawn forward, 
whereby the lower ends of the several sections 
are drawn downward, thereby bringing the 
sections into a vertical position in contact with 
the wind. 
It will be observed that the several sections 
A are connected by rods H with the second 
succeeding arms, G, thereby leaving suffi 
cient space for the movement of the wheel to 
ward said arms H(said arms H being at rest) 85 
to throw said section into the horizontal posi 
tion. It is also obvious that by connecting 
said sections to arms of the wheel so far re 
moved from the sections, the angle of said rods 
His so increased as to act with greatest effi 
ciency. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
provided with lugs a, shaft E, collar F, pro 
vided with recesses bandarins G, chain O, 
spiral spring N, radial arms C, rods H, and 
sections A, said lugsa a being adapted to move 
in the recesses b b, and said chain being adapt. IOO 
The combination of the windmill-hub D, 95 
9O 
us 
2 
29,369 
ed to be wound upon said collar, and said spi- of the brake is removed, all for the purpose Io 
ral Spring extended as the motion of said col- and substantially as specified. 
lar F is resisted by the action of the brake, 
while said sections A are thrown from a ver- presence of two witnesses. 
tical into a horizontal position out of the wind 
as said wheel moves forward by the action of 
said rods H, said collar being moved forward, 
and said sections brought into the vertical po- 
sition by the said spring when the resistance 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
W. J. SINNOTT, 
JAS. B. ERWIN. 
Witnesses: 
- 
w 
CHARLES II. CRAMIER 
- N ... t. 
to 
- 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294469.txt	S. C. HOWARD & J. C. SCHOTT, 
SLEEVE BUTTON. 
Patented Mar. 4, 1884. 
(No Model.) 
No. 294,469, 
 
3-9. cy 
C/2-4 ea. 
-- 
/ 
677e/ 675e/evaal 
---. 
67-6-4, -furry (22% 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN C. HOWARD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., AND JOHN C. SCHOTT, OF 
PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
SLEEVE-BUTTON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 294,469, dated March 4, 1884. 
Application filed October 12, 1883. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. : 
. The frames f and d are flanged or bent to 35 
embrace the edge of the parts e and g, which 
Be it known that we, STEPHEN CHOWARD, 
of New York, county and State of New York, may be of any material commonly used in 
jewelry-such as stone, agate, pearl, glass, 
and JoHN C. SCHOTT, of Providence, county 
of Providence, State of Rhode Island, have 
celluloid, or engraved, embossed, or figured 
plates-and by employing two of these mate- 4o 
invented an Improvement in Sleeve-Buttons, 
of which the following description, in connec 
rials of different color, material, or design, 
tion. With the accompanying drawings, is a 
novel and beautiful effects may be attained. 
specification, like letters on the drawings rep 
The frame f is supported at its ends by the 
resenting like parts. 
main frame d, and is arranged at a higher 
This invention has for its object animprove 
level than is the latter frame, the frame f and 45 
its ornamental panel or plate being Sup 
ment in sleeve-buttons, whereby new and or 
ported above the level of the panel or plate e. 
namental effects may be had; and our inven 
tion consists, essentially, in a sleeve-button 
The frame d is burnished over upon and 
composed of a main and a superimposed frame, 
about the edge of the back c by hand or oth 
or of two frames-one above the other-each 
erwise. 
frame being shaped to exhibit the stone, pearl, 
or other ornamental panel, block, or plate 
within it. 
Figure 1 is a top view of a sleeve-button em 
bodying our invention; Fig. 2, a section there 
of on the dotted line aca; and Fig. 3 is a modi 
fication showing the uppermost frame differ 
ently arranged with relation to the main or 
lower frame. 
The button-sharika, the pivoted shoeb, and 
the back plate, c, are and may be of any usual 
construction or shape. . 
The main framed receives the stone, pearl, 
or other ornamental surface, e, and above the 
said frame is the supplemental or superim 
posed snaller frame f, in which is placed the 
stone, pearl, or other, ornamental panel or 
plate, 0. 
We claim 
A button shank, back, shoe, and frame, d, 
and stone or other ornamental panel or plate, 
combined with a supplemental frame support 
ed above the level of the framed, and a stone 55 
or other ornamental panel or plate therein, 
all substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
STEPHEN C. HOWARD. 
JOHN C. SCHOTT. 
so 
Witnesses: 
W. EDWARD FISKE, 
JOHN F. COLLINS. 
IO 
15 
25 
 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294569.txt	(No Model.) 
F. S. BISSELL. 
ADJUSTABLE BLOWER FOR FIRE PLACES AND STOWES, 
NO, 294,569, 
. 
. . 
Patented Mar, 4 l884 
6222222222222222222222222222 s 
 
liness es. 
e%u-6, 444, 
N eror. 
7, 4. a7% 
PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANKS. BISSELL, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ADJUSTABLE BLOWER FoR FIRE-PLACES AND STOVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 294,569, dated March 4, 1884, 
- 
- 
Application filed July 2, 1883. (No model.) 
55 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
in front in the usual way, and is provided 
Beit known that I, FRANKS. BISSELL, of with two pins, k'-one on each side-which 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and project through the slots i and enter links in 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new the chains h, in which they are secured by a 
and usefullmprovementin AdjustableBlowers 
key. The weight h is sufficiently heavy to 
for Fire-Places and Stoves; and I do hereby 
counterbalance the weight of the blower k, so 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
that the latter will be held in any position it 
exact description thereof. 
may be moved to by the weight. The divis 
My invention is an improvement upon the 
ion-plates f are provided with large holes f', 
construction shown and described in Letters 
through which the sprocket-wheels e may be 
Patent No. 261,221, dated July 18, 1882, in 
inserted. The purpose of this is to enable 
which a vertically-moving adjustable.blower 
the shaft e to be removed from the stove with 
is suspended upon counterweighted cords 
outtaking off the top. The chains and sprocket 
passing over pulleys mounted rigidly upon a 
wheels are inclosed in vertical compartments 
I5 loosely journaled shaft, the shaft, pulleys, 
l by means of removable plates m, which are 65 
cords, and weights being placed in chambers 
secured in place by cleats m and screws m. 
separated from the fire-chamber of the stove. 
If it is desired to remove the chains and 
It has been my experience that the cords and 
sprocket-wheels, the plates an are taken off, 
pulleys were more or less affected by the heat 
then the wheels g are slipped off of their jour 
2C of the stove, and the operation of the blower 
nals, the chains taken off the sprocket-wheels 7o 
is not perfect under all conditions. To obvi 
e', and the shaft e lifted out. This construc 
ate this objection is the object of my improve 
tion enables me to take out these parts with 
ment. 
out taking down the stove or removing its 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
top, and greatly facilitates repairs. The blower 
25 and use my invention, I will now describe it 
k is provided with a handle, k, by means of 75 
by reference to the accompanying drawings, 
which it may be moved up and down at pleas 
in which 
lure. This construction enables me to make 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of an open-faced 
the bearings of the parts which are exposed 
stove, partly in section. Fig. 2 is a cross-sec 
to heat loose, so that there is no danger of 
3o tion on the line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a view 
their sticking by reason of their expansion 
of one of the removable side plates. Fig. 4 is 
when highly heated. 
. 
a view of a portion of the front. 
By reason of these improvements I am en 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
abled to make a stove with an adjustable 
in each. 
blower which is not open to the objections I 
The stove a is of a well-known construction, 
have heretofore experienced in the use of such 
and has the upper part of its interior sepa 
devices. 
rated from the fire-chamber b by means of a 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
plate, c, so as to form a chamber, d, for con 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
taining the shaft e. The shaft e rests in suit 
1. The combination, in a stove or fire-place, 
4o able bearings, e, in the side partitions, f, and 
of a vertically-adjustable blower, with coun- go 
at its outer ends is provided with sprocket 
ter-weights carried by endless chains mounted 
wheels e, which are keyed to it. Mounted on 
and moving vertically on upper and lower 
stationary journals attached to the side plates, 
sprocket-wheels journaled in the sides of the 
f, at a suitable distance below the sprocket 
stove, Substantially as and for the purposes 
45 wheels e, are other sprocket-wheels, g, which 
described. 
turn loosely on their journals. Mounted on 
2. The combination of the vertically adjust 
the sprocket-wheelse' and g are endless chains 
able blower provided with pins, endless chains 
h, each having a weight, it'. In the front 
having counter-weights and connected to the 
plate, i, at each side of the open-faced stove, 
blower by the pins, a shaft having sprocket 
So is a slot, i. The adjustable blower k is rested 
wheels rigidly attached thereto and sustaining ioe 
95 
. 
35 
". 
- 
2 
the pins, and other sprocket-wheels revolving. In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
loosely on stationary bearings, substantially hand this 26th day of June, A. D. 1883. 
as and for the purposes described. . . 
294,569 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
FRANKS... BISSELL. 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
. 
3. The combination, in a stove or fire-place, 
5 of the removable shaft and division-plates 
, 
, 
having holes to permit the lateral removal of . Witnesses: 
the shaft, substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
. . . . 
, 
, 
. . 
, 
. 
, 
, 
, 
, 
, 
W. B. CoRWIN, r 
JNO. K. SMITH. 
* 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
, 
; 
it 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294669.txt	(No Model.) 
F. L. POPE, 
AUTOMATIC CUT-OUT FOR ELECTRO MAGNETIC HELICES, 
No. 294,669, 
7.7. Z. 
Patented Mar, 4, 1884, 
Y 
o 
A. 5 
s-C U-17 
4. 
Es 
 
 
3rvuovtov: . 
... Azazz.A. Z.Zoae. 
6. is Setozvoys 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRANKL. POPE, OF ELIZABETH, NEW JERSEY. 
AUTO VAT C CUT OUT FOR ELECTRO WAGNET C - E - CES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 294,669, dated March 4, 1884. 
Application filed June 22, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
20 
25 
40 
w 
To all tufuon, it 7 City concert, 
Beit known that I, FRANKL. PoPE, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of Eliza 
beth, in the county of Union and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Automatic Cut-Outsfor Elec 
tro-Magnetic Helices, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to an automatic cut. 
Out for electro-magnetic helices; and its object 
is to diminish the consumption of battery ma 
terials in operating electro-magnets in circuits 
Which are closed for a great portion of the 
time. 
It consists in applying to an electro-mag 
net two independent assisting helices, which 
are included in the same electric circuit, one 
of Said helices being spanned by a normally 
closed shunt. A contact - spring or other 
equivalent device is attached to the movable 
armature of the electro-magnet, which, when 
the latter moves toward the poles of the elec 
tro-magnet, interrupts said normally - closed 
shunt, thereby bringing the second helix into 
conjoint action with the first one; hence 
When the armature is in a position adjacent to 
the poles of the electro-magnet the actuating 
current will pass through a greater number of 
convolutions of its coil than when it is in its 
most distant position. Thus the current trav 
erses an increased resistance when the arma 
ture is adjacent to the poles of the electro 
magnet, and the consumption of materials in 
the battery is correspondingly diminished, 
particularly when the helix which is spanned 
by the shunt is of a comparatively great re 
sistance, which is preferably the case in prac 
tice. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure l is 
a diagram illustrating my invention, which 
shows the course of the electric current when 
the armature of the electro-magnetis in prox. 
imity to its poles; and Fig. 2 represents the 
same when the armature has been drawn away 
from the poles. 
In the drawings, MI represents an electro 
magnet having a movable armature, A, which 
is pivoted at a, and provided with a retracting 
spring, S, of the usual construction. The 
electro-magnet M is provided with two sets of 
helices, H. H. h. h, which are all wound in the 
same direction upon the core, so that when in 
action they mutually assist each other. It is 
immaterial in what particular manner these 
independent helices are wound upon the core 
provided the foregoing condition is observed. 
The core may be wound throughout with two in 
dependent parallel wires, or one helix may be 
superposed upon the other upon each leg of the 
core, or one helix may be placed upon one leg 
and the other upon the other leg of the core; or 
they may be arranged in other Well-known 
ways, not necessary to be described. Aninsulat 
ed contact-spring, c, is mounted upon apost, P, 
and normally rests against the fixed stop p, 
forming an electrical contact therewith, as 
shown in Fig. 2. Upon the extremity of the 
almature A is placed a pin or Screw, b, which, 
when the armature approaches the poles of 
the electro-magnet M, bears against the con 
tact-spring c and pushes it away from the 
Stop p. 
When the apparatus is at rest and no Cull 
lent is passing, the several parts occupy the 
position illustrated in Fig. 2. If, now, the bat 
tery-circuit be closed, by depressing the key 
K the electric current will pass from the bat 
tery or electric generator E by wires 1 and 2 
to the helix I of the electro-magnet M, and 
thence by the wire 3 through the point 4 and 
wire 5 to the post P, thence through the stop 
p, contact-spring c, Wire 6, point 7, and wire 
The portion of cur 
S back to the battery. 
rent passing through the helix H will be so 
small as to be inappreciable. The electro 
magnet M will now attact its armature A and 
draw it forward; but when it is nearly in con 
tact with the poles the pinf will depress the 
contact-spring c, and thereby break the shunt 
between points 4 and 7, which will thereafter 
cause the electric current, upon reaching the 
point 4, to traverse the helices, H H and the 
wire 9 to the point 7, as shown in Fig. 1, and 
the current will accordingly take that course, 
successively traversing both sets of helices 
upon the electro-magnet M so long as the key 
K remains closed. 
In practice, it is preferable that the helices 
H H should be composed of a great number 
of convolutions of fine wire, so as to offer a 
considerable resistance to the current from the 
battery E, while at the same time the mag 
netic force developed thereby will be sufficient 
to hold, the armature up to the poles of the 
- 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
294,669 
electro-magnet after it has once been attracted. 
By means of my invention a powerful cur 
Tent may be employed to act upon the electro 
magnet to draw up the armature, which will 
be automatically replaced by a weaker one 
after the armature has been brought into po 
sition, although the latter will still be sufficient 
to l'etain the armature and prevent it from 
falling back. Such a device will be found 
especially useful in electric signaling appa 
l'atuls of various kinds. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of an electro-magnet provided 
With two independent assistinghelices included 
in the same electric circuit, an armature mov 
able toward the poles of said electro-magnet 
by Virtue of the attractive force induced there. 
in by one of said helices, a normally-closed 
shunt spanning the other or inactive helix, and 
mechanism, substantially such as described, 
for interrupting said shunt by such movement 
of the armature, thereby bringing the second 
helix into conjoint action with the first one as 
the armature approaches the poles of the 
electro-magnet. 
TO 
2 5 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of an electro-magnet provided 
with two independent assisting helices, one 
having a greater electric resistance than the 
other, and both being included in the same 
electric circuit, an armature movable toward 
the poles of said electro-magnet by virtue of 
the attractive force induced therein by the 
helix of lesser resistance alone, a normally 
closed shunt spanning the helix of greater re 
sistance, and mechanism, Substantially as Set 
forth, for interrupting said shunt by Such move 
ment of the armature, thereby bringing the 
helix of greater resistance into conjoint action 
with the helix of lessel resistance as the ar)na 
ture approaches the pole of the electro-magnet. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 21st day of June, A. D. 
SS3. 
3 5 
FRANK I. POPE. 
Witnesses: 
DANIEI, W. EDGECOMP, 
CARRIE E. DAVIDSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294769.txt	(No Model.) 
D. CURTIS. 
HORSE COLLAR PAD. 
No. 294,769, 
Patented Mar, ll, 1884. 
 
Zozzzzesses: 
 
Zzvezzar: 
Zetzer (7azrazy 
Air 12zzozzey, 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IDEXTER, CURTIS, OF MADISON, WISCONSIN. 
HORSE COLLAR PAD. . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 294,769, dated March 11, 1884 
Application filed August 29, 1883. (No model ) 
IO 
to all ution, it n.at/ concert, . 
Be it known that I, DEXTER CURTIs, of 
Madison, in the county of Dane and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvementsin Metal-Lined Harness; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description, of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification, and to 
the figures and letters of reference marked 
thereon. 
It has been the common practice for some 
years pas to apply metal, and preferably zinc, 
to the various parts of a harness which bear 
with the greatest pressure upon the animal 
such as the collar, collar-pad, saddle, breast 
pads, back-pads, &c. In the application of 
the metal difficulty has been experienced in 
forming a smooth joint between the edges of 
the metal and the leather backing to which it 
was applied, such as would prevent the cut 
ting or irritation of the animal. 
In Letters Patent of the United States 
granted to me as assignee of Matthew W. 
Lynch January 23, 1883, No. 270,960, is shown 
and described the application of a bearing 
plate of metal to a horse-collar pad in a man 
ner tending to produce a close joint between 
the edges of the metal and the leather of the 
pad-that is to say, the metal is pressed by 
powerful pressure into the body of the leather, 
so that its edges shall be flush therewith. It 
has been found, however, after a practical 
trial covering a considerable length of time, 
that the means shown and described in Said 
patent for holding the leather and metal to 
gether-to wit, two or more rivets applied 
through the leather and metal at opposite 
ends of the latter-are insufficient to prevent 
the separation of the leather from the metal 
- along the edges of the latter after the pad has 
been some time ia use. 
It has therefore been the object of my present 
invention to so unite the metal to the leather 
in collar-pads, as well as in other parts of the 
harness, as that the positive union of the metal 
to the latter shall be effected all along the edges 
of the latter; and to that end it consists inform 
3O 
35 
45 
 
ing upon or fixing to the body of the metal a 
series of projecting tongues or lugs extending 
all along its edges, and adapted to be pressed 
through the leather backing and clinched or 
turned down on the opposite side, and thus hold 
the leather positively to the metal all along the 
edges and prevent the separation of the one 
from the other and the opening of the joint. 
I have shown in the accompanying draw 
ings, in Figure 1, a perspective view, and in 
Fig. 2 a sectional view, of a collar-pad em 
bodying my invention, and in Fig. 3 a per 
spective view of the metalliclining of the pad 
detached from the leather body. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures denote the same parts. 
The letter A indicates the leather body of 
the pad; B, the metal linings thereof, made 
preferably of zinc, and b the prongs or lugs 
formed upon or attached to the lining, but by 
preference formed upon and made integral 
with the same, as shown. In applying the 
lining thus formed its body is pressed into the 
leather until flush with the surrounding leather 
surface, and so as to project the prongs or lugs 
b through the leather and out at the opposite 
side. The connection is then completed by 
turning down the projecting ends of the prongs 
or lugs against the body of the leather, as indi 
cated in Fig. 1. 
The metal bearing-plates of other parts of 
the harness are to be provided with similar 
prongs or lugs and pressed into the leather 
and clinched thereto just as in the case of the 
collar-pad. 
I claim as my invention 
The herein - described leather metal-lined 
collar-pad, consisting of a curved body of 
leather or like flexible material, and a narrow 
metal bearing-plate applied to the under side 
of the arch, and secured thereto by integral 
edge prongs of lugs, substantially as de 
scribed. 
DEXTER, CURTIS, 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs F. HARDING, 
A. W. SIDELL. 
55 
65 
SO 
85 
9O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294869.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 294,869. 
O. M. GRAVES, 
NECKTIE FASTENER, 
Patented Mar, ll, l884, 
 
776. 2. 
N. PETERS, Photo-ithographer, Washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
ORIEL MUNSON GRAVES, OF DAYTON, 
WASHINGTON TERRITORY, ASSIGNOR 
OF ONE-HALF TO H. D. GRAVES, OF PORTLAND, OREGON. 
NECKTIE-FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 294,869, dated March 11, 1884. 
Application filed October 6, 1883. (No model.) 
circle the collar. 
- 
fo all whon, it may concern. : 
Be it known that I, ORIEL M. GRAVES, of 
Dayton, county of Columbia, and Territory 
of Washington, have invented an Improve 
5 ment in Necktie-Fasteners; and I hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description thereof. 
My invention relates to a new and useful 
fastener for neckties, particularly adapted for 
Io standing collars and long neckties, which en 
My invention consists in a piece of wire 
bent at its center to form a spring-loop, and 
having oppositely-extending arms terminat 
I5 ing in hooks bent inwardly, as I shall herein 
after fully explain by reference to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my fast 
ener. Fig. 2 is a view showing its applica 
The difficulty of preventing neckties from 
rising over a standing collar is well known, 
and many devices have been used to prevent 
it, the most common being an ordinary pin; 
25 but this is rather difficult to adjust on account 
of the stiffness of the collar, and, moreover, 
the practice has a tendency to injure both cra 
vat and collar. 
A is a piece of spring-wire, bent to form at 
Its arms b extend 
3o its center a Spring-loop, at. 
2O tion to a collar and cravat. 
oppositely a short distance, and terminate in 
small inturned hooks c, adapted to hook into 
the cravat or tie. 
In adjusting this device the loop is fitted 
around the shank or stem of the collar-button 35 
B. The arms extend along the meeting ends of 
the collar C, the necktie D is brought around, 
and its lower edges fit in the hooks c, the 
points of which may penetrate the material 
and hold the tie down. When the tie is set 4o 
up in the proper bow, its ends or folds cover 
and conceal the fastener, so that the device, 
while effective, is not exposed. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 45 
Patent, is 
A necktie-fastener consisting of a piece of 
wire bent to form a central Spring-loop, (t, 
adapted to embrace the neck of the collar-but- . 
ton, and oppositely-extending arms b, termi- 5O 
nating in inturned hooks c, for engaging With 
and securing the tie, substantially as herein 
described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
ORIE MUNSON GRAVES. 
hand. 
. 
Witnesses: 
J. D. MAXWELL, 
J. N. WAN DUSEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US294969.txt	(No Model.) 
C. COUPLAND, 
SPINDLE AND BEARING FOR ROTARY OUTTERS OF MACHINES FOR 
Patented Mar. ll l884. 
No, 294,969, 
CUTTING, DOUBLE PILE FABRICS, 
Fig.I 
F9 g 
  
 
  
(AYY 
NAE 
eS 
2 W2 
 
 
  
  
 
% s SS 
1. I 
AEN3 
AEI 
Q IZN 
 
 
 
 
 
I 
lil 
%2.1% E. 
2. 3. 2. 2 
Ali All IR 
Witnesses 
gather: 
y 
Ya. 
In ventors. 
those 22, 
NE PETERS, Photo-lithngrapher, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES COUPLAND, OF SEYMOUR, CONNECTICUT. 
SPINDLE AND BEARING FOR ROTARY CUTTERS OF MACHINES FOR CUTTING DOUBLE PILE FABRICS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 294,969, dated March 11, 1884. 
Application filed March 29, 1883. (No model.) 
25 
W 
O 
fication. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES COUPLAND, of 
Seymour, in the county of Hew Naven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
Improvements in Spindles and Bearings for 
Rotary Cutters of Machines for Cutting Double 
Pile Fabrics, of which the following is a speci 
This invention relates more particularly to 
Spindles for the rotary cutters used in that 
class of textile machinery which is employed 
for severing or cutting the connecting pile 
threads of double pile fabrics; but it may 
also be employed in connection with rotary 
Cutters used for other purposes where an ex 
tremely high Speed of rotation is required. 
The object of my said invention is to pro 
vide a spindle which shall be stable and free 
from any irregularity or jar when rotated at 
a high velocity, and which may be readily 
kept in a state of constant and effective lubri 
cation, notwithstanding the great velocity at 
which it is run. 
My invention comprises certain novel com 
binations of parts, hereinafter pointed out in 
the claims, whereby these results are very 
effectually and thoroughly secured. 
Figure 1 is a partial vertical section of a 
Spindle and its immediate adjuncts construct 
ed according to my said invention. Fig. 2 is 
a vertical sectional view, taken in the line 
of Fig. 5, as seen from the right-hand side of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a horizontal sectional view 
taken in the line aca of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a 
horizontal sectional view through the bearing, 
taken in the line & 2 of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a 
horizontal sectional view taken in the line of 
y of Fig. 2; and Fig. 6 is a vertical transverse 
Sectional view of part of a machine for cutting 
the pile of double pile fabrics, illustrating the 
relation of the spindle and the rotary cutter 
to the double pile fabric when the cutter is 
arranged to Sever the same. 
When my said invention is used in a pile 
cutting machine, the spindle and its immedi 
ate adjuncts are mounted upon a bar, A, suit 
ably constructed, supported, and arranged to 
receive a reciprocating motion, any desired 
number of the spindles and their cutters being 
5O arranged along the Said bar, with the cutters 
placed opposite the space between two strain 
. 
. 
45 
35 
 
55 
Go 
65 
7C 
75 
8o 
85 
ing-bars, B B', through which the double pile 
fabric C is passed, the two fabrics a of said 
double fabric, when separated, passing over 
rollers D, which draw them in opposite di 
rections, and present the pile b to the action 
of the cutters in such manner that the latter, 
having a reciprocating movement simultane 
ous with their rotary movement, sever the 
pile at or about the middle thereof, so that 
one half remains projecting from the surface 
of one of the fabrics a, while the other half re 
mains projecting from the surface of the other 
of the fabrics a, substantially as shown in my 
separate and distinct application for a patent 
on improvements in apparatus for cutting 
pile fabrics filed November 7, A. D. 1882. 
When the cutters are to be applied to other 
purposes, the spindles and their adjuncts are: 
secured upon any suitable or appropriate sup 
port, either movable or stationary, as the cir 
cumstances of the case may require, the object 
of my invention being, as hereinbefore ex 
plained, to provide a means whereby the very 
highest required or attainable speed or rota 
tion of the cutters may be rendered consistent 
with perfect steadiness and regularity of mo 
tion, and perfect lubrication of the bearings 
of the spindle during such motion, these con 
ditions meeting the requirements of the pile 
cutting machine, as hereinbefore indicated, 
and also of various other branches of mechan 
ism-in which an exceedingly high velocity of 
the rotary cutters is required. 
The bar A, or other equivalent support 
which may be provided for the mechanism, is 
formed with a circular or other suitably-shaped 
socket, d, which receives the bearing E, which 
has at its upper end a circumferential flange, 
e, which rests upon the top of the bar A or its 
equivalent, thereby preventing the bearing E 
from displacement in a downward direction. 
This bearing E has at its upper and central 
part a vertical cylindrical bore, f. At its 
lower end it is laterally recessed, as shown at 
g, for a purpose which hereinafter appears. 
In its bottom h it has securely fitted a step 
block, i, of steel or other suitable material, in 
the upper end of which is formed a conical 
step-bearing, af. The block i is retained in 
place by a screw, k, inserted laterally through 
the adjacent portion of the bottom h of the 
95 
IOO 
s 
294,969 
5 
25 
35 
75 
85 
bearing E, as represented in Fig.2 and in dot 
extent through the boref, until its lower end, 
having passed through the boss of the pinion 
ted outline in Fig. 3. At the upper end of the 
I, brings its conical extremity into the step a?, 
boref, and concentric therewith, is a circular 
with the shoulder resting upon the adjacent 
recess, b. (More fully indicated in Fig. 1.) 
surface of the top of the bearing E, whereupon 
Fis a cap, which has at its lower end a flange, 
c', which rests upon the flange e of the bearing 
the pinion I may be attached to the spindle by 
E, and is securely affixed thereto by means of 
means of a transverse pin, w. The cap Fis then 
placed over the part in of the spindle and se 
suitable screws or bolts, A, as shown in Fig. 
2. This cap F has an upwardly-tapering bore, 
cured in place by the set-screws or bolts A, as 
hereinbefore explained, after which the cutter 
Io j, circular in its cross-section, and broadest at 
H may be suitably secured to the stock of the 
its lower end. Concentric with the said lower 
spindle by nuts above and below the same, 
end of the said bore i is a shoulder, e, which 
screwed upon the threaded upper part of the 
fits into the recess b of the bearing E. The 
spindle, as shown in Fig. 1, and substantially 
upper end of the capFis hollowed out, as rep 
resented at f', forming a cup-shaped cavity 
as shown in my former application just here 
inbefore referred to, and the bearing Eputin 
concentric with the adjacent end of the taper 
position upon the bar or support A. The parts 
ing bore j. 
G is the spindle, which is provided at its 
being constructed and placed in relation with 
upper extremity, in any ordinary or suitable 
each other as aforesaid, the spindle G is Sup 
ported not only by the step-bearing a, but also 
manner, with a circular knife or cutter, H. 
This spindle has an upwardly-tapering por 
by the contact of the shoulders at the top of 
tion, n, which corresponds in shape to the ta 
the bearing E. Furthermore, while the cy 
pering bore j, in which it is situate, and a 
lindrical bore f determines the axis of rotation 
cylindrical portion, n, which corresponds with 
of the spindle G, the conical bore j and the 
tapering part an of the spindle, acting in con 
the cylindrical bore f, in which it is situate, 
junction with the conical extremity s, fitted 
there being a circumferential shoulder, , at 
into the conical step a?, obviate any liability 
the junction of the parts in and n, which said 
shoulder rests upon the adjacent upper sur 
to endwise movement of the spindle, inasmuch 
face of the bearing E, as represented in Figs. 
as by simply grinding down the under side of 95 
the cap F to the requisite degree and adjust 
1 and 2. The lower extremity, s, of the spin 
dle G is made of conical shape to fit into the 
ing the shoulders in proper relation with the 
conical step (c. The pinion I, from which a 
conical ends the surfaces are brought in such 
rotary motion may be communicated to the 
relation as to prevent such endwise movement 
without unduly binding upon the spindle. 
spindle G, is attached to the lower part of said 
Furthermore, by pouring the oil or lubricating 
spindle, below the part in thereof, and of course 
above the lower extremity, s, the pinion Ibe 
material through the orifice into the chamber 
at, the latter passes through the cylindrical 
ing placed within the lateral recess (f, herein 
after described. One side of the pinion pro 
bore f and lubricates the length of the cylin 
jects beyond the adjacent parts to an extent 
drical part in of the spindle, the lubricant be 
sufficient to enable other suitable gearing to 
ing caused to be fed with the requisite modera 
tion by means of the porous material inserted, 
mesh therewith to communicate rotation there 
to, to actuate the spindle. 
as hereinbefore explained, in the said opening 
f in. By pouring the requisite quantity of oil 
Formed in one side of the bearing E, and 
parallel with the boref, is a chamber, u, which 
or lubricating material into the annular recess 
at its bottom communicates by an opening or f', the latter is caused to flow downward be 
passage, n., with the said boref. 
tween the tapered portion in of the spindle and 
Formed in the flange c of the cap F is an 
the tapering bore j of the cap F, thereby lubri 
orifice, ', which affords access to the top of 
cating the said parts, and also, by the descent 
the chamber it. The opening or passage in is 
of the oil or lubricant, the surface upon which 
to be filled With a plug, e', of porous mate 
rests and moves the shoulder . 
rial-Such, for example, as pine wood of open 
The step-bearing a may be supplied with 
texture and free from pitch, or other material 
the lubricating material at intervals, and may 
which will permit the slow passage or percola 
be readily cleaned, when desired, by simply 
tion therethrough of the oil or lubricating mate 
removing the block i and replacing the same. 
rial. In order that this plug may be applied in 
What I claim as my invention is 
place, there is provided in line with the open 
1. A spindle, G, for carrying a rotary knife 
ing in, but extending outwardly from the bot 
or cutter, constructed with the upwardly-ta 
tom of the chamber 4, a corresponding open 
pering part in, the shoulder , the cylindrical 
ing, it', normally occupied by a screw, '', so 
part in, and the conical extremity s, substan 
that by removing the bearing E from the bar 
tially as and for the purpose herein set forth. 
or support A, to afford access to the screw 7", 
2. The bearing E, having a conical step, a?, 
the latter may be removed and afford access 
and cylindrical boref, and the cap F, hav 
in a straight line to the passage or opening n. 
ing the upwardly-tapering bore j, in combi 
In order to put the several parts together, 
nation with the spindle G, constructed with 
the pinion I is placed in the cavity g, and the the upwardly-tapering part m, shoulder r, 
spindle G is thrust downward to the requisite cylindrical part in, and conical extremitys, all 
45 
55 
IOO 
IIC 
II5 
I 25 
294,969, 
, 3 
. 
. 
. 
substantially as and for the purpose herein 
set forth. 
3. The combination of the bearing E, hav 
ing the step a?, cylindrical boref, and flange 
e, the cap F, having the upwardly-tapering 
bore j and flange c, and the bolts or set-screws 
A, with the spindle G, constructed with the 
upwardly-tapering part in, shoulder r, cylin 
drical part in, and conical extremitys, all sub 
stantially as and for the purpose herein set 
forth. 
4. The combination of the bearing E, hav 
ing the cylindrical boref, lateral recess 0, and 
step a?, and the cap F, having the upwardly 
tapering bore j, with the spindle G, con 
structed With the upWardly-tapering part in, 
shoulder r, cylindrical part in, and conical end 
s, all substantially as and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
5. The combination of the bearing E, hav 
ing the cylindrical boref, lateral recess g, and 
step a?, the cap F, having the upwardly-ta 
pering bore j and flange c', and the bolts A, 
with the spindle G, constructed with the up 
wardly-tapering part m, shoulder , cylindri 
cal part in, and conical extremity s, and a cir 
eular knife or cutter, H, attached to the up 
per end of said spindle, all substantially as 
and for the purpose herein-set forth. 
6. The combination of the movable blocki, 
constructed with the conical bearing a', screw 
k, bearing E, constructed with the lateral re 
cess g, flangee, and cylindrical boref, and the 
cap F, constructed with the upwardly-taper 
ing bore j, with the spindle G, constructed 
with the upwardly-tapring part in, shoulder 
, cylindrical part in, and conical extremity s, 
all substantially as and for the purpose here 
in set forth. ' 
7. The combination of the bearing E, con- 4o 
structed with the cylindrical bore f, chamber 
u, and passage or opening in', and the cap F, 
constructed with the upwardly-tapering bore 
ii, with the spindle G, constructed with the 
upwardly-tapering part in and cylindrical 45 
part in, all substantially as and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
8. The combination of the capF, constructed 
with the opening or orifice and upwardly- . 
tapering bore j, and the bearing E, constructed 5o 
with the chamber it, passage n, and cylindri 
cal bore f, with the spindle G, constructed 
with the upwardly-tapering part in and cylin 
drical part in, all substantially as and for the 
purpose herein set forth. 
9. The combination of the pluge", of por 
ous permeable material, the bearing E, con 
structed with the chamber u, passage n, and 
cylindrical boref, and the cap F, constructed 
with the upwardly-tapering bore j, with the 6o 
spindle G, constructed with the upwardly-ta 
pering part in and cylindrical part in, all sub 
stantially as and for the purpose herein set 
forth. 
structed with the chamber at, opening or pas 
sage n, and the coincident opening or pas 
sage n, the screw r", and cylindrical boref, 
and the cap F, constructed with the upward 
ly-tapering bore j, with the spindle G, con- 7o 
structed with the upwardly-tapering part in 
. 
and cylindrical part in, all substantially as and 
for the purpose herein set forth. 
CHARLES COUPLAND. 
10. The combination of the bearing E, con- 65 
55 
. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. CAN FIELD, 
S. HART CULVER, 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295069.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 295,069, 
G, STEUDEL, 
PLOW, 
Patented Mar, ll, 1884. 
N. pers, state-legrapher. Washings. . 
. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE STEUDEL OF CHILTON, WISCONSIN. 
POW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,069, dated March 11, 1884. 
Application filed September 3, 1883. (No model.) 
tion. 
m 
landside C and plow-point F by metal straps 5o 
Be it known that I, GEORGE STEUDEL, a EE", bolted thereto. 
To all whom it 7ay concern: 
The sections E E of the 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chil- Inold-board are hinged together, as at d, and at 
ton, in the county of Calumet and State of 
their meeting edges are beveled (see Fig. 4) 
to make a tight joint, thereby excluding lodg 
5 Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Plows; and I do de 
ment of dirt, and permit adjustment of the 
hinged sections. The upper part, E, of the 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
mold-board is adjustably secured to the land 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
side by braces G. G., the former being pivoted 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
at one end to an eye, G', formed on the mold 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
board, its opposite end being provided with a 60 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
bolt, g, and tooth g. The brace G' is rigidly 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
bolted to the landside C, and extends up 
wardly and inwardly, being provided at its 
My invention relates to improvements in 
inner end with a slot, if', and on its upper 
plows, having for its object the provision of a 
surface with a series of teeth, into one of 65 
plow capable of being adapted for plowing 
which the tooth on the brace G. takes when 
when the parts G. G' are brought together, and 
either stubble-field or meadow-land, the means 
whereby this object is accomplished being 
So secured by the bolt (7 and nut g'. When it 
Strong and durable in construction and effi 
is desired to adjust the mold-board, the nut is 
cient in operation; and the invention consists 
loosened and the noid-board moved to the 
of a mold-board in two sections hinged to 
desired position, when the nut is again tight 
gether, one section being rigid and the other. 
ened, and the plow is ready for operation. It 
One adjustably connected to the landside, sub 
will be observed that this adjustment of parts 
stantially as hereinafter described and claimed. 
can be made without removing the plow from 
In the drawings, in which like letters of ref. 
the furrow. The sections E E are hinged to 
erence indicate like parts, Figure 1 is a per 
gether by an ordinary knuckle-hinge, one leaf 
spective view of a plow containing my in 
of which is rigidly secured to one of the sec 
provements. Fig. 2 is a bottom view of the 
tions, while the other has a slot to receive a 
same. Fig. 3 is a detail view of the brace 
threaded bolt provided with a nut. 
which supports the hinged section of the mold 
arrangement of the parts composing my in 
board. Fig. 4 is a cross-section on the line a 
at of Fig. 2, showing the joint between the sec 
Vention can be made without departing from 
the principle or Sacrificing the advantages of 
tions of the mold-board. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
my invention-as, for instance, the braces G. 
35 beam of the plow, supported upon a standard, 
G can be reversed and the pivoted brace con- 85 
B, securely bolted to the landside C. The 
nected to the landside and the rigid brace to 
handles DD" are bolted to the standard B near 
the mold-board. I would therefore have it 
its lower end and extend upwardly and rear 
understood that I do not confine myself to the 
40 Wardly, one, D', being morticed in the rear 
exact construction shown and described, but 
end of the plow-beam A, the other, D, be 
may make such alterations as fairly fall with 
ing held at a proper distance from the handle 
in the scope of my invention. 
D and the beam by a rod, a, which is secured 
I am aware that it is not broadly new to 
to the top of the standard B by a nut, c, and 
make a mold-board in two sections, one Sec 
45 thence passes through the handles DD", to the 
tion being rigid and the other hinged thereto, 
and adapted in various ways to be adjusted 95 
latter of which it is secured by a nut (not 
shown) and braces b d. The mold-board E. E. 
nearer to or farther from the landside. 
is divided into two parts or sections, the low 
I am aware of Patents Nos. 10,505, of 1854; 
er part, E, of which is rigidly secured to the 
176,729, of 1876, and 247,110, of 1881, for a 
I am aware that changes in the form and So 
55 
75 
90 
O 
 
2 
295,069 
similar purpose, and the devices therein set oted loosely to the landside, the bar G simi 
forth are not sought to be covered in this ap- larly pivoted to the movable section of the 
mold-board, and the nutg', for adjustably lock- 15 
plication. 
ing the bars G. G' together, all as and for the 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
What I claim as new is- 
In combination with the landside, point, purposes set forth. 
5 
and beam of a plow, the mold-board made in 
sections with beveled edges, and hinged to- presence of two witnesses. 
gether, as shown, the section E being adjust- 
able, and having eye G', the bar G, having 
Io wide tooth g and bolt g, the ratcheted arm G, 
having slot g, and the ratchets occupying 
either side of said slot, the bar G being piv- 
THEO. KERSTEN, 
HENRY KERSTEN. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE STEUDEL. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295169.txt	(No Model.) 
M. P. HAYES, 
EWAPORATING APPARATUS, 
No. 295,169. 
Patented Mar, 18, 1884, 
 
2 22 
2 
ZEEEIHEITIES 
essee 
St 
2. 
2.2 
-S 
2.. 
% H S. 
% 
s H 
Fitzh 
(HHSSNSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
%itts SSNSSSSNSS 2H2 
a Zazza22222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222 
YaaaaaaaZZYA24-277.4.222222222222222222222222222222222222222222 
SSSSYSSNX 
a 
 
 
SS3 sy 
SSSSSSSSSSSSS 
EKS 
WTNESSES 
4-2 2, 22. 2- II, WENIOR 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Wisutistor, D.C. 
Alfiorneys 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN PETER HAYES, OF SEAFORTH, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
EVA PORATING A PPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,169, dated March 18, 1884. . 
. 
Application filed June 26, 1883. (No model.) 
sudden cooling thereof after extinguishing the So 
25 
75 
To all livhon it Tru?t/ concern, 
Be it known that I, MARTIN PETER HAYES, fire, and consequently prevents the warping 
a citizen of Canada, residing at Seaforth, in and twisting of the pan. At the rear end of 
the Province of Ontario, Canada, have invent. the block or inclosure is the smoke-flue or 
5 ed certain new and useful Improvements in chimney B, having a double wall, B'B', and 
Evaporating Apparatus; aid I do declare the at the base of which it is designed to have a 55 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip- small grate and opening, to permit the build 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others ing of a small fire in the lower part of the 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to make chamber thus provided to the smoke-flue or 
Io and use the same, reference being had to the chimney, the purpose of which is to rarefy the 
accompanying drawings, and to the letters and : air of the flue or chimney, and thus increase 6o 
figures of reference marked thereon, which I the draft for the fire in the furnace. Longi 
form a part of this specification. 
tudinal upright partitions, of masonry, C C, ex 
This invention pertains to improvements in tend through the flue-chamber d, dividing it 
I5 that class of devices termed salt-blocks and into a series of similar flues, C. C. Placed 
furnaces for the evaporation of brine, hav- above these, and resting upon the top walls of 65 
ing for its object, among other things, to se. the block or inclosure, is the evaporating 
cure an expeditious evaporation of the con- pan D, to receive and hold the brine for 
tents of the evaporating-pan, to prevent the evaporation. The pan has sloping sides and 
2O warping of the pan, to promote combustion, an outwardly-projecting flange, g, arranged 
and increase the draft; and to these ends it con- around its upper edge, to which are secured 7o 
sists of the detailed construction and arrange- drain-boards. The sloping sides allow the 
ment of the parts, substantially as hereinafter salt to be easily withdrawn from the pan, and 
fully set forth and claimed. 
the flange prevents leakage of the brine down 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of the outside face of the walls of the furnace 
my improved salt-block and furnace. Fig. 2 block. 
Extending through the heat non-conducting 
is a longitudinal section, and Fig. 3 is a verti. 
cal transverse section, of the same. 
material f in the several flues are hot-air 
in carrying into effect my invention I con- pipes E, the rear end of one of which passes 
3o struct of masonry a rectangular inclosure, A, through the chimney, while the same-named 
with double walls at its sides, as at a. a, and ends of the others pass directly out through 8o 
an intermediate air-space to prevent the radia- that end of the block to receive the external 
tion of heat, and with three compartments, air. The rear ends of these pipes are provided 
one of which constitutes the furnace b, being with valves to regulate the supply of air. The 
35 arranged at one end; the second, which con- forward ends of these pipes enter combustion 
stitutes a combustion-chamber, c, being ar- chamber c in the elbow form, as seen in Figs. 185 
ranged next to the latter, and the third, which and 2. The office of these pipesis to introduce 
is the flue-chamber d, occupying the remaining hot air into the combustion-chamber to pro 
interior portion of the inclosure. The walls mote combustion and to generate increased 
brick or other refractory material. The bot- 
ton of the fiue-chamber d is provided with a from the furnace b through the apertures b', 
double thickness of plank floor, e, and upon and the heat from the combustion - chamber 
that is placed, to the depth of about a foot, a passes into the flues C'through the apertures e. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
wood or coal ashes mixed with a small por- what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 95 
tion of salt, as indicated at f. This promotes Patent, is 
1. The flue-chamber having heat non-con 
evaporation, and takes up sufficient caloric, 
which it gives off to the pan, to prevent the ducting surface, consisting of the double thick 
go of the combustion-chamber are made of fire- draft. 
The heat and products of combustion pass go 
45 heat non-conducting substance, consisting of 
 
2 
295,69 
ness of boards and coal or wood ashes with its flue, and the hot-air pipes, substantially as 
Salt, substantially as and for the purpose set and for the purpose set forth. 
forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
2. The combination of the evaporating-pan presence of two witnesses. 
IO 
MARTIN PETER HAYES, 
5 of the inclosure or block, having the longi. 
tudinal flues, with a heat non-conducting sur- 
face or floor, the furnace combustion-chamber, 
the chimney having an air-space surrounding 
Witnesses: 
F. HoLMESTED, 
JAMES M. HAYES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295269.txt	(No Model.) 
J. T. MILLER. 
TRESTLE FOR SCAFFOLDING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 295,269, 
Patented Mar. 18, 1884, 
 
's 
 
- 
II/ WEAFOR 
c/6/27-27 l222227 
764-26-6-2 
Aitornej 
(No Model.) 
J. T. MILLER, 
TRESTLE FORSCAFFOLDING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 295,269, 
Patented Mar. 18, 1884. 
ITESSES 
m 
INVENTOR 
Aftorney 
 
N. pers. Psato-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. MILLER, OF MEMPHIS, MISSOURI. 
TRESTLE FOR SCAFFOLDING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,269, dated March 18, 1884. 
Application filed August 8, 1883. 
No model. 
O 
65 
To all whom, it may concern: 
sections when expanded, the sections, when in 
Be it known that I, JoHN T. MILLER, a their expanded position, being kept securely 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mem apart by jointed spreaders e, pivotally Se 
phis, in the county of Scotland and State of cured to the standards eat or near their up- 55 
per and lower ends. 
Missouri, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Trestles for Scaffolding; 
To prevent the wire-cord braces from Sag 
ging outwardly when the trestle is folded up, 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
I employ a spiral spring or elastic cord, f, the 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
ends of which are loosely secured around said 6o 
making a part of this specification, and to the 
braces at their point of crossing, the contract 
ing force of said spring or elastic cord acting 
letters and figures of reference marked there 
to take up the slack and draw the wire cords 
O. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
inwardly when the sections are brought to 
gether in their folded position. 
view of my invention ready for use. Fig. 2 is 
a similar view of the same in its folded posi 
The standards 6 of the Sections AB are each 
provided with a groove extending its entire 
tion. 
length, said grooves acting as guides, for 
The present invention has relation to cer 
spring-bolts.g., secured to the lower horizontal 
tain new and useful improvements in that class 
braces, and extending through the standards 
of trestles for scaffolding adapted to be folded 
in a compact form when not in use; and the 
of extensible sections CD, said sections being 
object thereof is to provide a trestle that will 
similar in construction to the ones A, B, with 
be strong, durable, and simple in its construc 
the exception that their cross and horizontal 
tion, and, in addition to the advantage of 
braces are located upon the inside instead of 
folding together when not in use, may be ex 
the outside. Secured to the upper ends of the 75 
25 tended to any desired height, and firmly and 
standards of these sections CD are Suitable 
angle-irons, h, which act as hinges and form 
securely held in such extended position with 
bearings for a cross-piece, E, upon which to 
out danger to the workman, it being capable 
of sustaining a great amount of weight, and 
rest the board or boards forming the stage or 
platform of the scaffolding, said cross-piece 8o 
owing to its lightness and simplicity of con 
being preferably rounded, to prevent the tres 
struction this trestle is easily handled, and 
tles from rocking by the sagging of the stag 
may be readily carried about from place to 
ing or platform. The grooved standards c of 
place, to suit the convenience of its owner, and 
the sections A B are provided with perfora 
is also capable of being manufactured at a 
tions arranged at suitable distances apart, said 
greatly-reduced cost. These several objects 
perforations extending through the ungrooved 
5 above stated I attain by the construction sub 
stantially as shown in the accompanying draw- portion of these standards on a line with the 
ings, and means hereinafter more fully de 
direction of and forming bearings for the 
spring-bolts g of the sections CD, thus ad 
scribed. 
In the drawings, AB represent two sections 
mitting of these lattersections being raised or 
lowered to suit the convehience of the work 
4o of the trestle, provided with cross-braces a, and 
horizontal braces b, the latter being secured to 
a. 
Depending from the upper horizontal brace 
the sections near their upper and lower ends, 
of one of the sections C D is a loop or spiral 
at the termini of the cross-braces. These sec 
spring, i, having hung thereto a ring, k, from 
tions AB have suitably secured to their stand 
which depend cords or wires connecting with 
ards (, near the inner upper ends, wire cords 
a lever, F, pivotally securel to the lower hori 
d, which cross each other and are fastened to 
Zontal brace of said sections, said lever in turn 
the lower inner ends of the standards of their 
being suitably connected to the ends of the 
opposite sections, said wire cords being drawn 
tatt when the sections are expanded, thus spring-bolts (i. 
So forming very strong though extremely light 
To withdraw the bolts from any of the per 
forations in the grooved standards of the sec 
braces, to prevent lateral motion of the said 
3O 
85 
90 
95 
CO 
45 
 
2 
295,269 
so 
55 
tions A B with which they may be engaged, it their upper and lower ends, said sections hav- 45 
is only necessary to draw up the ring k, and 
thereby, through the medium of the cords and 
levers, the bolts are drawn back and the sec 
tions C D raised or lowered, as may be de 
sired. That portion of the bolts which enters 
the perforations in said standards when drawn 
back slides in the grooves, and thus prevents 
the sections from becoming disengaged during 
this operation. 
Though I have described the cords or wires 
as engaging with the pivoted lever, in turn 
connected with the spring-bolts, this lever may 
be dispensed with, and the cords or wires ar 
ranged to engage directly with said bolts; or 
other suitable means may be employed fortheir 
withdrawal. 
The hinged sections CD, if desired, may be 
removed from the sections A Band used as a 
short trestle, it being a trestle in itself when 
thus detached. 
Not only can the sections C D be used for 
an independent trestle, but the ones A B may 
also be thus used, as they are kept firmly apart 
by their spreaderse, and a board or boards 
forming the stage or platform of the scaffold 
ing may be either laid upon the tops of their 
standards or upon the upper horizontal braces. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. Atrestle for scaffolding, consisting of two 
outer expansible sections and two inner sec 
tionshinged together at their tops, these lat 
ter sections being removably connected to the 
outer sections and capable of extension in re 
lation thereto, and when extended securely 
locked and supported in position by the means 
substantially as herein described, the entire 
device being adapted to fold together, as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. The two outer sections, constructed sub 
stantially as described, and provided with 
jointed spreaders pivotally secured at or near 
ing their standards grooved and perforated to 
form guides and bearings for suitable bolts 
connected to the inner hinged sections, as and 
for the purpose specified. 
3. The outer folding sections, constructed as 
herein described, and provided with Wire 
cords adapted to cross each other in opposite 
directions, substantially as shown, to form 
braces when said sections are expanded and 
held apart by their spreaders, and a Spiral 
spring or an elastic cord having its ends loose 
ly secured around said wire cords at their 
point of crossing, as and for the purpose Set 
forth. 
4. The two inner sections, constructed sub 
stantially as described, and provided at their 
upper ends with suitable angle-irons which 
form bearings for a supporting cross-piece, 
and in connection therewith hinges for the sec 
tions, said sections having connected to their 
lower horizontal braces suitable bolts adapted 
to slide in grooves and engage with the per 
forations in the standards in the outer sections, 
and means for operating said bolts, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
5. The two outer sections, constructed sub 
stantially as described, having grooved and 
perforated standards, and provided with wire 
cord braces and jointed spreaders, in combi 
nation with a spiral spring or elastic cord 
loosely secured to said wire braces, and the 
hinged inner sections having a suitable cross 
piece, and provided with spring-bolts and 
means for operating the same, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
JOHN T. MILLER. 
N. E. OLIPHANT, 
GEO. R. PORTER. 
Witnesses: 
- 
75 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295369.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 295,369 
77 
 
sa 
 
WITNESSES 
N. A. DICKINSON, 
TROLLING HOOK, 
Patented Mar 18, 1884. 
4./64 
<-24 
p/ 
ATTORNEYS. 
NWENTOR. 
a 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
NEWTON A. DICKINSON, OF CHESTER, CONNECTICUT. 
TRO LLING - HOOK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,369, dated March 18, 1884. 
Application filed October 4, 1883. 
(No model.) 
O 
I5 pro 
To all livhon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NEWTON A. DICKIN 
soN, a citizen of the United States, and a resi 
dent of Chester, in the county of Middlesex 
and State of Connecticut, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Trolling 
Hooks; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, which form apart 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure I is a perspective view of my im 
roved trolling-hook, and Fig. 2 is a longi 
: 
tudinal section of the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
My invention has relation to that class of 
trolling-hooks which consist of a stick, into 
the ends of which the shanks of the hook and 
the eye to which the line is attached are in 
serted, and having a sinker secured to the up 
per end of the stick and a spring-fender; and 
it consists in the improved construction and 
combination of parts of the same, as herein 
after more fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
indicates a tapering stick, of wood or similar 
material, (rubber, horn, ivory, bone, or any 
material of similar character,) having a sock 
et, B, in its lower end, into which the upper 
screw-threaded end of the hook C is secured, 
and having a reduced upper end, D, forming 
a shoulder, E, over which reduced upper end 
a cap, F, of lead or similar heavy metal, is 
placed, having an aperture in its upper end, 
through which an eyed screw, G, passes into 
the end of the reduced part of the stick, hold 
ing the cap or socket in place, and forming 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
an eye for the attachment of the line. A 
spring rod or fender, H, is secured in the side 
of the cap, and its end reaches near to. and in 
line with the end of the hook, serving to fend 
off any sea-weeds or similar objects which the 
hook may meet with, while it is sufficiently 
elastic not to interfere with the catching of 
the fish which bites on the hook. 
It will be seen that a hook which is simple 
of construction and convenient for attaching 
it to the line is provided, the wooden stick 
forming easy means for attaching the hook and 
the eye into which the line is inserted, and 
the reduced portion of the stick forming con 
venient means for attaching the weight, which 
is held in place by the eyed screw. 
Having thus described my invention, claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States- 
The combination of a tapering stick having 
its upper portion reduced to form a shoulder, 
and having screw - threaded sockets in the 
ends of the same, a hook having a screw 
threaded shank inserted into the lower end of 
the stick, a cap of heavy metal fitting over 
the reduced end of the stick, an eyed screw 
fitting into the upper end of the stick and 
holding the cap in place, and a flexible or 
elastic rod or fender fastened into the side of 
the cap and extending down to near the point 
of the hook, as and for the purpose shown and 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
- 
NEWTON A. DICKINSON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. SULLIVAN, 
GILBERT SULLIVAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295470.txt	(Model.). 
No. 295,470. 
 
G. W. ZEIGLER. 
CARPET swREPER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar 18, 1884. 
(Model.) 
No. 295,470. 
G. W. ZEIGLER. 
CARPET SWEEPER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 18, 1884. 
(Model.) 
No. 295,470. 
 
G. W. ZEIGLER. 
CARPET SWEEPER, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Mar, 18, 1884. 
N. PTERS, Photo-tithographer. Washingtan. I. C. 
' 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. ZEIGLER, OF NORWALK, OHIO. 
CARPET-sweepER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,470, dated March 18, 1884. 
Application filed June 20, 1883. (Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. ZEIGLER, 
of Norwalk, in the county of Huron and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Carpet-Sweepers; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
5. Which Will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
O 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form part of this specification. 
This invention relates to carpet-sweepers; 
and its object is to provide a sweeper possess 
ing Superior advantages in point of simplicity, 
inexpensiveness, durability, interchangeabil 
ity of parts, and general efficacy of parts. 
The invention consists, substantially, in the 
construction and combinations of parts, as will 
be hereinafter described, and distinctly point 
ed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figurel represents a per 
spective view of my carpet-sweeper. Fig. 2 
is an end view, showing the spring journal 
adjusting mechanism and other details. Fig. 
3 is a view, looking toward the back of thema 
chine. Fig. 4is a vertical cross-section through 
the body of the sweeper. Fig. 5 is an inside 
view of one end of the apparatus. Fig.6 is a 
detached view of the toothed brush-cleaner 
and removable shoe. Fig. 7 is an end view of 
the brush-cleaner and shoe. Fig. 8 is a plan 
view of the adjustable spring-journal andle 
ver. Fig. 9 is a view of the double-armed 
bracket; Fig. 10, a perspective view of the 
handle-holder, clearly showing the section of 
screw-thread in the slitted socket. 
A is the top of the sweeper, which is pro 
vided with ribs a, (two or more.) While I 
am aware that ribs in tin or sheet metalwork 
are common and well known, nevertheless they 
serve a peculiarpurpose in this machine. Ex 
perience has demonstrated that these tops will 
not retain their form if made without the ribs 
or beads, and hence they become an impor 
tant factor in the make up of my sweeper. 
B is the end of the sweeper, to which is at 
tached the Working mechanism consisting of 
the driving-wheel C, double-armed bracket D, 
belt-wheels bc, and spring-journal-adjusting 
mechanism d, with the rack e. 
es 
40 
45 
so 
Upon the front of the machine, and in close 
proximity to its bottom, Ilocate what I term 
a carpet-beater, E), provided at its ends 
with rollers, so that when the machine is in 
motion the beater, rapidly revolves, and, be 
ling in contact with the carpet, beats or loosens 
the dust and sand out of the carpet, while the 
brush sweeps it into the box. 
F is the anti-friction roller, which prevents 
the abrasion of the walls when the machine is 
in close proximity thereto. The double-arm 
bracket-piece D retains the driving-wheel in 
position by one of its arms f. The other arm, 
g, has an elongated slot, in which is a screw, 
which secures it to the end of the machine. 
The body of the bracket D has on its inner 
face a spindle, on which the belt-tightening 
wheel is mounted, and which may be adjusted 
by means of the screw and slotted arm g. 
The adjusting-lever and spring journal bear 
ing, as clearly shown by Figs. 2 and 8, is one 
of my novel improvements and is an impor 
tantfeature. This spring is secured to the end 
of the sweeper by one of the stay-rods that 
holds the machine together. The spring has 
two arms, one of which is longer than the 
The long arm h is flattened and pro 
other. 
vided with a tooth-like projection, l, which 
meshes into a rack, e. The end of the brush: 
shafti projects through the end of the sweep 
er, and works in an elongated hole, i, which 
permits the vertical adjustment of the brush 
when worn or for other purposes. The ends 
of the shafti are journaled between the arms 
of the spring-lever, so that when the brush is 
to be raised or lowered in the machine the 
long arm h of the spring is simply moved up 
or down on the rack e. Thus is produced a 
spring supported and adjusting lever in a sin 
gle piece, which works satisfactorily and effi 
ciently, and provides for any lateral play or 
motion, and thus jarring and rattling are pre 
vented. 
Referring to Fig. 3, which shows the handle 
side of the machine, Gis the handle-piece, pro 
vided with a sleeve, k, all in a single piece, 
and which works on the shaft that carries the 
main driving-wheel. It is usual to provide 
handle-sockets with screw-threads; but I do 
away with this and simply have a section of a 
screw or thread, which retains the handle in 
55 
90 
95 
IOO 
g 
295,470 
position much better than if the socket were 
screw-threaded its entire length. The socket 
will be clearly seen by reference to Fig. 10, 
which shows it slitted, so that when the han 
5 dle is screwed in the top of the socket, which 
is slightly larger than the base, it springs the 
socket slightly open, and when the handle is 
in position the socket closes upon the handle, 
holding it firmly, so that as the handle Weal's 
Io the yielding action of the slitted socket pro 
vides for this wear, and thus the handle is al 
ways held tightly in position. The sleeve k 
has at the end of it a spring, so that when the 
handle is thrown up the spring forces it in 
I5 contact with a lip-piece, o, on plate B, which 
holds the handle in a vertical position. The 
lip piece or projection o on the sleeve rests 
against the disk formed on the end of plate B. 
This handle-socket and sleeve are cast in One 
2o piece of malleable iron, being bent into shape 
after casting. Thus the socket for the handle 
is made without a core. 
The bottom of the machine slides in and out, 
but when out it will automatically close itself 
25 by means of a spring, i, which is secured to 
the end of the machine and extends under the 
bottom of the same to near the middle there 
of, where it engages a projection, i, so that 
when the bottom is pulled out by means of the 
3o ring in the spring will throw it back to its posi 
tion. 
Fig. 4 shows a central section of the machine, 
in which is seen one of the carrying-shoes H. 
These shoes project slightly below the body of 
35 the machine. They are somewhat flat and 
have what might be termed a toe, n, and 
are made smooth, so that they do not at all 
wear or scrape the carpet. The pieces that 
form the mouth or opening are provided with 
4o detachable pieces n, so that when they become 
worn new ones may be substituted. Hereto 
fore when these mouth-pieces were worn the 
machine had to be discarded. These mouth 
pieces are so constructed that they will slide 
45 over each other to a shoulder or groove, n, 
which they engage, and are firmly held to 
gether, and at the same time may be readily 
removed. These mouthpieces form another 
prominent feature of my invention. The rear 
so mouth-piece, H, is provided with teeth h', 
whose edges are parallel to the hairs of the 
brush, and also flat, so that they go between 
the hairs or bristles of the brush while in op 
eration, as well as clean them by scraping, and 
55 thus keep them perfectly clean of litter and 
threads. This rear mouth-piece consists of an 
elongated strip slightly concave, its upper edge 
having a series of slits, and the free ends of 
the portions between said slits being bent at 
... At Fig. 5 will be seen an inside view of one 
of the ends of the machine, in which is shown 
: an elongated recess formed by a projecting 
... 
flange, the dotted line representing the ends 
65 of the brush-shank. This recess is made in 
: this form to permit the raising and lowering 
6o-right angles to form teeth. 
N. 
8O 
85 
I am aware that the drive-wheel of a carpet- 75 
of the brush, and the flange is for the purpose 
of preventing threads or other foreign sub 
stances from being twisted around the brush 
shank or hub. 
All the parts of this machine are inter 
changeable, and may be duplicated at any time, 
and some of its parts I wish to claim as articles 
of manufacture. 
sweeper has been heretofore connected with a 
pulley on the brush-shaft by means of an end 
less belt, which latter also passes over pulleys 
on an adjustable bracket. I therefore do not 
broadly claim this. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secureby 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a carpet-sweeper, the combination of 
the brush-driving pulley, the auxiliary pulley 
in rear of the drive-wheel, the drive-wheel, 
the belt passing around the pulleys and over 
the drive-wheel, the bracket having one arm 
pivoted to the stud-bearing of the drive-wheel, 
and another slotted arm adjustable on the 
frame by means of a set-screw, and a tighten 
-ing-pulley journaled in this two-arm bracket, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a carpet-sweeper, the combination, 
with the rotary brush, of the pivoted adjust 
ing-lever having a long and a short arm, be- 95 
tween which the journal of the brush is sup- . 
ported, said lever being adjustable on its pivot 
to vertically adjust the brush, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. In a carpet-sweeper, the combination of 
the casing provided with vertical slots, the 
rotary brush having journals working in said 
slots, the lever pivoted to the casing and bent 
to form a short arm and along arm, between 
which the journal of the rotary brush is re 
ceived, a rack on the side of the casing, and 
a projection on the end of the long arm for 
engaging this rack, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a carpet-sweeper, a case provided with 
a carpet-beater having friction-rolls at its ends, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. In a carpet-sweeper, the combination, 
with the case carrying the rotary brush, of a 
carpet-beater arranged across the front lower 
edge of the case, and provided with fiction 
rollers at its ends, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, in a carpet-sweeper 
having the flanged ends, as described, of the 
- sliding bottom provided with the ring m, and 
the spring i, for returning the bottom and re 
taining it in position, substantially asset forth. 
7. In a carpet-sweeper, the combination of 
the casing carrying the rotary brush, the 
mouth-pieces having the removable shoes at 
tached to their lower ends, the rear mouth 
piece being provided with teeth, the shoe H, 
and the removable bottom, substantially as 
set forth. 
8. In carpet-sweepers, the rear mouth-piece 
consisting of the elongated strip H, slightly I 3o 
concave, and having on its upper edge a series 
of slits, the free ends of the portions between 
I 25 
IO5 
's 
OC 
IO 
II5 
295,420 
3 
9. In a carpet-sweeper, the improved ad- movable spring-shoes sprung over said shoul- I5 
5 between which the journal-bearings are to be tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
said slits being bent at right-angles, substan- with pieces forming the mouth of thesweeper, 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
and provided with the shoulder ns, of the re 
justing-spring having a long and short arm, der and binding against the same, substan 
supported, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
10. In a carpet-sweeper, the improvedhan-my own I affix my signature in presence of 
dle-socket provided with the interior screw- two witnesses. 
threads and with a longitudinal slot, whereby 
Io it is adapted to clasp the handle and take up 
Witnesses: 
the wear of the same, substantially assetforth. 
11. In a carpet-sweeper, the combination, 
GEORGE W. ZEIGLER. 
B. F. MORSELL, 
EDWARD E. ELLIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295570.txt	A. W. L. 0ZIER. 
FIRE ESCAPE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet li. 
Patented Mar. 25, l884. 
 
| | 
| 
3 
Invvn o r. 
Cararrgvi 
/4 titor me 
(No Model.) 
W 
No, 295,570. 
. 
 
 
. 
::: 
: : : i 
; 
F y 2 
# 
Wilm  s se s 
| 
2 
2. 
MM) . 
 
, 
| 
(No Model.) 
No. 295,570, 
A, W LOZIIER, 
FIRE ES CAPE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 25, 1884. 
 
Witmesses, 
| 6 
In ve mvtor 
CUGraha ff. divo 
(No Model.) 
V 
M 
. 
No. 295,570, 
A. W. L0ZIER. 
FIRE ESCAPE 
| 3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Mar. 25, 1884, 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographor, washingtan, o. c 
Atto ir mg 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAMI W. LOZIER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FIRE-ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,570, dated March 25, 1884. 
Application filed February 8, 1883. (No model.) 
TO 
 
- 
- 
i and bolts, thereby forming the door in its en 
o all avhuom, it 7nnually co Fucern,  
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM. W. LOZIER, 
tirety. 
The lower portion of the door may be 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
furnished with a lock, a, formed of the lever 
have invented certain Improvements in Fire 
knob of the signaling devices, as hereinafter 
Escape Apparatus, of which the following is 
described. 
This is covered by a hasp, a*, 
a specification. 
which is secured by a padlock in such manner 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
as to prevent access to the lock a from the. 
fire-escape apparatus permanently combined 
ground, unless such hasp is first i removed, 
with the front of the building in such manner 
and at the same time permit the lock a to be 
as not only to insure effective means of escape N 
operated from the building, as hereinafter set 
to the occupants in the event of fire, but also 
forth. The key or keys to the padlock being 
to be free from the objection incident to the 
left in competent hands, the door may be 
use of the ordinary fixed fire-escape ladder 
opened from the street when legitimate neces 
that it affords a means by which burglars and 
sity exists therefor. 
The upper knobs, also 
other evil-disposed persons may gain access 
indicated by reference-letter a, may be actu 
to the interior of the building. 
ated by occupants of the building from the 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
windows of the latter. 
vide for alarming the inmates of the building 
The door is provided at its inner side with 
in case the apparatus is tampered with, or 
an alarm apparatus, which, as shown in the 
alarming the nighborhood in case the appa 
drawings, is constructed and operated as fol- , 
ratus is suitably operated by the occupants of 
llows: . 
the building in the event of fire. 
A fixed nipple, D, is arranged to receive a 
A further object of the invention is to ena- || 
percussion-cap or equivalent detonating de 
ble escape to be had from the various win 
vice. In line with this nipple, and arranged 
dows of the front of a building to a single fixed 
to slide in suitable guides, d, is a percussion 
ladder, and thence to the ground. 
bolt or striker, E, the head al' of which is ar 
A further object of the invention is to facili 
ranged to act upon the nipple, nd which is 
tate the work of firemen in reaching and ex 
forced toward the same by a spiral or other 
tinguishing the fire, and also to enable the 
suitable spring, f. The bolt or striker E is 
firemen or others to, gain ready and speedy 
connected by a cord, g, with the upper end or 
access to the roof of the building. : 
arm of a triangular block or dog, h, the shoul 
The invention comprises certain novel com 
der b' of which is constructed and arranged to 
binations of parts, whereby said objects are 
catch upon a hook, F, which depends from a 
effectually secured. 
lever, G, which is attached to the spindlem, 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view, in a 
of the knob or handle a, on the outside of the 
plane at right angles to the front of the build 
door, the spindle m passing through and be 
ing, of an apparatus made according to my 
ing supported in a suitable socket or bearing 
invention. Fig. 2 is a front view of the same. 
rovided to the door. . 
Fig. 3 is a front view, on a larger scale, of one 
The parts are so constructed, proportioned, 
portion of said apparatus. Fig. 4 is a plan 
and arranged that when the dog h is turned 
view of the parts represented in Fig. 3, and 
vertical, with its shoulder b' caught upon the 
Fig. 5 is a transverse sectional view of the 
hook F, the bolt IE will be withdrawn from 
same parts. Figs. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 are detail 
the nipple, and sustained against the pressure 
views of another portion of the apparatus. 
of the spring f by the cord g, the latter being 
A is a stationary ladder, which is affixed to 
strained taut, with its upper end carried some 
the front of the building, and extends from 
what past the dead-point or axial line of the 
the ground to the roof. This ladder is in 
bolt E. When the knob at is turned in the 
closed between two side plates, B, one of which 
requisite direction, the hook F lifts the shoul 
has hinged to it a vertical door, C. When 
der b' of the dog h, and thereby throws the 
preferred, the several sections of which this 
dog backward, swinging the cord away from i 
long door is formed may be connected by plates | the axial line of the bolt E, and permitting 
. 
. 
| 45 
55 
'', 
75 
9o , 
IOO 
2 
- 295,57o 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
the spring if to suddenly force the bolt against the saddle and then removing the same, to 
gether with the block Lu and pins r. 
the cap or detonator on the nipple, to sound an 
In order that the vertical ladder may be 
alarm. 
reached from the different windows of the dif 
The knob a is designed to be of easy access 
ferent stories, I further provide certain ad 
from a window of one story of the building. 
juncts constructed for use and operation, as 
In order to open the entire door and to render 
follows: 
the alarm apparatus available from a window 
M' is a separate supplementary ladder, to 
of another story, a rod, n, is extended from 
which is transversely affixed a platform, M, at 
the lever G to a similar lever, G, which is 
one end of which is an opening or passage, n'. 
fixed upon the inner end of the spindle of the 
To the inner end of this platform N are pro 
knob or handle a, so that a movement com 
vided hooks S. The side pins, o, of the plat 
municated from the latter to the lever G' will 
form N are horizontally slotted, as shown at 
communicate a similar movement to the lever 
o', in order that they may be passed astride 
G, to actuate the alarm and open the door from 
of any one of the rounds of the fixed ladder A, 
top to bottom. Any desired number of addi 
with the hooks S caught over the said rounds, 
tional levers, knobs, &c., may be employed, 
thereby firmly securing said end of the plat 
according to the number of stories from which, 
form to such round of said ladder A. Swing 
access is desired to be had to the apparatus. 
ing braces T are pivoted to the outer end of 
By this means the door may be opened and 
the platform N, with their lower parts curved 
the alarm of fire be readily sounded from any 
inward to permit their extremities to be passed 
story. 
behind a lower round of the ladder A, and 
The end of the lever G" is designed to fit into 
there retained, thus holding the platform N in 
a suitable fixed catch, G", after the manner of 
a horizontal position, with the ladder M' ex 
a latch, and thereby retain the door in a closed 
tended laterally, so as to reach windows at 
position. The opening of the door, involving 
substantially the same level, but at a greater 
in such case the lifting of the lever, sounds the 
or less distance from the platform N. The lat 
alarm, so that any attempt at surreptitious 
ter is provided at its outer end with a vertical 
use of the apparatus is at once detected. . 
ladder, U, and said platformN is reached from 
Where the door is to be swung open from the 
the ladder A through the opening or passage 
ground, one of the knobs, with its connected 
n'. The ladder M', with its platform N, may 
lever and rod in, should be placed in conven 
be thus attached to the ladder A at any por 
ient proximity to the ground or sidewalk. 
tion thereof, according as it is desired to afford 
In order to facilitate access to the parts 
connection with any of the windows adjoining 
aforesaid from , adjacent windows, the latter 
the ladder or with the roof of the building. 
are provided with swinging platforms IK, 
The ladder is attached by ring-bolts c to the 
which are hinged at their lower ends to the 
platform, so that it may on occasion be quickly 
Window-sills along the plane of the upper sash, 
removed from the platform, and is further pro 
and which are of skeleton or frame-like form. 
vided with ch?jins A", having hooks B at 
The hinges T', which connect these platforms 
their free extremities. On the sides of the 
to the window-sashes, are each in two leaves, 
window - frames are eyebolts c". When de 
a" b'", with their fastening - screws c' so ar 
sired, the ladder may be detached from the 
ranged that when the platform is placed ver 
platform, and the hooks B", being inserted in 
tically the said screws are covered, and ther? 
the eyebolt c, suspend the ladder as a scal 
by placed boyond the reach of tampering or 
ing-ladder in suitable juxtaposition to the ver 
removal. When the platform is thrown down 
tical Series of windows inmore remote from the 
ward and outward to a horizontal position, it 
fixed ladder A. The hooks B" may ordinarily 
rests across and upon the lintel d'", which sup 
be furnished by the pintiles of the shutters or 
ports the same in position. The platform, 
blinds. The ladder should have a looped rope 
when in a vertical position, is held in place 
or strap, (shown in dotted outline,) which strap 
by pins ?", which pass through holes formedin 
is passed around the back of the neck of the 
the ends of the side pieces of the platform, and 
person adjusting it to the fixed ladder, and 
project into corresponding holes formed coin 
thence under the armpits, so enabling him to 
cidently in the window-frames in the run of 
freely ascend the fixed ladder, and, after sta 
the upper sash. In order that these pins may 
pling the end of the horizontal ladder to the 
not be withdrawn except when required for 
rings of the said fixed ladder, he descends far 
projecting the platform horizontally from the . 
enough to sieze the swinging braces below, and 
window, there is placed upon the end of the 
affixes them to their appropriate rings. 
platform and between the said pins a block, 
It is to be understood that the platform, 
L?, and over this is placed a saddle, M, of 
hinged to the window-sill, and when brought 
metal or other suitable material, which projects 
to a vertical position, as described, constitutes 
downward astride of said block and astride 
a window-guard to protect the window from 
of said end of the platform. This saddle is 
access from the outside, care being taken that 
secured to the platform by a suitable chain 
its upper rail and stop are suitably placed be 
and padlock, so that the platform cannot be 
low the upper sash, to limit its downward 
thrown down by parties from the outside, but 
movement, so that no space sufficient to per 
may be readily projected from the windows by 
mit access over or above the platform, or the 
occupants of the building by first unlocking 
85 
95 
ICDr.) 
I O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
 
, 
, 
- 
upper Sash, when lowered for ventilation, is || 
i afforded. 
Referring to the locking device, that shown 
is the ordinary latch, G', pivoted to the inner 
side of the door, the pivot having the outside 
operating-knob, a, while G" represents the or 
dinary keeper fastened to the casing; but any 
approved form of latch or locking device may 
be used to fasten the door when closed and op 
erated from the outside. 
|- stantially as described. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, in a fire-escape, of a 
ladder, A, permanently fixed withina wall 
casing, B, provided with the catch G", and a 
door hinged to one side of said casing, with a 
locking device and an alarm device, both ar 
ranged upon the inner side of the said hinged 
door, and means, substantially such Mas de 
scribed, for operating said locking device, ar 
ranged upon the outer side of said door, and 
means for protecting said operating i device, 
| substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the fixed wall-lad 
der A, its inclosing-case, and a door hinged to 
one side thereof, of a locking device, in G" G", 
and means, substantially such as described, at 
tached to the inner side of the door for con 
necting said fastening device with an alarm 
device attached to the inner side of the door, 
said connection being such that the act of un 
locking the door will actuate the alarm, sub 
- 3. The combination, with the window of a 
building, of a fixed inclosed wall-ladder, A, 
and a barred platform, K, hinged to the win 
dow-sill in such manner that when raised and 
fastened to form a window-guard it will pre 
vent access to its hinges, and form a stop to 
limit the descent of the upper sash to prevent 
access through the window from the outside, 
and form the means whereby access is had 
from the inside of the building to the operat 
ing device for opening the ladder-case and giv 
ing the alarm. 
| 4. The combination, with the horizontal 
rows of windows of a building, of the fixed 
vertical ladder A, a movable horizontal plat 
form, N, provided with means for attachment 
to the fixed vertical ladder, and a horizontal 
supplemental ladder carried by said platform 
and arranged to project horizontally 
to the 
windows remote from the ladder A, all sub 
stantially as and for the purpose herein set 
5. The combination, with the movable plat 
form N, having arms slotted at their inner 
ends, and having the hooks S, and provided. 
at its outer end with a vertical ladder, u, and 
the braces T, of the fixed vertical wall-ladder 
A, all constructed and arranged for use sub 
stantially as described. 
6. The combination of a nipple, D, percus 
sion rod or striker E, springf, dog h, hook F, 
lever G, and a knob or handle, a, with the 
door and inclosing-casing of the fixed vertical 
ladder A, all substantially as and for the pur 
pose herein set forth. 
forth. 
yn 
 
4. *** 65 
7ON 
75 
' 
295,57o 
3 
7. The adjustable platform K, hinged at its 
lower end to the window-sill, so as to be ca 
cable of being placed horizontally, and of ver 
tical adjustment to cover and guard the win 
dow, and devices, substantially as described, 
for locking the said platform in said vertical 
position, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
8. The ladder M, detachable from the plat 
form N, and furnished with chains and hooks, 
whereby it may be suspended as a scaling-lad 
der from hooks or pintles adjacent to the win 
dow, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein Set forth. 
9. The combination, with the platform K, 
hinged or attached at its lower part, of the 
pins r, saddle M, and block Lu, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
m 
10. The combination, with the platform 
hinged at its lower part, of the hinges T, at 
tached to the platform, and covered thereby 
when the platform is in a vertical position, 
and suitable devices for retaining it in such 
position, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
. 
11. The combination, in a fire-escape, of a 
ladder, A, permanently fixed withina wall 
casing, B, provided with a catch, G", and a 
door hinged to one side of said casing, with a 
locking device and an alarm device, both ar 
ranged upon said door, and means, substan 
tially such as described, whereby said locking 
device is actuated from the outside of said 
casing, for the purpose specified. 
12. The combination of the movable plat 
form N , and the fixed vertical wall-ladder A. 
with devices, substantially such as described, 
whereby said movable platform is suspended 
and braced, substantially as described, for the 
purpose specified. 
13. The combination, with an inclosed fixed 
wall-ladder, A, anda door, C, ofalocking device 
and an alarm device, connected for simulta 
neous operation, as described, and an outside 
knob, a, of the signal device, also actuating 
the locking device, substantially as set forth. 
14. The combination, in a fire-escape, of the 
fixed wall-ladder A, the open wall-casing B B 
therefor, provided with a suitable catch, G", 
and a door, C, hinged to one side of said wall 
casing, with a locking device and an alarm de 
vice, both arranged upon the inner side of the 
door, and means, substantially such as de 
scribed, for actuating the locking and the alarm 
devices from the outside of the inclosing wall 
casing, substantially as set forth. 
15. The combination, with the fixed wall 
ladder A, of a separate attachable platform, 
N, provided with a vertical ladder, u, at its 
outer end, and suitable means for attaching it 
to and supporting it upon the rungs of the 
wall-ladder, the said platform having an open 
ing, m', at its inner end for access from the 
wall-ladder, substantially as described. 
16. The combination, in a fire-escape, of an 
inclosed fixed wall-ladder, and a door, C, pro 
i vided on its inner side with a suitable lock 
9o 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
I IO 
II 5 : 
I2O 
I 25 
A 
|- 
295570 
5 
IO 
ing device and an outside knob, a, for actuat 
ing said door-lock, with a barred platform, K, 
hinged to the window-sill, adapted to form a 
fixed guard to the window, and means where 
by the said outside lock-actuating knob may 
be reached from the windows, substantially as 
herein Set forth. 
17. The combination, with the fixed wall 
ladder A and an open casing, B B, therefor, 
with the inovable platform N, having an open 
ing, n', at its inner end for access thereto from 
the wall-ladder, means for attaching it to the 
rungs of the wall-ladder, and a brace or braces, 
T, hinged to the outer end of said platform, 
- 
and adapted to be supported against the wall I 5 
upon the ladder - rung, substantially as de 
scribed. 
18. The combination of the fixed wall-llad 
der A with a platform adapted for attachment 
thereto, and a supplemental ladder, M', 2o 
adapted for attachment to said platform, all 
arranged, as described, to form a fire-escape, 
substantially as set forth. 
ABRAHAM W. LOZIER. 
Witnesses: 
RUDOLF H. BJELLMAN, 
JAMES A. WHITNEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295670.txt	(Model.) 
E. R. OBER. 
PIANO HAMMER. 
No. 295,670, 
Patented Mar, 25 
1884, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
?? ?ENTOI: 
Attorneys 
UNITED STATES PATEN'T OFFICE. 
EDWIN RUTHVIN OBER, OF WATERBURY, VERMONT. 
PAN O - HAM M E R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,670, dated March 25, 1884. 
Application filed May 
19, 1883. (Model.) 
s 
55 
25 
O 
5 
io alZ vhom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN IR. OBER, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Water 
bury, in the county of Washington and State 
of Vermont, have invented a new and useful 
Piano-Hammer, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings. 
This invention relates to hammers for vi 
brating piano-strings, to vibrate the same and 
cause the sound; and its object is to provide a 
device possessing superior advantages in point 
of simplicity, inexpensiveness, durability, and 
general efficiency. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of one of my improved piano-stringham 
mers. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a detail perspective view 
of the parts separated. Fig. 4 is a perspec 
tive view, illustrating a modification. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
block, which carries the hammer proper, and 
is provided with the usual operating-arm B. 
To the end of this block A is secured a forked 
piece, C, between the sides of which a circu 
lar hammer-disk, ID, is arranged, as hereinaf 
ter specified. The piece C comprises a con 
necting-piece, E, from which projects a screw, 
F, by which it is secured to the block A, and 
two side plates, G. G., at the end of which are 
formed disks H, having conical inner surfaces, 
I, in which are formed central perforations, J, 
one of which perforations is screw-threaded, 
as shown. 
D designates a disk, which forms the ham 
mer, and comprises a hub, L, preferably formed 
of wood, and a main striking surface or pe 
riphery, M, of felt or other suitable material. 
The hub Lis provided with a central perfo 
ration, N, that forms a bearing for the disk, 
and has conical recesses O O formed in its 
ends, to receive the conical surfaces of the 
plates G G when the disk is placed between 
the latter, a suitable textile washer, P, being 
placed between the surfaces II and the bot 
toms of the recesses. A transverse pin or 
screw, Q, is inserted through the perforations 
J J and N, and on this screw the disk is adapt 
ed to turn. 
The operation and advantages of my inven 
tion will be readily understood and appreci 
ated. After a portion of the periphery or sur 
face of the rotary disk becomes hardened by 
usage and contact with the strings, the disk 
can be easily turned on its bearing to bring 
another portion of its periphery into play. 
Thus the whole surface of the disk can be util 
ized and the hammer is rendered very du 
rable, while the tone is preserved. The disks 
can, however, be readily removed by simply 
withdrawing the bearing-screw for substitu 
tion or any other purpose. When it is desired 
that the hammer strike the strings diagonally, 
it is only necessary to turn the forked piece 
that carries the hammer, its screw-connection 
with the block admitting of this movement, 
when the disk will strike the string as full as 
if it were on the same longitudinal plane as 
the string. The conical or concave or con 
vex bearings between the plates and the hub 7o 
of the disk serve to retain the latter securely 
in position. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 4 of the 
drawings, the forked piece is dispensed with, 
and the block A is provided with two up. 75 
wardly-projecting arms, R. R., between which 
the diskis Secured in the same manner, though 
in this instance it is not capable of a lateral 
movement to strike the strings diagonally. 
tofore been formed circular and secured be 
tween the arms of a forked or bifurcated piece, 
so that they are capable of an adjustable ro 
tary movement, by which different portions of 
the periphery are exposed to wear. The forked 85 
piece has also been pivotally connected to the 
head-block, to provide for lateral adjustment 
in relation to said block to alter the position 
of the hammer. I therefore do not broadly 
claim this construction and arrangement of go 
parts. 
I claim as my invention 
As an improvement in piano-hammers, the 
combination of the head-block A, the forked 
piece C, comprising the side plates, GG, hav 
ing end disks formed with conical inner'sur 
faces, I, provided with a central perforation, 
and the top connecting-plate, from which pro 
jects a screw-threaded shank, F, entering a 
corresponding receSS in the end of the block Ioo 
I am aware that piano-hammers have here- 8o 
95 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295770.txt	(No Model.) 
v 
W. K. KIDDER. 
. 
No. 295,770, 
MICROSCOPE, 
Patented Mar, 25, 1884, 
a 
a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
2.96%-e 
JGwy fe?cuer- 
- 
. 
. 
 
N. eTERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington. . 
. 
INVENTOR 
7%azeau 
"%-6-4- 
ATTORNEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. K. KIDDER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MICROSCOPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,770, dated March 25, 1884. 
Application filed February 9, 1884. (No model.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
lingS. 
. . . IC, 
- 
. 
45 
. 
the proper position, it may be put on the lens 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I WILLIAM. K. KIDDER, so as to adhere thereto, or it may be put on a 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New glass plate, G, which is inserted into the body 
York, in the county of New York and State of A in a well-known manner. 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
To one of the binding-posts DD is connect 
ful Improvements in Microscopes, of which 
ed a handle, I, for convenience of manipulat 
the following is a specification, reference be. 
ing the instrument, such posts having a sec 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw. 
ond screw-shank, D', to receive the handle; 
and to preserve the proper circuit of the elec 
The aim of this invention is to produce a 
trical current this handle, as well as the body 
microscope in which the object-such as an 
: 
. . 
. 
A should be insulated. 
insect-may be exposed to the action of an 
In some cases the lens B and its holder ma 
y 55 
electrical current for the purpose of killing 
be dispensed with, as when the object is to be 
or otherwise affecting it while under exam 
viewed through the lens of another and more 
ination; and to this end it consists in the ar 
powerful instrument. 
rangement of binding-posts and electrodes in 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
relation to the lens, as hereinafter described, 
by Letters Patent, is 
the whole being illustrated in the accompa 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
nying drawings, in which- . 
inbefore described, with the body or frame 
Figure 1 is a plan or top view. Fig. 2 is a 
and the lens of a microscope, of the binding 
bottom view. Fig. 3 is a cross-section. 
posts arranged on the body, and constructed 
Similar letters indicate similar parts. 
with electrodes which project inward to a point 
The letter A designates the body or frame 
opposite the lens, substantially as and for the 
of the microscope-in this example cylindrical 
purpose described. 
in form-and B the lens, fitted into the usual 
2. The combination, as hereinbefore de 
holder, C, which in turn is fitted into the body 
scribed, with the body and the lens of a mi 
in a suitable manner. 
croscope, of the binding-posts arranged on 
DD are binding-posts, arranged on the body, 
the body, and constructed with inwardly-pro 
as by means of screw-shank D'D' passing 
jecting electrodes, and the handle connected 
through it, and constructed with electrodes E 
to one of the posts, substantially as 
and for 
E, which project inward to a point opposite 
the purpose described. 
. 
. 
the lens B, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, the 
3. The combination, substantially as here 
terminals of these electrodes being left apart 
inbefore described, with the body or frame A, 
of the binding posts arranged on the body, 
from each other far enough to admit the ob 
ject-such as an insect-between them, so that 
and constructed with electrodes which project 
if the proper conductors are united to the 
inward to a point opposite the lens, substan 
binding-posts and charged with an electrical 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
current the object may be exposed to the action 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
of such current while under examination, 
presence of two witnesses. 
4o whereby a very interesting effect is produced. 
If necessary, the electrodes may have several 
points, as in the form of a small brush. 
For the purpose of bringing the object in 
FRANCIS CLARE BOWEN, 
JAS. S. EWBANK. 
WILLIAM. K. KIDDER. 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 
| 
. 
. 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295870.txt	 
 
 
(No Model.) 
W. H. HOGAN, 
COMBINED BOQUET AND TICKET HOLDER. 
- 
No. 295,870, 
Patented Mar. 25, 1884, 
FIG.l. 
d 
Fig.2. 
al 
R 
FG3. 
6 
e IEE 
a-Rib 
t 
C 
6 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. HOGAN, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO EDWARD W. PASTURE, OF SAME PLACE. 
coMBINED BOUQUET AND ticket HoLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,870, dated March 25, 1884. 
Application filed May 14, 1883. 
(No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. HoGAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented a new and useful Com 
bined Cutter, Bouquet-Holder, and Ticket 
Holder, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention consists of a device embody 
ing the several elements of a bouquet-holder, 
a card or ticket holder, a cutter for cord, 
twine, &c., and a twine or string carrier, and 
also an eyeglass-holder, the device being de 
signed for attachment to the lapel of a coat, a 
vest, or other convenient portion of the dress. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a blank of sheet-brass or 
other metal, of which the main portion of the 
device consists. Fig. 2 is a front view of the 
device with all the parts together. Fig. 3 is 
a side view of the same. Fig. 4 is a bottom 
edge view of the plate when bent into shape. 
Fig. 5 is a view of a detached portion of the 
device. Fig. 6 is an enlarged view of the 
same. Fig. 7 is a view of another detached 
portion. 
Similar letters indicate like parts in the sev 
eral figures. 
In carrying out my invention, I first cut or 
strikeout a blank of sheet-brass or other sheet 
metal, as shown in Fig. 1, and then bend over 
the ends b b and the portion c to the shape 
shown in Fig. 4, and turn down the part d, to 
form a hook. 
Fig. 5 represents a wire having its two ends 
sharpened to allow of their being readily | 
stuck into the cloth of a dress, and is formed 
with two legs, ee, or prongs. The centerg, con 
stituting the head, is bent to for in one com 
lete coil or loop. Then each end or leg is bent 
up to follow the form of the coil gas far as the 
center, and then up straight, as shown at ff, 
as high as the top of the coil g. The ends 
are then bent backward, so as to leave a space 
between the partsff" and the ends forming 
the legs or prongs e e'. This portion, which 
may be called the pin or holder, being 
all in one piece, is connected to the hook d 
by passing one of the ends into the hook and 
turning it so as to bring the hook to the po 
sition shown in Fig. 2. The legs e e are nor 
mally sprung apart, as seen in Fig. 5, and, 
when the loop is attached to the hook d, the 
legs e e are placed within the bent-over ends 
b b of the plate or shield a, whereby the two 55 
parts are held together. When attached to 
the dress, the legs e e are first passed through 
the cloth and then secured in the bent por 
tions b b. The part e of the shield or blank a 
is bent over in the shape shown in Fig. 4. 6o 
Within this bent-over part c is fixed one end 
of a blade or cutter, h, the sharp edge of 
which is at the inner side, and the outer end is 
raised sufficiently to allow of a string, cord, or 
twine to be inserted at the upper end and read- 65 
ily cut. 
Fig. 7 represents an eyeglass-holder. It is 
made of a single piece of wire, the horizontal 
endi of which passes through the bent por. 
tion c and blade h, serving as rivet to the 7o 
blade, and allowing of a slight movement of the 
blade. This holder is bent in the form shown 
in Fig. 7, the central portion, l, passing up 
ward and somewhat in Ward, forming a tongue 
narrower than the backportion, ik, upon which 75 
tongue may be hung an eyeglass or glasses. 
The side i passes by and bears against the 
cross-piece j, by which it is held in position. 
When used as a bouquet-holder, the stem or . 
stems of the flowers are passed through the 8) 
loop g. The loop is also useful for holding 
the end of cord or twine carried about the 
person. The cutter is useful for persons en 
gaged in tying up packages, &c. A car-ticket 
may be held between the pins e e and the 85 
shield a. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A bouquet and ticket holder and cutter 
consisting of the shield a, the holder giff' go 
e e, the cutter h, and the hold k iii, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the holder com 
posed of the loop g, the bent portions fif', and 
legs ee with the shield a, provided with the 95. 
hook d and bent portions b b, the shield be 
ing of a single metal plate, all as shown and 
described. 
In testimony whereofIhave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub- IOO 
scribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM E. HOGAN. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. ADAMS, 
E. W. PASTURE. 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US295970.txt	J. F. APPLEBY. 
GRAIN BINDER, 
5 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 1, 1884. 
- 
 
1 
 
. 
 
(Model.) 
No. 295,970. 
  
 
 
WITNESSES: 
4x6 Z2e24, 
stage 
 
(Model.) 
No. 295, 970, 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. F. APPLEBY. 
GRAIN BINDER, 
Patented Apr. 1, 1884. 
WITNESSES: N 
 
Sos. by's.) 
INVENTOR. 
- 
342.se . ATTORNEY., 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.c. 
: 
 
 
(Model.) 
No. 295,970. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
J. F. APPLEBY. 
GRAIN BINDER. 
- Patented Apr. 1, 1884, 
Sh 
| 
S 
sea 
(s) 
 
 
 
| 
N. | 
 
 
| 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
al - 
S3...? 
N. ETEs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
2, 
InVENTOR 
62 (31242.5i 
(Mode.) 
No. 295,970. 
- 
 
J. F. APPLEBY. 
GRAIN BINDER, 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Apr. 1, 1884. 
nin 
- 
|| 
INVENTOR, 
N. PETERs, Photo-ithographor, Washington, D.C. 
(Model.) 
No. 295,970, 
J. F. APPLEBY. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
GRAIN BINDER, 
Patented Apr. 1, 1884. 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
- INVENTOR. 
ATTORNEY 
. 
JOHN F. APPLEBY, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT 
AND MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE MINNEAPOLIS HARVESTER WORKS, 
OF MINNESOTA, AND JAMES F. GORDON, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
GRAN-BINDER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 295,970, dated April 1, 1884. 
Application filed August 12, 1882. (Model.) 
 
 
 
 
IO 
- 
To all ution it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN F. APPLEBY, of 
Minneapolis, in the county of Hennepin and 
State of Minnesota, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Grain-Binders; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, making part of this application. 
My invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements most applicable to that type 
of grain-binding machines in which thereisa, 
SOrt of gavel-receptacle adapted to receive the 
cut grain discharged from the upper end of 
I5 the elevator of a harvester, and in which the 
grain which is received into said gavel-recep 
tacle, is automatically packed into gavei form, 
is bound into sheaves by a binder mechanism 
proper, which operates periodically, and is 
20 discharged, when bound, from the lower end 
of Said receptacle, although some of the fea 
tules of my said invention may be used with 
more or less advantage in grain-binding ma-. 
chinery of a different type. 
25 My invention has for its main object to ren 
der more efficient and certain the property 
ing up of the gavel within the band of cord, cam-and-rack wheel detached. 
(to form a sheaf,) and to render the binding 
machinery capable of tying up the graintighter 
3O Without any great or unusual strain on either 
the cord or the binding mechanism; and to 
this end and object my invention consists in 
the novel feature of construction and opera 
tion of the knotting device, hereinafter to be 
35 more fully described, and which will be found 
more particularly pointed out and specified in 
the claim of this application. 
To enable those skilled in the art to which 
my invention appertains to fully understand 
4O and practice the same, I will now proceed to 
more fully explain it by reference to the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of this 
specification, and in which I have illustrated 
the Several features of my said invention car 
45 ried out in a form in which I have successfully 
practiced it in a working machine, and which 
manner of carrying out my invention is the 
best now known to me, though practice and 
experience may indicate, either to me or to 
others, some better way of carrying the same 50 
into practical operation. 
In the said drawings, Figure 1 is a side ele 
vation of so much as seems necessary to be 
shown of a grain-binder embracing the several 
features of my said invention. Fig. 2 is a top 55 
view of the same, looking at the mechanism at 
right angles to the inclined plate Kin the di 
rectionindicated by the arrow at Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a section at the line at a of Figs. I and 2. 
with the parts viewed in the direction indi- 6o 
cated by the arrows gain said figures. Fig. 
4 is a similar sectional view, but showing the 
knotter raised up and to its highest position. 
Fig. 5 is another similar view, but with the 
knotter depressed to its lowermost position. 65. 
Fig. 6 is an elevation showing the opposite 
side to that exhibited at Fig. 1, and showing 
only the cam-and-rack wheel, the pinion which 
engages therewith, and the sheaf-discharging 
arms. Fig. 7 is a partial vertical section at 7O 
the line y if of Fig. 2. 
Fig. Sis a similar view, 
but with the vibratory knotter-frame and its 
attachments in a different position, and With 
the position of the cam that lifts said frame 
changed. Fig. 9 is a detail face view of the 75 
Fig. 10. is a 
detail view to illustrate in top view the cord 
holder or clamp, (the parts being in the rela 
tive position they occupy when the cord is 
clamped by the holder.) Fig. 11 is a detail 8o 
sectional View at the line y y of Fig. 10, but 
showing the slide of the cord-holder drawn 
back as it would be at the time of the release 
ment of the cord. 
ever illustrated, will be found designated by 
the same reference-letter. 
A is the driving-shaft, from which are de 
rived the motions of all the parts of the binder, 
except those of the needle-arm, the packers, 90 
and the compressor, which acts in opposition 
to the needle-arm, (if there be one.) Said shaft 
is mounted in the frame of the binder in 
about the usual manner seen in what is known 
in the market as an Appleby' binder; and 95 
it carries the cam-and-rack wheel B, also a 
cam-wheel, C, which operates the upper cord 
pusher, the lower pusher, the cord-knife, and 
In the several figures the same part, wher- 85 
. 
. 
- 
; 
. . . 
2 
295,970 
IO 
20 
the slide of the cord-holder, (all as will be 
presently more fully explained,) and also a cam, 
D, which operates to lift the knotter-frame E, 
in a manner to be presently explained. 
5 The knotter-frame E is hung at its bifur 
cated end on a counter-shaft, F, on which it 
Swings axially of said shaft to a given extent, 
for the purpose of the elevation and depres 
Sion (as occasion may require) of the knotter, 
G, the lifting of the knotter and of said frame 
being effected by the cam D, and the extent to 
which said frame can be thrown up being re 
stricted by a stop, H. The shaft F is mounted 
to turn freely in the bearing-boxes at at a in 
the casting or metallic stand b of the binder, 
and while it serves as the pintle about which 
the frame E vibrates it acts also to drive, 
through the medium of beveled gears c and d, 
the shaft or spindlee of the knotter. Motion 
is imparted to the shaft F, for the purpose just 
mentioned, by a spur-pinion, I, which periodi 
cally engages with and is once rotated by the 
teeth J of the cam-and-rack wheel. This spur 
pinion I is formed or provided with three lat 
eral projections or lug-like devices, f, g, and 
h, the first and third of which, acting together, 
serve to hold the pinion from turning while 
the wheel B is making a certain part of its 
revolution, while the one lettered g is for the 
purpose of turning the shaft e back a quarter 
turn by the action of a cam-like projection, 
i, of wheel B, and the one lettered h acts by 
itself as a stop to the return movement of said 
knotter-shaft e, all as will be hereinafter more 
Kis the metallic platelocated above and form 
ing, so to speak, the usualtop or roof-like por 
tion of the gavel-receptacle. This plate K is 
slotted or cut out at j for the passage through 
it of the forward portion or end of the needle 
arm, and has the slotted partif formed so that 
the cord will be properly guided as the needle 
arm lays it over the knotter, and so that the 
upper fold or portion of the cold for the sheaf. 
band Willie immediately beneath the horizon 
tal shoulder portion f of said cut-out portion. 
L is the upper and M the lower cord-push 
er, while N is the cord-knife. All three of 
these devices are formed on or secured to car 
riage O, which slides in suitable guide-ways, 
k: k, on the plate K, and which is moved back 
and forth by one end of a lever, P, which at 
its opposite end is pivoted to an arm, l, of the 
frame b, the saidlever P being vibrated at the 
proper time and to the requisite extent by the 
action of cam C on an anti-friction roller piv 
oted to lever P at the point in. 
On the cam-wheel C is a calm-like lug por 
tion, n, which strikes at the proper time 
against the roller 0, for the purpose of forcing 
back (to open the cord-holder) the sliding bar 
Q. This bar Q is moved and held in the 
opposite direction (to keep the cord-holder 
closed) by a strong spiral Spring, q, and its op 
65 erative end is made rounding, as shown, SO as 
to coact,in a manner to be presently explained, 
with a stationary 1ecessed piece, R, for the 
35 fully explained. 
55 
45 
75 
85 
purpose of holding fast on or clamping the 
cord. This piece R is formed with a small 
horn, r, for a purpose which will hereinafter 
appear. 
The knotter is very analogous to the kind 
used in the well-known Appleby binder, and 
is composed of a bill-like device, s, having 
combined with it a swinging jaw-piece, t, the 
heel at of which is acted on by a strong spring 
plate, v. A little way below the bill of the 
knotter is a cord-rest, c, the operation of which 
will be presently explained. 
In the operation of my improved machine 
the parts shown in the drawings work sepa 
rately and together, as I will now explain. 
Supposing the knotter to be elevated to that 
position where it must be when the roller in 
of the swinging frame E is resting on the cir 
cular part of the periphery of cam D, and 
supposing, also, the banding-cord is held fast 
between the slide Q and stationary jaw R of 
the cord-holder, the gavel is formed in the 
loop of the cord about as usual, and when the 90 
binder devices proper start into operation, 
the needle-arm carries the second fold of the 
cord over and around the gavel (about as usual) 
and lays it over the bill, and jaw of the knot 
ter, (these two parts being closed together at 95 
this time and the knotter in a horizontal po 
sition,) carrying said fold of the cord down be 
low and placing it alongside of the slide Q of 
the cord-holder. The shape of the slot in 
plate K is such as to insure the guidance of IOO 
this second fold of the cord, so that it will be 
properly laid over the knotter along with the 
first fold, (that comes from the cord-holder up 
ward, thence over the knotter, and thence 
downward under the gavel.) The second fold IO5 
of the cord is guided to a position such that, 
after leaving the knotter, it passes obliquely 
upward and beneath the ledge at f of plate K. 
The next operations now are by the knotter . 
and the carriage O, the former of which is I IO 
lifted to its highest position, while at the 
same time the upper and lower pushers, L 
and M, of said carriage operate, the former 
to push the upper part of the second fold 
of the cord well along beneath the ledge j', 
and the latter to push the lower part of said 
fold of the cord along to a position near the 
end of slide Q and between it and the horn '. 
By these operations the holding down of the 
upper fold of the cord at a short distance from 
the knotter is insured, and the direction in 
which this fold of the cord runs off from the 
top of the knotter is so changed (by the ele 
vation of the knotter bodily) that when the 
knotter shall subsequently turn there will be I25 
no possibility of the cord being missed by the 
bill and jaws as they turn the cord over and 
around themselves. The knotter, when thus 
raised to its highest position, is carried up to 
a point such that, in descending therefrom to 
its lowermost position, it will have an oppor 
tunity to take up or Wind up on itself all the 
cord necessary to be taken up of the two folds 
running from the knotter down toward the 
II5 
I2O 
 
295,97o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
cord-holder. Of course, when the knotter as 
cends, as first explained, to the highest posi 
tion, its bill and jaw slide against both folds 
of the cord that lie over the knotter, (one of 
5 which folds is held down to the cord-holder 
over the other by the needle-eye,) and when 
the knotter descends it rotates at the same 
time on the axis of shaft e, to do the tying up 
of the knot. The descent of the knotter is 
IO. caused by the pull thereon, or, in other words, 
by the winding up on the knotter of the two 
folds of the cord, together with the gravity of 
the knotter-frame, &c.; but this descentis reg 
ulated and timed by the shape of a portion of 
the periphery of cam D. Inasmuch as the de 
scent of the knotter and the tying up of the 
cord occur while the needle-arm is about fin 
ishing its forward stroke, it follows that the 
final compression of the gavel between the 
needle-arm and the opposing compressor will 
occur just at the right time to prevent any 
undue strain on the cord while being tied up 
close around the bundle by the action of the 
knotter, and this timing, so to speak, of the 
25 operations of the compressing and tying de 
vices is important. In forming the knot dur 
ling the descent of the knotter (as just ex 
plained) the bill portion or heads and the jaw 
it operate together about in the manner these 
3o parts workin the knotter of what is well known 
in the market as the Appleby binder; but 
to avoid any slipping off of the lower fold of 
the cord during that part of the knotter's revo 
lution where the bill and jaw are in nearly or 
35 quite a vertical position, a retaining device, 
0, is added, which acts to hold up and on the 
knotter the lower fold of the cord. This re 
tainer c, extending, as it does, from the piece 
carrying the spring , is temporarily locked 
4O fast to the bill and jaw of the knotter at the 
time the latter completes the tying operation, 
so that, during a quarter-turn backward of 
the knotter, (to permit the drawing off of 
the knot,) this retaining device is obliged to 
45 turn down into a vertical position, and hence 
does not at such time interfere with the pull 
sing off of the knotted cord. The retaining de 
vice at is made quite thin, and is placed close 
up to the head of the knotter, and as no strip 
ping device is required, it will be seen that 
the head of the knotter can work close up to 
the plate K, and consequently close up to the 
bundle of grain. The great advantage, of 
course, of this is that the knot can be tied so 
close to the grain that no slack in the band 
will be left for the grain of the sheaf to ex 
pand into. 
The capacity of the knotter to permit the 
pulling off of the knot and to work close up 
O to the grain arises from the following novel 
mode of operation, viz: After having com 
pleted its revolution about the axis of shafte, 
(affected by the engagement of the teeth J of 
the cam-and-rack wheel with the pinion I,) 
65 the knotter is turned backwardly a quarter 
revolution, so as to have its bill point down 
ward, (the retainer w being turned with it.) In 
. 
75' 
... 
3 
this position, it will be observed, the tied 
knot can easily be pulled off of the bill by the 
discharge of the sheaf, which is swept out by 7o 
the sheave-discharging arms UU; but to ex 
pedite and insure the extrication of the knot 
from the bill and jaw of the knotter, the lat 
ter is bodily lifted or elevated at the same 
time that the sheave-discharging arms sweep 
1 the bound bundle out of the gavel-receptacle. 
The lifting of the knotter assists the extrica 
tion of the knot in two ways, viz: first, by 
pulling in opposition to the pull of the out 
going sheaf; and, second, by reason of the bill 8o 
and jaw (as they are swung up in the arc of a 
circle) getting more in line with the down 
pulling, doubly-folded cord, which latter de 
scends past the root or bottom of the slot or 
cut-out of plate K. The backward movement 85 
of the knotter is positively assured by the ac 
tion of a lug or tappet, i, of the rack-wheel 
B coming against the projection h of pinion 
I, and causing a quarter-turn of the latter, 
though in some cases, with the knotter made 9O 
a little differently, this back movement of the 
latter might be affected wholly by the pull of 
the outgoing sheaf. Of course, the first fold 
of the cord will have been released and the 
second fold of the cord (held in the cord-95 
holder) will have been cut during the fore 
part of the ascending movement of the knot 
ter. As the cord-holder lets go of the first 
fold of the cord, the latter is pulled up out of 
the way, and, in reclosing, the cord-holder Ioo 
clamps only the second fold, (above the needle 
eye,) which second fold, having been pushed 
to the right place by pusher M, naturally 
draws into the bite of the cord-holder. 
At 
this time the knife N is forced hard against 
the second fold of the cord, and then, as the 
knotter ascends, the action of the knife dur 
ing its further movement is facilitated by the 
rise of the knotter. The backward quarter 
turn of the knotter occurs, it will be under- IIo 
stood, immediately after the releasement of 
the first fold, the clamping of the second, and 
the cutting of the latter, (which three opera 
tions occur in rapid succession.) As the knot 
ter in rising to assist the extrication of the 
knot goes on and up to its highest elevation, 
it follows that the escape of the bound bun 
dle is facilitated by the knotter pulling the 
tied ends of the cord away from the bottom 
of the slot in plate K. The knotter now par 
tially descends to its first-mentioned position, 
the shoulder at b of the wheel B coming 
against the lugg of pinion I, and turning the 
shaft e so as to place the bill (and closed jaw) 
of the knotter in a horizontal position, ready 
to tie another bundle. 
It will be seen that the cord-holder is formed 
of the clamping end of slide Q and the recessed 
device R, and that these parts, where they 
come together, are designed to be shaped to 
match perfectly together, and are semicircu 
lar. By this construction a strong bite is ob 
tained, the cord being pressed tighter at the 
impinging ends of the semicircles or arcs than 
130 
Io5 
115 
2O 
I25 
4 
295,970 
at the point where the middle portions of the 
arcs come against the cord. Every time the 
point of the needle ascends it lays the cord 
running from the bite of the cord-holder be 
neath and upwardly around the outside of and 
against the horn or prong )", and every time 
the needle descends to encircle the gavel with 
cord it lays the next fold of the cord alongside 
of the slide Q and clear of the prong r, so that 
when the pusher M shall move forward it will 
push the latter fold up near to the point where 
the slide Q and piece R come together, from 
whence said cord-fold will naturally be drawn 
into the bite of the cord-holder when the lat 
ter opens to let out the fold already held in it. 
The functions of the horn rare these: First, 
it helps to hold fast the clamped cord, since 
the latter takes a partial turn around it as it 
passes from, the cord-holder beneath and up 
past the side of said horn; second, it prevents 
any entanglement of the outgoing and incom 
ingfolds of the cord, since onefold passes down 
from the cord-holder, and thence up outside of 
the horn, while the other fold is pushed in a 
vertical condition past the lower crooked end 
of the first-named fold; ald, third, it insures 
the clearing of the released first fold of the 
cord from the cord-holder when the latter is 
closing on the second fold, because at this time 
the first fold being pulled upward, the lower 
crooked end is forced by the horn to come 
away from the cord-holder, instead of possi. 
bly dangling in a pendent position over the 
cord-holder, where its lower end might be 
caught in the closing of the slide Q to grip the 
new fold. 
The construction and timing of the cams and 
other parts are such, it will be seen, that the 
cord-holder quickly releases the clamped fold 
of the cord just about as the knotter has com 
IC 
25 
35 
5O 
45 
pleted its tying revolution, and then, after the 
knotter has moved up somewhat, to pull out 
the end of the cord released by the cord-holder, 
the latter closes by the action of its spiral spring 
and clamps the second or outer fold of the cord. 
Then, during a slight rest of the knotterin one 
position, the knife comes up and pushes 
against this secondfold, so that when the knot 
ter resumes its ascending movement it will as 
sist the knife in its work. 
In order to more easily move the slide Q in 
opposition to the spring q, and with the quick 
motion requisite, I use the cam-like device in, 
acting on the anti-friction roller o, and mount 
the latter and the rear end of slide Q on a piv- 55 
ot, a, arranged at the upper end of the link 
c", (hung by a pivot, e, to the stand f',) and 
provide the rear end of the slide Qwith a roller, 
g", which rides on the curved track or way i". 
In this way all the twisting strain on the slide 6o 
when the rollerois struck by camp is avoided 
and the parts are made to work smoothly and 
durably. 
As certain matter herein shown and de 
scribed but not claimed is claimed by me in 65 
my patent of April 24, 1883, No. 276,519, filed 
March 29, 1883, (which is a division of this 
case.) I hereby disclaim in this case all such 
matter claimed in my said patent. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 7o 
Letters Patent, is 
A knotter which moves bodily toward the 
cord-holder during its revolution, (and the 
tying operation,) substantially as set forth. 
this 11th day of July, 1882. 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand 75 
JOHN F. APPLEBY. 
In presence of - 
JACOB FELBEL, 
ROBERT BLISSERT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296070.txt	... (No Model.) . 
No. 296,070, 
 
E. R. UTZ. 
FENCE POST, 
Patented Apr. 1, 1884. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD RUTZ, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIs. 
FENCE. POST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 296,070, dated April 1, 1884. 
m 
Application filed November 27, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
15 
to hold the post securely in position. When 
in position, the lower end of the post enters 
the ground for a few inches. 
The lower end 
of the post, from the ground-line upward a 
short distance, I fill with cement, or a block, 
of Wood, c, or other suitable material, is in 
serted therein, whereby greater strength and 
firmness are imparted to the post. 
The strips. 
B, hereinbefore referred to as passed through 
the openings formed in the lower end of the 
post, are provided at their upper ends each 
With an inwardly-projecting lug or head, d, 
which presses against the side of the post, and 
serves to bring the edges of the sheet from 
which said post is formed more closely to 
gether, and also to hold the cement or wooden 
block c in position more securely. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWARD RUTZ, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Fence-Posts, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
ings. My invention relates to an improved post. 
The object it has in view is to construct a post 
which will be strong and cheap, and in the 
manufacture of which no expensive or com 
plicated machinery will be used. 
To the accomplishment of the above the in 
vention consists of the novel devices and com 
bination of devices as will be described and 
claimed. 
What I claim is 
Reference will be made to the accompany 
1. A hollow triangular post formed of a 
ing drawings, in which Figure represents a 
single sheet of metal, and provided near its 
section of fence in which my posts are used; 
lower end with suitable openings, in combi 
nation with metal strips passed through said 
Fig. 2, a vertical section through one of the 
posts; Fig. 3, a perspective of the same; Fig. 
openings, and provided withinwardly-project 
ing lugs or heads for forcing the edges of the 
4, a section on line 11 of Fig. 2, and Fig. 5 a. 
metal sheet together, as set forth. 
Like letters refer to like parts in each view. 
2. A hollow triangular post formed, of a 
I form the post A of a single sheet of metal 
single sheet of metal, and having its lower end 
by bending such sheet to a triangular shape, 
filled with suitable material, in combination 
With its edges nearly meeting, and I also pre 
with metal strips passed through openings in 
fer to have the post tapering, gradually grow 
said post, and provided with inwardly-pro 
ing larger from top to bottom. In one face of jecting lugs or heads for forcing the edges of 7o 
the post I cut notches a, in which the wires.a. the sheet together and holding the filling ma 
... are inserted, and held. At points near the 
signature in 
lower end of the post, and in each of the three 
faces thereof, I provide two openings, b b', 
situated one above the other. A metal strip, 
B, is passed through each of the openings b, 
and then through the corresponding opening, 
b', after which it enters the ground and serves 
M. J. CLAGETT, 
LOUIS NOLTING. 
w 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my 
terial in place, as set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
EDWARD RUTZ. 
Witnesses: 
25 similar view on line 22 of Fig. 2. 
40 
45 
55 
65 
... 3O 
35 
: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296170.txt	(No Model.) 
0. E. HINKLIN. 
WATCH WINDING MECHANISM, 
No. 296,170, 
Patented Apr. 1, 1884, 
 
442 as A 
Air/2Zaza A 
ar 
Azziz/2: 
Azazz AAAZZZ 
Ay so st 
N. PETERS, holo-Lithographer. Wasilington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ORREN E. HINKLIN, OF MILFORD CENTRE, OHIO, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND 
MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, OF TWO-THIRDS TO ALBERT B. ROOTS, OF SAME 
PLACE, AND WALTER ALLEN, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
WATCH - WIND NG MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 296,170, dated April 1, 1884. 
Application filed January 2, 1883. 
(No model.) 
25 
O employed. 
To all, Luhon, it may concern, 
Be it known that I, ORREN E. HINKLIN, of 
Milford Centre, in the county of Union and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and use 
5 ful Improvement in Watches, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a watch in which 
two mainspring - drums having cog - circles 
meshing with a pinion in a spur-wheel are 
The object of my invention is to so construct 
the winding department that the watch can be 
wound back and to the right hand, the deface 
ment of the dial-plate being thus prevented; 
I5 to locate all the winding and driving mech 
anism between the cap-plate, top plate, and 
the pillar-plate, so as to reduce the thickness 
of such a watch; to simplify the construction 
by making a single ratchet-wheel on the wind 
2c ing-arbor do duty for both mainsprings by 
being engaged by a single ratchet-pawl; to 
enable the watch to run longer; to provide a 
device capable of adaptation to stem-winding 
mechanism and to any escapement. 
My improvement consists in the construc 
tion described hereinafter, and pointed out in 
the claim. 
In order that my invention may be fully un 
derstood, I will proceed to describe it with 
3o reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure l is a rear view of a watch-move 
ment embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
similar view, from which portions of the hous 
35 ing-plate have been removed to expose the de 
tails of my winding mechanism. Fig. 3 is a 
section on the lines a ac. 
A is the front and B the rear plate of a 
watch-movement. 
C is a shield or cap to protect and journal 
the two springs pivots did and the winding 
arbor G, and formed with recesses e, e, andf. 
I employ two mainspring - drums, D D, 
containing, respectively, two similar main 
45 springs, which, being of the customary con 
struction, are not shown in the drawings. The 
shafts did of said springs have two precisely 
similar spur-wheels, E. E. occupying the re 
cesses e e', said spur-wheels both gearing into 
5O an intermediate wheel, F, occupying recessf 
of the cap, and upon the winding-arbor G. 
55 
75 
fo 
The arbor G extends through the rear or pil 
lar plate in the manner shown. A ratchet 
pawl, L, engages a ratchet-wheel, M, on the 
arbor G. A spring, N, keeps the ratchet 
pawl I in engagement with the ratchet-wheel. 
Each drum has a spur-wheel, as shown at H 
and H, in the same plane, so as to engage the 
nearly - opposite sides of the internuediate 
pinion, I, mounted on whose shaft is a Spur 
wheel, J. that gears into the hour-hand pinion 
K. By this means I provide within the com 
pass of an ordinary Watch-movement and be 
tween the customary housing-plates two main 
spring Systems, which, being simultaneously 
wound by a single customary right-hand wind 
ing-arbor, both act on the train, and are capa 
ble of continuing it in motion for a week or 
other protracted period, depending on the 
aggregate strength of the springs. The inter 
position of an additional speed-wheel and 
pinion at least doubles the number of rota 
tions of the hour-hand relatively to those of 
the spring-barrel, this of course imposing a 
greater labor on the spring, which is over 
come hy doubling the spring-power. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
In a watch, the combination of front plate, 
A, rear plate, B, shield or cap C, formed with 
recesses e ef, two mainsprings' drums, D D, 
having spur-wheels El H" in the same plane, 
intermediate pinion, I, with which the drum 
spur-wheels engage, spur-wheel J on the in- 85 
termediate pinion-shaft, hour-hand pinion en 
gaged by the spur-wheel J, mainsprings shafts 
d d, journaled in the cap, spur-wheels EE" on 
the springs' shafts, occupying the recesses e e', 
winding-arbor G, extending through the rear 
plate and cap, spur-wheel F on the arbor, oc 
cupying the recess f and meshing with the 
springs spur-wheels EE, a ratchet-wheel, M., 
On the arbor, and a Spring ratchet-pawl to en 
gage the ratchet, as set forth. 
In testimony of which invention I hereunto 
set my hand. 
95 
ORREN E. HINKLIN. 
Attest: 
GEO. LYONs, 
JAS. SAGER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296270.txt	(No, Model.) 
E. R. BRY ANT, 
ATTACHMENT FOR METAL, PLANERS, 
Patented Apr. 1, 1884, 
N0. 296,270, 
A 2tes : 
Zaz e-za o 2 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer. Washingtor, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN R. BRYANT, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE ROCH 
ESTER MACHINE TOOL WORKS 
, (LIMITED,) OF SAME PLACE. 
ATTACHMENT FOR 
META- PLANERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 296,270, dated April 1, 1884. 
Application filed August 27, 1883. (No model. 
55 
to all Ithon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN, R. BRYANT, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
5 Improvement in Attachments for Iron-Plan 
ers, which improvement is fully set forth in 
the following specification and accompanying 
drawings. 
Much practical difficulty is experienced by 
Io machinists in plaining the under surfaces of 
work with the iron-planers as ordinarily con 
structed, crooked and awkward-shaped tools 
having to be provided for the purpose, which, 
on account of their shape and length, spring 
15 away from the work when the cut being taken 
is at all heavy, and the use of which tools is 
attended with other disadvantages and incon 
veniences. 
To produce a simple attachment for such a 
2d planer, designed to hold a simple cutting-tool 
rigidly in position to plane under-surfaces and 
provide the same with certain features of ad 
justment and other desirable capabilities, is 
the object of my present invention. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
front elevation of my improved attachment, 
shown as secured to the apron of the planer 
by means of the tool-clamping bolts of the 
same, showing the tool in position to operate; 
Fig. 2, a top view of the same, looking in the 
direction indicated by arrow 2 in Fig. 1, some 
of the parts being shown in different position; 
and Fig. 3, a side elevation of the same, viewed 
as indicated by arrow y in Fig.1. 
Referring to the parts, A is the swinging 
slide, and B the apron, of an iron-planer, as 
commonly constructed, and C the taper bolt, 
holding the apron in place against the slide A. 
The swinging slide is constructed to swing 
4o in a vertical plane upon the cross-slide (not 
shown) in the usual manner. 
Fare the usual tool-clamping bolts, extend 
inghorizontally out from the face of the apron. 
G is a block of iron, forming the body of my 
improved attachment, which I attach directly 
or indirectly to the swinging slide A, so that 
it shall partake of the various motions of said 
slide. This block or body may be made a 
separate piece from the apron and secured 
thereto by means of the clamping-bolts for 5o 
holding the tool, or it may be made in one 
piece with the apron and secured to the ver 
tical slide A, by means of the taperbolt C, be 
tween the projecting sides D, a separate apron 
of usual construction for holding the cutting 
tools being also provided for the planer. I 
prefer, however, the form as shown, in which 
the body is provided with holes adapted to 
slip over the clamping-bolts F of the apron, 
the ordinary clamp for the tools having been 
first removed, the back surface of the body, 
when in place, resting against the face c of the 
apron. The clamping-nuts I bear against 
seatse, formed on the face of the body G, which 
holds the body rigidly to the apron and indi 
rectly to the swinging slide. The body G is 
provided with a longitudinal opening, into 
which is fitted a tool stock or shaft, K, pro 
vided at its lower end with an opening in 
which to receive a cutting tool, b, all being 
clearly shown in Fig. 1. The upper part of 
the body is cut away, forming a cavity, g, in 
which is fitted a circular plate, H. The tool 
stock pierces the plate H at its center, as 
shown in Fig. 2, and these two parts are con 
nected, so as to turn together, by means of a 
key or feather, a, secured to the plate in a 
slot, f, in position to slide in a longitudinal 
race, d, of the tool-stock. A set-screw, t, 
passing horizontally through the plate and 
pressing against the key a, holds the plate 
and tool-stock rigidly together; but when 
thus held they may turn a short distance on 
their bearings within and upon the body G, 
as will be fully explained further on. By 85 
loosening the set-screw at the tool-stock may 
be longitudinally adjusted within the body 
and plate H, for the purpose of bringing the 
tool to the work. The plate has an extended 
art, k, the ends or faces n n of which are go 
P 
arranged to meet the respective faces, pp, of 
projecting parts of the body G when the tool 
stockis turned within the body, sufficient space 
being left between the opposing faces to admit 
the tool-stock to thus turn a short distance. 
A sectoral block, h, is fitted to fill the space 
between the opposing faces at either end of the 
| extended part it, being held in either position 
95 
7 5 
SO 
25 
45 
2 
296,270 
IO 
25 
85 
Zontal plane, but will deviate therefrom or 
of adjustment by means of a pin, i, extending 
move in an oblique plane and in such a man 
out both ways from the opposing faces of the 
ner that the said point will take a lower posi 
block and made to enter a hole, 0, in the body. 
tion as it moves away from its position when 7O 
The block is of such a size as to hold the tool 
cutting on either side of the body--that is to 
5 stock, when the end of the part l is brought 
say, the point of the tool will be lower when 
against it, in either position of adjustment, in 
in the position shown at lithan it will be when 
such position that the toolb will standparallel 
in the position shown at b. This dropping of 
with the face of the apron, as shown in Fig. 2. 
the point of the tool assists in freeing it from 75 
In each case the block h is inserted in place 
the work, so that it will not drag when the 
nearer the point of the tool and forms a stop 
work is running back. 
for the tool-stock, to prevent the tool being 
In attaching my invention to the swinging 
swung too far around by the work pressing 
slide of a planer, I do not confine myself to the 
against its point. The space at the other end 
use of the apron and clamping-bolts for the 
of the part k allows the tool-stock to turn in 
tool. This attachment may be formed to fit 
the opposite direction for the purpose of car 
and be secured directly to the swinging slide, 
rying the tool away from the work when the 
to partake of its vertical and oblique motions. 
latter starts back from the reverse motion of 
It is well understood that the apron is hung 
the planer. The tool is secured in place in the 
stock by means of a simple set-screw, ', as at the top, so that it will swing out at the 
bottom for the purpose of relieving the point 
of the tool when the work is running back, in 
doing upper-surface planing. This motion of 
the apron, if the latter be used, needs to be 
prevented while doing under-surface Work, 90 
for if it occurred it would cause the tool to 
catch onto the work and break when the latter 
started back. It will be easily understood 
that removing the apron entirely and clamp 
ing the attachment directly and rigidly to the 
swinging slide would be a proper and legiti 
mate mode of attaching the same. If attached 
to the apron of the swinging slide, the former 
would have, by some simple means, to be se 
cured rigidly to the latter, so that it could not 
rise therefrom. 
L represents the work, which, when moving 
in the direction indicated by the arrow in Fig. 
2, is being acted upon by the tool, the blockh 
serving to hold the tool in position, as stated. 
When the motion of the work is reversed, the 
tool will be carried slightly toward the dotted 
position (referred tobyl) by thefriction against 
its point, which tends to relieve the friction 
and allow the point of the tool to move easily 
3O along the Work. This slight forward motion 
of relief for the point of the tool is rendered 
possible on account of the space between the 
faces in and p, above described. After the work, 
in its reverse motion, has passed the point of 
the tool, the latter is brought backin position 
I claim as my invention- . 
for another cut by means of a spring, t, said 
1. An attachment for an iron-planer, Con 
Spring, as shown, being an ordinary spiral 
sisting, in combination with the Swinging 
Spring Secured at its respective ends to pins 
slide A, of a block, G, rigidly secured to the 
Ss, projecting, respectively, from the under 
swinging slide, provided with a stock, K, for 
surface of the plate H and face of the body G. 
holding the cutter, said stock being fitted in 
This light spring causes the tool to drag dur 
a circular bearing within the block, for the 
ing the reverse motion of the planer, but only 
purpose of permitting it to turn within the 
to the extent of the energy of the spring. To 
latter to bring the point of the tool in posi 
plane on the opposite side, a tool has to be put 
tion to take a cut, or be turned to relieve the 
in the stock in an opposite direction, as shown 
point of the tool from the work during the re 
in dotted lines, the block h transferred to the 
verse motion of the planer, substantially as 
Space at the other end of the part k, and the 
end of the spring that is attached to the pin 
described. 
2. An attachment for an iron-planer, Coll 
s' changed to the pins' on the other side of 
sisting, in combination with the swinging 
the block or body. 
slide, of a block, G, rigidly secured to the 
In using the device, the tool-stock is verti 
swinging slide, provided with a stock, K, for 
cally adjusted within the body, and the point 
holding the cutter, fitted to a circular bearing 
of the tool brought up to the work by means 
within the block, for the purpose of permit 
of the screw that moves the swinging slide A. 
ting it to-be turned within the latter at each 
and the horizontal feed-works of the planer set 
forward and backward motion of the planer, 
in motion. 
- 
to bring the point of the tool, respectively, in 
Fig. 3 shows the back surface of the body as 
position to take a cut or relieve it from the 
being planed obliquely with the ends and bore 
work, said stock K being longitudinally ad 
receiving the tool-stock, so that the latter is 
justable within the block, substantially as de 
6O held in an inclined position-that is to say, the 
upper end of the tool-stock inclines slightly 
scribed. 
3. The attachment for iron-plane's, consist 
away from the face of the vertical slide A. 
ing of a block, G, rigidly secured to the Swing 
From this position of the parts it will be un 
ing slide A, stock K, for holding the cutter b, 
derstood that when the said tool-stock is turned 
fitted to a circular bearing within the block 
65 in its bearing Within the body, as above stated, 
the point of the tool will not move in a hori. A G, for the purpose set forth, collar H, secured 
55 
35 
* 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
2O shown. 
 
296,270 
3 
4. In combination with the swinging slide block, for the purpose of permitting it to be 20 
to the stock K, and stoph, to limit the distance tached thereto, provided with a tool-stock, K, 
the stock may be turned within the block, sub- for holding the cutting-tool, said tool-stock 
stantially as set forth. 
being fitted to a circular bearing within the 
5 A of an iron-planer, a block, G, rigidly at- turned therein to bring the point of the cut 
tached thereto, provided with a tool-stock, K, ting-tool either to or away from the work, said 
for holding the cutting-tool, said stock fitted tool-stock being held by the block in an in 
to circular bearings within the block, for the clined position, for the purpose of allowing the 
purpose of permitting it to be turned therein point of the tool to deviate from a horizontal 25 
Io to bring the point of the tool either to or plane when the stock K is turned in its bear 
away from the work, with automatic means ings, as stated, for the purpose set forth. 
to turn said stock in position to bring the 
A N 
point of the tool to the work, substantially aS 
specified. 
5. In combination with the swinging slide 
A of an iron-planer, a block, G, rigidly at- 
E. R. BRYANT. 
I5 
Witnesses: 
E. B. WHITMORE, 
M. D. PHILLIPS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296370.txt	(No Model.) 
IMPLEMENT FORSMOOTHING OR POLISHING METALLIC SURFACES, 
No. 296,370. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1884, 
W. J. WALKER. 
 
Zrvive 72-for . 
7777. g/azize. Zazaer. 
 
N. PEEas, koto-Lithographer, Washington, E. C. 
Y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
i. 
WILLIAM JAMES WALKER, OF FRANKLIN, MASSACHUSETTS, 
IMPLEMENT FOR SMOOTHING OR POLISHING METALLIC SURFACES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 296,370, dated April 8, 1884. 
Application filed January 18, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
75 
SO 
85 
90 
95 
5 
O 
- 
To all tufton it naily concern : 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM JAMEs WALK 
ER, of Franklin, in the county of Norfolk, of 
the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Im 
plements for Smoothing or Polishing Metallic 
Surfaces; and I do hereby declare the same to 
be described in the following specification and 
represented in the accompanying drawings, 
of which- 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, and Figs. 2 and 
3 transverse sections in planes at right angles 
to each other, of an implement embodying my 
invention, the nature of which is defined in 
the claims hereinafter presented. 
This implement, as shown in the drawings, 
is designed for smoothing the curved and plane 
surfaces of hat-dies. Its smoothing-head Ais 
composed of an elastic hollow vessel, a, of 
proper shape, of vulcanized india-rubber, and 
a charge, b, of liquid-as water, for instance, 
though in some cases an oil of suitable kind 
may be substituted. 
On the outer surface of the vessel a there is 
to be a covering, l, of a suitable abrasive or 
polishing material. The said vessel has a 
metallic neck or carrier, B, properly con 
structed not only to hold it firmly, with a wa 
ter-tight joint between them, and to admit of 
the charge of water being passed or forced 
through it into the vessel, but also for attach 
ing or securing it (the said neck) to a mandrel 
or shaft or other device for rapidly revolving 
the implement. 
To this end the neckBiscom 
posed in part of a tubular shank, c, and a disk 
shaped flange, d, extending therefrom concen 
trically at its lower end. This shank c is 
screw-threaded on its periphery to receive or 
screw into a tubular nut, e, between which and 
the flanged there is a disk, f, of metal, through 
which the screw e passes centrally. On the 
upper end of the shank c is an elastic and wa 
ter-tightpacking, g, which is forced down upon 
said end by a screw, h, screwed into the nut 
e, the latter projecting, as shown, above the 
screw h. Furthermore, a tapering cock, c, ex 
tends through the nute and the shank c. Be 
sides serving to keep the nut from revolving 
on the shank, this cock is either to open or 
close communication through the bore of the character of the part at of the head and the ine 
said shank. The head i of this cock, like that lasticity of the charge b of liquid thereof, the 
of a common screw, is nicked to receive the 
blade of a screw-driver when used for revolv 
ing the cock. The upper part of the head A. 
extends, as shown, between the flanged and 
the disk f, and, being of a water-proof and elas 
tic material, will form with the flange and disk, 
when the latter is forced down closely by the 
mut e, a water-proof joint between the said 
head A and the metallic neck B. 
Preparatory to charging the head with wa 
ter or other proper liquid practically incom 
pressible, the cock is to be turned open, to 
allow the charge to be passed or forced into 
the head, which having been accomplished 
the cock is to be closed, the packing g put in 
place, and the screw h screwed downhard upon 
it. The packing and screw are additional 
means of preventing leakage of the charge, 
and, besides, serve to cover the upper open 
end of the shank c, in order to prevent dirt or 
emery or the grinding or polishing material 
used on the outer surface of the head A. from 
getting into the bore of the shank c and stop 
ping such or wearing the cock. 
I make no claim to a shoe-sole buffer made 
as represented in either of the United States 
Patents Nos. 190,174 and 227,839, such being 
somewhat analogous to my smoothing or pol 
ishing implement, as hereinbefore described, 
but differing therefrom in important particu 
lars, especially in having no elastic and water 
proof head or its inelastic charge of water or 
liquid. Furthermore, there is in neither of 
the said shoe-sole buffers, as in my smoothing 
implement, a nut extended upward beyond its 
male screw, and having within it the said nut, 
a packing, and a screw beyond which the nut 
is projected upward. 
The elastic and water-proof head of vulcan 
ized india-rubber and its charge of water or 
other like inelastic liquid is found when in 
use, and covered on its external surface with 
emery or other suitable abrasive or polishing 
material, to be capable of operating to better 
advantage than a head of felt, or one made of 
an inelastic bag or covering of leather or cloth, 
and a stuffing therefor of hair, wool, or other 
like material. 
By reason of the elasticity and water-proof IOO 
50 
 
2 
. 
296,370 
head, when revolving against a surface, will g arranged in the said nut, and with respect 15 
adaptitself to the corners and serrations there- to the said screw c, all being substantially as 
of, and substantially maintain its normal form represented. 
to far better advantage, and with new and use- 
3. The combination of the screw-threaded 
tubular shankc, having the disk-shaped flange 
ful effects, comparatively speaking. 
I claim- 
d, screw-threaded nut e, and disk f, as de- 20 
1. The combination of the tubular and scribed, with the cock C, extended into the nut 
flanged screw c and the disk if with the nut e and tubular screw c, and with the water 
e, screwed upon and extended beyond the said proofandelastic vessela, applied to such neck, 
screw, all being substantially as represented. all being substantially as represented. 
WILLIAM JAMES WALKER. 
2. The combination of the tubular and 
flanged screw c and the disk f with the nute, 
screwed on and extended beyond the screw, as 
set forth, and with the screw hand packing 
R. H. EDDY, 
S. N. PIPER. 
IO 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296470.txt	(Model.) 
No. 296,470. 
 
E, SIRRET. 
WEIGHING SCALE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet, I. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1884. 
WITNESSES 
6&w Y, 
to Attorneys. 
(Model.) 
E. SIRRET 
WEIGHING SCALE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
NO, 296,470. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1884, 
  
l 
2 st 
its i. 
 
, 
UNITED STATES FATENT OFFICE. 
EVILIE SLRRET, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK. 
WEGHNG-SCALE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 296,470, dated April 8, 1884. 
Application filed December 18, 1883. (Model.) 
55 
otally connected the guiding-arm C, the free 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EMIILE SIRRET, a citi 
end of which is bifurcated to receive the stand 
Zen of the United States, residing at Buffalo, 
ard C, this connection being made by means 
of a pin, C". This pin may be constructed 
in the county of Erie and State of New York, 
with a knife-edge, if desired, and the opening 
have invented a new and useful Weighing 
Scale, of which the following is a specifica- in the standard through which it passes may 
beformed accordingly. The lower end of this 
tion. 
standard is provided with a knife-edged cross 
This invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in weighing-scales, having 
head, D, whose outer ends are shouldered to 
prevent lateral displacement, and the upper 
special reference to that class known as pend 
end with the platform D'. 
ulum-scales. 
It has for its objects, first, to provide a scale 
Mounted on a knife-edge, D', which extends - 
transversely to the base-piece T3, and which 
whose indicating-hand shall accurately regis 
ter the quantity Weighed upon a dial or grad 
is cast or otherwise secured thereto, is the 
One end of this beam is provided 
uated plate whose division-marks are equi 
beam D'. 
distant; second, to provide a scale of this char. 
with a cross-head, from which extend the arms 
E, the lower edges of which are notched at D" 
acter which shall be capable of minute ad 
justments, whereby any variation incident to 
to fit over the knife-edge D', and the uppel' 
changes of the temperature may be corrected; 
edges near the ends are also notched, SO as to 
third, to provide a scale whose supporting 
receive the cross-head ID of the standard C. 
platform shall not exert any weight upon the 
By this means, it will be observed, the stand 
supporting points of the pendulum - shaft; 
ard C is free to move up and down, and yet 
fourth, to provide a pendulum whose weights 
it maintains a vertical position, this latter re 
sult being due to the approximate equality of 
shall be independent and relatively eccentri 
cally supported; and, fifth, to provide a pendu 
the distance between the pivotal points of the 
lum whose weights shall be independent and 
arm C and the pin C, and the distance be 
relatively eccentrically supported, and whose 
tween the notches D" in the arms E, and the 
arm or stem shall be provided with a pea capa 
contact of the cross-head with the said arm. 
A transverse pendulum-shaft, E, is deli 
ble of radial and circumferential adjustment. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
cately mounted in the upper palrt of the frame 
A on points or studs E". Extending through 
part of this specification, and on which the 
this shaft transversely is a short arm, F, a Set 
same letters of reference indicate correspond 
screw, F, being provided so as to fix its ra 
ing features, Figure 1 represents a side eleva 
tion of my improved scale; Fig. 2, a detached 
dius. One end of the said arm terminates in 
perspective view of the pendulum, its sup 
a bifurcation, which receives a link, F, to 
porting-shaft, and the indicating-hand; Fig. 3, 
which it is pivotally connected. The lower 
end of this link is also pivotally connected by 
a side elevation of a portion of the beam, show 
means of a pin, G', with an adjustable collar, 
ing in section an adjustable collar fitted there 
on; Fig. 4, a plan view of the same portion of 
G, which fits over and is adapted to slide on 
the beam, showing the adjusting-collarinhori 
the long arm of the beam D. The beam at 
the part which is occupied by this collar may, 
Zontal section; and Fig. 5, a detached per 
spective view of a portion of the beam and the 
if desired, be reduced in size, and the col 
platform-standard. 
lar may be constructed in any approved man 
ner. In the present instance it consists of 
The letter Adesignates the frame of my im 
proved scale, the same consisting of the ap- two jaws united at one end and provided near 95 
proximately upright portions B, (only one of the other with connecting-bolts G", whereby 
the said jaws may be delicately adjusted 
which is shown,) and the horizontal part B, 
against the points of the pin G', so as to take 
from which project at each end the legs B. 
up any lost motion incident to Wear at this 
This frame is constructed of cast-iron, prefer 
point. The collar is further provided with a 
ably, and to the upper portion of it is piv. 
85 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
296,470 
O 
set-screw, II, which serves to ?ix its position 
on the beam. 
The letter II designates the pendulum rod 
or stem, the upper end of which is adjustably 
connected with the pendulum-shaft E, a set 
screw, I, being in this instance employed to 
hold the same in any fixed position, though 
any other means for this plurpose may be 
adopted. A collar, l, is loosely fitted on this 
stem, and is provided with an adjusting weight 
or pea, I', having a threaded extension, I, 
which screws into the collar I, whereby its po 
sition is fixed on the stem. This weight or 
pea, it will thus be observed, is capable of radial 
adjustment relatively with the pivotal points 
of the pendulum-shaft-that is, it is adjustable 
up and down on said shaft-and is also ad 
justable circumferentially, whereby its influ 
ence over the normal position of the stem H' 
is regulated. The lower end of this stem is 
provided with a disk forming a weight, J, this 
disk being rigidly connected with it. IPivotally 
connected with said disk, at a point eccentric 
to the pivotal points or center of oscillation 
of the pendulum-shaft, is a second disk or 
weight, J', a stop, J, being attached to the 
disk J, and embracing the pivoted disk to 
limit the Swing of the latter in one direction 
when the pendulum-stem is moved out of nor 
mal position. 
The letter K designates the indicating-hand, 
the same being Secured to the pendulum-shaft 
E, and extended radially therefrom until it 
reaches the graduated scale marked on the 
plate K. 
It will be observed that the pound-marks 
are all at equal distances apart, and that the 
marks which indicate fractions of pounds be 
tWeel each of the pound-lnarks are also rela 
tively at ecual distances apart. This resultis 
attained by the use of the weight J", pivoted 
eccentlically to the pivotal points of the 
pendulum-shaft, and I have found by actual 
experiment that if the pendulum-weightis not 
so pivotally ari'anged the indicating-hand will 
not travel the Sahne relative distance bofore 
reaching the division markedl 3 and after 
reaching the division marked 5 by the in 
crease of additional weight on the platform 
that is to Say, the indicating - hand, when 
caused by a given amount of weight to reach 
a certain division on the dial-plate less than 
the division marked 3 or more than the divis 
ion analked 5, will lnot move to the next di 
vision by an additional amount of weight equal 
to that designated by the said next division 
mark. This difficulty is completely overcome 
by the pivoted Weight of the pendulum, as 
above described. 
A Weight, R., having a Set-screw, K", is 
fitted on the beam D', so as to facilitate in ef 
fecting the adjustlinent of the scale to make 
the hand normally stand at zero. Another 
Weight Orlea, K", (indicated in dotted lines 
5 in Fig. 1) may be resorted to and applied to 
the end of the beam D. When it is desired to 
weigh bodies heavier than would be registered 
by the graduated scale, this weight being 
equal to one, two, or three pounds, Ol' more, 
as the case may be, according to the Weight 
placed on the platform. 
After the parts of the scale are manufac 
tured and put together, the indicating-hand 
is to be set so as to stand normally at Zero. 
This is approximately done by adjusting the 
arm F in the penduluh-shaft E, and the col 
lar G and weight K' on the beam D". To 
bring the hand accurately over the mark 
zero, the adjustable pea or weight I is re 
sorted to, and it will be observed from Fig. 1 
that the more this weight is adjusted circum 
ferentially, so as to come more nearly in the 
same vertical plane as the disk J of the pend 
ulum, the farther the pendulum - stem will 
depart from the perpendicular. Therefore, 
if the angle between the hand and the pendul 
lum-stem is not just right, so as to bring the 
hand over Zero normally, it can be brought 
there by the adjustment of the weight I'. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to Secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a scale, the combination, with the in 
dicating-hand and a graduated plate having 
indicating - marks, of a pendulum having a 
weight supported eccentrically to the pivotal 
points of the pendulum-Support. 
2. In a scale, the combination, with an in 
dicating-hand, a pendulum, and a shaft upon 
which the hand and the pendulum are mounted, 
the pendulum being provided with a weight 
supported eccentrically to the axis of said 
shaft, of a graduated scale having equidistant 
. 
indicating-lmarks. 
3. In a scale, the combination, with the 
pendulum, of a supplemental Weight connected 
thereto eccentrically to the point of oscilla 
tion of the pendulum. 
4. In a scale, the combination, with the 
pendulum having a supplemental weight con 
nected thereto eccentrically to the point of os 
cillation of the pendulum, and a stop to limit 
the movement of the said supplemental weight, 
of a pea connected to the pendulum and ca 
pable of adjustment radially from the point of 
oscillation and circumferentially around the 
pendulum-stem. 
5. In a scale, the combination, with the sup 
porting-platform and the pivoted guide, of 
the pivoted beam, the pendulum-shaft, the 
means for connecting the beam and the shaft, 
the shaft being provided with an indicating 
hand, and a pendulum having a Supplemental 
weight supported eccentrically to the point 
of Oscillation of Said shaft. 
6. In a scale, the combination, with the Sup 
porting-platform, the standard, and the piv 
oted guide-arm, of the pivoted beam having 
an adjustable collar, the pendulum-shaft pro 
vided with an adjustable alm, and the link 
connecting the arm and the collar together. 
7. In a scale, the combination, with the Sup 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
296,470 
3. 
porting-platform, the standard, and the piv- lum - shaft having an adjustable arm, the 
oted guide-arm, of the pivoted beam, the dis- beam and shaft being adjustably connected to 
tance between the pivotal points of the arm gether. 
and its connection with the standard being 
5 approximately the same as the distance be- 
tween the pivotal point of the beam and its 
contact with said standard, and the pendu- 
BERNARD KENNEY, 
JAMES M. CLOAK. 
Witnesses: 
EMIITE SIRRET. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296570.txt	J, HOWARD. 
SOLE EDGE BURNISHING MACHINE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1884. 
- is: A 
- 
 
e 
t T 
W. 
NP. 
NVENTOR 
(No Model.) 
No. 296,570, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
i 
WTNE555 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 296,570. 
 
 
 
J. HOWARD. 
SOLE EDGE BURNISHING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1884. 
- - l 
s | 
WTNE55E5. 
2/yea---- 
fig-5- 
INVENT or 
Aar- 26 
 
N. PEfeR5, flict-lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES HOWARD, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
SOLE-EDGE-BURNSHING MACH NE. 
C23CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 296,570, dated April 8, 1884. 
Application filed December 26, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
O 
35 
45 
To all, whom it may coneer. " 
Be it known that I, JAMES HOWARD, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful improvements in Sole-Edge-Burnishing 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
Myinvention relates to that class of machines . 
in which the boot, or shoe to be operated upon 
is held by a jack, while the burnishing-tool and 
its immediate actuating mechanism are held 
and guided by the hand of the operator, the 
object of my invention being to so construct 
and arrange the working parts of the machine 
that the burnishing-tool may be freely moved 
in every direction, so as to be adapted to bur 
nish every part of the edge of the sole, and 
embodies-combining with the working-head 
or tool-operating part of the machine-a sec 
ondary swinging frame and a primary resilient 
connection, so that although the position of 
the head may be changed the force-transmit 
ting belt will always be taut and in condition 
to vibrate the burnishing-tool. I attain this 
object by the mechanism illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure l is a side elevation of my machine. 
Fig. 2 is an end elevation, showing the work 
ing-head of the machine. Fig. 3 is an eleva 
tion showing the rear part of the machine, and 
Fig. 4 is a plan view of the tool-holder. 
A. A. Fig. 3, are bearings connected to the 
frame A of the machine, Fig. 3, in which re 
volves a shaft, B. From this shaft are suspended 
the swinging frames C and D, Figs. 1 and 3. 
, In the lower end of the two arms that pro 
ject downward from the frame C are pointed 
or center screws C. C. These screws sup 
port on their points the housing C, Figs. 1 and 
3. in this housing is fitted a pin or stud, 
(indicated by dotted lines,) C, Fig. 3. The 
lower end of the stud C is fastened in the 
housing C. 
In the housings C is a spindle, C. This 
arrangement of the housing C, stud C, and 
screws C C forms a universal joint, admitting 
of free movement in a vertical or horizontal 
plane, so that the head of the machine can be 
turned to cause the burnishing-tool to bear 
upon the edge that may be presented to its 
C is an arm extending from the housing C 
action. 
- 
w 
From the end of 
to the head of the machine. 
this arm C at Fig. 2 extends a semicircular 
frame or fork, E, Fig. 2. 
Through the bosses E E of the frame E are 
center-screws E E, Fig. 1, and on these 
Screws is supported the yoke or frame F, Figs. 
1 and 2. 
FF are two lugs extending from and form 
ing a part of the frame F, in each of which is 
a Center-screw. 
H. H., Fig. 2, is a frame mounted on the cen 
In the upper part, H., of 
tering-screws F. F. 
this frame I place a shaft centrally located, 
which has the pulley H* upon it, and by which 
it is driven. This shaft has a crank-pin, H, 
which imparts a reciprocating movement to 
the lever K, Figs. 1 and 2. At the same time 
the working-head of the machine-containing 
the crank-shaft, pulley H, frame HH, and 
lever K-is capable of being rocked in a ver 
tical plane on the center-screws F, while the 
screws F, working-head, and frame F are all 
capable of being rocked in a horizontal plane 
on the center-screws E of the fork E, Figs. 1. 
and 2. This combination of all these move 
ments makes it much easier to guide the bur 
nishing-tool on all styles of sole-edges with 
this machine than with any machine of its class 
heretofore in use. 
L., Fig. 1, is a close-coiled spring, which ex 
tends from the working-head of the machine 
to the swinging frame D, to which it is at 
tached by the screw L, which forms a joint. 
This spring prevents any slackening of the belt 
when the head is rocked on the screws F, and 
also through its being an elastic connection 
between the head and frame Dit does not in 
terfere with the free movement of the head 
(within reasonable limits) in every direction. 
M is the burnishing-tool, and N, Fig. 4, the 
tool-holder. This tool-holder N is pivoted to 
a centerpiece, P, (see Fig. 4) attached to the 
vibrating lever K, Figs. 1 and 2, and has two 
tool-holding sockets, PP, Fig. 4. 
Motion is communicated to the crank-shaft 
H' in the head of the machine through the 
pulley H by the belt D, which passes around 
the pulley D' and is guided by the pulleys 
D. D. 
The tool-holder N, Figs. 1 and 2, is locked 
into position by means of the lever P, Fig. 2, 
the lower end of which fits into one of the 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
296,570 
notches P or P, Fig. 4, the lever being piv 
oted on the screw P', Fig. 2. 
To change the position of the tool-holder N 
it is only necessary to press the lever P, and 
5 then to turn the tool-holder to the position de 
sired, and push the lever P back into place. 
R, Fig. 1, is a handle, by which the operator 
guides the machine in its work. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
1. In a sole-edge-burnishing machine, the 
combination of the swinging frame D, arm C, 
resilient connection L, and working-head with 
the belt D', pulleys D D, and driving-pulley 
I5 D', all operating together substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
Io desire to secure by Letters Patent is 
Witnesses: 
HELEN. M. FEEGAN, 
WILLIAM EDSON. 
2. In a sole-edge-burnishing machine, the 
combination of the swinging frames D and C, 
the housings C and C, spindle C and arm C, 
and working-head of machine, all operating to 
gether substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. In a sole-edge-burnishing machine, the 
combination of the working-head having a 
crank-shaft, H. lever K, tool-holder N, and 
locking-lever P, all operating together sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
JAMES HOWARD. 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296670.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 296,670. 
W. C. BRYAN. 
DUMPING, WAGON. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1884. 
 
 
  
NA-Y 
seas 
ass= 
sers-zzie 
a Nis 
 
N. PSTERs, Fhoto-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. C. BRYAN, OF NASH VILLE, TENNESSEE. 
DUM PNG - WAG ON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters 
Application filed Novemb 
Patent No. 296,670, dated April 8, 1884. 
er 15, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all ufot, it; nay concert: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. BRYAN, of 
Nashville, in the county of Davidson and State 
of Tennessee, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Dumping-Wagons; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification, and to 
the figures and letters of reference marked 
thereon. 
My invention relates particularly to that 
class of wagons used for transporting bricks, 
coal, and similar material, though of course it 
is generally applicable to wagons used for other 
purposes. Its novelty consists in a certain 
improved construction and combinations of 
parts, hereinafter to be described and claimed, 
Whereby the wagon is rendered self-dumping. 
My invention will best be understood when 
described in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings illustrating it, wherein 
Figure 1 represents a top plan view of my 
improved wagon; Fig. 2, a side elevation of 
the same; Fig. 3, a longitudinal vertical sec 
tion taken on the line at a of Fig. i. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures denote the same parts. 
The letter A. represents the rear axle of the 
3o wagon, and the letter B the front axle of the 
same, both axles being provided with ordinary 
transporting-wheels, as shown. The front axle 
has mounted upon it, and connected to it 
through an ordinary fifth-wheel a bolster, C, 
and supported upon this bolster and upon the 
rear axle is an inclined frame, D, composed of 
side bars and a front bar or cross-piece, as 
shown. 
E represents the body of the wagon, sup 
- 4o ported upon the side bars of the frameD by a 
Cross-bar, F, at the rear, rollers G at the mid 
dle, or thereabout, and smaller rollers h. h. at 
the front end. The side bars of the frame are 
protected upon their upper bearing-surfaces 
by metal protecting plates or tracks I, extend 
ing from a point forward of the bearing-points 
of the front rollers, h, back of the rear axle, 
where they are curved up and formed into 
guards or stops J. The portions of the side 
5o bars of the frame which extend past the stops 
or guards J, and upon which the cross-bar F 
of the body rests, are also protected or shod 
35 
45 
65. 
55 
with metal plates K. Secured to the body at 
or near the point of attachment of the rollers 
Hare downwardly-projecting arms L, which 
serve to hold the forward end of the body in 
place and prevent it from moving laterally. 
The rollers or wheels h are preferably pro 
vided with flanges, so as to prevent lateral dis 
placement of the body at the middle, and also 
for the purpose of guiding and properly di 
recting the body when moving down the in 
clined plane, the downwardly-projecting arms 
also assisting in the accomplishment of this end. 
To the forward portion of the body, at op 
posite sides thereof, are pivoted, so as to swing 
up and down freely, hooked arms M.M. When 
the body is moved up the inclined frame from 
the rear, these arms Mhang down, with their 
forward shouldered ends below or on a line 
with the bottom of the body, and as the body 
advances up the incline they strike inclined 
guides NN, secured to the bolster, and are 
raised by said guides and caused to pass up 
over and engage with a cross bar or rod, O, 
extending from side to side of the frame D. 
Mounted upon a rock-shaft, P, extending 
from side to side of the front end of the frame 
D, are two U-shaped arms, Q. Q. The general 
form of these arms is U-shaped, though the 
upper part or branch is slightly longer than 
the lower part or branch. Normally these 
U-shaped arms stand opposite the inclined 
guides N N, with their upper branches above 
the cross-rod E and their lower branches below 
said cross-rod, as shown in Fig. 3, they being 
held in this position by the tension of a coiled 
spring, R, secured to the rock-shaft P, and 
having its free end bearing against cross-rod 
O. As the shouldered ends of the hooked 
arms M. pass up the guides NN, the points of 
the said arms strike the upper part of the U 
shaped arms Q, Q and raise the same, and hold 
them raised until the shouldered ends of the 
hooked arms drop into engagement with the 95. 
cross-rod O, when the U-shaped arms are 
again depressed by the operation of the spring 
R, and serve to hold the said hooked arms M. 
in engagement. 
If it is desired to dump the load, the rock 
shaft P is rocked by means of a hand-lever, S, 
applied to one of its ends, and the U-shaped 
arms Q, Q are caused to Swing up, and in So 
doing positively lift the ends of the hooked 
OO 
 
w 
2 
296 
,670 
arms MM and free them from the rod O. The 
body, being thus released, moves down the in 
cline frame upon the rollers Gandh, until the 
cross-bar F of the body at the rear passes off 
of the side bars, whereupon the body tilts 
down upon the axles of the wheels or rollers 
G as a center and strikes two other rollers, 
TT, located on the frame over the rear axle, 
as shown in Fig. 3. The body, in its tilted 
condition, continues down the inclined frame 
until its rollers G come in contact with the 
stops or guards J. After the load has slid 
out of the body, the latter is tilted up until 
its forward rollers, H, again rest upon the in 
cline frame, and it is then moved up the frame 
, until its hooked arms again engage with the 
cross-rod P, as before. It will be observed 
that as soon as the hooked arms are disen 
gaged from the rodP by the tilting of the rock 
shaft the dumping of the load is effected auto 
matically. 
Where an automatically-opening end-gate 
is not employed, it will be necessary to let 
down the end-gate before operating the lever 
S to disengage the hooked arms. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
SeW 
1. In a dumping-Wagon, the combination, 
with the inclined frame, of the body provided 
- 
IO 
25 
with the rollers at or near its middle, and also 3o 
near its forward end, and the cross-bar at its 
rear end, and the stops or guards upon the in 
clined frame, whereby the middle rollers, com 
ing in contact with the said stops or guards, 
permit the body to be tilted upon the axles of 35 
said rollers, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the inclined frame 
with the body, the hooked arms pivoted to 
the body, the incline for automatically raising 
the hooked arms, and the rod with which the 4o 
hooked arms engage, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with theinclined frame, 
of the body, the pivoted hooked arms, the rod 
with which they engage, and the U-shaped 45 
arms mounted on the rock-shaft, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination, with the inclined frame, 
of the body, the pivoted hooked arms, the in 
clined guides for raising said arms, the rod 5o 
with which the arms engage, the rock-shaft 
and its U-shaped arms, and the spring upon 
the rock-shaft, substantially as described. 
WILLIAM C. BRYAN. 
Witnesses: 
W. C. BUSH, 
OTIS E. DAVIDSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296770.txt	(No Model.) 
J. NIXON. 
THREAD MOISTENING ATTACHMENT FOR SEWING MACHINES, 
Patented Apr. 15, 1884. 
No. 296,770. 
 
S 
PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, 
c. 
AORN EY5 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JANE NIXON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO VERNON 
BELL OF SAME PLACE. 
THREAD-MOISTENING ATTACHMENT FOR SEWING-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 296,770, dated April 15, 1884. 
Application filed. March 9, 1883. (No model. 
IO 
To a 2Z uhon, it inay concern. 
Beit known that I, JANE NIXON, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at New York, 
in the county of New York and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provementin Thread-Moistening Attachments 
for Sewing-Machines, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to an improved at 
tachment for sewing-machines, the object of 
which is to moisten the thread before it passes 
to the needle, whereby it is rendered less 
brittle, and consequently less liable to break 
I5 when the machine is run at a high rate of 
speed; and it consists in the improved con 
struction and arrangement of the said attach 
ment which will be hereinafter fully described, 
and particularly pointed out in the claim. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure 1. 
is a perspective view of the attachment com 
plete detached from the sewing-machine. Fig. 
2 is a vertical sectional view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the thread 
guide, which forms a part of the device, de 
tached. Fig. 4 is a top view of the device 
complete; and Fig. 5 is a perspective view of 
the device complete and in position for oper 
ation upon a sewing-machine. 
The same letters refer to the same parts in 
all the figures. 
This device consists, mainly, of two parts 
viz., a cup or holder, A, and a thread-guide, 
B. Both are preferably to be made of glass, 
porcelain, or other similar material which will 
not rust or corrode or be otherwise injuriously 
affected by being continuously exposed to the 
action of water; but metal or any other ma 
terial may be employed in their construction 
4o if, for any reason, it shall be deemed expe 
dient. 
The holder. A consists of a suitable cup or 
vessel, having on its inner side a vertical rib, 
C, extending nearly to the bottom, and dia 
45 metrically opposite which, near the bottom, is 
located an inwardly-projecting flange, D. 
The vessel. A may be secured to the frame 
of a sewing-machine, in place of one of the 
usual thread-guides, in any suitable manner. 
5o I propose making the said vessels with va 
rious means of attachment adapted to the 
various makes of sewing-machines, and I do 
35 
3o 
- 
 
The thread-guide B consists of a disk, E, 55 
not wish to limit myself to any particular form 
of attachment. None is therefore described. 
having an upright, F, provided with a trans 
verse perforation or eye, G, for the passage of 
the thread. The disk E is provided with a 
notch, H, corresponding with the rib Cin the 
cup or vessel A. The diskE is of a size to fit 6o 
snugly in the bottom of vessel A, into which 
it may be readily inserted by causing the notch 
H to register with rib C. When the edge of 
the disk has been inserted under the flange D, . 
and the disk rests firmly upon the bottom of 65 
the vessel, a slight turn is given to the thread 
guide, which is thus firmly secured in the ves 
sel or holder A. by the diskE being held under 
the flange D and rib C of the latter. When 
in this position, the transverse perforation G. 
should be some distance below the upper edge 
of the vessel A, the upper edge of which 
must be smooth, so as not to cut or injure the 
thread. 
The operation of the invention will be 
readily understood. The device being secured 
upon the frame of a sewing-machine, the ves 
sel A is nearly filled with water. The thread 
passes through the eye or perforation Gunder 
the water, and is thus moistened on its pas 
sage to the needle withoutpossibility of being 
soiled or injured. The thread being thus 
practically both strengthened and lubricated, 
the machine may be run at a greatly increased 
rate of speed without danger of breaking the 
thread. 
I claim as my invention, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent of the United States 
A thread-moistening attachment for sewing 
machines, comprising a cup or vessel having 
on its inner side a vertical flange extending 
nearly to the bottom, and an inwardly-pro 
jecting flange arranged near the bottom and 
diametrically opposite the said rib, in combi 
nation with a disk having a transversely per 
forated upright, and provided with a notch in 
one side, as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JANE NXON, 
95 
75 
Witnesses: 
LYMAN D. MINOR, 
A. G. RICHARDS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296870.txt	(No Model.) 
M. OHLSON. 
MACHINE TO PROTECT CABLE ROAD SIOTS, 
No. 296,870, 
Patented Apr. 15, 1884. 
Eas 
Z/7'7-27 esses 
4/66-2/ 
x 
-- 
Z72/2 2.72 2 
-47agrees (7% 7s ope 
1777-oar 22e2/3 
Fergas. Photo-Lithographer. Withingto: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAGNUS OHLSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MACHINE TO PROTECT CABLE-ROAD SLOTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 296,870, dated April 5, 1884. 
Application filed October 23, 1883. 
(No model. 
O 
To all whon, if not concern: 
is 
Beit known that I, MAGN US OEILSON, re 
siding at Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, and a citizen of the United 
States, have invented a new and useful Ma 
chine to Protect Cable-Road Slots, of which 
the following is a full description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to a new and useful 
machine to protect cable-road slots while being 
cleared of snow, dust, or other matter. The 
object of my improvement, is to provide a 
shield or cover to be attached to a snow-plow 
or street-sweeper to prevent snow, dust, or 
other substances from lodging in the slot in 
the road-bed through which connection is had 
with the cable used to propel the cars, or fall 
ing through the same into the tunnel in 
which the cable runs during the cleaning of the 
track. 
attain this object by the mechanism 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figures 1, 2, and 3 represent, respectively, 
a front, side, and top view of my machine, 
while Figs. 4, 5, and 6 represent, respectively, 
side and top views of the pivot-bolts and plates 
used therein. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
A represents substantially the front end of 
a snow-plow or street-sweeper, on the upper 
and lower sides of which are attached, re 
spectively, the plates b l'. The plate b is of 
the form shown in the drawings, and is pro 
vided with the hole gy. The plate l' is of the 
same form, and is provided with the hole ac, 
which is slightly larger than the hole of in 
the other plate, also with the curved slot e. 
Through the holes a g of the plates b'b is 
passed the taper pivot-bolt (, secured at its 
upper end by the cap-nut in, to enable it to 
turn freely within the said hole. The taper 
pivot-bolt c is provided with the slot a? at its 
lower end, and the thread at its upper end, 
for the reception of the cap-nut n. In the 
slot a' is inserted and firmly held the upper 
end of the spring B. The pin h, of a size to 
permitofa free lateral movement in the curved 
slot e, is passed through the said slot e and 
fastened perpendicularly to the upper end of 
the spring B. The said spring B, bent to the 
shape substantially as shown in the drawings, 
45 
60 
8O 
slot. 
' 
. 
has attached to its lower end, by means of 
the bolt and pin p, to enable it to turn freely, 
the shoe or shield C, which is turned up at 55 
its forward end to the form indicated in the 
drawings, and provided with the guide-lugs 
ce. The shoe or shield c is of sufficient width 
to amply cover the slot in the road-bed, and 
long enough to pass under the working parts 
of a snow - plow or street-sweeper when in 
operation, and thus act as a shield or cover to 
the said slot. 
The use of the bolts a, and p and of the pin 
I and curved slot e admits of a lateral move 
ment of the front end of the snow-plow or 
street-sweeper while rounding curves with 
out disturbing the shoe or shield in the slot, 
and the use of the spring B enables them to 
pass over minor obstructions which may be 
encountered, or the inequalities of the track, 
without throwing the shoe or shield from the 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine to protect cable-road slots, 
the combination of the spring B and the shoe 
C and means of attaching same to the plow, 
substantially as described, and for the purposes 
set forth. 
2. In a machine to protect cable-road slots, 
the combination of the spring B and the shoe 
C, provided with the lugs c 6, and means of 
attaching the same to the plow, substantially 
as described, and for the purposes set forth. 
3. In a machine to protect cable-road slots, 
in combination with the substantially - de 
Scribed plates b b, the bolt a, spring B, and 
shoe C, provided with the lugs co, substan 
tially as described, and for tie purposes set go 
forth. 
4. In a machine to protect cable-road slots, 
in combination with the plates b b', provided 
with the holes g at and slot e, the spring B, 
provided with the pin h, and the pivot-bolt (, 
provided with the slot a, and the shoe C, pro 
vided with the lugs a c, and bolt and pin p, 
substantially as described, and for the purposes 
set forth. 
85 
75 
95 
M. OHLSON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. BUCKINGHAM, 
T. J. ROHDMAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US296970.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
s 
JOHN W. HYATT, JOHN H. STEVENS, AND WILLIAM. H. WOOD, OF NEWARK, 
NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNORS TO THE CELLULOID AIANUFACTURING COM 
PANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MANUFACTURE OF CELLULOID AND OTHER COMPOUNDS OF PYROXYLINE, 
Application filed March 22, 1884. (No specimens.) 
Io 
To all athlon, it inctly conce71, 
Beit known that we, JOHNW.HYATT, JoEIN 
H. STEVENs, and WILLIAM. H. WOOD, citizens 
of the United States, and residents of Newark, 
5 in the county of Essex and State of New Jer 
isey, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in the Manufacture of Celluloid 
and other Compounds of Pyroxyline, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
the manufacture of celluloid and other com 
pounds of pyroxyline; and it consists in certain 
novel processes, hereinafter described, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims, whereby 
I5 the process of manufacture is facilitated and 
simplified, and the necessity of breaking the 
cakes of material into pieces and stirring in 
the alcohol or other solvents prior to their 
subjection to heat and pressure, as has here 
2o tofore been the practice, is entirely avoided. 
In carrying our invention into effect we 
first grind the pyroxyline to a pulp, in con 
nection with camphor and whatever pigments 
or coloring-matter may be required. In prac 
25 ticing this step in the manufacture we prefer 
to make use of the process described in Letters 
Patent of the United States No. 105,338, grant 
ed to John W. Hyatt and Isaiah S. Hyatt, 
July 12, 1870. We next form the pulp, pro 
3o duced as above described, into cakes of con 
venient proportions and subject them to press 
ure between layers of bibulous material, (pref. 
erably blotting-paper,) for the purpose of ab 
stracting the moisture therefrom, the bibulous 
35 material being renewed from time to time until 
the cakes are dry. The cakes are then formed 
into a pile, applying at the time a sufficient 
quantity of liquid solvent to the surfaces of 
each cake to soften the pyroxyline. The pile 
4o of cakes just described is allowed to remain 
in an air-tight, receptacle of any convenient 
nature until the solvents have permeated all 
of the cakes and reduced the pile to a Solid 
mass. The length of time required for the 
45 solvents to thus affect the pile of cakes may 
vary according to circumstances; but it will 
usually be found that if they are permitted to 
remain in the receptacle for a Space of about 
fifteen hours the desired effect Will ensue. 
5o The block of material formed by the action of 
i 
 
the solvents upon the pile of cakes is now cut 
into pieces of convenient size and shape for 
handling, which are subjected to mixing or 
mastication in heated rolls of the usual kinds, 
after which the material will be in a condition 55 
for manipulation in a stuffing-machine; or it 
may be pressed into blocks and cut into sheets 
or other convenient, forms. 
The thickness of the cakes formed from the 
pulp as above set forth and the consistency 6o 
of the solvent applied to soften them will in 
a measure depend upon each other. For in 
stance, if the liquid solvent is employed in its 
ordinary fluid condition, it will be found de 
sirable to make the cakes thin-say about one- 65 
sixteenth of an inch in thickness-Since but a 
comparatively Small amount of Solvent is held 
by their surfaces. Where it is desired to 
form the pulp into thicker cakes, the fluidity 
of the solvents should be reduced by dissolv 
ing a smallproportion of pyroxyline in them. 
If the solvent be made of about sixty parts of 
wood-alcohol to one part of camphor and two 
parts of pyroxyline, it may be successfully 
used in treating cakes of about three-sixteenths 
of an inch in thickness; and when a larger 
proportion of pyroxyline is dissolved in the 
solvent, a cake of greater thickness may be 
treated according to our process Without diffi 
culty. 
Whenever it is desired to make use of the 
clear liquid solvents, we retain the necessary 
proportion thereof between the cakes by 
means of some suitable absorbent material 
such as cloth, linen toweling, &c.-the thick- 85 
lness of the absorbent material depending 
mainly upon the size of the cake, and the con 
sequent amount of solvent necessary. Where 
about fifty per cent. of liquid to the weight of 
the pyroxyline in the material is required, 90 
the thickness of the linen pad should be about . 
one-half of the thickness of the cake next to 
it, or, say, one-fourth of the weight of the 
cake. In the preparation of the absorbent 
pad care should be taken that its exterior, at 
least, should be of a nature which will not 
readily adhere to the cakes. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A process in which pyroxyline is first IOO 
95 
75 
- 
2 
296,970 
2. A process in which pyroxyline is first 
ground to a pulp, then pressed into cakes and dried, the proper amount of liquid solvent in 
dried, and the said cakes softened with the re-troduced by spreading the solvent in a viscid 
quired amount of liquid solvent by being condition between the cakes, and the whole 
formed into a pile with the solvent between then mixed or masticated in heated rolls or 20 
the cakes, and then mixed or masticated in other suitable apparatus, substantially as de 
heated rolls or other suitable apparatus. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
ground to a pulp, then formed into cakes and York and State of New York, thus 20th day 
dried, and the cakes softened with a liquid of March, A. D. 1884. 
solvent by being formed into a pile, the sol- 
vents being held between the cakes by leaS 
of suitable pads, the material being afterward 
mixed or masticated in heated rolls or other 
suitable apparatus, substantially as described. 
3. A process in which pyroxyline is first 
ground to a pulp and pressed into cakes and 
38HN Y. 57 WES's 
WIAir H. WOOD. 
WAr 
y 
O 
Scribed. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. C. GILL, 
HERMAN GUSTOW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297070.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. DAVIS, OF NEW BEDFORD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALE TO EZERIEL, EH. NOBLE, OF, SAME PLACE. 
ATHE CHUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 297,070, dated April 15, i884. 
Application filed December 13, 1882. (Model.) 
To all tuhon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. DAVIs, of 
New Bedford, county of Bristol, and State of 
Massachusetts, have made useful Improve 
ments in Chucks with Thread - Cutting and 
Countersinking Attachments, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to chucks for lathes; and 
it consists in the improved construction here 
inafter fully described, whereby the chuck can 
be readily manipulated to form countersunk 
recesses, both plain and screw-threaded, the 
countersinking devices combined with a drill, 
and the chuck at the same time is capable of 
being adjusted to perform the functions of an 
ordinary chuck. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a Central longitudinal section of a lathe stock 
and chuck on an enlarged scale, illustrating 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a side view, showing 
the parts in a different position. Fig. 3 illus 
trates the parts in detail; and Fig. 4 is a front 
view of the chuck, the outer shell being re 
moved. 
A is the lathe-stock, having a cylindrical 
head, B, tapered at its front end, b, and screw 
threaded along the body of said head. . The 
case C is internally threaded to engage the 
lathe-stock head B. The front portion, b', of 
the case C is tapered, and is provided with 
three openings, C C C", which converge to 
ward each other at the center of the front por 
tion, b', of the case C. Each of said openings 
CCC" have the side walls grooved at d. A 
series of dogs, D, having the body portions e 
provided with ribs fon each side of said body 
portion, are adapted to be placed one in each 
of the openings C C C", so that the ribs.ff of 
said dogs lie in the grooves of said openings 
C C C and prevent the vertical play of said 
dogs in said openings. 
The openings C C'C' 
are inclined from the front l of the case. C to 
ward the beveled front portion, b, of the stock 
head B, the outer face of the body portion 
e of each dog being correspondingly inclined, 
the ribs f thereon and the grooves d in the 
case being likewise inclined to admit the ready 
insertion and withdrawal of the dogs. 
as the dogs are moved into the case, cutters h, 
secured to extensions i of the dogs, will be 
caused to approach each other, while the out 
ward movement of the dogs from the case will 
cause the Several cutters to recede from each 
other. A shell, E, having a conical front por 
tion, F, and cylindrical body portion, is adapted 
to inclose the case C and the dogs D, so that a 
portion of the extensions of the dogs and their 
cutters will project from the front of the coni 
cal portion F of the shell, the said shell be 
ing interiorly threaded at its rear to engage 
the externally-threaded case H, a portion of 
the headli of which bears against the shoulder 
K, formed by the rear projecting edge of the 65 
threaded body portion of the head B of the 
stock. The neck I of the stock, near its junc 
tion with the head B thereof, is also threaded 
to engage an interiorly-threaded aperture, l, 
in the head of a cap, J. 
When it is desired to clamp a bit or other 
boring implement, the parts of my improved. 
lathe-chuck are organized as shown in Fig. 1 
of the accompanying drawings, the jaws be 
ing tightened upon the bit by holding the neck 
I stationary and turning the case E, which 
will cause its portion F to bear upon the face 
in of the dogs, so as to force them upon the 
bevel portion b of the stock-head of the lathe 
and upon the bit. The same end may be ac 
complished by turning the case J and the 
screw-threaded portion B, which will travel 
within the case C and produce the same re 
sults-to wit, force the dogs upon the shank 
of the bit. The dogs, being provided with cut- 85 
ters h, as shown, will form a countersink, if 
the article in which the perforation is made is 
brought in contact there with. 
In operating the chuck to open or close the 
jaws, the parts B and J move as one piece, 90 
while the other parts move in a similar man 
e. 
It will be readily seen that when it is de 
sired to remove the bit it may be accomplished 
by turning the portions B and J in an oppo- 95 
site direction from which they are turned to 
tighten the jaws. 
The cap His held against lateral movement 
upon the stock by means of the shoulder K. 
75 
r 
5O From the foregoing it will be apparent that i upon the stock between the screw-threaded Ico 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
297,070 
5 
O 
portions B and l. As the stock is turned in 
the proper direction and the case E held sta 
tionary, it will cause the portion C to recede 
and the dogs to slide rearwardly, so as to allow 
the bit to be withdrawn. If the case or por 
tion C is advanced sufficiently in the head, the 
cutters will abut against each other and con 
jointly form a single tool, which may he em 
ployed as a centerer. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a lathe-chuck, of 
the stock having a threaded head provided 
With a front tapering portion, against which 
bears a series of cutting-dogs, a case traveling 
on the said head and adapted to exert a down 
Ward pressure on the dogs, and a shell concen 
tric with the cap and clamping the dogs against 
the conical front portion of the head, and rig 
idly Secured by engaging a threaded cap, against 
Which bears the head, and which is re-enforced 
by a second cap secured on the stock, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination, in a lathe-chuck, of a 
case traveling on a threaded head and having 
a front conical portion, a series of openings 
near the center and radiating therefrom, and 
provided with grooves d, adapted to receive 
ribs on the body portions of the cutting-dogs 
25 
which rest snugly in the said radiating open 
ings, and a shell concentric with the said case 
and adapted to clamp the dogs against the said 
head and Screw-threaded at its rear for en 
gagement with a threaded cap, substantially 
as Set forth. 
3. The combination, in a lathe - chuck, of 
an interiorly-threaded case traveling on the 
threaded body of the head of the stock, and 
having a front conical portion provided with 
inclined grooved openings adapted to receive 
inclined body portions of a series of dogs ribbed 
as described, and a shell, Substaatially as Set 
set forth. 
4. The combination, in a lathe-chuck, of a 
stock having a threaded head, B, a threaded 
case, C, traveling thereon, and having a coni 
cal portion provided with grooved openings 
inclined to receive inclined ribbed dogs, a shell 
E, concentric with said case C, and screw 
threaded at its rear to engage a threaded cap, 
FI, against the head of which bears the shoul 
deri of the head, and a cap, J, secured to the 
neck, and re-enforcing the cap H, substan 
tially as set forth. 
GEORGE W. DAVIS. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD J. LUCE, 
FRANK. A. MILLIKEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297171.txt	(No Model) 
No. 297,171, 
 
C S CHUMACHIER, 
RATCHET DRILL 
Patented Apr, 22, 1884. 
SS 
W//j2s. 
f 
% -s /&e 
 
(6. Aw 
a 72%- 
- 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographor, Washington. d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CASPAR SCHUMACHIER, OF KALK, GERMANY. 
RATCHET, DR L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 297,171, dated April 22, 1884. 
Application filed December 21, 1882. (No model.) Patented in Germany July 21, 1881, No. 17,477. 
5 
O 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern, 
Be it known that I, CASPAR SCHUMACHIER, 
of Kalk, Germany, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Ratchet-Braces, (for 
which I have obtained a patent in Germany, 
bearing date July 21, A. D. 1881, No. 17,477,) 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention has for its object to construct 
a ratchet-brace provided with automatic and 
variable feed. 
In describing the invention, reference will 
be made to the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a cross-section, and Fig. 2 a longi 
tudinal Section, of an improved ratchet-brace. 
The construction of the tool is as follows: A 
drill-holder, a, is provided at one end with an 
opening, g, for the drill, and at the other end 
with a screw-thread, in which the screw-spin 
dleb may be turned by means of the lever b'. 
Over the upper end of the drill-holder fits an 
adjusting-sleeve, c, forming at the lower end 
a ratchet-wheel, c, facing the ratchet-wheela', 
formed on the drill-holder a. To the inside of 
the adjusting-sleeve c is secured a feather or 
key, d, serving to attach the sleeve to the spin 
die b. The ratchet-wheel a has a tooth more 
than the wheel c, and both may be turned by 
a pawl, e, pivoted on a pin, f. The pawl is 
pressed against the wheels by a spring, h. The 
whole mechanism is held by a lever, k, pro 
vided with a recess for the ratchet-wheels, 
ratchet, and Spring, which recess is covered 
with a lid, l, secured to the lever by screws 
in m. Outside the lidlthere may be keyed on 
the sleeve c a third ratchet-wheel, n, having 
one or two teeth less than the wheel c'. A 
pawl, 0, gearing into the ratchet-wheel n, may 
be turned aside and set out of action when de 
sired. 
The operation of the tool is as follows: The 
drill is held upon the piece of work, and the 
screw-spindle is turned out of the adjusting 
sleeve until the pointed head of the spindle. 
abuts against the counter-plate, which forms 
the necessary support in drilling. The lever 
k is then turned to and fro, whereby the drill 
holder at and the sleeve c are turned in the 
- same direction, but through different lengths 
of travel, owing to the difference in the num 
ber of teeth of the ratchet-wheels c' and a'. 
After every forward motion of the lever k for 
more than one division of the ratchet-wheels, 
(more than one tooth,) the pawl will be found 
in contact with two superposed teeth of the 
two ratchet-wheels, the contact-faces of these 
two teeth being in one vertical plane, while 
the contact-faces of all other teeth of one 
wheel are intermediate between the contact 
faces of the other wheel. If, now, the lever k. 
is turned back for several teeth, the pawl will 
slide over the teeth of both wheels, and when 
the forward motion commences the pawl will 
first come in gear with a tooth of the ratchet 
wheel having the smaller pitch-that is to say, 
the upper wheel, c'-and turn the same alone 
until the pawl comes also in contact with the 
nearest tooth of the wheel a?, after which both 
wheels turn together until the end of the 
As the sleeve e is keyed 
stroke of the lever k. 
on the spindie b, the latter turns in the drill 
holder a as long as a remains stationary-that 
is to say, as long as the pawl is in contact with 
the upper wheel, c', only. By this motion the 
spindle b will be screwed out of the drill 
holder a, and thereby feed the latter forward 
until the pawl has come in contact with both 
ratchet-wheels, after which only a rotary mo 
tion of the drill takes place. The ratio be 
tween the rotary motion of the drill and its 
feed motion will remain approximately con 
stant as long as there is only one ratchet 
wheel (c) on the sleeve c. In order to render 
such feed motion variable, a third ratchet 
wheel, n, is keyed on the sleeve c outside the 
lid; or several such ratchet - wheels may be 
keyed on. As the outer ratchet-wheel has at 
least one tooth less than the wheel c, it will 
commence to turn sooner and the feed motion 
will be greater. 
- 
What I claim is 
In ratchet-braces, the combination of a 
drill-holder, a, provided with internal screw 
thread, and with ratchet-teeth a', with a . 
screw-spindle, b, and adjusting-sleeve c, Se 
cured to the screw-spindle, and having ratchet 
teeth c, spring-pawl e, hand-lever k, ratchet 
wheel n, secured to the adjusting-sleevec, and 
having at least one tooth less than the sleeve 
c, and a pawl, o, adapted to be put in and out 
of gear with the wheel , substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing winesses. 
Witnesses: 
C. SCHUMACHER. 
G. ADOLF HARTZ, 
WILH. HARTMANN. 
45 
55 
75 
9O 
95 
ICO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297271.txt	(No Model.) D, E, LADD & E. J. B. WHITAKER. 
SHOW CASE. 
No. 297,271. 
  
  
 
5&Ecstasises 
y 
  
7'ig. 4. ZZ 
e H 
222222 esses: 
fee Ca 
9. 
frza 
a rod- 6, efo-cloc/ 
6. f. 6, UAiza A. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
DANIEL E. LADD AND ELIJAH J. B. WHITAKER, OF BALTIMORE, MD. 
SHOW a CASE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 297,271, dated April 22, 1884. 
. Application filed June 23, 1882. Renewed March 19, 1884. (No model.) 
The letter A designates the 
to a/Z, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, DANIEL E. LADD and 
ELIJAH J. B. WHITAKER, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Baltimore, in the 
5 State of Maryland, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Show-Cases, 
of Which the following is a specification, refer. 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
IO Our invention relates to a show-case, and 
has for its object to employ for the case a 
glass shade or globe of half-spherical shape, 
and to provide the same with a hinge attached 
to a base, so that the case may be raised at 
One side. Thus the case serves at once as both 
Case and cover. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure 1 is 
a side view of the case. Fig. 2 is a view on a 
larger Scale of a part of the shade, showing the 
metal binding. Fig. 3 is a view of the spring 
Wire, which constitutes the hinge. Fig. 4 is 
a View in which is shown the connection and 
attachment of the spring - wire to the base. 
Fig. 5 is a top side view of part of the base. 
Fig. 6 is a bottom side view of same. 
glass shade, 
and B the base upon which the shade sits. 
A hinge, C, Secures the shade to the base and 
permits that side of the shade opposite thereto 
to be raised, as indicated in Fig. 1. A suit 
able pad, D, attached to the base or to the 
shade near the hinge, serves as a stop device 
to limit the movement of the shade and to 
act as a stay When it is up. A spring is at 
tached to the shade in such manner as to tend 
normally to raise the shade, and a catch or 
latch is provided diametrically opposite the 
hinge to hold the shade down. 
Proceeding now to a detailed description of 
the construction, the shade is provided around 
its bottom rim with a sheet-metal binding, E, 
secured thereto by cement or otherwise, and 
in such Way as to leave a space, f, between the 
rim edge and binding. A spring-wire, g, oc 
cupies the space f for a part, say, one-fourth, 
of the distance around, and the endsg' of said 
wire are attached to the binding in any suit 
able manner. The central part of this spring 
wire, as seen in Fig. 3, is bent to form two 
5O loops, h, which project through openings i in 
the sheet-metal binding. Each of these loops 
passes vertically through a hole, l, in the base, 
3. 5 
25 
45 
The pad D may consist of a block of rub- 65 
A catch-hook, F, projects up through a slot, 75 
and are rigidly secured on the under side of 
the base, as shown at h, in any suitable man 
ner. The loops hand the spring-wireg, ex-55 
tending part of the Way around, with its ends 
only fastened, being thereby adapted to be 
twisted slightly, constitutes the hinge C. The 
slight twisting of the wire g, which the low 
ering of the shade A occasions, causes the 
same to act as a spring, having a tendency to 
raise the shade, as in Fig. 1, so that in the 
present case the spring-wire serves both as a 
hinge and a Spring. 
ber, a leather cushion, or other suitable elastic 
stop, and, as in the present case, may be at 
tached to the base B, or may be attached to 
the shade A in proximity to the hinge C, 
whereby, when the shade is raised, the pad D7o 
will be between the shade and base, and will 
act as a stop to prevent further movement of 
the shade, and Will serve to sustain the same 
and prevent the glass from being broken. 
n, in the base diametrically opposite the hinge 
C. This hook engages with a lateral lip, p, on 
the inner side of the metal binding E, indi 
cated in Fig. 1. The catch-hook F is on the 
end of a rod, F, which extends and moves 
endwise across the bottom of the base, as Seen 
in Figs. 1 and 5. At the extremity of this 
rod is a hook or ring, q, by which the finger 
may draw on it to release the catch-hook. A 
spring, r, is made fast to the bottom, and is 
connected to the rod in Such manner as to 
cause the rod and hook to be normally thrust 
in the direction which will engage the hook 
with the lip p. By this arrangement the catch 
hook may be released, so as to raise the shade, 
by entering the finger under the hinged side 
of the base. A short lever, s, is pivoted to 
the bottom on the catch-hook F side of the 
base, and is connected to the rod in such man 
ner that when the finger draws on the hook 95 
or ring t on the end of said lever the catch 
hook will be released, and thus the shade may 
be raised from this side also of the base. A 
shoulder, t, is formed around the base below 
the upper surface, and serves as a seat for the 
binding E- of the shade. The base is sup 
ported by feet v, which elevate it sufficient to 
permit entering the finger under the base. 
This shade A may be surmounted by any 
OO 
 
's 
2 
297,271 
5 United States- 
- 
I the loops projecting through the aforesaid 2d 
ornamental figure or device, c, which taste metal binding having openings i, the binding 
may suggest. 
being so secured as to leave a space, f, between 
Having described our invention, we claim it and the rim, a spring-wire having loops h, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the the ends of the wire occupying the space, and 
1. In a show-case, the combination of a base, openings, and a base having holes k, through 
B, a half-spherical glass shade provided around which pass the said loops, which are rigidly 
its rim with a metal binding, a hinge attached secured, as and for the purpose set forth. 
to the said binding and base, a spring which 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
hook which holds the shade when down, and 
which is provided on the under side of the 
base with means for its release, as set forth. 
2. In a show-case, the combination of the 
I5 glass shade provided around its rim with a 
IO tends normally to raise the shade, and a catch- in presence of two. Witnesses. 
DANIEL E. LADD. 
ELIJAH. J. B. WHITAKER, 
Witnesses: 
JNO. T. MADDOX, 
JoHN E. MoRRIs. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297371.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 297,371, 
G. S. FORREST, 
DOUBLE HEADED GAGE. 
Patented Apr. 22, 1884. 
 
2 N 3. 3. 32 
 
 
 
 
2. 
d 
a 
a 2 
2 
3 
2 2 
77/2Zezesses, 
g/2%3%ZZ 
7 (2.7%.2/21/2 
h 
 
Z2 ze 22 to 7. 
6.5 Z 27-22es Z. 
per-672 
C - 2 
1zzo 222 ey. 
perERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297472.txt	(No Model.) 
P. A. TERRELL. 
WIRE BARBING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet }, 
No. 297,472, 
Patented Apr. 22, 1884, 
 
 
, 
III 
ITTTTTTTTTTH 
sts.H. IESEIU 
... list is 
al. W. 
III e II e III 
 
 
 
  
 
 
into II - III 
IEEE 
is 
s so 
Sis 5 
s 
1 
 
17 verto 
2%e2ell 
6. 2-22-veo 26, 4-ev-u 
c/zto-ey 
(No Model.) 
No. 297,472, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
P. A. TERRELL. 
WIRE BARBING MACHINE. 
4. Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 22, 1884, 
Sl 
SS ZZZZZZZZ S SS 
S. 
se 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
B 
Invenior; 
ae 
ca-eir 
('at 
N, PEERs. Phato-lithographer. Washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
P. A., TERRELL, 
WIRE BARBING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 297,472, 
Patented Apr, 22, 1884, 
WITNESSES: 
& Ae 4- 9 
ety6/ 
N. perERs. photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C 
 
'' 
INVENTOR 
2-7774 
BY Av66azz 
ATTORNEY 
(No Model.) 
P A TERRELL. 
WIRE BARBING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 297,472. 
Patented Apr. 22, 1884, 
S 
& SITIS SITEHES 
St S 
aN2 
al 
S is is 
NNN 
N 
S hits 
Jer `NS S Nucleus 
&NS INN 
 
 
 
N s NS 
NN 
N NaNessly Ntv. 
"s 
NN. 
in IIISSN 
v/il 7 esses; 
T7a veal or 
 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. .. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PLEASANT A. TERRELL OF GRINNELL, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JAMES 
H. COON, OF DES MOINES, IOW.A. 
WR E. BARBNG VACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 297,472, dated April 22, 1884. 
Application filed August 27, 1883. . (No model.) 
IO 
Io add whom it nucully concern: 
Be it known that I, PLEASANTA. TERRELL 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Grinnell, in the county of Poweshiek and State 
of Iowa, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Wire-Barbing Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to wire-barbing ama 
chines, and more particularly to that class in 
which a two-pointed-wire barb is applied to 
one strand of fence-wire, and said strand is 
twisted with a plain Wire to produce barbed 
cable fence-wire; and the invention consists 
in the novel constructions, combinations, and 
arrangement of parts, hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and specifically pointed out in the 
claims. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved mal 
chine. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal sec 
tion on line y if of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical 
cross-section on line a' a' of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is 
an elevation of the barb-feeding mechanism, 
looking from the opposite direction to that 
shown in Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a detail plan view 
of the barb-cutting and barb-coiling devices, 
as hereinafter more fully described. Figs. 6 
and 7 are enlarged views of the barb-coiling 
device attached to and rotated by the twister 
frame. Figs. 8 and 9 are like views of the 
barb-coiling device, which may be mounted 
on the end of the twister-frame journal, and 
operated at a different speed from the twister, 
as hereinafter fully described. Fig. 10 is a 
vertical longitudinal section, showing coiling 
wheel I, in a modified form, mounted on the 
twister, and secured thereto by suitable clamp 
ing-pieces, so that it may be rotated at any 
suitable speed, by a gear-wheel secured on the 
main driving-shaft. 
In Fig. 1, AA is a skeleton frame employed 
as a bed-plate, Supported by Suitable legs, BB, 
and on this bed-plate are mounted the barb 
feeding mechanism, the barb-coiling and ca 
bling mechanism, and the shafting for operat 
ing the same, also the mechanism for feeding 
forward the fence-wires at regular intervals. 
C is a standard attached to the bed-plate, 
and forms a support for the fixed cutting-tool 
o, and for the wire-guided, employed to guide 
the barb-wire from the barb-feeding device to 
its proper position with reference to the cut 
ting-tools and the main fence-wire. 
C is a cap secured to C, and in connection 
With the latter forms a bearing for the rock 
shaft (c. Through C and C, as shown in Fig. 5s 
2, there is provided an opening, 1, in which a 
hardened-steel wire-guide, q', is secured to 
guide the strand of wire which is to be barbed. 
The barb-feeding mechanism consists of the 
eccentric c' secured on the main driving- 6o 
shaft ct, the eccentric-straps c, the arm c, the 
lever c', pivoted to sliding block c at c, the 
flange c' on said block, the guide-rods c' c, 
and the skeleton frame or standard c, rigidly 
attached to the bed-plate. The operation of 65 
the barb-feeding mechanism is as follows: The 
barb-wire is passed through openings in the 
standard c' c", and into the wire-guide d, 
thence forward on a curved line, as indicated 
by dotted line in Fig. 1. When main shaft (t 
revolves, the eccentric operates the arm cand 
draws the lower end of lever c' in toward the 
cutting-tools. When the lever has oscillated a 
Short distance, the upper end comes in con 
tact with the barb-Wire, and clamps the same 
firmly against the flange c'. As the movement 
of the eccentric continues, the block c, to 
gether with the barb-wire thus held, is car 
ried forward on the rods c' cand the barb fed in 
a distance as required to form a barb. While 
the barb is being coiled on the fence-wire and 
before the barb-wire is severed, the eccentric 
throws the lever back and frees the upper end 
The lower portion of the 
from the barb-Wire. 
lever will now engage the end of a set-screw, 
c', secured in a lug projecting from and made 
integral with c, and then forces the sliding . 
. 
block c' back to its original position, ready to . 
repeat the movement described. It will be 
observed that the free movement of lever c' go 
allows the sliding block to be at rest for a 
short time at the end of each thrust of the arm 
c, and by increasing or diminishing this pe 
riod of rest, by the set-screw c', the throw of . 
sliding block c, and gonsequently the length 95 
of the barb, may be regulated as desired. 
Sliding block c reciprocates in a line at right 
angles to the direction of the passage of the 
main fence-Wire, and the opening in the guide . 
through which the barb-wire passes is slightly IOO 
. 
75 
SO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
297,472 
65 
 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
curved, to direct the barb - wire across the 
main wire at an oblique angle, so that the free 
end of the barb-wire, as it is being coiled 
around the fence-wire, will not impinge upon 
that portion of the barb-wire which extends 
from the main wire back to the cutting-tools. 
The movable cutting-tool v is secured in a 
head, b, made integral with shaft a, and is 
operated by Oscillating the shaft by cam-wheel 
b, secured to main driving-shafta, through the 
cam-groove, stud, and roller b and crank b'. 
When the lower end of the crank-arm is 
carried out by the cam, the upper cutting-tool 
is oscillated inward and down upon the barb 
wire. As the motion continues, the barb 
wire, is severed and the free end of the barb 
wire rests upon the upper end of the lower 
cutter, and the barb attached to the fence 
wire and just severed is carried a short dis 
tance down in front of the stationary cutting 
tool, and is free to advance forward toward the 
receiving-reel. 
R is a rotating twister having hollow jour 
mals at each end, adapted to pass the barbed 
wire, mounted in bearings of g, over the bed 
plate. 
S is a spool mounted in the axis of revolu 
tion of the twister-frame, and secured in posi 
tion by a bolt, s, and supplied with proper 
tension by pressure between the head of the 
bolt on one side and springs ss" on the other 
side, in the usual manner. 
r ' ' ' ' are guide-wheels employed to di 
rect the barbed strand around the spool of 
plain Wire, and to guide the same through the 
hollow journals of the twister. The twister is 
rotated by the gear-wheels an and in, the for 
lmer secured on the main shaft a, and the lat 
ter on the forward end of the twister. 
h is a barb-coiling head attached to the rear 
end of the twister by a cap-screw, as shown in 
Fig. 1. As the twister is rotated, the barb 
coiling lug hat the proper time engages the 
end of the barb-wire projected across the fence 
wires, and carries it around the fence-Wire. As 
the process of coiling the barb upon the fence 
wire continues, the free end of the barb-wire 
is gradually shortened until the end projects 
from the fence-Wire just sufficient to form a 
barb. It will then pass freely through the 
opening in the end of the coiling-wheel. When 
it is desired to place the barbs very close to 
gether on the fence-wire, it is desirable to give 
the coiling-head a more rapid motion than the 
twister. I then employ coiling - wheel has 
modified in FigS. 9 and 10, instead of h as 
shown in Figs. 2, 6, and 7, and secure it to the 
end of the twister by the annular groove and 
flanged caps k, as shown in Figs. 9 and 10, 
and rotate the wheel by a gear-wheel, k, on 
the main shaft a. The main wires are twisted 
into a cable near the forward end of the twister 
immediately after passing guide-wheel 9', and 
are carried forward at regularintervals by the 
feed-drum in, mounted on shaft a, secured in 
bearings attached to the bed-plate. a is a 
short shaft mounted in a bearing, T, secured 
to the bed-plate, and carries a gear-wheel, n, 
and cam-wheel n. This shaft is rotated by 
gear-wheel m' on main shaft a through n, its 
mating gear. Cam n is employed to rotate 
the drum at regular intervals as required to 
advance the main Wires. 
12' is a wheel securely attached to the bars 
of the drum, and has on its face a series of 
pins and friction-rollers equidistant from each 
other. Cam in has a groove adapted to engage 
one of these pins at a time, and a flange adapt 
ed to rotate the wheel a distance equal to the 
pitch of the pins at each revolution of the 
Call. 
Drum n' consists of a series of arms, each 
arm having a toothed wheel pivoted thereto 
and allowed to rotate on the pivot. A cam, 
P', is placed on shaft a, but prevented from 
rotating thereon by an arm, v, rigidly at 
tached to the bed-plate. This cam is arranged 
to engage the toothed wheels P, and, as they 
pass around under the shafta, to rotate them, 
respectively, through an arc equal to the pitch 
of the teeth. The cable-wire passes once around 
this drum, resting in the notches of the wheels 
P, and, by reason of the rotary motion given 
said wheels, when the barbed cable comes up 
on the inside of the drum next to the twister 
it will not come in contact with the advancing 
cable, but will lie in the adjacent notches of 
wheels P and pass freely forward to the re 
ceiving-spool. The receiving-reel is attached 
to a distributing-shaft, a, secured in suitable 
bearings, and operated in the usual manner, 
and driven by a belt and flanged pulleys, as 
shown in Fig. 1. As I make no claim to this 
device, and it is well known in the art to 
which my invention pertains, no further de 
scription is here necessary. The barb-wire 
and the wire which is to be barbed may be 
mounted upon brackets secured to the bed 
plate, or on independent supports, as desired. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The barb-feeding mechanism consisting 
of the eccentric c, arm c', lever c', and sliding 
block c, and means for operating said device, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination of eccentric c, arm c, 
lever c, sliding block c, having the lug c', 
flange c', and adjusting-Screw c', substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The barb-cutting mechanism consisting 
of cam b, arm b', oscillating shaft a, made in 
tegral with head b, and cutting-dies v' and v, 
with means for operating Said cam, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The rotating twister R and coiling-wheel 
h, mounted on the twister, in combination with 
the barb-feeding and barb-cutting devices, and 
means for rotating the twister, and means for 
actuating the barb-feeding and barb-cutting 
devices, substantially as described. 
5. The rotating twister R, barb - coiling 
wheelh, mounted on the twister, and the barb 
feeding and barb-cutting mechanisms, in com 
- 
75 
95 
IOO 
ICu5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
297,472 
- 
3 
bination with the drum n', and means for actu- feeding and cutting the barb-wire, substan 
ating all the said several devices, substantially tially as described, and for the purpose set 
as and for the purpose specified. 
forth. 
PLEASANT A. TERRELL. 
6. The rotating twister R and barb-coiling 
5 wheel h, mounted on the twister, with means 
for rotating each of said devices at different 
speeds, in combination with mechanism for 
Witnesses: 
GILBERT DOUGLASS, 
GEO. WEAVER. 
 
TE 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297573.txt	A. DAVIDSON. 
INTEREST CAL CULATOR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 29, 1884. 
(Model.) 
No. 297,573. 
WITNE55E5 
 
(Model.) 
No. 297,573. 
A. DAWIDSON. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
INTEREST CAICULATOR, 
- 
Patented Apr. 29, 1884, 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTO 
R 
A. DAVIDSON, 
INTEREST CAL CULATOR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 29, 1884, 
(Model.) 
No. 297,573. 
 
29 ~ ~ 
 
&<<<<<<<<<ezza ? 
WITNESSES 
Z2-4-22-2 
w 
NVENTOR 
PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, b, c, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ARNOLD DAVIDSON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
INTEREST CACUATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 297,573, dated April 29, 1884. 
Application filed August 16, 1883. (Model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern, 
Beit known that I, ARNOLD DAVIDSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Brooklyn, county of Kings, State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improved Interest-Calculator or Metric Inter 
est-Table, of which the following is a specifi 
cation, having reference to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part thereof. 
The interest-calculating devices heretofore 
used have been made by taking one of the ele 
ments in the interest-calculation problem-of 
principal, of rate, or of time-as a fixed and 
invariable standard, and consequently show 
either the interest computed at a single rate 
On various amounts of principal for various 
periods of time, or the interest on a single 
amount of principal at various rates for vari 
ous periods of time, or else the interest for a 
single period of time on various amounts of 
principal at various rates, but do not admit 
in One and the same device of the variation of 
all of the elements of the interest-calculation 
problems. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
simple and expeditious interest - calculating 
device which will show the interest on any 
principal for any period of time at any rate 
percentage. The device, as shown, gives, by 
means of simple mechanical adjustment, the 
interest on amounts from one dollar to nine 
dollars and multiples of the same by ten, one 
hundred, one thousand, ten thousand, and one 
hundred thousand for periods of from one day 
to nine days and multiples of the same by ten 
and one hundred at as many different rates of 
percentage as may be desired, and by the fur 
ther process of addition of the so-computed 
interest on any amount to nine hundred and 
ninety-nine thousand nine hundred and nine 
ty-nine dollars for any period up to nine hun 
dred and ninety-nine days. In the example 
shown and described it gives the interest on 
these amounts of principal and for these pe 
riods of time at eleven different rates of per 
The drawings, in which the same letters of 
reference indicate like parts, represent, in Fig 
ures 1 and 2, a plan view of the interest-calcu 
lator or metric interest - table with aperture 
No. 4 in position; in Fig. 3, a section of the 
Centage. 
W 
a 
lower disk, A; in Fig. 4, an enlarged section 
of the calculator with aperture No. 4 in the 
same position as shown in Fig. 1; in Fig. 5, a 
vertical section of Fig. 4 on the line of XX. 55 
A represents the lower disk; B, the upper 
disk; C, the rivets securing disks A and B to 
each other; Y, a table directing the use of the 
different apertures: a, the sectoral columns 
within the plane of the twelve inner concen- 6o 
tric circles of the lower disk, A.; b, the eleven 
inner concentric circular spaces of the lower 
disk, A; c, the two outer concentric circular 
spaces of the lower disk, A, being that part 
of this disk which is exposed to view when the 65 
upper and smaller disk, B, is superincumbent 
upon it; a?, the thirty-six sectoral columns of the 
two outer concentric spaces, c, corresponding 
to the Sectoral columns at of the eleven inner 
concentric circular spaces, b, d, the marginal 7o 
spaces of the eight sectoral columns of the up 
per disk, B; e, the apertures in the eight sec 
toral columns of the upper disk, B, the spaces 
covered with tracing-cloth or other transpa 
rent material, f g, dollar and cent signs of 75 
various periods. 
The device shown in the drawings consists 
of the two plane disks A. and B-One Superin 
cumbent upon the other-composed of Card 
board or other suitable material, constructed 8O 
and inscribed as below specified, and so Se 
cured to each other at their centers C as to 
permit of independent rotary movements. 
The lower and larger of these disks, A, is di 
vided into fourteen concentric circular spaces, 85 
if no more than eleven rates of percentage are 
required. If more, one space is added for each 
additional rate. These concentric circular 
spaces are divided by radii into thirty-six or 
more equal divisions, forming sectoral col- 9o 
umns. These thirty-six sectoral columns a 
are each Subdivided within the eleven concen 
tric circular spaces b by seven radial lines, 
thereby providing eight spaces for interest 
amounts expressed in as many figures. The 95 
two outer concentric circular spaces, c, are 
denominated the one Principal, the other 
Time, or vice versa, which denomination is 
inscribed in each of the thirty-six Sectoral Col 
umns a? of the two outer concentric circular IOO 
spaces, c. In each of these sectoral columns 
a', I also place the factors of a common multi 
O 
25 
40 
45 
2 
297,573 
ple, the various multiplicands of one such mul 
tiple in the space a denominated Principal, 
and the various multipliers of the same mul 
tiple in the space c. denominated Time, or 
vice versa, selecting for the device, as shown, 
Such common multiples as are the result of 
the multiplication of the numbers one to nine 
With the numbers one to nine; andleaving out 
all repetitions by the aforesaid arrangement 
of the factors, there are left only thirty-six 
Original common multiples. This arralnge 
ment can be continued to any extent, being 
limited simply by the space to be occupied, 
unnecessary repetition and labor being avoid 
cd by using the common multiple in the man 
ner above stated. For instance, the interest 
on three dollars for eight days, on four dol 
lars for six days, on six dollars for four days, 
and on eight dollars for three days is pre 
cisely the same, the rate being uniform. This 
interest expressed in proper and sufficient fig 
ures decimally is also the interest on any mul 
tiple by ten, one hundred, one thousand, ten 
thousand, and one inundred thousand of the 
above amounts for the time set opposite the 
Same, the decimal-point only being moved in 
accordance with the arithmetical rule that the 
numbers of decimal places in the result (i.e., 
the said interest) must equal the sum of the 
places in the multiplicand added to those in 
the multiplier, and the time can also be in 
creased correspondingly by ten and one hun 
dred by simply moving the decimal-point in 
the said result as aforesaid. Therefore, in the 
above example, the result of seventy-two dis 
tinct calculations of interest at a given rate 
of percentage is expressed by a single pro 
duct by simply changing the position of the 
decimal-point when necessary. 
and 
Time lines as above indicated, I place in the 
thirty-six sectoral columns a of the eleven inner 
concentric circular spaces, b, the interest, ex 
pressed decimally and extended to from five to 
eight figures, on the amount of principal and 
for the period of time as found in the two outer 
concentric circular spaces, c, and at the rate 
of percentage as placed in the margin d of the 
aperture c of the upper disk, B, hereinafter 
described, so that for the first sectoral column, 
(t', I place on the line of the innermost of the 
eleven inner concentric circular spaces the 
interest Oll one dollar for one day at one-half 
per cent., expressed decimally in five figures; 
on the line of the next concentric circular 
space, the interest on the same amount for the 
same period of time at onepel cent.; in the next, 
the same at two per cent.; and so on, in regular 
progression, up to ten per cent. With gradual 
increase, expressed in six figures, repeating 
this in each of the remaining sectoral columns 
(t, but varying the interest according to the 
various principals and times found in the cor 
responding sectoral column, a', of the two 
Outer concentric circular spaces, c, so that on 
arriving at the sectoral column having 9 in 
Having arranged the ' 'rincipal 
the Principal' and 9 in the Time space, I 
place on the line of the innermost of the eleven 
inner concentric circular spaces the interest, 
represented by seven figures, on nine dollars 
for nine days at one-half per cent,; on the line 
of the next concentric circular space, the in 
terest on the same amount for the same period 
of time at one per cent.; on the next, the same 
at two per cent.; and so on, in regular pro 
gression, up to ten per cent., with its gradual 
increase expressed in eight figures. 
As it is customaly among Some merchants 
and bankers to calculate interest on the basis 
of three hundred and sixty days per annum, 
two distinct computations may be used, based, 
respectively, on three hundred and sixty-five 
days and on three hundred and sixty days 
per annum. The figures in the device shown 
are based on the former system. 
The upper and smaller disk, B, extends to 
the second outermost circle, c, of the lower 
disk, A. This upper disk or dial, B, is in 
part divided by radii into eight sectoral col 
umns, and each of these sectoral columns 
is subdivided by eleven arcs of concentric 
circles, the same as and corresponding to 
the sectoral columns at and their concentric 
circles b on the lower disk, A. Each of these 
eight sectoral columns is provided with a 
marginal space, d, which space is likewise di 
vided by eleven arcs of concentric circles cor 
responding to the circles b. On the line of 
each of these concentric arcs in the Said mar 
ginal space d is placed one of the different 
lates of percentage, commencing at the inner 
arc with the lowest rate and continuing out 
ward, in regular progression, to the highest 
rate, or vice versa. Each of the eight sectoral 
columns of this upper disk, B, is provided 
with an aperture, e, the width of which is 
regulated according to the number of sub 
divisions of the sectoral column at of the lower 
disk, A, which it is desired to expose. The 
first of these apertures, proceeding from left 
to right, is the size of three of the said sub 
divisions, the second of four, and so on, Nos. 
6, 7, and S being the size of one sectoral col 
lumn (t. 
Underneath the upper disk, B, is 
fixed tracing-cloth or other transparent ma 
terial, f, so arranged as to extend on the right 
hand side of and partly over the side of 
seven of these apertures, being made in the first 
six apertures to cover a space equal to two 
of the Subdivisions of the sectoral columns (t. 
of the lower disk, A, and in the seventh to 
cover only one of such subdivisions to indi 
cate decimal fractions, as hereinafter men 
tioned. Above and below the apertures, com 
mencing at the left hand, are inscribed the 
signs of dollars and cents in constantly-in 
creasing periods, (f, as shown in the drawings 
i. e., on 1 and 2 Cents; on the left-hand 
side of 3, Dollars'; the remaining spaces, 
Cents; on 4, the two left-hand spaces; on 5, 
the three left-hand spaces; on 6, the four; on 7, 
the five; and on S the six left-hand spaces are 
90 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
I I5 
O 
2 5. 
3. 5 
5 5 
65 
297,573 
3 
5 
Io 
35 
45 
marked l)ollars, all the remaining spaces 
in each being marked Cents, excluding in 
each instance the space above and below the 
portion of the apertures covered by tracing 
cloth f, as aforesaid. 
The calculator or metric interest-table can 
be used upon a device having a rectangular 
plane surface, with the computations of in 
terest placed in vertical columns instead of in 
sectoral columns, and with the Principal 
and Time arranged upon the same principle, 
and in accordance with the same arrangement 
and in combination, as in the case of the lower 
disk, A, above described. 
In such an ar 
rangement the marginal columns d of the ap 
ertures on the upper disk, B, containing the 
different rates of percentage will be placed on 
the left of each of the vertical columns. In 
place of the apertures e on the upper disk, B, 
a ruler or other Suitable instrument is used 
having a scale thereon graduated correspond 
ing to the apertures e of the upper disk, B, 
for the purpose of mechanically moving the 
decimal-point and defining the division be 
tween Dollars and Cents. 
Either of the above devices could also be con 
structed by placing the Rate and Time 
or the Principal and Rate' in the spaces 
in the outer circles, c, of the lower disk, A, or 
above the vertical columns. In that event it 
is only necessary to place the rejected element 
(i.e., the Principal or the Time, as the 
case may be) in the marginal spaces d of the 
upper disk or to the left of the vertical columns. 
To use the calculator or metric interest-ta 
ble, I find on the lower disk, A, the sectoral 
column a', having in the Principal and 
'' Time spaces c the left-hand figure of the 
given principal and the left-hand figure of the 
given time, and place over the corresponding 
sectoral columna, as shown in Figs. 1 and 4, 
the required aperture, which is found by a 
reference to the table Y; and, being guided by 
the per cent, rate as found in the margin d of 
the aperture e of the upper disk, B, I read off 
the corresponding interest. At the same time 
the fractional part of such interest is seen 
through the tracing-cloth f. 
If this is under 
fifty-hundredths, it is disregarded. If fifty or 
over, one cent is added to the interest. If 
the principal, time, or rate is represented 
by a compound figure, I proceed in the same 
manner--e.g., if the interestis to be computed 
on six hundred and fifty dollars for nineteen 
days at four and one-half per cent. I find, as 
hereinbefore described, first, the intereston six 
hundred dollars for ten days at four per cent. 
and at the same time at one-half per cent.; 
then on fifty dollars for ten days at four per 
cent. and one-half per cent.; then on six hun 
dred dollars for nine days at four per cent. 
and one-half per cent., and then on fifty dol 
lars for nine days at four per cent. and one 
half per cent, and add the different interest 
amounts together, but use, at the same time, 
each of the fractionis as shown through the 
tracing-cloth f, and only treat the resultant 
fraction as above indicated. 
. The position of aperture No. 4, as shown in 
Figs. I and 4, gives the interest at eleven dif 
ferent rates of percentage from one-half per 
cent. to ten per cent, on either thirty dollal'S, 
forty dollars, sixty dollars, or eighty dollars 
for, respectively, eight hundred, six hundred, 
four hundred, or three hundred days; or on 
three hundred dollars, four hundred dollars, 
six hundred dollars, or eight hundred dollars 
for, respectively, eighty, sixty, forty, or thirty 
days; or on three thousand dollars, four thou 
sand dollars, six thousand dollars, or eight 
thousand dollars for, respectively, eight, six, 
four, or three days; or on two hundred and 
forty dollars, two thousand four hundred dol 
lars, or twenty-four thousand dollars for, re 
spectively, one hundred, ten, or one day; Or 
on one hundred and twenty dollars, twelve 
hundred dollars, or twelve thousand dollars 
for, respectively, two hundred, twenty, or two 
days; or on four hundred and eighty dollars 
or four thousand eight hundred dollars for, 
respectively, fifty or five days; or on one hun 
dred and sixty dollars or sixteen hundred dol 
lars for, respectively, one hundred and fifty or 
fifteen days; or on seventy-five dollars or seven 
hundred and fifty dollars for, respectively, 
three hundred and twenty or thirty-two days; 
or on three hundred and twenty dollars for 
seventy-five days; or on ninety-six dollars or 
nine hundred and sixty dollars for, respect 
iyely, two hundred and fifty or twenty-five 
days; or on two hundred and fifty dollars for 
ninety-six days; or on three hundred and 
seventy-five dollars for sixty-four days; or 
on sixty-four dollars for three hundred and 
seventy-five days; or on one hundred and nine 
two dollars for one hundred and twenty-five 
days; or on one hundred and twenty-five dol 
lars for one hundred and ninety-two days, so 
that by means of the adjustment of aperture 
No. 4 upon the lower disk, A, as shown in 
Figs. 1 to 4, the result of three hundred and 
fifty-two different interest-calculation prob 
ems is given. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An interest - calculating device having 
parts adjustable one with relation to the oth 
er, upon which are displayed a table of inter 
estand different expressions of each of the ele 
ments of principal, of rate, and of time in the 
interest-calculation problem, whereby such de 
vice is adapted to admit of the variation of the 
value of each and every of such elements, and 
thus show any amount of interest sought for, 
substantially as described. 
2. A device for calculating interest which 
admits of the variation of any one of the three 
elements in the interest-calculation problem 
of principal, of rate, and of time, consisting 
of a lower disk or table bearing two of such 
elements, in conjunction with an interest-ta 
75 
SO 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
 
297, 
573. 
r 
45 
55 
having a table of figures thereon, an indicator 
having apertures therein, and tracing-cloth or 
othel' transparent material covering a portion 
of such apertures, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
S. In an interest-calculating device, a lower 
disk or device having a computation table or 
tables thei'eon, and different expressions of 
two of the elements of the interest-calculation 
problem, in combination with an upper disk 
or indicator having therein apertures of va 
rious widths and bearing different expressions 
of the third element, substantially as herein 
described. 
3. In a calculating device, a lower disk or 
device having a computation table or tables 
thereon and diffei'ent expressions of two of 
the elements in the interest-calculation prob 
len, in Coimbination with an upper disk or in 
dicator having apertures of various widths, 
adjacent to which are figure-columns and lif. 
ferent expressions of the third element, sub 
stantially as described. 
(). Ila combination with a lower disk haw - 
ing interest-computations thereon, a superin 
cumbent revoluble indicator having a space or 
spaces thereon adapted to expose the subja 
cent interest-columns, and upon the margin 
of such space Ol' spaces dollar and cent signs 
in various periods, whereby the proper value 
of the figures in the interest-computations dis 
played beneath is indicated, substantially as 
described. 
11. The combination of the projecting disk 
A with the tipper disk, B, having therein ap 
eitures e and partial coverings f of transpar 
ent material, and the interest table or tables 
constructed and arranged for the purposes and 
substantially as shown and described. 
ARNOLD IDAVIDSON. 
Witnesses: 
CLARENCE W. FRANCIS, 
F. A. DOYLE. 
O 
ble and an upper disk or indicator learing 
the remaining element, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In combination with an interest-calculat 
ing device, a table having grouped together 
pairs of factors, each of which pair has a coal 
lmon multiple with the others of the sale group, 
Such group consisting of two of the elements 
of the interest-calculation problem of pirinci 
pal, of late, or of time, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In combination with a superincumbent 
disk or indicator, a lower disk or other device 
having thereon an interest-table, a part where 
of consists of two of the three elements in the 
interest-calculation problem of principal, time, 
or rate, grouped together in pairs, each pil' 
of which respectively is composed of two fac 
tors of a multiple common to it, and every 
other pair of the same group, substantially as 
described. 
5. In a device for calculating interest, an 
indicator having apertures of various widths 
therein, and having inscribed thereon adja 
cent to Such apertures the different values of 
one of the tlhlee elements in the interest-cal 
culation problem of principal, of rate, and of 
time, in combination with another disk or ta 
ble bearing computations of intel'est, and, in 
connection therewith, the two remaining ele 
ments, substantially as herein shown anti tie 
scribed. 
6. An interest-calculator consisting of an 
indicator having apertures of various widths 
therein, and adjacent to such alpertures dif 
ferent expressions of rates of percentage, in 
combination with an interest. table displayed 
in columns upon a disk or other device, and 
having, in connection with such columns, dif. 
?erent expressions of the elements of princi. 
pal and of time, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
7. In combination with a calculating device 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297673.txt	C. CHAMBERS, Jr. 
MACHINE FOR FOLDING TOWELS, NAPKINS, &c. 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
(No Model.) 
No. 297,673. 
Patented Apr. 29, 1884. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2. 2. 2. St2 .tSS s:a. 
 
 
 
 
 
W -M WA. 
 
Aft 
Hili III.iii. I 
7 
A. 
 
NSO isea h 
i 
I HEALTIDIA 
it, i. A 
| RI 
El 
Am illii 
... -- 
WITNESSES: 
6.62.2 
A-4-4-627 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithograplic. Washiro. D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
C. CHAMBERS, Jr. 
MACHINE FOR FOLDING TOWELS, NAPKINS, &c., 
No. 297,673. 
Patented Apr. 29, 1884. 
I 
N 
3 
: As 
1626,134 se 
2 N 
I 
c 
N S 
El r 
% 2 E. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
s: 
CYRUS CHAMBERS, JR., OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MACHINE FOR FOLDING Towels, NAPKINS, &c. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Fetters Patent No. 297,673, dated April 29, 1884. 
f 
Application filed March 31, 1883. (No model.) 
To all, whom, it tray concert, i. 
Beit known that I, CYRUS CHAMBERs, Jr., 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city and county of Philadelphia, and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Fold 
ing Towels, Napkins, and Similar Articles, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the ac 
Companying drawings. 
Figure I, Sheet 1, is a plan or top view of 
my machine with the feed-table and convey 
ing-tapes removed. Fig. 2, Sheet 2, is a trans 
verse section of the invention on the line a b, 
Fig. 1, with the feed-table in place. Fig. 3is 
a detail plan, enlarged, of one of the rotary 
brushes with its connections and adjustments. 
Fig. 4 is a longitudinal vertical section on the 
line ed, Fig. 2, enlarged, the brush-wheelbe 
ing broken off through the vertical middle 
thereof. Fig. 5 is an end elevation of one of 
the boxes in which the first pair of folding 
rolls and brush-shafts are journaled, as herein 
after described. 
Like letters of reference, where they occur 
in the several figures, mark corresponding or 
Similar parts. 
The purpose of this invention is to provide 
a power-machine for smoothing out and fold 
ing articles from the laundry-such astwels, 
napkins, &c.-with convenience and dispatch. 
I term the machine a laundry-folder.' . 
Referring to the annexed drawings, A is a 
horizontal feed-table, upon which the articles 
to be folded are laid, one at a time, by the 
operative, to a gage lengthwise over a longi 
tudinal slot, S, in the table, so that the middle 
of the article will be in line with Said slot. 
In this position it is struck through the latter 
into the bite of the first pair of folding-rolls, 1 
2, beneath the table, by means of a blade, K, 
vibrating at regular intervals through the ac 
tion of a cam, P., upon the cam-shaft K', in 
the ordinary manner with folding-machines. 
Onits way to this pairofoils the ends of the 
article are brought into contact, respectively, 
with a pair of rapidly-revolving circular brush 
wheels, B, placed horizontally beneath the 
feed-table, and whose points of contact are in 
the vertical plane with those of the first pair 
of rolls, 1 2. These brushes separate and 
smooth out the end fringes of the towel, &c., 
should the article be provided with fringes. 
The second fold, which is also made length 
wise with the towel, &c., or parallel with the 
first fold, is given by the second pair of rolls, 
23, into the bite of which it is struck just as 
it has about passed through the first pair of 
rolls, by a blade, K, mounted upon a rock 
shaft, c. This blade is caused to vibrate by 
the operation of a cam, Q, upon the cam-shaft 
K. and the compression-spring t on rod V 
connecting the knife-bar with said cam, as 
seen in Fig. 2. The now twice-folded towel, 
&c., having passed through rollers 23, is car 
ried on upon tapes, (indicated by the dotted 
lines a, Fig. 2.) which run over the roll 3 and 
a roller, U, journaled in a bracket, y, Secured 
to the frame of the machine, untilitis arrested 
by a stop, F. Rolls 4 5 are at right angles to 
23, and opposite the middle of the latter, so 
that when the article is brought up against 
stop F, as mentioned, it will be in position to 
be immediately struck into the bite of rolls 4 
and 5, and given a first transverse fold by the 
third folding-blade, K, Fig.1, which vibrates 
at set times, through the action of a cam or 
eccentric upon the cam-shaft, in the usual 
manner in folding-machines. The fourth or 
final fold, which is parallel with the third, is 
effected by means of the vertical roll-pair 56. 
The relation and function of rolls 4 56 corre 
spond with those of the rolls 1 2 3. A fourth 
folding-blade (not seen in any of the accompa 
nying views) tucks the thrice-folded towel, 
&c., as it leaves the bite of rolls 4 5 into the 
bite of rolls 56, the location and operation 
of this blade with reference to rolls 56 being 
as is that of the bladeK to rolls 23. As the 
article passes from between the last folding 
rolls, 56, it is caught by a fly, O, and laid 
by it into a packing-trough, T, in the usual 
The foregoing is a somewhat general de 
scription of the construction and operation of 
my invention. 
I shall now proceed to explain the same in 
detail. 
As the various laundered articles to be 
folded by the machine differ considerably in 
thickness, it is desirable to have a provision 
for the self-adjustment of the folding-rolls to 
accommodate themselvesto the different thick 
nesses. This is accomplished by journaling 
e 
IO 
25 
35 
45. 
55 
75 
9O 
95 
IOO 
w 
 
1. 
297,673 
O 
the shafts of one of the rollers of each pair in 
sliding boxes, which are pressed against by 
spiral springs'. As this is a common expedi 
ent for a similar pulpose in various machines 
having coacting rollers, I do not make any 
claim thereto, and further description of the 
Salme will be unlnecessary. 
The brush-wheels B, which smooth out the 
ends and fringes of the towels, &c., are oper 
ated by bevel-gears CC, one of which, C, is on 
the driving-shaft H., (see Fig. 4.) and the other, 
C, on the vertical shaft d of the brush-wheel. 
The boxes or bearings of the brushes, together 
with the boxes in which the bevel-wheels turn, 
are carried at the end of a sliding bracket, D, 
that is secured by a bolt, c, passing through a 
slot, f, in the bracket upon the top of the 
journal-boxes,in which the first pair of rollers, 
12, and also the shafts H, which drive the 
bevel-wheels, respectively revolve. The latter 
shafts, H, are provided with a spline, p, Fig. 
4, and the sleeve of the bevel-gear has a cor 
responding longitudinal groove therein. Thus 
by slacking up the bolt e the brackets D, 
which, as stated, carry the circular brushes 
and the driving-gears, may be adjusted longi 
tudinally to increase or diminish the distance 
between the opposite pairs of brush-wheels to 
suit the lengths of the articles to be passed 
through the machine. The entire mechanism 
is driven from a come-pulley, MI, on the shaft 
an of roll 5, which, by bevel-gears K, turns a 
shaft, l, Fig. 2, which again, by a series of 
gears, drives the first and second pairs of fold 
ing - rolls, the brush - wheels, and the cam 
shaft lx, from which all the folding-blades are 
actuated in the usual manner in folding-ma 
chines. An eccentric, N, on the cam-shaft op 
erates the fly O, which packs the folded arti 
cles in the trough T provided for their recep 
tion. 
It will be seen by referring to Fig. 2, Sheet 
2, that the front part of the frame of the ma 
chine extends out beyond the main frame R in 
a manner that renders it convenient for the op 
erator, sitting or standing, to place the arti 
cles to be folded in proper position upon the 
feed-table, and also to reach under the said for 
ward extension of the frame when it may be 
necessary or desirable to take hold of the 
towel, &c., after it has gone through or is pass 
ing through the first pair of rolls, 12. This is 
sometimes desirable when, owing to the large 
size of the article, it is required to cause two 
or more folds in succession to be given it by 
the said rolls, instead of but one, as before de 
scribed. This is done as follows: When the 
cloth has nearly passed from between these 
rolls 12, the operative seizes hold of the same 
by extending his or lher hand beneath the feed 
table, and upon the article being freed from 
the rolls again places it, as once folded, upon 
the table A in suitable position over the slot 
- therein, and it again receives another fold by 
the same rolls, and may then be permitted to 
pass on between the others of the series of 
rolls, as hereinbefore described. 
The several folding-blades may be timed to 
operate at suitable intervals, according to the 
dimensions of the cloth, by adjusting their cor 
responding cams upon the cam-shaft in the 
usual manner. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and wish to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with the folding-rolls, 
of the lateral smoothing-brushes and the vi 
brating knife for tucking the article to be fold 
ed into the bite of said rolls, substantially as 
and for the purpose stated. 
2. The combination of theslotted feed-table, 
the first pair of folding-rolls, the folding-knife, 
and the lateral rotary smoothing-brushes, all 
combined, constructed, and operating substan 
tially as described, and for the purposes speci 
fied. 
3. The combination, with the slotted feed 
table, of the trio of rolls1 23, means, substan 
tially as described, to rotate the same, the first 
of two said rolls being in a horizontal plane, 
and the third in a vertical plane with the sec 
ond of the trio, together with the respective 
folding-bladesforoperating the same, and mech 
anism, substantially as described, to tuck the 
articles to be folded into the bites of the first 
and second and of the second and third of the 
trio of rolls, respectively, substantially as and 
for the purposes Stated. 
4. In combination with the slotted feed 
table and the folding-rolls and folding-blades, 
the lateral rotary brushes, and means, substan 
tially as described, for adjusting the same lon 
gitudinally, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with the first pair of 
| folding-rolls, of the vibrating knife K, the ro 
tary smoothing-brushes having the bevel-gear 
C, the feathered shafts H, with a bevel-gear, and 
the adjustable bracket provided with bearings 
for said gears and brushes, together with mech 
anism, substantially as shown, for operating 
said brushes, rolls, and folding-knife, the con 
struction and operation being substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
6. The combination of the slotted feed-table, 
the lateral brush-wheels, the rolls 1 2 3, and 
rolls 456, at rightangles to the first-mentioned 
rolls, together with the respective folding 
blades, and the mechanism for operating the 
same, all combined, constructed, and operat 
ing substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto affixed 
my signature this 14th day of February, A. 
D. 18S3. 
CYRUS CHAMBERS, JR. 
Witnesses: 
CURTIS PAXSON, 
NATHL. E. JANNEY. 
65 
75 
SO 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II 5 
25 
--5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297774.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 297,774, 
- - - 
G. E. FILER & A. H. NEFF, 
r 
DOOR. 
Patented Apr. 29, 1884. 
WITNESSES: 
- 
- - - N 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
INVENTOR: 
d 
oA 
ArTOR NEYs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE E. FILER AND ALBERT H. NEFF, OF SHIELDON, IOWA, ASSIGNORS 
OE ONE-THIRD TO H. C. LONE, OF SAME PLACE. 
DO O. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 297,774, dated April 29, 1884. 
Application filed February 11, 1884. (No model.) 
Io tion of the same through the line a ac. - 
To all, who in it inctly concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGE E. FILER and 
ALBERT H. NEFF, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Sheldon, in the county of 
O'Brien and State of Iowa, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Doors, 
of which the following is a description. 
Figure 1 is a front view of a door embody 
ing our invention, and Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
The object of our invention is to so construct 
a door as to permit it to be used for a tight 
storm-door, a glass-panel door, or a screen or 
woven-wire door. Attempts have been made 
heretofore to construct doors of this kind which 
shall be capable of the different uses named; 
but on account of the complication, expense, 
multiplicity of parts, or other causes, they have 
not been generally adopted. Our invention 
is designed to provide such simple and firm 
structure of door of this class as will recom 
mend it to practical use. 
In the drawings, A represents the skeleton 
frame of the door, having the usual panel-open 
ings. B C D are the detachable panels, one 
edge of which, b, is of a size to fit exactly into 
the panel-opening, and the other edge of which 
panels, c, is provided with a bead or molding, 
that overlaps the edges of the frame at the 
anel-openings. One of these panels, B, is of 
soliel board, and this form of panel is used in 
all the openings when a tight storm-door is 
required. The panel C is a glazed or trans 
parent panel, and this is used when light is 
required to pass through the door and still 
exclude the air, as in the case of vestibules 
of houses, while the panel D is in the nature 
of a screen of woven wire, which is employed 
when a circulation of air is desired without 
admitting flies and mosquitoes. For securing 
these panels in place we have simply shown 
screw-eyes e on the panels and hooks f on the 
55 
framing; but in practice we propose to use 
spring-seated locking-bolts or other neat and 
secure fastening that will hold the panels tight- 45 
ly without rattling. 
We may construct our doors with all the 
panels detachable, or with stationary panels 
below and renovable ones above. 
In summing up the distinctive points of our 
invention, we would call attention to the fact 
that the panels proper, whether of glass, wire 
netting, or wood, are secured between the de 
tachable framing b and the bead c, and this 
framing b is made of the same thickness as the 
stile or frame of the door, so that the inside of 
the door and inside of frame b are flush, to per 
mit them to be readily fastened on the inside, 
where burglars could not tamper with the fast 
ening devices, and these frames b are flanged 6o 
or provided with a lip, that overlaps the edge 
of the stile and fits in a groove or rabbet, to pre 
vent the panel from being kicked or forced in, 
the bead c being secured upon the outside, 
so as to make a good finish. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new is 
The combination, with the stile or framing 
of the door, having its outer edge grooved or 
rabbeted, of the detachable panels of wood, 7O 
glass, or woven wire, consisting of a framing, 
b, of a thickness equal to that of the stile, and 
having a lip or flange fitting in the rabbet, 
the panel proper applied to the outside, the 
bead c, securing the edges of the same, and 75 
means upon the inside of the door for Securing . 
the panel, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
GEORGE E. FILER. 
ALBERT H. NEFF. 
Witnesses: 
B. B. BAILEY, 
W. H. STRONG. 
25 
3O p 
35 
 
 
It is hereby certified that in Letters Patent No. 297,774, granted April 29, 1884, upon 
the application of George E. Filer and Albert H. Neff, of Sheldon, Iowa, for an in 
provement in Doors,' the name of the assignee of one-third interest therein was 
erroneously Written and printed H. C. Lone; that said name should have been 
Written and printed H. C. Lane; and that the proper correction has been made in the 
files and records pertaining to the case in the Patent Office, and should be read in the 
Letters Patent to make the same conform thereto. 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 27th day of May, A. D. 1884. 
 
SEAL.) 
Countersigned: 
BENJ. BUTTERWORTH, 
Commissioner of Patents, 
M. L. JOSLYN, 
Acting Secretary of the Interior. 
2.s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297874.txt	(No Model.) 
E. A. THIERY, 
BRACELET AND MODE OF ORNAMENTING WIRE THEREFOR. 
No. 297,874, 
Patented Apr. 29, 1884, 
 
N. peers. Photo-lithographer, Wahington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO CARTER, 
EDOUARD A. THIERY, OF NEWARK, 
SLOAN & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
BRACE LET AND MO DE OF ORNAMENTING WIRE THE REFOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 297,874, dated April 29, 1884. 
Application filed February 25, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
15 
to all whom, it may concern, ". 
Be it known that I, EDOUARD A. THIERY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
ark, in the county of Essex and State of New 
5 Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Bracelets and Mode of Or 
namenting Wire therefor, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a bracelet 
closed embracing my improvement. Fig. 2 is 
a perspective view of the bracelet open and in 
condition to be applied to the wrist. Fig. 3 
is a like view of the same form of bracelet 
with an auxiliary fastening device. Figs. 4, 
5, and 6 are details illustrating the mode of 
ornamenting the wire or stock from which the 
bracelet is made or formed. Fig. 7 is a sec 
tion of the wire with the core removed. 
Myinvention relates to the peculiar method 
of ornamenting the wire or stock and the for 
mation of a bracelet therefrom, and I will first 
describe in detail the process of manufactur 
25 ing or ornamenting the stock, and afterward 
the construction of a bracelet. 
In the drawings like letters of reference in 
dicate corresponding parts. 
A section of the finished wire or stock from 
which the bracelet is formed is shown in Fig. 
6. A represents the wire, and A' the soft 
metal core. In the manufacture of this stock 
I take a piece or strip of metal proportional 
to the size of the wire to be produced, and 
draw it into the form of a tube by means of 
the ordinary draw plate or die and bench, in 
the usual manner. I then fill this tube with 
a metal or alloy that is softer than the metal 
composing the tube, or that will fuse at a low 
degree of heat, or that is readily attacked by 
acids. The next step is to draw the tube, with 
the core inserted, through dies or plates 
shaped to provide it with beads or flutes, 
which gives it the form shown in Fig. 4. I 
prefer to make it quarterfoil in cross-section; 
but I do not limit myself to the number of 
beads or flutes, as I sometimes use a lesser or 
greater number than four, and so far as the 
method of manufacture is concerned it is im 
5o material whether two, three, four, or six beads 
3O 
35 
or flutes are formed on the stock. In this 
fluted wire I next make saw-kerfs c c in the 
grooves, as shown in Fig. 5, for a purpose 
which will be hereinafter explained. I then 
take the wire thus. prepared and twist it to 
form the finished stock, as shown in Fig. 6, as 
before referred to. It will be seen that the 
wire shown in the drawings is quarterfoil in 
cross-section, giving it externally the appear 
ance of four round wires twisted together. If 6o 
the trefoil form should be used; it will resem 
ble three twisted wires, and if six beads should 
be used it would have the appearance of six 
twisted wires. The kerfs c may be made by 
scoring with a sharp tool or instrument, in 
stead of using a saw, and the purpose of these 
kerfs is to render the wire elastic and to pre 
vent it from buckling or kinking when sub 
jected to torsion. After having prepared 
the wire or stock in the manner above de 
scribed, I cut off a length sufficient to form a 
bracelet, A, as shown in Fig. 1. I then re 
move the core of soft metal or alloy by means 
of acid or by fusion, and afterward solder to 
the free ends of the formed bracelet the balls 75 
at at or other suitable ornaments. 
It is well known that a bracelet made of 
solid wire, and also of the ordinary forms of 
tubular wire, possesses but little elasticity, and 
soon loses what it does possess when subject- 8o 
ed to any torsional strain, and, in addition, 
will buckle or kink when twisted. These ob 
jections are overcome by my improvement, as 
the ends are always held in contact, while at 
the same time the bracelet retains its original 85 
shape. I sometimes use an auxiliary fasten 
ing as an additional security. In Fig. 3 I 
have shown a small padlock, the hasp of 
which is passed through suitable loops or eyes, 
b, on the ends of the bracelet and secured by 9o 
means of a key or clasp. A ring and pendant 
provided with a locking mechanism may be 
used in lieu of the padlock. 
The manner of applying the bracelet to the 
Wrist of the wearer is shown in Fig. 2. The 95 
ends are pressed apart, the wrist inserted, 
and the torsional property of the wire auto 
matically closes it. 
The wire shown is specially designed for 
bracelets; but it is well adapted for certain IOO 
45 
 
2 
297,874 
O 
other articles of jewelry, and I do not wish to ment, what I claim as new, and desire to Se- 20 
limit myself in its use. 
Heretofore in the manufacture of braceletS 
of the class to which my invention relates 
viz., in which the ends of the bracelet are held 
together by spring action-it was necessary to 
provide an independent spring, which was 
generally inclosed in the tubular material of 
which the bracelet was composed. By my 
improvement the use of this spring is entirely 
dispensed with, as the structure of the tubul 
lar material I use possesses in itself all the 
elasticity necessary to keep the ends of the 
bracelet in a closed position without the use 
of a separate spring, and I thus not only Sim 
plify the structure, but produce a bracelet that 
is just as effective in use and less liable to get 
out of repair. 
Having thus fully described my improve 
: 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A bracelet composed of tubular twisted 
wire of quarterfoil or analogous form, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. That improvement in the art of orna 
menting wire or stock for bracelets which 
consists in inserting a core of soft metal or 
alloy in tubular wire, then drawing it into 
quarterfoil or analogous form, next forming 
kerfs in the grooves between the flutes, and 
afterward twisting it, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
PHILIP LOURY, 
OLIVER H. PERRY. 
Witnesses: 
25 
presence of two witnesses. 
r 
EDO UARD A. THIERY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US297974.txt	(No Model.) - 
No. 297,974, 
J. D. DORSEY. 
VEHICLE SPRING. 
Y 
 
 
  
Patented May 6, 1884. 
is v 
. - 
III c. 
I 
E. Le Fitti 
If IES 
 
A. 
a 
- 
 
2 TT.III 
  
N A 
 
WITNESSES 
d'23.a. 
INVENTOR 
3. Atty. 
NPETERs, photo-uthographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. DORSEY, OF GREEN VILLE, ILLINOIS. 
- 
VEHICLE - SPRNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 297,974, dated May 6, 1884. 
Application filed January 24, 1884, (No model.) 
O 
I 5 
- 
To all whon, it invug? concern '- 
Be it known that I, JoHN D. DORSEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Green 
ville, in the county of Bond and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Carriage and Wagon Springs; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
side-bar vehicles; and it consists, chiefly, of 
such a vehicle having the body connected to 
the side bars by springs which are flat curved 
and coiled at one extremity, composed of one 
or more leaves. Each spring is formed of two 
half-springs joined together at their curved 
extremities by a link, while the coiled por 
tions encircle the side bars and are suitably 
attached thereto; and it further consists of 
other connecting parts with the body of the 
vehicle, and combinations more specifically 
hereinafter set forthin the claims. The springs 
heretofore used for this purpose have been 
made either very stiff, in order to have suffi 
cient strength to sustain aheavy load, and con 
sequently yielded but little to a light load, 
and when these springs were depressed by a 
heavy load they were so stout and stiff as to 
push out the side bars, thereby racking the 
gear and producing rapid wear; or, if made 
light, they broke down completely under an 
unusually heavy load, and likewise caused 
rapid destruction of the parts. 
The object of my invention is therefore to 
provide such a spring as will fully meet all 
the requirements of both stiff and light spring, 
as desired, and at the same time preserve the 
gear of the vehicle from being racked and 
strained, whether the load be large or small. 
To enable others skilled in the art to which 
my invention appertains to make and use the 
same, I will now more specifically describe it 
by reference to the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is an edge view of the spring, to 
gether with an end view of the body and side 
bars of a vehicle, showing my improvements 
connected therewith. Fig. 2 represents the 
spring as viewed from below and connected to 
the side bars and a cross-bar on bottom of ve 
hicle. Fig. 3 is an enlarged detail view of the 
coupling device forming part of my invention. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 55 
in each of the figures. 
The body A is of any desired form, and is 
placed in a rectangular frame consisting of 
side bars, B, which may also be supported by 
a semi-elliptical spring and the front bolster 6o 
and rear axle. The springs C, which first en 
circle the side bars, as represented in Fig. 1, 
are fastened thereto by suitable. shackles, b. 
These springs are single, flat, and of uniform 
I thickness throughout their coiled portions, but 65 
are curved, and may consist of one or more 
leaves between that part and the point of con 
nection with the link f, by which they are 
joined together, as shown. The body of the 
vehicle rests on a cross-bar, g, and to the under 7o 
side of this barg are attached, at one end, the 
couplings h by means of hinge - brackets h", 
which are joined to and may be moved freely 
in guidei, bolted or otherwise suitably secured 
to bar g and the body of the vehicle. The 75 
bracketsh can be moved laterally beneath the 
body of the vehicle in the guide i, and rigidly 
fixed in any desired point by means of either 
a set-screw or bolts, which may pass through 
the guide-plate and bar for additional security 8o 
and strength. To these brackets h' the coup 
lings h are hinged by means of bolts at the 
upper end, while through a slot in the lower 
ends the curved parts of the springs pass, and 
thereby sustain the weight of the body of the 85 
vehicle. The lower ends of the couplingsh 
are securely fixed at any desired point on the 
curved portion of the spring by means of the 
set-screws I, or may be otherwise firmly at 
tached and accomplish the same results. 
From the foregoing description of the parts 
and connections of my invention it will be 
readily understood that the couplings hand 
their hinged bearing may be brought either 
close together or separated more than as rep-95 
resented in Fig. 1 of the drawings, and the 
springs be thereby rendered quite flexible and 
yielding, or firm and capable of sustaining a 
great weight without injury either to them or 
the gear and side bars of the vehicle; also, by Ioo 
reason of the body of the vehicle having a 
hinged connection with the springs, an easy 
9o 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
297,974 
5. Over an uneven road. 
long swaying motion will be imparted to the of said vehicle, substantially as and for the 
same, instead of the short, quick, jerky move- purpose set forth. 
3. A coupling device between the body and 
ments commonly experienced with ordinary 
springs when the vehicle is in rapid motion springs of a vehicle, by which the said body is 25 
Supiported on said springs, the said coupling 
Having thus described my invention, what device having a lateral adjustment, substan 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters tially as shown and described, and being pro 
vided with a set-Screw or other suitable con 
Patent, is- 
1. A vehicle-spring composed of half-springs trivance by means of which it is secured in 3o 
IO joined by a link at one end, and having the position on the springs. 
I5 tions with the body of the vehicle, substan- purpose specified. 
other extremities attached to the side bars, 
4. The combination of guide i, brackets h", 
around which they form a coiled spring, prior couplings h, and the springs of a side-bar ve 
to being connected there with, in combination hicle, with which said couplings h are adjust 
with laterally-adjustable couplings or connec- ably connected, substantially as and for the 35 
tially as shown, and for the purpose herein- 
before set forth. 
2. In combination with the body and springs 
of a vehicle, a coupling device connecting them 
2O susceptible of a swinging movement and lat- 
eral adjustment on both the body and springs 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
GEORGE H. FELLETT, 
AIBRAM JARIRARD. 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN ID. DORSEY. 
al 
f 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298074.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 298,074. 
J. A. DUNNELL & A. SMITH, 
CARPET STRETCHER, 
Patented May 6, 1884. 
peers, photo-Lithographer, Washington. O. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A. DUNNELL AND AARON SMITH, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CAR PET-STRETCHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,074, dated May 6, 1884. 
Application filed June 16, 1883. (No model.) 
A 
Beit known that we, JAMES A. DUNNELL as the carpet needs to be stretched. The arm 25 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, and Fig. 2 We claim as our invention 
The object of our invention is to enable any bination with toothed arm D, hinged at C, 35 
To aid, whom, it may concern, 
into the floor at such a distance from the wall 
and AARON SMITH, citizens of the United pointed with teeth D is drawn back by rais 
States, residing at Boston, in the county of ing at hinges C, when teeth D engage the car 
Suffolk and State of Massachusetts, have in- pet, (see Fig.1) and by bearing down athinges 
vented certain new and useful Improvements C the carpet is pushed up to the wall between 
in Carpet-Stretchers, of which the following the points A and B, whereas by lying flat on 3o 
is a description, reference being had to the ac- the floor it is below centers, and consequently . 
companying drawings, in which- 
is a plan of the same. 
The bent arms having points A, B, in com 
one to rapidly and easily stretch smooth and whereby two substantial points are given, be 
even a carpet, and hold the same firmly while tween which a carpet may be stretched smooth 
being fastened in place. 
and even at one motion the length or width 
This stretcher consists of two bent arms, |G: the room and be held firmly in place, sub 
with steel points A and B, Fig. 1, to engage stantially as set forth. 
the floor through the carpet at such a dis 
tance apart as to let the teeth D on straight 
arm engage the carpet and stretch between 
the points A and B its length or width. 
To operate this stretcher, the points A and 
B on bent arms are thrust through the carpet 
holds itself. 
JAMES A. DUNNELL. 
AARON SMITH, 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE H. REMELE, 
ALFRED S. HALL. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298174.txt	(No Model.) 
L. CHEWALIER & L., GRAILLOT. 
HOLDER FOR USE IN CARWING MEAT. 
No. 298,174. 
Patented May 6, 1884. 
g 
te 
N 
v- 
eS's SS=s= 
 
. NSNR 
s N 
w 
 
o 
r 
t 
L 
792zzesses: 
-6-24% 
- 
 
ef-6%zee 
-?a-4s 
1222/vee/3 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS CHEVALIER AND LEON GRAILLOT, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
HoLDER FOR USE IN CARVING MEAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,174, dated May 6, 1884. 
Application filed March 14, 1884. (No model.) 
sheath, thereby pressing the jaws upon the 5C 
This invention relates to a device designed let-bone or the like has been placed between 45 
far as projections g, formed at the bottoms of 
To all, whom it mally concern : . 
Beit known that we, LOUIS CHIEVALIER and the jaws a, into a sheath, h, fixed in a handle, 
LEON GRAILLOT, of the city of Paris, France, i, which may be of any suitable shape. This 4C 
have invented new and useful Improvements sheath his provided with a pawl, j, the edge 
5 in Holders for Use in Carving Meat, and for of which forms an internal projection or tooth, 
similar Purposes, of which the following is a k, which engages with the rack d. 
When the said holder is used after the cut 
full, clear, and exact description. 
to grasp the bone of a cutlet, to avoid holding the two jaws a, (which are grooved on their 
Io the same in the hand when removing the meat inner faces, in order to enable them to firmly 
therefrom. The said device also serves as a grasp the said bone and prevent it from slip 
holder for a leg of mutton, the leg of a chicken, ping,) the blades are pushed into the said 
or the like. 
We shall now proceed to describe the in- bone until the latteris firmly grasped, the said 
I5 vention, having reference to the accompany- rack, which engages with the tooth k, holding 
ing drawings, in which- 
the jaws in the desired position. In order to 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the said cut- open the jaws, it is sufficient to press the knob 
let-holder. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section off, which releases the rack from the tooth k, 55 
the same perpendicular to the jaws of the thereby enabling the blades to be readily with 
holder closed. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal sec- We claim 
tion between the jaws of the holder, the latter A cutlet-holder composed of the sheath h, 
being open. Fig. 5 is a front elevation of the fixed into any suitable handle, the jaws a, 6o 
holder open, the same being mounted in a grooved on their inner faces, and the blades b, 
acting as springs, in combination with the rack 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre-d, or its equivalent, engaging into the inner 
sponding parts throughout the figures. 
projection, k, on the pawl j of the sheath h, the 
The holder is composed of two jaws, a, ter- whole constructed and operating as hereinbe- 65 
minated by two blades, b, riveted at their ex- fore specified, and for the purposes set forth. 
The foregoing specification of our improve 
jaws a apart. Between these two blades b is ments in holders for use in carving meat, and 
riveted a rack, d, the latter having a tendency for similar purposes, signed by us. 
to spring laterally from the direction of the 
said blades b. This rack, which is preferably 
35 punched out of a steel blade, is bent at its up- 
per part, and terminates in a knob, f. The 
above-mentioned pieces can be introduced as 
2O holder. Fig. 3 is a similar view, showing the drawn. 
so tremities c, and acting as springs to keep the 
LOUIS CHIEVALIER. 
LEON GRAILLOT. 
Witnesses: 
, 
ROBT. M. HoOPER, 
GEORGE BRAUN. 
25 handle. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298275.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
G, C, BLICKENSDERFER & H. SMITH, 
CONVEYER APPARATUS, 
No. 298,275, 
Patent May 6, 1884. 
 
772. A ze e is is e J . 
71 (e.ez-Z-. 
(2-4-1. N. GPt 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. washington, D.c. 
Z7eze 7z Aa2 is 
74-e 7-z ey a%re z Zal 
6eet. 6.4%e-ez reeae. 
a22/ 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
G. C. BLICKENSDERFER & H. SMITH, 
CONWEYER APPARATUS. 
No. 298,275. 
Patented May 6, 1884. 
 
772. Azz errer. 
71 /e. 644-7, 
(62-64: ... (-tt. 
Zez et Z27 f. 
7Zerzey aS222 24-2. 
6ee, 6,22e caea Jazee/ear 
ze-Wa-Ceet/Cz%62-6. 
A-Z Zar 
N.PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
G, C, BLICKENSIDERFER & H. SMITH, 
No. 298,275. 
Patented May 6, 1884. 
CONWEYER. APPARATUS, 
 
72'zz erver 
A Me7 642-4-, 
24-h. A. Gertz 
Z72 Zez Za7J 
Zez ey 57-zz, 
eae. 6 22ee-ee-zu?a e2/e7. 
- Ze/4 6 9% 6 
u-22-4 r 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographar, washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
G. C. BLICKENSIDERFER & H. SMITH, 
CONVEYER. APPARATUS, 
No. 298,275, 
1884. 
K 
SR Si2 A. S2 (S22. 
SNSS2 
SRS2 
8. 8S2 Z. 
RS2 SS SS SS WNS Si 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
SN s 
SNSS SNS SNS 
 
771e7e err ef. 
62-44, W. Gu-r 
Zer 27.6% 5%. 2'z 
e ee easeze/6ee fee er/er. 
-A?4-4 52%-4-216. 
42 ar 
N. perers. Photo-thographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE C. BLICKENSDERFER AND HERVEY SMITH, OF ERIE, PA. 
CONVEYER APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,275, dated May 6, 1884. 
Application filed March 18, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that we, GEORGEC. BLICKENS 
DERFER and HERVEY SMITH, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Erie, in the county 
5 of Erie and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Conveyer Apparatus; and we do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to conveyers such as 
are used for carrying packages, cash, &c., and 
for other like purposes. 
I5 The invention consists in providing new and 
improved means for switching the cars from 
the direct track at the stations; also, in pro 
viding improvements in the devices for put 
ting cars onto the main or direct track at sta 
2O tions; also, in providing various improvements 
in the construction of the cars. . 
In a series of preceding applications we 
have shown various constructions of tracks, 
switches, and cars. This application is in 
tended as a companion application to those 
named, and many of the devices here shown 
are applicable in connection with those we 
have previously shown. 
Our present invention is illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, as follows: 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing two 
lines of track, one grading to the central sta 
tion and the other from it to the way-stations, 
and it also shows two receiving-switches and 
one shipping-elevator. Fig. 2 is a view look 
ing along the track, showing the tracks insec 
tion and showing a car just taking to Switch. 
Fig. 3 is a similar view, and shows the car 
sliding down the switch. Fig. 4 is an end 
4o view of a car on a switch. Fig. 5 is a side 
view of the shipper. Fig. 6 is a perspective 
view of a track and an alternative form of 
switching device. Fig. 7 is a like view, and 
shows still another form of switch. Fig. S is 
a side view of an improved form of car. Fig. 
9 is an end view of same. Fig. 10 shows the 
form of the car body or basket on the line at a 
in Fig. 9. Fig. It is a vertical transverse sec 
tion of one of the car-wheels, and shows the 
5o manner of lining the tread with some soft ma 
terial to prevent noise. 
45 
35 
In our former applications we have shown 
cars provided with a special set of wheels for 
running on the switch-tracks. In this instance 
we show a car with only one set of wheels and 55 
an entirely-different arrangement for switch 
ing the cars off the direct line at the stations. 
We show different modifications or forms of 
switching devices; but they all embody the 
same general or leading feature-namely, 6o 
catching the car by a hook or similar appli 
ance, and letting it down to the salesman or 
person at the station. This improved means 
for switching the cars is the leading feature of 
our present invention. Its construction and 65 
operation are as follows: 
A is the main track, leading from the sales 
men's stations to the cashier's desk. 
A is the reverse track-that is, the main 
track leading from the cashier's desk to the 7o 
salesmens stations. It is from this track that 
cars have to be switched at the stations to 
which they are destined. 
B, B, and B represent different forms of 
switches, which will be severally explained. 75 
C is the car body or basket, C its wheels, 
and C a hook on the top of the main post C. 
Other parts will be referred to by letter as 
we proceed. 
In Figs. 1, 2, 3 the switch-tracks B have 
their points lying in a vertical plane with the 
main line, and as they curve away from the 
track they incline downward rapidly. The 
car is provided with means for tripping the 
wheels up (similar to the tripping devices 
we have already shown in our former applica 
tions) at the proper point, leaving the car to 
hang suspended on the Switch-track by the 
hook C. When this occurs, the momentum 
of the car will cause it to slide on the track 9o 
B, and as that track inclines downward the car 
will readily slip down it. 
In Fig. 7 the switch-tracks Blie at an angle 
to the main line and a little above it. These 
tracks B may be taut-drawn wire, if desired, 95 
and they should slant downward and also for 
ward, as shown. The operation is clearly 
shown in Fig. 7, and is as follows: When the 
car passes under a switch which is the proper 
height to engage the hook, the trigger of the IOO . 
trip is sprung and the wheels fly up from the 
track and leave the car suspended by the hook 
85 
SO 
2 
- 
298,275 
75 
not so inclined as to do so, and the more in 
on the switch-track B, down which it at once 
clined the track the greater will be the press 
slides. The height of the hooks on different 
ure of the brake on the under Side of the track. 
cars will vary, and the switch-tracks B will 
The shoe is held by a spring so as to be yield 
be placed successively at varying heights, so 
ing and not rigid. Such a brake can be used 
that a car will pass under the switches to 
as well with cars having two or more sets of 
which it is not destined without the hook en 
wheels. 
gaging. 
On the top of the cars shown in Figs. 2 and 
As before stated, the tripping device on the 
4 are two friction-rollers, C'C', for contact on 
car shown in Figs. 2 and 3 is about the same 
the guides at the switches. 
as one we have shown previously; but the one 
In Fig. 11 we show a car-wheel having its 
shown on the car in Fig. 7 is different, and is 
treadlined with an india-rubber, gutta-percha, 
as follows: The wheels are on a bar which is 
or other lining, F, which will prevent noise. 
pivoted on a block, c, which slides in a slot 
In Figs. 8, 9, and 10 we show a car-body, 
or on guides in the upright C". The hook C 
C, and bail E, which is best adapted for the 
is pivoted at c, and on its lower side is a catch 
purpose. . The body is formed of wicker-work 
or lug, c'. On the block c' is a tripping-tog 
preferably, and it is oval shape in its greatest 
gle, c'. Below the block is a spring, c, which 
longitudinal horizontal section, as seen in Fig. 
will throw the block up when released. When 
10. Its bottom is rounded except a small space 
the car is set to run on the main track, the 
at the extreme, which is sufficiently flat to al 
parts above-named are in the position shown 
low the basket to set upright, and its ends are 
in the car at the left of Fig. 7. When the 
rounded or bilged vertically as well as hori 
hook C comes in contact with the track B", the 
Zontally. Such a shaped basket will not be 
hook is thrown back and the lug of pushes over 
catching on any object it may come in con 
the toggle c, and this allows the spring c to 
tact with when running on the track, as a 
raise the wheels up, as seen at the right of 
square-cornered basket would, and its ends, be 
Fig. 7. 
ing rounded each way, are elastic, more thana 
In the switching device shown in Fig. 6the 
square end, so that they make a good buffer, 
car need have no tripping device, for it is 
and when two cars come in collision, or a car 
lifted off the track by the switch. This switch 
comes in collision with any other object, the 
consists of a post, B, which is pivoted at its 
ends will spring and buff the concussion. The 
foot, and kept upright by a spring, b'. On 
bail is pivoted to ears E at each end, and the 
the upper end of the post is a hook, b, which 
ears have notches e, into which catches e en 
will engage with the hook C on the car, which 
gage. When the bail is to be turned down, 
is of proper height to be caught by it. The 
or perhaps we should say when the basket is 
post when upright leans somewhat up the 
to be turned up, so as to empty it, the catches 
track over its center, and when the car is 
e' are lifted out of the notches e. These bas 
caught the momentum will push the post back 
kets or bodies can be used on all forms or types 
over its center, and this will lift the car up so 
of conveyers. 
the flanges of its wheels will clear the track. 
In Figs. 1 and 5 we show a new car shipper 
The pivot of the post should be at an angle to 
and elevator. 
the line of track, so that as it swings it draws 
D represents the elevator-frame, which is 
the car to one side of the track, so it will clear 
provided with friction-rollers or sheaves d', 
it as it goes down. On the right of Fig. 6 the 
which run on the posts d. 
caris shownlet down onto the counter. While 
D is the horizontal part of the elevator 
this method differs as to the devices employed 
frame. It is provided at one end with a roller, 
considerably from the others above described, 
d', and at the other with two rollers, d". 
it is the same in general effect, for it takes the 
D is the slide, which passes between the 
car up off the track by the hook C and lets it 
rollers d and rests on the roller d. On this 
down. A crane proper might be used to catch 
slide is a deflected part, d, which gives to that 
the car, swing it clear of the track, and let it 
part which acts upon the roller d two inclined 
down. 
surfaces, so that as the slide moves over the 
The above-described methods are sufficient 
roller d it is lifted up and let down again. . 
to illustrate fully the use and purpose of a 
On the end of the slide D', nearest the track, 
hook on the top of the car as part of the means 
are horns D, for receiving the car, (the bar 
for switching the car automatically from the 
c, on which the wheels Care journaled, is set 
direct track. 
on horns D",) and at the other end of the slide 
When an inclined switch-track-such as is 
is a spring, D. D. A toggle-lever, D', is 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 7-is used, it may 
connected at one end with the part D and at 
be desirable to use a shoe on the hook. This 
the other with the slide D, and is in such a 
may be seen at C in Figs. 3 and 4. It may 
position, as shown, that when the elevator is 
also be desirable to use a brake to prevent the 
drawn up the joint of the toggle D* will come 
car sliding too rapidly down the track. 
in contact with a fixed plate, d, and will thus 
C in Fig. 3 is an illustration of one manner 
be depressed, and as it is depressed it will 
of constructing and applying a brake for that 
push the slide out, and as it is pushed out the 
purpose. It consists of a shoe which would 
not come in contact with the track if it was inclined will lift it up and let it down. This 
9O 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5, 
2O 
I25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
298,275 
3. 
movement of the slide will carry the car out 
toward the track, lift it up, so as to bring it the combination of the body C, standard C, 55 
above the track, and let it down again onto 
the track, (and the downward movement is 
enough to disengage the horns from the car.) 
As soon as the car is thus shipped onto the 
track, the elevator is lowered, and this allows 
the spring DD to draw the slide back. 
The position of parts when the slide is 
thrown forward is seen in Fig. 5 by dotted 
lines. 
m 
IO 
8. In a conveyer-car substantially as shown, 
wheels C, hook C, and brake C, substantially 
as and for the purposes mentioned. 
9. In a conveyer-car substantially as shown, 
the combination of the body C, standard C, 
wheels C, block c, toggle c, pivoted hook C, 6O 
lug c", and Spring c, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
10. In a conveyer - car substantially as 
shown, the combination, with the body C, of 
the pivoted bail E, with catchese, and the ears 65 
E, with the notches e, substantially as and for 
the purposes mentioned. 
11. In a conveyer - car substantially as 
shown, a body, C, formed of wicker-work, and 
having an oval form, with rounded bottom and 7O 
3. ends, as shown and described, and for the pur 
poses mentioned. 
12. In a conveyer-car, the combination of 
the body C, standard C, wheels C, hook C, 
and rollers C C, as shown, and for the pur- 75 
poses named. 
13. In a conveyer apparatus substantially 
as shown, the combination of the guide-posts 
did, elevator-frame D, and friction-rollers d' 
d' d' d', placed at the corners of said frame, 8o 
Substantially as and for the purposes men 
tioned. 
14. In a conveyer apparatus, a car loading 
or shipping apparatus consisting of the com 
bination of an elevator-frame, a platform on 85 
Said frame, a slide on Said platform, horns for 
holding the car on said slide, a lever for mov 
ing said slide forward, an inclined surface for 
raising up and letting down the forward end 
of said slide as it is moved forward, and a go 
spring for moving said slide backward, sub 
stantially as shown. 
15. In the car elevating and shipping de 
vice of a conveyer apparatus, the combina 
tion of the posts did, frame D, platform D', 95 
slide D, toggle D', and the plated, substan 
tially as shown. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
GEO. C. BLICKENSDERFER. 
EERVEY SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
w 
J. K. HALLOCK, 
ROBT. H. PORTER. 
What we claim as new is 
1. In a conveyer apparatus substantially 
as shown, a car having a running-gear for use 
on the main or direct track, and a hook by 
which it can be caught by the switching de 
Vices, Substantially as shown. 
2. In a Conveyer apparatus Substantially 
as shown, the combination, with the main or 
direct track and a car having a running-gear 
for use upon Said track and a hook thereon, 
of a switching device consisting of devices, 
Substantially as shown, for engaging with said 
hook and conveying the car from said main 
track thereby. 
3. In a conveyer apparatus substantially 
as shown, a car having a running-gear for use 
on the main or direct track, which is adapted, 
substantially as shown, to be tripped, and a 
hook by which the car can be caught and sus 
tained when said running-gear is tripped, sub 
stantially as shown, and for the purposes men 
4. In a conveyer apparatus substantially 
as shown, the combination, with the main 
track, of a switch-track, which is set at a suffi 
ciently precipitous angle thereto, as shown, 
to serve as a slideway for the cars when caught 
thereon by a hook, as shown and described. 
5. In a conveyer apparatus, the combina 
tion, with a precipitously-inclined track, of a 
car having thereon a brake, which is held 
against the track by the plumb position of the 
car, as shown. 
6. In a car for a conveyer apparatus sub 
stantially as shown, the combination of the 
body C, standard C, wheels C, and hook C, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes mentioned. 
7. In a car for a conveyer apparatus sub 
stantially as shown, the combination of the 
body C, standard C, wheels C, hook C, and 
shoe C, substantially as and for the purposes 
mentioned. 
tioned. 
w 
3O 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298375.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 298,375. 
W. B. HENDERSON. 
COMBINED EGG BEATER AND DISH, 
Patented May 13, 1884, 
 
  
   
 
  
 
age 
^ 
r 
s Y. 
s 
- 
s 
s 
^ 
Y. 
Y 
 
- 
H 
HHS - 
- 
S 
SI 
s ase 3 s a a a a ge a2 
 
 
 
21 
S s 
g Hy 
 
 
as: 1. 
y 
 
 
1. N S 
g E1 
S1 1. 
Sails 
S 
4. 
  
W 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithegrapher, washington, D., c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM BOWEN HENDERSON, OF POTTSTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
COMBINED EGG B EATER AND DISH. 
SPECIFIUATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,375, dated May 13, 1884. 
Application filed March 12, 1884. 
(No model.) 
IO 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM B. HENDER 
The wire beater is to be revolved within 45 
To all thon it. Thu?tly concertz - 
shaft e is provided with a crank, e, at one end, 
on which is secured the loose wooden handle 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing at e". 
Pottstown, in the county of Montgomery and the closed dish to beat the eggs, and the dish 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
is to be opened and the beater lifted out to re 
and useful Egg Beater and Dish Combined, of 
move the eggs after they have been beaten. 
which the following is a specification, reference 
Among the advantages possessed by this 
being had to the accompanying drawings. 
beater over others in the market are the fol- 5o 
This invention has relation to an egg beater 
lowing: It is a combined egg beater and dish, 
and dish combined, in which eggs may be which may be used either for beating eggs, or 
beaten and removed from the dish, which may 
may be used as an open or closed dish for bak 
afterward be used for baking and other pur 
ing and other purposes, which will readily 
poses; and it consists in the construction and 
Suggest themselves, thereby Saving the ex- 55 
novel arrangement of parts, as will be herein-pense of an extra dish. It is convenient in 
after fully described, and particularly pointed this form, and is therefore useful, in that it 
Saves time in baking. By its use eggs may be 
Out in the Claim. 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective of the de 
beaten stiff quicker than by any other beater 
Vice, partly open, arranged for use as an egg 
now in the market. It cannot get out of or- 6o 
beater; and Fig. 2 is a view of the dish en 
der, and a child can use it equally as well in 
tirely open, the beater being removed. 
beating eggs as an experienced baker could. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
It will beat one egg or one dozen eggs, and 
drawings, ( designates the dish, which is pref. 
beat the latter nearly as quickly as the former. 
erably made of tin in two sections or halves, 
It may be easily cleaned by removing the beater 65 
b b, hinged together at one side, so that the 
from the dish. The beater, being made of 
sections may be closed to form a closed dish 
galvanized wire, will not corrode, as the cast 
or egg-receptacle, and provided at the other 
iron beaters do, when in contact with the al 
side with a Staple on section b and a hinged 
bumen of the eggs. 
clasp on the Section b to hold the Sections 
Having thus fully described my invention, 7 
The mouth of the section b is pro 
closed. 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
vided with a surrounding flange, c, which, 
Letters Patent, is 
The sectional dish having the sectionshinged 
when the sections are closed, enters the mouth 
of the section b and forms a tight joint all 
together, and provided with end notches and 
round, except at the notches d d, in the ends 
suitable fastenings, and the removable galvan- 75 
of the sections b b', which notches form the 
ized-wire beater, adapted to be rotated within 
bearings for the shaft e of the wire beater f. 
the sectional dish, substantially as specified: 
The beater fis made of galvanized wire, bent 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
angularly to form longitudinal arms f', from 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in . 
the ends of which extend the radial arms.ff', 
presence of two witnesses. 
the ends of the latter arms being soldered to 
the inner faces of disks gg, fixed to the shaft 
e of the beater, immediately inside of the walls 
of the dish, when the beater is in place. The 
WILLIAM BOWEN ENDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAMPEOPLES, 
W. H. ANTRIM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298475.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 298,475. 
K. W. JONES. 
LAND ROLLER. 
Patented May l3, 1884. 
A 67. Z. 
 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographar, Washington... c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
KINZY W. JONES, OF LEMOORE, CALIFORNIA. 
LAND-ROLLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,475, dated May 13, 1884. 
Application filed January 21, 1884. (No model.) 
- 
A is a wide frame, in which are independ-ters Patent, is 
His the seat. The spring I for the seat 
To all, 7thon, it pay concern: 
Beit known that I, KINZY W. JoNES, of Le. consists of a single leafcurved spirally on itself, 
moore, county of Tulare, and State of Califor- and secured to the supporting-bar G by a 
nia, have invented new and useful Improve- rivet, i. The inner end of the leaf is slotted 
ments in Rollers; and I do hereby declare the at j, and has a movement on the lower turn of 4O 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip- the spring, guided by a pin, J, through the 
tion thereof. 
slot. The rear end of the leaf is bent upward, 
My invention relates to a new and useful forming a bearing between itself and the bar 
roller for agricultural purposes; and it con- G, in which the forward and meeting ends of 
sists in the novel arrangement and combination the connecting or coupling bars or arms b are 45 
of devices hereinafter described and claimed. fitted and pivoted by a bolt, K. The spring 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, for the seat is very simple and is easy in Op 
Figure is a perspective view of my roller. eration. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged view of the supporting- 
bar G and spring I. 
ently mounted the rollers B. B. The united 
1. The spring I for the seat, consisting of a 
length of these is sufficiently shorter than the single leaf, one end of which is riveted fast, 
width of the frame to leave an open space, a, and the other is curved inwardly on itself, and 
between their inner ends. Secured to the has a play by reason of a slot, j, and guide-55 
frame A are the arms b, constructed of a single pin J, substantially as herein described. 
piece of metal, while the forward ends of these 
2. The rear frame, A, having rollers B and 
arms are curved upward and formed with a connecting-armsb, formed in one piece, in com 
perforation to receive the bolt K, as shown in bination with the frame C, having roller D, 
Fig. 1. 
C is the front frame, in which is mounted leaf, and having a raised rear portion, under 
the roller D. This is of a length greater than which and over the bar G the arms b are piv 
the width of the space a between the rear roll- oted, substantially as herein described. 
ers BB, so that said roller Doverlaps the rear 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand. 
E is the tongue, secured to frame C, and F 
is the double-tree for the horses. 
Curved over the roller D is a supporting 
bar, G, the forward end of which is bolted to 
the tongue, and the rear to frame C. 
curved bar G, seat-spring I, forming a single 6O 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let- 5O 
. 
KINZY W. JONES. 
Witnesses: 
B. K. SWEETLAND, 
J. H. FOX. 
5 
IO 
- 
rollers. 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298575.txt	(No Model.) 
W. GOOD FELLOW. 
TOY REWOLWING BEL, 
No. 298,575, 
Patented May 13, 1884. 
 
2/7esses 
1 of 47 
N. pereas. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, i.e. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM GOODFELLOW, OF SOUTH NORWALK, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO HENRY HOFFMAN, JR., OF SAME PLACE. 
TOY REVOLVING BELL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No.298,575, dated May 13, 1884. 
Application filed AIarch 18, 1884. 
(No hotel.) 
To al(, 7 whom it tag? concern, 
Be it known that I, WILLIAAI GOODFEL 
LOW, residing at South Norwalk, in the county 
of Fairfield and State of Connecticut, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Toy Revolving Bells, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to toys; and it con 
Io sists in certain improvements in a bell-ring 
ing toy, as will be hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
cheap and simple toy which may be rung by 
rotating it in the hand in the same manner 
that revolving rattles have been made, the 
rotation of the toy serving to operate a spring 
Striker, which gives a succession of blows to 
the bell. 
In the drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, and in which like letters indicate like 
parts, Figure 1 is a front elevation of my re 
Volving bell-ringing toy. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
Vation of the same. Fig. 3 is a plan of the 
25 handle. Fig. 4 is a plan of the star-wheel, 
which Serves to actuate the spring-striker. 
Fig. 5 is a plai of the spring. 
Aindicates the handle of my toy. It is pref. 
erably a galvanized casting, but may be struck 
up of metal, or constructed in other suitable 
manner. This piece has a projection or spin 
(dle, C, which forms the axis of the star-wheel 
B, and finds its bearings in perforations c' in 
the body-piece C. 
C is the body-piece of the toy, which is 
swiveled on the spindle (, as shown. This 
piece is centrally slotted for a little distance 
from its swiveled end, as shown in Fig. 1. The 
star-wheel B is placed in this slot, and se 
cured therein bypassing the spindle a through 
its Central aperture, b, as well as through the 
perforations c, before referred to. The piece 
Cis preferably a light casting. The star-wheel 
B is of the form shown, or other suitable form, 
having ratchet-teeth or projections from a cen 
tral hub. The central perforation, b, is made 
to fit closely to the spindle a, so that solder 
ing is usually tunnecessary. If desired, the 
3 5 
le. 
perforation b' may be polygonal in outline, 
and a part of the spindle made to fit the same; 5. 
but this will generally be unnecessary. The 
star-wheel must, however, fit the spindle so 
closely that it will not turn thereon. The 
body C has a stud or post, F, extending from 
One side, and on the end of this post a bell, 5. 
D, is secured by a screw or in other similar 
On the side of the body C opposite the bell 
I rivet a flat spring, E, having a striker or 
hammer, e, projecting from the side thereof, 6 
which is toward the body, and in line with 
the edge of the bell. When permitted to do 
So, this striker passes through the slot in the 
body C far enough to strike the edge of the 
bell, as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 2. 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
By grasping the handle A and whirling the 
body which carries the bell and spring-striker 
in the direction of the arrow, the spring will 
be thrown back by the spurs of the star-wheel 
and released and permitted to fly forward as 
the end of the Spring passes over each spur, 
thus Striking the bell a rapid succession of 
blows, producing the effect of a chime. 
6, 
I claim 
I. The combination of a handle, a bell-car 
rying device, as described, a spring-striker, 
and mechanism, Substantially as described, 
whereby the spring-striker is made to strike 
the bell a succession of blows as the body is 
revolved on the handle, as set forth. 
2. The handle A, having spindle ct, and star 
wheel thereon, the body C, slotted as de 
scribed, and swiveled on said spindle, the bell 
D, and the spring-striker Ee', arranged as de 
scribed, so that the striker shall act through 
the slot and strike the edge of the bell when 
actuated by the star-wheel, all in combination, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM GOODFELLOW. 
Witnesses: 
JACOB M. LAYTON, 
GEORGE F. BEARSE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298675.txt	(No Model.) 
T. W. DOWLING, 
WINDOW S CREEN, 
No. 298,675, 
Patented May 13, 1884 
assas 
Asarayalays 
WITNESSES 
 
INVENIOR 
Aiforney 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer washington, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS W. DOWLING, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
WNDOW.S CREEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,675, dated May 13, 1884. 
Application filed November 13, 1883. (No model.) 
To all whon, it nually concern: 
Be it known that T, THOMAS W. DOWLING, 
of Detroit, county of Wayne, State of Michi 
gan, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Window-Screens; and I declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the same, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains 
to make and use it, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form a part of 
this specification. 
My invention consists of the combination of 
devices and appliances hereinafter specified, 
and more particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of an apparatus embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a separate view of a portion thereof 
in perspective. Fig. 3 is a cross-section. 
Myinvention relates to window-screens, and 
has for its object the construction of an im 
proved screen, which may be adjusted to fit 
into window-frames of different widths. I ac 
complish this object as follows: 
I construct my improved screen in two 
parts, the one being the counterpart or du 
plicate of the other. 
As illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, A. A represent the side portions of the 
frame of each portion of the screen. B rep 
resents the end pieces in each. C is the cross 
piece or brace. These braces are set in inter 
mediate of the ends of the sides pieces, A A', 
leaving the ends of said pieces extended, as 
shown at a. The side pieces at points between 
the end piece,B, and cross-piece Care provided 
with longitudinal dovetailed groovesa, and the 
solid extensions a, beyond the cross-piece, are 
each provided with a stud or screw, a, the 
dovetailed heads of which constitute tenons 
to engage the dovetailed grooves. Each part 
or section of the screen is the counterpart of 
the other, and it will be seen that the dove 
tailed grooves are at one end of the side pieces, 
while the dovetailed Stud or screen is secured 
to the solid projecting ends of the side pieces. 
When the two parts of the screen are put to 
gether, they are reversed end to end, so that 
the solid portions or extensions of one part 
provided with the studs or screws comes ad 
jacent to the grooved portions of the other 
part, the dovetailed heads of the studs or 
screws engaging the grooves, so that the Sec 
tions can slide one on the other, to expand Or 
contract the screen. This construction and 55 
arrangement imparts considerable strength to 
the screen, while simplifying and reducing the 
cost of manufacture, and is much more ad 
vantageous than those screens where the two 
portions are provided with dovetailed grooves 6O 
facing each other and connected by separate 
metallic dovetailed blocks. 
In my Letters Patent No. 229,032 the two 
parts of the screen are not duplicates or counter 
parts of each other, and one section only is pro- 65 
vided with dovetailed tenons, the other sec 
tions having the dovetailed grooves, such 
grooves extending the entirelength of the side 
pieces, which materially weakens the structure. 
I avoid this by my presentinvention, in that I70 
make each section the counterpart of the other. 
The dovetailed grooves are only in those por 
tions of the side pieces which are between the 
end and cross pieces, and the dovetailed stud 
or screw is secured in the solid extension of 75 
the side pieces which project beyond the cross 
piece, so that I produce a stronger and more 
desirable screen, and the sections are pre 
vented from warping and sticking, which is 
obviously objectionable. 
To facilitate the operation of securing the 
two duplicate parts together, I construct the 
sockets with a suitable orifice at one end, as 
shown at a', preferably to one side of the line 
of the sockets, thereby also tending to prevent 85 
the disengagement of the two parts from each 
other, said parts being engaged readily upon 
one side, when the frames may be sprung suf 
ficiently to engage them upon the other side 
in like manner. The sockets are limited to the 90 
desired distance to which it may be desired to 
expand the two parts. By means of the orifice 
at the frames may be united at one side and 
sprung together, as described, on the other 
side, the orifice preventing their disengage- 95 
ment and dispensing with the necessity of in 
Serting a stop for that purpose. 
It has been found in practice that by con 
structing both portions of the frame with said 
sockets and tenons, whereby the tenons of the IOO 
8O 
IO 
25 
45 
2 
- 
298,675 
IO 
one will fit into the sockets of the other, a firm 
bearing is provided and the frame is extended 
upon each of the middle of the screen, dimin 
ishing the liability of the two portions warping 
and Working unevenly, and also removing any 
difficulty which might otherwise arise from one 
portion of the frame binding on the other, 
were only one side of the frame provided with 
tenons fitting into sockets in the other. More 
over, this constructionis of valuable advantage 
in the manufacture of the screens, since, the 
one portion being the duplicate of the other, 
only one pattern is necessary. When said du 
plicate parts have been constructed as de 
Scribed, they are ready for engagement with 
each other, and require no further addition or 
labor. 
The netting c may be secured upon the sep 
arate parts of the frame in any proper man 
ner-as, for instance, each duplicate part may 
be constructed with suitable grooves, c', into 
which the edge of the netting is engaged and 
secured in place therein by a suitable spline, 
25 
c", though I do not limit myself to this method 
of securing the netting. 
What I claim is 
A screen-frame constructed of two duplicate 
parts, the top and bottom pieces of said parts 
being each provided with a dovetail socket at 
one end and a dovetail tenon at the other end, 3O 
said socket being limited in extension to the 
length to which the frames may be extended, 
and having a side orifice, a, communicating 
therewith at one extremity, the construction 
being such that the two frames may be readily 35 
united upon one side, and the opposite sides 
be united by springing the same sufficiently to 
engage the dovetail tenon of the one with the 
dovetail socket of the other, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS W. DOWLING. 
Witnesses: 
N. S. WRIGHT, 
M. B. O'DOGHERTY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298775.txt	(No Model.) 
M. R. P0 TT0RIFF, 
WASHING MACHINE. 
 
ge.)8???? 
Aiforneys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MATTHEW R. POTTORFF, OF GILMAN, ILLINOIS. 
WASHING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent INo. 298,775, dated May 20, 1884. 
Application filed August 13, 1883. (No model.) 
- 
To tull, avhom, it muay concern: 
Beit known that I, MATTHEW R. POTTORFF, every point with the slats upon the false bot 
tom and upon the rubber. This rubberis pro 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Gil-l vided with two cross-pieces, HH, extending 55 
man, in the county of Iroquois and State of from end to end of the rubber, and soldered 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Wash or otherwise secured midway of said cross 
ing-Machine, of which the following is a speci- pieces is a bail or handle, I, the lower ends of 
fication, reference being had to the accompa- which are turned at right angles to the same, 
nying drawings. 
which serve as journalstofit within the grooves 6o 
This invention relates to that class of Wash 
in the bearings C C, whereby the rubber is 
ing-machines in which the bed is stationary 
rocked to and fro when in the act of Washing 
and the rubber 1movable; and the improve 
clothes. 
ments consist in the construction and arrange 
The body or box A, heretofore referred to, 
ment of parts, as will be hereinafter more fully 
is provided at one end, on the inside thereof, 65 
Set forth, and pointed out in the claims. 
with a small block or ledge, J, secured fast 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
thereto, and upon which rests loosely one end 
represents a longitudinal sectional view of my 
of the false bottom. D, so as to be capable of 
improved machine. Fig. 2 represents a per 
removal and replacement within the body A, 
spective view of the rubber, and Fig. 3 rep 
as occasion may require. At the other end of 7O 
resents a perspective view of the false or de 
the box or body A is a thumb-screw or button, 
tachable bottom. 
K, having on the end of the stem or elongated 
In the annexed drawings, A represents a 
portion thereof, which extends down through 
semi-cylindrical box or body of a washing-ma 
a perforation in the end of the box, screw 
chine, provided with legs BB, secured at an 
threads K", over which a nut, L, is placed, 75 
angle to the same, and projecting upwardly 
which secures the thumb-screw Kloosely with 
from the sides and top and midway of the 
in the perforation in the end of the box, so 
body A are two grooved bearings, C C, for a 
that it can be turned therein as well as with 
purpose hereinafter to be referred to. 
in a slot in the end of the false bottom D, to 
D is a false bottom, also semi-cylindrical in 
fasten down or release the false bottom when So 
form, composed of one or more metallic curved 
it is required to be taken out of the body of 
strips, d, attached to two end pieces, E, which 
the machine for cleaning, &c. 
fit or rest snugly upon the ends of the box or 
. The operation of my machine is as follows: 
body A, inside thereof. At right angles to 
The false bottom is placed within the body 
these metallic strips d, and secured to the same, 
or box, with one end resting under the block 85 
are a multiplicity of slats or ribs, F, so ar 
or ledge and the other end fastened down 
ranged as to present the form of the letter V 
by means of the thumb-screw, which holds 
alternately from each side of the false bottom 
the false bottom therein, and within this false 
D. These slats E are secured to the metallic 
bottom is located or fitted the rubber, the slats 
strips d by means of screws, so as to enable 
of which correspond in form with those on 
them to be removed or attached at pleasure. 
the false bottom, and between said slats, after 
G is a rubber, made of metal, wood, or any 
sufficient water has been poured in the ma 
suitable material, of semicircular form, under 
chine, are placed the clothes to be washed. 
neath of the bottom of which are secured, in 
All that is necessary for the operator to do is 
a similar manner as those upon the false bot 
to take hold of the handle and rock the rubber 
tom, a multiplicity of slats, g, corresponding 
back and forth, when, by means of the friction 
to and arranged similar to those heretofore de 
produced upon the clothes by the slats upon 
scribed upon the false bottom, and which come 
the false bottom and rubber, the clothes are 
in contact with the clothes which are placed 
thoroughly and quickly washed without the 
between them and the slats upon the false bot 
least inconvenience to the operator. 
tom, the smaller or pointed ends of the W 
My machine is simple inits construction, not 
shaped slats upon the rubber covering the open 
easily gotten out of order, durable, and cheaply 
spaces of the W-shaped slats upon the false 
manufactured. 
bottom, so that the clothes come in contact at 
I wish to be understood that I do not limit 
90 
95 
IOO 
. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
298,775 
2 
myself to the precise construction and arrange- 
2. The false bottom having end pieces nearly 
ment of the parts, as said parts may be varied at right angles thereto, semicircular metallic 
Without departing from the spirit of my inven- strips d, connecting the end pieces, and ar- 2d 
ranged longitudinally, and detachable slats or 
tion. 
5. What I claim as new, and desire to secure ribs secured to the strips with their ends ad 
by Letters Patent, is- 
jacent to each other, and forming the letter V 
1. In a Washing-machine, the body A, hav- alternately from one side to the other, in corn 
ing each end extended, as shown, and provided bination with the box or body A, having ledge 25 
with a block or ledge, secured to one of its J, and a thumb-screw, bolt, and nut, as set 
having end pieces, E, at right angles thereto, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
and resting on the extended ends of the body, my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
one of said end pieces fitting under the block presence of two witnesses. 
MATTHEW 1R. POTTORFF. 
or ledge, and the other end piece being slot- 
- 
I5 ted, as shown, and a thumb-screw and nut en- 
gaging with the slot of said end piece, as and 
. 
for the purpose set forth. 
IO ends, in combination with a false bottom, D, forth. 
????? 
- 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL GREEN, 
GEORGE EI. POTTER. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298875.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
E. F. MILL ARD, 
PRESSURE FEEDER FOR PULP GRINDERS, 
No. 298,875, 
Patent May 20, 1884, 
INVENTOR; 
BY Mull 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD F. MILL ARD, OF MARINETTE, WIS CONSIN. 
PRESSURE, FEEDER FOR PUP G R N DERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,875, dated May 20, 1884. 
Application filed October 22, 1883. (No model.) 
To all, uhon, it may 007 Cern: 
side of the rod, so that at the best it is very 
Beit known that I, EDWARD F. MILLARD, 
difficult to maintain steam-tight piston-rod 
of Marinette, Marinette county, Wisconsin, 
packing in the steam or water pressure feed 
have invented a new and Improved Feeder 
ers. I therefore construct the box at e to be 
5 for Pulp-Grinders, of which the following is 
used merely as a bearing to the rod d without 55 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
packing, and to raise the piston by means of 
My invention consists of a steam or Water 
suction, to be created above the piston by the 
pressure feeder or presser for supplying the 
water - column of the exhaust-pipe gy when 
wood to pulp-grinding stones, contrived for 
water is used, or by a vacuum produced in the 
Io raising or withdrawing the piston when the 
exhaust-pipeg by a steam-jet from the steam- 6o 
wood blocks are ground up, by suction or by 
pipe q When steam is used. 
a vacuum produced in the cylinder behind the 
For operating the valves, the valve-rods k. 
piston, to avoid the use of pressure under the 
are connected to the arms lm, respectively, of 
piston for returning the piston, and thus avoid 
the rock-shaft n, by extending loosely through 
the use of packing and Save the time and labor 
the perforated end plates, 0, of said arms, with 65 
of keeping the piston-rod packing in order, 
stop-nuts p, Screwed on the valve-rods each 
which is a difficult matter in these machines, 
side of the arm-plates 0, to allow of some play 
in which the packing is rapidly destroyed. 
of the arms between the stop-nuts, which en 
My invention also consists of an improved 
ables the valves to be actuated quickly, as by 
contrivance of the valve-shifting lever, de 
a blow, instead of the slower movements they 
signed to effect the shifting of the valves by 
would have if connected to the rocker arms 
quick thrusts or blows to start them more 
without slack between the stop-nuts, thus 
readily than they will by the slow movements 
starting the valves better and more certainly, 
due to the swing of the lever, as hereinafter 
By dispensing with the packing in the pis 
ton-rodstuffing-box, the Water leaking through 
fully described. 
the piston or condensing from steam escaping 75 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
through the same is free to escape without 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
attention, whereas when steam is used to raise 
responding parts in all the figures. 
the piston care must always be taken to close 
Figure 1 is partly a side elevation and partly 
the petcock, that must in that case be used, 8o 
a sectional elevation of my improved pressure 
when steam is admitted to raise the piston, 
feeder. Fig. 2 is a plan view, and Fig. 3 is a 
and the said cock must be opened again when 
detail view. 
steam is admitted above the piston for feed 
The pressure - cylinder a is preferably ar 
ing the Wood. 
ranged upright on any Suitable Support, b, to 
press the Wood downward on the top of the 
nected by rod t with the rod ic of the steam 
grindstone, (not shown,) by the Water or steam 
valve i, when steam is used, to open the said 
pressure acting through the piston and the 
valve s simultaneously with the closing of 
cross-head c, attached to the lower end of the 
the steam-valve i, and vice versa. 
piston-rod d, but the cylinder may of course 
be arranged horizontally or obliquely. The 
ployed for producing the Suction by a steam 
vertical arrangement is, however, the best for 
jet, the nozzle may be connected to the ex 
some reasons; but it is difficult to get at the 
haust-pipeg by a branch, v, and the exhaust 
stuffing-box e of the piston-rod for maintaining 
pipe may have a cock, c, to close it below the 
water or steam tight packing for enabling Wa 
branch ). 
ter or steam to be used to raise the piston f 
I prefer to simultaneously move the valves 
when the blocks of wood are ground up and 
by a lever, j, fixed to rock-shaft n, and work. 
others are to be put in. Moreover, the lateral 
ing in or along a guide and stop plate, ac, fixed 
stress of the grindstone on the piston-rod has to the cylinder-head; and I propose to have a 
When steam is used and the nozzle u is em- 9o 
The valves of the steam-jet pipe q is con- 85 
95 
a 
. 
3O 
35 
45 
5o the effect of slacking off the packing on one spring, b, to hold the lever up when the press. Ioo 
298,875 
ure is on with a cord, c, attached to the lar boss on the under side of the support b, 
Spring, and passing over a guide-pulley, d, to 
below the cylinder, substantially as described. 
2. In a steam-pressure feed apparatus for 
the cross-head c, to withdraw the spring and 
pulp-grinders, the exhaust-pipeg, provided 
trip the lever when the cross-head arrives at 
with a steamjetpipe, q, for producing Suction 
the lowest point of its descent, and I will have 
on the exhaust side of the piston, for raising 
a weight, a, on the lever to cause it to act 
quickly and automatically. I propose to use 
or returning the same, substantially as de 
air as well as water or steam for applying the 
Scribed. 
m, connected to the 
pressure. 
valve-rods k, between stop-nuts p, allowing 
Having thus described my invention,I claim 
play of the arms for starting the valves with 
as new and desiretosecure by Letters Patent 
1. In a Water or steam pressure feed appa 
a blow, Substantially as described. 
ratus for pulp-grinders, the cylinder provided 
With means for raising or returning the pis. 
ton by suction on the exhaust side, and the 
piston-rod having a bearing only, without 
packing, in the boxe, Secured within a tubu 
JNO. FAIRCHILD, 
A. A. FAIRCHILD. 
3. The lever-arms 
25 
EDWARD F. MILLARD. 
WitneSSes: 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US298975.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 298,975. 
J. HUNTER 
TELEGRAPH POLE, 
Patented May 20, 1884, 
 
 
SS ZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
?aeSRSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
?SSSSSSSSSS< 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
INVENTOR, 
24/ 
ORNEYS, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
e6 
UNITED STATES PATENT 
 
JAMES HUNTER, OF RUFFS DALE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
TEE GRAPH - POLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 298,975, dated May 20, 1884. 
Application filed March 18, 1884. (No model.) 
50 
55 
heads, B; but only one may be used, or more 
To all whom it invity concern : 
than three, if desired, they being all fastened 
Beit known that I, JAMES HUNTER, a citizen 
to the pole in a similar manner, as follows: 45 
of the United States, and a resident of Ruff's 
Dale, in the county of Westmoreland and State Inserted at right angles into the upper end of 
the post is a piece or elbow, C, the lower arm, 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Telegraph-Poles; 
c, of which forms, in conjunction with the top 
of the post A, a support for the lowermost arm 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
or cross-head, B. This is held in position by 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
screwing a short tube or rod, D, through the 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
upper arm, c', of the elbow-piece C, the arm B 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
having a recess or depression, b, in the mid 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, which form a part of dle, to receive the lower screw-threaded end of 
the part D. To the top of the latter is affixed 
this Specification, and in which 
another elbow-piece, C, which is, in like man 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
ner, provided with a threaded section, D', the 
metallic telegraph-pole. Fig. 2 is a similar 
lower end of which bears against the second 
view of the pole at right angles to the view 
represented in Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 is a longi 
arm or cross-head B, and so on, according to 
the number of arms or cross-heads with which 
tudinal sectional view, on an enlarged scale, 
through the upper part of the pole. 
the pole is to be supplied. In this manner it 
will be seen that any one of the arms may read 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in all the figures. 
ily be removed whenever desired simply by 
unscrewing its appropriate section D and cor 
My invention has relation to metallic tele 
responding elbow-piece C, and that the pole 
graph-poles; and it consists in the improved 
may be built up or extended in the same manner 
construction and combination of parts of the 
to any suitable height, according to the num 
Same, which will be hereinafter more fully de 
ber of arms or cross-heads with which it is de 
Scribed and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, A denotes 
sired to provide it. 
Having thus described my invention, Iclaim 
the lower part or body of the post or pole, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
which may be of any suitable size, and is sunk 
a proper distance into the ground to insure 
United States 
The combination, in a metallic telegraph 
its stability. This part of the post may be 
pole, of the pole A, elbow-pieces C, removable 
either solid or tubular; but I prefer to con 
arms or cross-heads B, and threaded clamping 
Struct it tubular, of one or more sections of 
sections or extensions D, substantially as and 
pipe screwed together, in order to make it 
as light as possible consistent with proper 
for the purpose shown and set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
strength. 
own I have hereunto affixed my signature in 
The cross heads or arms B, upon which the 
presence of two witnesses. 
insulators are to be fastened that support the 
telegraph or telephone wires, are fastened to 
the upper end of the post in the manner shown 
more fully in Fig. 3. In the accompanying 
drawings I have shown three arms or cross 
JOSEPH D. COPE, 
ERASTUS R. SHERRICK. 
JAMES HUNTER, 
- 
Witnesses: 
75 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299075.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 2.99,075, 
7% z 
J. JENKINS, 
SAFETY PIN, 
/zz, 2. 
23. 
/%-7. 
Patented May 20, 1884, 
/27; 6. 
17 
/ 
17 
1. 
2 
e/27. 6. 
eel 
2 
e-A 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, d, C. 
INVENTOR 
4-4-. 
a ATTORNEY 
WITNESSES 
C6-432 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOEL, JENKINS, OF MONTCLAIR, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
GEORGE P. FARMER, OF SAME PLACE. 
SAFETY - PIN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 299,075, dated May 20, 1884, 
Application filed April 7, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
25 
I5 hereinafter particularly described. 
To all whom it invoy concern. 
Be it known that I, JoELJENKINs, of Mont 
clair, county of Essex, State of New Jersey, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
5 in Safety-Pins; and I declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing sheet of drawings, forming part of this 
specification. 
This invention is in the nature of an im 
provement in the construction of safety-pins; 
and the invention consists in a safety-pin with 
all its several parts made from a single piece 
of wire, the shield being formed in the manner 
In the accompanying sheet of drawings, 
Figure I represents the folds in the wire for 
making the old form of shield; Fig. 2, the first 
fold, Fig. 3 the second fold, Fig. 4 the third 
2O fold, and Fig. 5 the final folding, for my pres 
ent form of shield; Fig. 6, a side view of com 
pleted pin. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in the Several figures. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
Safety-pins heretofore patented to me in the 
United States in Letters Patent dated Octo 
ber 2, 1877, No. 195,825, in which all the 
Several parts of the pin-to wit, the sharp 
3O ened and unsharpened members, the spring, 
and shield-Were made from one and the 
same piece of wire, and integral with it. 
Such a safety-pin possesses many advantages 
over the old form of pin, in which the shield is 
35 formed from a separate piece of folded sheet 
metal and afterward secured to the wire of the 
pin, for in my patented pin the shield, as be 
fore stated, formed part of the same wire from 
which was constructed the other parts of the 
4O pin; but it was found in practice that in order 
to bend the wire to make the shield it either 
had to be annealed or a large percentage of 
the pins would breakin folding if unannealed, 
and if the Wire was annealed it was then ren 
55 
dered too ductile for the purposes of a shield, 45 
and it would then strain out of shape. There 
fore to make the shield from hard or unan 
nealed wire, and at the same time avoid break 
ing the wire in the process of folding, I con 
struct my shield by first bending the end of 5o 
the wire A with one turn, as in Fig. 2, a Sec 
ond turn, as in Fig. 3, a third turn, as in Fig. 
4, and finally double over all the turned or 
folded portions, as in Fig. 5, completing the 
shield B with a central bar, a. 
It will be observed that all of the several 
folds above described are open folds-that is 
to say, none of them are short turns-bringing 
the folded parts of the wire in close contact, 
which would tend to break it, and it will be 
further observed that there are fewer folds or 
turns than in the old form of shield, (such as 
is shown in Fig. 1;) consequently the metal is 
more easily and rapidly bent, and not so apt to 
be broken, as before stated. 
In making the foregoing shield it is wholly 
unnecessary to anneal the wire; therefore the 
shield will not be strained out of place. I am 
aware that wire shields have been made and 
patented which have but two folds or turns of 7o 
the wire; but these last-mentioned shields are 
ineffectual, for the reason that they form a 
mere frame that does not properly protect the 
point of the pin, whereas by my present in 
vention the point of the pin is guarded by the 75 
central bar, c. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
with the wire of the pin, and consisting of 
three parallel folds of wire doubled over and 
forming the shield B, with a central bar, a. 
JOEL, JENKINS. 
A safety-pin with its shield made integral 8O 
Witnesses: 
G. M. PLYMPTON, 
D. A. CARPENTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299175.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. SHEETs, 
CHIMNEY TOP AND WENTILATOR, 
No. 299,175, 
 
Patented May 27, 1884, 
 
 
-74. Wai, 
6 (6-4-6 
IWWEWTOR 
Attorneyeat 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN M. SHEETs, OF NORA. SPRINGS, IOW.A. 
CHMNEY - TOP AND VENT LATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 299,175, dated May 27, 1884. 
Application filed March 25, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
To all, whom it in?uly concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN M. SHEETs, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Nora 
Springs, in the county of Floyd and State of 
Iowa, have invented a new and useful Chim 
ney-Top, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention has relation to chimney-tops 
and ventilators designed to increase the draft 
and prevent internal glazing and creosote for 
lmation in the chimney-top; and it consists in 
the construction and novel arrangement of 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully described, 
and particularly pointed out in the claim. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a chimney 
top and ventilator embodying my improve 
ments, and Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view 
of the same. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, a designates the pyramidal-shaped 
base of the chimney-top and ventilator; b, the 
vertical pipe leading from the top thereof; c, 
the horizontal cross-flue secured upon and 
communicating with the vertical flue or pipe; 
and d and d are the outer upwardly-diverging 
end flues Secured to the ends of the horizontal 
cross-flue, and communicating therewith. The 
end flues, dd, are made to diverge from below 
25 
upward, in order to prevent the lodgment of 3O 
soot, creosote, snow, or rain in the horizontal 
cross-flue, and thereby prevent rusting, glaz 
ing, and obstruction of the ventilator. This 
arrangement also increases the draft, and in 
sures a draft, no matter in what direction the 35 
wind may blow. The arrows show the course 
of the draft, which, it will be seen, is out 
wardly at both ends of the diverging end flues. 
The device is cheap, durable, simple, and 
efficient, and will not get out of order. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
In a chimney-top and ventilator, the combi 
nation, with the base and vertical flue rising 
therefrom, of the horizontal cross-flue secured 
upon and communicating with the vertical flue, 
and the end flues diverging from below upward 
and secured to and communicating with the 
horizontal cross-fue, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
45 
JOHN M. SHEETS. 
Witnesses: 
JACKSON GAYLORD, 
W. E. ROBERTS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299275.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. SHAWK & A. S. WETMORE, 
No. 299,275. 
HYDRANT FILTER, 
Patented May 27, l884, 
 
 
M 
I 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
-- 
 
 
2 
E. 
- c4 
z-- 7-zer Y. 1,7- ATTORNEYS 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. SHAWK AND ALBERT S. WETMORE, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
: HYDRANT-FILTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 299,275, dated May 27, 1884. 
Application filed September 21, 1883, 
(No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
Eo att, who7, it may concern. 
Be it known that we, GEORGE W. SHAWK 
and ALBERT S. WETMORE, of Cleveland, in 
the county of Cuyahoga and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Hydrant - Filters; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
hydrant-filters; and it consists in certain fea 
tures of Construction and in combination of 
parts hereinafter described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation 
view of our improved filter. Fig. 2 is a lon 
gitudinal vertical section of the same. 
A represents a piece of rubber tube, into 
which is forced a thimble or hollow cylinder, 
B, preferably large enough to expand the tube, 
as shown. 
C is a broad Snugly-fitting band forced over 
the rubber tube and pressing the tube firmly 
upon the said inclosed cylinder B. Over each 
end of the cylinder is secured, and preferably 
by soldering, cylinder-heads b, of wire-gauze, 
and the space inside of the cylinder and be 
tween the gauze heads is packed with fine char 
coal, D. 
Either end of the rubber tube may be at 
tached to a hydrant, and the Water allowed to 
pass through the filter from either direction. 
First, the gauze will arrest the coarser part of 
the sediment, after which the Water passes 
through the charcoal, the filtering qualities 
of which are well known. 
After a time the 
accumulation of sediment in the filter will ob 
struct the passage of the water. When this 
occurs, the filter should be reversed-that is, 
the other end of the filter-tube should be at 
tached to the hydrant. The first action of the 
water after the said reversing will force out 
the accumulated sediment from thefilter, after 
which the water will be found in good condi 
tion to use and well filtered; and this will con 
tinue until the passage of the Water is again 
obstructed, requiring another reversing of the 
filter. 
55 
size, and it is sometimes desirable to use one 
of the larger sizes on smallhydrants or pipes, 
so that the filter may operate a long time with 
out reversing. 
The hydrant-pipe F is provided with the 
valve Ganda nozzle, f, made slightly tapering, 
and of Such size as will enter the tube A. The 
tube will be more or less expanded as it is 
forced onto the nozzle, after which the band ais 
pressed by hand up onto the expanded part 
of the tube, pressing it firmly onto theinclosed 
nozzle, thus forming a joint sufficient for the 
purpose and easily disengaged. 
The band C may be provided on opposite 
sides with the raised portions or bosses c, in 
which are respectively slots running longi 
tudinally with the filter, as shown, and em 
bracing the small trunnionse, that are attached 
to the brackets E, and that furnish a support 
upon which to revolve the filter in the pro 
cess of changing ends, as aforesaid. When 
the filter is attached to the nozzlef, as shown 
in Fig. 1, the trunnions e are near the bottom 
of the slots. The slots are of sufficient length 
to admit of lowering the filter until it is dis- 75 
engaged from the said nozzle. After the filter 
has been reversed and during the process of 
again coupling it to the said nozzle, the said 
trunnions and slots act as guides and keep the 
filter in a proper relative position to the noz 
zle. When the filters are so small that they 
are easily manipulated by hand, the said slots, 
trunnions, and brackets may be omitted. 
What we claim is 
1. A hydrant-filter consisting of a flexible 
tube, a hollow cylinder adapted to inclose the 
filtering material and forced into said tube, 
and means for holding the same therein against 
displacement, Substantially as set forth. 
2. In a hydrant-filter, a flexible tube dis 
tended by an inclosed hollow cylinder, in com 
bination with an outside band adapted to press 
the said tube upon the inclosed cylinder, sub 
the purpose 
stantially as described, and for 
set forth. 
3. In a hydrant-filter, the combination, with 
a flexible tube, a cylinderprovided with filter 
ing material and inserted in said tube, and 
means for holding the same therein against 
. 
9O 
These filters may be made of any required displacement, of a movable band, a, encircling IOO 
2 
said tube, and adapted to hold it in position 
In testimony whereof we sign this specifica 
on the hydrant-nozzle, substantially as set tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 13th 
forth. 
day of September, 1883. 
299,275 
4. The combination, with cylinder B, pro 
5 vided with the gauze ends, of the flexible tube 
A and the band C, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
5. The bracket E, provided with the trun- 
nions e, in combination with the band C, pro- 
Io vided with the slotted bosses c, substantially 
as described, and for the purpose specified. 
GEORGE W. SHAWK. 
ALBERT S. WETMORE, 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. H. DORER, 
W. E. DONNELLY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299375.txt	UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS GATHMANN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
METHOD of REDUC 
NG O 3AE GRAN. 
53CEFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 299,375, dated May 27, 1884. 
Application filed October 11, 1883. (No specimens.) 
O 
To all, whom it nually concern, 
Be it known that I, LOUIs GATHMANN, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Methods of Reducing Lo 
bated Grain in the Production of Coarse Mid 
dlings or Farina and Flour; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof. 
This invention relates to a novel process or 
method in the manufacture of flour, farina, 
coarse middlings, or flour from wheat or other 
lobated grain; and it consists, essentially, in 
the operations hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
I first describe the method in the order of 
the steps and with reference to the particular 
operations which I prefer to adopt in this in 
Vention, and will subsequently point out cer 
tain modifications which I intendshall be elm 
braced in my appended claim. 
The first operation is decortication of the 
grain by any suitable or well-known means for 
the purpose, either chemical or mechanical, it 
being understood that in this operation of de 
cortication a surrounding integument is left 
about the starchy body after the operation of 
decortication, as practiced by known means, 
has been completed. Next the grain is split 
through the crease, also by any well-known 
devices for the purpose. After the splitting 
has been performed and the kernels divided 
into parts or halves, the germ and crease im 
purities are of course exposed. In this con 
dition the grain is subjected to another oper 
ation of decortication by any one of the means 
well known for the purpose that it will be 
thought best to employ. In this operation I 
have found that the thin film or layer which 
incloses the starchy body will not be removed, 
but that the outer bran substance, which in 
the previous operation of decortication was 
concealed and protected within the crease, 
will be removed, leaving the thin layer or in 
ner portion of the original integument now 
embracing all parts of the half kernels that 
were previously covered by the bran. Next 
the half kernels are separated from the bran 
substance removed by the operations of de 
cortication and from the germ and crease 
impurities and the minor fragments which 
have been detached in said operations of de 
cortication, leaving clean large fragments or 
half-kernels inclosed, principally, by the thin 
interior layer or filament of the original integu- 55 
ment. These fragments are in this condition 
subjected to a grinding operation by any suit 
able means known in the art, but preferably 
by millstones. The product will be composed 
of two parts, one comprising about nine-tenths 6o 
of the entire decorticated grain substance, 
forming an exceptionally-pure flour and mid 
dlings, varying in relative proportions accord 
ing as the stones are set to grind high or low 
with reference to the particular character of 65 
the product in this respect desired. The re. 
maining portion of the product will consist of 
the bran filament referred to, together with 
parts of the starchy substance adhering there 
to, and this second part is subjected to puri- 7o 
fication by the ordinary purifying devices em 
ployed in mills for this purpose. The first 
portion of the product above mentioned, com 
prising nine-tenths of the entire food substance 
of the berry, will usually be of such purity as 
to require no purification whatever, but may 
be reduced to any desired extent, or separated 
into coarse and fine products--as farina and 
flour-for any further separate treatment or 
use desired. 
As a modification, I would state that the 
grain may be split before any decorticating 
operation is performed thereon, and in this 
case the decortication will be wholly effected 
upon the broken or half kernels. In the last 
case mentioned it is of course particularly de 
sirable that the grain shall be well cleaned, 
| either inits whole or broken condition, before 
decortication. 
ticular mode of operating upon the portion of 
the berry detached, either in breaking the ker 
nels or in decorticating the half-kernels; but 
I suggest that, as a little valuable flour sub 
stance will be removed in these operations, it 
will be better to perform any further reduc 
tions thereon, and also to perform the operation 
of reducing the fragments of bran for the sepa 
ration of food substance therefrom, upon rolls. 
has been impossible to produce a large per 
centage of coarse middlings or farina without 
bran adhering thereto. In the process de 
scribed it is practicable to obtain a percentage 
In previous methods of grain-reduction it IOO 
My invention is not restricted to any par- 9o 
45 
. 
75 
95 
2 
299,375 
of such coarse middlings or farina hitherto en- film from the product of reduction, whereby 
tirely unknown in the history of the reduction a large percentage of pure food substance is 
of grain. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
produced, substantially as set forth. 
I claim as my invention- 
5 The method hereinbefore described, which my invention I affix my signature in presence 15 
consists in splitting and dividing lobated grain of two witnesses. 
through the crease and decorticating the half. 
kernels, then separating the impurities from 
the half-kernels, then reducing the half-ker- 
Io nels, and thereafter separating the inner bran- 
Witnesses: 
M. E. DAYTON, 
JESSE COX, Jr. 
LOUIS (GATHIMANN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299475.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 299,475. 
FSFSFSS 
BAKING PAN. 
Patented May 27, 1884. 
| 
--- | 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PATRICK HOWARD, OF PIQUA, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO DAVID 
YOUNG, OF SAME PLACE. 
BAKING-PAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 299,475, dated May 27, 1884. 
Application filed October 9, 1883. (No model.) 
CleatS. 
 
* 
tom of the pan, as will be Seen more clearly 
To all whon, it na/ concern: 
by reference to Fig. 4, and serve to support 5O 
Be it known that I, PATRICK HoWARD, a 
the meat placedin the panto be roasted above 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Piqua, in the county of Miami and State of the bottom of the same, the meat being placed 
5 Ohio, have invented certain new and useful directly upon the cleats Eand being supported 
Improvementsin Baking-Pans; and Idohereby thereby, thus preventing the meat from burn 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and ing, and also permitting the gravy to drop 55 
eXact description of the invention, which will down into the bottom of the pan. 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap- | 
1o pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form apart of this specification, and in 
which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section 
I5 of a baking-pan embodying my improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the pan, show 
ing its removable cleats in position. Fig. 3 
is a similar view of the pan, with the cleats 
removed. Fig. 4 is a croSS-Section through 
2o the pan with one of its cleats, and Fig. 5 is a 
top view and a cross-section of one of the 
Similar letters Of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
My invention relates more particularly to 
that class of cooking-utensils in which aseries 
of pans or vessels are superimposed one upon 
the other, and which are adapted to cook sev 
eral dishes at one time. This class of uten 
3o sils is usually provided with a pan or vessel 
which is especially adapted for the baking or 
roasting of meats; and my improvement re 
lates to the meat-panormeat-roaster, as here 
inafter more fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Adenotes 
the bottompanor meat-baking pan, and Band 
C two other pans used in connection there 
with, while D represents the cover. The 
roasting-pan A. is provided with a Series of 
4o cleats, E, made by bending a strip of sheet 
metal at right angles longitudinally and then 
doublingtheedges,asshownat F. The ends of 
these cleatsare beveled, as shown at G, to adapt 
them to be wedged into a groove Orchannel, 
45 H, formed in the Sides of the pan Anear its 
bottom. These cleats, of whichthere may be 
three or more for each roasting-pan, accord 
ing to size, are wedged firmly into the bot 
I am aware that pans for roasting meats 
have beenmade before with a removable grid 
iron in the bottom, or with fixed cleats; but 
the latter are objectionable, because they in 
terfere with the cleaning of the pan, while the 
removable cleats shown in my invention pos 
sess several advantages over a removable 
gridiron in point of Simplicity and cheapness 
of construction, and in the fact, that the num 
ber of cleatS or Supports may be regulated ac 
cording to the size of the piece or pieces of 
meat which it is desired to cook at one time 
in the pan. After removing the removable 
cleats E F, it will be seen that my pan. can 
readily be cleaned, and the gravy poured out 
without the least inconvenience. 
Havingthus described my invention, Iclaim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United StateS 
1. The combination of the baking-pan A 
and removable cleats E, consisting each of a 
strip of sheet metal bent at right angles, with 
its edges doubled upon itself, Substantiallyas 
and for the purpose shown and Set forth. 
2. The combination of the baking-pan A, 
having a groove orchannel, H, near its bot 
tom, and removable cleats E, composed each 
of a strip of Sheet metal bent ab right angles, 
and having the ends cut off or beveled to adapt 
them to fit into the groove or channel H, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpOSe Shown and 
Set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 9O 
in presence of two witnesses. 
G. A. BROOKS, 
J. H. HATCH. 
PATRICK HOWARD. 
WitneSSeS: 
 
75 
25 
s 
35 
63 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299575.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 299,575. 
J. PERCY. 
WEHICLE SPRING, 
Patented June 3, 1884, 
7 
7zy A 
a. 
HRTITILIT 
titli 
 
S. 
HD 
itsittitt IIILITILITILITIN 
(' HL -----------------"I I 
NITTTTTTTTILLIIlyuuLiliull- - 
A. 
4." 
27 
al 
  
 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington. D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES PERCY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
VEHICLE - SPRING, 
(3PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 299,575, dated June 3, 1884. 
Application filed January 30, 1884. (No model.) 
- 
To all uhon, it naily concern : 
Be it known that I, JAMES PERCY, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
invented certain new and usefullmprovements 
in Buggy-Springs; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the Same. 
The object of this improvement is to pro 
duce a safe, durable, and very active spring 
suitable for side-bar and side-reach buggies. 
This result is attained by the mechanism illus 
trated in the drawings herewith filed as part 
hereof, in which the same letters of reference 
denote the same parts in all the views. 
Figure l is a top view. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation showing mode of Securing the Spring 
in position for use. Fig. 3 is a view of the 
spring inverted. 
A A' A' represent the body of the spring, 
having short curves (t", from which points the 
extensions or reaches A. and A are inclined 
to opposite sides, in order to clear each other 
when in motion. The ends of the reaches A. 
A? are curved inwardly, to bring the eyes a, 
by means of which the buggy-bed is hung 
thereto, in true line with each other. The 
spring is made entirely of one piece, and its 
IO 
3O 
base A", which is made to stand in line With 
the spring-bar B, is provided with a central 
perforation, a?, for the insertion of bolt C, 
which, with the usual clips, DD, secures the 
spring to the bar B. By reason of each curve 35 
of the spring having a counterpart or dupli 
cate in the body thereof, and by reason of the 
long reaches obtained by the construction of 
the same, all the parts will move simulta 
neously and harmoniously with each other, 4o 
and none of them will be liable to injury from 
undue or uneven strains when in use. 
Having explained the construction and op 
eration of my improvement, what I claim as 
new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 45 
S 
In a buggy-spring, the variably - curved 
reaches AA, having opposite parallel lateral 
. 
inclinations curved inwardly at their ends a, 
and continued integrally through short reverse 5o 
curves a' into a bow-shaped curve, A", to be 
centrally connected to the side bars, and there 
by arranged for operation throughout its en 
tire body, Substantially as Specified. 
presence of two witnesses. 
Intestimony whereofI affix my signature in 55 
JAMES PERCY. 
Witnesses: 
- 
GEORGE. M. JENNINGS, 
WM. H. GRIFFIN 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299675.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 299,675, 
L. C., PALMER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MACHINE FOR FORMING SCYTHES, 
Patented June 3, 1884. 
 
  
  
EQ 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
E. 
f 
fician/W 
g is nissy's 
iI2. TON 
(eAnn AS2E-6 
2H22H EHE 
Lility. A 
in it". rt E. 
/ 
FitzSite 
*/ 
  
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
L. C. PALMIER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. ' 
No. 299,675. 
 
MACHINE FOR FORMING SCYTHES, 
Patented June 3, 1884, 
 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUCIUS C. PALMER, OF BALLSTON SPA, NEW YORK. 
MACHINE FOR FORMING Scythes. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 299,675, dated June 3, 1884. 
Application filed September 21, 1883, 
(No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LUCIU's C. PALMER, of 
Ballston Spa, in the county of Saratoga and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
Improved Machine for Forming Scythe, Corn 
Knife, and Similar Blades, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention consists of arrangements of 
mechanism for Swaging scythe, corn-knife, and 
Other like blades in uniform shape from back 
to edge, and true taper from heel to point, and 
SO as to avoid the thick and thin places com 
monin the blades made by plating with a ham 
mer, the said mechanism being constructed 
and arranged as hereinafter described. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
Swaging-machine with a part broken out. Fig. 
2 is a plan view with a part in section. Figs. 
3 and 4 are details of an eccentric device em 
ployed to shift the die on which the blades 
are swaged to produce the taper of the blades 
from heel to point. Fig. 5 is a perspective 
view of the machine. Fig. 6 is a perspective 
view of the apparatus employed for adjusting 
the bed-die. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of 
the Oscillating die and the means for working 
it; and Figs. 8, 9, 10 and II are details of a 
clutch device employed for connecting the 
driving-gear and for working the shaping-dies 
for bending the blanks to produce the curve 
from heel to point preparatory to rolling the 
Sale. 
I use an Oscillating die, a, and a bed-die or 
anvil, b, to roll the blades, and beginning at 
the heel I roll the blank crosswise from back 
to edge, shifting the blank along on the bed 
die by hand after each pass, and causing the 
bed-die to rise slightly at the same time and 
to advance toward the back gage, l, to reduce 
the blade in thickness from heel to point and 
from edge to back. The Oscillating die is sus 
pended from a sliding block, c, by a pivot, d. 
The block is fitted in slideways d' in the under 
side of the cape, and is connected by rod if 
with the crank g of the main shaft h. The 
Oscillating die a is also connected with the arm 
i of the rod f by a coiled spring, j, or it may 
be any equivalent device. The said arm i 
projects downward from the end of rod f that 
is jointed to the slide c, so as to swing toward 
and from the die a by the vibrations of the rod 
f, caused by the crank, and the spring is con 
nected to the die a, near its lower end, so that 
said die will be made to swing forward and 
The object of 
backward as the arm is Wings. 
this arrangement is to employ the spring to 
throw the oscillating die forward and upward, 
as indicated in Fig. 7, to clear the blank when 
sliding back to the starting-point for the be 
ginning of the passes, which it will be seen is 
effected by the downward movement of crank 
g at the beginning of the back-stroke. Be 
fore the slide c arrives at the end of the back 
stroke, but after the die has passed back over 
the blank, the lower end of the die a stops 
against a stud, k, where it is held until the 
Crank rises on the forward stroke. The use 
of this projection or stud k is as follows: 
It was found that the durability of the spring 
Would be very much greater if some device 
could be made to extend the spring dur 
ing the backward movement of the Oscil 
lating die about one-half or one-fourth the 
amount that it was compressed in the forward 
movement of the die. The stop k was there 
fore placed on guidel, directly behind the bed 
dieb, and in the path of the oscillating die, for 
the rear edge of said die to bear against and 
extend the spring and cause the face of the 
died to press upon the blank near to one side 
of said die when it commences its forward 
movement. When this part of the oscillating 
die becomes worn, it may be reversed and the 
other side used, as it is made wide enough for 
this purpose, as will be readily seen from the 
drawings. The taper of the blade from back 
to edge is produced by the rolling action of 
the upper die upon the lower, and by gradu 
ally lessening the distance between the two 
dies a taper from heel to toe is formed simul 
taneously with the taper from back to edge, 
as will be fully understood from this specifica 
tion, in connection with the drawings form 
ing a part thereof. To raise the bed - die 
slightly after each pass of the oscillating die 
to produce the taper of the olade from heel to 
point, the bed-die b is secured on a die-block, 
m, that is arranged on a wedge, n, up which 
25 
35 
IO 
45 
55 
95 
IOO 
299,675 
the die-block is to be shifted slightly each 
time the oscillating die makes a pass, the 
blank being also shifted lengthwise along the 
die. The wedge is made adjustable by the rod 
2?, nut 3", and bar a to set it forward or back 
ward, as may be required, for thicker or thin 
ner blades. The block n is shifted by the ec 
centric o on a shaft, p, that is turned by a 
ratchet-wheel, q, pawls, and lever t through 
the chain it, and the lever t is worked by the 
slide c, which strikes a screw, at, fixed on the 
lever, every time it moves back. The screw 
is employed for the point of contact of the 
slide with the lever, in order that it may be 
shifted to vary the extent of the movement of 
the block and the rise of the die. The pawl 
lever tis pivoted at , or it may be on the 
ratchet-wheel stud a. 
The ratchet-wheel () is pivoted on a stud 
pin, , of the housing, and has a hub, c, to 
which a lever, a, attached to shaft p, is con 
nected by a chain, 1, for enabling said ratchet 
wheel to turn the eccentric 0, as above stated. 
The studs, connecting the chain to the lever, 
is adjustable along the slot a' of the lever to 
vary the movement of the eccentric and the 
rise of the die by that means also when re 
quired. 
To shift the die-block in back again pre 
paratory to swaging a new blank, another le 
ver, l', of shaft p is connected to a hub, c, of a 
friction-wheel, d', by a strap or chain, e. Said 
friction-wheel is mounted on an eccentric, f, 
which in turn is mounted on a stud. (f', of the 
housing, and connected by a stud, it', with the 
lever i', which, when pressed down by hand 
at the end of the long arm, will raise friction 
wheel d' up into contact with shaft j", by which 
the friction-wheel will be turned so as to shift 
eccentric O and move the die-block back. 
To raise the pawls out of the teeth of ratch 
et-wheel of automatically, for allowing the ec 
centric 0 to be thus turned back, the pawl 
lever t has a tripper, l', pivoted at I on an 
arm, an, of said lever, bent over said ratchet 
and down the side of it. This tripper is shifted 
under a stud, ', of the pawl by a stud-pin, o', 
set on the side of the ratchet-wheel, which 
strikes the tripper on its lower side above its 
pivot, thereby rocking it and causing its up. 
per face to act with a cam-action on the stud 
pin n' of the pawl, and raise said pawl out of 
engagement with the teeth of the ratchet 
wheel. The stud-pin o' is adjustable on the 
ratchet-wheel, and may be set for tripping the 
pawl earlier or later, according as the blades 
are long or short, and to throw back the trip 
per and allow the pawl to engage the latchet 
again when the ratchet - wheel turns back. 
Another stud-pin, p", is set in the side of said 
ratchet-wheel to strike the tripper on the 
other side and shift it back from under the 
stud-pin it? of the pawl, to let the pawl fall into 
the teeth again. 
For shaping the blanks to form the curves 
from heel to point preparatory to swaging 
them, I have arranged a stationary bending 
die, q, on the plates', and a movable die, t, 
on the slide at', fixed in slotted ways ', under 
plates, and connected by bar ac' with the lever 7O 
a'. Said lever is worked by a cam, if', on the 
part of of a clutch keyed fast to the main shaft 
h. Said shaft remains at rest except when 
coupled to the continuously-running wheel 2" 
by clutch 3', which coupling is effected at any 75 
time when required by a spring in box (t 
whenever the lever l) is pulled down from be 
tween the two parts of the clutch, where it is 
kept by a spring, c'. Said lever l' has a ta 
pered bit, d, that wedges the two portions of 8O 
the clutch of and :' apart. The spring f", Se 
cured at one end to bar at and at the other end 
to stationary plate?', pulls back the diet. 
The sliding part, c' of the clutch carries pins 
a', passing through part of", and engaging both 85 
notches in the side of wheel 3' to cause the ro 
tation of the crank-sha?th to set the can gy 
and other parts of the machine in motion. 
The sliding part 2' is also formed with an in 
cline or cam-surface on its lower inner edge, 90 
the said incline being widest at the forward 
edge and gradually tapered back toward the 
center. When the lever 0" is released the in 
cline l' will, during the revolution of the 
clutch, come in contact with the point of the 95 
bit d of lever l', thereby causing this incline 
l' to ride over the inclined side of the bit to 
ward its widest end and force the sliding part 
g' and its pins outward. The blank is placed 
between these dies of t', which then close on IOO 
and bend the blank to the required shape, a? 
ter which it is placed on the bed-die to be 
rolled, said blank being gaged thereon by the 
curved gage l, fixed adjustably on the hous 
ings a suitable distance back of the bed-die b, IO5 
as shown relatively to said die in Fig. 6. 
This guide l is placed a suitable distance in 
rear of die b, and is curved approximately to 
the curve of the said diel). When this ad 
justment has been properly made, the heated I IO 
blank is shaped in the bending-dies (t, to be 
hereinafter described, and then placed upon 
the die b and against the guide l, and is held 
in this position by the operator. Besides bend 
ing the blank in these dies of it before placing II5 
it under the die a, the slide at is also made to 
operate a hammer - die, (f, which I call a 
bunter, so as to press the rod against the 
face of the gagel at each back motion of slide 
at' and bend it to the shape of said die between I2O 
the passes of the roller-die to cause the rod to 
retain the shape given to it by the dies of 
t' 
and prevent it from being pressed out of shape 
by said roller-die. 
end of a lever, h, pivoted to the side of the 
bed-frame near the bottom, and extending up 
past the slide at', so that a shoulder of said 
slide will strike said level and cause the die 
(f' to strike the rod against the face of the gage I3O 
l or the end of an adjusting-screw, I, of said 
gage. While the oscillating die is returning 
clevated over the blank the hammer-die of 
strikes the blank close to said die, pressing 
The hammel-clief is attached to the upper I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
299,675 
3. 
w 
the blank against the curved guidel. At this 
moment the Oscillating die a bites upon the 
blank, and the hammer gisthrown back, and 
When the oscillating die has again operated 
and is returning, the operator moves the blank 
a few inches, when the hammer-die of again 
Operates, causing the blank to retain the curv 
ature given it by the bending-dies, and curv 
ing the Small portion that was not shaped by 
the bending-dies. This is continued until the 
blank is completed. 
The Work of this machine is superior to that 
produced by the plating-hammer, in that the 
plate is even from back to edge, and is true 
in the taper from heel to point, there being no 
uneven or thick and thin places throughout 
the entire length, so that when the plate goes 
to the finishing-hammer, the dies of which are 
ground to cover a short section of the plate 
from back to edge, said dies will act alike on 
the blade from heel to point as the bladeshifts 
along between them by the jars of the machine, 
Whereas a thick spot in the plate will pre 
Vent the finishing-hammer from properly ham 
mering, refining, and condensing a thin spot 
adjacent thereto, so that when such blades 
are heated for hardening and tempering they 
Will not heat evenly, and the temper will be 
uneven. The blades produced by this ma 
chine being more even and uniform in thick 
ness will finish with much less grinding than 
the more uneven blades of the hammering 
process. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a Swaging-machine, 
of a reciprocating Oscillating die with an ad 
justable bed-die, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, in a swaging-machine, 
of the Oscillating die a, arranged on the recip 
rocating slide c, the bed or anvil dieb, and a 
spring or analogous device for raising said 
Oscillating die in its backward movement over 
the bed-die, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, in a swaging-machine, 
of the reciprocating Oscillating die a, a bed 
die, a Spring or analogous device for causing 
the Oscillating die to clear the bed-die in its 
backward movement, and a stop in the path 
of the oscillating die for arresting said die in 
its backward movement at a point over the 
blank for allowing said die to bite on the blank 
in its forward movement, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. The combination, in a Swaging-machine, 
of the oscillating die C, sliding block c, hav 
ing said Oscillating die pivoted on it, the arm 
i, connected to the vibrating rod f and the 
Spring j, connecting Said Oscillating die at and 
arm i, substantially as described. 
5. In a swaging-machine having an oscillat 
ing die, ct, pivoted to a reciprocating block, c, 
a die-block, m, mounted on an inclined bed, 
n, and connected to an eccentric, o, having in 
- 
termittent rotary motion to raise or shift die 
b toward die a during the intervals between 
the passes of said oscillating die a, substan 
tially as described. 
6. In a Swaging-machine having an Oscillat 
ing die, a, pivoted on a reciprocating slide, c, 
the die-block m, arranged on an inclined bed, . 
n, and connected to eccentric o on a shaft, p, 
having an arm, ac, connected by a chain, ), to 
the hub of a ratchet-wheel, q, having a pawl, 
s, that is worked by the reciprocating slide c, 
Substantially as described. 
7. The tripper k on the pawl-lever t, in 
combination with pawls, having stud n., and 
with the stud-pins o' and p of the ratchet 
wheel q, substantially as described. 
8. The friction-wheel d', lever i, drum c', 
strap e, arm b, and shaft f'; in combination 
With the shaft p, having eccentric 0, connected 
With die-block m, substantially as described. 
9. The friction-wheel d", lever i, drum c, 
strap e', arm b', and shaft f', in combination 
With shaft p, having eccentric 0, connected 
With die-block m and with the ratchet-wheel 
q, connected to said shaft p, and having the 
tripper k" to its pawl s, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
10. In a swaging machine, the stationary 
bending-die (, movable bending-diet, slide 
'u', connected thereto, pivoted lever ac, rod v', 
pivoted to the lower end of lever ac' and to 
slide l', and a cam, y, for operating on the 
free end of the levera', substantially as shown 
and described. 
II. In a swaging-machine, the combination 
of the bending-dies of t and pivoted lever ac, 
connected to the movable die thereof, with the 
shaft h, gear-wheel a, clutch mechanism a' a 
of, camy, and lever b, provided with a wedge 
tongue, d, substantially as set forth. 
12. In a Swaging-machine, the gage l, in 
combination with the bed-dieb and the OScillat 
ing die a, said oscillating die being arranged 
on a reciprocating slide, c, substantially as 
described. 
13. In a swaging-machine, the bunterg, in 
combination with the gagel, bed-die b, and 
the oscillating die a, said oscillating die being 
arranged on the reciprocating slide c, and the 
bunter being operated by the slides, sub 
stantially as described. 
14. The combination, in a swaging-machine, 
of the bed-die b, the oscillating die a, arranged 
on the reciprocating slide c, arm i of the vi 
brating rod?, springi, connecting said die to 
said arm, and the stud k of the gaget to stop 
the die a in the relation to die.b for allowing 
said die a to bite on the blank in the forward 
movement of the said die, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
wa 
LUCIUS C. PALMER. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN I. LEE, 
THOMAS KERiFEY. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
So 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
K 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299775.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
No. 299,775, 
J. A. GAWITT, 
HARNESs BUCKLE. 
Patented June 3, 1884. 
ag 
 
III ITT 
 
 
 
 
e/ 
2 4-22 2 aaaaa. iS2u 
using 
WITNESSES: 
 
INVENTOR: 
- (Ne/ 
AORNEYS, 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
  
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES ALEXANDER GAVITT, OF WALLAWALLA, WASHINGTON TERRITORY. 
HARNESS - BUCKLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 299,775, dated June 3, 1884. 
Application filed November 26, 1883. 
(No model.) 
IO 
25 
3O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES ALEXANDER 
GAVITT, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Walla Walla, in the county of Walla 
Walla, Washington Territory, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Har 
ness-Buckles, of which the following is a de 
scription. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the outside of the 
buckle applied to the trace. Fig. 2 is a view 
of the opposite side of the same, and Fig. 3 
is a longitudinal section. 
My invention relates to harness-buckles, 
and more particularly to such harness 
buckles as are used at the front end of the 
traces; and it consists in the peculiar con 
struction of the buckle-frame and the means 
for connecting it to the hame-tugs, whereby 
a stronger connection is made and greater fa 
cility afforded for connecting and disconnect 
ing the same, as will be fully described here 
inafter. 
In the drawings, A. represents the buckle 
frame, hollowed out underneath to receive the 
trace B, and having at its sides the usual 
loops, C C, and at its rear end the loop D. At 
the front end of the buckle-frame its two side 
bars are extended forward and connected by 
an end bar, a, having a perforated and rear 
wardly-projecting plate, b, in the middle. 
E is the tug-frame, which is formed of two 
end and two side bars, and has its sides 
curved so as to pass beneath the end bar, a, 
and up through the buckle-frame, and upon 
this end has a downwardly-projecting stud, c, 
that passes through one of the holes in the 
trace and enters the perforation in the plate 
b on the end bar of the buckle-frame. The 
tug-frame E is adapted to connect with the 
hame-tugs, and when the draft-strainisbrought 
on the same the curved side bars of this tug 
frame bear against the end bar, c1, and thus 
relieve the trace of wear and strain, while the 
stud passing through the trace is stiffened and 
braced by the perforated plate b, through 
which the end protrudes. 
55 
The buckle-frame A is cast of malleable 
iron, and is finished without any covering, 
being made of one piece, with the exception 
of the base-bar d on the under side. 
In or-. 
der to permit the buckle-frame to draw from 
the mold, this bar is separately constructed, 
and its ends are set into notches e formed in. 
the under side of the buckle-frame. To hold 
it in place the ends of this bar are formed 
with dovetail notches g, into which pass pro 
jecting spurs f from the notches of the frame, 
which spurs are hammered or riveted down 
into the dovetail notches g in the ends of the 
base-bar. This strengthens the buckle and 
affords a base for the trace to rest against. 
The buckle as thus described is a very cheap 
and strong one, and is easily buckled and un 
buckled. In unbuckling the same the tug 
frame is simply turned back and under the 
buckle-frame A, and this draws the stud out 
of the trace and permits the parts to be dis 
connected. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. The combination, with a buckle-frame, 
A., having end bar, a, of the curved tug-frame 
E, passing under the end bar and up through 
the buckle, and having the stud c, adapted to 
enter the perforations of the trace, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, with the buckle-frame 
A, having loops C C and D and notchese, with 
spurs f, of the separate or independent base 
bar, d, held in said notches and riveted by the 
spurs. as shown and described. 
3. The combination of the buckle-fraine A, 
having loops C C and D and end bar, a, with 
perforated plate. portion, and the tug-frame 
E, curved as described, and having stud c, 
adapted to pass through the trace, and the 
perforated plate beneath, substantially as 
shown and described. 
- 
. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES ALEXANDER GAVITT. 
JACOB M. BOYD, 
JAMIES A. FEE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299875.txt	(No Model.) 
I. L. STONE, 
FOLDING SEAT FOR SCHOOL FURNITURE. 
 
No. 299,875, 
Patented June 3, 1884. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IRVING L. STONE, OF BATTLE CREEK, MICHIGAN. 
FOLDING SEAT FOR SCHOOL FURNTURE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 299,875, dated June 3, 1884. 
Application filed November 1, 1883. (No model.) 
55 
6o 
65 
75 
line, to a point, c, at which point it is curved 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, IRVING L. STONE, of upward to a point, c', the inner end in this 
Battle Creek, county of Calhoun, State of case being closed and the front end open. 
These slots receive and guide the pins or pro 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
jections formed on the seat-supporting bracket, 
ful Improvements in Folding Seats for School 
to be explained. 
Furniture, of which the following is a full and 
The seat-supporting bracket B may be made 
exact description, reference being had to the 
in any usual or preferred form, and is pro 
accompanying drawings, making part of this 
vided on its outer face, or that adjacent to the 
specification, in which 
standard, with two projecting pins or studs, 
Figure 1 is an inner face view of the stand 
did, the one, d, engaging the slot a and the 
ard, showing the seat-supporting bracket ex 
other, d, the slot a', the slot a' and the pin or 
tended. Fig. 2 is a similar view showing the 
studd serving to guide and steady the bracket 
same folded. Fig. 3 is a view of the standard 
during a portion of its movement, or until 
With the seat-supporting bracket and its con 
the pin or stud d shall engage the slot a, in a 
necting-arm removed. Fig. 4 shows a modi 
manner hereinafter explained. The bracket 
fication in the form of a seat wherein the slots 
B is connected to the standard through a suit 
are formed in the bracket and the projections 
able guiding brace or bar, B, pivoted at its 
or pins are formed with the standard, and Fig. 
lower end, D, to the standard and at its up 
5 shows the device with a single groove and 
per end, D', to the bracket, the connections 
slot to accomplish the same end. 
Serving as pivots on which the bracket turns 
My invention relates to that class of seats 
in the movement of the pins or studs through 
in which the rear edge of the seat is raised 
the slots in extending or in folding the seat. 
in folding, and is intended as an improve 
In Fig. 4 a modification is shown in which 
ment upon the seat patented to Uriah Smith, 
the slots are formed in the bracket and the 
and reissued October 8, 1878, No. 8,446, in 
pins or studs are formed on the standard; but 
which four connecting and supporting arms 
the operation of the parts is the same as be 
were employed; and my invention consists in 
a novel manner of connecting the seat-sup 
fore described. 
In the drawings two slots or grooves and 
porting bracket to the standard, whereby the 
pins are shown; but it will be readily seen 
rear supporting-arms are dispensed with, and 
that a single slot and pin may be made to an 
the seat guided and supported by means of 
swer the purpose, and also that slots and pins 
projections and grooves formed in or upon the 
may be used in both standards, if found de 
bracket and standard. 
sirable; and a different arrangement of pins 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
and slots may be employed without depart 
Sents the standard, which may be of any usual 
ing from the spirit or intent of my invention. 
or preferred form or configuration, provided 
When the two brackets and the standard are 
with the usual uprising back, A. 
connected together by means of the usual 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 3 the seat or front por 
wooden slats, it will be seen that the pins are 
tion is shown provided with slots or guide 
held in close working position with the slots, 
Ways a a, the inner one, a, starting at a point, 
and all side movement of the parts effectually 
b, on a line with the upper edge of the seat 
prevented. The slots may extend entirely 
portion, and curving downward and forward 
through the standard or bracket, or may be 
at an angle of ninety degrees (more or less) 
made in the form of grooves, as shall be found 
to a point, b, at which point it curves up 
Ward and forward, substantially as shown, and 
Having now described my invention, I 
having its upper end opened and its frontend 
claim 
closed, for a purpose hereinafter explained. 
1. The combination, with the standards and 
The front slot extends backward from the for 
seat provided with grooves and pins fitting the 
ward face of the standard, in a slightly-curved 
most desirable. 
- 
- 
- 
90 
95 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
2 
299,875 
grooves, substantially as described, of the 
links or braces connecting the standards and 
seat, as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination, with the standards, 
provided with pins fitting the grooves in the 
standards, and links or braces connecting the 
standards and seat, as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
3. The combination, with the standards pro 
5 grooved Substantially as described, of a seat Substantially as and for the purpose set forth. I5 
vided with the grooves or slots opening out 
ward in opposite directions, of the seat pro 
vided with pins fitting the grooves, and links 
or braces connecting the seat and standards, 
IRWING L. STONE. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. HINMAN, 
E. H. PRESTON. 
Io 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0200001-0300000/US299976.txt	(No Model.) 
G. H. G-ALE, 
BOX, FOR MATCHES 
No. 299,976, 
Patented June 10, 1884. 
Fi - l. 
 
WITNESSES: 
a&ze 
-- 
NVENTOR: 
feverage so. 'eosa) 
By his ditorneys, 
a-2, 7, 26.--& 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. G-ALE, OF BAYONNE CITY, NEWJERSEY. 
BOX FOR MATCHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 299,976, dated June 10, 1884. 
Application filed March 14, 1884. (No model.) 
to old, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE. H. GALE, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Bayonne City, Hudson county, New Jersey, 
haveinvented certain Improvementsin Match 
Boxes, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to that class of match 
boxes wherein matches are put up for sale 
and use, and which are usually made from 
paper. 
The particular kind of match-box upon 
Which my improvement is based comprises a 
tubular cover - case open at its ends, and a 
drawer or receptacle to slide into said cover 
CaSe. 
My invention consists in providing said 
drawer with a strip, usually of thinner material 
than that of the drawer and cover-case, which 
is narrower than the drawer, and hinged at 
one end to the end of the drawer. This strip 
extends a little beyond that end of the drawer 
upon which it rests, so that the fingers may 
take under it readily to raise it. The cover 
Case is made a little longer than the drawer, 
SO as to house the projecting end of the hinged 
Strip. 
In the drawings, which serve to illustrate 
my invention, Figure 1 is a perspective view 
of my improved match - box, showing the 
drawer partly drawn out. Fig. 2 is a per 
Spective View of the drawer detached from 
the Cover-case. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sec 
tion of the cover-case, showing the inclosed 
drawer in side elevation. 
A represents the cover-case, which is in the 
nature of a tube with a rectangular section, 
and open at the ends. B is the drawer or 
Slide to contain the matches, which is made a 
little shorter than the case A, and C is a strip 
made narrower than the drawer, hinged at 
One end, a, to one end of the drawer, and con 
Structed to rest at its other end on the oppo 
site end, c, of the drawer. The end b of the 
strip C projects a little beyond the end of the 
drawer, in order to enable one to take under 
it readily with the fingers, so as to lift the 
Strip When the matches are to be removed. 
In match-boxes as usually made, where the 
cover-strip is not attached to the drawer, or 
has its ends merely tucked down into the 
drawer at its ends after the matches are in 
place, the person who fills the drawer and ill 
serts it into the cover-case cannot perform 
these operations as rapidly as he should, ow- 55 
ing in part to the time consumed in tucking 
in the ends of the cover-strip, and in part to 
the necessity of holding down both ends of 
the strip while inserting the drawer, and the 
consumer is also inconvenienced by this loose- 6o 
ness of the strip, and usually discards it at 
O)Ce. 
My invention is designed to obviate these 
inconveniences without enhancing the cost of 
the box. With my box the filler throws over 65 
or open the strip C, places the matches or 
other articles in the drawer, turns the strip 
back, and, grasping the filled drawer between 
his thumb and finger, inserts the end where 
the strip is hinged into the cover-case. This 7, 
is the preferred manner ofinserting the drawer; 
but either end may be inserted by taking hold 
of the drawer at its middle, as this pressure 
will hold the strip C down flat. The user may 
push the drawer out, as indicated in Fig. 
1, and by bending the thin strip C remove 
any quantity of matches desired. When the 
drawer is again pushed in, the strip will be 
closed down to its place. By constructing the 
end b to project a little beyond the wall of the So 
drawer, the fingers may take under it readily, 
and by constructing it to rest on the Wall of 
the drawer it does not drop down into the 
same when the drawer is empty. 
I am aware that match and other boxes have 
been provided with hinged covers, and I do 
not claim this; nor do I claim, broadly, the 
employment of a loose or unattached cover 
strip for the matches. These are all old; but 
What I do claim is- 
A match-bOX comprising a cover-case, A, a 
drawer or slide, B, made shorter than the 
COver-case, and a strip, C, made narrower 
than the drawer B, hinged at one end to the 
Same, and constructed to l'est on and extend 
beyond the opposite end of the drawer, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
85 
9O 
75 
GEORGE H. GAL.E. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY CONNETT, 
ARTHUR C, FRASER. 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300080.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. JACKSON. 
DEWICE FOR PROMOTING COMBUSTION, 
No. 300 
080, 
Patented June 10, 1884. 
. 
: 
WITNESSES 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N7 
g5. 
6776 624, 
INVERTOR 
Attorney 
N. PETERS, Photo-thographe 
, Washingtol. . . 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER MARSH. JACKSON, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE AMERICAN COMBUSTION COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
DEVICE FOR PROMOTING COMBUSTION. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 300,080, dated June io, 1884. 
Application filed March 12, 1884. (No model.) 
IO it appertains to make and use the same. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WALTER M. JACKSON, 
of Providence, in the county of Providence 
and State of Rhode Island, have invented cer 
5 tain new and useful Improvements in Devices 
for Promoting Combustion; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
devices for the promotion of the combustion 
of fuel, the object of my invention being to 
provide a device of this character which shall 
I5. be adapted to conduct a thin sheet or jet of 
Steam enveloped in heated fresh air into and 
upon the ignited surface of a bed of combusti 
ble material, for the purpose of decomposing 
Said steam by being brought in contact with 
2O carbon in an incandescent state and burning 
the gases resulting from such decomposition, 
and thereby promoting combustion by pre 
Venting the escape of the free carbon, the parts 
to be so constructed and arranged that the 
25 products of combustion will be prevented from 
mixing with the steam or air before they issue 
from a common outlet; and with these ends in 
View my invention consists in certain novel 
features of construction and combinations of 
3O parts, as will be hereinafter fully described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
is a view in elevation of my improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical section thereof. Fig. 3 is 
a plan view of the upper and lower ends of 
the tube or air-supply pipe. 
A represents the tube or air-inlet of my in 
proved device, being provided at its upper 
and lower ends with the cross-arms or sup 
4O ports B, said tube being held in position in 
the walls of the fire-box by the nut C. The 
central portion of the bracket B is enlarged 
in cross-section, as shown in Fig. 3, and is pro 
vided with a hole or perforation, a, through 
45 which passes the steam-pipe D, the lower end 
of which extends a short distance beyond the 
lower end of the tube, and is provided with a 
male screw-thread, as shown at b, the said 
steam-pipe D being held in proper position by 
5o a lock-nut, c, fitting on the steam-pipe and 
3. 5 
65 
impinging against the bracket or support B. 
The upper end of the tube A is provided with 
a male screw-thread, d, on which fits the head 
or shell E, preferably of the form shown, the 
curved end of which is provided with an elon- 55 
gated slot, F, through which passes the heated 
air from the tube A. 
To the screw-threaded end of the steam-pipe 
D and within the shell E is secured the nozzle 
G, the lower end of which extends within a 6o 
short distance of the lower end of the shell E, 
said nozzle being provided at its lower end 
with the slot e, registering and running in the 
same direction with the slot F, said slot e be 
ing preferably formed a little slanting. 
My improved device is placed over the burn 
ing fuel, the tube A being connected with the 
fire-box and the pipelD with the boiler, through 
which pipe the steam passes and issues through 
the slot e, which, being made slanting, throws 7O 
the widened jet of steam at an angle on the 
fire. The steam, passing out of the slot in the 
shell E, draws the heated air up through the 
tube A and envelops and passes out with the 
jet of steam. By this construction and ar- 75 
rangement of parts the material products of 
combustion - such as carbonic, sulphurous, 
and phosphorous acids and nitrogen-are pre 
vented from becoming mixed with either the 
steam or heated air before they escape into or 8o 
over the fire through the common outlet, the 
shell Ebeing tightly closed around the tube A. 
Instead of using the tube A, the shellEmight. 
be tightly secured to the fire-pot, and a cement 
ed or packed joint may be made against the 85 . 
inner wall of said pot, to prevent the admix 
ture of the products of combustion with the 
air or steam before they issue from the shell. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters go 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with an air-heating 
tube provided at one end with a shell having 
an elongated air-discharge opening, of a steam 
pipe provided with a discharge-nozzle located 95 
within said shell, said nozzle having an elon 
gated opening formed therein, the opening in 
the steam-nozzle being located in close prox 
imity to the air-discharge opening, the parts 
being constructed and arranged to inject into IOO 
- 
2. 
300,080 
at or near its opposite ends with the centrally- I5 
perforated supports formed integral therewith, 
and the pipe passing through the tubes and 
supports, of the enlarged shell secured to the 
outer end of said tube, and the nozzle secured 
to said pipe and resting within the shell, all of 20 
the above parts combined as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
- 
WALTER MARSHI JACKSON. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. H. SAWYER, 
CHAS. H. JACKSON. 
the fire-box a thin jet of stealm enveloped by 
a thin stratum of heated air and prevent the 
ingress to the shell of the products of combus 
tion, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with an air-heating 
tube provided at one end with a shell forming 
an enlarged air-chamber, said shell having an 
elongated air-discharge opening, of a steam 
pipe provided with a nozzle located within 
the shell, said nozzle being provided with an 
elongated opening located in close proximity 
to the similar shaped opening in the shell, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the tube provided 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300180.txt	(Model.) 
W. C. WILLIAMSON & H, O, FLADWAID, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 300,180. 
STEAM STEERING MECHANISM, 
Patented June 10, 1884. 
 
  
  
Sir2 Zi N 
esses as assed Gr, 
2. 
S-ar 
I 2 NS 
N 
 
 
2. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
wiTNESSE !. 
V 
9%z. 
27s 
NVENTOR 5 
-24-7-6, 4-4-4- 
M 
(Model.) 
as 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. C. WILLIAMSON & H. O. FLADWAD. 
STEAM STEERING MECHANISM. 
No. 300,180. 
Patented June 10, 1884. 
 
WITWESSES 
a 622-2-ee-z-z-e6 
2 ex 
IWWEWTORS 
Caezz7/600 ea-7007 
. . 
. 
- Attorney 
(? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OF ACE. 
WILLIAM. C. WILLIAMSON AND HALVOR O. FLADVAD, OF PHILADELPHIA, 
PA., ASSIGNORS TO WILLIAMSON BROTHERS, OF SAME PLACE. 
STEAM STEERING MECHANISV. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 300,180, dated June 10, 1884. 
Application filed November 14, 1883. (Model.) 
65 
Zo all, whom it inval/ concern. 
Beit known that we, WILLIAMC. WILLIAM 
SON, a citizen of the United States, and HAL 
VOR. O. FLADVAD, of the Kingdom of Sweden, 
5 both residents of the city of Philadelphia, in 
the county of Philadelphia and State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Steam Steering Mechanism, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Io Our invention relates to starting, stopping, 
and reversing the engine of a steam steering 
machine by means of spiral, curved, screw, 
or inclined shifting faces or ends, which fit to 
gether, and operate by opening, closing, or 
I5 reversing the engine-valve, whereby the ship's 
rudder is consequently moved or held station 
alry. 
On reference to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section of 
2O the hand-wheels, drum, and shifting mechan 
ism. Figs. 2 and 3 are views of the faces or 
ends by which the working of the valve is 
accomplished. Fig. 4 is a perspective view of 
the complete machine. Fig. 5 is a detached 
25 view of the shifting faces and accompanying 
parts. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts in the 
A is the housing of the drum-section of the 
3O machine, which in this instance is located in 
the pilot-house, though it may be otherwise 
suitably placed. 
B is a hollow shaft, having a hand-wheel, 
C, fixed to it, and a screw-thread, a, formed 
5 on its exterior, for engaging with a stop-nut, 
D, which moves in a guide, b, to prevent it 
from turning, and thus retainits right-line mo 
tion. A collar, E, of the hollow shaft Ben 
gages with the end c of a lever, F, centered at 
4o d. Through the medium of a rod, G, the 
other end, e, of the lever connects with the 
reverse link or other mechanism, which con 
trols the motion and direction of the engine. 
His the shaft of the supplemental hand-wheel 
45 I and the drum J, which are keyed to it. It 
is journaled at AA, and while revolving with 
the wheel and drum it turns freely and inde 
pendently within the hollow shaft B, which it 
carries. Spiral, curved, screw, orinclined faces 
5of h are formed on the ends of the hollow shaft 
B. Like faces, g i, are made on the adjacent 
faces of the collars or hubs KL, which, being 
fixed to the shaft H, turn simultaneously with 
it. They are made to fit exactly, and have 
the same pitch or inclination. 
When the hollow shaft B is turned in the 
direction of the arrow j by the wheel C, its 
curved end h advancingly presses against the 
spiral face i of the collar L, and the end f and 
the face g give way to the pressure of the cam 
faces h i and permit the hollow shaft B to 
slide along the shaft H in the direction of the 
arrow le. The lever F, partaking of the mo 
tion of the hollow shaft, is turned on its cen 
ter d, and through the connecting-rod G the 
reversing-linkM, Fig. 4, is operated for open 
ing the steam-valve and starting the engine N. 
The power exerted by the engine is transmit 
ted by the wrapping connection O from the 
wheel P to the hand steering-wheel I, and the 7c 
drum J, which works the tiller chains or ropes 
Q for directing the rudder. The hand-wheel 
I, drum J, and hubs or collars KL, being 
fixed to and moving with the shaft H, have a 
simultaneous movement. Therefore, when the 75 
hand-wheel I is turned by the rope O, the col 
lar K turns with it, and while its spiral face 
g presses in a forward direction against the 
spiral end f of the hollow shaft B the spiral 
end h and the face i of the collar I, give way 
in turning to the pressure and allow the hol 
low shaft to slide along the shaft H in the di 
rection of the arrow l. During this reverse 
sliding of the shaft B it is held from turning 
by the person at the wheel C. The lever F, 
partaking of the sliding motion, operates the 
link M by the rod G and gradually closes the 
valve, by which the engine is stopped and the 
rudder held in the required position. 
It is evident that the spiral faces or ends 
operate the valve which controls the admis 
sion of steam to the engine. When they are 
moved by the wheel C, the valve is opened for 
running the engine.over or under, according 
to the direction given to the wheelin turning. 
When they are operated by the auxiliary 
wheel I, they serve to close the valve, shut off 
the steam, and stop the engine when the rud 
der has reached the desired inclination. 
Should the engine break down or become in- IOO 
terrupted in any manner, the auxiliary wheel 
I can be used for steering by hand by throw 
several views. 
a 
. 
55 
90. 
95 
300,180 
faces adapted to contact, as described, with 
collars having cam-faces and operated by the 
tiller-drum, and connections for starting, stop 
ping, and reversing the engine, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. In a stealm steering-machine, the combi 
nation of a hollow shaft, B, having spiral, 
curved, screw, or inclined ends, with a drum 
shaft, H., having like ends or collars, for start 
ing, stopping, or reversing the engine. 
5. In a steam steering-machine, the combi 
nation of a hollow shaft, B, having spiral, 
curved, screw, or inclined ends, a drum-shaft, 
H, having ends or collars, collar E, link F, and 
rod G, for starting, stopping, or reversing the 
driving-engine. 
6. In a steam steering-machine, the combi 
nation of a hollow shaft having spiral, curved, 
screw, or inclined ends, a drum-shaft, H, hav 
ing like ends or collars, a hand-wheel, I, drum 
Q, link F, and rod G, for starting, stopping, 
or reversing the driving-engine. 
35 
45 
WILLIAI C. WILLIAMSON. 
HAL WOR. O. FADVAD. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS D. PASTORIUS, 
JOHN M. SNEYOR. 
ing off the rope O and disconnecting the link 
M. The rotation of the wheel C either way is 
limited by the travel of the nut D in the guide 
b, the length of which is determined by the 
degree of vibration of the rudder. When the 
offsets of the spiral faces of f, Figs. 2 and 3, 
contact, the valve is wide open and the en 
gine is running over or under. 
We do not confine ourselves to the precise 
details of construction as illustrated and de 
scribed, but reserve to ourselves the right to 
change the same in any manner that expe 
rience or necessity may suggest. 
We claim as Otar invention 
1. In a steam steering-machine, sleeves hav 
ing spiral, curved, screw, or inclined end faces 
moved by the steering-wheel and connections, 
and appliances for controlling the motion of 
the steering-engine and governing the rudder, 
substantially for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a steam steering-machine, sleeves hav 
ing spiral, curved, screw, or inclined end faces 
and connected with the engine, and appliances 
connected with the engine for controlling the 
action of the same and governing the rudder, 
substantially for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, in a steam steering 
machine, of a hand-wheel provided with cam 
IO 
I5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300281.txt	 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. QUINAN, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
EXPLOSIVE coM Pou ND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 300,28, dated June 10, 1884. 
Application filed April 27, 1883. (No specimens.) 
25 
2O. 
To all, whom it invay concern: 
be taken up and held by a given weight, of any 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. QUINAN, 
such substance depends on the extent of sur. 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the face exposed. A solid lump will hold only 
city of San Francisco, county of San Francisco, 
the amount which adheres to its surface. If, 
and State of California, have invented certain 
however, the lump be broken into fragments, 
new and useful Improvements in Explosive 
new surfaces are formed, giving with every di. 
Powders, of which the following is a full, clear, 
vision an increasing surface of attraction. 
and exact description, which will enable oth 
Owing to this attraction the particles of nitro 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
glycerine are separated more and more by be 
make and use the same. 
ing made to cover more surface until, if the 
Myinvention relates to that class of detonat 
process of division be carried far enough, the 
ing explosives whichnore orless resemblegun 
nitro-glycerine ceases to give any indication 
powder in their strength and mode of action, 
of its presence as a liquid and loses the prop 
and areknown as low powders, in contradis 
erty of detonation by the ordinary cap. 
The . 
tinction to the stronger grades of detonating 
greater the specific attraction of the substance 
explosives. 
for nitro-glycerine the more rapidly and read 
The object of Iny invention is to make a low 
ily will the extension of the surface bring 
powder which can be readily exploded by the 
about this condition of attenuation. 
ordinary blasting-cap by using a small propor 
The nitrates of soda and potash and the wa 
tion of nitro-glycerine in combination with 
rious other explosive salts used as oxidizin 
otheringredients which form the essential ele 
agents in nitro-glycerine powders belong to 
ments of gunpowder. 
this class of non-porous or non-absorbent sub 
It is a well-established principle that a very 
stances which hold the nitro-glycerine by sur 
small percentage of nitroglycerine will deto 
face attraction. Their specific attraction for 
nitro-glycerine is comparatively strong. . 
nate or cause the sudden conversion into gas 
of gunpowder and analogous mixtures when 
Heretofore in forming high explosive pow 
the nitro-glycerine itself is detonated by the 
ders with nitro-glycerine, these nitrates or 
fulminate-cap. The difficulty to be overcome 
other explosive salts have been pulverized or 
in making a low powder on this principle is to 
reduced to fine particles. Owing to their great 
retain such small percentage of nitro-glycer 
extent of surface in a given weight, these par 
ine in such a state that though distributed in 
ticles will take up and render practically in 
the mixtureit can be readily detonated. When 
explosive the small proportions of nitro 
a small proportion of nitroglycerine is mixed 
glycerine desirable to use in low powders. 
with the pulverized ingredients of gunpowder 
This result, being in all essential respects the 
35 or analogous gas-producing mixtures, it is so 
same as that given by the employment of verita 
taken up and held that the ordinary blasting 
ble absorbents or porous substances, has prob 
cap will not detonate it. 
ably caused the value in the problem of mak 
The substances ordinarily used in forming 
ing low powders of the distinction between the 
with nitro-glycerine the stronger or high-ex 
action of veritable porous absorbents and such 
plosive powders may be classed as porous sub 
non-porous or surface-attracting substances 
stances or absorbents proper and non-porous 
to be hitherto overlooked. Thus, another 
substances, or those which hold the nitro-glyc 
inventor has found a means of counteracting 
erine by surface attraction. The power of 
this so-called absorption of the nitro-glyc 
this surface attraction for nitro-glycerine va 
erine by coating or varnishing the pulverized 
ries with different non-porous or non-absorb 
salts used with some substance having less at 
Some possess it slightly, and 
traction than such salts for the nitro-glycerine. 
ent substances. 
certain oily substances exercise a feeble repul 
I am the first to discover the cause of the fail 
sion. Whatever power of surface attraction 
ureto produce a low powder from the mixture 
a non-porous substance may possess, it is plain 
of such explosive salts and small proportions 
of nitroglycerine-viz., the great extent of loo 
that the amount of nitroglycerine which will 
75 
IO 
4O 
45 
50 
 
300,281 
, IO 
20 
15 
 
surface attraction exercised by the salts in the 
pulverized condition, and the remedy for this 
so-called absorption without changing the 
character of the surface-viz., to lessen its ex 
5 tent by employing the salts in the form of 
larger masses or grains. 
The carbonaceous ingredient or ingredients 
or the element which, in the explosion, fur 
mishes the carbon or hydrogen, or both,to unite 
with the oxygen of the nitrate or other explo 
sive salt, may be one or several of a great va 
riety of substances. For the purposes of my 
invention it should be essentially non-porous. 
To diminish as much as possible the surface, I 
generally employ a granular form, and by 
preference a spherical grain, as giving less sur 
face than any other. As the nitrate or other 
explosive salt properly forms more than two 
thirds of the mixture,its conditionis of greater 
importance than that of any other element. 
If its condition is such as to leave the nitro 
glycerine free when the two are mixed, it is 
easy to find a carbonaceous element suffi 
ciently non-absorbent to be added in properly 
small proportion to the mixture without de 
stroying the susceptibility of the nitro-glycer 
ine to detonation by the cap. Almost any 
... hard or dense form of carbon or hydrocarbon 
will fulfill this condition. 
3o. The following is a typical example of my 
invention: Unground nitrate of soda or cubic 
miter is taken in the crystallized commercial 
form and run through a sieve having twelve 
meshes to the linear inch. Of the crystals or 
grains which pass through the sieve, I mix 
sixty-seven parts, by weight, with fifteen and 
one-half parts rape-seed and five parts nitro 
glycerine. If the nitrate of soda has absorbed 
moisture, it should be dried before using. The 
order in which the ingredients are mixed is 
immaterial, though it is more convenient to 
add the nitro-glycerine last. After all the 
materials are in, thorough mixing can be ob: 
tained by running them through a coarse 
For the nitrate of soda any other explosive 
salt that can be used as an oxidizing agent 
such as the nitrate of potash, of baryta, of 
lead, &c.--maybe substituted. The nitrate of 
soda is to be preferred, on account of its cheap 
ness and the greater regularity of its granu 
lation in the crystal form. If any part of it 
... should be pulverized by accidental attrition 
or otherwise, the dust should preferably be 
55 sifted on 
sifted out before it is passed through the sieve. 
For the rape-seed any other form or forms 
of non-porous carbon or hydrocarbon may be 
... substituted-such as coal-screeningsfreed from 
dust and run through a sieve, like the nitrate 
6o of soda, mustard-seed, granulated resin, or 
...asphaltum, &c. The purer forms of carbon 
or hydrocarbon are best; but the presence of 
small amounts of oxygen, as in resin, will not 
seriously impede the explosive reaction. The 
65 proportions of nitrate or other explosive salt 
and the carbonaceous element should be ad-l 
45 sieve. 
35 
. . . 
- 
. 
justed by the chemical composition of the lat 
ter. There should be enough oxygen fur 
nished by the nitrate or explosive salt to ox 
idize the carbon to carbonic acid and the hy- 7o 
drogen to water. To make powders of various 
degrees of quickness and strength, the per 
centage of nitroglycerine may vary from one 
to ten. In making the powders, it should be 
borne in mind that the nitro-glycerine should 75 
be so well distributed and securely held that 
there is no danger of leakage, and at the same . 
time it should remain free enough to be readily 
detonated-that is, the powders should not be 
wet, neither should they be too dry. The 8o 
meshes of the sieve through which the nitrate. 
of soda or explosive salt is passed may vary 
in size from that given above, as greater or 
less proportions of nitro-glycerine are designed 
to be employed. The finer the grains of ni- 85 
trate of soda, the more, nitro-glycerine they 
will take up. For larger proportions of nitro 
glycerine the finer sieves may therefore be 
used for the nitrate; or the carbonaceous in 
gredient may be wholly or partly pulverized. 9o 
For smaller proportions of nitro-glycerine, 
coarser sieves may be used for the nitrate or 
explosive salt. The proper combinations of 
these alternatives will enable the powder 
maker to produce a variety of low powders, 95 
each having its special application in blasting, 
and all of which are safe against leakage of the 
nitro-glycerine and susceptible to the action 
of the cap. 
In making the powder, the unground crys 
tallized nitrate may be used efficiently with 
Regularity 
out passing it through the sieve. 
of granulation, though desirable, is not essen 
For the purposes of this invention, the 
granulation of the nitrate or other explosive 
salt used, and even of certain forms of carbon, 
may be effected by fusing each separately and 
running it through a sieve, or by other means. 
For convenience, the crystallized form of the 
nitrate is to be preferred. 
The essence of my invention consists in 
utilizing the principle of surface attraction. 
Without changing the character of the sur 
face of the substances holding the nitro-glycer 
ine, I lessen its extent by using the nitrate 
or explosive salt in masses large enough to 
leave the nitro-glycerine free to be readily de 
tonated. 
this: The nitrate, being in the form of grains, is 
less liable to injury by deliquescence. More 
over, the nitro-glycerine, having less surface 
to cover, acts more efficiently as a coating im 
pervious to moisture. To takefull advantage I25 
of this, it is well to add the nitro-glycerine to 
the nitrate and mix it thoroughly before the 
other ingredients are put in. 
Its other ad 
vantages are its sensitiveness to the cap, cheap 
ness, and the small amount of labor required 13o 
in making it. 
Among the advantages of my invention is I2O 
This application is a division of my appli. 
IO5 
II5 
OO 
tial. 
Cy 
. 
- 
 
3 
cation No. 43,786, on which a Patent No. untriturated small masses, grains, or crystals, 
260,786 was granted to me for one species of the unpulverized ingredients remaining as 
the invention July 11, 1882. 
separate grains in the mixture, substantially 
300,281 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let- as described. 
A low-explosive powder composed of a 1883. 
5ters Patent, is- 
Dated San Francisco, California, April 20, 15 
small proportion of nitroglycerine, carbona- 
ceous material, either pulverized or in the 
form of non-porous small masses or grains, 
Io and an explosivesalt in the form of non-porous 
Witnesses: 
JoHN.A. WRIGHT, 
CHAS. D. WHEAT. 
WILLIAM R. QUINAN. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300381.txt	(No Model. ) 
H. C. LUTHER 
MANUFACTURE OF GLASS JEWELS 
No. 300,381, 
Patented June 17, 1884. 
W77VA.A.A.A.A.' 
, 
% 247224 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. LUTHER, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
MANUFACTURE OF GLASS JEWELS. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 300,381, dated June 17, 1884. 
y 
Application filed March 20, 1884. . No model.) 
upon the upward movement of the sliding head 
B the inner portion, E, of the lower die will 
be raised by means of the pin (t, as shown in 
Fig. i., from which position the projecting edge 
of the jewel may be inclosed by the groove G 
of the jaws b b of the tongs, as shown in Fig. 
2, and then removed from the die E, either for 
the purpose of cooling the glass jewel or for 
fire-finishing the surface of the same. 
Heretofore in the manufacture of such glass 
jewels the jewel, after being formed in the 
dies, has been still retained attached to the 
glass rod, and as the jewel requires a consid 
erable length of time to cool to the required 
degree of hardness to bear handling and con 
tact with its fellows, the glass bar from which 
the jewels are to be formed will be kept from 
the furnace for a long time, thus entailing a 
loss of heat; whereas with my improvement 
the glass bar may be removed to the furnace 
upon the instant of the closing of the dies, and 
while the bar is being held in the furnace and 
manipulated by the left hand of the operator 
the tongs heid in the right hand may be used 
to remove the jewel, and to hold it while cool 
ing or while the same is being fire-polished. 
Thus the heat of the furnace may be utilized 
to a greater degree than heretofore, and a 
greater number of jewels may be turned out 
by the operator in a given time. 
The jaws b b of the tolags are intended to 
hold the jewel loosely, so as not to distort the 
same when removed from the die while in a 
highly plastic condition. 
I claim as my invention 
The improvement in the manufacture of 
glass jeweis, which consists in the combination 
of the upper die and the lower die, made in two 
parts, and means for Operating the same, sub 
stantially as described, with the tongs pro 
vided with the groovedjaw's adapted to remove 
the jewel in a plastic condition from the ele 
wated inner portion of the lower die without 
danger of distortion, substantially as described. 
HENRY C. LUTHER. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN S. LYNCH, 
SOCRATES SCHOLFIELD. 
55 
So 
85 
90 
O 
To add ition it invity concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY C. LUTHER, of 
Providence, in the State of Rhode Island, have 
invented an Improvement in the Mianufacture 
of Glass Jewels, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
improved construction of the dies and tongs 
for pressing the jewels, and for holding the 
same while cooling, or for fire-finishing, as 
lhereinafter Set forth. 
Figure I is a vertical section of the press 
employed for pressing the jewels from melted 
glass. Fig. 2 is a detail view showing a front 
15 elevation of the die-holder and a vertical sec 
tion of the lower portion of the die and the 
jewel-lifting tongs. Fig. 3 is a detail view 
showing the upper and lower dies as closed 
upon each other to form a jewel. Fig. 4 is an 
edge elevation of a jewel. Fig. 5 shows a plan. 
view of the tongs for removing the jewel from 
the die. 
Fig. 6 represents a section taken in 
the line ic ic of Fig. 5. 
In the accompanying drawings, A is the 
frame of the press; B, the sliding head, which 
serves to carry the upper die, C. The lower 
die is made in two parts, of which D is the 
fixed exterior, and Ethe movable interior, por 
tion, whicla is operated up and down in timely 
relation to the up-and-down movement of the 
die C by means of the pivoted lever F and rod 
G, which connects at its lower end with a 
The inner portion, E, of the die is 
treadle. 
made to rise from the outer polition, D, by 
means of the pin (, secured to the connecting 
bar G, which serves to elevate the portion E 
upon the arrival of the die Cat its upper limit 
of movement, as shown in Fig. 1. The tongs 
Fi, for relinoving the icwel from the die E, are 
provided with the two jaws b b, having a 
groove, c, adapted to receive the edge of the 
jewel, as shown in Fig. 6. 
In the manufacture of the glass jewels, the 
heated end of the glass rod is to be placed be 
45 tween the upper and lower dies. Then a Sud 
den downward movement inaparted to the die 
C will bring the dies together, with the heated 
glass between them, as shown in Fig. 3, and 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300481.txt	(No Model.) 
J. KINZER, 
No. 300,481, 
SAND SIFTING MACHINE, 
Patented June 17, 1884, 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
... peters, phic-Lithographer, Washirgor. 
IN VENTOR. 
By 4. rot & 
4tzz/ F. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB KINZER, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SAND-SIFTING MACHINE. 
3PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 300,48, dated June 7, 1884. 
Application filed arch 21, 1SS4. (No model.) 
O 
To all Zwho, it inctly concer'7, it 
Beit known that I, JACOB KINZER, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Pittsburg, 
in the county of Allegheny and State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented or discovered certain 
new and useful Improvements in Sand-Sifting 
Machines, of which improvement the follow 
ing is a specification. 
In the accompanying drawings, which make 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a view 
in side elevation of my improved sifting-ma 
chine, the screen being shown in operative 
position. Fig. 2 is a similar view, the screen 
being disconnected from the oscillating mech 
anism. Fig. 3 is a detail view, on an en 
larged scale, of the screen-oscillating end of 
the bell-crank lever. Fig. 4 is a top plan view 
of a portion of my machine. 
MIy invention relates to that class of ma 
chines which are used in foundries for sifting 
or Screening the Sand to be subsequently used 
in forming molds; and the object of my inven 
tion is to SO construct such a machine that it 
will be simple but effective, and may be easily 
put into and out of operation; and to this end 
my invention consists, in general terms, in the 
construction and combinations of parts, all as 
more fully hereinafter described and claimed. 
On a Suitable foundation on the floor of the 
foundry are secured two uprights or standards, 
I, provided at their upper ends with horizon 
tal arms 2, in the outer ends of which are 
formed the vertical notched projections 3. 
In the notches of the projections 3 are placed 
the bearing or pivotal ends 4 of the stirrup 5, 
provided with the horizontal depressed por 
tion. 
On the sides of screen 7, a short distance in 
front of their middle portions, are secured the 
plates 6, provided with notches at their lower 
ends, said notches being adapted to fit over 
the horizontal depressed portion of the stir 
rup 5. 
To the rear end of the screen 7 is secured 
the loop S, by which the screen is connected 
to the operative end of the bell-crank lever 9. 
This bell-crank lever is pivoted to the brackets 
10, which are bolted to the rear edges of the 
Standards 1 at Such a height as to bring the 
operative end of the bell-crank lever in line 
with the loop S when the screen is in a hori 
Zontal position, as shown in Fig. 1. The oper 
ative end ill of the lever 9 is provided with 
the curved notch 12, and the horizontal arms 
13 and 14 are provided at their outer ends 
with the turned-up portions 15. The horizon 
tal arm 14 is made somewhat higher than the 
arm 13, thereby forming the hook or prong 
16 at one side of the notch 12. The other 
end, 17, of the bell-crank lever 9 is pivotally 
connected to the lower end of the connecting 
rod 18, the upper end of the l'od being at 
tached to the strap 19 of the eccentric 20, se 
cured to any suitable power-shaft. 
To the rear end of the screen is attached 
one end of the cord or rope 24, which passes 
up and over the pulley 21, secured to a bean 
above the screen, and the free end of the cord 
is attached to a weight, 22, of sufficient size 
to automatically raise the rear end of the Screen 
when empty. 
In place of the above-described device, I may 
secure a spring to the horizontal arms 2, the 
free end of the spring being arranged to bear 
against the under side of the rear end of the 
screen, or against a projection from the side 
of the screen, as shown by dotted lines in 
Figs. 1 and 2. 
The operation of the above-described ma 
chine is as follows: When the Screen is empty, 
it is held in the position shown in Fig. 2 by 
the weight 22; but when sand or other mate 
rial is thrown into the rear portion of the 
screen the weight of the sand will cause the 
screen to take a horizontal position, as shown 
in Fig. 1. As the screen turns, the loop S Will 
drop into one of the horizontal arms of the bell 
crank lever, which is continuously oscillated 
If the loop 8 should drop 
by the eccentric 20. 
into the arm 13, it will on first movement of 
the operative end of the lever to, the right 
strike against the hook 16 and be forced into 
the notch 12; but if the loop should drop on 
the arm 14 a movement of the operative end of 
the lever to the left and then to the right will 
be necessary before the loop will be caught in 
the notch 12. During the movement to the 
left the loop will slide from the arm 14 into the 
arm 13, and during the succeeding movement 
to the right the loop will be caught in the 
notch 12, as above described. As soon as the 
loop is caught in the notch 12, the screen will 
be swung back and forth by the bell-crankle 
ver. As long as a sufficient quantity of Sand 
50 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
300,481 
is kept in the screen to counterbalance the 
weight 22, the loop will be kept in the notch 
12; but as soon as the sandis removed from the 
Screen it will be automatically disengaged from 
its operating mechanism by the weight 22 or 
its equivalent, the spring above described lift 
ing the rear nd of the screen, and thereby 
disengaging the loop from the notch during 
the movement of the operative end of the le 
wer to the left. 
It will be noticed that the screen can be 
readily lifted and removed from its supports 
and Oscillating mechanism if it is desirable to 
do so for any purpose. 
Another characteristic feature of my ma 
chine is in having the bearings for the bell 
crank lever secured to the standards which 
support the screen, thus preventing an Oscilla 
tion of the standards when the machine is in 
operation, for when the operative end of the le 
verispulling one way its bearings will be push 
ing in a contrary direction, and vice versa. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. In a sand-sifting machine, the Swinging 
Stirrup 5 and standards for supporting Said 
stirrup, in combination with the screen 7, hav 
ing notched plates secured to its sides forward 
of its center, and adapted to fit over and on 
Said stirrup, and mechanism for imparting a 
reciprocating longitudinal movement to the 
screen, substantially as set forth. 
2. in a sand-sifting machine, the Swinging 
stirrup and standards for supporting the stir 
rup, in combination with the screen 7, resting 
on the stirrup, the bell-crank lever 9, having 
one of its arms connected to the Screen, and 
mechanism attached to its opposite end for im 
parting motion to the lever, substantially as 
Set forth. 
3. In a sand-sifting machine, the screen 7, 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
swung in suitable bearings and provided with 
the loop 8, in combination with the bell-crank 
lever 9, having the curved notch 12, and mech 
anism for operating said lever, Substantially 
as set forth. 
4. In a sand-sifting machine, the screen 7, 
swung in suitable bearings and provided with 
the loop 8, in combination with the bell-crank 
lever 9, having at one of its ends the horizon 
tal arms 13 and 14, located in different hori 
Zontal planes, and the curved notch 12, and 
mechanism for operating said lever, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. In a sand-sifting machine, the screen 7, 
pivotally swung in suitable bearings and pro 
vided with the loop 8, in combination with 
the oscillating bell-crank lever 9, having the 
curved notch 12, and mechanism for auto 
matically disconnecting the loop and lever, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. In a sand-sifting machine, the screen 7, 
pivotally swung in Suitable bearings, in com 
bination with the oscillating bell-crank lever, 
said lever and screen being detachably con 
nected, and mechanism for automatically dis 
connecting the screen and lever, substantially 
as set forth. 
7. In a sand-sifting machine, the screen 7, 
pivotally swung in suitable bearings and pro 
vided with the loop 8, in combination with the 
oscillating bell - crank lever 9, having the 
curved notch 12, the cord 20, pulley 21, and 
weight 22, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto Set 
my hand. 
s 
JACOB KINZER. 
Witn esses: 
DARWIN S. WolCOTT, 
R. H. WHITTLESEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300581.txt	(No Model.) 
 
W. H. DOLMAN, 
FIRE PROOF BUILDING, 
Patented June 17, 1884. 
 
INVENTOR; 
% /Zeated 
ATTORNEYs, 
N. FETERS, Photo-Luthographer. Washington, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM H. DOLMAN, OF BRUNSWICK, MISSOURI. 
FIRE PRO OF BUD NG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 300,581, dated June 17, 1884, 
Application filed February 15, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
15 
23 
2 5 
To it, it foil, it Fictif concer'72: 
banked with the bodies H of dry non-inflam 
Beit known that I, WILLIAA. H. DOLMAN, 
mable material, held in place by the vertical 
of Brunswick, in the county of Chariton and 
boards I, which are nailed to the corner-cleats 
State of Missouri, have invented a new and 
a', so as to form spaces to receive the non 
Improved Fire-Proof Building, of which the 
inflammable material, and the bridging or 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. 
braces C C are surrounded by the bodies J, of 
This invention relates to certain improve 
non-inflammable material, held in place by 
ments on Letters Patent No. 2S6,401, which 
the narrow boards KK, nailed to the cleats 
were granted to me October 9, 1883; and it con 
a". The lower edges of the boards G IK do 
sists of the application of ashes, dry earth, or 
not reach down to the sheet-metal ceiling E, 
other non-inflammable material for protecting 
but reach slightly into the layer F of ashes 
the joists and other wood-work of buildings 
placed upon said ceiling, so that the vertical 
from fire, as hereinafter described and claimed. 
bodies F. H. J of ashes will join the hori 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
Zontal layer F of ashes, as shown in Fig. 2, 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
thus making the banking of the joists and 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
braces or bridging C with non-inflammable 
responding parts in all the figures. 
material complete; and it is designed in some 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the upper edges of 
instances to incline the boards G IK, making 
three wooden joists of a brick building, show 
them to stand farther away from the joists, 
ing my improved method of banking them and 
walls, and braces at their lower edges than at 
their braces or bridging with ashes, dry earth, 
their upper edges, so that the ashes or non-in 
or similar non-inflammable material. Fig. 2 is 
flammable material confined by them will be 
a sectional elevation of two of the joists banked 
given free opportunity to settle in case of any 
according to my invention, and showing my 
shifting of the layer F of ashes, thus avoiding 
improved double floor and the sheet-metal 
all danger of any break or opening being formed 
ceiling, the section being taken on the liney y 
between the vertical and horizontal borders of 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a similar yiew taken on 
non-inflammable material to expose the wood 
taken on the line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 shows 
work. The floor ID is made double of the in 
the method of boxing the water-pipes to pre 
ner false floor, d, and the outer main floor, d, 
vent any leakage or condensation that may oc 
supported upon the cleats.f, and the space be 
cur from wetting the ashes or dry earth used 
tween the outer and inner floors, dd, forained 
in banking the joists and sheet-metal ceiling, 
by the interposed cleats f, is filled with the 
and Fig. 5 is a detailed sectional plan view of 
layer L of ashes, dry earth, or other non-in 
a portion of one of the joists and walls taken 
flammable material, so that the false floor d. 
on the line & 3 of Fig. 2. 
and the joists, bridging, and other work be 
A. A represent the wooden joists; BB, the 
neath the floor d are perfectly protected from 
brick walls in which the ends of the joists are 
any fire that may occur upon the main outer 
held. CC represent the bridging or braces of 
floor, d'. The plates of sheet metal composing 
the joists. D represents the floor, and Erep 
the sheet-metal ceiling E are lap-jointed at 
resents the sheet-metal ceiling secured to the 
their edges, as shown at b, Figs. 2 and 3, so 
lower edges of thejoists Alby nails or otherwise. 
that no water can penetrate to the layer F of 
The sheet-metal ceiling E is covered with a 
dry non-inflammable material in case the 
thin layer, F, of ashes or other non-inflamma 
stream of water from a fileman's hose should 
blematerial or dry earth, substantially the same 
be turned toward the ceiling E, and the water 
as in my above-mentioned patent, and the 
pipes M, when they pass through the ceiling 
sides of the joists A are banked upon both sides 
and floor, will have the metallic casingN placed 
with the thin bodies F of ashes or dry earth. 
around them, as shown in Fig. 4, which will 
prevent any water resulting from leakage or 
held in place in contact with the sides of the 
joists by the narrow vertical boards G-G, nailed 
condensation from coming in contact with the 
to the cleats a c, tacked to the sides of the 
dry non-inflammable material. In this man 
joists, as shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings. 
ner it will be seen that the joists at their ends 
The walls B B between the joists A. A. are where they enter the Wall and throughout 
55 
65 
7 5 
So 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
300,58. 
3. The bridging or braces C of the joists 
banked with non-inflammable material J, held 
in place by the boards K, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
4. The horizontal body of non-inflammable 
material placed upon the metallic ceiling E, in 
combination with vertical bodies, of non-in 
flammable material banking the joists, bridg 
ing, &c., and held in place by boards held 
slightly above the ceiling E, whereby the ver 
tical and horizontal bodies of non-inflamma 
ble material are made to join, Substantially as 
described. 
5. The water-pipe M, having the boxing N 
placed around it where it passes through the 
ceiling E and floor D to prevent water from 
coming in contact with the non-inflammable 
material, substantially as described. 
WM. H. DOLMAN. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. WEST, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
25 
35 
5 
IO 
their entire length, and then the bridging of 
the joists, are thoroughly banked in non-in 
flammable material, so that they are perfectly 
protected against any fire that may occur in 
the rooms above or below, and that the non-in 
flammable materialis SO arranged that no open 
ings can occur to expose the Wood-work to heat, 
and that there is no danger of water coming in 
contact with the non-inflammable material to 
leak through and soil the wails or shift the 
non-inflammable material. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The joists A, banked upon either side 
with the non-inflammable material F, held in 
place by the boards G, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The joists A, banked at their ends by the 
non-inflammable material H, held against the 
walls B by the boards I, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300682.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 300,682, 
 
J. A. BLANKLEY, 
INCASED OIL CAN, 
Patented June 17, 1884, 
foLIN HS 
wX 
wiTNesses: 
a C-Qur' 
6%.4 
N. reeRS, photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A. BLANKLEY, OF BELLAIRE, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO CHARLES H. 
TALLMAN, OF SAME PLACE. 
NCASED O L- CAN. 
y 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 300,682, dated June 17, 1884. 
A 
Application filed February 26, 1884. 
(No model.) 
55 
55 
75 
O 
15 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES A. BLANKLEY, 
of Bellaire, in the county of Belmont and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Incased Oil-Cans; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full 
and exact description of the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
In incased glass vessels as now manufac 
tured the upper edge of the jacket is wired in 
Such a Way that an upwardly-projecting eye or 
loop is formed in the wire to which the hooked 
ends of the bail-wire are attached. To wire 
this top and form the eye or loop before men 
tioned is a matter of considerable labor and 
expense, and requires several manual and ma 
chine operations. 
To lessen this labor and expense is the pur 
pose of my invention, which consists, princi 
pally, in Separate ears or lugs of a special con 
struction for the bail, inserted from the inside 
through opposite walls of the jacket, and which 
are not only held in proper position by the 
glass vessel, but serve, in part or wholly, to 
hold the glass vessel in its position in the 
jacket. 
For the better understanding of my inven 
tion reference should be had to the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a top view of an incased glass 
vessel with the lugs or ears in position after 
the glass vessel is fully inserted; Fig. 2, a ver 
tical central section of the same with the glass 
vessel partly inserted, with the lugs or ears in 
the position which they then assume; Fig. 3, 
the blank for the lugs or ears as cut in the 
first instance, and Fig. 4 the lug or ear as fin 
ished by a subsequent operation. Fig. 5 is a 
vertical section on the line acac of Fig. 2. 
Similar letters denote corresponding parts 
in each figure. 
In the drawings, A. represents the glass ves 
sel, and B the incasing-jacket, and a the up 
per edge of the same. Slits or openings b 
are made in the Walls of the jacket, near the 
upper edge of the same, through which ears 
or lugs C are inserted from within after the 
jacket is completed. These ears or lugs are 
. So made from small scraps of sheet metal--such 
as tin, for instance-which would otherwise 
4O 
45 
35 
be thrown away as worthless. From Such 
pieces of scraps a blank is cut out by a proper 
die, in form like that shown in Fig. 3, with a 
body, c, and a neck, c, and an opening, c', 
for attachment of the bail-wire. By a Subse 
quent operation and by a proper die the blank 
is finished, as shown in Fig. 4, with the neck 
bent out at about right angles with the body 
for a short distance, and thenbent again nearly 
at right angles and in a direction opposite to 
that of the body. When these ears or lugs 
thus finished have their necks c' inserted in 
the slits b, the size of the body c preventing 
the passage of the same through the slit, and 
the weight of the body overbalancing the 
weight of the neck, the body hangs down in a 
vertical position, and close to the inner walls 
of the jacket, while the neckpoints upwardly. 
The glass vessel is inserted from below into 
the jacket, and the operator pressing the same 
npwardly, the upper shoulders of the vessel 
pass over the bodies c of these ears, and press 
and hold the same closely to the inner Walls 
of the jacket, and between such walls and the 
outer walls of the glass vessel. Thereby said 
ears are not only held firmly in the proper 
position with the neck c' pointing upward, 
but by the wedging action of the glass vessel 
upon these ears or lugs the glass vessel is 
more firmly held within the jacket. The up 
per edge of the jacket needs no wiring, as 
there is little or no strain upon it, and simply 
rolling over the edge in the usual way will be 
found sufficient. To these lugs the hooked 
ends of the bail D are attached in the usual 
way. The bottom of the jacket may be pro 
tected simply by Wiring; or there may be a 
metal bottom; or the glass vessel may be se 
cured in position above the bottom of the 
jacket in any desirable way-as, for instance, 
by securing a horizontal Wire or strip of metal 
or portions of the same around the inner wall 
or portions of the inner wall of the jacket in 
contact with the bottom of the glass vessel af. 
ter it is in position, or by securing one or more 
vertical wires or portions of metal, upon the 
inner wall of the jacket, with the upper end 
or ends of the same in contact with the bottom 
of the glass vessel, the latter means being 
shown by d in Fig. 5 of the drawings. 
| The economy as well as efficiency of my im 
- 3O 
95 
IOO 
2 
300,682 
Having thus described my invention, what same upon the inside of the jacket, and be. I5 
provement is too obvious to require particular and an incasing-jacket for the same having a 
mention. 
slot, b, of the ears C, with the body c of the 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters tween said jacket and the incased vessel, and 
the neck c' extending out through the slot b, 
Patent, is- 
1. The lugs or ears C, having a body, c, and substantially as and for the purposes described. 
neck c', in combination with the jacket B, 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
having a slit, b, the lugs or ears being ar- presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES A. BLANKLEY. 
ranged with the neck outside of the jacket, 
and the body inside of the same, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
2. The combination, with an incased vessel 
O 
Witnesses: 
C. H. TALLMAN, 
D. W. COOPER. 
 
. . . . . . 
. 
. 
. .-sars 
It is hereby certified that Letters Patent No. 300,682, granted June 17, 1884, upon 
the application of James A. Blankley, of Bellaire, Ohio, for an improvement in Incased 
Oil-Cans, was erroneously issued to Charles H. Tallman, of same place, as assignee 
of the entire interest in Said invention; that said Letters Patent should have been 
issued to the said James A. Blankley and Charles H. Tallman, as joint owners; and that 
the patent should be read with this correction therein to make it conform to the record 
of the case in the Patent Office. 
- 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 24th day of June, A. D. 1884. 
e 
M. L. JOSLYN, 
Acting Secretary of the Interior. 
SEAL. 
Countersigned: 
BENJ. BUTTERWORTH, 
Commissioner of Patents. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300782.txt	(No Model.) 
W. KOCH 
CASTER, 
No. 300,782, 
Patented June 24, 1884. 
777 Zea. 29. 
ZZG.3 
. 3. 
77 
 
 
 
  
 
 
'S WZ5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM KOCH, OF LAWRENCEBURG, INDIANA. 
CASTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 300,782, dated June 24, 1884. 
Application filed March 3, 1884, (No model.) 
Figs. 1 and 2 show the groove and tongue as 65 
In Fig. 5 the caster Alis shown as provided 7o 
to all whom it mazy concern, 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM KOCH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Law 
renceburg, in the county of Dearborn and 
State of Indiana, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Furniture-Cast 
ers, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had therein to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
This invention relates to those furniture 
casters or rollers which are provided with in 
dia-rubber tires; and my improvement con 
SistS in Such a construction of Said devices as 
Will prevent the elastic tire shifting either lat 
erally or circumferentially of the wheel or 
caster proper. This result is accomplished by 
providing the wheel, caster, or roller with a 
circumferential groove or grooves and a series 
of longitudinal slots that communicate with 
said groove and extend outwardly to the op 
posite sides of said wheel. The elastic tire is 
furnished with an inwardly-projecting tongue 
that enters the circumferential groove, and a 
Series of internal ribs or flanges that engage 
with the above-described longitudinal slots, 
by which arrangement said tire is securely an 
chored in place, as hereinafter more fully ex 
plained, and set forth in the claim. 
In the annexed drawings, Figures I and 2 
are axial Sections of the two component mem 
bers of my caster detached from each other. 
Fig. 3 is a similar section of the complete cast 
er. Figs. 4 and 5 show modified forms of the 
circumferential groove. Fig. 6 is a section 
ized side elevation of the wheelor casterproper. 
Fig. 7 is a side elevation of the complete caster. 
The roller, wheel, or caster proper, A, 
which may be of any suitable material and 
size, according to the use to which it is to be 
applied, is grooved circumferentially at B and 
bored at C, said bore C being designed to ad 
mit the axle, pintle, or other bearing. This 
groove B, which may be of any desired size 
and shape, is adapted to receive a rib, flange, 
or tongue, D, projecting from the inner pe 
riphery of the elastic or yielding tire, rim, or 
band E. Said rim is preferably composed of 
india-rubber, both on account of the economy 
of construction and facility of application; but 
the invention is not restricted to such mate 
rial. 
that the rim or tire E is somewhat less in di 
ameter than the caster A, and as a result of 
this arrangement the former hugs the latter. 
very closely when said members A and E are 55 
united, as seen in Fig. 3. This union is ef. 
fected by simply distending the tire, and then 
allowing it to contract around the caster, care 
being taken, however, to have the flange or 
rib D seat itself within the groove B. It is 
evident the tongue and groove now prevent 
lateral shifting of the tire, and thus obviate 
the necessity of cementing together these two 
component members A B and D E. 
being rectangular in transverse section; but in 
Fig. 4 said groove is represented as being un 
dercut at its sides, so as to allow the tongue to 
anchor therein. 
with a pair of semicircular grooves to receive 
the correspondingly-shaped tongues of the rim 
or tire. 
It is evident either of the above-described 
circumferential grooves will prevent the elas- 75 
tic tire E moving laterally or toward the 
side of wheel A; but some provision must be 
made for holding said tire so that it will not 
shift around the wheel. To guard against this 
last-mentioned contingency, the wheel Amust 
have a series of longitudinal slots, F, made in 
its face, as seen in Fig. 6, said slots being ar 
ranged to communicate with the circumferen 
tial groove or grooves, and the tire must be 
provided with a corresponding number of in 
wardly-projecting ribs, adapted to enter Said 
longitudinal slots, as represented in Fig. 7. 
Now, as the circumferential groove B and 
tongue D prevent the tire moving laterally of 
wheel A, and as the longitudinal slots F and 90 
the ribs entering the same retain said tire so 
that it will not shift around the periphery of 
the wheel, it is apparent the elastic member D 
E is securely anchored, and cannot be disen 
gaged from its proper place except by a force 95 
sufficient to destroy said elastic member. 
Finally, thetire may be cast around the wheel, 
if desired. 
I am aware it is not new to provide furni 
ture-casters with circumferential grooves to 
prevent lateral motion of the rubber tires, as 
Furthermore, reference to Fig.2 shows this construction is seen in several patents; but 
O 
5 
45 
IOO 
2 
300,782 
I know of no instance where longitudinal D, that engages with said circumferential 
grooves or slots have been arranged to prevent groove B, whereby the elastic tire is securely 
the tire shifting around the periphery of the anchored in place, and is prevented shifting 15 
wheel, and therefore my claim is expressly either laterally or peripherally of said wheel, 
Intestimony whereof I affix my signature in 
I claim as my invention- 
The combination, in a furniture-caster, of presence of two witnesses. 
as herein described. 
5 limited to this feature. 
wheel A, having a series of longitudinal slots, 
F, comiunicating With the circumferentiai 
Io groove B, and the rubber tireE, provided with 
a set of internal ribs, that enter said longitudi- 
nal slots, and an inwardly-projecting tongue, 
WILLIAM KOCH. 
Witnesses: 
ANTON SCHNEIDER, 
HENRY RUSSE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300883.txt	(No Model.) 
A, DE LANCEY MIDDLETON, 
RICE DRILL, 
 
No. 300,883 
Patented June 24, 1884. 
WITNESSEs 
42.7%z 
4 asy ref> 
INVENTOR: 
Z-CZ2 
Mulviv e 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR DE LANCEY MIDDLETON, OF CHARLESTON, SOUTH CAROLINA. 
RICE-DRILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 300,883, dated June 24, 1884. 
Application filed February 12, 1884. (No model.) 
15 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
and project downward and toward the front, 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR DE LANCEY and on the lower end of each arm a shoe, K, 
MIDDLETON, of Charleston, in the county of 
is secured, the front edge of which is curved 55 
upward in the same manner as a sleigh-run 
Charleston and State of South Carolina, have 
invented a new and Improved Rice-Drill, of 
ner, and from which shoe a tube, K', projects 
upward. 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
To the front end of each shoe a rod, 
description. 
L, is linked, which is provided at its upper 
Myinvention relates to improvementsinrice 
end with a longitudinal eye, L', through which 6o 
or other drills; and it consists in the peculiar 
a staple, L, on the under side of the front cross 
Io construction and arrangement of the parts, as 
bar of the machine-frame passes. On each tube 
hereinafter more fully set forth, and pointed 
K of each shoe the lower end of a flexible tube, 
out in the claims. 
M, is held, the upper end of which is held on 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
the corresponding pocket, F, of the seed-box, 65 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
through which flexible tubes Mthe seed passes 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
from the seed-boxes to the shoes. The shaft 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
His provided with a fixed arm, H, projecting 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved rice 
toward the front, and to the free end of the said 
drill, parts being broken out and others shown 
arm a connecting-rod, N, is pivoted, the up- 7o 
in section. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. 
per end of which is pivoted to the inner end 
2O Fig. 3 is an enlarged longitudinal sectional 
of a lever, O, pivoted on a standard, O, on 
elevation of the feeding device. Fig. 4 is a 
the rear end of the frame. A spring locking 
plan view of one of the shoes. 
lever, P, is pivoted on the lever O, and is pro 
In a frame, A, an axle or shaft, B, isjournaled, 
vided at its inner end with a pin, Q, adapted to 
on which are loosely mounted two wheels, C, a 
pass into one of a series of apertures, R, ar 
ranged in a curved line on an upright plate, 
Short distance from thesides of the frame. The 
hub of one of the wheels is provided with a 
S, on the frame of the machine. The shaft H. 
clutch-wheel, C, adapted to engage with a 
is also provided at one end with a rigid arm, 
clutch-collar, C, mounted on the shaft B, in 
T, which is adapted to swing up between the 
such a manner that it can slide on the same, 
lever D and the side piece of the frame A. 
The slides b closing the openings in the bot 
but revolves with the said shaft or axle, the 
collar C being held to revolve in the forked 
toms of the seed-boxes can be opened more or 
inner end of a lever, D, pivoted on the frame 
less according to the quantity of seed to be 
A and projecting from the rear end of the 
sowed. The seeds drop through the slots a, 
same, which lever is acted on by a spring, D', 
are carried downward by the toothed disks G, 
drop through the apertures Fin the boxes F, 
which presses it in such a manner as to couple 
through the flexible tubes M, through the tubes 
the clutch-collar C with the clutch-collar C 
K, and then through the apertures in the shoes 
on the hub of the wheel. Between the wheels 
C a seed-box, E, is arranged, which is provid 
K. If the outer end of the lever O is pressed 
ed near each end of its bottom with a series of 
downward, the inner end of the arm H will 
slots, a, which can be closed by a sliding cover, 
be swung upward, and thereby the shoes K. 
b. Outside of each wheel a seed-box, E, is ar 
will be raised from the ground, and at the same 
ranged, which is also provided in its bottom 
time the arm T is forced up between the side 
with longitudinal slotsa, which can be covered 
piece of the frame A and the lever D, thereby 
by a slide, b, and all the seed-boxes can be 
pressing the outer end of the lever Dinward 
45 provided with covers. Below the slots a in 
and disengaging the clutch-collar C from the 
each seed-box a pocket, F, is provided, in 
clutch C on the hub of the adjoining wheel C. 
which a toothed disk, G, revolves, which is 
The clutch-collar will no longer be revolved, 
mounted on the shaft B. Each pocket F is 
and thus the shaft B will not be revolved, and 
provided with an outlet-aperture, F. In lugs 
the disks G thereon will be stationary, and will 
projecting from the rear end of the frame Aa. 
not carry any more seed into the tubes M. The 
rods Lareprovided with the longitudinal loops 
transverse shaft, H, is journaled, on which is 
fixed series of spring-arms J, which are curved Lat their upper ends, to permit of raising the 
85 
75 
35 
95 
IOO 
2 
300,883 
- 
2. The combination, with the frame A, seed 35 
cross-bar of the frame, substantially as shown 
shoes K in the manner described. As the 
springs J would be bent out of shape in case 
and described. 
the shoes should strike aheavy obstacle, I have 
boxes EE, and the seed-dropping disks G, of 
provided the rods L, which would prevent the 
the rock-shaft H, spring-arms J, shoes K, con 
shoes from being forced backward too far by 
nected by flexible tubes M. to the seed-boxes, 
the said obstacle. As soon as the shoes are 
and provided with metallic tubes K, rods L, 
lowered again, the arm T is swung downward, 
thus permitting the spring D' to force the outer 
secured to the front ends of the shoes and slid- 4o 
end of the lever Doutward and engage the ling in keepers secured to the front cross-bar 
of the frame, wedge-shaped arm T on the shaft 
clutch-collar C with the clutch C on the hub 
H, the spring-pressed lever D, the clutch-col 
of the adjoining wheel C, whereby the feeding 
lar C on the inner end of said lever, and a 
apparatus of the machine will be started au 
clutch, C, on the hub of one of the wheels, 45 
tomatically at the same time that the shoes are 
substantially as described. 
lowered. By means of the locking-lever P the 
3. In a seed-drill, the combination, with the 
I5 shoes can be locked at any desired elevation. 
frame A, of the seed-boxes EE, the shaft B, 
As seed-boxes are arranged outside of the 
carrying the toothed disks G, the clutch-col 
wheels, the seeds can be planted along the 
lar C, mounted to slide on and turn with the so 
edges of the drains or ditches. 
shaft, the clutch-collar C, formed on the hub 
The above-described drill can also be used 
2O for planting other seeds as well as for planting 
of one of the wheels, the lever ID, in the free 
end of which the clutch-collar is held, the 
Ce. 
Spring D, the shaft H, having the rigid arm 
Having thus described my invention, what 
T, a lever for turning the shaft H, the spring- 55 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
arms J, secured on the shaft H, the shoes K 
Patent, is 
on the lower ends of the arms J, and flexible 
1. The combination, with the frame A and 
tubes connecting theseed-boxes with the shoes, 
seed-boxes EE, of the rock-shaft H, carrying 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
spring-arms J, shoes K, secured to the lower 
ends of the spring-arms J, and provided with 
the metallic tubes K, flexible tubes M, con 
3o necting the shoes with the seed-boxes, and rods 
L., secured to the front ends of the shoes and 
adapted to slide in keepers secured to the front 
A. DE LANCEY MIDDLETON. 
Witnesses: 
C. G. MEMMINGER, Jr., 
E. R. MEMMINGER. 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US300983.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 300,983, 
J. KILBOURNE, 
SINK, 
Patented June 24, 1884. 
 
avezzr . 
N, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JAMES KILBOURNE, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
SNK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 300,983, dated June 24, 1884, 
Application filed July 5, 1883. (No model.) 
my improvement, the line of section passing 
To all whom it may concern. 
axially and vertically through the neck. 
Be it known that I, JAMES KILBOURNE, of 
A is the body of the sink, and B is the neck. 
Columbus, in the county of Franklin and State 
In practice I form them by pressing them in 
of Ohio, have invented a new and useful Im 
one piece from a single sheet of Wrought iron 4o 
5 provement in Sinks, of which the following is 
or steel. At the upper end of the neck is the 
a specification. 
My invention is directed to and is an im 
annular depression a, in which the strainer- . 
plate (not here shown) lies, so as to be flush 
provement on that kind of sink claimed in my 
with the bottom of the sink. The neck below 
Patent No. 240,146, dated April 12, 1881-that 
this depression has a comparatively wide 45 
Io is to say, a seamless Wrought-metalsink struck 
dished form, as seen at b, the walls contracting 
up or formed from a single sheet of Wrought 
as they descend until they are brought to a 
iron or steel. In the sink shown and described 
in that patent the neck was made of malleable point where they form the tubular lower end, 
c. This end c may be cylindrical; but in prac 
iron distinct and separate from the sink, and 
tice I prefer to make it slightly tapering or 5O. 
I5 riveted thereto. This arrangement is objec 
conical, as shown. I find that in this Way I 
tionable, both on the score of expense and con 
obtain a neck which can readily be pressed 
sumption of time, for the parts must be care 
and formed from the same sheet of Wrought 
fully put together in order to make a durable 
steel or iron of which the body of the sink is 
and tight joint. 
made, the whole sink-body and neck-being 55 
2O The object of my improvement is to remedy 
thus struck up in, one piece without joint or 
this defect, and I do so by pressing the neck 
from the same sheet of steel or ironi that forms 
Sea. 
Having described my improvement, what I 
the body of the sink, thus making the entire 
claim as new and of my inventionis 
sink, body, and neck from one sheet of wrought 
The herein-described sink having its body 6o 
25 iron or steel without joint or seam. This de 
and neck, of substantially the shape shown, 
sirable result, which seemed at first sight un 
formed in one piece from a single sheet of 
attainable practically, I found could be ob 
wrought steel or iron, without joint or seani, 
tained by reducing that portion of the sheet 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
constituting the neck gradually to the tubular 
form which it is necessary that its lower por 
hand this 14th day of April, A.D. 1883. 
tion should have in order to properly receive 
and support the lead pipe, which in practical 
use is connected to it. 
The accompanying drawing represents in 
35 sectional perspective view a sink embodying 
Intestimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 65 
JAMES KIBOURNE. 
.. 
Witnesses: 
" 
WILLIS N. TULLER, 
W. T. MCCLURE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301083.txt	(No Model. 
No. 30,083, 
H. BORNSTEIN. 
PRICE CARD AND TIDY PIN, 
Patented July l, 1884. 
F', 4. 
Al 
'... 2 
V 
222 
C 
of 
J'e , 3 
f 
d 
77 
2. 
vil 
Az. 3. 
 
J 
f 
Wieness fs. 
A.reven cor 
- - - - 
- 
- - - - - - - - - - 
6-1.4/32 (42..., 
w 2-6-4y/ 
cezorazey. 
2 
N. Peters. Pigo-tithographor. Washinston. C. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY BORNSTEIN, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
PR C E CARD AND TOY Pi N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 301,083, dated July 1, 1884. 
Application filed April 23, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To cult, who in it inctly conceri, - 
Be it known that I, HENRY BORNSTEIN, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk, State of Mas 
Sachusetts, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Price-Card and Tidy Pins, 
of which the following is a description suffi. 
Ciently full, clear, and exact to enable any per 
Son Skilled in the art or science to which said in. 
vention appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a view of the blank or pointed 
wire from which the body of my improved pin 
15 is made; Fig. 2, a view representing the body 
after being bent to form the loops; Fig. 3, a 
rear elevation of the body after being bent as 
shown in Fig. 2, and also to form the attach 
ing-spring for the head; Fig. 4, a view of the 
head detached, and Fig. 5 an isometrical per 
Spective view of the pin complete or with the 
head attached. 
Likeletters of reference indicate correspond 
ing parts in the different figures of the draw 
My present invention is designed as an im 
provement on the device for attaching price 
and show cards which was secured to me by 
Letters Patent of the United States bearing 
(late August 21, A. D. 1877, No. 194,405; and 
it consists in a novel construction and ar 
rangement of the parts, as hereinafter more 
fully set forth and claimed, by which a more 
desirable article of this character is produced 
than is now in ordinally use. 
The nature and operation of the improve 
ment will be readily understood by all con 
versant with such matters from the following 
explanation, its extreme simplicity rendering 
an elaborate description unnecessary. 
In the drawings, A represents the body of 
the pin, and B the head. The body is bent to 
form the upwardly-turned loop at and down 
wardly-turned loop m, these loops or bends 
being preferably equal in size, although they 
may be varied as desired. The upper portion, 
, of the body is bent in respect to the loops 
a m to form the curved spring 2, as shown in 
Fig. 3. The head consists of a concaved sheet 
5O metal disk having its edge or periphery 
turned inwardly to form the curved holding 
I flange d, the curvature of the flange corre 
sponding with, but being slightly greater than, 
that of the portion i in cross-section. The di 
ameter or distance across the curved spring & 55 
from its end f to the point indicated by the let 
ter r is greater than the diameter or distance 
across the head B. 
In the device described in said Letters Pat 
ent the pin proper or body is usually attached 
to the back or rear side of the head by means 
of solder, and in order to make it cheaply, 
soft solder has to be employed, rendering the 
pin liable to be broken or detached from its 
head when subjected to any considerable 
strain, and also detracting greatly from the 
finished appearance of the goods. My pres 
ent improvement is designed to obviate these 
objections; and to that end Iconstruct the parts 
as shown and described, the body Orpin proper 
being attached to its head by means of the 
curved spring 3, which is compressed suffi 
ciently to pass it into the round opening l 
between the inner edges of the flanged, and 
thence downwardly into the head B, where it 75 
expands, thus securely locking the parts per 
manently together, as seen in Fig. 5. After 
the head has been attached to the body, as 
described, the flange may be milled or turned 
down onto the spring to prevent the head from So 
being revolved on the same, if desired; but 
when the spring and flange are properly 
formed this will not be necessary, the expan 
sive action of the spring preventing the head 
from turning unless considerable force is em- 85 
ployed. 
In the use of my improved pin, the card, 
tidy, or other article to be attached is passed 
onto the body A, and slipped over the top of 
the loopa' into the loop.m. The body is then go 
inserted as far as possible in the garment, chair, 
cloth, or other article to which the card or tidy 
is to be secured, and the pin left suspended by 
the loop ac, in a manner which will be readily 
obvious without a more explicit description. 95 
The bends a n are preferably of such dimen 
sions, and so arranged in respect to the body A. 
and spring 2, that when the pin proper and 
head are connected the bends will be oppositely 
disposed, or one behind the other, and hidden ICO 
from view by the head when the pin is in use. 
As all parts of the body of the pin are in 
25 lingS. 
O 
45 
2 
301,083 
IO 
25 
with an inwardly-turned flange, the head and 
tegral or composed of the same piece of wire, 
body being held in engagement by the expan 
and the head consists of a single piece of sheet 
sive action of the spring beneath the flange, 
metal, it will be obvious that the device is ex 
substantially as set forth. 
ceedingly simple, strong, and inexpensive to 
2. The body A, having the loops a m, and 
manufacture. 
I do not confine myself to concaving the provided with a spring for attaching it to a 
head B, as its face or front may be made flat, head, substantially as specified. 
3. The improved price - card or tidy pin 
or of any other suitable form desired. Neither 
do I confine myself to using the pin exclusively herein described, the same consisting of the 
for the purposes stated, as it is well adapted for body A, having the loops a m, and provided 
with the spring 2, and the head B, having the 
a great variety of analogous purposes. 
Having thus explained my invention, what flanged, all constructed, combined, and ar 
ranged to operate substantially as specified. 
I claim is- 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a price- 
HENRY BORNSTEIN. 
card or tidy pin having its body composed of 
a single piece of wire with its upper portion 
bent to form a spring, and its head provided 
C. A. SHAW, 
T. J. WHITE. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301184.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
E., TUCKER, Jr. 
APPARATUS FOR ANNEALING AND GALWANIZING WIRE, 
No. 30, 184, 
Patented July 1, 1884. 
 
 
 
 
N. Peters, Picto-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
E, TUCKER, Jr. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
APPARATUS FOR ANNEALING AND GALWANIZING WIRE, 
No. 301,184, 
 
Patented July 1, 1884. 
4 
 
11% 
'II' (2E, F - "". 
'... ". 
31, in 27 % 
; 
: 
...A." 
AS& 
A.Y. 
K (WS 
BiSHO |W 
f 
...E. 
| Biei 
: 
. 
SiW. II 
ST Cliff A, 
A2; al 
 
 
t 
is 
5. 
alia 
A.E.F. T 
r1, 
. 
y 2 S. 
N25.2.2 23 L 
al 
= 
He =E 
2 22E. 
  
 
/7. A / e 2-2-4-6 
N. Pereas, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 30l., 184, 
E, TUCKER, Jr. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
APPARATUS FOR ANNEALING AND GALWANIZING WIRE, 
Patented July 1, 1884, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
in 
?ZZZZZZZZZZZZ s e 
SAS 
N, Perers, Photo-Lithographer. washington, D. C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EPHRAIMI TUCKER, JR., OF WORCESTER, MASS ACHUSETTS. 
APPARATUS FOR ANNEANG AND GAWAN 2 N G W R E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 301,184, dated July 1, 1884. 
Application filed November 16, 1883. 
(No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it 7-?ity concern, 
Beit known that I, EPHRAIMTUCKER, Jr., 
of Worcester, in the county of Worcester, State 
of Massachusetts, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Apparatus for An 
nealing and Galvanizing or Coating Wire, of 
which the followingisa description sufficiently 
full, clear, and exact to enable any person 
Skilled in the art or Science to which said in 
vention appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure I is an isometrical perspective view 
representing my improved apparatus in use; 
Fig. 2, an end elevation; Fig. 3, a side eleva 
tion; Fig. 4, a vertical transverse section; Fig. 
5, a vertical longitudinal section; Fig. 6, an 
end elevation of the wiping-box, and Fig. 7 
an isometrical perspective view of the same. 
Like letters and figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in the different figures of 
the drawings. 
My invention relates more especially to that 
class of annealing and galvanizing or coating 
apparatus which are employed in annealing 
and galvanizing or coating wire for Wire fences, 
telegraphs, telephones, &c.; and it consists in a 
novel construction and arrangement of the 
parts, as hereinafter more fully set forth and 
claimed, by which a separate annealing-fur 
nace is dispensed with, and a more effective 
device of this character produced than has 
heretofore been in ordinary use. 
The nature and operation of the improve 
ment will be readily understood by all con 
versant with such matters from the following 
explanation. 
In the drawings, A represents the furnace, 
BB, the annealing pans or tanks, and C the 
coating-tank. ... The wires () to be annealed and 
galvanized or coated are Wound upon a reel, 
D, Figs. 1 and 3, disposed near one end of the 
furnace, and pass upwardly over a series of 
sheaves or grooved pulleys, E, arranged on a 
plane above the top of the tanks B, thence 
downwardly under the guides G in said tanks, 
thence upwardly over the pulleys H, thence 
outwardly around the pulleys J, thence in 
Wardly over the pulleys H, thence downwardly 
under the pulleys K, thence upwardly over 
The construction of the furnace will be best 75 
the pulleys L, thence downwardly under the 
guides M in the tank C, and thence upwardly 
through the wiping-box N onto a receiving 
reel, (not shown,) which may be located at any 55 
convenient distance from the furnace. The 
tanks B B contain the lead for annealing the 
wire, and the tank C the zinc galvanizing or 
coating material. In annealing the wires one 
half of the same are conducted through each 6o 
of the tanks B; but in coating or galvanizing 
them they are all returned through the tank 
C. A tank, P, containing the acid bath or 
flux, is disposed at the end of the furnace op 
posite the reel D, the pulleys K being sojour- 65 
naled in this tank as to submerge the wires 
passing under them, each Wire being provided 
with an independent pulley, E, L, K, H, and 
J. The guides G M are secured to the bot 
toms of their respective tanks, as shown, (see to 
Fig. 4) and provided with bends, ac, under 
which the wires are passed, and by which they 
are kept submerged on their passage through 
the tanks. 
understood by reference to Figs. 4 and 5, in 
which OO represent the grates, one of which 
is disposed under each of the tanks B. The 
gases, smoke, heated air, and other products 
of combustion from the furnaces pass upwardly So 
through the flues a (, disposed near the top at 
either end of the combustion - chambers S, 
thence to the center of the chamber R, be 
neath the tank C, thence downwardly through 
the diving-flue d in the bottom of said cham- 85 
ber into the central chamber, T, thence to 
ward either end of said last-named chamber, 
and downwardly through the diving-?lues in 
into the flues U, which are connected with the 
chimney. (Not shown.) As the tank or pan go 
C is liable to be destroyed, the intense heat to 
which it is subjected weakening its bottom and 
permitting the galvanizing metal to break 
through and fall upon the floor v of the cham 
ber R, said floor is inclined from either end 95 
toward the center, for the purpose of catching 
the fluid escaping from the tank and conduct. 
ing it safely through the flue d onto the floor 
20 of the chamber T, this floor being inclined 
in such a manner as to conduct the fluid metal 
into the spout 22, from which it may pass out 
Wardly through the opening 23 into any suit 
OO 
25 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
2 
301,184. 
 
65 
75 
85 
9O 
IOO 
I to 
II5 
ing fuel, and are designed to be fitted with 
covers and dampers for regulating the draft. 
There are also a series of draft and clearing 
openings, i, in the sides of the furnace slight 
ly above the plane of the grates O, and an 
other series, p, below the grates, also de 
signed to be fitted with proper dampers or 
The pulleys J are journaled in verti 
doors. 
cal standards (I, but may be Supported in any 
other suitable manner and at any desired dis 
tance from the body of the furnace, it being 
understood that all of the pulleys, reels, and 
other parts described are to be suitably con 
structed and arranged to properly perform 
their respective functions. A guard, 24, is 
placed around the upper end of the flue m to 
prevent the fluid metal falling on the floor 20 
from passing into said flue, and to direct it 
properly into the Spout 22. 
Having thus explained my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In an apparatus for annealing and gal 
vanizing or coating Wire, the furnace A, pro 
vided with the chambers S S RT, flues a d n, 
U, and grates OO, constructed and arranged 
to operate in combination with the tanks BC, 
substantially as specified. 
2. In an apparatus for annealing and gal 
vanizing or coating wire, the wiping-box N, 
consisting of the body F, provided with the 
grooves l, followers t, truss Q, and spring 
pins w, combined and arranged to operate 
Substantially as specified. 
3. The improved annealing and galvaniz 
ing or coating apparatus herein described, the 
same consisting of the furnace A, reel D, pull 
leys E, tanks BB, guides G, pulleys H, pull 
leys J, tank P, pulleys K, pulleys L., tank C, 
guides M, and wiper or wiping-box N, con 
structed, combined, and arranged to operate 
substantially as set forth. 
4. In an apparatus for annealing and gal 
vanizing or coating wire, the inclined floor v, 
having the opening or flue d, through which 
the fluid metal may pass, in combination with 
the inclined floor 20 and spout 22, for receiv 
ing and conducting it out of the furnace, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, in an annealing and 
tempering apparatus, of two combustion 
chambers extending longitudinally of the fur 
nace on each side thereof, annealing-tanks 
Suspended Over or into said combustion-cham 
ber, an elevated longitudinal central flue into 
which the products of combustion pass from 
both said combustion-chambers, and a coat 
ing-tank located over said common central 
flue, substantially as described. 
EPHRAIM TUCKER, JR. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY C. RICE, 
ELMER, G, TUCKER, 
O 
able vessel for receiving it. An opening, f, 
provided with a suitable door, leads into the 
chamber R at either end, for the purpose of 
enabling said chamber to be readily cleansed 
of Soot, ashes, &c., an opening, 23, also serv 
ing a like purpose for chamber T, and having 
a door. (Not shown.) There is also an ash 
pit or chamber, Y, formed beneath the grates, 
and preferably extending from side to side of 
the furnace. 
The construction of the wiping-box is best 
seen in Fig. 7, in which F represents the body 
of the box, and Q the truss. The body is pro 
vided on its upper side with a series of verti 
cal longitudinal grooves, l, extending its en 
tire length, and with a series of followers, t, 
beneath which the wiping materiali is insert 
ed. Each of the followers is provided with a 
pin, w, which passes downwardly through the 
top of the truss Q, and is threaded at its lower 
end and provided with a nut, n, the pin pass 
ing through the nut and into an unthreaded 
hole (not shown) in the top of the follower. 
: A spring, , is disposed around each of the 
pins w, beneath the truSS Q, the upper end of 
25 
the spring abutting against the under side of 
the truss, and its lower end resting on the up 
per side of the nut in, the spring acting expan 
sively to force the followers t downwardly up 
on the wiping material i in the grooves l. The 
box is disposed at the end of the tank C, op 
posite the pulleys L, and the wires (7, as they 
leave said tank, are passed through the wip 
ing material i in the box, the wires being in 
dependently disposed, as shown in Fig. 7. 
The wiping material i may be composed of 
powdered talc, or sand and charcoal; but any 
other suitable material for that purpose may 
be used, if preferred. 
It will be obvious that any degree of press 
ure may be placed upon the wires in the wip 
ing-box by turning the pins w downwardly 
through their nuts in. 
I do not confine myself to using independ 
ent sheaves or grooved pulleys E H J K. 
L, or a pulley for each Wire, although I deem 
the same preferable, as journaled drums or 
long rollers may be used instead of the pull 
leys. Neither do I confine myself to anneal 
ing and galvanizing or coating any specific 
number of Wires at a time, as one or more 
wires may be treated, according to the capac 
ity of the apparatus. The tank C is arranged 
centrally above the plane of the tanks BB, 
Over the chamber R, enabling the smoke and 
other products of combustion to be concent 
trated in said chamber, thereby more effect 
ively utilizing the heat before it passes down 
Wardly through the flues d n, and into the 
chimney. This arrangement of flues and tanks 
Secures great economy of heat. A series of 
apertures, h, are provided in the top of the 
furnace above the chambers S, for introduc 
35 
55 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301284.txt	D 21 - 726 
D 2676 
AU 
XR 
EX 
30 1 284 
(No Model.) 
No. 30l., 284. 
 
C, SCHER 
BILLIARD CUETIP FASTENER, 
Patented July 1, 1884. 
WITNESSES; - 
\- 
? 
i 
ised ony 
INVENT 
(3.2 E. 
36. 
stas -os-Lahorashue. Waskarsters. . . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
( ' | \ | 1, E S S ("I ER, OF 13 IR () () Kl, Y N, N. Y. 
B L L A R D - C UET P FASTENER, 
St. PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 3Ol., 284, dated July 1, 1884. 
... 
it': till fill 
arch 13, 183. 
(No. 1:... } 
li ( in ); it 
?ity (Ole ?el'7: 
In the accompanying tra wings, Figure 
T it i? ti'il. ii., f 
ise it k low that J. (if A is S. 'il Fir, of 
Brooklyn, coality of Kings, and State of New 
York, lay: il volate certain (; w and useful 
Iinov 'laints in Billiard-('ut-Tip Fasteners, 
of which the foil) Wiig is a specification. 
This ill vention has re?ence to an improved 
device for fastellig the leaflier tips to billiard 
cues, the device being inade simple and cheap 
in construction aid adapted for lilliard-cues 
( ; ; y thick intess: : an 
is enti? consists of 
a welge-shaped main piece of V-shaped cross 
Section, sail nail 
it'('' laving an altitment 
at the end, that resses the leather tip on the 
cite, a not of a fastelling-ring in part of seg 
lift it:ll 
a gll lar shape, said ring 
locking the we ge-sh;led main piece and the 
'u' rigilly together, so that the ti) is held in 
losit it it it the 'll of the 't'. 
rer'sets a side elevatio of lily improved 
last ('lie' for lili; I'l-(ue t is, slown as applied 
to a billiaril-cle. 
Fig. 2 is an end elevation 
of the fastening-liece detached from the cue. 
lig. 3 is a lorizital section oil line a ', Fig. 
1; and Fig. 
modified for in of 
the list Citig-liig. 
' ' tel''' in li('att (''- 
Silli; litt ('i's ( 
Slholl: il g arts, 
Will the lrawings 'epresents a billiard-cue, 
and ( the le; the ti) that is to be glued to the 
ent of the Site. The last (ther 13 consists of a 
wedge-shaped main liece of suitable cast metal 
and of a listelling-rig, (. The main piece 
3 is inade of V-shapel cross-section, so as to 
form flaring sile cheeks, l, b, that lear against 
the 'ld of the ("le \. 
A ahutinent, d, that 
is cast integral with the Jain lie (c. 3, extends 
it right angles to the in '' ('ll of the sane, 
aid is plated over the tip ( a?ter the same is 
gluietl (in the cil of the cut'. Til: 'etaining 
iiig ( ' is 
als' ( )f suit; alle cast metal of seg 
leat: shale at that sile that passes over the 
cue anil of aligular or V shille at the othel sile 
that passes over the wedge-shaped main piece 
13. 
over the 
By ressing first the at then ( 
is a l; 
if : 
5 
) 
i. 
5 
5 
5. 
(5th 
tip at and then pushing the ring ('forward over 
the main piece 3 and cue A, the filsteiner and 
tip are rigidly held in position on the cue eld 
until the glue his driel, when the fast ener is 
removed. The ring ( may be an entirely 
closed ring, as in Fig. 3, or ):ntly open at one 
side, as shown in Fig. 4. That portion which 
bears against the cue is made wider than the 
angular portion of the ring, the wider portion 
being made slightly flaring at the inner sur 
face, St as to correspond to the taper of the 
C. 
The fastenen, being entirely of cast unitial. 
can be furished very cheally, as there are no 
screw-sockets, and is a lated for use with any 
thickness of (e. 
laving thus described iny invention, clain 
as new and desire to Secure by lette's latent 
1. Albilliard cue-ti) fast ele' consisting of 
a wetlge-shaped main liece of V-shaped cross 
section, said Iain lieuc having a laterally 
extending alyut ment at the thinner (al, and 
of a fastelling-ling that settles the main piece 
to the cue, substantially as set forth. 
?asteller consisting of 
a \ing all all t 
: wedge-slabel liai lie' 
ment at the thier end aid flaring side cheeks. 
and of a lastelling-rig in 
art of segmental 
sale and in part of angular shape, so as to it 
over the cue anti main ic'' and lock the in 
together, sistantially as set f it. 
'1' (ol sisting of 
a wedge-shaped main lice having flaring side 
cheeks all all abutinent at the linn'1' 'ind, Sc) 
and of a fastening-rig anade artly in the 
shape of at enlarged segment having all intner 
slightly-flaring surface, all partly of angul: 1 
or V shape, salistantially is set forth. 
II testimony that I claim the for giing as lily 
invention I have sign' my man' ill ni''St.' ('' 
of t w () sit stilitig witness's. 
W R 
3. \ billiai'l-?lue-ti) first 
2, \ billiarl-cue-ti 
S N ( ' 
'. R. 
( ' 
 
5 5 
in 
5 
SS 
Wit (Sses: 
( AIR I, KAI ', 
( )''' ) RIS ( ' 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301384.txt	(No Model.) 
T. H., 
MEINHARD. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
COMBINED AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENT, 
 
 
 
 
 
???? 
?????: 
??/\ 
??? 
% 
N. Peters Photo itsrapher. Washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 301,384, 
T. H. MEINHARD, 
COMBINED AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENT, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
Patented July 1, 1884. 
SNSSSSSSNS 
 
22ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
Z-? 
IN YENTDIR.- 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
*???? 
THEODOR H. MEINHARD, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
coMBINED AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 301,384, dated July 1, 1884. 
Application filed January 31, 1884. (No model.) 
, following is a specification. 
55 
6) 
To aZZ whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THEODOR. H. MEIN 
HARD, a subject of the Emperor of Germany, 
residing in the city and county of San Fran 
cisco and State of California, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Com 
bined Agricultural Inplements, of which the 
My invention relates to an improved com 
bined agricultural implement adapted for the 
planting of cereals; and the object of my im 
provement is to provide a machine whereby 
the plowing of the ground, the sowing of the 
grain, the harrowing, and the smoothing or 
leveling of the surface of the ground may all 
be accomplished at one operation. I accom 
plish this object by the mechanism illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I is a longitudinal sectional view of 
my improved combined agricultural imple 
ment. Fig. 2 is a side view of the same, the 
rear portion of the machine being broken 
away. Fig. 3 is a sectional plan view. 
Similar letters of reference are used to des 
ignate like parts throughout the several fig 
e.S. 
The operating parts of my machine are con 
tained within a rectangular frame, A, which 
may be built solidly or of an open frame 
work, the sides and top of which should be 
braced and stayed in a substantial manner, 
and may be constructed of either wood or 
metal. 
A transverse bar, B, to which the animals 
are hitched, extends across the front part of 
the machine; and a pair of wagon-wheels, C 
C, are likewise attached to the forward end of 
the machine, for the purpose of lifting the for 
ward end of the side frame from the surface 
of the ground. Just back of the axle of these 
wheels I place a transverse bar, D, to which 
are pivoted links E, connected to the clevis of 
the plows F; and as many plows may be em 
ployed as desired, arranged side by side at 
proper intervals apart. . 
The handles of the plows are connected by 
a hinge-loop, G, to the transverse rod H, which 
has its bearings in a segmental slot, I, cut or 
formed in thesides of the main frame A. This 
plow-handle rod His moved up or down by 
means of a bentlever, J, pivoted to a transverse 
rod, K. The upper end of the lever extends 
- above the top of the mainframe, and is provided 
with a pawl or catch which engages with the 
curved ratchet L, as shown in Fig. 1, for the 
purpose of retaining the plow-handles at any 
desired elevation. By raising or depressing 
the rod to which the plow - handles are at 
tached the point or share of the plow will be 
caused to take a less or a greater bite on 
the land, as may be desired. 
The feed-boxMisplaced about midway of the 
length of the main frame and extends across 
it from side to side, and is formed into three 
Compartments. (Shown in Fig. 1.) The Cen 
tral compartment (designated by the figure 1) 
discharges the grain directly to the feeding or 
distributing roller; and as the supply of grain 
contained within this compartment becomes 
exhausted, the pressure of the mass of grain 
will be removed from the outwardly-opening 
flap-door N, leading from compartment 2, and 
the pressure of the grain within will cause 
this door to open, and the grain contained 
therein will then pass into compartment No. 
i. When this supply becomes nearly exhaust 
ed, the flap-door O in compartment 3 will then 
open and discharge a third body of grain upon 
the distributing-roller. The bottoms of com 
partments Nos. 2 and 3 are made slanting 
down toward the bottom of the flap-doors, so 
as to facilitate the outward passage of the 
grain. 
The bottom of compartment No. 1 is 
floored or covered by a series of slats, P, whose 
pintles are journaled in the sides of the main 
frame, and they are all provided upon one end 
with crank-arms a, pivoted in a sliding horizon 
tal rod, b, held in brackets c, and caused to 
move back and forth, to open and close the 
slats or grain-passage, by means of a slotted go 
lever, Q, engaging with a pin upon the end of 
the rod b, and pivoted to the side of the frame 
and operated by a pull-rod, R., extending up 
within convenient reach of the driver, who sits 
upon the top of the feed-box. After the grain 
passes through the slotted gate it falls upon a 
series of fixed slats, ddd, placed transversely 
across the hopper, which causes the grain to be 
more evenly distributed. The lowermost of this 
series of fixed slats are inclined so as to throw 
the grain toward the rear end of the feed-box, in 
the bottom of which is placed a fluted feed or 
distributing roller, S, the shaft of which ex 
tends through the sides of the frame, and is 
SO 
IOC 
15 
35 
 
2 
301,384 
for the seed-sower. The bottom of this grain-35 
bin closely approaches the ground and is made 
inclined from the front edge downward to 
ward the rear, the object being to provide a 
smoother or clod-crusher, J', to smooth off 
and level the surface of the ground after it 4o 
has been acted upon by the harrow, and there 
by render it more easy to drive over during 
the process of harvesting the crop. 
If desirable, Wagon-wheels may be placed 
at the rear end of the carrying-frame, although 45 
under ordinary conditions they may be dis 
pensed with, and the rear end of the side 
boards of the frame is permitted to drag upon 
the surface of the ground. 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
????--S[ 
In a combined agricultural implement, the 
combination, with the adjustable plows, the 
feed box or hopper M, the feed-roller S, op- 55 
erated by a belt-connection with the forward 
carrying-wheels, C C, and the harrow Z, of the 
disk-colters Y, and clod-masher J', all when 
constructed, combined, and arranged to oper 
ate substantially in the manner and for the 60 
purpose set forth and specified. 
have hereunto set my hand and Seal. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
THEODOR HI. MEINHARD. [II, s.] 
Having thus described my invention, what I 5O 
Witnesses: 
WILMER BRADFORD, 
C. W. M. SMITEI. 
O 
15 
provided upon both ends with gear-wheels S' 
S, which are engaged by the spur-gears TT, 
driven by belt-connections UW, with pulleys 
WW upon the hubs of the wagon-wheels C, 
and it is by this means that revolution is im 
parted to the seed or feed roller, anda certain 
quantity of grain is permitted to drop from 
the hopper upon the ground at regular inter 
vals of time, varying with the speed with which 
the machine is drawn over the ground. 
In the rear of the seeder I place a rod, X, 
carrying the disk-colters Y, which slice up 
the clods of earth preparatory to their being 
acted upon by the harrow Z, which is held be 
tween the sides of the main frame by the stay 
chains AA, extending from each of the four 
corners of the harrow. Other chains or ropes, 
BB, are made fast to each of the four corners 
of the harrow, and meet at a point directly 
over the center thereof, where they are made 
fast to a single line or chain, C, which passes. 
over a pulley, D', attached to a cross-bar, E, 
and from thence around the pulley F, attached 
to the rear of the seed-box, and then over a 
pulley, G', attached to the rear corner of the 
feed-box, and thence up and over a small 
roller, and made fast to the pivoted lever-arm 
H'. By throwing this lever down the har 
row may be raised clear of the surface of the 
ground. 
At the rear end of the machine I build a 
bin or box, I, which may for convenience be 
divided into compartments, as shown, and 
adapted for the reception of a supply of grain 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301485.txt	(no Model.) 
No. 301,485. 
L. DE MAESENER. 
EMBROIDERED ORNAMENT, 
Patented July 8, 1884. 
Zez. 2. 
N.E.S. hete-titlegrapher 
fashingter, . 
. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LAURA DE MAESENER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
EMBRODERED ORNAMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 301,485, dated July 8, 884. 
Application filed February 5, 1884. No model.) 
C) 
3O 
To all whom it may concern 
9 Beit known that I, LAURA DE MAESENER, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a certain new and useful m 
provement in Embroidered Ornaments, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention consists of a new article of 
manufacture, viz: an embroidered ornament 
such as a flower-leaf, butterfly, or the like 
in which certain of the threads are applied 
and cut in a special manner, with a view to 
imparting to portions of the article a fluffy 
appearance, resembling, in a general way, che 
milie. The article is preferably surrounded 
by a line or lines of stitches, or embroidered, 
constituting a border, which defines and gives 
finish to its outline, and serves to prevent the 
fabric backing, on which the ornament is em 
broidered, from raveling at the point where 
the fluffed-up threads are cut. I also over 
lay the fabric backing at certain points with 
threads or strands harmonizing in color with 
the general design, these threads or strands 
being applied before the application of those 
threads which are to be cut, and in such posi 
tion or location as to cover those parts of the 
fabric backing which might otherwise be ex 
posed to view after the cutting and lifting of 
the other threads. 
The invention is fully illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which Figure 1 is 
a view of an ornament-in this instance a 
flower-as it appears after the embroidering 
operation, and before the cutting and fluffing 
up of the threads hereinbefore referred to. 
Fig. 2 is a view of the completed article. 
Fig. 3 is a section, enlarged, on line & ac, Fig. 
2. Fig. 4. is a diagrammatic representation, 
on an enlarged scale, of the manner in which 
the threads to be cut are laid. 
The backing A, on which the design is em 
broidered, is of any suitable fabric. The de 
sign is embroidered upon this backing, as in 
dicated in Fig. 1, the threads used being silk, 
worsted, or any preferred material. 
In Fig. 1 the parts of the design marked a 
are those which contain the threads to be cut 
and fluffed up. These threads (lettered bin 
Fig. 4) are applied in stitches which start at 
one end from the edge or border c, surround 
Witnesses: 
M. BAILEY, 
EI. HARDY. 
 
55 
ing the threads to be cut, and at the other 
end from a point just a little past the longi 
tudinal center of the portion to be cut and 
fluffed up. There are thus, as seen, two rows 
of stitches, which overlap one another at their 
inner contiguous ends, this overlapping Serv 
ing to hold the threads firmly when their 
outer ends are cut. When the stitches or 
threads b are properly laid, they are cut at 
their outer ends, or end next the border, and 
are then fluffed up, as indicated in Figs. 2 and 
3. When this is done there is liability that 
portions of the backing A may be uncovered 
and exposed. To provide for this contingency 
I apply, with an embroidery-stitch, threads d, 
of harmonious color, (seen in Fig. 3,) which 
are seen in place before the threads b (which 
overlie them) are applied, and thus serve to 
cover those portions of the fabric backing A, 
which otherwise might be left bare by the cut 
ting and raising of threads b. 
The border of embroidering surrounding 
the article is indicated at c. It is preferred 
to outline the whole of the ornament, save 
the stem and other slender parts, with this 
border, for reasons hereinbefore given, and it 
may also, with good effect, be employed on 
individual portions of the design to outline 
some or all of the chenille-like parts, as indi 
cated in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The direction of the covering-stitches d in 
relation to that of the overlaid stitches l is 
indicated plainly in the diagram, Fig. 4. By 
being placed in this direction they are not 
liable to be cut when the outer ends of the 
Stitches b are cut. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
An embroidered flower or other ornament 
having threads b cut and fluffed as described, 
and underlaid threads d, covering the por 
tions of the fabric backing left bare by the 
cut threads b, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name this 1st day of February, A. D. 
1SS4. 
L. DE MAESENER, 
7 5 
So 
90 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301585.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 301,585. 
 
 
 
J. M. GASTON, 
TOBACCO MOD, 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
Patented July 8, 1884. 
s 
 
22zz 
Iss 
2222222 
 
s 
Wy 
ES 
& N. 
st 
ISE 
a S. 
WITNESSES: 
e S. 
INVENTOR; 
ar TORNEYs, 
 
N. peers taic-scipher. Washington. . C. 
(No Model) 
No. 301,585. 
3 sheet-sheet 2. 
J. M. GASTON. 
TOBACC0 MOLD, 
A2.3 Patente d July 8, 1884. 
S22222S25 
SS2S SNS 2 
WITNESSES; 
-66%e?e yed 
INVENTOR: 
Brutus de) 
-ATTORNEYS, 
 
N. PerERs. Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 301,585. 
 
WITNESSES: 
C-2-e-762) e-6 e- 
4 yeae 
 
J. M. GASTON. 
TOBACCO MOD. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented July 8, 1884. 
INVENTOR: 
Aziz, 3%azz7 
ulture 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES MONROE GASTON, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
TOBACCO - MOD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 301,585, dated July 8, 1884. 
Application filed December 17, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
IC 
15 
2) 
55 
(f 
t 
WIS 2. 
etle-CaleSan C. OCS. 
ity for A. 3S Ets . E. 
to aid, whon, it indi/ concern, 
when the end pieces, c, of the frames are re 
Be it, known that I, JAMES, M. GASTON, of moved. The platese also enter similar grooves, 
Louisville, in the county of Jefferson and f, in the cross-piece b, and the end pieces, c, 
State of Kentucky, have invented certain new also have grooves f, in which said plates enter 
and useful Improvements in Tobacco-Molds, when the end pieces are put on and secured 
R.E. following is a full, clear, and ex- 
t ends of E. sits pist, " The g 
act (lescriptilon. 
ottoms g are then put on the plates e to be 
My invention consists of a contrivance for supported by them, and the mold-framesh are 
arranging several series of tobacco-molds and then put on the mold-bottoms to be supported 
e. The Eas th OVE 
fe tiers by an of ES with E. R 
e SeVea. SeeSaw be e3CW leC abat eCare OaGeO Ole Oil all Oiler. Wit (OWell-OS 
after the pressing, to facilitate te t 
of i for R in any preferred number, E. 
the pressed plugs and the filling of the cells to ing to the required number of tiers of molds, 
I Rid E. yies: labor of lifting as: St.'E', : ShES of E. 
extenSible frames f; to each Side, Wlth Which a 
The invention also consists of improve-lever, l, is suitably connected for raising the 
ments in the construction of the molds for frames apart and holding them by a rack, n, 
sing f be al usted 
2, to sible t 
Rii. E. 1zes, 
ter EEE E. 'E tier 
9 OSS Oil Clee SZeS 8 aSeele OO- SO c. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying frames apart, as at present arranged. When 
drawings, forming part of this specification, the tier-frames are thus raised up, the follow 
in which similar letters of reference indicate ers d are raised out of the mold-cells, so that 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
the boxes I can be wholly or partly drawn out 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of iny improved for emptying and filling after the end pieces, c, 
tobacco-molds and pressing-frames, the frames of the frames are removed, and when the 
being lifted apart for enabling the molds to cells of the mold are refilled, preparatory to 
be filled. Fig. 2 is an end elevation of the pressing again, the boxes may be easily and 
molds and frames as represented in Fig. 1, quickly showed back and the end pieces, c, re 
with some of the mold-boxes partly drawn placed, after which the frames are to be let 
out and sectioned. Fig. 3 is a plan view of down by the extensible toggle-frames, so that 
one of the tier-frames and mold-boxes, show- the followers rest on the tobacco in the mold 
ing different forms of the mold-cells. Fig. 4 cells, to be forced down in a press wherein the 
is a plan view of one of the tier-frames in- apparatus is to be supposed as resting While 
yerted, showing the followers for pressing the being filled and emptied, and by which the 
tobacco in the cells. Fig. 5 is a section of frames are to be pressed till the followers d 
two of the tier-frames on the line acac of Fig. descend in the mold-cells and press the to 
3. Fig. 6 is a perspective view of one of the bacco into plugs. 
tier-frimes with the cross-bar of one end re. 
The mold boxesh are partitioned into cells, 
moved, and showing the manner of applying as required for the form and size of the to 
the followers. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of bacco-plugs to be made, by partitions in 0, 
a mold-box with one of the partitions and the which are notched at p for fitting them to 
botton detached. 
gether crosswise when the cells are to be so 
Imake a frame for each tier of mold-boxes, divided, and the box-sides have notches q for 
consisting of side plates or bars, a, connected the end projections, s, of the partition 0, said 
rigidly at the center by a cross-piece, b, and partition being located at the middle of the 
removable end pieces, c, in which frame the boxes when short plugs are to be made; but the 
press-follower d for the mold-boxes of the next box sides and partitions in have notches p and 
tier below are carried by plates e, to which it at one end, where said partition may be 
the followers are attached at the upper ends, placed when longer plugs are to be made. 
and which slide into groovesfin the sides a 
The bottoms g of the mold-boxes have 
75 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
45 
50 
 
2 
301,585 
O 
25 
grooves t and rabbets at,in which the box sides Ting up with the followers d when they with 
draw from the molds, and the screwsc', by Which 4O 
and partitions extend below the upper Sur 
they are held, are contrived to be set higher 
face of the bottom, to prevent the tobacco from 
or lower, to regulate the closing of the frames 
being forced under them, and said bottom () is 
together, and thereby enable the thickness of 
divided under the partition 0, in the space of 
the plugs to be varied at Will. 
which the lower edge of the partition o fits 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 45 
When placed on the middle of the mold-box h, 
as new and desire to secure by Letterspatent 
with a filling-piece, v, below, which filling 
1. The combination of a series of tier-frames 
piece is to be removed to enable the bottom to 
having mold-boxes and press-followers ar 
be shoved together to close the space at the 
ranged therein, and said tier-frames connected 
middle when the partition o is placed at the 
back of the box for long plugs. The rabbet 
by extensible frames for lifting them apart, 5o 
substantially as described. 
t is wider at the back edge of the bottom, to 
2. The tier-frames consisting of sides a, per 
eXtend under the mold-box side and With 
manently connected by the center cross-piece, 
draw from the same, to accommodate the shift 
b, and the removable end-pieces, c, Said sides, 
ing of the partitions. When the mold-cells are 
cross-piece, and end pieces having grooves f 55 
thus extended, one of the followers is shifted 
for the follower-plates, substantially as de 
close to the other by shifting one of the Sup 
porting-plates e in the grooves f and properly 
3. The combination, in tobacco-pressing ap 
changing a filling-piece, at; or different follow 
paratus, of the tier-frames having removable 
ers with different supporting-plates may be 
end pieces and grooved sides, ends, and cross- 60 
Substituted. 
piece, press-followers attached to supporting 
The end pieces, c, of the frames have holes ac, 
plates fitted in said grooves, and mold-boxes 
through which tenons y of the side pieces, a, of 
supported on said follower-supports, Substan 
the frames are passed to connect the endpieces, 
tially as described. 
and they are secured by keys 2. The lower 
frame of the series is arranged on a bed, a?, 
on which the apparatus is to be supported, 
and adjustable, bottom g and adjustable par 
tition o, and having a filling-piece, v, Substan 
and to which the levers l, for working the ex 
tensible toggle-framesk, are pivoted at b for a 
tially as described. 
5. The follower d, having separate support 
fulcrum. The two extensible frames k of each 
ing-plates e and fillers w, in combination with 7O 
side of the apparatus are connected together 
mold-boxes having adjustable partition 0, Sub 
by a bar, c, to be worked together and by one 
and the same lever, l, which is connected to 
stantially as described. 
Said bar. 
On the upper edges of the sides ct of the 
mold-frames I have provided overhanging 
strips l', to prevent the mold-boxes from ris 
4. The mold-boxes constructed with divided 65 
r 
JAMES MONROE GASTON. 
Witnesses: 
D. M. RODMAN, 
ALEH. PEYTON. 
Sciribed. 
m 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301685.txt	. 
T. A. COOK. 
CABBAGE SLICER, 
Patented July 8, 1884. 
(No Model.) 
No. 301,685. 
  
   
Sces 2SSESS3 X 3. Y SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
% 
22Egz N 
S. 
 
  
K 
 
 
WITNESSEs: 
\(2z/dz224 
4 4.e4- 
c yee 
z -4.27* 
1, 
INVENTOR: 
2 
e/-/.4%-d 
BY ultul de 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
N. Perers. Photo-Lithographer. washington. D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODORE A. COOK, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
CABBAGES C E R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 30,685, dated July 8, 1884. 
Application filed March 28, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
3O 
35 
To all whom it may concern, 
Be it known that I, THEODORE A. Cook, 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and Im 
proved Cabbage-Slicer, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
practical device for slicing cabbage; and the 
invention consists of the construction, ar 
rangement, and combination of parts, all as 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure l is a section of my new and im 
proved cabbage-slicer as it appears when 
placed upon a tub or receptacle for receiving 
the cabbage as it is sliced. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the same, and Fig. 3 is a detailed view 
of the frame. 
A represents a base of wood of suitable size 
to be placed upon the tub or receptacle B., 
The base A is formed with the large aperture 
C, and is provided at one end with the exten 
sion D, to which the arm E of the main cast 
iron frame F is secured by a bolt at a. The 
frame Fis in this instance square in form, and 
is formed with the four feet b-one at each 
corner-through which bolts pass for secur 
ing the frame firmly to the base A. The 
frame F is also formed or provided with the | 
box or hopper G, in which the cabbage to be 
sliced is placed, and it is formed also with 
notches at e, which receive and form ways for 
the edges d of the sliding knife-plate H. The 
plate H has two sets of diagonal slots, ee', 
made in it, in which the cutting-knives ff 
are held, and it has the strengthening-ribs g 
and the lugs h formed upon its under surface, 
the lugs h forming a connection for the con 
necting-rod or pitman , by which the plate 
is connected with the sectional rim or collar 
J, fitted upon the eccentric K of the lever L, 
 
55 
Attached to or formed upon the under sur- 5o 
which latter is pivoted at i to the outer end 45 
of the extension E, so that by reciprocating 
the lever L the eccentric K, acting through 
the collar J and pitman I, will reciprocate the 
.knife-plate H in the notches or ways c. 
faces of the strips c', formed by making the 
slots e in the knife-plate H, are the inclined 
lugs j, to which the knives fare secured by 
suitable screws or bolts, and upon the under 
surface of the strips c, formed by making the 
slotse, are formed or secured the lugs j', which 
are oppositely inclined to the lugsj, and to the 
lugs i' are secured by suitable screws or bolts 
the knives f', so that these knives f slant in 
the opposite direction from the knives f, thus 6o 
adapting the cutting-plate H, when recipro 
cated, to cut in both directions, the knives f 
cutting when the plate His drawn forward in 
the direction of the arrow, and the knives f' 
cutting when the plate His showed backward. 
This double action of the knives makes the 
device very rapid in its action, and, owing to 
the arrangement of the eccentric-lever L, the 
device is very easy to operate; and as a whole 
the machine is very cheap, durable, and prac 
tical for its purpose. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The slicing device comprising the base A, 
having the extension D, the frame F, having 
legs bolted to the base A, said frame also hav 
ing an extension, E, bolted at its downwardly 
projecting end to the outer end of the base 
extension D, and the knife-plate H, adapted 8o 
to bear and guided in notches e in the upper 
inner edges of the frame-legs, and carrying 
the oppositely-disposed cutting-knives, and 
means to reciprocate said knife-plate. 
65 
75 
THEODORE. A. COOK. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN CRAWFORD, 
WILLIAM COOKE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301785.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 301,785. 
J. AMSLER-LAFF0N. 
PERMANENT FIRE ESCAPE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 8, 1884. 
 
7%terses, 
66/624. 
FS 
O 
g: 
alco (6-1--a-62-3.77% 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 301,785, 
X 
 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2; 
J, AMSLER-LAFFON. 
PERMANENT FIRE ESCAPE, 
Patented July 8, 1884. 
7ty f' 
Zazeeve 67: 
2,3 ... 
e-1- 22 62% 
reTERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 301,785. 
J. AMSLER-LAFF0N. 
PERMANENT FIRE ESCAPE. 
- 
w 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
- 
Patented July 8, 1884. 
 
Az 9 
7% vesses, 
- Zaz-e-e2 for: 
peers, photo-ithographer, Washington, 
a 22-ye eae 
(No Model.) 
t 
- 
No. 301,785. 
J. AMSLER-LAFFON. 
PERMANENT FIRE ESCAPE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented July 8, 1884. 
 
WITNESSES 
(2-cov e/?a6-06/. 
INVENTOR 
Jacal Ams/e7 Zz7% 
Attorneys: 
pitters, Photo-Lithographer. Wairs" O. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB AMSLER-LAFFON, OF SCHAFFEIAUSEN, SWITZERLAND. 
PERMAN ENT FIRE - ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 301,785, dated July 8, 1884. 
Application filed June 19, 1883. 
(No model.) 
55 
. 
... 
To all whom it may conce77 : 
side bars and part of the connecting-rounds 
Beitknown that I, JACOBAMSLER-LAFFON, 
being shown in this figure. Fig. 7 is a sideView 
a citizen of Switzerland, residing at Schaff. 
of the ladder shown in Fig. 6 when in a closed 
hausen, in the Canton of Schaffhausen and Re 
position. Fig. 8 is a front view of a ladder 
public of Switzerland, have invented certain 
having angular side bars and telescopically 
new and useful Improvements in Permanent 
sliding connecting-rounds. Fig. 8 is a cross 
Fire-Escape Ladders; and I do hereby declare 
section through the line lm of Fig. 8. Fig. 8 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
is a cross-section through the line o of the 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
same figure. Fig. 9 is a view of a building, 
others skilled in the art to whichitappertains to 
representing two ladders in front and side ele 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
vation, and showing the guard-railing applied 
the accompanying drawings, and to letters or 
to an angular or inclined ladder-section. Fig. 
figures of reference marked thereon, which 
10 is a detail view illustrating the operation 
form a part of this specification. 
of the retaining and releasing devices, and 
This invention relates to that class of per 
Fig. 11 illustrates the pneumatic signal. 
manent fire-escapes which consist, essentially, 
The letter A designates a metallic bar, which 
of a folding ladder made of two side bars or 
is made of channel-iron, of any desired form 
beams and pivoted connecting-rounds or tread 
in cross-section; and Mis another bar of a cor 
surfaces, one of the side bars being secured to 
responding form, which is connected with the 
the Wall of a building, and the other being free 
bar. A by means of rounds or tread-pieces a, 
to move in an outward and downward direc 
that are connected with both bars by hinge or 
tion therefrom to bring the connecting-rounds 
pivot joints, as is shown in Fig. 1", and are 
or tread-surfaces into a horizontal position 
either made tubular or solid. These 
parts 
when the ladder is to be used as a fire-escape. 
constitute a folding ladder, in which the rounds 
The invention consists in means for holding 
or tread-pieces fold into the hollow space 
the ladder in a closed or folded position, in a 
formed when the two side bars of the ladder 
novel construction of the ladder whereby it 
are brought together, as is shown in Fig. 3. 
will adapt, itself to angles or cornices or other 
The bar A is secured to the front of a build 
projections on the front of a building and per 
ing by brackets, clamps, or other fastening 
mit a safe descent therefrom, and in a pneu 
devices, and constitutes the permanent mem 
matic-signal device arranged in a novel man 
ber of the ladder, the other parts being free to 
ner for giving Warning to the occupant of a 
move in a downward and outward direction 
building that danger is impending, or that the 
therefrom. 
ladder is in position for use. 
In Figs. 1 to 4, inclusive, I have shown a lad 
In the drawings, Figure1 is a front view of a 
der adapted for a straight-walled building, 
straightfire-escapeladder, showing the samein 
and means for holding the ladder in a folded 
an open or unfolded position. Fig. 1"is a cross 
position and releasing the same when it is to 
section through the line g h of Fig.1. Fig. 2 is 
be brought into a position for ready use. 
an elevation showing the ladder in a closed or 
These retaining and releasing devices consist 
folded position. Fig. 3 is a vertical section of 
of push-buttons and pins B, which are located 
the closed or folded ladder and the means for 
in the different stories of the building, and 
releasing or tripping the same from the inte 
operate in shells or guide-tubes B, fitted in 
rior of a building. Fig. 3" is a cross-section 
the wall of the building. 
through the linea, b of Fig. 3. Fig. 4 is a ver 
At the back of the bar A of the ladder are 
tical section through the line e if of Fig. 1 
arranged bell-crank or elbow levers O, the 
showing more fully the means for locking and 
vertical arms of which extend in front of the 
releasing the ladder. Fig. 5 is a face view of 
push-pins B, so that they can be rocked there- . 
an escape-ladder having an angular section in 
by. A vertical wire or rod,P, connected with 
terposed between two straight sections. Fig. 
the bell-crank levers belonging to the push 
5. is a cross-section taken through the line ik buttons of the different stories of the building, 
of Fig. 5. Fig. 6 is another form of ladder lies in the bar A, and is attached at its upper 
having an angular side section, only one of the end to one end of a centrally-pivoted lever or 
75 
95 
IOO 
Io 
20 
25 
3C) 
35 
45 
 
w 
30,785 
3O 
arm, Q, the other end of said lever carrying a 
rod or wire, R, which is connected with a suit 
able number of spring-hooks, S, that are piv 
oted to the permanent bar A of the latter. 
5 These hooks engage with projections T on the 
inner side of the movable bar of the ladder, 
it being obvious that when said movable bar 
is brought against the permanent bar the 
hooks engage in an automatic manner with 
Io the projections and hold the ladder closed. 
The tripping of the ladder can only be effect 
ed from the inside of the building, as the re 
taining devices are only capable of being re 
leased by means of the push-buttons and rods 
15 and the devices operated thereby. In the 
event of a fire or other cause rendering the 
use of the ladder necessary, any one of the 
pushbuttons can be resorted to for releasing 
the fastening-hooks S, and then the ladder will 
assume the position shown in Fig. 1 and be 
ready for use. Simultaneously with the open 
ing of the ladder a pneumatic signalis sound 
ed in one or more parts of the building, warn 
ing the occupants that danger or fire is at 
25 hand. This pneumatic signal is operated by 
means of a flexible air bulb or bellows, U, that 
is arranged inside the stationary ladder-bar, 
and is held in a collapsed or inoperative state 
by the pressure of one of the ladder-rounds 
upon the same. When this pressure is re 
moved by the opening or unfolding of the lad 
der, a spring, V, connected with the air-bulb 
or bellows and with the bar A, serves to dis 
tend or inflate said bulb or bellows, causing a 
35 suction of air through the pneumatic signal, 
which maybe in the form of a horn or whistle. 
It is also proposed to operate a signal or bell 
electrically by means of an electrical circuit, 
and using a circuit breaker and closer, W, 
which is arranged on the ladder-bar A, and 
co-operates with the movable part of said lad 
der. 
In Figs. 5 to 9, inclusive, I have repre 
sented various forms of folding ladders having 
45 angular or inclined sections or parts for adapt 
ing the same to buildings possessing angles, 
cornices, or other projections. 
In Fig. 5 the permanent side bar, A, has 
the angular or inclined section A, and the 
movable bar is divided and has the interme 
diate angular section, M, which is connected 
with the angular section A' by the pivoted 
rounds or tread-pieces, the lower end of the 
angular section. A resting upon the top of the 
55 subjacent bar A when the ladder is in an open 
position. On closing the ladder an extension, 
a', of the tread-piece next adjoining the an 
gular section M comes against the lower end 
of the latter, and when the parts are folded 
6o together they assume the position shown in 
dotted lines in Fig. 5. 
O 
In Fig. 6the angular section M ofthe mova 
ble bar M is shown connected with the latter 
by means of pivoted lever-links M, which, 
when the ladder is closed, assume the position 65 
shown in Fig. 7 and cause the component 
parts of the ladder to lie close together, as will 
be readily understood. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 8, IOver 
come the necessity of employing an independ- 7o 
ent intermediate section, and can make the 
outer bar, M, of a continuous length, having 
the properangular position M'. This is ren 
dered possible by using connecting-rounds a, 
made of telescopically-sliding sections-that 75 
is, each round is formed of a tubular part and a 
solid part that enters and can slide in said 
tubular part. 
It will be manifest that a ladder having an 
angular or inclined section following the con- 8o 
tour of the building can be used as a safe 
means of descent, and in order to prevent any 
stepping off from the angular Section of the 
ladder it is proposed to attach a guard-rail 
ing, W, thereto. This railing consists of arms 85 
extending at right angles to the bar M and 
vertical arms running parallel with the latter 
and connected with the other bars of the rail 
Ing. 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a permanent fire-escape for buildings, 
the combination, with a folding ladder, of the 
retaining-hooks S, the vertical rods PR, the 95 
lever or arm Q, bell-crank levers O, and push 
buttons and pins B, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. In a permanent fire-escape for buildings, 
the combination of a folding ladder having an Ico 
angular or inclined intermediate section and 
means, substantially as described, for connect 
ing the same with straight top and bottom sec 
tions, as herein set forth. 
the combination of a folding ladder having 
side bars made with an angular or inclined 
portion and telescopically-sliding rounds for 
connecting said inclined portions, substan 
tially as herein set forth. 
4. In a permanent fire-escape for buildings, 
the combination, with a folding ladder, of an 
air-bulb or bellows having a distending-spring, 
with a pneumatic signal, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
Having thus described my invention, what I go 
3. In a permanent fire-escape for buildings, Io5 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
JACOB AMSLEIR-LAFFON, 
Witnesses: 
TUL. A. BOURRY, 
JOHN FREY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301885.txt	(No Model.) 
E. D. HAWEN, 
FIRE PLACE, 
 
 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
K? 
EGBERT DEWEY HAVEN, OF ALBANY, OREGON. 
FIRE-PLACE. 
3?FCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 301,885, dated July 15, 1884. 
Application filed November 30, 1883. (No model.) 
25 
the top in a cylindrical projection, B, adapted 
To all whon it naty concern, 
to fit in a box, b, secured in the chimney-flue, 
Be it known that I, EGBERT D. HAVEN, of 
having sufficient play therein to allow the 
Albany, in the county of Linn and State of 
frame to be placed in position or removed 
Oregon, have invented certain new and useful 
without cramping. The hearth F, supporting 
Improvements in Fire-Places; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
the ash-pan J, the fender f, secured to the 
hearth and fire-place frame, and the grate G, 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
are all to be so constructed and attached that 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
they will swing with the back. The outside 
pertains to make and use the same. 
edge of the fire-place frame is provided with 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
a groove, d, adapted to receive the inner edges, 
fire-places, the object of the same being to 
d", of the panels D. These panels D are se 
provide a fire-place which may be reversed so 
cured to the stationary frame K at the sides 
as to face either of two adjoining rooms when 
of the arch by the arms I, pivoted to the pan 
the fire is not lighted, or when it is freely 
els and stationary frame. These panels D are 
burning. 
furthermore provided with the projecting 
With this end in view my invention con 
curved-faced lugs i, adapted to engage the 
sists, first, in a fire-place adapted to be placed 
short arms c, attached to the spindles of the 
in an arch of a chimney between two rooms, 
knobs C. By turning the knob C this arm c. 7o 
and provided with a pivotal point at the base, 
lifts upward and backward upon the lug i, 
upon which the fire-place is allowed to rotate 
2O horizontally; secondly, in a fire-place having 
thus raising the panel D out of the grooved, 
and allowing the fire-place to revolve. This 
a pivotal point bearing at the base upon which 
reversible fire-place affords an opportunity of 
the fire-place is allowed a rotary motion, and 
heating two adjoining rooms with the same 75 
provided at the top with a journal bearing in a 
fireby leaving it one-half reversed, or of trans 
box placed in the chimney-flue; thirdly, in 
ferring the fire from a room which it is de 
movable panels adapted to tightly inclose the 
sired to air by opening the windows or doors 
space about the revolving fire-place. 
to a room where the heat is in the meantime 
My invention further consists in certain 
needed. The panels D are so closely fitted to 
features of construction and combination of 
the grooves d that one room is effectually shut 
parts, as will be fully described, and pointed 
off when desired. The back of the fire-place 
Out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
may be ornamented in such a manner as to add 
to the appearance of the room toward which 
a front view. Fig. 2 is a side view showing 
it is, for the time being, turned. 
the position of the fire-place when half re 
It is evident that slight changes may be 
versed. 
Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sectional 
made in the construction and bearings of this 
view, and Fig. 4 is a transverse section at the 
fire-place without departing from the spirit of 
top of the grate. 
my invention. For example, the cup-bearing 
A represents the back of the fire-place, con 
may be in the bottom of the fire-place and 9o 
structed of iron or other suitable material, 
pivotal point below; hence I do not limit my 
and formed in any desired shape consistent 
self to the exact construction set forth in the 
With a good draft. This back may be lined 
With brick or other suitable material, and 
above; but, 
- 
Having fully described my invention, what 
provided with projections a, for supporting the 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let- 95 
grate G. The bottom a and sides a of the 
fire-place may be formed integral with the 
ters Patent, is 
1. A reversible fire-place, the upper end of 
back, or fastened securely thereto in any suit 
which forms both an exit-flue and bearing for 
able manner. The bottoma is provided with 
the fire-place. 
a pivotal point, H, situated at or near the 
vertical line through the center of gravity. 
place, the upper end of which forms both an 
5o This point H is adapted to rest in the cup 
bearing h. The fire-place frameterminates at exit-flue and upper bearing for said fire-place, 
2. The combination, with a reversible fire- IOc 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
- 
- 
55 
85 
O 
 
2 
301.885 
IC 
of a box secured in the chimney-flue for the 
reception of the upper end of the fire-place, 
and the step h, on which the fire-place rests. 
3. The combination, with a reversible fire 
5 place, the upper end of which is formed into 
a pipe which fits into a bearing and forms 
both an exit-flue and upper bearing, of a box 
secured in the flue, and constructed to receive 
the upper open end of the fire-place. 
4. The combination, with a reversible fire 
place, of adjustable panels located on each 
side of the fire-place, substantially asset forth. 
5. The combination, with a reversible fire 
place, of adjustable panels located on each 
I5 side of the fire-place and common to two ad 
joining compartments, substantially as set 
forth. 
6. The combination, with a reversible fire 
place provided with a grooved edge, of ad 
2O justable panels adapted to fit in said grooved 
edges, substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination, with a reversible fire 
place, of panels located on each side of the 
fire-place, and devices connected with said 
panels for moving them toward and from said 25 
fire-place, substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination, with a reversible fire 
place and adjustable panels, of knobs having 
arms attached to their spindles, said arms be 
ing adapted to engage with projections on said 3o 
panels, whereby the panels may be moved to 
ward and from the fire-place, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib- 35 
ing witnesses. 
EGBERT DEWEY HAVEN. 
Witnesses: 
JAs. F. CROSETT, 
EDWID. CHATTIIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US301986.txt	(No Model.) 
J. HILTON 
INSERTIBLE CUTTING TOOTH. 
No. 30 1986, 
Patented July 15, 1884, 
N2NN. A. &. 
SSN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Af42 6. A. 
2ZSSZA, 
a 
Attest. 
Azzczz Zor. 
Z64%. 2lez Zez. 2162244 
PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washingtan, D. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES HILTON, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
NSERTIBLE CUTTING-TOOTH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 301,986, dated July 15, 1884. 
Application filed November 24, 1883. (No model.) 
IO . 
25 
So all, whom it in?t 7 concern, 
Zen of the United States, residing in Newark, 
in Essex county, State of New Jersey, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Inserted Saw-Teeth, fully described and 
represented in the following specification and 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of the 
Sale. 
This invention consists in an improved 
means of securing a removable tooth in a saw 
blade, and in a modification of the same for 
Setting the tooth at several distances beyond 
the edge of the blade to compensate for wear. 
The construction will be understood from 
the inclosed drawings, in which Figure 1 is a 
side view of a part of a circular saw, showing 
three slots, which are provided with teeth, 
upon One of which teeth the button is riveted, 
Fig.2 shows a section of the saw-plate, tooth, 
and button on the line acac in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
is a longitudinal section through the center of 
the tooth and saw-plate, as shown at the mid 
dle of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 represents a portion of 
mill-saw plate, showing two slots having teeth 
inserted therein, the slot at the left hand hav 
ing the button shown in its locking position, 
and that at the right turned lengthwise of the 
slot to permit the removal of the tooth. Fig. 
5 is a front edge view of the right-hand tooth, 
shown in Fig. 4 as removed from the slot. 
Fig. 6 is a section of the saw-plate, slot, tooth, 
and button on line YY in Fig. 4. 
The slot C shown in the drawings is formed 
with V-shaped edges or guides A, to aid in 
holding the tooth laterally in the slot, the 
shank B of the tooth T being of correspond 
ing form. In Fig. 1 the base of the slot C is 
shown formed with a circular enlargement or 
recess, C, into which the root of the tooth 
(shown at B) penetrates, and in which it is 
secured by the button D, shaped to fit the en 
largement C, and recessed into one side of the 
tooth flush with the surface of the saw-plate 
E. The Shank B is made of the same thick 
lness as the saw-plate, and to admit the button 
plate the root of 
flush with the surface of the 
the shank is rabbeted to one-half its full thick 
neSS where it coincides with the recess. The 
5O button is shown in the section at Fig.2 as one 
half the thickness of the tooth or plate, and is 
secured to the root of the tooth by the rivet F, 
lBe it known that I, JAMES HILTON, a citi. which is preferably made of copper or otherma 
terial adapted to head easily after the tooth and 
button are inserted in their respective places. 
It is obvious that the location of the button in 
the recess at the base of the tooth effectually 
prevents the withdrawal of the latter from the 
slot, and resists all movement of the tooth in a 
radial or other direction. The slot at the left 
of Fig. 1, and the shank of the tooth fitted to 
it are shown of tapering form, by which con 
struction the tooth can be wedged more firmly 
to its seat in the saw-plate, and such construc 
tion is well adapted for teeth which may be 
permanently fixed in the slot; but Fig. 4 shows 
a construction of the tooth made to be par 
tially set out from the slot, and thereby put 
into a more effective or prominent position 
when the working-edge is partly worn down. 
In such a construction I form a similar recess, 
C, at two or more points in the sides of the 
slot, and construct the button to fit either re 
cess. The tooth may therefore be situated in 
the slot with the button opposite to either re 
cess, and it is secured in that position by riv 
eting the button in place, as before stated. 
To facilitate the adjustment of the tooth in 
more than one position, and to secure the for 
mation of the required enlargements close to 
gether, I form the button of oblong shape, as 
shown in Figs. 4, 5, and 6, constructing it pref 
erably of thin metal adapted to spring at the two 
ends when riveted to the shank of the tooth. 
At the left side of Fig. 4 the tooth is shown 
with the button turned in its locking position 
in the lower recess, C, while at the right side of 
the same figure the tooth is shown situated 
with the button opposite the upper recess, 
and the same turned lengthwise of the shank, 
so that the tooth may be withdrawn from the 
slot. To detach the ends of the button from 
the recess C, they require to be sprung out 
from the shank of the tooth, as shown in Fig. 
6, and can then be turned into the position 
shown in Fig. 4, when the tooth may be with 
drawn from the slot or shifted to a new posi 
tion. In the latter case the ends of the button 
are again sprung outward while turning it 
into the transverse or locked position shown 
at the left of Fig. 4. To bend the button in 
the manner described, it requires to be made 
45 
55 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
301,986 
of Spring steel or brass, and of a thickness 
adapted to yield; but it is obvious that the ob 
long button may be made of greater thickness 
than is shown in the drawings, and detached 
5 from the recess C by punching out the rivet F 
whenever it is desired to remove the tooth, the 
Same as would be done with the circular button 
shown in Fig. 1, and that the button thus may 
be similarly adapted for shifting the tooth 
IO outward instead of by prying up the ends, as 
indicated in the drawings. 
I am aware that teeth have been secured in 
an outwardly-tapering slot by a circular but 
ton applied to a recess in the base of the slot; 
 I5 but in such construction the button was in 
tended merely to prevent the retraction of 
the tooth, and was secured in place by ex 
pensive interlocking projections, while my 
Construction precludes the movement of the 
2O tooth in either direction, and may be used for 
Setting the tooth outward when worn, as de 
Scribed above. 
I alm also aware that teeth have been fitted 
into slots having V-shaped edges or guides, 
25 and held in place by removable gib recessed 
into the Saw-plate at both ends of such gib; 
but in such construction, as in many others 
for the same purpose, the saw-plate requires 
perforations apart from the slot, and is much 
3o more liable to be cracked in hardening when 
perforated to receive rivets. It is also much 
more liable to be sprung by the rivets when 
inserted in the plate or in contact with one 
edge of the slot than when they are confined 
35 exclusively to the inserted pieces, as in my 
From my description and drawings it will 
be seen that my invention dispenses with the 
insertion of all livets in contact with the saw 
As the rivet in my construction is ap 
plied solely to the shank of the tooth and its 
detached button, no strain is thrown upon the 
saw-plate in securing the teeth therein, both 
the shalnk and the button being properly 
4o plate. 
invention. 
- 
fitted to the saw-plate before the rivet is in 
troduced, and then clinched or riveted in 
place, not affecting the saw-plate either di 
rectly or indirectly. My invention not only 
affords a convenient method of inserting and 
removing the teeth, which latter may be done 
by punching out the rivet or turning the but 
ton, as shown herein, but it obviates the ne 
cessity of straightening the saw-plate after the 
insertion of the tooth. 
At T in Fig. 4 is drawn the outline of a 
tooth or cutter for a reaper or mower, to in 
dicate that such teeth may be attached to the 
upper side of the cutter-bar by facing the 
same with a plate slotted as herein described. 
It will be seen from the above that I do not 
claim the mere combination of a removable 
tooth with a locking-button, but the construc 
tion for the edges of the slot which holds the 
shank of the tooth laterally, and the construc 
tion for the button which enables the teeth to 
be set outward, if desired, and in any case pre 
vent the riveting from affecting the saw-blade. 
Itherefore claim 
1. The combination, with the slot C, hav 
ing guides A and enlargement C, of the shank 
B, fitted longitudinally to said guides and pro 
vided with the rabbet at its root, and the but 
ton D, secured to the rabbeted root of the tooth 
and fitted to the enlargement C, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, with the slot C, hav 
ing guides A and two or more enlargements, 
C, of the rabbeted shank B, provided with the 
button D, arranged and operated as described, 
to lock the tooth at several distances beyond 
the edge of the saw-plate, substantially as 
shown and described. 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
JAMES IIILTON. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. S. CRANE, 
H. TIIEBERATII. 
45 
5 5 
SO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302086.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 302,086. 
G. W. BARTON. 
FISHERMAN'S MINNOW BUCKET, 
Patented at 15, 1884. 
 
t1. -- 
 
  
. 
----------------------- 
- - - - - - - - - --- R 
- - - - - - - - - - - 
- - - - - - - - - - - 
 
WITNESSES: 
a-13 
44 year 
- - - - 
  
an 1A it 
- - - - - - - - - 
a. 
W. By law 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. BARTON, OF BETHLEHEM, KENTUCKY. 
FISHERMAN's MINNow-BUCKET. 
r 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 302,086, dated July 15, 1884. 
Application filed February 24, 1883. (No model.). 
. . 
. 
TO 
25 
from the notch, so that the false bottom may 
To all, whom, it may concern, 
Beit, known that I, GEORGE W. BARTON, 
be raised and lowered in the bucket, I adapt 
of Bethlehem, in the county of Henry and the tube E and false bottom to be turned ax 
State of Kentucky, have invented a new and 
ially upon the rod B, so that the catches may 
Improved Fisherman's Minnow - Bucket, of 
be moved out of line with the notch in the 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
rod, thus leaving the bottom free to be forced 
downward against the tension of the spring 
description. 
. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
by the hand, or to be suddenly forced upward 
by the spring F. 
fishermen's minnow-buckets; and it consists in 
the peculiar construction and arrangement of 
In the form of bucket shown in Fig. 1 the 
projections a a are to be disengaged from the 
parts, as hereinafter fully described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
loops b b for raising and lowering the false 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
bottom by simply drawing the rods toward 
dra Wings, forming part of this specification, in 
each other, thus leaving the false bottom free 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
to be either raised or lowered by the rods D 
responding parts in all the figures. 
D by hand. A minnow-bucket made in this 
Figure l is a sectional elevation of my new 
manner is very convenient, since the minnows 
and improved minnow-bucket, the false bot 
in the bucket may all be raised to the surface 
tom being adapted to be raised by hand. Fig. 
of the water in the bucket and caught in the 
2 is a sectional elevation of the bucket, the 
hand without rolling up the sleeves and delv 
false bottom being adapted to be raised by a 
ing the hand into the water, as must be done 
Spring; and Fig. 3 is a sectional plan view 
with the ordinary form of minnow-bucket. 
taken on the line acac of Fig. 2. 
Besides, the bucket is cheap and durable. 
The body A of the bucket is of the ordinary . 
Instead of using the several catches ff, a 
single pivoted spring-operated catch may be 
form. In the center of the bottom of the 
used, which may be locked out of engagement 
bucket A is secured the vertical rod B, upon 
which the false bottom C is placed. The false 
with the notches i when desired, thus obviat 
bottom is perforated with numerous small. 
ing the necessity of turning the tube E and 
holes, and is, by preference, slightly dished or 
bottom C when it is desired to raise or lower 
concaved, and in the form of bucket shown in 
the false bottom in the bucket. 
Fig. 1 is provided with the vertical spring 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
rods DD, which pass up through the loops bb, 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
secured to the rod B near its upper end, and 
Patent, is-- 
these rods are provided with the series of cor 
1. In a fishermans minnow - bucket, the 
35 responding projections, a ct, that are adapted 
combination, with a central guide-rod secured 
to rest upon the loops b b, for supporting the 
to its bottom, of a false bottom sliding on said 
false bottom at any desired depth in the 
guide-rod, and provided with a handle hav 
ing spring-catches engaging with the guide 
bucket. 
In the form of bucket shown in Figs. 2 and 
rod, substantially as shown and described. 
AO 3, instead of the spring-rods D D, the false 
2. In a fisherman's minnow - bucket, the 
bottom C is provided with the central tube, E, 
combination, with a guide-rod, B, secured to 
which fits over the rod B, and upon the rod B, 
its bottom and provided with notches i, of a 
perforated false bottom, C, provided with the 
under the false bottom, is placed the coiled 
Spring. F, for forcing the false bottom upward. 
apertured tube E, spring-catches.f, secured to 
said tube, and spring F, surrounding the guide 
For holding the false bottom in this construc 
tion at any desired depth in the bucket I 
rod and arranged between the false bottom 
form in the rod B the stop-notch i, and pro 
and the bottom of the bucket, substantially 
vide the tube E with the series of spring 
as shown and described. . 
catches ff, the ends of which reach through 
small slots in the tube, so as to be adapted to 
engage with the notch i, as will be understood. 
from Fig. 2; and for disengaging the catches 
... GEORGE W. BARTON. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. BOOTH, 
L. B. HALL. 
45 
- 
5 
so s 
9O 
95 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302186.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 302,186. 
I. M., AWERY. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT. 
Patented July 
S. se 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
SS 
 
 
 
 
 
ISH 
%III.7. See 
. sys 
AEI 
 
S 
S S 
N s 
N CSS 
 
SS S 
 
2 . 
 
 
Wass 6 
(ita 
2%---4- 
y --it- 
"ey A.4.4.4.1% Sis 
Yv wto Y 
rvg Avery 
..., e 
 
meters, Poto-Llosapler. Wasmagot. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
I. M. AWERY. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 302,186. 
 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT. 
Patented July 15, 1884. 
 
 
peers. Photo-Lithographer. Washi 
tor. 8. C. 
31, vvy m 
twww.y 
%2774 
ws att's 
16% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IRWING MI. AVERY, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT. 
3PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent (No. 302,186, dated July 15, 1884. 
Application filed May 22, 1884. (No model.) 
fo (t/l, Luhon it naily concern, 
Be it known that I, IRVING. M. AVERY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Mechanical Movements, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention consists in the combination, 
With an oblique disk mounted on an actuating 
arm or shaft, of a lever or arm which connects 
by means of a hinge or joint with a slide or 
pitman, So that when the actuating-shaft is 
turned or Operated a reciprocating motion is 
imparted to the slide or pitman. On the actu 
ating-shaft may also be mounted a can for 
further utilizing the actuations of the shaft. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation, partly in section in the plane 
2f ), Fig. 3. Fig. 2 is an end view, partly in 
section. Fig. 3 is an inverted plan view. 
Fig. 4 shows means for holding removable 
plates in place, being a section in the plane w 
ac, Fig. 3. 
' The remaining figures show details, herein 
after referred to. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter A designates a 
shaft which is mounted in suitable bearings, 
SO that a revolving or rocking motion can be 
imparted to it. On this shaft is firmly secured 
a circular disk, B, which is placed in an ob. 
lique position toward the shaft. On this disk 
is placed a strap, C, from which extends a le 
ver, D, and this lever connects by a ball-and 
Socket joint, c, with a slide or pitman, E. The 
strap C is made to overlap the edges of the 
disk B, and it is held in position by a ring 
plate, a, which is fastened to it by screw b. 
Instead of this, however, the disk B might be 
provided with a groove in its periphery, to 
receive the strap in the same manner as straps 
are usually connected to eccentrics; or any 
other desired means may be employed for con 
necting the lever D and the disk B-for ex 
ample, the disk B may be made in two parts, 
between which the lever D may be placed. 
When the shaft A is revolved, an oscillating 
motion is imparted to the lever D by the ob 
lique disk B, the position of which in relation 
to the shaft changes. By the action of the le 
ver D a reciprocating motion is imparted to 
55 
6) 
65 
the slide or pitman E. The end of the pit 
man E, which is connected by the ball-joint c 
to the lever D, is free to follow the motion of 
that end of the lever ID, with which said pit 
man E is connected, so as to prevent any 
Of course it will be readily seen 
crowding. 
that a hinge-joint-for example, of the con 
struction of a door-hinge-will accomplish the 
same purpose as the ball-and-socket joint c; 
but I prefer a ball-and-socket joint, as being 
easy of construction, and also allowing more 
freedom of motion, and avoiding any liability 
to break in case any lateral jar or motion 
should occur. On the shaft A is also mounted 
a cam, F, which cam, on the revolution of the 
shaft, imparts motion to a cam-lever, G. This 
cam-lever G is adapted to oscillate or turn' 
about a fulcrum, I, which fulcrula is formed 
on a fulcrum-block, K. (Shown in detail in 
Fig. 5, which represents a section in the plane 
a; ac, Fig. 2.) This fulcrum-block Kis adapted 
to be set in a higher or lower position in a slot 
in the standard or support L, and to be held 
at any desired position by a clamping-screw, 
M. By adjusting the fulcrum I nearer to or 
farther from the cam F, the throw or motion of 
that end of the lever G which is not connected 
to the cam F will become greater or less, as 
desired, and a regulation of motion is thus ob 
tained. The end of the cam-lever G which is 
not connected to the cam F communicates by 
a ball-joint or other suitable joint with the . 
connecting link or lever H, and impartsmo 
tion to it. The connecting link or lever His 
85 
hinged or pivoted to a universal joint, N, form 
ing the fulcrum for said connecting lever or . 
link H., so that the ends of said lever or link 
Hare free to move laterally, as well as up and 
down. Thus any movement which is imparted 
to the connecting-link H. by the cam-lever G 
will be readily partaken of by said connect 
ing-link H. 
As an example of the applicability of the 
mechanical movement above set forth, I have 
shown the same applied to a sewing-machine, 
where the slide or pitman E may serve to op 
erate the shuttle-carrier, while the connecting 
link H may serve to operate the feed-dog O, 
Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is a section in the plane & 2, 
Fig. 3. 
Of course I do not confine myself to the Tic 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
: 
302, 186 
55 
To conveniently gain access to the mechan 
ism, I may provide the base-plate P with open 
ings covered by sliding plates Q, held from 
accidental displacement by a retaining-spring, 45 
R; but I make no claim to such features. 
of my invention in a sewing-machine, as the 
same may be applied for any other purpose 
for which it is serviceable. 
I am aware that the United States Patent 
No. 171,572, of December 28, 1875, shows a 
mechanical movement having a shaft, an ob 
Imake no claim to the particular link shown 
lique disk, a lever, a slide, and a swivel-pin i which connects the lower end of the lever G 
in which the lever slides, and such I do not 
with the lever H, as such is not my invention. 
claim; but it should be noticed that I dispense 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
With a swivel-pin and employ a ball-joint or 
by Letters Patent, is 
hinge-joint to connect the lever D and pitman 
1. The combination of the shaft A, oblique 
E. By this arrangement I dispense with the 
disk B, oscillating lever D, pitman E, and a 
guides in which moves the slide in the con 
ball-and-socket joint, c, connecting the lever 
struction of said Patent No. 171,572, thus 
and pitman, to permit the end of the latter to 
cheapening the construction of the device and 
easily follow the motion of that end of the le. 
diminishing the friction and wear. 
ver with which said pitman is connected, sub 
I am also aware that United States Letters 
stantially as described. 
Patent No. 67,752, of August 13, 1867, show a 
2. The combination, with the oblique disk 
lever having an adjustable fulcrum and joined 
B and calm F, mounted on a common arm or 
to a connecting-link; but said Patent No. 
shaft, A, of a lever or pendent arm, D, and 
67,752 does not show said devices in combi 
cam-lever G, substantially as set forth. 
nation with the oblique disk and its contigu 
3. The combination, with the oblique disk 
ous mechanism. By the combination of these 
B and cam F, mounted on a common arm or 
elements I am enabled to obtain complicated 
shaft, A, of a lever or pendent alm, D, and 
movements without the employment of any 
cam-lever G, provided with an adjustable 
splings or additional mechanism, and the 
fulcrum, I, substantially as set forth. 
movements are all continuous, avoiding any 
4. The combination, with the oblique disk 
jars or blows and consequent noise and sub 
B and Cam F. mounted on a common arm or 
jecting the parts to very little wear. 
shaft, A, of a lever or pendent arm, D, slide 
I would also call attention to the construc 
or pitman E, cam-lever G, and connecting 
tion of the ball-and-socket joint c, connecting 
link H, substantially as set forth. 
the lever D and pitman E. The ball or sphere 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
is formed at the end of lever D, and is received 
hand and seal in the presence of two subscrib 
in a cup or hollow in the pitman E, and which 
ing witnesses. 
cup or hollow is formed by the co-operation 
of two parts, each containing part of such cup 
or hollow. These two parts are joined at one 
end by a hinge-joint, d, and at the other by a 
screw, e, and as the ball and socket wear out 
the Wear can be compensated for by tighten 
ing the screw e. 
IRVING M. AVERY. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. C. HAUFF, 
W. PIAUFF. 
IO 
4C) 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302286.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 302,286. 
L., L., SAGEND ORPH. 
CORRUGATED IRON ROOFING, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 22, 1884. 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) , 
L. L. SAGEND ORPH, 
CORRUGATED IRON ROOFING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 302,286. 
Patented July 22, 1884, 
 
s2222222222222 - 
Vs 
Seruya 
&z 
O 
se 
S SS 
Ss 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
L. LEWIS SAGENDORPH, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE NEW 
YORK IRON ROOFING AND PAINT COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CORRUGATED RON ROO FING 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 302,286, dated July 22, 1884. 
Application filed February 23, 1883. Renewed June 7, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it naty concern. 
lapping edge of the sheet, which causes the 
Beit known that I, L. LEWIS SAGENDORPH, 
roof to leak, and also causes the iron to rust 
of the city of Cincinnati, in Hamilton county 
at the joint, and the roof thus wears out at the 
and State of Ohio, have invented certain new joints, while it is perfectly sound in other 
5 and useful Improvements in Corrugated Iron 
places. Another objection to this style of cor. 55 
Roofing, of which the following is a specifica 
rugated roof is that the lap must be so great 
tion. 
that considerable material is wasted or unnec 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
essarily used. 
new and improved joint for corrugated iron 
I prefer to use my invention in connection 
roofing, by which a saving of material is ef 
with such roofing as is hereinafter described, 6o 
fected at the same time that a more perfect 
viz: The body of the sheet is corrugated, as in 
and durable joint is made. 
the old style of roofing. One edge of each sheet 
The various features of my invention, and 
is provided with a W-crimp, B, and the other 
the advantages resulting from their use when 
edge of each sheet has a flange or half-V crimp, 
applied together, or when one or more of said 
C, turned at a right angle, or approximately 
features are applied without the remairider, 
Slch an angle, to the plane of the sheet. Then 
will be fully apparent from the following de 
the sheets are laid on the roof. The V-crimp 
at One edge of a sheet is placed over the half 
scription and claims. 
Referring to the drawings forming part of 
V crimp or flange of the adjoining sheet, and 
this specification, Figure 1 is a perspective 
a pair of roofing-tongs is caused to grasp the 7c 
view showing three sheets of corrugated roof 
V-crimp and flange, which are pinched tightly 
together, and this joint projects vertically 
ing. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged section showing the joint 
from the plane of the roof, and consequently 
between two sheets and the preferred means 
no Water can Work through, as in the other 
for connecting the sheets to the roof. Fig. 4 
style of corrugated roofing joint hereinbefore 75 
is a view in perspective of a portion of a cor 
rugated sheet having a half-V crimp, provided 
with slits for receiving a cleat, applied in the 
preferred manner of my invention. Fig. 5 is 
a perspective view of the lower or under side 
of a sheet, showing the end cleats or tongues 
for making a secure joint between the ends of 
the sheets. Figs. 6 and 7 are views illustrat 
ing the form of corrugated iron roofing and 
the manner of connecting it to the roof as 
heretofore employed. 
These latter figures are shown to enable me 
to more clearly definemy improvements. 
As ordinarily constructed, the sheets A are 
4o evenly corrugated from side to side, the cor 
rugations at the edges of the sheet being in all 
respects similar to those throughout the re 
mainder of the sheet, and when the sheets are 
laid on the roof M the corrugation at the edge 
5 of one sheet is caused to overlap the corruga 
tion at the edge of the adjoining sheet, as 
shown in Figs. 6 and 7, and a nail, n, is driven 
through these lapping edges into the roof 
boards. The objection urged to this joint is 
so that the water soon Works up under the over 
My invention relates to means for securing 
the sheet to the roof. The sheets may be cor. 
rugated or otherwise. 
Figs. 3 and 4, shown my invention as applied 
to corrugated sheeting provided with a V 
Crimp, Substantially such as hereinbefore de 
scribed. 
feet along the flange C, and near its upper 
edge, are a number of openings or slits, in, 
therein, and through each one of these slits in 
is respectively passed a cleat, D, one end, a, 
of which cleat is bent down and secured to the go 
roof, usually by hailing it thereto, as shown 
in Fig. 3. The portion b of the cleat is bent 
down, as shown, to allow the W-crimp of the 
next sheet to slip down over the flange and the 
cleats, after which the end d of the various 95 
cleats is bent over the V-crimp, as shown in 
Fig. 3, and the V-Crimp, flange, and each cleat 
are then tightly pinched together, making a 
tight joint and Securing the adjoining edges of 
the two corrugated sheets to the roof. 
At intervals of preferably about one to three 85 
For the purposes of illustration, I have, in So 
described. 
- 
65 
IOQ 
w 
 
3.02,286 
O 
If desired, instead of passing the cleats D 
through slits in the flange C, they may be bent 
over the top of the flange; but I prefer to in 
troduce the cleats through the flange, as they 
will then prevent any longitudinal movement 
of the sheets. 
Another feature of nay invention is as follows: 
In order to make a more perfect.joint between 
the ends of the sheets, I secure to the under 
side of one end of each sheet (preferably to 
that end which is to overlap the adjoining 
sheet) a number of short strips or cleats, E, 
(see Fig. 5,) one end of Said strips extending 
to or a little beyond the end of the sheet, the 
opposite end only of said strips being secured 
to the sheet. The first sheet having been laid 
and secured to the roof, the lower end of the 
adjoining sheet is caused to overlap the first 
sheet, the ends of the cleats being slipped un 
der the upper end of the first sheet, thus unit 
ing the adjoining ends of the sheets. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new and of my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
25 
1. In a metal roof, the corrugated sheets A, 
one sheet being provided at one edge with a 
W-crimp overlapping the flange C of the ad 
jacent sheet, said flange being provided with 
an opening or openings, In, in Combination 
with a cleat or cleats, D, one end, a, of the 
cleat being secured to the roof, and the cleat 
then passing up between the W-crimp and the 
flange, thence through slit in, then down be 
tween the flange and W-crimp, thence around 
the edge of the crimp, and up over and around 
the crimp, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
2. In a sheet-metal roof, the sheets A, one 
end of each sheet being provided with the 
cleats E, secured to the under side thereof 4O 
near one end, the end of said cleats being 
adapted to slip under the end of an adjoining 
sheet, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
35 
L. LEWIS SAGENDORPH. 
Witnesses: 
J. W.M. STREHL, 
E. R. H.ILL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302387.txt	(No Model.) 
G. ENGEL. 
No. 302,387. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SUGAR, MIXING AND COOLING APPARATUS, 
Patented July 22, 1884. 
KAN 
2 
A 2 
7. 
s ? .9?????? 
R 
... refers. Photo-ithographer. Washington.. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GOTTFRIED ENGEL, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
 
SU GA R . MI i XI NG AN D C O O L N G A PPA RATUS. 
gPECIFICATION forming part of Latters Patent io. 302,387, dated July 22, 1384. 
Application filed January 18, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
65 
Be it known that I, GOTTFRIED ENGEL, of bearing, as shown. 
2O apparatus embodying my invention. 
To a// ?v}u??  ??? ???cern, : 
Brooklyn, county of Kings, State of New York, 
and a citizen of the United States, have in 
5 vented a Sugar Mixing and Cooling Appara 
tus, of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawing, forming part of this 
specification. 
to My invention relates to a machine or appa 
ratus for disintegrating and blowing air upon 
the particles of substances, and more particu 
larly for use in breaking or mixing and cooling 
sugars; and my invention consists in the parts 
I5 and devices and their combinations in the ap 
paratus hereinafter described, andas set forth 
and more particularly recited in the claims. 
In the drawing there is represented a verti 
cal central sectional view in perspective of an 
A is a cylinder, which is intended to be 
bolted by its upper flange to the ceiling of a 
room-say in a sugar-house. This cylinder is 
Open at its bottom, and is closed at the top by 
25 the ceiling, as stated. The cylinder thus con 
stitutes a chamber, A. 
B is a disk mounted to revolve in its hori 
Zontal plane on the end of the shaft C. Said 
disk B carries the pins b, which are placed 
3o near the periphery of the disk, and are per 
pendicular to the plane of the disk, as shown. 
B is a second disk, arranged horizontally 
within said chamber, below the disk B, and 
mounted, as shown, to revolve on a journal or 
35 bearing, C. This disk B is of somewhat 
greater diameter than the disk B, as shown, 
and upon its rim has the perpendicular or up 
right pins or postsb', which support and carry 
the frame or disk D above the disk B, from 
4o which frame or diskD depend the pins b, ar 
ranged within the line of the pins b of the disk 
B. The frame or disk D has a central open 
ing, d, through which enters the lower end of 
a hopper or spout, E, which it is intended 
45 shallpass upward through the ceiling, to which 
the cylinder A is secured, so that the material 
to be broken and cooled-such as sugar-may 
be thrown into the spout from the floor above. 
Upon the under face of the disk B are cast 
so or fixed the curved radial ribs or blower-arms 
F, as shown, and the disk B has the openings. 
-. 
G transversely through it around its hub or 
The shaft C is mounted vertically in a step 
at c, and the flange c'' of this step-piece jis se 
cured to the flange c of a hanger, c, depend 
ing from the wide cup c'. This cup is sup 
ported by the arms c, reaching from the lower 
rim of the cylinder A, and it in turn supports 
the upright journal or bearing c", arranged 
around the shaft C, and on which the lower 
disk is mounted. A pulley, c, drives the shaft 
C, being i.eyed to Salme below the cup c', and 
a pulley, c, drives the disk B, being keyed 
to the hollow shaft of the same, running on the 
bearing c". A pipe, c', serves the bearing c" 
with oil, said pipe extending from outside the 
cylinder A to said bearing. The overflow of 
oil from bearing c" passes into the cup c', and 
thence through a pipe, c', leading therefrom 
to the step c, where said overflow is used to 
lubricate the shaft C in said step. 
It is evident that the material to be broken 
and cooled-such as sugar-as it comes from 
the centrifugal machines in sugar-houses will, 
on being thrown into the hopper E, fall upon 
the disk B, and that said disk being rapidly re 
volved in one direction, while the disk. B' be 
ing rapidly revolved in the opposite direction, 
as is obvious may be done by means of the op 
erating mechanism described, the sugar will be 
carried or thrown to the circumference of the 
disk B, and on its way will be caught and 
broken up by the oppositely-moving sets of 
pins b, b, and b, and will thence be thrown off 
the periphery of the disk B and will fall down 
Ward across the opening or space between the 
circumferences of the adjacent disks B and B'; 
and, furthermore, it is evident that the blower 
arms or blades F, carried by disk B, will draw 
air up through the openings G and force the 
same Outthrough the space or opening between 
the rims of the disks B and B and blow the air 
across and into the falling sugar. By this 
means the sugar will be broken or disintegrated 
and cooled. 
The bearings and devices for lubricating the 
bearings of the shafts carrying the disks, &c., 
being wholly below the disks, it is obvious that 
they are most conveniently arranged for the 
operation of the machine without interfering 
with or damaging the sugar. The cooled and 
So 
85 
90 
95 
IOC) 
 
: 
302,387 
IO 
15 
disintegrated sugar falls downward through 
the open bottom of the cylinder A to the floor 
of the room, and may then be placed in barrels 
or Suitable packages. 
The pins carried by the disks may obviously 
be made in any desired form, and may be set 
at any desired angle to the face of the disk in 
which they are respectively mounted, and it is 
also obvious that the pins described may, in 
place of being set in the face of the disk, be 
fixed in radial arms carried upon the periph 
ery of the disk. It is furthermore evident 
that the blower-arms F may be carried by the 
lower disk, B, being fixed upon the upper face 
of the said disk B, or may be independently 
mounted upon the shaft C, so as to move in 
the same direction as one of the disks, without 
departing from the nature of this feature of my 
invention, which is to cause a current of air to 
be drawn in between the disks at the center 
thereof and forced out between their perime 
tel's to the falling sugar, as described. 
I find it desirable to employ the cylinder A, 
as described; but in some instances the inclos 
ing-chamber may be much larger relatively to 
the diameter of the disliks than is shown in the 
drawing, and the sugar be then allowed to fall 
directly from the rims of the disks without 
striking the chamber-wall. 
I am aware that a patent was issued to M. 
C. Coggs well on the 15th day of January, 18S4, 
numbered 292,100, for a purpose similar to the 
one herein described and claimed. I disclaim 
all that is set forth in said patent. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters IPatent, is 
1. In the described mixing and cooling ap 
pal'atus, the combination, in a chamber, A', 
of the connected horizontal revolving disks B 
45 
55 
and D, the latter provided with a central hori 
zontal opening, the oppositely-revolving disk 
B, between the disks B and D, and a feed-hop 
per, E, leading into the central opening in D 
onto the disk B, as and for the purpose de 
Scribed. 
2. In the described mixing and cooling ap 
paratus, the combination, in a chamber, A', of 
the connected horizontal revolving disks B 
and D, the latter supported upon and carried 
by the former and carrying a series of pins, b, 
theoppositely-revolving horizontal disk B, be 
tween the disks B and D, and carrying a se 
ries of pins, b, and a hopperleading into a cen 
tral opening in the disk, B, as and for the 
purpose described. 
3. In the described mixing and cooling ap 
paratus, the combination, in a chamber A, of 
the connected horizontal revolving disks B' 
and D, both provided with central openings, 
and a hopper, E, leading into Said opening in B", 
together with the oppositely-revolving disk B, 
provided with the blower-arms F, as and for 
the purpose described. 
4. In a mixing and cooling apparatus, the 
combination, with the horizontal oppositely 
revolvable disks B and B, working in cham 
ber A. of the vertical shaft C, extending below 
said disks, and the arms c, cup c', hanger c, 
and step c, constituting supportandbearing for 
said shaft, together with bearing c", mounted 
on c' around said shaft and constituting bear 
ing for hub C, all as and for the purpose 
set 
forth. 
(GOTTFRIE) ENGEL. 
Witnesses: 
A. S. FITCH, 
A. G. N. VERMILYA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302487.txt	(Model.) 
- 
G, C, HOITT. 
INVALID BED, 
2 sheets-Sheet l, 
. 
No. 302,487. 
Patented July 22, 1884, 
N Sir 
4. 
W s \A. 
 
Zzesz. 
2226.42%- 
* /e, /32. 
1. 
Z727-27zzoza, 
-%2. -6, 26.2% 
/8, 6. Wozze 
C267 
 
(Model.) 
G. C. HOITT 
NWALID BED, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 302,487, 
Patented July 22, 1884, 
 
ZZZZeszz." 
a2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
w 
GEORGE COTTON HOITT, OF MANCHESTER, NEW HAMPSHIRE, 
NVAL D-BED. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 302,487, dated July 22, 1884. 
Application filed October 19, 1883. 
(Model.) 
75 
. 
55 
65 
To all whom it may concerns 
Be it known that I, GEORGE C. HoITT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Man 
chester, in the county of Hillsborough and 
State of New Hampshire, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Invalid 
Beds; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters and figures of ref. 
erence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
- 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in invalid-bedsteads, the 
object being to furnish a bedstead with de 
Vices adapted to facilitate the treatment of a 
patient and permit parts of the body in con 
tact With the bed to be bathed and wounds to 
be dressed in those situations without moving 
or turning the patient; and the invention con 
sists in the construction and arrangement of 
the several parts of the bedstead, as will be 
hereinafter more fully set forth, and specifi 
cally pointed out in the claim. 
In the annexed drawings, which fully illus 
trate my invention, Figure 1 is a longitudi 
nal sectional view of my improvement, show 
ing the bed proper and trundle-bed in proper 
relation to each other for the reception of the 
patient. Fig. 2 is a bottom plan view of the 
trundle-bed. Fig. 3 is a detail view, in per 
Spective, showing a corner of the trundle-bed 
in a raised position. Fig. 4 is a perspective 
view of the trundle-bed in its closed or low 
ered position, and Fig. 5 is a transverse sec 
tion of the bedstead proper. 
The letter A represents an ordinary bed 
stead, the slats being replaced by cloth bands 
at (t, which pass transversely across the bed 
through apertures in the side rails, and are 
held in place by pins b b, inserted in loops in 
their ends, as shown in Fig. 5. These bands 
at a are placed at proper distances apart, all 
are for the purpose of supporting the patiefit 
when the trundle-bed with its mattress is lowest 
ered, and can be easily taken out one or more 
at a time, as required. 
B is the trundle-bed, made in two parts or 
sections, c and d, and provided with legs and 
casters to permit of its easy removal from un 
der the bedstead proper when desired. The 
trundle-bed is provided with longitudinal slats 
C C, on which is to be placed a mattress. 
The letter D represents a stationary cross 
bar extending transversely across the lower 
or stationary section of the trundle-bed. To 
this bar D at its center are pivoted the mov 
able levers E F, one on the upper and the 
other on the under side of the cross-bar D. 
G. and Hare two movable cross-bars secured 
These slides 
at their ends to four slides, e. e. 
e e reciprocate in grooves ff, formed on the 
inside of the lower section, d, of the trundle 
bed, as shown in Fig. 4. A short iron plate 
or link, h, is attached to each slide e at one 
end, the other end of the link being attached 
diagonally to the movable part c of the trundle 
bed, as seen in Fig. 4. The upper movable 
section, c, is further strengthened by vertical 
rods i i attached to it-one at each corner-and 
passing down into holes k l in each leg of the 
trundle-bed, as shown in Fig. 3. 
Attached to each end of the pivoted level E. 
is an iron arm, I, the otherends of which arms 
are secured to bars G and H. The lever F is 
secured to bars G and H by similar arms, but 
in opposite directions. 
Fastened to the under side of the bar H is 
an iron plate bent at right angles to form a 
nut, l, through which a screw, K, passes, the 
end of the screw being held in a stationary 
cross-piece, L, on the under side of lower sec 
tion, d. The other end of the screw turns in 
a bearing, g, on the end of Section d. 
The operation of raising the trundle-bed is 
as follows: Turning the screw K by crank or 
other means will cause the slides e e to move 
in the direction of the arrows in Fig. 4, and 
thus bring the links h h to a vertical position, 
thereby raising the upper Section, c, until the 
bands a ct lie loosely on the mattress, which 
will then support the patient. By reversing 
the motion of the screw K the Section c can be 
lowered, so that the patient can be treated 
while resting on the supporting-bands C. C. Only. 
It will be observed that the rods 
act aS 
'guides in raising and lowering the part c. The 
mattress and lower sheet are placed on the IOO 
95 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
3O2,487 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In a bedstead, the combination, With the 
lower stationary section, d, having stationary 
cross-bar's D L and grooves ff, of the upper 
vertically-movable section, c, having guides i 
i, the slides e e, linksh h, cross-bars GH, level's 
EF, arms II, nut, l, and screw K, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE COTTON HOITT. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER M. PARKER, 
GEORGE W. BOURNE. 
25 
trundle-bed, while its uppersection is lowered, 
after which the trundle-bed is pushed under 
the main bedstead, and the movable Section c 
is raised beneath the bands (ta, until the patient 
is firmly and comfortably supported. When 
it is desired to change the bed-clothing or turn 
the mattress, the section c is lowered and the 
trundle-bed temporarily removed, the patients 
body then resting On the bands (, at alone, and 
while in this position the under side of his 
body can be conveniently reached between the 
bands at at, or by removing one or more of the 
same, without the necessity of turning or oth 
erwise disturbing him. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
O 
I5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302587.txt	(No Model.) 
J. PORTER 
HAT HOLDER, 
No. 302,587. 
Patented July 29, 1884. 
-- 
- 1 
1. 2 M a 
M, M 
w 
w 
- 
- - - - - 
... was a w- m a 
I 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN PORTER, OF COALVILLE, ENGLAND. 
- Aa - O DER 
 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 302,587, dated July 29, 1884. 
Application filed October 30, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To (all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN PORTER, a sub 
ject of the Queen of England, residing at Coal 
ville, England, have invented a new and use 
ful Suspender for Hats or the Like, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
convenient and safe place in which to put one's 
hat in churches, theaters, and other places of 
public resort. The suspender is secured to 
the under side of the seat, or in some equiva 
lent position. 
This invention will be best understood by 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which like letters of reference represent like 
parts. 
Figure I is a front elevation of the sus 
pender, showing a hat in dotted lines. Fig. 
2 is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
plan of the suspender shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 
4 is a plan of a suspender specially suitable 
for large round hats, such as soft felt hats, 
: straw hats, or the like. 
Fig. 5 is a plan of the 
telescopic guard. 
The invention consists of a frame, A, made 
preferably of tin and wire, or other conven 
ient, light, and sufficiently strong material, 
which is either firmly secured to the plate B, 
which is Screwed into the under side of the 
seat or other convenient support, or it may 
be made so as to turn on the central pin, C, 
(a leather, rubber, or equivalent washer, G, 
being placed round the pin and between the 
moving surfaces, when desired, to prevent 
so that while the plate B is firmly 
noise,) 
fixed the suspender itself can be turned, as 
required, and particularly may be turned 
round, so as to serve either for the bat of the 
person to whose seat it is fixed or for that of 
a person in the seat behind. 
In Fig. 1 the frame-work descends partly 
down the hat, so as to protect it; but the por 
tion below the bottom bar Of A is unpro 
tected. To cover this a sliding or telescopic 
frame, D, is provided, which can be shut up 
when not in use, and thus leave more room 
for brushing and cleaning under the Seats of 
the building. 
For the purposes of providing a support 
and protector for the hat which may of itself 
extend down sufficiently far, or only extend 
partly far enough, and be provided with the 
telescopic portion, whereby it can be folded. 
up out of the way, I prefer to use the com 
55 
75 
90 
IOC 
plete device; but it will be obvious that for 
simply supporting the hat the form shown 
by Figs. 3 and 4 will be all that is required. 
By referring to Fig. 2 it will be seen that 
the face or platform E, upon which the brin. 
of the hat rests, is so arranged as to slope 
downward toward the back, and thus give 
a tendency to the hat to remain in the sus 
pender. This face E may be padded, as also 
may the rest of the frame-Work, if required. 
It will be observed that the padded plat 
form is of a semicircular contour, or U-shaped, 
and the whole supported to the ends of frame 
pieces, which cross each other, as shown, and 
at which point the plate for attaching it to a 
seat is secured. The frame-work or protector 
depends downward from the under side of said 
platform. 
The shape and size of the suspender can of 
course be varied to suit circumstances, and so, 
also, may the materials of which it is made. 
Having now described my invention, I 
claim 
1. A holder for hats, consisting of a U 
shaped platform and the frame A, attached 
to the platform, having a plate Secured there 
to, by which it may be attached to a seat, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A holder for hats, consisting of a U- . 
shaped platform and the frame A, attached 
thereto, having a plate for attachment to a 
seat, the construction of the parts being sub 
stantially as shown, whereby the ends of the 
platform shall be higher than the curved por 
tion, as set forth. 
3. A holder for hats, consisting of a U 
shaped padded platform, having a fraune de 
pending therefrom for protecting the hat, and 
the frame A, attached to the platform, hav 
ing a plate by which it may be attached to a 
seat, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, With the U-shaped . 
platform having a depending frame-work for 
protecting the hat, and the frame A, secured 
to said platform, having a plate for attachment 
to a seat, of a sliding or telescopic portion at 
tached to said depending frame, substantially 
as shown, and for the purpose described. 
JOHN PORTER, 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED J. BOULT, 
JoHN DEAN, 
17 Gracechurch Street, London, 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302688.txt	(NO Model.) 
No. 302,688, 
/zg (, 
 
J. & T, MONEIL. 
ANNEALING BOX, 
Patented July 29, 1884. 
t 
12:2 
3. 
-2 
4. 
4 
& 
WITNESSES : 
%6% 
'47 (2.4/ 
s 
JEE". r 
am 
3fama, ofC-Wei, 
by Zeng // 0 ins/ 
ATTORNEY. 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES McNEIL AND THOMAS McNEIL, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ANNEALNG - BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 302,688, dated July 29, 1884. 
Application filed April 21, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
25 
15 through the same. 
to all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES McNEIL and 
THOMASMCNEIL, citizens of the United States, 
residing at Pittsburg, in the county of Alle 
5 gheny and State of Pennsylvania, have joint 
ly invented or discovered a certain new and use 
ful Improvementin Annealing-Boxes, of which 
improvement the following is a specification. 
In the accompanying drawings, which make 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a view 
in perspective of an annealing-box embody 
ing our invention; Fig. 2, a vertical longitudi 
nal central section through a portion of the 
Same, and Fig. 3 a vertical transverse section 
Annealing - boxes employed for covering 
sheet-iron or other articles in annealing-fur 
naces, as heretofore constructed, have been 
Subject to the objections of being liable to be 
Warped or distorted by their own weight un 
der the intense heat to which they are ex 
posed when in use; and, further, that worn or 
burned-out portions could not be properly re 
newed or repaired, and consequently wear or 
injury of a portion of the box involved a 
Waste of comparatively serviceable metal in 
the remainder. 
It is the object of our invention to provide 
an annealing-box which shall possess the ca 
pacity of effectually resisting warping or def 
ormation by heat, and in which the renewal 
of any particular portion may be readily ef. 
fected as required, so as to retain the use of 
the remainder as long as in a serviceable con 
dition. 
The improvements claimed are hereinafter 
fully set forth. 
In the practice of our invention we provide 
a Series of sections, 11, each formed by bend 
ing a sheet of Wrought metal into trough or ?h 
form, said sections having a flange, 2, turned 
upon each end. We then take a sufficient num 
ber of Sections to form an annealing-box of the 
length desired and unite them by rivets 3, 
passing through their flanges. The ends of the 
box are closed by flat plates or heads 4, which 
are riveted to the outer flanges of the two 
end sections. The box is thus stiffened trans 
versely at intervals throughout its length by 
5o the flanges of the several sections, which serve 
both as braces and connecting-pieces, and is 
45 
35 
6C) 
thereby prevented from bending or warping 
under the action of heat, and the removal of 
any of the sections, if worn or injured, can 
be readily effected, whenever desired, by cut- 55 
ting out the rivets to admit of replacement by 
a new section, which is similarly secured in 
place. 
The flanges 2 may either be butted directly 
together, or, for the purpose of affording addi 
tional strength and stiffness to the box, brace 
bars 5, bent into form corresponding with the 
flanges, may, as shown in the drawings, be 
interposed between the sections, and united 
thereto by rivets passing through said brace 
bars and through the flanges which abut 
against each side thereof, and the edges of the 
box may be strengthened by bottom bars, 6, 
riveted to flanges 7 turned on the sides of the 
sections 1, and flanges 8 on the heads 4. 
We are aware that stiffening plates or ribs 
interposed between and connected to the out 
wardly-turned flanges of metal plates, as in 
the construction of furnace - flues for steam 
boilers, have been heretofore known, and Such, 75 
therefore, we do not broadly claim. 
We claim herein as our invention 
1. In an annealing-box, the combination of 
a series of open-bottomed U-shaped sections 
having flanges turned on each of their ends, 8O 
a series of transverse brace-bars bent into 
similar form with and interposed between the 
flanges of the adjacent Sections, a pair of end 
plates, and rivets passing through the flanges 
of the sections and through the brace-bars 85 
and connecting the sections one to another and 
to the end plates, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an annealing-box, the combination of 
a series of flanged sections, transverse brace 
bars interposed between the flanges of the ad- 9O 
jacent sections, a pair of end plates or heads, 
bottom bars abutting against the sections and, 
heads, and connecting-rivets, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set C5 
W 
our hands. 
JAMES MCNEIL. 
THOMAS MCNEIL. 
Witnesses: 
J. SNOWDEN BELL, 
R. E. WHITTLESEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302788.txt	(No Model.) 
R. SONTHEIVER, 
CLASP FOR PURSES, &c. 
No. 302,788, 
- 
Patented July 29, 1884. 
 
 
HMS II 
His 25 
4 
g A. 
 
5us \ o 
-2-1 (i. 
2. 
WITNESSES: 
(a 24% 
 
%2 INVENTori 
-3%ars 
ATTORNEYS 
B 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD SONTHEIMER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
CLASP FOR PURSES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 302,788, dated July 29, 1884. 
Application filed April 24, 1884. 
No model.) 
opposite end to the jaw A. 
The grooved edge 
Be it known that I, RICHARDSONTHE MER, b of the rigid locking-plate B is cut away at 
the lower rear part, as shown in Figs. 5 and 
6, so that the spring-plate C, when it is pressed 
down by the finger, clear's the rigid plate B 
and admits the opening of the bag or purse. 
When closing the bag or purse frame, the 
beveled edge of the spring-plate C interlocks 
with the grooved edge of the rigid plate B, 
and holds thereby the bag or frame in closed 
position. Either the Spring-plate C alone or 
both the spring-plate C and the rigid plate B 
may be provided with projecting buttons or 
knobs did, for the more convenient opening of 
the fastener, as shown, respectively, in Figs. 2 
and 4. The knobs, however, do not form con 
tact with each other, and serve merely for 
giving a more Ornamental appearance to my 
bag or purse fastening device. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
The combination of a rigid locking-plate, 
B, attached to one jaw of a bag and purse 
frame, said plate having a grooved edge, b, 
and a cut-away lower rear part, b, with a 
spring-plate, C, attached to the other jaw of 
the frame, said spring-plate having a beveled 
edge, d, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I-claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres- 65 
ence of two subscribing Witnesses. 
'io all, whom it in City concert 
of Brooklyn, Kings county, and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Bag and Purse Fasteners, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention has reference to an improved 
bag and purse fastener which can be con 
veniently opened by pressure on one part of 
the fastening device; and the invention con 
sists of a rigid locking-plate attached to one 
jaw of the frame, said locking-plate being pro 
vided with a grooved face having a cut-away 
edge at the rear palt, and of a spring-plate 
that is attached to the second jaw of the frame 
and adapted to interlock with the fixed plate, 
and to be released therefrom when it is de 
pressed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a side view of my improved bag 
and purse fastener. Fig. 2 is a detail side 
view of the same, partly in Section. Fig. 3 is 
a plan. Fig. 4 is a side view of a modified 
construction of the same; and Figs. 5 and 6 
are details of the rigid plate and Spring-plate 
of the fastener. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
SpCnding partS. 
AA in the drawings represent the jaws of 
a bag or purse frame of the usual construction. 
To the jaw A is riveted or otherwise fastened 
a rigid locking-plate, B, which is provided at 
its rounded-off end with a grooved edge, b, 
for the spring-plate C, that has a beveled in 
terlocking edge, d, and rigidly attached at its 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
SIDNEY MANN. 
RICHARD SONTHEIMER. 
Witnesses: 
55 
5 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
w 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302888.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 302,888, 
 
J. BYINGTON. 
AUTOMATIC SHELF FOR STOWES. 
A Pat 
ented Aug. 5, 1884. 
is 
fig? 
N. perers. Photo-Lithographer, wastington, D.C. 
' 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JUSTIN BYINGTON, OF COLUMBIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
KEELEY STOVE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC SHELF FOR STOVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 302,888, dated August 5, 1884. 
Application filed August 23, 1883. (No model.) 
5 
To all, whom it may concern, 
Be it known that I, JUSTIN BYINGTON, re 
siding at Columbia, Lancaster county, Penn 
sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Automatic Shelves for 
Stoves, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming parthereof, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of a stove, partly 
broken away, showing my improvements, the 
door being closed and the shelf hanging ver 
tically. Fig. 2 is a bottom view of the shelf 
and door, the shelf being horizontal and the 
door open, the front wall of the stove being 
shown insection; and Fig. 3 is a front view of 
the parts in the same position as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
Like letters of reference mark the same 
parts in all the figures. 
A is the front, and A the top, of any ordi 
nary stove or range provided with an oven, 
A", having a door, B, mounted at one side on 
hinges bib', and held closed by an ordinary 
latch, a. The hinge b is of ordinary construc 
tion, and the door is of a hollow or box form, 
as shown. The front. A is provided with 
bearings c, to receive pins c', projecting lat 
erally from lugs c, attached to the lower side 
or bottom of a shelf, C, whereby said shelf is 
hinged to the outside of the stove. The front 
is further provided with lugs d, to receive a 
bar, D, which has attached to it an arm, d", 
and a cam-shaped arm, d, the latter of which 
engages with a cam-shaped projection, b, at 
35 tached to and forming part of the door B and 
hinge l'. The arm d" and cam-piece dare set 
on the bar D at an angle of about one hun 
dred and twenty degrees to each other. When 
the oven-door is closed, as in Fig. 1, the shelf 
4o hangs vertically outside the stove, the capac 
ity of the oven being increased by reason of 
25 
50 
45 
55 
the hollow formation of the door. When the 
door is opened, however, the cam projection b 
engages with the cam-arm pieced, causing the 
bar D to turn on its axis, thus bringing the arm 
d' into a horizontal position, and raising the 
shelf to a horizontal position, the top being on 
a level with the floor of the oven. When the 
door is closed, the shelf falls by gravity to its 
vertical position. 
These improvements can be applied to the 
door in front of the fire-box or the ash-box. 
I am aware that stoves have been fitted with 
doors and shelves in front of the oven, to be 
automatically raised and lowered by said doors 
in opening and closing, and I do not, there 
fore, broadly claim such construction. 
Having thus fully described the construction 
and operation of my invention, what I claim 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Pat- 6o 
ent, is 
1. The combination of a door hinged to 
the front of a stove, a shelf located outside of 
and hinged to the stove, and a bar supported 
in lugs attached to the front of the stove, said 65 
bar having an arm to engage with the shelf 
and a cam-piece to engage a corresponding 
projection on the door, whereby the opening 
and closing of the door automatically raises 
and lowers the shelf through the medium of 7o 
said bar, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the stove-front, the 
door B, hinged thereto, the shelf C, also hinged 
thereto, the bar D, supported on lugs d, and 
having arm d and cam-piece d', and the cam 75 
projection b on the door, as set forth. . 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof have hereunto set my 
JUSTIN BYINGTON. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. YoCUM, 
FRED. W. HECKEL, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US302988.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 302,988, 
L. O. DION 
CASH CARRYING SYSTEM. 
Patented Aug. 5, 1884. 
 
z??????????zzzzzzzz 
83 SSSYAS 
????? 2 
sass 
2 
ZZZZZZ 
N 
2E 
SYANANS 
Sy 
. Peres. Phaib-Lithograssier. Washingtae, C. c. 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LON O. DION, OF NATICK, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CASH - CARRY NG SYSTE M. 
SPECIFICATIOE forming part of Letters Patent No. 302,988, dated August 5, 1884. 
Application filed April 9, 1884. (No model.) 
? 
receptacle, I prefer to hang it therefrom, as 
2 o all tuhon, it may conce're : 
Beit known that I, LON O. DION, of Na- || represented in Fig. 3; but desire at this point 
tick, in the county of Middlesex and State of to state that the receptacle for the cash may 
be within the motor itself; and in the one 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Cash-Carrier Systems, of 
herein represented such spaces exist in the 
sections e, and any suitable openings thereto 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
may be provided. I do not, however, intend 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this speci 
| to confine myself to this especial form of cas 
ing to the motor, and may arrange the recepta 
fication in explaining its nature, in which 
Figure 1 represents in vertical section, on 
cle in any other convenient place therein. The 
motor is preferably made in what may be called 
the line at a of Fig. 2, a motor used in connec 
three parts-namely, the parts E, E, and E. 
tion with my system. Fig. 2 is a view, part 
The parts EE are the portions which revolve, 
in cross-vertical section and partin elevation, 
and comprise the principal part of the casing. 
of the motor. Fig. 3 represents in front elle 
They have the cylindrical surfaces at at and 
vation the motor and its attachment, and in 
also the flanges a ca, and they (or one of them) 
section the track upon which it runs. Figs. 
are positively revolved by the spring-motor. 
4 and 5 are detail views, illustrating the con 
The part E, when a supplemental holder or 
struction, reference to which will hereinafter 
receptacle, C, is employed, does not revolve 
be made. 
with the parts EE'. This section E is a casing, 
The invention consists in a cash-carrier sys 
tem employing a self-propelling motor for sup 
which has a bearing upon the shaft e, and it 
porting and transferring a receptacle. The 
is made somewhat Smaller than the interior 
power which I prefer to usein propelling the 
cavity of the shell E. E", so that they shall not 
come in contact with its outer cylindrical sur 
motor is a coiled spring, and I make the mo 
tor cylindrical in shape, and provide it with 
face. The shaft e carries at its ends the see 
flanges, whereby it may be properly supported 
tions EE, one or both of which are keyed 
upon a track, as hereinafter shown. 
thereto, and it is revolved by means of the 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
coiled spring E, which has its outer end fast 
motor; B B, the tracks, and C the recepta. 
ened to the barrel e and its inner end to the 
cle for holding the cash and other articles. 
sleeve e' on the cross-rod e'. The barrel e? 
The tracks BB are preferably made of hori 
revolves upon this sleeve, and has the spur 
wheele, which meshes with the pinion eup 
Zontal and vertical metal plates b, and these 
plates are fastened by screws, or bolted to sup 
on the shaft e. This shaft carries the spur 
ports or stringers b'. 
wheel e, which in turn meshes with the pin 
These stringers are car 
ried or supported by brackets l', which are 
ion e' on the shaft e", which carries the spur 
wheele", which engages with a pinion, e, on 
sustained either by posts t or in any other de 
sirable way. The tracks B B are separated 
the mainshafte', so that the force of the spring 
is transmitted to the main shaft. The spring 
from each other by the space b", into which 
the flanges at a', projecting from the motor, ex 
may be wound either by a key in the usual 
tend. The motor, as above stated, is made 
way, in which case the sleeve e' will be ex 
cylindrical in shape, and the cylindrical sur 
tended to the outer edge of the casing, or by 
faces a? a bear upon the upper surface of the 
means of a tape, chain, or cord, to which, 
tracks, while the flanges at a' extend into the 
preferably, the lower section, c, of the inde 
opening between the tracks and bear upon 
pendent receptacle is attached. When this 
their oater sides against the vertical plates b 
construction is employed, the motor is never 
of the tracks, and the tracks may be inclosed, 
removed from the track, and the spring is 
except at points where openings are neces 
wound up upon the pulling down of the re 
sary for the purpose of reception or delivery, 
ceptacle c, and the motor will have the drum 
by continuous hoods or casings dd, which in 
Fupon the sleeve e", free to revolve thereon, 
substance form passages DD. (See Fig. 3.) 
and to which the end of the tape, cord, or 
When the motor has an independent money. 
chain f' is fastened. Upon one side of this 
O 
2 
45 
75 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
302,988 
5 
drum is placed the spring-pawlf', which en 
gages with the ratchet.f, keyed to the sleeve 
e', so that the movement of the barrel in one 
direction will cause the sleeve to be revolved, 
and therefore the mainspring E; and if this 
movement is in the direction necessary for 
winding it will of course wind up the spring. 
Therefore, upon drawing the tape, cord, or 
chain downward, the pawl engages with the 
Io ratchet and winds the mainspring. As, how 
ever, it is necessary that the chain, tape, or 
cord should be returned automatically after it 
has been drawn out, I provide the drum 
with a coiled spring, f, the outer end, f, of 
15 which is fastened to the casing E and the in 
ner end to a hub or extension, f', of the drum. 
This spring is wound up upon the unwinding 
of the tape, cord, or chain, and consequently, 
when the tape, cord, or chain is released, it 
2O causes the drum to revolve, and automatically 
winds the tape, cord, or chain thereon; but as 
the drum is thus moved in an opposite direc 
tion from that employed in winding the main 
spring, the pawl frides over the ratchet 
25 teeth f. The drum e is connected with the 
sleeve e by means of the crown ratchet-wheel 
f" at the end of the sleevee, and the spring 
pawlf attached to the drum. 
When the independent receptacle C is used 
3o I prefer to extend down from the section E 
the tubular extension G, through which the 
cord, tape, or chain f extends, and which car 
ries or supports at its lower end the upper 
portion, c', of the receptacle; and the lower 
35 portion, c of the money-receptacle I prefer to 
attach to the cord, tape, or chain, so that upon 
the downward movement thereof it is sepa 
rated from the upper part and drawn down 
with the cord, tape, or chain, and upon the 
4o reverse or upward movement thereof is drawn 
back toits original position, and automatically 
locks or comes in contact with and is held, by 
the force of the Spring f", against the section 
c'. I do not, however, confine myself to this 
45 form of independent cash receptacle, but may 
use any other which shall be adapted to be 
carried by the motor herein specified. 
It will be seen that by covering the tracks 
with the hood d the carrier is concealed from 
So view, and also that the casing may be used for 
the support or display of goods. 
The advantages of this system consists in 
the cheapness of construction and efficiency of 
service which arise from the use and employ 
55 ment of a self-propelling carrier, and also from 
the fact that a level track can be employed, 
thereby rendering the system applicable to 
low-studded stores and buildings. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
6o I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States 
1. In a cash-carrier system, a motor or self 
propelling carrier Supporting or carrying a 
receptacle for money and other articles, all 
65 substantially as and for the purposes described. 
Witnesses: 
F. F. RAYMONID, 2d, 
E. A. PIHAILEN. 
6. In a cash-carrier, the combination of the go 
5. The combination of the sections EEE 85 
2. As a cash-carrier system, the tracks B 
B', and a motor or self-propelling carrier, sup 
porting or holding a receptacle or tray, and 
adapted to be supported and guided by the 
tracks, all substantially as and for the pur- 7o 
poses described. 
3. A cash-carrier supporting or holding a 
tlay or receptacle, and having a positively 
revolved cylindrical section adapted to bear 
upon a track and by traction thereon cause 75 
the movement of the carrier and receptacle, 
all substantially as and for the purposes de 
?? 
Scribed. 
4. The combination of the self-propelling 
cash-carrier, consisting of the sections E E 8o 
and mechanism, substantially as specified, for 
automatically revolving one or both of said 
sections carried thereby, all substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
and mechanism, Substantially as specified, for 
automatically revolving one or more of said 
sections, all substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
sections EEE, containing mechanism, sub 
stantially as specified, for automatically pro 
pelling the same upon the tracks, and the in 
dependent receptacle C, all substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
7. The combination, in a cash-carrier, of the 
motor A, the receptacle, holder, or tray C, 
adapted to be drawn from the motor, and in 
termediate connecting mechanism, substan 
tially as specified, whereby the holder is ver 
tically movable in relation to the motor, all 
substantially as alnd for the purposes de 
8. The combination of the motor A, the act 
uating device of which is a coiled spring, and Io5 
mechanism, substantially as described, for 
winding the same by means of a tape, cord, or 
chain, f', all substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
bearing surfaces act", and the flanges a a?, all 
substantially as and for the purposes described. 
10. The combination of the tracks B B, 
with the hood d, all substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
11. The combination of the casing did, form 
ing the passages D D, and the tracks BB, all 
substantially as and for the purposes described. . 
12. In a cash-carrier system, the tracks B 
B, separated by the opening or space b", all I2O 
substantially as and for the purposes described. 
13. A device for a cash-carrier system 
adapted to be propelled by an actuating spring 
supported by said device, and mechanism, 
substantially as Specified, all as and for the I25 
purposes described. 
9. As a cash-carrier, a motor, A, having the II o 
Scribed. 
- 
. 
- 
95 
LEON O. DION. 
IOO 
II 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303088.txt	(No Model.) 
C, WHITAKER, 
FLY SCREEN. 
No. 303,088, 
- 
i 
Patented Aug. 5, 1884, 
 
perERs. Paeto-Lithographer, Walest 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES WHITAKER, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
FY-SC REEN. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 303,088, dated August 5, 1884. 
Application filed July 20, 1883. (No mode.) 
5 
time making a tight or close joint. Letters 
Be it known that I, CHARLES WHITAKER, C C are the links, and letters D D are cords 
connecting the two ends of screen-cloth, so 
as to make an endless connection, the clot 
passing over the roller and the cords over 
pulleys E E on window-sili. 
The manner of operating said screenis, when 
it is desired to open the screen lower the upper 
end of screen-cloth half-way. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is- 
The combination of the swinging roller B 
and the attachment C with the cords l) and 
pulleys E, with the fiy-screen for the purpose 
of operating the same. 
To cell ution, it nagy conce77. 
a citizen of the United States, residing at St. 
Louis, in the State of Missouri, have invented 
a new and useful Fly-Screen, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to construct a 
'simple, cheap, and durable fly-screen. 
Figure i of drawings is a perspective view 
Io of the entire fly-screen. Fig.2 is a longitudinal. 
Section of the Sarine. 
Letters A A are sections of Window-frame. 
Letters B B are swinging rollers attached to 
window frame by links, said links being S 
shaped, attached to window - frame by one 
end, and to roller by the other end, thus 
allowing the roller to play freely in and out 
and the screen-cioth to pass between the roller 
and sash without binding, and at the same 
CARLES WHITAKER, 
m 
Witnesses: 
E. J. DELEHANTY, 
G. EENIENWAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303188.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. RIGLANDER. 
SPECTACLE FRAME. 
No. 303,188, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1884. 
 
dS 
 
 
WITNESSES : 
za Al 4-d 
. 
INVENTOR 
its N. & 3 away 
2a2/ %-47 e 2-ea 
ATTORNEYS 
 
N. PETERS, Phee-titrographer. Wassington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB W. RIGLANDER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SPECTAGLE-FRAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 303,188, dated August 5, 1884. 
Application filed May 22, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
Io 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JACOB W. RIGLANDER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Spectacle-Frames, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to the side pieces con 
necting the temples to the eye-wires of specta 
cle-frames; and it consists in the novel features 
of constructionhereinafter described, whereby 
the eye-wires may be adjusted to the lenses 
without disturbing the joints of the temples. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
front view, partly in section, of a portion of a 
spectacle-frame embodying myinvention. Fig. 
2 is a similar view on a larger scale than in the 
previous figure. 
Fig. 3 is a plan or top view, 
partly in section. Figs. 4 and 5 are detail 
views of parts. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
The letter Adesignates an eye-wire, Baside 
piece, and C a temple. The side piece, B, is 
made in two sections, BB, to which the eye 
wire Aisattached in any usual or suitable man 
ner, and one of which, B, extends the entire 
length of the side piece to connect with the 
temple, while the other, B, extends a portion 
of the length thereof. The section B is formed 
with a mortise, C, to receive the temple C, and 
the latter is secured in the mortise by means of 
a joint-pin, e, for its connection to theside piece; 
but it is evident that the temple may be placed 
on either side of the proper section, omitting 
the mortise. The section B is united to the 
sectionBby means of a set-screw, f, and at the 
point where the sections meet the section Bis 
formed with a recess, i, of a depth equal to the 
thickness of the section B, to receive this sec 
tion, so that it is flush with the section B, and 
the whole is rendered smooth or even. This 
purpose, however, can also be accomplished by 
making the section B of equal length to the 
section B. The thickness of the section B is 
greater than that of the adjacentportion of the 
section B, and hence the set-screw f, which 
passes from the section Binto the section B', 
may be withdrawn from the latter a considera 
ble distance for adjusting the eye-wire to the 
lens without disconnecting the sections, which 
obviously facilitates the operation of inserting 
the lens. It will be noticed that in the adjust 
Inent of the eye-wire by means of the set-screw 
if the joint of the temple C with theside piece is 
left entirely undisturbed, and consequently the 
necessity of readjusting the temple, as in or 
dinary frames, is obviated. The section Bis 
countersunk on the outer surface to form a 
shoulder, o, Figs. 2, 3, and 4, upon which rests 
the head of the set-screw f, which head is flat 
tened in the plane of the screw for its passage 
through coincident notches ss in the edge of 
the shoulder o, so that the sections B B may 
be disconnected when desirable without remov 
ing the screw, the latter being simply adjusted 65 
to bring its head opposite to the notchess s, 
when the sections may be sprung apart from 
each other. 
It is evident that the set-screw, 
with its flat head, to pass through the notchess 
s and rest on the shoulder of the countersink, 7o 
is applicable also to eyeglass-frames. 
I am aware that it is not new to construct 
the side piece of the eye-wire in two sections, 
one having a mortise, in which the temple is 
pivoted by a pin disconnected from the other 75 
section, the two sections being held together 
by a pivoted clasp, and such, therefore, I dis 
claim. I am also aware that the side pieces of 
the eye-wire have been made in sections con 
nected by a screw, the temple being pivoted 8o 
between the sections by a pin fixed at its ends 
to the respective sections; but such is the con 
struction which my invention improves. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
i. The combination, substantially as herein 
before described, of the eye-wire A, the temple 
C, the side piece, B, made in two sections, one 
of which, B, is formed with a mortise, in which 
the temple is pivoted by a pin, e, disconnected 
from the other section, B, and the set-screw f, 
passing loosely through one Section and screw 
ing into the other section, whereby the eye 
wire may be adjusted to the lens without 
loosening the joint of the temple. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
before described, of the eye-wire A, the temple 
C, theside piece, B, made in two sections, B'B', 
one of which, B, is formed with a mortise, in 
which the temple is pivoted by a pin, f, dis 
connected from the other section,B", the latter 
having a countersunk portion to form the de 
85 
95 
ICO 
25 
3 5 
45 
50 
 
2 
303,188 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
before described, with the eye-wire, of the side 
piece, made in two sections, one having a coun 
tersink provided with notches in the edge 
thereof, and the set-screw for uniting the Sec 
tions, having a flat head adapted to pass 
through the notches and rest on the shoulder 
of the countersink. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
25 
JACOB. W. 
RIGILANDER. 
L. s. 
Witnesses: 
WM. FAUSTMANN, 
LEONARD KOEIN. 
pressed shoulder 0, and the set-screw.f, passing 
loosely through the shoulder, with its head 
resting thereon and screwed into the other 
section, whereby the eye-wire may be adjusted 
to the lens without disconnecting the side 
pieces or loosening the temple joint. 
3. The combination, substantially, as herein 
before described, with the eye-wire and the 
temple, of the side piece, made in two sections, 
one of which extends the entirelength thereof, 
and is constructed with a receSS to receive the 
othersection, the latter having a greater thick 
ness than the adjacent portion of the recessed 
section, and the set-screw passing from the re 
cessed section into the plain section for unit 
ing the sections. 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303288.txt	(No Model.) 
A, S, JACKSON. 
COMBINED CHIMNEY AND VENTILATOR, 
No. 303,288, 
Patented Aug. 12, 1884, 
 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR. 
psets proto-iscraper, Washirigtai, O.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALLEN STAMPERJACKSON, OF KOKOMO, INDIAN A. 
COMBINED CHIMNEY AND VENTILATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 303,288, dated August 12, 1884. 
Application fied March 28, 1884. (No model.) 
45 
To all whon, it invay concer. 
Be it known that I, ALLEN S. JACKSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Koko 
mo, in the county of Howard and State of 
Indiana, have invented a new and useful Com 
bined Chimney, and Ventilator, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
combined chimney and ventilators; and it con 
sists in constructing a combined chimney and 
ventilator with a concaved registry-base and 
a double revolving cowl over said chimney 
and ventilator. 
The objects of my invention are to construct 
a cone-shaped base for the ventilator-flue with 
a concaved registry-plate under it, and to pro 
vide a double half-open cowl to revolve over 
said ventilator and flue-pipes. I attain these 
objects by the mechanism illustrated by the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section, and Fig. 2 is 
a bottom view. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts. 
The concaved register-plate E is provided 
with a rim or flange, H, and slots G, all as 
shown. The cone-shaped cover D is placed 
over said plate, resting around it on the rim 
H, and made to stand a few inches above said 
plate, as shown in Fig. 1. The upper part of 
the cover D is formed into or connected to a 
large pipe, B, which extends above the house 
top or roof. Around the center or upper part 
of the plate E the stove-pipe or chimney C is 
connected and extends up through and several 
inches above the ventilator-pipe B, the said B, in combination with the double cowl A and 75 
chimney-pipe C being considerable smaller 
than the pipe B, all as shown in the drawings. 
A similar concaved plate, F, having similar 
openings G, is placed over the said plate E, so 
that it will revolve sufficiently to open or close 
the said openings G, to regulate the ventilation. 
A projection, I, is formed on the said plate F, 
so that it can be operated at will. Around the 
top of pipe C a flange, N, is secured. On this 
flange the double cowl A is movably secured, 
so that it will easily revolve. A rod, IL, which 
is secured inside of the pipe C, extends up suf 
ficiently to allow the top of the cowl. A to rest. 
on it, all as shown in Fig. 1. The cowl A is 
provided with a rudder, K, so as to keep the 
closed side to the wind, as indicated by the ar 
rows. The part of the cowl under the rudder 
is open, so that the smoke can escape at the 
upper opening, S, and the heated air, vapor. 
&c., at the opening T, as indicated and shown in 
the drawings. The lower part of the cowl. A 
encircles the top of pipe B, and the said pipe 
is held by braces J firmly to the chimney-pipe 
C, as shown in Fig. 1. 
As thus constructed, my invention is porta 
ble, and may be easily and quickly secured in 
place where a common flue is used, or in any 
desirable part of the house. 
By the plate E being large and concaved, it 
more readily catches the rising vapor, steam, 
heated air, noxious gas, &c., and the double 
cowl prevents the wind from blowing down 
either of the pipes, and increases the draft in 
each. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
the following and desire to secure the same by 
Letters Patent 
In a combined chimney and ventiator, the 
concaved plates E F, cone-cover D, and pipe 
chimney-pipe C, all for the purpose set forth. 
ALLEN STAAPER JACKSON. 
A. H. DUKE, 
W. J. WEBB. 
Witnesses: 
55 
65 
. 
O 
25 
35 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303388.txt	(No Model.) 
A. L. HECK. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 303,388. 
 
ELEWATOR SAFETY GATE, 
Patented Aug. 12, 1884, 
(No Model.) 
No. 303,388, 
 
A. T. HECK 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
ELEVATOR SAFETY GATE, 
Patented Aug. 12, 1884, 
Z722/e7-4 or 
2. 57 vez7 at A. oe?oer 
-6 -1 6-Zeya. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADAM L. HECK, OF INDIANAPOLIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO CHARLES 
F. REICHARDT, OF MARION COUNTY, INDIANA. 
ELEVATOR SAFETY - GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 303,388, dated August 12, 1884. 
Application filed April 11, 1884. (No model.) 
go all, Luhon, it may concern, 
Be it known that I, ADAM L. HECK, of the 
city of Indianapolis, in the county of Marion 
and State of Indiana, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Automatic 
Elevator Safety-Gates, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
an automatic Safety-gate for elevators, which 
object I accomplish by means of the mechani 
cal device described in this specification, and 
illustrated in the drawings filed herewith and 
made a part hereof, and in which similar let 
letters of reference relate to similar parts of 
my invention. 
Figure 1 is a front view of an ordinary ele 
vator with my automatic safety-gate attached; 
and Fig. 2 is a top view of Fig. 1, showing 
the mechanical device for opening and closing 
the gates. Fig. 3 represents a portion of the 
frame of the elevator-cage upon which the 
rack ', in full lines, and the rack ', in dotted 
lines, are shown to engage, respectively, the 
Segmental Wheel 8 0, mounted on shaft s, 
which supports the safety-gate l', provided 
With balance-weight W, and the dotted cog 
Wheel 9' on the counter-shafts' engaging with 
the dotted cog-wheel g, mounted on shafts, 
Supported by hangers h, attached to the wall 
of the elevator-chute. 
Fig. 4 represents a 
portion of the elevator-cage, showing the rela 
tive position of each of the racks' and ' on 
the frame of the cage, and the segmental wheel 
Sw, gear-wheel? on counter-shafts, and its en 
gagement with gear-wheel (7 on shafts, which, 
supported by hangersh, h", and h", operates the 
Safety-gate l', as hereinafter described. 
In Fig. 1, p is the cage of my elevator; g, 
the guide-rail. l and l are safety-gates, pro 
vided with balance-weights W. These safety 
gates are SWung on the outer ends of shafts 
8, journaled into hangers hand h", firmly at 
tached to the inner side of the walls of the 
chute. 
S v is a segmental cog-wheel rigidly at 
tached to the shafts, which actuates and sup 
r' and ' are racks firmly 
ports the gate l'. 
attached at the front and back of the frame 
of the cage, as seen on the drawings, Fig. 2. 
s' is a counter-shaft, upon which is rigidly 
mounted the gear-wheel (f'. 
This shaft is 
journaled into hangers h", and provided with 
Cog-Wheel 9', to engage with cog-wheel g, rig 
idly mounted on shafts, for opening the gate 
when the cage is descending and closing the 
gate when ascending, as hereinafter described. 
ff represent the first and second floors of a 
building, with the elevator in position to be 
loaded and the safety-gate l'open. 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
As the elevator - cage passes from the first 
floor upward, the rack ' at the lower end of 
the frame of the cage engages with the cog 
wheel (f', mounted on shaft s', causing this 
wheel to rotate upward; and as this wheel is 
constantly in engagement with cog-wheel g, 
mounted on shafts, this shaft is caused to 
rotate downward, carrying with it the safety 
gate l', thus closing it automatically. As the 
elevator-cage nears the second landing, f, the 
rack r engages with the segmental cog-wheel 
s w, mounted on shafts, causing the shaft 8 
to rotate upward, and thus automatically open 
this gate l. Should the elevator-cage pass on 
upward, the rack n' engages with the cog 
wheel g, mounted on the counter-shaft s', 
which is engaged with cog-wheel (), on shafts, 
closing the gatel, in the manner described for 
closing the gate l above mentioned. 
It is plainly apparent from the above that 
the operation of my device will be reversed. 
As the elevator, in descending, nears the sec 
ond landing, f, from above, the rack '' en 
gages the cog-wheel g, causing this wheel to 
revolve downward, which, being engaged with 
cog-wheel of on shafts, opens the gate, and 
upon the elevator-cage leaving this landing 
on its downward course the rack 
engages 
the segmental cog-wheel S v, thus closing the 
gate, which operation will be again repeated 
at the first landing. 
Having thus described my invention, its 
purposes, and advantages, what I claim as 
new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The combination of a cage or platform of an 
elevator, provided with racks r ', with gears 
S v and f', meshing, respectively, with said 
racks, and a counterbalanced gate, whereby 
the latter is automatically opened and closed 
as the cage approaches and leaves a landing, 
substantially as shown and described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand at Indianapolis, Indiana, this 29th day 
of March, A. D. 1884. 
In presence of - ADAM L. HECK. 
- 
JAMES SULGROVE, 
JOHN MILLER. 
55 
6 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
IO 
SO 
-ier'. ... 
-...-:..., 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303488.txt	(No Model.) 
S. BRADLEY. 
COUPLING FOR TUBULAR LIGHTNING RODS, 
No. 303,488. 
Patense Aug. 12, 1884, 
 
WITNESSES 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
SYLVESTER BRADLEY, OF 
BLOOMINGTON, ILLINOIS. 
COUPLING FOR TUBULAR LIGHTNNG-RODS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 303,488, dated August 12, 1884. 
Application filed February 19, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
75 
So 
IO 
25 
To all whon it may concern : 
Be it known that I, SYLVESTER BRADLEY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bloom 
ington, in the county of McLean and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use. 
ful Improvements in Connections or Coup 
lings for Tubular Lightning-Rods; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to ing the connection firm and tight. 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in the class of tubular 
lightning-rod connections or couplings, hav 
ing for its object the production of a cheap, 
perfect, and tight joint at the point of contact 
of the tubular sections forming the rod; and 
to this end the invention consists in novel fea 
tures of Construction and combination and ar 
rangement of parts, all as will be hereinafter 
fully described, and set forth in the claims 
hereto annexed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure I represents a view in perspective of 
the improved connection or coupling. Fig. 
2, a longitudinal section; Fig. 3, detached 
views of the parts necessary to form two sec 
tions of a rod. 
In the drawings, A and B represent two 
Sections of a tubular lightning-rod of equal 
diameter, and Can inner connecting-section of 
Smaller diameter, adapted to closely fit within 
the outer sections, A and B. The tubular sec. 
tions A and Bhave formed at their meeting or 
Contact ends, and a short distance therefrom, 
a spiral groove, a, which, when the ends of 
said sections are brought closely in contact 
With each other, will form one continuous spiral 
groove. The inner connecting tubular sec 
tion, C, is of a length corresponding to the con 
tinuous spiral groove on the ends of the two 
Sections, A and B, and has a similar spiral 
groove, c, also corresponding with that of the 
Sections A and B. 
The three sections A, B, and C, when formed 
with the spiral grooves, as shown and de 
scribed, are easily, quickly, and readily coup 
led in the following manner: The inner tubulal' 
connecting-section, C, is screwed into One of 
the outer sections until it strikes the end of 
the spiral groove formed thereon, after which 
the other outer section is screwed onto the 
projecting portion of the inner tubular sec 
tion, C, until the two outer tubular Sections 
are joined perfectly together, the inner Sec 
tions fitting closely to the outer sections, mak 
By the above-described construction of the 
connection or coupling no coppel' is Cut a Way, 
so that the rod is not in any way Weakened, 
while leaving a perfect free and inner open 
joint necessary in tubular lightning-rods. The 
spiral grooves being easily and readily pressed 
in the coupling-sections, materially lessells the 
cost of construction in this class of lightning 
rods, while, as before stated, a perfect and 
tight joint is formed in connecting the main 
Sections of the rod. 
It will be observed that by my improved 
construction the three parts A, B, and C are 
always ready for coupling, thereby obviating 
tools to form the connections when the Sections 
are desired to be connected in putting up a 
lightning-rod. 
Having thus described my invention, What I 
i claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In a connection or coupling for tubular light 
ning-rods, the combination of the outer tubula 
sections, A and B, having spiral grooves formed 
or pressed on their inner contact or meeting 
ends, and an inner connecting tubular section, 
C, having a similar spiral groove adapted to 
draw the adjacent ends of the sections A and 
B in close contact with each other, substan 
tially in the manner as and for the purpose 
herein shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
SYLVESTER BRADLEY. 
Witnesses; 
THos. SLADE, 
J. W. DAVES. 
. 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303589.txt	(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
- 
F. L. POPE. 
ELECTRICAL SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR RAILROADS, 
No. 303,589, 
Patented Aug. 12, 1884, 
 
WITNESSES 
%29 a 26.4% 
- 
INVENTOR 
Frank L.Pope, 
At has littorietys 
N. PeFERs. Photo-ithographer. Washington D.C. 
(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
F. L. POPE. 
ELECTRICA SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR, RAILROADS, 
No. 303,589. 
Patented Aug. 12, 1884. 
WITNESSES 
%29 6. elee 
p 
 
By 7s ...Attorneys 
INVENTOR 
Aaro?e A.Aope, 
op 
N. PETERs. Photo-lithographer. Washington 
(No Model.) 
F. L. POPE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
ELECTRICAL SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR RAILROADS. 
No. 303,589. 
Patented Aug. 12, 1884, 
 
R ------------ 
 
 
-- 
 
SS 
SS 
Ea 
g g 
E. lip. 
WITNESSES 
%29 6. e6% 
4-4-64 
NVENTOR 
IBy his Attorneys Frank L.Aope, 
-% e-les 
N. pters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK L. POPE, OF ELIZABETH, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE UNION 
SWITCH AND SIGNAL COMPANY, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ELECTRICAL SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR RAILROADS. 
Si?:3CIFICATIOFS forming part of Letters Patent No. 303,589, dated August 12, 1884. 
Application filed September 24, 1883. 
(No model.) 
To aid uphon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANKL. POPE, a citi 
zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Elizabeth, in the county of Union and State 
5 of New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Electric Locking and 
Signaling Apparatus for Railroads, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a system of electric 
Io switch-locking apparatus, in connection with 
visual and audible signals, designed for the 
protection of trains at railroad stations or junc 
tions; and it consists in an improved organi 
zation of locking apparatus in association with 
I5 suitable visual or audible signals, either or 
both, which latter are included in electric cir 
cuits and controlled by circuit-closers and cir 
cuit-breakers, the latter being in some in 
stances actuated automatically by the passage 
2c of a locomotive or train, and in others by the 
displacement of switches from the mainline at 
sidings orjunctions, and in still other cases they 
may be actuated manually by the station-mas 
ter or switchman. In accordance with my in 
25 vention, an approaching train, when at a dis 
tance of a mile (more or less) from the station 
or junction, gives Warning of its coming by the 
ringing of an electric bell at or near the sta 
tion, and simultaneously secures against dis 
3o placement all the switches at the junction or 
in the vicinity of the station by means of suit 
able electric locking apparatus controlled by 
the train. After the train has proceeded far 
enough to pass within the limits of the sta 
35 tion-yard or block-section a danger-signal is 
exhibited in the rear of the train, and at the 
same moment a second electric bellis set ring 
ing at the station, which continues to sound 
as long as the signal is displayed. By this 
4o means the train while passing through or stop 
ping at the station is protected in its rear by 
the danger-signal; but as it passes out of the 
Station-yard or block-Section, or at a point 
situated a suitable and proper distance beyond 
45 the station, automatic devices actuated by the 
train serve to withdraw the danger-signal at 
the entrance of the station-yard or block-sec 
tion and to unlock the switches. Means are 
provided whereby the danger-signal at the 
65 
entrance of the station-yard or block-section 5o 
may be exhibited or withdrawn at will by the 
station-master or switchman, in case it is, for 
any reason, desired to prevent a train from en 
tering; and means are also provided whereby 
the said danger-signal is in like manner auto- 55 
matically displayed by the displacement of 
any of the switches in the vicinity of the sta 
tion, so as to endanger the passage of trains 
on the main track. The apparatus is, more 
Over, so organized and constructed that a dan- 6o 
ger-signal will infallibly be exhibited and an 
alarm simultaneously sounded in case any of 
the electric conductors are broken or other 
Wise interrupted, or in the event of a failure 
of the actuating voltaic battery to performits 
proper functions. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a diagram representing my invention, and 
showing the normal position of the various 
parts of the apparatus when the track through 
the station-yard is clear for the passage of a 
train before the arrival of such train. Figs. 
2 and 3 are diagrams showing the position 
which the apparatus assumes at different times 
during the passage of a locomotive or train 
through the station-yard. 
In the figures, A. A represents the main 
track extending from one end to the other of 
the station yard, and A and A" are side tracks 
or branches diverging therefrom at or near 
the Station. The trains are assumed to move 
over the track A.A. in the direction indicated 
by the arrows, and I remark that the appa 
ratus herein shown and described is designed 
to be applied in connection with one track 
only of a double-track line of railway, on 
which track the trains ordinarily run always 
in the same direction, an entirely distinct set 
of signaling apparatus, in all respects similar 
to that hereinafter to be described, being ap 
plied to the other track, on which the trains 
run in the opposite direction. The section of 
track A. A represented in the figures may with 
advantage be about eight thousand feet (more 
or less) in length, extending, say, about five 95 
thousand feet from the switches in the diree 
tion from which the train approaches, and 
about three thousand feet in the opposite di 
S5 
75 
-- 
2. 
303,589 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 5 
90 
rection. At a suitable and convenient point 
say about five thousand feet in advance of 
the station or junction--is placed a circuit 
breaker, K, of well-known construction, which 
is so situated as to be automatically actuated 
upon the passage of a moving train by means 
of its impact or weight, or otherwise. At a 
point considerably nearer the station or junc 
tion-say about three thousand feet there 
from-is placed another similar circuit-break 
er, K", also adapted to be actuated by the mov 
ing train. At the entrance of the station-yard 
or block-signal section, and preferably in the 
vicinity of the last-named circuit-breaker, is 
placed a visual or semaphoric danger-signal, 
S, which is actuated or controlled by an elec 
tro-magnet, S. This signal apparatus may be 
of any convenient or suitable construction, 
the only condition necessary being that when 
the controlling or actuating electro-magnet S 
is vitalized by a closed circuit a safety-signal 
shall be indicated, but when the circuit through 
the electro-magnet is broken a danger-signal 
shall be indicated. I have shown in diagram 
a simple form of signal which will serve to 
illustrate the principle of operation, consist 
ing of a semaphore-arm, s', which is overbal 
anced by a weight, s, tending to throw the 
arminto a horizontal position indicating 'dan 
ger, as shown in Fig. 3, but which is normally 
depressed, in consequence of the elevation of 
the weight s, by the attractive force of the 
electro-magnet S, whereby the arms' is main 
tained in a vertical or nearly vertical position, 
denoting safety,' as shown in Figs. I and 2. 
At the exit of the station-yard or block-section 
is placed a track circuit-closer, K, which is 
adapted to temporarily close an electric cir 
cuit upon the passage of a train in the direc 
tion indicated by the arrow. 
At the station or junction the movable 
switch-rails, by means of which the main track 
is placed in connection with either of the sid 
ings or branches A'and A, may be moved to and 
fro in the usual manner by means of a bridle 
rod, b, which is itself moved longitudinally in 
one direction or the other by means of a hand 
lever, B, or othel Well-known or equivalent 
device. A simple circuit-breaker, c, of any 
suitable construction, is attached to some 
movable portion of the switch or its actuating 
lever B, SO that when the Switch - rails are 
moved in either direction, so as to interrupt 
the continuity of the main line, an electric cir 
cuit is broken for the purpose of actuating the 
danger-signal at the entralnce of the yard, as 
hereinafter explained. In practice I prefer, 
instead of attaching the circuit-breaker di 
rectly to some movable portion of the switch, 
as herein shown, to attach the same to the 
lock or guard of the Switch-lever, in a man 
ner fully set forth in the patent of Stephen C. 
Hendrickson, No. 199,977, of February 5, 187S, 
to which reference is had. The particular 
mode of attachment is, however, immaterial, 
so far as the present invention is concerned, 
it being only necessary that the circuit-breaker 
shal serve to break the circuit in case the 
switch is not in a safe condition for the pas 
sage of a train through the station-yard. I 
also apply to some suitable movable portion 
of the switch-an electro-magnetic locking de 
vice of any suitable construction-such, for 
example, as that shown and described in the 
patent of Oscar Gassett, No. 228,187, of June 
1, 1880, to which reference is had. The prin 
ciple of action of such locking device, omit 
ting the details of its construction, is shown in 
the figures. 
D is an electro-magnet, the arnature-lever 
of which is pivoted at d, and provided with a 
retracting-spring, d. On the end of the ar 
mature-lever is a projection, d, which, when 
the armature-lever is released, falls into a slot, 
b', formed in Some movable portion of the 
switch apparatus, so that when the armature 
is in this position the switch will be securely. 
locked until the projection d' is restored to its 
original position by the action of an electric 
current upon the electro-magnet D. The par 
ticular construction of this device is imma 
terial, so far as my invention is concerned, and 
it may be applied directly to some movable 
part of the switch, as shown in the figures; 
but, as in the case of the circuit-breaker, it is 
considered preferable in practice to attach it 
to the lock or guard of the Switch, rather than 
to the switch itself. 
M is an electro-magnet provided with two 
independent coils or helices, In, and in', either 
of which produces a like magnetic effect upon 
The armature-lever m of this mag. 
its core. 
net normally rests upon a contact-stop, v, and 
it also carries an insulated contact-spring, v', 
which, when the armature in falls away from 
the poles of-its electro-magnet, is brought 
against a contact-stop, v. A second electro 
magnet, N, provided in like manner with two 
independent coils or helices, in and n', has its 
armature-lever n arranged in a similar man 
ner, normally resting upon a contact-stop, ac, 
and carrying an insulated contact-spring, c', 
which plays between two fixed contact-stops, 
at and ac", as hereinafter explained. 
O is a vibrating or continuously-ringing 
electric bell of well-known construction, which 
may be placed upon the passenger-platform, 
or in any convenient position in or about the 
station, the office of which is to give notice of 
the approach of a train when the same reaches 
the most distant circuit-breaker K, as herein 
after explained. P is a similar vibrating or 
continuously-ringing electric bell, the office 
of which is to produce a continuous alarm so 
long as the signal Sindicates danger, thus call 
ing the attention of the station-master to the 
same. The bells O and P are actuated by a 
single local battery, L, common to both, which 
is brought into action by the electro-magnets 
M and N, in a manner hereinafter set forth. 
When the apparatus is in its normal posi 
tion, the main track being clear for the pas 
I IO 
I I5 
I 20 
I 25 
I 30 
303,589 
3 
Sage of a train through the station-yard, the 
course of the electric circuits may be traced 
as follows: the first or locking circuit, com 
mencing at the positive pole of the main bat 
tery E.; thence by the wires 1 and 2 to the 
track circuit-breaker K; thence by the wire 3 
to the locking-magnet D of the switch, (if there 
are two or more switches in the main track, 
the circuit passes through their respective 
locking-magnets in succession:) thence by the 
wire 4 to the coil or helix 
of the electro 
magnet M; thence by the wire 5, armature 
lever n, contact-stop v, and wire 6 to the point 7; 
thence returning by the wire 8 to the negative 
pole of the battery, E. Thus a constant elec 
tric current normally traverses the locking 
inagnet D of the Switch or switches, and also 
the helix m of the electro-magnet M, which 
latter electro-magnet keeps its own circuit 
closed by holding the lever an in contact with 
the contact-stop v. The Second or signal cir 
cuit, which is preferably derived from the 
same main battery, E, may also be traced as 
follows: from the positive pole of the battery 
E by wires 1 and 9 to track circuit-breaker K'; 
thence by wire 10 to electro-magnets, control 
ling the signal S; thence by wire 11 to circuit 
-breaker c, attached to the switch or switches B; 
thence by wire 12 to a manual circuit-breaker, 
Q, (which may be placed in the office of the 
switchman or station-master,) thence by Wire 
13 to the coil or helix 1 of electro-magnet N, 
thence by wire 14 to armature-lever in and 
contact-stop 20, thence by Wire 15 to the point 
7, thence returning to the negative pole of the 
battery by wire 8. The electro-magnet N, by 
its attractive force, also keeps its own circuit 
closed by the contact of its armature-lever in 
with the contact-Stop 20. If, now, a train ap 
proaches the station or junction from the di 
rection indicated by the arrows, it first acts 
upon the circuit-breaker K, and temporarily 
interrupts the first-described or locking cir 
cuit. This causes the electro-magnet M to re 
lease its armature int', which immediately falls 
off from the contact-stop v, and interrupts its 
own circuit at this point, which thereafter re 
mains broken at Said point, notwithstanding 
it may have been again closed at K. Thus 
it will be understood that even a momentary 
interruption of the closed circuit at the point 
K will cause it to thereafter remain open 
until it is closed again between the armature 
lever n and the stop 2. The position of the 
apparatus during the time in which the loco 
lmotive or train is passing from the circuit 
breaker K to the circuit-breaker K will be 
best understood by reference to Fig. 2, in 
which the locking-magnet D will be seen to 
have released its armature, thus allowing the 
projection d to enter the slotl), Securely lock 
ing the switch or switches, and preventing 
any of them from being displaced after the 
train has passed the point K. The falling off 
of the armature in when the train reaches 
the circuit-breaker K not only breaks the 
circuit of its own electro-magnet M, but the 
insulated contact-spring o', which is mounted 
upon it, touches the contact-stop v, and thus 
closes the circuit of the independent local bat 
tery L through the alarm-bell O, which there 
upon rings continuously, announcing the ap 
proach of the train and notifying the station 
master or switchman to immediately replace 
the switches, in case any of them are wrong. 
When the train in its progress reaches the 
second circuit-breaker, K, situated at or near 
the entrance of the station-yard or block-see 
tion, the Second or signal circuit is moment 
arily broken at that point, which releases the 
armature in of the electro-magnet N, allowing 
the same to fall off and break its own circuit 
at the contact-stop 20. The position of the 
apparatus after the locomotive or train has 
passed the second circuit-breaker, K, and is 
traversing the station-yard or block-section, 
is illustrated in Fig. 3. The electro-magnet S 
has released its armature, thus causing the 
semaphore-arm s of the signal S to be ex 
tended in a horizontal position, indicating 
** danger. The actuating - lever B of the 
switch or Switches still remains locked, as 
before. The armature-level in of the electro 
magnet N has also been released, and the 
insulated contact - spring o' has been liftcd 
from the contact-stop 20" and brought into con 
tact with the stop at', the result of which is to 
transfer the current of the local battery L 
from the alarn-bell O to the other continu 
ously-ringing bell, P, which latter continues to 
sound so long as the train is at the station, or 
anywhere within the limits of the station 
yard or block-section, while the bell O, being 
required only to give warning of the approach 
of the train, is permitted to ring only while 
the train is passing from the circuit-breaker 
K to the circuit-breaker K, after which it, 
ceases and the other bell, P, commencestoring. 
After the train has passed a sufficient distance 
beyond the station-say three thousand feet 
and arrived at the exit of the station-yard or 
block-section it momentarily actuates the cir 
cuit-closer K, (see Fig. 1) the office of which 
is to restore all the apparatus to its normal po 
sition and to close the locking and signal cir 
cuits, which it does by momentarily closing a 
normally-open auxiliary circuit from the same 
battery, which may be traced as follows: from 
the negative pole of the battery E by wire 16; 
thence through circuit-closer K and wire 17 
to the coil or helix n? of the electro-magnetN; 
thence by wire 18 to the coil or helix n? of 
electro-magnet M, and thence by Wires 19 and 
1. to the positive pole of the battery. The clos 
ing of this circuit causes a current from the 
battery to traverse the auxiliary coils in and 
in?, and thereby causes both armatures n and 
in to be simultaneously attracted, and so soon 
as these are brought in contact with their re 
spective contact-stops ) and at the two circuits 
first described-that is to say, the locking and 
the signaling circuits-are re-established, and 
IO 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7 5 
90 
IOO 
I O5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
A. 
303,589 
IO 
15 
SO 
thereafter hold themselves closed in the man 
mer first described, so that although the cir 
cuit at K" beinstantly broken again the arma 
tures an and m will not fall off. The closing 
of the locking and signal circuits vitalizes the 
magnet D and unlocks the switches, and also 
vitalizes the magnet S and withdraws the dan 
ger-signal. In case the switch at the station 
is displaced, so as to interrupt the main track, 
the breaking of the circuit at c produces pre 
cisely the same effect as if it had been broken 
at K" by the approaching train. The danger 
signal is exhibited at S, and the continuously 
ringing bell P in the office of the switchman 
or station-master is Set in operation and con 
tinues to ring as long as the switch is dis 
placed. The replacement of the switch, on 
the contrary, does not withdraw the danger 
signal at S. This can Ouly be done by mo 
mentarily closing a key, k, which completes 
the normally - open auxiliary circuit in the 
same manner as the circuit-closer K, which 
should be placed in the office of the switch 
man or station-master, and may, if necessary, 
be secured by a Special lock, So that it cannot 
be operated by an unauthorized person. 
The malnual circuit - breaker Q also serves 
to independently break the same circuit and 
exhibit the danger-signal if, from any cause, 
the station - master Ol' SWitchman wishes to 
signal an expected train and prevent it from 
entering the station-yard or block - Section, 
or passing beyond the signal S. 
In case it is desirable or necessary to un 
lock one or more switches within the station 
yard or block without withdrawing the dan 
ger-signal at the entrance of the section or 
block-as, for example, in case a train which 
has arrived at the station, and is under the 
protection of the danger-signal, is to be placed 
on a side-track, instead of being allowed to 
proceed on its way--it is only necessary that 
the station - master or other authorized per 
son should open the circuit-breaker Q, and 
at the same time depress the key k. The 
breaking of the signal-circuit at Q will retain 
the signal S at danger, while the closing of 
the key k will transmit a current through the 
electro-magnet M, thus restoring the locking 
circuit and unlocking the switch or switches. 
It will be obvious that the accidental break 
age of a conducting-wire or the failure of a 
battery will either cause the signal S to indi 
cate danger, or will prevent it from being 
placed in a position to indicate safety, as 
the case may be. 
In order to guard against an erroneous Safety 
signal being given by an accidental contact 
between the wires 16 and 17, a special signal, 
consisting, preferably, of a small alarm-bell, 
Z, may be placed in the circuit of one of these 
wires, as shown in Fig. 1, which, in case of 
such accidental contact, Will keep up a con 
tinuous alarm), thereby immediately calling 
the attention of the station-master to the Oc 
CL'ell Ce. 
It is obvious that two or more electro-mag 
netic switch-locks and two or more circuit 
breakers operated by switches may be included 
in their respective circuits, so that all the 
switches in the main line will be simultane 
ously locked upon the approach of the train, 
and the movement of any one of these switches 
will cause the danger-signal to be exhibited 
at the entrance of the yard or block-section. 
The hereinbefore-described system of elec 
tric locking or unlocking of a switch-level 
may be applied to any other hand - actuated 
lever employed for similar purposes, such as 
that of actuating an electric or non - electric 
safety-signal on the line of track over which 
the train is to pass, or for actuating a danger 
signal, either mechanically or electrically, 
upon the line of an intersecting or crossing 
track, so that said danger-signal lever and its 
signal may be locked at danger by an ap 
proaching train acting upon the track circuit 
closer K, and thus l'emain locked until the 
train shall have passed the point of intersec 
tion, and have actuated a circuit-breaker, K, 
for unlocking it. 
It is obvious that the device is applicable 
to the locking and unlocking of any hand 
actuated lever or other mechanism ordinarily 
used in connection With movable appliances 
such as draw-bridges, signals, and the like 
employed on or along railway-tracks, or any 
one or more of a series of levers, such as are 
used in the so-called interlocking' apparatus 
of Saxby and Farmer, or other like systeins. 
I claim as my invention- 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of a main battery, a nor 
mally - closed main or locking circuit, an elec 
tro-magnet, armature and armature-lever, a 
circuit-closer actuated by said armature-lever 
only when in proximity to the poles of said 
electro-magnet, whereby said main circuit is 
completed through the coils of said electro 
magnet, an independent electro-magnet also 
included in said main circuit, and a locking 
device which is brought into action by the de 
magnetization of said electro-magnet upon the 
breaking of the main circuit, for preventing 
the displacement of a switch while said cir 
cuit remains broken. 
2. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of a normally-closed main 
or locking electric circuit, a circuit-breaker 
situated at the entrance of a determinate sec 
tion of railway-track, a switch situated with 
in said section of railway-track, a locking de 
vice for preventing the displacement of said 
Switch, and an electro-magnet included in said 
electric circuit, which causes said device to 
lock the switch upon the release of its arma 
ture when said electric circuit is interrupted, 
and to unlock the same when the circuit is re 
stored, and a circuit-closer and connections, 
substantially as described, actuated from a 
point at or near the exit of Said section of rail 
way-track, and adapted to re-establish said 
, 
75 
SO 
90 
95 
O) 
TO 
I 25 
 
"... 
in 
303,589 
5 
circuit when actuated by a receding train, 
Whereby said switch will remain locked dur 
ing the time in which the train is traversing 
Said section. 
3. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of a main battery, a nor 
mally-closed main or locking circuit, an elec 
tro-magnet, armature and armature-lever, a 
circuit-closer actuated by said armature-lever 
Only when in proximity to the poles of said 
electro-magnet, whereby said main circuit is 
completed through its coils, a circuit-breaker 
actuated by a moving train at another point 
in the same circuit, an independent electro 
magnet included in said circuit, a locking de 
vice which is brought into action by the de 
magnetization of the last-named electro-mag 
let, to prevent the displacement of a switch 
While said circuit is broken, and an additional 
magnetizing-helix, auxiliary circuit, and cir 
cuit-closer actuated by a moving train, where 
by the first-named circuit remains broken and 
the switch locked until said circuit is again 
closed by the action of the auxiliary circuit 
and track circuit-closer. 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of a main battery, a normally 
closed main or locking circuit, an clectro mag 
net, armature and armature-lever, a circuit 
closer actuated by said armature-lever only 
When in proximity to the poles of said elec 
tro-magnet, whereby, said circuit is completed 
through its coils, an independent electro-mag 
net included in said circuit, a locking device 
which is brought into action by the demag 
netization of the last-named electro-magnet, 
to prevent the displacement of a switch while 
said circuit is broken, and an additional mag 
netizing - helix, auxiliary circuit, and hand 
circuit-closer, whereby the first-named circuit. 
remains broken, and the switch locked until 
Said circuit is again closed by the completion 
of the auxiliary circuit by means of said hand 
circuit-closer. 
5. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of a main battery, a nor 
Imally-closed main or locking circuit, an elec 
tro-magnet, armature and armature-lever, a 
circuit-closer actuated by said armature-lever 
only when in proximity to the poles of said 
electro-magnet, whereby said main circuit is 
completed through its coils, a circuit-breaker 
for breaking said normally-closed main cir 
cuit, which is actuated by a moving train, an 
independent electro-magnet included in said 
circuit, a locking device which is brought into 
action by the demagnetization of the last 
named electro-magnet, to prevent the displace 
ment of a switch while the main circuit is 
broken, and an additional magnetizing-helix, 
auxiliary circuit, and hand circuit - closer, 
whereby the first - named circuit remains 
broken and the switch locked until said cir 
O 
25 
45 
55 
65 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
- 
e.S. 
cuit is again closed by the completion of the 
auxiliary circuit by said circuit-closer. 
6. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of a main battery, a nor 
mally-closed main or locking circuit, an elec 
tro-magnet, armature and armature-lever, a 
circuit-closer actuated by said armature-lever 
only when in proximity to the poles of said 
electro-magnet, whereby said main circuit is 
completed through its coils, a circuit-breaker 
for breaking said normally-closed main cir 
cuit, which is actuated by a moving train, an 
independent electro-magnet included in said 
circuit, a locking device which is brought into 
action by the demagnetization of the last 
named electro-magnet, to prevent the displace 
ment of a switch while the main circuit is 
broken, an additional magnetizing-helix, and 
a normally-open auxiliary circuit provided 
with two circuit-closers, one actuated by hand 
and the other by a moving train, whereby the 
first-named circuit remains broken and the 
switch locked until said circuit is again closed 
by the completion of the auxiliary circuit 
through one or the other of said circuit-clos 
7. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, with a section of railway of 
determinate length, of a normally-closedlock 
ing-circuit, an electro-magnet included in a 
normally-open auxiliary circuit, and a circuit 
closer actuated by the armature of said elec 
tro-magnet, whereby the locking-circuit may 
be restored after having been broken for the 
purpose of actuating the locking devices. 
8. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, with a section of railway 
of determinate length, of a normally-closed 
locking-circuit, a normally-closed signal-cir 
cuit, one or more electro-magnets included in 
a normally-open auxiliary circuit, and a cir 
cuit-closer actuated by the armature of said 
electro-magnets, whereby both the locking and 
the signal circuit may be closed by closing the 
auxiliary circuit after having been broken for 
the purpose of actuating the locking device 
and signaling apparatus. 
9. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of a normally-closed lock 
ing-circuit, a normally-open auxiliary circuit, 
an electro-magnet included in said circuit for 
actuating a circuit-closer in the locking-cir 
cuit, and an alarm whereby the accidental 
closing of the auxiliary circuit will be indi 
cated. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 1st day of September, 
A. D. 1883. 
FRANKL. POPE. 
Witnesses: 
...A 
DANIEL W. EDGECOMB, 
CHARLEs A. TERRY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303689.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 303,689, 
 
W. C. WILLIAMSON. 
FRICTION CLUTCH, 
Patented Aug. 19, 1884, 
V Y X 
 
 
 
 
2. 
d 
// TWASSAS. 
AWJEWTOR 
4 TTORMEY 
Peters, photo-Lithographer, wishington, 
WILLIAM. C. WILLIAMSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR 
TO WILLIAMSON BROTHERS, OF SAME PLACE. 
". 
FRICT ON - CLUTCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 303,689, dated August 19, 884. 
Application filed June 28, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
To all uhon, it may conce7n 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. WILLIAM 
SON, of the city and county of Philadelphia, 
in the State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
5 new and useful Improvement in Friction 
Clutches for Rotary Shafts, Pulleys, or Drums, 
which improvement is fully set forth and illus 
trated in the following specification and ac 
companying drawings. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
strong, durable, efficient, and very neat meth 
od of connecting together and disconnecting 
fast and loose pulleys or drums and pulleys 
or gear-wheels running on the same shaft, or 
I5 to connect the two parts of a severed line of 
shafting by means of a fixed pulley on one 
part, a sliding clutch or clutch-pulley on the 
other part. 
The invention consists of the parts herein 
2O after particularly described, as specifically 
set forth in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional elevation of a winding or hoisting 
drum, mounted on internal bearings turning 
25 on a central shaft, and provided with a clutch 
for connecting and disconnecting the drum to 
a spur-wheel keyed fast to said shaft. Fig. 2 
is an end view of the clutch mechanism, partly 
in section, shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a ver 
3o tical cross-section through a sliding collar and 
attached clutch mechanism keyed to a central 
shaft, the clutch being operated to engage and 
disengage a loose pulley on said shaft. 
In said figures, the letter A indicates an ec 
35 centric, which is turned on its shaft or fulcrum 
a by means of its armb, to which armis attached 
one end of the rod G, whose other end is at 
tached to a sliding collar, F. Surrounding 
said eccentric A is a strap and sliding block 
4o or box, B, which raises and depresses the fric 
tion block or shoe D when raised or depressed 
itself by the eccentric A. The flange C is pro 
vided with guides 0 c and bearings did. With 
in said guides the base or shank o of the shoe 
45 D slides, and within said shank the sliding 
box. B is fitted, as more clearly shown in Fig. 
2. Said shank o of the shoe D is also provid 
ed with a flange or lug, f, through which the 
adjusting screw-bolt E is set. Said bolt is 
5o pinned at its lower end to the sliding box B, 
as clearly shown in the several figures at ac, 
and its upper end is let into a hole in the shoe 
D, as at 9. Above and below the lug f the 
bolt, E is provided with jam-nuts in n. The 
upper nut, m, rests against the inner side or 55 
rim of the shoe D, and the lower nut, , rests 
upon the upper side of the lugf. As the shoe 
wears from use, the upper nut is screwed up 
against the shoe D, taking up this Wear and 
virtually lengthening the shank of the shoe. 6o 
The lower nut, n, being screwed down upon 
the lugf, makes the necessary adjustment for 
the withdrawal of the shoe from frictional Con 
tact with the rim or flange R of the gear-wheel 
P, as shown in Fig. 1, or pulley P, as shown 65 
in Fig. 3. 
To the sliding collar F is fitted a strap, U. 
and to said strap is secured an ordinary forked 
hand-lever, L, such as is usually fitted to slid 
ing clutches, the ends of the forks being pinned 70 
or pivoted to any suitable fulcrum or fulcra, 
as shown at K, Fig. 1. 
In Fig. 1 the flange C forms part of the 
winding-drum T. In Fig. 3 the flange C is 
simply the radial part of the hub H, keyed 
fast to the shaft S. In this figure the collar F 
slides upon a feather in said shaft or upon a 
prolonged key, by which the hub His keyed 
to the shaft S. In Fig. 1 the collar F slides 
without any feather, but also revolves with 
the drum T in either direction of winding or 
unwinding. The collar F and the drum Tare 
held in the same relative positions radially by 
the guide rod or rods 2, extending from the 
collar F, and fitting with a neat sliding fit into 
a hole or holes in the end of the drum. The 
collar F will thus slide on the shaft and also 
turn with the drum T, the guide or guides 2 
preventing torsional strain upon the rods G. 
The gear-wheel P, Fig. 1, is keyed fast to the 9o 
shaft S. Said shaft is supported in bearings 
on the pillow-blocks N N, set upon a bed 
plate, M., Fig. 1. The collar Y is pinned fast 
to the shaft S to take the thrust of the gear 
wheel P, Fig. 1, or pulley P, Fig. 3, and pre 
vent them from slipping away from the shoe 
D when the clutch is applied or coupled. 
The operation of this device can now be 
readily understood. To throw the clutch in, 
(the position indicated by Fig. 1) the hand- IOO 
95 
2 
303,689 
consequent tendency to work loose) is thus 
communicated to the parts. The shoe D may 
be faced with wood, leather, or any other suit 
able frictional surface. 
Having thus fully described my said in 
provement, as of my invention I claim 
In a friction-clutch for rotary pulleys, drums, 
or shafts, the combination of an eccentric, as 
A, operating within a strap and block or slid 
ing box, as B, and a fiction-shoe, as D, at 
tached to said box, all co-operating substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
WILLIAM C. WILLIAMISON. 
25 
Witnesses: 
MATHEAS SEDDINGER, 
C. WESLEY RUFFELL. 
lever L is thrown over to the right, as shown 
in said figure, which causes the sliding collar 
F to push the three rods G to the right. This 
will turn the full of the eccentric Ato the left, 
and force the shoe D up against the rim R. of 
the gear-wheel or pulley P, making a close 
frictional contact therewith. By throwing the 
hand-lever Lin the opposite direction the ec 
centric A will draw down the shoes D by a 
positive motion, no springs being required to 
break contact, and the uncoupling of drum 
and gear-wheel or fast and loose pulley will be 
instantaneously effected. When this clutch 
is applied to line-shafting, the eccentric is 
moved over to its extreme throw for throwing 
the clutch in. Little or no end-thrust (and 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303789.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 303,789, 
 
E, BARRATH 
CLUTCH, 
Patented Aug. 19, 1884. 
 
r 
 
() Z, 
am 
- - - - 
/ 
A O 
W. WITNESSES: 
 
44%. of 
O) 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD BARRATH, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
CUTC H. 
C3P3CIE, CA"ICAN :orming part of Letters Patent No. 303,789, dated August, J.9, i884. 
Application filed January 9, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
collar C, and has a forwardly projecting head So 
r 
55 
w 
edge rests in the botton of the groove F. 
To the outer end of the rod J is attached a 7o 
2, a ?till, the oi), ii, inctly conceit, 
rests at one end against a collar, C, keyed to 
Be it known that I, EDWARD BARRATH, of the shaft A, and at its other end rests against 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of a cap-collar, D, secured to the said shaft. A by 
New York, have invented certain new and use. a set-screw, E. 
ful Improvements in Clutches, of which the 
In the shaft A is formed a groove, F, to re 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip- ceive the clutch-bar, G, which is made of such 
tion. 
a length as to pass through the hub of the pull 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying loy B and extend into the collal's CID, and of 
drawings, forming part of this specification, ill such a size that its outer edge will be flush 6o 
Io which similar lettel's of reference indicate cor- with the Surface of the shaft. A when its inner 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional side elevation of my To the clutch-bar G, near its outer end, is 
improvement. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the hinged the upper end of a link, H, the lower 
5 
same, the pulley being removed. Fig. 3 is a end of which is placed in a recess in the shaft, 6 
15 sectional elevation of the same, taken through A, and is hinged to the said shaft by a pin, I. 
the line a'a, Fig. 1, and looking to the left. 
To the outer end of the clutch-bar G is 
Fig. 4 is a sectional elevation of the same, taken hinged the inner end of a rod, J, which passes 
through the line of ), Fig. 1, and looking to out through an aperture in the cap-collar I). 
the right, the clutch-bar being removed. Fig. 
2d 5 is a sectional elevation of a part of the pull- head, K, against which rests the outer end of 
ley-hub, showing the grooves to receive the the spiral spring L. The inner end of the 
clutch-bar. Fig. 6 is a side elevation of the spiral spring L rests in a recess formed in the 
elbow-lever for operating the forked lever that cap-collar I). 
operates the sliding collar, the forked lever 
being shown in section through the line 22, to the lower end of the ever M, placed in a 
Fig. 2. Fig. 7 is a side elevation of the treadle recess in the collar C, and pivoted at its mid 
and the lower part of its connecting-rod for dle part to the said coilar by a pin, N. The 
cperating the elbow-lever. Fig. S is a side upper end of the lever M projects above the 
elevation and a plan view of the clutch-bar. 
3o The object of this invention is to provide formed upon it. With this construction, when 
clutches for presses and other machinery, de- the lever M is left free, the spring L will draw 
signed especially for use where the clutches the clutch-bar G outward, causing the link H. 
are required to work both ways, and which and the lever M to raise the said clutch-bar G 
shall be simple in construction and reliable in from the groove F, and cause it to enter a 85 
operation. 
groove. O, in the inner Silrface of the hub of 
The invention consists in a clutch construct- the pulley B. The groove O is made with 
cd with a clutch-bar placed in a groove in a one side radial and the other curved or in 
shaft and in recesses in collars attached to the clined, so that the bal' G will enter the said 
said shaft, and pivoted at its ends to a link groove and carry the pulley B with it when go 
o and a lever, and connected at its one end with the shaft A is turned in one direction, but 
a spiral spring for raising it into gear with the will readily pass out of the said groove when 
grooved pulley-hub, and thrown out of gear the shaft A is turned in the other direction. 
by a sliding collar having a conical or inclined When the pulley B is to be driven sometimes 
head at its inner end, and at its outer end a in one direction and sometimes in the other 95 
45 flange having a cross-groove to engage with a direction, a second groove, O', is formed in the 
spring-pressed hook-catch, the said sliding inner surface of the hub of the pulley B, with 
collar being thrown out of and into gear by a its radial side in the opposite direction from 
forked lever, an elbow-lever, a treadle, and a the raidial side of the first groove, so that, 
spring, as will be hereinafter fully described. the clutch-bar G will engage with the radial IOO 
So A represents a shaft, lipon which is placed side of one groove when the shaft A is turned 
a loose-pulley, B. The hub of the pulley B in one direction, and with the radial side of 
The inner end of the clutch-bar G is hinged 75 
2 5 
3 5 
2 
303,789 
7 5 
O 
the other groove when the said shaft is turned hereinafter described. The outward move 
in the opposite direction. 
ment of the collar P releases the lever M, and 
Upon the shaft A at the outer side of the 
allows the spring L to draw the clutch-bar G 
collar C is placed a sliding collar, P, within 
outward and raise it into gear with the hub 
which the said shaft. A revolves freely. Upon 
of the pulley B. 
the inner end of the collar P is formed a coni 
To the lever Y is attached the end of a spiral 
cal head, Q, which, when the collar P is forced 
or other spring, e, the other end of which is 
inward, presses the upper end of the lever M. 
attached to the frame of the machine or other 
upward and inward, drawing the clutch-bar 
suitable support. With this construction, when 
G down into the groove F and releasing the 
the treadle d is released, the springe operates 
pulley B. 
the lever Y and forces the collar Pinward, 
If desired, the conical head Q can be replaced 
operating the lever M and forcing the clutch 
by a calm formed upon the collar P, and op 
bar G into the slot F of the shaft A, releasing 
erating upon the lever M as the shaft. A re 
the pulley B. 
volves. 
The spring e can be connected with the 
Upon the outer end of the collar P is formed 
forked lever Y, the elbow-levera, or the treadle 
a flange, R, having an inclined outer side, and 
d, the effect being the same in either case. 
provided with a cross-groove, S, for the out 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
ward passage of the hook-catch T, which is 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
pivoted to a band, U, passing around and Se 
Patent, is 
cured to the shaft A, so that the said catch 
1. In a clutch, the combination, with the 
will be carried around by and with the said 
clutch-bar arranged in a groove of the shaft, 
shaft in its revolution. The hook-catch Thas 
and pivoted to a link and lever, respectively, 
its forward end beveled, and is held down by 
at opposite ends, of a spring for raising the 
a spring, V, attached to the band U, so that 
clutch-bar out of the groove, and a sliding 
the said hook-catch will cngage automatically 
collar having a conical or cam head engaging . 
with the flange R and hold the collar P until 
the free end of the said lever for drawing the 
the revolution of the shaft. A brings the hook 
clutch-bar down into the groove, substantially 
catch T opposite the groove S, when the said 
as herein shown and described. 
collar P will be moved inward automatically 
2. In a clutch, the combination, with the 
in the manner hereinafter described. 
grooved shaft A, the recessed collars CD, and 
In a groove around the middle part of the 
the grooved hub of the pulley B, of the clutch 
collar P is rigidly secured a band, W, to which, 
bar G, the pivoted link and lever HM, carry 
upon the opposite sides of-the shaft A, are at 
ing the clutch-bar, the spring and rod L J, 
tached two gudgeons, X, to receive the forked 
raising the clutch-bal, and the sliding collar 
end of the lever Y. The lever Y is pivoted 
P, having conical or can head Q, for lowering 
to a bracket, Z, attached to the frame of the 
the said clutch-bar, substantially as herein 
machine or other suitable support. The other 
shown and described, whereby the said clutch 
end of the lever Y is placed in a slot or fork 
can be thrown into and out of gear by operat 
in the end of the upper arm of the elbow-le 
ing the said sliding collar, as set forth. 
ver a, which is pivoted at its angle to a brack 
3. In a clutch, the combination, with the 
et, b, attached to the frame of the machine or 
shaft A, and the sliding collar P, provided 
other suitable support. 
with a flange, R, having cross-groove S, of the 
To the end of the lower alm of the elbow 
spring-pressed hook-catch T, substantially as 
lever ( is pivoted the upper end of a connect 
herein shown and described, whereby the said 
ing-rod, c, the lower end of which is pivoted 
collar will be held out of gear and released 
to the treadled. The treadle d is pivoted to 
automatically, as set forth. 
a bearing attached to the floor or other suita 
4. In a clutch, the combination, with the 
ble support. The free end of the treadled 
clutch-bar-operating lever M, the sliding col 
projects into such a position that it can be 
lar P, provided with the cam-head Q, and 
readily reached by the operator with his foot. 
grooved flange R. S., and the spring-pressed 
With this construction the downward move 
hook-catch T, of the forked lever Y, the spring 
ment of the treadle d operates the levers (, Y, 
e, and the elbow-levera, substantially as herein 
and forces the collar P outward, where it is 
shown and described. 
caught and held by the hook-catch T until the 
revolution of the shaft. A brings the said catch 
Topposite the groove S, which allows the col 
lar P to be again forced inward in the manner 
EDWARD BARRATH. 
JAMES T. GRAHAM, 
EDGAR, TATE. 
Witnesses: 
92 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
O 
2 5 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303889.txt	(No Model.) 
T, B, SHARP, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MACHINERY FOR CONCENTRATING ORES, &c. 
No. 303,889. 
 
Patented Aug. 19, 1884. 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ  
Saez, 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz 
Cefou Nd five 
N. peless, photo-uthegrapher. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
T, B, SHARP. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINERY FOR CONCENTRATING ORES, &c. 
No. 303,889. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1884. 
 
Witnesses. 
2-4-1. 
Inventor, 
(7%.a. A. Ka4, 4%. 
: 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS BUIDWORTH SHARP, OF FRENCH WALLs, SM ETHWICR, COUNTY OF 
STAFFORD, ENGLAND. 
MACHINERY FOR CONCENTRATING OREs, &c. 
3: CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 303,889, dated August 19, 1884. 
Application filed May 26, 1884. 
(No model.) Patented in England January 16, 1883, No. 265. 
. 
Io the following is a specification. 
To all, who 7), it inctly conceri . 
Be it known that I, THOMAS BUDWoRTH 
SHARP, a subject of the Queen or Great Brit 
ain, residing at French Walls, Smethwick, in 
5 the county of Stafford, England, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Ma 
chinery for Concentrating Ores, &c., (for which 
I have received Letters Patent in Great Brit 
ain No. 265, dated January 16, 1SS3,) of which 
My invention consists of the improved com 
binations or arrangements of parts, hereinafter 
described and claimed, of machinery or ap 
paratus for separating solids of different spe 
I5 (cific gravities-that is, for dressing ores or 
Separating the metallic from the earthy mat 
ters of the said ores, for separating metallic 
particles or filings from non-metallic parti 
cles, and for other like purposes. 
In constructing machinery or apparatus ac 
cording to my invention, I employ a vertical 
or nearly vertical pipe or tube, (which I will 
hereinafter call the water-tube,) open attop 
and bottom, the top being expanded or fun 
25 inel-shaped. This water-tube is supported, 
preferably, in the center of a tank having near 
its top a horizontal diaphragm through which 
the water-tube passes, and in which it fits 
tightly, there being no communication be 
30 tween the upper and lower compartments of 
the said tank, excepting through the water 
tube. The lower open end of the water-tube 
is at a considerable height from the bottom of 
the tank, the said open bottom of the water 
35 tube having underneath it a vessel or recep 
tacle to receive anything which passes out at 
the open bottom of the tube. Over the top 
funnel-shaped mouth of the water-tube is a 
stage or platform, and in the said platform is 
4o a hole opening into a guide-tube, the lower 
end of which guide-tube enters the funnel 
shaped mouth of the water-tube. An en 
trance or inlet, water passage, which will be 
controlled by a stop-cock or valve, opens into 
45 the lower compartment of the tank, and an 
overflow-pipe opens into the upper compart 
ment of the talk. 
In using the machinery or apparatus water 
is introduced by the inlet-passage into the 
So lower compartment of the tank, by which wa 
OO 
ter the said lower compartment of the tank 
and the receptacle contained in it are filled 
with water and a stream of water directed 
upward through the water-tube. The said 
stream overflows the top funnel-shaped mouth 
of the water-tube, and falling into the upper 
compartment of the tank passes away by the 
overflow-pipe. The mixture of solid parti 
cles to be separated is put upon the platform 
and pushed into the guide-tube, from which 
it falls into the water-tube, meeting in its de 
scent the ascending stream of water. By reg 
ulating the velocity of the said ascending 
stream of Water, by means of the stop-cock or 
valve referred to, the velocity of the said as 65 
cending stream may be made to exceed the ve 
locity with which the particles of the lighter 
solid fall in still water. By this regulation 
of the ascending stream the lighter particles 
do not descend in the water-tube, but are car 
ried with the overflow water, falling over the 
edge of the funnel-shaped top of the water 
tube, while the heavier particles descend in 
the water-tube with a velocity equal to the 
difference between their rate of descent in 
still water and the velocity of the ascending 
stream. The heavy particles thus falling 
down the Water-tube are collected in the re 
ceptacle in the lower compartment of the tank, 
the lighter particles, as hereinbefore ex 
plained, being carried away by the overflow 
water, from which they may be recovered by 
subsidence, if they are valuable. 
I will now proceed to describe the construc 
tion and combination of parts constituting my 
invention, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure I represents in vertical section, and 
Fig. 2 in plan, machinery or apparatus con 
structed according to my invention for sepa 
rating solids of different specific gravities. 
The same lettel's of reference indicate the 
same parts in both figures. 
(, is the vertical water-tube of the appa 
ratus, open attop and bottom, the said water 
tube being fixed in the center of the divided 
tank to c. The horizontal division or dia 
phragm dividing the tank into two parts is 
marked d. The water-tube a passes through 
the said horizontal diaphragm cl, as represented 
90 
75 
2 
303,889 
IOs 
25 
45 
55 
in Fig. 1, and is fixed thereto by the flange 
and screw-bolts and nuts shown. The Water 
tube a is fixed water-tight in the diaphragm d, 
so that there is no communication between the 
upper and lower compartments, b c, of the 
tank, excepting through the said water-tube 
The upper end of the water-tube ( is ex 
C. 
panded at a, and constitutes the overflow end, 
the overflow-water from which falls into the 
upper compartment, c, of the tank, from whence 
it passes by the spout cinto the pit c, (or other 
receptacle,) which is furnished with an over 
flow-pipe. f is a funnel supported over the 
top of the water-tube a by the rods or col 
lumns of g, which are fixed to the upper com 
partment c, of the tank. The funnelf car 
lies a guide-tube, h, the lower end of which 
dips into the expanded mouth a' of the water 
tube (t. Crossing the funnel f is a support, 
stage, or platform, ii, upon which a riddle Jnay 
rest, into which the mixture to be separated is 
In the lower compart 
shoveled , or placed. 
ment, b, of the tank is a vessel or receptacle, 
k, situated underneath the lower open end of 
the water-tube (, for receiving the heavier 
particles of the mixture to be separated. In 
order to introduce the vessel k into and re 
move it from the lower compartment, b, of 
the tank, the upper compartment, c, carrying 
the water-tube (, a' and funnelf, and other 
parts, is jointed to the lower compartlment, b, 
by a hinge-joint at l. This joint l permits the 
upper compartment, c, to be thrown back or 
turned aside, so as to uncover the lower com 
partment, b, when required to remove and re 
place the vessel k. The part c of the tank is 
fixed down upon the part b during the work 
ing of the apparatus by clamps or otherwise; 
but ordimarily the weight of the upper part, c, 
and the parts carried by it, is sufficient to 
maintain the part e in position and preserve 
the junction between it and the part b water 
tight. 1n is the entrance or inlet water pas 
sage into the bottom compartment, b. This 
inlet-water passage will be controlled by a stop 
cock or valve, (not shown,) so as to regulate 
the velocity of the stream of water passing 
through the apparatus, according to the re 
quirements of the mixtures being operated 
upon. The stream of water entering through 
the passage m is supplied from a reservoir at 
a greater height than the funnelf, or is sup 
plied under such pressure as will cause it to 
rise with the required velocity in the tube (i. 
The action of the machinery or apparatus 
is as follows: Water being introduced by the 
inlet-passage in, and its rate of entrance regul 
lated by the stop-cock or valve described, the 
lower compartment, b, of the tank and the ves 
sel or receptacle k are filed with water, and a 
strealm of Water rising upward through the 
Water-tube a overflows the expanded mouth 
(t of the said water-tube and falls into the up 
per compartment, c, of the tank and passes 
into the pit or other receptacle, e. The mix 
ture of solid particles to be separated being 
placed in the liddle, supported on the plat 
form i, a to-and-fr motion is given to the said 
riddle, and the materials to be operated upon 
fall in a nearly-uniform stream through the 
guide-tube h, as indicated by the dotted ar 
rows, into the water-tube a, and meet in their 
descent the ascending stream of water in the 
said water-tube. The velocity of the ascend 
ing stream of water having been regulated, as 75. 
hereinbefore described, the lighter particles of 
the mixture do not descend the water tube (, 
but are carried with the overflow water, fall 
ing over the edge of the expanded top (t" of 
the water-tube, while the heavier particles de- 8o 
scend in the water-tube a and are collected in 
the receptacle k in the lower compartment, b, 
of the tank. The lighter particles which are 
carried with the overflow-water fall into the 
upper compartment, c, and are conducted by 
the spout.c into the pit e, for recovery, if val 
ulable. 
Instead of placing the mixture to be sepa 
rated in a riddle, as described, the mixture 
may be introduced directly into the funnel f 90 
in a gentle stream in any convenient manner. 
In order to permit the escape of air from 
the top of the lower compartment, b, a small 
hole may be made either in the diaphragm or 
division d, as indicated at d", or in the Water 
tilbe (, as indicated at d. 
The water-tube c and tank may be modified 
in the manner illustrated in vertical Section 
in Fig. 3. In this modification the upper por 
tion of the water-tube a is divided by a verti 
cal partition into two parts or legs, (marked, 
respectively, a and a,) the lega', opening into 
the funnelf, and the other leg, c', forming the 
overflow part of the water-tube. The over 
flow-water and lighter particles are received 
from the pipe (t" by the trough c, from which 
they fall into a pit or receptacle. The action 
of this modification is exactly the same as that 
of the arrangement already described. 
dispensed with in the separating of Solids of 
different specific gravities, and the separation 
is efficiently, economically, and rapidly effect 
ed with a minimum expenditure of water. 
My invention is applicable, annong other 
purposes, to the Washing or dressing of ground 
ores, the washing of precipitated metals, the 
washing of jewelers sweepings, and casters 
and smelters' Sweepings, and Sweepings ob 
tained in other metallurgical operations, and 
generally to the separation of all such solid 
particles of different specific gravities as are 
not soluble in or injuriously affected by water. 
Having now described the nature of my in 
vention and the manner in which the same is 
to be performed, I wish it to be understood 
that I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the closed tank pro 
vided with an inlet for water, a receiving-re 
ceptacle within said tank, a delivery-tube ex 
tended through the top of the tank into the 
receiving-receptacle, a hopper from which ma 
terialis?ed into said delivery-tube, and a trough 
for receiving overflow material from the up 
By the use of my invention skilled labor is I IO 
95 
IOO 
II5 
I25 
303,889 
3 
per end of the delivery-tube, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination of the tank divided into 
an upper and a lower compartment provided, 
respectively, with an inlet and exit for wa 
ter, a receiving-receptacle within the lower 
compartment, a delivery-tube open at both 
ends and extended from the upper into the 
lower compartment, and a hopper supported 
above the upper compartment and provided 
With a guide-tube of smaller diameter than 
the delivery-tube, and fitted within the latter, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the tank divided into 
5 
O 
an upper and lower compartment, with the I5 
former hinged to the latter, and provided, re 
spectively, with inlet and exit passages for 
water, a delivery-tube supported by the up 
per compartment and extended into the lower 
compartment, and a hopper supported above 20 
the upper compartment and provided with a 
guide-tube of smaller diameter than the de 
livery-tube, and fitting into the latter, substan 
tially as described. 
THOMAS BUI)WORTH SHARP. II, s. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE SHAW, 
RICHARD SKERIRIETT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US303990.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 303,990, 
 
J. W. DAWS, 
PLOW, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1884. 
VITWESSES 
 
 
pets. Photo-Lithographer, Washing'''. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. DAVIS, OF FAIRFAX, IOWA, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND JOHN W. 
- 
FIRKINS, OF SAME PLACE. 
3Pr;CEFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 303,990, dated August 26, 1884. 
Application filed May 31, 1884. (No model.) 
o 
Io make and use the same. 
To all, whon, it in tely concer'72. 
Be it known that I, JoFIN W. DAVIS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Fairfax, 
in the county of Linn and State of Iowa, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Plows; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, cieair, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable othel's 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
This invention relates to that class of plows 
in which the beam is adapted to be adjusted 
to regulate the elevation of its front end; and 
its object is to provide simple and improved 
I5 means for securing the standard to the mold 
board and landside, and for effecting a con 
venient and secure adjustment of the beam 
upon the standard. 
To this end liny invention consists substan 
20 tially in providing suitable braces connecting 
the mold-board and landside, through which 
braces the standard passes and is secured, and 
in pivoting the beam to the top of the stand 
ard, suitable devices being provided upon the 
latter to secute the lower end of tie beam be 
low the pivot, in the position to which it has 
been adjusted, as will be hereinafter more fully 
set forth. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
3o view illustrating my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation. Fig. 3 is a vertical transverse 
sectional view taken on the plane of the stand 
Corresponding parts in the figures are de 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
mold-board, and B the landside, which parts 
may be of any suitable construction. 
C is a transverse brace secured to the lower 
4o portion of the rear face of the mold-board, and 
near the outer edge thereof, as shown at c, and 
from thence extending across to about the cen 
ter of the landside, and secured thereto, as 
shown at c'. 
D designates another angular brace, which 
is secured to the rear face of the mold-board at 
its front end, d, and has its rear end, d, secured 
to the rear end of the landside. This brace D 
is arched or formed so that it extends over the 
5o transverse brace C, and the said braces are 
35 noted by the same letters of reference. 
45 
alrd. 
- 
55 
thus relatively disposed at an angle to each 
other. Suitable openings ol' perforations, c'd, 
are respectively provided in the braces and on 
the same vertical plane, which openings re 
ceive the standard E, as shown. The lower 
portion of the standard, which passes through 
the brace C, is screw-threaded, and receives two 
nuts, F G, working, respectively, above and 
below the brace C, and serving to retain the 
standard down in position. A collar, H, is 
provided on the standard at a point just above 
the brace D, and has its under surface provided 
with radial serrations h, which engage corre 
sponding serrations, d, on the top face of the 
biace D. By this ai'i'angement, when the stand 
ard is drawn down by the action of its Securing 
nuts, these serrations are brought into engage 
ment, and the standard is secured in position 
and against accidental vertical movement or 
turning. The standard is provided with a top 
flat portion, e, to which is pivoted the beam I, 
as shown at i. The rear end, i, of the beam 
extends some distance below this pivot, and is 
provided with a segmental slot, i, which re 
ceives a transverse screw -bolt, J, working 
through the top portion of the standard. Upon 
the inner end of this screw-bolt is provided a 
clamp-nut, K, which binds against the face of 
the bean, and retains it in the position to 
which it has been adjusted. By operating the 
screw-bolt the nut may be loosened sufficiently 
to permit of the adjustment of the beam upon 
its pivot, after which the bolt is again screwed 
up to clamp the nut against the beam. The 
nut Kissecured against rotary movement dul 
ing the operation of the bolt J by its engage 
ment with the top edge, at, of the mold-board, 
the relative arrangement being such that when 
the standard is drawn down and secured by the 
nuts F and G the edge of the nut, K is locked 
into engagement with the top edge of the mold 
board, as illustrated in Fig. 1 of the drawings. 
The operation and advantages of my inven 
tion will be readily understood from the fore 
going description and annexed drawings. The 
construction is simple, and permits of the con 
venient and ready adjustment of the beam. It 
is obvious that my invention is adapted for ap 
plication to various kinds of plows, either 
walking or sulky plows, and that it is suscep- IOO 
90 
2 
303,990 
tible of regulation for one, two, or any other standard having a screw-threaded portion 
desired number of horses. 
passing through these perforations, securing 
In myinvention the regulation of the depth 
nuts upon the standard, the beam pivoted to 
of cut is readily and conveniently effected by 
the standard and having the segmental slot, 
simply adjusting the rear end of the beam, in 
the transverse adjusting-bolt, and the nut 
lieu of adjustment of the draft at the front end 
thereon, substantially as and for the purpose 
of the beam, as heretofore done, and theim 
set forth. 
proved arrangement serves to materially lessen 
3. The combination of the mold-board and 
the draft. 
landside, braces connecting the same and pro 
vided with perforations, one of the braces be 
ing provided with a serrated face, the standard 
passing through said perforations and having 
the serrated collar, and devices for securing 
the standard to the braces, substantially asset 
forth. 
Intestimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, in a plow, of the mold 
board, the standard, adjustable devices for re 
movably securing the standard in position, the 
beam pivoted to the top of the standard, and 
having the end slot, the adjusting-bolt pass 
ing through the standard and through this 
slot, and the clamp-nut engaging the edge of 
the mold-board when the standard is secured 
down in position, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, in a plow, of the mold 
board, suitable braces having perforations, the 
JOHN W. DAVIS. 
- 
Witnesses: 
W. D. DoDGE, 
E. LEFEBURE, Jr. 
25 
35 
O 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304090.txt	(No Model.) 
M. FLEISHER, 
WATER, TUBE BOLER, 
No. 304,090, 
 
Patented Aug. 26, 1884. 
in 
F is 8.1 
 
 
 
 
 
NA. 
| 
|| 
C 
Zvezzoz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MOYER, FLEISHER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WATER - TU BE BOER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,090, dated August 26, 1884. 
Application filed April 15, 1SS4. (No model.) 
O 
5 
To add twhlon, it may concern, 
Beit known that I, MOYER, FLEISHER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Water-Tube Boil 
el's, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
laleans for adjusting in place the plate-plugs 
for closing hand-holes and in openings for their 
reception, and is specially adapted for use on 
the class of water-tube boilers. For this real 
Son I will proceed to describe it as applied to 
such devices, although I do not desire to restrict 
myself to such use. Boilers of this character, as 
is well known, consist of groups of tubes the 
ends of which are expanded into a steam-cir 
culating end chamber, commonly known as a 
header or water-leg. 
These headers 
are made to receive the ends of all the tubes of 
the boiler; but sometimes said headers are 
made in sections, each section adapted to re 
ceive two or more of the tubes. Said headers 
must be provided with hand-holes, which be 
fore steam is generated have to be tightly 
5 
closed. When the headers are made sectional, 
they are connected together by a short tube or 
open-ended thimble, by which means a free 
circulation of steam is maintained. My inn 
provement is adaptable to eithel form of 
header. 
Hitherto there has been great difficulty in 
providing means for introducing within the 
chambers (or boxes, as they are sometimes 
called) of the headers the closing plates or 
plugs for the hand-holes, which, as is well 
known, must have a larger area on the inside 
or lower surface, either by beveling or flaring 
the periphery or by overlapping or extending 
said plates a given distance within the box or 
chamber over and beyond the hand-hole open 
ing, by which means the pressure of steam is 
resisted. 
To overcome this difficulty has been the ob 
45 ject of my improvement; and it consists in 
forming apertures for reception of the tubes, 
as well as the apertures for the connecting 
thimbles, when such are employed, larger in 
diameter relatively to the hand-hole-closing 
5o plugs, by which construction is provided one 
5 
55 
or more openings large enough for admission 
of the hand-hole-closing plates or plugs, and 
through which larger opening or openings Said 
closing-plates can be introduced into the re 
spective headers, whether sectional or not, 
from the inside, and be readily placed in po 
sition for closing said hand-holes. 
My improvement further contemplates that 
one or more of the apertures into which the 
ends of the tubes are to be expanded may be 
reduced in size by bushing. This construction 
admits the free passage (before the bushing is 
placed in position) of the closing-plate, when 
said plate is of much larger diameter than its 
opposite tube. So, too, may one or more of the 
hand-hole apertures be made much larger than 
its respective closing-plate, said aperture to 
be afterward reduced in diameter by bushing 
to a required size, thus admitting the introl 
duction of the tubes and the closing-plate into 
the header or water-leg through such enlarged 
hand-hole aperture previous to its reduction 
by bushing, all as hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, in 
which like letters of reference point out simi 
lar parts on each figure, Figure 1 is an eleva 
tion of the side chamber or header of a water 
tube boiler. Fig. 2 is a section of the same on 
the line 1). 
Fig. 3 is an other elevation of a 
Fig. 4 is a sectional view thereof on 
header. 
the line a. a. 
A is the outer plate; B, the hand-hole plugs 
or plates; C, the connecting-thimble; D, the 
boiler-tubes; E E, the bushing, which may be 
either expanded or screwed into place; b, the 
plug bridge or brace. 
Figs. 2 and 4 fully illustrate my invention. 
It will be seen that one or more of the hand 
hole openings are larger than necessary for 
passage of the tube, being made so for intro 
duction of the hand-hole plate, after which 
said enlarged opening is reduced to the proper 
size by screwing or expanding the bushing E 
into place; or the hand-hole plate may be in 
troduced through the thimble C, in which case 
the bushing E is dispensed with. 
It is manifest that the hand-hole plug B may 
be introduced through the aperture for recep 
tion of the tube D, instead of through the thim- IOO 
95 
So 
75 
X 
304,090 
O 
ble C, in which case the bushing E (see Fig. 
2) must be employed. 
In Figs. 2 and 4 I have shownthimble Cand 
bushing E E all of an enlarged size relative to 
the hand-hole plate B; but in practice it is not 
necessary that all be so enlarged; either one 
may be sufficient to carry out my invention. 
Although the drawings illustrate my in 
provement as applied to a sectional header, I 
desire to be understood as not limiting myself 
to this special form, it being equally adapta 
ble to a continuous vertical passage. 
Myinvention, although simplein its nature, 
provides for a long felt want, and will be found 
very useful for the purpose intended. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
tel's Patent, is 
1. Aheader for Water-tube boilers, provided 
with aperture for the reception of connecting 
thimble C, aperture for the reception of tube 
D, and an aperture for reception of plug B, 
either oral of the said apertures being made 
of larger diameter than the hand-hole plate, as 
and for the purpose intended, substantially as 
2. In a header for a water-tube boiler, hav 
25 described. 
ing on one side of its shell hand-holes, and on 
its opposite side apertures for reception of 
tubes to be expanded therein, wherein the 
hand-hole-closing plates are larger in diameter 
upon their lower surface than the hand-holes, 
and wherein one or more of the tube-receiv 
ing apertures are of a larger diameter than the 
closing-plug B, whereby said closing-plug cali 
be introduced within the shell of the header 35 
through the tube - opening, in combination 
with bushing E, as and for the purpose in 
tended, substantially as described. 
3. In a header for water-tube boilers, pro 
vided at one side with apertures for reception 
of tubes D, and on the oppositeside withhand 
holes, wherein said hand-holes are larger in 
diameter than their closing-plugs B, in combi 
nation with bushing E, whereby, said hand 
holes may be reduced in diameter after the 45 
passage of the tubes D and introduction of 
the closing-plugs B, as and for the purpose in 
tended, substantially as described. 
MOYEIR FLESHER. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. E. PANCOAST, 
MARIE SCHULDT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304190.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 304,190. 
 
E. C. FARRINGTON, 
- 
PLUME, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1884. 
WITWESSES 
2//C (2-6-4 . 
2/27. 
re. 
- Zaz-e -2 6. z23.22. 
546-14  22, Attorney 
N. PEFERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
8. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ENOCH C. FARRINGTON, OF FRYEBURG, MAINE. 
PLUME, 
o 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,190, dated August 26, 1884. 
Application filed June 19, 1884. (No model.) 
- 
IO 
Sale. 
to all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ENOCH C. FARRINGTON, 
residing in Fryeburg, in the county of Ox 
ford and State of Maine, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Plumes; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
The annexed drawing represents my im 
proved plume, the construction of which will 
be fully understood from the following de 
Scription. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
new and cheap article of manufacture-to wit, 
a campaign-plume which is adapted to be se 
cured to a hat, a flag-staff, a torch-staff, or to 
any other object, and which is designed es 
pecially for the use of political clubs, cam 
paign Organizations, and other similar pur 
poses; and the object which I have in view is 
to produce plumes for general decorative pur 
poses, which, from their simple and rapid con 
struction, inexpensive price, and great beauty 
of style and design, shall be well suited to 
common use and constitute a highly-popular 
article of trade and commerce for the afore 
said purposes. 
In the annexed drawing, the letter A. desig 
mates the feathery part of the plume, which is 
secured to a central axis or mid-rib, B. The 
plumous part A is composed of any cheap and 
simple material which will give a proper 
35 fluffy or feathery appearance. For this pur 
pose I prefer to utilize the common and well 
known article called excelsior, which is 
wood-fiber shavings used formattresses, pack 
ing, and other purposes, and which is com 
4o paratively inexpensive. This article I have 
found will give a handsome and attractive 
plumous appearance when mounted on a stem 
or mid-lib, B. The mid-rib B is made of two 
25 
 
M 
45 
55 
65 
or more strips of wire cut to any desired 
length. 
The operation of manufacturing my im 
proved plume is very rapid and very simple, 
and is as follows: The workman first selects 
the lengths of wire for the axis or mid-rib. 
He then quickly plats or twists them together, 
and as the operation progresses a tuft or bunch 
of the material for the plumous part is firmly 
confined between the wire strands, and for all 
the purposes designated a very attractive and 
effective badge-plume can be produced. This 
may be dyed any desired color. 
Very beautiful and attractive effects may 
be produced by dyeing the plumes in one or 
more cheap and bright colors. For instance, 
the material may be entirely dyed all red, or 
part red, a part blue, and the remainder the 
undyed white material. 
I use the excelsior or fine shavings of wood 
because it is found in the market in a curled 
or feathery state, and can be readily selected 
in tufts or bunches, and also because it will 
readily absorb and retain a coloring solution, 
and also because it is cheaper for the purpose 
than any other known material. 
...' 
I am aware that artificial flowers have been 
made of feathers, hair, paper, and worsted, 
and I do not therefore broadly claim the same 
as my invention. 
What I claim is 
As a new and improved article of manufac- 75 
ture, the herein-described plume, composed of 
curled tufts of woody fiber known as excel 
sior, secured to an axis or mid-rib, as speci 
fied. 
my own I have affixed my signature in the 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 8o 
ENOCH. C. FARRINGTON, 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE F. EMERY, 
H. G. BRIGGS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304290.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. BLESSING. 
SAFETY WALWE, 
No. 304,290, 
Patented Sept. 2, 1884, 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
N 2 
KS 
RS 
a 
N 
a x2 sys S S 
Sis S 's Yi 
(as 32N is 
stats 2. 
22 SYSe 
S 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. BLESSING, OF ALBANY, NEW YORK, 
SAFETY-VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,290, dated September 2, 1884. 
Application filed December 19, 1883. (No mode.) 
IO 
5 
to all, who in it. may concern: 
the city of Albany, county of Albany, and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Safety-Valves, of which 
the following is a full, true, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in Safety-valves, and is designed to furnish a 
valve which will be at once tight and inca 
pable of Sticking to its seat; and it also pro 
Vides in a simple and efficacious way a meth 
Od of renewing the valve-seatin case it should 
be worn out. 
My invention will be readily understood 
from the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I represents a section of my valve. 
Fig. 2 represents a view of the spider-frame 
holding the valve-seat in position, and Fig. 3 
a View of the valve-seat. 
A represents a view of the valve-box; BB, 
Openings by which the steam or other fluid 
may be admitted to the valve M and delivery 
port C; D, a diaphragm separating the open 
ings B B from the opening C. Carried in this 
diaphragm is the annular valve-seat support 
E, upon which the valve-seat Fisplaced. This 
Seat has an annular recess, G, corresponding 
to the lip or metallic annulus E, which is pro 
Vided with a soft packing, which serves the 
double purpose of packing the opening be 
tWeen the valve-seat and its support and of 
lessening the impact of the valve. This valve 
Seat is held in its position by the spider-frame 
H, provided with arms J, which is screwed 
into the valve-box, as is clearly shown in the 
drawings. The upper end of this frame is 
provided with screw thread and nut K, and 
the frame itself is drilled longitudinally to al 
low of the free movement of the pin L. 
M. represents the valve, which valve has a 
cup or recess projecting below, and prefer 
ably to a considerable distance below, the 
valve-seat. The valve itself has a spherical 
face where it bears against the corner of the 
Valve-seat F. 
N represents the safety-valve lever, sup 
ported in the frame O in the usual manner. 
This frame rests upon the upper part of the 
spider-frame H, and is locked thereto by the 
nut K, previously described. The pin L. rests 
Be it known that I, JAMES H. BLESSING, of in the cup of the valve M, while its upper 
end engages with the lever N. This pin is 
loose in the frame. 
The operation of this valve can now be 
readily understood. In the first place, the 
valve-seat F, provided with cushion G, is 
dropped upon the diaphragm or partition. 
The valve M is then placed in position, and 
the spider-frame His screwed down upon the 
valve - seat. The stem L is then dropped 
through the opening in said frame, and finally 
the lever Nis adjusted by the nutKinposition. 
When the valve is so constructed, it will be 
seen that the closing-surface is merely the line 
of contact between the square corner of the 
valve-seat and the spherical surface of the 
valve; and it will be likewise seen that the 
valve itself is automatically centered, by Tea 
son of the fact that the bearing of the pin I. 
against said valve is below the bearing of the 
valve upon its seat; and it will also be seen 
that a new seat or a new valve and seat can 
be readily and quickly substituted for the 
ones in the Valve should it be desired to make m 
Such substitution. 
This method of mounting a valve is appli 
cable to other kinds of valve besides safety 
valves, but is especially applicable to safety 
valves. It will be plainlikewise that a spring 
might be substituted for the weight to close. 
the valve. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A valve having a spherical surface clos 
ing against a valve-seat, and having an elon 
gated and contracted cup, and a free rod, or 
pin exerting its force in said valve at a point 
below the valve-seat, whereby the valve is 
automatically centered on its seat, asset forth. 
2. The combination, in a safety-valve, of a 
valve provided with a spherical valve-surface, 
a valve-seat provided with an angular seating 
Surface, and a pin bearing against said valve 
below the seating-surface and free to move in 
said valve, and likewise against the power clos 
ing said valve, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, in a safety-valve, of the 
valve-box A, provided with diaphragm D, the 
removable valve-seat F, the spherical valve, 
and the pin L. loose therein, operated by the 
35 
45 
59 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
304, 290 
power closing the valve, substantially as de- sage of the connecting-pin L, and the pin L, 
scribed. 
joining the lever N and valve M, substantially 
diaphragm D, the valve M, the spider-frame 
5 H., locking the removable seat F in position, 
and itself supporting the frame O and lever 
N, and provided with an opening for the pas- 
4. The combination of the valve-box A, as described. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES H. BLESSING. 
WILLIAM. A. POLLOCK, 
ANTHONY GREF. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304390.txt	(No Model.) 
R. A. WILLIAMS & J. BRAGG. 
APPARATUS FOR COLORING OIL 
No. 304,390. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1884, 
 
ZZ/Zvesses, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT A. WILLIAMS AND JOHN BRAGG, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
APPARATUS FOR COLORNG O L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,390, dated September 2, 1884. 
Application filed February 20, 1884. No model.) 
55 
m 
IO 
To all, whom it invally concern: 
Be it known that we, ROBERTA. WILLIAMS 
and JoHN BRAGG, of Cleveland, in the county 
of Cuyahoga and State of Ohio, have invented 
a certain new and Improved Device or Appa 
ratus for Coloring Oil; and we do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full and complete 
description thereof. 
The invention for the above-specified pur 
pose consists of a funnel having in the upper 
part thereof a chamber provided with a fo 
raminous bottom and a close side, between 
which and the side of the funnel is left a pas 
sage-way for the oil to flow down the funnel 
into the lamp or other vessel in which the pipe 
of the funnel may be inserted. 
The said invention is more fully set forth 
in the following specification, and illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, making a part 
of the same. 
In said drawings, Figure 1 shows a trans 
verse vertical section of the device above al 
luded to. Fig. 2 is a plan view. Fig. 3 is a 
horizontal Section. 
Like letters of reference denote like parts. 
in the drawings. 
A is a funnel, which is or may be in shape 
and size like such articles in ordinary use, or 
a modification thereof, as may be desired. 
B is a chamber formed in the body of the 
funnel by means of the partition or wall C and 
the foraminous bottom D. It will be observed 
that the Said bottom does not cover the entire 
area inclosed by the circumference of the 
body of the funnel, there being a space, ct, be 
tween the wall C and the side of the body 
for the passage of oil to the pipe E. The top 
of the chamber B is covered with a forami 
nous lid, F, hinged to the partition C, that it 
may be opened to obtain access to the inte 
rior thereof. On the bottom or floor of the 
chamber B is placed a layer of cotton or other 
fibrous or flocculent material, as seen at Gin 
Fig. 1. The space above the said layer of cot 
45 ton is then filled with chips of alkanet-root, 
saffron, logwood, or other coloring substances, 
from which the color may be extracted by 
being Saturated with oil. The chamber thus 
filled with the dye-stuff is then covered with 
35 
25 
To save the consumer the extra expense of 6o 
the perforated lid F, as seen in Fig. 2, to 
which further attention will hereinafter be 
called. Colored oils for various uses, and espe 
cially for illuminating purposes, have become 
an article of trade. For illumination the oil 
is colored for the pleasing effect it presents in 
the glassbowl of the lamp in whichitis burned. 
For that purpose oil is colored in bulk and 
Sold at an advance over the price of uncolored 
Oils. 
the colored oil is the purpose of the device 
above described, the practical use of which is 
as follows: Red-colored oil is preferred, and 
to give the oil that particular color the cham 
ber B is filled with chips of alkanet-root rest 
ing upon the filtering material D, above alluded 
to. The coloring-matter in the chamber is 
fully Saturated with the fluid to be burned, so 
that a very little addition thereto will cause 
the oil saturating the dye in the chamber and 
colored thereby to percolate through the fo 
raminous bottom of the chamber and flow 
therefrom down the pipe F into the bowl of 
the lamp which had previously been filled by 
pouring uncolored oil into the funnel at A, 
which flows therefrom through the space a 
into the lamp. Each time the lamp is filled 
a small quantity of oil is poured upon the 
perforated cover F, through which it passes 
to the coloring-matter beneath, causing it to 
discharge a few drops of colored oil through 
the foraminous bottom, which falls at once 
into the uncolored oil in the lamp, imparting 
to it a red color, more or less deep and bril 
liant as the amount of colored oil from the 
chamber may have been mingled with it, which 
will be in proportion to the quantity of un 
colored oil dropped upon the perforated cover 
above. 
By the above-described device each person 
is enabled to color their own oil, and of such 
shade of red as may be desirable to them, or 
of any other color, by simply changing the 
red-coloring material for such other as they 
may desire, to give to the oil the tint or color 
required. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
75 
85 
95 
 
2 
304,390 
In a device or apparatus for coloring oil, a 
funnel having therein a compartment or cham- in presence of two witnesses. 
ber, B, provided with a foraminous bottom and 
perforated cover, and oil-space A, formed be- 
5 tween the sides of the funnel and the parti. 
tion of the chamber containing the coloring 
material, substantially as herein set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
- 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT A. WILLIAMS. 
JOHN BRAGG. 
J. H. BURRIDGE, 
ELMER GOUSSTEL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304490.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. BERING. 
CORN PLANTER CHECK ROWER, 
Patented Sept. 2, 1884, 
-7%zaevey 
&-47 
Zzzavezze?' 
2% 
 
27 
N. PETERS. Photo-Litlvographer. Washington, D.C. 
427, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
V 
JAMES EDWARD BERING, OF DECATUR, ILLINOIS. 
CORN-PLANTER CHECK ROWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,490, dated September 2, 1884. 
Application filed April 25, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES EDWARD BER 
ING, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Decatur, in the county of Macon and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Corn-Planter Check-Rowers; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to Which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany. 
ing drawings, and to letters or figures of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in corn-planter check 
rowers of that class in which a tappet-wire 
stretched across the field acts upon forkedle 
vers, from which movement is transmitted to 
the seed-slides. In check-rowers of this class, 
as the parts become worn or loose from any 
cause, the forked levers will sometimes com. 
plete their throw without fully operating the 
seed-slides of the planter; and the object of 
my invention is to provide a remedy for this 
defect, to which end and object my invention 
consists in the use of a take-up or adjusting 
device, by means of which the levers may be 
made to give a full throw to the seed-slides 
when loose or worn on their journals, and 
when other parts of the device are worn. 
To enable those skilled in the art to which 
my invention appertains to fully understand 
and practice the same, I Will now proceed to 
more fully explain it by reference to the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of this 
specification, and in which I have illustrated 
the main feature of my invention carried out 
in a form in which it may be used in a work 
ing check-rower, and which manner of carry 
ing out my invention is the best now known 
to me, though practice and experience may 
indicate either to me or to other's some better 
Way of carrying the same into practical opera 
tion. 
In the said drawings, Figure is a top plan 
of so much as seems necessary to be shown of 
a check-rower embracing the main feature of 
my invention. Fig. 2 is an enlarged top plan 
of one end of the device shown at Fig. 1, but 
showing the parts in different relative posi 
- 
The foregoing parts, described by reference- 65 
tions from that shown at Said figure. Fig. 3 
is a side elevation of Fig. 2. 
Referring to the drawings by letters, the 
same letter indicating the same part in the 55 
different figures, A represents the main frame 
bar with heads B, carrying guide-pulleys CD. 
E is a rock-shaft provided with suitable bear 
ings on the bar A or heads B, and has a forked . 
lever, G, on each of its ends. His a spring 6 
for returning the shaft B after it has been 
partly rotated by the movement of a forked 
lever, G. I is the tappet-wire, provided with 
tappets i. 
letters, are parts of a well-known type of 
check-rower, and their construction and op 
eration, being well known, need not be any 
more fully described herein, nor is it deemed 
necessary in this application to show or de- 7O 
scribe a method of transmitting. motion from 
the rock-shaft E to the seed-slides of the 
planter, as any well-known method may be 
SeC. 
The forked levers Gare loosely mounted on 75 
the rock-shaft E. J J are arms, one fixed to 
each end of the shaft E. Each arm J extends 
upwardly and in rear of the adjacent forked 
lever G, and is provided with a set-screw, k, 
which passes through the arm J, and is pro- 8O 
vided with a nut, k, on one end, and a head, 
k", on its other end. Washers l are used on 
the set-screws lic to adjust the length of the end 
of saidset-screws next the forked lever G. It 
will be readily seen that if the parts are worn 85 
so that the seed-slides do not make their full 
throw at the completion of the throw of the 
levers G, the set-screwski may be adjusted to 
ward the levers G to compensate for wear, and 
to swing the rock-shaft farther at each throw 9o 
of a forked lever, and thus insure the full op 
eration of the seed-slides. 
The arrow at Fig.1 indicates the direction 
of movement of the planter, and one of the 
forked levers is shown at same figure as forced 95 
rearward by a knot or tappet, i, on the tap 
pet-wire; and it will be further seen at same 
figure that when the forked lever on one side 
of the planter is forced rearward the arm. J 
on the other side of the planter will swing IOO 
rearward, while the adjacent forked lever re 
mains stationary. At Figs, 2 and 3 the forked 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
s 
 
2 
304,490 
s 
It will be readily seen that this invention 
lever is shown in position, ready for the action ling for wear and looseness of parts, substan 
of a tappet on the wire I. 
2. In a corn-planter check-rower, in com 
may be applied to other parts of this type of bination, a tappet-wire, a rock-shaft, a spring, 
5 check-rower, and may be as readily applied forked levers E, loosely mounted on said rock 
to other types of this well-known machine; shaft, and arms provided with set-screws, 
hence I do not limit my claims to any specific against which the forked levers act, substan 
method shown of applying my invention; but tially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
tially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
to Letters Patent, is- 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
1. In a corn-planter check-rower, in com 
bination with the tappet-wire, forked lever, 
and mechanism for transmitting motion from 
the forked lever to the seed-slides of the 
15 planter, an adjusting device for compensat- 
JAMES EDWARD BERING. 
Witnesses: 
L. BURROWs, 
L. L. BURROWS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304590.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 304,590, 
R. H. WATTERSON. 
CAR REPLACER 
Patented Sept, 2, 1884. 
 
2 
 
V ES 
EN S. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
TVITWESSES 
26.6 
 
//i. VE VTOI 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT H. WATTERSON, OF ONEIDA, NEW YORK. 
CAR-REPLACER. 
w 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,590, dated September 2, 1884. 
Application filed March 3, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
a horizontal base or bed-piece, B, having 
To all whom it may concerns 
spurs or spuds in the bottom of same to pre 
Beit known that I, ROBERT.H. WATTER 
vent slipping, this base or bed-piece B having 
SON, of Oneida, in the county of Madison and 
an inclined surface, P, which extends from 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
the lowest point, P', to a level above the hori 
and useful Improvements in Car-Replacers; 
zontal plane of the rail. 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
At C is a half-socket, through which a bolt 
full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref. 
or rivet, C, is passed vertically. This bolt or 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
rivet is the vertical pivot of a laterally-mov 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
able arm, B, to which I pivot a reversible 
thereon, which form part of this specification, 
clamp, C, and also the clamp E. 
in which 
It will be observed that Ibevel the front end 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a section of a rail 
of the base or bed-piece at F, and also at G, for 
or bed-piece showing my railroad wrecking 
the purpose of adapting it to the T-shaped rail 
frog or car-replacer applied. Fig.2 shows in 
section my improved railroad wrecking-frog 
when in working position. 
. 
It will also be observed that at V, I hav 
or car-replacer, and also the spuds in the bot 
underscored the shoulder or the bed-piece for 
tom of this section, which are designed to 
the purpose of receiving the offset of the 
prevent the same from slipping. Fig. 3 is a 
clamp or gripping-iron C". 
CrOSS-Section of a double clamp through line gy 
It will be seen from the foregoing that I have 
2), indicated on Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a top view 
a railroad reversible wrecking-frog, or car-re 
of the device with the clamp or gripping-arm 
placer, being reversible in itself, and which 
removed. Fig. 5 is a bottom view of the ex 
is applicable to both rails, either out or in 
tension or carrying bar with clamps, the body 
side of the track. 
of replacer being removed. Fig. 6 is a per 
The cal-replacer is rigidly held on the ties 
spective view of a modification of the clamp. 
by the clamps or claws, and also the spuds in 
In the modification shown in Fig. 6 the 
the bottom of the same. 
clamp E is formed with a longitudinal slot, 
The double clamp or gripping-arm C is also 
which permits it to slide through under the 
adapted to engage with the T-head of the 
extension bars from one side to the other, ren 
rail, and the auxiliary clamp or claw E, being 
dering the said clamp less liable to be broken 
reversible, is also adapted to engage with the 
off in case the wheels should mount the bed 
rail on either side of the track. 
piece and run over. 
Having described my invention, I claim-- 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
1. A railroad wrecking-frog or car-replacer, 
device for the purpose of replacing or put 
double-beveled, as described, in combination 
ting onto the track the wheels of a derailed 
with a carrying-bar and a reversible clamp, 
engine or the wheels of a derailed railroad 
substantially as described. 
car truck. 
2. A railroad Wrecking-frog or car-replace) 
It consists in a double-beveled base or bed 
piece combined with a pivoted clamp, and consisting of a wedge-shaped base which is 
having one or more gripping arms or clamps, laterally beveled and adapted to fit the side 
as will be fully understood from the following of a railroad-rail, in combination with a hori 
description, when taken in connection with Zontal extension or carrying bar provided with 
the annexed drawings. 
two reversible pivoted clamps, substantially 
rail or bed-piece showing my improved rail- 
3. In a railroad wrecking - frog or car-re 
road wrecking-frog applied, indicating in dot- placer, a pivoted double clamp or gripping de 
vice, in combination with a reversible clamp 
ted lines the car-replacer adjusted for replac 
and a carrying-bar to which clamp is pivoted, 
ing a derailed car-truck or engine onto the 
substantially as described. 
track. 
This car-replacer cr frog-section consists of 
In Fig. 1 I have represented a section of a as described. 
So 
9O 
95 
4. The combination of a wedge-shaped base IOO 
O 
25 
35 
- 4O 
 
2 
304,590 
or bed piece, a carrying-bar, a double clamp, my own I affix my signature in presence of 
and a reversible clamp applied to the free end two witnesses. 
of said extension or carrying bar, all con- 
Structed and adapted to operate substantially 
5 in the same manner and for the purpose de- 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
WASHINGTON I.TILLOTSON, 
JOSEPHBIB. 
ROBERT H. WATTERSON. 
Witnesses: 
ry 
W A 
- 
Scribed. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304690.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 304,690. 
T. H. BARNARD, 
GATE FOR BRIDGES, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept., 9, 1884, 
z w 
~~ ~$ 
---------#--#--~~~ = =++~~ + -- - - - - - - - - - - ------- 
 
 
 
----+---- 
/2 
%a 7%.2-1. 
-4, 42 e. V2%-- 
-2&orveys, 
peTERs, Photo-Lithographer. Withicision, 
C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 304,690, 
 
T. H. BARNARD, 
GATE FOR BRIDGES, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 9, 1884. 
 
 
 
| 
 
l 
|| 
| 
E" l 
5 
? 
| | 
| 
t 
- 
(5 
IS 
(No Model.) 
No. 304,690. 
RS 
\ 
. 
1 
so 
e 
ed 
iii.4 
s si 
- 
Fei 
T. H. BARNARD, 
GATE FOR BRIDGES, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Sept. 9, 1884. 
s 
| 
- 
sts 
We 
n SS 
NS 
es 
Avezzoz'. 
%zzle. A 2 
- Aly /face / 7%. 
grapher. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 304,690, 
 
T. H. BARNARD. 
GATE FOR BRIDGES. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Sept., 9, 1884. 
2 ta 
2.72. C. 
N. 
S. Poly-lithographer. Washiaci. b. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 304,690. 
 
 
22. N 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
T. H. BARNARD, 
GATE FOR BRIDGES 
Patented Sept. 9, 188 
 
r 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TEIOMAS H. BARNARD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
GATE FOR BR D G E S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,690, dated September 9, 1884. 
Application filed February 11, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
75 
bridge is closed, the approaches shall be auto-. 
to all, whon, it may concern, 
matically opened and free for travel. In a C 
Beit known that I, THOMAS H. BARNARD, 
complishing this object, as has been done by 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
the devices hereinafter described, and illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, I have 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
produced an improved construction of gate 
Improvements in Gates for Bridges and other 
and operating mechanism which, although 
Purposes, of which I do declare the following 
particularly well suited for such purpose, is 
to be a full, clear, and exact description, ref. 
also adapted as to its main features for much 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification, in 
more extended use. I wish it to be distinctly 
understood, therefore, that, although the in 
which 
vention is here shown as applied to a Swing 
Figure 1 is a view in front elevation. Fig. 
ing bridge, its scope is not restricted thereto, 
2 is a view in horizontal Section above the 
gate, parts being shown in plan. Fig. 3 is a 
and I shall therefore point out with greater 
particularity the novel features of the inven 
view in side elevation. Fig. 4 is a plan view 
of the gate-operating mechanism at the end of 
tion in the claims at the end of this specifica 
one of the approaches to a bridge. Fig. 5 is 
tion. 
Upon the piers A, at the ends of the ap 
a detail view, in side elevation, of a portion 
proaches to the swinging bridge B, are placed 
of the sprocket-chain, the hangers, and the sus 
pension-rail for the gate. Fig.6 shows detail 
the end posts, A', the corner-posts A, and the 
front posts, A, which serve to sustain the gate 
views of the sprocket-chain. Fig. 7 is a detail 
and its operating mechanism. The posts A 
view in vertical transverse section through 
the suspension-rail and upper part of one of 
are connected together by the brace-beam a, 
the gate-hangers. Figs. 8 and 9 are enlarged 
and at each side of the pier may be placed 
suitable guide-rails, a. 
detail views of the top and bottom plates of 
My improved gate being preferably formed 
the gate-sections. Fig. 10 is an end view of 
One of the approaches of a bridge, showing 
of two like sections, C and C, as shown, and 
the operating mechanism of each section be 
modified mechanism for operating the gate and 
showing, in perspective, the end of the bridge 
ing the same, a description of one will be ap 
plicable to both. 
as it is about to close. Fig. 11 is a view illus 
trating in outline a modified arrangement of 
Between the upper parts of the corner-posts 
A extends the main girder D, and along the 
the gate and its operating mechanism. Fig. 
front of this girder, and preferably connected 
12 is a view in end elevation of the crank-post 
thereto by tie-irons d, extend the two parts 
shown in Fig. 11. 
of the suspension-rail E, by which the Sec 
Like letters of reference designate corre 
tions of the gate are respectively carried. 
sponding parts in the several figures of the 
drawings. 
The parts of this suspension-rail are bent, as 
shown, at the corner-posts, and have their 
My present invention has relation to theim 
provement of gates; and in particular does it 
rear ends secured to the upper parts of the 
posts A. 
relate to that class of gates which, while 
Upon each portion of the rail E travel a 
adapted to be used in various situations, are 
especially well suited for use in connection 
series of wheels, F, held in suitable journal 
straps f, on the hanger-rods F, that are con 
with swinging bridges to close the approaches 
nected to the gate-sections, as shown in Figs. 
thereto when the bridges are open for the pas 
Sage of vessels. 
5, 6, and 7. 
By reference to the enlarged detail View, 
The main object of my invention has been 
to provide for the approaches or roadways of 
Figs. S and 9, it will be seen that the gate 
a swinging bridge, an improved construction 
sections are formed of vertical rods c and c, 
the lower portions of the hanger-rods F, and 
of sliding gate, and mechanism for operating 
the top and bottom plates, c'. The rods c are 
the same, whereby when the bridge is opened 
rigidly connected to the plates c, which are 
the approaches shall automatically and with 
certainty be closed, and whereby, when the cut away, as shown, upon their opposite faces 
95 
IOC 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
304,690 
5 
O 
25 
at c and c', and are perforated at their ends 
to receive the rods c' and the hanger rods 
F, that serve to hinge the plates together. 
These plates care provided each with the in 
clined shoulder c, and a corresponding bev 
eled end c, and are so hinged together that 
the gate is rendered flexible in one direction 
only, and cannot be bent in the opposite direc 
tion. It will thus be seen that when the gate 
is closed it cannot be forced outward, and 
will securely guard the approaches. My ob 
ject in making the gate laterally flexible (and 
it is obvious that the precise manner of doing 
this can be greatly varied) is to allow it to be 
I5 turned in line with the roadway when opened, 
and hence occupy at such time a position in 
which it will not interfere with travel. Seg 
mental guide-plates C are connected with the 
corner-posts A, and against these the top and 
bottom plates c of the gate-sections bear as 
the gate is bent, in being opened or closed. It 
will be seen that the two sections C and C 
of the gate are of sufficient length to close the 
roadway, and a catch, c', may be used to hold 
them firmly together. To avoid all danger of 
accidents arising from persons being caught 
between the ends of the gate-sections when 
closing, I provide one of these sections with 
a hinged portion, C", held normally in line 
With the gate by means of the springs c. 
At the tops of the posts A and A', upon 
the corner-plate D', and upon the main girder 
D, near its center, are carried, respectively, the 
sprocket-wheels G, G', G', and G, over which 
35 passes the sprocket chain H, connected to the 
tops of the hanger-rods IF by means of the hooks 
h. This sprocket-chain has motion imparted 
thereto from the wheel G', keyed to the end of 
the vertical drive-shaft (, that passes through 
the corner-post A", and carries near its oppo 
site end the cog-wheel (f', meshing with the 
Cog-wheel (f, that is sustained by the bracket 
(f", and extends a sufficient distance beyond 
the pier A to gear with the rack-bar b, at 
tached to the end of the bridge. 
To the extreme end of the drive-shaft g is 
lkeyed the bevel gear-wheel?', that meshes with 
the corresponding bevel gear-wheel of on the 
end of the drum g', over which passes the 
chain sustaining the counterbalance-weight 
g". This Weight is so arranged that its chain 
Will be Wollind upon the drum by the momen 
tum of the closing bridge, and when thus li?ted 
the Weight will exert its force to close the 
gate as the bridge is being opened, and so put 
no more Work upon the attendant, in case the 
bridge is swung by hand, than is required to 
overcome the inertia of the bridge. The 
sprocket-wheels G and G' are idlers, and serve 
to guide the chain. The wheels G carry, at 
the lower ends of their journal-shafts, the cog 
Wheels (f, which are in gear, and thus cause the 
two sections of the gate to move in unison. The 
journal-shaft of one of the wheels G is pref 
65 erably furnished at its upper end with a cog 
wheel, I, that meshes with the cog-wheel I, 
40 
45 
55 
- 
SO 
75 
that is carried by a suitable shaft, I', carry 
ing at its top the signal-lantern J. This lan 
tern will have its opposite glasses of like color, 
and its adjoining glasses of different color, 7O 
and the gear-wheels I and I will be of such 
relative sizes as to cause a half-revolution of 
the lantern at each complete opening and clos 
ing of the gate. Thus when the gate is Opel), 
the white light will appear toward the road 
way and the red light toward the river, and 
vice versa, when the bridge is closed. My 
purpose in placing the cog-wheels and driv 
ing-shafts at each side of the roadway is to in 
sure the operation of the gate whichever way 
the bridge be opened or closed. The rack 
bars b at the ends of the bridge are placed, as 
shown in Fig. 3, in different horizontal planes, 
so that the rack-bar for gear-wheels of one 
gate-section shall not interfere with those of 85 
the other section. It will be noticed that 
these rack-bar's must be of proper length to 
exactly complete the movement of the gate 
sections in either direction, and are placed in 
such position that the bridge shall be par 
tially closed before the gate begins to open, 
thus leaving the ends of the roadway at no 
time exposed. 
From the foregoing description the opera 
tion will be seen to be as follows: If the bridge 95 
be closed and the gate open, the operation of 
opening the bridge will cause the rack-bars b 
to impart motion to the train of cog-wheels 
at the sides of the pier, which in turn will 
cause the drive-shafts and sprocket-wheels to 
revolve and force the Sprocket-chains to move 
the gate-sections toward each other until they 
meet, at which time the rack-bar will cease to 
act upon the gear-wheels and the bridge will 
be open. In this operation the counterbal- IJ5 
ance-weight will aid in closing the gate, so 
that the power necessary to swing the bridge 
open need not be greater than would be re 
quired were no gate used. In closing the 
bridge, the momentum acquired beforeit comes 
opposite the pier's will be sufficient to reverse 
the movement of the spocket chain and wheels 
and thereby open the gate and at the same 
time lift the counterbalance-weight into opera 
tive position. 
It is obvious that the details of construction 
hereinbefore described may be varied within 
wide limits without departing from the spirit 
of the invention; also, that many of the fea 
tures may be employed independently of the 
others. In Fig. 10 of the drawings, for ex 
ample, is illustrated a somewhat modified 
means of operating the gate by the bridge. 
In this construction there is keyed to the ends 
of the main driving-shafts (1, the bevel gear. I 25 
wheels 1, beneath which and engaging there 
with are the segmental bevel gear-wheels 2, to 
the shafts of which and extending into the 
path of the bridge are the lever-arms 3. Be 
neath the end of the bridge, and carried there 
by, is the friction-wheel4, which will bear upon 
the lever-arms 3, when they have been bent 
- 
IIO 
 
304,690 
w 
55 
O 
25 
w 
Controlled. 
down by the bridge in closing. If desired, 
arches may be placed across the ends of the 
bridge, to carry rack-bars similar to the rack 
bars shown upon the ends of the bridge, which 
Will engage with cog-wheels on the main girder 
and in gear with the sprocket wheels and 
chains of the gate. 
In adapting my improvements for use in 
other connections than with swinging bridges, 
the operating mechanism will be modified 
Somewhat, depending upon the source of power 
and the position from which the gate is to be 
In Figs. 11 and 12 of the drawings is illus 
trated a modified arrangement of the gate, 
wherein it is made of a single section of suf 
ficient length to extend between the posts 7 
and 8 at each side of the roadway, and is 
caused to bend around the corner-post 8 and 
rear post, 9, by the action of the sprocket 
chain 10, driven by the sprocket-wheel 11, and 
passing around suitable sprocket-wheels on 
the tops of the posts. The shaft of this sprock 
et-wheel 1 is furnished at its bottom. With the 
bevel gear-wheel 12, with which engages the 
bevel gear-wheel 13, journaled in the bracket 
14, and operated by the hand-crank 15. From 
this construction it will be seen that by turn 
ing the hand-crank the sprocket-chain will 
readily open and close the gate. 
With the exceptions indicated, the construc 
tion and operation of this modified form of 
gate and operating mechanism do not differ 
essentially from those hereinbefore described. 
This last modification will be found well suited 
for use in a variety of situations-as, for ex 
ample, at railway-crossings, toll-gates, and the 
like. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a laterally-flexible 
sliding gate and Suitable Supporting-posts, of 
a Sprocket chain and wheel for opening and 
closing the gate, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with a laterally-sliding 
flexible gate and suitable supporting-posts, of 
sprocket chain and wheels, a drive-shaft, and 
gear mechanism, whereby the gate may be 
operated, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the laterally-flexi 
ble sliding gate and a bent guide-rail and hang 
ers for sustaining said gate, of a sprocket 
chain connected to said hangers, and wheels 
for operating said chain, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. The combination, with a laterally-sliding 
gate, flexible in one direction only, of an Over 
head bent guide-rail, suitable supporting 
posts, hangers for Sustaining said gate, and a 
sprocket-chain connected to said hangers and 
sprocket-wheels connected to said chain, Sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination, with the laterally-flexi 
ble sliding gate and an overhead bent guide 
rail and suitable Supporting-posts, of hangel'S 
for sustaining said gate, a sprocket-chain Con 
nected to said hangers, sprocket-wheels, and 
a vertical shaft and gear mechanism for oper 
ating said wheels, substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with the posts at oppo 
site sides of the roadway, of the sliding gate 
sections, one of which is provided with the 
laterally-yielding, spring-acting end portion, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
7. The combination, with the separate gate 
sections, of sprocket chains and wheels, for 
operating said sections, said sprocket chains 
and wheels being geared together, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
S. The combination, with the two gate-sec 
tions geared together for conjoint operation, 
and an overhead beam extending across the 
roadway, of a signal-lantern sustained Cen 
trally upon the overhead beam and in gear 
with the mechanism that operates the gate 
sections, all substantially as described. 
9. The combination, with the swinging 
bridge, of a laterally-flexible sliding gate, an 
overhead bent rail and hangers for sustaining 
said gate, and an overhead sprocket chain and 
wheels for operating the gate, substantially as 
described. 
10. The combination, with the laterally-flexi 
ble sliding gate-sections, the hangers, the over 
head bent rails, and suitable Supporting-posts, 
of the posts A, for resisting any outward thrust 
upon the gate-sections, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 
hand this 5th day of February, 1884. 
THOMAS H. BARNARD. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. P. FISHER, Jr., 
JAMES H. PEIRCE, 
90 
IOO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304790.txt	(No Model.) 
No, 304790. 
E. M. BUTZ. 
METAL 00LUMN, PILASTER, OR GIRDER. 
Patented Sept. 9, 1884. 
 
o N. PETERs. Photo-lithographer, Washingto...C. 
Zazeezoz. 
&avard/c/O. stu?:- 
Z & re's civilizes 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD M. BUTZ, OF ALLEGHENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
METAL COLUMN, PLASTER, OR GRDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,790, dated September 9, 1884. 
Application filed January 10, 1884. 
(No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD M. BUTZ, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Alle 
gheny, county of Allegheny, State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented or discovered a new and 
useful Improvement in Metal Columns, Pilas 
ters, or Girders; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, concise, and ex 
act description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, making a part 
of this spacification, in which-like letters in 
dicating like parts 
Figure 1 is a perspective section of a metal 
shape plate or bar adapted for use in columns 
or girders embodying my invention; Fig. 2, 
a plane transverse section through a column, 
illustrating an application of the same; Figs. 
3 and 4, perspective sections of columns, illus 
trating modified forms of my invention; and 
Figs. 5 and 6, plane transverse sections 
through the columns of Figs. 3 and 4, respect 
ively. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
rolled-metal columns, pilasters, or girders for 
buildings, bridges, and other structural uses; 
and my improvements consist in a rolled 
metal plate or bar, of shape or section as here 
in shown and described, and in a composite 
column, pilaster, or girder having one or 
more of its webs formed of a plate of said sec 
tion, all as hereinafter fully set forth. 
To carry out my invention I form of rolled 
iron or steel a plate or bar, A, the form of 
which is that of a hollow-backed tongue, face, 
or rib having one or more segmental recesses, 
a, in its body or web and a flange at each of 
its sides. 
In the construction of a column, pilaster, 
or girder, the plate A is connected by bolts 
or rivets to one or more rolled plates, which 
may be either of similar or of any other de 
sired section. Fig. 2 shows a column formed 
of a shape, A, having a single recess, ct, in its 
face, united to two channel side plates, BB, 
and a plane back plate, C. In Fig. 5 the 
shape A has two recesses in its face, and is 
connected to side and back plates of corre 
sponding section with those of Fig. 2; and in 
Fig. 6 a shape, A, having a single recess in 
its face is connected to two side plates of L 
section and a channel back plate having its 
flanges turned outwardly. 
My invention is particularly applicable in 
the construction of pilasters for wrought-metal 
fronts for buildings, and in such application 
I provide a pilaster which serves both as a 
supporting member and an element of archi 
tectural design, by combining there with a 
tubular metallic shaft or shafts, D, fitting in 
the recess or recesses of the plate A, and con 
nected to a base, E, and capital F, which may 
either fit over and be connected to the plate 
A, as in Fig. 4, or be connected to prolonga 
tions of the side plates, B, of the pilaster be 
low and above said plate A, as in Fig. 3. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. A structural rolled-metal plate of shape 
or section as described, adapted to serve as a 
member of a column, pilaster, or girder, said 
plate being in the form of a hollow-backed 
tongue, face, or rib having one or more seg 
mental recesses in its body and a flange at 
each of its sides, substantially as set forth. 
2. A composite column, pilaster, or girder 
formed of rolled-metal plates united at their 
edges, and having upon One of its faces a 
web formed of a plate the transverse section 
of which is a hollow-backed tongue, face, or 
rib, with one or more segmental recesses in its 
body and a flange at each of its sides, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. The combination, in a rolled-metal pilas 
ter, of a front plate having a hollow-backed 
tongue, face, or rib, with one or more recesses in 
its web and a flange at each of its sides, a tubu 
lar shaft or shafts fitting in the recess or re 
cesses of the plate, a base and capital adjoin 
ing the ends of said shaft or shafts, and one or 
more side and back plates connected to the 
flanges of the front plate, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
EDWARD M. BUTZ. 
Witnesses: 
J. SNOWDEN BELL, 
R. E. WHITTLESEY. 
75 
90 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304890.txt	(No Model.) 
R. R. ZELL. 
SECTIONAL STEAM BOILER. 
No. 304,890. 
Patented Sept. 9, 1884 
 
272 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT R. ZELL OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
SECTIONAL STEAM - BOLE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,890, dated September 9, 1884. 
Application filed April 
0, 1884. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT R. ZELL, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Baltimore, in the county of Baltimore and 
State of Maryland, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Sectional Steam 
Boilers; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, which will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawing, which forms a part of 
this specification. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in that class of boilers or steam-generators 
which are known as sectional boilers or 
'safety-boilers;' and it consists in the coln 
bination, with the steam-drum and the inclined 
water-tubes, of an intermediate drum, which 
receives the water carried over by the steam 
into the steam - drum, and conducts it back 
into the 'headers' or castings, which form 
the rear water-leg of the boiler, and from 
which the water is fed back into the inclined 
Water-tubes. 
In the accompanying drawing, A denotes 
the inclined water-tubes, which are arranged 
in two series, the tubes of the lower series, a, 
communicating at their rear ends with the 
headers or boxes, which form the water-leg L, 
while the tubes of the upper series, b, are 
placed at all incline relative to those of the 
lower Series and enter with their rear ends 
into the collecting-drum D. The front head 
erS or boxes of the two series of inclined wa 
ter-tubes a and b, which constitute the front 
leg, IX, communicate with the front end of a 
series of horizontal tubes, B, the rear ends of 
which are inserted into and secured to the 
side of the steam-drum C above the water 
line. The bottom of the steam-drum C is con 
nected to the top of the collecting-drum D by 
a short tube, E, and the lower end of the rear 
water-leg, L, is connected to the usual mud 
drum, M. Suitable partitions extend across 
the entire series of tubes, as usual in steam 
generators of this type, for the purpose of 
compelling the flames and products of con 
bustion from the furnace to traverse the en 
tire series of tubes upward, downward, and 
again upward before reaching the flue or 
chimney through the aperture F, and the fur 
IO 
2 5 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
7 5 
nace is constructed with the usual bridge-wall 
to deflect the draft up between the tubes. 
The operation of the boiler is as follows: 
The two series ( and b being filled with wa 
ter, which circulates as indicated in the air 
rows, the steam generated therein will as 
cend through the front leg, K, up into the 
horizontal tubes B, where it is superheated 
before entering the drum C, from which it is 
discharged or fed to the cylinders of the en 
gine through the outlet c. The water which 
is carried over by the steam into the drum C 
collects in the bottom of the same, and runs 
through tube Edown into the collecting drum 
or receiver D, from which it is fed back into 
the rear Water-leg, L, and into the lower se 
ries, ct, of the inclined water-tubes. As the 
uppermost series of inclined tubes, b, connect 
with drum D and discharge the hot water into 
the Sane, a constant circulation will be main 
tained, as denoted by the arrows, through 
said tubes b, collecting - drum D, leg L, in 
clined tubes a, and the front leg, K, so that 
the water which collects in drum D from the 
upper steam-drum, C, is promptly circulated 
through the lowermost series of inclined tubes. 
It will thus be seen that water cannot collect 
in drum D, so as to rise up through the tube E 
into the steam-drum C, the steam-drum being 
always clear of water and filled with steam 
only, regardless of the quantity of condensed 
steam or water which is discharged into it 
through the Superheating-pipes B. 
Having thus described my invention, claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States-- 
In a sectional steam-boiler, the combination 
of the lower series of inclined water-tubes, a, 
upper series of inclined water-tubes, b, hori 
Zontal steam-tubes B, water-legs K and L, 
steam-drum C, connecting-tube E, and collect 
ing-drum D, connected on one side to the up 
per series of inclined tubes, b, and at the bot 
tom to the rear water-leg, L, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ROBERT R. ZELL. 
95 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. DANEKER, 
H. E. FRANZ. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US304990.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 304,990. 
E. CLIFF, 
CAR SPRING. 
Patented Sept. 9, 1884, 
 
"WWW. W ? 
W?N? 
 
 
  
   
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
W, TWE 55E5 
/WVEW 7 (7R 
???? ?????? 
??? 
??? 
N. perERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washiro. 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EDWARD CLIFF, OF OSWEGO, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE CLIFF & 
RIGHTER COMPANY, (LIMITED,) OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR-SPRING. 
3PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 304,990, dated September 9, 1884. 
Application filed April 3, 1884. No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all uhon, it may concert: 
. Beit known that I, EDWARD CLIFF, of Os 
wego, in the county of Oswego, in the State of 
New York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Car-Springs, of which the fol 
lowing, taken in connection with the accom-  
panying drawings, is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This invention relates to that class of springs 
in which two spirals of different diameters are 
arranged one within the other, and are grad 
uated either by variations of their length or 
by variations of the planes of their bearings, 
so that they are brought successively into ac 
tion as the strain on them is increased. 
The invention consists in an improved con 
struction and combination of the constituent 
parts of a graduated compound spring, which 
has the internal circumference of the outer 
spiral in proximity to the external circumfer 
ence of the inner spiral, so as to brace each 
other laterally without danger of binding the 
same or producing undue friction between 
them during the action of the spring, and which 
furthermore admits of a ready attachment and 
removal of the outer spiral without disturbing 
the inner spiral, all as hereinafter more fully 
explained, and specifically set forth in the 
claims.. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure I is a lon 
gitudinal Section of my improved graduated 
spring, showing its condition when at rest; 
and Fig. III is a longitudinal section of the 
same, illustrating its action when subjected to 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A and Erepresent the end bearings on which 
the spring receives the pressure it is designed 
to resist, said end bearings being in the form 
of cups of different diameters and placed con 
versely in relation to each other, or with their 
cavities facing each other. The smaller cup 
has a central depression, a, forming on the un 
der side of the cup an annular seat, b, for the 
two springs, and in the center of said depres 
sion is an eye, through which is extended a 
bolt, B, provided with a collar or nut, c, which 
rests in the depression a, the latter serving as 
5o a countersink to bring the outer face of the 
35 pressure. 
3O. 
45 
IOO 
55 
collar c flush with that of the cup A. The 
bolt has end extensions, B, which enter corre 
sponding mortises in the parts between which 
the spring is interposed, thereby insuring the 
attachment of the spring. 
That end of the bolt B to which the larger 
cup E is to be connected has rigidly attached 
to it a sleeve,f, forming a shoulder, d, on which 
is loosely hung or seated a yoke, C, which is 
provided with an annular flange, e, and be 
tween this flange and the cup A is held the in 
ner spiral spring, D, which is conoidal or taper 
ing toward said cup, and sustained concentric 
around the bolt by the yoke and by the de 
pressed central portion, a, of the cup A. 
D and S designate two tapering or conical 
spiral springs, of different lengths and diame 
ters, and arranged concentric one within the 
other. The cup E has a central eye, n, by which 
it is slipped over the end of the sleeve? and 
between this cup and the cup A is confined the 
outer spiral, S, which is tapered correspond 
ing to the taper of the inner spiral, and lies 
with its inner circumference in proximity to 
the outer circumference of the inner spiral, so 
as to brace the same laterally. The outer spi 
ral, beinig longer than the inner spiral, causes 
the cup E to stand some distance from the 
yoke C when the spring is at rest, as shown in 
Fig. I of the drawings. 
In subjecting the spring to the end-pressure, 
the outer spiral, S, is first brought into action, 
and in the approach of the cup E toward the 
base of the yoke C the larger or flaring end of 
the outer spiral moves toward the smaller or 85 
tapering inner spiral, and consequently frees 
the same, as illustrated in Fig. II of the draw 
ings, thus effectually obviating friction be 
tween the two spirals. If, after the cup E en 
counters the yoke C, increased strain is exerted 
on the spring, then the yoke is carried along . 
with the aforesaid cup, and thus the inner spi 
ral is brought into action to assist the outer 
Spiral. 
It will be observed that in my improved 
spring the inner spiral has its maximum di 
ameter without liability of producing friction 
On the Outer Spiral, and the Outer spiral can 
be readily introduced between the two cups A 
and E. 
75 
. . 
. 
. 
2 
304,990 
Having described my invention, what I claim of the outer spring, arranged in a lower plane 
than that of the inner spring and movable in 
dependent thereof, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of the cup A, formed 
with the depression at and annular seat b, the 
bolt B, provided with the collar c and shoulder 
d, the yoke C, hung on the shoulder d, and pro 
vided with the flange e, the inner spring, D, 
held between the seat b and flangee, the cup E, 
sliding on the bolt B, and the outer spring, S, 
of greater length than the inner spring and 
confined between the two cups, all constructed 
and combined substantially as described and 
shown. 
6. In combination with the cup A, inner 
Spring, D, and outer longer spring, S, the bolt 
B, having extensions B, and provided at one 
end with the collar c, the sleeve f, secured to 
the opposite end of the bolt, the yoke C, seated 
on the inner end of the sleeve and provided 
with the flange e, and the cup E, sliding over 
the sleeve f, substantially as described and 
shown. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name and affixed my seal, in the presence 
of two attesting witnesses, at Syracuse, in the 
county of Onondaga, in the State of New York, 
this 14th day of March, 1884. 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
i ent, is 
1. The combination of a conical spring sur 
rounding a shorter conical spring, having its 
small end in the same plane with that of the 
outer spring, and separate andlindependently 
movable bearings at the large end of the two 
springs, substantially as shown and set forth. 
2. In a graduated compound spring, the 
combination, with two helical springs of differ 
ent lengths, the shorter of which is arranged 
within the larger, of a plate receiving the 
bearings of one end of both springs, a central 
bolt having two collars or shoulders holding 
movable between them the aforesaid plate, 
and the bearing for the opposite end of the 
inner spring, and a bearing-plate sliding on 
the end of the bolt and receiving the bearing 
of the outer spring, substantially as described 
and shown. 
3. A graduated compound spring composed 
of spirals of different lengths and diameters, 
arranged one within the other, separate and 
independently-movable bearings for the bases 
of said spirals, and a central bolt supporting 
one of said bearings, as shown. 
4. In a graduated compound spring, the 
combination, with an inner tapering spiral 
Spring, of a Sul'rounding tapering spiral spring 
of greater length, and having its inner sur 
face in proximity to the outer surface of the 
inner spring, and a bearing for the large end 
EDWARD CLIFF. L. s. 
C. H. DUELL, 
F. H. GIBBS. 
Witnesses: 
s 
35 ; 
; 
; 
; 
45 
55 
6 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305090.txt	(NO Model.) 
W. C. MARR & A. J. MAUGHLIN, 
- 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 305,090, 
Patented Sept. 16, 1884, 
BIT STOCK, 
ea 
--- S 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. C. MARR, & A. J. MAUGHLIN. w 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 305,090. 
BIT STOCK, 
r 
Patented Sept. 16, 1884. 
 
AN N SS 
N 
NINS N. 
 
N 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
S 
 
 
 
 
Wiresses : 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
W. C. MARR & A. J. MAUGHLIN. 
BIT STOCK, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 305,090. 
Patented Sept. 16, 1884, 
-Z/22 
Wi does 
C - 
Zealez-Cap 
2%42-2, 6.2%(a--- 
2.72. 
 
w 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. C. MARR AND ALBERT J. MAUGHLIN, OF ON AWA, IOWA. 
BT STOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 305,090, dated September 16, 1884. 
Application filed May 21, 1884. (No model.) 
To all, whom it Tally conce772, 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM. C. MARR 
and ALBERT J. MAUGHILIN, citizens of the . 
United States of America, residing at Onawa, 
in the county of Monona and State of Iowa, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Hand-Braces, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had therein 
to the accompanying drawings. 
Our invention relates to carpenters hand 
braces; and it consists of the novel construc 
tion of such a brace, and of devices constructed, 
arranged, and combined with the brace-han 
dle, by means of which the speed of the mo 
tion of the bit may be readily increased and 
diminished by the manipulation of the han 
dle, and the devices may be readily thrown 
out of gear, and the tool may be used as an or 
dinary brace, all as hereinafter fully set forth. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation | 
of the improved brace provided with the de 
vices for changing the speed of the motion of 
the bit. Fig. 2 is a side view of a portion of 
the bevel-wheel shaft, showing the manner of 
securing and adjusting its bevel-wheels. Fig. 
3 is a top view of the locking-bar detached. 
Fig. 4 is a cross-section on line S S of Fig. 1, 
with the washer removed, showing the ratchet 
devices. Fig. 5 is a section on line acac of Fig. 
1, with the washer in place, showing the man 
ner of securing the bevel-wheel head to the 
handle and the sliding button to the wheel 
head by which the pawls are adjusted. Fig. 
6 is a plan of the slotted key. Fig. 7 is a side 
view of the upper portion of the stock. Fig. 
8 is a section, onliney y of Fig. 1, through the 
swivel-head. Fig. 9 is a cross-section, online 
& 2 of Fig. 1, through the swiveled head. Fig. 
10 is an end view of the bit-holder with the 
bit inserted. Fig.11 is a vertical section of 
the bit-holder. Fig. 12 is a cross-section of 
the bit-holder body online 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 
13 is an end view of the bit-holder body de 
tached from the sleeve and clamping-jaws. 
Fig. 14 is a face view of the bevel driving 
wheels. Fig. 15 is a side elevation of a modi 
fication of the bevel-wheel head. 
A designates the swivel-head and bearing 
knob of the handle. 
B is the handle-stock, the upper end of 
which is provided with a recess, a, to receive 
- 
the point a on the inner end of the set-screw 
a'. The head is secured upon the stock by 
means of a key, a, provided with a slot, a, 
enlarged at a to receive the end of the stock, 55 
which is provided near its end with an annul 
lar groove, a', to receive the inner edges of 
the key. Extending entirely through the 
head is a slot, a, through which the key is in 
serted. In attaching the head to the stock, the 6o 
end of the key having the enlarged parta of 
the slot is inserted far enough only in the slot 
a to place that part a in position to allow the 
end of the stock to be extended through the 
key far enough to place the annular groove a 
in range with the inner edges of the key, which 
is then extended through the head, thus se 
curing the head to the handle. All unneces 
sary play and wear of the key in the groove 
a' are taken up by the screw a. 
C designates the handle of the brace, pro 
vided with a longitudinal central hole to re 
ceive loosely and revolve freely upon the stock. 
This handle is provided with a projection, b, 
formed on or fastened to the handle, to aid the 75 
workman in grasping the handle firmly and 
holding it from turning in the hand. The 
upper end of the handle is provided with a 
recess, b, to receive the flange; b, which is 
formed on the stock, as hereinafter fully ex-'8o 
plained. A lever, b, provided with the 
hooked end b, is pivoted at bin a slot in the 
handle, which is provided with the spring b, 
to force the end b under or over the flangel", 
for the purposes hereinafter fully described. 85 
The lower end of the handle C is provided 
with a ferrule, b, having ratchet-notches b 
and an annular groove, b, for the purpose 
hereinafter stated. 
D designates a cylindrical head, provided 
with a central hole to receive and revolve 
freely upon the extension of the handle por 
tion of the stock, upon which head are formed 
the bevel-wheels c c', which are constructed to 
gear with the bevel-wheels c' c', mounted upon 
the shaft E, having its bearings at one end in 
the extended stock B and at the other end in 
the support-bar F, rigidly attached to the . 
stock, as shown. The wheel c is secured to 
the shaft E by means of a pin, c', and the 
wheel cis held from revolving upon the shaft 
by the spline c, and is adjustable longitudi 
95 
9O 
OO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
5 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
nally upon the shaft, and held in the required K designates a bifurcated lock-bar, pivoted 
position by means of the spring - spline c', at h to the stock B. The bifurcated portion 
having stop-lugs c'. 
The upper end of the h of this bar is curved to conform to the curye 
head D is recessed to receive the pivoted 
and extend on each side of the stock to the 
pawls c and the spring c". The head D is at 
end of the beveled wheel c'. The other end, 
l, of the bar K extends through the yoke h", 
tached to the handle C by means of the Wash 
er-plated, made in two parts the proper thick 
formed on the upper portion of the bar F, into 
ness, and having the central opening the proper 
an annular groove, h, in the body G of the 
diameter to fit neatly, but loosely,in the annul 
bit-holder. 
L designates a key clipped to slide not too 
lar groove baround the handle. On the side 
of the upper portion of the head D a receSS is 
easily upon the bar K, and its extended Orkey 
formed to receive the inwardly-projecting end 
portionk is provided on the top With a de 
pression, l', to receive the lugli, formed on the 
d of the button d', which button and inward 
interior of the upper portion of the yoke, to 
point are formed on or rigidly fastened to a 
plate, d, made large enough to cover the re 
hold in place the key when required. 
Opening into the annular groove h of the 
cess in the head, to exclude dirt from the re 
cess. The button and plate are held in place 
bit-holder body G are the notches m, formed 
the required width and depth to receive the 
by means of a tongue, d", on the head, ex 
tended into a groove in the side of the inner 
end it of the bar K, for the purpose of lock. 
portion of the button. The recess in the head 
ing the bit-holder. A spring, n, is attached 
is in position to allow the point d of the but 
to the stock in position to force the end of the 
ton to be placed between the ends of the pawls, 
bar K outward into the notches in. 
as shown in Fig. 4, so that both pawls will 
The stock-iron B is bent, as shown at B'B', 
so as to place the handle C as nearly opposite 
catch in the notches of the ferrule when re. 
quired, and thus prevent the head from being 
as possible to the swivel-head A, and as far 
turned either way, and the recess extends each 
as possible from the bit-holder, for the pur 
way sufficiently to allow the button to be moved 
pose of lessening the lateral strain upon the 
to either side, so that either one of the pawls 
bit, as shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings. 
may be disengaged and the other allowed to 
When it is desired to use the tool as an or 
catch in the notches, so that the head may be 
dinary brace, the handle C is moved upward, 
turned in one direction only for the purpose 
so as to disconnect the gear-Wheels c c, and 
of using the tool as a ratchet brace or drill. 
the gear-wheel c is moved on the shaft Eaway 
G is the body of the bit-holder, having the 
from the gear-wheel c'. In this position of 
stem G extended through and having bearing 
the handle the flange l' extends into the re 
in the enlarged end d of the brace-stock, the 
cess b, and the hooked endb' springs over the 
end of the stem being provided with a socket 
flange band holds the handle in the raised po 
to receive the end of the set-screw d". A col 
sition. 
lar, f, is fastened by a pin, f', upon the stem 
When it is desired to increase the speed of 
G' in position to hold the stem vertically and 
the motion of the bit, the end b of the lever 
form a bearing against the stock. The verti 
is released from the flange b by pressure upon 
cal wear and play of the stem are taken up by 
the other end of the lever, and the handle is 
means of the set-screw d. The body G of the 
moved downward, throwing into gear the bev 
bit-holder is provided with screw-threads to 
el-wheels c c'. It is readily understood that 
receive the threads on the inner surface of the 
the degree of the increase of the speed of the 
threaded sleeve H, and this head is provided 
bit depends upon the relative sizes of the wheels 
with longitudinal slots f', having their inner 
c and c and k le. 
When it may be desirable 
surfaces inclined outwardly at their upper 
to diminish the speed of the motion of the bit, 
ends, as shown. The sleeve H is provided 
the handle C is moved upward and fastened 
with the annular groove 
f, to receive the 
in the raised position, as before described, and 
tongues.f, formed upon the clutch-fingers.f, 
the bevel-wheel c' is moved along the shaft E. 
constructed to fit and slide loosely in the slots. 
and stopped by the lugs c' in position to gear 
The fingers have their inner ends curved out 
with the bevel-wheelc, which, it will be seen, 
ward and their outer ends curved inward in 
is smaller than wheel c'. 
position to clutch and hold in place the bit h. 
It is evident that the diminution of the speed 
A spring-wire, l', is inserted through holes in 
of the bit will depend upon and may be regul 
the upper portion of the fingers, which spring 
lated as required by changing the relative sizes 
wire presses the jaws outward against the in 
of these bevel-wheels. 
ner surface of the sleeve, keeping the tongues 
The bevel-wheel c may be rigidly attached 
f"pressed into the annular groove in the sleeve, 
to its shaft, and the bevel-wheel c' may be 
by means of which the fingers are moved ver 
formed on a block constructed to fit and slide 
tically with the sleeve as it is screwed up and 
vertically in a socket in the head D and handle 
down on the body of the bit-holder. The 
C, as shown in Fig.15, in which T designates a 
lower end of the stem G of the bit-holder is 
ferrule constructed to fit over and Oscillate on 
provided with a bevel-wheel, k, constructed 
the handle C, being held in place vertically by 
and located to gear with the bevel-wheel l', 
the pins e or by any other suitable bearings. 
mounted On the end of the shaft E. 
This ferrule is provided with a diagonal slot, t, 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
 
- . 15 
5 
TO 
2O 
25 
3C 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
305 
O90 
| 
3 
Y 
to receive a pin, i, which is rigidly attached to 
the sliding block of pinion c. 
The operation of this form of construction 
is as follows: To obtain the fast motion of the 
bit, the ferrule is turned to the left as far as 
the pin i will permit, which movement of the 
ferrule causes the pini, sliding in the slott, to 
move the pinion-block c' upward into the re 
cess s' in the handle, thus throwing bevel 
wheels c' and c out of gear. The handle is then 
placed in position shown in Fig.1, which places 
bevel-wheels c and c in gear. To obtain the 
slow motion, the handle is placed in the posi 
tion shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 1, with 
the hookb" on the flangel, which disconnects 
the bevel-wheels 0 c'. The ferrule is then 
turned to the right, which, by means of the 
slot and pin, moves the bevel-wheels c' cinto 
gear. By thus constructing the bevel-wheel 
call the changes required for increasing and 
diminishing the speed of the bit and for throw 
ing the devices entirely out of gear with the 
brace may be readily accomplished by thema 
nipulation of the handle and the devices im 
mediately attached thereto. It will be seen 
that the bifurcated end of the lock-bar extends 
to and bears upon the end of the shaft or block 
of the bevel-wheel c' when either this bevel 
wheel or the bevel-wheel c is in gear with the 
bevel-wheels c' or c, by means of which bear 
ing the endl of the lock-bar is held out of the 
notches in the bit-stock head, thus allowing 
free motion to the bit-holder. The upward 
movement of the handle, by which the bevel 
wheels are thrown out of gear, allows the ends 
k' of the lock-bar to move upward and the end 
k to be forced by the spring n into one of the 
notches an in the bit-holder head, thus locking 
the bit-holder and allowing the tool to be used 
as an ordinary hand-brace. 
The ratchet devices are adapted to allow 
the tool to be used as a ratchet brace or drill, 
when required, as in boring or drilling in 
corners or other positions where there is not 
room for the handle to sweep entirely around, 
and these ratchet devices may be used with 
the devices which produce either the increased 
or diminished motions of the bit, or without 
either of such devices when the tool is used 
as an ordinary hand-brace. 
The improvement in the bit-holder consists 
of the construction of the devices as set forth, 
so that the clutching-fingers are moved verti 
cally with the threaded sleeve at the same 
time that they are caused to clutch the bit, 
thus causing the double action by the fingers 
of clutching the bit and forcing it upward 
tightly into the socket of the holder. 
Having described our invention, we claim 
1. In a hand boring-brace, the combina. 
tion, with the brace-stock B, provided with 
65 
7o 
4. In a hand boring-brace, the combina- 75 
6. In a hand boring-brace, the combina- 85 
5. In a handboring-brace, the combination, 8o 
the recess a and the annular groove a, of the 
swivel-head A, provided with the slot a, the 
set-screw (t, and the slotted key a, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
2. In a hand boring-brace, the handle C, 
provided with the enlarged portion b, con 
structed to aid in grasping and holding the 
handle firmly, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
3. In a hand boring-brace, the combina 
tion, with the handle C, of the revolving 
head D, provided with the bevel-wheels c c, 
Substantially as and for the purpose described. 
tion of the stock B, provided with the flange 
b', the handle C, the pivoted leverb, provided 
with the hooked end b, and the spring b, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
with the handle C and means for adjusting it 
vertically upon the stock, of the head D, shaft 
E, and bevel-wheels c 6' d' d', substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
tion, with the handle C and means for adjust 
ing it vertically upon the stock, of the head 
D, bevel-wheels c c, pivoted bar K, Spring in, 
shaft E, stem G', bevel-wheels c c' c' c' k k, 
and the grooved and notched bit-holder head 90 
G, substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
7. In a hand boring-brace, the combina 
tion, with the yoke h", and the lock-bar K, 
of the key L, constructed to slide upon the 95 
bar, and adapted to hold the bar out of the 
notches of the bit-holderhead, substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
S. In a handboring-brace, the combination, 
with the handle C and notched ferrule b and IOO 
the recessed bevel-wheelhead D, of the double 
pawls cand adjusting-button d", substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
9. In a hand boring-brace, the combina 
tion, with the threaded and slotted bit-holder IO5 
body G, of the threaded sleeve H, provided 
with the annular groove f", the fingers f, 
provided with the lugs.f, and the spring-wire 
h', the fingers being adapted to move verti 
cally with the sleeve in their inclined slots, IIO 
substantially as and for the purposes described. 
10. In a hand boring-brace, the brace-stock 
B, bent at B'B' in position to place the handle 
as far as possible from the bit-holder, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof we have affixed our sig 
natures in presence of two witnesses. 
II5 
WILLIAM. C. MARR. 
ALBERT. J. MAUGHILIN. 
Witnesses: 
J. S. MAUGHILIN, 
S. B. MARTLN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305190.txt	C. T. HOLLOWAY. 
- 
HAND GRENADE FIRE EXTINGUISHER, 
Patented Sept. 16, 1884. 
A's. 2 
A'is. 3 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 305,190, 
A. 
Fig. / 
v 
Alagalive 
 
wiTNESSES: 
fe.7". 
NVENTOR: 
CA. Z. etc.wy 
by Cao M3. ucco.111 
Attorney, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEST. HOLLOWAY, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
HAND-GRENADE FIRE-EXTINGUISHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 305,190. dated September 16; 1884. 
Application filed July 18, 1884. (No model.) 
... 
IO 
- - - 
- 
- 
- 
55 
20 
vention into effect. 
To all whom it may concern. : 
Beit known that I, CHARLEST. HOLLOWAY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bal 
timore, in the State of Maryland, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
5 
in Hand-Grenades for Fire-Extinguishers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
a hand-grenade made of frangible material 
adapted to contain the requisite alkaline solu 
tion and liquid acid in separate receptacles, 
whereby they are kept from chemical combi. 
nation until the grenade is broken. The con 
struction of the improved hand - grenade 
whereby the desired result is accomplished 
Will be described in connection with the ac 
Companying drawings, which illustrate what 
is deemed the best means of carrying the in 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of my improve 
hand-grenade. Fig.2 shows the washer which 
may be interposed between the rim of the 
orifice on the shell and the flange of the acid 
receptacle. Fig. 3 shows a disk which may 
25 be used to close the mouth of the acid-recep 
tacle. Fig. 4 shows a screw-cap which, when 
the grenade is constructed as shown in Fig. 1, 
is employed to retain the disk over the mouth 
of the acid-receptacle and to confine the said 
acid-receptacle and alkaline solution within 
the grenade-shell. Fig. 5 shows the acid-re 
ceptacle detached. Fig. 6 illustrates my hand 
grenade made in a different shape, and shows 
a modification in the manner of securing the 
acid-receptacle within the grenade-shell. Fig. 
7 is a detached view of the elastic packing 
employed for securing the acid-receptacle 
within the shell when the grenade is made ac 
cording to the modification shown in Fig. 6. 
. Referring to the drawings, the letter Adesig 
nates the outer shell of the hand-grenade. 
This should be made of glass or other suitable 
frangible material. It may have a nearly 
globular form, as shownin Fig.1, or may have 
an ordinary bottle shape, as shown in Fig. 6. 
The shape, however, isimmaterial. This outer 
shell has a neck, b, which serves as a handle 
by which the grenade may be grasped. The 
neckis provided with an orifice, through which 
So the shell is filled with the solution. In the 
present instance the shell is designed to be 
filled with an alkaline solution, though it may : 
be used for confining the liquid acid. A re 
ceptacle, C, for acid is also made of glass or 
other frangible material, and has such shape 
as will permit it to pass through the orifice in 
the neck b, and thereby occupy position within 
the outer shell. In the present instance the 
acid-receptacle consists of a straight slim vial 
closed at the lower end, d, and provided at 6o 
the upper open end with a flange, e, project 
ing at a right angle. By this construction 
of the two frangible receptacles, when the one 
is confined within the other, as hereinafter de 
scribed, the grenade stands ready charged with 65 
such components separated as are usually em 
ployed in chemical fire-extinguishers to pro 
duce, when combined, carbonic-acid gas; and 
whei thrown into a fire with such force as to 
break the shell and receptacle the said com-7o 
ponents at once enter into chemical combina 
tion, producing instantly the desired fire-ex 
tinguishing gas. As the gas-evolving com 
ponents are kept separate until the grenade 
is broken, the grenade is at no time charged 75 
with gas, and there is no pressure within it to 
strain the shell or prematurely burst it. The 
components, being kept separate, may each be 
of the maximum strength, (a thing impossible 
in hand-grenades hitherto where the compo- 8o 
nents have been in contact,) whereby the lim 
ited quantity of the two solutions which a 
hand-grenade can contain will produce a 
greater volume of carbonic-acid gas, and there 
fore this combination will be more effective 85 
as a fire-extinguisher. 
I will now proceed to describe the means 
for confining the solution, the acid, and the 
acid-receptacle within the shell. . 
The solution constituting one component is go 
first put into the shell A, and the other liquid 
component is put into the receptacle C. The 
latter is then inserted into the former. A 
washer, f, of rubber, cork, or other material, is 
interposed between the rim of the orifice and 95 
the flangee of the receptacle. A disk, g, of suit 
able material is placed over the open end of 
the receptacle, resting on top of the flange; and, 
finally, a screw-cap, h, is placed over the disk 
and flange and screwed fast to the neck b. Ioo 
Thus the washerif confines the solution in the 
shell and affords an elastic connection between 
35 
5 
2 
305,190 
the shell and the receptacle. The diskg closes 
the receptacle, while the screw-cap keeps the 
disk to its place and confines the receptacle 
within the shell. It will be seen that the acid 
5 receptacle has such position within the outer 
receptacle as to be surrounded by the solu 
tion therein, and that the connection between 
the shell A. and receptacle C is only in the 
... neck of the former. Another means of con 
Io fining the receptacle within the grenade-shell 
is shown in Figs. 6 and 7. Here a suitable 
stopper, i, closes the open end of the receptacle 
C. An elastic packing consisting of a collar 
or sleeve, k, having a flange, k, is employed 
I5 to give an elastic connection between the shell 
and receptacle, and to confine the latter within 
the shell. The collar part k of the packing 
surrounds the vial below its flangee, and is 
crowded into the orifice of the neckb, while 
2O the elastic flange"part k'isinterposed between 
the orifice-rim and glass flangee. The flange 
on the upper end of the receptacle C projects 
over the rim of the orifice and serves to aid 
in staying the receptacle and prevent its mov 
25 ing. Having described myinvention, Iclaim and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent of the Unit 
ed States- 
i. A hand-grenade fire-extinguisher con 
3o sisting of an otter shell made of frangible ma 
terial, having an orific, a receptacle, also 
. 
made of frangible material, shaped to en 
ter said orifice, both ends being closed, and 
having its upper end projecting above the rim 
of the orifice, and an elastic packing inter-35 
posed between the rim of the orifice and re 
ceptacle, as set forth. 
2. A hand-grenade fire-extinguisher con 
sisting of an outer shell made of frangible ma 
terial, having anorifice, a receptacle, also made 4 
of frangible material, shaped to enter said ori 
fice, having both ends closed, and provided at 
its upper end with a flange projecting over. .. 
the-rim of the orifice, and secured substan 
tially as described. . 
45 
3. A hand-grenade fire-extinguisher con 
sisting of an outer shellmade of frangiblema 
terial, having an orifice, a receptacle, also made 
of frangible material, shaped to enter said ori 
fice, and provided at its upper end with a flange 5o 
projecting over the rim of theorifice, a washer 
interposed between the rim of the orifice and 
flange, and a cap covering the upper end and 
flange of the receptacle and secured to the 
outer shell, as set forth. . 
. 
: Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLEST. HOLLOWAY. 
. 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
. 
J. EDw. MORRIs, 
WM. B. NELSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305290.txt	W. D. CHAPMAN. 
STAMPING PRESS. 
2 sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented Sept. 16, 1884, 
(No Model.) 
No. 305,290. 
 
.. ge 
N 
an 
F 
| 
SSWSWSessie 
a 
wire, 
25 6. 
- 
WENTOR, 
3.22.. 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
W. D. CHAPMAN. 
STAMPING PRESS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 305,290. 
Patented Sept, l6, l884. 
 
WITNESSES: 
8.25% 
 
4.4%r- 4. 
z&ar 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. CHAPMAN, OF THERESA, NEW YORK. 
STAM PNG - PRESS 
SPECIFICATIOIN forming part of Letters Patent No. 305,290, dated September 16, 1884. 
Application filed February 23, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
25 
15 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. D. CHAPMAN, 
of Theresa, in the county of Jefferson and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Stamping - Presses; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form a part of this 
specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved stamping-press. Fig. 2 is a side view 
of the same, and Figs. 3 and 4 are front views 
showing the plunger and its clamp in two dif 
ferent positions. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in all the figures. 
My invention has relation to presses for 
stamping ornaments or letters in metallic ar 
ticles; and it consists in the improved construc 
tion and combination of parts of the same, as 
hereinafter more fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter 
A indicates an upright having a rearwardly 
extending bracket, B, at its upper end, upon 
the end of which is pivoted a horizontal double 
lever, C, and having a forwardly - extending 
3O bracket, D, at its upper end, the outer end of 
which forms a vertical bearing, E, provided 
with a set-screw, F. Another forwardly-pro 
jecting bracket, G, forming a vertical bearing, 
H, at its outer end, provided with a set-screw, 
I, and forming a bearing, J, at its inner end, 
provided with a set-screw, K, slides with the 
Said bearing upon the upright, being capable 
of adjustment by the set-screw. A block, L, 
having a set-screw, M, slides upon the lower 
end of the upright, where it may be adjusted 
by the set-screw, and is provided with a for 
Wardly-projecting flat spring-arm, N, the outer 
end of which forms a slightly, downwardly 
tapering sleeve or socket, O, into which the 
die P, the lower end of which is provided with 
the desired letters or ornamentation, is in 
serted, and in which the die may be secured 
by means of soft solder poured in between the 
sides of the die and the sleeve, or by any other 
5o desirable means. The upright is secured at 
35 
45 
its lower end in a base, Q, the forward end of 
which forms an anvil, upon which the article 
to be stamped may be placed. 
R is the plunger, consisting of a bar sliding 
in the vertical bearings in the outer ends of 55 
the brackets, in which bearings the plunger 
may be secured and held firmly suspended 
over the anvil, while the work is being adjusted 
or while not in use, by means of the set-screws 
in the bearings. 
A clamp, S, consisting of two forwardly 
projecting arms or jaws, slides with its inner 
end, which forms a bearing, T, upon an up 
right rod, U, projecting from the inner end of 
the lower sliding bracket, and is forced down- 65 
ward by a spring, W, secured to the upper 
end of its bearing and to the inner end of the 
upper bracket, sliding upon the upper end of 
the upright rod, while a rod, W, is secured to 
the clamp near its outer end, and is secured at 70 
its upper end to the forward end of the double 
lever at the top of the upright, to the other 
end of which is secured a cord or rod, X, pass 
ing downward to a treadle or other means for 
drawing it down. A doubled rod, Z, forming 75 
a rhombic or lozenge-shaped enlargement, A, 
at its lower doubled end, slides with its upper 
ends between the bearing of the upper bracket 
and the set-screw upon the same, by which it 
may be clamped and held adjusted at any de- 80 
sired height. The outer ends of the clamp 
project far enough beyond the point at which 
they clamp the plunger to bear upon the in 
clined sides of the enlargement of the doubled 
rod; and it will be seen that when the forward 85 
end of the lever is tilted upward the clamp 
will raise the plunger until the outer ends of 
the clamp strike the inclined sides of the en 
largement upon the end of the doubled bar, 
which will force the jaws apart, allowing the 
plunger to drop, striking the die, whereupon 
the spring bearing against the clamp will 
force the same down, allowing it to clamp it 
again for another stroke. It will also be seen 
that, the die being fastened in the end of a 
spring, the die will be forced down upon the 
work when struck, whereupon the spring will 
again raise it free of the work, allowing the 
work to be removed or its position changed. 
It will also be seen that by moving the lower IOO 
90 
95 
2 
305,290 
bracket up or down, the stroke of the plunger a set-screw, an adjustable sliding block hav 
may be regulated and adjusted to any length, ling a forwardly-projecting spring-arm form 
and consequently to any strength desired. 
ing a sleeve at its outer end, a die secured in 
By the foregoing description, taken in con- the said sleeve, a bracket sliding adjustably 
nection with the accompanying drawings, the with its inner end upon the upright and form 
operation of my press will be readily under 
ing a vertical bearing at its outer forward end 
stood without further explanation. 
provided with a set-screw, a plunger sliding 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
in the bearings of the brackets, a vertical rod 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the projecting upward from the inner end of the 
United States- 
sliding bracket, a clamp sliding with its inner 
1. The combination, in a press for stamping end upon the upright rod and adapted to clamp 
metallic articles, of an upright having brackets the plunger with its outer ends, a spring secured 
forming vertical bearings, a die-holding spring-i to the inner end of the upper bracket and bear 
arm sliding adjustably upon the upright, a ing against the inner end of the clamp, a dou 
plunger sliding in the vertical bearings, a bled rodsliding adjustably upon the upper ver 
clamp adapted to grasp the plunger, and means tical bearing and forming a rhombic enlarge 
for raising the clamp and for separating its ment at its lower doubled end, a lever pivoted 
ends at the end of its upstroke, as and for tle upon the end of the rearwardly - projecting 
purpose shown and set forth. 
bracket, and having means for tilting its rear 
end downward, and a rod hinged at its upper 
a vertically-sliding plunger, a clamp adapted end to the forward end of the lever and Se 
to grasp the plunger and having means for cured at its lower end to the clamp, all con 
being raised and forced down, and a bar formed structed to operate as and for the purpose 
With an enlargement at its lower end adapted shown and set forth. 
to Separate the ends of the clamp at the end 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
of its upstroke, as and for the purpose shown | own I have hereunto affixed my signature in 
and set forth. 
3. The combination, in a stamping-press, of 
a base forming an anvil, an upright having a 
forwardly and rearwardly projecting bracket, 
the forwardly - projecting bracket forming a 
vertical bearing at its outer end provided with 
DORMAN WALRADT, 
HENRY D. SCHERMERHORN. 
2. In a stamping-press, the combination of 
WILLIAM ID. CHAPMAN. 
presence of two witnesses. 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305391.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. HORE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
PROCESS OF MAKING CHROME-YELLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 305,391, dated September 16, 1884. 
Application filed January 15, 1884. (Specimens.) 
To all tuhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs E. HoRE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in the Manufacture of Chrome-Yellow, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to the manufacture 
of a chrome-yellow by the action of sublimed 
lead and bichromate of potash, as hereinafter 
more fully explained. Sublimed lead, or lead 
anhydrite, is a substance obtained from galena 
ores, and it is generally of the following com 
position: 
Sulphate of lead.............. . 
65.93 
Sulphite of lead............. a 
1.9S 
Oxide of lead................................. 31.13 
0.96 
Oxide of zinc.......'a a e s 
. . . . 
a so 
a p s a... 
n v e a s a 
. . . 
. 
. 
. . . 
s a 
a 
... 
' 
. 
. 
a 
. 
s 
O 
25 
Total.................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100.00 
It is used as a substitute for white lead. 
In carrying out my invention. I take five 
hundred pounds of sublimed lead, thin it with 
water, and pulp through a fine sieve to re 
move any coarse particles. Then I put the 
same into a mixer provided with a suitable 
agitator. I then take One hundred and eighty 
pounds of bichromate of potash and dissolve 
it in a sufficient quantity of water, and this 
Solution I add, either in parts or all at once, to 
the Sublimed lead contained in the mixer un 
der constant stirring, and finally I apply 
heat, either by steam or otherwise, and boil 
for three or four hours, until all the bichro 
mate has combined with the sublimed lead, 
which may be ascertained by the absence of 
any bichromate in the mother-liquor. The 
supernatant liquor is then drawn off, and the 
coloring-matter is repeatedly washed until en 
tirely free from the sulphate and Sulphite of 
potash in solution. The resulting product 
may be dried in the usual Way, and consti 
tutes a bright and brilliant chrome-yellow 
color. It can be used in the same manner as 
chrome-yellow made from white lead; but it 
can be distinguished therefrom by the pres 
ence of zinc. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The process, substantially as described, for 
producing a chrome-yellow, said process con 
sisting in mixing sublimed lead with a solu 
tion of bichromate of potash, boiling the mix 
ture, and finally separating the insoluble col 
oring-matter from the soluble products, sub 
stantially in the manner set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
35 
45 
50 
55. 
CHAS. E. HORE. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. H.AUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305492.txt	(Model.) 
No. 305,492. 
J. F. WALLACE. 
SIDE BEARING FOR CAR TRUCKs, 
mir 23, 1884, 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
A4 - G - 
e 
Sist 
 
 
 
 
2 
SASSES 
S & NNN 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. WALLACE, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SIDE BEARING FOR CAR-TRUCKS. 
-3CIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 305,492, dated September 23, 1884. 
Application filed June 4, 1ss4. (Model.) 
55 
65 
. 
in each. 
io ?tiff willon, it may conceriu . . 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Side Bearings for. Rail 
road-Car Trucks; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
My invention relates to the side bearings 
employed between the bolsters connecting the 
bodies of cars to their trucks, these bearings 
being employed on each side of the center 
plates through which the king-bolt passes in 
securing together the bolsters of the truck 
and the car-body. These side bearings have 
heretofore been formed of wood or metal, and 
in some cases a seat or depression has been 
formed in the face of the bottom bearing for 
the reception of packing and oil to lubricate 
the wearing-faces of the bearings; but asthere 
was no means of removing and replacing the 
packing in the seat when the car was se 
cured to the truck, consequently the packing 
soon wore away, and as the faces of the bear 
ings were dry, friction was created when the 
truck turned under the car, and, besides wear 
ing off the side bearings, the flanges of the 
wheels wore off much more rapidly, the 
wheels often wearing sharp, and for this rea 
son being more liable to climb the rails, and 
cause accident. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
side bearing which can be packed and oiled 
while the car-body is resting on the truck; 
and to this end it consists, essentially, in a 
side bearing having its bottom bearing pro 
vided with one or more cavities or seats for 
packing, and One or more openings communi 
cating therewith at the side or end of the bear 
ing, whereby said cavities may be packed and 
the bearing oiled while the top bearing is rest 
ing on the bottom bearing. 
It also consists in certain means for retain 
ing the saturated cotton waste or packing 
within the cavities. 
It also consists in forming the packing seats 
or cavities of a series of recesses extending 
into the wearing-face of the bearing from an 
oiling-space or basin at theside of and beyond 
the wearing-face. 
To enable otherS Skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe the same 
Be it known that I, JoHN F. WALLACE, of more fully, referring to the accompanying 
drawings, in which- . 
Figure l is a central section of the car-bol. 
ster's illustrating my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view of the bottom bearing. Fig. 3 is a 
cross-section of the bearing on the line aa, 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section on the 
line 22), Fig. 2; and Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are like 
views of another form of bearing embodying 
my invention. 
like parts 
Like letters of reference indicate 
The bottom bearings, a, of the side bear. 
ings are bolted to the truck bolster a through 
the lips d, and the top bearings, b, are secured 
to the car-body bolster e by bolts fpassing 
through them, the top bearings being provided 
With flanges of fitting on either side of the bol. 
ster. The top bearing has a flat wearing-face 
Over the Wearing-face h of the bottom bear. 
ing, and it may either be straight or curved, 
Corresponding to the curve of the wearin 
g 
face h, as shown. 
Two forms of the bottom bearing embody 
ing the invention are shown, and that shown 
in FigS. I to 4 will be first described. The 
Wearing-face h corresponds in width to that 
of the top bearing, and along one side of the 
face h is the packing space or opening k, the 
Walls of Said opening being of the same height 
as the face h, and forming also a basin to hold 
the oil. Leading out from this basin I, are the 
cavities or packing-seats l, which extend into 
the Wearing-face h, and are adapted to receive 
and retain cotton waste or other packing which 
Will absorb the oil and by capillary attraction 
hold it in contact with the wearing-face of the 
upper side bearing. These packing-cavities 
are made of greater width and depth at the 90 
base than at the top, the walls being formed - 
dovetailed, and either gradually increasing in 
width, as shown in Fig. 6, or being undercut, 
as shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 4, and indicated 
on dotted lines in Fig. 2. They are thus adapt 
ed to receive and retain a larger amount of 
the packing, and to prevent the packing from 
being drawn up out of the cavities by the ac 
tion of the top bearings. The bottom bear. 
ings, on account of the side opening or basin 
k, hold a large amount of oil or saturated 
95 
IOO 
IO 
2 5 
4O 
45 
2 
305,492 
, 
s 
C 
packing, and, because the packing-cavities can 
be packed or cleaned and oil furnished there 
to while the top bearings are resting thereon, 
the side bearings can be kept well lubricated, 
so that the friction between their faces is 
greatly reduced. The truck can, therefore, 
turn under the car more easily in traveling 
around curves, and, consequently, the cars may 
be more heavily loaded, the power necessary 
to draw the cars around curves is lessened, 
and the wear on the wheel-flanges is greatly 
reduced. 
The side bearing shown in Figs. 5, 6, and 7 
is found well adapted for the purpose, though 
I5 not as desirable a form as that previously de 
scribed, as the packing and oil are introduced 
under the top bearing instead of at the side 
thereof. The packing cavity or recess extends 
the entire length of the botton bearing a, 
and the packing-opening k is at the end of 
the bearing, the end wall being cut away to 
give free entrance to the packing-cavity. The 
packing, saturated with oil, may beintroduced 
and withdrawn by means of a hook, the pack 
ing being pushed by said hook into the cav 
ity, and after the bearing is properly packed, 
the waste being packed tight at the end of the 
cavity to retain the oil therein. The said bear 
ings may of course be employed to advantage 
3O in many places where like bearings are em 
25 
2C) 
ployed, and when so used are included within 
my invention. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A side bearing having its bottom bear- 35 
ing provided with one or more cavities or 
seats for packing, and one or more openings 
communicating therewith at the side or end 
of the bearing, whereby said cavities may be 
packed and oiled while the top bearing is rest- 4o 
ing thereon, substantially as set forth. 
2. A bottom side bearing having one or 
more cavities for the reception of saturated 
waste or packing, and an opening communi 
cating therewith at the side or end, said cavi 
ties having means, substantially as described, 
for retaining the packing within them, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. A side bearing having its bottom bear 
ing provided with a packing and oiling space 50 
or basin at the side thereof, beyond the top 
bearing, communicating with packing-cavities 
or seats in the wearing-face of the bearing, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
WALLACE, have hereunto set my hand. 
In testimony whereof I, the said JOHN F. 55 
45 
JOHN F. WALLACE. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES I. KAY, 
J. N. COOKE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305592.txt	(No Model.) 
A. HIRSHHEIMER. 
HARROW, 
No. 305,592. 
Patented Sept. 23, 1884, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ALBERT HIRSHHEIMER, OF LA CROSSE, WISCONSIN. 
HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 305,592, dated September 23, 1884. 
Application filed January 30, 1884. 
(No model.) 
O 
o Cudi, Zvi UT, it inctly concern: 
destroy all flexibility in the connections be 
Be it known that i, ALBERT HIRSHHEIMER, 
tween the beams. By simply loosening the 
of La Crosse, in the county of La Crosse and 
nut and slipping back the bolt out of the slot 
State of Wisconsin, have invented a new and 
in the end of the link D the harrow is coln 
useful Improvement in Harrows, of which the 
verted from a rigid into a flexible harrow; or a 
following is a full, clear, and exact description, 
part may be made rigid and a part flexible, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
and in a moment too, by simply changing the 
ings, making a part of this specification, in 
position of the nuts, thus adapting the harrow 
which 
to work on any kind of ground. On the up 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a harrow 
per portion of the band C is provided a slot, 
With my improvements attached. Fig. 2 is a 
c, through which passes a stop, F, secured to 
Section through line a ac, Fig. 1, showing part 
the end of the bean, and which controls the 
of the harrow rigid and a part flexible, and 
movement of the band around the end of the 
With Some of the teeth perpendicular and sonne 
beam, or of the beam turning within the band, 
slanting. Fig. 3 is an enlarged view of one of 
as it is evident that the beam can only turn the 
the connecting-links, Fig. 4 shows the flexi 
length of the slot c, as the stop F is then 
ble joint detached from the harrow. Fig. 5 is 
brought up against one end or the other of the 
an end View of the harrow folded for trans 
slot and further movement is arrested. When 
portation. 
the draft is in one direction, the position of the 
My invention relates to harrows adapted for 
stop holds the teeth in a vertical position; but 
use on both smooth and uneven ground; and 
changing the draft to the other end of the har 
it consists in the combination of devices here 
low and in the direction of the arrow, the 
in after explained and claimed. 
teeth will assume a slanting position, thus en 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
abling the operator to change from vertical to 
and use my invention, I will proceed to de 
slanting teeth by simply attaching his animal 
scribe the exact manner in which I have car 
to the opposite end of the harrow. 
lied it out. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
In the drawings, A represents the beams of 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
the harrow, and B the teeth, constructed in 
Patent, is 
any Well-known manner. The end of each 
1. In a harrow, and in combination with the 
beam is made round, and is fitted with a metal pivoted beams A, provided with the teeth B. 
band, C, (see Fig. 4.) in which the end of the and stops F, the herein-described links D D 
beam freely turns. This band, fitting around and bands C, formed in one piece, the said 
the ends of the beam, guards against the possi- bands being also slotted in their upper faces 
bility of splitting the beam when striking for reception of the stops, substantially as and 
against Stones, grubs, or other obstructions. for the purpose herein set forth. 
2 
On opposite sides and forming a part of the 
. The harrow-beams A, provided with the 
band are links D D, pivoted together at d. teeth B and stops F, in combination with the 
The link D is provided with a longitudinal slotted bands C and the pivoted and slotted 
slot, in which slides a short screw-bolt, E, links D D, formed in one piece, and screw 
provided with a nut, e, and elongated heade'. bolt E, provided with the nute, all construct 
The link D is bifurcated or slotted at its end, ed to operate substantially as and for the pur 
corresponding to the slot in the link D, so that | pose set forth. 
when the two links are brought into line the 
two slots exactly register, and the screw-bolt 
Witnesses: 
may be passed through both links, and the nuts 
tightened, so as to bind the links together and 
GEO. J. JoHNSON, 
EUGENEH, THOMAS. 
ALBERT FIRSHHEIMIER. 
- 
3 5 
55 
65 
75 
85 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305692.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 305,692. 
W. L. JONES, 
BARREL HOOP FASTENER, 
- 
Patented Sept. 23, l884. 
HIE1. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM L. JONES, OF HOLLY SPRINGS, MISSISSIPPI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALE TO JAMES T. FANT, OF SAME PLACE. 
BARREL-HOOP FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 305,692, dated September 23, 884. 
Application filed July 12, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, W. L. JoNES, a citizen of 
the United States of America, residing at Holly 
Springs, in the county of Marshall and State 
of Mississippi, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Barrel-Hoop Fasten 
ers, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had therein to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
This invention pertains to improvements in 
hoop checks or fastenings, having for its object 
to provide a simple, cheap, and effective means 
for securing metal hoops upon casks, barrels, 
or other analogous vessels; and it consists of a 
check or fastening formed integrally with the 
hoop, and adapted, after the forcing of the 
hoop to its intended place upon the vessel, to 
be driven into the staves thereof, and thusse 
cure the hoop firmly thereon as against its be 
ing jarred or otherwise accidentally detached 
in the handling of the cask or barrel, substan 
tially as hereinafter more fully set forth and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 il 
lustrates the application of my invention to a 
cask. Fig. 2 shows a broken away enlarged 
view of a metal hoop embodying my invention 
in two forms, and Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional 
view of the same involving one form thereof. 
In carrying out, my invention, I cut an ordi 
nary metal hoop in the direction of its length 
at two points, as at a C, said cuts being paral 
lel, and then produce a transverse cut, a, ex 
tending from one of the extremities of each 
longitudinal cut, effecting severing or the de 
tachment of one end of the intermediate piece 
of metal, thus forming a tongue, b. This 
tongue is bent so as to form a right-angled arm 
or tooth, b', which extends inwardly trans 
versely to the hoop and is sharpened upon its 
wide or broad surfaces, and slightly beveled 
upon its side edges, to enable it, when sufficient 
force is applied thereto, to penetrate the wood | 
of the staves. The longitudinal portion of the 
tongue or check is inclined outwardly from its 45 
point of union with the hoop, so that the free 
inwardly-projecting end of the tooth b' will 
clear or slightly rest upon the stave or side of 
the cask or vessel as the hoop is driven 
home, the tooth of the check or tongue be-, 5o 
ing then driven by the application of force by 
a suitable instrument-as a hammer-into the 
stave or side of said vessel. 
In lieu of the above-described method of 
constructing the tongue or fastening at a point 55 
intermediately of the side edges of the hoop, 
the same end may be substantially attained by 
cutting obliquely the required depth into one 
of said edges, and conforming the rest of its 
formation to that of the previously-described 
form of check or fastening, the latter being 
thus supplied to a side edge of the hoop in 
stead of at a point equidistantly between the 
side edges of the hoop, in which relation it 
will serve the purpose of thisinvention equally 
as well. 
This check or fastening furnishes a simple, 
cheap, and effective means for securing firmly 
the hoop upon the cask or vessel without lia- 
t 
bility of being accidentally jarred or falling off 7o 
in handling the cask or vessel. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
: 
The metal hoop having the tongue or check 75 
formed integrally there with, with its longi. 
tudinal portion inclined outwardly, and hav 
ing an inwardly-projecting arm or tooth with 
its inner end or point disposed to clear or 
slightly rest against the cask as the hoop is 8o 
driven home, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. . 
& 
WILLIAM. I. JONES. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. B. WATTHALL, 
ABRAM. T. NORFLEET. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305792.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 305,792. 
W. CHILTON, 
MOTOR. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1884. 
 
 
 
 
IWYE/WTOR 
Attorneys 
N. Fies, 
agreber. 
Sinixt, , 
, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM CHILTON, OF HEMPSTEAD, TEXAs. 
MotoR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 305,792, dated September 30, 1884. 
Application filed July 28, 1884. No model.) 
- 
25 out in the claims. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WM. CHILTON, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Hempstead, 
in the county of Waller and State of Texas, 
5 have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Motors, of which the following is a specifi 
cation, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
My invention relates to motors designed to 
Io be driven by hand-power, horse-power, steam 
or other power, for use in the kitchen, dairy, 
farm - workshop, or other place, to operate 
churns, washing-machines, sewing-machines, 
circular and scroll saws, corn-shellers and 
I5 mills, grindstones and emery-wheels, coffee 
and spice mills-in fact, any and all machines 
where light power is required; and it has for 
its object to provide a motor of the class re 
ferred to that shall possess superior advantages 
20 in point of simplicity, cheapness, durability, 
and general efficiency; and to these ends my 
invention consists in the construction and 
novel arrangement of parts, as will be herein 
after fully described, and particularly pointed 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in per 
spective of my improved motor applied to a 
churn, a circular saw, and a coffee-mill; and 
Fig. 2 is a view in perspective of a modifica 
3otion of the motor, wherein band-wheels are 
used in lieu of cog-gears shown in Fig. 1. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the frame of the ma 
chine, which may be made of either wood or 
35 iron. This frame A is rectangular in form, 
and is suitably braced to give it the necessary 
strength, and it may be of any desired dimen 
sions, said dimensions being regulated by the 
uses to which the motoristo be put, and in ac 
4o cordance with the power required. The driv 
ing-shaftBisjournaled in boxes CC on the side 
rails, DD, oftheframe A. The driving-wheel E. 
is secured to the middle of the driving-shaftB, 
and a crank, F, is pfovided at one end of said 
45 shaftB, and a band-wheel, G, at the other end 
thereof, its ends projecting through the boxes 
CC and beyond the side rails, D D, of the 
frame. A crank-shaft, H, is journaled in 
boxes CC on a cross-rail, I, and one of the 
5o end rails, J, of the frame at right angles to the 
driving-shaft B, and this crank-shaft. His pro 
In Fig. 1. I have shown the crank-shaft H 55 
vided at its inner end with a miter-pinion, K, 
the teeth of which mesh with the miter-teeth 
on the driving-wheel E. 
provided with two band-wheels, L and M, an 
emery-wheel, N, a double crank, O, between 
the emery-wheel and band-wheel I, and a 
crank-arm, P., at its outer end. The crank 
arm P is connected to a pitman-rod, Q, by a 6o 
wrist-pin, Q, and the pitman-rod is connected 
to the dasher-rod of a churn. It is evident 
that the pitman-rod may be connected to a 
scroll-saw or other device requiring a recipro 
cating motion to operate it. I have shown 65 
also in said Fig. 1. a circular saw secured in a 
frame attached to one of the side rails D, and 
operated by a band from the pulley M. A. 
band also runs from the pulley L to a pulley 
on the shaft of a coffee-mill on the opposite 7O 
side rail D. The double crank may be con 
nected by a pitman-rod to any machine re 
quiring a reciprocating motion to operate it. 
The crank - shaft H is provided with a fly 
wheel, R, which is secured thereto outside of 75 
the frame A, in order to enable me to make 
the frame small and the fly-wheel sufficiently 
large to cause the mechanism to run evenly 
and with uniformity. 
ing-shaft and crank-shaft are journaled paral 
lel to each other, and instead of cog-gearing, 
as in Fig. i., band-wheels and belting are used. 
The uses to which this motor may be put are 
practically illimitable in a figurative sense, 85 
and only a few of them havebeen enumerated 
above. 
For light work and short operations the 
crank on the driving-shaft may be used, and 
the motor be driven by hand-power. In heav- 90 
ier work and longer operations the band-wheel 
on said driving-shaft may be and is employed 
and is driven by horse-power, dog-power, or 
steam or water power, as may be most con 
venient. 
The corn-sheller, &c., are separate from the 
motor; but those I have shown connected to 
the frame may be conveniently used in such 
connection, and in some instances two or more 
of them may be operated at the same time, if IOO 
desirable. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 2 the driv- 8o 
The crank-shaft H has a bit-socket, H, in 
. 
95 
 
2 
305,792 
vided with the pinion on its inner end, engag 
ing the toothed driving-wheel, the band-wheels 
Land M, the double crank, the fly-wheel, the 
crank-arm, and the pitman-rod, substantially 
as specified. 
3. The combination, with the frame of the 
motor, of the crank-shaft provided with a band 
wheel and a crank at each end, a band-wheel 
at its middle, a shaft provided with a band 
wheel or pulley at each end and arranged par 
allel with the driving or crank shaft, a driv 
ing-wheel at the center, and a band-wheel on 
one side of the driving-wheel, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM CHILTON. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES ARMSTRONG, 
J. R. S. DAVIS. 
25 
35 
IO 
the end, to which the crank-arm P is detach 
ably connected, and the crank-arm may be re 
moved and a bit placed in said socket H', so 
that boring and drilling may be performed by 
the machine. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination, with the frame of the 
motor, of the crank-shaft provided with the 
double crank, bands Land M, fly-wheel, crank 
arm, and pitman-rod, and the driving-shaft 
and mechanism, substantially as described, for 
driving said crank-shaft, as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the frame of the 
motor, of the driving shaft provided with the 
Crank at one end and band-wheel at the other 
end, and the toothed driving-wheel at its mid 
dle, and the crank-shaft journaled in the frame 
at right angles to the driving-shaft, and pro 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305892.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 305,892. 
. 
E. C. BRUEN. 
PACKAGE FASTENER. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1884. 
- 
SAS 
 
s 
22222222222 
Wiesses, 
62. At 6.0-C24-6. 
Invezdar, 
ans. 6. 2.-w 
Pet ERs, photo-lithographar, Washington, D. c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN C. BRUEN, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
PACKAGE FAST ENER. 
cPECIFICATION forming part of Fetters Patent No. 305,892, dated September 30, 1884. 
Application filed May 14, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
Io 
'7) all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN C. BRUEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and Im 
proved Package-Fasteners, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of this invention is to provide an 
inexpensive and readily-applied substitute for 
cord for the purpose of fastening packages: 
and the invention consists, primarily, in a roll 
of gunmed paper of the requisite thickness 
and toughness, perforated crosswise at inter. 
vals, so as to form detachable strips of a size 
for convenient application to secure the ends 
of a package; and my invention includes a re 
ceptacle specially adapted to contain a roll of 
such paper in compact shape, and so arranged 
that strips can be quickly detached from the 
roll and moistened for application to the pack 
age, all as hereinafter fully described. 
in the accompanying drawings, in both fig 
ures of which like parts are designated by sim 
ilar letters of reference, Figure 1 is a perspect 
ive view of one form of receptacle adapted for 
carrying my invention into practical effect, 
and Fig. 2 is a central vertical section thereof. 
( designates the receptacle, having a hinged 
cover, b, with an opening therein, and a wa 
ter-trough, c, projecting from one end. The 
whole may be made of wood or other suitable 
material, and of any desired shape. 
d is a roll of gummed paper, perforated 
crosswise at intervals, and preferable at reg 
ular intervals, to form detachable strips of 
uniform size. The roll d is, as shown, wound 
upon a spool or reel, e, fixed to a rod, e, hav 
ing its bearings in the sides of the receptacle. 
One end of this rod terminates in or has fixed 
thereto a crank, f, supported outside of the 
receptacle. 
In the trough c is arranged a spindle, g, 
fixed to a rod, h, loosely mounted therein. 
. 
25 
35 
5O 
45 
This spindle is faced or covered with felt or 
other fibrous material adapted to absorb wa 
ter and present a wet surface, to which the 
gummed paper may be readily applied, when 
desired, and thereby moistened. 
A roll of gummed paper being wound upon 
the spool or reel by securing one end to the 
spool and turning the crank, the other end is 
passed out through the opening in the cover 
of the receptacle, and the trough filled or par 
tially filled with water. The device is now. 
ready for use, and when desired to fasten the 55 
ends of a package, the requisite number of 
strips are detached from the roll, moistened 
by contact with the spindle, and applied to 
seal the package. The detachable strips can 
be round, square, oval, or any other shape, 6o 
and may contain printed matter, when de 
sured, and will thus serve the double purpose 
of sealing packages and advertising the busi 
ness of the user. 
stituted for the spindle of the water-trough 
and that it would answer the same purpose I 
do not wish to be limited to the use of the 
spindle. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 7o 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A roll of gummed paper perforated to 
form detachable strips, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
; 2. The herein-described receptacle, having 75 
a spool or reel upon which a roll of gummed 
paper may be wound, and a water-trough pro 
vided with an absorbent, as and for the pur 
pose described. 
hand this 4th day of March, A. D. 1884. 
As it is obvious that a sponge could be sub- 65 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 8o 
EDWIN C. BRUEN. 
Witnesses: 
ERNEST C. WEBB, 
ARTHUR. C. WEBB. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US305992.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 305,992. 
H. W. ANNIS & W. H. FARRAND, 
SANDING ATTACHMENT FOR LOCOMOTIVES, 
7%. Z. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1884. 
 
Zee-e/zza2-s: 
Ae-are/ W. 472-azs & 
772a2zazz - Z. Zezerpre-22, 
Zoraze, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY W. ANNIS AND WILLIAM. H. FARRAND, OF ROCHESTER, N.Y., ASSIGN. 
ORS OF ONE-THIRD TO GEORGE S. RILEY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SANDING ATTACHMENT FOR O COMO TV E. S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 305,992, dated September 30, 1884. 
Application filed February 25, 1884. (No model.) 
r 
 
To all whom it invay concern : 
Be it known that we, HENRY W. ANNIS and 
WILLIAM. H. FARRAND, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Rochester, in the county of 
Monroe and State of New York, have invented 
new and useful Improvements in Sanding At 
tachments for Locomotives, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
that class of rail-sanding apparatus for loco 
motives in which a steam-pipe is employed, in 
connection with a sand-pipe, to produce fric 
tion enough to maintain the proper traction 
and prevent slipping of the driving-wheels on 
the rails when they have become slippery by 
wear, frost, or from other causes, and the ob 
ject is to apply the sand from a sand-box di- ) 
rectly at the point of contact between the 
wheels and the rails, and to moisten the tread 
of the driving-wheels and the rails, and cause 
the sand to adhere to them without the dan 
ger of said pipe freezing. 
In devices heretofore employed for this pur 
pose the pipes are apt to freeze in cold weath 
er and thus become inoperative, and said 
freezing is caused by the condensation of the 
steam, which forms ice, the gathering of moist 
ure, and the gradual closing of the sand-pipe 
by the sand sticking within its pipe, and by 
accumulation entirely closing it. 
To overcome these difficulties and furnish 
means for causing an unobstructed flow of sand 
whenever it is required, our invention con 
sists in producing a junction-piece or foot, to 
which the sand and steam pipes are connected, 
having an enlarged steam, hot-air, or hot-wa 
terheating-chamber by which the freezing of 
the Sand-pipe is prevented, and at the Salme 
time to carry off any condensed water from 
the steam-pipe in a drip-gutter attached to 
said junction-piece. 
It also consists in certain details of construc 
tion and arrangement of parts, as Will be more 
fully described hereinafter, and more specifi 
cally pointed out in the claims, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
pair of driving-wheels of a locomotive, show 
ing our improvement connected therewith; 
Fig. 2, a front elevation of the junction-piece 
or foot. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section of the 
: 
In the drawings, A A designate the driv- 55 
same. Fig. 4 is a cross-section of the same on 
the line acac of Fig. 3. 
ing-wheels of a locomotive, and B is the rail 
upon which they run. The sand-pipe C is 
connected to the ordinary sand-box, (not 
shown,) and D, the steam-pipe, connected with 
the steam-space of the boiler, (not shown,) 6o 
and both pipes are of the ordinary construc 
tion and proportions. These pipes are con 
nected to a junction-piece or foot, E, which 
is located in close proximity to the point of 
contact between the wheels and rails. The 65 
sand-pipe is screwed into a socket, a, at the 
upper rear part of the foot, and the steam 
pipe is attached to a nozzle, b, in front by a 
nut, n, forming a swivel-joint, and made pref 
erably of a spherical or conical shape, and it 7c 
can by this means be readily detached when 
desired. The body of the foot is divided by a 
partition, and forms the two chambers c and 
d. The first chamber, c, is a tubular passage, 
having its lower end cut obliquely, so as to 75 
form an opening, h, of greater area than its 
diameter, for the free passage of the sand, and 
to prevent choking. The second chamber, d, 
which is connected with the steam-pipe, hot 
air, or hot-Water pipe, forms a steam and heat- 8O 
ing chamber of considerable capacity, and ex 
tends the entire length of the sand-passage and 
transversely half-way or more around said 
sand-passage, as shown in Fig. 4, and, by nearly 
or entirely surrounding the same by hot steam, 85 
forming a heating-chamber for steam, hot air, 
or hot water. At the lower end ol' bottom of 
the heating-chamber is arranged an oblong 
opening or slit, e, placed in an angular dilec 
tion, so that a jet of steam issuing therefrom 90 
will strike the descending sand and force it 
toward the contact-point of the wheels and 
rails. A drip - gutter, (f, is placed in close 
proximity to the mouth of the steam-chamber, 
and serves to carry the condensed steam toward g5 
the sidle of the rails, and this is another in 
portant feature of our invention. 
The foot may be made round, oblong, Square, 
or of any other form desired, and the heat 
ing-chamber may be extended entirely around IOO 
the sand-passage, if desired, excepting its 
mouth, as shown by the dotted lines in Figs. 
3 and 4. 
It will be readily seen by those skilled in 
... O 
45 
305,992 
IO 
2O. 
tle art that by this arrangement of heating 
chamber of an increased capacity, the freez 
ing and closing up of the sand-passage will 
be entirely overcome and obviated. By form 
ing the outlet opening or mouth of the sand 
passage of an increased area its clogging or 
choking will be prevented, and the sand-pipe 
is therefore always kept free and unob 
Structed. 
By carrying the condensed steam sidewise 
of the rails it is out of the way and cannot 
form ice on the rails when the locomotive is 
standing still. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim is- 
1. In a rail-sanding apparatus for locomo 
tives, a junction-piece having a heating-cham 
ber partially or entirely surrounding the sand 
passage to prevent its freezing, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a rail-sanding apparatus, a junction 
piece or foot to which the sand and steam, 
hot-air or hot-water pipes of a locomotive are 
connected, and forming a heating - chamber 
by which the sand-passage is heated and pre 
vented from freezing, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In a rail-sanding apparatus for locomo 
tives, a junction-piece or foot to which the 
Sand and heating pipes are connected, and 
containing a heating-chamber partially or en 
tirely surrounding the sand-passage to pre 
vent its freezing, substantially as described. 
- 
35 
45 
55 
it. In a rail-Saluding apparatus for locomo 
tives, a junction-piece or foot to which the 
Sand and stealm pipes are connected, and hav 
ing a sand-passage provided with an opening 
or mouth of larger area than its diameter, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a rail-sanding apparatus for locomo 
tives, a junction-piece or foot provided with a 
heating-chamber surrounding the sand-pas 
Sage, having an outlet-opening or mouth of 
larger area than its diameter, substantially as 
described. 
6. The combination of a junction-piece or 
foot for a rail-sanding apparatus containing 
a heating-chamber and a sand-passage, and 
provided with a drip-gutter, substantially as 
described. 
7. The combination of a junction-piece, E, 
containing a sand-passage, c, and a heating 
chamber, d, partially surrounding said pas 
Sage, connected to a steam-pipe, D, and a 
Sand-pipe, C, all constructed and arranged 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
HENRY W. ANNIS. 
WILLIAM. H. FARRAN). 
Witnesses: 
J. M. DAVY, 
JAS. W. GREEN E. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306092.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 306,092, 
0, J. MIC GAINN, 
WATER CLOSET, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 7, 1884, 
| 
 
 
 
 
| 4 || 
Zcesses. 
??|| z 
Zzz zvezzz : 
(No Model.) 
No. 306,092, 
-47.) . 
O. J. McGANN, 
WATER CLOSET, . 
, 7", 
m 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 7, 1884. k 
  
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
EERs. Photo-ithographer. Washirstor, B.C. . 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OWEN J. McGANN, OF CHICAGO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALFTOJOHN L. 
VANDERMARK, OF PULLMAN, ILLINOIS. 
WATER. CLOSET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 306,092, dated October 7, 1884. 
Application filed April 14, 1883. 
(No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
55 
65 
and also to provide a water-closet with cer 
To all avhoT), it 7may co7ucer7u: 
tain novel and improved features of construc 
Be it known that I, OWEN J. MCGANN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
tion and combination, all as hereinafter de 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
scribed and claimed, and illustrated in the 
annexed drawings, in which 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Figure I is a perspective view of my im. 
Improvements in Water-Closets, of which the 
following is a specification. 
proved Water-closet, with the box or casing 
'shown in dotted lines. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
This invention relates to improvements in 
perspective view of the disinfecting-chamber. 
water-closets in which a hinged valve is em 
Fig. 3 is a detail representing the valve-cock. 
ployed for opening or cutting off communica 
Fig. 4 is a section taken on a vertical plane 
tion between the bowl and the soil-pipe, a 
float-valve arranged for automatically regu 
through the water-closet. Fig. 5 is a vertical 
section taken at right angles to Fig. 4. Fig. 6 
lating the supply of water to the bowl, and 
means provided for disinfecting the soil-pipe 
is a detail representing the float valve-cock in 
section. Fig. 7 is a top or plan view of the 
into which the contents of the bowl are dis 
charged. 
Water-closet. 
Referring by letters to the several figures of 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
water-closet with a disinfecting-chamber con 
the drawings, in which like letters denote like 
taining some suitable disinfectant, and ar- parts, A indicates the bowl, and B the dis 
ranged to communicate with the soil-pipe in charge-valve, that is provided for opening or 7o 
closing a pipe, C, which leads from the bowl 
such a way that at each time a discharge oc. 
curs through the soil-pipe a disinfected air for the purpose of carrying off its contents 
from the disinfecting-chamber shall, by rea 
and discharging the same into the soil-pipe. 
son of the tendency of the said discharge to 
The seat for this discharge-valve is made on 
an incline, so that when the valve is closed it 
create a vacuum in the soil-pipe, be sucked or 
shall lie in an inclined position, as shown in 
drawn down into the soil-pipe, SO as to disin 
Fig. 4. By such arrangement the valve will 
fect the same; also, to provide a water-closet 
with a disinfecting-chamber arranged so that 
close by reason of its gravity, which will also 
I 
serve to hold the valve down upon the inclined 
at each discharge from the bowl into the soil 
pipe the tendency of the discharge to create 
seat, and thereby render the valve more ef 
fective in resisting the pressure of the water 
a vacuum in the latter Shall draw disinfected 
in the bowl and pipe than if it hung in a ver 
air from the chamber into the soil-pipe, and 
tical plane when closed. 
also so that when the valve between the Soil 
Water for flushing the bowl and drain-pipes 
pipe and the bowl is closed and water backed 
is conducted from a supply service-pipe, D, 
up within the latter, water shall also rise in the 
through a branch pipe, E, leading from the 
disinfecting-chamber in a quantity suitable for 
absorbing some of the disinfectant contained 
latter to the bowl. This branch E is prac 
tically a portion of the supply or service pipe, 
therein, and for overflowing from the said 
so that the service-pipe will be understood to 
chamber into the soil-pipe, in which way at 
include the said parts D and E. 
each discharge from the bowl into the soil 
As a means for automatically opening and 
pipe the latter will be disinfected, and in case 
closing the service-pipe, so as to permit the 
the supply of water should partially fail or be 
flow of water into bowl after the discharge 
too limited to cause an Overflow from the dis 
valve has been opened, and to cut off the sup 
infecting-chamber disinfected air from the lat 
ply after the said valve has been closed, I 
ter will with each discharge be drawn down 
provide a float valve-cock, which will close 
into the soil-pipe. 
when the water rises to a certain height in the 
A further object is to provide novel means 
for effectively draining off water from the 
bowl, and open as soon as the water sinks be 
The float E of this valve 
service-pipe between a... valve-cock and the 
low such level. 
cock is arranged within a chamber, F, along 
bowl after the valve-cock has been closed, 
75 
o 
95 
IOO 
306,092 
3 
5 
O 
25 
the supply of Water fail or be too limited to 
have caused an overflow from the disinfecting 
chamber, air from the latter, impregnated with 
the disinfectant employed, will be sucked or 
) 
drawn down into the Soil-pipe. 
As shown, the disinfecting-chamber com 
municates with the soil-pipe through the me 
dium of the valve-chamber in which the dis 
infecting-chamber is located; but it will be 
evident that should the disinfecting-chamber 
be arranged outside of the valve-chamber, air 
from the disinfecting - chamber will still be 
drawn into the Soil-pipe at each discharge SO 
long as the soil-pipe and the disinfecting 
chamber communicate with each other and the 
general principles of my invention are ob 
served in constructing the samle. 
It will also be observed that the disinfect 
ing-chamber herein shown communicates with 
the bowl through a passage at a point between 
the bowl and the discharge-valve, since, while 
under the arrangement shown the disinfecting 
chamber connects with the bowl through the 
medium of the float-chamber and pipe-connec 
tions, yet in effect a passage is formed between 
the said chamber and bowl, no matter how 
many bends or enlargements the passage may 
have; also, that the seal located in this pas 
sage prevents the disinfected air from passing 
back to the bowl. The disinfecting-chamber, 
aside from Such convenient COInnection with 
the bowl, whereby advantage. can be taken of 
an overflow, has a still more marked and in 
portant feature, which consists in its connect 
ing with the soil-pipe through an open pas 
sage or a passage which is at all times open, 
and which connects the disinfecting-chamber. 
with the soil-pipe at a point beyond the dis 
charge-valve of the water-closet. In this way 
a discharge from the bowl will not only cause 
a current of air to be drawn into the soil-pipe, 
but even when the discharge-valve of this 
particular closet is closed a discharge into 
the soil-pipe from any other source-as, for 
example, from another closetwill likewise 
cause air from the disinfecting-chamber to be 
drawn into the soil-pipe, which, it will be seen, 
cannot be attained in closets Where the bowl 
has a space or chamber in one of its sides for 
a piece of soap, or the like, which said cham 
ber is simply washed out by Water rising in 
the bowl. 
The discharge-valve is suspended from a 
spindle, U, which passes through one of the 
walls of the valve-chafmber, and is provided 
with a suitable lever, V, arranged outside of 
the casing and connected with a pull-rod, W, 
having a knob or button on its upper end, and 
arranged to be conveniently grasped by a per 
son using the closet. A weight, 'V', can also 
be provided upon the lever V as an auxiliary 
means for holding the discharge-valve down 
upon its seat; but irrespective of said weight 
the valve will be held on its Seat and main 
tained by gravity against the pressure of Wal 
ter in the bowl, and hence while under the al 
rangement herein shown the gravity of the 
pull-rod, the button, and the Weighted lever is 
added to the gravity of the valve, yet I pro 
pose making the valve of such weight that it 7o 
will by its own weight rest and maintain a 
closed position against the water in the bowl. 
The valve-spindle passes through a bearing, 
W', which is fitted in the casing of the valve 
chamber, and a ground joint for preventing 75 
escape of gas or water is provided. This joint 
is formed by means of a shoulder, U', upon 
the spindle, and an expansion-spring, W., ar 
ranged to act against the inner end of the 
spindle, so as to force the said shoulder against 8c 
the inner end of the bearing, at which a suit 
able seat is provided, whereby the shoulder 
on the spindle, being held by spring-pressure 
against the said seat, will provide at all times 
a tight joint. This spring can be conveniently 85 
arranged on a bearing, W, that is provided 
for the inner end of the spindle, and the said 
bearing can be fitted in one end of or formed 
with the pipe S, that constitutes a portion of 
the passage between the float and the disin- go. 
fecting chambers. 
In conclusion, it will be observed that the 
valve-cock opens against the pressure of the 
water in the Supply-pipe, and hence that when 
the float rises and draws the valve toward its 95 
seat, by reason of the intermediate connec 
tions hereinbefore described, the pressure of 
the water upon the valve will assist in closing 
the same, SO that certainty of action on the 
part of the valve is at all times insured; also, Ioo 
that as the Water is drained off from the cock 
and branch pipe there will be no danger of 
freezing during cold Weather. 
It will be understood that I do not claim, 
broadly, a check-valve seating downward Io5 
upon an inclined seat, but that I confine my 
self to a Water-closet in which an inclined 
seat is arranged between the bowl and the 
soil-pipe, and a check-valve is hung in an en 
larged chamber over the inlet end or mouth IIo 
of the soil-pipe. By such arrangement the 
valve will, by reason of its weight, insure 
with certainty its being seated and held down 
against the pressure of water within the bowl, 
irrespective of any weighted arm that may be II5 
attached to the valve-spindle, which, in the 
case of a vertically-seating valve, cannot al 
ways be relied on. It will also be observed 
that should the Soil-pipe become choked up 
above its mouth the valve can be more read- I2O 
ily raised, or that when it is seated the valve 
chamber can be more easily cleaned, and the 
obstructing matter pushed down the soil-pipe, 
since the inclined top face of the valve forms 
a wall inclining downwardly to the mouth of I25 
the soil-pipe, and thereby leaving no horizon 
talledge between the edge of the valve and 
the said pipe. Where a vertical seat is used, 
and a weighted arm connected with the valve 
spindle solely relied upon to hold the valve 13o 
seated, any disarrangement in the adjustment 
of the parts frequently prevents the valve 
from being closely held upon its seat, and 
hence water Will leak out from the bowl and 
45 
SC 
55 
65 
4. 
306,092 
gas escape from the soil-pipe into the latter. 
It will be seen, however, that where the weight 
of the valve resting on an inclined seat is 
taken advantage of such accidents will not 
OGG?? . 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The combination, with a water-closet, of 
a disinfecting-chamber connected by an open 
passage with the closet at a point between the 
discharge - valve of the closet and the soil 
pipe, so as to have at all times an open com 
munication with the Soil-pipe, whereby each 
discharge through the soil-pipe from any 
source has a tendency to create a vacuum in 
the passage between the disinfecting-chamber 
and the soil-pipe, and thereby induces a cur 
rent of disinfected air from the former into 
the latter, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with a water-closet and 
a soil-pipe, of a disinfecting-chamber connect 
ed with the Soil-pipe by a passage between the 
discharge-valve and soil-pipe, substantially as 
described. 
3. The combination, with a water - closet 
bowl, the soil-pipe, and a discharge-valve situ 
ated between the bowl and the soil-pipe, of a 
disinfecting-chamber communicating with the 
soil - pipe at a point beyond the discharge 
valve, and communicating with the bowl at a 
point back of the said valve, substantially as 
described. 
4. The combination, with a water-closet, the 
soil-pipe, and a discharge-valve situated be 
tween the bowl and the soil-pipe, of a disin 
fecting-chamber connecting with the soil-pipe 
through an open passage, and connecting with 
the bowl through a passage provided with a 
seal, by which the backflow of disinfected air 
from the disinfecting-chamber to the bowl is 
prevented, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with the service-pipe 
for a water-closet bowl, of a valve-stem-pro 
vided with two valves and fitted to work with 
in a drain-passage branching from the service 
pipe, and a float for operating the valve-stem, 
one of said valves being arranged to open 
against the pressure of the Water, and to con 
trol the flow of water to the bowl, and the re 
maining valve being arranged to close the 
drain-passage when the valve for the service 
pipe is open, and to open the drain-passage 
when the said valve for the service-pipe is 
closed, whereby when said valve for the serv 
ice is closed water between the said valve and 
the bowl shall flow off through the drain-pas 
Sage, substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with the service-pipe 
provided with a lateral drain-passage, of a 
valve-stem made angular in CrOSS-Section and 
arranged to work within the drain-passage, 
whereby space for the flow of water is left be 
- 
75 
tween the stem and the walls of the passage, 
said stem being provided with two valves, one 
of which is arranged to open and close the Serv 
ice-pipe, and the other arranged to open and 
close the drain-passage, substantially in the 
manner and for the purpose described. 
7. The combination, in a water-closet, of the 
bowl, with the float-chamber communicating 7o 
with the bowl, and a disinfecting - chamber 
communicating with the float-chamber, to al 
low water that rises above a determinate height 
therein to pass out and flow into the soil-pipe, 
substantially as described. 
S. The combination, in a water-closet, of the 
bowl, with a float - chamber communicating 
with the bowl and with a disinfecting-chamber 
located within a valve-chamber in which the 
dischalge-valve for opening communication 8o 
between the bowl and the soil-pipe is located, 
substantially as described. 
9. The combination, in a water-closet, of a 
bowl, a disinfecting-chamber, a connection be 
tween said bowl, and chamber, and a water 
seal between the disinfecting - chamber and 
bowl, substantially as described. 
10. The combination, in a water-closet, of the 
bowl with a valve-chamber connected with the 
soil-pipe, a valve located between said cham 
ber and a passage leading from the bowl, a float 
chamber communicating with said passages, 
and a disinfecting-chamber located within the 
valve-chamber above the discharge-valve and 
communicating with the float-chamber, sub 
stantially as described. 
11. The combination, with the bowl, of the 
disinfecting-chamber communicating with the 
bowl, the inlet-pipe R, for the disinfecting 
chamber, and forming a chamber inclosing the 
upper end portion of the inlet-pipe, the case 
having an outlet below the top or discharge 
end of said inlet-pipe and above the bottom 
of the disinfecting-chamber, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
12. The swinging valve and its spindle U, 
. in combination with a bearing through which 
the spindle passes, and a ground joint for the 
spindle formed by a shoulder, U", on the spin 
de, and a spring acting so as to hold the said 
shoulder against a seating in the bearing, sub 
stantially as described. 
13. The combination, with the discharge 
valve, of the spindle. U, operated by a pull 
rod, the bushing W, through which the spin 
dle passes, and a ground joint for the spindle 
formed by a shoulder, U, on the spindle, and 
a spring acting against the inner end of the 
spindle, substantially as described. 
IOO 
IO 
OWEN J. MCGANN. 
Witnesses: 
- 
W. W. ELLIOTT, 
CHAS. G. PAGE. 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306192.txt	(No Model.) 
H. H. TRENOR, 
T00L, HEAD EYE. 
No. 306, 192. 
Patented Oct. 7, 1884. 
c 
n 
  
 
e 
e 
, 
2 E 
A. 
3. 
z 4-, 2-, 4 
Zia vez (ez 
M. PerERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washingtar, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY H. TRENOR, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
Tool-HEAD EYE. 
SPECIFICATION formi:g part of Letters Patent No. 306,192, dated October 7, 1884. 
Appication filed March 27, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
45 
. 
In Fig. 2 the ends of the eye are shown con- 6o 
Beit known that I, HENRY H. TRENOR, a with an eye of alternative form. 
near the butt, and Fig. 6 is a plan of a head 
To all w/von, it tally conceri. 
A is the ax-head; B, the haft of the handle; 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
C, the butt, and D the head of the latter. The 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
sides of the eye are shown at ss, and the ends 55 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
of the same at e c, the larger part of the eye 
in Tool-Head Eyes, fully described and repre 
sented in the following specification and the 
being at the outer side of the ax-head, at E, 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of the 
and the smaller part of the eye at the inner 
side of the head, at E. 
- 
Sae. 
This invention consists in the combination, 
with an ax or other tool head, of an eye having verging inward, So as to form a tapering socket, 
parallel sides and tapering ends; and the ob T, to secure the handle without fastenings of 
any kind, while the sides of the eye are shown 
ject of the invention is to adapt the head for 
in Figs. 1 and 3 parallel, for the reasons named 
use with a handle of uniform thickness through 
above: The handleshown herein is not claimed, 65 
15 out, such as I have made the subject of a sepa 
because it is made the subject of a separate 
rate patent application, No. 122,396, filed Feb 
patent application,in which I have claimed the 
ruary 28, 1884. I have heretofore claimed in 
flattening of the butt, as at C, and such a han 
my patent application No. 122,600, allowed to 
dle can obviously be passed through an eye of 
me March 19, 1884, an eye with tapering sides 
the shape described from the outer side, the 7c 
and parallel ends, but have found that such 
butt of the handle being shaped in all such 
construction necessitates the turning of the 
cases So as to go through the smallest part of 
handle in a lathe from a thick stick of wood at 
the eye. As the edges of the handle and its 
an enormous waste of material, while the eye 
butt are rounded, as shown in Fig. 5, the ends 
shown herein enables me to make the head of 
of the eye are preferably rounded, as shown in 7 
the handle of the same thickness as the haft, 
5 
Fig. 1, and the metal around the eye thereby 
and thus to form the handles of planks sawed 
connected most securely with the front and 
to the desired uniform thickness. Such han 
back of the ax-head. The parallelism of the 
dles can be produced with great economy by 
sides may be Tetained in an eye of different 
cutting them first from such flat plank with a 
contour than that just described, as is seen in 
band-saw, and then rounding their front and 
Fig. 6, where the eye is shown more nearly re 
rear edges uniformly from end to end by an 
sembling those used with the old style of 
edging - cutter or levolving molding - tool, 
wedged handles, being thinner at its front end 
whereas the ax or other too handles heretofore 
to avoid enlarging the cheeks of the ax. A 
made with an enlarged butt or thickened head 
finer cutting angle is thus obtained; but the 85 
could only be made by reducing the haft from 
5 3 a stick as thick throughout as such enlarge 
head of the handle requires to be shaped in a 
lathe at greater expense than the flat head 
ment, with a great resulting waste of the mate 
shown in Figs. 2 and 4. 
rial. The form of eye claimed herein is in 
tended for use with a handle adapted to pass 
It will be seen from the above that certain 
advantages result from the use of an eye hav 
entirely through the eye from its larger side 
ing the parallel ends; but it is also found that 
until the head of the handle is jammed fast in 
the punches used in forming the eyes in an ax 
the eye, and the handle thus held therein with 
poll machine are much more cheaply and ac 
out any fastenings, and the shape is shown in 
curately lnade if having two opposite parallel 
the drawings, in which 
sides, the parallel sides of such punches being 
Figure 1 is a plan of an ax-head having my 
filed away slightly toward the point to make 
improvement. Fig. 2 is a side view of the 
them draw out of the hole readily, without, 
head and handle combined. Fig. 3 is an edge 
however, requiring any widening of the han 
view of the back of the ax-head at F. Fig. 4 
dle-head at such opposite parallel sides by 
is an edge view of the handle separate from 
reason of such taper. 
so the head. Fig. 5 is a section of such handle 
So 
2 
306,192 
I have not made herein any general claim to and the width between the ends being great 
an eye having two parallel and two converg- est at the outer side of the head, as at E, so as 
ing sides, for the reason that I have made an- to form a socket with parallel sides and ends 
other specific claim to such an eye having paral- tapering from the outside inward, as and for 
elends and sloping sides in an application, No. the purpose set forth. 
122,600, pending simultaneously here with 
Intestimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
Having thus shown the advantages of my hand in the presence of two subscribing Wit 
improvement both in the manufacture of the messes. 
eye and of the handle for use therewith, I 
claim the same in the following manner: 
The combination, with an ax or other tool 
head, of the oblong eye having two parallel 
sides, as 3 s, and two converging ends, as e c, 
THOS. S. CRANE, 
C. C. HERRICK. 
IC 
HENRY H. TRENOR. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306292.txt	(No Model.) 
T. TAYLOR 
MACHINE FOR TREATING COTTON SEED, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 306,292. 
 
Patented Oct. 7, 1884. 
E22. 
/2 r 
-6-4ttorney o 
(No Model.) 
T. TAYLOR 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR TREATING COTTON SEED, 
No. 306,292, 
 
Patented Oct. 7, 1884. 
2%. 64.4% 
WEWTOR 
%- 
47 
-6-4 Attorney 
(No Model.) 
T TAYLOR. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
MACHINE FOR TREATING COTTON SEED, 
No. 306,292. 
 
Patented 00t, 7, 1884, 
WITWESSES 
26, 2 
s 
ity 
IWWE/WTOR 
"%-nga Ayal 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS TAYLOR, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
MACHINE FOR TREATING COON SEED. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 306,292, dated October 7, 1884. 
Application filed July 8, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
65 
O 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS TAYLOR, of 
Washington, in the District of Columbia, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Machines for Treating Cotton-Seed; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, and 
to the figures and letters of reference marked 
thereon. 
In Iletters Patent of the United States No. 
276,305, granted to me on the 24th day of April, 
1883, I described an improved mode or pro 
cess of treating cotton-seed, consistingin, first, 
drying the seed, then crushing it, so as to si 
multaneously break the hull and pulverize the 
kernel, and then separating the pulverized 
kernel from the hull particles and adherent 
fiber; and in the same patent. I also described 
and illustrated a form of machine by which 
the said process could be carried out. Since 
lny said patent was issued I have been en 
gaged in improving the machinery for carry 
ing out the process, and after a series of prac 
tical tests with machines of different construc 
tion I have adopted the form of machine here 
inafter described because of its cheapness, 
compactness, and general availability. 
I will first describe the said machine at 
length with reference to the accompanying 
drawings, and will then point out its particu 
lar points of novelty in the claims at the end 
of this specification. 
In the said drawings, Figures i and 3 are 
side elevations of the machine, taken from op 
posite sides. Fig. 2 is an end view of the ma 
chine. Figs. 4 and 5 are detail views of the 
blades of the upper feeding-cylinder. Fig. 6 
represents a longitudinal section of the ma 
chine. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of one of 
the upper crushing-rolls. 
Fig. 8 is a plan 
view of a portion of the upper feeding-cylin 
der, showing the arrangement of blades there 
Similar letters of reference in the several fig 
ures indicate the same parts. 
In carrying out my said improved process 
with this new machine, the cotton-seed, after 
having first been properly dried by heat or 
otherwise, is fed into the hopper A at the up 
per end of the machine, whence it passes down 
through the throat at into a chamber, B, in 
which is located a revolving feeding-cylinder, 
C, armed with rows of projecting blades b, ar 
ranged preferably in spiral lines, and so that 
the blades in one row stand opposite the spaces 
between the blades in the next succeeding row, 
as shown in Fig. S. Each of the blades is pro 
vided with a shank, l, adapted to be driven 
into the cylinder C, (which latter is prefera 
bly made of wood,) and with an outer broad 
ened end, b, which may be flat or corrugated, 
but is preferably constructed in concavo-con 
vex form, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5, and set 
so that as the cylinder rotates the concaveside 
is to the front. The ends of the blades extend 
in close proximity to the concentric walls of 
the chamber 13, from which it results that when 
the hopper is filled with seed and the feeding 
cylinderset in motion, only so much of theseed 
as is positively drawn from the throat of the 
hopper by the blades is allowed to be fed down 
and discharged onto the rollers DE, and it may 
be said in passing that the speed of the feeding 
cylinderissoregulated with respect to the speed 
and capacity of the said rolls DE that only 
such annount of seed is supplied to the rolls as 
can be disposed of by the latter without per 
mitting an accumulation of material upon 
them. 
The roll E extends from side to side of . 
the machine, and is mounted so as to turn 
freely in fixed bearings. Its surface is pro 
vided with a number of longitudinal grooves 
or channels, e, which at one edge, e", are pref 
erably rounded, and at the other, e, terminate 
rather abruptly, as shown in Figs. 6 and 7. 
The roll I), on the other hand, though extend 
ing from side to side of the machine, has a 
substantially Snooth surface, and is mounted. 
in sliding boxes (l, behind which are adjust 
ing-screws d and interposed springs d". As 
the seed is delivered onto the rolls I) E a quan 
tity of it is caught in turn in each of the 
grooves of the roll E, and is carried dowri be-, 
tween said roll E and the smooth roll D. The 
depth of the grooves is considerably less than 
the thickness of the seed, and hence as the 
center or point of greatest pressure is reached 
the smooth roll is caused to yield slightly, and 
the space between the rolls being thereby mo 
mentarily increased the superposed layer of 
. 
. 
85 
95 
IOC 
35 
45 
Ol. 
c) 
306,292 
fiber-coated seed is caught between the smooth feed-cylinder, K, ai'illed with lins or teeth. 
The function of this ?eed-cylinder is to evenly 
concave portion e of the roll E and the oppo 
and regularly feed the material to and between 7o 
site surface of the roll) and is drawn down 
a cylinder and concave, MN, as shown, and 
through between the rolls, this operation be 
its teeth are set tangentially and inclined fron 
5 ing, continually repeated while the machine 
the direction of rotation, so that while they 
reniains in motion. The seed in the grooves 
will positively draw the material down to the 
is squeezed so that its hull is cracked and its 
opening between the cylinder and concave 
kernel pulverized into coarse meal, while the 
they will not retain upon them any of the fibel' 
seed that is operated upon by the smooth un 
and become clogged, as they would were they 
IO broken surfaces of the two rolls is also cracked 
set radially or inclined in the opposite lirec 
and its kernel reduced, though more thor 
tion. The function of the cylinder and coll 
oughly and to a greater degree. 
cave is to thoroughly disengage the meal from 
The grooves in the roll E are not designed 
the hull particles and adherent liber. They 
to increase the crushing action of the rolls, ex 
are both serrated or toothed, as shown, and 
I5 cept incidentally, as it has been demonstrated 
the concave is rendered capable of being Set 
in practice that plain smooth rolls are well 
at any desired adjustment by means of Suit 
adapted to effect the desired crushing, but are 
able set-screws, O. For convenience, the Con 
incapable alone of properly feeding or draw 
cave J is mounted or formed upon the concave 
ing the cotton-seed between them when set at 
N, and is adjusted to or from the feed-cylin 
2O the proper distance to crush. This is owing, 
der K, to conform to the adjustment of the 
in a great measure, to the nature of the mate 
serrated concave N with respect to its co-op 
rial to be acted upon and its light adherent 
erating cylinder. Below the cylinder and con 
condition. It is to overcome this difficulty in 
cave is arranged an inclined revolving Screen, 
feeding and at the same time preserve the ad 
S, the upper portion of which is preferably 
25 vantages of the smooth rolls that the grooves 
covered with wire-cloth of finer mesh, while 
of the character described are formed in one 
its lower portion is covered with wire-cloth of 
roll. These grooves are made shallow relative 
larger mesh. On the passage of the material 
to the diameter of the seed in order that the 
from the cylinder and concave into and down 
latter may not be passed through unacted up 
through this revolving screen, the higher grade 
3o on, and are formed with an abrupt shoulder 
of meal is separated out in passing over the 
or wall on the lower side, that the seed may 
finer screen, while the coarser grade is passed 
not fall through, and with the gradually-in 
through the larger meshes at the lower part 
clined or tapering upper wall, that the seeds 
of the screen, the fiber and what hull particles 
may be crushed thereon, instead of being cut. 
have failed to pass through the larger meshes 
35 As the grooves in the roll E approach the op 
of the screen being tailed off at the lower end 
posite roll from above the seeds are received 
of the screen. Suitable hoppers or receivers, 
into the pockets thus formed, the space being 
IP Q, are placed beneath the different sections 
increased at this point between the proximate 
of the screen for the purpose of collecting the 
faces of the rolls. The lower shoulder pre 
4o vents any seed from passing entirely through, 
different grades of meal. 
While I have only shown two sizes of wire 
and as the rolls continue to revolve the mate 
upon the screen, it is obvious that the number 
rial, which is more or less matted and held to 
may be increased so as to divide the meal pro 
gether by the fiber, is drawn down into the 
duct into a greater number of grades. 
lbite of the rolls, the incline of the upper wall 
Motion is preferably imparted to both sets 
45 of the groove permitting the crushing action 
of rolls through a series of gears driven from 
to continue without effecting at once a separa 
a gear, R, mounted on the fly-wheel shaft S, 
tion of the material in the grooves from the 
that is provided with a large pulley, and is 
mass resting above and more or less connected 
driven from the main power-belt T. The lat 
by the fiber. After the material has passed 
ter also, through suitable pulleys, drives the 
so through between the upper rolls, DE, it de 
toothed cylinder M and the shaft U, which 
scends between guides FF onto and between 
imparts motion through suitable bevel-pinions 
the Second pair of rolls, GH, which are mount 
to the reel or screen. The upper feed-cylin 
ed in the same manner as the upper pair of 
der, C, receives motion from the shaft of the 
rolls, and only differ from the latter in con 
toothed cylinder M through a belt, W, and 
55 struction in that the roll H has fewer and 
suitable gearing, as shown in Fig. 3, while the 
shallower longitudinal channels or grooves 
lower feed-cylinder is driven by a belt, W, 
than the roll Eaboveit, so as to afford agreater 
from a pulley on the shaft S. 
area of smooth surface for acting upon and 
The revolving screen is preferably covered 
crushing or grinding the kernel. The lower 
by a suitable casing, X. 
6c pair of rolls are adjustable closer together than 
While this machine has been especially de 
the upper pair, and operate to reduce the ker 
signed for the grinding of cotton-seed and the 
nel to much finer meal and to break and grind 
separation of its ground kernel or meal from 
up finer the hull particles. Passing from the 
the hull particles and adherent fiber, it is also 
Second pair of rolls, the material descends into 
adapted to the grinding of sorghum, corn, oats, 
65 a Space O Compartment bounded on one side 
and other grain. This adaptability renders 
by an inclined wall, I, and on the other by a 
it possible for a planter with a single machine 
concave wall, J, and containing a rotating 
- 
90 
95 
IOC 
IC 
II. 
12 
I 2 
m 
306,292 
3. 
 
4O. 
45 
4. In the herein (lescribed slatilise 
to prepare not only cotton-seed meal in a clean 
and pure state free from fiber and hull parti-crushing or grinding cotton-seed, and in coln 
cles for stock-feeding or fertilizing purposes, bination with the crushing-rolls and serrated 
but also to grind for his stock the oats, corn, cylinder and concave thereof, the rotary feed 
and other grains which he ordinarily has to ing-cylinder having its teeth set tangentially, 
send to a distant mill to be ground. 
as described, and the chamber in which said 
Having thus described my invention, what I feeding-cylinder works, having one side in 
claim as new is- 
| clined and the other curved and concentric 
1. As a means for effecting a continuous and with the feeding-cylinder, substantially as de 
uniform feed of cotton-seed, and in combina- scribed. 
5. The combination, with the feeding-cylin 
tion with a hopper or receptacle and the curved 
feeding-chamber, the revolving cylinder pro- der having the tangentially-arranged teeth, 
vided with a series of blades whose broad the chamber in which said cylinder is lo 
curved faces are arranged longitudinally of cated, the serrated cylinder and concave, the 
the cylinder, substantially as described. 
latter being adjustable and carrying the 
2. In a machine for crushing or grinding curved wall of the feeding-cylinder chamber, 
cotton-seed, the combination of an upper pair whereby the adjustment of the serrated con 
of rolls, one of which is smooth and the other cave also effects the adjustment of the concave 
of which is provided with a series of longitudi- side of said feeding-cylinder-chamber, substan 
nal grooves having abrupt shoulders, such as tially as described. 
described, and plain surfaces between the 
6. The herein-described machine for crush 
grooves, with a second pair of rolls arranged ing or grinding cotton-seed, consisting of the 
beneath the first-mentioned pair, and the one hopper and upper feeding-cylinder having the 
smooth and the other having longitudinal broad blades, the pairs of crushing-rolls con 
grooves shallower than those of the corre- sisting each of a smooth roll and a grooved 
sponding upper roll and less in number, leav- roll, such as described, the lower feeding cyl 
ing wider plain surfaces between the grooves, inder having the tangentially-arranged teeth, 
all operating substantially as deseribed. 
the serrated cylinder and concave, and the 
3. In the herein - described machine for revolving screen, the whole constructed and 
crushing and grinding cotton-seed, the con- arranged substantially as described. 
bination, with the co-operating crushing-rolls, 
of the rotary toothed feeding-cylinder arranged 
beneath said rolls, and the serrated cylinder 
and concave, substantially as described, for 
the purpose set forth. 
FRED F. CHURCH, 
CHAS. R. BURR. 
THOMAS TAYLOR. 
Witnesses: 
IO 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306392.txt	(No Model.) 
F. J. FOLSOM, 
PLOW ATTACHMENT, 
No. 306,392, 
w 
Patented 00 t, l4, 1884, 
M. 
a 
S. 
  
c. 7 sa1. 
TL:25 - Z 
a : 
- S1 29 
AS332 
WITNESSES 
4x6456 
a 6 Wizza, 
fiefs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
INVENTOR, 
zig-Wi 
ATTORNEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS J. FOLSOM, OF EAST LIVERMORE, MANE. 
PLOW ATAC - V. E. N. 
SEPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 306,392, dated October 14, 1884. 
Application filed May 26, 1884. 
(No model.) 
to 
20 
25 
To ?ult, who in it naily concern: 
the United States, residing at East Livermore, 
in the county of Androscoggin and State of 
Maine, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Plow Attachments; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in sulky-plow attachments; and it consists in 
the construction and novel arrangement of de 
vices, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
forth, and particularly pointed out in the 
claim appended. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
cheap and simple means whereby the plow 
may be conveniently adjusted and canted by 
the driver or operator. These objects I accom 
plish by the mechanism shown and illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a view of the plow detached, 
and Fig. 3 is a view of the angle-lever detached. 
Referring by letter to the said drawings, A 
indicates the main frame, which consists, es 
Sentially, of the pole a, axle-beam b, and di 
agonal brace-bar c. The axle-beam b is pro 
vided at one end with the spindle B, to receive 
the supporting-wheel C, and the opposite end 
is provided with a hook, d, to engage an eye, 
D, on the plow-beam E. The diagonal beam 
or brace-bar c is designed to support the 
driver's seat, the beam e of which is bifur 
cated at its lower end, as shown at f to strad 
dle the said diagonal bar and engage by their 
forward sides a stop-pin, g, passing laterally 
through the said diagonal bar. The seat-beam 
e is provided with a brace-arm, h, which is 
perforated at its lower end to engage a verti 
cal stud or pin in the diagonal brace-ball to 
prevent lateral displacement, and the seat F 
lmay be plOvided with an extension or other 
suitable means for receiving the wheel-fender 
i. The diagonal brace-bar c is also provided 5o 
Beit known that I, F. J. FOLSOM, a citizen of in front of the seat-beam with a vertically 
pivoted hand-lever, G, which is provided at 
its lower end with a hooked rod, H, designed 
to engage the forward portion of the plow 
beam to move the same to or from the pole or 5 
5 
draft-beam. 
I indicates an angle-lever, which is pivoted 
at its angle in a suitable bearing, k, in the 
draft-beam, having its hand-lever extending 
back within convenient reach of the operator, 6o 
and the short forward arm K is provided at 
its outer end with a chain, l, leading down and 
connected to the forward end of the plow 
beam, Whereby the same may be adjusted ver 
tically. The draft-beam is provided with a 
hook, L, to engage the forward portion of the 
hand-lever m, to hold the same when thrown 
rearwardly and downwardly to raise the for 
Ward end of the plow-beam. 
M. indicates a vibrating spring ratchet-le 
ver, which may be connected at its inner end 
to the axle-bar by a swivel-joint and a spiral 
or other suitable spring, n, for holding its 
outer end, carrying a notched or ratchet plate, 
N, in engagement with a vertical post, P. ris- 75 
ing from the plow - standard. The spring 
ratchet-lever M is supported about midway 
its length by a short vertical post, S, which 
is pivoted at its lower end to the lear end of 
the draft - beam, and provided with a stay So 
chain or rope, R, which is connected to the 
draft-bean. 
The plow may be of any ordinary construc 
tion, and provided with handles for the oper 
ator, or the driver may cant and adjust the 
plow without leaving his seat by manipulating 
the levels, which are within convenient reach. 
From the foregoing description the opera 
tion of my invention will be obvious. It will 
be seen that when the lever in of the angle 
lever is released from the hook L. On the draft 
beam the plow may be run at its greatest, 
depth, and when shallow plowing is desired 
the operator should simply engage the lever 
m with the hook I of the draft-beam, the lat 
eral adjustment being effected by the vertical 
level G, and the canting by post or lever P 
and the spring ratchet-bar, 
- 
90 
95 
45 
2 
306,392 
Having thus described my invention what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters presence of two witnesses. 
Patent, is 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in Io 
In a sulky-plow, the combination, with the 
5 main frame having the hook to engage the eye 
or loop on the plow-beam, of the pivoted 
spring ratchet-bar, vertical post P, hinge 
post S, and its stay - chain, substantially as 
specified. 
Witnesses: 
JESSEM. LIBBY, 
JAMEs H. STANTON. 
FRANCIS J. E.OLSOMI. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306492.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 306,492. 
G. W. JACKMAN, 
SCREW. 
Patented Oct. 14, 1884, 
 
N. PeFeis, Foto-Khorapher, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. JACKMAN, OF LITTLETON, NEW HAMPSHIRE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 306,492, dated October 14, 1884. 
Application filed February 16, 1884. (No model.) - 
- 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. JACKMAN, 
To all athlon, it inctly conce/7 : 
head as that shown in Fig. 2, but with a dif 
ferent mode of widening the nicks at the bot- 45 
of the village of Littleton, in the county of tom, and thereby diminishing the thickness 
Grafton and State of New Hampshire, have of the base of the spine, and also with the ex 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
tremities of the jaws of the screw-driver made 
Wood-Screws, of which the following is a speci 
to correspond with these variations in the 
fication. 
nicks and spine. In this figure, a c indicate 
The invention relates to the means by which 
the nicks, b the spine, bits crown, and bits 
screws may be grasped and held by the screw 
base, and fifthe extremities of the jaws of the 
driver; and it consists of a screw having two 
Screw-drive'. 
nicks of sufficient depth across the head of the 
It will be observed that Figs. 2 and 3 rep 
screw, contiguous to each other, and widened at 
resent the spine as being diminished in thick 
the bottom, each in the direction of the other, so 
lness at its base by rectangular cuts into its 
as to leave intact an intermediate portion of 
sides; but this mode of accomplishing the de 
the screw - head extending across the latter 
sired end, which is that of giving a firmlhold 
through its greatest diameter, and forming a 
to the screw-driver upon the spine, is not es 
spine widel at its crown than at its base, in 
sential; but this may be accomplished in the 
such manner that the jaws of the screw-driver 
way indicated in Fig. 4, or by corrugating the 
may be inserted into the nicks and closed upon 
sides of the spine, or in any other convenient 
the Spine. 
way. The essential thing is such a construc 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
tion of the spine, substantially as indicated, as 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
to give the required tenacity and firmness to 
Figure 1 represents the upper surface of the 
the hold of the screw-driver. 
head of the screw, the same being indicated 
The advantages claimed for this invention 
by the letter A, the nicks by the letters a a, 
are, in part, the greater facility thereby of. 
and the spine by the letter b. 
fered for grasping, holding, and controlling 
Fig. 2 represents a section of the head of 
the screw and forcing it into position, and the 
the screw transverse to the spine and nicks, 
diminution of the liability of the head of the 
and shows the Spine engaged by the jaws of 
screw to break by bringing the greater part 
the screw - driver, A indicating the screw 
of the strain of driving upon the spine, which 
head, a ( the nicks, l the spine, of which b' 
by its formation and position is best capable 
is the crown, and b the base, and c e the jaws 
of bearing it, while at the same time a part of 
of the screw-driver. 
the strain is distributed to the portions of the 
Fig. 3 represents an entire screw and screw 
screw-head outside the nicks, thus giving four 
driver, the former being grasped by the latter. 
bearings to the screw-driver. 
In this figure, Aindicates the head of the screw, 
What is claimed as new and patentable in 
B, the blank, and C the threaded portion. (, a 
this invention is- 
are the nicks, and b the spine. D indicates 
A screw having two nicks, a cl, in the head, 
the screw-driver, of which e is the handle, if 
and a spine, b, all substantially as described. 
f the jaws, f' f" notches in the extremities 
GEORGE W. JACKMAN. 
thereof, of a lever for opening the jaws, and 
h a slide for confining the end of the lever. 
Fig. 4 represents a like section of the screw 
EDWARD JORDAN, 
JAMES HILLHOUSE. 
Witnesses: 
- 
- 
55 
65 
75 
TO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306592.txt	(No Model.) 
A, DE LASKI. 
SUPPLEMENTAL, JAW ATTACHMENT FOR, HAND SCREWS, 
No. 306,592, 
Patented Oct. 14, 1884, 
 
 
|- * - 
N. feters, Photo 
Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
/fety vesses 
4C 2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT DE LASKI, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SUPPL EVENTA JAW ATTAC - if ENT FOR - AM D S CREWS. 
$5CIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 306,592, dated October 14, 1884. 
Application filed February 15, 188i. (No model.) 
O 
25 
to all tuhon, it may concern, 
Lynn, in the county of Essex and State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Supplemental Jaw Attachments for 
Hand-Screws, &c., of which the following is a 
Specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a supplemental jaw attachment for hand 
screws, vises, and equivalent clamping devices, 
whereby objects of various forms may be se 
curely held. 
The invention consists in the provision of a 
pivoted jaw or jaws adapted to be adjusted 
to any desired angle with relation to the main 
jaw or jaws, and means, as hereinafter de 
Scribed and claimed, for supporting said piv 
oted jaw or jaws in any position to which they 
lnay be adjusted, so that said pivoted jaws 
Will be practically rigid when in use. 
The invention also consists in the provision 
of a plate or holder, to which the supplemental 
jaw is pivoted, Said plate being adapted to 
be detachably connected to one of the main 
jaWS by the connections hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
The invention also consists in certain de 
tails of construction, all of which I will now 
proceed to describe and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a side elevation of a hand screw or clamp pro 
Vided with my improvements. Fig. 2 repre 
Sents a longitudinal section of the same. Fig. 
3 represents a perspective view of the attach 
ment. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 represent sectional 
views of one of the main jaws. 
Fig. 7 repre 
Sents a modification. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
Same parts in all the figures. 
In the drawings, at a represent the jaws of a 
hand-Screw of the ordinary general construc 
tion, and bl represent the screws which con 
nect said jaws in the usual manner. 
In carrying out my invention I provide 
plates or holders did, adapted to be detachably 
Secured to the jaws a (, in any suitable man 
ner, preferably by means of lugs i. i., formed 
On the back of each plate, and groovesi, formed 
in the main jaws a to receive said lugs. Said 
lugs and grooves may be T-shaped in cross 
section, as shown in Fig. 5, or laterally ar 
ranged, as shown in Fig. 6, so that the en 
Be it known that I, ALBERT DE LASKI, of gagement of the lugs with the grooves will re 
tain the plate d in contact with the jaw (t. 
When the lugs and grooves are not adapted 
by their form to prevent the plate from being 
laterally separated from the jaw, the plate 
may have lugs i' i' at its edges adapted to bear 
against the sides of the jaw a, said lugs i' be 
ing screwed to the jaw. In either case the 
plate dis adapted to be readily applied to and 
removed from the jaw a, so that the latter can 
be used without the attachment, if preferred. 
e e represent the supplemental jaws, which 
are pivoted at e'e' to the plates did, and are 
adapted to be inclined at any desired angles 
with relation to said plates. 
ff represent segmental arms or braces, 
which are pivoted at ff' to the supplemental 
jaws, and project through slots in the plates 
d d and jaws a ca. Said arms or braces are 
provided with ratchet-teeth it on their convex 
sides. Said teeth are caused by springs in on 
the back sides of the supplementaljaws to press 
the toothed sides of the arms or braces f against 
corresponding teeth, t, formed at the ends of 
the slots in the plates d, through which the 
allins or braces pass, said springs in bearing 
against offsets.f, formed on the arms f. The 
teeth t are formed to slip on the teeth t when 
the arms or braces fare being drawn outwardly 
to increase the angle of the supplemental jaws 
With relation to the fixed jaws; but when in 
Ward pressure is exerted on the supplemental 
jaws the teeth t and t become engaged and , 
resist Slch pressure. It will be seen, there 
fore, that either of the supplemental jaws can 
be readily adjusted to any desired angle with 
the main jaw, to which it is applied, and is 
positively held against inward pressure by its 
brace fat any angle to which it may be ad 
justed. The hand-screw can therefore be 
adapted to hold triangular, wedge-shaped, or 
other objects having opposite sides which are 
not parallel. 
It is obvious that only one of the jaws a may 
be provided with this attachment, as shown 
in Fig. 7. 
The brace or armf may be pivoted either 
to the inner or to the outer end of the supple 
mental jaw. 
If preferred, the plate or holder d may be 
reversible, so that it may be applied to the 
- 
45 
50 
55 
75 
SO 
90 
95 
- 
LOO 
T 
2 
306,592 
IO 
jaw (, with the brace f either at its inner or 
its outer end. 
This improvement is applicable to vises and 
other clamping-tools as well as to hand-screws. 
The supplemental jaws may be faced with 
rubber or other yielding material to prevent 
injury to polished surfaces of articles held 
thereby. 
I claim 
1. An attachment for a jaw of a hand-screw 
or equivalent clamping device, said attach 
ment consisting of a plate or holder adapted 
to be detachably secured to said jaw, a sup 
plemental jaw pivoted to said plate or holder, 
and a toothed adjustable brace pivoted to the 
supplemental jaw and adapted to engage by 
its teeth with a detent and hold the supple 
mental jaw at any desired angle with relation 
to the plate or holder, as set forth. 
2. The improved clamping-jaw attachment 
consisting of the plate or holder d, adapted to be 
Secured to a clamping jaw, a, the supplemental 
jaw e, pivoted at one end to said plate, the 
notched bracef, pivoted to the supplemental 
jaw and provided with a spring, whereby its 
toothed face is pressed against a tooth or shoul 
der on the plated, as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the main jaw 
having a longitudinal groove or slot, of the 
plate or supplemental jaw-holder, adapted to 
enter said groove, and provided on its back 
with a lug or lugs, i, adapted to enter said 
groove, and at its edges with lugs i i", adapted 
to bear against the sides of the main jaw, as 
set forth. 
Intestimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses, this 13th day of Febru 
ary, 1884. 
ALBERT DE LASKI. 
Witnesses: 
C. F. BROWN, 
A. L. WHITE. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306692.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 306,692, 
M. E. KNIGHT, 
CT, ASP. 
Patented Oct. 14, 1884. 
WITNESSES : 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARGARET E. KNIGHT, OF ASHLAND, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CLASP. 
c 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 306,692, dated October 14, 1884. 
Application filed July 28, 1884, (No model.) 
O 
2 5 
35 
To all twhon it may conce7n: 
IBeit known that I, MARGARET E. KNIGHT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Ash 
land, in the county of Middlesex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Clasps for Robes and Textile 
Fabrics, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to an improved device 
for clasping one or more thicknesses of robes 
or textile fabric for the purpose of holding 
the same in any required position, either as a 
detached clasp for uniting the otherwise free 
edges of said robe or sheet of fabric or as a 
means of attachment from the end of a flexible 
connection to a fixed point, or from said con 
nection provided with means for securing its 
Other end. 
Myinvention is fully illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which Figure 1 shows my 
invention applied as a means of securing a robe 
or blanket to a vehicle and around the person 
of an occupant. Fig. 2 is a perspective view 
inside elevation of my device, having therefrom 
a flexible connection; and Fig. 3 is a partial sec 
tion of the same, showing the jaws grasping a 
single sheet of textile fabric. 
A B are spring opposing jaws, consisting of 
loops lying in the same or parallel planes when 
in an operative position, and adapted to have 
the outer perimeter of one constitute a bind 
ing-surface with the inner edge of the other of 
corresponding configuration, and adapted to 
have one received within the other to inclose 
one or more layers of a flexible sheet, to bind 
the same between the corresponding clamp 
ing-edges of the jaws, and to cause the conn 
pressed sheet or sheets to form a bight over 
the loop of the larger jaw. In Fig.2 saidjaws 
are shown removed, and in Fig. 3 the Same are 
shown in operative position. 
a b are arms from the loop-jaws AB, and 
adapted to permit the one, A, to be received 
within the one, 13. 
C is a cross-head uniting the arms (, b. The 
arm b is rigidly secured at c to the head C, and 
is prolonged to form in rear of said head an 
eye, d, and a binding - spring, h. The cross 
head is formed of two walls, between which, 
and intermediate to the arms (, b, plays the 
binding-spring h. One end of arm (t, is full 
crunned between the walls of head C, and is 
provided, in contact with spring h, with an 
angular cam, i, adapted, in connection with the 
binding-spring, to cause the jaw A. to be held 55 
widely distended or thrown from a certain 
point of distention to be held in a closed posi 
tion, as seen in Fig. 3, where E represents a 
single thickness of fabric held between the 
clamp-jaws. 
e e are serrated edges upon the jaws A, B, 
giving said jaws an increased holding-power. 
It is immaterial to the spirit of my inven 
tion which of the opposing jaws is received 
within the other, as either the movable or the 65 
fixed one may be the larger, or how the bind 
ing-spring, operating in conjunction with the 
movable jaw, is constructed or arranged, the 
essential feature of the invention being a hinged 
spring-actuated loop jaw adapted to operate 
in combination with a fixed loop-jaw, for the 
purpose described. 
The clasp thus provided forms an exceed 
ingly strong easily-operated means of Securing 
a horse-cover under the animal's neck Or to 75 
any part of the harness, as well as a clasp 
eminently useful in numerous other instances 
where a detached clamp is needed. 
In Fig. 2 a portion of a flexible connection, 
H, is shown attached to the eyed, by means of SO 
which the clasp may be permanently secured 
to any object, to have through said connection 
any l'equired latitude of movement. 
In Fig. 1 a flexible connection, H, is shown 
fixed to a buggy, to have the clasp upon its 85 
free end hold the robe upon one side of a per 
son driving, a clasp similarly arranged serv 
ing to secure the other side of said lobe, to 
leave it smoothly spread over the person to 
require no part of the attention. 
By making the connection H also elastic a 
freedom of movement will be given the per 
son inclosed by a carriage-robe without a dis 
placement of the same. 
Now, having described my invention, what 95 
I claim is 
1. The within-described clasp for holding 
lobes or fabrics, consisting of two Spring-Op 
posed jaws in the form of loops adapted to be 
received one within the other, to lie, when so IOC 
closed, in the same or contiguous approxi 
mately parallel planes, two arms having said 
loops for their free ends and arranged there 
with to permit one loop to pass within the 
9O 
s 
306,692 
s 
(othel', as described, a spring formed upon the jaw, and means, Substantially as described, 
prolongation of said arms from their loop ends, for operating the pivoted jaw. 
and operating in a direction to hold the loops 
3. The improved clasp for robes and textile 
upon the other ends of said arms together, and fabrics, consisting of looped interlocking jaws 
5 a hinge combined and arranged with said jaw- A B, arms (t b, cross-head C, cam i, binding 
actuating Spring and adapted to permit said spring h, and eye d, as a means of attachment 
jaws to be manually distended, all combined to a flexible connection, all combined and op- 20 
and operating as and for the purpose set forth. erating as and for the purpose described. 
... The impl o ed glasp ?o robes and textile 
IO fabrics, consisting of two opposing loop jaws 
adapted to lave one received within the other, 
as Set forth, provided with contiguous serrated 
edges, and having one fixed and one pivoted 
JOHN C. HASTINGs, 
GEORGE C. TRAWIS. 
Witnesses: 
I5 
ex fi 
MIARGARET E. RNIGHT. 
r 
r 
" 
-frn 
o r 
ar 
Att 
f 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306792.txt	(No Model.) 
S, WHEELAND. 
WELL DRILLING APPARATUS, 
No. 306,792. 
  
 
C 
3. Z 
22nd SS 4 
4tay 
y 
-4- 
Patented 00t, 21, 1884, 
 
A. 
i - 
(Azizzo-esses 32, 4.3% air 
perers, photo-Lithographer, Washing 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMIEN WHEELAND, OF BROWNS VILLE, MISSOURI. 
WELL-DRILLING APPARATUS. 
3.21.33E-ICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 306,792, dated October 21, 1884. 
Application filed July 17, 1884. (No model.) 
Zo (t// whof it inctly conce77 : 
Be it known that I, SIMEN WHEELAND, of 
Brownsville, in the county of Saline and State 
of Missouri, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvementsin Well-Drilling Apparatus; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form apart of this specification. 
The object of this improvement is an effi 
cient well-drilling appliance. The invention 
consists in the peculiar construction and ar 
rangement of the parts, as will be hereinafter 
fully explained and specifically claimed, refer 
ence being had to the drawings here with filed 
as part hereof, in which the same letters of 
reference denote the same parts in the differ 
ent views. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a well-drill 
embodying the features of my improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional end elevation of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of one of the parts 
detached. Fig. 4 is a top view of one of the 
parts detached. 
A A' A' represent a frame provided with 
Vertical extensions Act, and a circular open 
ing fitting over a cylindrical vertical exten 
sion, B, of a base-frame, B B", on which the 
frame A A' A' is arranged to revolve for a 
purpose hereinafter set forth. 
C is a vertical beam, tenoned at its lower end 
to a transverse beam, C, having journals c, 
by means of which, with straps C, it is flexi 
bly connected to the vertical extension A. 
3 represents metal braces for additionally 
Securing the connection of the vertical beam 
C to the transverse beam C, and a is a Z 
shaped metal brace for securing the position 
of the parts to whichitis connected, as shown. 
ID is a pulley secured to the upper part of 
the beam C by means of metal arbor D, to re 
ceive and act as a bearing for the rope D', con 
necting with the well-drill (not shown) and 
With an automatically adjustable link or frame, 
H', by means of a clamp, H, secured to the 
rope D, and to the link H. by means of bolts 
I. 
E is a shaft provided at its outer end with a 
double cam, H, for a purpose hereinafter set 
forth, and with disks FF, which serve as guards 
for winding the rope D', and elevating the drill 
from the well as occasion may require. The 
shaft Erevolves in bearings e e, secured to ver 
tical extensions ('A' of the revolving frame 
A A' A'. 
E is a gear-wheel seculed to the inner end 
of the shaft E, and arranged to mesh with a 
pinion, G', secured to a shaft, G, having a 
wheel, A', rigidly affixed to its outer end, as 
shown, and arranged to revolve in a swivel 
metal bearing, G", secured to the frame A' A', 
near its Outer end, and an adjustable metal 
bearing, K, affixed to the transverse beam a, 
and having a slotted extension, K", for a pur 
pose hereinafter set forth. 
His a metal frame or link, flexibly connect 
ed to the lateral extension (I' (t' of the revolw 
ing frame by a pivot-bolt, h, and provided 
with a friction-roller, h". The vertical beam 
C has a metal addition, C C, having a pivot, 
C", for the reception of a perforated plate, M, 
having radial hooked projections MI M. M. 
L. L. L are guy-ropes for steadying the ma 
chilne. 
K is a lever connecting by means of a link, 
k, with the adjustable bearing K for the shaft 
G, for the purpose of putting the pinion G' on 
the shaft G out of gear with the pinion E on 
the shaft E, and in gear with the pinion or 
idle-gear G', for the purpose of thereby re 
versing the motion of the shaft E, and elevat 
ing the drill from the well by winding the rope 
D' thereon, the latter being previously disen 
gaged from the clamp H", and secured to the 
disk. F by means of staple or hook affixed 
thereto, as shown at f. 
The mechanism. is put in operation by one 
or more draft-animals connected through the 
usual single or double tree to the ring-bolt N. 
on the frame-extension A, and driven in a 
circuit around the vertical extension B of the 
base frame or platform B'B', which is to be 
rigidly secured in position by any suitable 
means. As the frame A A' A' moves around 
the platform-extension B, the wheel A will 
revolve and give motion to the shaft G, and 
through the gearing G' E to the shaft E, pro 
vided at its outer end with the double cam H, 
which will pass through the link or frameH, 
and periodically engage with friction-roller h", 
affixed to the link H', flexibly connected to 
v 
55 
6 
5 
SO 
9O 
95 
IOC) 
IO 
25 
45 
s 
306,792 
the frame-extension (t (t', and by bealing the 
same downward elevate the well-drill ultil the 
ends H" of the cam H. pass the roller h", when 
the drill will drop with the usual effect. As 
the drilling progresses, the rope D'' is lowered 
through the clamp H", as occasion may re 
(uire. When the work is done, the flexibly 
connected vertical extension C is lowered on 
the part A A' A' for convenience of transport 
ing, for which purpose the parts II H may 
be disengaged from the frame-work and from 
each other. 
Having explained the construction and op 
eration of my improvement, what I claim as 
new, and desire to securely Letters Patent, 
lS 
1. The double cam II, and links H II, and 
IO 
the driving-frame A A' A', provided with 
vertical extension C, and geared shafting GE, 
all arranged to operate substantially as speci 
fied, for the purpose set forth. 
2. The frame B'B', provided with cylindri 
cal vertical extension B, in combination with 
the frame AA A', and superstructure, ar 
ranged to operate as specified, for purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
SIMIEN WHEELANI). 
Witnesses: 
A. ARMSTRON (;, 
W. H. REAWIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306892.txt	(No Model.) 
G. ANDERSON, 
SGRUBBER FOR GAS, 
. No. 306,892. 
Patented Oct. 21, 1884. 
Z 
2. 
6 
. 
2 
 
/2 
A. 
as 
Z. 
Zresses. 
ca - Coea. 
Z72avezz-foz 
survi A.S.-As 
writ - 
-Zozzeys - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE ANDERSON, OF WESTMINSTER, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO WILLIAM. H. CHAPPELL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, 
SCRUBBER FOR GAS. 
: P. Gigi AION forming part of letters Patent No. 306,892, dated October 21, 1884. 
Application filed March 26, 1SS3. (No model.) Patented in Englai.d August 12, 1875, No. 2,843. 
the opposite side with an eduction-pipe, the 
To all vivon, it 7-Clf concept 
Be it known that I, GEORGE ANDERSON, a orifices of both these pipes b being upon a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid: level with the top of the liquid reservoir of 
ing in the city of Westminster, England, have the chamber. The eduction-pipe of one cham 
5 invented certain new and useful Improve-ber extends to and constitutes the induction 
ments in Scrubbers for Gas; and I do hereby pipe of the next chanber above, the top cham 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ber being furnished with a suitable pipe for 
exact description of the invention, sufficient connecting to the main. 
To one end of the axles of each of the brush 
to enable other's skilled in the art to which it 
drums is attached a miter gear-wheel, e, which 
IO. pertains to make and use the same, reference 
meshes in a companion wheel, e, on the driv 
being had to the accompanying drawing, form 
ing-shaft e, and by this means revolution is 
ing part of this specifieation. 
The object of my improvement is to pro 
imparted to the several drums of the series. 
At the top of the scrubber is placed a deliv 
vide an apparatus which shall thoroughly free 
ery seal-pipe, l, of ordinary construction, by 
15 illuminating-gas from tarry vapors, ammonia 
means of which liquid enters the uppermost 
gas, and other like deleterious agents which 
impair its illuminating quality; and this ob 
reservoir of the series and passes in turn by 
Overflow through connecting-pipes b to each 
ject I have accomplished by the scrubberbere 
of the reservoirs B, thence to the pans d'a, 7o 
imafter described, illustrated in the accompa. 
and so continuing until it discharges through 
2O nying drawing, and particularly defined in the 
siphon-pipe l' at level of the pan a, showing 
claims at the end of the specification. 
thereby that the scrubber is filled and ready 
Upon a suitable base of masonry is placed 
what I designate the 'preliminary washer' 
A. This washer consists of the water-pans a 
25 and a', which are provided with deflection 
plates (t, and sustain such relation to each 
other that when the gas enters through the 
delivery-pipe (it will be forced by the plates 
to pass through the water of each pan until it 
so escapes through the pipe a' into the first of 
the series of cleaning-chambers of the scrub 
ber. Each of these cleaning-chambers con 
sists of a liquid-reservoir, B, above which are 
journaled the cleaning-drums C in such posi 
35 tion that when the reservoirs are filled with 
water or other purifying liquid the periphery 
of the drums will dip somewhat below the 
surface of the same. These drums may be 
formed of any suitable material, preferably 
wood, and their entire peripheries covered 
with the brush D of whalebone or other 
coarse fiber, securely held in place by a cem 
ent which will not be acted upon by the solv-, 
ent properties of the gas. The bottom of each 
liquid-chamber, except the lowest, is curved, 
as shown, to conform to the brush, which fits 
closely beneath the same, so that the gas inits 
passage through each chamber must pass over 
each drum and through the fibers of each 
So brush. Each cleaning-chamber is provided 
on one side with an induction-pipe and upon 
be seen that when the several reservoirs have 
been filled with purifying-liquid, and motion 
has been imparted to the driving-shaft, the 
fibers of the brush-drums will be kept constant 
ly wet. As the gas to be purified is forced 
through the preliminary washer A, it is freed 
from its tarry impurities, and, passing through 
the pipe Clinto the lowest cleansing-chamber, 
is caused to travel above the top of the drum 
and through the wet fibers of the brush until 
it escapes through the eduction-pipe of such 
chamber into the one above, and so on through 
the scrubber. As fresh liquid is constantly 
added to the top chamber, it overflows and 
passes out by the pipe b into the chamber be 
low, and thus from chamber to chamber until 
it is drawn from the preliminary washer. The 
motion given to the drums is in a direction 
contrary to that in which the gas is passing, 
thus causing it to be acted upon by a fresh 
surface of wet fibers, which take up its im 
purities and deposit them in the water as the 
drums revolve. When there is no mechanical 
power, the motion of the gas may be used to 
turn the drums; but in this case the brushes 
- must revolve in the direction of the moving 
gas, and their action will not be as efficient. 
From the construction above set forth it will 75 
90 
for use. 
w 
- 
55 
IOO 
306,892 
5 
O 
5 
The brush-drums of each cleaning-chanber 
should be so constructed that the gas cannot 
pass from the inlet-pipe on one side to the out 
let-pipe on the opposite side without passing 
l'ound the upper part of the brush. This is 
effected either by having the drum close at the 
circumference and lower edge. dipping into 
the water, as shown, or bars may be attached 
across the drum - say six in the circumfer 
ence, so that before one leaves the water at 
least one other will have entered, and thus 
formed a partition across the vessel sealed in 
the liquid to prevent the gas passing under the 
crum. 
In the drawing, five brushes are shown, 
placed vertically over each other; but they 
may be placed horizontally to each other, with 
only sufficient clevation, the one above the 
other, for the liquid to pass from the highest 
to the lowest bluish, and the number of brushes 
may be increased or diminished and their di 
lmensions altered according to the quantity of 
gas to be purified; but I prefer to have the 
brushes placed as shown in the drawing. 
The fiber of which the brush is made should 
not be too fine, whalebone, such as is used in 
stable brushes, being found suitable for the 
purpose. 
It is obvious that in many instances the 
brush portion of the scrubber may be advan 
tageously employed without the preliminary 
Washer; but in most cases, especially where 
the gases have been but imperfectly condensed, 
the use of the washer is preferable, as it serves 
to catch the tar in the bottom, and thus pre 
Vent a clogging of the brushes. 
It will be noticed that the external casing 
of the scrubber' is made up of separable sec 
tions, each containing one brush, and connected 
in any suitable manner at the points (, thus 
permitting the numbel' of brushes of a ma 
chine to be varied as desired. It is prefer. 
able, also, that the plates on the ends of the 
casing should be so constructed as to be re 
movable for the examination or replacement 
of the brushes as they wear out; but if the 
capacity of the Scrubber be comparatively 
Small-Say not to exceed one hundled thou 
Sand cubic feet of gas per diem-the outer cas 
ing, instead of being formed of separate sec 
tions, may be cast in one piece, care being 
taken to provide openings in the casing suffi 
ciently large to admit the brushes into the 
several compartments, which said openings 
may be closed by suitable doors tightly fitted 
to the casing. The curved partition-plates 
l, which separate the several chambers, rest, 
on the ledges b of the outer casing, and are 
carefully joined thereto to secure necessary 
tightness. 
in usual practice the Scrubber constructed 
as herein described is filled with water, and 
is arranged to receive the illuminating-gas 
inlinediately after the sane leaves the con 
densel and just before its entry into the puri. 
fier. From eight to twelve gallons of fresh 
Water should be supplied to the scrubber for 
ach ton of coal that is coked, the l) rushes or 
clums being ordinarily maintained at a speed 
of from three to five revolutions per minute. 
Good results in freeing the gas from in puri 
ties are obtained as long as the water in the 
top chamber is not saturated to exceed one-half 
ounce Sulphide of animonium to the gallon, 
though it is manifest, that as descent is la (C. 
in the scrubber the percentage of impurities 
to the gallon increases materially, and this, 
too, without detrinental result, so that a So 
lution is finally reached of strength sufficient 
to allow for its economic treatment, and for 
recovery of the salts in solution as lye pro 
ducts of the gas manufacture. Where several 
of the Scrubbers are employed in series, the 
first may be set apart for removal of the cal 
bon bisulphide and the others for removal of 
the Sulphureted hydrogen; or, again, aqua 
ammonia or the like may be used in lieu of 
water to take up such impurities, as the latter 
does not so readily alsorb. 
It should be lan 
derstood, moreover, that other than illumi 
nating-gases may be successfully treated in a 
Scrubber such as described. For example, 
free ammonia-gas may be discharged into and 
caused to circulate throughout the scrubber, 
in which event the water contained in the Sev 
eral chambers will dissolve more or less of 
Said gas and produce the ordinary aqua-alm 
monia. The invention is not, therefore, con 
fined to any particular use of the apparatus, 
but is intended to cover the construction of 
said scrubber, however the same may be en 
ployed. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a gas-scrubber, of a 
liquid-reservoir, a rotary brush in said reser 
voir, and induction and eduction pipes ar 
langed upon opposite sides of the reservoir to 
cause the gas to pass through the brush, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, in a gas-scrubber, of a 
liquid-reservoir, a rotary drum or brush in 
said reservoir, a culved plate above said drum 
or brush, and induction and eduction pipes 
for the gas, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, in a gas scrubber, of it 
series of liquid-reservoirs, rotary drums or 
brushes in said reservoirs, and induction and 
eduction pipes opening into the sides of the 
reservoirs at point S about on a line with the 
axes of the drums and opposite each other. 
substantially as described. 
4. The combination, in a gas-scrubber, of a 
series of cleaning-brushes, liquid-reservoirs, 
and a series of induction and eduction pipes 
connecting said reservoirs, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
5. The combination of a series of cleaning 
brushes and licuid - reservoi's located one 
above another, induction and eduction pipes 
located with respect to said drums, substan 
tially as described, and meelanism for rotat. 
ing said brushes, as set forth, 
75 
95 
IO 
IO5 
O 
I25 4. 
5 5 
6 y 
 
306,892 
3 
5 
IO 
| 
6. The combination, with the series of clean. 
ing drums or brushes and the liquid-chambers, 
of preliminary Washing-pans, substantially as 
described. 
7. A gas Scrubber divided into superposed 
receptacles communicating through overflow 
pipes constituting channels for the passage of 
both gas and liquid, in combination with the 
rotary cleaning-brushes and the geared shafts 
for operating the same, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
S. An apparatus for scrubbing gas, consist 
ing of a series of cases or chambers with up 
per and lower induction and eduction pipes, 
a suitable device within each of said cham 
bers arranged to rotate while partially in 
mersed in the liquid and in the path of the as 
cending gas, and a series of overflow-pipes ar 
ranged to open into each chamber opposite 
the rotating devices, substantially as shown, 
said overflow-pipes serving to conduct the g is 
in an upward and the liquid in a downward 
direct.on, substantially as described. 
9. An apparatus for Scrubbing gases. Con 
sisting of a series of cases or cbainbers (on 
nected by overflow-channels, arranged sub 
stantially as shown, whereby the same chan 
nels serve to conduct gas in an upward and 
liquid in a downward direction, and a series 
of rotating shafts arranged within said cham 
| bers, each shaft being furnished with suitable 
devices adapted to dip below the line of the 
overflow-channels and raise liquid into the 
path of the ascending gas, and suitable gear 
ing for imparting rotation to said shafts, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof witness my hand this 
27th day of the month of September, A. D. 
ISS2. 
GEORGE ANDERSON. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT H. J. COMERFORD, 
FREDERIC WILLOUGHBY, 
Clerks to Messrs. Comerford & Co., Public No 
taries, London. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US306992.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 306,992, 
W. R. ANDREWS. 
CULTIVATOR ATTACHMENT FOR PLOWs. 
Patented Oct. 21, 1884, 
 
INVENTOR 
WWvow R. Anay we 
"4. 4 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. ANDREWS, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
CULTIVATOR ATTACHMENT FOR PLOWS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 306,992, dated October 21, 1884. 
Application filed July 24, 1884. 
(No model.) 
IO 
15 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM R. ANDREWS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Newark, in the county of Essex and State of 
New Jersey, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Cultivator Attachments for 
Plows, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
simple, cheap, and convenient cultivating at 
tachment for plows, said attachment being so 
constructed that it can be readily secured to 
or detached from the plow, and that the same, 
when secured to the plow, can be easily guided 
through the rows in a straight line. 
The peculiar and novel construction of my 
cultivating attachment is pointed out in the 
following specification and claims, and illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents a side view of a culti 
vator with my attachment. Fig. 2 is a plan 
or top view of the same. Fig. 3 is a perspec 
tive of my attachment, showing parts of the 
plow. Figs. 4 and 5 are details. 
Similarletters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter A. designates 
the beam of my cultivating attachment. In 
this beam are secured two plowshares, BB, 
which, in the example shown in the drawings, 
are inclined toward each other, but the form 
of which may be changed in accordance to the 
work to be accomplished. 
In order to make the plowshares B B easily 
removable, their standards are provided with 
flanges (, Fig. 4, each of which is provided 
with a steady-pin, b, and with a hole for a 
screw-bolt, c. By removing this screw-bolt 
the plowshare can be removed and another of 
different form can be attached in its place with 
very little trouble or loss of time. The beam A 
is secured at its inner end to the standard C, 
which carries the plowshare D, and which is 
secured to the beam Eof the plow by a screw 
45 bolt or other suitable means. To the outer 
25 
55 
end of this main beam Eis attached the clevis 
F, which connects by a rod, G, with the outer 
end of the beam A. The clevisis fastened to 
the main beam E. by a screw-bolt, d, which 
passes through a slot, e, in the clevis-plate, 5o 
and through a round hole in the beam, said 
screw-bolt being made in the form shown in 
Fig. 5, so that when its nut is drawn up tight 
the clevis will be free to move backward or 
forward. An additional screw, f, which passes 
through a slot, g, in the clevis-plate, serves to 
guide the clevis in its backward or forward 
movement. The object of this construction of 
the clevis is to throw the strain of the draft 
animal directly upon the outer end of the beam 
A, thereby retaining the implement when pro 
vided with my attachment in a straight course, 
and enabling the plowman to guide the same 
with the same ease with which he can guide 
the plow without my attachment. 
From the outer end of the beam A. extends 
a brace, H, to the rear end of the main beam 
E, and it is attached to the main beam by a 
screw, so that it can be easily detached. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 7o 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, substantially as herein 
described, of the secondary beam A, the plow 
shares attached thereto, the rod G, and the 
clevis F, provided with slots e and g. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
described, with the plow, of the secondary 
beam A, the plowshares attached thereto, the 
clevis F, attached to the main beam E, and 
being free to move backward or forward, and 8o 
the rod G, extending from the outer end of 
the beam. A to the clevis F. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
75 
WILLIAM R. ANDREWS. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. H.AUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307092.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 307,092, 
D. T. CHAMBERS. 
SHOE FASTENING, 
Patented Oct. 28, 1884. 
 
 
O O. O. G. o O O 6 6 
(G) (G) 
(G) 
(G) 
(G) 
(G) 
(O) 
(G) 
WITNESSES 
3.25-6 
a 2.42. 
 
N, Peters, Photo-ithographer. Washington. C. C. 
C 
(G) 
(G) 
(G) 
(G) 
INVENTOR, 
Zalee Z 6% 
7.2 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL T. CHAMBERS, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, AssIGNOR 
OF ONE-FOURTH TO JULIUS A. KREMER, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
SHOE-FASTENING. 
3-?I2CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 307,092, dated October 28, 1884. 
Application filed March 27, 1884. (No model.) 
------------ 
A 
to a 2, willon, it inval? concert : 
Be it known that I, DANIELTHOMAS CHAM 
BERs, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Washington city, District of Columbia, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Shoe-Fastenings, of which the following is 
a description. 
Figure 1 is a top view of the slitted portion 
of a lace-shoe, showing my invention applied 
Io thereto. Fig. 2 is a cross-section through the 
line acac of Fig. 1. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are views 
of modified shapes of the blind strap-lace, Fig. 
3 being shown with a part of the facing-strip 
or cover D thereon. 
My invention relates to a novel shoe-fasten 
5 ing which I call a blind strap-lace, the 
same being composed of two thicknesses of 
material, and used in the place of the ordinary 
lacing-cord or shoestring, and being provided 
in the under layer or thickness with eyelets 
along each of its edges, which are adapted to 
be successively caught over the projecting 
hooks on the edges of the slit in the shoe, as 
hereinafter fully described. 
In the drawings, A represents a portion of 
the upper of a lace-shoe having the usual slit, 
and the edges of which slit are provided with 
re-enforcing strips, in each of which is seated 
a row of lacing-hooks, B. The lowest hook, 
b, of each series is so disposed on the strip as 
to be exactly opposite the lowest hook of the 
opposite series; but above these the hooks on 
one side alternate with those on the other side, 
so as to occupy a zigzag relation. These hooks 
are seated in the slit-strips so as to point ob 
liquely downward and away from each other, 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
CD is the blind strap-lace. This consists 
of a pliant strap of leather, textile fabric, or 
other suitable material, which corresponds 
somewhat to the tongue of a lace-shoe, but 
which, instead of being disposed inside of the 
shoe, as is a tongue, is arranged upon the out 
side of the shoe and coveling the slit-opening. 
This strap has its underneath portion, C, pro 
vided with a series of holes, (t, with or with 
out eyelets in them, which are to be fastened 
over and upon the hooks B on each side of the 
shoe-slit. The outer portion, D, of these 
straps is in the nature of a blindfly that cov 
ers the eyelets or holes, and also the ends of 
35 
 
55 
the hooks. These straps may have scalloped 
or ornamental edges, as in Fig. 3, or may be 
made plain, as in Eigs. 1, 4, and 5. In any case 
they cover the slit-opening perfectly, and ex 
clude rain, dust, and mud. To accommodate 
this form of fastening to different widths or 
shapes of feet, these straps are made of such 
variable shape as to meet the wants of any 
particular shape. Thus, if the ankle and in 
step are very large, a very considerable taper 
is given to the form of the strap, as in Fig. 3. 
If, however, the ankle and instep are small, 
nearly a straight strap is used, as in Fig. 4; 
or if, as in some cases, there is a high or 
thick instep and a small ankle, the strap is 
made largest in the middle, as in Fig. 5. 
These straps are made of these different shapes 
for each graded size to meet the requirements 
of any particular form of foot, and series of 7c 
these different shapes are kept in stock by the 
dealer, the idea being to fit the foot perfectly 
once for all, and the shoe being once properly 
fitted and adjusted on the foot, it always pre 
serves that fit without needing subsequent ad 
justment, and there is no transfer of looseness 
from one part to the other, as is the case with 
a cord-laced shoe, and no necessity for setting 
the buttons to a new position to fit the foot, as 
is the case with nearly all ready-made buttoned 
Shoes. 
In applying the blind straplace to the shoe 
the hand is inserted into the shoe and the two 
lower hooks, bb, are pinched together until 
they are in position to register with and pass 
through the two lowest eyelets or holes, c c, 
of the strap. Then the eyelets of the strap 
are successively hooked over the hooks, first 
upon one side and then upon the other, until 
the top is reached. 
If desired, an extra fastening or modified 
construction of hook may be used at the top 
to make the final fastening; but if the hooks 
and eyelets are properly made and seated this 
will not be necessary. 
In connection with this blind strap-lace the 
ordinary inner tongue may be used, if de 
sired; but its office is sufficiently performed 
by the blind strap-lace to dispense with said 
tongue. 
In opening the shoe the strap is unhooked 
first upon one side and then upon the other 
75 
9O 
95 
OO 
2 
307,092 
5 of the fact that it cannot be detached without the purpose described. 
until the last two hooks are reached, from tongue of two thicknesses or layer's of mate 
which the strap is not detached, but is allowed rial, having eyelets alongits edges in the inner 20 
to be permanently hooked therein, the strap i thickness, adapted to be applied outside the 
maintaining its connection thereto by reason shoe and to fasten over the hooks, as and for 
pinching together the lower hooks of the shoe. 
2. The blind-strap lacing consisting of the 
material for the strap, nor to any particular I), in colmbination with a shoe having a slit 
form of eyelet, nor to any particular form of opening, with hooks upon each side of the 
departing from my invention. It is also ob- 
3. A lacing-strap consisting of an eyeleted 
vious that the shoe-slit may be either in front section, C, of any suitable form, covered by 3o 
a blind fly, D, as and for the purpose described. 
or on the side or at the back. 
I do not confine myself to any particular eyeleted piece C and the outer blind fly-strap, 25 
Io lacing-hook, as, these may be varied without same, as described. 
I5 claim as new is 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
1. The combination, with a shoe having a 
slit or opening therein, with a row of lacing- 
hooks on each side, of a blind strap or lacing- 
) ANIEL. T. CHAMBERS. 
Witnesses: 
SOLON C. REMON, 
CHAS. A. PETTIT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307192.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 307,192, 
C. HALSTEAD. 
CULINARY VESSEL. 
Patented Oct. 28, 1884, 
it. 
2. 2% 
 
Wavesses 
A2 vezzazz. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES HALSTEAD, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CUNARY VESSEL. 
$3 PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 307,192, dated October 28, 1884. 
Application filed February 26, 1884. (No model.) 
^ 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES HALSTEAD, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the State of New York, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Culinary 
Vessels, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
arrangement of one or more removable vessels 
in an outer vessel, and capable of being used 
for steaming or as a cooking-vessel; and, fur 
ther, in the arrangement of the ledge and band 
on the inner vessel, through which the same 
is supported on the outer vessel. 
The accompanying drawing represents a ver 
tical section of the culinary vessels embodying 
my invention. 
A is the inne' vessel, made of earthenware 
orchina, resting upon the top of an outer vessel, 
B, and capable of being easily removed. The 
outer vessel, B, is provided with an outward 
flaring upper part or rim, C, extending above 
the top of the vessel A, and give the desired 
space for the supporting-ledges and band v 
on the vessel A, as well as for the flange of 
the cover D, and for the hooks or handles a. a, 
or suitable bail with which the vessel A is 
lifted. On the top of the rim C a suitable 
cover, E, is placed, to inclose the top of the 
vessel A. In the bottom of the vessel A an 
opening is made, closed by a removable plug, 
in. When the vessel A is used as a steamer, 
the plug n is removed and a concave perfo 
rated plate, In, is placed over the opening in the 
bottom, when the steam generated in the outer 
vessel, B, will enter through the opening at 
the bottom and be distributed into the interior, 
at the same time surrounding the exterior of 
. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
40 
the vessel A. By this construction large 
quantities of different kinds of food can be 
cooked at the same time by enlarging the outer 
vessel, B, to any desired size and shape, and 
provided with suitable openings or supports 
at the top to receive the inner vessel, A. Near 
the upper part of the vessel A a projection, s, 
of any desired shape, is made on the vessel A, 
around which a metallic band, w, is fitted, to 
protect the same from damage and hold the 
metallic band v, by which the vessel A is 
lifted, firmly in its place. The annular corru 
gation ) of the band v, which surrounds the 
projections of the vessel A, forms with it the 
necessary support to the vessel A upon the 
upper edge of the exterior vessel, B. The 
flaring top or rim C of the vessel B is formed 
or soldered steam-tight to the vessel B. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination, a china or earthenware 
vessel, A, the plug in, and perforated plate n, 
exterior supporting-vessel, B, having flaring 
rim C and cover E, as and for the purpose de 
sgribed. 
2. In combination, a china or earthenware 
vessel, A, provided with a projection, s, near 65 
its upper end, the band v, having hooks or 
handles at a, and an annular corrugation, , 
surrounding the projection s, and forming 
with it the flange for supporting the vessel A. 
upon the top of the vessel B, provided with 
flaring rim Cand cover E, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5 
CHARLES HALSTEAD. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY E, ROEDER, 
JACOB KOTLOWSKY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307292.txt	(No Model.) 
H. A. GORN. 
DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINE, 
No. 307,292, 
Patented 00t, 28, 1884, 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
3:238 
23-33 % 
w 
Da 
a? 
BY 
z Z5 
SS xS INVENTOR 
2222ey /2- 
ATTO ar. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMAN N A. G.O RN OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
DYNAMO - ELECT R C A C - N E. 
3C5iiCA iON forming part of Letters Patent No. 3C7,292, dated October 28, 1884. 
Application ?iled December 31, 1 SS3. 
(No ln(e.) 
To all, whon, it naily conce77. 
Be it known that I, HERMANN A. GORN, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Dynamo-Electric Machines, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention has reference to certain im 
provements in armatures of dynamo-electric 
machines by which the heating of the arma 
ture-core by the alternate polarization of the 
same by the field-magnetsis diminished and the 
generation of the so-called 'Foucault cur 
rents in the core to a considerable extent Ob 
viated. 
The invention consists of an amature for 
dynamo-electric machines having a core of U 
shaped cross-section, which is made of two 
rings of L-shaped cross-section that are insu 
lated from each other. Each ring of the core 
is made of a number of sections, which are 
also insulated from each other, said sections 
being provided with exterior lugs at their in 
ner and Outer circumference for supporting 
the coils of the armature. The rings of the 
core are attached to Spider-frames, the hubs 
Of which are mounted on the armatul'e-shaft 
by an insulated bushing. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a side elevation of my improved 
armature for dynamo-electric machines. Fig. 
2 is an end view, partly in cross-section, on 
line a ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a plan, partly in 
horizontal section, on liney), Fig. 1; and Fig. 
4 is a detail vertical longitudinal section 
through the hubs of the spider-frames and 
their insulating-bushing. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
My improved armature is based on the Well 
known Pacinotti ring-armature. The core 
of the same is composed of two flat rings, A. 
A, of L-shaped cross-section, which are rig 
idly secured to brass spider-frames BB, Fig. 
2. The rings A A are insulated from each 
Other, and are connected by transverse screws 
9 gog in such a manner that the main parts 
of the rings are parallel to each other, and 
form thereby a ring-shaped core of U-shaped 
cross-section, which is closed at the outer cir 
Cumference. Each ring A or A is made of a 
number of sections, which are rigidly con 
nected at their overlapping ends by screws a 
(t', (shown in FigS. 1 and 2,) the line of the 
joint being preferably arranged in radial di 
rection, as in Fig. 1, though it may also be 
made on an oblique or ZigZag line, as desired. 
The sections of each ring A or A are insul 
lated from each other at their overlapping 
ends. Both rings AA are provided with lat 
erally-projecting exterior lugs, a c', respect 
ively at the inner and Outer circumferences. 
The lugs 6 and c are arranged in radial lines 
and tapel toward the center of the core, the 
Outei' lugs being 'ecessed. The recesses serve 
for the purpose of reducing the weight of the 
almature and securing the regular distribu 
tion of the weight of the iron core. The coils 
i i are wound around the core A A' in the 
spaces formed between the lugs, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3. The coils extend transversely 
across the closed outer part and the inner 
open part of the U-shaped core, and are sepa 
rated and kept at uniform distance from each 
other by Said lugs. Owing to its U-shaped 
cross-section, the core can quickly change its 
polarity when passing between the alternating 
poles of the field-magnets, whereby the gen 
eration of Foucault currents and the conse 
quent heating of the core are almost entirely ob 
viated. As the air has free access to the in 
terior of the core, the cooling action takes 
place thereon, so as to still further diminish 
the heating of the core. No inductive action 
is exerted on the transverse inner portions of 
the coils, Owing to the inner open part of the 
Core, so that no induction-currents of opposite 
direction, which neutralize to that extent the 
main currents, are induced at the inner parts 
of the coils. The hubs of the brass spider. 
frames B B are mounted on the shaft by bush 
ings KK, which are insulated from the spi 
del'-frames, whereby the perfect insulation be 
tween the armature-coils and the coils of the 
field-magnets is obtained. The current that 
passes by leakage' from the coils of the ar 
lmature along the spider-frames and shafts to 
the cores and pole-faces of the field-magnets, 
and exerts an injurious effect upon the latter, 
is thereby prevented from passing beyond the 
Spider-frames, and is consequently localized in 
the armature. 
I am aware that armatures of U-shaped 
O 
25 
30 
45 
55 
75 
85 
90 
IOO 
2 
307,292 
5 
O 
vided with laterally-projecting lugs at the in 
Cross-section formed of two ring-shaped semi 
Sections which are insulated from each other 
her and outer circumference, the Outer lugs 
have been used heretofore, and I therefore do 
being recessed to decrease the weight of the 
not claim this feature, broadly. 
armature-core, substantially as set forth. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
3. In a dynamo-electric machine, the colm 
bination of an armature - core of U-shaped 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
l. An armature for dynamo - electric ma 
cross-section, and made of two insulated rings, 
chines, the core of which is made of J-shaped 
with spider-frames, to which the rings are at 
CrOSS Sections, and formed of two E-shaped tached, the spider-frames being provided with 
rings insulated from each other, each ring be- hubs that are secured by insulating bushings 
ing made of a number of sections connected at 
to the airmature-shaft, substantially as and for 
their overlapping ends, and also insulated from the purpose set forth. 
each other, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
2. An amattle for dynamo - electric ma 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
Chines, the core of which is made of S-shaped 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
cross-section, and formed of two disk-shaped 
ringSinsulated from each other, each ring being 
formed of a number of sections and connected 
at their overlapping insulated ends, and pro 
CARL KARP, . 
SIDNEY MANN. 
HERMANN A. GORN. 
25 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307392.txt	F. W. HUTCHINS 
INKSTAND, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented 00t. 28, 1884. 
(No Model.) 
No. 307392, 
 
 
 
 
 
WITIVESSES 
24, 22. 
2e, 7%. 
is, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washitgton, D.C. 
INVENTOR 
2-2, 747642. 
(No Model.) 
No. 307392, 
 
F. W. HUTCHINS. 
INKSTAND, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
7. 
a - 
Patented 00t, 28, 1884. 
- 7. 4 
H 
W/I//ESSES 
2-u 772- 
f 
N. PETERS. Photo-litrographer. Washington, d. c. 
1///E/WTOR 
Kye?/Kew/, 
Allor:1e/S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
&s. 
f 
FRANK W. HUTCHINS, OF WARREN, OHIO. 
NKSTAND. 
: .#CEICATIOIN forming part of Letters Patent No. 307,392, dated October 28, 1884. 
Application filed April 8, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
5 
To (tal, uhon, it naily CO7 ce.77. 
Be it known that I, FRANK W. HUTCHINS, 
of Warren, in the county of Trumbull and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Inkstands; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
inkstands, the object being to provide, pref 
erably, a double inkstand with two ink-bottles 
and two sets of bracketS or Supports for pen 
holders, and with a pivoted cover for eachink 
bottle, and provided with such levels and 
actuating mechanism that the covers will au 
tomatically close when a pen-holder is laid in 
the support that is respectively connected 
there with, and will automatically open when 
the pen-holder is removed. 
With these objects in view my invention 
consists in certain features of construction and 
in combination of parts hereinafter described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a view in perspective of my improved ink 
stand. With a pen-holder in the upper Sup 
port, and in consequence thereof the left-hand 
cover is closed. Fig. 2 is a view in perspective 
of the same, with portions of the outer wall 
broken away to show the internal construction. 
Fig. 3 is an end elevation of one of the covers 
and a side view of the attached arm by which 
the cover is operated. Fig. 4 is a front eleva 
tion of the same. 
Figs. 5 and 6 are views in 
perspective of the respective levers and at 
tached cams that form a part of the mechan 
ism. Fig. 7 is an elevation of the same parts 
shown in Fig. 3, but with the cover closed. 
A represents the body of the device, that has 
preferably an open bottom for convenience in 
coring the structure, that consists, in addition 
to the outer walls, of the two cross-walls a, 
together with such lugs, ribs, or projections 
5 on the inside as are necessary to hold the ink 
bottles B in their respective places next the 
front wall, and is provided with a removable 
top A, that has openings, as shown. From the 
front of the part A project the brackets that 
form the rests in and n for the pen-holders. 
The covers C and D and their attached arms 
are alike, except they are made right and left 
handed, and a description of one will suffi 
ciently illustrate the operation of both. As 
shown in Fig. 3, the cover C has a rib, C, that 
extends beyond the cover on either side and 
terminates in pivotal ends c, that rest, re 
Spectively, in depressions in the outer wall 
and cross-partition a. The inner pivotal end 
projects beyond the partition, and has attached 
the arm c, the flat side of which is close to 
the partition, and has on the opposite side the 
laterally-projecting lug c'. The center of the 
gravity in the cover in its upright position is 
Some little distance back of its axis, and will 
maintain the cover in this position, although 
partially counterbalanced by the arm c, the 
top part of which butts against the part A. 
and acts as a stop. 
E and F are levers made right and left 
handed, and when in position have the flat 
sides next to each other, with the attached rods 
E and F extended in either direction and 
journaled in a depression on the front wall of 
the part A, and form fulcrums for the respect 
ive levers. The lever E has the parte, and 
the lever F the part f, that project through a 
slot in the front wall, the latter being located 
lower and farther from its fulcrum than the 
former, so that these two parts engage, re 
Spectively, pen-holders in the upper and lower 
rests. On one side of the long and inwardly 
projecting ends of these levers are respectively 
attached the laterally-projecting lugs eande" 
and f' and f', that engage the lugs on the arms 
of the covers and act as cams. The relative 
position of the lever E with the arm c' when 
the cover C is raised is shown in dotted lines 
in Fig. 3... The relative position of this part 
When the cover is closed is shown in Fig. 7. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
When one of the covers-for instance, the 
- cover C-is raised, if a pen-holder is laid in 
the upper l'est, the part e is pressed downward 
and back Ward, causing the came to press 
back on the lug c, causing it to move back 
Ward and downward until the cover is closed. 
The relation of parts is such that this occurs 
before the part e is out of the way of the pen 
holder, and just as the extreme throw of the 
40 
55 
75 
95 
OC 
 
307, 392 
2 
can e' is reached. The end of the came there- 
fore passes by the lug cluore or less, accord 
ing to the size of the pen-holder, and locking 
the cover in its closed position, as shown in 
Fig. 7. When the pen-holder is removed, the 
weight of the inner end of the lever causes the 
luge' to press on the lugc", by means of which 
the cover is raised until its center of gravity 
is past its axis, after which, by its own gravity, 
the cover moves back into the arm c', striking 
the part A', as aforesaid, and the parts are 
again in the position shown in Fig. 3. The 
action of the cover D, and the lever F and the 
attachments are the same as just described. 
It is convenient to have two kinds of ink 
for instance, red and black-and a pen and 
holder for each in the proper rests. 
When 
either pen is taken, the cover of the ink-bottle 
to which this pen belongs is instantly raised, 
and closed again when the pea is returned to 
its place, so that there is no liability of mis 
take, and the ink-bottles remain closed when 
not in use, excluding the dust. Of course an 
inkstand may be made with but One ink-bot 
tle, cover, and attachment and one pen-holder 
rest; or any desired number of ink-bottles may 
be had in one inkstand by simply duplicating 
the mechanism described. The laterally-pro 
jecting lugs and cams on the respective alins 
and levers, as a foresaid, are not essential, as 
equivalent mechanism may be had by means day of April, 1884. 
of teeth and depressions that do not project 
laterally, and such devices would evidently 
be within the scope and spirit of my invention. 
1. An inkstand provided with one or illore 
bottles or wells, a hinged or pivoted cover for 
each bottle, a rest or support for the pen, a 
lever pivoted to the stand and resting in close 
proximity to the pen-support, and devices, 
substantially as described, connecting said 
lever and cover. 
2. The combination, with an inkstand, an 
ink bottle or well, a cover pivoted to said ink 
stand, the center of gravity of said cover when 
the latter is in a vertical position being some 
distance back of the axis thereof, and a com 
bined balance-arm and stop connected to said 
cover, of a lever situated in close proximity 
to the pen-support of the inkstand, and oper 
ating substantially in the manner set forth. 
3. In an inkstand, the combination, with a 
cover pivoted as aforesaid, and provided with 
a balance-arm having a laterally-projecting 
lug, of a lever situated in close proximity to 
the pen-support of the stand, alld a lever pro 
vided with a can for engaging the lug on said 
aim, the parts being constructed, and com 
bined, substantially as described, so that when 
the cover is closed the end of the cam engages 
the lug and locks the cover and leaves the 
level free to move more or less, according to 
thesize of the holder, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 2d 
FRANK W. HUTCHINS. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN MI. STULL, 
ROIT. T. IZ ANT. 
45 
55 
65 
O 
25 
35 
What I claim is 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307492.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 307492, 
C. PHILLIPS, 
STEAM AND AIR BRAKE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 4, 1884. 
: 
2. 8 
s 
W 
WN 
2. 
S 
Reev 
2. 
a 
&zS/AVA 
P 
 
K) 
e 
& Cozzeyzes Z%zzZ&os, 
27,2 2-c.14-s 
4zzopra ey. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 307,492, 
. 
C. PHILLIPS. 
STEAM AND AIR BRAKE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 4, 1884, 
ce. S 
 
  
%| 
2%ISSNs 
%.S EN 
2%Z 
2T2% 
 
 
N2 
  
2S 
  
 
 
 
t 
N 
R 
: 
 
 
 
As te 
1722-ezzzopr: 
Coz 27.62&s Z%zzazzy 
42a2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
COLLUMBUS PHILLIPS, OF ATLANTA, GEORGIA, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS 
TO GREEN I. FOREACRE AND JOSEPH 
STEAW AND 
B. TRAVIS, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
AR BRAKE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 307,492, dated November 4, 1884. 
Application filed February 12, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
To all tufton, it inctly concern, 
Be it known that I, COLLUMBUS PHILLIPs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at At 
lanta, in the county of Fulton and State of 
Georgia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Steam and Air Brakes; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable othel's skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to atmospheric air 
brakes used on railways, and has for its ob 
ject to effectually prevent the sticking of the 
piston in the brake-cylinder when the brakes 
are taken off, and consequently the necessity 
of bleeding the brake-cylinder, as hereto 
fore, to effect the release of the piston; and 
to that end it, consists in completely, so far as 
effecting the release is concerned, exhausting 
the air from the said cylinder at the time that 
the brakes are taken off by means under the 
control of the engineer without leaving his 
cab, of which an illustration will be given in 
the accompanying drawings, and particularly 
described in the following description. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
of the auxiliary reservoir (broken in two) 
brake-cylinder and triple valve of a Westing 
house air-brake with my attachment applied 
thereto, some of the parts being in section. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged view in elevation of my 
release attachment in vertical Section. Fig. 
3 is a plan view on the line a a of Fig. 2; 
Fig. 4, a bottom view of valve in the brake 
release chamber. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A. 
indicates the main brake-pipe connected by a 
branch pipe,B, with the triple valve C, formed 
with two chambers, D and E, in which work 
the piston F and stem G, and slide valve H, 
the casing or shell I of the triple valve being 
formed, in addition to the port for the main 
brake-pipe, with the port J for the auxiliary 
reservoir K, and the port L for the pipe M. 
leading to the brake-cylinder N; also, with 
the four-way cock O, and other usual fea 
tures, as illustrated, of the triple valve in gen 
eral use in the Westinghouse air-brake. These 
parts, so far generally referred to, are of Well- 5o 
known construction, and operate in the usual 
well-known way, and therefore need not be 
more particularly described. 
Under the construction referred to, while 
the air is exhausted from the brake-cylinder 
to release the brakes, still, at times from the 
air not being completely exhausted, the brake 
will stick, and it then becomes necessary to 
go to the cylinder and turn a cock, so as to 
bleed the cylinder before the brake will 
release. The inconvenience and disadvan 
tages attending such necessary steps are fa 
miliar to all locomotive-engineers. Various 
means have been devised to overcome such 
difficulties. In order to overcome such in- 65 
conveniences and difficulties, I connect with 
the brake-cylinder and the main brake-pipe 
an attachment constructed as follows: Two 
chambers, P and Q, which I will designate, 
respectively, as the air-pressure chamber' 
and the air or brake release chamber, are 
connected together by a bar, R. The air 
pressure chamber is provided with upper and 
lower screw-caps, PP, and within it is fitted 
a valve, P, the stem P'of which passes through 75 
the upper cap, while to its lower face a leather 
cup-valve, P, is secured by means of the 
plate or washer b and screw c. A suitable 
spring, preferably a coiled spring, P, fits be 
tween the upper cap and top face of valve P", 
and exerts a downward pressure on the valve 
when compressed. The air-release chamber 
Q is preferably of smaller diameter than the 
pressure-chamber, and is provided with up 
per and lower caps, Q Q, which preferably 
screw into the chamber, the upper cap hay 
ing a valve-seat, d, formed therein. Within 
the release-chamber is fitted a valve, Q, of 
any construction suitable for the purpose, but 
preferably of the form shown with wings e, 9o 
and having notches or ports filmade in its pe 
riphery for the passage of steam. When the 
valve is unseated, and with its stem Q, which 
passes through the upper cap, slightly flat 
tened, as seen at i, on one or more sides for 95 
the whole or a portion of its length, to permit 
the escape of steam between the stem and the 
walls of the opening in the cap when the valve 
85 
s" 
307,492 
is unseated. A suitable spring, Q, preferably 
a spiral spring, fits between the lower cap and 
the valve and bears against both, so that it 
will hold the valve against its seat and assist 
5 in reseating it after the pressure which un 
seated it has been reduced or overcome. Nor 
mally the stems of both valves preferably pro 
trude outside of their respective chambers, and 
bear against or are in such proximity thereto 
IO that they can be readily brought into contact 
with a beam, R., pivoted or journaled by a 
pin or bolt, g, to a post or support, R', con 
nected by a bolt, h, or other suitable means to 
the bar R. This beam-lever preferably stands 
15 at an inclination, as shown, with its longest 
arm between its support and the pressure 
chamber; but if necessary it can be adjusted 
to bring the longest arm between the release 
chamber and post, both the beam and connect 
2C ing-bar being formed with a series of holes 
for the adjustment of both beam and post, or 
either. 
The attachment constructed as described is 
applied by connecting the pressure-chamber P 
25 with the main brake-pipe by means of a pipe, 
S, entering the coupling A at one end, and the 
lower cap of the pressure-chamber at the other 
end, and the release-chamber with the brake 
cylinder by means of a pipe, T, entering the 
3o lower cap of the pressure-chamber and con 
necting with the cock U, heretofore used for 
bleeding the brake-cylinder. It will be thus 
observed that the attachment can be applied 
to brakes already in use very readily and at a 
In operation, when the engineer from his cab 
exhausts the air from the main brake-pipe to 
put on the brakes, and the air passes from 
the auxiliary reservoir to the brake-cylinder 
4o through the connecting-pipe, the air at the 
time that it enters the brake-cylinder also 
passes from the same through pipe T into the 
release-chamber and presses against the valve 
therein, but cannot escape, because the valve 
45 is pressed againstits seat, and hence the brake 
is applied as effectively as heretofore; but 
when the pressure is applied through the main 
pipe as heretofore to Irelease the brakes, a suf 
ficient portion of the air passes through pipe 
5o S into the pressure-chamber P to overcome 
the spring therein and press out the valve 
stem so that it will bear against and elevate 
that end of the beam, thereby lowering the 
other end, and through it pressing down the 
55 stem and unseating the valve in the release 
chamber, so as to effect an escape for the steam 
from the brake-cylinder through the release 
chamber, and hence So long as the valve in 
the release-chamber is open and the pressure 
6O in the brake-cylinder is greater than the at 
mospheric pressure the air must escape from 
the cylinder, and consequently there can be 
no possibility of the piston sticking by reason 
of pressure of air in the cylinder preventing 
65 it from receding to its former position. It 
will be observed, too, that the operation of the 
35 very small cost. 
95 
release is under the absolute control of the 
engineer from the cab, and that the piston can 
not stick, and that the necessity of bleeding the 
brake-cylinder as heretofore in the construc- 7o 
tion of air-brakes such as described is com 
pletely overcome. 
The capacity of the two chambers and the 
tension of the springs and the leverage of the 
beams are such that when air is applied to 75 
take off the brakes the pressure of the air ad 
mitted to the pressure-chamber will easily 
overcome the pressure of the springs and of 
the air in the brake-cylinder. 
I have, for the purposes of illustration and 
of showing how the releaser can be applied to 
the Westinghouse brake in common use, shown 
the releaser applied to such a brake with its 
ordinary appendages; but it will be under 
stood that I do not limit myself to its use with 
the details of construction of the several parts 
of such a brake, as changes may be made in. 
such parts, and my invention still be service 
able for the purpose for which it was designed. 
I have described the parts as applied to air 
brakes; but it will of course be understood 
that the invention is not limited to Such use 
where it can be used with other motive power. 
Having thus described my invention and set 
forth its merits, what I claim is 
1. The combination, with the brake-cylin 
der and main brake-pipe, of a pressure-cham 
ber communicating with the main pipe to re 
ceive air therefrom, a release-chamber com 
municating with the brake-cylinder, valves 
within the two chambers, and means for trans 
mitting motion from one valve to the other, to 
unseat the latter and allow the exhaust of air 
from the brake-cylinder, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination, with the brake-cylin 
der and main brake-pipe, of a pressure-cham 
ber communicating with the main pipe to re 
ceive air therefrom, a release-chamber com 
municating with the brake-cylinder, valves 
within the two chambers, and a beam for trans 
mitting motion from one valve to the other, to 
unseat the latter and allow the exhaust of air 
from the brake-cylinder, substantially as set 
forth. 
v 
3. The combination, with the brake-cylin 
der and main brake-pipe, of a pressure-cham 
ber communicating with the main pipe to re 
ceive air therefrom, a release-chamber com 
municating with the brake-cylinder, valves 
within the two chambers, springs acting on 
said valves to restore them to their normal po 
sitions after movement therefrom, and a beam 
for transmitting motion from one valve to the 
other, to unseat the latter and allow air to ex 
haust from the brake-cylinder, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the main brake 
pipe, the brake-cylinder, and means for con 
trolling the passage of air from the main pipe 
to the brake-cylinder, of a pressure-chamber 
communicating with the brake-cylinder, valves 
IOO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
2O 
307,492 
3 
O 
2) 
within the two chambers, and means fo1" trans- without communicating there with, and pro 
mitting motion from one valve to the other, to 
vided with the valve having a stem sliding 
unseat the latter and allow the exhaust of air 
through the end of the chamber, and the beam 
from the brake-cylinder, substantially as set 
fulcrumed upon a Suitable Support and con 
forth. 
necting the stems of the two valves, substan 
5. The combination, with the main brake 
tially as set forth. 
pipe, the auxiliary reservoir, the brake-cyl 
8. The combination of the pressure-chamber 
inder, and means for controlling the passage 
and release-chamber, each provided with the 
of air from the main pipe to the auxiliary res 
detachable caps, the valve to each chamber 
ervoir, and thence to the brake-cylinder, of a 
provided with a stem passing through the end 
pressure - chamber communicating with the 
of the chamber, and the cross-beam fulcrumed 
mail pipe, a release-chamber communicating 
on a suitable support, and having its opposite 
With the brake-cylinder, valves within the two 
ends over the ends of the valve-stems, and 
chambers, and means for transmitting motion 
adapted to receive momentum therefrom, sub- . 
from one valve to the other, to unseat the lat 
stantially as set forth. 
ter and allow air to exhaust from the brake 
9. The combination of the pressure-chamber, 
cylinder, substantially as set forth. 
the release-chamber, the valves within the two 
6. The combination of the release-chamber 
chambers having stems sliding through the 
provided with a valve and escape-port, and 
ends of the chambers, the springs acting on 
constructed to receive air from the brake-cyl 
the valves, and the bean connecting the stems 
inder, and a pressure-chamber provided with 
of the valves, substantially as set forth. 
a valve connected with the valve in the re 
10. The combination, with the pressure 
lease-chamber, and constructed to receive an 
chamber and the release-chamber and their 
inflowing agent to actuate its valve to trans 
valves, of the adjustable post or support, and 
mit its movement to the valve in the release 
the beam adapted to be adjusted on said post 
chamber, to unseat the same to open the es 
or support, substantially as set forth. 
cape-poet, substantially as and for the purpose 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
7. The combination of the pressure-chamber 
provided with the valve having a stem sliding 
through the end of the chamber, the release 
chamber connected to the pressure-chamber 
COLLUMBUS PHILLIPS. L. s. 
E. W. MARTIN, 
WM. A. HAYGOOD. 
Witnesses: 
- 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307592.txt	(no Model.) 
J. D. RICHARDSON, 
PACKING FOR STUFFING BOXES, 
No. 307,592, 
Patented Nov. 4, 1884. 
4 
 
 
 
 
 
EE 
Rs 
 
 
awa, 
3. 
to more;" 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. RICHARDSON, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO FRANK 
L. MANCHESTER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PACK NG FOR STUFF NG B OXES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 307,592, dated November 4, 1884. 
Application filed June 4, 1884. (No model.) 
The essential features of my packing are a 65 
to all, whon it 7 Culy conce77 : 
of the bolts at the box D is pressed on the pack 
Be it known that I, JoHN D. RICEIARDSON, 
ing - washer b. Any steam which escapes 
of the city of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
through the cylinder-head B around the rod 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
A cannot pass around the outside of the pack- 55 
5 and useful Improvement in Packing for Stuff. 
ing-box D, because prevented by the packing 
ing-Boxes, of which the following is a speci 
washer or gasket b, and can therefore only 
fication. 
pass to the interior of the packing-box, if it 
My invention relates to that class of piston 
has any escape at all. Whatever steam may 
rod packing for stuffing-boxes in which metal 
enter the packing-box) cannot escape through 6o 
Io lic rings are caused to hug the rod tightly by 
the ground joint c, and hence the packing 
spring-pressure, and in which the packing 
within the box D has only to prevent the es 
rings are set up or adjusted automatically by 
cape of steam directly through the box D and 
such springs, and without any adjustment of 
around the rod A. 
the gland to compensate for wear. 
15 The invention consists in novel conbina 
divided ring, spring-bound or embraced so as 
tions of parts, which are hereinafter described, to contract it upon the rod as it wears, the 
and pointed out in the claims. 
gap in the ring permitting its ends to come 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
toward each other as it is thus contracted, and 
a longitudinal section of a stuffing-box and 
an undivided ring having a bearing against 
2O packing embodying my invention, also repre 
the end of the packing -box continuously 
senting a portion of a piston-rod. Figs. 2, 3, 
around the rod, and having a spring applied 
and 4 are transverse sections taken, respect 
to it to press it against that side of the rod on 
ively, on the dotted lines aca, gy 1, 22, Fig. 1, the 
which is the gap in the spring-bound divided 
stuffing-box itself being omitted from these 
ring. 
25 figures; and Fig. 5 is a transverse section of 
The two rings above described are necessary 
the piston-rod and a divided spring-actuated 
elements of my invention; but in its more per 
ring embodying a modification of my inven 
fect form I employ two undivided rings, form 
tion, and hereinafter described. 
ing steam-tight joints with opposite ends of 
Similar letters of reference designate cor 
the packing-box and pressed against the rod 8o 
responding parts in all the figures. 
by springs, two divided and Spring - bound 
A designates the piston-rod, B the stuffing 
rings on the inner side of the undivided rings, 
box, and C the gland of the stuffing-box, which 
the gap in each divided ring being on theside 
is secured thereto by bolts (t. 
of the rod against which the adjacent undi 
The stuffing-box may be specially construct 
vided ring is pressed by its spring, and other 
'ed for my packing, or I may apply the inven 
divided and spring-bound wedge-rings placed 
tion to an ordinary stuffing-box. The stuff. 
between the two divided rings above referred 
ing-boxes of locomotive - engines commonly 
to, and serving to prevent end-play of the rings 
have in the bottom a brass ling, the back of 
and to keep the undivided rings pressed tightly 
which is flat or square and fits against a flat 
against the ends of the packing-box. 
seat at the bottom of the stuffing-box, and the 
EE designate the two undivided rings, which 
outer face of which is beveled or conical to 
form ground joints with the two end walls, e 
receive and crowd inward the packing. When 
e', of the packing-box D, and which are snugly 
such is the case, I remove this brass ring, and 
fitted to the rod A. Each ring E is pressed 
in the bottom of the stuffing-box I place a 
against the side of the rod by any suitably-ar- 95 
packing washer or gasket, b, of asbestus or ranged spring. 
As here shown, each ring is 
other suitable material. Upon the asbestus 
acted upon by a leaf-spring, f, which bears at 
washer or gasketb, I place a packing-box, D, 
the ends against the interior of the packing 
composed of two parts bored to fit snugly on 
box, and at the middle of its length upon the 
the rod, and connected by a rabbeted ground 
exterior of thering E. The effort of the spring IOO 
5O joint, c. The gland C has a bearing against 
to straighten crowds and holds the ring E 
the packing-boxD, and by tightening the nuts 
against the side of the rod at that point. As 
75 
45 
307,592, 
3. The combination, with the packing-box go 
2. The combination, with a packing-box for 8o 
2 
shown in Fig. 1, the springs.fpress the rings mitting it to the space inside of the stuffing 
E against opposite sides of the rod, and each 
spring f is held against displacement by a lit 
the teat, f*, upon it entering a seat or cavity 
5 in the ring. From the inner side of each ring, 
at the point where acted on by its springf, a 
small pin or spur, f', projects inward, the pur 
pose of which will soon be explained. 
FF designate two divided rings, which are 
IO placed on the rod A close to the rings E. The 
rings F each have a gap, g, and are bound 
around and contracted upon the rod by a spiral 
spring band, g, or, if desired, by wire springs 
g', as shown in Fig. 5. These springs con 
I5 tract. the divided rings Fupon the rod, and the 
gap g in each ring permits of such contraction. 
The spiral-spring bands of have their ends. 
joined, as shown in Fig. 3; but in Fig. 4 a por 
tion of the spring-bandis broken away to show 
2O the spring f behind it. The outer periphery 
of the divided rings F may be slightly grooved 
circumferentially, as shown in Fig. 1, to form 
a seat which will retain the spring-band and 
hold it against displacement. As beforestated, 
25 the gaps g in the divided rings are at the points 
where the undivided rings are pressed against 
the rod, and the pin f' on each ring E, enter 
ing the gap g in each ring F, holds the rings E 
F against turning relatively to each other. 
Between the two divided rings FF are two 
other rings, h. h, which may be divided or not, 
and which have their outer faces which bear 
on the rings F straight and their inner faces 
beveled, and between these two rings is a third 
35 divided ring, G, the faces of which are bev 
eled to fit and wedge between the faces of the 
rings h, and which is contracted on the rod by 
a spiral-spring band, (f'. The divided ring G, 
as it is contracted on the rod, also presses the 
4o rings h h. apart endwise of the rod, and so 
serves to press the divided rings FF against 
the two undivided rings E and hold the lat 
ter tightly against the end walls of the pack 
ing-box and all the rings in close juxtaposi 
45 tion. The undivided rings being kept snugly 
pressed upon the ends of the packing-box pre 
vents the steam from passing between them 
and the ends of the box, and the contraction 
of the divided rings F prevents steam from 
5o passing along the rod, save at the gap g, where 
such escape is prevented by the bearing of the 
rings E on the rod at the gaps.g. In this way 
I obtain a very tight and durable packing, 
which will wear the rod Smooth and not cut it. 
In ordinary running of a locomotive steam 
and moisture on the rod will be a sufficient 
lubricant; but in some cases-as in running 
down a long grade-it may be desirable to lu 
bricate the packing. 
6o I have shown an oil-cup, i, as connected by 
a tube, i', with the packing-box D, and an 
air-escape tube, i, extending within the tube 
i'. 
I may use a self-feeding lubricator in place 
of the simple oil - cup, if desired. This oil 
65 cup or lubricator supplies the lubricating ma 
terial directly to the interior of the packing 
box D and to the packing-rings without ad 
box B outside of the packing-box D. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 7o 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a stuffing-box packing, the combina 
tion, with a divided and spring-bound ring 
capable of contraction upon the piston-rod, of 
an undivided ring at the side of the divided 75 
ring, and a spring applied to the undivided 
ring to press it upon the side of the rod on 
which is the gap in the divided ring, substan 
tially as and for the purpose herein described. 
insertion into a stuffing-box, and adapted to 
receive the piston-rod through it, of an undi 
vided ring having a bearing on one end of the 
packing-box, a spring for pressing said ring 
against said rod, and a divided and spring- 85 
bound ring at the side of said undivided ring, 
arranged with its gap at that side of the rod. 
against which the undivided ring is pressed, 
substantially as herein described. 
D, of the undivided ring E, with the pin f', the 
divided ring F, having the gap g, the spring 
band for contracting the ring F on the piston 
rod, and the spring f, for pressing the ring E 
against the rod on the side of the gap g, sub- 95 
stantially as herein described. 
4. The combination, with a packing-box to 
be inserted into a stuffing-box and to receive . . 
the piston-rod through it, of undivided rings 
contained within and forming tight joints with ICO 
the ends of the packing-box, springs for press 
ing said rings against the piston-rod, and di 
vided and spring-bound rings for embracing 
the rod, each arranged with its gap on the side 
of the rod against which the adjacent undi- Io5 
vided ring is pressed, substantially as and for 
the purpose herein described. 
5. The combination, with a packing-box for 
insertion into a stuffing-box and adapted to 
receive the piston-rod through it, of undi- IIo 
vided rings at the ends of the box, forming 
tight joints with the inner sides thereof, di 
vided and spring-bound rings bearing against 
said undivided rings and serving to embrace 
the rod, springs applied to said undivided II5 
rings for pressing each of them against the 
rod at the side on which is the gap in the ad 
jacent divided ring, and a divided and spring 
bound wedging-ring serving to keep all the 
rings in close juxtaposition and to prevent I2O 
their end-play in the packing-box, substan 
tially as and for the purpose herein described. 
6. The combination, with the divided pack 
ing-box D, having a ground joint, c, of the 
undivided rings E and their springs f, and I25 
the divided and spring-bound rings F, serv 
ing to prevent the ingress of steam to and its 
egress from the packing-box D, all substan 
tially as herein described. 
ing-box D, of the undivided rings E, their 
springsf, and the divided and spring bound 
rings F, serving to prevent the ingress of steam . 
to and its egress from the packing-box, and 
3o 
55. 
7. The combination, with the divided pack- I-3o 
. 
307,592 
- 
3 
the divided rings h h and divided and spring- packing-box for the supply of lubricating ma 
bound wedging-ring C, serving to prevent end- terial directly to the interior of said packing- Io 
play in the packing-box, all substantially as box, substantially as herein described. 
herein described. 
5 8. The combination, with the stuffing-box 
and the packing-box inclosing the packing- 
rings and inserted there with into the stuffing- 
box, of a lubricator connected with the said 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
MATTHEW POLLOCK. 
Witnesses: 
J. D. RICHARDSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307692.txt	(No Model) 
am 
W. W. ALTHER...WOGEL. 
- 
BRUSH CLEANING AND CUTTING MACHINE, 
No. 307,692. 
a 
Patented Nov. 4, 1884. 
-22 a 42-at- 22 
22, W222 4622 P22a2E243C3. 
sees arease ea 
ass 
Z 
aR, 
SS 
 
as 23:36:11 
7%z22-esses, 
72a 2-e 22-67; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELM. WALTHER-VOGEL OF OBER-ENTFELDEN, SWITZERLAND. 
BRUSH CEAN ING AND CUTT N G V ACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 307,692, dated November 4, 1884. 
Application filed October 23, 1883. 
No model.) 
IO 
To all, whon, it naily concert: 
Be it known that I, WILHELM. WALTHER 
VOGEL, a citizen of Switzerland, residing at 
Ober - Entfelden, in the canton of Argovia, 
Switzerland, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Brush Cleaning and 
Cutting Machines; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawing, and to letters 
or figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
machine which shall, in an economical and ex 
peditious manner, card and clean the bristles 
and then trim them; and my invention consists 
of the improved machine for doing this work, 
as hereinafter described and claimed. 
The accompanying drawing shows a per 
spective view of the machine. The frame A 
A supports the top rectangular frame, B'B' 
BB", the side members of which, B'B', have 
each a longitudinal slot, C'C', respectively, 
the same being parallel with the carding-roller 
K and knife-shaft J. The two guide bars or 
plates, D'D', on which the brush-blocks rest, 
and which form guideways for them to be 
pushed along on, are adjustably supported on 
the screw-posts E, which pass through the 
slots C C, and have nuts F above the frame 
and jam-nuts below. It will thus be seen that 
the bars D' D' can be adjusted vertically or 
horizontally at any desired distance apart or 
above the trimming - knives. The pillow 
blocks G' G", adjustably attached to the frame, 
(there being similar pillow-blocks on the other 
side of the machine,) have bearings for the 
shaft J, which carries the knives H and the 
shaft of the carding or brush-cleaning cylin 
der K. The shaft J has three wings, each 
carrying a knife, H. The stationary knife-bar 
Qis vertically adjustable on the inclined screw 
posts R by nuts and jam-nuts, the ends of the 
knife-bar being made with short slots at each 
end transverse to the bar, through which the 
posts R pass, which allows for lateral adjust 
ment of the knife-bar. The knife-shaft is 
driven by the belt L, and the carding-roller 
3O 
45 
5 5 
75 
receives its motion through belts M and N 
passing over the intermediate pulley, O. The 
curved plate P, which passes up between the 
knives and cleaning-roller, separates the waste 
of the latter, which can in part be used again 
from the trimmings of the knives. The accu 
rate adjustment of the knives H can be se 
cured by means of outside and inside regulat 
ing-screws, which latter. are not seen in the 
drawing. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The guide-plates D' D'are set according to 
the width of the brushes to be cleaned and 
cut and the desired length of the bristles to be 
cut, for which plurpose, as above explained, 
the guide-bars are vertically and horizontally 
adjustable. The brushes, with the bristles 
turned downward and the sides of the blocks 
resting on the guide-plates, are then pushed 
forward, starting at the right-hand end of the 
guide-bars. The metal pins of the cylinder K 
first scrape and card the bristles, removing 
from them all dirt, loose bristles, &c. Then, 
as the brush is pushed on, the bristles are cut 
even and true between the knife-blade Q and 
the rotating knives. The waste from the clean 
ing-cylinder is delivered on one side of the 
partition P and the knife-clippings on the 
Other. 
Curved brushes can be cleaned and cut as 
well as straight ones, either by giving the nec 
essary motion by hand or by means of suitable 
guiding-pieces to be set on the guide-plates. 
Having thus described inly invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A brush cleaning and trimming machine 
consisting of the combination of the vertically 
and laterally adjustable guideways D D, the 
carding and cleaning cylinder K, the shaft car 
rying the rotary knives H, the vertically and 
laterally adjustable knife Q, and the partition 
P, all combined and operating substantially 
as described, and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILHELMI WAITHER-WOGEL. 
95 
Witnesses: 
T. A. BOURRY, 
S. H. M. BYERS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307792.txt	(No Model.) 
M. J. O'CONNOR. 
MACHINE FOR CHANNELING ROCK FOR GRINDSTONES, &c, 
No. 307,792. 
. Patented Nov. ll 1884. 
W/VASSAS, 
72% ea 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL J. O'CONNOR, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
MACHINE FOR CHANNELNG ROCK FOR G R NDSTONES, & C. 
5ECFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 307,792, dated November 11, 1884, 
Application filed July 30, 1884. 
(No model.) 
55 
65 
to all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MICHAEL J. O'CONNOR, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Louisville, in the county of Jefferson and State 
of Kentucky, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Chan 
neling Rock for Grindstones, &c.; and I here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure i is an elevation of a machine, em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view, 
partly in Section, of the revolving tool-arm 
and mechanism for actuating the same. Fig. 
3 is a top view of the adjustable base for col 
unn A. Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail view of 
the shaft () in section, loose pulley G, and 
clutch mechanism for causing the shaft g to 
rotate with the pulley when the drill rises. 
Like letters refer to like parts wherever 
they occur. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
apparatus for channeling and quarrying grind 
stone and other circular-shaped stone out of 
the solid rock. 
Heretofore, so far as I am aware, it has been 
the general practice to quarry the stone in ir 
regular blocks, and then to reduce them to 
the proper or desired form by picking, spall 
ing, and scabling. Such a procedure neces 
sitates considerable labor and results in great 
waste of material, all of which it is the pur 
pose of the present invention to avoid. 
To this end the main feature of the inven 
tion consists in mounting the channeling-tool 
or drill upon a revolving arm, which arm ro 
tates around a fixed axis, column, or post, so as 
to cause the tool to describe a circle while op 
erating, thus quarrying the block in its ulti 
mate form. 
A second feature of the invention consists 
in actuating the rotating arm or tool-carrier 
from the drill, so that its movement will alter 
nate with and be controlled by the drill, and 
the machinery be thus relieved from any strain 
consequent on the irregular action of either 
the arm or drill. 
There are other minor points of novelty 
I will now proceed to describe my inven 
- 
appeal'. 
Secured to the column A is a gear or worm 7o 
tion more specifically, so that others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains may apply 
the Same. 
In the drawings, A indicates a column, post, 
or center support for the drill or channeler, 
provided with a base or platform, Y, to which 
it is secured, being strengthened by ribs, as at 
gy, if desired. The column A extends through 
the base Y, and terminates in a rectangular 
foot, a, by means of which (and wedges or 
equivalent devices) it is anchored to the rock 
when in operation. 
Projecting through the base Y are screws S 
S, by means of which the base and column 
may be adjusted, and pivoted to the column 
A are extension or sliding legs L. L., which 
brace and stiffen the column A when properly 
adjusted. 
wheel, I, the object of which will hereinafter 
B indicates a revolving arm or tool-carrier 
journaled on the post or column A just over 
the gear or worm wheel I, and projecting at 75 
right angles thereto, which arm supports the 
channeler or drill C. 
The channeler or drill C, being no part of 
the present invention, may be of any approved 
form. 
The drill, whatever its character, should be 
so connected with the arm B, as at b, or other 
Wise, that it can be moved along the arm to 
and from the column A to increase or decrease 
the diameter of the stone to be quarried. At 
tached to the piston of the drill is the verti 
cal rod D, having an eye, d, at each end, for 
securing the ends of a cord or band, E, which 
cord or band passes over guide-pulleys F and 
around a power-pulley, G. The power-pull 
ley G is journaled loosely on a shaft, g, which 
shaft is in turn journaled on the arm B, and 
provided with a worm or screw, H, which en 
gages with the gear or worm wheel I,'attached 
to the column A. The loose pulley G is pro 
vided with a clutch so arranged that when the 
pulley is rotated by the rise of the drill-pis 
ton it clutches the shaft gy and causes it and 
the Wrm or screw H to rotate with it, while 
in the reverse rotation of the pulley Git moves J OO 
loosely on the shaft g, and the shaft (7 can be 
held by a reverse clutch, if desired. 
90 
95 
w 
So which will hereinafter more fully appear. 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
307,792 
The construction being of the general char 
acter hereinbefore specified, the machine will 
be operated as follows: A square orrectangul 
lar hole, v, is formed in the rock R to be 
quarried. The rectangular foot a is placed 
therein and tightly wedged therein by means 
of wedges 0, the machine properly adjusted 
by means of the set-screws SS, and braced by 
adjusting the extension-legs L. The drill C 
is adjusted along the revolving arm B until 
the desired distance from the column A to 
give the required diameter of stone is obtained, 
and is then properly secured thereto. Power 
is then applied to move the drill-piston, which, 
as it rises through the medium of rod D and 
cord E, applies power to the pulley G. Pul 
ley G in this movement clutches and rotates 
shaft g and its worm H, which as it gears with 
the fixed gear-wheel I causes the rotary move 
ment of the arm B a short distance. When 
the piston of drill C descends, the pulley G. 
rotates in reverse direction, moving loosely 
on the shaft (f, and the arm B, whether held 
by a reverse clutch or otherwise, remains sta 
tionary during the operation of the drill. 
When the drill next rises and falls, the above 
operations are repeated, and thus the drill is 
advanced in a curved path until the circle is 
completed. 
Having thus set forth the nature, operation, 
and advantages of my invention, what I claim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for quarrying grindstones 
and like circular articles, the combination of 
a center post or column, a revolving drill 
carrier journaled thereon, said post and car 
rier being provided with intermeshing gear, 
a reciprocating drill mounted on the carrier, 
and connections between the drill and gearing 
for transmitting the motion of the former to the 
latter, substantially as shown and described. 
2. In a machine for quarrying grindstones 
and like circular articles, the combination of 
a center post or column, a revolving drill 
carrier journaled thereon, said post and car 
rier being provided with intermeshing gear, 
a reciprocating drill mounted on the revolv 
ing drill-carrier, a clutch located upon the 
55 
operating gear-shaft, and connections between 
the drill and clutch for operating the latter, 5o 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a machine for quarrying grindstones 
and like circular articles, the combination of 
a center post having a gear or worm wheelse 
cured thereto, a revolving tool-carrier jour 
naled on the center post, a worm, and a clutch 
pulley journaled on the revolving tool-car 
lier, a reciprocating drill, and a band or cord 
for imparting the movement of the drill to 
the clutch-pulley, substantially as and for the 
purposes Specified. 
4. In a machine for quarrying grindstones 
and like circular articles, the combination of 
the center post or column, A, having the 
worm-wheel I secured thereto, the revolving 65 
tool-carrier B, journaled on the column A, the 
worm-wheel H, having the clutch-pulley G, 
and journaled on the revolving tool-carrier, 
the reciprocating drill, the rod D, attached 
thereto, the guide-pulleys FF, and the rope 7O 
or band E, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
5. In a machine for quarrying grindstones 
and like circular articles, the combination of 
a center post, A, the base Y, having a central 75 
perforation through which the post passes, 
the wedges w, the set-screws SS, and the re 
volving drill-arm journaled on the center 
post, substantially as shown and described. 
6. In a machine for quarrying grindstones 
and like circular articles, the combination of a 
center post, A, the base Y, having a central 
perforation through which the post passes, 
the extension-legs LL, the wedges w, the set 
screws SS, and the revolving drill-arm jour 
naled on the center post, substantially as 
shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in presence of witnesses, this 28th day of July, 
LSS4. 
So 
MICHAEL J. O'CONNOR. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE. M. DAVIE, 
JOHN MASON BROWN, 
W. N. CALDWELT. 
O 
25 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307893.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. WIS SINGER. 
METALLIC LATH, 
No. 307,893, 
Patented Now, ll, 1884, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. WISSINGER, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
METAL CLATH. 
5PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 307,893, dated November Ill., 1884. 
Application filed August 30, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all Luhon, it a? conce77, : 
Be it known that I, JoHN W. WISSIN?; ER, 
of the city and county of San Francisco, and 
State of California, have invented an Improve 
ment in Metallic Laths; and I hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription thereof. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in metallic lath or covering; and it con 
sists in the construction and arrangement of 
the devices hereinafter described and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
for a more complete explanation of my inven 
tion, Figure 1 is a view showing a number of 
my laths secured in position. Fig. 2 is a hori 
zontal section of the same. Fig. 3 is a verti 
cal transverse section showing a lath and the 
Figs. 4 and 5 show 
manner of Securing it. 
the securing devices. 
In the construction of my improved laths I 
employ thin sheets of metal of suitable length 
and thickness. These sheets are shown at A, 
and they have one end turned up, preferably 
at an obtuse angle, forming a flange, as ShoWn 
at B. At the opposite end they are turned 
up so as to form an acute or corresponding 
angle, as shown at C, and are then bent again 
so as to form a narrower flange, D, which 
stands parallel with the part A and at a Sufi 
cient distance from it to allow the mortar or 
cement which is used to pass beneath this 
flange D, and thus form a sufficient lock or 
key to hold it in place. In some cases the 
flange D may form a continuous curve from 
the part C, so as to overlap the projecting 
flange B of the adjacent lath, as shown in Fig. 
4, and the angles formed by the flanges BC 
may vary to suit requirements. In some cases 
the laths are formed with a longitudinal ridge 
or arched portion, a, which serves to stiffen 
them, and as it projects up between the flanges 
B and C it also reduces the amount of mortar 
used. When these laths are placed upon the 
supporting frame-work or timbers, they are 
placed so that the flange B of each lath is up 
permost when secured, to form a vertical Or 
inclined wall, and the flange C of the next 
lath above lies closely against it, with the part 
D projecting over the upturned edge B. 
If used upon a roof where cement may be 
placed upon it to form an exterior covering, 
these laths may be placed in the manner 
herein shown, or they may be placed extend 
ing longitudinally up and down the incline. 
In either case the overlapping flanges B, C, 
and D form water-proof joints through which 
rain cannot pass. If placed longitudinally up 
and down the incline of the roof, the laths 
themselves would form gutters to convey the 
water away, if not covered. 
In order to secure these laths in place, Iem 
ployhook-bolts E, the hook being of sufficient 
size to pass around the metallic supports for 
the laths, and having a shank provided with 
a head, F, at the opposite end, which extends 
through a hole or slot in the lath so as to be 
on the outer side. 
G is a wedge-shaped key, having a slot, H, 
made in it, extending from the thinner edge 
backward toward the thickest portion. This 
key is inserted between the head F of the 
hook-bolt and the edge of the lath, being driv 
en in So that the slot H encircles the shank of 
the bolt, and the increasing thickness of the 
Wedge forces the lath against the side of the 
Supporting-frame, while the hook is drawn 
closely against the opposite side, thus holding 
the lath firmly in place. After the laths are 
in position, with mortar or cement spread upon 
them in the usual manner of plastering walls, 
the hook or angular flanges D will form a suf 
ficient bond to retain it in place. By this 
construction the laths are formed so as to re 
ceive the mortar or cement upon one side, 
while the opposite side shows a perfectly 
Smooth surface, the edges abutting closely, 
and it may be painted Or otherwise finished, 
as described. The inner surface of the wedge is 
slightly concave, which causes it to make a 
better lock. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. Alath composed of a strip of sheet metal 
bent at the edges So that flanges project out 
ward at any required angle or curve, with the 
alternate flanges bent so as to overlap the 
next adjacent ones, while the inner or oppo 
site surfaces of the laths abut so as to form a 
Smooth and continuous Surface, in combina 
tion with a hook and slotted wedge for secur 
ing the laths, Substantially as herein de 
Scribed. 
2, Laths composed of strips of sheet metal, 
95 
ICO 
O 
25 
35 
 
307,893 
5 with the L-shaped bolts having a head upon hand. 
bent so as to have outwardly-projecting and a slotted wedge fitting the shank of the bolt 
overlapping flanges upon one side, while the between the head and the lath, substantially 
meeting edges abut so as to produce a contin- as herein described. 
uous surface upon the opposite side, together 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
one end, and the wedge-shaped locking-block 
substantially 3S herein described. 
as: 
3. A means for securing metallic laths to 
their supporting frame-work, consisting of L- 
Io shaped bolts having a head upon one end and 
JOHN W. WISSINGER. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. STRONG, 
S. H. NOURSE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US307993.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 307,993. 
T, B, SHARP, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
MANUFACTURE OF TUBING, 
Patented Nov. 11, 1884, 
F 
c 
(1/ - a N 
 
al 
 
SSSs 
 
Witnesses. 
22 
Inventor 
c?... sales 44 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
T. B. SHARP, 
MANUFACTURE OF TUBING, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 307,993. 
Patented Now, l l 1884, 
 
-- a- - - - - --morn-ce 
   
  
2ZZZZZ2, 2ZZZZZZZZ2222222222 
 
 
 
 
e- 
a 
se-Y. 
e 
2 
S 
( Ny. 
Ny 
as 
 
Witnesses. 
4-6- 
t%ual ?keyet-4 0%% 
N. Peters. Photo-thographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS BUDWORTH SHARP, OF FRENCH WALLS, SMETHWICK, COUNTY OF 
STAFFORD, ENGLAND. 
MANU FACTURE OF TUB ING. 
CPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 307,993, dated November 11, 1884. 
- 
Application filed May 26, 1884. (No model.) Patented in England January 30, 1883, No. 491; in France July 16, 1883, No. 156,555. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
drawing-hole. The plug stations itself by the 5C 
Be it known that I, THOMAS BUDWORTH 
motion of the tube at the eye of the draw 
SHARP, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
plate-that is, at the place where the drawing 
residing at French Walls, Smethwick, in the 
is effected-the metal being drawn between 
5 county of Stafford, England, have invented 
the wall of the hole in the draw-plate or die 
certain new and useful improvements in the 
and the said plug. The small diameter of the 55 
manufacture of copper and other metallic 
drawing-hole, between which and the rear 
tubes, and in apparatus employed in the said 
part of the plug the tube under operation is 
manufacture, (for which I have received Let 
situated, prevents the advance of the plug, 
Io ters Patent in Great Britain, No. 491, dated 
and between the plug thus self-fixed and the 
January 30, 1883, and in France, No. 156,555, 
wall of the drawing-hole, the reduction of the 6c 
dated July 16, 1883,) of which the following is 
external and internal diameters of the tube as 
a specification. 
well as the reduction of the thickness of the 
In the ordinary method of manufacturing 
metal of the tube takes place. The self-fixing 
I5 copper and other metallic tubes, a thick hollow 
plug which I prefer to use consists of a short 
cylinder is reduced in diameter and elongated 
cylinder of hardened steel, the fore end of 65 
by a succession of drawing-through dies, or a 
which is of less diameter than the rear part, 
draw-plate having a series of taper or conical 
the junction of the two parts having a convex 
holes progressively decreasing in diameter. 
shoulder, upon which shoulder the drawing 
The exterior of the tube is reduced in diam 
mainly takes place. The plug may, however, 
eter by the die or draw-plate, while the interior 
be varied in shape within considerable limits. 7c 
of the tube is supported by a cylindrical or 
A spherical or nearly Spherical plug, or a 
nearly cylindricallmandrel, which travels with 
conical plug, may be used with nearly the 
the tube, or the interior of the tube is sup 
same effect as the plug described, provided the 
25 ported at the point where the drawing takes 
proper relation between the size of the acting 
place by a bulb on the end of a long rod, the 
parts of the sphere or cone and the acting part 75 
said bulb being fixed by means of the said rod 
of the hole in the draw-plate or die be pre 
in the eye of the die or draw-plate. 
served. I prefer to make the holes in the 
In manufacturing copper and other metallic 
draw-plate or die of a trumpet shape, but 
tubes according to my invention, I dispense 
holes of the ordinary shape may be employed. 
with the cylindrical mandrel and bulbed rod 
referred to, and I employ in their place a de 
ence to the accompanying dra Wings the man 
tached or loose plug, preferably of the kind 
ner in which my invention is to be performed. 
hereinafter described. The fore part of this 
Figure 1 represents partly in longitudinal 
35 plug is of the diameter which it is intended 
section and partly in elevation the apparatus 
the interior of the tube Shall have after the 
Iemploy in carrying into effect my improve. 85 
drawing process, while the rear part of the 
ments in the manufacture of copper and other 
said plug is of larger diameter, preferably of 
metallic tubes, the said apparatus being rep 
a diameter not leSS than that it is intended the 
resented in conjunction with a metallic tube 
4o exterior of the tube shall have after the draw 
in course of manufacture. (c. is the die or 
ing process-that is, of a diameter not less than 
draw-plate, which may be of the ordinary go 
that of the narrowest end of the hole in the 
kind. In place of the fixed bulbed rod or cy- 
die or draw-plate. The fore end of the tube 
lindrical mandrel Ordinarily employed, use a 
to be drawn down is reduced in the ordinary 
detached or loose plug, bb. The fore part, 
45 way, so that it will pass through the drawing 
b', of the plug bib' has the diameter which it 
hole. The plug is then introduced into the 
isintended the interior of the tube a c' shall 95 
tube, its smaller end foremost. The plug hav 
have after the drawing process. The rear . 
ing been pushed up to the draw-plate, the tube part, b, of the plug b b is of larger diameter 
is drawn in the ordinary way through the than the fore part, b, the rear part, b, being 
I will now proceed to describe with refer- 8o 
. 
w 
2 
307,993 
preferably of a diameter not less than that of 
the exterior of the tube c c' after drawing 
that is, of a diameter not less than that of the 
narrowest part of the hole in the die or draw 
plate a. The fore end of the tube whose di 
ameter and thickness of metal is to be reduced 
is drawn down or contracted in the ordinary 
way, so that it will pass through the hole in 
the die or draw-plate a. The plug b listhen 
introduced into the tube and pushed up to the 
contracted end of the tube, the smaller part b 
of the plug occupying the said contracted end 
of the tube, and the shoulder at the junction 
of the two parts bl of the plug seating itself 
upon the shoulder formed by the contraction 
of the tube. The contracted end of the tube 
being passed through the hole in the draw 
platea, the tube is drawn by the ordinary ap 
pliances through the hole in the draw-plate. 
O By the motion of the tube e c the plug bl? 
stations itself at the eye of the die or draw 
plate a-that is, at the place where the draw 
ing is effected, the diameter of the tube and 
the thickness of the metal being reduced be 
5 tween the shoulder at the junction of the parts 
bb of the plug and the entrance to and nar 
row part of the hole in the said die or draw 
plate a. The plug bl becomes self-fixed and 
retains its position during the drawing of the 
whole length of the tube. In some cases it is 
desirable to expand the tube being operated 
upon before contracting it. This method of 
operating is illustrated in longitudinal section 
in Fig. 2, where a is the die or draw-plate and 
bb'b' is the self-fixing plug. In this case the 
plug is a cylinder, b, having conical endsy' b, 
and the manner in which the tube ecc' is op 
erated upon by the shoulder of the conical end 
b' and the hole in the die or draw-plate a will 
be understood from the description hereinbe 
fore given with reference to Fig. 1. As the 
tube, Fig. 2, is drawn through the die or draw 
platea, that part of it in which the cylindrical 
part b of the plug bbl is situated is increased 
in diameter, as at c, Fig. 2, before it is reduced 
to the diameter and thickness shown at c, Fig.2. 
In order to introduce the plug bbl into the 
tube to be operated upon, the fore end of the 
tube is slit or divided longitudinally, prefer 
ably, at three places, as represented at d in 
cross-section in Fig. 3, and side elevation in 
Fig. 4. By this slitting of the tube the plug 
bbb can be introduced, the three parts into 
which the end of the tube has been divided 
55 separating as the plug is forced into the split 
tube. The plug bib' bhaving been introduced 
into the tube c, the split end of the tube is so 
far contracted as to permit it to pass through 
the hole in the die or draw-plate a. The draw. 
6O bare is then inserted in that part of the tube 
which has been passed through the draw-plate, 
and the extreme end c' of the tube is next con 
tracted by driving the ring or collar if up to 
the heade of the draw-bar e. The drawing 
65 of the tube is then conducted in the ordinary 
way, and progresses in the manner hereinbe 
By 
fore described, and represented in Fig. 2. 
this method of manufacture, different thick 
nesses of metal maybe given to different parts 
of the tube under operation. For example, 7o 
if, as illustrated in Fig. 2, a ring or draw 
plate, g, be placed upon the tube c, having a 
hole or eye of larger diameter than the part 
c of the tube, but of less diameter than the 
part c of the tube, and if the said ring or 75 
draw-plate g be forced up to and stationed at 
the position indicated in dotted lines at g, 
Fig. 2, the external diameter of the tube will 
be diminished as the expanded part c' passes 
through the ring or draw-plate at g. As the 
final external diameter of the tube is deter 
mined by the size of the hole or eye in the die 
or draw-plate a, the tube after this treatment 
while having the same external diameter as 
it would have had if the ring or draw-plate g 
had not been employed, the thickness of the 
metal in the tube produced is less than it 
would have been if drawn without the said 
ring or draw-plate g. Thus by the method of 
manufacture described a tube may be pro. 9o 
duced having throughout its whole length the 
same external diameter, but having at any de 
sired parts a greater or less internal diame 
ter, according as the drawing is effected, with 
or without the draw-plate.g., theinternal diame 
ter being greatest when the draw-plate g is 
used, and least when the drawing is effected 
without the said draw-plate g. Fig. 5 repre 
sents in longitudinal section a tube of this 
kind, the ends having a greater thickness of Ioo 
metal, or of less internal diameter, than the 
other portion of the tube. Tubes of this kind 
are useful for locomotive and other boilers, and 
for all purposes where greater strength is re 
uired in one part of the tube than in another. 
From the description given it will be under 
stood that the additional thickness of metal or 
diminished internal diameter may be given to 
any part of the tube. Fig.6 represents in longi 
tudinal section a modification of the manu 
facture and apparatus represented in Fig. 2. 
In this modification the plugh h' has a nearly 
spherical head, h, the portion libeing cylin 
drical. The action of the modification, Fig. 
6, is essentially the same as that described with 
reference to Figs. 2 and 4, and may be em 
ployed for similar purpose-that is, for pro 
ducing tubes having different thicknesses of 
metal at different parts. I wish it, however, 
to be understood that the method of manufac 
ture described with reference to Figs. 2, 4, and 
6 may be employed with advantage to pro 
duce tubes having the same internal and ex 
ternal diameter throughout, the expansion of 
the tube before its contraction disclosing any 
defect in the tube being operated upon, and 
the issue of defective tubes into commerce 
is thus avoided. '.' 
. . . . . . 
The plug b bb, Fig. 2, may have a cylin 
drical termination at the end entering the 13o 
draw-plate similar to the end b of the plug b 
b", Fig. 1. In all cases where the plug has a 
cylindrical termination the interior of the tube 
operated upon is planished or made smoothby 
I 25 
II5 
95 
! 
. 
. . 
. 
IO 5 
IO 
' 
5 
35 
O 
45 
 
307,993 
3 
IO 
- 
the said cylindrical termination, excepting in 
those cases in which the ring g is employed. 
In such cases there is no planishing of the in 
terior of the tube. 
Having now described the nature of my in 
Vention, and the manner in which the same is 
to be performed, I wish it to be understood 
that I claim as my invention-- 
1. The combination, with a die or draw 
plate, of a loose self-adjusting core having a 
varying diameter, and adapted to be located 
Within a tube to be drawn, the greater diame 
ter of the core being larger than the diameter 
of the entrance to the eye of the plate through 
which the tube is to be drawn, substantially 
as described. 
2. The within-described method of drawing 
tubes, consisting in expanding the tube beyond 
its original external diameter previous to pass 
ing it through the draw-plate, and then by 
said plate contracting its diameter below its 
original external diameter, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
25 
35 
3. The within-described method of drawing 
tubes and forming them with a varying inter 
nal diameter, consisting in expanding the in 
ternal and external diameter of the tube and 
then reducing the external diameter of the ex 
panded portion without altering its inner di 
ameter, and afterward contracting the diame 
ter of the tube, substantially asset forth, where 
by the tube is formed with a uniform external 
and varying internal diameter. 
4. The combination of a multiple of draw 
plates or dies, the eye of one being of a greater 
diameter than the eye of the other, and a loose 
self-adjusting core having a varying diameter, 
and adapted to be located within a tube to be 
drawn, the greater diameter of the core being 
larger than the diameter of the eye of the final 
draw-plate that is to reduce the diameter of 
the tube, substantially as described. 
THOMAS BUDWORTH SHARP. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE SHAW, 
RICHARD SKERRETT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308093.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 308,093, 
S. A. PRESCOTT. 
HOLDBACK FOR CARRIAGES 
Patented Now, l8, 1884. 
As/ 
  
 
 
Tig 2. 
Zzzassasi. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL A. PRESCOTT, OF SUTTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
HOLDBACK FOR CARRIAGES. 
PAEC 
IFICASON forming part of Letters Patent No. 308,093, dated November 18, 1884. 
Application filed August, j, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
65 
tions. 
- 
To all, Luhon, it notif CO7 Cer'72: 
Sutton, in the county of Worcester and Com 
monwealth of Massachusetts, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Hold 
back Attachments for Carriages; and Idohere 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
my invention applied to practical use. Fig. 
2 represents, upon an enlarged scale, a plan 
or top view of that part of the device which 
15 is attached to the shaft, as will be hereinafter 
more fully described. Fig. 3 represents a 
cross-section on line y), Fig. 2, looking in the 
direction of arrow 2, same figure. Fig. 4 rep 
resents a side view of the parts shown in Fig. 
2, looking in the direction of arrow 1, same 
figure; and Fig. 5 represents a longitudinal 
section on linea ac, Fig. 2, looking in the di 
rection of arrow 3, Same figure. 
To enable those skilled in the art to which 
my invention belongs to make and use the. 
same, I will proceed to describe the same more 
in detail. 
The nature of my invention consists in cer 
tain improvements in self-adjusting holdback 
devices for carriages, carts, and other vehicles. 
In the drawings, the part marked A repre 
sents the device for attaching and holding the 
holdback-rod F to the carriage thills or shafts 
B, and which consists of a box, C, fastened to 
35 the shaft B by means of arms D D, the upper 
hooked or bent ends of said arms clasping the 
sides of the box C, to which they are securely 
fastened and held by means of the longitudi 
nal bolt b, which passes through holes in the 
upper ends of the arms D, and also through 
a hole in the base of box C, its head b being 
drawn against one of the arms D by means of 
a nut, c, which screws upon the other end of 
said bolt, thereby drawing the ends of both of 
the arms D firmly against the box C. The 
lower ends of said arms D are Secured to 
gether by means of a right and left screw, E, 
by turning which screw the arms D can be 
securely clamped to shafts B. 
In lieu of right and left screw E, the lower 
ends of arms D may be made round and pro 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL A. PRESCOTT, of vided with screw-threads, to pass through 
holes in a yoke, and then receive nuts for 
drawing down box C and fastening it firmly 
to the shaft B. Caps C are secured to the 
tops of boxes C by means of headed screws 
at a, thereby protecting the coiled springs H 
and journals G from dirt and injury. The 
respective ends of the holdback-rod F pass 
through holes in the heads of journal-pieces 
G, to which said ends of holdback-rod F may 
be fastened by heading down, pinning by nuts, 
or by any other suitable means. The small 
ends of journal-pieces G pass through holes 
in the upright sides of boxes C, and, as they 
enter from the inside, are not liable to be dis 
placed; but, if preferred, they may have nuts 
or pins combined with their outer ends for 
retaining them in their proper relative posi 
In the drawings, nuts G' are shown in full 
and dotted lines applied to the ends of jour 
mal-pieces G. One end of coiled steel spring 
His looped and fastened to a bolt, b, while the 
other end of each of said springs is fastened to 75 
its respective journal-piece G by pinning, as 
at d, or otherwise. In securing these springs 
in position they are first coiled or wound up, 
so as to create sufficient tension, when fastened 
into position, to throw the rear curved part of 8c 
holdback-rod Fup, and adjustable straps 9 
are combined with the carriage-shafts in such 
a manner that the height to which the hold 
back-rod F can rise is readily adjusted. 
pieces G to which the ends of holdback-rod 
Fare attached extend out beyond the arms D 
a sufficient distance to allow the curved por 
tion of the holdback-rod F to rise andfall 
freely, and that, too, without the ends of jour-go 
nal-pieces G coming in contact with the upper 
ends of arms D. 
To the inner side of the curved part of the 
holdback-rod Fis secured, in this instance, a 
wide piece of leather, I, similar to that used 95 
in the Common holdback part of the breech 
ing of a harneSS, the Same being fastened at 
its ends to the rod F, in this instance by 
means of metal clasps or clips f, one at each 
end of the leather facing, while intermediate too 
It will be noticed that the ends of journal- 85 
IO 
25 
45 
2 
308,093 
is 
wa 
O 
35 F) 
Guide loops or straps h may be secured to 
1. The combination, with a flexible hold- 7o 
loops e are employed to retain the central por- the carriage, thereby rendering the improved. 
tion of strap I in proper relation to the hold- device safer and less liable to occasion injury 
back-rod F. This arrangement is preferred in case of accidents; fifth, the expense of a 55 
in applying my invention to practical use, in- harness is very much lessened; and, sixth, the 
asmuch as the contact of the holdback device device is self-adjusting--that is, when the car 
with the animalis not so unyielding and rigid. riage presses against the horse, as in going 
Inlieu of springs H, any other suitable spring down hill, the device naturally lowers itself 
device may be employed combined with the to an easy and proper position for holding the 6) 
rod F in any suitable manner, provided such carriage back, and as soon as the bottom of 
spring shall cause the rod to spring up, there- the hill is reached and the draft comes upon 
by keeping it in proper position; and, if pre- the tugs the holdback device rises automatic 
ferred, in lieu of the fastening devices f and ally by means of the action of springs H and 
e of the leather facing of rod F, two pieces of resumes its former and normal position. 
leather-one on each side of the curved por- 
Having described my improvementsinhold-, 
tion of rod F-may be applied, their edges back attachments, what I claim therein as 
being stitched together, thus incasing the rod new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
F permanently. 
the carriage-shafts B, for retaining the adjust- back, I, for contact with the animal, of a sup 
ing-straps g (one on each side of the horse) in porting-rod, F, substantially as described. 
proper relative positions. 
2. The combination, with a flexible hold 
Instead of making holdback-rod F in one back for contact with the animal, of rigidly 
piece, it may be made in two pieces, one sec- supporting side pieces, F, attached to the 75 
tion on each side of the horse, leaving the shafts, for the purposes stated. 
centerportion of strap I without an iron Sup- 
3. The combination, with a flexible hold 
port. The ends of strap I should be very se-back for contact with the animal, of a sup 
curely attached to such side sections of rod F. porting device hinged to the shafts of a car 
4. The combination, with the shafts B B of 
and has been highly commended by those who 
have witnessed its operation. 
a vehicle, of the supporting - rod F, flexible 
Those skilled in the art to which my in holdback I, and holding clips or loops D, sub 
vention belongs will readily understand and stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
appreciate the practical advantages of that 
F, hinged in the box-piece C, attached to the 
class of inventions to which my present im 
shafts, of springs H, substantially as and for 
provement relates. 
the purposes set forth. 
In the first place the holdback device is not 
6. The combination, with shafts B, boxes 
attached to the harness part, so called, and 
does not require to be removed and attached C, and caps C, of springs H and spring sup- 9o 
to the horse every time the latterisharnessed; porting bolts b, substantially as and for the 
second, the horse can perform its work freer purposes set forth. 
and with less fatigue; third, the horse is not 
7. The combination, with shafts B and boxes 
so liable to interfere and trip in descending C, of adjusting clamping-pieces D and tight 
hills as with the old-fashioned holdback de- ening screw-shaft-E, substantially as and for 95 
vice, since that has a tendency to draw the the purposes set forth. 
t 
animal's limbs together, whereas by my in- 
8. The combination, with the shafts of a 
vention the limbs are left freer and the horse's vehicle, of an automatically-adjusting hold 
feet are not so liable to strike and interfere back device and regulating-straps g, substan 
as in the use of the old device; fourth, in case tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
of a runaway or the falling of a horse attached 
to a carriage, the holdback attachment, being 
separate from the harness of the horse, does 
not serve as a connection to hold the horse to 
My invention has been practically tested, riage, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with the holdback-rod 85 
Witnesses: 
THOS. H. DODGE, 
HAS. D. G.A.Y. 
SAMUEL A. PRESCOTT. 
OO 
65 
8o 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308193.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 308,193, 
E. F. O'HAWER. 
CAR COUPLING, 
Patented Nov. 18, 1884. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
w 
E. FRANK O'HAVER, OF MURPHYSBOROUGH, ILLINOIS. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
35ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 308,193, dated November 18, 1884. 
Application filed October 18, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
65 
... O all, whom it inval/ concern 
Be it known that I, E. FRANK OHAVER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mur 
physborough, in the county of Jackson and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Car-Couplers, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention has relation to car-couplers, 
my object being to provide means whereby the 
connecting-link may be received into the draw 
head at different elevations, thereby adapting 
the coupler to cars of different construction, 
and for the coupling and uncoupling of two 
cars without the necessity of standing in be 
tween the cars to be coupled; and the inven 
tion consists of certain features of construc 
tion hereinafter described, and specifically 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a lon. 
gitudinal section of a draw-head provided with 
my improvements, the section being taken a 
little to oneside of the centerthereof, and Figs. 
2, 3, 4, and 5 are details hereinafter described. 
Like letters indicate like parts in all the 
figures. 
A represents a draw-head, which is support 
ed in any suitable manner by a draw-bar, A', 
and across the front end of Which are cast 
spring-plate supports B, to each of which are 
secured spring-plates B-in this instance two 
to each support; but there may be instead 
plates extending entirely across the draw-head, 
as desired. The top of the draw-head is slot 
ted, as at C, which leads to a cavity, C. 
To the roof and within the cavity C is se 
cured in any suitable manner castings D-one 
on each side of the slot C-the purpose of which 
will be hereinafter explained and to the rear 
of the castings are others, D', running at right 
angles to the castingsD and parallel to the slot 
C. (See Fig. 3.) The castingsD are provided 
with bosses or raised portions D, which are 
longitudinally bored to form bearings for an 
axle, E, upon which is rotatably mounted a 
segmental rack, F, the periphery of which is 
provided with ratchet-teeth F, and the sides 
of which are beveled and provided with a gear, 
F, which gear meshes with beveled gears G, 
which are loosely mounted upon axles jour 
naled in the castings D, 
Upon suitable standards, H, is pivotally 
mounted a pawl, I, which is provided with a 
tooth at one end thereof, which tooth is held 
in contact with the teeth on the segmental rack 
F by means of a flat spring, I'. A spring, J, 
is coiled around the axle E, one end of which 
is secured to the draw-head, and the other end 
of which is secured to the segmental rackF, so 
that rack F is held, if not otherwise actuated, 
with its handle part toward the front of the 
draw-head. The rack or lever F is provided 
with an aperture for the reception of a chain 
or rope, the office of which will be hereinafter 
explained. 
In front of the gears G and rack F, and to 
the rear of the spring-plates B, is secured to the 
bottom of the draw-head-in this instance by 
staples or eyes L-a buffer-plate, L, against 
which one end of the spring-actuated pawl I 
rests. The bottom of the plate is cutaway, leav 
ing depending arms, which arms, after being 
turned up in connection with the staples, form 
means for fastening the plate to the bottom of 75 
the draw-head; and the top thereofisprovided 
with a tongue or extension, L, which retains 
the plate in position by abutting against the 
end of the slot C. The sides of the head are 
apertured or perforated, as at M, for the pas 
sage therethrough of a locking-lever, N, which 
lever is shouldered at its middle and trifur 
cated, forming arms N', the ends of which are 
struck up at a right angle to the main portion 
of the lever, thus forming projecting fingers or 
lugs O, which pass through holes O'in the draw 
head just above each of the plate-supporters. 
The other end, P, of the lever is connected to 
the gear-wheels G. by means of a rod, Q. It 
will be understood that a lever of this character 9O 
is arranged on each side of the draw-head. 
R, Fig. 5, represents one end of a link adapt 
ed to be used with my improved coupler, and 
is of that class known as the arrow link, it 
being provided with shoulders R; and in or- 95 
der to provide additional means for coupling 
the cars I have perforated my link at R for 
the reception of an ordinary coupling-pin, 
which may be passed through the aperture S 
in the draw-head and down between the spring- Ioo 
plates: Orin case the SpringSB' are continuous 
p 
that is, extending entirely across the draw 
head-perforations are made therein for the 
said pin. This being the construction, the op 
o 
O 
3O 
45 
2 
308,193 
5 
O 
eration is as follows: To set the head for coup 
ling, a pull on the rope or chain. K, which may, 
be extended to the top of a car or to any other 
desired position, will causetheleverto be drawn 
back against the tension of the spring J, and 
be held in that position, as shown in Figs. 1. 
and 3, by the pawl I, when the car will be ready 
for coupling. The link of an approaching car, 
now being inserted, will abut against the 
plate L, forcing the pawl Iback and releasing 
the ratchet, when by the tension of the spring 
J it will be quickly thrown to the front, rotat 
ing the gears G, which gears, by reason of 
their connection with the locking-leverN, will 
force the latter back against the walls of the 
head, and by reason of its being pivoted with 
in the aperture M the trifurcations will be 
forced against the outside of the head, throw 
ing the lugs or fingers O into the head, which 
lugs take into the shoulders R of the link R, 
thereby preventing its removal from the head. 
To uncouple the cars it is only necessary to 
pull the rope or chain K, when the gears will 
be rotated in an opposite direction, thus with 
drawing the lugs or locking -fingers O and 
placing the coupler in condition for coupling. 
The draw-head may be inverted, the lever F 
being below the same, and it and the gearing 
thus protected from the weather. 
If desired, the trifurcated levers may bear 
ranged within the draw-head, and the fingers 
thereof may be formed as a continuous annular 
flange; but this is not the preferred construc 
tion, as theinner side walls of the draw-head are 
not free from obstructions, as in the arrange 
ment of said levers as illustrated and described. 
Having described my invention and its op 
eration, what I claim is 
1. A draw-head having a series, of link-re 
ceiving openings, and levers passing through 
25 
4C) 
45 
the side walls of draw-head and provided with 
a series of link-locking fingers, in combination 
with devices for operating the levers, substan 
tially as specified. 
2. The combination of the draw-head A, 
having the supports B, with a series of spring 
plates, as B, substantially as specified. 
3. The buffer-plate L, in combination with 
a spring, pawl, ratchet, and gear, and with 
link-locking levers, substantially as specified. 
4. The segmental rack F, having the ratchet 
F upon its periphery, and the beveled gears 
F on its sides, in combination with gears G, 
substantially as specified. 
5. The segmental rack F, having a ratchet 
and beveled gear thereon, said rack meshing 
with a spring-actuated pawl and gears, in com 
bination with a draw-bar provided with suit 
able bearings, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
6. The combination of the herein-described 
rack F, the pawl I, spring I', standards H, 
rod Q, and lever N with the spring-plate L, 
substantially as shown and described. 
7. The gears G and F and ratchet F", in 
combination with the castings D, secured to 
the draw-head, substantially as shown and 
described. 
S. The combination of the link-lockingle 
vers, a spring-actuated segmental ratchet and 
intermediately-arranged devices for connect 
ing the ratchet with the levers, a spring-act 
uated pawl, and a buffer-plate, substantially 
as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
E, FRANK OHAVER. 
r 
55 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
W. W. KIMBALL, 
JOHN R. KANE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308293.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 308,293. 
 
A. W. TUBBS, 
THERMOSTAT, 
Patented Now, 18, 1884. 
21 
WITNESSES 
% (7.444 
Aace?e? 4-tiev 
NVENTOR 
4ZAe77 W. ZzZ6s 
. 
By 7 zS Attorileys 
(24.67 -a-r&c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ALBERT W., TUBBS, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
THERMO STAT. 
CATION forming part of letters Patent No. 303,293, dated November 18, 1884. 
Alication filed February 20, 1 
d. 
(No hotel.) 
5 5 
To (t/, 7t: Oil, if 72.(t/ coice it, 
Be it known that I, ALBERT W. TUBBs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Jersey 
City, in the county of Hudson and State of 
New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Thermostats, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the class of appa 
ratus employed for automatically completing 
the connections of an electric circuit when the 
temperature at the place where the instru 
ment is located has risen to a predetermined 
degree. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
instrument which will uniformly respond when 
Subject to a given amount of heat, which will 
not become useless or uncertain in its opera 
tions by long and continued use, which is sim 
ple in its construction, and especially adapted 
to the requirements of fire-alarm systems and 
Other similar purposes. 
The invention consists in constructing an in 
strument in substantially the following man 
her: Astout metallicinclosing-case is provided 
With a thin yielding corrugated diaphragm 
soldered tightly at its edges to the inner sur 
face of the case, thus forming a chamber which 
is designed to contain a small quantity of vola 
tile fluid. The top of the inclosing - case is 
provided with a suitable opening, through 
which the fluid may be supplied after the dia 
phragm is Soldered in position, and a cap 
Screw is fitted tightly within this opening when 
the fluid has been placed therein. Upon the 
Outer Surface of the diaphragm there is car 
lied a circuit-closing point, which is normally 
Separated from a corresponding circuit-clos 
ing Ol' Contact point carried upon an adjusting 
The adjusting-screw passes through 
SC'eW. 
an insulated Support carried upon a suitable 
base, to Which the inclosing-case is fastened. 
The inclosing-case is preferably pinned tightly 
to a Solid metal base, which in turn is fastened 
to the non-conducting support of the instru 
ment. Suitable binding-posts, which are re 
Spectively connected with the adjusting-screw 
and With the diaphragm and its circuit-clos 
ing point, are provided for placing the instru 
ment within an electric circuit. 
The instrument is designed to be employed 
for completing an electric circuit through an 
alarm or other signaling instrument for the 
purpose of giving warning when the tellneral 
ture to which it is exposed reaches a certain 
point; or it may be employed in connection 
with any other kind of work to which this 
class of instruments is usually applied. 
In the accompanying drawings. Figure 1 is 
a plan view, partly in Section, of an instru 
ment embodying the invention, and Fig. 2 is 
a vetical transverse section of the Sane. 
Referring to the drawings. A represents a 
Suitable spun-lmetal case for inclosing and Sup 
porting a diaphragm, B. The case A is pinned 
to a suitable solid metallic base, C, which ill 
turn is supported upon a non-conducting Sul)- 
port, E. Within the interior of the inclosing 
case A is placed the diaphragm B, which is 
preferably provided with annular corruga 
tions, as shown at l) b. This diaphragm is Sol 
dered at its edges to the inner surface. Of the 
inclosing-case A, as shown at C (t. A space, 
F, is thus left between the diaphragm and the 
upper surface on top, a', of the case A. This 
space is designed to be more or less filled with 
a quantity of \olatile fluid-such, for instance, 
as alcohol, turpentine, naphtha, or any othel 
fluid adapted to be expanded sufficiently Ol' to 
apolize under the influence of heat. 
lor the purpose of rendering the chanaber F 
air-tight and inclosing the fluid therein, it is 
necessary to solder the diaphragh in position 
before inserting the fluid, which might other 
Wise be unduly expanded or ignited by 'ea 
son of the heat required for soldering, and to 
afterward tightly close the opening which 
must necessarily be left for inserting the fluid. 
This is accomplished by forming in the top A 
a screw-aperture, h", into which a screw, H, is 
designed to fit tightly. The aperture h' is 
preferably in the form of the frustum of a Colne, 
converging toward its lower extremity, as 
shown in the drawings. By forming the aper 
ture and the screw II, which confornis thereto. 
in this manner, I am enabled to secure a more 
perfect joint. 
The quantity of fluid which is necessality to 
place in the chamber F may be varied Solne 
what; but in practice I prefer a quantity Sui 
ficient to occupy about one-third of the space. 
it is evident that when the chamber A. lhas 
thus been slightly filled with a few drops of 
volatile fluid-such, for instance, as alcohol 
and then subjected to heat, the expansion re 
SO 
S 
O 5 
O) 
O 
35 
 
308,293 
Sulting there from will cause the flexible dia 
phragm B to be thrown outward, and the de 
gree to which it will be thus pressed outward 
Will depend upon the amount of heat to which 
it is subjected. 
Upon the outside of the diaphragm, at or 
near its center, there is placed a contact-point, 
preferably of platinum, as shown at le. This 
point is designed to be moved, when the in 
strument is subjected to sufficient heat, against 
a corresponding circuit - closing or contact 
point, k, carried upon a suitable screw or other 
Support, K. The screw K passes through a 
suitable nut, k", which in turn fits tightly 
Within a non-conducting washer, L, resting 
upon the solid metallic base C, and the posi 
tion of the pointle' with reference to the point 
lic may be adjusted by turning the screw K a 
greater Or leSS distance within the nut. 
Two binding posts, M and M', are mounted 
upon the base E, and they are respectively 
connected with the case A through its base C, 
and thus with the point k and with the ad 
justing-screw K and circuit-closing point k". 
The parts are so adjusted that normally a small 
Sepalation will exist between the two contact 
points k and k. When, however, the instru 
ment is subjected to a predetermined amount 
of heat, the point k will be thrust against the 
point k, and an electric connection will be 
completed from the binding-post M' to the 
binding-post M through these points. 
In practice I have found it desirable to sub 
ject the instrument two or three times to a 
temperature. Somewhat greater than that at 
which it is desired that it shall, when in use, 
Complete the circuit-connections before finally 
adjusting the position of the contact-point k", 
for in this manner the volatile fluid becomes 
to a certain extent gaseous and the subse 
(quent operations of the instrument will be en 
tirely uniform. 
I claim as my invention 
l. The Combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the supporting-case A, the 
Corrugated diaphragm B, soldered thereto at 
its edge and forming therewith an air-tight 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
chamber, a volatile fluid permanently inclosed 
in said chamber, the contact-point k, carried 
upon said diaphragm outside the air-tight 
chamber, the metallic base C, the insulated 
contact-point k', extending within the case A, 
and against which the first-named contact 
point is designed to impinge when the volatile 
fluid is subjected to a predetermined amount 
of heat, and the non-conducting base E, upon 
which the metallic base C is carried. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of an inclosing-case, a dial 
phragm forming with said inclosing-case apel 
manently-closed air-tight space or chamber, a 
volatile fluid inclosed within Said chamber, a 
conical screw fitting into a conical opening 
formed in said case, for admitting said fluid 
into said chamber, a circuit-closing point car 
ried upon said diaphragm outside the air 
tight chamber, and a contact-point applied to 
Said circuit-closing point. 
3. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the case, the corrugated 
diaphragm, together forming a permanently 
closed chamber, a volatile fluid contained 
therein, the contact-point carried upon the 
outside of said diaphragm at or near its cen 
ter, the adjustable screw, the nut for receiving 
said screw, and the non-conducting washer in 
which said nut is inserted. 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
before set forth, with the case and the dia 
phragm, together forming the permanently 
closed air-tight chamber, of the volatile fluid 
contained therein, a contact-point carried upon 
the outside of the diaphragm at or near its 
center, and a Second contact - point, against 
which the first-named contact-point is designed 
to impinge. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 18th day of February, 
A. D. S84. 
ALBERT W., TUIBBS. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. LITTEE, 
HENRY N. BAUER. 
55 
70 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308394.txt	(Model.) 
No. 308,394, 
D. B. WIRT. 
MOUSE TRAP, 
Patented Now, 25, 1884. 
NZY ZN 
 
saaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaasses 
WITNESSES 
A 43 44%. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lillographer, washington, D. c. 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DIAN B. WIRT, OF HASTINGS, NEBRASKA. 
MOUSE -TRAP 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 308,394, dated November 25, 1884. 
Application filed May 27, 1884. (Model.) 
- 
- 
mice by lifting the gates from the sides which 
separate the central chamber from the parts 45 
at each end forming the trap. 
E is a trip having a top, E, loaded to give 
it the desired weight to preventit being turned 
by the rat or mouse until the animal has en 
tered entirely within the central chamber of 5o 
the trap. The tilt consists of a platform, E, 
having a perpendicular partition, E", sur 
mounted by the weighted portion E. 
Projecting from the bottom of the platform 
E are lugs H, which are pivoted to the sides 55 
of the trap by the pivots f, which enable it to 
tilt frona one side to the other, according to the 
position of the animal when entering either of 
the openings A. 
F are doors at the bottom of the trap, one 6o 
of which is at each end thereof, and are se 
cured by the pivots g to the sides of the trap, 
by means of which it may be swung open, and 
thus permit the rat or mouse to be removed 
from the interior of the trap. When a rat or 
mouse enters one of the openings A and rests 
upon the platform E, it tilts over to that side, 
and the weight E holds it in an inclined po 
sition, and in trying to get out he goes through 
one of the doors in the partitions D into the 
trap or chamber at that end of the device. 
Having described my invention, what I de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent and to claim 
S 
In a mouse-trap having sheet-metal lining 75 
d, wings d", and lugs d", the combination of 
gates D', made of a single piece of wire bent 
into form, as shown and described, and for the 
purposes set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 8o 
DIAN B. WIRT. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. F. WoRK, 
DAVIDS. TAGGART. 
Id 
5 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, DIAN B. WIRT, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Hastings, 
in the county of Adams and State of Nebraska, 
have invented certain new and usefullmprove 
ments in Rat and Mouse Traps, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
mouse and rat traps, and has for its object to 
produce an efficient contrivance to capture rats 
or mice. This object is attained by the de 
vice illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation. Fig. 2 is alon 
gitudinal section. Fig. 3 is a transverse sec 
tion. Fig. 4 is a plan view. Fig. 5 is a de 
tailed view of the wire swing-gate D. 
The letter A indicates the sides of the trap. 
The letter A indicates openings, of which 
there is one on each side of the trap, by which 
the rat or mouse passes to the inside thereof. 
B are perforated pieces of sheet metal, form 
ing a part of the top and the ends of the trap. 
C are racks to hold bait, and are made of 
sheet metal cut into strips, So as to leave open 
ings C, which permit the animals to see the 
bait, and are located on each side of a central 
opening in the top of the trap, covered by a 
removable lid or shutter, G, which is secured 
to thesides Aby the screws G', having rings, by 
means of which they may be readily unscrewed 
when it is desired to remove the cover. 
D are partitions of wood having a lining of 
sheet metal, d, which extend downwardly in 
an angular direction to the floor of the trap, 
and is provided with an opening in the center 
to receive the gate, and with lugs d", which 
Serve the purpose of bearings for the Swinging 
gates D', which are each made of a single piece 
of wire bent into the shape shown in Fig. 5. 
The Wings d' are to prevent the escape of the 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308495.txt	UNITED STATES PATEN'T OFFICF. 
IDMII, H()|FIN(']HO}']', OF BARMIEN, (}IERMIANY. 
P|ANO- FORTE ATTACHMENT. 
$PF8C3:'CAFTON forming part of Tuetters Patent No. 308,495, dated November 25, 1884. 
Application filed TFebruary 15, 1884. (No model.) P:\tomted in Germany Atugust 28, 1888, No. 3,803, and im I'rance September 
8:5, 1888, 2N0. 145,887. 
65 
? 
~ 
70 ??ZZ |/207)  7??/ C07ace772: 
Be it known that I, EMLTT, HOFING HOF'J', of 
the tOWn of Barmen, Germany, hawe imwented 
a meWand uSeful Imp1'Owemeratin IPian0-H'OrteS, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act deSCTription. 
'The object of my in wention is to pu'0wide a | 
1new and imp1'Owed attachment, for piam0 
fortes, by meanS of Which attachment tOneS 
reSembling th0Se produced on a harp, or tones 
produced by a quartet of String instrumentS, ! 
(wiolin, alto, wioloncello,) or tones resembling 
th0Se of the 0rgam 01 harmonium can be pr0 
duced. 
The in Wention consists in the combination, 
With a pian0, 0f a ba1' held to be in0Wable 
acrOSS the Strings, to which bar a Series of 
t0mgueS are fastened, whicla tongues have I'ub 
ber pieceS On the SurfaceS facing the StringS. 
By inter])OSing the tOIngueS between the ha1m 
merS and StringS the tOImeS of the piano are 
changed. 
Reference is to bellad to the accompanying 
dl'aWingS, forming part Of this Specification, 
in Which Simila]]'' letter'S Of referen(76 indi(?:ate 
c0rreSponding partS in all the figureS. 
lfigure 1 is a cr0SS-Sectional elevation of my 
attachmanent for pian0-fortes. Fig. 2 is a face 
wieW 0f the String-fralue of a pi:am0 provided 
With my imp1'0wed attachment, the ?attach 
ment being Sh0W m in different positions. IF'ig. 
}} is a face Wiew of a modification of the attach- | 
Iment. 
In front of the Strings A. a horizontal bar', 
B, iS held, Which is pressed upWard by Springs 
C, and iS C01anected by a rod, I), with a ped:l 
for mOwing it doWnWard. 
To the bar IB a Strip, IE, of flexible material 
iS Secured, Which projectS doWnWard, and has 
itS loWel': edge notched to form a Short tongue, 
H), for each String 0r cluster ofuniSon-stringS A. { 
To the front Surface of each tongue Jf' a hard 
lining, G, iS Secured, and to the real' Surface 
of each tongue. If' a piece of Soft rubbe}', H, is 
fastened. If desired, the pieceS G and H can 
be Secured to the loWe1' ends of independent 
tongueS Or StripS J, Suspended from the bar 
B, aS ShOWn in F'ig. 8. ThiS tongue-strip atnd 
itS rubber face and the independent stripS and | 
 
i their rubber faceS form the auxiliary ham 
merS in contr:l.distinction to the Ordinary ham 
anerS JK. 
If the t0neS Of the har}), harmonium, 0]'- 
ga1a, Ot' quartet Of St1'inged instruments are 
to be p]'0duced, the b:ar B is loWel'ed by means 
of the pedal, tlhereby bringing the tongues it' 
Or J in Such positions that the felt, hammers 
IK Will strike the pieceS G Om the tongues, 
alld will thus Cause the 1'ubber' ]pieceS H to 
Strike the Strings, Whereby the desired tones, 
Strongly reSembling thOSe Of the abowe - de 
SCI'ibed instI'uments, will be produced. AS 
SOOn aS the pedal of the bar? IB is released, the 
SpringS C raise the bar B and auxiliary h:um 
ImeTS tO Sucll all extent that t.lue lu:ummerS IK 
C:blan0t Strike the t0]ngueS. If desired, the 
ba.I lB can be connected With Once Of th(? tWO 
pedalS uSually prOwided On pianOS. 
I hav'e ShOW In my inap1'Owed attaclament com 
bined With an upright piano; but it can alSO 
be applie(, With Slight mn0difications, on Square 
alld grand pian OS. 
Hm using my ill]])rowed attachment, the 
player playS ** ?t.I')eggiO?? When the lhat'p tone 
is to be p]'oduced, and ** legato?? for the pro 
(duction of the tOIneS I'eSelmbling the Organ" and 
la?aramolaium tOimes. 
It will be tundlc1'StOOd that 
tlhis Similarity of tone existS only S0 far as the 
color' or character of the Sound of the harm0 
mit?m and OI'gam iS c0}ncerned, and c:ammot be 
1'efel']'ed to the pl'0lOnged SOulading Of these 
Hawing thuS described my in wention, Lclain 
as meW and desi]'e to Secure by HuetterS Patent 
1. The c0]mbination, in a piano p1'0wide(t 
With 0]rdinary lh:aunmel:'S and StringS, of a Se 
ries of auxiliary hammerS Suspended from a, 
Sliding bar parallel With the Springs, and 
c0mstructed and arranged aS deScribed, Where 
by they may be intel'pOSed betWeen the ordi 
nary lh:ummerS and StringS, each of Said attX 
iliary laammeI'S laawing a hardt plate on one 
face and a, rubbei? plate On the oppOSite face 
for cont:acting, respectively, With the ordinary 
hammePS am(d the StringS, Substantially aS Set 
forth. 
2. The combination, in a pi:umO |p1'OWided 
With the ordinary StringS and hammers, of 
instrumentS. 
~ 
95 
IO 
I 5 
2 5 
35 
45 
2 
308,495 
auxiliary laammers, the tongueS of Which are | betWeen the Ordinary hammers and St]'ingS, 
arranged in a continuous rOW and formed Of ! Subst:amtially aS Set forth. 
flexible material, and the heads of Which are 
made of S0ft imdia-rubber at the Side facing 
the StringS and of a haI'd material at the Side 
facing the OrdinaTy hammerS, and constructe({ 
aS described, Whereby they may be interp0Sed 
T''T'' I'`NTr^TT4*YT^T 
EM[II, II{}]'IN(PI()]' 
KART, 'T. M.A.YI91&, 
E}DUATRID ixNICISIST, 
WWit]]eSSeS: 
? 
~ ? 
? 
~ 
-{) |W)' 
-- 
{ } { 
II()]'i', 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308595.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 308,595. 
A Zey M. 
J. A., DALZELL. 
DOUBLE CARBON LAMP, 
Patented Dec. 2, 1884, 
-- 
As2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J. ALLAN DALZELL, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
D OUBLE CARBON LAMP. 
SECIFICATION criming part of Letters Patent No. 308,595, dated December 2, 1884. 
Application filed May 
24, 1883, (No model.) 
To a 2Z whom it in tely concei'il, 
Be it known that I, J. ALLAN DALZELL, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
5 State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Double-Carbon 
Lamps, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to electric-arc lamps of 
Io the kind known as double-carbon lamps, in 
which two sets of carbons are employed, and 
are combined with suitable mechanism where 
by one set may be kept out of action while the 
other is burning, but may be automatically 
I5 thrown into action when the carbons of the 
set that is burning are nearly consumed, Ol' 
when the arc between them becomes abnor 
lmally long. 
My invention is designed, in general, to im 
2O prove the simplicity and efficiency of this class 
of lamps, but more especially to furnish a sin 
ple and efficient lamp in which the arc may be 
shifted automatically at any time from either 
set of carbons to the other in case of an abno'- 
25 mal increase in the length of arc of the set in 
action, so as to produce a lamp that shall be 
double acting at any and all times, and not, as 
in many lamps of the general class referred to, 
restricted in its action and capable of shifting 
3o the are only from the set of carbons first burn 
ing to the other set, and then, as is generally 
the case, only when the carbons of the first set 
are consumed. My invention may, however, 
be applied in a lamp in which a shift from the 
35 first burning set to the other only is provided 
for. 
My invention consists, first, in combining 
with two sets of carbons, suitable means, elec 
trical or mechanical, for preventing the car 
4O bons of one set from burning, an electro-mag 
net in a derived circuit around the othel set 
of carbons for bringing the carbons of the one 
set into action by any suitable means, and an 
electric switch that serves to remove the cur 
45 rent from said electro-magnet simultaneously 
with its operation in shifting the arc. 
My invention consists, also, in the combina 
tion, with two sets of carbons, of a suitable 
shifting bar, lever, or other support, carrying 
5o a device whereby the One set of carbons may 
be brought into action, an electro-magnet in 
 
a delived circuit around the other set for op 
erating the said lever when the arc becomes 
abnormally long, and an electric switch for 
automatically and simultaneously removing, 
breaking, or shunting the current from said 
electro-magnet. 
MIy invention consists, also, in the combina 
tion, with two sets of carbons, of a recipro 
Cating rod, bar, lever, or other suitable device 6o 
carrying or actuating the devices that control 
the operation of the two sets of carbons in 
such a way as to prevent the formation of an 
arc, or at the proper time to allow an arc to be 
formed, two electro-magnets acting on saidle 
ver in opposite directions, and placed, respect 
ively, in derived-circuit connections around 
the two sets of carbons, and circuit-control 
ling devices, whereby the circuit of the mag 
met which throws the lever may be broken or 
changed simultaneously with the operation, 
and the circuit of the other magnet may be 
completed or changed so as to put the latter 
into opelative electrical connection with rela 
tion to the set of carbons rendered operative, 
While at the same time the other electro-mag 
net, which is for the time being in a derived 
circuit around the set from which the arc is 
shifted, is rendered electrically inoperative. 
tion of a movable releasing-stop for a clamp 
or clutch of the carbon-carrier for one set of 
carbons, and an electro-magnet in a derived 
circuit around the other set of carbons for Set 
ting said stop into position where the clutch 85 
Ol' clamp may be released. 
My invention consists, also, in the combina 
tion, with two sets of carbons, of feed clamps 
or clutches, or equivalent feed-controlling de 
vices, releasing stops or detents mounted on a 
reciprocating support, electro-magnets ar 
langed in derived-circuit connections, and ar 
ranged to act on the Support in turn and in 
opposite directions, and suitable means for 
electrically disconnecting the magnet, which 
is in a derived circuit around the set of car 
bons in action, and which throws the support 
to bring into action a new set of carbons, and 
connecting the other magnet into a derived 
connection around the set of carbons brought IOO 
My invention consists, also, in the combina- So 
75 
95 
ll. 
y 
My invention also consists in certain speci 
2 
308,595 
fied combinations of apparatus and devices to other suitaiole reciprocatory support, which is 
be set out in the claims following the subjoined 
beveled at points fif, as indicated, so that it 
description. 
may readily slip under the ends of the clutches, 
As a preferred method of carrying my in 
and when in position beneath the end of the 
vention into practice, I propose to use, as a 
clutch may act as a releasing - Stop therefor. 
means of holding a carbon out of action or ai. 
The lever G is pivoted on a suitable support 
lowing it to come into action, a movable de 
and swings in a horizontal plane, but is SO al 
tent, releasing-stop, or equivalent device for 
ranged that it will engage with but one clutch 
the feed-controlling mechanism, which is made 
at a time. When in engagement With One, it 
movable, and is so arranged that in one posi 
is out of engagement with the other, and vice 
tion it will prevent the carbon-carrier from 
versa. When it is out of releasing position 
moving, but in another position Will allow said 
With relation to a clutch, that clutch is unsup 
carbon to feed when the magnet system of the 
ported Save by the magnet systein, and the 
lamp operates the controlling mechanism in 
movements of the latter are insufficient to 
the usual way. With this movable stop, de 
cause it to release its rod, so that the rod re 
tent, or its equivalent is combined the de 
mains locked from movement. The other 
rived-circuit magnet that serves to actuate 
clutch, whose tail is over the releasing-stop on 
the support for said stop in such a way as to 
the other end of lever G, Will, however, be 
bring the stop or detent into operative posi 
released in the ordinary Way to cause a feed 
tion with relation to the feed - controlling 
of its carbon-carrier. The lever G is turned 
mechanism. I may, however, use any other 
to bring the releasing-stop of one clutch of the 
means for holding a Set of carbons out of ac 
other into releasing position by the action of 
tion and preventing the are from forming 
two derived-circuit electro-magnets, II II, 
suitably supported and acting oppositely on 
as, for instance, an electric switch that serves 
to break the circuit for one set of carbons, or 
an armature-lever, K, which extends from le 
close the same when it is actuated by the 
ver G between said magnets. Said magnets 
magnet in the derived circuit around the other 
are here shown as arranged to be placed in a 
Set. 
continuation of the derived circuit contain 
ing magnet C C through connection 5, which 
Some of the methods o' combinations and 
some of the various devices that may be used 
splits to said magnets, as indicated, the cir 
in carrying my invention into practice are 
cuit of one or the other being completed by a 
shown in the accompanying drawings, in 
switch, S, to the contact-points l', to which 
which 
the terminals of magnets II FI are connected, 
Figure 1 is a plan View of the magnet sys 
While the switch-level itself is connected with 
tem and the shifting-lever and its magnets. 
the wire 6, leading to the negative binding 
Fig. 2 is an elevation of the working parts of 
post of the lamp. In the position shown the 
the lamp, and shows the fol'm given to that 
circuit of magnet II" is complete through l' 
portion of the shifting-lever that works under 
and the switch-level; but magnet II is out of 
the clutch and constitutes in effect the releas 
circuit, its connections being broken at h. 
ing-stop for the clutch. Fig. 3 shows another 
Switch S is suitably mounted on the plate A 
form of clutch. Fig. 4 illustrates the appli 
and is provided with pins h h, against which 
cation of my invention to an electric switch 
the armature-lever impinges to throw the 
for switching the two sets of carbons into or 
switch onto one or the other of the contacts, l 
out of circuit. 
l", according to the direction in which it is 
Referring to Fig. I, A indicates the plate 
thrown. The pole ends of the magnets have 
which supports the lamp mechanism; BIB, a 
projectious of Some non-magnetic material let 
fixed main-circuit electro-magnet of horse 
into their faces to prevent sticking of the ar 
shoe form, and having the coils of wire upon 
mature. In the position of the parts shown 
its two legs. 
the carrier F is locked, because the free end 
C C indicate a similar delived-circuit elec 
of clutch IE is unsupported, and, Owing to the 
tro-magnet, which is lounted by its cross 
removal of its releasing-stop, cannot be released 
piece on a rock-shaft, A, mounted on uprights 
during the movement of the magnet system in 
rising from plate A, and provided with two 
regulating the feed of the other carrier. Clutch 
crank-arnas, D D, One of which is shown in 
E operates in the ordinary manner, its releas 
Fig. 2, and which are connected by links LL 
ing-stop being in position. Magnet II is in 
with two clutches, E. E", for the carbon-car 
circuit and II out of circuit, while armature 
riers F. F. The poles of the magnet C C pro 
IK in its extreme position is so far away from 
ject toward the poles of BB, and arearranged 
the magnet H that it is not operated thereby 
to swing in the face of the latter and to impart 
during ordinary fluctuations in the length of 
movement to the feed-regulating clutches or 
arc. If, however, the arc becomes abnormally 
equivalent devices in substantially the man 
long, owing to sticking of the carbon rod or 
ner set forth in my prior Patent No. 274,916. 
from the feeding out of the carbon, at which 
In that patent the tails of the clutches rest 
time a suitable pin on the Calbon rod prevents 
upon the floor of the lamp, which floor is, in 
farther downward movement thereof, then 
fact, a releasing-stop for the clutches. In the 
magnet H becomes sufficiently strong to draw 
present case the releasing-stops are supported 
armature K Suddenly over, by which opera 
by or formed on the ends of a lever, G, or 
tion the stop for clutch E is withdrawn, so 
SO 
IOC 
I O5 
I IO 
I I5 
2C) 
IO 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
308,595 
OO 
EIO 
I 
5 
I 
I 
5 
2 
5 
SO 
that carrier F will be locked by its clutch, 
and the releasing-stop for E is placed in oper 
ative position, so that carrier F may be fed in 
the ordinary way. At the same time the 
switch S is operated by the lever K striking 
a pin, h, thus breaking the connection atland 
completing the connection at l for magnet H, 
which is then ready to throw the lever and 
the stops back to the original position in case 
of abnormal increase in the length of arc of the 
pair of carbons them in action. The distance 
between the pins h h is such that the lever K. 
will throw the switch S only when near the 
end of its movement in one direction or the 
other, so that the armature may complete its 
throw without interference from the magnet 
pole that it is leaving. By this arrangement 
the light may be shifted automatically from 
either set of carbons to the other at any time 
in case the set in action fails to work properly. 
I do not limit myself to any particular ar 
rangement of the circuits of the magnets and 
switch, the idea and purpose being only to a u 
tomatically bring said magnets into operative 
electric condition with relation to the electric 
arc alternately and singly, and to cause an 
automatic shifting of the Switch to throw out 
the magnet which draws the armature over 
and to throw in the magnet on the opposite 
side, so as to place the latter in condition for 
causing a reverse movement of the armature 
and the support for the releasing-stops or other 
devices that serve to throw the sets of carbons 
alternately and singly into and out of action, 
in case Such revelse novelment should be ren 
dered necessary by an abnormal lengthening 
of the arc between the set of carbons in action; 
nor do I limit myself to the employment of 
the movable releasing-stops for causing the 
alternate lock and release of the two sets of 
carbons, as any other devices may be em 
ployed which will when in one position lock 
a carbon-carrier Ol' carbon and when in an 
other position allow said carrier to feed and 
act, in the Ordinary Way. 
It is obvious that the alternate locking and 
releasing might be accomplished by the ap 
plication of suitable stops or locking devices 
to other forms of feed-controlling devices be 
sides to ordinary clutches. The armature-le 
wer and support G. may be constructed and 
mounted in other ways, provided they be prop 
erly arranged to retain the position into which 
they are placed by the action of either magnet 
until drawn in the opposite position by the 
other. 
Another form of clutch that might be used 
in place of those shown in Fig. 1 is shown in 
Fig. 3. In this figure, M.Mindicate two straps 
pressing against the carbon-carrier on one 
side, and on the other carrying a pivoted 
clutching toe or dog that has an extended arm, 
in, upon which a spring acts to normally hold 
the dog against the carrier and prevent it 
from feeding. The clutch is supported by a 
link, l, or other attachment to the magnet 
system. 
serves, when in proper position, to release the 
clutch when lowered; but when said stop is 
moved by the lever to one side into the posi 
tion indicated the spring keeps the clutch in 
engagement with the carrier, and prevents the 
same from feeding. 
Instead of mechanical devices for determin 
ing which of the two sets of carbons shall act, 
I may employ an electric switch to complete 
the circuit to one set of calibons and simulta 
neously break the circuit for the other set. 
Such an arrangement is shown in Fig. 4, in 
which lever L or other reciprocatory support 
carries two circuit-closing springs, p p", one 
of which makes connection with a contact 
point, 22, and the other with a contact-point, 
24. The lever is connected with the positive 
pole of the lamp, and the contact-points 22 
24 with the carbon-carriers F E and their 
carbons, respectively. In one position of the 
lever (that shown) the circuit of carbon-car 
rier F of one set is completed and the circuit 
of the other broken, and vice versa, in the 90 
other position of the lever G. The regulat 
ing-magnets are not shown, for the sake of 
simplicity, but they are placed in the circuit 
in the ordinary way, which need not be re 
cited in detail. The main-circuit magnet 
might be in the connecting-wire 9, and the de 
rived-circuit magnet in the connecting-wire 
connecting the switch-lever S with the nega 
tive side of the lamp. In the one position of 
the parts the carrier IF is in circuit, and the 
magnet which is adapted to throw the arma 
ture K, so as to bring the other set into cir 
cuit and throw the first set out, is in the de 
lived circuit around the carbons in action. 
In the other position the conditions are re 
versed, with the obvious result of rendering 
the apparatus capable of shifting the light 
from either set of carbons to the other auto 
matically in case the Set in action fails to op 
erate properly. 
The parts are suitably proportioned to pre 
serve the general circuit as the lever G. shifts. 
I have herein described a breaking of the 
circuits containing the magnets and the car 
bons; but it is obvious that the same results 
might be accomplished by a short-circuiting 
of the parts, in a manner well understood by 
electricians. 
I do not limit myself to any particular con 
struction of mechauisu. Or form of individual 
parts, as the same may be varied in many 
ways. 
Other magnet systems may be employed, 
and other feed-regulating devices made use of. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, in an electric lamp, of 
two sets of carbons, suitable means for pre 
venting one set of carbons from burning while 
the other set is in action, an electro-magnet in 
a derived circuit around the latter set for 
bringing the first-named set into action when 
the arc resistance of the Set in action Teaches 
a predetermined point, and an electric switch 
A stop, n, supported by lever L, I controlling the circuit of said electro-magnet, 
5 
25 
35 
45 
65 
 
4. 
308,595 
and actuated thereby so as to remove the cur 
rent from said electro-magnet simultaneously 
with the shifting of the are from the one set 
of carbons to the other. 
2. The combination, in an electric lamp, of 
two sets of carbons, a reciprocating lever con 
trolling suitable means whereby a set of car 
bons may be brought into or out of action, elec 
tro-magnets acting on said lever in opposite 
directions and placed in derived-circuit con 
nections around the carbons, and an electric 
switch controlling the circuits of said electro 
magnetsin the manner described, so as to throw 
out the magnet which actuates the lever, and 
to throw the other magnet into a derived cir 
cuit around the set of carbons brought into 
action. 
3. The combination, with two sets of car 
bons, of means for locking and releasing one 
set of carbons, an electro-magnet in a derived 
circuit around the other set of carbons for ef 
fecting the release of the first set, and an elec 
tric switch for automatically cutting out or 
short circuiting said magnet simultaneously 
with the release of the carbons thereby. 
4. In a double-carbon lam), the combina 
tion, with a carbon-carrier for One set of car 
bons, of a clutch or clamp, a novable releas 
ing-stop therefor normally held out of releas 
ing position, and an actuating electro-magnet 
for throwing said releasing-stop into releasing 
position, said electro-magnet being placed in 
a derived circuit, which is closed around the 
other set of carbons, while such set is in action. 
5. The combination, with two sets of car 
bons, of feed clamps or clutches therefor, re 
leasing-stops for Said clamps mounted on a re 
ciprocating support actuating the same in op 
posite directions, and arranged in derived cir 
cuits around the carbons, and means for break 
ing the delived circuit of a magnet simulta 
neously with the movement of the reciprocat 
ing support thereby, and at the same time 
closing the derived circuit containing the other 
magnet. 
6. The combination, with two carbon-car 
riers, of feed-controlling mechanism therefor, 
a reciprocating lever or other support for the 
releasing devices of said mechanism, and ar 
ranged in the manner described, so as to al 
low the operation of but one feed-controlling 
mechanism at a time, derived-circuit electro 
magnets for actuating said supportin derived 
circuit connections around the carbons, and an 
electric switch for throwing one of said mag 
nets into circuit and the other out of circuit, 
as and for the purpose described. 
7. The combination, with two carbon-car 
riers, of feed clamps or clutches therefor, a re 
ciprocating feed-shifting bar or support, two 
electro-magnets for operating Said support in 
opposite directions, placed, respectively, in de 
rived-circuit, connections around the carbons, 
and suitable circuit-controlling devices for ad 
mitting the electric current to either of Said 
electro-magnets simultaneously with the op 
eration of the support by an abnormal increase 
in the length of arc in the set with which the 
other is connected, as and for the purpose Set 
forth. 
S. The combination, with the two carbon 
carriers, of the two clutches, the reciprocating 
level carrying the releasing-stops, and the tWO 
electro-magnets in derived circuits, respect 
ively, around the carbons, and provided with 
means for automatically switching them into 
and out of circuit. 
9. The combination, with two sets of car 
bons, of a reciprocating light-shifting lever, 
two electro - magnets in derived-circuit con 
nections, and two circuit-controlling points, 
whereby the current may be admitted to Said 
electro-magnets separately and in turn. 
10. The combination, in a double-carbon 
lamp, of two sets of carbons, a shifting-lever, 
G, two electro-magnets, H H', acting thereon 
in opposite directions, and an automatic cir 
cuit-controlling switch for removing the elec 
tric current from the magnet which throws 
the lever, and simultaneously admitting cur 
rent to the other laagnet. 
11. The combination of the feed-shiftingle 
ver G, electro-magnets H. H., connected to a 
derived circuit around the carbons, and an 
electric switch, S, as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
12. In a double-carbon lamp, the combina 
tion of a movable releasing-stop for the clutch 
or clamp of one set of carbons, and an electro 
magnet in a derived circuit around the other 
set of carbons for setting Said stop into posi 
tion where the clamp or clutch may be re 
leased. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 13th day 
of April, A. D. 1SS3. 
J. ALLAN ID ALZELL. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. C. COFFIN, 
THOS, TOONEY. 
75 
SO 
85 
95 
IOO 
I D5 
IC) 
3 5 
 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308696.txt	C. P. PETER SON, 
BELT SHIFTER AND HOLDER. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
IWWEWTOR 
o 
AttorneS 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 308,696. 
C. P. PETER SON, 
BELT SHIFTER AND HOLDER. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 2, 1884. 
  
 
 
tIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIITTI 
- 
I?iTITAT - 
uRANALIIIIHHHHHHTu. 
??? 
WITWESSES 
???lue 
J.WVEWTOR 
? ??? ???? - 
- 
Attorney 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
C. P. PETER SON. 
BETT SHIFTER AND HOLDER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
No. 3O8,696, 
Patented Dec. 2, 1884. 
 
7JW WEWTOI? 
Attornets 
PEERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D., c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES P. PETERSON, OF RICHMOND, INDIANA. 
BELT sHFTER AND HolDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 3O8,696, dated December 2, 1884. 
Application filed October 4, 1884. (No model.) 
TO 
25 
35 
2o a/7 ?/???, it ??? ????ern * 
Be it known that I, CHARLES P. PETERSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Rich 
- mond, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Indiana, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Belt Shifter and Holder, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
h9S. ???? invention relates to a belt shifter and 
holder, the objects being, first, to improve the 
details of construction of the holder for which 
Letters Patent were granted to me July 8, 
1884, and numbered 301,517, byproviding one 
or more of the arms of said holder with idlers 
in lieu of the spherical bearings therein shown, 
in order that the belt may be more readily 
shifted from the holder to the band pulley or 
wheel; second, to provide an improved shifter 
for removing the belt from or placing it in en 
gagement with the band pulley or wheel; and, 
third, to provide a shifter which shall besim 
plein its construction and thoroughly effective 
in its operation. 
With these ends in view the invention con 
sists in the combination, with a disk, of arms 
connected therewith, one or more of Said arms 
being provided with idlers, while the re 
mainder are provided with spherical or ball 
bearings. 
The invention further consists in the com 
bination, with the disks of the belt-holder, of 
a laterally-adjustable bracket or frame and a 
laterally-movable shifter. 
The invention further consists in the com 
bination, with a laterally-sliding shifter, of 
an arm secured thereto to aid in placing the 
belt upon the band pulley or wheel. 
The invention further consists in the detailed 
construction of holder, and in the combinations 
of the various partshereinafter fully described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a belt-holder constructed in accord 
ance with my invention, and showing one form 
of my improved shifter applied thereto. Fig. 
2 is a detail view of one of the arms of the 
disk, showing the same provided with idlers. 
Fig. 3 is a detail view of another form of 
shifter detached, showing the position and ar 
rangement of the different parts of the same 
when vertically attached to the holder. Fig. 
4 is a view showing the position of the parts 
when said shifter is adjusted horizontally, and 
Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the shifter 
shown in Fig. 1. detached. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
like letters of reference indicate correspond 
ing parts in all the figures, A represents a 
disk or sector provided with a central open 
ing, a, larger in diameter than the driving 
shaft upon which it is intended to be placed. 
I find it convenient to provide the disk or sec 
tor A with an open slot, B, sufficiently wide 
to admit the driving-shaft, thereby enabling 
the said disk or sector to be readily placed on 
or taken off the shaft without uncoupling; 
but the disk may be constructed without the 
opening B and slipped on the end of the shaft, 
if considered advisable. The disk A is pro 
vided with a series of radial arms, C, at suit 
able distances apart about its circumference. 
The arms may be formed integral with the disk 
or sector, or they may be secured thereto with 
or without radial adjustment. The preferred 
manner of securing them, however, is to pro 
vide the ends of the said arms with open slots 
a, and clamp the arms to the disk or sector A 
by means of bolts or set-screws D. The arms 
Care provided with an outer section, C, ex 
tending at right angles thereto. One or more 
of the sections C, at the point where the belt 
leaves the holder when it is removed from the 
said holder to the band pulley or wheel, are 
provided with openings for the passage of a 
shaft, b. Upon said shaft b are mounted a 
series of idlers, c. By the use of these idlers 
the belt may be more readily shifted from the 
holder to the band-pulley than with the spher 
ical bearings, for the reason that they turn 
very readily; but as these idlers do not move 
laterally, I employ the ball-bearings for the 
remainder of the arms C, for by their use 
the belt is readily shifted. The idlers, at the 
point where the belt leaves the band-pulley, 
aid materially in placing it on said band-pull 
ley by imparting or allowing a free forward 
movement of the same, and forward movement 
at this point is all that is necessary. The re 
mainder of the arms Care equipped with the 
spherical bearings described and claimed in 
the patent granted me and beforementioned, 
45 
55 
SO 
OO 
308,696 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
5 5 
and aure placed about that part of the pulley bed-plate. This pinion is operated by a rod 
which receives the belt, thereby allowing the 
connected rigidly there with, by which means 
belt free and easy side or lateral motion to the 
it will be seen that when said pinion is turned 
starting point or pulley. 
it will move the rack-bar in a lateral direc 
F represents the shifter, which is attached 
tion. 
to the disk A, preferably by a slotted arm, G, 
W represents arms, which have reduced 
by which means it will be seen that it may be 
screw-threaded ends a, and also have screw 
adjusted to or from the disk. The end of this 
threaded lugs or extensions w, projecting from 
arm F is turned at right angles to the body 
their sides near their lower ends. These arms, 
portion, and is provided with an open slot, d, 
when the shifter i arranged in the position 
and is secured to the body of the shifter, or, 
shown in Fig. 3, are attached to the rack-plate 
more properly, the bed H, by bolts or other 
by means of the screw-threaded extensions ac, 
Suitable means. As said bed or track is pro 
which pass through the openings in the rack 
vided with a series of perforations or open 
plate, and are held in place by nuts.- 
ings, e, it will be seen that it may be adjusted 
To arrange the shifter above described in 
upon the attaching-arm in a lateral direction. 
a horizontal position, as shown in Fig. 4, the 
The bed or track is provided with a groove 
attaching-arm is seculed to the disk A in the 
or channel, f, and is provided at its ends with 
sanne manner as the arm shownin Fig. 1. The 
ulp Wardly-projecting l tags /, which are pro 
arms W are then removed from the openings 
vided with any number of registering perfora 
in the rack-plate and their reduced screw 
tions, h. Between these lugs, at each end of 
threaded ends passed through the openings in 
the bed or track, is mounted a pulley, i, which 
the rack-plate, and are Secured upon the un 
is vertically adjustable in said lugs. 
der side of the rack-plate by means of nuts, as 
G' represents a casting winich is adapted to 
already described. Moreover, with this form 
slide in the bed or track, said casting having 
of shifter it will be seen that the arms W may 
upwardly-projecting arms.j, having in Wardly 
be adjusted for different widths of belt. 
extending lugs k at their upper ends. The 
The devices above described are simple in 
arms j are provided with holes or openings l 
their construction and effective in their oper 
upon their rear sides for the attachment of a 
ation, and provide ready and convenient 
cord. Said cords pass over the pulleys and 
means for shifting a belt and holding the same 
down within easy reach of the operator, so that 
When not in use. 
the slide or casting G may be moved from one 
Changes in the details of construction may 
end of the bed Or track to the other. If de 
be resorted to without departing from the 
sired, however, the cords may be passed un 
spirit of my invention; hence I would have it 
der said pulleys, and then over pulleys in the 
understood that I do not limit myself to the 
joists of the room, thence to any part of the 
precise construction and detailed arrangement 
building, from which point the shifter may be 
of parts herein shown and described, but re 
operated. The outer arm of the shifter-that 
serve to myself the right to make all such 
is, the arm farthest from the belt-is provided 
slight changes and alterations as may properly 
with an outwardly-extending rod having a 
fall within the scope of my invention. 
bent end. By the employment of this rod it 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
will be seen that the transferring of the belt 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
from the holder to the band pulley or wheel 
Patent, is 
is greatly facilitated, as it pushes against the 
1. As a means of aiding the shifting of a belt 
edge of the same and serves to lift it upon the 
from its holder or support to the belt-pulley, 
pulley. It will thus be seen that to remove 
the employment of idlers for imparting a free 
the belt from the band-wheel to the holder it 
forward movement to the belt. 
is necessary only to pull the cord farthest from 
2. In a belt-holder, idlers supported in close 
the inner end of the track, when the slide or 
proximity to the belt-pulley, said idlers being 
casting will be moved in that direction, and 
adapted to impart a free forward movement to 
thus transfer the belt. To replace the belt 
the belt as it is shifted from its holder to the 
upon the wheel, the other cord is pulled, which 
belt-pulley, as set forth. 
carries the slide to the other end of the frame, 
3. In a belt-holdier, a Series of movable 
and the belt sliding upon the Spherical balls of 
spherical bearings and one or more arms sup 
the holder is readily transferred. 
porting idlers arranged in close proximity to 
In Figs. 3 and 4 I have shown a modified 
the belt-pulley, and adapted to support the 
form of shifter. In this case a plate having 
belt as the latter is shifted from the pulley. 
upwardly-extending sides is secured to the at 
4. In a belt-holder, the combination, with a 
taching-arm. In this plate slides a rack-bar, 
series of armas, of a series of idlers and a se 
U, having perforations or openings on its 
ries of spherical bearings, substantially as set 
upper side, as shown at it. The teeth upon 
forth. 
this rack - bar extend but about half the 
5. The combination, with a disk provided 
length of the bar; and adapted to engage said 
with laterally-eXtending arms, of idlers se 
teeth is a pinion-wheel, V, which has commu 
cured in One or more of Said arms and ball 
nication. With said rack-plate by reason of an 
bearings in the remainder, substantially asset, 
opening being cut in one of the sides of the 
forth. 
- 
7? 
SO 
90 
95 
OO 
IO5 
I I. ? 
II 5 
I25 
16. The combination, with a holder, of a 
bed-plate, a slotted arm having its end bent 
laterally and slotted, and a shifter sliding in 
said bed-plate, substantially as set forth. 
17. The combination, with a bed-plate hav 
ing a groove or channel, of a slide or shifter 
having upwardly-extending arms, and means, 
substantially as described, for shifting said 
slide, as set forth. 
18. The combination, with a bed-plate hav 
ing a groove or channel, of a slide or shifter 
having upwardly-extending arms having in 
Wardly-bent ends, and means, substantially 
as described, for effecting the shifting of said 
slide, substantially as set forth. 
19. The combination, with a bed-plate, of a 
laterally-sliding shifter and an arm secured to 
one of the arms of said shifter, substantially 
as set forth. 
20. The combination, with a bed-plate, of a 
laterally sliding shifter having upwardly ex 
tending arms provided with inwardly-extend 
ing ends, and an arm secured to the outer arm 
of the shifter and having an inwardly-bent 
end, as set forth. 
21. The combination, with a bed-plate, of a 
laterally-sliding shifter having upwardly-ex 
tending arms, pulleys mounted in the ends of 
the bed-plate, and cords connected with said 
shifter and passing over said pulleys, as set 
forth. 
22. The combination, with a bed-platehaving 
upwardly-extending ends, of pulleys mounted 
in said ends in such manner that they may be 
vertically adjusted, a slide or shifter having 
upwardly-extending arms having inwardly 
extending ends, a rod having a bent end se 
cured to the outer of said arms, and cords se 
cured to said shifter and passing over the pull 
leys, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES P. PETERSON. 
Witnesses: 
ALVIN E. CROCKER, 
RICHARD H. KING. 
55 
75 
9O 
IO 
2C 
25 
6. The combination, with a disk provided 
with arms having radial adjustment, of idlers 
mounted in one or more of said arms, and 
spherical bearings mounted in sockets of the 
remainder of said arms, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. The combination, with a disk provided 
with an opening to admit a shaft to a central 
perforation, of arms secured to the disk in 
radial adjustment, idlers mounted in one or 
more of said arms, and spherical or ball bear 
ings secured in the remainder of said arms, 
substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination, with a vertically-ad 
i5 justable disk, and provided with laterally-ex 
tending arms, of idlers mounted in one or more 
of said arms, the remainder of said arms be 
ing provided with ball-bearings fitted in sock 
ets thereof, substantially as set forth. 
9. In a belt-carrier, the combination, with 
a vertically-adjustable disk, of a series of ra 
dially-adjustable arms, one or more of said 
arms having openings, idlers mounted on a 
shaft passing through said openings, and ball 
bearings mounted in sockets of the remainder 
of said arms, substantially set forth. 
10. In a belt shifter and holder, the combi. 
pation, with a holder, of a laterally-sliding 
shifter, as set forth. 
11. The combination, with a holder, of a 
laterally-sliding shifter and an arm secured 
to said shifter, as set forth. 
12. The combination, with a holder, of a 
laterally-sliding shifter and an arm having a 
bent end secured to said shifter. 
13. The combination, with a holder, of a 
laterally-adjustable bed-plate and a laterally 
sliding shifter. 
14. The combination, with a holder, of a 
bed plate or track, an arm secured adjustably 
to said holder, said bed-plate being adjusta 
bly attached to said arm, and a laterally-slid 
ing shifter, substantially as set forth. 
15. The combination, with a holder, of a 
bed-plate adjustably secured to said holder, a 
laterally-moving shifter sliding in said bed 
plate, and an arm for aiding in placing the 
belt upon the band-pulley, as set forth. 
45 
35 
Y 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308796.txt	(No Model.) 
N. A. RANSOM. 
ak 
CAS MACHINE. 
No. 308,796, 
Patented Dec. 2, 1884. 
NS NN 
R N  
Giri 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
N N 
 
 
 
c 
|RYify it ball, 
aaya 2%ava 
8 
a 
e 
 
 
 
s 
Mid/7 es S6S 
7, 
S.A.--)- Nisce. 
NEE 7/7 we?t/o/, 
(N 
(S 
W 
$3& 
<S 
32 TSSFS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NEWMAN A. RANSOM, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
GAS MACHINE. 
- 2E:IFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 308,796, dated December 2, 1884. 
Application filed October 13, 1883. (No model.) 
O 
55 
60 
- 
l 
- 
to atti. 7th O77, it nutt i? conce77. 
these balls greatly increases the vaporizing 
Be it known that I, NEWMAN A. RANSOM, of 
surface and capacity of the carburetor. It is 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
important that they should be non-absorbent 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful. 
and free from cups or cavities wherein thema 
Improvements in Gas-Machines; and I do 
terial might be retained. 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
The coil composing the carburetor is sur 
and exact description of the same, reference 
rounded by a jacket, W, of sheet metal or other 
being had to the accompanying drawing, form 
suitable material, and a flame, T, is applied 
ing part of this specification, and to the fig 
beneath the coil, to maintain an equable tem 
perature of about S0, or at any desired point 
ures and letters of reference marked thereon. 
My present invention relates to that class of 
that may be found most desirable. As shown 
gas-machines wherein hydrocarbon vapors are 
in the drawing, the flame T is supplied by the 
generated and combined with air or other gas 
combustion of the gas made by this machine, 
eous fluid to form the illuminating agent; and 
and conducted beneath the carburetor through 
it consists in certain improvements, more es 
the pipe S". 
pecially applicable to the machine or appa 
To cut off the flow of gas should the flame 
from any cause be extinguished, I have pro 
ratus for which Letters Patent were granted to 
vided a thermostatic regulator, consisting of 7o 
nie April 3, 1883, as will hereinafter be more 
a bar, W, attached to the cock. S', with its free 
fully described, and pointed out in the claims. 
The figure of the accompanying drawing 
end, when expanded by the heat of the flame, 
represents a Sectional elevation of the appa 
resting upon support T. When the flame is 
ratus, in which C represents the supply tank 
extinguished, the bar W' contracts, and, with 
or reservoir, situated under ground, prefera 
drawing from the support T, fails by grav 
ity, and by SO doing turns off the gas. A weight, 
bly outside the building, and at a distance 
therefrom. The Supply-pipe B, through which 
W', attached near the free end of the bar W. 
adds greatly to the certainty and effectiveness 
the tank is filled, is carried up outside the 
building, or to any convenient point, and is 
of its movement. 
provided with a cap, A, or any suitable valve. 
thin copper tubing, or other material having 
The bottom of the tank is located slightly 
the property of expanding and contracting 
above the bottom of the feed-box G, with which 
quickly. 
it is connected through the pipe D and valve 
E. The feed-box G is elongated, so as to pro 
The overflow-tank M is arranged to receive 
ject below the floor-line, and of such propor 
any surplus or residuum which might other 
tions relatively to the reservoir or supply. 
wise collect in the carburetor and impede the 
tank C that the Supply of hydrocarbon liquid 
flow of air and gas. Said tank may be buried 
can never rise above a given point, the ut 
in the earth at any desirable point, being con 
most limit being determined by the height of 
nected to the coil of the carburetor by the pipe 
L', and provided with an outlet-pipe covered 
the column contained in the reservoir, and, if 
desired, a float controlling a valve in the sup 
by a cap, M', through which, when the cap is 
ply-pipe D may be employed to regulate the 
removed, a pump may be inserted and the ac 
height of the liquid. 
cumulated liquid drawn off. 
The pulley H, carrying the elevator-belt, is 
The hydrocarbon is supplied to the carbu 
retor in suitable quantities by the buckets I, 
rotated by the meter P, as in my former patent. 95 
The air is supplied by the force-pump N, of 
attached to a belt or chain passing around pull 
leys H and F and dipping into the liquid. 
any suitable and well-known construction, and 
The contents of the buckets are discharged in it is arranged to be operated by the descent of 
the hopper or funnel at the upper end of the the weight O. 
feed-box, and Conducted through pipes KK' Between the pipe Q, leading from the meter Ioo 
P, and the pipe R', connected to the bottom of 
to the carburetor, as in my prior patent; 
5o The carburetor is constructed in the form the coil of the carburetor L, is interposed a 
of a coil or Worm, and is partially filled with drying - chamber, Q, containing a horizontal 
balls impervious to the liquid. The addition of perforated or reticulated shelf or diaphragm 
The expansion - rod W may be made of 8o 
85 
3O 
35 
45 
75 
90 
308,796 
45 
55 
for the reception of unslalked lime or other ab- the flame from any cause whatever be extin 
guished, and, if proper electrical connections 
sorbent of moisture, through which the air is 
are provided, may be made to signal the fact 
forced to dry it. One head, R., of the box or 
that the gas is out, or that the flame has de 
chamber Q is removable, being clamped tightly 
against the end by a screw, R, working through 
creased below the minimum. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
a yoke or stirrup pivoted to the box. This is 
to allow the lime or other absorbent material 
aS OW 
1. In a gas-machine, and in combination with 
to be removed and renewed. 
the carbureting-coil and its inclosing-casing, a 
The drying-chamber may, if desired, bein 
gas-jet located within the casing, and a ther 
serted in the pipe S between the carburetor 
mostatic device located above and exposed to 
and the service-pipes. 
the direct action of the flame, for shutting off 
In order to give timely warning that the 
the supply of gas when the flame is extin 
weight has nearly run down and that the ma 
guished, substantially as described. 
chine needs attention, alarm or signaling de 
2. In a gas-machine, the combination of a 
vices are employed, consisting of an electric 
carbureting-coil, an inclosing-casing, a gas-jet, 
bell, V, and battery U in a normally-open cir 
also within the casing, for maintaining a heat 
cuit, which is closed by the descent of the 
ing-flame, a cock in the gas-jet supply, and an 
weight O. To effect this latter operation, a 
expansible rod connected to the said cock and 
spring contact - piece, O', surmounted by a 
arranged above the gas-jet, and adapted when 
coiled spring, O', and extending above but not 
the flame is extinguished to contract and shut 
in contact with the terminal X, is arranged 
off the gas-supply to the jet, substantially as 
beneath the weight O, so that the latter, before 
described. 
it has reached the bottom or floor, shall close 
3. In a gas-machine, the combination of a 
the circuit, thus causing the bell V to ring and 
carbureting-coil, an inclosing-casing, a gas-jet, 
give warning that the machine needs attention. 
also within the casing, a cock in the gas-jet 
It is obvious that other well-known arrange 
supply pipe, an expansible rod connected to 
ments and devices may be employed for clos 
said cock and arranged above the gas-jet, and 
ing the circuit, and that instead of a normally 
a weight for insuring the movement of the rod 
open circuit a closed circuit may be employed, 
when released by the contraction of the rod, 
in which case the descent of the Weight will 
Substantially as described. 
open instead of close the circuit; or a small dy 
4. In a gas-machine, the combination, with a 
halmo generator may be set in motion by the 
carbureting-coil, of balls of non-absorbent ma 
falling weight, or the weight caused to ring an 
terial arranged within the pipe composing the 
ordinary non-electric bell. 
coil, for the purpose of increasing the vapor 
The advantage derived from protecting and 
izing-surface of the carburetor, substantially 
heating the carburetor is, that the evaporation 
of the hydrocarbon liquid is thereby facili 
as described. 
tated, rendering it possible to use the whole of 
74 gasoline, where before only a part of S7 
gasoline could be vaporized. 
The use of the thermostatic regulator pre 
vents dangerous accumulations of gas, should 
E. A. CHERITREE, 
JOHN F. GREENLEAF. 
NEWMAN A. RANSOM. 
Witnesses: 
7 5 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308896.txt	(No Model.) 
J. S. HENDRICKSON, 
THILL COUPLING, 
No. 308,896, 
 
Patented Dec. 9, l884. 
- WITNESSES 
A. & wage. 
9. S & Clees 
(a, -7&s (face 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES S. HENDRICKSON, OF OLMSTED, OHIO. 
TH La COUPNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 308,896, dated December 9, 1884. 
Application filed March 10, 1884. 
(No model.) 
8 
IC 
2 5 
30 
35 
45 
55 
65 
ing end with the spurg, adapted to fitinto a cor 
responding wedge-shaped recess in the iron B. 
F is a rod reaching across the arch of the 
shaft from bolt E to the T-shaped shaft-iron 
G. This iron G has a shoulder provided with 
head h of the brace F, said shoulder-socket 
and bulging head corresponding, respectively, 
to those, e, e, and f, located at the other end 
of said rod. The T-iron G is fastened to the 
shaft, and may be provided with a series of 
devices for the accommodation of the rod F 
at different points on the shaft. 
My coupling may be made with the ordi 
nary clips in common use on vehicles, or with 
any other equivalent means of attachment. 
My coupling is preferably made of malleable 
iron, but is not confined to that. 
To attach the shaft or shafts or to remove 
them I loosen the segment C by unscrewing 
the nut d, and so sufficiently open the eye K 
and drop down the tip or tips of the shaft or 
shafts to such a point as where it or they will 
easily unhook from the draft-bolt. 
The combination of spur g and the wedge 
shaped recess effects the function of a hinge 
to segment C, upon which it practically turns - 
as nut d on bolt D is tightened or loosened. 
To all whom, it may concern : 
Beit known that I, JAMESS. HENDRICKSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Olmsted, county of Cuyahoga, and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Vehicle-Shafts; and I do a socket, f', adapted to receive the bulging 60 
hereby declare the following to be a descrip 
tion of the same, and of the manner of con 
structing and using the invention, in such full, 
clear, concise, and exact terms as to enable 
any person skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to construct and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of the specification, the princi 
ple of the invention being herein explained 
and the best mode in which I have contem 
plated applying that principle, so as to dis 
tinguish it from other inventions. 
It will be seen and understood that in this 
description of my invention I use the terms 
shaft and shafts' as equivalents to the 
ordinary terms pole' and thills,' inas 
much as the invention is applicable either to 
a vehicle-pole or to vehicle-thills. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure is a per 
spective view of a shaft provided with my 
improvements. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of 
a portion of the mechanism shown in the pre 
ceding view. Fig. 3 is a detail perspective 
view of the shaft-coupling. 
A is a shaft, made of wood and curved, and 
also tapered at its rear portion. 
B is the main shaft-iron, formed at its low 
er end into the cylindrical segment b, and 
concaved on its inner surface, b', where it as 
sists in composing the open eye K. This iron 
is firmly fastened to the shaft by bolts E, and 
has a shoulder, e, which shoulder is provided 
with sockete, for the reception of the bulging 
head fof the rod F. 
C is a Supplemental segment to the Seg 
ment b, made in a separate piece from it, 
and has its lower inner surface, c, concave, 
adapting it to complete the rotund open eye 
K. as the two said segments are brought to: 
gether. Segment C also has its broad end c' 
so beveled as to fit closely upon the beveled 
end b of the iron B. Segment C is provided 
with the longitudinal slot I, adapted to allow 
bolt D to move freely in it as said segment is 
loosened and inclined at different angles. Bolt 
DisrigidinironB, and with nutdfurnishes the 
locking and unlocking mechanism of the coup 
ling. Segment C is also provided at its taper 
What, therefore, I claim is 
1. In a shaft-coupling, the combination, 
with shaft-iron B, provided with wedge-shaped 
recess K, of segment C, provided at its ex 
treme forward end with the wedge - shaped 
spurg, formed in the longitudinal line of said 
segment and fitted into said recess K, said 
spur and recess acting connectedly as a hinge, 
said segment provided also with the longi 
tudinal slot I, adapted to receive bolt D, sub 
stantially asset forth. 
2. The combination, with arched shaft A, 
and the independent shaft-irons B and G, re 
spectively secured to the shaft at opposite 
extremities of its arch, said irons respectively 
provided with sockets e' and h, of rod F, span 
ning the arch of the shaft, and having its ex 
tremities respectively provided with heads f 
and f', fitting in said sockets, substantially as 
Set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing to 
be my invention I have hereunto set my hand 
this 6th day of March, A. D. 1884. 
Witnesses: 
JAMESS, HENDRICKSON, 
H. A. WISE, 
THOS. B. HALL. 
9O 
95 
So 
IOO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US308996.txt	(Modei.) 
 
J. SCHOENHOF, 
PANNIER, 
Fig. 2- 
Patented Dec. 9, 1884. 
Fig. 3. 
WITNESSES: 
NVENTOR: 
22ucy 6cs-or-S^s 
By his littorneys, 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
- 
JACOB SCHOENHOF, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PAN. N. 
E. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 308,996, dated December 9, 1884, 
Application filed December 14, 1883. 
(Motel.) 
O 
6 5 
To all ution, it inctly conce71 : 
Be it known that I, JACOB SCHOENHOF, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented certain Improvements in Panniers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
In my Patent No. 257,769, granted May 9, 
1SS2, I have shown a pannier or skirt consist 
ing of a body fabric (the back breadth of the 
skirt) with a series of spring-distended ruffles 
attached to it, one below another, and extend 
ing from the waist down to the bottom of the 
skirt. This construction of pannier is found 
to be liable to the objection that the upper ruf 
fle has, or the two or three upper rufiles have, 
to sustain almost the entire Weight of the 
dress, while the lower ruffles are almost free 
from pressure, the result being that the upper 
ruffles are liable to Soon become flattened out 
of shape and unable to properly fill out and 
uphold the dress. 
My present invention constitutes an im 
provement upon that pannier, its object being 
to overcome this objection. This result lat 
tain by omitting from the pannier the upper 
ruffie or ruffles, which are subject to this strain, 
and replacing them by a bustle which is 
formed of a single ruffle stiffened by a num 
ber of horizontal distending-Springs arranged 
in such mannel that the bustle is rigid when 
subject to downward Strains, but collapses on 
being pressed upward. 
Figure I of the accompanying drawings is 
a rear elevation of the pannier and bustle, and 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation thereof. Fig. 3 is a 
horizontal section on the line 33 in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged fragmentary view show 
ing the method of construction. Fig. 5 is: 
fragmentary side elevation of the bustle and 
part of the pannier. 
A is the pannier proper, and 3 the bustle 
portion of the same, the two, however, being 
one construction and forming my improved 
pannier. 
The 
pannier may be sewed to this skirt, as shown 
in Fig. 2, or buttoned to it, as shown in Fig. 
5; or the two may be secured together in any 
manner, either permanently or removably. 
The pannier A. consists, essentially, of a 
body fabric, ci, and a series of spring-distended 
rtifies, lo l, arranged. Successively one beneath 
C is the skirt worn beneath the dress. 
another. It also requires a lacing device, In, 
as shown in Fig. 3, to draw the ends of the 
distending-springSO c together and bow out 
the pannier to the desired extent. 
The construction of the ruffles l l and their 
distending-springs C C is preferably the same 
as shown in my Patent No. 273,165, dated 
February 27, 18S3, and requires no particular 
description here. The body fabric a may be 
the back breadth of the skirt, C, and the lac 
ing device in he arranged within the skirt; or 
the Wings of the lacing device may constitute 
the back breadth of the skirt and the fabric (t. 
be exterior thereto; or both may be exterior 
to and independent of the skirt. The body 
fabric should extend from the waistband d 
downward, as shown, its upper portion, where 
it passes beneath the bustle B, being plain or 
unprovided with ruffles l b. 
The bustle B consists of a fabric, e, distended 
by a series of parallel horizontal springs, ff. 
It forms in effect one very deep ruffle similar 
to the ruffles b b, but stiffened by several 
springs One above another, instead of by only 
One Spring at its bottom. The ends of these 
Springs are preferably connected in similar 
manner to that shown in my said Patent No. 
273,165, the end of the Spling being secured 
by a clip, h, to the fabric e at a little distance 
from the point where this fabric is attached to 
the body fabric or skirt, as clearly represented 
in Fig. 4, thus leaving a flexible portion, i, of 
fabric intervening. These end fastenings are 
covered by a strip, i, Seamed at one edge and 
fastened by clips is at the other. A strip or 
tape, 9, is attached to the bottom spring of 
the blastle and extends down the back of the 
pannier, being fastened to each spring c, and 
its lower end being carried forward, as shown 
in Fig. 2, and fastened to a spring, c', in the 
bottom of the body fabric a. 
The bustle is so stiffened by its several 
Springs that it is capable of sustaining the 
Weight of the dress without losing shape, leav 
ing the Tuffles below only to hold out the dress 
When the wearer sits down, the 
behind. 
bustle may collapse by its springs folding to 
gether, this capability being due to the ab 
sence of the vertical or diagonal bracing 
Springs customarily used in bustles, which 
render them rigid and prevent their collaps. 
ing. When the wearer rises, the tapeg, be. 
SO 
85 
90 
OO 
45 
 
g 
308,996 
IO 
ing pulled downward by the pannier, on which 
the weight of the dress falls, draws the bustle 
down again to its proper shape. 
By constructing a pannier in the manner de 
scribed-that is to say, with its upper portion 
having a broad ruffle in the nature of a col 
lapsible bustle adapted to resist a considerable 
downward strain, but capable of collapsing 
readily under a pressure from below-I pro 
vide a proper support for the dress, and at the 
same time avoid any discomfort to the wearer. 
I am aware that bustles having only hori 
Zontal and no diagonal springs have been used, 
and I do not claim this. 
My pannier is an entirety, and the bustle 
portion B forms an integral part of the same. 
This bustle portion B may be attached by any 
of the well-known methods of Securing fab 
rics together or securing one garment to an 
other. 
I do not claim in this application any of the 
features shown in my application for patent, 
No. 93,296, filed April 28, 1883. 
I claim as my invention 
A pannier comprising a body fabric, ct, a Se- 25 
ries of narrow spring-distended ruffles, bb, at 
its lower part, a broad spring-distended col 
lapsible ruffle or bustle portion, B, at its top, 
containing a series of parallel horizontal 
springs, ff, and a flexible strip, g, connected 3O 
with the lower edge of the bustle portion B 
and with the several ruffles b b, substantially 
as Set forth. 
In witness whereof I have helreunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 35 
Witnesses. 
JACOB SCHOENHOF. 
m 
Witnesses: 
HENRY CONNETT, 
ARTHUR C. FRASER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309097.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 309,097. 
  
M. H., ROBB, 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
Patented Deo. 9, 1884. 
riggsgoggle OsascottsExtra-Esasteguia 
i 
: A. 
Q 
2 2 
 
  
 
  
 
  
- 
WITWESSES 
-261-2-2 
y 64 
 
 
 
*2%.27% 
Attorneys 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARCUS HENRY ROBB, OF OAK RIDGE, MISSOURI. 
FIRE-ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 309,097, dated December 9, 1884. 
Application filed October 16, 1884. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARCUS H. ROBB, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Oak 
Ridge, in the county of Cape Girardeau and 
State of Missouri, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Fire-Escapes, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to fire-escapes, and it 
has for its object to provide improved means 
for making the same and regulating the speed 
of the descent of the user; to provide improved 
means for preventing the rope, apparatus, or 
person using the same from coming in contact 
With the building when a descent is being 
made, and to so pivot the brake or lever with 
in the Casing by means of a spring-bolt that it 
may be readily removed when so desired or 
found necessary. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide at a slight cost a fire-escape which shall 
combine simplicity of construction with effi 
ciency and durability in use. 
With these ends in view the invention con 
sists in the combination, with a suitable cas 
ing, of a pivoted brake or lever and a rope 
connecting said casing and lever, and also con 
nected to and holding the user so that the 
speed of descent will be controlled by the 
Weight of the operator. 
The invention further consists in the com 
bination, with a suitable casing, of a pivoted 
lever and a spring-pressed catch for holding 
said lever in place. 
The invention further consists in the com 
bination, with a suitable casing carrying a 
suitably journaled roller, of a pivoted lever 
or brake carrying a roller so arranged that 
when said lever is closed it (the roller) will be 
in close proximity to that of the casing, and a 
rope arranged upon a series of pulleys and 
adapted by the weight of the user to close the 
lever, and thus regulate the speed of descent. 
The invention further consists in theim 
proved construction and detailed arrangement 
of the various parts, hereinafter fully described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a fire-escape constructed in accordance 
with my invention, showing the same applied 
and in position for descent, also showing the 
brace for holding the rope, operator, and ap 
paratus from contact with the building while 
making a descent. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
vertical section. Fig. 3 is a side elevation; 55 
and Fig. 4 is a detail view in perspective of 
parts detached. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
like letters of reference indicate correspond 
ing parts in all the figures, A represents a cas- 6o 
ing, one of the sides of which is open, as shown 
at a, and also open at its upper and lower 
end. 
In the closed side of the casing A, about 
midway between the two ends, is provided a 65 
hole or opening, b, in which hole or opening 
is journaled a roller, c, which extends a slight 
distance within Said casing A. 
C represents a lever or brake, which is piv 
oted within the casing A, at the upper end 7o 
thereof, by means of a spring bolt or key, d. 
By the use of this spring bolt or key the lever 
C may, when desired or found necessary, be 
readily detached from the casing with but lit 
tle trouble and a very slight expenditure of 
time. 
At about the center of the lever C is pro 
vided an enlarged portion, D, which is recessed 
or cut away, and in said recessed portion is 
journaled a roller, e, which, when the lever is 8o 
closed or within the casing, is in close proX 
imity to the roller journaled in theside of the 
casing. At the point within the casing where 
the enlarged portion enters said casing is cut 
away to receive it, as shown at f, this re 
cess being necessary, inasmuch as the en 
larged portion is somewhat wider than the 
passage of the casing. Thus it will be seen 
that when said lever is closed there will be a 
passage between it and the rear wall of the 
casing for the passage of the rope upon which 
the casing slides in making a descent, the rope 
passing between the two rollers already de 
scribed. There is also a groove formed on the 
rear end of the casing, near the upper end 95 
thereof, and a similar groove is also provided 
on the lever or brake on its inner side, near its 
upper end, as shown at g. 
Adjacent to the lower end of the enlarged 
portion D is secured by any suitable means a IOO 
rope, h. 
Upon the closed side of the casing, 
within the same, and a slight distance from its 
75 
25 
35 
A5 
 
309,097 
75 
90 
lower end, is journaled a pulley, i, the shaft of 
which has bearing in the sides of the casing. 
Upon the handle of the brake or lever, on the 
inside of the same, is pivoted in a bracket, j, 
a roller or pulley, le. The rope h, already 
mentioned, has a catch or snap-hook secured 
to its free end, and said free end is passed 
underneath the pulley i and then up and over 
the pulley k, passing between said pulley and 
the end of the handlet of the lever C, and is 
guided and held in place by said end of the 
handle, which extends below the pulley and is 
provided with a groove. The bracket.j, which 
fits around the lower end of the lever C, and 
in which the pulley Ic is journaled, has a slot, 
which slot extends nearly the entire length of 
said bracket. A set-screw, in, Secures Said 
bracket in place, from which it will be seen 
that said bracket may be vertically adjusted. 
Said set-screw also secures in place a flat 
spring, n, the purpose of which will be here 
inafter mentioned. 
Einged to the open side of the casing A is 
a catch or latch, o, the free end of which is 
bent inwardly and engages a recessed portion 
On the opposite side of the casing, thus hold 
ing the lever within the casing and preventing 
it from flying out. It will be seen that by 
making the pulley k adjustable the power or 
weight required to draw the two levers together 
can be regulated by adjusting said pulley (c. 
By the use of the flat spring in, which is de 
pressed to a certain extent by the latch or 
catch o, and serves to press or hold the lever 
C within the casing, roller e and roller c will 
be in close proximity upon the rope on which 
the descent is made, and will be pressed to 
gether thereon with sufficient force to support 
the instrument in its place until the weight or 
person is attached. Upon the front side of 
the casing, near the lower end thereof, is pro 
vided a diagonal slot, p, terminating at its up 
per end in an enlarged opening. In this en 
larged Opening is journaled a roller, q, which 
extends within the casing A, and serves as 
a guide for the rope while a descent is being 
made. Pivoted to the side of the casing is a 
catch, , of Substantially - shape. 
When a descent is to be made, the escape is 
adjusted as shown in Fig. 1, and the user at 
tached by any preferred arrangement of straps 
and bands to the ropel. As already described, 
the weight of the operator serves to draw the 
lever further within the casing, and in this 
manner the descent is regulated, inasmuch as 
the weight draws the rollers of the lever and 
casing in close contact. Should the descent 
be too rapid, it may be controlled or slowed 
by pressing the handles of the lever and cas 
ing together, while if the descent were too 
gradual it might be increased by grasping the 
top of the casing with the hand and support 
ing part of the weight thereby, thus removing 
a portion of the weight from the rope h, which, 
as already described, by being attached to 
pulleys of the casing and lever, controls the 
speed of descent. 
A fire-escape constructed as above described 
is simple, effective, and durable, and may be 
manufactured and supplied at a slight COSt. 
Further, by its use the speed of descent may 
be controlled by the user. 
I have mentioned a brace or guard for pre 
venting the rope, apparatus, or person using 
the same from coming in contact with the 
building while a descent is being made. This 
brace or guard consists of a bar hinged to the 
building and having a forked or U-shaped 
end, in which the rope rests. This brace or 
guard is held in a horizontal position by means 
of a stop or Spring. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a fire-escape, the combination, with a 
suitable casing, of a pivoted ever, and a rope 
attached to said lever at one end and Conject- - - 
ing said lever and casing, for controlling the 
speed of descent, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a fire-escape, the combination, With a 
suitable casing, of a pivoted lever, a rope at 
tached to said lever at one end, and connect 
ing said lever and easing, and straps or bands 
for the support of the user, attached to said 
rope, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a fire-escape, the combination, with a 
suitable casing having a suitably - journaled 
roller, of a lever carrying a roller, and piv 
oted within said casing, and a rope connect 
ing said lever and casing, whereby the speed 
of descent is regulated, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. In a fire-escape, the combination, with a 
suitable casing, of a lever pivoted within said 
casing, said casing and lever each carrying a 
roller, and a rope passing over a series of pull 
leys for controlling the speed of descent, said 
rope supporting the user, substantially as Set 
forth. 
5. In a fire-escape, the combination, with a 
suitable casing carrying a Toller, of a pivoted 
lever carrying a roller, a pulley journaled upon 
the inner side of the casing near its lower end, 
a pulley journaled near the lower end of the 
lever, and a rope secured to said lever pass 
ing under the pulley of the casing and over 
that of the lever, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a fire-escape, the combination, with a 
suitable casing, of a pivoted lever, said casing 
and lever each carrying a suitably journaled 
roller, a pulley journaled near the lower end 
of the casing, a vertically-adjustable pulley 
mounted on the lower end of the lever, and a 
rope secured to the lever and engaging said 
pulleys, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a fire-escape, the combination, with a 
suitable casing, of a pivoted lever, a spring 
pivoted to said lever, and a latch, substan 
tially as set forth. 
8. In a fire-escape, the combination, with a 
suitable casing carrying a suitably journaled 
roller, of a pivoted lever having an enlarged 
recessed portion at about its center, a roller 
journaled in said recessed portion, and a rope 
rs 
w 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 
309,097 
3 
side of the lever, and a latch, substantially as lo 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
MARCUS HENRY ROBB. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD ROBB, 
HENRY T. BURNS. 
connected with the lever and casing for con 
trolling the speed of descent, substantially as 
set forth. 
9. In a fire-escape, the combination, with a 
5 suitabie casing, of a pivoted lever, rollers 
journaled to said lever and casing, said lever 
and casing each having a pulley at its lower 
end, a rope secured to the lever and engaging 
said pulleys, a spring secured upon the rear 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309197.txt	M. CLARK. 
STORE SERVICE SYSTEM 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 16, 1884. 
(No Model.) 
No. 309, 1971, 
WITNESSES: 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 309, 197, 
M, CLARK, 
STORE SERVICE SYSTEM. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Deo, 16, 1884. 
 
3 
1 ATTORNEY 
(No Model.) 
N0. 309,197, 
M. CLARK, 
STORE SERVICE SYSTEM, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 16, 1884. 
2 2. 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
 
BY 
T-Z- 
ATTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MILTON CLARK, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STORE-SERVICE SYSTEM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 309,197, dated December 16, 1884. 
Application filed August 13, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
To a 2Z Zwho7, it inctly conce77 : 
Be it known that I, MILTON CLARR, of New 
York, in the county of New York and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Store-Service Sys 
tems; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, which will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to cash and parcel car 
rying systems for stores; and it consists, broad 
ly, in a single forwarding-track for all the sta 
tions of each counter, individual return tracks 
or ways inclined in direction opposite to that 
of the forwarding-track, means or devices for 
elevating the car above and to a position at 
an incline with the forwarding-track, for auto 
matically giving to said car an impetus and 
delivering it upon said forwarding - track, 
mechanism for automatically returning such 
delivering devices to their primitive posi 
tions, wire-tighteners for taking up the slack in 
the tracks or ways, and in such other details 
as will hereinafter be distinctly described. 
Referring to the annexed sheets of drawings, 
Figure 1, Sheet 1, represents inside elevation 
a system, constructed and arranged in accord 
ance with my invention. Fig. 2, Sheet 2, is a 
plan view thereof. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are views 
in enlarged detail, respectively, of the elevat 
ing and delivering devices and the tightening 
devices. 
A single forwarding-track is employed for 
each counter, the same being made to take in 
all the stations of the respective counter to 
which it belongs. This forwarding-track, be 
ing secured at the point farthest from the 
cashier's desk, is inclined in the direction of 
such desk at a degree sufficient to cause the 
car, when delivered thereto, to descend by 
gravity. The manner of supporting this for 
warding-track is by rods depending from the 
ceiling at each station of the counter to which 
said track belongs. 
For the return of the car to the clerk after 
inclined in opposite direction to the forward 
ing-track. The terminals of these tracks are 
secured to the same depending supports to 
which the forwarding-track is Secured, these 55 
supports being sufficiently far away from the 
heads of the clerks, and the cars being caused 
to descend by the devices hereinafter de 
scribed. 
Reference being had to the several parts by 
letter, A. represents the cashier's desk, and B 
the counters, having one or more stations. 
C represents the main forwarding-track, that 
is suspended at One end from one of the Sup 
ports, ct, depending from the ceiling, and is in 
clined toward the cashier's desk, where its 
other end is secured to a support, a, above 
his head, the said track, however, being sup 
ported by suitable attachment to each of the 
rods a, which are in its path. 
D represents the tracks or ways for the re 
turn of the car 2 to the clerk, which are in 
clined in direction opposite to the forwarding 
track, and are secured at their terminals to 
the supports at at the clerks ends and a sup 
port, a, above the head of the cashier. 
On the supports at above the forwarding 
track, at gradually-increasing height propol 
tional to the difference in the incline of such 
track as it recedes from the cashiers desk, 
are located the devices I employ, on which to 
place the car to elevate it above the forward 
ing-track automatically, giving it an initial 
impetus by which it operates the device for 
delivering it upon the track, whence it is car 
Iried forward to the cashier. 
The devices 
consist of a straight bar, b, having end por 
tions, b', by which it is made to set out some 
what from the line of the forwarding-track, 
and at its forward end is provided with a 
hinged jointed extension, b", that comes over 
or is situated perfectly over and in line with 
said forwarding-track. Immediately under 
the forward end or portion of this extension 
b' is a spring, b', for restoring it to position 
after it has been thrown downward or de 
pressed by the car, which is made to descend 
upon it. To the rearward portion of the 
hinged extension is attached one end of a cord 
or other flexible media, c, which is passed 
5o having been forwarded to the cashier, I em- upwardly over a pulley, d, having its bear 
ploy separate and individual tracks or ways, ling in a small upright or standard, d, ex 
3C) 
35 
95 
IOO 
O 
45 
g 
309,97 
SO 
8 
5 
- 
2O spring b' restores the hinged arm to its for- 
tending upwardly from the bar b at its rear limiting myself to the particular devices here 
end, as shown. These bars can be turned in shown, for while I have described certain 
upon the supports a, in any direction, but constructions and arrangements as very ma 
when adjusted to the position or directions terial, departures can be made therefrom which 7O 
5 desired are secured against movement. The would come under the Scope of my invention, 
free end of cord changs down to within reach it being my object and intention to claim, 
of the operator, and is provided with a broadly, the invention herein set forth. 
weighted handle, as shown. When the clerk 
The general subject-matter of receiving the 
desires to forward a car, he elevates the end conveyer from a track and restoring it to the 75 
Io of cord c to allow its bight to descend, where- same track from which it was received is not 
upon he places the car on the cord, then ele- claimed herein broadly, as that forms the Sub 
vates it by pulling the cord downwardly. ject of an application now pending. 
This tightens the cord and gives to its por- 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
tion between the pulley d and the extension b' is 
1. A store-service system consisting of a 
I5 an incline, causing the car to run down upon 
the jointed arm or extension, depressing it single forwarding-track for all the stations of 
by its weight to rest upon the track, and the a counter, and individual return-tracks for 
said car is thus transferred or delivered upon each counter or station, substantially as de 
the way. As soon as the car is delivered the scribed. 
2. In a store-service system, the combination 
mer position. The bars b may be clamped of a single forwarding-track for all the sta 
either at their ends to the supports a, (see Fig. tions of a counter, supported at each station 
3,) or at their middleportion, (see Fig. 1,) this and inclining toward the cashier's desk, Sep 
latter manner of attachment, however, being arate and individual return-tracks inclined go 
25 that preferred by me, as a better and more oppositely to the forwarding-track, and a car 
equal balancing of parts is gained thereby. adapted to travel such tracks, substantially 
These elevating and delivering devices are as described. 
arranged above the forwarding - track suffi- 
3. In a store-service system, the combina 
ciently high to allow the passage thereunder tion, with a main forwarding-track, of suitable g5 
means whereby the car is elevated above the 
At the clerk's end of the return tracks or track, given an initial impetus, and auto 
ways D, I have arranged flexible devices onto matically transferred or delivered upon the 
which the car runs and is lowered to within track, substantially as described. 
convenient reach of the operator, these de- 
35 vices not being claimed herein except in com- track inclined toward the cashier, and indi 
bination with others serving to comprise the vidual return-tracks inclined oppositely there 
present complete system, they being the broad to, suitable means whereby the car is elevated 
subject-matter of another application filed by above the forwarding-track and automatically 
me. They consist of a support or bar similar delivered upon it, and also means at the end IO5 
4o to the barb, a cord, e, kept taut by a counter- of the 1eturn-tracks whereby the car is auto 
weight, and when the car descends the track matically lowered to within reach of the op 
it depresses the cord and sinks to within reach erator, substantially as described. 
of the clerk. 
5. The combination of a single inclined for 
45 secured to tightening devices, which consist iter, supports at each station to which it is at 
of a clamp, E, Secured to the rod a?, a screw- tached, and automatic devices located on said 
threaded arm, t1, hinged thereto, as at g', and supports above the track for elevating the car, 
an angle-arm, h, which is borne on the end of giving it an initial impetus and delivering it 
the arm and itself bears a pulley, i, around upon the track, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of the inclined forward 
bending and consequent rupture, and is then ing-track, individual oppositely-inclined re 
secured by twisting, as shown. At each side turn-tracks, depending supports to which they 
of the alm on the bolt is a nut, 11, the oper- are all attached, the elevating and delivering 
ation of taking up slack in the track being devices clamped to said supports and consist. I2C 
55 by moving the nuts on the rod 0, which there- ing of the barb, hinged jointed extension b', 
by carries with them the angle-arm. By vir-i spring b', cord c, and pulley d, and the re 
tue of the joint of the tightener can be turned ceiving devices for the car at the end of the 
in either direction in which it is desired to return-tracks, all substantially as described. 
extend the track. 
6o Adjustable mechanism may be employed track and supports a, of the bar b, hinged 
for varying the incline of the track, such de- jointed extension a, spring bearing against 
vices, however, not having been herein rep- said extension, cord c, and pulley d, all sub 
resented. 
At the cashiers end the tracks or ways are warding-track for all the stations of a coun- I Io 
4. The combination of a main forwarding- IOo 
so which the track is passed, thus avoiding sharp 
7. The combination, with the forwarding- I 25 
The operation of my invention will be thor- 
8. The combination, with the tracks or ways I 30 
65 oughly understood from the foregoing descrip- of a store-service, of a supporting-bar, the 
tion, and I do not desire to be understood as clamp E, a screw-threaded armhinged to said 
stantially as described. 
II5 
3O of the car. 
- 
 
309, 197 
3 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as Io 
clamp, the angle-arm carrying a pulley, 
and adjusting-nuts, all substantially as de- my own I affix my signature in presence of 
scribed. 
9. The combination, with the track or way 
of a store-service system, of adjustable devices 
for keeping them taut, the same bearing a 
pulley round which the terminal of the way 
is passed and then secured, all substantially as 
described. 
MTON CARR. 
two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
IEDWARD E. ELLIS, 
M. P. CAI.T.A.N. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309297.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 309,297, 
J. H. FOSTER, 
BOX NAILING MACHINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 16, 1884, 
al 
S S. S 
 
A. SEs s s 
e% 
N & n { 
Es s t 
s 
s 
2 22 22 
ES 
e 
%-6- 
s See Jo/tru?. Zoster, 
Z7tuevo 7, 
 
 
N. PEERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheet S 
Sheet 2, 
 
 
 
2222222222222 
S. 
7ttest. 
Zuve 7 to 7, 
16 (232/ 
... pters. Photo-Lithographor, Washi'stol. C. 
No Model.) 
No. 309,297. 
J. H. FOSTER, 
BOX NAILING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 16, 1884, 
OOZ 
  
 
 
<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<?S 
 
T 
?=~~~~::~~======,No.-~-5E: 
~~~~:=?No.-No.----- 
--(X,\S?)(-Fi) 
?zn!== 
//*N. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 309,297, 
J. H. FOSTER, 
BOX NAILING MACHINE, . 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Dec. 16, 1884, 
 
S 
h 
i 
l 
sa 
 
  
 
 
727-7 7(.72ster, 
N. PeFERS. Piloto-Lithograpler, Washington. D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. FOSTER, OF PLATTSBURG, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND 
MESNEASSIGNMENTS, TO THE EXCELSIOR BOX NAILING MACHINE COM 
PANY, OF BAYONNE, NEWJERSEY. 
BOX - NAILNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 309,297, dated December 16, 1884. 
9 
Application filed September 12, 1883. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I, JoHN H. FoSTER, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing in the city 
of Plattsburg, county of Clinton, and State of 
5 New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Box-Making Machines, 
fully described and represented in the follow 
ing specification and the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of the same. 
Io The present invention relates to the manu 
facture of oldinary rectangular wooden boxes, 
it being the object of the invention to produce 
a mechanism for this purpose which shall be 
automatic and continuous in its operation, and 
I5 in which all the nails necessary for uniting the 
sides, ends, and bottom shall be driven at a 
single operation, thereby not only increasing 
the rapidity With which the mechanism can 
be made to operate, but avoiding the strain 
2O upon the material which results from nailing 
, the several joints in succession. 
The details in the construction and organi 
zation of the mechanism in which the inven 
tion is embodied will be hereinafter so fully 
25 explained and so particularly pointed out as 
to render any extended preliminary descrip 
tion unnecessary to an understanding of the 
invention. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
3o a side elevation of a box-nailing mechanism 
embodying the present invention. Fig. 2 is a 
transverse vertical section of the same. Fig. 
3 is a partial horizontal section upon an en 
larged scale, taken upon the line yay of Fig. 2. 
35 Fig. 4 is a partial longitudinal vertical section 
upon the same Scale as Fig. 3, taken upon the 
line at a of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a sectional detail 
taken upon the linea at of Fig. 4. 
Figs. 6 and 
7 are sectional views of the 'forms in which 
4o the parts of the box are supported during the 
nailing, each being taken upon the line ac a' of 
the other. Figs. 8, 9, 10, and 11 are details 
upon an enlarged scale, illustrating the con 
struction and operation of the nail Supporting 
45 and driving mechanism. Fig. 12 is a partial 
plan view of the nail-feeding mechanism. 
Fig. 13 is also a partial plan view of the same 
mechanism upon a greatly enlarged scale. 
 
Referring to said drawings, it is to be un- 65 
Fig. 14 is a horizontal section taken upon the 
line acac of Fig. 1, showing the mechanism for 5o 
automatically arresting the operation of the 
machine. Fig. 15 is a vertical section taken 
upon the line acac of Fig. 14. Fig. 16 is a plan 
view of one of the forms, showing the com 
pleted box in position, and also showing in 55 
dotted lines a printing mechanism for print 
ing any desired matter upon the sides of the 
box as it leaves the nailing mechanism. Fig. 
17 is a perspective view of the completed box; 
Fig. 18, a sectional detail of the same. Fig. 6o 
19 is a view of the under side of one of the 
forms for supporting the parts of the box in 
their assembled position, and Fig. 20 is a 
partial end view of the same. 
derstood that the complete organization there 
in shown is made up of two substantially-dis 
tinct mechanisms, the function of the first be 
ing to receive and support the several pieces. 
going to make up the box and present them 7o 
in proper position to be united by the nailing 
mechanism, and then, after they have been so 
united, convey the complete box from the nail 
ing mechanism and deliver it from the mal 
chine, while that of the second is to present 75 . 
and drive the nails in proper position to unite 
the several pieces of the box. These two mech 
anisms are driven from the same Source of . 
power, and are so timed that they will per 
form their several operations in proper suc- 8C 
cession and in such relation to each other as 
to make the operation of box-making prac 
tically continuous. 
In order to arrive at an understanding of 
the construction and operation of the Whole 85 
organization, the two mechanisms of which it 
is composed will first be described in the order 
in which they have been mentioned, after which 
their combined operation will be explained. 
a number of forms, 100, which are attached 
at points near the centers of their bottoms to 
an endless chain, 99, so as to form an endless 
series. The endless chain 99, carrying the 
forms, is stretched around a pair of grooved 95 
wheels or pulleys, 101, mounted upon shafts 
The first mechanism consists, essentially, of go 
- 
309,297 
O 
35 
45 
. 
102, which are supported in suitable bearings tial, and may in some cases be onitted. So, 
also, it is not absolutely necessary that the 
in the frame-work at the opposite ends of the 
parts 32 should be adjustable. The forms may 
The grooved pulleys 101 are of a 
machine. 
circumference equal tothelengths of twoforms, 
also be varied in other respects without depart 
ing from the invention, so long as a form is 
and are provided at opposite sides with semi 
provided which is adapted to receive the parts 
circular recesses 98, which, as the wheels re 
Volve, receive corresponding projections, 20, 
of the box and support them in their assen 
bled position during the nailing operation. 
upon the bottoms of the forms, whereby the 
chain 99 is prevented from slipping over the 
As the forms are carried upward around the 
surface of said pulleys and a positive feeding 
pulley 101, to be brought into position to re 
ceive the parts for forming the box, they pass 
movement is given to the forms. The shafts 
onto a supporting bed-plate, 97, which extends 
102 are each provided with a sprocket-wheel, 
between the pulleys 101 and supports the forms 
21, around which passes a drive-chain, 193,- 
during the time the box is being formed. 
which also passes over and partially around 
This bed-plate is divided in its center, so as 
a mutilated sprocket-wheel, 22, which is fast 
to provide a longitudinal opening for the pas 
to a transverse shaft, 23. The shaft 23 is pro 
sage of the chain 99 and the projections 20 
vided with a gear, 104, to which motion is 
communicated from a gear, 24, mounted upon 
upon the bottoms of the forms. The bed 
plate 97 is provided with upwardly-extending 
a second transverse shaft, 25, the opposite end 
of which is provided with a gear, 105, which 
side pieces, 35, which are located just outside 
engages with a gear, 26, mounted loosely upon 
the edges of the bed-plates 30 of the forms, 
the shaft 23, and rigidly connected to the belt 
and which serve, in connection with the por 
tions 34, to support the side-forming portions 
pulley 106. The chain 103 is held in engage 
Inent with the mutilated sprocket-wheel 22 by 
of the box until it has arrived at the nailing 
means of a pulley, 27, mounted upon the shaft 
mechanism. The side pieces, 35, are pro 
vided with spring-pressed rollers 3637, the 
25, and a pulley, 28, mounted upon a stud ex 
tending from a pivoted weighted lever, 29, all 
purpose of which will hereinafter appear. 
The projections 20 upon the bed-plates 30 of 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
S. 
The bearings 19, in which the shafts 102 are 
the forms are provided on each side with 
Supported, are made movable upon the frame 
small rollers 17, which, as the forms are car 
of the machine, and are provided with adjust. 
ried downward around the pulley 101, pass 
above Supporting-plates 96, Suspended from 
ing-screws 18, by which, after the chains 99 
103 have been placed upon the pulleys 101 and 
rods 50, and support the weight of the forms 
sprocket-wheels 21, they can be so adjusted 
as they are caltried back to the opposite end 
as to bring said chains to the proper tension. 
of the machine. The shaft 23 is provided 
The forms 100, in which the several pieces 
with a pair of eccentrics, 38, to the bands 39 
composing the box are supported during the 
of which are connected a pair of rods, 40, 
process of nailing, consist of a bed-plate, 30, 
which operate the nailing mechanism, in a 
manner which will hereinafter appear. The 
of suitable size to Support the box, which is 
to be formed and provided with upwardly-pro 
eccentric-bands 39 are connected by a cross 
jecting arms or brackets 3132, between which 
bar, 41, which, through a link, 42, and a piv 
the end pieces for the box are placed, the arms 
oted lever, 43, operates a Second cross-bar, 44, 
31 being provided with presser - springs 33, 
to the ends of which are secured a pair of 
vertically-working locking-bolts, 45, which 
which will yield sufficiently to permit end 
pass through openings in a bracket, 46, and 
boards of Slightly-varying thicknesses to be 
received, and will hold such boards always 
the bed-plate 97, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 
pressed against the arms 32. The arms 32 are, 
The link 42 and the bolts 45 are provided with 
as will be seen by reference to Fig. 6, secured to 
springs 47. 48, the tendency of which is to hold 
the bed-plate 30 by means of bolts, which pass 
said link and bolts in their raised positions. 
through elongated openings in the arms, there 
The forward end of the bed-plates 30 of the 
by making Said arms capable of slight adjust 
forms are provided upon their under sides 
ment with relatioll to the arms 31, so that when 
with beveled channels, as shown in Figs. 4, 
boards which differ considerably in thickness 
19, and 20, so as to pass above and press down 
are to be used the arms can be fixed in proper 
ward the locking-bolts 45, and are provided 
position to accommodate the same. The arms 
with openings 49, into which the locking 
31 are united at their ends by portions 34, which 
bolts are thrown by their springs 48, so as to 
extend upward from the bed-plate 30 and sup 
arrest and hold the forms in exactly the proper 
port the inside of the side pieces for the box. 
position with relation to the nailing mechan 
Although the construction just described is 
ism. The sprocket-wheel 22 is so propor 
the best which I have yet devised for the 
tioned that during each revolution it will ad 
forms 100, and has consequently been chosen 
vance the chain 99 a distance equal to the 
for illustration in the present case, yet it will 
length of one form, and the parts are so timed 
readily be seen that these forms may be va. 
that the bolts 45 will arrest and lock the form 
ried in Construction from that shown with 
just before the last tooth of the wheel22 passes 
out departing from the principle of the inven 
out of engagement with the chain 103. As 
tion. The springs 33 are notabsolutely essen 
soon as the form is thus locked, the strain 
75 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
O 
309,297 
- 
3 
5 
O 
(5 
upon the chain will raise the weighted pulley 
2S, so as to slacken the chain and allow said 
tooth to pass out of engagement there with. 
While the blank part of the wheel 22 is in 
contact with the chain 103 the form will re 
main at rest, and during this period the mail 
ing takes place. The eccentrics 3S are so 
timed as to withdraw the bolts 45 just before 
the first tooth of the sprocket-wheel 22 comes 
into engagement with the chain 103. 
The second mechanism-that for supplying 
and presenting the nails in proper position 
and for driving them-consists, essentially, of 
a reservoir or hopper, means for taking the 
nails from this hopper and conveying them as 
they are required to the driving mechanism, 
alnd a driving mechanism consisting of a num 
ber of series of plungers arranged to act si 
multaneously to drive all the lines of nails re 
(uired to unite the ends, sides, and bottom of 
the box. 
The reservoir or hopper from which the 
nails are supplied to the driving mechanism 
consists of a rectangular box, 107, the opposite 
sides of which are provided along their lower 
edges with a series of feeding-openings, 7, cor 
responding in number with the whole number 
of nail - driving plungers. This hopper is 
mounted upon a rock-shaft, 108, and is pro 
vided with means, as one or more handles, 
95, by which it can be rocked from side to 
side, so as to shake the nails and cause them to 
pass out through the opposite openings. This 
rocking of the hopper may be effected auto 
matically by suitable connections with some 
moving part of the apparatus, or it may be 
done by an attendant. The botton of the 
hopper is provided with shallow grooves or 
recesses leading to the openings 7, which aid 
in causing the nails to assume a position cross 
Wise of the hopper, so that they will readily 
pass through said openings as the hopper is 
rocked. The hopper will preferably be pro 
vided with a number of cross-partitions, as 
94, by which it will be divided into several 
separate compartments, so that nails of differ 
ent lengths or quality may be supplied to the 
different plungers, if desired. 
Arranged upon each side of the hopper 10, 
and in such position that their upper edges 
will coincide with the bottom of said hopper 
when the same is inclined in either direction, 
are a pair of inclined plates, 93, in which are 
series of slots, S, corresponding in number to 
the feed-openings 7 in the sides of the hopper, 
said slots being of sufficient width to receive 
the bodies of the nails, but not their heads, so 
that as the nails pass through the feed-open 
ings their bodies will drop through the slots 
S, and they will gravitate downward along 
said slots suspended by their heads. The 
plates 93 are each provided with a ledge, 10, 
which is sufficiently raised above said plate to 
allow the heads of the nails to pass freely be 
neath it when they are in proper position in the 
slots 8, but is sufficiently near to said plate to ar 
rest any nails which do not properly fallinto the 
slots, from which position such nails can read 
ily be restored to the hopper by the attendant. 
The slots 8 in the plates 93 terminate in open- 7o 
ings 9, which are of sufficient size to allow the 
heads of the nails to pass through them, and 
are located directly above a corresponding 
number of conveying tubes, which are divid 
ed into six series, 1 2 3 4 56, for conveying 75 
the nails to and presenting them in front of 
the six series of piungers 11 12-13 14 1516, 
for driving the six rows of nails 5152 53 54 
5556, which unite the sides and ends to each 
other and to the bottom of the box. These- So 
ries of tubes 1 2 lead directly downward and 
inward from the central portions of the open 
ings 9 upon the opposite sides of the hopper 
to the series of plungers 11 12, which drive the 
rows of nails 5152, for uniting the bottom of 85 
the box to the ends, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
4, S, and 7. The series of tubes 34 lead 
from the openings 9 upon the opposite sides 
of the hopper at the left side of the machine, 
looking from the delivery end, and, passing go 
downward, curve inward to the series of lat 
erally - reciprocating plungers 13 14, which 
drive the rows of nails 53 54, for uniting one 
of the sides of the box to the ends, as shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 9, and 17. The series of tubes 95 
5 6 lead from the openings 9 upon the op 
posite sides of the hoppel' at the right of the 
machine, looking from the delivery end, and, 
passing downward, curve inward to the series 
of laterally-reciprocating plungers 1516, which Ioo 
drive the rows of nails 5556, for uniting the 
other side of the box to the ends, as shown 
in Figs. 2, 3, 9, and 17. The plungers 11 12, 
which drive the rows of nails 51.52, are mount 
ed in a 1'eciprocating head, 57, which moves IO5 
upon foul vertical guide-rods, 58, and is pro 
vided with a cross-shaft, 59, to which are con 
nected the rods 40, before referred to, as shown 
in Figs 2 and 4. Each of the series of plungers 
11 12 consists of five plungers, said plungers IIo 
being arranged obliquely, so as to give a cor 
responding direction to the nails which they 
drive, (see Figs. 2, S, and 9,) thereby giving 
said nails a greater hold upon the wood and 
correspondingly increasing the strength of the II.5 
box. To permit the plungers to have this di 
rection of motion, they are loosely mounted 
in the head 57, so as to be capable of lateral 
movement in said head as it is raised and low 
ered. To effect this each plunger is provided 12o 
with a flat head, 60, which rests in a recess, 62, 
formed between the body of the head 57 and 
a clamping-piece, 61, bolted to said head, as 
shown in Fig. S. By this construction it will 
be seein that as the plungers are forced down- . 125 
ward by the bead 57 their heads 60 will move 
along the recess 62, so as to readily accommo 
date themselves to the changed position which 
their oblique arrangement requires them to 
take, as indicated by the dotted lines in said 13o 
figure. The plungers 1314 1516, which drive 
the rows of nails 53545556, are mounted inlat 
45 
55 
 
4 
309,297 
O 
25 
erally-reciprocating heads 63 64, which move 
upon guide-rods 6566, and are operated by rods 
67 68, bell-crank levers 69 70, and rods 7172 
from the shaft 59 of the head 57, as shown in 
Fig. 2. Each of these series, as shown in the 
present case, consists of six plungers, which, 
as in the case of series 11 12, are arranged ob 
liquely, and are secured to their operating 
heads, so as to be capable of lateral movement 
therein in the manner already described, as 
shown in Fig. 9. 
The bed-plate 97, in addition to the devices 
already described, is provided with a pair of 
upwardly-extending plates or Supports, 73, 
which form continuations of the plates 35, and 
also form supports for the guide-rods 65 66, 
and for a cross-plate, 74, which supports the 
guide-rods 58. 
To the ends of the plates 7374 there are se 
cured blocks 75 7677 7S 7980, in which are 
formed guideways for the inner ends of the 
driving-plungers, and also openings which 
communicate with the series of tubes 1 2 3 4 5 
6, and through which the nails pass to posi 
tion in front of the plungers. 
To prevent the nails from coming into con 
tact with the box, and to hold them in readi 
ness to be operated upon by the plungers at 
the proper time, the linner ends of the open 
ings in the blocks 75, &c., are closed by yield 
ing jaws, which arrest and hold the nails un 
till acted upon by the plungers, when the 
yield so as to permit the nails and plungers 
to pass and again automatically close upon the 
withdrawal of the plungers. These jaws are 
formed of two plates, 882, which slide in op 
posite directions, and are controlled by springs 
83 84. The plates S1 are held to slide in guide 
ways on the under sides of the blocks 75, &c., 
4o and are provided with openings which allow 
the passage of the nail and plunger, one end 
of which openings forms one member of the 
jaws, the other member of said jaws being 
formed by the projecting portions of the plate 
82, which latter plate slides in a recess formed 
in the plate.81. The two members of the jaws 
are beveled, as shown in Figs. S and 9, so that 
they will be readily forced apart against the 
resistance of the springs S384 by the action of 
the plungers. 
In order that only a single nail may be pre 
sented in front of each plunger at a time, and 
that such nail shall be presented when the 
plunger is in its retracted position, the plates 
93 are provided with a cut-off mechanism, by 
which, at each operation of the driving mech 
anism, one nail is separated from the line of 
nails in each slot and allowed to drop into its 
guiding-tube, to be conveyed to the corre 
sponding plunger, while the remaining nails 
in each line are arrested. This mechanism 
consists of a pair of plates, S5, which lie be 
neath the lower ends of the plates 93, and are. 
provided with oblique slots, which terminate 
in enlarged openings 87, as shown in Figs. 12 
and 13. The plates 85 are connected by a 
35 
5O 
55 
45 
95 
75 
cross-bar, SS, and receive a reciprocating mo 
tion through a link, 89, and a pivoted lever, 
90, which is connected to the plunger-head 64. 
By this connection it will be seen that as the 
head 64 returns to its outer position after per 
forming each nailing operation the plates 85 
will be moved inward, so as to cut one mail 
from the row in each slot and carry it down 
ward, so as to allow it to drop through the 
coinciding openings S7 9 and pass into its 
guiding-tube, while the remainder of the row 
is arrested. 
The operation of the mechanisms just de 
scribed is as follows: The machine being set 
in motion, the forms 100 will be carried up 
ward around the pulley 101, as shown in Fig. 
1, their rear ends being acted upon by the 
springs 91, so as to tilt their forward ends over 
onto the plate 97. As the forms pass forward 
toward the nailing nechanism, the attendant 
or attendants will first insert the end pieces, 
109, between the arms 31. 32, after which, as 
the forms pass between the side plates, 35, the 
side pieces, 110, will be inserted between said 
plates and the supports 34, and the bottom 
piece, 111, will be then placed in position over 
the sides and ends. As the form carrying the 
parts thus assembled nears the nailing mech 
anism, the spring-pressed rollers 36 37 will 
press theside and bottom pieces snugly against 
the end pieces, in which position they will en 
ter between the plates 73 and beneath the 
late 74. As the first form arrives in position 
for the nailing mechanism to operate, the bolts 
45 will be pressed into the openings 49 and 
lock the form, and the teeth of the sprocket 
wheel 22 will pass out of engagement with the 
drive-chain 103, as already described, so as to 
no longer drive the chain 99. While in this 
position the side pieces of the box will be held 
snugly against the end pieces by the action of 
the springs 92. 
During the operation just described the ec 
centrics 38 will, through the rods 40 7172, 
raise the head 57 and throw the heads 63 64 
outward, so as to withdraw all of the plungers 
to their retracted positions, as shown in Fig. 
S, and at the same time move the plates 85 
inward, so as to allow one nail from each of II5 
the slots 8 to pass through the openings 87 9 
and enter the corresponding conveying-tubes, 
through which tubes they will fall and be ar 
rested by the jaws of the plates Sl. 82 in front 
of the plungers of the several series, as indi 
cated in Fig. S. As soon as the form con 
taining the assembled parts has been arrest 
ed in position for the nailing operation the 
eccentrics 3S will, through the connections 
just described, commence to draw the heads 
57 downward and the heads 63 64 inward, 
thereby forcing the several series of plungers 
simultaneously inward between the jaws of 
the plates S1 S2, as shown in Fig. 9, and 
driving the corresponding rows of nails to I3O 
unite the sides, ends, and bottom of the box, 
as shown in Figs. 16 and 17. 
AS Soon as the 
J 25 
s 
IOO 
IO 
 
309,297 
5 
IO 
45 
SO 
plungers have advanced far enough to start 
the nails well into the wood the continued 
revolution of the eccentrics 38 will rock the 
lever 43, so as to withdraw the bolts 45 and 
release the form, as shown in Fig. 4. Shortly 
after the plungers commence their return 
movement the teeth of the sprocket-wheel 
22 will again come into engagement with the 
drive-chain 103, so as to start the chain 99 
and carry the form holding the now com 
pleted box out from between the plates 73, 
and at the same time advance the next suc 
ceeding form, holding the pieces for another 
box into position between said plates, where 
it will be arrested, as already described. As 
the Second form is advanced into position be 
tween the plates 73 the plungers will be with 
drawn to their extreme retracted positions, 
thereby allowing the jaws of the plates S182 
to be closed by the springs 8384, and operat 
ing the plates 85 so as to allow a fresh series 
of nails to fall to position in front of the 
plungers, and so the operation will continue 
to be repeated, one box being completed at 
each revolution of the sprocket-wheel 22. 
It is of course to be understood that during 
the operations just described the hopper 107 
will be rocked, either automatically or by 
the attendant, so as to keep all of the slots 8 
in the plates 93 supplied with nails. As 
the forms pass downward around the pulley 
101 the completed boxes will be removed 
either by an attendant or by means of an 
automatic discharging apparatus, which may 
readily be provided for that purpose. It 
will of course be seen that a part of the nail 
driving plungers may be thrown out of op 
eration if at any time it should be desired 
to use less than the whole number-as, for ex 
ample, if it should be desired to simply unite 
the side and end pieces, the plungers 1112 
can be removed; or, if it should be desired to 
nail the bottom onto side and end pieces which 
have been previously united, the rods 6768 
may be disconnected from the parts 64 65, so 
that the plungers 131415 16 will remain idle. 
By disconnecting the rods 67 68 in this man 
ner, the machine may also be used to nail the 
covers onto boxes which have been previously 
made. If it is desired to capacitate the ma 
chine for this work, however, the forms must 
be slightly modified in construction, so as to 
receive the box. This can be done by simply 
making the parts 3134 capable of removal 
from the part 30. 
If it should be desired to place any printed 
matter upon the sides of the boxes, it may 
readily be done by means of one or more ver 
tical printing-rolls, as 112, which are mounted 
in suitable bearings rising from the bed-plate 
97, and so positioned as to come into printing 
contact with the sides of the boxes as they pass 
forward from the nailing mechanism. The 
printing-rolls 112 will of course be provided 
with a suitableinking mechanism, represented 
in the present case by the rolls 113. 
In a machine of the character of that herein 
shown it is of course desirable, in order to 
prevent danger of breakage, to provide means 
by which it can be instantly arrested in case 7o 
any of the parts fail to work properly. To 
provide for this, the gear 104 is mounted loose 
ly upon the shaft 23, and is connected thereto 
by a sliding spline, 114, which rests in a groove 
in the shaft, and is arranged to enter either 75 
one of a series of recesses, 115, formed in the 
hub of the gear, as shown in Figs. 14 and 15. 
The spline 114 is provided with a spring, 116, 
the tendency of which is to press the spline 
outward, so that it will enter one of the re- 8o 
cesses 115 and lock the shaft and wheel to 
gether. The spline 114 is provided upon its 
outer edge with a recess, 117, the inner wall 
of which, as the shaft 23 revolves, will be 
brought into engagement with the beveled 85 
end of a pivoted lever, 118, which normally 
rests upon the top of said shaft, thereby forc 
ing said spline inward, so as to withdraw its 
end from the recess 115, in which it is rest 
ing, and disconnect the shaft 23 from the gear 90 
104. The lever 118 is connected by a link, 
119, to one end of a lever, 120, the opposite 
end of which is connected to a push-rod, 121, 
which terminates near the nailing meehanism. was a 
attendant places his foot upon the rod 121, 
and thereby raises the lever 118 out of the re 
cess 117 and away from the shaft 23. The 
spring 116 will then force the spline 114 
against the hub of the gear 104 and cause it 
to enter the first one of the series of recesses 
115 which is presented, so as to connect the 
gear 104 to the shaft 23, and set the machine 
in motion. As long as the rod 121 remains 
depressed the lever 118 will be held in its 
raised position and the machine will continue 
in motion. 
When it is desired to stop the machine, the 
attendant simply removes his foot from the 
rod 121, and thereby allows the end of the le 
ver 118 to fall onto the shaft 23, so that as 
soon as the spline 114 comes to the top of the 
shaft it will be withdrawn from the recess 115 
and the machine arrested. 
When it is desired to start the machine, the 95 
OO 
IO 
What I claim is 
1. In a box-making machine, the combina 
tion, with the form or support constructed and 
arranged to hold the sides, ends, and bottom 
of the box in their assembled position, of nail 
driving mechanism constructed and arranged 
substantially as described, and capacitated to 
simultaneously drive of all the nails required 
to unite said parts. 
2. In a box-making machine, the combina 
tion, with the form or support constructed and 
arranged to hold the sides, ends, and bottom 
of the box in their assembled position, of nail 
driving mechanism constructed and arranged 
substantially as described, and capacitated to 
simultaneously drive all of the nails required 
to unite said parts and complete the box, and 
nail-feeding mechanism, substantially such as 
. 
II5 
I 25. 
6 
309,297 
- 
- 
anism. 
described, which is capacitated to supply the 
as described, for arresting said series as each 
nails in proper position to said driving mech 
form arrives in proper position for the nailing 
operation, substantially as described. 
3. In a box-making machine, the combina 
S. In a box-making machine, the combina 
5 tion, with the movable form or support Con 
tion, with the forms or supports 100, construct 
structed and arranged to receive and hold the 
ed and arranged to receive and hold the parts 
parts of the box in their assembled position, 
of the box in their assembled position, and Con 
and to then present said assembled parts in 
hected to each other so as to form an endless 
proper position to the nailing mechanism, of 
series, of mechanism for moving said Series SO 
as to bring said forms successively to the nail 
IO a nail-driving mechanism constructed and al 
ranged substantially as described, and capaci 
ing mechanism, means, substantially such as 
tated to simultaneously drive all of the nails 
described, for arresting said series as each form 
required to unite said parts and complete the 
arrives in proper position for the nailing Op 
box, and a nail-feeding mechanism which is 
eration, and a nail-driving mechanism, Sub 
I5 capacitated to supply the nails in proper or 
stantially as described, which is capacitated to 
simultaneously drive all of the nails required 
der and position to said driving mechanism. 
4. In a box-making machine, the combina 
to unite said parts and complete the box. 
tion, With the movable form or support coln 
9. The combination, with the series of forms 
structed and arranged to receive and hold the 
100, of means for advancing the same With a 
2O parts of the box in their assembled position, 
step-by-step movement, and the locking-bolts 
present said assembled parts in proper posi 
45, for arresting the same at the proper points, 
tion to the nailing mechanism, and remove the 
substantially as described. 
completed box therefrom, of a nail-driving 
10. The combination, with the series of forms 
mechanism constructed and arranged substan 
100, of the drive-chain 103, mutilated sprock 
25 tially as described, and capacitated to simul 
et-wheel 22, and the locking-bolts 45, Sub 
taneously drive all of the nails required to 
stantially as described. 
unite said parts and complete the box, and a 
11. The combination, with the series of forms 
nail-feeding mechanism, substantially such as 
100, provided with projections, as 20, and 
described, which is capacitated to supply the 
rolls, as 17, of the bed-plate 97 and the sup 
3o nails in proper order and position to said driv 
porting-plates 96, substantially as described. 
ing mechanism. 
12. The combination, with a form, as 100, 
5. In a box-making machine, the combina 
adapted to support the parts of a box in their 
tion, with the movable form or support con 
assembled position, of a number of Series of 
structed and arranged to receive and hold the 
plungers, as 1112 13, &c., arranged to drive 
35 parts of the box in their assembled position, 
the several rows of nails required to unite 
present said assembled parts in proper posi 
the parts and complete the box, and means 
tion to the nailing mechanism, and remove the 
for simultaneously operating all of said series 
completed box therefrom, of a nail-driving 
of plungers, substantially as described. 
mechanism constructed and arranged substan 
13. The combination, with a form, as 100, 
4c tially as described, and capacitated to simul 
adapted to support the parts of a boxin their 
taneously drive all of the nails required to 
assembled position, of a number of series of 
llnite Said parts and complete the box, a nail 
plungers, as Il 12 13, &c., arranged to drive 
feeding mechanism, substantially such as de 
the several rows of nails required to unite the 
Scribed, which is capacitated to supply the 
parts and complete the box, means for pre 
45 nails in proper order and position to said driv 
senting the required nails in front of said 
ing mechanism, and a printing mechanism, 
plungers, and means for simultaneously oper 
substantially such as described, arranged to 
atting all of said series of plungers, substan 
act upon the completed box as it passes from 
tially as described. 
the nailing mechanism. 
14. The combination, with means for Sup 
5o 6. In a box-making machine, the combina 
porting the parts of a box in their assembled 
tion, With the forms or supports 100, con 
position, of a number of Series of plungers, as 
structed and arranged to receive and hold the 
11 12 13, &c., arranged to act at or substan 
parts of the box in their assembled position, 
tially at light angles to each other, substan 
and connected to each other so as to form an 
tially as described. 
55 endless Series, of mechanism for moving said 
15. The combination, With means for Sup 
series so as to bring said forms successively 
porting the parts of a box in their assembled 
to the nailing mechanism, substantially as de 
position, of a number of Series of plungers, as 
scribed. 
11 12 13, &c., arranged to act at or substan 
7. In a box-making machine, the combina 
tially at right angles to each other, and means 
6o tion, with the forms or supports 100, construct. 
for presenting the required nails in proper 
ed and arranged to receive and hold the parts 
position in front of said plungers, substantially 
of the boxin their assembled position, and con 
as described. 
nected to each other so as to form an endless 
16. In a nail-driving mechanism, the com 
Series, of mechanism for moving said series so 
bination, with a reciprocating head, as 57, 
65 as to bring said forms successively to the nail 
provided with a series of plungers, as 11, of a 
ing mechanism, and means, substantially such block, as 75, provided with a series of guide 
75 
9O 
IOO 
IID 
I5 
I 25 
I 30 
309,297 
7 
Ways for said plungers, and with yielding slid- openings at both its sides, substantially as de 
ing jaws for closing said ways, substantially scribed. 
aS described. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
17. In a nail-feeding mechanism, the com- hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
JOHN H. FOSTER. 
5 bination, with a rocking hopper, as 107, of a nesses. 
pair of inclined slotted plates, as 93, provided 
with a cut-off mechanism, as 85 86, substan- 
tially as described. 
18. In a nail-feeding mechanism, a rocking 
Io hopper, as 107, provided with nail-feeding 
Witnesses: 
JAS. A. HOVEY, 
A. N. JASBERA. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309397.txt	FASTENING FOR, HAND BAG AND POCKET. B00K FRAMES. 
J. MEHL, Jr. 
(No Model.) 
No. 309,397. 
Patented Dec. 16, 1884, 
WITNESSES: 
 
pters, photo-Lithographer, washington, 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN MEHL, JR., OF JERSEY CITY, NEWJERSEY. 
FASTENING FOR HAND-BAG AND POCKET-BOOK FRAMES. 
El ECIFICATION orming part of Letters Patent No. 309,397, dated December 16, 1884. 
Application filed Sentmber 17, 1884. 
(No model.) 
5 
C. 
To atli, u/lo1), it in (t/ CO7 ce/'7. 
Be it known that I, JOFIN MEHL, Jr., of 
Jersey City, in the county of Hudson and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Fastenings for Hand 
Bag and Pocket-Book Frames, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip. 
tion. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a hand-bag 
frame to which my improvement has been ap 
plied. Fig. 2 is a plan view of a part of the 
same. Figs, 3 and 4 show modifications of 
my improvement. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in that class of fastenings in which two 
halls mounted on opposite sides of the frame 
snap by each other when the frame is closed, 
and are held by friction and the elasticity of 
the frame; and it consists in hinging or pivot 
ing to one of said balls, a bar that is adapted 
to engage the other ball and positively lock 
the two together, so that the frame will not 
open when dropped or after being used for a 
while, as is now the case with articles pro 
vided with such ball-fastenings. 
A B are the bars of the frame, to the mid 
dle parts of which are attached stems C, hav 
ing balls D formed upon or attached to them. 
The balls D are arranged in the usual manner 
for snapping by each other when the frameis 
closed. 
To one of the balls D is hinged a bar, E, to 
engage with the other ball D and fasten the 
frame A B closed. The hinged bar E may be 
made in the form of a loop, as shown in Fig. 
2, or in the form of a half loop or hook, as 
shown in Fig. 3, or in the form of a straight 
bar shutting down into a slot in the balls D, 
as shown in Fig. 4, the form of the bar being 
immaterial so long as it is hinged to one of the 
said balls and engages with the other ball. 
I am aware that frames have been provided 
on one side with a pivoted loop engaging a 
ball secured to the opposite side, and I do not 
claim such as of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
The combination, with the balls D, con 
structed to engage each other, as described, 
and connected with the parts A, B of a hand 
bag or pocket-book frame, of the barE, hinged 
to one of the said balls and engaging with the 
other ball, substantially as herein shown and 
described, whereby the said frame can be 
readily fastened and unfastened, and will be 
held securely from becoming accidentally un 
fastened, as set forth. 
JOHN MEHL, JR. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES T. GRAHAAI, 
EDGARTATE. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309497.txt	(No Model.) 
C. A. SMITH, 
DEVICE FOR TIGHTENING BOLTING CLOTH, 
No. 309,497. 
Patented Dec. 16, 1884, 
 
Zeev. Z 
s 
- -- 
- 
--- - 
- 
r --- -- s - --- -- 
- 
D 
ge 4. s 
VV at 72 esses. 
 
2%2-2-6- 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithograpler, Wastington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. SMITH, OF JACKSON, MICHIGAN. 
O EW CE FOR T G - 
E N N G B O LT, N G CLOTH. 
SFSCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 309,497, dated December 16, 1884. 
Application filed February 25, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
O 
- 
To all, 7th OT, it tal/ concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES A. SMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Jack 
son, in the county of Jackson and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Devices for Tightening 
Bolting - Cloth, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a flour-bolt 
containing the invention. Fig. 2 is an end 
elevation, partly broken away. Fig. 3 is an 
elevation of the opposite end of the reel, partly 
broken away. Figs. 4 and 5 are detailed 
views. Fig. 6 is an end elevation, showing 
the invention as applied to a many-sided reel. 
In the drawings, A, B are the reel-heads, 
which may be of any usual or approved con 
struction, although in this instance they are 
shown as being provided with central hollow 
trunnions, such as are commonly used in that 
class of bolts known as centrifugals. 
C is 
the bolting-cloth. . 
Referring to Fig. 2, ID represents a strip, 
binding, or extension of the bolting-cloth, 
which in this instance consists of a narrow 
sheet or strip of stout woven fabric of double 
thickness stitched at its edges to the edge of 
the bolting-cloth. E is a circular tightener, 
which in this instance consists, essentially, of 
a hoop-like wire or small rod, turned up at 
its ends to form ears e e, which are perforated 
to receive a tightening-bolt, E, carrying at 
its threaded end a nut, e, and at its opposite 
end a head, which prevents the bolt from pass 
ing through the ear in which it is supported. 
This circular tightenel is seated in the fold of 
the fabric D, and it will be readily understood 
that by turning the nut e' in the proper di 
rection the two ears e e can be made to ap 
proach, and thus reduce the diameter of the 
circular tightener E and draw the bolt-cloth 
over the edge of the reel-head and toward its 
Under many circumstances it will be found 
desirable to construct the reel-head B with a 
concentric flange, b, against which the circular 
tightener shall bind the fabric D; and when 
it is desired to mount the reel upon anti-fric 
So tion rollers F, as is sometimes done, it may be 
provided with a second flange, b, of somewhat 
Center. 
3O 
5 3. 
less diameter than the flange b. By providing 
the reel-head with the two flanges b b the 
rollers F can rotate in contact with flange or 
rimb' without danger of their running upon the 55 
drawn-over edge of the cloth, should they be 
come loose, the step between the two flanges 
keeping the rollers upon their proper way or 
". 
Referring to Fig. 3, ID is a strip of fabric, 6c 
The 7o 
doubled and attached by its edges to one end 
of the bolting-cloth. Fis a circular tightener, 
provided at one end with a head, f, and at its 
opposite screw-threaded end with a nut, f'. 
G is a metal plate, attached to the fabric D 65 
by rivets g g or otherwise, and provided at 
its lower or inner end with a seat or groove 
for the reception of one end of the tightener, 
the seat or groove being of such size that the 
tightener may move freely through it. 
other end of the tightener is also supported 
by the plate G, and in this instance is shown 
as passing through and resting in a groove or 
seat formed in one or both legs of the plate, 
between the screw-threaded end of the tight- 75 
ener and the rivets ( ( ; but it is not intended 
to limit the invention to the precise construc 
tion of parts shown, it being apparent that 
one end of the tightener might be riveted or 
otherwise firmly attached to the plate G, the So 
threaded end being free to move relative to 
the plate without departing from the spirit 
of the invention. While in the construction 
shown the plate is formed of a thin sheet or 
strip of metal doubled upon itself and riv- 85 
eted at g g and ty, yet it (the plate) might be 
made of cast metal, with projecting lugs or 
ears for the reception of one end or both ends 
of the circular tightener. 
to a many-sided reel, in which instance it may 
be found preferable to cut the fabric H. in the 
form shown-that is to say, with its outer 
edge or periphery many-sided, to correspond 
substantially with the outline of the reel, its 95 
inner edge, when doubled, being substantially 
circular, because this form will facilitate pro 
ducing a uniform tension upon the bolting 
cloth, as will be readily understood without 
further explanation. Of course in this in- IOO 
stance the reel may be of any usual or ap 
proved construction-as, for instance, with a 
In Fig. 6 the invention is shown as applied go 
2 
309,497 
5 
O 
- 
central shaft, spokes radiating therefrom, lon- the smaller flange b', which forms a rim for 25 
gitudinal bars attached to the spokes, an en- friction-rollers, the bolting - cloth extending 
circling hoop-rim at the discharging end, with longitudinally of the reel and turned over the 
a centrally-open head at the receiving end. It edge of the reel-head toward the center, the 
is not necessary that the plate or its equiv- circular tightener connected to the turned 
alent should be attached to the fabric D, be- over end of the bolt-cloth, and means for grip-30 
cause the device will operate satisfactorily ping the tightener and the bolt-cloth upon the 
under many circumstances, even if the plate flange b, substantially as set forth. 
. 
be connected directly only to the circular tight- 
2. In a flour-bolt, the combination of the 
ener, although the construction shown is be- reel-head A, the bolt-cloth extending longi 
lieved to be the preferable one for use under tudinally of the reel and turned over the edge ; 3 5 
ordinary circumstances; nor is it essential to of the reel-head and toward its center, the 
the working of the invention that the parts circular tightener connected with the turned 
D D, or either of them, should consist of a over end of the bolt-cloth, the plate having 
fabric separate and apart from the bolting- both ends of the circular tightener attached 
cloth, because under many circumstances the thereto, and means for adjusting one end of 4o 
cloth can be hemmed, the fold being of such the circular tightener relative to the plate, 
depth as to provide a seat for the circular substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
tightener, although it is probably better to 
employ ticking, canvas, or similar material presence of two witnesses. 
for these parts D D, one or both of them. 
CHARLES A. SMITH. 
What I claim is- 
1. In a flour-bolt, the combination of the 
reel-head B, provided with the flange b and 
- 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. DICKEY, 
GEO. S. BENNETT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309597.txt	(No Model.) 
D. D. BERRY. 
TUCKER FOR SEWING MACHINES 
No. 309,597. 
Patented Dec. 23, 1884, 
WITNESSES: 
74.4//4 
-3%A %reezzese.1 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
20. 
INVENTQR. 
2ee-ee-62 a9. 
 
t 
B-24: 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIELD. BERRY, OF 
COLUMBIA, MISSOURI. 
TUCKER FOR SEWN G. VACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 309,597, dated December 23, 1884. 
Application filed March 17, 1884. (No model.) 
- 
To aid, whon, it vally conce77, 
Be it known that I, DANIEL D. BERRY, of 
Columbia, Boone county, Missouri, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Tuck 
ers for Sewing-Machines, of which the follow 
ing is a full and clear description, which will 
be more readily understood by reference to 
the accompanying drawings, of which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the tucker. 
in position on the machine, with the work pass 
ing through and held in position against the 
inner edge of the guiding device. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view of the tucker device. Fig. 3 is a 
side view of the work-plate of a sewing-ma 
chine with the tucker in position, and show 
ing the presser-foot and needle. Fig. 4 is an 
end view of the work-plate with the tucker in 
place. 
A represents a plate, made of any suitable 
material, provided with the slots B and B. 
Through the slot B is passed the milled headed 
bolt a, which screws into the work-plate of the 
machine. This slot and bolt are intended to 
allow a lateral adjustment of the plate A and 
to secure the same in position when properly 
adjusted. The plate A is cut out or recessed 
On its inner edge at the part marked C. This 
recess is to allow the plate A to escape the 
presser-foot and feed of the machine when the 
plate is adjusted closely for narrow tucks. 
D is a narrow plate of metal or other suit 
able material. One end of this plate is turned 
over at b. The other end of this plate is pro 
vided with a threaded bolt brazed or soldered 
thereto, and standing perpendicular to the 
plane surface of the plate. This bolt passes 
through the slot B, and is threaded at the end 
to receive the milled nut al. This arrange 
lment allows the plate D to be adjusted by slid 
ing it inwardly or outwardly in the counter 
sunk channel, (marked on the drawings, Fig. 
4, with the letter d.) This channel is about 
the depth of the thickness of the plate D, and 
arranged so that the plate may be easily ad 
justed and secured in place by tightening the 
nuta. The inner edge of the plate A (marked 
e on the drawings) is the guide along which 
the work passes, and at the same time marks 
the point at which the work is turned over in 
preparing the width of the tuck. The plate 
A is also provided with the projecting piece 
F is the material in which the tuck is to be 55 
or finger E, which projects over the tuck and 
assists the right hand in keeping the work 
down and in place. 
formed, and His the presser-foot of the ma 
chine with the needle passing through it. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
Before beginning to work with the tucking de 
vice I make one tuck by hand, as follows: The 6o 
material into which the tuck is to be sewed is 
first turned andfolded. The folded edge is then 
placed against the inner or guiding edge, e, of 
the plate A, passing under the projecting piece 
or finger E. The presser-foot is then placed 65 
upon the work. The plate A has been pre 
viously adjusted so that the distance between 
the guiding-edge e and the needle of the ma 
chine will regulate the width of the tuck. The 
work is then run through the machine, taking 7o 
care to keep the work folded by using the right 
hand with its edge against the guiding-edge e. 
In this way the first tuck is made, the plate D 
being adjusted so that the inner end of the 
hooked or bent-over portion b will be at a dis- 75 
tance from the needle corresponding with the 
space between the tucks. The work is then 
turned around, and the tuck just made by hand 
is placed under the hook b of the plate D un 
til the Sewed seamlines with the inner edge of 8o 
the hook b, as shown in Fig. 1. This seam. I 
have marked c'. The end of the material F is 
then turned over, and, with the left hand upon 
the goods, placed so as to keep the tuck just 
made in position and under the hooked part b 85 
of the plate D and the stitched seam in line 
with and against the inner edge of the hook b, 
the right hand holding the work so that its 
opposite edge, properly turned and adjusted 
under the presser-foot, passes closely against go 
the guiding-edge e and smoothly under the 
projecting finger E. Thus the second tuck is 
formed, and so on continuously until the re 
quired number of tucks is completed. 
in the manner above described renders it un 
necessary to mark the work in any way pre 
paratory to tucking, and enables the operator 
to work on linen, cotton, Woolen, or otherma 
terial, avoiding the common trouble of having IOO 
the work thrown out of place by the pinching 
or marking device, or torn or injured thereby, 
A. tucking device constructed and operating 95 
TO 
45 
SO 
309,597 
and the further difficulty of light marking, fre 
cluently so faint as not to show upon the ma 
terial. 
This device is simple, serviceable, and ac 
5 curate, and contains no moving parts to coll 
fuse the operator while at work. 
am aware that tuckers have heretofore been 
made with an adjustable finger adapted to pro 
ject beyond the edge of the plate, and that said 
IO base-plate has been cut away to admit the gage 
plate sliding therein; but in all such construc 
tions, so far as I am aware, the device was so 
made that the gage-plate was fitted in a recess 
cut in the top of the base-plate; consequently, 
there was the thickness of the material of which 
the base-plate was formed between the gage 
plate and the table. This was found objec 
tionable, for the reason that the Work was nec 
essarily raised above the table, whereas the 
work should lie as close as possible to the ta 
ble; and it very often happened with some ma 
chines that the gage-plate, owing to its being 
raised above the table, would be in the way of 
the presser-foot. To avoid these difficulties I 
form the recess d on the under side of the plate 
A, which arrangement allows the plate D to 
25 
rest on the table of the machine, so as not to 
raise the material but a trifle above the table, 
R where it is out of the way of the presser 
OOt. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a tucking device for sewing-machines, 
the plate A, provided with the recess d on its 
under side, the adjusting-slots B and B for the 35 
securing-bolts at and a, the guiding-edge e, the 
fixed projecting finger E, and recess C, in com 
bination with the plate D, having upturned 
end b, substantially as described. 
the plate A, provided with the recess d on its 
under side, the adjusting-slots B and B for 
the securing-bolts a and a, the guiding-edge 
e, and the projecting finger E, in combination 
with the plate D, provided with the upturned 45 
hook b, arranged as described and operating 
as set forth. 
2. In a tucking device for sewing-machines, 4o 
DANIEL D. BERRY. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS E. NoRWOOD, 
H. B. LONSDALE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309697.txt	(No Model.) 
W. DEVER AUX. 
BRIDGE GATE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 309,697, 
Patented Dec. 23, 1884. 
s 
E 
E. 
 
 
 
% 
aN 
 
 
  
 
7/772 afayaay 
g-C7/2 A 
--7.6 2:22- 
Na 
zz-z7zz 
Zw-4. 2 - 422eer-2-r 
46%-4A-2-4 z 
27627 
-1227zzaz 
 
(No Model.) 
W. DEWER AUX. 
BRIDGE GATE 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 309,697. 
Patented Dec. 23, 1884. 
 
 
 
WITTTTT 
 
I % 
2 
s O% Q 
% 
 
l o 
2 S. 
Z 
d 
Z 2 4 l 
(6) T 
222222 
-R-R-R-ee to-2 
2 
7/2727-24, 27.47 
C-C c. 7, 21. 
coca-a- 
zoea 
-2227zzazz/ 
(No Model.) 
W. DEWERAUX, 
BRIDGE GATE, 
8 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 309,697, 
Patented Dec. 23, 1884, 
 
   
 
  
firfrnn 
 
 
 
7272zza 
>7%6. 2.2%- 
sh 2-le 
a 
22/27azz 
- 
e2; 
Zo -2'rzz/247/ 
e/2-4-1-4-1- 
A. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM DEV ERAUX, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
BRO GE GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 309,697, dated December 23, 1884. 
Application filed July 25, 1884. 
(No model.) 
O 
15 
35 
'o (76 LUfuon, it inctly conce77 : 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM DEVERAUX, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Bridge-Gates, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, to wit: 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
bridge-gates; and it consists in certain pecu 
liarities of the construction and arrangement 
of the same, substantially as will be herein 
after more fully set forth and claimed. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
its construction and operation, referring to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a portion of the 
bridge and the adjoining approach. Fig. 2 is a 
cross-section of the approach. Fig. 3 is a front 
elevation of the approach and the gate-oper 
atting mechanism; Fig. 4, an end view of the 
bridge, and Figs. 5 and 6 are details of parts 
of the operating devices. 
A represents a bridge of the common and 
well-known form, pivoted in the center and 
swinging entirely around to allow of the pas 
sage of vessels. This bridge is upon each end 
provided with two toothed racks, A' A', the 
former of which is placed near one corner un 
der the roadway, and the latter in rear of and 
below the other, and commencing at the inner 
end of the first rack and running in toward the 
center of the bridge, as clearly shown in Fig. 4. 
In suitable bearings in the end of the abut 
ment or approach is journaled a shaft, b, up 
on the outer end of which is a lantern-wheel, 
B, which is engaged and operated by the rack 
A. Beside and below this shaft is a second 
one, b, the outer end of which is provided with 
a lantern-wheel, B, projecting in front of the 
other, and these wheels are each provided with 
cogs or teethb", meshing together as represent 
ed, by which one gives motion to the other, as 
will be presently explained. 
Upon the inner end of the shaft b is a pin 
ion, b, engaging a rack, c, upon a vertically 
sliding bar, C. This bar is near its lower end 
provided with a second rack, c, engaging a 
pinion, d, upon a shaft, D, running across the 
abutment, and having a similar pinion, d, lip 
On its opposite end, engaging and operating a 
rack, c, upon a second vertically-sliding bar, 
C, as shown in the drawings. The bars C C 
are incased in a suitable frame or casing, and 
are at their upper ends each provided with 
racks c' c, engaging with and giving motion to 
a segment-gear, E, upon a shaft, e, journaled 
in this frame, upon the ends of which are se 
cured the arms E, which form the gate across 
the roadway when they are lowered, and when 
not in use stand in a vertical position, as in 
Fig. 5. 
A second gate, E, is hinged in each casing 
Fupon a short shaft, F, and arranged to Swing 
across the foot-walk as the road-gates descend 
by a bevel-wheel, f, upon the shaft F meshing 
with a similar pinion, f', upon the shaft e. 
In the center of the roadway is a vertical 
bar, G, which rises and falls in the approach, 
and has upon its lower end a lack, g, meshing 
with a gear-wheel, d, upon the shaft D, and 
having its upper end bifurcated to receive and 
support the ends of the arms E, as in Fig. 2. 
In operation, when the bridge is closed, the 
gates are open, as in Fig. 1, and when the 
bridge begins to swing open in one direction 
the rack A operates the lantern-wheel B, and 
by means of the pinion b and rack c draws 
down the bar C. This bar, by its rack cand 
the shaft D, operates the bar C at the oppo 
siteside of the roadway, so that they slide down 
together. These two bars operate the shafts e 
and F and close the gates E. E., and prevent 
accident to both foot-passengers and teams. 
At the same time the gate-arms E fall, the 
wheel d' lifts the supporting-bar G to meet 
them, and as this bar rises as the arms fall it 
is evident that any weight upon the arms only 
tends to more firmly lock them in connection 
with their supports. The gates are thus closed 
before the bridge has swung more than a few 
feet, and all accidents prevented. When the 
bridge is closed again, if Swung back to its 
first position the operation is reversed; but if 
turned entirely around the rack A' engages the 
lantern-wheel B", and it operates the wheel B 
and its connecting devices in the reverse direc 
tion to open the gates, as will be at once un 
derstood. 
75 
90 
95 
IOO . 
 
309,697 
Having thus fully described my invention, upon shafts journaled in the approach, and 
having teeth l, meshing together, the rack 
bars c c', connected by shaft D, to operate to 
gether, the segmentB, shaft e, and arms E, Se 
cured upon its ends, Substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. The shaft b, carrying the lantern-wheel B 
and pinion b, the sliding rack-bars C C, con 
nected by the shaft D and pinions did, the seg 
ments E, shafts e F, gates E" E, and bevel 
wheels f f, in combination with a gear, d, 
| upon the shaftD, and a vertically-sliding rack 
bar, G, operated thereby to receive and support 
the gate-arms E, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a bridgegate, the combination, with 
5 the gate and a Series of rack-bars and gearing, 
of two lantern-wheels geared together, and one 
projecting beyond the other, and two operat 
ing-racks upon the bridge, one in front of the 
other, whereby the gates are operated by the 
Io bridge in either direction, stabstantially as 
shown and described. 
2. In a bridge-gate, the combination, with two 
hinged arms raised or lowered over the road 
way by mechanism operated by the bridge, of a 
5 supporting-bar sliding vertically through the 
center of the roadway to Support the gate-arms 
when lowered, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
3. The bridge A, provided with the racks 
2C A' A', one in front of and above the other, in 
combination with two lantern-wheels, B B', 
WILLIAM DEVERAUX. 
Witnesses: 
W. C. MCARTEIUR, 
CHAS. KRESSMANN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309798.txt	(No Model.) 
M. PORTER, 
AND ROLLER 
m 
No. 309,798, 
Patented Dec. 23, 1884, 
Kok 9 gear, 
7-6 rese, 
N. PeFERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
inventor 
MOSES PORTER. 
3 g (. . galem 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MOSESPORTER, OF LOVINGTON, ILLINOIS. 
AND ROLE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 309,798, dated December 23, 1884. 
- 
Application filed March 6, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
O 
e, and provided with pivotal attachments to 
lugs c' c' of frame c c. 
3. 
if h h show the arrangement of braces used 
to impart the motion of the horses to the roller 
frames, if representing a bar rigidly attached 
to the tongue, and h h representing V-shaped 
draft bars or braces extending from the ends 3 
of barf to the frames c c. 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MOSESPORTER, a resi 
dent of Lovington, in the county of Moultrie 
and State of lllinois, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Adjustable 
Field-Rollers, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention consists in the combination, 
with a pair of roller-frames adapted to pivot 
vertically in order to conform to the inclina 
tions of the ground, and with the tongue ordi 
narily used with rollers, of a pair of bars or 
braces adapted to secure the rollers in a par 
allel position, and a set of draft bars or braces 
to secure the same on a line horizontally and 
impart the motion of the horses thereto with 
out interfering with the pivotal motion above 
mentioned. 
In the drawings accompanying and forming 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a plan 
I claim-- 
The combination, in a field-roller, of rollers 
of my device. Fig. 2 is an end view, and Fig. 
3 an edge view of the ends of the rollers. Fig. bb, frames e c, tongue e, bars did, barf, and 5 
V-shaped bracesh h, as and for the purpose 
4 is a perspective view of a roller-frame, 
set forth. 
gg are angle-braces to strengthen barf. 
The bars did hold the rollers in a position 
parallel with each other and with the tongue. 
Braces h. h. and bar 
the horses from the tongue to the roller-frames. 
By having one set of braces to hold the roll 
ers in position laterally and another set to 
impart motion thereto, each set may be con 
structed of lighter material and still, from 4 
the advantage of location, produce a better 
result. 
if convey the motion of 4 
a is the seat for the driver. 
b b are the rollers. 
cc are the frames in which the rollers oper 
ate. d d are cross-bars rigidly attached to tongue 
Attest: 
L. P. GRAHAM, 
J. D. WALKER. 
. 
MOSESPORTER. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309898.txt	(No Model.) 
C, D, UPH.A.M. 
GRAPPLING TONGS, 
No. 309,898, 
Patented Dec. 30, 1884, 
Wise s 2. 
22). 
(0.4%a 46/7o 24, 
22a-2-424 -9%aez 
day 4. C. $$ew & Sv wily sus, 
-s44- is 
; : 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES D. UPHAM, OF COLFAX, IOWA. 
GRAPPLING-TONGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 309,898, dated December 30, 1884. 
Application filed June 17, 1884. (No model.) 
45 
d d are detachable legs adjustably connect- 4o 
ed with the arms a by simply inserting their 
upper ends in the loops be and then fastening 
them by means of set-screwsf, that extend in 
to the loops c, or in any suitable way. 
of g are jaws formed on the ends of the legs 
by simply bending their ends inward at right 
angles. 
h h are revolving spurs secured to the jaws 
g by forming suitable bearings for them on 
the ends of the jaws and then placing the 
spurs thereon and riveting them fast, or in 
any suitable way, so that their points will 
project inward. 
From the drawings and detailed description 
of the construction of my improved tongs the 
application and operation of the same in mov 
ing and elevating building - stones, barrels, 
&c., will be obvious, and specific instructions 
for using the same for the various purposes 
contemplated are deemed unnecessary. 
I claim as myinvention 
1. In a grappling - tongs, the combination 
of two elbow - shaped arms, a, having fixed 
loops bc, and two adjustable elbow-shaped 
legs, d, having fixed jaws (7, Substantially as 
and for the purposes stated. 
2. The improved grappling-tongs composed 
of the pivoted elbow - shaped arms a, having 
loops bc, and the legs d, having jaws g, and 
revolving spursh, substantially as shown and 7O 
described, for the purposes specified. 
CHARLES D. UPHAM. 
Witnesses: 
J. R. RYAN, 
A. T. REEDER. 
5 
IO 
;C. 
To add twhon, it may concern, 
Be it known that I, CHARLES D. UPHAM, 
of Colfax, in the county of Jasper and State 
of Iowa, have invented an Improved Grap 
pling-Tongs, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of my invention is to facilitate 
the lifting and moving of blocks of building 
one, kegs of nails, barrels of merchandise, 
Heretofore holes have been drilled in the 
opposite faces of blocks of marble and stone 
for the purpose of pivoting the gripping ends 
of tongs thereto and allowing the blocks to be 
turned and balanced in the tongs while being 
elevated or lowered by means of the tongs. 
Spurs have also been pivoted to the gripping 
ends of the arms of tongs, and elbow-shaped 
arms have been adjustably connected to adapt 
them to be spread or contracted as required 
to grapple objects differing in size. 
My invention consists in the construction 
and combination of elbow-shaped arms and 
adjustable elbow-shaped legs carrying pivoted 
spurs, as hereinafter fully set forth. 
Figure I of my accompanying drawings is 
a side view of my improved tongs. Fig. 2 
shows the tongs applied as required to lift 
and balance an open-ended barrel, a building 
stone, or other object. Fig. 3 shows the tongs 
in position as required to roll a barrel. Joint 
ly considered, these figures clearly illustrate 
the construction and operation of my com 
plete invention. 
at a represent two elbow-shaped arms, piv 
oted together in a common Way. Each has 
an eye or loop, b, extending at right angles 
from its end, and a second loop, c, at a dis 
tance from the loop b. 
2 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US309998.txt	(No Model.) 
C. M. VAN VLECK. 
BENCH HOOK, 
- 
No. 309,998, 
Patented Dec. 30, 1884, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES M. WAN WILECK, OF UHRICHSVILLE, OHIO. 
BENCH HOOK. 
(cf. CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 309,998, dated December 30, 1884, 
Application filed October 23, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
Fig. 2 is a sectional view; and Fig. 3 the bench. 
thumb-piece, i, for raising Said pawl, the pawl 
being held in engagement with the ratchet 
Wheel by a Spring, i. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
To raise the hook the disk His turned, caus 
ing the gear-wheel E to rotate, which engages 
with the teeth on the bench-hook, and said 
bench-hook is held in a raised position by the 
ratchet-wheel, the pawl of which prevents the 
rotation of the shaft. Tolower the bench-hook, 
the pawl I is raised and the shaft turned in an 
opposite direction, the flange fabutting against 
the lower one of the teeth e, thus preventing 
the hook being depressed below the surface 
of the bench. 
I am aware that prior to my invention bench 
hooks have been constructed which are pro 
vided with rack-teeth, with which engage a 
worm-wheel which is colnnected to a shaft hav 
ing a handle which operates horizontally, the 
same being let into a recess in the surface of 
This construction is objectiona 
ble, owing to the fact that the recess in the 
upper surface of the bench is liable to become 
filled with refuse matter, which has to be re 
moved before the handle can be turned. 
To all vivor it trictly concer'72: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES M. VAN 
WLECK, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Uhrichsville, in the county of Tuscara 
was and State of Ohio, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Bench - 
Hooks; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
tise the Salme. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in bench-hooks, the ob 
ject of the same being to provide a carpen 
ter's bench with an adjustable bar or hook, 
the means for adjusting said bar or hook be 
ing attached under the bench and to one side 
of the same, as will be hereinafter more fully 
set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate my invention, Figure l is a perspective 
view. 
is a side view. 
A represents a carpenter's bench, the upper 
portion of which is recessed for the reception 
of a plate, B, which is provided with a rect 
angular passage-way, C, for the reception of 
I claim 
1. In a bench-hook, the casing C, depending 
the bench-hook. The side pieces, C, of this 
passage-way project so as to form bearings from the upper surface of the bench and pro 
vided with side flainges, in combination with 
for a horizontal shaft, D, which is provided 
the shaft D, having a gear-wheel which en 
between said side pieces with a gear-wheel, E. 
gages with teeth formed on the bench-hook, 
The side c of the passage-way C is cut away 
said shaft D being provided at its outer end 
so as to allow the gear-wheel E to pass through 
with a ratchet - wheel and milled disk, the 
the same and engage with the rack-teeth e, 
former engaging with a spring-pawl, substan 
formed on the lower portion of the bench 
tially as shown, and for the purpose set forth. 
hook. The upper portion of the bench-hook 
2. In combination with the bench - hook 
is provided with serrations, e, with which the 
having teeth formed on its lower end, a hori 
board or other object will engage, and the 
Zontally-Supported shaft having a gear-wheel 
wall c' is provided at its upper portion with a 
which engages with said teeth, said shaft be 
recess, f, upon which the lower serration will 
ing provided at its outer end with a ratchet 
rest when the hook is withdrawn entirely 
wheel and milled disk, said ratchet-wheel en 
within the casing. 
gaging with a spring-pawl, substantially as 
G represents a metallic shell, which is pro 
shown, and for the purpose set forth. 
vided with a projecting flange, g, which is se 
3. In a bench-hook, the plate B, having de 
; cured within a recess in the depending side 
pending therefrom a casing consisting of sides 
A? of the bench. This plate is provided with 
C C C C, a horizontal shaft journaled therein 
a perforation, through which the shaft D 
and provided with a gear-wheel, which en 
passes, and said shaft is provided on the outer 
gages with rack-teeth formed on the bench 
side of said plate with a ratchet-wheel, h, and 
hook, the end of said shaft being journaled in a 
a serrated disk, H, for turning said shaft. 
flanged plate, G, and provided with a ratchet 
Pivoted to the plate G is a pawl, I, having a 
3. 5 
SO 
So 
90 
95 
() ) 
 
309,998 
Wheel, h, and Spring-pawl I, With a projecting a ratchet-wheel and disk, said ratchet-wheel 
portion, i, Substantially as shown, and for the engaging with a spring-pawl, substantially as 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
5 near its upper portion with a recess, f, which presence of two witnesses. 
set forth. 
4. In a bench-hook, the casing C, provided 
forms a stop against which the lower one of 
the teeth e' abits, in combination with the 
shaft D, having a gear-wheel which engages 
with the teeth formed on the bench-hook, 
Io said shaft being provied at its outer end with 
CHARLES M. WAN VILECK. 
A N 
7 
y 
Witnesses: 
T. D. HEALEA, 
L. H. FERGUSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310098.txt	G. VALIANT, 
B00T OR GLOVE FASTENER, 
Patented Dec. 30, 1884, 
(No Model.) 
No. 310,098, 
 
AIE) g5S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE VALIANT, OF TORONTO, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
B O OT OR GLOVE FAST ENER. 
3:1.3IFICALION forming part of Letters Patent No. 310,098, dated December 30, 1884. 
Application filed May 17, 1884. 
(No model.) 
5 5 
75 
IO 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE WALIANT, of the 
city of Toronto, in the county of York, in the 
Province of Ontario, Canada, manufacturer, 
have invented a certain new and useful Boot 
or Glove Fastener; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same. 
The object of the invention is to devise a 
neat and effective substitute for a button, to 
which the part having the button-hole may be 
connected without difficulty, and without the 
necessity for employing a button-hook; and it 
consists, essentially, of a plate or bar having 
a groove or passage-Way made in it, extending 
from a point near one of its ends to a point 
near the head formed on its other end, and con 
nected to the portion of the boot or glove where 
buttons are usually attached by a pin or sta 
ple arranged to fit into the groove or passage 
way, so that while connecting the plate or bar 
in position the said plate or bar may be ad 
justed longitudinally, that it may be drawn for 
ward to bring the pin or staple to the tail of 
the bar or plate, when the bar or plate may be 
turned over on its back, the pin or staple act 
ing as its pivot, or When the bar or plate is 
drawn back, So as to force the pin or staple 
against the end of the groove or passage-way 
near the head of the plate or bar, it will be held 
down and prevented turning over, substantial 
lyas and for the purpose hereinafterexplained. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved fastener, showing it attached in posi 
tion by a pin passing over the groove or slot, 
which pin is connected to two jaws on a plate 
fastened to the material. Fig. 2 is a similar 
view, but the plate or bar has only one button 
head formed on its top. Fig. 3 is a similar 
view with two button-heads, like Fig. 1, but 
with the pin fitting into a groove madeinstead 
of the slot or passage-way shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. Fig. 4 shows an ordinary staple for 
connecting my improved fastener to the ma 
terial. Fig. 5 shows the fastener tipped up, in 
position ready to receive the button-hole, 
which is also exhibited. Fig. 6 shows the but 
ton-hole slipped over the button-fastener. 
All the views in the drawings represent the 
so same fastening device, being merely slightly 
altered in form, the point of the invention be 
45 
ing to so form and pivot the bar or plate A 
that the button-hole may be easily slipped over 
it, and that when pressed into a horizontal po 
sition the drawing strain of the parts connected 
by the fastening shall lock the same. 
It will be noticed that I form a passage-way, 
a, on the bar or plate, which passage-way ex 
tends from a point near the head b to the tail 
of the bar, the thickness of the metal between 
the slot or passage-Way ( and the end of the 
bar being only sufficient to give the necessary 
strength. . 
c is a pin fixed to the jaws d, which form 
part of or are fastened to the flatplate B. This 
latter plate is sewed or otherwise fastened to 
the material C, which is supposed to represent 
that portion of the material to which the but 
ton is usually attached. Sufficient space is 
left between the pin c and the top of the flat 
plate B to allow the metal forming the bottom 
side and tail end of the slot a to pass freely 
between them. Consequently when the bar 
A is drawn forward, so as to bring its tail end 
against the pin e, the said bar can easily be 
turned over on its back, or in the position it is 
shown in in Fig. 5. It will be noticed that the 
head b is grooved, so that the button-hole e 
may readily be slipped over the head b into 
the said groove. 
In order to connect the button-hole piece D 
to the button-piece C, it is merely necessary 
to throw the bar Aback in the position it is 
shown in in Fig. 5, when the button-hole may 
be slipped over it. Then by pushing down 
the bar into a horizontal position the strain 
between the two parts thus connected will draw 
the bar B back till the pin c comes in contact 
with the head end of the slot. When in this 
position, the fastener is locked, as the bar A 
cannot be turned on the pivot-pin c until the 
bar has been drawn forward so as to bring 
the pin cagainst the tail end of the slota, when 
the bar will naturally be drawn over on its back 
and the button-hole piece immediately re 
leased. 
I have shown in some of the figures a false 
head, f, which I prefer to use, as it hides the 
button-hole, as shown in Fig. 6; but of course, 
as far as the fastener is concerned, the bar A 
would work equally as well. Without it. I also 
prefer employing a flatplate, B; but the same 
90 
95 
IOO 
310,098 
plate, B, fixed to the material C, and having 20 
effect could in a large measure be obtained by a, made in it; and a grooved head, b, formed 
using simply a staple, which I have shown in at one end of it, in combination with a flat 
Fig. 3, and marked c. 
The slot or passage-way a will be found the jaws d, between which the bar A is inserted, 
simplestform; but the bar Almight be arranged and a pin, c, to pass through the slot a, sub 
to operate without a slot. For instance, a stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
groove, which I have marked a in Fig. 3, might 
3. A bar, A, having a groove or slot, a, 
be used instead of the slot or passage-way. 
I mention these modifications, as I do not in combination with a pin, c, arranged to con 
wish to be limited to the exact shapes shown. nect the bar to the material, substantially as 
What I claim as my invention is- 
1. The bar or plate A, having a slot or groove, 
(t, made in it, and ahead, b, formed at one end, 
in combination with a pin or staple, c, secured 
to the material, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. A bar or plate, A, having a slot or groove, 
In presence of - 
J. J. HARTON, 
A. VALIANT. 
GEORGE WALIANT 
formed in it, and heads b andf formed on it, 25 
and for the purpose specified. 
Toronto, May 3, 1884. 
- 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310199.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 310,199, 
E. G. HASTINGS, 
MUSIC LEAF TURNER. 
Patented Jan, 6, 1885, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN G. HASTINGS, OF NEWADA, IOW.A. 
MUSCLEAF TURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 310,199, dated January 6, 1885. 
Application filed December 17, 18S3. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
To all, whom it inctly conce77: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN G. HASTINGS, 
of Nevada, in Story county, and State of Iowa, 
have invented a Music-Leaf Turner, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My object is to provide a practical mechani 
cal device and attachment for organs and pi 
anos to turn the leaves of a music-book by the 
foot-pressure of the operator, so that he will 
need no assistant to turn leaves, and will not 
be required to remove his hands from the key 
board, and have no interruptions and pauses 
in the performance of a piege of music, such 
as are frequently occasioned by using the hands 
in turning leaves while playing. 
My invention consists in the construction 
and combination of a book-rest, a spool hav 
ing toothed sectors, arms having toothed sec 
tors, adjustable leaf-clasping devices, a cord, 
and cord-directing-pulleys, as hereinafter fully 
set forth. 
Figure I of my accompanying drawings is 
a perspective view of my book-rest and base 
for my operating mechanism. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged perspective view of the spool and two 
arms, having toothed sectors, and an adjust 
able leaf-clasping device attached to one of 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of an 
the arms. 
organ having my complete device attached. 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section. 
Jointly considered, these figures clearly 
illustrate the construction, application, and 
operation of my device. 
(t is the base-piece of my book-rest, in the 
form of a straight strip of wood. 
b is a board of corresponding length fixed on 
top of the piece (, to project upward at any 
angle desired. 
b' are triangular-shaped pieces fixed in the 
angle formed by the two pieces at and b, for 
the purpose of uniting them securely and rig 
idly. 
b' is an opening formed in the bottom and 
center of the board b. 
b' are brackets fixed to the front face of the 
board b, to support a hook. 
c is a pin or post fixed in the base-piece (, 
to Support the spool having toothed sectors. 
c is a similar post, upon which series of 
arms having toothed sectors are placed and 
operated. 
d is a spool, that has a series of toothed sec 
tors, 123, on its periphery at different points 
of elevation. 
d is a cord-pulley fixed to the top of the 
Spool. 
ffrepresent a series of arms having perfo 
rated toothed sectors f' on their ends, adapt 
ing them to be pivoted to the book-l'est by 
placing the sectors upon the post c'. 
f" are flanges on the lower sides of the sec 
tors f', to keep the arms separated, and to ex 
tend under and between the toothed sectors 
on the spool d as it revolves. 
() is a sliding loop secured to one of the arms 
if by means of a set-screw. 
ty are curved wires fixed to the loop (), to ex 
tend upward to clasp the leaf of a music-book. 
h represents a washer placed upon the post 
c" and top of the sectors and arms ff. 
h' is a brace connecting the top ends of the 
posts c and c'. 
i i are pin-wheels journaled to the pedal 
frame of an organ or piano, or to brackets con 
tiguous thereto. Pius projecting from their 
sides are adapted to be pressed by the oper 
ator's feet, and thereby turned to wind the 
ends of a cord, k, upon pulleys l, fixed to the 
axes of the wheels i. 
456 7 are pulleys, over which the cord k is 
directed from the pin-wheel i to the pulley d" 
The bearings of these 
on top of the spool d. 
cord-directing pulleys are attached to the or 
gan or piano in any suitable way, so that the 
pulleys and cord will not interfere with the 
operative mechanism of the instrument. 
In the practical operation of my invention 
thus constructed and applied, I simply place 
an open music-book upon the book-rest, turn 
all the arms to the left, and connect the leaf 
clasping devices carried by the arms with the 
leaves that are to be successively turned. To 
turn a leaf from left to right at the proper mo 
ment, I simply press the pin-wheel on the 
right of my feet so that it will make a partial 
revolution, and in so doing wind the end of 
the cord upon the pulley on the end of the 
axle of the crank-wheel, and thereby rotate 
the Spool having toothed sectors. The upper. 
most arm, having its toothed sector engaged 
With the corresponding sector of the spool, 
will be swung from left to right by the rotary 
motion and fractional revolution of the spool, 
and, by means of the leaf- clasping device, 
7 5 
SO 
90 
95 
IOO 
6) 
- 
- 
310,199 
carry and turn the leaf from left to right. tol's, 1 2 3, and a pulley, cl.", a series of arms, 
Each leaf to be turned can thus be instantly if, having toothed sectors on their ends and 
moved by foot-pressure, while the fingers and carrying leaf-clasping devices, pin-wheels i i, 15 
hands remain upon the key-board. To turn having pulleys t, a cord, k, and cord-directing 
5 back the leaves from right to left, reverse mo- pulleys 4567, arranged and combined rela 
tions are imparted to the arms successively by tive to each other, and an organ or piano, in 
simply pressing the left crank-wheel and wind- the manner set forth, for the purposes speci 
ing the opposite end of the cord upon the pull- fied. 
- 
ley on its axle. 
Witnesses: 
TE} \VIN G. HASTINGS. 
| 
Jo 
I claim as my invention- 
The book-rest a b l'b', having fixed posts 
ce', the spool d, having a series of toothed sec 
R. H. COOPER, 
F. Mi. FENISON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310299.txt	. (No Model.). 
No. 310299. 
M, MEYER. 
DRAWER. 
Patented Jan. 6, 1885, 
2ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZAZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZXZZZZ2 
C/ 
SNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 
222722 
22 zzZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ2 
---- 
NN | SN NS 
2 
2 
ZZZZZ2SS 
Z2 
? 
WITNESSES: 
- 
INVENTOR; 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
N. pgTeRs. plio-Lithorarler. Washington. o. C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL MEYER, OF WAUKESHA, WISCONSIN. 
DRAVVER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 310,299, dated January6, 1885 
Application filed April 16, 1884. (No model.) 
va? concer: 
or, in other words, to maintain a parallelism 
To all avJuoni, i 
Be it known that I, MICHAEL MEYER, of with the front face of the drawer-frame, and 
Waukesha, in the county of Waukesha and the action will bealike in this respect whether 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain new the drawer Abe worked by grasping the knobs 
and useful Improvements in Drawers, ofwhich or pulls gg at both ends of the drawer or at 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip- either end only, as will readily be understood. 
tion. 
The sectors D and limks E require no more 
The object of my invention is to provide room for their application than is usually left 
simple, inexpensive, and self-acting devices vacant below the bottom of the drawer, and 
for attachment to drawers and their frames or as the supporting cleats or plate C need be no 
slideways, whereby the drawers will be conn-thicker than the spacing-pieces between the 
pelled to move alike at both ends as they are drawers, my improvement may be applied to 
drawn out from and slid back into closed po-drawers of any size without requiringa special 
sition. 
enlargement of the parts, and the improve 
The invention consists in a pair of inter-ment may also as readily be applied to the 
meshingtoothed sectorspivoted to fixed cleats i drawers of old articles of frniture al ready in 
or cross-bars of the drawer-frame and to the | use asto new goods. 
As shown, the intermeshing sector-plates D 
drawer by links, whereby a parallelism of 
movement ofthe drawerissecured, allashere- i consist of thin flat pieces of wood; but they 
inafter fully described and claimed. 
may be cast of any suitable metal and in open 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying pattern work, making them very light in 
drawings, forming part of this specification, | weight, and still sufficientlystrong forthe work 
in which similar letters of reference indicate i required of them. 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
i My invention may be applied to single draw 
Figure I is a front elevation of a chest of ers adapted for use in any situation, as well as 
drawers, partly broken away, and showing my to chests or tiers of drawers, as represented in 
improvement applied; and Fig. 2 is a sectional i the drawings, and drawers having my im 
plan view on the linea a, Fig. 1. 
provement applied need notbe fitted sosnugly 
Theletter A indicates the drawers of an or- in their frame, and still work equally well or 
dinary bureau or cabinet, which are fitted in much easier than drawers most carefully fitted 
place to slide in the frame B, said frame B in the usual way. 
having the front spacing-pieces, b, between 
Havingthus fully described my invention, I 
the drawers, and also having the side cleats, claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
c, forming the rests or ways on which the i Patent 
drawers slide. The drawers Aare of the usual 
1. The combination, with a tirawer and 
pattern, their bottoms a being grooved into drawer-frame, of intermeshingtoothed sectors 
the sides a', leaving a space between the draw-D, pivoted to the drawer-frame, and having 
er-bottom and the lower or working edges of their outer ends connected to the bottom of 
the sides a'ofabout one-hal finch, more orless. i the drawer, whereby a parallelism with the 
In applying my improvement Ifasten to the i front face of the drawer is maintained, asset 
drawer-frame B the cross-cleats C, which are forth. 
2. "The combination, with the drawer Aand 
of about the same thickness as the spacing- 
pieces b between the drawers, and to these the drawer-frame B, provided with the cleats 
cleats C, I pivot on pins c' the sector-plates D, C, ofintermeshingtoothed sectorsD, pivoted to 
which have intermeshingteeth d, andare con- said cleats, and the links E, pivoted to the out 
nected bypins e to bars or links E, whichlat-er ends of the sectors and to the drawer-bot 
terare in turn pivoted to the drawer-bottom tom, substantially as described. 
a, atf, near the front of the drawer, as clearly 
shown in the drawings. With this construc. 
tion, as the drawer Aispulled out orpushed 
in the links E. Will turn the Sectors D and 
cause both ends of the drawer to move alike, 
T. C. MARTIN, 
C, F. HEPP, 
MICHAEL MEYER. 
A 
VVitneSSes: 
75 
S 5 
v 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310399.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 310,399, 
 
 
F, E, FLAGG, 
SUSPENDERS, 
Patented Jan. 6, 1885, 
 
 
 
27 
/ 
I 
 
WITNESSES: 
C. ca 
-643ro?e 
7 
1zee-eeeee- re, 
ATTORNEYs, 
BY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK E. FLAGG, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
S US PEN DERS. 
S2ECi. FICATION forming part of 2.etters Patent No. 310,399, dated January 6, 1885. 
Application filed November 19, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
terial to reduce its size to the size of the said 
socket, as shown in Fig. 2. The unwound end 
of the rubber rod C remains at its natural size 
and serves as a head to prevent the said end 
from drawing out of the socket B. 
Upon the rubber rod C, at such a distance 
from its upper end as will make the suspender of 
suitable length and will give the said suspender 
sufficient elasticity, is placed a regulator, E, 
which may be made of leather, metal, or other 6o 
suitable material, and has a tubular aperture, 
E, formed through it to receive the rubber 
rod C. The tubular aperture E through the 
regulator E is made so much smaller than the 
rubber rod C that the part of the rod C be- 65 
low the said regulator E will serve as a head 
to prevent the said regulator from slipping 
down when the suspenders are in use. The 
regulator E is made with wings, to which 
are secured, by sewing or other suitable ,o 
means, the suspender-ends F, to which the 
pantaloons are to be buttoned. If desired, 
a third suspender-end, F, can be secured to 
the regulator E to support the drawers of the 
wearer. The free end of the rubber rod C is 75 
designed to be wound with thread or other 
Suitable material, to so reduce its size that it 
can be readily passed through the tubular ap 
erture of the regulator E, and the wound end 
can then be covered with a cap-ferrule, G, to so 
give a finish to the said end. The regulator 
E can be adjusted to regulate the length of 
the suspender by stretching the rubber rod C 
till its size is so reduced that the said regu 
lator can be moved upon it easily. 
In the modification shown in Figs. 3 and 4 
the suspender-ends FF are separate from the 
regulator E, and are connected with the said 
regulator by an eye, H, attached to the said 
ends, and a hook, I, attached to the said regu- go 
lator, the operation of the regulator being the 
same as hereinbefore described. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The suspenders constructed, substantially 95 
as herein shown and described, with the shoul 
der-straps connected with the suspender-ends 
by rubber rods, as set forth. 
2. In suspenders, the combination, with the 
85 
25 suspenders. 
Io corresponding parts in all the figures. 
To all, Luluon, it inctif concern. ' 
Be it known that I, FRANK E. FLAGG, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
5 ments in Suspenders, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a part of a 
suspender to which my improvement has been 
applied. Fig. 2 is a sectional side elevation 
of the same, taken through the broken linea: 
I5 ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a front elevation of a part 
of a suspender, showing a modification of the 
improvement, the parts being disconnected. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the same, show 
ing the parts connected. 
2O The object of this invention is to provide 
suspenders constructed in Such a manner as 
to avoid the use of buckles or clasps, and at 
the same time allow the Suspender-ends to be 
readily adjusted to lengthen or shorten the 
The invention relates to suspenders con 
structed with the shoulder-straps connected 
with the suspender-ends by rubber rods. To 
the end of the shoulder-Strap is attached a 
3o cap having a tubular socket to receive the 
rubber rod, and upon the rubber rod is placed 
a regulator, to which the suspender-ends are 
attached, and which is made with a tubular 
aperture smaller than the said rubber lod, 
35 whereby the said rubber rod is securely con 
nected with the shoulder-strap and the said 
regulator can be readily adjusted and will be 
securely held in place, as will be hereinafter 
fully described and then claimed. 
4.) A represents the shoulder-strap of a sus 
pender, to the end of which is attached a cap, 
B. The cap B is made of leather, metal, or 
other suitable material, and is Sewed or other 
Wise secured to the end of the shoulder-strap 
45 A. Upon the middle part of the cap B is 
formed a tubular socket, B, to receive the end 
of a rubber rod, C. The interior of the socket 
B is smaller than the rod C, and the part of 
the said rod that passes through the said socket 
1. 
so is wound with thread D or other suitable ma- i shoulder-strap A. and the suspender-ends F, Ico 
3. 
10, 399 
of the cap B, having tubular socket IB, the 
rubber rod C, and the legulator E, having 
tubular aperture E, substantially as herein 
shown and described, whereby the said shoul 
der-straps and suspender-ends are securely 
connected, as set forth. 
3. In suspenders, the combination, with the 
l'ods C and the suspender-ends F, of the regul 
lator E, having a tubular aperture, E, smaller 
than the said rubber rod, substantially as here 
in shown and described, whereby the said 
regulator can be readily adjusted and will be 
held in place securely, as set forth. 
O 
4. In suspendel's, the combination, with the 
shoulder-strap A. and the rubber rod C, hav 
ing its upper part wound with thread, of the 
cap B, having a tubular socket, B, Smaller 
than the said rubber rod, substantially as here 
in shown and described, whereby the said rub 
ber rod is securely connected with the said 2d 
shoulder-strap, as set forth. 
I5. 
FRANK. E. FLAGG. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES T. GRAHAM, 
EDGARTATE. 
. 
. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310499.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 310,499. 
O 
C. DREW, A. W. LEISNER & P. NELSON. 
HARROW, 
Patented Jan. 6, 1885. 
- 
WITNESSES: =  Inventon. 
YE- 
2. 
it 3. 
14 yr. 
. 
. 
ATTORNEYS, 
r. PETs, Ira-tiu?graller. Winslings. . 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTOPHER, DREW, ANDREAS WILLIAM LEISNER, AND PHILIP NELSON, 
OF LAS VEGAS, TERRITORY OF NEW MEXICO. 
HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 310,499, dated January 6, 1885. 
Application filed July 1, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
C) 
- 
To ?till whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CHRISTOPHERDREW, 
ANDREAS WILLIAM LEISNER, and PHILIP 
NELSON, all of Las Vegas, in the county of 
San Miguel and Territory of New Mexico, 
have invented a new and Improved Harrow, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description. 
Our invention consists of the construction 
and arrangement of parts, as will be herein 
after fully described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a harrow con 
structed according to our invention, and Fig. 
2 is a Sectional elevation of the same on the 
linea: a) of Fig. 1. 
We fit a broad thin plate, a, of steel, iron, 
or other approved material, and as large as the 
area of the harrow, on the teeth b, suitably for 
shifting up to the under side of the frame c and 
down to the points of the teeth for a cleaner, 
to force down the trash collecting on the teeth 
and cause it to escape from the points, and 
for a gage to regulate the depth of the teeth 
in the ground by setting it part way down 
the teeth to run on the surface of the ground, 
and also for a smoothing-plate to smooth the 
surface of the ground by setting the plate 
down to the points of the teeth, so that it will 
run on the surface, and at the same time carry 
the weight of the harrow for pressing the sur 
face Smooth. To operate said plate we con 
nect a rod, d, with it at the center of the top, 
and extend it up through a tubular standard, 
e, Supported on the top of the frame c, for a 
stay to said rod and for a guide to a spider 
frame, f, the arms of which are connected at 
the lower ends to the plate a by brackets of 
and pins h. The rod dextends above the top 
of the standard d, and connects at i with a 
presser, j, at the bottom of a socket, I, in the 
lower end of said presser, which surrounds 
the top of standard d and rests on the top of 
the hub l of the spider-frame f. The upper 
end of the presser j is connected to the hand 
lever m, the short arm of which is connected 
to link n, which extends down to and is joint- 5o 
ed to the top of the harrow-frame a short dis 
tance from one side of the standard d. The 
long arm of the lever m swings up and down 
along a standard, o, attached to the top of 
the harrow-frame, and having a series of pin- 55 
holes, p, to secure the lever in different posi 
tions by the stud-pin q, according to the dis 
tance it is required to set the plate a down 
along the teeth, said plate being pressed down 
ward by the lever. 
For raising the plate ( and holding it up 
ward, a coiled spring, s, is attached to it and 
to the top plate, t, of the frame at the center 
and surrounding the rod d, suitably for pull 
ing up plate a and holding it against the un- 65 
der side of the frame, and another coiled 
spring, u, is fitted in the socket k of presser 
j around rod d, so as to bear on the top of 
standard e and press upward against the bot 
tom of said socket k, to act in conjunction 7O 
with spring S for lifting up the plate a. In 
this example the lever an is connected to the 
presser i by passing through a slot in the up 
per part of the presser; but it may be con 
nected in any approved way. The lever has 75 
a curved notch, v, in the upper side, and the 
presser is correspondingly curved at it in the 
upper end of the slot, to provide a good bear 
ing and easy-working joint, and the lever has 
stop-lugsa at each side of the presser, to pre- 8O 
vent it from sliding in the slot. The holding 
standard o is suitably stayed with a brace, gy. 
The plate a is provided with flanges 2 on the 
forward edges, to prevent the earth and other 
matter from collecting between it and the un- 85 
der side of the frame. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
1. The combination, with the harrow-frame 
cand teeth b, of the smoothing-platea, provided 
with vertical flanges 3, extending up by the for 
wardsides of frame c, and with openings for the 
teeth b to pass through, a rigid spider, f, pro 
vided with a central aperture, and jointed at 95 
the ends of its arms to the plate (, a presser 
connected with the plate a through the aper 
ture in the spider, springs for pressing the 
Eatent- 
- 
90 
25 
35 
45 
2 
30,499 
plate at upward, and a lever fulcrumed to the 
frame and connected to the presser for oper 
atting the plate a, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the rod d, springs S 
and it, presser j, and tubular standard e with 
plate a and lever n, said plate being fitted 
to shift up and down on the teeth l, and hav 
ing the spider f, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the lever - setting 
Standard o, lever n, presser j, spider f, tubu 
lar standard e, rod d, and springs S and it with 
the platea, fitted to shift up and down on the 
harrow-teeth b, substantially as described. 
4. In a harrow of the character described, 
IO 
the tubular presser j, provided with a culved. I5 
slot, t', socket I, and rod d, in combination 
with the lever n, provided with a curved 
notch, , within the slot of the presser, stop 
lugs ac on opposite sides of said slot, and the 
link n, connected to the short arm of the lever, 20 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
CHRISTOPHER, DREW. 
ANDREAS WILLIAM LEISNER. 
PHILIP NELSON. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN L. TAYLOR, 
GEORGIE H. SHIELD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310599.txt	(Model.) 
L. LYBRAND. 
PAPER BOX, 
No. 310,599, 
Patented Jan. 13, 1885. 
 
oooz 
oal oal oa of oocal cat . cae 
f 
A6 / 
 
WIWESSES, 
& a 6.2%ae- 
4-ce 
A 24 
- 
W/EW70. 
c4-2- %, 6 ecle 
CY"a N 
M3 C2/f Star co-62 
N. Peters. Photo-lithotripher, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
LUCIUS LYBRAND, OF NOBLESVILLE, INDIANA. 
PAPSR BOX. 
SiCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 310,599, dated January 13, 1885. 
Application filed January 7, 1884. (Model.) 
O 
' 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LUCIUS LYBRAND, a. 
resident of Noblesville, Hamilton county, In 
diana, have made certain new and useful Im 
provements in Paper Boxes, a description of 
which is set forth in the following specifica 
tion, reference being made to the accompa 
nying drawings, in the several figures of which 
like letters indicate like parts. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
paper boxes, and will be readily understood 
from the following description. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view of the 
blank cut ready for folding, with re-enforcing 
Strips r pasted across the upper ends of parts 
A and C on the latter, just below flap 3. Fig. 
2 is a view of the same blank with flaps 11 
233 folded ready for closing the box together. 
Fig. 3 is a view of the box closed, with a string, 
S, passed through the holesh, and tied to form 
a loop at the back by which to hang up the 
box. Fig. 4 is a vertical cross-section of the 
box closed, as in Fig. 3. 
The side C has two end flaps formed inte 
ral With it, an upper flap, 3, and a lower flap, 
3. The upper flap, 3, has a side tag, t, and 
end tags, tt, all of which have holes h, as 
shown, for passing string S through. The 
lower flap, 3, has end tags, it'. The side A 
has a side flap, 1, and a bottom flap, 2, and 
back B unites sides A and C, which latter 
also has a side flap, 1'. Re-enforcing strips 
rare pasted upon sides A and C at their up 
per ends, inside, as shown, and holes h are 
made through strips r and the sides to which 
they are fastened, to admit the string S. 
The blank being cut, perforated, and re-en 
forcing strips pasted on, the box is thus made: 
The flaps and tags are bent as indicated in 
Fig. 2. The back of tag tisgummed and fast 
ened flat to the inside of back B, at the lower 
end. Sides A and C are closed together, flap 
2 coming inside of and resting upon flap 3, 
which forms the bottom of the box, and paste 
is applied to secure flap 2 to flap 3 in this po 
sition. Tag t is pasted to inside of flap 1 at 
35 
45 
55 
its lower end, and flap 1 folds under flap 1, 
and these two are also secured by paste. At . 
the top tag t folds inward and is pasted to 
the inside of the upper end of flap 1, and tag 5o 
t to the inside of back B. Tag tis then fold 
ed down on the outside of the upper end of 
side A, completing the box-form, and the 
string S is then passed through the holes h, 
which are formed all around the top, through 
sides, ends, and tags t t and side tag, t, these 
holes, by the folding, being brought opposite 
each other in adjacent parts, and near enough 
to all the corners to hold the parts firmly to 
gether at the lapping places, and yet are SO 
arranged that there will be no difficulty in 
getting the contents of the box in and out 
without obstruction from the cord or the edges 
or corners of the flaps or tags. 
The box when closed is represented in Fig. 
3, and to open it the top of flap 3 is cut through 
with a sharp knife along the dotted lines. 
The top parts may be closed and fastened by 
eyelets, and a short wire or cord loop be used 
to hang it up by; but this would be a mere 
mechanical equivalent or substitue for string S. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is the following: 
1. The paper-box blank herein shown, hav 
ing side A, provided with flaps 1 and 2, back 
B, side C, having flap 3, with tags t t t con 
nected and integral there with, flap 1 on the 
side of C, flap 3' at the bottom, provided with 
end tags, it', and re-enforcing strips r, all 
combined substantially as described. 
2. The paper box herein described, con 
structed from a blank having side A, provided 
with flaps 1 and 2, back B, side C, having flap 
3, with tags t t t connected and integral there 
with, flap 1 on the side of C, flap 3 at the 85 
bottom, provided with end tags, it', re-enforc 
ing strips , perforations h, and cord S, all 
combined substantially as described. 
75 
LUCIUS LYBRAND. 
Witnesses: 
C. P. JACOBS, 
O. L. GETITDIDIER. 
25 9. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310699.txt	(No Model.) 
M. J. MONELLY, 
UNE.0 ADING AND ELEWATING APPARATUS, 
No. 310,699, 
Patented Jan. 13, 1885. 
 
 
 
 
  
WITNESSES: 
O-27-73. 
al 
III 
| 
g 62 Cl yazy 
INVENTOR: 
// Zez y 
| 
ATTORNEYS, 
* Pettis. Photo lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
MATTHIAS J. McNELLY, OF 
WILMINGTON, DELAWARE. 
UNLOADING AND ELEVAT N G A PPARATUS, 
3PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 310,699, dated January 13, 1885. 
Application filed October 21, 1884. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, MATTHILAS.J. McNELLY, 
of Wilmington, in the county of New Castle 
and State of Delaware, have invented a new 
and Improved Unloading and Elevating Ap 
paratus, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to economize 
time and labor in unloading, elevating, and 
transferring coal, Sand, or other substances. 
The invention consists in an unloading and 
elevating apparatus constructed with a chute 
arranged below a railway-track, a pit below 
the chute, into which an elevator-bucket run 
ning on tracks of a trestle or frame may pass, 
so as to receive the material discharged from 
the chute, which is elevated by the bucket and 
discharged therefrom into a hopper supported 
on the trestle over tracks on which transfer 
cars may run to receive the material from the 
hopper and deliver it at any point below. 
The invention consists, also, in particular 
constructions and combinations of parts of the 
apparatus, all as hereinafter fully described 
and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similarletters of reference indicate cor. 
responding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of my in 
proved apparatus, showing in dotted lines the 
position of the elevator-bucket when dumping 
its load into the overhead receptacle; and Fig. 
2 is a front view of the elevator-bucket. 
The letter A indicates a trestle or frame, 
which has tracks act at the top, on which the 
transfer-car Bruns, so as to discharge its loads 
of coal or other material into any one of a se 
ries of bins or in separate heaps below the 
trestle. 
C is the road-bed alongside of which the 
trestle is built, and on which the tracks c e of 
the main line of railway or a siding thereof 
are laid, so that the cars D may be run along 
or from the main track directly over an in 
clined floor or chute, E, built under the track, 
to dump their loads into said chute. 
F is a gate fitted at the outer end of the 
chute E, and having any Suitable mechanism 
such as a lever, f-by which it may be lifted. 
or opened to let the coal G or other material 
dumped from the cars D fall into the elevator 
pit, I, built at the 
J are tracks, which are fastened by braces 55 
bucket H, which rests in a 
side of tracks c c. 
k or otherwise to the face-posts K of the tres 
tle A, and extend upward from the pit I and 
curve inward at the top, as at j, to allow the 
oppositeside rollers, h. h., of the elevator-bucket 
H to move inward as the bucket dumps its 6o 
load into the hopper or receptacle L, fixed to 
the trestle A, so that the cars B may be run 
below the hopper to be loaded therefrom, the 
hopper having a bottom inclining toward an 
outlet closed by a sliding gate, M, which may 65 
be opened by operating a lever, m, suitably at 
tached to the hopper and gate. 
N is the hoisting rope or cable, which is con 
nected to the bail O of the bucket H and 
passes over a pulley or sheave, P, journaled at 7o 
the head of the posts K and it may be over 
a rear pulley, Q, to be wound on a drum (not 
shown) driven by any convenient motor. 
I fix to the posts K the elastic or yielding 
trip-bars R., (dotted,) having hook-heads, on 75 
which the front plate or nose of the bucketH 
must catch as it rises. A bar, R, may be fixed 
to each of the pair of posts K, to catch the 
bucket at or near its opposite sides or ends, to 
which the rollersh h are pivoted; but a single So 
trip-bar, R, may be fastened to the center of 
a cross-beam connecting the two posts K, to 
catch the center of the front of the bucket, if 
desired. The lower ends of the tracks J are 
curved outward, as at j', to carry the back 
wall of the bucket H well underneath the end 
of the chute E as the bucket rests on the floor 
of the pit I, (see Fig. 1) so that all the mate 
rial G shall passinto the bucket from the chute. 
The operation is as follows: The coal or 
other material G. having been dumped from 
the railway-cars D into the chute E, and the 
bucket H having been lowered to the pit I, the 
gate F will be opened, and the coal G will au 
tomatically dump itself into the bucket, which 
then is hoisted by the rope N until it strikes 
the hook-heads of the trip-bars R, and a con 
tinued hoisting of the bucket will carry it in 
ward on the curved ends j of the tracks J, and 
cause it to be swung, as in dotted lines in Fig. 
1, to discharge its load into the hopper L, the 
trip-bars R yielding backward to allow the 
front or nose of the bucket to stand well with 
in the hopper, so that it shall receive the en 
85 
9O 
95 
IOC 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
310,699 
O 
tire contents of the bucket, which now may 
be lowered for its next load. The coal or 
other material may then be delivered from the 
hopper Linto the transfer-car Band dumped 
therefrom at any point below the tracks a (c. 
It will be seen that the coal or other mate 
rial may quickly be removed from the rail 
way-cars D and be elevated and transferred to 
any desired point in the yard below the trestle 
without hand-shoveling, thereby largely econ 
omizing time and labor. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An unloading and elevating apparatus 
constructed with a chute below the railway 
track, a pit at the side of the track, an adja 
cent trestle having tracks on which a hoist 
ing-bucket runs, a hopper or receptacle Sup 
ported on the trestle to receive the material 
from the bucket and deliver it to transfel 
cars, and means for hoisting the bucket and 
dumping its contents, substantially as herein 
Set forth. 
2. In unloading and elevating apparatus, 
the combination, with the chute E, pit I, and 
bucket H, of the trestle-tracks J, having out 
25 
35 
wardly-curved lower ends, j', to carry the 
bucket well under the end of the chute, sub 
stantially as herein set forth. 
3. In an unloading and elevating apparatus, 
the combination, with the elevator-bucket H. 
and hopper L, of tracks J, having inturned 
upper ends, i, and of the yielding trip-barSR, 
having hook ends , substantially as herein 
set forth. 
4. The combination, in an unloading and 
elevating apparatus, of a chute, E, under the 
railway-track, and having a gate, F, and 
means for opening it, a pit, I, below the chute, 
a trestle, A, supporting tracks J, having out 
wardly-bent lower ends, j', and inturned up 
per ends, i, yielding trip-bars R., having hook 
heads , and an elevating-bucket, H, adapted 
to the tracks J, and means for hoisting the 45 
bucket, and a hopper, L, supported on the 
trestle to receive the contents of the bucket H 
and deliver the same to transfer-cars below it, 
substantially as herein set forth. 
MATTHIAs J. McNELLY. 
Witnesses: 
PETER SPRINGER, 
JOHN C. COLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310799.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 310,799. 
J. E. COMPTON, 
WHEEL FOR GRINDING OR POLISHING SURFACEs. 
Patented Jan. 13, 1885, 
 
 
 
 
N. PeFERS. Photo-Litito 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E BEN E ZER COMPT ON OF LYNN, MASS ACHUSETTS. 
WHEEL FOR GRN DING OR POLISH NG SURFACES. 
-?ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 310,799, dated January 13, 1885. 
Application filed May 20, 1884. 
(No model ) 
IO 
?lo all whom, it notif concer'7. 
Beit known that IJAMESEBENEZER COMP 
TON, a citizen of the Dominion of Canada, but 
now residing at Lynn, in the county of Essex, 
of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Wheels for Grinding or Polishing Surfaces or 
for other Mechanical Purposes; and Idohere 
by declare the same to be described in the fol 
lowing specification and represented in the 
accompanying drawings, of which 
Figures 1 and 2 are oppositeside elevations, 
Fig. 3 a transverse section, and Fig. 4 a lon 
gitudinal section, of a wheel embracing my in 
vention. Fig. 5 is an inner side view of the 
helically-grooved plate-section or annulus con 
stituting part of the hub of such wheel. Fig. 
6 is an inner side view of the radially-grooved 
section of the hub, and Fig. 7 is an edge view 
of one of the loops and its two voussoirs, to be 
described. Fig. 8 is an end view, Fig. 9 a. 
rear view, and Fig. 10 a transverse section, of 
one of the adjustable weights D', hereinafter 
described, the said section being taken through 
one of its confining-screws. Fig. 11 is a side 
view on an enlarged scale of one of the taper 
ing screwst, hereinafter referred to. 
The nature of my invention is duly defined 
in the claims hereinafter presented. 
The rim. A of the wheel is made of sole 
leather or rawhide, or of Strong leather-board 
or other suitable like material, and, as shown, 
is composed of a series of loops of such leather 
or material and two voussoirs to each loop, 
each of such voussoirs consisting of part of the 
loop and two or other suitable number of pieces 
of the leather or material arranged side to side 
in pack and on opposite sides of the loop, in 
manner as shown in Fig. 7, in which a denotes 
the loop, and b b and e c the pieces of leather, 
applied to each other and to the loop at and 
near each end of it, the pack composed of the 
said pieces having the form of or being taper 
ing like the voussoirs of an arch. The parts 
composing each vousSoir may be secured to 
gether by cement arranged between them or 
by pegs or nails driven into them. There are 
to each loop, and to extend between its vous 
soirs, two bent or arched re-enforcers or metal 
So lic plates, d and e, through which and the loop 
at its middle an arm, B, is extended, the part 
a of such arm, that goes through the loop, be 
ing screw-threaded to receive two nuts, Cand 
D, arranged with the loop and its re-enforcing 
plates d and e in manner as represented. By 
means of the screw-threads and the nuts, or 
such and the plates, the arm is secured to the 
loop. The said arms B, arranged in radial 
directions, extend within the wheel-hub C, 
between its two sections fando, and are adapt 
ed to slide in radial groovesh, formed in the 
inner face of the section f, such grooves being 
shown in Fig. 6. The section f is disk-shaped 
and provided with a hub, k, the part l of which 
is cylindrical, and has upon and concentric 
with it the flat annulus or partig, which is held 
in place in a measure by a nut, m, screwed on 
the said partl. A helical groove, n, is made 
in the inner face of the part g, into which 
groove each of the arms is extended where it 
covers such groove. By turning the helically 
grooved annulus g one way on the extension l, 
all the arms will be simultaneously moved in 
ward in radial directions, so as to draw the 
several voussoirs inwardly and toward each 
other. By continuing to revolve the annulus 
these voussoirs may be drawn tightly together, 
so as to form a very strong rim to the wheel. 
Screws 0, inserted through one of the sections 
if g and screwed into the other, are arranged 
between the arms, as shown. They are to aid 
in firmly holding the sections to the arms, but 
have to be removed from the Sections before 
the helically-grooved one can be revolved. The 
rim of a grinding or polishing wheel so made 
is, when in use, to have on its sides and pe 
riphery, or on the latter, some proper grinding 
or polishing or abrasive solution-such as em 
ery, corundum, sand, or Totten-stone, for in 
Stance. 
there is formed near its edge, and concen 
trically therewith, a circular groove, p, dove 
tailed in transverse section. This groove has 
extending into it the dovetailed ribs 
q of two 
adjustable weights, D'. 
weights is in two separate curved sections, ss, 
formed as shown. (See Figs. 8,9, and 10.) 
Into and between the two Sections SS screws 
tt are screwed and a but against the bottom of 
the groove, each Screw being tapering, so as on 
being screwed down between the two sections 
and against the said bottom it will force them 
In one of the sections fg of the hub go 
Each of the said 95 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
75 
8 5 
IOC) 
30,799 
. 
. . 
I claim- 
apart and laterally or OutWardly in a manner 
to cause their separable dovetailed rib to be 
extended and moved, so as to hold the weight 
firmly in position on or to the hub-section. 
These adjustable weights are to properly bal 
ance the wheel to cause it to run correctly 
while in operation. By reason of the weights 
D' being in sections, they are the more readily 
placed within or removed from the groove p. 
1. The combination of the helically and ra. 
dially grooved sections of the hub with the 
series of arms applied, as described, to such 
section, and with the rim consisting of a se 
ries of voussoirs, each of which is composed of 
pieces of leather, as set forth, and connected 
with the arms, the whole being so that by re 
volving in one direction the helically-grooved 
section of the hub the several voussoirs, by 
means of the arms, shall be drawn and held 
firmly together, essentially as explained. 
2. The wheel-rim consisting of a series of 
voussoirs, each of which is composed of pieces 
of leather in pack, in combination with a hub, 
and with arms adapted thereto and to such 
voussoirs, and provided with mechanism for 
moving such arms in radial directions toward 
the hub, so as to draw together the several 
IO 
25 
voussoirs, all being substantially as set forth, 
the said mechanism for moving such arms con-3 
sisting of the disk (, provided with the helical 
groove in, having the arms, where covering it, 
extended into it, as set forth. 
3. The wheel provided with the circular 
groove dovetailed transversely, and with one or 
more weights, made in two sections, dovetailed 
as described, and arranged with such groove 
and held in place thereto by screws going into 
and between the two sections, all being substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. The wheel-hub, made in sections, heli 
cally and radially grooved and connected, sub 
stantially as described, in combination with 
the series of radial arms, arranged between 
and applied, as described, to the said sections, 
and with the rim composed of the loops and 
voussoirs of leather, and of the strengthening 
metallic plates applied to each loop, the said 
arms being extended through the loops and 
such plates and connected therewith by screws 
and nuts, substantially as represented. 
JAMES EBENEZER COMPTON. 
45 
Witnesses: 
R. H. EDDY, 
E. B. PRATT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310899.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MURDOCH MACKAY, OF LONDON, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
RICHARD EDWARD GOOLDEN, OF SAME PLACE. 
PLASTIC COMPOUND SUITABLE FOR MOLDING INTO WARIOUS USEFUL ARTICLES, SUCH AS SCREW 
STOPPERS FOR BOTTLES, JARS, &c, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 31.0,899, dated January 20, 1885. 
Application filed June 11, 1884. (No specimens.) Patented in England November 20, 1883, No 5,467; in France May 20, 1884, 
No. 162,249, and in Belgium May 23, 1884, No. 65,23f. 
- 
When 55 
I5 
- 
25 dry, moist, or liquid. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MURDOCH MACKAY, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid- by being passed through hot rollers. 
ing at London, England, have invented new 
5 and useful Improvements in Plastic Com 
pounds Suitable for Molding into Various 
Useful Articles, such as Screw-Stoppe's for 
Bottles, Jars, &c., Brushes, Buttons, or any 
other articles for useful or ornamental pill'- 
Io poses which are required to stand a high de 
gree of heat, (for which I have obtained a pat 
entin Great Britain, No. 5,467, dated the 20th 
day of November, 1883,) of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to the manufacture 
of improved plastic compounds or composi 
tions suitable for molding into various arti 
cles, such as screw-stoppers for bottles, jars, 
casks, and similar vessels; for the manufac 
2O ture of that class of brushes which have their 
bristles secured in plastic material; also, for 
buttons and for various other articles for use 
ful and ornamental purposes which are re 
quired to stand a high degree of heat, whether 
The improved compositions are manufac 
tured from a mixture of gum-sandarac or gum 
kauri,(singly or in combination,) shellac, with 
or withoutrosin, carbon or asphaltum, and as 
In manufacturing a compound suitable for 
making screw - stoppers and other articles 
which require to be free from taste and smell, 
and which are likely to be subjected to a high 
35 degree of heat, I employ the following ingre 
dients, in about the proportions specified 
that is to say, about seventy-five pounds of 
lac, (preferably shellac,) thirty-eight pounds 
of gum-sandarac, thirty-eight pounds of or 
4o dinary rosin, thirty-eight pounds of ivory 
black or other fine carbon, and one hundred 
and sixty-eight pounds of asbestus or other 
suitable fibrous material or silicates. 
I first put the above-named resins and or 
45 dinary pine-rosin into a suitable vessel and 
heat the saune until they are reduced to a 
fluid state. I then add the carbon, and When 
this has been well amalgamated I add the as 
bestus or other fibrous matters or silicates. 
So The whole is well combined by stirring until 
it forms a stiff paste, which is then fit to be 
molded in dies (preferably heated) or to be 
rolled out into sheets; or the ingredients, when 
heated, can be mixed and worked into a paste 
the compounds are required of various colors, 
I omit the carbon and add in place thereof 
any suitable colored pigments. 
The above proportions may be in some 
cases varied, according to the quality of the 6o 
materials employed, it being borne in mind 
in proportion as the quantity of gum-sandarac 
used is increased the heat-resisting quality of 
the compound formed is increased; but it 
should not be used in excess, as the result 65 
Would be to give unnecessary brittleness to 
the compound. 
The above composition is not affected by 
either dry or moist heat at 200 Fahrenheit, 
nor in hot water at 210 Fahrenheit. It is 7o 
not affected by the fermentation in beer, 
Wille, and the like, and is free from taste or 
shell when in contact with such liquids, and 
is specially adapted for use in hot climates. 
When the composition is not required to be 
entirely free from taste and smell, gum-kauri 
may be used in Combination with gum-sanda 
rac, by preference in equal proportions, though 
other proportions may be used; also, in some 
cases I enploy asphaltun in place of or in 8o 
combination with the carbon. 
The ingredients of my improved compounds 
and the proportions thereof above named are 
those which I have found to answer well for 
producing compounds suitable for the pur- 85 
poses mentioned; hut, it will be evident that, 
the proportions of the ingredients may be va 
ried according to the nature of the articles to 
be manufactured therefrom. In some cases 
other resins may be employed in combination 9c 
with gllm-Sandarac and gum-kauri. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention 
and in what manner the same is to be per 
formed, I declare that what I claim is 
The plastic compound described, consisting 
of lac, gum-Sandarac, rosin, ivory-black, and 
asbestus, or their described equivalents, in 
the proportions substantially as set forth. 
MURDOCH MACKAY. 
3C bestus or other fibrous material or silicates. 
Witnesses: 
G. F. REDFERN, 
F, PRICE, 
75 
95 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US310999.txt	(No Model.) 
A. S. HIBBARD. 
ATOMIZER 
No. 310,999. 
Patented Jan. 20, 1885, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
Was 
 
A2%zasses. 
6-6-2 
 
lazzezzzeys. 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANGUS S. HIBBARD, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN. 
ATOMZER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 310,999, dated January 20, 1885. 
Application filed September 30, 1884. (No model.) 
Io described hereinafter. 
Beit known that I, ANGUs S. HIBBARD, of outside of the bulb, and have it extend up to so 
Zo all whom it may concern: 
cover and cork, I may place this tube on the 
Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee, and in the outlet of the tube F. In this case I would 
the State of Wisconsin, have invented certain use a flexible tube, and make one end remov 
5 new and useful Improvements in Atomizers; able, so as to admit of the removal of the 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a cover, as shown in Fig. 2. The removable 
full, clear, and exact description thereof. 
My invention relates to that class of arti- passing through the cover C and into the stop 
cles known as 'atomizers,' affl will be fully per D, and this end may be pulled out when 
it is desired to remove the receptacle E from 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a central ver. the bulb A; or the end g' of the flexible part 
end may have a downward solid projection, g, 55 
tical section of my device, and Fig. 2 is a like of the tube G may be removed from the in. 6o 
view of a modification thereof. 
flexible part for this purpose. 
A is an ordinary rulber bulb, having an 
2O through its center, and a circular recess on its 
G may be of glass, metal, or any material 65 
The receptacle E is preferably of glass, so 
15 air-valve, a, in its lower end, or at any other as to show its contents and condition when 
suitable point, and an internally-screw-thread- ever removed from the bulb, and the tubes F 
ed collar, B, in its neck. 
C is a cover that has an externally-screw- preferred, and the stopper D may be of either 
threaded neck, c, which has an aperture rubber, cork, or any substance found suitable. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
under side to receive a centrally-perforated claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
stopper, D, the lower end of which is inserted Patent, is- 
in the receptacle E, that contains the liquid E' 
1. An air-bulb inclosing a liquid-receptacle, 
to be atomized. 
in coilbination with one tube leading out from 
25 F is a tube that extends up from within the within the receptacle and another leading out 
liquid-receptacle through the stopper D and from the space within the bulb, and between 
cover C. The upper portion of the central it and the receptacle, forming an atomizing-in- 75 
perforation in the stopper D is enlarged, and jector, substantially as set forth. 
a tube, G, is extended down parallel with 
2. In an atomizer, the combination of a liq 
3o tube F, and then bent so as to be passed out uid-receptacle inclosed within a compressible 
at an angle to it and open into the bulb. The air-bulb, with tubes leading, respectively, from 
outer ends of the tubes are of corresponding the receptacle and air-bulb to the outside, 8o 
form to those of ordinary atonizers. 
substantially as set forth. 
7o 
cover having a recess for the stopper of the 85 
The cover may be of any desired form, and 
4o form of either that will admit of the suspen- 
3. The combination, in an atomizer, of a 
35 may be provided with one or more necks on compressible bulb, a liquid-receptacle, a stop 
top for attaching atomizing-tubes of different per, a threaded collar, and a corresponding 
forms to it. 
I do not confine myself to any particular liquid-receptacle, and perforations for the at 
form of liquid-receptacle or of stopper, as any omizing-tubes, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
sion of the liquid-receptacle in the bulb by have hereunto set my hand, at Milwaukee, in 
the stopper will serve my purpose. 
The compression of the bulb forcing the air 
45 through tube G will cause it to draw the liquid 
from the receptacle and inject it upon the sur- 
face to be treated. 
Instead of passing the tube G through the 
The operation of my device is very simple. consin, in the presence of two witnesses. 
S. S. STOUT, 
R. J. FORSYTHE. 
ANGUS S. HIBBARD. 
the county of Milwaukee and State of Wis- 9o 
Witnesses: 
. 
t 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US311099.txt	E. P. BAWILLE. 
MACHINE FOR THREADING SCREWS, BOLTS, AND NUTS, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 311,099, 
 
Patented Jan. 20, 188 
52 
1/z.27 effe." 
-6 &eece/2 
8 
Z772 evezzr. 
6.2 &2& 
1.Z272 eap. 
(No Model.) 
E. P. B. AWILLE, 
MACHINE FOR THREADING SCREWS, BOLTS, AND NUTS, 
No. 311,099. 
- 
Patented Jan. 20, 1885. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
o is 
|S. 
Wi 
Estest 
Esties 
s 
S. 
m 
B. HETIHI JII. HIT IIIHis 
Rs. 
HASHII IIHF: 
p s 
HIH 
- 
- 
STE 
2. 
Taiti 
3. 
Ea 
27 Sl p- g 
2SkS 
lity 
s 
Tie-12 L. 
CZ 
RF 
T 
IHEI-IEIT III 
=- 
elect. 
H H. H. W. H 
un? 
y 
 
 
2. 
(fl. 
- 
. 
5. 
--- 
3: E. cII. ic: | 
T 
g 
f 
1/z772 esses, 
44-42 
J.a6.O. 
Zzz zvezza7. 
 24.4- 
-Zw 
12/727/24a.s. 
N. Pretts, Polo-Eticsrapher. Waslington.D.C. 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
E. P. BAWILLE, 
MACHINE FOR THREADING SCREWS, BOLTS, AND NUTS, 
* 
No. 311,099, 
Patented Jan. 20, 1885. 
 
Says 
4. 
2 2. 
riffilif A 
72Z77zesses. 
4 &vie4 
Zzzvezzr. 
& 7 (2/26&- 
-2772/7Zezs. 
N. :ERs, photo-lithogratic r. Washistoli. D.C. 
MACHINE FOR THREADING SCREWS, BOLTS, AND NUTS, 
E. P. BAWILLE, 
(No Model.) 
No. 311,099, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Jan. 20, 1885. 
 
A A. 
X 
JZZzerter, 
46%-6-d 
e/26 % 
- Z za/e/227, 
6 Y& 
27 Music 
1772//zee/s. 
(No Model.) 
NO; 311,099. 
 
 
E. P. B. AWILLE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
MACHINE FOR THREADING SCREWS, BOLTS, AND NUTS, 
Patented Jan. 20, 1885. 
 
--~% 
42. 
6 4.eze 
(Luv- sy-(2- 
7272//zez 
Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 311,099, 
MACHINE FOR THREADING SCREWS, BOLTS, AND NUTS, 
Patented Jan. 20, 1885, 
E. P. BAWILLE. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
 
1/7772 esses, 
44% cored 
s 
N. Peters. Proto-Lithographer. Wishington, D.C. 
Z722/e/2227 
6 (2. 
-27 -lu. Je 
7227/ze2s. 
(No Model.) 
No. 311,099. 
S 
E. P. B. AWILLE, 
MACHINE FOR THREADING SCREWS, BOLTS, AND NUTS, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
Patented Jan. 20, 1885. 
f 
 
SS S 
S. 
e (A 2 
S& 
SS 
2. t SSA) 
&y 
  
 
NSN 
 
W at 77A 
2 Se: N2 s 3SN 
EAT SS 
NSS2 3i 
N 
 
 
R Y 2. 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
i. S 
2 32 -------Z2  
N/72 C 
S 
 
 
 
  
  
  
(No Model.) 
No. 311,099. 
MACHINE FOR THREADING SCREWS, BOLTS, AND NUTS, 
E. P. BAWILLE. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
Patented Jan. 20, 1885, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
[] ? N, 
|| \,: 
???222222 
?NI ae 
Azzeesyes; 
EGG, 
T-P 
/Z--- (a 
22-6 72227; 
3 Z 
tav A6/ 
17ZZz7-7zezs, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDMOND PIERRE BAVILLE, OF BRUSSELS, BELGIUM. 
MACHINE FOR THREADING SCREWS, BOLTS, AND NUTS. 
gPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 311,099, dated January 20, 1885. 
Application filed November 24, 1883. (No model.) Patented in Belgium November 28, 1882, No. 59,688, and in France 
December 21, 1882, No. 152,7S8. 
To ali, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDMONDPIERRE BA 
VILLE, of the city of Brussels, Belgium, have 
invented new and useful Improved Machin 
ery for Threading Screws, Bolts, and Nuts, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This improved machinery for threading 
screws in general, and especially screw-bolts, 
has for its object to impart to the manufac 
ture of screws of all kinds, and especially of 
screw -bolts, greater rapidity, considerable 
economy, and above all greater accuracy; and 
to this end the invention consists in the pe 
culiar construction and arrangement of parts, 
as hereinafter fully described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1, Sheet I, is a front elevation of my 
improved machine; Fig. 2, Sheet II, a plan 
view of the same; Fig. 3, Sheet III, a side ele 
vation partly in Section; Fig. 4, Sheet IV, a 
rear elevation showing the side of the die 
stocks or screw-plates; Figs. 5 and 6, Sheet 
V, sectional views of the sliding bolt-holder; 
Figs. 7 and 8, Sheet VI, elevation views of 
the adjustable die-stock or screw-plate; Figs. 
9 and 10, Sheet VII, sections of the same show 
ing its interior arrangement; Figs. 11 and 12, 
Sheet VIII, views of a fixed standard screw. 
plate; Figs. 13, 14, and 15, Sheet VIII, views 
of the adjustable universal cutting-tool. Fig. 
16, Sheet IX, is a longitudinal section of the 
bolt-holder head. Fig. 17, Sheet IX, is a 
section on line aca, Fig. 16. Figs. 18, 19, and 
20, Sheet IX, are end sections and plan views, 
respectively, of the gripping-jaws. Figs. 21, 
22, and 23, Sheet IX, are plan, section, and side 
elevation, respectively, of the ring provided 
with dovetail slots in which the dovetail ends 
of the gripping-jaws slide. Figs. 24 and 25, 
Sheet IX, are end and sectional views of the 
holder, showing the notches in which the stops 
on the globulous heads fit. 
Figs. 26 and 27, 
Sheet IX, are plan and sectional views of the 
adjusting-nut. 
In the present instance the machine is ar 
ranged in such a manner as to thread four 
bolts, and I have shown on the opposite side 
of the machine means for tapping nuts, and 
at opposite ends of the machine, mechanism 
for turning the stems of bolts, and mechanism 
for shaping the faces of the nuts and the bolt 
These devices, however, form no part 
heads. 
of the present invention. 
On a foundation-plate, A, which contains a 
reservoir or tank for the Water to be distrib 
uted to each tool, are securely mounted the 
frames B B, connected together by the cross 
pieces B". 
On the side frames, B, are fastened in any 
convenient manner the brackets B and B, 
supporting, respectively, the bolt-turning and 
head and nut shaping devices, Figs. 1, 2, and 
3. Cast - iron tanks or receptacles B", pro 
vided with a false bottom, which is perfo 
rated with holes and covered with coarse can 
vas, so as to filter the water which has been 
used for cooling the tools and which is re 
turned constantly to the reservoir, while the 
finished article and the turnings remain in the 
receptacles B, project laterally on each side 
of the frames B. B. The driving-shaft C is 
longitudinally mounted in the center of 
machine in bearings fastened upon brackets b, 
cast with the frame, which can only be seen 
in the plan view, Fig. 2. The driving-shaft 
C receives its rotary motion from the graded 
pulley D, on the side of which is secured a 
fly-wheel, D', in order to regulate the move 
ment. 
At the ends of the shaft C are the bevel 
wheels F, which engage with correspond 
ing wheels, F, operating the two transverse 
shafts C C, the bearings of which are in 
bosses b bon stands upon the frames, and each 
of these shafts operates simultaneously two 
die-stocks or screw-plates, H, situated on one 
side of the machine, and two tap-holders, K, 
on the other side of the same, by means of the 
pinions G. G. G. G', provided with coupling 
clutches. The two spur-pinions G. G., which 
operate each, respectively, two corresponding 
wheels, G* G', (one for each die-stock,) are 
loosely fitted upon the shafts C'C' when they 
are disengaged with their corresponding 
clutch; but as soon as this latter is engaged 
with the said pinions, (which operation is per 
formed by pulling silluply on the horizontal 
55 
OO 
65 
75 
85 
90 
IC 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
S) 
31,099 
O 
.5 
9O 
rod (),) they will rotate with their shafts and 
operate the wheels G-G, in order to revolve 
the screw-stocks H, the shafts of which C'C' 
are mounted in the same manner as the shafts 
C'C', there being one on each side of each 
Shaft C and at equal distances therefrom. 
The other two pinions, G. G', which serve to 
give motion to the tap-holders, K, are also 
loose on their shafts C C, and may be en 
gaged by pulling on the forked hand-lever 
g'. The pinions G G engage with interme 
diary pinions, G' G", turning loosely on studs. 
projecting from the stands b', in order to act 
upon the wheels G* G', the shafts of which C 
C are situated underneath the shafts C C of 
the screw-plates, and do not extend through 
the whole width of the machine, but are mount 
ed in bosses l'b" on the receptacle B and the 
frame at one side of the machine. The driv 
ing-shaft C has besides the bevel-wheels F at 
its ends, another bevel-wheel, F, fixed on its 
middle, which engages with a corresponding 
wheel, F, the top end of a vertical shaft, C, 
which has its upper bearing in a cross-piece, 
b', of the frames, and its lower one in a bracket, 
l, projecting from the frame. The bevel 
wheel F on its lower end engages with a cor 
responding wheel, F, on the inner end of a 
horizontal transverse shaft, C, which has its 
bearings b" on the lower part of the frame. 
The wheel F on the outer end of this shaft 
drives a longitudinal shaft, C, the bearings of 
which are mounted in brackets b, connected 
With the frames. A pulley, I, at one end of 
this shaft gives motion to the stem-turning 
mechanism by means of a belt or strap acting 
upon a pulley, I, on the main shaft of this ap 
paratus, and a pulley, I, at the other end op 
erates the pulley I" on the driving-shaft of the 
bolt-head and nut-shaping mechanism. 
Having now given a general insight of the 
operating action of the various arrangements, 
the different parts and their special working 
Will be separately described, and in order to 
proceed regularly I will first show the sliding 
bolt-holder in all its details. 
The sliding bolt-holder L is represented on 
a larger scale in Figs. 5 and 6 of Sheet V, and 
in Figs, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 
26, and 27 of Sheet IX. The bolt-holder 
proper consists of a cylindrical box having a 
globulous head, (t, held on the end of the tube 
t" by the nutt, screwed on the sleevel, which 
ill turn is Screwed on the tube l'. The bore 
of the Said box is tapering from its inner to 
its outer end, and said box is provided with 
in Wardly-projecting lugs 1 on its outer end, 
to enter the grooves 2 of the four gripping 
jaws a', which slide in the said box, and are 
60 provided with dovetail-shaped ends 3. The 
dovetail ends 3 of the grippingjaws work in 
radial dovetail slots 4 of the flanged and 
threaded ring (t. A flanged nut, l, is screwed 
on the outer end of the heada, with its flange 
outside of the flange of the ring a, and a nut, 
l, is screwed on the end of the said ring a. 
The inner end of the head a is provided with 
lugs 5, which enter notches or recesses 6 in 
the end of the tube l'. By this construction 
the head, while it is prevented from turning, 
yet is free to follow all the movements of the 
bolt, and by advancing or withdrawing the 
nut l, the gripping-jaws at are brought to 
gether or spread out without leaving the 
ring a, by sliding up and down on the faces 75 
of the conical hollowed boxa, and thus clamp 
the stems or heads of bolts between them, so 
as to perfectly center and firmly secure them 
in the sliding bolt-holder L. The slides L, 
which may be of any convenient length, travel 
in bosses bcast on the receptacles B", so as to 
slide longitudinally in these latter under the 
pull of the bolt in course of threading, and to 
prevent their turning. The feather d on the 
slide is guided in a groove of the boss b. At 
the middle of the feather d is fixed on the 
slide a small bearing, e, in which the rod f, 
with its tappet l', the object of which will be 
hereinafter explained, is adjustable by means 
of screwse'. The sliding nut-holders L on 
the opposite side of the machine are guided 
identically in the same manner by means of a 
feather, d. It will be understood that the tap 
is provided with an ordinary square head, by 
means of which it is secured in the tap-holder 
Kin order to rotate with this latter. 
As I now will proceed to the description of 
the construction of the inner mechanism or 
devices of the die-stock or screw-plate H, I 
will first illustrate the cutting-tool S in its 
structure and multifariousness of its prop 
erties. 
The universal adjustable cutting-tool illus 
trated on a larger Scale in FigS. 13, 14, and 15, 
Sheet VIII, consists of a mere piece of a flat 
steel bar, in one side of which triangular or 
rectangular grooves, according to the thread 
to be made, are cut on a planing-machine or 
otherwise. It will be readily seen that by thus 
grooving the tool, ribs will be formed on it 
at any convenient distances apart and of any 
depth. As it is the amount of obliquity of the 
lower or cutting edge of the tool which deter 
minds the pitch of the screws, any desired 
shape or bevel may be given in two directions 
to the tool by submitting it to the action of a 
grindstone. If it is desired to make a right 
handed screw, the obliquity given to the cut 
ting-tool is to the left, and if the thread is to 
be left-handed, the obliquity given to the cut 
ting-tool is to the right. To make screws of 
two threads the obliquity is doubled, and for 
three threads, tripled. 
It will be readily seen that perfectly true 
screws can be easily made with this kind of 
cutting-tool, because the pitch of the screw 
may be varied at will, which has never before 
been possible with any of the dies, screw-plates, 
or chasing-tools in existence. It will further 
be seen that by means of its peculiar adjust 
ment in the screw-stock this tool will really 
cut the thread on the cylindrical surface of 
the rod or stem without compressing the lat 
ter or squeezing it between the tools, whereby 
9 
65 
3 5 
OO 
IO5 
IIO 
I I5 
A-s- 
31,099 
3 
O 
the elongation of the rod and wringing of the. 
thread is prevented. In a word, my univer 
sal cutting-tool does not rub, but it will cut 
as well at the heel as at the top of the thread, 
so as to cut the latter in a most precise man 
ner on the metallic Surface without otherwise 
affecting the rod, which has never before been 
possible by all existing chasing-tools. Even 
in cutting screw-threads in a lathe, the thread 
is not strictly true, because the screw to be 
threaded becomes heated during the opera 
tion and elongates, and when it is finished and 
cools down it shrinks again. By the arrange 
ment of my improved tool all these difficulties 
are obviated, and for this reason I call my tool 
a universal adjustable cutting-tool for thread 
ing screws.' The so-prepared tools for cut 
ting threads of all sections are then adjusted 
on the tool-holders in the die-stock H, which 
2O is represented in Figs. 7, 8,9, and 10 of Sheets 
V and VII. 
The tool-holders Q are shown in section in 
Figs. 9 and 10. They are three in number in 
die-stocks for threading rods, the diameter of 
which does not exceed forty-five millimeters. 
For rods of greater diameter the number will 
increase to four, five, &c., according to the 
various diameters of the rods. 
It will be 
well understood that when the number of the 
tools in a die-stock H is increased, all pro 
portions of this latter and of the whole ma 
chine should be increased accordingly. The 
tool-holders Q are provided at their inner ends 
with a projecting nose, q, against which will 
rest the end of the tool S, which is flatly placed 
against the tool-holder and firmly secured 
to this latter by a pressure-screw, s, passing 
through a projection, g, on the outer end of 
the holder. When the tools are thus fastened 
to their holders they will be in a tangential 
position with respect to the rod or stem to be 
threaded, and it will be clearly seen that not 
withstanding their powerful cutting in the 
surface of the rod by the revolutions of the 
die-stock they will not compress or squeeze 
the rod or stem. From the back of the tool 
holder, near its inner end, and radially ar 
ranged with respect to the rod to be threaded, 
projects an innerly-threaded socket, q', which 
slides within a socket, ', on an iron ring, R. 
This latter is secured to the back plate, P, 
cast on the hub P of the die-stock, Fig. 9. 
The whole is solidly champed in a hoop, R, 
having a rim, S. This Small rim will prevent 
the turnings and other dirt falling behind the 
screw-plate. 
With each of the threaded sockets engages 
a screw, p, provided With a pinion, p, turning 
freely in the socket , and kept in place by 
the two washers ss. The pinions p' are ac 
tuated by means of racks n, traveling in hori 
Zontal holes in the screw-plate, and fastened 
to the engaging-sleeve N, sliding on the hub 
P of the screw-plate. It will be seen that 
when the sleeve N is moved along the hub P 
the racks in will cause the pinions p", with their 
screw's p, to turn in the sockets q, and thus 
55 
O 
will bring the cutters nearer or draw them 
away from the center or from the rod to be 
threaded. 
In ring R and hoop R are provided slots in 
which the Outer projections, q', of the tool 
holders are guided. The large portion or base 
of the projections of rests and slides against 
an inner straight portion of the ring R, Fig. 9. 
It will thus be Seen that in Order to withdraw 
the tools from the stem it will be sufficient to 
give a slow retrograding motion to the sleeve 
N to liberate the rod or bolt, which may then 
be easily removed from the die-stock. 
To adapt the cutters to bolts of smallei or 
larger diameter, a similar sliding of the sleeve 
N is merely required without affecting their 
tangential position with respect to the rod or 
stem. A guide-plate, S', Fig. 8, for the rod 
or stem to be threaded is screwed upon the 
inner ring, R., after the cutters have been ad 
justed, to prevent the bolt from falling be 
tween the tools when it is disengaged. The 
turnings will fall upon the sloping edges of 
the hoop R, and thence into the receptacle B. 
The guide-plate S is so formed that water can 
pass through to wash out the dies and carry 
away the turnings. 
Figs. 11 and 12, Sheet VIII, represent a 
fixed standard screw-plate, combined by 
means of my cutting-tools. It consists of a 
circular plate, X, having a central aperture 
uniformly surrounded by the three projecting 
rests ac, from which extend three slots, which 
are tangential to the central aperture. In 
these slots the tools S are inserted, the lower 
or cutting edges of which are channeled and 
rest on the cleats or projections ac, against 
which they are pressed by means of the 
pressure-screws s's", so as to be firmly held 
in place. 
All the engaging and disengaging move 
ments of the tools in the die-stock, as well as 
the movements for adjusting them to the di 
ameter of the rods or stems, will be effected 
automatically by means of special mechanism 
hereinafter described. The lever M, Figs. 3, 
7, 8, 9, and-10, is pivoted upon a bolt on a 
bracket cast on the tank B. The upper forked 
arm of this lever has on its ends studs which 
engage in the circular groove of the sleeve N. 
The longer under arm ends in a pin or plun 
ger sliding in a hollow arm, MI, which is piv 
oted upon a nut, MI, on a Screw, M, the lat 
ter having a hand-wheel, MI. This screw 
turns freely within the disengaging-shaft O, in 
which it is kept in place by a circular groove 
on its surface, which embraces a transverse 
pin in the shaft C. This latter is supported 
in a laterally-projected socket and correspond 
ing boss, b, and slides longitudinally in them. 
At the other end, opposite the screw M, the 
shaft is provided with a roller, e, and about 
in its middle it is traversed by a slot receiv 
ing the upper end of a rock-lever, O', pivoted 
to the bracket l' of the frame, the lower end 
of which lever passes in an identical manner 
through the pressure-shaft O", encircled by the 
90 
IOO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
4 
31,099 
1. 
75 
So 
25 the frame. 
spiral springs oo', and sliding longitudinally 
in boss and socket b'b'. o o are india-rub 
ber washers, Serving to break the shock or 
brunt of the shaft O'. At one side of the rock 
5 lever O' the shaft O is provided witha hollow, 
p', in which plunges (when the tools or dies 
S are engaged) the bolt P, keeping thus the 
shaft O in place and the dies ready for cutting. 
Upon the bolt P acts a spiral spring, P, 
Io lodged in a socket, P, and encircling the tie 
rodp', which is articulated with the connecting 
rod p, pivoted to the right end of the lever P. 
This latter rocks on a bearing, p, connected 
to the frame in any convenient manner, and 
its left end or arm, P, serves as a strike to a 
roller fitted at one end of the alm P. This 
latter is transversely guided in the frame and 
forced to its normal position by the spiral 
spring which encircles the rod P, extending 
2O through the frame, and at the end of the Said 
rod P' is mounted a finger or stop, p". 
All 
these arrangements are shown in Fig. 3, and 
for each die-stock H is provided such a dis 
engaging mechanism conveniently fitted to 
Thus there are in the present in 
stance four of these disengaging or die-actu 
atting arrangements, and consequently four 
disengaging-shafts O with roller e. 
In front of each of the rollers e is mounted 
3o loosely on the constantly-rotating shaft Ca 
cam, Q, Figs. 1, 2, and 3. Two clutches, Q 
Q', are also mounted on the shaft C", and each 
of these clutches is placed between two of the 
cams Q', and is so arranged that it may en 
35 gage with a counterpart on each cam as re 
quired. Thus by pulling the clutches to the 
right or the left hand the corresponding cams 
will be engaged, which travel of the clutches 
Q will be effected by means of two levers, Q, 
4o pivoted on projections o' of the frame, Fig. 3, 
and extending through the whole machine, 
Fig. 2, in such a manner that it can be acted 
upon at the end opposite to the clutches by 
the knee of the workman. When the tools 
45 or dies S in the screw-plate H are engaged or 
shut-that is to say, when they are in position 
ready for cutting the thread on the rods or 
bolts-the bolt P. contrarily to its position 
shown in the drawings, is plunged in the notch 
So p of the disengaging-shaft O by the pressure 
of the spring P, and the rock-lever O' stands 
vertically between the two sia?ts O O", and 
springs o' of of the latter bear heavily against 
collars of the shaft O'. If, now, a rod or stem 
55 is to be threaded a certain definite length, it 
is fastened in the sliding bolt-holder L, pre 
viously described, and the rod f, with its tap 
pet k", is adjusted according to this length in 
its bearings e. The die-stock as it rotates and 
6o threads the rod acts as a mult and draws in 
ward the said rod, together with the slide L, 
in which it is held until the tappet ki' meets 
the finger p of the rod P, connected to the 
arm P', the roller of which strikes now against 
65 the lever-arm P' and raises the rods p' p' and 
the bolt P. Through this lifting of the bolt 
P the disengaging-shaft O becomes free and 
the springs o' o' on the shaft O' impel this lat 
ter toward the right hand, which movement 
is transmitted in the opposite direction by 
the intermediary rock-lever, O", to the disen 
gaging-shaft O, which moves toward the left 
hand. By this movement it has rocked, by 
means of the pivoted arm M', the lever Mand 
caused the sleeve N to slide on the hub of the 
die-stock in order to actuate, by means of the 
racks in, the pinions p on screws p, Fig. 10, 
which will thus retract the tool-holders Q and 
disengage the dies S. 
To engage again the dies or cutting-tools on 
a fresh bolt, the workman presses his knee 
against the lever Q to turn it to the right or 
left hand, according to the die stock or plate 
to be operated, and the clutch Q on the shaft C 
will gear with the cam Q", which, by its ro 
tary motion, bears or strikes vigorously against 
the roller e on the shaft. O and thrusts the latt 
ter back. The bolt P will plunge again into the 
notch p, and the shaft O is again secured and 
the dies engaged until the bolt P is again 
raised. As a single revolution of the cam Q", 
by acting against the roller e, will be sufficient 
to thrust back the disengaging-shaft O to its 
normal position, the clutch Q is brought again 
to its central position, when the workman re 
leases the lever Q" by means of flat springs q', 
arranged on each side of the latter, and these 
springs are shown in Fig. 4. These springs 
press against the levers when they are under 
pressure of the workman's knee, and therefore 
pull them back to the middle as soon as re 
leased from the pressure of the knee. . 
In order to adjust the dies or cutting-tools, 
as required by the different diameters of rods 
or stems to be threaded, the hand-wheel M is 
turned either to the right or left, according as 
to whether a larger or smaller rod is to be op 
erated upon. It will be readily understood 
that the necessary movements are effected by 
the displacement of the adjustable nut M". 
As all the movements are made with rapidity, 
by means of a machine thus constructed, with 
four die-stocks and four taps, which is the 
preferred type, can be made eight thousand to 
nine thousand bolts a day often hours work. 
It will be readily seen that by modifying 
the proportions of the whole mechanism rods 
of any desired length and diameter may be 
easily threaded; but when verythick bars are 
to be threaded I prefer another type of the 
machine, arranged with two die-stocks and 
having a fly-wheel on each side, and for work 
ing very small bolts or screws I use machines 
t provided only with a single small screw-plate. 
In a word, my die-stock or screw-plate, with 
universal adjustable cutting-tools, is applica 
ble in all various manners to the threading of 
the smallest bolts, and also to the threading 
of the thickest bars or spindles. 
The stem-turning mechanism shown at the 
right of Fig.1 consists of chuck on the lower 
end of shaft o', journaled in projections at a 
on the frame A, secured upon the support B. 
of the frame B, for holding the head of the 
. 
95 
IO , 
O 
I 25 
311,099 
5 
a 
bolt and a cutter Secured to the base A of the 
frame A'. The shaft o' is driven from the 
shaft c, by means of a belt from the pulley I 
on said shaft c' to a pulley, I, on the shaft l', | 
provided with a bevel-wheel, w, meshing : 
with the bevel-wheel v on shaft v'. The pull 
ley I on the shaft is locked to the shaft by 
a clutch, the movable portion of which is con 
trolled by a forked lever, i, and a spring, k, 
attached to a pin projecting from said lever 
and to the frame A. The outer end of the 
lever i is provided with a screw, K". The 
clutch is disengaged by a weighted lever, V, 
pivoted to the top of the frame A and con 
nected to the shaft o' by link in swiveled to 
said shaft. A plunger, R., operated by the 
treadle R, is employed for forcing the bolt 
out of the cutter W. 
Mechanism for shaping the faces of the nuts 
and heads of bolts (shown at the left-hand side 
of Fig. 1) is mounted on a frame, A' A', sup 
ported on the bracket B", projecting from the 
main frame of the machine, and is operated 
by a belt from the pulley I on the shaft C", 
passing around the pulley Ion a shaft of said 
mechanism. 
A forcing-pump, 2, is acted upon by a crank 
of the shaft C, and raises the soap-water or 
other liquid serving to lubricate or to cool 
the toolsina tube or tubes, 2', extending longi 
tudinally over the machine, and having con 
nected to it the transverse feeding-tubes 2", 
which lead the water to the several tools or 
cutters in work by means of secondary tubes 
or waste-pipes. 
I claim 
1. In a machine for forming Screw-threads, 
the combination, with the die-stock H., of the 
cutter-holders Q, the screws p, and the means, 
substantially as described, for operating said 
screws, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed. 
2. In a machine for forming screw-threads, 
the combination, with die-stock H, provided 
with the holders Q, carrying cutters S, of the 
screws p, provided with the pinions p", the 
racks in, and the means for operating said 
racks, substantially as herein shown and de 
Scribed. 
3. In a machine for forming screw-threads, 
the combination, with the die-stock H, pro 
O 
I5 
3O 
45 
- 
described. 
vided with the hub P, of the holders Q, the 
cutters S, the screws p, provided with pin 
ions p", the racks in, the sliding sleeve N, the 
pivoted lever M, and the means for vibrating 
said lever, substantially as herein shown and 
4. In a machine for forming screw-threads, 
the combination, with the die-stock H, the 
sleeve N, and the means for operating the 
cutters of said die-stock from the sleeve of the 
lever M, the pivoted arm M', the screw 
M, the wheel M, the nut M', the shaft O, 
the cam Q, the knee-lever Q, the shaft C", 
and clutch Q', substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
5. In a machine for forming screw-threads, 
the combination, with the die-stock H, the 
shaft O, provided with the notch p, the cam 
Q, the screw M, and the intermediate mech- 7 
anism for operating the cutters of the die 
stock, of the sliding bolt-holder L, carrying 
tappet k", the spring-pressed rod P', provided 
with arms p" p, the lever P, provided with 
the arm P', the spring-pressed bolt P, and 
connecting-rod p' p", substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
6. In a machine for forming screw-threads, 
the combination, with the die-stock H and 
the sliding bolt-holder L, carrying tappet k, 
of the spring-pressed rod P, provided with 
the arms p" p, the lever P, provided with 
arm P', connecting-rods p" p", spring-pressed 
bolt P. shaft O, having notch p", shaft O, hav 
ing springs oo'surrounding it, rock-lever O', 
cam Q, and the intermediate mechanism for 
communicating the movement of shaft O to 
the cutters of the die-stock, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
7. In a machine for forming screw-threads, 
the combination, with the tube land the head 
(, of the sliding gripping-jaws (t, the nut 
and the ring l, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
The foregoing specification of my improved 
machinery for turning, screwing, and shaping 
bolts and nuts signed by me this 9th day of 
August, 1883. 
Witnesses: 
EDMONO PIERRE BAVILLE. 
75 
95 
AUG. FORISSEN, 
EMILE HUYTs. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US311201.txt	/ 
/ 
/ 
r 
(iro Model.) 
/ O Mode 
W. D. OR, CUTT. 
ROTARY OUTTER, 
No. 31120l. 
Patented Jan, 27, 1885, 
 
2E 
 
  
  
 
Zavezotoz: 
to270ey. 
MValiana Z), Ozrevett, 
y -/62ao 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAMD. ORCUTT, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ON E-HALF 
TO JAMES H. BUSELL, OF SAME PLACE. 
ROTARY CUTTER, 
5PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 311,201, dated January 27, 1885. 
Application filed February 8, 1884. 
(No model.) 
io all, whom, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMD. ORCUTT, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Rotary Cutters, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
My invention relates to rotary cutters for 
trimming the edges of boot and shoe soles; and 
Io it consists of a circular head provided with one 
or more radial slots cut longitudinally through 
its periphery parallel to its axis, in combina 
tion with one or more cutter-blades mounted 
in said slot or slots, and having their outer ends 
15 molded to a shape the counterpart of the de 
sired shape to be given to the sole-edge, and 
each provided with a throat and a circumfer 
entially-projecting blade, and arranged and 
adapted to be adjusted radially of said head, 
2O and to be sharpened by grinding it in a plane 
slightly inclined to a plane cut radially through 
the axis of Said head. 
It further consists in the combination of one 
or more cutting-blades having molded outer 
25 surface or surfaces, and adapted to be sharp 
ened by grinding a surface or surfaces at right. 
angles, or nearly so, to said molded surface or 
surfaces, and a cutter-head provided with one 
or more radial slots cut longitudinally through 
3o the same to receive said blades, and a rand 
guard having an annular lip to serve as a gage 
for setting said cutters. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is an elevation of 
my improved cutter. Fig. 2 is a sectional ele 
5 vation, the cutting-plane being on line at a on 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is alongitudinal section online 
yy on Fig. 2, but showing the cutter-blades in 
elevation. Fig. 4 is a section online 22 on Fig. 
3. Fig. 5 is a longitudinal section online v on 
4o Fig. 2, showing a modified form of the cutter 
head. Figs. 6 and 7 are respectively a front 1 
and a side elevation of the cutter-blade. 
A is the cutter head, which may have a plain 
cylindrical periphery, as indicated in Fig. 5; or 
45 it may have its periphery molded to the coun 
terpart of the desired shape to be given to the 
sole-edge, as shown in Fig. 1, and has cut 
through its periphery one or more slots, a, the 
sides of which are parallel to each other and to sole-edge. 
revolution of said head. In the bottom of said 
slot or slots is drilled a cylindrical socket ex 
tending radially toward the center of the head 
to receive the shankb of the cutter B, as shown 
in Fig. 4, said cutter being secured therein by 
means of the set-screw c, as shown in Figs. 2 
and 3. 
C is the rand-guard disk, secured to the end 
of the shaft D by the screw D', and having its 
outer edge made quite thin and provided with 6o 
the inwardly-projecting annular lip d, to serve 
as a gage for setting the cutter or cutters B, as 
shown in Fig. 3. The cutter B is of a peculiar 
shape, its outer end being molded to a counter 
part of the shape to be given to the sole-edge, 
and having a width in the direction of the cir 
cumference of the head about equal to the width . 
of the slota, and provided at itsinner end with 
the cylindrical shank b, by which it is mounted 
in the socket formed for the purpose in the bot-7o 
tom of the slot a. The body of the cutter-tool 
B has a portion of its front side cut away, as at 
e, Figs. 6 and 7, so as to form the overhanging 
blade fanda throat for the escape of the chips. 
The blade f is sharpened by grinding its front 
end in a plane slightly inclined to a radial line 
drawn through the center of the cutter-head, 
and may be used until the blade f is all worn 
away to the back or botton of the throat e. 
The cutter-head illustrated is provided with 
two slots and two cutter-blades; but one only. 
may be used; or, if desired, a greater number 
may be used without affecting the principles 
of my invention; but whatever number of cut 
ting-blades are used it is very important that 
those portions of the periphery of the cutter 
head which are between said cutters should be 
concentric with the axis of revolution of said 
head, so as to bear upon the edge of the sole 
during the operation of trimming, which pre 
vents the cutter taking too rank a hold of the 
sole, and at the same time said concentric sur 
face or surfaces act to rub and set the edge to a 
certain degree, thus leaving the edge in a better 
condition when the sole is trimmed than can be 95 
the case when a cutter is used having a large 
number of cutters alternating with grooves or 
slots which present no bearing-surface to the 
The outer ends of the cutters B are 
so the plane cutting radially through the axis of made slightly eccentric to the periphery of the Ioo 
55 
9O 
2 
31.120. 
cutter-head to give the desired clearance,in the cumferentially-projecting blade f, whereby it 
usual manner, and the forward or cutting edge 
is adapted to be sharpened by grinding its 
of the cutter. blade is adjusted to a distance be 
front radial or nearly - radial face, substan 
yond the periphery of the cutter-head equal to 
tially as described. 
5 the desired thickness of chip to be taken from 
2. The cutter A, provided with one or more 
the sole-edge at each revolution, said adjust 
slots, a, one or more cutter-blades, B, fitted 
to and arranged to be adjusted radially in said 
ment being determined or limited by the outer 
corner of the rand-cutting lipg coming in con 
slots, and the rand-guard C, provided with the 
tact with the annular lip d of the rand-guard C, 
annular lip d, all arranged and adapted to op 
as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. 
erate substantially as and for the purposes 3o 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
described. 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two sub 
1. The combination of a circular cutter-head 
provided with one or more radial slots cut lon 
scribing witnesses, this 6th day of February, 
gitudinally through its periphery parallel to its 
A. D. 1884. 
axis, and one or more cutters mounted and ad 
WM. D. ORCUTT. 
justable radially in said slots, and having their 
outer ends molded to the counterpart of the de 
sired shape to be given to the sole-edge, and 
2O each provided with the throat e and the cir 
N. C. LOMBARD. 
WALTER, E, LOMIBARD. 
25 
IO 
. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US311301.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. EMERSON, 
INSERTIBLE SAW TOOTH, 
 
No. 311301. 
Patented Jam, 27, 1885. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. EMERSON, OF BEAVER FALLS, PENNSYLVANIA. 
NSERTBLE SAW-TOOTH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 311,301, dated January 27, 1885. 
Application filed December 23, 1884. (No model.) 
9, 55. 
IO 
25 
35 
after. 
- 
Be it known that I, JAMES E. EMERSON, a a of the recess A in the saw-blade. 
groove, b, to exactly fit upon the angular rib 
To all whom, it may concern 
citizen of the United States, residing at Beaver 
b'b' are half-round rivet-holes in the tan 
Falls, in the county of Beaver and State of 
B of tooth B, and so situated that when the 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
tang of the tooth is inserted in the recess the 
useful Improvements in Insertible Saw-Teeth, 
half-circle hole will exactly coincide with hole 
of which the following is a specification, refer. 
a? in the saw-blade, when a rivet is inserted in 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings. 
the usual way to hold the tooth securely in 
place. 
My invention relates to insertible teeth for 
B' is a hole through the tang B' of tooth 
circular saws, which are not only insertible 
and removable, but also in making them with 
B, for the insertion of a punch to assist in the 
two cutting edges or points, one cutting-edge 
removal of the tooth from the recess whenever 
pointing in one direction and the other in the 
it is to be removed from its position. 
Double-edged reversible and insertible saw 
opposite direction; and it consists in the con 
teeth constructed and inserted within an in 
Struction of the teeth and the saw-blade to re 
ceive the teeth, to admit of insertion, removal, 
clined recess of a saw-blade, as above described, 
are as safe as any insertible teeth can be, and 
and reversal of the teeth in, from, and to the 
by using one cutting-edge C until it is worn 
Saw-blade, as will be fully described herein 
back by filing to the dotted line 1 in the throat 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a sec 
and dotted lines 2 on the Outer circumference 
of the tooth, then the teeth are removed and 
tion of a saw-blade constructed to receive the 
improved teeth. Fig. 2 represents a tooth 
reversed in position, when a new set of teeth 
are ready for use, thus making it true that a 
Iready to be inserted in the saw-blade. Fig. 3 
double-edged reversible tooth will do double 
represents a section of a saw with teeth in 
the sawing that a single-edged tooth can. 
Serted; and Fig. 4 represents a plate of steel 
I do not claim, broadly, for a double-edged 
in Section, showing how the blank teeth asim 
tooth, or a tooth having two cutting-edges that 
proved in form are cut to save material. 
A represents a section of a saw-blade hav 
can be reversed and use successively both cut 
ting-edges, as Ian aware of Patent No. 130,659, 
ing the inclined open recesses or seats. A for 
dated August 20, 1872, which shows a tooth 
the reception of the teeth. This recess A' is 
having twin or two cutting-edges, but of an 
made in the form shown, and has a half-circle 
entirely different construction from mine, and 
at its base and a A-shaped projecting rib, a, 
Worked on the slightly - diverging opposite 
believed to be impractical in use, because it 
has no secure means to hold the teethin their 
sides of the recess from point o on the saw 
seats, as the thrust against the teeth in saw 
blade around to the termination of the recess 
ing tends to cause a lateral Spring upon them, 
at the throat-opening on the oppositeside. At 
and hence the points would project, catch in 
point a' is a half-round hole in the saw-blade. 
the kerf, and be entirely destroyed, by reason 
B represents the reversible tooth having the 
that there is too great a leverage between the 
two opposite cutting-edges C equidistant from 
cutting-edges and the point at which the teeth 
point C through the center of the tang of the 
tooth B, which is made to perfectly fit in the 
are held in the recesses of the Saw-blade. 
I am also aware of Patent No. 171,604, dated 
recess A, and is slightly narrower in width at 
December 28, 1875, that shows a double cut 
the commencement of the circle-lineat its base 
ting or two-edged tooth similar to mine in so 
than at the opening of the recess at point o of 
far as the two cutting-edges are concerned, 
the saw-blade. At point o' to point o' is a 
but dissimilar in all else, both in construction 
concave circle on each side of the tooth B, that 
and purpose, as the tang of this tooth is about 
will fit upon and bear against the saw-blade 
six-sevenths of a circle, inserted in a spring 
from point O to point o', which gives to the 
jaw-piece, which in turn is forced into an 
tooth support as against the thrust in the ac 
opening or recess wider at its outer edge than 
tion of cutting the kerf in sawing. From 
point o' around in the edges of the tang of at its seat, so as to tightly compress the cir 
tooth B to its opposite side is cut a W-shaped cular tang of the tooth in its grasp and yet 
75 
95 
OO 
3.1301 
O 
allow it to rotate in its seat. This tooth is not 
calculated to be taken out of its seat to be re 
versed in its position, as the intention was to 
have the saw cut through the length of a log, 
then reverse its revolution and the feed mech 
anism, so that instead of gigging back the car 
riage and log thereon, the saw would auto 
matically rotate or turn the saw-tooth to 
present its opposite edge to cut backward 
through the log, as the log was reciprocated 
in the reverse direction to that first presented 
to the saw. This construction is also believed 
to be impractical, because the purpose was to 
have the teeth rotate partially in the jaw-piece 
when the revolution of the saw was reversed; 
but no description is given of any means by 
which the teeth can rotate or change their 
position to have the saw cut backward, and 
because the teeth could not be. held without 
the jaw-piece, while in my invention the re 
versible saw-teeth are held in the Saw-blade. 
In Fig. 4 is shown how the blank teeth are 
cut by dies from a plate of steel, in which 
there is less waste of metal than by any other 
known form of teeth. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
25 
1. A reversible saw-tooth, B, haying two 
opposite cutting-edges, C, a tang, B, having 3o 
Straight opposite sides, intersected at their 
Outer termini with curvedlines, to form a dust 
space on the cutting side and a support on the 
Saw-blade on the opposite side, at their inner 
termini with the half-circle base, and having 35 
opposite half-circle rivet-holes b', substantially 
as described and shown. 
2. The combination of the double-edged 
reversible saw-tooth B, having opposite cut 
ting-edges C, tang B", having straight oppo- 4o 
sitesides, intersected at their outer termini with 
Curved lines and at their inner termini with 
a half-circle base, and having opposite half. 
circle rivet-holes, b, with the saw-plate A, 
having the inclined recess A", to receive the 45 
tang of the tooth, and rivet-hole a', to coincide 
with half-circle hole b" in the tang of the 
tooth, Substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES E. EMERSON. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN MCCoWIN, 
CHARLES P. WALLACE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US311402.txt	(No Model.) 
J. WITHINGTON, 
CONE PULEY. 
3 sheets-sheet 1. 
No. 311,402, 
Patented Jan. 27, 1885. 
N 
N N 
N R 
H 
WITNESSES 
e/f/f(2-4--- 
NVENTOR 
42arz, a 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
as 
J. WITHINGTON, 
CONE PULLEY, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 31.1402, 
Patented Jan. 27, 1885, 
O 
SS 
 
se s 
 
& fiti EE 
fills s 
H. 
Ets 
Giti 
s 
s 
s 
WITNESSES; 
 
assessesseeeeeeessessesses NW E N TO R 
N, PETERS. hoto-lithographsr, Washington, C. C 
 
(No Model.) 
J. WITHINGTON, 
CONE PUTTEY, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
No. 31.1402, 
Patented Jan. 27, 1885, 
 
2. 
NVENTOR 
/ 
WITNESSES: 
to-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES WITHINGTON, OF CHAMBERSBURG, ASSIGNOR TO THE TRENTON 
IRON COMPANY, OF TRENTON, NEW JERSEY. 
CON E-PULLEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 311,402, dated January 27, 1885. 
Application filed June 3, 1884. (No model.) 
s 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES WITHINGTON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cham 
bersburg, in the county of Mercer and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Belt-Shifting Devices for 
Cone-Pulleys, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to a class of pulleys 
known as cone-pulleys, which are employed 
for the transmission of proportional speeds 
from a given fixedly and regularly rotating 
shaft to a shaft parallel with it, each of the 
pulleys being of the form of a frustum of a 
cone, and the two pulleys being set with their 
axes parallel, but being respectively reversed 
in position. 
The specific object of my improvement is 
the provision of a device by which the belt 
which communicates the motion of one cone 
pulley to the other cone-pulley can be readily 
shifted with respect to its position upon the 
said cone-pulleys, and when shifted shall be 
accurately retained in the position in which 
it is then Set. 
The above objects I attain by mechanism, a 
preferred form of a convenient embodiment of 
which is illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings and explained in the following descrip 
tion, the particular subject-matter claimed 
being hereinafter definitely specified. . 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a top plan view 
of my device; Fig. 2, an end elevation of 
the same, sight being taken from the lower 
side of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a side sectional ele 
vation of the apparatus on Fig. 1, on the line 
a; at of Said Fig. 1, and sight being taken from 
the right hand of said figure. Fig. 4 is an ele 
vational view of one of the supporting-frames, 
and Fig. 5 an end elevational view of one of 
the traveling frame-bars of one of the belt 
shifting frames. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A A are a pair of cone 
pulleys whose axles 9P shafts a, a? are parallel 
and Supposed Supported in any suitable hang 
ers. (Notrepresented in the drawings.) These 
cone-pulleys are disposed in the usual man 
5O ner-that is to say, at a certain distance apart 
35 
O 
I5 
45 
and in reversed positions-as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2. 
B is the cone-pulley belt which encircles. 
both pulleys, and which, assuming that the 
pulley A is driven at a fixed speed, will occa 
sion the driving of the pulley A' either at the 
same speed, or at a speed proportionately less 
or greater than that of the pulley A, accord 
ing to its position with respect to the two 
pulleys. 
Further description of this well-known me 
chanical contrivance is unnecessary. 
The contrivances in which the novelty of . 
my invention resides, and which are devices 
for shifting the belt B and retaining it in dif. 65 
ferent positions with respect to the cone-pull 
leys, are the following: 
C C C C are four supporting frames or 
hangers disposed in opposite pairs, respect 
ively, by pairs face to face in a manner which 
will be understood by reference to Fig. 1, and 
which are supported from the ceiling from 
which the apparatus as a whole is suspended. 
Journaled, respectively, in opposite Sup 
porting-frames, near the centers thereof, are 75 
two screw-shafts, D D, which are preferably 
in the same horizontal plane as the shafts of 
the cone-pulleys, and which are parallel with 
said shafts. These screw-shafts are adapted to 
be rotated in bearings did d' d', formed in the 
supporting frames or hangers, but have no 
axial motion with respect thereto. Upon the 
corresponding extremities of each of the two 
screw-shafts beveled pinions did are provid 
ed, which pinions mesh with other beveled 
pinions, e'e', respectively, at the extremities 
of a counter-shaft, E, supported in suitable 
bearings, ee, connected with the hangers C. C. 
Upon this counter-shaft is mounted a grooved 
hand-wheel, e, in the peripheral groove of 9o 
which is suspended an endless hand-rope, e^, 
the manipulation of which occasions the ro 
tation in either direction of the hand-wheel, 
and consequently of the counter-shaft, with 
the result that through the operation of the 95 
beveled gears the two screw-shafts are caused 
to rotate at an equal speed and in a corre 
sponding direction, either right or left handed, 
according to the direction of the rotation of 
the hand - wheel. The office of the screw- IOO 
So 
2 
311,402 
2d 
shafts is to occasion the longitudinal travel of 
what I term the belt-shifting frames, com 
posed of vertical frame-bars if f', connected 
together at top and bottom by yoke-sleeves f* 
5f', and at their centers provided with threaded 
sleeve-bearings f", which embrace the screw 
shafts. These belt-shifting frames are held 
in vertical position and guided in their travel 
by horizontal guide-rods f', set, respectively, 
Io near the top and bottom of the pairs of sup 
porting-hangers, upon which guide-rods the 
yoke-sleeves f", respectively, travel. The belt 
passes between the vertical bars f'f'' of the 
belt-shifting frames, and in the movement of 
I5 these frames, which are set face to face, and 
under the actuation of the screw-shafts travel 
with equal speeds in the same direction, is 
moved longitudinally with respect to its posi 
tion upon the cone-pulleys. 
In order to keep the belt taut upon the cone 
pulleys, I have provided two belt-tightener 
rolls, G. G., housed in bearings g, which slide 
upon vertical rodsg', supported on brackets 
g", erected from the vertical bars f' of the belt 
25 shifting frames, as clearly shown in Fig. 5. 
Spiral springs g, coiled upon the vertical rod 
g', between the bearings g and the upper 
brackets, g, serve to retain the belt-tighten 
ing rolls down upon the belt with a yielding 
pressure. 
It is obvious that instead of employing two 
belt-shifting frames-one in connection with 
or propinquity to each pulley-but one belt 
shifting frame can be employed. I prefer, 
however, to employ two, as the control of the 
belt is best effectuated thereby. . 
- 
I am aware that I am not the first to pro 
vide means for automatically shifting the belt 
of cone-pulleys and for retaining the belt 
when shifted in given positions, and to such 
device, broadly, as such, I lay no claim, the 
novelty of my invention consisting in the 
specific devices for shifting and controlling 
- 
30 
35 
- 
55 
45 
claimed. 
the position of the belt herein described and 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In combination, a pair of cone-pulleys, 
an endless belt traveling thereupon, the belt 
shifting frames for controlling the position of so 
said belt upon said pulleys, the screw-shafts 
for actuating said belt-shifting frames, the 
counter-shaft, and the miter-gears for connect 
ing the screw-shafts with the counter-shaft, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In combination, the cone-pulleys, the 
endless belt, the belt-shifting frames provid 
ed with belt-tightening rolls, the screw-shafts, 
the counter-shaft, and the miter-gears for con 
necting said shafts, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, to form a belt-shifting 
contrivance, of the belt-shifting frames, the 
guide-rods, the screw-shafts, the counter-shaft, 
miter-gears connecting said counter-shaft with 
the Screw-shafts, and the hand-wheel and rope 
for imparting motion to the counter-shaft, 
Substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, to form a belt-shifting 
contrivance, of the belt-shifting frames, the 
guide-rods, the screw-shafts, the counter-shaft, 
miter-gears connecting said counter-shaft with 
the screw-shafts, means for imparting rotation 
to the counter-shaft, the cone-pulleys, and the 
endless belt, substantially as described. 
suitably connected together by the yoke- . 
sleeves, and provided with threaded sleeve 
bearings, the vertical rods, slide-bearings, 
springs, and belt-tightener roll carried by 
said slide-bearings, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto signed 
my name this 22d day of May, A. D. 1884. 
5. In combination with the vertical bars, 75 
65 
JAMES WITHINGTON. 
In presence of - . 
J. BONSALL TAYLOR, 
W. C. STRAWBRIDGE. . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US311502.txt	(No Model.) 
W 
No. 311,502, 
Jy. 1 
A. MANN. 
HOT AIR FURN AGE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
Patented Feb. 3, 1885. 
L 
Weavesses, 
re 
A. 
Z/// 
Jive 2-602. 
N. pers. Photo-lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
420-21 2 vey-sa 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 3ll 502, 
ls 
 
 
 
 
 
it 
. . 
N 
 
 
- 
N 
N N N N . N N 
 
A. MANN. 
HOT AIR FURNACE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
R 
is 
R 
iss-I 
il 
se 
SR 
223 
Niss 
N 
n 
s 
|A || 
i 
RS 
--13. 
Es 
s s 
at-ris 
ss. 
are-age 
s E 
SE 
 
ES Es N 
In IHIRail 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAM MANN, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI. 
HOT - A R F U RNA CE. 
322CIEICATIC3N forming part of Letters Patent No. 311,502, dated February 3, 1885. 
Application filed February 6, 1884. 
(No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all, whon, it Thalf concert, 
Be it known that I, ABRAM MANN, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Kansas 
City, in the county of Jackson and State of 
Missouri, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Hot - Air Furnaces, of 
which I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification. 
My present invention relates to that class 
of hot - air furnaces commonly known as 
brick-set furnaces, and has for its object 
to provide a furnace of such improved con 
struction that the products of combustion, be 
fore discharging into the chimney-fue, may 
be forced to part with the greatest possible 
amount of heat for the purpose of warming 
the air to be used for heating purposes. 
To this end my invention consists in the 
novel construction and arrangement of parts 
hereinafter described, illustrated in the draw 
ings, and particularly defined in the claims at 
the end of the specification. 
Figure 1 is a view of the improved furnace 
in vertical longitudinal section. Fig. 2 is a 
view in transverse vertical section on line aca 
of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a view in transverse ver 
tical section on line / ) of Fig. 1, parts being 
shown in elevation in both Figs. 2 and 3. 
A designates the base of the furnace, in 
which are formed suitable induction-ports, a 
and (t, for the delivery to the furnace of the 
air to be heated. 
A denotes the side walls, A the front wall, 
and A' the back or chimney Wall, of the heat 
ing-chamber, having the dome or cover A', 
provided with a suitable flue, a, for the dis 
charge of the heated air. 
Upon the top wall of the base A, near its 
front, rests the ash-pit B, and above this ash 
pit is the fire-box C and expanded combus 
tion-chamber D. 
Suitable doors, c and b, are provided in the 
side wall, A, for the fire - box and ash-pit, 
through which fuel may be fed and ashes with 
drawn. 
In the rear side of the based of the combus 
tion-chamber openings are formed, in which 
So are held the lower ends of the series of air 
pipes E, which are inclined as shown, and 
35 
45 
- 
 
55 
have their upper ends held in suitable open 
ings in the top d of the combustion-chamber. 
These pipes E are open from end to end, to 
permit the free passage of the air through 
them, and are placed at such distance apart 
as to cause the products of combustion to pass 
between and around them before entering the 
discharge-openings d' and d", which lead, re 
spectively, into the vertical escape-pipes F 
and Smoke-fue G. 
Opposite, the air - pipes E, and similarly 
held in the base and top of the combustion 
chamber, are the open-ended air-pipes E, in 
clined as shown, in order to present great ex 
posure to the products of combustion. 
From the expanded top portion, D', of the 
combustion-chamber extends the Smoke-flue 
G, fitted to the discharge-opening d", and con 
necting the combustion-chamber directly with 
the chimney-?lue. This flue G is provided 
with the damper-valve g, operated by a suit 
able hand-rod without the furnace, and with 
elbow-pipeg, the function of which will pres 
ently appear. 
From the lower side of the portion D' of 
the combustion - chamber, and having their 
ends fitted to the openings d therein, extends 
the series of vertical escape-pipes F, prefera 
bly four or more in number, the lower ends 
of which pipes are suitably connected to the 
box H, having openings therein for such pipes, 
and having corresponding openings for the 
adjoining series of vertical escape - pipes F. 
The upper ends of the pipes F are joined to 
the short projecting pipes h' of the upper box, 
H', to the short pipesh of which box are con 
nected the upper ends of the escape-pipes F, 
which rest upon the lower box, H, having 
openings for said pipes and for the vertical 
escape-pipes F. The tops of the pipes F are 
joined to the short pipes hon the under side 
of the box H, which connects with the elbow 
pipeg' of the smoke - flue G. The boxes H, 
H', and H' are provided, as shown, with suit 
able openings, h", through which Soot depos 
ited therein may be withdrawn. 
From the foregoing description the opera 
tion of the furnace will be seen to be as foll 
lows: Firehaving been started in the fire-box, 
the valve - damper g will be turned SO as to 
permit the products of combustion to pass 
75 
85 
90 
95 
ICO 
g 
311,502. 
O 
through the smoke-flue G directly to the chim 
ney until the fire is well started, when this 
damper may be closed and the hot products 
of combustion be forced to pass to the chim 
5 ney through the several series of escape-pipes, 
which, together with the upper and lower 
boxes, constitute sinuous channels therefor. 
By thus directing the products of combustion 
through separate channels a much larger sur 
face of heated pipe is exposed to the incom 
ing air, so that such products will be robbed 
of all available heat before passing into the 
chimney. The damper-valve g will further 
serve to control the heating action of the fur 
I5 nace, as by this means more or less of the hot 
products of combustion may be allowed to 
escape directly to the chimney through the 
smoke-flue without being fully utilized. The 
air-pipes E, located as shown, serve not only 
to highly heat the air passing through them, 
but also serve to cause a more uniform distri 
bution of the products of combustion through 
the several series of escape-pipes. 
It will be observed that the induction-ports 
25 are so placed in the base of the furnace as to 
admit the air at such points that it can circu 
late freely around the heater, through the 
rows of air-pipes, and around the vertical es 
cape-pipes before passing into the discharge 
flue a' in the dome of the furnace. 
By the above-described construction of fur 
nace a very large surface exposure of heated 
pipe is secured, and the air is delivered to the 
furnace in Such manner as to insure a most 
effective circulation over such surface. More 
over, the arrangement of the escape-pipes for 
the products of combustion in vertical rows, 
connected by common boxes, offers little 
chance for the deposit of soot upon the pipes 
and permits the ready cleaning of the boxes. 
It is to be understood that modification 
may be made of the precise structure and ar 
rangement shown without departing from the 
spirit of the invention. Thus, for example, 
45 the air-pipes E may be omitted, or the num 
ber of escape-pipes may be varied as desired. 
I am aware that it has been heretofore pro 
posed to connect the fire-box with the chim 
ney-flues by a single row of escape-pipes ver 
tically arranged between the two, such escape 
pipes being all connected at their tops and 
bottoms to an upper and a lower flue commu 
nicating with the chimney, the upper flue be 
ing provided with a damper; and I am also 
aware that it has been heretofore proposed to 
place on top of the stove or fire-box a series 
of rows of horizontally-arranged escape-flues, 
connected at theirends by drums or chambers. 
In neither of such constructions, however, is 
35 
55 
65 
the heat of the outgoing products of combus- 6o 
tion so thoroughly utilized as in my improved 
furnace. The arrangement of the series of 
vertical rows of escape-pipes causes the pro 
ducts of combustion to be divided and to pass 
through a portion of the furnace, where their 
heat will be more effectively abstracted than 
would be the case were they placed horizon 
tally on top of the combustion-chamber, where 
they would be exposed only to the partially 
heated air. Moreover, by connecting the up- 7C 
per smoke-?lue with the last of the series of 
escape - pipes, the deposit of soot therefrom 
into the intermediate pipes is avoided, and by 
arranging the boxes connecting the escape 
pipes separately the cold air is allowed to cir 
culate around the same, so as to abstract the 
heat therefrom. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a hot-air furnace 
having suitable ports for, the admission and 
discharge of air, of the fire-box, the combus 
tion-chamber having a series of escape-pipes, 
and the series of open-ended air-tubes extend- 85 
ing from top to bottom of said combustion. 
chamber in front of the series of escape-pipes, 
whereby an even distribution of the products 
of combustion around the air-tubes is effected, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a hot-air furnace, the combination, 
with the fire-box and combustion-chamber, of 
the series of rows of separate vertical escape 
pipes F, F, F, and F, the upper and lower 
boxes, H, H, H, and H, arranged independ- 95 
ently of each other, and the smoke-flue G, con 
nected with the box H, and independent of 
the other boxes, and provided with the damper 
g, substantially as described. 
with the fire-box and combustion-chamber, of 
the row of open-ended pipes extending through 
the combustion - chamber in front of the out 
lets for the products of combustion, and the 
rows of vertical escape - pipes connected to- Io5 
gether at their tops and bottoms to form sep 
arate sinuous channels for the products of 
combustion, and connected to the combustion 
chamber with relation to the open-ended air 
tubes, in substantially the manner shown and IIC 
described. 
my hand this 28th day of January, 1884. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
3. In a hot - air furnace, the combination, IOo 
9O 
ABRAM MANN. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT W. QUARLEs, 
JOHN MACLELLAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US311602.txt	(No Model.) 
S. B. OPDYKE, 
EYEGLASS FRAME. 
No. 31,602, 
Patented Feb. 3, 1885. 
WITNESSES: 
26.-2, 
3%. 27. 
INVENTOR 
BY 
71-7432-4-4 
ATTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STACY B, OPDYKE, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
EYE G ASS FRAVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 311,602, dated February 3, 1885. 
Application filed October 20, 1884. (No model.) 
IC 
25 
30 
35 
- 
(to all w/07 it naily concern : 
Be it known that I, STACY B. OPDYKE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Haven, county of New Haven, and State of 
Connecticut, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Eyeglasses, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to eyeglasses and 
Spectacles, and is an improvement upon the 
device described and shown in my prior Pat 
ent No. 265,626. 
The Said invention consists in the combina 
tion of two longitudinally-grooved plates or 
fastening-pieces with the nose-pads and the 
bow, these plates or pieces being arranged 
behind the lower parts of the bow, or supple 
Inental plates or springs corresponding to said 
lower parts, and receiving and holding the 
edges of the cork sheets which constitute the 
pads. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents in elevation of a pair of eyeglasses 
en bodying inly invention. Fig. 2 represents 
detail views of one of the side springs, the 
corresponding fastening-piece, and the pad 
secured thereby. 
A designates the lenses of the eyeglasses; B, 
the frames for said lenses, and C the bow, 
which is secured to the upper lugs, b, of said 
frames. From said upper lugs to the lower 
lugs, b, the side pieces, D, extend, these side 
pieces being plates or springs adapted to fit 
against the sides of the nose and be held there 
by the pressure of the bow. They are often 
made integral with the latter, but I have illus 
trated them as in separate pieces held to the 
frames by the same screws, d, which hold said 
bows, and slotted to allow a certain amount 
of play over or past the latter. 
E designates the nose-pads, which fit around 
these side pieces and are held against the sides 
of the nose. 
Each of these pads consists of a 
flexible sheet, preferably of cork, which has 
its edges folded back behind one of the side 
6O 
plates or springs, D, and inserted into the 45. 
grooved sides of a fastening-piece, F, which 
sets against the rear face of the said side plate. 
Each of these fastening pieces is grooved on 
each side fro) end to end, (the grooves being 
marked f) thin plates being left between the 5o 
grooves and the front and rear faces, respect 
ively, and also as a partition down the middle 
of the piece. After the edge of the pad is in 
serted into the grooves of the fastening-piece 
the thin lips or plates which form the walls 55 
of the groove may be clamped thereupon, 
holding the pad in place. The pad in turn 
keeps the fastening piece in place, although 
the latter inlay have additional means of attach 
lment to the side spring or side plate. 
The above-described means of attachment 
of the pad allows the latter to be easily re 
moved when worn out or soiled, and facilitates 
the substitution of a new one, although it 
holds the pad very firmly against accidental 65 
displacement. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
grooves in its sides, in combination with the 
side pieces of an eyeglass-bow, and pads which 
fold around said side pieces and enter said 
grooves, substantially as set forth. 
side springs or plates, a pair of flexible sheets 
which fold around said springs to form nose 
pads, and a pair of fastening-pieces arranged 
behind said side springs, respectively, and 
clamped on the edges of said pads to hold the 8o 
same, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
IeSSeS. 
2. In combination with an eyeglass-bow and 75 
1. A fastening-piece, F, having longitudinal ?o 
- 
STACY B. OPDYKE. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED BERNEIEIM, 
MAX BAYERSDORFER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US311702.txt	(Model.) 
J. T. WILLIS, 
SCSSORS - 
No. 311,702. 
Patented Feb. 3, 1885, 
Z 22, 1 
" 
WITNESSES : 
eyz - 
4 day-to-2 
INVENTOR 
BY A.C. 
C ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPHUS. T. WILLIS, OF CUBA STATION, ALABAMA. 
SC SS ORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 311,702, dated February 3, 1885. 
Application filed July 9, 18S4. 
(Model.) 
To aid whon, it nually conce77 : 
Be it known that I, JosEPH.Us T. WILLIS, 
of Cuba Station, Sumter county, Alabama, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Scissors, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention consists in the construction 
and arrangement of paris, as will be herein 
after fully described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a side view of a pair 
of Scissors, upon an enlarged scale, for the use 
for which they are more especially designed, 
embodying my invention, and showing the 
blades as open. Fig. 2 is a top view of the 
Scissol's When the blades are closed and se 
cured in such position; and Fig. 3 is a side 
view, upon a reduced scale, of said scissors when 
closed. 
A A' indicate the blades of the scissors piv 
oted at b. The blade A is provided at its han 
dile end with a ring or loop, c, of sufficient 
diameter to tightly fit, without inconvenience, 
the portion of the forefinger of the operator 
which lies between the first, and second joints, 
so that the scissors may be worn, ready for 
use, by the person having need of them. This 
ring or loop will of course vary in size to 
suit different-sized forefingers. Attached to 
the under side of said ring or loop c is a bow 
or rest, d. The other blade, A, is provided 
on its handle end with a knob or thumb 
piece, e. The two blades are forced open by 
spring tension or pressure, and for this pur 
pose I have shown a flat metallic spring, B 
such, for instance, as is used in a more length 
ened form for the mainspring of a watch or 
small time-piece. This spring B, I remova 
bly engage at its one end with the handle 
end of the blade A where the finger-rest d 
joins the back lower portion of the ring c, 
and bending it partly around said ring pass 
it through a guide or small slotted projec 
tion, f, on the back portion of the ring, from 
whence said spring is passed up to freely en 
gage at its opposite end with a notched por 
tion, g, of the handle end of the blade A, 
on the under side thereof. This construction 
and mode of applying the opening-spring has 
the advantage, not only of facilitating the re 
moval of the spring when required to replace 
it by another in case of breakage, or of re 
moving it altogether, if desired at any time 
to use the scissors without it; but when the 
two blades are closed said spring will flex 
to close snugly around the upper back por 
tion of the finger-ring on the one blade, and 
between the handles of the two blades, so as 
to be entirely out of the way and free from 
catching or being caught on any exterior ob 
ject, as shown in Fig. 3. The spring, how 
ever, may be otherwise constructed and ap 
plied, if preferred, to have a like opening ac 
tion on the blades. 
Attached to the front end of the under blade, 
A, is a pendent ring, hook, Ol' loop, h, which 
may be turned up over the front end of the 
| other blade, A, when the blades are closed, to 
hold them closed, when necessary, as shown 
in Figs. 2 and 3. 
To use the scissors the ring c of the blade 
A is slid by the operator to a close or snug 
fit onto his forefinger, between the first and 
second joints thereof, when by pressing down 
with his thumb on the knob e of the blade 
A', and supporting, if necessary, the blade 
A. by the rest d on the fingers next to the 
forefinger, the blades of the scissors, kept open 
ready for use by the spring B, will be closed 
on each other to make the cut, after which, 
and on removing pressure from the thumb 
piece e, the blades will be thrown open again 
by the spring, ready for another cut. 
Scissors thus constructed will not only be 
very easy to manipulate, but they may be 
worn on the finger, ready for use at any time, 
without interfering with any work that clerks 
in retail dry-goods stores.and others would or 
dinarily have to do. 
Having thus described my invention, Iclaim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a pair of scissors, the combination 
of the pivoted blades A A', the finger-ring 
c, with its attached finger-rest d, on the han 
dle-end portion of the blade A, the knob or 
63 
90 
IO 
45 
2 
3ll,702 
thumb-piece e on the handle-end portion of ment with or over the forward end of the other 
the blade A, and the flat spring B, essentially of said blades, whereby the blades may be Io 
as shown and described. 
kept closed against the tension of the opening 
2. In a pair of Scissors in which a spring spring, substantially as specified. 
JOSEPHUST. WILLIS. 
- 
w 
5 is combined with the pivoted blades to throw 
the blades open, the combination, with said 
parts, of a pendent fastening attached to the 
forward end of one of said blades for engage- 
Witnesses: 
J. K. P. SHIELTON, 
P. M. JoNES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US311802.txt	(No Model.) 
T. H. BENNETT, 
PUDDLING AND HEATING FURNA CE, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washi 
ngton, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
THOMAS H. BENNETT, OF IRONTON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO D. 
ILINN GOUCH, OF SAME PLACE, AND A. L. STOUT, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
PU DD LI NG AND H E AT NG FU RNA CE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 311,802, dated February 3, 1885. 
Application filed March 7, 1884. 
(No modlcl.) 
2O 
5o and 3; but I use one or two or more, according The draft in chimney J draws air through the IOO 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS H. BENNETT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Iron 
ton, in the county of Lawrence and State of 
5 Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Puddling and Heating Fur 
naces, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
furnaces for puddling or heating iron; and the 
IO objects of my improvements are, first, to econ 
omize fuel in the processes of puddling and of 
heating iron; second, to so thoroughly fuse 
the flue-cinder that it shall readily flow off 
When tapped; third, to cause a more powerful 
I5 draft through the furnace, and, fourth, to pre 
vent the passing off of black smoke and offen 
sive gases by the chimney. I attain these ob 
jects by means of the furnace illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section of 
a puddling-furnace embodying my improve 
ments. Fig. 2 is a top view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a transverse vertical section through line 
LM, Fig. 2; and Fig. 4 is a face and edge view 
25 of a single brick with an air-hole through it. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
A. A. al'e air holes or passages made through 
bricks in the crown of the furnace. B is the 
3o neck of the furnace. C is the tap-hole for flue 
cinder. D is the stoke-hole. E is the fire 
grate. F is the ash-pit. G is the fire-bridge. 
His the flue-bridge. I is the charging-door. 
J is the chimney or flue. K is the crown of 
I build this furnace of the materials, dimen 
sions, and designs in use for other puddling 
furnaces; but I make one or more air-passages, 
AA, through its crown K, and leading from 
40 the Outer air into the neck B of the furnace. 
To make these air-passages AA, I use the brick 
illustrated by Fig. 4, having a hole, A', through 
it from one bed-face to the other. Ilay these 
brick on end in longitudinal courses, as shown 
45 in Fig. 1, so that their air-holes Aforma con 
tinuous air-passage, AA, from the front of the 
furnace to the beginning of the neck B, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
I have shown two air-passages, A. A. Eigs. 2 
Out the Several views. 
35 the furnace. 
to circumstances. I find it desirable to make 
my perforated brick longer than the ordinary 
brick used for building the crown of a pud 
dling-furnace. So, when the ordinary brick 
are nine inches long, I make my perforated 
brick about twelve inches long, SO as not to 
weaken the crown Kim any manner. I find 
one inch and a half a suitable diameter for hole 
A'; but it may be made larger or smaller, pro 
vided it gives air passages capable of admit 
ting the quantity of air required. I use a slide 
valve at the outer end of the air-passages A.A. 
to close, open, or partly open the air-passages 
A. A., as may be desired. I have not shown 
this slide in the drawings, as it is a well-known 
device, and is easily applied. It will be ob 
served that these flues receive air at the front 
only of the furnace, and not at a point between 
its front and rear extremities. It will also be 
| noted that these air-passages are located di 
rectly over the fuel-chamber and the heating 
chamber of the furnace, and that they extend 
in an unbroken line from the front of the for 
inner to the rear of the latter. It will also be 
perceived that the heated currents are dis 
charged not into the fuel chamber, or into the 
heating-chamber, or into the flue above the 
bridge-wall, but are delivered at a point behind 
all these. It will further be observed that the 
currents pass in a practically direct line from 
the extreme front of the furnace to the rear of 
the puddling or heating chamber without de 
flecting or retarding angles, and that at their 
point of discharge into the neck they do not 
! operate to obstruct or turn aside the currents 
from the puddling-chamber to the chimney, 
but, flowing in the same direction and min 
gling with such currents, their added oxygen 
contributes to intensify the combustion, there 
by consuming all carbonaceous substances and 
greatly accelerating the draft. This construc 
tion, it will be seen, is quite distinct, both in 
purpose and effect, from that in which air is 
received unheated and by a downward dis 
charge into the neck of the furnace. 
This furnace is started and worked like oth 
er puddling-furnaces; but when a fire is kin 
dled in it a draft is developed in chimney J, 
and crown K is heated to a high temperature. 
55 
75 
90 
2 
31,802 
O 
passages A.A. from the outer air into neck B, 
and this air gets heated while passing through 
the hot brick. When this hot air enters neck. 
Bit mixes with the flame and hot gases pass 
5 ing off from the furnace, and its Oxygen com 
bines with and burns up all unconsumed car 
bon and combustible gasesit meets. This com- || 
bustion intensifies the heat in the neck B to 
such a degree that the flue-cinder is thoroughly 
fused, and can be run off by tapping; also, the 
gases pass from the neck B at so high a tem 
perature that they give a powerful draft in 
chimney J, and this gives a greater draft 
through the furnace and fire-grate E, which 
burns up the coal completely, and so prevents 
the loss of fuel incident to the raking of the 
fire when the draft is bad. As the flue-cinder 
is thoroughly fused in neck B and can be 
tapped off through hole C, the labor and the 
injury to the furnace incident to the removal 
of the flue-cinder when solidified or viscid are 
avoided, and the formation of tea-cups'' is 
rendered impossible; also, as the carbon, which, 
mixed with the chimney gases, forms black 
smoke, is burned in neck B, no such smoke 
passes off by the chimney; but all the carbon 
and gases being burned in neck B, the gases 
that pass off by the chimney are as harmless 
and inoffensive as the gases of combustion can 
be. The quantity of air passed through the 
passages AA may, if desired, be increased to 
an indefinite extent, by connecting them with 
25 
- 
35 
- 
specified. 
any blowing apparatus; but the method of so 
connecting them is obvious and need not be 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is-- 
1. In a furnace for puddling or heating, the 
combination, with the fuel and puddling cham 
bers, of an air-passage, AA, within the crown 
of the furnace, extending from the front of the 
fuel-chamber to the rear of the puddling-cham 
ber, and discharging into the front of the neck, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a puddling or heating furnace, an air 
passage or flue, AA, extending from the front 
of the furnace along the crown thereof to the 
rear of the puddling-chamber, such fue being 
composed of a series of sections, A, placed face 
to face, and each provided with a single per- 5 
foration, as described. 
3. In a furnace, one or more air-flues, AA, 
extending along the crown of the furnace from 
the front of the same to the rear of the heat 
ing-chamber, and discharging into the front 
portion of the neck of the furnace, the upper 
portion of the neck constituting a continua 
tion substantially in the same downwardly and 
rearwardly inclined plane of the upper portion 
of such flues, substantially as described. 
. 
THOMAS H. BENNETT. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
WM. F. HASENAUER, 
HENRY C. SMYTH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US311902.txt	(No Model.) 
D, D, LEWIS. 
STOPPER FOR ADLES, 
No. 3ll, 902, 
Patented Feb. 10, 1885. 
N 2. 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
n 
 
  
 
 
 
d 
Yiftesses 
as 19 f 
Fig. 3 
re. 
MN/. Aa1-0 g/ 
oct/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
DAVID D. LEWIS, OF JOHNSTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
STOPPER FOR LADLEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 311,902, dated February 10, 1885. 
Application filed November 24, 1884. (No mode.) 
To all, whon, it inctly concern. 
Be it known that I, D. D. LEWIS, of Johns. 
town, in the county of Cambria, and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Stoppers for Ladles; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use it, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
stoppers for ladles; and it consists in the com 
bination of the ladle having a suitable per 
forated casting secured to its under side, and 
a suitable perforated brick which is applied 
to this casting, with a metallic casting, which 
is moved back and forth by a suitable mech 
anism, and which is also provided with a 
perforated brick, a plate or casting which sup 
ports the movable casting in position, and 
springs for the purpose of forcing the two 
castings together, so that the melted steel can 
not get between them, all of which will be 
more fully described hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
stopper for ladles which can be moved freely 
back and forth for the purpose of controlling 
the flow of melted steel, and in which the 
parts are forced together by suitable springs. 
Figure 1 represents a vertical longitudinal 
section of an apparatus embodying my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is an end view of the same. Fig. 
3 is an inverted view. 
G represents the ladle, which will be con 
structed in the usual manner. Secured in 
any suitable manner to the under side of this 
lade is a metallic casting, B, which has an 
opening through it, SO as to register with the 
opening through the bottom of the ladle, and 
which casting has suitable depending flanges, 
O, which serve as guides to the slide. This 
casting is recessed, as shown, for the purpose 
of receiving the perforated brick C, which 
protects the casting B from the melted steel. 
Applied to the under side of this casting B, 
and in between its flanges O, is a second me. 
tallic casting, A, which is moved freely back 
and forth by means of the crank-lever , piv 
oted upon the crucible and the connecting 
rod H. This casting A is also perforated and 
IO 
45 
55 
75 
recessed, as shown, so as to receive the perfo 
rated brick D, which serves to protect the 
casting from the action of the steel. The top 
part of this brick B extends forward suffi 
ciently far to always close the opening through 
the brick C, and thus prevent the melted 
steel from ever coming in contact with the 
casting A. The casting A is supported in po 
sition against the under side of the casting B 
by means of the perforated plate E, as shown. 
Suitable bolts, P., are passed up through the 
plate E and the lower edges of the flanges O 
on the casting B, and then spiral Springs L. 
are applied to the bolts for the purpose of 
keeping the casting A forced upward tightly 
against the bottom of the casting B, SO as to 
prevent the melted steel from coming between 
them. The casting A is made sufficiently 
thick to project slightly below the lower edges 
of the flanges O, and hence the plate E will 
keep the casting A pressed up into position. 
When the casting A is drawn outward into 
the position shown in Fig. 1, the melted 
steel flows freely out; but when the casting A 
is forced backward, the front portion of the 
brick D stops the flow. In case the bricks C 
D should become burned out at any time, the 
bolts P can be readily removed, the casting A. 
taken out, and new bricks applied. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination of the ladle, the perfo 
rated and recessed casting B, applied to its 
under side, with the perforated and recessed 
casting A, a mechanism for moving it, and 
the two perforated bricks CD, substantially 
as shown and described. 
2. The combination of the crucible, the re 
cessed and perforated casting B, provided 
with the flanges O, the recessed and perforated 
casting A, a mechanism for moving the cast 
ing, the bricks C D, the plate E, and springs 
for forcing the castings A B together, Substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
DAVID D. LEWIS. 
Witnesses: 
J. D. LEWIS, 
THOMAS WATKINS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312003.txt	G. L. MORRISON, 
FIRE PLACE HEATER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 10, 1885, 
(No Model.) 
No. 312,003. 
 
awarasaraxaaaaaaaayaawaaaaa-awawasarayaaaaaayasava aSN 
Alae 
(Sses: 
/z ven 
&J 2. 
(No Model.) 
G. L. MORRISON, 
FIRE PLACE HEATER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 312,003, 
Patented Feb. 10, 1885. 
 
R 
Mi Nesses: 
I. cSv. Volouk. 
276(32.42 
INyENTDR 
4. eczerc. 4-4-3- 
2-1/2 
N. Pereas. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GARDNER L. MORRISON, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM. H. 
JACKSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FIRE PLACE HEATER. 
SPECIFICATIOIN forming part of Tetters Patent No. 312,003, dated February 10, 1885. 
Application filed February 23, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
5 
To all, Luhon, it Tival? concern. 
Be it known that I, GARDNER L. MORRI 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Fire-Place Heaters; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact specification thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved heater with the sides open and front 
doors removed. Fig. 2 is a transverse verti 
cal section of the heater in a plane cutting 
through the side chambers, combustion-cham 
ber, oblique flues, and register-boxes; Fig. 3, 
a vertical section thereof from front to back 
in a plane indicated by the line aca, Fig. 2. 
Like letters designate corresponding parts 
in all of the figures. 
A fire-place heater is of that class of stoves 
for warming houses which are set partly into 
a fire-place and partly incased, to form an air 
chamber within the fireplace, that the air 
drawn into said chamber may be heated by the 
direct radiation from the fire-pot and combus 
tion-chamber and flues which pass through it. 
The air thus heated is conducted to upper 
apartments or allowed to enter the immediate 
apartment, according to the adjustment of a 
damper which controls the exits of the same. 
The air to be heated in this class of ordi 
nary stoves is admitted through side flues or 
free openings, and is drawn around and to the 
rear of the combustion-chamber and fire-pot, 
entering the air-chamber, and is thence ad 
mitted to conductors or flues communicating 
with upper rooms, or else is diverted by means 
of a damper, and is drawn through an exit 
flue above the fuel-magazine into the apart 
ment in which the heater is located. By this 
manner of constructing the heater the air for 
warming rooms is not subjected to the great 
est heat directly above the incandescent fuel 
in the fire-pot. 
My improvement is designed to avail of the 
superior advantages above referred to; and it 
consists in the provision of two auxiliary in 
duction-?lues for air at the sides of the fire-pot, 
so each connecting with an inwardly-inclined 
45 
25 
35 
oval-shaped flue, which communicates with a 
register-box laterally above the combustion 
chamber. The oval-shaped flues are Within 
the combustion-chamber, and incline over the 
fire-pot, and receive the full effect of the ra 
diation from the incandescent fuel and the as 
cending heat of the burning gases, which en 
velops them in its passage to the Smoke-fille. 
In the drawings, a a denote the air-ingress 
flues, which communicate with the air-cham 
ber around the rear part of the stove within 
the fire-place, and from which, by means of a 
damper, heated air can be admitted to the 
lower apartment of the house or allowed to 
pass upwardly through pipes which communi 
cate with upper rooms. 
My improvement is more particularly de 
scribed with reference to the drawings as fol 
lows: At each end of the fire-pot K a rectan 
gular chamber, c, is formed, which communi 
cates with the register-box e through the in 
termediate oval flue, d, which inclines inwardly 
over the fire-pot and within the combustion 
chamber L. The air to be heated is drawn 
into the air-ingress chambers c e through ap 
ertures or dampers in their front doors, (not 
shown in the drawings,) coming in direct Con 
tact with the ends of the fire-box K, thence 
it passes up through oval flues did and enters 
the register-boxes e e. These register-boxes 
extend from the front of the stove back into 
the hot-air chamber n, and are provided each 
with a sliding damper or door, g, by means of 
which the air heated in passing through the 
auxiliary chambers c e and oval flue d d may 
be admitted into the room in which the Stove 
is located, or (when each door g is drawn for 
ward) it will pass into the hot-air chamber n, 
to be conveyed to upper rooms. 
It will be observed that, while all the gen 
eral features and advantages Common to this 
class of heaters are retained, auxiliary air 
heating flues are so located in my improve 
ment as to augment the volume of heated air 
without enlarging the heater and without es 
sentially diminishing the fire-pot and combus 
tion-chamber. The dotted line a and facing 
Sindicate the respective portions of the heater 
to occupy the fire-place and project in front 
thereof. 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
312,003. 
back hot-air chamber, n, the combustion 
I am aware that neither the air-chambers a 
a nor auxiliary air-chambers and flues extend 
chamber L, and register-boxes ee above the 
ing through the fire-pot are new; but in ex- combustion - chamber, of separate auxiliary 
isting heaters these flues connect with the air-ingress chambers c c, inclined flues d d, 
main hot rear air-chamber, while in my con 
leading from the said auxiliary chambers 
struction they open into register-chambers or 
through the combustion-chamber to the said 
boxes provided with movable slides or damp 
register-boxes, and dampers g g, for deflect 
ing the heated air-through the register-boxes 
ers, by means of which the hot air is passed 
through the flues and deflected through the 
into the room. Or into the rear hot-air cham 
ber, n, substantially as and for the purpose 25 
front of the stove into the room, or is allowed 
to pass into the rear hot-air chamber, as de 
herein set forth. 
3) 
GARDNER L. MORRISON. 
sired. 
- 
I claim as my invention 
In a fire-place heater, the combination, with 
15 the air-ingress chambers a a, leading to the 
Witnesses: 
E. MILLER, 
H. P. K. PECK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312103.txt	A. EUSTON & J. P. NEWILLE. 
METHOD OF BOXING LEAD PIPE, 
Patented Feb. 10, 1885. 
(No Mode.) 
No. 312,103, 
 
1zzesz/ . 
766 16-61. 
-Alazzzzz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER EUSTON AND JOHN P. NEVILLE, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
METHOD OF BOXING LEAD PPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 312,103, dated February 10, 1885. 
Application filed May 29, 1884. 
(No model.) 
IO 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ALEXANDER EUSTON 
and JOHN P. NEVILLE, both of the city of St. 
Louis, in the State of Missouri, have invented 
a certain new and useful Improvement in the 
Method of Putting up Lead Pipe for Shipment 
or Transportation, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing part of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a side view, and Fig. 2 a perspec 
tive view. 
In the manufacture of lead pipe it has been 
the practice to coil the pipe around a drum, 
One layer above another, as it comes from the 
press, which givesita cylindrical form. There 
are a number of disadvantages arising from 
this form of coil, among which are, first, the 
great amount of lost space or room; secondly, 
the coil is easily mashed and pressed out. of 
shape; thirdly, the coil requires to be wrap 
ped with a thick coat of hay, excelsior, or 
other suitable material; and, fourthly, the 
pipe, though the coil is wrapped, is liable to 
be dented and mashed, which greatly damages 
it, for dents cannot be taken out of a pipe ex 
cept by removing a section or part of the pipe, 
which involves a loss of pipe and time, and 
Which necessitates a joint in the pipe. 
To avoid all these and other like difficulties, 
We have devised a new and improved method 
of putting up this lead pipe for transporta 
tion or shipment, which consists in first coil 
ing it, by any suitable means or apparatus, 
into a flat or watch-spring form, as shown in 
Fig. 1, and then placing it in a crate or case, 
as shown in Fig. 2, on which may be marked 
the size of the pipe, maker's name, &c. The 
frame holds the several rings of the coil in 
place, Supports the coil, and protects the pipe 
25 
3O. 
35 
Referring to the drawings, A, Fig. 1, rep- 45 
from being mashed and indented, and when 
the pipe reaches its destination it can be taken 
out of the case, and is in the best possible 
shape to be uncoiled for use. 
resents the coil, and B, Fig. 2, the crate or 
package. 
We are aware that pipes for heating and 
cooling apparatuses and similar purposes have 
been coiled into a flat or watch-spring form 
as, for instance, the patent to A. D. Brock, 
dated May 11, 1883, No. 276,763, shows such 
a coil; but these pipes are not lead, as his 
specification describes a threaded joint, and a 
thread is never cut on lead pipe, the metal 
being too soft to hold the thread; nor are the 
Brock pipes and others of like character 
boxed, as they consist of hard metal that does 
not require boxing, and they are not merely 
coiled for the purpose of transporting them, 
and to be uncoiled for use, but they are coiled 
into a form which they are intended to retain, 
and in which they are used for heating, cool 
ing, and similar purposes; but 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The improved method of putting up lead 
pipe for transportation or shipment, which 
consists in first coiling it into a flat or watch 
spring form, and then putting it into a thin 
crate or case, which retains the coils in proper 
form, and from which it can be easily removed 
and uncoiled for use when it reaches its des 
tination, as set forth. 
55 
ALEXANDER EUSTON. 
JOHN P. NEWILLE, 
In presence of - 
GEO. H. KNIGHT, 
SAML, KNIGHT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312203.txt	(No Model.) 
E. HORTON. 
6 Sheets-Sheet; 1. 
MACHINE FOR FINISHING CLOCK PALLETS, 
No. 312,203, 
Patented Feb. 10, 1885. 
y 
N 
y 
R 
N 
N 
$ in 
u 
R H 
II 
| 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
E. HORTON. 
MACHINE FOR FINISHING CLOCK PALLETS, 
No. 312,203, 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 10, 1885. 
-S 
EGSail 
- Ul 
N 
-1S 
ys-6s 
(2) 
Rs 
(2) 
80 
(2) 
co S 
IN 
O 
(2. N 
Ss 3. 
na 3. 
(2 R (Sis 
(2) 
Sy 
SS 
N 
NS 
21, 2 
T 
a 2" 
No. t 
R 
N 
 
(No Model.) 
E. HORTON. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
MACHINE FOR FINISHING CLOCK. PALLETS, 
No. 312,203, 
Patented Feb. 10, 1885, 
7& of 
   
  
  
  
 
 
 
in II 
3f 
NIN 
 
 
Z N 
2 
& 
2 N 
W SNN 
 
 
 
N 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. c. 
(No Model.) 
E. HORTON. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
MACHINE FOR FINISHING CLOCK PALLETs, 
No. 312,203, 
 
Patented Feb. 10, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
E. HORTON. 
MACHINE FOR FINISHING CLOCK PALLETs, 
NO, 312,203, 
Patented Feb. 10, 1885. 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
E. HORTON, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
MACHINE FOR FINISHING C, OCK PATIETS, 
No. 312,203, 
Patented Feb. 10, l885. 
?o 
 
 
Sir 
u-2 N 
N 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EVERETT HORT ON, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
VACHINE FOR FINISHING CLOCK-PAL LETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 312,203, dated February 10, 1385. 
Application fied August 9, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
O 
25 
To all, it'? O7) it in?tity concern: 
Be it known that I, EVERETT HORTON, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented new Im 
provements in Machines for Making Clock 
Pallets; and I do hereby declare the following, 
when taken in connection with accompanying 
six sheets of drawings, and the letters of ref. 
erence marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, and which said 
drawings constitute part of this specification, 
and represent, in 
Figure 1, a front view; Fig. 2, a top view; 
Fig. 3, an end view from the right; Fig. 4, a 
vertical central section through the slide S; 
Fig. 4", a horizontal section through the clamp 
ing plate 0, looking down upon the holder, 
and showing the method of locating the pallet 
On the holder, enlarged; Fig. 5, a horizontal 
Section above the disk t, showing the two se 
ries of studs and their respective stops, en 
larged; Figs, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11, diagrams ill 
lustrating the operation of the cut, enlarged; 
Fig. 12, a diagram showing the finished pal 
let, enlarged to four times its usual size; Figs. 
13 and 14, Sectional side views, and Fig. 15 a. 
transverse Section illustrating the method of 
imparting vertical reciprocating movement to 
the bearings of the cutter-arbor; Fig. 16, a 
modification. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in machines for making clock-pallets, and par 
ticularly to that class which are cut from 
sheet metal and of a shape as seen in Fig. 12. 
These pallets are stamped with a pinch and 
die from sheet metal, which leaves the edges 
so rough that a finishing of those edges is nec 
essary before they can be applied to the clock. 
This work has hitherto been done by placing 
the pallets in a templet of the exact shape of 
the finished pallet, and then with a file work 
ing down the surface of the pallet to the stand 
ard shape of the templet. In thus finishing 
the pallets by hand there is unavoidably a 
greater or less variation in the working sur 
faces, causing more or less difficulty in assem 
bling and adjusting the parts. 
The object of my invention is the construc 
tion of a machine whereby the edges of the 
5o pallet may be finished and all the pallets 
brought to precisely the same shape and size; 
and the invention consists, essentially, in a 
revolving cutter combined with a support for 
the pallet, and mechanism for turning the pal 
let to properly present the respective edges 
to the cutter, so that the edges will be dressed 
to a standard size, and as more fully herein 
after described. 
A represents the bed of the machine, not 
unlike a small lathe-bed. At one end is a head 
stock, B, in which two journal-boxes, CC, are 
arranged. These boxes are set in vertical 
slots in the head-stock, and so as to be moved 
downward and upward, as from the position 
in Fig. 13 to that in Fig. 14, and return. In 
these journal-boxes C the arbor D is arranged 
so as to revolve freely therein, power being 
communicated to the arbor through a pulley, 
E, or otherwise. 
On the arbor D, near each of the boxes C 
C, an eccentric, F, is fixed. Around each ec 
centric is a strap, G, from which an arm, H, 
extends downward beneath the arbor, the 
lower end of each arm supported on a pivot, 
I, on the base of the head-stock. The eccen 
trics revolve with the arbor. The result of 
such revolution is to impart to the two boxes 
and the arbor an up-and-down reciprocating 
movement to the extent of the throw of the 
eccentric F, as from the position in Fig. 13 to 
that in Fig. 14, and return, and as indicated 
in broken lines, Fig. 15. The purpose of this 
up and-down reciprocating movement will be 
explained hereinafter. 
On the bed longitudinal guides JJ are fixed, 
between which is a longitudinal slide, K. To 
the rear guide a hand-lever, L, is hung, as at 
M, provided at its forward end with a han 
dle, N, and is also attached by a pivot, P, to 
the slide K, and so that the operator by means 
of the lever L. may impart to the slide K a 
longitudinal back-and-forth movement. 
On the slide K guides R. R. are arranged at 
right angles thereto, and in the said guides R. 
R a slide, S, is arranged to be moved back 
and forth at right angles to the slide K. 
To one of the guides R, as at a, a lever is 
hung, one arm, T, extending forward, termi 
nating in a handle, U. The other arm, V, ex 
tends over the slide S, and is hung thereto by 
a pivot, b, and so that the operator holding 
the handle U in one hand may impart a back 
45 
75 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
w 
32,203 
and-forth movement to the slide S at right an 
gles to the slide K, while with the other hand 
upon the lever L he may at the same time im 
part a longitudinal movement to the slide K, 
which last movement will be communicated to 
the transverse slide S, thus enabling the oper 
ator to communicate a movement to the slide 
S either in a longitudinal or transverse direc 
tion. 
d is a vertical shaft arranged on the slide S, 
taking its bearing at the lower end in the 
slide, and its upper end supported in a bear 
lling, 6. 
is a shaft arranged below the slide, but 
parallel with the shaft d, its upper end tak 
ing a bearing in the slide, and its lower end 
supported in a bearing, g, extending down 
ward from the slide S. 
On the shaft d is a toothed pinion, h, which 
works into a corresponding pinion, i, on the 
shaft f, so that a rotation imparted to one 
shaft will be communicated to the other, and 
to the Same extent. 
On the shaft d, above the slide S, is a disk 
or dial-plate, i', having a series of notches in 
its edge, into which the nose l of a spring-dog, 
m, may set, so as to hold the disk and the 
shaft with which it is connected at any point 
to which it may be set. 
Upon the upper end of the shaft d a holder, 
n, for the pallet-blank is fixed in a plane par 
allel with the slide S, but So as to partake of 
whatever rotation may be given to the shaft 
d. The inner end of the holder n is fitted to 
receive the pallet and leave its working sur 
faces exposed. The pallet is secured thereon 
by a clamp, o, upon which a clamping-screw, 
, is brought to bear, as seen in Fig. 4, and so 
that by turning the shaft d the pallet will be 
turned to present its respective edges to the 
cutter. 
On the shaft if a collar, t, is fixed, from 
which project radially a series of studs, 1, 2, 
3, 4, 5, and 6. Below the collar t is a like col 
lar, u, carrying a second like series of studs, 
1, 2, 3,4", 5", and 6", one of each series cor 
responding to one of the Second series, and 
the corresponding studs of one series being 
at right angles to the studs of the other series, 
as seen in Fig. 5. 
On the front of the bed A is a stop, 7, 
which stands in line with one series of studs, 
and from the bed an arm projects, forming a 
stop, 8, for the other series at right angles to 
the stop 7. When the shaft d stands in the 
position seen in Fig. 5, the stud 1 of one se 
ries strikes the Stop 7, and the other or core 
sponding stud, 1", strikes the stop 8. 
- 
In operation the slide S is moved, say, to 
the right and forward, So as to take the sev 
eral studs out of reach of their respective 
stops. The pallet is secured in the holder. 
Then the operator turns the disk i until the 
notch 1 comes into engagement with the nose 
l of the dog m. The several notches 1, 2, 3, 
4, 5, and 6 on the dial correspond, respective. 
ly, to the studs on the shaft d below; hence 
when the disk i' stands, as shown in Fig. 2, 
with the notch 1 engaged with the dog l, then 
the stud 1 projects directly forward toward the 
bed, and its companion stud 1" projects to the 
left at right angles thereto. The operator 
then moving the lever L to the left, will take 
the slides K and S in that direction until the 
stud 1" comes against the stop 8. Then he 
moves the lever T until the slide S advances to 
bring the stud 1 against the stop 7, and as seen 
in Fig. 5. 
On the arbor D the cutter 9 is fixed. The 
edge of this cutter upon its right-hand side is 
in a plane at right angles to its axis. On the 
reverse side it is inclined, as seen in Figs. 6, 
7, &c. 
The pallet as seen in Fig. 12 presents six 
Surfaces to be dressed. These are numbered 
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, corresponding, respectively, 
to the notches in the disk i and to the studs 
below. 
The pallet, held as before described, and 
under the movement of the slides K and S, is 
presented first to the cutter 9, as seen in Fig. 
6, and the toe or surface 1 is dressed, the cut 
ter operating upon that surface until the studs 
below come to a bearing against their respect 
ive stops. This done, the slides are with 
drawn to take the pallet out of reach of the cut 
ter. Then the holder is turned to bring the 
notch 2 into engagement with the dog m, and 
there held will be moved to the left by the le 
ver L. until the stop 2" comes against the stop 
8. Then under the action of the lever T the 
pallet will be advanced toward the back of the 
cutter, and the surface 2 or impulse will be 
dressed by the back of the cutter, as seen in 
Fig. 7. This done, the pallet is again with 
drawn from the cutter and turned until the 
notch 3 of the disk engages with the dog m. 
Then by the action of the lever L, as before, 
the slides will be moved to the left until the 
stud 3" comes against the stop 8. Then under 
the action of the lever T the slide S will be 
moved forward, taking the pallet to the edge 
of the cutter, and the Side 3 or repose will be 
dressed by the back of the cutter, as seen in 
Fig. 8. This done, the slides are again with 
drawn from the cutter and the disk i turned 
until the notch 4 engages the dog m, and which 
brings the corresponding studs 4 and 4" into 
action, the slide S is moved forward under the 
action of the lever T until the stud 4 comes 
in contact with its stop 7. Then under the ac 
tion of the lever I, the slide S, with the pallet, 
is moved toward the cutter and until the stud 
4' comes to a bearing against the stop 8, and 
by which operation the edge 4 or impulse will 
be dressed by the flat edge of the cutter, as 
seen in Fig. 9. This done, the slides are again 
withdrawn to take the pallet from the cutter. 
Then the disk i is turned to bring notch 5 into 
engagement with the dog m. Then under the ac 
tion of the lever L the slide K is moved to 
the left until the stud 5" comes to a bearing 
against its stop 8, and then under the action 
of the lever T the slide S is advanced to pre 
95 
IOO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
IO 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
312,203 
3 
75 
SO 
O 
3O 
sent the side 5 or repose to the back of the 
cutter, as seen in Fig. 10. This edge finished, 
the slides are again withdrawn as before, the 
disk i turned to bring the notch 6 into engage 
ment with the dog in. Then under the action 
of the lever T the slide S is advanced until the 
stud 6 comes to a bearing upon the stop 7, and 
then under the action of the level I the Slides 
are moved to the left, bringing the inner side, 
6, of the heel of the pallet against the flat face 
of the cutter and until the corresponding stud 
6" comes to a bearing against the Stop S, which 
finishes the pallet. The slides are again with 
drawn, the finished pallet removed, and a new 
blank introduced and dressed as before. By 
this operation all the pallets d'essed must be 
of precisely the Same size and shape, and pre 
sent precisely the same angles, and thereby 
avoid the variation which must occur in hand 
shaped pallets, and the difficulties attending 
hand-finishing. 
To perfectly insure the proper position of 
the pallet in the holder preparatory to dress 
ing the surfaces, I set a stud, n', on the upper 
surface of the holder in corresponding to the 
hole made through it for its attachment to the 
rod. The clamp 0 upon its under face is re 
cessed so as to form two bearing-points, o' 0", 
at two opposite extremes on the back of the 
pallet. 
To apply the pallet on the holder, the clamp 
0 is moved backward, which movement is per 
mitted by the slot through which the clamp 
ing-screw extends, then the pallet is set upon 
35 the stud n., the clampo moved forward, bring 
ing the two points o' o' hard against the back of 
the pallet at opposite ends, and the clamping 
screw applied. The hole in in the pallet is ce2- . 
essarily positive and fixed, and the bringing 
of the two extremes of the back of the pallet 
to two fixed points insures the Same relative 
position of all pallets. If, perchance, the 
dressing of one or more faces of a pallet should 
be omitted in the operation the pallet may he 
subsequently replaced upon the holder, and 
these unwrought faces be finished with the 
same accuracy as if they had been finished in 
the first operation). As the surfaces are pre 
sented to the back of the cutter, or any part of 
it which is in a plane other than at a right an 
gleto its axis, the surface dressed will be curved 
according to the circumference of the cutter, 
It is necessary that the impulse and repose 
surface on the pallet shall be flat, to be prop 
erly acted upon by the teeth of the crown 
wheel. The up-and-down movement imparted 
to the arbor which carries the cutter, and here 
inbefore described, accomplishes this result, 
the up-and-down movement being at least to 
the extent of the thickness of the pallet. Be 
cause the cutter thus moves up and down in 
operating upon the surface, it follows that the 
surface will be flat, and the concave shape 
which would result from the axis of the cut 
I have represented the shaft f as separate 
from but parallel with the shaft d. This shaft 
65 ter remaining stationary is avoided. 
55 
f is, however, to be considered as a continua 
tion of the shaft d, as it will be evident they 
may be but a single shaft. 
The studs of the two series are made ad 
justable by screwing them into their collar t, 
as seen in Fig. 4, so that they may be length 
ened by withdrawing them, or shortened by 
turning then inward. 
Instead of stopping the movement of the 
slides by the two series of studs, as described, 
the collar may be constructed with corre 
sponding projections, made as an integral part 
of the collar or shaft, as seen in Fig. 16. 
Therefore, by the term studs?' I wish to be 
understood as including any projections from 
the holder, directly or indirectly, by which 
the two slides may be stopped at the proper 
position. 
Instead of constructing the disk i with 
notches into which the dog Will engage, any 
of the known equivalents may be employed. 
I therefore do not wish to be understood as 
limiting the invention to the notches described 
and shown. 
claim 
9O 
95 
IOO 
1. The combination of a revolving cutter, 
a slide movable parallel with the axis of the 
cutter, and a Second slide arranged upon the 
first, movable at right angles thereto, a ro 
tating shaft arranged upon said second slide, 
and carrying a holder to support the pallet, 
also provided with a disk constructed with 
notches corresponding to the respective edges 
of the pallet, and a dog arranged to engage said 
disk at its Several positions and thereby locate 
the pallet with relation to the cutter, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination of a revolving cutter, 
9, longitudinal slide IK, transverse slide S, 
vertical shaft d on said slide S, carrying the 
pallet-holder, and also carrying a disk, i', 
constructed with a Series of notches corre 
sponding to the respective edges of the pallet 
to be dressed, a dog to engage said disk, two 
series of radially-projecting studs, the studs 
of one series at Substantially right angles to 
the corresponding studs of the other series, 
and stops7 and S corresponding, respectively, I 15 
to said two series of studs, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. The combination of the revolving cutter, 
the slide K, movable in a plane parallel with 
the axis of Said cutter, the slide S, arranged I2O 
upon said slide K, and movable at right an 
-gles thereto, a holder to receive the pallet to 
be dressed, and arranged to rotate in a plane 
parallel with the axis of the cutter, said 
holder provided with a series of notches cor- I 25 
responding to the respective edges of the pal 
let to be dressed, a dog to engage either of 
said notches, the arbor of said cutter ar 
ranged in bearings movable in guides paral 
lel with the axis of rotation of said holder, and I3o 
the mechanism, Substantially such as de 
scribed, to impart an up-and-down recipro 
cating movement to said arbor and cutter, 
substantially as described. 
4. 
312,203 
5 
O 
4. The combination of the revolving cutter, with relation to each other and to the cutter, 2O 
the slide K, movable in a plane parallel with the said cutter arranged in bearings movable 
the axis of the cutter, a slide, S, arranged on in a plane parallel with the axis of rotation of 
said slide K, and movable at right angles said holder, and the mechanism, substantially 
thereto, the pallet-holder arranged on said such as described, to impart reciprocating 
slide S, and so as to rotate upon an axis at movement to said bearings, substantially as 25 
right angles to the path of movement of said described. 
slide, said holder provided with a series of 
5. The combination of the cutting devices 
notches corresponding to the respective edges to dress the respective edges of the pallet, the 
of the pallet to be dressed, a dog to engage holder n, provided with the stud n., corre 
either of said notches, said holder provided sponding to the hole through the pallet, and 3O 
with two series of projections at right angles the clamping-plate o, constructed with bear 
to the axis of rotation, and each projection of ings o' o' for the back of the pallet at opposite 
each series corresponding to the respective ends, substantially as described. 
notches on the holder, corresponding projec- 
tions in the two series at right angles to each 
other, and a stop against which the corre- 
responding projections of each series will 
strike to arrest the movement of the two slides 
JOS. C. EARLE, 
L. E. ToRCKER. 
Witnesses: 
EVERETT HORTON. 
T 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312303.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. THOMAS, 
APPARATUS FOR BENDING METAL BARS, 
No. 312,303, 
Patented Feb. 17, 1885. 
- 52-42. 
A. 
Z) 
s 
I 
42/ 2 
-- - - 
\ 
e 
- 
A. 
a 0 --C, 
/7. 
, 
* 
A. 
Zo 
Z2 
( SS ass 
\ 
f 
w S. 
- 
- 
---. z. 
ZO 
6 
a 
> . 
f 
2. 
on 
-- 
------ 
pe 2 
 
  
N. -1 
N 
Z-1 2 
  
 
1.WWEWTOR 
2 44.7%. 2. At for nety . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. THOMAS, OF SPRING FIELD, OHIO. 
A PPARATUS FOR BEN DING METAL BARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 312,303, dated February 17, 1885. 
Application filed May 31, 1884. No model.) 
55 
To all, whoIn it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN H. THOMAs, of 
Springfield, county of Clark, and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Apparatus for Bending Metal Bars, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, making part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to a novel means for 
bending rods or bars of metal to form cranks, 
or for other purposes, and is more especially 
designed for the forming of cranks for use in 
hay-tedders for actuating the tedder-teeth, and 
for other similar purposes; but it will be ap 
parent that it may be employed for bending 
rods or bars of metal for various uses other 
than that named. 
It consists in the combination, with a die 
and former of the configuration required for 
giving the desired form or bend to the rod or 
bar, of a clamp or holder for grasping the rod 
or bar, holding it in the desired relation to 
the die and former, and preventing its slipping; 
and, also, in the employment, in connection 
therewith, of a gage or gages for Setting the 
rods on bars in proper relation to the die and 
former, whereby any desired number of uni 
formly cranked or bent rods may be formed; 
also, in the combination, with the die and 
former, of a gage or shelf for supporting a 
crank previously formed in a rod or bar at the 
desired angle to the one to be formed, which 
shelf or gage may be adjustable for varying 
the angle or relation of the cranks to each 
other, as may be required. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a longitudinal section through the 
die or base-plate and former, showing the gage 
for setting the rod or bar, with the latter 
clamped in position for bending; and Fig. 2 is a 
similar view showing the parts in the position 
they assume when the bend or cranklhas been 
formed in the bar. Fig. 3 is a face view of 
the die or bed-plate, with its gages for placing 
or setting the bar therein, and for supporting 
a previously-formed crank and determining 
the angle of relation thereto of the crank to 
be formed. Fig. 4 represents a transverse 
section on linea ac, Fig. 2; Fig. 5, an end view 
of the apparatus; Fig. 6, a side elevation of 
the former, and Figs. 7 and S detail views 
showing modifications in the form of the 
clamps. 
A represents the die or base-plate, (shown 
in the form of a rectangular block,) of metal, 
with a depression at Ain its face at about the 
center of its length, extending across the face 
of the block, and corresponding in form to 
the bend or crank it is desired to form in the 
metal rod to be operated upon; and B is the 
former, corresponding in shape to and Snugly 
fitting the face of the die, having a tapering 
projection, B, formed upon it and fitting the 
depression A. The adjacent faces of the die 
and former have each a longitudinal groove 
of semi-cylindrical or other suitable form, con 
forming to the shape of the rod or bar to be 
operated upon, and extending from end to 
end through the depression for the crank and 
the projection on the former, as indicated at 
C. and b. The die has a transverse groove, c', 
formed in its face at or near the center of the 
length of the depression A", said groove ex 
tending from side to side of the die, for a pur 
pose which will be explained, and the former 
B has secured to or formed upon its sides slot 
ted arms or ears l and b, arranged at the 
sides of the projection B, and in the same 
transverse plane with the groove C', as shown. 
C in Fig. 1 represents the rod or bar to be 
operated upon, placed within the longitudinal 
groove a ; and D, a thumb disk or nut adjust 
able on a screw-threaded rod, D', secured to 
one end of the die or block A, said thumb nut 
or disk D serving, when properly adjusted, to 
determine the relation of the rods or bars to 
the die and former, the rods being placed in 
succession in the die, with their adjacent ends 
abutting against said disk. When a rod is 
thus placed in the die A and the former B is 
brought against it until the rod rests in the 
groove b in the face of the projection B there 
of, a wedge, e, is passed through the slots in 
the arms l' and b on the outer side or below 
the rod C, and said wedge, being driven in 
tightly, serves to clamp the rod C snugly with 
in said groove b against the face of projection 
B', and thereby to effectually hold it against . 
displacement in the process of bending. The 
bar or rod C is heated before being placed in 
position to facilitate the bending of the same, 
and after it has been so placed and Secured, as 
described, the former is forced to place in the 
gO 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
AO 
45 
312,303 
5 
IO 
die by any suitable means for that purpose, 
forming the bend or crank in the rod or bar, 
in a manner that will be readily understood. 
... To the end of the die A opposite the gage 
D is secured a short shelf, F, of sufficient 
width and length to form a support for one of 
the cranks formed in the rod or bar C, said 
shelf being by preference connected with the 
die or block A. by a longitudinal pivot at f, 
permitting its adjustment, and having a slot 
ted segment, f', connected with it, through 
which a set-screw, f, passes into a segment, 
f', attached to the block or die A, by which 
means the shelf F can be set and held at any 
I5 desired adjustment. This feature is important 
in machines like hay-tedders employing a se 
ries of cranks for actuating the tedder forks 
or teeth, in which the cranks are set at differ 
ent angles, varying from ninety degrees to one 
hundred and eighty degrees apart, the shelf 
F being made adjustable to suit such varia 
tions in the distance apart of the cranks. 
The means for holding the shelf at any de 
sired adjustment may of course be varied, and 
where it is employed only in the manufacture 
of cranks placed at a uniform distance apart 
it will not be necessary to make it adjustable. 
It serves as a support for a crank that has been 
formed in the shaft, and the angle at which it 
is set and in which it supports said crank 
serves to determine the angle of relation of 
the crank to be formed to that last formed in 
the shaft, the angle of relation shown in Fig. 
5 being one hundred and twenty degrees, and 
The means for clamping the rod or bar to 
the former may also be varied. Thus in Fig. 
7 an angle-iron clamp, g, is shown, which may 
move in suitable ways on the side of the 
former, and be operated by means of an eccen 
tric at g', pivoted to the former, and in Fig. 8 
a forked lever, h, one arm of which is made in 
the form of a hook, h", and enters a socket in 
or an eye or staple on the side of the former, is 
35 giving three cranks to the circle. 
25 
shown for clamping the rod to the latter, in 45 
lieu of the slotted ears and wedge. The wedge 
or clamp, when the former is forced inward in 
the die, enters the transverse groove a', formed 
in the die for its reception, thus permitting 
the die and former to be brought snugly to- 5o 
gether. 
2. The combination, with a die and former 6o 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim as new is 
1. In an apparatus for forming cranks or 
bends in rods or bars of metal, the combina- 55 
tion, with the die and former for bending said 
bars, of a gage for setting and a clamp for 
holding the bars in the desired relation to said 
die and former, substantially as described. 
for bending or forming cranks in rods or bars 
of metal, of a shelf or support arranged at an 
angle to the crank to be formed in the bar, for 
gaging the angle of the latter and supporting 
the crank previously formed in said bar, sub- 65 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a die and former 
for bending or forming cranks in metal bars 
or rods, of an adjustable gage or support for 
the cranks previously formed in said rods or 7o 
bars, for gaging the angle of relation thereto of 
the crank to be formed therein, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination, with the die and former 
for bending or forming cranks in metal bars, 75 
of a gage for setting said bars in proper rela 
tion to the die and former, a clamp for hold 
ing said bars while the cranks are being formed, 
and a gage or support for the crank previously 
formed therein, substantially as and for the 8o 
purpose described. 
my hand this 28th day of May, A. D. 1884. 
J. H. THOMAS. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
Witnesses: 
H. B. ZEVELY, 
REX. M. SMITH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312404.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 312,404. 
 
A. P. THAYER 
DIE FOR MAKING BARBED FENCING, 
w Patented Feb. 17, 1885, 
WITNESSEG= 
INVENTOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ANSON P. TEIAYER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THOMAS W. 
HALL OF SAME PLACE. 
DE FOR MA KING BARBED FENCNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 312,404, dated February 17, 1885. 
Application filed November 30, 1883. Renewed January 2, 1885. 
(No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANSON P. THAYER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Dies for Making Barbed Metallic 
Fencing, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention consists of dies adapted to 
shear apart a double blank Strip in a ZigZag 
line and form therefrom two rods having 
notches and projections containing the mate 
rial for the barbs and the waste material to be 
cut away from the barbs; also, dies adapted for 
punching away said waste material, as herein 
after fully described, reference being made to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a transverse section of the blank 
strip to be sheared apart and barbed. Fig. 2 
is a plan of the shearing-dies and of the bed 
die of the punch, also a portion of the fenc 
ing-strip partly cut, and a horizontal Section 
of the movable dies of the punch. Fig. 3 is 
a side elevation of the devices represented in 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a plan and horizontal sec 
tion of the dies, also a plan of the fencing 
strip, showing a modified form of the punch 
ing-dies; and Fig. 5 is a side elevation of the 
devices represented in Fig. 4. 
To shear the strip apart I use one die, a, 
having a rib, b, and another die, c, having a 
corresponding groove, d, and both dies hav 
ing the plain faces e andf, Working together, 
to separate the blank and form the projections 
35 p alternately on each part for the barbs. The 
rib and groove b d and the projections formed 
thereby are as wide as one barb to be made 
and one blank space to be cut away between 
the barbs when the waste is cut equally from 
both sides of the barbs; but I propose in some 
cases to cut the waste alternately with two 
barbs which are cut together, in which cases 
the waste is double the length of the portion 
to be cut from the projections formed by the 
rib and groove b d-that is to say, two por. 
tions of waste are cut together and two barbs 
are also cut together. The faces e are equal 
in width to half the spaces between the barbs, 
and the width of faces f may be the same or 
25 
O 
45 
less; or faces e may be less and faces fequal 5o 
to half of said spaces. The blank strips be 
ing fed to the dies a c from 9 to h, which is a 
distance equal to the length apart the barbs 
are to be, will be sheared apart in the zigzag 
line represented along the dies a c. From said 55 
dies a c, I propose to cause the Strip to pass , 
between the punching-dies, consisting of the 
bed-die i and the two punches ilk, by which 
the waste pieces l and in are to be punched 
Out, said punches being arranged Separately 
with separate die-sockets f' and k' in the die 
i, as in Fig. 3, or together with one die-socket, 
f', as in Fig. 4. In the first arrangement, the 
angles of the punches j k are converse to each. 
other and punch away the waste equally on 
both sides of the barbs of but in the other ar 
rangement said punches are paralleland punch 
away the waste between two alternate barbs 
formed side by side, said punches being, if pre 
ferred, formed together in one device and cut 
ting two measures of Waste together. The de 
vices, mode of operation, and results are sub 
stantially the same whether punches i k are 
arranged separately or together. The punches 
jk might be placed close together-that is, 75 
with their converging angles touching; but 
the bed-die would have an angle-web between 
the die-sockets that would not be durable, 
which makes it better to place them the dis 
tance of one feed-movement of the strip far- 8o 
ther apart. Punch i in Fig. 2 is located the 
distance of two feed-movements from diesb d, 
and both punches j and k are the same in Fig. 
4; but the punches may be placed farther away 
from said dies b d, if preferred. 
The dies a c may be made double or treble 
by increasing them in Width and number of 
ribs and grooves, and the punching-dies may 
be correspondingly doubled or trebled to in 
crease their capacity, in which case the feed go 
of the blank strips will be accordingly in 
creased in the length of the movements. 
The blank strip consists of two parallel cores, 
q, connected by a thin Web, s, and having outer 
ribS, t. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
terS Patent, is 
The combination, with shearing - dies a c, 
85 
95 
2 
312,404 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
having ribb, groove d, and plain faces ef, for 
shearing the blank strip and forming rods my name in the presence of two subscribing 
therefrom, having alternate projections and witnesses. 
notches, as described, of punching-die i and 
5 punches j and k, for cutting away the waste 
portions of said projections and completing 
the barbs. 
F. A. THAYER, 
S. H. MORGAN. 
Witnesses: 
ANSON P. TEHAYER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312504.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. PEASE. 
ALARM MECHANISM AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING THE SAME. 
Patented Feb. 17, 1885. 
No. 312,504. 
Giulim III 
Im. 
* . 
. 
II". 
s. 5a E L 
WN Ea 
sessee e = 
 
 
 
\XSwkss 
4 253. SS 
 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. PEASE, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO LENOX SIMPSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
- 
ALARM MECHANISM AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING THE SAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 312,504, dated February 17, 1885. 
Application filed April 25, 1884. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern, 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM M. PEASE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Alarm Mechan 
isms and Apparatus for Operating Same, of . 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This improvement is intended to be used in 
connection with a system of automatic electric 
railroad-train reporting set forth in an appli 
cation for patent (marked A) filed by me as 
of even date herewith. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
single alarm mechanism capable of reporting 
the passage of trains moving upon the track 
in opposite directions. 
The invention consists in the hereinafter 
described means. for attaining said object. 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of my 
invention while at rest; Fig. 2, a side eleva 
tion of same, and Fig. 3 a front elevation of 
same while in operation. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts throughout the different views. 
The clock-work A. of the alarm mechanism 
is of similar construction to that used in the 
ordinary fire-alarm boxes, and needs, there 
fore, no description. 
a represents the main or winding shaft of 
the clock-work, and a? the shaft which bears 
the circuit-breaking disks. 
To the shaft a is fixed an upright lever, B, 
which upon being forced toward the right 
winds up the clock-work. Fitting upon said 
lever are transverse slotted bars C C, and piv 
oted to said bars are upright leversDD". The 
lever Dis pivoted or fulcrumed below its point 
of joinder with bar C, while the lever D' is 
fulcrumed above its point of joinder with bar 
C'. When the upper extremity of either one 
of said levers D D is drawn inwardly, the 
mechanism will be wound up. Over the tops 
of levers D D' engage the hooked bars EE, 
the inner extremities of which are pivoted to 
the upright arm of a bell-crank, F. The hori 
Zontal arm of said bell-crank is attached to 
the upper extremity of a rod, G, and the 
lower extremity of the latter is pivoted to a 
crank borne by the horizontal bar H. Said 
. 
bar is provided with bearings, and reaches 
to the side of a rail, J, which forms one of a 
pair of rails belonging to the track of the 
railroad, but insulated therefrom. A lever, 
K, whose extremities extend a little above the 
rail J, is secured to the free extremity of the 
bar H. By this construction it will be seen 
that if the wheel of a car passing in the di 
rection of arrow 1 strikes lever K, the latter, 
through the medium of mechanism H, G, F, 
E, D, and C, will throw the lever B to the right 
and wind up the clock-work, while a car pass 
ing in the direction of arrow 2 will attain the 
same result through the medium of mechan 
ism H, G, F, E, D, and C. 
Pivoted to the inner end of bar C is a bent 
lever, c, whose free extremity reaches to within 
a short distance of the under side of hook 
bar E. 
Pivoted to the inner end of bar C is a beli 
crank, c, adapted when moved by the bar 
to force upward a rod, c, whose upper ex 
tremity reaches to the under side of hook-bar 
E. The effect of this construction is to throw 
the hook-bar E out of engagement with lever 
D' when a car passes over the lever K in the 
direction of arrow 1, and to throw hook-bar 
E out of engagement with lever D when a car 
passes in the direction of arrow 2. 
Attached to the outer end of bar C, but in 
sulated therefrom, are switch-levers L, and 
situated to the right of said levers are fixed 
contact-points l. 
Attached to the outer end of bar C are 
switch-levers L, and to the right of said le. 
vers are fixed contact-points l. 
Below their fulcrums levers D ID' are pro 
vided with offsets d d", and situated beneath 
said offsets, and extending slightly beyond 
same, are horizontal armatures M.M. The lat 
ter are hinged at their inner ends, and are 
provided with springs adapted to force upward 
their outer ends. Beneath Said armatures are 
situated electro-magnets N N', which when 
energized hold said armatures out of engage 
ment with the offset d d. 
O O' are two circuit-breaking disks attached 
to shaft a?, and having Serrations upon their 
peripheries corresponding to different num 
bers. 
PP' are the insulated tongues, which actin 
. 
75 
SO 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
312,504 
55 
60 
5 
O 
15 
- 
conjunction with said disks to break the cir- O, the breaks in the circuit are different, and 
cuit. Said tongues are attached by springs to the result is that the position and direction of 
the frame of the clock-work, and have arms p travel is indicated thereby. 
p', extending upward within the path of the 
Having thus described my invention, what 
lower extremities of the levels D D'. When 
I claim is 
the lever D is operated, its lower end, acting 
1. The combination, with lever B, of bar C, 
upon the arm p', forces the tongue P away 
lever D, bar E, crank F, rod G, crank-rod H, 
from contact with the disk O', while when the 
and lever K, substantially as and for the pur 
lever D' is operated the tongue P is in like 
poses described. 
manner forced away from contact with disk O. 
2. The combination, with lever B, of bars C. 
The ends of the coil of magnetN are connected 
C, levers D D, bars EE, crank F, rod G, 
by wires with switch-levers L, tongue P, and 
crank-bar H, and lever K, as and for the pur 
the ground, and the ends of the coil of mag 
poses set forth. 
net N are connected with switch-levers L, 
3. The combination, with the lever B and 
tongue P, and the battery-line. The contact 
bar G, of the crank F, hook-bars EE, levers 
points l are connected by wires with the two 
D D', bars C C, bent lever c, crank c, and 
insulated rails, as are also the points l. 
rod c, substantially as and for the purposes 
The operation of the invention is as follows: 
set forth. 
A train coming in the direction of arrow 1 
4. The combination, with lever B, bars C 
depresses lever K, and, through the interven 
C, and levers D D, of the disks O O", and 
ing mechanism, draws the top of lever D to 
tongues PP, provided with arms pp, substan 
the right. This winds up the clock - work, 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
forces switch-levers Lin contact with points 
5. The combination, with the clock-work 
l, forces the tongue Paway from disk O', and 
provided with lever B and the insulated rails, 
lifts hook-bar E from lever D'. The circuit, 
of the points ll, switch-levers LL, bars CC, 
which has been hitherto through magnetN, is 
lever c, crank c, bar c, levers DD", provided 
switched off through the insulated rails and 
with offsets d d", magnets N N', armatures M. 
the car wheels and axles. The armature Mis 
M", hook-bars E E, crank F, rod G, crank 
thereby released, flies upward, and catching 
rod H, and lever K, substantially as described, 
against the offset d locks the lever and clock 
whereby said clock-work will be wound up 
work. As long as a single pair of wheels and 
and locked by a car passing over said rails in 
axle remain upon the insulated rails the mag 
either direction and released after the pass . 
net N is cut out of circuit and the mechanism 
sage of said car, as set forth. 
continues locked. When the train has passed, 
6. The combination of the insulated rails, 
the circuit through the rails is broken and the 
the clock-work provided with lever B. and 
magnet N energized. The armature is there 
disks O O", the tongues PP, provided with 
by drawn downward and unlocks the mechan 
arms pp', levers D D, provided with offsets d 
ism and the disks revolve. Each time one of 
d', bars. C C, levers c c' c, switch-levers LL", 
the serrations in the disk Opasses the tongue 
contact-points ll, magnets N N', armatures M. 
P a break is made in the circuit, and the 
M', hook-bars E. E", crank F, rod G, crank 
number and arrangement of these breaks in 
rod H, and lever K, substantially as and for 
dicate-at the end of the line-the location of 
the purposes described. 
the train. If a train passes in the direction 
of the arrow 2, the disk O' and the tongue P 
are brought into operation, and the arrange 
ment of the serrations on said disk being dif 
ferent from (preferably the reverse of) disk 
WILLIAM M. PEASE. 
J. A. KURTZ, 
J. T. BIDDEE. 
Witnesses: 
3O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312604.txt	2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. L. BARKER, 
FLYING TARGET, 
Patented Feb. 24, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
No. 312,604, 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
iorney 
(No Model.) 
No. 312,604, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. L. BARKER. 
FLYING TARGET, 
Patented Feb. 24, 1885. 
er 
 
s ex 
a. 
 
21 
&N2 a 
&N2. 
All 2-222, 
% 
, 
Photo-Lithographer. Washinson. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN L. BARKER, OF RACINE, WISCONSIN. 
FLYING TARGET. 
313 CIFECATECEN goriting part of letters Patent No. 312,604, dated February 24, 1885. 
Application filed February 19, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
85 
- 
Sale. 
To all who77, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN L. BARKER, of 
Racine, in the county of Racine and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Flying Targets; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
flying targets. 
It is well known that the use of glass balls 
on fields where children are accustomed to 
play or cattle to feed is attended with great 
danger on account of the broken glass, and 
that the balls constructed of fragile material 
and provided with fulminates in the manner 
hitherto constructed become quite expensive 
and offer less attraction to the young sports 
man than a target which more nearly resem 
bles a bird. 
The object of my present invention is to pro 
vide an attractive and inexpensive target 
Which can be readily taken apart and packed 
in Small compass, and one which will soar 
bird-like out of and upward from the line of 
projection. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combinations of parts, as will be fully de 
Scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in perspective showing the target in 
position in the trap and trap ready to be 
sprung; Fig. 2, the arrow, body of the bird, 
and Wings, and Fig. 3 a sectional view show. 
ing the trigger and spring-guard. 
The body of the bird, A, is preferably made 
of tough paper about one-sixteenth of an inch 
thick, and cut in shape to represent a side 
view of a pigeon or other bird, as desired. 
The front of the body A is provided with a 
longitudinal slit, a, and the back with a notch, 
a. The purpose of the slit and notch will 
appear further on. The lower portion of the 
body A is furnished with the elongated pro 
jection B, in which the diagonal open slot b 
is formed. The projection B is constructed to 
enter the elongated slot c in the arrow C. A 
pin, c, is placed transversely across the slot 
c, and is adapted to enter the open slot b when 
the projection IB is placed in the slot c. The 
diagonal position of the slot b causes the body 
A to be carried along with the arrow C with 
out liability of displacement while the arrow 
is in motion, and at the same time furnishes 
an easy means of adjusting the body and re 
moving it from the arrow. 
The arrow may be made of any suitable ma 
terial, preferably of tough wood, and consists 
of a plain gradually-tapering rod provided 
with a weight at its head to give it momen 
tum enough to carry the bird a sufficient dis 
tance. 
The wings D consist of a single piece of thin 
stiff and tough paper, preferably oblong in 
shape, having the front corners rounded, and 
provided with an elongated closed slot, d, suf. 
ficiently long and wide to admit of the wings 
D being slipped over the head of the body A 
and slid rearwardly in the slit a until the rear 
ward edge of the wing portion falls into the 
notch a'. The lowest portion of the notch a? 
is farther from the arrow than the slit ais, and 
thus when the wings are placed in position it 
will cause them to be curved, as shown in the 
drawings. This will cause the artificial bird 
or target, when thrown with sufficient veloc 
ity, to lift from the line of projection and imi 
tate quite closely the rising of a game-bird. 
The position of the notch and the slit on the 
body of the bird may be varied to cause dif. 
ferent paths of flight, and the arrow may, if 
desirable, be rigidly secured to the bird. 
The object of the arrow being removable is 
economy-by having one hundred arrows, for 
example, answer for one thousand birds. 
The trap designed especially for projecting 
the above-described target consists of a bar 
rel, E, made of suitable material provided 
with a longitudinal perforation, e, adapted 
to allow the arrow a free sliding motion 
therein. The barrel E is further provided 
on its upper side with a narrow open slot, e, 
which communicates with the perforation e, 
and on its right and left sides with the corre 
sponding closed slots e". The slot e' is made 
of sufficient width to allow the body of the 
bird, A, a free sliding motion therein, and 
the slots e are sufficiently wide to allow the 
string which connects the actuating-springs a 
free longitudinal movement. 
A cross-bar, F, is secured in an easily-re. 
O 
5 
25 
45 
 
312,604 
Co 
that both the bird and trap may be taken apart 
and packed in a very concise form for trans 
portation, and can be adjusted for operation 5o 
in a very short time; and, furthermore, the 
small amount of metal required in the con 
struction of these devices makes the package 
light to carry and inexpensive to send. 
It is evident that many slight changes may 
be made in the form and construction of the 
several parts described without departing 
from the spirit and scope of my invention; 
hence I do not wish to limit myself to the ex 
act construction herein set forth. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A flying target shaped to resemble a bird, 
and provided with outstretched wings up 
wardly inclined from their front to their rear 
edges, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a flying target 
shaped to resenable a bird, and provided with 
outstretched curved wings upwardly inclined 
from their front to their rear edges, of an ar 
row secured to the bird below its wings, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a flying target 
shaped to resemble a bird, and provided with 
outstretched wings upwardly inclined from 
their front to their rear edges, of an arrow re 
movably secured to the bird. 
4. A flying target shaped to resemble a bird, 
and provided with removable outstretched 
curved wings upwardly inclined from their 
front to their rear edges, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. In a flying target, the combination, with 
an arrow having an elongated slot, of an arti 
ficial paperbird removably secured in the slot. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
- 
55 
5 
JOHN L, BARKER. 
Witnesses: . 
J. R. DYER, 
J. C. HEDDLE. 
I5 and a little beyond the notchese. 
movable manner to the end of the barrel E. 
The bar F may be rigid or have a slight spring. 
To the ends of the bar F the spiral springs 
G. are secured in any approved manner, and 
5 these springs are connected at their other ends 
by a tough hard string, g, which, as before 
noticed, has an easy longitudinal motion in 
the slots e. 
At the rear ends of the slots e the barrel E. 
Io is provided with the downwardly-extending 
notchese, to afford a rest for the string g. A 
flat strip of spring-metal, H, is secured in a re 
cess prepared for it at the rear end of the per 
foration e, and extends forward just beneath 
The trigger 
K is pivoted in a slot, k, beneath the forward. 
end of the spring H, and is constructed to lift 
the end of the said spring when pulled back 
ward. It will thus be seen that when the 
2O string of is drawn down and placed in the 
notches e the arrow, with the bird attached, 
may be introduced into the barrel E at either 
end, and the rear end of the arrow placed 
against the front end of the spring H. Now, 
25 if the trigger be pulled backward, the spring 
H will lift the string of out of the notches e, 
and the tension of the spiral springs G, or 
combined tension of the spiral springs G and 
spring-bar F, will be exerted to project the ar 
3o row. The tension of the springs, and hence the 
velocity of the arrow, may be easily regulated 
by lengthening or shortening the strings or 
other devices which fasten the springs to the 
cross-bar. The barrel E is pivoted between 
35 the upwardly-extending arms of the standard 
L, and is held in the required angle of eleva 
tion by means of the clamping-nut l on the 
pivotal bolti. The lower portion of the stand 
ard is swiveled in the base-block M, and hence 
4o allowed to occupy any required position in a 
horizontal plane. The base-block M is pref 
erably Square in cross-section, and is support 
ed upon four legs pivoted thereto by the bolts 
m. A single bolt secures two opposite legs, 
45 and a clamping-nut on this bolt holds the legs 
in any required adjustment. 
From the above description it will be seen. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312704.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 312,704. 
S. L. CARPINTER. 
BALE BAND TIGHTENER, 
Patented Eez N24, 1885. 
 
7 
to a 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEVEN LAFAYETT CARPINTER, OF ROSS VILLE, TENNESSEE. 
BALE-BAND TIGHTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 32,704, dated February 24, 1885. 
Application filed December 6, 1884. (No model) . 
55 
65 
75 
angular portion of the lever nearer to the 
To all, whon, it in alf conce7'72: 
power end of the lever, and this eyebolt J is 
Be it known that I, STEVEN L. CARPIN 
also secured in place by a threaded nut, K. 
TER, a citizen of the United States, residing 
To the eye of this bolt Ja, long curved hook 
at Rossville, in the county of Fayette and 
arm, L, is linked, the hook being turned 
State of Tennessee, have invented a new and 
slightly up and in the direction of the rectan 
useful Improvement in Bale-Band Tighteners, 
gular end of the lever A. The bale-tie M is 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
provided with the clamp N at one end, said 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
clamp being secured in an integral loop of 
OS. 
the bale-tie by a rivet, P. A short distance 
5, invention has relation to bale - band 
from the clamp N the bale-tie M is provided 
tighteners; and it consists in the construction 
with round holes P, which the pike D enters. 
and novel arrangement of parts, as Will be 
This part of the tie rests on top of the bale. 
hereinafter fully described, and particularly 
The portion of the tie having the slots Qrests 
pointed out in the claim. 
against the vertical side of the bale, and the 
In the drawings, Figure 1.is a view in per 
hook of the hook-arm L enters the proper 
spective of a bale-band tightener embodying 
slot Q, and the operater lifts up on the lever 
my improvements. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of 
and draws the bale-tie M. tightly around the 
the bale-tie, showing the round holes and elon 
bale. The clamp N prevents the tie from 
gated slots which the hooks of the bale-band 
slipping back by leason of the expansive 
tightener engage when the device is operated 
force of the material, causing the material to 
to tighten the bale-band; and Fig. 3 is a view 
bear outwardly against the tie and clamp and 
in perspective of a bale and bale-band, show 
ing the band-tightener in position to tighten 
to bind the parts tightly. 
I am aware of the patent to McComb, Oc 
the bale-band. 
tober 23, 1S66, No. 59,151, and would have 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
it understood that I do not seek to claim any 
drawings, A. designates the handle or lever of 
thing shown therein, as it is the object of my 
the band-tightener, which in practice should 
invention to improve on the arrangement 
be about four feet long, in order to insure Suf 
shown in the aforesaid patent. 
ficient leverage to enable one man to operate 
The device patented by McComb consisted 
the device with ease in tightening the bale 
of a hand-lever having its end pivoted to en 
bands. This lever A is made of strong wood, 
gage the holes in one end of the bale-band, 
and is preferably rectangular in cross-section 
and a hook-arm journaled at one end to a side 
throughout the portion H, to which the pike 
projection of the lever, and having its other 
B and hinged hook-arm C are secured, and is 
end engaging with the holes in the opposite 
round throughout the remaining portion of 
extremity of the bale-band. In practice this 
its length to permit the operator to conven 
has been found objectionable in many respects. 
iently grip and operate it. The pike B has 
In making the pointed end of the hand 
the downwardly-projecting point E, and has 
lever it is necessary to construct this end of 
a threaded angle-arm, F, at its other end, 
iron and make it detachable, or construct the 
which is bent in a direction directly opposite 
whole thing in one piece of iron, as wood or 
to the point E, and is passed up through a 
like material is out of the question. A heavy 
hole, G, a short distance from the end H of 
iron band-lever would require extra effort in 
the lever A, and is secured in place by a nut, 
tightening the bale, and, besides, would be 
I, screwed down upon the threaded project 
highly objectionable, especially in cold weath 
ing end of the angle-arm F and bears upon 
er. I avoid these objections by constructing 
the face of the rectangular portion. The 
the handle of stout oak wood, with the pike 
point or dog E projects slightly beyond the 
secured in place in the manner shown, so as 
rounded or curved end of the portion E. A. 
short distance from the threaded angle-arm F to be detachable in case the handle or pike 
... 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
So an eyebolt, J, is passed up through the rect- becomes broken. 
5 
IO 
25 
- 45 
 
312,704 
O 
Another necessary feature of my invention, 
resulting from the construction of the handle 
of wood, is the manner of securing the hook 
arm by means of the eyebolt. By means of this 
construction the hook-arm is fitted securely 
to the lever, has a universal movement, and 
cannot possibly get out of Order. The man 
ner of connection on a line with the pike, and 
the whole device drawing in a commonstraight 
line, prevents slipping, and enables the oper 
ator to hold the band tight while adjusting it 
in the buckle or tie. Again, the detachability 
of the parts enables the owner, in case the 
hand-lever becomes broken, to apply the 
parts to a new one with ease, thereby saving 
the additional cost. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
As an improvementin bale-band tighteners, 
the combination, with the handle or lever A, 
of the pike B, provided with an arm, F, Se 
cured within the lever, the eyebolt J, also 
fitted in the lever in rear of the arm, and the 
hook-arm C, interlocked with the eye of the 
bolt, arranged and operating so that the hook 
arm and pike will draw the band on a Com 
monstraight line, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
STEVEN IAEAYET CARPINTER, 
Witnesses: 
T. B. ALLEN, 
I. H. SMITH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312806.txt	(No Model.) 
W., BRUEN & S. A. WALL 
COMBINED DOOR SPRING AND BELL. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 312,806. 
Patented Feb. 24, 1885, 
first 
 
/zz Z/z/or 
A. 
26%. 2% 6 Z 73%ae. 
zz24 (4624, 42. 
N, pete Rs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 312,806. 
W. BRUEN & S. A. WALL. 
COMBINED DOOR SPRING AND BELL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No 
-l 
Patented Feb. 24, 1885, 
sye arw 
A. Z. 
A ZO. M. 
N 
 
  
 
III. A, 4: 3. 
N 
- 
- 
N - - - 
N 
-h. 
<RN stra art ITTTIrassasssssssssan 
Ag: 6. 
- - 
As 
 
  
ea 
M 2z 
A74 re 2 (or, 
Ysz W2A 6 &/ 47%zz - 
764-27% s/22% 62, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. O. C. 
N 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
N 
WILLIAM BRUEN AND STEPHEN A. 
WALL OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
COV B N E O DOOR SPRNG AND BE . 
SiFCIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 312,806, dated icebruary 24, 1885. 
Application filed March 10, 1884. (No model) 
EO 
3O 
35 
55 
. 
To all tufton, it notif concern: 
tached to a holder upon the door. Upon the 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM BRUEN and spindle of the spring-box, above the spring, 
STEPHEN A. WALL, citizens of the United are mounted a gong, G, and a hammer, H, 
States, residing in Newark, Essex county, New 
and the latter is actuated by tappets F, at 
Jersey, have invented certain new and use 
tached to the spring-box and operating to en 
ful Improvements in a combined Door Spring 
gage the hammer-arm as the spring-box is ro 
and Bell, fully described and represented in 
tated by the opening of the door D. 
the following specification and the accompa 
B is the spring-box, constructed of two 
nying drawings, forming a part of the same. 
heads, B, and cylindrical shell B, the latter 
being constructed with lugs l, to engage holes 
This invention consists in the combination, 
with the cylindrical box of a door-spring and 
h, formed in one of the heads, and the heads 
a flexible connection from the door thereto, of 
being provided with round studs s, to enter 
an alarm-bell and hammer mounted upon tine 
the eye , usually formed in the Outer end of 
spindle of the spring-box, and actuated, when 
such coiled springs as are shown at I in Fig. 
the door is opened, by tappets rotating with 
7. The blacket A is provided with a foot to 
secure it to the door or frame, as may be pre 
the spring-box. 
It also consists in the construction of the 
ferred, and is constructed with a vertically 
projecting spindle A", the spring-box being 
spring-box and the limeans for attaching the 
spring thereto; and, fourthly, in the combi 
fitted to its lower part, the hammer just above 
it, and the gong at the top. The spring is se 
nation, with the door spring and bell mounted 
upon the same spindle, of a bell-pull actu 
cured to the spindle by its inner eye, Fig. 7, 
and to the spring-box by the studs S, formed 
ated by a knob outside of the door. The con 
struction will be understood by reference to 
upon the heads B, and the cord t being at 
the annexed drawings, in which 
tached to the box-shell B in any convenient 
Figure 1 is a front view of part of a door 
manner by one end, and to the door or frame 
and frame having my combined door-spring 
by the other end, the spring is wound up 
and alarm attached thereto. Fig. 2 is a plan 
when the door is opened, as in many previous 
of the same with the bell removed, the latter 
Constructions. 
being shown in Fig. 1 as a gong secured at the 
For attaching the cord to the door or frame 
top of the spring-box spindle, which box is 
we have devised an adjustable holder consist 
thus exposed by the removal of the gong. 
ing in an arm or post, P, fitted to a bracket-bal', 
Fig. 3 is a plan of the spring-box and bell 
Q, which is provided with a foot for attaching 
hammer when the latter is retracted by the 
it where required. The bar Q is of triangular 
rotation of the former. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are 
form, or formed with an acute upper edge, so 
that the post P may slide freely upon and be 
Sectional views, taken at their center line, of 
the three parts composing the spring-box. 
clamped firmly thereto by a set-screw, P, ap 
Fig. 7 is a plan of the lower head and part of 
plied to the bar at the side opposite the acute 
the spring-box cylinder. Fig. 8 is a front 
upper edge. The cordt, being attached to the 
view of the parts shown in Fig. 3, with a sec 
head of the movable piece P, may be drawn 
more or less tightly by adjusting the post upon 
tion of the bell applied to the spindle of the 
Spring-box; and Fig. 9 is an elevation of a 
the bar Q. The hammer His sustained above 
door and frame provided with the combined 
the box B, and vibrated by means of tappets 
door-spring and alarm, and a bell-pull for 
FF, attached to the upper head of the box. 
As such tappets must automatically release the 
actuating the alarm from the outside of the 
door, the inner end only of the bell-pull being 
hammer if propelled by a spring against the 
gong, as shown in the drawings, I mount the 
shown. 
In the drawings the door-spring represented 
hammer upon a pivot located eccentrically to 
consists in a flat spiral spring mounted, with 
the spring-box, so that the path of the tappets 
its inclosing-box, upon a bracket, A, secured 
may intersect the hammer-arm for only a given 
to the door-frame, and actuated by a cord at 
distance. The fulcrum of the hammer is there 
90 
95 
ICO 
312,806 
25 
5 
IO 
fore preferably mounted upon a crank, b, se 
cured rigidly to the spindle B, the latter be 
pries squared at such point, as well as inside the 
gong, to prevent both from turning, as shown 
in Figs: 3 and 8. The hammer is fitted loose 
ly to the fulcrum-pin c, and is provided with 
a tail-piece, H', which projects upon the op 
posite side of the fulcrum, and extends across 
the path of the tappets F. The tail of the 
hammer thus moves in the arc indicated by 
the dotted liney y in Figs. 2 and 3, and slips 
off of the tappets after moving the required 
distance. A spring, d, is secured to the spin 
dle above the crank b, and operates to throw 
the hammer against the gong, the latter being 
indicated by the dotted curves y y in Figs. 2 
and 3. The tappets are shown as two projec 
tions formed on the top of the spring-box, near 
its periphery, and shaped with sloping face at 
oneside to clear the tail H when rotating back 
ward, the tail H" being provided with a hinged 
latch, e, at its extremity, as is usual with the 
hammers of such alarm-bells, to allow the act 
uator to pass when retracted. 
By the construction described the hammer 
is actuated twice for each rotation of the spring 
box, and a much more effective alarm pro 
duced than by the use of a single-acting trip 
To utilize the gong to sound an alarm before 
the door may be opened, the hammer may be 
provided with a tail-piece, H, and a bell-pull 
attached to the door or frame in the usual man 
ner may be readily connected therewith by 
means of a guide-pulley or bell-crank located 
over the hinges of the door, as shown in Fig. 9. 
The tail-piece. His shown in Fig. 2, and the 
wire connected with it is shown at f in Figs. 
2 and 9. In the latter figure, in represents the 
bell-crank frame, usually provided at the in 
ner end of a door-frame bell-pull, the knob in 
being merely indicated by dotted lines as be 
ing upon the opposite side of the frame, and 
m represents a bell-crank arranged on a line 
with the door-hinges o 0, so that the tension 
of the wires f is not changed by the opening 
of the door. The wires f being slack until 
pulled, the connection described does not in 
terfere with the action of the hammer when 
operated by the tappets. The gong G may 
thus be made to serve as an alarm in two dif 
ferent capacities, being operated either by 
gOng. 
35 
45 
- 
55 
65 
75 
85 
hand or by the door-spring movement, as may 
be required. 
We are aware that a spring-box and gong 
have been combinedinburglar-alarms, and do 
not therefore claim such a combination broad 
ly; but we are not aware that any hammer has 
been pivoted upon a spring-spindle in the 
Same manner as ours, or that the combined 
spring-box and gong have ever been applied 
to a door, so as to operate automatically with 
two distinct functions-namely, to sound an 
alarm when the door is opened, and to close 
the door when released by the person entering; 
and our invention therefore accomplishes what 
no previous construction has effected. 
We are also aware that alarm-bells actuated 
by a tripping-piece upon a moving door are 
not new, and do not therefore claim the same, 
except in combination, broadly, with a rotat 
ing spring-box to actuate the hammer, sub 
stantially as set forth herein. 
We claim 
1. The combination, with the spindle car 
rying the gong and rotating spring-box, of the 
ammer pivoted eccentrically to the gong, and 
the tappet upon the spring-box to operate the 
hammer, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. The spring-box consisting of the cylin 
drical shell constructed with lugs to fit holes 
in one of the heads, and the heads provided 
with the holes for the cylinder-lugs, and with 
studs to fit the outer eye of the spring, sub 
stantially as herein shown and described. 
3. The combination, with a door - spring 
bracket, of a spindle carrying a rotating spring 
box adapted to close the door by means of suit 
able connections, a bell or gong mounted upon 
said spindle, a hammer actuated by tappets 
upon the spring-box when the latter is rotated, 
and a connection between the hammer and a 
bell-pull upon the door or frame, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
- 
WILLIAM BRUEN. 
STEPHEN A. WALL. 
Witnesses: 
C. C. HERRICK, 
THOS. S. CRANE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US312906.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
. 
No. 312,906. 
E. SCHR, ABETZ. 
GAS GOVERNOR FOR GAS ENGINES, 
Patented Feb. 24, 1885. 
Oahuase? 
Sekov & Carta. 
cover 
6:0 9-hole-3 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMIL SCHRABETZ, OF VIENNA, AUSTRIA-HUNGARY. 
GAS - GOVERNOR FOR GAS - ENGINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 312,906, dated February 24, 1885. 
Application filed June 2, 1884. (No model.) Patented in Belgium May 16, 1884, No. 65,171; it England May 17, 1884, No. 7,875; in 
France May 17, 1884, No. 162, 192; in Germany May 17, 1884, No. 29,62s; in Austria-Hungary September 13, 1884, No. 30.5S0 
and No. 41,376, and in Italy September 30, 1884, XVIII, 17,209. 
. 
To all, whon, it in-?ty conce7n. 
Be it known that I, EMIL SCHRABETZ, a sub 
ject of the Emperor of Austria-Hungary, and a 
resident of Vienna, in the Empire of Austria 
Eungary, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Gas-Governors for Gas-En 
gines, of which the following is a specification. 
The object of the present invention is to 
counteract the influence of the irregular con 
Sumption of gas in gas motors upon the gas 
pressure in the gas-main pipe, which manifests 
itself in a flickering of the flames fed from the 
maln plpe. 
The apparatus forming the subject of the pres 
ent invention is intended to be interposed in 
the main pipe leading to the gas-motor; and 
it consists of a light gas-holder, a, Figure 1, 
preferably a cylinder with vertical sides float 
ing in a liquid. The gas enters from the main 
through a pipe, b, below the holder, and passes 
off to the gas-engine through a pipe, c. The 
holder is Weighted in such a manner that the 
gas in the Same is under a lower pressure than 
the lowest pressure in the feed-main. An es 
Sential feature is that the vertical sides of the 
holder are thin, and that their lower edges are 
sharp and cutting. When the engine draws 
gas through the pipec, the holder a will sink, 
and as, owing to its sides being thin and cut. 
ting, it displaces only a very small quantity 
of liquid, and has only a very small resistance 
to overcome, this movement takes place with 
out any perceptible variation of the pressure 
in the holder, and therefore the gas enters the 
holder through the pipe b during the suction 
under unaltered conditions. Thus the flick 
ering of the flames fed by the pipe b or the 
connecting main pipe is prevented. The 
holder a sinks rapidly at each filling of the 
working-cylinder of the engine, and rises slowly 
until the next filling is taken from the holder. 
Hitherto in governing the speed of gas-en 
gines generally one of the two following meth 
ods was used. According to one method, the 
proportionate quantity of gas in each charge 
was varied as required. According to another 
method, some of the charges of the cylinder 
were made without any admixture of gas, and 
Such charges are known under the name of 
dead charges. 
In using the apparatus forming the subject 
of the present invention, the amount of gas 
remaining unconsumed in the above-described 
method of charging will gradually accumulate 
in and lift the gas-holder a. The holder can 
of course only have a limiteil play. When 
the holder assumes the highest position and is 
then stopped, the pressure would increase in 
the holder and diminish on the next charge 
being taken therefrom. The flames must then 
necessarily flicker. In this highest position, 
moreover, there would be no room for any 
spared gas, and the holder must then play in 
its highest position, and thus cause repeated 
flickering. To prevent this I regulate the 
feeding of the gas by any suitable construction 
of check-valve or trap or cock, or similar de 
vice. This cut-off with variable opening I 
combine with any suitable construction of gear 
actuated by the holder, so that while the holder 
is rising the feeding will diminish, and will be 
entirely stopped just before the holder assumes 
its highest position. When, on the contrary, 
the holder goes down in consequence of the 
admission of gas being too slow, the cut-off 75 
device will be gradually opened. 
The connection of the holder with the valve 
must be such that the continuous rising or sink 
ing of the holder produces the above-described 
effect, but that the oscillations of the holder 
produced by a single charge of the working 
cylinder of the engine will not actuate the cut 
off valve when the admission and the con 
sumption of gas are equal. 
In order to obviate the necessity of regulat 
ing at each dead charge, I increase the dead 
play of the gear actuated by the holder, so 
that the holder can rise more, and so that the 
regulation takes place in variable intervals, 
according to the irregularity of the Working 
of the engine. Hitherto in using the Ordinary 
governors with rubber bellows each dead 
charge changed the pressure in the conduit. 
Fig. 1 shows a suitable form of apparatus 
constructed according to the present inven 
tion. A rod, e, extends downward through 
the tube d, which also serves as a guide 
for the holder. This rode is provided at its 
lower end with stops f and g. In the feed 
pipe b a throttle-valve, h, is provided, which 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
50 
b 
312,906 
is connected with the lever i, the other end of 
which is situated between the stops f and g. 
The operation of this device is quite clear 
from what has been said above. The distance 
between the stops f and gallows a free play to 
the holder within certain limits without af. 
fecting the throttle. 
As the downward motion of the holder is 
very rapid, I prefer to provide the lever it at 
O its end engaging with the stops with suitable 
sliding surfaces, in order to open the throttle 
only slowly, especially when the holder is near 
its highest position. A stop between the 
prongs of a bifurcated lever may also be em 
ployed. 
It is advantageous to provide the lever i 
with more than two prongs working together, 
with a corresponding number of stops, where 
by something like a rack-and-pinion gear is 
obtained. By suitably forming the sliding 
surfaces or cams on the lever i it is possible 
to cause the throttle to be actuated at will in 
any position of the gas-holder. Fig. 2 shows 
such an arrangement with two prongs and 
three stops, wherein one stop is worked upon 
after the other. 
I have described my invention referring to 
the arrangement shown in Figs. L and 2, in 
which the driving mechanism is connected 
centrally with lever and throttle, because this 
is the simplest and most advantageous; but I 
may equally well arrange the apparatus in 
such a way that the gas-holder drives the gear 
from any other point, and I may equally well 
employ any known mechanism for communi 
cating motion to the valve. 
25 
35 
From the above description it is very easy 
for any competent engineer to substitute a 
valve, or sliding valve, or any equivalent 
mechanism for the throttle. 
The holder may be provided with a coun 
terbalancing-weight. 
When the consumption of gas is great, I 
feed the gas to the engine through a number 
of apparatus placed side by side, or I use one 
or more larger apparatus, which, being of 
stronger construction, have a less easy play, 
and then connect the said larger apparatus 
with a small one, which compensates the small 
variations of pressure left by the large appa 
ratus. The pressure in the small apparatus 
should be greater than that in the large ap 
paratus. 
I may arrange a set of apparatus in the 
course of the main pipe, one behind the other. 
I prefer, however, the connection shown in 
Fig. 3. 
Feed-regulators for the large apparatus A 
and B may be dispensed with, although their 
use is preferred. 
I claim 
An apparatus consisting of a floating gas 
holder with thin vertical sides, in combination 
with a gas-feed regulator which within certain 
limits allows a free play of the holder, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
EMIL SCHRABETZ. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
C. O. PAGET, 
E. G. J. MOELLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313007.txt	(No Model.) 
M. N. LYNN. 
WALWE GEAR FOR STEAM ENGINES, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 313,007. 
Patented Feb. 24, 1885, 
 
WZZpa esses 
r 
Zee weze-Zaz. 
. 
. 
\ 
- 
1. 
\ 
(No Model.) 
No. 313,007. 
M. N. LYNN. 
a sheet-sheet 2. 
WALWE GEAR FOR STEAM. ENGINES, 
Patented Feb. 24, 1885. 
N 
 
s 
s 
N 
n 
Y A A. V. M. 
N 
N NS is 
Y 
SS N 
S 
R 
IN 
Hillso 
Sl 
N 
S 
- 
s 
.N. 
-er T - 
S 
s 
  
 
 
 
.S. N s 
s N 
Iis i 
III, 25 
3. IT IT 
III, 
HEEEEEEEEEEE2HETH 2. 
 
  
 
W262aesses 
ea 25 /34 
%20-%24-le? 
 
Azaleza Zoz 
(0t 
(blue-a-?ea 
fr2%-4 
(No Model.) 
M. N. LYNN. 
WALWE GEAR FOR STEAM. ENGINES. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, . 
No. 313,007. 
Patented Feb. 24, 1885. 
 
We Zee esses. 
6.6%-4- 
(No Model.) 
No. 313,007, 
M. N. LYNN, 
VALVE GEAR FOR STEAM. ENGINES, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Feb. 24, 1885, 
 
y 
a Ilia 
H IIH N 
HI HETH 
INEI. 
EEE7 B 2EEME 
N 
a '98: 8 
SESseries Z 
 
f 
 
 
22 % 2|| 
 
 
&es 
R 
WZZezesses 
A ve 22 Zez 
... pers. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, f. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MIRABEAU. N. LYNN, OF RISING SUN, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTs, 
TO THE AMERICAN ELECTRIC HEADLIGHT COMPANY, OF INDIANAPOLIS, 
INDIANA 
WAVE - GEAR FOR STEAM - ENGINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent INo. 313,007, dated February 24, 1885. 
Application filed April 10, 1884. 
(No model) : 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MIRABEAU.N. LYNN, of 
Rising Sun, in the county of Ohio and State 
of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Valve-Gear for Steam 
Engines; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this speci 
to fication, and to the figures and letters of ref 
erence marked thereon. 
My invention has for its object to provide a 
powerful engine capable of being run at a high 
rate of speed with the consumption of a mini 
15 mum amount of steam; and to this end it con 
sists in the novel construction of an engine of 
the three-cylinder type, which will be herein 
after fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings of my en 
2O gine, Figure 1 represents a transverse section 
al elevation. Fig. 2 is alongitudinal sectional 
elevation; Fig. 2", a detail view of a modifica 
tion of the speeding-up gearing; Fig. 3, a trans 
verse section on the line 11, Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a 
25 transverse section on the line 22, Fig. 2; Fig. 
5, a transverse section on the line 33, Fig. 2; 
Fig. 6, a transverse section on the line 4 4, 
Fig. 2; Fig. 7, a transverse section on the line 
55, Fig. 2; Fig. 8, a detail view showing a 
30 modification of the exterior bearing of the en 
gine-shaft; Fig. 9, a detail view showing the 
relative positions of the fixed and movable 
Figs. 10 and 
eccentrics of the valve-gearing. 
11 are viewsillustrating a form of compensat 
35 ing-spring adapted to be applied to weighted 
arms of the cut-off regulator. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures indicate the same parts. 
The letter A indicates the main shaft of the 
4o engine, supported S0 as to freely revolve in an 
inner fixed bearing, B, provided within the 
main casing C and in an outer sleeve-bearing, 
D, sustained by a standard, E, as shown. 
Keyed to the inner end of the main shaft A 
45 is a weighted crank arm or block, F, provided 
with a crank-Wrist, G, as shown in Fig. 1. 
This wrist projects through an opening, h, ar 
ranged about centrally of a yoke or frame, H, 
and to the latter are connected the pitmen or 
connecting-rods IJ K of three pistons, I'J'K, 5o 
working in three independent cylinders, I'J' 
K", respectively, as also shown in Fig. 1. A 
series of friction-rollers, h., three or more in 
number, suitably mounted between the two 
plates of which the yoke or frame H is com- 55 
posed, and projecting into the opening h, 
through which the crank-wrist passes, serve 
as the bearings of the yoke upon the Wrist. 
The inner end of the pitman I is firmly se 
cured to the yoke H, preferably by a screw-6o 
connection, while its outer end is joined to the 
piston I, being secured by means of a strap, 
i, and adjusting-wedges i', as shown. 
By reason of the yoke being fixed to the in 
ner end of the pitman I, the latter operates to 65 
prevent it from turning laterally, and always 
insures the proper relation of its friction-bear 
ings with respect to the crank-wrist. The pit 
man J is not only jointed to its piston, but is 
also jointed at its inner end to the yoke, and 7O 
the same is true of the pitman K. I prefer to 
form the jointed connections of these two last 
named pitmen by concaving both ends of each 
of the rods and fitting them to cross-bolts upon 
the piston and yoke, respectively, and then 75 
applying a separate strap, k, around each of 
the bolts and bringing both of the straps to 
gether and securing them by screw-bolts lch, 
or other suitable means. This construction is 
found very desirable, as it enables both of the 80 
bearings of each pitman to be simultaneously 
tightened or loosened by a manipulation of the 
screw-bolts, and to maintain their positions of 
adjustment until, from wear of the parts or oth 
er cause, it becomes necessary to change them. 85 
The several pistons are properly packed, so 
as to closely fit their respective cylinders. 
Adjoining each piston-cylinder is arranged a 
valve-cylinder, L, having at its upper end a 
port or passage, l, leading directly to the boiler 9o 
or source of steam-supply, and having also be 
low the port l a series of other passages, l, all 
communicating With an annular passage, l, 
which in turn communicates with the upper end 
of the adjoining piston-cylinder by a port or 95 
passage, l'. Each of the valves L is connected 
to a rod or stem, M, which is centered by, but 
works freely through, a guide N, arranged at 
- 
 
313,007 
-- 
O 
25 
35 
-5 
55 
into the main casing C, lubricating all the 
the lower end of the valve-cylinder, as shown, 
but offering no material obstruction to the parts located therein, and finally escaping 
through a passage, C, as shown in Fig. 2. The 
passage of the exhaust-steam out through the 
arrangement of the valves is such that there 
said lower end of the valve-cylinder, as will 
is always an inward pressure of steam upon 
be further on explained. Each valve-rod is 
them, which causes the rollers upon the inner 
provided at its inner end with a friction-roll 
ends of their stems to bear at all times uni 
er, O, which bears upon two eccentrics, Q and 
formly upon the operating-eccentrics, and to 
R, on the main engine-shaft A, as shown in 
runsmoothly and evenly thereon without noise 
Figs. 2 and 9. The eccentric Q is keyed rig 
or jarring. 
idly to the shaft A, and always sustains the 
A clear idea of the action of the three pis 
sane relation to it; but the eccentric R, though 
tons in co-operatively giving motion to the 
conforming in slope to the eccentric Q, and 
main engine-shaft may be gathered from in 
normally arranged to exactly coincide with it 
spection of Fig. 1. Here the piston I in cyl 
in position, is keyed to a sleeve, S, mounted 
inder I is just commencing to take steam, the 
loosely upon the shaft, said sleeve having 
piston J in cylinder J is operating under full 
formed with it or secured to it a pinion, P, 
steam-pressure, while the piston K' in cylin 
with which engage two gear - sections, TT, 
der K has just completed its inward move 
secured, respectively, to the inner ends of two 
ment and is moving Outward, the exhaust 
independent shafts, f f, which have bearings 
steam passing out in front of it. During the 
in opposite ends of a cross-bar, T', secured 
entire operation of the engine the whole power 
rigidly to the shaft Aby a screw, f', as shown 
in Fig. 2, or otherwise. Upon the opposite 
of one piston and more or less than a half of 
the power of one of the other pistons under 
end of each of the shafts f is secured a curved 
full boiler-pressure is exerted upon the main 
arm, f, which carries at its outer end a weight, 
shaft, giving the latter very rapid and power 
f". Each of the curved arms f is so shaped as 
ful rotation. 
to extend from if Spoint of connection with the 
While the engine is running at a normal rate 
shaft t around and to the opposite side of the 
of speed, the weighted arms ff', under the 
main shaft A, so that the weight carried by 
influence of the springs ff, remain in sub 
it will stand in a position exactly opposite to 
stantially the position shown in Figs. 3 and 
the weight carried by the other curved arm, 
4, and both eccentrics Q and R operate uni 
one of the Weights being provided with a 
formly and together upon the valve-stems and 
curved slot, f, to accommodate the shaft f of 
effect the periodic opening and closing of the 
the opposite curved arm, as shown clearly in 
valves. When, however, the speed of the en 
Figs. 3 and 4. A spiral spring, f, is secured 
gine is increased above the normal rate, the 
at one end to each of the curved arms.f, and 
centrifugal force of the weighted arms over 
at the opposite end to the fixed cross-bar T, 
comes the tension of the actuating-springs and 
for the purpose of operating to normally hold 
the arms and the Weight in the position shown 
causes the arms to be thrown outward, and the 
shafts ff, upon which they are mounted, to 
in Figs. 3 and 4. 
turn in their bearings. As the shafts.ff turn, 
The pistons and connecting-rods of the sev 
the gear-sectors T, connected to them, are also 
eral cylinders are so adjusted with relation 
turned, and, operating upon the pinion P of 
to the yoke or frame H, by which power is 
the sleeve S, cause the sleeve and the attached 
applied to the Crank on the main shaft, and 
cann R to be moved more or less out of center 
also with relation to the valves, valve-rods, 
with the fixed can Q, so as to bring said mov 
and operating-eccentrics, that, when one cyl 
able cann R into position to more or less quick 
inder begins to take steam, the second cylin 
der will be working under full steam-pressure, 
ly return the valves into position to close the 
while the third cylinder will be exhausting. 
ports C, after the steam has been admitted 
through said ports to the respective piston 
When either of the cylinders is taking steam, 
cylinders, and keep said ports closed, while 
the valve in the corresponding valve-cylinder 
the steam in the piston-cylinders is operating 
is drawn in Ward, SO as to permit the steam to 
upon the pistons by its expansive force only. 
enter the inlet-port l under full boiler-press 
ure and pass directly through the passages l' 
In this way the movable eccentric and its 
ll into the cylinder, and there operate upon 
connections are made instrumental in regulat 
ing and governing the speed of the engine, as 
the piston with full force, the motion of the 
The diagram, . 
piston being transferred, through the pitman, 
well as in economizing Steam. 
Fig. 9, will serve to illustrate this feature of my 
connecting-yoke, and crank, to the main en 
gime-shaft A and causing the rotation of the 
invention more clearly. The fixed eccentric is 
represented in full lines and the movable eccen 
latter. As the piston of either cylinder nears 
tric in dotted lines. Of the three valves shown, 
the end of its stroke, the fixed cam Q on the 
let the one marked M represent the valve to be 
main shaft, operating upon the roller on the 
operated upon. While the engine is running 
inner end of the appropriate valve-stem, causes 
at a normal rate of Speed, the fixed eccentric 
the valve to be thrust out till it passes the 
portst, thus cutting off the steam from the cyl 
will cause the valve M to admit steam into the 
cylinder when the point a of the eccentric is 
inder and permitting that remaining in the 
cylinder to exhaust out through the passages 
under the valve - Stein, and to commence the 
land i and through the open valve-cylinder exhaust when the point e is under Said stem, 
95 
OO 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
-- 
33,007 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
- 
Upon the speed of the engine being increased, completely automatic manner, and saving 
much time and special attention on the part 
however, the shifting of the movable eccentric 
of the engineer. 
into the position represented by the dotted 
Instead of locating the pinion V and gear 
lines will obviously cause the movement of 
wheel V' outside of the casing, as shown in 
the Valve in the direction of the exhaust to 
Fig. 2, I, by preference, arrange them both, 
be accelerated up to point where the valve 
as well as the pinion V', within the casing, as 
covers the ports leading from the piston-cyl 
shown in Fig. 2", so that all of the gears may 
inder, where the valve will retard till the 
have the advantage of the lubricating and 
steam in the cylinder shall have had time to 
noise-deadening effects due to their operation 
operate upon the piston by expansion, and 
in the exhaust-steam of the engine. 
then the exhaust-movement will be continued 
The power of the engine may be applied 
until the exhaust-ports are wholly opened by 
through the instrumentality of a pulley fixed 
the fixed eccentric. 
to the tubular shaft V, and utilized for any de 
In place of the spiral spring f, I may, and 
sired purpose; but, as I have especially de 
preferably do, employ a compensating-spring 
signed my engine for the driving of a dynamo 
arrangement, such as shown in Figs. 10 and 
electric machine, it is perhaps best adapted 
11. To provide such, the cross-bar Tis formed 
for that use, the armature of the dynamo being 
with an elongated hub, T, which extends along 
mounted upon, SO as to turn with, the hollow 
the main shaft under the weighted arms ff. 
Opposite each of said weighted arms the said 
shaft W. 
In order to get the best effects from a dyna 
hub is provided with short lugs TT, and to 
mo-machine, it is necessary that it be run at 
each of these lugs is connected a small spiral 
an exceedingly high velocity, and, from the 
ly-grooved conical pulley, T, connected at one 
difficulty experienced in getting an engine that 
end to a helical spring, T, the other end of 
could run with speed enough to perform the 
the said spring being fixed to the lug. A 
work required, all atten pts at direct applica 
chain, T, is fastened to the longest end of 
tion of steam-engines to dynamos have hith 
the pulley, and extends thence to the weight 
erto been unsuccessful. 
on the arm f", which is opposite. 
When the 
All these things I have had in view in the 
weighted arms are in their normal positions, 
production of my invention; and to that end I 
the chains T are wound up on their respect 
have so balanced and inclosed the operative 
ive spiral pulleys, from the larger to the 
parts of the machinery, and provided for the 
Sinaller part of Said pulleys, by the action of 
using steam at nearly or quite boiler temper 
the helical springs; but, as the weighted arms 
ature, as to enable the main shaft A to be given 
are thrown out by centrifugal force, the chains 
are unwound, and, as the unwinding proceeds, 
a normal rotation of about six hundred turns 
per minute; and then I have so geared up the 
the leverage exerted by the chains on the 
tubular shaft upon which the armature of the 
larger parts of the pulleys overcomes the ten 
dynamo is to be mounted as to impart to the 
sion of the helical springs to such an extent 
latter about twelve hundred revolutions a 
as to diminish the resistance to the outward 
minute, and have thus, I think, succeeded in 
throw of the arms in proportion to the extent 
making a practical improvement in the art of 
of such throw, and thus render the contriv 
electric lighting. 
ance more sensitive than if there were a direct 
I intend, among other applications of my 
application of simple springs which increased 
engine, to mount it and its accompanying dy 
in force as they were stretched. 
namo upon the boiler of a railway-locomotive 
Rigidly keyed to the main shaft A within 
for train-lighting, taking steam directly from 
the casing C is a gear-wheel, W, with which 
the locomotive-boiler. 
meshes a pinion, V", fixed to a short shaft, 
No special attention is to be given to the en 
V", having its bearings in the casing C. On 
gine after once being set up and adjusted, the 
the outer end of the shaft V* is fixed al 
engineer being able to start or stop it by simply 
other pinion, V", which meshes with a gear 
turning on Ol' off the Steam-supply from hi 
wheel, V", secured to a tubular shaft or sleeve, 
position in the cab. 
V. This tubular shaft V is provided at its 
In order to decrease friction in the outer 
inner end with three (more or less) frictional 
bearings of the main and tubular shafts, I pref. 
rollers, V", which bear upon the main shaft A, 
erably, in lieu of the construction shown in 
and serve as well to center as to support the 
Fig. 2, employ that shown in Fig. 5, wherein 
inner end of Said tubular shaft, while at its 
the main shaft is given a separate bearing in 
outer end said tubular shaft has connected to 
the standard E, and the tubular shaft is pro 
it the cap or bearing D, before referred to as 
vided with friction-rollers, which bear upon 
constituting the outer sleeve-bearing of the 
the main shaft, the same as at the inner end of 
main shaft. The exhaust steam, carrying, as 
the said tubular shaft, as before described. 
it does, in the form of vapor, the lubricating 
The combination and arrangement of the 
oil fed in with the steam-supply, is discharged 
crank operating mechanism, driving-gears, 
into the casing C, and, having access to all the 
cyli.ders, alld nain Casing, as shown and de 
operative parts of the machinery therein lo 
scribed, form the subject-matter of a prior ap 
cated, keeps them, as well as the bearings be 
plication, filed January 10, 1884, No. 117,018, 
tween the main shaft and tubular shaft, all 
of which this application is a division, and 
the time thoroughly lubricated in the most 
65 
7o - 
75 
95 
OO 
Io5 
IO 
I 25 
4 
313,007 
such matters are therefore herein disclaimed, ports, and the weighted arms, substantially as 
the present invention appertaining to the described. 
3. The connbination of the gear-sectors, their 
valve-operating mechanism only. 
shafts and shaft-supports, and the curved arm, 
I claim as my invention 
and weights, one of said weights being slotted 
1. The combination, with the valves, of the 
to accommodate one of the gear-sector shafts, 
eccentric fixed to the main shaft, the movable 
eccentric, and means for changing the position substantially as described. 
of the movable eccentric when the speed of the 
4. The combination of the gear-sectors, their 
unain shaft increases above the normal rate, so shafts and sluaft-supports, the weighted arms, 
Io as to move said eccentric to operate independ- and the grooved conical pulley, spring, and 
ently upon the valves and cause them to cut chain, constituting a means for decreasing the 
off the steam in the cylinders and allow it to resistance offered to the outward movement of 3O 
work by expansion only, substantially in the the weighted arms in proportion to the extent 
of such outward movement, substantially as 
manner described. 
valve-rod, of the movable eccentric mounted 
MIRA.BEAU. N. LYNN. 
on the sleeve, the pinion on the sleeve, the 
gear-sectors and their shafts and shaft-sup- 
2. The combination, with the main sha?t and described. 
A. S. STEU ART, 
FRED F. CHURCHI, 
25, 
...A 
I5 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313107.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ILDO RAMSDELL OF ATLANTA, GEORGIA, 
PROCESS OF TREATING PAPER TO PRESERVE IT AGAINST THE CORROSIVE ACTION OF ACDS, 
SPECIFICATION fo-ming part of Letters Patent No. 313,107, dated March 3, 1885. 
Application filed July 19, 1884. (No specimens) 
5 
IC 
25 
35 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ILDO RAMSDELL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Atlanta, 
in the county of Fulton and State of Georgia, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
proved Process of Treating Paper to Preserve 
it against the Corrosive Action of Acids, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the process of treating paper to pre 
serve the cellulose and its integrity against the 
corrosive action of acids, and its object is to 
prepare paper sheets, blocks, or pads to be 
subsequently employed for lithographic or 
other transfer printing. 
It is well known in the art of lithographic 
printing that Water or acids will act as re 
pellents to greasy inks, and on this action 
have been based the various processes known 
for reproducing and printing from original 
drawings, designs, or characters, and for trans 
ferring such upon stone or other plates. 
The process heretofore employed of subject 
ing the original to the action of an acid which 
attacks the surface of the paper not protected 
by the inked lines of the design, and serves 
as a repellent to the ink in such places when 
the surface is rolled up, is well known; but 
a strong objection to its use and to its success 
ful employment in obtaining numerous and 
accurate copies has been the destructive ac 
tion of the acid upon the cellulose of the pa 
per, destroying its integrity and breaking down 
the lines from which the impressions are made. 
My invention is designed to obviate these 
objections; and to this end it consists, essen 
tially, in a process of treating paper sheets, 
blocks, or pads to preserve their cellulose and 
structural integrity against the action of cor 
rosive acids by treating it with glycerine or 
glycerine solutions preparatory to the trans 
fer of the design, drawing, or print, as more 
fully hereinafter described. 
The glycerine may be diluted with alcohol 6o 
In carrying out my invention I preferably 
take glycerine, one part, water, ten parts. 45 
These I mix thoroughly and apply to the pa 
per in any convenient manner-as, for in 
stance, by means of a brush or by floating the 
paper upon a bath of the solution until it is 
properly saturated with the solution. The 5o 
paper is then ready for the acid application, 
which may be applied in the usual or any ap 
proved manner. 
The proportions of glycerine and water 
above mentioned I have found to answer well 55 
in practice; but the proportions may be va 
ried indefinitely without departing from the 
spirit of my invention, which consists, essen 
tially, in treating the paper with glycerine. 
with good effect to allow the paper to more 
freely absorb the glycerine. 
When the paper is made into blocks or pads, 
the said blocks or pads are saturated with the 
solution in any convenient manner. 
The glycerine, while it affords positive pro 
tection to the cellulose of the paper, also tends 
to keep the paper damp or moist, which is ab 
solutely necessary in the subsequent transfer 
operation, thus affording an additional and 7O 
decided advantage to the paper as prepared 
by my process. 
I claim as my invention, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent 
The process of preparing paper to resist the 75 
action of corrosive acids, the same consisting 
in treating it with glycerine or glycerine so 
lutions, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
65 
ILDO RAMSDELL. 
Witnesses: 
E. L. WHITE, 
WMI. H. ROWE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313210.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 313,210. 
 
  
Z/ 
  
T. H. HULBERT, 
SELF CLOSING HATCHWAY. 
2 Sheets-Sheet , 
Patented Mar, 3.1885. 
  
 
Z/2ZZzeyyey, 
of 7%.2%-44. 
Zzzezzzzz. 
- 
(77.2 
6.4 dazz. 
prens. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 313,210. 
 
 
T. H. HULBERT, 
SELF CLOSING HATCHWAY, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar, 3, 1885. 
 
A. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS H. HULBERT, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA. 
SEF - CLOS ING HATCHWAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 313,210, dated March 3, 1885. 
Application filed June 20, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS H. HULBERT, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Minneapolis, Hennepin county, and State 
of Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Self-Closing Hatch 
Covers, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to that class of shafts 
or hatchways in which an elevator car or plat 
form ascends and descends, and in which the 
covers are operated by Said car, and is espe 
cially useful in preventing drafts of air, and 
spread of flame in case of fire, while at the 
same time, and during the active use of the 
elevator, the openings at the several floors are 
kept covered, avoiding loss of life by persons 
falling therein. I provide two flexible cov 
ers or aprons of fire-proof material fastened 
a slight distance under the edges of the floor, 
and reaching from opposite sides of the hatch 
way and meeting in the Center, and together 
covering the opening. TWO Strong tensional 
springs, attached to the forward edges of the 
covers, at the corners, draws them forcibly to 
gether, extended across the opening, but with 
liberty of moving back to allow the elevator 
car to pass. These flexible doors gradually 
droop or bag as the elevator approaches, and 
when it is passing they are completely looped 
or collapsed against the sides of the hatch 
way, occupying but little space, and after the 
elevator has passed they again gradually ex 
The mechanism by which I accomplish the 
easy opening of the covers, their retention 
against the sides, and easy closing again is 
comparatively simple and entirely automatic, 
and is operated by the elevator-carin its travel 
up or down the shaft. I provide four arms or 
levers slightly curved, preferably, and of suffi 
cient length, extending upward and back 
ward from and supporting the forward edges 
of each set of doors, and attached at their upper 
ends in proper bearings to the sides of the 
shaft. These levers are attached at their lower 
ends to two bars forming the front edges of 
their respective coversin reasonably accurate 
bearings, allowing the partial rotation neces 
say, but avoiding cramping by one portion of 
either door getting ahead of the other, I 
tend. 
m 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 75 
provide also a set of almost similar levers be 
low, but extending backward or in the oppo 
site direction. They are mounted at their 
lower ends on bearings at the sides of the 55 
shaft, but at their upper ends each embraces, 
with a fork or slot, the front edges of the door, 
thus giving liberty of considerable play. The 
elevator-car in its ascent and descent rubs 
against these levers, forcing their ends apart, 6o 
and thus drooping or bagging the flexible cov 
ers against the sides of the shaft. At the cor 
ners of the elevator-car which operates the 
levers, I provide anti-friction rollers and ver 
tical ways therefrom along the sides, against 65 
which the evers can bear while the elevator 
is passing; and I arrange a brace or lockhold 
ing the levers outward in place, excepting 
When the elevator is approaching, to prevent 
bagging of the covers if anything should fall 7o 
on them. On freight-elevators, where there is 
no frame-work, I attach a rigid frame, or as 
many bars as there are levers reaching up 
from the platform, to operate said levers. 
this specification, and represent what I con 
sider the best means of carrying out my inven 
tion. 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of part 
of an elevator-shaft having my improved doors 8o 
and mechanism, the car being represented as 
ascending and having almost reached the level 
of the floor. Fig. 2 is a central vertical sec 
tion corresponding to Fig. I, but at right an 
gles thereto. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the 85 
hatch Way, showing the covers as closed across 
the opening. Figs. 4 and 5 represent details 
detached and on a larger scale, Fig. 4 being 
a section of my fire-proof cover attached to the 
floor, showing the construction Iconsider most go 
desirable; Fig. 5, a perspective view of part 
of an apron or cover, the front bar or slat 
thereof, and the upper lever attached thereto. 
Fig. 6 represents a modification, and is a side 
view of nyimproved hatchway, in which each 95 
cover is of only two pieces, hinged at the (en 
ter, and in which the levers are practically 
straight instead of curved. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
AA are the flexible covers; B B, the sup 
porting-levers, extending upward and hinged 
IOO 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
2 
33,210 
75 
to the walls in accurate bearings b b; C C, the 
the slots. 
I can use other forms of material 
corresponding levers below, hinged at ce to the 
than slats for the flexible covers C-such as 
wall or sides D of the shaft, and embracing in 
woven - wire bands or tape, or overlapping 
the slots c' c', in the upper ends thereof, the 
strips like a shutter. In some cases it will be 
advantageous to arrange the tensional springs 
cross-bar or front portion, A, at the corners. 
D' D'are the several floors, and A' A' the 
E from each bar A across to the other side, 
edge of each cover, which is hinged or attached 
or to projections from the side walls, by which 
thereto at D'D', with liberty of swinging down 
four springs will be used at each floor instead 
of two, so that it will not be so great a strain 
Ward. 
EE are the tensional springs attached at 
on them, and so that both covers will be uni 
formly urged to their fully-extended position, 
the sides of the front bar, A, of each cover. 
G represents the elevator - car having the 
even if one should lag or catch. The anti 
anti-friction rollers G' and ways g, which op 
friction-rollers G can be dispensed with, and 
erate the levers, and against which they bear 
the ways g well lubricated, or the moving car 8o 
when the elevator is in the vicinity. 
operate the levers B and C. I can provide 
His the lock or brace, having a rule-joint or 
tensional springs from below the sides of the 
other provision for holding the covers posi 
hatch way to the middle slats of each cover, to 
tively extended, except when the elevator is 
insure their bagging or doubling at the right 
approaching; and h h', the rod and pin, con 
point; or I can provide weights on the center 85 
slats for the same purpose; but I do not now 
nected thereto in such manner that the ele 
deem this will be necessary. I propose in 
vator-car in its traverse toward this floor will 
trip and unlock the brace. 
some instances, where the floors of the build 
In operation, as the elevator-car approaches 
ing are somewhat close together, to shorten 
the levers as it may be found necessary; but go 
from below, the pin or lever his moved by 
the roller G' on the side of the car, which lib 
this will increase the relative rise and fall of 
erates and holds the lock H in this position. 
the meeting edges of the covers A'; and to ob 
The rollers G' now begin to bear on the low 
viate this I will provide slots in the ends of 
est and gradually-inclined surfaces of the four 
the upper as well as the lower levers, by which 
levers C, prying them at first very slowly and 
each will take half of the vertical motion, as 95 
then more swiftly apart, and at the same time 
will be obvious. I may make each cover AA, 
sagging or opening covers A A until the top 
as shown in Fig. 6, of but two wide sections, or 
of the car has reached the level of the floor, 
what would really be of two slats joined or 
hinged at their meeting edges, and provided, 
when the springs E E are fully extended and 
the hatch completely open. As the car con 
as in their other forms, with the extending roo 
tinues to ascend the adjacent parts rub against 
springs EE, so that when the elevator is pass 
the ways guntil the floor-level has been passed, 
ing they are folded against each other at each 
when the covers A and all the levers grad 
side, occupying but very little space. It will be 
ually take their former closed and extended po 
obvious that the covers A A can be arranged 
sition. When the car is delivering its freight 
so as to fold upward instead of downward, if Ios 
at the next floor, the hatch at this will be 
such should be found desirable in any instance. 
closed, or nearly so. 
I can make all the levers B and C straight, as 
The curved form of my levers B and C in 
shown in Fig. 7, which construction will avoid 
any protruding of portions outside the line of 
sures the more gentle commencement of the 
opening movement and prevents the shock 
the shaft, and will not require any ways at IIo 
and jar which would be more likely to occur 
the side of the elevator-car, as the levers will 
if the levers were straight, and which in other 
always bear against the rollers at the edges. 
forms of automatic hatch-covers is so annoy 
I can use weights, properly connected with 
ing and wearing on the parts. 
ropes and pulleys, to draw the covers into the 
All the parts of my apparatus are of thin 
extended position, instead of the spring E; 
and light dimensions, are of metal, and thus 
and instead of the arms h' for the elevator to 
fire-proof. The covers swing free, moving in 
trip in unlocking the brace H, which may be 
dependent of, ways or tracks from the floor, 
liable to get out of order by the sudden shocks, 
and always under tension, thus avoiding dan 
I can provide inclined surfaces or levers which 
ger from Cramping, and withal the whole is 
will receive the motion of the moving elevator 
ractically noiseless. 
gradually. In some instances, where it may 
Modifications may be made without depart 
be objectionable to have the meeting edges 
ing from my invention. At the other floors 
rise and sink much when moving back and 
than the top and bottom two rods, h, and le 
forward, I can have the levers B and Clonger, 
versh', for unlocking the brace H, will be nec 
being straight and perpendicular, a consider. I25 
essary, one set below, as shown in Fig. 1, and 
able portion only being acted on by the ele 
the other above, being operated by the car in 
vator at the portions near the covers A. 
its descent above the levers B, as will be ob 
I have described the covers and levers as of 
vious. I can, if found desirable in any case, 
metal; but if, for economy or other reason, a 
support the covers A on the lower levers, C, 
builder should desire it, I can make the parts I3o 
forming the bearings for the rods A therein, 
of wood, canvas, or other material treated 
and having the upper levers, B, provided with with a fireproofing substance, or without such 
II5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 p. 
 
313,210 
O 
treatment. In Some situations-such as where 
a brick wall forms the immediate face of one 
side of the shaft-I can use one large cover, 
A, with its levers B and C and springs E all 
reaching across to the oppositeside, and, when 
the elevator approaches, folding or looping 
back all at one side of the shaft. I can, if 
desired, make the springs E to urge the covers 
together by a pushing instead of a pulling 
force, in which case I would still retain the 
advantage of a continual tension on all the. 
partS. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an automatic hatch-closing device, the 
flexible covers A. A supported at their for 
ward and rear edges, adapted to loop or fold 
at the sides of the opening, with provisions 
for extending the same across, substantially 
as described. 
2. In an automatic hatch-closing device, the 
levers B B and C C, supporting and control 
ling covers AA, and adapted to be operated 
by the moving car, as and for the purposes 
herein specified. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. LAUDERDALE, 
CHAS. C. STETSON. 
3. In an automatic hatch-closing device, the 25 
lock H and operating parts, in combination 
with the levers C, and adapted to be tripped 
by the elevator, as and for the purposes herein 
specified. 
4. The Supporting and operating leverS B 
and C, of such curved outline that the elevator 
in its motion will impinge on a slight and 
gradually-increasing angle, in combination 
with such elevator and with the folding cov 
ers AA, as and for the purposes described. 
5. In an automatic hatch-closing device, the 
combination of the closing means E with the 
looping-covers A A' A' and levers B and C, 
the whole operating together, as and for the 
purposes herein specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand, at Minneapolis aforesaid, this 9th 
day of June, 1884, in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
T. H. HULBERT. 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313310.txt	(No Model.) 
G. S. FRAZEY. 
CREAMING CAN, 
No. 33,310, 
Patented Mar, 3, 1885. 
  
 
27 
  
SSSSSSS 
N 
ar 
- 
 
 
Z22 zvezeeez. 
-4 eeo77ae/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUY s. FRAZEY, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
C REAVING CAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 313,310, dated IMarch 3, 1885. 
Application filed February 14, 1884. (No model.) 
To all, Zuhon it may concern. : 
Be it known that I, GUYS. FRAZEY, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Jersey City, in the county of Hudson and 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Creaming 
Cans, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had therein to the accompa 
nying drawings. 
My invention consists in certain improve. 
ments in the construction of milk pails and 
pans whereby the advantages of either deep 
or shallow setting are readily obtainable, the 
milk properly ventilated, and the flow of a 
cooling medium across said pail permitted 
Without submerging the can or allowing any 
of such cooling agent coming in contact with 
the milk. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents in ver 
tical section my improved can or pail adapted 
for deep setting. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
showing its adaptability for shallow setting. 
Fig. 3 represents the shallow-setting pansepa 
rately. Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the top 
or cover of the pail. 
A represents a pail or other vessel, of ob 
long, square, round, or other desired shape, 
for receiving the milk as it passes from a strain 
er, B. While this pail is adapted, by means 
of an upwardly-extending tube, a, to receive 
an ordinary straining device, I have in the 
drawings shown such a strainer as I prefer to 
use, and for which I have made application 
for patent on the 16th day of June, 1882, Serial 
No. 64,256. In the side of this pail or re 
ceiver A is a window, composed of a strip of 
glass or other transparent material, a, by means 
of which the height of the milk within such 
receiver can be readily ascertained. 
C represents the lid or cover of the can or 
receiver. This cover is formed with upward 
ly and downwardly depending flanges 12, as 
shown, notches being formed in the top of 
flange I, to allow water to be distributed over 
the unsubmerged part of the can or receiver, 
and with an upwardly - extending tube, a?, 
which may be central of the cover or to one 
side thereof, as desired, and has a cap, b, hav 
ing ventilating-openings in the top, and pro 
vided with a similarly-perforated rotating 
disk, in order that communication between 
the interior of the can and the outer air may 
be unimpeded or entirely prevented, as de 
sired. 
c represents a strip of some suitable stout 
material, preferably wood, which is placed 
across the top of the can or receiver, as shown, 
with its outer edges resting upon the rim 1 
thereof. The object of this rim 1 is to afford 
a seat upon which, when milking, the person 
may safely sit without bending the cover or 
the receiver, as by this arrangement the Weight 
of such person is evenly distributed around 
the edges of the pail or receiver and the sagging 
down of the cover and the edges of the pail or 
receiver prevented; also to hold or retain about 
one-half to one inch of cool water all the time 
the milk or cream is being raised. Upon the 
upper end of this tube a is formed a screw 
thread to admit of the Screw-threaded lower 
end of the straining-vessel B being screwed 
thereon; but such screw-thread may be dis 
pensed with, if desired. 
d represents a rim or flange formed interi 
Orly of the pail A, and extending circum 
ferentially around the same, for the purpose. 
of Supporting the pan D. This pan D may be 
of any desired depth, although it is believed 
that a depth equal to about one-half the depth 
of the pail. A will be found the most desirable;. 
or, if desired, two or more of such pans may 
be employed, each of less depth than that 
shown in the drawings, said pans in such case 
being placed the lower one upon the rim or 
flanged, and those above resting upon the top 
of the lowest pan. Such a duplication of the 
pan D in the receiver or pail would be found 
advantageous by those who practice shallow 
setting, as thereby the volume of milk can be 
divided so as to increase the surface to which 
the cream can rise, and the distance to which 
the cream must rise is less than when only 
one pan is used. 
When it is desired to use two or more pans, 
the flanged would be placed near the bottom 
of the receiver or can, to afford room for the 
additional pan or pans resting upon or in each 
other. 
The pan D is of corresponding shape to the 
shape of the pail A, except that at one por 
tion of its circumference it is formed straight 
or flat, as at e. A hole or opening, f, is formed 
IC 
3 5 
45 
55 
65 
8 5 
90 
IOO 
 
313,310 
- 
- - 
in this flat portion, in order that when the 
milk flowing into said pan rises to a level with 
the opening it shall flow out therethrough 
to and into the inclosing pail. By forming 
one portion of the pan with a flat surface it 
will be readily seen that the flow of milk 
through the hole if to the pail A will be free 
and unimpeded. This hole will be closed by 
a slide-valve, to prevent cream or milk from 
pouring through when being skimmed or be 
ing removed. 
g represents loops or handles attached to 
the inner face of the pan D, in order that said 
pan may be readily raised from the rim or 
flanged, or lowered within the pail. A until 
its bottom rests upon said flange. As it is 
designed to make this pan of equal, or nearly 
equal, circumference to that of the pail, the 
attaching of the loop of to the interior of the 
pan will allow of said pan being readily slid 
up and down within the pail. 
h represents a strip of glass or other trans 
parent material placed in the side of the pan, 
in order that when the pan is placed within 
the pail with said strip h opposite to the 
transparent strip a (its normal position) by 
looking through said strips the extent to which 
the cream has risen within the pan can be 
readily ascertained. 
It is well known that the caseine and other 
qualities contained in milk that it is desired 
to extract therefrom for use in butter and 
cheese making are obtainable more readily 
and in larger quantities by means of the 
shallow-setting' method than by the deep 
setting;' and it is also well known in the trade 
that butter and cheese manufactured from milk 
subjected to the shallow-setting method are 
superior to and bring a higher price in 
market than do similar articles produced 
from milk subjected to the deep-setting meth 
od, owing to the added richness of the product 
of the shallow-setting method. By my present 
improvements I am enabled at will to readily 
employ either of these methods by a very sim 
ple and efficient arrangement, and at a cost 
not exceeding that at which deep setting alone 
is ordinarily accomplished. 
In practice, if shallow setting is desired, 
the pan D is placed within the pail A, with 
its bottom resting upon the flanged, and the 
strip of glass or other transparent material, 
h, in said pan opposite to the similar trans 
parent strip, a, in the pail. The cover or lid 
C is then applied, and the strainer B de 
scribed in my application before referred to 
(or any other suitable straining device) placed 
in communication with the tube a'. The milk 
is then caused to pass through said strainer, 
either as it is drawn from the cow or after 
ward, by pouring it therein down through said 
tube a? into the pan D, into which it will flow 
and remain until the orifice therein is reached, 
when any additional milk will flow therefrom 
through said orifice to the inclosing pail. 
Should it be desired to secure deep setting 
instead of shallow setting, the pan D is not 
placed within pail A, but the milk allowed 
to flow freely and directly within the pail 
through the strainer and tube before de 
Scribed. 
While this pail and pan can be readily used 
either with or without a suitable straining de 
vice, still it is my intention to use the same 
in conjunction with the milking and strain 
ing devices described in my application for 
patent before referred to, and also in con 
junction with an arrangement for cooling the 
milk and raising the cream thereon, shown 
and described in an application for patent 
filed on even date herewith. 
I am aware that a milk-can has been con 
structed with a cover having a rim or flange 
having perforations to permit of water flow 
ing off said cover, and also that a can-cover 
has been constructed with an upwardly-ex 
tending tube or cup provided with a perfo 
rated cover and an independent imperforate 
cap adapted to fit over said perforated cover. 
I am aware that cans have been construct 
ed with a cover having an upwardly-extend 
ing perforated tube, some provided with an 
imperforate cap adapted to fit over and close 
such perforations; also, that a can has been 
provided with a tube having perforated side 
walls and a surrounding refrigerating -box 
provided with a cover in which is located a 
pivotal perforated disk; and that a vat has 
been constructed with a cover upon which an 
upwardly-extending tube is formed, provided 
at its upper end with a pivotal valve, by 
means of which such tube is opened and 
closed, and such I do not claim. I am not, 
however, aware of any cover for an ordinary 
milk-can constructed with an upwardly-ex 
tending tube having imperforate side walls, 
and provided with a cap having a perforated 
top and a disk pivoted thereto, and having 
perforations corresponding with the perfora 
tions in said cap-top, whereby on the removal 
of said cap the tube is adapted to receive the 
neck of a straining-vessel of similar construc 
tion to that shown in the drawings hereunto 
attached, (and which is the subject of another 
application for patent, as herein referred to,) 
and when such cap is applied to the tube and 
the disk opened the contents of the can can 
be ventilated, and when such disk is closed 
the can is sealed, so that whatever the oscil 
lation of the can, even to the extent of the 
falling over thereof, the contents cannot 
spill. 
What I claim as new herein is 
1. The combination of the pail A, having 
on its inner side a flange or rim, d, and a 
cover having an upwardly-extending tube, 
a', a perforated cap, b, adapted to fit said 
tube, and a rotatable disk pivotally connected 
With Said cap, and having ventilating-open 
ings therein adapted to register with the per 
forations in the cap, and the pan D, having 
loops or handles 9, flat face e, and orifice f, 
Substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the pail A, having 
75 
9O 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
IO 
25 
45 
65 
33,310 
3 
a flange or rim, d, window a, and a cover loop g, flat face e, and orifice f, and a pail, 
having a ventilating-opening provided with A, having suitable means for supporting Said 
a perforated cap, b, and a disk pivotally con- pan therein, substantially as set forth. 
nected with said cap, and having a series of 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
perforations adapted to register with the per- presence of two witnesses. 
forations in said cap, and the pan D, having 
loops or handlesg, flat face e, orificef, and 
transparent strip h, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination of a pan, D, having 
CHAs. J. GOOCH, 
E. P. HOUGH. 
GUY S. ERAZEY. 
5. 
O 
Witnesses: 
7. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313410.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 313,410. 
 
W. H. ECKERT, J. A. SEELY & E. A. ECKERT. 
HANGER FOR ELECTRIC CABLES. 
Patented Mar. 3, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
W. H. ECKERT, J. A. SEELY & E. A. ECKERT, 
HANGER FOR ELECTRIC CABLEs. 
No. 313,410, 
Patented Mar, 3, 1885. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. ECKERT, JOHN A. SEELY, AND EDWARD A. ECKERT, OF NEW 
YORK, N.Y., ASSIGNORSTO THE AMERICAN BELL-TELEPHONE COMPANY., 
OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
HANGER FOR ELECTR C CABLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 313,410, dated March 3, 1885. 
Application filed October 13, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM. H. ECKERT, 
JOHN A. SEELY, and EDWARD A. ECKERT, 
formerly all of Cincinnati, in the county o 
5 Hamilton and State of Ohio, and now of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and usefullmprovementin Hang 
ers for Electric Cables, which improvement 
is fully set forth in the following specification. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
convenient means for hanging and Supporting 
cables containing electric wires for telephonic 
or telegraphic purposes, although it is obvi 
ous that our device may be applied to other 
analogous purposes. The weight and flexi 
bility of the ordinary electric cables renderit 
necessary to provide them at frequent inter 
vals with supports, which, while not penetrat 
ing the cable, will clutch it sufficiently to pre 
2O vent its sliding through them, and which will 
themselves be incapable of any appreciable 
movement or play longitudinally of the cable. 
The surface which the cable exposes to the 
wind is of such area that it is important to al 
25 low it an opportunity to swing laterally while 
guarding against any permanent disturbance 
of its position, or any liability to be released 
from its support by Such SWing. We aim by 
our invention to meet these several require 
3O ments, while providing a hanger economical 
of construction and easily applied and Se 
cured in any desired position. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a simple form of our hanger. 
35 Fig. 2 shows the same hanger applied to the 
support of a cable. Figs. 3 and 5 represent 
blanks provided with locking devices-such 
as prongs or lips, T-heads, or additional slots 
for the purpose of securing their arms or straps 
go more firmly in the position to which they are 
bent. Figs. 4 and 6 show the same blanks, 
respectively, when bent into final shape. 
The blank A is made from a thin sheet or 
plate of galvanized iron or other pliable ma 
45 terial, preferably such as affords good electri 
cal conduction, and is capable of being cut 
with its several slots by a single stroke of a 
suitable die, It consists, substantially, of a 
body portion having slots B, arms C, (herein 
after termed supporting-arms,) projecting 5o 
from One side of the body portion, and arms 
F, (hereinafter termed receiving or cable 
arms,') projecting from the other side of said 
body portion and adapted to be bent up and 
passed through the slots. A rod or stout 55 
wire, D, is extended along the course over 
which the cable is to be stretched, and the 
cable is attached to it at such intervals as 
may be desired by bending the supporting 
arms around this rod or wire and the receiv- 6a 
ing-arms around the cable, and then passing 
the last-mentioned arms through the slots in. 
the body part. The several arms are held in 
position by the resistance of the material of 
which they are composed, aided in case of the 65 
cable-arms by the slots through which they 
paSS. 
To still further secure the arms, we provide 
in our preferred form additional slots, G. H. 
through which the arms are passed and then 
bent sharply backward, as shown in Fig. 6, 
or prongs or T-heads may be used, as shown 
in Figs. 3 and 4. The middle supporting 
arm is advisably bent in the opposite direc 
tion from the others, and thereby the hanger 75 
is effectively secured against any danger of 
being released from the supporting-wire by 
the swing of the cable. 
In practice the blank should be just pliable 
enough to be readily bent into position by 8o 
hand, while at the same time possessing suffi 
cient resistance to maintain the arms in the 
position to which they are bent. This ena 
bles the attachment to be made very rapidly 
and in such manner as to clasp the supporting 
wire and cable snugly and firmly, precluding 
not only endwise slipping of the latter, but, by 
the extended support afforded, as well as by 
the Secure grasp, preventing it from sagging 
or being cut, and yet permitting it to swing so 
freely that it may even be thrown entirely 
around the supporting-wire without danger 
of detachment, 
The above-described hanger, which, as stated, 
is made of conducting material, may be used 95 
as a connection between the induction wire or 
9O 
 
313,410 
5 
O 
2 
core of the cable and the supporting-rod D. 
The said rod, being grounded at each end, 
will serve, in respect to the induction-core, all 
the purposes of a ground to carry off induced 
currents wherever connection is made between 
them. We do not, however, claim this feature 
herein, the same being reserved to our prior 
application filed January 28, 1882, of which 
the present application is a division and con 
tinuation. 
Having now fully described our said inven 
tion, what we claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The slotted blank for a hanger having 
supporting and receiving arms, one or more 
each, sufficiently pliable to be bent into posi 
tion for use and sufficiently rigid to retain 
such position, substantially as described. 
2. In combination with the receiving-arms 
of the hanger, a locking device for securing 
the same rigidly in position, substantially as 
described. 
3. The hanger having two or more receiv 
Witnesses: 
TIMOTHY S. KELLY, 
GREENFIELD FOSDICK. 
ing-arms embracing the cable, and secured in 
position by being passed through slots, and 
supporting-arms bent around the sustaining 
rod in opposite directions to each other, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The pliable hanger-blank provided with 
slots B G H, the last two serving to lock the 
arms after being passed through the first, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The cable-hanger having arms for em 
bracing the cable, said arms being locked by 
a backward bend after passing through slots 
in the body of the hanger, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof we have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
WM. H. ECKERT. 
JOHN A. SEELY. 
EDWARD A. ECKERT. 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313510.txt	(NO Model.) 
S. C. MEYER 
2. Sheets-Sheet. 1, 
MACHINE FOR REDUCING BAGASSE TO PULP TOEXTRACT THE 
SACCHARINE MATTER THEREFROM, 
No. 313,510. 
 
Patented Mar. 10, 1885. 
WITNESSES - 
sess 
INVENT OF - 
63--4 3 2 as . 
3, 4.2% 
N. PETERs, Pieto-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
S. C. MEYER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR REDUCING BAGASSE TO PULP TO EXTRACT THE 
No. 313,510. 
 
. 
SACCHARINE MATTER THEREFROM, 
. 
Patented Mar. 10, 1885. 
Witnesses. 
INVENTOR 
pters. Potolithographer, Washington 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMON C. MEYER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MACHINE FOR REDUCING BAGASSE TO PUP TO EXTRAC THE SACCHAR NE MATTER THEREFROM, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 33, 50, dated March 10, 1885. 
Application filed May 15, 1854. (No model.) 
. 
F', and F, which have their journals resting 
To all, LLIOT, it Taif CO72.Ce/'72. 
in bearings secured on the front part of the 
Beit known that I, SIMON C. MEYER, a citi 
housings G and G', as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
Zen of Paris, France, residing in the city and 
county of Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania, 
These housings also form the sides of the in 
clined chute, and are arranged the proper dis 
having invented a new and useful Improve 
tance apart to accommodate the cylinders, 
mentin Machines for Reducing Bagasseto Pulp 
which project partially within the chute to 
to Extract the Saccharine Matter Therefrom, 
act upon the descending bagasse. 
of which the following is a specification. 
H, H', and H, Fig. 1, are inclined platforms, 
My invention has for its object the extrac 
secured across the intervening space between 
tion of all the saccharine matter, or as large a 
percentage as possible, remaining in bagasse 
the sides of the chute and in the rear of each 
cylinder, arranged to support the plungers I, 
or crushed sugar-cane. To accomplish this; I 
I, and I", which press the material toward 
reduce the bagasse to a fine pulp or pomace, so 
as to break or open all the cells of the cane 
the cylinders. 
The teeth on the bars D of the cylinder A, 
not otherwise affected by the cane-mill, to 
Figs. 3 and 4, are of two different shapes. The 
liberate the juice, and then submit the pulp 
teeth 7, viewed from the front or cutting edge, 
to pressure to express the Saccharine matter. 
present a double-inclined or wedge shape, 
My invention consists of a series of cylin 
while the cutting-edges of the alternate teeth 
drical rasps, mounted partially within an in 
hare curved or rounded off at the apex and re 
clined chute, and provided with adjustable 
cede toward the back part, presenting a cut 
teeth or cutters of coarse and fine pitch, for 
ting-edge somewhat in the form of a parabola. 
the reduction of the bagasse in rapid succes 
As this cylinder has the heaviest part of the 
Sion to as fine a pulp as may be desired. I 
work to perform, the teeth are necessarily made 
attain these objects by the mechanism illus 
larger and stronger, so as to effectually cut 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
through and mangle the bagasse. 
which 
The teeth ion the bars D' of the cylinder A, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the the entire 
Fig. 5, are of uniform shape and size, being of 
machine. Fig. 2 is a half-elevation and half 
a double incline or wedge-shape, and the teeth 
section on the line a b of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
lc on the cylinder A* are composed of curved 
longitudinal section through a portion of one 
or waved lines presenting a cutting-edge Semi 
of the cylindrical rasps. Fig. 4 is a transverse 
circular in form. These two cylinders will 
section on the line c d of Fig. 3. Figs. 5, 6, 7, 
reduce the bagasse to a fine pulp; but if a still 
and 8 are edge views of the teeth or cutters 
finer pulp is desired, the machine may be air 
detached from the cylinders, showing the dif 
ranged to receive an additional cylinder or 
ferent form of teeth employed. The cylinders 
cylinders provided with fine saw - teeth, as 
A, A, and A are each flanged at the ends, 
as shown at B B, Fig. 3, and are provided 
shown in Fig. 7. 
The toothed bars are arranged on the cylin 
with an annular rib, C, arranged to form two 
ders in two divisions, as above stated, and are 
divisions around the circumference. On each 
by this means readily adjusted, the circular 
side of the said rib an annular groove or chan 
band E being so divided into segments as to 
nel, e, is formed for the reception of the inner 
be readily removed and applied when it be 
ends of the toothed or cutter bars D, which 
are placed in a longitudinal direction on the 
comes necessary to remove one or more of the 
bars for repairs. The bars are also placed at 
circumference of the cylinder with their outer 
ends resting against the flanges B and B. 
intervals around the cylinders, with blocks of 
woodL, Fig. 4, fitted in the intervening spaces, 
E is a circular band, divided into as many 
to hold them longitudinally in position. 
segments as convenient for adjustment, placed 
J, J', and J, Fig. 1, are nozzles for intro 
over the ends of the toothed bars, and secured 
to the periphery of the flanges B and B by 
ducing jets of Water into the mass of pulp for 
the purpose of retaining the same in a semi 
means of the screws ff. The said cylinders 
A, A, and A* are inointed upon shafts F, fluid state, so as to be more readily worked. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
2 
313,510 
Brushes K, K, and K, Figs. 1 and 2, with 
their ends secured to side projections, V V, 
are arranged across the housings in front of 
and in contact with the teeth of each cylinder, 
for the purpose of removing any particles of 
pulp which might adhere to the teeth and in 
terfere with their proper action. The bagasse 
to be acted upon is received at the upper part 
of the chute from an endless apron or cane 
carrier, and falls upon the inclined plate M, and 
in passing downward is acted upon by the first 
cylinder, which reduces it to threads or fila 
ments before it passes to the second cylinder, 
where it is reduced to a finer degree, and then 
on to the third cylinder, where it is reduced 
still finer and the rasping process completed, 
from whence the pulp passes to a suitable re 
ceptacle or directly into the press. 
The entire machine is placed near the cane 
mill, and the bagasse is submitted to the rasp 
ing process just as it comes from the mill; but 
it may be necessary to reduce it to short pieces 
before it passes into the machine, and for this 
purpose I propose to use a circular saw or re 
volving cutter to cut the bagasse into short 
sections. 
The axles of the cylinders A, A, and A are 
provided with pulleys N, N', and N', which 
receive motion communicated by belts from 
shafting and pulleys driven by the engine of 
the cane-mill or independent power. 
The plungers I, I, and I", Figs. 1 and 2, 
which are reciprocated upon the inclined plat 
forms H, H', and H, to carry the bagasse or 
pulp toward the rasping-cylinders, are oper 
ated by means of grooved heart-shaped calmso 
o' and pivoted levers P P. The said cams 
O 
25 
3 5 
45 
are placed in pairs upon shafts R, R, and R, 
and receive motion from spur-wheels S, S', and 
S and pinions TT. 
I do not wish to limit myself to the exact 
construction of the machine as described, as it 
is obvious that many changes may be made 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine or apparatus for reducing 
bagasse to a fine pulp or pomace, the combi 
nation of the cylinders A, A, and A', toothed 
bars D, D, and D', wooden block L, and seg 
mental bands E, substantially as shown and 
described. 
2. The combination of the cylinders A, A, 
and A', provided with the flanges B B, rib C, 
and teeth (f, h, i, and k, substantially as and 
for the purpose shown and described. 
3. The combination of the cylinders A, A, 
and A', housings G and G', inclined platforms 
H, H', and H, plungers I, I', and I', water 
jets J, J', and J, and brushes K, K", and K, 
substantially as and for the purpose shown and 
described. 
4. The combination of the cylinders A, A, 
and A', shafts F, F, and F, pulleys N, N', 
and N', housings G and G', plungers I, I, and 
I", shafts R, R, and R', heart-cams O O", le. 
vers PP, spur-wheels S, S', and S', and pinions 
TT, substantially as shown and described. 
SIMON C. MEYER. 
Witnesses: 
CHRISTOPHER FALLON, 
ISAACR. OAKFORD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313610.txt	tNo Model.) 
J. J. O'NEILL 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MESSENGER SIGNAL AND FIRE ALARM APPARATUS, 
No. 313,610, 
- 
 
Patented Mar, 10, 1885, 
zz -1 - 
A-2 Attorney o 
N. PETERs. Photo-Littlegrapher. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
--wn. 
J. J. O'NEILL. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
MESSENGER SIGNAL AND FIRE ALARM APPARATUS, 
No. 313,610. 
Patented Mar, 10, 1885. 
WITWESSES 
S. IW E. TOR 
- 
N. PETEAs, Photo-Lithographor, washington, c. G. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES J. O'NEILL OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
V ESSENGER - SIGNAL AND FIRE AAR V AFPARATUS. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent INo. 313,610, dated March 10, 1885. 
Application filed April 23, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all Luhon, it nudy concern. 
Be it known that I, JAMES J. O'NEILL, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Messenger-Signal and 
Fire-Alarm Apparatus; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part of this specification, and to the figures 
and letters of reference marked thereon. 
In the district-messenger-service system a 
closed circuit is usually employed, and there 
is arranged in said circuit, at the central of. 
fice, a recording mechanism made operative 
by the breaking and making of said circuit, 
and at each of the signaling-stations there is 
arranged a signal-box through which the cur 
rent is normally closed, but which, when op 
erated, opens and closes the circuit the pre 
determined number of times. No provision 
is however made for enabling the person who 
pulls a signal-box to determine whether or 
not his call has been received at the central 
office, and much valuable time is often wasted 
in awaiting the coming of a messenger-boy, 
who never arrives because of a rupture of the 
circuit, or by reason of either the signaling 
or receiving instrument being out of order. 
The object of my invention, therefore, is to 
provide means whereby when a box is pulled 
the person pulling it can tell with certainty 
whether or not his call has been received at 
the central office; and to this end it consists 
5 in the addition of certain improved devices to 
the signaling-box whereby such object is ac 
complished, as will be hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims at the 
end of this specification. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a front elevation of the mechanism of an 
ordinary signal-box such as is now generally 
used in the district-messenger service, my in 
vention being shown applied thereto; Fig. 2, a 
45 similar view of the same, showing the parts in 
a different position. Fig. 3 is a side eleva 
tion, and Fig. 4 alongitudinal vertical section 
taken on the line acac of Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
So figures indicate the same parts. 
As the general construction of the instru 
3O 
- 
55 
65 
ment shown does not differ from those in gen 
eral and common use, I will simply refer by 
name to the several parts without entering 
into any detailed description thereof. 
The letter A indicates the main shaft of the 
instrument, which has secured to its rear end 
the crank or handle B, and at its front end the 
arm C, which arrests the rotation of the make 
and-break wheel. 
DEFG H represent the train of gearing; 
I, the actuating-spring; J, the pallet or es 
capement; K, the make-and-break wheel; L, 
the contact-fingers for engaging with the make 
and-break wheel. 
M is the metallic back plate upon which all 
the mechanism of the instrument is mounted. 
When the crank or handle B is pulled down 
ward in the direction indicated by the arrow 
in Fig. 1, the shaft A is rotated, and the arm 7o 
C, at the front thereof, is raised into the po 
sition shown by the dotted lines, Fig. 1, out 
of engagement with the stop-pin a of the 
make-and-break wheel, and upon the handle 
being then released the spring J, operating 
upon the train of gearing, causes the make 
and-break wheel to rotate in the direction in 
dicated by the arrow, Fig. 1, until it has made 
one complete revolution, when it is arrested 
again by the arm C, which has meanwhile de 
scended to its former position. As the make 
and-break wheel rotates, the contact-fingers 
L, which normally rest upon its portion b, are 
caused to break contact a number of times in 
succession, depending upon the number of de 
pressions or notches c c formed in the wheel, 
as shown. 
In applying my invention to the instrument, 
Isecure to the metallic back plate, MI, a me 
tallic bracket, N, and mount upon this brack- 9o 
et an electro-magnet, O, and also a hinged or 
pivoted bar, P, carrying an armature, Q, for 
said electro-magnet O. 
Upon the frame in which the gearing is 
mounted I mount a contact-arm, R, the same 95 
being insulated from the frame, and arranged 
so that its upper end Will normally support 
the pivoted bar P, which carries the arma 
ture. . 
75 
On the stud or pin S, to which the spring IOo 
is connected, I mount, so as to turn freely, an 
arm or lever, T, the upper end of which is 
. 
2 
313,610 
- 
O 
15 
2O wire, G, to the said binding-post.f. 
adapted when the lever is swung up to im 
pinge against the armature Q and raise it, 
so as to bring it close to the poles of the 
electro-magnet, and carry its supporting 
5 bar out of engagement with the contact R, 
while the lower end of said bar or lever T 
is adapted to be operated upon by a cam, U, 
preferably formed upon the hub of the make 
and-break wheel K, as shown. The arm or 
lever T is preferably hung so that when not 
in engagement with the cam it will gravitate 
into the position shown by the dotted lines in 
Fig. 2, and if it is desired to make its opera 
tion more positive, a spring may be applied to 
if, and relied upon instead of gravity. One 
of the terminal wires, d, of the electro-magnet 
is connected to the bracket N, while the other 
terminal wire, e, is connected to a binding-post, 
. The contact-arm R is also connected by a 
When the instrument is in normal position, 
as shown in Fig. 1, the line-circuit enters at 
binding-post h, passes thence by wire i to a 
stop-arm, j, and thence through arm C and 
25 the other metallic parts of the mechanism to 
the back plate,M; thence through the bracket 
N to armature-bar P, to contact-arm R, to 
binding-post F, and thence out to line again. 
When, however, the box is pulled, as it is 
3O called, by the depression of the crank or han 
dle B, the circuit-breaking wheel is set in mo 
tion, and the arm C moved out of contact with 
both the stop-pin on the circuit-breaking wheel 
and the stop-arm j, thus causing the circuit to 
pass from armi, through wirel, through con 
tact-fingers L to the circuit-breaking wheel, 
and from thence through the metallic parts of 
the mechanism to the back plate and out by 
the path before described to the other binding 
post, f. As the make-and-break wheel moves 
around, the appropriate number of makes and 
breaks are effected by the co-operating con 
tact-fingers L, and the signal is sent out to line. 
Just before the circuit-breaking wheel com 
pletes its revolution, the rotating cam Ustrikes 
the lower end of the pivoted lever T, and 
causes said lever to turn on its support and 
raise the armature Qup in close proximity to, 
if not in actual contact with, the poles of the 
electro-magnet, thereby causing the armature 
supporting bar P to be moved out of engage 
ment with the contact-arm R, which had pre 
viously supported it. Immediately upon the 
breaking of the contact between the arm P 
and the contact-arm R the current, being no 
longer able to traverse, that path, proceeds 
from the bracket N, through the terminal wire 
d, into the coils of the electro-magnet and out 
again through the terminal wire e to the bind 
ing-postf, and thence to line. As soon as the 
lever T has performed its function of raising 
the armature and its bar, it drops back into 
its normal position; but the armature remains 
elevated by reason of the attraction of the 
65 core of the electro-magnet due to the con 
tinued passage of the current through the 
45 
55 
35 
75 
coils of such magnet. As soon as the oper 
ator at the central office is apprised of the 
call, he momentarily breaks the line-circuit 
by means of an actuating push-button, and , 
this breakage of the circuit, by producing a 
cessation of the current through the electro 
magnet of the calling-instrument, causes the 
armature of such electro-magnet to be released 
and again dropped till its supporting-bar P 
again comes in contact with the contact-arm 
R, thus establishing the circuit through the 
calling-instrument by the normal path. 
It is obvious that, if, when the boxis pulled, 
the armature is not attracted and held by 
the electro-magnet, the line-circuit is either 
ruptured or out of order, or the instrument 
is out of order and the operator is apprised 
at once of the futility of again calling until 
the defect is remedied. 
For the purpose of enabling the operator to 
readily tell whether or not the armatureis held 
up when raised, I preferably connect to the ar 
mature supporting the bar P a light bar, v, 
carrying at its outer extremity a suitable in 
dicating ball or plate, colored, if necessary, 
to render it more conspicuous, or coated with 
luminous paint for night service. This ball 
or plate when the armature is raised is adapt 
ed to project through the casing of the instru 
ment. After a call, when it remains raised 
for awhile and then drops, it is evidence that 
the call has been duly received; otherwise, 
that the call has not been received. 
While I have for convenience shown my 
invention applied to one of the most ordi 
nary forms of messenger-service call-boxes, 
it is evident that it may be applied to other 
forms of boxes without exercising anything 
more than mere mechanical skill in the appli 
cation. 
It is also evident that my invention is adapt 
ed to fire-alarm-signaling instruments, and, in 
fact, anywhere where it is desired to know 
with certainty whether or not a signal sent 
out over an electric circuit has been received 
at its desired destination. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, substantially as de 
scribed, of a signaling mechanism connected 
to a line-circuit, an electro-magnet in a shunt 
circuit having the part bearing its armature 
interposed to form part of the line-circuit, 
and a device, substantially such as described, 
operated by the signaling mechanism, and act 
uating the armature, to direct the current from 
the line-circuit through the shunt-circuit, and 
cause the electro-magnet in the latter to hold 
the armature. 
2. The combination, substantially as de 
scribed, of a signaling mechanism connected 
to a line-circuit, an electro-magnet in a shunt 
circuit, having the part bearing its armature 
interposed to form part of the line-circuit, 
and a device, substantially such as described, 
operated by the signaling mechanism, and 
actuating the armature to divert the current 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
313,610 
3. 
from the line-circuit through the shunt-cir 
cuit, and cause the electro-magnet in the latter 
to hold the armature, and a device for break 
ing the main-line circuit. 
3. The combination, Substantially as de 
scribed, of the signaling mechanism connected 
to a line-circuit, an electro-magnet in a shunt 
circuit, the armature, and its co-operating con 
tact in the line-circuit, and the vibrating lever 
operated by signaling mechanism for raising 
the armature after the signal has been sent. 
4. The combination, substantially as de 
scribed, of the signaling mechanism connected 
to the line circuit, the electro-magnet in the 
shunt-circuit, the armature, and its co-operat 
ing contact in the line-circuit, the vibrating 
lever for raising the armature, and the cam of 
the signaling mechanism for operating said 
lever. 
IC 
5. The combination, substantially as de- 20 
scribed, of a signaling mechanism connected 
to the line-circuit, an electro-magnet in a 
shunt-circuit, having the part bearing its ar 
mature interposed to form part of the line 
circuit, a device, substantially such as de 
scribed, operated by the signaling mechanism, 
and actuating the armature, to divert the cur 
rent from the line-circuit through the shunt 
circuit, and cause the electro-magnet in the 
latter to hold the armature, and an indicator 3o 
for indicating the position of the armature. 
JAMES J. O'NEILL. 
Witnesses: 
W. C. DRURY, 
MELVILLE CHURCH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313710.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 313,710. 
 
M. F. CONNETT, Jr, 
MACHINE FORTURFING FABRICS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l' 
Patented Mar, 10, 1885. 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
M. F. CONNETT, Jr. 
MACHINE FORTURFING FABRICS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2' 
- 
No. 313,710. 
Patented Mar. 10, 1885. 
Z 
A. 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MATTHEW F. CONNETT, JR., OF SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
THIRD TO MATTHEW F. CONNETT, SR., OF SAME PIACE. 
WAC NE FOR U R F N G FA ERCS. 
SPECI:ECATION for ring part of Letters Patent No. 313,710, dated March 10, 1885. 
Application filed October 16, 1884. 
(No model ) 
Io 
2d of the needle-throw regulating-sleeve. 
To all, whon, it naily concern. 
Beit known that I, MATTHEW F. CONNETT, 
Jr., of Springfield, in the county of Sangamon 
and in the State of Illinois, have invented cer 
5 tain new and useful Improvements in Ma 
chines for Turfing Fabrics; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 shows a perspective view of my 
machine as in operation; Fig. 2, a sectional 
view in side elevation, showing the parts as 
in position before the needle has been thrust 
through the fabric; Fig. 3, a view in side ele 
15 Vation of the machine with the parts as in po 
sition after the needle has been thrust down 
through the fabric; Fig. 4, a detail view of 
the needle-bar removed; Fig. 5, a similar 
view of the needle, and Fig. 6 a similar view 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved apparatus or machine for turfing 
25 fabrics; and to this end it consists in the con 
struction, arrangement, and combination of 
parts, as hereinafter specified. 
In the drawings, A designates the fabric to 
be turfed, which is stretched over a suitable 
3o frame, B, in the Ordinary and well-known way. 
C designates a tube, within which slides the 
tubular needle-bar D. Where the machine is 
to be operated by hand, this tube forms a han 
dle. Where the machine is to be drivem by 
35 power, this tube is to be attached to a support 
ing-arm in the same way as the needle-guide 
and presser-foot of a Sewing-machine, and the 
needle-bar is to be connected in any suitable 
way with a vibrating needle-arm. 
The tube, as shown in the drawings, has a 
longitudinal slot, E, in its rear side, open at 
its lower end, and extending well up the tube. 
The lower end of the tube C is provided at its 
sides with downwardly-extending ears or lugs 
45 FF, which extend parallel with each other, 
and are rounded on their forward and rear 
ends, so as to permit the free passage of the 
fabric under them while they rest in contact 
with it. Upon the tube, just above these 
5o ears, is a sleeve, G, capable of being rotated 
about the tube as desired. This sleeve is at 
one point slotted from end to end, the slot H 
being of a width corresponding with slot Ein 
the tube. When, then, the sleeve is rotated SO 
that the two slots are in coincidence, there is a S 
5 5 
clear passage throughout the extent of slot E. 
The upper end of the sleeve is cut away to 
different depths, so as to leave portions g g g, 
of different heights, forming steps. The sleeve 
is so formed for a purpose hereinafter to be 
described. The tubular needle-bar D is pro 
vided near its lower end with a lug, I, pro 
jecting through and moving in the slot E as 
the bar is reciprocated within tube C. The 
upper end of this lug is made abrupt, So aS tO 
act in connection with the upper end of the slot 
as a stop, to limit the upward movement of the 
bar. The outer force of the lug is, as shown, 
inclined inward and downward from its upper 
to its lower end. Just below this lug a portion 
of the rear side of the tube of the needle-bar is 
cut away, and a slot, K, is cut in the remaining 
portion at right angles to the axis of the tube. 
The needle L is tubular, and at its lower end 
is brought to a penetrating-point by being cut 
away obliquely or at an angle on its rear side. 
The upper end of the needle is formed with a 
flange, L, adapted to fit in the slot K in the 
end of the needle-bar. This flange is made of 
such shape as to just slide and fit Within the 
tube C when the needle-bar is drawn upward 
within such tube. It is also made slightly 
thinner toward its rear side than at its front, 
so that the needle, while attached to and car 
ried by the tubular bar, as described above, 
is capable of being vibrated slightly to carry 
its point to the rear. For the purpose of giv 
ing the needle this motion, so as to form a 
needle-feed, on the rear side of the needle is 
the fixed lug or ear M, projecting out through 
and guided in the slot. Ein tube C. Thelow 
er end of the lug is on its inner side cut away 
to leave a downwardly-projecting portion, M, 
having its inner face inclined upward and in 
ward, as shown. This portion, as the needle 
bar is thrust downward within its tube, rides 
up on the sleeve G, so that the needle is SWung 
rearward to make the feed. The main portion 
of the lug M, coming in contact with the up 
per edge of that portion of the sleeve which is IOO 
90 
95 
 
 
313,710 
5 
, ... O 
2O 
I5 
as 
turned across slot E, limits the downward 
movement of the needle-bar and needle. By 
turning the sleeve so that different portions 
of it shall be brought across the slot E the 
throw of the needle can obviously be regu 
lated as desired. . 
Attached to the rear side of tubular needle 
L, and extending parallel with it, is the nee 
dle' N, whose point stands in rear of and just 
above the lower end of the needle L. 
To swing the needle forward again into po 
sition after the inclined projection M" on its 
lug has passed up out of engagement with the 
sleeve, I provide the spring P, attached at one 
end to the lug on the needle, and at the other 
bearing against the inclined outer face of the 
stop-lug on the needle-bar. The edges of the 
obliquely cut-away end or point of the tubu 
lar needle are not left sharp, but are rounded, 
as shown, to prevent cutting the fabric. 
If desired, the hollow needle can be provided 
with a solid point, an opening being made near 
the point for the passage of the yarn from the 
inside of the needle. 
The operation of my machine is as follows: 
The fabric to be turfed is stretched on the 
frame B, and the needle is supplied with yarn 
or similar material, which is passed down 
through the needle-bar and needle and out at 
30 
the point of the latter. The bar and needle 
being pulled back, the tube C is held with its 
bottom ears or lugs against the fabric. The 
needle-bar is then thrust down, so that the 
needle carrying the yarn is forced through the 
fabric until the lug on the needle strikes the 
sleeve on tube C. Just before this, as the end 
of the stroke of the needle is neared, the rid 
ing of the inclined inner face of the projec 
tion on this lug swings the needle to the rear. 
As the needle is confined in the goods or fab 
ric this movement of it. causes the machine 
to move forward. The needle being now with 
drawn, a loop is formed of the yarn on the 
opposite side of the goods operated upon. 
As the needle is thrust down again through 
the fabric the sharp supplemental needle im 
pales the yarn in the rear of the needle, and 
so prevents the loop just made from being 
pulled out by the movement of main needle 
L. As this latter moves downward the yarn 
is compelled to feed down through the needle 
bar and tubular needle. The length of stroke 
of the needle, and consequently the size of the 
loops made, can be regulated, as described, 
by turning the sleeve on the tube to bring 
higher or lower portions of it over the slot. 
The spring P keeps the needle in its normal 
position, as show n in Figs. Li and 2, and re 
turns it to such position after it has been 
swung rearward to make the feed by the 
means already described. 
Having thus fully set forth the nature of 
my invention, what I claim is- 
1. In a machine or apparatus for turfing 
fabrics, in combination with the needle for 
carrying the yarn down through the fabric, 
means, substantially as described, moving in 
so 
35 
55 
15 
8O 
the same direction with the needle, adapted 
to hold the yarn at a point between the nee 
dle and the loop last formed, so that such loop 7o 
shall not be pulled out by the movement of 
the needle, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
2. In combination with the needle adapted 
to carry the yarn through the fabric to form 7 
5 
loops, the supplemental needle adapted to im 
pale and hold the yarn between the needle 
and the last-formed loop as the needle passes 
through the fabric, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
3. In combination with the tubular needle 
for turfing fabrics, having the yarn fed through 
it, the supplemental needle carried with the 
tubular one, and adapted to impale the yarn 
between the loop last formed and such tubu- 85 
lar needle, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
4. In a machine or apparatus for turfing 
fabrics, a needle for carrying the yarn through 
the fabric, in combination with the impaling go 
needle, arranged parallel to the other and 
traveling in the same direction with it, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
5. In combination with the hollow needle 
bar adapted to allow of the passage and feed 95 
of the yarn or thread down through it, the 
hollow needle attached to the bar, having its 
bore connecting with or forming a continua 
tion of the bore of the needle-bar, and at its 
lower end cut away at an angle to form a IOO 
penetrating-point, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
6. The hollow needle-bar provided at its 
lower end with a slot substantially at right 
angles to its axis, in combination with the IC5 
hollow needle provided with the flange adapt 
ed to fit the slot in the needle-bar, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
7. The hollow needle-bar provided at or 
near its lower end with a slot substantially at I Io 
right angles to its axis, and open at one side 
of the bar, and the needle having at its up 
per end a flange adapted to fit in such slot 
and be flush with the outside of the bar, in 
combination with the tubular sheath sur- I 15 
rounding the bar, substantially as shown and 
8. In combination with the tubular sheath 
provided with the longitudinal slot, the nee 
dle-bar within the sheath, provided with a lug I2O 
guided in the slot, the needle carried by the 
bar, having the lug extending out through the 
slot in the sheath, and the stop-sleeve around 
the latter, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
9. In combination with the slotted sheath 
and the needle carried by the bar, within the 
sheath, and provided with a lug projecting 
through the slot, the rotary sleeve on the 
sheath, cut away to form steps of different 13o 
heights for engagement of the lug on the nee 
dle, to limit the movement of the latter, sub 
'stantially as and for the purpose described. 
10. In a machine or apparatus for turfing 
described. 
I25 
- 
- 
;-* 
313,70 
3 
25 
the needle normally in one position, and the 
inclined lip or projection carried by the nee 
dle, adapted to come in contact with and ride 
over the upper edge of the sleeve on the nee 
dle-bar sheath as the needle approaches the 
lower end of its throw, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
14. In combination with the slotted needle 
bar sheath, the needle having a lug project 
ing out through the slot in the sheath, and 
the stop-sleeve on the lower end of said sheath, 
provided with a longitudinal slot adapted by 
rotation of the sleeve to be brought into coin 
cidence with the slot in the sheath, to allow 
the needle to be removed, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 6th day of 
October, A. D. 1884. 
MATTHEW F. CONNETT, JR. 
Witnesses: 
ISAAC K. BRADLEY, 
MATTHEW. F. CoNNETT, Sr. 
5 
fabrics, in combination with the needle, means 
for regulating its throw, consisting of a lug or 
stud on the needle and an adjustable stop for 
engaging the samme, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
11. In combination with the needle, the lug 
thereon provided with a projection or lip in 
clined on its inner side, and a fixed lug or stop 
on the machine, adapted to be struck and en 
gaged by the lip and lug at the lower end of 
the stroke of the needle, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
12. In combination with the needle-bar, the 
needle attached thereto, so as to be capable 
of swinging thereon, and means, as a lug and 
stop, adapted to swing the needle to the rear 
at the lower end of its stroke, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
13. In combination with the needle-bar, the 
needle carried thereby, so as to be capable of 
a swinging motion thereon, a Spring attached 
to the needle, and bearing against the inclined 
face of a lug on the bar, and adapted to keep 
IJO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313810.txt	(No Model.) 
P. D. 8. J. H. C0R YELL, 
FRUIT DRIER, 
AYWYN 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Wishington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
PETER D. CORYELL AND JOE H. 
CORYELL OF GLIDDEN, IOWA. 
FRUIT-DRER. 
S2ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 313,810, dated March 10, 1885. 
Anplication filed May 6, 1884. (No model.) 
7o a^2 u'honn, t? may conce77): 
Be it known that we, PETER. D. CoRYELL 
and JoE H. CORYELL, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Glidden, in the county of 
Carroll and State of Iowa, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Fruit 
Drying Apparatus; and we do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to fruit-drying ma 
chines; and it consists in the improvements 
hereinafter fully described and set forth. 
In the accompanying drawing, the figure 
represents in perspective a fruit-drying ma 
chine embodying our improvements. 
A is the steam - generator, which may be 
made entirely of suitable sheet metal in the 
form shown, and provided at its sides A and 
ends A" with wood or other anti-condensing 
material, or it may be more cheaply and as 
practically constructed by making the top and 
bottom of metal sheets securely affixed by 
means of screws to the upper and lower edges 
of wood sides A and wood ends A", in a way 
to form water-tight joints, for which purpose. 
suitable gaskets or packing material may be 
placed between the metal and the edges of the 
Wood frame forming the sides and ends A' A' 
of the steam-generator, which is to reach from 
one outer edge to the other of the furnace 
Walls C. 
B is the furnace-chamber provided with a 
bridge-wall, B, and a draft-course for throw 
ing the heat closer to the bottom of the steam 
generator and extending to the rear end there 
of, where it is provided with an ordinary 
smoke-stack, B". 
D and E are steam-boxes having metal tops 
and bottoms affixed to wood sides D'E' and 
ends D'' and E' in the same manner as the 
steam-generator A. 
G G are wood standards suitably secured to 
the furnace-walls and to the ends of the steam 
boxes D and E, which may be increased in 
number, as desired, by lengthening the stand 
ards G. The spaces between the steam-boxes 
should not be more than six inches. 
FF represent movable pans made of thin 5O 
sheel metal, and into which the fruit is placed 
preparatory to being put on and between the 
steam-boxes, where it is dried by the heat of 
the steam supplied from the generator through 
a series of circulating-pipes, as shown at a 55 
and d, and which should be located at alter 
nate ends of the apparatus to maintain a con 
tinuous flow from the generator of fresh steam, 
which has an outlet from the box E, as shown 
at d'. The forwardend of the generatoris pro 
vided with a series of faucets or gage-cocks, a, 
for testing the supply of water therein. b rep 
resents the furnace-door. 
His a water-tank mounted on a platform, 
K, at an elevation above and connected with 65 
the steam-generator by means of supply-pipes 
J, provided with a stop-cock, h'. 
J is a steam-conducting pipe connecting the 
upper steam-box, E, with the water-tank H, 
for a purpose hereinafter set forth. 
I is a pipe connecting the interior of the 
tank H with the smoke-stack B", and h repre 
sents a funnel and pipe for supplying the tank 
with water. The steam-outlet d is provided 
with a closely fitting cap, d", for covering the 
same, and thereby directing the steam into the 
tank H. and so heat the water that it will be 
more rapidly and economically converted in 
to steam for the purpose intended. The ob 
ject of the pipe I is to prevent a dangerous 
accumulation of steam in the water-tank by 
continuously discharging it into the smoke 
stack. 
The cover di" to the outlet d' is to be removed 
when the temperature of the steam in the gen- 85 
erator and boxes tends to a greater degree of 
heat than is proper for drying the fruit, as 
by removing the same the steam will escape 
more rapidly and the temperature will be 
harder to maintain and consequently reduced 
in proportion. 
Valuable time can be saved and gained in 
the use of the apparatus by providing double 
sets of pans F, and by supplying them With 
sliced fruit, make the same ready for placing 95 
on and between the steam-boxes immediately 
upon the removal of the pans containing the 
dried fruit. 
75 
90 
O 
IS 
2 5 
45 
2 
313,810 
Having explained the construction and op- said tank with the uptake, substantially as set 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
The combination, in a fruit-drier, of a sup- in presence of two witnesses. 
eration of our improvement, what we claim, forth. 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
5 porting-frame, a series of superposed steam- 
boxes supported therein and communicating 
with each other by means of circulating-pipes, 
a steam-generating boiler and furnace, an up- 
take or fue, a supply-tank communicating 
Io with said boiler, and a pipe, I, connecting 
PETER D. CORYELL. 
JOE. H. CORYELL. 
Witnesses: 
A. HARRIS. 
M. M. COONEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US313910.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 313,910. 
737.2. 
R, S, BARTLETT, 
BASKET, 
Patented Mar. 17, 1885. 
Azz.47 
iiitiitii 
 
 
A 
se 
fl-SEEas --ee: 
3. 
..a 
-- 
Etz 
L7avezzloz, 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROLAND S. BARTLETT, OF NORTHAMPTON, MASS., ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WILLIAMS MANUEFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BASKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 313,910, dated March 17, 1885. 
Application filed December 24, 1884. (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROLAND S. BARTLETT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Northampton, in the county of Hampshire 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Bas 
kets, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had therein to the accompa 
nying drawings. 
My invention relates to what are known as 
'stave' baskets, which baskets are used for 
carrying fruit and garden-truck in measured 
quantities, ready for the market. The baskets 
are made to fit snugly one within the other 
when empty, to economize space when packed 
together for retransportation to the producer. 
Baskets heretofore employed of this descrip 
tion have been provided with a middle hoop 
to prevent the staves from bulging, and said 
hoops have been made of wood or metal bands 
intertwined with the staves or secured there 
to by nails, rivets, or staples driven into the 
wood to hold the hoop in place. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
improved means for forming the middle hoop 
and for holding said hoop in place upon the 
basket, as will hereinafter more fully appear. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a basket provided with a 
middle hoop formed and supported upon the 
basket according to my invention; Fig. 2, a 
vertical central section through said basket; 
Fig. 3, a side elevation of a basket, showing 
a modification of the device for supporting 
35 the hoop; Fig. 4, a detail view in perspec 
tive of one form of said hoop-supporting de 
vice, and Fig. 5 is a modification thereof. 
The general form and construction of the 
basket shown in the accompanying drawings 
is well known. The bottom A is made of 
either one piece turned to form a flange at 
the bottom or of two circular pieces, a a?, 
nailed together. The lowerpiece, a, is slightly 
largerin diameter than the piece a?, to project 
beyond its periphery and form a shoulder, a, 
against which the lower ends of the staves B 
may abut. A wooden hoop, C, encircles the 
lower ends of the staves upon the outside of 
the basket and rests upon the ledge or outer 
5o edge of the shoulder a, above described. 
45 
Nails c are driven through the hoop and staves 
into the bottom piece, a, to hold said parts se 
curely together. The upper ends of the staves 
B are secured firmly between wooden hoops 
DD' by nails passing through the hoops and 55 
staves to form a substantial rim for the basket 
in a well-known manner. The middle hoop, 
E, is formed of a strip of suitable material, 
or preferably a piece of metal wire, that en 
circles the outside and middle portion of the 6o 
basket, and is of sufficient length to pass com 
pletely around the basket and have its ends 
overlap each other opposite one of the staves, 
and said ends are bent or doubled around 
the edges of and upon the inner side of said 65 
stave in opposite directions. A complete 
bandis thus formed around the basket without 
securing the ends of the band directly to each 
Other. 
The construction above described and illus 
trated in the drawings of securing the end of 
the middle hoop to one of the staves instead 
of to each other to form a band is simple, 
strong, and effective, and is effected at little 
expense. The middle band, E, is held se- 75 
curely in position by stays shown in the accom 
panying drawings. 
The stay-strip may be made, as shown at F 
in Fig. 3, of an additional narrow stave of 
wood, which extends from the top to the bot- 8o 
tom of the basket, to overlie the outside of 
the middle hoop and some of the staves, and 
be held securely by the hoops and nails m at 
its upper and lower ends and by nails n, driven 
through its middle portion into the stave im 
mediately below the middle hoop. This form 
of suspension-strip serves to materially pro 
tect and strengthen the staves and basket with 
out materially increasing the weight thereof. 
Any desired number of stay-strips, but 
preferably three, may be employed and ar 
ranged at equal distances apart around the 
basket. 
I am aware that sheet-metal strips similar 
to those shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 4 have been 
used to connect the hoops of stave baskets, 
and I do not claim metal strips of that form. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The combination, with the staves of a 
85 
95 
go 
basket, of a middle hoop encircling the bas- IOO 
2 
313,910 
ket, and having its ends bent around the op- and staves under said middle hoop, whereby Io 
posite edges of one of the staves, substan- the latter is supported, substantially as de 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
5 the bottom, the side staves, the hoops at the presence of two witnesses. 
scribed. 
ROLAND S. BARTILETT. 
2. The combination, in a stave basket, of 
top and bottom, the re-enforcing and sustain- 
ing stays F, secured by nails to the upper and 
lower hoops, the middle hoop overlaid by the , 
stays, and nails in, driven through the stays 
Witnesses: 
E. H. WADE, 
D. W. BOND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314010.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. FOWLE, J. P. CHRISTOPHER & W. P. SMITH, 
Patented Mar. 17, 1885. 
No. 314,010, 
MINE RAILWAY. 
"fifts. Photo-Lithographer. washion. pc. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. FOWLE, JOHN P. 
CHRISTOPHER, AND WILL P. SMITH, OF MICHI 
GAMME, MICHIGAN. 
MNE RALWAY. 
...?F3 OIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 314,010, dated March 17, 1885. 
. Application filed January 14, 1885. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
To all, whon, it may conce77: 
Be it known that we, JOHN C. FOWLE, 
JoHN P. CHRISTOPHER, and WILL P. SMITH, 
all of Michigamme, in the county of Mar. 
quette and State of Michigan, have invented 
a new and Improved Mine-Railway, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription. 
The object of our invention is to lessen the 
cost of transportation of ore, coal, &c., by 
utilizing part of the power of the hoisting 
rope for operating a surface-car. 
The invention consists in a winding-drum 
and gearing suitable for operating it from a 
pulley over which the hoisting-rope passes, 
the rope for operating the surface-car being 
connected with the said drum. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional eleva 
tion of a shaft-house and part of the mine, 
showing the arrangement of our improved 
mine-railway. Fig. 2 is an enlarged side view 
of part of the gearing. 
The shaft A is journaled in the shaft-house 
B, and on it is mounted a grooved pulley, C, 
over which the hoisting-cable D is passed, 
which passes from the engine-house and ex 
tends down the inclined shaft E and is se 
cured to the skip F, running on tracks G in 
the shaft E, and on the tracks G', extending 
upward from the shaft, and provided with a 
dump, H, near its upper end, at which the 
skip F is dumped automatically. 
An inclined track, J, leads from the shaft 
house to a dumping-ground, or to cars, ves 
sels, &c., or wherever the ore, coal, &c., are 
to be deposited. On the track J the dump 
ing-car K runs, which is Secured to a cable, 
L, passed over an angle-pulley, I, and se 
cured to and wound on a drum, M, journaled 
on a frame, T, having one end pivoted at N, 
and having the other end connected with a 
lever, O, pivoted in suitable hangers and pro 
vided with a pulling-rod, P. 
A grooved friction-pinion, Q, is formed on 
the shaft of the drum M, or on one end of 
the drum, and is adapted to be engaged with 
a friction-wheel, R., rigidly mounted on the 
shaft A. 
The operation is as follows: The skip F is 
pulled upward in the shaft E by the cable D, 
w 
 
55 
and thereby the pulley C is revolved, over 
which the cable D passes. The rod P is 
pulled down, whereby the frame T is raised, 
and the friction-pinion Q is brought in con 
tact with the wheel R, and the drum M is re 
volved from the wheel R, the rope Lis wound 
on the drum M, and the car K is moved in 
the direction of the arrow a?, and by the time 
the dumping-car K is under the dump H the 
skip F arrives at the dump and dumps its 
load into the car K. The rod P is released, 
the frame T moves downward slightly, and 
the pinion Q and wheel R are disengaged, 
thus permitting the car K to run down the 
inclined track J and the cable L to unwind 
from the drum M. In the meantime the skip 
F is lowered, and when it is again raised the 
pinion Q and the wheel R are engaged and 
the car K is pulled in the direction of the ar 
row a? again. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a pulley over 
which a hoisting-rope is to be passed, of a 
drum, gearing for revolving the drum from 
the Said pulley, and of a cable or rope se 
cured on the said drum and connected with 
a dumping-car, said cable being passed over 
the angle-pulley, Substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
2. The combination, with the pulley C, over 
which the hoisting-cable D is to be passed, 
Of the wheel R on the same shaft with the 
pulley C, the pivoted frame T, the drum M, 
journaled in the same, the pinion Q, con 
nected with the drum, the rope L secured on 
the drum, and the dumping-car K, secured to 
the said rope L, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
the pulley C and the friction-wheel R on the 
same, the pivoted frame T, the lever O, the 
drum M, and the pinion Q on the frame T, 
the rope L, the track J, the car K, the track 
G', and the dump H, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
3. The combination, with the shaft A, of 95 
75 
9O 
JOHN C. FOWLE. 
JOHN EP. CHRISTOPEER. 
WILL P. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
ANDREW G. JoHNSTON, 
WMI, P. EWERTS, 
OO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314110.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 34,110. 
 
W. H. CLARKE, 
4. STOPPER, 
Patented Mar. 17, 1885. 
22% 
ZyzzAzazzae M62eeze. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. CLARKE, OF OLEAN, NEW YORK. 
BoTTLE-STOPPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters 
Patent No. 34,110, dated March 17, 1885. 
Application filed January 16, 1885. 
(No model.) 
To all, whom, it Tay conc."2 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. CLARKE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Olean, 
Cattaraugus county, New York, have invent 
ed new and useful Improvements in Bottle 
Stoppers, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to bottle-stoppers, and 
the purpose thereof is to provide devices for 
Io permanently attaching the stopper to the bot 
tle and for clamping the same in place, the 
clamping-lever having a double bearing upon 
the stopper or plug and being guided by the 
bail or yoke to which it is pivoted or upon 
which it is supported, whereby the bail pre 
vents the lever from being forced sidewise, 
guides it into proper position relatively to the 
stopper, and gives the lever a broad contact 
upon the latter. 
My invention consists in the several novel 
features of construction and combinations of 
parts hereinafter fully set forth, and definitely 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a ver 
tical central section taken through the stop 
per and lever. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of 
the bail and stopper, the lever being detached. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the cam-lever. 
In the said drawings, the reference numeral 
1 denotes the bottle-neck having the head, 2, 
usually formed upon all bottles. Upon this 
head is mounted a yoke or bail, 3, hooking un 
der the head or connected therewith in any 
suitable manlier. This bail is carried above 
the top of the neck 1, and provided with a 
central eye, 4, which may be formed by a loop 
in the wire or by a separate device. In this 
loop or eye 4 is pivotally mounted a cam-le 
ver, 5, having two parallel branches or forks, 
6, one lying upon each side of the bail. The 
lever is attached to the loop by a pivot-pin, 7, 
passing through said loop and through both 
A back or strip, 8, is 
forks 6 of the lever. 
mounted upon the parallel plates 6 and pro 
45 longed beyond their lower ends to form a 
thumb-piece, 9. 
35 
25 
m 
 
50 
55 
66 - 
The stopper 10 is formed of rubber, cork, or 
other suitable material, and provided with a 
cap, 11, of metal, wood, or other substance, 
having opposite lugs or ears, 12, which are 
perforated to receive the bail, the construction 
being such that the stopper will readily move 
up or down upon the bail or yoke, but is not 
easily detached therefrom. 
In use the lever 5 is thrown down until the 
thumb-piece 9 lies upon one part of the bail. 
In this position it firmly holds the stopper in 
place, the two parallel plates 6 of the lever 
having contact with the cap-plate 11 upon each 
side of its central point, and thereby holding 
it securely in place. The cam is guided by 
the bail into proper position upon and engage 
inent with the stopper by means of the paral 
lel plates of saidlever, which lieupon each side 
of the bail, as shown. 
This forms a strong, cheap, efficient, and 
easily-operated device, and one wherein the 
stopper and its parts are all connected to 
gether. 
What I claim is 
1. In a bottle-stopper, the combination, with 
a bail or yoke to which the stopper is movably 
connected, of a cam-lever pivotally mounted 
upon said yoke, and having parallel plates, 
which ie upon each side of and are guided by 
the bail, substantially as described. 
2. In a bottle-stopper, the combination, with 
a bail or yoke having a central eye, in which 
is pivoted a cam-lever having two parallel 
plates lying upon each side of said bail, and 
a stopper having perforated lugs or ears, which 
engage with the bail, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM. H. CLARKE. 
Witnesses: 
ANATOLE A. KER, 
W. H. BOURIKE. 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314210.txt	No Model.) 
J. WISSEN, 
SLED PROPELLER. 
No. 314,210, 
Patented Mar. 17, 1885. 
A 
 
u?itasesse 
T. vess. - 
%u of Mezzey, 
in cutor. 
8) S.S. nate 
.ETERS, hoto-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
s 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPH WISSEN, OF DECATUR, ILLINOIS. 
SLED PROPELE. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 314,210, dated March 17, 1885. 
Application filed June 24, 1884. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JoSEPH WISSEN, a resi 
dent of the city of Decatur, county of Macon, 
and State of Illinois, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvementsin Sled-Propel 
lers, of which the following is a specification. 
In the drawings accompanying and forming 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view of a sled with my device at 
1o tached. Fig. 2 represents the handle, and 
Fig. 3 shows the propeller in side elevation. 
A is the sled, which may be formed in any 
suitable manner. 
a is a lever, provided with bearings a? a "for 
b represents a cogged segment formed of 
the lower termination of lever a. 
c is a smaller cogged segment adapted to 
gear with b, and provided with lever-termi 
I5 the handle. 
2O nation d. 
Projectione, as before stated, is relied on 65 
in is placed in holes C" of the leversa, thereby 5o 
shortening the leverage. 
To change the position of the handle with 
relation to the sled for the purpose of modi 
fying the position of the operator while oscil 
lating the levers, attaching-bolts l l may be 55 
drawn and the relative position of the gearing 
b c be adjusted as desired. 
The handle n is provided with diminished 
bearings o 0, that work so loosely in holes a 
a' that one lever may be operated without af. 6o 
fecting the other. 
Lever d and bar e are so hinged that the 
Smallest angle possible for them to form is 
shown in Fig. 1. . 
to limit the upward swing of barf, and con 
sequently whenever the device is in the po 
sition indicated in Fig. 1 points h are held 
firmly against the ground or ice. 
Points h may be adjusted in headg, and may 7o 
also be removed for sharpening or other pur. 
OSeS. The levers are oscillated by the occupant of 
the sled, and in turning either lever may be 
operated, to the exclusion of the other. 
In sled-propelling devices heretofore pro 
duced it has been necessary to keep the mech 
anism in Swift motion in order to attain to 
any considerable degree of speed, thereby ef. 
fecting with great labor what should be ef. 8o 
fected with ease, as it is observable that of all 
conveyances a sled on snow well beaten or on 
ice requires the least power to propel. 
In my device, owing to the peculiarity of 
the gearing, a slow steady motion will propel 85 
the sled rapidly, and the manner of applying 
the power, which consists in pulling back with 
a motion similar to rowing, provides a bene 
ficial exercise for the entire body. 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let. 9o 
ters Patent 
1. The combination, in a sled-propelling de 
vice, by means of which a slow steady back 
Ward motion similar to rowing is used to im 
part motion to the sled, of leversa, geared 95 
Segments b and c, levers d, and suitable means 
for connecting the said levers d with penetrat 
ing points h, as and for the purpose set forth. 
75 
25 receptacle g. 
with receptacle g and set-screw k. 
e is a bar hinged to lever d. 
f is a bar hinged to lever e and provided 
h is a pointed bar adapted to be adjusted in 
e' is an extension on bare that limits the up 
ward swinging motion of barf. 
m represents the handle, provided with 
knobs in in and diminished bearings o 0. 
3o p shows the bracket by which the propel 
ling device is attached and supported. 
q is a pin inserted in the sled-frame for the 
purpose of limiting the upward motion of le 
wer d. 
3 5 ll represent securing-bolts for leversa and d. 
In Fig. 1 my device is shown ready for a 
propelling-stroke, and in Fig. 2 the relation 
of the various parts is shown at the comple 
tion of a stroke. 
4o The propelling is effected by oscillating the 
leversa, and the poweris conveyed to the pene 
trating points through b c de f in the order 
named. 
A propelling device is attached to each side 
45 of the sled by means of brackets p, and a han 
dle, m, connects the levers a and provides a 
suitable hand-hold for the operator. 
To increase the speed of the sled without 
increasing the motion of the operator, handle 
 
314, 20 
2. The combination, in a sled-propelling de- 
4. The combination, with levers (t, geared 
vice, of levers a, geared segments band c, bars segments bc, bars ef, and pointh, of attach 
e, provided with projection e', bars.f, provided ing-brackets p, as and for the purpose set forth. 
with re3eptacles g and Screwsk, and penetrat 
5 ing points h, adapted to be adjusted in recep- 
tacles g, as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a sled-propelling device, the combi 
nation of levers a, provided with holes at a', 
and handle n, provided with diminished ex 
IO tensions 00, as and for the purpose set forth. 
JOSEPH WISSEN. 
Witnesses: 
WILHELM. M. BoLD, 
PETER HAHNBAEHER. 
1. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314311.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. BAYRER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MACHINE FOR FOLDING SHEET METAL, 
No. 314,311. 
Patented Mar. 24, 1885, 
He 
Hi 
& 
SS 
- 
: -- Ss. 
K 
--K 
S 
L. i. 
; 
! 
o. 3 
: : 
--- it 
', \, : : 
e 
 
(No. Model.) 
W. J. BAYRER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
M 
MACHINE FOR FOLDING SEIEET METAL, 
No. 314,81. 
 
Patented Mar. 24, 1885. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM J. BAYRER, OF SOUTHINGTON, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
PECK, STOW & WILCOX COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR FOLDING SHEET METAL. 
SPECIFICATION $orming part of Letters 
Aplication file. Decem 
Patent No. 314,311, dated March 24, 1885. 
bCr 18, 18S4. (No node.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all whon, it nag? concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM J. BAYRER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at South 
ington, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Folding 
Sheet Metal, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention is an improvement upon the 
folder patented to O. W. Stow, February 28, 
1860, No. 27,319; and the objects of my im 
provement are to facilitate the manufacture of 
the machine, to enable one part thereof when 
worn to be duplicated at a small expense, and 
to positively lock the gage in position when 
desired. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
plan view of my sheet-metal-folding machine. 
Fig. 2 is a front elevation. Fig. 3 is a side eleva 
tion. Fig. 4 is a partial section thereof on line 
aca of Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is another partial section 
thereof onliney y of Fig. 1, and Fig. 6 is a front 
elevation of a portion of the slide which moves 
the gage. 
The main portion of the machine need not 
be described in detail, because it is substan 
tially the same as has heretofore been manu 
factured under the said patent to Stow. 
A designates the folding-bar, which turns in 
the bearings a, which bearings are mounted 
upon the swinging frame b b. This bar is 
moved by means of the lever B. 
C designates the plate, around the edge of 
which the folding-bar turns, and D designates 
the gage. underneath the plate C, for regulat 
ing the width of the lock to be turned. In 
the prior machines this gage was moved by 
the direct action of a Screw located in the 
frame at about the middle of its length. I 
rovide this gage. D with two wings having 
In Fig. 1 a part of the plate 
oblique slots d. 
C is broken away and removed, so as to bet 
ter show the other parts. One end of this 
gage is shown infull lines in this figure, while 
the contour of its opposite end is indicated by 
broken lines. 
Underneath the gage D, and lying in a lon 
gitudinal groove through the frame.E, is the 
gage-slidef, Figs. 1, 4, and 6, which slide is 
rovided with projections or lugsg, which are 
received by the oblique slots d in the gage. 
The end of this gage-slide f is bored and 
threaded to receive a left-hand screw, and in 
the frame is a nut, h, which is threaded to re 
ceive a right-hand screw. 
F designates the gage-adjusting screw, which 
screw is provided with a right and left hand 
portion, to fit the nuth and end of slide f, re 
spectively, as shown most clearly in Fig. 1. 
The slide f having lugs which engage the ob 
lique slots in the gage D, the screw F and its 
nuth constitute the gage-adjusting mechanism 
in its improved form. In said Fig. 1 the gage 
is represented as thrown forward to its ex 
treme limit. By turning the gage-screw F in 
a left-handed direction the gage-slide f will be 
moved to the right, and thereby draw the 
gage ID back away from the edge of the plate. 
The gage-slidelies within alongitudinal groove 
within the frame, which is milled out so that 
the slide may be neatly fitted thereto. For 
the purpose of saving labor in fitting the slide, 
portions of its sides are cut away, as shown in 
Fig. 1, care being taken, however, to leave a 
bearing - surface of some length, which will 
bear closely against the wall of the groove 
near the middle of the length of the frame, 
and upon that side which is nearest the fold 
ing-bar. 
When a large job of work of a particular 
style is to be done, it sometimes happens, es 
pecially when the machine is much worn, that 
the position of the gage may change a little 
from the position to which it was left by the 
gage-adjusting screw. In order to prevent 
such an accident I provide the machine with 
means, in addition to the gage-adjusting screw, 
for locking the gage-slide against movement 
in either direction. This means, in the present 
instance, consists in a simple set-screw, k, in 
such a position as to press upon the gage-slide 
near the middle of its length and bind it 
firmly against the opposite Wall of the groove 
in which it slides whenever it is desired to 
hold it in position with greater positiveness 
than it would be held by the gage-adjusting 
Screw alone. The Set-screw of course must be 
loosened or turned back preparatory to ad 
justing the gage to a different position. 
The nuth for the adjusting-screw is a part 
which is subject to great wear. In order that 
this nut when worn may be duplicated or re 
55 
75 
9O 
95 
OO 
45 
50 p 
 
34,311. 
newed without removing the entire frame of gage to move back and forth upon a longitudi 
nal movement of the gage-slide I consider the 
the machine, I have made this nut so that it is 
equivalent of said slots and studs. 
readily attachable and detachable. By so do 
ing I am also enabled, when the nut is re 
moved, to leave the groove for the gage-slide 
f open from end to end of the frame E, where 
by a milling-tool may be run through the 
groove, so that it can be milled much more 
conveniently and at less expense than could 
be the case provided the nut were an integral 
part of the frame. I secure this nut, which 
is formed separately from the frame E, in place 
by means of the tenon in, Fig. 5, which fits 
into a hole in the frame underneath the body 
of the nut, while the plate C, which is held 
upon the frame by screws in the ordinary man 
ner, bears upon the top of the nut in such 
manner as to prevent it from Working up out 
of place. By removing this plate the nut can 
be readily taken out and a new one substi 
tuted therefor at a trivial cost. 
I have shown and described the oblique 
slots in the gage and the studs on the gage 
slide as means for operatively connecting said 
parts. Other means which will cause the 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a machine for folding sheet metal, the 
combination of the gage D, the gage-adjusting 
mechanism for moving said gage, and means, 
in addition to the adjusting mechanism, for 
locking said gage against movement in either 
direction, substantially as described, and for 
the purpose Specified. 
2. In a machine for folding sheet metal, the 
combination of the frame, the gage D, mounted 
thereon, and having the oblique slots, the gage 
slidef, having the studs which enter said ob 
lique slots and move longitudinally within a 
groove in the frame, the gage-adjusting screw 
IF, and the nuth, formed separately from the 
frame E, substantially as described, and for 
the purpose specified. 
WILLIAM J. BAY RER. 
35 
Witnesses: 
EDDY N. SMITH, 
JAMES SHEPARD. 
5 
IO 
15 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314411.txt	(N0 Model.) 
E. B. ALLEN. 
HEELING BLOCK. 
No. 314,4ll, 
Patented Mar. 24, 1885. 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS K3K 2 3 
N N 
2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD B. ALLEN, OF PORTLAND, MAINE, ASSIGNOR TOJAMES W. BROOKS, 
TRUSTEE, OF CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
- E ENG B O C K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 314,411, dated March 24, 1885. 
Application filed May 3, 1884. No model.) 
e. 
IO 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARDB. ALLEN, re 
siding in Portland, in the county of Cumber 
land and State of Maine, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Heeling 
Blocks; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the Same. 
My invention in heeling-machines has for 
its object to provide the top-lift plate of the 
usual nail-box with means for automatically 
operating it, so that the latter will be thrown 
into position to sustain the topliftimmediately 
after the nail-box and die-bed spindle are 
lowered from the nailed heel, thus placing the 
top-lift plate in position to receive upon it the 
top lift, which is to be attached to the nails 
left projecting from the heel, thus completing 
latter at the next rise of the die-bed spin 
In heel-nailing machines heretofore used in 
which a top-lift plate has been employed the 
5 said plate has always been turned into posi 
tion above the nail-box by hand. Operating 
the said plate mechanically enables the speed 
of the machine to be very considerably in 
creased. 
Figure 1 is a top or plan view of a nail-box 
of usual construction detached from a heel 
nailing machine, the usual top-lift plate being 
shown by dotted lines as turned aside into the 
position that it will occupy while the heel is 
being nailed. Fig. 2 is a central vertical sec 
tion of Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 is a detail of the 
top-lift-plate Swing -pin, and its actuating 
Spring. 
The nail-box or heel-support A, provided 
with the holes in for the reception of the nails 
of a loaded heel, and the drivers to drive such 
nails into and through the heel far enough to 
fasten it to the sole, the top at of the said nail 
box, the post B to support the said nail-box, 
and the top-lift plate C, are all substantially 
as in United States Patent No. 166,795, dated 
August 17, 1875, to which reference may be 
had. 
The top-lift plate described in the said pat 
5o ent is swung into position above the nail-box 
by hand when the top lift is to be applied to 
3O 
35 
45 
the projecting ends of the nails. To operate 
the top-lift plate automatically to compel it 
to be quickly turned into position above the 
perforated top of the nail-box immediately 
after the body of the heel has been nailed up 
on the sole, and the nail-box and heel are sepa 
rated for the reception of the top lift, I have 
connected the top-lift plate with a swing-pin, 
F, which, extended down into the nail-box, is 
surrounded by or provided with a spring, 
which normally acts to keep the top-lift plate 
closed, as in full lines, or so as to cover the 
holes in in the nail-box. 
The swing-pin is shown as provided with a 
square or angular head, E, which enters a cor 
respondingly-shaped recess made in the top 
lift plate, and the shank of the swing-pin, be 
sides being provided with an annular groove, 
b, for the reception of the end of a screw, J, 
by which to restrain endwise movement of the 
spindle, is also forked or bifurcated, as at c, 
for the reception of the end of a spring, K, 
the other end of which is fixed to or with re 
lation to the nail-box by a screw, L. 
The top-lift plate C is held in its dotted 
line position by the heel while the nails are 
being driven therein; but as soon as the heel 
and nail-box are separated the spring K acts 
quickly and throws the top-lift plate into po 
sition to cover the nail-box and support the 
usual top lift, while the heeling-machine in its 
next operation acts to force the top lift upon 
the heads of the nails left protruding from the 
end of the heel. 
In another application, Serial No. 130,242, 
I have shown and claimed mechanism for 
automatically operating the top-lift plate in 
both directions; but herein the said plate is 
operated in one direction by means of a spring. 
The operation of the nail-box in the machine 
referred, to and known in the market as the 
McKay and Bigelow Heeling-Machime, is 
well know, so, to illustrate my invention, only 
that part to which my invention is applied 
need be illustrated or described. 
I do not claim a horizontally-swinging top 
lift holder-plate for carrying a top lift to and 
holding it in position over the heel-blank 
when combined with an actuating-spring to 
return the Said plate to its normal condition, 
I claim 
55 
.75 
95 
IOO 
g 
314,4 
A horizontally-swinging top-lift plate piv. my own I have affixed my signature in the 
oted to the nail-block, combined with an actu- presence of two witnesses. 
ating-Spring to return said plate to its normal 
position above, and to cover the nail-block 
5 when a blind top-lift is to be attached to the 
heel, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
CHAs. L. WILSON, 
H. G. BRIGGS. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD B. ALLEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314511.txt	No Model.) 
No. 314,5ll. 
E. A. BOSTROM. 
LEVELING INSTRUMENT, 
Patented Mar. 24, 1885, 
 
y; 
62% at 
-4, 7% 
Inventor 
& O, VS ww. 
(hy O.W.' 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNST A. BOSTROM, OF NEWN AN, GEORGIA. 
EWE. N. G. NSTRU VENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 314,511, dated March 24, 1885. 
Application filed November 25, 1884. 
(No model.) 
55 
IO 
(to all vivot it may concern, : 
Be it known that I, ERNST A. BOSTROM, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Newnan, in the county of Coweta and State of 
Georgia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Leveling - Instruments, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates, especially, to instru 
ments employed for running levels, and is an 
improvement upon the device for which Let 
ters Patent No. 280,713 were granted to me 
July 3, 1883. 
The object of my invention is to furnish an 
inexpensive instrument, adapted to the use of 
farmers and others in the work of running 
levels, grades, ditches, &c., for laying Off an 
gles, and for work of a like nature. 
My invention consists, essentially, in an 
upright staff having an arm upon its upper 
extremity, whereon the level proper is sup 
ported by a spherical bearing, insuring steadi 
ness of the instrument, the frame thereof be 
ing open on one side, giving great range. The 
weight and sights are made adjustable and 
the sights may be set for any required angle. 
The circle upon the level is graduated for de 
termining angles, and the flanged metal shoe 
at the bottom of the staff regulates its posi 
tion in the earth, all of which will be herein 
after first fully described, and then pointed 
out in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of my device, and Fig. 2 is a view in ele 
vation of the plumb-rod and attached parts. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged view of the outer sight, 
and Fig. 4 of the inner sight. Fig. 5 is a plan 
Fig. 
view of the level and graduated circle. 
6 is a side view of thc arm affixed to the up 
per extremity of the shaft. 
Like letters of reference, wherever they oc 
cur, indicate corresponding parts in all the 
figures. 
A is the level, provided with a spirit-tube, 
a, and with sights fl. Sight h has a cross 
wire, h., for determining the center or level 
line. Sight f has a small slide, k, wherein is 
an eye-hole, o, corresponding to cross-wire h". 
This slide is graduated upon one side, and 
can be moved upward for fixing grades. By 
moving said slide upward one-sixteenth of an 
N 
25 
35 
inch it will give a grade of one inch in sixteen 
feet. 
b is the pivot or bearing point, having a 
rounded or spherical end, which rests in a 
concavity in the arm G. This gives the in 
strument, a steady bearing, while it is free to 
move in a true level, the arm having an open 
ing, c, in one side, which enables the instru 
ment to turn in either direction within a range 
of two hundred and seventy degrees. 
B is a rod connecting the level with the 
weight W, said rod having upon its lower ex 
tremity a small segment, S, a nut, N, below 
the segment engaging with the threaded end 
Weight W has a groove, g, in 
of the rod. 
the edge, through which the rod B passes, 
and the weight is held by the nut N. Weight 
W is made in the shape of a half-moon, so as 
to be heavy upon its lower side for adjusting 
the instruinent. 
W is a graduated circle divided into de 
grees, and secured to the level by a screw, q, 
the point p on arm G serving to indicate an 
gles or degrees, and by placing a pocket-com 
pass on the top of the instrument it can be 
used for ordinary surveying. 
C is a staff, having upon its upper extrem 
ity an arm, G, which is formed with the con 
cave seat d, for receiving the pivot b. The 
staff C has upon its lower extremity a metal 
point, J, and a flange, i, which prevents the 
point entering the ground lower than the 
flange. In terracing this is of great utility, as 
the instrument can be moved from place to 
place and reset at the same height. 
In using the device the staff is set in the 
ground and the instrument is mounted upon 
arm G, the gravity-rod taking a vertical po 
sition, retaining level A at a true horizontal. 
The instrument is adjusted by turning weight 
W to one side or the other, as may be re 
quired. If a grade is to be run, the slide k in 
sight f is raised as required. 
85 
The circle V is used in laying out angles. 
This instrument is inexpensive, and is de- 95 
signed for the use of farmers, &c., serving all 
the purposes of the usual costly devices. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new therein, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
IOO 
2 
314,5ll. 
In a leveling-instrument of the character 
Signed at Newnan, in the county of Coweta Io 
herein specified, the spherical bearing b, sup- and State of Georgia, this 30th day of August, 
porting the level A, whereon are sights f h, A. D. 1844. 
slide k, adjustable weight W, circle V, staff 
C, having arm G, wherein is seat d at top, and 
the pointerp, said staff being provided at its 
lower extremity with the point J and flange 
i, the whole combined and arranged to oper- 
ate substantially as shown and described. 
WILLIAM WELLs, 
JAS. A. LEE. 
ERNST A. BOSTROM. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314611.txt	(No Model.) 
W. SCHOLLHORN. 
COACH LATCH 
No. 34.6ll. 
Patented Mar. 31, 1885. 
- 
4e^2-9 
2%, 4.6//...- 
T Cs: 26. 
r: Peters, Proto-Lilhographer, wishing oil. D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM SCHOLLHORN, OF NEW HAVEN CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNORT 
WILLIAMI SCHOLLHORN & CO. 
COACH - ATCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 314,611, dated March 31, 1835. 
Application filed September 22, 1884. 
(No model.) 
To all, whon, it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, WM. SCHOLLHORN, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new Im 
provement in Coach-Latches; and I do hereby 
declare the following, when taken in connection 
With accompanying drawings and the letters 
of reference marked thereon, to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, and which 
said drawings constitute part of this specifica. 
tion, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a side view of said latch, the up 
per end of the lever broken off; Fig. 2, a hori 
Zontal section through the lever-pivot. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in that class of coach-latches which are set 
into a mortise in the edge of the coach-door, 
with a lever extending from the latch up 
through the window-sill in the door, and by 
which lever the occupant may draw the bolt 
from the inside of the carriage. In the best 
construction of these latches the bolt is simply 
a straight longitudinal bar extending through 
the face-plate of the case and supported upon 
the inside of the case, combined with a lever 
having a hook-like engagement with the bolt, 
a spring applied to the bolt to force it home, 
and which spring is relied upon to support 
the lever, and this spring, if the bolt is per 
mitted to throw outward to its full extent in 
to the keeper, will hold the lever so as to pre 
vent its rattling, but if the bolt meet with an 
obstruction to prevent its entering the keep 
er, as by friction upon the keeper, or other 
wise, then the lever is left free and produces 
a disagreeable rattling as the carriage runs. 
Again, in the usual construction, the lever is 
hung upon a pivot in the case, the pivot be 
ing a screw introduced through the end of the 
lever, tapped into the case, the lever working 
on the barrel or body of the screw. While 
such a construction serves a very good pur 
pose as a pivot, unless the fitting of the lever 
upon the screw be perfect the movement of 
the lever frequently loosens the screw, and 
gives to the lever a freedom which will pro 
duce the before-mentioned disagreeable rat 
tling. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
F is the lever which extends downthrough 6o 
in the construction as hereinafter described, 
and particularly recited in the claims. 
A represents the main plate of the case; B, 
the face-plate; C, the bolt extending through 
the face-plate and supported in a bearing, D, 55 
upon the under side of the case. The inner 
end of the bolt is turned up into hook shape, 
to form the arm E, against which the lever 
may work. 
the top of the case to near its lower edge, 
where it is secured upon a pivot, a. This 
pivot is cast or made as an integral part of 
the case, as seen in Fig. 2. The lower end of 
the lever is fitted thereon as a bearing, and so as 65 
to turn freely. The end of the pivot is tapped, 
and into it a screw, b, is introduced, the head 
of which takes its bearing hard upon the piv 
ot, but extends over slightly onto the face of 
the lever, so as to prevent the lever from slip- 7O 
ping off the pivot. Under this construction 
of the pivot the lever cannot loosen the screw, 
but if from any cause the screw should be 
loosened, the pivot remains as a firm and sub 
stantial bearing upon which the lever may 75 
The lever extends to the rear of the 
tul'n. 
bolt, thence curved forward and downward 
to form an arm, d, to engage the arm E of the 
bolt, and so that by pulling the lever inward 
the bolt will be drawn, as indicated in broken 8O 
lines. 
G is the bolt-spring. It is made from wire, 
one end introduced into a slot in a stud, e, 
formed as an integral part of the plate A. The 
other end of the spring extends upward to 
engage the bolt, the tendency of the spring 
being to throw the bolt forward or outward. 
To prevent the rattling of the lever and give 
it a support independent of the bolt, I apply 
a spring, H, upon the back of the lever. This 
spring is made from a piece of wire, one end 
introduced into a slot in a stud, f, which is 
formed as an integral part of the case, the other 
bent around to take its bearing on the back of 
the lever, as shown. By this construction and 9 
arrangement of the springs one end is firmly 
and immovably fixed in the case, and if per 
chance the springs break they alre easily re 
paired without resort to a locksmith, as it is 
90 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5o these difficulties; and the invention consists only necessary to remove the broken spring IOO 
2 
f 
314,6ll 
and introduce a piece of wire bent into shape. 
This construction and arrangement of springs the case, the bolt C, extending through the face- 35 
overcomes a serious difficulty heretofore ex 
perienced in this class of locks, from the fact 
5 that the construction and attachment of the 
springs in the previous constructions are such 
as to require considerable mechanical skill to 
repair or apply them. The pivot of the lever 
is directly under its bearing upon the bolt, 
Io the spring bears upon the lever to force it into 
its extreme forward position, and there hold 
it independent of the bolt, and so that whether 
or not the bolt be completely thrown, the le 
ver will be firmly held, and the rattle of the 
It will be understood the bolt is operated 
from the outside by the usual knob-like at 
tachment Working through the hub I in the 
usual manner, the said hub being in the usual 
2. In a carriage-latch, the combination of 
plate, its inner end supported in a bearing, D, 
and terminating in an arm,E, the lever F, ex 
tending through the upper edge of the case 
downward and hung upon a pivot, a, below 
said lever, also constructed with an arm, d, to 
engage the arm E of the bolt, the spring H, 
having one end secured in the slot of a fixed 
stud, f, formed as an integral part of the case, 
said spring arranged to bear upon the leverin 
dependent of the bolt, and a spring, G, arranged 
to act directly upon the bolt, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a carriage-latch, the combination of 
the case, the bolt C, arranged through the face 
plate of the case, its inner end supported in a 5o 
bearing, D, and terminating in an arm, E, the 
lever F, extending through the upper edge of 
the case downward, hung upon a pivot, a, 
formed as an integral part of the case, said 
lever constructed with an arm, d, to engage 55 
the arm Eof the bolt, the spring G, made from . 
wire, one end arranged in a slot in a stud, e, 
made as an integral part of the case, the other 
engaged with the bolt, and a spring, H, ar 
ranged to bear upon the lever independent of 6O 
the bolt, substantially as described. 
I5 lever is impossible. 
2O connection with the bolt, but not shown. 
I claim 
l. In a coach-latch, the combination of the 
case, the pivot a, constructed as an integral 
part of said case and internally screw-thread 
25 ed, the latch-bolt. C, the lever F, hung upon 
said pivot and constructed to engage with the 
said bolt, and the headed screw b, introduced 
in the end of said pivot, the head of the screw 
taking a bearing upon the end of the pivot, of 
3o greater diameter than the pivot, and so as to 
extend over the pivot onto the surface of the 
lever, with a spring adapted to force the said 
bolt outward, substantially as described. 
s 
45 
WILLIAM SCHOLLHORN. 
Witnesses: 
ADOLF SCHATZ, 
HENRY WILLIAM MAGG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314711.txt	. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABEL PATCHEN OF WESTFIELD, NEW YORK. 
PROCESS OF FREE ING QUCKSLVER FROM LEAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 314,711, dated March 31, 1885. 
Application filed May 21, 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ABEL PATCHEN, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Westfield, 
in the county of Chautauqua and State of New 
York, now temporarily residing in Mexico, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Process of Freeing Quicksilver from 
Lead, of which the following is a specification. 
It is well known that in straining amalgam 
of silver ores containing lead a percentage of 
lead is carried through the sack or other strain 
ing device with the quicksilver, and the latter 
is thereby rendered partially unfit for reuse; 
and the object of this invention is to free the 
quicksilver from the percentage or quantity 
of lead which is taken up by the same, or which 
passes through the straining device with the 
same, in order that the quicksilver may be 
thoroughly freed from lead, so that its action 
upon the ore in succeeding processes of amal 
gamation may be as thorough and complete 
as in any previous use of the same quicksilver. 
I have discovered that by treating the quick 
silver with a solution of sulphate of copper 
the lead in the quicksilver, accumulated by 
previous uses of the same, as above described, 
is separated there from and forms a milky in 
soluble sulphate of lead, which is washed away 
with the water, while the quicksilver, after so 
being treated, retains the copper of the solu 
tion, and will pass through the straining-sack 
free from the lead, and that the copper will - 
not pass therethrough in any material quan 
tity, but such as is retained by the quicksil 
IO 
25 
45 
1884. (No specimens.) 
ver is materially advantageous in its subse- 35 
quent use with ores containing lead. 
The quantity of the solution of the sulphate 
of copper which is employed in treating quick 
silver varies with the proportion or quantity 
of lead contained in the quicksilver, and an 
excess of the solution is harmless from the na 
ture of the ingredients of the composition. 
In order to free quicksilver of the lead ac 
quired thereby in its use as an amalgamator 
with ores containing lead, I mix with the 
quicksilver a suitable quantity of a solution 
of sulphate of copper, and at the same time 
agitate the mixture, when the lead will sepa 
rate, as above described, and may be carried 
off by over flow until the amalgamator is suf. 
ficiently cleansed. 
The use of bichloride of copper and steam 
for cleaning amalgam, as heretofore practiced, 
is more expensive and less easily practiced 
than the method herein described. 
Having described my invention and the man 
ner of practicing the same, what I claim is 
The process herein described of freeing 
quicksilver from lead, which consists in agi 
tating the same in the presence of a solution 
of the sulphate of copper, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ABEL PATCHEN. 
- 
55 
Witnesses: 
E. B. STOCKING, 
WM. S. DUWALL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314811.txt	(No Model.) 
B. J. EDWARDS. 
APPARATUS FOR COATING PHOTOGRAPHIO PLATEs. 
No. 314,811, 
Patented Mar.-31, 1885. 
 
N, PEFERs, Photo-lthographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN J. EDWARDS, OF LONDON, 
COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND. 
APPARATUS FOR COATING PHOTOGRAPH. C. PLATES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 314,811, dated March 3, 1885. 
Application filed October 22, 1884. (No model.) Patented in England June 5, 1884, No. 8,643. 
the relative speeds of the roller and the travel 
ing band which carries the plates. 
In order to coat plates of various sizes, I 
make the above-described scraper removable, 55 
and when required I replace it by another 
similar scraper of the length required to cor 
respond with the width of the plates to be 
m 
Io tion. 
To all, whon, it may concern, 
Beit known that I, BENJAMIN JOSEPH ED 
WARDS, a citizen of Great Britain, residing 
at London, in the county of Middlesex, have 
5 invented an Improved Apparatus for Coating 
Photographic Plates or Paper with Gelatine 
Emulsion, (for which I have obtained a patent 
in Great Britain No. 8,643, bearing date June 
5, 1884) of which the following is a specifica 
Myinvention, illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, relates to an improved method 
Of and apparatus for rapidly applying an 
even layer or coating of gelatine emulsion to 
15 sheets of glass, metal, paper, or other surfaces 
for photographic purposes. 
I carrying out my invention I make use of 
a trough or vessel containing the emulsion, and 
also of a metal roller working in bearings and 
2o made to revolve in the trough which contains 
the emulsion with which the plates are to be 
coated. The length of the roller and trough 
must be slightly greater than the width of the 
largest plate to be coated, and I fix the said 
25 roller and trough above and across a travel 
ing band or table which carries a continuous 
train of plates to be coated. 
In order to carry out my improved method 
of applying an even coating of emulsion to 
3o the surface of the plates, I make a scraper, 
preferably of sheet metal or ebonite, of suit 
able length and thickness, and I fix this 
scraper parallel to the roller, so as to turn on 
pins or centers at or near the lower edge, and 
by means of a lever, weight, or springs, the 
upper edge of the Scraper is made to press 
against the roller which revolves in the trough; 
and I make the scraper of a convenient shape 
and width and fix it at any suitable angle, so 
40 that the lower edge rests upon or nearly in 
contact with the surface of the plates or paper 
to be coated. When the roller is made to re 
volve in the emulsion, the solution which ad 
heres to the surface of the roller is taken off 
45 by the upper edge of the scraper, toward 
which the roller revolves. The emulsion then 
flows down the scraper to the surface of the 
plates which are carried by the traveling 
band below. By this means the plates are 
5o coated with an even layer of emulsion, the 
thickness of the coating being regulated by 
3. 5 
coated. 
- 
- 
In order to admit of coating plates of dif. 6o 
ferent degrees of thickness, Imake the centers 
or pins at the lower edge of the scraper to 
work in bearingsfixed to a movable frame, or 
pair of side rods pivoted or hinged at one 
end and carrying at the other end a roller or 65 
guide which rests upon the surface of the 
plates as they pass beneath the scraper. By 
this means the frame or rods carrying the 
scraper rises and falls in proportion to the 
thickness of the plates, which are thus al- 7o 
lowed to pass under the scraper without ob 
struction. Sometimes I attach the scraper to 
the side of the trough and support the trough 
itself, with the scraper attached, by means of 
pivots or bearings upon the movable frame or 75 
side rods before described. 
In order to facilitate the cooling or setting 
of the emulsion after it has been spread upon 
the surface of the plates, I cause the travel 
ing band carrying the plates to pass over a 8o 
table or slab artificially cooled by being kept 
partially immersed in ice-Water or other cool 
ing substance contained in a metal tray, with 
in which the slab rests, and I cover the table 
with a metal tank containing ice or other cool- 85 
ing substance. The tank is supported so that 
the under side is only a short distance above 
the slab, thus forming of the space between 
the slab and the under side of the tank or cover 
a cooling chamber or tunnel, through which go. 
the plates pass. The cover or tank also serves 
to protect the plates from light and dust after 
they have been coated with emulsion. 
By the means above described the emulsion 
is rapidly set and the plates are very quickly 95 
ready to be removed from the traveling band 
and placed in racks to dry. In practice I pre 
fer to make the traveling band in two sepa 
rate portions of unequal length-that is, I 
make two endless bands to travel in the same IOO 
direction. One of these bands, which I call 
the coating band, is used only to carry the 
 
2 
314,8i 
plates under the trough and scraper. The 
plates then pass onto the other band, which I 
call the setting band, and which carries 
the plates over the cold slab and through the 
cooling-chamber before described. Each of 
the above-mentioned bands works over a pair 
of rollers or drums fitted at one end with a 
driving-pulley, by means of which the band is 
made to travel in the required direction, the 
setting or cooling band being made to travel 
at a slightly-greater speed than the coating 
band, in order to cause the plates to separate 
from each other as they pass into the cooling 
chamber. 
For the purpose of cleaning the back or un 
der surface of the plates and removing any 
emulsion which may have been spilled onto 
the coating-band, I make another endless band 
of rubber cloth passing over a pair of rollers 
of suitable diameter, and I fix one of these 
rollers so that the cleaning-band just touches 
the coating-band and the under side of the 
plates after they are coated, and I arrange the 
other roller, which is driven by a pulley, so 
that it revolves in and carries the endless band 
through a trough of warm water. By this 
means the back or under surface of the plates 
is cleaned and the traveling bands are kept 
clean and free from emulsion. For coating 
paper With gelatine emulsion for photographic 
purposes I use my improved machinery and 
apparatus, substantially as above described, 
and in a similar manner, with the exception 
that I dispense with the cleaning-band and the 
top roller; and I use the other roller and the 
trough for the purpose of wetting or dampen 
ing the paper previous to its being coated; 
and I use another roller or squeezer for the 
purpose of removing the excess of moisture 
and causing the paper to adhere to the coat 
ing-band before being passed under the trough 
and Scraper. The paper when coated passes 
through the cooling-chamber, after which it is 
cutinto convenient lengths and hung up to dry. 
In this manner a continuous length of paper 
can be uniformly coated with an even layer of 
gelatine emulsion of any desired thickness. 
In using my improved machinery for coat 
ing plates Or paper I actuate the rollers and 
bands by means of pulleys of suitable diame 
ters to give the speed required, and driven by 
a gas-engine or other suitable motor. 
The endless bands may be made of india 
rubber cloth or other suitable flexible ma 
terial; but I prefer to make the band which 
passes through the cooling-chamber of woven 
wire or thin metal plate, in order to cool or 
set the emulsion as rapidly as possible. Some 
times, instead of ice, as above described, I use 
a current of cold air or vapor for the purpose 
of setting the emulsion on the plates or paper 
in the Cooling-chamber. In any case this cham 
ber or tunnel must be of sufficient length to 
allow of the film of emulsion being perfectly 
Set Or Stiffened before the removal of the 
plates or paper from the band. The length re 
quired Will depend greatly upon the speed at 
which the machinery is driven. With a mod 
erate speed I find fifteen feet a convenient 
length for the refrigerating chamber or tun 
nel. 
By means of my improved machinery and 
appliances, as above described, photographic 
plates or paper may be prepared or coated 
with gelatine or other sensitive emulsion with 
greater rapidity, certainty, and uniformity 
than has hitherto been practicable by any 
other method. 
The accompanying drawings show the va 
rious parts of my improved machinery as de 
scribed in the above specification. 
Similar letters indicate similar parts 
throughout, 
I do not, however, confine myself to the 
precise details of construction as shown or de 
scribed, as the same may be somewhat modi 
fied without departing from the principle of 
my invention. 
Figure I is a side elevation of my machine, 
the coating-chamber and carrier-belt being 
partially broken away, and Fig. 2 is a detail 
view of a modification. 
In Fig. 1, A is the trough containing the 
emulsion. B is the roller. C is the mov 
able and adjustable scraper. D is the pivot 
frame which carries the scraper, and some 
times the trough with scraper attached. E. 
is the guiding-roller. FF is the traveling 
band for coating. G. G. G. are rollers carry 
ing the traveling bands. H. H. are similar 
rollers to carry the endless band for cleaning 
the plates. J is the cleaning-band. K is the 
trough containing water for cleaning or wash 
ing the band. L is the traveling band carry 
ing the plates through the cooling-chamber. 
M is the cooling chamber or tunnel, closed at 
the sides and open at each end. N is the 
cold slab over which the traveling band pass 
es. O is the metal tray in which the slab 
rests. PP are the plates before and after be 
ing coated. R is the metal tank or cover 
over the cooling-chamber. S is the spring 
which presses the Scraper against the roller. 
X is a reservoir of emulsion for replenishing 
the trough. 
Fig. 2 shows one modified arrangement of 
scraper attached to the trough, down the side 
of which the emulsion may flow to the surface 
of the plates. 
EHaving now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, I 
wish it to be understood that I do not claim 
any novelty in the use of a roller revolving 
in a trough of emulsion, as hitherto used for 
applying a coating of emulsion to the under 
surface of photographic plates and for other 
purposes; nor do I claim the use of an end 
less band for carrying the plates, as described 
in Swan's English specification, A. D. 1879, 
No. 4,607; but 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an apparatus for coating sheets of 
glass or paper with gelatine emulsion for pho 
25 
35 
45 
55 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
314,811 
3. 
tographic purposes, the movable and adjust- plates with an emulsion, the combination, with 
able scraper or scrapers, of any suitable shape the pivoted frame which carries the scraper, 
or size, in combination with the roller and or the trough with scraper attached, of the I5 
trough, for the purpose of applying the coat- roller or guide connected with said frame, sub 
ing of gelatine or other emulsion to the up- stantially as described. 
per surface of the plates, substantially as de 
Scribed and shown. 
2. In an apparatus for coating photographic 
plates with an emulsion, the endless band or 
bands for cleaning the back or under surface 
of the plates, as described and shown. 
3. In an apparatus for coating photographic 
90 Cannon St., London. 
8 Fairfield Rd., Bow. 
B. J. EDWARDS. 
IO 
Witnesses: 
A. H. REED, 
I. D. POLLARD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US314911.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 314,911. 
G. B. BOOMER. 
- BOX, FOR PRESSEs, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar, 31, 1885. 
 
A1A/Y (2/ 
. 
2 ozzza21 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 314,911. 
 
G. B. BOOMER, 
BOX, FOR PRESSES. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 31, 1885. 
A//774, SSAS 
2. 
//W/A//70/2 
4 4.e. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE B. BOOMER, OF MOUNT PLEASANT, NEW YORK. 
BOX FOR PRESSES 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 31.4,91, dated March 31, 1885. 
\ 
---------- 
Application filed January 26, 1885. (No model.) 
To a 27, whom it; nay concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE B. BOOMER, re 
siding in the town of Mount Pleasant, in the 
county of Westchester and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Boxes for Presses, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, making a part of this specification. 
My invention relates more particularly to 
O the presses used for extracting oil from ole 
aginous substances, and to the manner of con 
structing the plates used on the bottom of the 
boxes and on the face of the plungers, and 
which form the pressing-surface against which 
the material is pressed, and of arranging the 
frames that secure the cloth over the same. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which like 
letters indicate like parts, Figure 1 is a view 
of the pressing-surface within the box, show 
ing the frame and cloth in position, a part of 
the latter being removed to show the arrange 
ment with the plates P beneath. Fig. 2 is a 
view of the inner pressing-surface of the box 
when adapted for two plates, showing one 
plate in position and on the opposite side the 
recess in which the plate is placed. Fig. 3 is 
a view of the under side of one of the plates. 
Fig. 4 is a sectional view through one of the 
plates. Fig. 5 is a view of the frame shown 
in position in Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a view of the 
pressing-surface of the box when adapted for 
one plate, showing the frame and cloth in po 
sition. Fig. 7 is a sectional view through 
Fig. 6. 
My improvements are designed to be used 
on any variety of presses, whether the boxes 
are arranged horizontally or vertically and 
whatever the power employed, and may be 
used on both the pressing-surfaces of the box 
and of the plunger or follower, or on only one, 
as desired. 
In the usual construction of boxes where 
plates or their equivalents have been used on 
the inner face of the box to form the pressing 
surface, these plates have been made to cover 
the entire face of the box, and when frames 
have been employed to hold the cloth in place 
such frames necessarily rest upon and are at 
lent. In this form of construction much diffi 
culty is encountered in making the frame 
heavy and thick enough to have the required 
strength, and yet not have it interfere with 
the pressing-surface of the box. 
enough to lie close against the plate and not 
interfere when the two pressing-surfaces come 
together, the frame, is not strong enough to 
hold the cloth firmly in its place, while if 
made thick and heavy enough to accomplish 
that object, it projects too far beyond the face 
of the plate and seriously interfere with the 
action of the press. 
In my improved construction, by which I 
overcome this difficulty, I make the plate 
smaller or of less extent than the face of the 
box and form the frame so as to surround 
the plate or its equivalent on all sides, by 
which method I am enabled to construct the 
frame thick and strong-as thick as the plate, 
if desired-and yet have the top edge of the 
frame project but slightly above the upper 
surface of the plate, or be even and on the 
same plane with it, as will be fully understood 
from the drawings. The plate may be fastened 
to the face of the box in the usual manner; but 
I prefer the method shown in the drawings, 
where, as will be seen, the plate or plates, in 
case there are two, rest in shallow recesses 
formed in the face of the box. These recesses, 
as shown in Fig. 2, are surrounded by the sides 
BB, and where two plates are used are sepa 
rated by a middle partition, B, and are made 
of such a depth that when the plates are placed 
in the same they will project above or beyond 
the sides-BB and partition B', as is seen in Fig. 
The plates may be secured 
2 of the drawings. 
in the recesses in any convenient manner; but 
preferably by a screw at each end, so as to be 
easily removable. Over the plates thus se 
cured, and the entire face of the box, is ex 
tended the filter-cloth D, Fig. 1, and is held 
in place by the frame F, (shown detached in 
Fig. 5,) which closely surrounds the plates and 
rests on the sides B B and middle partition, 
B, shown in Fig. 1. This frame may be just 
thick enough to correspond with the height of 
the plates above the sides B B, so that when 
in position the top of the frame will be even 
45 
25 
35 
5o tached to the top of the plate or its equiva- | with the surface of the plates, and the frame ico 
If made thin 55 
75 
SO 
90 
2 
314,9ll 
25 
and plates will present a smooth uniform 
pressing-surface; or the outer edge and the 
middle of the central division of the frame 
may be the thickest, and the sides may be 
5 beveled or slope toward the surface of the 
plates, as is shown in the drawings. This is 
the preferable form of construction, as when 
thus made the material as it is pressed is 
forced away from the sides of the box toward 
Io the plates, and the cake after pressure is thin 
nest at the edge and may easily be dislodged 
from the pressing-surface; and, moreover, 
when the central division of the frames is 
made thickest in the middle with beveled 
I5 sides, as is shown, the cake after pressure is 
separated in two parts in the center and may 
be more easily dislodged and removed from 
the box. The frame is fastened to the surface 
of the box by means of screws, as is seen in 
Fig. 1, or may be secured in any manner found 
convenient, so as to be readily removable when 
it is desired to clean or renew the cloth. As 
the frame closely surrounds the plates, it 
stretches the cloth tightly over the surface of 
the latter and holds it firm and in place dur 
ing the pressing and when the cake is removed 
after the material is pressed. 
My improved frame, constructed so as to 
surround the plate, may be used equally well 
when the plate is attached directly on the face 
of the box, instead of resting in a recess, as 
described and shown above. In all cases it is 
only necessary to arrange the thickness of the 
frame to correspond with that of the plate. 
The frame, moreover, may be so constructed 
as to secure or hold the plates in position 
Without other fastening, as by a lip or projec 
tion. 
My improved method of constructing the 
frame may be used with any plate where the 
cloth is held on by a frame; but I prefer the 
plate illustrated in the drawings, 
As I propose to construct it, the plate is 
formed of iron or steel, and for ordinary use 
about one-fourth of an inch thick, but may 
vary in thickness and material, as is found 
desirable. On the upper side of the plate nar 
row grooves are formed, extending across the 
face of the plate from edge to edge. These 
grooves, which are most conveniently made by 
a milling-machine, increasein depth from both 
edges toward the central line of the plate un 
til they pass entirely through the latter, as is 
shown in Fig. 3, which shows the back or un 
55 der side of one of the plates. In the middle 
or central line of the plate, therefore, the 
groove extends through the plate from the up 
per to the lower side, and the lower line of the 
groove is V-shaped, as will be understood from 
6O the cross-section of one of the grooves shown 
in Fig. 4. The inclination of the bottom or 
lower line of the grooves from the edge and 
the length of the slot or opening which passes 
through the plates is determined by circum 
65 stances and the use for which the press is 
adapted. The greater the length of the slot 
35 
40 
45 
or perforation, the freer the oil or other liquid 
will flow through the same, and the slot may 
be as long as is consistent with the strength of 
the plate. . 
In the face of the box AA a groove or chan 
nel, C, Fig. 2, is formed lengthwise of the box, 
directly beneath the line of openings pin the 
plate for collecting the oil or other materials 
after the same has passed through the plate. 75 
By thus constructing the plate with grooves 
across the face and passing through the same 
at one part of the plate, as shown, the plate is 
rendered much stronger than in the ordinary 
mode of construction, as the portions of the 
plates between the grooves are left intact and 
of the full thickness where they cross the 
channel or leader on the face of the plate 
bed, and thus cannot be affected by the press 
ure brought to bear on them when in use, 85 
and the grooves are made on both sides of 
the plate at one and the same operation, and 
all trouble of making a different set of grooves 
on the under side of the plate is avoided; and, 
moreover, on account of the nature and extent 90 
of the opening through the plate, the liquid 
passes readily and quickly through the same, 
and its flow is not checked or interfered with. 
Plates thus grooved and perforated according 
to my improvement may be used in any con- 95 
struction of box and on any form of press, 
whether horizontal or vertical, and may be 
employed whenever plates or their equivalents 
are used; and it is not necessary that the plates 
should be of the form and construction shown 
in the drawings, as they may be round or of 
any desired shape and adapted to any style 
of press. 
While I prefer the construction and combi 
nation of the plates and frame above described, 
the two plates may be used by themselves with 
out the cloth and frame, being held in place 
in the recess in any convenient manner. In 
that case the sides B B of the recess and the 
middle partition, B, should be high enough to 
be even with the top surface of the plates, and 
it is evident that my combination of parts may 
be used with plates grooved in any other way 
than that described. A single plate may also 
be used, with or without the frame, to cover 
the face of the box or plunger. By my im 
proved construction of plate, therefore, I ob 
tain a stronger and better plate than those 
commonly used, and by making the plates so 
small that they lie within the sides of the frame 
any strength required can be given to the 
frame, and without raising its inner edge above 
the level of the plate more than is desired. 
The cloth is also easily and tightly stretched 
over the surface of the plates and can be fast 
ened more securely than is possible by the 
methods now in use. 
What I claim is- 
1. In oil-presses, a frame for holding the 
cloth adapted to surround the plate or press 
ing-surface, as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In oil-presses, the combination, with a 
m 
I2O 
I25 
OO 
IO 
I5 
314,911. 
3 
perforated plate or plates, of the frame F for 
holding the cloth adapted to surround the grooved and perforated plates PP and re- 15 
plate, as and for the purposes set forth. 
5. In oil-presses, the combination, with the 
cessed box or plunger to receive the same, of 
3. In oil-presses, the combination, with a the frame F and filter-cloth D, substantially 
5 perforated plate or plates and recessed box as and for the purposes set forth. 
or plunger to receive the same, of the frame 
F for holding the cloth adapted to surround 
the plate, as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. In oil-presses, a plate having grooves 
IO across the surface increasing in depth from 
the edges and passing through the plate at or 
near the center, substantially as described, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
Dated this 24th day of January, 1885. 
GEO. B. BOOMER. 
Witnesses: 
F. L. GROSS, 
JOHN E. LAW. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315011.txt	(No Model.) 
L. M, CURRY. 
SWITCH STAND. 
- 
No. 315,011. 
Patented Apr. 7, 1885. 
 
 
fills 
(STINSE 
SAR 
S 
a. 
SEItal 
2. 
laza/e722a: 
C/27/ 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS M. CURRY, OF JACKSON, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
OSWALD. F. JORDAN, OF SAME PLACE. . 
SWITCH STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 315,011, dated April 7, 1885. 
a. 
Application filed February 16, 1884. (No model.) 
- 
to all, Luhon, it Tay concern, 
Be it known that I, LEWIS M. CURRY., a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Jack 
Son, county of Jackson, State of Michigan, 
have invented a new and useful Switch-Stand, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention has for its object certain im 
provements in such devices to increase their 
utility and insure greater safety. 
In the accompanying drawings forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation with parts broken away and the . 
draw-bar detached; Fig. 2, a top and sectional 
view looking down from line 22 in Fig. 1; Fig. 
3, a broken portion of Fig. 1 in vertical sec 
tion on line 11 in Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a side ele 
vation of a part of Fig. 1, showing the side 
opposite to that in said figure; Fig. 5, same as 
Fig. 2, with parts removed; Fig. 6, a plan of 
a switch and a section on line 33 in Fig. 1; 
and Fig. 7 an enlarged perspective of a part 
Fig. 6. 
The leaning standards B of the stand are 
provided with a base-plate, D, and a top plate, 
a. The top plate has a central hole, e, in 
which the round bearing or axle c of the ro 
tatable carriage c is located. 
Through a square hole in the carriage and 
its axle c the perpendicular signal-shaft P is 
at at are notches to receive the pivoted lever 
', as in other switch-stands. In addition to 
this mode of locking, which is deemed unsafe, 
I have provided the carriage e with a verti 
cally-falling pin-lock, f, adapted to enter holes 
a in the top plate, Figs. 5 and 3. With this 
construction the pin f and lever rare raised, 
as in Fig. 4, and the carriage and signal shaft 
are turned to the desired position, when the 
lock-pin will fall by its own weight to the posi 
tion shown in Fig. 3. The lower part of the 
lock-pin f is enlarged, forming a shoulder at 
the top of Said enlarged portion adapted to in 
tercept the upper end of the recess d, and pre 
vent the lock-pin from being drawn out when 
raising it. 
The carriage is provided with a flange, e, to 
cover the lock-holesac. ttarestops to limit the 
movement of the carriage, 
located. 
- 
The upper portion of the shaft P is provided 5o 
As the standards B B are located at an ob- 7o 
with the usual day and night signals, A and L. 
The lower end of the standard P terminates 
in a crank, gy. 
The base-plate D is provided with a notch 
or recess, v, beneath the ends of the crankly 55 
when said crank is in the position shown in 
Fig. 6. By this means the end of the switch , 
draw-bar h, which is perforated for the pur 
pose, can be inserted in the recess and slipped 
over the ends of the crank. The draw-bar at 6o 
this time is in the position shown by the 
broken bar h in dotted lines in Fig. 6. By 
carrying said bar to its used position, as in 
said figure, it cannot slip off owing to the por 
tions of the plate D, which are then beneath 65 
it. In Fig. 6 the stand is shown in its rela 
tion to the switch draw-bar h, and a switch, 
the latter being illustrated by the rails R. R. of 
a track. 
lique angle to the vertical shaft P, a proper 
connection of the top of the stand is had with 
said shaft, and the base of the standards does 
not conflict with the operating means connect 
ed with the lower end of the vertical shaft P. 75 
(See Figs. 6 and 1.) 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters . 
Patent, is 
1. The stand having the upper plate pro 
vided with the lock-holes, in combination with 
a carriage adapted to rotate, and provided 
with a lock-pin and with a base-flange adapt 
ed to cover said lock-holes, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination, in a switch-stand, of the 
plate provided with the lock-holes, the car 
riage provided with the lock-pin recess, and 
a lock-pin having the shoulders adapted as set 
forth, substantially as described. 
In testimony of the foregoing I have here 
unto subscribed my name in the presence of 
two witnesses. 
85 
9O 
LEWIS M. CURRY. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. O. B. HALL, 
JoHN H. CHASE. 
() 
15 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315111.txt	(No Model,) 
E BELDEN. 
DOOR OR SHUTTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 315,111, 
Patented Apr. 7, 1885. 
Zey / 
WITNESS: 
. 
as-s-s-s-s 
By 
INVENTOR 
AfroRNEY 
N. PETERs, Photo-tilhographer. Washingtoll. D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
E. BELDEN. 
DOOR OR SHUTTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 315,111, 
Patented Apr. 7, 1885. 
AD 
As 
RSX N 
Z 
C 
As 
- 
Zo' 
 
 
d 
a 
| 
 
f 
4 
4II: 
f 
WITNESS: 
IWWEWTOR 
ATTORNEY 
PErers, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMERSON BELDEN, OF GREEN ISLAND, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO ALBERT CRAMPTON, OF SAME PLACE. 
DOOR OR SHUTTER. 
3.ECTICAEIOS forming part of Isetters Patent No. 315, lll, dated April 7, 1885. 
Application filed December 19, 1 SS4. (No model.) 
To all whon, it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, EMERSON BELDEN, a 
resident of Green Island, in the county of Al 
bany and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Doors and Shutters; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, that will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts in the 
several figures therein. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
doors and shutters, and more particularly to 
the adjustment and retention in place of the 
panels and mullions therein. 
The objects of my invention are, first, in the 
manufacture of doors and shutters, to easily 
and quickly adjust the panels and mullions in 
their proper position; second, to provide for 
the expansion and contraction of panels and 
mullions without injury to the doors or shut 
ters or change of the relative position of pan 
els, mullions, stiles, or rails; third, to effect a 
saving in the quantity of material required for 
the manufacture of doors and shutters. 
- My invention consists in providing a yield 
ing fillet or tongue to separate the inclosed 
edges of a panel or mullion from the bottom 
of its inclosing-groove within the edges of the 
stiles, rails, or mullions. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a side elevation 
of a door, or section of a door or shutter. Fig. 
2 is a cross-section of same, Somewhat exag 
gerated in thickness, taken at the broken line 
a gy in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a cross-section of one 
of the stiles, taken at broken line a gy in Fig. 
6, showing position of fillet a, and in dotted 
lines the relative position of an inclosed edge 
of a panel. Figs. 4 and 5 are similar cross 
sectional views showing modified forms of the 
fillet. Fig. 6 is a plan view of the groove and 
inclosed fillet in a short portion of a stile. 
Figs. 7, 8, and 9 are similar plan views show 
ing modified forms of the fillet. Fig. 10 is a 
side view of parts shown in Fig. 9. 
25 
35 
45 
Fig. 1 represents in general form of con- 5o 
struction an ordinary three-panel door in 
which the uprights or stiles A A' are securely 
connected by the top and bottom rails, D and 
D', the space therein inclosed being filled in 
with the panels B and connecting-mullions C. 55 
It is well known that wood, and especially 
the light and soft woods of which the greater 
number of doors are constructed, is consider 
ably affected by the humidity of the atmos 
phere, which is in a large degree changeable. 6o 
When moisture is absorbed from the atmos 
phere or other sources, wood swells and ex 
pands, and when the moisture is evaporated 
and expelled from the wood it contracts. The 
expansion and contraction laterally of the grain 65 
of the wood is much greater than its longitudi 
nal expansion. The rails which connect the 
stiles at their ends, and, usually, at their middle 
parts also, are necessarily constructed with the 
grain of the Wood extending longitudinally of 7o 
the rails from stile to stile, while the inclosure 
within the stiles and rails is filled with the 
panels and mullions, all placed side by side 
with the stiles and with each other, with the 
grain of each part running in the same direc 
tion, and the panels of a door, being thinner 
than the other parts, are more sensitive to at 
lmospherical changes. Consequently some al 
lowance must be made for the unequal expan 
Sion of the parts, or the panels will bend so as 
to concave' or convex, or will force the 
stiles from the rails, or both, and for contrac 
tion, or the panels will draw away from the 
mullions and stiles, leaving an unseemlyaper 
ture in the door. 
It has been customary heretofore to cut a 
deep groove in the edges of the stiles, mull 
ions, and rails in which the edges of the 
panels were inserted, as shown by the dotted 
lines in Fig. 1, in which the outer lines, d, rep 
resent the bottom of the groove, and the inner 
lines, b, the external edges of the panels and 
mullions, the ends of the mullions being cut 
down to form tongues of the same thickness 
as the panels. A vacant space was thus pro 
vided between the edges of the panels and the 
bottoms of the grooves in the stiles and mull 
ions, only to be occupied when the panels and 
75 
- 
go 
95 
5 
IC 
y 
- 
2 
35,111 
mullions expanded sufficiently to fill it. The ling the adjustment and position of the parts 
defects in such a form of construction are that 
Or the connection of the rails with the stiles 
when the panels and mullions are subjected 
to permit the door to sag. 
to heat or contracted to their limit they move 
The parts are also prevented from rattling, 
and slide about easily within the grooves, 
if the edges of the panels happen to be thin 
which at the same time and for the same callse 
ner than the grooves. A material saving of 
become larger or wider, and if they all slide 
material is also effected, as the panels can be 
in one direction, as they are quite likely to in 
made narrower without danger of their slip 
transportation, the panels will be so far dis 
ping to one side to form an aperture through 
placed as to form an opening through the door 
the door. Instead of forming the fillet in the 
between a panel and stile or mullion, and if 
bottom of the groove, it may be a thin tongue 
the panels are raised,like the middle panel in 
projecting from the edge of the panel, as shown 
Figs. 1 and 2, the slightest movement from 
by dotted lines in Fig. 4. 
the center would mar the appearance of the 
The fillet may be a thin strip inserted in the 
door. 
Wood at the bottom of the groove, as shown at 
A great amount of care and time is required 
Fig. 5, which may be of wood, rubber, or any 
in their manufacture to adjust the panels and 
other yielding material. 
mullions in their proper positions, as a slight 
Instead of a strip there may be employed 
variation would increase the exposed surface 
pegs, tacks, or nails, as shown in Fig. 7, or 
of one panel at the expense of another. By 
Springs of various forms, as shown in Figs. 8, 
introducing withia the grooves a fillet or Some 
9, and 10, a' being a coil-spring, and a' being 
yielding substance to extend from the botton 
a thin sheet-metal spring. 
of the grooves in the stiles and mullions and 
In projecting the fillet a from the bottom of 
rails, when desired, out through the space 
groove d, I do not wish to limit its location to 
heretofore left vacant to the edges of the 
the center of the groove, as it may be on one 
panels, I am able to entirely overcome the dif 
side of the center, or even integral with a side 
ficulties above enumerated. 
wall of the groove, terminating in a shoulder, 
I prefer to leave a narrow fillet of Wood, a, 
g, Fig. 4, at a height proper to form the re 
in the bottom of the groove, as shown in Fig. 
quired stop. 
3, and in Fig. 1, where a portion of the stile is 
The pegs, tacks, or nails may be inserted in 
broken away, exposing it to view. It can be 
the edges of the panels, as well as in the bot. 
thus made by the same tool that makes the 
toms of the grooves, and when the stops are 
groove and at the same time. With these 
made of metal or other rigid material the yield. 
fillets projecting out from the bottoms of all 
ing to the pressure of expansion in the parts is 
the grooves just far enough to come in contact 
divided between the part in which the stop is 
with the inserted edges of panels and mullions 
fixed or inserted and the part which comes in 
they serve as stops therefor, and the door's can 
contact with the exposed portion of the stop. 
be put together much more easily and quick 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
ly, as no adjustment of the panels and mull 
by Letters Patent, is 
ions is required. 
1. In a paneled door or shutter, a yielding 
As the parts are put together in a dry and 
stop between the edge of a panel and the bot 
contracted condition, the first change to which 
tom of a panel-inclosing groove in a stile, rail, 
they are subjected after construction is likely 
or mullion, substantially as and for the pur 
to be that of expansion. 
poses set forth. 
As the panels and mullions expand the ef 
2. In a paneled door or shutter, a project 
fect is simply to compress and flatten the fil 
ing fillet or tongue of wood in the bottom of a 
lets, which may be made very thin to yield 
panel-inclosing groove in a stile, rail, or mull 
readily to pressure. 
ion integral with said stile, rail, or mullion, 
As the parts do not expand without absorb 
substantially as described, and for the pur 
ing moisture in proportion to their degree of 
poses set forth. 
f 
expansion, the fillets, by reason of their moist 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
condition, yield more readily, and on becom 
hand this 16th day of December, 1884. 
ing dry again return to their former positions 
as the edges of the panels recede from them. 
The parts may thus be repeatedly subjected 
to expansion and contraction without disturb 
EMERSON BELDEN. 
GEO. A. MOSHER, 
W. H. HoLLISTER, Jr. 
Witnesses: 
65 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315211.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 315,2ll. 
G. W., AKINS, 
WHEEL PLOW. 
Patented Apr. 7, 1885. 
 
Z7z (vezzzaz; 
%2. 2. /7/47s. Y2 
s 
26. 
-1. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. AKINS, OF 
NASH VILLE, ILLINOIS. 
WHEEL 
PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION gorming part of Letters Patent No. 315,211, dated April 7, 1885. 
Application filed June 28, 1884. (No model.) 
- 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W.A.KINs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Nash 
ville, county of Washington, and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Wheel-Plows, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the axle-bar of wheel-plows and the attach 
ment of the operating-lever thereto, whereby 
the plow or plows supported by the axle crank 
Or cranks are more readily raised and lowered 
than by the methods now in use. 
Figure 1 represents the frame of a wheel 
plow With my improved axle having a pair of 
double cranks attached thereto. Fig.2 rep 
resents the frame with my improved axle hav 
ing one double crank attached thereto. Fig. 3 
represents the axle formed with a single double 
Crank for supporting plow-beam. Fig. 4 rep 
resents the axle formed with double cranks 
for supporting the plow-beams. 
Like letters and figures refer to like parts. 
The axle is preferably formed of one con 
tinuous bar having a straight spindle on a 
line with the axle for the land-side wheel, a 
crank-arm on the furrow side, a double crank 
Or cranks so bent or curved as to present a 
point of leverage above the line of the axle 
when the plow is at the bottom of the furrow 
in ordinary plowing. 
The operating-lever is connected with the 
bent double crank at 4, so that all the advan 
tage of a projecting rigid lever-arm for oper 
ating the axle is secured without any of its 
accompanying disadvantages, increased cost of 
construction, and liability of breaking or be 
coming loosened. 
It will be seen that by the construction of my 
improved axle the greatest possible strength, 
being the full strength of the axle-bar itself, 
with a more advantageous application of the 
leverage thereto, is secured. 
A is the spindle on land side. 
B is the crank-arm with spindlefon furrow 
side. 
C is the double crank which supports the 
plow-beam, bent or curved above the line of 
the axle and at a proper distance therefrom, so 
as to present an advantageous point of lever 
age for the attachment of the lever-bar. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
In practice I prefer that the bent portion of 
the double crank, which is between the point 
of lever attachment and the axle, should be 
vertical, or approximately so, when the plow is 
at the bottom of the furrow in ordinary plow 
ing. The axle is rotated by means of lever 1 
through link-lever 2, connected with the bent 
double crank at 4. 
D is the frame, journaled on the axle-bar 
and supporting pole E and seat 6. 
5 is the segmental rack-bar with which le 
ver 1 engages. The continuous axle-bar C in 
cludes the several subordinate parts desig 
nated by other letters-as A, the land-sidespin 
dle; B, the furrow crank-arm, and f the spin 
dle connected thereto; also, d, the upward-bent 
portion of said axle-bar, and e the portion bent 
downwardly therefrom at 9 to the line of the 
plow-support at h. 
Fig. 1 represents the axle in the position as 
sumed when plowing, the crank-arm B being 
depressed and the wheels in the furrow. When 
the plow is to leave the field, the lever 1 is 
drawn toward the driver, the plow being lifted 
by the elevation of the bent double crank C. 
and the furrow - wheel spindle is thereby 
brought to the level of the land-side spindle. . 
This form of axle may be applied with equal 
advantage to a sulky or gang plow, the same 
function being performed by the bent double 
crank whether the leverage is applied to op 
erate one or more in use. 
What I claim as new and of my invention, 
and for which I ask Letters Patent of the United 
States, is 
1. In a wheel-plow, in combination with the 
wheels and frame, a continuous axle-bar hav 
ing spindle A on its land side, crank-arm B 
and spindle f on the furrow side, a double 
crank having parts d and e, forming a bend or 
curve at 9, and lever attachment at 4 near said 
bend, substantially as set forth and described. 
2. In a wheel-plow having an axle with a 
double crank, said crank so bent as to form 
the parts d and e, in combination with the op 
erating-lever and supporting-frame, substan 
tially as set forth. 
GEORGE W. AKINS. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. HALL. 
J. H. STEWARD. 
55 
65 
75 
go 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315311.txt	(No Model,) 
No. 315,311. 
L. A., MO CORD. 
- REIN HOLDER, 
Patented Apr. 7 
1885. 
N 'N 
RN S EN 
} . 
JVITAESSES 
a 
--- 
Attorneys 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LUTHER A. McCORD, OF CLINTON, SOUTH CAROLINA. 
REIN-HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATIOIN forming part of letters Patent No. 35,311, dated April 7, 1885. 
Application filed June 5, 1884. 
(No model.) - 
O 
to all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LUTHER A. MCCORD, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Clin 
ton, in the county of Laurens and State of 
South Carolina, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Rein-Holders; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters or figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a vertical sec 
tional view of my device. Fig. 2 is a front 
view of the same, and Figs. 3 and 4 are trans 
verse sectional views. 
This invention has relation to rein-holding 
attachments for buggies, carriages, and wag 
ons; and it consists in the construction and 
novel arrangement of devices, as hereinafter 
set forth, and pointed out in the appended 
claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
designates the base-plate of the attachment, 
which is made with perforations B for the pas 
Sage of fastening-screws. Near one end of the 
plate A rises therefrom the end portion C of 
an arm, D, the main portion of which extends 
parallel to the base-plate and terminates in 
a beveled or pointed end, E. The inside of 
the arm D opposite to the base-plate is re 
cessed, as shown, so that there is a seat be 
tween the end portion C and the shoulder F 
of the point portion, in which is pivoted the 
elongated double cam G, or three-faced cam. 
This cam has its end journals seated in bear 
ings h of the portion C of the arm and of the 
shoulder F. Usually the cam consists of an 
elongated piece of wood or metal of elliptical 
35 
O 
 
45 
form in cross section; but a triangular sec 
tional form having rounded sides may be em. 
ployed. This piece of wood or metal K forms 
the core of the calm, its surface consisting of 
a piece of tubing of india-rubber, which is 
slipped over the core, as shown at Z. 
To the outer face of the plate A, opposite 
the rubber-covered cam, is secured a flat rub 
ber strip, V, the end of which opposite to the 
beveled inner surface of the point E of the 
arm D is also beveled, so that the rein or reins 
can be readily slipped into the, interval be 
tween the strip V and the rubber-covered cam. 
G. When the reins are in position, a slight 
pull thereon serves to cause the cam to turn a 
little on its journals, SO that it will compress 
the reins between its rubber surface and the 
base-strip V and hold them securely. 
- 
Having described this invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
As an improved article of manufacture, the 
rein-holder herein described, consisting of the 
base-plate A and the recessed parallel arm D, 
having its upper end pointed, as at E, the 
rubber-covered cam-shaped roller Gjournaled 
centrally and vertically in the said recessed 
arm, and the base-strip V, secured to the inner 
side of the base-plate nearly its entirelength, 
and tapering at its upper portion opposite to 
the tapering or pointed head of the said re 
cessed arm, the whole being adapted to oper 
ate without the use of springs, substantiall 
aS specified. 
. 
. 
. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
LUTFIER A. MCCORD, 
65 
7.) 
75. 
Witnesses: 
PHIL C. MASI, 
THEO. MUNGEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315411.txt	(No Model.) 
J. HUCHES, 
AUTOMATIC DRILL, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 315,4ll. 
Patent 
5. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
 
 
J. HUGHES, 
AUTOMATIC DRILL. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 7, 1885, 
(No Model,) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
f 
s 
 
El 
S 
 
 
W 
EEEESS 
i S. 
S. S 
S. 
IntyrTN s 
& Esk 
k 
s 
 
I 
s 
s E. 
sis: 
Eins 
A 
Fili S. 
s 
 
 
s 
 
 
EE 
N 
pters, photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES HUGHES, OF AUBURN, NEW YORK. 
AUTOMATIC DRILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 315,411, dated April 7, 1885. 
Application filed June 28, 1884. (No model.) 
2O the line gy y in Fig. 3. 
To all uhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES HUGHES, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Auburn, in the county of Cayuga and State 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Automatic Drills; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
Io the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form a part of this 
Specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
I5 proved automatic or self-reversing drill. Fig. 
2 is a side view of the same. Fig. 3 is a front 
view. Fig. 4 is a vertical sectional view taken 
on the line as a in Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a top view, 
and Fig. 6 is a horizontal sectional view on 
The same letters refer to the same parts in 
all the figures. 
This invention relates to drilling-machines; 
and it has for its object to provide a ma 
25 chine of this class which shall be automatic 
in its action, or self-reversing, and in which 
provision shall be made for regulating the 
point at which the reversing motion shall take 
place. 
3O The invention consists in the improved con 
struction and arrangement of parts, to be 
hereinafter described, and particularly pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the drawings, A designates a suitable 
35 upright mounted upon a base, B, and pro 
vided upon its front side with a rack-bar or 
series of teeth, C, engaging a pinion, D, which 
is secured upon a transverse shaft, E, mounted 
in suitable ears or bearings formed upon a 
4O vertically-sliding carriage, F, carrying the ta 
ble or platform G, which is provided with a 
perforation, H, to receive the drill-point when 
the machine is operated. One end of the 
shaft E carries a ratchet-wheel, I, engaging a 
45 spring-pawl, J, which is pivoted to the side 
of the carriage, which is by this mechanism 
retained securely in any position to which it 
may be adjusted. The opposite end of the 
shaft E is provided with a hand-wheel, K, by 
- 
 
means of which it may be conveniently ma-.5o . 
. . . . . . . 
. 
. 
. 
nipulated. 
. 
. 
V is the horizontal shaft, arranged in suit- 75. 
The upper end of the upright A is pro 
vided with a pair of horizontal arms, Li Li, 
which form the top or head of the machine. 
An additional arm, M, extends in an upward 55 
direction, as shown. Suitable bearings are 
provided in the said arm M and in a plate, . 
N, at the rear ends of the arms L for a shaft, 
O, having at its rear end a cone-pulley, P, 
adapted to receive motion from any suitable 6O. 
motive power. 
"... ...i 
The front end of the shaft O. is provided 
with a bevel-wheel, Q, engaging a pinion, R, 
which is seated or mounted in a suitable bear- 
. . 
ing between the front ends of the arms II, 65 . . . 
The said pinion has a central opening in 
which slides the shank S of the drill T, which 
may be connected in any suitable manner to: 
the lower end of the said shank. The shank 
S is to be connected with the pinion by means 7o. 
of a key, U, which, while it permits the 
shank to slide vertically, will cause it to re 
volve with the pinion when the machine is 
operated. . 
able bearings above the main shaft of the ma 
chine, and provided with a gear-wheel, W, 
receiving motion from a pinion, X, upon the 
main shaft. The shaft W also carries a cone 
pulley, X, connected by means of a belt or 8O 
band, Y, with a cone-pulley, Z, upon another 
horizonal shaft, A. The latter is provided 
with a pinion, B', meshing with a spur-wheel, 
C, mounted loosely upon a shaft, B. The hub 
of the said spur-wheel is provided at its front 85 
end with an annular groove, D", over which 
is fitted the end of a forked spring, E, which 
is bolted to the frame of the machine. The 
rear end of the hub forms a clutch, F, 
adapted to engage a clutch-collar, G, which is 90 
arranged to slide longitudinally upon the . 
shaft, with which it is connected by means of 
a transverse pin, G", working in a slot, H', 
in the said clutch-collar. The latter is pro 
vided with a central annular groove, I, adapt-95 
ed to receive the forked end of a lever, J, 
which is pivoted to the side of the frame of 
the machine. The rear end of the clutch-col 
; : 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
2 
- 
315,411 
SC 
lar G' forms a clutch adapted to engage a 
clutch, K, formed upon the hub of a pinion, 
L', which is mounted loosely upon the shaft 
D, and which engages the gear-wheel Wupon 
the shaft V. 
The shaft D is provided near its front end 
With a Worm, M', engaging a spur-wheel, N', 
upon one end of a transverse shaft, O'. The 
other end of the said shaft is provided with a 
pinion, P, engaging a rack-bar, Q, which forms 
a part of the frame R in which the drill 
shank is mounted. It will be seen that when 
this pinion is revolved in either direction the 
said frame, with the drill, will be raised or 
lowered, as the case may be, while at the same 
time a rotary motion may be imparted to the 
drill by means of the bevel-wheel mounted 
upon its shank and the bevel-wheel upon the 
end of the main shaft engaging therewith. 
The front end of the shaft D is provided 
with a hand-wheel, S', by means of which it 
may be conveniently manipulated for the pur 
pose of adjusting the drill when power is not 
applied to the machine. 
The main frame of the machine is provided 
at its front end with brackets T', forming 
bearings for a vertically-sliding rod, U', which 
is provided with stops or collars W, adjust 
able upon the said rod by means of set-screws 
V'. The lower end of the said rod is bent lat 
erally, So as to form an arm, X, terminating 
in a handle, Y. The said handle is pivotally 
connected with a lever, Z, mounted upon a 
stud, A", upon the side of the frame, and re 
tained by the action of a spring, B", the ten 
sion of which may be regulated by 
means of 
a nut, C'. The rear end of the said lever is 
provided with an upwardly-extending arm, 
D', the upper end of which is connected by a 
rod, E", with the main handle. The said 
arm is also connected by means of a link or 
joint, F, with the free end of the lever J, 
which may thus be operated. 
The frame which carries the drill-shank is 
provided with a forwardly-extending arm, H', 
having a perforation, I", which accommodates 
the vertically-sliding rod U", and adapted to 
engage the collars or stops upon the latter. 
The operation of this invention is as foll 
lows: When the drill is to be operated, the 
clutch-collar G' is placed in contact with the 
clutch upon spur-wheel C, and the shaft O 
is now revolved, imparting motion, through 
pinion X to cog-wheel W, the shaft V of 
Which will communicate motion through its 
cone-pulley and belt Y, to the shaft. A through 
its (shaft A's) cone-pulley Z, and the pinion 
B upon this shaft will engage spur-wheel C, 
Which, by being engaged with collar G', will 
revolve shaft D and the worm upon the same. 
The Worm will revolve spur-wheel N' and 
shaft O', and pinion P' upon this shaft will 
lower the rack-bar Q and the drill, feeding 
the latter to the work, and it will be seen that 
the pinions communicating revolution from 
One shaft to another will mesh with cog-wheels 
upon the shafts to be revolved--as, for in 
stance, pinion X meshing with cog-wheel W., 
and pinion B' meshing with spur-wheel C-so 
that the motion imparted to the drill will be 
comparatively slow; but when the drill-frame 
strikes the lower stop W, the arm X", lever 
: Z, and arm D" will push the main handle or 
lever J' back, disengaging clutch G' from the 
spur-wheel C, and causing its rear end to 
engage clutch K upon pinion L, which is at 
all times engaged and revolved by spur-wheel 
W, and the shaft D and its worm will now be 
revolved in the opposite direction by being 
meshed directly with spur-wheel W, revolv 
ing within spur-wheel C, causing the worm to 
revolve the pinion N' and P' in the direction 
opposite to its former revolution, raising the 
rack-bar and drill-frame at a comparatively 
greater speed, the spur-wheel W of a larger 
diameter engaging pinion L of a smaller di 
ameter. When, now, the drill-frame and its 
arm H' arrive at the upper stop W, it will 
push rod U' upward, bringing clutch G' in en 
gagement with the clutch upon spur-wheel C, 
as before, through arms X Z D'' and main 
hagdle J', repeating the first-described opera 
tion. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
1. In a drilling-machine, the combination, 
with a suitable frame, of a vertically-mova 
ble drill-carrying frame having a forwardly 
extending arm, a guide-l'od traveling in a per 
foration in the said arm, and provided with ad 
justable sleeves or stops, and having at its low 
er end a lateral extension, mechanism connect 
ing the latter with a reversing-lever, a clutch 
arranged to be operated by the said lever, and 
sliding upon and revolving with a horizontal 
shaft having at its front end a worm arranged 
to operate the drill-carrying frame, and a 
pair of spur-wheels adapted to engage the said 
double clutch and to receive motion from the 
main shaft of the machine, substantially asset 
forth. 
2. In a drilling-machine, the combination 
of a vertically-traveling drill-carrying frame 
having a vertical rack-bar, a shaft having a 
pinion at each end, one of the said pinions 
engaging the said rack-bar, a horizontal shaft 
having a worm at one end engaging the other 
of the said pinions, and having means, as de 
scribed, for having its motion reversed at each 
end of the line of travel of the drill-carrying 
frame, and a hand-wheel at the end of the hori 
Zontal shaft for adjusting the drill independ 
ently of the reversing mechanism, as and for 
the purpose shown and set forth. 
3. In an automatic reversing mechanism for 
a drilling-machine, the combination of the 
shaft D', operating the drill-feeding mechan 
ism, the pinion C, having half-clutch F, re 
volving upon shaft D', and meshing with a 
pinion receiving motion from the drive-shaft, 
the sliding collar G', turning with the shaft 
90 
OO 
II5, 
2O 
IO 
I5 
2O 
25 
45 
GO 
65 
3. 
 
315,4ll 
 
3. 
D', having half-clutches at both ends, and 
means, substantially as set forth, for sliding 
it upon shaft D, spring E, bearing against 
pinion C, and pinionL, having half-clutch K, 
5 and meshing with a cog-wheel receiving mo 
tion from the drive-shaft, as and for the pur 
pose shown and set forth. 
In testimony that Iclaim the foregoing as my 
own I have hereunto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES HUGHES. . . . 
Witnesses: 
PATRICK McLAUGHILIN, 
LAWRENCE C. WEITE. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315511.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 315,5ll. 
T. KAYS 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
STEAM BOILER, 
- 
Patented Apr. 14, 1885. 
/ 297. Z. 
r 
 
  
 
H Z 
H 
N. percRs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
(No Model,) 
No. 315,511. 
ac ac 
T. KAYS 
STEAM BOILER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 14, 1885, 
G. 
s 
Rawaii , 
4. 
 
WITNESSES: 
-6 were 
. . 
. 
INVENTOR 
BY leavi (JG 
O-- 1. 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. Pereas. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
THOMAS KAYS, OF NEWTON, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE LAWSON NON 
EXPLOSIVE BOILER COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STEAM-Boile R. 
SPECIFICATIoN forming part of Letters Patent No. 315,5ll, dated April 14, 1885. 
Application filed May 27, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS KAYs, of New 
ton, in the county of Sussex and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Steam-Boilers, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
My invention has primarily for its object 
the prevention of explosions of steam boilers 
or generators used for working engines, and 
for other purposes. It also has for its objects, 
in connection with such steam boiler or gen 
erator, the prevention of foaming, priming, 
or entrainment, also of incrustation and cor 
rosion; and it furthermore has for its many 
objects or uses, among others, securing the 
generation and delivery of dry steam direct 
from the boiler, and the safer use of steam at 
high pressures. 
The invention generally is an improvement 
upon that described in Letters Patent No. 
227,024, granted to Daniel T. Lawson, April 
27, 1880, which invention was for a method 
of preventing concussive strains in boilers, 
due to the intermittent escape of steam into 
the cylinder of an engine, that consisted in re 
tarding or prolonging the flow of the steam 
from the water to the steam-space through a 
greater length of time than is allowed for the 
escape of the same quantity of steam from the 
steam-space; and which invention further 
more consisted in a steam-boiler adapted to 
carry a permanent bulk of water, having a 
partition dividing the main steam-space from 
the water-space, with one or more openings in 
said partition controlled by a valve, if desired, 
of less aggregate area than that of the throt 
tle-valve or opening through which the steam 
is led from the steam-space of the boiler to 
the cylinder of the engine. 
The invention comprises an additional par 
tition or diaphragm dividing the steam-space 
of the boiler arranged above or beyond the 
partition which divides the main steam-space 
from the water-space of a boiler, as above de 
scribed, such additional partition having open 
ings in it for the passage of the steam through 
it of a somewhat greater aggregrate area than 
that of the openings in the first partition, 
5O but still of less aggregate area than that of 
35 
25 
45 
. 
the opening through which the steam passes : 
from the steam-space of the boiler to the cyl 
inder of the engine, whereby the results sought 
to be obtained are more perfectly secured. 
The invention also includes the providing of 55 
said perforated diaphragm with short tubes 
in the perforations thereof, whereby the ve 
locity of the steam is increased as it passes 
through the orifices in the diaphragms, and 
by means of which all sediment passing to 6o 
the upper or outside of said diaphragms is 
prevented from returning to the water-space 
in the boiler or from being carried into the 
engine. Furthermore, the invention com 
prises certain valvular devices in connection 65 
with said diaphragms, whereby sediment set 
tling in certain angular spaces formed by the 
junction of the diaphragms with the shell of 
the boiler may be readily blown off at the will 
of the engineer without any interference with 7o 
or stopping the regular operation of the boiler. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is an end view of a boiler with my 
invention applied. Fig. 2 is a vertical trans 
verse section of the same on the line at a in 
Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a broken central longitudi 
nal section on the line y) in Fig. 1, and Fig. 
4 a broken horizontal section thereof on the 
irregular line & 2 in Fig. 1. 
. 
. 
The boiler, as represented in the drawings, 
is a horizontal one, and presents an oblong 
figure in transverse section for its general con-85 
tour, the same being divided internally by two 
arched diaphragms, A, B, arranged one above 
the other, and extending the whole length of 
the boiler, and forming three separate steams 
spaces or chambers, CD E, from the upper go 
one, E, of which the steam is passed by a pipe, 
S, to the engine. The lower interior dia 
phragm, A, may be a part of a cylindrical 
shell of which the body of the boiler is com 
posed, as here shown, the same dividing the g5 
steam-space above it from the water-space of 
the boiler, also forming a steam-space below . 
it immediately above the water, and the upper 
steam-chambers, DE, be supplementary ones 
separately built upon the main body; or the IUO 
75 
." 
 
2 
315,5il 
boiler may be otherwise constructed to pro 
vide for substantially the same arrangement 
of water-space and steam chambers. The dia 
phragm. A has a series of apertures, C (t, in 
which are screwed or inserted small tubes b b, 
the length of which should be about one and 
three-quarter times their diameter, and the 
aggregate area of which is less than that of the 
induction port or opening through which the 
steam is passed to the cylinder of the engine 
and less than that of the throttle-valve. The 
Second or upper interior diaphragm, B, has 
also orifices c c, fitted with tubes dd, the length 
of which may also be about one and three 
quarter times their diameter, but the aggre 
gate area of which is somewhat greater than 
that of the aggregate area of the tubes b b, 
though, like them, less than the area of the 
opening through which the steam is led from 
the boiler to the engine-cylinder. These tubes 
b d, or certain of them, may have perforated 
plates mounted on them, carrying slide-valves 
FF, provided with oblong slots, and capable 
of operation from the one end of the boiler by 
a lever or hand-wheels, e e, for partially or 
wholly closing the orifices which they control, 
one orifice at a time, to adjust the proper 
relative aggregate areas of the tubular steam 
passages through the two perforated dial 
phragms to each other and to the throttle-valve 
or opening through which the steam is led to 
the engine-cylinder. 
G G represent two valves, each of which is 
composed of a sheet-iron plate slightly spiral 
in direction of its length and extending the 
whole length of the boiler, or nearly so, with 
in each angular space formed by the junction 
of the diaphragms A B with the sides of the 
boiler. These valves, which may be operated 
by leversh, and which are made slightly spiral 
to Secure an easier and more effective closing 
of them (shown by dotted lines in Fig. 2) 
against the sides of the boiler and tops of the 
diaphragms AB, are constructed to leave an 
opening, i, between their one end and the end 
of the boiler for the passage of steam beneath 
them when closed to blow out, through stop 
cocks k at the opposite end of the boiler, any 
Sediment that may collect from time to time 
in the angular spaces formed by the junction 
of the diaphragms A B with the sides of the 
boiler, said valves remaining open, as shown 
by full lines in Fig. 2, excepting when it is 
required to blow off collecting sediment, as 
described. The orifices l, communicating 
with the stop-cocks k, are arranged as low 
down in said angular spaces as it is con 
Venient to place them, and when the valves 
G. are closed and stop - cocks lic opened the 
steam admitted through the openings i at the 
opposite end of the boiler will pass freely into 
the space beneath the valves from that end, 
and flow as a current through the full length 
of the valve-closed spaces and out of the stop 
cock k, carrying the collected sediment along 
with it. 
Water collecting in the angular spaces be 
neath said valves G, above the sediment de 
posited in the angular spaces at the sides of 
the boiler, may be returned to the water-space 
f e boiler by orifices m in the diaphragms 
The arched configuration of the diaphragms 
A B not only serves to strengthen the boiler, 
but to facilitate the fall of water and sedi 
ment or foreign matter carried up by the steam 
into the angular spaces beneath the valves G. 
at the sides of the boiler, thus depositing the 
same where they can easily be removed, and 
the tubes b d in the diaphragms A B act as 
barriers to prevent return of uplifted sediment 
through the apertures a c back into the lower 
water and steam chamber of the boiler. 
His a ball-float on a lever, i, having its full 
crum J within the lower water and steam space 
of the boiler, said float resting on the water 
therein. Connected with this lever I, on op 
posite sides of its fulcrum by rods in n, are two 
stop-cocks, LM, arranged within the Water 
space of the boiler, and the one, L, of which 
is a water-blow-off cock connected by pipe 
with the outside of the boiler, while the other 
one, M, is a water-supply cock, and is con 
nected by a pipe, ', with an outside water 
reservoir, N, of cylindrical form, and fitted 
with a piston, O, loaded with one or more 
weights, P, of suitable specific gravity to force 
water from the reservoir N into the boiler 
against the pressure of the steam therein when 
the cock M is open. This apparatus forms an 
automatic regulator of the water-level in the 
boiler and an auxiliary water-feeder to the 
boiler, distinct altogether from and operating 
in addition to the regular feed - pump. It 
serves to keep the Water in the boiler at a uni 
form level, or nearly so. Thus Supposing the 
dotted line S in Fig. 2 to be the extreme high 
level to which the water should be permitted 
to rise in the boiler, and the dotted lines' to 
indicate its lowest safe level, then as the float 
H rises or falls between and approaches either 
of these levels it will operate through its con 
nections either the cock L or the cock M. to 
regulate the amount of water in the boiler. 
For instance, if it rises, owing to a too free 
supply of water, it will open the cock L and 
discharge surplus water therethrough, while 
if it falls below a proper level it will open the 
cock M and admit water fron) the reservoir N 
till the proper level is again reached in the 
boiler. Such apparatus not only prevents an 
undue or destructive and dangerous exposure 
of the boiler to the action of the fire by the 
water falling too low in the boiler, but it pre 
serves a regular or nearly fixed amount of 
water in the boiler, and, what is equally or 
more important in a boiler constructed to work 
upon the principle the boiler shown in the 
drawings does, it preserves a nearly uniform 
steam capacity and proper relative proportion 
of the lower steam chamber or space to the 
steam chambers or spaces above such lower 
In this improved boiler the lower section or 
O)6. 
- 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
IO5 
I IO 
II5 
 
315,511. 
IO 
25 
chamber is filled with water up to the line sor 
s', or to an intermediate level, and the space 
above such level or levels in said chamber with 
steam, which steam-space C is in communica 
tion by the tubes b d and valves F with the up 
per steam chambers or spaces, DE. The ag 
gregate area of the openings thus established 
through the diaphragm. A being less than the 
aggregate area of the openings through the 
diaphragm B, and the aggregate area of said 
steam-openings in the diaphragm B being less 
than the area of the throttle-valve or induc 
tion-port to the engine, any sudden reduction 
of pressure upon the surface of the super 
heated water in the boiler is prevented and 
the pressure thereon kept approximately uni 
form. There should be three steam-gages at 
tached to the boiler, the same communicating, 
respectively, with the steam-chambers C, D, 
and E, and when the boilerisputin operation 
the slide-valves FF should be adjusted so as 
to make the aggregate area of the openings 
through the diaphragm. A say, about one 
tenth less than the aggregate area of the open 
ings through the diaphragm B, and to keep 
the last-named openings less than the open 
ing by which the steam is passed from the 
boiler to the cylinder of the engine. These 
adjustments having been attained, there can 
be no sudden reduction of the pressure upon 
the surface of the water in the boiler, no rapid 
withdrawal and sudden check of steam from 
the compartment next to the Water, no violent 
concussive actions or strains on the boiler due 
to the intermittent escape of steam into the 
cylinder of the engine, the effect of the draft 
or check being first and most sensibly felt in 
the compartment E, and being only gradually 
transmitted in succession to the other com 
partments, DC, below, and hence there can be 
little or no risk of explosion from this cause, 
and an approximate uniformity of pressure 
upon the water is much more perfectly secured 
than where a single perforated diaphragm is 
used. Such improved construction of boiler 
will also serve to deliver dry steam directly 
from the boiler to the engine, the steam pass 
ing from the lower steam-compartment to the 
second steam-compartment, and so on to the 
third steam-compartment, not at one point in 
each, but in small quantities at several points. 
Water passing by chance along with the steam 
from the first steam-compartment will be de 
posited in the second steam-compartment, and 
should any (which is not probable) be carried 
up into the third steam-compartment it can 
not fail to be deposited there. There can be 
no rising and falling of cone-shaped columns 
or bodies of water, no churn-like motion or 
action take place, and no irregular and violent 
ebullition. In this way foaming, prim 
ing, or entrainment are avoided and dry 
steam may be taken directly from the boiler 
without the aid of domes, superheaters, or 
steam-drums. Incrustation, too, will be pre 
vented, inasmuch as all foreign solid sub 
stances held in suspension or solution will 
so 
60 
 
7O 
lows. 
- 
3 
be separated from the water and be deposited 
upon the upper sides of the diaphragms A 
B, where they will not interfere with the gen 
eration of steam, and from whence they may 
readily be removed, as hereinbefore described. 
All foreign matter, as it is separated from the 
Water by crystallization or otherwise by the 
mere motion of the water, will be carried to 75 
the surface of the water, and by the motion . 
of the steam be carried through the small ori. 
fices in the diaphragms AB, or lower one at : 
least, and as the motion of the steam is quick 
ened by its passage through the small tubes 
bd, said foreign substances, being of a greater. 
Specific gravity than the steam, will be dropped . 
as they leave the tubes and fall upon and down 
either side of the diaphragms A B into the 
angular spaces formed to receive them. Should 85 
the lower diaphragm, A, fail to thus catch all 
the uplifted foreign matter, the second dia 
phragm, B, certainly will. By thus removing, 
too, certain foreign substances which have a 
corroding tendency, corrosion of the boiler go 
will be largely prevented, and by keeping the 
boiler clean economy in fuel necessarily foi 
Notwithstanding the fact that superheated 
water is highly explosive, and that it bursts 95 
into steam from a sudden reduction of press 
ure, a boiler constructed as here described may 
be worked with perfect safety, and this under 
a very high and economical pressure of steam 
without any or very little danger from such 
The form of the boiler may be more or less 
changed, as may also the shape of the dia 
phragms, likewise the number and sizes of the 
openings of less aggregate area in each dia 
phragm than that of the induction-port; also, 
valves for regulating such area of escape 
through the diaphragms be used or not. 
The feeder herein shown and described forms 
no part of the present application; but I re 
serve to myself the right to make a separate 
application therefor at some future time. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In a steam-boiler adapted to carry a per 
manent bulk of water and having a diaphragm 
or partition dividing the main or upper steam: . 
. . 
space from a lower steam and waterspace, with . 
apertures in said partition of less aggregate. I2O: 
. . 
area than the opening through which the steam . . 
is led from the steam-space to the cylinder of 
. 
an engine, the arrangement within the steam: . 
space of the boiler, above or beyond said par 
tition, of a second partition or diaphragm also I25. 
having openings in it of less aggregate area 
than the steam-supply opening to the engine, 
and whereby three consecutive steam-spaces 
are formed in the boiler, substantially as speci 
2. A steam-boiler having its steam-space di 
vided into a series of consecutive compart 
ments in communication with each other by ap: 
ertures in the partitions which separate said 
115 
IIo 
Ico. 
- 
CauSe 
. 
. 
 
315,511. 
IO 
4 
compartments, the aggregate areas of said ap 
ertures increasing for each successive com 
partment, but the aggregate area of the aper 
tures in each partition being less than that of 
the opening through which the steam is led 
from the steam-space to the engine-cylinder, 
essentially as and for the purposes herein set 
forth. 
3. In a steam-boiler having its steam-space 
divided into two or more compartments, the 
Separating diaphragm or diaphragms of said 
Steam chambers or compartments studded with 
small bore tubes of greater length than diam: 
eter in or about in the proportions specified and 
of less aggregate area than the opening through 
which the steam is led from the steam-space of 
the boiler to the cylinder of the engine, sub 
Stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
4. The within-described boiler having three 
steam spaces or compartments, C, DE, sepa 
rated from each other by arched diaphragms. 
A B, fitted with upwardly-projecting tubes b 
d of different aggregrate areas and of less ag 
gregate area in each partition than the open 
ing through which the steam is led from the 25 
steam-space to the cylinder of the engine, es 
sentially as specified. 
5. The combination, with the outer shell of 
the boiler and the arched perforated dia 
phragms AB, dividing the steam-space of the 3o 
boiler or either of them, of the valves Gin the 
angular spaces formed by the junction of either 
diaphragm with the sides of the boiler, con 
structed to pass the steam from their one end 
when closed, and the blow-off cocks k, sub-35 
stantially as and for the purposes herein set 
6. The combination of the tubes b or d and 
either arched diaphragm A or B, separating 
the steam-space of the boiler, with the valves 4o 
G. G. and blow-off cocks k k, essentially as de 
scribed. 
forth. 
- 
THOMAS KAYS. 
Witnesses: 
A. GREGORY, 
C. SEDGWICR. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315612.txt	(No Model,) 
H. GROSS 
LOCK MECHANISM FOR SAFES. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 315,612, 
Patented Apr. 14, 1885, 
 
  
 
 
S 
2% 
s P 22 
SES 
22:2 
A 
WITNESSES: 
~ 76-4-6-r 
3-242,144. A fir 
Azz. v . . . / 
INVENTOR 
a Y Z r 4. 
ATTORNEYS 
- a -a, 
  
N. 
TeRS. Pitoio-hitharapher. Washington. , C. 
 
(No Model,) 
H. GROSS, 
LOCK MECHANISM FOR SAFES, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 315,612. 
Patented Apr. 14, 1885. 
- - 
l 
A. 
G . 
S2 
A22, 
A 
2SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS2% 
S3S SSN 
22%SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS3.7i. 
2SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS232 
S22222222225S M 
SSSSS2222222222222SS 
2 SSNSSZ,22 
WITNESSES: : 
a 2646-, 
1, y's 5, INVESTOR 
2. 
V 
T 
7%ay 6-2/ 
ATTORNEYs 
N, PETERs, Photo-lithographer. Washington, n c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 315,612, 
H. GROSS 
LOCK MECHANISM FOR SAFEs. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Apr. 14, 1885. 
Azz. 8. 
ATTORNEYS 
Perers, riots killegrapher waistop c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY GROSS, OF CHICAGO, IL LIN O Is. 
LOCK MECHANISM FOR SAFES. 
 
CA - orming part of Letters Patent No. 315,612, dated April 14, 1885. 
Aplication filed April 3, 1884. (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all thon, it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY GROSS, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Lock Mechanism for Safes, of which I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming part of this 
Specification. 
In the construction of lock mechanism for 
the doors of burglar-proof safes or vaults as 
at present commonly practiced, it is customary 
to provide the permutation or other suitable 
15 lock controlling the movement of the bolt-work 
with a time-lock upon the inside of the safe, 
which acts as a guard to prevent the operation 
of the bolt-work of the safe during a predeter 
Jined period and until the time-lock is auto 
matically released and ceases to act as a guard. 
In lock mechanism of this description a num 
ber of serious difficulties are encountered. For 
example, it sometimes happens that in setting 
the time-lock the hand of the dial or the indi 
cator-pointer is moved too far, and in such 
case, as this hand cannot be turned back, the 
safe must necessarily remain locked longer 
than is desired, thereby occasioning serious 
inconvenience. 
One of the objects of my present invention 
is to provide means whereby mistakes of this 
kind can be corrected and the delay in the 
opening of the safe can be avoided. In the 
time-locks at present employed it is also cus 
tomary to provide two separate clock-move 
ments, each with a tripping device for releas 
ing at the desired time the guard that checks 
the operation of the bolt-work, so that in case 
either of said movements stops, the other will 
release the guard. As these separate clock 
movements are independent of each other, it 
is necessary to set each separately, and if, 
through carelessness or accident, one is not set 
and the other stops, it becomes necessary to 
My present invention has for its further ob 
ject to provide means whereby the two clock 
movements can be simultaneously set and will 
move in unison, so that in case the spring of 
5o either movement fails to act that of the other 
movement will with certainty operate the 
guard-releasing device. 
45 drill or break open the safe. 
In an invention heretofore made by me, on 
which a patent was granted of the 8th day of 
February, 1876, provision was made whereby 55 
the guard of the time-lock could be brought 
into action to check the operation of the bolt 
work at a time subsequent to the setting of the 
time-lock, so that in case it was desired to use 
the safe a short time after the setting of the 
time-lock, as in the evening, the bolt-work 
could be operated until such hour as the guard 
of the time-lock should be automatically 
thrown into action. In such construction, 
however, the two clock-movements were in- 65 
dependent of each other, so that in case of 
any accident to the movement that carried the 
tripping device for automatically bringing the 
guard into action the time-lock would serve 
no useful purpose. By the present inven 
tion the tripping device that throws the guard 
of the time-lock into action at any desired 
hour subsequent to the setting of such lock, 
is caused to operate with certainty So long 
as either of the clock-movements is effective. 
Again, in the usual construction of lock mech 
anism the arbors or spindles of the permuta 
tion-lock, and of the knob for operating the 
bolt-work, extend through the door or wall of 
the safe and constitute its weakest point, as 8o 
by knocking off or driving in or drilling these 
arbors the burglar obtaias a ready opening, 
through which explosives can be introduced 
into the safe, or the bolt-work can be moved. 
To overcome this last difficulty it has been pro 
posed to apply to the inner face of the safe-door 
lock mechanism the bolts of which shall be 
shot the instant the safe-door is closed, and 
shall be automatically retracted at the desired 
hour by the action of the time-lock. With this 
kind of lock mechanism it is evident that the 
safe, when closed, must remain locked until 
such time as the time-lock shall operate to re 
tract the bolts, after which the safe will be 
open. This form of lock mechanism is notice 
ably defective in two particulars. In the first 
place, it is frequently desirable to use the safe 
in the evening, in which case the time mech 
anism must not come into operation until after 
such use, a result that cannot be attained by 
this last-described anechanism without leav 
ing the safe open until the evening, or by set 
ting the time-lock for a short period with the 
expectation of resetting it thereafter. It is 
85 
95 
CC 
2 
315,612 
: 
- 
detached. 
evident, however, that neither of these ways 
is a plan view of this last form of time-lock 
of using such lock mechanism is secure, as it 
may happen that from some cause no one will 
In Fig. 1 my improved time-lock is shown 
return to use the safe and set the time-lock, in 
as applied in connection with a permutation 
which event the safe will remain open all 
lock, and in Figs. 6, 8, and 9, in connection 
night. It will therefore be seen that it is de 
with mechanism that co-operates there with to 
sirable to provide mechanism whereby, with 
automatically shoot and retract the bolt-Work 
out forming any weak point in the door or 
of the safe. 
wall of the safe by running an arbor through 
A designates the top plate, and A the bot 
the same, the safe can belocked independently 
tom plate, of the time-lock, these plates being 
of the time-lock, which shall be automatically 
suitably connected together by posts or stand 
thrown into operation to guard the bolt-work 
ards a. In this time-lock two distinct clock 
at some predetermined time subsequent to its 
movements are employed, and these move 
setting, and to accomplish this is one of the 
ments are provided with driving-springs B 
objects of my present invention. 
and C, that serve, respectively, to operate the 
My invention, therefore, consists in provid 
indicator-pointer or dial-hand and the trip 
ing improved mechanism whereby the time 
ping devices for controlling the guard of the 
lock may cease to check the operation of the 
time-lock. The driving-springs are covered, 
bolt-work before the expiration of the time 
as shown, by the caps b and c, attached to the 
for which the time-lock has been set, so that 
under side of the bottom plate. 
any mistake in setting the time-lock may be 
To the springs B and C are connected the 
thus corrected and all delay in opening the 
driving-arbors B and C, that pass through 
safe by reason of such mistake may be avoided. 
the top and bottom plates, A and A', and have 
My invention further consists in providing 
loosely held thereon the gear-wheels band c', 
mechanism whereby the bolt-work of the safe 
that will be placed in gear with suitable es 
may be automatically thrown by the time-lock 
capement mechanism and will receive move 
to lock the safe. 
ment from their driving-arbors through the 
My invention also consists in providing 
medium of the ratchet-wheels b and c and 
means whereby the bolt-work of the safe may 
ratchets b and c, in manner well known in 
be automatically thrown and retracted by the 
the art. 
time-lock to lock and unlock the safe. 
To the arbor B is keyed the ring D, having 
My invention also consists in various de 
an arm, d, adapted to strike the stude on the 
tails of construction, which will be hereinaf 
under side of the gear-wheel E, that has an 
ter described, and particularly pointed out in 
extended hub, e, passing through the top 
the claims at the end of this specification. 
plate, A, and fitting loosely on the arbor B. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure l is 
The reduced upper portion of the hub e is 
a view in elevation of a time-lock of my in 
squared and receives the washer e" and the in 
proved construction. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
dicator-pointer F, which, in connection with 
of the time-lock, a portion of the top plate 
the hour-dial F, serves to determine the length 
being broken away, and the plate or disk that 
of time for which the lock shall be set. 
carries the tripping devices being removed for 
The driving-arbor C is provided with a 
better illustration of subjacent parts. Fig. 3 
ring, G, having an arm, g, adapted to strike 
is a view in horizontal longitudinal section on 
the studh, depending from the face of the gear 
line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a view in longi 
wheel H, the extended hub h of which passes 
tudinal vertical section on line y y of Fig. 3, 
through the top plate, A, fits loosely on the 
showing in inverted elevation the mechanism 
arbor C, and is provided with a squared end 
on the under side of the top plate. Fig. 5 is 
that carries the slotted revolving plate or disk 
also a sectional view on line y y of Fig. 3, 
I, that sustains the tripping devices K and L. 
showing in elevation the mechanism on the 
for throwing the guard M. of the time-lock re 
face of the bottom plate. Fig. 5" is an en 
spectively into and out of operation. 
larged sectional view in detail of the plate 
The tripping device K, which serves to 
carrying the tripping devices. Fig. 6 is a view 
throw the guard Mout of action, is adjustably 
in elevation of the inner face of the safe door 
held beneath the circular slot i of the plate I 
and frame having my improved time-lock 
by means of the threaded shank k, which 
mechanism applied thereto, parts being broken 
passes through the slot, and is furnished with 
away for better illustration. Fig. 7 is a view 
the small clamp-nut k", by which the tripping 
in horizontal section on line at a of Fig. 6. 
device may be fixed at any desired point along 
Fig. 8 is a view in elevation of the inner side 
the slot, its position being determined by the 
of a portion of a safe door and frame, parts scale or dial at the side thereof. The guard 
being broken away, and parts being shown in 
M is pivotally held on the top plate, A, by 
section. Fig. 9 is a detail front view (some 
means of the journal screw or pin M, and is 
what enlarged) of the time-lock in connection 
provided with the lug or shoulder m that ex 
with the parts directly operated thereby. Fig. 
tends a sufficient distance beneath the plate I 
10 is a view in elevation of a somewhat modi 
to be struck by the tripping device K as the 
fied form of time-lock, a part of the top plate 
plate revolves. The lower portion of the 
being broken away, and the plate that carries 
guard M is furnished upon its inner side with. 
the tripping devices being removed. Fig.11 
a lug, (shown in dotted lines, Figs, 1 and 2,) 
I. O 
IC 5 
I IO 
I 25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
315,612 
3 
which, when the guard is swung downward, 
will catch beneath the stud in of the pivoted 
latch bar or lever N, that is provided with 
the angle-bar n, adapted to drop into the or 
dinary notched tumblers of a permutation 
lock. The latch N is slotted, as shown, to re 
ceive the pino of the driving-lever O, by which 
movement is imparted from the drive-wheel 
O' to the bolt-work of the permutation-lock. 
Beneath the circular slot i of the plate I 
the tripping device L, which throws the guard 
Minto operation to check the bolt-work, is 
held by means of its threaded shank l, which 
extends through the slot and is provided with 
the clamp-nut, that retains this tripping de 
vice at any desired position along the slot. 
Pivotally connected to the top plate, A, is 
the dog or pawl P, the rear end of which is 
provided upon its upper side with the cam 
faced lug p, that projects beneath the slot i', 
and in position to be struck by the tripping 
device L as the plate revolves. The forward 
end, p, of the pawl is held by the spring p" 
normally in position to engage with the shoul 
der n' of the guard, and serves to tempora 
rily retain the guard in a retracted position, so 
that it will not affect the operation of the bolt 
work until the pawl is released by the trip 
ping device L Striking the lugp. A knob, p, 
projecting from the face of the pawl P, serves 
to retract this pawl by hand, as will herein 
after appear. 
Between the gear-wheels E and Hand mesh 
ing there with is placed the gear-wheel H, keyed 
to the winding-post H, journaled in the top 
and bottom plates, and having a squared pro 
jecting end, over which the winding-key will 
fit. By means of this gear-wheel the two 
clock-anovements are caused to work in uni 
son, and are simultaneously wound and set. 
The operation of the mechanism thus far 
defined is as follows: Let it first be assumed 
that the tripping devices K. and L are at the 
zero-points of their respective slots i and i', 
that the indicator-pointer is at the zero-point 
of its hour-dial, and that the guard M is turned 
down so that its lug catches under the stud n. 
of the latch-bar N, and holds the same sus 
pended and the bolt-work out of operation. 
If, now, a winding-key be applied to the post 
H' and be turned toward the left, the driv 
ing-springs of the two clock-movements will 
be wound and the indicator - pointer F and 
plate I may be simultaneously set for the de 
sired number of hours. The indicator-pointer 
and the plate will then move in the direction 
of the arrows, Figs. 1, until the tripping de 
vice K strikes the lug or shoulder m of the 
guard M, and causes this guard to swing back 
ward, so that the latch-bar N will be released 
and the bolt-work of the permutation-lock can 
be operated. At this time the indicator 
pointer will have returned to the zero-point 
of the hour-dial. 
It is evident that if the tripping device K 
is moved forward in the slot i of the plate I 
and there clamped, it will strike the shoulder 
in of the guard sooner than if it were at the 
zero-point of such slot, and Will retract said 
guard before the indicator-pointer reaches its 
zero-point; hence it will be seen that, if in 
the operation of setting the time-lock, the in 
dicator-pointer has by mistake been turned 
too far it is only necessary in order to correct 
such mistake to move forward the tripping de 
vice K a distance in the slot i corresponding to 
the number of hours the indicator-pointer has 
been overset. For example, if it is desired 
to close the safe at three oclock in the after 
moon, so that it cannot be opened until nine 
o'clock the following morning, the indicator 
pointer should be turned to the point 18 on 
the hour-dial, but, if through mistake it has 
been turned too far-as to the 24 point-the 
mistake can be leadily corrected, and the de 
lay in opening the safe can be avoided by fix 
ing the tripping device K at a position in its 
sloti opposite the point 6 of the slot-scale, as 
by this means the tripping device will throw 
back the guard MI six houl's sooner than were 
it in at the Zero-point of the slot, and hence 
in eighteen hours after the time the time-move 
ment started. 
If it is desired that the time-lock shall au 
tomatically coine into operation to check the 
bolt-work at a time subsequent to the setting 
of the time-lock-for example, if it is desired 
to close the safe at three o'clock in the after 
noon and have the time-lock automatically 
come into operation at nine o'clock in the 
evening, the bolt-work of the permutation 
lock being unchecked in the interim-the indi 
cator-pointer will be set, as usual, for the hour 
at which the Safe is to be opened the next 
morning, but the guard M will be swung back 
and held by pawl P, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2, and the tripping device L will be moved 
forward and fixed at Such point in the slot i' 
that at six hours after the starting of the 
clock-movement it will strike the cam-lug p, 
and by so doing will release the pawl P and 
allow the guard MI to swing forward to catch 
the stud in of the latch-bar, and thus check the 
operation of the bolt-work until the guard is . 
forced backward by the tripping device K at 
the end of the period for which the time-lock 
has been Set. 
In Fig. 1 of the drawings the guard M is 
shown as held back by the pawl P, the indi 
cator-pointer has been set for twenty - two 
hours, the tripping device K is fixed in its 
slot opposite the point 4, and the tripping 
device L is fixed in its slot opposite the point 
16. With the parts in this position (assum 
ing the clock-work to start at three p. m.) the 
bolt-work of the permutation-lock will remain 
free until the tripping device L strikes the lug 
p and allows the guard M to swing forward, 
(which will occur at eleven p. m.,) and will 
then remain checked by the guard until the 
tripping device K throws back the guard at 
nine o'clock in the morning, or four hours 
earlier than the time for which the indicator 
point was set. 
2 5 
35 
55 
60 
75 
go 
95 
IOO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
4 
- 
315,62 
IO 
In Figs. 6 to 11 of the drawings my inven 
tion is shown as applied for automatically 
throwing and withdrawing the bolt-work of a 
Safe. 
R designates the front wall of the safe, and 
;R denotes the door, upon the inner face of 
which is the usual frame, r, for sustaining the 
bolt-work, consisting of the bolts R, connected 
together by the tie-plate R. Upon the inner 
face of this tie plate are formed the bearing 
flanges r, through which passes the sliding rod 
S, that carries the coiled springs S and S', and 
is loosely held in a suitable seat in the bolt 
frame r and the bearing-sleeves that is bolted 
to the door. A hand-lever, T, pivotally held 
upon a stud, t, and connected to the rear end 
of the rod S by the pint", serves to move for 
ward the rod, and it will be seen that as this 
rod is forced forward by the action of the 
hand-lever, the pins' bearing upon the spring 
Stends to compress this spring, while at the 
same time the pins of the rod bearing upon 
the end of the spring S' forces the same against 
the rear flange of the tie-plate, and tends to 
force this tie-plate and its connected bolt-work 
forward. Upon the inner face of the tie-plate 
is formed a stop or lug, r", as shown by dotted 
lines in Fig. 6 and full lines in Fig. 8, and this 
stop is so placed upon the tie-plate as to catch 
against the square shoulder u of the pivoted 
trigger or stop-lever U when the latter is in 
elevated position, as shown in Fig. 6. 
If, 
therefore, the trigger be elevated at the time 
the sliding rod Sis thrust forward by the hand 
lever T, the spring S will be pressed by the 
pins' against the frame-work r, and the spring 
S will be pressed by the pin s" against the 
rear flange of the tie-plate as this tie is pre 
vented from moving forward by the resistance 
of the trigger, and the only effect of the slid 
ing rod under such condition will be to com 
press the springs without moving the bolt 
Pivotally connected to the door at the point 
ty is the releasing-lever V, the short arm of 
which rests upon the arm u', projecting from 
the trigger U, and the long arm of which pro 
jects within the path traversed by the tripping 
device L of the time-lock. From this con 
struction it will appear that if, after the springs 
S and S have been compressed by the sliding 
rod S, as just above described, the tripping 
device L strikes the lever V, it will force the 
long arm of this lever upward, which will in 
turn depress the trigger U, thereby causing it 
to release the tie-plate R and allow the com 
pressed spring S' to force the bolt-work for 
ward to automatically lock the Safe. 
At a suitable point, as 0, on the door is 
pivoted the latch-bar W, the free end of which 
is provided with the small friction-roller w', 
adapted to bear against the bottom edge of 
the time-lock guard M when the latter is in 
position to check the operation of the bolt 
work after it has been thrown forward. 
Upon the under side of the latch-bar W is 
the depending lug w, the inclined face of 
work. 
- 
... " 
9. 
which bears against the rear end of the slid 
ing rod S, and serves to hold this rod pressed 
forward so long as the end of the latch-bar is 
beneath the guard. 
It will be seen by reference to the detail, 
Figs. 9, 10, and 11, that the time-lock forming 
part of this last-described automatic bolt 
working mechanism is the same as that here 
tofore described, with the exception that the 
lug on the inner side of the guard and the 
rear end of the pawl P and its lug are dis 
pensed with as unnecessary in this construc 
tion, although it will be readily understood 
that the form of lock having such features 
may be employed in both cases. 
The operation of this last-described time 
lock mechanism is as follows: Let it be as 
sumed that the parts are in the position shown 
in Fig. 6, the safe-door being shut and locked 
by an independent permutation jam-lock, to 
be presently described, the indicator-pointer 
F and the revolving plate I will turn backward 
in the direction of the arrows. The tripping 
device L will, after a predetermined period, 
depending upon its position in the slot i', 
strike the end of the releasing-lever V, which 
in turn will depress the trigger U, thereby al 
lowing the compressed spring S' to shoot the 
bolt-work to lock the safe, and bringing the 
front flange r of the tie-plate R against the 
in s' of the sliding rod, as seen in Fig. 8, 
p 
The bolt-work remains thus in its forward po 
sition until the tripping device K of the time 
lock strikes the lug in and releases the guard 
M, at which moment the compressed spring 
S will force backward the sliding rod S, (no 
longer held by the lug w of the latch-bar,) 
which will carry with it the bolt-work, and 
hence leave the safe free to be opened save for 
the permutation jam-lock. It will be seen 
that by this last-described mechanism the 
main bolt-work can be automatically thrown 
forward to lock the safe at any desired hour 
subsequent to the setting of the time-lock, and 
after remaining guarded for a predetermined 
period can be automatically withdrawn to un 
lock the safe. The advantages of this con 
struction have been herein before set out. 
The jam-lock, forming as it does the subject 
matter of another application for Letters Pat 
ent filed of even date here with, needs be but 
briefly described here. It consists, essential 
ly, of a series of tumblers, X, of usual con 
struction, carried by the casing ac, that is re 
movably held within a suitable recess of the 
doorjam of the safe. To the casing a is piv 
oted, as aty, the bolt-plate Y, which is pro 
vided with the angle bar or catch y, adapted 
to enter the notches of the tumblers and the 
notch of the drive-wheel 2, formed on the end 
of the tapering arbor of the dial-knob Z. The 
bolt-plate Y, when thrown forward by the 
drive - wheel, enters the space if, formed in 
the front edge of the safe-door, and securely 
locks this door. 
It will be noticed that the 
arbor of this permutation-lock does not extend 
through the Wall of the safe, and hence an 
& 
25 
35 
40 
45 
5O 
s 
6o 
65 
70 
75 
95 
... O 
IIO 
II5 
-- 
315,612 
5 
IO 
25 
45 
Scribed. 
- 
With a guard for checking the operation of 
In order to provide a tighter joint between the bolt-work, of an indicator-pointer, a driv 
ing-spring for said pointer, a tripping device 
in gear with said pointer, a separate spring 
for Said tripping device, and a key-post con 
mon to both the pointer and tripping device 
whereby they may be simultaneously set, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. In a time-lock for safes, the combination, 
with a guard for checking the operation of 8o 
the bolt-work, of an indicator-pointer, a sup 
plemental adjustable tripping device or catch 
for throwing the guard into action, and gear 
wheels connecting said tripping device with 
the indicator -pointer, substantially as de- 85 
75 
5. In a time-lock for safes, the combination, 7o 
opening for the introduction of explosives or said tripping device, substantially as de 
moving the main bolt-work cannot be obtained scribed. 
by drilling the arbor, as is possible with safes 
having arbors extending through the Wall. 
the rear edge of the safe-door and the frame, 
so as to prevent the introduction of explosives, 
I form a long groove, 1, in the inner face of 
the door near its rear edge, and a like groove 
in the inner face of the door-frame, into which 
grooves will snugly fit the flanged edges 2 and 
3 of the protecting-plate 4, pressed normally 
outward by the flat springs, shown in dotted 
lines. A retaining-plate, 5, sustained by the 
15 screws 6, bears against the rear portion of the 
piate 4, and holds the flange 2 within its slot. 
On the rear ends of the boits R are formed 
the cam-lugs 7, which, when the bolt-work...is 
shot, will bear upon the forward portion of 
the plate 4 and force the flange 3 into the 
groove 1. In this position the protecting 
plate 4 covers the joint between the rear edge 
of the safe-door and the door-frame, and will 
securely guard against the introduction of ex 
plosives through such joint into the safe. 
It is obvious that the details of construction 
above set out may be varied within wide lim 
its without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention, and that Some of the features of the 
invention may be employed without the others 
or in connection with other forms of lock mech 
anism. I wish it distinctly understood, there 
fore, that the scope of my invention is not re 
stricted either to the details of construction or 
arrangement above set out. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a time-lock for safes, the combination, 
with a guard for checking the operation of the 
bolt-work and a suitable.indicator-pointer, of 
a revolving adjustable tripping device for re 
leasing said guard, and gear-wheels connect 
ing said tripping device with the pointer, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a time-lock for safes, the combination, 
with a guard for checking the operation of the 
bolt-work and a suitable indicator-pointer, 
of a revolving plate in gear with said pointer 
and a tripping device for releasing the guard 
adjustably held in said plate, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a time-lock for safes, the combination, 
with a guard for checking the operation of 
55 the bolt-work, of an indicator-pointer, a slot 
ted revolving plate in gear with said pointer, 
a tripping device for releasing said guard, and 
means, substantially as described, for adjust 
ing the tripping device at different points 
along the slot of said plate, substantially as 
set forth, 
4. In a time-lock for safes, the combination, 
with a guard for checking the operation of 
the bolt-work, of an indicator-pointer, a driv 
5 ing-spring for said pointer, a tripping device 
for releasing the guard in gear with said 
pointer, and a separate driving - Spring for 
7. In a time-lock for safes, the combination, 
with a guard for checking the operation of 
the bolt-work, of a dog for holding said guard 
temporarily out of action, an adjustable Sup- go 
plemental tripping device for throwing the 
dog out of engagement with the guard, a 
main tripping device for throwing the guard 
out of action, a driving-spring for said trip 
ping devices, and an indicator-pointer and 95 
gear-wheels connecting said tripping devices 
with the pointer, substantially as described. 
8. In a time-lock for safes, the combination, 
with a guard for checking the operation of 
the bolt-work, of a dog or pawl for tempora- Ioo 
rily holding said guard out of action, an in 
dicator-pointer, a supplemental tripping de 
vice for throwing the dog out of engagement 
with the guard having a supporting-post sepa 
rate from that of the indicator - pointer, a 
main tripping device for throwing the guard 
out of action, and gear-wheels connecting the 
tripping devices and the pointer, Substantially 
as described. 
9. In a time-lock, the combination, with a 
uard for checking the operation of the bolt 
9. 
work and an indicator-pointer, of a dog or 
pawl for holding the guard temporarily out 
of action, an adjustable supplemental trip 
ping device for throwing the dog out of en 
gagement with the guard, a main tripping de 
vice for throwing the guard out of action, and 
a revolving plate or disk for carrying said 
tripping devices, substantially as described. 
10. In a time-lock for safes, the combina 
tion, with a guard for checking the operation 
of the bolt-work and a dog for holding said 
guard out of action, of a single indicator 
pointer, a revolving plate having two slots 
therein, two tripping devices-one for the 
guard and one for the dog-adjustably held 
in said slots, two clock-movements, and gear 
wheels for connecting said pointer and re 
volving plate, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
11. In time-lock mechanism for safes, the 
combination, with the main bolt-work of the 
safe, of mechanism for throwing the main 
bolt-work to lock the safe and clock mechan 
20 
25 
IO 
6 
- 
315,612 
25 
ism for automatically releasing said bolt- temporarily checking the action of the un 
throwing mechanism, Substantially as de-locking-spring, and tripping devices for said 
trigger and guard whereby the safe can be 
scribed. 
12. In time-lock mechanism for safes, the automatically locked and unlocked, substan 
combination, with the bolt-work, of a spring 
tially as set forth. 
for throwing said bolt-work to lock the safe, 
14. In time-lock mechanism for safes, the 
a trigger or stop for temporarily restraining combination, with the bolt-work, of the slid 
the action of said spring, and a tripping de- ing rod connected with the bolt-work, the 
vice operated by suitable clock-work to re-coiled springs upon said sliding rod, the trig 
lease said trigger and automatically lock the ger for temporarily checking the movement 
safe, substantially as set forth. 
of the bolt-work, the releasing-lever for said 
13. In time-lock mechanism for safes, the trigger, the latch-bar, the guard, and tripping 
combination, with the bolt-work, of a spring devices for acting upon said guard and the 
for automatically throwing said bolt-work to releasing-lever, substantially as described. 
lock the safe, a spring for automatically with- 
HENRY GROSS, 
drawing the bolt-work to unlock the safe, a 
trigger or stop for temporarily restraining the 
action of Said locking-spring, a guard for 
GEO. P. FISHER, Jr., 
JAMES H. PEIRCE. 
Witnesses: 
I) 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315712.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 315,712, 
 
M. L. S. BUCKNER, 
AERIAL DROP FOR EXPOSIWES, 
Patented Apr. 14, l885. 
WITNESSES: 
- To so. As a C 
/h. 2%a 
BY/tal2.f 
S 
Y 
 
   
 
"... 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MosEs L. S. BUCKNER 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Shelbyville, in the county of Shelby and State 
5 of Kentucky, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Aerial Drops for Explo 
sives, of which the following is a descrip 
tion. : : 
This invention relates to aerial transporta 
Io tion of explosives, and dropping them in war 
fare; and it has for its object to reach the 
enemy with destroying agents at distances 
:erthan may be done by any present known 
- 
vention consists in the 
throwing projectiles. 
. . . . . . 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
mon time-keeping clock, B, 
Cir ping arrangements, 
pelt or cnalin mounted to rotate on 
EF. The pulley, E is a mere roller, 
may be journaled on a level with the 
so as to cause the belt to traverse 
illy, or it may be journaled above 
is or other receptacles for 
suitable form. 
These receptacles mayh 
g sidewise against 
the belt, as at G', or they 
may sit flat upon 
the belt, as at G. In either case the revolv 
ing of the belt tips the buckets to discharge 
their contents 
as each passes over one of the 
pulleys. . 
. . 
. 
The receptacles may bearranged in any de 
sired order on the belt, either clustered to: 
gether or equally spaced overits entirelength. 
The pulley Fis connected by a train of gear 
wheels with a propelling-spring, H, its rate 
of revolution being governed by a fan-wheel, 
I, whose blades, being resisted by the air, 
are restricted to a given speed. This por. 
5otion of the device is common clockwork, 
such as is used for similar purposes, and 
here called propelling mechanism. This 
propelling mechanism, after being woundup, 
remains fixed until the clock-hands arrive at 
55 the figures indicating the time at which the 
4O 
45 
. . 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
PATENT OFFICE. 
BUCKNER, OF SHELBYVILLE, KENTUCKY. . 
AERIAL DROP For Explosives. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 315,712, dated April 14, 1885. 
. 
. . . . Application filed September 17, 1884. (No model) 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
device has been previously set to start. Then 
it starts to revolve, and continues to revolve 
until the contents of the receptacles G are 
emptied-that is, until the belt D has made a 
complete revolution. The shaft of the driv 
ing-pulley F would start at once to revolve, 
as soon as the spring His wound up, but its 
revolution is prevented, in the same manner 
as the alarm of a clock is prevented from op 
erating, until a given time. . . 
J represents the time-hand of the starting 
device, and K is the knob by which it is set. 
In service my aerial dropper for explosives 
will be managed according to the rules of sci 
entific gunnery and engineering. The speed 
and course of the wind and the distance to 
the enemy being ascertained, it only remains 
to locate the starting-point in the proper line, 
set the time - escapement to the number of 
minutes or hours required for the balloon to 75 
travel that distance, then start the balloon. 
Dynamite and such like powerful explosives 
may be thus dropped upon the enemy from 
overhead, where he is least protected. A 
fort, an army, or vessels may be thus destroy 
ed by means wholly irresistible. . . 
. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
... 
1. The combination, with a 
series of ex 
plosive - carrying receptacles arranged to 
empty their contents in rotation, and means 
for rotating them, of clock-work connected 
with said means of rotation to start it to ro 
tating at any given time, and a balloon for 
carrying the said apparatus. 
2. The combination, with the frame A and 
the pulleys E and F, journaled therein, of 
the belt D, mounted to rotate on the pulleys, 
the receptacles G, attached to the belt, the 
spring H, and gear-wheels connecting it with 95 
the driving-pulley E, the clock B, provided 
with the setting-knob K and time-hand J, 
means connecting the clock with the pulley 
F, and the balloon C, supporting the frame A 
and attachments, substantially as shown and loo 
described, whereby explosives may be trans 
ported through the air for a given length of 
time, and then be dropped, as specified. 
The above specification of my invention 
igned by me in the presence of two subscrib-lo5 
MOSESL. S. BUCKNER, 
Witnesses: 
9O 
. 
. 
- 
. 
WXSTEVENs, 
SoLON C, KEMON, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315812.txt	l, 
(No Model.) 
No. 315,812, 
J. E. MITCHELL, 
WASHING MACHINE 
2. Sheets-Sheet, i. 
Patented Apr. 14, 1885. 
 
  
 
 
Il-s-E-2 
seems 
s 
s 
A. 
(E \ 
HanW 
is? % 
F 
\\ 
K2III, 
s 
2.2 litti 
Hill.i. 
42 
2|H|NH||||||||W27 
title 
| 
 
 
 
I 
C 
SES 
it is P.I. 
s 
it: H. 
S. 
E H 
I 
H 
A 
III. 7 
E HiH 
Esse2 
- 7 a2/ 
----E S2 
| 
 
 
is: ins 
s' 
 
i I.T. J.S.St.S 
7% eZ92, 
 
1."WEATO I 
% -2%. 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 315,8 12. 
J. E. MITCHELL. 
WASHING MACHINE 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 14, 1885, 
- 
7- 
2 
style: 
--Ssss 
I 
% 
% 
al 
s 
C 
- 
 
 
 
 
an as 
s 
Etes. Photo-lixsgrapher. Washington, . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN E. MITCHELL OF KEOKUK, IOW.A. 
WASHING-MACHINE. 
S3?:CIFICATION for:ring part of Letters Patent No. 315,812, dated April 4, 1885. 
Application filcd March 22, 1884. (No model.) 
lent form in cross-section to receive the shaft 7o 
vided at its center with an opening to receive 65 
upon the end of the cross-bar and is secured 
To (til thon, it notif concei'il. 
Be it known that I, JoHN E. MITCHELL, of thereto by a loop-pin, ty. This ring Gis drawn 
Keokuk, in the county of Lee and State of inwardly to release the cross-bar from its en- 55 
Iowa, have invented certain new and useful gagement with the bracket F, and to secure 
5 Improvements in Washing-Machines; and I the bar it is only necessary to drop the bar 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, upon the bracket (holding the ring up against 
clear, and exact description of the invention, the under side of the bar) and allow the ring 
such as will enable others skilled in the art by its own weight to fall and embrace the 6c 
to which it pertains to make and use the same. bracket. The drip-pan His made of metal, 
Io My invention relates to Washing-machines, to insure durability, and is designed to carry 
and more particularly to certain improve- the water from a wringer arranged above the 
ments on the machine patented to me July 10, tub back into the latter. The bar E is pro 
1883, No. 2S1,111. 
The object of the present invention is to pro- a flanged sieeve, I. Within this sleeve is se 
5 vide a machine of simple and durable con- cured a bearing-sleeve, J, projecting from a 
struction, and one that will avoid the incon- crank-arm, K, and secured by a cross-pin, i. 
veniences incident to the use of my former The sleeve-bearing J is of square or equiva 
machine. 
The invention consists in the novel means L of the rubber M. This shaft L corresponds 
2O for hinging the cross-bar of the machine to in cross-section to the sleeve-bearing J, thus 
i's standard, in a novel automatic securing allowing the rubber to be raised and lowered 
device for said cross-bar; in an improved form freely. Both the false bottom D and the un 
of rubber shaft and crank; in means for se. der surface of the rubber are each provided 75 
curing and operating the lever of the ma- with two series of slats, arranged at right an 
25 chine, and in various other features of con- gles to each other. The slats d of the false 
struction, as will be fully described herein- bottom are secured at right angles to the slats 
d, and the slats in of the rubber are at right 
after, and pointed out in the claims. 
my improved machine. Fig. 2 is a side view islats effects a thorough agitation of the water 
3o of the same. Fig. 3 is a vertical section. Fig. in the tub. The tub and rubber (as will be 
4 illustrates the false bottom of the tub and explained) oscillate in opposite directions, so 
the face of the oscillating rubber; and Figs. that the slats of the false bottom will force the 
5, 6, and 7 are sectional detail views. 
A. A represent parallel standards secured same time the rubber slats (moving in the op 
to base-blocks a a and connected by a cross- posite direction) will tend to force the water 
bar, b. This bar b is provided centrally with to the outer edges of the tub. The constant 
a socket, C, which receives a tapering pivot, reversal of the movements of the rubber and 
C, secured rigidly to the center of an oscil-tub effects a continual reversal of the currents go 
lating frame, C, upon which the tub C is re- of water, thus insuring the maximum agita 
tion, and lessening materially the time and 
secured within the tub by means of a tongue, 
P represents an arm or bracket secured to 
d', and staple d, and a staple, d", and cross- the standard A. by means of a prong, p, en- 95 
pin d". 
tering the standard, and a bolt, p, passing 
E. represents a cross-bar pivotally secured through the standard and bracket and held 
to the upper end of the standard A by means by a nut. The outer end of the bracket P is 
of arms e e, secured to the sides of the stand- of journal form and receives a flanged sleeve, 
ard by a pin, e, passing through the arms and Q, which enters an opening in the lever O and Ioo 
standard. The opposite end of the cross-bar is held by a pin, Q'. 
N is a rod connecting the lower end of the 
drip-pan, H, secured to the inner side of the lever O with the oscillating frame C", upon 
upper end of the standard B. A ring, G, fits which the tub is secured. 
In the drawings, Figure i is a plan view of angles to the slats in'. This arrangement of 8o 
D represents a removable or false bottom labor required to cleanse the clothes. 
water in currents to the center, and at the 85 
4o movably secured. 
3. 5 
45 
5o E rests upon a bracket, F, projecting from a 
2 
315,812 
forth. 
- 
R is a similar rod connecting the outer end 
1. The combination, with the standards, of 
of the crank-arm K with the lever O above a hinged cross-bar and a supporting-bracket, 
the center of the latter. 
which latter receives the free end of the cross 
bar, and a ring arranged upon said cross-bar 25 
to engage the bracket, substantially as set 
2. The combination, with the standards A. 
and B, of a cross-bar hinged to the standard 
A by arms e e below the top edge of the tub, 3o 
a bracket projecting from the standard B, 
and a ring pivotally secured upon the cross 
bar to engage said bracket, substantially as 
set forth. 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
O' represents a treadle projecting from the 
5 lower end of the lever to admit of the appli 
cation of foot-power as an auxiliary to hand 
power in operating the lever. 
It will be apparent from the above descrip 
tion that when the lever is operated the tub 
Io and rubber will be oscillated in opposite di 
rections. The arms ee enable the cross-bar E 
to be raised to remove the rubber from the tub 
without contact with the drip-pan H. The rub 
ber, by means of the construction of the shaft 
I5 L and its adjacent parts, may be readily raised 
and lowered. The lever O is securely held 
upon the standard A, and an automatic se 
curing device for the bar E is provided. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
2O I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 35 
ters Patent, is 
JOHN E. MITCHELL. 
Witnesses: 
I. C. REEVES, 
J. T., INGRIM. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US315912.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet, i. 
APPARATUS FOR COLLECTING AND DRYING THE SEDIMENTARY 
R CORSCADEN. 
MATTER OF SEWAGE, 
  
 
 
2 
 
 
 
 
S. SS 
3. 
A 
- / 
17tuezzzo 7. 
/64-2%%,4 4. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, C. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
APPARATUS FOR COLLECTING AND DRYING THE SEDIMENTARY 
R, CORSCADEN. 
MATTER OF SEWAGE, 
Patented Apr. 14, 1885. 
No. 35,912. 
 
 
  
 
 
1. 
2 
t 
- 
- 
N N N N 
N N 
N 
N 
N N N N N 
2 
settlewels is e N 
y NRyws S. 
2 
XVS wkwa (N N 
y 
WYAWV WYAVYVVYVYWY 
2N 
N 
R. 
N 
N WY 
 
 
 
 
2(7(esses: 
S. S.S.-sk 
R 2 
as: 
77(Uevi?oz. 
6%/zza24. 
N. Peters. Pholc-livographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT CORSCADEN, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
APPARATUS FOR COLLECTING AND DRYING THE SEDIMENTARY MATTER OF SEWAGE, 
S532 CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 315,912, dated April 14, 1885. 
Application filed October. 4, 1883. (No model.) 
IO 
2C) 
35 
- 
basins. 
Figure i is a horizontal section on line a 2: 
fo all, whon, it may coneeria: 
of Fig. 3, showing the sector-formed catch 
Beit known that I, ROBERT CoRSCADEN, of 
basins, chimney-flue, and parallel catch-ba 
Providence, in the State of Rhode Island, have 
sins. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the par 
invented an Improvement in Apparatus for 
allel catch-basins on line a' a' of Fig. 1. Fig. 
Collecting and Drying the Sedimentary Mat 
3 is a vertical section of the chimney, catch 
ter of Sewage, of which the following is a 
basins, and sewer on linea a of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 
specification. 
4 is an elevation of the drying portion of the 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
apparatus. Fig. 5 is a partial plan view of 
combination of a sewer with two or more catch 
the same, broken away at one side for the pur 
basins placed below the bottom line of the bed 
pose of illustration. Fig. 6 is a horizontal 
of the sewer, and having valves or gates at 
section of the sewer and three parallel catch 
their inlet and outlet openings, whereby the 
matter flowing through the sewer may be shut 
basins. 
In the accompanying drawings. A is a sewer 
off from or be turned into either of the catch 
leading into an annular channel, B, provided 
basins, as desired, thus allowing the collected 
with valved or gated openings a CE (t, through 
sediment to be removed without at any time 
which the sewage will flow into the sector 
obstructing the proper flow of sewage. 
formed catch-basins CCC, separated from each 
It also consists in the combination of a sewer 
other by means of the radial partitions bb b. 
provided with two or more catch-basins placed 
Suitable outlets, ecc, provided with valves or 
below the bottom line of the bed of the sewer 
gates ddd, and connecting the catch-basins 
with a chimney-flue adapted for drawing the 
with the chimney-flue e, are provided for the 
foul odors or gases from the sewer and catch 
overflow from the catch-basins, and the over 
flow, after falling to the bottom of the chim 
It also consists in providing the chimney 
ney-flue, will pass off through the Sewer D, 
with a spiral flue made in the wall of the chim 
which may be extended to any required dis 
ney, whereby the heat derived from a furnace 
tance from the catch-basins, and may be pro 
may be made to accelerate the draft of the 
vided with the parallel catch-basins C C, ex 
chimney-flue for drawing off the sewage-gas. 
cavated below the bottom line of the bed of 
It also consists in a circular series of sector 
the sewer, and in this case I provide a swing 
formed catch-basins surrounding a centrally 
ing gate, f, pivoted at the end of the parti 
arranged chimney-flue with a furnace and 
tion g, which serves to separate the two catch 
heating-pipes adapted for drying the sediment 
ary matter of the sewage in order to manu 
basins. 
Suitable tide-gates, h. h. and i, or gates adapt 
facture a transportable fertilizer therefrom. 
ed to prevent the outer air from passing 
It also consists in a circular series of sector 
through the sewer and up the chimney-?lue e, 
formed catch-basins surrounding a centrally 
may also be provided, the bed of the over 
arranged chimney-flue with a furnace pro 
flow-sewer D'being made at a lower level than 
vided with heating-pipes and a heating-floor 
that of the sewer D. The catch-basins C. C. 
arranged over the heating-pipe for the deposit 
are each provided with a man-hole, i, closed 
of the sedimentary matter of the sewage to 
by means of a cover, l, and through which the 
be dried, and a circular track for transport 
collected sedimentary deposit in the catch-ba 
ing a hoisting-engine from opposite the man 
sin may be removed by means of a self-load 
hole of one of the catch-basins of the series 
ing car or shovel adapted for moving down 
to the man-hole of another catch-basin, for the 
purpose of raising the sedimentary deposit 
the curved or inclined side l of the catch-ba 
sin. Whenever the gates in the sewer at op 
from the catch-basin and transporting the same 
posite ends of one of the catch-basins are 
to the drying-floor. 
closed, the flow of sewage will be directed into 
It also consists in a float placed at the out 
the opposite catch-basin. Thus the accunall 
let-opening of the catch-basins and adapted to 
lated sediment may be renoved by first clos 
prevent substances that float on the surface of 
the water from passing off with the overflow. ling one of the catch-basins and then the other 
55 
85 
90 
O) 
2 
315,912 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
- 
without at any time interfering with the free 
flow of sewage. 
A float, e, may be placed at the outlet of 
the catch-basin, as shown in Fig. 2, in order 
to prevent substances that float on the suface 
of the water from passing off with the over 
flow, and instead of the two catch-basins C'C', 
arranged side by side, any desired number of 
parallel catch-basins may be employed, three 
such basins being shown in Fig. 6. 
A furnace, E, located in a suitable cham 
ber, m, is connected with a spiral coil of pipe, 
n, (shown in Fig. 5,) and connecting with the 
spiral flue F, made in the wall of the chim 
ney G. 
Over the spirally-coiled pipe n is placed the 
metallic floor H, upon which the sediment re 
moved from the catch-basins C is to be placed 
for the purpose of drying, in order to reduce 
the sewage-sediment to a proper condition 
for handling and transportation, and a pro 
tecting-flange, o, is made around the man 
hole p of the catch-basins to prevent the de 
posited sediment from falling into the man 
hole when the same is opened for the purpose 
of removing the sediment from the catch-ba 
SS. 
Over the drying-floor His placed the cover 
or flat roof I, provided with the radially-di 
rected car-tracks J, extending from the trap 
doors q to the outer edge of the roof. The 
trap-doors q are hinged to the roof at their in 
ner edges, and are provided at one side with 
an inclined projecting arm, r, adapted to come 
in contact with a projecting pin on the self 
loading car, and thus to be automatically 
raised and lowered by means of the forward 
and backward movement of the car. The ma 
terials raised by the car from the catch-basins 
are to be dumped through the hatchway un 
der the trap-doors onto the drying-floor be 
low, and evenly spread over the surface of 
the same, in order to facilitate the drying of 
the material by the heat derived from the fur 
nace-pipe in. 
A movable hoisting-engine and boiler, K, 
is placed on the circular track L, the smoke 
pipes of the boiler being connected with the 
furnace-pipe in by means of the radial pipes 
in?, arranged, for convenience, near the side of 
the several man-holes p, as shown in Figs. 4 
and 5, and thus the escaping heat from the 
fire-box of the boiler may be made to assistin 
drying the sewage-sediment deposited on the 
floor H. Above the boiler K, Fig. 3, is piv 
oted the tilting track t, adapted to receive the 
loaded car on its upward passage along the 
curved or inclined side l of the catch-basin, 
and to transfer the same to the radial tracks 
J. The car it, having floor v, has attached 
thereto a rope, w, which passes over a sheave, 
ac, to the drum gy of the engine. 
Openings & 2 are made in the outer wall of 
the chimney between the drying-floor n and 
the roof I, connecting with the spiral flue F, 
and serving to draw off the steam and foul air 
75 
95. 
The radial pipes in, which connect with the 8o 
from the drying sediment on the floor H, and 
the flues F and F, after circling spirally around 
the chimney for a sufficient height above the 
floor, are brought into the central flue, e, of 7o 
the chimney, thus insuring a strong draft. 
The heat from the furnace, by passing up the 
spiral flue F, will so heat the lower portion of 
the chimney as to cause a greatly-increased 
draft from the sewers and catch-basins. 
Short tracks a? a may be made to extend up 
ward from the man-holes p to meet the end of 
the tilting track of the movable engine located 
on the circular track L. 
coiled furnace-pipe in, are to be closed at their 
outer ends when not in use by means of a suit 
able valve or cover. 
The openingsa a, through which the sewage 
flows from the circular channel B to the catch 
basins C, are provided with the gates or valves 
c', by means of which any one of the catch 
basins of the series may be shut off from con 
nection with the main sewer A, for the purpose 
of removing the collected sediment, and upon 
opening the man-hole p of any of the basins 
the valve or gate d is to be closed, in order to 
prevent the outer air from rushing through 
the man-hole, and thence up the chimney-flue 
e, and thus disturbing the draft. 
The overflow-sewer D may be made to pass 
from the chimney-flue in the line of one of the 
partition - walls b, above the bottom of the 
catch-basins, as shown in Fig. 3. 
ed with the main sewer and catch-basins, is 
provided with a valve, b, adjusted to admit 
only sufficient outer air to allow the gases of 
the sewers to be drawn into the central flue, e, 
of the chimney, and thence into the upper air 
at the top of the chimney, thus tending to free 
the city or town from sewer-gas. 
I do not herein particularly describe or 
claim the construction of the car or the means 
of operating the same to remove the contents 
of the catch-basins to the drying-floor, as that 
forms the subject of another application now 
pending. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S-ad 
1. The combination, with a sewer, of one or 
more series of sector-formed catch-basins or 
precipitating tanks arranged, as described, 
to freely receive the discharge of said sewer, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the sewer and the 
catch-basins with which it is connected, of the 
chimney having a ventilating-flue for the 
catch-basins and an independent flue for the 
furnace, as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a series of radial 
catch-basins, of a circular drain or sewer ex 
tending around and communicating with said 
catch-basins, as set forth. 
4. In an apparatus for treating sewage, the 
combination, with the drying-chamber, the 
The farthest end of each sewer A, connect- IOO 
II5 
I25 
IC 
315,912 
3. 
45 
gine from the man-hole of one of the catch 
basins to the man-hole of another catch-basin, 
substantially as described. 
10. The combination of a circular series of 
sector-formed catch-basins surrounding a cell 
trally-arranged chimney, with a furnace or fire 
chamber and heating-floor, and a cover or roof 
for the heating-floor provided with trap-doors 
and radial tracks adapted for transporting 
the sediment from the catch-basins and depos 
iting the same on the heating-floor, substan 
tially as described, 
11. The combination of the spiral flue F, 
provided with the openings 2 &, made in the 
outer wall of the chimney, with the drying 
floor H and roof I, substantially as described. 
12. The combination of a sewer, A, and two 
or more catch-basins placed below the bottom 
line of the bed of the sewer, with a ventilating 
chimney-flue and a gate or valve, b, adapted 
for the admission of only sufficient air to al 
low the gases of the sewers to be drawn up the 
chimney-flue, substantially as described. 
13. The combination of a sewer and two or 
more catch-basins placed below the bottom 
line of the bed of the sewer, with a ventilating 
chimney-flue, and an overflow-sewer connect 
ing with the chimney-flue at a point below the 
overflow-outlets of the catch-basins into the 
chimney-flue, substantially as described. 
14. The combination of a sewer and a catch 
basin placed below the line of the bed of the 
sewer, with a float adapted to prevent sub 
stances floating on the surface of the water 
from passing off with the overflow, substan 
tially as described. 
ROBERT CORSCADEN. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN S. LYNCH, 
SOCRATES SHOLFIELD. 
55 
65 
75 
IO 
heating devices, and the chimney, of the flue 
in the chimney and the openings thereinto 
for the escape of steam and effluvia, from the 
drying-chamber, substantially as set forth. 
5. In an apparatus for treating sewage, the 
combination, with the Series of catch-basins or 
precipitating tanks with their gates, as de 
scribed, of the sewer delivering thereinto, the 
discharge sewer or drain, and an automatic 
gate, i, as set forth. 
6. The combination of a sewer with two or 
more catch-basins placed below the bottom 
line of the bed of the sewer, and having a deck 
or floor thereover, and man-holes or hatches, 
and a curved or inclined side extending under 
the man-hole and adapted for the up-and 
down movement of an automatic car or shovel 
for removing the sedimentary deposit from the 
catch-basins, Substantially as described. 
7. The combination of a sewer provided with 
placed below the 
two or more catch-basins 
bottom line of the bed of the sewer, and a 
ventilating-chimney provided with a spirally 
constructed flue made in the wall of the chim 
ney, with a fire chamber or furnace connected 
with the spiral flue, whereby the base of the 
chimney may be heated so as as to insure a 
strong draft up the chimney-flue, substantially 
as described. 
S. The combination of a circular series of 
sector-formed catch-basins surrounding a cen 
trally-arranged chimney, with a furnace or 
fire chamber, heating-pipe, and heating-floor 
arranged over the heating-pipe, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
9. The combination of a circular series of 
sector-formed catch-basins surrounding a cen 
trally-arranged chimney, with a furnace or fire 
chamber, and a heating-floor with a circular 
4o track adapted for transporting a hoisting-en 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316012.txt	UNITED STATES ? PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN CURTIN, OF MARION, WTRGINIA. 
PLATING = BOARD) 
ECTF"|CATTON forming part of Tetters Patent INo. 316,012, date3 April 21, 1885. 
Application filed September 17, 1884. (No model.) 
^ 
rable. 
70 dZZ |h0m? z 7m?d/ 007bc772; 
Be it kn0Wn that I, JOHN CURTIN, a citizen 
of the United States, reSiding at Marion, in 
the c0unty of Smyth and State of Wirginia, 
hawe in wented a new and useful Impr0wement 
in Plaiting-B0ards, of Which the following is a 
Specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying draWingS. 
My invention relates to plaiting-boards; and 
it has for its object to prOwide a dewice of this 
character with a roller for keeping the cloth 
being Operated upon SimOOtha and prevent it 
from becoming Wrinkld. 
A furthel' object of the imwention is tO pr0 
wide a plaiting-b0ard With adjustable piwoted 
Spring presSer arms or I'0ds for holding the 
cloth being Operated upon in pOSition. 
A further object of the in wention iS to pr0 
widea, plaiting-b0ard Which Shall be cheap and 
Simple in itS construction, effectiWe in itS Op 
eration, and one that Will be Strong and du 
With these etnds in WieW the imWention (eOna 
Sists in the improwed conStruction and in the 
combination and arrangement of the various 
partS, hereimafter fully deScribed, and pointed 
Out in the claimS. 
In the drawingS, B'igure 1 is a perSpective 
wiew of a plaiting-b0ard COnStructed in accord 
ance with my in wention, Showing both of the 
Spring preSSer-armS loWered. F'ig. 2 is a Side 
eleWation shOW|ing both of the armS raised. 
Fig. 8 is a detail wieW of the plaiting-knife. 
In the accompanying draWingS, in Which 
like letterS of reference indicate correspond 
ing partS in all the figureS, A representS the 
board, hawing at itS forward end, on each Side 
thereof, a forWardly-extending arm, B. Be 
tWeen Said arms, just in front of the b0ard A., 
is journaled a roller, C, the purp0Se of Which 
is to keep the cloth being Operated upon 
Sm00th and prewent it from bec0ming Wrinkled 
when it is fed onto the face of the board. Upon 
the SideS of the plaiting-b0ard, near each end 
thereof, are pr0wided a Series of holeS or open 
ings, (t. Upon each Side of the board, near 
the forward end there0f, fitted in any One of 
the SerieS 0f h0leS Or 0peningS dt, iS a Staple, b. 
Fitted in Said stapleS are the endS Of a preSSer'- 
arm, 10. Said preSSer consistSOfaSingle piece 
or strip of Stiff Wire hawing itS ends bent to 
In Operation the Spring preSSer-arm at the 65 
form h00kS 6, which engage Said Staples, and 
thus pi wotally. Secure Said preSSer-arm theret0. 
At the other end of the table is a, preSSer-arm, 
IE, which iS Somewhat Similar, in COnStruction 55 
to that already described, with the exception 
that it is pi woted a slight distance abowe the 
table and haS a U-Shaped portion, dl, and alSO 
has a portion, , which lieS flat upon the b0ard. 
These preSSer-arms are connected by a Series 6O 
of tapes, ', which Ser'we to hold the ends of 
the preSSer: armS in engagement With the Sta 
pleS, and also holding the cloth flat and Sm00th 
upon the table or board. 
forward end 0f the b0ard is raised and the 
cloth paSSed between it and the roller. Said 
preSSer-arm is then loWered and holds the 
cloth in p0Sition. The preSSer-arm at the 
other end of the b0ard is then raised, and the 
end Of the cloth paSSed underneath the Same, 
after which it is lowered, and the cloth plaited 
by meanS of a knife of the cOnStruction ShOWn 
in Fig. 8. The tapeS may be tightened at any 
time by Withdrawing the stapleS and mOwing 
them to the next adjacent hole in the board. 
It Will be Seen from the ab0We deScription 
that a plaiting-b0ard constructed in acc0rdance 
With my imwention iS Simple, may be manu 
factured and Supplied at a Slight c0St, and that 
its operation is thoroughly efficient and ef 
fectiWe. 
Hawing fully described my imwention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to Secure by I getterS 
|Patent, iS 
1. The combination, in a plaiting - b0ard, 
With b0ard A', 0f a roller journaled at One end 
thereof, and a Spring preSSer-arma lhaW img itS 
free portion resting on Said roller. 
? 
ing a roller journaled at one end there0f, ' of 
Spring preSSer-armSl00ated one at each end of 
the bcard, and tapeS c0nnecting Said arms, 
SubStantially aS Set forth. 
 my own I have hereto affixed my Signature in 
presence of tW0 WitneSSeS. 
2. The combination, With the b0ard A, haW- 9O 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing aS 95 
85 
75 
 
^ 
JOHN OURTIN, 
WitneSSeS: 
M. M. SEAWER,  
JOHN MT. WTLSON, 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316112.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 316,112. 
J. E. CAREY. 
ELECTRIC CLOCK MOWEMENT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 21, 1885. 
Sig- y . 
- - - - - - - - - - - 
a. 
6 
ti----1a, 
 
N. Perers. Photo-lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. E. CAREY. 
ELECTRIO CLOCK MOWEMENT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 316,ll 2, 
Patented Apr. 21, l885. 
Wit vesses: 
 
UNITE). STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIAN E. CAREY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRIC - CLOCK MOVEMENT. 
Application filed March 8, 1884. (No model.) 
The objects of my invention are to produce 
w 
be fully described in the following. 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 6o 
by me for this purpose, while more efficient, 
Be it known that I, JULIAN E. CAREY, of may be made very cheap, either by stamping 
To all, whon, it may coice77: 
the city, county, and State of New York, have up the metal or otherwise, particularly when 55 
invented certain new and useful Improve- manufactured in large quantities. 
Certain minor details of the invention not 
ments in Electric-Clock Movements; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full and particularly mentioned here, but claimed, will 
exact description thereof. 
a movement for electric clocks which shall be this specification, and represent what I con 
sufficiently simple and cheap to allow its in- sider the best means of carrying out the inven 
troduction into general use, and which shall tion. . 
be so constructed as to preclude the possibility 
Figure 1 is a back view of the movement. 
of occasional failure either in consequence of Fig. 2 is a side view of the same. Fig. 3 is a 65 
the improper reception of the electric impulses front view. Figs. 4 and 5 are diagrams, the 
or of parts of the mechanism getting out of former showing the wheel moving and retain 
order. 
ing parts and their relation to the wheel in 
I am aware that electric-clock movements the position of rest, and the latter showing the 
are in existence which operate satisfactorily; same parts after they have been lifted to move 7c 
but such movements are of complicated con- the wheel one step. Fig. 6 is a view on a 
struction, and for this reason alone very ex- larger scale, corresponding to Fig. 1, certain 
pensive, while, in order to insure a continuous portions being broken away. Fig. 7 is a plan 
good service, the delicate parts of such move. in section on the line a ac, Fig. 6, showing cer 
ments require frequent inspection. I have as- tain portions of the mechanism. 
certained by repeated and prolonged experi- 
The frame of the mechanism is composed of 
ments that with my invention these difficulties the front plate, (, smaller back plate, a', and 
are overcome, since the peculiar arrangement posts a' a'. The electro-magnet B, which re 
of parts insures an efficient and reliable ser- ceives the electric impulses at given intervals 
vice without necessitating frequent examina- from a suitable source, (not represented,) is So 
tions of the apparatus, the simplicity of the mounted by means of a screw, b, upon an an 
latter at the saune time permitting it to be of gle-plate, l', the hole in the latter, through 
fered at such prices as will greatly advance which the screw b passes being formed as a 
the general use of the electric time system. 
slot, as shown at b, Figs. 1 and 6, so as to al 
ing of the hand-moving mechanism, I have de- lateral adjustment of the magnet With relation 
vised a combination of stops arranged to en- to its armature C is effected by means of a 
gage with the wheel which is driven by the slot, a, through which pass the screws (t", which 
action of the armature, so that the said wheel fasten to the plate b to the main plate (i. 
is at no time free to turn in either direction, 
except when the propelling-pawl is brought gained by this adjustment of the magnet B, 
into position for action, and then the motion which permits the locating and Securing of 
of the parts which cause said pawl to act is the magnet in a vertical line, after a lateral 
such that the wheel can turn only the required adjustment has been fixed, without in any Way 
distance in the desired direction, becoming disturbing it; and the reverse is als0 true, that 95 
again locked by the very termination of such when a vertical adjustment has been deter 
motion. I am aware that this effect has partly mined and fixed a lateral adjustment may 
been produced prior to my invention by the afterward be made without in the slightest af. 
employment of a retaining-pawl or of analo- fecting the vertical adjustment already made. 
gous devices; but all such devices have re- This arangement allows the armature to be at IOO 
quired the employment of an extra pivot, and once fixed permanently with relation to the 
also in many cases the action of springs, where- parts operated by it, and requires no further 
by the construction was made expensive and displacement. The armature C is supported 
the apparatus more delicate. The stops used at the center c, and it is normally held away from 
In order to insure against accidental turn- low the magnet to be adjusted vertically. The S5 
It will be seen that a peculiar advantage is 9o 
75 
IO 
15 
25 
45 
 
2 
316, li2 
IO 
25 
35 
the poles of electro-magnet B by the overbal 
ancing weight of the parts that it acts upon 
when energized. The latter parts consist of 
a bell-crank lever, the arms thereof being let 
tered D and E. These arms are fastened upon 
the shaft F, so that both are compelled to move 
together. 
The arm D consists of a substantially down 
Ward-projecting part the lower extremity of 
which is formed on one side with an arm, d, 
the latter being bent so as to reach behind 
that side of the armature C which faces the 
poles of the electro-magnet, where it carries 
an adjusting-screw, d", which bears against the 
Said face of armature C. On the opposite side 
the extremity of the arm D carries one, d, of 
the above-mentioned stops, the latter reach 
ing across the periphery of the minute-wheel 
G. The arm E carries near its extremity the 
pawl e, pivoted at e' and arranged so as to be 
able to co-operate with the teeth of the wheel 
G. About midway between the center of the 
axis F and the pin e' is arranged the other, e", 
of the above-mentioned stops. b is a safety 
Stop attached to the plate b' or to any other 
part of the fixed frame. This stop serves to 
prevent the arm E from ever rising too high 
in case of accidental derangement of any of 
the other parts of the mechanism. The wheel 
G has sixty teeth, and is fastened upon the 
shaft (/, which carries the minute-hand. (Not 
represented.) A pinion, g, upon the shaftg 
engages with a wheel, H, the pivot of which 
is firmly Set in the bridge piece (t. A second 
pinion, h, fastened to the wheel H, extends 
through the plate C, and engages on the front 
thereof with the wheel I upon the sleeve i. 
The train g H. h. I is the ordinary train for 
transmitting the proper motion from the 
minute-shaft to the hour-hand, and does not, 
therefore, require any further detailed descrip 
tion. 
The general operation of the mechanism is 
Very simple and requires only a few words to 
be fully understand, upon which the effect of 
the stops d' e" in the co-operation with the 
wheel G will be fully and minutely set forth. 
It is evident that when the armature C is 
attracted by the energizing of the magnet B 
the arm D, by means of its extension d, and 
consequently the axis F and arms E, will be 
rocked so as to raise the arm E, with its pawl 
e, the latter engaging with the tooth following 
the one that it was engaged with at the preced 
ing moment. When the armature is then re 
leased, the weight of the lever E will cause a 
rocking of the system upon the axis F in the 
opposite direction. Thereby the wheel G is 
turned one step, moving both hands through 
the proper connections, as desired. 
Considering, now, Figs. 4 and 5, it will be 
noticed that with the mechanism at rest, as in 
Fig. 4, the stop d is Out of engagement, the 
pawl e appears as not resting upon the upper 
side of the tooth g, which it was engaged with 
at the preceding operation, and the two sides 
of the triangular stop e' are engaged between 
the teeth gig in such manner that either tooth 
is in firm contact (due to the weight of the arm 
E) with a side of the stop e". Thus con 
ditioned the latter prevents the wheel G from 
being turned by any force that, under ordinary 
circumstances, might be brought to act on it 
accidentally. If, now, the bell-crank lever D 
E on shaft F begins a rocking motion, the pawl 
e will rise over the tooth g, and the stop e" 
gradually leaves the space between the teeth g 
g; but before it has left said space completely, 
whereby the wheelG would become liberated, 
the stop d'enters between the teeth off and 
in its turn locks the wheel G. On the succeed 
ing downward motion, now, of the parts, the 
top d' begins immediately to recede from be 
tween the teeth gg, so that, upon the pawl e 
coming in contact with the tooth g, it can be 
gin to turn the wheel, the inclined lower side 
of stop d' permitting such motion, Said stop 
receding gradually, as required, by the for 
ward motion of the wheel, while an accidental 
return motion of the wheel would still be pre 
vented by the upper face of stop d coming in 
contact with the lower side of tooth of until 
the stop has completely left the space between 
teeth g(f, but at that moment the tooth ghas 
already passed under the point of stop e", and 
the latter has entered the space between teeth 
g' and of, thus again in its turn controlling the 
wheel G. At the final part of the downward 
movement that inclined face of stop e' which 
comes then in contact with the edge of tooth 
g' pressing upon the latter urges the wheel G. 
on a little faster, so as to liberate the pawl e 
from the face of tooth g, and bringing the 
wheel to rest in a position corresponding to 
that shown in Fig. 4, having advanced, of 
course, the distance of one tooth. It will thus be 
seen that the stop e not only serves to hold the 
wheel in position after it has been moved, but 
it also acts as an impelling-pawl to liberate the 
wheel from the main pawl e and turn it suffi. 
ciently to bring it into the exact position re 
quired after each step. 
In practice I find that the best results are 
obtained when the distances between F and e 
and between F and d are equal, and when the 
distance between Fande' is double the former. 
Many modifications may be made in the de 
tails without departing from the principle of 
my invention or sacrificing all the advantages 
thereof. 
It is not necessary that the wheel G be 
mounted upon the minute-hand Shaft, so that 
an electric impulse has to be sent over the 
line every minute. The wheel may have any 
other desired number of teeth and the elec. 
tric impulses sent at any desired intervals; 
but in this case Suitable connection will have 
to be made, either by gearing or otherwise, 
with the minute-handshaft to propel the hands 
properly. 
In some cases I can dispense with the stop 
d, and use only the propelling-pawl e and 
the setting or adjusting pawl or stop e". 
In this manner the construction of the device 
OO 
SO 
ICC 
IO 
II5 
I25 
 
316,112 
3 
IC 
30 
35 
is still more simplified, while at least some of 
the advantages of my invention are retained. 
I attach considerable importance to the fact 
that the armature C is suspended in a verti 
cal or nearly vertical plane, because there 
by the weight of said armature may be en 
tirely thrown out of consideration in the con 
struction of the device, so as to leave the weight 
of the parts swinging on or with the arbor F 
the only matter to be considered with refer 
ence to the strength of the electric current re 
quired for operation, and this weight of the 
parts carried by F may be easily adjusted by 
slightly increasing or diminishing the quan 
tity of metal or by other well-known means. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with a driven wheel, 
as G, of a rocking lever carrying a pawl ca 
pable of engaging with the teeth of Said. Wheel, 
and two rigid stops arranged to act alter 
nately as retaining means for the wheel, one 
of Said stops being So shaped as to act also as 
an additional impelling - pawl, whereby the 
wheel is set or adjusted in its final position 
of rest after each step, substantially as speci 
fied. 
2. The combination, with a driven wheel, 
of a rocking lever carrying a pawl and two 
rigid stops, one of which latter serves also as 
an additional impelling-pawl, and of suitable 
automatic means for imparting motion to said 
lever mechanism, all arranged to operate sub 
stantially as herein specified. 
3. The combination, with magnet B, ver 
tically - suspended armature C, driven wheel 
G, and rocking shaft F, of the arm D, hav 
ing extensions d and d", engaging the one with 
the armature and the other with wheel G, and 
of arm E, carrying pawl e and stop or projec 
tion e', which latter two parts act both on 
wheel G, both arms D and E being carried 
by the shaft F, and the whole being arranged 
to operate substantially as herein specified. 
4. The combination, with a driven wheel, 
as G, of a rocking lever carrying a pawl ca 
pable of engaging with the teeth of said wheel, 
and a rigid stop, as e, arranged to act al 
ternately as a retaining means for the wheel 
and as an additional impelling-pawl, where 
by the wheel is set or adjusted in its final po 
sition of rest after each step, substantially as 
specified. 
5. The combination of a magnet, B, verti 
cally -Suspended armature C, driven wheel, 
as G, rock-shaft F, an arm carried on said 
rock-shaft, as d, with a gravity propelling 
lever, E, arranged normally in a horizontal 
plane, its propelling-pawl e carried at its vi 
brating end, and a main controlling-stop car 
ried upon said lever, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of magnet B, vertical 
armature C, gravity-lever E, carrying pawl e 
and stop e", rock-shaft F, carrying lever i), 
with arms d and d, and wheel G, all construct 
ed to operate substantially as described. 
7. The combination of magnet B, vertical 
ly-arranged armature C, with arm d, rock 
- 
85 
12. The combination of the magnet B, Ver- IOO 
shaft F, and bell-crank lever DE, carrying pawl 
e and stops e' d', practically at right angles 
from their center of motion, for alternately en- 7O 
gaging betwee; the teeth of wheel G, substan- 
tially as described. 
8. The combination of magnet B, Vertical 
armature C, an arm, D d, mounted on shaft 
F, a gravity propelling-lever, E, with its pro 75 
pelling-pawl carried at its vibrating end, and 
an adjusting stop, all to operate wheel G, Sub 
Stantially as described. 
9. The combination of an adjustable electro 
magnet, an armature constructed to engage SO 
with an arm arranged upon a rock-shaft at 
right angles, or nearly so, with a gravity-lever 
which carries the propelling-pawl, and main 
stop for the driving-wheel, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
10. The combination, with driven wheel G. 
andgravity-lever E, carrying propelling-pawle 
near its vibrating end, of a centrally-located 
adjusting-stop carried upon said lever, a rock 
shaft, an arm, D, carrying stop d, and means 9) 
for operating the same, substantially as de 
scribed. 
11. The combination of the electro-magnet 
B and vertical armature C, constructed to bear 
upon an arm carried by the rock-shaft for rais- 9 
5 
ing a gravity-lever upon which are mounted 
at its end a propelling-pawl and at its center 
the main controlling-stop, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
tically-arranged armature C, for engaging With 
an arm, d, carried by a rock-shaft, a gravity 
lever carrying a propelling-pawl at its vibrat 
ing end, and a main controlling-stop With a 
vertical arm, D, carrying stop d", substantially Io5 
as described. 
13. The combination of an electro-magnet, 
and a vertically-arranged armature constructed 
to engage with one arm of and vibrate a bell 
crank lever carried by a rock-shaft, and cal'. I IO 
rying a propelling-pawl at the end of one of 
its arms and a stop at the end of its other arm, 
substantially as described. 
14. The combination, with driven wheel G. 
and lever E, carrying propelling-pawl e near I5 
its vibrating end, of a centrally-located adjust 
ing-stop carried upon said lever, a rock-shaft, 
an arm, D, carrying stop d, and means for Op 
erating the same, substantially as described. 
armature C, constructed to bear upon an arm 
carried by the rock-shaft for operating a lever 
upon which are mounted at its end a propelling 
pawl and at its center the main controlling 
stop, substantially as described. 
16. The combination of an electro-magnet, 
and an armature constructed to engage with one 
arin of a bell-crank lever carried by a rock 
shaft and provided with a propelling-pawl at 
the end of one of its arms and a stop at the end I3O 
of its other arm, substantially as described. 
17. In an electric clock, the combination, 
With an armature controlling the hand-mov 
ing mechanism, of a magnet and two sets of 
15. The combination of electro-magnet Band I2O 
I 25 
 
4. 
316,132 
Set-screws, whereby said magnet may be ad- latter and carrying stops or pawls which Op 
justed in two directions at right angles to each erate the driven wheel, substantially as de- O 
other, substantially as described. 
Scribed. 
1S. In an electric clock, an electro-magnet 
5 and a vertically-arranged armature construct- 
ed so as to engage directly with an arm upon 
a rock-shaft, in combination with said rock- 
shaft, and with arms or levers mounted on the 
JULIAN E. CAREY. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH. L. LlEVY, 
A. J. LEEIMAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316212.txt	! 
(No Model.) 
C. F. WILSON. 
No. 316,212, 
BOLER, FEED REGULATOR, 
Patented Apr. 21, 1885. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES F. WILSON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO M. MELVIN BEMIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
BOER-FEED REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATIOIN forming part of Letters Patent No. 316,212, dated April 21, 1885. 
Application filed May 8, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
65 
tion, with a boiler and the balanced vessel 
go all, whom it may concern : 
flexibly connected with the steam and water 
Be it known that I, CHARLES F. WILSON, 
of the city of Brooklyn, in the county of spaces of the boiler, of a steam-Whistle the 
valve of which is controlled by the rising and 
Kings and State of New York, have invented 
falling movements of the cylinder in a novel 
a new and useful Improvement in Boiler-Feed 
and simple manner, particularly, hereinafter 
Regulators and Alarm Apparatus, of which 
the following is a specification. 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
The accompanying drawing represents an 
My invention relates to apparatus in which 
elevation of a part of a boiler and a partly Sec 
the necessary movement for letting on or shut 
tional elevation of an apparatus embodying 
ting off the supply of feed-water to the boiler 
my invention and connected there with. 
is obtained by a vessel which is connected with 
A designates the portion of the boiler, which 
the boiler above and below the water-line by 
may be of the upright type, and C at a desig 
flexible connections, so that the said vessel 
nate the several gage - cocks. The proper 
may fall or rise by reason of the greater or less 
water-line is indicated by the dotted line ar. 
Volume of water contained in it, the volume 
B designates a closed vessel, here shown as 
of water varying with the water-level in the 
of cylindric form, and which may be of any 
boiler. 
desired size. This vessel is connected by a 
My invention consists in the combination, 
a pipe, C, with the steam-space of the boiler, 
with a boiler, an outside vessel flexibly con 
and by a pipe, C, with the water-space of the 7o 
nected with the steam and water spaces of the 
boiler. In the pipes C C are valves c c', 
boiler, so that it may rise and fall with the 
whereby the passage of steam or water through 
variations in the volume of water contained 
them may be shut off, when desired, and the 
Within it, and balancing devices for the vessel, 
pipes are of such length that they will allow 
of a steam cylinder and piston whereby the 
the vessel B to rise and fall, thereby forming 
admission of feed-water to the boiler may be 
flexible connections between the Vessel and 
controlled, and an induction-valve for said 
the boiler. As here shown, the pipes CC are 
steam - cylinder, so connected with the said 
provided with several bends or elbows, thus 
rising and falling vessel as to be controlled by 
allowing for considerable flexure by distrib 
it and moved by its movement. The moving 
uting the strain between the several joints. 
piston of said steam-cylinder may be connected 
At the end of the vessel B is a blow-off pipe, 
with the steam-inlet valve of a feed-injector, 
C, provided with a blow-off valve, c'. 
with the belt-shifter of a beltfeed-pump, or with 
The vessel B is so supported and balanced 
the throttle or stop valve of a steam-actuated 
feed-pump, thereby controlling through any 
that when the volume of water therein corre 
of these ordinary boiler-feeding devices the 
sponds to the normal water-linea of the boiler 
it will occupy a definite and intermediate po 
admission of feed-water to the boiler. The 
sition, as shown. In this example of my in 
steam-inlet valve of a feed-water injector 
vention the vessel is provided with a bail or 
should always be opened and closed slowly to 
hanger, B, and is supported by a Spring 
insure the proper operation of the injector; 
hanger, D, from a hook or fixed support, d; 
and to the end that such slow movement of 
but a weight or a weighted scale-beam may be 
the piston of the aforesaid steam-cylinder may 
applied in any suitable way for balancing the 
be produced, I combine with the steam-cylin 
der and piston a cataract cylinder and piston, 
vessel. 
the latter cylinder containing liquid which is 
From the above description it will be under 
stood that when the water-line a' in the vessel 
circulated from end to end of the cataract 
corresponds with the normal water-linea in the 
cylinder by the movement of the piston there 
in, the speed of movement being controlled 
boiler the vessel will be balanced; but if the 
by more or less throttling the passage through 
water rises above the water-lines at a the ves 
sel will fall, and if the water falls materially 
which circulation is effected. 
The invention also consists in the combina- below said lines the vessel will rise, 
90 
95 
75 
IOO 
5 
IO 
25 
45 
 
316,212 
5 
E designates a water-gage on the vessel, and 
from the upper or steam connection of the gage 
with the vessel there extends a pipe, e, termi 
nating in a steam-whistle, e. In the pipe e is 
a valve shell or body, e, and e designates a 
stem or valve-spindle secured at e' to a fixed 
support, and up and down which said shellor 
body e will be moved by the rising and fall 
ing movement of the vessel B. When the ves 
sel is in its intermediate position, as shown, 
the stem or valvee' closes the passage through 
the pipe e; but in Said stem or valve are two 
cross-ports, * *, and when the pipe e in rising 
or falling comes opposite one or other of these 
cross-ports, steam will escape through the whis 
tle and Sound an alarm, thus giving notice that if 
the level of water in the boiler is above or be 
low the desired level. The whistle forms an 
audible alarm controlled by the rising aud 
falling vessel. 
F designates a steam-cylinder, and Fitspis 
ton, the rod f of which is to be connected with 
the steam-inlet valve of a feed-injector, the 
belt-shipper of a belt feed-pump, or the throt 
tle-valve of a steam feed-pump. I have here 
shown a feed-injector, I, which is supplied 
with Steam by a pipe, 0. The water-inlet or 
suction of the injector has a pipe, o', which is 
extended to a suitable source of supply, and 
the water-outlet o' from the injector is con 
nected with the boiler. The handle o', which 
controls the operation of the injector, is con 
nected with and moved by the rod f. 
The valve-chest F* of the cylinder Freceives 
steam from a pipe, f', which steam is conduct 
ed through passages f* f* to opposite ends of 
the chest. 
The cylinder F has induction and eduction 
passages g g leading to its opposite ends, and 
an intermediate main exhaust-port, g. 
In the valve-chest F* is a cylindric slide 
valve, h, which by its movement opens either 
passage, 9 or 9', to the steam and places the 
other passage, g or g, in communication with 
the main exhaust g. 
The rising and falling vessel B is connected 
by a rod, h, with an arm of an elbow or bell 
crank lever, G, and the other arm of said lever 
is connected with the valve-stem his of the 
valve h. The arm of the lever G. is placed 
between collars h h on the stem hik, and by 
adjusting these collars the vessel B and valve 
h may be brought into such relation that when 
the vessel is motionless in its intermediate and 
balanced position the valve h will cover both 
the ports gg, and the piston F will be in an 
intermediate position, as shown. If the wa 
ter-level in the boiler rises, the volume of wa 
ter in the Vessel will increase and the latter 
will fall, thereby moving the valve h to admit 
steam to the port g and right-hand end of the 
cylinder F, and permit the exhaust from the 
left-hand end thereof. The piston E will 
then move toward the left and will decrease 
, or stop entirely the admission of feed-water 
to the boiler. When the water-level in the 
boiler falls, the vessel will rise and will there 
5 
- 
by uncover the port g to the steam and place 
the port gin communication with the exhaust 
port g. The piston F will then move toward 
the right, and will increase the admission of 
feed-water to the boiler. 
In connection with the above I employ a 
liquid cataract cylinder and piston for com 
pelling the piston F to move slowly in either 
direction. Such controlling device or retarder 
is particularly desirable when the piston-rod 
f is connected with the steam-inlet valve of a 
feed-injector, which valve should be opened 
and closed slowly. 
H designates the liquid-cylinder, and H' 
the piston thereof, which is fixed upon the rod 
The two ends of the cylinder are in com 
munication by a passage, i, which is controlled 
by a valve, i', which may be adjusted to more 
or less close the passage, and thus control the 
circulation from end to end of the cylinder H. 
through the passage i. In this way therapidity 
of movement allowed the pistons H F may 
be nicely regulated. 
, 
The valve i' may consist of a simple set 
screw, as here shown. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a steam-boiler, 
an outside vessel flexibly connected with the 
steam and water spaces of the boiler so that 
it may rise and fall with variations in the vol 
ume of water contained within it, and balanc 
ing devices for the vessel, of a steam cylinder 
and piston, whereby the admission of feed 
water to the boiler may be controlled, and an 
induction - valve for said steam - cylinder so 
connected with the rising and falling vessel 
as to be controlled by the movements of said 
vessel, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein described. 
2. The combination, with a steam-boiler, 
an outside vessel flexibly connected with the 
steam and water spaces of the boiler, and bal 
ancing devices for said outside vessel, of a 
steam cylinder and piston for controlling the 
admission of feed-water to the boiler, an in 
duction-valve for said cylinder connected with 
and capable of movement by a rising and fall 
ing movement of said vessel, and a cataract 
cylinder and piston connected with the piston 
of the steam-cylinder, and serving to retard 
the movements of the latter, Substantially as 
and for the purpose herein described. 
3. The combination, with the boiler A, of 
the rising and falling vessel B, flexibly con 
nected with the steam and water spaces of the 
boiler, and provided with a steam-pipe termi 
nating in a whistle, and formed with a valve 
shell or body, e", and a valve-stem or valve, e', 
attached to a fixed support and controlling 
the passage of steam to said whistle, Substan 
tially as herein described. 
C. F. WILSON. 
90 
95 
OO 
IIO 
II5 
I2O 
I 25 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
MATTHEWPOLLOCK, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316312.txt	(No Model.) 
J, TORD OFF. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MANUFACTURE OF STEAM BOILER MAN HOLES AND ANAT,000 US DEWICES, 
No. 316,312, 
Aza, Z. 
 
Patented Apr. 21, 1885. 
767. 6. 
Azzzzesses 
4 ?-a-. 72% 4./42-4 
3, 76%-4-4--. 46% 
2- 24 
Az 24 a.4 
Azzezzzz/. 
a 
Ae 
ye/4 2442p;4 
R 
(No Model.) 
J, TORD OFF 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MANUFACTURE OF STEAM BOILER MAN HOLES AND ANALOGOUS DEVICEs. 
Patented Apr, 21, 1885. 
Az. A5. 
No. 316,312, 
A267.9. 
 
12. M. 
- 22% A. e??ee-1- 
c-f 
42 
26- ca 
'N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.c. 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH TORDOFF, OF LEEDS, COUNTY OF YORK, ENGLAND. 
MANUFACTURE OF STEAM-BOLER MAN-HOLES AND ANALOGO US DEVICES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 316,312, dated April 21, 1885. 
Application filed December 17, 1883. (No model.) Patented in England October 2, 1883, No. 4,695. 
to all, whon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH TORDOFF, a 
Subject of the Queen of Great Britain and Ire 
land, residing at Leeds, in the county of York, 
Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, have 
invented new and useful improvements in the 
manufacture of flanged metallic devices of 
annular form, such as steam-boiler man-holes 
and the like, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention of improvements in the man 
ufacture of flanged metallic devices of annular 
form, such as steam-boiler man-holes and the 
like, relates to the formation not only of the de 
vices known as man-holes, but also of other 
Similar devices, such as unions' or connect 
ing parts of boilers and their separate steam 
chambers, mountings for the reception of safe 
ty, Stop, or other valves, covers for openings 
in boilers and other vessels, connecting-pipes 
between series of tanks or cisterns, and other 
Similar structures of annular form with one 
or more flanges, as explained below. Here 
tofore such articles have usually been made 
either of cast-iron or by bending to form and 
Welding a ductile metallic material, such as 
Wrought-iron or steel. When made by cast 
ing, the articles in question cannot in all cases 
be relied upon to withstand the pressures to 
which they may be subjected, and, further 
more, they are liable to fracture when being 
attached to a boiler or other body by riveting. 
On the other hand, when made by bending to 
form and welding, they are very costly, owing 
to the skilled labor required to produce them. 
Now, in order to reduce the cost of nanu 
facture, while at the same time producing a 
Superior article according to my invention, a 
plate of unetal of appropriate quality, size, and 
form for the production of the article required, 
as hereinafter explained, is heated, and then 
while in the heated condition is placed upon a 
female die, the interior configuration of which 
corresponds with the external shape required 
to be given to the body or main portion of the 
article, then by pressure or percussion applied 
through the medium of a punch or male die 
So much of the metallic plate is forced into 
said female die as is needful to form the body 
and one flange, together with a surplus por 
tion, which is afterward removed, leaving so 
much of the metallic plate on the entering side 
of said female die as will form the first flange. 
Then the partially-formed article is removed 
from the female die, and, if needful, is reheated. 55 
While in a heated state it is now pressed con 
secutively into other suitably-shaped dies until 
the first flange and the body have assumed 
somewhat the form of a hat. Then a part Or 
all of the crown' is removed. The rest is 6c 
reheated, and that portion constituting the 
body is surrounded with a compound die made 
in parts-that is, one so that the first-formed 
flange, previously referred to, bears against 
one side of said compound die, while a portion 65 
of the main body projects beyond the contrary 
side of said die. This projecting portion of 
the body is now subjected to the action of a 
counter-punch, which turns it over in an out 
ward direction, (or, if preferred, this opera- 7o 
tion may be performed by hand,) after which, 
by a suitably-formed tool, this second flange is 
completed. 
When a flanged annular device manufac 
tured according to my invention is to be used 75 
as a cover or cap for an opening in the shell 
or other part of a boiler or other vessel, the 
metallic plate is pressed into shape with one 
flange, as above described with reference to the 
first-mentioned flange, but without removing 8O 
any portion of the crown. After the pressing 
and stamping processes the edge or edges of 
the flange or flanges is or are trimmed either 
by hand or machinery. 
Figures l and 2 illustrate a metallic plate, a, 
that has undergone the first operation of be 
ing cut to form, ready for Stamping. 
Figs. 3 and 4 illustrate in plan and sectional 
elevation the second operation-viz., the first 9o 
cupping process-a being, as before, the me 
tallic plate; b, the female die, and c the punch. 
or male die. 
Figs. 5 and 6 illustrate the third operation, 
wherein the plate a, as shown, has been sub- 95 
jected to the second cupping process. 
The 
female die b, here shown, is the same as used 
in the second operation or first cupping pro 
cess, but has been inverted for the present 
operation, (or in lieu thereof a special die may 
be provided.) d is the punch or male die. 
Figs. 7 and 8 illustrate the fourth opera 
tion-that is to say, the final cupping and first 
flanging process. e is the female die, and d 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 85 
IOO 
SP 
5 
IO 
25 
--5 
 
316,312 
5 the punch or male died. 
the finishing-punch or male die as used in the 
previous operation, the flattening of the flange 
being effected by the head of the press or ham 
ner (used in this operation) projecting beyond to a regular form, ready for use. 
tions the finished man-hole after it has under 
gone the eighth operation-viz., that of hav 
ing the edges of the flanges trimmed or turned 
Unions and other similar articles, previ 
Figs. 9 and 10 illustrate in plan and sectional ously referred to, are formed in a similar man- 
elevation the partially formed object after it ner to the man-hole just described; but I would 
has undergone the fifth operation-that is, observe that the operations required to pro 
that of having the crown or part g removed, duce objects such as above referred to may in 
IO ready for the formation of a second flange. some cases be more or less in number than 
The removal of the part 9 may be effected those above described. 
eith y At, Y E. File E. What I claim is- t in th 
s an improvement ln the art of making 
Or the partial formation of the second flange. metallic man-holes for steam-boilers and like 4o 
15 h is the compound female die, in halves or articles, drawing a disk to the form of a tube 
parts; i, the counter-punch for partially turn- and turning a flange on the open end thereof 
ing over the parti, Figs. 10 and 12. y 
| in dies, cutting ou the metal, closing the op 
Figs. 13 and 14 illustrate in plan and eleva- posite end, and then forming a similar flange 
tion the seventh operation-that is, the com-on said opposite end by means of dies, in the 45 
the same configuration crosswise as that of the 
boiler or object to which it has to be attached. 
h is the same compound female die as used in 
the sixth operation; k, the finishing flanging Fell. Inst. P. Agents, 24 Victoria Chambers, Leeds. 
2O pletion of the second flange. This must have manner substantially as described. 
lgS. llan 
11 lustrate the Slxth operation 
Witnesses: 
T. E. CRAVEN, 
JOSEPH TORD OFF. 
t of maki 
3O 
3 5 
e 
25 tool. 
Figs. 15, 16, and 17 show in plan and eleva- North Street, Leeds. 
WILLIAM SADLER, 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316413.txt	J. F. STUCKERT, 
SUPPORT FOR GUTTERS OF SKYLIGHTS, ROOFS, WAULTS, &c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 316,413, 
Patented Apr. 21, l885. 
 
  
 
SNSS 2S 222222822 
& 
2 
&% 227 
t 
 
WITNESSES: 
-a, -8-4.2% 
 
By 
NVE TOR: 
litiu(l)tada?uke 
AORNEY. 
2. PeFERs. Photo-1 thegrapher. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J. FRANKLIN STUCKERT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SUPPORT FoR GUTTERs OF SKYLIGHTS, RO OFS, WAULTS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 316,413, dated April 21, 1885. 
Application filed October 8, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
To all, who7, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, J. FRANKLINSTUCKERT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of Penn 
5 Sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Supports for Gutters of Sky 
lights, Roofs, Vaults, &c., which improvement 
is fully set forth in the following specification 
and accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side sectional view of my im 
provement, taken on line a ac, Fig. 4. Figs. 2 
and 3 are similar views showing modifications 
of means of attachment of the bearing to the 
roof, also showing different forms of slides and 
I5 gutters. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are plan views of 
the tops of roofs shown in side section in Figs. 
12, and 3, respectively. Figs. 7, 8, and 9 are 
Views at right angles to those shown in Figs. 
l, 2, and 3, respectively. 
2O Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in the several figures. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new method of and means for securing to sky. 
lights, roofs, vaults, and other structures the 
25 gutters Or drains, so that the leakage between 
the parts of the roof, and also the condensed 
Vapor On the under side thereof, may be car 
ried off as desired. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
3O portable bearing or dripping - piece for the 
plates B, of glass or other material, to reston, 
and is made of any hard substance and of any 
Suitable shape and size, and may be continu 
Ous, as shown in Fig. 1, or detached, as shown 
35 in Fig. 2. To its lower part is attached, by 
means of slide C, the gutter D. 
The slide C may be a separate piece from 
the bearing, or it may be integral there with, 
and consists of a main part, e, having a down. 
4O Ward slope from the outer part to the base of 
the bearing, and arms e' bent either at a right 
angle or inwardly, so as to embrace the outer 
sides of the gutter. If bent at a right angle, a 
ScreW or other fastening is employed to attach 
45 the gutter thereto. The arms may also be 
bent outwardly if the form of gutter is used as 
shown in Fig. 3, where the bent arms are 
placed inside of the sides of the gutter, said 
arms being secured to the bearing A. by a bolt 
5O having a washer, f, between the arms and the 
bearing. 
 
6O 
65 
The gutter D may be of any proper shape, 
three different forms of which are shown in the 
drawings, and is lined with a thin piece of 
non-corrosive metal, E-Such as lead-to pre-55 
vent the action of acids thereon. 
To the top of the bearing A, FigS. 1 and 2, 
is firmly secured a bent wire or staple, F, 
through which a pin, ct, is inserted, having its 
ends resting upon the plates B. 
A covering-bar, G, of either metal or wood, 
may be employed if desired, but is of little im 
portance, as the joints are so narrow that they 
may more advantageously be filled with putty 
Or Cement. 
In the drawings, Fig. 3, a Screw, c, and nut 
d are shown as a means for securing the bear 
ing to the plates forming the roof. By this 
means of attachment the drip from the upper 
side and the condensed vapor on the under 7o 
side of the roof are conducted by the dripping 
piece or bearing into the gutter. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desired to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. A bearing, in combination with a gutter, 
plates forming a roof, and means for connect 
ing said plates to said bearing, the said bear 
ing being pendent from said plates and not 
sustaining the said roof, substantially as and 8o 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. A bearing having the adjacent edges of 
two contiguous plates of a roofin contact there 
with, in combination with means for binding 
said plates to said bearing, a gutter, a slidehav- 85 - 
ing arms sustaining said gutter, the said bear 
ing being pendent from said plates, Substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The bearing A, in combination with slide 
C, gutter ID, and plate B, substantially as de- go 
scribed. 
4. The combination of bearing A with slide 
C, gutter D, plates B, and covering-bar G, sub 
stantially as described. 
B, means for attaching said bearing Atoplates 
B, slide C, and gutter D, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination of bearing A with plates 95 
75 
J. ERANKLIN STUCKERT, 
Witnesses: 
J. A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
A. P. GRANT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316513.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. ACKER 
SHIFTING TOP FOR HAMMOCK SUPPORTs, 
No. 316,513, 
644. 
IWVEWTOR / 
 T.2% 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. ACKER, OF WATER TOWN, NEW YORK. 
SHIFTING TOP FOR HAM Mock-su PPoRTs. 
EPECIFICATION ferming part of Letters Patent No. 316,513, dated April 28, 1885. 
Application filed September 3, 1883. (No model.) 
2O 
IO 
IS 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs W. ACKER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Watertown, in the county of Jefferson and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
useful Shifting Top for Hammock-Supports, 
of which the following is a specification, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
IngS. 
This invention relates to tops or canopies 
for hammock-supports, or for lawn or field 
amusements; and its object is to provide a 
canopy or top that possesses superior advan 
tages in point of simplicity, inexpensiveness, 
durability, and general efficiency, whereby it 
can be readily adjusted in position, and its 
position can be shifted as desired. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the frame of my improved top set in 
position, with the awning or cover removed. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical transverse sectional view 
of the same, showing its adjustment in dotted 
lines. Fig. 3 is a vertical longitudinal sec 
tional view thereof, 
Referring to the drawings, A. A designate 
two base pieces or strips, which are adapted 
to rest upon the ground, and from which the 
upright end posts or standards, BB, project, 
these posts being preferably separably con 
mected to the base-strips by having their low 
er ends provided with a pin, C, that enters a 
corresponding hole or recess, D, in the bot 
tom of a recess or mortise, E, in the base 
strip. At their tops the posts B B are pro 
vided with openings F, that receive the corre. 
sponding ends, GG, of the longitudinal top bar, 
H, which latteris rectangular in cross-section, 
and has its ends retained in the posts by cross 
pins I, inserted through perforations J. 
K designates the top frame, which con 
prises a longitudinal bar, L, to the ends of 
which are pivoted divergent side bars, MM, 
that are connected at their outer ends by longi. 
tudinal side bars, N N. The mechanism for 
shifting this top frame consists of two end 
pieces, O O, that are provided with a corre 
sponding opening, P, to receive the bar H, 
on which they are adapted to slide to adjust 
the top frame longitudinally, a connecting 
5o bar, Q, being pivoted to the top of each of 
3O 
35 
45 
 
55 
6 
65 
75 
these pieces OO, and also pivoted at the end 
of the top bar, L, while divergent braces R. R. 
are pivoted to the lower ends of pieces O O, 
and have their outer ends pivoted to the side 
bars, MM. 
The main supporting-frame is adapted to 
support a hammock or to be placed over any 
lawn or field game or apparatus, and the top 
shifting frame,K,is covered by canvas or oth 
er suitable shade material, S. 
The operation and advantages of my inven 
tion will be readily understood. It is very 
Simple and convenient, and by means of the 
pivotal connections with the pieces OO the 
top frame can be set in any desired position 
at varying angles of inclination, as shown in 
dotted lines, Fig. 2. To effect this adjust 
ment it is only necessary to draw the top 
frame over and down at either side, when the 
pivotal connection of the top frame with end 
pieces, O O, which is formed by connecting 
bars Q Q, will be correspondingly shifted, and 
the connecting-braces R. R will serve to retain 
the said top frame in its adjusted position 
against accidental displacement. When not 
in use, the top can be folded down as desired 
by withdrawing the pivot-bolt a, so as to de 
tach the pieces O O from the braces R, and 
then folding the side bars, M, longitudinal 
bars N, and braces R together into the posi 
tion indicated by the dotted lines marked Z, 
Fig. 2. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The herein-described shifting frame com 
prising stationary end pieces, O, connecting 
bars Q, pivoted to the top of said end pieces, 
side bars, M, pivoted to the top of said con 
necting-bars Q and extending divergently 
therefrom, longitudinal bars N, connecting 
the side bars, M, braces pivoted to the bottom 90 
of stationary pieces O and extending diverg 
ently to the side bars, M, to which they are 
pivoted, and the devices for supporting the 
Same, Substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the supporting- 95 
frame having the top bar, H., of the top frame, 
comprising the longitudinal top bar, diverg 
ent side bars pivoted thereto, longitudinal 
bars N, connecting the side bars, the station 
ary pieces supported on the top bar of the IOO 
. 
2 
316,513 
main frame, eonnecting-bars pivoted to the own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
tops of said pieces and to the adjoining ends presence of two witnesses. 
of the side bars, and divergent braces pivoted 
to the bottom of Said E. and to E. side 
5 bars, substantially as and for the purpose 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
C. W. DASHIELL. . 
EDW. G. SIGGERS. 
CHARLES W. ACKER. 
. 
. 
 ,  
av 
Set forth. 
- 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316613.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 316,613, 
H. G. FARR, 
SURCINGLE, 
Patented Apr. 28, 1885. 
N, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
HIRAM G. FARR, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
SURCNG. E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 316,613, dated April 28, 1885. 
Application filed December 18, 1884, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may conce7n: 
Beit known that I, HIRAM. G. FARR, of Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Surcingles, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, mak 
ing a part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a surcin 
gle made in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged longitudinal section 
through my improved surcingle-pads. Fig. 
3 is a transverse section on the line acac of Fig. 
2, with the pads located within a tubular web 
bing. 
My present invention has special reference 
to the subject-matter contained in Letters Pat 
ent No. 263,367, for surcingle, granted me Au 
gust 29, 1882. A surcingle constructed in ac 
cordance with said invention answers a good 
purpose; but under some circumstances, when 
the girth is tightly drawn, the pad is apt to be 
brought to a bearing on the spine of the horse 
or other animal to which it is applied. To 
avoid this liability and to afford an expedi 
tious and inexpensive means of securing the 
pad and girth together is the object of this 
invention, which consists in the combination, 
with a tubular webbing, of a pad provided 
with a rigid bent brace or connection, pref 
erably of metal, secured to and extending be 
tween the portions of the pad on each side of 
the spine, for re-enforcing and permanently 
retaining the same in its bridged position. 
thereover, in order that no pressure may come 
directly upon the line of the spine, and that 
a space be provided for the heat and moist 
ure to escape at this point, and the slipping 
of the surcingle be prevented, the aforesaid 
re-enforced pad being readily located within 
the tubular webbing without the labor and ex 
pense of sewing or binding incident to the use 
of a band of single thickness. 
In the said drawings, A represents a tubul 
lar webbing, made preferably of the ordinary 
material, and of the same width as the single 
thickness of webbing now in use for surcin 
gles. To one end of the webbing is secured 
a strap, B, and to the other end a buckle, C, 
as usual. The pad D is composed of several 
thicknesses, a ba, of the same or different 
materials possessing flexibility, with a rigid 
pad frame or brace, c, secured thereto. In 
the present construction (see Figs. 2 and 3) I 
have employed two thin strips, a a, of leather, 5 
with an interposed strip, b, of wood veneer 
ing bent to the form shown in Fig. 2, the 
width and length of the outer strips, a, being 
somewhat greater than that of the middle 
strip, b, in order that the edges of the strips 6 
a may be skived, and thereby rendered more 
pliant, so as to freely conform to the slope of 
the body of the horse when the surcingle-strap 
B is tightened to hold the blanket in place. 
The rigid pad-brace c is preferably of metal,  
and secured to the top of the flexible strips a 
b a by a screw or rivet, d, located near each 
end of the pad, but may be secured in any 
other desirable manner. 
The essential requirement of this feature of , 
my invention is to avoid pressure of the sur 
cingle on the spine of the horse, in order that 
the heat and moisture from the portion of the 
backbone thereunder may escape, and the 
scalding and soreness incident to the use of 
ordinary flexible pads be thereby prevented. 
The form, therefore, of the several portions (t 
ba, c is carefully so made that the middle of 
the pad will span over the spine without com 
ing into contact with it, and the parts on each 
side of the center will bear evenly on the sides 
of the back below the spine. 
The pad D, provided with my metallic 
brace c, may be secured to a Surcingle band or 
web of single thickness, if desired; but I pre 
fer to use it in connection with a tubular web 
bing, as the rigid pad can be readily intro 
duced at one operation to its place within the 
tube, and may be secured therein by a few 
stitches, or by any other simple fastening pass 
ing through the flexible strips a ba, the out 
side of the fastening being ornamented, if de 
It will be seen that the employment of tubu 
lar webbing dispenses with the necessity of a 
binding and the sewing on of the same inci 
dent to a surcingle having a web of single 
thickness, and that the tubular webbing is of 
greater durability. 
By the application of my improved surcin 
sired. 
-- 
- 
5 
O 
25 
35 
so 
s 
. 
 
316,613 
s 
gle no pressure is exerted on the backbone of 
the animal, and when sweating the perspira 
tion is not checked nor the spine scalded at 
this point. 
I claim 
A surcingle consisting of a tubular webbing, 
A, and a pad, D, provided with a rigid bent 
brace, c, substantially as described. 
5 
Witness my hand this 9th day of December, 
884. 
HIRAM G. FARR, 
In presence of - 
N. W. STEARNs, 
CHAS. HALL ADAMS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316713.txt	(No Model.) 
L. E. WHITON, 
LATHE TOOL 
 
No. 316,713, 
Patented Apr. 28, 1885. 
A NS 
f 
snails IHTSN 
S. 
2E SS, Y N 
2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUCIUS E. WHITON, OF WEST STAFFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
LATH Ea TO O. 
52-2CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 316,73, dated April 28, 1885. 
Application filed November 21, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
75 
O 
To all Luhon, it may concern 
engine-lathe, according as it is deemed best to 
Be it known that I, LUCIUS E. WHITON, of 
use a revolving or a fixed cutting-tool, the in 
West Stafford, in the county of Tolland and 
terlocked threads will firmly resist the action 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new and 
of the cut. This means of holding the plate 
useful tool for holding the scroll-plates of 
6 permits its entire back to be finished at one 
scroll-chucks while the backs of said plates 
operation, because projecting clamps or other 
are being turned to the required shape by 
mechanism for holding said plate are unnec 
properly-devised cutting-tools, of which the 
essary. 
following is a specification. 
In the center of the upper face of the block 
The objects of my invention are, first, to pro 
1 a circular recess is made, having its axis co 
vide a means of holding one of these plates 
incident with that of the scroll-thread 7. Into 
which shall permit the whole of the back of the 
this recess an annular ring or bushing, 2, is 
plate to be finished at one operation; second, to 
fitted, with its outer end made of suitable size 
make sure that the work performed upon the 
to form a journal-bearing or guide upon which 
back of the plate shall be perfectly central 
to revolve the scroll-plate 6 until it reaches a 
with the scroll-thread upon its face; and, 
position which will allow the threads to in 
third, to provide means for the easy removal 
terlock. Without this guide it would he dif. 
of the finished plate without marring or other 
ficult to readily place the scroll-plate in a 
wise injuring its surface. I attain these ob 
proper position for the threads to become in 
2Ojects by the mechanism hereinafter described, 
terlocked. The center hole, c, of this bush 
and illustrated in the accompanying draw: 
ing is made of proper size to form a journal 
ings, in which 
bearing for the guide-pin of the cutting-tool, 
Figure I is a face view or plan of my im 
which thus acts as a pin-drill. As the axis of 
proved tool. Fig. II is a longitudinal section 
this bushing 2 coincides with that of the scroll 
on line a ct of the plan, and showing an un 
thread 7, it follows that said scroll-thread and 
finished Scroll-plate in place ready to be op 
the cutting-tool are held central; hence, guided 
erated upon by the cutting-tool. Fig. III is a 
by the interlocking threads, the scroll-plate 6 
section of a part of my improved tool on line. 
will also assume a position central with the 
at a, and showing the finished plate partially 
cutting-tool, and thus the work performed 
removed; and Fig. IV is a face view of the 
upon the back of said scroll-plate will be cen 
scroll-plate of a geared scroll-chuck, showing 
tral with the thread B upon its face. 
its scroll-thread or spiral groove. 
It is evident that by the use of various guide 
Referring to the drawings, an accurate scroll 
bushings 2 scroll-plates of various sizes may 
thread, 7, is cut upon the face of the block 1, 
be conveniently held upon the block 1, pro 
having the same pitch as the thread upon the 
vided the pitch and direction of their threads 
face of the scroll-plate which it is desired to 
The approach of the cut 
remain the Same. 
operate upon, but in the opposite direction, 
ting-tool may be predetermined by a suitably 
as is shown by a comparison of Figs. I and 
arranged stop, and thus uniformity in the 
IV. In cutting the thread upon 1 the space 
thickness of the finished Scroll-plates may be 
A is left slightly wider than the thread B of 
Secured. 
the scroll-plate 6, so that when the plate 6 is 
To provide means for the easy removal of 
properly placed upon the block 1 the threads 
the finished plate, a screw-thread, d, is cut 
will interlock, as shown in Fig. II. In this 
upon the body of the block 1, to which is fit 
position, Fig. II, the plate 6 is subjected to 
ted a threaded sleeve or nut, 4, operated by 
the action of the cutting-tool, which may be 
convenient handles, N. N. Three or more 
moving, as with the revolving spindle of a grooves, e, are made in the body of the block 
drilling-machine, or fixed, as is the dead-cen 
1 parallel to its axis, of relatively great radial 
ter of an engine-lathe. It is evident that by 
depth, and extending below the screw-thread 
preventing the revolution of the block 1 by 
d and nut 4. Into each of these grooves e a 
suitable arms, MM, which shall come in con 
sliding piece or dog, 3, is loosely fitted, hav 
tact with stops upon the drilling-table, or by 
ing a projection, f, which rests upon the nut 
attaching the block 1 to the chuck-plate of an 
4. The dogs 333 transmit the pressure pro. 
35 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
36,73 
duced by revolving the nut 4 upon the thread 
d to the finished scroll-plate 6, thus lifting it 
gradually from contact with the thread upon 
the block 1, as shown in Fig. III, after which 
5 it may be easily removed. To retain the dogs 
333 in position and to strengthen the tool, a 
ring, 5, is fitted and firmly driven upon the 
block . 
By means of the mechanism above described 
Io the cost of manufacturing the scroll-plates is 
greatly lessened, for it permits the entire back 
of the plate to be finished at one operation-a 
method heretofore unknown. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
I5 claim as new, and desire to hold by Letters 
1. The block 1, adapted to be held upon the 
Patent, is 
chuck-plate of a lathe or the drilling-table of 
a drilling-machine, having a Scroll-thread, 7, 
upon its face adapted to receive the scroll- 20 
thread of the scroll-plate to be operated upon, 
Substantially as described. 
2. The block 1, adapted to be held upon the 
chuck-plate of a lathe or the drilling-table of 
a drilling-machine, having a screw-thread, d, 25 
and a scroll-thread, 7, adapted to receive the 
scroll-thread of the scroll-plate to be operated 
upon, in combination with the guide-bushing 
2, threaded nut 4, sliding dogs 333, and ring 
5, all substantially as described and set forth. 3o 
LUCIUS E. WHITON. 
- 
Witnesses: 
HENRY LUFLER, 
PLINY M. HARWOOD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316814.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
DANIEL O'HARA, OF WALTHAM, MASSACHUSETTS, 
WATCH. CASE. 
SPECI???ATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 316,814, dated April 28, 1885. 
Application filed November 10, 1884. (Model.) 
5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DANIEL O'HARA, of 
Waltham, in the county of Middlesex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Watch-Cases, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description? 
This invention relates to the construction of 
the various parts of a watch-case for their at 
IO tachment to each other to secure the inclosure 
of the watch-movement, and under the inven 
tion, first, the band or ring to contain a watch 
movement, arranged therein in the usual way 
or in any other suitable manner, is made with 
15 a bevel or taper at and across its exterior face 
or edge, and the central shell or body or an 
nullus to surround and hold said movement 
ring is made with a bevel or taper at and 
across its interior face or edge corresponding 
20 to the exterior taper of the ring, all in man 
ner and form, with the ring placed and forced 
into the central shell to secure a jointing of 
the two sufficiently tight and close to attach 
the one to the other, and to prevent the en 
25 trance of dust and dirt and moisture at such 
joint; second, the central shell or movement 
ring, or both, are made with either an exte 
rior or an interior, or both an exterior and an 
interior, bevel or taper, and the other parts 
3O necessary to complete the inclosure of the 
movement in the movement-ring-such, for 
instance, as a front or a backbezel-ring or a 
front or back cap, cover, or plate-are made 
with a corresponding bevel or taper to suit 
35 the bevel or taper of the part of the annulus to 
which they belong, all in manner and form, 
with such parts placed in position and forced 
upon their proper parts of the central shell or 
movement-ring, as the case may be, to secure 
4o a jointing thereof sufficiently tight and close 
to attach them thereto, and to prevent the en 
trance of dust and dirt and moisture at such 
joints; third, the movement-ring is made with 
a bevel or taper at and across its exterior face 
45 or edge, and the central shell or body is made 
with a bevel or taper across its interior face 
or edge corresponding to the exterior taper of 
the ring, and otherwise made with a taper or 
bevel exteriorly or interiorly, or both, for re 
5O ceiving the other parts of the case necessary 
to complete the inclosure of the movement 
such, for instance, as a front or a backbezel 
ring or a front or back cap, cover, or plate 
which are correspondingly beveled or tapered, 
all in manner and form, with the several parts 55 
placed in position and forced upon their prop 
er parts of the central shell, to secure ajoint 
ing thereof sufficiently tight and close to at 
tach them thereto, and to prevent the entrance 
of dust and dirt and moisture at such joints; 6o 
fourth, the central shell or movement-ring, or 
both, are made with either an exterior or an 
interior, or with both an exterior and an in 
terior, bevel or taper and the other parts nec 
essary to complete the inclosure of the move- 65 
ment in the movement - ring-such, for in 
stance, as a front or a back bezel-ring or afront 
or a back cover or plate-are made with a cor 
responding bevel or taper to suit the bevel or 
taper of the part of the central shellor move- 7o 
ment-ring to which they belong, all in man 
ner and form, with such parts placed in posi 
tion and forced upon their properparts of the 
central shell or movement-ring, as the case 
may be, to secure a jointing thereof sufficiently 75 
tight and close to attach them thereto, and to 
prevent the entrance of dust and dirt and 
moistureat such joints, and, furthermore, made 
with a flange or rim in position to lap over 
the outer edge or periphery of the central shell So 
sufficiently to conceal and close the joint be 
tween the parts of the case attached to the cen 
tral shell or movement-ring, as the case may 
be; fifth, the winding key pipe or spindle or 
plug in its length is made of a conical or taper-85 
ing shape, and a seat therefor in the central 
shell is made of a corresponding tapering or 
conical shape. 
In the accompanying plates of drawings 
this invention is illustrated on an enlarged 9C 
scale as carried out in various ways, all em 
bracing its essential features of the taper and 
bevel jointing of the parts of the case to in 
close the movement. 
tions, Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 9 being full, and 
Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8 partial, sections. Figs. 
10 and 11 are views in detail of this invention, 
illustrating it as applied to a stand or pedes 
tal for supporting the watch-movement, which ICO 
stand makes one part of the case. 
In the drawings, A is the band or ring to 
contain the watch-movement. B is the cen 
tral shell or body or annulus. C, Figs. 2, 4, 
Figures 1 to 9, both inclusive, are cross-sec- 95 
 
2 
36,84 
? ? 
25 
35 
45 
5 5 
7, and 9, is the frontbezel-ring, having a crys 
tal, ID; and IE, Figs.. 4 and 7, is the back bezel 
ling, having a crystal, F. 
In Figs. 1, 3, 6, and 8 crystals correspond 
ing to the front and back crystals, D and F, 
carried by the front and back bezel-irings, C 
and E, of Figs. 2, 4, 7, and 9, are attached di 
rectly to the central shell, B-that is, without 
the interposition of bezel-rings-and in Fig. 
10 a front crystal is similarly attached. 
In Figs. 2 and 9 a back cap or plate or 
cover, G, is attached in Fig. 9 to the central 
shell, and in Fig. 2 to the movement-ring A, 
and this plate in Fig. 10 is carried by a stand 
or pedestal, H. The movement-ring is made 
of a bevel or taper, J, at and across its outer 
face or edge, and the central shell is made of 
a corresponding bevel or taper, K, at its in 
terior periphery or edge in the direction of 
its width or thickness; and in Figs. 2, 3, 6, 8, 
and 9 this taper or bevel extends practically 
from side to side of the shell, and in Figs. 1, 
4, 5, 7, and 10 it extends from one side, M, 
for only a part of the width of the shell, and 
for the remaining part the shell tapers from 
the side N opposite to said side M toward and 
meeting the taper from that side N. 
In Figs. 2 and 9 the front bezel-ring, C, is 
beveled or tapered at and around the inner 
face of its flange or rim a, fitting over a cor 
responding taper or bevel, b, at and around 
the Outer vertical face of a rim or flange, d, 
of the central shell in Fig. 9 and of the move 
ment-ring in Fig. 2. 
In Figs. 4 and 7 the front bezel-ring is bev 
eled or tapered at and around the outer face 
of its flange or rim a, fitting within a corre 
Sponding taper or bevel at and around the in 
ner periphery of the central shell and wherein 
the movement-ring is placed. 
In Figs. 4 and 7 the back bezel-ring is bev 
eled or tapered at and around the outer face 
of its flange or rim if, fitting within a corre 
sponding taper or bevel at and around the in 
ner periphery of the central shell. 
In Figs, 2 and 9 the back cap or plate is 
beveled or tapered at and around the inner 
face of its flange or rim g, fitting over a corre 
sponding taper or bevel at and around the 
outer periphery of the central shell, Fig. 9, 
and of the movement-ring, Fig. 2. 
In Figs. 1 and 8 the front and back crystals 
fit, by their outer beveled or tapered edge, 
within the corresponding bevel or taper at 
and around the inner periphery of the central 
shell, and in Fig. 11 the same is true of the 
front crystal only, the back of the central shell 
being closed by the raised projection G on the 
upper face of the stand or support H, which 
is beveled at and around its edge, fitting with 
in the corresponding bevel or taper at and 
around the inner periphery of the centralshell. 
In Figs. 3 and 6 the front and back crystals 
fit, by the beveled or tapered inner face of their 
rim or flangeh, over the bevel or taper at and 
around the outer edge of the central shell. 
In Figs. 2 and 7 the parts of the case cover 
ing the front and back sides of the central 
shell are provided with a flange or rim, k, 
which laps over the extreme outer edge orpe 
riphery of the central shell and conceals and 
covers up the joint made between such parts 
and the central shell. 
In Fig. 8 the central shell is made in two 
parts, which are correspondingly tapered or 
beveled, the one part around its outer edge or 
periphery, and the other part around its inner 
edge or periphery. 
From the description given it is to be seen 
that the jointing of the several parts making 
up the case is made by a taper or bevel of the 
contiguous faces thereof, which in all cases is 
made to correspond in manner and form to 
produce a tight and close jointing and attach 
ment of them when they are placed in position 
upon each other and forced to their seats. 
By this construction and jointing of the sev 
eral parts when the parts are properly applied 
together a most secure and rigid attachment 
is obtained, excluding all entrance of dirt, 90 
dust, and moisture, which, obviously, if the 
bearing-surfaces are ground will be increased 
in some considerable degree. 
At the same 
time the parts can be separated with readiness 
and ease when desired. 
Set-screws may be applied to the several 
parts to rigidly fasten them; but they are not 
thought necessary or essential, as the tapering 
construction of the joints is sufficient for all 
practical purposes, and more especially SO for 
the purposes for which the improvements in 
watch-cases herein particularly described are 
to be used-to wit, for the casing and display 
of movements in the trade. 
Listhe key pipe or spindle or plug, located 
in the pendent knob M of the case. Thiskey 
pipe L is conical or tapering along a portion 
of its length, and this portion fits within a cor 
responding conical or tapering socket or tubul 
lar bearing, N, of the pendent knob. 
In Figs. 1, 2, 6, and 9 the key-pipe passes 
through the movement-ring to engage with the 
movement, as ordinary, and for operation is 
turned around within the tapering or conical 
bearing N*therefor of the pendent knob. 
In Fig. 4 the key-pipe is incased within a 
tapering or conical plug, O", which fits within 
a corresponding conical or tapering bearing 
of the central shell, B, and when it is to be 
used it, with said plug, is removed from the 
case, and it is unscrewed from the plug and 
entered through the conical bearing into the 
movement through a hole (not shown) in the 
movement-ring. 
The taper of the key-pipe and of its bearing 
within the pendent knob secures a close joint 
ing and bearing between the two to the better 
exclusion of dirt, dust, and moisture to the 
Watch-movement. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a Watch-case, a movement-ring, A, 
having an exterior taper, and a central shell, 
B, having an interior taper and made sepa 
IOO 
I IO 
 
316,814 
3. 
rate from each other and adapted to fit closely 
the one within the other, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
2. In a watch-case, a central shell, B, and 
the part of the case, such as a front or back 
cap or plate, or a bezel-ring and its crystalto 
close said central shell at its side, respectively 
made with tapering joints or surfaces and 
adapted to closely fit each other, substantially 
as described, for the purpose specified. 
3. In a watch-case, a movement-ring, A, 
and the part of the case, such as a front or 
back cap or plate, or a bezel-ring and its crys 
tal to close said ring on its side, respectively 
made with tapering joints or surfaces and 
adapted to closely fit each other, substantially 
as described, for the purposes specified. 
4. In a watch-case, a movement-ring, A, 
having an exterior taper, J, and a central 
shell, B, having an interior taper, K, and made 
Separate from each other,in combination with 
a central shell, B, and the part of the case, 
- such as a front or back cap or plate or a bezel 
ring and its crystal to close the case on its 
side, respectively made with tapering joints 
or surfaces and adapted to closely fit each 
other, substantially as described, for the pur 
pose specified. 
5. In a watch-case, a movement-ring, A, 
having an exterior taper, J, and a central 
shell having an interior taper, K, and made 
IO 
25 
separate from each other, in combination with 
a movement-ring and the part of the case, 
such as a front or back cap or plate, or a 
bezel-ring and its crystal to close the case. On 
its side, respectively made with tapering 
joints or surfaces and adapted to closely fit 
each other, substantially as described, for the 
purpose specified. 
6. In a watch-case, a front or back cap or 
plate, or a bezel-ring and its crystal adapted 
to be attached to the case with a taper-joint, 
and constructed with a flange or rim, K, over 
lapping the outer edge or periphery of the 
central shell, substantially as described, for 
the purpose specified. 
7. In a watch-case having its several parts 
making the case proper adapted to be at 
tached together with a taper joint or joints, 
the combination of a tapered socket, N, and 
a tapered key pipe or plug, L, adapted to be 
entered into and to closely fit the taper of 
said socket, substantially as described, for 
the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
- 
- 
DANIEL O'HARA. 
5 a 
d 
45 
50 
55 
Witnesses: 
. 
EDWIN W. BROWN, 
WM. S. BELLOWS, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US316914.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 316,914. 
J. RINGEN. 
PORTABLE OVEN, 
Patented Apr. 28, 1885. 
 
 
 
Zaza2zzazz. 
 
fly" 
N 
as 
ZZ A-f e ea S. 
i8 
M 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN RINGEN, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
PORTABLE OVEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 316,914, dated April 28, 1885. 
Application filed December 26, 1884. (No model.) 
I5 out in the claims. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN RINGEN, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at St. Louis, 
in the county of St. Louis and State of Mis 
5 souri, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Portable Ovens, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to portable ovens 
1o adapted for service over ranges, oil-stoves, or 
other sources of heat; and the novelty con 
sists in the construction, arrangement, and 
adaptation of the parts, as will be more fully 
hereinafter set forth, and specifically pointed 
The object of the invention is to produce 
an oven for baking purposes adapted to be 
placed over a stove or to receive heat from an 
other source, one which shall be simple in 
2o construction, efficient in service, and inex 
pensive of manufacture. I provide that the 
heat shall pass under the interior bottom of 
the oven and circulate through its sides. I 
further provide that the current of heat as 
5 it enters the oven proper shall be in the di 
rection of the sides at their lower ends. 
The invention is illustrated in the accompa 
nying drawings, which form a part of this 
specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, broken awa 
at points to show the internal construction. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal section in per 
spective with the door in elevation, and Fig. 
3 is a transverse section looking in the direc 
For convenience of description I have illus 
trated a rectangular form, A being the front, 
having doorway as A', the back, and B B the 
respective sides. C designates the top, and 
4o C the bottom. These portions comprise the 
exterior shell. The bottom C has a large 
heat-receiving aperture, c.; orit may be largely 
cut away to receive the volumes of heat from 
a range or other source. (Not shown.) 
45 From a point, d, on the front A, beneath 
the sill of the doorway a, a horizontal plate, 
E, extends toward the back, being secured to 
both the sides B and B at a height sufficient 
to form heat-flue E. This part E. forms the 
5o bottom of the oven-chamber, and it is bent at 
f and extends vertically to form a flue, F, 
35 tion of the door. 
3o 
7O 
between the vertical plate F and the back A. 
A space, f', is left between the upper edge of 
the plate F and the top C to formathroat, and 
the plate F is secured to the sides B B in any 55 
Suitable Inanner. 
At a suitable distance from the sides B.- . 
say two inches, more or less-and secured to 
the plates E and F and to the front A and 
top C, is a plate or partition, G, having near 6o 
its bottom a series of apertures, g, while upon 
the opposite side, and bearing the same rela 
tion to the side B", is a similar partition, G', 
having similar apertures,g'. These partitions 
G and G form the side flues, H and H', re- 65 
spectively, and for an outlet to the flues the 
side B has perforations b near the top, and the 
side B similar perforations, b'. 
I designates the door. The door is hinged, 
and has a proper latch or catch, i. 
The flues H and H have no connection with 
the flues E and F, but form passages from 
the lower interior of the oven to the outer at 
mosphere, conducting the heat upward on both 
sides, while the flues E F conduct the heat 75 
directly into the oven. 
By my construction I provide heat-flues on 
both sides, bottom, and back of the oven. 
The entire device is made preferably of sheet 
metal. 
It is important that the heat in its greatest 
intensity is projected directly into the interior 
of the oven, and in passing through the flues 
H H is taken from near the bottom of said in 
terior. 
The various apertures, as gg, &c., may be 
provided with registers and other modifica 
tions in details of construction may be made 
Without departing from the principle or sacri 
ficing the advantages of my invention, the es-' go 
sential features of which have been explained. 
I disclaim an oven with a flue at its back in 
combination with a hollow door having aper 
tures on the inside near the bottom and other 
apertures on the outside near the top, as such 95 
an oven is not new. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
vertical back flue, F, by which the heat is con 
veyed and discharged into the oven, and side 
1. A portable oven having bottom flue, E, Ioo 
8O 
85 
 
2 
316,914 
flues, H H', connecting with the inner oven by shown, and forming with the sides flues Hand 
apertures gg, and with the outer air by aper-H, all combined, arranged, and serving as set Io 
tusk. Ey, E. the front forth. 
e oven described, composed of the fron 
5 A, having doorway a, the back, and the sides 
BB, perforated, as shown, the bottom E, and 
vertical plate F, arranged to form flues E and 
F, the partitions G and G', perforated, as 
J. O. ING ALS, 
FRANCIS WALLE. 
Witnesses: 
2. 
JOEN FRINGEN. 
Y 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317014.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. QUIGGLE, 
HEEL, PLATE FOR BOOTS OR SHOES, 
No. 317,014, 
Patented May 5, l885. 
zzle ses. 
- 
-Azz'ezzar, 
/2a1 M. 
37. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM EDWARD QUIGGLE, OF DEDHAM, MASSACHUSETTS. 
HEEL-PLATE FOR B O OTS OR SHOES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 317,014, dated May 5, 1885. 
Application filed March 2, 1885. 
(No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM EDWARD 
QUIGGLE, of Dedham, in the county of Nor 
folk, in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Heel-Plates for Boots or Shoes; and I do 
hereby declare the same to be described in the 
following specification and represented in the 
accompanying drawings, of which 
Figure 1 is a top view, and Fig. 2 an edge 
elevation, and Fig. 3 a perspective view, of a 
heel-plate of my invention, the nature of which 
is defined in the claim hereinafter presented. 
The said figures show on an enlarged scale 
the said heel-plate and its spurs or clinches. 
The heel-plate is to answer as a bottom finish 
to a shoe or boot heel of leather or other mate 
rial; and it consists of a metallic plate, a, of 
proper form, and a series of pairs of metallic 
spurs or clinches,bb', projecting from its upper 
face, and integral or formed or cast in one piece 
with the plate, and having those of each pair 
beveled on their inner faces from at or near 
the middles thereof to the points, such being 
in order for the clinches of each pair, when 
being driven into a heel, to be spread apart or 
turned away from each other, and thereby se 
cure the plate to the heel to great advantage. 
When the heel is of a thickness to allow the 
spurs to go entirely through and extend be 
yondit, they will or maybe clinched upon it be 
forefixing it to the sole, or they may be driven 
into the sole, so as to spread in it and aid in 
connecting the heel thereto. 
When heel-plates are fastened to heels by 
means of nicked-headed screws going through 
the plates and screwed into the heels, the 
heads of the Screws become visible in the 
plates countersunk to receive them. As the 
plates may become worn down while in use, 
the screw-heads are liable to project from them 
and to do injury to floors or carpets, or to be 
come broken from the screw-shanks, so as to 
loosen the hold of the plates to the heels, all 
of which is obviated or prevented with my in- 45 
proved manufacture of heel-plates whose fast 
enings do not extend through it, but from One 
side only of it. 
The heel-plate I construct with an opening, 
d, through it at its central part, such opening 5o 
being in the form of a star. This opening an 
swers to prevent the heel from slipping on ice 
while a person may be walking thereon, and, 
besides, is useful for allowing to be seen through 
it an imprint or label on or applied to the bot- 55 
tom of the heel. Generally speaking, I have 
two pairs of the clinches or spurs at or near 
the front and one pair of them at or near the 
back part of the heel-plate. The bevels of 
each pair on their inner faces are as shown at 60 
c c in Fig. 2. 
Prior to applying a heel-plate of my im 
proved kind to a heel, the latter is to have 
holes made in it for the reception of the pairs 
of clinches or spurs, each of such holes having 65 
a depth about half the length of the pair of 
clinches or spurs to enter it. This having 
been accomplished, the pairs of spurs or 
clinches are to be introduced into the holes, 
and the plate, by means of a hammer Or mal 
let or a press, is to be forced up to the bottom 
of the heel. 
I claim 
As an improved manufacture, a heel-plate 
perforated or having in it an opening, d, as 
described, and provided with a series of pairs 
of spurs or clinches integral with it and pro 
jecting from one face of it, and having those 
of each pair beveled on their inner faces from 
their points toward their middle, all being 8O 
substantially as set forth. 
75 
WILLIAM EDWARD QUIGGLE. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. EDDY, 
S. N. PIPER. 
TO 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317114.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 317,114. 
 
A. G-OERTZ. 
SATCHEL HANDLE, 
Patented May 5, l885. 
 
M2//es/ 
4.46. A 6.1% 
(2cal (2/224-6, 
/72 reve/oz 
Oveezzos Goerz, 
M 
27, 45-cu?eu 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
AUGUST GOERTZ, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
SATCHEL-HANDLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 317,114, dated May 5, 1885. 
Application filed November 8, 1884. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, AUGUST GOERTZ, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Newark, 
in the county of Essex and State of New Jer 
sey, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provementsin Satchel-Handles; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form apart of this specification. 
The object of this invention is to reduce the 
liability of the flexible handle of a bag or 
Satchel drawing out of its sockets or end caps, 
to improve the appearance of the handle and 
attachments, and to reduce the cost of con 
Struction. 
The invention consists in the arrangements 
and combinations of parts, substantially as 
will be hereinafter set forth, and finally em 
bodied in the claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
in which like letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in each of the several fig 
ures, Figure 1 is a side elevation of a bag or 
Satchel framehaving my improvements there 
on. Fig. 2 is an elevation of a portion of said 
frame, showing a modification in the mode of 
securing the handle to said frame. Fig. 3 is 
a side elevation of one of the frame posts, 
studs, or ears adapted to be secured rigidly 
upon the frame to receive certain handle-con 
nections. Fig. 4 is a detail sectional view 
35 
... showing more clearly the mode of attachment 
of the handle to certain pivotal posts or con 
nections. Fig. 5 is a sectional detail showing 
the manner of connecting said pivotal posts 
to said rigid studs. 
In said drawings, a represents a bag or 
satchel frame; b, the handle thereof; c, rigid 
posts attached to the frame; d, pivoted posts 
attached to said rigid posts; e, end caps or fer 
rules attached to the upper ends of said piv 
oted posts, and extending therefrom at ap 
proximately right angles to receive the han 
dle b, and frivets adapted to secure said caps 
to said posts d. 
45 
25 
 
The posts c, are preferably flat plates hav- 5o 
ing lugs c, adapted to pass through perfora 
tions in the frame a and be riveted therein, 
and having pivotal perforations d' to receive 
pivotal rivets g. The pivoted posts or con 
nectives d d are also preferably flat, and, be- 55 
ing secured on the flat sides of the rigid posts, 
work with the handle b positively from side 
to side transversely as respects the frame, and 
thus give an effect of strength deemed desir- / 
able. The pivoted posts did are bent or curved/6o 
outwardly and oppositely, as shown, to im 
A 
art elasticity to the handle to give greatef 
scope to the hand, are perforated at their up 
er ends to receive rivets f, the shanks of 
which rivets extend through the perforations 65 
in said posts into the perforated ends of caps, 
ferrules, or sockets e e, and are therein se 
cured. The rivets thus hold the caps at right 
angles to the pivotal posts, so that they lie 
in line with the handle connecting them to- 7o 
gether. 
The said ferrules or sockets e at the ends 
of the handle are formed by pressing or draw 
ing short tubular sections into a cap shape 
with end perforations. This mode of con- 75 
struction, while securing a well-finished and 
durable piece of work, is less expensive than 
when said socket is turned out of a solid piece 
of metal. 
posts, and caps or ferrules is such as that the 
usual upward pull on the handle does not tend. 
directly to withdraw the handle from its sock 
ets or from the pin holding said handle into 
said sockets, but because of the said peculiar 
arrangements of parts the cap divides the 
strain with said pin, and thus reduces the lia 
bility of the latter to tear out from the han 
dle, which is preferably composed of flexible 
material. 
I am aware that rigid handles have been 
supported or held by rigid posts pivoted upon 
studs fixed to the frame, and also that end 
caps have been provided with holes at one end 
with rivets therein, by which the said cap is 95 
secured to the post or stud of the frame, and 
these features I do not wish to be understood 
as claiming, broadly. 
The peculiar arrangement of the handle, 8o 
9o 
85 
 
 
 
 
 
317,114 
Having thus described the invention, what 
In combination with the bag-frame, rigid October, 1884. 
I claim as new is 
posts c, curved pivotal posts d, end caps or 
5 ferrules secured on the free ends of said piv- 
otal posts and extending toward one another 
at approximately right angles to said pivotal 
posts to receive a handle, and said handle, as 
set forth. 
Witnesses: 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I Io 
have hereunto set my hand this 31st day of 
w 
AUGUST GOERTZ. 
- 
CHARLES H. PELL, 
OSCAR A. MICHEL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317214.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 317,214. 
7% 7. 
X 
 
 
 
s 
9. 
 
E. SCHILIMBACH. 
ALE AND BEER PUMP. 
2622N. ya 
Patented May 5, 1885. 
N & 
NT 
1 
 
  
% 
 
 
 
N2 G. N 
N 
N 
 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR: 
e Z2 
asy 4th:...G. 
ATTORNEYs. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD SCHILIMBACH, OF LONG ISLAND CITY, NEW YORK. 
ALE AND BEER PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 317,214, dated May 5, 1885. 
Application filed December 18, 1884. 
(No model.) 
O 
25 
to cause the said piston to force upward in its 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
upward movement the liquid that may be 
Be it known that 1, EDWARD SCHILIMBACH, 
aboveit. The piston-rod F passes out through 
of Astoria, Long Island City, in the county of 
the upper head of the pump-cylinder B, and 
Queens and State of New York, have invented 
is packed to prevent the liquid from escaping 55 
a new and useful improvement in Ale and 
around it by a rubber tube, G, through which 
Beer Pumps, of which the following is a full, 
the said piston-rod F passes. The upper end 
clear, and exact description. 
of the rubber tube G is attached to a boss, H, 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
formed upon the inner side of the upper head 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
of the cylinder B, and through which the pis- 6o 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
ton-rod F passes, and its lower endis attached 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
to a boss, I, formed upon the upper side of the 
Figure 1 is a sectional rear elevation of one 
piston D, and to which the lower end of the 
of my improved pumps. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
piston-rod F is pivoted, so that the liquid in 
side elevation of the same, taken through the 
the pump cannot come in contact with the said 65 
line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a sectional side ele 
piston-rod. The upper end of the piston-rod 
vation of the same, taken through the line y), 
Fis connected by a pivoted link or bar, J, with 
Fig. 1. 
the forward end of a lever, K, which is piv 
The object of this invention is to promote 
oted to a cross-bar of the frame T, to which the 
convenience in operating ale and beer pumps, 
various parts of the pump are attached. The 7o 
and to promote convenience and reliability in 
rear arm of the lever K is curved downward 
packing the piston-rods and the valve-stems 
and rearward, and to its end is pivoted the 
of pumps. 
lower end of a connecting-rod, M, the upper 
The invention, relates to an ale and beer 
end of which is pivoted to the rear end of the 
pump constructed with the pump piston-rod 
lever N. The lever N is pivoted to a support 75 
operated by means of two curved levers con 
attached to a cross-bar of the frame I, and its 
nected with each other by a rod, whereby the 
rear armis curved upward and downward. The 
pump can be operated by moving the lever 
forward arm of the lever N is bent downward, 
handle through a short arc. With the pump 
forward, upward, forward, and downward, 
discharge-pipe is connected a cylinder pro 
and has a handle,N', formed upon or attached 8o 
vided with a valve the stem of which is con 
to its forward end, which projects through a 
nected with the pump-lever by a lever and 
slot in the casing inclosing the frame L. With 
connecting-rod, whereby the said valve will 
this construction the lever N will require very 
be opened and closed by operating the said 
pump-lever. The piston-rod and valve-stem little space, and the pump can be worked by 
moving the lever-handle N' through a very 85 
are packed by placing upon them rubber tubes 
short arc. 
secured to them and their cylinders, whereby 
With the upper part of the pump-cylinder B 
the liquid is kept from escaping around the 
is connected the end of the pipe O, the other 
said rod and stem, as will be hereinafter fully 
end of which is connected with a cooling 
described, and then claimed. 
chamber, P, placed in an ice chamber or box, 
A represents a pipe leading from the cask 
Q, secured to the frame L. From the cooling 
or other reservoir from which a liquid is to 
chamber P a pipe, R, leads to and enters the 
be pumped to the lower end of the pump-cyl 
upper part of the cylinder S, secured to the 
inder B. The upper end of the pipe A is 
upper part of the frame L. The cylinder Sis 
closed by a valve, C, opening upward, to pre 
made in two parts, the upper One of which is 95 
5 vent the liquid from being forced back into 
made with a larger interior than the lower 
the said pipe. 
part, and is screwed into an annular screw 
D is the pump-piston, which is provided 
flange formed around the upper end of the said 
with one or more valves, E, opening upward, 
lower part. 
to allow the liquid to pass up through the pis 
50 ton as the said piston is moved downward, and 
Upon the upper end of the lower part of the Io. 
35 
4C) 
 
- 
having a nozzle at its outer end. With this 
construction no faucet will be necessary, as the 3o 
valve T will be opened and closed by the move 
ments of the levers N in operating the pump, 
the said valve being opened each time the 
pump-piston is raised to force out the liquid, 
and closed each time the said piston is lowered 35 
cylinder S is formed a seat for the valve T, 
which is made of a less diameter than the in 
terior of the upper part of the said cylinder, 
so that when the said valve is raised from its 
seat the liquid from the upper part of the cyl 
inder can flow down past the said valve. The 
valve T is held down to its seat by a spiral or 
other shaped spring, U, and the stem V of the for another stroke. 
said valve passes out through the lower head 
of the said cylinder S. The valve-stem V is 
packed to prevent the fluid from escaping 
around it by a rubber tube, W, through which 
the said valve-stem passes. The upper end of 
the tube W is secured to a base, X, formed 
upon the lower head of the cylinder S, and the 
lower end of the said tube is secured to the 
valve-stem V at or near the lower end of the 
said valve-stem. 
To the lower end of the valve-stem V is piv 
oted the end of the lever Y, which is pivoted 
to the frame L, or to a support attached to the 
Said frame. To the other end of the lever Y 
is pivoted the lower end of the connecting-rod 
Z, the upper end of which is pivoted to the le. 
ver N at a little distance in the rear of the full 
Crum of the Said lever. 
With the lower part of the valve-cylinder S 
is connected the end of a discharge-pipe, a, 
Witnesses: 
1. In anale and beer pump, the combination, 4O 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
with the pump piston-rod F, of the two curved 
levers KN and the connecting-rod M, sub 
stantially as herein shown and described, 
whereby the said pump can be operated by 
moving the lever-handle through a short arc, 45 
as set forth. 
2. In anale and beerpump, the combination, 
with the pump discharge-pipe O Ra and the 
pump bent leverN, of the cylinder S, the valve 
T, the valve-stem V, and the lever Y, and 50 
connecting-rod Y Z, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
EDWARD SCHILIMBACH. 
O 
25 
 
317,214 
JAMES T. GRATIAM, 
C. SEDGWICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317314.txt	(No Model.) 
C. F. CROCKETT. 
RAILWAY CAR, 
No. 317,314. 
Patented May 5, l885. 
 
WITNESSES 
-ele---f 
224----44 Y 
INVENTOR 
woxv4 E. vros' vic 
BY 
A4, ATTORNEYS 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES F. CROCKETT, OF MOUNT VERNON, NEW YORK. 
RALWAY - CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 317,314, dated May 5, 1885. 
Application filed April 2, 1885. (No model.) 
Io 
To all, whon, it invally concer'7. 
Be it known that I, CHARLESF. CROCKETT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Mount Vernon, in the county of Westchester 
5 and State of New York, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Devices for De 
stroying Noise on Railroad-Cars, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention consists in the combination, 
with the body of a railroad-car, of one or more 
noise-conducting tubes which extend through 
the bottom and through the roof of the car. 
In order to render these noise - conducting 
tubes most effective, the lower end of each of 
15 them is made to extend over two or more of 
the wheels of the trucks, so that the noise pro 
duced by the action of the wheels upon the 
rails when the train is in motion is carried up 
through the tubes and out into the open at 
mosphere above the car, and the volume of the 
noise in the interior of the car is greatly re 
duced. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure rep 
resents a longitudinal section of a railroad-car 
constructed according to my invention. Fig. 
2 is a plan or top view of the same. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter Adesignates the 
body of a railroad-car, which is supported by 
3o trucks BB, in the usual manner. With the 
body are combined two or more tubes, C, 
which extend through the bottom and through 
the roof of the car. 
In the example shown in the drawings two 
35 tubes are shown over each truck, and the bot 
tom end of each of these tubes is made oblong, 
so as to extend over the two wheels on one 
side of the truck. In this case the tubes C. C. 
are situated on the opposite sides of the car. 
4o If desired, a single tube can be used for each 
truck, the lower end of said tube being formed 
25 
 
so as to extend over all four wheels of the 
truck, and in this case such tube would be 
made to extend up through the body Ain the 
middle of its width. The tubes C form con- 45 
ductors for the noise created by the action of 
the wheels upon the rails, and their efficiency 
can be improved by making the upper ends 
of said noise - conductors flaring, as shown 
in the drawings. By the tubes C the undu- 5o 
lations of the air produced by the action of 
the wheels upon the rails are carried up 
through the car into the open atmosphere, and 
the noise in the interior of the car is greatly 
reduced. If desired, said noise-conductor C 55 
may be provided with a lining, a, or a jacket, 
b, or both with a lining and a jacket of felt 
or other suitable material, so that an addi 
tional safeguard is obtained, whereby the un 
dulations of the air are prevented from pene- 6o 
trating into the interior of the car. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a railroad-car, of 
one or more noise-conducting tubes extending 65 
through the bottom and the roof of the car, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with the body of a 
railroad-car and with the trucks supporting 
the same, of noise-conducting tubes which ex- 7o 
tend through the bottom and through the roof 
of the car, and the lower ends of which ex 
tend over two or more of the wheels of each 
truck, substantially as shown and described. 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 75 
CHAS. F. CROCKETT. (L. s. 
Witnesses: 
OTTO HUFELAND, 
E. F. KASTENEIUBER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317414.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 3l 
// 
A 
// 
S 
SE 
E PLUMB, 
DEVICE FOR FASTENING R00F TILES. 
Patented May 5, 1885. 
 
? 
INVENTOR 
???????? 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FAWCETT PLUMB, OF STREATOR, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
JOHN H. SHAY AND JAY BAKER, OF SAME PLACE. 
DEVICE FOR FASTENING ROOF-TILES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 317,414, dated May 5, 1885. 
Application filed December 11, 1884. (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FAWCETT PLUMB, of 
Streator, in the county of La Salle and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Devices for Fastening Roof. 
Tiles; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
tiles and the manner of securing the same to 
roofs, the object of the same being to provide 
a tile and means for securing the same to roofs, 
wherein the use of perforations in the tiles may 
be dispensed with. 
A further object is to provide means where 
by the tiles may be secured to a roof without 
the use of nails and like fastenings coming in 
contact With the tiles. 
A further object is to provide tiles of the 
above character which shall embody economy 
in construction with durability and efficiency 
in use; and with these ends in view my inven 
tion consists in certain features of construc 
tion and combinations of parts, as will be more 
fully described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure is a side view show. 
ing my device secured to a roof, and Figs. 2, 
3, and 4 are detached views of tiles showing 
the projections. 
A represents a rafter, which is suitably fast 
ened to the plate of a building, and to which 
the rails B are secured. C represents a tile 
provided with the depending lug D, which is 
adapted to rest snugly against the upper edge 
of the rail B, as will be seen from the draw. 
ings. This lug can be formed at one end of 
the tile, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2; or, if 
desired, the lug may be located at any inter 
mediate point between the ends of the tile, as 
shown in Figs. 2 and 3. The tile is preferably 
provided with the angular lug D, shaped as 
shown in Fig. 1, with the lower end, F, thereof 
broader than the end immediately adjoining 
the tile and running from such broad end in 
the oblique direction shown, thus forming a 
bearing adapted to receive the oblique-faced 
I. ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
SO 
55 
?? 
75 
85 
strip G, which rests upon the inclined face of 
the lug D. The oblique-faced strip G is rig 
idly secured to the rafter A in any desired 
manner, and, resting flush with the lug D, 
serves to hold and secure the tile in position 
on the rail. 
In Fig. 1 the outer or upper edge of the lug 
is beveled and the strip G correspondingly 
beveled to lock the tile in place, while in Fig. 
2 the inner or lower face of the lug is bev 
eled. With this construction the rails B would 
be beveled. With the construction shown in 
Fig. 3 the rail G would be provided with an 
overhanging lip or rib corresponding in shape 
to the lug. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- . 
1. The combination, with a roofing-tile pro 
vided with a depending lug and a rail secured 
across the rafters for supporting the tiles, of 
a strip extending across the rafters in contact 
with the upper side of the lug, whereby the 
tile is snugly locked to the roof, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a roofing-tile pro 
vided with a depending oblique faced lug and 
a rail secured across the rafters in contact 
with the lower side of the lug, of a strip se 
cured to the rafter in contact with the upper 
side of the lug, whereby the tille is securely 
locked to the roof, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a roofing-tile pro 
vided with a depending lug formed integral 
there with, said lug being thicker at the lower 
end than at the upper end, of a rail secured 
across the rafters in contact with the lower 
side of the lug, and a strip secured to the 
rafter in contact with the upper, side of the 
lug, whereby the tile is secured to the roof, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
EAWCETT PLUMB. 
GEORGE GOULDING, 
RALPH PLUMB. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317514.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 317,514, 
C. M. CONRAD SON. 
ROLLER, SKATE. 
Patented May 12, 1885. 
z 267 ?- 
ZZZZZZZZZZZA 
777 Z74/ A. 
 
 
 
2 
 
  
 
 
s 
A. 7. 
Zaz / 
Z) 
ce-est 
starticle SES 8 
S 
W. 
SZ, 
/ A. 
2 
k 
; 
e 7, 
  
 
 
7 le. 
W. XXX N % f 
Z7 
 
 
  
 
 
ZA A 
s 
A 
Z-2 1/ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
C. G. 
 
 
w 
WITNESSES: 
44 6 oze/ . 
INVENTOR - 
6% revez M, Cozza-cas o'77 
ATTORNEYs 
N reefs. Photo-ithographer, Washigt 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CONRAD M. CONRADSON, OF MADISON, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE.THIRD 
TO FREDERICK A. JOHNSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
ROLLERSKATE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 317,514, dated May 12, 1885. 
Application filed January 5, 1885. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CONRAD M. CoNRAD 
SON, a citizen of the United States, and re 
siding at Madison, in the county of Dane and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Roller-Skates, 
which are fully set forth in the following 
specification, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a transverse sectional view of a 
device embodying my invention; Fig. 2, a sec 
tional view of the same on the linea at of Fig.1; 
Fig. 3, a sectional view, similar to Fig. 1, of 
a modified form of my invention; and Fig. 4, 
a sectional view on the line y y of Fig. 3. 
Like letters refer to like parts in all the 
figures of the drawings. 
My invention relates to roller-skates, and 
more particularly to the manner of attaching 
or mounting the rollers, its object being to 
provide an axle-bearing that will operate with 
less friction than the ordinary bearing, be 
more cleanly in use, and require a minimum 
of lubrication; and to these ends my invention 
consists in certain novel features which I 
will now proceed to describe, and then spe 
cifically point out in the claims. 
The axles for roller-skates as at present 
constructed must, in order to obtain the best 
results, be frequently and freely oiled, and 
... 
even under the most favorabie conditions the 
friction is excessive, owing to the great weight 
of the load on the bearing in proportion to 
the size of the axle. Moreover, this oil exudes 
at the ends of the bearing and collects dust and 
dirt from the skating-floor, which is thrown 
from the rollers, by the centrifugal force due 
to its rapid rotation, upon the clothing of the 
skater and upon the floor. 
The former of 
these objections is by far the more serious of 
the two, since it greatly increases the labor of 
skating and calls for a great amount of mus 
cular exertion. 
In the drawings I have shown in Figs. 
1 and 2 one form of my invention, in which A 
indicates the bearing in which the axle is 
mounted, said bearing being attached to the 
skate, or, more properly speaking, to the 
bracket thereon, in any approved mannel, the 
connection between the skate and the bracket 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
being such that the bearing may be applied 
to any skate. 
Within the bearing A are arranged a series 
of anti-friction rollers, B, of suitable material, 
the said rollers surrounding the axle C and 55 
accurately filling the space between the axle 
I and the walls of the bearing, these several 
parts being accurately turned to the proper 
SZe. 
On the projecting ends of the axle C are 6o 
If desired, the bearing A may be recessed 8o 
On the axle C, between the rollers D and the 7o 
mounted the roller's D, these rollers being 
loose upon the axle, so that they may turn 
thereon independently of each other, in order 
that they may have a differential movement 
when traveling upon a curve, to prevent drag- 65 
ging. The rollers D are retained in position 
on the axle by means of pins or cotters pass 
ing through the ends of the axle, which pro 
ject beyond the rollers. 
bearing A, are arranged washers E, which 
bear against the end of the recess in the bear 
ing and serve to close the same, thereby form 
ing an oil-chamber for retaining the oil Within 
the bearing, and also for preventing lateral 75 
slipping of the anti-friction rollers B, while at 
the same time they form an abutment for the 
inner faces of the rollers D, which bear against 
them and hold them in place. 
at each end, as shown at e, to receive the 
washers E, in order to form a more closely 
fitting connection between the two. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 of the drawings I have 
shown a modified form of my invention, in 85 
which anti-friction balls or spheres are em 
ployed instead of the rollers shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. In this case the bearing A will be pro 
vided with suitable surfaces, a, against which 
the balls B may bear, while the axle C will be go 
provided with similar surfaces for the same 
purpose, these surfaces being shown, in the 
present instance, as furnished by means of 
sleeves F attached to the axle, these sleeves 
being internally threaded to screw upon the 95 
threaded central portion, c, of the axle C. The 
outer ends of these sleeves F are formed 
into disks f, which serve to close the recesses 
in the bearing A in the same manner and for 
i the same purposes as do the washers E in the Ioo 
9. 
93.7, 
5 
4. 
CONRAD M. CONRADSON. 
It is obvious that mains mechainical modifica. 30 
constructioi shown in Figs. 1 and 2 of the 
drawings, Check-nuts G are interposed be-, tions in the details of construction may be made 
tween the sleeves F and the rollers B, and a 
without departi ig from the principle of my 
similar check-nut, G, may be interposed be 
invention, and I therefore do not wish to be 
tween the adjacent in her ends of the sleeves. 
understood as limiting myself strictly to the 
It is obvious that by rotating the sleeves F 
precise details of construction herein before 35 
they may be brought closer together, and, 
set forth and slowl ill the clawings. 
consequently, with their bearing-surfaces lear 
Having thus described my invention, what 
to the bearing surfaces a of the bearing A, in I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
order to take up any wear that may occur. 
Patent, is 
The operation of my improved device is 
obvious. By means of the anti friction rollers 
the rollers and their axle, of the bearing con 
or balls the friction is reduced to a minimum, 
taining anti-friction rollers or balls arranged 
while at the same time but very little lubri 
between the walls of the bearing and the axle, 
cation is necessary, and by means of the wash 
and disks or washers arranged between the 
ers E, or their equivalents-the disks f on the 
rollers and the ends of the said bearing, sub-45 
outer end of the sleeves F-the oil will be pre 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
vented from escaping from the axle-bearing, 
2. In a roller skate, the combination, with 
thereby preventing Waste of the lubricant 
the rollers D and their axles C, of the bearing 
and rendering the skate more cleanly in use. 
A, containing anti-friction rollers or balls sur 
By reason of the rollers D being mounted 
rounding the said axle, and disks or washers 5o 
loosely on the axle C they are capable of 
arranged between the rollers and the ends of 
Independent motion with respect to each other 
the bearing A to close the ends of the said 
and with respect to the rotation of the axle, 
bearing and form an abutinelat for the rollers, 
thereby preventing any increase ill the fric sub startially as and for the purposes specified 
tional resistance or any strain on the axle 
when the rollers are moving in a curved path, 
in which one roller must travel over a greater 
distance than the other. 
1. In a roller-skate, the combination, with 4o 
Witnesses: 
W. R. BAGLEY, 
J. A. JOHNSON. 
O 
I 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317614.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 317,614, 
W. & D, BLACKSTONE, 
HAY RAKE AND LOADER, 
Patented May 12, l885. 
 
IWVEWTORS' 
Attorne/S 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM BLACKSTONE AND DANIEL, BLACKSTONE, OF SHIELBYVILLE, ILL. 
HAY RAKE AND LOADER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 317,614, dated May 12, 1885. 
Application filed April 24, 1884. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM BLACK 
STONE and DANIEL BLACKSTONE, citizens of 
the United States, residing at Shelbyville, in 
the county of Shelby and State of Illinois, have 
invented a new and useful Hay Rake and 
Loader, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention has relation to hay rakes and 
loaders; and it consists in the construction 
and novel arrangement of parts, as will be 
hereinafter fully described, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective of a hay 
rake and loader embodying the improvements 
of our invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical longi 
tudinal section on the line a ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a transverse vertical section on the line 
2/3), Fig. 2; and Fig. 4 is a perspective detail 
View of one of the rake-teeth. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the main frame of the 
machine, which is mounted on wheels B and 
B', journaled on spindles C C, secured to the 
side rails of the main frame near their rear 
ends, as shown. In the transverse rails D and 
D' of the main frame are journaled the rollers 
EE, one near each side of the frame, over 
which runs an endless apron, F. 
From the transverse rails D and D' rise two 
inclined rails, G. G', at the side of the frame 
nearest the drive-wheel B, and these rails G. 
G' form the bearings for the rollers H. H. near 
their lower ends, and the rollers II near their 
upper ends, for the two endless aprons K. K. 
These inclined rails G. G' are provided, near 
the upper ends of the endless aprons KK, 
with a guide-board, L, over which the hay 
passes to the Wagon. 
To the right of the rails G. G', and secured 
upon the rear transverse rail, D', is an auxil 
iary frame, M, which inclines upwardly and 
forwardly, as shown, its front rail forming the 
rake-head. This frame M is provided with 
roller's NN' and O O" for the upper and lower 
inclined endless aprons P and P. The shafts 
QQ of the rear rollers, N'O', of the aprons P 
and P extend to the drive-wheel B, and have 
The drive-wheel B is provided on its inner 
- 
. 
55 
face with a cog gear-wheel, R, which meshes 
with a broad pinion, R., on the end of the shaft 
Q', and this pinion R' meshes with a narrow 
pinion, R., on the end of the shaft Q, to rotate 
the endless aprons PP in the direction of the 
arrows 1 and 2. 
The shaft S of the roller E projects rear 
Wardly, from its bearing, and is provided on 
its projecting end with a combined miter-pin 
ion and sprocket-wheel, T, which engages a 
miter-pinion, T, at its right side on the shaft Q. 
The shaft U of the upper roller, I, between 
the rails G. G', is provided with a combined 
cog-pinion and sprocket-wheel, V, on its pro 
jecting rear end, and the sprocket-wheel on 
this pinion is connected with the sprocket 
wheel on the miter-pinion T by an endless 
chain, W. The teeth of the pinion V engage 
the teeth of a pinion, X, on the shaft of the 
roller I, and the endless aprons KK are ro 
tated in the direction of the arrows 4 and 5. 
The endless apron F rotates in the direction 
of the arrow 3, and carries the hay to the ele 
vator-aprons, which carry it up between them 
and discharge it over the guide-board. 
The arms a of the rake-teeth are hinged be 
tween eyes b b on the rake-head, and are bi 
furcated at 0 for a portion of their length, and 
the angular upper ends of the rake-teeth d are 
pivoted in the rear ends of these bifurcations, 
as shown. The rake-arms at and the angle 
arms of the rake-teeth d are perforated later 
ally for the insertion of wooden break-pins e, 
so that when a tooth meets with an obstruction 
the wooden pin will break, and thus prevent 
the tooth from being broken. The hay is 
taken from the rake-teeth by the endless aprons 
PP', and carried between them to the apron 
F, and by it to the elevator-aprons. 
By this construction hay can be raked and 
loaded in very windy weather, as the canvas 
aprons are positive in their action. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination, with the main frame, 
provided with the endless apron F and wheels 
B B", of the endless aprons P P', having 
roller-bearings in the auxiliary frame M, the IOO 
shaft Q, provided with the broad pinion R 
and the miter-pinion T, the shaft Q, pro 
90 
95 
O 
25 
30 
5O bearings in the side rail of the main frame. 
2 
37,64. 
vided with the narrow pinion R, the cog-wheel cured in place near its forward end by a 
R on the drive-wheel B, the combined miter- wooden break-pin, substantially as specified. 
pinion and sprocket-wheel T, the combined 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing 
cog-pinion and pulley V, the cog-pinion X, as our own we have hereto affixed our signa- I5 
chain W, and the endless aprons KK and P tures in the presence of two witnesses. 
P, and the hinged rake-teeth connected to 
the auxiliary frame, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the bifurcated and 
laterally - perforated rake-arm, of the rake- 
tooth having the perforated angle-arm at its 
upper end pivoted in the bifurcation and Se- 
YAHMEAESSN, 
p 
O 
Witnesses: 
IE. HoMRIGHOUS, 
HENRY FUCHRING. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317714.txt	(No Model.) 
M. B. BROOKS. 
DOUBLE ACTING SUBMERGED FORCE PUMP, 
No. 37,714, 
Patented May 12, 1885. 
  
NII 
I 
la N 
 
 
 
% WITAESSES 
IWWEWTOR 
-2ZCzz Z, Z7-22-63, 
1%-224, 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MOTT BILLINGS BROOKS, OF NORTH HAMMOND, NEW YORK. 
DOUBLE-ACTING SUBMERGED FORCE-PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 317,714, dated May 12, 1885. 
Application filed October 20, 1884. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MoTTB. BROOKs, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at North 
Hammond, in the county of St. Lawrence and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful improvements in Double-Acting 
Submerged Force-Pumps; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being had 
to the annexed drawings, making a part of this 
specification, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a sectional ele 
vation of my improved pump. Fig.2 is a detail 
plan view of the upper valve-seat; Fig. 3, a simi 
lar view of the valve; Fig. 4, a plan view of 
the lower end of the cylinder; Fig. 5, a similar 
view of the lower valve, and Fig. 6 a partial 
sectional detail taken at right angles to Fig. 1. 
The present invention has relation to certain 
new and useful improvements in double-acting 
submerged force-pumps; and it consists in the 
details of construction substantially as shown 
in the drawings and hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the pump-cylinder, having interior screw 
threads upon its lower end for attaching there 
to a perforated valve-seat, B, and a central hole 
to receive a guide-pin, a, for the valve C. 
Within the cylinder A Works ahollow piston 
rod, D, which extends up through a head, E, 
and cap F, the latter having connected thereto 
an operating rod or lever, b. The head E is pro 
vided with an exterior screw-threaded flange, 
c, for engaging with interior screw-threads 
upon the upper end of the pump-cylinder A. 
The upper portion of the head E is cast or 
otherwise provided with an interior screw 
threaded flange or rim, d, with which engages 
the screw-threaded flangee of the cap F. The 
headE is also cast with a valve-seat, f, having 
inletsg, which communicate with the chamber 
G, formed by the flanges de between the cap and 
head, a valve, H, controlling the inlets g. The 
lower end of the hollow piston-rod D is screw. 
threaded, and has connected thereto a tubular 
piston-section, I, which passes loosely through 
the plunger-head K, consisting of the two sec 
tionshi and packing k, of leather or other suit 
ablematerial. The tubular section I, nearits up 
per end, has perforations l, and near its lower 
end perforations m, for the discharge of the 
water into the piston-rod D. The ends of the 
tubular section I are provided with stationary 55 
valves LM, which act in conjunction with the 
plunger-head K. 
In Fig. 1 of the drawings the cylinder A is 
shown as being pressed down, the inlets g be 
ing closed by valve H, as are also the perfora- 6o 
tions an in the tubular section I, the valve L. 
closing tightly against the under side of the 
plunger-head K, which forms a seat therefor. 
The water is forced from the upper part of the 
cylinder down and through the upper perfora- 65 
tions, l, and up the hollow piston-rod D. The 
pressure of water in the Well causes the valve 
O to rise, which opens the perforations in the 
valve-seat B, and thus allows the water to enter 
the cylinder A and fill that portion thereof be- ?o 
low the plunger-head K. The cylinder Ahav 
ing completed its downward stroke, the valve 
C closes, and on its upward stroke carries with 
it the plunger-head K, and, as the head strikes 
the under side of the valve M, closes the per- 75 
forations l and opens the perforations on, the 
water being forced from the lower part of the 
cylinder through the perforations in and up the 
piston-rod D. The pressure of the Water in the 
well causes the valve H to rise, and allows the 8o 
water to pass into the chamber G through in 
lets (), and thence down through openings in 
in the valve-seat f, which fills that portion of 
the cylinder Aabove the plunger-head K. The 
pins p, which pass through the valve EI, are to 85 
prevent it from turning. 
I am aware that submerged-pump cylinders 
have been provided with a removable cap, 
forming an annular chamber between the cap 
and the end of the cylinder, which latter forms go 
a seat for a valve confined between the end of 
the cylinder and the cap to regulate ports 
formed in the end of the cylinder, and do not 
claim such, for where the peculiarity consists 
in the construction of the cylinder, as in the 95 
above case, the production of the same is at 
a much higher cost, comparatively, than my 
device, where the peculiarity of construction 
is solely in the head, which latter can be pro. 
duced cheaply and used in connection with Ioo 
any cylinder or tube. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
317,714. 
In a double-acting submerged pump, a pump- 
5 forated Valve-seat and valve, and at its upper of two Witnesses. 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by in combination with a hollow piston-rod and 
Letters Patent, is- 
plunger-head, as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
Cylinder provided at its lower end with a per- hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
end with a removable head having an annular 
chamber formed therein, with inlets leading 
from the exterior and interior of the cylinder 
to said chamber, and a valve located within 
Io said chamber and controlling the inlet-ports, 
MOTT BILLINGS BROOKS, 
Witnesses: 
GEO. MORRIS, 
FORREST K. MORELAND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317814.txt	(No Model.) 
D. LYLE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
COMBINED STEAM AND HOT AIR ENGINE. 
No. 317,814, 
Patented May 12, 1885. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
lik 
C 
: 
E. 
es 
 
BY Mulviv 
ATTORNEYS, 
NPEreRS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
w 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 317,814, 
D. LYLE. 
COMBINED STEAM AND HOT AIR ENGINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 12, 1885. 
Zez-Zzzazzz'N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
22222 
if 3,221 
s 
2S SS 
S. 
2. 
Y 
as 
-re Sas 
2 
Ea 
atta 
R 
s NS 
WITNESSES 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
D. LYLE. 
COMBINED STEAM AND HOT AIR ENGINE, 
No. 317,814, 
Patented May 12, 1885, 
 
A&z 4. 
WITNESSES : SA 
INVENTOR: 
BY ?tupid 
ATTORNEYS, 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
D. LYLE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
COMBINED STEAM AND HOT AIR ENGINE, 
No. 317,814, 
N 
LI 
s 
| 
s S Wi 
3) 
eSS NYNNNNN 
NYNYSNSYSKYSSSNS 
2 2 
N22 
S. 
lay 
3 
g 4% 
S. S2 S. 3NY-142. 
% 2 
SN 
SS sale AS 
% | ca 
SSSIs 
SS 
) 
NS 
in 
g 
   
Wy 
s$7. 
 
yo 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
D. LYLE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
COMBINED STEAM AND HOT AIR ENGINE, 
No. 317,814, 
C-9-QS-C-9-GE 
& O C coo Go: 
a a as as are a 
: 
W. 
Patented May 12, 1885, 
ZZZZ 4 W 
y 
s S 
l 
% 
s % 
% 
2 
a22 % 
  
 
 
as S DN, S 
 
(XN 
46%riot 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
ATTORNEYS, 
D. LYLE. 
COMBINED STEAM AND HOT AIR ENGINE. 
Patented May 12, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets 
Sheet, 6. 
No. 317,814, 
SaaS as SSY 
 
 
 
NVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. Perers, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID LYLE, OF MANCHESTER, JAMAICA, WEST INDIES. 
COV B NED STEAM AND HOT-AR ENGINE. 
3PECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 317,8l4, dated May 2, 1885. 
Application filed June 14, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID LYLE, of Man 
chester, Jamaica, West Indies, have invented 
a new and Improved Combined Steam and 
Hot-Air Engine, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved combined steam and hot 
air engine, which is so constructed that the 
Steam and hot air are produced by one fire 
place, and the exhaust-steam and hot air serve 
to heat the feed-water and the air to be used 
in the engine. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction and arrangement of parts, as herein 
after fully described, and pointed out in the 
claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures, 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved com 
bined steam and hot-air engine and boiler. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional elevation of 
the same, parts being broken out. Fig. 3 is 
a cross-sectional elevation of the same through 
the cylinders. Fig. 4 is a detail perspective 
view of the slide-valve cylinder and the parti 
tion formed on the same. Fig. 5 is a sectional 
plan view of the engine through the cylinders. 
Fig. 6 is a detail longitudinal Sectional eleva 
tion of the air and Water pumps. Fig. 7 is a 
cross-sectional elevation of the same. Fig. 8 
is a sectional plan view of the boiler. Fig. 9 
is a cross-sectional elevation of the boiler. 
Fig. 10 is a side view of the valve-regulating 
mechanism, and Fig. IL is a plan view of the 
Sale. 
With my improved combined steam and hot 
air engine I use an improved boiler that pro 
duces the steam and hot air which must be 
used with my engine; but to simplify the de 
scription of the parts I will first describe the 
engine and then the boiler. The main shaft 
A revolves in suitable journals held in the 
ends B of a box, B, resting on a hollow base, 
B'. On each end of the shaft A are mounted 
a belt-pulley, A', and a fly-wheel, A, outside 
of the casing, and on one end is mounted in 
5O addition a belt-pulley, A, for the cord or belt 
45 
. 3O 
35 
U", for operating the governor. The crank 
shaft is provided with two cranks, at and a', 
which are arranged below the cylinders C and 
C, respectively. The diameter of the cylin 
der C, which is the steam-cylinder, is consid- 55 
erably less than that of the cylinder C, which 
is the hot-air cylinder. The cylinders are ar 
ranged vertically, and are closed at their upper 
ends and open at their lower ends. Each cyl 
inder contains a plunger or piston, D or D, 6o 
provided with suitable packing, which pistons 
or plungers are connected with the cranks a 
and a' by means of the connecting-rods b and 
b', respectively. Between the two cylinders 
C and C a third vertical cylinder, C, is ar- 65 
ranged, which is closed at its upper end and 
open at its lower end, and contains a slide 
valve, D', mounted on a rod, b, provided at 
its end with a ring surrounding an eccentric 
disk or wheel, a, on the shaft A. The rod 7c 
b'passes through a suitable stuffing-box in the 
top of the box B. 
The valve D'preferably consists of a hollow 
cylinder of less diameter than the cylinder C, 
and is provided at its top and bottom with 75 
flanges, the edges of which fit closely in the 
cylinder C. The cylinders C C C are sur 
rounded by a metal casing, E, having a Suit 
able top, and forming a jacket entirely around 
the cylinders, as shown in the sectional plan 8o 
view, Fig. 5. The central cylinder, C, is pro 
vided on opposite sides with outwardly-pro 
jecting wings c' and c, which extend to the 
sides of the casing E, and thus divide the cas 
ing E into two compartments, c' and c', of 85 
which the former contains the steam-cylinder 
C, and the latter the hot-air cylinder C. Chan 
nels d lead from the lower part of the cylin 
der C, containing the slide-valve, to the upper 
part of the steam-cylinder C, and other chan-90 
nels, d, lead from the upper part of the cyl 
inder C to the upper part of the hot-air cyl 
inder C. The cylinders Cand Care provided 
at about the middle of their height with ex 
haust-ports d", through which the exhaust- 95 
steam and hot air, respectively, can pass off 
into suitable pipes. The plungers Ol' pistons 
of the cylinders C and C are so arranged that 
when one is raised the other is lowered, and 
the sliding valve D is so arranged that when loo 
 
2 
3,7,814 
5 
) 
its upper end closes the ports through which 
the hot air passes to the upper end of the cyl 
inder C the lower end will be clear of the 
ports that conduct the steam into the upper 
end of the cylinder C, and vice versa. When 
the lower end of the valve closes the ports for 
conducting steam into the upper end of the 
cylinder C, the upper end of the piston is 
clear of the ports through which the hot air 
passes into the cylinder C. The hot air is con 
ducted into the upper part of the casing E 
through the pipe E, enters the compartment 
c", and then passes through suitable apertures 
from the said compartment into the upper 
part of the cylinder C, and then into the up 
per part of the cylinder C. The steam passes 
into the casing E through a pipe, F, and cir 
culates in the chamber c, surrounding the cyl 
inder C, and then passes through suitable ap 
ertures into the lower part of the cylinder C, 
and then into the upper part of the cylinder 
C. The connecting-rods band b must be piv 
oted in the plungers or pistons D and D. The 
box B is filled up to the shaft. A with oil. 
In the hollow base B", below the casing B, 
two sets, ee', of coiled pipes are arranged, the 
former having less diameters than the latter, 
and the pipe e being connected with a pump 
for pumping the feed-Water into the boiler, 
and the free end of the said pipe e extends 
into the boiler, so that the feed-water that is 
pumped into the boiler must first circulate 
through the said pipes e, and thereby pass 
through the said hollow base B. The pipe e' 
has one end connected with a pump for forc 
ing hot air into the boiler, and the other 
end extended into the open air, so that the 
air pumped by the pump referred to above 
must pass within the pipes e through the 
hollow base B. An exhaust-pipe, F, leads 
from the middle of the hot-air cylinder C down 
into the hollow base B, and the exhaust-pipe 
e", connected with the middle of the steam 
cylinder C, extends into the exhaust-pipe F, 
So that the exhaust-air and exhaust-steam 
from the cylinders C and C pass through the 
pipe F into the base B", thereby heating the 
air and feed-water circulating in the pipese' 
and e. The hot air and exhaust-steam then 
pass through a pipe, F, into the outer air. 
On the shaft Aan eccentric disk, a, is formed 
adjoining the eccentric diska, and surrounded 
by a ring connected with the piston-rod G' of 
the feed-water pump G. Another eccentric 
disk or wheel, a, formed on the shaft A, is 
surrounded by a ring connected with the pis 
ton-rod H of the hot-air pump-cylinder H. 
On the end of the piston-rod G' the piston G* 
is formed, which works in the cylinder G. 
The cylinder His provided at the closed end 
With a series of apertures, h, which connect 
the cylinder with an annular chamber, h, sur 
rounding it, with which annular chamber a 
pipe, I, is connected, through which air is 
conducted from the pump-cylinder H to a 
stand-pipe, i. In the middle of the closed 
end of the pump-cylinder H an inwardly 
swinging valve, g, is hinged, to close the end 
of a short pipe, J, provided at its open end 
with a stop-cock, J. With the pipe J the 
pipe e is coupled, which, as previously stated, 
is arranged in the hollow base B" of the casing 
B, and has its opposite free end in the open 
air. When the piston H' moves in the direc 
tion of the arrow i', the valve g is closed and 
the air in the pump-cylinder H is compressed 
and forced through the pipe I into the up 
right pipe I" and then into the boiler, in a 
manner that will be described hereinafter. 
When the piston H' moves in the reverse di 
rection of the arrow i, the valve g is opened 
and air is drawn into the cylinder. The pipe 
I must be provided with a suitable check 
valve. If the valve J is opened and a valve, 
I, of the pipe e' closed, the air drawn into the 
pump-cylinder H will not circulate in the 
pipe e', but will be drawn directly into the 
pump. If the cock I" is opened and the cock 
J' closed, the air drawn into the cylinder will 
circulate through the pipee. Into the closed 
end of the pump-cylinder G the pipes e and 
if lead, of which the former, e, contains a ball 
Valve, e", which opens-that is, is removed 
from its seat-when the piston G' moves in the 
direction of the arrow it. The pipef contains 
a ball-Valve, f', which opens-that is, is re 
moved from its seat--when the piston G moves 
in the reverse direction of the arrow i. The 
pipef draws the feed-water from a suitable 
tank, and when the piston G moves in the di 
rection of the arrow i' the piston forces the 
water through the pipe e, whereby the water is 
heated in the hollow base B", and then passed 
through the pipelinto the boiler. The pipe E, 
which conducts the hot air into the top of the 
casing E, passes into the boiler K, and forms a 
spiral, K, of one or more turns above the dome 
L, which is above the fire-place L in the said 
boiler, and the end of the pipe leads into the 
top of the dome, so that the products of com 
bustion, &c., are conducted from the dome 
through the pipe E into the casing E. A 
transverse water-pipe, M, is formed in the 
dome, whereby the water will be heated 
very rapidly. The water is also heated by the 
hot air and products of combustion passing 
through the spiral pipe K". The fire-door M" 
and the ash-pit door M? of the boiler must be 
arranged to close absolutely tight, so that no 
air can enter. The boiler is provided with a 
dome, O, having numerous apertures, O, in 
the sides, and on the top of said dome the 
safety-valve P is arranged. A pipe, P, leads 
from the upperpart of the dome into a casing, Q, 
arranged above the uprightpipe I". Through 
the casing Q a vertical rod, R, extends, on 
which are mounted valves R. R' within the 
casing Q, which valves fit on suitable seats in 
the said casing. When the valves R are 
raised from their seats, the steam can pass 
through the pipe P, the casing Q, and the pipe 
Finto the chamber c' around the cylinder C. 
From the pipe I two pipes, SS, lead into the 
fire-place of the boiler above and below the 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
8) 
90 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
37,814 
3. 
grate m. On the vertically-movable rod Rin 
the pipe I'two sliding pistons or valves, TT, 
are arranged, which are adapted to close the 
ends of the said pipes S. A ball-governor, U, 
is driven by the belt or cord U' from the pull 
ley A. On the main shaft A, and the said ball 
governor is connected by a rod, W, with the rod 
R in the casing Q, and by another rod, W', 
with the rod Rin the tube or pipe I. 
The operation is as follows: As stated, the 
crank-shaft revolves in oil, and is thus thor 
oughly lubricated at all times. When one 
piston moves down, the other moves up, and 
so on alternately, the pistons always moving 
in opposite directions. Each piston is single 
acting-that is, it is forced downward by the 
Steam or hot air, and is carried upward by the 
impetus of the driving-shaft. I will first de 
scribe the operation in the steam-cylinder. 
The steam is drawn from the top of the dome 
O of the boiler K, and passes through the pipe 
P and the pipe F into the chamber c, in 
which the cylinder C is located. The steam 
surrounding the said cylinder prevents the hot 
air in the cylinder from being cooled, as the 
steam forms a jacket. When the valve D'' is 
raised, the steam passes through the channels 
or openings d' into the top of the cylinder C, 
forces the piston D down, and thus revolves 
the crank-shaft A. The exhaust-steam passes 
into the pipe F, and through the same into 
the hollow base B", and then passes through 
the pipe F into the outer air. The smoke 
and like products of combustion are fully 
consumed in the fire-place, and the hot 
gases pass through the spiral pipe K, and 
through the pipe E into the chamber c, and 
from the same into the cylinder C, and then 
into the cylinder C through the ports in the 
top of the same. It then forces down the pis 
ton D", thereby revolving the crank-shaft. 
The hot air then passes through the pipe Fin 
to the hollow base B, and from the same 
through the pipe Finto the smoke-stack. 
The operation of the compound governor is 
aSfollows: If the shaft Arevolves too rapidly, 
the shaft of the governor will be revolved with 
great speed, and thereby the rod R will be 
moved downward and the rod Rupward. If 
the rod R is moved dewnward, the valves R. 
close the openings in the casing Q, and thus 
prevent part of the steam from passing into 
the steam-cylinder, and as the rod R is raised 
the valves T cover more or less of the inner 
ends of the pipes S, thus diminishing the quan 
tity of air that is forced into the fire-place by 
the pump H. If the crank-shaft. A revolves 
too slowly, the balls drop, the rod R is raised, 
the valves R are raised with it, and the rod 
R" descends, the valves T descending with it, 
and thus opening the inner ends of the pipes 
S, and permitting the pump H to force a greater 
quantity of air through the pipes S into the 
fire-place, whereby the quantity of heated air 
produced will be increased. The quantity of 
Steam admitted into the steam-cylinder and 
the quantity of air forced into the fire-place 
are always increased and decreased simulta 
neously, so that the governor can regulate the 
hot-air supply and the steam-Supply. 
In place of the cylindrical slide-valves here 
in shown and described, any other Suitable 
slide-valve may be used. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an engine, the combination, With a 
casing divided into two compartments, of a 
hot-air cylinder in one compartment and a 
steam-cylinder in the other compartment, and 
of means for conducting hot air into the Com 
partment in which the steam-cylinder is lo 
cated, and means for conducting steam into 
the compartment in which the hot-air cylin 
der is located, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
2. In an engine, the combination, with a 
casing divided into two compartments, of a hot 
air cylinder in one compartment, a steam-cyl 
inder in the other, and a valve-cylinder be 
tween the hot-air and steam cylinders, Sub 
stantially as herein shown and described 
3. In an engine, the combination, With the 
casing E, of the cylinder C, having the Oppo. 
site partitions c' c, and of the cylinders. C 
and C, arranged at opposite sides of the cylin 
der C, substantially as herein shown and de 
Scribed. 
4. In an engine, the combination, with a gas 
ing, E, divided into the compartments co, of 
the steam-cylinder C in the compartment c, 
the hot-air cylinder in the compartment c', 
the valve-cylinder C between the steam and 
hot-air cylinders, pistons DD in said steam 
and hot-air cylinders, a sliding valve in the 
cylinder C, and the shaft A, provided with 
cranks and an eccentric for operating the said 
pistons and slide-valve, substantially as here 
in shown and described. 
5. In an engine, the combination, with the 
hot-air and steam cylinders arranged in Sepa 
rate compartments of the casing, of a cham 
ber formed in the hollow base of the ma 
chine, pipes for heating the feed-Water and 
hot air arranged in the said hollow base, and 
pipes for conducting the exhaust-steam and 
hot air into the pipes of the hollow base, Sub 
stantially as herein shown and described 
6. In an engine, the combination, With the 
hot-air and steam cylinders arranged on a 
hollow base, of pipes for conducting the ex 
haust-steam and hot air from the above-men 
tioned cylinders into the said hollow base, 
two sets of coiled pipes arranged in the base, 
through one set of which pipes the feed-Water 
is conducted, and through the other set of 
which pipes the air circulates before passing 
into the air-heating furnace, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
7. In an engine, the combination, with the 
crank-shaft A, of the steam-cylinder C and 
the hot-air cylinder C, pistons contained in 
the said cylinders, connecting-rods connect 
ing these pistons with the crank-shaft, the 
> 
9O 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
4. 
317,814 
air-pump H and the water-pump G, operated 
from the crank-shaft, pipes leading from the 
Water-tank to the water-pump and from the 
pump to the boiler, and pipes leading from 
the air-pump to the furnace of the boiler, sub 
Stantially as herein shown and described. 
8. In an engine, the combination, with the 
hot-air cylinder and the shaft operated from 
the piston in the said cylinder, of a pump-cyl 
inder, H, containing a piston, H, operated 
from the above shaft, the pipe J, provided 
With the cock J', and the pipe e, connected 
with the pipe J, substantially as herein 
Shown and described. 
9. In an engine, the combination, with the 
hot-air cylinder and the shaft operated from 
the piston in the said cylinder, of the pump 
cylinder H, the piston H" in the same, the 
chamber h", surrounding one end of the pump 
cylinder, the pipe I, connected with the said 
chamber, the pipe J in the closed end of the 
cylinder, the valve g, for closing the said pipe, 
the cock Jin the pipe J, and the pipe e', pro 
vided with the cock I, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
10. In an engine, the combination, with the 
hot-air cylinder and the steam-cylinder, pis 
tons in the said cylinders, and connecting-rods 
connecting the said pistons with the crank 
shaft, of a boiler, pipes connecting the steam 
O 
. (5 
25 
cylinder with the boiler, a valve held in the 
said pipe and connected with the governor, a 
pipe connecting an air-pump with the furnace 
of the boiler, and valves arranged in the said 
pipe and connected with the governor, Sub 
stantially as herein shown and described. 
11. In an engine, the combination, with the 
steam-cylinder and the hot-air cylinder, pis 
tons in the said cylinders, and connecting-rods 
connecting the said pistons with the crank 
shaft, of the boiler K, the pipe I, the casing 
Q, the valves Rin the casing Q, the valves Tin 
the tube I'', the pipe S, connecting the tube I' 
with the fire-place above and below the grate, 
and the governor U, connected with the rod 
on which the valves Rare mounted, and with 
the rod on which the valves T are mounted, 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
12. In an engine, the combination, with a 
combined boiler and air heater, of a hot-air 
cylinder and a steam-cylinder, pistons in the 
cylinders, crank-shafts connected by connect 
ing-rods with the pistons in the cylinders, and 
a regulating device for regulating the supply 
of hot air and steam at the same time, sub 
stantially as herein shown and described. 
DAVI) LYLE. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. E. HOSKINSON, 
GEO. CORN ELIUS. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US317914.txt	(No Model.) 
A. M. YEAKEL, 
WATCH CASE PEND ANT, 
No. 317,914, 
Patented May 12, 1885. 
WITNESSES 
4.64%z6. 
22.22- 
Y 
INVENTOR, 
A (...3. 
2/ 
/6% 
%g (Y 
2e2/51 (-, 
N. PETES. Poto-Lithographer, Washington, D. G. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ABRAHAM. M. YEAKEL OF PERKASIE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WATCH-CASE PENDANT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 317,914, dated May 12, 1885, 
Application filed February 12, 1SS3, 
(No model.) 
O 
it 5 
To all thon, it invay concern: 
Beit known that I, ABRAHAM. M. YEAREL, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Perkasie, in the county of Bucks and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Watch - Case IPend 
ants; and Idohereby declare that the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, which form a part of 
this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a portion 
of the case-center of a watch-case having my 
improved pendant. IFig. 2 is a sectional view 
taken vertically through the pendant. Fig. 
3 is a vertical sectional view taken on the line 
a'a in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a horizontal sectional 
view taken on the line y) in Fig. 3; and Fig. 
5 is a perspective detail view, showing the 
Several parts composing my improved watch 
pendant separated or detached from each other. 
The same letters refer to the same parts in 
all the figures. 
This invention relates to pendants for watch 
cases; and it has for its object to provide a 
pendant intended more especially for all 
classes of hunting-case watches, whether face 
or stem winders, and also for open-face stem 
winders, which shall be simple in construction, 
inexpensive, and absolutely dust-proof. 
With these ends in view the invention con 
sists in the improved construction and com 
bination of parts of the said watch-case pend 
ant, which will be hereinafter fully described, 
and particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, A desig 
nates a pendant, to the lower end of which 
the case-center of the watch-case B is soldered 
or otherwise secured, and the sides of which 
are provided with recesses or sockets to re 
ceive the ends of the pendant bow-ring C. The 
pendant A is provided with an upward-ex 
tending neck, D, upon which is fitted a swiv. 
eled ring, G, which is securely retained by 
means of a collar, H, firmly secured upon the 
upper end of Said neck. A perforation, I, ex 
tends through the pendant A, the upper part 
of which is enlarged, so as to form a shoulder, 
J, upon which is seated a spiral spring, K. 
L designates a crown, the inner side of 
which is provided with a downward-extend 
ing stem, M, passing through the perforation 
I, Said crown is provided on its inside with 
vertical grooves NN, registering with lugs O 
O, extending laterally from the swiveled ring 
G, to which latter the said crown is secured by 
means of Small screws PP. It will be seen 
that when this connection is made the spring 
K serves to force the crown L in an upward 
direction, thus forcing the swiveled ring Ginto 
contact with the collar H, and forming a prac. 
tically dust-tight joint, which still leaves the 
Crown L. free to turn. 
The lower or inner end of the push-pin M. 
bears against the case-spring Q, which may 
thus be operated by simple pressure from the 
outside upon the crown L. By this arrange 
ment the said case-spring also serves to force 
the crown Lin an upward direction, thus re 
enforcing the spring K. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the drawings hereto annexed, 
the operation and advantages of this inven 
tion will be readily understood. 
The construction is simple and effective 
for the purpose set forth, and the device may 
be readily applied to ordinary watch-cases. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
1. The combination of a pendant having 
an upward-extending neck, and provided with 
a vertical perforation, the upper part of which 
is enlarged, so as to form a shoulder, a spiral 
spring seated on said shoulder, a ring swiveled 
on the neck of the pendant and retained by a 
collar fixed at the upper end of the same, and 
a crown fitted over and attached to the swiv 
eled ring, and having a stem extending through 
the perforation of the pendant, all arranged 
and operating substantially as and for the pur 
pose herein set forth. 
2. The combination of the pendant having 
an upward-extending neck, the swiveled ring 
having laterally-extending lugs, the fixed re 
taining - collar, the crown having interior 
grooves adapted to receive the lugs of the 
swiveled ring, and provided with a down 
ward-extending stem, means for attaching the 
said crown to the swiveled ring, and a spring 
- 
O 
3 5 
45 
so 
 
g 
- 
317,94 
arranged to force the said crown in an up- bearing against and adapted to be operated 
ward direction, substantially as and for the by the lower or inner end of the stem extend 
purpose herein set forth. 
ing downwardly from the crown, substantially I5 
3. In a watch-case crown, the combination as and for the purpose herein set forth. 
5 of the pendant having a vertical perforation, 
the swiveled ring, the retaining-collar, the 
crown attached to the swiveled ring, and hav 
ing a stem extending through the perforation 
of the pendant, a spiral spring arranged to 
IO force the crown in an upward direction, the 
case-center of the watch-case Secured to the 
lower end of the pendant, and the case-spring 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ABRAHAM M. YEAKET. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY G. MOYER, 
SAMUET. TR, KRAAEIR. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318014.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. MUN CEY. 
ORE WASHER 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 318,014, 
Patented May 19, 1885, 
 
 
 
HaSEE 
a" s 
-Z. 
-- 
INVEWTOR 
g 
C2 
 
  
a 4. 
  
 
 
 
Z) 
S. t 
Zo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 318,014, 
W. J. MUNCEY. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
ORE WASHER, 
Patented May 19, 1885. 
s 
- 
 
e 
2 
 
NYS 
- 
R 
- 
- - - - 
Se &\ N 
 
Ss.RS 
. 
SSSN 
SSSSSSS 
S 
k 
 
 
 
NZ ja16 2 
 
 
Byez Attorneys 
C22-2496 
N. Peters, Photo-l:Irographer, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM J. MUNCEY, OF GUNNISON, COLORADO. 
ORE - WAS HER. 
C. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 318,014, dated May 19, 1885. 
Application fied March 13, 1885. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
35 
45 
To add whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM J. MUNCEY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Gun 
nison city, in the county of Gunnison and 
State of Colorado, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Ore-Washers, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be. 
ing had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
ore-washers; and it consists in the peculiar 
construction and combinations of devices, that 
will be more fully set forth hereinafter, and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of an ore-washer embodying 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a detailed vertical 
longitudinal sectional view of the cylinder, 
showing the receiving-trough and the water 
pipe located therein. Fig. 3 is a detailed ver 
tical transverse sectional view of the same. 
Fig. 4 is a top plan view of the ore-washer. 
A represents a rectangular supporting 
frame, which has projecting beams B. To the 
ends of these beams are secured bearing-blocks 
C, in which is journaled a transverse shaft, D. 
To this shaft is fixed an overshot water-wheel, 
E, the upper side of which is slightly below 
the level of the upper side of the supporting 
frame. A miter gear-wheel, D, is secured to 
the shaft D. 
A shaft, F, is journaled in blocks G at right 
angles to the shaft D, and to one end of this 
shaft F is fixed a miter gear-wheel, H, that 
meshes with the gear-wheel D. To the inner 
end of the shaft F is fixed a pulley, I. 
Transverse beams A are bolted to the up 
per side of the frame A in pairs, between 
which, and near the ends thereof, are jour 
maled the anti-friction bearing-rollers A". 
Standards Arise from the frame A, near the 
ends thereof, and betweenthese standards, and 
resting on the rollers A, is placed a cylinder, 
K, which is open at its ends, and is slightly 
inclined, its inlet end being a little higher than 
its discharge end. 
A spout, A', is located above the water 
wheel and slightly below the discharge end of 
the cylinder. The cylinder is lined on its in 
ner side with a blanket, L, similar to those 
now in common use in sluices, for receiving the 
precious metals from the ore pulp. 
M. represents a trough, which is secured to 
7O 
55 
the standards A" in a slightly-inclined posi 
tion, parallel with the cylinder, and extends 
longitudinally through said cylinder, the edges 
of the trough coming nearly in contact with 
the inner sides of the cylinder, as shown at 
Fig. 3. 
N represents a pipe that is supported by 
the standards A", and extends through the cyl 
inder near the upper side thereof. The end 
of this pipe at the discharge end of the cyl 
inder is closed, and in the upper side of this 
pipe, throughout the length of the cylinder, 
is made a series of perforations, n. 
An inducting-trough, O, communicates with 
the inlet end of the cylinder, near the lower 
side thereof. 
An endless belt, P, passes over the cylinder 
and under the pulley I. 
A spout, R, communicates with the dis 
charge end of the trough M, and leads to a 
tank, S, which is preferably located to one side 
This tank has a discharge 
of the ore-washer. 
spout, S', at one end, near the upper side there 
of. 
The lower end of the sluice rests on the 
trough O. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
The tailings from the sluice pass through the 
cylinder, and the water is discharged upon the 
water-wheel, causing it to revolve, and this 
revolution of the water-wheel is communi 
cated to the cylinder, as will be readily un 
derstood by reference to the drawings and 
from the foregoing description. Clear water 
is forced through the pipe N, either by hy 
draulic pressure or a force-pump, or by any 
other suitable means, and jets up through the 
openings in against the upper side of the cyl 
inder. A portion of the clear water passes 
down the sides of the cylinder; but the major 
portion of it falls into the trough M. As the 
cylinder revolves, the tailings are carried up 
with it, and are met by the descending current 95 
of clear water, which carries off the mud and 
slime, while the metal is retained by the 
blanket and carried up above the trough M, 
where it is acted upon by the jets from the 
pipe N and caused to fall into the trough M, 
and is conveyed to the tank S and therein de 
posited. As the cylinder rotates, every por 
tion of the surface of the blanket lining there 
of is presented successively to the action of 
75 
OO 
318,014 
trough in the cylinder, and gearing connect 
ing the water-wheel with the cylinder, where 
by the rotation of the wheel is imparted to 
the cylinder, for the purpose set forth, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of the rotating cylin 
der having the blanket lining, the trough lo 
cated in the cylinder and extending there 
through, the perforated water-pipe in the cyl 
inder, above the trough, and the receiving 
tank communicating with the discharge end 
of the trough, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
own I have hereto affixed my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
-- 
. 
WM. J. MUNCEY. 
Witnesses: 
WM. N. MooRE, 
E. G. SIGGERS. 
) 
the jets from the water-pipe and thoroughly 
cleansed thereby, so that the fuzzy surface of 
the blanket is prevented from becoming filled 
with sand or slime, and thus the blanket is 
constantly kept in condition to arrest the me 
tallic particles. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination of the rotating cylin 
1 O der having the blanket lining, the trough lo 
cated in the cylinder and extending there 
through, and the perforated water-pipe in the 
cylinder, above the trough, substantially as de 
- 2. The combination of the Supporting-frame, 
the rotating cylinder secured thereim, the wa 
ter-wheel located beneath the discharge end 
of the cylinder, the trough extending through 
the cylinder, the perforated pipe above the 
Scribed. 
I 5 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318114.txt	(No Model.) 
N. A. HULL. 
DRAWER CASE, 
No. 318,114, 
Patented May 19, 1885. 
s 
Q) 
22222222222 
N o N\\\\\\\SA SN 
N 
NS 
NS 
I & I 
N N 
NSN 
S.LNS 
ZZZZZZZZZZSZ,N MNNN 
a4aaaaaa 
aaaaaaaaaa 
N 
N 
N 
  
 
WITWESSES 
tie, 
IWWEWTOR 
t?ae/Zoasla. Zsea, 
Attorney 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer. Washington, A. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NICHOLAS A. HULL OF PERU, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO AARON N. DUKES, 
OF SAME PIACE. 
DRAWER-CASE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 318,ll4, dated May 9, 1885. 
Application filed September 25, 1883. 
(No model.) 
- 
O 
I5 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NICHOLAs A. HULL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Peru, 
in the county of Miami and State of Indiana, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Drawer-Cases, of which the fol 
lowing is a description. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
view of my invention with one side removed; 
Fig. 2, a cross-section looking toward the front, 
and Fig. 3 a detail view of one corner enlarged. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in drawer-cases for sew 
ing-machine and other tables. 
Previous to my invention it has been usual 
in the manufacture of such drawer-cases to 
form their sides from three distinct and sepa 
rate pieces joined together by gluing, said 
sides being braced and supported by cross 
pieces at each end and one placed in the mid 
dle below the bottom drawer, the interior faces 
of the sides being grooved to receive strips 
upon which the drawers rest and slide. 
The object of this invention is to improve 
25 the construction of drawer-cases, so as to effect 
a saving in time, labor, and material, and 
which, when completed, will be neat in finish 
and their sides and ends well protected for 
storage or shipment, at the same time admit 
ting of Said cases being made upon a form with 
their sides separate from the braces, which 
prevents these sides from becoming sprung by 
the expansion and contraction of the same. 
These objects Iattain by the construction sub 
35 stantially as shown in the accompanying draw 
ings, and hereinafter more fully described. 
In the drawings, A represents the sides of 
a drawer-case constructed according to my in 
vention, said sides being each composed of but 
two pieces, one of which is the veneer or out 
side. These sides A are firmly supported by 
longitudinal parallel pieces or bars B at the 
top, middle, and bottom, said pieces or bars 
forming bearings, upon which rest and slide 
the drawers C. The parallel pieces or bars B 
are tenoned, so as to enter grooves cut in the 
end pieces,D and D', and, being separate from 
the sides A, do not affect the same by contrac 
tion or expansion. 
The corners of the drawer-cases, formed as 
3O 
- 
55 
foo 
above described, have rabbeted thereto round 
posts E, which not only serve as a finish and 
support for the end pieces, D', which are se 
cured thereto by nails e passing through the 
post, veneer, and into the said pieces, but also 
protect the sides and ends from becoming 
broken or marred when packed for storage or 
transportation, at the same time giving in 
creased strength to the point of junction be 
tween said sides and end pieces. 
It will be noticed by reference to Figs. 1 and 
3 that the rabbeted posts E serve the three 
fold purpose of supporting the end pieces, D', 
securing the side pieces, Ain place, and afford 
ing a finish and protection for the corners. 65 
The recess for each drawer is slightly larger 
than the drawer itself, so as to prevent bind 
ing, and by regulating the depth of the groove 
in the corner posts or slightly removing the 
edge where the sides join the end pieces accu 
rate fitting can be made around the drawers 
and their fronts, thereby giving to the entire 
case a neat and tasteful appearance. By hav 
ing the braces longitudinal instead of lateral 
greater strength is imparted to the case, and 
there is less liability of its becoming sprung, 
as is frequently the case with drawer-cases of 
the usual and ordinary construction, it being 
necessary to use three pieces of wood so ar 
ranged as to compensate one for the other for 
incidental contraction and expansion, this be 
ing a common, well-known, and necessary ex 
pedient, but requiring more material than is 
absolutely essential to form a drawer-case, the 
inner pieces being made from common pine or 85 
other light wood to serve as a backing for a 
veneer of hard wood, in order to cheapen the 
manufacture. In my construction of drawer 
cases the longitudinal braces tenoned to the 
end pieces are entirely separate and distinct 
from the sides, but form bearings upon which 
rest and slide the drawers; and there being no 
strain upon said sides, but two pieces are nec 
essary for the formation of each-viz., the ve 
neer and backing-and the entire device is 
readily made upon a form, thereby facilitating 
labor and insuring a meat and true finish. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
38,114 
l. The herein-described drawer-case, con 
sisting of the sides A, composed each of a 
veneer and backing, grooved end pieces, D 
and D', brace-bars B, running parallel and ten 
oned to said grooved end pieces, and the rab 
beted posts E, the latter serving to support the 
end pieces, D', secure the sides A in place, 
and form a finish and protection for the cor 
ners, substantially as shown and described. 
2. A drawer-case consisting of the sides A, 
each composed of a veneer and backing, and 
end pieces, D and D, in combination with the 
rabbeted posts E, supporting the end pieces, 
D', and securing the sides A. in place, and the 
parallel brace-bars B, independent of thesides 
A and securing the end pieces, D and D', to 
gether, substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a drawer-case for sewing-machine or 
other like tables, the combination of suitable 
sides composed each of but two pieces-the 
veneer and backing-with grooved end pieces, 
longitudinal parallel brace-bars tenoned to 
said grooved end pieces independent of the 
sides, and round rabbeted corner posts, sub 
stantially as shown, and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to the specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
25 
NICHOLAS A. HULI. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES M. BROWN, 
GEO. W. CONSTANT. 
5 
O 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318214.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 318,214, 
J. SMITH, 
WATER WHEEL. 
Patented May 19, 1885. 
 
 
 
 
 
?? 
7 
N. PETERS Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESPER SMITH, OF WASHINGTON, NEW JERSEY. 
WATER - WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 318,214, dated May 19, 1885. 
Application filed April 24, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
75 
Zo a? ?v/u???  ??? ???cer?, : 
Be it known that I, JESPER SMITH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the county of Warren and State of 
New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Water-Wheels, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had thereinto the accompanying 
drawings. 
The object of this improvement is a re 
versible water-motor of economical construc 
tion and simple operation, adapted for use in 
the operation of elevators. These results are 
attained by the mechanism illustrated in the 
drawings herewith filed as part hereof, in 
which the same letters of reference denote the 
same parts in the different views. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation, partly in sec 
tion, of a water-motor embodying the fea 
tures of my improvement. Fig. 2 is a side 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a side elevation 
Fig. 4 is a top view 
of the Valve detached. 
of the Same. 
4 
Aisthe Water-wheel casingor cylinder, hav 
ing inclined recessed extensions A, and a cir 
cular valve-chamber, A, and an exhaust open 
ing, A, at the lower part of the casing A, all 
made integral. 
B B are cylinder-heads secured to the cy. 
lindrical casing A' by bolts D, which pass 
through perforated lugs on the parts B B', 
corresponding in size and position to lugs at 
on the casing A, with which they are made 
integral. 
CC are bosses, made integral with the cyl 
inder-heads B B and provided with inner 
recesses for the purpose of receiving and form 
ing bearings for correspondingly-sized jour 
nals with which the water - wheel J is pro 
vided. 
J' represents radial buckets or arms, made 
integral with the body of the wheel J, which 
is made hollow to avoid unnecessary weight. 
E is the valve, having an opening, e, in its 
lowert part, agreeing in size with the recesses 
in the inclined connections A, through one or 
the other of which the water is applied to 
driving the wheel J, as hereinafter fully ex 
plained. 
G G are caps for inclosing the valve E in 
the chamber A, having integral perforated 
lugs a?, by means of which the caps G G are 
bolted to the valve-casing A', as shown at gg. 
F is the valve-operating rod, having an ob 
long square form intermediate of its ends, cor 
responding in size to the recesses E in the 
sides of the valve, (more fully shown in Figs. 
3 and 4) for a purpose to be presently set 
forth. Outside of the body of the valve the 
rod F is made round in order that it may fit, 
move in, and be packed water-tight by stuf 
fing-boxes.f, as indicated in Fig. 2. The valve 
E is provided in its upper part with an en 
larged recess, E, on each side of the rod F, 
connecting with the central recess, e, in order 
that Water may pass through the valve and in 
to the conduits A without obstruction from 
the rod F. 
His a grooved pulley, suitably secured to 
the valve-rod F. Said pulley is to be pro 
vided with an operating rope or chain extend 
ing to the top of the building in which the 
motor is employed, in order that its operation 
may be governed from any part of the trav 
erse of the elevator to which it is applied. 
K is the water-induction pipe, which may 
be made integral with the cap G, as shown, 
and thus introduce the water through theside 
of the valve-chamber; or the supply of water 
may be introduced through the top thereof, as 
may be deemed most advisable. 
By operating the pulley H the oblong square 
portion of the rod F will engage with the side 
walls of the valve and cause it to oscillate in 
One direction or the other, and by so doing 
bring the central recess, e, in line with either 
of the conduits A, and thus apply the water 
to the corresponding part of the wheel J, 
which may thus be promptly driven in either 
direction as occasion may require. 
By shifting the valve to the position shown 
in Fig. 1 the water-supply will be cut of 
from both conduits, and the operation of the 
wheel J will cease. The pressure of the wa 
ter on the body of the valve will make a wa 
ter-tight joint with the valve-seat, and thus 
prevent leakage or waste when the motor is 
mot in use. 
Having explained the construction and op 
eration of my improvement, what I claim as 
. 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
2 
318,244 
new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, ranged to operate as and for the purpose set Io 
S- 
In a reversible Water-motor, the combina- 
? of the water-wheel, the casing having in- presence of two witnesses. 
clined recessed extensions terminating in a 
5 circular valve-chamber, the valve iasing , 
Central water-way provided with an enlarge- 
ment in its upper part, as described, and the 
valve-operating shaft, all constructed and ar- 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
JESPER SMLTTH. 
forth. 
Witnesses: 
WM. GUNSAULES, 
AUG. P. HANN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318314.txt	(No Model.) 
w M. R. SKINNER, 
PULLEY BIOCK, 
No. 318,314, 
Patented May 19, 1885. 
 
 
 
...' 
NSN 
( 
SNISNS NSNS 
N: 
NY N 7 
S EGA C 
e. 
 
c. 
 
 
 
 
- 
A 
2. 
37 e 
f 
in PETERs. Photo-Litkographer. Washington D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MERRILL R. SKINNER, OF HAMBURG, NEW YORK. 
PULLEY.- BLOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent INo. 318,314, dated May 19, 1885. 
Application filed March 5, 1885. (No model.) 
IO 
15 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MERRILL R. SKINNER, 
of Hamburg, in the county of Erie and State 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Pulley-Blocks, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
pulley-blocks which consist of ashellor casing 
provided with an eye or loop at its upper end, 
Whereby the block is suspended, and a pulley 
or sheave arranged in the casing and adapted 
to receive a suitable chain. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
the block in such manner that the chain may 
be locked in the block by a simple means, and 
the pad or weight held suspended when de 
SeC. My invention consists of the improvements 
which will be hereinafter fully set forth, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1 
and 2 represent longitudinal vertical sections 
of my improved pulley-block. Fig. 3 is an 
end elevation thereof. Fig. 4 is a sectional 
bottom plan view. Fig. 5 is a fragmentary 
vertical section showing the chain-catch ad 
justably secured to the block-casing. Fig. 6 
is a cross-section in linea ac, Fig. 5. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the several figures. 
A represents the shellor casing, composed of 
two side plates or cheeks, a a, which are united 
attheir upper ends with an eye or loop, B, from 
which the block is suspended. The loop B is 
elongated and provided on its upper side with 
a central projection, b, which divides the loop 
and forms two bearings, bb, on opposite sides 
of the projection, each of which bearings may 
be yed for supporting the block on the sta 
ple b. 
C represents the pulley or sheave arranged 
between the cheeks a a, and mounted on a pin 
or arbor, c, which is journaled in bearings c, 
formed in the side plates, a. a. 
D is a chain running over the pulley C, and 
fastened with its front end, d, to the load or 
weight to be raised, while its rear end, d, re 
ceives the draft in the direction of the arrow 
in Fig. 2. The rear ends, a?, of the cheek-pieces 
a a extend downwardly below the sheave, and 
are connected on the front side of the rear por 
55 
65 
tion of the chain by a bridge-piece, E. The 
latter is provided with two jaws, ee, which rest 
against the inner sides of the plates a, leaving 
an opening, e, between the jaws, through which 
the chain-links can pass edgewise. The lower 
edges of the jaws are provided with a V-shaped 
notch, f. The bridge-piece E and jaws e are 
made in one piece, and are preferably cast with 
the side plates, a as or, if desired, the bridge 
piece E and jaws e maybe made separate from 
the side plates, a, and secured in place by a 
bolt, g, as represented in Figs. 5 and 6. When 
the jaws are cast separate from the side plates, 
a, and secured by the boltg, the latter may ex 
tend through segmental slots h, formed in the 
side plates, as shown in Fig. 5, whereby the 
jaws can be adjusted toward or from the chain 
by sliding the bolt g in the slotsh. When the 
block A is suspended from the bearing b' of 7O 
the loop, as shown in Fig. 1, the jaws e will 
stand in front of the rear portion of the chain, 
and the latter will move freely past the jaWS 
without catching against the same. In this 
position of the block the chain is permitted to 
move freely over the pulleyin either direction, 
as in an ordinary pulley-block. By shifting 
the loop B on the staple b" so that the block 
will be suspended from the bearing b, as shown 
in Fig. 2, the block will hang in an inclined 
position, and the jawse will stand in line with 
the rear portion of the chain, and the latter 
will move through the slote between the jaws, 
with its links standing in line with said slot, 
while the other links will move past the ends 85 
of the jaws when the rear portion of the chain 
is drawn down in the direction of the arrow in 
Fig. 2. . When the chain tends to move in an 
opposite direction, the links will catch against 
the underside of the jaws in the notch f, where 
by the chain is locked and the load suspended. 
Thus by shifting the block from one bearing 
to the other the locking device is placed in 
an operative position or removed out of its 
operative position, as may be desired. 
It is obvious that the two bearings in the eye 
of the loop may be entirely separated from each 
other by an intervening wall; but such a con 
struction is less convenient, because the fast 
ening-bolt or lower portion of the loop passing 
through the bearing would have to be removed 
in Order to shift the block. 
75 
9O 
95 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
318,314 
I claim as my invention 
i 
1. The combination, with a pulley-block, of 
a chain-catch secured to the casing of the block, 
and a changeable support, whereby the posi 
5 tion of the block can be changed to place the 
catch in an operative or inoperative position 
at desire, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the pulley-casing, 
of a Supporting-loop, B, provided with two 
3. The combination, with the pulley-casing 
provided with depending rear portions, a?, of 
a catch, E, attached to said rear portions, and 
a loop, B, provided with two bearings, b' b, 
IO bearings, bb, substantially as set forth. 
I5 substantially as set forth. 
 
5. The combination, with the casing of a pull- 20 
4. The combination, with the pulley-casing, 
of a chain-catch composed of a cross-piece, E, 
provided with jaws e e, having notches f on 
their under sides, substantially as set forth. 
ley-block and its pulley or sheave, of a chain 
catch adjustably secured to the casing, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
Witness my hand this 25th day of February, 
1885. 
MIERERILL R. SKINNER. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. J. BONNER, 
C. F. GEYER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318414.txt	(No Model.) 
- J. A. BURR, 
No. 318,414. 
 
SHUTTER FASTENER, 
Patented May 19, 1885. 
WITNESSES 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. BURR, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SHUTTER - FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 318,414, dated May 19, 1885. 
Application fied June 27, 1884. 
(No model.) 
IO 
5 parts in the several figures. 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN A. BURR, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, a citi 
Zen of the United States, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Shutter-Fasteners; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying sheet 
of drawings, forming part of this specification. 
This invention is in the nature of an im 
provement in shutter-fasteners; and the inven 
tion consists in a shutter-fastener constructed 
to be operated from the outside of the shutter 
by a stream of water in the manner herein 
after shown, described, and claimed. 
In the accompanying sheet of drawings, 
Figure 1 is a front elevation with shutters 
closed; Fig. 2, a front elevation with shutters 
open; Fig. 3, a vertical section of window 
Casing showing position of spring; Fig. 4, sec 
tion showing in full and dotted lines locked 
and unlocked position of the latch; Fig. 5, 
plan of under side of cup device. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
As a protection against fire it is customary 
to provide the windows, and sometimes the 
doors, of warehouses and other large buildings 
with iron shutters, usually consisting of two 
leaves of sheet-iron fastened on their inner 
Sides to a metal cross-bar, so that no means 
of opening the shutters is presented from the 
outside; therefore, in the event of fire within 
the building valuable time is lost in prying 
and cutting open these iron shutters by the 
firemen, who, under such circumstances, work 
at a great disadvantage from ladders. The 
time consumed in effecting an entrance in this 
way often works irreparable injury. To pre 
Vent this loss, and at the same time to afford 
a prompt and easy means of opening the shut 
ters in case of fire, various means have been 
devised, and in line with my invention the 
shutter-latch has had a plate applied, against 
which a stream of water is to be directed from 
outside the building to open the shutters, 
springs being employed to throw them open 
when the latch is released. 
In my form of this invention I construct 
my shutters with the ordinary two leaves, A 
and B, of sheet-iron, and the window-casing 
with the usual metal cross-bar, C. To the 
lower part of this casing, or in some other con 
venient manner, are fixed two springs, D. 
These springs may be spiral or of any other 
suitable form. The leaf B of the shutter is in 
every respect the same as is any ordinary 
shutter-leaf, and is held fast in its closed posi 
tion by the leaf A, which overlaps its front 
edge, a, precisely as in all shutters of this char 
aCtel'. 
To the leaf A, in any suitable manner, is 
pivoted a latch, E. This latch passes through 
the leaf A, and its inner end is provided with 
the ordinary catch, b. Its other end, how 
ever, consists of a cup-shaped or concavo-con 
vex plate, F, with the concave side under 
most. This device is so pivoted to the leaf A 
as to permit the catch b to engage with the 
under side of the cross-bar c of the Windows, 
in which position it is held by the gravity of 
the plate F, so that when the leaf B is closed 
and the leaf A overlaps its front edge, as be 
fore stated, and the catch b is engaged with 
the bar c, the shutters are tightly secured in 
their closed position, and ordinarily they can 
not be opened, except by employing force for 
that purpose. By my invention, however, a 
fireman has only to direct the stream of Water 
from his play-pipe against the under side of 
the plate F, when the catch b is instantly 
disengaged from the bar c, and the springs D, 
being at liberty to exert their resilient power, 
force open the shutters at once, giving in 
gress to the burning building without further 
trouble or effort. 
To prevent the shutters from being opened 
by dishonest or mischievous persons, it is 
designed to place the latches in positions 
where they cannot be readily reached by the 
hand or cane from the street level. The 
shutters are opened from the inside of the 
building in the ordinary manner. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination, with the shutters A B, 
springs D, and bar C, of the latch E, having 
the hook b to engage the bar C to lock it, 
and the inverted concavo-convex plate F to 
hold said hook in engagement with the bar 
by its gravity, and to afford means against 
which to direct a stream of water to release 
the latch to open the shutters in case of fire, 
all substantially as shown and described. 
JOHN A. BURR. 
In presence of - 
WILLIAM. P. BURR, 
BERNARD REILLY, Jr. 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOC 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318514.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. SEELY. 
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE. 
No. 318,514, 
SZ 
S/. 
 
Patented May 26, 1885. 
A. 
6 
A. 
 
SEF 
2 y tifyi 
y 
f 
1SN II 
9. 
y (-ts 20 
3 A. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. SEELY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 318,514, dated May 26, 1885. 
Application filed October 6, 1884. (No model.) 
- 
IO. 
fication. 
To all Luhon it in aly c072677): 
Be known that I, JOHN A. SEELY, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, a citizen 
of the United States of America, have made 
5 a new and useful Improvement in Telephone 
Exchanges, of which the following is a speci 
At a central office of a telephone-exchange 
many operators are employed, each of whom 
is entrusted to attend to the calls of a certain 
number of subscribers, while all of said ope 
rators are under the immediate supervision of 
a manager who is provided with means where 
by he may communicate with and call all of 
the operators, and may connect his telephone 
in any subscribers wire with which an op 
erator may be in connection. 
I am aware that it is not new to provide an 
exchange with a series of operators tables, 
to each of which tables a part of the lines cen 
tering into the exchange are connected, to 
gether with a manager's table which is capa 
ble of being connected with all of the opera 
tors tables; nor is it broadly new to loop a 
5 manager's telephone into an operator's line at 
the manager's table. Each operator's table is 
provided with what is commonly known as an 
operator's line, which extends from the earth 
at the operator's table, through a receiving and 
transmitting telephone, to the manager's table, 
there passing through a Spring-jack or other 
suitable switch, by which the manager can 
loop his telephone into said line; and from 
the manager's table the operator's line extends 
back to the operators table, where it termi 
nates in the switch-block, which forms a nor 
mally-insulated terminal therefor. A second 
conductor, which Iterm the manager's line, 
extends from each operator's table to the man 
ager's table, and is provided at each end with 
a spring-jack and annunciator, thus enabling 
an operator, by connecting his line with the 
manager's line, to signal the manager, or the 
manager, by connecting a battery to his line, 
to call the operator. The manager's table is 
45 provided with a telephone in an electrical con 
ductor terminating in a switch-plug, whereby 
the manager may loop his telephone directly 
into an operator's line by means of the spring 
5o jack in said line which is at the manager's ta 
ble. The manager's table is also provided with 
an additional loop branch terminating in two 
3O 
35 
6) 
55 
switch-plugs, one of which normally connects 
with earth, whereby the manager may con 
nect any two managers' lines together, or any 
one manager's line to earth. The manager's 
table is provided with a signaling-battery and 
two keys, whereby the manager may signal 
either of two operators who are connected by 
managers' lines, and each operator has a key 
and battery for signaling the manager over 
the operator's and manager's lines when con 
nected, or for signaling a subscriber over 
the operators and subscriber's lines when 
joined. 
I will now describe my invention by refer 
ence to the accompanying drawing. 
OT is one of a series of operators' tables, to 
which a series of subscribers' lines, SL, are con 
nected, said lines being joined to earth through 
Spring jacks having upper plates, 2 N, thence 
through Ordinary drop-annunciators, and to G. 
Each operator's table is also provided with a 
telephonic transmitter and receiver placed in 
a wire, hereinafter referred to as the operator's 75 
line, one end of which is connected to earth at 
4 G, while its other end terminates in a con 
necting-Cord, MI, and a plug having conduct 
ing part N. When a call is received over a 
subscriber's line at the operator's table, the So 
operator inserts his switch-plug in the spring 
jack of the calling-line, with conducting part 
N of the plug in contact with 2 N of the 
spring-jack, thus removing the annunciator 
and normal ground - connection of the sub 
scriber's wire and completing the subscribers 
circuit from the spring-jack through the oper 
ator's line, including cord M, post O, wire 5, 
spring-jack fg', hereina?ter described as the 
listening spring-jack, Wire 4, key K, its back 
contact 20, wire 3, receiving-telephone D, wire 
2, secondary of induction-coil I of the trans 
mitting-telephone C, and thence to earth E 
by wire 1. With the plug of the cord-switch 
inserted as just described, the operator may 
converse with the Subscriber, or if connection 
with the subscriber's line be made without a 
call from the subscriber, to attract the atten 
tion of the subscriber the operator will de 
press his key K upon contact 21, thus closing 
the subscriber's line to earth 4 G through bat. 
tery B, thereby actuating the subscriber's an 
nunciator-drop. 
In addition to the connecting of the oper 
85 
95 
OO 
 
2 
W 
318,514 
5 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ator's apparatus to a subscriber's line by cord 
switch M, said cord-switch may be used to 
connect the operator's line with the manager 
by inserting the part N of the plug into con 
tact with N of the spring-jack of the mana 
ger's line-that is a line, H, extending from the 
manager's table to each operator's table. By 
means of the insulating part of the plug the 
earth-Connection E1 and annunciator A are 
removed from the manager's line H, and a cir 
cuit is completed from 3 E of the manager's 
desk through wire 8, annunciator-drop 2A, 
wire 7, spring-jack 2 y, wire 6 N N M, and 
thence over the operator's line to earth E. It 
will be seen that the operator may now call 
the manager by depressing his own key K and 
dropping the manager's annunciator 2A, and 
that upon the manager connecting his tele 
phone with spring-jack 2 of the operator can, 
upon raising switch W, to bring strips c b in 
to contact with 1 a. and 2 a, converse with the 
manager through his own telephone. By 
means of annunciator 1A on the manager's 
line the manager is enabled to call the oper 
at Or. 
MIT is the manager's table. To comply 
with the requirements of the system, the man 
ager should be able first to call the operator; 
and to this end the manager has a local battery 
which he can connect to the manager's line H 
to operate annunciator 1. A; Second, the man 
ager should be able to converse with the oper 
ator both when the operator is connected to a 
subscribers wire and when he is not. At the 
left side of the manager's table is an ordinary 
telephone-set, R being the receiver and T the 
transmitter. The induction - coil and local 
therefor of the transmitter are not shown. 
two keys, in and l, normally rest at back con 
tact, which keys are respectively connected by 
wires j and k with conducting bars or pieces 
2 a. and 1 a. Bar 2 cl is connected by wire e 
with conducting-strip f of a cord switch-plug, 
and 1 a by wire h with conducting-strip g of 
the same plug. With the circuit-connections 
as just described, if the cord switch-plug be 
inserted into its spring-jack with fin contact 
with f' and g in contact with g, it will be seen 
that the manager's telephone is inserted or 
looped directly into a subscribers line leading 
through the telephone of the operator, it being 
assumed, however, that cord-switch Mhas al 
ready connected the operator to a subscriber's 
line, and that the normal earth of said line has 
been broken. Spring-jackf'g'', I designate as 
a listening spring-jack, from the fact that by it 
the manager can loop his telephone-set into a 
subscribers circuit connecting with an opera 
tor. The earth 3 G is connected to the mid 
dle of battery L. B, and said battery, by de 
pressing key m, may be employed to operate 
an annunciator-drop at the Subscriber's sta 
tion when the plug if g is inserted in the list 
ening-jackfg', as above described, and keyl 
may be employed to operate a drop at the op 
erator's table when the listening-plug is re I telephone, is as follows: 
moved; but in this case plug of must be in 
serted in spring-jack 2 y', and the switch W, 
pivoted at it, must be depressed by turning 
cam-bar t until conducting-strip b comes in 
contact with 2 a. and conducting-strip cin Con 
tact with 1 a. When thus arranged, it will be 
seen that normally there is a circuit estab 
lished from earth 2G, through 22, corde, post 
ac, wire 14, conducting-strip b, bar 2 a, wire f' 
mfTR p 1, wirek, bar 1 a, strip c, wire 13, post 
w, cord y if 2 y, line H to annunciator I A and 
earth E. Upon depressing key t against stop 
o a circuit will be established from 3 G to bat 
tery L. B o 1, wire k 1 a, c, wire 13, post v, 
cord y if 2 y, and thence over manager's cir 
cuit H to the operatol's annunciator 1A. To 
call the operator, therefore, plug of being in 
Serted in spring jack f', the manager has only 
to depress lever W until strips b c come in con 
tact with 2 a. and 1 a, and to then depress key l. 
In the same manner it will be seen that by de 
pressing switch W and key in a second opera 
tor may be called, but as a condition precedent 
thereto plug 2Z must be removed from its sup 
port and be placed in the spring-jack of a mana 
ger's line (not shown) leading to the second op 
erator's board. If it is desired to place two op 
erators' switch-boards in communication, plug 
y is placed in spring jack 2 y, and plug 2 Z is 
placed in the spring-jack of the manager's 
line (not shown) leading to the second opera 
tors switch-board, thus completing a circuit, 
as follows: From E over line FI2 y ify, wire 
11, annunciator 3 A, wire 12, stationary back 
Stop r, strip b, Wire 14, cord 2, plug 28, a Spring 
jack in the manager's line (not shown) lead 
ing to the second operator's board, and thence 
Over the managers line running to the annun 
With 
the two operator-boards thus connected, if it 
is desired by the manager to call the second 
operator by the annunciator on the manager's 
line leading to the second operators table, 
lever W is depressed until strip b comes in 
contact with 2 a. Key n is then depressed 
against stop , thus connecting the annuncia 
tor of the Second. Operator with battery I, B, 
through key n, bar 2 a., strip b, wire 14, plug 
22, and thence through the manager's line to 
the second operator's annunciator. Annun 
ciator 3A is employed only when two opera 
tor-boards are connected to apprise the mana 
ger when to disconnect said circuit by remov 
ing plugs y and 22 from their spring-jacks in 
the managers' lines. The manager is thus in 
formed by the operator, say at O T, who, by 
the depression of his key Ic against stop 21, 
sends a current from battery B through an 
nunciator 3 A. With the arrangement here 
shown, and while two operators are connect 
ed, it will be seen that the manager's tele 
phone may be connected in said circuit by in 
Serting plug fg in spring-jack fg', thereby 
enabling the manager to listen to the conver 
sation between the operators, and to speak to 
them. This circuit, including the manager's 
Earth E, operator's 
if and p are two set-screws, against which iciator of said second operator-board. 
75 
gO 
95 
IOC 
IO 
II5 
I25 
I 30 
 
318,514 
IO 
I5 p. 
telephone, wire 4, f f, wire e, 2 ct, wire i, R. 
T, wire k 1 a, wire h g (, plug N, line H2 y 
gy', wire 11, annunciator 3A. Wire 12 r, strip b, 
Wire 14, and plug 23, and the manager's line to 
the second board corresponding with mana 
ger's line H. Each operator's board is pro 
vided with a line, H, and an open branch 
circuit, including a telephone-set and a listen 
ing Spring-jack, as here shown. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a telephone-exchange, an operator's 
line for each operator's table, including a 
Spring-jack for looping in the manager's tele 
hone a managers line for each operator's 
table, and plugs and Spring-jacks for joining 
any two managers' lines together through the 
manager's table, and a looping apparatus for 
joining the manager's apparatus in an opera 
tor's line. 
2. In a telephone-exchange, the combination 
of an operator's and a manager's line at each 
operator's table, a manager's telephone and 
signaling devices, switching devices for loop 
ing two manager-lines together through the 
manager's table, and Switching devices for 
looping the manager's table into an operator's 
line. 
3. In a telephone-exchange, the combination 
of an operator's table at which a part of the 
subscribers wires terminate, an operator's 
line, including a spring-jack for looping a con 
ductor therein, a manager's table, a manager's 
line for each operator's table of the exchange, 
a manager's telephone adapted to be looped 
into the operators line, a battery at the 
manager's table, a Switch at said table, two 
switch-plugs for connecting with managers' 
lines, and two signaling-keys, Substantially as 
described. 
4. In a telephone-exchange, the combination 
of an operator's line having a telephone and 
a spring-jack for connecting a loop-wire there 
in, and a series of subscribers wires each hav 
ing an earth-connection at the switch-board, 
and respective spring-jacks, whereby the op 
erators ?ine may be connected to any one of 
the subscribers' lines terminating at the op 
erator's table, and the earth-connection of the 
subscribers' lines may at the same time be 
broken. 
25 
30 
35 
45 
5. In a telephone-exclhange, the combination 
of an operator's line whose ends are respect 
ively connected to earth and to a switch-plug 
embracing a telephone and a spring-jack, a 
battery at the operator's table, and a key for 
connecting said battery to the operator's line, 
an independent manager's line extending from 
the operator's table to the manager's table, 
having a spring-jack and annunciator at each 
end, a loop conductor embracing an annunci 
ator terminating in two switch-plugs for con 
necting two operators tables together through 
the manager's table, a battery, a Switch, W, 
and two keys for signaling from the manager's 
table to either operator when connected to 
gether, and a loop-circuit embracing the mana 
ger's telephone which may be inserted into an 
operator's line. 
6. In a telephone-exchange at a manager's 
table, the combination of a loop branch, in 
cluding annunciator 3A, which terminates in 
switch-plugsy' and 22, earth-connection 2 G, 
switch W, substantially as described, battery 
LB, and earth-connection 3 G, keys land n, 
and a loop conductor embracing the mana 
ger's telephone RT and terminating in switch 
plug fg. 
7. In a telephone-exchange, the combination 
of a series of managers' lines, H, extending to 
the operator-tables, each line having a spring 
jack and annunciator at both ends, a loop 
conductor embracing annunciator 3 A, and 
terminating in switch-plugsy' and 22 for con 
necting any two of the lines H, and an earth 
connection, 2 G, for connecting any one of 
the managers' lines to earth through annun 
ciator 3 A. 
S. In a telephone-exchange, the combination 
of a manager's line to enable the manager 
and operator to signal each other when at 
their respective tables, an operator's line ex 
tending from the operator's table by way of 
the manager's table to the switch-board, and 
switching devices for looping the manager's 
telephone into the operator's line. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
JOHN A. SEELY. 
Witnesses: 
WM. ARNOUX, 
A. A. WATTERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318614.txt	(No Model.) 
F. P. GUIGON, 
TAG ATTACHING DEWICE, 
No. 318,614. 
 
Patented May 26, 1885. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK PIERRE GUIGON, OF FRANKLIN, MASSACHUSETTS. 
TAG - ATTACHING DEW CE 
S3?ECIFICATION forming part of Fetters Fatent No. 318,614, dated May 26, 1885. 
Application filed February 14, 1885. (No mode.) 
pose of more readily hanging it upon any con 
venient nail or hook, and it may be employed 
for holding a large number of tags. In Figs. 
1 and 2 a tag, T, is shown in place upon the 
hanger. 
Tags can be hung upon or detached from 
the hanger by disengaging the hook C from 
the eye D and passing the hook C through the 
eyelet in the tag. Tags can be placed upon or 
removed from the file in the same way. 
At C, Fig. 1, the hooking of the hanger is 
shown to be made more secure by the hook 
C being partially closed by pressure, as with 
the finger and thumb. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
An improved tag-attaching device consist 
ing of a wire bent to form an eye, E, a straight 
portion, A, an eye, D, and a loop, B, termi 
luating in a free end hook, C, adapted to in 
terlock with the eye D, all substantially as 
Set forth. 
FRANK PIERRE GUIGON. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
JAMES M. FREEMAN, 
ALBIN R. BLAKE. 
5 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANKPIERREGUIGON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing. at 
Franklin, in the county of Norfolk, in the 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and improved tag-attaching or suspending de 
Vice for attaching memorandum-tags to bodies 
and running-gears of carriages or other arti 
cles while in process of painting or at 
other times; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full and exact description there 
of, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the entire hanger 
with tag attached. Fig. 2 is a front view of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a side view of the hanger 
open for the insertion of the tag. Fig. 4 is a 
front view of the hanger. Fig. 5 is a side 
view of the same. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
The straight end A, the large loop B, the 
hook C, and the eye D constitute the whole 
hanger. The addition of an eye, E, bent on 
the straight end A of the hanger, is for the pur. 
out the Several views. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318714.txt	(No Model.) C. A. FLETCHER & W. H. WILDER. 
No. 318,714. 
WICK ADJUSTER, 
Patented May 26, 1885. 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
W 
S 
2 
i. 
WITNESSES: 
 
INVENTOR: 
-6 (c. 22%-4, 
% 42. -d 
B 
 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, , C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. FLETCHER AND WILLIAM. H. WILDER, OF GARDNER, MASS., 
ASSIGNORS TO THE AMERICAN OIL STOVE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
wick-ADJUSTER. 
PECIFICATIOE forgining part of Betters Patent No. 318, 7.4, dated May 26, 1885. 
Application filed December 22, 1854. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
15 
2 
25 
35 
45 
To all whon, it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that we, CHARLES A. FLETCH 
ER and WILLIAMI H. WILDER, buth of Gard 
ner, in the county of Worcester and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Wick Raisers or Ad 
justers, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
This invention is more particularly designed 
as a wick raiser or adjuster for oil-stoves in 
which flat Wicks of considerable width are 
used; and it relates to that description of Wick 
raisers in which duplicate toothed rotating 
wick raisers or spindles, arranged for opera 
tion on opposite sides of the Wick and geared 
together to operate in unison, are used, and 
more particularly to that construction of such 
wick-raisers in which the wick-raising surfaces 
are grooved longitudinally and otherwise to 
form the teeth which bite or hold on the wick. 
In such wick-raisers the duplicate toothed 
wick-raising spindles or devices have been so 
constructed, pitched, and geared that they 
press upon the wick at directly opposite points, 
and where the Same extend across the whole 
width of the wick bear upon both sides of the 
Wick at opposite points throughout its width, 
thus firmly grasping or pressing the wick in 
between them. This rigid hold of the wick 
restricts the flow of oil up the wick, and con 
sequently interferes with the proper burning 
of the Stove or lamp. 
Our invention consists in a novel construc 
tion and arrangement of the duplicate wick 
raisers, whereby this defect is avoided and 
other advantages are obtained, substantially 
as hereinafter fully described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure represents a partly broken plan in 
part of the oil-reservoir of an oil stove or 
lamp with wick-tube attached and having our 
invention applied. Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
tion of the same on the line a a in Fig. 1. 
Aindicates the oil-reservoir, and B the wick 
tube, up and down through which the flat wick 
C is adjusted by means of duplicate toothed 
Spindles D D', arranged to act upon opposite 
Sides of the wick in the wick-tube or else 
where, and shown as extending wholly across 
the wick. These spindles are geared together 
to rotate in unison, as by gears c 0. They may 
be made either of cast or milled metal, and 
the One, D, of them has its shank d made in 
One piece with its toothed portion and extend 
ed through and outside of the reservoir, for op 
eration by an attached button, e. The body 
or Wick-raising portion of each spindle D D 
is formed with a series of longitudinal grooves, 
f, in it and cross-grooves (, intersecting the 
longitudinal Ones, thereby bearing or produc 
ing teeth h. Thus grooved the spindles are so 
geared together that the teeth h of either spin 
dle alternate with the longitudinal grooves f 
of the other spindle; or, in other words, the 
teeth of each spindle alternate with the con 
cave spaces between the teethin the other spin 
dle, and the cross-grooves g are also prefera 
bly SO pitched that said grooves in the one 
Spindle are intermediate of those in the other 
Spindle. By this arrangement of the teeth of 
the two geared spindles, especially of the teeth 
in either One spindle alternately with the lon 
gitudinal grooves in the other, a positive ac 
tion of the teeth at short distance apart on 
both or opposite sides of the wick is obtained 
Without pressing or squeezing the wick at op 
posite points in between the spindles, thus al 
lowing of a full or free flow of oil up the wick, 
alnd insuring an even and continuous action 
throughout the full width of the wick. This 
is directly the reverse of grasping the wick 
upon opposite sides across its whole width at 
Opposite points, which necessarily checks the 
free flow of the oil, whereas by our improve 
ment We So engage the Wick that at no time 
during its passage between the spindles will 
it be compressed, and that at all times the 
flow of oil will be equal, and to the full capa 
city of the Wick, each pair of teeth on the one 
spindle bearing on One side of the wick for or 
as against One intermediate tooth on the other 
spindle, and Said bearing-points alternately 
from One side of the wick to the other as the 
raising spindles are turned, the flexibility of 
the Wick being largely depended upon for the 
necessary pressure upon the bearing-surfaces, 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
318,714 
and whereby a positive motion without ob 
structing the flow of the oil through the wick 
is obtained. Furthermore, by our arrange 
ment of the wick-raising teeth, as described, 
a wavy or tortuous motion is given to the 
Wick in its passage between the spindles, 
whereby we are enabled to force the wick 
through a longer and closer wick-tube, and 
any slight obstruction will be more readily 
passed or removed than is practicable with a 
direct or straight passage of the wick between 
the raising devices. 
- 
We are aware that cylinders for raising 
lamp-wicks have been provided with serrated 
ribs extending entirely around the same, form 
ing grooves between said ribs, and we there 
fore do not claim such invention. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The longitudinally-grooved wick-raising 
spindles geared for operation in unison, as de 
scribed, so that each longitudinal rib on either 
spindle will register with alongitudinal groove 
in the other spindle, substantially as described. 
2. The longitudinally and transversely 
grooved wick-raising toothed spindles geared 
for operation in unison, as described, so that 
each longitudinal row of teeth on either spin 
dle will register with a longitudinal groove in 
the other spindle, substantially as described. 
3. In duplicate wick-raising spindles ar 
ranged for operation on reverse sides of the 
wick, and geared together for action in unison, 
and in which the wick-raising teeth are formed 
by longitudinal and transverse grooves in said 
spindles, the geared spindles D D', having 
their longitudinal grooves f and transverse 
grooves g forming teeth h, arranged to alter 
nate with one another both longitudinally and 4O 
transversely throughout the two spindles, Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
35 
CHARLES A, FLETCHER. 
WILLIAM. H. WILDER. 
Witnesses: 
THATCHER B. DUNN, 
JULIAN P. DUNN. 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318814.txt	(No Model.) 
TACKLE FOR WORKING SHIPS' CLEANING APPARATUS, 
A. D. SPIER, 
No. 318,814. 
Patented May 26, 1885, 
 
 
 
s 
  
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. D. SPIER, OF GLASGOW, COUNTY OF LAN ARK, SCOTLAND, 
ASSIGNOR OF TWO-TENTHS TO ARCHIBALD SCOTT BROWN, OF SAME 
PLACE, AND DAVID HUNTER, OF TROON, SCOTLAND. 
TACKLE FOR WORKING SHIPS CLEAN ING APPARA U.S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 318,814, dated May 26, 1885. 
Application filed July 1, 1884. (No model.) Patented in England March 31, 1884, No. 5,717; in France August 9, 1884, No. 163,705; 
in Germany August 9, 1884, No. 31,491; in Belgium IDecember 30, 1884, No. 67,376, and in Spain January 2, 1885, No. 4,724. 
O 
To call ution, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALEXANDERIDONALDSON 
SPIER, a citizen of the United Kingdom of 
Great Britain and Ireland, residing at Glas 
5 gow, in the county of Lanark, Scotland, have 
invented new and useful improvements in 
tackle for working apparatus for cleaning, 
scrubbing, painting, and coating the Sub 
merged parts of ships or vessels afloat, (for 
which I have obtained Letters Patent of Great 
Britain bearing date March 31, 1884, and 
numbered 5,717;) and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, which will en 
I5 able others skilled in the manufacture or 
art to which it relates to make and use the 
Sale, 
This invention has for its object improve 
ments in tackle employed in Working appara 
tus for cleaning or scrubbing, painting, and 
coating the sides and bottoms of ships or ves 
sels afloat, and of the class which is moved 
over the skin of the ship in an approximately 
vertical direction from the keel toward the 
The apparatus constituting the invention 
consists of a shoe, hook, or clamp removably 
placed on the cut-water of the ship or vessel 
and capable of being raised and lowered in 
3o position. To the rearward part of each side 
of the said shoe, hook, or clamp a shackle or 
ring or shackles or rings is or are connected, 
and to one of these shackles or rings, or to 
both of them, a block is secured by its forward 
end. To a shackle or ring in the rear end of 
the said block a line is attached, the opposite 
end of the line being made fast at any desired 
position on the deck or other part of the 
ship. A corresponding line is connected di 
rect to the shackle or ring at the other side 
of the shoe, hook, or clamp, the said line 
being carried up the other side of the ship 
and similarly made fast on the deck or other 
part of the ship. By these two lines the shoe, 
hook, or clamp is held in position on the cut 
water. 
25 deck, and vice versa. 
45 
50 
75 
s 
55 
65 
The cleaning or scrubbing or the painting 
Or coating apparatus is connected to one end 
of a line or rope-preferably a wire rope-and 
the said rope is rove through the block above 
mentioned and carried to the deck or other 
part of the ship, where it is so secured as to 
be capable of being hauled in and paid out, 
as desired. At intervals apart on the said 
rope a Series of bobbins, rollers, or knobs are 
placed loosely, but retained at proper dis 
tances apart by collars, disks, or washers, and 
enlargements on the rope. These bobbins, 
rollers, or knobs bear on the ship's side, and 
While tending to reduce friction they also keep 
the rope from cha?ing on and scraping the 
paint from or otherwise damaging the skin of 
the ship. 
On the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a side elevation of the improved tackle. Fig. 
2 is a plan thereof. Fig. 3 shows the applica 
tion of the tackle to a cleaning or scrubbing 
or painting or coating apparatus operating on 
the side of a ship or vessel. Figs. 4 and 5 are 
details, hereinafter more particularly referred 
to. 
The shoe, hook, or clamp, which embraces 
the cut-water, is marked A, and as seen more 
particularly at Fig. 2 the sides of it are, at 
their rearward parts, preferably curved out 
ward to facilitate adjustment and to keep the 
other parts of the tackle out from the junction 
of the cut-water with the bow of the ship. 
At its front end the shoe, hook, or clamp has 
or may have an eye, B, formed on it and a 8o 
line, C, connected thereto for the purpose of 
guiding the shoe in raising and lowering it to 
the desired position, and the interior front 
part of the shoe bearing on the front of the 
cut-water is or may be serrated, as indicated 85 
at a, Fig. 1, or it may be formed flat or plain 
or have one or a series of rollers, as indicated 
at it, Fig. 4. 
At each of the curved rearward ends of the 
shoe, hook, or clamp A, an eye, E, is formed, go 
and through the said eyes shackles D D' are 
passed, as shown. 
318,814 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To the shackle D a sheaf or pulley-block, 
F, is connected by an eye, , and to another 
eye, u, at the rearward end of the block a 
line, G, is secured. This line, as seen more 
particularly on Fig. 3, passes to the deck or 
other part of the ship, where it may be made 
fast in any desired manner and position. 
To the shackle D'' (which on Fig. 1 is turned 
up slightly out of position for greater clear 
ness in the reference) another line, H, is at 
tached, the said line passing, as indicated by 
the dotted line H, Fig. 3, up the other side 
of the ship to the deck or other point, where 
it is also made fast in any desired manner and 
position. By these two lines G. H. the shoe, 
hook, or clamp A is held on the cut-water, 
and by paying them out or hauling them in 
its position on the cut-water is adjusted. In 
stead of connecting the said lines G H to an 
eye at the middle of the rear end at each side 
of the shoe, as shown, the shoe may be con 
structed with two eyes at each side, as illus 
trated at Fig. 4, in which case the line G is 
connected to the upper eye, t, at one side of 
the shoe and the line H to the corresponding 
eye at the opposite side, the block F being in 
that case connected to the lower eye, t. It is, 
however, preferred to make the connections, 
as indicated at Fig. 1, in order to obviate any 
possibility of fouling the lines G. H. with the 
rope to which the cleaning, painting, or coat 
ing apparatus is secured. 
In the block F a sheaf or pulley, I, is car 
ried, on which runs the rope J of the clean 
ing or painting apparatus. This rope, which, 
as before explained, is preferably an iron or 
steel wire rope, has at intervals throughout 
its length a series of bobbins, rollers, or knobs, 
K, these being loose on the rope and held at 
the proper distances apart by disks or col 
lars s, which are also loose, but maintained 
in position by winding a strand, r, of wire, 
cord, or equivalent materials behind them 
on the rope, or they may be so maintained 
by other suitable means. The bobbins, roll 
ers, or knobs K in working with the tackle 
bear on the skin of the ship, so lessening fric 
tion, while at the same time they keep the 
rope J from chafing, thereby also preserving 
the rope and the paint or composition on the 
ship. 
To allow the bobbins to pass through the 
block F without unduly increasing its size, 
the sheaf I is centered toward the rear end 
of the block, as shown. This sheaf may either 
be a simple flanged pulley, or it may be made 
as indicated at Fig. 5, or in other desired 
le. 
To keep the block itself from chafing on 
the side of the ship, it is furnished with 
leather, india-rubber, canvas, or other soft 
pads p, which can be removed as they be 
COei WOl. 
In working with the tackle one block F 
only may be used, in which case one clean 
ing or painting apparatus only can be op 
erated, and therefore to render the position 
of the block easily interchangeable from one 
side of the ship 
to the other, the shackles D 
D' are each made with a removable pin, O. 
It is, however, obvious that with a tackle 
constructed as described, a block F may be 
connected to each side of the shoe A in Order 
to enable two cleaning or painting apparatuses 
to be worked at the same time-one on each 
side of the ship. 
The operation of the tackle is as follows: 
The shoe, hook, or claimp A having been 
adjusted to the desired position on the cut 
water, the lines G H are made fast, and the 
cleaning or painting apparatus N, Fig. 3, is 
then worked through a vertical arc over a 
breadth of the skin of the ship from the 
shoe as a center with a radius equal to the 
length of rope between the shoe and the ap 
paratus N. When that breadth has been 
sufficiently operated on, a length of the rope 
J equal to the length of the actual cleaning 
or painting part of the apparatus N is paid 
out or hauled in, and the said apparatus again 
actuated as before. 
It is found in practice that with a tackle 
constructed as described, the difficulty here 
tofore experienced in working with clean 
ing or painting apparatus of the class men 
tioned-namely, the difficulty of efficiently 
operating on the turn of the bilge, the flat 
of the bottom, the part near the keel, and 
also in the run at the stern of the ship-is 
OWerCOme. 
Having now fully described the invention, 
what I desire to claim and secure by Letters 
Patent is 
1. In a tackle for the purposes set forth, a 
shoe, hook, or clamp placed on the cut-Water 
and having lines for raising and lowering it 
to position, in combination with a padded pull 
ley or sheaf block or blocks and a rope or 
ropes having bobbins, rollers, or knobs, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In tackle for the purposes set forth, a 
shoe (to fit on the cut - water) formed with 
an eye or eyes in its outwardly-curved rear 
ends and with a guide-line eye in its for 
ward bearing end, which is serrated, plain, 
or furnished with rollers, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In a tackle for the purpose set forth, a 
shoe, hook, or clamp placed upon and em 
bracing the cut - water, as described, lines 
for raising and lowering it, and a pulley 
block secured thereto, in combination with the 
implement to be manipulated, and a cable 
connected to said implement, passed through 
the block, and thence to the deck, substan 
tially in the manner and for the purpose set 
forth. 
4. In a tackle for the purpose set forth, the 
combination, with a shoe or clamp secured to 
the cut-water, the implement for cleaning the 
75 
9O 
IOO 
IO 
115 
I25 
'. 65 
 
318,84. 
3 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
sides of the ship, and means for raising and 
loweringit, of a cable connected to said imple-hand and seal this 17th day of June, 1884. 
ment and extending to the shoe or clamp on 
ALEXR. D. SPIER. L. s. 
the cut-water and thence to the deck having 
loose bobbins or rollers journaled directly on 
said cable, (which forms their axis,) substan- Fel. Inst., P.A., 135 Buchanan Street, Glasgow. 
tially in the manner and for the purpose set 
forth. 
GEO. M. CRUIKSHANK, 
HUGH DONALD FITZPATRICK, 
Clerk, 135 Buchanan Street, Glasgow. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US318914.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 318,914, 
B, KIAM, 
BED CLOTHES CLAMP, 
Patented May 26, 1885, 
- 
E E. 
WITNESSES: 
2. A 
2. 
BY 
N. Peters, Pisoto-Lithographer, Washington, d, c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
BENJAMIN KIAM, OF HOUSTON, TEXAS. 
BED - CLOTHES CAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 318,914, dated Iay 26, 1885. 
Application filed May 15, 1884. No model. 
IO 
3O 
To at thon, it n(ty concern. : 
Be it known that I, BENJAMINKIAM, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at Houston, 
in the county of Harris and State of Texas, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Bed-Clothes Holders, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description, ref 
erence being had to the annexed drawings, 
forming part of this specification. 
This invention relates to devices for hold 
ing bed-clothes over sleeping children or inva 
lids; and it consists of the construction and 
arrangement of parts hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
Figure is a side elevation of part of a side 
rail of a bedstead, showing my invention. Fig. 
2 is a section on line acac of Fig. 1, showing a 
leg and part of the head-board of a bedstead; 
and Fig. 3 is an end view of one of the clamps. 
A indicates the side rail of a bedstead, and 
B is a clamp secured thereto, consisting of a 
threaded rod, c, having an arm, b, provided 
with a bend, c, fitting over the top of the rail, 
and an internally-threaded arm, d, screwing 
on the rod at and bearing against the bottom 
of the rail. 
Instead of the bend c, which prevents the 
clamp from being moved laterally out of en 
gagement with the rail, any equivalent con 
struction adapted to secure the same result 
may be employed. The arm b is to extend to 
ward the bed, and it is provided with a perfo 
ration, e, in its end, in which is inserted an 
elastic cord, C, having attached thereto the 
clamp D. The clamp D consists of a strip of 
sheet metal made broader at the ends f than 
at the intermediate portion, g, and doubled 
upon itself and provided with a loop, h, by 
which the jaws ij are to be held together. 
The jaws are bent at right angles to the planes 
of the ends, and are adapted to overlap each 
other. The inner jaw,i, is serrated, as shown, 
to give it a firm hold upon the bed-clothes. 
The advantage of the elastic connection C, 
between the clamps B and D, is that the bed 
clothes are held yieldingly thereby, so that 
In order to adapt the rod B to take a firmer 50 
they will not uncomfortably restrain the move 
ments of the occupant of the bed in turning 
or getting out of bed. 
hold on the rail A, a washer, k, may be used 
in connection with the arm or nut d. The 
washer is formed with a flange, l, which en 
gages with the inner surface of the rail, as 
shown. 
I am aware of the fact that clamps for fast 
ening bed-clothes to the bedstead have here 
tofore been employed, and I therefore only 
claim my particular means for attaching the 
clasp to the bed-rail, which is capable of uni- 6o 
versal application and adjustability to any 
part of the bed-rail without alteration of or 
injury to the same. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a suitable clasp 6 
5 
55 
for holding the bed-clothes and its link C, of 
the means for adjustably securing it to the 
bed-rail, consisting of a rod, B, having itslow 
er end screw-threaded and provided with a 
nut, d, and washer k, and having on its up 
per end a hook - shaped projection that is 
adapted to pass over and around the upper 
edge of the bed-rail, and is provided with an 
eye at e for connection with the clamp, as 
shown and described. 
2. The combination, with a suitable clasp 
for holding the bed- clothes, and an elastic 
connection, C, of the rod B, screw-threaded 
at its lower end, and provided with a nut, d, 
and washer k, and having at its upper end a 8c 
hook-shaped projection, c, adapted to pass 
over and around the upper edge of the bed 
rail, and formed with an eye at e for the con 
nection with the clasp, as described. 
signed by me in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
The above specification of my invention 85 
BENJAMEN KAM. 
Witnesses: 
Jos. GORGANO, 
EDW. KIAM. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319014.txt	(No Model.) 
A. P. OMISTEAD 
COMBINED HASP AND BOLT, 
No. 39,014, 
Patented June 2, 1885. 
 
  
%\ z N 
% 
a 2&2 
N 
ZZ 
NZ 
 
  
 
WITNESS ASA 
32-3- Z.4%- 
44 2 
(W& 
II//E/WTOR 
(2/2 /.4% 
?/3 -4-c-ce W 42% 4/ 
ATTORNEY 
peers, photo-Lithographsr, Washington, O.C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
ALBERT P. OLMSTEAD, 
OF TROY, NEW YORK. 
COMBINED HASP AND BOLT. 
SPECIEICATOIN forming part of Letters Patent No. 319,014, dated June 2, 1885. 
Application filed Jun 
e 23, 1854. (No model.) 
55 
rod, g, that is parallel to and arranged within 
the recess R in the side of a lug, p, projected 
from the face of the hasp up into the recess R, 
that is made in the bolt. The rear end of the 
bolt-latch B is made with an outwardly-pro 
jected finger-piece, F, for pulling it out. The 
latch end of the bolt on its face nearest the 
hasp is rounded off, as indicated at m. 
The letter ddesignates a bolt-stop on the face 
of the hasp. 
As thus constructed, the bolt B is adapted to 
be drawn out against the force of the spring 
S by means of the finger-piece, and to be auto 
matically returned when the tension on the 
finger-piece is released. 
The letter Eindicates an eye or slot formed 
in the hasp at its free end at right angles to 
its sides, and D designates a staple adapted to 
be attached to the doorjamb or door by means 
of screws L on the staple-plate P'. The face 
of this staple D has two openings or eyes, O' 
and O. The lower one, O, is adapted to re 
ceive the latch end of the bolt, and the outer 
one, O', is adapted to receive a padlock when 
the hasp, by means of its eye E, is passed over 
the said staple D. 
The dotted lined designates the hasp as de 
tached from the staple D and as swung down 
! on its staple-connection at T. 
The parts thus made and arranged are used 
as follows: The hasp being attached to the 
door M at its eye end E, and the staple D be 
ing attached to the door-jamb J by means of 
screws in the staple-plate P, when the hasp is, 
by means of its eye E, passed over the said 85 
staple D and pressed in against the door, the 
bolt latches into the lower opening, O', being 
forced there by the spring S, and this fastens 
the door by the bolt-latch. When it is de 
sired to lock the door from the outside, so that go 
it cannot be opened without unlocking it, a 
padlock is inserted in and locked in the open 
ing O'. 
having thus described my invention, what I 
SC 
5 
claim, and desire to secure by letters Patent, 95 
S 
In a door or gate hasp, the combination of 
the hasp - body constructed with an eye for 
pivotal attachmentatone of its ends, and made 
with an eye or slot to receive a staple at the IOO 
O 
5 
15 
To all, w/on, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ALBERT P. OLMSTEAD, 
of the city of Troy, county of Rensselaer, 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Combined Door or 
Gate Hasp and Bolt, of which the following is 
a specification. 
- 
Myinvention relates to hasps-a class of de 
vices that are used on doors or gates to fasten 
them. These articles as usually made are con 
structed with an eye at one end, through which 
a clinching-staple is passed to secure the de 
vice to the door or door-jamb, with the other 
end made to have an elongated eye arranged 
to pass over the eye of a secured staple, so that 
a padlock or pin may be passed into the lat 
ter outside the hasp. 
Mly improvement on this class of devices con 
sists, as will be more fully detailed hereinaf. 
ter in connection with its illustration, in the 
combination, with a hasp made to be secured to 
the door or doorjamb at one end by an eye on 
the hasp, and a clinching-staple, of a spring 
bolt attached to the outside of the hasp, an 
elongated slot arranged in the free end of the 
hasp, and a staple attached to the door orjamb 
and provided with a lower eye for the bolt on 
the hasp, and an outer eye for the padlock. 
Accompanying this specification, to form a 
part of it, there is a sheet of drawings contain 
ing two figures illustrating my invention and 
improvement, with the same designation of its 
parts by letter-reference used in both of them. 
Of these illustrations, Figure 1 shows a per 
spective of a hasp containing my invention, 
and Fig. 2 shows a longitudinal section of the 
Sle. 
The several parts of the hasp and the fea 
tures containing my improvement and inven 
tion are designated by letter-reference, and 
the function of the parts is described as fol 
lows: 
The letter EI designates the hasp-body made 
with an attaching-eye, E, at one end, adapted 
to be secured to the door or doorjamb thereat 
by a staple, T. 
The letter B designates a latch-bolt, and C 
the housing for the bolt attached to the hasp. 
The bolt on the under side is recessed at R to 
5o receive a spring, S, and this spring has a guide 
 
2 
319,014 
other end, a latch-bolt and spring arranged on 
the outer face of the said hasp within a hous- May, 1884, in the presence of the two wit- IO . 
ing or side inclosurethereon, a staple adapted nesses whose names are hereto written. 
to be attached to a doorjamb and to receive 
5 the free eye end of the hasp when passed on 
over it, an upper and a lower opening in said 
staple, with the lower opening adapted to re- 
ceive said bolt-latch, as shown and described. 
Signed at Troy, New York, this 31st day of 
ALBERTP. OLMSTEAD. 
Witnesses: 
STANLEY M. HoLDEN, 
GEO. M. PAYFER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319114.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 319,114, 
J. D. OLDS. 
STEAM ENGINE WALWE GEAR. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 2, 1885. 
LHA 
 
 
: 
| H 
if 
" 
t 
47 (tes ( : 
tute 4 Aug. 
53. 
. Peters, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
Z72 vervoz. 
4, 40. 64/ 
4. %ls 
Ozo, rvey, 
(No Model.) 
J. D. OLDS. 
STEAM ENGINE WALWE GEAR. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 319,ll4, 
Patented June 2, 1885. 
 
ELER 
PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington. p.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. D., OLDS, 
STEAM ENGINE WALWE GEAR. 
4 Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
% 
N. PETERs, Phcto-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 319,ll4, 
Alig. 6. 
J. D. OLDS. 
STEAM. ENGINE WALWE GEAR. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented June 2, 1885. 
M. PEERS, Photo-Lithograpior, washington, d. c. 
 
PATENT OFFICE. 
in air UNITED STATES Dar Art -h (?hirt ri 
JOHN D. OLDS, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA. 
STEAW - ENGINE WAWE - GEAR. 
{??? C.E. CATION forming part of Letters Pate at No. 319,114, dated June 2, 1885. 
Application filed June 19, 1884. (No model.) 
To ada. Zivi?ion, it inctly concer 7 : 
Be it known that I, JoHN D. OLDs, of Fort 
Wayne, in the county of Allen and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Steam. -Engine Valve 
Gear; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing specification, taken in connection with the 
drawings furnished and forming a part of the 
same,is a clear, true, and complete description 
of the several features of my invention. 
The main object of my invention is to pro 
vide for the variable control of a steam-engine 
valve by what is sometimes termed a dyna 
mometrical' or fly-wheel' governor, in such 
a manner as will enable the governor by an 
unusually-limited movement of its weighted 
arms or equivalent centrifugal devices to im 
part to the valve a wide range of movement, 
and also to effect the closure of the steam-ports 
with great rapidity after said ports have been 
promptly opened to their maximum capacity 
for receiving steam, thus enabling an engine 
cylinder to be promptly charged with steam 
-i. e., without wire-drawing-for any prede 
termined portion of its stroke, and to then 
have the Steam promptly cut off, so that it 
may operate expansively for the remainder of 
the stroke. 
In seeking the best results a balanced slide 
valve should be relied upon, and I have de 
vised such a valve, which constitutes the sub 
ject of a separate application for Letters Pat 
ent, but which will be hereinafter sufficiently 
described for the purposes of this specifica 
tion. Although I prefer to use said balanced 
slide-valve, I do notherein limit myself there 
to, because I am well aware that balanced 
valves, otherwise constructed can be employed 
with my governing mechanism with more or 
less desirable results, and also that said mech 
anism can be relied upon for controlling any 
variety of valve which is capable of being op 
erated by means of eccentrics and a longitudi 
mally-reciprocating rod or bar, however this 
latter may be coupled to the valve. 
My governing mechanism differs from any 
others of its class known to me, in that it in 
volves the use of two independent but co-op 
erating valve - working eccentrics, which are 
loosely mounted on the crank-shaft, and are 
capable of rotative movement in opposite di 
rections, although they rotate inharmony with 
IC 
45 
the crank-shaft, except when otherwise con 
trolled by the governor, whatever its charac 
ter, and one weighted arm coupled to both 55 
eccentrics can be relied upon or two arms, each 
of which is coupled to both eccentrics, or in 
lieu of weighted arms sliding bails can be em 
ployed. Between my eccentrics and the valve 
to be worked thereby is a complex rocker arm 
or lever with which the two eccentrics are 
connected in such a manner that, although 
said eccentrics are oppositely set on the en 
gine crank-shaft, they operate harmoniously in 
imparting to one valve-rod more rapid recip- 65 
rocating movements than have, as I believe, 
heretofore been obtained by the use of eccen 
trics, and this portion of my invention is of 
value, independently of a fly-wheel governor, 
in which case the two eccentrics are capable 7o 
of no rotative movement independently of the 
crank-shaft. 
My improvements are applicable to engines 
of various styles and for general service, al 
though I have devised and organized them 
with special reference to high-speed engines 
with a view to obtaining steadiness in opera 
tion and economy in the use of steam. 
After fully describing the mechanism illus 
trated, the several features deemed novel will 
be specified in the several clauses of claim 
hereunto annexed. 
Referring to the four sheets of drawings, 
Figure 1, Sheet 1 is a pian view of an engine 
embodying my improvements. Fig. 2, Sheet 
2, is a partial side elevation and vertical sec 
tion of said engine, with its fly-wheel shown 
in dotted lines for the better illustration of the 
governing mechanism, the cross-head, slide, 
and piston-rod being omitted for more clearly 
showing my improvements. Fig. 3, Sheet 3, 
is a diametrical section of the fly-wheel and 
the portions of the valve-governing mechan 
ism which are mounted upon it and the crank 
shaft. Fig. 4, Sheet 3, is a longitudinal hori 
Zontal section of the steam-chest and its valve. 
Fig. 5, Sheet 3, in two enlarged views illus. 
trates a complex rocking-lever which is coupled 
to the slide-valve and to the two eccentrics. 
Figs. 6 and 7 are separate side views of fly- Ioo 
wheels embodying certain portions of my gov 
ering mechanism in two different forms. 
The cylinder A, its piston, piston-rod, cross 
head, pitman, crank or crank-disk, and crank 
95 
7 5 
319,114. 
3. 
15 
25 
desired. 
- 
shaft B are all substantially as heretofore. 
The fly-wheel C is also as usual, with the ex 
ception of such details in construction as are 
necessarily incident to mounting thereon a 
portion of the governing nechanism. 
The steam-chest D contains a sliding box 
valve, a, and a balance-plate piston, b, fitted 
to a cylinder, c, in the cover of the chest, and 
provided with adjusting or depressing screws 
; o' and lifting-screws c, and also with a bull 
ring, Springs, and ring-packing, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 4. 
This balanced valve embodies certain novel 
features which constitute the subject of a sep 
arate application for Letters Patent. The most 
important matter to be considered in this con 
nection is the fact that said cylinder c is suffi 
ciently large to include within its sectional 
area the entireportion of the valve-seat which 
is occupied by the induction and the exhaust 
ports, which, in connection with the fact that 
said balance-plate piston is positively sup 
ported by its lifting-screws, enables the valve 
to be very easily operated and very readily 
controlled by a governor coupled to the recip 
rocating valve-rod d. 
It is to be understood 
that, although I have thus described said valve 
and propose to herein make claim to a bal 
anced valve in certain combinations, I do not 
intend to thereby limit myself to this par 
ticular valve, but mean to include as within 
said portions of my invention any of the well 
known balanced reciprocating valves, whether 
of the box, or the D, or the piston, or the 
oscillating Varieties, provided they are ca 
pable of being operated by eccentrics and a re 
ciprocating valve-rod, organized substantially 
as hereinafter described. 
As an essential element between the crank. 
shaft B and the jointed valve-rod d, I employ 
the complex rocker arm or lever E, which is 
pivoted at its base to the bed-plate of the en 
gine, so as to be capable of rocking in a ver 
tical plane toward and away from the steam 
chest, and at a suitable point below its upper 
end it is provided with a lateral tubular bear. 
ing for receiving the rock-shaft of an auxil 
iary rocking lever, e, to the upper end of which 
the outer end of the valve-rod d is coupled by 
5c means of a pin and strap-bearings in a manner 
well known. 
Upon the crank-shaft B there are two eccen 
trics, F and G, which will be first described, 
independently of the governing mechanism, of 
which they are in one sense a part, and also 
independently of such peculiarities thereof as 
are essentially involved in connection with 
said mechanism. For present purposes I need 
only say that they are mounted side by side, 
but oppositely set or located on the shaft; or, 
in other words, they project therefrom in op 
posite directions, SO as, when rotated, to cause 
their respective rods f and g to be longitudi 
nally reciprocated in opposite directions. The 
rod f of the eccentiric F is coupled to the up 
per end of the main portion of the rocker arm 
or lever E, and the rod g of the eccentric G is 
coupled to the lower end of the auxiliary le. 
wer e. Now, assuming the eccentrics to be re 
volving with the crank-shaft, it will be seen 
that while the eccentric Fis moving the valve 
rod f toward the crank-shaft the eccentric G 
is moving its rod of away from the crank 
shaft, thus causing the lower end of the aux 
iliary lever e to be correspondingly moved, 
and its upper end and the valve-rod d to be 
moved toward the crank-shaft in harmony 
with the movement of the main portion of the 
rocker-arm as to direction, but at a much 
greater speed, and it will be obvious that as 
the eccentrics are further rotated they will 
cause a precisely - corresponding rearward 
movement of the valve-rod and valve. 
As thus far described, (it being understood 
that the eccentrics are properly set with ref 
erence to the crank plate or disk,) it will be 
seen that the valve will not only be moved to 
a greater extent than the extent of throw of 
either eccentric, but also moved much more 
rapidly than would be possible with a single 
eccentric, and therefore the induction-ports 
are promptly opened to their maximum ca 
pacity and promptly closed at such predeter 
mined portion of the engine-stroke as may be 
Although not fully shown, it is to be under 
stood that the several connectious between the 
eccentric-rods and the rocker - arm may be 
made adjustable in a manner well known-as, 
for instance, by means of slots, clamping-nuts, 
and studs-and that the foot of the rocking 
arm may be also capable of adjusting move 
ments, and also that the eccentric-rods may 
be capable of longitudinal adjustment with re 
lation to their straps without departure from 
my invention. 
I am aware that two eccentrics have here 
tofore been employed with a complex rocker 
arm in connection with two valve-rods for 
operating respectively a main valve and an 
overlying cut-off valve; but I believe I am 
the first to organize two eccentrics and a 
rocker-arm so as to operate one slide-valve 
and enable the latter to be reciprocated with 
great rapidity, so as to promptly fill a cylin 
der with steam and then to promptly close 
after a desirable dwell of the valve at each 
end of its stroke. 
I am also aware that a single slide-valve 
has heretofore been coupled to a pair of eccen 
trics, one being within the other, and serving 
as a variable axis for the outer eccentric; but 
such eccentrics, when considered independ 
ently 
of a governor which controls the inner 
eccentric, would operate precisely the same as 
one ordinary eccentric instead of as two inde 
pendent but co-operating eccentrics as thus 
organized by me. 
I will now describe said eccentrics as when 
mounted so as to be controlled by a fly-wheel 
governor, and to then therefore constitute a 
part of the governing mechanism. 
The inner eccentric, G, nearest the crank 
is integral with or may be mounted upon and 
45 
65 
7o 
75 
85 
IO) 
I 5 
O 
2) 
3.19,14 
3. 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
55 
keyed or otherwise secured to one end of a 
sleeve, h, which is so mounted as to be capa 
ble of freely rotating on the crank-shaft, and 
at its opposite end said sleeve has secured 
thereto a two-armed lever, h, projecting ral 
dially in opposite directions from the sleeve. 
Between said lever h and the eccentric G the 
outer eccentric, F, is loosely mounted on said 
sleeve, and to its outer face a similar but 
longer lever, i, is secured, which projects 
radially in opposite directions beyond its 
periphery, and is recessed centrally to re 
ceive the lever h in substantially the same 
plane, as clearly indicated. To these levers 
a governor is connected, so as to cause the 
eccentrics to be thereby rotated in oppo 
site directions independently of the crank 
shaft, and said sleeve, the eccentrics, and 
their levers constitute one portion of my in 
vention regardless of the particular character 
of the fly-wheel governor which may be em 
ployed therewith. These eccentrics may be 
both controlled by either of the weighted 
arms H or H'; but when only one of such 
arms is coupled to said eccentrics a centrif. 
ugal counterbalance weight should obvi 
ously be employed, and therefore I prefer to 
employ the two arms, as shown. These arms, 
as heretofore in other fly-wheel governors, 
are pivoted to the arms of the fly-wheel, and 
are backed up by expansive adjustable spiral 
springs k, located near their pivoted ends. 
Each weighted arm is also provided with an 
adjustable stop, l, radially movable on an arm 
of the fly-wheel. Each of said weighted arms 
is pivotally coupled to both of the eccentrics 
as follows: arm H by link in to the eccentric 
F, and by link in to eccentric G. The arm H' 
by the link m is coupled to the eccentric F, 
and by the link n' to the eccentric G by way 
of their respective arms or levers i and it, as 
clearly shown. 
The coupling of one weighted arm to two 
eccentrics I believe to be broadly new, and so 
also as to the two weighted arms, each coupled 
to two eccentries. It will be seen that either 
or both of said weighted arms by their swing 
ing movements cause the eccentrics to be op 
positely rotated, and that the result thereof is 
to vary the time of closing the steam-ports 
according to the speed at which the engine is 
operated. It will also be seen that there is a 
practically perfect balance of straining force, 
as between either weighted arm and the ec 
centrics, and that therefore the movements of 
the governing mechanism will be smooth and 
easy, and that a comparatively slight rotative 
movement of both eccentrics independently of 
the crank-shaft will result in a radical varia 
tion in the movement of the valve. 
It is to be understood that while I make 
specific claim in certain combinations to the 
one and the two weighted arms coupled by 
links to the eccentrics, as described, I do not 
limit myself thereto, but broadly claim, under 
the main feature of my invention, the combi 
nation of the two eccentricS loosely mounted 
on the crank-shaft with any variety of govenor 
mounted on and rotating with Said shaft, how 
ever the one or two weighted arms thereof 
or equivalent centrifugally-operated devices 
may be coupled to said eccentrics, as I am well 
aware that said coupling mechanism may be 
variously organized, and produce desirable 
results, although I prefer to employ the links, 
as shown, because of their reliability, ease of 
operation, and simplicity. 
To illustrate other modes of coupling and 
other types of governor, I will next describe 
the mechanism illustrated on Sheet 4, Figs. 6 
and 7. 
Referring to Fig. 6, it will be seen that the 
eccentric-levers is and i are in the form of 
toothed segments, and that the weighted arms 
H and H are each coupled to said segmental 
levers. The eccentric G and sleeve it, before 
described, and its segmental toothed lever hi? 
are coupled to pinions h, keyed upon the 
pivots o of both arms by the intermediate 
gears h", loosely mounted on studs projecting 
from the arms of the fly-wheel. The eccen 
tric F, by way of its longer segmental toothed 
lever i, is coupled directly to segmental gears 
it, keyed upon the pivots of both weighted 
arms. Spiral springs pencircle the housings of 
the studs 0, and have bearing at one edge of 
each arm, as clearly indicated; but said springs 
may be otherwise applied, if desired. With 
this construction it is obvious that the vibra 
tory movement of the weighted arms willim 
part to the levers it and irotative movements, 
as before described, and that the two eccen 
trics will be in like manner oppositely rotated. 
The value of the weighted arms and the 
simple links illustrated in Fig. 2 will be all 
the more apparent on a comparison there 
with of the complicated system of gearing 
illustrated in Fig. 6, and especially when it 
is further considered that with such gearing 
more or less lost motion will be inevitable, all 
of which is obviated by the direct link-con 
nection. 
To illustrate wherein certain portions of 
my invention are of value, even if the weight 
ed lever-arlias are wholly dispensed with, I 
will refer to Fig. 7, wherein the eccentric 
levers hand i are coupled by their links on 
m" and 2 n directly to sliding balls q, which, 
as in Some prior forms of governor, slide ra. 
dially on rods extending from the hub to the 
rim of the fly-wheel, whereby, as will be ob 
vious, the two eccentrics will be controlled in 
a manner similar to that already described, 
Although this last-described construction can 
in some cases be relied upon, the weighted 
arms, substantially as shown in Fig. 2, are 
died preferable for obtaining the best re 
Having thus described my invention, Iclaim 
as new and desire to Secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, substantially as herein 
before described, of the two independent valve 
Working eccentrics mounted loosely on the 
crank-shaft, and a governor mounted on and 
SutS. 
- 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
... 4 
39, lla 
rotating with said crank-shaft and coupled to 
said eccentrics, substantially as described, 
whereby said eccentrics can be variably ro 
tated by the governor in opposite directions. 
2. The combination, with the crank-shaft, 
of a weighted arm, the two eccentries loosely 
mounted on said shaft, each provided with an 
arm or lever, and both connected by a link 
to said weighted arm. 
3. The combination, with the crank-shaft, 
of the two weighted arms, the two eccentrics, 
each provided with an arm or lever, and each 
connected by links to both of said weighted 
a.S. 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
before described, of a balanced valve, a vi 
bratory rocker-arm, a rocking lever mounted 
on said arm, a pair of eccentrics oppositely . 
set on their shaft, coupled, respectively, to 
IO 
the rocker-arm and to the rocking lever, and 20 
a valve-rod which connects said rocking lever 
with the valve. 
5. The combination, with the governing 
mechanism, including the two eccentrics and 
the complex rocker-arm, of a slide-valve, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. The two eccentrics, one tightly mounted 
upon a sleeve and provided with a lever ra 
diating from said sleeve, and the other loosely 
mounted on said sleeve and provided with a 
lever, substantially as described, whereby both 
of said eccentrics may be connected to a fly 
wheel governor, as set forth. 
25 
JOHN D. OLDS. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP F. LARNER, 
HOWELL BARTLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319214.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. EW ARTS 
SUSPENSION PULLEY, 
No. 319,214, 
Zzy z Patented June 2, 1885. 
   
  
( NY L57 
f 
a. f 
C 
y 
Z 
7, 7/1 sea 1 
M 
 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, p.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. EVARTS, OF MERIDEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE BRADLEY 
& HUBBARD MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SUSPENS ON - PULSEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 329,214, dated June 2, 1885. 
Application filed March 30, ISS5. 
(No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN A. EVARTS, of 
Meriden, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new Im 
5 provement in Suspension-Pulleys; and I do 
hereby declare the following, when taken in 
connection with accompanying drawings and 
the letters of reference marked thereon, to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
Io and which said drawings constitute part of 
this specification, and represent, ill 
Figure 1, a top view of a suspension-pulley 
having three pulleys; Fig. 2, a side view of 
the same; Fig. 3, one of the hubs and its arms; 
I5 Fig. 4, the other hub and its arms; Fig. 5, a 
transverse section through the arms, pivot, 
and pulley; Figs. 6 and 7, modifications upon 
the pivot; Fig. 8, the invention as applied to a 
two-pulley hanger; Fig. 9, a side view of one 
2O half the hanger; Fig. 10, a transverse central 
section through the said hanger. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
hangers for that class of pulleys over which 
articles are suspended which it is desired to 
25 adjust or support at different elevations-- 
such, for illustration, as lamps, flower-baskets, 
bird-cages, and the like-and which are coun 
terbalanced by a weight or some equivalent 
therefor. 
3O In the arrangement of a pulley of this charac 
ter the weight must substantially counter 
balance the thing suspended; but as the arti 
cles mentioned, or such as are suspended for 
household uses or for decorations, are liable 
35 to vary in weight-as, for illustration, flower 
baskets will vary in weight, owing to variable 
quantities of earth introduced or from various 
degrees of dampness; lamps differ because 
of varying weight of shades or quantity of oil 
4o or from other causes-but the weight is and 
must be constant; hence in some cases if the 
pulley be free the weight will necessarily 
overbalance the article suspended, or in other 
cases the article may overbalance the Weight. 
45. To obviate this difficulty, various frictional de 
vices have been applied to pulleys. 
The object of my invention is the construc 
tion of an extension-pulley for two or more 
chains or cords, and in which substantially an 
equal friction may be applied in a simple man- 5 
merto all the pulleys; and the invention consists 
in the pulley-support constructed in two parts, 
One part carrying all arm upon oneside of the 
pulley and the other an arm upon the opposite 
side said parts adapted to be drawn together 55 
to grasp the pulley between them with a 
greater or less amount of friction, and as more 
fully hereinafter described. 
I will first illustrate my invention as for 
pulleys to carry three chains or cords, as the 6o 
case may be. 
A represents a central hub, from which ex 
tend three arms, B. B. B. The plane of each of 
these arms is at one side of a radial line, but 
parallel to said radial line, as indicated in 65 
Fig. 3, the distance between the radial line 
and the surface of the arm being little more 
than half the thickness of the pulley to be in 
troduced. A second hub, C, is formed like 
the hub A, and from this in like manner ex- 7o 
tend three arms, D, (see Fig. 4:) but the arms 
on the hub C are upon the opposite side of 
the radial lines, as indicated in Fig. 4. The 
width of the arms is the same, but the hubs 
are of half the thickness of the arms, as seen in 75 
Fig. 2, and So that the hub. A may be set upon 
the hub C, as seen in Figs. 1 and 2, and when 
SO Set the arms are in the Same horizontal 
plane and Substantially parallel with each 
other, as seen in Fig. 1. Through the hub is a So 
central opening, ct, by which the hanger may 
suspended. 
Between each pair of arms, near their ends, 
a pulley, E, is introduced upon an axis, and 
so as to revolve freely. The suspending device 85 
forms a pivot through the hub, and upon 
which the parts of the hub may be turned to 
Some extent, each independent of the other. 
As represented in Fig. 1, the axles consist of 
a screw, F, introduced free through the arms go 
B, and screwed into the arms D, and are also 
loose through the pulley, as seen in Fig. 5, 
and so that the pulley may turn freely thereon. 
Outside of the arm B, and beneath the head 
of the screw, a spring, b, is introduced to bear 95 
against the arm B, and So that the arm B be 
ing free on the screw the tendency of the 
spring is to force it against the pulley and to 
h 
2 
339,274, 
3O 
ward the opposite arm, and thereby grasp the 
pulley between the two arms to the extent of 
the power of the spring b. Each of the screws 
is preferably provided with a like spring. 
5 The pressure of the arms upon the pulleys 
may be adjusted by the screws through the 
Springs. 
While I prefer to arrange a spring upon 
each screw or to each pulley, it will be evi 
Io dent that a single Spring may answer the pur 
pose. Inasmuch as one hub and its arms 
may turn upon the axis (, independent of the 
other, it follows that if one arm B be drawn 
toward its opposite arm, D, all the others 
must be accordingly forced toward each other; 
hence the spring-pressure being applied to 
one arm to grasp the pulley between it and 
its opposite arm all the pulleys will be alike 
grasped between their respective arms. 
The axles for the pulleys may all be free 
that is, fixed in one arm only, as seen in Fig. 
6, but free through the pulley and opposite 
arm-then a Screw introduced through one 
arm into the opposite arm, as indicated in 
25 broken lines at d, Fig. 1, the head of the screw 
bearing upon one arm and the screw tapped 
into the opposite arm, will draw the two arms 
together. This would produce a constant and 
unyielding friction; but the same spring may 
be applied beneath the head of the screw, as 
before described, and thereby make a yield 
ing friction. 
The spring b may be omitted under the first 
arrangement described, the clamping being 
made positive and rigid, yet I prefer in all 
cases a yielding pressure; or a spring may be 
introduced upon the inside between the arm 
and the pulley, as indicated in Fig. 7. 
For a two-pulley hanger I provide a straight 
bar which forms two arms, H. H., and a second 
bar, parallel with the first, which forms two 
arms, II. Between the ends of the arms the 
pulleys E are arranged, as between the arms 
in the first illustration, and through one arm 
and pulley into the opposite arm pivots are 
applied in the same manner. In this construc 
tion the suspending device is best made in the 
form of a loop, L, made as a part of the arm 
I, the central portion of the arms turned in 
ward to bring the loop into a central plane be 
tween the pulleys, as indicated in Fig. 8; and 
that the pull may come alike upon both arms 
I construct the opposite arm, H, with lugs e, 
which extend acroSS and bear upon the top of 
the opposite arm, as shown in Figs. 8, 9, and 10. 
As in the first illustration, the spring may 
be applied upon the axle; or it may be pro 
duced by a central screw, f, (indicated in 
broken lines, Fig. S,) having a Spring applied 
thereto. In this case the axles may be as shown 
in Fig. 6. 
I claim 
1. A suspension-pulley consisting of the 
hanger constructed in two parts and extend 
ing from the central Support to form pairs of 
arms, the said arms adjustable toward and 
from each other, combined with a pulley hung 
45 
55 
95 
upon an axle between each pair of arms, and 
a screw through one arm into the opposite 
arm, whereby said arms may be made to grasp 7o 
the said pulleys with frictional contact, Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A suspension-pulley consisting of the 
hanger constructed in two parts and extend 
ing from the central support to form pairs of 75 
arms, a pulley arranged upon an axle between 
each pair of arms, and a screw through One arm 
into the opposite arm, and by which said arms 
may be forced upon Said pulleys, with a Spling 
against which the pressure of the said screw 8o 
will be applied, and whereby said pressure is 
made yielding, substantially as described. 
3. A suspension-pulley consisting of the 
hanger constructed in two parts and extend 
ing from the central support to form pairs of 85 
arms, a pulley arranged upon an axle between 
each pair of arms, a screw extending through 
one arm, through the pulley, and into the Op 
posite arm to form an axle for one pulley, and 
a spring arranged between the said screw and 
pulley, whereby the pressure of the said screw 
upon the pulley is made yielding, Substan 
tially as described. 
4. A suspension-pulley consisting of a 
hanger composed of two hubs, AC, one, A, 
of said hubs constructed with two or more 
arms, B, and the other hub, C, constructed 
with corresponding arms, D, the said arms ex 
tending from the hub parallel with each other, 
a pulley arranged upon an axle between each 
pair of arms, and a Screw through one arminto 
the opposite arm and adapted to draw the 
said arms toward each other, whereby said 
pulleys are frictionally grasped between said 
arms, substantially as described. 
5. A suspension-pulley consisting of a 
hanger composed of two hubs, AC, one, A, 
of Said hubs constructed with two or more 
arms, B, and the other hub, C, constructed 
with corresponding arms, D, the said arms ex 
tending from the hub parallel with each other, 
a pulley arranged upon an axle between each 
pair of arms, and a screw through one arminto 
the opposite arm and through the pulley be. 
tween them, and so as to form the axle for the 
said pulley, with a spring between said screw 
and pulley, whereby the pressure of the screw 
to draw the arms upon the pulley is made 
yielding, Substantially as described. 
6. A suspension-pulley consisting of a 
hanger composed of two hubs, AC, the one, 
A, of said hubs constructed with two or more 
arms, B, and the other hub, C, constructed 
with corresponding arms, D, the said arms ex 
tending from the hub parallel with each other, 
a screw, F, extending free through one arm 
into the opposite arm of each pair, a pulley, 
E, arranged upon each of said screws as an 
axle, and a Spring, b, between the head of the 
screw and the arm, substantially as described. I3o 
I 25 
I I5 
IO5 
IOO 
JOHN A. EVARTS. 
Witnesses: 
W. R. BOOTH, 
R. P. RAND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319314.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
SWITCH, FROG, GUARD RAIL AND CROSSING FLANGE AND CLEARER. 
Patented June 2, 1885. 
No. 319,314, 
C. C. QUINN. 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
sWITCH, FROG, GUARD RAIL, AND CROSSING FLANGE AND CLEARER, 
No. 319,314. 
Patented June 2, 1885. 
C. C. QUINN. 
 
ATTEST 
-( O21-2-1-0--- 
N. FETERS. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
w f 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
SWITCH, FROG, GUARD RAIL, AND CROSSING FLANGE AND CLEARER, 
Patented June 2, 1885. 
No. 319,314, 
C. C. QUINN. 
F. G.3 
-r-, 
 
  
  
SXA 
glac 
AT TEST. 
f f/ovy/adoev 
%-77 - 62-7 co- 
NVENTOR 
4262 
base ess-e- 
2 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C., 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES CALVIN QUINN, OF FARGO, DAKOTA TERRITORY. 
SWITCH, FROG, GUARD-RAIL, AND CROSSING FLANGE AND CLEARER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 319,34, dated June 2, 1885. 
Application filed February 18, 185. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, uhon, it may CO72, Ceti, 
Beit known that I, CHARLES CALVIN QUINN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Fargo, in the county of Cass and Territory of 
Dakota, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Switch, Frog, Guard-Rail, 
and Crossing Flange and Clearer, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to new and useful im 
provements in flange-cutters, tread clearers, 
and excavators for railroads; also in a lock 
and lateral-motion journal end stop and box. 
My object is to provide a dirt, sand, ice, 
and snow clearing mechanism for railroads, by 
means of which switch-rails, frog-rails, and 
planks and rails at crossings can be cleared, 
as will be fully understood from the following 
description, when taken in connection with 
the annexed drawings, in which 
Figuire 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
devices. Fig. 2 is a front elevation thereof; 
Fig. 3, a vertical longitudinal section through. 
Fig. 1 in a plane through the journal-boxes. 
Fig. 4 is a detail of the levers and automatic 
locking devices. 
B designates a suitable frame; G G, the car 
wheels; C C, the pedestals. 
To each end of the frame B, and as close as 
possible to the wheels G. G., vertical timbers 
P P are rigidly secured and sustained by 
means of foot-braces L. 
In front of the timbers P, and in close rela 
tion thereto, are threaded square bars F, and 
to the lower ends of these bars are Secured 
flange-cutters U, (shown clearly in Fig. 2,) for 
the purpose of clearing between and below 
the surfaces of the Switches, frogs, guard-rails, 
at crossings, and other places on the road. 
In front of the threaded bars F, and at a 
suitable distance above the lower end of the 
cutters U, are perpendicular tread-clearers O 
O, which are suitably secured to said bars 
and arranged as close as possible to the tops 
of the rails J. The perpendicular tread-clear 
ers O O are arranged at an angle of about 
thirty-five degrees with respect to the line of 
rails, and immediately above said clearers U 
U are conical scoops or deflectors 2, Secured 
to the bars F. These bars are provided with 
screw-threaded portions on their upper ends, 
which pass through guides K and lugs E, 
which are secured to the timbers BP, and are 
Vertically adjustable by means of nuts M on 
the top and bottom of the lugs E, which nuts 
aid in resisting the shocks to the flange-cutter 
and tread-clearer when brought in violent 
contact with dirt, sand, ice, and snow. A 
very accurate vertical adjustment of the flange 
cutter and track-clearer can be effected by the 
manipulation of said nuts. 
AS close as possible to two of the wheels G. 
G are arranged funnel-shaped excavators 13 
13, which are secured to the frame B by means 
of perpelidicular bars 33, which are threaded 
for the reception of nuts 6, and suitably 
guided. The funnel excavators can be ad 
justed independently of each other. The said 
excavators are held suspended by chains 7 7, 
attached to arms on a tumbling-shaft, 8, which 
has its bearings on vertical timbers 9. The 
longer or upright arm of the shaft 8 is con 
nected by a rod to a horizontal lever, 10, ap 
plied to an automatic locking device, 11, on 
top of a Vertical timber, 12. The excavators 
13 are so shaped and arranged as to guide and 
convey dirt, &c. off the track, and by means 
of the ScraperS 133 the rails are cleared. When 
the excavators are designed to clear below the 
railtops, they are operated by lever 10, and held 
in position, when desired, by the locking de 
vices, and When clearing above the track the 
excavators are rigidly held by the nuts 66. 
The automatic locking device consists of a 
circular plate, 15, Secured by brackets 16 to 
the top of the timber 12. To the plate 15the 
lever 10 is pivoted at 17. (See Fig. 4.) 18 is 
a tongue attached to the plate 15. 19 is a 
Spring secured to the tongue 18, on the under 
side of which Spring is a lip, 20. By the press 
ure of the spring 19 its lip is held down, and 
the lever 10 is held in place by the angularle 
ver 22, which is pivoted to the circular plate 
15 and attached to said spring by an eye, 23. 
The levers 10 and 22 can be moved by ropes 
2nd 25, extending to the cab of the locomo 
IWe 
The adjustable lateral motion and end stops 
and journal-box shown in Fig. 3 are construct 
ed as follows: The journal-box at the outer end 
of each axle is provided with a top bearing 
block, a feed-opening for lubrication, and an 
endywise adjusting device consisting of the fol 
lowing elements: d designates a journal-box, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
90 
IOO 
319,314 
provided with a cylinder, a piston end stop 
m, set-screw c, set-nut in, and piston end stop 
m, bearing against the axle-journalp. By ma 
nipulating the set-screws can accurate adjust 
ment of the flange-cutters with respect to the justable onits axles, substantially as described. 4O 
rails J can be effected. 
2O 
IO 
It will be observed by reference to Fig. 1 
that Secure to the vertical timbers PP broons 
R R, which are arranged to sweep the rails. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new is 
1. In combination with the continuously 
perpendicular flange-cutter U, tread-clearer 
O, funnel-excavator 13, conical scoop 2, per 
15 pendicular threaded square bar F, and the 
threaded bar 3, substantially as described. 
2. In combination with a railroad-track, the 
funnel-shaped surface-clearers adjustable, as 
described. 
3. The combination, in a railway - track 
clearer for cars, of a perpendicular flange-cut 
ter and tread-clearer of a funnel-shaped ex 
cavator, adjustable to cut above and below the 
faces of the rails, substantially as described. 
25 - 4. The combination of the flange-cutters, 
the tread-clearers, vertically adjustable, the 
funnel-shaped excavators adapted to be lifted 
over switches, and an automatic lock, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a track-clearer, the overhanging de 
flector 2 and angular perpendicular clearer, 
in combination with the vertically-adjustable 
bar F and a car, substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with a car, of vertical 
35ly independently-adjustable funnels 13, Sus 
pended flexibly from a rock-shaft, 8, substan 
tially as described. 
7. The combination, in a railway - track 
clearer, of a truck-frame which islaterally ad 
8. The combination, with a car-frame, of the 
surface-rail clearers and the conical chutes 2, 
braced and adjustable, as described. 
9. The combination, with a car-frame, of the 
surface-clearer, the cutter U, braced and ad- 45 
justable, as described, and the vertical timber 
P, as specified. 
10. The combination, in a railway - track 
clearer, of a curved surface-deflector, a clearer, 
U, and a broom arranged to operate as de- 5o 
Scribed. 
11. The combination, with the funnel exca 
vator, adjustable, as described, of the tooth 133, 
substantially as specified. 
clearer, of the vertical stayed timbers P, the 
adjustable bars F, the guides therefor, the rail 
flange-cutters U, the brooms, and the surface 
clearers, as described. 
able on its axles, in combination with vertical 
frog and side rail-clearers, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
13. A railway-truck frame laterally adjust- 6o 
12. The combination, in a railway - track 55 
CHARLES CALVIN QUINN. 
Witnesses: 
H. C. SouTHARD, 
ORRIS W. FRANCIS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319414.txt	(Model.) 
NO, 319,414, 
 
J. HUTH, 
SASH FASTENER, 
Patented June 2, 1885. 
WITNESSES : 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer.' Washington, , C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HUTH, OF CANTON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO FRED J. 
HEING ARTNER, OF SAME PLACE. 
SASH-FASTENER. 
S?ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 319,414, dated June 2, 1885. 
Application filed December 30, 1884. (Model.) 
55 
To the sash Cisattached the clamping-block 45 
is simply suspended, as it were, from the lower 
end of the rod G. 
I, substantially as shown in the drawings. 
This clamping-block I is provided with the 
head J, which slides on the rod G. The head 
J is provided with a threaded portion, which 
fits in the block I, as seen in the drawings. 
The object of providing the threaded portion 
is to adjust the head J to the rod G in case the 
parting-rails and the window-sash should vary 
in thickness. The head J and the socket H 
are each provided with the set-screws K and 
K, which are for the purpose of securely hold 
ing the sashes B and Cin any position desired. 
In use the set-screws are loosened and the 
sash placed in the position desired, when the 
Set-screws are turned tight against the rod. 
It will be seen that by my peculiar arrange 
ment I am enabled to move each sash inde 
pendent of the other. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 65 
Letters Patent, is 
The combination of the vertical rod G, se 
cured at its upper end to the window-frame, 
and provided at its lower end with a socket, 
H, having a set-screw, K, the vertical rod E, 7o 
connected at its ends to the lower sash and 
capable of sliding through the said socket, and 
a block, I, secured to the upper sash, and havn 
ing an adjustable head sliding on the upper 
vertical rod, and provided with a set-screw, 75 
K, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
JOHN HUTH. 
Witnesses: 
FRED W. BOND, 
W. M. MOUNTAIN. 
IC) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN HUTH, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Canton, in 
ghe county of Stark and State of Ohio, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Sash-Easteners; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same, reference being had 
to the annexed drawings, making a part of 
this specification, and to the letters and fig 
ures of reference marked thereon, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view. Fig. 2 is a 
detached view of clamping-head for the upper 
Sash. 
15 The present invention has relation to that 
class of sash-fasteners designed to hold the 
window at any desired position, and also to 
securely lock the window either up or down; 
and its nature consists in the different parts 
and combination of parts hereinafter de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, A represents 
the window-frame, which is of the ordinary 
style and form, to which are attached, in the 
ordinary manner, the sashes B and C. 
To the bottom or lower end of the sash B is 
attached the socket D, which may be of the 
form shown, and is for the purpose of securely 
3o holding the bottom or lower end of the rod E, 
the top or upper end of said rod E being se 
curely held by the socket F, secured to the top 
of the Sash B. 
A vertical rod, G, is rigidly secured at its 
upper end to the top of the window-frame, 
and the lower end of this rod is provided with 
a socket, H, through which the lower rod, E, 
is adapted to slide vertically when the lower 
sash, B, is moved. It will of course be un 
4o derstood that in order to permit this move 
ment of the rod E in the Socket H the latter 
is not attached to any part of the sash B, but 
35 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319514.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 319,514, 
J. O. SCOTT. 
CARAXLE BOX, 
Patented June 9, 1885. 
 
 
y\\\\\\\\\\\\\Os 
// 
# 
////// 
////// 
// 
, 
N. Peters, Photo-thographer, Watlington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES O. SCOTT, OF TYLER, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO F. L. 
- 
DILLEY, OF SAME PLACE: 
CAR-AXE BOX. 
E.J.PFCFICATION $orming part of Letters Patent No. 319,514, dated June 9, 1885. 
Application filed September 4, 1884. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it tally conce7n 
Beit known that I, JAMEs. O. SCOTT, of Ty 
ler, in the county of Smith and State of Texas, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Axle-Boxes; and I do hereby declare 
that the same is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, which will enable others 
Skilled in the art to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and the letters of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
car-axle boxes, and is an improvement on the 
invention shown and described in Letters Pat 
ent of the United States granted to me on the 
30th day of May, 1882, and being numbered 
258,813. The present invention is directed to 
the construction of the flanges formed on the 
sides or ends of the box, and the grooves in 
the sides of ends of the cap, and has for its 
object the production of an axle or oil-box for 
car-axles, SO arranged and constructed that 
the lid or cap thereof will be automatically 
and securely held in position when closed. 
At the outSet I would state that I am aware 
that it has been proposed heretofore to em 
ploy an axle-box having beveled end and ver 
tical side grooves, and an inclined lid having 
side flanges projecting at right angles along 
its entire edge, and formed with inward-pro 
jecting vertical ribs to accomplish the same 
result I have in view. This arrangement is 
defective and objectionable for many reasons. 
The beveled end of the box, which performs a 
very important part of the act of locking the 
lid in position upon the box, when closed, hav 
ing no protection whatever, and being ex 
posed when the box is open, is likely to be 
come nicked or chipped off to such an extent 
as to materially reduce that portion of the 
side of the box between the beveled end and 
the vertical side grooves as to cause the lid to 
fit loosely upon the box, and thereby create a 
defect which it has been long sought to remedy. 
It has also been proposed to do the same thing 
by employing the means described and illus 
trated in my United States Letters Patent 
hereinbefore referred to. This plan also is 
objectionable and defective, the principal ob 
face being confined entirely to the holding 
pin running at right angles to the arm. On the 
side of the lid or cap it has been discovered 
that it is not sufficient for the purpose of hold 
ing the lid at all times in proper position. 
The pin is also liable to be broken off from 
having to raise and close the lid so many times. 
My present invention is the outgrowth of 
experiments made for the express purpose of 
remedying the numerous defects and short 
comings of the several plans for accomplish 
ing this same result, and while it possesses all 
the characteristics and advantages of those 
now in use it combines features which, So far 
as I am aware, have never been conjoined be 
fore. 
It is a further purpose of my invention to 
provide an axle-box having a detachable cap, 
provided with inwardly projecting pins or 
trunnions upon its flanged ends, which run in 
grooves in the opposite walls of the box, in 
conjunction with inwardly - turned flanges 
upon the end flanges, whereby the cap is not 
only closely drawn against the open end of the 
box, but may also be raised and thrown over 
upon the top of the latter and retained in that 
position by its own gravity. 
The invention can best be explained and 
understood by reference to the accompanying 
drawings, in which Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of so much of a car-axle box as is neces 
sary to illustrate my invention, the cap being 
elevated. Fig. 2 is a detail view of the cap 
detached. Fig. 3 is a side view, party in Sec 
tion, showing the lid down. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the axle or oil box of the ordinary con 
struction, provided with vertical sides or ends. 
B is the usual opening in the front of the box 
for the insertion of the oil and packing. 
B 
is the cap or lid for covering the opening B. 
It is of any suitable material, and preferably 
a rectangular plate, having in the center there 
of a lug or projection, C, which serves as a 
handle to raise the cap when it is desired to 
uncover the opening B. At each end or side 
of the cap B is an extension, b, of the cap, 
provided with a pin, b, at right angles there 
to. Extensions b are also provided on their 
55 
65 
75 
So 
90 
95 
5ojection being, however, that the bearing-sur- inner sides with Wedge-shaped grooves c, as IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
319,514 
seen in the drawings. These grooves c, it will 
be seen from the drawings, are about one-half 
the width of the cap B, terminating at pin b. 
It has been found expeditious and productive 
of excellent results to thus arrange these 
grooves. On the sides or ends of the box are 
formed wedge-shaped flanges d, which slide in 
the said correspondingly-shaped grooves c in 
the cap or lid of the box, thus locking the cover 
firmly to the box before the pivots breach 
the bottom of the groovese. It is to these 
two features-namely, the wedge - shaped 
flanges and correspondingly-shaped grooves 
that my claim is made. The pins b slide in 
inclined groovese on each side of the box A, 
near its front end. The grooves are the same 
as those described and shown in the aforesaid 
Letters Patent, and require no particular de 
Scription here. Across the front end of the 
box at its top is a ridge, f, against which the 
knob or rivet a in the cap B strikes and pre 
vents the cap from being drawn farther back 
and out of the groovese. A lip or extension, 
e', of the groove e at the top of the box clear 
ing the ridgef permits the withdrawal of the 
pins and removal of the cap B from the box 
when the knob or riveta is removed from the 
cap. It will thus be understood that in order 
to securely and tightly fasten the cap upon 
the box it will only be necessary to drop the 
cap and allow it to slide into position upon 
the box, as seen in Fig. 3. When it is de 
sired to open the box, it is only necessary to 
O 
25 
push upward on the handle a, and the grooves 
and flanges will readily become unlocked, 35 
thereby allowing of the elevating of the cap 
B to the position seen in Fig. 1. 
I attach importance to the grooves c, ar 
ranged in the upper half of the cover, in their 
adaptability to serve with the flanges d of the 4o 
box to wedge the lid firmly in place before the 
pins breach the bottom of the slots e. 
Having thus fully described my invention 
and the best way known to me of carrying the 
same into effect, I would remark that I do not 45. 
restrict myself to the particular devices here 
in shown and described, inasmuch as my in 
vention may be carried out in a variety of 
ways without departure from my invention. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let So 
ters Patent, is 
In an axle-box, the combination, with the 
box A, having the wedge-shaped projections 
d, and slotsee, of the cover B, having pins b', 
and wedge-shaped recesses c formed between 55 
said pins and the top of the lid, whereby the 
gravity of the cover will wedge it to the box 
when the pins are without a bearing, as set 
forth. 
my hand this 20th day of August, 1884. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 6o 
JAMES O. SCOTT. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. H. BONNER, 
T. T. COTNAM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319614.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. PENDLETON, 
DRILL, 
No. 319,614, 
Patented June 9, 1885. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. PENDLETON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF, 
ALEXANDER. H. TIERS AND CORNELIUSTIERS, BOTH OF MADISON, NEW 
JERSEY, WILLIAM G. STEPHENS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, AND JOSEPH B. 
DICKSON, OF MORRISTOWN, NEW JERSEY. 
D R L. 
3.21: CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 319,614, dated June 9, 1885. 
Application filed September 4, 1883. Renewed November 24, 1884. (No model.) 
w 
. The bottoms of the longitudinal grooves a a 
in the drill, when seen endwise, form obtuse 
angles 1 2 3, and from 3 to 4 the surfaces are 
curved or partially curved, as represented. 
The bottoms of the grooves at 22 are near but 4o 
slightly at each side of the axis of the drill, so 
as to retain the necessary strength. The por 
tions 23 of the grooves are planes parallel to 
each other; so, also, the portions 12 are planes, 
the plane in one groove being parallel to that 45 
in the other, and the junctions of the planes 
along the line 2 become guides to the work 
man in sharpening the drill. The cutting 
end of the drill is conical; hence the cutting 
edges at the ends of the planes 12 are straight 5o 
lines, but at an acute angle to the axis of the 
The grooves a a may be straight throughout 
their length, or they may be at a slight incli 
nation or twist to the axis, or they may ter. 55 
minate with spiral rearward extensions, as in 
my aforesaid patent. 
I claim as my invention 
The drill having grooves at opposite sides, 
the bottoms of the grooves being planes 1 2 6o 
and 32, uniting at 2 near to but at each side 
of the axis of the drill, the portions 3 4 of the 
grooves having curved or partially curved 
surfaces, substantially as set forth. 
D. 1883, 
Signed by me this 1st day of September, A. 65 
drill. 
- 
J. H. PENDLETON. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
WILLIAM G. MOTT. 
5 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JoHN H. PENDLETON, 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented an Improvement 
in Drills, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
In Letters Patent No. 283,509, granted to 
me, a drill is shown in which there are longi 
tudinal grooves extending from the cutting 
Io edge and opening into spiral grooves on the 
body of the drill. 
My present invention is specially intended 
as an improvement upon the aforesaid drill; 
and it relates to a drillin which the longitudi 
I5 nal grooves are each formed with a flat face 
at the end of which is the cutting-edge. The 
flat faces in the two grooves are parallel to each 
other and extend to points in line with but at 
each side of the axis of the drill. The bottom 
2O of each groove is V-shaped, and the surfaces 
are inclined to each other at an obtuse angle, 
and the surface of each groove that is not in 
line with the cutting-edge is rounding, so as to 
form a trough for the reception and forward 
25 ing of the chips from one end to the other of 
the groove. The angle at the bottom of each 
groove forms a guide to the workman in grind 
ing the tool, so that the cutting-edge may be 
straight and at an acute angle to the axis, and 
3o the back of the cutting-edge be sufficiently 
beveled not to rub upon the metal; hence the 
cut will be without unnecessary friction or 
strain upon the tool. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an end view of 
35 the drill, and Fig. 2 is a side view. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319714.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 319,714. 
 
C. HESSE. 
WINDOW SCAFFOLD, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 9, 1885. 
MH'. 
't 
M 
Enga 
as SEHe is 
(SE SREHF: 
St. ESIPs 
iHEH 
62. 
WIZVESSES 
1432- 
3. 
f 
IWWEWTOR 
24 
24-22a2/ 
(No Model.) 
No. 319,714, 
C. HESSE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
WINDOW. SCAFFOLD, 
Patented June 9, 1885, 
2. 
2% 
2, 22. . 
2.2% 2 2 22 N 
, , a 
22 
4. 
:- 
a 
% 
. 
.22 a 
s 
/A f/2. 
2. 
%22 2, 
2232 
a 
x. 
M 
. 
Sa. 
f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
T2- 
A :/56, 
(22 
2% 
* 
Attorney 
N. Peters, Photo-ithographer, Washington, . C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES HESSE, OF DAN VILLE, ILLINOIS. 
WINDOW. SCAFFOLD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 319,714, dated June 9, 1885. 
Application filed April 29, 1885. 
(No modcl.) 
55 
(C 
65 
, 5 
So 
90 
95 
ICO 
s 
To all, whon, it may concern 
Beitknown that I, CHARLES HESSE, of Dan 
ville, in the county of Vermillion and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Window-Scaffolds; and I do 
hereby declare that the followingis a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, which 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to the letters of reference marked there 
on, which form part of this specification. 
My invention is an improvement in win 
dow-scaffolds, the object of which is to pro 
vide a strong, durable, and adjustable plat 
form for mechanics, laborers, and the like, 
while engaged in repairing window-frames or 
in painting the same, and for persons while in 
the act of washing the windows and wood-work 
of the higher stories of houses, thus provid 
ing a wide and safe platform to prevent any 
accidental falling of the persons employed. 
It may also be used as a means for attaching 
fire-escapes of any desired construction. 
It consists of a frame made, preferably, of 
wood, and it is strengthened at both ends by 
cross-pieces. On the platform may be con 
structed a wire-net fence, built around the 
edges of the frame, but which I have not 
shown in the illustrations. The fence may be 
of any height and kind. On each side of the 
frame are secured two adjustable legs, which 
are adapted to fit close to the wall of the house. 
The legs C C are on the outside of the wall, 
while the legs C C are placed in the interior, 
to prevent any slipping or jolting of the scaf. 
fold while in use. The legs connect with each 
other by supports or braces, which may be 
made of wood or other suitable material, and 
are held in place by metal braces, which are 
perforated to receive bolts, all of which will be 
hereinafter more fully described, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a side 
elevation of my improved device. Fig. 2 is 
an end elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a de 
tail perspective view of a house to which my 
invention is applied, and showing the attach 
ment of a fire-escape. Fig. 4 is a detail sec 
tional view taken on the linea ac, Fig. 1, and 
Fig. 5 is a detail view of the flooring or stage. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the specification, in which 
A represents the frame, which is formed by 
pieces of suitable thickness and length. 
BB represent the cross-pieces, which are. 
secured to the frame A by bolts a, and held 
fast by the iron washers b band nuts ce. They 
are used as a flange for the frame, to prevent 
the flooring d from slipping off, which it would 
have a tendency to do as the person standing 
on it attempted to reach the upper part of the 
window; but with the cross-pieces BB (which 
also help to strengthen the frame) the flooring 
is held in a fixed position, and would support 
a weight of from one to five hundred pounds 
with perfect safety. If so desired, the floor 
ing may be screwed to the frame A; but on 
the bottom are secured two strips, SS, formed 
integral therewith, and in such a manner as 
to fit snugly between the frame, thus avoiding 
Oscillation thereof. (See Fig. 5.) The cross 
pieces B B are also applicable to hold and 
support the fire-escape F, which is preferably 
made of iron rods and rope, but may be of any 
suitable construction and material. 
CC are adjustable legs, which are adapted, 
asheretofore explained, to straddle the Walland 
fit snugly to it on both sides. They are pro 
vided at their lower extremities with cross 
pieces e e', which serve to connect the legs and 
form a support while they are brought in con 
tact with the wall. The support e is provid 
ed with a cushion, f, made of rubber, felt, or 
any suitable material, to prevent scratching or 
disfiguring the wall. The legs C C are ad 
justed to the thickness of the wall, and held in 
place by the braces D D, which are perforated 
at tt, to admit of the screw-bolts a? a, and se 
cured by washers b band nuts c' c'. Said per 
forations are of equal distance apart, as in 
the drawings, but may be of any distance, pro 
vided they come into immediate contact with 
the bolts a? a when the legs are set in the 
proper position. The braces are made of thin 
sheet metal, but malleable iron is preferred, 
and are fastened to the legs near the cross 
pieces e e' by bolts R. R., forming a hinge on 
which the braces are moved. 
E is an upright guide fastened at its upper 
end by screw-bolts to the cross-piece B, and 
rabbeted at G to the cross piece or brace G', as 
3O 
45 
SO 
e 
319,714 
shown in Fig. 4. It is also braced by rods in 
m. (See Figs. 2 and 4.) At or near its lower 
extremity is a hole, through which extends the 
rod h, which facilitates the adjustment of the 
legs to walls of various thicknesses. On each 
side of the guide E are two lever-nuts, which 
serve to secure the leg at any desired adjust 
ment. The rod l is bent in the form of an 
eye at g to link with the eye-screw g', which 
is secured to the supporte, and has for a shoul 
der the washer n, which is made of any suit 
able metal, to prevent the screw from pulling 
Out or sinking into the support e. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
The scaffold is placed in the window, the legs 
straddling the wall beneath the sill. Then the 
lower portion of the legs are moved toward 
each other and caused to squeeze the wall by 
means of the rod h and the screw-levers hl. 
in guide E. The braces DD are then placed in 
their respective positions. 
It will be observed that my improved scaf. 
fold is simple, light, strong, and inexpensive. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a scaffold, the frame, the adjustable 
legs and braces, and the cross-pieces at the 
ends extending above the platform, in combi 
nation with the platform, as described and set 
forth. 
2. In a scaffold, the frame, the adjustable 
legs, and braces, in combination with the 
guide, the tightening-rod, and the brace to 
hold the guide firmly in place, as described 
and set forth. 
3. In a window-scaffold, the frame A, and 
adjustable legs C C C C, pivotally secured 
thereto, having connections with each other 
by cross-pieces e e, and the cushion f, in com 
bination with the wall of a house, substan- 4o 
tially as described. 
4. In a window-scaffold, the combination of 
the frame A, cross pieces or flanges B B, with 
the adjustable inclined braces D D, and legs 
C C C C, and cross-pieces e e', substantially 45 
as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
CHARLES HESSE, 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIs M. SHUFY, 
CHARLES MILLER. 
5 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319814.txt	
/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US319914.txt	J. W. LEETE. 
THILL COUPLING, 
Patented June 9, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
No. 319,914, 
 
C, 
N2 
 
 
 
W KZ4. Ns 8 
an 
12 f frt as as asaras. 
ox (2-42 
- Z 2 Lyasr- 722- des 
7- 76 AA/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. LEETE, OF SOUTH MERIDEN, CONNECTICUT. 
THILL COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 319,914, dated June 9, 1885. 
Application filed April 6, 1885. No model.) 
is formed a circular recess or socket, G, and 
Beit known that I, JoHNW. LEETE, of South in these two sockets is placed a ring, I, either 
of the shape here shown or any other, as may 
be preferred. This ring fits snugly in the two so 
sockets and serves to unite the two parts of 
the coupling together, and receives the whole 
of either the forward or backward draft, and 
thus prevents any strain from coming upon the 
clamping-bolt. This ring further serves to 55 
prevent the two parts of the coupling from be 
coming loose and rattling, in case the bolt 
should become worn. 
The advantages of using a separate ring are 
as follows: First, the ring, being made sepa 
rately from the other parts of the coupling, will 
revolve or turn in its socket, and thus equal 
ize the wear upon the ring at all points; sec 
ond, the ring being made of steel and the two 
parts of the coupling of iron, a hard and soft 
metal are brought in contact with each other, 
and hence there is not as much wear upon the 
parts as there would be if all of them were 
made of the same material, and two wearing 
surfaces are obtained; third, in case the bolt 7o 
should break, the ring would still hold the 
parts together for a time at least, instead of 
allowing them to separate at once; fourth, 
whenever the parts become too much worn, it 
is only necessary to remove the ring and in- 75 
sert a slightly-larger one, and thus the coup 
ling is made nearly as good as when new. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
Athill-coupling composed of two parts, each 8o 
of which has a socket formed in its inner side, 
in combination with a separatering which fits 
in both the sockets, and a clamping-bolt which 
passes through both parts of the coupling and 
binds them together, substantially as shown 85 
and described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
To all, whon, it may eoncern: 
Meriden, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Thill-Coup 
lings; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it pertains to make and use 
Io it, reference being had to the accompanying 
lyings, which form part of this specifica 
10, 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
thill-couplings; and it consists in the combi 
I5 nation of a clip having a portion of the coup 
ling either formed as a part thereof or attached 
thereto, the thill-iron a separate and inde 
pendent ring which fits snugly in the sockets 
made in both parts of the thill-coupling, and 
the clamping-bolt by means of which the two 
parts of the coupling are held together, as 
will be more fully described hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to form a thill 
coupling in which the whole of the draft, either 
forward or back, is made to come directly upon 
a ring which is placed between the two parts 
of the coupling, instead of upon the coupling 
bolt itself. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the thill 
coupling embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a vertical Section of the same. 
A represents the clip, and B one portion of 
the thill-coupling, which may either beformed 
as a part of the clip or attached thereto, as 
may be preferred. The other portion, C, of the 
coupling is formed as a portion of the thill 
iron, and has its inner side to bear against the 
inner side of the part B, and the two parts of 
the coupling BC are securely clamped together 
by means of a bolt, D. This bolt may extend 
through both parts of the coupling without 
having its threads engage with either part; or 
it may have threads upon it, so as to engage 
with the part C, and thus prevent any possi 
45 bility of the bolt working out and being lost. 
In the inner face of each part of the coupling 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
25 
JOHN W. LEETE. 
Witnesses: 
F. A. LEHMANN, 
L. L. BURKET. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320015.txt	E, A, TAFT, 
HOSE TRUCK. 
Patented June 16, 1885. . 
(No Model.) 
No. 320,015, 
 
WITNESSES 
Q46 26-4- 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD A. TAFT, OF DAVENPORT, IOWA. 
HOSE-TRUCK. 
ser:CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 320,015, dated June 16, 1885. 
Application filed April 9, 1885. (No model.) 
IO 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD A. TAFT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Daven 
port, in the county of Scott and State of Iowa, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Hose-Trucks, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention has relation to hose trucks or 
reels, and hasor its object the provision of a 
handle for the truck which is capable of being 
folded down to serve as a support to maintain 
the frame-work in a desired position, and to 
be at the same time capable of being quickly 
and easily brought into operative position, 
and when not in actual use the truck as a 
- whole will occupy materially less space than 
when not provided with my improvement. 
The invention consists in certain features 
of construction hereinafter described, and 
specifically set forth in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation of a truck embodying my improve 
ment, one wheel thereof being removed and 
the handle being folded down. Fig. 2 is a 
plan of the frame-work with the handle in op 
erative position. Fig. 3 is a substantially 
central vertical section of Fig. 2, and embodies 
a modification hereinafter described. 
Like letters indicate like parts in all the 
figures. 
A represents the bail-like frame-work of 
the truck, which is mounted upon an axle, B, 
which carries the reel C. The frame-work is 
extended to the front in the form of arms or 
brackets A, and comprises a tie-bar, A', se 
cured by bolts, rivets, or otherwise to and at 
the rear faces of the front portion of the 
frame-work, as clearly indicated in Fig. 2. 
The handle B, which may be made wholly of 
iron, or in part of wood, as desired, is pro 
vided with a T-end piece, B, the prongs of 
which may be straight, but for the purpose 
hereinafter specified are preferably curved, as 
shown. The handle is pivoted upon a bolt, 
B", passing through it and the arms A, and is 
perforated (as at B, in rear of its pivot) so as 
to register with like perforations A* in the 
arms, and passing through the same, as clear 
ly indicated in Fig. 2, for the reception of the 
removable pin or eyebolt D, which may be 
connected to the frame-work by any suitable 
55 
cord or chain, so as to be always present for 
US8, 
By the construction thus far described it 
will be seen that the handle can be folded, 
turned, or swung downwardly, so that its end 
will rest upon the ground or floor, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 1, and being proportioned in 
length for this purpose, it will support the 
frame-work and reduce the space otherwise 
occupied by the truck nearly one-half. While 
in this position the advantage of curving the 
arms of the T-head of the handle is apparent, 
in that they are raised above the floor so that 65 
they can be readily seized for the purpose of 
turning the handle to a horizontal position, 
as indicated in Fig. 1. 
Now, by reference to Fig. 2 and the dotted 
lines X therein, (which represent a modifica- 7o 
tion of the locking device D-that is, a spring 
secured to one of the brackets of the frame 
work, and having a pin or bolt passing 
through one of the perforations A, and of 
sufficient length to reach into the perforation 75 
B to about the point Y of the handle, said 
pin or bolt being beveled after the manner of 
ordinary spring-seated reciprocating latches,) 
it will be seen that the handle when raised to 
a horizontal position, as above described, Will 8o 
be automatically locked in its operative or 
extended position. 
To insure a more rigid, safe, and sure re 
tention of the handle in operative position, 
the pin D is employed, and with it, in order 85 
to give greater strength and to relieve the pin 
from undue strain, I may extend the handle 
in the form of a hook, B, made either integral 
therewith, as shown in Figs. I and 2, or Sep 
arate therefrom and secured thereto in any go 
suitable manner, as illustrated in Fig. 3. 
I do not limit my invention to the use of the 
hook, but may vary the same in any manner 
and to any extent within the skill of persons 
conversant in the construction of similiar 95 
apparatuses. 
Having described my invention and its op 
eration, what I claim is 
1. A hose reel or truck provided with a 
handle pivoted to the frame-work of the truck, IOO 
and adapted to fold down to form a support 
for the truck-frame, substantially as specified. 
2. In a hose reel or truck, the combination 
of a pivoted handle adapted to fold down to 
25 
35 
45 
2 
320,015 
form a support for the same, with devices for comprising arms A and a tie-bar, A, with a 
securing said handle in an elevated operative handle, B, having hook B", and a locking-pin, I5 
position, substantially as specified. 
D, substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a hose reel or truck, the combination 
6. The combination with the frame A, and 
5 of a pivoted handle provided with a hook, the handle B, pivoted thereto, and provided 
with a frame-work adapted to support the with the T-head, having the curved arms B, 
pivot and act as a stop for the handle, sub-substantially as shown and described. 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
4. The combination of the frame-work A, in presence of two witnesses. 
2o 
Io extended to form arms A", with the handle B, 
pivot-bolt B", and locking device D, substan- 
tially as shown and described. 
5. The combination of the frame-work. A 
Witnesses: 
GEO. A. PIERCE, 
ROBERT MANY. 
EDWARD A. TAFT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320116.txt	(No Model.) 
E. J. COLBY, 
-- WATCH MAN's TIME RECORDER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 320,116, 
Patented June 16, 1885. 
 
(No Model.) 
E. J. COLBY, 
WATCHMAN'S TIME RECORDER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 320,116, 
Patented June 16, 1885. 
rivetitor 
$22, 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. d. c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD J. COL BY, OF CINCIN N AT I, OHIO. 
WATCH MANS T ME REC C. R. E. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Eletters EPatent No. 320,116, dated gaine 16, 1885. 
Application filed February 13, 1885. (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all whoIn it inctly concer'72: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD J. COLBY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Cincinnati, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Watchmen's Time 
Recorders, of which the following is a speci?i 
cation. 
My improvement relates to watchmens re 
Its object is a convenient reliable 
corders. 
means for the officer to record the time he was 
On duty at any particular place. 
It consists of a revolving dial actuated by a 
time-piece, which dial carries a disk of slate 
or paper, and a pencil - carrying arm held 
above the paper in a position to be turned 
and make a mark upon the disk, the whole 
being secured in a box under guard of a lock, 
the key of which is carried by the proprietor 
or Superintendent. 
It also consists in certain details of con 
struction and combination of parts, all of 
which will be fully understood by the follow 
ing description of the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved de 
vice, the cover of the box being thrown back 
to expose the dial and recording device. Fig. 
2 is a transverse Section of the Same taken 
through line acac of Fig. 1. In this view the 
cover is closed down and locked. Fig. 3 is 
an inside elevation of a door having my re 
corder attached to it and the registering-arm 
connected to a lever secured upon the door 
knob, so that the watchman by turning the 
knob from the outside may record the time or 
times he was present at the building. Fig. 4 
is a perspective view of the lever which is se 
cured to the lock-spindle. Fig. 5 is a verti 
cal section taken through line y) of Fig. 2 of 
a central portion of the box or case. Fig. 6 
is a perspective view of the case attached to 
the door or other portion of the building, the 
case being unlocked, showing the means of 
attachment. 
The recording mechanism is inclosed with. 
in the box A, which has a hinged cover, B, 
the box being hinged to the base C, by which 
the device is attached to the Wall Or door D 
by screws c passing through the base C and 
into the piece D, The purpose of this ar 
rangement is that the box cannot be detached 
or the time mechanism interfered with so long 
as the latch e of lock E is thrown in the posi 
tion shown in Figs. 2 and 5. Secured to the 
cover B and base C are lugs d d", with which 
the hooks of latch e engage to lock the parts 
A, B, and C together. The latch e is con 
trolled by a lock, E, which may be of any ap 
proved pattern. The time-piece Fis one of the 
ordinary circular-case clocks, the revolving 
dial F being Secured upon the hour-hand 
mandrel. The disk G, which is secured upon 
the dial, is preferably made of silicate or ar 
tificial slate, such as writing-tablets are com 
posed of, so that when the marks are recorded 
they may be rubbed out. 
Mounted within the case A and in standards 
his a shaft, H. This has projecting up from it 
an arm, I, which has jointed at its top another 
arm, I. Secured to the back of arm is a 
spring, J, which passes around over the top of 
the alm, and its free end presses upon the top 
of the arm I, so as to give a yielding pressure 
When the arm is brought down and the pen 
cil, which is secured in the pencil-carrier K, is 
pressed upon the dial G, making a mark. On 
the lower side of the shaft H another arm, l, 
projects, to which is attached one end of the 
spring Il, the Opposite end being attached to 
a standard, l'. The purpose of the spring L 
is to keep the pencil-carrier in position (shown 
in Fig. 2) until it is brought down by the key 
MI, which is applied to the angular end of the 
shaft. H through an opening in the side of the 
box A. When these boxes are placed in the 
different stories of a building to be visited by 
a watchman on the inside, he carries the key 
with him, which fits the end of the shaft in 
any number of boxes desired; but when a num 
ber of merchants or others desire to employ a 
street - watchman, who shall remain in the 
neighborhood without having access to the 
building, the boxes containing the recording 
mechanism are Secured either to the inside of 
the door or in any convenient position within 
the building, and the lever, Fig. 4, is applied 
to the spindle of the door by simply removing 
the screw which holds the knob to the spindle 
and placing the curved end of the lever, Fig. 
4, around the neck of the knob and passing 
the screw through one of the screw-holes in 
7 5 
95 
OO 
 
320,116 
O 
the curved end of the lever N, and through 
the knob into the spindle, and then connect 
ing the lever N and crank-arm of the key M. 
by a wire, O. Now it will be seen that when 
the door-knob is turned, the shaft H will be 
rocked, bringing the point of the pencilk down 
upon the dial, thus indicating the time the 
knob was turned by the watchman. The 
time-piece is wound up and set from the bot 
tom, a circular opening being left in the case 
for that purpose. If it is desired to keep a 
record of the time recorded each might, a pa 
per disk with the hours printed on it may be 
attached to the dial to be removed each morn 
ing and have the date stamped upon it. 
It is evident that the pencil-carrying arm 
may be varied, and I do not desire to limit 
myself to the exact construction shown. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, substantially as speci 
fied, of the time-piece F, having the revolving 
dial, and a recording-pencil Suspended above 
2. The combination of a watchman's time- 30 
said dial and adapted to be brought in contact 
with the dial for the purpose of recording when - 25 
ever desired, with the case ABC, lock E, and 
hooked latch e, for the purpose of simultane 
ously locking the parts together by engaging 
the lugs d d. 
register, secured as shown, and having an arm, 
M, to actuate the recording devices, with a 
lever, N, secured to the door-knob or other 
suitable actuating device, and a wire, as O, 
to connect the lever N and actuating-arm M, 35 
Substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, in a watchman's time 
recorder, of the case A, B, time-piece F, and 
revolving diai F, with the recording devices, 
consisting of rock-shaft H, carrying the arms to 
II", and pencil-carrier iX. 
EDWARD J. COLBY. 
Witnesses: 
CASPER MILES, 
GEO. J. MURRAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320217.txt	(No Model.) 
J. CAMPBELL 
LOG LOADER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 320,217, 
Patented June 16, 1885. 
Attorney 
(No Model.) 
J. CAMPBELL. 
LOG LOADER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 320,217, 
Patented June 16, 1885. 
WITWESSES 
/0. (244). 
IWWEWTOR 
26.2%, Attorney 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN CAMPBELL OF MUSKEGON, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO ALEXANDER 
RODGERS, OF SAME PLACE. 
LOG - LOADER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 320,217, dated June 16, 1885. 
Application filed March 23, 1885. 
(No model.) 
To aid, whom it may concert: 
Be it known that I, JOHN CAMIPBELL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Muskegon, 
in the county of Muskegon and State of Michi 
gan, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Log-Rolling Machines, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
mechanism employed in saw-mills for the pur 
pOse of retaining logs upon the inclined deck 
or log Way of a saw-mill until it is desired to 
place them in position upon the log-carriage, 
When Said mechanism is caused to release the 
log heal'est the carriage (should there be more 
than one on the logway) and roll the same 
thereon, and at the same time prevent any 
other logs which may be upon the logway from 
following so closely as to interfere with the 
One rolled upon the carriage. The mechanism 
employed to accomplish this object consists, 
essentially, of a shaft placed beneath the rails 
of a logway and carrying two notches or sec 
tor-wheels placed at such a distance from each 
other as to bear against the log near its ends, 
said shaft being also provided with a rack 
arm depending therefrom and connected at its 
lower end with a chain, one end of which 
passes over a sheave and has attached to it a 
Weight by means of which the rack-arm is 
drawn in one direction and gives a correspond 
ing movement in the opposite direction to the 
periphery of the wheels upon the shaft. In 
order to move the rack-arm in the opposite di 
rection and throw a log lying in the notches 
of the sector-wheels upon the log-carriage, the 
end of the chain opposite to that to which the 
weight is attached is carried to a spool ro 
tated by a system of frictional gearing which 
is under the control of the sawyer, so that when 
it is desired to place a log upon the carriage 
it is only necessary for him to start the gear 
ing, which rotates the chain-spool, causing one 
end of the chain to be wound thereon. This 
acts upon the rack-lever, which rotates the 
shaft and wheels, causing the latter to throw 
the log lying in the notches or recesses of the 
sector-wheels upon the log-carriage, when the 
disconnection of the friction-gear allows the 
weight to draw the rack-lever in the opposite 
direction, so as to return the notches of the 
45 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 6o 
In order to a full understanding of the 75 
wheels into the proper position to receive the 
next log, the remaining log or logs upon the 
log way having in the meantime been prevent 
ed from rolling toward the carriage by the un- 55 
broken portion of the periphery of the Wheels 
which is projected above the platform of the 
logway when said wheels are turned to throw 
or roll the log lying in the notches. 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a front 
view of the mechanism and logway with a log 
in the notches or recesses of the Sector-wheels 
ready to be placed upon the log-carriage. Fig. 
2 is an end view of the logway, rolling mech- 65 
anism, and log-carriage with a log in the re 
cesses of the sector-wheels and other logs upon 
the logway retained in position thereon by Said 
wheels. Fig. 3 is also an end view showing 
the manner in which the sector-wheels pre- 7o 
vent the remaining logs upon the logway from 
rolling forward during the operation of plac 
ing a log upon the log-carriage. Fig. 4 is all 
enlarged side view of one of the sector-wheels. 
construction and arrangement of this mech 
anism, its several parts and their operation 
will now be specifically described. A repre 
sents the mill-floor, and B the inclined log 
deck, provided with rails a, preferably of or- 8o 
dinary railroad-iron. Upon these rails the 
logs are placed as they are hauled into the mill 
from the log-basin or other place of storage. 
D represents an ordinary log-carriage, upon 
which the logs are placed to be cut up into 85 
lumber by the saw. 
In suitable journal-boxes, t) b, beneath the . 
log-deck is carried the shaft E, extending 
nearly or quite the whole length of the same. 
Secured upon this shaft are two sector-wheels, 
FF, each having a segment, c, cut from its 
periphery, forming a recess within which is 
secured the Springs, as shown in Fig. 4 of the 
drawings. The rack arm or lever G is secured 
upon the shaft E at any desired point in its 95 
length, and depends from the shaft so far as 
to bring its lower end beneath the mill-floor. 
To this lower end of the lever G is attached 
the clevises e e', to one of which, the clevise, 
is attached the chain d, extending horizontally too 
beneath the floor to the sheave H, over which 
it passes, and has attached to its depending 
O 
15 
 
320,217 
5 
O 
25 
end the weight E. To the other clevis, e, is 
secured the chain d", which passes over the 
sheave H' and thence down to the spool I. 
This spool is mounted upon journals which 
revolve in boxes secured upon the bridge-trees 
J of the frame K beneath the mill-floor. The 
spool I is provided with a friction-pulley, g, 
to which motion is communicated by a fric 
tion-pinion, h, carried upon the shaft L. This 
shaft L. revolves in bearings upon the bridge 
trees M, one of which is movable, being piv 
oted at one end, and provided at the other 
with an adjustable eye-bolt, i', by means of 
which it is connected to rack-shaft N and le 
ver N'. To the upper end of this lever N' is 
attached a rack, k, which connects with a le 
ver, O, the upper end of said lever O passing 
through and above the mill-floor into a posi 
tion where it may be readily operated by the 
Sawyer. Motion is imparted to the shaft L, 
carrying the friction-pinions, by a belt from: 
any continuously-revolving pulley upon the: 
mill-shafting to the pulley P, secured upon the 
shaft. 
The operating mechanism is as follows, the 
Several parts being in the position shown in 
Fig. 2: When the sawyer desires to place a 
log upon the carriage, he pulls the lever O, 
which brings the friction-pinion into contact 
with the periphery of the friction-wheel g, 
which rotates the spool and winds up the 
chain d", which acts upon the lever G, and par 
tially revolves the shaft E. The revolution 
of this shaft gives motion to the sector 
wheels, by which the projecting point c of said 
wheels is carried down below the line of the 
rails a, allowing the log which occupies the 
notches or recesses c to roll forward upon the 
log-carriage. This movement of the log is as 
sisted and made positive by the opposite side 
of the recess c", which rises and forces the log 
forward, and at the same time projects up 
ward between it and the log in its rear, pre 
venting the latter from coming too far down 
the inclined upper surface of the rails. When 
the log is properly placed upon the carriage, 
the sawyer releases the lever O, which allows 
the friction-pinion to drop out of contact with 
the friction-wheelg. Then the weight W, which 
5o has been raised by the winding of the chain 
35 
45 
upon the spool, begins to act, returning the 
parts to their normal position, as shown in 
Fig. 2, the part c' of the recesses c drop 
ping below the top of the rails a, and the pro 
jection c' rising to form a stop against which 55 
the logs remaining on the rails rest and are 
prevented from rolling onto the log-carriage. 
The spring s within the recess of the sector 
wheels is used to stop small logs, so that two 
of them may not get into the recess at the same 6o 
time; but a log large enough to prevent an 
other from entering depresses the spring and 
rolls over it. 
Having thus described my invention, Iclaim 
75 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 65 
the following: 
1. The log-rolling machine consisting of 
sector-wheels provided with recesses, c, and 
springs s, located in said recesses, said sector 
wheels being mounted upon a suitable shaft, 7o 
in combination with the lever G, chain and 
friction mechanism for operating said parts, 
and the weights W, arranged to return the 
sector-wheels to their normal position after 
they have been partially rotated by the fric 
tion-gear. 
2. In a log-rolling mechanism, the combi 
nation of the shaft E, upon which are the sec 
tor-wheels FF, said sector-wheels being pro 
vided with recesses c, in which are located 
the springs s, the lever or rock-arm G, attach 
ed to the shaft E, and the friction-gearing 
and chain for operating the same, as specified. 
3. In a log-rolling mechanism, the sector 
wheels mounted upon shaft E, lever G, clevises 
e e' thereon, chains connecting said lever to 
the weight W, and friction devices for rotat 
ing said shaft in opposite directions, in com 
bination with adjustable eyebolt i', rock-shaft 
N, lever N', connecting-rod k, and hand-lever 
O, connected to each other and to the friction 
gearing, and arranged to operate the friction 
mechanism in the manner shown and de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
95 
JOHN CAMIPBELL. 
Witnesses: 
J. C. McLAUGHILIN, 
ROBT. E. BUNKER, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320317.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 320,317. 
T. A. WESTON, 
HOISTING MECHANISM, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 16, 1885. 
 
 
 
\ 
S. 
, A. 
A 
A 67. Af 
l 
- 
arty O 
 
tale, CE 3 
32E,6 232 2. Eis E2 
N 
N 
SN 
225 24 S. 
z 
Yr72 
28 2 a2X 
2 2. aS2 se : S. 
ha 
SN 
HN 
R 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
f 
f 
S. NN 
As 
  
 
N 
NS 
sa? 
WITNESSES 
%29 OC. of...e4 
EN 
Y 
S N 
iii.) 
|H|| 
NilssS Z5 
y-Z 
ZZ 
N 
&.3% 
NVENTOR 
Z 72 oraces 4.7Westo22, 
Lity 7 is Attornel/S 
Ra 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
u 
y 
f 
(No Model.) 
T. A. WESTON, 
HOISTING MECHANISM, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 320,317. 
Patented June 16, 1885. 
ITISHIH 
ra SNGN 
S SN S N2. Rae 
= SSS 1. N. 
3.SS 
N $3SN N2N or 
SHH N25N 
XEt, 
OS 
  
 
 
  
WITNESSES 
%29 (Z. oee 
C24, 23. CZ 
sas 
INVENTOR 
By 722s Attorneys 
272 ozczsa.7Veszor, 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. washington, d. c. 
I 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS A. WESTON, OF STAMFORD, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
YALE & TOWNE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
HOSTING MECHAN SM. 
:53: CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 320,317, dated June l6, 1885. 
Application filed January 8, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all w/von, it inval? eOnce Piu: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS A. WESTON, of 
Stamford, in the county of Fairfield and State 
of Connecticut, have invented an Improved 
Hoisting Apparatus, of which the following is 
a specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings. 
The object of my invention is to obtain a 
very compact and portable hoisting machine, 
the mechanical purchase or power of which 
consists, mainly, in the plain spur - gearing I 
employ, ill order that the machine may have 
little friction, and which machine shall be al 
Ways Self-checked against backward motion or 
is turning down of the load during both opera 
tions of hoisting and lowering. 
The safety-lowering and self-sustaining fea 
ture employed I do not claim, broadly, as it 
forms the subject of my Letters Patent of the 
United States, No. 9S,000, December 14, 1869, 
and in the particular application to a pulley 
block or portable hoist is shown in Fig. 20 of 
my English Letters Patent, No. 960, March 
15, 1S73. 
In the drawings the chains and lower block 
are not shown, being of the ordinary kind. 
Figure 1 is an elevation with the plain spur 
gearing eXposed. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
transverse section through the line 22, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an elevation on the Sprocket. Wheel 
side of the block. Fig. 4 is a vertical trans 
verse section. Fig. 5 is a sectional view of a 
ratchet-pawl and segment of the ratchet-wheel 
in the line 55, Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a sectional 
view of a piece forming a brace or stay to the 
frame sides, and also a shaft bearing chain 
guides and chain stripper or clearer. 
A is the main shaft, carried in bearings B", 
projecting inwardly toward each other from 
the inner sides of the main frame B. The main 
hoisting-sheave or chain - wheel C and spur 
wheel D are respectively keyed upon or firmly 
fixed to the shaft A. The pinion E, fixed to 
or forming part of the shaft E, engages by its 
teeth With the Wheel D. The shaft E at its 
other end carries upon a screw-thread the driv 
ingsprocket-wheel H., correspondingly thread 
ed in its boss to travel on the shaft. The shaft 
E also carries at the same end, but firmly se 
cured by the key a' and screw-nut 0, the abut 
ment collar and disk-hub F. The latter has a 
45 
AO 
25. 
3O 
35 
 
disk-carrying hub F of smooth periphery for 
the ratchet-wheel G, and its disks to turn upon. 
It has also in its periphery sunken key-grooves 
or slots, F, to receive projections on the cen- 55 
tral aperture of the intermediate disks E, and 
thus to hold them securely, but permitting 
their longitudinal motion on the shaft. 
G is a ratchet-wheel rim formed upon the 
middle friction-disk, G'. The inner annular 
surface of the said rim, forming a recess or 
shallow cylinder on each side of the flange or 
disk G', has thereon lugs. G', engaging securely 
the friction-disks G", but permitting their lon 
gitudinal movement to or from the adjacent 65 
disks. The said disks G G are bored Cen 
trally to turn upon the disk-hub F, which 
supports them. The intermediate disks, F, of 
the hub are at their periphery free and clear 
of contact with the inner surface of the ratchet- 7o 
rim G, so that the one set of disks F may, in 
lowering a load or in the backward driving of 
the shaft E, have an independent rotary fric 
tional brake action upon the then stationary 
disks G' G", which are held at rest by the lugs 
G and the pawls I. The said two sets of disks 
are intended when lowering a load to furnish 
a large area for frictional brake-action be 
tween the back Ward-moving parts, viz., the 
sprocket-wheel H and hub F, and the then 
stationary parts, the ratchet-wheel or rim G 
and the disks G' G". 
The said disk-brake is made in accordance 
with the specification of my United States 
Patent No. 75,227, March 3, 186S. 
My present improvement in the said disk 
brake consists, chiefly, in making the ratchet 
wheel of an annular or hoop form, supported 
by the disks it encircles and engages with by 
their slotted peripheries, the Said disks turn 
ing upon the central hub, which also carries 
the intermediate disks engaged there with by 
slots and keys or projections. The said an 
nular ratchet-wheel is by preference cast or 
formed in one piece with a flange or disk form 
ing one of the acting friction-disks of the se 
ries belonging to and engaging with the ratch 
et-wheel. I am thus enabled to bring the 
ratchet-wheel and disk-lbrake into the space 
or thickness of a plain ratchet-Wheel occu 
pying no more space lengthwise upon the 
shaft. I am further enabled by my invention 
90 
IOO 
 
 
320,317 
to make the said ratchet - wheel, the disk 
brake, the safety-incline device, and also the 
driving-pulley or sprocket-wheel occupy, all 
together upon the shaft, only the space needed 
for a common sprocket-wheel. The said driv 
ing-pulley or sprocket-wheel, safety-incline 
device, frictional-disk ratchet-wheel, and dif 
ferential pawls constitute my improved safety 
sprocket-wheel, which contains within its own 
thickness substantially all the foregoing parts, 
yielding a brake - action self-checked at all 
times in hoisting or in lowering by its continu 
ous safety lowering motion. 
The ratchet-teeth of the rim G are spaced 
apart, so as to act differentially or alternately 
with the pawls II, which latter are pivoted 
to the outer frame, B". The said pawls are 
recessed around their pivot-hole to receive and 
inclose from dirt or injury or displacement the 
curved springs I, the curved form securing the 
springs from breakage by their ordinary bend 
ing action. Such pawls and self-contained 
springs are therefore well adapted for use upon 
the frames of hoists, and particularly of pulley 
blocks which are exposed to rough usage as 
they are dragged about from place to place. 
For like reasons the spur-gearing is covered 
by a casing or box, B", which adds stiffness to 
the frame, as does also the cross-stay piece K, 
(shown separately in Fig. 6,) which piece also 
provides an ample bearing for the shaft E, 
chain-guides K' K', and a stripper or clearer, 
K", to secure the disengagement of the chain 
from the sheave as it passes away from the lat 
ter. 
An ordinary endless hand-chain is placed 
upon the spocket-wheel H, and a strong li?t 
ing-chain (not endless) is placed on the sheave 
C, one end being secured to the eye B in the 
lower edge of the frame side, and from thence 
the chain descends to a common snatch-block. 
Passing beneath the sheave of the latter, and 
thus sustaining it, the chain ascends through 
the chain-guide K to the hoisting side of the 
sheave C. Passing over the latter, and down 
through the cruciform guide-hole K, the slack 
chain may hang downward freely; but for coin 
pactness its loose end may be pinned to any 
convenient point in the lower part of the frame 
B. The frame B is provided with the ordi 
nary cross-head B and hook B". 
The pinion E may, if desired, be engaged 
with an internally-toothed wheel in lieu of the 
plain one D, omitting the cover thereto. 
The direction of motion in the several parts 
during hoisting is indicated by arrows, also 
by the direction of the pawls and ratchet-teeth, 
the latter never moving backward. 
The operation is as follows: The sprocket 
wheel being driven in the direction for hoist 
ing, it will at first turn upon the shaft E, ad 
vancing along the Screw-threads outward to 
ward the collar F. 
It will then compress 
against the said collar F the intervening fric 
tion - disks within the ratchet-rim G. The 
amount of compression is of course determined 
by the resistance of the load and varies there 
IO 
25 
55 
65 
with. The load thus insures for itself in ex 
cess always efficient frictional adhesion be 
tween the disks and friction-surfaces of the 
sprocket-wheel and hub F, and those of the 
ratchet-wheel G. to thus unite them all. The 
pawls I arrest backward motion in the ratch 
et-wheel, so that at any instant the driving 
force may cease and the hand-chain be let go, 
when the load will remain safely suspended. 
To lower the load, the sprocket-wheel His 
turned backward. This motion unscrews it 
upon its threaded bearing on the shaft E, re 
leasing from pressure the disks and collar F, 
and so soon as the pressure and resultant fric 
tion are thus sufficiently lessened, the load will 
descend and inpei the chain-sheave C, shaft 
A, spur-wheels, shaft E, collar or hub F, and 
its disks F backward, following closely the 
retiring motion of the sprocket-wheel H, and 
screwing the latter up again to compress the 
disks as fast as it is unscrewed from then by 
the continued backward pulling of the hand 
chain. The load can therefore only be low 
ered by the continued backward driving of 
the sprocket-wheel, and, as when hoisting, the 
operator can instantly let go his hold upon the 
hand-chain and leave the load safely suspend 
ed. Were the disks all omitted except the 
one forming the flange of the ratchet. rim, the 
hoist would be still operative and self-sustain 
ing, but the wear of the single-friction sur 
faces of the hub F and sprocket-wheel upon 
the intervened ratchet-flange would be very 
rapid and the lowering motion not so smooth 
and even from the insufficient brake area. 
My improved frictional ratchet-wheel and 
brake occupies only the longitudinal space 
along the shaft necessary for its teeth to be of 
sufficient breadth, and the said ratchet-wheel 
and contents come substantially within the 
breadth or thickness of the sprocket-wheel 
rim, thus adding nothing to the bulk of this 
form of hoist, in which portability is the first 
essential, and in a less degree, only the colm 
pactness of my invention in this feature is as 
desirable for many fixed hoisting-machines. 
By my invention I am also enabled to place 
the frame sides of the hoist very close to 
gether, leaving between them merely the space 
needed to accommodate the thickness of the 
main sheave C, from which the load hangs 
centrally in line with the suspending-hook B". 
My construction, nevertheless, affords ample 
length of bearing to both shafts A and E, and 
the external box of gearing on one side of the 
frame approximately balances the sprocket 
wheel on the other side and its self-contained 
frictional brake apparatus. 
For the purpose of pulley-block construc 
tion there is an obvious advantage in the con 
struction of my invention, consisting in plac 
ing the ratchet-wheel and collar F on the outer 
side of the said sprocket-wheel farthest from 
the hoist, for it permits the sprocket-wheel to 
have its plain side in close proximity to the 
hoist-frame, allowing only the very small clear 
ance required for the sprocket-wheel to turn 
9O 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
320,317 
3 
5 
IO 
free of contact with the frame and to traverse 
slightly upon its screw-threaded shaft. Thus 
I avoid making the sprocket-wheel and shaft 
unduly overhung or projected from the hoist 
frame. In many forms of hoists it may sim 
plify the frame to place the ratchet-wheel and 
collar on the side of the sprocket-wheel next 
the frame, when the pawls can be hung to the 
main frame. 
A helical incline Ol' Screw-surface of one con 
volution upon the shaft E, in lieu of the con 
tinuous screw-thread and a corresponding in 
cline upon the boss of the sprocket - wheel, 
would effect the purposes of my invention; but 
not equally with the screw-thread, inasmuch 
as the latter affords a positive retiring motion 
from the disks When it is turned backward on 
the shaft, and so more surely releases them 
from pressure when it is desired to lower the 
load or the unloaded chain and lower block. 
When the main sheave is wholly unloaded, 
it can be driven backward by the sprocket 
wheel or driving-pulley H with a positive mo 
tion when the sprocket-wheel has been turned 
backward as far as it will go toward the inner 
end of the screw-thread. When desired, the 
said improved driving-pulley may be oper 
ated by a common crank-handle by spur-teeth 
in its outer periphery, or by a driving-band of 
any kind to which its periphery may have been 
adapted. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States, is 
1. A set of friction-disks loosely supported 
by a central hub and connected by a rim at 
their peripheries, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a sprocket-wheel, an 
abutment-collar, and a screw-threaded shaft 
with which they both engage, so that the ro- 4o 
tation of the wheel in One direction causes 
fictional contact, substantially as set forth. 
3. A driving-pulley or sprocket-wheel pro 
vided with an internally - screwed boss, a 
screwed shaft, friction-disks, ratchet-rim, or 
equivalent checking device, supporting-hub, 
and abutment collar, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. A pulley-block frame provided with in 
ternal bearings for both the driving and main 
shafts, so that the width of the frame is not 
increased by Said bearings. 
5. In combination with a pulley-block frame, 
a stay or brace which serves as a shaft-bear 
ing and also a chain-guide, substantially as 
described. 
6. In a pulley-block, the combination of a 
main shaft and clhain-sheave turning upon in 
wardly-projecting bearings which project into 
recesses in the chail-sheave, substantially as 
described. 
7. A pulley-block having combined with it 
differential ratchet and pawls, substantially as 
described. 
S. In a hoist, the combination of a main 
frame, an abutment-collar, F, and a Sprocket 
wheel interposed between the two, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 21st day of December, 7C 
A. D. 1SS-1. 
55 
THOS. A. WESTON. 
Witnesses: 
ScHUYLER MERRITT, 
GEO. E. W.IIITE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320417.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDRE VAN STRA ALER, OF POLA DE LENA, ASTURIAS, SPAIN. 
PROCESS OF EXTRACTING ARSENIC AND MERCURY CONTAINED IN THE RESIDUES OBTAINED IN THE 
DISTILLATION OF MERCURAL ORES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 320,417, dated June 16, 1885. 
Application filed March 9, 1885. (No specimens.) Patented in Spain March 22, 1884; in Austria-Hungary December 29, 1884, and 
in Italy December 31, t884. 
55 
65 
o 
75 - 
25 
To all twho7, it nazy concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDRE WAN 
STRAALER, a resident of Pola de Lena, As 
turias, Spain, have invented a new ald useful 
improvement in process of extracting arsenic 
and mercury contained in the residues ob. 
tained in the distillation of mercurial ores, 
which process is fully set forth in the follow. 
ing specification. 
The invention has reference to the treatment 
of the soot or residues which, in the distilla 
tion of ores of mercury, are obtained from the 
chambers, alludels, or condensers. These resi 
dues contain sulphides of mercury, metallic 
mercury in 
infinitesimal particles, greasy 
matters, powdered materials of different kinds, 
oxides, chlorides of mercury, &c. Moreover, 
if the ore contained arsenic, there would be 
found in the residues arsenious acid, metallic 
arsenic, sulphides of arsenic, and also mer. 
curial compounds, sulphates, arseniates, &c. 
The particles of mercury contained in the 
mass cannot be extracted by the mechanical 
methods heretofore employed, because the 
great quantity of foreign and greasy matters 
prevents the particles from nuiting to form 
drops, and in any case the mercurial com 
pounds are lost if the ore does not contain 
arsenic, and if it contain arsenic the mercury 
amalgamated with the metallic arsenic is lost, 
as Well as the mercurial and arsenical com 
pounds. 
Distillation of the soot or residues has also 
been proposed for separation of the mercury, 
by heating the residues in iron tubes which 
are connected with iron condensation-tubes, 
the condensed mercury running out from the 
condensation-tubes into a reservoir; but in 
this old process neither reagents nor pressure 
in the retort has been employed, so far as I 
am aware, Bor has the process been so con 
ducted as to decompose, or at least thoroughly 
and effectually to decompose, the mercurial 
compounds and separate the mercury there 
The recovery of the mercury and arsenic or 
the mercury (if the ore does not contain ar 
senic) is the object of the present invention. 
The invention also has for its object to sep 
5o arate the mercury from the arsenic which is 
carried over with it, by a subsequent distilla 
tion under Such coditions that the arsenic 
or arsenical compound is melted and can be 
cast into commercial forms. Of course, the 
purification from metals is not new, but, so far 
as I am aware, it has not heretofore been at 
tempted so to separate it from arsenic, and 
certainly not to effect the separation in such 
way as to fuse the arsenic compound and ob 
tail it in commercial shape. 
I. Where the soot o' residue contains a '- 
senic.- If, in a close vessel provided with a 
condenser, sulphides of arsenic and sulphides 
of mercury be subjected to a certain tempera 
ture with a proper degree of pressure the sul 
plur of the mercury sulphide combines with 
the arsenic, leaving the mercury free. This 
action may be explained by the instability of 
the sulphides of arsenic, and by the fact that 
tlose sulphides which are very rich in arsenic 
distill at a temperature much more elevated 
than those rich in sulphur. At a certain tem 
perature they decompose and the sulphur com 
bines in large proportion with the arsenic at 
the commencement of the decomposition, and 
the sulphide formed goes off to be condensed 
in the apparatus of condensation. As the 
temperature rises, less and less sulphur is 
contained in the sulphides of arsenic in the 
vessel, and when the temperature is reached 
at which sulphide of mercury is decomposed 
the sulphide of arsenic which remains is very 
poor in sulphur and unites with the sulphur 
of the sulphide of mercury. The residues or 
soot, (products of the distillation of mercury, 
such as collect in the chambers, alludels, or 
condensers,) either after the mercury has been 
separated, so far as the separation can be 
effected by the mechanical means heretofore 
in use, or previously, are charged into a close 
vessel or retort provided with a condenser, 
the outlet from which communicates with a 
pipe which is immersed at the other end in 
water to such a depth as to maintain the de 
sired degree of pressure. Before introducing 
the material to be treated it is mixed with a 
certain quantity of deoxidating and desulph 
urating reagent. When the charge has been 
inserted, the temperature is raised little by 
little until a red heat is obtained. The rise Ioo 
45 from. 
35 
90 
95 
EO 
 
: 
320,417 
is made very slow at the beginning in order 
to prevent powdered material from being car 
ried over by the escaping steam or gas. From 
the product of this distillation the mercury is 
separated by mechanical means so far as pos. 
sible and the remainder is placed in a close 
vessel, such as before described, after first 
mixing with the quantity of sulphur neces 
sary for the production of one of the less 
unstable sulphides, such as the bisulphide, 
for example. So soon as the whole mass is 
melted, sulphur is added and the temperature 
raised so as to produce red oriment or the 
Sulphide of arsenic corresponding to AsS,-- 
2 AsS and it is then run into molds or r - 
ceptacles of any kind. 
In the condenser will loe found the different 
arsenical products, but in very small quanti 
ties, and also the whole of the mercury. This 
latter may be separated mechanically and the 
residue be subjected to a new operation. 
Instead of red orpiment, orpiment or any 
sulphide of arsenic can be manufactured in 
like manner. 
If it be desired to obtain white arsenic or 
arsenious acid, the residue or soot is distilled 
in the nanner above described, but it is mixed 
only with lime or a desulphurant; and the re 
sult of the first operation is arsenious acid in 
powder with metallic mercury. This product 
is melted in an apparatus such as used in Sax 
ony, or in other suitable apparatus, and the 
result is on the one hand compact and vitreous 
arsenious acid, and on the other, in the con 
; denser all the metallic mercury mixed with an 
insignificant quantity of arsenious acid in pow 
der. The mercury is separated mechanically 
and the residue is added to the material for a 
following operation. 
Where the mercatrial soot or residue does 
not contatin (tsenic.-After a preliminary mix 
ing with a desulphurating, reducing, or other 
Suitable reagent, the soot or residue is distilled 
in a retort-furnace provided with a condenser, 
as already described, taking care to conduct 
the operation slowly at the beginning to avoid 
carrying over any powder, and the tempera 
ture is increased gradually until that neces 
sary for the decomposition of the mercurial 
II. 
55 
compound is attained. In the condenser is 
collected all the metallic mercury with an in 
significant quantity of powder. The mercury 
is separated mechanically and the residue is 
added to a following operation. 
In the place of mixing the reagents with the 
soot in either case, a second retort for contain 
ing the reagents alone can be interposed be 
tween the retort and condenser, and the re 
sistance which it opposes to the passage of the 
gases suffices generally to produce the desired 
pressure. The immersion of the exit-pipe in 
Water is then tunnecessary, and the non-con 
densible products of distillation may be per 
mitted to escape into the atmosphere. 
The second retort has an independent fire, 
in order that it may be heated and the re 
agents be brought to the temperature desired 
for the decomposition of the mercurial and 
arsenical compounds before lighting the fire 
under the distilling-retort. 
In this manner 
the passage into the condenser of unreduced 
compounds is avoided, and the consumption is 
leduced to what is strictly necessary. 
7 O 
75 
I 'laim 
1. The process herein described for the ex 
traction of mercury and arsenic contained in 
the residues or soot obtained in distilling their 
ores by heating said residues or soot gradually 
in a close vessel under pressure to the temper 
ature required for decomposing the mercurial 
and the arsenical compounds and condensing 
the products of distillation, the decomposition 
of said compounds being assisted by suitable 
reagents, to the action of which they are sub 
jected, substantially as described. 
2. The process of separating arsenic and 
mercury by heating the mass and thereby 
melting the arsenical compound and volatiliz 
ing and condensing the mercury, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
A. WAN STRAALER. 
9O 
Witnesses: 
GENERoso MARTINEZ, 
EUSTOQUID SUAREZ. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320517.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 320,517. 
 
G, W, WASHIBURN. 
FASTENING FOR BUTTONS, 
Patented June 23, 1885, 
 
 
S. 
 
 
 
7ZZZ/Zeases 
(2c/ 
72-----e-r- 
w 
C. C. 724---z-z--ee-et-, 
. Cle. 
Gaoa 6A 21 A225A/40/A/y, 
Azy 22&radio7726g/ 
Z72ceyzor 
-66-2, 
N. PETERs, rheto-lithographer, Washingtor, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. WASHIBURN, OF WEST NEW BRIGHTON, NEW YORK. 
FASTENING FOR BUTTONS. 
SPECI:ICATION fo:ming part of Letterg Patent No. 320,517, dated June 23, 1885. 
Application filed April 25, 1885. (No model.) 
To a 2Z Zuhon, it Tal/ conce772. 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. WASHIBURN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at West 
New Brighton, in the State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Fastenings for Buttons, &c., of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates, primarily, to fasten 
ings for cuff-buttons, collar-buttons, and shirt 
studs, but may be embodied in part in scarf 
pins and the like. It consists, first, in a novel 
construction of the shoe' of the button or 
stud, whereby its insertion is facilitated, and 
at the same time a double hold on the respect 
ive sides of the button-hole is afforded; sec 
ondly, in the combination, with a rigidly-at 
tached support for the back of the fabric 
formed by said shoe or the pin or pins of a 
scarf jewel or the like, of a spring-detent hav 
ing a serrated end, which bites the fabric in 
contact therewith until forced back by a card 
or the like, for the purpose of resisting the 
escape or withdrawal of buttons, &c., until 
they are purposely released by the wearer; 
and, thirdly, in attaching said spring-detent 
by a hinge or pintle joint, whereby it is adapt 
ed to be made fast by hard-soldering, without 
the impairment of its elasticity by annealing. 
A sheet of drawings accompanies this speci 
fication as part thereof. 
Figures 1 and 2 of these drawings are edge 
views of a cuff-button illustrating this inven 
tion. Fig. 3 represents a section on the line 
33, Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a front view of the shoe 
and post of the button as they appear before 
being united with the other parts; and Figs. 
5 and 6 are additional edge views of the but 
ton, illustrating, respectively, the fastening 
and unfastening operations. Figs. 7 to 12, in 
clusive, illustrate other applications of the 
same fastening and modifications thereof, 
Fig. 7 being an edge view, and Fig. 8 a scc 
tional back view, of a shirt-stud; Fig. 9, an 
edge view, and Fig. 10 a back view, of a jewel 
too small to be conveniently provided with a 
hinged pin-tongue; and Figs. 11 and 12, re 
spectively, an edge view and a back view of a 
scarf-pin provided with a hinge-attached 
spring-detent according to this invention. 
Like letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Said cuff-button, Figs. 1 to 6, inclusive, is 
provided with a shoe, s, in the form of a ta 
pering oval with rounded edges, as shown in 
Fig. 4. This is rigidly united with the button 
proper or body B of the cuff-button by a near 
ly flat shank or post, p, having the form of a 
flat oval in cross-section, as shown in Fig. 3, 
and located near the larger end of the shoe, as 
shown in Fig. 4, and preferably away from the 
center of the button, as seen in Fig. 3, so that 
the long end of the shoeshall not project unnec 
essarily beyond the edge of the button. This 
construction of shoe and shank facilitates in 
serting the button in stiff cuffs without mar 
ring the linen, the shoe passing through the 
button-holes small end foremost, its long end 
coming to rest flat against the cuff inside and 
its short end or heel catching and holding 
within the cuff on the opposite side of the but 
ton-hole from that behind which said longer 
end holds, a secure double hold being thus 
afforded, as illustrated in Fig. 5, the flat 
shank of post p occupying the button-hole and 
precluding displacement by turning. As its 
central portion performs no function, the shoe 
may be made of wire, in skeleton form, as in 
dicated in dotted limes in Fig. 4. 
A spring detent, d, having its free end ser 
rated, as shown in Figs. 2, and 3, and its flat 
back resting against that of the button proper, 
engages by its teeth with the outer surface of 
the cuff, so as to resist the escape or with 
drawal of the button, and thus renders the 
inserted button securely fastened or locked 
in automatically, as also illustrated by said 
Fig. 5. To unfasten it a card or the like is 
inserted between the spring-detent and the 
cuff, so as to disengage the teeth of the former 
from the latter, as illustrated in Fig. 6, and 
then, or at the same time, the cuff is unbut 
toned from said heel end of the shoe, as indi 
cated at the upper end of said Fig. 6, after 
which the button may be quickly removed, as 
indicated by the arrow in the figure. 
To provide for securely uniting the parts 
with the aid of hard solder without annealing 
said spring-detent, a small hinge-tube, h", is 
hard-soldered to said post p before the latter 
is attached to the button, as represented in 
Fig. 4, a pair of hinge-tubes being formed 
on the inner end of the detent, as shown in 
55 
65 
7, 
75 
85 
90 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
IOO 
2 
320, 57 
thereof operates automatically to fasten the 
article to which it is attached against escape 
9r withdrawal, and is unlocked by inserting 
a card or the like between its serrated end and 
the fabric, with which the latter interlocks. 
Other analogous applications and modifica 
tions of the same will occur to those skilled in 
the art. 
Having thus described my said improve 
ment in fastenings for buttons, &c., I claim as 
my invention and desire to patent under this 
specification 
1. The combination, with the body of a 
button or the like, of a rigidly-attached flat 
post perpendicular to its back, and a shoe in 
the form of a long tapering oval rigidly united 
with said post near its larger end, the post be 
ing transverse with reference to the shoe, and 
said larger end of the shoe projecting as a 
rigid heel, substantially as herein specified. 
2. The combination, with the body of a 
button or the like, of a rigidly-attached sup 
port for the back of the fabric, to which it is 
thereby connected, adapted to be inserted end 
wise through the fabric, and a spring-detent 
having a serrated end opposed to said support 
to resist escape or withdrawal, Substantially 
as herein specified. 
3. The combination, with the body of a 
button or the like, of a rigidly-attached Sup 
port for the back of the fabric, to which it is 
thereby connected, adapted to be inserted 
endwise througn the fabric, and a spring-de 
tent having a serrated end opposed to said 
support, and attached by a hinge joint, sub 
stantially as herein specified, for the purpose 
Set forth. 
GEO. W. WASHIBURN. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY P. WELLs, 
JAS. L. EWIN. 
45 
55 
75 
IO 
Fig. 3, and a hinge-joint, h, is completed by 
inserting its pintle after the other parts are 
united. 
The shoe-post and detent constituting the 
improved fastening may be made of one or 
more sizes, in quantity, and furnished to man 
ufacturing jewelers, to be attached to buttons 
of different styles, as called for. A collar 
button would have a fastening substantially 
the same in all respects as said cuff-button. 
The fastening of said shirt-stud, Figs. 7 
and S, operates on precisely the same prin 
cible as that of said cuff-button, and in con 
struction it differs from the latter only in two 
particulars-viz., its shoes and post p are 
of round wire or jewelers tubing, adapting 
them to eyelet-holes, and its spring-detent d 
is attached to the back of the button proper 
or body B' by soft solder behind the post, 
having for this purpose a bifurcated end, e, 
to embrace the latter, illustrating this and 
analogous ways of rigidly attaching the spring 
detent in either application thereof. 
The fastening of said small jewel, Figs. 9 and 
10, consists in part of a short rigid double 
pin, p, forming a support for the back of the 
fabric, substantially similar to the long end of 
said shoes, to coact with a spring-detent, d, 
with which the jewel setting or body B is pro 
vided. The spring-detent is attached in this 
modification to the back of said body B by a 
hinge-joint, h, the fixed part of which may be 
hard - soldered on without subjecting the 
spring-detent to annealing heat, as in the form 
first described. . 
The fastening of said scarf-pin, Figs. 11 and 
12, is composed of a spring-detent, d", similar 
to the one just described, in combination with 
a short rigid pin, p", the latter performing the 
functions of said shoes as a support for the 
face of the fabric to coact with said spring-de 
tent. Said spring-detent in each application 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320617.txt	C. BLATTMANN. 
ELECTRIC IOCK. 
Patented June 23, 1885. 
s 
NNN 
Av 
(No Model.) 
No. 320,617. 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
-/-4-26-2 
??-6 2z 
//WWEWTOR 
By 
Aitorneys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES BLATTMANN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRIC LOCK. 
SFCIEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 320,617, dated June 23, 1885. 
r 
Application filed March 14, 1885. (No model.) 
To all whom it may conce7n: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES BLATTMANN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Electric Locks, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
The nature of my invention consists in the 
arrangement of a revolving locking-plate in 
the staple-case of a door-lock, fastened by a 
Suitable projection or stop to keep the locking 
plate in its proper position, and in the ar 
rangement of an electro-magnet in the staple 
Case, connected with the stop for said locking 
plate, through which this stop is operated to 
relieve the same and allow the bolt of the lock 
to pass freely. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a side view of a staple-case, with one of the 
sides removed, embodying my invention. 
Fig. II is an end view of the same with the 
Fig. III is a horizontal 
end plate removed. 
section on line Z, Z, Fig. I. 
A is a suitable casing to inclose the mechan 
ism attached to the plate B, through which 
the same is attached to the frame of the door 
by bolts bl'. This plate B has lugs C C, be 
tween which a four-winged locking-plate, 
D, can turn upon a suitable bolt, d, attached 
to said lugs CC. This plate B has a suitable 
opening for the wings of the locking-plate to 
pass freely, and is cut away at one side oppo 
site said wings to allow the lock-bolt to pass 
freely, while the other side, B', (see Fig. III,) 
is solid, except the space necessary for the 
Wings of the locking-plate to pass, and be 
tween which said solid part B and one of the 
Wings of the locking-plate D (when in position 
shown in Fig. III) the lock-bolt is firmly held 
When the door is closed. A block,E, attached to 
a lever, E, turning upon a fixed pin, e, attached 
to the casing, retains the locking-plate D in its 
proper position. The forward part, 2, of this 
block E is made wedge-shaped, (see Fig. III,) 
and the after part, 3, is made parallel with its 
other side, and fits between the inside of the 
casing and the side of one of the wings of the 
locking-plate D. By this arrangement the 
revolving locking-plate D is prevented from 
turning in the direction of the arrow 4 when 
the door is closed and the lock-bolt strikes 
55 
against one of the wings of the locking-plate. 
This block E is acted upon by a suitable. 
spring, S, to retain the same in its proper 
position. When the locking-plate D is al 
lowed to turn in the direction of the arrow 5, 
for the purpose hereinafter described, this 
block E will be pushed back to allow the lock 
ing-plate D to turn one-quarter around, when 
the action of the spring S will again force the 
block E into its proper position and lock 
again the locking-plate. 
In the lower part of the casing electro-mag 
nets M M are arranged, close to the upper end 
of which an armature-plate, N, is arranged, 
hinged on a fixed bolt, n, and held upward 
clear of the electro-magnets by a suitable 
spring, m. The bolt d, upon which the lock 
ing-plate D turns, projects some distance 
downward to act as a stop for said armature- 7O 
plate N against the action of its spring 2n; 
but any other suitable stop may be arranged 
for this purpose. 
The armature N is provided with a projec 
tion, P, which comes in contact with one of 75 
the sides of one of the wings of the locking 
plate D when the same is in its proper posi 
tion, and thus prevents said locking-plate D 
from turning in the direction of the arrow 5, 
Fig. III. The operating-wire is connected to 8O 
the screw b, from which a connecting-wire, ', 
passes to the magnets M. The bolt b is insul 
lated from the case or plate B in the usual 
manner, as shown by black lines at ac, Fig. I. 
magnets Min the usual manner, the armature 
N will be attracted to the magnets, whereby 
the stop P, attached to said armature N, will 
be moved clear of the wing of the locking- . 
plate D, when said locking-plate D can freely 90 
turn in the direction of arrow 5 and allow the 
lock-bolt, (not shown in the drawings,) which 
was confined between one of the wings of the 
locking-plate D and the side of the plate B, to 
pass clear of the staple-case. To facilitate 95 
the opening of the door and quick passing of 
the lock-bolt, it is advisable to arrange a suit 
able spring to the door to force the same open, 
and consequently its lock-bolt away from the 
locking-plate, as soon as the stop P has been ICO 
withdrawn from the locking-plate D by the 
action of the magnets. 
As soon as connection is made with the 85 
IO 
2C) 
35 
45 
2 
320,67 
What I claim as my invention, and desire wedge-shaped block E, electro-magnets MM, 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
1. The combination of winged locking-plate tially in the manner and for the purpose set 
D, turning on an arbor or bolt, d, with stop P, forth. 
4. The combination of locking-plate D with 
tro-magnets for throwing it against and away arbor or bolt d, electro-magnets M. M., hinged 
from said locking-plate, in the manner and for armature N, spring in, and stop P, substan- 20 
the purpose described. 
armature N, stop P, and spring m, substan- 15 
5 connected with mechanism operated by elec- 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
TNT 
CHARTES BLATTMANN. 
2. The combination of locking-plate D with 
Io wedge-shaped block E, electroinagnets MM, 
armature N, and stop P, substantially as de- 
Scribed. 
3. The combination of locking-plateD with 
Witnesses: 
HENRY E. ROEDER, 
F. W. BRIESEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320717.txt	(No Model.) 
W. STANLEY, Jr. 
INDUCTION COIL. 
No. 320,717. 
Patented June 23, 1885. 
a' 
 
c 
az' 
2824-voxyca. 
-6-6-24- 
841-uo-1-vot 
WZZZiar Szarazey, Jr. 
Cardsor C. G-lea 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer. Washington, D. c. 
- 1 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
WILLIAM STANLEY, JR., OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
INDUCTION-Col. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No.320,717, dated June 23, 1885. 
Application filed December 4, 1884. 
(No model ) 
5 
IO 
3O 
4.5 
To all tuft OF7, it 77 (Lily CO726er, 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMSTANLEY, Jr., 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Induc 
tion-Coils, of which the following is a full and 
exact specification. 
My invention is intended to be applied to a 
system of electrical distribution where there 
is a main circuit leading from a dynamo-elec 
tric machine or other Source of electrical 
energy and local work - circuits containing 
translating devices; and the object of the de 
vice herein described is to generate, by means 
of the current in the main circuit, induced 
currents in the work - circuits to operate the 
translating devices therein, said work-circuits 
not having electrical connection with the main 
circuit. 
In the drawings, did represent the wires of a 
main circuit leading from a generator of elec 
tricity, and at a the wires of a work-circuit. 
The generator with which the wires of the 
main circuit are connected should be one giv 
ing a direct current or a current in one direc 
tion only. The wires at a? at the end of the 
work-circuit nearest the main circuit form a 
coil, A, about an iron core, D. Outside the 
winding A of the core D is wound a second 
coil of wire, B, the extremities of which are 
connected with the mains did at the points g 
g'. Outside of the winding B is wound a third 
coil of wire, C, the extremities of which are 
also connected with the mains d d at the bind 
ing-screws gg. The Wire b', which is a con 
tinuation of the circuit through the wire bib' 
forming the winding B of the core D, forms 
the winding of a Small Solenoid, E, the mova 
ble core lc of which has a conducting face 
plate, n, which when the Solenoid E is de 
magnetized rests upon the contact-pieces e e. 
One terminal of the Wire forming the winding 
of the Solenoid E is connected with the face ), 
of the core k by means of the wire i, forming an 
elastic connection. The wires forming the 
windings B and C are wound in opposite direc 
tions around the Core D, one being a left-hand 
and the other a right-hand Winding. R is a re 
sistance-coil or Spark-arrester interposed be 
55 
65 
tween the plate in and the contacts e e by 
means of the wires ' '. 
The Operation of the device is as follows: 
When no current is passing along the mains d 
d, the Solenoid Eis demagnetized and the plate 
In rests upon the contact-pieces e e, making 
a closed circuit through the coil B. The 
circuit through the coil C is a continuously 
closed circuit. If now a current passes along 
the mains (ld, a portion of it will pass through 
the coil C and also through the coil B and 
Solenoid E. The solenoid E will be energized 
and the core k lifted, breaking the contact be 
tWeen the plate 7 and the contacts e e and 
Opening the circuit through the coil B. There 
upon the Solenoid E is again demagnetized 
and the COre it drops, making contact between 
the plate in and the contacts e e and closing 
the circuit through the coil B. In this way a 
Constant trembling motion of the core it is 
kept up, alternately opening and closing the 
circuit through the coil Bin rapid succession. 
As the coils B and C are wound in opposite 
directions about the core D, the magnetizing 
effect that a current flowing through either of 
these coils alone would have upon the core D 
is neutralized when a current is flowing 
through both by the action of the current 
flowing through the other and the core D re 
mains unmagnetized. 
AS Soon, however, as. 
the circuit through the coil B is opened and 
Current ceases to flow therein the current 
flowirg in the coil C magnetizes the core i), 
which is again demagnetized when the circuit 
through the coilB is again closed, thus becom 
ing magnetized and demagnetized alternately 
in rapid Succession. As long as current is 
flowing in the coil C alone or in both the coils 
B and C no effect is produced upon the coil A, 
but as often as current begins or ceases to flow 
in the coil B an alternating currentis generated 
in the coil A and transmitted through the 
working-circuit. 
The inductive effect upon the coil A is in 
tensified by the presence of the magnetized 95 
iron Core D, which tends to increase the number 
of lines of force passing through the coils. 
The office of the resistance R is to prevent, 
Sparking between the plate in and contacts ee 
when they are Separated or brought together. CC 
85 
75 
320,717 
45 
circuit, a secondary coil located within the 
magnetic field of the primary coils and in elec 
trical connection with the working-circuit, 
and means for alternately breaking and closing 
the circuit through one of the primary coils, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. In an inducing apparatus, the combina 
tion of a coil, C, in a continuously-closed cir 
cuit with a source of electrical energy, a coil, 
B, in electrical connection with the same 
source of energy and adapted to have its cir 
cuit alternately broken and closed, and a coil, 
A, in electrical connection with a circuit con 
taining translating devices, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
4. In a system of distribution consisting of 
a main circuit and local or work circuits, the 55 
combination, with each working-circuit, of an 
inducing apparatus consisting of a core, D, a. 
coil, A, in electrical connection with the work 
ing-circuit, a coil, B, on an alternately open 
and closed circuit With the main, and a coil, 
C, on a continuously closed circuit with the 
main, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
5. In an inducing apparatus, the combina 
tion of two coils wound in opposite directions 
about a central core and both in circuit. With 
a source of electrical energy, the one coil be 
ing in a continuously-closed circuit and the 
other in a circuit adapted to be alternately 
opened and closed, substantially as and for 7C 
the purposes set forth. 
GO 
WILLIAM STANLEY, JR. 
Witnesses: 
S. F. RANDALI, 
H. L. LUQUIES. 
5 
IO coil. 
If desired, the inducing apparatus may be 
placed at a distance from the main circuit and 
connected there with by the wires leading from 
the terminals of the coils B and C. 
In such an apparatus as I have described 
the limits of the magnetic field are more ex 
tended and its action in inducing current in 
the Secondary coil is more prompt and power 
ful than in the ordinary form of induction 
I do not confine myself to the particu 
lar form of construction shown in Figure 1 of 
the drawings as regards the relative positions 
of the coils, as it is evident that the construc 
tion may be modified in this respect without 
I5 affecting the results produced so long as the 
Secondary coil remains within the magnetic 
field of the primaries. Thus the coils may be 
placed side by side, as shown in the plan view 
in Fig. 2. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an inducing apparatus, the combina 
tion, With a secondary coil in electrical con 
nection with a working-circuit, of two primary 
25 coils wound in opposite directions and both 
in circuit with a source of electrical energy, 
the One being in a continuously-closed circuit 
and the other in a circuit adapted to be alter 
nately opened and closed, substantially as set 
2. In a system of electrical distribution con 
Sisting of a main circuit leading from a gen 
erator of electricity and one or more local 
Ol' Wolk circuits not in electrical connection 
35 with the main circuit, the combination, with 
each of the working-circuits, of an inducing 
apparatus consisting of two primary coils of 
Wire ill electrical connection with the main 
3O forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320817.txt	(No Model.) 
N. RICHEY. 
THITL COUPLING, 
No. 320,817. 
Patented June 23, 1885. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NEWTON RICHEY, OF ASHLAND, OHIO. 
THILL COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 320,817, dated June 23, 1885. 
Application filed October 25, 1884. 
(No model.) 
55 
To ?till, twhon, it notty concern: 
Beit known that I, NEWTON RICHEY, of Ash 
land, in the county of Ashland and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Thill-Couplings; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same. 
My invention is an improvement in thill 
couplings of that class in which the bolt hold 
ing the shaft-iron to the socket, is held in place 
by a movable stop, whereby the shaft-iron is 
held Securely against accidental displacement, 
but is easily removed whenever it is desired 
to remove the shafts. 
The invention consists in details of construc 
tion hereinafer described and claimed, the pur. 
pose of which is to provide a simple construc 
tion of easy manufacture, which construc 
tion Will also furnish a secure hold of the shaft 
iron and a constant spring-pressure against said 
iron to prevent rattling. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a perspective view of the entire coupling. Fig. 
2 is a Section through the clip-socket and shaft 
irol) and also through the spring-bolt and press 
ure-plate. Fig. 3 is a section taken longitudi 
nally through the coupling on the line with 
the bolt and the pressure-bar. 
A clip, A, of ordinary construction, sur 
rounds the axle. Integral with or connected 
to this is a Socket-piece, B, the sides at a of 
which extend downwardly forming downward 
ly-projecting ear or ears b b. Upon these sides 
the eye c of the shaft-iron fits snugly. Holes 
in the sides, adapted to register with holes in 
the eye c, admit the bolt d, the head of which 
is counterSulnk into the side. In the lower 
ends of the ears b b are holes made directly 
opposite each other to receive the pressure 
bolt e. One end of this bolt is provided with 
a head or nut, and upon the other end is a stop 
arm, (7, the arm being fixed to the bolt. The 
upper end of this arm is adapted to swing over 
and close to the outer face of the side b, which 
is countersunk for the hoad of the bolt d. 
The upper end of the armg is provided with 
offsets h, which, when the arm is swung up to 
cover the head of the bolt d, fits snugly over 
the upper edge of the side b. This offset is pro 
vided with a locking-pin, 1, on a reduced shank, 
and within a hole in the offsetis a spring, 2. 
The upper end of the shank is provided with 
a head, 3, and the spring tends to force out the 
pin 1 into a hole, 4, in the upper edge of the 
side. This pin holds the plate g over the end 
of the bolt d and prevents it from coming out. 
In order to remove the bolt, the head 3 is lifted 
and the spring thus withdrawn, when the plate 
may be sprung before uncovering the counter 
Sunk head of the bolt d. 
The pressure-bolte is cut away, as shown at 
5, on the side opposite that in which the arm 
extends-that is to say, when the arm covers 
the bolt and is locked in place the rounded side 
is uppermost and the flat or cut side is under 
neath. 
Between the ears b b or lower part of the 
sides b b is a pressure-plate, H. This plate 
has front and rear flanges, 6 and 7, which ex 
tend up the edges of the ears, so that the plate 
rests upon the pressure-bolt, and is held against 
displacement to front or rear by these flange 
extensions, (marked 6.) 
A spring, l, of rubber or equivalent mate 
rial, is held in the pressure-plate between the 
flanges and the sides b b, and a piece against 
the lower surface of the eye shaft-iron. 
When it is desired to connect the shaft to 
the clip, the arm q is thrown down to a verti 
cal dependent position, and the vertical plate 
rests upon the cut-away portion of the press 
ure-bolt, being thereby lowered, and with it 
the spring is also lowered. The eye of the 
shaft-iron is then introduced and the bolt din 
serted. The arm g is then brought up to its 
place to cover the end of the bolt until the pin 
is forced into the hole. This turns the press 
ure-bolt with its rounded side up, raising the 
plate, and puts the spring under compression. 
The bolt is easily made by cutting away an 
ordinary iron bolt. 
The construction of the pressure - plate is 
such that the spring is held securely, but may 
be easily removed. 
The parts may be all formed cheaply and 
work securely when in place. 
I claim as any invention 
1. In a thill-coupling, in combination with 
a socket, the eye of the shaft-iron, the bolt 
connecting the eye to the socket and the stop 
arm which holds the bolt, the pressure-bolt 
fixed to the arm, and cut away on one side, 
and the pressure-plate and spling, substan 
tially as described. 
SC 
9O 
95 
ECC 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
320,817 
2. In a thill-coupling, the combination, with 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name Io 
a socket, of the pressure-bolt and stop-arm to this specification in the presence of two sub 
provided with a locking-spring, the pressure- scribing witnesses. 
plate H, resting upon the pressure-bolt, the 
5 said plate having flanges 66, extending across 
at the front and rear between the sides of the 
socket, and the spring l, interposed between 
the pressure-plate and the eye of the shaft, 
all substantially as described. 
WILLIAM WELTY, 
HENRY COOPER. 
N. RICHEY. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US320917.txt	(No Model.) 
W. N, EYSTER 
BICYCLE, 
No. 320, 97. 
Patented June 30, 1885. 
WITNESSES: 
2% 
c 
cal-e---- fa-4-2 
V 
 
A. 
INVENTO 
44-232 
24/2/7% /zza 
BY 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM N. EYSTER, OF CANTON, OHIO. 
BICYCLE. 
3FECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 320,917, dated June 30, 1885. 
Application filed April 6, 1885. (No model.) 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM N.EYSTER, a suitable clamping-bolts. The tread lever or 35 
45 
55 
To all, whon, it Tray concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Can 
ton, in the county of Stark and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Bicycles; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the same, reference being had to 
the annexed drawings, making a part of this 
Specification, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon, in which 
Figure -1 is a side elevation of a bicycle, 
showing propelling device. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged view of propelling device. 
The present invention has relation to the 
propelling of bicycles; and its nature consists 
in the different parts and combination of parts 
hereinafter described, and particularly pointed 
Out in the claim. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts 
in each figure of the drawings. 
In the accompanying drawings, A represents 
the propelling-wheel, which is substantially of 
the form shown in Fig. 1, and is constructed 
in the ordinary manner of constructing wheels 
provided With a drum, ratchet, and spring. 
This wheel A is held in proper position by 
means of the frame b, said frame being pro 
vided with the arms B, to which arms are at 
tached the saddle, guide bar or handle, and 
other devices used in bicycles of this class. 
The frame b is provided with the top exten 
sion, C, which may be formed with the frame; 
or it may be made separate and attached by 
arm D is substantially of the form shown in 
the drawings, and is fulcrumed to the extension 
C, substantially as shown, the tread end of said 
lever or arm being about twice the length of 
the strap end. The strap D is attached to 
the tread lever or arm D, as shown, the oppo 
site end of said strap being attached to the pe 
riphery of the drum E. 
It will be seen that by my peculiar arrange 
ment I am enabled to gain leverage over a tread 
lever or arm fulcrumed at its end. am aware 
that tread-levers as applied to bicycles and 
fulcrumed at the end are old, and hence do 
not claim broadly; but 
What I do claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
In a bicycle, the combination of the frame b, 
provided with a suitable step and having the 
top extension, C, of the tread lever or arm D, 
fulcrumed to said top extension and directly 
Over the axle, and of the strap D and the 
drum E, all arranged substantially as shown 
and described, and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM N. EYSTER, 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN F. FREASE, 
FRED W. BOND, 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321017.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. GLIDDEN. 
HEEL, TRIMMING MACHINE 
No. 321,017, 
Patented June 30, 1885. 
Fi D: 1. 
r 
e - 7 a. 
A 
* - R. als lfrid a 7............. 4-r 
f 
tle 
/ 
sell 
T 
O A 
K-6 
72. 
Ea 
a. 
c. 
o 
V 
 
72 
7 
F i D: 9. 
 
 
 
 
s 
Stez 
 
 
s S$E 
N 2& SS 
R 
E-Z 
S. E. 
N 
S 
8. 
 
 
 
   
IEEE 
 
 
WiFi ess E = . 
 
& 
Epid 
 
Inver For, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. GLIDDEN, OFLYNN, ASSIGNOR TO JAMES W. BROOKS, TRUSTEE, 
OF CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
HEEL-TRM M N G MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 321,07, dated June 30, 1885. 
Application filed March 3, 1885. 
(No model.) 
5 
IO 
To add u?ion it may concer'ri 
Be it known that I, CHARLES. W. GLIDDEN, 
of Lynn, county of Essex, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvement in Heel 
Trimming Machines, of which the following 
description, in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification, like let 
ters on the drawings representing like parts. 
This invention is an improvement on that 
class of machines described in United States 
Letters Patent No. 217,866 heretofore granted 
to me; and has for its object to improve the 
mechanism therein shown, whereby a greater 
variety of heels or heels of different shape may 
be trimmed. In that patent the central groove 
controls the line of movement of the edge of the 
knife to give to the tread of the heel the shape 
determined by the said groove, while the outer 
groove determines the angle of presentation 
of the cutting-edge of the knife to the leather 
to enable the knife to cut the same to the 
greatest advantage. By the aid of these two 
grooves a pattern-plate at the top of the nail 
box and the top-lift plate the tread of the heel 
is given a certain shape, and to trim a heel of 
a different shape at the tread a different plate 
having proper grooves therein and a pattern 
plate of the proper shape has to be applied to 
the machine, heels having different shaped 
treads requiring separate grooved plates and 
Specially adapted pattern-plates. 
It has been 
attempted with the same grooved plates and 
with only a change of pattern-plate and top 
lift plate to change the contour of the tread of 
the heel, the knife-carriage being drawn for. 
ward by the action of the knife alone as it 
enters the heel, the same knife entering the 
material of the heel until its edge comes in 
contact with the pattern-plate; but said plan 
is in my opinion objectionable, because the 
wear on the pattern-plate and the top-lift 
plate is very great, and also because the edge 
of the knife subjected to such great strain is 
frequently bent or broken. To obviate this 
objectionable strain on the knife and wear on 
the pattern and top-lift plates, I have provided 
the heel-trimming machine with an auxiliary 
pattern-plate, and I have applied the said 
plate between the nail-box and the driver. 
plate, and, further, I have provided the bear 
ing-block or knife-carrying cross-slide on 
55 
65 
which the knife-holder is pivoted with an 
adjustable follower having, preferably at its 
inner end, a roller which bears against the 
edge of the said auxiliary pattern-plate and 
receives the strain of the parts, thus obviating 
straining the knife and wearing the pattern 
plate out of shape. 
Figure I in top view represents a sufficient 
portion of a heel-trimming machine such as 
referred to with my improvements added; and 
Fig. 2 is a section thereof in the dotted line 
aca, the line of section intersecting the line of 
the slot between the side of the follower and 
the block in which it slides. 
The stationary or frame plate c, provided 
with the grooves 9 and 10, the trimming-lever 
a, the heel-support or pattern-plate b, the 
turn-table plated, the knife e, the segmental 
base e', to which is attached the knife-holder 7o 
f, the flange-plate g, its ear 9, the knife 
holder?, mounted on the flange-plate 9, the 
bearing-block, or slide i, fitted to slide in ways 
formed in the turn-table plate, the armi, con 
nected by the screw h with the flange-plate g, 
the screw m, and the pins or bolts o, and the 
pattern-surface in are all substantially as in 
the patent referred to, where the same parts 
are designated by like letter's. The driver 
plate A, the nail-box B, and the top-lift plate 8o 
Care all as in the McKay and Bigelow heel 
ing-machine, and as also shown in the above 
patent, but not lettered therein, because well 
known at that time. 
To enable the form-plate c, having grooves 9 
and 10, to be used when trimming heels vary 
ing considerably in shape, I have added to the 
parts so far described an auxiliary pattern 
plate, E, which I have placed between the 
usual driver-plate, A, and the nail-box B, as 
shown in Fig. 2, and I have also provided the 
bearing-block i or knife carrying cross-slide 
with a follower, D, the inner end of which sup 
ports a roller, 2, that bears against the said 
auxiliary pattern-plate and takes the strain 
which otherwise would be exerted by the edge 
of the knife e upon either the pattern-plate b 
or on the top-lift plate C, which latter plates 
in this my invention will be changed to corre 
spond in shape with the tread of each heel to loo 
be trimmed. The follower D has swiveled 
loosely in its outer end the end of the adjust 
75 
90 
95 
25 
35 
45 
 
() 
321,Ol'7 
the force exerted by the spiral spring 6 and 
keep it constant in all position of adjustments 
of the follower D, I have so supported and 4o 
made the nut 7 that the latter as it is turned 
to move the screw longitudinally by reason of 
the pin 40 in the slot of the said nut will not 
compress the spring additionally. 
I claim 
1. In a heel-trimming machinehaving a nail 
box, a grooved form-plate, a trimming-lever, 
a turn-table plate, a bearing-block, a knife 
holder and knife, the combination, with the 
auxiliary pattern-plate located below the nail- 5o 
box, of the adjustable follower moving with the 
bearing-block and turn-table plate and travel 
ing against the auxiliary pattern-plate to lessen 
the strain of the knife against the regular pat 
tern-plate located above the nail-box, the com 
bination being and operating substantially as 
2. The turn-table plated, the bearing-block 
i, the follower D, and its loosely attached screw, 
combined with the spring and the slotted nut 
screwed into an ear of the turn-table plate, to 
operate substantially as described. 
3. In a heeling-machine, the nail-box and 
driver-plate, combined with the follower and 
the intermediate auxiliary pattern plate, to op 
erate substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
described. 
- 
45 
55 
CHARLES W. GLIDDEN. 
Witnesses: 
G. W. GREGORY, 
B. J. NOYES. 
able screw, 3, which is made to enter and en 
gage a nut, 4, held in the bearing-block i by 
the cap 5, attached to the said bearing-plate 
by a screw, 16, so that the nut cannot move 
5 longitudinally with the screw 3 or rotate there 
with. The outer unthreaded end of the screw 
3 is extended through a spiral spring, 6, and 
then through a hollow nut, 7, which is screwed 
into an ear, S, attached to the turn-table plate 
Io d. Near its outer end the screw 3 is provided 
with a pin, 40, which is extended therefrom at 
right angles and enters a longitudinal slot cut 
through the said nut from its end to its head. 
A tubular washer, 12, having its flange 13 
5 placed against the outer side of the nut 4, re 
ceives about its body one end of the spiral 
spring 6, the other end of the latter abutting 
against the inner side of the ear 8. The great 
strain upon the knife e is due to the fact that 
2O the edge of the blade as it enters the leather 
follows into the same until the edge of the blade 
comes against the edge of the pattern-plate b. 
By turning the slotted nut 7 and screw 3 in op 
erative connection with it by the pin 40 in the 
25 slot of the said nut the follower D may be forced 
more or less out beyond the edge of the bear 
ing-block i, so that the roll 2 will run against 
the auxiliary pattern-plate, the latter thus re 
ceiving against it and resisting the strain which 
3o otherwise the knife would exert upon the plates 
b and C. The farther the follower D is forced 
from the bearing-block the farther the edge of 
the knife e from the plates band C. Under all 
circumstances it is desired that the force with 
35 which the bearing-block i is pressed forward 
in the turn-table plate and against the auxil 
iary pattern-plate be the same; so, to equalize 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321117.txt	(No Model.) 
A. B. LANDIS. 
WALWE GEAR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
; 
. 
????? 
At 
?? 
- Zzzvezzr 
? 
?????? 
?? 6 
???? 
??? 
fic639, 
?. 
(No Model.) 
A, B, LANDIS. 
WALWE GEAR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 32ll 17, 
. 
Patented June 30, 1885. 
 
I 
2222 
/ 6 ???. 
8/ ?????? // t??? ??? 
' 
. , 
??? 
?? 
? 
? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM B. LANDIS, OF WAYNESBOROUGH, PENNSYLVANIA. 
VALVE- GEAR. 
SPECIEICATICN forming part of Letters Patent No. 321,117, dated June 30, 1885. 
Application filed February 4, 1885. 
(No moll. ) 
To all. lvillon, it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM. B. LANDIS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Waynesborough, in the county of Franklin 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Valve 
Gears, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the accom 
panying drawings. 
This invention has relation to means emi 
ployed for shifting an eccentric for the purpose 
of varying the throw of a valve or for revers 
ing an engine; and the invention consists in 
certain features of construction, hereinafter de 
scribed, and specifically set forth in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
plan, partly in section, of details of a shifting 
eccentric and its adjuncts sufficient in extent 
for a clear understanding of the invention. 
Fig. 2 is a face view of the eccentric, showing 
the shaft in section. Fig. 3 is a transverse 
section of the same. Fig. 4 is an end eleva 
tion of the left-hand portion of Fig. 1, the 
shaft being shown in section. Fig. 5 is a face 
view of the eccentric, showing the shaft in 
section, with two governing-plates, ribbed on 
only one of their sides and passing through 
said shaft, and a central bar, partly cylindri 
cal but having opposite sides flattened and 
ribbed. Fig. 6 is an enlarged detail in eleva 
tion of the ribbed bar and one of the ribbed 
plates. Fig. 7 is an end elevation of the ribbed 
bar and plates. Fig. 8 is an end view of the 
sliding collar and its sleeve. Fig. 9 is a longi 
tudinal section of said collar and sleeve. Fig. 
10 is an end elevation of the ribbed bar, with 
two pairs of ribbed plates to operate two ec 
centrics in a double engine. Figs. 11 and 12 
represent in section and side view the sliding 
collar, sleeve, and operating-lever. 
Like letters indicate like parts in all the fig 
GS. 
The object of this invention is approxi 
mately the same, but in some particulars is an 
improvement upon the invention for which a 
patent was granted to me November 18, 1884, 
No. 308,079, the object of the two governing. 
plates and of the ribbed collar being to pre 
sent an extensive bearing-surface, and conse 
quently durability to the frictional surfaces 
against both end thrust and side thrust. 
In the drawings, A represents a driven shaft 
of an engine, on which is mounted a crank or 
other dik B, having upon its face a frame, C, 
the inner faces of which are beveled to receive 55 
a bevel - edged sliding base-piece, D, secured 
to or formed as a part of the eccentric E. The 
frame C is adjusted to the disk B and base 
piece D by means of liners placed under the 
frame C, and the latter is secured to the disk 6o 
by bolts b or screws b, so that some of the 
liners can be easily removed when a closer ad 
justment is required, owing to the wear of the 
parts. The side through which the bolt b 
passes entirely through the disk is without 65 
liners thereunder, and by tightening the nut 
or drawing upon this bolt the frame Csprings 
and binds tightly the eccentric. This eccen 
tric is held thus when the engine is doing 
such work that it does not require reversing, 7O 
consequently taking all the wear off the col 
lar; but when used as a reversing-engine,?nsin? 
a traction-engine on the road or a hoisting 
engine, the bolt b should be slack to allow 
the eccentric to move freely by operating the 75 
lever M. . 
The eccentric E and base-plate are slotted, 
as at E, in order that they may be thrown 
across a shaft to vary the throw of the valve, 
or to reverse the engine by means of the usual So 
eccentric-strap and connecting-rod, mounted 
upon the eccentrie E and connected with 
the valve of an engine. The means shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2 for varying the position of the 
eccentrics are similar to those in my Patent S5 
No. 308,079, and consist of a bar, F, having 
ribs upon two of its sides, and extending di 
agonally across the same. This bar passes 
through a slot formed in the shaft, and is ar 
ranged within the eccentric E, so that when 90 
the bar is moved within the slot and across the 
shaft the eccentric and plate I) are also moved 
there with. The shaft A is bored centrally and 
longitudinally, as at A, for the reception of 
the means employed for moving the bai's F 95 
across the shaft. The devices employed for 
that purpose, and shown in Figs. 1 and 2, are 
two semi-cylindrical bars, G, ribbed diago 
nally upon their flat surfaces, as at G', to mesh 
with the ribs of the bar F. 
In Figs. 5, 6, and 7 the operating-bar G, 
within the hollow shaft A, is partly cylindrical, 
and has two opposite sides flattened and trans 
versely ribbed, and two bars, F, are made to 
I OO 
V 
? 
25 
35 
45 
2 
32,117 
IO 
25 
35 
- 
w 
pass through transverse openings A in the 
shaft A and bear against the ribbed sides of 
the bar G'. The inner sides of the bars E 
are also diagonally ribbed, and made to mesh 
with the two ribbed sides of the bar G'. The 
advantages obtained with two bars, F, is that 
the bar G' has a full bearing at the top and 
bottom, and has not the apparent tendency to 
hug the governing-bars shown in Fig. 2. The 
bar G may also be entirely cylindrical, and 
the ribs be cut deeper therein. In place of 
using two bars, F, Fig. 5, only one of them 
might be used, (although not so good,)in which 
case the central bar, G', might be ribbed on 
one side only. 
To operate two eccentrics in a double en 
gine, wherein the eccentrics would be blaced 
side by side and at right angles to each other, 
the bar G' would be ribbed on four sides to 
mesh with two pairs of ribbed bars, F, as 
shown in Fig. 10. The bar G' could then be 
Square or other shape in cross-section, being 
made cylindrical simply for convenience in 
manufacturing or boring the shaft A. The 
inner end of the bar G' is formed either with 
a countersunk recess, adapted to receive the 
cylindrical head H, Fig. 1, and the reduced 
portion I of the operating-rod J, located within 
the central bore of the shaft A, or the inner 
end of the bar G may be recessed and screw 
threaded Fig. 6 to receive the screw-threaded 
end of the bar J, so that the length of the op 
erating-bar J G may be adjusted; but these 
Parts J G may also be made in one continu 
ous piece. The opposite end of the rod G is 
slotted for the reception of a key, K, which is 
passCd through a slot, A, formed in the shaft 
A, and said key is held in place by means of 
a sliding collar, L. This collaris, made in two 
halves, L, notched in the joint, as at l, in each 
half for the ends of the key K to fit into. The 
two halves,L, are fitted to come together firmly 
without binding on the shaft. The length of the 
collar is sufficient to keep the slot A covered 
in all positions. This collar L is provided 
with a suitable number of circumferential ribst 
on its outside surface, and is surrounded by a 
sleeve, L', made also in two halves fitting to 
gether at the joint in a manner similar to 
the collar L. The sleeve Lhas internal cor 
rugations, l, and two conical holes for the re 
ception of the screws m, forming the trunnions 
in the operating-lever M, the free end of which 
runs over a notched sector M, serving to hold 
the lever in different positions to determine 
the extent of the longitudinal movement of 
the bar G within the shaft, and the conse 
quent position of the eccentric by reason of 
said movement. 
The pivotal end of the operating-lever Mis 
connected by a link, M, to a bearing, M. A 
Second bearing, N', is shown near the eccen 
tric; but it is evident that my improvements 
are equally adapted to shafts of engines hav 
ing the eccentric between the bearings. The 
Space between the ribs and the corrugations 
of the sleeve L is for the reception of Bab 
bitt or anti-friction metal which will form the 
bearings for the ribs t, thus giving a large 
amount of bearing for the end thrust of the 7o 
lever on the collar, and thus adding to their 
durability, and at the same time keeping the 
slot closed in all positions. The inner end of 
the lever Mthat goes around the collar is made 
in two halves, so that the whole device can be 75 
removed from the shaft and taken off without 
disturbing the shaft of the engine. 
Now it will be noticed that by first entering 
the rod J partly within the bore of the shaft 
A, and applying to the screw-threaded end 8o 
thereof the bar G', and then entering saidbar 
within the bore of the shaft through the open 
ing B' formed in the disk B, that said bar G' is 
provided with a long bearing within the shaft, 
and that the ribbed bars F may then be in- 85 
serted through the slots A in the shaft, and 
be made to mesh with the ribs and grooves of 
the central bar, G', and, being forced entirely 
through the shaft, the bearings moving longi 
tudinally, therein as the bars F are forced 9o 
against them. A dust-guard, O, is also placed 
between the bearing N' and the eccentric E, 
the dust-guard being a plate 9f suitable nna 
terial apertured to fit the shaft loosely, and 
extending beyond the opening in the body of 95 
the eccentric, so as to exclude all dust and 
dirt from getting within the eccentric. A 
cap, B, is screwed or otherwise secured with 
in the opening B' to prevent the entrance of 
dust therein at the end, and the collar I covers IOO 
the slot A and excludes dust therefrom. The 
frame C is now secured to the face of the disk 
by the screws or bolts b. The key K is in 
serted in the slot A and through the slot in 
the connecting-rod J, its ends resting in the IO5 
slots of the collar L. The sleeve L, having 
its interior properly babbitted, is then put in 
position upon the collar L, and the trunnions 
of the lever Minserted in the cavities of the 
sleeve. The parts are now in operative posi- IIo 
tion. By throwing the free end of the lever 
along the sector, the bar G is reciprocated, 
and, by reason of the inclined ribs thereon 
meshing with the similar ribs on the bars F, 
the eccentric is thrown across the shaft to any II5 
desired extent, and is retained in such posi 
tion by means of the notches in the sector. 
In Figs. 11 and 12 are represented om a 
large scale a portion of the crank-shaft A, its 
sliding collar, sleeve, and operating lever. I2O 
The external bearing-surfaces of the sleeve L. 
that connect it to the lever M are more ex 
tensive than in the previously-described fig 
ures to reduce the wear of the parts. For 
this purpose each half of the sleeve has upon I 25 
its surface a boss or trunnion, L, provided 
with series of concentric U-shaped grooves, 
l, and the two halves, M', forming the inner 
end of the lever M, have cavities on to receive 
the bosses L., and a sufficient amount of Bab- 13 
bitt or anti-friction metal poured between 
them and the concentric grooves. By this 
arrangement the frictional surfaces do not re 
quire any adjustment. The halves M are 
- 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
321,117 
3 
5 
IO 
25 
united at one end by the bolt mand at the 
other by the bolts m m'. The bolt m' may be 
used to adjust the parts after filing or fitting 
the joint madjacent to said bolt. The link 
M is provided with a ball-shaped journal, P, 
at each end. One end enters a corresponding 
bearing in the inner end of the operating-le 
ver, and the other end is received in a similar 
bearing projecting from the shaft-bearing N 
or some other fixed part. By means of this 
adjustable ball-joint connection no twisting 
strain can be thrown on the lever, and the 
fitting of the parts need not be so accurate, 
and consequently it requires less time to prop 
erly connect the parts. 
Having now fully described my invention 
and its operation, I claim 
1. In a shifting-eccentric, governing-bars 
arranged within and across the shaft and pro 
vided with diagonally-disposed ribs upon the 
sides thereof facing the axis of the shaft, in 
combination with a diagonally-ribbed bar lo 
cated within the shaft, substantially as speci 
fied. 
2. The combination of a centrally-bored 
shaft, an operating-rod, a ribbed bar arranged 
in the bore, and a governing-bar ribbed upon 
the side thereof facing the center of the shaft 
and arranged across the shaft and in engage 
ment with the axial ribbed bar, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination of a bored and slotted 
shaft, an eccentric mounted thereon, govern 
ing-bars arranged within the eccentric and 
passing transversely through the shaft, a cen 
tral bar having ribs adapted to mesh with the 
ribs of the governing-bars, an operating-rod 
connecting with the central bar and with a 
sliding collar mounted on the shaft, and a 
sleeve connected with a lever, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
4. The combination of a bored and slotted 
shaft, an eccentric mounted thereon, a central 
bar provided with a transverse key, a sliding 
collar made in halves, and a sleeve therefor, 
whereby said collar is wholly inclosed, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
5. The combination of the hollow shaft A, 
eccentric E, the transverse ribbed bars F, the 
central ribbed bar, G', rod J at the end there 
of, the split collar L, its sleeve L, and the le 
ver M, constructed substantially as described, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination of a centrally-bored 
shaft, an operating-rod, a ribbed bar arranged 
in the bore, and ribbed governing-bars ar 
ranged across the shaft and in engagement 
with the axial ribbed bars, with a disk, B, 
eccentric E, having dovetailed base-piece D, 
and recessed frame C, secured to the disk by 
bolts, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
7. The combination of the hollow shaft A, 
central rod, J, and key K, the 'split collar II 
and its sleeve L, and bosses Li thereon pro 
vided with concentric grooves, with the lever 
M, made of two halves having cavities m to 
receive the bosses, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
8. The combination of the hollow shaft A, 
central rod, J, and key K, the collar L, its 
sleeve I, and bosses thereon, with the lever 
M, having its inner end provided with ball 
sockets, and the link M, having ball journals 
at each end, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
. 
ABRAHAM B. LANDIS. 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
D. M. GOOD, Jr., 
C. E. BESORE, 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321218.txt	(No Model.) 
E. L. HEIDENREICH. 
CAR BRAKE AND STARTER 
Patented June 30, 1885. 
 
- & 
WITNESSES 
e/C 
a/Cze. 
l 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EY WIND LEE HEIDENREICH, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO JOHN A. McLENNAN, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR BRAKE AND STARTE. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 321,218, dated June 30, 1885. 
Application filed April 17, 1885. (No model.) 
C 
25 
35 
55 
the lower end of a bracket, a, projecting from 
To aid, whom it may concern: 
a frame, D, supported by four (more or less) 
Be it known that I, EY WIND LEE HEIDEN 
REICH, a resident of Chicago, in the county of bolts, a, projecting upward from the bearings, 
the upper ends of the said bolts being passed 
Cook and State of Illinois, have invented a 
into apertures in the car-floor, in which aper 
5 new and Improved Car Brake and Starter, of 
tures they play loosely. On the outer parts 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
of the beveled surfaces of the male clutch-cups 
description. 
C teeth E are arranged, which form bevel 
This invention relates to certain new and 
cog-wheels, which bevel cog-wheels engage at 
useful improvements in car brakes and start 
their tops with diametrically-opposite points 6o. 
ers, in which the energy of the car is stored 
of a cup-shaped bevel cog-wheel, E, mounted 
in a spring when the car is to be stopped, 
on a bolt, a, held in the middle of the frame 
which stored energy is utilized when the car 
D, and projecting downward. In the said 
is to be started. 
cup-shaped wheel E a spring, a, is coiled, 
The object of my invention is to simplify 
which has one end secured firmly to the socket 
6 
15 the construction of the car brake and starter 
a surrounding the bolt a, and the other end 5 
and to make the same more effective in use. 
secured to the inner surface of the cup-shaped 
The invention consists in the combination, 
wheel. The said spring must be made more 
with an axle, of a sliding sleeve arranged to 
or less powerful, according to the weight of 
turn with the axle and having clutch-cups at 
the car. On the rim of the wheel Elaterally- 7o 
its ends which can be engaged with clutches 
projecting teeth E are formed, which teeth 
mounted loosely on the axle and engaging with 
are preferably made of steel. A sliding bolt, 
a wheel in which a spiral spring is coiled. 
b', is arranged in a bracket, a, projecting from 
The invention also consists in parts and de 
the frameD, and the said bolt is provided with 
tails and combinations of the same, as will be 
a head adapted to engage with the spaces be- 75 
fully set forth and described hereinafter. 
tween the teeth E. The bolt b is surrounded 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
by a spring, b, held between arms of the brack 
drawings, forming apart of this specification, 
et a', which spring presses the end or head of 
in which similar letter's of reference indicate 
the bolt against the toothed edge of the wheel 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
E. The bolt b is connected with a lever, b, 8o 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the under side of 
pivoted by a bolt or pin, b, on the bottom of 
a car provided with my improved car brake 
the car. 
and starter. Fig. 2 is an enlarged cross-sec 
In case one of the above-described devices 
tional elevation of the same on the liness, 
is used on each axle, the ends of the levers B 
Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sectional ele 
are connected by a connecting-rod, c, on the 
vation of the same at the middle of the axle. 
under side of the car, and the levers b are 
Fig. 4 is a top view of the socket-wheel con 
connected by a connecting-rod, b. Each lever 
taining the Spring. Fig. 5 is a section through 
b is connected with a rod, b, and each lever 
the platform, showing the manner of attach 
B is connected with a rod, c'. The rod c is 
ing the hand-lever. Fig. 6 is a side view of 
connected with the lower end of a lever, o', 
the hand-lever. 
which is pivoted in the car - floor in such a 
On the axle M the sliding sleeve A is mount 
manner that it can easily be detached and ap 
ed, which is guided by a spline or key, a, to, 
plied on the other end of the car. I have 
slide on the axle and revolve with the said 
shown the said lever provided with a square 
axle. On the ends of the sleeve A the female 
eye, through which a square pin, arranged to 
45 friction-clutch cups A are formed to fit against 
turn on the car-floor, can be passed; but, if de 
the male clutch-cups C, loosely mounted on 
sired, the said lever can be arranged in any 
the axles between the ends of the splines and 
other suitable manner. An angle-lever, b, is 
the bearings; a. Each sleeve A is provided 
pivoted to the car and has its lower end con 
with an annular groove for receiving the 
nected with a rod, b. On the other end of Ioc 
so forked end of an angle-lever, B, pivoted on 
85 
90 
 
2 
321,218 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
the said lever b a hook is formed, which is 
passed into an eye in the lower end of the rod 
c', connected with an angle-lever, c', pivoted 
on the lever c' near its upper end. 
The operation is as follows: To stop the car, 
the lever c' at the front of the car is thrown 
in such a manner as to press one female clutch 
cup A firmly against the adjacent clutch-cup 
C, so as to lock them firmly together, whereby 
the said clutch-cup C is locked on the axle 
and revolves the wheel E, whereby the spring 
a' is coiled and drawn up very tightly. The 
energy of the car is consumed and taken up in 
coiling the spring, and thus the car is brought 
to a standstill. At the same time that the le 
ver c' is thrown the angle-lever c is pressed 
toward the opposite end of the lever c' for the 
purpose of withdrawing the bolt b to permit 
the wheel E to be revolved. As soon as the 
spring has been coiled and the car brought to 
a standstill, the angle-lever c is released, so 
as to permit the spring b' to press the end of 
the bolt b against the toothed rim of the wheel 
E, thus locking the same in place. 
To start the car, the lever c' is thrown in 
such a manner as to engage the other female 
clutch-cup A with the other clutch-cup C by 
friction, and then the angle-lever c is pulled 
for the purpose of withdrawing the bolt b 
from the wheel E, whereby the said wheel is 
released and the spring a' permitted to un 
coil. The spring revolves the axle E, which 
in turn revolves the said cup C, and by means 
of the sleeve A the axle and the wheels there 
On are revolved. The car is thus started. 
The operation is always the same whether 
the apparatus is provided on one or on two 
axles, and the apparatus can be worked from 
the front or rear end of the car, as may be 
desired. 
The above-described device can be used on 
cars of all kinds-such as steam railway-cars, 
horse-cars, cable-road cars, or even on ordi 
nary vehicles. 
I do not limit myself to the exact construc 
tion, arrangement, and combination of parts 
and details, as it is evident that the same can 
be arranged in various different ways without 
departing from the spirit of my invention. 
I do not confine myself to guide the bolts a 
merely by means of the apertures in the car 
floor. Some parallel link-motion will proba 
ably be more efficient. The head of sliding 
bolt b is beveled, so as to give sufficient and 
et not too much resistance in being pulled 
out, the angled being determined by the weight 
of the car. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a car brake and starter, the combina 
tion, with an axle, of a clutching device ar. 
ranged to slide on and revolve with the axle, 
a clutching device mounted loosely on the axle 
and provided with cogs upon its outer flared 
surface and with clutch-teeth at the base of 
said cogs which are engaged by corresponding 
teeth of the aforesaid clutching device, a cog 
wheel engaging with the cogs on the said 
clutching device, a spiral spring secured at 
one end to the said cog-wheel, and having its 
other end secured to a fixed part, and of le 
vers for engaging the sliding clutching de 
vices with the clutching devices mounted 
loosely on the axle, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
2. In a car brake and starter, the combina 
tion, with a car-axle, of a sleeve mounted to slide 
on and turn with the axle and having clutch 
cups at its ends, of two clutch-cups mounted 
loosely on the axle adjacent to the ends of the 
above-mentioned sleeve, cogs formed on the 
clutch on the axle, said latter clutch also hav 
ing clutch-teeth at the base of the cogs, with 
which engage the clutch-cups of the said above 
mentioned sleeve, a cog-wheel engaging with 
the said clutches on the axle, a spring having 
one end secured to the said cog-wheel and the 
other end to a fixed part, and a lever for shift 
ing the sleeve to engage the clutching devices 
on one end of the sleeve with the adjacent 
clutch on the axle, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
3. In a car brake and starter, the combina 
tion, with the axle, of the sleeve A, having 
the clutch-cups A on the ends, the clutches 
C, mounted loosely on the axle and having 
teeth E upon their outer flared surfaces, and 
clutch-teeth at the base of said teeth E, with 
which clutch-teeth engage trie clutch-cups A, 
the cog-wheel E, engaging with the teeth E 
of the clutches C C, and having teeth on its 
rim, the spring a', coiled in the wheel E, and 
levers and rods for shifting the clutch-sleeve 
and operating the bolt, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
4. In a car brake and starter, the combina 
tion, with the axle, of the sleeve A, having 
the clutch-cups A on the ends, the clutches 
C, mounted loosely on the axle and having 
teeth E, the cog-wheel E, engaging with the 
teeth E of the clutches C C, and having teeth 
on its rim, the spring a', coiled in the wheel 
E, the sliding bolt, b, the spring b, acting on 
the same, the leverb, connected with the bolt, 
the rod b, and the rod c, for shifting the sleeve 
A substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed. 
5. In a car brake and starter, the combina 
tion, with the axle, of the sleeve A, having 
the clutch-cups A on the ends, the clutches 
C, mounted loosely on the axle and having 
teeth E, the cog-wheel E, engaging with the 
teeth E of the clutches C C, and having teeth 
on its rim, the Spring a, coiled in the wheel 
E, the sliding bolt b, held in a bracket, a, 
the spring b, the lever b, the lever B, for shift. 
ing the sleeve A, the rod c, connected with 
the lever B, the rod b, connected with the le 
verb, the lever c', connected with the rod c, 
the angle-leverb, connected with the lever b, 
the rod c, and the elbow-lever c' on the lever 
c", substantially as herein shown and described, 
55 y 
 
75 
85 
95 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
-- 
-- - - 
- 
--- 
--- 
321,218 
3 
6. In a car-brake and starter, the combina- b, and rods for connecting the lever c' and 
tion, with the axles, of the sliding sleeves A. elbow-lever b, substantially as herein shown Io 
on the same, provided with clutch-cups A, the and described. 
clutches C on the axles having teeth, the cog 
5 wheels E, the springs a, the levers B, con- 
nected by a rod, c, the sliding bolts b, the le- 
vers b, the rod b, connecting the levers b, 
the rods c' and b, the lever c, the elbow-lever 
ELBRIDGE HANECY, 
GEORGE P. MERRICK. 
EY WIND LEE HEIDENREICH. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321318.txt	S. A. SCOFIELD. 
HAND EMBROIDERING MACHINE. 
Patented June 30, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
No. 321,318, 
 
|--~~~~ 
WITNESSES : 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SILAS ANDREW SCOFIELD, OF MORENCI, MICHIGAN. 
HAND E M B. R O DE R N G - MACH NE. 
322 CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 321,318, dated June 30, 1885. 
Application filed December 1, 1884. (No mod 1.) 
IC 
To all, who, it may concern: 
Morenci, in the county of Lenawee and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Hand Embroidering 
Machines; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to that class of de 
vices known as hand embroidering-ma 
chines; and it consists, substantially, in the 
parts as constructed, and in the particular 
combinations to be hereinafter distinctly de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
The class of machines to which my inven 
tion is most nearly allied consists of two blocks, 
which are alternately caused to slide past each 
other, one of which bears at its outer end the 
needle by which the thread is carried, and the 
other carrying at its corresponding end a rigid 
loop-holder, the needle being first caused to 
penetrate the fabric on which the embroider 
ing is to be done, and the loop-holder imme 
diately afterwards forced into the opening 
thus made, to hold the stitch and prevent its 
withdrawal until another or succeeding stitch 
is made, and so on. 
In machines of the character described the 
blocks have heretofore been of certain con 
structions by which the necessary operation 
of moving them apart to the length of stitch 
to be made, and again bringing them together 
automatically, when permitted so to do by the 
operator, is attained, and some ingenuity has 
been exercised in the construction of both the 
needle andloop-holder, by which the best prac 
tical results could be accomplished; but thus far 
many difficulties have been encountered 
which this invention is designed to overcome, 
as will be seen from the following descrip 
tion. 
Referring to the annexed drawings, Figure 
1 represents a perspective view of the block, 
at the outer end of which the needle is car 
ried; and Fig. 2 indicates a like view of the 
corresponding block, which carries the loop 
holder. Fig. 3 indicates a view in section of 
the outer ends of the blocks as when placed or 
Be it known that I, SILAs A. SCOFIELD, of held together for operation, and Fig. 4 repre 
sents a detail perspective to more clearly in 
dicate the construction of certain parts. 
Reference being had to the several parts by 
the letters imarked thereon, A represents the 
block, which carries at its outer end the nee 
dle a, and B represents the block which car 
ries at its corresponding end the rigid loop 
holder b. The two blocks are held together 
by a rubber, Spring, or other suitable elastic 
connection, c, (shown in each of the first two 
figures as broken away,) and on their corre 
sponding or contiguous edges they are formed, 
the first with a longitudinal channel orgroove, 
a', and the second with a corresponding 
tongue, a', the channel or groove in the one 
being provided with a pin or projection, b, 
which plays in a space or division, c', in the 
tongue a', by which the movement of the 
blocks past each other is limited. The tongue 
a', at near the outer end of the block on which 
it is formed, terminates by slanting off flush 
with the surface of the inner longitudinal edge 
of said block, as shown at d, Fig. 2, the pur 
pose of which will be described hereinafter. 
The needle is secured to the block A, near 
its outer end in the groove (t", in such manner 
as to be brought about even or flush with the 
surface of its inner edge. 
Both of the blocks may, if desired, be pro 
vided with ornamentally-headed pins oo, by 
Which the appearance of the blocks or com 
plete machine will be rendered fancy and at 
tractive. 
Referring more particularly to the con 
struction of the loop-holder, it consists of a 
flat and rigid strip of metal, which is bent to 
conform to the incline at the upper termina 
tion of the tongue a', as shown at d, and is 
secured to said tongue by a screw, rivet, or in 
any suitable manner. The longer extremity 
of this loop-holder, a portion of which pro 
jects outwardly from the outer end of the 
block B, is preferably made flush with the 
surface of the inner side or edge of said block, 
as shown. The outer end or edge of this 
loop-holder is slightly concave, as shown, by 
which the thread or strand will be more read 
ily caught and retained in the opening made 
by the needle. 
Directing attention to the needle, as con 
9O 
95 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
d 
2 
321,318 
2. The combination of the block A, pro- 65 
The elastic connection between the two 
blocks keeps them together, and it may be 
added that when the machine is not in use it 
has the appearance of two corresponding 5o 
blocks whose opposing edges are flat and 
tightly fitting against each other, the needle 
and loop-holder having also a somewhat like 
resemblance to each other. 
Having thus described my invention, what 55 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 1. In an embroidering-machine, the combi 
nation, with the sliding blocks AB, of a nee 
dle and loop-holder attached, respectively, 6o 
to the outer ends of said blocks, the needle 
being formed on one side for the reception of 
the loop-holder and on its opposite side with 
a channel or groove, substantially as described. 
vided with the groove a? and pin b, and the 
needle a, having bevele, the block B, formed 
with the tongue a', inclined at its upper ex 
tremity, as at d, and separated or divided, as 
at c, and the loop-holdersecured to the block 
and bent to conform to said incline d, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the blocks A and 
B, formed with the corresponding tongue and 
groove, of the needle a, formed in each of its 
sides with a recess or channel, and provided 
with the eye having beveled edge, and the 
loop-holder b, adapted to work in the side of 
the needle, substantially as described. 
nation, with the sliding blocks carrying at 
their outer ends a needle and loop-holder, of 
an elastic connection acting to draw said 
blocks together, substantially as and in the 
manner described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
4. In an embroidering-machine, the combi- 8o 
SILAS ANDREW SCOFIELD. 
- 
85 
. 
JAMES INVERARITY, 
FRED W. COOK. 
structed, it will be seen to consist of a metal 
piece sharpened or pointed at its outer end, 
and having at a suitable distance from the point 
an eye' or opening, in which the thread is in 
serted. The lower end of this needleis formed 
beveled or inclined, as at e, and its inner side 
is formed for a portion of its length with a 
channel or groove for the reception of the 
loop-holder, having to each edge an upward 
ly-projecting flange, while its outer side or 
surface is similarly grooved or channeled, by 
which, when the needle is forced through the 
fabric the thread or strand Will be made to 
enter its side, and thus not increase the size 
of the incision or opening made in the fabric 
by the needle. This recess in the outer sur 
face of the needle likewise assists to guide the 
thread or strand to the eye in the threading 
operation. This needle-eye is beveled on its 
surrounding edge from each side of the nee 
.dle, which also facilitates in a great measure 
the insertion of the edge of the thread. 
The described construction of both the nee 
dle and loop-holder renders them of the great 
est degree of strength, and their joint opera 
tion most perfect. 
The following is a description of the easiest 
and best mode of operation of the Several parts 
constituting the machine: The needle is first 
forced through the fabric, and the loop-holder 
immediately inserted into the opening made 
thereby. Simultaneously with the insertion 
of the loop-holder the block which carries the 
needle is drawn backward, to enable the spac 
ing and taking of the next succeeding stitch. 
In the movement of the blocks back and forth 
past each other the loop-holder is guided in 
the side of the needle, and the inclined bottom 
end, e, of the needle rides or slides upon the 
corresponding incline, d, formed with the loop 
holder in its conformity to the end or extrem 
ity of the tongue a' of the block B, and thus 
is the needle separated or forced apart from 
the loop-holder to an extent of space equal to 
the degree of the height or projection of the 
tongue from the block on which it is formed. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321418.txt	(No Model.) 
No 32,48, 
t 
L. W. BOYNTON, 
TURN UP BED. . 
Patented July 7, 1885. 
 
 
EEEEE 
- 8 - 3 - 3 - 3-6, 
X.. 
Fig. 3 
b 
j-FE--------------- ---------- el 
O 
o 
With esses 
(SAN&S 
4-yar. 
 
Inu entor 
onor Biz, 
soetry, 
64 %z & 
ustos, Marc-minonettws, W.Askoto, c.c. . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LEANDER. W. BOYNTON, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
TURN - UP BE D. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 321,418, dated July 7, 1885. 
Application filed February 21, 1884. 
(No model.) 
55 
25 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, LEANDER W. BOYNTON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Hartford, and State of Con 
necticut, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Turn-Up Beds, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, whereby a person skilled in the art to 
which it appertains can make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings. 
My invention relates to that class of beds 
which are used for sleeping purposes in small 
apartments and elsewhere, and are arranged 
to be shut up or folded away when not in use. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and economical, light and convenient 
bed of the general character mentioned by 
supporting a mattress-frame in such a manner 
that said frame and its slipports may consti 
tute a bedstead adapted to be turned down 
into position for use when wanted, and to be 
turned up out of the way when out of use, in 
the manner hereinafter explained, and to reu 
der the same easy of manipulation by means 
of a suitable spring adapted to counteract the 
weight to be handled in raising and lowering 
the bed. These objects I attain by the mech 
anism illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which like letters denote the same parts 
throughout the several views. 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved bed 
in position for occupation, together with a part 
of the floor and side wall of a room contain 
ing the same. Fig. 2 is an elevation of my 
improved bed when turned up and out of use; 
and Fig. 3 is a detail showing the foot-rail b. 
and hook 2, partly in cross-section, on the 
line acy in Fig. 2. 
A is a mattress-frame of the general charac 
ter commonly used in connection with spring 
wire mattresses. a. a' are the side rails, and 
b b are the end rails, of such mattress-frame, 
connected together by the corner castings did 
and e c, in the usual manner. The mattress 
fabric e is attached in any ordinary or con 
venient manner to the mattress-frame in the 
position shown in Fig. 1. There is nothing 
peculiar in the construction of the mattress, 
5o nor of the mattress-frame, except as hereinaf. 
termentioned, for my improved bed may be 
35 
constructed by using in the manner described 
any mattress-frame of the general character 
mentioned. The side rails, at a, are provided 
with swinging legs ff. One end of each leg 
is pivoted to the inside of its side rail at any 
convenient point to support the mattress 
frame, as in Fig. 1. Fig. 2 shows the legs.ff' 
in their proper position when the bed is turned 
up. The frame A is provided with a rod or 
bar, i i", extending horizontally through the 
side rails, a a', and projecting from the outside 
of a a? as a fulcrum for the bed to turn upon. 
The fulcrum-bar i i' may be continuous from 
a to a, or may be discontinued between a a?, 
as in Fig. 2. Two iron frames or stand 
ards, h. h", having an irregular form, support 
the head of the bed when the latter is in a 
horizontal position, and Support the entire 
frame A when the latter is in an upright po 
sition, by sustaining the ends of the fulcrum 
bar i i" in the two holes or slots, jj', which are 
fitted to receive i i" and to allow rotation of 
the fulcrum-rod within such slots if' as a 
bearing. By means of a bracket, k, attached 
to the standard h, a loose pulley or conduct 
ing-roller, l, is pivoted to said standard h. 
This roller is peripherally concave, as shown 
in Fig. 2. A coil or spiral spring, m, adapted 
to run within the concave of roller l, is at 
tached, one end of m to the corner casting d. 
by a nib, p, provided for that purpose, and 
the other end of m to the lower forward part 
of the standardh by means of a nib or ear, q, 
provided for that purpose. The spring in, 
which is carried under the roller l, for the 
purpose of increasing the length of the spring 
without the inconvenience of a corresponding 
increase in the size of the standard h, may con. 
veniently be a foot long when most contracted, 
as in Fig. 2. In like manner the similar stand 
ard, h", is provided with a roller, l, bracketed 
thereto, to conduct a similar spring, m, which 
is in like manner attached to said standard by 
the nib g and to the casting d by the nib. p. 
These two springs are of such strength and 
elasticity as may be desired to assist in the 
operation of raising and lowering the frame 
A, as hereinafter explained. By preference 
they should be of sufficient force to sustain the 
principal part of the weight of the foot end 
of the bed when the latter is in a horizontal 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
 
2 
- 
321,48 
65 
position, and to retain the mattress-frame in Itain the latter upright. The pillows or any 
an upright position whenever the same is 
desired part of the bedding may be placed in 
the pocket B, the night-clothing may be hung 
turned up, as hereinafter described. A foot 
board, , is attached to the end rail, b, and is 
upon the hooks at and strapped in place by ) 
5 provided with hooks ss, in the position indi 
o', and the curtain-roll t may be laid into the 
cated in the drawings, to sustain a detachable 
hooks ss', and a curtain may be drawn thereon 
curtain-roll, t, which reaches across the foot of 
to cover the bed. Such curtain and the roll 
the bed from side to side, and is adapted to 
t are to be removed before the bed is lowered 
carry a curtain which shall cover the exposed 
into position for occupation. When the frame 
under side of the bed when the frame A is in 
A rises, as described, the legs ff swing into 5 
5 
an upright position. I attach the hooks at to 
position between and against the side rails, ct 
the under side of the end rail, b, to hang 
a, as seen in Fig. 2. 
clothes upon; also the straps v v' across the 
I am aware that turn-up beds have hereto 
bottom of the bed to the under side of the 
fore been constructed in which the process of 
side rails, at a, to confine and hold in place 
folding up and of unfolding the bedstead has 6o 
such clothing as may be hung upon said hooks. 
been facilitated by the use of springs or 
A board, w, screwed to the under side of a (t, 
weights. I do not, therefore, claim the use of 
in the position shown, forms a convenient 
a spring for that purpose, broadly. 
pocket, B, for the reception of pillows, &c. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
The pocket is formed by and between a. a', 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
did, b, w, and e. 
1. The frame A, provided with legs ff' and 
The mode of operation of my turn-up bed is 
fulcrum i i", in combination with the stand 
as follows: The standards h is being screwed 
ards h h", which are provided with concave 
to the floor 0 or side wall, n, or to both, and 
rollers l l and with coil-springs m m?, adapted 
the fulcrum i i" being placed in the position 
to run upon said rollers, substantially as set 
shown, also the Springs n n being passed un 
forth. 
der their respective rollers ll, as shown, the 
2. The frame A, the standards h h, and the 
mattress-frame is permitted to assume a hori 
concave bracketed rollers ll, in combination 
Zontal position, where it is supported by the 
with the springs in m', adapted to run upon 
standards h h' and by the legs ff', which are 
said rollers, substantially as set forth. 
Swung into position for that purpose, as shown 
3. In a turn-up bed, the rollers ll, in com 
in Fig.1. As the frame A is being lowered by 
bination with the springs in n, adapted to run 
hand to such horizontal position the springs 
thereon, one end of said springs being imme 
m in counteract a part of the weight of the 
diately attached to the standards h h", and the 
35 frame, so that the same is easily lowered to that 
other end of the same being immediately at- 8c 
position. As the springs are extended in this 
tached to the mattress-frame A, substantially 
process, they run as far as may be necessary 
as set forth. 
over the pulleys ll, which are rotated there 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
by. When it is no longer desired to occupy 
name in the presence of two subscribing wit 
4o the bed, and when the latter has been made 
leSSeS. 
up partly or wholly, or not at all, as may be de 
sired, the foot of the frame A may be raised 
until the frame has reached an upright posi 
tion. The springs will aid the hand of the op 
45 erator in so turning up the bed, and will re 
WILLARD EDDY, 
TEIOMAS MOORE ROBERTS. 
LEANDER. W. BOYNTON. 
Witnesses: 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321519.txt	(No Model.) 
J. NEVILLE, 
FURNA CE, 
Patented July 7, 1885. 
N - - - - --N 
R-S. 
No. 321,519. 
7777. , 2 . 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
  
Azzeszt 
 
PA ex 
N 
 
 
! N 
N 
N 
Zzavazzazzar 
2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN NEVILLE, OF JERSEY CITY, NEWJERSEY. 
FURNA CE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 321,519, dated July 7, 1885. 
Application filed March 12, 1884. 
(No model.) 
O 
in Figs. 1 and 2, air being admitted into the 
To all Zwho, it may conce71 : 
bridge-wall chamber through a pipe, M. Ac 
Be it known that I, JoHN NEVILLE, of Jer 
sey City, in the county of Hudson and State cess is had to the floor of the smelting-cham 
ber through dool's PP at the side and outer 
of New Jersey, have invented a certain new 
end, respectively. 
and useful Improvement in Furnaces, of which 
Above the floor of the roasting-chamber is 
the following is a specification. 
a horizontal partition to divide the upper por 
My invention relates to a combined furnace 
tion, C''', from the lower portion, C". The chim 
having smelting and roasting chambers, the 
ney D or outlet therefrom being located above 
heat and products of combustion of the smelt 
the flue C, the heat and products of combus 
ing - chamber being utilized for heating the 
tion first pass through the lower portion, C''', 
roasting-chamber. 
then up and over the partition C and through 5 
My invention consists in a horizontal fur 
the upper portion, C''', to the chimney or out 
nace comprising a smelting-chamber accessi 
let. Q are doors by which access can be had 
ble through doors at the side and outer end 
to the fioor of the roasting-chamber. 
and a roasting-chamber at right angles thereto, 
The chamber B being at right angles to 
accessible through doors at the sides, as here 
the chamber A, access can be had to the for 
in after described, and pointed out in the claims. 
ward end as well as the side of the latter, and 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
the chimney as located is in a central position. 
a plan view of my improved furnace, partly in 
claim as my invention 
horizontal section on the linel 1, Fig. 3. Fig. 
1. The horizontal furnace herein described, 
2 is a vertical section on the line 22, Fig. 1. 
comprising smelting-chamber A, having doors 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section on the line 33, 
P P at the side and outer end, respectively, 
Fig. 1. 
and the roasting-chamber B, at right angles to 
My furnace has a smelting-chamber, A, and 
the smelting-chamber, connected to the latter 
roasting - chamber B at right angles thereto. 
by a flue, C, and having doors, substantially 
These chambers are connected by a flue, C, so 
as set forth. 
that the products of combustion and heat pass 
2. The horizontal furnace comprising smelt 
from the smelting-chamber A to the chimney 
ing-chamber A, having doors PP, roasting 
D through the roasting-chamber B as their 
chamber B, at right angles thereto and having 
only outlet. The direction of the heat and 
doors, flue C, connecting the chambers, and a 
products of combustion is indicated by the 
chimney, D, in a central position above the 
a''OWS. 
flue, substantially as set forth. 
The smelting - chamber A, I prefer to heat 
as follows: N is the fire-chamber, having be 
tween it and the smelting-chamber a bridge 
wall, O, formed with a hollow hot-air cham 
ber, J, communicating with the chamber A 
by means of pipes I and passages L., as shown 
GEO. H. KNIGHT, 
SAMI. KNIGHT. 
In presence of - 
55 
65 
JOHN NEWILLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321619.txt	(No Model.) 
E. F. MACKUSICK. 
TILE WORK ADAPTED TO HEARTHS, FIRE PLACES, AND WESTIBULES, 
Patented July 7, 1885, 
No. 321,619, 
 
A 
SS El YY 
 
Faaaaaaaaaaawaaaaaaaaaaaaaaawasawawa 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ELMER. F. MAC KUSICK, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO J. S. 
CONOWER & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
TLE-WORK ADAPTED TO HEARTHS, FIRE-PLACES, AND VESTIBULES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 321,619, dated July 7, 1885. 
Application filed May 4, 1885. (No model.) 
55 
gether cement is to be made use of beneath 
the tiles and between the metallic strips and 
such tiles, so that the metallic strips are firmly 
cemented into place; and it will be apparent 5O 
that the metallic strips intervening between 
the tiles and extending in either straight or 
Zigzag lines between a number of such tiles 
serve to hold the parts and increase the strength 
and the union of the tiles one with another. 
In the manufacture of separate articles, such 
as tea - pot stands, shovel - stands, or other 
movable articles, it is preferable to make use 
of a metallic frame passing all around the tiles, 
as well as to employ the strips of metal between 6o 
the respective blocks. There may also be a 
metallic back to support the tiles in place of 
a stone back. 
I am aware that cast-metal frames have 
been filled with a cement or composition, the 65 
edges of the metal being at the surface of the 
concrete; also that strips of tarred paper or 
metal bars have been introduced between Sec 
tions of cement or concrete to form divisions. 
and the edges of the intervening strips of 
sheet metal are on the same level, and the 
cement is used only as a means for holding 
the parts together. 
In my improvement the ornamental tiles 7o 
I claim as my invention- 
1. The combination, in tile-work, with the 
separate tiles, of strips of metal between such 
tiles placed edgewise and cemented so that 
the edges of the strips of metal appear be 
tween the tiles, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a backing, of tiles 
cemented to such backing, and intermediate 
strips of sheet metal placed edgewise and 
cemented in between said tiles, substantially 
as set forth. 
Signed by me this 1st day of Alay, A. D. 
- 
E. F. MAC KUSICK. 
1SS5. 
75 
8o 
85 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
WILLIAM G. MOTT. 
5 
I5 
To aid, who772, it may conce72. 
Be it known that I, ELMERF. MACKUSICR, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented an Improvement in Tile-Work, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This improvement relates to that class of tile 
work which is especially adapted to hearths, 
fire places, and to vestibules, in which the tiles 
are generally of a highly ornamental charac 
to ter; and the object of the invention is to in 
crease the ornamental appearance of the till 
ing and at the same time to strengthen the 
work by binding the blocks more closely to 
gether. 
With this object in view I introduce strips 
of sheet metal between the tiles so that the 
edges of the metallic strips are level with or 
slightly above the surfaces of the tiles. The 
metallic Strips are usually of an ornamental 
2c character, snch as brass, and the edges are 
kept bright by the friction or wear to which 
they are exposed. For fire-places the tiles 
and metallic strips are usually cemented upon 
slabs of slate, So that they may be completely 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
a piece of tiling, and Fig. 2 is a section of the 
Sle. 
The tiles and metallic strips may be em 
3o bedded in cement upon a concrete foundation, 
but usually they are cemented to a slab, A, of 
slate or other suitable stone of the proper 
size to fit the place where the tiling is to be 
applied. The tiles B B are to be square, tri 
35 angular, or of any desired shape and formed 
into patterns, and the surfaces of the tiles 
may be ornamented or plain or of any desired 
color. Between these tiles strips of metal C 
are introduced. These strips of metal are the 
4o same width, or nearly so, as the thickness of the 
tiles, so that one edge of each strip is at or 
slightly above the surface of the adjacent 
tiles, and the exposed edges of these strips are 
either plain, round, and polished or knurled, 
In packing the tiles and metallic strips to 
45 So as to present an ornamental appearance. 
25 prepared before being put in place. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321719.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 321,719, 
G, HARGREAVES, 
WENTILATING SEWERS. 
Patented July 7, 1885. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE HARGREAVES, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
VENTILATING SEWERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 321,719, dated July 7, 1885. 
Application filed October 20, 1884. 
(No model.) 
5 
IO 
To a 77 ?p/L??, it ??? ????er?, : 
Beit known that I, GEORGE HARGREAVEs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at De 
troit, in the county of Wayneand State of Michi 
gan, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Ventilating Sewers; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to letters or figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
Figurel of the drawings is a vertical longi 
tudinal sectional view of my device. Fig. 2 
is a detail view of the device for operating the 
doors on the openings into the sewer. Fig. 3 
is a modification of the air-opening into the 
SeWer. Fig. 4 is a sectional detail view. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
ventilating sewers and consuming the sewer 
gas by fire, and is intended to draw the venti 
lating-air into the sewers from the lowest and 
most impure stratum of the atmosphere near 
est the ground or earth, and thereby destroy 
any germs of disease that may exist there. 
The invention consists in the construction, 
novel arrangement, and adaptation of devices, 
as Will be hereinafter more fully set forth and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the vertical longitudinal section of a 
sewer, of which a represents the sewage, and 
a the air-space above the same. 
A is the mouth of a similar sewer at right 
angles to and opening into A. 
a' is the tube or flue by which the sewer A, 
and, if desired, A, open into the chimney B, 
of which b is the grate and fire, b the ash-pit, 
and b the foundation. 
b' is a chute by which fuel is introduced to 
the fire, and b is an opening opposite the 
chute, through which the fire is raked and the 
coal distributed. In some cases it is prefer 
able to arrange the chimneys at the lower ends 
of the sewers instead of the upper ends, as 
shown in the drawings. 
CC are the tubes or flues that admit the air to 
the sewers. The flues may be either straight 
or inclined, and may have the same diameter 
4. 
throughout, or may be smaller at their lower 
ends than at their upper, as shown. 
ce are the gratings covering the ?lues CC, 
and c' c' are the doors or valves at their lower 55 
ends. Each of these valves opensin Wardly on 
its hinge, and is opened and closed by means 
of the wire or metal chain c, connected to it 
opposite its hinge, and passing through a 
proper director near the end of the flue C, CO 
thence over the pulley c, whence it rises 
through a proper opening, and is attached to 
the drum c, and actuated by the lever c' on 
the said drum. Each door has its own proper 
chain or wire, lever, and drum, and all the 65 
drums turn on the same rod or shaft, c', fixed 
at any proper point to actuate the valves. The 
valves may be kept at any point of Opening 
by means of a ratchet and pawl, or other 
proper means, connected to the drums of each. 7o 
When the flues C C have their lower ends 
smaller than their upper, the valves are dis 
pensed with, as shown. 
DD are floats, made of any proper material, 
which show what quantity or height of Water 75 
is in the different parts of the sewer. The 
floats D D have attached to them the cords or 
metal chains did, which first pass over the pull 
leys d' d', thence run to the pulleys did, below 
which they turn and ascend through proper So 
openings, turn over the pulleys or rollers d' 
d, each of which has a bearing on the upright 
or standard d', and have attached to their de 
pending ends the weights did. The standard 
d' is placed near the levers and drums, so that 85 
the person operating the latter may know the 
height of water in the sewer. As the water 
ascends in the Sewer the float D also ascends 
and the weights d descend upon the standard. 
The valves c' are usually set less widely open go 
as the sewer rises, because it is desirable to 
draw more air from the lower and more im 
pure strata of the atmosphere outside. There 
is also caused thereby a greater range of draft 
in the sewer when the chimney is at the up- 95 
per end. When the flues Care of smaller di 
ameter at their lower ends than at their up 
per ends, their openings into the sewer grow 
less as they approach the chimney, except in 
some cases, where the latter is at the lower end IOO 
of the Sewer. 
Having thus disscribed my invention, what 
3O 
45 
SO 
2 
32,719 
cords or chains connecting the floats and 15 
weights, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with a sewer and flues 
having hinged doors or valves at their lower 
ends, of a horizontal shaft having one or more 
drums, and a lever-handle, and cords connect- 20 
ing the valves and drums, substantially as 
Specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE HARGREAVES. 
VWitnesses: 
CY RUS JOHNSTON, 
JOHN STUBENSKY. 
5 
IO 
i claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the sewer, of a 
chimney having a fire-place therein, a flue 
connecting the sewer with the chimney below 
the fire-place, vertical flues leading from the 
outer surface to the sewer, with valves at their 
lower ends, a shaft having drums provided 
with levers, and cords connecting the vertical 
flue-valves with the said drums, substantially 
as specified: 
2. The combination, with a sewer, of a ver 
tical frame or standards having horizontal 
rollers, floats arranged in the sewers, and 
m 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321819.txt	No. 321,819, 
BIOYGLE, 
Patented July 7, 1885. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 32,819, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
W. S. KELLEY. 
BICYCLE 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 7, 1885. 
???? 
 
 
 
El 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model. 
W. S. KELLEY. 
BICYCLE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 3 
No. 321,819, 
Patented July 7, 1885. 
 
  
 
 
H. 
(No Model.) 
No. 321,819. 
 
W. S. KELLEY. 
BICYCLE. 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented July 7, 1885, 
A ?? 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
W. S. KELLEY. 
BICYCLE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 5. 
- 
No. 321,819. 
Patented July 7, 1885. 
 
 
 
EAS 0AYSA0eTTTTLeL LLTLTTLLLLLLL LLLLLLLALTzzTLTLLL AALLLLLSLLLTTLTLTLLLLLT TALAAAAALLTTL LALAL LL LL A LL A 0L 0L 
 
 
 
 
 
????????? s 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. S. KELLEY, OFSMITHVILLE, NEW JERSEY. 
B CYCLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 321,819, dated July 7, 1885. 
Application filed February 7, 1854. (No model.) 
To aZZ zuv7hoTn?, it 7na/agy cornoee7?na, : 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM S. KELLEY, 
of Smithville, in the State of New Jersey, have 
invented certain Improvements in Bicycles 
and Tricycles, of which the following isa speci 
fication. 
The present invention relates to improve 
ments designed more particularly for applica 
tion to that class of front-steering rear-driving 
machines which are manufactured under the 
patents granted to G. W. Pressey, Nos. 234,722 
and 233,640, commonly known in the art as 
the Star machine, although, as will here 
inafter appear, certain of the improvements 
are also applicable in machines of other styles. 
The invention relates more particularly to 
improvements in the construction of the main 
frame; to an improved manner of arranging 
the pivoted foot-levers and connecting the 
same with the Clutch meolhamism of the driv 
ing-wheel; to means whereby the rider may 
instantly change the point at which the strap 
for driving the clutch is connected to the foot 
lever, in order to enable the driver to apply 
increased power to the wheel; to an improved 
construction of the rim; to improvements in 
the construction of the elastic tire; to a sad 
dle-support which is maintained by pendent 
supports, or otherwise arranged to have a 
limited forward and backward movement; to 
an improved device for connecting the clutch 
springs with the axle and permitting their 
convenient change of tension; to means for 
automatically throwing the pawls of the clutch 
into and out of action, for the purpose of ren 
dering the machine noiseless and of permit 
ting it to be moved backward at will; to an 
improved manner of connecting the suspen 
sion-Spokes to the hub of the wheel; to im 
proved devices for operating the brake, and 
to a Spring-Saddle of peculiar construction. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
machine. Fig. 1" is a section on the line 99. 
of Fig. 1, looking downward, and illustrating 
the form of the main frame. Fig. 1" is a side 
elevation of the axle-bearing in the main frame. 
Fig. 2 is a transverse central section through 
one side of the driving-wheel, frame, and the 
clutch mechanism. Fig. 3 is a cross-section 
on the line 11 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a similar 
view illustrating the partsin a slightly modi 
fied form. Fig. 5 is an end and a side view 
of the collet by which the clutch-spring is 
connected to the axle. Fig. 6 is a view of the 
same in a modified form. Fig. 7 is a section 
on the line 22 of Fig. 2, illustrating the man 
ner of connecting the spring to the box or body 
of the clutch. Fig. 8 is a cross-section on the 
line 33 of Fig. 1, showing the lower bearing 
of the steering-shaft. Fig. 9 is a sectional 
view, looking downward, on the line 44 of Fig. 
1, showing the upper bearing of the steering 
shaft and the connection of the seat-support 
therewith. Fig. 10 is a cross-section on the 
line 55 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 11 is a side elevation 
illustrating in a modified form the devices for 
suspending the seat-bar from the frame. Fig. 
12 is a front elevation of the steering-bar, the 
handle, and the attendant parts for operating 
the brake. Fig. 13 is a section on the line 6 
6, looking downward. Fig. 14 is a vertical 
section on the line 7 7 of Fig. 12, showing the 
manner of connecting the steering-ball to the 
steering-shaft. Fig. 15 is a horizontal section 
on the line S8 of the preceding figure. Fig. 
16 is a front elevation of the brake-connec 
tions in a slightly modified form. Fig. 17 is 
a perspective of the front Saddle-spring. Fig. 
18 is a perspective of the rear Saddle-spring. 
Fig. 19 is a sectional view illustrating the pre 
ferred form of the hub of the wheel and the 
attendant parts for giving access to the inner 
ends of the Spokes. 
Fig. 20 is a side view of 
the salme. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
A represents the main driving-wheel; B, the 
forward steering-wheel, of relatively small size, 
and C the main frame by means of which the 
wheels are connected and the Seat Or Saddle 
supported in essentially the same manner as 
in the original Pressey patents. 
The main Wheel A. is of the well-known Sus 
pension type, consisting of a rim connected by 
laterally-diverging spokes to hubs on the op 
posite ends of an axle. This main axle is 
made hollow or tubular from end to end to 
admit a stationary axle, D, which is passed 
through the same and secured firmly at its ends 
in the sides of the main frame. 
The main frame is composed of two parts or 
halves of similar size and form, applied on op 
posite sides of the main wheel, and united by 
the stationary axle and other transverse con 
nections, as hereinafter explained. . Each side 
of the frame is made in the form plainly rep 
resented in Figs. 1, 1", and 2. An upright 
arm, a, in the lower end of which the end of 
55 
85 
90 
95 
O 
25 
35 
50 
2 
321,819 
15 
75 
SO 
the fixed axle D is secured, rises a short dis 
tance above the axle, and is then extended in 
ward horizontally to a point near the wheel, 
where it unites with the four arms c, d, e, and 
5 f. The arm e extends forward in a substan 
tially horizontal position to receive the bear 
ing for the lower end of the steering-bar, the 
arm d upward and forward to receive the 
bearing for the upper end of the steering-shaft, 
Io the arm e upward and rearward to sustain 
the rear end of the seat-support, and the arm 
fbackward and downward to receive the rear 
end of the foot-lever or treadle, which will be 
hereinafter described. 
As shown in Fig. 1", the rear end of the arm 
f is bent outward horizontally to passaround 
the real end of the lever, and is then returned 
or extended forward, and united to the lower 
end of the arm at at a point adjacent to the 
axle. It will be observed that by returning 
or doubling the arm f in the manner de 
scribed it is adapted to give support to both 
ends of the pivot by which the foot-lever is 
sustained. 
25 The various arms of the frame are welded 
or otherwise permanently united, the entire 
side of the frame being thus composed of a 
single continuous piece. 
In order to give the frame additional rigid 
ity all upright rod or arm, (, is extended from 
the upper end of the arm d directly down 
rard to the arm c, to which it is riveted, 
welded, or otherwise securely attached. 
It will be observed that by bending the up 
per ends of the arms at inward the main por 
tions of the frame are permitted to stand in 
close proximity to the sides of the wheel, while 
at the Same time sufficient room is afforded 
between the arms a and the hub of the wheel 
for the introduction of the clutch mechanism. 
Heretofore difficulty has been experienced 
in securing and maintaining a firm connection 
of the fixed axle to the firanne. "To avoid (lifli 
culty in this regard I make one or both ends 
of the axle D of a square or other angular form 
to enter corresponding holes provided in the 
arms (t. 
Each of these arms I provide with a 
narrow slit or opening, h, extending from the 
angular hole outward, as plainly represented 
in Fig. 1", and unite the same by a transverse 
bolt, i, by means of which the arm may be 
drawn together, so as to firmly embrace the 
axle. In practice it is found that this con 
struction entirely overcomes the danger of the 
axle working loose in consequence of a constant 
vibration to which the parts are subjected 
when in action. 
On one side of the machine, preferably the 
left, the bolt i is extended downward, and pro 
vided at the lower end with a step, L, by means 
of which the rider is enalled to mount the 
machine. This step encircles the lower end 
of the bolt, and is secured by nuts applied 
above and below, as in Fig. 1, the nuts allow 
ing a vertical adjustment of the step, as may 
be required. 
Passing now to the mechanism for imparting 
motion to the wheel, it will be found to con 
sist of foot-levers connectedl to straps winding 
on drums, which revolve loosely on the main 
axle, and which carry pawls arranged to en 
gage with teeth on the main wheel. Springs 
serve to turn the drum backward when re 
lieved from the strain exerted by the strap and 
treadle, thus elevating the treadle; but the de 
pression of the treadle causes the straps to 
unwind and turn the drums in a forward di 
rection, the drums in turn communicating mo 
tion through their pawls to the wheel. 
In their general mode of action the parts 
resemble those in the original patent, but di?. 
fer there from in various details of construc 
tion, which will now be explained. The main 
wheel has each of its hubs provided on the 
outside with an annular flange, k, inside of 
which there is secured by screws or otherwise 
a removable ring, l, provided with ratchet 
teeth on its inner surface. This ring may be 
readily detached and replaced by another in 
the event of its being worn or otherwise in 
jured. Being made separate from the hub, it 
may be made of steel or other metal, accurately 
finished, and highly hardened to resist wear. 
On the end of the fixed axle D, between the 
hul) of the wheel and the main frame, I mount 
a loosely-revolving drum or pulley, E, pref 
erably constructed, as in Fig. 2, with a wide 
bearing on the axle. On the inner side of 
the drum I pivot, at points near the axle, 
two pawls or dogs, M, diametrically opposed 
to each other and alranged to engage at 
their outer ends with the toothed ring of the 
wheel. The outer side of the drunn E con 
tains an annular groove or recess, into which 
there is inserted a strong coiled spring, G, 
the outer cind of which is connected to the 
rim of the drum, while the inner end is con 
nected to a non-rotating collet, II, fixed upon 
the main axle D. When the drum or pulley 
is turned forward, the dogs impart a forward 
motion to the wheel and at the same time wild 
the spring. When the parts are released, the 
spring serves to turn the drum and pawls in 
a backward direction. The collet to which 
the spring is attached is preferably made of 
the form represented in Fig. 2, its outer end 
being adapted to fit closely on the square por 
tion of the axle D, while its inner portion is 
made hollow ol' tubular to extend over and 
around the hub or sleeve of the rotary drum 
E. This construction is adopted in order that 
the drum E may be given a long bearing on 
the axle, as before alluded to. When tulis 
long bearing is deemed unnecessary, the collet 
H may be arranged to fit closely throughout 
its entire length upon the axle. 
Heretofore it has been customary to fit the 
end of the spring firinly to the collet. This 
construction was attended with two evils; 
first, the difficulty of changing the tension of 13o 
the spring, which could only be effected by 
disconnecting the parts and removing the col 
let to permit its rotation on the axle, and, 
second, the liability of the spring to be bro 
I 25 
I I. ? 
I I5 
95 
ICO 
35 
45 
55 
 
321,819 
3 
IO 
35 
45 
55 
ken in the event of the wheel being turned 
backward. To avoid these difficulties I now 
construct the spring with a hook at its inner 
end, and provide the collet with a series of 
notches or shoulders, o, to engage with the 
Spring, as plainly represented in Fig. 6. On 
turning the drum forward the spring will en 
gage automatically with one or another of the 
shoulders, and this engagement will continue 
as long as the Spring remains under tension. 
If it be required to increase the tension of 
the spring, it is only necessary to turn the 
drum which carries the same forward until 
the end of the spring rides from one notch or 
shoulder to another. This adjustment, which 
may be readily effected by hand after dis 
Connecting the operating-strap, admits of the 
tension being quickly increased to any de 
sired extent, and this without the necessity of 
disconnecting the parts of the clutch or gain 
ing access thereto. 
Fig. 5 illustrates the form of the collet when 
made solid instead of tubular, as before re 
ferred to. When the collet is tubular or hol 
5 low, the notches may be cut entirely through 
its periphery to receive the end of the spring; 
but when made solid, as in Fig. 5, the notches 
or shoulders are formed on the outer surface 
only. It is manifest that there may be any 
suitable number of shoulders to engage the 
spring, but in practice it has been found that 
five will answer an excellent purpose. 
The foregoing parts of the clutch mechan 
ism are inclosed and protected by means of 
a cup-like shell or casing, I, consisting simply 
of a disk fitted loosely over the axle with a 
peripheral flange extending over and around 
the pulley, and secured thereto by screws or 
otherwise. To the outer surface of this casing, 
which encircles the drum or pulley E and 
constitutes in effect a part thereof, is connected 
the strap J, by which the forward rotation of 
the parts is effected. The inner or rear end 
of this strap is preferably connected to the 
drum in the manner illustrated in Fig. 7. The 
strap is laid against the outer surface of the 
drum and covered by a plate, p, having lips 
or studs to enter the upper surface of the 
leather. One or more screws, q, are passed 
through the plate and the leather, and also 
through the periphery of the drum into a plate, 
r, applied to the interior of the drum, a single 
screw thus serving to hold the strap to the 
outside of the drum, and also to hold the plate 
upon the interior. One end of the plate ' is 
curved inward, away from the inner surface of 
the drum, forming a hook or iip over which the 
outer hooked end of the coiled spring G en 
gages, as represented. The strap is wound 
about the drum in a forward direction, and is 
connected at ill-forward extremity, by means 
which will be presently explained, to a foot 
lever, K. This foot-lever, which is made of 
substantially an - form, extends downward 
in front of the drum, and thence backward 
thereunder to the rear extremity of the main 
frame, where it is mounted on a horizontal 
95 
Practical experience has shown that the ar- 85 
pivot, t, the two ends of which are sustained 
in the armf, before alluded to, as plainly rep 
resented in Figs. 1 and 1". The pivot t is 7o 
located directly in rear of the axle, and pref. 
erably in the same horizontal plane. It will 
be observed that as the lever is pivoted at its 
rear end and connected to the strap at its mid 
dle, while the power is applied at its forward 75 
end, the power or weight applied is imme 
diately received upon the strap and trans 
ferred in part to the forward or rolling side 
of the drum. The rear end of the lever being 
urged upward by the power applied exerts an 8o 
upward or lifting action on the main frame, thus 
relieving the main axle of a large portion of 
the weight and friction to which it would oth 
erwise be subjected. 
rangement of the lever to the end named is of 
great advantage. 
Referring to Fig. 1" it will be seen that the 
rear end of the lever is widened to form a 
long bearing for the pivot-pin, this construc. 9o 
tion retaining the lever securely in its up 
right position and preventing it from being 
thrown sidewise by the pressure of the foot. 
The strap may be connected at its forward 
end rigidly to the lever in any suitable man 
ner; but, inasmuch as it is desirable to have 
the power applied with increased effect to 
turn the wheel in mounting hills and rid 
ing sandy and rough roads, I provide an ad 
justable connection, whereby the point of at 
tachment between the strap and lever may be 
instantly changed by the rider without dis 
mounting. The movement of the connection 
back Ward toward the fulcrum of the lever 
gives an increased leverage, and vice versa. 
The adjustable connection may be modified 
in form; but I prefer to make use of the link 
it, having one end attached to the strap, and 
the opposite end pivoted to the lever in such 
manner that it may be swung forward and 
backward, the upward strain of the strap serv 
ing to hold it in either position in which it 
may be placed. The link may have its end 
inserted in a slot or groove formed for the 
purpose in the lever, or it may be forked to 
straddle the lever, as preferred. In those ma 
chines which admit of such construction being 
employed, a stud or arm may be formed on 
the end of the link in such position that the 
rider, by placing his foot directly thereon, may 
effect the forward or backward adjustment of 
the link, as demanded. In a machine of the 
present type, however, this lateral projection 
directly upon the link is not admissible, for 
the reason that it would encounter the step L. 
For this reason I provide a supplemental de 
vice for adjusting the link, this device being 
extended upward in close proximity to the 
lever in such position as not to encounter the 
step. The device consists simply of an arm, 
v, pivoted at its lower end to the extremity of 
the link, and jointed near its upper end to a 
second link, w, the lower end of which is piv 
oted to the lever. The upper end of the arm 
ICC 
IO5 
I 25 
EO 
II. 
 
: 
; 
t 
; 
: 
 
i 
: 
4 
; 
, , , , , , 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
4. 
32, 
89 
; 
; 
: 
- 
- 
- 
i 
: 
: 
- 
, 
pressure. 
is bent laterally, as represented, in order to 
afford a bearing for the foot of the rider. The 
link being in its forward position, as in Fig. 
1, a downward pressure of the foot upon the 
! 
5 army has the effect of causing the link to 
swing backward to the position represented 
by dotted lines, thus changing the connection 
of the strap ito a point nearer the fulcrum of 
the foot-lever. On the contrary, an upward 
i Io pressure applied by the toe to the arm av will 
have the effect of swinging the link from its 
backward to its forward position. 
it, Will be observed that, the links in and 20 
are arranged to stand at substantially right 
15 angles with each other. The effect of this ar 
rangement and the connecting devices is to 
'enable the operator to effect the movement of 
the link at more easily than would otherwise 
till be possible, it being found in practice that 
2O notwithstanding the fact that the straps may 
till be under a considerable tension, the move 
ment of the link may be effected in either di 
rection by the application of a very slight 
25 While the devices represented hereina are 
the best knowntoine at the present time for 
effecting the adjustment of the strap with re 
it spect to the lever, it is imanifest that they may cline ceases its action and the parts resume 95 
be modified inform in many respects, which 
3o will suggest themselves to the skilled me. 
chanic, without departing from the spirit of 
my invention, which consists, broadly, in the 
combination, with the strap and the foot-le 
liver, of an intermediate device whereby the 
35 connection between the strap and lever may 
| be varied at will by a pressure of the foot, and 
Without the necessity of dismounting from the 
machine. 
In the machine as originally constructed 
4o the pawls or dogs were maintained in engage 
ment by means of springs, the result of which 
was, first, the production of an oljectionable 
clicking sound as the pawls moved backward 
over the teeth, and, second, the fact that it 
45 was impossible to turn the wheel in a back 
ward lirection, which frequently rendered it 
inconvenient to ln Ove the machine when not 
in use. To avoid these difficulties I now pro 
vide a friction device connected with the pawls, 
5O whereby they are thrown positively into and 
out of engagement at the proper times. This 
device, which may be modified in its details, 
is preferably of the form represented in Figs. 
2 and 3. A collar, ac, divided through its 
55 center, is clasped around the fixed axle from 
opposite sides, and its two parts united by 
means of adjustalle bolts or screws /, which 
are extended through and beyond one of the 
portions, and provided with spiral springs 2. 
6O The springs and bolts serve to urgethe two parts 
together around the axle with a yielding press 
ure, causing them to engage the axle with a 
moderate degree of friction. This frictional 
collar is provided with outwardly. extending 
65 arms the extremities of which are connected 
by links (t' to the respective dogs or pawls in 
the manner plainly represented. 
The action of the parts is as follows: When 
the drum or pulley E is turned in a forward 
direction by the straps and levers, the forward 7o 
rotation of the outer ends of the pawls is in 
mediately resisted by the links (t, which are: 
held in position by the friction of the collar 
on the fixed axle. The result of this resist. 
ance is that the pawls are immediately caused 75 
to engage in the teeth of the wheel, and re- 
tained in engagement so long as the forward 
motion of the drum continues. The instant that 
the engagement occurs the pawls, ovelcoming 
the friction of the collar upon the axle, cause the 8o 
collar and its arms and links to turn forward, , 
, , 
the entire combination of parts l'otating in a 
noiseless manner. The instant that the Straps 
are released so that the (lrum starts in a back 
ward direction under the influence of the 85 
spring G, the links (', owing to the continued 
friction of the collar upon the axle, tend to 
resist the back Ward movement of the dogs, 
the effect of which is to cause the dogs to dis- 
engage instantly from the teeth and remain go 
out of engagement during the entire backward, 
rotation of the i drunn. 
The above is the action of the parts when 
the machineis in Operation. When the mal 
their normal positions, tille pawls i are out of 
engagement with the wheel, and will thus re 
main until the drums are again turned forward 
: 
to cause their engagement. It follows, con 
sequently, that the machine may at any time IOO 
be rolled in a backward direction at Will. This 
will be found a matter, of great convenience 
in moving the machine from place to place. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
While it is preferred in ordinary cases to 
make use of the links (t between the frictional (O5 
collar and the pawls, the arrangement repre 
sented in Fig. 4 may be substituted. 
The collars, dogs, and springs are all con 
structed and arranged substantially as in the 
first device; but instead of employing the in 
termediate links the arms of the collar are 
arranged in such position as to engage di 
rectly with the outer ends of the pawls, with 
which they will be united by means of a pin 
and slot, as shown, or any other suitable slid 
ing connection. 
The operation of the device is substantially 
identical with that first described, the only 
difference being that the collar acts directly 
upon the dogs instead of through the links. 
So far as the engagement and disengagement 
of the pawls is concerned there is no difference. 
Passing now to the forward wheel and the 
steering-shaft by which it is carried, it will 
be observed that the wheel has the ends of its I 25 
axle mounted in arms which extendl downward 
in a vertical or substantially vertical direction 
from the lower end of the s' sering-shaft M, 
which extends thence upward and backward 
in an inclined position to a point in advance I3o 
of the rider's seat, its upper end being pro 
vided with a steering bar or handle, N, secured 
transversely and firmly thereon, so that by 
turning the handle the steering-wheel is de 
II 5 
IO 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
321,89 
5 
flected both horizontally and vertically in es 
Sentially the same manner as explained in the 
original patent. In the original machine the 
steering-bar was mounted in a single bearing 
at the lower end, and combined with an en 
circling spiral spring, in order that it might 
play end Wise Within the bearing in the event 
of the forward wheel encountering serious re 
sistance, for the purpose of relieving the ma 
chine and rider from the shocks which would 
otherwise have beenencountered. In my im 
proved machine the necessity for this longi 
tudinal movement of the shaft is avoided, and 
consequently I am enabled to dispense with 
the inclosing-tube and spring which were com 
monly employed. The lower end of the shaft, 
immediately above the forkin which the wheel 
is mounted, is carried in a sleeve or bearing, 
a', which is located between the arms a of the 
mainframe and Secured firmly therein by means 
of a transverse bolt, b, as plainly represented 
in Figs. 1 and 8. The bearing a consists of 
a solid block bored out to fit closely around 
the journal of the shaft and split or divided on 
its rear side, through which the bolt l' is 
passed, to the end that it may be contracted or 
I 
compressed by tightening the bolt in such 
manner as to compensate for wear and insure 
a close fit upon the shaft. The bearing c", at 
the upper end of the steering-shaft, is similar 
in construction to that at the lower end, and is 
united by a transverse bolt, d, to the upper 
ends of the arms d and g of the main frame. 
It will be perceived that the two extremities 
of the steering-shaft are thus connected di 
rectly to the main frame, and that the trans 
verse bolts h, which secure the bearings in 
place, serve the additional purposes of adjust 
ing the bearings and of clamping the main 
frame firmly thereto. 
The combination of the box in the manner 
described to admit of its adjustment is not a 
necessary feature; but the construction is pre 
ferred for obvious leasons. 
It will be perceived that under my improved 
construction the steering-bar, connected at its 
two ends to the main frame, is made to serve 
in effect as a part of the frame, and to assist 
in giving the same the necessary strength and 
rigidity. In this connection the principal dif. 
ference between my construction and that rep 
resented in the original Pressey patents lies 
in the fact that the steering-bar is made of 
greater length and connected at its two ex 
tremities with the frame. It will be perceived 
that in my frame the forward portion may be 
tied together by means of the steering-shaft 
alone, thus avoiding the necessity of a rigid 
front bar, which would otherwise be required. 
In order to relieve the machine and the 
rider from the shocks which would otherwise 
be encountered in the event of the steering 
wheel encountering a sudden resistance, as 
before alluded to, I now connect the seat or 
Saddle with the other parts in such manner as 
to admit of its receiving a limited fore-and 
aft motion. To this end I make use of a seat 
95 s 
supporting bar, O, located directly over the 
driving-wheel, its rear end being pivotally 
Connected to the arm e of the main frame, 7o 
while its forward end is connected by a pend 
ent Swinging arm to the upper bearing, c, of 
the steering-shaft or other portion of the main 
frame. The arm p' may consist simply of a 
link pivoted at one end to the seat-bar and 75 
at the opposite end to a bearing on the main 
frame. It is preferred, however, to employ a 
suspension device which is elastic, and which 
will tend to resist the forward movement of 
the seat-bar. In Figs. 1 and 9 I have repre- 8O 
Sented a suspension-spring, p, consisting of a 
single piece of Wire having its central por 
tion formed into coils and its two ends ex 
tended downward and pivoted at their ex 
tremities to the seat-bar. The central coiled 
portion is Secured to the shaft-bearing by 
means of a clip-plate and screw, as plainly 
represented in Fig. 9. The seat-bar stands 
normally in the position represented in Fig. 
1. When, however, the machine encounters 
a resistance, or has its motion otherwise ar 
rested suddenly, the spring-Suspension device 
will yield and permit the seat-bar to move 
forward to a limited extent, the arm e at the 
rear end possessing sufficient flexibility to fol 
low the bar. The essence of the invention in 
this regard consists in connecting the Seat-bar 
with the frame in such manner that it may 
play forward and backward to a limited ex 
tent, and that it shall resume its original po- ICO 
sition automatically, and it will be manifest 
to the skilled mechanic that the details may 
be modified in various respects without de 
parting from the limits of the invention. 
In Fig. 11 the seat-bar has its forward end 
pivoted to an ear on the side of a block, l, 
which is arranged to slide vertically in a tubul 
lar link, h, pivoted at the upper end to the 
frame. The link is slotted on One Side in Or 
der that the ear on the slide may project 
through the same and play up and down there 
in. Within the link are mounted two spiral 
or other springs, one above and the other be 
low the slide. The link permits the seat-bar 
to move forward and backward, while the 
springs permit it to play vertically With an 
easy action, in consequence of which the ma 
chine may be driven over rough roads with 
out discomfort to the rider. 
In practice it is found desirable to have the 
seat-bar located in close proXimity to the pe 
riphery of the wheel; but it is important that 
it should be free from liability to bear upon 
the wheel under any circumstances which may 
arise. I therefore construct the Seat-Support 
ing bar of a form in cross-section as in Figs. 
1 and 10. The bar thus formed may be given 
the necessary stiffness without undue weight. 
In addition to the advantages above men 
tioned it possesses the further advantage of I3O 
Serving as a guard or Shield to protect the 
rider from the dust and dirt which may escape 
from the periphery of the wheel. 
Upon the seat-bar I mount an elastic sad 
IO5 
II5 
IO 
O 
25 
35 
55 
?? 
 
6 
32,819 
IO 
25 
45 
dle, Q, of the peculiar construction represent 
ed in Fig. 1. It consists of a pliable seat or 
Saddle proper sustained at its two extremities, 
and strained longitudinally by means of coils e. 
and f'. The form of these springs is plainly 
represented in Figs. 17 and 1S. The forward 
Spring consists of an arched portion having 
its two extremities coiled and extended hori 
Zontally for attachment to the supporting-bar. 
In practice it is found advisable to Weld or 
otherwise unite these lower arms, thus pro 
ducing an endless or continuous spring. 
The spring e' at the rear end of the saddle 
is similar in construction to that at the front, 
but differs therefrom in that its raised por 
tion is extended backward and expanded lat 
erally to conform to the rear end of the seat, 
which is of the same marginal form as those 
now in common use, its width being dimin 
ished from the rear to the front or horn. 
The springs may be secured to the bar by 
means of clip-plates and nuts, So as to remain 
immovably in position. It is preferred, how 
ever, to attach them by devices which will ad 
mit of their being adjusted longitudinally of 
the bar-first, that the position of the saddle 
with respect to the wheel may be varied to 
suit the taste or requirements of individual 
riders, and, second, that the tension of the 
Spring may be modified to increase or dimin 
ish the stiffness of the saddle. 
Another part of my invention has reference to 
the construction of the metal rim of the wheel 
and to the elastic tire thereon. The rim is 
rolled in one continuous piece, of the sectional 
form represented in IFig. 10. It will be per 
ceived that the outer surface of the rim con 
tains a groove or cavity to receive the tire, 
and that this cavity is made with a flat bot 
tom surface, and with upright side wheels, the 
faces of which are inclined slightly outward. 
In practice it is found that the groove of this 
particular form is advantageous, in that it 
causes the tire to be retained securely in po 
sition, and avoids the loosening of the cement 
by which the tire is retained in place. In this 
regardi the rim is far superior to those having 
a groove of a Semicircular or approximate 
forms, which cause the cement to become read 
ily loosened in consequence of the tension and 
the lateral Strains to which the tire is sub 
jected. 
The elastic tire as at present known in the 
art consists either of a homogeneous body of 
soft and elastic rubber, or of a soft body hav 
ing a hardened surface applied on the outer 
side. 
It is customary to apply tires of the kind 
first mentioned under a considerable degree of 
tension, the result of which is that whenever 
the outer surface is ruptured or cut in use the 
walls of the incision are immediately drawn 
apart. This action results in the rapid de 
struction of the tire. 
In tires of the second class mentioned it is 
found impossible to apply them under the de 
sired tension on account of the want of clas 
ticity in the outer portion. 
It is the aim of my improvement to provide 
a tire the Outer surface of which shall be 
adapted to resist the cutting action of sharp 
stones and other objects with which it is lia 
ble to be brought in contact, and which shall 
at the same time be adapted for application 
under a high degree of tension, so that in the 
event of the failure of the cement there will 
be no danger of the tire being displaced. 
To this end the improvement consists in a 
tire naving its body composed of an outer 
portion of soft and highly-elastic rubber, and 
its inner portion composed of rubber pos 
Sessing great strength and elasticity. 
It further consists in combining with the 
tire a thin outer skin or coating of rubber 
treated in such manner as to be exceedingly 
tough, so that although it may yield readily, 
it will prevent the destruction of the inner 
alld Softer portion of the tire. 
The form of my improved tire is plainly 
represented in Fig. 10, in which c" represents 
the body portion of the tire, of a circular or 
approximately-circular form, composed of a 
light and highly - elastic rubber. f. repre 
sents the base portion of the tire, united to 
the body portion in the process of vulcaniza 
tion or by suitable adhesive materials or coin 
pounds, the outer surface of the portion cor 
responding closely to the body with which it 
is intimately united. The inner surface will 
be made of a form corresponding with that 
of the groove or recess in the particular tire 
With which it may be employed. In the pres 
ent instance the inner surface is flat, with edges 
inclining outward. This base portion is of a 
highly elastic and strongly contractile char. 
acter, and is made shorter than the outer por 
tion, or of such relative length in Irelation 
thereto that although the base portion may 
be under tension the outer portion will be free 
from tension, or practically so, so that if sev 
ered or punctured at the outer side it will 
have no tendency to gape open, as is the case 
with tires of ordinary construction. Reliance 
is placed mainly on the construction of this 
base, which is stretched upon the wheel to re 
tain the tire in place. 
Around the tire, constructed as above, I 
place an envelope or skin, (f", consisting of a 
pliable and exceedingly tough rulbber, which 
receives its support from the inner or body 
portion, but which at the same time serves to 
protect the body from injury. It is preferred 
to have this en velope inclose the base portion 
of the tire as well as the body, as by reason of 
its exceeding strength and toughness it is pe 
culiarly adapted, when cemented to the rim, 
to retain the tire in place. 
It is to be understood that in constructing 
the tire the body portion e' is to be arranged 
on the base in Such condition or in such man 
ner that, although the base may be stretched 
or subjected to a considerable tension when it 
wrs 
7o 
75 
SO 
90 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
321,819 
25 
35 
I) 
is applied to the wheel, the outer portion 
shall be comparatively free from tension. 
Owing to this absence of tension there will be 
no tendency of the outer portion of the tire to 
open or spread in the event of incisions being 
made therein. 
The tire as above constructed may be em 
ployed in connection with the rim represented 
without the employment of cement; but it is 
recommended that it be cemented securely to 
the rim in the usual manner. 
In the construction of my tire the several 
portions above referred to may be produced 
by selecting appropriate compounds of rubber 
5 and subjecting them to a vulcanization adapt 
ed to the end in view. 
Various methods being well known and 
commonly practiced in the art for the produc 
tion of vulcanized rubberranging from a state 
of extreme softness to a state of extreme hard 
ness, it is deemed unnecessary to detail the 
same herein, inasmuch as any person skilled 
in the art is capable of exercising the ordinary 
skill and discretion in the selection and treat 
ment of the material to give the same the qual 
ities enumerated herein. 
My invention relates rather to the selection 
and combination of different qualities of rub 
ber, well known in the art, than to the treat 
ment of the rubber to give it the required con 
sistency. 
In order to give the inner and outer por 
tions different degrees of tension and elastici 
ty, as above stated, the outer portion may be 
subjected to compression at the time that it is 
applied to the inner portion, or the inner por 
tion stretched at the time it is applied to the 
outer layer. 
For the purpose of arresting the motion of 
the machine, it is provided with a hand-brake 
to act. On the main wheel. 
As shown in Figs. 1, 12, and 13, the brake 
shoe U is pivoted at its lower end to the arm 
d of the main frame, and is pivoted at its up 
per end to a rod, g, extending to a collar, h", 
arranged to slide on the upper end of the 
steering - shaft. This collar is united by a 
swiveling connection to one end of a hand 
lever, i', having a pivotal connection at an in 
termediate point in its length with the steer 
ing-bar. By drawing upward from the outer 
end of the lever i' the brake is caused to act 
upon the wheel. 
It will be observed that the brake-lever is 
attached to and swings with the steering-bar, 
and that the swiveling action of the steering 
bar and shaft in no wise interfere with the ac 
tion of the brake. 
If preferred, the brake-shoe may be pivoted 
at an intermediate point in its length, as shown 
in Fig. 12, and united to the middle portion 
of a hand-lever pivoted to the steering-bar. 
For various reasons it is desirable to have 
the steering-bar united with its shaft securely, 
but in Such manner as to be detachable. I 
therefore adopt the construction represented 
in Figs. 14 and 15. The upper end of the 
steering-shaft is made of conical form, and in 
serted into an opening of corresponding form 
in the steering-bar. The bar is fixed against 
rotation on the shaft by means of a key or 
spline, m', and held down in place by means 
of a screw, n., inserted into the upper end of 
the shaft and bearing on top of the bar. 
Referring again to the friction device for 
throwing the pawl into and out of action, it 
should be stated that the friction-collar may 
be arranged to turn on a sleeve or projection 
on the hub of the wheel, instead of being mount 
ed directly on the fixed axle; but the construc 
tion represented in the drawings is preferred. 
In wheels of the present type having the 
rim carried by a series of wire spokes under 
tension, commonly known as suspension 
wheels, trouble is experienced in maintaining 
the tension of the spokes, the incessant vibra 
tions of the machine causing them to Work 
loose. To remedy this difficulty I attach the 
inner ends of the spokes to the hub in the 
manner plainly represented in Fig. 2. The 
hub has an annular groove or recess, o, inits 
interior. The ends of the spokes are inserted 
loosely through radial holes in the hub, with 
their inner ends projecting through or into 
the groove. To their inner extremities nuts 
pare applied, as represented. The outer ends 
of the nuts are made spheroidal in form, where 
by they are permitted to rock or tip to the 
slight extent which may be required in order 
to adjust them in the direction of the spoke. 
The advantage of this construction is that the 
nut is enabled to seat itself firmly at all times 
without danger of subjecting the spoke to a 
lateral or indirect strain. This construction 
avoids that frequent breakage of the threaded 
ends of the spokes of the character in which 
the nuts are seated immovably in place. 
The groove to receive the nuts which hold 
the inner ends of the spokes may be formed 
within the flange k of the wheel, as represent 
ed in Fig. 2, in which case it will be necessary 
to remove the clutch mechanism in order to 
gain access to the nuts. 
To avoid the incon 
venience which would thus be occasioned, I 
propose to adopt in ordinary cases the con 
struction represented in Figs. 19 and 20, the 
nut-receiving groove being formed in an an 
nular flange overhanging the outer side of the 
hub, outside of and beyond the periphery of 
the drum. It will be observed that this con 
struction admits of the nuts being reached from 
the outside of the drum, so that the spokes may 
be adjusted or removed without affecting any 
portion of the clutch mechanism. 
As a convenient means of covering and con 
cealing the nuts thus applied, I provide an 
external casing, I, which surrounds the drum, 
with a radially-extended flange or lip, a', as 
plainly represented. At one or more points this 
flange will be cut away, as represented at b', 
thus producing an opening through which the 
nuts may be reached. This opening may be 
located at the lower side and remain uncov 
ered; but it is preferred to close the same by 
55 
?? 
7o 
75 
90 
95 
IOo 
IO 
II5. 
I2O 
I 25 
I3) 
 
S 
. 
. 
. 
. 
321,819 
5 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
90 
means of a plate, c'", pivoted, screwedl, or oth 
wise attached to the casing. 
While I have illustrated and described my 
various improvements with special reference 
to their use on a bicycle, it is to be understood 
that the clutch mechanism, the pedals, the rim, 
the tire, the saddle, and various other parts 
may be employed with equal facility and ad 
Vantage on machines having three or more 
Wheels, and that such of the features as are 
adapted for the purpose may be applied to 
two - wheel machines having rear steering 
wheels, or having the large wheel in advance 
of the other. 
It will also be understood that although I 
have mentioned hereinstraps as the means of 
connection between the levers and clutches, 
flexible connections of any suitable kind 
Such as cotton belts, elastic bands of metal, 
chains, or equivalent devices-may be em 
ployed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, is 
1. The frame-section for a bicycle, consist 
ing of the arms a, c, d, e, and f, as described 
and shown. 
2. In combination with the foot-lever, the 
main frame having the arin f' doubled or re 
turned in the manner described, whereby it is 
adapted to support the fulcrum of the lever at 
both ends. 
3. In combination with the main frame and 
axle, the step and the bolti, adapted to serve 
the twofold purpose of sustaining the step 
and of contracting the frame upon the axle. 
4. In a bicycle, the combination, with the 
main frame, of the pendent screw or bolt i, and 
the step L, adjustably secured upon said bolt 
by means of nuts. 
5. In combination with the rear driving 
Wheel and its axle, the main frame mounted on 
said axle and provided with the arms c and d. 
the bearings attached to the extremities of said 
arms, and the steering-shaft mounted in said 
bearings and fixed against end motion therein. 
6. In a bicycle, the combination of the rigid 
main frame, the rear wheel mounted therein, 
the forward steering-wheel, and the inclined 
steering-shaft connected at its two extremities 
to the main frame, and serving in effect as a 
front bar for said frame to impart the requisite 
strength and rigidity thereto. 
7. In combination with the lear driving 
Wheel, the main frame, the front steeriig 
Wheel, the steering bar or shaft mounted in 
fixed bearings on the main frame, and the seat 
supporting bar mounted, substantially as de 
Scribed and shown, to move bodily forward 
With respect to the frame and to return auto 
matically to its normal position. 
S. In a machine comprising a main frame, 
and Sustaining-wheels therefor, a seat-sup 
porting bar connected to the frame at its for 
Ward end by means of a pendent link, and at 
its rear end by an upright yielding arm, as 
described and shown. 
9. In a bicycle, two ground-wheels, in com 
bination with a connecting-frame, whereby a 
fixed distance is maintained between the 
wheels, and a seat - supporting bar movable 
bodily forward and backward upon the frame, 
said bar being supported in substantially the 
manner described, whereby it is adapted to re 
sume its normal position automatically. 
10. In a bicycle or similar machine, a wheeled 
frame, and a seat or saddle supported at its 
two ends by yielding devices, adapted to per 
mit the saddle to move freely forward and 
backward in relation to the frame and wheels. 
11. In combination with the main frame, 
the rear driving-wheel, and the forward steer 
ing-wheel of relatively small size, the seat-sup 
porting bal' pivoted at its rear end to the arm 
of the frame, and connected at its forwardend 
to the frame by means of a pendent link or 
Support. 
12. In combination wi tlh tlhe, main frame, 
the driving-wheel, and the steering-wheel, the 
seat-supporting bar 0, jointed at its rear end 
to an arm of the main frame, and a Spling, p, 
connecting the forward end of said bar with 
the main frame, substantially as described and 
shown. 
13. In combination with the fixed axle, the 
driving-wilheel revolving tilhereon, the I'ota'y 95 
drum or pulley revolving independently on the 
axle, the connecting-pawls, ald a trictional 
collar connected with the pawls, substantially 
as described, whereby the pawls are thrown 
positively into and out of action. 
14. In a bicycle or similar machine, the com 
bination of a driving-wheel, an independently 
revolving drum, intermediate pawls connect 
ing said parts, a spring to turn the drum in a 
backward direction, a strap and treadle to 
turn the same in a forward direction, and a col 
lar having a frictional engagement. With a sup 
port independent of the pawl-carrier, and ar 
ranged to act upon the pawls for the purpose 
of swinging the same into and out of engage 
ment, substantially as described and shown. 
15. In combination with the non-l'otating 
axle, the driving-wheel provided with a 
toothedl rinn or flange, the independently-re 
volving drum provided with pawls to engage 
the rim, the divided collar confined by spring 
pressure upon the axle, and a connection be 
tween said collar and the pawls. 
16. In a bicycle, the combination of a foot 
lever or pedal, a. driving-Wheel, a stl'ap for op 
erating said wheel, and intermcdiate devices 
connecting the strap and lever movable to 
and from the fulcrum of the latter, and de 
vices adapted to be operated by the foot of the 
rider for changing the position of the connect 
ing devices. 
17. In a bicycle, the combination of the foot 
lever and the wheel-operating stra) with the 
connecting-link arranged to swing forward 
and backward, substantially as described. 
1S. In a bicycle, the combination, with a 
driving-wheel, of an operating-strap, a lever 
to actuate said strap, and a SWinging connec 
tion between the strap and lever provided 
OG 
?? 5 
IIO 
II5 
25 
 
321,819 
9 
Io 
2) 
25 
35 
0. 
5 
with a projection to be moved by the foot of 
the operator, whereby an instantaneous ad 
justment of the connection may be effected. 
19. The drum and the spring tending to 
revolve the same in a backward direction, in 
combination With the operating-strap, the le 
ver, and the swinging link u, whereby the 
point of connection between the lever and 
strap may be changed at will and the adjust 
ment maintained by the tension of the strap. 
20. In combination with the strap and lever, 
the Swinging link at, the secondary link ac, and 
a 
21. The axle and the revolving drum or 
pulley, in combination with the springg, hav 
ing a hooked inner end, and the stationary 
collet provided with a series of shoulders or 
notches to receive the end of the spring. 
22. In combination with the axle and spring, 
the stationary collet H, made of hollow or tu 
bular form, and the drum or pulley E, having 
its journal extended around the axle within 
the collet. 
23. In combination with the drum having 
a plate or hook, ), in its interior, the spring 
g, having a hooked outer end to engage there 
With. 
24. In combination with the drum or pull 
ley, the internal Spring, and its holding-plate 
r, the external strap and its holding-plate p, 
and the screw or screws q, applied as described 
and shown. 
25. In combination with the driving-wheel 
having the annular flange k, the drum or pull 
ley provided with pawls to drive the wheel, 
and the internal shell or casing applied, as 
shown, to encircle the hub and flange, whereby 
the parts are concealed and protected. 
26. In combination with the supporting 
bar, the flexible seat or saddle and the inde. 
pendent supporting - springs e' and f', each 
consisting of a coiled portion having one ex 
tremity secured to the bar, and the opposite 
extremity attached to the saddle. 
27. In combination with the flexible seat or 
saddle, the supporting-springs e' and f', each 
consisting of a continuous or endless wire hav 
ing coils formed therein. 
28. The improved rim for a bicycle-wheel, 
having in its outer surface the groove with 
the flat seat and outwardly-inclined sides. 
29. The improved rim for a bicycle-wheel, 
having in the outer surface a groove with a 
flat bottom and flaring sides, and also having 
on the back the central rib, substantially as 
ShOwln. 
30. In an elastic tire for bicycle and other 
wheels, the combination of a central body of 
light and highly-elastic rubber and an exterior 
skin or coating of thin tough rubber, combin 
ing the qualities of pliability and of relatively. 
great tensile strength. 
31. The combination, with a wheel, of an 
elastic tire consisting of an inner portion ap 
plied under tension to act with a contractile 
effect on the wheel, and an outer portion con 
45 
55 
75 
- 
described. 
nected firmly to the inner portion and free 
from or under relatively low tension, whereby 
the tire is retained firmly in position upon the 
wheel, but prevented from opening in the event 
of its surface being cut or ruptured. 
32. In combination with a wheel, an elastic 
tire consisting of illner and outer portions, the 
inner portion being under high tension and 
the outer portion free from tension or under 
relatively low tension. 
33. In an elastic tire for road-wheels, the 
combination of a base portion of highly-con 
tractile rubber, an outer portion of light elas 
tic rubber, and a thin covering or envelope of 
relatively-tough rubber, as described. 
34. In combination with the steering-shaft 
and the main frame-sections, a divided box or 
bearing for said shaft, connected to the frame 
by means of a transverse bolt, substantially as 
35. In a bicycle, the combination, with the 
main wheel, of a seat-Supporting bar located 
directly thereover, said bar constructed of a 
?form in cross-section, as and for the pur 
pose described. 
36. In combination with the main frame and 
the wheel fixed therein, the brake-shoe, the 
rotary steering-shaft and its handle, and the 
brake-operating lever pivoted to and swinging 
with the handle and united by a swinging con 
nection with the brake. 
37. In combination with a clutch mechanism 
for driving the same, a suspension-wheel hav 
ing the inner ends of its spokes secured to the 
hub at a point outside of or beyond the periph 
ery of the clutch mechanism, whereby access 
is afforded to the inner end of the spokes. 
38. In combination with the clutch mechan 
ism having pawls to engage the wheel, the 
wheel provided with the overhanging toothed 
flange, and also with the spoke-receiving flange 
outside of or beyond the first-named flange. 
39. In combination with the wheel having 
the annular flange (t", with the spoke-retaining 
nuts applied to its inner surface, the shield or 
casing I, provided with a flange to cover and 
conceal the nuts. 
40. In a bicycle, the combination of a main 
frame, a rear wheel mounted in fixed bearings 
in said frame, a steering shaft or rod with a 
forward and backward inclination, mounted in 
bearings in the front of said frame and fixed 
against end motion therein, a steering-wheel 
mounted in a substantially-vertical fork on the 
lower end of said shaft, a steering bar or han 
dle applied to the upper rear end of the shaft, 
a brake mounted on the main frame, a brake. 
operating lever located adjacent to and ar 
ranged to turn with the steering-handle, where. 
by the brake and the steering-wheel may be 
controlled without interference with each 
other. 
WILLIAMS, KELLEY, 
85 
90 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
Witnesses: 
E, F, BURNS, 
E, H, BURTIS, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US321920.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 321,920. 
A. E. STRONG. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
AUTOMATIC FROGLESS SWITCH. 
Patented July 7, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
A. E. STRONG. 
AUTOMATIC, FROGLESS SWITCH. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 321,920. 
Patented July 7, 1885. 
 
 
 
a 
Ne Dzzvezzzoz. 
No1% 
| 22,% & 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT E. STRONG, OF PATERSON, NEW JERSEY. 
AUTO VATC FROGLESS SWTCH. 
C-2:CEFECAir IoM forming part of Letters Patent No. 321,920, dated July 7, 1885. 
Application filed August 6, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
To all, Luhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ATLBERT E. STRONG, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pat 
erson, in the county of Passaic and State of 
New Jersey, have invented a new and useful 
Automatic Frogless Railroad-Switch, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing part thereof, in which 
Figures 1 and 2 are plan views; Figs. 3 and 
4, perspective views of parts in detail; Fig. 
5, a cross-section near the center of Fig. 4. 
Fig.1 shows the position of railroad-rails of 
the main line as originally laid, being clamped 
together as firmly as is possible in the con 
struction of railroads; and my switch can be 
placed at any point in the main line that is 
named without displacing, cutting, or in any 
way disconnecting the rails of said main line, 
they being left as originally laid. Fig.2 shows 
how this is accomplished-viz., by the three 
pieces A, B, and C, operated by a series of 
levers, or a compound leverage consisting of 
the levers D, D, and E. 
A represents a heavy cheek-piece placed at 
the outside of inner rail and overlapping the 
Salle. 
B is an inclined piece lying on the inside of 
inner rail, and is secured by a guard-block, 
L, with a gradual rise sufficient to allow the 
wheels to pass over the main rail to the cheek 
piece A, thence to siding-track K. 
C represents a cheek-piece lying inside of 
outer rail, tapering to a point, in order to al 
low the wheels to pass from main rail onto 
said cheek-piece, the flange of wheels passing 
inside of said cheek-piece, thus throwing the 
opposite wheels onto inclined piece Band over 
cheek-piece A, thereby throwing or conduct 
ing the train from the main track onto the sid 
ing-track Kwith absolute safety. The inclined 
piece B swings on a pivot at the journal I, and 
is so constructed that the wheel-flange enters 
as a wedge between B and the main rail, forc 
ing it away from the main rail. The wheel 
flange acts on the piece B as it does on the 
pointed piece C. In passing through the 
switch, the tread of the wheel resting on the 
main rail or passing along the same in the di 
rection of the arrow, Fig. 2, the outside edge 
of the tread of wheel helps to displace the 
cheek-piece A. The pivoted end of the in 
clined piece B is much lower than the flange 
of wheel, and the movable end is on a level 
With the main rail and curved sufficiently to 
allow the flange to act as a wedge between 
the two. The rod connecting B and lever 
E Contains an expanding spring, H, which 
readily permits the separation of B from the 
main rail M by the flange of wheel. The 
pieces A B C are firmly secured in metal 
chairs, which form journals, and are marked 
III, and are securely spiked or bolted to the 
ties or plates for the purpose of safety and 
strength. All the journals III are placed so 
as not to interfere with wheels on main rail, 
and so as to permit the pieces to be acted up 
on by the levers D'D' E. The rod marked S 
connects the cheek-pieces A and C, and is it 
self connected with the ever D. D is con 
nected with the inclined piece B at point 
marked X. The levers D'and D'are pivoted to 
lever E at the points marked TT, by which 
means levers D and D'act in opposite direc 
tions, thus moving the pieces A and Cin one wa 
and piece B in the opposite direction when in 
operation. The switch must of course remain 
locked, as ordinary Switches are, unless it is 
desired to use the switch by hand-lever, with 
which my switch may be provided, as appears 
by F in the drawings, which shows F an up 
right post in center of lever E, around which 
lever Eis fastened. Said upright may display 
signals, as desired. It is at its lower endem 
bedded in a socket of metal, and at its upper 
end it is secured as usual, and is only turned 
When used as hand-lever switch. In levers 
D' and D are placed, at point marked H. H., 
springs, which, in combination with the pieces 
A, B, and C, constitute the automatic portion 
of my switch. 
In Figs. 1 and 4 is seen how I dispense with 
the use of a frog, which is generally used in 
all switches. A, Fig. 1, represents an over 
lapping cheek-piece, similar to A in Fig. 2, 
9. 
and is placed on inner side of inner rail of 
main track, overlapping the same. B is an 
inclined lever outside of the inner rail of the 
siding-track K. Under said inclined lever 
are secured inclined metal blocks, on which in 
clined lever moves, and outside of said inclined 
lever are metal braces or guides. The lever B' 
is connected with cheek-piece A' by rod or bar 
marked C. DD show a series of heavy springs 
y 75 
I O 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
321,920 
5 
attached to the outside of lever B, and anchored 
in socket-plates, which are securely fixed to 
ties similar to the metal chairs in Fig. 2, 
The pieces Ain Fig. 2 and Ain Fig. 1 may 
be made in a solid piece or in two pieces, the 
overlapping plates being made so as to easily 
be adjusted and removed in case of wear. 
The switch, as shown in Fig. 2, operates as 
follows: A train passing along main track to 
o the points marked PP, the flange on wheels 
passing between the outer rail and the cheek 
piece C forces the cheek-piece C and the over 
lapping cheek-piece A and the inclined piece 
B clear from the main rails, and having passed 
the points of the switch OO the switch itself 
is closed automatically by reason of the springs 
HH in levers D'and D", said springs forcing 
the overlapping cheek-piece A over the inner 
rail of main track, and at the same time forc 
ing the pointed cheek-piece C against the in 
ner side of outer rail of main track, securely 
closing the switch, and thereby forming a solid 
passage-way from the main track onto thesid 
ing-track K. The passage from left to right, 
Fig. 2, is rendered more easy and safe by the 
gradual ascent of the inclined piece B, which 
rises a little above the main rail, thus allow 
ing the wheels to pass onto the overlapping 
cheek-piece A, which is itself provided with 
The operation of my invention, as shown by 
Figs. 1 and 4, is as follows, viz: A train pass 
ing on siding-track K moves onto the inclined 
lever B", forcing lever B' down on springs D 
D. Lever B' being connected by rod C to the 
overlapping cheek-piece A", when the lever B' 
is forced down on the springs D D, the over 
lapping piece A is naturally drawn over the 
a flange. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
main rail at point 20, thus forming a solid pas 
sage-way over the inner rail of the main track 
onto the siding-tracks K, leaving the main 
rails intact. After passage of the train past 
point 20, the inclined lever B' being relieved 
from weight of train, it is forced back obliquely 
by the springs DD to its position overlapping 
the rail and fy the same movement, thereby 
causing the cheek-piece A to leave the inner 
rail of the main track at the point 20, and thus 
the main line remains free and clear. 
A train can pass in either direction from 
one track to another, as above described, and, 
as above stated, a switch may be placed at 
any point without moving a main rail or dis 
connecting one. 
The switch above described may be used as 
the ordinary hand-lever switch which is em. 
ployed in railroading, or it may be used auto 
matically, as set forth. 
Having described my invention, I desire to 
secure it by Letters Patent, and claim 
The combination of the unbroken main rail 
M, siding - rail K, the flanged overlapping 
cheek-pieces A, and pointed piece C, con 
nected by bridle-rod S, inclined piece IB, with 
flange at loose end, compound lever E, rods 
D" and D", springs H, expanding and contract 
ing inclined lever B, provided with springs 
D, and connected with overlapping piece A 
by bridle C, all constructed substantially as 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
ALBERT E. STRONG. 
Witnesses: 
Wyr. L. TIONISON, 
GEO. H. ALBERTT. 
35. 
45 
5 
6 
fo 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322020.txt	(No Model.) 
C. F. STOCK, Dec'd, 
N. G. MOORE, administrator. 
TRAP FOR THROWING TARGETS, 
No. 322,020. 
v 
Patented July 14, 1885. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
2zor 1267-72 ez 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLESF. STOCK, OF PEORIA, ILLINOIS; N. GRIER MOORE, ADMINISTRATOR 
OF SAID CHARLES F. STOCK, DECEASED, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGN 
MENTS, TO THE PEORIA TARGET COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TRAP FOR THROWING TARGETS. 
SPECIFICATION foxmirig part of Letters Patent No. 322,020, dated July 14, 1885. 
Application filcd October 13, 1884. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs F. STOCK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Peoria, 
in the county of Peoria and State of Illinois, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Traps for Throwing Flying 
Targets, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention pertains to that class of traps 
To which are designed to send or throw through 
the air targets made of light fragile material, 
usually called clay pigeons, said traps having 
a throwing or sending arm which holds the 
target upon one end, and which is operated 
I5 from the other end. In the traps heretofore 
patented and now in use the target has been 
removably secured to the sending or throw 
ing arm by means of a tongue or cord secured 
to the target engaging a spring device on the 
2O end of the arm. When this arm is swung 
round to throw the target, centrifugal force 
Will give to it an uncertain amount of axial 
rotation; but, as found by practical experience, 
this impulse is not sufficient to overcome the 
25 force of the wind which may be blowing at 
the time, nor have the targets sufficient axial 
rotation to cause an even and steady flight; 
consequently they Wabble' more or less, 
and cannot be thrown to any considerable 
30 distance, nor is the distance to which they 
can be thrown at all positive. 
My improvement consists in providing the 
end of the sending or throwing arm with a 
pivotal clamping and automatically-releasing 
35 device, so constructed that the target is se 
curely held in place while the sending-arm is 
being swung around, and arranged in such 
manner as to automatically release the target 
when in proper position for being thrown, 
4O and at the same time, by means of a pin or 
other stop, to give the target more axial rota 
tion than it otherwise would receive by reason 
of centrifugal force alone. These features 
and the advantages of my invention will more 
45 fully appear by reference to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication, and in which similar letters of refer 
ence indicate like parts. 
55 
So 
In said drawings I have shown at Figures 1 
and 2 perspective views of a trap embodying 
the best form of my invention. Figs. 3 and 
4 are enlarged plan views of the same device, 
and Fig. 5 is an enlarged vertical sectional 
view of parts hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, A represents the throwing 
or sending arm of a trap, suitably pivoted at 
b on a standard, B, which arm is operated by 
a cord, C. The target A is provided with 
lugs, projections, or recesses a, which engage 
with proper pins or projections, d and e, on the 
clamping-arms D E. The arm D is pivoted 
to the swinging arm A at d, and I secure or 
pivot the arm E to said arm D at e'. The 
end of the arm A is provided with a cam, C, 
which operates on the pin or roller e on the 
end of the arm E. The flanged and rubber 
ring or washerd serve to secure the target 
more firmly when clasped by the arms D and E. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
I first place the clamping-arm on one side of 7o 
the arm A, so that the pin or roller e will 
rest against the cam at at a point nearest the 
center or pivot d, as shown in Fig. 3, and 
then, placing one of the lugs against the pin?, 
I secure the edge or rim of the target under 7 
the flange d', pressing it against the Washer 
das I hook the pine on the other lug of the 
target. The trap is now set and ready for 
use, as shown in Fig. 1. The cord C is now 
pulled and the arm. A caused to swing around 
on b as a center into the position shown in 
Figs. 2 and 4. As the arm E comes around, 
the cam a causes the pin or roller e to oper 
ate, and on e' as a pivot the arm E is thrown 
out, and thus releases one of the lugs on the 
target A, and as the target starts on its 
flight the pind, holding the target back, as it 
were, by means of the disengaged lug, gives 
to the target a positive axial rotation. The 
target will thus be given an even and steady 
flight of sixty-five to seventy-five yards. 
I have shown what I deem to be the best 
method of reducing my invention to practice, 
but do not wish to be limited to the exact Con 
struction shown in the drawings, as modifica- 95 
tions thereof will readily suggest themselves 
90 
2 
322,020 
2. In a trap for throwing targets, the clamp 
ing device shown, consisting of the arm D, pivot 
ed near the end of the throwing-arm of the trap, 
having pin d on One end, and the arm E, pro 
vided with pine and roller e", pivoted at e' to 
the arm D, Substantially as specified. 
3. In a trap for Sending targets, the clamp 
ing device consisting of the arm D, pivotally 
Secured at or near the end of the throwing 
arm of the trap, provided at one end with the 
engaging pin d, and at the other end with the 
pivoted arm E, having a target-engaging pin, 
?', in combination with the frictional washer 
ci, Secured by the pin or pivot d to the arm 
A, whereby, with the pins d and e, the targets 
are held in place, Substantially, as specified. 
25 
35 
CHARLES F. STOCK. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN T. NEILSON, 
FRANK II. JACK. 
O 
to those skilled in the line of improvements to 
which my invention relates, which may be 
used with very good results and without de 
parting from the principle thereof. 
My invention is very simple, durable, and 
effective, requires no nice adjustment, has no 
wealk parts to break or complicated parts to 
get out of order, and is quite cheap to manul 
facture. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a trap for throwing targets, the tar 
get-clamping device herein shown and de 
scribed, pivoted at or near the end of the 
throwing-arm of a trap, in combination with 
a double or two faced calm formed on the end 
of Said arm, and a depending projection or 
pin on the clamping device, which bears 
against the calm during the swing of the 
clamping device, releasing the same by its 
escape from the cam, and thereby allowing the 
target to escape, substantially as set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322120.txt	 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT MUNROE, OF ALLEGHENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
BOLER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 322,120, dated Juily l4, 1885. 
Application filed April 3, 1885. (No model.) 
' 
. 
- 
. 
repaired. The facility for repairing the flues 75 
Ic struction hereinafter described. 
To enable others skilled in the art with O into the stack.' 
My invention relates to an improvement in through the flues I into the heat-chamber H, 6o 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
dled in the fire-chamber D, the fuel-such as 
Be it known that I, ROBERT MUNROE, of anthracite coal or other fuel- is charged into 
Allegheny, in the county of Allegheny and the cylinder J, the cap N being removed for 55 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new that purpose. The smoke, gases, and heat, 
5 and useful Improvement in Boilers; and I do performing their office in the fire-chamber, 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, pass up into the fire-chamber F through the 
and exact description thereof. 
flues G, then pass from the chamber F down 
boilers; and it consists in the peculiar con- which surrounds the outer case, A, of the 
boiler, and, finally, pass out through the flue 
The advantage of the hereinbefore described 
which my invention is most nearly connected 
to make and use it, I will proceed to describe construction of boiler or steam-generating de-65 
vice consists in the large area of surface sub 
its construction and operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form jected to the action of the heat of the fire-cham 
part of this specification, A represents the ber and flues and chamber F, and finally utiliz 
shell of the boiler, having an inner shell, Bing the heat around the boiler-shell A in the 
C. Within the shell C is a fire-chamber, D, chamber H. But another very important ad- 7o 
E being the fire-door of said chamber, which vantage consists in having the cylinder J de 
2o communicates with a chamber, F, by means tachable and removable, also in the largeness 
of flues G, said chamber F. communicating and peculiar form and position of the cham 
with an outer heat-chamber, H., by means of ber F, whereby the flues G. I may be readily 
flues I. 
Within the case B, and extending from the G. I afforded by the chamber F will be ap 
Having thus described my improvement, 
1. The combination of the furnace D, cham- 8o 
chamber, is a cylinder, J, which is employed 
as a magazine for supplying the fire-chamber what I claim is 
with fuel. To the lower end of said cylinder is 
attached a casting, for the purpose of keeping ber F, flues G, shell or tube B, extending from 
3o the lower end from burning off. The flues G the upper end of the boiler to the top of the 
are secured in the crown K of the fire-cham- chamber F, and the detachable magazine, 
ber, and in the sheet L; and the flues I are whereby access is afforded to the chamber F, 
secured in said sheet L and the lower end substantially as described. 
sheet, M, in the usual manner of securing 
2. The combination of the furnace D, cham 
flues. The cylinder J is detachable and re-ber F, flues G, tube or shell B, between the . 
movable, and is provided with a cap, N. upper end of the boiler and the chamber F, 
Near the upper end of the cylinder are aper- the magazine J, perforated near its upper end, 
tures P, for the escape of gas from said cyl- and the return-passage to the chamber F, 9o 
inder down into chamber F in the space be- formed by the walls of the tube and the mag 
is carried off through flue I into the heat- 
3. The combination of the furnace D, cham 
chamber H, and out at the exit-flue O into ber F, flues G, tube B, magazine J, perforated 
the stack. 
The outer walls, Q, are constructed of ma- chamber F, the flues I, and the heat-chamber 
45 sonry, if so desired, and may be constructed of H, surrounding the boiler, substantially as 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
4o tween said cylinder and inner case, B, and azine, substantially as described. 
25 top of the boiler to the crown of the fire- parent. 
near its upper end, the return-passage to the 95 
sheet metal. The construction of the outer described. 
walls, Q, and of the boiler, hereinbefore de- 
scribed, will readily be comprehended and my hand this 2d day of February A.D. 1885. Ioo 
understood by the skillful boiler-maker from 
so the foregoing description, and by reference 
to the accompanying drawings. 
The operation is as follows: Fire being kin- 
A. C. JoHNSTON, 
C. S. JOHNSTON. 
ROBERT MUNROE. 
Witnesses: 
. . 
. 
85 
15. 
3 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322220.txt	S. D. WARFIELD. 
CORN SILKER. 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 14, 1885, 
(No Model.) 
No. 322,220, 
 
 
 
- VVTNESSES - 
- NN/NTOR 
 
NPETERs, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
S. D. WARFIELD. 
CORN SILKER, 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 322,220. 
Patented July 14, 1885. 
|/ 2.44. 
44.2%.4 
4 a. a. 
4 (fi/iza (, 
44 - 
- 
 
m, Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
S. D. WARFIELD. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 322,220, 
CORN SILKER, 
Patented July 14, 1885. 
  
 
air. t 
like A cight 
f 
E: 
\SES an 
 
  
 
 
Eise goalsco 
ago 
o c 
9 3C 
 
PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 322,220. 
S. D. WARFIELD. 
CORN SILKER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
Patented July 14, 1885, 
-WITNESSES- 
(2.4% - 
NYENTORi. 
4 in a?-4. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
SOLOMON DAVIES WARFIELD, 
OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
CORN-SILKER. 
SPECEFECATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 322,220, dated July 14, 1885. 
Application filed March 28, 1885. (No model.) 
Io. 
To all, whom it may c0700e,770 
Be it known that I, SOLOMON DAVIES WAR 
FIELD, of the city of Baltimore and State of 
Maryland, have invented certain Improve 
5 ments in Corn-Silkers, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in that class of corn-silkers in which the 
silk is removed from the cut corn. 
In the drawings, forming a part hereof, Fig 
lures I and II are exterior views of the machine 
as seen from different sides. Fig. III is a plan 
of the machine with some minor parts thereof 
removed. Fig. IV is a vertical section taken 
15 on the dotted line a ac, Fig. III. Figs. V and 
VI are details of the machine. 
G is a hopper supported between the two 
sides of the frame A and above the driving 
roller B of the belt B, in which the corn as 55 
cut from the cob is poured. This hopper has 
an upper and lower set of distributing-bars,f, 
which project from rods f', as shown particu 
larly in Figs. III, IV, and W. These rods, 
with their distributing-bars, are reciprocated 6C 
in contrary directions by means of a rocker, 
9, on the shaft g', adapted to vibrate in a sleeve, 
h, projecting from the frame A. The vibratory 
motion of the shaft g' is effected by means of 
an arm, G', fastened thereto, which is connect 65 
ed by the rod h to a crank, G', at the end of 
the fan-shaft H, hereinafter alluded to. . 
By referring to Fig. V it will be seen that 
the distributing-rods f have pins i, which rest 
A is a frame supported by legs A. 
in slots i' in the rocker g. The full and dot-7C 
B is an inclined endless conveyer belt or 
ted delineations of the rocker and certain of 
apron, carried by rollers B. These rollers have 
its attachments indicate the extremes of their 
2O gudgeons (, adapted to turn freely in boxes a 
movement. 
in the frame A. 
By simply employing pins to connect the 
Cis a second endless belt or apron, carrying 
rods f' with the rockerg the said rods, with 75 
silking-fingers b, and arranged so as to bring 
their distributing-bars, may be easily removed 
the fingers on its under side nearly in contact 
for cleaning or other purposes and replaced 
25 with the upper side of the conveyer-belt B, as 
while the machine is in operation; and to ad 
shown particularly in Fig. IV. The belt C 
mit of this removal the hopper G has slots i, 
is also mounted on rollers, which are denoted 
as shown in Figs. I, II, and V, and is provided 8O 
by C, and have gudgeons b, adapted to restin 
with a hinged door, H. 
bearing-boxes c in the frame A. 
To retain the rods f' in place, and prevent 
3o The belts B and C are driven as follows, the 
corn entering and escaping through the slots 
direction of their movement being indicated 
by arrows in Fig. IV: A main driving-shaft, j, I employ plates j', hinged to the inner sides 
of the hopper at k, and adapted to cover the 85 
c', supported by hangers D, is provided with 
slots, and to be raised, as shown by dottedlines 
a driving-pulley, D. On this shaft c is a 
in Fig. IV, to allow of the withdrawal of the 
35 sprocket-wheel, d, connected by a chain-belt, 
rods, the hinged door H being previously 
d, to a Second sprocket-wheel, E, on the gudgeon 
opened. 
a of the upper and driving roller, B, of the end 
less conveyer-belt B. 
will be described, and their uses set out in the 
E is a smaller sprocket-wheel on the same 
description of the operation of the machine 
4O gudgeon a, and connected by a chain-belt to a 
which follows: Supposing the machine to be 
larger sprocket-wheel, F, on the gudgeon b' of 
in operation, corn, as cut from the cob, is 
the upper and driving roller, C, of the endless 
poured in the hopper G. By the action of 95 
belt C. On the gudgeonb' is also a still larger 
the distributing-bars the corn, in falling to 
sprocket-wheel, F, united through the me 
the conveyer-belt B, is evenly spread over its 
45 dium of a chain-belt to a smaller one, e, on the 
surface and to a uniform depth. The dis 
brush-shaft e, which is suitably supported on 
tributing-bars also serve to separate from the 
the frame A. This shaft is provided with a 
corn any pieces of cob that may be contained IC 
rotary brush, F", preferably of the spiral kind, 
therein. The corn is carried by the conveyer 
and set substantially the same as that shown 
belt B toward a second hopper, I, hereinafter 
5o and described in Letters Patent No. 309,999, 
described, and against the silking-fingers b, 
granted to me on the 30th day of December, 
which are moving in an opposite direction and 
1884, for a corn silker. 
- 
Parts of the machine not yet alluded to 9C 
 
2 
322,220 
at a less speed. The object in moving the fin 
ger-belt at a less speed than the conveyer-belt 
is to avoid the danger of the fingers carrying 
the corn from the machine. When the Corn 
to be silked contains the scrapings of the Cob, 
such scrapings are not evenly mixed with the 
grain, and if the corn is packed in this condi 
tion one can will contain more of these Scrap 
ings than another. This difficulty is entirely 
obviated by forcing the corn on the conveyer 
belt against the fingers, which serve to break 
the lumps of scrapings and distribute the par 
ticles thereof evenly among the grain. While 
the fingers are breaking the lumps of Scrap 
ings and mixing the same with the grain, they 
are also removing the silk from the mass, and 
the silk is carried by the fingers to the brush 
F', which in its revolution in a contrary di 
rection to the moving fingers cleans them 
and throws the silk to the silk-box I, support 
ed on the frame A. A hood, J., (shown in full 
lines in Fig. IV and in dotted ones in Figs. I 
and II,) prevents the scattering of the silk 
and guides it to the silk-box I". The second 
hopper, before alluded to and designated by I, 
is supported by springs J', bolted to the frame 
A, and is vibrated laterally of the machine 
through the medium of a bell-crank, k, piv 
oted at l, and a rod, t, attached to the crank 
G' on the fan-shaft H. The hopper I consists 
of a box, open at the side next to the machine. 
(See Fig. IV.) This box contains a cross 
piece, m, from which project bars in', as shown 
in Figs. III and IV, and is placed sufficiently 
close to the conveyer-belt to remove corn 
therefrom, but not to scrape the belt. The 
conveyer-belt, to which considerable chaff and 
short silk adhere, is finally cleaned by means 
of a wiper, n, attached to the frame A. This 
wiper is preferably made of strips of rubber 
or other flexible material fastened to a bar, 
a', and is adjustable with reference to the belt, 
as shown particularly in Figs. IV and VI. A 
pan, K, hinged to the frame A at 0, serves to 
catch the matter wiped from the conveyer 
belt. 
L is a fan of any approved construction, the 
rotary wings of which are secured to the fan 
shaft H, before alluded to. The discharge 
nozzle o' of the fan is toward the open side of 
the hopper I, and the air forced therefrom 
passes through the corn shaken through the 
bars m' and removes from the grain chaff and 
short pieces of silk contained therein. The 
rapid shaking of the bars in lightens up the 
mass of corn as it falls through the hopper 
and facilitates the passage of the air through 
the grain. The bars in also serve to catch any 
pieces of the cob that may have passed through 
the first hopper. The fan-shaft His driven from 
the main driving-shaft c' through the medium 
of the gear-wheels L and M, as shown in 
Fig. I. The silked corn falls from the hopper 
I to any suitable receptacle placed underneath 
thereof. Side boards, N, screwed to the inner 
faces of the frame A, prevent lateral disper 
sion of the grain from the conveyer-belt, The 
side boards are grooved to receive the edges 
of the belt. (See Fig. VI.) An adjustable 
binding-roller, O, (see Figs. I, II, and IV,) is 
used to take up the slack in the conveyer 
belt. 
The principal object in having the silking 
fingers on a moving belt is to admit of the 
said fingers being easily cleaned; but as other 
means for cleaning the fingers could be em 
ployed the fingers could be fixed or stationary 
without departing from the spirit of the in 
vention, which aims to remove the silk from a 
body of corn by conveying the same against 
and through a system of silking-fingers. 
I do not restrict myself to the use of the 
various devices shown for driving the belts 
and for effecting the vibratory movement of 
the several parts of the machine, as it is evi 
dent that other contrivances could be en 
ployed to produce the same effect. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a corn - silking machine, an endless 
moving belt for conveying corn and rollers 
for supporting said belt, combined with a 
series of silking-fingers situated over the said 
belt, through which the corn is forced, sub 
stantially as specified. 
- 
2. In a corn - silking machine, an endless 
moving belt for conveying corn, and rollers 
for supporting the said belt, combined With a 
series of silking-fingers situated over the said 
belt, and a hopper containing distributing de 
vices, substantially as specified. 
3. In a corn - silking machine, an endless 
moving belt for conveying corn and rollers 
for supporting the said belt, combined with a 
series of silking-fingers situated over the said 
belt, and a fan arranged to force air through 
the corn, substantially as specified. 
4. In a corn-silking machine, an endless 
moving belt to convey corn and rollers for 
supporting the said belt, combined with an 
endless moving belt on rollers carrying silk 
ing-fingers situated over the conveyer-belt, 
substantially as specified. 
5. In a corn - silking machine, an endless 
moving belt to convey corn and rollers to 
support the said belt, combined with an end 
less moving belt on rollers carrying silking 
fingers situated over the conveyer-belt, and 
means to move the fingers in a direction op 
posite to that of the conveyer-belt, substan 
tially as specified. 
6. In a corn-Silking machine, an endless 
moving belt for conveying corn and rollers 
to support the said belt, combined with silk 
ing-fingers situated over the said conveyer 
belt, a perforate shaking hopper located at the 
discharge end of the conveyer-belt, and a fan 
adapted to force air through the said perforate 
hopper, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
7. In a corn-silking machine, an endless 
moving belt for conveying corn and rollers 
to support the said belt, combined with an 
endless moving belt with silking-fingers, a 
perforate shaking-hopper located at the dis 
2) 
5 
5 
75 
80 
85 
90 
95 
CO 
IC5 
IIO 
I I5 
I 25 
1. 
322,220 
. 
- 
: 
. . 
support the said belt, combined with an end 
less moving belt carrying silking-fingers, and 
a shaking perforate hopper situate at the dis 
charge end of the said conveyer-belt, substan 
tially as specified. 
12. In a corn-silking machine, an endless 
moving belt for conveying corn and rollers to 
support the said belt, combined with an end 
less moving belt carrying silking-fingers, and 
a fan to force air through the cornfalling from 
the said conveyer-belt, substantially as speci 
fied. 13. In a corn-silking machine, an endless 
moving belt to convey corn and silking-fin 
gers situated over the said belt, combined with 
a shaking perforate hopper situated at the dis 
charge end of the said belt and adapted to re 
ceive corn falling therefrom, substantially as 
specified. 
- 
.. 
Witnesses: 
SOLOMON DAVIES WARFIELD. 
CHAs. W. ARNOLD, 
DANL. FISHER. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
25 
3O 
35 
40 
O 
charge end of the said conveyer-belt, and a fan 
adapted to force air through the said shaking 
hopper, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
8. In a corn-silking machine, an endless 
moving belt to convey corn and rollers to 
support the said belt, combined with a wiper 
in contact with the said belt, a tray to receive 
the material wiped from the said belt, and a 
series of silking-fingers arranged over the said 
conveyer-belt, substantially as specified. 
9. In a corn-silking machine, a hopper to 
receive corn, combined with distributing-bars 
arranged one above another, and means to 
reciprocate the said bars in opposite direc 
tions, substantially as specified. 
10. Ia a corn-Silking machine, a hopper to 
receive corn, combined with removable dis 
tributing-bars arranged one above another, 
and means to reciprocate the said bars in op 
posite directions, substantially as specified. 
11. In a corn-silking machine, an endless 
moving belt to convey corn and rollers to 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322321.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 322,321, 
 
F, RHIND, 
ARGAND BURNER. 
Patented July 14, 1885. 
s-sl O 
ex 
 
 
perERs, photo-Lithographer, Washire." 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK RHIND, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
ARG AND BURNER. 
32CEFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 322,321, dated July 14, 1885. 
Application filed February 12, 1885. (No model.) 
IO 
to all whom it inau concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANKRHIND, of Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Argand Burners and Lamps; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use it, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ing, which forms part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Argand burners and lamps; and it consists, 
first, in an Argand burner, in the combination 
of the wick-tube, the spreader, a deflecting 
ring which conducts the air to the flame, a 
support for the ring, and a support for the 
chimney, the ring being provided on its outer 
side with slotted wings which are adjustable 
to the chimney; second, in an Argand burn 
er, the combination of the wick-tube, the 
spreader, and a cone which is applied to the 
outer side of the wick-tube, the cone being 
provided with a deflecting-ring upon its top 
and a support for the chimney at its lower end, 
and contracted at or near its center, so as to fit 
tightly upon the wick-tube, all of which will 
be more fully described hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to so con 
struct the different parts of the burner that 
the heat from the deflecting-ring is transferred 
through wings connected thereto to the chim 
ney, and the cone kept cool by having all of 
the air which is fed to the burner from the 
outside made to pass through it, and the lamp 
thus prevented from becoming intensely heat 
ed, as is always the case where a large Ar 
gand burner is used. 
The accompanying drawing represents a 
vertical section of a lamp embodying my in 
vention. 
A represents the lamp-bowl, up through 
which the hollow or tubular wick-tube B 
passes in the usual manner. All of the air 
which is fed to the burner from the inside 
passes through the perforations at C, and then 
up through the tube to the flame. 
Upon the outside of the wick-tube, at any 
suitable distance below its top, is the concave 
perforated support D, upon which the per 
forated cone or cap G rests. The lower por 
tion, H, of this cohe is spread out to any suit 
. 
35 
45 
able extent, so as to form a support for the 
chimney, and is given any ornamental shape 
that may be preferred. Above the Support- 55 
ing part H the cone is inclined inward and 
upward, and is perforated, as shown at I, so 
that the air which passes through the perfo 
rations in the support D can pass up into the 
lower portion of the chimney. At the top of 6o 
the perforated part Ithe coneiscontracted, so as 
to fittightly against the outer side of the wick 
tube, not only for the purpose of holding the 
cone in position, but to prevent the air which 
passes up through the support D from passing 65 
directly up the wick-tube. This contracted 
portion serves to turn the rising currents of air 
out into the chimney for the purpose of keeping 
both the lower portion of the chimney and the 
burner cool. From this contraction the burner 7o 
expands outward and upward to the deflecting 
ring L, which forms the top of the burner. The 
portion Obelow the ring is perforated, so that 
the air from the bottom portion of the chim 
ney can pass through it to be fed to the flame 75 
from the under side of the deflecting-ring. On 
the outer side of this deflecting-ring are 
formed the wings or springs P, which serve 
both to hold the chimney in position and, by 
coming in contact with the inner side of the 8o 
lower end of the chimney, to conduct away 
the heat from the deflecting-ring, and thus 
keep this portion of the burner cool. 
These 
wings also serve to prevent the air in the lower 
portion of the chimney from rising upward, 85 
and thus forcing it to pass through the per 
forated part O. If the wings were not used in 
connection with the ring, the chimney could 
not be made to fit, and too much air would 
pass up the chimney without coming in con 
tact with the flame, thus causing a red instead 
The wings and the ring co 
of a white flame. 
act for the purpose of producing a more per 
fect illumination than can be produced with 
out them both. 
The body of the cone acts only as a support 
for thering and wings, and to support the chim 
ney in position. The chimney need not be 
forced downward as far as shown in the draw 
ing, as it can be supported higher up, if so Io 
desired. 
As the Argand burners have heretofore been 
constructed the deflecting-ring becomes in 
tensely heated, and this heat being commu 
95 
 
S 
 
g 
2 
322,321 
2. In an Argand burner, the combination 2O 
of the wick-tube, the spreader, and a cone 
which is supplied to the outer side of the 
wick-tube, the cone being provided with a de 
flecting-ring, and having a slitted flange on its 
outer side forming wings which are adjustable 
to the size of the chimney on its top, and a 
support for the chimney on its lower end, the 
cone being perforated and contracted at or 
near its center, Substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
FRANK RHIND. 
Witnesses: 
PH. Ald. NEBLING, 
ROBERT. J. COWAN. 
nicated to the other parts of the burner, the 
lamp becomes so intensely hot that it not only 
becomes dangerous but unpleasant to handle. 
The ring being brought in contact with the 
chimney by means of the wings, and the air 
being made to pass back and forth through 
the burner, the burner is always kept cool, 
and hence this difficulty is entirely overcome. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In an Argand burner, the combination 
of the wick-tube, the spreader, a deflecting 
ring which conducts the air to the flame, and 
which is provided on its outer side with a 
slitted flange forming Wings which adjust 
themselves to the chimney, a support for the 
deflecting-ring, and a support for the chim 
ney below the slitted flange, substantially as 
shown. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322421.txt	(No Model.) 
A. E. CHOATE, 
SEED PLANTER, 
No. 322,421. 
Patented July 21, 1885, 
 
- 
WITNESSES: 
-6 oyroe 
O 
NWENTOR: 
pluss, 
ATTORNEYS, 
: 
- 
- 
... 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTUS EDWARD CHOATE, OF COCHRAN, GEORGIA. 
SEED-PLANTER. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 322,421, dated July 21, 1885. 
Application filed May 28, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUSTUS E. CHOATE, 
of Cochran, Pulaski county, Georgia, have 
invented a new, and Improved Coverer for 
5 Seed-Planters, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
efficient, easily-Worked, and durable coverer 
for attachment to seed-planters, and one which 
will ridge the earth over the seed sufficiently 
to obviate the first plowing usually required 
for that purpose after the use of the ordinary 
board coverers. 
The invention consists in a pair of spring 
bars adapted to be attached at their forward 
ends to the frame of the planter, and having 
the coverer arms and plates connected at their 
back ends by rear bolts and at the front by 
laterally-elongated ioops to permit varying 
the angle of the plates to throw more or less 
earth, and having also a pair of upwardly-con 
vergent bars, which tie the back ends of the 
mainspring-bars together, and have springs at 
their inner faces to hold the coverer-plates to 
their work, and permit them to rise or shift 
laterally in passing obstructions. 
The invention includes, also, various details 
of construction and combinations of parts of 
the coverer, all as hereinafter fully described 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which Similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a seed-plant 
er with my improved coverer applied, and 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the coverer de 
tached from the planter and drawn to a larger 
Scale. 
The letter A indicates an ordinary seed 
planter, which has beams a, wheel b, drill 
opener c, seed-hopper d, handles e, and de 
vices, such as a connecting-rod, f, and cranks 
gh to operate any approved style of mechan 
45 ism for dropping seed or a fertilizer from the 
hopper. 
The planter may have any desired construc 
tion, as it forms no part of my invention, which 
latter I describe as follows: 
BB are spring-bal's fastened to the beams a 
of the planter by bolts passing through the 
forward ends of the bars. These bars B ex 
3o and claimed. 
SO 
35 
 
. 
" 
55 
65 
I shape the coverers C with their forward 7o 
tend backward, preferably, in a downward 
curve, and so as to support the coverers at the 
proper height. 
I make the coverers C of metal plates hav 
ing rounded outer edges, and fix them by bolts 
or otherwise to the lower ends of the curved 
bars or arms D, which connect with the bars 
B at their forward ends by laterally-elongated 
eyes or loops E, through which the spring-bars 
B are passed, and at their rear ends by nuts 
F, screwed above the bars upon the upturned 
ends i of rods G, extending backward from 
the arms D, and rigidly connected there with 
in any approved way, as by welding of the 
rods to the arms, or by forming the rods of 
parts of the arms split off and turned up from 
the main bodies of the arms, as shown. 
edges extended upward considerably at the 
corners, as at j, to prevent catching of the 
plates in the earth and avoid surface-trash or 
other obstructions by more readily passing 
over or around them, the elasticity of the bars 
permitting the coverers to rise or spring side 
wise for this purpose. 
I connect the back ends of the bars B to each 
other by bars Or plates H, which have foot 
bends or flangesk to lie flat on the bars, and 8o 
through which flanges k bolts may pass to se 
cure the lower ends of the bars H. I prefer 
to have the bolt ends i of the arms D extend 
through both the bars B and the flanges k, so 
that the One nut, F, serves to hold the coverer 85 
C and the bar or plate H to the bar B, as 
shown. 
The bars H H of the two spring-bars B B 
rise convergently to meet and be fastened to 
gether by a bolt, I, and so as to afford space go 
between the bars to pass or bridge over grow 
ing plants as the machine moves along the 
drill. Inside springs, J, are placed along the 
bars H, and are fastened by the bolt I, which 
holds the bars to each other, said springs 95 
serving to press the bars HHand spring-bars 
B B outward or from each other, and hold the 
coverers C C at an even distance apart for 
good work. The bars H. Hand their springs 
JJ have a series of coinciding holes, l, so that roo 
the bolt I may be moved down from the tops 
of the bars, where shown, to bind the bars 
and springs H J together at a lower point in 
their length, to bring the coverers C C closer 
75 
322,42 
5 
O 
25 
together, or to brace the coverers more firmly 
to each other when Working in hard or crusted 
earth. The coverers C Care fixed to arms D at 
an angle in horizontal plane, or with their rear 
ends approaching each other suitably to throw 
the earth over the seed as the Seed falls into 
the drill; and I have made the eyes or loops E 
long to permit moving them laterally over 
the spring-bars B, to shift the forward ends of 
the arms D and vary the angle of the coverers 
to throw more or less earth over the seed, as 
may be required. Set - screws K, passing 
through the loops E against the bars B, serve 
to lock the coverer-arms G and coverers in any 
desired angular position. The bars B B may 
be the same as are used to secure the ordinary 
board coverers to the planter; hence my im 
proved coverers may readily be substituted 
for the boards at Small expense, and the change 
from one to the other style may so quickly be 
made that either may be used in different parts 
of the same field where the nature of the ground 
would favor the use of one over the other; but 
generally my improved coverers will be pre 
ferred for workin covering cotton-seed or corn, 
and, if desired, a corn-planter without cov 
erers may precede the machine represented in 
the drawings to drop the corn, and be followed 
by the latter machine, carrying a fertilizer in 
the hopper d, which may be dropped over the 
seed, which is then covered by the coverers 
CC, as will readily be understood. 
My improved coverers cover cotton-seed on 
smooth freshly-bedded land equally as well as 
the board coverers, and will work quite as . 
well on crusted or rooty earth, where the board 
coverers cannot be used; and a special advan 
tage of my coverers over the boards is that 
they save one plowing usually done after the 
passage of the board coverers to raise a Suit- 4O 
able ridge about the plants, as my coverer it 
self leaves a proper ridge of earth about the 
seed, so that when the cotton plants come up 
they may be chopped to a stand. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 45 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. A coverer for seed-planters, consisting of 
the spring-bars B, connected arms D, carry 
ing the coverer-plates C, and bars H, rising 
from the back ends of bars B, and connected by 5o 
a bolt, I, substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with the spring-bars B, 
carrying the coverer-arms D and plates C, and 
the rear tie-bars, H., of the springs J at the 
inner faces of the tie - bars, substantially as 55 
shown and described. 
3. The combination, with the bars B and 
the arms D of the coverers secured at their 
back ends by bolt ends i and nuts F, of the 
laterally-elongated loops or eyes E and set- 60 
screws K, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
4. The combination, in a coverer for seed 
planters, of the spring-bars B B, arms D D, 
carrying coverer-plates CC, and connected to 
bars B B by the bolt ends i i and nuts FF, 
loops E, E, and bolts KK, and the rising con 
vergent bars H. H., springs J J, and bolt I, 
substantially as shown and described. 
AUGUSTUS EDWARD CEIOATE. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. CURRELL, Sr., 
A. RINALDI. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322521.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS R. CLARK, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
GAZED KD LEATHER. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 322,521, dated July 21, 1885. 
Application filed March 19, 1885. 
(No specimens.) 
20 
25 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS R. CLARK, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
5 Glazed Kid-Leather; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to this speci 
fication. 
MIy invention relates to that class of leather 
which is commercially known as French 
glazed kid,' and which is chiefly employed in 
the manufacture of ladies' fine shoes. 
It consists in a novel description of leather 
in which a highly-polished surface produced 
upon the tissue of the skin, so as to be insep 
arabletherefrom,is combined with an oil-tawed 
body, or a body or grain rendered supple, du 
rable, and imputrescible by the permanent 
presence in its fiber of oxidized or saponified 
oil free from tannin, alum, or any perceptible 
trace of lime. 
My improved leather combines, with all the 
beauty and advantages of a perfectly-glazed 
surface of the highest finish, all the supple 
ness, strength, and toughness of the best oil 
tawed leather, and it is consequently free from 
the objectionable tendency to crack under 
strain, which is inherent in French glazed 
leather heretofore manufactured. 
To produce this new article of manufacture 
I take skins which have been thoroughly 
tawed by any known process wherein the fibers 
of the grain of the skin are coated and im 
pregnated with oil or fat, which in the process 
of tawing is fixed and rendered insoluble and 
practically unchangeable therein. I remove 
from these oil-tawed skins every particle of 
unoxidized or unconverted oil or fat by drying 
them, and then immersing the dry skins in a 
bath of pure refined naphtha-preferably the 
ordinary commercial naphtha of about 70 
Baum-or other equivalent volatile hydrocar 
bon oil in a tank or close vessel, which is either 
made to revolve or in which the skins are other 
wise agitated by means of rotating arms or stir 
ring devices, so as to insure a rapid and thor 
ough permeation thereof by the fluid. This agi 
45 
35 
tation is continued until the naphtha becomes 
so fully saturated with the greasy and oily 
matter extracted thereby from the skins as that 
The skins are then . 
it will take up no more. 
removed to a second clean bath of pure maph 
tha, and drenched therein as in the first case, 
and this operation of subjecting the skins to 
a fresh supply of naphtha in a clean vessel is 
repeated again and again until the naphtha in 
which the skins are last placed will remain 
pure, and so far unaffected thereby as not to 
show upon proper test the least trace of oil or 
grease. 
Where the skins have in the original steps 
of tawing been treated with impure oil, it may 
become necessary to further purify them from 
the traces of gummy or resinous matters which 
have resisted the solvent action of the pure 
naphtha, in which case I subject such skins to 
a drenching with alcohol, wood-spirits, am 
monia, or other equivalent solvent for gummy 
and resinous substances. The skins thus tawed 
without the use of tannin, or of alum or other 
mineral tanning materials, are finally dyed and 
polished in the same manner as are the alum 
tawed skins of which the French glazed kid 
leather heretofore manufactured is produced, 
and which, being well known to the art, it is 7 
unnecessary herein to describe. 
This improved glazed leather combines with 
all the toughness and desirable qualities and 
peculiarities which are inherent in oil-tawed 
skins a peculiar toughness in the polished sur 
face which is wholly novel and has heretofore 
been deemed unattainable. 
I claim as my invention 
Glazed leather having a body ingrained with 
an oxidized or fixed oil, combined with a sur. 
face brilliantly polished. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
THOS. R. CLARK. 
Witnesses: 
J. EMRICH, 
SAMUEL ROBINSON. 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322622.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 322,622, 
 
D. H. McCOY, 
RATCHET DRIVING MECHANISM, 
Patented July 21, 1885. 
%233 
SEER, 2S 
WITNESSES : 
O22-26 
-6 & s 
5 
- 2 NWENTOR; 
Z27 
m 2% 
BY 
C3 
ATTORNEYs, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL HENRY McCOY, OF SMITH VILLE, NEW JERSEY. 
RATC HET DRVNG MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 322,622, dated July 21, 1885. 
Application filed November 18, 1884. 
(No model.) 
25 
35 
45 
To all, whom, it may concern 
Beit known that I, DANIEL HENRY McCoy, 
of Smithville, in the county of Burlington and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new 
and Improved Ratchet Driving Mechanism, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The object of my invention is to improve 
the construction of ratchet driving mechan 
ism, so that the pawls of the driving-clutch 
shall act more positively to drive or operate 
the connected machine, and noisy rattling of 
the pawls on the return of the driving clutch 
Section for a new hold is prevented, and where 
by the pawls are held out of engagement with 
the driven clutch-section when the operating 
treadle or lever is not worked, so that the ma 
chine driven-a bicycle, for instance-may 
run freely in either direction without effect on 
the ratchet driving mechanism. 
The invention consists in particular con 
structions and combinations of parts of the 
ratchet driving mechanism, all as hereinafter 
fully described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure is an end view of my improved 
ratchet driving mechanism. Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse sectional elevation thereof. Fig. 3 is a re 
verse end view in section on line aca, Fig. 2; 
and Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the pawl 
tripper. 
The letter Aindicates a fixed stud or shaft, 
which may represent the axle of a bicycle, 
tricycle, or other vehicle, or may project from 
any part of a machine-frame to serve as a 
support to the part to be driven, and the mech 
anism for driving it, as hereinafter explained. 
By way of illustration I will describe the 
ratchet mechanism as applied to use in driv 
ing a vehicle, the spokes at of the vehicle 
wheel being rigidly connected to the driven 
part or Section B of the driving mechanism, 
which constitutes the hub of the wheel, and is 
fitted loosely on the shaft A by its central 
hub portion, b, from which the plate b' ex 
tends to connect the horizontally-projecting 
In the inner face of the flange C is formed 
an annular recess, which has opposite inclined 
or tapering side walls, c c, and is provided 
with corrugated, roughened, or toothed sur 
face, said teeth D forming the base of the re 
cess toward which the side walls, c c, of the 
groove converge. 
On the shaft A is fitted loosely, by its in 
Wardly-extended hub portion e, the driving 
part or section E of the motor, and a plate, e, 
connects the hub e with the rim e", to which 
the operating strap, cord, or chain F is con 
nected and to which the treadle G is attached. 
H are the driving or clutch pawls of the 
motor, which consist each of two parts, h. h, 
pivoted on strong pins h to the hub e of the 
driver E, and having chamfered or beveled 
Outer faces, h., adapted to engage the inclined 
side walls, c c, of the recess of flange C, and 
having also roughened, corrugated, or toothed 
outer ends, the teeth D' of which are adapted 
to engage the teeth D of the flange C. Near 
their outer ends the parts h h of each pawl H 
have a pin, i, passed through them transverse 
ly to serve with the pivot-pins has guides to 
the two parts of the pawls to hold their toothed 
outer ends steadily as the parts h h are crowd 
ed together or toward each other by contact 
of their faces h. h with the walls c c of the 
flange C, to allow their end teeth, D', to fairly 
engage the teeth D of the flange, and a spring, 
I, fitted in opposite recesses of the inner faces 
of the parts h h, and held preferably on the 
guide-pin i, acts to force the parts h h of the 
awl from each other. 
The letter J indicates a wire spring, which 
is fastened ati to the plate e' of driver E, and 
hooks around the pawl at j', and tends to throw 
the pawl into gear with the teeth ID On part 
B of the motor; but these springs may be dis 
pensed with, if desired, as the pawls will en 
gage the teeth D by gravity; but the springs 
secure a more prompt action, and hence are 
preferred in practice. 
To the plate e' of the driver Eis held loosely, 
by brackets k" or otherwise, the pawl-tripper 
K, which has arms k extending through slots 
k in the plate e', and standing in front of the 
pawls H, the tripper being curved and hav 
ing an arm, k, on each end, as shown, to act 
5O flange or rim C of the part B to the hub. 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
322,622 
5 
O 
on two pawls; but the tripper will have a sin 
gle arm or more than two when a single pawl 
or more than two pawls are used, one arm, k, 
being provided for each pawl. 
To the end of shaft A is rigidly fixed in any 
approved way, as by placing it against a shoul 
der on the shaft. and by screwing a nut, , 
outside of it on the shaft, the collar or plate L, 
which has a toe, l, adapted to strike the end 
or one arm, k, of the tripper K to swing back 
the pawls H, and to the collar L is fixed one 
end, m, of a coiled spring, M, the other end, 
m", of which is fixed to the rim e of the driver 
E, so that the spring acts to turn the driver 
backward after each down pull of the strap F, 
which turns it forward. 
Any suitable guides, as at N, may be pro 
vided to guide and laterally support the Spring, 
and a cap of any kind may be fitted to the end 
of the driver E to cover and protect the mech 
anism of the motor. 
The operation is as follows: As the treadle is 
forced downward the driving-section E of the 
motor will be turned, which will carry the 
pawls Hinto engagement with the teeth D on 
the part B, to drive it and the vehicle-wheel 
connected therewith forward, the parts h h of 
the pawls being gradually forced toward each 
other by contact of their faces h" with the 
walls c c of flange C until the teeth ID' of the 
pawls engage the teeth D of the flange, by a 
positive clutching action, to carry the part B 
forward, the spring M being at the same time 
wound up or put in tension, and when the 
pressure on the treadle is relaxed the spring 
M acts instantly to turn back or reverse the 
motion of the driving-section E, while the 
momentum of the driven section B carries it 
forward, and the friction then occuring be 
tween the faces hh of the pawls and the faces 
c c of the part B Swings the pawls inward and 
disengages their teeth D from the teeth ID of 
the section E, and as the pawls H swing in 
ward their springs I force their parts h h from 
each other, and hold their faces h h" against 
the faces c e with a light pressure, sufficient 
to prevent all rattling of the pawls against 
adjacent parts of the motor and obviating en 
tirely the disagreeable noise incident to most 
awl-and-ratchet driving mechanism; and as 
the spring M carries the driver E to its ex 
treme backward position, the tripper K will 
strike the relatively fixed toe l of the collar 
L, which will swing the tripper back, so as to 
carry its arms k along the slots k" and against 
the backs of pawls H, to hold the pawls out 
of engagement with the teeth D, as in Fig. 3, 
which is the normal relation of the pawls when 
the motor is not drawn upon by the belt. F; 
hence, when the treadle is not operated the 
wheel connected to part B of the motor may 
be turned freely in either direction, allowing 
the vehicle to be run backward or forward by 
hand without operating the ratchet mechan 
ism or the treadle, which is animportant feature 
of my invention. When the treadle again is 
depressed, the tripper will be carried away 
from the toe l of the collar L, and the pawls 
H, aided, it may be, by the springs J, will 
again, engage the teeth D of the part B to give 7o 
the next forward impulse to the vehicle, in the 
manner above described. The collar L. may 
be set on the shaft A, with its toel in any de 
sired position, to throw the tripper K. earlier 
or later, according to the length of stroke it 75 
is desired to give the operating-treadle. 
It is evident that the part B of my ratchet 
driving mechanism may connect with a belt 
pulley rim to give motion to sewing-machines 
or drive hand or horse power mowing-ma- 8O 
chines, or the feed-wheels of up-and-down saw 
mills and many other kinds of machinery. 
The pull-belt F may be worked by a suit 
ably-arranged hand-lever, as will readily be 
understood. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a ratchet driving 
mechanism and with the clutch-sections B E 9o 
fitted loosely on a relatively fixed shaft, A, 
of the flange C on section B, having an inte 
rior groove provided with inclined faces c c, 
converging toward the bottom teeth, D, and 
the pawls H, pivoted to section E, and con- 95 
sisting of two parts, h. h., forced apart by a 
spring, and having inclined facesh'h', adapted 
to the faces c. c of flange C, and end teeth, D', 
adapted to the teeth ID of section B, substan 
tially as herein set forth. 
2. The combination, in a ratchet driving 
mechanism and with the clutch-sections BE 
fitted loosely on a relatively fixed shaft, A, of 
the flange C on section B, having an interior 
groove provided with inclined faces c c, and IO5 
the pawls H, pivoted to section E, and con 
sisting of two parts, h. h., forced apart by a 
spring, and having inclined faces l'h', adapted 
to the faces c e of flange C, substantially as 
herein set forth. 
3. The combination, with two clutch-sec 
tions of a ratchet driving mechanism fitted 
loosely on the same shaft, and the pawls of 
one section engaging the other section, of a 
tripper having arms standing in front of the 
pawls and means for throwing the tripper to 
hold the pawls out of engagement with the 
driven clutch-section, substantially as herein 
set forth. 
4. The combination, in a ratchet driving 
mechanism, of the clutch-sections B E, loose 
on shaft A, pawls pivoted to section E and 
engaging section B, the retracting-spring M, 
a collar, L, held rigidly to shaft A and hav 
ing a toe, l, and the loose tripper K, having 
arms k, projecting in front of the pawls H, 
substantially as herein set forth. 
. 5. The combination, in a ratchet driving 
mechanism, of the clutch-sections B E, fitted 
loosely on shaft A, the pawls H, pivoted at 
h' to the hub e of the section E, and formed 
of two parts, h. h., forced apart by a spring, 
I 30 
I 25 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
322,622 
- 
3. 
and having beveled faces h h", engaging the ranged to operate substantially as herein set 
inclined faces e c of the section B, and teeth forth. 
D', engaging teeth D of part B, the collar L, 
having a toe, l, the tripper K, having arms k 
5 standing in front of the pawls, means for 
turning the clutch-section E forward, and a 
retracting-spring, M, all constructed and ar- 
SAMUEL ELLERSON, 
FRANK E. CRAWFORD. 
DANIEL HENRY MCCOY. . 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322722.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. HOWES. 
PURIFYING AND AERATING APPARATUS FOR WATER SERVICE, 
No. 322,722. 
Patented July 21, 1885. 
W ITNESSES 
(i. 20, na Aleu-e- 
4. 2., 4-- ** 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Uthographer. Washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN HOWES, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, 
PURIFYING AND A E RATING APPARATUS FoR WATER SERVICE 
SSECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 322,722, dated July 21, 1885. 
Application filed August 29, 1883. 
(No model.) 
I5 
25 
30 
35 
65 
55 
F, the usual Working position being that 
To all whom it may concer's: 
shown. 
Be it known that I, JoHNHOWEs, a citizen 
Letters d and f indicate the passages by 
of the United States, residing at Worcester, 
which the liquid passes to the delivery-faucets 
in the county of Worcester and State of Mas 
D and G. The ?aucet D is for drawing off 
sachusetts, have invented certain new and 
sediment and unfiltered liquid, and faucet G. 
useful Improvements in Purifying and Aerat 
is for drawing filtered liquid. If desired, lead 
ing Apparatus for Water Services and for other 
ers or pipes may be connected in place of the 
Purposes; and I declare the following to be a 
description of my said invention, sufficiently 
faucets G and D, or either of them, to convey 
the liquid to any desired place of use, the fau 
full, clear, and exact to enable others skilled 
IO 
cets being there located. 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
The space at the back of the filter-felt F is 
 use the same, reference being had to the ac 
divided by the partitions ct into a narrowser 
companying drawings, which form a part of 
pentine channel or water-way, D', communi 
this specification. 
cating with the inlet c and delivery-passaged, 
My present invention relates to improve 
or forming a continuation of Said passages, in 
ments in water-service apparatus adapted for 
the manner substantially similar to that de 
purifying water for household and manufac 
scribed in my former Letters Patent No. 
turing purposes, the objects thereof being to 
provide means for pumping or mechanically 
276,820. 
Hindicates an air-pump or a combined air 
introducing air into the interior of the filter 
and-liquid pump communicating with the fil 
ing apparatus; also, to provide, in connection 
trate-chamber W by suitable passage,h. Said 
with a filtering apparatus, an air chamber or 
pump is in the present instance made as 
reservoir, into which air can be compressed 
shown, and consists of a cylinder screwed to 
for affording an increased and elastic pressure 
the shell A, and within said main cylinder is 
to impart a sudden reactive movement for 
arranged a reciprocating hollow plunger or 
assisting in cleansing the filter plates or mate 
piston, I, that in turn forms the cylinder for 
rial; also, to perfect the construction of the 
an inner plunger or piston, K, which latter is 
apparatus to render the devices compact, con 
also hollow and provided with an air-valve, J, 
venient, and efficient in use. The particular 
and with an inlet, O. This piston K is fur 
subject-matter claimed is hereinafter definitely 
nished with a suitable handle, L, for effecting 
specified. 
reciprocative movement of the piston K. The 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a front 
outer pump or plunger, I, is reciprocated by 
view of an apparatus illustrating the nature 
movement of the handle L beyond the limit 
of my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical central 
of the inner piston, K. When the handle I. 
section of the apparatus. Fig. 3 is a hori 
is depressed, the part K, being of smaller di 
zontal section through the upper portion of 
ameter than the plunger I, is opposed by less 
the pump-cylinder and the hollow plungers. 
pressure from the interior than is said plun 
In referring to the drawings, A denotes the 
ger I, and it is therefore forced downward 
body-casting or filter-shell inwardly provided 
within the plunger I until its end is brought 
with an annular ledge, a, and transverse bars 
into contact with the piston-head, when fur 
or partitions a, for supporting the filter-plate 
ther depression of the handle L and piston K 
F, which latter consists of disks of felt-one, 
necessarily overcomes the resistance of the 
two, or more-retained in position by means 
service-pressure on the larger piston and forces 95 
of the grate B, held down at its edges by the 
downward the part I within the cylinder H, 
flanged cap-plate A", that forms the front of 
in connection with the part K. With the up 
the shell. 
ward movement of the handle L the service 
C denotes the plug valve or cock for opening 
and closing the inlet-passages e, b, and c, by pressure on the plunger I causes said plunger 
which the liquid enters the apparatus from the to rise with the upward movement of the pis- IOO 
main or supply pipe E and by which it is di ton K. until the shoulder near the lower end 
rected to the back or front of the filter-plate of the plunger I strikes the under side of the 
75 
90 
 
2 
322,722 
O 
packing-ring and prevents its further upward 
movement, and the continued upward action 
of the handle then carries up the piston K 
Within the plunger I. The two parts. K and 
I could, if desired, be connected by a slotted 
link or by lugs working in slots or grooves, so 
as to effect the action without reference to 
the service-pressure; but under ordinary cir 
cumstances the pressure will raise the plunger 
I in the manner stated, and is deemed pref. 
erable. 
The arrangement of the various parts of the 
pump mechanism is shown in Fig. 2. The 
head of the piston I is properly packed, as at 
i, and is provided with a downwardly-opening 
Valve, m. A stuffing-box, H, is provided at 
the top of the cylinder H, through which the 
plunger I moves, and a suitable stuffing-box, 
I', is formed on the upper end of said plunger 
for packing the inner plunger, K. 
A cushion or buffer ring, n, may be arranged 
about the neck of the plunger I, for prevent 
ing shock when it is forced downward against 
the cylinder-cap and a buffer or leather ring, 
n", may be placed on the plunger K for a simi. 
lar purpose. 
The valve J is provided with a cross-headed 
stem, J", to limit its movement from its seat; 
or it may be otherwise confined to prevent its 
displacement or escape while in use. The end 
of the piston K and valve J are made to en 
tirely fill the interior space of the plunger I, 
when forced downward, so that all air con 
tained therein will be expelled through the 
valve in to the interior of the filter. 
In the Operation of the air-pump on the up 
Ward stroke of the piston K, air enters at the 
Openings o, and passes down beneath the valve 
J, and such air is from thence forced down 
ast the valve m to the interior of the filter by 
the downward stroke of the piston K. The 
piston I serves to pulsate or augment the flow 
of liquid through the filter-plate F, by me. 
chanical action at the same time that air is 
forced into the interior with the liquid. 
The air-pump piston K is operated by the 
upper portion of the stroke of the brake or 
handle L, and the water-piston I by the lower 
portion of the stroke of said brake. 
Hence 
either of the pistons K or I can be worked 
without moving the other by simply working 
the brake or handle L within the limit of that 
portion of its stroke corresponding to the limit 
of action of the respective pistons, or both of 
said pistons can be operated together by giving 
the full stroke of the brake or handle. B 
this means air may be injected into the filter. 
chamber W without the discharge of the water 
by working the air-pump only to the limit of 
the stroke or movement of its piston K; or, 
again, the liquid may be pulsated through the 
filter without the introduction of air by work 
ing the piston of the liquid-pump only, which 
is accomplished at the lower part of the stroke 
of the handle or brake; or, again, the injection 
of air and the pulsation of the liquid can be 
simultaneously effected by working the hall 
dile the full extent of its stroke from the high 
est to the lowest position of its action. When 
pulsating the liquid, the lower faucet, D, or 
cleansing-vent should be open to permit the 
liquid to pass through the felt F, 
In the use of the apparatus for Water Service, 
where the pressure is comparatively light, a 
check-valve, E, should be placed in the Sup 
ply-pipe E, that the full effect of the pump 
may be utilized without forcing the water back 
against the fountain-head through the pas 
Sage e. 
The check-valve may be connected in the 
pipe E in the ordinary manner, and at any 
convenient position. In cases where there is 
heavy service-pressure the check-valve may 
be omitted or employed, as preferred or most 
convenient, as in such cases, with the cock G 
or D open, there would be little or no liability 
of creating a backward flow in the pipe E. 
when working the pump devices. 
An air-chamber or compress-reservoir, P, 
is connected with the filtrate-chamber W or 
delivery-passage f by a pipe, p, leading there 
from. This reservoir receives the air forced 
into the interior of the apparatus by the pump 
K, and said air being compressed therein 
serves to accumulate force for giving a react 
ive movement of the liquid through the filter 
plates when the cleansing-passages are Opened. 
Said reservoir may be located in the imme 
diate vicinity of the filter, or the connecting 
pipe p may be extended to any convenient 
height above the filtering apparatus-as, forin 
stance, to the upper stories of a building or to 
the upper part of a room-where it will be out 
of the way and afford a greater degree of re 
active force by additional height above the 
apparatus. 
By the aid of the air-pump and air-reser 
voir the pressure can be increased within the 
apparatus, so that a very forcible reactive 
movement or flow can be attained for cleans 
ing the felt F of the filter when delivery D is 
opened, even though the nominal supply press 
ure is very tight. 
The reservoir P also en 
ables the filtered liquid to be stored under 
air-pressure, and this pressure forced or ac 
cumulated to any desired degree to assist the 
flow of the liquid through pipes to any loca 
tion where it is desired for use. The pump 
also permits of air being added to the liquid 
for aerating purposes, if desired. 
The air-pump mechanism herein described 
may be employed with filtering devices of 
other construction than that herein shown 
with beneficial results, and I design to em 
ploy it when desired in connection with the 
several kinds of filters such as are described 
in my former Letters Patent. 
What I claim as of my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a filtering appa 
ratus, of an air-pump mechanism for inject 
ing air to the interior of said filter, and an air 
25 
35 
45 
ro 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I25 
 
322,722 
- 
3 
reservoir into which said air can be com- the filter plates or material for the purposes Io 
pressed for imparting reactive movement when of cleansing, substantially as hereinbefore set 
the filter-cleansing cock is opened, substan- forth. 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
Witness my hand this 25th day of August, 
ratus, of a combined air and water pump 
JOHN HOWES. 
adapted for simultaneously injecting air to the 
interior of the filter and pulsating the liquid 
therein, and for forcing air and liquid through 
5 2. The combination, with a filtering appa- A. D. 1883. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. H. BURLEIGH, 
CHAS. D. G.A.Y. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322824.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 322,824, 
R. B. HUTCHCRAFT, 
SEED CLEANER AND HULLER, 
Patented July 21, 1885. 
 
Ft. 7 
A ty. 2. 
S2NZLINESSEs. 
e, ca.1 
TNYZENLore : 
67, (6-eafaye4e 
.7itorne)'. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
V 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
R. BRENT HUTCHCRAFT, OF PARIS, KENTUCKY. 
SEED CLEAN E R AND HUER. 
3ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 322,824, dated July 21, 1885. 
Application filed August 14, 1884. (No model.) 
- 
- 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, R.BRENT HUTCHCRAFT, 
of Paris, in the county of Bourbon and State 
of Kentucky, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Seed Cleaners and Hullers, 
which improvement is fully set forth in the fol 
lowing specification and accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view, partly in section, of 
my inproved seed cleaner and huller. Fig. 
2 is an end view of the same. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
seed cleaners and hullers, which will be fully 
understood from the following description, 
when taken in connection with the annexed 
drawings: 
A designates a suitable frame, and C is a 
shaft journaled in said frame at the upper end 
thereof. This shaft C is provided with a cyl 
inder, C, of sheet metal, preferably having a 
series of spiral corrugations or abrading sur 
faces, D, extending from one end of the cylin 
der to the other. Around this cylinder C, I 
provide a shell, E, the lower part of which is 
formed with perforations E, or, if desired, 
with a screen or sieve; and a hopper, F, is pro 
vided above at one end and an outlet, G, at 
the opposite end of said cylinder. One end of 
the shaft Chas a pulley, H, and the other end 
a pulley, I, keyed on it. 
Immediately beneath the cylinder C, I pro 
vide a shaft, J, having at one end a pulley, K, 
communicating with the pulley H by a belt. 
The shaft J is provided with a right and left 
conveyer, L, working in a box or trough, L', 
having a central opening, L, to convey the 
seed centrally through said opening. 
Immediately beneath the opening L, I pro 
vide a series of shafts,M, journaled in the ends 
of the box N. These shafts are arranged in a 
horizontal plane, and have pins or beaters O 
fixed spirally in them. The outer end of each 
one of the shafts M is provided with a pulley, 
P. Within the box N, at the opposite end 
from the opening L, I provide an opening, Q, 
extending downwardly. 
At any convenient distance beneath the 
shafts M, I provide a shaft and cylinder simi 
lar to the upper cylinder, C, having at one 
end a pulley, S, and at the opposite end two 
pulleys, SS". A belt, T, communicates with 
the pulley I above. This lower cylinder, R, 
... 
is also surrounded by a shell or concave, T, 
having a screen, U, which is provided with 
smaller perforations than the upper screen,E, 
for the purpose hereinafter explained. At 
the opposite end of the shell T from the open 
ing Q, I provide an outlet or chute, U", for dis 
charging the chaff. A belt, V, passes around 
the pulley S, extending to and alternating over 
and under the series of pulleys P at the ends 
of the shafts M. An idler-wheel, V, is placed 
intermediate at any convenient point to pro 
duce a tension on said belt V. The pulley S' 
at the opposite end of the shaft is designed to 
communicate power by means of a belt. (Not 
shown in the annexed drawings.) 
In operating this machine the seed with 
chaff is placed within the hopper F, and in 
passing down and around the cylinder C the 
seed is separated from the chaff, and passes 
through the openings in the screen E'. For 
this purpose this screen E is designed to be 
provided with perforations of such a size as to 
admit of the passage of the seed. The spiral 
corrugations on the cylinder C convey the 
chaff through the chute G. The seed which 
pass through the concave are conveyed in 
wardly by the conveyer L. from the ends of 
the box L" and discharged through the open 
ing L. The shafts M, bearing the beaters, re 
volve in opposite directions, and serve to re 
move the remainder of the chaff from the seed, 
and at the Same time convey the seed toward 
and through the opening Q to the cylinder R. 
The concave U is provided with smaller per 
forations than the upper concave, E, which 
permit the smaller and imperfect seed to pass 
into a receptacle beneath, the larger and per 
fect seed passing off through the opening U. 
At any stage of the progress of the seed af. 
ter leaving the cylinder C provision may be 
made for introducing a blast of air through the 
machine for removing the dust. This feature 
is not shown in the drawings, as I do not at 
all times find it necessary. The lower cylin 
der, R, while designed principally for carry 
ing the Seed through it, will also assistin clean 
ing or removing the last remnant of the chaff 
from the seed. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of the cylinder having 
corrugations spirally disposed, the shell or 
concave having perforations through itslower 
IO 
I5 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
- 
322,824 
5 2. The combination of the upper cylinder 
part and at the end a chute, the box or trough tions, and an outer shell provided beneath 
L", having a central opening, L, the right and with smaller perforations than those in the 
left conveyer, the box N, and the series of upper shell, the whole arranged to operate as 
beater-shafts M, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
provided with corrugations spirally disposed, have hereunto set my hand, this 19th day of 
the outer perforated shell, the right and left May, 1884, in the presence of witnesses. 
conveyer, the box or trough L', having a cen- 
tral opening, the box N, having an opening, 
IO Q, a series of shafts having spirally-disposed 
beaters, the lower cylinder having corruga- 
R. BRENT HUTCHCRAFT. 
Witnesses: 
F. R. ARMSTRONG, 
W. H. MCMILLAN. 
described. 
I5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US322924.txt	(NO Model,) 
No. 322,924, 
A, GUMMER. 
VEHICLE SPRING, 
Patented July 28, 1885, 
 
727(esses. 
6. 
Z72ZYeyazov 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT GUMMER, OF OMRO, WISCONSIN. 
VEHICLE - SPRNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 322,924, dated July 28, 1885. 
Application filed May 21, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
the combination together. C is a depending 
Be it known that I, ALBERT GUMMER, a lug indicating the central point of the spring 
B, and it and the ends D of the spring A Con 
stitute the points of connection with a vehicle 
body; but the central point of the spring B 
being the one to which a vehicle-body is mainly 
secured, the necessity of a rigid fastening of 
the ends of the spring B to the spring A will 
be plain, since it is required that the vehicle- 4O 
body shall be firmly secured from a longitudi 
nal or lateral play upon its spring according 
as the latter may be situated upon an axle of 
a vehicle, and this stability is given by the 
welding or riveting of the clip or ears F to 
either leaf of the spring A, in preference to 
other known but materially different methods 
of combining a supplemental half-spring with 
a primary one. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
The combination, with the half-elliptic pri 
mary spring, having the fixed perforated ears 
between its middle and each end, of the Sup 
plemental spring attached at, its ends to the 
fixed perforated ears described, its middle 
forming a bearing about in the same plane 
with the ends of the main spring, substantially 
as set forth, for the purpose specified. 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Omro, 
in the county of Winnebago and State of Wis 
consin, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Vehicle-Springs, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the manufacture and construction of that class 
of vehicle-springs denominated and known as 
'half-springs;' and it consists in welding or 
riveting to the primary spring the clip or 
yoke, coupling the primary and supplemental 
springs together at a point between the center 
of the primary spring and its ends, whereby 
a more simple and effective adaptation of the 
parts forming the combination than heretofore 
known and used is obtained. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the springs A and 
B in combination. Fig. 2 is a side view of the 
Supplemental spring B alone. 
A is a three-leaved primary half-spring, with 
an eye, D, at each end of the same, and with 
projecting ears F welded to either leaf of the 
spring A at a point between the center of the 
Spring A. and its ends. B is a supplemental 
and semi-elliptical spring, with an eye, H, at 
its ends corresponding with the ears F, be 
tween which the ends of the spring B are se 
3C cured by the pin or bolt X, running through 
the same and coupling the springs forming 
ALBERT GUMMER. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGEA. HATCH, 
BURTON. W. GUMMER. 
25 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323024.txt	M. DAVIS Dec'd, 
M. J. DAVIS, administratrix, 
PRINTING MACHINE. 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 323,024, 
Patented July 28, 1885. 
s 
s 
s 
$ 
  
A 
---------\ - ------ 3. 
S. 
A 
-9 
N 
 
 
v. 
to s (S 
2S 
If f(q2. 
 
s 
 
 
W/ 7/V ESSES 
w 
ta ?zil. 
74-p11-2-(4-l- 
WWMAW /O AR . 
Malwau. y O allowatt 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
M. DAVIS Dec'd, 
M. J. DAVIS, administratrix. 
PRINTING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
 
 
//V ASS AS 
24. 
42-44-1-2. 
/Wve W70 A. 
Wow-Wojewo, as Atwo 
pETERs, Photo-ithographer, Washingtan, P.C. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
M. DAVIS, Dec'd, 
M. J. DAVIS, administratrix. 
PRINTING MACHINE. 
No. 323,024, 
Patented July 28, 1885. 
S 
S. 
S 
; 
(2) 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
sy 
w 
s 
N 
 
S. 
Y 
yats 
& (2 
e8 o 
Ne 
Se 
S 2 
r 
2/ 
s SN 
s 
s 
k 
N 
R) 
R 
N 
ra 
/ 
N S 
N 
R 
: 
s 
S. 
SSS 
s 
S 
N 
y 
st 
S. 
SR 
N 
s 
sts 
(YS 
S 
N. 
f 
Sa 
S 
Ya 
s 
na 
s 
SO's 
s 
a 
N 
i 
 
Ya 
S. 
S 
: 
: \S &S 
:S 
I. 
s 
S. 
S 
e 
S 
w 
s 
s 
N 
| |N 
N 
w 
N 
N 
w N 
N 
N 
\ 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
S 
s 
S 
. 
wn 
7 HE 
s 
OTS 
S 
(2) 
KY 
ra 
s 
s 
S 
w 
& 
R. 
N 
s 
 
se 
31 
& 
|.. 
Sislesse 
S. 
S 3 
s 
w 
s 
s 
c). 
6/ 
R is is 
s, S 
SS 
S. &|| 
13 
& 
N 
5 
|g 
S 
& 
s 
n 
e 
a 
S 
n 
Q 
& 
 
A W / A W 7 OA. 
w 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. G. 
M. DAVIS, Dec'd, 
M. J. DAVIS, administratrix. 
PRINTING MACHINE, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented July 28, 1885. 
 
 
s 
& 
2SSSSSSSSI 
52% 3.SS a Q 
N 
sizza & N r N 
N 
SS 
 
 
Srs 
 
No. 323,024, 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
s 
a. & aS 
 
 
 
 
y 
 
212 3N 
o 
titler2S2s2Sss 
Q S22.S.A.s3.23s 
N 73%.2%zY. 
S. 
%2 
2 
% 
S 
M/A/7/V ASS AS. 
4.3%. 1. a, SC, 
S 
//VVA/V7OA 
is 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MERWIN DAVIS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-EIGHTEITO 
J. W. PECKETT, OF SAME PLACE; MARY JANE DAVIS ADMINISTRATRIX 
OF SAID MERWIN DAVIS, DECEASED. 
PRINT N G - MACH NE. 
SEPECEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 323,024, dated July 28, 1885. 
Application filed July 16, 1879. 
To add tufton it natu? coice.772 
Be it known that I, MERWIN DAVIS, of 
Brooklyn, Kings cointy, New York, have in 
vented, made, and applied to use Improve 
5 ments in the Construction of Printing-Ma 
chines; and I do declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and correct description of the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, making part of this specifica 
Io tion, and to the figures and letters of reference 
marked thereon, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the machine. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal section through 
the center of the machine. Fig. 3 is an end 
15 elevation showing the inking apparatus. Fig. 
4 is a transverse section through the line at ac, 
Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a section of inking-rollers. 
Fig. 6 is a view of the means employed to lock 
the counterbalanced segment of a cylinder. 
2O Fig. 7 is a vertical section at y i?, Fig. 1. Fig. 
S is a vertical section of counterbalanced seg 
ment of a cylinder, right-hand side. Fig. 9 is 
an end view of counterbalanced segment of a 
cylinder, right-hand side, the parts 32 and 36 
25 removed. Fig. 10 is an end view of counter 
balanced segment of a cylinder, left-hand side, 
the parts 32 and 36 removed. Fig. 11 is a 
vertical section of counterbalanced segment of 
a cylinder, left-hand side. Fig. 12 is a de 
3c tached view of the supplemental fingers 159 
and 166. Fig. 13 is a detached view of the 
shaft 113. 
In the drawings like parts of the invention 
are designated by the same figures and letters 
The nature of the present invention consists 
in improvements in the construction of print 
ing-presses, and will be found to refer more 
particularly to, first, the means employed to 
4o produce an impression; second, the means 
employed to lock the counterbalanced segment 
of a cylinder; third, the means employed to 
unlock the counterbalanced segment of a cyl 
inder; fourth, the means employed to open and 
45 close the sheet-taking nippers; fifth, the means 
employed to give a period of rest to the car 
riage 32 (supporting the counterbalanced seg 
ment of a cylinder) at the termination of each 
riciprocating movement; sixth, the means em 
35 of reference. 
5 5 
ployed to suspend the impression; seventh, 5o 
the combination, with the cylinders 65 and 70, 
of a vibrating and wobbling cog-wheel, a 
flanged pinion and a forked lever; eighth, the 
alternating rollers with the means for operat 
ing them; ninth, the rider, substantially as 
shown, for the form-rollers; tenth, the sheet 
carrier and the means to operate it; eleventh, 
the combination of a sheet lifter and carrier, 
and a series of spring-stops; twelfth, the com 
bination of a sheet lifter and carrier and the 
means to give the same a vertical movement; 
thirteenth, the combination of the sheet lifter 
and carrier and the means to give it a hori 
Zontal movement; fourteenth, the combination 
of the sheet lifter and carrier, a series of fin 
gers, and the means to operate them; fifteenth, 
the combination of a sheet-releasing lever and 
the means to operate it; sixteenth, the com 
bination of a falling pile-table and the means 
to support and operate it; seventeenth, the 
combination of the means to operate the fall 
ing pile-table and the means to govern the 
extent that it shall fall or drop; eighteenth, 
the combination of a sheet - carrier and a 
sheet lifter and carrier; nineteenth, the com 
bination of a sheet-carrier, a sheet lifter and 
carrier, and a falling pile-table; twentieth, the 
combination of a supplemental rack, 11", and 
the means to operate it; twenty-first, the com 
bination of the supplemental rack 11 and the 
means to operate it. 
To enable those skilled in the arts to make 
and use my invention, I will describe the con 
struction and operation of the same. 
1 are the side frames of the machine, se 
cured together by means of the cross-stays 2 
and tie-rods 3, in which the operative parts 
of the machine are supported. These side 
frames extend upward in their central parts, 
as at 4, and form standards. These standards 
are firmly connected by the cross-bars 6, 
bolted to the upper ends of the standards. In 
the angles formed by the intersection of the 
cross-bars 6" with the upper ends of the stand 
ards 4, are located the fixed parallel bars 5, 95 
rendered unyielding by contact with the un 
der sides of cross-bars 6", to which they are fast 
ened. Underneath these fixed parallel bars the 
75 
2 
1. 
323,024 
O 
15 
2C) 
25 
5 inafter described. 
impressing-wheels 36 of the counterbalanced 
inner sides of racks 27 are affixed the Ways on 
segment of a cylinder, 6, pass and repass dur 
which the heads 31 of the impressing-segment 
ing the reciprocating movements of carriage 
roll. A space, 29, is left between the grooved 
32. The function of these bars Will be here 
ways 25 and the horizontal racks 27 for the 
introduction of the supplemental racks 11' 11" 
7 shows the crank or main shaft of the ma 
110 1. 
chine, Working in boxes in the side frames, in 
30 shows a guard-ledge, held between the 
which it has its bearings, in connection with 
grooved way 25 and the horizontal rack 27, 
parts to be hereinafter mentioned. 
and directly in line with one of the supple 
S shows a projecting finger secured upon the 
mental racks 11' 11" 11 11". 
shaft 7, employed to lock the counterbalanced 
32 is the frame-work for supporting and 
segment of a cylinder after an impression has 
carrying the counterbalanced segment of a 
been given, and also employed to open the 
cylinder, 6, over the form of types secured in 
sheet-taking nippers 37, that the printed sheet 
the bed 21, while an impression is being given, 
may be relieved from them. 
and during the return movement of the count 
9 is a surface-cam, secured on shaft 7, (near 
erbalanced segment of a cylinder after an im 
finger 8,) employed, in connection with bell 
pression has been given. This consists of the 
crank lever 10' and lever 112, to lock thrown 
side frames 34, secured together by the tie 
off shaft 113, (on the forward movement of 
rods 33. The side frames are continued in 
carriage 32,) and thus prevent the impressing 
course of manufacture about centrally, so 
segment 6 from revolving or printing. 
. 
that they rise above their lower portions, and 
10" is a surface-cam, secured on the righ 
these raised portions are provided with rect 
end of shaft 7, employed to operate, through 
angular openings into which are fitted boxes, 
the intersection of bell-crank lever 107, fric 
through which pass the circular bearings 35 
tion pulley 107" and connection 107, the hori 
of the counterbalanced segment of a cylinder, 
Zontal rod 120, whereby the supplemental 
and upon these bearings are also placed the 
racks 11" and 11" are brought into and out of 
impression-wheels 36, which run and travel 
gear with the right-hand cog wheel, 28", of the 
upon the grooved ways 25. 
impressing-segment 6. 
6 represents the counterbalanced segment 
12 is a cam secured upon the shaft 7, em 
of a cylinder having upon its ends the circu. 
ployed to close the sheet-taking nippers 37 
lar heads 31, the cog-wheels 28, (with a frac 
upon the counterbalanced segment of a cyl 
tion of their teeth eliminated,) and the jour 
inder, by and through the upright lever 47, 
nals 35, by which it is held down while giving 
connecting-1 od 13, and bell-crank lever 46. 
an impression, and by which it is controlled 
35 Outside of the cam 12, upon the shaft 7, is se 
and moved in the carriage 32. 
cured a cog-wheel, 14, gearing into a pinion, 
The shaft 38 (upon which are affixed the 
15, supported upon a stud, 16, inserted in the 
sheet-taking nippers 37) has its bearings in 
frame, which pinion 15 in turn engages with the 
the heads 31 of the impressing-segment 6 in 
pinion 17 upon one end of the fly-whee' sha?t 18. 
mediately in front of the forward edge of the 
18 shows the fly-wheel shaft, (having its 
Segment. 
bearings in the frame,) upon one end of which 
The gear-wheels 28 have, as already stated, 
is the pinion 17 and the fly-wheel 19. 
several of their teeth cut away, and outside 
20 are the ways upon which the bed 21 of 
of the cut-away portions of these gear-wheels 
the machine rests. These ways 20 rest at their 
are placed (on the left side) the supplemental 
45 rear ends upon the cross-stays 2, and at their 
sliding piece 28, and on the opposite side the 
forward ends upon brackets attached to the 
fixed teeth 28. 
side frames 1. The upper portion of these 
The object of using a counterbalanced seg 
ways are grooved and receive the slides 22, 
ment of a cylinder will be fully hereinafter 
provided with openings properly positioned 
explained. 
5o to receive the lower portions of the impres 
The lower portion of the frame-work or car 
Sion-screw'S 23. 
riage 32 is slotted, as at 39, to receive the 
21 shows the bed of the press in which the 
bearings of the rollers 40, intended to ink the 
form of types from which the impression is to 
form placed in the bed 21, upon the forward 
be taken is secured. This bed is supported 
and return movements of the counterbalanced 
55 by the screws 23, and may be raised or low 
segment of a cylinder. 
ered, as occasion requires, by turning then. 
Upon one end of the rod 38, supporting the 
The upper portion of the bed is provided with 
sheet-taking nippers 37, is secured a semi cog 
a series of openings, 24, the object of which 
wheel, 42, which, when the counterbalanced 
will be hereinafter set forth. 
segment of a cylinder is brought into position 
25 are grooved ways, secured upon the in 
to receive the sheet of paper to be printed, 
ner sides of the frame of the machine and ex 
interlocks with a rack, 43, upon the supple 
tending its full length. Upon the sides of the 
mental sliding piece 2S", outside of the gear 
grooved ways and in advance of them are 
wheel 28, operated by finger 44, secured upon 
fitted the strips 26, supporting the horizontal 
shaft 45, upon the opposite end of which is the 
65 racks 27, with which the gear-wheels 28 (se 
bell-crank lever 46, the lower end of which is 
cured upon the ends of the counterbalaced 
attached to one end of the connection 13, to 
segment of a cylinder, 6) engage, and to the the opposite end of which connection is at 
95 
ICO 
EO 
II5 
I 20 
I 25 
 
323,024 
3 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
tached a lever provided with a stud and roller, 
47, operated by the cana 12, and thus, by the 
cam-connection and bell-crank lever, the sheet 
taking nippers are closed upon the sheet at the 
proper time. The upper portion of the bell 
crank lever has secured in it a pin playing in 
the slotted lever 4S, secured upon the end of 
the rod 49, upon which are placed the sheet 
guides or gages 50, and as the roller 47 engages 
with the cam 12, the guides or gages 50 are 
thrown forward and away from the table 51, 
so as to allow the sheet to be printed to be 
drawn from it by the sheet-taking nippers 37. 
51 shows the feed-table of the machine rest 
ing upon the standards 51, upon which the 
sheet to be printed is placed, being laid to or 
against the guides or gages 50. The front por 
tion of the table rests upon the arms 52, secured 
upon the rod 45, and as this rod is operated 
by the bell-crank lever 46, the arms 52 are de 
pressed, the forward portion of the feed-table 
is dropped, and its front edge brought to the 
face of the segment, immediately behind the 
sheet-taking nippers 37. 
To the rear portion of the frame-work or 
carriage 32 are attached the forward ends of 
the connecting-rois 53, the lear ends of which 
are connected to the upper ends of the oscil 
lating levers 54, Secured upon the sides of the 
frame-work 55, Supported upon a rockshaft, 
56, having its bearings in the side frames of 
the machine, to which frame-work a rocking 
motion is imparted by the connecting-rod 57, 
the rear end of which is received within a 
hinged collar, 59, (secured to the frame-work 
55,) and its forward end attached to the crank 
pin of the shaft 7. 
5S shows a slot of three varying curves, 
(each curve corresponding with a period of 
rest or motion in the carriage 32 and segment 
6.) the forward and rear ends of which are se 
cured to the cross-stays 2. Within this slot 
5S plays a roller, 60, supported by a stud se 
cured to the forward end of lever 61, the rear 
end of which is connected to the hinged piece 
59, and by and through the movement of lever 
61 (guided by roller 60) a dwell is given to 
the carriage of the counterbalanced segment 
of a cylinder immediately before and after the 
crank passes its centers, thus affording the nip 
pers 37 time to close. On the margin of a sheet 
lying on the feed-table, and after its impres 
sion to transfer it to fingers 166. 
The inking apparatus consists of a partly 
curved table, 62, supported between the ways 
for segment-heads 31, and placed below the 
feed-table 51, and also of a table, 63, supported 
in like manner at the opposite end of the ma 
Chine, 
To the rear end of the machine, back of and 
below the partly-curved table 62, are secured 
the brackets 64, in which are located an upper 
vibrating cylinder, 65, the alternating rollers 
66, (held in the arms 67 upon a shaft, 68, hav. 
ing at its left end the center-passing lever 69, 
and at its right the E-shaped trip-levers 176") 
a reciprocating cylinder, 70, a messenger 
roller, 71, and a fountain,72, also a recipro 
cating roller, 73, held and carried in a frame 
work, 74, moved upon the tie - rod 3, the 
supply-rollers 75, and a rider-roller, 76, held 
in the frame-work 77, attached to the rear end 
of the carriage 32. 
The form-rollers, or rollers to supply the form 
with ink, are located in the forward portion of 
the carriage 32. 
78 shows a revolving shaft (having its bear 
ings in the standards 51")provided with a right 
handed screw-thread, 79, and having upon its 
right end (outside of standards 51") a blank 
wheel, 80, in which is fixed a stud, S1, over 
which passes one end of a connection, S1", the 
opposite end of which is attached to a crank 
arm, 82, on a grooved pulley, S3, supported 
by a stud inserted in the side frame 1. With 
the right-handed screw-thread 79 (on shaft 78) 
engages the elongated nut 84, (guided and kept 
in position by projecting arms passing over the 
uppermost of the tie-rods in standards 51",) 
from the inner side of which projects the pin 
85. This pin, intercepting a slot in the elas 
tic tongue at the upper part of frame-work 74, 
carries the frame-work 74, and consequently 
the roller 73 (located and held therein) from 
side to side of the press-frames, in accordance 
with the right or left rotation of the screw. 
shaft 7S. The reciprocating distributing-cyl 
inder 70 has the shaft Supporting it provided 
at its left end (outside of brackets 64) with a 
flanged pinion, 89, engaging with a vibrating 
and Wobbling cog wheel, 90, and upon its op 
posite end (outside of brackets 64) a scored 
pulley, 91. The distributing-cylinder 65 has 
upon its right end a scored pulley, 92. The 
vibrating cog-wheel 90 is supported upon a 
shaft, 93, having its bearings in boxes attached 
to the brackets 64. 
95 is a side piece secured to the left side of 
frame 1. and supporting a vibrating lever, 94, 
the forked portions of which pass over the 
grooved left ends of the vibrating cog-wheel 
shaft, 93 and the vibrating cylinder-shaft 65. 
96 shows the table for the reception of the 
printed sheets, Supported upon the columnar 
rods 97, running through the ribs of side 
frames 1 and secured in the yokes 9S, at the 
bottom of the side frames. This table is slot 
ted, through which slots project the pins 100, 
supported upon the rear end of a reciprocat 
ing frame-work, 101 (lying underneath the 
pile-table,) the forward end of which is bent 
upward, as at 102, so that it may be pushed 
back by a pin on the underside of secondary 
sheet-carrier 131. From thesides of the yokes 
98 project studs, resting upon levers 103, se 
cured upon the rock-shaft 104, having its bear 
ings in the side frames 1. 
Upon one side of 
this rock-shaft 104 is secured a vertical lever, 
106, having at its hipper end an eye, which 
passes over the threaded shaft 10S, (supported 
in the CrOSS-Stays 2,) upon the rear end of 
which is keyed a ratchet-wheel, 109, while 
directly behind the eye of the lever 106 is 
placed a nut, 110. 
. 
. 
75 
9O 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 23 
4. 
323,024 
90 
95 
111 represents the pawl by which the ratch 
et-wheel is operated. This pawl is connected 
by a chain or link to the lever 112, attached 
to the '' throw-off shaft 113. 
113 is the throw-off shaft of the machine, 
having its bearings in the boxes 114, attached 
to the frames 1. Upon one end of the shaft 
113 is the bell-crank lever 115, connected by 
the rod 116 to the pedal 117, so that either the 
hand or foot of the operator may be used to 
suspend the impression. 
Upon the opposite. 
end of the shaft 113 are Secured the lever 118 
and the toe-shaped lever 119, slotted at its up 
per end, so that when it is elevated the slotted 
portion shall embrace the connecting-rod 13 
and intercept a stop affixed thereto, thus pre 
venting the closing of the sheet-taking nip 
pers 37. While the lever 11S is vibrated by 
the movement of the shaft 113, it presses 
against the rear end of rod 120 (held in the 
boxes 121 upon the side frame 1) and moves 
the same forward, so that the block 122, (pro 
vided with an inclined face upon its under 
side,) operating against the inclined face on 
the upper side of block 123, (secured upon one 
of the supplemental racks, 11",) forces supple 
mental rack 11" downward and out of gear 
with the cog-wheel of the impressing segment. 
The supplemental racks 11*11' 1111" are em 
ployed to throw the counterbalanced segment 
of a cylinder into gear while printing a sheet 
on its forward movement, and out of gear after 
a sheet has been printed and while it is mak 
ing its retrograde movement. 
Two of these 
supplemental racks, 11'11", are provided with 
spindles 124, over which are passed helical 
springs 125, and one of them, 11", is provided 
with the block 123, as described above. These 
racks are inserted in openings at the inner 
sides of the main racks 27. The supplemental 
rack 11" is provided with a projecting block, 
126, tripped by an L-shaped lever, 127, op 
erated by a finger, S, upon the shaft 7, so that, 
as the finger S is brought into contact with the 
L-shaped lever 127, the rack 11 is thrown up, 
the sheet-taking nippers 37 are opened, and 
the counterbalanced segment of a cylinder is 
locked for its return movement. A third sup 
plemental rack, 11, directly in line with rack 
11", is lever-shaped and affixed to the right 
end of shaft 12S, passing through the contin 
uous rack 27. From shaft 128 projects a ver 
tical lever, 129, connected by a link, 129, to 
the lever 11S, on thrown-off shaft 113, by 
which the rack 11 is depressed, as occasion 
requires. 
Directly in front of the counterbalanced seg 
ment of a cylinder, and hinged to a cross-tie 
at the forward end of carriage 32, is the hori 
zontal sheet-carrier 130, composed of a series 
of strips of wood or metal, with spaces be 
tween them, by which the printed sheet is 
taken from the supplemental fingers 166 and 
transferred to the sheet lifter and carrier 131. 
Upon the forward ends of the strips of sheet. 
carrier 130 are secured the spring-clamps 142, 
to be hereinafter more fully described. 
The hinged slides 132 (connected at their 
forward ends by a rod, 132", and nuts) are 
supported near their centers upon the upright 7o 
rods 133, (passed through boxes 134, secured 
upon the side frames 1,) which are elevated 
and depressed by the levers 135, pinned at 
their rear ends upon the shaft 36, having its 
bearings in boxes 137, secured upon the side 75 
frames. 
The shaft 136 is operated by lever 139, (pass. 
ing through cross-stay 2,) upright connecting 
rod 140, lever with friction-pulley 141, and 
calm 138 on crank-shaft 7. The rear ends of 8o 
the hinged slides 132 move in the upright 
grooved ways 149, secured upon the rear of 
standards 4. 
The sheet lifter and carrier 131 is composed 
of a series of strips of wood or metal, (with 85 
spaces between them,) secured upon a base 
bar, 143, with studs at each end, over which 
studs pass the rear ends of connecting-rods 
144, whose forward ends are pinned to the 
free ends of curved levers 145, secured upon 
the rod 146. Placed upon these strips, as 
judgment may dictate, are the spring-stops 
147, which stop and hold the margin of the 
printed sheet. 
Over the sheetlifter and carrier 131 is placed 
a sheet-holder, 148, (somewhat similar in con 
struction to 131,) and hinged upon the base 
bar 43. 
Upon one end of the rod 146 is secured a 
semicircular flanged pulley, 150, to which one 
end of a strap, 151, is attached, the opposite 
end of which is secured in the slotted upper 
end of lever 152, which has its fulcrum upon 
a stud secured in the side frame 1, and at its 
lower end a stud and roller actuated by calm 
153, secured upon the left outer end of the 
crank-shaft 7. 
Upon one side of the sheet-carrier 130 is at 
tached a prong, 154, with a curved projection, 
155, upon its under side, the office of which 
is to raise the forward end of the sheet-car 
rier and enable the spring-clamps 142 to grasp 
the forward margin of the printed sheet as it 
is held in supplemental fingers 166. This 
lifting of the end of the sheet-carrier is ac 
complished by the intervention of a pin, 156, 
projecting from the upper end strip,157, which 
strip is operated through lever 158, having 
its fulcrum on rod 120, (see detail drawing, 
Fig. 7,) by the supplemental cam 158, se 
cured upon the outer side of cam 10", thus 
forcing the pin 156 through an opening in the 
upper end of the standard to engage with the 
under side of curved projection 155, and cause 
the forward end of 130 to rise. 
Fingers 159 are a series of prongs and stops 
secured upon the rod 160, which has its bear 
ings in side pieces affixed to the impressing 
bars 5. The rod 160 is vibrated through a 
lever on rod 160", by the link 167, which has 
its lower end attached to a stud on arm 164. 
(See detailed drawing Fig. 12.) 
To the fingers 159 are secured (beneath the 
back of their forward ends) the stops 168, 
I 25 
CC 
IO 
I I5 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
323,024 
5 
IO 
55 
75 
90 
95 
which intercept, at the right moment, the for. 
ward edge of the printed sheet, and cause it 
to pass from the sheet-carrier 131 and fall up 
on the pile-table 96. 
Upon the rod 165 are a series of fingers, 
166, whose upper or supplemental parts are 
permanently fastened to forward cross-bar of 
the standards 4. The function of these fin 
gers is to sieze the forward margin of a sheet, 
immediately after it is printed, and hold it 
during the retrograde withdrawal of the im 
pressing-segment 6, and until it is transferred 
to the primary sheet-carrier 130, ready for 
retransferrence to the secondary sheet lifter 
and carrier 131. 
Upon the left side of the sheet-holder 148 
is located the right-angled prong 169, which, 
actuated by the tongue 170, (hinged to the 
left side of the rod 146,) rises at the proper 
time and releases the margin of the sheet 
from the spring-stops 147. The tongue 170 is 
operated by the vertical rod 171, the lever 
172, and the cam 161. The bed 21 is securely 
held, during the operation of printing, by a 
set-screw passing through the left side frame 
of the press. 
173 is a rod Secured in the frame-work. 55 
of the oscillating levers 54, and over this rod 
is passed a sliding box, 174, to the forward 
end of which is hinged the rear end of a 
hooked lever, 175, the hooked end of which is 
passed over a pin, 176, secured in a bell-crank 
lever, 177, vibrating upon a stud affixed to 
the outer side of the slot of three varying 
curves. The sliding box. 174 is held in posi 
tion upon the rod 173 by a thumb-screw, 178, 
and as the box 174 is raised or lowered upon 
the rod 173 the hooked lever 175 will increase 
or decrease the movement of the bell crank 
lever 177, and as this lever controls the move 
ment of the pawl 111 (by which the speed of 
the ratchet-wheel 109 is governed) the move 
ment of the ratchet-wheel 109 will be increased 
as the box 174 is raised upon the rod 173, or 
in like manner decreased when the box 174 is 
fixed at a lower point on the rod 173, thus 
allowing the pile - table 96 to accommodate 
itself to variations in the thickness of the 
sheets placed upon it. 
Below the grooved ways 25 are placed the 
rods 180, with spiral springs 182 wound over 
them and right-angled projections 181 at their 
rear, against which the rear ends of the car 
riage 32 impinge. The function of these rods 
is to overcome the momentum of carriage 32 
on its backward movement, and also to neu 
tralize any looseness of joints or backlash' 
in the gearing of the machine. 
Such being the construction of the improved 
machine, its operation may be thus set forth. 
I will speak first of the means employed to 
distribute the ink. The fountain being sup 
plied with ink, the messenger-roller placed in 
position, the alternators' secured in the 
frame supporting them, the reciprocating rol 
ler inserted in its frame-work, the supply 
rollers and their rider positioned in their 
85 
frame-work, and the form-rollers located in 
the forward portion of the carriage 32, mo 
tion is communicated to the driving-shaft 7, 
which sets all parts in the inking apparatus in 
motion. 
I prefer to describe the operation of the 
machine while it is breaking up and dis 
tributing the ink preliminary to the placing 
of the form upon the bed of the press. As 
the fly-wheel shaft revolves, a rotary motion 
is communicated through the belt 173, passed 
over the scored pulley 174" upon the shaft 18, 
and also over the grooved pulleys 91 and 92 
to the cylinders 70 and 65, and as the cylinder 
70 revolves the flanged pinion 89 engages with 
the vibrating cog-wheel 90 and operates the 
forked lever 94, by which one of the cylinders 
is caused to vibrate from the right to the left, 
while the other vibrates from the left to the 
right, and so on, and vice versa. The messen 
ger -roller 71 is raised and depressed from 
and to the duct-roller' of the fountain 72 
by means of a connecting-rod, 175, the for 
ward end of which is attached to the lower 
part of one of the levers 54, and thus the re 
ciprocating cylinder 70 is supplied with ink 
from the fountain 72. Between the cylin 
ders 65 and 70 are the alternating rollers 66, 
held in the double arms 67 upon the shaft 68, 
the office of which alternating rollers is to as 
sist in the distribution of the ink by bear 
ing alternately upon the cylinders 65 and 70. 
This alternate movement of the roller 66 is 
effected by means of an E-shaped lever, 176", 
secured upon the right end of shaft 68, and 
operated by a vibrating finger, 177", attached to 
one of the levers 54. By the movement of the 
alternating rollers from one cylinder to the 
other the ink (partially broken up by the 
lower cylinder, 70,) is supplied to the upper 
cylinder, 65. The reciprocating roller 73, 
held and carried in the frame-work 74, is al 
ways in contact with the outside alternating 
roller, and, by its movement from end to end 
of the alternating roller, assists in breaking up 
and blending the ink received by the upper 
vibrating distributing cylinder, 65. In the 
meantine the inner alternating roller is per 
forming a similar office in giving distributed 
ink to the upper vibrating-cylinder, 65, which 
in turn gives its distributed ink to the Supply 
rollers 75. The to-and-fro movement of the 
blending-roller 73 is effected by the screw 
bearing shaft 78, operated through a blank fly 
wheel, 80, by the connecting-rod 81", attached 
(at its lower end) to the grooved pulley 83. 
Upon the screw-shaft 78, at each end of the 
right-handed screw, are the collars 178", having 125 
upon their inner side the pins or projections 
179". Back of these collars are placed the 
helical spring 180", the ends of which are at 
tached to the collars and to the shaft, 78. As 
the shaft revolves, to the right or to the left, 
the right-hand screw, 79, engages with the 
elongated nut 84, and thus the frame-work 74 
is carried, together with the roller 73, from 
one end of the outer alternating roller to the 
-IOO 
IO 
II5 
323,024 
6 
other. A projection, 85, upon either side of 
nut 84 engages with the catches 179" upon the 
spring-collars 178, when, by the resistance 
offered by the springs 180 to the further ro 
5 tation of the shaft, the crank of the blank 
wheel 80 is thrown off its center, and the recip 
rocating roller, through the counter revolu 
tion of the screw-shaft 7S, is returned to the 
opposite side of the machine, where the same 
IO operation is repeated, and thus the roller 
travels from one end of the outer alternating 
roller to the other. The handle 88 is hinged 
upon the frame-work 74, and is employed by 
the operator (at his discretion) to shift the 
I5 blending-roller 73 to any position upon the 
outer alternating roller that may be desirable. 
The supply-rollers 75 and the rider-roller 76 
receive the broken-up ink from the distribut 
ing-cylinder 65, and supply the same to and 
2O upon the partly-curved table 62, from which it 
is received by the form-rollers 30, and by them 
applied to the form (when it is placed on the 
bed) and to the forward distributing table, 63. 
When the rollers 40 are inking the form 
25 placed in the bed of the machine, they are 
brought successively upon and over the for 
ward distributing-table, 63, and the partially 
curved table 62, at the rear end of the ma 
chine. The form-rollers have the recipro 
3O cating rider - rollers 183 placed over them. 
The reciprocating rider - rollers 183 consist 
each of a hollow metal cylinder, passed over 
a spindle, 184, having at one end a spiral 
thread, 185, by which a vibratory movement 
35 is given to the roller, through the form-rollers 
40, at each reciprocating movement of the 
carriage 32. Upon each end of the spindle 
184 are placed the collars 186, from which pro 
ject the pins or catches 187. The rider-roller 
4O 183 has at each end of its head a pin or pro 
jection, 188, which, when the roller 183 (from 
any cause whatsoever) attempts to exceed the 
limits of its vibration, interlocks with the pin 
or projection upon the collars 186, and makes 
45 it act, at the required time, as if it were im 
movable upon its spindle, thus preventing any 
excess in its vibratory movement. It is in 
tended that a rotary motion shall be given to 
the reciprocating rider-rollers by contact with 
5O the form-rollers, and if from any cause the 
tendency of the roller 183 is to run unduly to 
One side the interlocking of the pins or pro 
jections on the roller with the projections on 
the collars prevents its further reciprocation, 
55 so that the axle and roller simply revolve to 
gether without vibration until the motion of 
the press is reversed. The ink, through the 
operation of the parts above described, hav 
ing been thoroughly distributed, the form from 
6O which the impression is to be taken may now 
be placed and secured upon the bed of the 
machine. The bed is now drawn to the front 
of the machine over the grooved ways 20, and 
the form is placed on the same, and, if the 
5 form be a small one, or one not occupying the 
full width of the bed, to economize the use of 
furniture in locking up the form, a flat bar of 
metal may be employed, provided with a pin 
at each end, on its under side, fitting into cir 
cular openings at each side of the bed, and 7O 
lying in a slightly-diagonal line, so that with 
ordinary quoins the form can easily be locked 
up. The bed is then pushed back upon the 
grooved ways, so that it occupies the proper 
position for an impression to be taken, and is 75 
secured in this position by means of a set 
screw passing through the side frame of the 
press. 
The counterbalanced segment of a cylinder 
having been provided with a tympan-sheet, 8o 
and the form made ready, the operation of 
printing is as follows: The sheet to be printed 
is laid upon the feed-table 51, its front edge 
against the sheet - guides 50, and the coun 
terbalanced segment of a cylinder is brought 85 
into the proper position to allow the sheet 
taking nippers 37 to grasp the sheet to be 
printed from the feed-table 51. At this point 
the fixed supplemental teeth on the side of 
the cog-wheel 28 (on the right-hand side of go 
the press) are brought in gear with the vi 
brating lever-shaped supplemental rack 11, 
and the machine being set in motion, as in the 
case of the ink distribution, the sheet guides 
50 are thrown up and away from the forward 95 
margin of the sheet, the forward edge of the 
feed-table 51 is depressed to the face of the 
impressing-segment 6, the nippers 37 close on 
the margin of the sheet, and the impressing-seg 
ment is unlocked and free to revolve on its for- (OC 
ward movement. The counterbalanced seg 
ment of a cylinder, 6, is unlocked, (and made 
free to revolve in the carriage 32) by the fin 
ger 44 engaging with and depressing the sup 
plemental sliding piece 2S, (whose slides are ro5 
affixed to the side of the left cog-wheel, 28,) 
upon the upper end of which is a pin, A. 
The counterbalanced segment of a cylinder, 
6, supported in the carriage 32, operated by 
the vibrating levers 54 through the crank- I.O 
shaft 7, connecting-rod 57, and connections 53, 
now commences to revolve through the en 
gagement of the cog-wheels 28 with the con 
tinuous racks 27. The nippers 37, having 
already been closed upon the sheet, through I I5 
the agency of semi cog-wheel 42, rack 43, and 
finger 44 (operated by shaft 45,) connection 
13, bell-crank lever 46, upright lever 47, and 
calm 12, the impressing - segment 6 in making 
one-half of a revolution presents the forward I2O 
part of the sheet to be printed to the front 
edge of the form, and, in completing its revo 
lution, prints the whole surface of the sheet, 
and brings its front margin within the grasp 
of the supplemental fingers 166, which now 25 
close upon it and hold it for transferrence to 
sheet-carrier 130. The form-rollers 40, (placed 
in the forward portion of the carriage 32,) 
during this forward movement of the counter 
balanced segment of a cylinder, have passed I3o 
completely over the form in advance, inked 
it, and now rest upon the table 63. During 
the forward movement of the counterbalanced 
Segment of a cylinder the impressing -wheels 
323,024 
7 
Jo 
25 
35 
45 
O 
55 
36 (placed upon the circular bearings 35) each carrier may freely pass each other with 
have passed under the impression-bars 5, thus out contact at their sides. Immediately be 
holding the impressing-segment in unyielding fore the completion of the forward novelinent 
contact with the form. At this point the of the sheet-carrier 130 the front edge of the 
counterbalanced impressing-segment 6 having sheet lying upon it is brought against the 
completed a full revolution its forward move. spring-stops 147, by which it is released from 
ment ceases. The finger S, upon the shaft 7, the clamps 142. The sheet lifter and carrier 
now operates the L-shaped lever 127, and 131 is now raised vertically by the Ways 132, 
through the block 126, upon the supplemental (attached to the rods 133,) levers 135 and 139, 
rack 11", elevates this rack, which, engaging connecting-rod 140, lever 141, and cam 13S, 
with the teeth at the lower end of the supple. and as it rises lifts the printed sheet from the 
mental sliding piece, (at left side of cog-wheel carrier 130, the sheet-holder 148 immediately 
2S,) elevates this sliding piece, and forces the impinging upon the spring-stops 147 and holl 
pin A (at its upper end) through an opening ing the sheet securely in position upon the 
in a projecting cap upon the side of the car. carrier and lifter 131. It is now carried In a 
riage 32, and thus the counterbalanced seg- horizontal line by the action of Connecting 
ment of a cylinder is locked and rendered in-rods 144, curved levers 145, flanged pulley 
movable within the carriage 32. As the slid- 150, lever 152, strap 151, and cam 153 to and 
ing piece 28" (upon the upper end of which the immediately above the pile table 96, and this 
pin A is placed) is thrown up, the rack 43, motion continues until the rear end of the 
which forms a part of it, engages with the sheet almost touches the pins 100 passed 
Semi cog-wheel 42, and thus the sheet-taking through the slots of the pile-table 96. The 
nippers 37 are opened. The supplemental sheet lifter and carrier 131 having completed 
finger's 166 having been opened through arm its forward movement now commences its re 
16, operated by connecting-rod 163, and le- turn movement; but before it has brought the 
ver 162, actuated by cam 161, are now closed forward margin of the sheet, inclosed and 
(through the same mechanical devices) upon held between its upper and lower parts, 
the margin of the printed sheet, and as the against the stops or guides of fingers 59, the 
carriage 32, in which the counterbalanced im- lifting-tongue 170, (impelled by the uprightrod 
pressing-segment is now locked, commences 171,) lever 172, and cam 161, impinges against 
and continues its retrograde movement, the the under side of the right-angled arm 169 
printed sheet is gradually withdrawn (printed and raises the arms or prongs of sheet-holder 
side up) from the impressing-segment and de- 148, so that they do not touch the Spring 
posited upon the sheet-carrier 130. The sheet-stops or guides 147, thus releasing the forward 
carrier 130, hinged to the forward end of the margin of the sheet and allowing sheet cal 
carriage 32, having been through the retro- rier 131 to withdraw from it and leave it upon 
grade movement of the carriage 32, brought the pile-table 96, its front edge controlled by 
under the printed sheet, and the clamps 142, the stop and pressure fingers 159, and its 'eill' 
at forward end of carrier 130, having been edge by the upright prongs 100 held and re 
raised by means of the prong 154, projection ciprocated by the slide 101. During the for 
155, spring-strip 157, pin 156, lever 158", and ward and back, rising and falling movement 
can 15S to a line with the supplemental fin- of the duplex sheet lifter and carrier 131, the 
gers 166, the clamps 142 embrace the margin counterbalanced impressing - segment 6 has 
of the printed sheet, the supplemental fingers completed its second forward revolution, print 
166 are instantly opened, as fully heretofore ed the sheet upon its surface, and delivered its 
described, and the carrier 130 then drops, forward margin into the supplemental fingers 
through the retraction of the pin 156, to a 166, and has then returned (locked) to its 
horizontal line, releasing the printed sheet original position under the forward edge of 
from the supplemental fingers 166, and bear- the feed-table 51, ready to take the third and 
ing it upon its prongs or slats. At this mo- all succeeding sheets and print and deliver 
ment the carriage 32 and also the counterbal. them to the supplemental fingers 166, pre 
anced segment of a cylinder have returned to cisely as heretofore described. 
their proper position to allow a second blank 
To facilitate the piling of the sheets the pile 
sheet to be taken from the feed-table 51, which table 96 is caused to drop a certain distance 
sheet is received upon the impressing-segment as each printed sheet is placed upon it, the 
precisely as the first one was, and the impress- distance it shall drop being governed by the 
ing segment is unlocked, as already described, thickness of the sheet to be printed. The 
and its second forward movement commences. mechanical devices employed (in connection 
The sheet-carrier 130, attached to the forward with the pile-table) to effect this result have 
end of carriage 32, with the first printed sheet already been referred to, as has, also, in a 
lying upon it, (printed side up) is brought, great measure, their operation. They consist 
during the second forward movement of the of the ratchet-wheel 109, the pawl 111, the 
carriage and impressing-segment, immediately screw-shaft 10S, as well as the means by which 
over the sheet lifter and carrier 131, the strips (at the discretion of the operator) the speed of 
or prongs of which are narrower in width the latchet-wheel 109 is increased or decreased, 
than the interstices between the prongs of the so as to govern the fall of the pile-table 96. 
upper sheet-carrier, 130, so that the prongs of As a result of this arrangement, when the last 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
8 
. 
323,024 
IO 
25 
sheet has been piled (the table meanwhile the bell-crank lever 46, connecting-rod 13, up 
having dropped, at each impression, only the 
right lever 47, and cam 12 on crank-shaft 7, 
thickness of one sheet) it occupies the same 
the same constructed and operating substan 
relative position to the prongs of the sheet 
tially as hereinbefore specified. 
lifter and carrier 131 as did the first printed 
- 4. The combination, with the sheet-taking 
sheet. 
nippers 37, of the rod 38, the semi cog-wheel 
To ink the form more than once, or to dis 
42, the rack 43, the finger 44, the shaft 45, the 
tribute the ink before printing, or to suspend 
bell-crank lever 46, connection 13, upright 
the operation of the nippers, (in case of mis 
lever (with stud and roller)47, and cam 12, com 
feed upon the feed-table,) the throw - off 
bined and operating substantially as and for 
mechanism of the press is employed. This is 
the purpose specified. 
so constructed that either the hand or foot of 
5. The combination of the sheet-taking nip 
the operator may be made available to oper 
pers 37, of rod 3S, the semi cog-wheel 42, rack 
ate it. When either of these is employed, the 
43, sliding piece 2S, supplemental rack 11", 
toe-shaped lever 119 is elevated and intercepts 
L-shaped lever 127, and the fingel 8 on shaft 
a collar on the connecting-rod 13, thus pre 
7, constructed and operating substantially as 
venting it from operating bell-cranklever 46, 
specified. 
and, through it, the shaft 45 and finger 44, and 
6. The combination of the frame provided 
allowing the impressing-segment 6 to make its 
with the curved slot 58, roller 60, lever 61, 
forward movement without revolving, at the 
hinged support 59, frame-work 55, connecting 
discretion of the operator. The guard-ledge 
rod 57, and crankshaft 7, constructed and op 
30, in line with the supplemental rack 11", 
erating substantially as described, for the pur 
guarantees the locking of the counterbalanced 
pose of giving a period of rest to the carriage 
Segment of a cylinder on its return movement, 
32 at the termination of either reciprocating 
as it prevents the pin A from leaving its posi 
movement. 
tion in the projecting cap on carriage 32. 
7. The combination of the counterbalanced 
The dwell of the counterbalanced segment of 
segment of a cylinder, the throw-off shaft 113, 
a cylinder at each end of the carriage move 
operated by the hand-lever 115 or pedal 117, 
ment is effected by the slot of three varying 
the toe-shaped lever 119, lever 118, shaft 128, 
curves, and occurs when the impressing-seg 
link 129", lever 129, and connecting-rod 13, the 
ment is in position to receive a sheet from the 
same combined and operating substantially as 
feed-table 51, and also when the sheet-taking 
described. 
nippers 37 are transferring the printed sheet 
8. The alternating rollers 66, supported by 
to the supplemental fingers 166. The impress 
the double arms 67 on shaft 68, in combination 
ing-segment is counterbalanced because the 
with the E-shaped lever or trip 176", the spring 
periphery of its impressing part is of greater 
finger or pawl 177", oscillating lever 54, and 
radius than the other half, and it is desirable 
the center-passing lever (with spiral spring) 
that the part of smallest radius shall equal in 
69, combined and operating substantially as 
Weight, or counterbalance, the larger side of 
and for the purpose set forth. 
it; in other Words, to make the segment re 
9. The vibrating roller 73, frame-work 74, 
volve as if it were a perfect cylinder of equal 
right-handed screw 79, shaft 78, collars 178", 
density throughout. 
projections 179", spiral springs 180", blank 
Having specified the component parts of my 
wheel S0, connecting-rod 81", crank-pin 82, 
invention, I shall now designate what I claim 
elongated nut 84, pin 85, and grooved pulley 
as new and useful, and desire to secure by 
83, substantially as and for the purpose set 
Letters Patent- 
- 
1. The combination of a bed, 21, a carriage, 
10. The rider for the form-rollers 40, in com 
32, to which a reciprocating movement (with a 
bination with the spindle 184, spiral thread 
dwell at its termination) is imparted by a modi 
185, collars 1S6, and pins or projections 187 
fication of the crank movement, and a coun 
and 188, operating substantially as and for the 
terbalanced segment of a cylinder, 6, located 
purpose set forth. 
in said carriage, which is free to revolve on its 
11. The combination, with the sheet-carrier 
forward movement, but not on its return move 
130, of the prong 154, (with curved projection 
ment, being locked, substantially as shown, the 
155,) the pin 156, strip 157, and cam 15S, op 
same constructed and operating substantially 
erating a lever, 15S", for the purpose of rais 
as hereinbefore described. 
ing the forward end of the sheet-carrier 130, 
2. The combination, with the counterbal 
operating substantially as set forth. 
anced segment of a cylinder, 6, and carriage 
12. The sheet lifter and carrier 131, com 
32, of the supplemental rack 11", the L-shaped 
posed of a series of strips of wood or metal se 
lever 127, the finger S on shaft 7, the supple 
cured upon a bar, 143, and provided with the 
mental sliding piece 28", Fig. 10, and the pin 
Spring-stops 147, operating substantially as 
A, combined and operating substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
hereinbefore described. 
13. The combination, with the sheet lifter 
3. The combination, with the counterbal 
and carrier 131, of the hinged ways 132, rods 
anced segment of a cylinder, 6, and carriage 
133, levers 135, shaft 136, cam 138, lever 139, 
32, of the supplemental sliding piece 28, (see 
connecting-rod 140, and lever 141, for the pur 
Fig. 10,) the finger 44 attached to shaft 45, 
pose of giving a vertical movement to the sheet 
forth. 
- 
- - 
45 
.75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
5 
323,024 
9 
3O 
18. The combination of the ratchet-wheel 
109, shaft 108, pawl 111, rod 173, sliding box 
174, hooked lever 175, pin 176, bell-crankle 
ver 177, and thumb-screw 178, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
19. The combination, with the sheet-carrier 
130, of the sheet lifter and carrier 131, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
20. The combination, with the sheet lifter 
and carrier 131, and falling pile-board 96, of 35 
the sheet-releasing lever 169, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
21. The combination, with the supplemental 
rack 11", of the inclined block 123, the inclined 
block 122, rod 120, lever 118, and shaft 113, 4o. 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
22. The combination, with the supplemental 
rack 11, of the shaft 128, lever 129, link 129", 
lever 118, and throw-off shaft 113, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
MERWIN DAVIS. 
Witnesses: 
A. SIDNEY DOANE, 
WILLIAM W. H., HICKS, 
Io as and for the purpose set forth. 
lifter and carrier 131, operating substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
14. The combination, with the sheet lifter 
and carrier 131, of the hinged ways 132, ver 
tical rods 133, connecting-rods 144, curvedle 
vers 145, shaft 146, flanged half-pulley 150, 
strap 151, lever 152, and cam 153, for the pur 
pose of giving a horizontal movement to sheet 
lifter and carrier 131, operating substantially 
15. The combination, with sheet lifter and 
carrier 131, of the fingers 159, (held upon the 
rod 160,) the cam 161, lever 162, arm 164, rod 
165, connecting-rod 163, lever onrod 160", and 
I5 link 167, operating substantially as set forth. 
16. The combination of the sheet-releasing 
lever 169, the tongue 170 upon the shaft 146, 
the carrier 131, the lever 172, upright rod 171, 
and cam 161, operating substantially as and 
17. The combination of the vertical stand 
ards 97, the yokes 98, levers 103, rock-shaft 
104, and lever 106, with the threaded shaft 108, 
ratchet-wheel 109, and nut 110, substantially 
2O for the purpose described. 
25 as and for the purpose described. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323124.txt	(No Model,) 
A. DONNELEY. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 323,124, 
 
FURNACE FOR STEAM BOILERS 
Patented July 28, 1885. 
Z272. 
 
- - - - Y - r- - - - - - - - 
o, o o os o o 'o o o o off 
3. 
s 
Ho o o O / 6 o  o O O. o 'o 
f | 
c 
| 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 323,124. 
A. DONNELEY. 
FURNACE FOR STEAM BOILERS, 
2 Shee 
ts-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 28, 1885, 
7% 
  
Highly 
All 
A. 
TAT 
  
 
 
 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPH DONNELEY, OF HAMBURG, GERMANY. 
FURNA CE FOR STEAM - B O LERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 323,124, dated July 28, 1885. 
Application filed June 7, 1884. (No model.) Patented in Germany July 1, 1883, No. 25,313; in France July 24, 1883, No. 156,707; in 
Belgium August 8, 1883, No. 62,264, and March 28, 1884, No. 64,664; in England September 24, 1883, No. 4,559, and in Austria 
Hungary December 13, 1883, No.35,205 and No. 53,454. 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ADOLPH DONNELEY, of 
Hamburg, in the Empire of Germany, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Furnaces for Steam-Boilers, of which the fol 
lowing is a description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to furnaces for steam 
boilers which are provided, in lieu of ordi 
nary grate - bars, with basket-like grates, 
wherein a large and deep body of fuel is con 
tained, and through which fuel the atmos 
pheric air passes to the heating-surface of the 
boilers. 
My invention consists in the combination, 
With a steam-boiler, of a passage or conduit 
external to the boiler and communicating with 
the heating flues or surfaces thereof, and an 
upright basket extending across the passage 
or conduit and composed of two series of bars, 
and provided at the top with a feeding mouth 
or hopper external to the boiler. This basket 
is to be kept nearly or quite full of fuel by 
feeding from the top, and the fuel burns from 
the bottom. One or both Series of bars will 
preferably be tubular, and will communicate 
at top and bottom with channels or passages 
communicating with the water-space of the 
boiler, and the entrance of air between the 
bars of the front or outermost series may be 
controlled or regulated by two or more hori 
Zontal rows of pivoted bars, which may be ad 
justed to close more or less of the Spaces be 
tween the bars of the front series. These fea 
tures are also included in my invention. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of a horizontal boiler having 
my improved furnace applied thereto, both 
series of bars being tubular. Fig. 2 is a hori 
Zontal section thereof. Fig. 3 is a planthere 
of, the feeding-hopper being removed. Fig. 
4 is a sectional view similar to Fig. 2, but 
showing the back series of bars only as tubu 
lar or hollow. Fig. 5 is a sectional view simi 
lar to Fig. 2, but also showing the frontseries 
of tubular bars as having pivoted between 
them supplemental bars, which may be ad 
justed to more or less close the spaces between 
55 
65 
the bars of the front series. Fig. 6 is a front 
elevation of a part of the basket shown in 5O 
Fig. 5, and Fig. 7 is a horizontal section of a 
part of the front series of tubular bars. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
Sponding parts in all the figures. 
G designates a part of a boiler, (here shown 
as of the horizontal type,) and having a heat 
ing-flue, G'. At the front of the boiler is a 
passage or conduit, G, transversely acroSS 
which is arranged the fire-basket or fuel-re 
ceptacle. This basket or receptacle is sub 
stantially upright, and is formed by two se 
ries of bars, a b, which converge toward their 
lower ends, and at the top of the basket is a 
feeding mouth or hopper external to the boil 
er. As here shown, a hopper, T, is fitted to 
the top of the basket; but this hopper is re 
moved in Fig. 3 to more clearly illustrate the 
parts below. The bars of one or both series 
are tubular, or consist of tubes. As shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3, 5, 6, and 7, the bars C. b of 70 
both series are tubular; but in the example of 
the invention shown in Fig. 4 only the bars 
b of the back Series are tubular. 
The lower 
ends of the tubular bars are fixed in a trans 
verse channel or passage, H, from which a 75 
pipe, m, leads to the water-space of the boiler, 
and the upper ends of the tubular bars are 
fixed in one or more channels or collectors, p, 
which is or are connected by a pipe, p, with 
the water-space of the boiler, as best shown ill 
Fig. 3. The active circulation of water through 
the tubular bars not only heats the Water, but 
it also prevents the tubular bars from beingSOOn 
burned out by the fire. The basket or recep 
tacle is to be kept full or nearly full of fuel by 
replenishing it at the hopper or feeding-mouth 
at the top thereof, and the fuel burns from 
the bottom upward. The sides of the basket 
or receptacle are closed by the side walls of 
the passage or conduit G', in which are doors 90 
k, providing for the removal of ashes or clink 
ers to clean the basket or receptacle. The 
space between the bars at of the front series is 
ample for the entrance of air to support Com 
bustion, and the gases and hot products of 95 
combustion pass from the basket or receptacle 
85 
' 
" 
. 
323,124 
series of bars, and provided at the top with a 
feeding mouth or hopper external to the boil 
er, substantially as herein described. 
2. The combination, with a boiler and the 
passage or conduit leading thereto, of the up 
right basket extending across the passage or 
conduit and composed of two series of bars, 
some or all of which are tubular, a feeding 
mouth or hopper at the top of the basket, and 35 
channels or passages in which the upper and 
lower ends of the tubular bars are fixed, and 
which communicate with the water-space of 
the boiler, substantially as herein described. 
passage or conduit leading thereto, of an up 
right basket extending across the passage or 
conduit and composed of two series of bars, 
a feeding mouth or hopper at the top of the 
basket, and supplemental bars d, hinged at the 45 
front of the basket and adjustable to more or 
less close the space between the bars of the 
front series, substantially as herein described. 
ADOLPH DONNELEY. 
3. The combination, with a boiler and the 4o 
- 
Witnesses: 
F. ENGEL, 
F. CLAIRMONT. 
(as indicated by the arrows, Fig. 2) into the 
heating-flue G', and from thence through the 
other flues or tubes, or in contact with other 
heating-surfaces. 
In order to regulate the fire it may be desir 
able to provide means for closing more or less 
of the space between the bars a of the front 
series, and in Figs. 5, 6, and 7 I have shown 
short bars d, arranged in three rows, extend 
ing across the basket or receptacle, one above 
another, and hinged opposite the spaces be 
tween the bars a. These supplemental bars 
d may then be swung outward, like those of 
the lower row in Fig. 5, to admit air freely to 
the basket or receptacle; or they may be closed 
or shut against the front of the basket or re 
ceptacle, like the middle and upper rows of 
bars in Fig. 5, so as to close the spaces between 
the bars (t. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a boiler and a 
passage or conduit external thereto and com 
municating with the heating flues or surfaces 
thereof, of an upright basket extending across 
the passage or conduit and composed of two 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323224.txt	(No Model.) 
L. SMITH, 
CONWEYERS 
MOUTH PIECE FOR PNEUMATIC LIFTINGAPPARATUS FOR GRAIN 
No. 323,224. 
Patented July 28 
1885, 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
- (3) 
*>\ 
&?F 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LYMAN SMITH, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI. 
MOUTH-PIECE FOR PNEUMATIC LIFTING APPARATUS FOR GRAN-CONVEYERS, 
SPECIFICATICEN forming part of Letters Patent No. 323,224, dated July 28, 1885. 
Application filed January 17, 1885. (No model.) 
To cult, whom it mal/ concern: 
Be it known that I, LYMAN SMITH, of Kan 
Sas City, in the county of Jackson and State 
of Missouri, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Mouth - Pieces for grain the edge of the flange sinks beneath its 55 
Pneumatic or Lifting Apparatus for Convey. 
ing Grain; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
ion of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
tel's of reference marked thereon, which form 
part of this specification. 
This invention has for its object to expedite 
and facilitate the handling and transfer of 
grain and other material that is capable of 
transfer by pneumatic apparatus, patented to 
L. La Rue Smith, November 28, 1882, No. 
26S, 303, and No. 26S, 305, November 28, 1882, 
granted to me, and in the system as described 
in Said patents, and in patents granted to me 
Of a later date for improvements on method 
for transferring grain pneumatically and au 
tomatically, &c., but particularly as an in 
provement on Patent No. 289,315, dated No 
vember 27, 1883, in which is a mouth-piece 
for use at the end of a supply-pipe, and adapt 
ed to be conveniently moved about a car or 
Other receptacle to collect the grain therein 
contained. In this latter patent the mouth 
piece is supplied with air by tubes adapted 
for that purpose, whereby the air and grain, 
as it passes through the tube, forms a kind of 
semi-fluid as it passes to the receiver; but in 
this construction, as well as in all others 
known to me, the volume of outside air is too 
great, and much of the power of the suction 
engine is Wasted Sucking Said volume. The 
flow of air and grain in these old methods is 
also very irregular, and So much so that the 
Vacuum is very much diminished and fre 
quently destroyed. To overcome these de 
fects, and to utilize the full power of the suc 
tion-engine, and to increase the carrying ca 
pacity of the machine With the same power, 
and to otherwise perfect the operation of the 
apparatus above referred to, are the general 
objects of my invention. 
To this end my invention consists in form 
ing a mouth-piece preferably flat, or nearly 
So, which piece is provided with a flange all 
around its periphery in such manner that 
when the mouth-piece is thrown on top of the 
Surface and prevents the entrance of the ex 
ternal air; but at the same time the surface of 
the mouth-piece is in sufficiently close con 
tact with the grain as not to permit volumes 
of air to pass into it without carrying the 
grain with it. 
Many improvements have been made with 
a view of overcoming these difficulties, and 
they have shown and fully demonstrated the 
fact that a large quantity of air permeates the 
body of grain in bulk in cars, elevators, and 
Ships, and to such an extent that, when prop 
erly controlled, no outside air whatever is re 
quired in the manipulation of my pneumatic 
process. 
Heretofore quantities of air had to be sup 
plied to the mouth-piece to make the machine 
Work; but in Sucking or drawing in the air 
with the grain the volume of air was so great 
that much power of the machine was Wasted 
in pumping Said air. . 
My new mouth-piece is made to cover a large 
area of the surface of the grain, and the edges 
of the flange sink into the grain below its sur 
face, preventing the admission of outside air, so 
that air sufficient is found in the body of grain 
covered by the mouth-piece to form, with the 
grain, a Semi-fluid, in which condition it is 
taken up the tube and passes to the receiver 
without external air and, therefore, loss of 
power. This condition is maintained without 
fluctuation for the reason that much of the 
large space beneath the mouth-piece forms 
alone an air-chamber, which regulates the vac 
uum to an even pressure. This process con 
tinues until the vessel is entirely emptied. 
In order to illustrate a few of the many ways 
that my mouth-piece may be constructed, ref. 
erence is had to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 shows a car loaded with grain, the 
mouth-piece being in position for operation. 
Fig. 2 shows a side elevation and plan in per 
spective; Fig. 3, a cross-section taken on the 
line XX, Fig. 2. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are views 
75 
85 
gO 
95 
IOO 
O 
I5 
25 
3 5 
45 
2 
323,224 
w 
IO 
25 
35 
. 
of modified forms, as my invention is designed 
to cover all forms without departing from the 
spirit thereof. 
Like letters will indicate like parts in all the 
figures. 
A is the mouth-piece, and B the flange. C 
is the take-up tube, which carries the grain to 
the receiver. 
In many instances the suction-pressure is 
quite great and requires considerable resist 
ance to prevent a collapse of the mouth-piece. 
To avoid this I make the mouth-piece double, 
as shown in section at Fig. 3. It also occurs 
that as the grain is being sucked up into the 
tube when the space between the grain and the 
mouth-piece is large, the grainforms what 
I call a cone, which interferes with perfect 
Operation. To prevent this the inner plate, a, 
is bellied downward, which brings the mouth 
of the tube close to the grain, and thus the 
coning' of the grain is prevented. Again, 
if the mouth of the tube is too far from the 
grain more air in proportion is sucked in, 
which interferes with the proper suction of 
the grain. The upper plate, b, is slightly in 
clined upward, so that it sheds any grain rest 
ing upon it. Thus it will be seen that this 
form of mouth-piece performs three func 
tion-i. e., the strengthening of the mouth 
piece, the prevention of the coning the grain, 
and the shedding thereof. 
It will be observed that the form shown by 
Fig. 2 is provided with hinged flanges. The 
object of this is that generally when a car is 
being emptied the middle is emptied first, 
leaving the sides filled up, so that a flat mouth 
piece could not have equal bearing to the sur 
face of the grain, it being naturally at an in 
clination. To avoid this the hinged flange is 
thrown up, which opens a mouth for the grain 
to enter at the side of the mouth-piece, and in 
this way every particle is sucked up. The 
mouth - piece is also provided with small 
wheels or casters, so that it can be readily 
run around the floor of the car without trouble. 
It is obvious that any other means may be em 
ployed for this purpose. 
The construction of Figs. 4, 5, and 6 may 
be plainly understood, keeping always in mind 
that better work is done when the pipes and 
nozzles are Without curves. 
55 
65 
75 
SO 
The operation of this mouth-piece will be 
readily understood from what has already 
been stated without further description; but 
I may remark that my invention is designed 
to cover any means whereby the air is ex 
cluded from the surface of the grain while 
being sucked up to the receiver by canvas, 
india - rubber, sheeting, or in any manner 
whatever, as I claim, broadly, the process of 
sucking or drawing the grain up without out 
side air, and with the air actually permeated 
through the grain and embodied in the in 
terstices between the grain in bulk. 
I hereby give notice that a separate appli 
cation will be made covering the specific con 
struction of the mouth-piece. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The manner herein described of convey 
ing grain and sucking or drawing it into a re 
ceiver by first covering the surface of grain in 
bulk or a portion thereof, then forming a vac 
uum or suction under said covering, and then 
drawing the grain or other material there 
from. 
2. The manner herein described of lifting 
or transferring grain, of first covering the sur 
face thereof, excluding external air from under 
said covering, then imparting a sucking or 
drawing action to the grain beneath the cov 
ering, which gives to it the character, when 
mixed with air already mingled with the grain, 
of a semi-fluid, and then drawing it off by 
means of a Suction-machine. 
3. The method herein described of convey 
ing grain, which consists in first covering the 
surface of the grain, thereby excluding the air, 
forming an air-chamber above the mouth of the 
suction-pipe, and then imparting a sucking or 
drawing action to the grain beneath the cover. 
whereby said grain is drawn off as a semi-fluid. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of two 
witnesses. 
95 
LYMAN SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
O. E. DUFFY, 
J. F. WHITE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323324.txt	(No Model.) 
W. D., HAYNER & C. W. MANGUS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No, 323,324, 
 
CHECK ROW CORN PLANTER, 
Patented July 28, 1885, 
W11 WESSES 
c/ . 
w 
o-26-7- 
2-2. 
/ 
Photo-ithographor. Washington, d. C 
Z/2Z Z/7 aer 
C.Z().ZMezza, 26%/ 
fy WEATOR5, 
- A2/ @4.7% 
. 
eate&rAtiorneys. 
(No Model.) 
W. D., HAYNER & C. W. MANGUS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 323,324, 
CHECK ROW CORN PIANTER, 
Patented July 28, 1885, 
WITWESSES 
y 
AA/0. 
1.WWEWTOIS. 
ty to 5 
... 
1 
77teiz. Attorne if S 
Littrographer, Wa. 
shington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM. D. HAYNER AND CHARLES W. MANGUS, OF GILLIAM, MISSOURI. 
CHECK ROW C C R N PANTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 323,324, dated July 28, 1885. 
Application filed April 15, 1885. (No model. 
5 
O 
2 5 
45 
55 
65 
75 
SO 
Figs. 4 and 5 are detail views. 
To (77 it? of, it of coice.77. 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM ID. HAYNER 
and CHARLES. W. NIANG US, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Gillian, in the 
county of Saline and State of Missouri, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Check-Row Corn-Planters, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
check-row corn-planters; and it consists in the 
peculiar construction and combination of de 
vices that will be more fully set forth here 
inafter, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a top plan view of a corn-planter embodying 
our invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudi 
nal sectional view of the same, taken on the 
line tea of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a detailed verti 
cal sectional view taken on the line if y of Fig. 
1. 
A represents the main frame, which con 
sists of the side beams, B, and the rear trans 
verse connecting-beam, C. The axle D is of 
wood, and is preferably of about the same di 
ameter as the beams of the frame, and is rig 
idly Secured in the frame, as shown. The ends 
of the axle are reduced to form spindles, on 
which are mounted the wheels E. F. From 
the center of the axle projects forwardly a 
beam, G. 
H represents a frame, to which are secured 
furrow openers or runners I, having side ex 
tending wings K, for preventing the furrow 
openers from running too deeply in the ground. 
Conveyer-tubes L connect the ends of the rear 
beam of the frame H to the furrow-openers. 
The side beams of the frame H extend rear 
Wardly, and in the rear ends of these side 
beams are cut vertical slots M. A coupling 
rod, N, passes through the front ends of the 
beams B and G and through the slots M, and 
hinges the frame H to the frame A. The slots 
M. permit the frame H to move vertically in 
dependent of the main frame. 
O represents the tongue that is bolted to 
the center of the hinged frame, in line with 
the beam G. A groove, P, is made in the up 
per side of the rear beam of the hinged frame, 
and in this groove works the reciprocating 
seed-slide R. This slide has openings Snear 
its ends that, when the slide is at one limit of 
its movement, register with openings in the 
rear beam of the hinged frame that communi 
cate with the upper ends of the seed-convey 
ers L. 
T represents hoppers that are secured on 
the ends of the rear beam of the hinged frame, 
and these hopper's have openings U in their 
bottons. 
Slides W are placed in the bottoms of the 
hoppers, and have openings W, that commu 
nicate with the openings U when the slides are 
pushed out, and when the said slides are drawn 
in they cut of the openings U, and can thus 
permit seeds being fed from either or both of 
the hoppers at will. In order to move the 
slides, we employ hand-levers X, which are 
fulcrumed to the rear beam of the hinged 
flanne and connected to the Slides, as shown. 
On the front end of the beam G is fulcruined 
a bent lever, Y, that is connected to the rear 
end of the tongue by a chain, as shown. By 
means of this lever the hinged frame may be 
raised, so as to bring the furrow-opene's out 
of contact with the ground when the machine 
is being drawn along and not in operation. 
In the inner faces of the wheels E and F are 
made a series of openings, a, to receive the 
markers b, two of which are applied to each 
wheel and diametrically opposite to each other. 
To the hub of the wheel E is fixed a gear 
wheel, c, that meshes with a gear-wheel, d, ar 
ranged at rightangles to it and journaled upon 
a spindle, d, that projects from the front side 
of the axle. 
e represents a hand-lever that is fulcrumed 
at its lower end to the axle, and that engages 
with a rack, f, secured to the axle, by means 
of which rack the lever may be secured at any 
desired point. One end of a shaft, g, is ioose 
ly journaled in the hand-lever e, and passes 
through a journal-block, h, that is suspended 
on the coupling-rod, and the front end of this 
shaft has a finger, i, that, as the shaft revolves, 
strikes against a depending lug on the seed 
slide and operates the slide. 
To the inner end of the shaft g is fixed a pin 
ion, k, that meshes with the gear-wheeld and 
imparts motion to the shaft. By means of the 
hand-lever, to which one end of the shaft is 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
323,324. 
journaled, the pinion may be caused to disen 
gage from the gear-wheel d when it is desired 
to cease planting the corn. 
Centrally to the under side of the main 
frame is secured a depending bent frame, l, 
to the lower portion of which are swiveled 
casters m, having rollers n, that bear upon the 
ground and steady the motion of the main 
frame and keep it horizontal as the machine 
is being drawn along. 
A marker, O, is pivoted centrally to the rear 
side of the main frame, and a lever, p, is pro 
vided and attached to the marker, by means 
of which lever the driver, seated in the seat r, 
Secured to the main frame, can throw or swing 
the marker to either side of the machine. 
In order to cause the corn that is fed into the 
conveyer-tubes by the seed-slide to fall into the 
groundin a lump and avoid scattering the seeds, 
we close the lower ends of the conveyer-tubes 
by pivoted slides s, controlled by vertical rods 
t that are journaled alongside the tubes and 
have cranks it at their upper ends. These 
cranks are connected with the seed-slide, and 
as the slide moves back and forth the pivoted 
slides alternately open and close the lower 
ends of the tubes and drop the seeds that have 
been deposited upon them by the seed-slide 
into the ground together, as will be very readily 
understood. The finger i on the shaft? moves 
the feed-slide in one direction, and the slide 
is retracted by a coiled spring, v. 
The operation of our invention is as follows: 
The markers in the wheels are arranged so as 
to make a depression in the side of the hills 
as the machine is being drawn along, and the 
machine plants two hills at a time, which are 
exactly in line with each uther. When the 
end of the rows is reached, the planting mech 
ism is thrown out of gear, and the machine 
turned around and placed with the seed-tubes 
exactly in line with the last hills of the rows 
just planted. A hand-lever, w, is then full 
crumed on a stud, ac, on the rear beam of the 
hinged frame, and the power end of the lever 
inserted into a bail, y, secured on the seed 
slide, and the seed-slide is then worked by 
hand and caused to plant the first two hills. 
The instant the first two hills are planted the 
hand-lever is removed and the planting mech 
anism thrown in gear. Pointers 2 are secured 
to the axles, and these pointers will indicate 
the openings in the inner sides of the wheels 
that will align with the hills planted. If the 
markers applied to the wheels are not in these 
openings they must be placed in them, and 
then the operation of planting will proceed as 
before. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim 
1. The combination of the main frame, the 
driving and supporting wheels, gear-wheels c 
and d, fulcrumed lever e, shaft g, having one 
end journaled in lever e, and a finger, i, at the 
opposite end, pinion k, fixed to shaft g and 
meshing with gear d, and the frame H, hinged 
to the main frame and carrying the seed-tubes, 
furrow-openers, seed-hoppers and seed-slide, 
the latter operated by the finger i, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a check-row corn-planter, the driving 
and supporting wheels having the openings in 
their rims, markers b adapted to be inserted 
in the openings, and the pointers 2 for indi 
cating the openings that will align with the 
hills, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the main frame hav 
ing the supporting-wheels, the frame H, hinged 
thereto, and having the furrow-openers, hop 
pers, and seed-slide, and the framel, depending 
from and secured to the main frame and having 
the rollersn. for maintaining the main frame in a 
horizontal position, substantially as described. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM D. HAYNER. 
CHARLES W. MANGUS. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. W. McKINNEY, 
JAMES M. POWELL. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
So 
85 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323424.txt	(No Model.) 
P. H. JACKSON. 
METHOD OF OUTTING AND EMPLOYING WOODEN BEAMS AND GIRDERS, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1885. 
No. 323,424, 
 
Av. 5. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER. H. JACK SON, OF SA 
N FRANCIS CO, CA LIF OR NIA. 
METHOD OF CUTTING AND EMPLOYING WOODEN BEAMS AND GIRDERS, 
SFPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 323,424, dated August 4, 1885. 
Application filed December 30, 1884. 
No model.) 
--- 
5 
O 
25 
35 
To ?till whon, if naily concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER. H. JACKSON, of 
San Francisco, State of California, have in 
vented an Improved Method of Cutting and 
Employing Wooden Beams and Girders, by 
which an increased number of pieces can be 
obtained from the log; and I do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
My invention relates to timber beams, with 
reference to the property in the various kinds 
of Wood of greater resistance to compression 
than tension, together with the manner in 
which I employ them to sustain loads, the form 
given them admitting of a greater number of 
beams or girders being cut or sawed from a log 
or large piece of timber than in the common 
manner of doing, the said beam being still of 
equal strength to resist transverse strain as in 
the other, as will be more fully explained by 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a cross-section of a log of wood 
marked to be cut in this improved manner, 
showing how six beams or girders with taper 
ing sides may be sawed. Fig. 2 also repre 
sents a cross-section of the same size log as 
Fig. 1, marked to be cut in the present man 
ner of doing, from which but four beams or 
girders can be sawed. Fig. 3 is a cross-section 
of a large stick of timber marked to be cut in 
this improved nuanner into twelve beams or 
girders with tapering sides. Fig. 4 is a cross 
section of the same size stick of timber as in 
Fig. 3, marked to be cut in the present man 
ner of doing, from which but eight beams or 
girders can be sawed of this size. Fig. 5 is a 
cross-section of one of these improved cut 
wooden beams or girders, taken from either 
Figs. I or 3, with tapering sides, and em 
ployed in the manner designed, the greatest 
width being across the top, to resist compres 
sion, in which most, if not all, timber has this 
property of l'esistance in the least, and the ma 
terial in that part is iricreased to make up this 
deficiency, the dotted line ab representing the 
neutral axis. Fig. 6 is a cross-section of a 
beam or girder taken from either Fig. 2 or 4, 
cut rectangular in the ordinary manner of do 
ing, the material outside of the dotted limes 
being so much useless material in resisting 
transverse strain, as will be hereinafter ex 
 
plained. Fig. 7 is a longitudinal section of a 
bean or girder of any material, W in all the 
figures representing the weight or load, which 
may be central or distributed. The arrows 
pointing toward each other on the top surface 
indicate that part is being compressed by the 
load, and the arrows at the bottom pointing 
in opposite directions indicate that part is in 
a state of tension or separation of the parts, 
the parts being compressed and extended the 
greater as the distance is increased in either 
direction from the neutral axis (, b. Fig. S is 
a cross-section of a cast-iron beam or girder 
with the bottom and top parts duly balanced 
in metal quantities in accord with the capacity 
of the material to resist compression and ten 
sion. Cast-iron, being weak in its resistance 
to separation, should have about six and a half 
times more material in the bottom than the 
top part to equilibrate the two forces. Fig. 
9 is a cross-section of a wrought-iron beam or 
girder with the top and bottom parts duly bal 
anced in metal quantities. Wrought-iron, be 
ing the weakest in resisting compression, to 
equilibrate the two forces, should have about 
thirty-five per cent, more material in the top, 
subject to compression, than in the bottom, sub 
jected to tension or separation of the particles. 
In the treatise on the resistance of materials 
by De Volson Wood the resistance to compres 
sion and tension per Square inch of different 
timber is given as follows: 
Ash, ordinary- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
Ash, very dry. . . . . . . . . . . . - - - - - - - - - 
Beech, ordinary ------------------. 
Beech, very dry. ---- 
Cedar - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
Fir, New England 
Fir, Riga. ---...- 
Oak, English 
sur. 
sil-3 is - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
coppression. 
Resists Resists tension or 
S,683 lbs. 
9,363 
7,733 
9,363 
5,674 : 
5,748 
6,586 '' 
35 & 
9,509 '' 
separation. 
17,207 lbs. 
17,207 
15,784 
17,850 '' 
11,400 
11,549 '' 
12,857 '' 
17,300  
9O 
95 
IO 
In the work entitled Mechanic's Text 
Book, by Thomas Kelt, is as follows: 
White pine 
Relpine.--- 
Yellow pine 
- - - 
compression. 
Resists 
2,028 lbs. 
5,375 '' 
5,445 ' ' 
Resists tension or 
separatio. 
12,34ts lbs. 
11,800 '' 
11,835 '' 
Taken from the 'California Architect and 
Building News, December, 1884, issue: 
compression. 
Resists 
5,998 lbs. 
6,000 '' 
Resists tension or 
separation. 
12,800 lbs. 
7,000 '' 
Redwood - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
Spruce. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
It will be seen by the table of reference that 
fir, oak, white, red, and yellow pine, redwood, 
2 
323,424 
Having thus described my invention, what 
and spruce, from which beams and girders are 
usually made, have about twice the capacity I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
to resist separation to that of compression, Patent, is- 
, 
and these two forces being equal when the A wooden beam or girder of suitable depth 20 
5 leam or girder is employed, the material, to be to serve as such, and of a greater width at the 
used economically, should have about twice the top than at the bottom, proportioned to the 
amount of material in the top part, subjected greater capacity of the wood to resist tensile 
to compression, to that of the lower part, sub- than compressive strains, as set forth. 
jected to tension. Therefore wooden beams or 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand. 
Io girders sawed in the tapering shape shown 
and described, and employed with the wide 
part at the top, as in my device, have equal 
strength to the rectangular beams or girders, 
and from one-third to one-half more pieces can 
I5 be obtained from a large piece of timber by 
the former than by the latter. 
JAMES B. LANE, 
HENRY HAUSTEIN. 
PETER. H. JACKSON. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323524.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 323,524, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. PAULUS, 
CAP FOR EXPLODING DYNAMITE, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1885. 
4, , 
-4, a 
63. 
 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
J. PAULUS, 
CAP FOR EXPLODING DYNAMITE. 
s 
2 sheets-Sheet 2 
 
N. PETES, etc. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB PAULUS, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
CAP FOR EXPLO DNG DYNAM TE. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 323,524, dated August 4, 1885. 
Application filed May 7, 1885, (No model.) 
The figures in the accompanying drawings 55 
My invention relates to improvements in the object before mentioned. 
Figure 1 represents a cap the bottom of 6o 
2O purpose which it is desired to attain. 
The accompanying drawings show in a receive the plate or cover. Figs. 5, 6, and 7 75 
would produce the desired effect, and would 
Be it known that I, JACOB PAULUS, of the be of special importance in cases where fluid 
To all, whom it may concern: 
city of Berlin, in the Kingdom of Prussia and explosives are employed. 
German Empire, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Caps or Appara- represent the different constructions of the 
tus for Exploding Dynamite, of which the fol. cap according to the degree of the force of 
lowing is a specification. 
explosion required for the purpose and with 
the manufacture of blasting-caps for explod- 
Io ing dynamite, nitro-benzole, gin-cotton, and which is so weakened that the same only acts 
other blasting compounds, the object of which as a protective cover for the charge. Fig. 2 
said improvements is to insure the explosion shows a cap of which the corner, formed by 
and increase the explosive force of such said the bottom and the side walls, is beveled off 
blasting-caps whether they are employed for to such an extent that only thin annular con- 65 
I5 exploding dynamite, nitro benzole, gun-cot-I nection between bottom and side wall re 
ton, or for other purposes. 
mains. Fig. 3 shows the weakened parts of 
By means of my improvements I am ena. the bottom, Which are produced by cuts or 
bled to obtain the above-mentioned results in incisions in the inner or Outer surface of the 
a higher or lesser degree, according to the said bottom. In Fig. 4 the bottom is either 7o 
totally or to the greater part punched out or 
My improvements apply equally to ordina- removed, thus only leaving a narrow rim or 
ry blasting-caps and to such provided with an such parts as were left by the respective cut 
ting, which remaining parts are intended to 
inner capsule. 
25 number of representations those improve. show a cap perfectly bottomless, Fig. 5 show 
ments which I desire to protect by Letters ing the blank space, whereas Figs. 6 and 7 
Patent. The improvements refer as much to show the same closed up by an inserted cap or 
the construction of the caps as to the absolute covered with a suitable cover. Figs. 8, 9, 10, 
perfection of the charge and the method of and 11 represent caps with an outer and an 8o 
3o filling the same into the cap, as the charge is inner capsule, the latter of which is provid 
only then able to fulfill its purpose surely and ed with a round or otherwise formed opening 
with the highest effect when the explosive or aperture in the bottom, of appropriate size, 
mass is in a perfectly dry condition and when whereby the inner cap is arranged either a 
it completely fills out the hollow space of the few millimeters above the bottom of the outer 85 
35 double cap as a compact body which cannot cap or shell or closely resting upon the same, 
be affected by rapid or violent motion or the hollow space between being completely 
filled out with hard-pressed dry explosive 
shocks to which the caps may be subjected. 
Besides insuring the absolute safety of the matter, which thus forms a hard, solid body. 
charge and attaining the highest effect at the Fig. 12 is a cap without bottom, as shown in 9c. 
4o explosion of the cap, it is the object of all Fig. 4, but surrounded by a mantle or shell. 
these improvements to direct the force of the Figs. 13 and 14 show caps with a capsule and 
explosion downward, or, in other words, in the an outer mantle or shell for the purpose of 
direction of the longitudinal axis of the explo- strengthening the walls of the said caps. Figs. 
sive mass which the said cap is intended to ex- 15, 16, and 17 show caps, with or without bot- 95 
45 plode. It is, however, possible, if the pur- tom, with walls of considerable thickness, 
pose requires it, to divide the exploding-power that the nipping in of the upper uncharged 
in such manner that the same is able to act portion of the walls is no longer admissible, 
with great effect in a lateral direction. A few and so that (as shown by Figs. 13 and 14) for 
small holes or perforations of round, angular, the reception of the quick-match the employ- too 
Sc or other appropriate form in the side walls ment of a thin tube of soft metal, which may 
of the cap within the limits of the charge either be pressed or screwed into the cap or 
323,524 
shell, is required; or the upper part of the cap 
may be provided with a screw-thread for the 
reception of the quick-match. Figs. 18 and 
19 are caps with walls of considerable thick 
ness, the upper part, a, of which is provided 
with screw - threads for the quick - match, 
whereas the lower part, 3, of the wall of the 
cap either serves direct for the reception of 
the explosive matter, Fig. 18, or receives an 
inner capsule, Fig. 19, which latter is provid 
ed with a vent and is placed into the cap in 
inverted position-i. e., with the open part 
downward. The smaller borings 6, which serve 
as igniting canals or channels, should, before 
inserting the quick-match, be filled up with 
loose gunpowder or some other suitable ex 
plosive or combustible matter of a secondar 
y 
nature, whereby the effect of the shot will be 
absolutely secured. 
In order to protect the outer or inner walls 
of the cap or caps of the shell or shells from 
the influence of acids, the same can be var 
nished with a suitable varnish or other equiv 
alent, or be provided with a suitable coating 
of non-oxidizing metal or other matter by 
means of electricity or galvanic action, or in 
Other suitable manner. 
It is evident that in order to attain the ob 
ject before described, and without departing 
O 
25 
from the principle of my invention, I can, 
from the various constructions shown, apply 
and carry out a further number of combina 
tions of the parts of the said blasting-caps. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
1. A blasting - cap adapted for downward 
firing, having its bottom weakened, substan 
tially as set forth, in combination with a me 
tallic cylindrical re-enforcing mantle or shell 
open at both ends, which is located at the 
lower end of the cap, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. A blasting - cap which contains the ex 
plosive, having its bottom integral with the 
body thereof, said bottom being weakened by 
being partially cut away, substantially as set 
forth, whereby a downward explosion is at 
tained. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
35 
45 
JACOB PAULUS. 
Witnesses: 
ANTHONY STEFFER, 
B. ROI. 
-...-, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323624.txt	(No Model.) A, BARA & E. DEsJARDINS-LIEUX. 
LAMP SHADE, 
No, 323,624, 
| 
Patented Aug. 4, 1885. 
M. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTE BARA AND ERNESTE DES.JARDINS-LIEUX, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
LA VIP=SHADE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 323, 624, dated August 4, 1885. 
Application filed December 26, 1884. (No model.) Patented in France July 16, 1883, No. 156,553; in Belgium February 18, 1884, No. 
64, 198, and in Germany February 19, 1884, No. 30,108. 
vice. 
 
45 
50 
This shade is preferably made of two coni 
cal frusta united together at their smaller 
ends. 
Lf desired, the shade can be permanently 
secured to the tapered part D. 
The shade being mounted on the chimney 
by means of clasps B, the operation of the de 
vice can be easily understood. The spherico 
tapered piece D, upon which the reflector or 
shade is fixed, being independent of and con 
centric to the part A, can be readilymoved 
upon the chimney so as to throw the light in 
any desired direction. 
- It is obvious that, as the conical part Dis 
movable on the periphery of the spherical 
Zone A concentric with the axis of this Zone, 
the shade E can be adjusted at any desired 
angle within the limit of the breadth of this 
zone; hence the light can be reflected at dif. 
ferent angles. 
Having now described our invention, we 
claim 
1. The combination of a spherical Zone, A, 
clasping-springs secured inside thereof, and 
an adjustable holder for a lamp-shade, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination of the spherical zone A, 
To (vill tvhom, t 7ncy ?oncern. 
Beit known that we, AUGUSTE BARA and 
ERNIESTE DESJARDINs-LIEUX, citizens of the 
Republic of France, residing at Paris, in said 
Republic, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Lamp-Shade Adjusters, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had therin to the accompanying 
dra Wings. 
Figure 1 is a central cross-section on line & 
 of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the de 
The object of our invention is to construct 
lamp-shades and reflectors so that they can be 
easily moved on their holders and thus caused 
fo reffect the light in any direction. This is 
done by a System of Superposed and concen 
tlic Spherical surfaces and springs, all as wiil 
now be more fully described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Ais aspheri 
cal Zone of any suitable material. The inter 
nal face of this zone is provided with clasps 
or claws B, which may be riveted to it or up 
on it, or otherwise held in place. In the an 
nexed drawingstheyareshownfixedon springs 
C, which are attached on the inside of the 
Zone A. It isthis first piece, A, thatis mounted 
on the chimney. Upon the external periphery ||springs B C, the tapered shade - support D, 65 
of the Zone A is placed another part, D, which 
is the shape of a conical frustum, and concen 
tric to the part A., so that it may be revolved 
freely uponit. This part D may be composed 
of one or Several pieces, as may be desired. 
The accompanying drawings show the part D 
as made of two pieces joined together at their 
edges. It is on the superior tapered part that 
the shade E or reflectoris placed. 
ROBT. M. HOOPER, 
GUSTAVEA. DITTMAR. 
Intestimony whereofwe affix our signatures 
adjustable on said zone, as described. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
AUGUSTE BARA. 
ERNESTE DES, JARDINS-LIEUX. 
Witnesses: 
IO) 
5 
2 5 
3 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323726.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 323,726, 
F. PAYNE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
THRASHER AND SEPARATOR, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1885. 
Zzz 2 
ar 
7. 
S-Z 
2s 
(Z 
{g 
Z. 
f 
a 
s 
m 
e p 
SES. 
Z2/ 
Z 1. 
p 
Z/ 
w 4. 
WITNESSES: 
2-6-6244/, 
%-4 INVENTOR 
BY 
27. 
 
PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington.D.C. 
ATTORNEY 
(N0 Model.) 
F, PAYNE 
THRASHER AND SEPARATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 323,726, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1885. 
 
 
 
 
  
2IN 
- Ole 
C ).) 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
w 
7 
2. yNTOR 
7a-6 3-ove. 
BY 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK PAYNE, OF EAST PORTLAND, OREGON. 
THRASHER AND SEPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 323,726, dated August 4, 1885. 
Application filed October 16, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To al., whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK PAYNE, of East 
Portland, in the county of Multnomah and 
State of Oregon, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Thrashers and 
Separators; and Idohereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form apart of this speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in thrashing-machines and grain-sepa 
rators; and it has for its object to provide a 
I5 more perfect and rapid separator for the sev 
eral seeds than has heretofore been produced; 
and to this end it consists in certain improve 
ments in the general construction and arrange 
ments and the combination of the parts of 
the machine, as hereinafter particularly de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a side, elevation of my improved 
machine entire. Fig. 2 represents alongitudi 
nal vertical sectional view of the same. Fig. 
3 represents a detached elevation of the main 
driving mechanism of the machine. Fig. 4 
represents a sectional view of a portion of my 
carrier. Fig. 5 represents a sectional view of 
a portion of the separator; and Fig. 6, a de 
tached Sectional view of the separator, show 
ing the peculiar construction of the same. 
The letter Aindicates the frame of the sepa 
rator, which supports the various working 
parts of the machine. 
At one end, at the upper part of the ma 
chine, is located a thrashing-cylinder, B, which 
is mounted on a shaft, C, journaled in suit 
able bearings in the frame or casing of the 
machine. The said shaft is provided with a 
pulley, D, and receives motion by a belt, E, 
passing from a pulley, F, on the main driving 
shaft G of the machine. The said shaft is 
journaled in bearings H at the front of the 
45 machine, and receives its motion from any 
suitable motive power. 
The letter I indicates an inclined slotted 
grate extending from the lower part of the 
thrashing-casing to the front end of the straw 
5O carrier L. The said carrier is in the form of 
a hollow cylinder having a flaring rear end, 
35 
and is constructed of longitudinal slats sup 
ported by metallic straps M on the inside 
and the flanged hoops N on the outside. The 
hoops N of said carrier rest upon the rollers 55 
R, which are mounted on the shafts N', one of 
the shafts receiving rotary movement through 
the medium of the cone friction-gearing S, 
which receives its motion as more fully here 
inafter described. The said carrier is ar- 6o 
ranged to rotate in a semi-cylindrical trough, 
T, and is provided on its outside with a curved 
propeller-blade, which carries the grain pass 
ring through the spaces between the slats in the 
carrier toward the front of said trough, where 65 
it is discharged upon the inclined partition U, 
leading from the thrashing-casing at a point 
below the inclined grate to the forward end of 
the Separator W. The Said separator consists 
of two concentric sheet-metal cylinders, one 7o 
within the other, each being provided with 
oblong perforations, which may be made to 
register with each other, so as to be adjusted 
to the size of the grain to be separated, such 
adjustment being effected by means of the set 
screw W, which permits the cylinders to be 
adjusted longitudinally with respect to each 
other. 
The separator has on its outside the flanged 
hoops X, which rest upon the rollers Y, mount- 8o 
ed upon the shafts Z. One of said shafts re 
ceives a rotary motion through the medium of 
the cone friction-gearing A', which receives 
its motion from a pulley, B, driven by the 
belt B. The said separator is arranged to ro- 85 
tate in a trough, C, and on the periphery of 
the said carrier are secured the right, and left 
screw-blades, which propel the refuse grain 
passing through the openings in the carrier 
shells to the center of the trough C, where go 
it is discharged. The rear end of the carrier 
is provided with a contracted neck, d, and 
perforated head D', for the purpose herein 
after explained. 
shaft, F, journaled in suitable bearings, and 
having a pulley at one end, which receives its 
notion from the common belt before men 
tioned. From the lower edge of the fan-casing 
extends a pivoted blast-regulator into the for- Io 
Ward end of the separator, by means of which 
a winnowing-blast of varying force or quan 
The letter E indicates a fan mounted on a 95 
75 
 
323,726 
45 
55 
65 
1. The combination of the revolving carrier 
constructed of longitudinal slats, internal me 
tallic bands, and external flanged hoops, a Se 
lies of rollers mounted upon longitudinal 
shafts, and the cone friction-gearing, substan 
tially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the thrashing 
mechanism, the inclined grate, and the straw 
carrier and its external propeller-screw and 
trough, of the rotating separator located below. 
the straw-carrier, and the inclined partition 
whereby the grain is directed into the Sepa 
rator, substantially as specified. 
3. In a thrashing-machine, the combination, 
with the thrashing-cylinder, inclined grate, 
trough T, and rotating thrashing-cylinder L, 
provided with an external propelling-screw, 
of the inclined plane U, separating-receptacle 
V, and the gearing whereby the whole is op 
erated, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination, with the blast-fan and 
the tubular separating-receptacle V, composed 
of an inner and an outer perforated shell adjust 
able upon each other to regulate the size of 
the escape-openings, of the perforated head ID', 
for the escape of the unthrashed heads of 
grain, Substantially as specified. 
5. The combination, with the rotating sepa 
rating-receptacle V, provided on its exterior 
with right and left screw-blades, perforated 
head D', and the trough C below said recep 
tacle, of the rotating straw-conveyer L, pro 
vided on its exterior with a propeller-screw, 
the trough T below said conveyer, inclined 
plane U, and the gearing whereby the whole 
is operated, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
ERANK PAYNIE. 
Witnesses: 
T. J. MATLOCK, 
H. D. MICGUIRE. 
75 
SO 
tity may be directed into and through the sepa 
lator. 
The letter G' indicates an inclined trough 
located just below the forward end of the sepa 
5 rator, into which the separator-grainfalls, and 
through which it is conducted to the sacks or 
other receptacles. The common belt passes 
around a driving-pulley, H', mounted on the 
driving-shaft, and around the pulleys of the 
IO straw-carrier and separator, respectively, to 
give motion to the same. 
The letter K indicates an elevator located 
at one side of the machine, and L a stacker 
located at the rear of the machine. These may 
I5 be of the usual construction and operated by 
any suitable gearing. 
The operation of my improved machine is as 
follows: The material to be thrashed is fed into 
the machine, and passes under the thrashing 
2O cylinder, where the grain is beaten out, and is 
carried with the straw over the inclined grate, 
the greater portion of the grain falling through 
the grate upon the inclined partition, by which 
it is distributed to the separator. The straw, 
25 with portions of unseparated grain, then passes 
into the straw-carrier, wherein the grain is 
separated from the straw, the grain falling 
through between the slats into the trough be 
low, from which it is carried by the screw and 
3O (lischarged, as indicated by the arrows, onto 
the inclined partition, and discharged into the 
separating-receptacle Y. The worthless grain 
is separated and passes out into the trough be 
low, to be discharged by the propeller-blades, 
35 while the valuable grain is discharged into the 
inclined trough, to be delivered into the sacks 
or other receptacle at the end of the separator 
next to or in front of the fan. The tailings or 
imperfectly-thrashed heads of grain are blown 
4o over neck d into the perforated head D', and 
thence fall onto the elevator K, which conveys 
them back to the thrashing-cylinder B. 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
as new is 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323826.txt	(No Model.) 
 
W. J. S. OSBORN & J. MADDEN, 
SHAFT INER, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1885. 
H 
. 
722(22esses. 
c57. 62-e-2426, 
{(6) 6 - 
i? 
Z22-2-eeze/s. 
Waltz, a? Cader?y 
Ay 4a a?dly 
2/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER J. S. OSBORN AND JAMES MADDEN, OF SHELBY, OHIO. 
SHAFT. L. N.E.R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 323,826, dated August 4, 1885. 
Application filed July 25, 1884. (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WALTER J. S. Os 
BORN and JAMES MADDEN, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Shelby, in the county 
of Richland and State of Ohio, have invented 
Certain new and useful Improvements in De 
vices for Aligning and Truing Shafts, of which 
the following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
The invention relates to a device for align 
ing and truling shafts; and the novelty con 
sists in the construction, arrangement, and 
adaptation of parts, as will be more fully here 
inafter set forth, and specifically pointed out 
in the claims. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, which form a part of this 
Specification, and in which 
Figure l is a side elevation of the device in 
one of its operative positions. Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation in another position, and Fig. 3 a. 
perspective detail. 
Referring to the drawings, a designates the 
body of the device. It comprises a bar hav 
ing parallel sides and of a neat finish. 
B designates a spirit-level, which slides 
loosely on the body a, and which may be 
leadily put in place or removed at will. The 
Socket in the level and the body a are so con 
structed as to make a snug joint and allow no 
play except in a direct line. 
C designates a removable head having sock 
ets ab, arranged at right angles to each other, 
and adapted to receive one end of the body. 
At the junction of these sockets a b a set 
Screw, c, is located, and it serves to lock the 
head and body together, as the body may be 
engaged with either socket. The head Chas 
fixed jaws, the junction of whose sides d is on 
a line with the upper edge of the socket a', 
and consequently the line of upper edge of 
socket a will intersect the center of a shaft 
when said shaft is engaged by those jaws. 
Said edges d are equally inclined to the line 
of the upper edge of socket a, the combined 
deviation being preferably about sixty de 
grees, and the jaws thus formed are adapted 
to embrace the shaft, and to bring its center 
on a line with said upper edge of socket a', 
E designates a sliding marker or pointer. 
F designates a straightedge forming a square 
The mechanical features of the device will 
It has a socket, h, which receives snugly the 
body a, and is provided with an ordinary set 
screw, by which it may be fixed or locked to 
said body at any desired point. It has two 55 
points, c and g, arranged at right angles to 
each other, and both arranged at right angles 
to the body, One of these points extending 
vertically and the other horizontally allows a 
point to be compared with a line in different o 
positions of the device. 
with the body. 
be understood from the foregoing description, 65 
taken in connection with the drawings. 
In bringing the revolving shafts of mills and 
manufactories to a true bearing, horizontal or 
vertical, this device has many advantages. 
We will briefly indicate some of its uses. We 7o 
will imagine that a true horizontalline has been 
obtained at a proper distance from the posi 
tion which the shaft is to occupy. By this 
device the shaft may be leveled to agree with 
that imaginary line, by causing the horizon 
tal point g to traverse said line, the device 
exactly locating the center of the shaft, What 
ever its diameter. Now, the shaft thus lev 
eled with the true line may not be parallel 
therewith; hence by changing the head to the 8O 
position shown in Fig. 2, and keeping the 
shaft embraced by the jaws and the pointer e 
upon the line, we can detect and correct any 
deviation in that direction. To true a verti 
cal shaft after a horizontal shaft has been prop 
erly aligned, we drop two plumb-lines, and by 
keeping the pointerg on one of the lines and 
the shaft engaged with the inclines d, the po 
sition of the shaft may be readily made to 
agree with the vertical line drawn, and then go 
repeating the operation for the other plumb 
line the shaft will be trued vertically. By 
this device we are enabled to discover devia 
tions in shafting and to correct the same with 
out removing pulleys, belts, or journals. The 
shaft being trued, it is only necessary to make 
its bearings correspond, and this may be ac 
complished without disturbing the other parts 
of the machinery. In aligning vertical shafts 
of course the level B is not used and may be 
removed. 
Instead of a horizontal imaginary line, as 
75 
95 
IOO 
5O whatever the diameter of the shaft, 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
323,826 
5 
hereinbefore mentioned, a shaft may be trued 
to a line inclined at any angle to the horizon. 
What we claim as new is 
1. In a device for aligning and truing shafts, 
the combination, with a body and a leveling 
device, of a V-shaped notch adapted to receive 
the shaft and to locate its center, as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the body and ad 
justable head having angular jaws, of a pointer, 
Io as E, having points perpendicular to each 
other, as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination, with the body and slid 
ing level, of the head having sockets, as a b, 
arranged at right angles to each other, and 
having the angular jaws to receive the shaft, 
as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the body and slid 
ing level, of the head having a V-shaped notch 
whose apex is on a line with upper side of the 
body, and adapted to engage shafts of various 
diameters and locate their centers, as set forth. 
5. The combination, with the body and level, 
of the head having sockets, as a b, arranged 
at right angles to each other, and the set 
screw c, arranged at the junction of the two 
sockets, as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the body, sliding 
level, and adjustable head, of the pointer E, 
having socket h and set-screw, and having 
points e and g, arranged at right angles to each 
other and to the body, as and for the purposes 
Set forth. 
7. The body a, having square F and the slid 
ing level B, combined with the head C, hav 
ing Sockets ('b and inclined jaws, the pointer 
E, having points e.g., and the set-screws, as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
. 
WALTER J. S. OSBORN. 
JAMES MADDEN. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAMOWINGs, 
SANI D. OWINGS. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US323926.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. FIELD. 
GLOWE. FASTENING 
No. 323,926. 
Patented Aug. ll, 1885. 
- - - - - - - - - - - - 
 
Aiaesses 
&n. %27. 
N. PFTERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. FIELD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
GLOWE. FASTENING 
55. OIFECATAON forming part of Letters Patent No. 323,926, dated August 11, 1885. 
Application filed March 16, 1885. 
(No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
To all, u?ion, it inva? COI2Cer'72: 
Be it known that I, JoHN C. FIELD, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented new and useful Improvements in Glove 
Fastenings, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention pertains to that class of glove. 
fastenings or other similar devices for fasten 
ings, as gloves, shoes, &c., in which the slit 
portion of the glove or shoe is or must be 
drawn and held together in some manner; and 
this invention applies to that class of devices 
for drawing edges of the slit together, as will 
hereinafter be readily seen by reference to the 
accompanying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a plan of a glove, full size, with 
the fastenings attached. Fig. 2 is a plan of 
the attaching devices, double the usual size. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section of the same. 
The invention consists, chiefly, in the use of 
a take-up or tape with eyelets in it, connect 
ing through the loops and pins attached upon 
the edges of the slit, so that the fastening 
may be made adjustable, as will hereinafter 
appear. 
At A is shown a plan of a glove, full size, 
with attachments in position. B is the tape 
or connecting thong or lacing for drawing and 
holding the two edges of the slit toward each 
other, and this tape is merely a narrow and 
flat strip of braid or similar woven fabric, or 
it may be athong of leather-as a shoe-lacing 
provided with eyelets C and C at certain in 
tervals for the purpose of fastening or holding 
the edges of the slit toward each other. 
At D is shown a loop of metal or similar sub 
stance fastened upon the glove or edge of the 
slit by sewing, or by eyelets, or by riveting, 
or by tangs, as at E, Fig. 3, which may be 
clinched or bent down over the fabric to hold 
the loop in position, and through this loop the 
braid or thong extends, as shown at F. The 
opposite fastening-as a pin or stud--as seen 
at G, is fastened upon the opposite edge of the 
slit in the same manner as the loop-holding 
devices. 
Upon each end of the tape is a knob or stop, 
H and K, which may be a knot in the threads 
of material or balls of metal, as shown in the 
drawings, which may be compressed upon the 
ends of the Said tape or thong, and thus pre 
vent the tape from slipping away from its 
position in the loop. 
The operation of such a fastening is as fol 
lows: After the glove or shoe is placed in po 
sition, either on the hand or foot, as the case 
may be, the end of the tape provided with 
the knot or ball K is first drawn over so that 
the eyelet at C may be fastened upon the stud 
or pin G, which of course will close the slit to 
the extent of whatever the said drawing ac 
tion of said tape may be, and in which posi 
tion the other end of the tape would be resting 
against the edge of the loop at F. If, how 
ever, this does not close the slit to the desired 
degree, then the end of the tape at H is car 
ried over the loop, and by pulling upon it, and 
fastening one of the eyelets at C, is hooked or 
fastened upon the pin, in which position the 
tape is doubled over upon itself, as shown at 
P, Fig. 1, and thus the edges of the slit will 
be drawn closer together just in proportion to 
whichever one of the eyelets at C is used on 
the pin G. 
It is evident that such a fastening may be 
used as well for shoes, corsets, or other por 
tions of garments for drawing the edges to 
gether. 
therefore claim 
In a fastening for gloves or other articles, 
the combination, with the eyeleted braid with 
a knob at each end, of a loop in one side of the 
opening of the glove or other article, and a 
retaining pin or stud upon the opposite side, 
all arranged and operating substantially as set 
In witness whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name and affixed my seal in the 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
forth. 
. 
JOHN C. FIELD. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
EUGENE N. ELIOT, 
BOYD ELIOT, 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324027.txt	J. W. HORNER. 
HAMMOCK SUPPORT, 
Patented Aug. ll, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
No. 324,027, 
 
y/ 
2.4% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN W. HORNER, OF LAKE CITY, MINNESOTA. 
HAVVO CK. SUPPORT. 
N 
CFI-CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 324,027, dated August 11, 1885, 
Application filed March 11, 1885. (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN W. HoRNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lake 
City, in the county of Wabasha and State of 
Minnesota, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Hammock-Supporters, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in folding hammock-supporters; and it con 
sists in the construction and novel arrange 
ment of devices, all as will be hereinafter more 
fully explained, and particularly pointed out 
in the appended claim. 
The annexed drawings, to which reference 
is made, fully illustrate my invention,in which 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of my 
hammock-supporter, and Figs. 2 and 3 are de 
tail views. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the support for ham 
mocks, which consists of two end uprights or 
standards, C. C., which are constructed exactly 
like one another. The same are secured at 
their lower ends to a transverse bar, b, which 
is hinged, as at c, to the end of the base-bard, 
thus connecting the two end standards at their 
base. These standards are provided with in 
clined brace-barse, which are bolted at their 
lower end to the transverse bar and at their 
upper end to the standard, as shown. Said 
standards are further provided with adjust 
able inclined bars f, which are pivoted at 
their upper end to the standard, while the 
opposite pointed end, (), is designed to engage 
one of the perforations or notches h in the 
horizontal base-bar aforesaid. The vertical 
standards are provided also with kerfs h' in 
their upper ends to receive the hook end of 
the top horizontal adjustable bar, i, which lat 
ter is removably hooked to the transverse 
bolti, which crosses the kerf aforesaid. This 
upper horizontal adjustable connecting-bar is 
constructed in two sections. The end of each 
section is provided with a rectangular slide 
or sleeve, k, which is provided with a thumb 
Screw, l, adapted to be screwed tightly against 
the opposite section when the bar is suitably 
adjusted, thus firmly holding said sections in 
position and fast to one another, thereby form 
ling a single bar. 
These sections are provided 
with a series of vertical perforations, m, which 
are adapted to receive the pin a on the cross 
bar 0, to which the canvas or sunshade p is 
secured, thus rendering said shade adjustable 
to correspond to the adjustment of the Sup 
port. 
The letters r ) represent the hooks or other 
common fastenings, to which the ends of the 
hammock are attached, and from which the 
same are suspended. The base-bar is divided 
in the middle and joined together with a 
hinge, thus enabling the support to fold more 
closely. 
If desirable, the lower horizontal base-bat 
may be made longitudinally adjustable to COr 
respond with the adjustment of the upper bar. 
It will be observed from the above descrip 
tion, and by reference to the annexed draw 
ings, that the support can be adjusted at Will, 
as well as the sunshade, and at the same time 
can be folded up in a compact form, thus tak 
ing up very little space in shipping; and the 
upper horizontal bar can be removed from the 
standards simply by raising the hook ends 
from engagement with the transverse bolts in 
the top of said standards, and it is durable as 
well as ornamental, and cheap to manufacture. 
It will be observed that the braced frame is 
sustained against lateral displacement by the 
braces e e, and that it is also sustained by the 
braces.ff against longitudinal displacement; 
also, that I employ a horizontal bar, d, which 
is centrally hinged, the hinge being on the 
lower side. These devices, together with the 
upper extensible bar, constitute a folding 
braced frame, which is especially adapted for 
a hammock-support. I also employ-as it will 
be observed-the extensible horizontal beam, 
which is notched into the uprights at a, and 
combine therewith the pivoted cross-bars O, 
having hammock attachments on their ends. 
This beam, which connects the two uprights, 
is composed of two longitudinal sections con 
nected by a clasp, k, so constructed that the 
frame can be held in a vertical position. 
Patents Nos. 240,522 and 292,204 having been . 
2 
324,027 
granted by the United States for similar de-length of the top supporting-bar's can be ad 
vices, I therefore do not claim such construc- justed without changing the length of the 
tion shown in either of said patents; but, 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
5 and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
Canopy. 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN W. HORNER. 
Having described my invention, what I claim, 
The combination of the braced standards, 
the two adjustable supporting-barsi, connected 
by clasps and pins, and provided with holes 
m, and the pivoted cross-bars O, having pins 
Io n, substantially as described, whereby the 
Witnesses: 
R. H. MooRE, 
H. ROFF. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324128.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 324,128, 
C. A., LINDB, OM, 
HAMMOCK SUPPORT. 
Patented Aug. 11, 1885. 
 
WITNESSES: 
-6/l (24 
1.2ceed 
N. Peters. Photo-lthographe 
r, Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES AXEL LINDBLOM, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
HAM IMO C K - SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION orming part of Letters Patent No. 324,128, dated Agust 11, 1885. 
Application filed April 3, 1884. (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES AXEL LIND 
BLOM, a subject to the King of Sweden, resid 
ing in the city of New York, and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Ham 
mock-Support, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The nature and objects of my invention are, 
first, to provide a light and strong structure in 
which to sling or suspend a hammock to be 
used in a room; secondly, to provide said 
structure with removable extensions over 
which to stretch a light canvas or stout mus 
lin shed, so as to avert the inconvenience of 
the sun, moon, or dew when the support is to 
be used in the open air, and from which may 
be suspended a suitable mosquito-netting; and, . 
finally, to so arrange the entire structure that 
it may be easily and quickly taken apart and 
2O packed into a receptacle (box or trunk) made 
for the purpose, so as to prevent the loss of 
any part or parts during transportation, and 
as quickly and easily set up for use. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts, as will be hereinaf 
ter fully described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the sup 
port. Fig. 2 is an end elevation, and Fig. 3 
is a side elevation, of the same. 
The device consists of a number of pieces of 
wood and metal so shaped or manufactured 
that when put together, as hereinafter de 
scribed, they form two uprights or standards 
connected by and braced to a tie-bar, so as to 
form the support of the hammock. 
4o The two pieces BB, which form the base or 
foot-pieces of the standards C, are each pro 
vided with a mortise in the center, in which 
to insert the tenons of the uprights CC. Both 
the uprights C C and the foot-pieces B B are 
provided with eye-screws, into which are 
hooked the stays D D. 
A is the tie-bar. This is composed of the 
three parts or sections a b c, so as to form con 
venientlengths for storage. The sections a b c, 
So are joined at the ends by means of the top and 
bottom plates, PP, and bolts passing through 
said plates and through the sections a be, as 
shown. 
The tie-bar A is attached to the uprights C, 
preferably to the slotted plates d, screwed on 55 
the upright C, and the tongued, fastened on 
the ends of the bar A, or other suitable means 
for this purpose may be used. 
The uprights C are braced lengthwise to the 
tie-bar A. With the braces E.E. If these braces 
be made of wood they must have a hook, e, 
screwed into each end, so as to fasten into eye 
screws e', screwed into the tie-bar A and the 
uprights C. If made of metal they may be 
fastened in at the ends in any suitable manner. 65 
The bar A is trussed with a wire, F, or with 
a light chain passing from upright to upright 
under the blocks FF, attached to the under 
side of the tie-bar A. 
The hammock His attached to the hooks f 7o 
f, attached to the upper ends of the uprights C. 
Constructed as thus far described, the device 
is adapted for indoor use. 
When I desire the device for outdoor use, I 
lengthen the uprights CC by attaching thereto 75 
the extensions G G, the means of attachment 
being by preference the slotted plates g, at 
tached to the uprights, and the locking lugs or 
tongues g, attached to the extensions G. The 
upper ends of the extensions G. G. have tenons, 8o 
which are each inserted in mortises made in 
the top croSS-bars II, which cross-bars are se 
cured to the extensions G. G. by the hooks J J 
entering eyes.jj, screwed into the edges of the 
extensions G. G. 
The muslin canopy or shed K(shown in dot 
ted lines in Fig. 1) is fastened to one of the 
bars I, and is from there stretched to the other 
and held by strings or secured by other con 
venient means. 
If flies or mosquitoes are troublesome the 
whole structure may be inclosed by a mos 
quito-netting, (not shown,) which may bebut- . 
toned to the canopy or shade K. 
Though I prefer making the device of wood 
and to use metal sparingly, in order to have 
the article as light and cheap as possible, it is 
evident that it may be made entirely of metal, 
either of bars or tubular iron. 
Constructed as described, it will be seen that 
the device forms a perfect knockdown ham 
mock-support, the parts of which may be easily 
35 
- 
85 
95 
too 
2 
324.123 
I am aware that prior to my invention ham- rights are tenoned, and the side stays with the 20 
separated and packed in small space, and curing said uprights to the tie-bar, the foot 
which may be quickly and easily set up for use. pieces B B, in which the lower ends of the up 
mock-supports have been made of various pat- truss F, secured to the uprights below the tie 
5 terns. I therefore do not claim such an inven- bar, and blocks FF between the tie-bar and 
tion, broadly; nor do I claim to be the first in- truss, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a hammock of the character described, 
ventor of any one particular part of the Sup- 
port-for instance, the application of the di- the combination, with the hammock and sup- 25 
vided tie-bar A. I confine myself to my par- porting-frame, of the removable upper struc 
Io ticular mode of constructing and combining ture comprising the extension-uprights G. G., 
the various parts, so as to form the whole, as cross-bars II, stays J J, the canopy K, and 
the mosquito-netting detachably secured to the 
illustrated and described. 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let- 
1. The combination of the sectional tie-bar A, 
the uprights C C, interlocking-plates for se- 
Having thus described my invention, what canopy, substantially as set forth. 
5 ters Patent, is- 
CHARLES AXEL, LINDBLOM. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. WEST, 
C. SEIDG WICK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324228.txt	(No Model.) 
J. D., L, H, & C. M. CHARLEs. 
STRETCHER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 324, 228, 
 
Patented Aug. ll, 1885. 
SAs 
Z. 
(S. AESA272 
ASF 2% (S 
WITNESSES 
A & z4. 
22-2- 
A 
y 
INVENTOR5. 
4%2/2) 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
J. D. L. H. & C. M. CHARLEs. 
STRETCHER 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
No. 324,228. 
Patented Aug. ll, 1885. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES D. CHARLES, LEONIDAs H. CHARLEs, AND CASSIUS M, CHARLES, OF 
LITCHFIELD, ILLINOIS. 
STRETCHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part uf Letters Patent No. 324,228, dated August il, 1885. 
Application filed March 28, 1884. (No model.) 
25 
IO 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
To add whon, it may concert: 
means of which the rollers may be turned; and 
the inner portion, I, of the projecting ends of 
Be it known that We, JAMES D.CHARLEs, 
the trunnions are polygonous, adapted to be 
LEONIDAS H. CHARLEs, and CASSIUS M. 
engaged by hooks J, having correspondingly 
CHARLES, citizens of the United States, and 
shapedjaws and pivoted upon the cross-pieces, 
residents of Litchfield, in the county of Mont 
preventing them from turning. 
gomery and State of Illinois, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Stretch 
A long bail, K, is hinged at its ends to the 
ends of each roller, its straight portion being 
ers; and We do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
parallel with the roller, and it will be seen 
the invention, which will enable others skilled 
that the sheet or blanket T., upon which the 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
patient lies, may have its edges inserted into 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
these bails, and have the said edges doubled 
Companying drawings, which form a part of 
over the straight portions of the bails, when 
this specification, and in which 
they will be held tightly when the rollers are 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of our im 
turned, stretching the sheet and holding it fast. 
For the purpose of raising and moving the 
proved truck and stretcher for use in hand 
ling helpless persons. Fig. 2 is an end eleva 
stretcher with greater ease, we construct a bed 
frame having four upright posts, M, mounted 
tion of the same. Fig. 3 is a side elevation. 
upon casters N, and connected by means of 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of one of the rollers of 
the stretcher. Fig. 5 is a cross-section of the 
side rails, O, similar to the side rails of a bed, 
same and of the sheet, and Figs. 6 and 7 are 
and the posts at the ends of the side rails are 
connected at their upper ends by means of 
detail views of the ends of the trunnions of the 
stretcher-rollers and their fastenings. 
rollers P, journaled transversely in the upper 
ends of the posts at a height sufficient to allow 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
the rollers to pass over the ends of a bedstead, 
the width of the truck being sufficient to pass 
Our invention has relation to trucks and 
stretchers for use inhospitals or similar places 
over and straddle a common bedstead. 
for handling sick and helplesspersons in mov 
One of the trunnions of the roller at one end 
is provided with a crank or winch, Q, and 
ing them from one bed to another or in mak 
ing the bed; and it consists in the improved 
cords R. R. are attached to the roller and to 
that end of the stretcher, serving to raise that 
construction and combination of parts of such 
a stretcher, in which the person upon the 
end of the stretcher when the roller is revolved, 
stretcher may be raised upon the sheet or 
while cords S S are attached at one end to the 
roller, winding upon the same, whereupon they 
blanket upon which he lies, and of a truck 
pass down at the sides of the posts, over pull 
by means of which the stretcher may be raised 
leys Tupon the inner sides of the posts, to pull 
and moved from one place to another, as here 
leys U upon the posts at the other end, up to 
inafter more fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letters 
the roller at that end, over the same, and are 
AAindicate two cross-pieces of the stretcher, 
attached to that end of the stretcher, so that 
forming handles at their ends, and forming 
both ends of the stretcher may be raised when 
bearings B near their ends, in which the trun 
the roller at the other end is revolved. 
nions C of the longitudinal stretcher-rollers 
The cords are provided near the ends at 
D Dare journaled. The trunnions passing 
which they are attached to the stretcher with 
through the one cross-piece have grooves Ein 
spiral springs V, the cords being cut in two, 
their ends, into which grooves hooks F, piv 
and the end of the lower portion being passed 
oted upon the cross-piece, may engage, which 
up through the spring and attached to the up 
hooks prevent the trunnions from slipping out 
per end of the spring, and the end of the up 
per portion being passed down through the 
of their bearings; and the trunnions passing 
through the other cross-piece are Square at 
spring and attached to the lower end of the 
Spring, So that the Springs are compressed 
So their outer ends for the reception of a wrench, 
G, which fits upon the said ends H, and by by weight, preventing them from breaking by 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
324,228 
2. The combination, in a stretcher, of the 20 
longitudinal side rollers having bails hinged 
with their ends at the ends of the rollers, and 
with their straight portions parallel with the 
rollers, with a sheet or blanket having its side 
edges folded double over the straight portions 25 
of the bails, and wound partly on the said 
rollers, as and for the purpose shown and set 
forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereunto affixed our signa. 3o 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES D. CHARLES. 
LEONIDAS H. CHARLES. 
CASSIUS M. CHARLES. 
Witnesses: 
ELI LEE, 
W. E. LOUGHMILLER. 
overstraining, the springs serving to cushion 
the stretcher when the truck is moved. In 
this manner it will be seen that a person may 
be raised in the sheet or blanket upon which 
5 he rests, and that the stretcher may be raised 
above the bed and moved upon the truck, the 
entire mechanism only requiring one person 
to operate it. 
It follows that the stretcher 
may be used without the truck, the handles 
upon the cross-pieces or end pieces serving for 
that purpose. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. The combination in a stretcher, of the 
longitudinal roller, with a bail hinged at its 
ends to the ends of the roller, and having 
its straight portion parallel with the roller, 
as and for the purpose shown and set forth. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324328.txt	(No Model.) 
G. H. KAMMAN. 
DITCHING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 324,328, 
Patented Aug. ll, 1885, 
WITNESSES 
IWWEWTOR 
2428 
. 
Attorney. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 324,328. 
 
G. H. KAMMAN. 
DITCHING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
m 
Patented Aug, ll, l885. 
WITWESSES 
&%34-3 
IWWEWTor 
a & 444-see, 
Attorney 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer, Washington, d, C. . 
 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
G. H. KAMMAN. 
DITCHING MACHINE. 
Patented Aug. 11, 1885. 
III 
E. 
Ee SS 
EEFS 
are 
site 
terror 
 
- is 
... 
S 
S 
(No Model.) 
No. 324,328, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
WITWESSES 
tex. 62-------6 
?z43 
1.WWEWTOR 
7 a. A c44-44. 
Attorney 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. KAMMAN, OF CHAMPAIGN, ILLINOIS. 
DTCH ING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 324,328, dated August ll, 1885. 
Application filed February 16, 1885. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 - 
To all, Luhon, it may conce77. 
Beit known that I, GEORGE H. KAMMAN, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resid 
ing at Champaign, in the county of Cham 
paign, in the State of Illinois, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvementsin Ditch 
ing - Machines, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in that class of ditching-machines consisting 
of a wheeled carriage carrying the ditching 
plow, and having mechanism attached for ele 
Vating the dirt and discharging it at the side 
of the ditch. 
The object of my invention is to make ama 
Chine of the kind named which will accom 
plish the purpose intended with certainty, and 
to SO arrange and construct the mechanism 
effecting the purpose that it may be adjusted 
with ease to any desired depth of ditch and 
operate with all needed power. I accomplish 
these objects by means of the mechanism illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, where 
- 
Figure 1 is a side view of the machine. Fig. 
2 is a side view the reverse of that shown in 
Fig. 3 is a top plan view. Fig. 4 is 
Fig. 1. 
a perspective view of the plow. 
In the drawings similar parts are identified 
by like letters of reference. 
The letters Adesignate the wheels of the car 
riage, sustaining the axles B. The carriage is 
made wide enough to straddle the furrow or 
ditch, and the axles are made of sufficient dimen 
sions to conveniently afford room for the ma 
chinery fixed to them, and to perform the 
work and bear the strain without liability of 
breaking. 
The coupling-pole or reach of the carriage 
may be of any desired make, it being essen 
tial that it be of such strength as to securely 
keep the carriage in connection. 
The letter C designates the plow - beam. 
This consists of a substantial piece of timber 
or metallic bar of such length that the respect 
ive ends shall project a short distance beyond 
the front face of the front axle and the rear 
face of the hind axle, and to each end of the 
beam is secured an upright rack-bar or stand 
ard, DE, and firmly fixed in such position. 
These rack-bars or standards are held in con 
nection with the axles of the carriage by 
M 
means of metallic sleeves F F, strongly and 
firmly Secured to the front and rear face of 
the respective axles. 
On the upper face of each axle are rigidly 
set standards G. G. G', formed with bearings, 
in Which is disposed a shaft carrying a cog. 
Wheel, H, and ratchet-wheels II. The cog 
Wheels Hengage with the upright rack-bars 
On the ends of the plow-beam, and are turned 
by means of the hand-levers J J', which are 
pivotally attached to the shaft, and are pro 
Vided With spring pawls or bolts (t, to set with 
in the ratchets. The operation of this mech 
anism raises or lowers the beam of the plow, 
and also sets the same, so that the plow may 
run at any desired depth. 
The letter K designates the clevis, which is 
connected to the front end of the plow-beam, 
and also fastened to the lower end of a rack 
bar standard, L. The post or standard G' on 
the front axle is made larger than the other 
standards thereon appearing, and has piv 
otally secured to it the lever O, which is 
formed with an opening, ct, in its weight end, 
from the sides of which are suspended chains 
Or barse, the lower ends of which are secured 
to the double-tree clevis M. This double 
tree clevis is formed with forward extensions 
to connect with the double - tree, and with 
backward arms, between which is journaled a 
Small gear-wheel, b, which meshes with the 
rack-bar II. 
The letter N designates the tongue, pro 
tected against side displacement by braces d, 
the bar of which is passed through the tongue, 
and serves as a bearing and Support, and ex 
tends therefrom to the axle of the carriage, 
where the ends are suitably fastened; or they 
may be carried through the axle and have the 
ends formed into eyes or staples, substantially 
as shown. In the rear end of the tongue is 
formed an aperture, c, substantially as shown. 
The rack-bar T is passed through the open 
ing in the double-tree clevis, thence through 
the opening in the rear end of the tongue, and 
thence through the opening in the arm of the 
lever O. 
Secured to the post G' is a ratchet-bar or 
a series of holes, f, made therein, in which 
engages the bolt of a ratchet or spring-catch, 
g. The purpose of this mechanism is to oper 
ate and adjust the line of draft with the set of 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
324,328 
5 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the plow. As it will be seen, by raising the 
lever the double-tree is also raised or lowered 
and maintained in a set position by Setting 
the lever-latch in the notches or holes pro 
vided for that purpose. 
The letter T designates the cutters, which 
consist of three cutting-disks fitted to a shaft, 
and having upward-extending arms detach 
ably and adjustably secured to the plow 
beam. 
The letter U designates the plow-standard, 
to the foot of which is secured the share V. 
This share consists of the arrow-head double 
share 1, formed with an extended shank, 2, 
having a mortise, in which the foot of the 
standard sets and is firmly held. 
The letter A' designates the mold-board, 
the forward end of which is formed to set 
within and behind the wings of the double 
share, and is thereto secured. The rear end is 
slotted to receive the plow-standard, the ex 
tended sides J J' of the slotted portion passing 
beyond the rear of the standard, as shown. 
Longitudinally the mold-board is somewhat 
arched, and in cross-section has the upper 
face raised in the center and its sides or edges 
turned upward, so as to form longitudinal 
depressions on each side of the central eleva 
tion. The depressions or grooves tend to re 
tain the broken dirt on the mold-board and 
deliver it to the elevator. The central eleva 
tion is flared in direction of the plow-point 
and contracts rearward to the plow-standard, 
where its base is of about the width of the 
standal'd. From thence the side extensions are 
flattened. This formation tends to throw the 
broken dirt or furrow inwardly in the direc 
tion of the mouth of the elevator. The arch 
form of the mold-board breaks up the soil, 
and thus makes the progress of the plow 
easier. 
The letters i i" represent braces extended 
from the beam to the shank of the share. 
The letter B' designates the elevator, the 
frame of which is pivotally attached to the 
extendled sides of the slotted mold-board, and 
is sustained in an inclined position by means 
of rods C, pivotally secured to the hind axle 
of the carriage, and provided in their outer 
ends with a series of perforations, through 
which are passed the lugsk, fixed in the sides 
of the elevator. A spool is journaled in the 
lower end of the elevator-frame, and in the 
upper end is journaled a shaft with spool, and 
having on one end a sprocket-wheel, D', and 
on the other end of this shaft is fixed a gear 
wheel, E'. The endless apron F is arranged 
about the spools at the lower and upper ends 
of the elevator-frame, and provided with a 
series of buckets, F, which receive the dirt 
from the plow and convey it to the spout, 
from Whence it is delivered to the side of the 
ditch. 
One of the hind wheels of the carriage has 
Secured to it a gear-wheel, F, which meshes 
With a small gear-wheel, m, on a shaft, n', 
which latter carries a sprocket-wheel, O, on 
 
75 
which the chain Pisplaced, and extends from 
that to the small sprocket-wheel D'. 
Suspended from and secured to and across 
the upper end of the elevator is a spout, Q. 
This spout is so arranged in connection with 
the elevator that the dirt raised by the buck 
ets shall be deposited in the spout, and, (le 
scending, shall be thrown to the side of the 
ditch. The spout is set at an incline, and is 
provided in its upper end with a shaft carry 
ing a gear-wheel, n, which meshes with the 
gear-wheel E, fixed to the shaft in the upper 
end of the elevator. This connection gives to 
the spout a vibratory or slight shaking notion, 
which expedites the passage of the dirt down 
the Spout. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the front and hind 
axles of the carriage, provided with vertical 
sleeves, and having gear-wheels mounted on 
journals on the top of the carriage-axles pro 
vided with actuating-levers, the plow having 
the beam formed or provided with upright 
rack-bars projected through the sleeves on the 
axles and meshing with the said gears, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In combination, the lever pivoted to a 
standard on the front axle of the carriage and 
formed with an aperture in the front end, and 
having means for holding it to the standard 
in a desired position, a double-tree clevis Sus 
pended from the weight end of the lever and 
formed with a vertical slot having a cog-wheel 
journaled therein, and a rack-bar projected 
through the slot in the double-tree clevis and 
through the aperture in the actuating-lever, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In combination with the front axle of the 
carriage and the plow-beam, the lever pivoted 
to the standard on the front axle, and formed 
with an aperture in its weight end, the tongue 
formed with an aperture in its rear end and 
having a bearing and support on the braces 
d, a double-tree clevis suspended from the 
actuating-lever and having a gear-wheel jour 
naled in its rear end, and a rack-bar having 
its lower end connected to the plow-beam and 
projected through the apertures of the double 
tree clevis, the tongue, and the actuating-le 
ver, substantially as described. 
4. The mold-board for a ditching-plow, the 
plate whereof is arched longitudinally, and in 
cross-section has its upper faced raised in the 
center and its sides turned up, forming longi 
tudinal depressions on each side of the central 
elevation, and having its rear end slotted to 
receive the plow-standard, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. The plow herein described, consisting of 
the beam provided with upright rack-barsse 
cured to each end thereof, the standard hav. 
ing secured thereto the double share having 
elongated shank, and the mold - board, the 
plate whereof is arched longitudinally, and in 
Cross-section has its upper face raised in the 
center, and its side edges turned up, forming 
go 
95 
OO 
IIO 
I I5 
I 25 
324,328 
A. 
3 
longitudinal depressions on each side of the 
central elevation, and having its rear slotted 
to receive the plow-standard, substantially as 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In combination, the carriage provided 
with a driving gear-wheel on one of the hind 
wheels, a shaft carrying a gear-wheel on one 
end to mesh with the gear on the carriage 
wheel, and a sprocket-wheel fixed to the oth 
er end and mounted on bearings fixed on the 
upper face of the hind axle of the carriage, the 
plow adjustably secured to the carriage, the 
elevator having its lower end journaled to the 
rear extensions of the mold-board and pro 
vided with a shaft in its upper end carrying 
a sprocket-wheel on one end, connected by a 
sprocket-chain to the sprocket-wheel on the 
IO 
axle of the carriage, and a gear-wheel on the 
other, and supported by bars having their 
ends pivotally secured to the rear face of the 
hind axle of the carriage, and the delivering 
spout or trough secured across the upper end 
of the elevator in an inclined position, and 
the journal of its upper spool extended and 
provided with a gear-wheel to mesh with the 
gear on the elevator, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name in the presence of two attest 
ing witnesses. 
GEORGE H. KAMMAN. 
2O 
25 
Attest: 
ALBERT NICHOLs, 
JoHN H. SMITH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324428.txt	D. C. SUMNER, 
MACHINERY FOR SHEARING CLOTH, 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
Patented Aug. 18, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
No. 324,428, 
 
Z7 A/za at Zay. 
4.4. Ma-* 
/vvzzV77A7 
7 'A- 
-&% (24-6-va?aver 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d, C. 
as as 
- 
/ 
1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 324,428, 
D. C. SUMNER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
MACHINERY FOR SHEARING CLOTH, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1885. 
X2 it a 
. 
. 
40.4. /& 2.2 
. 
. 
AVVAW72r 
eve4e 664-6- e?cawler 
 
(No Model.) 
D. C. SUMNER, 
MACHINERY FOR SHEARING CLOTH, 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
No. 324,428, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1885, 
YVz ZMZ55275 - 
AZV/z V7,7zr. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 324,428, 
D. C. SUMNER. 
MACHINERY FOR SHEARING CIOTH, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4, . 
Patented Aug. 18, 1885. 
S 
7 
-N- S 
W 
S. 
X777Vzzzzzis 
N-N 
22. 4-4424/47- 26. 2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DWIGHT CLINTON SUMNER, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS. 
MACHINERY FOR SHEARING CLOTH. 
5ECIEICATIOfN forming part of Letters Patent No. 324,428, dated August 18, 1885. 
Application filed IDecember 5, 1883. 
(No model.) Patented in England April 27, 1883, No. 2,144. 
I5 fication. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DWIGHT CLINTON SUM 
NER, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Worcester, in the county of Worcester and 
5 State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Machinery 
for Shearing Cloth, (for which I obtained a 
patent in Great Britain, No. 2,144, April 27, 
1883;) and I declare the following to be a de 
IO scription of my said invention sufficiently full, 
clear, and exact to enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
In my former Letters Patent Nos. 265,644, 
282,401, and 282,402, I have shown and de 
scribed special mechanisms or devices for pro 
ducing certain peculiar classes of sheared or 
2O namentation, wherein the designs are com 
posed of longitudinally - disposed lines with 
intersecting transverse lines or checks, inter 
meshing checks or basket patterns, and diag 
onally-arranged checks and spots. My pres 
25 ent invention relates to another specially-con 
structed mechanism adapted for producing a 
design or style of finish not included in the 
above-named patents. 
The object of my present invention is to af. 
3o ford a practical and efficient means for pro 
ducing by shearing action on piled or napped 
fabrics a peculiar class or style of surface, or 
namentation, or finish, consisting of a series 
of parallel laterally - disposed ribs or welts 
35 extending across the fabric and separated by 
sheared lines or shorter-cut pile, said style of 
finish being very desirable and admirably 
adapted for such goods as plush, canton flan 
nels, and other long-pile fabrics. I attain 
4o these objects by a mechanism the nature, con 
struction, and operation of whichisillustrated 
in the drawings and hereinafter explained. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional 
view showing the front of the shear-revolver 
45 and ledger-blade, and Fig. 2 is a vertical trans 
verse sectional view showing such parts of a 
shearing-machine as will illustrate the nature 
of my present improvements. Fig. 3 is a front 
view of a piece of fabric illustrating the style 
5o of finish effected by my improvement. Fig. 
4 is a longitudinal section of the fabric. Fig. 
5 is a view of one end of the shearing-ma 
chine, showing the arrangement of the driv 
ing-pulleys and belts and gearing for operat 
ing the feed-rolls. Fig. 6 is a view of the op 
posite end of the shearing-machine, showing 
the arrangement of pulleys and belts for op 
erating the revolver and for changing the rel 
ative speed of the feed. Fig. 7 is a sectional 
view showing the revolver, the ledger-blade, 
and the sheared fabric as disposed in a broad 
shearing-machine. Fig. 8 is an end view on 
somewhat larger scale, showing the revolver, 
the ledger-blade, the guiding-support, and a 
portion of fabric as passing over the support. 
In referring to parts, A designates the frame 
of the shearing-machine, of suitable construc 
tion to support the working parts. 
B indicates the cloth-support, over which the 
fabric passes while undergoing the shearing 
operation. 
C is the ledger-blade, fixed in usual manner 
on the adjustable part a of the frame. 
D is the revolver or shearing-cylinder, con 
structed in the peculiar manner hereinafter 
described for effecting the desired results. 
E denotes guiding -rolls for directing the 
fabric, and F the feed-roll for carrying for. 
ward the fabric G as it is finished. 
His a brush for straightening out the nap 
or pile on the surface to be sheared, and I in 
dicates the screws for adjusting the blades to 
or from the face of the cloth. 
J denotes the operating-shaft, provided with 
pulley or pulleys J" for the driving-belt J, 
and with a pulley, K, for the belt K", which 
operates the revolver D; also, with pulleys 
for the operation of other parts of the mech 
'anism, as shown. 
L denotes an auxiliary shaft for operating 
the feed devices or rolls F, said rolls being 
connected with said shaft by the gears and 
pinions F, pulleys lll, and belt L, arranged 
as shown in Fig. 5. 
M. indicates a belt-tightener worked by a 
hand-lever, M, whereby the feed devices can 
be thrown into and out of action independ 
ently of the other parts of the mechanism. 
Shaft L is operated from shaft J by the pull 
leys N N' and belt O. (Shown in Fig. 6.) 
The direction of movement of the several parts 
is indicated by the arrows on the drawings. 
For producing the laterally-ribbed surface . 
on textile fabrics according to my improved 
- 
75 
95 
OO 
 
324,428 
method, the revolver D is provided with a 
single cutting-blade, d, fixed in the cylindrical 
body and extending longitudinally thereof in 
the manner shown. This revolver is prefer 
ably made about three and one-half inches in 
diameter, with the blade d projecting about 
half an inch from the body or cylinder, which 
gives a working diameter of about four and 
one-half inches. Its length may be more or 
less, according to the requirements of the ma 
chine. That shown in Fig. 1 is on a scale of 
about twenty-five inches in length, and that 
shown in Fig. 7 is on a scale of about sixty 
two inches length, or to shear goods sixty 
inches or less in width. The blade d may 
have sufficient curve or spiral set to preven 
jarring or shaking the machine when in oper 
ation, the amount of curvature or spiral being 
for the length of revolver shown some less 
than once around the cylinder. Any desired 
degree of spirality within practical working 
limits may be given to the bladed; but I pre: 
fer that shown as giving good results in cut 
ting action. The revolver is mounted in bear 
ings f, and adjusted in relation to the inclined 
ledger-blade C and support B, so that when 
the cylinder D is revolved by the belt Kon its 
pulley D' the edge of the bladed will act in 
conjunction with the edge of the ledger-blade 
C for shearing off such of the pile, or nap from 
the face of the fabric as may stand between. 
the edges, while the balance of the pile passes 
uncut. Each revolution of the revolver brings 
the edge of its single bladed across that of the 
ledger-blade, giving an intermittent cutting 
action the full length of said blade, thus pro 
ducing, as the cloth is moved forward with a 
uniform continuous motion over the guiding 
support B, a series of furrows, m, and ribs w, 
about one-half inch (more or less) apartin their 
central spacings, which furrows and ribs ex 
tend transversely, or substantially so, across 
the piece of goods, or nearly at a right angle to 
the direction of its movement through the 
machine, thereby imparting to the surface 
of the fabric a style of finish very desirable for 
certain classes of materials, especially long 
piled fabrics. 
The distance to which the fabric is moved 
over the edge of the support B during the time 
the revolver is making a revolution gives the 
width or spacing of the ribs w and furrows 
m, and this is governed by the relative speeds 
IO 
3O 
45 
55 
75 
of the revolver ID and feed-rolls F. The 
speed of the revolver may be three hundred 
and fifty revolutions (more or less) perminute. 
As illustrated in the present case, the feed 
rolls F move the fabric about one-halfinch for 
ward during each revolution of the revolver, 
giving the appearance to the fabric as shown 60 
in Fig. 7. 
This method of effecting the production of 
transversely-extending lines by the aid of a 
single-bladed shearing-revolver is of great 
utility, economy, and practical value in the 
finishing and ornamentation of pile fabrics by 
shearing, as it can be cheaply and rapidly 
worked and effects as a result a finish of great 
richness and beauty when applied on such 
goods as plush, velvets, canton flannels, fur 
beavers, and other long-piled fabrics. 
The relative width of the ribs w can be some 
what varied by varying the speed at which 
the cloth moves forward in relation to the 
speed at which the revolver rotates. This 
can be accomplished by changing the pulleys 
N and N', on the ends of the shafts J and L, 
and substituting pulleys of other proportional 
diameters, so that the auxiliary shaft L will 
be operated by the belt O at 
speed in relation to the shaft J. The pulleys 
NN" are so arranged that by loosening their 
set-screws they may be readily slipped from 
the shafts for interchanging, as desired. 
What I claim as of my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A revolver or shearing-cylinder for cloth 
shearing machines, having a single longitudi 
|nally-arranged blade, as described, combined 
: for action with a ledger-blade and cloth-guid 9) 
ing support, disposed in the mannershown, for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. A cloth-shearing machine provided with 
the single-bladed revolver D d, the ledger 
blade, the cloth-support, the roll or rolls for 95 
guiding and feeding forward the fabric, and 
means, such as shown and described, for im 
parting motion to said revolver and feed-rolls, 
in combination, for the purpose set forth. 
ber, A. D. 1883. 
Witness my hand this 30th day of Novem- Inn 
greater or less 8o 
DWIGHT CLINTON SUMNER. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. H. BURLEIGH. 
S. R. BARTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324529.txt	(No Model.) W. H. BROMILEY & P. J. GATELY. 
ADJUSTABLE SCRAPER FOR CRACKER MACHINE FEED ROLLERS. 
Patented Aug. 18, 1885. 
No. 324,529, 
 
T ----- 
WITNESSES: 
C-6. C64 
-66eae. 
eyes- 
L&N 
N 
2. Pyrs 
4% 
by V & Brz 
- 
AITORNEYS, 
. 
WILLIAM. H. BROMILEY AND PHILIP J. GATELY, OF BROOKLYN, N. Y. 
ADJUSTABLE SCRAPER FOR CRACKER-MACHINE FEED-ROLLERS. 
S.E.C.E"a CATION forming part of Letters Patent No.324,529, dated August 18, 1885. 
Application filed March 19, 1885. (No model.) 
To all who1, it may concert: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM. H. BROM 
LEY and PHILIPJ. GATELY, both of Brooklyn, 
E. D., in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Adjustable Scrapers for 
Cracker-Machine Feed-Rollers, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure I is a sectional elevation of our im 
proved scrapers, shown as applied to the feed 
rollers of a cracker-machine. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of a part of the same. Fig. 3 is a view 
of the rear edge of the scraper-plate. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
simple and effective mechanism for keeping 
the feed-rollers of cracker-machines free from 
dough. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with the frame and the feed-rollers of a crack 
er-machine, of arms, bars carried by the said 
arms and having deep grooves in their inner 
edges and scraper-plates placed in the said 
grooves and provided with eyes, to which are 
swiveled the ends of screws I, passing in 
through screw-holes in the rear edges of the 
said bars, whereby the said feed-rollers can 
be kept clear of dough, as will be hereinafter 
fully described and then claimed. 
A represents the frame, B the upper feed 
roller, and C the lower feed-roller, of a cracker 
machine. 
To the journal-bearings of the rollers BC, 
or to the frame A, are attached, or upon them 
are formed, arms D, to the outer ends of which 
are attached, or upon them are formed, the 
ends of bars E. The bars E extend across 
the machine, and have deep grooves Fformed 
in them to receive the scraper-plates G. Upon 
one side of the rear part of the scraper plates 
G. are formed, or to them are attachd.eyes H, 45 
through which pass and to which are swiveled 
the reduced forward ends of the screws I. The 
screws I pass in through screw-holes in the rear 
edges of the grooved bars or holders E, so that 
the scraper-plates G can be adjusted closer to 
or farther from the rollers BC by turning the 
said screws I. With this construction the 
rollers B C can be readily kept clean from ad 
hering dough, and in proper working condi 
tion. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let. 
ters Patent, is 
The combination, with the feed-rollers, of 
the arms provided with the intermediate bars 
having grooves opening at their inner edges, 
the plates fitted in said grooves and having 
eyes upon the lower rear edges and the screws 
working in the intermediate bars and swiveled 
in the eyes of the said plates, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
65 
WILLIAM. H. BROMILEY. 
PHILIP J. GATELY. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES T. GRAHAM, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
IO 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324630.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY ZIEGLER, OF BASLE, SWITZERLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE BADISCHE 
ANILIN AND SODAFABRIK, OF MANNHEIM, GERMANY. 
COLORNG MATTER FROM PHEN YHYDRAZINE. 
gFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 324,630, dated August 18, 1885, 
Application filed July 1, 1885. 
(No specimens ) 
IO 
25 
to all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY ZIEGLER, a citi 
Zen of Switzerland, residing at Basle, Switzer 
land, have invented new and useful improve 
ments in the manufacture of a yellow coloring 
matter or dye-stuff produced by the action of 
bioxytartaric acid upon the sulpho-acid of 
phenylhydrazine, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to a yellow dye-stuff 
or coloring-matter, which is produced by the 
action of bioxytartaric acid (carboxytartronic 
acid. See Ke Kul Ann. Chem. Pharm., vol. 
221 page 245,) upon the sulpho-acid of phenyl 
hydrazine, (Fischer Ann. Chem. Pharm., vol. 
190, page 76.) This yellow dye-stuff is the 
representative of a new class of coloring-mat 
ters which I have produced by the action of 
bioxytartaric(carboxytartronic)acid upon sev 
eral members of the so-called class of hydra 
Zines, and which shall be made by me the 
subject-matter of separate applications for 
Letters Patent. 
To carry out my invention I proceed as fol 
lows: Ten parts, by weight, of bioxytartirate 
of soda are intimately mixed with sixteen parts, 
by weight, of water heated up to 40 centigrade, 
and then thirteen parts, by weight, of strong 
hydrochloric acid of 1.18 specific gravity are 
added. The solution thus obtained is filtered 
and mixed with twenty parts, by weight, of 
the before-named sulpho-acid of phenylhydra 
Zine previously dissolved in sixty parts of wa 
ter and ten parts, by weight, of caustic-soda 
liquor containing thirty per cent, of solid 
caustic Soda. The mixture is then heated to 
80 centigrade during the space of about from 
one-half to one hour, and afterward refriger 
ated in order to separate the dye-stuff. The 
45 
precipitate thus obtained is then filtered, 4o 
pressed, and dried. 
The dye-stuff or coloring-matter prepared 
as hereinbefore described is the sodium salt 
of an organic sulpho-acid. It is soluble in 
cold water, and very easily soluble in 
hot water. The solutions thus obtained are 
of a yellow color. In strong alcohol and 
glacial acetic acid it is almost insoluble even 
at a boiling-heat. By the addition of caustic 
soda to the aqueous solution its yellow color 
assumes a more reddish hue. Alcohol added 
to the concentrated aqueous solution precipi 
tates the dye-stuff almost completely in the 
shape of crystalline flakes. 
When a solution of nitrate of lead is mixed 
with the aqueous solution of the dye-stuff, in 
a few minutes an orange crystalline precipitate 
is formed. Chloride of baryum under the same 
conditions produces a reddish orange precipi 
tate. Reducing agents-such as tin and hydro 
chloric acid, or bichloride of tin and hydro 
chloric acid, or zinc and acetic acid, or zinc 
and caustic soda-decolorize the yellow color 
ing-matter. The dye-stuff dissolves in sul 
phuric acid with a yellow color. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The yellow dye-stuff or coloring-matter here 
inbefore described, and having the character 
istics above set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
HENRY ZIEGLER, 
... Witnesses: 
GEORGE GIFFORD, 
CHS. A. RICHTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324731.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. ROBERTSON. 
RAIL SCRAPER FOR STREET AND OTHER RAILWAYS. 
No. 324731, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1885, 
Jrvosses. 
<-3-2-4-4-4- 
M7 ep-CZZ O7: 
2 4 6-4-4- 
(2% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. ROBERTSON, OF TORONTO, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
RAIL-SCRAPER FOR STREET AND OTHER RALWAYS. 
C2CEEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 324,731, dated August 18, 1885. 
Application filed April 2, 1885. (No model.) Patented in Canada. April 16, 1885, No. 21,416. 
IO 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM HUTCHINSON 
ROBERTSON, of the city of Toronto, in the 
county of York, in the Province of Ontario, 
Canada, gentleman, have invented a certain 
new and useful Rail-Scraper for Street and 
other Railways, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
The object of the invention is to design an 
effective rail-scraper which will always keep 
the same distance from the track, notwith 
standing any vertical movement of the body 
of the car; and it consists, essentially, of a 
shoe having a plow-shaped nose formed on its 
toe and a wheel or roller journaled within it, 
So as to rest upon the rail and support the 
shoe, which shoe has a shank fitting loosely 
into a sleeve securely braced to the bottom of 
the car, substantially as hereinafter more par 
ticularly explained. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing my 
improved scraper attached in position. Fig. 
2 is an enlarged sectional elevation of my im 
proved scraper. 
In the drawings, A represents one of the 
wheels of a street-railway car resting on the 
rail B. C is a hollow sleeve securely bolted 
and braced to the bottom timber D of the car. 
E is a shank fitting into the sleeve C, and 
having formed on its bottom end a shoe, F, 
which is shaped, as shown, so as to receive the 
wheel or roller G, which is journaled in it as 
indicated. 
H is a plow-shaped nose attached to the 
toe of the shoe F, and shaped substantially as 
shown, having a lip, a, on its inner side, so 
as to project below the bottom of the rail B, 
in order to clear a space for the flange of the 
wheel. It will be noticed that the upper por 
tion of the plow His curved forwardly, so as 
to cast any snow or ice which it may have 
gathered down onto the track in front of it, 
which will more effectually cause the said 
SnOW. Ol' ice to be cast on either side of the 
track instead of passing over the top of the 
plow H, were it to slant backwardly, in which 
case, the snow or ice gathered by the plow 
would fall behind the wheel or roller G and in 
terfere with the wheel A. 
Small friction-rollers b are journaled in the 
sleeve C, as shown, the one at the bottom of 
the sleeve being in the rear, while the one at 
the top is on the front side of the shank, so that 
any strain on the shank E caused by the 
- 
6 
plow performing its work will be met and 
5 
curried by the rollers b; consequently the 
sleeve C will move freely vertically on the 
shank to accommodate any vertical move 
ment in the body of the car without in any 
way altering the position of the Scraper 
proper. 
As it is sometimes necessary to raise the 
scraper clear of the track, I attach to the up 
per end of the shank E a cord or chain, I, 
passing it over a sheave pulley, J, journaled 
on the top of the sleeve. This cord or chain 
I, I carry to a point where it can be conven 
iently acted upon by the driver, either con 
necting it to the brake-handle or providing a 
special handle for it. 
It will of course be understood that the 
shank E must be so formed that while Work 
ing freely vertically within the sleeve C it 
cannot turn round in the said sleeve. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A rail - scraper composed of a plow 
shaped nose, H, attached to the toe of the 
shoe F, which has journaled within it a 
wheel or roller, G, in combination with the 
sleeve C, securely fastened to the bottom of 
the car, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. A rail - scraper composed of a plow 
shaped nose, H., having a lip, (t, and attached 
to the toe of the shoe F, which has journaled 
within it a wheel or roller, G, in combina 
tion with the sleeve C, securely fastened to 
the bottom of the car, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
3. The wheel or roller G, arranged to Sup 
port the shoe F, to which the plow-shaped 
nose H is attached, a shank, E, extending up 
wardly from the shoe F and fitting into the 
hollow sleeve C, in combination with the fric 
tion-rollers b, arranged substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
4. The wheel or roller G, arrangcd to Sup 
port the shoe F, to which the plow-shaped 
nose H is attached, a shank, E, extending up 
wardly from the shoe F and fitting into the 
hollow sleeve C, in combination with the 
friction-rollers b and cord or chain I, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
W. H. ROBERTSON. 
Toronto, March 18, 1885. 
In presence of - 
95 
90 
OC 
'HAs. C. BALDWIN, 
F. BARNARD FETHERSTONHAUGH. 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324831.txt	(No Model.) 
J. GERHARDT, 
CAR TRUCK. 
No. 324,831, 
Patented Aug. 25, 1885. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN GERHARDT, OF MONTREAL, QUEBEC, CANADA, ASSIGNOR TO SAMUEL 
DAVIS, OF SAME PIACE. 
- 
CARTRUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No.324,831, dated August 25, 1885. 
Application filed February 3, 1885. 
(No model.) Patented in Canada February 12, 1885, No. 21,093. 
55 
distance and provided with jam-nuts bb, to 5o 
Be it known that I, JoHN GERHARDT, of secure it in place. 
To all, whom it may concern. 
The distance apart of these 
the city of Montreal, in the district of Mon- jam-nuts gives the amount of play, and they 
treal and Province of Quebec, Canada, have 
may, for greater security, be doubled or pro 
invented a certain new and useful Improved 
vided with lock-nuts. To prevent the wear 
Safety - Truck Appliance for Railway-Cars; 
of the thread on the rod by friction in the ap 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
erture of A, Islip over it at that point a 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same. 
sleeve, b'. (Shown in detail in Fig. 3.) On 
My invention has for its object to prevent 
the other end of the rod B is formed an eye, 
the trucks of a railway-car from slewing or 
B, corresponding to a double eye formed on 
ditching when from any cause-such as an 
the end of a plate, C, secured, as shown in the 
open switch or any other form of derailment 
drawings, to the angle of the truck-frame D, 
the wheels leave the track; and, further, in 
the junction being made by an eyebolt or 
such a case, to keep the trucks in their usual 
rivet, c, or in any other usual way. 
position with respect to the car. Besides this, 
As shown in Fig. 1, this construction may 
my invention will be equally effective in keep 
be slightly modified, the principle, however, 
ing the truck-frames parallel with the car in 
remaining the same. The rods B may be taken 
the case of a broken axle. It may be briefly 
obliquely to a single plate, A, secured to the 
described as consisting in the attachment 
car-frame at some point on its longitudinal 
loosely of the truck-frames to the framing of 
axis and doubly perforated to receive the ends 
the car by rods placed on either side of such 
of both. 
trucks. These rods are usually, although not 
In some cases it may be found desirable to 
necessarily, attached to the truck-frames on 
do away altogether with the plates A A and 
their inner sides at or near the corners, and 
carry the rods, in the one case, through the 
thence are preferably taken up obliquely to 
transverse stringers, and, in the other, through 
and secured to the longitudinals of the car at 
the longitudinals, these being perforated for 
a point or points nearer to the center than the 
the purpose and strengthened by plates on 
trucks. Sufficient play is allowed to permit 
either side. 
the trucks to accommodate themselves to 
Another modification which may be made 
curves, the amount of radiation required be 
is the substitution for the jam and lock nuts 
ing adjusted at will. 
of a shoulder formed on the rod, and a cotter 
For full comprehension of the invention ref. 
inserted into such rod at the distance required 
erence must be had to the annexed drawings, 
to afford the necessary play. 
forming part of this specification, in which 
Either of the constructions above described 
Figure 1 is a plan of the under side of a car 
(which are simply modifications of the pri 
body, looking up, one of the trucks shown be 
mary idea) allows the truck to swivel on the 
ing that of a passenger-car and the other that 
king-bolt sufficiently to accommodate itself to 
of a freight-car. Fig. 2 is a side view of the 
curvature, the amount of play being, as be 
above, and Figs. 3 and 4 details of the fasten 
fore mentioned, regulated by the distance 
ings of the rods. 
apart of the jam-nuts or shoulder and cotter. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
play it is impossible for the truck to slew,' 
partS. 
AA are plates, secured by bolts or other 
and that therefore whenever from any cause 
suitable means to the under side of the longi 
the wheels of a truck leave the track the truck 
tudinals at, preferably, about the positions 
is still held by the rods in the proper position 
shown in the drawings, A' being perforated 
with relation to the car and the wheels follow 95 
projections or bosses cast or formed on same. 
the track, thus doing away with the chance 
Through this projection passes one end of a 
of ditching, going down embankments, and all 
rod, B, which is preferably threaded for some 
accidents of this class, 
It is obvious that beyond this amount of go 
75 
. 
IC 
25 
35 
45 
2 
324,83i 
O 
25 
It will also be noticed that any strain upon B are connected, and plates A, secured to 
longitudinals to which such rods are adjust 
ably attached, as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
3. The combination, with a car truck and 
body, of sliding rods B, stops b on such rods, 
and a sleeve, b, substantially as described. 
4. In combination with a car frame and 
truck, rods extending from the truck to the 
frame and sliding in such frame, and stops on 
said rods to limit their motion, substantially 
as described. 
JOHN GERHARDT. 
the rods is in the direction of their length, and 
therefore of their greatest strength. 
My invention is applicable to freight-cars 
of all kinds, passenger-cars and sleepers, and 
can also be fitted to the trucks of locomotives 
and their tenders. In no case is any altera 
tion required in the present mechanism for 
brakes, &c. 
Having thus described my invention, I beg 
to state that what I claim is as follows: 
1. The combination, with the trucks of a 
railway-car, of sliding rods connecting them 
to the car-frame, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
2. The combination, with the truck-frames 
of a car, of plates C, to which the sliding rods 
Witnesses: 
FRAS. HY. REYNOLDS, 
OWEN N. EVANS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US324931.txt	(No Model.) 
P, FLEURY 
SPINNING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets--Sheet, 1. 
No. 324,931, 
w 
t 
Patented Aug. 25, 1885. 
w 
w 
Q 
l 
Mzerves. 
Zaeezzz2. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
P, FLEURY. 
SPINNING MACHINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 324,931, 
Patented Aug. 25, 1885. 
- 
) 
sis 
(e) 
a EEL 
W- SSSIs 
is 1 
er 
t Q 
S 
l 
'ssf 
N 
-E 
S. 
ser 
s 
T 
IEEEEEEEEEEEEEENFE 
-- 
ELIHEAEIIIHIIIHIAHIEEE 
to 
EE 
/7ZZzzesses. 
Shefflue/ 
W 
Azzazza: 
7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
PAUL FLEURY, OF GONNEVILLE, FRANCE. 
SPNNNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 324,931, dated August 25, 1885. 
Application filed September 12, 1882. (No model.) Patented in France July 25, 1881, No. 144, 223; in Belgium November 17, 1$Si, 
No 5.6,257; in England November 18, 1881, No. 5,059, and in Austria-Hungary May 25, 1852, No. 10,727/1,001 and No. 20,293/1,000. 
O 
To all Luhon, it naily concern: 
Beit known that I, PAULFLEURY, of Gonne 
ville, France, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Spinning-Machines, (for 
which I have obtained a patent in France, No. 
144,223, July 25, 1881; in Belgium, No. 56,257, 
November 17, 1881; in Austria - Hungary 
No. 10,727 / 1,001 and No. 20,293 / 1,000, May 
25, 1882, and in England, No. 5,059, No. 
vember 18, 1881;) and I do declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon, 
forming a part of this specification. 
The object of my invention is chiefly to pro 
vide improved mechanism for raising the trav 
erse rails of spinning - machines at regular 
intervals, so that the bobbins supported there 
on may also be correspondingly raised while 
in rotation to properly wind the thread on the 
Sae. 
The nature of my invention will be fully 
described below, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an end view of 
a part of a spinning-Inachine with my improve 
ment attached thereto. Fig. 2 is an end view, 
partly in vertical section. Fig. 3 is a front 
view thereof, showing but one of the spindles, 
in order to better represent some of the other 
partS. 
A is a drum which, through suitable bands, 
rotates the spindles and receives motion from 
prime motor, in any of the well-known 
the 
ways. The said drum is located between the 
ends of the frame P, and is mounted on the 
shaft (t. At one end of the drum-shaft, pro 
jecting without the frame, is mounted a worm, 
C, driving a worm-wheel, D. On the shaft of 
the worm-wheel D is a second worm, E, which 
also drives a worm-wheel, F, below it. The 
shaft of worm-wheel F is short, and only ex 
tends slightly within the lower part of frame 
P. Between the end of the frame and the 
wheel F this shaft carries an elliptical cam, G, 
the purpose of which is to depress by its pro 
jections the lever Hat regular intervals. The 
said lever is pivoted at I to f bracket, I', which 
extends up as a support for the journal of the 
shaft carrying the worm-wheel D and worm 
E. See Fig.1. To the free end of the leverisat 
tached one end of the chain J', by means of an 
adjustable screw-bolt, t. The other end of the 
chain passes partly around and is fastened to a 
pulley, K', arranged on One end of an oscillat 
ing or rock shaft, L, located between the ends of 
the frame of the machine. The said chain 
transmits motion from the lever to the shaft 
L, and the purpose of making the former ad 
justable as to length in connection with the 
lever and shaft is to regulate or limit the throw 
of the traverse rails Z, Z through the shaft 
L and its connections with them, which will 
plesently be described. The shorter the chain 
J' the higher will be the traverse, and vice 
versa. The shaft L is also provided with two 
more pulleys, KK, (see Fig. 3,) and from these 
depend chains J J', which are fastened to the 
under side of cross-heads iN N' by adjustable 
screw bolts or pinst t. From the cross-heads 
the vertical rods M M extend upward, and 
are suitably joined at their upper ends to the 
traverse rails. It will now be seen how the 
shaft L is connected with the traverse rails 
and gives them vertical motion as it oscillates. 
(See Fig. 3.) 
At each end of the traverse rails Z, Z pro 
ject two pins, p p", and to permit of an en 
gagement with the frame of the machine the 
latter is vertically slotted at ' '. Hence the 
pins and slots constitute devices for guiding the 
said rails and limiting the lateral play thereof. 
The bobbins S S are supported on the trav 
erse rails Z, Z, and the latter have notches i 
i extending across the upper edge of the front 
portion. From these at regular intervals de 
pend weights w ac, which, through the cords 
by which they are suspended, serve to exert a 
drag on the bobbins as they are revolved to 
wind the thread. The spindless s' have the 
usual fliers at the top, and pass down through 
the traverse rails and rest upon the step-rails 
O O", arranged between the ends of the frame. 
The spindles are provided with whirls TT, 
and between these and the drum A a band is 
arranged, So that the drum may rotate the 
spindles at the same time it is transmitting 
motion to the traverse rails. 
The operation of my devices is briefly this: 
When the projections of the cam on the shaft 
25 
35 
45 
EO 
55 
So 
95 
OO 
2 
324,931 
of wheel F assume a vertical position, the le. 
ver is pressed down, and the chain J", shaft 
I, chains J J', cross-heads N N', and rods M 
M' lift the traverse rails to their upward limit. 
When the projections of the cam are hori 
Zontal, the parts fall by gravity, except the le 
ver, which is drawn up to be again depressed. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
. The combination of the lever H. With the 
actuating-cam G, the worm-wheel F, and its 
shaft, the worm E, worm-wheel D, worm C, 
and the drum-shafta, the adjustable chain J", 
pulley K", and the shaft L, pulleys K. K", 
chains J J', cross-heads N N', vertical rods M 
M", and the traverse rails Z, Z, as set forth. 
IO 
2. The combination of the lever H with the 
actuating-cam G, the worm-wheel F and its 
shaft, the worm E, worm-wheel D, worm C, 2O 
and the drum-shafta, the adjustable chain J', 
pulley K", and the shaft L, pulleys K K", 
chains J J', cross-heads NN", vertical rods M 
M, the traverse rails Z, Z', having side pins, p 
p', and the frame having the guide-slots ' ', 25 
as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 14th day of 
December, 18S1. 
PAUL FLEURY. 
Witnesses: 
L LEVEQUE, 
LE SIMON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325031.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH L. WELLS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WESTON & WELLS MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF CAMDEN, N. J. 
BU STE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 325,031, dated August 25, 1885. 
Application filed April 14, 1885. 
(No model.) 
IO 
25 
2O the free ends of the wires. 
To all twi-On, it inctly conceit, . 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH L. WELLs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city and county of Philadelphia, and State of 
5 Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Bustles, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, of which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a tube of 
braided wire of which my invention is con 
structed. Fig. 2 is a perspective view looks 
ing upon the upper side of the completed 
bustle. Fig. 3 is an outline as of a section 
I5 thereof through the middle, further showing 
the shape of the article. Figs. 4 and 5 are, 
respectively, longitudinal, sectional, and per 
spective views of one end of the bustle, illus 
trating the manner of protecting and securing 
This invention relates to that kind or class 
of bustles for ladies wear which are con 
structed of spring-wire braided in hollow or 
approximately tubular form. 
The object of the invention is, mainly, to 
improve the construction of the bustle in such 
manner that the greatest strength and elastic 
resistance are directed or Secured at and to 
ward the middle of the crescentic or double 
3o tapering skeleton tube, which is the general 
form of a woven-Wire bustle. 
A second object of the invention is to pro 
vide an improved means for securing the free 
ends of the braided wires, all as hereinafter 
The wires w, preferably of steel, are braided 
to form a skeleton tube of uniform diameter, 
such as that shown in the side elevation, Fig. 
1. The extremities of the wires at the respect 
4o ive ends of the tube are brought or bunched 
together and secured by means of a metal clip, 
the wires being soldered to said clips. This 
forms a hollow double cone or roll. This roll, 
or two or more of the same arranged one near 
45 ly above the other, is or are secured to a strap 
or straps-such as that marked S in Fig. 2 of 
the annexed drawings-Whereby the article is 
suitably fastened around the waist. 
It will be understood that when the bustle 
5o is in use the greatest pressure comes against, 
35 to be described. 
and the greatest resistance is required at, the 
middle or more projecting part of the article. 
Consequently it will be obvious that it is de 
sirable to secure increased strength at and 
about that portion of the bustle, and this with- 55 
out increasing its weight. I accomplish this 
result by drawing together the wires of the 
aforesaid tubular fabric, Fig. 1, toward the 
middle on the inner side, which bears against 
the person's back, and setting or fixing them 6o 
permanently in that position, so that the wires 
are, so to say, massed as much as possible 
closely together at and toward the middle, as 
shown in Fig. 2. The result of such distribu 
tion of the wires is, that a very much greater 65 
resistance is secured at and about the middle 
of the bustle, with only the usual quantity and 
weight of wire. I fix the wires in this rela 
tion in two ways-one by drawing the tem 
pered wires together toward the middle from 7o 
or near the ends, as indicated by the bracket 
and arrows in Fig. 1, by means of a wire or 
cord, and then fastening the ends of the lat 
ter, and the other, which is preferred, by 
drawing or setting the untempered wires to. 75 
gether in like manner and afterward temper 
ing the same, when they retain the positions 
to which they are thus originally set. 
Although not essential, I prefer to make the 
bustle of the general shape in cross-section in 89 
the middle as seen in Fig. 3-that is, ovoid 
and somewhat flattened and curved on the 
under side-whereby the bustle is adapted to 
snugly rest upon the back of the wearer, and 
a gracefully-curving support is afforded to the 85 
overhanging skirt. 
The article is attached to the buckle-strap S 
in the usual manner, whereby it is secured 
around the waist of the person, the great flexi 
bility of the braided fabric permitting it to 9C 
accommodate itself to the contour of the Wear 
er. The extremities of the Wires are secured 
together by inserting them in a clip or hollow 
plate of metal, C, and bending over the latter 
with the wires ac, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 
I sometimes insert the wires in an opening 
in a hollow sheet-metal button and bend over 
the wires within the button, the wires being 
bent within said button, either by pressing 
their ends against the inside face of the button IOO 
95 
: 
325,033, 
or by forcing the two disks or sides of the but 
ton together. I have shown such a hollow 
button device in an application for Letters 
Patent for a braided-wire bosom-pad filed by 
me on the 12th day of March, 1SS5, Serial No. 
158,527. 
It will be seen that by means of this fasten 
ing device the use of solder is dispensed with, 
while the ends of the wires are securely held 
and protected. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and wish to secure by Letters Patent 
1. A bustle consisting of a braided-wire 
tube having its ends contracted and confined 
O 
and attached to a suitable strap, the internie- 15 
diate portion adjacent to the strap being 
bunched and secured to the same, Substan 
tially as and for the purposes specified. 
2. In combination with the wire braided 
bustle, the hollow metallic end clips having 20 
said wires inserted and bent over therein, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
Intestimony whereofI have hereunto affixed 
my signature this 11th day of April, A.D. 1885. 
JOSEPH L WELLS. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN NOLAN, 
JOHN BRUNER JONES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325131.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. H. STEWENSON, 
METHOD OF FILLING FRUIT CANS WITH LIQUIDS, 
No. 325, 131, 
 
5 22 
See ---E- 
2XZ2222222222222222222222222222 
s 
 
WTNESSES: 
14- 62-6. 
INVENOR: 
rs...h6!...ru 
Attorney. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D., c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM. H. H. STEVENSON, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
VEH OD OF FILNG FRUIT- CAN S W T H QUID. 
3 PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 325,131, dated August 25, 1885. 
Application filed January 26, 1885. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
To all, whon, if n (tgy conce/ft, : 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. H. STEVEN 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Baltimore, in the State of Maryland, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in a Method for Filling Fruit-Cans with Liq 
lids, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
lingS. 
In packing hermetically sealed goods the cans 
are first filled ordinarily with the same-such 
as fruit, vegetables, &c.-after which a certain 
amount of water, sirup, or any desired liquor 
is applied. The cans are then capped, sealed, 
and processed. 
My invention relates to a method of filling 
the cans with liquids, which is now principally 
done by hand; and it consists of submerging 
the cans, after they have been filled and capped, 
but not sealed, in the liquid with which the 
cans are to be filled, and then creating a vac. 
uum therein, which permits the said liquid to 
enter the cans, thereby filling the same. 
As illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, a device is shown by which my method 
is exemplified, in which Figure 1 is a side view 
with parts in section; Fig. 2, an enlarged de 
tail view of the can in section, showing the 
holes in the cap and part of the packing de 
vice, and Fig. 3 a top view of the can. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The letter A. designates the vessel which 
contains the liquid with which the cans are to 
be filled; C, a reciprocating chamber, in which 
a vacuum is created by any desired means, 
and which is communicated thereto by the 
hose a. From the chamber C project pipest), 
which are provided at the end with a flexible 
packing, b, which makes a tight joint between 
the cans d and the ends of the pipes b, the 
said device being provided with suitable 
guide-rods, e, counter-weights f, and inter 
mediate mechanism, whereby the whole is 
counterbalanced. 
The tray B, in which the cans d are placed, 
is provided with a perforated bottom and suit 
able guides, g, which pass loosely through the 
frame of the chamber C, weights h, and pulley 
mechanism, whereby the same is reciprocated 
and counterbalanced similar to the chamber 
C, which work in unison thereto, as herein 
after explained in the operation, as follows: 
In the vessel A is placed the liquid with 
which the cans are to be supplied, and the 
chamber C and the tray B raised. The cans, 
which have been previously filled with goods 
and capped, are then placed in said tray, With 
the opening i in the cap opposite the opening 
l, in the packing, with the vent or inlet port 
m, to one side of same. (See Fig. 2.) The 
chamber C is then pressed down, and with it 
the tray B, by the packing b coming in con 
tact with the top of the cans, thereby making 
a tight joint between the two. The whole is 
then pressed down until the tops of the cans 
are submerged, and held in that position until 
the cans are filled. After the cans are Sub 
merged a vacuum is formed in the chamber C 
by opening a valve in the pipect, which commu 
nicates with vacuum mechanism, thereby ex 
hausting the air in the cans, which permits 
the same to fill with the fluid through the 
port in by the action of the atmospheric 
pressure. After the filling has taken place 
the valve in the pipe ( is closed and the cham 
ber Cand tray B are raised, the cans removed, 
sealed, and processed, and another lot placed 
therein, and SO on. 
By this method the cans are quickly and 
thoroughly filled with the liquid at a nominal 
expense and by unskilled persons. 
Tomatoes and moist-like goods may be filled. 
by this method, provided the port in is large 
enough to admit the same. 
I do not herein claim anything pertaining 
to the mechanism, as the same is fully detailed 
and more thoroughly shown and described in 
an application for United States Letters Pat 
ent for the same, which was filed by me April 
10, 18S4, No. 127,391, and allowed. 
Having fully described my invention, What 
I claim, and wish to secure by United States 
Letters Patent, is 
first submerging the cans in the liquid with 
which they are to be fillied, and while sub 
merged exhausting the air or forming a vac 
uum in the can or cans, whereby the liquid is 
caused to pass therein. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM. H. H. STEVENSON. 
In filling cans with liquids, the method of 95 
8 5 
Witnesses: 
M. H. PLUN KETT, 
WA. B. NEISON. 
55 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325231.txt	(No Model.) 
H. G. BADGLEY. 
SEWER TRAP AND CESS POOL 
No. 325,231, 
Patented Sept. 1, 1885. 
 
  
 
s 
- 
Maesses. 
-22a-2-4-1 . A 
Zeolor 
16-26.2% 
ze 4. 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIOWARD G. BADGLEY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SEWERTRAP AND CESS PO O. 
3PECIFICATIOE icrning part of Letters Patent No. 325,231, dated September 1, 1885. 
Application filed September 15, 1SS4. (No modei.) 
O 
To all tuf-07, it Hictly co7.cert. 
Be it known that I, HO WARD G. BADGLEY, 
of the city of New York, in the county and 
State of New York, and a citizen of the United 
States of America, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Sewer-Traps and Cess. 
pool-Boxes, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of the same, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of a trap or 
bOX embodying my invention on line aca, Fig. 
2, and Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the same 
on line q, y, Fig. 1, showing the partition here 
inafter described in eievation. 
My invention relates to water-traps con 
nected with Sewel's or cesspool-boxes; and it 
consists in the combinations of devices here 
ina?ter described and claimed. 
A is the body of the trap, which may be of 
any Suitable form or material. The One shown 
has a rectangular base, (t, and vertical sides 
(t' ('C', the fourth side, a, being preferably 
vertical for a portion of its length, then extend 
ing in an oblique direction toward the side (t 
for about half the width of the body of the 
trap, and then directly upward for a short 
distance until it reaches the height of the side 
(c. 
(t" and a' are of a form and size adapted 
to inclose the space between a? and a and 
leave all aperture, b, at the top. The side a 
is provided with an opening, c, preferably 
flanged, for connection with the sewel-pipe, 
and all Opening, c', above the opening c, for 
connection with the ventilating-leader, its po 
sition being preferably such that the ventilat 
ing-leader may extend there from slightly lbelow 
the top of the trap. 
B is a removable partition which extends 
from side to side of the body of the trap and 
reaches from the top of the trap to a point 
somewhat below the level of the opening c. 
It is fitted to form an air-tight joint with the 
top and sides of the trap. This is preferably 
Secured by forming grooves in the side walls, 
(t (t", as shown in Fig. 1, and partially filling 
said grooves with red lead before inserting 
the partition. I usually make the partition 
the full length of the trap and provide open 
ings extending from below the level of opening 
c to or near the bottom of the trap, as seen 
in Fig.2. This partition, it is obvious, divides 
the body of the trap into two chambers, A 
and A', having open communication at the 
botton). 
C is the cover, formed preferably with a 
rabbataround its edge, so that it will fit closely 
into and upon the top of the trap. This cover 
has a strainer, D, preferably provided with a 
Screw thread that screws into a threaded Open 
ing in said cover, and lugs did are formed on 
the under side of the cover of the trap, and 
also on the sides of the trap, the latter, d", 
being pierced with holes and arranged in such 
relative positions to those on the cover, which 
have the form of pins, that said pins d will fit 
into the holesind", where they niay be secured 
by a pin or nut or any other suitable means. 
The strainer D, being removable, enables a 
workman to easily reach and unfasten the 
cover from the trap when necessary, while it 
is securely attached at all other times, and the 
fastenings are entirely out of the way of per 
sons passing over the trap, which is intended 
to be placed in the ground with the cover level 
with its surface. 
Water entering into the trap through the 
stainer rises in both chambel's until it reaches 
the level of the opening c, and thereafter flows 
off into the sewer, while all gas and foul odol's 
are prevented by the water-seal at the bottom 
of the trap and the partition above it from 
passing into and escaping through chamber 
A", but naturally pass off through opening c 
in chamber A* to the ventilating-leader. 
The partition B being easily removed per 
mits the sewer-connection and the trap itself 
to be readily cleared of any obstruction with 
out taking up the trap. 
I do not limit myself to the exact form or 
arrangement of the parts, as they may be con 
siderably varied without departing from the 
spirit of my invention. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a sewer-trap pro 
vided with a lug or lugs on the inside near its 
top, of a cover having an opening adapted to 
receive a removable straineralnd provided With 
means for securing said cover to the lugs in 
side of the trap, the same being so located as 
to be accessible through the opening in the 
cover, as and for the purpose specified. 
2. A sewer-trap divided into two chambers, 
3 5 
55 
SC 
IOO 
1. 
 
2. 
325,23. 
with open communication between them at 
or near one end, one of said chambers being 
provided with an inlet above the level of said 
opening, and the other chamber being provided 
with an outlet above the level of said opening 
and below the level of the inlet in the first 
chamber and a second outlet above the level 
of the first outlet, as and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
3. A sewer-trap divided into two chambers 
by a removable partition, with open commu 
nication between them at or near One end, 
one of said chambers being provided with an 
inlet above the level of said opening, and the 
other chamber being provided with an outlet 
above the level of said opening and below the 
Cy 
level of the opening in the first chanaber, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
4. A sewer-trap divided into two chambers 
by a removable partition, with open commu- 2d 
nication between them at or near one end, 
one of Said chambers being provided with an 
inlet above the level of said opening, and the 
other chamber being provided with an outlet 
above the level of said opening and below the 25 
level of the inlet in the first chamber and a 
Second Outlet above the level of the first out 
let, all as and for the purpose described. 
HOWARD G. BADGLEY. 
Witnesses: 
A. G. N. VERMILYE, 
D. J. PALMER HERRICK. 
s -: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325332.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 325,332, 
W, FLAGG, 
STEAM BOILER, 
Patented Sept, l, 1885. 
ESSSSSSSSSSSS 
22 
s SSSSSSSS 
 
  
  
 
22222 
s 
S 
SSaaSSWyay:WSNSSSSSSSSAS 
GNilssless RS 
33 SEESN35 s 
SS SL st-M 
SV SV 
S 
SS 
(2-(. Oe 72 ele----e--- 
22. 2%. 22.4%. 
By Mis Attorneys 
W2Cline A Zagg. 
... Perers, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM FLAGG, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
STEAM - BOLE. R. 
sFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 325,332, dated September 1, 1885. 
Application filed June 2, 1885. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all, whom, it may concept: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM FLAGG, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Steam - Boilers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
tubular steam-boilers of the class in which 
there is kept up a forced circulation of the 
water being converted into steam; and my ob 
ject, mainly, is to provide for rapidly gener 
ating steam with a minimum amount of fuel. 
My invention consists in a novel organiza 
tion of parts, and in certain combinations of 
devices, to be particularly pointed out by the 
claims, after being first described by the aid of 
the accompanying drawings, which show its 
application to a marine boiler. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation, and Fig. 2 a. 
view, partly in vertical longitudinal central 
Section and partly in side elevation, repre 
Senting all those parts of the boiler illustration 
of which is required to convey a proper un 
derstanding of a suitable adaptation of my im 
provements. 
The boiler shell or casing Ahas double ends 
or heads BC. As shown, the front head, B, 
is formed of inner and outer plates, bib', and 
the rear head of inner and outer plates, ec", 
the plates of the respective heads being suit 
ably bolted together. The water-spaces a d, 
thus provided between the plates of the double 
heads, extend uninterruptedly from side to 
side, or entirely across the boiler, and may be 
divided by separating-partitions into any de 
sired number of smaller spaces of the full width 
of the boiler to control the course of the water 
and insure its proper circulation, as soon to 
be described. 
A large number of small water, circulating 
boiler-tubes, D, of, say, an inch or less in diam 
eter, (shown as arranged in parallel rows in a 
heating - chamber, E, ) communicate at their 
opposite ends with the front and rear water 
Spaces, and the flames and heated products of 
combustion pass from the fire-box F, along by 
way of this boiler-tube heating-chamber E, 
between and in contact with the boiler-tubes, 
the waste products of combustion finding out 
let by way of the smoke-stack G. 
As in this instance shown, the water-space 
d of the rear head of the boiler is undivided, 
and the water-space of the opposite head is 
separated by a partition, a?, into upper and 
lower parts, the lower portion being of less 
vertical area than the upper, and communi 
cating with the front erds of the three lower 
most rows of boiler-tubes. As before stated, 
the water-spaces (both the front and the real' 
spaces) may be separated into any desired suit 
able number of parts by partitions extending 
across the spaces, and it is not necessary that 
the relative sizes of the upper and OW'er pol 
tions of the water-space a be such as shown. 
A steam chamber or dome, H, from which 
the steam passes by an outlet-pipe, i, as usual, 
is connected by means of an inlet-pipe, 1, 
with the boiler. This boiler-connecting pipe 
I enters the steam-dome at or near its top, and 
this pipe at its lower end connects with the 
upper end of the front water-space or head of 
the boiler. A deflecting-plate, i, Secured at 
its upper edge to the inner top surface of the 
steam-dome, projects downwardly a sufficient 
distance to direct the incoming water toward 
the bottom of the steam-dome. This deflector 
terminates at its lower end above the Water 
level, is inclined, (see Fig. 2.) and serves, as 
will further on be made apparent, to prevent 
the water as it enters forcibly into the steam 
dome from commingling with the dry steam, 
which accumulates in the upper part of the 
steam-done. The steam entering from the 
inlet-pipe to the dome finds its way beneath 
the deflector to the upper part or steam space 
of the dome in obvious way. 
Near the lower end of the steam-dome a 
water-circulating pipe, K, communicates with 
it. The lower end of this return-pipe coin 
municates with a feed-water tank or drum, L. 
The feed-water is supplied to this drum as 
needed by a pipe, l, in well-known way. 
A water-circulating pipe, MI, makes Com 
municating connection between the feed-Water 
drum and the boiler. As in this instance 
shown, this water-circulating pipe M connects 
at one end with one end of the feed-Water 
drum near its top, and at its opposite end or 
upright portion, n, this pipe communicates 
with the lower portion of the front water 
space, ct, of the boiler. The upright pipe in 
enters this water-space near the bottom thereof. 
25 
35 
45 
75 
SO 
OO 
325,332 
A suitable pump, N, operated in appropriate 
well-known way, serves to keep up a forced 
circulation of water through the boiler. 
From the above description it will be seen 
that when the pump is in operation water will 
be forced from the feed-water drum into the 
front water-space of the boiler, through the 
lower boiler-tubes to the back water-space, 
thence through the water-tubes above the par 
tition a, and by way of the front and back 
water-spaces and the circulating-pipe I into 
the steam-dome, to the bottom of which the 
hot water passes, and thence by way of re 
turn water-circulating pipe K back to the 
feed - water drum, and warming the water 
therein preparatory to its being forced through 
the boiler, as the circulation is continuously 
kept up. It will be seen that as the feed 
Waterisheated and a very largeheating-surface 
provided the steam is rapidly generated with 
but slight consumption of fuel, the boiler-tubes 
being of such small diameter that the water 
Within them is very rapidly heated. 
In order that the boiler may be kept in 
operation for short periods, as occasion may 
require, . Without using the pump to keep up 
a forced circulation of the water, an auxiliary 
communicating-pipe, O, is provided to direct 
the Water from the feed-water drum to the 
upright portion m of the pipe, which makes 
Communication between the feed-water drum 
and the boiler-front. The auxiliary commu 
nicating-pipe O is provided with valves o P. 
When the regular operation of the boiler is 
going On-that is, when the pump is in oper 
tion-the valves o P are closed, and when the 
pump is out of operation and the pipe O in 
use the valve 0 is open. Valves g g are pro 
vided in the communicating - pipe M, and 
these valves are of course open when the 
pump is at work. They are closed should the 
pump get out of order, or when the pump is 
out of action and the auxiliary communicat 
ing-pipe is being employed. The auxiliar 
communicating-pipe serves as a blow-off pipe, 
and when so used both of its valves are of 
course open. 
A short pipe, R, provided with a valve, , 
connects the pipe I with the lower part of 
the dome H. Ordinarily the valver is closed; 
but when the pump is not in action this 
valve is opened and facilitates the operation of 
the boiler when a natural circulation is going 
Ol. 
Although I have described but one organi 
Zation of my improvements, I do not wish to 
be understood as confining my invention in 
all respects to the details of construction and 
arrangement specifically described, as, ob 
viously, my invention may be modified in 60 
such ways as to adapt it for use in connection 
with boilers differing somewhat from that 
particularly described herein. 
I claim as of my own invention 
1. The combination of the feed-water drum, 65 
the front and rear water-spaces of the boiler, 
the boiler-tubes, means by which the boiler 
has communicating connection with the feed 
Water drum, the steam-dome, the water-cir 
culating pipe having inlet communication 7o 
with it and communicating with the boiler, 
and the return-water-circulating pipe commu 
nicating with the steam-dome and feed-water 
drum, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. The combination of the boiler-tubes, the 
inner and outer plates constituting the front 
water-space extending from side to side of 
the boiler, the partition a?, and the inner and 
Outer plates constituting the rear water-space, 8O 
likewise extending from side to side of the 
boiler, Substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
3. The combination of the boiler, the steam 
dome, the water-circulating pipe by which 85 
the Water ascends from the boiler to the steam 
dome, the return-Water-circulating pipe, the 
feed - Water drum communicating with the 
steam-dome by Way of the return-water-cir 
culating pipe, means by which the Water is 9o 
Conducted from the feed-Water drum to the 
boiler, and the pump by which a forced cir 
culation of the water through the boiler and 
Water-circulating pipes is kept up, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of the boiler, the steam 
dome, its deflector projecting downwardly 
and terminating above the water-level, and 
the pipe I, connecting the steam dome and 
boiler and from which the water issues against IOO 
the deflector, substantially as and for the pur 
OSe Set forth. 
5. The combination of the feed-water drum, 
the boiler, the pipe M. m., having communica 
tion with the boiler and feed-water drum, the Io5 
pump, the pipe O, the valves of the pipes M 
and O, the steam-dome, the water-circulating 
pipe I, and the return-water-circulating pipe, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
Scribed my name. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub- IIo 
95 
WILLIAM FLAGG. 
Witnesses: 
BENJ. A. MORRISON, 
BENEDICT MARTELLA. 
y p 
IO 
25 
35 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325432.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 325,432. 
ziz 
S. A. MOULTON. 
CULTIVATOR, 
Patented Sept. 1, 1885. 
  
 
 
 
 
S g 
ES 
E 7. 
Eff YE 
(X) 
7TWESSES 
El 
2 
/ 2. / 
() () () 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1 
TE 
 
(X) 
ay G261 sys 
7-3 Attorney S 
Z, ( 
N. PETERS, Picto-tithasrapher. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STILLMAN AUGUSTUS MOULTON, OF SAN JOSE, CALIFORNIA. 
CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 325,432, dated September 1, 1885. 
Application filed May 27, 1885. (No motle.) 
55 
To all tufton, it may eOnce77: 
Beit known that I, STILIMAN A. MoULTON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing. at San 
Jos, in the county of Santa Clara and State 
of California, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Cultivators, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
cultivators adapted especially for use in or 
chards; and it consists in the peculiar con 
struction and combination of devices that will 
be more fully set forth hereinafter, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
- 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of a cultivator embodying my invention, with 
the near wheel removed. Fig. 2 is a top plan 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a front elevation. 
The frame A of the cultivator consists, es 
sentially, of the transverse beams B and C 
and the longitudinal connecting-beams D. 
E represents brackets that are secured to 
the inner side at the center of the beams C, 
their securing-bolts passing through slots e 
that are made in the brackets. Similar slot 
ted brackets, F, are secured to the upper side 
at the center of the front beam, B. 
G represents a tongue, the rear end of which 
is bolted between the brackets E and F. By 
reason of the slots in the brackets the tongue 
may be adjusted laterally to either side of the 
center of the frame, as will be very readily 
understood. 
H represents a bar that is hinged to one of 
the beams B, and on the upper side of this 
bar is secured a sliding bracket, I, having slots 
K, through which its securing-bolts L. pass, 
and formed with this bracket is a segmental 
rack, M. A similar sliding bracket, N, hav 
ing slots O, is secured on the opposite beam, 
B, by means of bolts P, and near the center of 
this bracket, in the forward portion thereof, 
is a vertical slotted standard, R. A. Curved 
rack, S, is formed with the rear end of the 
bracket N, and at the front end of said bracket 
is a pivotal lug, T. 
U represents a double-cranked axle, which 
is journaled in the bracket I, and in the slot 
ted standard of the bracket N. A hand-lever, 
V, is secured near one end of this axle, and 
engages with the segmental rack M. 
A hand-lever, W, is pivoted in the stud T 
on the opposite side of the frame, is fulcrumed 
to the axle U, and engages with the curved 
rack S. 
The supporting-wheels are journaled on the 
ends of the axle. 
The rear beam, C, has its ends extending 
beyond the beams D, and on the under sides 
of these projecting ends are bolted keepers X, 
which are arranged diagonally, and are adapt 
ed to secure the inner ends of diagonal for 
wardly-projecting removable arms Y, on the 
outer ends of which are journaled removable 
circular disks or rollers Z, which are provided 
with cushioned rims. 
Cultivator-teeth of any suitable construc 
tion are secured to the beams B C D and to 
the arms Y, as shown. From the upper side 
of the tongue G, above the front beam, B, pro 
jects a headed stud, A, and similar studs, B, 
project from the upper side of the beam B on 
opposite sides of the tongue. C represents a 
driver's seat, the standard of which is pro 
vided with an opening, D', at its foot large 
enough to receive the heads of the studs. A 
and B, and from the front side of this open 
ing extends an open slot, E, of a correspond 
ing diameter to the shanks of said studs. By 
means of this construction the driver's seat 
may be placed either at the center of the frame, 
on the stud A, or upon either side thereof, 
upon the studs B, as will be very readily un 
derstood. 
By providing the sliding brackets in which 
the axle is secured, the axle may be moved at 
an angle to the cultivator-frame for the pur 
pose of changing the line of the wheels and 
enabling the cultivator to run close to the 
trees and to draw to one side, thus overcom 
ing the side draft of the cultivator-teeth se 
cured to the inner side arm, Y, when only one 
of said side arms is used. The purpose of the 
hinged bar H and the slotted standards of 
the bracket N and the hand-lever W is to 
enable the frame to be inclined, and thereby 
cause the teeth on the Outer side of the frame 
to run deeper in the ground than those on the 
inner side thereof when it is necessary to 
cause the inner teeth to run shallow in the 
ground in order to avoid disturbing the roots 
of the trees. The removable arnas Y enable 
the cultivator-teeth to be extended so as to 
work under the branches of the trees where 
75 
9) 
95 
IOC 
iO 
35 
40 
45 
g 
325,432 
the cultivator-frame could not be driven, and 
the cushioned disks on the ends of said arms 
are to prevent abrasion of said arms with the 
trunks of the trees, and thereby prevent in 
5 jury to the latter. The hand-lever V and the 
Cranks on the axle enable the cultivator-teeth 
to be raised entirely out of the ground when 
not at work, or to be lowered to any desired 
extent in the ground. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a sulky-cultivator, the extending arms 
Y, having the cultivator-teeth, and the disks 
at their outer ends for preventing abrasion of 
2. The combination, in a sulky-cultivator, 
15 the trees, substantially as described. 
Io 
of the frame A, the bar H, hinged thereto at 
one side, and the sliding bracket on said bar, 
the sliding bracket N on the opposite side of 
the frame, and having the slotted standard, 2O 
and the axle secured in the slotted standard 
and in the hinged sliding bracket, and the le 
ver W for raising or lowering the free end of 
the axle, substantially as described. 
own Ihave hereto affixed my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 25 
STILLMAN AUGUSTUS MOUTON. 
Witnesses: 
H. F. DUSING, 
L. J. CHIPMAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325532.txt	No Model.) 
No. 325,532, 
F. A. GRAFF, 
CAR TRUCK. 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
 
 
WIT.WE 
1. 
ES 
2-(2----. 
(2- 24 
IWVEWTOE 
-222 m 
A / 
Attorney 
N. peers, Photo-Liticagrapher, Washingtol, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 325,532, 
F. A. GRAFF, 
CAR TRUCK. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 1, 1885. 
e it. 
i 
 
Ali 
s 
 
A. 3. 
& 
All 
& 
eates 
27-? 
2 
sizry&S 7 z /7 s 
-Z 
27 
Eit 3. Yiesls, 7 7 
7IAWESSES 
(22% (6% 
IWWEWTOR 
M 
/rzs 
Attorney . 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS A. GRAFF, OF NEW ALBANY, INDIAN A. 
CAR TRUCK. 
$3RR:CF3 CATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 325,532, dated September 1, 1885. 
Application filed July 2, 1885. No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS. A. GRAFF, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Albany, in the county of Floyd and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Car-Trucks, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
The object of this improvement is to lighten 
to the draft of car-trucks and other wheeled ve 
hicles by so constructing and connecting the 
running-gear of the same that their front and 
rear axles will be simultaneously adjusted in di. 
vergent positions, and thereby cause the front 
15 and rear wheels to describe circles or curves 
in unison with each other. These results are 
attained by the mechanism illustrated in the 
drawings here with filed as part hereof, in 
which the same letters of reference denote the 
Figurel is a side elevation, representing the 
application to a street-car of running-gear em 
bodying the features of my improvement. Fig. 
2 is a view of the running-gear inverted. Fig. 
253 is a longitudinal vertical section of the same. 
Fig. 4 is a longitudinal sectional representa 
tion of details. 
A is the body of the car. 
B is the base 
frame thereof. 
CC are circular bearing-plates affixed to the 
car frame-work B. D ID are corresponding 
bearing-plates suitably secured to the truck 
frames E. E. 
FF are the truck-wheels, connected to the 
35 frames E E in the ordinary manner, as shown. 
The truck-frames are secured to the frame B 
by the bolts E, as fully shown in Fig. 3. 
2O same parts in the different views. 
G G are ordinary brake-shoes. 
HH represent bars having slotted enlarge 
4o ments H, for the reception of a double-head 
ed bolt, H, and diagonally connected in op 
posite directions to the truck-frames EE, to 
which their ends are pivoted, as shown at h h", 
Fig. 2. 
KK are rods connecting the brake-shoe 
supporting frames G'G' with a brake-lever, k, 
pivoted to a stud-frame, (shown at L.,) and se 
cured to the truck - frame by any suitable 
45 
ea)S. 
R is the draft -hook, having arms R., by means 5O 
65 
of which the hook is connected with the truck 
frame E. 
P is a bar pivoted at p to the base-frame B, 
and provided with suitable bends, as shown, 
to clear the truck mechanism, and project be 
yond the rear end of the car, where it is pro 
vided with a slotted eye, P, for a purpose here 
in after set forth. 
R is a bearing-plate for the draft. hook R. 
P is a bearing-plate for the bar P, which op 
erates as a link or draw-bar for connecting 
other cars, as occasion may require. E" E are 
metal plates transversely secured to the truck 
frames E for the purpose of strengthening the 
Same and additionally securing the connec 
tions of the diagonal bars H H'. 
SS are chains connecting the forward truck 
frame with the body of the car, for the pur 
pose of preventing the divergent adjustment 
of the trucks to an extent that would strain 
the slotted connection of the bars F. H. 
. As the draft on the hook R. is inclined to 
one side or the other, the double-headed bolt 
H' will slide in the slots of bars' H H', which, 
by reason of the sliding bolt H', will take ex- 75 
actly equal adjustment in opposite directions, 
and by holding both ends of the opposite 
trucks in exact relative position with each 
other cause the motion of the correspond 
ing truck-wheels to be exactly the same, and 
thereby facilitate the movement of the car 
through curves in the track. 
By reason of the connection of the draft 
hook with the outer ends of the truck-frame, 
through its diverging arms R, the adjustment 
of the leading truck to the direction of the 
track-curves can be done by less draft than 
with the ordinary connection, and a compara 
tive directness of the draft to the load will 
also be continuously maintained, and the ex 
ertion of the draft-animals ordinarily neces 
sary to draw cars, especially when more or 
less loaded, around curves will be greatly re 
lieved. Requisite action of the brake-shoes 
G G is obtained by connecting the lever k in 
the usual manner to the ordinary brake mech 
anism. 
Having explained the construction and op 
90 
 
2 
325,532 
eration of my improvement, what I claim as 
new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, presence of two witnesses. 
S 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in Io 
Combined with car-trucks, centrally-slotted 
5 diagonal bars connecting the relatively-oppo 
site ends of said trucks, and a bolt retaining 
the central portions of the bars together and 
traveling in the said slots, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
FRANCIS A GRAFF. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM W.TULSY, 
SETH. WOODRUFF. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325632.txt	(No Model.) 
E. RYDER. 
ENWEL0PE M0ISTENER, 
No. 325,632. 
Patented Sept. l., 1885. 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
   
 
 
  
    
 
 
 
 
23 XXXXA 
?XXXX 
KiXXXXXXX 
XXXXXXXXX 
XXXXXXXXXA 
KiXXXXXXXXXXX 
XXXXXXXXXXXX) 
XXXXXXXXXXXXX 
KiXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
XXXXXXXXXXXXX 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
KiXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
KiXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
XXXXXXXXXXXX 
N. PE FERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELISHA RYDER, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
EN VE O P E - M O I STEN E R 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 325, 632, dated September 1, 1885. 
Application filed June 8, 1885. 
(No model.) 
5 
C) 
To all av?livo772, it 7 naty co7ucer7v.: 
Be it known that I, ELISHA RYDER, of Hart 
ford, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented a new Improve 
ment in Envelope-Moisteners; and I do hereby 
declare the following, when taken in connec 
tion with accompanying drawings and the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, and 
which said drawings constitute part of this 
specification, and represent, in- . 
Figure 1, a vertical section; Fig. 2, a hori 
zontal section showing the bearing-surface be 
low the slit. 
This invention relates to a device for moist 
eming the gum upon envelopes preparatory to 
sealing the same, the invention being adapted 
to sponge - cups, such as are employed as desk 
furniture, and is an improvement upon the cup 
described in my application for Letters Pat 
ent, Serial No. 155,303. 
The object of my previous invention was to 
construct the cup so that envelopes might be 
readily moistened preparatory to sealing. To 
this end I constructed the cup with a slot 
through one side, opening into the surface of 
the sponge, and through which the gummed 
surface of the envelope might be drawn in 
contact with the sponge to receive the requisite 
moisture from such contact with the sponge; 
but in that construction both surfaces of the 
flap of the envelope will be moistened, the 
one by coming in contact with the sponge, 
and the other with the plain surface of the 
inside of the cap, that plain surface receiving 
its moisture from the sponge. 
While the said invention satisfactorily 
dalimpens the gun, in some cases this moistem 
ing of tille outer surface of the flap is objec 
tiomable. To overcome this difficulty is the 
object of my plresent invention, which consists 
in constructing the cup with a surface adja 
cent to the slit, and upon which the sponge 
umay die, so that the envelope introduced will 
pass between the said surface and the sponge, 
the said surface constructed in the form of a 
series of points or irregular surfaces, so as to 
present only slight bearing-points to the re 
verse side of the envelope, as more fully here 
i nafter described. 
The construction or shape of the cup, broad 
ly considered, is immaterial; but I illustrate 
the cup as made from a sheet- metal casing, A, 
adapted to receive the sponge, with a weighted 
bottom, B, applied thereto. Through the side 55 
of the cup, at a convenient point for the in 
troduction of the envelope, I form a slit, a, sub 
stantially as in muy previous invention, and so 
that the flap of tilne envelope to be moistened 
may readily be drawn through this slit, to 6o 
bring the gummed surface in contact with the 
sponge. This slit is best arranged near the 
bottom of the cup. From the slit inward is 
a slightly-raised platform, c, the upper sur 
face of which is substantially fdush with the 65 
lower side of the slit a, the surface of which 
platform is constructed in the form of a series 
of points, as shown, the points conning sub 
stantially fdush with the lower edge of the slit, 
and so that the wet sponge may rest on the 7o 
platform, as shown. 
To moisten the envelope, the flap, with the 
gummed side toward the sponge, is passed 
through the slit; the outer surface of the flap 
passing over the surface of the platform c, 75 
the gumamed surface receives moisture from 
contact with the sponge, but the reverse sur 
face, presenting only a series of points, or no 
extended single bearing, cannot retain upon 
its salient portions any degree of moisture. So 
Therefore, as the outer surface of the envelope 
passes over these Salient portions of the plat 
form it is not wet, and substantially the same 
as if the surface over which it passes were with 
out possible contact with the moist sponge; 85 
hence the wetting of the outer surface of the 
flap is avoided. 
The particular method of forming the irreg 
ular bearing surface or platform is immaterial, 
it only being essential that it shall present 9o 
bearing-points having no considerable surface. 
They may be in the form of points or ribs, the 
ribs being brought to a sharp edge. 
While in the best construction the bearing 
surface presenting the salient points to the 95 
sponge at the slit is to make this surface above 
the bottom of the cup in the form of a plat 
form, for the reason that should water from 
the sponge settle to the bottom it may rest in 
a space away from the bearing-surface for the Ioo 
envelope-fdap, and thereby prevent the water > - 
from resting on said surface, in such case the 
grooves which form the salient bearing-points 
should be of such a character that any water 
25 
3 5 
45 
 
2 
325,632 
which would naturally rest in such grooves | 
hold a moist sponge, the said cup constructed 
may escape to the lower part of the cup. The 
with a transverse slit, a, opening to the sponge 2o 
bearing-surface having such salient points may || within the cup, the surface within the cup 
from the lower edge of the slit inward con 
be the bottom of the cup. 
5 This invention, while adapted specially for || structed to present salient points toward the 
the purpose of moistening the gummed sur- || Sponge, substantially as and for the purpose 
face of the flap, may be used to advantage in | described. 
moistening the face of the envelope for the 
2. A sponge cup constructed with a trans 
application of the stamp thereto, and the ad- || verse slit, a, through its side, a raised plat 
I o vantage of this improvement in moistening | form, c, in the bottom of the cup, its upper 
the front surface is the samme as that in moist- || surface substantially flush with the lower edge 
ening the flapthat is to say, the surface only | of said slit, and the said upper surface con- 3o 
upon which the stamp is to be placed will be || structed to present salient bearing-points, sub- . 
moistened. The reverse side will remain dry, | stantially as described. 
form over which it passes. - 
I 5 because of the peculiar formation of the plat- 
ELISHA RYDER. 
25 
| | 
I claim- 
1. A sponge-cup adapted to contain and 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR D. ROBINSON, 
AUGUST BIERMANN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325732.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 325,732, 
E. B. CLARKE, 
CARPET SWEEPER, 
Patented Sept. 8, 1885. 
yettesses: 
6%.2d 4./ 
4.4.2/224-4 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C.- 
 
a 
. 
ique ter. . . 
. st % 
4- 2,7? 
kiteries 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERWIN B. CLARKE, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
CA RPET SWEEPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 325,732, dated September 8, 1885. 
Application filed July 24, 1883. (No model.) 
-um 
4. 
O 
twofold purpose of hinging the cover B to the 
To all, Luhon, it may conce77. 
casing and connecting the bail to the same. 
Be it known that I, ERWIN B. CLARKE, a 
The bail is constructed of two arms, dd, 
citizen of the United States, residing at Grand 
cast in one piece, as shown in Fig. 2, and the . 
Rapids, in the county of Kent and State of 
ends thereof are inserted in the recesses g of 
Michigan, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Carpet-Sweepers, of which the the hinges, as before described. Said bail is 55 
provided at its central portion with a shank, 
following is a specification. 
e, screw-threaded and adapted to be screwed 
This invention relates to certain new and 
into the usual wooden handle C. Opposite 
useful improvements in carpet-sweepers; and 
said spindle the bail is provided with a lug or 
it has for its object to combine durability, 
projection, a, preferably at an angle to the 
simplicity, and cheapness of construction; and 
plane of the bale, for the purpose to be de 
to this end it consists in the construction and 
arrangement of parts hereinafter fully de 
scribed. Secured to the rear end of the cas 
ing at a suitable point, by means of a Screw 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
or otherwise, is a spring, c, having a perfora 
claims, due reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
tion or recess, h, adapted to receive the lug a, 
before described. 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section on the linea a 
When it is desired to empty the sweeper 
casing of the accumulated sweepings, the han 
of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the sweep 
er, a portion being broken away. Fig. 3 is a dle C is lowered, and the lug denters and is 
held in the perforation h of the spring c, thus 
plan view of the combined bail-ear and hinge. 
preventing the bail fron turning on its hinges, 
Fig. 4 is a section on the line & 2 of Fig. 3. 
and the sweeper may be then inverted or 
Fig. 5 is a side view of the combined bail-ear 
turned over, when the lid or cover B will drop 
and hinge. Fig. 6 is a front view of the spring 
by gravity, allowing the sweepings to drop 
or catch. Fig. 7 is a section on the line y y of 
Fig. 6. 
Out. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
out the Several views. 
A represents the casing of the sweeper, 
ls 1. In a carpet-sweeper, the combined hinge 
which is constructed in the ordinary manner, 
and bail-ear fg, consisting of the perforated 
and B is the cover of the same. The cover B 
is hinged to the casing A by means of a hinge part f and the part g, provided. With a 
pro 
jecting lug or pintle fitting in the perforated 
constructed in the following manner: One 
part f, and having a recess, g, in which is 
portion of said hinge consists of a perforated 
fitted one end of the bail, substantially as 
Wing, m, adapted to be secured to the under 
side of the cover B at a suitable point by shown and described. 
2. In combination with the bail did, hinged 
means of a screw or other well-known fasten 
to the casing, as shown, and provided with 
ing, and having a cylindrical portion, f, per 
the lug or projection a, the spring-catch (, Se 
forated as shown in Fig. 4. The other por 
tion of the hinge g is secured to the casing by cured to the rear end of the casing and havi 
ing the perforation or recess h, all arranged 
means of screws passing through perforated 
wiligs in n, and said portion is provided with and constructed substantially in the manner 
shown and described, and for the purpose 
a projecting lug or pintle, which fits into the 
specified. 
perforation in partf, as is clearly shown in 
Fig. 4. 
ERWIN B. CLARKE. 
In order to simplify the device and render 
the same cheap, I construct the part g of the 
hinge with a recess, g, adapted to receive one 
end of the bail, whereby the hinge serves the 
CHARLEs E. WARD, 
ROSCOE G. PHILBRICK. 
Witnesses: 
75 
85 
90 
2O. 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325833.txt	 
(No Model.) 
G. HALLIDAY, 
No, 325,833, 
V 
FLOUR BOLT, 
Patented Sept. 8, 1885. 
 
WITNESSES: 
G? 
gz2" . 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
-s 4-rez-KD 
N TTORNEYS, 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographor, washington, D. C, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORG HAJILIDAY, OF WINNEBAGO CITY, MINNESOTA. 
FLO U R B O LT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 325,833, dated September 8, 1885. 
Application filed May 19, 1885. (No model.) 
w 
I 5 of the same. 
To all uvhom, ib Tuvaly concerro: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE HALLIDAY, of 
Winnebago City, in the county of Faribault 
and State of Minnesota, have invented a new 
and Improved Flour-Bolt, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of an ordinary 
bolting-chest having my new flour-bolt placed 
therein, showing the boit in vertical position, 
and Fig. 2 is a broken longitudinal elevation 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the drawings and then pointed 
out in the claims. 
The bolt A is composed of two parallel bolt 
2o cloths, (a a, held about two inches apart in a 
light rectangular frame, b, secured to the 
shaft c by pins or bolts d d. The shaft c. is 
journaled in blocks e, fitted in the bolt chest 
or housing B, and the blocks e are placed 
25 upon screwsif, by which they may be moved 
vertically for adjusting the pitch of the bolt. | 
The meal to be boited is fed into the bolt A 
through the spout C, the lower end of which 
enters the receiving-chamber b'', formed at the 
head end of the frame of the bolt. The bolt. 
A and shaft c are revolved by a belt passing 
over the pulley g on shaft c. The pulley g is 
placed loosely on shaft c, so that it may turn 
thereon, but is connected with the shaft by | 
the coiled spring, h, the inner end of which is 
made fast to the shaft, while its outer end is 
made fast to the pulley g, near its periphery, 
as shown clearly in Fig. 2. - 
To each edge of the bolt-frame b is pivoted 
a knocker, j. These are normally held against 
pins i by spiral springs k, and in the sides of 
the bolt chest or housing B are placed the 
pins or projections l, against which the ends 
j' of the knockers strike as the bolt revolves, 
45 so that the opposite ends of the knockers will 
be swung away from the pins i, against the 
tension of springs k., which springs, after the 
knockers pass the pins or projections l, will 
react and suddenly bring the knockers against 
5o the pins i, and thus jar the bolt-cloths and 
clear or clean the meshes thereof. The knock 
ers and pins l' are arranged to strike pins i 
3O 
35 . 
 
while the bolt-cloths a are in horizontal posi 
tion, which jars the specks and impurities 
from the upper cloth into the interior of the 55 
bolt, and does not affect the lower cloth, since 
the whole body of meal in the bolt is resting 
thereon at the time the strokes are delivered. 
In this manner the specks and small impuri 
ties are kept from passing through the bolt- 6C 
cloths, and the cleaning is perfect. 
The pulley g being loose on shaft c and con 
nected there with by spring h, when the bolt A 
stands in vertical position the weight of meal 
within will be below shaft c, so that as the 65 
pulley revolves it will turn upon shaft c and 
will wind up the spring h. This will continue 
until the tension on the spring h is sufficient 
to turn the unevenly-loaded bolt A and shaft 
c. As the bolt A passes a horizontal position 7o 
in turning, and the meal within begins to shift 
to the other side of the bolt the strain on the 
spring will be lessened, and it will react on 
the shaft and bolt and give them a sudden 
overthrow or motion forward, which will throw 
the meal against the opposite bolt-cloth, thence 
it will slide down to the bottom of the bolt, 
when, as the spring is again wound, it will re 
peat this action, so that the meal is thrown 
from one side of the bolt to the other twice for 
every revolution of the bolt. 
This bolt may be run at a speed of about 
twenty revolutions per minute, which is one 
ofits chief advantages, as with this slow motion 
small sticks, nails, and dough-balls, liable to 
get in with the meal, will not puncture or break 
the cloths a, as they are liable to do with rapid 
motion bolts, and owing to the accelerated 
motion given the bolt by spring h the bolting 
is quite as rapid as with rapid-motion bolts. 9O 
There is no breaking down or getting out of - 
order of machinery as with other bolts, less 
power is required to operate it, and there is 
much less wear on the bolt-cloths than in com 
mon bolts. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is  
1. The bolt A and shaft c, in combination 
with pulley g, placed loosely on the shaft, and 
the connecting-springh, whereby periodically 
accelerated motion is given to the bolt, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. - 
2. The combination of the bolting-chest, the 
85 
75 
8O 
95 
. 
:: 
- 
IOO 
2 
325,833 
lbolt-frame A, provided with bolting - clotlu 
knockersji at its side edges, and the pins or 
projections l, placed at the sides of the bolt 
box l to cause the knockers to strike while the 
5 bolting-cloth is in horizontal position, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The bolt A, comprising a frame, two par 
aliel bolt-cloths, a, and a shaft, c, in combina 
tion with the pulley g and spring h, Connect 
ing the pulley g to the shaft c, substantially as Ic 
and for the purposes described. 
GEORGE HALLIDAY. 
Witnesses: 
F. W. WINSHIP, 
C. A. WEAVER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US325933.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 325,933, 
 
WITNESSES: 
%. 6. vez 
* 
G. H. WES, 
MIXING MACHINE FOR BAKERIES, 
Patented Sept. 8, 1885. 
INVENTOR 
; 
. By/ 2,  
 
. 
-: 
, 
 
- 
M 
/ TTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. IVES, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
MIXING-MACHINE FOR BAKERIES. 
ESPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 325,933, dated September 8, 1885. 
Application filed August 11, 1884. (No model.) 
TO 
I 5 
- 
To al? zuv7 o 7mm, it mvay concern. . 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. IVES, re 
siding at New Haven, in the county of New 
Haven and i State of Connecticut, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Mixing-Machines for Bakeries; and I do 
declare the. following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improved mix 
ing and beating apparatus for bakeries, the 
object being to produce a device of such de 
scription which shall i be effective in use, 
- 
easily cleaned, and durable. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain details of construction and 
combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of one form which my im 
provement may assume, and Fig. 2 is a sim 
ilar detached view of the cover thereof. 
As herein shown, the apparatus is provided 
with two skeleton beaters or whippers, each 
composed of loops A and a stock, B, fur 
nished with a thumb. nut, C, extending to 
ward and beyond each other from opposite 
directions, and detachably secured, respect 
ively, to the contiguous ends of levers ID D, 
pivoted so as to have free vertical movement 
in slotted bearings E E, swiveled and remov 
ably secured by pins a a in sleeves F F, 
located at the ends of arms MI M, secured to 
the frames G G of the machine and extend 
ing toward each other. The outer ends of 
the said levers are flexibly and eccentrically 
connected with pinions H H, centered in 
armsNN, extending upward from the frames 
aforesaid and provided with fdaring open 
ings b, receiving the said ends of the levers, 
and respectively arranged so that the beat 
ers will each clear the other. The pinions 
aforesaid mesh with driving-gears II, one of 
which is provided with a handle, K, and 
which are connected by a. shaft, J, mounted 
in arms O, extending upward from the frames 
of the machine. A removable shallow recep 
tacle or dish, Lu, receives the material to be 
mixed and beaten or whipped, and a cover, 
IP, having slots Q Q, is provided for setting 
35 
over the levers onto the said receptacle after 
it has been placed under the beaters. 
By virtue of the described construction and 
arrangement of parts the beaters are inde- 55 
pendently revolved on inclined axes converg 
ing or intersecting in the receptacle in ec 
centric paths, carrying the beaters through a 
full and deep sweep thereof, and then almost 
horizontally over its mouth, whereby scatter- 6Co 
ing is in great measure avoided, and a shal, 
low receptacle of ordinary form and adapted 
to be set under the beaters without removing 
and replacing them is made available. By 
employing two beaters and arranging them to 65 
extend toward and beyond each other from 
opposite directions is secured a coaction 
greatly promoting the efficiency of the ma - 
chine. 
* * 
, 
... 
, 
, 
In using the machine the material to be 7o 
mixed and beaten or whipped is placed in 
the receptacle, which is then set under the 
beaters, previously brought into position for 
the purpose. When the work is done, the 
dish is removed, with its contents, and the 75 
beaters are detached, cleaned, and replaced. 
The machine does not require a special re 
ceptacle, but any that can be set under the 
beaters will answer. A dish having a con 
caved bottom is, however, preferred. A 8o 
cover will not always be necessary, as scatter 
ing is in great measure avoided by the pecu 
liar mode of operating the beaters. It is not 
essential that they should be skeleton in 
structure or that they should extend beyond 85 
each other, i but such construction and ar 
rangement are preferred. 
If desired, the driving connections herein 
shown may be replaced in whole or in part 
by equivalent devices adapted to operate the 9O 
beaters in the same way. I would, therefore, 
have it understood that I do not limit myself 
to the exact construction and arrangement of 
parts shown and described, but hold myself 
at liberty to make such changes and altera- .95 
tions as fairly fall within the spirit and scope 
of my invention. 
I am aware that a single beater having a 
circular motion on an inclined axis is not 
new, and hence do not claim the operation of ICO 
a beater on an inclined axis, broadly. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
 
2 
325,933 
5 
O 
I 5 
25 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A mixing and beating machine having 
independent beaters extending toward each 
other from opposite directions, a receptacle 
located beneath them, and nimeans for revolv 
ing them on inclined axes converging in the 
receptacle, substantially as set forth. 
2. A mixing and beating machine having 
independent beaters extending toward and 
beyond each other, a receptacle located be 
neath them, and means for revolving them on 
inclined axes converging in the receptacle, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. A mixing and beating machine having 
independent beaters revolving on inclined 
aXES through eccentric paths, as described, 
and a receptacle located beneath them, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. A mixing and beating machine having 
independent beaters extending toward each 
other from opposite directions and revolving 
on inclined axes through eccentric paths, as 
described, a receptacle located beneath them, 
and a cover for the receptacle adapted to fit 
over them, substantially as set forth. 
5. A mixing and beating machine having | 
independent removable beaters extending to 
ward and beyond each other from opposite 
directions and revolving on inclined axes : 
through eccentric paths, as described, and a 
receptacle located beneath them, substantially 
aS set forth. 
6. A mixing and beating machine having 
skeleton beaters extending toward each other 
from opposite directions and revolving on in 
clined axes through eccentric paths, as de 
scribed, and a removable receptacle, substan 
tially as set forth. 
7. A mixing and beating machine having 
removable skeleton beaters extending toward 
and beyond - each other from opposite direc 
tions and revolving on inclined axes through 
eccentric paths, as described, and a remov 
able receptacle, substantially as set forth. 
8. A mixing and beating machine having 
beaters, a receptacle, levers to which the 
beaters are attached, universal bearings for 
the levers, and pinions centered above the 
said bearings and having the levers flexibly 
and eccentrically connected with them, sub 
siantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
35 
45 
GEO. H. IWES. 
WitneSSes: 
M. S. SEELEY, 
D. J. KELSEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326034.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 326,034, 
L. HIRT. 
SIPHON STARTER, 
Patented Sept. 8, 1885. 
SKSINS 
 
 
 
WITWESSES 
ZzzzZ, %d?, 
???? (????? 
?? 
N. Peters, Photo-Khorapher, Washington, b.c. 
1?r? ??TOR 
e ???? 
?????? 
- Alittorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEO HIRT, OF NEW KIOWA, KANSAS. 
SI P H O N - START ER 
sPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 326,034, dated September 8, 1885. 
Amplication filed July 20, 1885. 
(No model. 
??? 
2O 
I 5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LEO HIRT, a citizen of 
the United States, residing at New Kiowa, in 
the county of Barber and State of Kansas, 
haveinvented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Siphon-Starters; and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which forma part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
siphons, and is designed to produce a device 
for decanting liquids that shall prevent the 
passage of particles of foreign matter, and that 
shall regulate the flow of the said liquid from 
the reservoir to the receptacle. 
The improvements consist in the construc 
tion of parts, as set forth in the description 
and claims. 
In describing the device, reference is had 
to the annexed drawings, in which Figure 1 
shows a perspective view of the device with a 
2 
5 portion of the reservoir broken away to show 
the interior thereof and the contained mech 
anism, and Fig. 2 a perspective of the clamp. 
In the said drawings, the reservoir is shown 
as a barrel, A, and the siphon as a tube, B, 
held to the barrel by castings C. The tube 
enters the barrel and carries at its end a filter 
consisting of a perforated portion, ID, prefer 
ably spherical, a screw-threaded or convoluted 
stem, E, entering the siphon-pipe, and a coni 
cal base, F. The base raises the filter from 
the bottom of the barrel, and thus prevents 
its being clogged by sediment that naturally 
would rest thereon. 
The sphere D may or may not contain filter 
ing material. 
The siphon pipe or tube B is connected to 
a tube or pipe, G, leading from the receiving 
vessel, by means of a coupling, H, which may 
consist of a short piece of screw-threaded or 
convoluted pipe, as shown. 
The tube G is provided with a bulb, I, for 
starting the siphon by extracting the air in 
the tubes, and thus causing the liquid to pass 
5O into them. The receiving-vessel is of course 
35 
7. 
placed below the level of the liquid in the 
barrel. 
As it is necessary to often stop the flow 
through the siphon, and it is desirable that 
tineliquid should remain in the tubes, a clamp, 5. 
as shown in Fig. 2, is provided. This clamp 
consists of two arms, K and L, joined by an 
integral spring continuation, M. One of the 
arms carries a loop or frame, N, which sur 
rounds the other arm, and is provided with 6. 
teeth O, in which the said arm engages. 
Hangers consisting of wires P, secured at one 
end to the clamp and hooked at the other end, 
support the said clamp by engaging around 
the pipe G, preferably at the conjunction of 6. 
the said pipe and the neck of the bulb I. 
The arms K and L engage on either side of 
the pipe G, and by means of the toothed frame 
maintain a regulated or adjustable pressure 
tlhereon. 
The spring tends to spread apart or open 
the arms, while they are closed or brought 
nearer together by pressure on their free ends. 
The clamp admits of the fullflow of the liquid 
through the siphon; or it may be utilized to 
entirely stop it, as in the case of changing 
from one receiving-vessel to another. 
I claim 
1. AS ann i un provement illum si puolus, ad claup 
therefor, consisting of two arms joined by an 8 
integral spring, and a toothed frame secured 
to one arm and surrounding the other, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination, with the siphon, of a 
filter consisting of a filter-chamber with a base 
or support and a projecting stem, and a clamp 
consisting of two arms integrally connected 
by a spring, and a toothed frame secured to 
one arm and surrounding the other arm, said 
clamp being supported from the siphon-tube 9? 
by hangers, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
3. The combination, with the pipe or branch 
carrying a bulb by means of a short neck, cf 
a clanpengaging around the pipe and pro- 95 
vided with hangers engaging with the said 
pipe at its conjunction with the said bulb 
neck, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
4. The combination, with the pipe or branch IC 
7. 
2 
326,034 
carrying a bulb by means of a short neck, of 
a clamp consisting of spring-connected arms, in pres?ince if two witnesses. 
a toothed frame connected to one arm and 
surrounding the other, and hangers connected 
to said clamp and engaging with the pipe at 
its conjunction with the bulb-neck, substan- 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
M. A. WooD, 
D. BETAT. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
Witnesses: 
ILEO HIRT. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326134.txt	(Model.) 
No. 326,134, 
J. McNEAL. 
FISHING FLOAT, 
Patented Sept. 15, 1885. 
 
 
Prm mumm-mm SeSGS 
 
 
Weezzesses : 
72/22- 
- 
ea 
Zzzye7zzo2- : 
% (1 /( &- -4 zarzeez, 
 
N, PETERS. Phato-lithographer, washington, l.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES McNEAL OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO CHAs. H. SEATON, OF SAME PLACE. 
FISH NG. FLOAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 326,134, dated September 15, 1885. 
Application filed February 2, 1885. (Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES MCNEAL, of 
Washington city, District of Columbia, have 
invented a new and Improved Fishing-Float; 
and I hereby declare the following to be a fall, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, making a part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 2 is a side elevation of the float at 
tached to the fishing-line. Fig. 1 is a vertical 
longitudinal section of the same. Fig. 3 is an 
end view of the float, and Fig. 4 is an enlarged 
end view of the same. 
There are two highly-desirable, not to say 
necessary, elements to be combined in a fish 
ing float or bob in order to have it fully meet 
the requirements of the angler-first, the float 
should be readily adjustable upon the line or 
removable from it without disturbing the lead 
or hooks, and, second, the fastenings, securing 
the float to the line should be such as not to 
require any winding of the line about them or 
the creation of any bights in the line, which 
necessarily decrease the tensile strength and 
render it liable to break in such bights or 
twists when the strain in striking' a fish is 
brought upon the line. 
The object of my invention is to embody in 
a fishing-float both of these desirable elements; 
and to this end my invention consists in a slot 
ted float through which, at or near its center, 
passes a wire having its ends formed into a 
bight bent at right angles to the body of the 
wire so as to lie against the ends of the float 
and clasp the line, the ends of the wire being 
closed upon the body so they can be sprung 
out to insert the line, all of which is herein 
after fully described, and specifically pointed 
In order that those skilled in the art may 
make and use my invention, I will proceed to 
describe the manner in which I have carried 
it out. 
In the said drawings, A is the body of the 
float, which can be made of any material de 
sired, and provided with a slot, a. If this body 
is of wood, it may be found desirable to bevel 
the sides of the said slot a to compensate for 
, 
the swelling of the body when wet, tending to 
close it. 
Through the length of the body, at or near 
its center, extends a wire, B, having means at 
its ends to engage the line C and hold the float 
to it. These engaging ends of the wire consist 
of two bights or loops, b, bent down at right 
angles to the body of the wire, the ends being 
brought close to the body and given for a mini 
mum distance a reverse curve at e, to prevent 
the ends of the wire from accidentally engag 
ing with or entangling the line. 
When the wire B is in its normal position, 
the openings in the loops b lie over the ends of 
the slot a, though they may be turned in either 
direction together, so as to slightly pass the 
ends of the slot, and the friction will retain 
said loops in whatever position placed. (See 
Fig. 3.) If the ends of the float wear away, 
the loops may be pressed down so as to again 
come in frictional contact with the body and 
retain them in any desired position. 
The line is laid in slot a and passed around 
the ends of the wire and sprung into the loops 
b, which engage and hold it in such frictional 
contact with the body A as to prevent said 
body under ordinary strains from changing 
position on the line, and yet leave the line so 
that any strain upon it will be distributed 
evenly throughout its length, and is relieved 
of undue strains at particular points, due to 
wrappings, bights, or sudden changes in direc 
tion of the line, wherebreakage usually occurs. 
The float is quickly removed from the line 
by passing the line out of the loops b in the 
manner reverse to the engagement. 
It is obvious that the fastening described 
may be applied to other fishing appliances to 
be removably attached to the line without de 
parting from the spirit of my invention. 
188,755, and do not claim anything therein 
shown and described, as the fastening therein 
described generally requires bights in the line. 
to secure the float with practical certainty. 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A fishing-float provided with line-attach 
55 
Go 
65 
7o 
75 
85 
Having thus described my invention, what I 95 
5 
Cu 
25 
35 
45. 
4o out in the claims. 
I am aware of the patent to Redfield, No. 9o 
326,134 
ing devices consisting of bent loops at its ends 
at about right angles to the axis of the float, 
whereby twists, bights, or sudden changes in 
direction of the line are avoided, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. A fishing-float provided with a body, A, 
in combination with a wire, B, passing through 
its length, and having on its ends fastening 
devices having a movement in the arc of a cir 
cle to engage the line, for the purpose specified. 
3. In a fishing-float, the central wire, B, ex 
tending entirely through the float, and pro 
vided at its ends with loops b, bent at right 
IO 
angles, and having their ends adapted to be 
sprung open to receive the line, substantially I5 
as described. 
4. In a fishing-float, the body A, provided 
with the slot a, in combination with the cen 
tral wire, B, provided with loops b on its ends, 
adapted to move across the ends of the slot, 20 
substantially as set forth. 
JAS. MCNEAL. 
Witnesses: 
A. G. KELLOGG, 
R. K. EVANS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326234.txt	(No Model.) 
G., J. MILLER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MACHINE FOR CROZING AND HOWELING BARRELS, 
No. 326,234. 
Patented Sept, l5, l885, 
 
 
 
 
 
g?>:zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzng 
  ( ) 
SS 
SS 
. R 
T s 
| () 
S 
SS 
W6%zesses. 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
G. J. MILLER. 
MACHINE FOR CROZING AND HOWELING BARRELS, 
No. 326,234 
Patented Sept. 15, 1885. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE J. MILLER, OF LAKE VIEW, ASSIGNOR TO DANIEL W. RYAN, OF 
CEICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MACHINE FOR CROZNG AND HOWELING BARRELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 326,234, dated September 15, 885. 
Application filed April 24, 1885. (No model.) 
invention. 
To all whom it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE J. MILLER, of 
Lake View, Cook county, Illinois, haveinvented 
a new and useful Machine for Leveling, Howel 
5 ing, and Crozing Barrels, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The invention relates to that class of howel 
ing and crozing machines in which the barrel 
is revolved and the tools for doing the work 
1o ing off are brought into contact with it while it 
is in motion. 
The object of the invention is to simplify the 
component parts of the machine and better 
their arrangement and combination therein; 
15 and it consists in the combinations hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate the 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the machine. Fig. 
2O 2 is a longitudinal vertical section. Fig. 3 is 
a perspective. Fig. 4 is a cross-vertical sec 
tion on line at a of Fig. 1. 
A is a low horizontal frame, made to be fast 
ened to the floor by screws or bolts. Two sup 
25 plemental frames, A', are supported on the 
horizontal frame and secured thereto by a 
tongue and groove, or otherwise, so as to slide 
back and forth thereon. The upright part of 
the supplemental framesis made in halves a. a', 
3o adapted to be secured together by screw-bolts, 
and together form a circular opening within 
which the barrel-holding ring B is secured by 
a tongue and groove, b, so as to turn freely, a 
broad fiange on the ring projecting beyond 
35 the frame, so that a belt, B, may be trained 
upon it to operate the ring. 
curved links C C and a cam, C, fastened to a 
rock-shaft, C, which is operated by a lever, D, 
4o so that by turning the lever in one direction 
the supplemental frames are drawn toward 
each other, and in the other are thrown apart. 
The curvature of the links, one being bowed 
up and the other down, is such with reference 
45 to the Cana as to permit it to pass the center 
of motion when the lever is turned half around 
in the direction required to draw the Supple 
mental frames together, so that they will then 
resistany outwardstrain without any provision 
Abarrel-support,E,is connected to the hori 
The supplemental frames are connected 
So for holding the lever down. 
 
The movement of the lever G' is regulated 7o 
Zontal frame, in the center between the Supple 
mental frames, by means of vertically-sliding 
bars F, adapted to operate in connection with 
cams F, attached to the rock-shaft C, so that 55 
when the lever is thrown in the direction re 
quired to move the supplemental frames apart 
the cams E will strike the bars F and elevate 
the barrel-support, and when turned in the 
opposite direction will release them, and so 6o 
lower the barrel-support. 
The supplemental frames are each provided 
with a rock-shaft, G, to the inner end of 
which is secured an upright lever, G', pro 
vided with a plate, H, which supports the 65 
howeling-tool h, the chamfering-tool h, and 
the crozing-tool h", and the lower end of the 
lever has a branch, G', which carries the level 
ing-knife h". 
by a bifurcated arm, I, fastened to the rock 
shaft, one branch of which arm extends be 
low and the other above the supplemental 
frame, and each has a set-screw, i, for the 
point of contact with the frame in the move- 75 
ment of the arm, which limits its movement up 
and down, and thus defines the movement of 
the rock-shaft and the lever G. By setting 
the screws in or out the extent to which the 
lever may be reciprocated is decreased or in- 8o 
creased as desired. 
For the purpose of keeping the lever G' 
upright when released, or not in use, a Weight, 
W, is suspended below the rock-shaft on a 
short arm, u, fastened rigidly to the shaft. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The operator, standing facing the machine on 
the side having the lever D, in the position 
shown in Fig. 3, turns the lever to the right 
hand side. This throws the holding-rings BB 9o 
apart sufficiently to admit a barrel to be rolled 
between the belt-flanges, and also elevates the 
barrel-support between them, so that it will 
support the barrel with its axis substantially 
in line with the axis of the holding-ringS. 95 
The horizontal frame or bed being low down, 
the barrel may be readily turned over on to 
the support, without lifting, and placed with 
the ends coincident with the rings. When 
in this position, the lever D is turned over Ico 
to the left. This brings the flanges of the 
rings over the ends of the barrel and causes 
85 
326,234 
them to enter and be clamped in the rings. 
This movement of the lever also lowers the bar 
rel-support, so that the barrel is now held by 
the rings and free to turn with them. The 
barrel projects through the rings at each end 
sufficient to extend across the path of the lev 
eling-tool, so that all irregularity of the staves 
will be cut off even or level by said tool. The 
leveling and chamfering tools are so timed or 
arranged with reference to each other that the 
former, as lever G' is moved toward the op 
erator, will be brought into contact with the 
outside of the stave before or nearly simulta 
neously with the contact of the latter on the 
inside, so that the surplus ends of the staves 
will be leveled or cut off from both sides in 
stead of one, and thus all burring of the edge 
such as usually results from cutting the stave 
off from One side or with one tool-is prevented 
and a smooth edge formed. The howeling 
tool is also brought into operation by this 
movement of the lever G in the direction in 
dicated, and continues to operate until the 
lowermost branch of the bifurcated arm comes 
in contact with the frame of the machine. The 
leveling and howeling of the barrel will then 
be completed at one end and the lever is 
then moved in the opposite direction to bring 
the crozing-tool into action and cut the croze. 
The same operation is repeated at the other 
end, and the worked-off barrel is then taken 
Out Of the machine. 
During the operation of working off the bar 
rel is revolved rapidly by means of the belts 
BB on the ring-flanges, passing over oper 
ating-pulleys above, arranged in any of the 
ordinary Ways to be stopped or set in motion 
by a friction-clutch operated by a lever sus 
pended within reach of the operator. 
The interior orifice of the holding-rings cor 
responds in size or diameter with the end of 
the barrel above the end truss-hoops, so that 
the truss-hoop will come against the side of 
the ring and prevent the barrel going through 
any farther, and the orifice through the belt 
flange is made large enough to readily allow the 
truss-hoops to pass through to the ring. 
For smaller barrels other sets of rings with 
Correspondingly - Smaller orifices are substi 
tuted for those used for the largest size. The 
machine is in this way adapted to about three 
or four sizes of barrels. For still smaller sizes 
or kegs a smaller-size machine is preferred. 
What is claimed is 
1. In a howeling and crozing machine, a low 
75 
horizontal frame provided with a sliding frame 
at each end carrying the barrel-holding rings 
provided with belt-flanges and a vertically 
movable barrel-support, said sliding frames 
and barrel-support being connected with cams 6o 
on a rock-shaft arranged to operate the slid 
ing frames and barrel-support simultaneously, 
substantially as specified. 
2. In a howeling and crozing machine, two 
sliding frames for supporting the barrel-hold- 65 
ing rings, arranged to slide toward and from 
each other, and a barrel-supporting frame ar 
ranged between the holding-rings and being 
movable vertically, in combination with a 
rock-shaft provided with a cam and links con 
necting with said sliding frames, and one or 
more cams, as F, connecting said rock-shaft 
with and thereby operating the barrel-support 
ing frame, all substantially as shown. 
3. In a howeling and crozing machine, the 
howeling, chamfering, and crozing tools mount 
ed on a plate, H, attached to an oscillating le 
ver, G', and the leveling-knife h' on an arm of 
said lever, said lever being supported in front 
of the barrel-holding ring, so as to bring and 
oscillate the plate transversely of the barrel 
and within its end when placed in the ring, 
and the leveling-knife just outside the barrel 
near the face of the ring, substantially as speci 
fied 
4. In a howeling and crozing machine, the 
howeling, chamfering, and crozing tools mount 
ed on a plate, H, attached to a lever, G', and 
the leveling-knife h' on an arm of said lever, 
said lever being supported in front of the bar- go 
rel-holding ring on a rock-shaft, so as to bring 
and oscillate the plate transversely of the bar 
rel and within its end when placed in thering, 
and the leveling-knife just outside the barrel 
and near the face of the ring, said rock 
shaft being provided with a bifurcated arm, I, 
and weight W, as and for the purpose specified. 
5. In a howeling and crozing machine, the 
barrel-clamping frames connected to a rock 
shaft, as C, by links C, hinged to the opposite 
end of an S-shaped cam on the rock-shaft, 
said links at the ends next to the cam being 
curved in opposite directions, so that the ex 
treme ends or points of connection with the 
cam may be turned past the center of motion, Io 
as and for the purpose specified. 
85 
OO 
GEORGE J. MILLER. 
. . . 
. . 
Witnesses: 
JNO. H. WHIPPLE, 
DANIEL W. RYAN. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326335.txt	(No Model.) 
C, E, ROGERS 
PIANO ACTION, 
No. 326,335. 
Patented Sept. 15, 1885. 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
 
N 
 
 
N 
 
 
    
 
 
an -- it 
 
s 
 
A'y. Z. 
Witnesses: 
944 (72 %2-way 
%ze. 
f .27C 
Zharles A. Zayers, 
'y 16,...if a. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. ROGERS, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
PIANO - ACT ON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 326,335, dated September 15, 1885. 
Application filed May 5, 1884. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs E. ROGERs, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Piano-Actions, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to piano actions, and 
especially to actions for upright pianos; and 
it consists in certain novel constructions, ar 
rangements, and combinations of parts, which 
will be readily understood by reference to de 
Scription of the drawings, and to the claims to 
be hereinafter given. 
Figure 1 of the drawings represents a trans 
verse section through the action-rails of an up 
right piano, and showing one key and the action 
connected there with in elevation. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section through the fly and its lever 
on linea a on Fig. 1, and showing the upper 
portion of the fly in elevation. Fig. 3 is a 
plan of the fly-carrying lever and damper full 
crum-block. Figs. 4 and 5 are rear and side 
elevations, respectively, of the action-carry 
ing flange, and Fig. 6 is a plan of the flange 
rail. 
A is the key fulcrumed at (, and having se. 
cured to the upper side of its inner end the 
rocker-lever B, to the rear end of which is 
pivoted the lower end of the jack C, the upper 
end of which supports and acts upon the front 
end of the fly-carrying lever D, to which it 
is connected by the pinb, which passes through 
the projecting portion of the felt-pad c, se 
cured to the under side of said fly-carrier D, 
and against which the upper end of the jack 
C bears, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The rear end of the fly-carrying lever D is 
pivoted at d to the flange E, which in turn is 
secured by its middle to the rear bar, e, of the 
flange-rail F, and projects upward therefrom, 
and has pivoted thereto at f the hammer-butt 
G, as shown. 
The lever D also has pivoted to its rear end 
at g the block H, in which is firmly secured 
the damper-rod H', carrying at its upper end 
the damper H, and projecting below said 
block Hinto a position to be acted upon by 
the pedal-operated cam-rail I, for the purpose 
of removing the dampers from the strings, as 
indicated in dotted lines in Fig, 1. 
45 
The la numer.butt, G has formed thereon the 
felted and leathered shoulder h, against which 
the upper end of the fly-lever Jacts to throw 
the hammer G' against the string i. The fly 
lever J passes through the slot d", formed in 
the lever D, and is pivoted to said lever at d 
with its lower end extending below said lever 
D and into contact with the felted button I, 6O 
adjustably secured to the jack C by the screw 
k", said fly-lever being maintained in the de 
sired oblique position With its upper end in 
engagement with the shoulder h, by means of 
the spring l, connected at one end to the block 65 
H, and at the other end to said fly-lever above 
its fulcrum, as shown in Fig. 1. The lever D 
is also connected to the block H. by means of 
the spring m, for the purpose of maintaining 
contact of the front end of said lever with the 
upper end of the jack C. 
The hammer-butt G is provided at its upper 
end with the forward projection G', having its 
upper front corner rounded, as shown, and 
having secured to its under side the felt or 
leather pad n, which projects beyond the ham 
mer-butt, and has inserted therein one end of 
the spring 0, the other end of which is insert 
ed in the front side of the fly-lever J, as 
Shown. 
To the upper portion of the front side of the 
fly-level J is secured a piece of felt or leather, 
o', to prevent contact of the spring O with the 
wood of said lever. 
L is a hammer - check mounted upon the 
stem L', set in the forward end of the lever D, 
said check being arranged to catch the hai 
mer-butt when the hammer relbounds after 
having struck the blow upon the string by 
pressing upon the rounded upper surface of 
the projection G' of said butt. 
M is the hammer-rest rail provided with the 
felt-cushion p to receive the hammer-handle 
after the finger is removed from the key in a 
well-known manner. 
It will be observed that the flanges are at 
tached by their middle to the flange-rail Fand 
project above. and below said rail and carry 
at one end the hammer-butt and at the other 
end the fly-carrying lever and the damper 
fulcrum-block. 
The flange-rail F consists of a front bar, ', 
and the rear bar, e, arranged parallel to each 
other and extending from side to side of the 
75 
- 
o 
95 
CO 
326,333 
piano. case, and connected together by the end 
lies, ss, and one or more intermediate ties, s' 
8', and the whole made in one piece, preferably 
of cast-iron, the spaces between the front and 
-5 rear bars being occupied by the flies and han 
mer-check rods, as shown in Fig 1. 
Another novel feature of my invention is the 
mannel in which the hammer-butt, G and fly 
carrying lever D are pivoted to the flange E. 
Io which is as follows: The flange E, instead of 
having a hole or holes drilled through it to re 
ceive the fulcrum-pins f and d, as is usual, has 
formed in one side thereof, and near One Ol' 
both ends, a transverse groove, f', to receive 
I5 said pin or pins, which are firmly secured 
therein by the screws d", the heads of which 
bear hard upon said pins to clamp them in 
position. 
A great advantage is obtained by this ar 
2O rangement, inasmuch as When it is desired, 
for any purpose, to remove the hammer-butt 
G or lever ID the fulcrum-pins f and d do not 
have to be removed therefrom, but it is only 
necessary to slacken the screw d to remove it, 
25 and to secure it again the butt or lever is placed 
in position with its fulcrum-pin resting in the 
groove f' in the side of the flange, and the screw 
D is screwed up till its head bears hard upon 
the pin, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The metallic flange-rail F, composed of 
the bars 7 and e, the end ties, SS, and one or 
more intermediate ties, ss, all arranged sub 
35 stantially as and for the purposes described. 
2. In combination with the rail F, provided 
with the bars and e, the flange E, secured to 
and projecting above and below the bar j', the 
hammer-butt G, pivoted to the upper end of 
to said flange, the lever D, pivoted to the lower 
end of said flange and provided with the slot. 
d", the fly J, pivoted to the lever D and ar 
45 
SO 
55 
- 
ranged to engage with and lift the hammer 
butt G, the jack C, and the key A, all arranged 
and adapted to operate substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. The lever D, provided with the project 
ing felt pad c, in combination with the jack 
C, provided with the pin b, extending above 
the upper end of said jack and through said 
felt, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the flange E, the le. 
ver D, pivoted thereto, the damper-block H, 
pivoted to the lever D, and the spring in, all 
arranged and adapted to operate substantially 
as described. 
5. The hammer-butt G. provided with the 
flexible projecting pad it, in combination with 
the fly J, and the spring 0, all arranged and 
adapted to operate substantially as described. 
6. The combination of the lever D, flange 
E, hammer-butt G, provided with the projec 
tion G", the check L, and the springs land 0, 
substantially as described. 
7. In combination with the damper-rod H', 
projecting above and below the fulcrum-block 
El and carrying at its upper end the damper 
H', the pedal-operated rocking rail I, con 
structed, arranged, and adapted to operate 
Substantially as and for the purposes described. 
S. The flange E, provided with one or more 
transverse grooves, f', and one or more clamp 
ing Screws, d, in combination with the fulcrum 
pin or pins of a pivoted part of the action, 
Substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses, on this 1st day of May, 
A. D. SS4. 
CHAS. E. ROGERS. 
Witnesses: 
N. C. LOAIBARD, 
WALTER. E. LONIBARD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326436.txt	(No Model.) 
J. D. LANE. 
HORSE 00LLAR FASTENER, 
No. 326,436, 
Patented Sept. 15, 1885. 
 
47/22. 
Aa. c4 man, 
Ave Zer. 
Jane Aava Z Zarze. 
42- 2 zis eyes; 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JONATHAN D. LANE, OF 
ONONDAGA, MICHIGAN. 
HORSE COLAR FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forning part of Tetters Patent No. 326,436, dated September 15, 1885. 
Application filed June 4, 1885. (No Inode.) 
O 
To all, Luhon, it may concert: 
Beit known that I, JONATHAN D. LANE, Of 
Onondaga, in the county of Ingham and State 
of Michigan, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Horse-Collars; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in the construction of 
horse-collars; and the invention consists in 
the peculiar construction and application of a 
metallic strap especially designed for use upon 
that class of collars which open at the top, and 
by means of which the collar can be securely 
closed about the neck of the animal Without 
the employment of straps and buckles. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of an open 
top horse-collar provided with my improved 
device. Fig. 2 is a similar view with the lock 
ing lever thrown up ready to engage with the 
metallic Strap. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, A represents a so 
called open-top' horse-collar, which is pro 
vided with the usual collar-pad, B. 
C represents an articulated metallic strap, 
one end of which is secured in any convenient 
manner, but not detachably, to one side of the 
collar at its open end, while the opposite end 
of such metallic strap has Secured to it a plate, 
D, in which are formed a series of openings, ca. 
E is a suitable link, which is secured to the 
opposite end of the collar, the free end of such 
link having pivotally secured to it the cann 
lever F. 
In practice, the collar is placed upon the 
neck of the animal, as in the ordinary man 
ner, and its ends brought as near together as 
convenient, until the free end of the lever F 
will engage with the nearest opening or slot 
in the plate D. By now drawing down upon 
the lever, at the same time depressing the plate 
D, the lever draws the ends of the collar to 
gether and locks it upon the neck of the ani 
45 
55 
mal; and it will be noticed that by the pe 
culiar outward bend of the lever F, when it is 
in its engaged and locked position, the strain 
upon it is brought in a direct line or nearly so 
with the body of its length, which prevents 
the lever from accidentally flying up and re 
leasing the collar. 
The pivotif of the lever F is at the mouth of 
a recess, f', formed in the collar structure up 
on the outer face, as shown. This recess gives 
the cam part of the lever free play while the 
leveris being operated. 
I am aware that a similar lever differently 
arranged has been used before in connection 
with links and chains as a hame-fastening, as 
the feature is shown in patent No. 313,927, of 
1885. In that construction, however, the cam 
of the lever was liable to impinge upon the 
collar, and be thus prevented from opening. 65 
In my device, I provide for the free operation 
of the lever, and by locating the seat at a dis 
tance from the joint of the collar I provide 
against injuring the neck of the horse. The 
collar-pad also serves to protect the neck of 7O 
the animal from injury. 
I am also aware of Patent No. 279,751 of 
1883, in which a cam-lever is located at the 
I deem 
joint and projects from the collar. 
the construction of the collar with the receSS 75 
f' important, as providing against the projec 
tion of the cam-lever. 
What I claim as my invention is 
in combination, an open-ended collar, A, 
having recessf', and provided with an articu- 8O 
lated metallic strap, C, the free end of which 
is provided with a plate, D, in which are 
formed a series of openings, a, and a link, E, 
with a cam-locking lever, F, pivoted at f in 
the mouth of the recessf', when constructed, 85 
arranged, and operating substantially in the 
manner and for the purposes set forth. 
JONATHAN D. LANE. 
Witnesses: 
P. WAN RIPER, 
WALLACE ROSSMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326536.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 326,536. 
 
A, BONZAN 0. 
CABLE RAILWAY. 
4 Sheets-Sheet l. 
Patented Sept. 15, 1885. 
737 4s 
=%. 724. 4. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington. O.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 326,536. 
A, BONZAN 0. 
CABLE RAILWAY. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 15, 1885. 
 
 
 
 
- - - - - - -a 
- - - - 
- - 
o O 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
(- - - - - - 
- - - - - - 
 
 
 
2a 
 
 
SS 
- 
42.4%/6%.e. 
N, Peters, Photo-lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
A BONZAN 0. 
CABLE RAILWAY. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Sept. 15, 1885. 
(No Model,) 
No. 326,536. 
NE); &% 2 
s 
 
  
traveral o 
/21-4-1- 
(No Model.) 
No. 326,536. 
A. BONZANO. 
CABLE RAILWAY 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Sept. 15, 1885. 
 
  & No.r 
Citz -2. 
perers, photo-Lithographer. Washingtoft. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPHUS BONZANO, OF PHOENIXVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CABLE RALWAY. 
SECIFICATION fortning part of letters Patent No. 326,536, dated September 15, 1885. 
Application filed March 18, 1SS5. (No model.) 
2 o a 27, Luhon, it inctly conce7'72: 
Be it known that I, ADOLPHUS BONZANO, 
of Phoenixville, in the county of Chester and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented an In 
provement in Cable Railways, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention has reference to conduits for 
cable railways and their appendages, but more 
specifically to an improvement upon Letters 
Patent No. 287,220, and dated October 23, 
1SS3, granted to me; and it consists in certain 
improvements by which the slot through which 
the grip passes may be prevented from be 
coming closed or partly closed, all of which 
is fully set forth in the following specification, 
and shown in the accompanying drawings, 
which form part thereof. 
In cable railways in which metallic tubes 
Such as set forth in my patent hereinbefore 
referred to are used, when the pavements be 
tween the tracks are inperfectly laid down 
as, for instance, when the blocks forming the 
pavements are larger on the upper surface. 
than on the lower, forming wedges, or when 
the joints between the pavement-stones are 
not properly filled with an elastic and water 
proof cement-there is a tendency of wedging 
and expansion due to frost, which action has 
the effect of causing the slot to be contracted. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
this difficulty by providing suitable means by 
which the angle-irons forming the slot are 
bolted or otherwise Secured to the vertical 
braces from the transverse beams, or, if de 
sired, to the stringers or rails, and also by 
suitable supporting - braces in the form of 
angle-irons or struts connecting the vertical 
braces, stringers, or rails with the lower part 
of the tube or the ribs thereon, or the lower 
transverse beams. If desired, these struts 
and the cross-braces may be made adjustable, 
by which the width of the slot may be va 
ried to compensate for any decrease in its 
width due to the cause above specified. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a cross-section 
of a cable-railway conduit-tube and railway, 
showing bracing embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view of a modified construc. 
tion, in which the horizontal or upper braces 
are made adjustable. Fig. 3 is a view sub 
stantially similar to that shown in Fig. 2, in 
cluding the dotted portions thereof, and show. 
IO 
25 
45 
ing a slight modification in the bracing, and 
Fig. 4 is also a similar view, in which both 
the horizontal and oblique braces are made 55 
adjustable. 
A is the tube or conduit, of which B B rep 
resent the angle-irons secured to the upper 
edges of the side walls and form the slot C, 
and D are the re-enforcing side ribs, formed 6o 
of angle-iron. E is the lower transverse beam, 
commonly made of channel - beams. F are 
oblique struts connecting the upper purt of. 
the angle-irons or braces D with the lower 
and outer ends of the transverse beam E. So 65 
far the construction is similar to that covered 
in Letters Patent to me, hereinbefore referred 
tO. 
Hare the rails, and rest upon the stringers 
G. These stringers or rails may be connected, 7O 
if desired, with the upper part of the tube by 
the dotted bolts, Fig. 2, and with the bot 
tom of the conduit-tube by oblique braces I, 
as shown in Fig. 1, or to the transverse beam 
E, as shown in Fig. 2. The upper part of the 
conduit or the irons D thereof are connected 
by angle-irons or ties J to the stringers or 
upper edges of the struts I, or to both. As 
shown in Fig. 1, these ties are made of angle 
irons, but in Fig. 2 they are shown as being 8C 
formed of rods which pass through the upper 
ends of the oblique or vertical braces, or 
through the stringers, and are made adjust 
able by nuts. 
P are vertical braces or jes, which are 
secured at the lower ends to the transverse 
beams E and extend up, preferably, on the 
inner side of the stringers and rails, and rig: 
idly secured to the oblique brace I, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 3. The ties J are put through 
the upper ends of the vertical tie or brace P, 
or, if desired, the oblique strut, I, at or about 
their junction, and may be rigidly secured 
thereto or made adjustable by nuts K. The 
stringers and their rails may be loosely sup-95 
ported upon the brackets L, or, if desired, the 
stringers may be rigidly secured to the brac 
In 9. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 4, both 
the oblique struts and horizontal ties are made 
adjustable and formed of rods, the struts 
being supported upon shoes N and adjustable 
by nuts M, Working thereon. The upper ends 
of the struts I may be provided with supports 
9O 
75 
- 
- 
IO) 
2 
326,536 
O 
L, as indicated in Fig. 2, or in dotted lines in 
Fig. 1 and Fig. 3. 
It is immaterial to my in 
vention what the particular construction of 
these struts or vertical ties or braces may be, 
and the conduit or tube may be of any suit 
able design or construction, though that shown 
is what I prefer and have been using for cable 
railways. 
By this construction of bracing and struts 
any downward pressure of the stringers and 
the rails will tend to cause the slot to become 
enlarged in place of being closed, and by form 
ing the struts I of angle-iron they expose a 
large surface to the material above, which 
when forced down acts thereon and prevents 
the stringers being drawn toward the conduit, 
and these, through the agency of the ties J, 
prevent the conduit from becoming closed. 
The tie J, also prevents any wedge action of 
the paving stones forcing the angle-irons B 
toward each other. Thus the distance between 
the said angle-irons and the rails H or their 
stringers may be practically fixed. 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of a sheet-metal conduit 
with the lower transverse beams, vertical ties 
or braces secured thereto, and oblique or in 
clined struts extending from the lower part of 
the conduit or the transverse beams thereof 
and secured at their top to the vertical ties or 
braces, and horizontal ties connecting the up 
per edges of the conduit with the upper ends 
of the struts, and vertical ties to prevent the 
closing of the slot, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
2. The combination of a sheet-metal con 
duit with the lower transverse beams, vertical 
ties or braces secured thereto, oblique or in 
clined struts extending from the lower part of 
the conduit or the transverse beans thereof 
and secured at their top to the said vertical 
25 
45 
55 
ties or struts, and horizontal adjustable ties 
connecting the upper edges of the conduit 
with the upper ends of the struts or vertical 
ties, or both, to prevent the closing of the slot, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination of a sheet-metal con 
duit with the lower transverse beams, vertical 
ties or beams secured thereto, oblique or in 
clined struts extending from the lower part of 
the conduit or the transverse beams thereof 
and secured at their top to the vertical ties, 
and horizontal ties connecting the upper edges 
of the conduit with the upper ends of the struts 
or vertical ties to prevent the closing of the 
slot, the said ties and struts both being adjust 
able, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
4. The combination of a sheet-metal con 
duit with the oblique struts extending from 
the lower part of the conduit or the transverse 
beams thereof, horizontal ties connecting the 
top of said oblique struts with the conduit 
near its top, and rails loosely supported upon 
the upper ends of said struts, but so arranged 
that they cannot approach the conduit through 
the intervention of the extended ends of said 
struts, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
5. The conduit A, having angle-irons BB, 
forming slot C, and re-enforcing ribs D, string 
ers G, rails H, struts I, and ties J, arranged 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
6. The conduit A, having angle-irons BB, 
forming slot C, and re-enforcing ribs D, string 
ers G, rails H, ties P, transverse beams E, 
struts I, and ties J, arranged substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony of which invention I hereunto 
set my hand. 
Witnesses: 
ADOLEPHUS BONZANO. 
w 
- 
R. M. HUNTER, 
ANDREW ZANE, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326636.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 326,636, 
H. W. ELLSWORTH, 
WRITING DESK, 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY W. ELLSWORTH, OF FREDONIA, NEW YORK. 
WRITING - DESK. 
S3ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 326,636, dated September 22, 1885. 
Application filed April 25, 1885. 
(No model.) 
55 
To all whom it. Tay concern. 
Beit known that I, HENRY W. ELLSWORTH, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Fredonia, in the county of Chautauqua, 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Writing-Desks, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to that class of writing 
desks in which the patterns to be copied are 
supported upon strips adjustable within the 
desks, so as to expose the patterms in succes 
sion as they are required in order to copy 
them; and my invention consists in cOnstruct 
ing the desk and arranging the pattern-sheet, 
as fully set forth hereinafter, so as to expose 
the patterns above the upper edge of the in 
clined top of the desk. 
Myinvention further consists in means, fully 
set forth hereinafter, for securing an elastic 
support for the hand, so as to reduce the press 
ure thereof upon the paper. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view illustrating a writing-desk embodying 
my improvement. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
section of the desk. Fig. 3 is a plan view. 
Fig. 4 is a view illustrating a modification of 
the elastic supporting-band. 
The body A of the desk is a receptacle of 
any suitable construction, and is provided 
with an inclined top, a, which is preferably 
hinged at its upper edge, so that it may be 
lifted to expose the receptacle, within which 
may be deposited writing materials of various 
kinds. At the rear the body or case is in 
creased in height, and is provided with rounded 
sides b and with a curved cover, c, hinged at 
its rear end, thereby forming a deep box or 
receptacle, within which is arranged the up 
per roller, d, of a pair of rollers, d d", the 
lower roller, d", being arranged within the 
shallower part of the case, and both rollers 
carrying a strip or band, ac, of paper or other 
flexible material, upon which are Written or 
engraved in lines extending across the strip 
the words, seiutences, or other matter which is 
to serve as a copy for the scholar. From one 
of the sides b to the other is extended a strip 
or guard, f, the lower edge of which is a short 
distance above the rear edge, y, of the top of 
the desk, so as to leave a narrow opening or 
sight of sufficient width to expose a line of 
the copy upon the paper strip beneath, so that 
after the strip has been adjusted by turning 
the roller but a single line of the copy will be 
exposed. 
The rollers are turned to carry the paper in 
One direction or the other by means of but 
tons h upon the shaft i of the rollers, which 
project through the case at one side. 
When the desk is in use, the lid c is thrown 
back so as to uncover the sight-opening U and 
expose the copy; but when the desk is not in 
use the cover is thrown forward and effectu 
ally covers and protects the copy and pre 
vents the access of dust to the receptacle. 
It is well known that beginners in penman 
ship are apt to bear with too much pressure 
upon the paper, thereby interfering with the 
freedom of the movements of the hand and 
rendering their writing cramped and angular. 
To prevent this, I support a standard, D, in a 
position in front of the Writer, and from an 
arm, n, of the standard I suspend a strap or 
loop of rubber or other elastic material, which 
the writer may connect to his hand in such 75 
manner that the elasticity of the band will 
tend slightly to lift the hand and reduce the 
pressure of the same upon the paper. 
The band n may be a strip of rubber or elas 
tic fabric with a cross-piece to extend across 
the under sides of the fingers between which 
the band passes; or it may consist, preferably, 
of a continuous rubber band, through which 
the forefinger, wrist, or any finger will pass. 
Where it is desired to assist in making the up 
strokes, the band n is carried to the shaft of 
the standard or is otherwise fixed at a point 
forward of the writer, as shown in dotted lines, 
Fig. 1. 
The standard and band may be used in con 
nection with portable or stationary writing 
desks or tables. 
When the standard D is used in connection 
with the style of desk illustrated in the draw. 
ings, the latter is provided with a socket, v, 
into which the lower end of the standard may 
be placed, and when the desk is not in use the 
standard may be lifted from its socket and 
placed in the shallow receptacle of the desk. 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
struction and arrangement of parts shown and 
described, I claim 
1. A copying-desk provided With a case or 
body having a shallow receptacle and inclined 
85 
90 
95 
IO 
5 
25 
3 5 
45 
 
2 
- 
326,636 
4. The combination, with a writing desk or 
table, of an elastic band, a support therefor 
whereby it is secured at one end forward of 
the position of the Writer, and adapted for di 
rect attachment to the hand, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination of a desk provided with 
a socket, v, and a standard, D, fitting the said 
Socket detachably, and an elastic strip, n, con 
nected to the standard and adapted for attach 
ment to the hand of the writer, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
HENRY W. ELLSWORTH. 
25 
Witnesses: 
HENRY M. WALTER, 
CLARENCE SANGER. 
top, a deeper receptacle at the rear with a 
transverse sight-opening directly above the 
rear edge of the inclined top, and with roll 
ers did, arranged one above the other and sup 
5 porting a band of paper containing the mat 
ter to be copied in position to expose the same 
directly above the upper edge of the inclined 
top, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the body of the case 
Io having a shallow receptacle and inclined cover 
therefor and a deep receptacle at the rear 
with a transverse strip, f, sight-opening, u, 
and cover c, and rollers did, supporting a strip 
of paper, ac, at the rear of said opening, sub 
3. The combination, in a writing-desk, of a 
standard and an elastic strip supported by the 
standard adapted for attachment to the hand 
of the writer, for the purpose described. 
I5 stantially as set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326737.txt	(No Model.) 
J. HOFFMAN, 
PENCIL, OR CRAY ON HOLDER, 
No. 326,737, 
Patented Sept. 22, 1885, 
122 6-sa eas, 
%27.4ce 
 
 
mi. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH HOFFMAN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO GUSTAVUS A. 
GOLDSMITH, OF SAME PLACE, 
PENCL OR CRAY ON HOLDER. 
SEPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 326,737, dated September 22, 1885. 
Application filed March 12, 1885. 
(No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH HOFFMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York city, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Pencil or 
Lead or Crayon Holders, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
- My invention relates to that class of pencils 
or lead and crayon holders in which clamp 
ing jaws (in combination with a sleeve or 
sheath and a lead or crayon containing tube) 
are contracted or closed upon or caused to hold 
the lead or crayon subjected to their action by 
the movement longitudinally of the sleeve or 
sheath relative to the jaws, or vice versa; and 
my invention, more specifically stated, consists 
in combining, with the above-recited parts, 
mechanism for holding the lead or crayon both 
in its projected and retracted position and for 
feeding the same, this mechanism being placed 
within the lead-containing tube. 
Among the advantages secured by my in 
vention are, first, definite retention of the lead 
or crayon in its projected position when in use, 
whereby its backward slipping, consequent 
upon dulling or weakening of the clamping 
jaws or shaving of the lead, is avoided; sec 
ond, a positive feed without danger of losing 
the lead; and third, avoidance of the direct 
nipping action of the jaws upon the lead or 
Crayon, which frequently occasions its fracture. 
In the drawings like reference-letters indi 
cate like parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 illustrates a pencil-holder embody 
ing my invention, the external sheath or sleeve, 
with its trinamings, being shown in longitud 
inal central section, and the lead-holding mech 
anism projected ready for use, this mechan 
ism, the tube which contains it, the actuating 
spring, and the clamping-jaws being shown in 
plan view. Fig. 2 illustrates the same pencil 
holder shown in Fig. 1, the lead-holding mech 
anism being retracted, and all the parts being 
shown in longitudinal central section, with the 
exception of the lead - holding mechanism, 
which is shown in plan view. Both of these 
figures are somewhat enlarged from the size of 
an actual pencil-holder, the better to illustrate 
the several parts, their construction and com 
bination. 
A is the outer sheath or case. It may be made 
of wood, metal, rubber, paper, or any other 
suitable material. In the pencil-holder shown 
in the drawings it is formed of a tubular hard 
rubber body, a, provided with a metal tip, b, 
which may be contracted at its forward end 
where it engages with the clamping-jaws. It 
is attached to the hard-rubber part in any suit 
able manner. 
B is the lead-containing tube or receiver, 
formed of metal in the present instance, and it 
should preferably be made of metal, although 
I do not limit myself to such material. It car 
ries at its front end the clamping-jaws C, which 
in the instance illustrated are made integral 
with the body of the tube B. These jaws have 
normally a slight spring away from each other, 
so that when projected from the end of the 
pencil they separate, and are so constructed 
as to nip or bite the lead or crayon placed be 
tween them. They are formed externally With 
a taper or inclined part, c. These parts are 
so constructed and adjusted to each other that 
when the jaws are retracted the front end of the 
sheath (shown at b) will act on the inclined Sur. 
faces c and close the jaws firmly upon the lead 
or crayon holding device projecting between 
them, the end of the jaws being outside of the 
sheath. Encircling the rear end of the tube B 
is a spiral or other suitable spring, d, one end 
of which bears against the shoulder formed by 
the forward end, e, of a small metal cap, f', 
fastened on the extreme rear end of the tube 
B, and the front end of the spring bears against 
a shoulder, g, formed on a sleeve or lining, h, 
attached to the inside of the sheath A, and 
which projects somewhat beyond the rear end 
of the sheath A, as seen at i, for the sake of 
giving that end of the sheath a finished ap 
pearance. The cap f and the sleeve h are 
both preferably made of metal. The cap f' 
moves with the tube B, which carries the jaws 
C, sliding smoothly within the sleeveh, and at 
the forward end the metal tip b should pref 
erably be so contracted at the part marked 
b' that it will properly guide and support the 
tube B. The stop K, formed upon the tube 
B, takes a bearing against the shoulder 9 of 
the sleeve or liningh, and limits the rearward 
action of the spring d. 
It works in a slot 
formed in the front end of the sleeve h, thus 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
2 
326,737 
5 
O 
projected position suitable for use. When it 6O. 
is desired to retract the lead, the pencil-holder 
is held with the lead upward, and pressure is 
applied to the cap f. The parts are again 
acted upon as before. Thejaws relax their hold 
upon the propelling lead-holder, which then 
immediately drops within the tube B, carry 
ing the lead a entirely within the jaws C until 
the lugh comes in contact with the rear end 
of the sloth". The pressure being then removed 
from the cap f', the jaws C are again closed, 7O 
and the lead and its propelling and holding 
device are all inclosed within the tube Band 
held therein by closing of the jaws. 
It is obvious to one skilled in this art that 
many changes may be made in the location 75 
and relative adjustment of the parts above 
shown and described, and that various equiva 
lent devices may be used instead of those shown 
and still my invention be employed. I do not, 
construction or arrangement shown. 
also preventing rotation of the tube B relative 
to the sheath A. 
Within the tube B is placed the lead-hold 
ing mechanism. This consists of the lead 
receiving tube and feeding devices of an ordi 
nary propelling-pencil, (shown at F;) and it 
is provided with the usual rotatable tip, f, 
Which engages with the usual internal tube 
and follower with threaded exterior, which 
engages with threads formed on the inside 
of the Outer tube, F, all as usual in propelling 
pencils, and which do not require more spe 
cific description or illustration here. In one 
side of the tube B, I form a slot, h", (seen in 
Fig.1) in which travels a lug or ear,h', formed 
on the rear end of the external tube of the 
lead-holding device F. This lug is so located 
on the lead-holding device relative to the slot 
h that when it is in contact with the forward 
- 
end or shoulder of the slot the lead held by 
the holding device will be in its proper pro therefore, limit myself to the details either of 8o 
jeeted position, and so that the jaws C will 
upon their retraction, consequent upon the 
release of the spring d, close upon the lead 
holding device behind a little collar, le", formed 
on the extreme forward end of the external 
tube of the lead-holding device, thus securely 
clamping the same and holding it and the 
lead held by it firmly in the proper projected 
position for use; and the slot h is made of 
such length that when the lead-holder is re 
tracted it and the projecting end of the lead 
held by it may drop entirely within the jaws 
C before the lugh strikes the back end of the 
slot. The lug h", in addition to its above-re 
cited function, prevents rotation of the ex 
ternal tube F of the propelling lead-holder 
upon twisting the tip f for feeding the lead. 
The lead is shown at X. . It is inserted at the 
frontend of the tipf, as usual in propelling 
pencils. 
The operaticn is as follows: Assuming the 
propelling lead-holder to be retracted within 
the tube B, by pressing on the cap f', the tube 
B will be pushed forward against the stress of 
the spring b, thus projecting the jaws C, which 
then, Springing apart, allow the propelling 
lead-holder bearing the lead to drop, the pen 
cil being held with the lead end down, until 
the lug h comes in contact with the forward 
shoulder or end of the slot h", which stops the 
lead-holder. The pressure upon the capf' is 
then, released, and the spring d, retracting the 
lead tube B, carries the propelling lead-holder 
F with it until the jaws C, being contracted 
by the tip b of the sleeve or sheath, close in 
behind the collar or shoulder k' and securely 
lock the several devices maintaining the lead 
firmly held in the propelling-holder F in the 
I claim 
1. The combination, in a lead or crayon 
holder, of a case or sheath, expanding jaws ta 
pered or provided with projections acted on 
by the case or sheath to produce the closing 
of the jaws, and provided with an extension 
beyond the end of the case opposite the jaws, 
whereby the jaws may be pressed outwardly, 
from the case, a spring which automatically 90 
moves the jaws relative to the case longitudi 
nally, and a lead-holding device provided with 
a stop or stops to limit its movement inwardly 
and outwardly, placed between the jaws and 
retained in place by them both in its extended 95 
and retracted position, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination, in a lead or crayon 
holder, of a case or sheath, expanding jaws 
acted on by the case or sheath to produce the 
closing of the jaws and provided with an ex 
tension beyond the end of the case opposite 
the jaws, whereby the jaws may be pressed 
outwardly from the case, a spring which auto 
matically moves the jaws relative to the case 
longitudinally, and a lead-holding device 
placed between the jaws and retained in place 
by them, both in its extended and retracted 
position, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 7th day of 
March, A. D. 1885. 
JOSEPH HOFFMAN. 
JOHN H. IVES, 
SHERWOOD W. CONNELL. 
Witnesses: 
ICO 
OS 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326838.txt	(No Model.) 
C. BOY CE, 
BOOK COWER, OR PROTECTOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 326,838. 
Patented Sept. 22, 1885. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. BOY CE. 
BOOK COWER, OR PROTECTOR 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 326,838. 
Patented Sept. 22, 1885. 
 
- - - - - - - - - 
e 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARO LIN E BOY CE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
B O OK COVER OR PROTECTOR 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 326,838, dated September 22, 1835. 
Application filed June 30, 1884. (No model.) 
O 
To add, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CAROLINE BOY CE, of 
the city and county of New York, in the State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Book Covers or Protectors, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to book covers or pro 
tectors which are commonly made of Manila 
or other strong and tough paper, and which 
are to be applied to the exterior of the book 
to protect the binding and prevent wear there 
of. Covers or protectors of this kind have 
been heretofore made of a piece of paper cut 
somewhat larger than the book to be covered, 
in order to provide flaps, which, after the book 
covers are laid on the paper cover or protect 
or, are folded over the edges of the book-cow 
ers and secured by gum or by interlocking 
tongues and slots. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
strong and durable cover which can be readily 
applied to a book, and which, when applied, 
will only form a single thickness of paper on 
the inner sides of the book-covers. 
The invention consists in a novel combina 
tion, with the side covers of a book, of a cover 
or protector constructed and applied thereto, 
as hereinafter described, and pointed out in 
the claims; also in a novel construction of 
cover or protector, also pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an end view of a book having my improved 
Fig. 
paper cover or protector applied to it. 
2 is a plan of the open book, showing the inner 
sides of the covers thereof and the paper pro 
tector applied thereto. Fig. 3 represents on 
a smaller scale the paper blank for the cover 
or protector, and Fig. 4 represents the paper 
cover or protector partially folded. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A designates the leaves, and B B designate 
the side covers, of a book to which my im 
proved cover or protector is to be applied. 
To make the protector or cover, I take a 
blank or piece of paper of about the form shown 
in Fig. 3. The height or width of this piece 
should be considerably greater than the height 
or dimension of the book from top to bottom, 
and is preferably nearly or quite double the 
height of the book. The length of the piece 
of paper should be such that its two end por 
tions, when folded inward, will be sufficient to 
cover the inner sides of the side covers, B, of 
the book. The piece or blank C is first folded 
or creased along the dotted lines at a, Fig. 3, 
which brings it to the form shown in Fig. 4. 
The turned-in portions C are shown as quite 
narrow, in order to economize paper; but they 
may be of such width that when folded over 
they will nearly or quite meet, thus making a 
double thickness of paper throughout. The 
folded blank is then creased or folded on the 
dotted lines b b and c c, (indicated in Fig. 4.) 
and is ready to be applied to the book, as I 
shall soon describe. I have here shown slits 
or not ches d in opposite edges of the blank at 
points coincident with one of the dotted lines 
c, thereby forming supplemental flaps C8, for 
a purpose hereinafter described. These slits 
or cuts and supplemental flaps C* formed by 
them are not necessarily employed, but they 
serve a purpose hereinafter described. If the 
blank is made without the slits or cuts d, it 
would present throughout the same appearance 
as the left-hand portion of the blank shown. 
By folding inward the portions C it will be 
seen that I form pockets C, open at the ends 
and extending to the lines of creasing c, and 
these pockets severally receive the side covers, 
B, of the book, the said covers being slipped 
into the pockets from the open ends thereof. 
The making of the supplemental flaps or fold 
ed portions C* enables that portion of the 
cover or protector to receive or be applied to 
the one side cover without slipping the latter 
into the open end of the pocket, as I shall now 
describe. The protector or cover C having 
been folded inward or creased for folding on 
the Iines c, one side cover B of the book is 
slipped into the open-ended pocket C, at the 
| left hand of Fig. 1, and the other cover B is 
enveloped or introduced into the right-hand 
pocket C, by tucking the supplemental flaps 
C'k inward under the outside of the side cover 
B and between it and the protector C. The 
covered book then presents the appearance 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the side covers B 
being covered on their inner sides with but a 
single thickness of paper throughout. 
The construction of the paper cover or pro 
3O 
55 
65 
75 
90 
OO 
 
326,838 
5 
25 
35 
tector, so as to form a uniform instead of an 
unequal thickness on the inner sides of the 
side covers, is very advantageous, because, 
When the paper protector forms an uneven or 
Variable thickness on the inner sides of the 
side covers, the covers are apt to be bent or 
Warped, the appearance of the book injured, 
and its durability lessened. 
When the protector is made without the slits 
or cuts d, the side covers of a small or lightbook 
may be readily slipped into the pockets Ck from 
the open ends thereof, or the protector may be 
applied to any book by lifting the leaves of 
the book and allowing the side covers B to 
drop downward, thus permitting the two open 
ended pockets Ck to be slipped upon them. 
If the book be heavy, this lifting by the 
leaves and allowing the side covers to fall 
downward mightsfrain the binding, and hence 
the advantage of forming the slits or cuts d 
and flaps C*, which may be tucked under one 
side cover after the other side cover has been 
slipped into the other pocket. 
When slit or cut at d, the protector C* may 
be applied in either of the ways above de. 
Scribed. 
The protector or cover may be made of Ma 
nila or other strong paper, and the thickness 
and strength of the paper may be varied ac 
cording to the size of the book and the amount 
of handling to which it is to be subjected. 
The protectors may be cut out, creased, and 
folded by machinery and sold as an article of 
stationery, and they may be applied without 
any gum or other substance liable to soil the 
books, covers, or fingers. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
understood that when my protector is applied 
to the side covers B of a book the flap por 
45 
55 
5O. 
tions C, which are inward of the dotted lines 4O 
c c, do not receive the side covers B under 
them, but lie on the outer sides of Said COvers, 
while the flap portions C, which are outward 
of or beyond the lines c c, do receive the 
said covers B under them, and in this way the 
protector is secured upon the book. In other 
words, the portions of the protector inward of 
the linesc e simply lie in the outer sides of but 
do not receive the side covers B, while the 
portions outside or beyond the lines c c form 
pockets C8, which receive the side covers. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the side covers 
B B of a book, of the cover or protector C, 
herein described, having the folded portions C 
at top and bottom and folded inward on the 
lines c c, the portions of the protector outward 
of the lines c c being parallel with the portions 
inward of said lines and forming open-ended 
pockets C-8, within which the side covers B B 
are inserted and which cover the inner Sur 
faces of the said covers, while the portions 
inward of said lines ( c. extend over and pro 
tect the outer surfaces of said side covers, sub 
stantially as herein described. 
2. The paper book protector or cover here 
in described, consisting of a blank, C, having 
the folded portions C at top and bottom there 
of creased or folded on the lines a c to form 
open-ended pockets C, and having the folded 
portions C slit or cut coincident with the line 
c, as at d, substantially as herein set forth. 
CAROLINE BOYCE. 
Witnesses: 
C. HALL, 
FREDIK. HAYNES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US326938.txt	(No Model,) 
No. 326,938, 
T. E. BOMAR, 
INK FOUNTAIN FOR PRINTING MACHINES. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1885, 
 
1H3 
 
F 
WITWESSES s s 
SSs 
-3 
a -a - 
"22 
is 
6 O?(3.04. 2 f "S A 
r2: 
(la cv 2 
27zonzas A. 
IJWWEWTOR, 
Alonzag, 
y 
Attorneys, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS E. B O MAR, OF McKINNEY, TEXAS. 
NK-F OUNTAIN FOR PRINTING-MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 326,938, dated September 29, 1885. 
Application filed July 15, 1884. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all whon, it may concern: 
! 
Be it known that I, THOMAS E. BOMAR, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mc 
Kinney, in the county of Collin and State of 
Texas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Ink-Fountains for Printing 
Machines; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to letters or figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to an improved ink 
fountain for printing-presses, which is specially 
adapted for that class of presses having a ro 
tary inking table or disk, as in the type, so 
called, the Gordon' press. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
simple and effective means for permitting dif 
ferent-colored inks to be readily and conven 
iently used in the press without removing the 
inking devices that are carried by or sup 
ported upon the press-frame in co-operative 
relation to the inking-table or revolving disk. 
To these ends the invention consists in a 
detachable or removable ink holder or foun 
tain that is designed to be placed into a shell 
shaped frame having a discharge-aperture at 
its end and a distributing-roller located in 
front thereof. The shell-shaped frame is car 
ried by a vertical arm clamped to the framing 
of the press, and the shell-shaped frame is 
further provided with a socket, through which 
the Vertical arm passes, and with a thumb 
screw for adjusting its position with reference 
to the inking-table. The removable ink-holder 
has a discharge-aperture in its end wall, which 
registers with the opening in the shell-shaped 
frame, and a cut-off gate or plate is provided 
for regulating the size of the aperture in the 
ink-fountain or closing the same. 
A suitable number of detachable ink-foun 
tains are designed to form the complement of 
a press, So that the color of the ink used can 
be readily changed by withdrawing the foun 
tain from the shell-shaped frame, cleaning the 
delivery-roller and the disk or table upon 
5o which it travels, and substituting another ink 
fountain containing a different-colored ink. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of an ink-fountain constructed according 
to my invention. Fig. 2 is a detail view of 
the removable ink reservoir or holder. Fig. 3 
is a vertical sectional view of the ink-foun 
tain, showing the arm and clamp that Serve 
to support the ink fountain above the rotary 
ink-table. 
The reference-numeral 1 designates the in 
clined rotary inking table or disk of a Gordon 
printing-press, and 2 is part of the adjoining 
frame-work. Above said inking table is ar 
ranged a shell-shaped frame, 3, that is gener 
ally made of a single piece of cast-iron, and 
has an inclined bottom and vertical side and 
end walls. At the front or highest portion of 
said frame 3 are formed bracketS Ol' arms 4, 
which receive the horizontal journals or shaft 
of a roller or disk, 5, that serves to distribute 
the ink upon the inking-table 1. This roller 
is made of hard Wood or rubber, and has a 
rubber tire. An aperture is made in the front 
wall of the frame 3 for the discharge of the 
ink onto the periphery of the roller 5. In 
side the frame 3, and partly inclosed by the 
same, is arranged the ink reservoir or holder 
6, which conforms in shape with said frame 
that is, it has an inclined bottom and vertical 
side and end wall. This ink-reservoir may be 
made of sheet or other metal, porcelain, glass, 
or other suitable material, and it has an aper 
ture, 8, in its front wall, that coincides or reg 
isters with the opening in the front wall of the 
frame 3. 
A vertically-sliding gate, 9, fitted in suit 
able guides on the inner face of the front wall 
of the ink-reservoir, serves as a medium for 
varying the size of the discharge-opening, thus 
regulating the outflow of the ink; or said gate, 
when pushed down to its full extent, closes 
said opening and shuts off the flow of ink. 
It should be observed that the ink-reservoir 
fits closely into the frame 3 in Such a unanner 
as to require no fastening devices, and it can 
be readily inserted or removed, as may be 
desired, and this without disturbing the other 
members of the ink-fountain. 
An arm, 10, rising from the frame-work ad 
joining the inking-table, and attached thereto 
by a suitable screw-clamp, 11, is fitted at its 
| upper end into a socket or apertured exten 
45 
65 
7 5 
90. 
95 
IOC 
'y 
2 
- 
326,938 
sion, 14, on the rear wall of the frame 3. A 
set-screw passing through said socket and 
bearing upon the vertical arm 10 serves as a 
medium for adjustably holding the ink-foun 
5 tain in position-that is, said fountain can be 
raised and lowered to adapt it for use on dif. 
ferent-sized presses. It will readily be mani. 
fest without further description that a detach 
able or independent ink reservoir or holder 
Io applied or used as above described is simple 
in construction, convenient in use, and is an 
important adjunct of a printing-press where 
the color of the ink is frequently changed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I5 I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination of the shell-shaped frame 
having an inclined bottom, a hole in the lower 
part of the front end wall, and a socket pro 
vided with a thumb-screw, a vertical arm: 2O 
passing through the said socket and provided 
with a clamp at its lower end, a roller for dis 
tributing ink, journaled at the front of the 
shell and vertically adjustable there with, and 
the removable reservoir having a gate, an in- 25 
clined bottom, and an opening corresponding 
with the hole in the shell, substantially as 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 3O 
THOS. E. BOMAR. 
Witnesses: 
O. M. GODIDARD, 
WM. C. REAVES. 
s 
-- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327039.txt	(No Model,) 
E, THOMSON, 
SAFETY DEWICE FOR ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS, 
No. 327,039. 
Patented Sept. 29, l885. 
Witre S S E S 
2/ z2 at 4. 
24% A%-7-72-7, 
Inventor, 
Z Zeze/Z7677a-to 7C/ 
2, 6-6 -- 7 7%rs. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIHU THOMSON, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE THOMSON 
HOUSTON ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF CONNECTICUT. 
SAFETY DEVICE FOR ELECTRICAL CIRCUTS. 
SPECIFICATIOIN cynigg part of Tetters Patent No. 327,039, dated September 29, 1885. 
Application filed February 8, 1884. (No model.) 
55 
75 
SO 
IO 
To all, whom it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, ELIHU THOMSON, of 
Lynn, county of Essex, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvement in Safe 
5 ty. Devices for Electrical Circuits, of which 
the following description, in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters on the drawings representing like 
parts. 
My invention relates to a safety device for 
circuits that derive electrical energy or are 
fed from other circuits supplied with currents 
of higher potential than is desirable for the 
supplied or local circuits, in which the current 
15 may be produced by induction from the main 
Or supplying circuit, or by some other trans 
ferring apparatus which may operate continu 
ously or intermittently. 
The safety device consists, essentially, of a 
2O SWitch or circuit connecting device (shown in 
this instance as controlled by an electro-mag 
net) having one terminal connected with the 
local or supplied circuit and the other with 
the ground, in such a manner that when the 
25 said local circuit becomes accidentally or un 
intentionally connected with the main or sup 
plying circuit the said magnet will be ener 
gized by the electricity escaping to the ground, 
and when thus energized will cause or per 
3O mit the switch to be opened, wholly discon 
necting the local or supplied circuit from the 
main circuit. 
Figure I is a diagram of a main current 
Supplying circuit and supplied or local cir 
35 cuit which derives electrical energy from the 
said main circuit, and is provided with a 
safety device in accordance with this inven 
tion; and Fig. 2 a similar diagram, showing 
the local circuit supplied with electrical en 
4o ergy from the main circuit through the inter 
vention of a secondary battery which is 
charged from the main line and then gives 
out electricity to the local circuit. 
The main line a b, charged with an electric 
45 current of high potential from any suitable 
generator or source of electricity, is provided 
with means to lmpart electrical energy to or 
cause an electric current to be produced in 
a local or current - receiving circuit, c. d, for 
so supplying instruments of any kind-such, for 
instance, as incandescent lamps, (indicated 
at e.) 
The apparatus by which electricity is im 
parted on supplied to the local circuits ed 
from the main circuit (, l is shown in Fig. 1 
as consisting of an induction - coil, fg, the 
terminals of the secondary coil of which are 
connected by wires h i with switches k m, or 
other circuit-controlling devices, which may 
be placed in contact with the terminals of the 
local circuit c d, thus completing the said local 
circuit through the said secondary coil 9, or 
by means of the said switches the said local 
circuit may be wholly disconnected from the 
said secondary coil, and thus be wholly re 
moved from the influence of the main circuit 
a b. This kind of apparatus may be used for 
imparting electricity to a local or supplied 
circuit from a main circuit in which the cur 
rents are of short duration or of alternating 
polarity. 
The switches k n are mechanically connect 
ed together by a bar, n, by which they may 
be both moved simultaneously to connect both 
terminals of the circuit cd with the coil g or 
to disconnect them therefrom, the said bar be 
ing acted upon by a Spring, O, tendibg to 
move it in a direction to disconnect the said 
local circuit and coil. 
When the switches are moved to the posi 
tion to connect the local circuits c d and coil 
g, as shown in full lines, Fig. 1, they are re 
tained in the said position by a locking device 
shown as a finger, p, engaging a projection, 
', on the bar n, the said finger being connect 
ed with the armature-lever of an electro-mag 
net, t, one terminal of which is connected by 
wire 2 with the local circuit, and the other 
terminal of which is connected by Wire 3 with 
the ground. 
When the circuit c d is charged with a cur 
rent of normal potential and the insulation 
from the main line is nearly perfect, the cur 
rent escaping from the circuit 0 d through the 
magnett to the ground is Wholly inapprecial 
ble, or insufficient to cause the said magnet to 
attract its armature, and the circuit cut-off or 
safety device, consisting of the said magnet 
and switches h n, produces no material effect. 
If, however, the local circuit c d should be 
9O 
95 
IOO 
327,039 
IO 
come overcharged by an escape from the main 
circuit a b-such as might be produced by a 
cross-connection between the Said circuitS or 
an imperfection in the insulation between the 
main and secondary coils of the transferring 
apparatus-the current from the main circuit 
will increase the potential in the local circuit, 
so that the electricity escaping from the lat 
ter through the magnett would be sufficient 
to energize the said magnet, so that it would 
attract its armature and release the bar n, 
which is moved to the position shown in dot 
ted lines, Fig. 1, wholly disconnecting the cir 
cuit c d from the main or supplying circuit, 
and removing the possibility of injury to the 
said local circuit c d and instruments Con 
nected therewith, arising from too strong a 
current. 
When the main circuit a b is short and 
thoroughly insulated, it should have a ground 
connection, as shown at 4, through a large re 
sistance, in order to afford a circuit for the 
magnett, in case the main and local lines be 
come connected; but when the main line is 
long the general unavoidable leakage will be 
sufficient without a special earth-connection. 
When the main and local circuits are con 
nected, as shown by the dotted line 5, the 
current will divide at the points 4 and 5, as 
indicated by the arrows, apartflowing through 
the earth-branch 4 3 2 5, including the mag 
nett and a part of the local circuit, and thus 
energizing the said magnet and causing the 
total separation of the local from the main 
circuit. 
The invention is applicable in any case 
where one electric circuit, which may for dis 
tinction be called the local' or supplied' 
circuit, derives its electricity in any way from 
another circuit containing a prime generating 
source of electricity, it being intended that 
the two circuits should be electrically discon 
lected or insulated from one another, and 
that the current in the supplied circuit shall 
be normally of lower potential than that in th 
main circuit. 
The means or apparatus employed for im 
parting the electricity to the local from the 
main circuit may be varied, and it is not es 
sential that the local circuit be continuously 
supplied while a current is flowing through 
the main circuit. The essential feature of the 
invention consists in providing an automatic 
cut-off for separating a circuit from one hav. 
ing a current of higher potential when con 
nection has been established between said cir 
cuits. 
Fig. 2 illustrates two circuits, one of which, 
a b, may be considered the main circuit, and 
is intended to have currents of high poten 
tial, and the other or local circuit, ed., is in 
tended to be supplied with electrical energy 
derived from the current in the main circuit 
a b. Instead, however, of deriving its elec 
tricity continuously by induction, as pre 
viously described in connection with Fig. 1, 
it receives it intermittingly by means of an 
intermediate storing device, consisting in this 
instance of a secondary battery, f, so arranged 
that it may be placed in connection with the 
main circuit to receive electricity therefrom, 
and then with the local circuit to impart the 
electricity supplied from the main circuit to 
the said local circuit. The said battery is 
connected by wires h' i' with switches of', 
which may be connected with the main line 
in order that the battery might receive its 
supply therefrom, and the coils of the said 
battery are also connected by wires h i with 
switches k m, by which it may be connected 
with the local circuit in order to impart the 
supply of electricity from the main circuit to 
the said local circuit. 
Since, owing to the proximity of portions 
of the local circuit to the main circuit, and 
owing to the connections between the local 
circuit and the battery and between the bat 
tery and the main circuit, it is possible that 
the local circuit might become connected with 
the main circuit, in which case it would be 
charged with electricity of as high potential 
as that in the main circuit, the said local cir 
cuit is provided with an automatic cut-off or 
safety device, k n t, which forms, in connec 
tion with the main and local circuits, the sub 
ject of this invention, and the construction and 
operation of which has already been fully de 
scribed in connection with Fig. 1, in which 
other means were employed for imparting the 
electrical energy from the main to the local 
circuit. 
The normal operation of the apparatus illus 
trated in Fig. 2 is as follows: When the 
switches of are in position to connect the main 
circuit a b with the wiresh' i', the current from 
the said main circuit will flow over the earth 
branch 3 sufficiently to cause the magnet t to 
be energized by the escape, permitting the 
switches k.m. to open, as before, and the local 
circuit c d will thus be disconnected from the 
main circuit, while the secondary battery is 
being charged. When the latter is sufficiently 
charged, the switches of may be opened and 
the switches k in closed and engaged by the 
locking device, thus enabling the local circuit 
to be supplied from the battery f', although 
if any accidental connection should occur be 
tween the main and local circuits the Switches 
lc in will be permitted to open, removing the 
local circuit from the influence of the main 
circuit. 
I claim 
1. A main or current-supplying electric cir 
cuit and a local or supplied circuit deriving 
electrical energy therefrom, but intended to be 
electrically insulated or disconnected from 
Said main circuit, and normally having a cur 
rent of lower potential than said main circuit, 
combined with a safety cut-off operated by 
increase in potential of the current in the 
local or supplied circuit, whereby the latter 
is automatically disconnected from the main 
3C) 
45 
fo 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
327,039 
ratus which supplies or imparts electricity to 
the latter from the former, combined with 
switches controlling the connection of the 
said local circuit with the transferring appa 
ratus, the locking device for the said switches, 
and the electro-magnet and its armature con 
trolling the said locking device, the said mag 
net being energized upon the abnormal rise of 
potential in the supplied circuit, such as pro 
duced by an electrical connection between the 
supplied and main circuits, and thus operat 
ing the locking device and causing the switch 
to disconnect the supplied from the main cir 
cuit, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
ELIHU THOMSON. 
35 
Witnesses: 
W. O. WAKEFIELD, 
E. WILBURRICE. 
circuit upon the establishment of electrical 
connection between said main and supplied 
circuits, substantially as described. 
2. A main or current-supply electric cir. 
cuit and a local or supplied circuit deriving 
electrical energy therefrom, but intended to be 
electrically insulated or disconnected from the 
said main circuit, and to normally have a cur 
rent of lower potential than the said main 
circuit, combined with switches controlling 
the local circuit, and a controlling electro 
magnet for the said switches, and a branch 
circuit from the local circuit to the ground, 
including the said magnet, which, upon con 
nection being made between the main and 
local circuits, and the consequent rise in po 
tential in the latter, is energized and causes the 
switches to be operated and the local circuit 
thereby disconnected from the main circuit, 
3. The main and local circuits and appa 
2O substantially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327139.txt	(no Model.) 
H. M. CLEMONS, 
BRIDE BET, 
No. 327,139, 
Patented Sept. 29, 1885. 
Witness P. 
IIllent Dr. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HIRAM. M. CLEMONS, OF VIRGINIA CITY, NEVADA. 
BRDLE-B.T. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 327,139, dated September 29, 1885, 
Application filed May 18, 1885. (No model.) 
- 
The bit-iron proper is provided with two will soon cause him to become quiet. 
the check-pieces and the check-rein in the 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HIRAM. M. CLEMONS, a rings D, so that if the animal attempts to run 
citizen of the United States, residing at Vir- away, by drawing upon the reins the check 
ginia City, in the county of Storey and State pieces will be drawn from the slots into the 
of Nevada, have invented a new and useful mouth of the animal, in which position the 
Bridle-Bit, of which the following is a specifi- weakest driver can manage him. 
cation. 
When the check-pieces are in position in 
This invention consists in making the check- driving with loose reins, the animal will gen 
pieces so that they will shut into the bit and erally throw the head forward, and this ac 
be drawn out by the reins or check-strap, as tion, through the medium of the check-rein, 
occasion requires, and in forming said check- will pull or carry the check-pieces back into 
pieces with angular arms and rings; and it the slots in the bit-iron, and a smooth bit is 
further consists in certain peculiarities of con- then had. 
struction, as hereinafter set forth. 
In arranging the bit for a riding-bridle or 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a hitching the animal with the reins in the rings 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a plan D, a halter or strap is connected to one of the 
of my improved bridle-bit with check-pieces rings E, and the end of the halter is passed 
closed within the bit. Fig. 2 is also a plan through the other or opposite ring E, and by 
with the check-pieces drawn outwardly from drawing upon the halter a pressure is brought 
to bear upon the under jaw of the animal that 
the bit. 
slots, A, extending from near the center of the 
I am aware that bridle-bits have heretofore 
bit outwardly to each end thereof. These slots been constructed having check-pieces pivoted 
pass through the bit-iron, and annular holes or to the bit-iron and adapted to be drawn back 
ward and forward. This, therefore, I do not 
openings are made in both ends of the bit. 
which are pivoted at their inner ends within 
What I do claim as new, and desire to se 
the slots. To each corner or angle of the cure by Letters Patent, is 
check-pieces is pivoted a chain, C, which A bridle-bit consisting of a slotted bit-iron 
passes through the cylindrical openings in the having annular openings at the ends, to the 
ends of the bit, and the ends of these chains center of which bit-iron are pivoted check 
are provided with a ring. D. 
pieces B B, provided with angular arms EE, 
The outer ends of the check-pieces are made carrying rings EE, said check-pieces being 
angular, and to the arms E are connected a adapted to operate in the slots of the bit-iron 
ring, E, and when the chains C are hauled by being drawn from or shut within them by 
taut the check-pieces are shut up within the , means of link or chain connections C, passing 
bit-iron, as shown at Fig. 1. 
through the cylindrical openings in the ends 
The head-stall rings G are rigidly connected of the bit, substantially in the manner and for 
to the bit, and are always in a vertical posi- the purpose herein set forth and specified. 
tion in line with the bit-iron. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
driving reins are connected to the rings D and 
the check-rein in the rings E. On the con- 
trary, if the animal be vicious, the driving- 
reins are placed in the rings E at the end of 
In operation, if the animal is gentle, the have hereunto set my hand and Seal. 
The check-pieces B are flat angle-irons, broadly claim as new; but 
Witnesses: 
W. ENGLISH, 
A. SPENCER. 
HIRAM. M. CLEMONS. L. s. 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327239.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 327,239, 
S. COATS. 
ANIMAT, RELEASING DEWICE. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1885. 
A. 
 
 
E. 
EEZ 
X 
iP2 
2. s: 
-8 
Gait, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
SAMUEL COATS, OF BRIDGEPORT, PENNSYLVANIA. 
F. 
ANIMAL-RELEASING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICAFIORT forming part of Letters Patent INo. 327,239, dated Septcmber 29, 1885. 
Application filed May 
11, SS5. (No model.) 
O 
3O 
To aid, whon, it pay conce77. 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL COATs, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Bridgeport, 
in the county of Montgomery, State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Animal-Releasing Devices for 
Stables, &c., which improvement is fully set 
forth in the following specification and accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation, partly 
sectional, of a releasing device for stables em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 represents a 
top or plan view thereof, partly sectional. 
Fig. 3 represents a vertical section in linea ac, 
Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
The object of my invention is the automatic 
releasing of animals from their fastening de 
vices in stables, &c., and automatic opening 
of the doors thereof in the event of fire or other 
danger, as will be hereinafter set forth. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
portion of a stable, and B the feed-troughs 
thereof. 
Crepresents a slide, which is fitted to the top 
of the feed-trough and passed through slotted 
keepers D, which are connected with the feed 
trough, said slide C having slots E, which are 
open at the side of the said slide, so that theslots 
may be in and out of communication with the 
slots of the keeper, it being noticed that the 
outer walls of the slots form catches E for the 
rings or loops of the halter or hitching-straps, 
which latter are attached to the animals in the 
stable. One end of the slide is formed with a 
lip, F, with which engages an elbow-lever, G, 
which has a weight, H", attached to its outer 
end by cord H, whereby said lever may be held 
in upright position, it being moticed that the 
lower limb of said elbow-lever is bifurcated, so 
that it may be engaged with opposite sides of 
the lip F on the slide C. 
J represents the door of the stable, the same 
being suitably hung, and having a spring, K, 
bearing against it, whereby it is self-opening 
in its nature, said door being held shut by a 
dog or latch, L, which engages with a suitable 
hook or catch on the door, said dog having 
connected with it a cord or chain, M, prefer 
ably the latter, as it is incombustible, the same 
being suitably guided above or around the 
 
The door J is closed and held by the dog L, 65. 
door and connected with the cord H, it being 
noticed that the weight connected with the 
lever G is adapted to exert its power on both 55 
the cord H and chain M. 
It will be seen that when the cord His drawn 
taut it raises the lever G, whereby the slide C 
is moved outward, causing the catches Ethere 
of to hold the ring or loops of the halter or 6o 
hitching -straps, it being noticed that said 
catches E project across the slots of the keep 
er's D, the cord H being properly tied or oth 
erwise secured. 
it being noticed that the chain Mis loose. In 
the event of fire or other danger the cord His 
released in any suitable manner, whereby the 
lever G under the action of its weight drops, 
forcibly causing the slide to be pushed in- 7o 
wardly, thus placing the slots of said slide in 
communication with the slots of the keepers, 
the catches of the slide clearing the slots of 
the keeper, whereby the halter or hitching 
straps are released from said slide and the 75 
animals are free. Simultaneously therewith 
the chain M, having been subjected to the ac 
tion of the falling weight, raises the dog L. 
clear of the hook or catch on the door, and as 
the door is now controlled by its spring it flies 8o 
open, so that the animals can escape there 
through. 
The cord or rope H is run through the barn 
or stable wherever fire is iikely to occur, and 
in order to cause the cord to burn quickly and 8 
5 
thus be severed it is saturated with a mixture 
of tar and turpentine or other highly-inflam 
mable material, so that when fire breaks out 
in the barn or stable and the cord is burned 
through the slide C and dog L will be auto- 9c 
matically operated, as is evident, the Satura 
tion of the cord or rope with the above mate: 
rial also preventing the destruction of the same 
by rats, mice, &c. 
the outer end of the lever G and lower end of 
the cord or rope H, so that the expansion and 
contraction of the latter will not disturb the 
releasing devices of the slide and door. 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A releasing device for stables, having a 
slide with catches, keepers for covering and 
A short chain, H, is interposed between 95 
- 
Having thus described my invention, what Ico 
2 
327,239 
uncovering said catches, a weighted lever for G, having a bifurcated limb, a weight attached 
controlling said slide, and a cord or chain for to said lever G, cord H, and chain H, sub 
holding said lever in elevated position, sub. stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In an animal-releasing device, a slidehav 
2. A releasing device consisting of a slide ing catches, in combination with a lever control 
having catches, a lever controlling said slide, a ling said slide, a weight attached to said lever, 
weight attached to said lever, and a cord for and a cord keeping said weight and lever in 
holding said lever and weight in an elevated an elevated position, the said cord being satu 
position,in combination with a chain attached rated with an inflammable mixture, substan 
to the said weight and connected to and oper- tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
ating a latch attached to a spring-actuated 
door, substantially as described. 
3. The slide C, having lip F and catches E, 
in combination with keepers D, elbow-lever 
- 
MUSCOE. M. GIBSON, 
N. H. LARZELERE. 
15 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL COATS. 
l 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327339.txt	(No Model.) 
R. M. SQUIRE, 
STAPLE, 
No. 327,339, 
Patented Sept. 29, 1885. 
Zig-Z w 
Witnesses : 
 
4.42% A 
O 
77 
Inventor 
iMs). 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROLLIN M. SQUIRE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STAPLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 327,339, dated September 29, 1885. 
Application filed November 15, 1884. 
(No model.) Patented in England March 25, 1885, No. 3,852. 
IO 
To al., whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, RoLLIN M. SQUIRE, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, a 
citizen of the United States, have invented 
5 certain new and useful Improvements in 
Sples, of which the following is a specifica 
I01. 
Thisinvention refers to self-clinching barbed 
Staples: and is an improvement on Letters 
Patent issued to Stiles Frost, March 27, 1883, 
No. 274,481. 
The Said improvement consists, first,in form 
ing the deflecting angles upon the outside of 
the extension of the prongs of the staple in 
Such manner that the said prongs are forced 
in Ward toward each other and also away from 
each other, the latter deflection, however, 
being in a direction sidewise of the staple; and, 
Secondly,in an improved form of barb or space. 
Of the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan and 
front elevation showing staple in normal con 
dition. Fig. 2 is a plan, front, and side ele 
Vations, showing staple after it will have been 
driven. Figs. 3 and 4 are enlarged trans 
verse sections online C, also showing a modifi 
cation; and Fig. 5 is an enlarged longitudinal 
Section through prongs of staple, illustrating 
the preferred form of spaces or barbs. 
In the drawings a staple of usual form, 7, is 
represented, with the exception that the ex 
tremities or extensions of the prongs S 9 are 
beveled 'Jn their outer sides, as 1011, in an in 
Ward and downward direction, and also at an 
angle te the common center line, D, of the 
prongs, the angles of the said beveled por 
tions, however, being formed in an opposing 
direction each to the other, as seen in Fig. 4; 
hence, when the staple is driven into any 
yielding material, as wood, the resistance 
against the bevels tends to deflect the prongs 
differentially inward toward each other and 
sidewise away from each other, as illustrated 
in Fig. 2. The extent of this deflection or 
curvature is directly dependent upon the de 
45 gree of obtuseness given to the bevels, the 
length of the prongs, and the character of the 
material in which the staple may be driven. 
It will therefore be seen that by properly 
balancing the conditions the prongs of the 
25 
35 
65 
staple will be forced into a shape where- 5O 
by to resist withdrawal to an extent limited 
only by the rigidity of the metallic prongs 
against flexure-that is, to be restraighten 
ed-and the friction of the material in which 
they are embedded. 
To yet further increase the resistance of the 
staple against withdrawal, a series of spaces or 
barbs, as 12, are formed in one or more sides 
of the prongs. It will be apparent that the 
larger the volume which can be embraced by 6o 
the spaces between the barbs of the material 
encompassing the prongs, the greater Will be 
the resistance offered to the withdrawal of the 
staple. To this end the said spaces are formed 
in the manner shown at 13, Fig. 5, in which 
the bottom of each space is the arc of a circle, 
preferably of the least diameter that will con 
nect the bottom, as 14, with the top, as 15, of 
any single space. The increased capacity of 
the spaces, and therefore the advantage of the 7o 
serrations thus formed, is clearly shown by 
the dotted outlines 1617. 
It will be observed that the extent and di 
rection of the differential movement imparted 
to the prongs by the bevels is not arbitrary, 75 
but may be varied to suit special requirements. 
This is indicated by Figs. 3 and 4, in which 
the arrows show the lines of force and con 
sequent direction of movement. 
staple is that the prongs are caused to embrace 
the material in which the staple may be driven, 
and also to spread and increase the area of 
resistance against displacement. Thus this 
combined embracing and spreading action im- 85 
parted to the prongs increases the efficiency of 
the staple, first, by augmenting the friction 
against the staple, and, secondly, by the di 
rect opposition of the fibers of the material 
which fill the spaces between the barbs, all of 90 
which is clearly demonstrated by the dotted 
outline 18 and arrow's 19, the latter indicating 
resisting lines of force. 
The controlling advantage of this form of 8O 
I claim 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a staple 95 
having the outside of the extension of each 
prong beveled to an edge or point, the direc 
tion of the said bevel being downward andlin 
 
2 
327,339 
 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a staple name to this specification in the presence of 
ward and also at an angle to the center line, prongs when the bottom of the said spaces 
D, of the prongs, in combination with spaces are formed to the arc of a circle, substantially 
or barbs formed in the main portions of the as specified. 
prongs, substantially as specified. 
having the outside of the extension of each two subscribing witnesses. 
prong beveled to an edge or point, the direc 
tion of the said bevel being downward and in- 
Ward and also at an angle to the center line, 
D, of the prongs, in combination with spaces 
or barbs formed in the main portions of the 
ROLLIN M. SQUIRE. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 15 
Witnesses: 
JOHN THOMSON, 
MAURICE. B. FLYNN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327440.txt	(No Model,) 
I, W HEYSINGER 
UPRIGHT PAPER CLIP, 
No. 327,440, 
Patented Sept. 29, 1885. 
 
 
s 
3 Nor? 
e/7 
( 
al 
se 
e 
2 
WNESSES : 
NVENTOR 
7C. o. &- 26-7- 
N. PETEs, Photo-ithographer, Washingto, C. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC W. HEYSINGER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
UPR GHT PAPER CL. P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 327,440, dated September 29, 1885. 
Application filed May 
10, 1885. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ISAAC W. HEYSINGER, 
of Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvement in Up 
right Paper-Clips, &c., of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description, refer 
ence being had to the drawings accompany 
ing and forming a part of this specification, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view, from above, of a 
clip embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal vertical section along the line of 
the Spring C. Fig. 3 shows a construction of 
the clamping-lever whereby papers, &c., may 
be held at various angles. Fig. 4 is a modified 
form in which the clamping-jaws are made 
mutually adjustable upon transverse centers, 
so as to hold paper's at various angles. Fig. 
5 is a view of a clamping-lever, detached, 
with its thumb-piece and clamping-jaw formed 
in two parts hinged together by the screw D. 
Fig. 6 shows the same in perspective, the 
binding-screw D being shown detached. Fig. 
7 is a front View in cross-section taken at the 
line where the clamping jaw is pivoted to the 
base. Fig. 8 is a side view of the same, show 
ing the clutch E, by which it is fixed to the 
thumb-piece at any desired angle by means of 
the screw D, and Fig. 9 shows a board held in 
place by the jaws of the clip, and supporting 
a sheet of paper, letter, or design, to be copied, 
the same being held from falling by the ad 
justable band or holder P. 
Like letters refer to like parts. 
Myinvention relates to the construction of 
a spring clip for holding papers, cards, callen 
ders, copies for writing or drawing, models, 
photographs, &c., in which the said papers, 
&c., are held in an erect or slightly-inclined 
position, so as to be easily read or seen upon 
a mantel, table, desk, &c., and in which, if 
desired, the angle at which they are held may 
be varied so as to give them a greater or less 
erectness of position as may be most suitable 
for the purposes required, the device also be 
ing adapted for use as a paper weight, the 
jaws of the upright clip forming a convenient 
handle for moving the same about from place 
to place. 
While the device may have its thumb and 
clamping lever attached to its base in various 
ways, I prefer to use the means shown and de 
scribed and patented to me in my Letters 
Patent of the United States No. 226,402, 
dated April 13, 1880, upon which, in so far, it 
is an improvement, the same general arrange 
ment of spring, thumb-lever, heel impinging 
upon spring, and clamping-jaw being used 
with a base; but the device as herein de 
scribed is so modified in its construction as 
to render it useful for purposes to which the 
former invention was not adapted, and at the 
same time take away its utility for the pur 
poses set forth in the Letters Patent aforesaid. 5 
Referring to the drawings, in Fig. 1 I show 
a flat, preferably square or oblong, base, A, 
raised from the table by the beveled margin 
A", and slotted diagonally through the middle 
for the reception of the flat bar-Spring C, 
which rests at its extremities upon the 
shoulders a. a. (Shown in Fig. 2.) About the 
middle of this spring-slot there extends across 
it from side to side, arched over the same and 
rising above the surface of A, an upright, A, 
which extends directly upward, being sloped 
in front and rear, as shown in Fig. 2, SO as to 
insure easy casting if made, as I prefer to 
make it, of cast metal, and also to give its for 
ward surface, where engaged upon by the 
clamping-jaw, a cant or rake backward, SO 
that the papers held upon the Said Surface 
by the clamping jaw B' will set backward, 
so as to insure easy reading, and give a 
graceful slope to the articles held in the 
the clip. As shown in Fig. 2, this upright 
A extends above the point where it is im 
pinged upon by the clamping-jaw B', to Sup 
port the papers and prevent them from tip 
ping backward upon the lip of the clamping 
jaw as a pivot. In front of the upright A' 
the base is carried forward, as shown in Fig. 
2, and is provided on the sides of the Spring 
slot with a pair of open sockets, A', closed 
above and open beneath, into which the pins 
B* B of the clamping-lever B may be seated 
by insertion from beneath, and be held up 
in place by the upward pressure of the spring 
This clamping-lever . 
C against the heel B. 
B consists of a thumb-piece, B, extending 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
327, 440 
IO 
25 
75 
clips, &c. 
backward from the pivot B, and overhanging 
the base and spring-slot A, so that it may be 
depressed by pressure upon the top surface of 
the said thumb-piece. At its forward enditis 
bent sharply upward, above the pivot B", to 
form a clamping-jaw, B'B', which impinges 
upon the flat surface of A', and is adapted to 
clamp and securely hold any papers, &c., in 
terposed between the said jaws in the manner 
of an easel. This thumb-lever B is pivoted 
to the base by the pins BB", which are seated 
from the under side in the sockets A' A', the 
thumb-lever being adapted to be slipped into 
place through spring-slot A, Fig. 3, the said 
spring-slot being cut away at the sides, as 
shown in Fig. 1, to admit the passage of the 
Sale, 
The thumb-piece B, in rear of the pins B'B', 
is: provided with a downwardly-projecting 
heel, B, which extends beneath the level of 
the pivots B" B", and impinges against the 
upper surface of the flat spring C between 
the shoulders a. a, so that the upward pressure 
of the spring holds: the thumb-piece and its 
pivots up to place, and at the same time se 
cures a firm clamping of the jaw B' against 
the opposite jaw, A', while pressure upon the 
thumb-lever B will cause the jaws, to open, 
the pivots B'B' forming the center upon which 
the clamping-lever rotates. 
By slipping the spring C out of its sockets 
at a the thumb-piece may be readily disen 
gaged, or conversely. In order to secure even 
pressure against the papers held in the clip 
along the lip of the clamping jaw B' where it 
abuts against the opposite jaw, A', I provide 
the edge of the clamping jaw (see Figs. 2 and 
6) with a strip of rubber or other elastic sub 
stance, shown at B, which I prefer to set into 
the edge of the clamping-jaw B' by means of 
the dovetail groove B, Fig. 6, though it may 
be applied otherwise, if desired; and if such 
evenness of fit be not required along the 
edge of the clamping-jaw B', I dispense with 
the elastic cushion altogether. This cushion 
B, extending along the lip of B, will closely 
apply itself to the surface of A under press 
ure of the spring C, and securely hold papers, 
&c., without lateral slipping thereof. 
I 
refer to form the base A of cast metal in 
the form of a paper-weight, either square, 
oblong, polygonal, oval, or round, and to 
make it sufficiently heavy to perform the 
functions of such paper-weight I also provide 
55 the base A with the screw-holes A' A', by 
means of which I attach the device to a desk 
or table or to a loose board of ornamental or 
protective character or to a pad of such size 
as to prevent tipping over of the clip when 
used for holding large cards, pictures, &c., I 
also sometimes make the device exceedingly 
light and ornamental in character, for use as 
an ornamental card or photograph holder in 
parlors, &c. I also provide it, when made of 
suitable size for use by copyists, artists, &c., 
with a detachable-board, P, of pasteboard, 
wood, or other material, which I provide at its 
upper part with a clip or holder or adjustable 
spring-band, P, so that when the board Pisin 
serted, as shown in Figs. 2 and 9, the papers 
are held from dropping out sidewise or slip 
ping by the support afforded by the clamp P, 
which holds the said papers against the said 
board, while the base of the clip A affords a 
Support against dropping downward by their 
weight, or when the clamp P is not used, so 
that the device acts as an easel of an exceed 
ingly simple, compact, and effective character. 
Instead of a spring-band at P, I sometimes 
use a metallic spring or lever clamp of any of 8o 
the forms in use for like purposes in letter 
While the backward slope or rake of A 
(shown in Fig. 2) is sufficient in general, it is 
sometimes desirable to secure various adjust 
ments of inclination for the copy in the holder. 
I accomplish this in a cheap construction, in 
the manner shown in Fig. 3, where the inside 
of the clamping-jaw B' at its lower part and 
above the pivots B'B' is widened in its space 
from point to rear, and provided along its 
bottom with a series of vertical or inclined 
transverse serrations, B'B', opening upward, 
and into any one of which the bottom of the 
board P may be inserted, and which will cor 
respondingly incline the board P to a greater 
or less degree. In this case the part of A 
which projects above the lip of the jaw B', 
(see Fig. 2,) and which in that figure sup 
ports the back of the board Pabove the point 
of impingement of the clamping-lip B" is re 
moved, so that the clamping jaw B' may en 
gage against the upright A' at its top, so that 
the various slopes of the board P in the serra 
tions B'B' may not be interfered with. 
Where a more positive guidance is required 
for the adjustable board P, I use the construc 
rtion shown in Figs. 6, 7, and S. This may be 
briefly described as the hinging of the up 
right A' upon a transverse pivot at its lower 
part and a similar hinge or pivot at or near 
the joint of the clamping-lever B, so that each 
part can be set backward or forward to va 
rious angles, and then be tightened up by 
screws or springs acting along the line of the 
pintle of said hinges, so that the jaws may be 
adapted to each other at different angles rela 
tive to the base without interfering with the 
action of the pivots B" B, the heel B, the 
spring C, or the thumb-lever B. In Fig. 6 
Ishow a thumb-screw, D, detached. In Fig. 5 
the same is shown without a thumb-screw 
head, however, inserted into the hinge-joint. 
As shown, it will draw the lugs upon the seg 
ments of the hinge together in the manner 
more clearly indicated in Fig. 7, the opposite 
faces of the hinge-lugs being roughened or ser 
rated, as shown in Fig. 8, to hold the parts 
securely when tightened up. I prefer to pass 
this screw D through one of the pins B" B', 
which are enlarged for the purpose, as the 
centers will thus coincide, and I also seat the 
screw in the lug of the opposite segment of the 
hinge, so as to draw the lugs together by ro 
95 
15 
- - - 
- 
- 
IOO 
IO 
I 30 
 
327,440 
3. 
55 
75 
tating the said screw. I also sometimes se 
cure this adjustment by the use of a spring 
acting against the serrated surfaces EE, Figs. 
7 and S, so that a very ready adjustment may 
be secured; but for ordinary purposes I pre 
fer the simpler solid construction shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, which can be cast to any angle 
required for the special class of work in view 
at the time the device is made. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination of the horizontal base 
A, Spring C, upright jaw A, extending ver 
tically above said base, pivoted upright 
clamping-jaw B', adapted to impinge there 
upon and hold cards, papers, &c., in sub 
stantially a vertical position, and laterally 
projecting thumb-piece B, substantially as 
described. 
2. An upright paper - holding clip and 
weight, consisting of an expanded horizontal 
base provided with an upwardly-projecting 
central jaw extending vertically above the 
Said base and adapted to be used as a handle 
for the paper-weight and ajaw for the paper 
clip, and a laterally-projecting thumb-lever 
actuated by a Spring and provided with an 
angularly raised clamping-jaw to close against 
Said upright jaw of the base, and hold papers 
or other articles between the said jaws in an 
upright Or inclined position upon a desk or 
table, Substantially as described. 
3. In combination with the base A, pro 
vided with a transverse spring-slot, A, hav 
ing terminal Spring-Supporting shoulders a ca, 
and an upright jaw, A, arched over said 
spring-slot and extending upward from the 
same, a clamping-lever, B, having pivoted 
supports B" B, seated from beneath in the 
open sockets A' A', a projecting thumb-piece, 
B, an upwardly-projecting clamping-jaw, B", 
and a heel, B, in rear of said pivots BB", 
together with a flat spring, C, supported upon 
said shoulders at a, and extending beneath the 
arched upright A', the clamping-jaw B, and 
the thumb-piece B, and impinging against 
the under surface of the said heel B, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
s 
4. In combination with the upright paper 
clip, consisting of the base A, having the up 
right jaw A', and a spring thumb-lever, B, 
having the clamping jaw B', adapted to im 
pinge against the said upright jaw A, the 
transverse serrations B'B', formed within the 
jaws BA, to receive the lower edge of the 
card P, and secure adjustment thereof at dif 
ferent angles, substantially as described. 
5. The adjustable upright clip ABC, hav 
ing base A, uprightjaw A, Spring clamping 
lever B, having thumb-piece B, and clamp 
ing-jaw B', and a spring, C, adapted to com 
press together the jaws B and A', saidjaWS 
being made independently adjustable upon 
their supporting parts by means of the hinged 
joints EE, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
6. As an article of manufacture, an upright 
paper-clip, consisting of a horizontal metallic 
base provided with a transverse spring-slot, 
A, shoulders a. a, upright jaw A, extending 
vertically above the said spring-slot, the piv 
oted spring clamping-jaw B', adapted to im 
pinge against the said upright jaw A', and 
the spring C, the said base A being provided 
with the holes A' A', or their equivalents, for 
the reception of screws, &c., for permanent 
attachment of the said clip to a desk or table, 
or to an extended wooden or other base, sub 
stantially as described. 
7. As an article of manufacture, the upright 
paper-clip consisting of the horizontal base 
A, having spring - slot A, provided with 
shoulders at a, journal-boxes A' A', opening 
downward, and vertical jaw A', together with 
the clamping-lever B, having the horizontal 
thumb-piece B, angularly-raised clamping 
jaw B', heel B, and journals or pins B'B', 
the said lever B, with its journals, being held 
up in place and the parts kept together by 
the upward impingement of the spring C 
against the heel B thereof, substantially as 
described. 
ISAAC. W. HEYSINGER. 
Witnesses: 
J. L. HEYSINGER, 
M. B. FENNINGER. 
IO 
25 
3) 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327541.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER P. ELLIOTT, OF NEW BRUNSWICK, NEW JERSEY. 
WETHOD OF MAK NG LUMINATING - GAS. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 327,541, dated October 6, 1885. 
Application filed January 12, 1885. Serial No. 152,589. 
(No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
O 
To all whon, it inay concert: 
Be it known that I, WALTER P. ELLIOTT, 
of New Brunswick, in the county of Middle 
Sex and State of New Jersey, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in the Method 
of Making Illuminating-Gas, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to the method of mak 
ing gas by decomposing steam and adding to 
the products of decomposition the hydrocar 
bon vapors evolved from bituminous coal in 
process of distillation and sufficient vapor of 
naphtha or other liquid hydrccarbon to pro 
duce a rich and desirable illuminating-gas. 
My improvement in this method consists in 
charging retorts partly full of bituminous coal 
and in charging a generating - furnace with 
fuel; in blowing up the furnace and passing 
the products of combustion through the retort 
chamber and around the retorts; in then de 
composing steam in the furnace and passing 
the resulting water - gas through the retort 
chamber and around the retorts; in admitting 
hydrocarbon liquid directly into the retort 
chamber and vaporizing it around the retorts, 
whereby the vapor, as soon as formed, is taken 
up by the water-gas, and in delivering both 
the gas and the products of distillation from 
those ends of the retort - chamber and retorts 
which are most distant from the generating 
furnace, where they mingle together. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section of one form of apparatus 
which may be employed in carrying out my 
invention, and Fig. 2 is a partial transverse 
section thereof on the plane of the dotted line 
a; ac, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in both the figures. 
The apparatus here shown is similar to that 
shown and described in my application for 
Letters Patent, Serial No. 142,279, dated Sep 
tember 5, 1884, and but a brief description 
thereof is necessary. It comprises a generat 
ing-furnace, A, a chamber, B, wherein are a 
number of retorts, C, of ordinary character 
and open at both ends, and an upright cham 
ber or stack, D, wherein is arranged fire-brick 
or other refractory materiala. These tiles or 
fire-brick may be arranged or piled in cob 
house fashion, or otherwise placed to offer an 
extensive surface. At the top of chamber D 
is an escape flue or aperture, b, from which 
may lead a smoke-flue and pipe for the deliv 
ery of gas, the passage of Smoke and gas being 
controlled by any suitable arrangement of 
valves, such as are well known in gas appa 
ratuS. 
The several parts of the structure may be 
built of brick, and have an inclosing metal 
shell, c, within which may be a layer of pull 
verized fire-brick, ashes, or other suitable ma 
terial. 
In the generating - furnace A is a grate, d, 
which may be composed of pipe, through 
which a circulation of water is maintained, 
and below the grate is an ash-pit door, e, and 
an aperture, f, for the inflow of air from any 
suitable source of supply-such as a fan-blower 
or other air pumping Or forcing apparatus. 
Above the grate may be provided one or more 
stoking-holes, g, and the fuel is fed through 
an inlet opening or throat, h, at the top, pro 
vided with a suitable cover, h". 
The chamber Bextends approximately hori 
Zontally from above the furnace A, with which 
it communicates by passages i i to the lower 
part of chamber D. In said chamber the re 
torts C are arranged, as here shown, horizon 
tally, and they are supported by tilesi, pro 
jecting inward from and set into the Walls of 
the chamber. In the tile-supportsi are open 
ings f', arranged as shown in Fig. 1, whereby 
the gaseous products from the furnace A are 
compelled to take a circuitous course in pass 
ing from the furnace to and thence through 
the vertical chamber D. I have shown an 
air-inlet, k, in the bottom of the chamber D, 
through which air may be supplied to promote 
combustion of the gaseous products from the 
furnace, and thereby the refractory material 
a in the chamber D becomes highly heated. 
In the front wall of the chamber B are re 
tort-mouths l, which are closed by suitable 
doors, l, and through which the open-ended 
retorts C may be charged with bituminous 
coal m. After charging, the front ends of the 
retorts are to be closed by stoppers n, which 
may be made of fire-clay or other suitable ma 
terial, and are cut down at the middle of their 
5 
CO 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
327,541 
O 
5 
length to decrease their weight. As shown, 
these stoppers in rest in the frout ends of the 
retorts C, which they close, and also in the 
retort-mouths l; and they may be readily re 
moved when it is desired to charge the retort 
C. The stoppers n are not shown in Fig. 2. 
It will therefore be seen that the only provis 
ion for the escape of products of distillation 
from the retorts C is at their rear ends and at 
the end of the chamber B, from which issue 
gaseous products from the furnace into the 
chamber D. 
I also provide one or more pipes, 0-two 
being here shown-through which naphtha or 
other volatile liquid hydrocarbon may be in 
troduced into the chamber B on the outside 
of the retorts. The liquid hydrocarbon may 
be taken from an elevated reservoir, a pump, 
or other source of supply, and its inflow may 
be regulated by valves o'. 
I also provide a pipe, p-in this instance 
entering below the grate d--through which 
stealin may be introduced to pass through the 
mass of fuel in the generator. The passage 
of steam is controlled by a valve, p'. 
I have 
also shown in the furnace A, above the fuel 
therein, an inlet, q, for air. 
In the operation of the apparatus the gen 
erator A is charged with anthracite coal, coke, 
or other fuel, and the retorts C are charged 
with bituminous coal m, and the stoppers in 
inserted into their front ends. Air is then ad 
mitfed through the aperture f, and also 
through k and q, if desired, and the blowing 
up is continued until the fuel in the generat 
ing furnace A is raised to a point of incan 
descence and the bituminous coal m is raised 
to a distilling heat. Tile products of combus 
tion pass upward through the chamber D and 
out at the escape-passageb, thereby heating the 
contained refractory material to a high tem 
perature. The air is then shut off and steam 
turned on through the pipe p, and oil through 
the pipe Or pipes o. The steam in passing up 
Ward through the mass of incandescent fuel is 
decomposed, and as the products of decompo 
sition pass around the retorts C to the rear 
ends thereof, they meet and take up the hy 
drocarbon vapors which have been produced 
in the chamber B by the heated exterior of 
the retorts. As the mingled products of de 
composition and vapor leave the chamber B, 
at the rear end thereof, they meet and take up 
the products of distillation issuing from the 
rear end of the retorts C, and the rich gas 
thus produced passes upward through the 
chamber B and among the refractory mate 
rial a, whereby the vapors are fixed and a 
permanent illuminating-gas produced. When 
the charge of coal m in a retort, C, is dis 
tilled, the colke is pulled forward and drops 
into the furnace A through the passages i, 
thereby forming fuel for the generator. When 
the fuel in the generator has cooled to a tem 
35 
45 
SO 
90 
perature which is no longer suitable for de 
composition, air is again admitted for blow 
ing up, and the operation is repeated, as above 
described. 
I am aware of United States Patents to 
John L. Stewart, No. 295,832, granted March 
25, 1884, and No. 301,531, granted July 8, 
1884, and do not desire to claim in this appli 
cation anything therein shown or described 
as of my invention. In each of these patents 
the retorts are to be filled entirely full of bi 
tuminous coal, and their only outlet is at the 
end which is over the generating-furnace. In 
each of said patents the oil to be vaporized is 
not admitted directly into the retort-chamber 
and vaporized around the outside of the re 
torts, but is first admitted into a separate re 
tort in the retort-chamber, and is therein va 
porized, and the hydrocarbon vapors are not 
added to the water-gas until they escape from 
this oil-retort. In both these patents it is in 
tended to deliver all the products of distilla 
tion from the retorts directly into the gener 
ating-furnace. My method differs from those 
described in the patents above referred to in 
I do not de 
several important particulars. 
liver the products of distillation from the re 
torts into the generating-furnace to then min 
le with the water-gas, but deliver the water 
gas and products of distillation from the re 
torts at those ends of the retort-chamber and 
retorts which are remote from the furnace, 
and they are not until then mingled together. 
I do not vaporize liquid hydrocarbon in a 
separate heated retort, but deliver it directly 
into the retort-chamber, and as soon as it is 
vaporized it is at once taken up by the water 
gas, and hence the vapor is by the Water-gas 
shielded from excessive heat, and no part 
thereof is destroyed. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The improvement in the method of making 
illuminating-gas consisting in charging a 
generating-furnace with fuel, in blowing up 
the furnace, and passing the products of com 
bustion through the retort - chamber and 
around the retorts, in then decomposing steam 
in the furnace and passing the resulting Wal 
ter-gas through the retort-chamber and around 
the retorts, in admitting hydrocarbon liquid 
directly into the retort-chamber and vaporiz 
ing it around the retorts, whereby the vapor 
as soon as formed is taken up by the water 
as, and in delivering both the gas and the 
2 
products of distillation from those ends of the 
retort-chamber and retorts which are most 
distant from the generating-furnace, where 
they mingle together, substantially as herein 
described. 
WALTER P. ELLIOTT. 
Witnesses. 
C. HALL, 
MATTHEW POLLOCK. 
IC5 
IO 
I I5 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327641.txt	(No Model) 
G. W. ABBOTT & G, S, FORREST. 
COUNTERSINK, 
No. 327,641. 
Patented Oct. 6, 1885. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. ABBOTT AND GEORGE S. FORREST, OF CONCORD, N. H. 
COUNTERS NK. 
{FECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 327,641, dated October 6, 1885, 
Application filed May 14, 1885. Serial No. 105,483. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
To all, uhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGE W. ABBOTT 
and GEORGES. FoRREST, citizens of the Unit 
ed States, residing at Concord, in the county 
of Merrimac and State of New Hampshire, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Countersinks, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
that class of countersinks which are adapted 
to be adjustably attached to bits and drills. 
Our improvements consist of the combina 
tion of a suitable countersink, a gage capa 
ble of adjustment relative to said countersink, 
and a bit or drill to which said parts are 
clamped and rendered adjustable by any or 
dinary machine-screws. 
The object of our invention being to provide 
an adjustable countersink applicable to bits 
or drills of such construction that a hole may 
be bored of ample depth for a given length of 
screw and countersunk for the reception of 
its head at one and the same time, and, fur 
thermore, to provide an adjustable counter 
sink of such construction as to be capable of 
being set so as to cut any given depth required 
for various sizes of screw-heads. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming part 
of this specification, Figure 1 is an elevation 
of an ordinary bit having our improved coun 
tersink and gage attached ready for use and 
showing the said countersink in front view. 
Fig. 2 is a like view of a bit provided with 
our improved attachment and showing the ad 
justable gage in front view. Fig. 3 is a de 
tached view of our improved countersink and 
gage having the clamping-screws in position. 
Fig. 4 is an elevation in detail of the adjust 
able gage, showing the groove by which it is 
held in its proper position upon a bit or drill. 
Fig. 5 is a like view of the adjustable counter 
sink, showing its groove by which it is held in 
its proper position upon a bit or drill. Fig. 
6 represents a plan view of Fig. 4, and Fig. 7 
a plan view of Fig. 5. 
Likeletters of reference indicate correspond 
ing parts in all the views. 
The part forming the countersink is pre?er 
ably made of steel, and may be conveniently 
drop-forged. This consists of the flat part A, 
having an enlargement, A, at its bottom, which 
is curvilinear or nearly semicircular from edge 
to edge on its top, and tapering toward its bot 
tom in the form of a Semi-cone. This semi 
conic surface, in order that it may cut, may 
be serrated or grooved, as is common in the 
manufacture of this class of tool, or it may be 
provided with a single groove, a, as seen in 
the drawings; and the edge a' forms a cutter. 
The adjustable gage consists of a flat piece 
of metal-iron or steel-provided at its lower 
end with a flange, B, projecting at a right 
angle, and formed nearly semicircular from 
edge to edge, and slightly convexed on its 
lower surface, as seen in the drawings. 
The advantage of this convexed surface over a 
flat one is that the Said Surface when so formed 
will not scrape or tear the surface of the arti 
cle being bored, even though the bit may be 
entered on a slant. Fastening-screws C pass 
through elongated openings b, formed in the 
gage B, and are threaded to the countersink, 
as shown. 
Both the countersink and the gage are pro 
vided, respectively, with a groove, a and b, 
for the purpose of preventing said parts from 
slipping Out of place laterally-i. e., the bit 
or drill D being allowed to rest within said 
grooves while the two parts are being drawn 
toward each other and clamped thereon. When 
it is desired to adjust the devices relative to 
the length of a given screw, it is simply nec 
essary to loosen one of the screws C; but when 
it is desired to adjust the gage relative to the 
countersink both the screws will require loos 
ening, and by reason of the slots b the gage 
may be set to countersink for any ordinary 
screws, from the smallest to the largest. 
In place of using two fastening-screws, C, 
either part, A B, may be hinged to the other, 
So as to be adjustable vertically, and the neces. 
Sary clamping be accomplished by a screw or 
other suitable means upon one side only, the 
manner of clamping the parts together being 
really an uneSSential feature in this inven 
tion, as the cheapest method will be the one 
adopted in the manufacture of this device. By 
Setting the gage below the countersink this 
device may be used to gage the required depth 
of hole for Various round-headed screws with 
out forming a countersink. 
We are aware of Patent No. 170,653, bearing 
ICC 
327,642. 
The combination, substantially as set forth, 
with the part A, having a semi-conic enlarge 
ment, A, provided with groove a and cutting 
edge a', which comprises the countersink, of 2n 
the adjustable partB, provided at its lower end 
with flange B, convexed on its bottom, which 
comprises the gage, and the screws C, whereby 
said parts are secured to a bit, all constructed 
and operating in the manner specified. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
GEORGE W. ABBOTT, 
GEORGE. S. FORREST. 
Witnesses: 
v 
- 
J. B. THURSTON, 
NATHANIEL E. MARTIN. 
date November 30, 1875, which is for a counter 
sink attachment for bits, and which also shows 
an appliance for gaging the depth to be cut. 
This invention, however, consists of a counter 
sink made in two parts, said parts being placed 
on opposite sides of the bit and secured by 
ScreWS, and the Stop Ol' gage comprises a sepa 
rate device, which is adapted to be secured to 
one of the parts of the countersink by the 
screws which secure said parts to the bit. We 
desire therefore to disclaim the countersink 
in tWO parts, and also the stop or gage, as a 
separate or independent attachment thereto; 
but 
What we do claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327741.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 327,741. 
M. B. TRUE. 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT. 
Patented Oct. 6, 1885, 
 
| 
WITNESSES: 
YNTOR: 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARK B. TRUE, OF NEWBURYPORT, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TOHIMSELF 
AND JAMES S. MURPHY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 327,741, dated October 6, 1885. 
Application filed March 23, 1885. 
Serial No. 159,782, (No model.) 
O 
5 
to all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MARKB. TRUE, of New 
buryport, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Mechanical Movements, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
This invention consists' in a peculiar me 
chanical movement for giving a parallel and 
straight motion from a revolving disk or de 
vice to any number of paddles, shelves, or oth 
er attachments, all of which are connected by 
a circular rod or ring, substantially as here 
inafter shown and claimed. 
Theinventionisespecially applicable, though 
5 
not restricted, to the propulsion, by means of 
paddles, of steamboats on rivers or other wa 
ters at high rates of speed, in a reduced space 
or circle as regards the motions of the pad 
dles, and so that they will enter and leave the 
water in the most efficient directions. It is 
also suitable to revolving shelves, printers' 
cases, sign-carriers, tool-boxes, and many oth. 
er articles or purposes. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a sectional face view, on 
the line at at in Fig. 2, of a mechanism embody 
ing my invention; and Fig. 2 is a side or edge 
view of the same. 
A is the disk, plate, or wheel, mounted up 
on a main rotating shaft, B, which may either 
35 be horizontal, vertical, or occupy any other 
suitable position, according to the purpose the 
invention is applied to. 
C C are spindles or axles, arranged at a 
proper distance apart, and at equal distances 
30 
25 
40 
SO 
apart, and at equal distances from the cen 
ter of the main shaft B. These spindles are 
fitted to turn within or through the disk 
A, and may be extended any distance beyond 
it to carry the paddles or floats, shelves, 
signs, &c., which it is desired to rotate in com- 45 
mon with the disk A, and at the same time to 
preserve a parallel relation with each other. 
To this end the spindles or axles C C are con 
nected by cranks DD through pivots or bear 
ings b b with a circular rod or ring, E, ar 
ranged to occupy an eccentric position rela 
tively to the disk A, and which is restrained 
from lateral motion or held in its proper place 
by any suitable number of inner and outer roll 
ers, G. G., which may be carried by a plate, H, 
or be otherwise suitably supported. Any 
suitable power or means may be used to drive 
or rotate the disk A. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with the rotatable disk, 
plate, or wheel A and the spindles or axles C 
C, carried by it, of the circular rod or ring E, 
arranged to occupy an eccentric position in 
relation with the disk A, and the cranks D 
D, connecting said ring and disk, substantially 
as and for the purpose or purposes herein set 
forth. 
2. The combination of the rollers G G with 
the eccentrically-arranged ring E, the cranks 
D D, the spindles or axles C C, and the ro 
tatable disk A, essentially as and for the pur 
poses herein described. 
65 
55 
MARK B. TRUE. 
Witnesses: 
DENIs F. MuRPHY, 
ARTHUR. F. SIMPSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327841.txt	(No Model.) 
J. WALRATH. 
STEAM BOITER 
No. 327,841, 
 
Patented 0t. 6 
a 
 
 
 
 
566,666,666 
-TNA 
SSSS as 
al 
 
s 
Zazzazzesses: 
6 2 (Cacao 
ww.i.and 
Z722/e7e2O7 
4.2.2 
36.2 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer. washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESSE WALRATH, OF RACINE, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR TO THE J. I. CASE 
THRESHING MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
STEAM - BOLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 327,841, dated October 6, 1885. 
Application filed June 16, 1885. Serial No. 168,883. 
(No model.) 
To all whom, it may concerra: 
Beit known that I, JESSE WALRATH, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Racine, in 
the county of Racine and State of Wisconsin, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Steam-Boilers; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to the letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to the type of steam 
boilers constructed with a large direct flue 
which at one end contains the grate and issues 
at the other end into a combustion-chamber, 
and with a number of small return-flues by 
which the products of combustion are returned 
to the other end of the boiler, where the un 
consumed portions enter the smoke-box and 
finally escape through the uptake. 
My improvement consists of a hollow coil 
arranged in the combustion-chamber so as to 
extend from near the flue-sheet to near the 
exterior head of said chamber, and to encircle 
an area somewhat greater than that covered 
by the direct and return flues in the flue-sheet. 
This coil serves to effect an active circula 
tion of the water in the boiler to protect the 
exterior shell of the combustion-chamber from 
the flame and heat, and also enables the boiler 
to make steam very quickly after starting the 
fire. 
It consists, also, of certain details of con 
struction relating to the coil and its adjuncts, 
which will be more especially pointed out in 
claims at the close of this specification. 
In order that my invention may be clearly 
understood, I have illustrated in the annexed 
drawings, and will proceed to describe, a prac 
tical form thereof. 
Figure 1 represents a longitudinal section 
of my improved steam-boiler. Fig. 2 repre 
sents a transverse section thereof, taken in 
the plane indicated by broken line acac of Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 represents a detached portion of 
the boiler, showing the openings by which the 
35 
45 
- 
The same letters of reference indicate iden 
tical parts in all the figures. 
The shell A, heads B and C, flue-sheets D 
and E, direct flue F, and return-flues G may 
be constructed and combined as shown in the 55 
drawings, differing in no essential particular 
from the well-known construction of horizon 
tal boilers of this type, a combustion-chamber, 
H, being formed between the rear flue-sheet, 
E, and rear head, C, and a smoke-box, I, be- 6o 
tween the front flue-sheet, D, and front head, 
B. The front end of flueF forms the furnace, 
being provided with a grate, L, and the front 
head, B, is provided with a suitable furnace 
door, which, since the boiler illustrated is 65 
adapted for burning straw when desired, is 
provided with a straw-feeding chute, K, which 
may be permanently attached or detachable, 
and may be provided with a self-closing flap, 
if required. The combustion-chamber H con- 7o 
tains a hollow coil, M, which extends from 
near the rear flue-sheet to near the rear head, 
as shown in Fig. 1. The upper portion of the 
coil is flat and extends horizontally across the 
combustion-chamber in a plane a little above 75 
the highest return-flues, while the remainder 
of the coil is curved, so as to lie close against 
the boiler-shell, all as clearly shown in Fig. 2. 
Thus the interior space of the hollow coil cov 
ers the whole area occupied by the direct and 8o 
return flues in the rear flue-sheets, and affords 
ample space for the flame and other products 
of combustion. The upper end of the coil 
projects through the rear flue-sheet, E, at a 
point at about the water-line, though it may 85 
issue either above or below the said water 
line. The lower end of the coil projects 
through the bottom of the combustion-cham 
ber, and is connected through a valve, n, and 
a pipe, m, with the lower part of the water- 9o 
space of the boiler. 
A blow-off cock, n', is provided, so that on 
closing valve in the coil maybe blown off at any 
time, and while the boilerisin operation, and 
may also be emptied, when required, to pre- 95 
vent freezing. The coil provides increased 
heating-surface in the combustion-chamber, 
so that the generation of steam at this point 
is greatly augmented. The circulation of wa 
ter through the coil is not affected to any ex- Ioo 
IO 
I5 
25 
5o boiler communicates with the mud-drum. 
2 
327,841 
tent by such changes in the water-level as oc 
cur on a traction-engine boiler when the trac 
tion-engine is ascending or descending grades, 
so that there is no danger of overheating the 
coil during such changes of the general water 
level. 
A mud-drum, R, is secured to the bottom 
of the boiler, which connects therewith by 
holes r r. The drum is provided with the 
usual blow-off cock. 
The grate shown was constructed with the 
view of adapting it more especially for the 
burning of straw, although other light fuels 
and wood can be successfully burned upon it. 
This grate is fully described and claimed in 
my application for a United States patent filed 
August 5, 1885, Serial No. 173,621. 
I claim as my invention 
O 
1. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, with the direct and return flues and 
the combustion-chamber into which said flues 
open, of a hollow coil in the said combustion 
chamber, both ends of which coil communi 
cate with the interior of the boiler. 
2. The combination, substantially as be: 
fore set forth, of the hollow coil in the com 
bustion-chamber, the valve and pipe for con 
necting it with the lower portion of the water 
space of the boiler, and the blow-off cock. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
JESSE WALRATH. 
Witnesses: 
M. GOULD, 
CHAS. H. MINER. 
 
r 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US327942.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 327,942. 
J. P. GRISCOM, 
DIAMOND DRILL CORE BREAKER, 
Patented Oct. 6, 1885, 
 
 
AZ G. f. g@ 
F-T---------- } }- 
A / G.2 
 
?---- 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, wanton, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN P. GRISCOM, OF POTTSVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DAMOND-DRL CORE - BREAKER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 327,942, dated October 6, 1885. 
Application filed May 20, 1885. Serial No. 166,121. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN P. GRISCOM, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Pottsville, Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain Improvements in Diamond-Drill Core 
Breakers, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention consists of certain improve 
ments in the construction of diamond drills, 
designed mainly with a view of avoiding wear 
on the core-breaking devices, as fully de 
scribed hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal section of the bit end of a drill 
embodying my improvements. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section of a core-breaking and core 
lifting tube as made in two parts, and shown 
detached from each other and from the case 
Or barrel. Fig. 3 is a section on the line 1 
2, Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 is a section on the line 
34, Fig. 1. 
Referring to Fig. 1, A represents the bit of 
a drill, and B is a tube, into the lower end of 
which the bit is screwed, while into the up 
per end is screwed a coupling-ring, D, for 
Securing the tube B to the drill-rod. 
In the single-barrel diamond drills of the 
character illustrated in the drawings it has 
been usual to provide the barrel or case with 
wedging-pieces, which, on the withdrawal of 
the drill, grasped the core and broke it off, 
so as to pull it out with the drill-tube; but as 
the Wedging-pieces rotated with the barrel 
about the core they rapidly became worn too 
thin to perform their duty, and they would also 
break up the core by catching against it as 
the said wedging-pieces revolved with the 
drill. To remove these objections, and yet 
insure the breaking of the core without the 
use of a separate tool, I mount the wedging 
piece or pieces in a cylinder which is free to 
turn independently of the barrel and drill. 
In the present instance I have shown two of 
these wedging devices, E, consisting of dove 
tailed pieces adapted to dovetailed groovese, 
with inclined or tapering seats in the tube or 
cylinder Fat one side thereof. This cylinder 
is free to turn independently of the barrel B, 
so that the tube B and the drill may revolve, 
while the cylinder F, carrying the wedging 
pieces, will remain stationary by frictional 
contact with the core. The cylinder F is 
mounted between an annular shoulder, b, 
near the lower end of the tube B, and a ring, 
d, interposed between the upper end of the 55 
cylinder F and the lower end of the coupling 
D. I prefer to provide this cylinder F also 
with grasping-fingers G, which are shown in 
the present instance as consisting of four 
springs riveted to the lower end of the cylin- 6o 
der F and projecting outward at their upper 
ends, so as not to interfere with the free de 
scent of the drill-tube over the core while 
giving a firm frictional contact therewith to 
prevent the turning of the cylinder F, and 65 
also to grasp the core to assist in withdraw 
ing it when it has been broken off. In the 
present instance I have shown the tube F as 
being made of two parts for convenience of 
manufacture, one part carrying the wedging- 7o 
pieces and the other the grasping-fingers, and 
the two being united by means of the groove 
and tenon f, Fig. 2, so that one cannot turn 
without the other. In some cases the grasp 
ing-fingers may be dispensed with, the wedg 
ing piece or pieces alone being relied on to 
grasp the core, as well as break it. 
When the core, as indicated by dotted lines 
in Fig. 1, has become of such length by the 
drilling operation as to require its removal, 
its upper end will have passed the upper end 
of the cylinder F, so that on attempting to 
withdraw the drill the points of the wedging 
pieces E, owing to their frictional contact 
with the core, will slide down their inclined 
seats, and, being on one side of the cylinder, 
will press the core to one side, as shown in 
Fig. 4, with the final result of breaking it off 
near its base, so that the core will be with 
drawn at the same time as the drilling-tube. 9c 
Owing to the above-described independ 
ence of the wedge-carrying cylinder F from 
the drill-tube, the wearing away of the wedg 
ing-pieces by turning against the core, and 
also the breaking up of the latter from the 
catching of the Wedging-pieces against it, are 
prevented. 
Although I have shown two wedging-pieces 
in the drawings, one or more may be employed 
without departing from my invention. 
My improvements may be applied to other 
forms of diamond drills than the single-barrel 
drill shown. For instance, in an application for 
a patent filed of even date herewith, Serial No, 
85 
95 
75 
IOC 
25 
30 
35 
45 
SO 
5. The combination of the barrel of a drill 3o 
with a cylinder free to turn therein, the said 
cylinder being in two parts, one carrying 
spring-fingers and the other a wedging piece 
or pieces, substantially as specified. 
with a cylinder free to turn in the barrel, and 
having a groove or grooves with tapered seats, 
and a wedging piece or pieces adapted to slide 
in the groove or grooves. 
wedging piece or pieces adapted to a seat or 
seats on one side of said cylinder, the latter 
being free to turn independently of the barrel 
of the drill, substantially as set forth. 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
6. A tubular drill having a cylinder and a 35 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 4o 
JOHN P. GRISCOM. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. FISTER, 
MORGAN REED. 
2 
- 
327,942 
4. The combination of the barrel of a drill 25 
161,122, I have shown its application to a 
drill having inner and outer barrels, the inner 
barrel in that case constituting the cylinder 
which carries the wedging piece or pieces, 
5 and which is free to turn independently of 
the outer barrel. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A tubular drill having a cylinder free 
to turn independently of the barrel, and a 
Io Wedge piece or pieces carried by and adapted 
to a seat or seats in said free cylinder, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. A tubular drill having a cylinder carry 
- ing grasping-fingers, and a wedging piece or 
15 pieces carried - by and adapted to slide in 
said cylinder, the latter being free to turn in 
dependently of the barrel of the drill. 
3. The combination of the barrel of a dril), 
having a shoulder, b, above the bit, and a 
2O coupling for the drill-rod, with a cylinder 
free to turn in the barrel between said shoul 
der and coupling, and a wedging-piece car 
ried by and adapted to slide in the cylinder, 
all substantially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328042.txt	(No Model.) 
M. LYSETT. 
COMBINED CUPOLA FURNACE AND CONVERTER, 
Patented Oct. l3, 1885. 
 
  
 
| | | | | 
tographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTINLYSETT, OF HOMESTEAD, PENNSYLVANIA. 
COMBINED CUPOLA-FURNACE AND CONVERTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,042, dated October 13, 1885. 
Application filed July 15, 1885. Serial No. 171,721. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARTIN LYSETT, of 
Homestead, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Combined 
Cupola-Furnace and Converter for the Manu 
facture of Bessemer Steel; and Idohereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to make and use it, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this Specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement 
in combined cupola and converter, the ob 
jects being to provide a cupola and converter 
that will be strong and durable in structure 
and of comparative small initial cost, and by 
blowing the metal in the converter without 
exposure to the atmosphere, the saving of 
labor and fuel; and with this end in view my 
invention consists in certain details of con 
struction and combination of parts, as will 
be more fully explained, and pointed out in 
the claims. 
in the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional elevation of my improved cupola 
and converter combined, the one placed above 
the other, together with all its working parts. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional plan of the same some 
distance above the tuyeres of the cupola. 
Fig. 3 is an external elevation. 
To put my invention into practice and give 
it bodily form, I construct an outside cylin 
drical shell or jacket, a, lined with fire-brick 
or other refractory material, b. A converting 
vessel, c, is formed in the base of the stack, 
having an arched roof, d, the better to sup 
port the cupola e placed above. A short dis 
tance above the hearth f of the converter c 
is placed a bustle-pipe, g, connected by a 
pipe, h, with a blowing-engine, and having 
a number of tuyeres, i, that may be removed 
through the openings j and replaced at will. 
From the top of the converter c an inclined 
passage, k, leads to the outside, and provides 
means whereby the waste products may es 
cape, and the condition of the metal in the 
converter c immediately known. A semicir 
cular opening, l, through the Wall of the con 
verter c, is placed at the lowest point of the 
hearthf, for tapping or running off the metal. 
The openings m, placed in the sides, may be 
used for various purposes in the art, and for 
slag to pass off 
O 
25 
35 
45 
A short distance above the converter c is 
placed a cupola, e, having a circular opening, 
o, at the lowest point, and communicating 
with the converter c beneath. Near or at the 
center of the cupola e is placed a large door, 
w, used to charge the same with fuel and stock. 
At any distance above the hearth p of the 
cupola e is placed an external bustle-pipe, 
q, with a number of tuyeres, r, communicat 
ing with the interior of the cupola, e, and hav 
ing a pipe, s, connected thereto leading from 
a series of fans, or if desired, may be attached 
to a gas-main under great pressure, which 
assures the double purpose of a blast and fuel. 
The enlarged portion of the pipe s, hav 
ing a number of small bell-mouthed pipes, t, 
connected thereto, regulates the supply of air 
to complete cognbustion. The upper part of 
the cupola e tapers to a narrow draft-stack, u, 
and is provided with a damper on the top. 
The metal in the cupola, e, when in a molten. 
condition, drops to the converter c beneath, 
and is converted to steel by the blast of air 
through the tuyeres i, and is tapped from the 
semi-circular opening l. The different changes 
in the metal can be seen by the waste products 
passing out of the opening k at the top. 
I am aware that a cupola has been mounted 
upon a converter in direct communication 
therewith, and that the same has been pro 
vided with bustle-pipes and tuyeres, and the 
cupola with feed-door and draft-stack, and I 
do not claim such. 
Having thus described uny invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The combination of a combined cupola, e, 
and converter c, in direct communication 
with each other, and placed the one above 
the other, and each having a bustle-pipe, one 
g and the other q, placed above the hearths, 
and provided with a number of tuyeres, an 
opening, l, at the base of the converter c for 
tapping the same, and another, k, inclined 
toward the center at the top to allow the 
waste products means of escape, a door, w, 
in the cupola e for charging the same, and 
draft-stack at, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
MARTIN LYSETT. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
Witnesses: 
H. T. MORRIs, 
M. E. HARRISON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328142.txt	(No Model.) 
C. M. RHODES 
CLOCK ESCAPEMENT, 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES M. RHODES, OF WALDEN, NEW YORK. 
CLO C K -- ES CAPE M ENT. 
SipECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,142, dated October 13, 1885. 
Application filed April 21, 1885. Serial No. 162,899. 
(No model.) 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES M. RHODES, 
of Walden, in the county of Orange and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
5 Improvement in Clock-Escapements, of which 
the following is a specification. 
With the ordinary pendulum the pendulum 
rod must be made very long in order to obtain 
a beat or reciprocation of the pendulum which 
Ic is slow enough to indicate one or two seconds, 
and the necessary length of the pendulum pre 
cludes the making of a clock which will beat 
very much slower than this. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
I5 escapement for a clock which is of such char 
acter that the clock will only require to be 
wound up at very long intervals, and which 
requires but comparatively small space, so 
that a clock containing it will not be large or 
cumbrous. By my invention a clock may be 
made which will not be of extraordinary size 
and will run for months without requiring to 
be wound up. My invention will be more 
fully hereinafter described, and pointed out in 
the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a sectional elevation of a clock-case 
and such parts of a movement as are necessary 
to illustrate my invention, and Fig. 2 repre 
sents a sectional elevation upon the plane of 
the dotted line ac ac, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in both figures. 
A designates portions of the case, which 
may, of course, be of any suitable design or 
construction, and B designates the frame of 
the movement, which is secured therein. Of 
this movement I have only shown the escape 
wheel C and its arbor C, as only these are 
necessary to illustrate the operation of my in 
vention. As here represented, the movement 
is to be driven by a weight, D, suspended by 
a cord, D', and wound around the arbor C of 
the escape-wheel, as on a drum. The inven 
tion is, however, equally applicable to clock 
movements in which the escape-wheel is driven 
by a Spring. 
The essential feature of my invention con 
sists in a vertical balance-beam, E, which is 
5o provided with weights EE at top and bottom, 
and which is fulcrumed at a at about midway 
- 
h 
of its length and very slightly above the center 
of weight in the beam. As here represented, 
the fulcrum a consists of a cross-pin inserted 
in the weight-rod of the beam E, and sup- 55 
ported by bearings b, one of which is sup 
ported in one of the frame-plates of the clock, 
and the other of which is supported by a 
bridge, B, extending rearward from the frame, 
as best shown in Fig. 2. The fulcrum-bear- 6o 
ings b may advantageously consist of pieces of 
glass, which are slightly indented or notched 
to recelve the knife-edged fulcrum (t. The 
beam or rod is thus supported so that it can 
swing or vibrate in a plane parallel with the 65 
wheel C. 
In order to provide an adjustment whereby 
the beam or rod F may be properly balanced, 
I make the weight E at the bottom thereof 
lighter than the weight E at the top, and I 7o 
provide supplemental weights E, which are 
adjustable toward and from the rod E upon a 
screw-threaded cross-piece, E, fixed in the 
rod E, near the lower end thereof. The beam 
or rod E being thus supported and very nearly 
balanced, the weights at its lower end very 
slightly preponderating, it will be obvious 
that a slight impulse will cause the oscillation 
of the rod or beam E upon its fulcrum a, and 
such oscillation of the beam or rodacts through 
suitable pawls to control the rotation of the 
escape-wheel C, under the impulse which it 
receives from the weight D, or from a spring 
employed as a substitute for the weight. As 
here represented, one of these pawls consists 
of a pin, c, projecting laterally from the rod 
E at a short distance above its fulcrum at, and 
adapted to engage with the teeth of the escape 
wheel C. As here represented, the other pawl, 
d, is carried by a lever, F, which is fulcrumed 
at e to the frame of the movement, and has at 
its lower end an arm, f, which projects later 
ally within range of the beam or rod E as it 
swings on its fulcrum. 
As represented in Fig. 1, the beam or rod 
E is in mid-position, and the escape-wheel 
is prevented from turning by the pawlor de 
tent d. Supposing, now, that a slight impulse 
be given the beam in a direction to move its 
upper end toward the right of Fig. 1, it will 
be seen that Said beam or rod will strike the 
laterally-projecting rod or arm f, and will 
75 
90 
IOC 
328,142 
? ? 
15 
30 
35 
move the pawl or detent d out of engagement 
with the teeth of the escape-wheel C. The 
wheel will thereupon turn sufficiently to bring 
a tooth in engagement with the pawl c, which 
is carried by the beam or rod E, and such 
pawl will block the further turning of the 
wheel, and at the same time the weight, act 
ing through the wheel, will cause the tooth to 
press against the pawl with sufficient force to 
swing the rod or beam in a reverse direction, 
or so that its upper end will move toward the 
left of Fig. 1. As the upper end so moves 
toward the left the rod or beam will gradually 
retreat from the arm f, and before its pawl c 
has passed beyond the range of the teeth of 
the wheel C the detent or pawl d will be al 
lowed to come into engagement with the next 
tooth of the wheel C, and will thereby block 
the turning of the wheel. 
Therefore it will 
be seen that the teeth of the wheel C in Suc 
cession impart to the rod or beam a move 
ment which carries the upper end thereof to 
ward the left of Fig. 1, the pawl c at the same 
I time blocking the further turning of the wheel 
C, and the return movement of the beam or 
rod, which is produced by the slight excess in 
weight at its lower end, will move the pawl or 
detent d out of engagement with the wheel C, 
and permit another tooth of the wheel to come 
against the pawl c and impart a second move 
ment to the rod or beam E. 
It will be seen that by moving the pawl c 
nearer to or farther from the fulcrum a the 
force which the Wheel C exerts to swing the 
rod or beam may be decreased or increased 
as desired. It will also be seen that the ex 
pansion or contraction of the rod or beam E, 
by reason of variations in temperature, will 
affect the operation of the escapement only in 
so far as such changes in length affect the 
short length of rod which is between the full 
crum a and the pawl c, and this change will 
be so infinitesimal that it need not be taken 
into consideration. 
It is found that by the use of the balance 
beam or rod E in the escapement the escape 
ment may be made to beat very slowly with a 
rod of comparatively short length. For ex 
ample, it is found that a rod or beam of a lit 
tle more than one foot in length, with weights 
properly adjusted, will require about fourteen 
seconds for its complete reciprocation or dou 
ble movement, and hence such a movement 
would require a very long time to run down, 
and a lesser number of wheels would be re 
quired in the time-train than are now neces 
sary. By making the rod or beam E of about 
thirty-seven inches in length-which is not an 
unusual length for a clock-pendulum-nearly 
a minute would be required for a complete 
reciprocation or double movement of the rod 
or beam, and hence the speed would have to 
be but very little reduced between the arbor 
of the escape-wheel and the arbor or sleeve of 
the movement which carries the minute-hand. 
By my invention I provide an escapement 
55 
which will enable a clock-movement to run 
for a very long time between the intervals of 
winding, and I greatly reduce the number of 
wheels in the clock - movement, and thereby 
lessen the cost of such movement and the 
friction therein. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the escape-wheel 
C, of the vertical balance beam or rod E, 
weighted at both ends, and fulcrumed near 
the center of weight and arranged to vibrate 
in a plane parallel with and behind the es 
cape-wheel, and pawls or detents controlled 
by the swinging movement of the beam or rod, 
and engaging with the teeth of said wheel, 
one of said pawls being acted upon by the 
teeth of said wheel to vibrate the beam or rod, 
and the other pawl being acted upon by the 
beam or rod to withdraw it from engagement 
with the teeth of said wheel, substantially as 
herein described. 
2. The combination, with the escape-wheel 
C, of the vertical balance beam or rod E, 
weighted at both ends and fulcrumed at a at 
or near the center of weight, the fulcrum a be 
ing parallel with the axis of the said wheel, the 
pawl c projecting laterally from the beam or 
rod near its fulcrum, and in a direction par 
allel with the axis of the escape-wheel, where 
by the action of the teeth of the wheel upon 
the said pawl will vibrate the beam or rod in a 
plane parallel with and behind the escape 
Wheel, and a stop pawl or detent, d, actuated 
by the vibrating beam or rod to control the 
rotation of the escape-wheel, substantially as 
herein described. 
3. The combination, with an escape-wheel 
of a clock-movement, of a vertical balance 
beam or rod having weights at both ends, and 
having near its lower end laterally-projecting 
arms, to which are adjustably fitted supple 
mental weights, and pawls or detents con 
trolled by the swinging movement of said beam 
or rod, and serving to regulate the rotation of 
the escape-wheel, substantially as and for the 
purpose herein described. 
4. The combination, with the escape-wheel 
C of a clock-movement, of a balance beam or 
rod fulcrumed at about the center of weight, 
and having projecting from it near its full 
Crum a pawl, c, which engages the teeth of the 
escape-wheel, and through which said wheel 
acts to swing said beam or rod, a swinging 
arm, F, carrying a pawl or detent, d, en 
gaging with the escape-wheel, and which is . 
acted upon by the swinging beam or rod to 
remove the pawl or detent d from the escape 
Wheel as the pawl c comes into engagement 
there with, substantially as and for the pur 
pose herein described. 
CHARLES M. RHODES. 
75 
90 
IOC) 
EIO 
II5 
Witnesses: 
CALEB BIRCH, 
DAVID MILLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328242.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 328,242. 
H, MITCHELL. 
WACON REACH COUPLING, 
Patented Oot, 13, 1885, 
i Ni N2 
A ?tresses: 
7ze/ezza2z. 
-etzieae. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY MITCHELL OF 
RACINE, WISCONSIN. 
WAGON-REACH COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,242, dated October 13, 1885. 
Application filed April 12, 1884. 
Serial No. 127,643. (No model.) 
55 
axle I am enabled to secure a tight joint, and 45 
effectively retain the parts in perfect Working 
order. 
The reach is inserted from the front, and 
slides snugly but easily in the bushing, the 
length of coupling being regulated by sliding 
it in or out and adjusting the bolt d in the 
perforations therein. 
By the use of my bushing I do away with 
all liability of binding in wet weather, and 
protect the coupling against the elements. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A reach-bushing for wagons, having 
wedge-shaped ribs upon its outer ends and 
vertically - projecting flanges upon its rear, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A reach - bushing for wagons, having 
formed integral therewith upon its outer ends 
wedge-shaped ribs and upon its rear verti. 65 
cally-projecting flanges, the latter each pro 
vided with a bolt-opening, and the lower one 
of said flanges offset or out of line with the 
upper, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
3. A reach-bushing having wedge-shaped 
ribs upon its outer ends and vertically-pro 
jecting flanges upon its rear provided with 
bolt-openings, in combination with the reach, 
bolster, and axle of a vehicle, and suitable 75 
bolts adapted to pass through the openings in 
the vertically-projected flanges and enter said 
bolster and axle, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
have hereunto set my hand, at the city of Ra 
cine, in the county of Racine, and State of 
Wisconsin, in the presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY MITCHELL. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 8o 
Witnesses: 
HENRY G. MITCHELL, 
E. W. MARCHER. 
3 
To all, whon, it nazy concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY MITCHELL, of 
Racine, in the county of Racine, and in the 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Wagon-Coup 
lings; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof. 
My invention relates particularly to farm 
wagons, and will be fully described herein 
after. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
section of a portion of the rear running-gear 
of a wagon embodying my invention. Fig. 2 
is a bottom plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is 
a detached view of the bushing, which forms 
the essential feature of my invention, 
A is the reach; B, the rear bolster; B, the 
rear axle; C, the hounds; D, the coupling 
box; D', the reach-bushing. This reach-bush 
ing is preferably cast in the form of a hollow 
r(cangle, with a rib, a, on each outer end and 
flanges a? a, which latter are respectively pro 
jected up and down from the rear of said bush 
25 ing, and are each provided with an opening 
to receive bolts b b. The hollow rectangular 
portion of the bushing, when in position for 
use, fits in suitable mortises cut, respectively, 
in the rear bolster and axle, and is secured to 
these latter by means of the bolts b b passing 
through the openings in the flanges a' a'. 
It will be noticed that the ribs a upon the 
bushing are wedge shaped in a longitudinal 
direction, the purpose of this construction 
being to secure a tight joint when said bush 
ing is driven home in the mortises in the bol 
ster and axle. It will be also noticed that the 
under side of each rib is of greater length than 
that of the upper, and that the lower flange, 
a', is offset or out of line with that of the up 
per flange, a?, so as to accommodate the axle 
B', which is usually wider than the bolster 
B. By my construction and arrangenment of 
the bushing with relation to the bolster and 
35 
g 
k 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328342.txt	J. M. B., ROBINSON, 
FIRE SCREEN HING.E. 
- 
Patented Oct. 13, 1885. 
OxS NSK (CYS 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 328,342. 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
322 
a 3 3:6 2 3t 
e2e. 
3. 
TC, 
retro- 
INVENTOR: 
fy 4-gye 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. B. ROBINSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FRES CREEN HING E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,342, dated October 13, 1885. 
Application filed February 6, 1885. Serial No. 155,115. 
(No model.) 
rounded and with their inner edges straight, 
and have bolts D cast upon the centers of 
the said inner edges, which bolts pass through 
the side bars of the wing-frame A, and have 
nuts E screwed upon their ends to secure 
the said plates C in place. 
In the plates C are formed horizontal slots, 
F, to receive the ends of the connecting-plate 
G, and vertical recesses H to receive pins 
attached to the ends of the said connecting 
plate G. The outer edges of the recesses E 
are made parallel with the rounded edges o 
the plate C, as shown in Fig. 3, and in dotte? 
lines in Fig. 4, so that the said rounded edge 
will always be in contact whatever be th 
relative position of the Wing-frames with re 
spect to each other. 
Having thus described my invention, 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letter 
Patent 
1. A screen-hinge constructed substantiall 
as herein shown and described, and consist 
ing of the plate C, having horizontal slots F 
and vertical recesses H, and rounded oute 
edges, and provided with bolts and nuts ) 
E, and the connecting-plate G, having pil 
I, whereby the edges of the said plates wi 
be kept in contact with each other as th 
hinges are worked, as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the side bars 
the frames A of the screen-wings havir 
rounded adjacent edges, of the plates C, ha 
ing horizontal slots F, vertical recesses E 
and rounded outer edges, and provided wi 
bolts and nuts DE, and the connecting-pla 
G, provided with pins I, substantially as her 
in shown and described, whereby the edg 
of the wing-frames will be kept in conta 
with each other however the said wings ma 
be adjusted, as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the hinge-plat 
C, having horizontal slots F, and also ve 
tical recesses H, having their outer margi 
parallel with the faces of said hinge-plate 
of the connecting-plate G, provided with pi 
I, substantially as shown and describe 
whereby the faces of the said hinge-plat 
will be in contact however the hinge may 
adjusted. 
J. M. B. ROBINSON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. KINGHALL, 
JOS. E. McCARTHY. 
IO 
15 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES M. B. RoBIN 
SON, of the city, county, and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Fire-Screen Einges, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a screen to 
which my improved hinges have been ap 
plied. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of a part of 
the same enlarged and part being broken 
away. Fig. 3 is a sectional plan view of a 
part of the same enlarged, taken through the 
line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a sectional plan 
view of a part of the same enlarged, taken 
through the line y), Fig. 1, and showing in 
dotted lines the relative position of the parts 
of the hinge when the leaves of the screen are 
folded. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
Screen-hinges constructed in such a manner 
that the adjacent edges of the wing-frames of 
the screen will be kept in contact however 
the said wings may be adjusted, and which 
at the same time shall be simple in construc 
tion and inexpensive in manufacture. 
The invention relates to a screen-hinge con 
structed with plates having horizontal slots, 
vertical recesses, and rounded outer edges, 
and provided with bolts and nuts, and a con 
necting-plate fitting into the slots of the 
hinge-plates, and provided with pins working 
in the recesses of the said hinge-plates, where 
by the edges of the said plates will be kept in 
contact with each other as the hinges are 
worked, as will be hereinafter fully described 
and claimed. 
A represents the frame of a screen, which 
is made in sections or wings and is provided 
with screens, B, of paper, gauze, or other suit 
able material, in the ordinary manner. The 
adjacent edges of the side bars of the wing 
frames A are rounded, as shown in Fig. 4, so 
that the said frame A can be kept in contact 
while being folded and unfolded. 
C are the plates of the hinge, which are in 
serted in transverse slots in the edges of the 
adjacent side bars of the wing-frames A. The 
plates C are made with their outer edges 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328442.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
J. L. WHINERY, 
DENTISTRY. 
No. 328,442. 
Patented Oct. 13, 1885. 
y 
 
 
 
 
WITWESSES 
&^%ze (22. 
IyVEWTOR 
a 4-0%--, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES L. WHINERY, OF UNION, IOW.A. 
DENTISTRY. 
P:CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,442, dated October 13, 1885. 
Application filed August 6, 1885. Serial No. 173,731. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whon, it pay concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES L. WHINERY, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Union, in the county of Hardin, in 
the State of Iowa, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement inDentistry, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
processes for replacing or repairing vulcanized 
rubber dental plates. 
Heretofore the practice has been to repair 
vulcanized dental plates by patching them, or 
uniting to the impaired plate by vulcanization 
a new piece of material, the fit and incorpo 
ration of which depended largely on the skill 
of the professional. Blocks of teeth were re 
set and fractures united by means of applied 
coatings of rubber cemented by vulcanizing, 
which always thickened or distorted the sur 
face of the plate to which applied. 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
a simple, certain, and cheap method, whereby 
a broken or impaired rubber dental plate can 
be duplicated or replaced. My invention is 
also adapted to resetting detached teeth to the 
plate. 
My invention therefore consists in the pro 
cess or method hereinafter set forth, and spe 
cifically pointed out in the claim. 
I accomplish the purposes of my invention 
by a series of successive steps or acts wherein 
are used certain means or appliances common 
to the profession, but which I have illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings in order that 
the progressive acts may be fully demonstrated 
and practically understood. 
Reference being had to the drawings as a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 shows a 
view of an upper set of teeth with a fractured 
plate, the pieces of which have been tempo 
rarily united by a cement of wax. Fig. 2 
shows the same after the impression-mold has 
been flasked and taken out. Fig. 3 shows the 
plate and teeth in the reverse mold, and Fig. 
4 shows the plate with the grooves cut about 
its rin or gums, one of the sides being rep 
resented as filled with the wax. 
To consummate the purposes of my inven 
tion I take the impression of the plate to be 
replaced or duplicated by spreading a thin 
mixture of plaster-of-paris in the plate and 
then insert the plate in position in the mouth 
of the patient, pressing it in place, and for the 
purpose of obtaining a well-defined impression 
I have the patient bring the teeth together 
with pressure sufficient to effect the purpose, 
and also that the articulation may not be 
! changed when the plaster hardens. 
When in 
duration of the plaster- of paris is effected, the 
plate is taken out of the mouth and the iun 
pressed plaster-of-paris trimmed about the 
edges to give it the shape it is desired the new 
plate shall have when finished. The appear 
ance of the plate with the thin impression 
coating is shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings, 
wherein the thin impression is shown with a 
part broken away, as indicated at (t. I then 
paint the impression with a coating of shellac 
varnish, and also apply a coating of oil, so 
that the mold-plaster to be deposited in the 
plate will not adhere to that constituting the 
thin impression-mold already in the plate. I 
then fill the impression with plaster to obtain 
the mold of the mouth, and trim the plaster 
nicely. I then cut a groove in the gum or 
rim of the plate, substantially as shown in 
Fig. 4 of the drawings at a', the object being 
that the plate shall bend easily, and thus lessen 
the danger of breaking the mold when taking 
it out of the plaster. This groove at is then 
filled with wax, which is trimmed to the con 
tour of the plate or down to the surface of the 
rim. I then flask the teeth the same as though 
a wax plate were being used, and let the plas 
ter harden. The closed flask containing the 
teeth is then put in the vulcanizer and treated 
until the mercury runs up to 320 Fahrenheit. 
This treatment must be done with dry heat. 
During this treatment the wax in the groove 
will be absorbed by the plaster. When the 
treatment has been accomplished as stated, 
the flask is taken from the vulcanizer and sep 
arated. The mold will be found in one part 
and producing a fac-simile of the impression 
plate, substantially as seen in Fig. 2 of the 
drawings, and the teeth and plate Will remain 
in the other, substantially as seen in Fig. 3 of 
the drawings, which shows the teeth fixed in 
the plaster and the thin impression-plate ad 
hering to the plate. I then carefully remove 
the rubber while hot, it being quite soft then. 
I also remove all pieces of the thin impres 
sion-plaster, most of which will be adhering 
to the rubber plate. When the rubber and 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
N 
328,442 
2 
thin impression-plaster have thus been re- in first depositing in the plate to be renewed 
moved, the teeth are ready for the new rub 
or replaced a thin impression-cast of suitable 
ber, and this is put on by packing it where 
plastic material, then filling in the plate on 
the old has been removed from. When thus 
the thin impression-cast with a plastic mold, 25 
5 packed, the flasks are united, put into the vul 
then cutting a groove in the exterior rim of 
canizer, and treated as is usual, the result 
the rubber plate and filling said groove with 
reached being that the teeth have been reset 
wax, then flasking the teeth in a plaster mold, 
to a new plate. 
then subjecting the closed flask and contents 
Should the plate to be replaced be fractured, 
to dry heat to devulcanize the rubber, then 3o 
Io the parts may be held together by a wax cem- removing the devulcanized plate and replac 
ent and the plaster poured into the plate, 
ing its mold with packed rubber, and then 
which gives the mold of the mouth, and then 
vulcanizing the same, all substantially as set 
the process is carried out as heretofore de 
scribed. 
15 The invention, it will be seen, is equally ap 
plicable to resetting blocks of teeth which 
have been broken from the plate. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
2O. The process for replacing, duplicating, or 
repairing rubber dental plates, which consists 
hand in the presence of two attesting wit 
neSS6S. 
in witness whereof I have hereunto set my 35 
JAMES L. WHINERY. 
B. J. PARRISH, 
J. H. MCDILL. 
forth. 
- - 
- - - - - 
Witnesses: 
ka 
4 
r 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328542.txt	(Model.) 
C, E, TIBBLES, 
FEED MOTION FOR, SEWING MACHINES, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 328,542, 
Patented Oct. 20, 1885. 
SY 
Illil 
  
seats 
fill 
III 
N 
 
 
l2S-- I 
sites 
T" (i. 
T9 
Wizzzzesses : 
- 
of scalez 
(Model.) 
C, E, TIBBLES 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 328,542. 
FEED MOTION FOR, SEWING MACHINES 
 
 
 
e s 
SXXXXXX 
t 
s 
E. SR 
s 
- 
--- 
s 
S 
Wezzes,ses : 
2 62.4% 
CZaz-Zes Z. Z2642es, 
aera e2, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. TIBBLES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE TIBBLES 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
F E. E. D. V. OT ON FOR SEWING-MACHINES. 
SERCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,542, dated October 20, 1885. 
Application filed May 14, 1885. Serial No. 165,412. (Model.) 
5 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES E. TIBBLES, 
of Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Feed-Motions for Sewing-Machines; 
and I hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, making part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a bottom plan view of the bed 
plate of the machine and attached mechanisms. 
Fig. 2 is a detail elevation of the stitch-con 
trolling device. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of 
the feed-bar, feed-points, and raising and low 
ering cam, the driving-shaft being in section. 
Fig. 4 is a bottom plan of the feed-bar, its 
fastenings, and driving-shaft. Fig. 5 is a side 
elevation of the bar and cam for working the 
lever that reciprocates the feed-bar. Fig. 6 
is a plan of the same bar shown in Fig. 5, and 
a sectional view of the mechanism to change 
the throw of the calm that operates the bar. 
Fig. 7 is an end view of a sleeve on the driv 
ing-shaft provided with a pin to change the 
set of the cam which reciprocates the feed 
bar. Fig. S is an end view of the hub on the 
can to reciprocate the feed-bar, and a section 
through the hub and cam. Fig. 9 is a plan 
and Section of the vibrating lever that moves 
the feed-bar. Fig. 10 shows details to be re 
ferred to. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
feed-motion for sewing-machines which can be 
set to feed the work both to and from the op 
erator at will, and will also feed the work al 
ways from the operator, regardless of which 
way the driving-wheel may be turned. 
My invention also has for its object to take 
up and compensate for all lost motion pro 
duced by wear between the working parts of 
the feed-motion. 
My invention consists in various details of 
construction and combinations of devices, as 
hereinafter fully described, and specifically 
pointed out in the claims, being improvements 
on the invention described and claimed in my 
application filed March 11, 1884, and bearing 
Serial No. 123,834. 
In order that those skilled in the art may 
make and use my invention, I will proceed to 
describe the exact manner in which I have 
carried it out. 
In the said drawings, A is the bed-plate of 
the machine, and B is the driving-shaft. On 
the driving-shaft, by means of set-screw 2, is 
adjustably secured a sleeve, B, through which 
passes a plunger or pin, b', having a short 
rectangular arm, b", on its outer or protrud 
ing end to engage in notches in n, of different 
depths, and retract the pin against spring n' 
when desirable, for a purpose hereinafter set 
Out. 
On driving-shaft B, adjacent to sleeve B, is 
the came, which through intermediate con 
nections reciprocates the feed-bar. This cam 
is provided with a cylindrical hub, e, the end 
of which is cut away to a short depth around 
one-half of the face, forming a depression, e", 
having at one end the semicircular shoulder 
e', and at the other end a hole, b', of a proper 
size to receive and engage with the inner end 
of pin b', whereby the hub and attached cam 
and sleeve B may be locked together, for a 
purpose hereinafter set out. 
The came lies between two downwardly 
projecting adjustable arms, c c, Secured to a 
pitman-bar, E, which passes on one side of the 
shaft without touching it, against which arms 
said cam strikes to move bar E back and forth, 
neither bar nor cam contacts c 0 touching the 
shaft proper. The arms c have rectangular 
slotted heads c, through the slots of which 
pass screws securing the arms to bar E, and 
the slots afford a ready means of Setting up 
the arms to the cam to compensate for Wear. 
The bar E has one end Sustained in a box, 
e', secured to the bed-plate, said box having 
a central adjusting-screw, e, which bears 
against an interior loose flat gib or plate, e, 
on which rests the end of bar E, the feeding 
forward of the screw e serving to push the 
gib against the bar E and bring it to a bear 
ing in order to compensate for wear. The 
other end of bar E rests on the top of one end 
of the vibrating lever H, and engages with it 
by means of stud h and hole l', the other end 
of said lever H being provided with a slot, h, 
55 
75 
95 
2 
328,542 
O 
which engages a vibrating button or stud, g, also that hole band recess e'e' may be made 
on one end of the feed-bar F. The stitch- directly in the face of the cam instead of in 
changing bar G carries the movable fulcrum an intervening hub, e. 
When the pin b' has its lever b" turned to 
around which lever H. vibrates. This full 
drop into the deepest notch in in sleeve B, the 
crum consists of a box, I, which straddlesbar. 
spring n' throws the inner end of the pin into 
G. and fits exactly over the edges of lever H, 
the said box being secured to bar G by means 
the hole b" in hub e. The sleeve B' being 
fixed to the driving-shaft, this operation locks 
of a headed screw, i, about which the boxvi 
the cam e on the shaft rigidly without any 
brates. 
Interposed between bar G and lever EI is a 
lost motion, and in such a position that the 
center radius of its working-arc lies exactly 
gib, i', against the lower side of which bears 
a screw, i, which passes through the center of 
at right angles to the center radius of the 
Working-arc of the lifting and depressing cam 
screw i, tapped for that purpose, and is pro 
Turning screw i in-f. In this position the cams will feed the 
vided with a jam-nut. 
goods in time toward the operator, when the 
ward forces gibi' against lever H, and always 
driving-wheel is thrown toward the operator 
brings it up so as to make the bearing perfect, 
and thereby compensates for wear. 
and feed the goods in time from the operator, 
The change in the position of the movable 
when the driving-wheel is turned from the 
operator. . . 
fulcrum by the longitudinal movement of the 
When it is desired to always feed the goods 
bar G determines the length of the throw of 
from the operator, regardless of the direction 
the feed-bar, and consequently the length of 
of the rotation of the driving-shaft, the pin 
the stitch, after the well-known manner in 
such devices, with the exception that at the 
b' is withdrawn from hole b", and lever b'is 
longest throw of the feed-bar the movable full 
turned into the shallower notch n', leaving 
the inner end of the pin b' projecting into 
crum is at the center of the lever H, so that, 
the depression e', so that hub e' can move 
whatever be the length of stitch, I at all times 
maintain a powerful leverage to throw the 
freely in either direction one-half a revolution, 
until it brings up either against shoulder e' 
feed-bar. 
or the shoulder eat hole b. When the driv 
The feed-bar E is sustained and slides in 
rectangular supports or hangers.f, secured to 
ing-shaft is now turned in one direction, the 
the race-rib by headed screws passing through 
friction checks the cam until the end of the 
slots 44, the slots enabling a ready adjustment 
pin abuts against the shoulder e', when the 
of the bearings of the feed-bar against the rib, 
came is carried along with the shaft by con 
tact with the pin at a point quartering exactly 
while gibs 55, inserted between the hangers 
across the position of camf, and the machine 
and the lower face of the feed-bar and set up 
by screws 66, allow a vertical adjustment of 
feeds from the operator in time. When the 
driving-shaft is rotated in the opposite direc 
the feed-bar to take up lost motion or for 
other purposes. 
tion, the friction checks came for half a revo 
The feed-points F are secured to a sliding 
lution, until the end of the pin b' strikes the 
block, F, which moves independently inver 
shoulder e at hole b', and carries said cam 
along, quartering in the opposite direction 
tical ways 77 in the feed-bar, and is actuated 
by can f on the driving-shaft. In a recess in 
from that maintained while the pin was 
f against shoulder e', and also quartering ex 
block F is a movable contact, f', for cam 
actly across cam f, and in a position conse 
to strike, controlled by a screw, f', to feed it 
quently to still feed the work from the oper 
downward in order to take up lost motion. 
It will be observed that in so far as the pit 
ator in time. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
man-bar E is concerned it has no direct con 
tact with the driving-shaft, and came only 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
touches the arms c c, thereby avoiding any 
Patent, is 
1. In a feed mechanism for sewing-machines, 
wear whatever on the shaft or cams that can 
not be compensated for by setting up said 
the feed-bar F, and came, for reciprocating the 
feed-bar, having hole b" and semicircular de 
S C C. 
pressione', in combination with the stationary 
The pin b' is of such a length as to enter 
sleeve B, provided with movable pin b", and 
well into hole b', and yet not touch the bot 
the driving-shaftB, substantially as described. 
tom and crowd the cam to one side. 
The cam is kept from slipping out of place 
2. The stitch-regulating bar G and vibrat 
by a flange, t, made on bar E, as well as by 
ing lever H, in combination with box I, flat 
gibi', screw i, and screw i, passing through 
the hub e, if a hub be used; but other well 
screw i and abutting against gibi", all con 
known means-as a collar and set-screw-may 
structed, arranged, and operated as described. 
be used on the shaft for the same purpose 
3. The driving-shaft B, sleeve B, provided 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
With notches in n, spring-pin b', came, pro 
Vention. 
vided with hole b" and depression e", pit 
It is obvious that the sleeve B may be made 
integral with the driving-shaft without de 
man-rod E, having adjustable contact-arms c 
parting from the spirit of my invention, and 
c, vibrating lever H, provided with a movable 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7o 
75 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
 
328,542 
3 
fulcrum feed-bar, F, and stitch-regulating bar F, and operating mechanism connecting the 
G, all constructed, arranged, and operated as feed-bar and pitman-bar E, substantially as IO 
Set forth. 
Set forth. 
CEARLES E, TIBIBLES 
4. In a sewing-machine feed mechanism, the 
pitman-bar E and devices to support it en 
tirely free of the driving-shaft, in combination 
with two laterally-adjustable contact-arms, c | 
c, came, to reciprocate the feed-bar, feed-bar 
Witnesses: 
F. D. ELLSWORTH, 
F. B. EWANS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328642.txt	(No Model.) 
J. K. BROWN. 
B00T OR SHOE STRETCHER, 
No. 328,642. 
Patented Oct. 20, 1885. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN K. BROWN, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, 
B O OT OR SHOE STRETCHER. 
27-2CI&ICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,642, dated October 20, 1885. 
Application filed July 15, 1885. Serial No. 171,704. (No model.) 
This invention relates to the class of stretch. Shell near the toe. 
To all, whom, it invay concer. 
A. A denote the last-shaped shell, made in 
Be it known that I, JOHN K. BROWN, of two parts hinged together at the heel. C de 
Worcester, in the county of Worcester and notes a rod having a screw out on about one 
Commonwealth of Massachusetts, have in- third its length, which works in a threaded 4O 
vented certain new and useful Improvements nut, E, held loosely in a slot at the heel of the 
in Boot or Shoe Stretchers; and I do hereby shell. The screw end of the rod C is swiveled 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and and works in a cross-head, F, to which cross 
exact description of the invention, such as will head are attached the stretching-arms G. G., 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap- so they can be moved out or drawn in by turn- 45 
pertains to make and use the same, reference ing the screw-rod. 
H. H. denote the springs, one end pivoted 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, and to | to the ends of the arms and fastened at the 
the letters of reference marked thereon. 
other end by the screw K to the inside of the 
ers which are used in stretching boots or shoes 
I denote holes in the shell, in which may 
to conform to the feet and toes of the wearer. be inserted oval-shaped buttons or lumps, to 
It is often the case that much pain is expe- stretch local spots in case of corns or callous 
rienced by the wearer in breaking in a new places on the toes or feet, as the case may be. 
J denotes the handle to the rod C. 
pair of boots or shoes, and in stretching them 
with the ordinary stretchers now in use the 
In the use of my device the leather is less 
leather is strained beyond what it will bear, liable to be injured in stretching, by reason of 
On account of the rigid action of the stretch- a gradual yielding stretch instead of a rigid 
ing-arms. 
Having thus fully shown and described my 6o 
My device avoids in a large measure the li- 
ability of injury to the boot or shoe in stretch- invention, what I claim is 
ing; and it consists in providing the stretch- 
The combination, with the last-shaped shell 
ing-arms with springs attached to the ends of AA, hinged together and provided with screw 
the arms and fastened to the last-shaped shell. rod C, nut E, cross-head F, and stretching 
Said shell is made in two halves and hinged arms G. G., of the springs H. H., substantially 65 
together at the heel. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre- 
sents the last-shaped shell closed, and Fig. 2 1SS5. 
represents it opened, one side of which is cut 
out to show the stretching-arms and my im- 
proved spring attached thereto and fastened 
to the inside of the shell. 
Worcester, Massachusetts, July 8, A. D. 
JOHN K. BROWN. 
as shown, and for the purposes specified. 
SIMIEON E. KING, 
MIIRICK H. COWDEN. 
Stretch, as before stated. 
IO 
25 
35 
5O 
55 
- 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328742.txt	(No Model.) 
P. WIEDERER. 
FOLDING MIRROR 
No. 328,742. 
Patented 00t, 20, 1885, 
N AA 
 
WITNESSES; all a? a 
w \\ 4 
uo.'s 
Cy 
a' , all INVENTOR 
47.4% 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER WIEDERER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FOLONG MIRROR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,742, dated October 20, 1885. 
Application filed March 13, 1885. Serial No. 158,655. 
(No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER WIEDERER, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Folding Mirrors, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention has reference to an improved 
folding mirror of that class in which three 
mirror-plates are so united that they can be 
arranged at any suitable angle to each other, 
and neatly folded up after use; and the in 
vention consists of a folding mirror formed of 
a main and two side mirror-plates, the frames 
of which are connected by double hinges with 
intermediate straps or leaves. The pintles of 
one hinge are arranged midway between the 
edges of the main frame and one side frame, 
while the pintles of the double hinges, connect. 
ing the main frame with the other side frame, 
are arranged at the adjoining edges of said 
frames, so that one side plate folds readily 
over the main plate and the other side plate 
over the folded side plate. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a front elevation of my improved 
folding mirror, shown extended for use. Fig. 
2 is a horizontal section of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 
is an end view of the mirror as folded up; and 
Figs. 4 and 5 show, respectively, the hinge 
connection of the middle mirror-plate at op 
posite sides of the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
Referring to the drawings, A A' A' repre 
sent three mirror-plates of suitable size, and 
a, a? a, the frames of the same. The frame a 
of the main mirror-plate A is connected with 
the frame a of the side mirror-plate A' by 
double hinges B B, which are so attached to 
the frames at a that the pintles of the double 
hinges B B are located midway between the 
edges of the frames a. a. The pintles of the 
hinges B B are connected by straps or leaves 
bb, which extend over the joint between the 
frames a a, when the mirror-plates A A are 
folded one over the other, as shown in Figs. 3 
and 4. By the double hinges B B the side 
mirror-plate A can be readily folded over 
the main mirror-plate A. 
To the opposite side of the frame a of the 
mirror-plate Aishinged by double hinges C 
the frame a of the opposite side plate, A. 
The pintles of the hinges C C are, however, 
not located midway between the edges of the 
frames a a, but at the adjoining edges of the 
frames a. a, as shown respectively in Figs. 3 
and 5. The double hinges C C have connect 
ing straps or leaves b'b', which are equal in 
width to the thickness of the frame a. 
The described arrangement of the hinges B 
and C permits the folding of the mirror-plates 
A A' A' one upon the other, as the disposition 
of the hinges B B brings the side plate A 
snugly over the main plate A, and the dispo 
sition of the hinges C C the side plate A 
snugly over the plate A. At the same time 
the open space between the frames of the 
mirror-plates A A' and A A' is of about the 
same width when the plates are opened. The 
double hinges B and C permit the setting of 
the side mirror-plates, A' A', at any suitable 
angle to the main plate A, either in front of 
or at the back of the same, as shown in dotted 
lines in Fig. 2. The side plates, A' A', can 
be arranged not only at the customary forward 
angle of inclination to the middle plate, A, 
but also one in forward the other in back 
ward direction, or both in backward direc 
tion, so as to inclose a triangular space. This 
feature permits of a more extensive use of the 
folding mirror than when the plates are con 
nected by plain hinges in the manner hereto 
fore in use, in which case only a forward po 
sition of the side plates is possible. 
I am aware that hinges having intermediate 
folding straps or leaves connected to pintles, 
and the leaves attached permanently to the 
articles to be connected, have been used here 
tofore, and I therefore do not claim this hinge 
construction, broadly. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The combination of a framed mirror 
plate and two framed side plates with double 
hinges having intermediate folding straps or 
leaves by which the side plates are hinged to 
the frame of the main plate, the pintles of the 
double hinges of one side plate being arranged 
midway to the edges of the main and side 
frames, while the pintles of the double hinges 
of the opposite side plate are arranged at the 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
2 
328,742 
5 substantially as set forth. 
adjoining edges of the frames of the main plate the edges of the frames a a and connected by 
and oppositeside plate, whereby the side plates straps or leaves b'b', equal in width to the 
may be set to any angle of inclination to the thickness of the frame a', whereby the side 
main plate and snugly folded over the same, plate, A, is adapted to fold over the side 
2. The combination of a main mirror-plate, the main plate A, substantially as and for the 
A, having a frame, a, a side mirror-plate, A', purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
having a frame, a, double hinges BB, connect- 
ing the frames act', the pintles of said hingesbe- my invention I have signed my name in pres. 
the frames a, a? and connected by straps or 
leaves b b, a second side plate, A", having a 
frame, a, and double hinges C C, connecting 
the frame a to the opposite side of the frame a, 
I5 the pintles of said hinges being arranged at 
Io ing arranged midway between the edges of ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS C. RAEGENER, 
PAUL GOEPEL. 
plate, A', after the same has been folded over 20 
PETER WIEDERER. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328844.txt	(No Model.) 
T. GRIBBLE & R. ABRAHAM. 
No. 328,844, 
B00T OR SHOE PROTECTOR, 
... 
- 
Patented Oct. 20, 1885, 
2. 
(e.uy2/ea 
6% yiece 
ET0. - 
27.32 
BY love y & 
C-Artoineys. 
-----1 
N. PETEFs, Photo-Lithographor, Washington. D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT 
THOMAS GRIBBLE AND ROBERT ABRAHAM, OF CALUMET, MICHIGAN; SAID 
ABRAHAM ASSIGNOR TO SAID GRIBBLE, 
BOOT OR SHOE PROTECTOR. 
S3ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,844, dated October 20, 1885. 
Application filed January 20, 1885. Serial No. 153,426. (No model.) 
and be secured to the boot by screws d, ar. 45 
ranged to pass from the outside of the plate 
at into the sole. 
C is the metallic shank-protector, which 
also consists of a studded plate, a', with side 
flanges, b, and which may be likewise secured 
to its place on the boot by screws d. The 
front edge, e, of the plate a', of this protector 
is of a waved or recessed shape, and the back 
edge, f, of the plate a of the upper and sole 
protector A is shaped to loosely fit therein. 55 
The front ends of the flanges band rear ends of 
the flanges b are made to overlap one another, 
at which point they are united by a rivet, g, 
on each side. This gives an articulated con 
nection of the upper and sole and shank pro- 6o 
tectors, which will give a certain flexibility to 
the tread and ease the use of the boot to the 
wearer. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The malleable metal upper and sole pro 
tector A, consisting of a bottom plate having 
Studs on its bottom surface and formed with 
side and toe flanges, b, interrupted at inter 
vais by the cuts c, whereby, when applied to 
a boot or shoe, the said flanges may be bent 
inward to inclose the sole edge and the lower 
portion of the upper, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a miner's boot, the combination, with 
the metallic studded upper and sole protector 
A, having upwardly-projecting flanges b, of 
the metallic shank-protector C, having up 
wardly-projecting side flanges in pivoted or 
articulated connection at their forward ends 
with the rear ends of the flanges b, as shown 
at g, substantially as specified. 
75 
THOMAS GRIBBLE. 
ROBERT ABRAHAM. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES D. GRIBBLE. 
JOHN B. CURTIS. 
To all, whom it may conce77. 
Beit known that we, THOMAS GRIBBLE and 
ROBERT ABRAHAM, both of Calumet, in the 
county of Houghton and State of Michigan, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Boot and Shoe Protectors, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This invention more particularly relates to 
Io miners' boots; and it consists in the construc 
tion and arrangement of parts, as will be here 
inafter fully described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
15 in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a side view of a boot 
having our invention applied; Figs. 2 and 
3, views in perspective as seen from beneath, 
2O upon a larger scale, of our improved upper 
and Sole protector and shank-protector de 
tached. 
A is the upper and sole protector, which 
should be made of malleable or flexible metal 
25 as, for instance, of the best malleable cast-iron. 
The same is cast in the form of a hollow cover 
or case to the sole and adjacent side and toe. 
parts of the upper of the boot B, and of proper 
dimensions, according to the size of the boot. 
3o It consists of a sole-plate, a, having studs s 
on its upper surface representing nail-heads 
of any suitable pattern to give the boot grip 
or hold on the ground, and, furthermore, hav 
ing upright flanges b to take in the side and 
35 toe parts of the upper of the boot. These 
flanges stand straight up, or nearly so, in the 
plain casting; but when the protector is ap 
plied to the upper and sole of the boot they 
are bent or beaten up close to the upper to 
4o facilitate which they may be scallop shape 
on their upper edges-that is, made with 
downward openings or cuts c in them at 
Suitable distances apart. Such upper and 
sole protector may be of any desired weight, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US328945.txt	(No Model.) 
H. C. HOPKINS, Jr. 
CTO THES WRINGER 
No. 328,945. 
Patented 00t, 27, 1885. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. HOPKINS, JR., OF COVINGTON, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO HENRY C. HOPKINS, OF SAME PLACE. 
CLOTHES-W RINGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 328,945, dated October 27, 1885. 
Application filed February 25, 1885. Serial No. 156,967, 
(No model.) 
. 
To all, Luhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, HENRY C. HoPKINs, 
Jr., a resident of Covington, in the county of 
Kenton and State of Kentucky, have invented 
5 certain new and useful Improvements in 
Clothes-Wringers, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to that class of clothes 
wringers in which the journals of one of the 
Io rolls is sustained by a U-spring, the ends of 
which clamp the axes of both rolls, holding 
them together for wringing. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means for spreading the axes of the rolls apart 
I5 and loosening the tension of the spring by one 
axial movement of one of its rolls, all of which 
will be fully set forth in the description of the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of 
this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal elevation of my 
improved rolls, partly in section. Fig. 2 is a 
broken end elevation showing the rolls in po 
sition for wringing; Fig. 3, a similar elevation 
showing the rolls spread apart. 
A represents the ordinary clamp-legs of the 
wringer, which are secured to the cross-bar B 
and to the U-spring C by nuts D. 
a represents the journal-bearing of one of 
the springs, which clamps around the axis c, 
3o and b represents the top bearing of the upper 
axis, d, formed on the opposite arm of the 
Spring. 
E. Erepresent the housings, which are made 
of the ordinary shape and form for inclosing 
the end of the rolls J. 
G represents a vertical slot pierced through 
the lower end of the housing receiving the 
H represents an angular slot pierced through 
4O. the upper portion of the housing for receiving 
the upper axis, d. This slot is preferably 
25 
2XS C. 
35 
made at an angle of about thirty degrees to 
the horizon. This angle may, however, be 
considerably varied. When the shaft d occu 
pies the lower portion of the slot H, as shown 45 
in Fig. 2, it is in position for wringing. When 
the roll is turned by the crank K, the force Cf 
the crank tends to carry the axis d forward, 
besides the tension of the spring Cassists in 
holding it in the lower portion of the slots in 5o 
the housing. 
The housing E of course is a duplicate of 
the housing E, which is shown in detail, Figs. 
2 and 3. 
A reverse motion of the crank has a tend- 55 
ency to move the axis d of roll into the up 
perportion of slot H; but in order to moreef 
fectually secure the spreading apart of the 
rolls I provide a coupling-rod, L, which is at 
tached to the ears of the housings E E by a 
tenon or screw, l. This coupling - rod may 
be grasped by one hand and pulled to or fro, 
and housings E E will move on the axes a as 
a fulcrum, and the axis d can be moved in the 
slot H for adjustment in either position. 
I claim 
1. In combination with the rolls I J, Sup 
ported by the U- spring C, the housings EE, 
provided with the inclined slots H, for moving 
the rolls to or from each other, substantially 7o 
as specified. 
2. In combination with the rolls I J, Sup 
ported by the U-shaped spring C, the hous 
ings E. E. having the inclined slots H, and the 
coupling-rod L, secured to the ears of the 75 
housings, substantially as specified. 
my hand. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
65 
HENRY C. HOPKINS, JR. 
Witnesses: 
LEWIS C. PARKER, 
W. K. MELLHOLLAND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329045.txt	(No Model.) 
 
 
J. A. HURLEY, 
FLUE CLEANER, 
Patented 00t. 27, 1885. 
s 
sy w 
Sas 
R 
NS 
ss m rw a 
. 
w a 
s 
w 
u s N 
R) 
:-wr-w R. 
SS 
Z 
N T 
5 
I 
Y R 
5 
Y 
L 
Z 
V la  
m 
 
I 
A 
 
  
f 
k 
w 
i 
a. 
s 
Sease 
g 
2E 
EH 
II first 
U 
ProSassr 
- 
 
 
w 
 
s 
f 
 
 
 
g 
xas 
SEE 
I 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
I VIII Hi 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
; or El R s 
(ST7 S. 
W 
 
 
772 a e esses 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN A. HURLEY, OF ERIE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FLUE CLEAN ER. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 329,045, dated October 27, 1885. 
Application filed June 9, 1885. 
Serial No. 168,118. (No model.) 
55 
tion shown in Fig. 4 a bell-crank lever, E, 
and a second connecting-rod,E, are employed 
to secure the proper connection. The valve 
B is kept upon its seat by a spring, S.; but this 
is not essential, as the valve could be kept 
seated by the pressure of the steam. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
The operator makes the proper connection to a 
source of steam-supply with the hose C, and 
then inserts the nozzle, as shown in Figs. I and 
4, into a flue and holds it in place firmly. He 
then presses down on the hand grip-lever E, 
and thus pulls open the valve B. This allows 
the steam to rush into the chamber A and 
out through the annular slit a' into the flue. 
- 
What I claim as new is- 
1. In a flue-cleaner, substantially as shown, 
the combination of a nozzle, a shut-off valve 
operating in Said nozzle and having an out 
ward-extending stem, a steam-Supply pipe 
connecting with a flexible hose, a handle con 
nected with said steam-pipe, and a hand grip 
lever on said handle, which is operatively con 
nected with said valve-stem, substantially as 
and for the purposes mentioned. 
2. In a flue-cleaner, substantially as shown, 
the nozzle-shell A, having conical face a, an 
nular steam-passage a', chambers A and A, 75 
with connecting - passage, and steam-Supply 
entrance into the chamber A, in combination 
with the valve B, with outward-extending 
stem B, the steam - supply pipe C, flexible 
hose C, handle D, hand grip-lever E, and con- 8o 
necting-rod E, connecting the said lever E 
with the valve-stem B'. 
w 
3. In a flue-cleaner, substantially as shown, 
the combination of a steam-nozzle, a shut-off 
valve within said nozzle, having a protruding 85 
stem, a handle connected with said nozzle, and 
a hand grip-lever on said handle, which is op 
eratively connected with said valve-stem. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN A. HURLEY. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. K. HALLOCK, 
ROBT. H. PORTER. 
To all, whom, it may concern 
Be it known that I, JoHN A. HURLEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Erie, 
in the county of Erie and State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Flue - Cleaners; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to that class of Steam 
boiler-flue cleaners in which a jet of steam is 
used to blow the soot from the flue; and it 
consists in improvements in the construction 
thereof, as will hereinafter be fully described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
My device is illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, as follows: 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the device 
with its nozzle inserted in a boiler-flue, which 
is shown invertical longitudinal section. Fig. 
2 is a vertical longitudinal section of the noz 
zle, and shows the construction of the same 
and the valve contained therein. Fig. 3 is a 
front elevation of the nozzle. Fig. 4 is a side 
elevation of the device constructed so as to 
be applied to vertical flues. 
The nozzle consists of a cylindrical shell, A, 
having a tapered or conical face, a, and divided 
into two chambers, A' and A, by a partition, 
A, in which is an opening closed by a valve, 
B. The mouth of the nozzle consists of an an 
nular slit, a?, around a concave diaphragm, A, 
which is connected with the shell by bridges 
a' act a'. The back end of the shell is closed 
by a screw-plug, A, through which is an open 
ing for the valve-stem B, and is provided with 
a stuffing-box, B". On the side of the shell is 
an openling into the chamber A, into which a 
pipe, C, is screwed. This pipe connects with 
a flexible hose, C, which connects with the 
steam-supply. At the outer end of the pipe 
C there is a socket, D', into which a turned 
wooden handle, D, is inserted. On the handle 
D there is pivoted a hand grip-lever, E, which 
is connected by a rod, E, and proper coup 
lings with the valve-stem B. In the construc 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329145.txt	(No Model.) 
W, A, DEXTER, 
IOC BOAT, 
No. 329,145, 
Patented Oot, 27, 1885, 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Its - INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. A. DEXTER, OF DAYTON, NEW YORK. 
O G-BOAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 329,145, dated October 27, 1885. 
Application filed August 19, 1585. Serial No. 174,806. No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM A. DEXTER, 
of Dayton, in the county of Cattaraugus and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
Improved Log-Boat, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to boats or sleds used 
for getting out or moving timber or carrying 
stone, and has for its objects to facilitate 
these operations by lessening the draft of the 
boat or sled, and making the boat less liable 
to stoppage by obstructions in its path, and 
also to increase the durability of the boat or 
sled, especially of its bolster, to which the log 
usually is chained or fastened. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction and combinations of 
parts of the log-boat, all as hereinafter fully 
described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved log 
boat. Fig. 2 is a plan view thereof, and Fig. 
3 is a transverse sectional elevation on the line 
at ac, Fig. 1. 
The letters AB indicate the opposite par 
allel runners of the log boat or sled, which are 
turned upward at their front ends, which are 
connected by a cross bar or plate, C, having 
a hole at c to receive the draft hook or chain 
by means of which the boat or sled is drawn 
along with its load. 
Near their back ends the runners A, B are 
connected by a heavy bolster, D, which is 
Supported on blocks did from the runners 
when said bolster is raised considerably above 
the runners, as shown in Fig. 1, and in full 
lines in Fig. 3, to give room below it for the 
arched axle E, on the opposite ends or arms 
of which the wheels FF are fitted loosely, so 
as to turn on the axle. The axle is fixed, and 
preferably reaches up to the under side of the 
bolster to give additional stiffness and strength 
to the bolster when it supports heavy logs 
placed lengthwise on the boat or sled, to be 
conveyed thereby to any desired place. 
Another advantage of the arrangement of 
the axle directly underneath and as closely as 
may be to the bolster is, that the chains used 
to bind the log to the bolster may be pressed 
under the metal axle, and not directly under 
the bolster, as usual; hence the bolster will 
be protected by the axle from most of the 55 
usual wear on it of the tie-chains. 
By raising the bolster considerably and arch 
ing the axle E, as shown, the sled will clear 
or pass over small stumps and stones, and 
other obstructions in its path, which saves 6o 
time which otherwise would be required to 
remove the obstructions from the road. 
If desired, the bolster D may be set lower 
down, and the truck-axle E may run straight 
across the boat or sled, as indicated in dotted 65 
lines in Fig. 3; but the high bolster and arched 
axle are preferred for heavy boats intended 
to carry large logs. 
The front cross-bar, C, and the bolster D 
will be secured to the runners A B by heavy 7c 
bolts or screws, or in any other approved way. 
As shown clearly in Figs. 1 and 3, the wheels 
FF are of proper size to support the back ends 
of the runners A B a little above the ground 
when the ground is hard enough to support 
most of the load on the wheels, and when the 
ground is soft the wheels will sink into the 
ground to allow the load to be carried by the 
runners alone. 
I cut recesses or notches G in the runners 
A B large enough to allow the wheels FF to 
run on their axles within the recesses, or partly 
within them-say for one-half the width of the 
wheel-rims, or more-so that in soft ground the 
flat under faces of the runners will press or 
pack the earth down in front of the wheels to 
form a clear path for the wheels, and prevent 
clogging of the wheels and stoppage of the 
sled by obstructions which otherwise would 
accumulate about the wheels and interfere 
seriously with the easy draft of the boat or 
sled. 
It is obvious that a log boat or sled con 
structed as above explained will accommodate 
itself by its wheels and runners to hard or soft 
ground, and that it may be drawn easier with 
either light or heavy loads than boats or sleds 
not provided with wheels arranged in theman 
ner described. Consequently the labor of both 
men and animals will be lessened in getting 
out a given amount of timber, and time will be 
economized in the Work. 
9O 
95 
75 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
329,45 
By flooring over the space between the run- ster, and wheels F F, fitted on the axle and 
ners A B the boat will serve as an efficient projecting below the runners, substantially as 15 
stone-sled, as will readily be understood. 
Eaving thus described my invention,I claim 
3. A log boat or sled comprising runners 
5 as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent- A B, bolster D, connected thereto, an axle, E, 
1. A log boat or sled constructed with run- and wheels E F, arranged substantially as 
ners AB, a bolster, D, secured to the runners, specified, the said runners having recesses, as 20 
an axle, E, held beneath the bolster, and wheels at G, within which recesses the wheels F are 
FF, fitted on the axle and projecting below. located, substantially as herein set forth. 
herein set forth. 
Io the runners, substantially as herein set forth. 
2. A log boat or sled comprising runners 
A B, a cross-bar, C, and bolster D, secured to 
the runners, an axle, E, held beneath the bol 
WILLIAM. A. DEXTER. 
Witnesses: 
WINFIELD. S. THRASHIER, 
NORMAN S. THRASHER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329246.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
WEBSTER, 
MACHINE FOR LAYING DRAINTILES, 
Patented 00t, 27, 1885, 
No. 329,246. 
 
i 
WITWESSES 
^, X, (C-te- of 
(/rt/ /4% 
IWVEWTOR 
Zy 
m 
- 
rar 
Attorney S. 
(No Model.) 
S 
WEBSTER, 
2 sheets-sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR LAYING DRAINTILES. 
No. 329,246. 
Patented Oct. 27, 1885. 
 
X, K. (e-) co--ee 
97.4 (222. 
# 
7.WWEWTOI 
7 & 2. 2% 
7%. 6 
Attorneys 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
IVORY WEBSTER, OF WEST LIBERTY, IOW. A. 
MACHINE FOR LAYING DRAIN-TILE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 329,246, dated October 27, 1885. 
Application filed June 24, 1883. Serial N5. 169,655. (No model.) 
M 
25 
15 
To all wi?on, it Tay concern: 
Be it known that I, IVORY WEBSTER, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
West Liberty, in the county of Muscatine and 
5 State of Iowa, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Making 
Trenches and Laying Drain-Tiles; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Io which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
tion, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved machine for making ditches and lay 
ing drain-tile in the same. Fig. 2 is a plan or 
top view of the same. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal 
vertical Sectional view take on the line aca 
in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a vertical transverse sec 
tional view taken on the plane indicated by 
line gly in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a side elevation, 
and Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9 are detail views of the 
cuttingapparatus and the mechanism for regul 
lating and controlling the same. 
The same letters refer to the same parts in 
all the figures. 
This invention relates to an improved coin 
bined machine or apparatus for making ditches 
or trenches, and for laying drain-tiles in the 
Same automatically, and by a single passage 
of the machine over the field, provision being 
also made for covering the drain-tile thus laid 
by the Soil originally removed by the forma 
tion of the trench, and without disturbing the 
position or condition of such soil; and it has 
for its object to provide a device of this class 
Which shall possess superior advantages in 
point of simplicity, durability, and general 
efficiency. 
With these ends in view the invention con 
sists in the improved construction, arrange 
ment, and combination of parts, which will be 
hereinafter fully described, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, A. desig 
nates the main beam of the machine, to the 
rear end of which is secured the downwardly 
extending furrow-opener B, which comprises 
5O in its construction the trench-forming and the 
tilelaying and covering mechanism. The said 
furrow-opener consists, practically, of a flat 
35 
45 
65 
wall or landside, C, inclined from the beam 
toward the furrow, and connected at its front 
and rear edges with the mold-board D, which 55 
is curved horizontally from the front to the rear 
edge, and between which and the landside a 
space, E, is thus left open. This space serves 
as a conduit for the drain-tiles, as Will be 
hereinafter more fully set forth. By having a 
flat landside, as C, which bears against the 
solid earth, the machine is made to run 
steadier than where both sides are curved and 
has loose soil upon both sides, as has hereto 
fore been done in machines of this class. 
The front part of the sled IR is provided 
with apertures '', in which are placed the up 
rights or standards T, which support the rod 
T, to which the power is applied for drawing 
the machine through the soil. By placing the 
standards in different holes the necessary di 
rection is given to the sled for making the 
proper curve. 
To the outer side of the mold-board, near 
the lower edge of the latter, is secured a flange, 
F, which extends from the front end of the 
said mold-board, first in an upward and then 
in a downward direction, either in a straight 
or in a curved line, although the latter is pre 
ferred, and the outer edge of which is con 
nected by a wall, G, with the shoe H, or bot 
tom of the mold-board. This flange serves to 
carry the sods and dirt which is loosened by 
the share, as will be hereinafter described, in 
the act of making the trench, over the tiles, 85 
and to deposit it in the original or in approxi 
mately the original position. 
: The main beam A of the machine has a 
transverse or laterally-extending beam, I, the 
ends of which are provided with slots JJ, to 9o 
receive the vertically-adjustablescrew-thread 
ed rods K. K., the upper ends of which work 
in washers LI, upon the under side of the 
said beam, and the lower ends of which are 
provided with flanges or collars MM, working 95 
in guides N N upon the longitudinal beams O 
O of the sled or rinner P, which said beams 
are connected by means of cross-beams Q. Q. 
bolted thereto, or otherwise connected there 
with. 
The nose of the machine consists of the shoe 
Randanelliptical share,T, pivotally connected 
by means of the pin or bolt U. This shoe can 
be made of a single piece, or of two pieces, R 
75 
IOO 
2. 
323, 2 : 
 
. 
O 
3 C 
and R', as shown in Fig. 9, secured together by bearings in a slot, Al", fol'neil Lorizol tally ill 
Slicit. 
any of the well-know the?iods for to 
the front, if of the be:...) A intel'Secting the 
work. The rear portion of the shoe is pro 
slot II", and where the said trunnions are re 
vided with a rearwardly-extending iug, ir", 
tained by means of pins or keys N. The 
and perforations '. The front, part of the 
loyer end of the screw J" is swiveled it it 
flange F is provided with two forwardly-pro 
bracket, O, upon the rear side of the verti 
jecting lugs, S, each of which is provided with 
cally-adjustable beam I". The lower end of 
a pin or projection), S. When the nose is put in 
the standard i is formed or provided with a 
place oil the flange F. tile lug R fits between 
gudgeon, i?', which is journaled in one of the 
the lugs S, and the projections & 8 fit in the 
cross-beams, Q, of a sled, R', the side pieces 
perforation is ' , thus making a joint that will 
or runners of which, S', are provided on their 
periait of a vertical motion of the front end of 
under sides with siap - edged impinging 
the nose, and one that has no projection on 
boards T', which, when the device is in opera 
either the upper or lower surface, and one 
tion, will enter the soil, thus serving to guide 
which can be easily taken apart, and ptit; to 
tie device and to hold it in the track in which 
gether. 
it is drawn or guided. 
The share it is 3 triiie wider than the siloe 
The ends of the cross-beams (3 of the sled R' 
R, and has two perforations or slots, ', one 
are connected with a ca-piece, U", not inted 
lipoll each side. Projecting through these 
tipon the upper end of the beam i', by reas 
slots are the lower cids of the upwardly and 
of brace-rods W V', as shown. A linged di 
laterally extending cutters W. W., having 
agonai or inclined brace, W, connects the 
notches 2 in their rear edges, which engage 
lower end of the beam i? with the cross bar ol 
with the share, and the upper ends of which 
bear I, which atter is also connected with the 
fit in inclined recesses WW in the cross-beat; 
main beam A. by means of suitable braces, X. 
I, the under side of whici is provided with 
Braces Y aiso connect the lower end of the 
the adjusting-yokes. Y". 
brace Y, with the real' beam, (, of the sled, 
Secured to the front side of the bean E is a 
and other braces and strengthening-fixtures 
transverse shaft, X, the ends of which have 
may be employed whenever and wherever 
cranks Y, which work in notches Z in the 
they shall be deemed proper and necessary. 
front sides of the upper ends of the catter's W. 
The rain beam A. of the device is provided 
The shaft X is provided with a worm-weel, 
at great its rear end with a slot or recess, 
A", which is operated by means of the vertical 
3, from whence a chute, B", of suitable cor 
screw 3", which is journaled in the beam I. 
struction, leads to the heel end of the mold 
By rotating the shaft X the cranks Y at the 
board, as will be plainly seen in the drawings 
; ends raise or lower the cutters W, and with 
provided 
3 5 
hereto annexed. Said chute B" is 
the in the nose of the machine, thus causing 
with one or more adjustable shoes, C, for the 
it to make a shallow or a deep cat, as is de 
purpose of adjusting the said chute to tiles of 
sired. 
":28 332.S. 
By anaking the nose of the ditcher in two 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
pieces and having the shal'epart of it pivoted to 
connection with the drawings hereto annexed, 
the shoe, as above described, and securing the 
the operation and advantages of this inven 
cutters to it in the imanner indicated, stificient 
tion will be readily understood without re 
play is given to the parts to allow of the in:- 
guiring any extended explanation. 
chine being drawn in a curved direction, as it 
The Sietls which support the carrying-frare 
is not always desirable to in the ditch in 3, 
gf the machine are vertically adjustable, ag 
perfectly straight line. 
shown, thereby enabling the vertical adjust 
C C are a pair of hars or beas arranged 
inent of the furrow-opecr to be effected with 
longitudinally under the eans (; , and con 
relation to the silrface of the soil, and this 
nected with the latter by neas of hooked 
eliabiling a trench or ditch of any desired 
bolts f' D', or in any other suitaile mainer. 
depth to be dug. The tile, which during the 
The said beans C" are connected by diagonal 
progress of the machine over the field is fed 
pivoted braces E, and their rear ends are pro 
into the chute i3", is laid evenly in the botton 
vided with notches F, in which are fitted the 
of the trench, which is curved or concaved for 
lowe' ends of the colter-arms W. W. The bars C" 
the reception of the said tile by the pressure 
are also provided on their tinder sides, near 
of the heel end of the mold-board, which is 
their rear ends, with colters or cutters G', which 
cylindrical in shape, and the tile, as soon as it 
precede the colter-arms and cut furrows in the 
has been laid, is covered by the furrow-slice, 
soil in front of the atter, so as to enable then 
which is carried over the flange F of the de 
to pass more freely through the soil, and with 
vice, and which is thus restored to its normal 
better resuits. 
position in the trench, with the exception of 
The main beam A. of the machine is pro 
being raised or lifted by the tile, such being 
vided at its front end with a vertical slot, H', 
the most favorable condition for future culti 
in which a standard, , is arranged to slide 
vation of the soil. 
vertically. The upper end of the said standard 
It will be seen that, owing to the general 
is provided on its rear side with a bearing for a, 
coastriction and arrangement of parts, this 
SYiwcled screw, J', which works in a nut, K, 
device is especially adapted for turning 
mounted upon trunnions L', which have their 
culves, which is especially inportant in a 
SO 
65 
75 
95 
iOO 
IOS 
O. 
I I5 
125 
329,246 
3 
0. 
15 
device of this class, as it is not always possi 
ble, or even desirable, to follow a straightline 
in laying the tile. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
5 claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. In a combined ditching-plow and tile 
laying machine, the herein-described furrow 
opener, having a flat inclined landside, and 
Io a mold-board which is curved from the front 
end to about the center, and thence recurved 
to the rear end of the said furrow-opener, sub-. 
stantially as and for the purpose herein set 
forth. 
2. In a combined ditching-plow and tile 
laying machine, the combination, with the 
furrow-opener, constructed and arranged sub 
tantially as herein dscribed, of a shoe hinged 
horizontally to the front end of the said furrow 
20 opener, and a share pivotally secured to the 
top of said shoe, substantially in the manner 
and for the purpose herein set forth. 
3. In a combined ditching-plow and tile 
laying machine, the combination, with the 
25 furrow-opener, of the shoe hinged horizon 
tally to the front end of the same, a share 
pivotally secured to said shoe, and provided 
at the sides with slots, and the upwardly-ex 
tending colter-arms, having notches upon the 
3o rear edge of the lower ends, substantially as 
herein described, for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a combined ditching-plow and tile 
laying machine, the combination of the main 
bean, the furrow-opener, a transverse beam 
35 secured to the main beam in front of the fur 
row-opener, a shaft journaled to the latter, 
and having a worm-wheel meshing with a 
suitably-arranged screw, cranks at the ends of 
the Said shaft, entering or engaging notches 
40 in the colter-arms extending upwardly from 
the Cutter hinged to the front end of the fur 
row-opener, all arranged and operating sub 
stantially as and for the purpose herein set 
45 5. In a combined ditching-plow and tile 
laying machine, the combination of the main 
beam, the furrow-opener, the hinged point 
forth. 
- 
of cutter having upwardly-extending colter 
arms, mechanism for the adjustment of the 
latter, a carrying-sled connected adjustably 50 
with a transverse beam secured to the main 
beam by means of screw-threaded rods, and 
an adjustable frame secured to the said carry 
ing-sled, the sides of said frame being con 
nected by pivoted diagonal bars and equipped 55 
with colters or cutters, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
6. In a combined ditching-plow and tile 
laying machine, the combination, with the fur 
low-opener having a fiauge upon one side 6o 
the front end of which is provided with for 
Wardly-projecting lugs having upwardly-ex 
tending projections upon their front ends, of 
a shoe having apertures and a rearwardly 
projecting lug, and a share pivotally secured 65 
to said shoe, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
7. In a combined ditching-plow and tile 
laying machine, the combination, with the 
furrow-opener and tile-laying mechanism, of a to 
vertical beam secured adjustably to the front 
end of said machine, and having its lower end 
swiveled or mounted pivotally in a carrying- . 
sled the under sides of the runners of which 
are provided with sharp impinging-boards or 75 
cutters, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
8. In a combined ditching-plow and tile 
laying machine, the combination, with the 
furrow-opener and tile-laying mechanism, of 8o 
a supportiug-sled the front part of which is 
provided with holes or apertures, a vertical 
beam swiveled in said sled, and an upright 
rod or standard secured therein, and the . 
hitching-rod passing through the upper end 85 
of said standard, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
90 
. 
IVORY WEBSTER, 
Witnesses: 
How ELL HISE, 
GEORGE WOOLLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329346.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 329,346, 
 
C. M., TITUS. 
DUMPING, WAGON. 
Patented Oct. 27, 1885. 
- 
\ tity. 
i? 72,44. . 
(3//2a. 
ity ento . 
1676-4-2-02a 
22-02-4 
... peers, photo-Lithographer, Washington, P.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES M. TITUS, OF ITHACA, NEW YORK. 
DUMP NGWAG ON. 
SEPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 329,346, dated October 27, 1885. 
Application filed April 13, 1885. Serial No. 162,018. 
(No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs M. TITUS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ithaca, 
Tompkins county, New York, have invented 
an Improved Dumping-Wagon, whereof the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to a four-wheeled wag 
On, and to a box made in two parts, one rest 
ing mainly on the fore and the other on the 
rear wheels; and my invention consists in the 
adaptation of the dumping-divisions to a com 
mon Wagon and to its reach, and to the means 
of retention in place and of dumping the di 
Visions of the box, as will be apparent as I de 
scribe my invention. 
Figure 1 is a view from above, or a ground 
plan of my wagon. Fig. 2 is a side elevation, 
and Fig. 3 is a view of the fore box and its po 
sition when dumped. Figs. 4 and 5 show an ad 
justment of divisions of the box and of clamps 
differing somewhat from the other figures. 
In the figures, a is the front division of the 
box, and c is the rear part of the box, and b 
is the rear axle, to which the rear division of 
the box is hinged; and d is a second bolster, to 
which the anterior division is hinged, and is 
placed in rear of the usual front bolster, and is 
attached to it by connecting rods or pieces d". 
To support this second bolster in its place, I 
make the Wagon - reach e quite stout, and 
strengthen it by the metallic trusse', as shown, 
beneath the reach. It will be noticed that a 
small section of the fifth-wheel f of the front 
axle is indicated as resting on this iron truss 
bracing in Figs. 2 and 3, but as it would obscure 
the parts shown in Fig. 1, it is omitted in that 
figure. A Scondary iron bar segment of a fifth 
wheel is used, on which, as is common, the 
ends of the two bolsters d d' rest, my modifi 
cation being so to form it that it shall reach 
my rear bolster, d. These iron fifth-wheel seg 
ments are omitted lest they obscure the draw 
ings. Just in rear of this second bolster will 
be noticed the stout hinges of, on which the 
front division of my wagon-box rests, and by 
which it is held. This division has a front 
end-board, h, but no rear end-board, since, 
when in use, the front end-board of the rear 
box - division h is all that is needed. The 
rear box-division c is hinged to the bolster of 
the rear axle by the hinges g', and this box 
division and its hinges act as in any two 
wheeled cart. Next is the provision I make 
for the use of a reach in my Wagon, and it Will 
be noticed that at i is a hinged piece in the 
bottom of the front box-division, directly Over 
the reach. In Fig. 1 it is closed down in its 
place, because the box is shown in the position 
to receive its load; but in Fig. 3 it is Open, 
because the box is in the position of being 
dumped, when this hinged part rests on the 
reach, which thus becomes the self-acting 
means of opening it. 
Ati, Fig. 1, there is shown a lever-clamp 
that fastens the two divisions of the box to 
gether. Its shape is not very essential; but its 
point is wedge or cam shaped, so that it closes 
the boxes together tightly or snugly to each 
other. This is shown only on the upper side 
of Fig. 1; but a similar one is used on the lower 
side of that figure, if needful; or one can be 
placed to act by one lever on each side of the 
hinged piece i, in which case it is fast to the 
middle of the rear box - division front end 
board, and its staples are in the bottom of the 
front division of the box. It is important that 
the clamps be made strong, and to close the 
two divisions of the box firmly together; also, 
it will be noticed that a bolster-shaped CrOSS 
piece, m, is attached to and moves with the 
rear division of the box, and which, when the 
rear box-division is returned to the loading 
position, rests on the reach. The front - axle 
bolster acts as a guide for the loading position 
of the front box-division; thus the box-divis 
ions are self-adjusting to each other on the 
horizontal level, and for the clamps to act. 
The reach is made of a stout top wood strip, 
in, extending from the usual king-bolt of the 
front axle to and through, in the usual mall 
ner, the usual place between the rear bolster 
and axle; but I add to it a stout iron truss, n', 
which begins at or embracing the king-bolt, 
or close to it, and has a stud-block, n', under 
the additional bolster, near the front axle, 
and goes backward to a stud-block, n', under 
the bolster cross - piece in, and to near or 
through the aperture in the rear bolster and 
axle, where it ends. By this means I make 
a wagon-reach fitted to the demands of the 
wagon I have described. It is advisable to 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
329,346 
IO 
make the tie-bolt rods that hold the addi 
tional bolster d to the front bolster, d", of 
iron, but they may be made of wood; and in 
the adaptation of a common wagon to my de 
vices the front bolster, d", is perforated for 
these bolt-rods, that when the additional or 
Second bolster may be put on or taken off of the 
Wagon the reach may not be removed; but as it 
may be shorter than the usual length in farm 
Wagons, it can be taken out and a common one 
Substituted when the box-divisions have been 
removed. The bolt-rods being unloosed, the 
additional bolster is taken off. 
To fit the wagon for the ready adjustment of 
my devices, the segmental fifth-wheel of Wag 
OnS constructed as usual should be made to 
be easily adjustable, that the cross-segment of 
the fifth-wheel may be taken out and easily 
put in the place (shown in the figures) it has 
in my reach. 
Thus by my devices shown and described 
I make a dumping-wagon box, with two divis 
ions or boxes, adapted to the transportion and 
the ready unloading of various articles-such 
as manure, earth, sand, &c.--and for use in 
excavating, road - repairing, and like uses. 
The bolster d is bolted to and through the 
reach and the stud-block n'. The box divis 
ions a and e may be made to fit one within the 
other, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. The box c 
in Fig. 4 is represented to be adjusted to have 
its sides and end board h go a few inches into 
the rear end of the division a. This folding of 
One division into the other makes a stouter 
35 junction of the boxes together, and also allows 
a better plan for the clamps of the divisions. 
The plan is shown to be that staples are at 
tached to the division c, which pass, when the 
boxes are put one in the other, through aper 
tures in the b ttom of the division at a certain 
distance, when the rod j', by its handles from 
either side, is moved, and this causes the 
hooks j', attached to this slide-rod j', to enter 
25 
5 
the staples, and thus lock the divisions to 
gether. This rod is, by a spring, self-acting 
when it is desirable thus to make it. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a dumping-Wagon, the second or ad 
ditional front bolster, attached to the front 
bolster, and to which second bolster the front 5O 
division or box is hinged, in combination with 
the reach n, as set forth. 
2. The reach e", made of the reach proper, 
n, in combination with the truss-bracing rod 
m, and with the stud-blocks n' n', and adapt 
ed to sustain the additional bolster d and the 
bolster cross-bar n, as shown and described. 
3. A second bolster, d, secured by the rods 
d' d' to the front bolster, and constituting with 
the front bolster a fixed resting support for 
the division a of the wagon-box. 
4. The cross-bar n, secured to the reach n, 
in combination with the rear axle, to which 
the reach n extends, the said cross-bar and 
axle constituting the supports of the rear di 
- 
vision of the box, as set forth. 
5. A two parted or divided wagon-box, eac 
division dumping in a separate cart-like man 
ner, in combination with and adapted to a 
wagon with a reach, as set forth. 
6. A wagon with dumping division-boxes a 
and c, suited to a wagon-reach by means of a 
hinged piece in the bottom of the front divis 
ion of the box, whereby a pit for the reach is 
made, as shown and described. 
7. A lever, i, or cross-rod f', provided with 
hook-shaped or inclined tightening - surfaces, 
whereby when the lever or rod is in the closed 
position for holding the boxes or divisions to 
gether these surfaces act as tightening-wedges, 
thus making a firm locking together of the 
divisions. 
- 
CHARLES M. TITUS. 
So 
Witnesses: 
S. J. PARKER, 
F. W. PHILLIPs. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329446.txt	PROCESS OF TREATING STEAM BOILERS FOR PREVENTING FRACTURES 
C. S. EBAUGH. 
AND EXPOSIONS 
(No Model.) 
No. 329,446. 
 
 
 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES S. EBAUGH, OF ST. LOUIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-TENTH TO CHARLES 
D. MOODY, OF WEBSTER GROVES, MISSOURI. 
PROCESS OF TREATING STEAM-BOLERS FOR PREVENTING FRACTURES AND EXPOSIONS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 329,446, dated November 3, 1885. 
Application filed September 8, 1885. Serial No. 176,477. (No specimens.) 
5 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES S. EBAUGH, 
of St. Louis, Missouri, have made a new and 
useful Improvement in Processes of Treat 
ing Steam-Boilers for Preventing Fractures 
and Explosions, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
The improvement is based upon the fact, as 
certained by me after prolonged investigation, 
that the plates of steam-boilers, if not origi 
nally so, in use become, from various causes, 
crystallized,and therefore weakened and more 
liable to break, and that with the maximum 
authorized working pressure cracks occur 
only in plates whose metal is crystallized, 
and upon the further fact that by annealing 
crystallized iron or steel is reconverted into 
uniformly-tough ductile metal. 
The improvement consists in taking a steam 
boiler just as it is after its plates have from 
use or other cause become crystallized, and 
without in any manner changing its constitu 
tion, and preferably in situ, and without any 
water in it, subjecting it to an annealing-heat, 
and after thoroughly so heating allowing it 
to cool gradually, whereupon it will be found 
restored to its original condition and strength, 
and if the plates of the boiler when originally 
made were crystallized the boiler will be 
materially bettered by the treatment. 
The most desirable mode of carrying out 
the improvement is illustrated in the annexed 
drawings, making part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
of an ordinary steam-boiler of the cylinder 
type having two flues and set in the ordinary 
manner. The section is on the line 11 of Fig. 
2. Fig. 2 is a vertical cross-section on the 
line 22 of Fig. 1. 
The same letters of reference denote the 
Same parts. 
The water being drawn out of the boiler A, 
a wood-fire, B, (as fuel containing sulphur 
should not be used,) is placed in the fire-place 
C and the boiler subjected to heat proceed 
ing from the fire, just as when the boiler is 
filled with water and used as a steam-gener 
ator. The firing is continued until the entire 
boiler is subjected to an annealing-heat, and 5o 
until it assumes the proper annealing color, 
following in this respect the most approved 
practice in annealing iron or steel, and ac 
cording to the character of the metal of which 
the boiler is composed. (I have ascertained 55 
that if the plates are heated even to a white 
heat no injurious result ensues.) The fire is 
then withdrawn and the boiler allowed to 
gradually cool, as in annealing. It will then 
be seen that the seams and rivets are in no 6o 
wise impaired, and that the metal in the 
plates is no longer crystallized, but tough and 
Strong. 
The customary inclosing-walls, D D, and 
covering E, constitute a suitable furnace or 
box, not only for enabling the heat to be ap 
plied to the boiler, but also for enabling it to 
be cooled gradually. 
In presenting this application I beg to state 
that it is based upon a long series of tests 
with actual steam-boilers, both single ones 
and in batteries. At least one hundred boil 
ers have been subjected, under my personal 
superintendence, to the above-described treat 
ment. It was problematical whether the de 
sired heat could be applied to a boiler as a 
unit without injuring its form or weakening 
it at the joints. It also involved a long period 
of time for a comparison to be instituted be 
tween boilers not thus treated and boilers 
which had been subjected to the treatment, 
and a reliable conclusion to be reached; but 
after these repeated and prolonged tests, 
made at first, and almost always afterward, 
at my own cost, risk, and responsibility, I am 85 
prepared to state that the treatment in ques 
tion positively prevents fractures in boiler 
plates, and with any working pressure equal 
to the test applied by the Government ex 
plosions will not occur. 
The improvement is adaptable to any of 
the ordinary forms of steam-boilers, and to 
locomotives as well as to stationary boilers. 
I have further demonstrated that fractures 
occur in boiler-plates because of isolated 95 
strains due in turn to unequal contraction 
75 
90 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
329,446 
and expansion, but only in plates whose metal without any water in it, to an annealing heat, 
is crystallized. 
and allowingit to cool gradually, substantially 
as described. 
Witnesses: 
I claim- 
The herein - described mode of treating 
5 steam-boilers, for preventing fractures and 
explosions, with a working steam-pressure, 
which consists in subjecting the entire boiler, 
CHARLES S. EBAUGH. 
C. D. MooDY, 
J. W. HoKE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329546.txt	(N0 Model.) 
~ 
 
N0. 329,546. 
H0ISTING, 0ARRYING, AND DELIWERING: APPARATUS. 
W. A FRY, 
? Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented N0w. 3, 1885. 
 
 
?. PETERs, Photo-Lithcgrapher. WashinE??ton. D. C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
W II, IIAM A. FR Y, OF WASHING: TON, DISTRICT OF COLU MBI.A. 
HOISTING, CARRYING, AND DELIVERING APPARATUS. 
8?F8CIFICA['TON forming part of Hetters Patent INo. 329,546, dated November 3, 1885. 
Application filed July 2, 1885. Serial No. 170,531. (No model.) 
r 5 tion. 
25 coal to and deliwering it in the c0al-yard. 
70 a?/Z ??//a07??/ z 7??)(Z/ c072077a 
Be it known that I, WTLLIAMr A. F'RY, a 
resident of Washington city, im the District of 
Columbia, bave invented certain new and use 
5 ful Improvements in Apparatus or Machinery 
for Hoisting, Carrying, and Deli wering Heawy 
Bodies, Such as Barth, Stone, &c.; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
rO which will enable otherS Skilled in the art to 
Which it appertainS to make and use the Same, 
reference being  had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letterS of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this Specifica 
'The object of my imwention is to prowide a 
Simple, efficient, and economical apparatuS 
Wherehy large and heaWy b0dieS may belifted 
or hoisted, carried whera raised, and deposited 
2O or delivered at the desired point-as, for im 
Stance, at another place in an excavation, or 
into carS, WagOnS, or WeSSels; and it iSalSO ap 
plicable for loading and discharging c0al-weS 
Sels, lifting out of hatchWayS and carrying the 
'The Special cOnStruction, arrangement, and 
operation of the dewiceS Will clearly appear 
from the following. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in eleva 
3o tion illustrating an apparatuS embOdying my 
imwention and in p0Sition for actual use aS 
adapted for hoisting earth, Stone, &c., from 
deep excavations, Carrying it directly bark 
for again filling up Such excavationS Step by 
35 Step after the underground Work-Such as 
maSOnry, SewerS, &c.-have been progreSS 
'iwely built; Fig. 2, an enlarged partial wieW in 
elevation ShOW|ing the balance frame and com 
nectionS and an engine Supported on Such 
~ 4o frame; Fig. 8, a detail showing a clip enlarged; 
Rig. 4, a partial wieW enlarged Showing the 
articulated carriage and itS connectionS; Fig. 
5, an edge wiew of one of my trawerSing take 
up dewiceS enlarged; F'ig. 6, a drum and itS 
4.5 connectionS enlarged, for tightening and hold 
ing the cable; and H'ig. 7, an end wiew of the 
balance-frame. 
A is a metallic or other fixed or *''standing?? 
rope, Secured at both ends, and Serwing aS a 
5o track for the carriage. It is either moored at 
both ends by anchoring in the ground, aS 
ShoWn at 1 in Fig. 1, or to Some fixed object; 
or it may be S0 Secured at one end only, While 
itS other end iS fastened to a frame, B, and on 
this frame the Steam-engine 8 for Working the 55 
apparatuSiS preferably Supported. This frame 
B is a triangular balance-frame composed of 
ab |upright part, 4, a long horizontal part, 5, 
and diagonal braces 6. This frame I pre 
fer to prowide With Wheels to run on a railway- 6O 
track, as Shown, and the Steam or other en 
gine is placed on one end of it, and the Weight; 
of the engine not only Serves to ballast and 
Steady the frame, but, being placed at the 
greatest practicable distance from that point, 65 
7, which receives the main thrust and Strain 
when the apparatus is at Work, it effectually 
OwercomeS any tendency of the frame to be 
pulled over With that point as , a fulorum 
p0int. ThiS arrangement alS0 permitS the 7o 
frame to be put Om. Wheels and placed on a, 
Short railroad-track prepared for the purpOSe, 
and Which greatly facilitateS the Shifting of 
both frame and engine from time to time as 
the Work progreSSes and advances forward. 
Two or more Stationary or Standing ropeS, 
A, may be used with the Same frame and en 
gine, aS found desirable; and each Standing 
rope is provided with its own jointed or ar 
ticulated carriage, C, by the aid of Which the 8O 
bucketS 8* or other bodies are hoisted, car 
ried and lowered, and deposited. This car 
riage is of peculiar conStruction, itS frame be 
ing Substantially a pendent parallelogram 
jointed, piwoted, or articulated at each of itS 85 
four corners, 8 9 10 11, So that when rum 
ming on an inclined rOpe the pointS Or COrmerS 
10 11 may hang wertically from the pointS 8 
9 under all changes of position of this car 
riage on itS track. The upper gro0wed guide 9O 
wheels, 12, 0f this carriage run on the rope 
A, and the lower ones, hung at 10 11, are used 
for the hoisting-rope ID, which rope is clipped 
or fastened Securely at any desired point to 
the rope A, Whence it paSSeS Ower the groowed 95 
pulley 10*; thence downward to and around a, 
grOOwed pulley, 18, mounted in a frame, 14, 
prowided With a hook on Which one of the 
|bucketS 8* is humg When in use, and thence 
upWard and around pulley 11*, and thence to roo 
and ower pulleyS 15 16 on the balance-frame 
B to the lifting-drum B on the bed of the en 
gime, this drum Serwing thuS to lift or lower 
t the bucket, as may be needed. 
75 
~ 
2 
~ 
329,546 
75 
= 
, - 
ed bucket or other article along the line of the 
Work, a trawerSing-rope, F', is employed, one 
end of Which is connected in any Suitable man 
ner to the carriage, aS Shown, for instance, at 
2; thence it extends to and over pulleyS 17 and 
18 on the frame B, and thence to the drum G 
of the engine, the rewolution of which Serves 
to wind or unwind it at the will of the attend 
ant at the engine. 
AS I claim nothing new in the construction 
of the engine itself, it need only be Said here 
that the engineer can by any ' well-known 
| means, aS by Simply turning a lewer or other 
wise, thrOW either or both drumS into or out 
of gear or action at will at any time to Wind 
or to permit the un Winding of either or both of 
the ropeS ID or R', and thus either the hoisting 
or the lowering may continue either while the 
carriage is running or no$ running. . The hoist 
ing or loWering may alSO be Stopped While 
continuing to run, or the running of the car=. 
riage may be Stopped while the hoisting or 
lowering is going on. Two or mu0re hoisting 
carriages, C, may be hoisted , and run at the 
Same time by Simply proWiding tWo or more 
rope-trackS, A, and the hoisting and traverS 
ing ropeS aS abOwe, and guide-pulleyS, one 
balance-frame, IB, and one engime answering 
for all. 
H H' H', &c., represent a Series or set of ? 
trawerSing take-up dewices, which rum on the 
track and Serve to keep the hoisting and traw 
erSing ropeS from Sagging or becoming Slack, 
and also to keep thern practically parallel 
with the track and With each other, and they 
Severally consist of a frame, 19, in which are 
journaled a pulley, 20, and itS attached wind 
ing-drum, 20*, (See F'ig. 5,) and grooved pul 
leyS 21 22. The pulley 20) runs on the track 
A. Pulley 21 runS between and on the ropes 
ID R' and pulley 22 beneath and on rope F. 
A rope, I, Say about tWenty feet, long, extends 
from drum_20*of H to a similar take-up, H', ' 
Similarly placed on the track and ropes, and 
a FOpe, I', Similarly extends from the drum on 
H[* to a similar take-up,H', and so on for the : 
Series, the rope from the last of these Small 
drumuS being Secured to the balance-frame B. 
When the trawerSing-rQpe is in action to cause 
the carriage to dump or deliver its load, the  
first one, H, of thiS SerieS of devices is pushed " 
 forWard by the advancing carriage. as it; or 
any projection thereOn comes against, it, and 
as it moveS forWard the friction of pulley. 20 
55 
Ota the track A causes this pulley to revolve, 
and thuS Winds up On itS druna. 20* the rope 
I, which reached from it to H', and so on in 
SucceSSion,theSe dewiceSH['H', &c.) arepushed 
each one toward the next, and their rope con 
mectiobaS. I I'I', &c., WOuhad up, and not, left, to 
|hang down, aS Otherwise they would do. I 
thus, avoid all liability of their becoming in 
any Way entangled or twisted or obstructing 
5 the proper action of, the apparatuS. ...When 
the carriage C runS back, which it will do, by 
For traversing the carriage and its suspend- | its own gravity on an inclined track, all the8e 
devices H H', &c., also run back by their own 
grawity, and the Wound cord or rope of the 
one nearest the balance-frame B first runS Out, 
stopping the dewice at ifS original place of 
| Suspension on the , track A... . Then the next 
one unwinds itS cord till it runS Out, and SO 
on, each one SucceSSively reSuming itS Original 
place if the Garriage be run back far enough. 
'. Clips K, of any appropriate kind, may be 
used to fasten the hoisting-rope ID to the cable 
or rope A. A.desirable form of Such clip is 
shown on an enlarged Scale in F'ig. 8. By 
tightening its mutS l:' it binds and clipS theSe 
ropeS firmly together as cloSely as may be 
needed. The shifting of these clipS to a dif 
ferent position upon the rope allows the limit' 
of descent of the bucketS, &c., to be waried as " 
desired without any derangement Or alteration 
of any other part of the apparatuS. ClipS may 
be dispensed with, and the end of rope ID may 
be permanently fastened to the Same mooring 
with cable A... . This cable A may be of any 
length desired, dependent on the character of 
the work, and even to the length of Several 
| hundred feet or more, So that When the appa- " 
ratus ) is ready for WOrking, a long range of 
work or of excavating and of filling up after' ? 
| excavating may be done Without meed of mow 
ing the engine and balance-frame, or of re 
mooring the rope Or cable A; but When Such 
mowing is done the railWay-track IL may be 
extended acc0rdingly 0wer the ground last 
filled up. In Some caSeS (dependent on the 
character of the Work) the cable A need not ? 
be inclined. In Such caSe the empty butckets 
or the carriage may be pulled back by a cord 
or rope instead of by grawity. . AS a rule, it is 
better to make a full hoist of the bucket, or 
other article to be raised and carried before    
causing it to run Or travel tOWard itS place 
of delivery. I tighten the cable or cableS A. 
to the required degree by means of a drum, 
M, on the frame B, and thiS drum may be held 
from rewolwing by a common ratchet and pawi; 
but I prefer to use a worm and gear, asshown 
at 28 in FigS. 2 and 5, which Serwe both to 
tighten the cable and to lock the drum. It 
will be Seen that. Work may be continued al 
most, the entire distance between the balance 
frame B and the mooped end 1 of cable A be 
fore it will be needful to Shift the apparatus to 
a new position. 
? ? 
The machime workS wery easily and rapidly, 
'and I find by practical use that it, will do the 
'work of many men and many horSeS and cartS 
or cars, and far more economically and Satis 
factorily. It is adapted for light aS Well aSfor 
the heaviest kind of Work in engineering, rail 
'road construction, certain kindS. Of tunneling,  
and the like; and by Shifting aS desired the 
position of the balance-frame and engine the 
raised articles can be depOSited at any desired 
point within a circle whoSe, radiuS is equak to 
the distance which the carriage may travel oph 
its cable, this flexible cable and itS connec 
35 
45 
 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
I T5 
12O 
T25 
329,546 
38 
tionS readily permitting this, as there is mo ! R', balance-frame B, and a steam-engine Sup 
ported on Such frame, all Substantially as Set 
treStle-work for Supporting a track to be taken 
forth. 
down and rebuilt. 
For many purpoSeS the railway-track I may 
4. In combination With the hoisting, traw 
erSing, and track TopeS, and With a railWay 
be diSpenSed With--aS, for instance, for dis 
in line Substantially With the course of the ex 
charging from weSSels into Warehouses and for 
cavation, a railway-carriage adapted for Such 
warietieS of light Work,and Where the work is 
track, and ballasted at its rear end by the en 
not a progreSSing ome-and the flexible track 
gine which Operates the hoisting mechanism. 
cable A. may be fastened at that end where the 
power is applied directly to the ground or to 
.. 5. In combination with the track-rope A, 
hoisting-rope, and trawerSing-rope, the Series 
a building Or any fixed object. 
of wheeled devices H H', &c., prowided With 
I claim aS my improwements in apparatuS 
Wheels 20 21 22, for rumming on Said ropeS, and 
for hoiSting, conveying, and deliwering earth 
connected together and to the balance-frameby 
and heavy articleS 
cords or ropeSII', &c., as and for the purpoSeS 
1. In combination, the metallic standing or 
track rope, thejointed or articulated traveling 
Set forth. 
6. In combination, the track-rope, hoisting 
carriage C, humg thereon, the hoisting-rope ID, 
Trope, trawerSing-rope, and at Series of take-up 
and trawerSing-rope F, these parts being ar 
ranged for joint action, SubStantially aS Set 
dewiceS H H', &c., commected aS described, 
and each prOwided With a drum for automatic 
forth. 
ally Winding up the Slack of the cords or ropes 
2. In combination With the standing-rope 
I I', &c., all Substantially as Set forth. 
A, the hoiSting-rope ID, adjustably fastened 
theretO by clips, and a traveling carriage, 
Substantially as and for the purpOSeS Set forth. '' WitneSSeS: 
8. In combination, the track-rope A, hoist 
ing-rope ID, fastened thereon, trawerSing-rope 
IPERCY WHTTE, 
A. B. BROWNE. 
'WILLIAMT A... ]E'RY. 
35 
45 
5 
O 
15 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329646.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 329,646, 
A, S, HIBBARD; 
TELEPHONE CALL REGISTER, 
-- 
Patented Now, 3, 1885, 
  
 
i 2 i 
 
 
 
 
  
 
s M YNS 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANGUS S. HIBBARD, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN. 
TELEPHONE CALL REGISTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters EPatent No. 329,646, dated November 3, 1885. 
Application filed July 6, 1885. 
Serial No. 170,711. (No model.) 
IO 
20 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANGUS S. HIBBARD, of 
Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented a certain 
new and useful Improvement in Call-Registers 
for Telephone-Lines, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
Heretofore in telephone exchanges where 
the charges for use of telephones are not fixed 
irrespective of service, but are based upon and 
are proportionate to the number of calls made 
by each subscriber, it has been customary for 
the operators to enter the calls upon blotters, 
from which they are transferred to ledgers; 
but on account of the additional work thus 
thrown upon the exchange-operators many 
calls are not noted during busy hours, and the 
noting of such calls may serve to confuse the 
operator or detract from the promptness of 
the Service. 
The object I have in view is to produce a 
register which will answer the requirements 
for carrying out a system of telephone-charges 
based upon service. I have determined it to 
be essential that a register for this purpose 
cannot be entirely automatic, since it is desired 
to register only calls actually made; but at the 
Same time that it is subject to the volition of the 
eXchange-operator, it should be arranged for 
operation so as to require the smallest possible 
additional work, as by being convenient for 
Working in connection with one of the opera 
tions necessarily performed by the operator in 
giving the service-as, preferably, by the ma 
nipulation of the drop-and it should also be 
preferably a mechanical register, in order not 
to add to the number of wires in the exchange, 
although an electrically - operated register 
comes also within the scope of my invention. 
In carrying out my invention I provide, in 
connection with a telephone switch-board, a 
register for each line running thereto. The 
preferred method is to arrange a register in 
connection with each drop, in such manner 
and of such construction that the drop may 
fall and be set without working the register; 
but the operator can, when setting the drop, 
by an additional movement work the register. 
The operative or controlling part of the reg 
ister may be a moving stem projecting forward 
through the drop-plate, which stem will be 
moved by an additional backward pressure 
on drop in setting; or the register-stem may 
be directly on drop, and may project from its 
rear side for engagement with drop-plate; or 55 
the stem may be on front of drop, in position 
to be pressed by the operator's finger in set 
ting drop; or the register-stem may project 
from the front of drop in position to rest on a 
projecting arm when drop is down, the weight 6o 
of drop in falling not being sufficient to work 
register, and an additional downward press 
ure on drop being required for this purpose. 
If an electrically - operated register is em 
ployed, the movement of stem will be utilized 65 
to close or open a local register-circuit, the 
register being located at any convenient point, 
near at hand or distant. I prefer, however, a 
mechanical register of any suitable construc 
tion. A simple form of mechanical register 7O 
has been devised by me, consisting of two 
wheels placed close together on same spindle, 
and loose thereon. One wheel is slightly larger 
than the other, and both are provided with 
fine ratchet-teeth, the larger wheel having in 75 
addition a single deeper tooth or notch. A 
pawl wide enough to cover both wheels is 
worked by the movement of the register-stem, 
produced as before described. This pawl rests 
on larger wheel and turnsit, being kept there- 8O 
by out of contact with smaller wheel; but 
when the pawl reaches the deep tooth of the 
larger wheel it falls far enough to catch a tooth 
of the smaller wheel, and both wheels are 
moved one tooth together. The two wheels 85 
carry numbers presented at propel openings, 
and these numbers may be arranged in any 
suitable and convenient way to indicate the 
calls registered. 
part hereof, Figure 1 is an enlarged view of a 
drop-plate with drop down, showing head of 
register-stem and register-number openings; 
Fig. 2, a view of register partly developed, 
with drop-plate removed; Fig. 3, a top view 95 
of register with top of case removed; Figs. 4, 
5, 6, and 7, side elevations of drop and drop 
plate, with supporting-strip in section, show 
ing different arrangements of mechanical reg 
ister; and Fig. 8, a similar view, including IOO 
drop-magnet, showing an electrical register. 
B represents the usual telephone switch 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 90 
35 
45 
 
329,646 
being given an additional downward pull to 
work register; or the stem a may control the 
circuit of any suitable electrical register, G, 
and local battery L. B, as shown in Fig. 8. 
In the construction shown the movement 
of stem a forces contacts in together, closing 
the register-circuit. 
board drops. The drops are hung on drop 
plates D, and are held set by hook-levers E. 
My call-registeris operated or controlled by a 
stem. a. The register is preferably a mechani 
cal register, F, which may be composed of two 
wheels, b c, located close together on spindle 
d, and capable of turning independently. 
Wheel b is larger than c, as shown. Both 
What I claim is - 
wheels have small ratchet-teeth, while wheel 
1. The combination, with a telephone switch 
b has one deeper tooth or notch e. A pawl, f, 
board drop, of a call-register arranged in con 
carried by transverse slideg, is wide enough to 
nection there with and operated by the move 
cover both wheels. It is held out of engage 
ment thereof, substantially as set forth. 
ment with wheel c by wheel b, except when 
2. The combination, with a telephone switch 
deep tooth e is reached, when it engages with 
board drop, of a call-register arranged in con 
and turns both wheels one tooth and is again 
nection there with, and having an operating 
raised from wheel c. Wheel C carries numbers 
stem arranged in the line of movement of the 
on its face, while a number-disk, h, is secured 
drop, substantially as set forth. 
to wheel b. The numbers appear at openings 
3. The combination, with a telephone switch 
i. The stem a moves a wedge, k, which, en- board drop and a register. operating stem ar 
gaging with a pin on slide (, moves it trans- ranged in the line of movement of the drop, 
versely. Springs ll return the stem and slide 
of two ratchet-wheels of different sizes, and the 
to first position. The register F may be back 
pawl and its operating parts, the larger wheel 
of drop plate, as shown in Figs. 1 and 4, or on 
having a deep notch for permitting the pawl to 
back of the drop itself, as shown in Fig. 5. 
engage with smaller wheel at intervals, sub 
With these arrangements the drop may be set 
stantially as set forth. 
without working register; but by pressing 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
drop back to an additional extent the stem (t 
26th day of June, 1885. 
will be forced in and the register operated. 
The register F may be on face of drop, the 
stem a being pressed by operator's finger, Fig. 
6; or the stem at may be arranged to rest on 
arm in when drop is down, Fig. 7, the drop 
GEO. D. PERRINE, 
A. W. KIDDLE. 
ANGUS S. HIBBARD. 
Witnesses: 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329746.txt	(No Model.) 
H. F. KING, 
BUTTER WORKER 
No. 329,746. 
Patented Nov. 3, 1885. 
Zzznesses. 
- - - 
(2-, (24.2 
Azeez ov. 
u2-e-2 -z, 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY F. KING, OF BELLOWs FALLS, VERMONT, ASSIGNOR TO THE VER 
MONT FARM MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BUTER - WORKER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 329,746, dated November 3, 1835. 
Application filed May 7, 1885. Serial No. 164,674. (No model.) 
armed, the two lower arms, 9 g, and also the 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY F. KING, of central and upper arm, h, being furnished with 
flanged friction-rollers i, which run upon track 
Bellows Falls, in the county of Windham and 
j. 
It may, however, be adapted for four such 
State of Vermont, have invented certain new 
flanged rollers, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6 
and useful Improvements in Butter-Workers; 
two for an upper track and two for the lower 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
track. Whether three or four flanged rollers 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
be used the retainer is furnished with a cen 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the art 
tering or journal pin, k, at its upper extrem 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
ity, and by means of which it is suspended or 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
hung on the traversing arm of the frame, one 
ing drawings, and to letters of reference 
at each side of the tray. This secures a per 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
manent relationship during the Working of the 
specification. 
machine between the roller-frame and the re 
My invention relates to that class of butter 
tainers, the journal-pins not only allowing any 
workers in which the buttermilk (or butter 
needed swing or play of the retainers to pre 
milk and brine) is pressed out from the butter 
vent the binding of the latter on the tracks 
by means of a rolling pressure, the roller mov 
when in action, but also permitting any needed 
ing forward and backward in a tray; and the 
rise and fall of the frame and its roller, and also 
leading feature of my invention consists in a 
preventing the frame becoming accidentally 
special construction of certain parts, as will 
lifted off the retainers, and requiring no aux 
presently appear, whereby friction is mate 
iliary device to hold these parts together. The 
rially diminished, the machine is worked with 
flanges also compel: the retainers not only to 
much less labor, the roller-frame is better kept 
keep their place on the track, but also hold the 
to place and guided, and the whole apparatus, 
retainers to the frame. When but three fric 
when in use, made more firm and steady by 
tion-rollers are used, I place one on the upper or 
the aid of an adjustable reach, and which also 
center arm of the triangle, as shown in Fig. 1, 
permits the folding of the entire structure into 
and hang the triangles to the extremities of the 
a close compact form for transportation or 
traversing arms F of the roller-frame, and I 
shipment, or when to be laid away after use, 
prefer in such case to have each of the fric 
and also permits the raising or lowering of the 
tion-rollers flanged at its inner side similarly 
frame or table at will. 
to a car-wheel, and to have the upper and lower 
Figure I represents in perspective a butter 
tracks correspondingly plowed out, so that all 
worker embodying my improvements; Fig. 2, 
the wheels, both upper and lower, may run on 
a cross-section of the track for a retainer; 
a flanged track. Such track may be very sim 
Fig. 2, plan and edge views, enlarged, of one 
ply made of a single strip of Wood, having one 
of the flanged rollers; Fig. 3, the under side 
side flanged at top and bottom, or of two pieces 
of the tray with the legs folded up; Fig. 4, a 
secured together side by side, one being broader 
retainer for three friction-rollers; Figs. 5 and 
than the other, and in either case being some 
6 retainers adapted for four friction-rollers, 
what T-shaped in cross-section, as shown in de 
and Fig. 7 an under side of the tray with the 
legSSO arranged as not to overlap when folded 
tail, Fig. 2. It will be now evident that this con 
struction and arrangement of flanged rollers 
up. 
A is the Supporting and adjustable frame for 
that is, two such lower rollers and one or two 
upper ones and the doubly-flanged track-af 
the tray B, and C the roller-frame carrying the 
ford the greatest assurance of keeping the 
roller D, the tray inclining, as usual, and hav 
parts to place, and that the triangular ar 
ing an outlet or outlets for liquid. 
rangement allows of the greatest freedom of 
E is the retainer, by means of which the 
movement and play, and the provision of up 
traversing arms F of the roller-frame are 
per and lower rollers precludes any tendency 
guided and kept to their proper course when 
to bind or tighten at any point. The con 
the machine is in use. This retainer is shown 
struction is also simple and cheap. The re 
in FigS. 1 and 4 as made triangular or tri 
65 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
329,746 
5) 
55 
65 
also being similarly brought up against or 
parallel with the tray, the cross-bars o either 
turning in their bearings or the bars p turn 
ing on these cross-bars for this purpose, or the 
bars pmay, if preferred, behinged to the cross 
bars to allow of this folding. 
Instead of the legs being arranged to lap, 
(each pair side by side at their ends when 
folded,) as shown in Fig. 3, they may, when 
short enough, be so applied to the under side 
of the tray that when folded against it their 
ends will abut or nearly touch each other, as 
shown in Fig. 7. 
I claim 
1. In a butter-worker, in combination with 
the roller-frame, a pendent retainer having at 
its upper end a journal-pin and carrying up 
per and lower anti-friction rollers adapted to 
run both on the upper and lower surfaces of 
a track-bar, as shown and described. 
2. In a butter-worker, in combination with 
the roller-frame, the pendent retainers pro 
vided each with the journal-pink at its upper 
end and with the upper and lower flanged 
friction-wheels, as shown and described, and 
the tracks flanged on their upper and lower 
sides, all substantially as set forth. 
3. In a butter-worker, in combination With 
the retainers provided with the journal-pins 
k at their upper ends and with the upper and 
lower flanged wheels, the tracks, flanged as 
set forth, the pressure-roller, and the handles 
or frame for operating the same. 
4. In combination with the tray of a butter 
worker, folding legs connected to its under 
side, and the adjustable bars or reach pp, con 
necting the two sets of legs, and a screw or 
pin for adjusting and securing these bars one 
to the other to determine the spread of the 
legs and to firmly hold the tray to its desired 
position. 
- 
- 
HENRY F. KING. 
Witnesses: 
A. R. SLADER, 
A. J. HOLLEY. 
O 
25 
35 
tainer-frames E, whether for three or more 
rollers, may be castin a single piece, and with 
pills or journals for the rollers made or cast 
integral with them. (See Figs. 4, 5, and 6.) 
They may be hung by means of their center 
ing pins or journals k on metal pieces m, se 
Cured to the end of the roller-frame or di 
rectly to the arms F, as may be most con 
Venient. 
N N are the folding legs, which support 
the tray, being hinged thereto, as shown; but 
unless properly stayed or braced the tray 
would be unsteady and shaky when in use, 
and if braced by a single piece or brace would 
still be far from firm; hence I have provided 
the following device, which not only holds 
the whole firmly, but also has means for ad 
justing it, so that the degree of tightening up 
may be controlled, as found necessary. To 
each of the cross rods or bars oo of the legs. 
I connect a strip or bar, p, long enough to 
Overlap each other, and fasten them firmly 
together at any point desired, the two con 
stituting what may be called an adjustable 
A simple and efficient means for fastening 
Consists in slotting one or both of the bars p. 
near its inner end, and employing an adjust 
ing thumb-screw or pin, q, extending through 
both bars, and whereby, when the legs are 
placed the proper distance apart, they may 
be connectedly held to that position by tight 
ening up the screw or pin. A thumb screw 
and nut, or any equivalent device, may be 
used for this purpose. This adjustment of the 
lower ends of the legs nearer to or farther 
from each other serves also to raise or lower 
the practical height of the tray from the floor. 
to adapt it and the roller-frame to the height. 
of the person working the machine. 
When the whole apparatus' is to be folded. 
up and laid aside until again wanted for use, 
the bars p are loosened from each other, the 
legs are turned inward, so as to fold or lie 
against the under side of the tray, the bars p. 
reach. 
- 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329846.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
F. MYERS. 
MACHINE FOR TRIMMING, CHAMFERING, AND CR0ZING STAVES, 
Patented Nov. 3, 1885. 
No. 329,846, 
s 
WITNESSES- 
RS 
S 
INVENTOR 
-164 
W 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model,) 
F. MYERS 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR TRIMMING, CHAMFERING AND CR0ZING STAVES: 
Patented Nov. 3, 1885. 
No. 329,846. 
 
 
  
 
() 
; : 
R 
s 
WITNESSES- 
1. 
INVENTOR: 
e6-7, 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
F. MYERS. 
MACHINE FOR TRIMMING CHAMFERING, AND CR 02ING STAVES. 
Patented Nov. 3, 1885. 
No. 329,846, 
 
N pet ERs Photo-Lithographer, wasnister. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK MYERS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MACHINE FOR TRIMMING, CHAMFERING, AND CROZING STAVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 329,846, dated November 3, 1885. 
Application filed January 15, 1884. Serial No. 117,590. (No model.) 
O 
3O 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
staves that are curved transversely to the curv 
Beit known that I, FREDERICK MYERs, a 
ature of the barrel, so as to cut the chines and 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
crozes of uniform depth across the concave 
York city, in the county and State of New 
sides of the staves, which cannot be done with 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
such cutters when moved along the flat sur 
ments in Machines for Trimming, Chamfering, 
face of the table. Flat staves may be dressed 
and Crozing Barrel-Staves, of which the foll 
equally as well with these guides as Without 
lowing is a specification. 
then. 
My invention consists of improvements in 
To feed the staves along the saws and cut 
the Construction and arrangements of ma 
ters, I use a feeding-slide, k, arranged to Work 
chines for sawing barrel-staves off at the ends, 
on guideways l of the table, and connected by 
for Cutting them to the proper length, and si 
a rod, n, with a crank-pin, n, of a wheel, o, 
multaneously chamfering the chines and cut 
located at the opposite end of the table, and 
ting the Crozes, which said improvements are 
having a driving-belt, p, running on it from a 
hereinafter fully described, reference being 
Small pulley, q, on a counter-shaft, s, driven by 
made to the accompanying drawings, in 
a belt, i, from a small pulley, u, on the driv 
ing-shaft v and running on the large pulley' 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
U of the counter-shaft. 
machine with a part broken out. Fig. 2 is a 
To supply the staves to the feeder, I have 
plan also with some parts broken out. Figs. 
provided benches a over the saws and cutters, 
3 and 4 are details in section, and Fig. 5 is a 
on which to place the staves i in piles against 
side elevation with an endless feeder. 
the backs), to be dropped therefrom one by 
On any suitable bench or table, a, I arrange 
one by the attendant in the order of the move 
a SaW and cutter-mandrel, b, at or near one 
ments of the feeder down in front of the saws 
end of said table, connecting it with a main 
and Cutters and between the benches and the 
driving-pulley, c, by the beltd, and arranging 
stops b, and also between the end guides, a. 
The stops b' prevent the staves from being 
a cutting-off Saw, f, on said mandrel, near each 
end, but as far apart as the required length of 
drawn back on the pusher, in case they may 
the staves, With a chine-cutter, g, and a croze 
happen to fall on it, and the end guides, a, con 
Cutter, h, on the inner side of each saw, said 
trol the staves lengthwise with relation to the 
SaWS and cutters being so arranged with rela 
SWS. 
tion to the table that the staves i, being pushed 
The feeder pushes the staves one by one 
along on the table between the saws, will be 
along to the saws and cutters, forcing them 
trimmed off at the ends to the required length, 
under the pressers d', which are held down by 
springse to hold the staves to the cutters. The 
and the Staves will pass over the chine and 
pressers have socket-studs f', extending up 
croze cutters and will be properly chined and 
Ward, and receiving the stud-pins of, extending 
crozed on the under side thereby. The saws 
are of larger diameter than the croze and chine 
downward from the benches to hold the press 
ers against the tendency of the staves to carry 
cutters to cut through the staves; but the said 
chine and croze cutters reach above the table 
them backward. 
and a curved gage, j, thereon only sufficiently 
The benches a each have a saw-guard, l', 
to cut the chines and crozes to the proper 
attached to them to cover the saws to protect 
depth. Instead of causing the staves to pass 
them and the saws, and said benches, saws, 
and cutters are adjustable toward and from 
along the plain flat surface of the table in 
passing over the cutters, I provide the said 
each Other to Set the machine for staves of 
Curved gageSi alongside of the cutters, which 
different lengths. 
gages are convex on the upper edge, which is 
The Saws and cutters are fitted to a sleeve, 
i", having a collar, j', against which they are 
curved to the radius of a barrel, and the 
highest pointisinline with the highest point of 
clamped by the nutsk', and the sleeves are ad 
the Cutters, and directly over the mandrel b, to justable along the mandrel and have a set 
gage the staves thereto in passing over the screw, l, to secure them. 
Cutters. The object of these gages is to gage 
The benches a and end guides, a?, are attached 
7o 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
329,846 
arranged coincidently with the cutters gh, for 
gaging transversely-curved staves to the said 
chine and croze cutters, and the pressers d",4o 
arranged over said guides, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a stave-trimming, chine-cutting, and 
crozing machine, a saw and chine and croze 
cutter for each end of the staves, mounted on 
sleeves i, fitted adjustably along the mandrel 
for adjusting said saws and cutters for staves 
of different lengths, in combination with feed 
benches having correspondingly-adjustabie 
side guides, a, for the ends of the staves, and 
with a feeder, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the stave-holding 
benches ac, having supporting-backs y above 
the rests for the stayes, and also having end 
guides, a, and the stops b, located in front of 55 
the benches, with the feeder k, and with the 
trimming-saws and the chine and croze cut 
ters of a stave-trimming, chine-cutting, and 
crozing machine, constructed and arranged 
substantially as described, 
4. In a stave-trimming and chine and croze 
cutting machine having saws and chine and 
croze cutters fitted adjustably on the mandrel 
b, and also having adjustable feed-benches a, 
the-saw-guards h, fitted to the saws f and at: 
tached to the adjustable feed-benches, sub 
stantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
Y 
FREDERICK MYERS, 
Witnesses: 
W. J. MORGAN, 
S. H. MORGAN. 
O 
5 
to the base-plates m, which are fitted to shift 
forward and backward in the recesses in of 
the table, and are secured by the bolts o', 
which also shift along slotted holes p' of the 
table. 
The stops b are also adjustable along the 
slotted holes g toward and from the benches, 
as may be required. The convex gagesi have 
a base-flange, s', bolted down on the table to 
attach them to the table. 
It may be preferred in some cases to sub 
stitute an endless belt, a, with pushing studs 
or lugs b for the pusher k as a means of feed 
ing the staves, which will feed more continu 
ously and regularly than the pusher, said belt 
being arranged on suitable carrying-pulleys, 
c", at each end of the machine, with which the 
driving-pulley O may be suitably connected at 
one end to employ the same arrangement of 
driving-gear between said pulley 0 and the 
main shaft as is used with the pusher. Ins 
stead of using a single wide belt, a, it will be 
preferred to use two narrow ones, to be located 
near each side of the top or bed of the ma 
chine. 
The feed-table, front, side, and rear guides, 
and pusher form the subject-matter of a claim 
in my prior application for a patent on im: 
provements in barrel-making machines, filed 
November 14, 1883, No. 111,733, and are not 
specially claimed herein. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let. 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the trimming-saWS 
35 fand chine and croze cutters gh, arranged in 
stationary bearings, and with a horizontal 
feed-table and feeder, of the convex guides i, 
25 
St. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US329947.txt	(No Model.) 
J. P, PUTN AM, 
OWERFI,0W PIPE FOR SET BASINS AND SIMIL AR FIXTURES. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1885. 
No. 329,947 
No. 
 
 
 
?SSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
z" |  
|SSSSSSSSSSSS 
% 2 
N 
N 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN PICKERING PUTNAM, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETS. 
OVER FLOW-PPE FOR SET BASINS AND S M A R FIXTURES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 329,947, dated November 10, 1885. 
Application filed October 16, 1884. Serial No. 145,630. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN PICKERING PUT 
NAM, of Boston, in the State of Massachusetts, 
have invented an Improvement in Overflow 
Pipes for Set Basins and Similar Fixtures, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The invention is applicable to set basins, 
bath-tubs, sinks, and other fixtures of like na 
ture in which an overflow-pipe not only serves 
for an overflow, but is used as a plug or valve 
to retain or allow the discharge of water from 
the fixture in the normal operation of the same; 
and the invention consists in a contrivance for 
raising the overflow-pipe from its seat in the 
discharge-passage of the fixture, or for lower 
ing it from its elevated position into the said 
seat, each movement by a single motion of the 
hand, provision being made for retaining the 
pipe in its elevated position when raised there 
to, and thus permitting the discharge of the 
contents of the fixture until by a single reverse 
movement the pipe is returned to its seat in 
the discharge-passage to close the same. 
The invention consists, also, in certain de 
tails of construction. A lifting-rod projects 
upward from the overflow-pipe through a ver 
tical slotin a frame above the fixture, and has 
in itself a slot in which works a weighted cam 
pivoted to the frame. Turning the camin one 
direction lifts the overflow-pipe from its seat. 
Turning it in the other direction permits the 
overflow-pipe to return to its seat by gravity. 
The Weight upon the cam is so placed in re 
spect to the pivot or center of motion of the 
cam as to hold the overflow-pipe inits elevated 
position when the latter is once raised to that 
position and the hand of the operator removed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tional elevation of apparatus embodying my 
said invention, including so much of the fix 
ture as is necessary to illustrate the mode of 
operation. Fig. 2 is a plan of the same. 
A is a portion of the wall of a set basin, 
bath-tub, sink, or similar fixture. 
B is a slab or frame projecting over a por 
tion of said fixture. 
C is the overflow-pipe, an enlarged portion 
thereof taking a seat as a valve in the upper 
end of the discharge-passage D of the fixture. 
E is a strainer permanently attached to a 
cross-piece, a, in the bottom of the overflow 
plpe, F is a rod projecting upward from the over 
flow-pipe through a slot, b, in the slab B. It 
is secured to the overflow-pipe by means of a 
yoke, c, attached to it by a threaded projec 
tion and nut, d, as shown, the said yoke hav 
ing at its ends hooks that take hold of pro 
jections e e from the upper portion of the 
overflow-pipe. 
The rod F has a slot, f, near its upper end. 
G is a brass plate secured to the slab B by 
screws g g and suitable nuts, as shown. It 
has a hole, b, the same being a continuation 
of the slot b in the slab or frame. 
The plate G has two ears, jj, holesin which 
form bearings for the pivot or axis k of a cam 
piece, H. The upper end of the cam - piece 
projects at all times more or less through the 
slot fin the rod F. 
The bearing or operating-surface of the cam 
is marked 1, and some portion of it is al 
Ways in contact with the upper end or side of 
said slot f. 
Wis a weight attached to the cam, as shown. 
The operating-surface of the cam has substan 
tially the curve of a parabola, and this surface 
and the weight are so placed relatively to the 
pivot of the cam that the cam easily passes its 
The weight is sufficiently heavy to 
- Center. 
hold the overflow-pipe clear from its valve 
seat in the discharge-pipe when once thrown 
back to the position shown in full lines at 
Fig. 1. 
When thrown forward to the position shown 
in dotted lines in Fig. 1, and this is easily 
done, the overflow-pipe falls and plugs up the 
discharge-passage of the fixture. 
I do not herein claim an overflow-pipehav 
ing a strainer or guide attached thereto work 
ing in the discharge - passage of the fixture, 
since I have already in substance claimed such 
an overflow-pipe in combination With a set 
basin in my application No. 121,370, now pend 
ing; but 
I do claim herein 
1. The combination, with the set basin or 
similar fixture, and movable overflow - pipe 
provided with a lifting-rod, of a cam pivoted 
to said fixture, and having its operating-Sur 
- 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
329,947 
face in contact with said lifting-rod, substan- substantially as described, for the purpose 
tially as described, for the purpose specified. specified. 
2. The combination, with the set basin or 
similar fixture, and movable overflow - pipe 
5 provided with a lifting-rod, of a weighted cam 
pivoted to said fixture, and having its operat- 
ing surface in contact with said lifting-rod, 
J. PICKERING PUTNAM. 
Witnesses: 
WM. S. ROGERS, 
WALDRON BATES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330048.txt	(No Model.) 
W. R. PATTERSON. 
METHOD OF TESTING ELECTRIC CABLES, 
No. 330,048, 
Patented Nov. 10, 1885. 
 
ITT III 
 
as: 
2 
 
  
 
 
WITNESSES : 
2.2. 
, PETERS, Photo-lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
NWENTOR 
'4. 
%iza 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. PATTERSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WESTERN ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
METHOD OF TESTING ELECTRC CABLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 330,048, dated November 10, 1885. 
Application filed March 22, 1884. Serial No. 125,220. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. PATTER 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Methods of Testing Elec 
tric Cables, of which the following is a full, 
clear, concise, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawing, 
forming a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to telegraph - cables, 
which consist of a core of conductors drawn 
within lead pipe, the interstices between the 
pipe and the core being filled with paraffine. 
The core of conductors may be a thousand 
feet or more in length, without splice or joint, 
while the pipe must be in sections of, say, one 
hundred feet each in length. The core is 
drawn into the pipe and the joints are then 
wiped. By means of my apparatus described 
in my Patent No. 284,226, granted September 
4, 1883, the melted paraffine is then forced into 
the pipe about the core. The pressure of the 
melted paraffine charged with gas is sufficient 
to test the wipe-joints of the pipe. If, how 
ever, a defective joint be found, it is necessary 
to wipe it again after the cable has cooled. 
The joint then must be tested again to guard 
against the possibility of a leak. In laying 
cables also, it is often necessary to make 
splices, and the joints of the pipe at such 
splices must be wiped and tested. 
My invention herein consists in a new 
method of testing the joints of the pipe of 
telegraph-cables, and is especially designed to 
be used where a joint has been found defective 
and rewiped, and where joints are made in 
laying cable and under circumstances where 
it is inconvenient or impracticable to obtain 
internal pressure. 
I have devised a hydrostatic press for the 
purpose of applying my method. This press 
forms the subject-matter of another applica 
tion for United States Letters Patent, and is 
therefore disclaimed herein, except when used 
in my process or method of testing the joints 
of telegraph-cables, as herein described. 
My method consists more particularly in 
bunching the conductors of the core to a wire 
which is connected through a battery and 
galvanometer to the pipe of the cable, and 
applying hydrostatic pressure to the joint 
to be tested, and while observing the gal 
vanometer gradually raising the tempera 
ture of the water about the joint from, say, 55 
40 Fahrenheit to about the melting-point of 
paraffine or the other insulating material, Say 
about 150 Fahrenheit. If the joint is defect 
ive, Water or moisture will be forced through 
the joint to the conductors of the cable. The 6o 
circuit of the battery and galvanometer will 
thus be closed at the joint between the pipe 
and the conductors by the moisture thus 
forced through the defectivejoint. The press 
ure applied is so great and the galvanometer 55 
so sensitive that the slightest imperfection in 
the joint may thus be readily detected. 
In the accompanying drawing Ihave shown 
apparatus adapted to be used in the practical 
application of my method of testing the joints 7o 
of telegraph-cables. The hydrostatic press A 
is shown placed about the pipe B of the cable. 
The conductors C of the cable are at one end 
bunched together, as shown, and connected 
through a battery, D, and galvanometer E to 75 
the pipe. The joint to be tested is inclosed 
within the cylinder of the hydrostatic press and 
cannot be seen in the drawing. The water 
surrounds the joint. By turning the handle 
of the press the water may be pressed against 8o 
the joint with great force. I preferably at 
tach a gage to the press to measure the amount 
of pressure. If, now, when pressure is thus 
applied to the joint any moisture is forced 
through to the conductors the fact will be in- 85 
dicated by the galvanometer E, which will be 
turned more or less, according to the amount 
of moisture forced in. 
Gutta-percha cables have been heretofore 
tested by running them through a trough filled go 
with water, and at the same time observing a 
galvanometer connected in circuit with a bat 
tery at one end of the conductors. Ocean ca 
bles are usually coiled in large tanks of water 
for testing. I have found, however, that 95 
these old methods of testing are not sufficient 
for my cables, since the paraffine may fill an 
opening in a defective joint and keep water 
from penetrating to the wires for a long time. 
Ihave found it necessary, in order to test my ca- Ioo 
bleat any particular point from the outside, to 
apply great hydrostatic pressure. I have also 
25 
35 
45 
50 
2 
330,048 
found it better to have the water in the press 
quite cold, or at a temperature approaching 
the melting-point of paraffine. I therefore 
prefer to have the temperature of the water. 
5 in the press, say, from 32Fahrenheit to 40, 
or between 100 Fahrenheit and 150. If the 
wateris quite cold, the lead pipe and paraffine 
shrink, thus making the defect or opening in 
the joint larger. On the other hand, if the 
Io water in the press is warm enough to slightly 
soften the paraffine, it will offer less resistance 
to the pressure of the water, so that the water 
or moisture may be more easily forced 
through a flaw in a joint, although the lead 
I5 has been slightly expanded. At a tem 
perature ranging from about 40 Fahrenheit 
to about 100 I find that more pressure is re 
quired to test a joint than when the tempera 
ture of the water is outside these limits, as 
I do not limit myself to any particular ap 
paratus for producing hydrostatic pressure 
about the joint to be tested. It is evi. 
dent, also, that the galvanometer may be 
2O above described. 
connected with the conductors in different 25 
ways; and I therefore do not limit my inven 
tion to the specific manner herein described 
and shown. 
As to the state of the art prior to my inven 
tion, reference is made to the following Eng- 3O 
lish patents: No. 2,997 of 1858, (pages 20 and 
21,) No. 1,023 of 1853, and No. 1,234 of 1864. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The method of testing the joints of the lead 35 
pipe of telegraph-cables, which consists in 
pressing water about the joint and gradually 
increasing the temperature of the water, and 
at the same time observing a galvanometerin 
cluded in the circuit of the wires of the cable, 4o 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In witness whereof Ihereunto subscribe my 
name this 18th day of March, A. D. 1884. 
WILLIAM R. PATTERSON. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE P. BARTON, 
C. C. SHEPHERD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330148.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. PAINE. 
STENCH TRAIP, 
 
 
 
A272esses 
????? 
???. 
??? 
Zazava.0272 
ZEzize 
.02 
?? 
???l 
UNITED STATES ?????? OFFICE. 
JOHN A. PAINE, OF TARRYTOWN, NEW YORK, 
STENCH-TRAP. 
SFRCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 330,148, dated November 10, 1885. 
Application filed July 26, 1884. Serial No. 138,914. (No model.) 
2O 
25 
IC 
To all w/i??, t; ??? ????????: 
Beit known that I, JOIIN A. PAINE, resid 
ing in Tarrytown, in the ccunty of Westches 
ter and State of New York, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Traps for 
Water-Pipes, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawing, making a 
part of this specification. 
- 
My invention is an improvement in the 
traps used in connection with the pipes from 
basins, closets, &c., and is intended to pro 
duce a trap that will effectually prevent the 
evaporation of the water therefrom, or the 
15 draying off of the same by suction or siphonic 
action, and that will also render the passage 
of sewer-gas through the trap impossible, and 
is so constructed that the whole interior of 
the trap can be easily and quickly cleaned. 
The accompanying drawing is a vertical 
sectional view of the trap, showing the posi 
tion and arrangement of its pipes and valves 
and the openings into the trap closed by 
screw-caps, by means of which the pipes may 
be cleansed and freed from all obstruction. 
In the traps commonly used in connection 
with basins and closets it frequently happens 
that the Sewer-gas, on account of great press 
ure in the pipes, or for some other cause, 
overcomes the Weight of Water in the trap, and 
is forced through the same and escapes into 
the house or living-apartments; and it also 
often occurs that the volume of water in the 
 trap 
is reduced to such an extent, either by 
evaporation, When the trap remains unused 
for a great length of time, or by suction or 
siphonic action, drawing the water into the 
sewer-pipes, that it offers but little, if any, 
resistance to the passage of gas from the sewer. 
pipes into the rooms, 
My improved trap is designed to prevent 
all such occurrences, and is so constructed 
that the Water in the trap cannot be drawn 
out of the same by any siphonic action or suc 
tion in the pipes, and cannot evaporate, even 
when the trap remains unused for a long time, 
and, no matter how great the pressure in the 
sewer-pipes may be, will not allow the passage 
of any gas through the trap into the room or 
other apartment. 
The trap constructed according to my im 
provement consists of the usual U or S 
shaped tube or pipe Connected at one end-its 
receiving end-With the discharge-pipe from 
the basin, closet, or other vessel, and by the 
other end with the pipe into the sewer, and 
having its bend suficiently bellow the water 
level or mouth of the discharge-pipe to be or 
constitute a water - reservoir always filled 
with water, and having its valves so arranged 
or located that such water space or reservoir 
will remain continually filled with water, pro 
tected against evaporation into the basin, and 
also against evaporation or suction into the 
sewer. 
As illustrated in the drawing, for economy 
of space and facility in cleaning the three sec 
tions or pipes A, B, and C, forming my in 
proved trap, may be constructed together, or 
so as to be separated by single walls or parti 
tions. 
In the middle section, B, of the trap, which 
is constructed large enough for the purpose, 
is placed a spherical valve, S, resting or fitting 
closely in the valve-seat E. E. This valve, 
which I prefer to make of Some aard metal-- 
as copper or brass-is heavier than water, and 
should be of a Weight to slightly exceed the 
pressure or weight of the water in the other 
section, A, of the trap, so that when the trap 
is filled the Water will stand a little higher 
in the section Athan in the section B, so as to 
partially fill the chamber at the top of A, and 
the valve S, by its weight, will rest closely 
and tightly on the valve-seat E. E. When 
water enters the trap, the Weight of this valve 
is overcome, and it is forced up from its seat, 
as shown in dotted lines, so as to allow the 
extra amount of Water to pass through the 
trap into the discharge or Sewer pipe, and is 
held in this position until water ceases to en 
ter the trap, when it again falls back into its 
seat and remains there until more waterflows 
into the trap. 
The weight of the valve S, which may be 
made solid or hollow, should be so adjusted 
that it will move with facility, and not tend in 
any way to obstruct the flow of water, &c., 
through the trap. As this valve fits tightly in 
its valve-seat, it effectually prevents thepassage 
of gas from the sewer-pipes through the trap, 
and, as will be understood from the drawing, 
the greater the force or pressure of the gas on 
the top of the valve the closer it will rest on 
its seat, and the more effectually it will pre 
vent the escape of gas into the section A of the 
trap, and thus into the room or apartment. 
This valve S will also prevent the evaporation 
| 
| 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
 
2 
330,148 
of the water from the section A of the trap 
into the sewer-pipe. 
In a chamber situated at the top of section 
A of the trap, as shown in the drawing, which 
may be formed in any convenient manner, is 
another spherical valve, T, made so light as 
to float on the top of the Water in the cham 
ber when the trap is full of water, but at other 
times resting firmly and tightly in its seat F 
F. This valve is preferably made hollow, of 
some hard metal-as copper-by which a tight 
close connection with the valve-seat is se 
cured, so that no air can pass between the 
valve and the seat, and yet the necessary light 
ness and buoyancy are obtained, so that the 
valve will be lighter than water. 
In the ordinary condition of the trap, as al 
ready explained, the water partially fills the 
chamber at the top of the section A of the 
trap, and the valve T, floating on top of the 
water, offers no obstruction to the flow into 
the trap, but is still farther raised away from 
the valve-seat as the amount of water in the 
chamber is increased, as will be understood 
by reference to the drawing; but if, for any 
reason, the amount of water in the section A 
of the trap is decreased, the valve T will 
fall with the column of water until arrested 
by the valve-seat FF, in which it will remain 
until again raised and floated by the water in 
the section A. It follows from this that if, 
through long disuse of the trap, or for any 
other reason, the Water in the trap evaporates 
sufficiently to bring the column of water in 
the section A below the valve-seat FF, the 
valve T will fall and rest in its seat, and as 
the valve is so constructed as to fit the valve 
seat closely and tightly, further evaporation, 
and consequently a further decrease of the wa 
ter, in the trap, is prevented. As will thus be 
seen, evaporation can never decrease the vol 
ume of water in the trap below the valve-seat 
FF, and no matter how long the trap may re 
main unused, it will always be filled with wa 
ter up to this point. Moreover, as the weight 
of the column of water in the section A is less 
ened, the valve S will rest with greater weight. 
on its valve-seat, and thus compensate for the 
loss in the volume of water in the trap. 
As water enters the trap from the basin or 
other vessel, the Valve T, on account of its 
lightness, rises from its seat and floats on the 
column of water, as before. 
Should the water in the trap be drawn from 
the same into the sewer-pipe by any siphonic 
action or by suction overcoming the weight 
of the valve S, as the volume of water de 
creases the valve T Would fall until it rested 
in its valve-seat, and would then arrest any 
further siphonic action or suction, and would 
thus prevent any more Water being withdrawn 
from the trap into the sewer-pipe, thus insur 
ing a sufficient quantity of water remaining 
in the trap to prevent the passage of gas 
through the same. In my improved trap, 
therefore, the body of water between the valves | 
S and T is locked in or confined, and cannot 
- 
be withdrawn from the trap under any circum 
stances by evaporation or suction, thereby in 
suring a volume of waterin the trap at all times. 7o 
Thus the combined action of the two valves S 
and T, embracing a volume of Water between 
them, secures a bar, under all circumstances, 
against an undesired current up or down and 
to any emptying of the trap, while at the same 75 
time allowing the water to freely pass through 
the trap. 
The valve S may be placed at any point in 
the section B of the trap as is found desirable, 
so as to embrace a greater or less volume of 8o 
water between the valves. 
To insure a closer fit of the valves in the 
valve-seats, the latter may be lined with some 
hard metal-as braSS or copper-and con 
structed broad enough to allow the valve to 85 
have a wide and firm bearing or seat in the 
same. These valves, instead of being spheri 
cal, as shown and described above, may be of 
any convenient shape, as elongated or oval. 
openings capable of being closed by screw 
caps L., M., and N, as shown in the drawing, 
by means of which the interior of the trap may 
be easily and quickly cleaned and freed from 
all obstructions. The opening in the bottom 95 
of the trap, closed by the cap N in the draw 
ing, is so made as to form a pocket or recep 
tacle in which foreign matter may lodge, and 
from which it may be easily removed. In the 
trap shown in the drawing the cap M is so Ico 
placed with respect to the pipe B as to pre 
vent the valve S from passing over into the 
pipe C; but some other mode of accomplish 
ing this may be employed. My improved trap 
thus not only prevents sewer-gas from escap- Io5 
ing into the room, but also allows the trap to 
be easily and quickly cleaned and all obstruc 
tions to be removed. 
?? 
My improved trap is also constructed with go 
What is claimed as new is 
1. In a trap for Water-pipes, constructed as IIo 
described, and having a floating valve with 
a single valve-seat at the top of the water 
chamber, at or near the mouth of the receiv. 
ing-pipe from the basin, the combination of a 
second valve and seat, situated at or near the II.5 
point of discharge into the educt-pipe into the 
sewer, thereby preventing evaporation into 
the basin and into the Sewer, and the drain of 
water from the trap by suction or siphonic 
action into the sewer, and the passage of gas I 20 
through the trap. 
2. In a trap for Water-pipes, the combina 
tion, with a valve lighter than water, located 
at the top of the water-chamber, of a valve 
heavier than Water, at or near the entrance to 12 s 
the discharge-pipe into the sewer, whereby 
the passage of Sewer-gas through the trap and 
the drain of water from the same are rendered . 
impossible, and also evaporation into the basin 
and into the sewer is prevented. 
- 
J. A. PAINE. 
Witnesses: 
H. W. LINSON, 
C. S. DAWISON. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330248.txt	(No Model.) 
F. R. MARKS. 
SLATE DRESSING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 0, 330,248 
242. Patented Now, 10, 1885. 
 
 
SSSSSSSSSSSSYSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSNs 
A.Y. 
1WWEWTOR 
4, Zia-70% Attorneys 
N. pet ERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, P.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. R. MARKS. 
SLATEDRESSING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 330,248, 
Patented Now, 10, l885. 
 
  
 
Y IITY 
infiltrati 
sarsh, 
As 
At this 
y 
s 
C. via A. cf. 
IWWEWTOR 
4, c/e Save-2C27.4 
Attorneys 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITWESSES 
7. CC, 62-e--ee-1-(- 
4.24- 
N. PereRs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, O.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS R. MARKS, OF ASHLAND, OHIO. 
SATED RESSENG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 330,248, dated November 10, 1885. 
Application filed January 23, 1885. Serial No. 153,741. 
(No model.) 
55 
To ?t/7, whon, it naily concern : 
each side of the central rail, B, without calcu 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS R. MARKS, a 
lation. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ash 
The letter I indicates an adjustable gage, 
land, in the county of Ashland and State of 
which may be adjusted by means of a set 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
screw, M, to determine the length of the slate 
Improvements in Slate-Dressing Machines, of 
to be cut, the rear end of the slate resting 
which the following is a specification, refer 
against the rear upward portion of the gage. 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
The letter N indicates a lever fulcrumed in 
bearings P at the rear of the machine, the 
IngS. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
fulcrum-bolt being surrounded by a spiral 
ments in machines for dressing and punching 
spring, Q, which holds the knife-arm R nor 
slates; and it has for its objects to provide 
mally elevated, the said arm being connected 
improved means for gaging and adjusting the 
with a treadle, S, by means of which it may 6 
slate to be cut, and for adjusting the cutting 
be depressed by the foot of the operator to 
and punching mechanism, as more fully here 
operate the knives and punches for punching 
inafter set forth, and also to provide an ad 
and trimming the slate. The knives are 
justable seat for the operator, as more fully 
mounted on the slides S, which are adjusta 
hereinafter explained. These objects I attain 
bly secured to the beveled cross-bar T of the 
by the means illustrated in the accompanying 
vibrating arm in such manner that they may 
drawings, in which - 
be separated to adjust laterally, and also turned 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of my im 
so as to adjust them at angle to each other. 
proved machine with a portion of the upper 
The forward top rail, U, of the frame is 
works removed to show the slate-adjusting 
beveled in cross-section, and provided with 
adjustable slides V, which carry the adjustable 
devices. Fig. 2 represents a vertical sectional 
punch-rests W, the vibrating arm above being 
view of the machine. Fig. 3 indicates a top 
provided with a cross-slotted arm, K, having 
view of the vibrating arm which carries the 
cutting and punching mechanism. Fig. 4 rep 
graduations at each side, and carrying the 
resents a front view of the machine; Fig. 5, a 
punches Z for piercing the slate. To the front 
detached view of the punch-gage; Fig. 6, a 
of the frame A is pivoted a frame, A, which 
detached view of a portion of the adjustable 
has secured to it a half-frame, B, provided 
seat; Fig. 7, a detached view of one of the 
with semicircular recesses C, and to said half 
slate-supports which set below the punches, 
frame is hinged a similar frame, D', which is 
adjustably connected to the frame B at one 
and Fig. 8 indicates a detached view of a 
portion of the seat-support. 
end by means of the bolt and set-screw E. 
The letter A indicates the frame of the ma 
The half-frame B has secured to it a seat, F, 
chine, which is provided with a central cross 
which may be adjusted to and from the ma 
rail, B, at the top, which is T-shaped in cross 
chine by setting it back and forth by the ad 
section, and has adjustably secured to it a justment of the half-frame, so as to cause the 
slide, C, provided with a clamping-screw, D, 
successive recesses to embrace the front rail 
by which it may be held in any desired ad 
of the seat-frame, and thus provide for the 
justed position. 
proper position of the operator in front of the 
The letter Eindicates the slate-rests, which 
machine. The seat-frame is supported at its 
are secured by means of the bolts F to the 
outer end by a vertical standard, G', and the 
slide G. The rests are arranged to turn upon 
frame and its appendages are so arranged as 
the bolts F, and are held in an adjusted in 
to be folded up on top of the machine When 
clining position by means of the ratcheted or 
not in use. The forward standards of the 
serrated seats G', which engage the similarly 
frame A are provided with rubber stops I for 
the frame K, carrying the slate-punches, to 
ratcheted bases of the slate-rests, as shown in 
Fig. 1 of the drawings. The slate-rests are 
limit their movement. 
connected by means of the pivoted links H 
In operation the slate is adjusted between 
with the slide C, so that the slate-rests may be 
the slate-rests, and upon the front supports 
simultaneously adjusted at the same angle at 
the rests as well as the knives to cut the slates 
90 
95 
IOC) 
75 
IC) 
25 
35 
45 
330,248 
to the proper shape, while the punches and 
front rests are adjusted to pierce the slate at 
the proper points. 
The slate-rests E may be either ratcheted or 
5 plain, and the slide C and links H may be 
omitted, if desired, without changing the spirit 
of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
In combination with the rests adapted to 
hold the slate, the adjusting-slides connected 
IO IS 
to the adjustable gage by means of pivoted 
rods, the ratcheted or serrated seats whereby 
the rests may be held, and the clamping-bolts I5 
whereby the parts may be securely clamped 
together, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRANCIS R. MARKS. 
Witnesses: 
F. C. SEMPLE, 
E. N. HARWARD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330348.txt	(No Model.) 
J. R. POLLOCK, 
SUSPENDERS, 
No. 330,348. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1885. 
WITWESSES 
7, ca. 62-e---e-G 
/4-02-2- 
 
IWVEWTOR 
Aveo (26.4% 
dily o/2 - 6 (24-ceo/e/2a 
Attorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES R. POLLOCK, OF MANSFIELD, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
JOSEPH. P. RUMMEL OF SAME PLACE. 
SUSPENDERS. 
SPE 
C:ICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 330,348, dated November 10, 1885. 
Application filed April 14, 1885. 
Serial No. 162,224. (No model.) 
shoulder-straps and prevent the web from pull 
ing out of the clip when subjected to strain. 
C represents the back-button connecting 
straps, which are formed at their contiguous 
ends in the same manner as are the shoulder 
straps, and are placed within the clip, the lat 
ter serving to hold or bind together the shoul 
der and button straps in the manner indicated 
by Figs. 1 and 2. 
By the means of my improvement I am en 
abled to produce an extremely cheap article, 
which will also be strong and durable, and not 
liable to pull to pieces, as where the parts are 
stitched together. The web at its juncture with 
the clip also forms a pad, which rests against the 
body of the wearer and prevents any chafing 
or injury to the wearer by the metallic strip. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
5 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE MOORHOUSE, 
LEWIS REEDE. 
S- 
The combination, with the webs A and the 55 
r 
button-straps C, having their respective ad 
jacent ends turned outwardly and in juxtapo 
sition with each other, of the metallic clip B, 
having its edges turned inwardly, so as to em- 6c 
brace the said outwardly-turned edges of the 
web and button-straps and hold the same se 
curely together, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 65 
. 
JAMES R. POLLOCK. 
IO 
To all, whon, it navy concern: 
Re it known that I, JAMES R. POLLOCK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mans 
field, in the county of Richland and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Suspenders, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in that class of suspenders in which the 
shuulder-straps and the back-button connect 
ing-straps are secured together by a metallic 
clip; and it has for its objects to provide an 
improved connection for said straps, whereby 
they may be secured together in such manner 
as not to cha?e or irritate the back of the wear 
er, as more fully hereinafter specified. These 
objects I attain by the means illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which - 
Figure 1 represents a back view of the shoul 
der-straps and button connecting-straps and 
the binding-clip by which they are secured to 
gether. Fig. 2 represents a detached view of 
the clip. Fig. 3 represents a cross-section of 
the clip, shoulder-straps, and back-button 
connecting-Straps. 
The letter A indicates the shoulder-straps, 
which are formed of strips of webbing or other 
lmaterial, cut at their contiguous ends so that 
3o they will diverge at a proper angle to pass com 
fortably over the shoulders of the wearer. 
The letter B indicates a clip constructed of 
sheet metal, folded as shown in Fig. 2, the ad 
jacent free edges of the same being serrated or 
35 indented, so as to bite into the web forming the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330450.txt	(No Model.) 
E WESTON, 
ELECTRIC LAMP, 
No. 330,450. 
 
Patented Nov. 17, 1885, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD WESTON, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE UNITED 
STATES ELECTRIC LIGHTING COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRC LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 330,450, dated November 17, 1885. 
Application filed February 12, 1885. Serial No. 155,666. 
(No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWARD WESTON, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, and a resi 
dent of Newark, in the county of Essex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Electric Lamps, 
of which the following is a specification, ref. 
erence being had to the drawing accompany 
ing and forming a part of the same. 
In a patent granted to me November 14, 
1882, No. 267,474, I have shown and described 
an electric-arc lamp in which two sets of car 
bons are operated and controlled by a single 
set of feed-magnets, the current being shifted 
from the first set of carbons to the second, 
through the instrumentality of an electro-mag. 
net, in a derived circuit normally open, but 
closed by the contact of a stop carried by the 
gravitating carbon rod of the first set of car 
bons with a fixed contact-point, 
To this form of lamp my present invention 
relates; and it consists in an apparatus operat 
ing upon a different plan for accomplishing 
the same result, and which, from the nature 
of its mode of operation, is capable of a much 
Wider application to lamps of other forms. 
According to my present invention I em 
ploy substantially the same mechanical con 
struction of feeding and shifting devices as 
in the patent referred to. In lieu of the means 
for closing the circuit through the magnet 
controlling the shifting devices, however, 
which I previously employed, I use the stop 
On the carbon rod of the set of carbons first to 
be consumed simply as a means of arresting 
the descent of said rod at a predetermined 
pointin its path, and for sustaining its weight, 
the shifting-magnet being operated, whether 
directly or indirectly, by the diversion of cur 
rent above a certain normal limit through a 
closed shunt or derived circuit around the 
lamp, which is occasioned by the arrest of 
the carbon rod by its stop and the elonga 
tion of the arc by the consumption of the 
carbons consequent thereon. To do this I 
have a closed derived or shunt circuit of high 
resistance around the lamp, and in this the 
shifting - magnet may be included. I pre 
fer, however, on account of the greater cer 
tainty of action obtained thereby, to employ 
a relay-magnet in this circuit, which shall 
65 
close the circuit from whatever source it may 
be derived through the shifting-magnet, and 
this form I have illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawing, in which I have shown those 55 
parts of a lamp that enter directly into the 
invention, the lamp-frame supports and the 
like being omitted, inasmuch as they differ in 
no essential particular from those described 
in my said former patent. 
A and B designate the carbon rods or hold 
ers of a double lamp; C and D, the clamps or 
clutches for controlling the movement of the 
same; E, the electro-magnet for controlling the 
feed and adjustment of the carbons; F, the ar 
mature supported by springs ff, and to which 
the clamps C and D are connected by the links 
ab. G is a pivoted plate that forms the floor or 
rest for tripping the clutches. It is provided 
or formed with two raised parts, cd, with a bev 
eled edge, which by the movement of the plate 
Gare brought under the tails of the clutches, 
or the ends of screws g g passing through the 
same. A spring, K, bears upon the plate G 
and exerts a force tending to shift the plate to 
a position in which the Screw of rests upon the 
raised part c and the screw of upon the face 
of the plate. The plate is held in a position 
opposed by the spring by a pivoted catch, n, 
that forms the armature of a magnet, N. An-8o 
other pivoted catch, L, connected with the 
plate G, locks under a flange, M, on the car 
bon rod B and holds the carbon carried there 
by out of contact with its lower carbon until 
the catch in releases the plate G. At some 85 
convenient point a magnet, O, is attached to 
the lamp-frame and provided with an arma 
ture, o, adjustable by means of a Spring, p. 
The armature has front and back stops, m. 
m". The feed magnet or magnets E are here 
shown in dotted ines, and may be of any 
kind-as, for example, the Ordinary type of 
compound or differential magnets, the main 
coils being in circuit R from the binding post 
P to the frame of the lamp, or by the usual 
means to the carbon rods. The derived-cir 
cuit coils are in a circuit, , from post P to 
post P, and as the armature O may be oper 
ated by any closed shunt of high resistance, I 
insert the magnet which controls it in this 
circuit. The magnet N is included in a de 
rived circuit of high resistance formed by a 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
330,450 
IO 
wire, S, from post P to the front stop, m, and 
by a Wire, S', from post P to the armature 0. 
The operation is as follows: The parts be 
ing adjusted as shown in the drawing, the 
5 carbons, of which the rod A carries the posi 
tive, are fed and consumed, while the others 
are not moved, for the reason that the clutch 
C, with its screw resting on a lower floor than 
that upon which rests the screw of clutch D, 
Will grip and release its carbon rod while the 
clamp D is held out of action. When the 
carbons are in this way consumed to a certain 
point, a stop, T, on the carbon rod A comes 
down into contact with the stationary cross 
piece V of the lamp-frame. A further down 
Ward feed of the rod A being thus prevented, 
the arc gradually elongates as the consump 
tion of carbon continues and increases in re 
sistance. This diverts a greater amount of 
current through the circuit r, which, when it 
has imparted a magnetism to the magnet that 
Controls the movement of the armature o suf. 
ficient to overcome the adjusted tension of the 
spring p, draws the armature over against the 
Stop 72, and closes the circuit through the 
magnet N. By this means the catch q2 is 
drawn up, the plate G shifted, and the second 
Set of carbons dropped into contact. This 
also throws clutch C out of action and brings 
clutch D into action, so that the arc will con 
tinue between the second set of carbons. 
This invention is applicable to lamps of 
many various kinds of feed mechanism and 
shifting devices. In illustrating the same by 
means of the most practicalle devices for car 
lying out the invention of which I am aware, 
and applied to a special form of lamp, I do 
not confine myself either to the specific means 
shown or to the special form of lamp to which 
they are applied. 
3O 
35 
What I claim is 
I. In an electric lamp, the combination, with 
a single magnet or set of magnets and two sets 
of carbons and feed mechanism therefor, of 
45 devices for bringing into operation the two 
sets of carbons successively, and an electro 
magnet in a constantly-closed derived circuit 
around the lamp, adapted to operate the said 
devices upon the attainment of an attractive 
force caused by a given diversion of current 50 
through the derived circuit, as set forth. 
2. ln an electric lamp the combination, with 
a single magnet or set of magnets and two sets 
of carbons and feed mechanism therefor, of 
devices for operating the two sets of carbons 55 
Successively, a shifting-magnet for operating 
Said devices, and a magnet and armature in 
a constantly-closed derived circuit around the 
lamp, for closing the circuit of the shifting 
magnet, as set forth. 
3. In an electric lamp, the combination, with 
a single magnet or set of magnets and two Sets 
of carbons and feed mechanism therefor, of 
devices for bringing into operation the two 
sets of carbons successively, a shifting-magnet 
in an open derived circuit, for operating said 
devices, and a relay-magnet and armature in 
a constantly-closed derived circuit, for closing 
the circuit of the shifting-magnet, as set forth. 
a singie feed-magnet or set of magnets and ar- 
mature, two sets of carbons, and clamps or . 
clutches for controlling the feed Of the same, 
alnd connected with the al'mature of the feed 
magnets, and a pivoted floor of varying height 
for tripping said clutches, of an electro-mag 
net in an open derived circuit, for shifting the 
floor, a magnet in a constantly-closed derived 
circuit, for closing the circuit through the 
shifting-magnet upon a given lengthening of So 
the arc, and a stop for arresting the feed of 
the carbons first to be consumed, and thereby 
producing the elongation of the arc at the 
propel time, as set forth. 
my hand this 9th day of February, 1SS5. 
4. In an electric lamp, the combination, with 7o 
. 
In testimoy whereof I have hereunto set 85 
65 
EDWARD WESTON. 
Witnesses: 
FRANR. N. CRANE, 
JAS. L. RIKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330551.txt	| 
(No Model.) 
F. BOARDMAN. 
PIVOTING CHUCK, 
No. 330,551, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1885. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
N 
% 
R. 
, 
2. 
3. 5. 
\X/i E. E. E. s B. S. 
ILVE E O P. 
6%ay 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographor, washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FREDERICK BOARDMAN, OF MANSFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
PWOT N G CHUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 330,551, dated November 17, 1885. 
Application filed July 23, 1884. Serial No. 138,521. 
(No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK BOARD 
MAN, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Mansfield, in the county of Bristol and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Pivoting-Chuck, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
chucks for watch-makers' lathes; and it con 
sists, first, in pivoting the clamping-jaws in 
radial slots in the body of the chuck, and in 
the use of a sliding tapering sleeve to assist 
in the adjustment of the jaws and to bind 
them when in position; also in the use of in 
dependent adjusting-screws in the backs of 
the jaws; also in the combination of the hol 
low spindle and pump-center for bringing the 
work to adjustment between the pump-center 
and jaws, with a binding-screw for holding it 
to its adjustment. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
a chuck embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a longitudinal section. Fig. 3 is an end view. 
A is the body of the chuck, having three or 
more radial slots in which the jaws a a a are 
pivoted. The backs of the jaws are beveled 
off at a, and the sliding sleeve B is tapered, 
so that when the sleeve is moved forward by 
the following-nut C it will operate against the 
inclined backs of the jaws to close them and 
clamp them upon the Work. 
d is a guide-pin to prevent the sleeve B 
from revolving. The adjusting-screws b b b 
serve as independent centering devices by 
which the jaws may be moved singly into the 
position required and nice adjustment secured. 
It is preferable to make a thin slot, c, in the 
backs of the jaws, the adjusting-screws b being 
a little larger than the screw-hole, so that 
there is a constant spring - pressure on the 
screw to prevent it working loose. 
The operation of mounting the work is as 
follows: The shaft or pump-center l is pressed 
down in the centering-cup, compressing the 
spring S until the end of the shaft is sunk 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
level with the body of the chuck, when it is 
locked in its place by the binding-screw h. 
The sliding sleeve B is moved back, so that 
the jaws may be opened to admit of inserting 
the work. The staff of the Wheel is then in 
serted on the end of the pump-centert, and the 
binding screw h turned to release the pump 
center, so that it may move forward and carry 
the wheel into position. The jaws are then 
brought forward to the work by the sleeve B 
and following-nut C, and centered by adjust 
ing-screws b. When adjusted as desired, the 
pump-center is again locked by the binding 
screw h. By making a narrow slit, m, in the 
body of the chuck a slight spring is given to 
the part p through which the arborg passes. 
The end of arborg bears against the body on 
the farther side of the slit m, so that by turn 
ing the Screw the part p may be sprung back 
to cause the back of the jaw to fit more or 
less closely in the slot. 
What I claim, is 
1. A chuck having three or more clamping 
jaws pivoted in radial slots in the body of the 
chuck, and independent adjusting - screws, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a chuck, the clamping-jaws a, pivoted 
in radial slots, one end of the arborg being 
screwed into the yielding part p, constructed 
as described, all substantially as set forth. 
3. A chuck having three or more clamping 
jaws pivoted in radial slots in the body of the 
chuck, sliding sleeve B, and adjusting-screws 
b bb, substantially as described. 
4. In a chuck, the combination of jaws at a 
a, sliding sleeve B, and following-nut C, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
5. In a chuck, the combination of jaws a a 
a, adjusting-screws b b b, sliding sleeve B, 
pump-center l, spring S, and binding-screw h, 
substantially as described. 
FREDERICKBOARDMAN. 
55 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
JOHN R. SNOW, 
W. A. COPELAND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330651.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. WETHERILL. 
WINDOW SEAT BOX. 
No. 330,65l. 
Z 22, Z 
Patented Nov. 17, 1885. 
Z2-2 
 
  
 
Z2. 1 
 
WITNESSES 
2. 
-6. lea?yve? 
INVENTOR: 
Z%2za 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
) 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HENRY WETHERILL OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
wiN Dow a SEAT BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 330,651, dated November 17, 1835. 
Application filed August 22, 1885. Serial No. 75,065. (No model.) 
- 
55 
65 
C of which or opening in the wall for the 
window has flaring upright sides c c, as shown 
in Fig. 4, then the lid B may either be a de 
tachable one, capable of being lifted on and 
off, or a sliding one along transverse Ways 
on the end portions of the box part, the sides 
c c not admitting of a lid hinged in the rear 
then being used; but whether the lid be an at 
tached or detachable one, or hinged or other 
wise connected, is of no importance so far as 
the invention is concerned, nor yet whether 
the ends did of the box part and lid form an 
approximately right-angular junction with 
the back edges of the box part and lid, as in 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3, or bend inward at their 
junction with said back edges, as shown in 
Fig. 4, to adapt them to the peculiarly-shaped 
window-casing shown in Fig. 4; but in each 
and every case the window-seat box is com 
posed of a hollow lower body or box part, A, 
the front of which may be of pronounced 
undulating profile, it having a deep interme 
diate recess, h, down its front, thereby expos 
ing six distinct sides, i i, in advance of its 
straight back k, and of a lid, B, of correspond 
ing configuration on its front and side mar 
ginal portions, whereby the entire seat is 
made to form two independent sittings, on 
which two persons may sit either with their 
backs to the window or sidewise relatively 
thereto, so as to face each other without twist 
ing the body or straining any member of it; 
or, when desired, sidewise, with their backs 
opposite one another, and so that in each side 
wise position relatively to the window the 
occupants of the twin seat may, if reading, 
receive the full benefit of the light from the 
window without obstruction by their persons. 
In this way the whole structure not only forms 
a box or convenient repository for various 
articles, but a twin seat and vis--vis or tte-a- 
tte of an improved or superior description. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- 
1. The within-described window-seat box, 
the same consisting of a hollow lower body or 
box part, A, having an intermediate recess, 
h, down its front, exposing six distinct sides, 
- 
75 
85 
90 
95 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. WETH 
ERILL, of Philadelphia, in the county of Phila 
delphia and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Window-Seat Boxes, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention consists in a new and useful 
combined seat and box designed to be placed 
Io within a sitting or other room, against or im 
mediately under the window, and in which 
the device not only forms a lidded box, in 
which articles of different kinds may be kept 
or stowed away, and also forms a seat for the 
I5 occupant or occupants of the room, but in 
which both the box or body part and lid are 
specially constructed to make a double seat 
that may be occupied by two personsin differ 
ent sitting positions relative to each other 
2O and the window with facility for their facing 
each other without twisting the body or strain 
ing any member of it, substantially as herein 
after shown and described. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
25 drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of a 
window-seat box embodying my invention 
3o and as applied to or immediately under a 
window, the box being represented as closed. 
Fig. 2 is a partly broken or sectional similar 
view showing the box with its lid thrown 
back or open; and Fig. 3 is a plan view of 
35 the device closed and showing its arrange 
ment to the window-casing, which is repre 
sented in section. Fig. 4 is a similar view to 
Fig. 3, showing the device as adapted to a 
window - casing of special or different con 
A is the body or box part of the device, 
and B its lid, which, in case of the device be 
ing used on the inside of a window the cas 
ing C of which is flush with the inside walls, 
45 as in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, or of a Window which 
sits within a square recess in the Wall, may 
be hinged in its rear to the box part, as at b 
b. When the article, however, is designed to 
be used on the inside of a window the casing 
4O struction. 
 
2 
330,651 
i i, in advance of its back k, and of a lid, B, having an intermediate recess, h, and adapted Io 
of corresponding configuration on its front and to accommodate two persons either with their 
side marginal portions, the whole forming a backs to the window or in different sidewise 
many-sided twin window-box seat adapted positions relatively thereto and facing each 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. In a combined window seat and box, the 
hollow body or box part A and its lid B con- 
structed to form a vis-a-vis or twin seat, gg, 
5 to be used as a vis-a-vis seat when desired, other, essentially as shown and described. 
WILLIAM HENRY WETHERILI. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. WATSON, 
A. RULON FOSTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330752.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. TAYLOR. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
DEVICE FOR REMOVING WAGON BODIES, 
No. 330,752, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1885. 
 
 
  
  
  
 
- - 
M 
--- 
.- 
3. - : 
e . o 
-- 
i - - r m - - - - 
WITNESSES 
Svows a.o.ork 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
J. B. TAYLOR, 
DEVICE FOR REMOVING WAGON BODIES. 
No. 330,752, 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 17, 1885. 
H 2 
azzliese 
S 
taaaaaaaa2a2a2a2a: eer 
XM 
gava, 
As 
s 
witness 
9%.2%. 
24 date. 
-z-42-4-96 
N. PETERs, Photo-tithographer, washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. TAYLOR, OF LA MONTE, MISSO URI. 
DEVICE FOR REMOVING WAGON BODIES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 330,752, dated November 17, 1885. 
Application filed August 15, 1885. Serial No. 174,510. (No model.) 
65 
ropes F extending outward from them for at 
tachment to the sides of the wagon. By draw 
ing upon rope D the body will be elevated, 
as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1. The pow 
er-wheel C is grooved around its circumfer- 55 
ence to receive the rope, and at suitable inter 
vals has outward-curved horns or guiding 
arms to prevent the rope from getting out of 
the groove. These horns are marked c'. This 
apparatus is not only useful to farmers, team- 6o 
sters, and other users of wagons and other ve 
hicles, but, as already stated, it may With 
good effect be employed in shops for suspend 
ing the body and gear while the wheels are off; 
and also it can be made use of to elevate Wagon 
bodies or other vehicles for painting, finish 
ing, or otherwise operating upon them; and, 
indeed, it will be found useful in any connec 
tion where heavy articles are to be raised for 
any purpose. The power-wheel being of con 
siderably larger diameter than the shaft, great 
leverage and purchase are afforded thereby, 
and by reason of the pulley E a horizontal 
draw is made to elevate the bed or other Ob 
ject. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
desire to claim, and Secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. An apparatus for hoisting heavy bodies, 
' 
consisting of the journaled shaft B, having the 8o 
drop-ropes attached near each end thereof, 
and the power-wheel C, mounted upon it, and 
the draw-rope D, secured to said power-wheel. 
2. The combination of the shaft B, journaled 
in frame A, having drop rope or ropes F, and 
a power-wheel, C, with curved horns or guides 
c c' on it, and a draw-rope, D, attached to said 
power-wheel. 
3. The combination of the journaled shaft 
B, having drop rope or ropes, a power-wheel 
mounted upon said shaft, a draw-rope secured 
to said power-wheel, and a pulley, E, secured 
to the frame at a lower point for the rope D 
to pass under, as set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two Witnesses. 
95 
75 
JOHN B, TAYLOR, 
Witnesses: 
JOHN AWARD, 
JAMES CHURCHILL. 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN B. TAYLOR, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at La 
Monte, in the county of Pettis and State of 
Missouri, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Devices for Removing 
Wagon-Bodies, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to apparatus for hoist 
ing wagon-beds and analogous heavy and large 
objects and suspending them at such a height 
as to be out of the way. 
The appliances which I have devised for this 
purpose consist of a journaled shaft held in 
the upper timbers of a wagon-shed or analo 
gous structure, having upon it a power-wheel 
with curved guiding-forks and a rope Secured 
round it and carried down to the Side of the 
building and passed over a pulley to be taken 
hold of by hand. This wheel by preference 
is placed near the mid-length of the shaft and 
is fixed thereto. Near the ends of the shaft 
ropes are fastened, which are let down to join 
branching ropes which reach out over and are 
secured to the sidies of the bed or some other 
convenient part. By drawing upon the power 
wheel the body of the Wagon will be elevated. 
The device may be applied upon a frame, 
as shown, which can be placed near a wheel 
wright or smith shop to hold up the Wagon 
while the wheels are off or being repaired and 
replaced. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
invention. 
Figure 1 is an end elevation, and Fig. 2 is 
a plan, of the apparatus. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in both figures. 
A represents the fixed frame, which, as above 
indicated, may be a part of a structure in which 
vehicles are kept or a frame especially pro 
vided. B is a shaft journaled in the end beams 
of the frame. Near its center it is provided 
with the power-wheel C, which is fixed to it, 
and has the rope D passed round and secured 
to it at one end, while the other end extends 
down under pulley E and out to be drawn 
upon by hand or other power. Near the ends 
of the shaft ropes FF are secured, with branch 
- 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330853.txt	(No Model.) 
W. W. R. OSENFIELD, 
PORTABLE DISINFECTING APPARATUS, 
y No. 330,853, 
c 
O 
O 
ey 
Patented Nov. 17, 1885. 
9 w w w 
w 
a 
 
N. peers, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM WOODWARD ROSENFIELD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR 
TO THE HOME WAPOR BATH AND DISINFECTOR COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
PORTABLE DISINFECTING A PPARATUS, 
SFECIE CATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 330,853, dated November 17, 1885, 
Application filed March 23, 1885. Serial No. 159,735. (No model.) 
O 
- 
Sale. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM W. RosEN 
FIELD, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at New York, county of New York, and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Portable Disin 
fecting Apparatus, fully described and rep 
resented in the following specification and the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of the 
It has been found necessary in all large 
towns and cities, in order to prevent the 
spread of contagious diseases, and in order 
also to preserve as far as possible the general 
health of the community, to provide not only 
for the disinfecting and purifying of houses 
and other places where contagious diseases 
have existed, but also for the disinfecting and 
purifying of all buildings and other places 
which, either from being overcrowded or in 
a filthy condition, or from any other cause, 
are likely to originate and promote the spread 
of disease. This work is usually performed 
by officers appointed for the purpose, and in 
the case of houses or other places which are 
infected with contagious diseases-such as 
small-pox, cholera, fevers and the like-the 
disinfecting is accomplished by burning or 
vaporizing some suitable disinfectant on or 
about the premises, so that the smoke or va 
por produced carries the disinfectant into all 
places where contagion exists. In addition 
to this some suitable liquid disinfectant is 
Sometimes sprinkled about the premises. In 
the case of buildings and other places which 
are not infected, but are in such condition 
as to be likely to originate disease, the disin 
fecting, or, more properly Speaking, the puri 
fying, is commonly accomplished by simply 
sprinkling some suitable disinfectant about 
the premises. 
Inlarge and densely-populated cities, where 
great numbers of people live in crowded and 
filthy buildings, and particularly at times 
when contagious diseases are prevalent, or in 
time of an epidemic, the work of properly dis 
infecting and purifying the infected and filthy 
places is one of considerable magnitude, and, 
owing to the poor facilities for the work which 
have heretofore existed, has frequently been 
imperfectly performed, and the general health 
of the community has suffered in consequence. 
It is the object of the present invention to 
provide a simple and portable apparatus by 
which an infected or filthy building or other 
place can be quickly and thoroughly disin 
fected or purified, and by which the disin 
fectant can be applied either in liquid or va 
por form, as may be found most desirable and 
efficacious in any particular case. 
To this end the invention consists in an ap 
paratus which is constructed and operates in 
a manner which will now be explained, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation partly in sec 
tion of the complete apparatus. Fig. 2 is a 
sectional elevation of the medicating or tinct 
uring apparatus thereof, which will be here 
inafter referred to, and Fig. 3 is a view of the 
foraminous nozzle through which the disin 
fectant is applied. 
Referring to said figures, it is to be under 
stood that the apparatus in its most complete 
form consists of a force-pump, B, a feeding ap 
paratus, C, by which the water passing through 
the pump is properly impregnated or charged 
with a suitable disinfectant, a heater, D, by 
which the water containing the disinfectant is 
properly heated for use, a hose, E, connecting 
the pump with a water-supply, a hose, F, 
through which the water containing the disin 
fectant is conducted to the place of use, and 
a suitable vehicle, G, upon the platform H of 
which the several parts just mentioned are 
mounted. 
The pump B may be of any suitable form, 
either single or duplex, and arranged either 
vertically or horizontally, and may be oper 
ated either by hand or by any suitable motor 
mounted upon the vehicle. The pump will 
preferably, however, be a direct-acting steam 
pump, as illustrated in the present case. When 
the pump is of this form, the vehicle will usual 
ly be provided with a suitable boiler, as A, for 
supplying steam for operating the pump, 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
 
330,853 
75 
though in some cases where the streets are pro 
vided with steam-pipes the boiler may be omit 
ted, the steam for driving the pump being 
drawn from the pipes in the streets. 
The boiler A, when one is provided, may be 
ofany suitable construction, but will preferably 
be of the vertical form shown, and be provided 
at its base with a fire-box or furnace, 15, al 
ranged below the platform H of the vehicle, the 
boiler and furnace being arranged and mount 
ed in substantially the same manner as in an or 
dinary steam fire-engine. The steam from the 
boiler A is conducted to the engine or to the 
steam end 16 of the pump B through a pipe, 
10, which is arranged in the usual manner and 
is provided with the usual throttle-valve, 11. 
It is to be remarked, in passing, that the size 
of the pump B is considerably exaggerated in 
the drawings for the purpose of illustration. 
The suction-pipe 9 of the pump proper, 17, 
is connected by a detachable coupling, 8, with 
the hose E, which is of suitable length and is 
provided at its opposite end with a coupling, 
12, by which it can be attached to a hydrant 
or other source of water-supply. 
The feeding apparatus C is of substantially 
the construction shown and described in 
United States Letters Patent No. 266,530, 
heretofore granted to me, and consists, essen 
tially, of a chamber, 19, for containing a solid 
disinfectant, a chamber, 21, for containing a liq 
uid disinfectant, and a chamber, 20, for contain 
ing a volume of air to prevent the water from 
passing upward and mingling with the liquid 
disinfectant contained in the chamber 21. The 
chamber 21 is air-tight, and communicates 
With the chamber 20 by means of a glass pipe, 30, 
and two ducts, 6 7. The duct 7 extends from the 
pipe 30 to the bottom of the chamber 21, and 
affords a passage through which the liquid 
disinfectant contained in the chamber 21 flows 
downward into the chamber 20 to mingle with 
The duct 7 is provided with a 
the water. 
suitable cock or valve, 5, by which the flow 
of the liquid from the chamber 21 can be 
properly regulated. The duct 6 extends from 
the pipe 30 to the bottom of the chamber 21, 
where it communicates with a pipe, 29, which 
extends upward in the chamber 21 and termi 
nates at a point above the surface of the liquid 
therein. The chamber 21 is provided at its 
top with a suitable opening, through which it 
can be filled, and this opening is hermetically 
closed by a screw-plug, 28. The chamber 19 
is provided at its top with a removable cap, 
31, and upon its interior with a removable 
perforated cup, 32, the purpose of which will 
hereinafter appear. 
This feeding apparatus, as before stated, is 
of the same general construction as that de 
scribed in my former Letters Patent, to which 
reference is made for a more detailed descrip 
tion of its construction and operation. 
The feeding apparatus will in practice usu 
ally be considerably larger in proportion to 
the other parts than is shown in the drawings. 
The discharge-pipe 13 of the pump 17 enters 
the chamber 19 of the feeding apparatus, and 
this chamber is connected by a pipe, 14, with 
the air-chamber 20 at a point near its bottom, 
and this latter chamber is in turn connected 
by a pipe, 18, with the top of the heater D. 
The pipes 13 18 will preferably be provided 
with throttle-valves, as 22 23, by which they 
can be closed, if desired. The heater D is of 
any suitable form, and is provided at a point 
near its botton with an outlet, 25, which is 
controlled by a cock, 4, and is provided with 
a coupling, 3, to which is connected the hose 
F, which is of considerable length, and is pro 
vided at its opposite end with a coupling, 1, 
to which can be attached a foraminous nozzle, 
as N. This nozzle may be of any desired or 
suitable form, but will be so constructed as to 
deliver a large number of small jets. The 
form shown in Fig. 3, consisting of a number 
of perforated pipes, 26, connected to a T 
shaped pipe, 33, is well suited for the 
pur 
The pipe 10 is provided with a branch, 
pose. 
27, which connects with a coil, 24, located in 
the heater D, and having an outlet, 2, near 
the bottom of the heater, and through which 
steam from the boiler is allowed to circulate, 
so as to heat the water containing the disin 
fectant. 
The operation of the apparatus is as follows: 
Assuming that the necessary steam-pressure 
exists in the boiler A, and that the apparatus 
has been brought into the neighborhood of the 
building or other place which it is desired to 
disinfect or purify, the hose E will be coupled 
to the inlet-pipe 9 of the pump 17 and to the 
hydrant or other source of water-supply." The 
disinfectant, if in liquid form, will be placed 
in the chamber 21 of the feeding apparatus 
and the chamber then closed. The hose F will 
be coupled to the outlet 25 of the heater B, 
and the nozzle N, after being secured to the 
coupling 1, will be carried to the point or near 
to the point where the disinfectant is to be 
applied. The pump will then be set in oper 
ation and the valve 5 opened, so as to allow 
the proper quantity of the liquid disinfectant 
contained in the chamber 21 to flow down 
ward through the duct 7 and the body of air 
confined in the chamber 20 and mingle with 
the water as it is forced by the pump 17 
through the pipes 1314 18 into the heater I, 
and thus impregnate or charge the water, so 
as to form a disinfecting-mixture of suitable 
strength for use for disinfecting purposes. As 
the water charged with the disinfectant passes 
downward through the heater ID it will become 
heated by the steam in the coil 24, 
that 
when it is discharged through the nozzle N it 
will be in the proper condition to operate 
most efficiently. 
If it is desired to apply the disinfectant in 
liquid form, the perforations in the nozzle N 
may be comparatively large, so that the water 
charged with the disinfectant will be delivered 
in the form of a shower or spray. If, on the 
other hand, it is desired to apply the disin 
fectant in the form of vapor, a nozzle having 
- 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
IO 
25 
45 
65 
 
330,853 
3 
What I claim is-- 
1. In a portable disinfecting apparatus, the 85 
very small perforations will be used. When for heating the water containing the disin 
fectant, or into which the disinfectant is to be 
this is done and the water charged with the 
introduced, may be provided with a furnace 
disinfectant is of a temperature of from 130 
or any other suitable means for that purpose. 
to 200 Fahrenheit, it will be largely con 
So, also, in some cases metal pipes may be 7O 
5 verted into vapor as it issues through the per 
used in place of the hose E. F. In some cases 
forations of the nozzle and comes in contact 
the pump may be omitted and the pressure in 
With the air, and thus the disinfectant can be 
the water-pipes be depended upon to force 
applied in this form. The small amount of 
the water through the heater and the hose F. 
the water not vaporized will be caught in any 
So, also, in some cases the feeding apparatus 75 
suitable vessel placed under the nozzle N. 
may be omitted, the suction-pipe of the pump 
By means of the pump B and the hose F the 
being in such case connected to the outlet of 
water charged with the disinfectant can be 
the heater, and the hose F connected to the 
forced to almost any height, so that it can be 
discharge-pipe of the pump. In such case 
used in any part of a building that may be de 
the water previously charged with the disin- 8o 
sired, or if a hose of sufficient length is pro 
fectant will be supplied to the heater and will 
vided it can be delivered at almost any dis 
be drawn therefrom by the pump and forced 
tance from the apparatus. 
through the hose F to the place of use. 
If the disinfectant which is to be used is of 
solid instead of liquid form, it will be placed 
in the cup 32 of the chamber 19, instead of in 
the chamber 21. The operation will then be 
the same as before described, except that the 
water will become charged or impregnated 
with the disinfectant by coming in contact 
with and dissolving a portion of it in passing 
through the chamber 19, instead of by min 
gling with it in passing through the cham 
ber 20. 
The apparatus just described, in addition to 
its utility for disinfecting and purifying in 
fected and filthy houses and other similar 
places, may be employed for purifying infected 
ships. The vehicle G will preferably be pro 
vided with suitable reels, as K, upon which 
the hose EF can be wound for transportation 
and when not in use. The vehicle may also be 
provided with a box or bin, as L, in which a 
suitable quantity of fuel can be carried for 
use in heating the water in the boiler A, and 
also with a tank or reservoir, M, in which a 
quantity of the disinfectant can be carried. 
The apparatus shown in the drawings illus 
trates the invention in its most complete and 
desirable form. It is to be understood, how 
ever, that the relative arrangement of the 
parts and the construction of some of the 
parts may be varied considerably, and also 
that some of the parts may be omitted with 
out departing from the essential features of 
the invention. The heater D may be so ar 
ranged that the water will be heated before it 
reaches the pump, if preferred. So, also, the 
feeding apparatus, instead of being inter 
posed between the pump and the heater, may 
be arranged to charge the water with the dis 
infectant before it reaches the pump, or it 
may be arranged to charge the water with the 
disinfectant after the water leaves the heater. 
If preferred, the chamber 19 of the feeding 
apparatus may be placed beneath the cham 
ber 20, as shown in my former Letters Pat 
ent; or if it is not desired to capacitate the 
apparatus to employ a solid disenfectant the 
chamber 19 may be omitted. The heater D, 
65 instead of being provided with a steam-coil 
combination, with a heater arranged to heat 
a quantity of water charged or impregnated 
with a disinfectant, of a hose or pipe arranged 
to conduct the heated water from the heater 
to the place of use, and a pump arranged to 90 
force the water from the heater through the 
hose, the whole being mounted upon a suita 
ble vehicle, substantially as described. 
2. In a portable disinfecting apparatus, the 
combination, with the feeding apparatus C, 95 
arranged to charge or impregnate a stream of 
water with a disinfectant, of a heater ar 
ranged to heat the water, and a hose or pipe 
arranged to conduct the heated water from 
the heater to the place of use, the whole be- ICO 
ing mounted upon a suitable vehicle, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a portable disinfecting apparatus, the 
combination, with the feeding apparatus C, 
arranged to charge or impregnate a stream of IO5 
water with a disinfectant, of a heater arranged 
to heat the water, a hose or pipe arranged to 
conduct the heated water from the heater to 
the place of use, and a pump arranged to 
force the water from the heater through the IIO 
hose, the whole being mounted upon a suita 
ble vehicle, substantially as described. 
4. The herein-described portable disinfect 
ing apparatus, consisting of the force-pump 
B, and a suitable motor for operating the II 5 
same, the feeding apparatus C, arranged to 
charge or impregnate a stream of water with 
a disinfectant, a heater, D, arranged to heat 
the water, and the hose E F, the whole being 
mounted upon a suitable vehicle, and ar- (2O 
ranged to co-operate, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
J. A. How EY, 
T. H. PALMER. 
WILLIAM WOODWARD ROSEN FIELD. 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US330953.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 330,953, 
A, B, WOODWARD 
BRICK MACHINE, 
3. Sheets 
Sheet 1, 
 
WITWESSES 
Z-42 
IWWEWTOR 
46.46%2-26eezezzo 
Attorneys 
(No Model.) 
A. B. WOODWARD. 
BRICK MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 330,953, 
. 
, s , 's 
Patented Now, 24, 1885. 
is 
214 s NYN 
R 
E6 SERE 2 
 
 
63 % 3S 
3% N 33.3% NN 
M N 2 NN 
s N 33) N s NN 
R. N. N. 
% 31 %3% N 
s 
Y L. NN 
is & 2 23. 
Sir FN 
set 
s tZ, Willili, ZZ 
 
 
s 
s 
s 
3. 
 
 
w 
w 
YS 
Rs 
( 
Wayaya 
SaaSaaSSSN 
l 
s 
N 
N N N N N N 
aS N 
Nes still 
s A. Y. 
Seif its 
- ee2 
22:S 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
s 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
WITWESSES 
c1834; 
WWEWTOR 
2zztowz-z-C/ 
Attorneys 
(No Model.) 
No. 330,953. 
 
 
N 
 
w 
 
N N 
 
  
 
 
A. B. WOODWARD. 
BRICK MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 24, 1885. 
IWWEWTOR 
62.66(42a24/2226, 
47 f 
f 
Attorneys 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABEL B. WOODWARD, OF NASHVILLE, TENNESSEE. 
BRCK - VACH NE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Iletters Patent No. 330,953, dated November 24, 1885. 
Application filed September 29, 1885. Serial No. 178,555. 
(No model.) 
- 
O 
15 
25 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ABEL B. WoODWARD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Nash 
ville, in the county of Davidson and State of 
Tennessee, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Brick-Machines, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in brick-making machinery; and the novelty 
consists in the peculiar construction, arrange 
ment, combination, and adaptation of the va 
rious parts for Service, substantially as here 
inafter fully described, and specifically pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation of my improved brick-machine. Fig. 
2 is an end elevation. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
transverse section through one set of the 
plungers and their operating mechanisms on 
the line at a of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical 
longitudinal section on the liney y of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a detail view of the mechanism for 
automatically returning the upper compres 
Sion-plunger to its normal position to be acted 
upon by the cams. Fig. 6 is a detail view of 
the hopper and its actuating mechanism. Fig. 
7 is a detail view of the gage. 
Fig. 8 is a 
side view of the lower cam, and Fig. 9 is a 
view showing my preferred form of driving or 
sprocket chain. 
Like letters of reference in the several fig 
ures of the accompanying drawings denote 
The invention is especially designed as an 
improvement in that class of brick-making 
machinery known to the art as reciprocating 
brick-machines;' and it has for its objects, 
among other things, to provide for the bottom 
or lower platen of the molds or dies by so ar 
ranging and timing the movements of the lower 
or expelling plunger that its die shall form 
the bottom to Said molds while the material 
is being fed thereto and the upper compression 
piunger is acting on the material in said molds, 
after which the expelling-plunger forces the 
compressed and formed brick out of the molds. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide improved means for automatically oper 
atting the reciprocating hopper; to provide 
scrapers for cleaning the faces of the plungers 
from any material that may adhere thereto; 
to provide means for automatically returning 
the compression-plungers from the molds When 
released by the depressing-cams, and to com 
bine simplicity with great strength and dura 
bility in the construction, and which shall be 
thoroughly effective and automatic ill Opera 
tion and without any undue strain or Wear 
upon the several parts of the machine. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, A des 
ignates the frame of the machine, which com 
prises four upright posts or pillars, A, Se 
cured or bolted at their lower ends upon 
beams A", and connected, at their upper and 
lower ends by horizontal beams or bars A, 
and intermediately between such upper and 
lower beams by horizontal beams A". Bolts 
are passed through the posts or pillars, and 
have their ends threaded to receive nuts (t, to 
tighten the tension under which the frame is 
held together. 
Bdesignates the molds, arranged in the plane 
of and secured in any suitable manner to the 
beams A, and arranged in series in a hori 
zontal plane. The molds B are provided With 
guides b, which depend from their lower Sur 
faces at the side edges and ends thereof, and 
between these guides moves the frame of the 
expelling-plunger C, arranged below the molds 
and adapted to be forced upwardly therein. 
D designates the upper compression plun 
ger, arranged above the plane of the molds 
and adapted to be forced downwardly therein. 
E designates a shaft journaled in proper 
journal boxes or bearings, e, secured to the 
lower horizontal beams of the machine-frame. 
This shaft E carries two cam-wheels, E, near 
its middle, beneath the reciprocating expel 
ling-plunger, and at its ends it projects be-, 
yond the frame A and carries a sprocket. 
wheel, E, at each end, one of the sprocket 
wheels having a crank-pin, e, for the attach 
ment of a driving-piston from a steam-engine 
or other motor, thus making the shaft E the 
driving-shaft. 
F designates a shaft arranged in the plane 
of the shaft E and journaled or mounted in 
boxes.f, secured to upper horizontal beams of 
the main frame, said shaft being provided with 
cams F, arranged at different angles to their 
75 
95 
OO 
35 corresponding parts. 
5O 
330,953 
IO 
25 
35 
. 4O 
45 
5C) 
shaft than the cams of the shaft E, and to work 
or operate on their plungers at a different 
time. This shaft F is extended beyond its 
bearings in the main frame, and carries a 
sprocket-wheel, F, at each end, similar in con 
struction and size to the sprocket-wheels of 
the shaft E, with which they are geared or 
connected by a sprocket-chain, G, the pre 
ferred form of which I illustrate in detail in 
Fig. 9. The lower expelling-plunger, C, com 
prises a bar, c, having a series of platens, c', 
on its upper surface, and on its lower surface 
it is provided with depending arms c, which 
are arranged between the guides b of the molds 
and are free to slide or reciprocate up and 
down therein. 
c c' designate friction or bearing rolls 
loosely or rotatively mounted in the lower ends 
of arms c' of the expelling-plunger, and nor 
mally kept in contact with the cams E, the 
frame of the expelling-plunger being drawn 
downwardly by gravity until its bearing fric 
tional rolls c' come in contact with the cams 
E, by which said plunger is held in position 
and reciprocated to perform its office or duty 
in expelling or forcing the compressed brick 
from the molds B. 
The upper compression-plunger, D, is ar 
ranged between guides or ways D, secured to 
the upper horizontal beams, A' A', above the 
plane of the molds B, to leave an intermediate 
space for the passage of a reciprocating hop 
per, I, said guides D' receiving the frame of 
the compression - plunger. 
This plunger is 
similar in its construction to the expelling 
plunger. It has a bar. or platen, d, having 
projecting dies d on its lower surface and 
guide-arms d'arranged between the guides D', 
the upper ends of said arms d being bifur 
cated to embrace the shaft F, with which they 
are arranged in close juxtaposition. 
d designates friction or bearing rolls pivoted 
or hung loosely in the guide-arms d", above 
the bar d thereof, and adapted to be operated 
upon by the cams F to force the dies of the 
platen into the molds to compress the mate 
rial fed thereto by the hopper. 
The guides D are provided with protecting 
and guiding strips or walls at their sides, as 
shown, and the shafts of the rollers d are pro 
jected through vertical slots f', formed or cut 
in the end guides, D', and receive a friction 
roller, f', the office and function of which will 
appear more fully hereinafter. 
The vibrating or reciprocating hopper I 
comprises two casings and chambers at right 
angles to each other, to receive the clay or 
other material from a conducting-spout, said 
hopper I having supporting-bars i at its ends, 
arranged to bear on the upper surface of the 
mold at the side edges thereof, and work in 
guides I, secured to the molds, as shown. . 
J designates a rock-shaft journaled in bear 
ings j, secured to the frame A, and having 
arms J at each end projecting inwardly, and 
arranged in the plane of rotation to be struck 
or operated by curved operating-plates K, se 
90 
95 
cured to each of the sprocket-wheels of the 
shaft E. The arms J are arranged at differ 
ent angles to their supporting-shaft J, and are 
each provided with a loosely-mounted fric 
tion-wheel, f', adapted to be successively struck 
or operated by the arms of the sprocket-wheels 
for the purpose of forcing and retracting the 
hopper I forward and backward from the 
molds. The rock-shaft J is connected with 
the hopper I by means of upright bars or 
standards L., arranged at each side of the main 
frame, and having an opening in its upper 
end, and through this opening of each of the 
bars L passes the outer threaded end of an 
arm, L', which receives the two nuts e", ar 
ranged to bear on opposite sides of the slotted 
end of the bar L, to adjustably connect the 
said bar to the hopper I to vary or regulate 
the length of movement or stroke of the hop 
per, the inner ends of the arm L being piv 
otally connected at each side of the hopper 
thereto. The arms or plates K are arranged 
at a varying angle to the sprocket-wheels on 
which they are mounted, so as to be succes 
sively brought to strike against and oscillate 
the arms of the rock-shaft, one of said plates 
striking against one of the arms to force the 
hopper inwardly to the molds, and just suffi 
cient time is allowed to permit of such in 
ward movement and discharge of the clay or 
other material into the molds before the op 
posite arm or plate:X Strikes the opposite arm 
of the rock-shaft to draw the hopper rear 
wardly away from the molds, this operation 
being continued as long as the machine is in 
motion. The sprocket-wheels F of the upper 
cam-shaft, F, are provided with lifting arms or 
brackets M, each sprocket-wheel having one of 
said brackets arranged on its inner surface at 
the periphery thereof. 
The main portion of 
said arms or brackets Misarranged in the arc of 
a circle concentric with the outer periphery of . 
the sprocket-wheels, while their forward ends IO 
are tapered, as at m, and their rear ends bev 
eled or rounded off, as at m, to permit the de 
vice to readily take under and leave the fric 
tion-rollers f of the upper compression-plun 
ger, to elevate said plunger and withdraw its 
dies from engagement with the molds, to 
permit the compressed brick to be discharged 
or expelled from said molds by the upward 
movement of the lower expelling-plunger, 
such upward movement taking place simul 
taneously with the withdrawal of the com 
pression-plunger from the molds. 
In lieu of 
thus positively operating or elevating the 
the upper compression-plunger by the action 
of the lifting-brackets M, a mechanism may be 
employed to keep the said plunger normally 
elevated out of engagement with the molds 
and in contact with the cams F, operating 
to depress or force the compression-plunger 
into the molds, such automatic elevating device 
permitting of the depression of such plunger. I 30 
tical position alongside of the main frame, 
above the roller-shaft of the rollers f', the 
N designates two plates arranged in a ver-, 
II5 
I25 
I2O 
OO 
330,953 
3 
lower ends of said plates being bifurcated, to 
embrace the journal-pin of said rollers f' and 
be connected thereto. The upper ends of the 
plates N, which are adapted to move verti 
cally with the upper compression-plunger, 
are pivotally connected to the bent ends of 
the arms of a vertically-sliding bail, N', which 
projects above the plane of the upper periph 
ery of the sprocket-wheels F. The arms of 
this bail N" are arranged to pass through slots 
or recessed portions of the upper horizontal 
beam, A, of the frame, and be thus guided in 
its vertical movements, and said bail carries 
a rigid arm, n, arranged in a horizontal po 
sition at right angles to the bail, thisarm being 
fulcrumed at or near its middle on a support 
ing bracket or arm, O', secured to and pro 
jecting from the main frame, said arm or beam 
n having a weight, O, at its outer extremity. 
It will thus be seen that the weighted arm in 
will keep the vertically-sliding plate and bail 
normally pressed upward, and consequently the 
Compressioll-plunger, and keep the friction 
rolls thereof in engagement with the cams F, 
and the dies of the platen thereof elevated out 
of the forming-molds. I have found by ex 
periment that this plunger actuating or lift 
ing device, which comprises the plate, bail, 
and weighted arm, will give good and benefi 
cial results; but to insure harmony and ease of 
action without subjecting the parts thereof to 
any undue Stlain or Wear, I have deemed it 
best, although not essential, to employ the lift 
ing brackets or arms M, arranged on the 
sprocket-wheels F, and adapted to operate, 
in connection with such automatic lifting de 
vice, to lift the compression-plunger wherif the 
cams F have ceased to act on the friction 
rollers thereof. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
Clay or other material is fed to the recipro 
cating hopper, and the machine is started by 
applying power to one of the sprocket-wheels 
of the shaft E. The rotation of said sprocket. 
wheels causes one of the curved arms or plates 
K thereof to strike one of the arms J of the 
rock-shaft, J, which is thus oscillated, and com 
municates its motion to the reciprocating hop 
per I to force it forward. Simultaneously with 
the forward movement of the hopper the lower 
expelling-plunger is forced upwardly by the 
cams E into the molds to form bottoms or 
platens thereto, and the upper compression 
plunger is also simultaneously withdrawn from 
said rolls by the joint action of the weighted 
lever and the lifting-brackets, or by either one 
of them independently of each other, the pro 
jecting rib or cam surface on the cams F be 
ing withdrawn, or turned so as to be out of 
engagement with friction-rollers of said com 
pression-plunger. The other curved arm or 
plate K now comes in contact with the other 
arm of the rock-shaft, causing it to turn or 
Oscillate in its bearings in the opposite or re 
verse direction to its first movement, and with 
drawing the hopper from the molds to receive 
a new charge of clay or other material. The 
cams F are now brought to act or bear on 
the compression-plunger and force the same 
down into the molds onto the surface of the 
material therein to compress the same firmly 
and compactly, the lower expelling-plunger 
remaining stationary during these two latter 
movements. The compression-plunger is now 
withdrawn from the molds, and simultaneously 
with such withdrawal thereof the lower ex 
pelling-plunger is moved upwardly into the 
molds by the revolution of the cams E to force 
the compressed and formed brick from the 
molds, and when the bricks have been com 
pletely elevated out of the molds they are 
forced onto a carrying or discharging device 
(not shown) by the forward movement of the 
reciprocating hopper, which has been again 
actuated by the plates K and rock-shaft J. 
When the hopper is at its forward stroke, the 
lower compression-plunger drops to its nor 
mal position to form the bottom to the molds, 
Said frame dropping by gravity when the cams 
have been revolved; and these successive steps 
in the operation of the machine are continued 
in order to compress the brick, the whole op 
eration being performed automatically and 
without requiring the presence of an attend 
ant. 
Any preferred form of conveying apparatus 
may be employed to carry the formed pressed 
bricks away from the machine; but as such a 
device does not constitute part of the present 
invention, I have not deemed it necessary to 
illustrate the same. An idle wheel or pulley, 
P, mounted on a pin or shaft, p, supported in 
the main frame, is employed to bear against 
the endless traveling belt G, connecting the 
sprocket-wheels E, F, to keep the belt taut 
and under proper tension, one pulley P be 
ing employed to each belt. The pulley or 
wheel may be made adjustable to vary the 
tension of Said belt. 
The upper and lower edges of the front end 
of the vibrating or reciprocating hopper I are 
provided with scraping-blades Q, arranged to 
clean or clear the lower and upper faces of 
the compression and expelling plungers of any 
clay or other material that may adhere thereto, 
such clearing operation being performed by 
the blades when the lower plunger forces or 
expels the brick from the molds, and the up 
per plunger is withdrawn therefrom. 
I do not desire to limit myself to the par 
ticular construction shown and described, as 
I am aware that many changes may be made 
therein and in the form and proportions of the 
various parts without departing from the prin 
ciple or sacrificing the advantages of my in 
vention, the essential features of which have 
been explained and will be readily understood 
from the foregoing description, taken in con 
nection with the drawings. 
A casing or shield, R, is secured to the 
guides b of the molds to protect and guide the 
friction-rollers of the gravitating expelling 
plunger. 
In Fig. 7 I show a gage for regulating the 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
4 
330,953 
O 
lifting devices mounted on the cam-shaft and 
separate from the compression-plunger, to ele 
vate said plunger out of the molds at the prop- 7o 
er interval, substantially as described. 
3. In a brick-making machine, the combina 
tion, with the molds, of a gravitating expelling 
plunger, a compression-plunger normally held 
from engagement with the molds, two shafts 75 
having cams mounted in the machine-frame 
beneath and above the expelling and com 
pression plungers, and an automatic lifting 
device connected with and separate from said 
compression-plunger, to keep the same nor- 8C 
mally in engagement with its actuating Cam 
shaft, substantially as described. 
4. In a brick-making machine, the combina 
tion, with the molds, of a gravitating expelling 
plunger, an upper compression-plunger, Cam- 85 
shafts arranged beneath and above the expel 
ling and compression plungers and geared to 
gether, lifting arms or brackets mounted on 
the cam-shaft of the compression-plunger, and 
a weighted arm and intermediate connections 9o 
pivotally secured to the shaft of the com 
pression-plunger at each end thereof, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a brick-machine, the combination of 
the molds having depending guides, a gravi- 95 
tating expelling - plunger working in said 
guides and having frictional rolls, guides 
for the upper compression - plunger, a com 
pression - plunger carrying frictional rolls 
at its middle, and having friction-rolls ar- IOO 
ranged thereon exterior to the guides of said 
plunger, cam-shafts for said plungers, geared 
together, and lifting device for said compres 
sion-plunger, arranged to act on the outer fric 
tion-rolls thereof, substantially as described. Io5 
6. In a brick-making machine, the combina 
tion of a frame, molds mounted therein, the com 
pression and expelling plungers, Cam-shafts 
for actuating said plungers and carrying 
sprocket-wheels, an endless traveling belt con- IIo 
necting said cam-shaft sprocket-wheels, a re 
ciprocating hopper arranged to move between 
the plungers, a rock-shaft mounted in the frame 
and having arms connected with the hopper, 
and operating-plates secured to the sprocket- II.5 
wheels of the lower cam-shaft and arranged to 
successively operate the rock-shaft to oscillate 
the same and the hopper, substantially as de 
depth which the platens of the lower expel 
ling-plungerlie in the mold. The lower faces 
of the arms c of said lower expelling-plunger 
are beveled and engage the beveled face of a 
supporting gage-block, S, rigidly secured to 
the squared portion of a shaft, S, bearing at its 
ends in supports s, secured to the main frame, 
and having one of its ends threaded and pro 
vided with an adjusting-nut, S. The shaft is 
free to turn in its bearings, and can be ad 
justed back and forth therein to bring the bev 
eled face of the gage-block nearer to or far 
ther from the center of the lower beveled sup 
porting-arms, c, of the gravitating expelling 
lunger. 
In Fig. 8 of the drawings I have shown in de 
tail one of the cams on the lower shaft for actu 
ating the lower gravitating expelling-plun 
ger. The outer periphery of each of the lower 
cams has three bearing points or surfaces, titt, 
at different distances from the Center and con 
centric therewith. The first of the bearing 
surfaces, t, is in engagement with the friction 
roller of the expelling-plunger after it has re 
turned to its normal position after expelling 
or forcing the brick from the molds, and 
said cam-surface serves to hold the platens of 
said plunger in the bottom of the molds to 
form the bottoms thereto when the earth or 
clay has been deposited in the molds by the 
hopper. The second bearing-surface, t, is at 
a little greater distance from the center of the 
cam and projects beyond the periphery of the 
surface t, and serves to advance the lower 
plunger in the molds for a short distance, and 
operates to elevate said lower plunger simul 
taneously with downward stroke of the upper 
compression-plunger, and thus serves to com 
press the clay or earth in a slight degree by 
shortening the distance between the two plun 
gers, which is important when dry earth is 
fed to the molds, and the third extended bear 
ing-surface, t, lies at a greater distance be 
yond the center of the cam than either of the 
surfaces tt, and at a distance from the latter 
surface, t, equal to the distance which the 
platens of the expelling-plunger lie from the 
tops of the molds when the material is being 
compressed therein, and said cam-surface t 
acts to force the lower expelling-plunger up 
ward to force out the brick from the molds 
simultaneously with the withdrawal of the 
compression-plunger therefrom, all as will be 
very readily understood. 
tion of a frame, molds mounted therein, a com 
pression and expelling plunger, shafts having 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
cams mounted in the frame for operating the 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
plungers, and carrying sprocket-wheels geared 
Letters Patent, is 
together, a reciprocating hopper having I 25 
1. In a brick-machine, the combination, with 
guides working between the plungers and car 
the molds, of a lower expelling-plunger, a 
compression-plunger, and an automatic lifting 
rying scraping-blades, a rock-shaft mounted 
device connected with said compression-plun 
in the frame and having arms carrying fric 
ger for holding the same normally from en 
tional rolls, operating-plates mounted on the 
gagement with the molds, substantially as de 
sprocket-wheels of the lower cam-shaft and I3o 
arranged to successively strike the frictional 
scribed. 
rolls of the rock-shaft arms, upright bars se 
2. In a brick-machine, the combination of 
the molds, a compression-plunger, a shaft hav 
cured to the rock-shaft and having slotted 
ing cams for depressing said plunger, and i ends, and arms pivotally connected to the 
w 
scribed. 
7. In a brick-making machine, the combina- I2O 
25 
35. 
45 
55 
65 
330,953 
5 
35 
hopper and having threaded ends carrying hopper having closed ends and sides to provide 3o 
nuts, substantially as described. 
8. The combination, with the compression 
plunger having its frictional roller-shaft ex 
tended, and the slotted guides therefor, of aver 
tically-sliding plate connected to said shaft at 
each end thereof, a bail pivotally connected 
to each plate, a bracket secured to the frame 
of the machine at the sides thereof, and a 
Weighted arm mounted in each of said brack 
ets and connected to the bail-arm, substantially 
as described. 
9. In a brick-machine, the combination of 
a frame, a mold or molds mounted therein, a 
gravitating expelling - plunger arranged to 
form a bottom to said mold or molds, a com 
pression-plunger, lifting devices therefor sep 
arate from the compressing devices, a recip 
rocating hopper arranged to move between 
the plungers and Over the mold or molds, and 
means, substantially as described, whereby 
the compression-plunger is withdrawn from 
the molds simultaneously with the upward 
movement of the expelling-plunger and the 
forward movement of the reciprocating hop 
per, substantially as described. 
10. In a brick-machine, the combination, 
With the molds and the compressing and ex 
pelling devices, of a reciprocating bottomless 
a preliminary forming-chamber, and having a 
receiving - throat communicating therewith 
and arranged at an angle thereto to conduct 
the earth into said hopper, substantially as 
described. 
11. In a brick-machine, and in combination 
with the molds and the expelling and com 
pression plungers, a shaft having cams for 
actuating said plungers, each cam of the ex 
pelling-plunger shaft having three raised por 
tions that lie at different distances from the 
center thereof, and are successively brought 
to act upon the expelling-plunger to maintain 
the same normally within the molds, to form 
a bottom thereto, to slightly elevate the said 
plungers simultaneously with the downward 
stroke of the compression-plunger into the 
molds, and to force or expel the brick from 
the molds simultaneously with the withdrawal 
of the compression - plunger therefrom, Sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ABEL B. WOODWARD. 
45 
Witnesses: 
E. G. SIGGERS, 
WM. N. MOORE, 
IO 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331053.txt	(No Model.) 
N, H. GRIFFITH, 
WRENCH, 
No. 331,053, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1885, 
WITNESSEE 
/44Ac4 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NATHAN H. GRIFFITH, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
WRENCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 331,053, dated November 24, 1885. 
Application filed July 30, 1885. Serial No. 173,097. (No model.) 
Fig. 2 is a p 
To all whom it may concern: 
the square shank of a boring-bit or other tool; 
Be it known that I, NATHAN H. GRIFFITH, 
and by means of the lugs i, I attach to the 
of Providence, in the State of Rhode Island, jaws ee the shoes ll, provided with an angu 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
lar groove, m, (shown in Fig. 1) which is 55 
5 in Wrenches, of which the following is a speci 
adapted to embrace the opposite corners of the 
fication. 
shank of a boring-bit and to hold the same 
Myimprovementismore especially designed 
against forcible endwise withdrawal, as shown 
as a Carriage-wrench, and it may also be ad 
in Fig. 4, the shoes ll being prevented from 
vantageously employed for holding a boring 
moving laterally by means of the projecting 6o 
Io bit or other tool; and it consists in the im 
eaS , , 
In putting the parts together, the jaws ee 
proved combination of a screw with the ex 
are first passed upward through the openings 
panding jaws, and also in the combination 
therewith of a holding - shoe, as hereinafter 
b b. The yoke-nut o is then inserted within 
fully set forth. 
the chamber a through the opening h and se- 65 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
cured to the jaws by means of the joint-screws 
Wrench adapted for carriage use. 
. The screw g is then passed loosely through 
perspective view of the expanding jaws sepa 
the perforation fat the upper end of the socket 
rated from the body of the wrench. Fig. 3 is 
portion B and screwed into the yoke-nut 0, 
a detail section showing the operating mech 
after which the lower end of the screw is 7o 
2O anism of the jaws. Fig. 4 is a detail view, 
headed over at the outer side of the perfora 
partly in section, showing the jaws with their 
tion f', as shown in Fig. 3. 
attached holding-shoes adapted to hold the 
When used as a carriage-wrench, the nut o, 
shank of a boring-bit. Fig. 5 is a perspective 
Fig. 1, will be tightly held, so that there can 
view of the holding-shoe adapted for attach 
be no danger of dropping the same or of soil- 75 
25 ment to the jaws of the wrench. Fig. 6 is a 
ing the fingers, and the shoes ll, provided with 
top view of the same. Fig. 7 is a perspective 
the angular grooves m, are admirably adapted 
view of the same, showing the groove adapted 
for holding the shank of a boring-bit, as shown 
to receive the shank of the boring-bit. 
in Fig. 4. 
In the accompanying drawings, A is the 
handle portion of the wrench, which may be 
ward by means of the Screw, they will be caused 
either made straight, as in an ordinary mon 
to separate from each other, and thus nuts of 
key-Wrench, or be made in the form of a brace, 
various sizes may be operated upon by means 
as shown in Fig. 1. The handle Aisprovided 
of the same wrench, and by reason of the in 
with a socket portion, B, within the chamber 
ward curving of the jaws I am enabled, with 85 
35 C. of which is placed the jaw mechanism, the 
the construction employed, to obtain a com 
said socket portion being provided with the 
paratively rapid opening and closing move 
openings bb, adapted to receive the jaws ee, 
ment; but when the parts are otherwise prop 
erly proportioned a pair of straightjaws may 
and with the perforations.ff, adapted to form 
holding-bearings for the screw g, which serves 
be employed. 
to operate the jaws. The socket portion B is 
provided at one side with a slot-opening, h, in 
order to secure ready access to the chamber a, 
for the purpose of putting the jaw mechanism 
together. At the upper end of the screw is se 
cured the turning-handle i, and the lower end 
of the screw is held in the perforation f by 
slightly spreading the extreme end of the 
Screw or otherwise. 
The jaws ee are provided with the inwardly 
5o projecting lugi, which is made with a notch, 
k, adapted to embrace the corner of a nut, or 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the handle, the socket 
provided at its outer end with holding-open 
ings for the jaws, the operating-screw having 
a bearing at the opposite ends of the socket, 95 
and the yoke-nut With the opposite jaws held 
in the openings of the socket and jointed to the 
yoke-nut, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the handle, the socket 
provided with holding-openings for the jaws, 
the operating-screw, and the yoke-nut with 
the opposite jaws held in the openings of the 
When the jaws e e are made to move out 8o 
90 
IOO 
15 
40 
45 
2 
socket and jointed to the yoke-nut, and the the opposite jaws held in the openings of the Io 
shoes grooved on their adjacent faces and socket"and jointed to the yoke-nut, and also 
adapted to the projecting lugs of the jaws, sub-provided with inwardly-projecting lugs, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of the handle, the socket 
provided at its outer end with holding open 
ings for the jaws, and with the side opening, 
h, the operating-screw having a bearing at the 
opposite ends of the socket, theyoke-nut, and 
SoCRATEs SCHOLFIELD, 
JOSEPH. J. SCHOLFIELD. 
stantially as described. 
5 
33,053 
- 
NATHAN. H. GRIFFITH 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331153.txt	(Model.) 
W. M. MORTON. 
I,00K, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
No. 331,153, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1885. 
(Model.) 
W. M., MOR TON, 
LOCK. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
No. 331,153, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1885. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. MORTON, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 
OCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 331,153, dated November 24, 1835. 
Application filed May 18, 1885. Serial No. 165,884. 
(Model.) 
IO 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WM. M. MoRTON, of 
Minneapolis, in the county of Hennepin and 
in the State of Minnesota, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Locks; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the acccompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 shows a view in side elevation of 
my lock with the side plate removed, the bolt 
being slid back. Fig.2 shows a similar view 
of the lock when the bolt has been thrown for 
ward by turn-button from the inside of the door; 
Fig. 3, a similar view of the lock, showing the 
position of the parts when the door has been 
locked by a key from the outside of the door; 
Fig. 4, a detail view showing the first action of 
arm OF Cam On the shaft or arbor of the turn 
button as the dooris being unlocked, after being 
locked by the key, as shown in Fig. 3; Fig. 5, a 
similar view showing the position of the plate 
and top tumbler as the turn-button or lock latch 
is turned farther; Fig. 6 a sectional view of the 
lock on line XX of Fig. 1; and Fig. 7 a detail 
View showing inner side of the removable side 
plate of the lock. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved guard mechanism for locks; and to 
this endit consists in the construction, arrange 
ment, and combination of parts, as hereinafter 
specified. 
In the drawings, A designates the casing of 
the lock, which is preferably of the mortise 
kind, provided with the usual form of latch 
mechanism in the upper part of the casing. 
This lock is provided with the bolt B, attached 
to or cast in one piece with the bolt-plate C, 
of ordinary construction, guided in the well 
known way in its reciprocations by means of a 
lug on the side plate of the casing projecting 
into a slot in the bolt-plate. Any desired 
number of spring-actuated tumblers, of which 
the outer or top one, D, only is shown in the 
drawings, can be used, engaging in the well 
known way the lug or stud E, projecting 
from the bolt-plate C, and having any desired 
shape on their under edges or surfaces for the 
proper engagement of the key of the required 
form. 
The lug or studE in my lock extends beyond 
the face of the top tumbler, D, for the purpose 
to be hereinafter set forth. On this top tum 
bler is a pin, d, the purpose and function of 
which will also be set forth hereinafter. 
On the outer or key-hole side of the lock, 
and sliding alongside the tumbler D, is the 
guard-plate G, having in it the opening 9, for 
the passage of the key-stem as it is thrust into 
the lock over the key arbor or stud H. The 
upper enlarged portion of this key-opening in 
the guard-plate is extended out horizontally at 
the side toward the inner end of the lock. 
This offset or slot g' is of such size as to just 
fit over the key-arbor H as the plate is slid 
toward the front end of the lock. The key-hole 
in the lock will thus be effectually closed, as 
indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 2. 
The lower edge of the bolt-plate C is pro 
vided with the usual form of notch for the 
proper engagement there with of the key as 
the latter is turned in either direction to shoot 
the bolt in or Out. 
To enable the bolt to be operated from the 
inside of the door, a turn-piece, I, is provided, 
attached to the end of a squared shank, I, 
which fits into the squared axial Opening 
through the hub IK of the cam K'. The ends 
of this hub are, as shown in Fig. 6, journaled 
in the side plates of the lock. The cam K. 
has the radial plate or armic, which is adapted 
to engage the tumblers to properly raise them 
to release the bolt-plate C, and to operate the 
bolt by engaging a notch in the plate similar 
in shape to that provided for the engagement 
of the key. The guard-plate G rests and 
slides at its lower edge upon Suitable lugs, g 
g, projecting upward from the bottom of the 
lock. From the lower edge of the plate is 
the projection g, extending down into and 
playing in the slot gin the bottom of the lock 
casing. The removable side plate, L, is on, its 
inner side cast or otherwise formed with the 
projections or lugs ll, which project over the 
upper edge of the guard-plate, and with the 
lugs gg, upon which the plate rests, serve to 
guide the plate in its reciprocations. As 
shown in the drawings, the upper rear corner 
of the plate is extended upward to form alug, 
M, which engages the stud E, projecting from 
the bolt-plate through the tumblers, as de 
scribed hereinbefore. 
35 
45 
55 
95 
ICO 
33,153 
O 
25 
35 
4O 
45 
SO 
55 
The plate G is provided with the opening 
M', through which passes the hub of cam K, 
With its arm or radial plate k. This opening 
is at its upper end formed with the offset or 
notch n, with the sides of which the arm or 
plate k engages as cam K'is revolved in either 
direction. From the lower corners or edges 
of this notch the sides of the opening M are 
curved away in opposite directions, so as to 
admit of the proper revolution of the cam, 
with its plate or arm ic. They are curved on 
arcs of circles described from the centers of 
the cam-hub when the plate G is at opposite 
ends of its play. These curves, as shown, if 
continued upward, would intersect the oppo 
Site sides of the notch. With this construc 
tion, if the can be turned upward and over, 
it Will always engage one side of the notch, 
and will reciprocate the plate in the same way 
that it moves the bolt-plate. The lower and 
forward side of the opening below the plane 
of the cam-hub is curved, so that the cam-arm 
can be turned freely up or down past it when 
the plate is slid forward, as when in position 
to close the key-hole. At the lower end of this 
curved side of the opening is the shoulder N, 
corresponding to one of thesides of the notch or 
offset at the upper end of opening M'. From 
this shoulder the lower and inner side of open 
ing M is curved backward and upward on a 
circle having a radius equal to that of the cam, 
and described from the cam-arbor center when 
the plate is in its forward position. This curve 
is continued upward to a point on a plane 
With such center, and is there joined with the 
lower end of the curved upper and inner side 
by a straight line to form a shoulder, O. The 
upper edge of plate G is provided with the 
two notches PP, separated by the lug or pro 
jection R, which is inclined or sloping on its 
forward side and abrupt on the outer or rear 
side. The pin d on the top tumbler engages 
these notches, as hereinafter to be described. 
In the guard-plate lock patented November 
7, 1871, No. 120,704, when the door had been 
locked, by means of the key, from the outside 
of the door, it was not only impossible to slide 
the guard-plate over the key-hole by means 
of the knob or turn-piece on the inside of the 
door, but it was impossible to unlock the door 
at all, except from the outside and with the 
key. My present guard-plate lock is designed 
to avoid these very great objections to the 
patented lock. If the bolt of my lock is shot 
from the outside by a key, the guard-plate G 
is left in the position shown in Fig. 3. The 
Occupant of the room can then from the inside, 
by turning the knob or thumb-piece, turn the 
Cam So that its arm or plate will strike the 
shoulder N and carry the plate G forward, so 
that the key-opening in it will be out of line 
With the key-hole of the lock, as indicated in 
Fig. 2, and said key-hole will be closed. Dur 
ing the movement of the plate the pin d on 
the tumbler rides up the inclined sides of the 
forward notch, P, in the upper edge of the 
plate, and drops into the rear one, P, thus 
locking the plate. If, now, it be desired to 
unlock the door, the cam is turned farther 
upward and backward until it engages the 
tumblers and lifts them in the usual way, there 
by raising pin d out of notch P to release 
the plate, and then engages the recesses or 
notches in the bolt and guard-plates, respect 
ively, and moves said plates both back to 
unlock the door and open the key-hole. The 
pin d on the top tumbler then drops into notch 
P. While the bolt and plate are both slid 
back, as shown in Fig. 1, if the thumb-piece 
and cam be turned upward and forward, the 
arm or plate of the cam will pass up along the 
curved upper end of the opening M until it . 
strikes the side of the notch or offset, and will 
then carry the guard-plate forward. As in 
the ordinary locks, it meantime raises the 
tumblers to release the bolt-plate and slides 
said plate out. When the tumblers are al 
lowed to drop again by the cam, the pin on 
the top tumbler then drops into notch P and 
locks the guard-plate. Said plate can also, 
further, belocked by turning the can K So. 
that its plate or armis horizontal and toward 
the outer or forward end of the lock, as shown 
in Fig. 2. The plate could not then be slid 
inward, as theside of the opening would strike 
this cam-arm. As the lug on the upper inner 
corner of the guard-plate rests against or en 
gages the rear side of the stud on the bolt 
plate, as described and shown, the guard-plate 
cannot be slid forward to close the key-hole 
without a movement of the bolt-plate to shoot 
the bolt; but the bolt can be forced forward 
and out by a key independently of any move 
ment of the guard-plate. 
Having fully set forth the nature and object 
of my invention, what I claim is 
1. In a lock adapted to be operated by a 
key on one side and a cam turned by a suita 
ble thumb-piece or knob on the other side, 
the guard-plate for covering the key-hole, 
adapted to be moved by the cam to close the 
key-hole after the bolt has been shot by the 
key, substantially as shown and described. 
2. In a lock, in combination with the bolt 
mechanism adapted to be operated by a key 
from the outside of the door, and means for 
operating the said bolt from the inside of the 
door, the guard-plate for covering the key 
hole, adapted to allow such bolt to be shot by 
the key, and adapted to be moved by the 
means for operating the bolt from the inside, 
so that it shall cover the key-hole after the 
key is withdrawn, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
3. In combination with the bolt-plate pro 
vided with a stud; the tumblers having slots 
through which extends said stud, the guard 
plate for closing the key-hole, provided with 
a lug adapted to engage the rear side of the 
bolt-plate stud, and means, operated from the 
inner side of the lock, adapted to actuate the 
bolt to lock or unlock the door, and at the 
ICO 
IO 
IIS 
33,153 
3 
45 
55 
forward independently of the bolt when the 
said bolt has been shot by the key, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
7. The sliding guard-plate for the key-hole 
of a lock, provided on its upper edge with two 
notches, the forward one of which has its rear 
side inclined, and the other abrupt sides, in 
combination with a pin on the tumbler next 
the plate, adapted to engage such notches, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
S. In combination with the sliding guard 
plate for closing the key-hole of a lock, the 
Cam for operating the tumblers and bolt, ex 
tending through and revolving in an opening 
in the plate, said opening being formed above 
the cann, so that as said cam is turned to throw 
the bolt in either direction it will also move 
the plate, and below with a shoulder against 
Which the cam can be turned to throw the 
plate forward to close the key-hole, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
9. In combination with the sliding guard 
plate and means for automatically locking it 
When in position to close the key-hole, the cam 
for operating the tumblers and sliding the bolt 
independently of the action of a key extend 
ing through and revolving in an opening in 
the plate so formed above the cam that as the 
Cain is turned to throw the bolt in either di 
rection it will also move the plate, and below 
the cam formed with a shoulder against which 
the cam can be turned to throw the plate for 
Ward to close the key-hole when the bolt has 
been thrown forward by the key, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 25th day of 
August, 1884. 
. 
W. M. MORTON. 
Witnesses: 
LUCIAN SWIFT, Jr., 
J. FRED SMITH. 
Same time to move the guard-plate to close or 
unclose the key-hole, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
4. In a lock adapted to be operated by a 
key on one side, the bolt-plate having a stud, 
and the tumblers having slots through which 
extends said stud, in combination with the 
guard-plate for closing the key-hole, provided 
With a lug engaging the rear side of the bolt 
plate stud, when the plate and bolt are slid 
back, So that the bolt can be moved out by the 
key independently of the guard-plate, but the 
latter cannot be moved forward to close the 
key-hole without the bolt-plate and bolt being 
moved forward, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
5. In a lock adapted to be operated from 
One side by a key and on the other by suit 
able means independent of such key, the bolt 
plate and tumblers adapted to be operated by 
such means, and by the key, as desired, and 
the guard-plate for closing the key-hole, slid 
ing on the outside of the series of tumblers, 
and provided in its upper edge with the two 
notches, the forward one of which has its rear 
side inclined backward, in combination with 
the pin on the outer tumbler adapted to en 
gage these notches, and the means for operat 
ing the lock independently of the key, adapt 
ed also to reciprocate the plate, substantially 
as shown and described. 
6. In a lock, in combination with the bolt 
plate and tumblers adapted to be operated by 
a key from the outer side of the lock, the key 
hole-guard plate provided in its upper edge 
with two notches, of which the forward one has 
its rear side inclined rearwardly, and the rear 
one has abrupt sides, the pin on the outer tum 
bler adapted to engage these notches, and 
means adapted to slide the bolt and guard 
plate forward and back together inlocking and 
unlocking the door, and move the guard-plate 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331253.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 331,253, 
 
C. MUSSEL. 
CORKING DEVICE FOR WESSELS, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1885. 
WITNESSES 
g &A.:4. 
 
INVENTOR 
yiS'ss 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTOPH MUSSEL OF SOUTH BEND, INDIANA. 
CORKING DEW CE FOR VESSELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 331,253, dated November 24, 1885. 
Application filed September 14, 1885. Serial No. 177,065. 
(No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern 
which are arranged to hold the device upon a 
Be it known that I, CHRISTOPH MSSEL, 
keg, so that the ring-washer will make an air 
of South Bend, in the county of St. Joseph and 
tight joint over a cork-hole therein. 
State of Indiana, have invented certain new 
In practice two of the corking devices are 
and useful Improvements in Corking Devices 
used, one over a cork-hole at or near the bot 
for Wessels; and I do hereby declare that the 
tom of the keg and one over a cork-hole at or 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
near the top of the same. The beer is ad 
thereof, reference being had to the accompany 
mitted through a tube connecting with the one 
ing drawing, and to the letters of reference 
near the bottom, and the air escapes through a 
marked thereon, which form part of this speci 
tube connecting the one near the top with any 
fication, in which the figure is a plan view, 
proper receptacle. 
partly in section, of the improved corking 
The manner of using the devices is as foll 
device applied to a barrel in position to di 
lows: When each is bound over its proper 
rect the cork into the bung-hole of the same. 
hole, the sections B are drawn outwardly until 
This invention is an improved corking de 
the corks, which have been forced downward 
Vice adapted to aid in filling casks or kegs 
and into their lower ends, are outward of the 
with beer or other fermented liquid; and it 
branch tubes D, the valves d of which are then 
consists in the construction and novel arrange 
opened, allowing the beer to flow in and the 
ment of parts hereinafter described, and 
air out of the keg. When the latter is full, the 
pointed out in the appended claims. 
sections B are shoved clear inward against 
Referring to the accompanying drawing by 
the keg, the valves d closed, and the corks X 
letter, A designates the device, composed of 
are driven out of the ends of the sections B 
the tubular sections Band B, the latter adapted 
into the cork-holes, in which they expand lat 
to slide partially into the former. The sec 
erally and securely hold, they having been 
tion B has on its end which is arranged to lie 
compressed in the section B, and the holes 
against the keg a circumferential groove, into 
being large enough for them to enter. The 
which a corresponding flange, c, of the ring 
devices are then detached from the keg and 
Washer C enters, securing the washer to the 
attached to the succeeding one. The corks 
end of the section, as shown. 
are preferably forced out by a rod, I, having 
ID is a branch tube standing out from the 
upon it a shoulder, i, which strikes against 
side of the section B, and controlled by the 
the outer edge of the section B and prevents 
valved. The end of the tube is adapted to be the rod from forcing the cork too far inward. 
connected to the end of a length of rubber or 
Having described my invention, I claim 
other proper tubing. 
1. In the corking device A, the combination 
d is a circumferential shoulder on the sec 
of the tubular section B, provided with the 
tion B, on the side of the tube D opposite that 
branch escape-tube D, having one end exter 
on which the ring-washer lies. The outer end, 
nally threaded, and the other end provided 
E, of the section B is externally threaded, as 
with the ring - Washer C, adapted to lie upon 
shown. The outer end of the section B is 
and form an air-tight joint with the cork-hole 
funnel-shaped, as shown, and the bore of its 
of a keg or similar vessel, the tubular section 
straight part is slightly conical from without 
B, adapted to slide within the section B till 
inward, so that the cork X may be compressed 
its inner end is flush with the outer surface of . 
as it is forced inward. 
the ring-washer, provided with a bore slightly 
F is a screw - cap, internally threaded to 
conical, so that the cork will be compressed 
screw on the end E of the section B, and packed 
when driven inward, and will be held within 
within at f to make the joint between the sec 
its inner end, and having its outer end open 
tions air-tight. 
and funnel-shaped, and the screw-cap F, sub 
His a yoke having a central opening, which 
stantially as specified. 
surrounds the section B and lies upon the 
2. The corking device A, composed of the 
shoulder d. The ends h of the yoke are so 
tubular section B, having the ring rubber 
formed as to be made fast to ropes or cords, 
washer C on its outer end, threaded at its in 
25 
35 
55 
95 
IOO 
331,253 
ner end, and provided with the shoulder d and 
the branch tube D, having the valved, the 
tubular section B, sliding partially into the 
section B, having its outer end funnel-shaped 
and the bore of its straight portion slightly 
conical, the screw-cap F, engaging the threaded 
end of the section B, and the yoke H, all con 
structed and arranged to operate substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as Io 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two Witnesses. 
CHRISTOPH MUSSEL. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES DU SHANE, 
J. GEO. ROTH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331353.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 331,353 
 
A WILCOX. 
HARROW, 
Patented Dec. 1, 1885, 
pereas, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
. UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT WILCOX, OF CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA. 
HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 331,353, dated December 1, 1885. 
Application filed November 17, 1884. Serial No. 148,109. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
15 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERT WILCOX, a citi. 
zen of the United States, residing at Cedar 
Rapids, in the county of Linn and State of 
Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Harrows, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to harrows having ad 
justable teeth; and my object is to effect a 
change in the angle of the teeth with respect 
to the frame by the use of simple, cheap, and 
reliable means, and such as may be applied to 
the frame of any ordinary harrow. 
The invention consists in a harrow - tooth 
having a hook at its upper end, by means of 
which it is suspended and is free to oscillate 
on a pivot in a Socket formed in or attached 
to the frame, the top and end of which socket 
serve as stops for the tooth in its terminal po 
sitions by the contact of the hook and of the 
body of the tooth, respectively. 
It also consists in a cap or socket which may 
be attached to the frame, and in the combina 
tion and arrangement of the parts, as will be 
hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a side elevation of the invention as 
applied to a simple iron harrow-frame; Fig. 
2, a view of the socket from the inner side 
with tooth attached; Fig. 3, a vertical cross 
section of Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a similar view of the 
invention applied to a wood frame; Fig. 5, 
the same with angle-iron frame; Fig. 6, a plan 
view thereof from the bottom, and Fig. 7 the 
cap adapted to said angle-iron frame. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The tooth A is bent or otherwise formed 
into a hook at its upper end, the terminus 
thereof being preferably less than a right angle 
to the body of the tooth, so that being pivoted 
near the corner of a right-angular socket the 
tooth will befree to vibrate a limited distance, 
as will be seen by reference to Fig. 2. When 
the tooth is at right, angles to the frame, the 
body of the tooth a bears against the end of 
the socket b, and at the other extreme position 
the hook or shoulder a strikes the top of the 
socketb', as indicated by the dotted lines. The 
tooth, being loosely suspended on the pivot C, 
assumes the respective positions indicated, 
according as the draft is applied to the one 
side or the other of the frame, and the harrow 
is thereby adapted to various conditions of 
soil. The socket B may beformed in the beam 
itself, being a mortise nearly square in longi 
tudinal section and wide enough to admit the 
head of the tooth freely; but to avoid the 
weakening of the beam which this would cause, 
and also to admit of the tooth being applied 
to any frame, whether of wood or iron, and, 
still further, to reduce the cost of manufacture, 
I prefer in practice to provide the tooth with 
a removable cap or socket adapted to be at 
tached to the side of the frame D, as repre 
sented. Where the nature of the case admits, 
I prefer to use the pivot C as a bolt for fasten 
ing the cap to the frame; but where it is not 
desirable to make a hole in the frame the 
pivot may be integral with the cap, and the 
latter may be secured to the frame by a clip 
or clips. To prevent the cap from turning 
when applied to a frame having a plane side, 
the upper side, b, may be extended beyond 
the other sides and project over the top of the 
frame. In the same manner lugs b' b' may 
extend from the lower end of the sides b band 
pass under the frame, affording a double bear 
ing, as shown in Fig. 3. In order to allow the 
pivot-bolt to pass through the middle of the 
beam when of Wood, and at the same time 
adapt the cap to the difference in width of the 
wood and iron frame, the retaining-flange may 
project from an offset in the cap, as shown in 
Fig. 4. Thelugb' also may be a spur adapted 
to pierce the wood under the pressure of the 
fastening-bolt or enter holes in the side of the 
frame. 
In applying the cap to an angle-iron frame 
the upper flange, b, may be dispensed with, 
the horizontal flange D of the angle-iron serv 
ing as the head of the socket and to prevent 
the cap from turning. 
To prevent the movement of the tooth from 
wearing the frame when of wood, a metal 
shim is interposed, as shown in Fig. 4, or this 
side of the socket may be integral with the 
IeSt. 
Owing to its simplicity, the device above 
described is easily, rapidly, and cheaply made, 
and being strong and durable, as well as neat 
in appearance and effective in operation, I 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
331.353 
5 
O 
2 
regard it as a useful improvement in harrows. plane of its curvature and furnish at one end 
a stop for the body of the tooth and at the top 
Itsformis such as to admit of sufficient strength. 
a stop for the hook portion, respectively, and 
with light material, and the operative parts, 
a pivot upon which the tooth is suspended by 
being inclosed on all sides except the bottom, 
said hook, substantially as specified. 
are well protected from the weather and con 
3. In combination with a tooth having a 
Sequent rust. 
hook orangle formed at its upper end, a socket 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
therefor made by securing to an angle-bar 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
frame a stirrup - shaped cap by means of a 
Patent, is 
single bolt adapted to serve as a pivot for the 
1. A harrow - tooth having its upper end 
tooth, the socket So formed having an end 
formed into a hook somewhat less than a right 
bearing for the body of the tooth and a top 
angle, whereby the tooth is adapted to oscillate 
bearing for the hook portion, according to the 
without displacement in a rectangular socket 
relative position of the tooth, substantially as 
and stop at the terminal positions by the con 
described. 
I5 tact, with the corresponding interior faces of 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
the socket, of the hook at one extreme and the 
presence of two witnesses. 
body of the tooth at the other, substantially as 
specified. 
2. The combination of a harrow-tooth hav 
3 ing a hook or angle at the upper end, a socket 
in or at one side of the frame adapted to allow 
the tooth to oscillate a short distance in the 
FRANK. G. CLARK, 
S. G. ARMSTRONG. 
ALBERT WILCOX. 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331453.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 331,453, 
H. G. SHIPPS. 
FEED CUTTER, 
' 3 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
Patented Deo, l, 1885. 
N 
 
 
for a 33-ki- 
a '71". 
 
(No Model.) 
H. G. SHIPPS, 
FEED CUTTER, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 331453, 
Patented DeC. l. l885. 
'N 
t 
RS 
HP 
HERSITI 
HATHILHART III 
H 
is 
is H 
UITTENT 
 
S N 
T 
 
  
s 
  
2 
- Hyatt, R 
&EIts Is Is 
S 
- 
 
 
IEE III 
21 Ogi; 
S 
SS 
3. 
NS 
- r 
 
w 
s 
it. PEERS, Photo-ithographer, Washington, O. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 331453. 
 
H. G. SHIPPS, . 
FEED CUTTER, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Deo, l, 1885. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORATIO G. SHIPPS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FEED CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 331,453, dated December 1, 1885. 
Application filed June 23, 1884. Serial No. 135,769. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HoRATIO. G. SHIPPs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain Improvements in Feed- Cutters, of 
which the following is a specification. 
One object of my invention is to so construct 
a feed-cutter that there will be a uniform ac 
tion of the feed-rolls whether the amount of 
material passing between the same be great 
or small, further objects being to prevent the 
choking of the feed-rolls, and to insure the 
proper clamping of the hay or straw while it 
is being cut. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, 
Sheet l, is a longitudinal section of my im 
proved feed-cutter: Fig. 2, a side view of 
part of the same; Fig. 3, Sheet 2, an end view 
of the machine; Fig. 4, a transverse section on 
the line 12, Fig. 1; Fig. 5, Sheet 3, a perspec 
tive view of the frame for connecting the two 
feed-shafts; Fig. 5, a side view of arms form 
ing part of said connecting-frame; Fig. 6, a 
plan view of part of the machine, and Fig. 7 
a longitudinal section illustrating one of the 
features of the invention. 
A is the main frame of the machine; B, the 
feed-table, and D D' the feed-rolls, both of 
which are preferably fluted. The spindle a 
of the lower feed-roll, D, is adapted to fixed 
bearings in the frameA; but the spindle a? of 
the upper roll is carried by boxes which are 
free to slide vertically in guides b on the 
frame, straps d extending from these boxes 
to a transverse bar, d, upon which bears a 
Weighted lever, E, beneath the table, so that 
the upper roll is constantly subjected to a 
yielding pressure. 
In order to gear together the spindles a a? 
in such a manner that the rise and fall of the 
upper spindle will not throw it out of gear, I 
Secure to the spindle at a spur-wheel, e, and to 
the spindle a? a similar wheel, e', these spur 
wheels gearing, respectively, into pinions ff" 
on short shafts g g, which are hung to the 
spindles a C by arms h h", the shafts being con 
nected together by links i, so that the pinions 
if f' are caused to gear into each other. By 
this means vertical separation of the spindles 
So at a to any necessary extent is permitted with 
out throwing the wheels e e' out of gear with 
45 
35 
the pinions f f', or the latter out of gear with 
each other. The upper shafts, g, being hung 
to the lower shafts, g, by links i, are free to 
yield, to permit the shaft C of the upper roll 55 
to move in a vertical line, as described. I 
have shown two sets of arms, h. ht-one set inside 
and the other set outside of the gearing; but 
the outside set only may be used, if desired, 
and although it is preferable to use the gear- 6o 
ing on both sides of the machine, so as to 
drive both ends of the roll D', the gearing at 
one end of the roll may be dispensed with in 
SOhe CaSeS. 
To prevent the arms hit from dropping at 65 
the outer ends, the outside arms have seg 
mental portions i, with interlocking teeth i', 
as shown in Figs. 2 and 5. As the arm h 
swings from the shaft a, the teeth on the up 
per edge of the segment of said arm would 7o 
have a tendency to move outward as well as 
downward on the dropping of the arm, as they 
would follow a segment struck from the cen 
ter of the shaft a, whereas the teeth on the 
segment of the upper arm, h", would have a 75 
tendency to swing inward, as they would fol 
low a segment struck from the center of the 
shaft al. The teeth consequently bind upon 
each other and prevent the outer ends of the 
arms from falling. In the present instance 8o 
there are two teeth on the lower arm and three 
on the upper arm; but this number may be va 
ried. In advance of the feed-rolls is a clamp 
block, F, which is secured to the upper end of a 
yoke, G, the latter being connected to a trans 
verse treadle, H, beneath the table, said 
treadle being acted upon by a spring, k, which 
tends to elevate it and the clamp-block. 
Between the adjustable guides m on the end 
of the frame A is a vertically-reciprocating 
slide, J, which carries the inclined cutting 
knife M, and is connected by a pin, n, to an 
arm, N, hung by a link, p, to a stud, q, on the 
frame. The spindle of the lower feed-roll 
should be furnished with a suitable crank 
(see dotted lines, Fig. 2) When the machine is 
to be operated by hand, the operator in this 
case turning the roll with the left hand, oper 
ating the knife with the right hand, and de 
pressing the treadle H with one foot. 
In order to prevent the accidental descent 
of the knife before the action of the clamping 
95 
IOO 
2 
33,453 
IO 
block F, the treadle H, which operates the lat 
ter, is connected by a cord, s, to a spring catch, 
t, on the end of the frame A, this catch serv 
ing to retain the arm Nin its elevated posi 
tion, as shown in Fig. 7, until retracted by 
the depression of the treadle. 
It will be noticed on reference to Fig. 6 
that the feed end of the guide - trough S is 
wider than the front end, but that the sides of 
the latter are parallel to a point, T, in the rear 
of the feed-rolls, at which point the widening 
of the trough takes place. By this means I 
prevent that choking of the feed-rolls with 
hay or straw which is likely to occur when the 
said rolls are located in a tapering portion of 
the trough. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the feed-rolls D D 
and their spindles a a? with transmitting 
gearing comprising the spur-wheels e e, pin- 2 o 
ions.ff', shaftsgg', arms hit', and link or links 
i, hung to the shaftsgg', as set forth. 
2. The combination of the spindles at a', 
shafts g g, spur-wheels e e', and pinions f f' 
with the link i and the arms h h", having in 
terlocking teeth f', as set forth. 
3. The combination of the knife-slide and 
its operating-arm N, the clamp-block and its 
treadle, and a spring-catch, t, connected to the 
treadle, and serving to lock the arm N when 3o 
the latter is elevated, as specified. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
25 
HORATIO G. SHIPPs. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN M. CLAYTON, 
HARRY SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331553.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
C. SCHILICKEYSEN & E, BRESLAUER, 
- 
SAND MOLDING MACHINE, 
No. 331,553, 
Patented Dec. 1, 1885. 
N. PTERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL SCHILICKEYSEN AND EDUARD BRESLAUER, OF BERLIN, GERMANY., 
ASSIGNORS TO SAID SCHILICKEYSEN. 
SAN) of O 
N G V AC - NE. 
SEPECIFSCA. IOEN forming part of retters Patent No. 333,553, dated December 1, 1885. 
Application filed July 3, 1885. Serial No. 170,610. (No model.) 
IO 
35 
20 
To all whon, it half concert: 
Beit known that we, CARL SCHILICKEYSEN 
and EDUARD BRESLAUER, both of Berlin, in 
the Kingdom of Prussia, in the Empire of 
5 Germany, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Machines for Making 
Molds for Castings, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The material for making castings of iron, 
composed of properly - selected earth, tech 
nically termed sand, in a slightly-damp 
ened condition, requires to be compressed 
against the pattern to a carefully-determined 
extent. If the sand is too slightly compressed, 
it fails for obvious reasons. If the sand is 
compressed too tightly, so as to not allow the 
air and gases to escape, it equally fails to per 
form its function properly. Some parts of a 
pattern being much lower than others, the 
molder in operating by hand can vary the 
force of the blows in ramining the sand at 
different points, So as to produce an equable 
effect. There are peculiar difficulties in the 
way of obtaining the like effect by machinery, 
25 We have devised machinery which attains 
this end. 
Our machine produces molds with rapid 
ity and economy, requiring no special prepa 
ration to adapt it to receive patterns of a 
great variety of forms, and to produce a mold 
every part of which is compressed to about 
the proper degree. We operate by means of 
a device analogous to a Screw-pl"opeller, forc 
ing the sand into the box, technically termed 
flask,' with great uniformity of pressure. 
Corresponding screws have been before used 
in machines for making tile and brick. We 
have combined the parts adapting the mech 
anism to operate Successfully in producing 
molds. We have arranged for operating the 
machine conveniently and rapidly. We can 
with modifications work under widely-vary 
ing conditions. 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 
this specification and represent what we con 
sider the best means of carrying out the in 
vention. 
Figure1 is a central vertical section through 
the entire machine, and Fig. 2 is a plan view 
so of the lower portion. The remaining figures 
45 
are vertical sections showing modifications. 
Fig. 3 shows the upper portion of the ma 
chine made portable and used to fill a sta 
tionary mold. Fig. 4 represents two condi 
tions, the right side corresponding to Fig. 3, 55 
and the left side corresponding to Fig. 1, with 
modifications. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures where they 
OCC. 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, A is a fixed cas 
ing of cast-iron. 
C is an upright shaft operated by worm 
gear C and carrying screw-blades C. It re 
ceives rotary motion from a worm, B, carried 65 
on a rapidly-revolving shaft, B, driven by a 
belt, B, running on fast and loose pulleys, 
(shown by dotted lines B".) The shaft Cissup. 
ported in a long bearing, or, more properly, two 
bearings, in the upper portion of the casing. 7o 
The sand, properly screened and prepared, is 
introduced by hand or by machinery, either 
constantly or at short intervals, in the upper 
portion, A', of the casing, and the screw-blades 
traverse in a smooth cylindrical portion, A, 75 
of the casing. The sweep of the screw-blades 
or wings nearly fills the cylindrical interior. 
The bottom A* of the cylindrical casing is 
finished evenly. 
At suitable points on the fixed frame-work 
are series of stout supports or shelves A. D. 
is a table supported thereon by dogs E, which 
are carried in suitable bearings on the under 
side of the table and pressed forward by 
springs, one of which is shown at F. These 
allow the table D to be adjusted to various 
heights to accommodate flasks of different 
depths. A considerable cavity is formed in 
the center of the table D, in which plays a 
lifter, G, operated by levers H, arranged to go 
be actuated by the foot of the attendant to 
elevate the lifter G a little above the main sur 
face of the table D when desired. The cen 
ter h of these levers His supported in the 
table D, and is raised and lowered with the 95 
latter in adjusting the machine for different 
flaskS. 
M is a mold-board. 
M M are respectively the cope and drag of 
a flask having lugs and guide-pins, as usual. Ioo 
2 
331,553 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
P is the pattern. The sand is marked s. 
In the drawings, to the right of Fig. 1, we 
show the condition of the flask when we com 
mence to make the molds according to our in 
vention-that is to say, with the drag filled 
with sand and the pattern in place. 
After a flask is placed in position and be. 
fore the sand is forced down into it, the treadle 
levers H are depressed by the attendant. 
Through the action of the levers H the lifter 
is raised to press the upper edge of the cope 
into firm contact with the lower edge of the cy 
lindrical case A'. A shipper, (not shown,) 
which may be of any ordinary or suitable con 
struction, operated by a lever worked by the 
attendant, controls a belt, B, which, running 
alternately on and off the fast pulley indi 
cated by the dotted circle B' in Fig. 1, starts 
and stops the screw-blades at will. 
I is a ring loosely inclosing the cylinder A. 
Pins a, inserted through the upper ends of the 
slots i into corresponding sockets in the cyl 
inder A, hold this ring firmly up, so that it 
is of no effect when the machine is used as 
above described; but under different condi 
tions the ring I serves as a sand-box, as seen 
in Fig. 3. 
Assuming the operator to be familiar with 
making castings by hand, and to be provided 
with proper patterns and flasks, the opera 
tion may proceed rapidly. 
Fig. 1 shows a flask in position in the 
machine, the screw-blades having operated to 
force down the Sand and pack it properly in 
all parts of the interior, so as to constitute a 
complete mold, requiring only an opening and 
closing of the flask, and the removal of the 
pattern, and the establishment by any ordinary 
or suitable means of the sprue and gate 
through which the melted metal shall be in 
troduced. The foot of the attendant resting 
on the treadle gives warning when the lifter 
is forced down by the continued strong action 
of the screw-blades C, so that the upper edge 
of the cope is a little out of contact with the 
cylinder A*. When this occurs, the attendant 
shifts the belt B and stops the rotation of the 
shaft C. The Sand is then cut across above 
the cope by the use of a fine wire provided 
with handles and operated in the obvious 
manner. Then the treadle H is released, the 
lifter G, with its load-i. e., the drag M and 
cope M, both packed with sand-sinks out of 
contact with the sand above, and the flaskMM 
may be moved away and a fresh oneintroduced. 
The right-hand side of Fig. 1 shows a flask 
ready to be slid upon the lifter and to be 
raised SO SOOn as the flask which now occu 
pies that position is removed. 
By drawing outward the several bolts or 
dogs E and raising or lowering the table D 
it may be adjusted to various heights. 
Parts of the invention may be used with 
out the whole. Some of the most obvious 
modifications are shown in additional figures, 
and will be briefly described. 
Fig. 3 shows the machine operated, as above 
described, as a portable machine. In this fig 
ure the pattern Phas been set in good molding 
sands, which is assumed to rest on or in the 
floor of the foundry. M' is a cope properly 
placed thereon to receive the sand to form the 
upper part of the mold. In this figure the 
pins a have been removed, and the ring I has 
been allowed to descend, so as to form a sand 
box resting on the top of the cope. Thus con 
ditioned, the operation of the screw C forces 
down the dampened sand until not only the 
cope M, but also the ring I, is tightly filled 
with sand. Now, a wire being used, as before, 
to sever the sand between the cope M and the 
ring I, the machine is lifted off and moved to 
a new place, where the operation may be re 
peated. In this mode of working, the com 
pressed sand which fills the ring I should be 
expelled by hand or by working the screw C. 
after the machine is removed from one cope and 
before applying it on another. The Sand thus 
dropped may be subsequently screened or 
otherwise broken up and thoroughly loosened, 
in which condition it is ready to be again 
shoveled or otherwise put into the upper por 
tion, A, of the machine and reused. We es 
teem it important that the sand is forced down 
afresh upon the pattern in each instance with 
out having been previously compressed. 
Fig. 4 shows on the right-hand side the 
same mode of working as Fig. 3, except that 
a number of small castings are being made at 
the same operation, instead of one large one, 
and the flask extends out under the flange of 
the ring I. 
The left-hand side of Fig. 4 shows the gen 
eral mode of working illustrated in Fig. 1; 
but in this modification on the left side of 
Fig. 4 the ring I is omitted and the cylinder 
A is provided with a permanently-attached 
flange. This flange will rest fairly on the 
cope, and the operation will be successfully 
conducted with considerable variations in the 
size of the flask. In this modification shown 
in Fig. 4 different mechanism from that shown 
in Fig. 1 is employed to raise and lower the 
lifter G. In this a rack is attached to the 
lifter, and it is operated by gearing. The 
gearing is driven by a crossed belt from the 
shaft B, suitable friction-clutches (not shown) 
or other convenient means being employed to 
engage and disengage the parts, so that this 
mechanism can be operated to raise the lifter 
and its load while the Screw is at rest, and 
that the screw is operated to force down the 
sand while the lifter is at rest. Wis a brake, 
which serves usefully to allow the proper 
yielding when the flask is pressed full. This 
brake also may serve usefully in controlling 
the lowering of the lifter and its load when 
it is desired to remove the flask. 
It is not essential that the screw-shaft be al 
ways vertical. It may be worked in variously 
inclined or even horizontal positions. We 
believe it practicable to work the machine in 
75 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
I 15 
I25 
33,553 
and cope, and the screw. C., of the lifter G, 
lever H, and the adjustable table D, as set 
forth. 
2. In a machine for making molds for cast 
ings, the casing A, the table D, and means for 
adjusting it at different heights, in combina 
tion with the lifter G and its operating means, 
and with the screw Cand its operating means, 
arranged for joint operation as herein speci 
fied. 
3. In a machine for making molds for cast 
ing, the ring I, having vertical slots i, adapted 
to rise and sink around the cylinder A, in 
combination with the screw C and with pins 
a', as herein specified. 
4. The combination, with the cylinder A, 
the screw C, and its operating means CB B 
B', of the ring I, having slots i, and the pins 
a', operating in said slots, as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our invention we have signed our names in 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
CARL SCHILICKEYSEN. 
EDUARD BRESLAUER, 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
B. ROI, 
Y. W. MOORE. 
an inverted position, forcing the sand upward 
to fill the flask from below, if such mode of 
Working shall under any circumstances be re 
quired. 
We propose in some cases to use a large 
flask with a small cylinder, A', and screw, 
shifting the flask relatively to the screw or the 
screw relatively to the flask, so that all parts 
of the flask shall be acted on in Succession. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The drag of the flask having been filled with 
Sand and the pattern placed in position, either 
the cope is raised up close to the case A or 
Said ring I is brought into contact with the 
cope, and the machine is set into operation to 
complete and pack the sand in the flask. As 
Soon as the packing is completed, the cope is, 
by the Wirementioned, struck off from its con 
nection with the casing A or ring I, and is 
completed for use. 
In either case described-that is to say, 
whether the drag is employed or the cast is 
made on the foundry-floor-the lower half of 
the mold is packed and sifted with parting 
Sand in a manner well known to those skilled 
in the art. 
We claim as our invention 
l. The combination, with casing A, the drag 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331653.txt	(No Model.) 
J. N. RICHEY. 
PORTABLE SAW MILL. 
N. PETERs, photouthographer, washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JAMES N. RICHEY, OF WAYNESBOROUGH, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE FRICK COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PORTABLE SAW. V. L. 
SECE-2C.A. 3 CIN forming part of Letters Patent No. 33,653, dated December 1, l885. 
Application filed September 2, 1885. Serial No. 76,033. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a mill embodying 55 
quickly adjusted into position, the desired 
To all whon, it may concer 7 : 
Be it known that I, JAMES N. RICHEY, of quantity of lumber sawed, and then the mova 
Waynesborough, in the county of Franklin ble parts again packed upon the frame, ready 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Portable 
Saw-Mills; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to wh hit pertains to make 
and use it, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form part of this 
Specification. 
Aly invention relates to an improvement in 
portable saw-mills; and it consists in, first, a 
politable saw-mill, in which the axle and the 
mud-sillare secured together or formed in a sin 
gle piece; second, the combination of the front 
axle, a mud-sill which forms a bolster and is 
placed thereon, and which is made adjustable 
for the purpose of leveling the mill while in 
Operation, and by means of which the front 
wheels can be turned freely in any direction; 
third, the combination of that part of the 
frame or mill which is rigidly secured to the 
Sills, with those portions of the ways which 
are loosely connected thereto and form an ex 
tension of the ways at each end of the frame, 
and which movable portions a 2 adapted to be 
folded back on top of the frate while the mill 
is being moved from place to place; fourth, 
the combination of the stationary part of the 
mill, which is secured to the mud-sills, with 
the movable portion of the ways, and the 
jointed braces for securing the movable por 
tions of the ways in position; fifth, the com 
bination of the wheels, recessed blocks to re 
ceive them while the mill is at work, boards 
which are applied to opposite sides of the 
wheels and blocks, and clamping-bolts for se 
curing the parts together and locking the 
wheels in place; sixth, the combination of the 
two parts of the head-block provided with 
wheels, with a toothed rod or pipe for con 
necting them together; seventh, the cam-wash 
ers, by means of which the ground-wheels are 
locked against lateral motion while the ma 
chine is in operation. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
portable saw-mill which can be hauled like a 
wagon to any desired place, the movable parts 
to be moved to some other place. 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of 
the same. Fig. 3 is an end view. Figs. 4, 5, 
6, 7, and S are detail views of the same. 
A represents the driving-wheels, which are 
made, preferably, of the same size; B, the front 6o 
axle, and C the rear one. The rear sill, D, is 
placed solidly upon the rear axle, or, if SO 
preferred, the rear sill and axle may be made 
in a single piece, in which case the rear wheels 
will be placed on spindles which are attached 65 
directly to the ends of the combined sill and 
axle. If the rear axle and sill are made sepa 
rately, the axle may be made of iron and then 
placed in a groove which is made in the under 
side of the axle, as shown. The sill F upon 7o 
the front axle is secured in place by means of 
the bolt, G, which passes down through the 
husk, the sill, and the axle, and which serves 
as the pivot upon which the axle B turns, so 
that the mill can be turned and moved freely 
about, like a common wagon. While the mill 
is being moved about, the nut on the bolt G will 
be loosened enough to allow a free movement of 
the axle; but when the mill is to be put into op 
eration the nut will be tightened up so as to hold 8o 
the parts rigidly together, and at the same 
time the clamping-bolts or set-screws H will be 
adjusted, so that the sill F will not only assume 
a horizontal position, but be locked rigidly 
in line with the front axle. The rear sill, D, not 85 
having any adjustment by means of Sciews, 
must first be adjusted into a horizontal posi 
tion by means of devices of any kind, which 
are placed under the wheels in case the ground 
is not perfectly level. After the front Sill has go 
been leveled up and locked in place the 
other parts are to be secured in position. The 
two sills are secured rigidly together by means 
of the husk I, ways J, and the braces or tie 
rods. The head-blocks consist of the two 95 
triangular frames E, which are mounted upon 
wheels in the usual manner, and which are 
connected together by means of the pipe (t, 
upon which the two frames can be moved back 
and forth in any desired relation to each other Ioo 
7 5. 
2 
331,653 
75 
O 
5 
and then locked in place. Inside of the pipe 
is placed a wooden rod, b, for the purpose of 
strengthening and bracing the pipe and pre 
venting it from springing in any direction. 
The teeth c are cast separately and then bolted 
to the under side of the pipe, and which also 
help to brace and strengthen the pipe. After 
the stationary part of the frame-work has 
been leveled in place the movable portions 
L of the way are placed in position at each 
end of the frame and supported upon suitable 
Supports, N, of which there will be any desired 
number. These movable parts I of the ways 
are then bolted rigidly in place by the jointed 
brace-rods O, which are provided with swivels 
Q for loosening and tightening the rods, as 
may be desired. After the rods. O have been 
tightened in place by means of the swivels 
the illner portion of the Way or tracks is 
straightened out and prevented from getting 
Out of true by reason of the strain exerted 
upon it by the brace-rods by means of a num 
ber of tie-rods, R, which pass through that 
portion of the Way or track, and are fastened 
5 at their other ends directly to the tie-rods O. 
These rods R are provided with adjusting 
nuts and can be loosened or tightened at will. 
When the mill is to be moved, the rods O are 
detached by means of the swivels, the jointed 
portion turned back over the top of the frame, 
the movable portions of the ways also turned 
back Over the top of the frame, the supports 
N also piled upon the frame, and then the 
machine is ready to be moved to some other 
place after the wheels have been unlocked 
and the frontsill loosened. 
While the mill is in operation, in order to 
lock it rigidly in place each one of the wheels. 
A is placed in a recessed frame, T, which cor 
responds to the shape of the wheels. Then two 
planks, V, are applied to opposite sides of 
both wheels and frames, and then clamping 
bolts X are passed through the planks and 
Wheels, and the wheels then locked so that 
the frame cannot move either forward or back. 
In order to keep the frame from having any 
lateral play while the mill is in operation, 
washers Y, which are made partially wedge 
shaped and provided with handles V', are used 
On the Spindles outside of the wheels. When 
the mill is being moved about, these washers 
are turned so that their thin flat portions come 
against OT opposite the linchpin, and then the 
wheels have just enough lateral play to enable 
them to turn freely without unnecessary fric 
tion. When the mill is about to be used, 
these washers are turned on the spindles, so 
as to bring their wedge-shaped parts to bear 
against the linchpins, and thus lock the wheels 
So tightly in place that the frame can have no 
lateral play whatever. To the front axle is 
Secured the tongued, to which the team is se 
cured when the mill is to be moved from place 
to place. This tongue, being fastened on be 
low the level of the ways, need never to be 
removed, as it does not interfere at any 
time with the operation of the mill. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a portable saw-mill, the rear sill or 
axle provided with wheels, the front axle, also 
provided with wheels, the front sill, which is 
adjustably secured upon the top of the front 
axle, the husk and ways which are placed 
upon the tops of the two sills and connect 
them together, the saw which is journaled 
upon the husk, and the carriage which moves 
back and forth upon the ways, substantially 
as shown. 
2. In a portable saw-mill, the combination 
of the rear sill and axle, combined together so 
as to form practically one piece, and provided 
with wheels, the front axle, the front sill, 
which is adjustably secured upon the front 
axle, the husk and ways which are placed 
upon the tops of the wheels and connect them 
together, the saw, and the carriage which 
moves back and forth upon the ways, Substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a portable saw-mill, the combination 
of the rear sill or axle provided with wheels, 
the front axle, the front sill, adjustably se 
cured thereon, the husk, the ways, tie-rods 
which secure the two sills together, the saw, 
and the carriage which moves back and forth 
upon the ways, Substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the front axle pro 
vided with wheels, the front sill adjustably 
secured thereto, and devices for passing 
through the sill and securing it rigidly in po 
sition in a line with the front axle while the 
mill is in operation, with the husk and ways, 
the rear axle provided with wheels, the saw, 
and the carriage which moves back and forth 
upon the ways, substantially as specified. 
5. The combination of the rear sill or axle, 
the front axle, the front sill which is adjust 
ably mounted thereon, the husk and ways 
which connect the two sills together, the saw, 
and the carriage, with the movable parts of 
the ways which are mounted upon supports 
and then secured rigidly in position in line 
with the stationary part of the ways by means 
of tie-rods which extend from the ends of the 
husks and ways, and which are fastened at one 
end to opposite sides of one of the tracks, 
substantially as shown. 
6. The combination of the rear sill or axle, 
the front axle, the front sill movably secured. 
thereon, the husk and ways which connect 
the two sills rigidly together, the saw, and the 
carriage, with the movable portions of the 
ways, the tie-rods provided with swivels, the 
adjusting-rods which are passed through one 
of the ways and connect with the tie-rods, and 
suitable supports for the movable parts of the 
ways, substantially as described. 
7. In a portable saw-mill, the combination 
of the rear sill or axle provided with wheels, 
the front axle, also provided with wheels, the 
front sill which is adjustably secured upon 
the front axle, the husk and ways which con 
nect the two sills together, the saw, and the 
carriage which moves back and forth on the 
65 
55 
35 
45 
95 
IO3 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
331,653 
- 
3 
ways, with the recessed blocks or frames which 
9. The combination, in a portable saw-mill, 
are placed under the wheels, the planks which of the rear sill or axle, the front sill, wheels 
are applied to the blocks and connect them which are applied to the axles, the husk, Saw, 
together, and the bolts which secure the blocks ways, and carriage which moves back and 20 
5 and plank together, substantially as set forth. forth on the ways, with clamping devices 
S. The combination, in a saw-mill, of the which are applied to the wheels so as to lock 
two triangular frames of the head - block, them rigidly to their axles, and thus prevent 
placed upon the ways and provided with suit- the frame of the saw-mill from swaying lat 
able wheels or rollers for moving on the ways, erally while the mill is in operation, substan- 25 
head-block together, the rod placed inside of 
the pipe, and the teeth which are formed up- presence of two witnesses. 
on or secured to the under side of the pipe, 
and a means for moving the carriage back 
I5 and forth by means of the pipe, substantially 
as specified. 
IO the pipe which connects the two frames of the tially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
J. N. RICHEY. 
Witnesses: 
S. B. RINEHART, 
F. A. LEHMANN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331753.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 331,753. 
W. D, ARNETT, 
SEEDING MACHINE, 
A29. 
h 
Patented Deo. 8, 1885. 
7 
77 4 
A. 
7ty 3 
A. 
 
Fy 6 
t 
t-gs 
WNNesv 
Afg:25 
26%-4 
. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
Vav evast 
William D. A-cutt, 
by 7 ot, OBrien - Co 
his Auto it SS . 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. ARNETT, OF NEAR MORRISON, COLORADO. 
SEED ING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 331,753, dated December 8, 1885. 
Application filed March 20, 1885. Serial No. 159,535. 
(No mode.) 
5. 
O 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM D. ARNETT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing near 
Morrison, in the county of Jefferson and State 
of Colorado, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Seeding-Machines, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
seeding-machines, being certain improvements 
on the invention for which Letters Patent No. 
312,791 were issued to me, said Letters Patent 
bearing date February 24, A. D. 1885. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a top view. Fig. 3 
is a top view of the covering device. Fig. 4 
is a side view of said device. Fig. 5 is an 
end view of my invention. Fig. 6 is a top 
sectional view of Fig. 5, cut through the line 
0. Similar letters refer to similar parts in the 
a 
several views. 
In Figs. 1 and 2, a is the drag-bar, the for 
ward part of which consists of two arms di 
verging from each other, as shown in the 
drawings, said arms being attached to the 
beam E, forming part of the frame of the ma 
chine, by the staples c c, which pass through 
said beam and are fastened by nuts, as shown. 
a' a' are corresponding arms of adjacent 
drag-bars, the right arm of one bar and the 
left arm of the other being attached to the 
beam E by the same staple c. Each drag-bar 
consists of two wrought-iron plates riveted to 
gether, as shown, and branching into two arms 
at each extremity. d d are cast-iron plates 
containing the disk-axles d". The plates did 
are bolted to the drag-bar a between the 
branching extremities of the same, as shown. 
The plates did are adjusted by means of the 
wedges ee, placed between the plates and the 
drag-bar, as shown. The wedgese e are held 
in any desired position by tightening the nuts 
upon the bolts ff, which pass through the 
piates and the drag-bar, said wedges passing 
between said bolts. By means of said adjust 
ment of the plates d d by the Wedges e e the 
disks g g are made to form any desired angle 
so with the line of the machine's forward move 
45 
3C) 
 
55 
65 
ment, thus cutting a furrow of any width that 
may be deemed necessary. The forward part 
of the plates did extend above the drag-bars 
and lap over the same sufficiently to come in 
contact with each other, as shown in Fig. 5. 
To the top of the plated is attached by a bolt, 
h', the guide h for the reception of the con 
ducting-tube i. To the bolt his also attached 
the Spring m, by means of which the drag-bars 
are raised and lowered. To the plate d is 
also pivoted the conductor j, which conveys 
the grain to the ground, depositing it in the 
furrow formed by the cutting-disks g. The 
conductor i swings easily upon the pivot j', 
preventing any injury to the machine should 
the conductor come in contact with a stone or 
other obstruction by yielding to the resisting 
object and returning to its proper position by 
its own weight. The conductor i is adjusted 
laterally by means of the wedgel, Figs. 5 and 
6, which contains the slot l', through which it 
is bolted to a narrow flange projecting from 
the bottom of the plated toward the conduct 
or i, the grain being thus dropped at any de 
sired distance from the disks. The covering 5 
devices b b are bolted to the rear arms of the 
drag-bars through the slots b'b', by means of 
which slots the said covering devices are ad 
justed vertically, thus regulating the depth 
of the furrow cut by the disks. The covering 8o 
devices b b project slightly outward from the 
drag-bar as they extend forward, the object 
of said projection being to gather the dirt 
thrown out by the disks and replace it in the 
furrow from which it was thrown. On the 85 
inner side of the rear and bottom portion of 
the covering device b is formed a flange, b, 
which presses the dirt compactly around the 
grain. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to go 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
In a seeding-machine, the combination of 
the conductor j, the adjustable plates d, at 
tached to the drag-bar, as described, and the 
wedgese, substantially as described and shown, 95 
and for the purpose set forth. 
WILLIAMI. D. ARNETT. 
In presence of - 
J. B. WILLSEA, 
W. R. MCDERNIOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331853.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 331853, 
J. T. WARREN. 
- 
RAZOR STROP, 
Patented Dec. 8, 1885, 
  
 
 
ZZ 
C Z 
%2%SS3 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
2gGca A 
2 S 
 
PTERS, Photo-Lithographer washingtono, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JABEZ T. WARREN, OF LEROY, NEW YORK. 
RAZOR STRO P 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 331,853, dated December 8, 1885. 
Application filed May 20, 1885. Serial No. 166,212. 
(No model.) 
I that when the ends of the tin and leather are 
To all vv.hom, it may concern: 
secured to either end of the curved steelhone 
Beit known that I, JABEZ T. VVARREN, a 
the leather backed by the tin, by being in a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Le 
straight line across the curve, will forma yield 
Roy, in the county of Genesee and State of New 
ing hone, which is found to be of advantage 55 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
for the purpose of putting a fine cutting-edge 
provement in Razor-Strops, of which the fol 
upon the razor or other implement. 
lowing is a specification. 
In honing a razor it often happens that the 
My invention relates to improvements in 
edge becomesslightly turned or made ragged 
razor-strops in which the hone and finishing 
by overhoning, or otherwise, which of course 6o 
Io surfaces are used in conjunction; and the ob 
causes the implement to do imperfect work, 
jects are, first, to provide a metallic hone 
yet the imperfections are so slight that they 
slightly curved from heelto point, to be used 
are unobservable to the naked eye. Toremedy 
in connection with an abrading compound; 
second, to facilitate the operation ofsharpen 
this result II have devised annethod of insert 
ingrazors by attachingto the hone a yielding 
ing a double convex lens, F, in one of the 65 
ends of the strop, (out of the way,) which so 
polishing-surface; and, third, to supply the 
magnifiesany object brought within range that 
strop with a magnifying-lens, so as to enable 
the parts can be minutely and quickly exam 
the operator to institute a critical examina 
inedatany stage ofsharpening, and thus enable 
tion of the work as it progresses. I attain 
the operatorto continue work until a fine edge 
these objects by the mechanism illustrated in 
is produced, and to cease operations before the 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
edge is turned or made ragged. The orifice 
Figure lis a perspective view of the hone 
in the steel (for mounting the lens) is coun 
with the cap of the handle removed to show 
tersunk upon the inside, within which the 
the cavity for holding the abrasive com 
lens is placed, and is there held between the 
pound. Said figure also shows the magnifying 
leather and metal by cementing the parts to 
lens in position. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec 
gether. 
tional view taken through the face-center of 
To make my hone more effective than would 
the strop, showing the location of the several 
otherwise be done, (by the use of the ordinary 
parts. 
abrading-mixture,) have compounded an at 
Similarletters referto similar parts through 
trition-paste which Ipurpose to make the sub 
out the severai views. 
A represents the curved steelhone; C, the ject ofanother application; hence I will not 
describe it at this time, but reserve the right 
handle, and c the cavity in the end of the 
to patent at some future period. 
same for holding the abrading compound. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I purpose to make application for a patent 
I desire to secure by Letters Patentis 
for an abrading-paste which may be spread 
A razor-strop consisting of the magnifying 
upon the hard steel surface of the hone A, 
lens, the longitudinally - curved blade, the 
which Will materially aid in the attrition up 
handle, the paste-receptacle in the handle, and 
on the cutting part of the razor. d is a me 
the leather finishing-hone secured to the thin 
tallic cap for closing the orifice of the paste 
metallic base, the same being fastened to the 
cavity to prevent any foreign mixture from 
ends of the curved blade, upon the concave 
entering into its composition. E istheleather 
side thereof, all these parts arranged and op 
finishing-hone firmly secured to the metallic 
erating substantially as shown, and hereinde 
back e, while both pieces E and e are secured 
scribed. 
at their ends upon the concave side of the 
steel blade A. This finishing-hone is of the 
same surface dimensions as the steel part, and 
is provided with a metallic back of thin ma 
terial-such as tin-upon which the leatheris 
5o cemented while in a stretched condition, so 
RANDOLPHI BALLARD, 
VVILLIAM R. CROFOOT, 
JABEZ T. WARREN. 
WitnesSes: 
75 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US331953.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J. EBNETER, 
EMBROIDERING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet. . 
No. 331,953, 
Patented Dec. 8, 1885. 
S 
ZAZAveesses: 
 
/re pera-Zor 
wool, we 
23, who,0w 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 331,953, 
J. J. EBNETER, 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
EMBROIDERING MACHINE, 
Patented Dec. 8, 1885. 
 
  
 
 
SS 
v. 
A-?hir 
Senatoe, 
is 6 
f 
A0Azzesses: 
so a 
 
 
Azarentor. 
"3". 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. J. EBNETER. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 331,953, 
EMBROIDERING MACHINE, 
Aziz Z Patented Dec. 8, 1885, 
-- 
---------- 
--- 
--- 
--mo 
as-- 
--- 
-- 
--- 
P---- 
- 
-- 
F------------- -------------------------- 
- - - - - - - - - - !-- - - - - - - - - - -------------- 
ee site -------------------, -i- - - -r-r-far-ri-- - - - - 
- - - - 
if 
t 
1 
-- 
-- 
P 
--- 
- 
22 
s 
s 
A / 
2 
-- 
- i f 
ar 
A. 
ess re-ric 
------ 
a cerer.er." See Fre arr 
- - - - 
F 
:-- 
: 
t 
- 
( 
e 
Z 
--- 
2 
If || 
: 
: 
i; 
if 
a . 
-- 
- 
f 
r 
fill---------------- ----------------------------fil----- 
Ricar 
- - - 
--- m 
ZOAvesses. 
Zzavendor: 
peers, photo-iithograph.cr. washington. O.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. J. EBNETER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 33,953, 
Patented Dec. 8, 1885. 
EMBROIDERING MACHINE, 
Tu - - 
f SA s 
A. A 
Z 
M 
T. (2) Tz7. 
Z 
Z 
Z. 
4N 
tizdzeesses: 
Zrarezofor: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN JACOB EBNETER, OF ST. GALL, ST. GALL, SWITZERLAND. 
EM B R O DE RING - MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 33,953, dated December 8, 1885. 
Application filed September 30, 1884. Serial No. 144,332. (No model.) Patented in England July 18, 1884, No. 10,307; in Belgium 
July 31, 1884, No. 65,801; in Italy August 13, 1884, XXXIV, 105; in Austria-Hungary October 8, 1884, No. 25,877 and No. 4,577; 
in France December 3, 1884, No. 150,810, and in Germany March 27, 1885, No. 30,931. 
To all, whon, it may concern 
Beit known that I, JoHN JACOB EBNETER, 
a citizen of the Republic of Switzerland, re 
siding at St. Gall, in the Canton of St. Gall, 
Switzerland, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Embroidering-Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
suitable device for a so-called Heilmann or 
common hand embroidering-machine in order 
that the latter may be used for embroidering 
with a continuous thread by means of shuttles 
working together with fixed or eye-pointed 
needles, besides performing the ordinary duty 
ascribed to such machines. 
The advantages of my improvements are 
chiefly that fabrics can be embroidered with 
very different kinds of stitches without being 
removed to another machine, thus facilitating 
the work, while the quality of the embroidery 
is also greatly improved. In order to attain 
this object I provide one of the two carriages 
bearing the pinchers in a hand-embroidering 
machine with a special row of eye-pointed 
needles, which are brought to action whenev 
er the embroidery has to be done with the 
continuous thread. These special needles cor 
respond to a set of shuttles on the other side 
of the fabric, put to work or brought out of 
way simultaneously with the former. When 
ever the eye-pointed needles and shuttles are 
set to work, the to-and-fro motion of the said 
carriage is modified, the way being shortened 
while the other carriage is stopped entirely, 
having no participation in this quality of 
work. 
The mechanism for carrying my invention 
into effect is illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure I is a front view showing the gen 
eral form of a machine exhibiting my improve 
ments. Fig. II is a left-side elevation of the 
machine on a larger scale. Fig. III is a front 
view of the right part of the machine on same 
scale as Fig. II, some parts which are shown 
in other figures being removed to make the 
figure clearer. Fig. IV is a vertical section of 
a part of the machine parallel to the side ele 
55 
65 
out the Several views. 
vation and in larger scale. Fig. V represents 5o 
a plan view of a portion of the flat rail sup 
porting the rail carrying the shuttles and the 
shuttle-driver connected there with. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
In the drawings, the framing of the machine 
is shown at a. a. As in a Heilmann machine, 
two carriages, b and b in Fig. II, which are 
movable forward and backward by endless 
belts r r, carry, by means of arms BB, four 6o 
bars, c'e' ce', which bear the pinchers PP, 
(see Fig. IV,) the latter being opened and 
closed by eccentric rods did, for taking hold of 
the usual double-pointed needles alternatively. 
on each other side of the fabric FF, which is 
placed in the screen or frame f and stretched 
and wound around rollers e e. The pattern 
card D, which governs the attendant in mov 
ing the pantograph G G, and the latter are 
shown only in Fig. I. In other figures these 7o 
parts have been omitted in order not to crowd 
the drawings, being features well known to 
all interested in the art of embroidering. 
The usual devices for perforating the fabric 
and festooning and other accessories are also 75 
not shown for same reason, and because they 
can be applied to the machine exhibiting my 
improvements without interfering with the 
latter in any way. 
All the above-mentioned parts of the ma 
chine belong to the common hand embroider 
ing or Heilmann machine. They may thus be 
modified in any known manner, and receive 
their motion by the means employed hereto 
fore on such machines. The mechanism for 
imparting motion to the carriages b and l' 
when the latter are used in the common way 
is thus not shown in the drawings, and will 
not be described, being the same as used in 
any embroidering-machine built on the Heil 
mann principle. 
It should be remarked that the bars c' c' 
on Fig. II, bearing the pinchers, are alike to 
the bars c' c, forming thus two sets of devices 
for performing the similar work of embroid- 95. 
ering on two separate pieces of fabric, F. F. 
According to this arrangement the correspond 
ing parts pertaining specially to my improve- . 
O 
25 
35 
40 
2 
33,953 
IO 
55 
. 
5 
For carrying out the purpose of my inven- 90. 
ments, which are now to be specified, are also 
moves the carriage b away from the fabric. 
shown in two applications on Fig. II, but in one 
During the intervals when the bar 2 is released 
on Fig. IV. 
the frame f, supporting the fabric, can be 
The devices described in the following mat 
moved by the pantograph, as is done usually 
ter concern specially the parts of the embroid 
in embroidering-machines. 
ering-machine which are used when the 
As shown specially in Figs. IV and V, a 
stitches are made with eye-pointed needles 
rail, s, is provided, corresponding to bar g, 
and shuttles using a continuous thread. 
but situated on the opposite side of the fabric. 
To the bar c' on carriage b" another bar, g, 
Rail s supports a flat rail, s, which has suit- 7 
parallel to the former, is attached at each end 
able grooves to receive the shuttless's", and 
by means of an arm, g, movable at its full 
a metallic plate, s, acting as shuttle-driver. 
crum, being connected with a pin, g, to and 
The latter is connected by a link, s', and arm 
supported by bracket g, made fast to bar c', 
s', to a vertical rod or shaft, s. As will be 
as shown in Fig. IV. Other similar arms may 
seen on Fig. III, shafts' receives an oscillating 
be adapted at suitable distances on barg in 
motion by the arms', which is provided with . 
order to hold it more rigid. The barg is pro 
a cam corresponding to the groove of Can 
vided with a row of eye-pointed needles, i, 
wheels. This cam-wheel is fixed on main 
fixed to the former, thus remaining always on 
shaft at, and revolves with the latter. The shaft 
the same side of the fabric. The arms of be 
s' being connected, as described, with the shut 
ing movable, the barg, with needles i, can be 
tle-drivers, the shuttles will make a suitable 
brought in position for the work with continu 
to-and-fro motion at each revolution of the 
ous thread or put out of way when the em 
main shaft it. 
broidering is done by double-pointed needles. 
The removing of barg is done by swinging it 
tion, the rails, which supports the shuttles, 
up and back, the arm g' turning on its full 
cannot be fixed directly to the frame of the 
crum. Whenever this operation is performed, 
machine, but must be movable, in order that: 
the carriage b is moved away from the fab. 
it may be brought out of way when the em 
ric at suitable distance, otherwise the barg 
broidering is to be done no longer by the shut 
would interfere with the arms 2' of bar 2, to 
tles and eye-pointed needles, but with the 
be described later in my specification. 
double-pointed needles. For the object thus 
The continuous thread for the eye-pointed 
stated, rails is made fast to three rods, p, one 
needles is wound on bobbin h, which is pro 
near each end of the rail and one at its center. 
vided with the usual accessories-for instance, 
These rods are made to slide in corresponding 
with a flat spring, k, acting at certain inter 
boxes, p", which are fast on the frame of the 
vals, as a tension on the bobbin. Spring k is 
machine, and may be either square or cylin 
fixed to rocking arm land pressed against the 
drical, being in the latter case provided with 
bobbin or released by rod l and lever l', the 
a groove or other suitable device for prevent 
latter being acted upon by a cam-wheel, l, set 
ing their revolving on their axis, allowing 
on main shaft it. (See Figs. II, III, IV.) From 
them only to slide up and down in the boxes' 
the bobbin the continuous thread passes 
p'. The rods p are hollow and provided with 
around rods t and t and the eccentric rods d 
a screw-fillet fitting screws p", as shown in Fig. 
to the corresponding eye-pointed needles. 
IV. The screws are made to revolve by pin 
This thread is stretched or loosened by motion 
ions p' and p", shaft p", and crank p". It will 
of the arms t and t, rod t, lever t, and cam 
be easily understood that by turning the crank 
wheel t, the latter being set on shaft u. (See 
handle forward or backward the screws will 
Fig. III.) 
lift or bring down the rails. 
Whenever the embroidering is done with 
I prefer to use the described means for mov 
continuous thread, using the described eye 
ing rails up and down; but it shall be under 
pointed needles i, the carriage b", which bears 
stood that I might apply other known devices 
the latter, receives a special motion, being 
which may be suitable for the same purpose. 
brought against the fabric and away from it 
Having thus described the several parts of 
by rod m, rocking arms m and m, moved by 
my improved embroidering-machine, I shall 
cam-wheel m'. Rod m, being fixed to the car 
resume briefly how the embroidering is done. I2O. 
riage by a hook resting on pin m', can be loos 
For embroidering with a continuous-thread 
ened from the carriage very easily, thus stop 
by means of shuttles and eye pointed needles, 
ping the latter whenever necessary. Carriage 
rails, with the shuttles, railg, with the eye 
b', which is not working when the eye-pointed 
pointed needles i, and the bar 2, are brought 
needles, and the shuttles are operated, is held 
in the suitable position toward the fabric and I25. 
at rest by rod n, having a fulcrum at one end 
set in motion by the intermediate mechanism 
and a hook at the other. 
by applying driving power to main shaft al. 
Another device used when the continuous 
Whenever the ordinary hand embroidering 
thread is at work is the bar 2, which is pressed 
has to be done, the parts just named are re 
against the fabric for tightening the latter by 
moved out of way, rails is removed from its 13o 
rocking arms 2 and 2", which are fixed on the 
place by turning the screws p", by means of 
same rod 2", and Spiral spring 2', acting on 
crank p", rail g is swung back, and bar 2 is 
arm 2'. Bar 2 is released by the arm 2 being 
allowed to drop somewhat from its place by 
pushed by collar 2" of rod m when the latter unfastening spring 2'. Rodm is released from 
g IC5. 
95 
IOO. 
IO: 
II.5. 
25 
35 
45 
33i,953 
3 
carriage l', and rod in from carriage b'. Both these facts, specifically claim the invention 
carriages, supporting the bars c' cc c, with herein shown and pointed out in the claim. 
pinchers PP, are set in motion by endless 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
belts rand other mechanisms usual in ordinary 
hand embroidering-machines. I may thus al 
ternatively make on the same fabrics different 
kinds of embroidering, and by adding the usual 
devices for perforating the fabric and festoon 
ing I may add in an embroidery composed 
mainly of step-stitches all varieties of designs, 
which can only be produced on a hand em 
broidering-machine. 
For increasing the quantity of work to be 
done with the embroidering-machine on using 
the continuous thread, I may apply several 
rows of eye-pointed needles with correspond 
ing shuttles, as is shown, for instance, on Fig. 
II, where i represents a row of needles similar 
to needles i, with corresponding accessory de 
vices. 
I am aware that embroidering-machines 
have heretofore been provided with movable 
carriages carrying a series of needles, the 
whole working in conjunction with shuttles op 
erated by cams, whereby the shuttles are given 
a to-and-fro motion. I therefore, in view of 
what I claim, and wish to secure by Letters 3o 
Patent, is 
In an embroidering-machine, the combina 
tion of the carriage b, rods in m. m., pin m', 
cam-wheelm, rotary shaft it, bars c' c', arm B, 
eccentric rods d, framef, rollersee, barg, arm 
g', ping", bracket of, eye-pointed needles i i", 
bar 2, arm 2', fulcrum 2, spring 2, collar a, 
bobbin h, flat spring k, rocking arm l, rod, 
lever i, cam-wheel l, rod t and t, arms it, 
rods t, and levert, cam-wheel t, angle-rails, 
flat rails, shuttless, metallic plates, links', 
arms, vertical rods, arms s', cam-wheels, 
main driving-shaft at, rods p, boxes p, screw 
p', pinions pp', shaft p", and crankp, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto sign my 
name, in the presence of two subscribing wit 
nesses, this 12th day of June, 1884. 
JOHN JACOB EBNETER, 
Witnesses: 
EMIL BILUM, 
MORITZ WEITB. 
35 
45 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332053.txt	(No Model.) 
I, COLE. 
CHAIN FOR BRACELES 
No. 332,053, 
Patented Dec. 8, 1885. 
WITNESSES 
e?see alya 
2242-4- 
/all () BY 
INVENTOR 
so oc Seve 
7724 
is ATTORNEYS 
perERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washingto: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC COLE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
CHAN FOR BRACE ETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 332,053, dated December 8, 1885. 
Application filed August 6, 1885. Serial No. 173,715. 
(No model.) 
To all tufuO77, it naily concern, 
Be it known that I, ISAAC COLE, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Brooklyn, 
in the county of Kings and State of New York, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Attachment-Chains for Bracelets and other 
Jewelry, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Ornamental chains, and especially to that class 
of chains known as '' attachment chains, 
which are adapted to be connected to the free 
ends of bracelets, lockets, or to similar ar 
ticles of jewelry; and my invention consists, 
essentially, in providing one or both ends of 
a chain with a link, which is provided with 
an opening on one of its sides, and is secured 
rigidly to the end of the chain, all of which, 
together with other novel features, is more fully 
pointed out in the following specification and 
claims, and illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents an elevation of my im 
proved attachment - chain as secured to a 
Fig. 2 is a face view of one end of 
bracelet. 
the same, on a larger scale than the preced 
ing figure. Fig. 3 is a side view of the same. 
Fig. 4 is a face view of the end link de 
tached. Fig. 5 is a face view of a modified 
form of end link. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter A designates an 
attachment-chain, the body of which is com 
posed of links united in the usual manner, while 
the links employed can also be of any desired 
shape. On each end of this chain A can be 
placed what I shall term an '' end link, B, 
which latter, as shown in the drawings, Figs. 
2 and 4, is oval-shaped, and consequently the 
sides b b thereof are necessarily oblique to 
the axis of the link. This end link is pro 
vided with an opening, b, in one of its sides, in 
order that it may be slipped over the last link, 
C, of the chain, and also that it may be in 
serted into the eye or link D, Fig. 1, usually 
secured to the bracelet or other article of 
jewelry. This opening b may be situated 
centrally with reference to the ends of the end 
link; but by preference it is placed some 
what nearer the smaller end of the Said link. 
It frequently occurs that the end link of 
an attachment - chain having its opening in 
one end of the link, as usual, So turns that 
35 
A 
45 
O 
 
55 
65 
75 
the said opening is brought around to the last 
link proper of the chain, and any slight 
stress upon the attachment-chain will then 
cause the same to pull out from the said end 
link, which may result in the loss of the brace 
let. To avoid this I place the opening in the 
side of the end link, and so incline the sides 
of the same that the smaller end of the said 
link will always be in engagement with the 
last link-that is to say, the end link will 
not be liable to turn. Although the link, as 
described, will remain almost stationary in 
position, yet for such chains as attachment 
chains I prefer to secure this end link, B. rig 
idly to the last link of the chain, which I can 
do by soldering the former thereto in prox 
imity of the point c after proper insertion into 
the said last link. 
The end link shown in Fig. 5 differs from 
that shown in the preceding figures in hav 
ing flatter ends-a form which I have found 
very efficient when the end link is not soldered 
ol' otherwise Secured in position. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, an at 
tachment-chain having an end link or links 
rigidly secured there to, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, an at 
tachment-chain having a link or links rig 
idly secured to the end of the chain and pro 
vided with a side opening, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. As a new article of manufacture, an at 
tachment-chain provided with end links rig 
idly secured thereto, said end links having 
Side openings, Substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
4. As a new article of manufacture, an at 
tachinent-clhain provided with oval end links, 
which links are rigidly secured thereto, and 
each of which is provided with a side open 
ing near its smaller end, substantially as shown 
and described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
ISAAC COLE. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
J. WAN SANTWOORD, 
A. FABER DU FAUR, Jr, 
93 
95 
ICO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332153.txt	(No Model.) 
H. C. HOWELL, 
CORN AND PEA PLANTER 
No. 332,153. 
Patented Dec. 8, 1885, 
E. 
NYZENCO2 : 
42 64-4 
---4- 1zzorney. 
PETERS. Photo-lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. HOWELL, OF BATON ROUGE, LOUISIANA. 
CORN AND PEA PLAN TER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 332,153, dated December 8, 1885. 
Application filed May 29, 1885. Serial No. 167,027. (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY C. How ELL, of 
Baton Rouge, in the parish of East Baton 
Rouge and State of Louisiana, have invented 
a new and Useful Improvement in Corn and 
Pea Planters, which improvement is fully set 
forth in the following specification and accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view, partly in section, of 
my improved corn and pea planter; Fig. 2, a 
plan view of the same; Fig. 3, an enlarged 
perspective view of the rear end of the lever 
connecting with the handles, and Fig. 4 is a 
perspective view of the dropper. 
The presentinvention relates to animprove 
ment in corn and pea planters, wherein I pro 
vide a pair of beveled wheels a short distance 
apart upon a common axle, connected together 
by means of bolts or pins designed to operate 
a rocking lever connecting at its forward end 
With a dropper, whereby the seed is fed into 
the furrowing-drill intermediately, and the 
seed lever and dropper may be stopped or 
started by connecting the rear end of the lever 
with the handles rearwardly, all of which will 
now be set forth in detail. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the frame of the planter, having suitable 
transverse connecting-pieces, B, and suitable 
handles, C. At the rear end of this frame I 
provide a transverse axle, D, having thereon 
a pair of wheels, E, of any suitable size, and 
having the inner ends of their peripheries 
F formed somewhat beveling. These wheels 
are designed to be placed a few inches apart 
rigidly upon the axle, connected by means of 
fulcrum-pins G some distance outwardly from 
the axle D. Forward from these wheels E an 
upright post, G, is placed over the transverse 
piece B, provided at its upper end with a 
recess wherein a lever, H, is hinged. Rear 
wardly this lever H rests between the wheels 
E, and as the said wheels revolve a rocking 
motion is produced by engaging with the full 
crum-pins C C. The forward end of this lever 
has a vertical rod, I, extending to and con 
necting with the dropper J within the seed 
box K. 
The dropper, as shown in Fig. 4, is provided 
With an adjustable plate secured by means of 
a set-screw, L, whereby the quantity of seed 
7o 
discharged from the seed-box may be regulat 
ed. Upwardly from this adjustable plate I 
provide a lug, M, designed to agitate the seed 
and prevent the seed from becoming choked 55 
up around the dropper in its passage into the 
furrowing-drill beneath. 
When it is desired to stop the operation of 
the dropper, I do so by raising the rear end of 
the rocking lever H sufficiently to prevent its 6o 
engaging with the fulcrum-lugsC between the 
wheels, and to secure it in position by means 
of a pin passing through the vertical pin-holes 
O, housed within a transverse piece, P, be 
tween the handles, and with its lower end em- 65 
bracing and hinged to the said lever. When 
the rocking lever is in operation, this pin Q 
may be removed, thus permitting the vertical 
pins O to play freely vertically Within the 
transverse piece P. 
As will be noticed, the lever H, by therevo 
lution of the wheels E, engages intermediately 
with the fulcrum-pins CC, which rocks the 
said lever sufficiently to fill the dropper J 
with seed within the hopper Kat the forward 75 
part of the machine, and deposit the said seed 
into the furrowing-drill N beneath the frame. 
A pair of covering-shovels rearwardly from 
this drill,in connection with the beveled wheels 
rearwardly, assist in covering the seed, and 8o 
at the same time form somewhat of a ridge 
over it. 
When it is desired to move the machine 
without the dropping attachment, the lever 
can be raised rearwardly, so as to clear the 85 
fulcrum-pins in the revolution of the wheels, 
and secure it in position to the handles by 
means of vertical sliding pins O, and secured 
in position by means of the pin. 
What I claim as new is- 
1. In a corn and pea planter, a main frame 
and wheels, in combination with a rock 
ing lever engaging intermittently with full 
crum-pins between a pair of beveled wheels, 
and forwardly with a dropper, so as to feed 95 
the seed into the furrowing-drill, substantially 
as herein set forth. 
2. In a corn and pea planter, a main frame 
and wheels, in combination with a rocking 
lever hinged centrally, and connected at its ICO 
forward end by means of a rod with the stem 
of the dropper within the seed-box, and so 
9C 
 
332,153 
disposed as to feed seed into the furrowing 
drill intermittently by engaging rearwardly 
with fulcrum-pins located between the beveled 
wheels, and also arranged to be thrown out of 
gear by means of a vertical piece and pin con 
necting with the handles, substantially as 
herein set forthi. 
3. The combination of the rocking lever, 
connecting forwardly with the dropper and 
rearwardly with the handles, so disposed as 
to engage with pins between the wheels, with 
the beveled wheels disposed upon the axle and 
connected together by means of transverse 
pins, substantially as herein set forth. 
4. The combination of the rocking lever, 
hinged somewhat centrally, engaging with the 
wheels rearwardly, so as to produce a rocking 
IO 
motion, with the seed-box, the furrowing 
drill, and the adjustable dropper having the 
lug m, substantially as herein set forth. 
5. The combination of the furrowing-drill 
N, the adjustable dropper L, provided with the 
lug m, the rocking lever H, and She beveled 
wheels, the whole arranged as and for the pur 
pose substantially as herein set forth and de 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand, this 1st day of 
May, 1885, in the presence of witnesses. 
scribed. 
HENRY C. HOWELL, 
- 
25 
Witnesses: 
B. MULHOLLAND, 
JAS. J. WOULF. 
 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332253.txt	7 
(No Model.) 
J. HARRINGTON, 
8. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 332,253. 
R0TARY ENGINE, 
Patented Deo, 15, 1885. 
With esses. 
2 
63%-4- 
ra 
A2.2e la Zor 
/2 2. 
6, 
C%.-- 
^seys s 
N. PETERS, Paulo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
b 
No. 332,253. 
J. HARRINGTON, 
ROTARY ENGINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
k 
Patented Dec. 15, 1885. 
V/faesses 
Agavezafor 
(34%-4. 
(, (2.4/ 
4 witeracy. 
N. PEERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washingtoll, O.C. 
 
 
 
 
 
####################################### 
NNN?N S Z 
No. 
No. 
WITN/ESSES 
C-6- M2/32--- 
(No Model.) 
No. 332,253, 
J. HARRINGTON. 
ROTARY ENGINE. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1885. 
N 
SS 2 
N 2 2 
SN 
I-JI 
;------ 
i 
 
~~~~); 
:::::::: 
VT7 , 88:4&####### 
|---- 
No., | 
=== 
== , ZZ: Z 
|- 
IWYEWTOR 
M 
3. 
4e, Attorneys 
(No Model.) 
No. 332,253. 
J. HARRINGTON, 
ROTARY ENGINE. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1885. 
 
| z +4,7 
pereas, photo-Lithographer, Washingto". 
(No Model.) 
No. 332,253. 
J. HARRINGTON, 
ROTARY ENGINE, 
8 sheets 
Sheet 5, 
Patented Dec. 15, 1885. 
2 N 2 3 
III. Hill 
 
 
 
 
WITWESSES 
C-4. v z2-4- 
2. 
No.?{{################# 
is 
 
W WEWTOR 
A4Attorneys 
(No Model.) 
J. HARRINGTON. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 332,253. Al- 
Patented Deo, 15, 1885. 
ROTARY ENGINE, 
 
 
P 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 332,253. 
J. HARRINGTON, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 7, 
ROTARY ENGINE, 
Patentipe, 15, 1885. 
tzzesses. 
7a ve 22tor 
- 
A4%toreys 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 332,253, 
HARRINGTON, 
J. 
Rotary ENGINE 
8. Sheets-Sheet 8. 
Patented De 0, 15, 1885. 
 
W 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HARRINGTON, OF CALDWELL, KANSAS. 
ROTARY ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 332,253, dated December 15, 1885. 
Application filed March 18, 1885. 
Serial No. 159,317. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all, whom it naily concer'72: 
Be it known that I, JOHN HARRINGTON, of 
Caldwell, in the county of Sumner and State 
of Kansas, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Rotary Engines; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, and 
to the figures and letters marked thereon. 
'''Rotary engines, so called, may be divided 
into two general classes-namely, first, those 
in which the pistons, abutments, valves, and, 
in fact, all the moving parts, are given rotary 
motion, and which may be termed true 'rotary 
engines;' and, secondly, those in which the pis 
ton alone or the piston and some one or more, 
but not all, of the valves or other moving parts 
are rotated, and which may be termed, with 
more propriety, mixed engines. To the 
latter class my engine particularly relates. I 
have entered upon its construction after a 
somewhat careful examination of the state of 
the art, and with the belief that, profiting by 
the failures of others, through a close exami 
nation of the causes thereof, I could produce 
a machine measurably free from the defects 
developed in prior structures. 
In order that others skilled in the art may 
be able to fully understand the construction 
and operation of my engine, I will first de 
scribe it with reference to the accompanying 
drawings, and will then in the clauses of claim 
at the end of this specification endeavor to 
novel features. 
In said drawings, Figurel represents a per 
spective view of my engine; Fig. 2, a transverse 
vertical Section of the same, taken on the linea 
ac of Fig. 4. 
Fig. 3 is a longitudinal vertical 
section taken on the line & 2, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 
is a horizontal Section taken on the line 1 of 
Fig 2. Fig. 5 is longitudinal vertical section 
taken on the line of y of Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is a 
view of the sliding abutment detached. Fig. 
45 
7 is a detail view of a portion of a modified 
. form of abutment, in which the parts which 
bear upon the eccentric piston are rendered 
self-adjusting. Fig. 8 is a view of the gov. 
ernor-valve for controlling the admission of 
steam to the eccentric piston. Fig. 9 is a view 
of the rotary cut-off valve. Fig.10 is a sec 
tional view of a portion of the inner cylinder 
or casing and the governor and cut-off valves. 
Figs. 11 and 12 illustrate a mode of packing 55 
the eccentric piston. Fig. 13 is a detached 
view of one of the valves which controls the 
inlet exhaust-ports of the engine. Fig. 14 is 
a view of a portion of the casing of the engine, 
designed to show the increased inclination of 6o 
one of the inner steam-ports through the Same, 
leading from the cut-off valve to the chamber 
in which the piston works. Fig. 15 is a simi 
lar view, showing one of the outer steam 
ports. Figs. 16 and 17 are views illustrating 
the opposite inclination of the ports through 
which the steam alternately passes to the 
chamber containing the piston when the en 
gine is worked direct and reverse. Fig. 18 is 
a view illustrating the means for centering the 
shaft and inner case. Fig. 19 is a perspec 
tive view of the means for shifting one of the 
valves that control the exhaust; Figs. 20 and 
21, diagrams illustrative of the balancing of 
the pistons. 
Similar letters in the several figures indicate 
like parts. 
There are two casings to my engine-aninner 
casing, A, and an outer casing, B. Both these 
casings are stationary, and between them, and 
almost entirely surrounding the illner casing, 
is a space, 'C, into which the steam employed 
to run the engine is admitted through an inlet 
port, D, as shown in lig. 3, being thence con 
ducted through certain passages in the walls of 
the inner casing, controlled by suitable valves, 
35 point out what I deem to be, its essentially to the chambers EEE, in which the rotary 
pistons are located, and being exhausted thence 
in a manner to be further on explained. 
The 
pistons are preferably three in number, and 
comprise a large middle one, F, and two small 
er ones, FF, arranged on opposite sides of it, 
as shown clearly in Figs. 3, 4, 5. Each of them 
is of eccentric form, as shown in Fig. 2, and 
its sides are fitted as accurately as possible to 
the sides of its circular chamber, while its pe 
riphery is adapted at one point to slide in con 
tact with the inner circumference of its said 
chamber, as shown at G in said last-talentioned 
figure. By preference, Iform the large middle 
piston, F, with a long hub, H, that extends 
from end to end of the inner casing, A, and 
upon this extended hub I mount and rigidly 
secure the two smaller pistons FF. The hub 
85 
75 
95 
IOO 
3O 
SO 
 
a) 
al 
332,253 
 
. 
... O 
of the middle piston is in turn mounted upon 
and keyed or otherwise fastened to the main 
driving-shaft I of the engine. The two end 
pistons, FF, are set oppositely to the middle 
5 piston, F, and though all three of the pistons 
are of the same diameter the width of the mid 
dle one equals the united width of both the 
other ones. By this construction and arrange 
ment the pistons and shaft are put in what I 
term mechanical balance-that is to say, 
a state of equilibrium, whether at rest or in 
motion. 
The broad idea of applying several rotary 
eccentric pistons to a common shaft is not new 
with me; but never before, to my knowledge, 
has there been observed that relation of size, 
weight, and location of pistons found in my 
engine, which alone renders the accurate me 
chanical balancing of the parts possible. Oth. 
ers, for instance, have placed two eccentric pis. 
tons of equal weight and diameter oppositely at 
different points on a common shaft; but in such 
an arrangement the centrifugal force resulting 
from rotation causes the two pistons to tend 
to fly off tangentially in opposite directions, 
and to cause a gyration of the shaft on a cen 
ter midway between such two pistons, the re 
sult being a deflection of the shaft and in 
creased friction at and undue wearing of its 
bearings. This may be illustrated by the dia 
gram Fig. 20, wherein 5 represents the shaft, 
66 the two eccentric pistons of equal weight, 
and 77 the bearings of the shaft, and 8 the 
center between the pistons upon which there is 
a disposition of the shaft to gyrate when in ro 
tation. The arrows marked 444 represent the 
direction in which the pistons would tend to 
travel under the influence of centrifugal force. 
This deflection of the shaft in my construction 
is entirely obviated for the tendency of the 
middle portion to carry the shaft in one di 
rection is resisted by the tendency of the two 
smaller pistons exerting together equal force 
on opposite sides of it to carry the shaft in 
the opposite direction, the result being the 
establishment of a perfect equilibrium and 
the even and regular running of the shaft in 
its bearings, no more friction being imposed 
upon the bearings than is due to the weight 
of the parts. The diagram Fig. 21 illustrates 
this, 9 being the shaft, 10 10 its bearings, 11 
the large middle piston, and 12 12 the small 
er piston. The arrows marked 13 13 13show 
the direction in which the centrifugal force of 
the several pistons would tend to carry said 
pistons. It will be observed that all the ar 
rows travel in parallel lines. 
In order that the temperature of the pistons 
may be kept as nearly as possible uniform 
throughout, and that there may be an equal 
expansion of the parts, I preferably form an 
annular chamber, J, in each of them and con 
nect them by channels K to longitudinal chan 
nels Lu in the hub H, that coi municate wit 
the steam-space between the inner and outer 
casings. 
Each of the chambers in which the rotary 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
eccentric pistons work is provided with a . 
sliding abutment, M, which passes through 
both the puter and inner casings and bears 
against the face of the piston, as shown in 
Fig. 2. Opposite each of these abuments and 
bearing upon a corresponding portion of the 
periphery of the piston is a sliding false abut 
ment, N, which is connected to the sliding 
abutment by means of frames O, and through 
rods P, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. From this 
construction it will be seen that as the eccen 
tric piston rotates, the abutment will be 
moved positively in both directions-outward 
by the direct action of the piston, and inward 
indirectly, though with equal positiveness, by 
means of the arms, rods, and false abutment 
N. The inner end of the abutment is prefer 
ably provided with suitable packing-such, 
for instance, as shown at Q in Fig. 2-for the 
purpose of preserving at all times a fight 
joint between it and the periphery of the pis 
tion, and where found desirable the false abut 
ment N is rendered adjustable, so as to com 
pensate for wear. 
Openingiate each piston-chamber above 
the sliding abutment are two steam-induction 
ports, R. R., and two eduction or exhaust ports, 
R. R., one induction and one exhaust port be. 
ing arranged in each side wall of the casing, 
oppositely. Two pairs of similarly-arranged 
induction and exhaust ports, SS, open into 
said piston-chamber below the abutment. 
In engines of this class as heretofore con 
structed sliding abutments have been ar 
ranged to slide in fixed guides to and from 
the piston, or else have been arranged within 
the piston so as to rotate with it and slide in 
and out toward the inner circumference of the 
piston-chamber; but in both such arrange 
ments the projected portion of the abutment 
upon which the pressure of the steam is ex 
erted has been unsupported, and the result has 
been that the steam, acting with leverage upon 
such extended portion, has caused more or 
less binding of the abutment in its bearings. 
In my engine I have avoided this difficulty by 
letting the lateral edges of each abutment into 
guiding-greaves in the walls of the casing, as 
shown at U U in Fig. 4. More than this, I 
have extended the lateral edges V V of the 
abutment even beyond that portion upon 
which the steam-pressure is applied, as seen 
in Fig. 6, and in this way I support the abuti" 
ment throughout its entire length, rendering 
it impossible for the steam to act with lever 
age upon it, so as to cause it to bind in its 
bearings. 
To provide against leakage of steam at the 
corners of the pistons-a somewhat difficult 
place to pack-I may in some instances face 
the end of the abutment with a spring-seated 
block or face piece, W, as shown in Fig. 7, 
and provid E. 
e extended portions WV of the 
abutment with other similar spring seated 
face-pieces, X, overlapping the face-piece W. 
as also shown in said Fig. 7. By this con 
struction tight joints are maintained. 
90 
95 
ICO 
To5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
f 
332,253 
25 
Io shown in Fig. 2. 
15 and hold it firmly in position. 
It is essential, of course, that not only should 
the joints between the eccentrid pistons asl 
their sliding abutments be kept tight, but also 
that close joints be preserved between said 
5 pistons and the inner peripheries of the cham 
bers at the point of contact. I have therefore 
formed a transverse recess, X, in the periphery 
of each eccentric piston, and have filled the 
same with a suitable packing material, Y, as 
I have furthermore let into 
the opposite faces of each piston, near its pe 
riphery, a split ring, Z, having offsets or 
tongues Z, which project into the ends of the 
packing, as shown clearly in Figs. 11 and 12, 
Mounted upon the extended hub H, and 
keyed rigidly to the same, so as to rotate 
therewith, are a series of cut-off valves, A, 
which operate within the inner casing, A, of 
the engine to cut off and admit the steam sup 
plied to the piston - chambers through the 
steam-induction ports R and S. As there are 
four induction-ports opening into each piston 
chamber-that is to say, two, one on each side 
above the sliding abutment, and two similay 
located below the abutment-it follows that 
for each piston-chamber there are two rotary 
cut-off valves, one on each side thereof. This 
is clearly shown in Figs. 3, 4, 5. 
One of the cut-off valves A is represented 
detached in Fig. 9, and in dotted lines in Fig. 
2. As will be seen from these figures, it is 
provided with two curved ports, B C, the 
former being the outer and longer one and the 
latter the inner and shorter one. The port 
B', when the valve is rotated, travels over the 
outer steam-induction port, R, that opens into 
the piston - chamber above the sliding abut 
ment, as shown in Fig. 2, while the inher port, 
C, travels over the inner induction-port, S, 
below the abutment. Around the edges of 
each of the ports B C, on both sides of the 
valve, is arranged a suitable metallic pack 
ing, D'. 
Besides the rotary cut - off valves just de 
scribed, each of the piston-chambers is further 
provided with a reciprocating slide-valve, E. 
(See Figs. 2 and 13.) This valve has an upper 
exhaust-port, F, and a lower exhaust-port, 
and upper and lower steam-induction ports, 
H'I', as shown in Fig. 13. When it occupies 
the position shown in Fig. 2, it closes the upper 
exhaust-ports, R., of the piston-chamber and 
opens the lower exhaust - ports, S', thereof, 
While it opens the upper steam - induction 
ports, R, and closes the lower steam-induction 
ports, S. The reverse operation of this takes 
place when the valve is shifted to its limit in 
the opposite direction. 
Provision is made for shifting all the recip 
rocating slide-valves of the engine simultane 
ously into the desired position by manipulat 
ing a handle, G', secured to a crank-shaft, H', 
that operates laterally-sliding inclined shift. 
ing-bars I, constructed to co-operate with and 
act positively upon the lower portion of the 
slide-valves, as shown in Fig. 2. The steam 
G between the inner and outer casings is 
ridged at the exhaust-ports of the piston 
chambers by nheans of packing-rings J, inter- to 
posed between said casings and forming a 
continuation of the exhaust-ports, as seen in 
Fig. 2. 
From the foregoing description of the valves 
it will be evident that when the reciprocating 75 
slide-valve is adjusted to the position shown 
in Fig. 2, for instance, steam will pass from 
the steam-space between the two casings into 
the passages in the inner casing, controlled by 
the rotary cut-off Valves, and will be alter. 3o 
nately admitted to and cut off from the piston 
chambers by the operation of said cut-off 
valves in a manner that will be readily un 
derstood-that is to say, the piston-chambers 
will take steam while the elongated ports B 85 
in the valves are passing their respective 
ports in the casing, and steam will be cut off 
therefrom during the remainder of the revo 
lution of Said valves. By this construction 
of valves a full port of steam under nearly 
oiler-pressure is admitted directly into the 
pistoriehambers on each side thereof, thus 
fully utilizing the initial pressure and reduc 
ing the amount of clearance to the minimum. 
If, now, the reciprocating slide-valves be shift 
ed to their fullest extent in the opposite di 
rection, so as to close the induction-ports above 
the sliding abutinents and open those below 
the abutments, and at the same time open the 
exhaust-ports above and close the exhaust 
ports below, the inner ports, C, of the rotary 
cut-off valves Will become operative and will 
deliver or cut off steam to or from the piston 
chambers below the sliding abutments there 
of, thereby causing a reversal of the engine. 
Of course, it will be understood that the 
steam, when admitted to the piston-chambers, 
will operate first by direct pressure, and after 
ward, when cut off, expansively upon the 
projecting parts of the eccentric pistons, and 
cause the latter and the shaft to which they 
are attached to rapidly revolve in one direc 
tion or the other, according as the steam is 
admitted above or below the sliding abut 
mentii, 
The arrangement of valves thus far described 
will be found to suffice for ordinary engines; 
but, by preference, I also employ in addition 
a set of 'governing-valves, so called from the 
fact that they are designed to co-operate with 
the rotary cut-off valves in a manner to effect 
the almost instantaneous cutting off of the 
steam at any desired point, according to the 
load or desired speed of the engine. These 
governing valves are represented in section in 
Figs. 3, 4, 5, and are lettered K'. A side view 
of one of them is also shown in Fig. 8. They are 
all mounted so as to turn freely upon the hub 
Hill close proximity to the rotary cut-off 
valves, and each one has connected to it a rod, 
L', which passes out through both casings 
and is connected to a bar or shaft, M, coin 
non to all. The bar Minturn passes through 
slots in the tipper portions of vertical bars S 
35 
4) 
55 
: 
, 
. 
95 
IOO 
TO 
II5 
25 
I 30 
 
A. 
332,253, 
 
- 
75 
90 
95 
N", mounted upon a rock-shaft, O', to which a 
hand lock-lever, P, is also secured. By the 
operation of this hand-lever the position of 
all the governing-valves can be shifted as de 
5 sired and locked in their adjusted positions. 
Each of the governing-valves has two ports, 
Q U", located at different points and at difier 
ent distances from the center, as shown in Fig. 
8, the outer port, Q', being arranged so as to 
co-operate with the outer port, B, of the cor 
responding rotary cut-off valve, and the inner 
port, U', with the inner port, C, of said cut 
Voff valve. 
The manner in which the governing-valves 
15 co-operate with the rotary cut-off valves will 
be readily understood if the attention is di 
rected to Fig. 9, wherein a side view of one of 
the cut-off valves is shown in full lines, the 
steam-inlet ports of the adjacent piston cham 
ber by the cross-lined spaces lettered RS, and 
the ports of the governing-valve by the spaces 
inclosed by dotted lines and lettered Q and 
U', respectively. Assuming the rotary cut-off 
valve and the shaft and piston with which it 
5 co-operates to be rotating in the direction in 
dicated by the arrow in said Fig. 9, and that 
by reason of the position of the reciprocating 
slide-valve theinlet of steam to the inner stean 
induction passage opposite the port S is cut off, 
if the governing-valve is shifted till its outer 
port, Q, (see Fig. 8,) comes opposite the steam 
induction port R. of the inner casing, steam will 
be admitted into the piston-chamber through 
said port Q', (which, when once adjusted, re 
mains stationary,) and through the outer port, 
B', of the cut-off valve while the entire length 
of the said cut-off-valve port IS passing by the 
said two other ports, the result being the giv 
ing of a full port of steam, the same as though 
the governing-valve were dispensed with and 
the rotary cut-off valve alone employed: but, 
where it is desired to give only a half-port of 
steam, for instalnce, the governing - valve is 
shifted till its port Q' stands at a distance from 
the corresponding port, R., of the casing, equal 
to half the length of the port or slot B in the 
cut-off valve, as shown by the dotted lines Q. 
in said Fig. 9, this movement shortening up 
the port of the cut-valve and causing the steam 
to be cut off just twice as quickly as when the 
position of the governing-valve was at that 
first described. Fronn this it will be seen that 
by adjusting the positions of all the governing 
valves of the engine all the rotary cut-off valves 
may be caused to cut off stealin at any given 
point, according to the load or speed of engine 
required. 
On the reversal of the cngine, and a consc 
quent closure of the port R and opening of the 
inner ports, S, the inner port, U", of the gov 
erning-valves will in like manner co-operate 
with the inner ports, C, of the rotary cut-off 
valves, as will be readily understool. 
Inasmuch as the outer R Giesotary, 
cut-off valves travel faster than the inncrports 
thereof, by reason of the difference in distance 
from the center of motion, the Said outer ports 
are made proportionally longer, in order that 
they may admit the same amount of steam in 
the same time as the inner ports. 
The packings D' (see Fig. 10) on opposite 
sides of the rotary cut-off valves, while pre 
serving tight joints between the said valves 
and the casing on the one hand and between 
aid valves and the governing-valves on the 
other hand, leave slight intervals or spaces 
A B, which would tend to create unequal 
pressure on the valves, were it not for the fact 
that I provide each valve with a number of 
lateral perforations, C, through which steam 
is admitted to both sides of the valve. Thus 
steam-balanced, the valves run smoothly, sub 
ject only to the friction of the packings. The 
governing - valves are kept properly seated 
against the cut-off valves by means of springs 
D", interposed between them and the casing, 
as clearly shown in Figs. 8 and 10. 
In most rotary engines, owing either to the 
unequal expansion of the parts of the mech 
anism or to wear, difficulty often arises from 
the shaft getting out of center, and with this 
in view I have in the construction of my pres 
ent engine essayed a distribution of steam 
calculated not only to steam-balance all the 
running parts, but also to provide for a uni 
formity of expansion. My plan for accom 
plishing this as has been seen, includes the 
steam-jacketing of the inner casing in which 
the several operative parts of the mechanism 
work, the channeling and chambering of the roo 
inner casing, the hub, and pistons, so as to ad 
mit steam therein, the provisions for steam 
balancing the several valves, the supporting 
of the inner casing so as to permit of free ex 
pansiol, in all directions, the packing of the Ios 
sliding abutments, slide-valves, and rods in a 
manner to admit of eXpansion, &c. In fine, 
my aim has been to secure a free and equal 
expansion of the inner casing and all its con 
tained parts from Center to circumference, so IIo 
that there shall be no binding or cramping at 
any point, and so that the expansion or con 
traction of the inner casing would not affect 
at all the inner casing. While all these pro 
visions are believed to in a large measure, if I15 
not entirely and effectually, meet the difficul 
ties of unequal expansion, I have still thought 
it advisable to provide further against such 
difficulties, but more particularly against wear 
of parts, by the employment of means for ad 
justing and centering the shaft, or rather the 
long hub of the pistons in its bearings in the 
inner casing. In carrying out this point of 
my invention I form annular tapering re 
cesses 15 IE" in the outer portions of therinner I25 
case, as shown, for instance, in Fig. 4, and in 
such recesses I arrange a series of correspond 
ing wedge-shaped ring segments, F, rendered 
adjustable E. ovable bolts G". The shaft, 
which ". use is rigidly connected to the hub 
H, has beari gs I' l?" in the outcr casing, that. 
are capable of a slight lateral adjustment in 
the casing, the joint between them and the 
Outer easing being maintained at all times 
3O 
O 
35 
45 
55 
- 
332,253 
. . . 
75 
steam-tight by means of packing-rings I", in 
7. In a rotaly engine, the combination, with 
circling the shaft and steam-pressed outward, 
a stationary piston-chamber, of an eccentric 
piston operating therein and the sliding abut- 7o 
as shown. 
When the engine is first properly centered 
ment supported at its lateral edges in the 
and balanced, a circle may be struck upon the 
walls of the chamber and actuated by direct 
Outer surface of the outer casing by means of 
contact of its end with the periphery of the 
eccentric piston, substantially as described. 
any suitable instrument applied to the shaft 
8. In a rotary engine, the combination, with 
and rotated with it. This circle will there 
a stationary casing having a series of piston 
after serve as a gage by which to determine 
whether the shaft is perfectly aligned. If at 
chambers and a series of eccentric pistons ar 
any time, upon a suitable instrument being ap 
ranged in said chambers and mounted upon 
plied to the shaft, it is found that a circle is 
a common shaft, of a series of sliding abut 
made eccentric to that of the standard circle, 
ments, one for each piston-chamber, said abut 
the Wedge-shaped sections E are adjusted till 
ments being supported in the walls of the sta 
a perfectly true alignmentis effected. In this 
tionary casing and bearing upon the periph 
Way an even running of the engine may at all 
eries of their respective pistons and receiv 
ing positive motion therefrom, substantially 
times be assured. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
as described. 
9. In a rotary engine, the combination, sub 
I claim as new is- 
1. In a rotary engine, a single driving-shaft 
stantially as described, of the stationary outer 
and a series of eccentric pistons of the same 
casing and the stationary inner casing, having 
diameter, but of unequal weight, secured to said 
the steam-space between them, with the middle 
shaft in a manner to cause the balancing of the 
piston, its elongated hub, and the two smaller 
heavier piston or pistons by two or more of 
pistons secured to said hub, all said pistons 
the lighter pistons, in combination with cham 
and said hub having internal passages for 
bers in which the pistons work, and sliding 
steam in communication with the steam-space 
abutments co-operating with said pistons and 
between the inner and outer pistons, for the 
supported by the walls of the piston-cham 
purpose Specified. 
bers, substantially as described. 
10. In a rotary engine, the combination of 
2. In a rotary engine, the combination of a 
a stationaryinner casing formed with piston 
chambers, rotary eccentric pistons arranged 
middle rotary eccentric piston having an elon 
gated hub and two other eccentric pistons se 
in said piston-chambers, and valves for con 
cured rigidly to said elongated hub on oppo 
trolling the inlet of steam to said piston 
site sides of said middle portion, substantially 
chambers, also contained within said inner 
as described. 
casing, with an outer casing, between which 
3. In a rotary engine, the combination of a 
and the inner casing is a live-steam space sur 
middle rotary eccentric piston having an 
rounding the inner casing at both sides and 
elongated hub and two other eccentric pistons 
ends, whereby the inner casing and all its con 
rigidly secured to said elongated hub on op 
tained parts are kept at all times at a sub 
posite sides of the said middle piston, and 
stantially uniform temperature, and are per 
having an aggregate weight equal only to 
mitted to uniformly expand without liability 
the Weight of the middle pistul, substantially 
of binding. 
as described. 
11. The combination, with the inner and 
4. In a rotary engine, the combination of 
outer casings, having the steam-space between 
an inner casing containing the piston chain 
them, of the piston-chambers within the inner 
bers, the rotary pistons, and the valves for con 
casing, the rotary eccentric piston, the sliding 
trolling the admission of steam to said piston 
abutments, and the reciprocating valves for 
chambers, with an outer casing, between which 
simultaneously opening the steam-induction 
and the inner casing the steam for runnin 
ports and closing the exhaust-port on one side 
the engine is first admitted before passing 
of the abutments, and closing the steam-induc 
into the inner casing, substantially as de. 
tion ports and opening the exhaust-port On 
scribed. 
the opposite side of the abutments, substan 
5. In a rotary engine, the combination, with 
tially as described. 
a stationary piston-chamber, of an eccentric 
12. The combination, with the inner and 
piston operating therein and a sliding abut 
outer casings, having the steam-space between 
ment guided in the walls of the piston-cham 
them, of the circular packing-rings interposed 
ber and moved positively in and out by direct 
to form part of the exhaust-passages, substan- - - 
contact with the surface of the piston, sub 
tially as described. 
stantially as described. 
13. The combination, with the inner casing 
6. In a rotary engine, the combination, with 
and its piston-chamber and rotary pistons, of 
a stationary piston-chamber, of an eccentric 
the series of reciprocating slide-valves and the 
piston operating therein, a sliding abutment, 
handle, crank - shaft, and shifting - bars for 
and a sliding false abutment guided in the 
simultaneously operating said valves, substan 
Walls of the piston-chamber, connected to 
tially as described. 
gether and bearing upon oposite portions of 
14. The combination of the rotary eccentric 
the surface of the piston, substantially as de-pistons, sliding abutments, and the inner cas 
Scribed. 
ing having piston-chambers in which the ro 
95 
IO 
II5 
I25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
| 
 
6 
! 
. 
332,253 
 
tary pistons work, and provided with two op 
posite steam-inlet ports on each side of the 
abutments, substantially as described. 
15. The combination, with the eccentric 
piston, having the transverse slot in its pe 
riphery for the reception of packing, of the 
split rings let into the sides of the piston, and 
having the offsets or lugs for holding the pack 
ing in position, substantially as described. 
16. The combination, with the casing hav 
TO 
ing the piston-chambers, of the rotary eccen 
- tric pistons, the sliding abutments, and the 
rotary cut-off valves having the inner and 
outer elongated ports co-operating with the 
steam passages or ports in the casing, substan 
tially in the manner described. 
17. The combination, with the casing having 
the piston-chambers, of the rotary eccentrie 
pistons, the sliding abutments, and the rotary 
cut-off valves arranged in pairs, one on each 
side of every piston-chamber, and controlling 
the admission of steam to such piston-cham 
bers, substantially as described. 
18. The combination, with the casing having 
the piston-chambers, of the rotary eccentric 
histons, the sliding abutments, the rotary cut 
off valves arranged in pairs, one on each side 
of every piston-chamber, and controlling the 
admission of steam to the piston - chambers, 
and the reciprocating cut-off valves co-oper 
ating with the steam supply and exhaust ports 
on opposite sides of the abutments, in the 
ner described, and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
19. The combination, with the casing having 
the piston-chambers therein, of the rotary cut 
off valves having the elongated segmental 
ports, and the adjustable governing - valves 
having inner and outer ports co-operating with 
35. 
the ports of the rotary cut-off valves, substan- 4o 
tially in the manner specified, and for the pur 
pose described. 
20. The combination, with the inner casing 
and its steam ports or passages, of the rotary 
cut-off valves having the elongated ports, and 45 
the packing surrounding said ports on both 
sides of the valves, and the adjustable gov 
erning-valves, substantially as described. 
21. The combination, with the inner casing 
and its ports, of the rotary cut-off valves and 5o 
the governing-valves, constructed as described, 
and pressed against the cut-off valves by 
means of springs, substantially as described. 
22. The combination, with the inner casing 
and its steam-ports, of the rotary cut-off valve, 55 
the governing-valve, and the reciprocating 
cut-off valves, all constructed and arranged 
substantially as described. 
23. The combination, with the inner casing 
and its steam-passages, of the rotary cut-off 6o 
... valves, the governing - valves, and the de 
scribed means for simultaneously adjusting 
the governing-valves, so as to cause them to 
cut off the steam. Sooner or later for all the 
piston-chambers, substantially as described. 65 
24. The combination, with the elongated 
hub rendered adjustable in the inner casing, 
as described, of the shaft to which the hub is 
secured, the bearings for said shaft having a 
slight play in the outer casing, and the out- 7o 
wardly steam-pressed packings for preserving 
the joint between the said bearings and the 
outer casing, substantially as described. 
JOHN HARRINGTON. 
Witnesses: 
FRED F. CHURCH, 
J. B. CHURCH. 
| 
| 
|| 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332353.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 332,353, 
C. S. MAYNARD, 
CAR COUPLING 
Patented Deo, 15, 1885. 
essage sesse-N 2. Et- W - Y 
NSN&S s 
AR 
- 
m 
NS SS 
SS 
N ae 
2. 
sery ES 
so 
rew YHarmar: 
s 
 
 
Witnesses. 
fear 6&4. 
Fig. 4 
Inventor. 
%-44%ace 
. 
. 
422:/-. 
N. PEERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, O.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES STUART MAYNARD, OF PAW PAW, MICHIGAN. 
CAR COUPNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 332,353, dated Dacember 15, 1885. 
Application filed August 29, 1885. Serial No. 175,626. No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it mal? eO7 cer. 
Beit known that I, CHARLES S. MAYNARD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Paw 
Paw, county of Van Buren, State of Michigan, 
have invented new and useful Car-Couplings, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to car - couplings in 
which the ordinary or commonly-employed 
draw-heads, coupling-pins, links, and auto 
matically-operating means for Supporting and 
releasing the pin are used in conjunction with 
each other; and it has for its object certain 
improvements in construction and arrange 
ment designed to facilitate the operation, all 
substantially as below described and claimed. 
In the drawings forming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a longitudinal section 
through the center of the draw-heads, the coup 
ling means being in side elevation, except the 
ends of the link and pin supports, which are 
also in section; Fig. 2, an enlarged longitudinal 
and horizontal central Section of one of the 
draw-heads, looking on top of the link and its 
support; Fig. 3, a top view of details in Fig. 
2, showing the end of the link and pin Support 
in horizontal section; and Fig. 4 is a side ele 
vation of Fig. 3. 
Referring to the drawings and the letters 
of reference marked thereon, B are the com 
monly-employed draw-heads; I, the link, and 
Pthe coupling-pin, which passes down through 
a vertical hole of the head and through the 
loop end of the link. The automatic supports 
for the pin P which I employ are shown at D. 
Such supports have heretofore been employed 
playing endwise under a Spring pressure or 
control; but it will be observed that I have 
peculiarly adapted them for supporting the 
pin P and guiding the same in its descent, and 
that I have also so formed the SupportSD that 
they, when under Spring-pressure, support the 
link in a horizontal position, when coupled 
with one of the heads, to enter the other head 
when the cars which are to be coupled come 
together. 
In Figs. 1 and 2, it is a hollow cavity, in 
which the lower end of the pin Prests when 
supported by the support D. (See left-hand 
part of Fig. 1.) This prevents danger of the 
pin tilting over out of a true vertical position 
from being top-heavy. This recess registers 
with or opens into a central vertical groove, 
S, in the end of the support D, which the pin 
follows in its descent, thus guiding it through 
the loop of the link and through the lower 
pin-hole in the head. In the under side, at 
the end of the support D, is formed a half 
round and concave recess conforming to the 
contour of the end of the link, the lower con 
fine of this recess coming well under the end 
of the link. (See right of Fig. 1.) By this 
means, when the end of the link L is coupled 
with the head B, as here shown, with the pin 
P down, the expansive pressure of the spring 
C against the lugs e of the Support D causes 
Such a pressure of the Walls of the recess 
against the end of the link and such a pressure 
of the link against the pin P that the link is 
supported in the horizontal position shown in 
Fig. 1, ready to enter the approaching head 
at the left of said figure and automatically 
couple with it. As the draw-head at the left 
approaches and comes in contact with the free 
end of the Supported link the concussion forces 
the Support D back from under the supported 
pin, and the pin freed from the recess t falls 
downward through the guide-groove S, as be 
fore explained. The recess r in receiving the 
free end of the link performs still another of. 
fice-that of preventing the free end of the link 
from being tilted vertically or laterally out of 
position when the cars come together and the 
end of the link comes in contact with the end 
of the support D. 
In Fig. 1, a are lever's fulcrumed in the up 
per wall of the head B, their lower ends, which 
extend into the channber of Said draw-head, 
forming engagement with the upper side of 
the supports D by insertion between the lugs 
e v. By this means the supports D are forced 
back and held when desiring to pull the coup 
ling-pins to uncouple the cars or to remove 
the link I. 
Having thus described my improvements, 
what I claim as new is 
In a car-coupling employing the Ordinary 
draw-head, coupling-pin, and link, a sliding 
block which is forced forward under spring 
55 
60 
75 
So 
90 
95 
5 
O 
25 
45 
) 
332,353 
In testimony of the foregoing I have here. 
unto subscribed my name in presence of two 
witnesses. 
CHARLES STUART MAYNARD. 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN M. RUSSELL, 
A. ROBINSON. 
pressure, having in its forward end an open 
transverse recess to receive and sustain the 
link in a horizontal position by the clamping 
of the end of the link between the pin and the 
5 walls of the recess, and a lever to release said 
clamping of parts to free the pin, substantially 
- 
as set forth. 
. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332453.txt	(No Model.) 
C. SMITH, 
ELECTRIC LIGHT ATTACHMENT FOR SPECULUMS, 
No. 332,453, 
Patented Deo, 15, 1885. 
ERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CASTLE SMITH, OF QUEEN VICTORIA STREET, LONDON, ENGLAND. 
ELECTRIC - LIGHT ATTACHMENT FOR SPECULUMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 332,453, dated December 15, 1885. 
Application filed December 26, 1884. 
Serial No. 151,143. (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CASTLESMITH, of Queen 
Victoria Street, London, England, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Means for Applying the Electric Light to 
Speculums and other Scientific Instruments, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to so apply 
the electric light to speculums and other scien 
tific instruments as to provide for its being 
easily adjusted and thrown into its operative 
position or out of position; and to this end it 
consists in an electric-lamp attachment for 
Speculums and other scientific instruments, 
consisting of the combination of a lamp 
holder, a plate to which said lamp-holder is 
pivoted, and which is furnished with insulated 
terminals, and a fastening to which the said 
plate is hinged, and by which it may be at 
tached to the instrument. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of the apparatus. Fig. 2 is a side 
View, and Fig. 3 is an under side plan, of the 
Sane. Fig. 4 is an end view of a speculum 
with the lamp applied thereto, and Fig. 5 is a 
longitudinal Section of an ordinary speculum, 
showing the lamp in position. 
C is an incandescent lamp, which is secured 
by binding with thread or in any other con 
venient manner in a hollow metal holder or 
Casing, b, SO that the lamp shall be inclosed 
on its two sides and at back and exposed only 
in front. This holder or casing b is con 
nected by a ball-and-socket joint, or is other 
Wise adjustably Secured to a metal plate, c, 
which is formed with two large holes, dd, and 
is hinged to a pair of spring-clips, e, where 
by the apparatus may be attached to the spec 
ulum. To this metal plate c is secured in any 
convenient manner a plate of vulcanite or 
Other insulating material, f, to which the ter 
minals g are attached. The terminals g are 
connected with the lamp by the coiled insu 
lated wires h h, the holes d in the plate c be 
ing of sufficient size to allow for proper insu 
lation. The Wires h. h will allow of the move 
ment of the holder b in any direction within 
reasonalle limits, while the double hinges 
will permit of the lamp being fixed in the 
position most Suitable for the operator, and 
Will also permit of the lamp being brought 
parallel to the mouth of the speculum, what 
ever may be the distance the lamp projects 
Over the mouth. 
75 
55 
65 
The holder or casing b will form a shade to 
the lamp, and may be lined with some reflect 
ing material, which will increase the light. 
It will be seen from Fig. 4 that the lamp 
will take up but a small portion of the avail 
able sight-space, even when placed in the po- 6o 
sition to obtain a direct light down the Specul 
lum; but by withdrawing the lamp to one side, 
so as to obtain a reflected light, the whole of 
the sight-space may be made available. 
If desired, the holder b may be made tele 
scopic, by which means it may be brought 
quite to the center of the speculum. 
In place of the spring-clip, I may hinge the 
metal plate c to an internally-threaded flanged 
ring, which fits over the mouth of the specu 
lum, and is secured at the back by a Second 
ring, which screws into the first ring, the 
mouth of the speculum being gripped, be 
tween the two rings. This modification is 
shown at Fig. 6, i i being the outside ring, to 
which the plate c is hinged; and j, the inside 
or gripping ring. I may also use a clamp 
ing-screw to secure the light-holder to the 
speculum; but inasmuch as ordinary specul 
lums are made of glass the clamping-Screw 
would have to be used with care. It Will, 
however, be evident that the means for Secur 
ing the light-holder to the speculum may be 
varied to a considerable extent; but the spring 
clip is the simplest and most quickly applied, 
and therefore preferable. 
In applying the holder to other Scientific 
instruments the use of which requires a light 
as, for instance, the stage of a microScope-l 
may use a clamping-screw or a spring-clip to 
secure the light-holder to the instrument. 
Having now described my invention, I 
claim 
An electric-lamp attachment for specul 
lums and other scientific instrumentS, COIl 
sisting of the combination of a lamp-holder, 
a supporting-plate which is furnished With 
insulated terminals, an adjustable connection 
between said holder and supporting plate, a 
fastening for attaching said plate to the in 
strument, and a hinge between said plate and 
fastening, substantially as herein described. 
CASTLE SMITH. 
90 
Witnesses: 
GEO. J. B. FRANKLIN, 
W. J. NORWOOD, 
Clerks to Messrs. Scorer & Harris, Notaries 
Public, 17 Gracechurch St. London. 
OO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332553.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. OSTRANDER, OF PIATTSBURG, NEW YORK. 
GARM ENT SE EVE. 
SPECIFICATIONiorming part of Letters Patent No. 332,553, dated December 15, 1885. 
Application filed March 7, 1885. 
Srial No. 158,011. (No model.) 
To all, whon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES H. OSTRAN 
DER, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Plattsburg, in the county of Clinton and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in the Sleeves of 
Coats and other Garments, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the sleeves of coats and other garments in 
which the device hereinafter described pro 
vides a close and warm fitting of the sleeve 
around the Wrist, thereby excluding the air 
from the sleeve and retaining its warmth. I 
attain these objects by the device illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a flat seamless ring of 
fur or other suitable material. Fig. 2 repre 
sents a partly broken or sectional view show 
ing two flat seamless rings attached to each 
other on the inner edges; Fig. 3, a longitudi 
inal section of the lower end of a sleeve with 
the double ring attached. 
Several views. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts in 
I attain the desired result by cutting from 
fur or other suitable material two fiat seamless 
rings, A. A., which I attach to each other on 
the inner circular edges, thus forming a dou 
ble ring, C, with the aperture D made to con 
form to the size of the wearers wrist. The 
double ring C, of fur or other suitable material, 
is attached at its outer edge to the inner por 
tion of the sleeve B. This construction of a 
double ring or perforated diaphragm, C, at 
tached to the lower end of a sleeve, readily 
allows the passage of the hand through the 
opening D, as the inner edge of the double 
the 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ring is pushed outwardly by the pressure of 
the hand, and also causes the inner edge of 
the ring, after the passage of the hand, to hug 
the wrist, and allows free and unrestricted 
motion of the arm, and excludes the air from 
the arm. In withdrawing the hand the inner 
edge of the double ring is drawn inwardly by 
the pressure and readily allows the hand to 
be drawn through. 
While I have shown and described a dia 
phragm made of fur, it is manifest that I may 
employ any of the well known equivalents or 
substitutes therefor-such as plush, velvets, 
C. 
I am aware that various elastic fur bands 
and Wristlets for muffs and sleeves have been 
provided, but such muffs and sleeves have 
some form of an elastic or spring which very 
Soon becomes more or less ineffectual, produces 
more or less an uncomfortable feeling to the 
Wrist, and are more expensive in their con 
struction. Therefore I do not claim such in 
vention, broadly; but 
What I do claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters fatent, is 
The herein-described article of manufacture, 
the same consisting of a garment-sleeve hav 
ing secured to the inner side thereof, at or near 
its lower end, an annular perforated disk or 
diaphragm, the same comprising two sections 
of fur set face to face and secured to each other 
and at the outer periphery of the diaphragm 
to the sleeve, as set forth. 
CHARLES H. OSTRANDER. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID F. DOBIE, 
WILLIS L1, WEWER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332653.txt	(No Model.) 
J. GRESHAM. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
AUTOMATIC WACU UM BRAKE APPARATUS, 
No. 332,653, 
- 
Patented Dec. 15, 1885. 
Avesses: 
NPETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.o. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. GRESHAM. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
AUTOMATIC WACU U M BRAKE APPARATUS, 
No. 332,653. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1885. 
 
 
2 s 
a 
 
 
 
 y: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES GRESHAM, OF SALFORD, COUNTY OF LAN CASTER, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WACUUM BRAKE COMPANY, (LIMITED,) OF 32 QUEEN VICTORIA STREET, 
COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND. 
AUTOMATIC VACUUM-BRAKE APPARATUS. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 332,653, dated December l5, 1885. 
Application filed May 25, 1885. Serial No. 166,615. (No model.) Patented in England November 23, 1881, No. 5,109, and De 
cember 27, 1882, No. 6,171; in France March 6, 1833, No. 154,136; in Belgium March 7, 1883, No. 60,676; in Italy March 15, 1883, 
No. 15,231; in Austria-Hungary July 11, 1883, No. 9,791; in Victoria September 19, 1884, No. 3,846, and in New South Wales De 
cember 13, 1884, No. 15.59. 
- 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES GRESHAM, of 
the firm of Gresham & Craven, of Craven 
Iron-Works, Salford, in the county of Lan 
caster, England, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in or Applica 
ble to Automatic Vacuum-Brake Apparatus, 
(patented to me in Great Britain, No. 5,109 of 
1881, and No. 6,171 of December 27, 1882; 
in France, No. 154,136, March 6, 1883; in 
Belgium, No. 60,676, March 7, 1883; in Italy, 
No. 15,231, March 15, 1883; in Austria-Hun 
gary, No. 9,791, July 11, 1883; in Victoria, 
No. 3,846, September 19, 1884, and in New 
South Wales, No. 1,539, December 13, 1884) 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved con 
struction and combination of brake-cylinder, 
vacuum - chamber, and valve apparatus for 
use in working automatic vacuum railway 
brakes. 
Vacuum-brake apparatus constructed and 
arranged in accordance with my invention is 
represented in Figure I of the accompanying 
drawings, the valve apparatus appertaining 
thereto being shown to a large scale in the 
supplementary sectional view, Fig. 2. Fig. 3 
is a cross-section taken at right angles to Fig. 
1; Fig. 4, an enlarged view corresponding to 
Fig. 2. 
In Fig. 1, c is the vacuum-chamber; c, the 
brake-cylinder. d is a piston furnished with 
a rolling packing-ring, d. d is a piston-rod 
communicating motion through the bell-crank 
levere to the brake-rods. The brake-cylinder 
may be considered a double one, having an 
Outer part, c, closed and forming a vacuum 
chamber, and an inner part, c', for the piston 
d to work in. The part c' of the cylinder is 
closed at its lower end and is open to the vac 
uum-chamber at its upper end. The cylinder 
c is mounted on trunnions c, whereby it is 
enabled to adjust itself to the circular move 
ment of the extremity of the vibrating lever 
e. The piston-rod d passes through a gland 
packing, by preference of india-rubber com 
position. The valve-casing k is attached to 
the under side of the cylinder c, and commu 
nicates through a flexible tube, c', with the - - 
train - pipe b, the connection being made 
through a T-piece with ascending branch. 
There are two passages from the valve-casing 
k, one communicating with the cylinder con 
the under side of the piston d, and the other 
leading to the vacuum-chamber c and upper 
side of the piston d. 
In order that the construction and operation 
of the valve apparatus may be fully understood, 
I will proceed to describe the same with refer 
ence to Fig. 2. 
The ball a is arranged in a passage or cham 
ber, b, having an inclined internal surface, so 
disposed as to induce the ball to roll toward 
its seating c", where it arrives with its center 
approximately opposite the axis of the said 
seating, and against which it closes with little 
or no lift. The anterior portion of the passage 
b', wherein the ball a rests when against the 
seating c", is approximately of the same diam 
eter as the ball, but sufficiently larger to allow 
the ball to roll freely therein. The posterior. 
portion of the passage is of considerably larger 
diameter than the ball, and is formed or fitted 
with an inclined interial surfaace, b, whereon 
the ball rests, when forced, by the effect of 
unequal pressure on its opposite sides, a Way 
from its seating. When the ball is in this 
enlarged portion of the chamber and upon the 
higher part of the incline, ample area of pas 
sage-way is presented for air to pass around 
the ball. When the current of air ceases, the 
ball rolls down the incline and arrives in the 
narrow portion of the passage, ready to close 
against its seating on a very slight excess of 
pressure in the passage b relatively to that 
prevailing beyond the seating. 
In ordinary working the brakes are released 
by restoring the vacuum on the train-pipe side 
of or below the piston in the brake-cylinder 
to that prevailing on the opposite side of the 
piston; but it is sometimes necessary to ac 
complish the same end by restoring equilib 
rium in another manner-that is, by destroy 
ing the vacuum on the reservoir side of or 
above the piston. For this purpose it is ex 
pedient to provide means whereby the ball 
85 
95 
75 
Iu 
25 
35 
45 
 
332,653 
valve may be unseated by hand. The cham 
ber b, inclosing the balla as in a cage, is ac 
cordingly mounted to slide longitudinally. It 
is carried at one end on a tubular neck form 
5 ing the valve-seating c", and is mounted at the 
other end in a flexible diaphragm, d, of 
leather or other suitable material. To a pro 
longation, e, outside the diaphragm d, is at 
tached a lever, f, which, bearing on the part 
IOf' as a fulcrum, serves, when operated either 
Way, to draw the valve-carrier b outward 
and to remove the ball from its seat c, the in 
ternal diameter of the carrier beyond the ball 
being smaller than that of the latter. The 
bearing-surface of the valve-carrier b, sliding 
On the neck of the seating c", is grooved longi 
tudinally, as shown at b, so that when the 
ball-carrier or cage is withdrawn a short dis 
tance and the ball lifted from its seat, air is 
enabled to enter from the train-pipe b between 
the extremity of the ball-carrier and the sur 
face of the body h, and so by way of the pas 
sage b" to the branch k' without having to pass 
the ball-valve a. By these means air may be 
rapidly admitted to the reservoirs, and with 
out the necessity of actually holding the valve 
off its seat by means of the handlefuntil the 
Vacuum is completely destroyed. On recreat 
ing vacuum in the train-pipe b the first effect 
is for the diaphragm d to be pressed inward and 
for the ball-valve carrier b to be moved lon 
gitudinally until the inner extremity of the 
latter, Seating against the surface of the body 
h, shuts off communication through the groove 
or grooves b, whereupon the apparatus is 
again in order for automatic working, educ 
tion of air from one side of the brake-piston 
being effected by way of the passage land ulti 
mately from the opposite or vacuum chamber 
side of the brake-piston by way of the passage 
k' and past the ball-valve a. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States, is 
25 
35 
5 5 
1. The improved automatic vacuum-brake 45 
apparatus, constructed and working substan 
tially as herein described, and consisting of a 
brake-cylinder open at one end to and inclosed 
within a vacuum-chamber, the piston packed 
as shown, and operated by means of ball-valve 5o 
apparatus in connection with the train-pipe, 
and communicating directly with one end of 
the brake - cylinder and with the vacuum 
chamber, respectively. 
2. The use, in automatic vacuum-brake ap 
paratus, of a ball-valve mounted in a movable 
carrier having chambers of three diameters, 
respectively smaller, slightly larger, and con 
siderably larger than that of the ball-valve, 
the chamber having the largest diameter being 6o 
provided with an inclined surface for the pur 
pose of causing the valve to roll toward its 
seating against which it closes with a very 
slight, if any, lift, substantially as described: 
3. The lever fand connections, as described, 
for manually releasing the valve from its seat, 
the same consisting of a tubular carrier hav 
ing a part beyond the valve of contracted 
diameter, the said carrier being attached to a 
flexible diaphragm or equivalent device, 7o 
whereby the valve is enabled automatically to 
resume its working position on vacuum being 
recreated. 
4. The improved means, substantially as 
described, for rapidly admitting air from the 75 
train-pipe direct to the vacuum-chamber with 
out passing around the ball-valve, such means 
consisting of the valve-carrier b, having longi. 
tudinal internal grooves, b, the open neck c', 
and pipe c, all arranged to serve with the 8o 
piston-cylinder and train-pipe b, as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
55 
JAMES GRESEAM. 
Witnesses: 
PETER J. LINSEY, 
JAMES WOOD. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332753.txt	(No Model.) 
R. ROSSITER, 
TENSION ATTACHMENT FOR SEWING MACHINES. 
No. 332,753, 
Patented Dec. 22, 1885. 
a 
-d 
9 
Fig. 1. 
 
Withesses: 
4's 44 
... peers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, P.C. 
 
hivehtor: 
t Bazar (or 
AttOrgyS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD ROSSITER, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS. 
TENS ON ATTACHMENT FOR SEWING MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 332,753, dated December 22, 1885. 
Application filed March 18, 1885. Serial No. 159,258. (No model.) 
the two jaws at their rear end is the spiral 
spring f. When the eccentric-strap C is in 45 
its lowest position, the needle -bar will be 
raised, and the nut d on the rod D brought 
down against the upper jaw, e, thus depress 
ing the rear end of the jaw and raising the 
forward end, and allowing the thread to be 5o 
fed between the jaws. When the eccentric 
strap C is in its highest position, it will lower 
the needle-bar, raise the rod D and nut d, and 
the spiral spring f will throw the rear ends of 
the jaws apart, thus throwing the forward 55 
ends together, so as to firmly grasp the thread 
t. (See Fig. 2.) 
I have all tided to the action of the eccentric 
strap C on the needle-bar to illustrate how the 
tension attachment loosens its hold on the 
thread after every stitch taken by the machine. 
The point at which the jaws E and e' shall 
loosen their hold upon the thread and the 
length of time they shall remain open can be 
regulated by the nut d on the rod D, the jaws 
opening quicker and remaining open longer 
when the nut is low on the rod than when it 
is higher. The inside faces of the jaws E and 
e', where they come in contact with the thread, 
may be lined with glass or other hard sub 
stance, to prevent the thread from wearing 
into the Surface. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
A tension attachment having the rod D, nut 
d, jaws E and e, pin e', and spring F, and 
means, as strap C, for imparting an intermit 
tent movement to rod D from the main shaft, 
all substantially as in the one shown and de- 8o 
Scribed. 
75 
RICHARD ROSSITER. 
Witness my hand. 
In presence of - 
CHAs. ALLEN TABER, 
WARREN B. HUTCHINSON. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RICHARD RossITER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Lynn, 
County of Essex, and Commonwealth of Mas 
5 Sachusetts, have invented a new and useful 
Tension Attachment for Sewing-Machines, of 
Which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to tension attachments 
in which the thread is passed between two 
IO jaws, which are held in place by a spiral spring; 
and the object of my invention is to provide a 
tension attachment that will hold the thread 
firmly and loosen the thread at each stitch 
taken by the machine, so that it may be fed 
I5 to the needle as fast as required. I attain this 
object by means of the mechanism illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view of a section of a sewing 
machine having the tension attachment fast 
ened to it, with the jaws loosened up so that 
the thread will pass through easily; and Fig. 
2, a view of the tension attachment with the 
jaWS closed tightly upon the thread. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
25 out the several views of the device. 
A is an upright section of the frame of a sew. 
ing-machine, to which is fastened the tension 
attachment proper. b is a shaft provided with 
an eccentric, b, which, as the shaft revolves, 
raises and lowers the eccentric-strap C. The 
eccentric-strap C is attached to a lever which 
is connected with the needle-bar, (not shown,) 
SO that as the eccentric-strap is raised the 
needle-bar is lowered, all of which is accom 
plished in an obvious and well-known man 
e. 
The tension attachment consists of the rod 
D, jaws E and e, pine", spiral spring f, and 
nut d. The rod D passes through the jaws E 
and e, the lower end being fastened to the ec 
centric-strap C, and the upper end provided 
With a nut, d. The upper jaw, e, is pinned 
to the lower jaw, E, by the pine, and between 
3O 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332853.txt	 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE WILKIN, OF DUNDEE, NEW YORK. 
CRATE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 332,853, dated December 22, 1885. 
Application filed July 22, 1885. Serial No. 172,268. (No model.) 
r 
which- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE WILKIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Dun 
dee, in the county of Yates and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Crates, of the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Crates used for picking and shipping fruit; 
and the objects of my improvements are, first, 
to make a crate specially adapted for picking, 
and that may be readily transformed into a 
shipping-Crate; second, to admit of the crates 
being packed and loaded together, one above 
the other, in the least possible room, for ship 
ping, and for the convenience of being carried 
to and from the pickers or field. I attain 
these objects by the arrangement of the crate 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my crate 
as it would be used for a picking-crate, with 
a portion broken away to show the groove or 
recess in its bottom. Fig. 2 is a cross-sec 
tional view of three crates, showing the man 
ner of combining for packing or shipping pur 
poses, with baskets within. Fig. 3 is a ver 
tical sectional view on the line y), Fig. 1, of 
two crates as they would be combined. Fig. 4 
is a perspective view of the cover. Fig. 5 is 
an edge view, in detail, of two spring-hooks 
when combined, as in Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a front 
view, in detail, of same hook. Figs. 7 shows 
an equivalent or modified form of said hooks. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The crate is usually made rectangular in 
form, but may vary somewhat in size or style, 
according to the fruit it is to contain, and in 
making, to the edges of the end pieces, BB, 
are nailed the slats c e o c and d ddd, to con 
stitute the bottom and sides, and between them 
open spaces are left. These spaces serve for 
ventilation, excepting the central space, e, in 
the bottom, which is of proper width to receive 
a projecting central partition or handle, F, 
made equal, or nearly so, in width to the 
ends B B, and so nailed between them as 
to balance the crate when lifted by it, and 
to project or rise nearly one-half its width 
above said ends. To protect this space 
e from fruit, so that the handle F may read 
ily pass within it when one crate is set upon 
another, I have nailed to the sides of the 
bottom slats, at the lower edge of said han 
dle, thin shielding-strips ii. As the picking 
crates are thus placed together, the handle 
F of one passes up into the groove e in the 
bottom of another, and when so placed it will 
be readily seen that slipping laterally in either 
direction is prevented; and now by the use 
of spring-hooks SS, or their equivalent, to hold 
one down upon the other, and by placing upon 
the last of the combined crates the independ 
ent lid H., (more fully explained hereinafter,) 
a ready shipping-crate is formed of any num 
ber of picking-crates, and without any extra 
change or handling of fruit, such as is neces 
sary with the ordinary shipping-crate. To 
further strengthen the crates when so com 
bined, and to relieve the handle F from too 
much strain that might be brought upon it, I 
have placed in the upper edges of head-pieces 
B B dowel-pins r r, arranged to enter cor 
responding holes, r' ' ' ', in the lower edges 
as they are successively brought together. 
The springs, having an inclined hook, t, at its 
top or spring end, suitable to engage in an 
opening, 0, at the bottom or fixed end of an 
other spring, is attached by means of screws 
to the ends BB, in position to insure the en 
gagement of the spring end of one with the 
fixed end of another as the crates are pressed 
down together. The hook shown in Fig. 7 
as an equivalent or a modified form may be 
used, and differs only in that, instead of the 
hook itself being a spring, a spring, s, is in 
serted in it near its fixed end, and instead of 
screws to attach it to the head-piece B two 
staples are used, the lower one passing through 
the hook and forming Said opening 0, While 
the other staple is driven over the hook and 
its spring, near its free end, merely for the 
purpose of guiding said hook and forming a 
seat for its springs. 
In making a cover, H, that shall fit any and 
all of the crates it is necessary that a similar 
opening, e', to that in the bottom be made to 
receive the handle F, and through which said 
handle may project, the spring-hooks catching 
over the lid ends, Fig. 3, which are protected 
from wear by short iron strips it, laid upon 
cross-pieces d d, to which slats D D, of the 
right width, are nailed. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
85 
go 
95 
OO 
2 
332,853 
 
Scribed. 
1. A crate having a raised portion, F, on 
Having thus fully described my improve- eral movement is prevented when so arranged 
ment, what I claim, and wish to secure by together, in the manner substantially as de 
Letters Patent, is- 
4. In combination with a crate having the 
5 one side and a recess or groove, e, to receive raised portion F and recess e underneath it, 
the corresponding portion, F, of another crate, the cover H, having the opening e' through it, 
Substantially as described. 
side and an opening or recess in its opposite pieces ff, and an opening, e, through it, in 
Io side, in combination with spring - actuated combination with spring-actuated hooks, With 
hooks, with apertures below the springs of the apertures below the springs of the hooks, for 
hooks, for the reception of the hooks of another the reception of the hooks of another crate, 
crate, substantially as shown and described. substantially as set forth and described. 
GEORGE WILKIN. 
2. A crate having a raised portion on one 
substantially as described. 
5. In a crate, the lid H., having protecting- 25 
I5 dowels ' 
3. A crate having a raised portion, F, and 
', or their equivalent, in combina- 
tion with a crate having a recess or opening, 
e, to receive such raised portion, whereby lat- 
Witnesses: 
G. S. SHATTUCK, 
E. G. COSTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US332953.txt	(Model.) 
No. 332,953, 
W. J. SHERRIFF. 
INJECTOR, . 
Patented Dec. 22, 1885. 
 
 
ZZZZZZZ) 
IIIIIIIIIIIIT? 
 
WZZ72esses. 
??? 4. 
PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM J. SHERRIFF, OF ALLEGHENY CITY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
I NJEc?o R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 332,953, dated December 22, 1885. 
Application filed December 10, 1884. 
Serial No. 49,943. (Model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM.J. SHERRIFF, 
of Allegheny City, in the county of Allegheny 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
5 new and useful Improvement in Injectors; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional view of 
my improved injector on the line av ac of Fig. 
2. Fig. 2 is an edge view of the same. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
wherever they occur. 
The object of my invention is to simplify, 
cheapen, and improve the construction of in 
jectors. 
In the drawings, a is the shell, having its 
body divided into three compartments, a?, ct, 
and d, by diaphragms or partitions a and af. 
Within these partitions are two nozzles, b and 
c, the nozzle b being a steam-nozzle, and c a 
water ejecting or lifting nozzle. The nozzle b 
extends into the chamber a from the steam 
chamber d, and the nozzle c extends from the 
chamber a? into the chamber a through the 
diaphragm a'. A partition, a, supports a third 
nozzle, e, which establishes communication be: 
tween the chamber a and a chamber, a. 
The nozzle e is in line with the other two noz 
zles, b and c. The chamber a has a direct 
lateral communication with a discharge-pipe, 
, which leads to the boiler. The shell a is 
provided with a steam-pipe, d", leading into 
35 the steam-chamber d, and the latter chamber 
is separated from the other parts of the in 
jector by the partition cc, except a steam-port, 
g, communicating With the steam-chamber and 
the chamber a through the partition a and 
the nozzle b, which admits steam from the 
chamber d into the chamber (c. The chamber 
at is the induction-chamber, and the shell a is 
provided with two induction-pipes, h. h., which 
enter this chamber directly from opposite 
sides of the injector. At the base of the 
shell, and out of line with the nozzles bc e, is a 
waste or overflow port, i, which communicates 
with the chamber a'. The nozzles are put in 
place through openings in the upper and lower 
sides of the shell a, which are closed by screw 
plugs k and l, these openings being in align 
ment with the nozzles. The upper plug, l, 
45 
7? 
serves as a fulcrum for a lever, m, which is 
pivoted thereto. Connected with the lever m, 
on one side of the fulcrum l is a stem, n, hav. 55 
ing a valve, n, at its lower end, arranged to 
close the steam-port g by being seated in a 
conical seat at the upper end of the port. Om 
the other side of the fulcrum l, and pivoted to 
the lever m, is another valve-stem, i', having a 
valve, i, at its lower end, arranged to close 
the overflow-port, i when depressed to its seat 
thereon. The valves in and i are adjusta 
ble by changing the height of the fulcrum, 
which may be done by the screw-plug fitting 65 
into the shell a. 
Vx 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
To start the injector, the port g is closed by 
depressing the lever m, and the overflow-port, 
is opened by the same operation. Steam be 
ing admitted into the pipe d' passes from the 
chamber d through the nozzle b into and 
through the head c, producing a vacuum in 
the chamber a, raising water into this cham 
ber through the induction-pipes h h", and dis 
charging it through the head c into the noz 
zle e and chamber ct, whence it escapes 
through the overflow i. When the currentis 
established, the lever m is slowly raised, there 
by gradually opening the port g and closing 
the discharge-port i. Steam will then pass 
through the port g into the chamber at and 
around the nozzles c and e, between which it 
forms an annular jet, which strikes the water 
in the nozzle e and impels it therethrough 
and through the chamber a to the overflow 
port i. When steam has ceased to come 
through the latter opening, and the chamber 
a' is well filled with water, the lever m is raised 
SO as to open the steam-port g and to close 
the overflow-valve i completely, when the wa 
ter will escape through the pipef to the boiler. 
A slow regular lift of the lever-handle is all 
that is necessary to effect the whole of this 
operation, because the closing of the valve i 
and the Opening of the valve g are simultane 
ously performed, and by the time when these 
parts are respectively opened and closed the 
current of water through the injector will 
have been well established. Cold water from 
a well or hydrant is drawn into the chamber 
a through the induction-pipe h. The oppo 
site pipe, h", is connected with the condenser 
or waste-Water chamber usual in boilers, and 
85 
95 
75 
JO 
ICO 
and nozzlese, c, and b are all in alignment, 3o 
heated water is drawn from thence. Care 
and that by removing the plugs all the noz 
should be had that not enough hot wateris in 
zles may be unscrewed and removed for the 
duced into the chamber a that when mingled 
with cold water from the pipe h the resultant purpose of repairing without the necessity of 
5 may be unduly hot and prevent the necessary 
detaching the injector from the boiler. 
I am aware that injectors have been em 
condensation of steam in the ejector-head. 
ployed having a steam-valve and an overflow 
The amount of hot water used can be conven 
valve arranged to be operated by the move 
iently regulated by a throttle or cock on the 
pipe h'. When the hot-water pipe h' is not de 
ment of the same lever, and I am also aware 
that nozzles and plugs have been arranged in 
sired to be used, it may be uncoupled, and the 
an injector in a line with each other, and I do 4o 
hole in the injector-shell closed by a plug. 
not desire to claim these features, broadly. 
The advantages of the construction of the 
Having thus described my improvement so 
induction-pipes herein shown are that they 
introduce the water directly into the chamber 
that others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains may manufacture and use it, what I 
a without allowing it first to come into con 
claim as my invention, and desire to secure by 
tact with and chill the other parts of the in 
jector, and by the use of two pipes I am en 
Letters Patent, is 
The combination, in an injector, of a lifting 
abled to utilize the heated water of the con 
densing-chamber in a manner unknown here 
or ejecting head or nozzle, a cold-water-induc 
tion pipe, and a hot-water-induction pipe, 
both of said pipes communicating with the 
The construction of the valves in and i', in 
? 
said lifting-head, substantially as and for the 5 
combination with the simple lever m, en 
purposes described. 
ables the valves to be opened and closed by a 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
simultaneous and gradual movement of the 
my hand this 2d day of December, A. D. 1884. 
25 lever-handle, and as both valves seat down 
ward in the direction of the impelling force 
of steam or water they will securely close 
their respective ports. 
It will be observed that the plugs l and l: 
VV. B. CORWIN, 
THOMAS W. BAKEWELL. 
WILLIAM J. SEHERRIFF. 
35 
45 
O 
2o tofore. 
332,953 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333053.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 333,053, 
D. BROWN & J. D. BRADLEY. 
BUCKBOARD WAGON, 
Patented Deo, 22, 1885. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SP 
S. 
G 
 
It 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IFI 
62 
C. 
s 
d i.e. 
L. L. r 
..I l its 
-- roman O 7 
D simuli. It traits 
N 
li 8. En 
E 
L. L e d ls 
IIIHERITIP 
-re 
... 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
WITNESSES: 
(5.2% 6ata 
22. 
it 32, 
Waala T. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID BROWN AND JOSEPH. D. BRADLEY, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, 
ASSIGNORS TO ROYAL. O. DORMAN, OF SAME PLACE. 
BUCKBOARD-WAG ON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,053, dated December 22, 1885. 
Application filed June 11, 1885. Serial No. 168,427. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that we, DAVID BROWN and 
JoSEPHD. BRADLEY, citizens of the United 
States, residing at New Haven, in the State 
of Connecticut, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Buckboard-Wagons, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to animproved buck 
board-Wagon, and has for its object to adapt 
the vehicle for short turning, and to provide 
increased elasticity of the wagon body or 
frame. 
In the ordinary buckboard-wagon the reach 
is dispensed with, and the axles are con 
nected by elastic parallel slats or strips of 
WOOd, forming a springing platform, on which 
the seat is mounted. The platform is but 
slightly elevated above the center of the 
Wheels, and if made nearly as wide as the 
Space between the wheels will prevent the 
Wagon from being turned in a short space. 
If the platform is made narrow, its elasticity 
is reduced, and the wooden slats sag under 
the load imposed and remain deflected. 
Our invention consists in the novel con 
struction and arrangement of the slats form 
ing the vehicle-body and in a novel auxil 
iary metal spring for strengthening the same, 
as hereinafter more particularly described 
and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
is a side view of a buckboard-wagon embody 
ing Our improvements. Fig. 2 is a plan view 
of the under side of the body of the vehicle, 
and Figs. 3 and 4 show modifications of the 
slats forming the body or frame. 
In the drawings, A designates the parallel 
Wooden slats or strips which form the vehi 
cle body or frame. The slats are arranged 
in two sets or series, and extend from the re 
spective axles to about midway of the wagon. 
The rear Slats are fastened at their rear ends 
to a transverse bed-piece or bolster, which is 
mounted on the back axle, b, and the for 
Ward slats are secured at their forward ends 
to a transverse bed-piece, which is mounted 
Over and pivoted in the usual manner to the 
front axle, c. The slats curve upward from 
the axles, as shown, and are fastened at their 
opposite ends to parallel cross-bars d, which 
are connected by longitudinal bars e. The 
Wagon-Seat his mounted upon the cross-bars 
d, and further strengthens the connection 
between the Slats. Thus curved and connect 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
ed the slats form a strong and graceful elas 
tic frame, which is arched midway of its 
length, and has the wagon-seat surmounted 
directly over the arch or point of greatest 
elasticity. 
Arranged under the vehicle - body is an 
auxiliary spring, L, which is shaped to con 
form to the arch in the frame. The spring 
is secured at its center to the middle stay, 
e, and is bent around under the slats A, fol 
lowing their curvature. The ends of the 
spring are fastened to transverse bars M, which 
are bolted across the horizontal part of the 
Slats. 
Constructed as above, described and shown 
this form of buckboard-Wagon can be turned 
in a very short space, as the forward wheels 
swing under the arch in the frame when the 
axle oscillates on its bolt or pivot. The 
arched frame also has greater strength and 
elasticity than the ordinary buckboard-wagon, 
and is more graceful in design. 
When a two-seated wagon is desired, the 
rear ends, A, of the rear slats may project 
beyond the axle and curve upward like the 
forward ends, as shown in Fig. 3, forming a 
support for an additional Seat. 
If desired, the spring L. may be dispensed 
with, and the arch properly strengthened by 
iron braces, stays, or leather cross-straps; but 
the spring insures superior elasticity, and is 
therefore preferable. 
It is evident that the upper ends of the 
slats may be fastened to a single cross-bar 
or suitably secured to the bottom of the seat. 
The body or frame of the wagon may also 
be made of a single series of slats, A, bent 
upward near the middle to form an arch, as 
shown in Fig. 4. 
We desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination of the front and rear 
series of slats A with the auxiliary spring L, 
having its ends attached to the respective 
Series of slats, substantially in the manner 
and for the purpose specified. 
2. In a double-seated buckboard - wagon 
having an arched frame, the rear series of 
slats, A, bent upward at each end to form an 
elastic support for the respective seats, sub 
stantially in the manner set forth. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID BROWN. 
JOSEPH. D. BRADILEY. 
DAVID K. ANDREWs, 
ALWENO M. HOLMES. 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333153.txt	(No Model.) 
N0, 333,153. 
J. F. PLATT. 
HAY TEDDER, 
Patented Deo, 29, 1885. 
 1 : 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. PLATT, OF STERLING, ILLINOIS. 
HAY-TED DER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,153, dated December 29, 1885. 
Application filed October 20, 1884. Serial No. 146,046. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES F. PLATT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ster. 
ling, in the county of Whiteside and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful. 
Improvements in Hay cuius; and I do here. 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, and to letters and figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form apart of this speci 
fication. 
My invention has reference to certain im 
provements in hay tedders, and pertains more 
especially to a novel construction and seating 
of the tedder-fork, whereby a portion of such 
fork may abut against the lower end of the 
fork-arm, and thus limit the throw of such 
fork. 
As the improvement is confined to the fork, 
and the relation of the latter to the residue of 
the machine is well known to those skilled in 
the art, I do not deem it necessary to show or 
describe the residue of the machine. 
In the drawings, Figure1 is the front eleva 
tion of a fork embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 is a section in the lir. 
. . cf Fig. 1, except 
that the fork is shown at the limit of its back 
ward throw. 
A is the ordinary fork-arm, attached to the 
machine in the usual mode, with the points of 
the fork toward the rear of the machine. 
C Care plates attached, respectively, to each 
side of the arm A, at the lower end of the lat 
ter, and provided with outwardly-extending 
lugs or ears aa, transversely through which 
the forkID is pivotally seated. 
D is the fork, having its central portion bent 
into the upward loop d, and two downward 
loops, ee, the latter located, respectively, in a 
line with the sides of the loop d. 
25 
30 
O 
4: 
Co 
65 
E is a flat spring attached at its upper end 
to the front face of the arm A, and having its 
lower and free end protruded into and resting 
upon the apex of the loop d. 
The loops ee are formed by bending a por 
tion of the central part of the fork D down 
ward, outward, and upward and in such re. 
lation to the arm A that when the teeth are 
thrown backward from contact with an ob 
stacle or prominence on the ground the loops 
ee will, when such teeth are back sufficiently 
to rise over the obstacle, abut against the 
lower end of the arm A and check the farther 
throw of the fork. After the fork has passed 
the obstacle the spring E, acting upon the cen 
tral loop, d, will return the fork D to its work 
ing positiou. The loops e e are intended if 
course, to prevent the fork D being thrown so 
far back as to permit the loop d to pass out 
from under the spring E or to rotate so far 
that the pressure of such spring on the loop 
d will throw the fork backward. 
The loops e e furnish a very strong and 
substantial stop. 
What I claiun as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
S 
1. The fork D, provided with the loop d, and 
with the loops e e, integral with such fork, sub 
stantially as shown, and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
2. The fork D, provided with the loop d and 
the loops ee, in combination with the arm A, 
plates C, and spring E, substantially as shown, 
and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES F. PLATT. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER N. HASKELL, 
CYRUS KEHR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333253.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 333,253, 
J. C. REED. 
CAR COUPLING, 
Patented Dec. 29, 1885. 
Z24 
e 
27 
z1 
A TSg 
is 
a 
A 
S 2 
ld 
E. se 
l 
S 
A a 
 
ez 
A. 
A. E 
WITWESSES 
4.- C wer 
IWWEWTOR 
44.6 %ece 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN C. REED, OF TOPEKA, KANSAS. 
CAR a COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,253, dated December 29, 1885. 
Application filed July 28, 1885. Serial No. 172,895. (No model.) 
Be it known that I, JoHN C.REED, a citizen tion, a, which acts as a socket, into which the 55 
65 
Suitable mechanism for uncoupling is con- 6o 
The lower part of the draw-bar has a perfora 
lower end of the swinging pin C drops after 
the coupling has been completed, thereby 
forming a bearing for the lower end of the pin 
against the draft. 
nected with the pins C and G from the end 
and top of the car, in order that they may be 
adjusted from the ground without going be 
tween the cars, or from the top of the latter, 
as occasion may require. 
The operation is as follows: The link D is 
placed in the draw-bar and secured in its con 
nection thereto by the pin G, the end of the 
link being under the interior extension, a, of 
the draw-bar, which will prevent the outer 7c 
end of the link from dropping too low to enter 
the mouth of the opposite draw-bar. As the 
cars are moved together, the link D will en 
gage with the pin C of the opposite draw-bar, 
and cause the same to move in the direction 75 
indicated by the dotted lines until it passes 
over the end of the link and regains the posi 
tion shown by dropping into the link, thereby 
effecting the desired connection without other 
care than first placing the link in one draw- 8o 
bar, as described. For the purpose of un 
coupling, a chain or wire will be affixed to the 
eye c of the swinging pin C, and another to 
the eyeg of the ordinary pin, G, and extended 
thence to the top and sides of the car through 85 
a pulley fastened to the body of the car above 
the bracket E E E, and so arranged that the 
pins G and C will be simultaneously given 
sufficient movement for the purpose of un 
Coupling. 
Having explained the features of my im 
provement, what I claim as new, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The pin C, arm B, and pin G, connected and 
arranged to operate as described, in combina- 95 
tion with the draw - bar A, provided with 
bracket E E E, interior perpendicular exten 
sions, a d", notch a, and recess a' a', as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in Ioo 
90 
JOHN C. REED. 
Witnesses: 
WM. HALL JENKINS, 
C. THOMAS, Jr. 
5 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
of the United States, residing at Topeka, in 
the county of Shawnee and State of Kansas, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Car-Couplers; and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters and figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
The object of this improvement is a coup 
ler for freight-cars that will couple auto 
matically and may be uncoupled without the 
necessity of the operator going between the 
cars. These results are attained by the mech 
anism illustrated in the drawings herewith 
filed as part hereof, in which the same letters 
of reference denote the same parts in the dif. 
ferent views. 
Figure l is a plan view of a car-coupler 
embodying the features of my improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional representation of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a side elevation. 
AA are draw-bars, provided on their tops 
with integral longitudinal and transverse ele 
vations forming brackets EEE. 
B is an arm pivotally secured to the bracket 
parts E E by means of a boit, a. 
C is a coupling -pin articulated to the 
arm B. 
The upper part of the draw.bar is provided 
with a slot, b, at the rear end of which the 
body of the draw-bar has a notch, a, for a 
purpose hereinafter set forth. The body of 
the draw-bar is also provided with an interior 
perpendicular extension, a, (shown in Fig. 
2,) for the purpose of engaging with the end 
of the link D and holding the same in a hori 
Zontal or nearly horizontal position, suitable 
for entering the mouth of the opposite draw 
bar as the cars are moved together. The in 
terior of the draw-bar is also provided with a 
vertical extension or lug, ct, for the purpose 
of engaging with the end of the link D and 
preventing the inward movement of the same 
when it comes in contact with the opposite 
draw-bar in the act of coupling. Adjacent to 
the transverse part E of the bracket E E the 
draw-bar is provided with a perforation for 
the reception of an ordinary coupling-pin, G. 
25 
35 
45 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333354.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 333,354, 
 
A. M. SOUTHARD, 
WAPOR BURNING LAMP. 
Patented Deo 
29, 1885. 
 
Mae:Z2 
----------- 
???z 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM M. SOUTHARD, OF DEN VER, COLORADO, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
SOUTHARD PORTABLE GAS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
2 
VAPOR-BURNING LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,354, dated December 29, 1885. 
Application filed April 3, 1885. Serial No. 161,137. (No model.) 
? ? 
3O 
35 
25 line ygy in Fig. 5. 
To all, ?????, it ??? ????????: 
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM. M. SouTH 
ARD, of Denver, Arapahoe county, Colorado, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve. 
5 ments in Vapor-Burning Lamps, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My improved lamp is adapted for convert 
ing light oil into vapor and burning it. 
My improvements aid to make the lamp safe, 
regular, reliable, and easily governed with re 
gard to the amount of vapor used and of light 
developed. 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 
this specification, and represent what I con 
sider the best means of carrying out the in 
vention. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the lamp, 
showing it arranged on a standard. Fig. 2 is 
a similar view of a portion partly broken away, 
showing the lamp mounted on a bracket. Fig. 
3 is an elevation. Fig. 4 is a similar view at 
right angles to Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a vertical sec 
tion. F`ig. 6 is a cross-section on the line ac ac 
in Fig. 5, and Fig. 7 is a cross-section on the 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures where they 
OCCU. 
A is the body of the lamp. The base of A 
connects by a short vertical tube with a hol 
low Socket-casting,B, certain portions of which 
will be designated, when necessary, by addi 
tional marks, as B. B. 
B is an arm extending downward directly 
under the lamp-body. ltis formed with swells, 
as shown, to give an ornamental effect, and is 
capable of serving as an efficient bearing to 
Support the lamp and its attachments in a 
socketed bracket, as will appear further on. 
C is a pinching - screw, which is tapped 
through the vertical socket B and serves to 
set it firmly on an upright cylindrical rod, D, 
which latter is fixed at adjustable heights om a 
stand, E, by means of a pinching-screw, F. 
45 The casting B is tapped at the end B, and re 
ceives a screw - thread of a curved tube, M, 
which incloses a fibrous filling, n. This has 
in my experiments been a loosely-braided soft . 
cord of cotton or other fiber, such as is some 
times used for wicking in lamps having Small 5o 
round tubes. The curvature of this tube al 
lows this material, which I will designate as 
wick, to be conveniently inserted and with 
drawn, when necessary, from either end. The 
upper end of this tube M and its contained 55 
wick m are higher than the top of the main 
body of A. The lamp is filled at intervals with 
a volatile hydrocarbon liquid. In my ex 
periments I have used a light product of the 
distillation of petroleum, commonly known 6o 
in the trade as gasoline.' I will so describe 
it. The gasoline fills the main body of Band 
the lower portion of the curved tube M, and 
saturates the whole of the wick, being drawn 
up in the fibrous filling quite to the top of 65 
M. The wick m does not protrude from the 
tube, but, raising the gasoline by capillary at 
traction, presents it to the heat which ob 
tains in the metal at the upper end of M 
and produces a combustible vapor. I pro- 7c 
vide small orifices for the escape of the vapor 
with convenient means for simultaneously 
controlling their area. When the lamp-body 
A is filled, the wick is capable of presenting 
more of the fluid to the burner than is re- 75 
i quired. Under such conditions the heat gen 
erating a surplus of vapor will force down the 
level of the fluid in the tube M. There is 
practically little difference in the working of 
the burner whether the lamp-body A is filled 
or nearly empty; but it is important to pro 
vide means for regulating the slight differences 
which are due to this cause, and to allow the 
user of the lamp to command at will the full 
power of the burner or as much less as he 
may feel disposed to use. To this end I pro 
vide the upper end of the tube Mwith a fixed 
cap, P, having a flange, P, and five or other 
desired convenient number of small lateral 
apertures, p. Exterior to this perforated por 
tion of M is a close-fitting ring, Q, having a 
flange, Q, and provided with apertures q, cor 
responding to the apertures p. The ring Q 
is capable of turning on the cap P, SO as, when 
the apertures p and q coincide, to providelib. 95 
eral apertures for the outflow of vapor. 
R is a controlling-shaft, which stands nearly 
parallel to the upper portion of the curved 
85 
9O 
2 
333,354 
I will term it simply an upright screw-plug, which performs its obvious func 
tions. 
A is a float. This may be a thin hollow 
metallic vessel, or a simple cork may suffice. 
To it is connected a slender rod, a, having 
its upper end formed in a ring, a. This rod 
or wire a can move up and down in a sufi 
cient orifice provided in the lamp-top A. 
When the lamp is being filled, the ring a 
remains down until the gasoline has nearly 
filled the lamp-body B. Then the float A 
rises and communicates its motion through 
the wire a to the ring a, and serves as a gage 
to warn the attendant that he shall stop pour 
ing. The top of the lamp A carries an orna 
mental cap, which makes a finish, and protects 
the ring a and the wire a from mechanical 
injury, while allowing them to be easily in 
spected from above in the act of filling. 
It will be seen that although I have applied 
the term 'wick to the fiber m, it does not 
protrude so as to perform the ordinary func 
It raises the gasoline into 
tion of a wick. 
the vicinity of the upper end of the tube M 
by capillary attraction in a manner analogous 
to that of a wick, and it restrains any tend 
ency of the gasoline to pulsate or dash, or rise 
and sink rapidly in the tube when the lamp 
is carried or jolted. If the impurities in the 
gasoline foul the wick or the heat of the 
burner chars the upper end after a time, the 
parts may be easily separated and the wick m .. 
drawn out, and the charred end may be cut 
off and the wick reinserted, or a new one sub 
Stituted. 
tube M. 
shaft. It extends through a hole in the 
flange P, and also through a hole a little 
farther out from the center under the flange 
Q. It is provided at the upper end with 
a bent end, R', which bent end engages 
with the flange Q, serving as a short arm or 
lever to communicate the turning motion of 
R to the ring Q, and when the shaft R is 
turned causes the ring Q to turn to a less but 
effective extent. The lower end of R is pro 
vided with a convenient handle, R. 
T is a hub or boss capable of being moved 
up and down on the tube M, and secured in 
the desired position by a pinching-screw, U. 
The hub Tis equipped with arms T', which 
connect to a shade-holder, T, provided with 
the ordinary screws, T, by which a shade may 
be confined or released. The lower end of 
the upright shaft R is steadied between two 
short arms, TT, on the hub or boss T. The 
inner faces of these arms are beveled at their 
outer ends, as indicated in Figs. 3 and 7, and 
farther inward are finished, so as to loosely 
embrace the shaft R and form a bearing in 
which it may be turned to the right and left. 
This steadies the lower end of the shaft while 
allowing it to be removed and inserted when 
required on simply throwing it into an inclined 
position corresponding to the inclined inner 
faces of the arms T.T. It will be understood 
that the socket B is entirely out of connec 
tion with the passage containing the gasoline, 
and that the branch simply serves as a socket 
by which the lamp may be supported. 
S is a bracket supported upon the wall W. 
by screws 8 s'. By slackening the screws C 
the parts above may be disconnected from the 
rod D. The bracket S is formed with a socket, 
S', adapted to receive the arm B, and thereby 
to firmly support the body A and its attach 
ments, allowing the tube M and its attach 
ments to be turned in various directions by 
the partial revolving of the bearing-arm B in 
the socket S. Thus the lamp may serve either 
as a bracket-lamp or a student-lamp. In the 
latter use it is adjusted up and down by rais 
ing and lowering the rod D, on which it is 
supported. 
The bracket described forms no part of the 
invention in this application. 
I employ, in combination, with this lamp, a 
peculiar lighting device adapted to conven 
iently apply the heat for putting the lamp in 
condition for work. 
A' is a filling-aperture provided with a 
I claim as my invention 
1. The perforated ring Q q, in combination 
with the perforated cap Pip, flanges P'Q', and 
bent or cranked operating-shaft R. R', com 
bined and arranged to serve relatively to each 
other and to the tube M and lamp-body A, 
substantially as herein specified. 
2. The plate T, with lugs TT, and arms T. 
T, in combination with the tube M, cap P P' 
with the lamp-body A, arranged for joint op 
p, ring Q Q g, and adjusting-shaft R R, and 
eration, substantially as herein specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand, at Chicago, Cook county, Illinois, this 
17th day of March, 1885, in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
ABRAHAM M. SOUTHARD. 
Witnesses: 
E. M. STANTON, 
W. C. JoNEs. 
?? 
65 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333455.txt	M. W. B. EU ANS, 
JAR PROTECTOR AND SEALER, 
- 
Patented Dec. 29, 1885. 
(No Model.) 
No. 333,455, 
 
WITNESSES 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN W. B. EUANS, OF PORTSMOUTH, OHIO. 
JAR PROTECTOR AND SEALER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,455, dated December 29, 1885. 
Application filed July 23, 1885. 
Serial No. 172,460. (No mo'el.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
flange, c, which is adapted to fit within the 
depression in the bottom of the jar, so as to 
retain the same centrally upon the base. The 
outer periphery of the base is turned upward 
ly, and at suitable intervals there are attached 
thereto upwardly-projecting strips D, Which 
are of greater length than the jar A. The 
top E of the casing, near its outer edge, is rig 
idly secured to the strips D, and it is provided 
on its under edge with inclined pieces e. The 
cover of the jar is held in position by a block, 
F, which extends across the top, and is pro 
vided with a central depending portion, f, 
which is curved on its under face where it 
bears on the concave surface of the top. When 
it is desired to secure the cover on the jar, the 
block F is placed under the top E, and turned 
so that its ends will come in contact with the 
beveled pieces e, and when further turned the 
top will be forced and held securely in place. 
The opening in the upper portion, E, is of 
such a size that the jar may be passed through 
the Same. 
In order to form a further protection for the 
jar, so as to exclude the rays of light from the 
contents of the jar, I place a cylinder or sheet 
of card-board between the outer frame and 
the jar, as shown at G. 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MARTIN W. B. EUANs, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Portsmouth, in the county of Scioto 
and State of Ohio, have invented certain new 
and useful Inprovements in Fruit-Jar Protec 
tors and Sealers; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
er's skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
or figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in devices for protecting 
and Sealing or securing the tops to fruitjars; 
and my invention consists in the construction 
and combination of the parts, as will be here 
inafter set forth, and specifically pointed out 
in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate my invention, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a fruitjar protector and sealer con 
structed in accordance with my invention; 
and Fig. 2 is a sectional view. 
A represents a fruit or other jar which is 
of ordinary construction, said jar having its 
bottom slightly depressed, as shown ata, while 
I claim 
In a fruitjar protector and holder, a cas 
its neck is provided with an upwardly-pro 
ing or frame, substantially as described, pro 
jecting rim, a?, from which extends an in 
wardly-projecting shoulder, b, which serves vided with a top having inclined depending 
portions and a block, F, which engages with 
as a support for a rubber gasket, above which 
the same to retain the cover in position, sub 
is located a covering-plate, B. 
stantially as set forth. 
A is a concave cover, which rests within 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
the flanges a? of the jar immediately upon the 
presence of two witnesses. 
covering-plate B, which cover is pressed upon 
the same and held in position by a cross 
bar, as will be hereinafter set forth. 
C is a circular base, which has stamped up 
therefrom or attached thereto a circular raised 
GEORGE W. ANDERSON, 
W. B. ANDERSON. 
MARTIN W. B. EU ANS. 
Witnesses: 
-45 
SO 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333555.txt	(No Model.) 
B. B. SHARP, 
ALTITUDE INSTRUMENT. 
No. 333,555, 
Patented Jan, 5, 1886. 
gruventor. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN BARTON SHARP, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
ALTTUDENSTRUMENT. 
3PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,555, dated January 5, 1886. 
Application filed March 31, 1885. Serial No. 160,832. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
To all, Luhon, it nalty concer'7. 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN BARTON 
SHARP, a resident of San Francisco, State of 
California, have invented a novel and useful 
Anglemeter; and I hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings. 
My invention relates to a novel means for 
measuring altitudes and ascertaining time dur 
ing day or night. 
The following description fully explains the 
nature of my said invention, and the manner 
in which I proceed to construct, apply, and 
use the same, the accompanying drawings be 
ing referred to by figures and letters. 
Figure L represents the stern of a vessel, 
showing the position of the anglemeter. Fig. 
2 is an enlarged view of the anglemeter 
mounted. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the angle 
meter. Fig. 4 represents elevation of the 
cross-bar, showing spirit-levels. Fig. 5 is a 
plan view of the same. Fig. 6 is an enlarged 
view of the anglemeter, showing index-bar 
and nonius or vernier. Fig. 7 is an end view 
of the telescope, showing eye-piece and shade. 
The stern of a boat is represented in Fig. 1 
by the letter a. Upon this is shown the stand 
and anglemeter at b. 
My device, which I call an anglemeter, 
l, consists of a graduated arc, b, of ninety de 
grees, having an index-bar, l, and nonius or 
vernier n, tangent-screws o and clamp, and a 
telescope, n, attached to the face of the index 
bar, and having an eye-piece, q, and shade , 
and a cross-wire at its farthest extremity. 
The telescope is held to the index-bar by 
bands in, having set-screws p, by means of 
which the telescope may be revolved and held 
in place. The anglemeter is mounted upon a 
movable hollow frame or stand, c, of conical or 
pyramidal form, and of a suitable height and 
diameter. In the center of this frame a pend 
ulum, d, Swings out and in the openings e On 
both sides of the lower part of the frame. 
The pendulum is attached to a cross-bar, t, 
through which a shaft, h, extends. On each 
of the cross-bars there is a lug, k, the horizon 
tal flange of which is screwed to the cross-bar, 
and the vertical flange is perforated for the 
adjusting-screw's p, attached to the angleme 
ter and acting in the slots p. 
cross-bar is rabbeted, j, for a slide and rest for 
the anglemeter on the upper surface of the 
cross-bar, and on its end there are spirit-levels 
i. A metallic ring, f, plays and rotates in a 
groove in the upper part of the frame, and 
within this ring there is another, g, piv 
oted tof, and is adjusted as to using and os 
cillates like a mariner's compass on its gimbals. 
The inner ring, g, is notched for the gimbals 
of the shaft h to act, and it is adjusted to a 
horizontal position by the pendulum and its 
plane determined by the spirit-levels, Fig. 3. 
This novel instrument combines perfect 
means for measuring altitudes. The entire 
field may be obscured, as the slots in both 
arms of the anglemeter, provided with ad 
justing-screws, permit the instrument to be 
attached by either of its radial limbs, and to 
allow a slight movement on the adjusting 
screws by means of the slots p in said limbs. 
The adjustments of the instrument are so 
nice and accurate that after making an ob 
servation it is impossible to place the angles 
out of order. 
After use, the anglemeter is removed to the 
cabin, where it is read and the result of the 
observation obtained, and the instrument is 
secured until it is again wanted. The frame 
may be removed or remain on deck under 
COWe 
The anglemeter is an angle of ninety degrees, 
which describes that arc of the heavens rep 
resenting the horizontal limb, and of course 
the perpendicular limb-that is to say, the 
zenith. The vision is directed from right an 
gle toward any part of the arc of ninety de 
grees, as seen direct from that angle, and the 
true altitude is at once obtained, less the sum 
of atmospheric refraction. There is no dip 
of the horizon, whatsoever the elevation of the 
eye above the surface. The center of the ob 
ject is taken as readily as either limb, and 
consequently there is no semi-diameter. The 
apparent difference of position of the object 
or its parallax is of Small moment, as 
amounts to Only a few Seconds in the case of 
a large altitude. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In an anglemeter, the combination of the 
The face of the frame or stand having the rings f and g, mov 
-- 
- 
45 
SO 
s 
- 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
333,555 
able as described, a cross-bar, t, swung in ringg 
lc on top and the pendulum beneath of the 
by means of a shaft, h, a pendulum attached 
graduated arc having the two radial limbs at 
to said cross-bar below and a graduated arc, 
ninety degrees from each other, provided with 15 
and radial limbs having a nonius or vernier, slots p, adjusting-screws for connecting the 
5 m, index-bar l, and telescope m, secured ad. radial limbs to lugs k, and the vernier n, barl, 
justably to the upper side of the bart, as set and telescope, as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
forth. 
the stand having the rings f and g, as de- 
Io scribed, and the cross-bart, having the shaft 
h, by means of which it is swung in the ring g, 
and provided with the spirit-levels i and lugs 
2. In an anglemeter, the combination, with my hand and seal. 
BENJAMIN BARTON SHARP. L. s.) 
Witnesses: 
A. B. SMITH, 
J. HITCHIENS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333655.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 333,655, 
O. E. MICHAELIS, 
OBTURATING PRIMER, 
Patented Jan. 5, 1886. 
 
22 22 2 2 
2 
. G 
 
 
 
 
 
Nsiga 
3% 
 
 
 
 
7) 22 % | 
1. 
re-esses: NY 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OTHO ERNEST MICHAELIS, OF PHILADELPHIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
HENRY BOWER, OF GRAYS FERRY ROAD, PHILADELPHIA, PA. 
OBTURATING-PRIMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,655, dated January 5, 1886. 
Application filed November 28, 1885. Serial No. 184,205. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Sage of the fiction-wire I, the head of the case 
Abeing also perforated, as shown, for the same 
Be it known that I, OTHO E. MICHAELIS, of 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia, 
purpose, and the inner end of the wire I being 
and State of Pennsylvania, at present stationed 
flattened, and having its edges serrated or 
roughened, as shown at a, as is usual, to create 
at the Watervliet arsenal, have invented cer 
tain Improvements in Obturating-Primers, of 
the necessary friction to ignite the fulminate e. 
which the following is a specification. 
B represents a small metallic tube for hold 
My invention relates to primers for firing 
ing the fulminate, with a hole in its upper end 
for the passage of the wire, and C represents 
Ordnance; and the invention consists in so: 
constructing the primer that when fired it 
another and still smaller tube interposed 
prevents the escape of the gas at the vent 
between the tube B and the plug D, to hold 
hole of the gun, thus forming what is termed 
the tube B in position. The wire I is of course 
an obturating-primer.' 
inserted while straight, its outer end being 
Figurelis a central longitudinal section. Fig. 
Subsequently formed into a loop, as shown, for 
attaching the lanyard or cord by which it is 
2is a similar view of the primer after it has been 
pulled, and it is provided with an enlarge 
fired. Fig. 3 is a central longitudinal section 
of the primer arranged to be fired by electric 
ment, b, to Serve as a stop to limit its move 
ment when pulled. This stop b may be formed 
ity. Fig. 4 is a sectional view of a screw 
plug adapted to hold the primer in the gun, 
by solder applied to the wire, or by bending 
and Fig. 5 shows the manner of applying the 
the wire upon itself so as to form a loop in it, 
or by upsetting the wire, the particular method 
same to a gun. 
of forming it being immaterial. 
Friction primers, as generally used with ord 
nance, were simply placed loosely in the 
If desired, the tube C may be omitted, in 
which case the tube B will bear directly against 75 
vent-hole, and were not so constructed as to 
serve as a gas-check. The escape of gas at the the plug D, the stop b in that case being made 
vent-hole, more especially since the adoption 
at or near the serrated part a, the operation 
of the greatly-increased charges now used in 
being the same in either case. 
To hold the primersecurely in the vent-hole 
guns, sooner or later scores, enlarges, or oth 
of the gun and preventit from being blown or 
wise injures the vent-hole, and consequently 
the gun. 
forced out by the pressure of the gas, I pro 
vide a plug, G, (shown in section in Fig. 4.) 
The object of my present invention, there 
fore, is to produce a primer with means for 
Said plug having a recess or slot cut in its low 
Securing it firmly in position in the vent-hole 
er end, of such a shape as to permit the case A 
to be shoved laterally therein, as shown, there 
of a gun, and which, when fired, shall prevent 
being also a longitudinal slot cut in the plug 
the escape of gas at the vent. To accomplish 
for the Wire I to rest in, as represented. This 
this result, I provide a metallic case, A, which, 
plug G is provided on its exterior with the 
as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, is made in the 
well-known interrupted screw - thread, by 
form of what is known as a Solid - headed 
cartridge-shell. These cases may be drawn 
which it is secured in place in the gun with 
the primer attached, as represented in Fig. 5, 
from sheet metal, the same as cartridge shells 
the vent-hole, of course, being suitably en 
or cases, and that is the style that I prefer to 
use generally; or they may be bored from a 
larged or counterbored to receive the primer 
and plug, and provided with a corresponding 
solid piece of metal, especially in those cases 
screw-thread to hold the plug. 
where it is desired to cut a screw-thread on 
the case for holding it in place in the gun, as 
is also provided with a handle, H., by which 
shown in Fig. 3, in which case greater thick 
it can be turned to lock or unlock it, and to 
enableit, with the primer-case, to be withdrawn 
ness of metal will be required. 
after firing. 
If the primer is to be fired by friction, it will 
be prepared as shown in Fig. 1, in which D 
In lieu of the plug G, the case A may have 
5o represents a compressible plug, having a hole 
a screw-thread formed on it, as represented in 
through its center longitudinally for the pas 
Fig. 3, and be provided with a handle, thumb 
This plug G 95 
35 
5 
85 
90 
IOO 
45 
333,655 
piece, or suitably-formed projection, by which 
it can be screwed in and out, there being of 
course a corresponding screw-thread formed 
in the gun. 
In case it be desired to use an electric cur 
rent for firing the charge, the friction devices 
will be omitted, and instead thereof two insu 
lated conducting-wires, n, will be inserted, as 
represented in Fig. 3. These wires will be 
extended through the plug or wad D, and have 
their ends connected by a small piece of plati 
num Wire, o, as usual, for igniting the charge. 
The plug D, which constitutes a very in 
portant feature of my invention, may be made 
of any suitable material that will be com 
pressed by the force of the gas at the time of 
discharge, so as to close the hole through 
which the Wire passes, and thus seal the case. 
and prevent the escape of any gas at that 
point, the thin walls of the case at its lower 
end being at the same time pressed outward 
and held tightly against the surrounding walls 
of the recess in which it rests, thereby pre 
venting the gas from escaping at the sides of 
the case, the same as the metallic cartridge 
shell does in the ordinary rifle or shotgun. 
By experiment I have found that the plug 
D, when made of the material known in the 
market as vulcanized fiber, works well, and 
that is the material which I prefer to use, 
more especially for electric primers, but do 
not limit myself to the use of that material, as 
these plugs may be made of rubber or other 
When arranged to be fired by electricity, 
the plug D must be made of a non-conduct 
ing material, or the wires n must be coated 
with an insulating material all the way 
through the plug D. If the plug itself be 
made of a non-conducting material, it may be 
molded on the wires n, in which case the wires 
material. 
-- 
need only be coated from a short distance 
within the plug outward, as shown in Fig. 3. 
Whichever method of igniting the charge be 
used, the result will be that the force of the 45 
gas will force the plug D firmly up against 
the closed end or head of the case A, and by 
compressing it longitudinally close the cen 
tral opening and make it fill the upper por 
tion of the case A so completely as to effectu- 5o 
ally prevent the escape of any gas through 
the vent-hole of the gun, thus preventing all 
injury to the gun from that source. 
By using the drawn-metal cases they can be 
made very cheaply, and at any place where 55 
the tools or appliances for making metallic 
cartridges exist, thus avoiding the necessity 
for a special plant or outfit for their produc 
tion. 
with both muzzle and breech loading guns, 
and that, if desired, they may be fitted in the 
movable breech-closer of the latter class. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
l. An obturating-primer consisting of the 
I metallic case A, having its outer end closed 
by a solid metal head, with a central perfora 
tion for the firing-wire, with a compressible 
plug, D, arranged therein, said parts being 7o 
constructed and arranged to operate substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, in a primer, of the me. 
tallic case A, provided at its outer end with 
a flanged metallic head, the compressible plug 75 
D, and the firing wire or wires, all arranged 
to operate substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
It is obvious that these primers may be used 6o 
I claim is- 
65 
OTHO ERNEST MICHAELIS. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES WALTERs, 
JOHN A. COOK. 
O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333755.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. ISAACS, OF OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA. 
METHOD OF MOLDING CONCRETE TUBES FOR CABLE RALWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,755, dated January 5, 1886. 
Application filed October 30, 1884. Renewed August 21, 1885. 
Serial No. 175,013. (No model.) 
55 
To a?7 ?y/u??, i?; ??? ?????,7?: 
Beit known that I, JOHN D. ISAACs, of Oak 
land, Alameda county, State of California, 
have invented an Improved Method of Mold 
ing Concrete Tubes for Cable Railways, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to the constructing of 
those tubes which are placed below ground to 
carry therein the cable of a street-railway, and 
which are made by molding a concrete mass 
around a former corresponding in its outer 
Surface with the inner contour of the tube. 
It consists in the manner in which the form 
eror molding-block is made, and in the method 
of forming the tube there with, by which the 
labor of molding the tube is lessened, the tube 
itself is more expeditiously laid in a perfectly 
true course, and the work is more smoothly 
done than by other known methods. 
In the accompanying drawing of the tube 
the concrete part only is shown. The sleepers, 
slot-irons, rails, pulley-brackets, &c., are 
onnitted, so as to simplify my illustration and 
not confuse it by introducing matters not em. 
braced in the invention. 
The single figure of the drawing is a trans 
verse sectional elevation, this being esteemed 
amply sufficient by Way of drawing to illus 
trate the inventiom. 
In the drawing, A is the mass of concrete 
in which the tube is formed. It will extend 
in most cases on either side to form a bed for 
the rails to rest on. 
B is the molding - block, formed of four 
pieces-that is, two side pieces, bb, a bottom 
piece, b, and a cap or top piece, b", all fitting 
and being held together, substantially as 
shown. The bottom piece must have its un 
der surface corresponding with the bottom of 
the tube, while its upper face will form a seat 
for the side pieces, bb. There will be a rib, 
b', on this bottom piece, which will separate 
the side pieces and maintain them an unvary 
ing distance apart. The cap-piece b' will 
overlap the side pieces, and, like the bottom 
piece, it will have a rib which will separate 
the upper part of the side pieces and main 
tain them an unvarying distance apart. Sev 
eral bolts, C, set four or five feet apart, will, 
when screwed up tightly, hold the four pieces 
firmly together. 
It will be noticed that the top and bottom 
edges of the side pieces slant where they fit 
into the cap and bottom piece. This makes 
the block firmer and less liable to spread side 
wise if the bolts are not tightly drawn. The 
length of each block may be as long as can be 
conveniently handled-say from twenty to 
thirty feet-or, for the sake of convenience, let 
the former belong enough to mold the straight 
part of the tube between pulley-brackets, for 
here the tube will have its recesses for both 
brackets and man-holes, which recesses may 
be separately molded. 
The method of proceeding will be as follows: 
First, lay a bed of concrete in the trench which 
has been dug to receive the tube, then lay 
down the bottom piece of the former upon it 
and tamp around it. Then set your side 
pieces and put on the cap, running the bolts 
through the holes therein to receive them. 
Finally, put the washers and nuts on the bolts, 
screw them up tightly, and then ram the con 
crete about the former until the tube is formed. 
As soon as it is desirable to remove the former, 
the nuts and washers are taken off the bolts, 
and piece by piece the former is removed by 
lifting each piece vertically. 
Care niust be taken to provide for the bot 
tom piece being drawn out of the narrower 
part of the tube at top. Ordinarily, it will be 
sufficient to cant the bottom piece over a little 
and bring it up edgewise, with the bolts in 
place; but, if necessary, the bolts may be en 
tirely removed by having a nut instead of a 
solid head on the bottom of each bolt, so that 
after they are entirely withdrawn the bottom 
piece may be drawn out edgewise. 
To give the former and tube their true align 
ment, the lines of the finished portion of the 
tube may be projected, as by a straight edge 
or string, to match with longitudinal lining 
marks scratched on the side of the cap-piece, 
a matter easily understood by those practiced 
in the art. 
If there are to be set and embedded in the 
concrete any anchor-bolts or other iron-work, 
this must be done while the concrete is being 
filled in. The slot-irons will be set after the 
former has been withdrawn. 
I claim as my invention, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, as follows: 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
I. ? 
25 
45 
 
333,755 
1. The method herein described of forming 
concrete tubes for cable railways, consisting 
of building the tube around a former, made 
of separate wooden pieces bound together, 
SO as to form a solid mold, and which are ar 
ranged so as to be separated and withdrawn 
piece by piece out from the molded tube ver 
tically, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein described. 
2. A former for molding concrete tubes for 
cable railways, consisting of several separate 
O 
wooden blocks matched and bolted together 
to form a solid mold, the blocks being ar 
ranged so as to be separated and withdrawn 
vertically from the tube after it has been 
formed, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein described. 
JOHN D. ISAACS, 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE PARDY, 
FREDERICK. T. NEWBERY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333856.txt	(No Model.) 
H. P. HEITMANN. 
HEATING STOWE, 
No. 333,856. 
Patented Jan. 5, 1886. 
WITWESSES 
  
Attorney 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEINRICH. P. HEITMANN, OF ABLEMAN, WISCONSIN. 
HEATINGSTOVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,856, dated January 5, 1886. 
Application filed May 14, 1885. Serial No. 165,506. (No model.) 
the drum E, and is controlled by means of a 
damper, e. An inclined pipe, f, establishes 
communication between the lower part of the 
pipe D and the lower part of the heating-drum, 5o 
and is controlled by a damper, 9. 
The operation of the improvement is as fol 
lows: When it is desired to heat the room in 
which the drum E is located without making 
a fire in the latter, the dampers a e are oper. 55 
ated to close their respective pipes and the 
damper of the pipes F f operated to open 
Said pipes. The heat from the stove B will 
then pass from the stove through the pipef 
and vertically up through the tortuous pas- 6c 
Sage c, through the pipe F into the chimney, 
thus effectually heating up the radiating-drum 
E. By closing the damper g and opening the 
dampers a and e the heat from the stove B 
will pass through the pipe d, through the up- 65 
per portion of the drum E, through the pipe 
F, to the chimney, this draft of heated air be 
ing sufficient to in part enough heat to the 
drum E to temper or moderately heat the room 
in which it is located. By closing the damp- 7o 
erse and g and opening the damper a the pro 
ducts of combustion will pass directly into the 
chimney from the stove B. 
I claim 
The combination, with a prime heating- 75 
stove, a pipe, D, for the discharge of smoke. 
and products of combustion, of a secondary 
heater, a pipe, f, connecting the base of the 
secondary heater with the pipe D, a pipe, d, 
Connecting the upper portion of the second- 8c 
ary heater with the pipe D, the said pipes d 
f being provided with dampers e g, and a 
damper, a, for closing the pipe D above its con 
nection with the pipef, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
- 
'85 
HENRICH. P. HEITMANN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. BLAKE, 
WM. RAETZMANN, 
2d 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, HEINRICH. P. HEIT 
MANN, a citizen of the United States of Amer 
ica, residing at Ableman, in the county of Sauk 
5 and State of Wisconsin, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Heating 
Stoves; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
Io the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawing, and to letters or figures of 
reference marked thereon, which formus apart 
of this specification. 
15 My luvenuou has for its object the provis 
ion of an arrangement of flues in connection 
with a prime and secondary heating stove, 
whereby two different rooms may be readily 
heated. 
In the accompanying drawing the figure 
represents a sectional view illustrating the 
relative arrangement of stoves in connection 
with the dividing-partition and the chimney. 
A designates a central vertical dividing-par 
25 tition, on one side of which is arranged the 
prime heater B, preferably in the form of a 
cook-stove. The chimney receives the pro 
ducts of combustion from the stove B by 
means of a vertical pipe, D, which may be 
3o cut off by means of a damper, a, located there 
in. On the other side of the partition is lo 
cated the secondary heater, which is, as illus 
trated, a vertical heating - drum, E, which 
is provided at or near its base with a fire 
35 chamber, b, to which access may be had 
through a suitable door, (represented by dot 
teu lies.) Within the vertical drum E are 
arranged two chambers or compartments, the 
presence of which form a tortuous passage, 
4o c, within said drum, in order that the heat 
may have a more extended passage to travel 
for its proper radiation. The drum E com 
municates at its top with the chimney C by 
means of a pipe, F. A horizontal pipe, d, es 
45 tablishes a communication between the up 
per part of the pipe D and the upper part of 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US333956.txt	(No Model.) 
C. A. KNIGHT. 
STEAM BOILER 
5 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 333,956, 
Patented Jan. 5, 1886, 
S(SN 
H 
g 
 
- 
N 
Sy 
2 
------- || 
ii. 
 
WITNESSES 
&zzw 2. 
6672 
INVENTOR 
425, 
32. 
proto-Lithographer, withird 
(No Model.) 
C. A. KNIGHT. 
STEAM BOILER, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 333,956, 
Patented Jan. 5, 1886. 
?zzzzzzzzzzzzzz 
????????z 
2:2:2:2:2) 
 
 
s 
& 
N. Perers, photo-Lithographor, washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
C. A. KNIGHT. 
STEAM BOIER, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
- 
No. 333,956, 
Patented Jan. 5, 1886. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 333,956. 
 
C. A. KNIGHT 
STEAM BOILER, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Jan. 5, 1886, 
N. peers. Photo-ithographer, Washington.D.C. 
(No Model.) 
C. A., KNIGHT, 
STEAM BOILER 
5 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
No. 333,956, 
Patented Jan. 5, 1886. 
&NSN 
N 
 
 
N S&N YaYaNYXAAAYAAAAAS 
 
WITNESSES 
22.6% 
6%. 444, 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. KNIGHT, OF GLASGOW, COUNTY OF LANARK, SCOTLAND. 
STEAM - B O LER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 333,956, dated January 5, 1886. 
Application filed April 8, 1885. Serial No. 161,564. (No model.) Patented in England September 9, 1884, No. 12,189; in France 
September 24, 1884, No. 164,468; in Germany September 24, 1884, No. 32,241, and in Belgium September 25, 1884, No. 66,415. 
55 
65 
75 
To all whon, it may concern: 
KNIGHT, a citizen of the United States of drum and in the water-box. 
America, and residing at Glasgow, in the 
county of Lanark, Scotland, have invented 
certain Improvements in Steam - Boilers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention consists of improvements in 
the construction of steam-boilers of the water 
tube kind, in which a series of tubes may be 
employed connected with each other at the 
ends by means of headers, and these in turn 
to an intermediate water-box and an upper 
vessel or drum. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate sev 
eral modifications of my improvements as ap 
plied to water-tube boilers. 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of such a 
boiler, in which the drum, instead of being con 
nected directly to the headers, as usual, is con 
nected at both ends through a novel arrange 
ment of water-box. Fig. 2 is a sectional eleva 
tion of parts of the same boiler. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse vertical section; Fig. 4, a longitudinal 
vertical section, and Fig. 5 is a plan view show 
ing to a larger scale the mode of arranging this 
Water-box to connect the drum and the head 
ers. Fig. 6 is a sectional elevation of part of 
a boiler, showing an improved construction of 
header connected to the drum by the water 
box. Figs. 7 and 8 are respectively an end 
elevation and a plan illustrating these im 
proved headers. Figs. 9 and 10 are side and 
end elevations (the former partly in section) 
of an improved form of header shown connect 
ed direct to the drum at the front of the 
boiler. Figs. 11 and 12 are elevations at right 
angles to each other; and Fig. 13 is a plan of 
a similar form of section adapted to serve as 
the rear header of the same boiler, to which it 
is connected through a water-box. Fig. 14 
illustrates a modification in which a header of 
improved construction is connected to a cast 
iron drum end. 
In constructing an improved water - tube 
boiler according to the modification of my in 
vention illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, I 
interpose between the drum A and the end 
pieces or headers, B, to which the water-tubes 
Care connected, a water-box, D, of iron or 
steel, which I connect to the end of the drum Iter-tubes. 
by a number of shorthorizontal tubes, d, which 
Be it known that I, CHARLES ALBERT are expanded into orifices in the end of the 
I prefer to use 
this mode of connecting the box to the drum 
instead of the usual riveted flanges, although 
the latter may be employed as well. The Wa 
ter-box D extends across the end of the drum 
A at each end and over the top of the end sec 
tions or headers, B, to the full breadth of the 
transverse row of tubes C, and it is connected 
to the individual sections or headers by Sep 
arate vertical or inclined tubes b, which are 
expanded into orifices in the upper ends of the 
headers and into corresponding orifices in the 
lower side of the water-box. In the top of side 
opposite the vertical and horizontal connect 
ing-tubes b d openings did may be formed in 
the water-box D, through which suitable ex 
panding mandrels or tools may be passed to 
secure the tubes b d in place, and such open 
ings are afterward closed with plugs or caps. 
Instead of making the ends of the steam and 
water drum A of cast metal, in the usual Way, 
I prefer to form them of single plates A of steel 
or wrought-iron, which are dished out and riv 
eted to the cylindrical shell A of the drum, 
and on the outside of the dished ends A, Irivet. 
suitable supporting-hooks, a, by which the 
drum may be suspended to the carrying-girder, 
which is usually provided. 
Figs. 6, 7, and 8 illustrate the construction 
of headers which I propose to employ, such 
headers being formed of wrought-iron. In 
this case a header or end piece, B, is provided 
for each water-tube C at front and rear, and is 
formed by drawing or welding a square tube 
of Wrought-iron or steel, and closing the ends, 
and drilling or otherwise cutting out orifices 
for the water-tubes and other connections. 
The water-tubes in the example shown are dis 
posed in rows vertically over each other. A 
number of such sections, B, are fitted at front 
and rear, and are connected to the steam and 
water drum by a water box, D, of the form 
hereinbefore described. 
Each header or end piece may be made of 
such breadth as to embrace two vertical or 
staggered rows of tubes, in which case it may 
be strengthened by stays or stay-tubes ex 
panded at convenient points between the wa 
The orifices formed in the headers 
9O 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
333,956 
5 
- 
opposite to the water-tubes C for the purpose 
of inserting the mandrels for expanding such 
tubes may be covered in the usual manner with 
the ordinary cap, c, or by caps with conical 
or tapered edges, as at c, fitting correspond 
ing surfaces formed in the orifices, or, prefer 
ably, by means of short tubes c, of special 
thickness expanded in the orifices and faced 
on the outer edge to form a bearing for the or 
dinary form of cap c. 
In the case of boilers of small size, in which 
only a small number of transverse rows of 
tubes are employed, I connect the tubes C to 
a single header or end piece, B, at each end, 
such header or end piece being of one of the 
forms shown in Figs. 9 to 13, and being in 
breadth equal to the combined breadth of the 
multiple sections of the ordinary arrangement, 
or Such as to admit of the direct connection to 
them of the entire transverse row of water 
tubes C of the boiler. I in this case directly 
connect the front header or end section, B, by 
short tubes b to the front dished end, A, of the 
steam and Water drum A, the connecting-tubes 
being fitted near the top and at any conven 
ient position within the breadth of the header. 
The rear header or end piece, B, is connected 
to the corresponding end of the drum by means 
of a Water-box, D, as in the modification de 
scribed in reference to Figs. 1 to 5. 
This improved form of header I make of 
cast-steel or malleable cast-iron, with ribs or 
partitions B serving to strengthen it and to 
divide it internally into vertical sections 
corresponding to the number of connecting 
tubes b communicating with the steam and 
water-drum A or with the water. box. Such 
45 
55 
. 
partitions are formed with openings to provide 
communication between the sections into 
which the header is divided. 
In Fig. 14 the wrought-iron or steel header 
described in reference to Figs. 7 and 8 is shown 
connected to a cast drum end. 
It is obvious that the intermediate water 
box herein referred to may be connected to 
various forms of headers or drum ends. For 
instance, its connection with horizontal cross 
headers would not change its function or pur 
pose. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A steam-generator composed of headers 
connected by a series of water-tubes, an ele 
wated steam and water drum, and an interme 
diate water-box extending across said series of 
water-tubes, the respective parts connected 
and communicating by means of stay-tubes, 
as shown. 
2. A header composed of cast-steel, cast 
malleable iron, or similar material, having in 
ternal ribs or partitions dividing the same into 
communicating sections to accommodate the 
staggered position of the connected water 
tubes, said header being connected to a steam 
drum direct or to an intermediate water-box, 
as described. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
3. 
CHARLES A. KNIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN SIME, 
THOMAs McKEAN. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334056.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 334,056, 
 
J. SHIPLEY. 
RAIL JOINT, 
aa.. 
Patented Jan. 12, 1886. 
t N 
E2 2. 
- 
WITNESSES 
27.2 
INVENTOR 
4 e6% 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN SHIPLEY, OF SAYRE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAIL-Joint. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 334,056, dated January 12, 1886. 
Application filed September 19, 1885. Serial No. 17,522. (No model.) 
To all, whosn, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN SHIPLEY, of Sayre, 
in the county of Bradford and State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Rail - Joints; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification, 
and in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal elevation of rail 
joint. Fig. 2 is a plan of same. Fig. 3 is 
an enlarged section of eccentric washer. Fig. 
4 is a plan of same. Fig. 5 is an outside ele 
vation of same. Fig. 6 is a cross-section of 
rail-joint. Fig. 7 is a cross-section of a double 
rail joint. 
Like letters indicate like parts in all the 
figures. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means to Secure the ends of rails so that the 
rails are held firmly together without the 
bolts passing through them, as heretofore, and 
at the same time provide for the more equal 
contraction and expansion of the rails. 
To carry out my object I provide a casting 
to receive the rails, and by the application of 
a loose angle-plate having a V-shaped rib op 
posite each bolt. The rail joint is made by 
the loose plate being fastened into the casting 
by eccentric-formed washers with V-shaped 
recesses on the under side radiating from the 
center. The washer, being moved round by 
the wrench, tightens itself-against the casting 
and the loose angle-plate, so that by the bolt 
being drawn tight by the nut it virtually forms 
a lock. 
My invention consists of a cast-steel chair 
for embracing the rails, provided on one side 
to suit the section of the rail, and the other 
side with an abutment, so that when the rail 
ends are placed in the cast chair the loose 
angle-plate with the V-shaped ribs opposite 
each bolt can be put in its place. The bolts 
passing through the chair and the loose angle 
plate receive a cast-steel washer eccentric in 
form, with V-shaped grooves on the bottom 
edge radiating to the center, and with small 
hubs on the top side indicating the position 
of the V-grooves, on being tightened by the 
wrench bends against the loose angle-plate 
and the abutment. Thereby the loose angle 
plate holds the rails in position, after which 
the nut of the bolt, being tightened, virtually 
forms a lock. 
In Figs. 1, 2, 6, and 7, A designates the 
rails. 
B is the chair for embracing the rails, hav 
ing one side to suit the section of the rails, 
the other side having an abutment, b, so that 
the loose angle-plate may be fastened between 
the rails and the abutment. 
D is the loose angle-plate, having V-shaped 
ribs opposite each bolt, and on which the V 
shaped grooves on the under side of the ec 
centric washer fit. 
dare the V-shaped ribs. d are the V-shaped 
grooves. 
E is the eccentric washer, which is made 
hollow with a square in the center, so that it 
can be operated by a wrench to put the larger 
part of the washer to bear against the abut 
ment and the loose angle-plate holding down 
the rails. On the under side of the washer E 
V-shaped grooves radiate to the center, and 
small hubs on the top side are for indicating 
the position of the V-shaped grooves, so that 
when the washer is moved by the Wrench it 
fits on the rib on the loose angle-plate. 
e is the square on washer. e are the hubs 
on washer. 
F are the bolts with a dovetailed head to 
fit the chair B, and which pass through the 
center of the eccentric washer, the nut on the 
top keeping the eccentric washer down in its 
place, so that it virtually forms a lock. 
In Figs. 3, 4, and 5 the enlarged drawing 
of the eccentric washer is clearly defined with 
the V-shaped grooves on the under side and 
the small hubs on the top, the square for the 
Wrench, and hole for the bolt to pass through. 
Instead of single chairs, double chairs can be 
made for holding rail-joints, as will be seen 
on reference to Fig. 7. 
I claim 
1. A rail joint chair consisting of two pieces 
embracing the rails, the chair proper having 
an abutment by which the loose angle-plate 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
ICC 
2 
334,056 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
can be fastened by the eccentric washer held 
in position by the bolt and locked by the nut, my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
all substantially as and for the purpose speci- in presence of two witnesses. 
fied and set forth. 
2. A rail joint consisting of two pieces com- 
bined with the eccentric washer, substantially 
as described, for the purpose set forth. 
W. H. WoOD, 
THEODORE GLIMMI. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN SHIPLEY. 
5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334156.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BARD. 
STEAM BOLER 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 334,156, 
Patented Jan, 12, 1886. 
S. 
- - 
(thirtistill 
y 
 
WITNESSES 
NS 
ae(Ce, Zzew--------, 
N 
NS 
s SNNN N N 
s N 
S 
N 
Y 
N 
 
N 
 
INVENTOR 
Jo?an Asocird 
By 7 is Attorneys 
&saw-why'- 
(No Model.) 
No. 334,156. 
 
J. B.A.I.R.D. 
STEAM BOILER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
m 
Patented Jan, 12, 1886, 
WITNESSES 
. 
(2-(. O, 72-e-----1-le--- p 
Ole . C'. ZC-----------. 
By 7s Attornet/s 
INVENTOR 
Jo/72-75azra. 
- 
m 
SS s wo-vis 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer. Washingor, 
C. 
J. BAIRD. 
STEAM BOILER 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Jan. 12, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
No. 334,156, 
 
WITNESSES 
a-C w Ce. 72-e-lu-l-11-et-1--, 
c. c. 2C-. 
NVENTOR 
/o/a Aaird. 
By 7s Attorneys 
Sai-Yokov's 
(No Model.) 
J. BAIRD, 
STEAM BOLER 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 334,156, 
Patented Jam, 12, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
- - - - A SS 
WITNESSES 
G2-C, Ce. 72-e-clu----et-1--, 
P V-1 v. 7----------, 
ae. 2. 
OOOOOO 
OOOOOO 
OOOOOOO 
OOOOOOO 
OO GOOOO 
GOOOOO/ 
OOOO / 
By 72's Attorneys 
INVENTOR 
Jo/72 ABClard 
S.A.-Nk.' Yoi. 
- 
(No Model.) 
No. 334,156, 
J. BAIRD. 
STEAM BOILER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Jan. 12, 1886. 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - 
O 
O Og 
Sy O 
O 6 
9 
 
  
By 22's Attorneys 
 
NVENTOR 
Jo?z Zaird 
sa.--wkwn Rer. 
J. BAIRD. 
STEAM BOILER, 
6 Sheets 
Sheet 6. 
Patented Jan. 12, 1886. 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
zzzzzzz 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ??= 
(No Model.) 
No. 334,156. 
 
 
WITNESSES 
2-(ce, Zee-------- 
NVENTOR 
Jo/72. Aard 
By 7s Attorneys 
(seaws. Yoh-'-- 
N. peers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BAIRD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STEAW a BOER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 334,156, dated January 12, 1886. 
Application filed March 12, 1885. Serial No. 158,546. (No model.) 
IO 
15 
3O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN BAIRD, mechan 
ical engineer, of the city, county, and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
S useful Improvements in Steam-Boilers; and I 
do hereby declare that the following, taken in 
connection with the drawings, is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof. 
The drawings are in six sheets, showing 
various modifications of my improvements, 
and the various figures will be defined and 
referred to hereinafter. 
The object of my improvements is to pro 
vide a comparatively cheap, simple, and effi 
cient boiler to be used in steam-vessels, where 
steam, as is now the practice, is used at a high 
pressure, as high as cighty to one hundred 
pounds to the square inch; but the boiler will 
be found useful where the pressure is com 
paratively low, and is applicable for station 
ary engines. 
The great feature of the invention consists 
in combining one or more cylindrical - shell 
boilers with a cradle of boiler-iron or steel, the 
25 boilers being without water-legs, the cradles 
forming, in fact, the legs. These cradles are 
to be made of boiler-iron or steel, and have 
double walls throughout, the space between 
the walls being, when in use, filled with water, 
and the cradles serving as setting for boilers 
which have cylindrical shells. The walls of 
the cradle are to be braced to each other in a 
manner similar to the walls of locomotive or 
marine boilers by means of screw -bolts or 
socket-bolts, or other usual bracing, and the 
shells of the boilers will require no bracing, 
except that furnished by the tubes thereof and 
some suitable bracing at the heads in places 
where the tubes do not perform this duty. 
The cradle is a vessel entirely distinct from 
the boiler, and is capable of containing water 
and steam when the boiler is removed. The 
cylindrical-shell boilers may be of any suita 
ble construction. They may be fired at one 
end or at both ends; they may have return 
tubes, or be of such a structure that the flame 
will pass only once through the boiler, as 
shown in the drawings, and they may be single 
shelled boilers or have two shells, one above 
the other, as shown in Figures 23 and 24. In 
addition to this great feature of the invention 
45 
35 
40 
w 
In describing my improvements will first 60 
there are minor features-such as the brick 
work, which may complete the inclosure of 
the shells, the brick-work for insuring full 
combustion, the supporting of the inclosing 55 
brick-work by water-tubes, and the combina 
tion, with the double-walled cradles, of tubes 
which connect the water-spaces and increase 
the heating-surface. 
refer to Sheets 1, 2, and 3, from which a thor 
ough knowledge of the main features of the 
invention can be derived. In these sheets, 
Fig. 1 is a front elevation of the boilers Set 
in their cradle, showing als0 the brick-work 65 
and the supporting-pipes thereof. Fig.2 is a 
rear elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a top 
plan or view of the whole contlivance from 
above. Fig. 4 is a vertical longitudinal Cen 
tral section through one of the boilers and the 7o 
cradle, &c. Fig. 5 is a central vertical longi 
tudinal section through the boiler; Fig. 6, a 
front elevation thereof, and Fig. 7 a rear eleya 
tion of the same. Fig. 8 is a front elevation 
of the cradle; Fig. 9, a rear elevation of the 
same; Fig. 10, a plan of the same, and Fig.11 
a side elevation thereof. 
In these drawings the boiler is shown with 
a cylindrical shell provided with tubes which 
return the products of combustion from rear 
to front, and also with a front connection or 
hood bolted to the outside of the shell, (See 
Fig. 4) through which the smoke passes to 
the chimney. The shell is longer than the 
tubes, (see Figs. 5 and 7, Sheet 2, and Fig. 4, 
Sheet (,) and the boiler is so made that the 
shell and a partial rear head and a curved 
piece, as at ac, form the upper part of the rear 
connection. This boiler is set, as it Were, in 
the cradle. This cradle is a double-walled 
box, y, without top or botton. Its sides ex 
tend, as at 2, above the water-level in the boil 
ers, although their tops may lie below that 
level. Its front is provided with two semi 
cylindrical depressions, in which the front 
edges of the shells rest, and at its rear the Wall 
is flat, so as to support the lower flat surface 
of the rear head, c, Figs. 2, 4, and 5, and the 
shell of the boiler rests upon the cradle at 
front and rear. The sides of this box do not 
touch the shells of the boilers, although they 
might be made to do so, and the space above 
o 
SO 
ICO 
-n ------. 
- 
334, 56 
O 
the ends and between the sides of the cradle 
and the shells is filled with brick-work. So 
also is the space above the cradle between the 
shells of the adjacent boilers. 
The drawings show the cradles as in one 
piece; but each cradle may be in several 
pieces, providing the cavities or water-spaces 
therein have proper connections with each 
other, and the drawings before referred to 
show two boile's ()inly in one cradle; but there 
may be three ol' inole boilers in one cradle, 
provided the shape of the former be properly 
modified. 
Brick-work 2 c rests either on the shells 
where they adjoin, or partly upon the shells 
and partly against the inside walls of the sides 
of the cradle, and in order to hold and sup 
port it securely I provide a pipe or pipes 0, 
which rest, up()] the front and rear of the top 
of the cradles, and these pipes have the lower 
tier of bricks built upon them. The ends of 
these pipes are capped, (see Figs. 12 and 13,) 
and the cavity of the pipes is connected with 
the boilers by pipes a c. 
I also connect the 
steal - Spaces within the cradle - Walls with 
the stealm-space in the boilers by means of 
pipes (1 t?, ai'i'anged as shown in the drawings, 
or in any propel' manner, and these pipes may 
be more or less nu meious. In order further 
to increas ( the leating-surface, I intend at 
times to coil (ct the front and real cavities or 
Water-spaces of the cradles by means of tubes 
(I (I, these lulos Occupying the space between 
the shells or l)etween the Outer shells and the 
sides of the (radle, its clearly shown in Figs. 
13, 14, 15, and 16 of Sleet 6, where Fig. 13 is 
a longitudinal horizontal section through the 
lower tier of these tubes () and the cradle: 
Fig. 14, a front elevation of the tubes q and 
the cradles with one boiler in place. Fig. 15 
is a vertical central section through the axis 
of the boiler and cradle; and Fig. 16, a sec 
tion through the outside tier of tubes q, show 
ing the side of the cradle in elevation. 
These 
tubes (l, as before stated, connect the front and 
rear water-spaces of the cradle, and will there 
fore be filled with water. In order to make 
them circulate better, I intend at times to 
set them on an incline, as shown in Fig. 17", 
so that the water will enter the lower and rise 
and pass out of the higher ends of the tubes, 
and so that any steam formed within then 
will freely pass in the same direction into a 
part of the cradle a' which is elevated above 
the water-level, and pass from thence by a 
suitable pipe into the steam - room in the 
boiler. 
I prefer to deliver the feed-water for both 
cradles and shells into the cradles, through a 
check-valve at (, Fig. 1, from a proper feed 
pipe, and to provide the front Water-space 
of the cladle with a partition, b, Figs. 1, 3, 
and S. When this is clone, the feed - water 
will circulate to the real of the cradle, then 
return to its front and pass into the boiler 
through pipes cl d, Figs. 1 and 3; but there 
may be several feed-pipes to each cradle, 
and the spaces in the cradles may have no 
partition, and these spaces may be connected 
with the boilers in any proper way; or there 
may be feed-pipes connecting with both the 
boilers and the cradles. I prefer to collnect 
the steam-spaces in the boilers by means of 
pipes ff, Figs. 2 and 3, located at the leal' 
thereof, and to connect the fronts of all the 
boilers, by means of pipesl, to a commonsteam 
pipe, h; but the steam-connections between 
the steam-spaces and those for conveying the 
steam to the engine may be applied according 
to the judgment of the engineer who puts up 
the battery of boilers. 
In order to insure as far as possible the 
proper combustion of the gases and to give 
to the tubes of each boile' in the set their 
proper supply of flame, &c., I build brick 
walls or pillars k, lc (see ligs. 1, 2, and 4, also 
23") on the top of the brick ?ire - bridge or 
brick bottom of the rear connection. These 
walls divide the flaunes passing from the sev 
eral sets of grate-bars, so that the ?lines froln 
the grate-bars under each boiler will pass to 
its corresponding back connection. The rear 
surfaces of these walls or pillai's are about on 
a line with the rear tube-sheets of the boilers, 
and the walls extend up to the brick-work be 
tween the shells or between the outer periph 
eries of the outcl shells and the sicles of the 
cradle. 
I prefer to construct the front walls of the 
cradles so that they do not extend downward 
much below the grate bars, as slow in in the 
drawings, so as to permit a full supply of air 
into the ash-pits below the grate-bars; but this 
wall may extend as low as the sides of the 
cradles and have holes formed in it for the ad 
mission of air. (See Fig. 21.) The front walls 
are to be furnished also with holes through 
which to charge the furnaces, and proper grate 
bars, ii, must be supplied. I prefer to use 
brick-work ij (see Figs. 1, 2, 4, 18, and 19) to 
form the bottoms of the ash-pits, the bridge 
walls, and the bottom of the rear connections; 
but for these or any of them there may be sub 
stituted double walls of boiler-iron, properly 
braced to each other and forming water-spaces, 
these walls being either in one piece with or 
separate from the cradles, but in the latter 
case these water-spaces must be.properly con 
nected with the water-spaces in the cradles. 
(See Fig. 19.) The sides of the cradles may, 
in some instances, not extend above the wa 
ter-line in the boilers, but I prefer to make 
then as shown in the drawings. The de 
livery ends of the boiler-tubes must in all 
cases be properly connected with the smoke 
stack or chimney. I prefer to use hoods, as 
shown in Figs. 4, 19, and 24. 
sometimes intend to make the boilers 
double ended, with cradles having semi-cylin 
drical concavities at both front and rear. (See 
Sheet 5, where Fig. 18 is a front elevation of 
the boiler's cradle and brick-work with the 
25 
O 
5 
35 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
25 
r 
334,56 
B 
hoods removed; Fig. 19, a central verticallon 
gitudinal section through one of the shells; 
Fig. 20, a top view; Fig. 21, an elevation of 
the front of the cradle; Fig. 22, a plan of the 
Same, and Fig. 23 a side elevation.) 
These boilers are to be fired at both ends 
and to be fed with water, as before described, 
and I prefer to pass through the back con 
nection a tube, l, uniting the Water-space of 
the front and rear sections of the boiler, thus 
insuring circulation. When intending to use 
steam at over one hundred pounds to the inch, 
Or even lower, I intend at times to make each 
boiler in two tiers-that is, with two cylindri 
cal shells, one above the other, either the up 
per only or both shells being supplied with 
tubes. Fig. 23" is a front elevation of this 
arrangement, showing the cradle, brick-work, 
&c. Fig. 24 is a vertical lengthwise section 
through one of the boilers, cradle, and brick 
bottom thereof; Fig. 25, a similar section 
through a lower-tier shell; Fig. 26, a rear ele 
vation of the same; Fig. 27, a vertical central 
lengthwise section through an upper-tier shell, 
and Fig. 28, a rear elevation of the same. 
In this arrangement I prefer to use pipes n, 
connecting the lower-tier shells with the rear 
water-space of the cradles and to connect each 
lower shell to each upper corresponding one 
by the ordinary vertical water-tubes, SS S. 
The front of the cradle for these double tier 
boilers must have cylindrical apertures in it 
to receive the front ends of the lower shells, 
and these holes must be somewhat larger in 
diameter than the shells, so that the boilers 
may be set in the cradles, any cracks or 
crannies between the shells and the cradlesbe 
ing, if necessary, stopped with clay or fire 
lute. 
Fig. 29 is a lengthwise vertical central sec 
tion through a double-ended boiler; Fig. 30, 
a front elevation of the same, and Fig. 31 a. 
vertical section on the line acac of Fig. 8, show 
ing the tube-sheets in elevation. 
It will be clear from what has been said 
heretofore that the boiler to be combined 
with the cradle may be of any internal struct 
ure-that is, as to arrangement of flues or 
tubes and connections-provided it has a cy. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
lindrical shell or shells, the great object of 
myinvention being to utilize the strength due 
to a complete cylindrical shell in connection 
with the heating-surface of double-wall fire 
boxes, and incidentally to provide for the 
separate renewal or repair of the fire-boxes 
which constitute the cradle. 
I claim as of my own invention 
1. The combination of a cylindrical boiler 
provided with proper flues or tubes, and of the 
same length as the cradle, with a cradle com 
posed of double walls, so as to contain Water, 
and inclosing the fire on all four sides, Said 
cradle serving as a boiler-setting and being SO 
shaped that the two ends of the boiler rest the 
one upon the front the other upon the rear of 
the cradle, and the whole combination being 
substantially such as set forth. 
2. The combination of a cylindrical boiler 
provided with proper flues or tubes with a 
cradle, said cradle serving the purpose of a 
boiler-setting and being composed of double 
walls, so as to contain water, and inclosing the 
fire on all four sides, the front and rear Walls 
of the cradle being connected by water-circu 
lating tubes, said cradle also supporting the 
boiler and combined there with, substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination, with a cylindrical-shell 
boiler or boilers and a cradle, substantially as 
specified, of the brick-work supported by a 
tube or tubes and lying between adjacent 
boilers or a boiler and a cradle. 
4. The combination, with a boiler or boilers 
and a cradle, substantially as specified, of the 
brick walls or pillars in the neighborhood of 
the back connections, which serve to insure 
combustion and divide the products of Com 
bustion, substantially as set forth. 
5. The devices for insuring circulation, Con 
sisting of a feed-aperture into the cradle, a 
partition in the cradle, and pipes connecting 
the cradle with the boiler or boilers, the Whole 
being and operating substantially as described. 
JOHN BAIRD. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
In presence of - 
WILLIAM R. WILDER, 
JOHN S. BAIRD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334256.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. LINK, 
DETACHABLE COUPLING, 
No. 334,256, 
Patented Jan. 12, 1886. 
 
 
 
  
 
in H.H." 
Elles, 
 
 
t in 
i? 2 trilii 
Art?--- = -- 
(7V, 2 6-4-2- 
A. 8 (27te. 
77- - - 72 
16. AA 
2 a.2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIS EUGENE LINK, OF RADCLIFFE, IOWA. 
DETAC HABLE COUP N G. 
a 
- 
EC5:ICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 334,256, dated January 12, 1886. 
Application filed August 13, 1885. 
Serial No. 174,353. (No model.) 
IO 
upon the other plate or flange, so that this cam 
To ali, whom it may concern: 
is prevented from turning around upon the bolt 
Be it known that I, WILLIS E. LINK, of 
when the other cam is being turned for the 
Radcliffe, in the county of Hardin and State 
purpose of clamping the plates or flanges rig. 55 
of Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
idly together. 
Improvements in Detachable Couplings; and 
Each one of the cams is shaped as shown 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
upon its lower edge, and when the outer one 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
of the two cams is turned by means of the pro 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
jection O, which is formed upon its side, the 
which it pertains to make and use it, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
inclined surfaces are made to act as wedges, 
and thus exert a pressure against the nut on 
which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the end of each bolt, and thus draw the two 
plates or flanges tightly together. Each one 
detachable couplings; and it consists in the 
of the slots in the plate being open at its outer 
combination of two flanges or plates having a 
end, it is only necessary to move the cam into 
suitable number of radial slots with clamping 
that position where their inclined surfaces ex 
bolts which are passed through the slots, and 
ert no pressure against each other, and then 
cams which are applied to the bolts for the 
purpose of clamping the two flanges tightly 
each bolt can be pulled freely out of its slot. 
When the flanges or plates are first placed 
together, as will be more fully described here 
together, the nuts are adjusted upon the bolts 
inafter. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
in any desired relation to the outer ends of the 
outer can, and then the flanges or plates are . 
coupling between sections of wooden tubing or 
clamped together by turning the cams par 
between iron and Wooden tubing, or for coup 
tially around. 
ling pipes of different kinds together, and in 
Each plate or flange has a pipe, P, of suita 
which the two parts of the coupling can be 
quickly and readily put together or detached 
ble length, projecting from its center, and these 
pipes are either to be connected by suitable 
from each other, as may be desired. 
screw. couplings to the iron pipe or the pipes 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a coupling 
P are to be driven into the wooden tubings. 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a similar 
The friction of the tubing against the pipes.P 
view taken at right angles to Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 
will be sufficient to hold the parts in position; 
shows a modification. 
A represents flat round plates or flanges 
but if it is so desired the plates or flanges can 
having openings through their centers, and 
be secured to the wooden tubing by means of 
which are perfectly smooth upon their inner 
screws or any other suitable devices. 
sides. When brought together, a packing of 
By means of a coupling constructed as here 
leather, rubber, or other suitable material, B, shown and described pipes of iron and sec 
In each plate or tions of wooden tubing can be quickly put to 
is placed between them. 
flange are made a suitable number of radial gether and taken apart. This coupling can 
slots, C, which slots register when the two plates also be used for connecting iron pipes togeth- 9c 
or flanges are brought together, and through 
er; but it is more especially intended for con 
necting together the sections of the tubing used 
which the clamping-boltsD pass. Upon each 
in connection with pumpS. 
side of each one of the slots are made the ribs 
F, which serve to catch against opposite sides 
As each end of the outer or upper cam has 
of the head G of the clamping-bolt and against 
a square end, it can be turned in either direc- 95 
tion by a wrench, instead of by a projection, 
the square portion H, which is formed on each 
O, as shown. The projections O, being placed 
one of the cams I. The ribs upon One of the 
plates or flanges catch against opposite sides 
one upon one cam and one upon the other, 
serve also to prevent the upper cam from be 
of the head of the bolt, so as to prevent the 
bolt from turning when the nut J is being 
ing turned too far around. 
tightened into place. The inner cam has its 
Instead of having the inner surface of the 
square portion to catch between the two ribs plate A made smooth, it may be ribbed or 
75 
85 
7 O. 
m 
CO 
25 
35 
4O 
45 
50 
-4 
334,256 
5 upper surface of the flanges. 
io the coupling or any loss of time. 
In case the nut rusts upon the bolt, so that edges, clamping-bolts, cams placed upon the 20 
roughened in any suitable manner. If so pre- sides of the slots with the clamping-bolts, the 15 
ferred, the inner or lower cam may be cast as cams, and the nuts which are applied to the 
a part of the plate or flange A, in which case bolts, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the plates provided 
there will be no necessity for the ribs F on the 
with pipes at their centers, slots through their 
it cannot be turned, the cams will allow the bolts and provided with projections, and the 
bolts to be removed without the slightest trou- nuts upon the bolts, substantially as specified. 
ble, and that without damaging any part of 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in . 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim- 
1. The combination of the plates or flanges 
provided with slots and ribs upon opposite 
WLLIS EUGENE LINK. 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
Witnesses: 
A. J. HARRIS, 
C. O. BUTILER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334356.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
S. B. DOOLEY. 
COMBINED COUNTER AND SHOW CASE. 
No. 334,356, 
Patented Jan, 12, 1886. 
G 
s 
2. - Z. 4-2 2. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
S. B. DOOLEY. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
COMBINED COUNTER AND SHOW CASE. 
No. 334,356, 
Patented Jan. 12, 1886. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL B. DOOLEY, OF BEATRICE, NEBRASKA. 
coMBINED COUNTER AND SHOW-CASE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 334,356, dated January 12, 1886. s: 
Application filed July 30, 1884. Serial No. 139,222. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL B. DOOLEY, of 
Beatrice, county of Gage, State of Nebraska, 
have invented a certain new and useful Com 
bined Counter and Show-Case, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The following description will give a clear 
and exact idea of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a cross-sectional view of my in 
vention, the box. A being in position to show 
goods. Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the 
Same, the box A being let down on the sta 
tionary frame C. Fig. 3 is a rear view of the 
same. Fig. 4 is a front perspective view of 
the same. 
My invention consists in a new combined 
counter and show-case for the purpose of fully 
displaying the different varieties of crackers, 
fruits, and similar articles that are displayed 
for sale, and at the same time keeping them 
K is a frame-work open at the rear and 
bottom, which may be inserted in the front 
of a common counter, if desired, or used sep 
arately, it being so constructed that the boxes 
are at a convenient height from the floor. 
The box A, not being fastened, may be re 
moved when empty and replaced by a full 
one. Said box A is placed on a movable 
frame, D, which is hinged to the top of the 
swinging pieces B, and the said box may be 
lowered and drawn out or raised and pushed 
forward by means of the swinging pieces B 
and frame D. The pieces B are hinged to the 
stationary frame C at their lower ends and to 
the movable frame D at their upper ends, the 
movable frame D being free to move back and 
forth on the stationary frame C. When the 
box A is moved forward, as above described, 
it sets at an angle, the front or outer end being 
lower than the rear or inner end. This ar 
rangement enables the customer to better ob 
serve the goods, and when the said box is let 
down it enables the merchant to easily and 
quickly serve the customers. On the upper 
face of the movable frame Dis a shoulder, d. 
E represents a glass top over the front part 
of the box A, through which may be seen the 
contents of each box. 
F is a frame containing the glass E, and 
forming the upper front part of the frame 
work K. 
H represents the front open frame-work of 
the case, through which may be seen the labels 
On the ends of the box A. 
d represents the right-angled piece on the 
front lower corner of the box A, the lower 
side of which fits into the shoulder d in the 
movable frame D. The right-angled piece d' 
is secured to the box A, and its lower arm 
rests against the shoulder d of the frame D, 
and when the box A is pulled back this ar. 
rangement prevents the said box from sliding 
on the frame D, but brings the said frame 
back with it, as seen in Fig. 2. 
G is a counter for weighing or wrapping up 
the goods upon and forms the top of the de 
WCe, 
I do not limit myself to the exact construc 
tion of the parts shown and described, but 
consider myself at liberty to make such changes 
in the construction of the cases as may come 
within the spirit of my invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In combination with a counter, G, and open 
frame-work, K, the stationary frame C, hinged 
pieces B, hinged to the rear end of stationary 
frame C, movable frame D, hinged to the 
hinged pieces B, and box A, resting on said 
frame D, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 10th day of 
July, 1884. 
SAMUEL B. DOOLEY. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES T. LEECH, 
W. H. TICKNOR, 
25 protected from dust, handling, and theft. 
55 
75 
So 
85 
O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334457.txt	(No Model.) 
J. D. McCANN. 
MEASURE FOR DRAFTING GARMENTS, 
No. 334,457, 
- E. 
Patented Jan. 19, 1886. 
 
Witnesses 
57 (1244-27 
4.(-73, 
y 
/7Zaevefor?" 
f 
E. (22-222 
? 
2. v. 2 is 
N. PeFERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES DWIGHT McCANN, OF FALLS CITY, NEBRASKA. 
MEASURE FOR DRAFTING GARMENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 334,457, dated January 19, 1886. 
Application filed January 28, 1885. Serial No. 154,231. 
(No model.) 
5 
IO 
To all whom it may concern; 
Be it known that I. JAMES D. McCANN, of 
Falls City, in the county of Richardson and 
State of Nebraska, have invented a set of Im 
proved Measures for Drafting, Designing, and 
Cutting Out Garments, of which the follow 
ing is a Specification. 
The invention consists in a set of instru 
ments for the drafting of garments, furs, gloves, 
and mittens, as hereinafter described. 
- My instruments embody a new, useful, and 
improved method of measuring, drafting, or 
designing. They consist of a series of geo 
metrically-scaled chest or bust measures, an 
angle-measure, and a former or scaled curve, 
to be used in the drafting and construction of 
scaled diagrams. They serve as guides from 
which any and all kinds of full-sized garments 
or wearing-apparel may be drafted, designed, 
cut, and made. 
By my invention a consecutive set of scaled 
sizes may be drafted and cut, ranging from 
the small chest or bust measure (marked six 
teen) to that of forty-seven inches, thus mak 
ing thirty-two or more sizes which may be 
drafted or cut from the same diagram with 
the same mathematical exactness and with the 
same instruments. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the chest-scale. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view of the angle-scale, 
with the chest-scale pivoted at the vertex of 
its angle. Fig. 3 is a plan view, to show the 
joint in angle-measure, whereby the short arm 
may be folded down on the long one. Fig. 4 
is a plan view of the curve-scale. Fig. 5 is a 
diagram illustrative of a garment as it is cut 
The following measurements are to be taken 
moderately tight, and preferably over some 
tight-fitting garment: First, girth of the neck; 
Second, girth of the arm close to the shoulder. 
joint; third, girth of chest or bust close up un 
derneath the arms; fourth, from the top of the 
spinal column down the back sharp onto the 
5 line ranging With the upper point of the hips; 
fifth, girth of waist close down onto the upper 
point of the hips; sixth, girth around over the 
largest part of the hips; seventh, length of arm 
from upper point of the shoulder round over 
5o the elbow to the wrist, marking figures at el 
bow and Wrist, (arm to be held in an easy bent 
position;) eighth, girth of sleeve at elbow and 
Out. 
- 
at the wrist; ninth, the distance across the back 
between the outer circles of the armholes; 
tenth, the distance from the under side seam 
beneath the arm to the center of the chest or 
bust in front. 
In using my scale and diagrams the follow 
ing measurements are only necessary: First, 
the chest or bust measurement around the 
body close up underneath the arms determines 
the chest, bust, or scale to be used; second, 
the distance from the top of the spinal column 
down the back to the waist determines the 
length of the waist; third, girth of the waist 
down close onto the top of the hips; fourth, 
length of sleeve from the upper point of the 
shoulder around over the elbow to the wrist; 
fifth, girth of sleeve at elbow and wrist; sixth, 
the distance across the back between the outer 
circles of the armholes; seventh, the distance 
from the side seam beneath the arm to the 
center of the chest or bust in front. 
The above seven measurements will give all 
the data necessary to make any changes re 
quired in the drafting of the body of any gar 
ment, or the body of any and all Wearing-ap 
parel. 
In the application of my method of drafting, 
designing, or making of diagrams for wearing 
apparel there are three essential instruments 
required, which are of the following construc 
tion and dimensions: 
In Figure 1 of the drawings, A represents 
the chest or bust measure or scale, which runs 
or ranges in consecutive numbers, from six 
teen inches to that of forty-seven inches, rep 
resenting the number of inches around the 
chest or bust of a person. 
The chest-measure is made in the following 
gradation of scales: The chest measure or scale 
number 30 is taken as the base or dividing line 
between the man and the youth, maid or miss, 
and is the true English standard inch and foot 
measure, and all prepared diagrams are pref. 
erably scaled upon this base or dividing line. 
The twelve inches of the foot are called 
spaces, which are subdivided into ten equal 
parts or tenths. 
The chest-measurements of persons generally 
vary from about thirty to forty-seven inches; 
hence it is most convenient to have about 
eighteen straight measures like that shown 
in Fig. 1 of the drawings. 
25 
35 
55 
75 
90 
95. 
IOO 
 
334, 
45 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
on the same 
5. The desig 
The above said chest measures or scales may 
equal parts, being the tenth part of an inch of 
be made of wood, flexible tape, steel, vulcan 
the English standard measurement, but m 
lized rubber, or any other material which will 
be spaced or scaled in any other known o 
answer the purpose for w 
ich they are used. 
vised manner. A set of letters is placed up 
heir width is three-fourths of 
es of said curved scale, two inches 
on both 
apart. The purpose of these letters is to de 
an inch, and the scales printed up 
. 
will determinet heir length. 
iii. 
iiii termine what side, special, or particular part 
In Fig. 2 of the drawings, Brepresents the 
of the edge of said curved scale is to be used 
angle measure. The long armb of said angle 
in drafting the article of wearing-apparel. 
oisone and one-fourth inch wide by twenty 
As a guide, and to guard against any possible 
inches long. The short arm of the same is 
inistake, the same class of letters as used upon 
one inch wide by twelve inches long. The 
said curved scale is also placed upon the dial 
thickness of said angle is from one-eighth to 
grams, so that the user or drafter has only to 8o 
one-fourth of an inch. Both sides of the arms are 
observe the letters upon the diagram and for 
5 spaced offil to one-inch spaces upon the outer 
mer and their relative positions, so as to de 
margin, and the inch-spaces to be subdivided 
termine the side and particular part of the 
into ten equal spaces, the spacing to be 
edge of the former which is to be used. The 
made both ways from the vertex of the angle, 
said curved scale is made in two pieces joint 
led together in the narrowest place for the con 
by a circular 
the two arms 
hinge, B', w 
venience of storage and carriage. 
It is easily 
an 
d 
jointed. . . . 
Fig. 5 of the drawings is a sample dia. 
gram. In order to draft it. I proceed as fol. 
First. Place the angle-measure upon the pai 
per or material upon which the diagram is to 
afted, with the outer edge of the long arm 
with the edge of material next to you, 
t 
he short arm away from you, 
douickly jointed togeth 
In Fig. 5 of the drawin 
: - - - - 
lows: 
. . 
. . 
. . 
: 
: 
: 
: 
75 
 
i- it 
3 -i il 
given angle to the long arm. 
In Fig. 3 is a view of the hinge at the junc 
tion of the arms of the angle-measure, the 
upper and outer plate of hinge being cut away 
t the circleshc 
A piece is made to fit 
the same, neatly notched and scaled upon one. 
half of the edge of the same. The said piece 
is then riveted upon the proper side of the 
tongue of the shor 
angle of said square, so 
that it will nicely fit up into the cut-away cir 
A. and a screw is placed in the cente 
rata to 
en the parts of hinge together. When 
fasten 
the short arm b is moved to or from the long 
arm b, the notched and scaled circle d turns 
4o around in the cut-away circle on the long arm 
b. Near the edge of the cut-away circle is a 
small catch-spring, c, which catches in the 
notches of circle d d and firmly fastens the 
Same at ally given angle. Catch-springfis 
45 fastened at e at the junction of arms bb, with 
the screw g to receive and hold in place scale 
A. Two more like springs are used to catch 
and hold scale A, one being placed in each 
arm of the angle-measure at a suitable dis 
In Fig. 4 of the drawings C represents the 
curved Scale, which is so constructed in curves 
and circles that when used in conjunction 
with the chest and angle measure the true 
55 circles and natural curves required to secure 
a perfectly-fitting garment may be easily and 
readily obtained. The curve-scale is a frac 
tion over twenty-three inches long and one 
eighth of an inch in thickness, the large end 
6o having a maximum width of about five inches, 
and the small one a width of about three and 
three-eighths of an inch. Said curved scale 
may be made of wood, vulcanized rubber, or 
any other suitable material. The outer mar 
65 gin (necessary to be used) of said former is 
Scaled or divided into one-inch spaces, and 
Said one-inch Spaces are subdivided into ten 
5o tance, SO as to hold said scale. 
rest upon the paper or goods. Draw 
along the outer edge of both arms of the an 
a line 
: 
- 
- 
- 
- 
II5 
urements are to be taken. 
Second. Select chest measure or Scale 30 and 
place the same in the catch-springs on the 
long arm of the angle-measure, with the end 
on which space one is marked at the vertex of 
the angles and even with the long arm b. IIo 
With the square even with the before-said 
marked lines, proceed to mark the required 
spaces down the vertical line as follows: Make 
a mark at the spaces designated. Space 13 
determines the upper shoulder-line. Space 23 
determines the outer curve or circle of the 
neck. Space 33 determines the lower point 
of neck-curve. The above three spaces given 
are ail determined by the girth of the neck. 
Measure down 6 spaces, which is oppo 
site the outer front curve of the arm-circle. 
Mark down 9 spaces, which is the chest or 
bust line passing close underneath the arms. 
The last two spaces are governed by the girth 
of the arm close to the shoulder. Mark 9 
spaces, which determines the top of the under 
arm seam. Mark down 12 spaces, which de 
termines the upper point of the front side dart. 
Mark space 15, which gives waist-line as per 
measurement down the back. Mark 193, 
which is determined by measurement over 
the hips. Mark 273, which gives full length 
of back part of skirt. Mark 28, which gives the 
lower point of the front of the skirt. Move the 
I25 
: ; ; ; ; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; ; ; 
; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
334,457 
3 
The foregoing is the draft of one side of the 35 
front of a lady's walking jacket. Where two 
pieces of the same dimensions are required, 
the goods are doubled and both pieces are cut 
at once. The necessary seam - cloth is al 
lowed in the construction of all diagrams. 
An indefinite number and variety of dia 
grams may be constructed from which any 
and all kinds of wearing-apparel may be 
drafted and cut upon the same principle by 
following the directions accompanying each 45 
Oe 
One or more dashes placed parallel with 
any given line on the diagrams denote straight 
lines drawn with the straight-edge. 
Stars placed upon the margin of separate 
pieces or parts of the drafted diagrams de 
termine the edges that are to be joined to 
gether in making up the garment. 
Having thus described all that is necessary 
to a full understanding of my invention, what 
I consider to be new, and desire to protect by 
Letters Patent, is 
A tailor's measure, C, reversely curved at 
its opposite ends, marked and notated with a 
figure for every inch-space near its margin, 
having a letter over every other figure, and 
having more or less of the inch-spaces subdi 
vided into tenths, as and for the purpose de 
scribed. . 
55 
SO 
JAMES DWIGHT MCCANN. 
Witnesses: 
w 
E. D. STOUGHTON, 
O. D. MCCANN. 
chest measure or scale from the long arm onto. 
the short arm of the angle-measure. Fasten 
the Scale in the catch-springs upon the said 
angle. Mark out on the upper base-line 3, 
spaces. Move down to marked space 13, 
keeping the long angle of the square always 
even with the vertical line. Mark out 9. 
spaces to point of shoulder-line, drawing a 
guide-line back to the vertical or base line, as 
must be done with all guide-lines. Move to 
23. Mark out three spaces. This gives the 
outer circle of the neck. Move down to 6. 
Mark out 8. Move down to 9. Mark out 
10 spaces. This is the chest, or bust meas 
lure or scale-line. Move down to 93. Mark 
out 11 spaces, which gives the top of the un 
der arm side seam. Move down to 121. 
Mark out 
and 5, which gives the curve 
of the front edge and top of the front side 
dart. Move to 153. Mark out , 4, 71, 
and 11, which gives waist-line front and side 
dart curves. Move to 193. Mark out , 5, 
7, and 12 spaces, giving front and front side 
dart curves and curve of swell over the hip. 
Move down to 273. Mark out 13 spaces as 
width of skirt. Move to 28. Mark out 5. 
and 7 spaces, which gives the lower curve of 
front side dart lower circle of skirt. To con 
plete the draft, take former or scaled curve and 
obtain the required circles and curves (as per 
diagram) by noticing the given letters on the 
diagram and upon the former, which will 
designate the proper side and part of the said 
former to use. 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334557.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F., BENGERT, 
REWOWING SIGN. 
No. 334,557. 
 
Patented Jan. 19, 1886. 
E. 
za 
T 
zia SSS 
a in 'NS 
AITORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. BENGERT, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
REVOLVING SG N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 334,557, dated January 19, 1886. 
Application filed June 1, 1885, Serial No. 167,321. 
(No model.) 
- 
tion. 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN F. BENGERT, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvementin Revolving Signs, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of one of my im 
proved revolving signs. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
front elevation of the same, taken through 
the line a ac, Fig. 1, and part being broken 
away. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of the lower 
part of the pivot, the upper part of the post 
and the lower part of the sign being shown in 
Section. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
signs constructed in such a manner that they 
will be revolved by the wind, and thus at 
tract attention, and which shall be simple in 
construction, and not liable to get out of or 
der. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of the various parts of the 
revolving sign, as will be hereinafter fully 
described. 
A represents a post set in the ground at the 
Outer edge of a sidewalk or other desired po 
sition. In the upper end of the post A is 
formed a screw-hole, into which is screwed 
the lower end of a pivot, B. The pivot B 
passes up through a block, C, and upon its 
conical upper end rests a steel bearing, D, se 
cured to the said block C at the upper end of 
the pivot-hole. The block C is made in the 
form of a watch, with a dial-plate and hands. 
upon one or both sides, and with a stem, E, 
and guard-ring F upon its top. To the stem 
E and guard-ring F is rigidly attached a ver 
tical rod, G, to which is attached a collar or 
hub, H, provided with eight (more or less) 
radial arms, I. To the outer ends of the ra. 
dial arms I are attached the upper ends of 
short vertical rods J. to the lower ends of 
which are attached wings K. The wings K 
are made angular in plan view, as shown in 
Fig. 1, and are secured in vertical positions by 
braces L., the lower ends of which are secured 
to the lower parts of the wings K, and their 
upper ends are secured to the upper ends of 
the adjacent wings, as indicated in Figs. 1 
and 2. With this construction the wind Will 
cause the sign to revolve, as it will have greater 
power upon the wings whose open rear sides 
are toward the wind than it has upon the 
wings whose sides or angular forward sides 
are toward the wind. 
The representations Mof eyeglasses or other 
objects can be attached to the side edges of 
the block C and suspended from arms N, at 
tached to the upper part of the post A, to 
make the sign more conspicuous. 
The block C is kept from rising upon the 
pivot B by a set-screw, O, passing in through 
the base of the said block C and entering an 
annular groove in the pivot B, as shown in 
Fig. 3. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
A revolving sign constructed substantially 
as herein shown and described, and consisting 
of the pivot B, secured to a post, A, the block 
C, representing a watch, and revolving upon 
the said pivot B, the vertical rod G, attached 
to the revolving block C, and provided with 
a collar, H, the radial arms I, attached to the 
said collar, and the angular Wings K, rigidly 
suspended from the said radial arms I, and 
strengthened in position by braces L., attached 
to adjacent wings, whereby the said sign will 
be revolved by the wind, as set forth. 
JOHN F. BENGERT. 
Witnesses: 
JAMEST. GRAHAM, 
EDWID. M. CLARK. 
55 
75 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334657.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 334,657. 
 
C. GORTON. 
STEAM GENERATOR, 
Patented Jan. 19, 1886. 
FR: 
Eli 
W Ellis 
r 
I Usesg H 
li IEEE 
All 
s:ss. 
III 
I 
E 
Tw- 
se E. 
is EEEEEEil 
7 
WA 
I se 
AE AN 
ISAS 
E. E. SS 
EYE) 
nints 
D 
. 
, 
^ WTA/ESSES 
m 
INVENTOR 
26-4-42 
w 
By 22eal-Aitof 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES GORTON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STEAM - GE NE RATOR. 
3?ECEEACATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 334,657, dated January 9, 1886. 
Application filed May 27, 1885. 
Serial No. 166,858. (No model.) 
w 
To all, Luhon, it nay concern: 
Be it known that I, CHAs. GORTON, of New 
York, in the county of New York and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Steam- Generators; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to low-pressure steam 
generators, which are applicable to house 
heating and farming purposes and the like, 
and has for its object simplicity in construc 
tion, economy in consumption of fuel, sec 
tional in its character, and self-feeding from 
external fuel-pockets, instead of from a cen 
tral magazine, as heretofore. 
The invention essentially consists of an up 
per and lower section, each having water 
spaces communicating with each other by 
circulating-tubes, the upper section having 
a series of Short Outer return-tubes and the 
inner portion of the upper section having 
a nest of longer flame - tubes around said 
nest. I arrange an annulus which divides 
the return - smoke chamber from the exter 
nai pockets and fuel - reservoir, and below 
the annulus, and also extending below the 
tube-sheet I arrange an annular downwardly 
projecting flange, which forms between it and 
the outside jacket a fuel-reservoir into which 
there is no draft, and in which no combustion 
takes place. These features, together with the 
fuel-pockets, constitute the gist of my inven 
tion. I may, however, add that the arrange 
ment of the grate and fire-pot is an important 
adjunct to the successful operation of my im 
proved boiler. The inner walls of the fire-pot, 
as will be seen, are converging from the top 
down to the grate, and the grate also con 
verges to its lower surface, so that as near as 
possible the layer of fuel is of equal thickness 
throughout the furnace, thus forming a com 
bustion-chamber between the fuel and the tube 
sheet for the commingling of the gases, where 
by they are more perfectly consumed, and con 
sequently insures even combustion throughout 
said chamber. Between the fire-pot and grate 
I provide air-apertures, so that the proper 
quantity of air shall be supplied at the proper 
time and place, as will be more fully herein 
after described. One of the most important 
conditions for perfect combustion is that the 
supply of air be regulated by the demand. No 
more air should enter through any one orifice 
than can be absorbed by the gas with which 
it comes in contact, because an excess of air 
beyond that which is absolutely necessary for 
chemical union must have an injurious influ 
ence; but when all the oxygen in the air which 
passes through the perforations enters into 
chemical union heat is constantly developed, 
so as to overcome the cooling effect of the air. 
The heat also causes the combustible gases to 
rush toward the jets of flame and to take the 
place of the rarefied products of combustion 
which are constantly driven away by the cur 
rent, and to control this required quantity, 
whereby a perfect combustion of all the gases 
takes place and economy of fuel is secured. 
Having reference to the drawings hereto 
annexed, Figure 1 represents a front eleva 
tion, Fig. 2 a vertical transverse Section, and 
Fig. 3 a plan view, of a plate which may be 
adapted for holding the pockets; but prefera 
bly the pockets are riveted to the casing of 
the lower Section. 
It will be readily seen in Fig. 1 that the 
boiler is provided with the usual attachments 
of safety-valve, damper-regulator, gages, &c., 
which form no part of my invention, and will 
therefore not be further described. 
A is the upper section, and B the lowersec 
The casings of the two sections meet at . 
tion. 
a, and form a joint. Small doors b b are placed 
near the lower edge of the upper section for 
access to the return-smoke chamber for clean 
ing, &c., and upon the lower section I place 
two or more fuel-pockets, C C, which, in con 
junction with the converging fire-pot D and 
the annulus E, form a fuel-reservoir, which 
when filled will automatically supply the fur 
mace with fuel for a long space of time. As 
before stated, the upper sections have Water 
spaces, the lower one surrounding the fire-pot 
and the upper one over the fire, which is pro 
vided with flame-tubes in the usual manner. 
These water-spaces are provided with commu 
nicating or circulating tubes G. G., through 
which the water freely circulates from one to 
the other. 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
35 
45 
334,657 
Around the central nest of flame-tubes d d, 
I arrange a series of return-smoke tubes, ee, 
which communicate with the upper flame 
chamber, F, and the return-smoke chamber H. 
It will be observed that the latter of these 
tubes are much shorter than the central nest 
of tubes, and are not therefore in the way of 
the return-smoke chain)er or the fuel-reser 
voir. The outer casing of the upper section 
forms the exit smoke-?lue to the uptake. The 
meeting edges of the plates constituting a fire 
box at its bottom, form an annulus or base 
which fits into the ash-pit, or that portion of 
the furnace which holds the grate. The ash 
pit casing is provided with doors in the usual 
way, and also sail-supply apertures which are 
governed automatically for the proper supply 
of air to support combustion. The grate is 
circular in form, but a polition of it stands 
downwardly, so that the fuel will fall toward 
the center. An air-space entirely surrounds 
the grate, and also a portion of the fuel to 
where a clear incandescence takes place, so 
that the fuel will burn equally throughout the 
furnace. 
I desire to draw particular attention to the 
downwardly-projecting annular ring E, which 
divides the fuel-'eservoir from the combus 
tion-chamber, so that no combustion shall take 
place in said reservoir, and but little combus 
tion along the slanting sides of the fire-pot. 
When the boilers are ready for transporta 
tion, they are taken apart, and now, being in 
sections, are rendered easy to handle, and when 
ready to be elected or set up all that is neces 
sary to do is to put the parts together, the 
joints being adapted to fit, and simply make 
the water and steam connections, when the ap 
paratus is ready for use. 
IHaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a steam-generator, 
of the upper portion provided with the annu 
lus E, fuel-pockets C, and fire-pot D', Substan- 45 
tially as set forth. 
2. A steam-generator consisting of the up 
per section having the annulus, and the lower 
standing section forming the fire-pot, in com 
bination with the fuel-reservoir and the con- 5o 
necting-tubes, arranged substantially as set 
3. A steam-generator consisting of the up 
per and lower sections connected together by 
water. circulating tubes, a fuel-reservoir be- 55 
tyeen said sections, and a furnace having 
slanting inner walls, with the grate, all ar 
ranged for joint operation substantially as set 
forth. 
forth. 
- 
4. A steam-boiler consisting of the upper 6o 
section having the long and short series of 
tubes, an annular chamber forming the bottom 
of the return-smoke chamber, and also the top 
of the fuel-reservoir, in combination with the 
fuel-pockets and the fire-pot, substantially as 65 
Set forth and described. 
5. The combination, in a steam generator, 
of the upper and lower sections, as described, 
the flat annular chamber located beneath the 
short tubes and over the fuel-reservoir, the 7o 
depending annulus with the fire-pot, Substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the ?oregoing as my 
own I affix my signature in presence of two 
Witnesses. 
CARLIES GOERTON. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM R. SYME, 
DANIL. B. MURPHY. 
5 
1 
35 
 
w 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334757.txt	(No Model.) 
R. D'HEUREUSE. 
DRILL FOR WOOD AND OTHER MATERIALs, 
No. 334,757. 
Patented Jan, 26, 1886. 
 
Z2 
A4A 
AZZZesses 
26. 2624s-- 
 
/7zzezz 
fee?, eu 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
RUDOLPH D'HEUREUSE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
D R L FOR WOOD AND OTHER MATER ALS. 
3PECIFICATION forning part of Letters Patent No. 334,757, dated January 26, 1886. 
Application filed May 23, 1885. Serial No. 1 C6,489. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RUDOLPHDHEUREUSE, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of New York, in the county of New York and 
5 State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Drills for Wood 
and other Materials, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to drills for wood or 
other materials, and it is applicable to appa 
ratus to be operated by hand or any other 
motive power. 
The object of my invention is to so organize 
a drilling apparatus that it may be used for 
the purpose of drilling holes in places difficult 
or impossible of access when the ordinary 
drilling contrivances-such as braces, &c.- 
cannot be depended upon for performing the 
work. 
One of the purposes for which my apparatus 
is especially applicable will be the drilling of 
holes into the window frames or casings of 
upper story windows, when it is desired to pro 
vide for temporary or permanent arrangement 
for cleaning, repairing, or for the application 
of fire-escape apparatus. 
My invention comprises a frame for sup 
porting the drilling mechanism, which frame 
is provided with adjustable clamping mech 
anism at its foot; and this frame may be made 
in more than one part, thus rendering it 
capable of being adjusted and fixed so that the 
drill may move in a direction parallel to the 
vertical axis of the clamped foot-piece, so as 
35 to drill vertically, or adjusted at any desired 
angle with reference to the object to which the 
apparatus is clamped, so as to bore holes at 
any desired angle with relation to said object. 
The drilling mechanism may be mounted upon 
this structure in a sliding frame, or the drill 
spindle may be combined with any one of sev 
eral well-known kinds of drill-feed devices. 
In either organization the construction is such 
as to insure a progressively-forward movement 
of the drill of the requisite speed simulta 
neously with its rotating movement. 
The organization of my apparatus is such 
that it may be operated so as to bore the hole 
toward the operator, the drill-point moving 
5o in the direction of the operator, instead of away 
from him. 
The subject-matter for which I desire pro 
45 
75 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 55 
tection in this instance is pointed out in the 
claims at the end of this description. 
a part of this description, and in which like 
letters indicate like parts, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation of one form of my apparatus; Fig. 
2, a front elevation of the same; Fig. 3, a de 
tached portion showing one form of device for 6o 
insuring the progressive forward movement of 
the drill. Fig. 4 is a front elevation of an 
other form of the apparatus; Fig. 5, a side ele 
vation of the same; Fig. 6, a view of one of the 
modes of feeding the drill that may be em- 65 
ployed, and Fig. 7 a detail view of a part of 
Fig. 6. 
A represents the drill-frame, with clamps B 
B, one of which may be permanently affixed to 
the stanchion d of frame A. 
E is the drill-spindle, provided with the 
drill-chuck C and with gear G, which co-oper 
ates with the gear g, located upon the driving 
spindle, which latter is provided with a crank, 
(or may be provided with a pulley,) O. 
In Fig. 1 the pivot band set-screw c, operat 
ing in the concentric slot, show how the direc 
tion of the drill-spindle may be changed, so as 
to enable the boring of the hole at any angle 
with relation to any object to which the appa 
ratus may be affixed; and it is obvious that by 
suitable arrangement the length of the frame 
may be extended or contracted to suit the Work 
to be performed. 
The drill-spindle Ein the form of apparatus 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2 slides through the gear 
G, which, by a screw-pin running in the groove 
h, communicates its rotary motion to the spin 
dle E, as will be understood by reference par 
ticularly to Fig. 3. 
In Fig. 1 the drill-frame Aisrepresented to 
be attached to the narrow projection of a win 
dow-frame, F, to bore through which and the 
hanging stile S the chuck has to pass close to 
the outer wall, N, projecting from the window 
frame. The hole is shown as already bored 
and the chuck provided with the countersink 
bar P, which is passed through the hole and 
furnished with the cutter R. In this condi 
tion, if the pull Mis pushed outward and the 
drill revolved in the proper direction, the 
countersink may be furnished to the depth re 
quired. 
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the clamps BB 
95 
OO 
334,757 
IO 
25 
35 
are represented to be adjusted apart by set 
screws and a screw, a, within the stanchion d, 
to secure the clamp to the window-frame or 
other object. 
In operating the form of apparatus shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2 the revolution of the driving 
spindle will give the requisite rotary motion 
to the drill-spindle, and the gradual drawing 
forward of the pull M will insure the progress 
ively forward movement of the drill-spindle. 
The form of apparatus shown in Figs, 4 and 5 
is provided with a sliding frame, D, to which 
the drill-spindle is properly Secured, and With 
gears and crank for effecting the revolution of 
said spindle. Power applied to the crank 
shaft will give revolution to the drill-spindle, 
while the slide D is fed progressively forward 
by a cord, belt, or chain, e, operated by a wheel 
or crank, F, nearer the foot of the device than 
the driving-shaft of the drill-spindle. The 
manner in which this progressively forward 
movement of the drill-spindie is accomplished 
in this embodiment of my invention will be 
clearly understood without a detailed descrip 
tion thereof. 
Figs. 6 and 7 show another method of feed 
ing the drill which may be employed instead 
of that shown in Figs 1 and 3. In these 
views Figs. 6 and 7, J indicates the threaded 
portion of the drill-spindle E, which meshes 
into a nut, K, which is held in place by a 
screw-pin, P. The revolving drill-spindle 
feeds in the desired direction when the tooth 
L is allowed to catch into one of the notches 
in in the rim of the nut K. 
Various other modifications of the drill-feed 
ing, clamping, or adjusting means may be em 
ployed without changing the character of my 
invention, and the apparatus, though repre 
sented in the drawings as applied to boring 
wood, may be used with slight modifications 
for drilling other materials. 
I specially design this apparatus for light 
work, and as a handy tool for such purposes 
its parts will be made as light as may be con 
sistent with proper strength; but it is not my 
purpose to restrict the use of this apparatus 
to any particular work, as its adaptability to 
heavy work is obvious. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A drilling-tool comprising a frame, hav 
ing a hinged foot constructed to be adjustably 
secured near the object to be operated upon, 
mechanism for imparting a progressively for 
ward movement to the drill-point, and mech 
anism for imparting the requisite rotary. Imo 
tion thereto, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. A drill embodying in its organization a 
frame whose foot can be adjustably secured 
near the object to be operated upon, and whose 
top portion can be adjusted to enable the drill 
ing-tool to penetrate at an angle to the vertical 
axis of the foot of the frame, gearing for im 
parting rotary motion to the drilling-tool, and 
drill-feed mechanism whereby said tool is pro 
gressively fed forward simultaneously with its 
rotation, substantially as set forth, 
3. The frame A, whose foot-piece is pro 
vided with a clamping mechanism, one of the 
jaws, B, whereof is rigidly secured to said foot 
piece, in combination with a drill-spindle, 
gearing for imparting rotary motion to said 
spindle, and the pull M, connected to the top 
extension of the drill-spindle and extending 
down near the foot of the drill-frame, whereby 
a forward or backward movement may be im 
parted to the drilling-tool, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. The frame A, constructed to have one of 
its members adjusted at an angle with relation 
to its other member, and provided with adjust 
able clamps at its foot, in combination with the 
drill-spindle, gearing to effect the rotary move 
ment of said spindle, and the pull M, connected 
to the top extension of said spindie and ex 
tending down to near the foot of the drill 
frame, whereby a progressively forward move 
ment of the drill-spindle may be effected, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 16th day 
of May, A. D. 1885. 
RUDOLPH. DHEUREUSE. 
Witnesses: 
HUGO KOELKE, 
J. E. M. BOWEN. 
55 
75 
85 
9O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334857.txt	(No Model.) 
T. E. GILKES ON, 
THRASHING MACHINE, 
No. 334,857. 
S 
 
 
Patented Jan, 26, 1886. 
SS 
ea 
7 
X 
t 
: 
le 
A. All, 
Estes 
a s 5 
Sasas S. 
- 
3. Sa 
77 
a. 
N Ja 
-- 
a" 
g 
 
WITNESSES 
63.4a/ 2 
/ 77.4. 
III/E/WTOR 
?tra. & 80-k.o.o.A. 
a?tos-rmity 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS E. GILKESON, OF LODA, IILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE CASE & 
WILLARD THRESHER COMPANY, OF BATTLE CREEK, MICHIGAN. 
THRAS ING - VACH NE. 
PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 334,857, dated January 26, 1886. 
Application filed October 24, 1885. Serial No. 180,808. (No model.) 
55 
I () 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS E. GILRESON, 
of LOda, in the county of Iroquois and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Thrashing-Machines; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
thrashing-machines. 
It is found that in handling flax and grains 
where the straw is tough and liable to split 
into long fibers, the fibers have a tendency to 
Wind on the shafting and cylinder, and conse 
quently to impede the progress of the ma 
chine, and render it less effective. 
The object of my present invention is to pro. 
vide an improved construction of fork-head 
and guards in connection with the mechanism 
for transferring the straw from the thrashing 
cylinder to the screens or endless-belt carrier. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view of a portion of a thrasher embodying 
my invention invertical longitudinal section. 
Fig. 2 is a front view of the fork-shaft, forks, 
and guards in position for use; and Fig. 3 is 
a cross-section of one of the guards. 
A represents the thrashing-cylinder; B, the 
concave, and C the rearwardly and upwardly 
extending grate, over which the straw is con 
ducted from the thrashing - cylinder to the 
shaking Screens and straw-carrier. 
To the rear of the cylinder A. and above 
the grate C is located a series of ribs, D, form 
ing a guard, between which the fork tines or 
teeth E travel in forcing the straw rearwardly 
as it leaves the cylinder A. The ribs D are 
secured at their front ends just at the rear and 
above the center of the cylinder A, and extend 
from thence in curved form, as shown, above 
the grate C, to a point at or near the upper por. 
tion of the thrasher-frame, where they are se 
cured to a suitable cross-bar. Each of the ribs 
D is hollowed out on its under side, as shown at 
ac, and rounded or beveled on its upper side, as 
shown aty. The rib may be inverted-Wshape in 
cross-section, or it may be curved, or the cen 
tral portion may be flat and the edges slanti 
ing. The object is to provide inclined edges 
for the rib, so that the fine fiber of the flax, 
straw, or twine from the bands of the sheaves, 
which tends to work up through the spaces 
between the ribs will slide back again, instead 
of accumulating on the upper sides and clog 
ging the crank-shaft. The hollow lower faces 
of the ribs form channels, which direct the 
course of the blast of air from the cylinder A. 
along the length of therib, and the fibers, which 
would otherwise creep up through the spaces 
between the guards are thereby drawn back 
into the machine. Above the ribs D the dou 
ble crank shaft Fis adapted to rotate, its ends 
being journaled in suitable bearings in the 
sides of the machine. 
On the cranked portions of the shaft F the 
fork heads G are secured. The heads G con 
sist of elongated sleeves, either made in one 
piece and slipped into position before the 
crank is complete, or, preferably, in two half 
sections, as shown in the drawings. The 
sleeves or heads G are adapted to loosely fit 
the shaft, and are provided with laterally-ex 
tending perforated lugs g, in which the heads 
of the tines or teeth E are secured, preferably 
by means of draw-nuts g, in engagement with 
the threaded ends of the times. When the 
sleeves are constructed in two half-sections, 
the teeth, secured as stated, form at the same 
time bolts for locking the two half-sections 
together. 
Near the central portions of the sleeves or 
heads G, and in a plane with the times E, the 
upwardly-extending arms H are secured, the 
upper ends of the arms H being connected to 
a cross-bar, I, by rods or links h. The com 
bined effect of the rotary motion of the crank 
shaft and the jointed connection H h is to 
cause the times E to descend nearly their en 
tire length, with but slight forward motion, 
at the end of the guard nearest the thrashing 
cylinder, and then to move forwardly along 
the length of the guard with their full length 
extending below the guard, and, finally, at 
the point where they stop moving toward the 
rear of the machine, they move back a short 
distance from the straw, which they are forc 
ing rearwardly before they withdraw above 
95 
OC 
25 
35 
45 
2 
334,857 
3. The combination, with the thrashing-cyl 
the guards. This motion prevents as far as 
possible any tendency to draw the fiber above 
irder and the straw-conduit leading there 
from, of a guard composed of a series of hol 
the guard, and enables the tines to grasp the 
low-faced ribs adapted to form the upper side 
straw to its full depth at the very start. 
I am aware that it is not new to employ a 
of the straw-conduit and hold and direct the 
air-blast from the cylinder, and forks for forc 
series of forks mounted on a crank and adapt 
ing the straw rearwardly through the straw 
ed to move between ribs and links for regu 
conduit, substantially as set forth. 
lating the movement of forks, and hence Inmake 
4. The combination, with the thrashing cyl 
no claim, broadly, to such construction. 
It is evident that slight changes might be 
inder and the forks adapted to remove the 
resorted to in the form and arrangement of the 
straw therefrom, of a series of hollow-faced 
slanting backed ribs adapted to form the upper 
several parts described without departing 
from the spirit and scope of my invention; 
side of the straw-conduit, substantially as set 
hence I do not wish to limit myself strictly to 
forth. 
the construction herein set forth; but 
5. The combination, with the frame, the 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
crank-shaft, and the fork head consisting, es 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters sentially, of an elongated sleeve made in two 
parts and provided with laterally-extending 
Patent, is 
perforated lugs, of the tines secured in said 
1. The combination, with the thrashing-cyl 
lugs and a jointed arm secured to the sleeve 
inder, the straw-conduit, and forks, of a series 
and frame, substantially as set forth. 
of ribs forming a guard, each of said ribs hav 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
ing a hollowed-out face and beveled back, sub 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the thrashing-cyl 
ing witnesses. 
inder, and the straw.conduit located behind 
the thrashing - cylinder, of a Series of longi 
tudinally-curved ribs forming the upper side 
of the straw-conduit, the said ribs having dou 
ble inclined backs, for the purpose substan 
tially as set forth. 
JAMES GREEN, 
ALFRED G. HIGHAM. 
THOMAS E. GILKESON. 
Witnesses: 
35 
O 
45 
O 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US334958.txt	(No Model.) 
C. A. MAHONY, 
PENDULUM, 
 
 
 
WITNES sEls: 
NVE N O FR 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washing 
toi, ). C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. MAHONY, OF PHILADELPHIA PENNSYLVANIA. 
PEND UUM. 
& ECIFICATIO3N foxming part of Letters Patent No. 334,958, dated January 26, 1886. 
Application filed May 13, 1885. Serial No. 165,329. (No model.) 
I. ? 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES A. MAHONY, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of the city and county of Philadelphia, and 
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Pendulums, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to furnish a 
means whereby the compensation of a pendu 
lum can be varied or adjusted with ease and 
precision. To accomplish this, I make one of 
the rods of the pendulum (or more than one, 
if requirements of design make it preferable) 
of two metals or other substances of different 
Is expansibility. Such rod or rods I call the ad 
justing rod (or rods.) One piece of which the 
adjusting-rod is composed forms the upper part 
of the adjusting-rod, and the other piece the 
lower part, and these two pieces do not meet, 
but, on the contrary, they must be some little 
distance apart-at least enough to allow to both 
pieces their fullest degree of expansion. The 
two pieces are held together by a swivel hav 
ing a screw-thread on its inside, the ends of 
5 the two pieces being likewise threaded. There 
is a sufficient length of thread on both pieces 
to enable the Swivel to be screwed for such a 
distance toward or from the axis of the pendu 
lum as may be required. The part of the 
swivel that engages with the upper piece may 
be made of the same material as the upper 
piece, or of material of the same expansibility, 
and the lower part of the swivel may likewise 
be made of the same material as the lower 
piece, or of a material of the same expansi 
bility; but, owing to the shortness of the parts 
which engage together, and consequent ex 
treme minuteness of expansion of those parts, 
it will probably be found that a swivel com 
posed entirely of one material will answer suffi 
ciently well. The screw-threads are all of the 
same direction, diameter, and pitch, or if for 
any reason they should be made to differ in 
any of these particulars, yet their action should 
be made the same in the following respect as 
it would be if there were no such difference: 
I mean in respect to this that the extreme 
length of the adjusting-rod will not be in 
creased or diminished by the turning of the 
swivel in either direction. The linear expan 
sibility due to temperature will, however, 
vary, owing to that cause, because by a change 
35 
45 
of the position of the swivel more length of 
one of the two differently-expanding pieces 
would be brought into play to lengthen or 55 
shorten the rod and less length of the other, 
and thus with suitable proportions and design 
a range of variation in the susceptibilities of 
the rod to temperature could be attained that, 
comparatively speaking, would be consider- 6o 
able. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows the adjusting-rod applied to a gridiron 
pendulum; and Fig. 2, a section through the 
swivel, showing the ends of the adjusting-rod. 
The middle rod, A, is the adjusting-rod, and 
is shown as having the pendulum-bob on its 
lower end. The upper piece, a, of the adjust 
ing-rod is supposed to be of the more expan 
sible material-say brass-and the lower one, 
b, of the less expansible material-say of steel. 
The pendulum being set to work, if the time 
piece runs faster at a high temperature tham 
at a low one, it indicates that there is not a 
sufficient length of the brass piece a of the 
adjusting-rod brought into play, and therefore 
the adjusting-swivelic should be screwed down 
Ward, thereby virtually lengthening the brass 
piece a and bringing into play less of the less 
expansible steel piece b. 
If, on the contrary, 
the time-piece runs slower at a high tempera 
ture than at a low one, just the contrary 
should be done. 
When the motion has been made as nearly 
isochronous as possible, the pendulum can be 
regulated to ordinary time, in the usual man 
ner, by raising or lowering the bob in the usual 
alle. 
The raising or lowering of the adjusting-rod 
necessarily causes some alteration of the axis of go 
oscillation, which can be overcome by means of 
a counterpoise, d, if desired, of which an illus 
tration is shown in Fig. 1. This counterpoise 
is a body which can be screwed upward or 
downward to such degree as the case may re 
quire, the weight of the body and the degree 
that it ought to be moved for corresponding 
movements of the swivel to be determined as 
nearly as possible by calculation or experi 
ment; but any device for this purpose is quite 
needless so far as obtaining correct compen 
sation is concerned. The use of the adjusting 
rod is not confined to the gridiron pendulum, 
but it could also be applied to the mercurial 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
334,958 
?????? 
An adjustable compensating pendulum rod 
pendulum, to Reid's pendulum, and to other 
or rods consisting of the rod or rods A, formed 
forms. 
I have spoken of the adjusting-rod as not of substances, a b, of different expansibility, 
being altered in length by the position of the having their ends threaded, and connected to- 20 
5 adjusting-swivel; but I so expressed myself gether by a swivel-screw, c, by means of which 
for lucidity and to avoid confusion in that the length of one of the pieces a b can be in 
place, for it is obvious that correct compensa- creased or diminished while the other is di 
tion could be effected despite such alterations, minished or increased without altering the 
providing they were not in excess of the ad- length of A, substantially as set forth. 
Io justing capacity of the combination; yet, as 
Such alterations would introduce an element 
of uncertainty, they would make correct com 
pensation more tedious and difficult to be at- 
tained. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
CHAS. A. RUTTER, 
OTIS EGAN, 
I5 
CHARLES A. MAHONY, 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335058.txt	(No iliodel.) 
A, H, COWES, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
ELECTRIC FURRACE AND METHOD OF OPERATING THE SAME, 
No. 335,058, 
Patented Jan, 26, 1886. 
area 
. 
 
S. N 
2 
(/6-- 
7%izesses 
^ A2.a 6%-422,-- 
(a dj/8) a 9-1- 
4, 2/82 2227 
- 
/2Z//aa A. Caze/Zas 
(22- - are J 
75. % 
&. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
m 
A. H. COWLES, 
EECTRIC FURNACE AND METHOD OF OPERATING THE SAME, 
No. 335,058. 
 
//7A/ESSES -- 
?i?a.-4 
6.d//e a 4- 
/27/reca 7/. Cove/Zes 
46-, -r-,-, 
INVENTOR 
Attorneys 
w 
UNEED SA ES 
S-r -- "yr 
pre-, - 
OFFICE, 
ALFREI) i. COWLES, OF CI.EVELANI), OHIO. 
E.B.E.C. F. C. F. Raj ACE AND METHO of of 
&rAT. Ng THE SAME. 
SP35.3', C.A.32 S forming part of lette;s 
Airlieation filed Afay 15, 1885. 
Fate at No. 335,358, dated failuary 26, 1886. 
Serial No. 83,63. (So loit.) 
5 5 
75 
8. 
-- 
22 all ashof ii incy conceria: 
in tiepi, as his foila) of consiruction is found 
Be is known tiati, A.FRED II. Cow LEs, a 
to be is:4, adapted for the free escape of the 
gitizen of Elae 2 sited States, residing at Cleve 
gases evolved iron the charge during the pro 
lead, iii le coality of Cayahoga aid State of 
cess ef exiction. 
3 is a lining for protecting the walls of the 
(Chic, iiave is "cated certain new and useful lan. 
faraace. This lining is formed of finely-pulver. 
p'o'geal eitsi i Electric Furnaces and Alethod 
a 
Sperating the Sane; and do hereby de. 
ized charcoal or other similar-material of in 
clare tie following to be a full, cleat, and ex 
| ferior electric'l conductivity to the charge to 
act, description of the iavention, such as will 
be operated on, and wiich is also a bad con 
enable other's skillei in the art to which it ap 
dactor of heat. 
4 is the positive, and C the legative, elec'. 
Retailag is 2iake and use the same, reference 
being had to the aggoing tying drawings, and 
trode. Connected to these are the wirest and 
c', for conducting the electricity to the furnace. 
ioletters Q' figures of reference marked there 
These electrodes are preferably formed of rods 
ona, whici fo?"; a pait; aft is secification. 
of carbon, which project into the body of the 
This inven Siofreiates {{ electrical siteiting 
charge through the iurnace walls and lining. 
fugliaeeg operating oli tea incaidescent s'in 
tiple, is syhici instairgica: operations re 
i3 is tihe charge. This consists, ordinarily, 
airing 21 intense leai are carriei ), wit: 
of eiectrical resistance raterial-such as elec 
electricity as the heat-producing agent, 
| tic-light carton-aid the ore to be reduced. 
Both of these are previously pulverized and 
This invigation coasisis is the is proved 
intimately mixed together before being plaged 
lethod of, operating incaidaseen electric 
in the furnace; but in some cases pulverized 
fraces heireis describes, 3 ad is ti, 302s bi 
nation, with a furnace cois tailiiga charge of 
ore alone is used when it is a sufficient con 
! ductor of electricity. The charge fills the 
electrical resistance maierial, of yo notable 
whole lengti, with line exception of the pro 
electrodes situated as opposite 342ds of jae is . 
I tecting-packing is at the ends of the furnace, 
nace, and projecting it to the ledy ef the 
and it presses against the sides and ends of 
charge contained within it, so t. ii, the said 
each of the electrodes which project into it. 
selectrodes say, when 
resistance rins 
dow, b0 drawn a part, tiereby increasing the 
The current of electricity flows from the sides 
and ends of the said electrodes through the 
aiahou 13t of the charge between the electrodes, 
and cosisequently increasing the 'esistance, 
charge, and catases the electrical resistance 
laterial in the charge to become incandescent. 
and this preserving a unifori resistance wish 
The intense heat of the said incandescent ma 
in the f: gaa 38. 
The i23 &ntion aise goalsists in the arrange. 
eria reduces the ore. 
Yihe the furnace is employed for the re 
allen & of staitaile ahegiharaisin aciliated by the 
diaetiola of ore, the metal is found at the close 
cal ''et or a fortio}} of tie Sairie for a toanatic 
of the operation filling the interstices hetween 
aly is a vileg fie electrodes, so as o gover the 
the particles of carbon, mixed with it. and at 
a motiat of energy utilizei in the filrace. 
Figure in tie tira wigs represents a longi. 
the botton of the furnace, where it collects 
pon the charctri floor after having worked 
Fig. 3 shows 
ii is a sectio: of ae fairacy 
down irough tie clarge. When the furnace 
he tiernace, and 
S 
is started, the electrodes ar; near together ill 
ows this the arra geneat of icehalist) for 
S 
auton:..ticaliy 'swing a pari, tie electrodes by 
the positions indicated by dotted lines the re 
sistance at the start being very great. - After 
2a2a is { a, i aghet, viii'a fig are attre, and 
the frace has been raining for a wille, and 
site -ciek it; also shows the constraction of 
this portion of the clarge between the elee 
the coli: ct-boxes eployed. 
todes has become heated, the resistance falls, 
A are the surnace-walls, which may be coin. 
and the electrodes are ten drawn out a little, 
structed of fire-trick or other sixilar material. 
They are preferally coustracted so that th i 
increasing the length of the ciharge between 
furnace has its largest dimensions in a hori- their, and ringing into the active part of the 
zon?: direction, and is.comparatively shaliow electrical field additional parts of the charge. 
zia iaii ties: inevies 
- 
 
O 
S 
2 5 
w 
45. 
So 
95. 
CO 
335,058 
. 
. . 
. 
5 ing arnature. 
In this manner by successive withdrawings of 
the electrodes a uniform resistance is pre 
served until the entire charge is brought into 
action. 
5 The movement of the electrodes may beeffect 
ed by clock-work mechanism, by hand, or auto 
matically by the current of electricity in the 
circuit, so that the greatest possible amount 
of electrical energy in the circuit may be util 
ized from the beginning to the end of the oper 
- 
ation in the furnace. 
In Fig. 2 is shown a convenient manner of 
operating the electrodes automatically by 
means of a shunt circuit, magnet, and vibrat 
G represent magnets connected in the main 
circuit, and wound in the opposite direction 
with the wire of the shunt-circuit. That from 
the positive pole leads to the positive elec 
trode C, and that of the negative pole leading 
to the contact-point ty. 
H is a vibrating armature, with a contact 
point, h, connected by a wire leading to the 
inegative elictrode C, or to the main wire lead 
ing thereto. To the armare is attached the 
spring I, the tension of which is regulated by 
the key i. 
J is the rod by which the armature is sis 
pended, and at the upper end is provided with 
a friction-clutch, jembracing the hub of the 
ratchet-wheel K, the teeth of which are en 
gaged by the retaining-pawl k. A train of 
gears connect the ratchet-wheel with the gear 
I, that engages the rack M, that is attached 
to the electrode C. This rack also engages 
the pinion N, that is connected by a cross-belt 
or other suitable neans with the duplicate pin 
ion, N', engaging the rack M', connected with 
the electrode C, by which arrangement the 
electrodes are simultaneously moved equal 
distances in opposite directions. 
The electrodes are employed not alone to 
maintain a given resistance, but also to throw 
fresh ore into the zone of reduction. 
In operating the furnace, as the heat in 
creases and the electrical resistance conse 
quently decreases, causing too great a current, 
the arnature. His drawn toward the magnet, 
causing a contact of the points g and h, con 
necting the shuni-circuit, by means of which 
a portion of the current is passed around in 
stead of through the furnace, thus lessening 
the power of the magnet, so that the armature 
is again drawn to its normal position by the 
tension of the spring. With the movement of 
the armature toward the magnet the friction 
clutch slides on the hub of the ratchet-wheel; 
but with the reverse movement of the arma. 
ture, caused by the spring, the ratchet-wheel 
is advanced a notch, thereby withdrawing the 
electrodes a trifle from the furnace, and such 
increase in the distance hetween the electrodes 
of course increases the electrical resistance, 
and consequently decreases the volume of elec. 
f5 trical current through the furnace. As the 
electrodes are drawn apart by successive in 
crements, additional portions of the charge 
drop into the spaces in front of the electrodes. 
and a continuous body of material is preserved 
between them and in contact always with both. 7e 
The extent of this mass of material within the 
zone of action gradually increases until the 
whole of the charge is involved. 
Of course various modifications of the gov 
erning mechanism may be made without de-75, 
parting from the spirit of my invention. 
In charging the furnace the pawl may be . 
thrown back and the ratchet-wheel turned by 
hand to adjust the electrodes. If the elec 
trodes in the heated condition in which they 
usually emerge from the furnace were exposed 
to the air, they would oxidize and be reduced in 
size, to avoid whichi have provided the copper 
contact-boxes P, that are secured to the walls 
A, and have lateral holes through which the 
electrodes pass. The boxes are filled with, pref. 
erably, copper shot, R., of small size, surround 
ing the electrodes. Copper, on account of its 
well-known properties of conducting heat and . 
electricity, is preferable in most cases for this go 
purpose, and the wires are attached to the boxes 
P. As the heated portions of the electrodes 
emerge slowly from the furnace, they first en 
counter the shot, by means of which the heat is 
rapidly transmitted from the electrodes, so that 
the heated portions, as they pass out of the 
respective boxes, are so much reduced in tem 
perature that they are not injured by exposure 
to the air. The shot or globular form for the 
packing or filling in the box P is not essential, 
but is preferable. The movement may be con 
fined to but one of the electrodes, or both may 
be made movable. It will be seen that the . 
feed mechanism of an arc light may be readily 
adapted to move the electrodes outward as the 
resistance-falls; but in the present case such a 
feed mechanism, instead of being adjusted so 
as to maintain the extremities of the electrodes. 
at a uniform distance apart and to feed them in 
toward each other as they are consumed, is so 
arranged that it feeds the electrodes oftward. 
farther and farther apart as the operation pro 
gresses, the space between them always being 
kept filled with the charge. If it were desired 
to lessen the resistance during. the smelting 
operation, by lessening the amount of the 
charge between the electrodes, they may be 
pushed in; and in order to allow this they 
should be made with pointed ends, 
E is a layer of granular charcoal covering 
the top of the charge. 
F is a slab of fire-clay, or other similar ma 
terial, provided with ventholes f. This slab 
covers the whole of the top of the furnace, 
and is luted around the edges before the op 
eration commence. A small space is left be: 
tween the top of the layer of charcoal, E, and 
the bottom of the slab F. The gases given off 
by the charge during the process of reduction 
pass off through the layer of granular char- 30 
coal and out of the vent-holes f. 
I am aware that it is not new to make the 
electrodes of an electric furnace automatically 
adjustable, so that as the resistance diminishes 
II 5 
125 
. 
. 
. 
55 
fo 
45 
, 
. 
OO 
O 
20 
335,058 
45 
50 
55 
70 
O 
they are drawn apart, and I do not claim the 
same, broadly; but all Such attempts and ex 
periments have relation to furnaces in which 
the electric arc is employed, and the electrodes 
being subject to rapid wear the loss must be 
compensated for. The conditions there exist 
ing are similar to those found in the case of an 
electric-arc light-a constant distance must be 
preserved between the electrodes, and the wear 
thereof must be compensated for; but in the 
present instance there is no material wear to 
the electrodes, a continuous body of material 
is preserved between the electrodes, and the 
distance between them varies, gradually wid 
ening from the beginning of the operation 
until the whole of the charge is brought into 
action. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The method of smelting ores and other 
substances by the incandescence of an electrical 
resistance material contained in Said substances 
or mixed there with, which consists in first, 
bringing a limited quantity of the material to 
be treated between a pair of electrodes, and then 
gradually increasing the quantity of such ma 
terial by causing the electrodes to recede from 
each other, substantially as herein set forth. 
2. In the art of smelting ores and other sub 
stances by the direct heating action of the elec 
tric current, the method of obtaining a uniform 
action of said electric current upon the mass 
or charge to be treated, herein described, which 
consists in introducing into the charge elec 
trodes which are normally in proximity to each 
other, and then gradually causing said elec 
trodes to recede from each other, the contact 
with the charge still being preserved until the 
mass of the charge is contained between the 
said electrodes, substantially as set forth. 
3. In an incan descent electrical Sluelting ap 
paratus, the combination of a furnace-cham 
ber having electrodes fitted into its opposite 
sides, with suitable mechanism for bringing 
said electrodes normally in proximity to each 
other within the furnace-chamber and grad 
ually separating the same during the Smelting 
process to the full extent of Said furnace-cham 
ber, substantially as herein set forth. 
4. In an incandescent electrical smelting ap 
paratus, the combination of a furnace-cham 
ber having electrodes fitted into its opposite 
sides, mechanism for normally bringing said 
electrodes in proximity to each other and grad 
ually separating the same during the Smelting 
process to the full extent of the furnace-cham 
ber, and a charge of electrical resistance mal 
terial in contact with both electrodes during 
the entire process, substantially as herein set 
forth. 
5. The combination, with an adjustable elec 
trode of an electric ?urnace, of a mass of heat 
conducting particles, preferably globular, en 
compassing the electrode outside of the fur 
nace-chamber, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
6. The combination, with adjustable elec 
trodes, of contact-boxes, preferably of copper, 
located one at either end of an electric furnace, 
and through which the electrodes pass, filling 
for the boxes, preferably of copper, and pref 
erably of a globular formation, arranged 
around the respective electrodes and in con 
tact there with, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two Witnesses. 
ALFRED. H. COWLES. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT E. LYNCH, 
CHAS. H. DORER. 
1.5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335158.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 335,158, 
E, THOMSON, 
INCANDESCENT ELECTRIC LAMP, 
Patented Feb. 2, 1886. 
7%izzesses; 22 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-lthographer, Washington, O. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ELIHU THOMSON, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
THOMSON-HOUSTON ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASS. 
INCAN DESCENT ELECTRIC LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 335,158, dated February 2, 1886. 
Application filed January 2, 1883. Serial No. 80,640. No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all whon, it may concern: . 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of New 
Britain, in the county of Hartford and State 
5 of Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Electric Lamps, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to sealed electric lamps, 
and more especially to that type in which an 
incandescent strip or rod is used as the source 
of light. 
The object of my invention is to avoid as 
far as possible the liability of leakage at the 
point where the conducting wires or rods pass 
through the glass casing, and to provide a 
means whereby the continuity of the general 
circuit may be preserved when the lamp is 
removed from its socket, or when the carbon 
breaks, so that an incandescent lamp may be 
used in series with other incandescent lamps 
or with arc-lamps. 
My invention consists of certain novel 
switching appliances, to be hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
My invention consists, further, of certain 
novel constructions and devices that will be 
described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
vertical central section of the complete lamp. 
In Fig. 1, A is the lamp - globe of glass. 
From the neck or other portion of Said globe 
is hung the metallic conducting - frame F, 
which serves to support the incandescent car 
35 bon B or other material and to convey the 
electric current to or from the same. Said 
frame is preferably stainped out of sheet-steel, 
and its surface is enameled or coated with 
glass or porcelain, or any other material that 
will not be affected by the gases or liquids con 
tained in or generated in the lamp, so as to 
protect the metal from the action of said gases. 
The upper end of the frame FF is brazed or 
otherwise connected to wires W. W., of iron, 
15 platinum, or other suitable material, which 
pass outward through the glass envelope, be 
ing suitably sealed at their point of exit, and 
upon the exterior of said globe are connected 
with a metallic ring, plate, or other suitable 
5o terminal, R., by means of which separable con 
nection is made with one of the wires supply 
ling current to the lamp. The wires or sup 
Beit known that I, ELIHU THOMSON, a citi- ports W are upon the interior of the lamp 
Suitably enameled or coated, in the same man 
ner as the frame F. At the lower end of 55 
frame F is a suitable support or electrode, G, 
for the carbon stick or pencil B. Said elec 
trode is by preference made of a small block 
of very dense graphite electrically connected 
With the steel frame F by plating or otherwise. 6o 
Upon the frame F, and above the carbon, is a 
movable yoke or cross-head, Y, of some insul 
lating material-such as glass or porcelain 
which carries a piece, H., of some conducting 
material, terminating in an electrode or sup 
port, G', similar to G, and in electric con 
nection with one of the outside conductors by 
a spring, S, or by other suitable means. The 
opposed faces of G and G' have small cavities 
formed in them for the reception of the ends 
of the rod B, of carbon or other suitable ma 
terial, which latter is held in place by the 
spring S. The latter is suitably connected 
with the entering conductor V, to be presently 
described. 
The entering conductor W is an elongated 
cone, preferably of steel or iron, inserted into 
the inwardly-turned conical end of the lamp 
globe. At its smailer extremity it is sealed 
into the glass, while above it is surrounded 
with a semi-solid or nearly solid amalgam, 
(indicated at P,) which is contained in the in 
wardly-turned conical end, and above which 
is a layer of Wax or paraffine, M, as shown in 
Fig. 2. The rod or conductor V is made thick 
and tapering to its smallest section, where it 
is inserted through the glass, this construction 
being adopted in order to make the joint as 
small as possible, but at the same time to give 
strength and conductivity to the major por 
tion of the rod. In order to produce a tight 
and close joint, I propose to employ an amal 
gam that will adhere closely to both the glass 
and the metal of the conductor, and for this 
purpose use an amalgam containing Sodium or 
potassium, or even lead, which amalgam is 
placed around the conductor in a semi-solid 
or nearly solid mass. The conductor may be 
of iron or of other materials to which the 
amalgam will adhere as well as to the glass. 
The layer of paraffine or hard wax serves to 
hold the amalgam in place. 
3o Fig. 2 is a detail of construction. 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
335,158 
O 
- 
Formed upon or connected with the frame 
F are conducting-stops e e for the piece or 
holder H. Should the rod B break, the holder 
H is brought by the spring S or by gravity 
into contact with the projections e e, so as to 
preserve the continuity of the circuit, as will 
be understood by an inspection of Fig. 1. 
The lamp is held in place by spring-clips C 
C-two or more-attached to a body of insu 
lating material, E, and resting in contact with 
the ring R, before referred to, while the con 
ductor W makes contact with a yielding stop 
or plug, D, forced downward by a spring 
above it, and electrically connected with the 
entering wire a from the circuit upon which 
the lamp is placed, spring-clips C C being in 
connection with the other wire, b, of the cir 
cuit. 
When the lamp is removed from the clips C 
C, the stop or plug D acts as a circuit-closer 
to connect a and b, and for this purpose is air 
ranged to come into contact with the springs 
m m, or other suitable contacts connected with 
a spring or springs, CC, so that the circuit is 
maintained intact. An outer shade or cover, 
K, suitably supported, covers all the metal 
portions of the lamp and holders that are oth 
erwise exposed. 
The current enters, say, at a, passes to D, 
to V, to S, to H, through B, rendering it in 
candescent, to G, to FF, and out at W. W. R. 
to C C, and to wire b. The lamp A is ex 
hausted of air while at a high temperature 
and hermetically sealed. The source of light 
is the outer surface of Brendered very highly 
incandescent. 
I propose to construct the carbon B so that 
its exterior shall be of greater density or hard 
ness, and therefore a better conductor, than its 
interior, thus confining the greater part of the 
electric flow to the exterior, and preventing 
the vaporization and disintegration of the in 
terior, which would otherwise ensue if the rod 
were uniforn, owing to the fact that theinterior 
cannot radiate as freely as the outside of the 
rod. By thus constructing the incandescing 
rod so that its exterior shall be of hard good 
conducting carbon, the internal structure, be 
ing less heated than it otherwise would be, 
helps to retain the form, even at very high tem 
peratures, of the exterior-such that a rod or 
filament as ordinarily used would but for a 
short period Sustain. 
The rod B may be made by taking a rod of 
rather poorly-conducting carbon, dipping the 
latter momentarily in sugar, sirup, tar, or 
other carbonaceous matter and baking in close 
vessels, repeating the operation until the de 
sired hardness or conductivity of skin is ob 
tained; or a hard thin tube of carbon of good 
conducting power may be filled with a more 
spongy carbon with cementing sirup or tar, 
and afterward carbonizing the whole in close 
vessels. 
It is essential that pure carbon, and carbon 
only, exist in the rod B, and that such carbon 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
be prepared of the qualities herein mentioned. 
at a very high temperature, out of contact with 
air, and finally located in a good vacuum; or 
it may be heated in pure dry hydrogen and 7o 
inserted in the lamp-globe, said globe having 
been previously filled with hydrogen, so as to 
drive out the air. A good exhaustion of said 
globe is then obtained, the lamp sealed, and 
the final traces of hydrogen removed by 
small fragments L of a dry substance having an 
affinity for hydrogen at moderate elevation of 
temperature. For example, fused sodium 
manganate or chromate, or barrine dioxide, 
lead dioxide, or silver oxide may be used in 8o 
presence of sodium oxide, all dry and pure. 
The substance used should absorb water, va 
por, and hydrogen below a red heat. By these 
means every trace of oxygen will be excluded 
or removed from the interior of the lamp- 85 
globe. 
I make no claim herein to the above method 
of preparing the vacuum for the incandescing 
body, but reserve the same for a separate pat 
ent; nor do I make any claim herein to the go 
sealing compound described, as such will 
form the subject of a separate application for 
patent. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, with the metallie sup- 95 
porting-frame for the incandescing conductor, 
of the block G, of hard graphite, resting di 
rectly in or on said frame, and electrically 
united there with by plating, said block itself 
forming a holder for the end of the incandes- Ico 
cing conductor. 
2. The combination, with the reciprocating 
holder H, bearing against the end of the car 
bon pencil, for making electrical connection 
to said pencil, of a spring forcing said holder 
against the carbon pencil and a contact in the 
path of the holder, as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
3. The combination of a holder, H, bearing 
directly on the end of the carbon pencil, a 
guide-frame therefor supporting the pencil 
at its lower end, a spring, S, above the hold 
er, and a contact in the path of the holder H, 
as and for the purpose described. 
4. The combination of frame F, holder G, 
rod B, holder H, and contact e, as and for the 
purpose described. 
5. The combination, with the inverted coni 
cal neck for the globe, of the conical entering 
conductor V. 
6. The combination of the incandescent 
lamp having projecting conductor, a spring 
actuated and reciprocating contact in the bot 
tom of the lamp-socket, and a spring arranged 
in the path of said contact and connected to 
one of the circuit-wires, all as set forth, so 
that the act of inserting the lamp into its 
socket will actuate the contact and break the 
connection between said contact and the 
Spring. 
7. The combination of the incandescent 
J lamp having spring-socket, the reciprocating 
II5 
I 25 
IO 
335,158 
3 
contact-block D, conductor V, and springs 
in, arranged in the path of the block D and 
connected to one of the circuit-wires. 
8. The combination of insulating-block E, 
5 plug D, spring-clips C, and lamp provided 
with a conducting-ring forming one terminal, 
and a conductor, W, projecting from the lamp 
proper, forming the other terminal and adapt 
ed to make contact with plug D. 
9. The combination, with the lamp, of 
Springs C, contact-springs in, and Spring-actu 
ated plug D. 
10. The combination, with the globe A, of 
the frame F, lower holder, G, supported by 
I5 said frame, supporting-wires W, yoke Y, hold 
Io 
er H, spring S, and entering conductor con 
nected thereWith. 
11. The combination, with the frame F, of 
the electrode or holder G, of any suitable ma 
terial, the longitudinally-reciprocating sup- 20 
port H, carried by the frame, and the incan 
descing-rod B. 
Signed at New Britain, in the county of 
Hartford and State of Connecticut, this 28th 
day of December, A. D. 1882. 
ELIHU THOMSON. 
Witnesses: 
E. WILBUR RICE, 
W. O. WAKEFIELD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335258.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. WICTOR 
LOGCING MOTOR, 
No. 335,258. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1886. 
w2 -- -an. 
1.t 
is 
kSX 
e 
... . . . . . 
WITNESSES 
Z2/zza2z/ 
1 
- - - 
r 
S. 
s 
INVENTOR 
A M/0, ... Z22cza7 
(262 Attorney S 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER MOSES VICTOR, OF MARINETTE, WISCONSIN. 
LOGGING - MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent To. 335,258, dated February 2, 1886. 
Application filed June 27, 1885. Serial No. 170,025. (No model.) 
To ali, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER M. WICTOR, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mari 
nette, in the county of Marinette and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Logging - Motors, of which 
the following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
logging motors; and it consists in the peculiar 
construction and combination of devices, that 
will be more fully set forth hereinafter, and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a motor embodying my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a bottom plan view of the 
Same. Fig. 3 is a detailed view. 
A represents the frame of my motor, which 
consists, essentially, of the longitudinal side 
beams or girders, B, and the transverse tie 
beams C. This frame is supported upon 
trucks D and E, which trucks are provided 
with runners F. The front truck, D, is pivoted 
below the frame; but the rear truck, E, is rigidly 
secured therete. 
F represents a boiler, preferably of the same 
type as a locomotive-boiler, and is secured to 
the frame, and is provided with a furnace, G, 
and a smoke-stack, H, and on the rear end of 
the frame is a cab, I. A pair of reversible 
reciprocating engines, K, are secured on the 
frame, One on each side thereof, and the pit 
men of these engines are connected to a crank 
shaft, L, that is journaled transversely in 
blocks bolted to the beams B, and extends 
under the boiler. On the projecting ends of 
the shaft are secured sprocket-wheels, M. 
N represents a transverse shaft that is jour 
nated in blocks O, secured to the under sides 
of the beams B, at the rear ends thereof, and 
on the ends of this shaft are secured sprocket 
wheels P. The runners of the rear truck are 
grooved on their under sides, as shown, and 
provided with transverse anti-friction rollers 
R. 
Endless sprocket-chains S connect the 
wheels MI and P, and pass under the grooved 
runners, and bear under the anti-friction roll 
ers therein. To these chains S are secured 
projecting pointed teeth T. 
To the pivotal shaft of the front truck, D, is 
secured a wheel, U. A vertical shaft, V, is 
journaled in the rear end of the frame, and is 
provided at its upper end with a steering 
wheel, W, and at its lower end with a chain 
wheel, X. An endless steering-chain, Y, coll 
nects the wheels U and X. The shaft V is 
also provided with a notched wheel, Z, with 
which engages a spring-pawl, A, that is adapt 
ed to be removed out of engagement With the 
wheel by the foot of the engineer or the per 
son steering the motor. 
This invention is particularly adapted for 
use in drawing sleds loaded with logs through 
the woods to the river down which the logs 
are to be floated; but it is adapted for other 
uses as Well. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
When the engines are driven ahead, the chains 
S are moved rearwardly under the rear run 
ners, and the teeth with which said chains are 
provided engage with the snow or ice and in 
pel the motor forward, as will be very readily 
understood. A reverse movement of the en 
gines reverses the motor. 
By providing the rear runners with the 
grooves to receive the chains, the latter are 
prevented from slipping laterally from the 
runners, and by means of the anti-friction roll 
ers, previously fully described, the chains are 
permitted to work freely under the grooved 
sides of the runners. 
I do not desire to limit myself to the precise 
construction and arrangement of devices here 
in before set forth, as it is evident that many 
modifications may be made therein Without 
departing from the spirit of my invention. 
Having thus described Iny invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination, with the grooved run 
ners, of the endless traction-chains passing 
under said runners and means for driving the 
chains, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the sled or truck 
having the runners, of the endless traction 
chains having the projecting teeth engaging 
with the snow or ice and means for moving 
the traction-chains, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the grooved run 
ners having the anti-friction rollers, of the end 
less traction-chains passing under said runners 
and bearing on the rollers and means for driv 
ing the chains, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the frame, the en 
gines, the trucks, and the steering devices for 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
So 
95 
IOO 
h 
2 
335,258 
One of the trucks with the shaftL, connected to 
the engines and having the sprocket-wheels M, my own I have hereto affixed my signature in Io 
the shaft N, having the sprocket-wheels P, and presence of two witnesses. 
the endless traction-chains having the project 
5 ing teeth, said chains connecting the sprocket- 
Wheels MandP and passing under the grooved 
runners of one of the trucks, substantially as 
described. 
. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
WALTER MOSES VICTOR. 
Witnesses: 
E. C. LANE, 
JAMES H. MACNAUGHTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335358.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 335,358. 
 
 
 
 
W. S. ISHAM. 
ROCK, DRILLING MACHINE, 
Patented Feb. 2, 1886. 
 
Sii)f 
t a 
so, 
WITNESSES: 
V 
%226C 
16sve 
Eron. 
2%afela. Prud 
BY cluw 6 
uys, 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARDS. ISHAM, OF BURLINGTON, VERMONT. 
ROCK-D RING MACH NE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 335,358, dated February 2, 1886, 
Application filed May 18, 1885, Serial No. 105,926, 
(No model.) 
IS 
25 
O 
To all whon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLARDS. ISHAM, of 
Burlington, Chittenden county, Vermont, have 
invented a new and Improved Rock-Drill, of 
S which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in that class of drills 
known as 'percussion' drills. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
With a frame, of a reciprocating block, a rod 
to which the bit is fastened, a wedge in the 
block, and a cam for pressing the wedge 
against the rod. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
Which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both figures. 
Figure 1 is a face or front view of the work 
ing parts of my improved drill, and Fig. 2 is a 
detail view. 
The longitudinal frame A is provided with 
the trunnions B, for supporting it on the tripod. 
A sliding grooved block, C, is arranged between 
and guided by the side pieces of the frame, 
and contains a wedge, D, which is movable in 
the said block. The block C is connected by 
a rod, E, with a crank, F, on a shaft, G, in the 
frame, which crank-shaft can be revolved by 
hand or power. A cam, H, pivoted in the 
block C, rests against the wedge D and pro 
jects over one side bar, on which bar a trip 
ping-piece, J, is held adjustably, the said trip 
ping piece being held on the lower end of a 
screw-rod journaled in the frame, and hav 
ing a hand-wheel, K, Onits upper end. Apin, 
I, is held in an apertured lug, MI, on the 
frame A, and is pressed upward by a spring, 
N, surrounding it. The bit is held on the 
lower end of a shaft or rod, O, passed freely 
through the top of the frame and through a 
ratchet-wheel, P, on the cross-piece of the 
frame, which ratchet-wheel is made in two 
parts and has a pin or key, which works in a 
spiral groove, O', in the rod O. A dog, Q, 
engages with the ratchet-wheel. A latch, R, 
is pivoted on the block C, and serves to hold 
the rod in the groove of the block. 
The operation is as follows: The shaft. G is 
revolved and the block C is moved downward, 
and when it arrives at the bottom of the frame 
the cam Hstrikes the pin I, and the cam is 
caused to revolve, and, being in contact with 
the wedge D, forces the same downward and 
forward, whereby the wedge is locked on the 
rod O, and thereby the rod O is raised by the 
upward movement of the block C. When the 
block C has been raised as high as possible, or 
as high as desired, the cam H. strikes the trip 
ping-piece J, whereby the can is revolved and 
the wedge is moved from the rod O, to release 
the same, and thus the said rod Ois permitted 
to drop under the action of the weight on the 
Same. The tripping-piece J can be adjusted 
higher or lower by means of the rod J, to 
cause the cam to release the rod O Sooner or 
later, and thus the stroke can be adjusted. 
When the rod O moves upward, the ratchet 
wheel P is turned with it, but when the rod O 
descends the dog Q locks it, and the rod O is 
revolved by the action of the pin on the 
ratchet-wheel, working in the groove in the 
rod O. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a drill, which is to be used for drilling 
rocks or any other material that can be drilled, 
the combination, with a frame, A, to which 
the parts hereinafter to be mentioned are 
held, of the block C, which is mounted to 
slide in the above-mentioned frame A, the 
shaft O, mounted to slide in the direction 
of its length and to turn on its longitudi 
nal axis in the above-mentioned frame A, 
the wedge D in the block C, the cam H., 
which is pivoted in the above-mentioned block 
C, and of projections on the frame A, on which 
projections the cam can strike, Substantially 
as herein shown and described. 
2. In a drill for drilling rock or other ma 
terial that can be drilled, the combination, 
with the frame A, of a block, C, mounted to 
slide in said frame, the rod O, mounted in said 
frame to slide in the direction of its length 
and to turn on its longitudinal axis, the wedge 
D in the above-mentioned sliding blockC, the 
rod E, connected with said wedge D, the crank 
shaft G, journaled in the frame A and con 
nected with that end of the rod E opposite the 
one that is connected to the wedge D, the cam 
H, pivoted on the sliding block, the pin IL, held 
on the frame A in such a manner that it can 
be struck by the cam, and of the tripping 
piece J, held adjustably on the above-men 
35 
45 
50 
SS 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
335,358 
end of the screw-rod I, and is used for turning 20 
5 with the frame A, of the block C, mounted to 
tioned frame A, substantially as herein shown : and the hand-wheel K, which is held on one 
and described. 
3. In a drill for drilling rock or other ma- the same, substantially as herein shown and 
terial that can be drilled, the combination, described. 
4. The combination, with the frame A, of 
slide in said frame A, the rod O, mounted in the grooved block C, mounted to reciprocate 
the frame A, to slide in the direction of its in the same, the rod O, mounted in the frame 25 
length and turn on its longitudinal axis, the A, to slide in the direction of its length and to 
wedge D in the block C, the rod E, connected revolve on its central longitudinal axis, and 
Io with the wedge D, the crank-shaft G, journaled the latch R, secured to the block C and pro 
in the above-mentioned frame A and connected jecting over the rod O, to hold it in the groove 
with that end of the rod E opposite the one of the said block, substantially as herein 3o 
with which the wedge D is connected, the cam shown and described. 
H, pivoted on the sliding block, the pin L, held 
I5 on the frame A in such a manner that it can 
be struck by the wedge, the tripping-piece J 
on the frame A, the screw-rod I, mounted to 
turn on its longitudinal axis on the frame A, 
WLLARD S. ISHAM. 
m 
Witnesses: - 
GEO. B. ISHAM, 
F. W. WRIGHT, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335458.txt	(No Model.) 
J. KELLOW. 
RAILWAY JOINT, 
No. 335,458. 
Z 267: 
- /. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1886. 
ISHII 
e 
f e 
S 
E2 
SS 2S 
asS. 
 
 
ele. 
 
4. 
N 
%a 32 
 
 
 
 
 
 
VITWESSES 
f 
A A 
727. 2 
1 wrewTOR 
Moseaa AiezAoze, 
AZS Attorneys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH KELLOW, OF PEN ARGYL, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RALWAY-JONT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 335,458, dated February 2, 1886. 
Application filed August 10, 1885. 
Serial No. 174,011. (No ode.) 
5 
O 
2 5 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH KELLOW, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Pen Ar. 
gyl, in the county of Northampton and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Railway-Joints, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
- ing had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in railway joints; and the novelty consists in 
the construction, combination, arrangement, 
and adaptation of the various parts for service, 
substantially as hereinafter fully set forth, and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. . 
My invention has, primarily, for its object 
to reduce and cheapen the cost of an effective 
rail joint, and to combine simplicity, strength, 
and durability of construction and efficiency 
of operation; to permit of the expansion and 
contraction of the rails during hot and cold 
weather; to provide a bearing for the car 
wheels at the joints at all seasons of the year 
in hot weather, when the rails are expanded, 
and in cold weather, when they are contracted 
and to provide a firm and secure connection 
between the rails and fish-plates. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a railway-joint embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is an elevation taken from 
side of the device. Fig. 3 is a cross-section on 
the line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a detail view 
of one of the fish-plates. 
Fig. 5 is a detail 
of one of the securing-nuts, and Fig. 6 is a 
view of the fish-plate cross-bolt. Fig. 7 is a 
section on line y if of Fig. 2. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like 
letters of reference indicate like parts in all 
the figures, A A' designate the rails, which 
are of the ordinary construction at present in 
use, and at the point where their ends meet 
they are cut away in an oblique line, or bev 
eled, as at b, for a purpose presently described, 
said rails having an elongated slot, b b, cut 
through their webs for the passage of the se 
curing-bolts B B. 
CC designate the fish-plates, arranged one 
on each side of the rail, and both constructed 
substantially alike. Each fish-plate comprises 
a vertical plate or portion, c, adapted to fit 
between the head and foot of the rail, against 
the face of the web, and over the joint or line 
where the two rails meet, as is obvious. At 
or near its middle, and on each side of the 
line where the two rails meet, said vertical 
portion is provided with an aperture or open 
ing, c', for the passage of the shank of the bolt 
B, said aperture c registering with the open 
ing or slot b' in the rail. The horizontal por. 
tion of the fish-plate is made tapering or 
wedge-shaped from a point near its outer edge 
to the point where it joins the vertical por 
tion of the fish-plate, as at did, the latter por 
tion of said plate being provided with plane 
straight faces, as shown. From the outer edge 
of the horizontal portion of the plate to the 
point where the wedge-shape portion d d" 
thereof begins Said plate is provided with 
nearly a straight face, which lies on the plane 
of the bottom edge or surface of the foot of the 
rail and against the upper surface of the sleep 
er, to which it is secured by means of spikes 
driven through Openings or notches c' c', formed 
at the Outer edge of the horizontal portion of 
the fish-plate, near the ends thereof, as clearly 
shown. 
The heads b of the bolts B B are enlarged, 
as at l', and when in position the enlarged 
heads fit or bear against the upper surface of 
the horizontal portion of the fish-plate, and 
are thus prevented from turning. The bolts 
are held in place by the nuts D D, which are 
provided with a squared portion, e, over which 
a wrench or other implement fits to tighten 
the same, and a circular or disk-shaped por. 
tion or ring, e, having its periphery notched 
or Serrated, as at e, the squared and circular 
portions e e' being made in one piece and 
having a screw-threaded aperture or opening 
formed therein, which fits over the threaded 
end of the bolt B and secures the same in po 
sition. 
E designates a bar, preferably of metal, 
having its upper side, near the ends, notched 
or serrated, as at f, and adapted to engage the 
serrated disk-shaped portion of the nuts D, to 
lock them in place. The bar E is arranged 
On the upper face of the fish-plate at the angle 
formed by the vertical and horizontal por 
tions thereof, and is of a length a little great 
er than the distance between the two bolts 
and the nuts, the Serrated or notched ends 
thereof being arranged beneath the nuts D, 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
w 
335,458 
as clearly shown. The bar is held in position 
by means of a plate, F, Wedge - shaped, as 
shown, and having its inner end bearing on 
said bar and its under side resting on the fish 
plate. A similar plate, F, is arranged on the 
opposite side of the rail and resting on the 
fish-plate thereof. Each plate E E is secured 
in position by means of a bolt, G, passing 
through said plates and the fish-plates, and a 
cross bar or plate, I, the said plate I extend 
ing transversely across beneath the rails and 
their fish-plates, from side to side of the lat 
ter. The heads of the bolts G bear against 
the under or lower face of the bar I, while the 
upper ends thereof receive nuts J, which are 
similar in construction to the nuts D D-that 
is to Say, it has a Squared portion, j, and 
a disk-shaped Serrated portion, i'. 
Each 
of the plates FF carries a pawl, f, prefera 
bly made of spring metal and secured in a 
notch formed in one end thereof and adapted 
to engage one of the serrations in the nut J, to 
prevent the same from turning and becoming 
displaced. If desired, the pawl may be piv 
oted to the plate and have a spring to bear 
against the same to hold it in engagement with 
the nut J, as is obvious. 
The function of the cross-plate I, the secur 
ing-bolts G, and the nuts J and pawls f' is to 
secure the angular fish - plates to the rails, 
while permitting the expansion and contrac 
tion thereof and connecting them, said fish 
plates being spiked to the sleeper or ties and 
bolted to the rails to hold them together by 
the through-bolts B. 
From the foregoing it will be observed that 
the rails are free to expand and contract with 
out danger of breakage to the various parts, 
and that the beveled ends of the rails always 
provide a bearing for the wheels of the cars, 
the inner beveled end or side of one of the 
same being in alignment with the outer beveled 
side of its fellow rail at the greatest contrac 
tion of the rails which takes place in cold 
weather, and thus provides the bearing for the 
wheels, leaving no open space between the 
rails, as is common with rails having Squared 
ends. 
The construction of the several parts is ex 
extremely simple, thus Securing a great re 
duction in the cost of maintaining railroads, 
and providing a rail joint which is strong and 
durable and efficient in operation. 
Other means than that shown for holding 
the locking-bar E in place can be provided 
without departing from the principle or sac 
rificing the advantages of my invention. A 
washer may be provided, or one end of the bar 
E may be upturned, as at e, to bear against 
the nut and prevent the same and the bar 
from moving. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
I am aware that heretofore it has been pro 
posed to provide a railway-rail joint with two 
beveled meeting ends, to provide a continuous 
bearing-surface for the wheels of a car, and 
hence I do not claim such a construction, 
broadly; but in my improved rail joint I pro 
vide for the expansion and contraction of the 
rails, and also hold the locking-nuts from dis 
placement by the same devices. 
I am aware that it is not new to provide the 
bolts of a nut-lock mechanism with serrated 
nuts and a bar to engage said nuts and having 
bent spring-arms to engage the serrations 
thereof; but in this device no means is pro 
vided for the expansion and contraction of 
the rails. 
r 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the rails having 
their meeting edges beveled or cut away in an 
oblique line and the webs slotted longitudi 
nally, of angular fish-plates, through-bolts hav 
ing serrated nuts, a bar, E, having its ends 
serrated to engage the nuts, clamping-plates 
bearing on the fish-plates and the bar E, and 
securing-bolts G, to clamp said plates to the 
fish-plates, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the longitudinally 
slotted rails having their meeting ends beveled 
in an oblique line, angular fish-plates fitted 
over said rails and bearing against the foot and 
web thereof, through-bolts securing said rails 
and fish-plates together and having serrated 
nuts, a bar, E, having its ends Serrated and 
arranged below the nuts to engage the serra 
tions thereof, a plate or bar, I, clamping-bolts 
FF, bearing on the fish-plates and bar E, and 
carrying pawls.f, securing-bolts G, to clamp 
the plate I, the fish-plates, and clamping-plates 
together, and serrated nuts J, fitted on the 
bolts G and adapted to engage the pawls f", 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the longitudinally 
slotted rails having their meeting ends beveled 
in an oblique line, angular fish-plates bearing 
against the web and foot of the rails and se 
cured to the ties at their outer ends, through 
bolts passing through the rails and the upper 
angle of the fish-plates and having serrated 
nuts, and a bar, E, having its ends Serrated 
and arranged on one of the fish-plates beneath 
the serrated nuts to engage the latter, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH. KELLOW. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES J. COPE, 
W. C. LOOS, 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335559.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. BOWERS. 
SEDIMENT RECEIVER FOR STEAM BOILERS, 
No. 335,559, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1886. 
 
Witnesses. 
Inventor. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CILE W. BOWERS, OF FORT ATKINSON, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO ELI P. 
MAY, OF JEFFERSON COUNTY, WISCONSIN. 
SED MENT RECEIVER FOR STEAM - B O LERS 
22iticii. ICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 335,559, dated February 9, 1886. 
Application filed August 28, 1885, Serial No. 175,589. (No model.) 
55 
To att, Luhon, it nay concern: 
in Fig. 3, are found in the construction of 
Be it known that I, CILE W. BOWERS, of the some boilers; but when there are none sup 
city of Fort Atkinson, Jefferson county, in the ports for the sediment-pan must be provided, 
State of Wisconsin, a citizen of the United | So as to leave a space between the boiler and 
5 States, have invented an Improvement in the bottom of the pan directly above the fur 
Sediment-Receivers to be used in Steam-Boil- nace. Now, it will be observed that the wa 
ers, of which the following is a specification. ter and sediment which fill the space beneath 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 the pan, in accordance with the laws of heat, 
represents a receiver or deposit-pan, A and A', are forced outward each way from the center of 
Io made in two sections. Fig. 2 shows an end the space, curving upward, and finally inward, 
section of a horizontal cylindrical steam-boiler until the two currents meet above the pan, 
provided with a hand-hole, C, in which is where there is less agitation?. The sediment 
shown the front end of the Sediment-pan A Settles into the pan, as described by arrows, Fig. 
and A', as when being introduced into the 3. The two sections of this pan may be passed 
15 boiler through the hand-hole C. Fig. 3 is an separately into the boiler through the hand 
end section of the steam-boiler, broken away hole C, after which they can be coupled to 
to show the position of the pan A and A rest-gether by bolte and placed in position, as in 
ing upon the rivet-heads c inside of the boiler. Fig. 3. 
For a small boiler one section is sufficient. 
To remove the pan with the sediment from 
2d This invention relates to certain novel im- the boiler, first the two sections must be de 
provements by which the sediment, which has tached by removing the bolt at e. Then each 
heretofore settled upon the lowest sheet of the section is removed from the boiler separately. 
boiler, (and that to its great damage,) is gath- In doing this the side or partition B of sec 
ered and deposited in a receiver provided for |tion A divides the sediment between the two 
25 that purpose, the manner of doing which I now sections, and thereby prevents the liability to 
proceed to describe, so that others skilled in Escatter or spill the sediment while removing 
the art may understand the same. 
! them. The lower corner of each section is 
In the drawings, Fig. 1 represents the sedi- rounded, to favor the introduction of the pan 
ment-pan complete, constructed in two sec- through the hand hole. 
When desired, a single pan may be used. 
3o tions, which are simply two boxes formed of 
The height and width of the pan is deter 
sheet metal, the box A having two sides, B 
and B, and ends b and a, the box A with mined by the size of the hand-hole C, through 
ends band a, with one side, B', but minus which it must pass. 
side C at dotted line. The right side, B, of 
I do not claim to be the first to make and 
35 box A rests upon the left inside, C, of box or use sediment-receivers in steam-boilers, for 
section A', and is fitted to slide freely into it, such were used prior to my invention; but 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
like a drawer into its case, and thereby the 
width of the pan is reduced, to allow it to pass sire to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
freely through the hand-hole into the boiler, States, is 
In combination with a steam - boiler sub 
duced into the boiler, the Section A is drawn stantially as described, a sediment-pan pro 
out of section A to the position shown in Figs. vided with a movable partition, B, for divid 
1 and 3. A bolt is then placed in the hole e ing the sediment to avoid spilling the same 
through the ends at and a', which fastens the when more than one section is used, substan 
flexible at that point, so that the two sections 
may adjust themselves to either a level or 
curved boiler-bottom, as shown in Figs. 1. 
and 3. 
so The rivet-heads c, upon which the pan rests 
45 two scies together Ely Yg 
4o as shown in Fig. 2. After thus being intro- 
Witnesses: 
C. A. CASWELL, 
THOMAS CRANE. 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
CILE W. BOWERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335659.txt	(No Model.) 
C. J. WAN DEPOELE, 
REGULATOR FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES 
No. 335,659, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1886, 
 
sy 
is 
477&sz. 
f 16aleazea 
Zee Zac ZZ Z22 : 
6%az-Zes 7Aze Zazeeze 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES J. VAN DEPOELE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
REGUATOR FOR DYNAMO - E L E CRC MACH NES. 
3.22c2FICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 335,659, dated February 9, 1886. 
Application filed November 8, 1882. Serial No. 76,261. (No model.) 
55 
6o 
mature S S, as usual in ordinary dynanos; 
thence the current passes from the top part 
of the armature down to the lower part, C, of 
the same through the collector and connect 
ing-wire C to the inner end of the coil M" and 
out at the outer end of said coil at I)", when 
it is connected to the binding-post N. This 
is the circuit in the main coils in the ina 
chine. 
To a 27 it foil, it 7ay concein. 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs J. WAN DE 
POELE, of Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Dynamo-Electric Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, which form a part of this 
Specificatio}}. 
The differential current runs as follows with 
The nature of this invention relates to cer 
relation to the main coils: The inner end, A., 
tain new and useful improvements in the con 
of the coil D is connected with the binding 
struction of dynamo - electric machines, by 
post P, which is in electrical contact with the 
which the electro-motive force of the machine 
main coil. The current thus flows from the 
is equalized or kept up to meet the different 
inside of the coil D to the outside terminal, b, 
requirements on the line-as, for instance, 
thereof, whence it passes by means of the con 
when the machine is adapted to run twenty 
nection b to the outside of the coil D' at c, 
lights in a circuit, and it is expedient, from 
and out at d, and then through a connection to 
any cause, to extinguish at a certain time a 
be hereinafter described. 
part of the lights, one after another, Without 
In Fig. 2 is shown a regulator or governor, 
warning to the central station. The device 
such as is described in Letters Patent granted 
works automatically without attention, and 
to me January 9, 1883, No. 270,352; hence a de 
the force necessary to run the lights will cor scription thereof is not deemed necessary here. 
respond to the number of such lights in actual 
Suffice it to say, P is a binding-post, to which 7 
a number of coils or passages, f, are connected 
Se. 
The invention consists in winding the main 
by their lower ends or terminals. . All the 
magnets of the machine differentially and in 
outer ends of these coils or passages f pro 
the combinations and construction of parts and 
trude on top of said coils f at 11, and all are 
their ope 
'ation, as more fully hereinafter de 
insulated from each other. 
scribed. 
H is a copper bar, (or other suitable metal,) 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
edged by a platinum Strip, h, running the 
through the axis of my improved dynamo. 
length of the contacts g. The bar H, when 
Fig. 2 shows the connection between the dy. 
not brought down by the magnet M', will be 
namo and the governor. Fig. 3 shows the 
forced upward by the spring S', and thereby 
connections between the dynamo, governor, 
break all communication with the contacts (1, 
and a number of lights in circuit. 
so that the amount of current passing will de 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
pend, first, on the tension of such currents, 
a part of this specification, AA represent the 
and, second, on the lumber of coils or pas 
iron cores of the magnets, one of which is 
sages f in or out of circuit. This is actuated 90 
placed on each side of the armature. 
by the magnet M upon the bar H. One of 
MM represent the main magnet-conductors, 
the terminals of all the said coils or passages 
and ID ID the differential magnet-conductors, 
f is connected in multiple arc to the binding 
both being wound in the usual way around 
post P, communicating with the differential 
the cores and insulated from each other, the 
circuit, and the free ends 9 thereof are acted 95 
main magnet-conductors being wound outside 
upon by the contact-bar H, as explained. 
the differential-magnet conductors, as shown. 
Having thus described the construction of 
my improved dynamo, I will now attempt to 
The outer end of the main conductor is con 
mected to the binding-post P, the current 
clearly indicate its operation. Let us suppose 
passes from the outer to the inner part of the 
that a dynamo is capable at its maximum force IOo 
coil or main conductor and through the con 
to ruin thirty lights. We connect the wire I 
necting-wire B to the top collector of the ar 
to the binding-post P and to the lamp-circuit 
SO 
IO 
2 
45 
335,659 
O 
25 
at H', and out of said circuit at G, and thence 
to the magnet M through post F and out at modus 
E, to the binding-postN of the dynamo. 
armature should now be revolving at the nor 
mal speed, and all the lamps will be found to 
be burning normally. The magnet M is not 
now powerful enough to draw in its core, be 
ing counteracted by the spring S', which lifts 
the bar Hout of communication with the con 
tacts g; hence there is no current passing 
through the coils for through the differential 
coils D and D. These differential coils, as 
Will be seen, are so connected as to magnetize 
the cores in opposition to the main coils MM'. 
The circuit of the differential coils outside of 
the machine will be understood at a glance by 
referring to the annexed drawings. The in 
ner end, a, is connected to the binding-post P 
of the machine, while the outer end, d, is con 
nected to the binding-postP of the regulator, 
and when the bar His drawn down upon the 
contacts g the current will flow through said 
bar to the post N' and back to the binding 
3. 
post N of the machine. Thus it will be seen 
that the differential current is connected be 
tween the main circuit of the machine at P 
and N. When the magnet M is sufficiently 
energized to draw down the bar H, and there 
by establish communication with the con 
tactSg, a portion of the current will at once 
flow through the coils ID ID' and oppose the 
action of the main coils M M', and this oppo 
sition will be strongest when all the contacts 
g are in communication with the bar FI. Thus 
all that is necessary in order to have a dynamo 
become automatic in its own regulation-to 
control its force according to the work re 
quired of it-is, first, to properly adjust the 
resistance of the coils DD with regard to the 
main current, and, second, to regulate the ten 
sion of the spring S in the regulator. Thus 
it will be seen that on cutting out one or more 
lamps the magnet M will be over excited and 
draw its core in deeper until the spring S and 
45 the attractive power of the magnet will again 
balance. At the same time the bar H will 
make communication with one or more con 
tacts g, and these will send a corresponding 
amount of current through the eoils DE), 
50 STS diminishing the power of the main coils 
On cutting out more lamps the mag 
met M will continue to operate with increased 
force upon the bar H, thus making more con 
tacts and diminishing more and more, as the 
55 case may be, the power of the main magnets. 
M. 
3C) 
35 
I do not desire to confine myself to the above 
operardi of regulating the flow of the 
The currents in the differential magnets-as, for 
instance, the main magnets may be wound 
with two wires running parallel with each 6o 
other, so that while the main current is pass 
ing through one of the wires a current may be 
made to pass in an opposite direction, thus 
weakening the magnetism of the field-cores, 
as may be required, without departing from 
the spirit of my invention. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a dynamo-electric machine, a separate 
helix supplementary to the main helix of the 
field-magnet, the separate helix being so wound 
and connected that the machine working nor 
mally will not be influenced thereby, but on 
the current becoming abnormally strong said 
supplementary helix will be brought into ac 
tion and tend to diminish the magnetism of 75 
the field-magnet, and automatically regulate 
the strength thereof to accommodate the out 
side work, substantially as set forth. . 
2. The combination, with the field-magnets 
of a dynamo-electric machine, of two series of 8o 
opposing helices, one series serving to excite 
the field-magnets and the other series serving 
as regulating-helices for the same, a branch 
circuit, including the regulating-helices, a va 
riable resistance, also included in the branch, 85 
and means for controlling the resistance in 
the branch, whereby the field-magnets may be 
regulated as required. 
3. In a dynamo-electric generator, a sepa 
rate helix supplementary to and wound differ. 9o, 
entially upon the cores of the field-magnet and 
included in a normally-open circuit, also in 
cluding variable-resistance coils having a mov 
able contact operated by the moving core of 
an electro-magnet located in the main circuit, 95 
to successively make or break contact with 
one or more of the coils of the regulator and 
to close or partially close the differential cir 
cuit by the action of the varying resistance of 
the main circuit operating upon the electro- ICO 
magnet and resistance-coils, and thereby de 
magnetizing to a greater or less extent the 
field-magnet and automatically regulating the 
electro-motive force of the machine, substan 
tially as set forth. 
HARLES J. WAN DEPOELE. 
Witnesses: 
THEo. P. BAILEY, 
AARON K. STILES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335759.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. KING, 
SUPPORTER FOR DITCHING MACHINES 
No. 335,759, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1886. 
 
 
WITNESSES 
 
g 
INVE/WTOR 
let's-nois. 
de uu e 
N. PETERS, Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. KING, OF MARION, OHIO. 
SUPPORTER FOR DITCHING-MACHINES. 
Sir ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 335,759, dated February 9, 1886. 
Application filed October 15, 1885. Serial No. 179,983. (No model.) 
It is intended that the excavator shall be 55 
- 
... To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. KING, of 
Marion, in the county of Marion and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Supports for Ditching-Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the Same. 
- 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
supports for ditching - machines. It often 
happens that the soil through which a ditch 
is to be cut is so soft that it will not support 
the wheels of a ditching-machine, and it also 
is often desirable to deepen or clear out old 
ditches in which the mud is very soft or the 
ditch partially filled with water, and the banks 
not firm enough to support a machine of the 
ordinary construction. 
The object of my present invention is to 
provide a support for any of the improved 
forms of ditching-machines which will admit 
of the machine being advantageously employed 
in deepening ditches partially filled with mud 
or water, or both, the banks of which are soft, 
and for cutting new ditches through soft or 
hard ground. 
With this end in view my invention consists 
in a suitable frame - work having a sled or 
runner bottom adapted to support a ditching 
machine. 
My invention further consists in certain 
features of construction and combinations of 
parts, as will be hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal vertical section through the 
support located in a ditch and having an ex 
cavator mounted thereon, and Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse Section of the same. 
A represents the outside covering of the 
frame - work, which may be of planking or 
metal provided with flaring sides, having a 
width suitable to admit it between the sides of 
the ditch, and so braced by cross-girders B, 
uprights C, and diagonal braces D, or other 
wise to suit different sized and proportioned 
ditchers that it will form a stable support for 
the excavator. 
The bottom of the frame-work 
- 
E may or may not be curved upwardly in 
front, and forms a sled or runner on which 
the support may be readily slid along in the 
soil or mud. 
operated from the end of a swinging crane, as 
shown, reaching out in front of the support, 
and that the support shall be drawn along by 
means of a purchase secured to an anchoring 
Set in advance. 
The frame-work A may be either covered 
without regard to having it water-tight, or it 
may be made water-tight, and hence serve to 
carry part of the weight when there is water 
in the ditch. 
The front edges of the covering of the sup 
port are preferably provided with cutters E, 
adapted to trim the edges of the ditch; but 
these are not necessarily attached. 
The deck of the frame-work is adapted to 
support any of the ordinary forms of ditching 
machines which can be employed to excavate 
in front of the support. 
The support is quite inexpensive, and it 
admits of the use of the best forms of excava 
tors in places where they have not heretofore 
been capable of use, and thus serves to satisfy 
a long felt need. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a hollow frame 
constructed substantially as described, and 
having flaring sides and a sled or runner bot 
tom, of an excavator mounted on said frame, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. A support for ditching - machines, con. 
sisting, essentially, of a frame-work provided 
with a sled or runner bottom and flaring sides 
adapted to fit within the ditch, and cutters se 
cured to the front edges, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
. 
GEORGE W. KING. 
Witnesses: 
J. E. DAVIDs, 
JENNIEMI. DAVIDS, 
70 
75 
9O 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335859.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 335,859. 
H. W.ALTHER 
LIFTING JACK. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1886. . 
 
 
 
 
 
SS SS 
N 
----- 
a- - 
ra w 
m 
------rear m 
Ot 
t------ 
--a 
-ura - 
ser-saw *"war--- 
A7 
s2 
- 2-4-4-( -cs 
SAte 1 INVENTOR: 
%24%, 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, Phot&-lithographer, Washingto., D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY WALTHER, OF CILINTON, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND 
ISAAC JOYNER, OF SAME PLACE. 
LIFTING JACK. 
& 
3: CSEC.?. iiii) folming part of Letters Patent No. 335,859, dated February 9, 1886. 
Application filed September 19, 18s5. Serial No. 177,564. (No model.) 
To all willon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY WALTHER, of 
Clinton, in the county of Vermilion and State 
of Indiana, have invented a new and Improved 
Lifting-Jack, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention pertains to improvementsin 
lifting-jacks; and it consists of the combina 
tions of parts, including their construction, 
substantially as heleinafter set forth, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved lifting-jack. Fig. 2 is a detail per 
spective view illustrating the construction of 
the pawl carried by the crank-handle, and 
also of the ratchet with which said pawl en 
gages. Fig. 3 is a Sectional view taken online 
a: a of Fig. 1, illustrating the construction of 
the lower end of the toothed rack; and Fig. 4 
is a sectional view taken on line if y of Fig. 1, 
illustrating the formation of the extending 
all S. 
The general construction of my improved 
lifting-jack will be readily understood from the 
illustration of the device given in Fig. 1, 
wherein A. lepresents the standard, which is 
vertically slotted, as shown at a. This stand 
ard projects upward from a base, B, the two 
parts being preferably made of malleable iron, 
and cast in one piece, a bottom or base board 
being Secured beneath the base B when neces 
sary to increase the stability of the standard. 
A shaft, C, is journaled in bearings formed in 
the top of the standard, and to this shaft there 
is Secured a pinion, D, which is so arranged 
and proportioned that its teeth project within 
the slot ( of the standard, as best shown in 
Fig. 1. 
A toothed rack, E, formed with a strength 
ening-flange, e, rides in the slot (, in a position 
such that its teeth engage with the pinion D, 
while the strengthening-flange projects out 
ward through the slot a, which slot, as shown 
in Fig. 3, is-shaped. 
The shaft C, upon which, as before stated, 
the pinion D is mounted, carries a ratchet, f, 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
while a pawl, f', is secured to the standard A, 
as shown. The crank-handle H is not fast 
upon the shaft C, but is formed With a large 
boss, g, which encircles the shaft, the crank 
arm being prevented from lateral displace 
ment by the nut, h, which engages with the 
threaded end of the shaft. 
Referring now to Fig. 2, it will be seen that 
the shaft Cisformed with a second set of ratch 
et-teeth, (shown at i i,) said teeth being en 
gaged by a pawl, j, which is centrally pivoted 
in the crank-handle H, its lower end being 
upheld by a spring, l, which, although shown 
as a bent band-spring, might be a spiral Spring, 
so that the catch-tooth of the pawl will be 
pressed hard down upon the ratchet-teeth i i. 
From this construction it will be seen that the 
crank may be freely revolved in the direction 
of the arrow, but that if turned in the other di 
rection the pawli will engage with the teeth i i 7O 
and rotate the shaft C. It will also be seen that 
such rotation of the shaft C will, through the 
medium of the pinion D, elevate the rack E, 
which will be held in the elevated position by 
the engagement of the pawlf with the teeth 
of the ratchet f. 
Two projecting arms, N N', are rigidly se 
cured to the top of the rack E, the arm N 
being considerably larger and heavier than the 
arm N'. Although these arms N N' might be 
simple round bars, I greatly prefer to make 
them in the form shown in Fig. 4-that is, with 
a rounded upper surface and a downwardly 
projecting strengthening rib or flange, p. The 
arms N N are cast with scoop-shaped sockets 
in n' at their ends, the purpose of which is 
to fit beneath the threaded end of the axle of a 
vehicle after the retaining-nut has been re 
moved. 
When one of the scoop-shaped sockets has 
been placed beneath the threaded end of an 
axle, as just described, and as shown in Fig. 1, 
the crank His rotated and the rack E elevated, 
thus raising the wheel carried by the axle free 
from the floor or ground, when, in order to get 
at the axle to grease it, the wheel is pulled for 
ward onto the arm Nor N', whereitis held dur 
ing the operation of greasing the axle, after 
which it is returned to its normal position. 
95 
75 
8 5 
go 
To lower the wheel to the ground, the crank IOO 
335,859 
ICY 
is moved slightly forward to loosen the pawl 
f, which is thrown back and the crank gradu 
ally turned until the wheel strikes the floor or 
ground again. 
In order to steady the rack E, and at the 
salne time lessen the friction caused by moving 
it in the slot a, Isecure two friction-rollers, O 
o, to its lower end, and one on each side of the 
ribe, and these rollers ride in the slot and bear 
against its sides as the rack is raised or low 
ered. 
The arms N N are made the one small and 
the other large, to adapt them for use on heavy 
and light wagons, as will readily be understood. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- 
1. The combination, with the toothed rack 
E, mounted in a standard, A, of a pinion, D, 
and crank-arm H, secured to the shaft of the 
- 
25 
pinion, said shaft carrying a ratchet, 
f, ar 
ranged to engage with a pawl, f', and said 
rack E carrying two arms, NN", formed with 
sockets in n', substantially as described, and 
for the purpose specified. 
2. In a lifting-jack, the combination of the 
following elements, viz: standard A, toothed 
rack E, arm N, formed with socket in, pinion 
D, shaft C, ratchets f 
and i and their pawls, 
and a crank-handle, H, substantially as de- 3o 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination, with the rack E and its 
standard, of the rollers o 0, arms NN", formed 
with scoop-shaped sockets in n', respectively, 
pinion D, shaft C, and crank-arm H, substan. 35 
tially as described. 
HENRY WALTHER. 
Witnesses: 
r 
PLATT Z. ANDERSON, 
RUFUS H. WASHIBUN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US335959.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. RATLIFF, 
SEED PLANTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 335,959. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1886. 
4%. 
 
 
WITWESSES 
e's far.) 
J. W. RATLIFF, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
SEED PLANTER, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
No. 335,959, 
zz2. 
A. 
g 
A. 
Z 
f 
A. 
77 
zz A 
7. 
6: 
y 
al 
7. 
ev 
n 
D - 
F 77 
X 
-R se - 
w 
s 
e 
WITWESSES 
7, 24, Cze-2-2-2-1-2C 
Jeeyoos.) . 
VEWTOR 
u? 
N/ 
96.9. Attorney 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. RATLIFF, OF LEWISVILLE, TEXAS. 
SEED PLAN TER. 
B SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 335,959, dated February 9, 886, 
Application filed September 4, 1885 Serial No. 16,192. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN W. RATLIFF, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lewis 
ville, in the county of Denton and State of 
Texas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Seed-Planters; and Idohere 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, which 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to seed-planters, the 
object being to provide the hopper of the same 
with regulating devices, whereby the seed may 
be planted in desired quantities and at de 
sired intervals. 
A further object of the invention is to in 
prove the details of construction of machines 
of this class, and to provide a planter which 
shall be simple in its construction and thor 
oughly effective in its operation, 
With these ends in view the invention con 
sists in the improved construction and combi 
nations of parts hereinafter fully described, 
and pointed out in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a seed-planter embodying my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical section 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a transverse section, 
and Fig. 4 is a section on the line acac of Fig. 3. 
Corresponding parts in the several figures 
are denoted by the same letters of reference. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
frame of the planter, which is composed of the 
parallel longitudinal side beams, a, connected 
at their front and rear ends by cross or tie 
beams b. Just in rear of the front cross or 
tie beam, b, is secured a beam, c, and secured 
to the beams at and c is a beam, d, which ex 
tends forwardly beyond the front of the frame. 
An opening, e, is made in the beam d, and fit 
ted in said opening is a standard, C, carrying 
a furrow-opener or plow, f, at its lower end, 
said standard being adapted to be adjusted in 
said opening and held in place by a set-screw, 
g. At the rear ends of the frames are pro 
vided coverers D, which extend downwardly 
from their point of attachment to the longi 
tudinal side beams. Extending upwardly from 
the beams a a are handles E, which are con 
nected and braced by a rod, h, and are sup 
ported in proper position by bars i. Upon 
the upper sides of the beams a, about midway 
- 
the ends of the same, are provided brackets F, 
which are provided with elongated vertical 
slots i. 
G represents the hopper, which is cylindric 
alin form, and has extending outwardly from 
its sides gudgeons or trunnions k, which have 
bearing in the slots of the brackets F, thus 
permitting the hopper to rise and fall to ac 
commodate itself to the condition of the ground. 
Hrepresents a circumferential flange, which 
projects from the hopper, and which may be 
provided with a metal tire, l, said flange pre 
venting the hopper from direct contact with 
the ground and forming a wheel or tread for 
said hopper. At desired intervals in the hop 
per G are provided openings m, and at suita 
ble points on the hopper between the openings 
in are provided openings in. 
J represents a slide, which consists of a cir 
cular band, having openings 0 to correspond 
to the openings an in the hopper. This slide 
is provided with finger-pieces K, by which it 
may be turned, and is guided and held in place 
by brackets L. The movement of the slide is 
limited by pins, or their equivalent, which 
are located in the brackets L, and which are 
adapted to fit in recesses p in the sides of the 
slide. 
: By the arrangement of openings and slide to 
cover the same, above described, the seed may 
be planted in drills by turning the slide so 
that its openings will register with the open 
ings m in the hopper, which are, as shown, ar 
ranged very close together. If it is desired to 
plant the seed in hills, the slide is turned in 
one direction, which covers the openings in and 
exposes the openings n, of which there are, 
say, four or five. 
When the seed is planted in drills, the pins, 
fitting the recesses p, are located at points mid 
way the ends of the recesses, and when planted 
in hills the slide is turned so that when the 
pins bear against one end of the recesses the 
openings in will be exposed. If the slide is 
turned so that the other ends of the recesses 
bear against the pins all the openings in the 
hopper will be closed, thus preventing the seed 
from being dropped. It will also be observed 
that the slides may be so regulated as to par 
tially close either the openings an or n, thus 
regulating the amount of seed dropped when 
planting in drills or hills. 
IO 
35 
SO 
55 
75 
90 
95 
335,959 
An opening, I, is made in oneside of the hop 
per, for the introduction of seed and closing said 
opening is a hinged door, J, which is provided 
with a spring-catch, r, having an opening 
5 which is adapted to be engaged by a pin, 8, 
projecting from the hopper. By this arrange 
ment the door to hopper may be automatically 
locked by simply closing the door. 
The planter before described is simple in-its 
Io construction, thoroughly effective in its oper 
ation, and strong and durable. Further, if de 
sired, the hopper might be removed, and the 
frame having the opener and covers used as a 
cultivator. 
Having thus described Iny invention, what 
I5 
I claim is 
A seed-planter comprising in its construc 
tion a supporting-frame, a rotatable hopper 
mounted and adapted to vertical movement 
in bearings of said frame, a circumferential 
flange on the hopper, said hopper having open 
ings of varying sizes, a slide having openings 
to correspond to those of the hopper, said 
slide having recesses and guided by brackets 
I, pins fitting said recesses, and the finger 
piece Kon the slide, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN W. RATLIFF. 
25 
Witnesses: 
C. A. McMEANs, 
N. W. RATLIFF. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336059.txt	(Model.) 
J. W. OWERMAN. 
WASHING MACHINE, 
No. 336,059, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
IIT III 14 
 
 
 
  
WITNESSES: 
%2 W 
- doseve - 
IN VENTOR: 
/eco 
BY lege 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. OVERMAN, OF FORT FETTERMAN, WYOMING TERRITORY. 
WASHING MACHINE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,059, dated February 9, 1886. 
Application filed April 11, 1885. Serial No. 161,977. (Model.) 
To all whom, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN W. OVERMAN, 
of Fort Fetterman, in the county of Albany 
and Territory of Wyoming, have invented a 
new and Improved Washing - Machine, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with a revolving tub secured on a spindle, of 
a ribbed fixed cylinder in the middle of the 
tub, and of a curved wash-board in the tub. 
The invention also consists in parts and de 
tails and combinations of the same, as Will be 
fully set forth hereinafter, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a cross-sectional elevation of my 
improved washing-machine. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the same, parts being broken and 
others in Section. 
A vertical shaft, A, is journaled in a cross 
piece, B, of a frame, C, Supported by legs, and 
in a bar secured to the bottom of the cross 
piece. To the head on the upper end of the 
shaft the bottom of a tub, D, is Secured, and 
the ends of a cross-frame, E, held on the shaft 
A, rest against the bottom of the tub. A 
vertical ribbed cylinder, F, is provided on its 
upper end with a disk, G, Secured to a verti 
cal rod, H, depending from the free end of a 
horizontal bar that is secured at its other end 
to the top of the upright K. The lower end 
of the cylinder has a recess, F, to receive a 
boss, D', on the center of the inner face of the 
tub-bottom. The cylinder and tub will thus 
be held in proper position relative to each 
other while the tub is being rotated. In the 
tub a curved or segmental wash-board, IL, is 
placed, which is formed of a series of slats, M, 
secured to two spring-Strips, N. A small cleat, 
M", is secured on the rear surface of the up 
per spring-strip, N, at each end, and the said 
cleats pass into grooves in lugs P on the inside 
of the tub. The said cleats hold the wash 
board in place. The spring-tension in the 
strips N presses the wash-board against the 
roller, and the pressure on the articles is the 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
same at all times. As the articles increase in 
size the spring wash-board is pressed back, as 
shown in dotted lines. The slats of the wash 
board stand vertically. The tub is provided 
with a series of handles, O, projecting from 
the outer surface. The clothes are placed in 
the tub, which is revolved by means of the 
handles, are rotated alternately in opposite di 
rections, the cylinder F remaining stationary 
and the tub turning with its spindle or shaft A. 
Large articles of clothing-sheets, &c-or 
any number of small articles-such as socks, 
stockings, handkerchiefs, napkins, &c.-can be 
washed easily and rapidly in my improved na 
chine. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a revolving tub, 
of a fixed ribbed cylinder in the tub, and of a 
curved wash-board in the tub, substantially 
as herein shown and described. 
2. The combination, with the revolving tub 
having a boss, D', on its bottom, of the fixed 
central ribbed cylinder having a recess in its 
lower end to receive the bars, and a curved 
wash-board adjacent to the vertical face of the 
fixed cylinder, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the frame C, of 
the spindle A, the cross-frame E, the tub D 
on the spindle, the fixed ribbed cylinder F in 
the tub, and a wash board held in the tub, 
Substaitially as herein shown and described. 
4. The combination, with the revolving tub 
D, of the fixed ribbed cylinder F in the same, 
the Spring strips N, and the slats M, secured 
to the same, substantially as herein shown and 
described. 
5. The combination, with a tub, of the 
springs N, the slats M, secured to the same, 
cleats M' on the ends of the upper spring, N, 
the lugs P, secured to the inside of the tub, 
and a vertically-ribbed cylinder in the mid 
dle of the tub, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
JOHN W, OWERMAN. 
Witnesses: 
JULIUS SCHAUs, 
WILTLIAM, WERNER, 
55 
75 
85 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336159.txt	(No Model.) 
R. M. REILLY & F. KING, 
m 
No. 336,159, 
v 
FAUCET. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1886. 
  
LazLSse 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
2. 
, 
N. . 
% 
  
2 
 
, : 
. 
. 
. 
WSW 
SSS2 
Yinggi 
2 NW KaryRE 
t tags1 raci it, 
by kyll.st. ATTORNEY 
S2 
9. 
 
S, Photo-lithographer, Washington, O. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT M. REILLY AND FRANCIS KING, OF BALTIMORE, MD., ASSIGNORS OF 
ONE-THIRD TO THOMAS M. DUKEHART, OF SAME PLACE. 
FAU CET. 
SECEFICAE.ON forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,159, dated February i, 1886. 
Application filed June 10, 1885. Serial No. 168,426. (No mode.) 
7) ?ull, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, ROBERT M. REIILLY 
and FRANCIS KING, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Baltimore, in the State 
5 of Maryland, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Faucets; and we 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to. 
Io Which it appertains to make and use the 
Sanne, reference being had to the accompany. 
ing diaWings, and to the letters and figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
I5 Our invention relates to a combined bung 
and faucet for beer and ale casks; and it con 
sists in certain details of construction and op 
eration of the several parts, as will be herein 
after more fally set forth in the specification 
2O and pointed out in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of our device 
on the line y), Fig. 2; Fig. 2, a plan view of 
the flanged locking-plate of the bung; Fig. 3, 
25 a detail perspective view of the cup-shaped 
valve; Fig. 4, a section of same on line acac, 
Fig. 1; and Fig. 5, a vertical section on the 
line v, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 6 is a vertical section of 
the valve and bushing, showing a spiral spring 
Referring more particularly to the draw 
ings, the faucet A is provided with a flange, 
cu, which limits the entrance of the faucet into 
the bung, and locking-lugs (t, adapted to enter 
35 slots c' in the locking-plate C, and be turned 
in the under groove of said plate, and thereby 
held in position. The bung Bisscrew-thread 
ed in the usual manner for securing it in the 
barrel, and has a shoulder, b, and a flange, b, 
4o for purposes which will be hereinafter ex 
plained. 
For the putpose of introducing into the 
faucet or excluding therefrom the liquid con 
tents of the cask, we have constructed a valve, 
45 H, made cone-shaped, and provided with an 
upper flange, h, an intermediate flange, h', 
and a lower flanged base, h". The upper and 
lower portions of the valve are attached by 
means of the posts or bars h", made integrally 
So with the valve, and thus leaving an opening 
for the passage of the liquid through the valve 
3o Surrounding the valve within the bushing. 
 
55 
fo 
75 
and into the faucet. Groovesh' may be cut in the 
upper surface of flange h", for the more ready 
passage of the liquid. A gasket or packing 
band, G, is placed around the shank of the 
valve, the outer rim resting on the lower 
flange, b, of the bung. Upon this, and be 
tween the flange h' of the valve and the inner 
surface of the bung, we place a ring, F, which 
serves to hold this packing in place and at 
same time afford a seat for the upper pack 
ing ring or gasket, E. To hold this gasket in 
position we place the flanged ring D upon it, 
and this ring is in turn securely locked in po 
sition. The lower end of the faucet is now 
passed down through the gasket E, causing it 
to bend downwardly and around the faucet, 
and as it reaches the valve its beveled edge 
comes in contact with the beveled seat l of 
Said valve and pushes the valve down Ward, 
causing the gasket G to uncover the opening 
to the valve, and thus permit the liquid to 
flow into the bung. When the faucet is re 
moved and the downward pressure on the 
valve is released, it instantly returns to its 
closed position. It will thus be seen that no 
liquid can pass into the bung around the Valve 
or leak outwardly, as the gasket G effectually 
prevents it. The gasket G cannot slip down 
into the cask or away from the valve, as it is 
securely held by the flanges l'h'; but the valve 
may be pushed entirely into the cask by sim 
ply forcing it through the gasket. We may 
place a spring around the upper part of the 
valve, and between it and the ring F, as shown 
in Fig. 6, but it is not absolutely necessary. 
The valve is very simple in construction 
and can be quickly and easily removed when 
necessary. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A bung provided with a freely-sliding 
valve having an inner and an outer flange to fit 
the opening into the bung, and an interior 
seat for the reception of the end of a faucet 
freely sliding within the bushing, whereby 
the valve may be instantaneously opened by 
direct pressure upon the faucet, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A bung provided with a waive having 
an upper flange extending outwardly beyond 
90 
95 
ICC 
336,159 
5 
the immer edge of the valve-seat b of the bung, 
a flange forming a seat for a gasket, and a 
flange to fit the opening into the bung, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with a bung provided 
with a cone-shaped valve having an inte 
rior beveled seat, of the faucet provided with 
locking-lugs to hold it in position, a flange to 
limit its entrance into the bung, and lower 
Io beveled edge adapted to fit the beveled seat 
of the valve, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
4. The combination, with a faucet, of a bung 
provided with a shouldered recess, b, and in 
15 ternal flange, b, a cone-shaped valve and a 
gasket therefor, the valve being opened by 
the direct pressure of the faucet, a ring for 
holding said gasket in place and forming, a 
seat for an auxiliary, gasket, a flanged ring. 
adapted to hold the said gasket in place, and a 
flanged locking-plate, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ROBERT M. REILY. 
FRANCIS KING. 
Witnesses: 
NEWTON B. LOVEJOY, 
ED J. UNDERWOOD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336259.txt	(No Model.) 
M. PETTET, 
CAR COUPLING, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MILES PETTET, OF WELLINGTON, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
CA R - C O U PL | N G . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,259, dated February 16, 1886. 
Application filed August 26, 1885. Serial No. 173,384. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all who1, it tagy conce772. 
Beit known that I, MILES PETTET, of Wel 
lington, in the county of Prince Edward, in 
the Province of Ontario, in the Dominion of 
Canada, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Car-Couplings; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the sane. 
The object of my invention is to couple cars 
automatically after prior adjustment of the 
coupling-pin, and to support the link horizon 
tally in the draw-head to effect coupling. 
My invention consists of a draw-head pro- | 
vided with a post having an arm projecting 
through the end of the car-truck, and a coup 
ling-pin hung on the end of the arm, so that 
when the draw-head is forced inward the arm 
will leave the pin, and the pin will drop into 
the link to effect coupling; also, in a link hav 
ing a central cross-bar provided with a prop i 
to bear within the outh of the draw.head to 
support the link in horizontal position for 
coupling automatically. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section 
of two draw-heads approaching coupling, show 
ing my improvements. Fig. 2 is a top view 
of one of the draw-heads. Fig. 3 is a plan 
view of my improved link, and Fig. 4 is an 
elevation of the coupling-pin. 
A is a portion of the car-truck or car, and 
B the draw-head, provided with the usual 
spring, C, whereby the draw head will have 
the ordinary end wise movement when two 
draw-heads come together in coupling. 
D is a post, secured to the draw-head inter 
mediate of the spring and mouth of the draw 
head, and provided with a horizontal arm, D', 
which passes loosely through a boss, E, on the 
end of the car-truck. The outer end of the 
arm slightly projects from the boss vertically 
with the pin-hole in the draw-head when the 
draw-head is in a normal position, the projec 
tion being sufficient to hang thereon the coup 
ling-pin J, which is provided with a suitable 
eye. In such position the point of the pin 
enters the pin-hole, so that when two draw 
heads come together they will be forced end 
wise, and the outer end of arm D' will be 
drawn into the boss, thereby leaving the pin, 
which immediately drops and secures the link 
which had previously been adjusted in the 
opposite draw - head, and effects coupling. 
The arm may, if desired, be provided with a 
screw, E, entering post D, to regulate the 
length of projection on which to hang the 
coupling-pin. 
The coupling-link G. has a cross-bar, G', on 
which bar is hung a prop, H, to support the 
link horizontally in the draw-head when the 
pin is in the link by the prop standing with 
in the mouth of the draw-head, to effect coup 
ling of the link with the draw-head of the 
annexing car. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the draw-head B, 
of the post and arm D D and boss E, for 
hanging a coupling-pin, J, and releasing the 
same by an end wise movement of the draw 
head, as set forth. 
2. The coupling link G, having a cross-bar, 
G", near its middle, and provided with a prop, 
H, as set forth. 
MILES PETTET. 
6 
VWitnesses: 
D. F. CAMPBELL, 
J. J. SCOTT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336359.txt	(No Model.) 
F. H., TURNURE. 
HORSE TAIL, HOLDER. 
No. 336,359. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1886. 
WITNESSES 
?a, C/2- 
2.5 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR: 
2//a2-te 
by logg 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRANK H. TURNURE, OF GRAHAM, MISSOURI. 
HORSE-TA HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,359, dated February 16, 1886. 
Application filed November 27, 1885. Serial No. 184,100. (No model.) 
A, and which may be freely moved along the 
arms of the frame. 
My improved device is applied to the tail 
of a horse by first drawing up the cross-bar 
E to a point near the oblong loops B and B. 
The strap C is removed from the loop B, and 
the horse's tail is passed through the rectan 
gular opening formed between the crossbar E 
and the sides of the frame of the holder, and 
wound once or twice around the lower part 
of the frame, when the cross-bar is pushed 
down into the position shown in Fig. 3, and 
the bushy part of the horse's tail is bent back 
upon itself and wound around itself above the 
crossbar, when the free end of the strap C is 
inserted in the loop B and buckled around the 
horse's tail, as shown in Fig. 3. 
The holder, being made of wire, is very 
light and is not noticed by the animal. It 
may be readily applied and is easily removed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a tail-holder for horses and other ani 
mals, the wire frame A, having parallel arms 
and loops B B formed on the ends thereof, a 
cross-bar, E, and the strap C, in combination, 
as herein specified. 
2. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a horse-tail holder consisting of a wire frame, 
A, having parallel arms with oblong loops 
formed on the ends thereof, a cross-bar, E, ar 
ranged to slide upon the parallel arms of the 
frame, and a strap, C, provided with an eye, 
a, and having upon one end a buckle, D, as 
herein specified. 
FRANK H. TURNURE. 
Witnesses: 
P. J. BARRON, 
J. C. SWANK. 
45 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concer. 
Be it known that I, FRANK H. TURNURE, 
of Graham, in the county of Nodaway and 
State of Missouri, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Horse-Tail Holders, 
of which the following is a specification, ref. 
erence being had to the annexed drawings, 
forming a part thereof, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation. Fig. 2 is a 
transverse section taken on line acac in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 shows the application of my improved 
horse-tail holder. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the different figures of the 
drawings. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
efficient and simple device for holding the tails 
of horses and other animals, to keep them in 
good order and to prevent them from becom 
ing covered with mud. 
My invention consists in a frame provided 
with a movable cross-bar, and having a strap 
and buckle, and adapted to receive the bushy 
end of the horse's tail and hold it in a compact 
but easily-released knot. 
The body of the holder consists of a frame, 
A, formed of a wire bent twice at right angles, 
with the two arms thereof arranged parallel 
with each other. Upon the end of the arms 
are formed oblong loops B B for receiving the 
strap C. The strap C is provided with an 
eye, a, for receiving the end of the wire form 
ing the loop B, so as to prevent the strap from 
sliding through the loop. One end of the 
strap is provided with an ordinary buckle, D, 
and the opposite end of the strap is perforated 
to receive the tongue of the buckle D. A 
cross-bar, E, extends across the body A of the 
holder, and is provided with eyes b at oppo 
site ends, which encircle the arms of the frame 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336459.txt	 
 
(No Model.) 
F. L. WHEELER 
DOUBLE ACTING PUMP. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 336,459, 
Patented Feb. 16, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
S. 
 
%N 2 N 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
N 
N is 
N. N 
  
 
28itv.cssos 
c1692 
2a2 
.. 
 
 
 
 
( S. 
Ns S 
 
 
 
 
d 
/ 
 
 
 
 
. 
34uc1 tot 
727-5, Zzz 2.2%z. 
S3 Wus "243.3% 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 336,459. 
 
F. L. WHEELER 
DOUBLE ACTING PUMP, . 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1886. 
28ity.css.cs 
3v.u.c. v. to 
Z2e2e2/Z.Aceeder 
26% . 
53 his elitovitcys 
ill 
; 
N.ETERs. rhat&-Lithographer. Washingtoll. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK L. WHEELER, OF WESTFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
D OUBEACTNG PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,459, dated February 16, 1886. 
Application filed November 10, 1885. Serial No. 182,383. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANK. L. WHEELER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Westfield, in the county of Hampden and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Double-Acting 
Pumps, of which the following is a specifica. 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
double-acting pumps; and it consists in the 
peculiar construction and combination of de 
vices that will be more fully set forth here 
ill after, and particularly pointed out in the 
claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tional view of the operating parts of a punp 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective view of my invention complete. 
Fig. 3 is a detailed elevation, partly in sec 
tion, of one of the pump-rod-operating cams. 
AA represent a pair of pump-cylinders, 
and B represents a water-cylinder located be 
tween the pump-cylinders and communicat 
ing with both of the latter at its upper and 
lower ends. 
The cylinder A has an inlet-port, a, at its 
upper eld, and a similar port, a?, at its low 
er end, and the cylinder A is likewise pro 
vided with inlet-ports a and a. Inwardly 
opening valves b, b, b, and b are arranged 
in the inlet-ports, as shown, and outwardly 
opening Valves C, c, c, and c are located in 
the passages between the pump-cylinders and 
the water-cylinder. The latter is provided 
with a discharge-opening, d, and to the cyl 
inders are attached pipes D, communicating 
with the inlet-ports of the cylinders, and 
these pipes are connected by a Y. coupling 
pipe, E, to a Suitable pipe for supplying wa 
ter to the pump-cylinders. The upper ends 
of the cylinders are provided with stuffing 
boxes F. 
H represents the piston or pump rods, that 
are secured at their lower ends in piston 
heads I. 
The piston-rods are connected at their up 
per ends, by suitable eccentric-straps, with 
eccentrics or cans S on a shaft, T, mounted 
in suitable bearings, U, and having a fast 
pulley, V, and a loose pulley, W, and adapt 
ed to be rotated by any suitable power. The 
cams extend from the shaft in diametrically 
opposite directions, so as to operate the pis 
tons in opposite directions simultaneously 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
that is to say, one of the pistons is being 
raised while the otheris being lowered. When 
the piston in the cylinder A rises, the valve 
b is closed, and the valve c is opened, and the 
water above the piston forced into the water 
cylinder, and the valve b is opened and the 
valve c' closed, so as to fill the cylinder A 
with water below the piston, and the opera 
tion in the cylinder A is exactly reverse, its 
piston being on the downstroke, closing the 
valves c' and b, and opening the valves c' 
and b, forcing the water in the lower portion 
of cylinder A out through the discharge 
opening in the water-chamber, andfilling said 
cylinder above the piston. Each piston is 
thus double-acting, forcing water at both the 
up and down stroke in a single rotation of the 
shaft, and as two cylinders and pistons are 
employed a pump is produced of great power 
and capacity. 
In order to regulate the stroke of the pis 
tons, and thus control the capacity of the 
pump, I provide means for shifting the cams 
on the shaft to give them greater or less ec 
centricity, a convenient form of said means 
being shown in Fig. 3, in which the cam is 
composed of a circular rim, e, across which, 
out of center, extends a transverse bar, f, 
having a slot, g, throughout its length. The 
side of this bar nearest the center of the can 
has teeth h. 
A block, k, having an opening, l, is keyed 
on the shaft, and has teeth on one side adapt 
ed to match the teeth in the cross-bar, and 
the block is secured to the latter by a set 
Screw, m, that passes thi'Ough the slot g and 
enters the blocks. By this means it will be 
readily understood that the block k may be 
adjusted along the bar, and secured thereto at 
any desired point, and thus regulate the throw 
or eccentricity of the cam. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
The combination of the cams having the 
toothed and slotted cross - bars, the blocks 
having teeth, and Set-screws passing through 
the slots to secure the blocks to the cross-bars, 
said blocks being adapted to be secured to a 
shaft, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: FRANK L. WHEELER 
COWPER GIBBs, 
HENRY FULLER. 
OO 
1 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336559.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
J. G. W. F. FLEEMING, 
STOWIE HOOD OR HEAT COLLECTOR, 
No. 336,559, 
 
-zzz his 
Patented Feb. 23, 1886. 
WITNESSEs 
Azzerzzz Z, 9ecerea. 
6 day suchy, /, = \ 
I i F. 
 
1.WWEWTOR 
N U (2 WZ Z Zeezrg 
Juvvsz, 
77 -aattorney - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN G. W. F. FLEEMING OF EMERSON, IOW. A. 
STOVE-HOOD OR HEAT-COLLECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,559, dated February 23, 1886. 
Application filed February 6, 1885. Serial No. 155,156. 
(No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN G. W. F. FLEEM 
ING, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Emerson, in the county of Mills and State 
5 of Iowa, have invented a new and useful Stove 
Hood or Machine for Collecting and Trans 
mitting Surplus Heat from Stoves and Ranges, 
of which the following is a specification, to wit: 
My invention relates to certain novel im 
provements which are applicable to hoods 
that are arranged over stoves, ranges, and 
other cooking apparatuses, and designed for 
conducting off the vapors, smoke, &c., rising 
from the heater itself or from articles during 
I5 the process of cooking, and discharging the 
same into a flue or uptake; and my invention 
consists in the novel devices, which will be 
fully understood from the following descrip 
tion, when taken in connection with the an 
nexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical central section through 
my improved hood and heat - collector sus 
pended by a collar, and showing a hand-hook 
for adjusting the register-valves in the remov 
able botton G. Fig. 2 is a bottom view of 
the device. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of 
the hanger; and Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail 
in section, showing the several register-valves. 
A designates the hood proper, which is pref. 
erably the rustum of a pyramid, and made of 
any suitable capacity adapted to collect heat 
or Vapors, &c., rising from a stove or range 
or other heater over which it is arranged. 
From the top of this hood rises a flue or pipe, 
B, rigidly secured to it, and provided with a 
regulating damper or valve, C. 
D designates an elbow-pipe section, which 
may be connected to the upper end of the pipe 
B by means of pins e and bayonet - slots d, 
or by any other suitable means which will al 
low a ready detachment of said parts when 
desired. 
F designates a suspension-band for the de 
vice, which band is composed of two semi 
circular parts, connected by a hinge at b and 
by a hook-and-eye fastening, c. This band is 
designed to clasp the horizontal part of the 
said elbow D, and, by means of a screw or 
spike inserted into a ceiling, to sustain the 
hood in proper position over a stove, range, or 
other heater. 
G designates the bottom for the hood A, 
which is adapted to fit snugly the lower end 
of this hood, as shown in Fig. 1, and to be re 
55 movably secured to it by means of pins g. 
45 
50 
35 
40 
This hood-bottom G is constructed with bev 
eled or upwardly-converging flanges G, which 
afford close contact-bearings for the said bot 
tom against the inclined sides of the hood, 
and also receive the inner ends of the remov 
able connecting -pins g, above referred to. 
The bottom plate, G, is constructed with out 
wardly-flaring draft-passages h, which radiate 
from a common central pivot, k, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 4, and from an outer angle of each 
draft-passage h is an offset, j, for a purpose 
hereinafter explained. These passages h are 
what are known as register-holes; but, in 
stead of using a single circularly-movable reg 
ister plate, Iemploy, say, three independently 
movable register-segments which are mova 
ble about the said common pivot, k. 
It will 
thus be seen that I am able to adjust each reg 
ister-plate independently of the others, and 
for this reason I can direct the rising vapol's 
or heated air through any one or more of the 
draft-passages h. Each one of the said regis 
ter segments or valves H is provided with a 
hook, i, adapted to receive, for convenience, a 
hand-hook, N, (shown in Fig. 1,) by means of 8o 
which the valves can be adjusted. The necks 
or stems of the hooks i are received in the 
short offsets i, when their valves are fully 
Open. 
It is obvious from the above description that 
the bottom or removable portion, G, of the 
hood A serves the purpose of a heat-deflector, 
which will radiate into the room a large 
amount of heat. In the summer season this 
deflector may be removed to allow the heat to 
freely escape through the hood and flues, Or 
at any time, when the said deflecting-bottom 
is attached to the hood, the exit of the heated 
air can be nicely regulated by adjusting the 
valve - segments H and the valve C in the 95 
pipe B. 
75 
90 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The combination, with a stove-hood, of 
a removable bottom provided with openings 
and independent valves for closing the same, ICO 
substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with a stove-hood, of 
a bottom provided with openings and inde 
pendent valves for closing the same, substan 
tially as specified. 
JOHN G. W. F. FLEEMING. 
Witnesses: 
H. J. LTESVELD, 
C. M. WITTSTRUCE, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336659.txt	(No Model.) 
D. M. MONROE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 336,659, 
CAN SOLDERING MACHINE, 
Patented Feb. 23, 1886. 
Iml 2. ZiW 
I 
i 
Witnesses: 
Zaye7zfor: 
 
N. perers, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
D. M. MONROE. 
CAN SOLDERING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
Wit72 esses: 
Azvezdor: 
Lilhosaphar, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
D. M. MONROE. 
CAN SOLDERING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 336,659. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1886. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID M. MONROE, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
CAN SOLDERING MACH NE. 
PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,659, dated February 23, 1886. 
Application filed December 3, 1885. Serial No. 184,643. (No model.) 
To all, whom it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, DAVID M. MoNROE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Balti 
more, in the State of Maryland, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Can 
Soldering Machines, of which the following is 
a specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
can-soldering machines, in which the side or 
body seams of sheet-metal cans are soldered, 
as illustrated in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a top view. Fig. 2 is a side view 
of the machine; Fig. 3, a rear end view of the 
gaging device; Fig. 4, a side view of the gag 
ing device; Fig. 5, a vertical section of the 
gaging device; Fig. 6, a front end view of the 
gaging device; Fig. 7, a horizontal sectional 
view of the gaging device; Fig. 8, a top view 
of the gaging device. Fig. 9 is a sectional 
view of the rail, showing the weight-releasing 
mechanism and an end view of the gaging de 
vice. Fig. 10 is a side view of the weight 
mechanism. Fig. 11 is a front view of the 
soldering-rollers. Fig. 12 is a sectional view 
of the solder-receptacle. Fig. 13 is a sectional 
view of the flux-receptacle. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
This machine is constructed to have a con 
tinuous motion by which the can-gaging de 
vice is continually moving at the time the 
different operations are being performed; and 
it consists of a frame, A, supported on suit 
able legs, B, provided with two wheels, C-one 
being arranged at each end of the machine 
around which travels a chain consisting of a 
suitable number of links, D, secured together 
in any suitable manner, in this instance being 
pivoted. On this chain are arranged the gag 
ing devices E, which consist of a split cylin 
der, e, and the standards e", provided with 
circular holes in which the said cylinder is 
placed, and which is expanded by the sliding 
rod F, supported in the bearingf, and secured 
to the cylinder by means of the pivoted bars.f, 
which are pivoted to both the rod and cylin 
der, thereby forming a toggle-joint, which, 
when the rod is moved to the left, expands 
the cylinders, and when moved in the oppo 
site direction contracts the same, which per 
mits the rolled sheet-metal blank to be placed 
in position. This is then gaged by expanding 
the cylinder and forcing it against the stand 
ards e, and is there held in the gaged position 
until soldered. The upper part of the stand 
ards e' are cut away to form the opening 9, at 
which point the seam of the can-body is placed, 
by which the soldering operation can be per 
formed. 
As it is important in machines of this class 
to only apply the solder, flux, &c., when a 
can-body is on the device on account of keep 
ing the same free thereof, I arrange a device 
by which this is accomplished. It consists of 
a bar, G, swung to the standard e' by means 
of suitable links, which permit it to be swung 
in and out, and it is provided with an incline 
projection, g, part of which extends into cyl 
inders. When there is no can-body on the 
same, but when the said body is slipped on the 
cylinder, its ends conue in contact with the 
incline, which pushes and holds the bar G out, 
and which is then in a position to operate the 
solder and flux applying devices; but if the 
cylinder were minus a body, the said bar would 
not project far enough out to operate the said 
devices. 
The device that operates the expanding 
mechanism of the gages E. consists of a weight, 
I, which is secured to a pivoted arm, l, attached 
to the finger t, which holds the weight up by 
engaging with the spring - arm l, which is 
pushed to one side by the inclined surfaces on 
both finger and arm coming in contact with 
each other when the weight is raised. The 
finger thus holds the weight up until released 
by the bar G coming in contact with the arm 
l, which releases the weight, and it, falling, 
strikes the end of the rod E and forces it in 
ward, which expands the cylinder and the 
body placed thereon against the standards e', 
and holds the same in that position until re 
leased, which is accomplished by like weight 
mechanism P, placed on the other side of the 
frame A, but arranged to act in an opposite 
direction to the one L, the weight being ele 
vated by the gages E. coming in contact there 
with as they pass along, which automatically 
accomplishes the Same. 
The fluxing device His secured to the frame 
55 
55 
7 S 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
30 
35 
5 
50 
 
s 
336,659 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
75 
A, and provided with a series of holes in its same and ejects the flux on the can-body, after 
which it passes to the solder-applying device, 
bottom, over which vibrate the arms h, se 
cured to the rod h", which is attached to the 
which is operated likewise and the solder de 
posited, whence it passes to the heated irons, 
arm h, that extends downward and which 
which fuse and complete the soldering. The 
comes in contact with the bar G as the gage 
passes under, and thereby operates it, which 
body is then cooled by natural or artificial 
passes the arms h over the holes and ejects a 
means as it passes from the irons to the releas 
ing-weight, which falls and moves the rod F 
sufficient quantity of flux on the can-Sean im 
mediately below, the flux being pulverized 
to contract the cylinder, which then releases 
the soldered can-body, and which is removed 
rosin or a similar Substance. 
The soldering-receptacle I is secured to the 
therefrom by the arm T coming in contact 
frame A and provided with an ejection-orifice, 
with the edge of the body and pushes it out of 
the gage into a basket placed to receive the 7o 
i, in which is placed a cut-off stem, i, attached 
to the lever i, that is pivoted to the receptacle 
Sale. 
and projects downward and comes in contact 
Instead of using the means to apply the sol 
with the bar G as it passes thereunder, there 
der, flux, &c., they all or in part may be dis 
by lifting the stem i and permitting a fine 
pensed with and these functions performed by 
stream of molten solder to be deposited on the 
hand. 
can-body as it passes under, which will either 
Having described my invention, I claim and 
form in a wire or in small pieces thereon, 
desire to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
which is sweated into the seam by the irons 
States 
farther on, the solder being kept in a molten 
1. In a can-soldering machine, the combi 
condition by burners suitably arranged, play 
nation of the frame A, the chain consisting of 8o 
ing continually their flame thereon. 
links D, means to impart thereto a continu 
The soldering apparatus consists of a bar, 
ous motion, and the gaging device E, placed 
R, centrally pivoted to an arm, which is at 
on the said chain. 
tached to the frame A, and provided with a 
2. In a can-soldering machine, the combi 
series of rollers, r, which are arranged to rotate 
nation of the endless chain, the gaging device 
independently, and which are heated to the 
E, mounted on the chain, the wheels C C, 
desired temperature by means of hydrocarbon 
means to impart to one of the wheels motion, 
and the soldering-irons arranged to solder the 
burners arranged to deliver their flame there 
against, by which the said rollers are always in 
can - body seam as the said body is passing 
thereby. 
contact with the flame, and thereby sufficiently 
heated to fuse and Sweat the Solder in the 
3. The combination of the endless chain, the 
seam of the can-body as it passes under them. 
gaging devices E, mounted on the chain, means 
to impart to the chain motion, a Soldering 
The machine is driven from the shaft r", which 
is provided with the gear-wheel , secured 
iron device arranged to solder the seam as the 
body is passing by, and the solder - applying 
to the shaft by means of a groove and feather, 
so that it can be shifted in or out of gear by 
device I. 
means of the handle r", with the wheel r on 
4. The combination of the chain, the gages 
a vertical shaft which extends up through a 
E, mounted on the chain, means to impart uno 
tion to the chain, the soldering-irons arranged 
bearing in the leg of the machine and commu 
nicates with the wheel C, thereby turning the 
to solder the seam as it passes by, the solder 
applying device I, and the flux-applying de 
same and also the chain there with. 
In operating the machine the attendant in 
vice H. 
this instance stands at the left-hand end of the 
5. The combination of the chain, the gages 
machine and places the roiled unseamed body 
E, mounted on the chain, the soldering-irons 
blank on the cylinder of the gaging device by 
arranged to solder the seam as it passes by 
placing it in the space between the cylindere 
the solder - applying device I, and means to 
and the surface forming the opening in the 
operate the gaging devices by which the can 
standard e from the rear end, from which it 
bodies are gaged or released. 
passes to the weight Li, which is dropped and 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
thereby expands the cylinder, which then re 
in presence of two witnesses. 
lifts the weight as it passes on, ready for the 
follower gaging device. The next operation 
is to apply the flux by the bar G coming in 
contact with the arm h", which operates the 
BEN. F. Boy DEN, 
JNO. T. MADDOX. 
DAVID M. MONROE. 
90 
95 
Witnesses: 
IOO 
IO5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336759.txt	(No Model.) 
4. 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
J. E. SHAW & J. F. ELLINGER. 
MACHINE FOR BUNDLING KINDLING WOOD, 
No. 336,759. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1886, 
 
HI 
2-AT 2, 23%NA 
 
 
 
 
Ii % s' 
WITWESSES 
s. , 2 vs.-- 
 
tyrextors 
4-7 62. 
(No Model.) 
J. E. S.H.A.W. &. J. F. ELLINGER 
MACHINE FOR BUNDLING KINDLING WOOD, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 336,759. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1886. 
 
1a.s. Z. 57, ow, 
47a 7A/Zeroez 
IWYEyTOR 
%2f&A 
77ter Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. SHAW, OF WILLIAMSPORT, AND JOHN F. ELLINGER, OF ARM 
STRONG, LYCOMING COUNTY, ASSIGNORS TO THE WILLIAMSPORT KIN 
DLING WOOD COMPANY, (LIMITED.) OF WILLIAMSPORT, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MACH NE FOR BUND LN G. K. ND LN G. WOOD, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,759, dated February 23, 1886. 
Application filed September 12, 1885. Serial No. 176,916. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES E. SHAW and 
JoHN F. ELLINGER, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Williamsport and Arm 
5 strong township, respectively, in the county 
of Lycoming and State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Machines for Bundling Kindling-Wood; 
and we do hereby declare the following to be 
Io a full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
Our invention relates to machines for bun 
I5 dling kindling-wood, of that class in which the 
wood to be bundled is placed within the ma 
chine within movable compressing-straps, or 
the like, and drawn closely together, tied, and 
the completed bundle automatically ejected 
2O from the machine, and the movements of the 
machine stopped at intervals by disconnecting 
the working parts from the driving medium. 
Heretofore in machines of this kind several 
practical defects have existed. These arise 
i 
25 principally from the lack of positive motion 
in the several parts. In the best-known of 
these machines the mechanism for ejecting 
the completed bundle is actuated by a cam 
mounted outside the principal working parts 
3o of the machine, and upon a principal driven 
shaft thereof; also in the most common form 
of these machines the driving-power is thrown 
out only once during a revolution of the prin 
cipal driven shaft. 
The object of the present invention is to ob 
viate these defects, and to provide a machine 
which shall be more positive and reliable in 
operation, and whereby the bundling of kin 
dling-wood is facilitated, and the bundle pro 
This invention consists in certain details of 
construction, which we will now proceed to 
particularly describe. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which like 
45 letters of reference indicate corresponding 
parts in different figures, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation. Fig. 2 is a view in elevation of the 
side opposite that shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is 
a view in front elevation, and Fig. 4 a rear. 
4o duced more durable, compact, and secure. 
35 
65 
elevation. Fig. 5 is a top plan view with por. 5o 
tions of the table broken out. 
The letter A. designates the frame of the 
machine, and B the table. In the frame is 
mounted the main driving-shaft A, which 
has loosely mounted thereon the driving or 55 
band pulley C, carrying the friction or clutch 
plate c. Pivoted in a fixed hub, b, are two le. 
vers, b, carrying shoes a a on their outer ends, 
which engage the periphery of the friction 
plate c. The inner ends of the levers, b, are en- 6o 
gaged by a double-incline groove in the sur 
face of a sleeve or collar, D, secured to the 
shaft A in such manner as to be movable lon 
gitudinally thereon, but at the same time to 
be turned by said shaft. 
Mounted in the frame is another shaft, E, 
upon which is secured a large spur gear-wheel, 
E, which meshes with and is turned by a pinion, 
F, on the driving-shaft A'. The gear E has 
upon one of its faces a projection or cam, d, to 
which engages after each half-revolution one of 
two rollers, ee, mounted upon a lever, G, pivoted 
in the main frame A. One end of this lever 
G engages the sleeve or collar D, to move the 
same longitudinally upon the shaft, as said 75 
lever is actuated by the projection or cam d. 
The other end of the lever G has fitted to it 
a-hand-lever, G', pivoted at a convenient 
point in the frame. This is used for starting 
and stopping the lmachine. 
Formed with or upon the table Bare two or 
more brackets, H, in which the wood to be 
bundled is placed. Each of these brackets is 
made with vertical holes at both ends, through 
which pass the guide posts or rods H", having 85 
straps or bands H" secured thereto. The 
lower ends of these guide-posts H are se 
cured to a cross-head, I, which has pivoted to 
it a rod, I'. The lower end of the rod I is 
provided with an eccentric band or strap, in 9C 
which turns the eccentric K on the end of the 
shaft E. At the rear of the brackets H, 
mounted upon the table to slide thereupon, is 
a vertical plate, L, secured on the end of a 
sliding bar, l, connected by means of a link, 95 
l", with a bent lever, m, fulcrumed in bracket 
in on the under side of the table. The bent 
lever n has pivotally secured at its lower end 
s 
3 3. 6 5 9 
a rod, n, carrying a roller or lug, n, to be en 
gaged by the cam-surfaces 0 o' upon the face 
of the spur-gear E. 
The operation of our machine as above con 
structed may be briefly described as follows: 
A suitable quantity of wood for forming a 
bundle is placed in the brackets H, and the 
hand-lever G' moved to start the machine. 
A proper movement of this lever will cause 
the collar or sleeve D to move longitudinally 
upon the shaft, which, by means of one of the 
inclined sides of the groove, will cause the 
shoes a to grasp the friction-plate c, and 
cause the shaft to revolve. The pinion or 
gear F turns with the shaft and causes the 
large gear E to turn, and with it the eccentric 
Kin the strap or band I", thus causing through 
the bar I a vertical movement of the cross 
head I and bands or strap H", to tightly 
compress the wood, which is then ready to 
and receives the usual cord or wire for holding 
the bundle together. By the time the tying 
is done the wheel E will have completed a 
half-revolution, the machine stopped, and the 
lever G moved in a direction opposite that of 
first instance, which will cause the upward 
movement of the cross-head. Upon further 
movement of the gear E the cam surfaces 0 
o' will engage the roller on the rod, causing 
it to be drawn downward, whereupon the rod 
l, and with it the plate L, will be moved for 
ward to push the bundle from its bracket H, 
when the operation may be repeated. 
IO 
25 
AO 
What We claim as our invention is 
1. The combination, with the driven gear 
wheel having the inclines attached to or formed 
with the side of the said wheel, of the ejector 
plate and the lever connected with the ejector. 
plate and receiving motion from the inclines, 
substantially as described, whereby the eject 
or-plate is moved forward to displace the 
bundled wood, and then back to its normal 
position. 
2. The combination, with the driven gear 
5 wheel having the projections attached to the 
side of the said wheel and inclined in opposite 
So 
55 
ic 
75 
directions, of the ejector-plate carried upon 
a suitable rod, the lever connected to the said 
rod, and the link provided with a lug or roll 
er which engages the projection on the gear, 
whereby the ejector-plate is given a positive 
reciprocative motion. 
3. The combination, with the driving-shaft 
provided with the gear and clutch, of the piv 
oted lever having the two rollers, and the 
driven gear having the cam projection at 
tached to the side thereof and engaging the 
rolls on the lever, whereby the clutch is disen 
gaged at each half-revolution of the driven 
gear. 
4. The combination with the driving-shaft 
provided with the clutch and pinion, of the 
driven shaft provided with the eccentric and 
carrying the gear having the projection at 
tached to its side, the pivoted lever engaging 
the clutch and provided with the rolls, and the 
binding-straps connected with the eccentric 
upon the driven shaft, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. The combination, in a machine for bun 
dling wood, of the driving-shaft provided with 
the gear and clutch, the driven shaft provided 
with the large gear having the inclines and 
projection attached to its side, and the eccen 
tric, the binding-straps receiving motion from 
the eccentric, and the ejector-plate attached 
to and operated by the bell-crank lever, which 
receives motion from the inclines on the driven 
gear. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses each. 
JAMES E. SHAW. 
JOHN F. ELLINGER. 
Witnesses to the signature of James E. 
Shaw: 
R. G. DYRENFORTH, 
GEO. M. FINCKEL. 
Witnesses to the signature of John F. El 
linger: 
D. F. Hull, 
ORRIN SHAW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336860.txt	(No Model.) 
D. C. KRUM. 
PRESSER BAR FOR PLANING MACHINES, 
No. 336,860, 
Patented Feb. 23, 1886. 
 
s 
- - - - 
: 
A 
A 
Aere SE- 
35 SNg 
--f A. sy 3r 
) 
N83t2 
C 
   
 
 
Z27%27////7/A 
%\ \ZZ 
...' 
 
S. 
WITNESSES 
---. 
N. PEEERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
INVESTOR 
v6-e C 
2,222. 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID C. K R U M, OF GRAND R A PIDS, MICH IGAN. 
PRESSER-BAR FOR PLAN ING - MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,860, dated February 23, 1886. 
Application filed August 1, 1885. Serial No. 173,244. 
(No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
85 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID C. KRUM, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Grand 
Rapids, in the county of Kent and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Pressure-Bars for Plan 
ing-Machines; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the Same. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in pressure-bars for planing-machines. 
It consists in a certain novel construction 
and arrangement of a pressure-bar consisting 
of a series of independent fingers or sections 
and the operating springs and devices for ad 
justing the same, whereby lumber of varia 
ble thickness may be firmly held to the bed 
of the machine, the fingers or sections being 
adapted to adjust themselves to the inequali 
ties on the surface of the lumber, all of which 
I will now proceed to point out and describe, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
of a planing-machine provided with my im 
provement. Fig. 2 is an end elevation with 
the rotary cutter removed; Fig. 3, a top plan 
view, and Fig. 4 a detail. 
Referring to said drawings, A is the bed 
plate of the machine; BB, the feed-rollers; C, 
a rotary cutter; D, a plank in position to be 
planed. 
EE are two upright standards on the bed 
plate. To the standards are secured two bars, 
FF, parallel to each other and in a plane par 
allel to the bed-plate. 
G G are a series of independent fingers or 
sections forming a pressure-bar, said fingers 
or sections being hinged on a cross-rod, a, 
secured to the bars FF. The fingers G are 
provided with beveled ends b, which engage 
with the board and hold it firmly on the bed 
plate, as hereinafter described. 
c are shoulders on the sides of the fingers 
next to the cutter. 
d is a cross-bar secured to the bars FF and 
having the dependent portion d', with which 
the shoulders c on the fingers engage as they 
are moved toward the cutter, and thus limit 
their motion in the direction of said cutter 
and prevent them from coming in contact with 
the same. 
e are upwardly-projecting lever-extensions 
on the pressure-fingers. 
H H are a series of independent levers full 
crumed on a rod, f, secured to the bars FF, 
the number of said levers corresponding to 
the number of the pressure-fingers, and their 
short arms h engaging with the extensions e. 
I is a bridge secured to the bars E. E. 
i are a series of independent springs secured 
to the under side of the bridge I. Said springs 
bear on the long arms of the levers HH, forc 
ing them down and elevating the lever-exten 
sions e of the pressure-fingers G. G., to cause 
the beveled ends b to engage with the board 
which is being planed and firmly hold it against 
the bed-plate. 
K are a series of set-screws, by which the 
tension of the springs is regulated. 
The pressure fingers or sections, being en 
tirely independent of each other, readily adapt 
themselves to the inequalities of the lumber 
which is being planed, and at the same time 
hold it firmly on the bed-plate. 
With a pressure constructed as above de 
scribed two or more boards of different thick 
ness can be planed at the same time. 
My invention can be used with equal ad 
vantage on molding and matching machines as 
on ordinary planers. It is simple in construc 
tion, very strong, and so arranged that it is 
almost impossible to get out of order, and in 
case of breakage of any one of the fingers, le 
vers, or springs it can be readily replaced 
without taking the entire pressure-bar apart. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a planing - machine, a presser - bar 
consisting of a series of independent presser 
fingers or sections having lever - extensions 
and mounted on a transverse rod above the 
bed of the planer, in combination with a cor 
responding series of levers engaging with the. 
extensions of the presser-fingers and each pro 
vided with a spring, all arranged and oper 
ating to the end that the springs will hold the 
levers in engagement with the extensions of 
the presser-fingers and operate said fingers, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. In a planing machine, a presser-bar 
IO 
25 
45 
95 
IOO 
2 
336,860 
5 tion with a corresponding series of levers, H, presence of two witnesses. 
consisting of a series of independent presser hold the levers in engagement with the exten- Io 
fingers or sections, G, having lever-extensions sions of the presser-fingers and operate said 
e and shoulders c, and mounted on a transverse fingers, substantially as shown and described. 
rod above the bed of the planer, in combina- 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
engaging with the extensions of the presser- 
fingers, and each provided with a spring, i, and 
set-screw K, and the cross-bar d, all arranged 
and operating to the end that the springs will 
DAVID C. KRUM. 
Witnesses: 
MARK M. POWERs, 
O. C. RANSOM, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US336960.txt	(No Model.) 
F, TAYLOR, 
WIRE HAT AND COAT H00K. 
No. 336,960, 
Patented Mar, 2, 1886. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK TAYLOR, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS, 
WRE HAT AND CO AT HOOK. 
SiFCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 336,960, dated March 2, 1886. 
Application filed April 18, 1884. Renewed January 27, 1886. Serial No. 189,996. (No model.) 
then bent backward at right angles to the part 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK TAYLOR, a of the hook, by which similar hooks are usu 
ally fastened to a vertical wall are pointed, 
that they may be driven into such wall, and 
may be nicked to give them a better hold. Of 
course this will bring one of the points at one 
side of the hook, and the other point at the 
other side of the hook. Therefore to improve 
the appearance of the hook I place the point 
which proceeds from the upper hook a little 
higher than the other point, and make a double 
bend or offset in the long strand, which has 
the effect of bringing the lower short strand 
inline with the part of the long strand which 
lies above the offset, and the upper short strand 
in line with the part of the long strand which 
comes below the offset. 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Low 
ell, in the county of Middlesex and Common 
wealth of Massachusetts, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Wire 
Coat and Hat Hooks, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to wire coat and hat 
hooks; and it consists in the hook hereinaf. 
ter claimed. 
In the accompanying drawing, the figure is 
an isometric view of my invention. 
A is a hook formed of a single wire, W, 
doubled sidewise upon itself at the top of the 
hook, the strands w w thus formed being 
curved, as shown, to form a hat-hook, a, and 
running nearly or quite parallel with each other 
from a slight distance below the top of the hook 
to a little below the middle of Said hook. The 
wire W is also doubled sidewise in the oppo 
site direction upon itself at the bottom of the 
hook, the strands w w being curved, as shown, 
to form a coat-hook, a?, and running nearly 
or quite parallel with each other from a slight 
distance from the free end of the hook. 
free ends of the hooks a a are preferably 
slightly spread, to prevent their piercing or 
marking clothes or other articles suspended 
thereon. The ends w w of the wire W are 
I claim as my invention 
A hook formed of a single wire twice doubled 
upon itself sidewise in opposite directions, 
and curved to form a hat-hook and a coat 
hook, and having its nuain or longest strand 
offset, as herein described, and having the 
ends of said wire bent into attaching-points, 
where said Imain strand is offset, as and for the 
Witnesses: 
EDW. W. THOMPsON, 
ALBERT M. MOORE. 
The purpose specified. 
35 
45 
55 
25 
FREDERICK TAYLOR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337060.txt	E. S. HARRIS. 
sOLE FOR B00Ts OR SHOES. 
Patented Mar. 2, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
No. 337,060, 
 
277/Z a 2 et a 72 . 
27 /zzaz a. 22z/Azis - 
Aaa" 
/622-2- /52- y 
-6-ye 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELMER. S. HARRIs, OF HAVERHILL, MASSACHUSETTS, 
SOLE FOR BOOTS OR SHOES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 337,060, dated March 2, 1886. 
Application filed May 9, 1885. Serial No. 164,940. (No model.) 
O 
25 be hereinafter referred to. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELMER. S. HARRIs, of 
Haverhill, in the county of Essex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Soles for Boots 
and Shoes, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates more particularly to 
the manufacture of turned boots or shoes, al 
though applicable as well to other kinds of 
boots and shoes; and the invention consists in 
the preparation of a sole for a boot or shoe 
previous to its being attached to the upper, 
all substantially as hereinafter fully described, 
reference being had to the accompanying plate 
of drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents in cross-section a shoe 
with a last within it having its sole prepared 
according to this invention and secured to the 
upper. Fig. 2 is a viewin cross-section of the 
shoe shown in Fig. 
as having had its sole 
attached to the upper and the shoe turned. 
Figs. 3 and 4 are cross-sections of the sole 
prepared according to this invention, and to 
In the drawings, A represents a boot or shoe 
in cross-section, of which B is the sole, and C 
the upper secured together by stitches a. 
The sole B is prepared for attachment to 
3O the upper in the following manner: The sole 
having first been cut from the proper material 
and shaped and rounded as usual, a slit is cut 
from the edge b of the sole, but preferably 
close up to the surface or side d of the sole 
(which is the flesh side of the sole) by hand, 
or in any suitable machine, entirely around 
the edge of the sole and in a diagonal di. 
rection through the thickness of the sole, 
as shown at f in Fig. 3, more particularly 
making a lip, D, around the sole-edge and 
leaving a portion, E, of the sole the full 
thickness or substantially the full thickness 
of the sole at the edge b. The lip D is then 
turned back, and preferably nearly to the side 
45 d of the sole, and the portion E turned back 
toward the side g of the sole, all substantially 
as shown in Fig. 4 more particularly, which 
can be done in any suitable manner. The 
sole is then ready to be and is attached to the 
5o upper substantially as follows: It is first tacked 
35 
A sole prepared as above described, having 7o 
to the last F, its grain side g next the last, 
which last has its bottom at its edgeh bev 
eled or chamfered off, as shown in lig. 1, for 
the portion E of the sole to lie in, and on such 
surface to keep it in its turned-back position. 55 
The upper, turned inside out, is then placed 
so that its edges l will lie against the lip D 
and portion E, as shown in section in Fig. 1, 
and the sole and upper stitched together in 
any suitable sewing - machine, the stitches 60 
passing through the upper and through the 
lip D, as shown at a, Fig. 1. The lip is then 
hammered down close to the surface d of the 
sole, the shoe removed from the last, turned, 
and then the ordinary last inserted therein, 65 
and the portion E of the sole flattened or 
beaten out in the usual manner, as shown in 
cross-section in Fig. 2, and the shoe finished 
as usual. 
its portion E turned back as shown, enables, 
when sewing the upper to the sole in a sew 
ing-machine more particularly, a straight nee 
dle to be used, which is a great advantage 
over the present manner of sewing with a 75 
curved needle, which is required when the 
portion E is not turned back, but turning back 
such portion, as shown, moves it out of the 
way, so that a straight needle can be used; 
also, the splitting of the sole in a diagonal di 
rection enables the sole at its edge to be of the 
full thickness, or substantially the full thick 
ness, of the material forming the sole; also, 
thins the edge of the lip for a close laying, 
when it is flattened or hammered down on the 85 
sole, of the lining, &e., thereon; also, secures 
at the place where the stitches pass through it 
the requisite thickness of material at such 
place for the attachment of the sole to the up 
per in a strong and durable manner; also, as 9o 
substantially the full thickness of the sole is 
secured at the edge b of the sole a saving of 
material is obtained over the present mode of 
preparing a sole when the slit is cut in a dif 
ferent manner or parallel to the surfaces, which, 95 
as is obvious, to show the same thickness of 
the sole at the edge and secure the requisite 
thickness of the lip I) where the stitches pass 
through it, would require a much thickerpiece 
of material for the sole. 
" 
. 
IOC) 
a 
. 
337,060 
In cutting the slit in the sole it can com 
mence nearer the middle of the edge or at the 
cc; ner; but it is preferable to commence close 
up to the side d of the sole, so as to leave the 
5 full width of such surfaced of the sole and se 
cure as nearly as possible the full thickness of 
the sole at its edge. 
It is desirable that the lip D should be turned 
back substantially as far toward the sided as 
Io shown, in order to form a hollow or groove 
m, as it were, for the sole to bear or rest by 
such groove on the guiding-edge of the usual 
post of a sewing-machine used in sewing boots 
and shoes for the effectual and practical guid 
(5 ing of the boot or shoe when being sewed in 
the machine. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
A sole for a boot or shoe, having alipformed 20 
by a cut starting from the edge of and extend 
ing diagonally into the sole, and having said 
lip and the portion from which the lip is cut 
turned from each other, as set forth. 
Intestimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 25 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit. 
eSSS 
ELM.R. S. HARRIS. 
Witnesses: 
EDw1N W. BRowN, 
WM. S. BELLONs. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337160.txt	MACHINE FOR PEARLING WHEAT AND OTHER GRAIN 
J. J. HUBBELL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 337,160, 
Patented Mar, 2, 1886. 
SaaZaAl44As Aase 
ir-to 
Estered 
SZNZSS 
 
  
WITNESSES 
 
64-perce 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, E. c. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. J. HUBB 
ET.L. 
MACHINE FOR PEARLING WHEAT AND OTHER C-RAIN, 
No. 337,160, 
Patented Mar, 2, 1886, 
 
- 
WITNESSES: 
M2-yc2% 
-6 4.3 ok 
NWENTOR: 7C 
 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN J. HUBBELL, OF BENZONIA, MICHIGAN. 
MACH NE FOR PEARLING W HEAT AND OTHER GRAN. 
gPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 337,160, dated March 2, 1886. 
Application filed IDecember 5, 1884. Serial No. 149,568. No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
Upon the shaft A are the series of disks C, 6o 
drum, so that by the reverse motions of the 
To cell, Luhon, it 77 Cz/ CO7 ce/'72. 
Be it known that I, JOHN J. HUBBELI, of disks and head there will be a space formed 
into which the incoming grain enters. This 
Benzonia, in the county of Benzie and State of 
hood and its wings form a force-feed device 
Michigan, have invented a new and Improved 
that causes a uniform and continuous feed of 
Machine for Pearling Wheat and other Grain, 
the grain to the drum B from the delivery. 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
spout that discharges into the hood. 
act description. 
The object of my invention is the removal 
separated by rings k, which are keyed to the 
of the thin outer skin or bran from wheat 
shaft. These disks may be of any suitable 
and other grain, so as to leave the berries 
material-such as emery-wheels, or wheels or 
whole, and in the case of wheat to leave the 
disks of any kind of composition; but stone is 
nutritious portions that lie next to the bran, 
preferable, and grindstones can be utilized by 
and furnish a product that can be readily 
boring holes through them near the center and 
cooked. To these ends I Construct a machine 
attaching them to the rings lc by boltsl, passed 
in which a revolving shaft carrying numerous 
through the stones and rings. The disks or 
disks of stone is combined with a hollow drum 
stones are slightly smaller in diameter than 
or cylinder, and the feed is regulated by de 
drum B, so as to leave a space for passage of 
vices of novel character, all as hereinafter de 
the grain; but the stones project between the 
scribed and claimed. 
rings d, or into the spaces between the rings. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
The sections c are slotted, as shown most 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
clearly in Fig. 4, to allow escape of dust and 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
bran. At the discharge end of the drum the 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
inner head, e, is provided with series of radial 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section of 
ly-disposed apertures, n, to allow escape of the 
my improved pearling-machine. Fig. 2 is a 
grain into the space between the two heads, 
cross-section on the line aca. Fig. 3 is a cross 
and there are also apertures 0 in the periphery 
section on the line y J. 
Fig. 4 represents a 
of the double head for final discharge of the 
half of one of the sections of the drum; and 
grain. The closing of a portion of apertures 
Fig. 5 is a sectional view taken on the line 2 3 
n, by means preferably of the contrivance as 
of Fig. 1. 
shown in Fig. 5, regulates the discharge to 
A is a shaft supported horizontally in boxes 
the extent required for keeping the machine 
a ct, and provided with a driving-pulley, b. 
filled with grain to the extent required. Said 
Upon and around the shaft is a drum or cyl 
contrivance may consist of a series of gates or 
inder, B, made up of a series of cylindrical 
plates, D, one for each series of apertures n, 
sections, c, fitted each with an interior beveled 
said gates or plates being connected to con 
ring, d. At one end the drum is attached 
centric rings of stout wire D at their inner 
to a double head formed of two disks, e, 
and outer ends, respectively, which rings are 
which are bolted to a hub, f, that is free to re 
adapted to have a limited movement in the arc 
volve upon and independently of the shaft A, 
of a circle, the outer one being confined by a 
said box, as also the box of the other head of 
flange of the casing of the cylinder or drum, 
the drum or cylinder, (presently referred to,) 
being preferably provided with a lining of 
while to one of the plates or gates is secured 
an offset arm or bar, D", projecting through a 
Babbitt or soft metal to reduce to a minimum 
slot, d", in said cylinder or drum casing, and 
frictional contact between the same and the 
engaging, being formed with knife - edged 
shaft. At the opposite end the drum is pro 
flanges d' at its side edges, with a lack or 
vided with a head, e, bolted to a hub, f', on 
toothed bar, d, secured to and standing a lit 
the shaft, and the head e' is formed with a 
tle above said casing. The rear edge of each 
conical hood or projection, 0, that is provided 
plate or gate D stands radially to the inner. 
with Wings h adjacent to openings i in heade'. 
ring, while the front edge of the plate or gate 
The openings i are protected by small hoods 
i", projecting inward from the head in such a stands nearly tangentially or obliquely to said 
manner as to Ward off the grain alreadyin the ring to permit, as will be observed from Fig. 5, 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
go 
95 
EOC) 
s 
337,160 
O 
the partial closing of each series of the aper 
tures 2. 
The machine being constructed with the de 
sired number of sections, and in practice set 
up with the tail end slightly lower than the 
feed end, the shaft A is connected with power, 
so as to be rotated rapidly. The drum B is 
also to be rotated by suitable means at a slow 
speed and in a reverse direction to the shaft, 
which means of rotation may consist of an 
inner circle of cogs or teeth, p, upon the drum 
B, geared with a pinion, q, of a suitably jour 
naled shaft, q', driven by a second pinion, ', 
thereon at its outer end, which latter pinion, 
r", gears with a pinion, s, on the shaft A, the 
plane of rotation of all of which pinions is in 
dicated by arrows. The grain supplied to the 
feed- chamber or hood y is forced into the 
drum into contact with the first stone and fill 
ing the first section. It then passes to the 
second, and so on until the drum is filled. In 
each section the grain is acted on by the stone, 
which rubs off the bran without breaking the 
berry, so that by the time the grain reaches 
the discharge end it is thoroughly cleaned or 
pearled. 
The drum or cylinder is made in sections, 
for convenience in assembling the stones or 
disks, with their separating rings k, upon the 
shaft, and to permit of the alternating of the 
stones with the rings d, the openings of the lat 
ter, being of less diameter than the stones or 
disks. 
- 
25 
For pearling wheat this machine is especial 
ly useful, as it removes only the thin skin from 35 
the grain and leaves the nutritious portions, 
which are usually lost in the ordinary process 
of making fine flour. 
It will be understood that I make no claim 
to the specific means herein employed for reg- 4o 
ulating the amount of discharge. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a pearling-machine, the combination, 45 
with the shaft and disks or stones, of the 
drum or cylinder having a doublehead formed 
of spaced-apart disks or plates, both the in 
ner disk and the periphery of said head hav 
ing apertures, and means whereby a portion 
of said apertures are adapted to be closed, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a pearling-machine, the head e', pro 
vided with hooded apertures i, the hood gy, 
and wings h, forming a force-feed, combined 
with drum B, disks C, and shaft A, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a pearling-machine, the drum B, pro 
vided with a double head formed of diskse, 
having apertures in o, combined with shaft. A 6o 
and disks C, substantially as described. 
55 
50 
JOHN J. HUBBELL. 
Witnesses: 
WM. W. ROTHG-EB, 
A. N. WHITCOMB. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337260.txt	(No Model.) 
J. P. A. J. F., & G. O. HANLON. 
No. 337,260. 
TRAIN SIGNALING APPARATUS, 
Patented Mar, 2, 1886, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
se 
S 
.N.W. S 
Pr 
N 
22 
At SS 2. 
A. 
2 
it 
NSN RS 
A- C - 
SY S 
S. & 
Ca 
O 
aesea sy 
9 
22 
22 
xin SNS4 
Ars-s 
Sysys 
 
  
2435 
scsSS N 
S &2Z2Z 2 K 
2 
E. AR 
2 zis 
 
SN SSX2S3 
 
 
  
 
2 
 
W T N E ss e s : 
2-4-2-22 
Clues w S Q-g & & \\cs w 
N. PETERS, Photo-filiographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPH P. A. HANLON, JOHN F. HANLON, AND GEORGE O. HANILON, OF 
BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
- 
TRAIN-SIGNALING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 337,260, dated March 2, 1886. 
Application filed September 14, 1885. Serial Ni). 177,041. (No model.) 
IO 
15 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JoSEPH. P. A. HAN 
LON, JOHN F. HANLON, and GEORGE O. HAN. 
LON, of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Train-Sig 
naling Apparatus, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
This invention relates to that class of elec 
tric signaling apparatus for railroad trains in 
which conducting-wires are affixed to the en 
gine and cars, and are connected between the 
cars by detachable couplings. 
The invention has for its object to provide 
an improved contrivance whereby upon the 
Separation of any of the members of any coup 
ling a circuit will be closed and an alarm given 
in the engine-cab or at other suitable point, 
the engineer being thus informed of the ac 
cidental separation of any of the cars of the 
train. 
It has also for its object to improve the 
means whereby the coupling members are con 
nected, and to provide devices for protecting 
25 the instrumentalities immediately connected 
with the coupling members from injury by 
dust, rain, ice, &c.; and to these ends the in 
vention consists in the improved coupling em 
bracing the means for securing the two mem 
bers together for rendering the circuit-closing 
device inoperative when the members are con. 
nected and making them to operate automatic 
ally when said members are disconnected, and 
in the means for protecting the parts from in 
Our invention also consists in the combina 
tion of parts, as hereinafter set forth and 
claimed. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a longitudinal section of a coupling embody 
ing our invention. Fig. 2 represents an end 
view of one member of the coupling shown in 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents a section on line a 
ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 represents a side view of the 
fixed contact-plates shown in section in Fig. 
1. Fig. 5 represents a longitudinal section of 
a modification. Fig. 6 represents a perspec 
tive view of one member of another modified 
resents alongitudinal section of the companion 
to the member shown in Fig. 6. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in all the figures. 
In carrying out our invention we provide 55 
the engine-cab and each car with two conduct 
ing-wires, a. a', those on the engine being con 
nected with the positive and negative poles of 
a source of electricity, which may be of any 
suitable kind, such as a battery or generator. 6o 
The two wires in each car are suitably insu 
lated and affixed to the car, and when the 
wires of all the cars are connected by the coup 
ling devices they constitute two conductors 
extending continuously through the train, each 
being independent of and insulated from the 
other. 
Our improved coupling device is composed 
of two members, 23, each being composed of 
a (preferably) cylindrical body, which receives 
the wires a ct, said wires passing through the 
outer end of the coupling member to Seg 
mental metallic terminals b b' at the inner end 
of the member, the terminals of each member 
being arranged to make contact with the ter 
minals of the other member when the two mem 
bers are connected. The terminal band wire 
a of each member are insulated from the ter 
minal band wire a' when the members are 
connected, so that there is no electrical con 
nection between the wires a and a so long as 
the members remain connected; but when the 
members become disconnected by accident or 
otherwise a connection is automatically estab 
lished between the wires a and the wire a? of 85 
each of the disconnected members, so that an 
electric circuit is completed through the Con 
ductors between the source of electricity and 
the coupling member remaining in electrical 
connection therewith, and an alarm included 9o 
in Said circuit and located in suitable prox 
imity to the engineer is operated, thereby 
giving the engineer notice of the separation 
of the members of the coupling. The con 
struction whereby this result is secured may be 
variously modified. 
In Fig. 1 we have shown two slides, c c, 
adapted to move on guides d d in the mem 
bers 23, each frame having a spring, e, where 
5o form of our improved coupling. Fig. 7 rep-i by it is normally forced forward so as to press 
35 jury by rain, ice, &c. 
40 
45 
3O 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
337,260 
a continuous metallic ring, f, on its rear por 
tion against two segmental metallic plates, 
gg, in electrical contact, respectively, with the 
wires a and al. (See Fig. 4.) Each slide is 
provided at its outer end with a projecting 
finger, h. The finger of each slide is arranged. 
to Strike the outer end of the other slide when 
the members 23 are brought together in coup 
ling them, the slides cc being thus forced back 
wardly, so as to disconnect the rings ff from 
the contact-plates g g g g. 
When the members of the coupling are dis 
connected, the springs e. force the slides c c 
forward, and by forcing the rings ff against 
the plates g g establish a metallic connection 
between the wire a, and the wire a? of each sec 
tion, and thus close the circuit, as above de 
scribed. The coupling members have pivoted 
hooks if, which are provided with springs 
kic, whereby they are caused to interlock, as 
shown in Fig. 1, and thus detachably connect 
the members 23. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 5 the rear 
end of each hook i is provided with a trans 
verse metallic plate, l, insulated from the me 
tallic portions of the hook, and arranged so 
that when the members are disconnected the 
platest will be caused by the springs k of the 
hooks j to make contact with uncovered por 
tions or loops of the wires a ct, and thus estab 
lish a metallic connection between said wires. 
When the members are connected, each hook 
is forced back by the other hook, the plates 
ll being thus displaced and separated from 
the wires a ct, as shown. 
Jn Fig. 7 a metallic plate, l, is supported by 
but insulated from a rod, n, and is normally 
forced by a spring, o, on said rod into contact 
with the wires aa, as shown. When the mem 
bers are connected, the rod n and plate l of 
each member are displaced, so as to discon 
nect the latter from the wires a a by two rods, 
r, projecting outside of the outer end of the 
coupling member, and two levers, ss, pivoted 
to the rods ' ', and to a support within the 
coupling member, and bearing against a col 
lar, n, on the rod in... When the members are 
brought together, the rods r r are pressed in 
wardly and turn the levers ss on their pivots, 
So as to cause said levers to move the rod an 
and plate laway from the wires a. a. 
It is obvious that other modifications may be 
adopted without departing from the spirit of 
our invention. 
Each coupling member has two segmental 55 
flanges, tt, at its forward end, said flanges be 
ing separated by spaces adapted to receive the 
flanges of the other member, so that they serve - 
as guides in connecting the members. 
6o 
We claim- 
1. The improved coupling, composed of two 
members, each having two conducting-wires 
provided with segmental metallic terminals, a 
pivoted coupling-hook centrally located in 
each member, circuit-closing devices, substan- 65 
tially as described, which are made inopera 
tive by the connection of said members and 
operative automatically when said members 
are disconnected, a casing entirely surround 
ing the mechanism in each member, said cas- 7o 
ings being provided with segmental flanges at 
their forward ends, said flanges of the casing 
of each member being supported by spaces 
adapted to receive the flanges of the other 
member, and thereby serving as guides con: 75 
necting the members, as set forth. 
. . . 
2. The improved coupling, composed of two 
members, 2 3, each having two conducting 
wires, a a?, provided with segmental metallic 
terminals b b', a pivoted coupling-hook cen; 8o 
trally located in each member, circuit-closing 
devices consisting of a spring-impelled slide 
provided with the metallic ring f on its rear. 
portion, and the two metallic plates g g in 
electrical contact, respectively, with the wires a 85 
and a, which circuit-closing devices are made 
inoperative by the connection of said mem 
bers and operative automatically when said 
members are disconnected, and a casing en 
tirely surrounding the mechanism in each, 9o 
member, as set forth. 
. . ; 
3. The combination, with the casings, of the 
two members provided with the wires a la', 
having the metallic terminals b b', the slides 
c c, rods did, fingers h h, coupling-hooks if, 95. 
pivoted in the forward ends of said slides, the 
metallic rings ff, and metallic plates gg, as 
; ," 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification, in the presence of Ico 
two subscribing witnesses, this 12th day of 
. 
. . . 
September, 1885. 
JOSEPH. P. A. HANLON. 
JOHN F. HANLON. 
GEORGE O. HANLON. 
. . . . 
; ; ; 
. 
. . 
Witnesses: 
C. F. BROWN, 
H. BROWN, 
IO 
25 
30 
35 
45 
SO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337360.txt	(No Model.) J. T. BALTIMORE & J. F. PADDLEFORD. 
No. 337,360. 
SWINGING GATE, 
Patented Mar. 9, 1886. 
 
282 livesses 
m 242 
c/66 2 m 
2.04 
X 
Juventoz8-4 
A2Zezzzzzaze, a 
ZZZ2eezzAs/27a. 
a 
S3 their &lftov.11cs 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- ... 
-- 
JOHN T. BALTIMORE AND JOHN F. PADDLEFORD OF NORA SPRINGS, IOWA. 
SWING ING GATE. 
SPECEEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 337,360, dated March 9, 1886. 
Application filed November 7, 1885. Serial No. 182, 130. (No model.) 
O 
w 
25 a recess, b. 
To all whon, it malf concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN T. BALTIMORE 
and JoHN F. PADDLEFORD, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Nora Springs, in 
5 the county of Floyd and State of Iowa, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Swinging Gates, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying dra Wings. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
swinging gates; and it consists in the peculiar 
construction and combination of devices that 
will be more fully set forth hereinafter, and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
Fig. 2 is a similar view with 
tion of our gate. 
parts broken away, showing the gate in a 
raised tilted position. Fig. 3 is a top plan 
Fle W. 
w A represents the post to which the gate is 
hinged, and B represents the post, against 
which the gate closes. The inner side of the 
lower end of the latter is provided With par 
allel vertical cleats b, between which is formed 
C represents an upright, which is hinged to 
the post A. On one side of this upright, and 
at a suitable distance therefron), is secured a 
keeper, C, a space being left between the up 
3o right and the keeper, thus forming a slot to 
receive the inner ends of the horizontal bars 
of the gate. 
D represents the gate, which is composed of 
the horizontal bars did, the vertical depend 
35 ing bar dat the outer end, and the vertical 
bad near the inner end. The inner ends of 
the bars did project beyond the bard, and 
the inner end of the bar d is pivoted between 
the upright, and the keeper upon a pivotal 
to bolt, e. This pivots the gate to the keeper, so 
that the gate may be tilted or inclined-that 
is to say, its outer end may be raised or low 
ered. The upright Cprojects vertically above 
the inner end of the gate for a suitable height, 
and the latter has an inclined brace-bar, d. 
To this bar is fulcrumed a lever, E, and a rod, 
e', is pivoted to the upper end of the upright 
and attached to the lever. The Outer end of 
the lower bar, d, of the gate projects beyond 
So the said gate, and fits in the recess b' when the 
gate is closed to lock the latter in that posi 
tion. 
In the lower end of the upright C is a ver. 
tical series of openings, c, by means of which 
45 
o 
a 
a 
the pivotal connection between the gate and 55 
the upright may be raised to permit the gate 
to clear snow-drifts, or for the passage of simall 
animals under the gate. 
In order to open the gate, the outer end of 
the lever is depressed, which raises the outer 6o 
end of the gate to the position shown in Fig. 
2, and clears the bar d' from the recess b, when 
the gate may be very readily SWung open. 
When the gate is opened and the lever re 
leased, the depending-end of the bard comes 
in contact with the ground as the gate lowers, 
and thus prevents the gate from Swinging to 
a closed position. 
No claim is made herein, broadly, to the 
combination of the hinged support, the gate 
pivoted thereto, and a lever for raising and 
lowering the outer end of the gate, as this, we 
are aware, is not broadly novel. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim 
1. The combination of the hinged swinging 75 
upright C, having the vertical series of open 
ings (, the gate, the pivotal bolte, to pivot the 
gate in either of the openings c', to permit the 
gate to be raised or lowered, for the purpose 8o 
set forth, and the lever and rod connecting the 
lever with the upright for tilting the gate, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The gate having the vertical bars d and 
d", and the horizontal rails d and d", having 85 
their ends projecting beyond the bars d' and d. 
the vertical swinging hinged upright C, slot. 
ted at its lower portion to receive the inward 
ly-projecting ends of the gate-rails, the bolte, 
to pivot the lower inner corner of the gate in 
the slotted upright C, the lever E, pivoted to 
the gate, the rode, connecting the said lever 
with the upright C, to raise and lower the outer 
end of the gate, and the post B, against which 
the gate closes, having the recess b on its in 95 
ner side, to receive the outwardly-projecting 
end of one of the gate-rails, and thereby se. 
cure the gate when closed, substantially as de 
scribed. 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as rca 
90 
JOHN T. BALTIMORE. 
JOHN F. PADDLEFORD, 
Witnesses: 
GEO. O. MASON, 
F. I. ABORN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337460.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 337,460, 
M TOMPKINS, 
FIFTH WHEEL, 
 
  
 
Sa 
 
 
2233 
Qs) 
Y 
K (7. 
   
 
 
 
9. 
- to 
voz' 6724as. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MYRON TOMPKINS, OF ATTICA, OHIO. 
FIFTH... WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 337,460, dated March 9, 1886, 
Application filed December 31, 1885. Serial No. 187,197. (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, MYRON TOMPKINS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at At 
tica, in the county of Seneca and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Fifth-Wheels, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
fifth-wheels; and it consists of the peculiar 
construction and combination of parts, Sub 
stantially as hereinafter fully set forth, and 
specifically pointed out in the claims. 
Heretofore in this class of devices the mem 
bers of the fifth-wheels have been generally 
bolted or otherwise suitably mounted on the 
upper face of the axle and its bed, the lower 
member of the wheel being rigidly connected 
to the axle, and the upper member of said 
wheel connected to the lower member so as to 
rotate freely thereon and carrying the bolster 
and springs for the front part of the vehicle 
body. The devices of this class are objection 
able, from the fact that the strain and wear are 
brought upon the axle directly, and the parts 
require frequent repairs and renewals to 
adapt them for use, which is quite expensive. 
In my improved fifth-wheel I locate and 
support the fifth-wheel members beneath the 
axle and its bed, and suspend the head-block 
and spring of the vehicle-body above the axle 
and bed and out of contact there with, the 
head-block and spring being supported on the 
lower member of the fifth wheel, to bring the 
strain, draft, and wear on the king-bolt and 
upper and lower members of the fifth-wheel. 
The means by which attain these results are 
very simple, strong, and durable in their con 
struction, thoroughly effective in operation, 
and cheaper than the ordinary fifth-wheel at 
present in use. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a fifth-wheel constructed 
in accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
central vertical longitudinal Sectional view 
on the line at a of Fig. 1. 
Figs. 3 and 4 are 
detail detached views of the upper and lower 
members of the fifth-wheel, and Fig. 5 is a 
detail view of one of the head-block support 
ing-yokes. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like 
letters of reference indicate corresponding 
parts in all the figures, A. designates an axle; 
B, the bed thereof; C, a head-block located . 
above and out of contact with the axle-bed; 
D, the spring connected to the head-block; F, 
the Supporting-yokes connected to the head 
block and straddling the axle; G, the fifth 
wheel, and K the reach, the peculiar con 
struction and arrangement of the several parts 
above mentioned being fully described here 
inafter. 
The axle and its bed and the head-block 
and spring may be of the form shown in the 
accompanying drawings; or any preferred de 
vices of like character may be substituted for 
all or either of them. 
Each one of the supporting-yokes F (shown 
in detail in Fig. 4) has reduced threaded ends 
f, and at its upper rounded portion is made 
oblong or Square in shape, so that the head 
block C may rest firmly thereon. The yokes 
may have upturned ledges or flanges, that are 
adapted to bear On opposite faces of the head 
block, and the Squared portion of the yokes 
have openings f", through which are passed 
the lower threaded ends of clips f', that serve 
to secure the spring D to the head-block, the 
lower threaded ends of said clips receiving 
nuts to rigidly secure the spring to the head 
block. Two yokes are provided to suspend 
and support the head-block and spring above 
the axle and its bed and out of contact with the 
same, and these yokes are disposed so that 
they straddle the axle and bed thereof, and at 
opposite ends of the head-block. The lower 
reduced ends, f, of the yokes are passed 
through openings i' in the lower member of 
the fifth-wheel, and the yokes are rigidly con 
nected with the said lower member of the 
fifth-wheel by fastening-nuts, as shown. 
The fifth - wheel G comprises two members, 
HI, which are pivotally connected together 
by a king-bolt, J, to permit of the movement 
of said fifth-wheel members when the vehicle 
turns a curve, &c. The upper member, H., 
of the fifth-wheel is shown in detail in Fig. 3, 
and comprises a straight bar of metal of a 
width equal to that of the axle A, against the 
lower or under face of which it bears. The 
ends of said upper member are provided with 
right-angled lugs or clip-barsh, which extend 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
6 p. 
75 
85 
90 
95. 
O) 
337,460 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
O 
45 
SO 
on opposite sides of the axle at each end of the 
upper member, and each of the lugs or clip 
bars is provided with an opening, through 
which passes the lower threaded end of one of 
the arms of a clip, it'. Two of these clips h 
are provided, one for each end of the upper 
member, and these clips serve to rigidly se 
cure the axle, its bed, and the upper member 
of the fifth-wheel together, so that the upper 
member of the wheel moves in unison with the 
axle. At or near its middle the bar-shaped 
upper member of the fifth-wheel has an en 
larged portion, l, which projects beyond 
the axle on opposite sides thereof, and this en 
larged portion has upwardly-projecting lugs, 
h", that bear against opposite faces of the axle 
which is seated therein, to firmly connect the 
parts together and relieve the clips h' at the 
ends of the upper member from a portion of 
the strain and draft. The king - bolt J is 
rigidly secured or connected to the enlarged 
middle portion, h., of the upper member of 
the fifth-wheel by Welding or otherwise, and 
the lower end of the king-bolt is threaded, so 
that an intermediate plane or smooth portion 
is provided between the lower face of the up 
per member of the fifth-wheel and the threaded 
portion of the king-bolt, the lower member, I, 
being fitted SO as to rotate in horizontal planes 
on the smooth portion of the king-bolt, as is 
obvious. The lower member, I, of the fifth 
wheel, which is shown in detailin Fig.4, is made 
similar to an Open ring, and it is strengthened 
and braced by an arm, i, another arm, i, 
connected to the middle of the arm i, and 
arms, i, that extend from the middle portion of 
the brace-arm i to the outer free ends of the 
open ring-like member of the fifth-wheel, all 
of said arms being formed integral or in one 
piece of metal; but I do not desire to confine 
myself to the precise form of the lower mem 
ber of the fifth -wheel shown and described. 
The lower ring-link member of the wheel has 
four openings, i, two of which are provided 
for each of the supporting-yokes F, and the 
brace-arm i has an opening, i, therein, 
through which passes the lower threaded end 
of the king-bolt J. The arm i of the lower 
fifth-wheel member is extended rearwardly, 
and the front end of the reach or perch K is 
connected theretO by bolts, aS shown. A nut, 
is screwed on the lower threaded end of the 
king-bolt, to pivotally connect the upper and 
lower members of the fifth-wheel together, and 
a metallic and a yielding washer are fitted on the 
king-bolt between the nut and the fifth- wheel. 
L. designates a vertically - disposed brace 
that is rigidly bolted at its lower end to the 
reach, and is pivotally connected at its upper 
end to the Spring D or head-block C by a bolt 
and nut. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the drawings, it will be seen 
that the head-block and spring are suspended 
above the axle and its bed, out of engagement 
and contact with the same, and that the weight 
. 
thereof is brought on the lower member of the 
fifth- wheel. The axle is thus relieved of the 
direct weight of the head-block, spring, and 
vehicle-body, and the weight of these parts is 
suspended from the under side of the axe. 
The fifth-wheel is located below and supported 
by the axle, and the yokes are of such pro 
portion and size that the requisite movements 
of the axle is permitted without interference 
or himderance from the yokes. The axle and 
upper member of the fifth-wheel rotate or turn 
together on the lower member thereof, and 
said lower member receives the direct weight 
of the head-block, its spring, and the vehicle 
body, which weight serves to force the lower 
member away from the upper member, and 
thus reduces the friction and wear between 
the members of the fifth-wheel. The reach or 
perch being connected to the lower fifth- wheel 
member, the draft is thus brought thereon and 
on the king-bolt, which transmits it to the up 
per member, and thence to the axle, so that 
the draft is distributed through all the parts. 
I do not desire to confine myself to the pre 
cise construction herein shown and described, 
as I am aware that many changes therein may 
be made without departing from the principle 
of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of an axle, a fifth-wheel 
arranged below the axle, a head-block located 
above and out of contact with the axle, and 
yokes rigidly connected to the head-block 
and the fifth-wheel, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of an axle, a fifth. wheel, 
a head - block, and yokes that straddle the 
axle, and are rigidly connected to the fifth 
wheel and the head-block, to support the lat 
ter out of engagement with the axle, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The combination of an axle and a fifth 
wheel located below the axle, and comprising 
an upper member bolted to the axle, a lower 
member for Supporting a head-block, and a 
king-bolt to pivotally connect the upper and 
lower members, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of an axle, a fifth- wheel 
located beneath and supported by the axle, a 
head-block, and yokes straddling the axle and 
rigidly secured to the lower member of the 
fifth-wheel, substantially as described. 
5. The combination of an axle, a fifth-wheel 
located beneath the axle, a head-block, yokes 
connecting the head-block and lower member 
of the fifth- wheel, and a reach, also connected 
with the lower fifth-wheel member, substan 
tially as described. 
6. The combination of an axle, an upper 
fifth - wheel member having a seat for the 
axle and rigidly connected thereto, a king 
bolt rigidly secured to the upper member, and 
a lower member loosely mounted on the king 
bolt, substantially as described. 
7. The combination of an axle, an upper 
75 
9O 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
25 
 
337,460 
3 
fifth-wheel member rigidly connected thereto, my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
a lower member, a king-bolt, yokes secured presence of three witnesses. 
to the lower member, a head-block rigidly 
connected to the yokes, and a reach connected 
5 to the lower member, the whole arranged and 
adapted to serve substantially as described, 
for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
E. G. SIGGERS, 
H. T. BERNHARD, 
WM. N. MOORE, 
s 
Witnesses: 
MYRON TOMPKINS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337560.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. COOK. 
SALT DRIER, 
No. 337,560, 
Patented Mar. 9, 1886. 
 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH A. COOK, OF AUBURN, NEW YORK, 
SALT DRIER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 337,560, dated March 9, 1886. 
Application filed June 1, 1885. Serial No. 16,316. (No model.) 
To all whon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JosePH. A. COOK, of 
Auburn, in the county of Cayuga and State of 
New York, have invented a new and Improved 
Salt-Drier, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of my new 
and improved salt-drier. Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse Sectional elevation of the same on line 
ac a' of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is a similar view show 
ing a modification. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the drawings, and then pointed out 
in the claim. 
A represents a casing, preferably of wood, 
held by upright frame-pieces B. B. 
In the casing A is placed the trough C, pref. 
erably of sheet metal, in which trough the salt 
to be dried is placed. The trough C may be 
jacketed, as shown at C, Fig. 3, so that steam 
may be supplied to spaces, for heating the 
trough, or steam-pipes D may be placed in the 
wooden casing A, in close proximity to the 
bottom of trough C, as shown in Fig. 2, for 
heating the trough and the salt thereon. 
E is a heating-drum, also for heating and 
drying the salt in the trough C. This drum is 
closed at its ends by suitable heads, which are 
provided with hollow gudgeons FF', by which 
the drum is journaled in the cross-pieces B'B' 
of the frames B. B. The ends of the trough C 
are slotted, as shown at C'C', to receive the 
gudgeons F F, and steam is supplied to the 
drum E for heating it through inlet-pipe G 
and exhausted through pipe H. The pipes 
G H are fitted in the hollow gudgeons FF, 
respectively, as shown. 
Upon the outer surface of the drum E is se 
cured the flange J, that winds spirally around 
IO 
25 
3) 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
the drum, as shown clearly in Fig. 1, so that 
as the drum E is revolved by a belt or pulley, 
K, or otherwise, the flange will act first as an 
agitator for the salt, and secondly as a con 
veyer for moving the salt along in the trough 
C to the discharge pipe L. 
Cast with or attached to the spiral flange 
J are several flanges, angle-irons, or boxes, 
MM, which, as the drum revolves, Serve as 
elevators and act to scoop the salt from the 
bottom of the trough C and elevate it above 
the drum E, and then discharge it over and 
upon the heated drum, which greatly acceler 
ates the drying of the salt. 
This apparatus is applicable also for drying 
sugar and other fine substances. By heating 
both the trough C and drum E the drying is 
done very rapidly, and by employing the 
wooden casing A practically all loss of heat 
by radiation from the sides of the trough C is 
obviated. 
I am aware that the hollow drying-cylinder 
has been provided with a spiral flange on its 
outer surface and inclined Wings extending be 
tween said spirals, and I do not claim such as 
of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A salt-drier consisting of the box A, having 
the heating-pipes in its lower part, the trough 
C, arranged above the heating-pipes and pro 
vided with the discharge-pipe L, the drum E, 
provided with the hollow gudgeons FF, and 
the spiral flange J, having the angle-irons M 
secured thereto and forming elevators, and 
the steam-pipes G. H., projecting through the 
hollow gudgeons into the drum, substantially 
as shown and described. 
JOSEPH A, COOK. 
Witnesses: 
R. M. VAIL, 
F. P. TABER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337660.txt	(Model.) 
A. S. CAMPBELL, 
PALETTE KNIFE AND BRUSH SUPPORTER, 
No. 337,660, 
Patented Mar. 9, 1886, 
Azt. Z. 
 
| 
2. A 
  
 
. 
- WITNESSES 
A /12 
g: 
 
hyl I ". 
i 
"...is 
S &C. 
i. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHURS, CAMPBELL OF MANCHESTER, NEW HAMPSHIRE, 
PALETTE KNIFE AND BRUSH SUPPORTER. 
SPECIEEGATEON forming part of Letters Patent 
No. 337,660, dated March 9, 1886. 
Application filed January 15, 1886. Serial No. 188,619. (Model.) 
t 
65 
To all, who77 it nazy concern: 
Be it known I, ARTHUR. S. CAMPBELL, of 
Manchester, in the county of Hillsborough and 
State of New Hampshire, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Pal 
lette-Knife and Brush Supporters; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
palette-knife and brush supporters. 
The object is to provide a support which 
may be readily and securely attached to paint 
or ink cans, and which will, when so attached, 
support a palette-knife and brush, one or both, 
in a position to drip into the can. 
A further object is to provide a support 
which shall be neat in appearance, and which 
can be manufactured at a slight initial cost. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view of the Support in position for use, and 
Fig. 2 is a transverse section. 
It is 
provided with a longer leg, a, and a shorter 
leg, a', which legs are separated by a narrow 
slot, B, adapted to receive the edge of a paint 
..can, C, as shown. The longer leg, (t, is supposed, 
to rest in contact with the outside of the can, 
and the shorter leg, a', with the inside of the 
can. To secure the standard in position on 
the can, a set-screw, b, is provided, which 
works in a threaded perforation, C, in the lon 
ger leg, and is adapted to impinge against the 
portion of the can located in the slot, B. 
In the upper end of the standard there is a 
narrow slit, c, formed, extending radially from 
the axis of the can, in which slit are secured 
the lower ends of a pair of Spring-arms, D. 
The arms D gradually separate from each other 
as they extend upwardly, and form a rest for 
the blade of a palette-knife. The blade, when 
slightly pressed downwardly between the arms 
ID, is clan) ped in position by their Spring press 
ure against its sides. 
To support the handle of the knife, a brack 
et-like rest is formed, preferably of a single 
A represents a supporting-standard. 
piece of wire, E, one end of which is set firmly 
in the standard A near its upper end. From 
thence the wire extends outwardly in nearly 
a horizontal direction a distance of four inches, 
more or less, to suit the sizes of knife and 
brush for which it is intended, where it is bent 
to form a pair of diverging loop-branches, e. 
It is then returned to the lower portion of the 
standard, making a half-twist around the hori 
zontal portion and curving downwardly and 
inwardly to the point, where its end is firmly 
set in the standard. The handles, knife, and 
brush will restsecurely between the said loop 
branches e, while the blade of the knife and 
the end of the handle to which the brush is 
attached will rest between the spring-arms D. 
The drippings from the end of the knife and 
brush are thus allowed to fall back into the 
can; the handles of the knife and brush are 
kept from becoming soiled; a convenient place 
to lay the knife and brush, when not in use, is 
always at hand, and the rest may be removed 
from and applied to cans of various sizes and 
shapes without any appreciable waste of time, 
It is evident that the shape and size of the 
spring-arms D, the wire-rest E, and the stand 
ard A might be changed, and that the wire 
rest might be made in two or more pieces, in 
stead of one, and of other material than wire, 
without departing from the spirit and scope 
of my invention; hence I do not wish to limit 
myself strictly to the construction herein set 
forth; but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a palette-knife and brush support, the 
combination, with a standard adapted to be 
secured to the edge of a can or pot, of a han 
dle-rest attached to the standard, substantialiy 
as set forth. 
2. In a palette-knife and brush support, the 
combination, with a standard adapted to be 
removably secured to the side of a paint-re- 95 
ceptacle, and provided with diverging arms 
for the reception of a knife-blade or brush, of 
a handle-support attached to the Standard, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a palette-knife and brush support, a 
bifurcated standard adapted to embrace the 
edge of a can, and provided with a pair of 
9) 
LCO 
O 
25 
35 
SO 
337,660 
spring-arms set in its upper end, adapted to of a bent-wire bracket extending outwardly 
from the standard and provided with a pair 15 
receive the knife or brush, or both, substan 
tially as set forth. 
of branches adapted to receive the handle of 
4. In a palette-knife and brush supporter, 
a knife or brush between them, substantially 
5 the combination, with a bifurcated standard 
as set forth. 
having a longer and a shorter leg, and pro 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
vided with a pair of diverging spring-arms set 
Specification in the presence of two subscrib- 2d 
in its upper end, and with a set-screw for lock 
ing witnesses. 
ing it to a can, of a handle-support secured to 
5. In a palette-knife and brush supporter, 
the combination, with a standard adapted to 
be renuovably Secured to a paint-receptacle, 
IO the standard, substantially as set forth. 
ARTHUR, S, CAMPBELL, 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT O. BROWN, 
EDWIN F. JONES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337761.txt	(No Model.) 
A, FRENCH, 
THILL COUPLING, 
No. 337,761. 
Patented Mar. 9, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
// 
SS 22 
22 
2 2 2 
7 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT FRENCH, OF EAST ROCKPORT, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
ALFRED FRENCH, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
TH 
COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 337,761, dated March 9, 1886. 
Application filed September 12, 1885. Serial No. 176,877. (No mod 1.) 
Sae. 
To all, it'? O7], it navy concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERT FRENCH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at East Rock 
port, in the county of Cuyahoga and State of 
5 Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Thill-Couplings; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable other's skilled in the art to 
lo which it appeltains to make and use the 
My invention relates to thill-couplings, the 
object being to provide a device of this char 
acter whereby all lateral movement of the 
I5 thill-iron in the draw-iron and the conse 
quent rattling are prevented. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a thill-coupling possessing the above 
mentioned advantage which may be manu 
2O factured at a comparatively slight cost, one 
that will be strong and durable and not likely 
to get out of Order. 
My invention consists in the details of con 
struction and combinations of parts herein 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a thill-coupling embodying lny in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical sec 
tion of the same. Fig. 3 is a transverse verti. 
3ocal section, and Fig. 4 is a detail view of the 
bushing removed. 
Corresponding parts in the several figures 
are denoted by the Saline letters of reference. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
35 portion of the axle, secured to which is a clip, 
B, said clip having threaded ends. Fitting 
upon and connecting the ends of the clip is a 
bar or plate, C, and holding Said plate in place 
are nuts a, which engage the threaded ends of 
D represents the draw-iron, which projects 
outwardly from the clip, and is preferably 
formed integral there with. This draw-iron 
consists of two outwardly - extending ears, 
45 each of which is provided with an opening, b. 
E represents the thill-iron, which is adapted 
to be bolted or otherwise firmly secured to 
the thill. This thill-iron E is formed with a 
head, d, which has a transverse opening or 
25 after fully described and claimed. 
4o the clip. 
50 passage. 
 
Within the opening or passage of the head 
d is formed a shoulder, f, which is preferably 
circumferential, and is located midway the 
ends of the head. This shoulder f may be 
formed by reaming out the head from op. 55 
posite sides. 
G represents a sectional bushing, which is 
preferably of elastic material, Such as rub 
ber or leather. The two parts or sections of 
the bushing G are passed through the open- 6c 
ings in the ears of the draw-iron, and bear 
with their inner ends against the shoulder f, 
their outer ends resting in the openings of the 
ears of the draw.iron. 
H represents a headed bolt, which passes 
through the bushing or packing, and which 
is held in place to secure the parts together 
by a rut, g. The Outer ends of the sections 
of the elastic bushing bear against the head 
of the bolt and the nut, and they serve as 
cushions for the same to prevent their wear 
and rattling. It will be observed that as the 
ends of the sectional bushing bear against the 
sides of the shoulder the lateral movement 
of the thill-iron is prevented, and as the bush 
ing fits tightly in the openings forward and 
backward movement of the thill-iron is also 
prevented. 
I am aware that it is not broadly new to 
provide the opening of a thill with a sectional 
bushing having its outer ends located in the 
opening of the draw-iron and forming a bear 
ing for the pivotal bolt its entire length; but 
in constructions of this class, So far as I am 
acquainted, conical openings have been pro 
vided in the draw and thill irons, and a coni 
cal sectional bushing employed in combina 
tion with a bolt made conical for half its length. 
This construction of coupling has never been 
brought into general use, owing to its expensive 
construction, a special form of bolt being 
necessary, which, if lost, could only be replaced 
by the manufacturer. The bushings are not 
alike, one of then having a smooth interior 
bore, and the other a conical bore to fit the 95 
conical portion of the bolt. 
My construction differs from the construc 
tion before mentioned in that Imake the open 
ings of both the thill and draw irons plain, and 
provide a plain tubular bushing to fit in the Ioo 
90 
5 
2 
337,761 
of said bushing bearing against oppositesides 
of the shoulder f, and their outer ends bear 
ing in the openings of the draw-iron, and the 
bolt A, corresponding to and passing through 
the opening in the bushing and a nut, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
Intestimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ALBERT FRENCH, 
Witnesses: 
A. J. MARWIN, 
M. G. NORTON. 
5 cost of manufacture to the minimum. 
thill-iron and have its ends rest in the open 
ings of the draw-iron and in combination with 
a plain or ordinary bolt, thereby greatly sim 
plifying the construction and reducing the 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
The combination, with the draw and thill 
irons having cylindrical openings, and an in 
Io terior circumferential shoulder in the thill 
iron, of a sectional cylindrical bushing having 
plain inner and outer surfaces, the inner ends 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337862.txt	(No Model.) 
A. PERRY. 
CLASP. 
No. 337,862, 
Patented Mar. 16, 1886. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUSTIN PERRY, OF FLORENCE, KANSAS. 
CLASP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 337,862, dated March 16, 1886. 
Application filed August 6, 1885. 
Serial No. 173,76S. (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, AUSTIN PERRY, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Flor 
ence, in the county of Marion and State of 
Kansas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Clasps; and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
The invention relates to means for hanging 
up pans, pails, wash-boilers, sauce-pans, stone 
pots, skillets, and other kitchen utensils. 
Hitherto some have been hung on nails, hooks, 
and similar devices, while other's have been 
kept in boxes, on benches, or upon shelves. 
The object of my invention is to furnish the 
public with a clasp upon which any of these 
utensils may be hung up, so as to be out of 
the way, while it will no longer be necessary 
to disfigure walls with nails and analogous 
devices. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a side elevation 
showing the peculiar form of any clasp. Fig. 
2 is a front view showing an article with a 
loop or hole and suspended in the ordinary 
way. Fig. 3 is a similar view showing an 
article without any means of being hung up 
on a nail or hook. Fig. 4 shows an article 
held in an upward position, when so desired. 
In the drawings, A represents my clasp, 
made, preferably, but not necessarily, of flat 
plate metal, and provided with one or more 
holes, a, by which it may be screwed or other 
wise secured to a support. It is bent at a', a, c, 
a', and a, the bend or lip a being carried some 
distance beyond the bend or lip a. By this 
construction I make a cavity, a, which allows 
the edge of an article to first descend and then 
ascend, so that the parts a a will obtain a 
firm grip upon it, while the weight of the ar 
ticle will be thrown so as to insure the neces 
Sary friction. 
If the article has a loop handle or hole, it 
may be suspended as from a hook or nail, as 
shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings; but if it has 
neither of these it may be held as shown in 
Figs. 3 or 4 of the drawings. Thus it will be 
perceived that my clasp permits all utensils 
to be hung up, so as to present a tidy aspect 
in the kitchen. 
Having thus described all that is necessary 
to a full understanding of my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to protect by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The described kitchen-utensil clasp formed 
of a metallic plate, bent, as described, at a? a 
a'a' (c, the bend a being carried beyond the 
bend a, to form the cavity a', and provided 
with the attaching-shank A, as shown and de 
scribed. 
45 
55 
AUSTIN PERRY. 
Witnesses: 
C. M. SANGER, 
JULIUS MERCET. 
IO 
5 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US337962.txt	p (No Model.) 
W. L., KLING, 
DEWICE FOR CONVERTING MOTION. 
No. 337,962, 
Patented Mar. 16, 1886, 
SN 
 
 
 
A. 
2NSz 
O 
Az7ess eas. S Z7zve 724or 
2...wa. ca, 
N %% 
% 
tira-Ma'ssor. 
M 
6/ x6, 772&aso av/ 
y 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM L. KLING, OF ST. CLOUD, MINNESOTA. 
D E W C E FOR CONVERTING MOT ON. 
3ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 337,962, dated March 16, 1886. 
Application filed August 22, 1885. Serial No. 15,109. No model.) 
To all Luton, it may concen: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAAI L. KLING, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at St. 
Cloud, in the county of Stearns and State of 
Minnesota, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Machines for Converting 
iIotion, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in ma 
chines for converting reciprocating into ro 
tary motion; and it consists in the combination 
and arrangement of a treadle with spools, 
straps, a pawl and ratchet, and other connec 
tions hereinafter described, and specifically 
Set forth in claims, and also illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure i is a perspective view of the ma 
chine. Fig. 2 is a side view of the operating 
parts Connected with the main shaft of the ma 
chine. Fig. 3 is a transverse vertical section 
of the shaft, showing the ratchet and pawl. 
Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section of the main 
shaft and parts mounted thereon. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
The machine is represented as used to drive 
a circular Saw, but it may be used to drive a 
lathe, boring-machine, corn-sheller, churn, 
grindstone, velocipede, and other machines. 
In the present instance it is carried by a frame, 
A, formed of four uprights united at the top 
and bottom by cross bars and sills. 
Upon the cross-bars A is mounted in suit 
able bearings, a, the main shaftBof the machine. 
Upon one end of the shaft is secured a fly 
wheel, C, having cast and formed upon one 
end of its hub a small ratchet-wheel, c. Upon 
the opposite end of the shaft B is loosely 
mounted a sleeve, D, to which is secured at d 
One end of the machine-driving strap E and 
of the strap F, used to give a back movement 
to the sleeve D and its pawl. This sleeve is 
provided with collars d', to prevent the straps 
from leaving the location allotted to them upon 
the sleeve while being coiled thereon. The 
opposite end of the strap E is secured at e upon 
the treadle G, through which foot-power is 
given to the machine. 
To connect the opposite end of the strap F 
out the Several views. 
l 
65 
with the treadle, there is secured upon the latter 
a bar, G', bent in the form of an inverted U, the 
branches of which straddle the shaft and rest 
upon the treadle, while to the under side of 
the bent portion or arch of said bar is Secured 55 
the upper end of said strap F. The straps E 
and F are coiled upon the sleeve D in oppo 
site directions, so that while one of them is 
wound the other is unwound. The inner end 
of the sleeve D is provided with two radial 6o 
arms having projections D and D parallel 
with the axis of said sleeve. The projection 
Disradially slotted to receive the outer end of 
the pawl d, and a pin, d, passing loosely 
through said outer end and into the projection 
D', retains the pawl connected with the latter. 
To cause the inner end of the pawl to 
promptly engage with the teeth upon the 
ratchet-wheel without the help of a spring 
upon the said pawl while pressure is brought 
down upon the treadle, and also to cause the 
pawl to pass silently over the teeth of the 
ratchet-wheel without touching them while 
said pawl is going back for a new hold, there 
is mounted loosely upon the shaft B, between 
the ratchet-wheel and the inner end of the 
sleeve, a disk, H, from the outer face of which 
projects a small pin, h, that is made to fit slot d" 
in the pawl. By this construction, while the 
operator rapidly presses upon the treadle 
the strap E revolves the sleeve forward, and 
with it its projections D, carrying the heel of 
the pawl forward, while inertia detains the 
disk H and causes the point of the pawl to 
engage with the teeth of the ratchet-wheel and 
revolve it and with it the fly-wheel C. Under 
the inverse motion of the treadle-that is, while 
it is going up-thestrap Frevolves the sleeve in 
the opposite direction, and with it its projec 
tion D", carrying the heel of the pawl rearward, 
while inertia or the slight adhesion of the disk 
H to the shaft, or previously acquired momen 
tum, causes the pawl to be rocked upon its 
middle pin, h, and its point to be disengaged 
and kept elevated away from the periphery 
of the ratchet-wheel. The projection D sim 
ply acts as a balance-weight for the projection 
D". One end of the treadle is pivoted to a 
transverse rod, g, retained in bearings upon 
two of the uprights of the frame; and to bring Ico 
85 
75 
90 
95 
2 S 
35 
45 
SO 
 
337,962 
5 
O 
and retain said treadle to an elevated position 
it is connected, by means of a strap, g, with 
the looped middle portion of a wire spring, g, 
that has its ends coiled around and secured to 
a horizontal brace, A', secured to the stand 
ards above the pivot-rods g of the treadle. 
The fly-wheel is connected in this instance by 
a belt, C, with a small pulley upon the shaft 
8, carrying a circular saw, S, to rotate the lat 
ter at a high speed. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
I claim- 
1. The combination of a treadle, the bar G", 
extending upward therefrom, the sleeve D, 
having two straps coiled arounditin opposite. 
directions and provided with projections D' 
and D, a pawl pivoted thereto, and a ratchet 
wheel connected with a driving-wheel, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination of the main shaft B, its 
sleeve having projections, as D", a pawl piv. 
- 
oted thereto at one end and having a slot, d", 
about the middle of its length, with the disk 
H, mounted loosely upon the main shaft and 
having a pin entering the slot of the pawl, and 
a ratchet-wheel secured upon the shaft, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination of a treadle, the bar G, 
extending upward therefrom, the sleeve D, 
having two straps coiled aroundit and provided 
with projections, as D', a pawl pivoted there 
to, a disk, H, connected with said pawl, and 
a ratchet-wheel upon the main shaft with the 
strap g and spring g, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM L. KLING, 
Witnesses: 
ANDREW C. ROBERTSON, 
MARTIN MOLITOR. 
25 
35 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338062.txt	(Model.) 
W. C. HAMNER, 
FARM GATE, 
No. 338,062, 
Patented Mar, 16, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
 
W 
N 
s 
ETI ITTI 
? - 
s 
 
  
 
sis, 
TTTTTTTT || 
s 21 
s 
WITNESSES 
26 
2% 
Y 2%r 
-64 seco( 
R. 
2% INVENTOR: 
26.7% 
BY do? 
QC-YY - 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, washington. f. c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. HAMINER, OF MORGANFIELD, KENTUCKY. 
FARM 
GATE. 
3. CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 338,062, dated Marcin 16, 1886. 
Application filed August 28, 1885. 
Serial No. 175,564. (Model.) 
55 
To all whon, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. C. HAMNER, 
of Morganfield, in the county of Union and 
State of Kentucky, have invented a new and 
Improved Farm-Gate, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved farm-gate, which can be 
opened and closed some distance from either 
side of the gate by a pedestrian or a person in 
a vehicle or on horseback, and which gate is 
locked and unlocked automatically. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts and details, as will 
be fully set forth and described hereinafter, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved gate. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged detail view of the locking 
device. 
The gate A is hung on a post, B, and its 
free end Swings against a post, C. The top 
rail, D, projects beyond the hinged end of the 
gate, and on the projecting end of the said top 
rail a lever, G, is pivoted, the inner end of 
which is connected by a rod or wire, F, with 
the upper end of a lever, E, pivoted on the 
gate, and passing through a notch, D', in one 
side edge of the top rail, D. 
The sliding bolt H, passed through the 
swinging end part of the gate, is pivoted to 
the lever E, and is acted upon by a spring-rod, 
J, secured to the gate and bolt, and pressing 
the bolt in the direction of the swinging end 
of the gate. 
On a croSS - bar, K, on the inner sile of 
the post C, two latches, L, are pivoted at the 
outer ends of said cross-bar, and the latches 
are provided at their inner ends with notches 
M. The upper prongs, MI, of the latches rest 
on pins N, projecting from the inner side of 
the post C. 
Some distance from each side of the gate a 
post, O, is erected, against which the free end 
of the gate can swing, the Said posts having 
stop-boards Q', against which the end of the 
gate can rest. 
On the upper end of each post O an arm, P, 
is secured, having eyes Q, through which the 
ropes R are passed, which have rings or han 
dles S on the outer ends, and their inner ends 
are connected with the outer end of the lever G. 
The operation is as follows: When the gate 
is closed, the end of the bolt His between the 
lower prongs, M, of the latches L. To open 
the gate either handle S is drawn down, where 
by the lever G is swung in such a manner as 
to Swing the upper end of the ever E in the 
direction toward the hinged end of the gate, 
thus disengaging the bolt from the latches. 
When the lever E rests against one end of the 
notch D', the said lever E cannot be swung 
farther, and by continued drawing of the han 
dle S the gate is swung in the direction from 
the person and against the post O, opposite 
the one at which the handle is being pulled. 
The person can pass the gate, and after having 
passed, the other handle S is drawn and the 
gate swung against the post C. The end 
of the bolt H Striking the bottom of a latch, 
L., raises it, and after the bolt H has passed the 
inner end of the latch it drops, and the boltis 
thus held between the inner ends of the latches 
and is locked automatically. The pins N pre 
vent the latches L. from dropping too far. 
By pivoting the arms P so that they extend 
Out Over the road, the handles S are brought 
within easy leach of a driver, who can oper 
ate the gate-opening mechanism without leav 
ing his seat. The arm IP can easily be pushed 
back when loads of hay, straw, &c., pass 
through the gate, so that the full width of the 
road may be had. If the arms extended into the 
road and were not pivoted, travel would be 
interfered with, and the said arms would be 
broken off. 
I am aWare that a gate has had a bar extend 
ing from its rear end, on which were level's 
connecting the same with the gate-latch, the 
posts at opposite sides of the gate having piv 
oted levers provided with ropes for operating 
the gate and its latch; and I do not claim the 
same as of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with the gate hinged to 
a post, B, the top rail of the gate extending 
over the top of said post, the latch H, the ver 
90 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
SO 
 
2 
338,062 
2 
 
tical lever E, the horizontal lever G, pivoted and a lever for operating the latch, of the side 
on the extension of the top rail, the rod F, posts, O O, the arms P, pivoted at their inner 
connecting the lever E with the inner end of ends to said posts, the guides Q, Q on the arms, 
the horizontal lever G, and the posts OO at and the cords R, said cords being connected 15 
5 oppositesides of the post B, of the arms P, piv- with the gate-latch-operating lever and ex 
oted to the posts at their inner ends, the guides tending longitudinally over the arms P and 
Q on said arms, and the cords R, connected to through the guides Q, substantially assetforth. 
the Outer end of the horizontal lever and ex- 
tending through the guides on the arms PP, 
2. The combination, with a gate, its latch, 
KEN. CHAPEZE, 
J. J. CONN. 
Io substantially as set forth. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM C. HAMINER, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338162.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. BURNS 
PROPELLING AND STEERING WESSELS, 
No. 338,162, 
P 
Patented Mar. 16, 1886. 
 
--- 
 
Z, 2. 
1zzes 
o 
ust. 
t 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographur, Washington.0, C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. BURNS, OF ST. LOUIS, MISS OUR I. 
PROPELLING AND STEERING VESSELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 338,162, dated March 16, 1886. 
Application filed April 6, 1885. Serial No. 161,264. (No model.) 
steer the boat when the boat or vessel is pass 
ing through the water, and it will be seen that 
by means of the propeller, when in the posi 
tion shown in Figs. 2 and 3, the boat or vessel 
may be turned around without having any 
end Wise movement in the water. 
An inclined position of the propeller is 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3. 
I have shown the frame G as little more 
than a simple frame, the bars having no great 
width in the plane of the frame; but it may 
be preferred to extend the frame so as to form 
a rudder, as shown by dotted lines in Figs. 1 
and 3. 
I am aware that it is not broadly new to se 
cure a screw-propeller within the rudder-frame 
and connect it to the operating-shaft through 
gearing, and do not claim such, broadly, as 
my invention. 
I claim 
In a steering-propeller, the combination of 
the brackets C and D, the oscillating frame G, 
stepped into said brackets, the tiller-shaft E, 
connected to the frame G, the short vertical 
shaft I, journaled at both ends in the frame 
G concentrically with its axis of oscillation, 
the propeller-shaft H, journaled at its ends in 
said frame, the propeller-screw secured to said 
propeller-shaft at a point intermediate of its 
journals, the beveled cog-wheel J on said pro 
peller-shaft, the operating-shaft O, having the 
beveled cog-wheel N, and the beveled gearse 
cured to the vertical shaft L and connecting 
the operating-shaft with the propeller-shaft, 
all constructed and arranged to operate sub 
stantially as set forth. 
WILLIAM. H. BURNS. 
55 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
SAML. KNIGHT, 
GEO. H. KNIGHT. 
5 
O 
15 
25 
35 
keel. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. BURNS, of 
the city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Propelling and Steering Appa 
ratuses, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming part of 
this specification. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the improvement 
when the screw-shaft is in line with the keel 
of the vessel. Fig. 2 shows the screw in end 
view, its shaft being at right angles with the 
keel. Fig. 3 is a detail horizontal section at 
33, Fig. 2, showing the propeller-screw and 
its supporting-frame in top view. 
A is the stern portion of a vessel, and B the 
- 
C and D are brackets in which the tiller 
shaft Thas bearing. 
F is a tiller by which the tiller-shaft may 
be turned; but I do not confine myself to this 
means of turning said shaft, as any device may 
Upon the tiller 
be used for this purpose. 
shaft is fixed a frame, G, in which the shaft 
H of the propeller-screw I has bearing. Up 
on the shaft H is a bevel cog-wheel, J, which 
engages a bevel cog-wheel, K, upon a vertical 
shaft, T, which has bearing at the ends in the 
frame G, and whose axis is in line with the 
axis of the tiller-shaft, so that the turning of 
the tiller-shaft does not affect the position of 
the shaft L. Upon the shaft L is a bevel cog 
wheel, M, which engages with a bevel-wheel, 
N, upon the shaft O, which is rotated by the 
steam-engine. 
It will be readily seen that the propeller 
may have continuous rotation while the tiller 
shaft is turned upon its bearings, and that 
when the propeller-shaft is inclined to either 
side the propeller will operate as a rudder to 
n 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338262.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 338,262, 
G. G. GIBSON. 
STREET SCRAPER AND SNOW PLOW, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 23, 1886. 
G. G. GIBSON. 
STREET SCRAPER AND SNOW PLOW. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 23, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
No. 338,262, 
N - 
 
Sn 
w 
A. 
s 
zusa 
-4zzaszy 
1644. 
css 
772-2ZZZZZy 
z7-27.7zoz. 
es 5%a. 
3 762 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographer, washington, D. c. 
 
h 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE G. GIBSON, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
STREET SCRAPER AND SNOW-PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 338,262, dated March 23, 1886. 
Application filed January 5, 1886. Serial No. 187,727. 
(No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whon, it invay concer'7. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE G. GIBSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at St. 
Louis, in the State of Missouri, have invented 
certain new and usefullmprovementsin Street. 
Scrapers and Snow-Plows; and I hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a plan view, Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation, and Fig. 3 is an enlarged detail view, 
of a scraper or snow-plow embodying my in 
wention. 
Like letters refer to like parts wherever they 
OCC 
My present invention relates to the con 
struction of street-scrapers and snow-plows 
for cleaning streets and roads, and though of 
general utility, wherever such apparatus is re 
quired it is of special utility where the streets 
are paved, where car-tracks, uneven surfaces, 
gutters, or raised crossings exist. 
Heretofore, so far as I am aware, the blade 
or scraper of this class of machines, which is 
usually set angling or obliquely to the line of 
draft, has been continuous or rigid, and as a 
result illy adapted to resist the shocks and 
strains to which it is constantly submitted; 
Or it has been made up of independent sec 
tions, like a series of detached hoes or shovels, 
each section dependent for its power on its 
own gravity or a spring or springs. 
One difficulty experienced with rigid or 
single-bladed scrapers has been that whenever 
a raised crossing or similar obstruction was 
met the blade must be raised, and thus skip 
the crossing, or, if allowed to drag, when the 
leading end strikes the obstruction the whole 
blade is raised, which causes it to skip or leave 
portions of the street untouched. When the 
leading end of the ligid scraper strikes the 
crossing or other obstruction, a strain as well 
as a shock is given the whole blade, which 
frequently results in its destruction. 
The objection to a blade made up of shortin 
dependent spring or gravity sections lies in the 
lack of power or strength in, said sections, 
their liability to get out of repair and become 
practically inoperative, the unequal distribu 
tion of the strain on the plow and frame, and 
the somewhat complex character of the con 
struction. 
The object of the present invention is to So 
modify the construction and attachment of 
the scraper as to avoid the objections herein 
before referred to; and to this end it consists, 
first, in providing a sectional practically con 
tinuous or flexible scraper-blade made up of 
sections loosely or pivotally united one with 
another, which shall accommodate itself to the 
surface on which it is operating, so as to do 
its work thoroughly and with the least strain 
on the apparatus, while each section shall be 
held down to its work by its fellows, have the 
power incident to the weight of the whole 
blade, and the strain shall be equalized or dis 
tributed over the several sections, and thus in 
a measure neutralized; secondly, in providing 
a saddle or yoke for preserving the continuous 
and operative relation of the sections which 
compose the scraper, so that they may ac 
commodate themselves to the surface over 
which they pass without loss of continuity and 
power. 
There are minor points of novelty which 
will hereinafter more fully appear. 
In the drawings, Aindicates the bed of the 
car or carriage from which the scraper is sus 
pended by chain, ropes, or in any approved or 
suitable manner. 
B indicates the scraper, which is made up 
of a series of plates, b, pivoted on each other, 
as at , so as to insure flexibility of the blade 
as a whole and enable each section to adapt 
itself to the surface over which it is passing 
without disturbing or displacing the other 
plates of the series. This scraper-blade com 
posed of the pivoted plates b is connected at 
each end by a pivotal bolt, c and c, to a stretch 
er-bar, C, which occupies the position of the 
usual plank straight-edged scraper in Common 
use, and said stretcher C, whose only function 
is to sustain the flexible blade and maintain 
the vertical position of the plates, may be of 
plank or any suitable material. 
In order to permit the movement of the . 
plates or scraper longitudinally sufficient to 
render them capable of accommodating them 
selves to inequalities, or to concave or convex 
surfaces, both of which are found on car-tracks 
and most roads, one of the bolts, c, moves in 
a slot which may be made either in the plate 
or in the stretcher C. The several plates are 
each connected with a suspension-bar, D, by 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
338,262 
and the flexible or floating blade B will, by the 
independent movement of its plates b, accom 
modate itself to the character of the surface 
over which any part of the blade is passing. 
If a crossing or gutter is encountered, each 
plate will in its turn sag or enter, and pass 
from the gutter or rise and ride over the cross 
ing without straining or disturbing the re 
maining Sections, and the play of the section 
on bolt c will allow the blade to expand or 
contract to pass the horizontalline in dropping 
from a convex into a concave track. 
Having thus described the nature, advan 
tages, and operation of my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a scraper or snow-plow, a flexible or 
floating scraper made up of sections loosely 
or pivotally united one with another, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
2. In a scraper or snow-plow, the combina 
tion, with a scraper, of a flexible or sectional 
Wing-piece composed of two or more plates 
loosely or pivotally connected, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
3. In a scraper or snow-plow, the combina 
tion of a floating or flexible scraper composed 
of pivoted sections and a stretcher, the parts 
connected by a pivot or journal having a slot 
ted bearing, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
4. In a scraper or snow-plow, the combina 
tion of a flexible scraper, a stretcher, and a 
saddle-brace, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
5. In a scraper or snow-plow, the combina 
tion of a flexible scraper, a stretcher, a saddle 
brace, and a suspension-bar with which the 
sections of the flexible scraper are each inde 
pendently connected, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 30th day of 
December, 1885. 
GEORGE G. GIBSON. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE M. BLOCK, 
F. W. RITTER, Jr. 
55 
75 
90 
IO 
15 
a chain or other flexible connection, d, and, if 
desired, the plates may have shanks or arms 
d for attaching the chain, though this latter 
feature is not essential. The suspension-bar 
D is in turn connected by a chain or other 
flexible connection, d, with a lever, E, pivot 
ed on the car or carriage bed A, which lever 
serves to raise or lower the scraper. 
Findicates a saddle or brace bar, which is 
supported or rides on the stretcher C, and, if 
desired, may be secured thereto by clamp-bolts 
or screws f. This brace-bar F aids in pre 
venting the tilting of the sections or plates b 
when the scraper is in use. It is valuable, 
but not essential, as the apparatus works well 
without it. 
G indicates the wings of the scraper or that 
portion which extends beyond the pivot-bolt 
C, and is composed of two or more plates, the 
outer one, or both, of which is controlled by 
a rope or chain, g, passing over a pulley, g', 
to the lever Eor other fastening within reach 
of the driver. In case of single-plate wings, 
only level or evenly-inclined surfaces can be 
5 scraped, whereas by sectioning this wing 
piece irregular surfaces may be cleaned. The 
scraper, as usual, is set angling or obliquely to 
the line of travel, and is properly supported by 
diagonal bracesh, of wood, iron, or any suit 
able material, which extend from the stretcher 
C to the frame - work thereof, as shown in 
Fig. 1. 
It will be noted on reference to Fig. 3 that 
the devices are shown as in use for scraping a 
car-track, as they are specially adapted for 
removing snow, &c., therefrom. For such 
purposes the outer plates or sections, which. 
are pivoted on the stretcher, should be curved 
in on the edge, as at m, so as to come within 
the rail, and this will be of special importance 
where the track may be either convex or gut 
tered, as shown in dotted line, Fig. 3, or worn 
irregular by the travel. 
The devices being substantially as herein 
before described, the scraper will be lowered 
into operation in the usual manner by means 
of the lever E and ropeg, the stretcher bar or 
. plank riding the rail, (if for clearing tracks,) 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338362.txt	(No Model.) , 
J. REESE. 
APPARATUS FOR REDUCING METAL RODS OR WIRE, 
No. 338,362, 
Patented Mar. 23, 1886, 
  
 
 
  
 
OCO 
ERN. 
iAirfighly 
  
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washingtor, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB REESE, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
A PPARATUS FOR REDUCING META R O S OR WR E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 338,362, dates AS arch 23, 1886. 
Application filed March 17, 1884. 
Serial No. 124,450. (No model.) 
25 
5 
IO 
To all whom it invay concern: 
Beit known that I, JACOB REESE, a citizen 
of the United States, and a resident of Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in a Plant for Reduc 
ing Metals; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 indicates a plan view of an im 
proved apparatus for reducing metals. Fig. 
2 indicates a longitudinal vertical sectional 
view of the same, taken through at the lines 
at a shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 indicates a side 
elevation of the same. Fig. 4 indicates a front 
elevation of a set of roll-standards in which a 
set of rolls and a guide-box are mounted. Fig. 
5 indicates a plan view of the same. Fig. 6 
indicates a front view of a section of a bifur 
cated water-pipe in position over the rod or 
wire, to allow the cooling medium to flow down 
upon and cool the same. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
wherever they occur. 
My invention relates to a new and useful 
plant for reducing metallic rods, blanks, or 
wires, which consists in drawing the metal by 
tension through a set of rolls. 
The principal objects of the invention are 
to secure a rapid reduction of the metal, and 
to secure economy and durability in the op 
eration and construction of the drawing mech 
anism. 
I shall now proceed to describe the construc 
tion and operation of mechanism adapted to 
the use of my invention, so that others skilled 
in the art may make and use the same. 
In the drawings, Aindicates the frame which 
supports the drawing mechanism. 
B indicates the drawing spool or pulley, 
which is mounted on the upper end of a ver 
tical spindle provided at its lower end with 
a beveled gear-wheel, which meshes into and 
receives motion from a similar beveled gear 
wheel mounted on One end of the horizontal 
main driving-shaft b. 
B indicates the delivering-spool, which is 
mounted on the upper end of a vertical shaft 
5o journaled in the forward part of the furnace 
C in such a manner as to allow its ready ro 
35 
40 
45 
 
55 
75 
tation by the tension produced on the metal 
by the rotary movement of the receiving or 
drawing spool. 
DD indicate a set of roll-housings, open at 
the top to admit the insertion and withdrawal 
of a set of rolls, and provided with cap-pieces 
d d, which are secured and held in position by 
the cap-bolts d' d. 
d d indicate the tightening-screws, which 
work in threaded-boxes in the cap-pieces and 
project down into the top journal-boxes of the 
upper roll, in Order to regulate the pressure 
of the same upon the metal during the draw 
ing operation. These standards are provided 
with a guide-box immediately in front of the 
rolls, to hold the metal up and enter it prop 
erly into the groove of the rolls. 
E indicates a section of a bifurcated pipe, 
which extends down at the rear of the hous 
ings to convey water or other cooling medium 
onto the metai directly after it has passed 
through the rolls, the idea being to cool the 
metal after its passage, so that the tension 
upon it will be incapable of reducing its cross 
sectional area, except at the instant it passes 
from the rolls to the cooling medium. 
The operation of the improvement is as fol 
lows: Coils of rods or wire pointed in the usual 
manner are placed in the furnace and properly 
heated. One of the coils is then placed on the 
delivering-spool, and fle pointed end of the 
coil is drawn forward through an aperture in 
the front of the furnace, then through the 
guide-box and groove of the rolls, and is at 
tached to the drawing-spool in the usual man 
ner. The mechanism now being in condition 
for operating, power is applied to the main 
driving-shaft, rotating the same and impart 
ing a rotary movement through the medium 
of its gearing to the drawing pulley. This 
movement of the drawing-pulley pulls the wire 
forward through the groove of the rolls and 
imparts a rotary movement to the latter, and 
also causes the metal to unwind from and ro 
tate the delivering-spool. At the moment the 
wire commences to draw forward, jets of water 
or the cooling medium are permitted to flow 
down through the bifurcated pipe onto the 
metal as the latter passes from the rolls to the 
drawing-pulley. This operation is continued 
until all the metal is drawn through the rolls 
95 
IO 
s 
338,362 
drawn at a high rate of velocity through the 
groove. Another difficulty is, ordinary rolls 
frequently slip over the metal and do not 
draw into the groove when a heavy draft is 
made upon the metal; but in this invention 
the amount of draft is only limited by the 
breaking strength of the metal. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a plant for reducing metals, the con 
bination, with delivering and receiving spools, 
of an intermediate set of reduction-rolls re 
volved solely by the moving wire, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In a plant for reducing metals, the com 
bination, with delivering and receiving spools, 
of an intermediate set of reduction-rolls re 
volved solely by the moving wire, and a roll 
guide-box located between the delivering and 
receiving spools, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a plant for reducing metals, the Com 
bination, with a set of reducing-rolls, of a pipe 
for conveying a cooling agent to the heated 
metal after its passage from the rolls, substan 
tially as set forth. 
JACOB REESE. 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
Witnesses:- 
FRANK M. REESE, 
WALTER REESE. 
. . 
and wound up upon the receiving-spool, when 
another coil is operated upon in a similar mann 
le. When it is desired to reduce the metal cold, 
the furnace, the heating, and the use of the 
cooling jets are dispensed with, and the metal 
is drawn from the delivering to the receiving 
spool in a similar manner. 
It will be observed that my mode of reduc 
tion differs from the ordinary mode of rolling 
in that the metal is drawn by tension through 
the rolling-surfaces. 
Heretofore wire rods have not been rolled 
down below No. 5 gage. 
One of the reasons 
why such has been the case is, the size of the 
rolls should be decreased in proportion to the 
decreased size of the metal to be roled, and 
the difficulty in gearing up the rolls to run at 
the required rate of speed increases in propor 
tion to the reduction of the size of the gearing 
which must be employed. Consequently the 
rolls and their gearing could not be reduced 
sufficiently in size and rotated at the extreme 
ly-high rates of speed demanded for successful 
operation upon smaller gages; but in the use 
of my invention, where I dispense with roll 
gearing and draw the metal through the rolls 
by a direct tensile pull, none of these diffi 
culties exist, and the rolls may be decreased 
to any size desired, and the metal may be 
O 
IS 
3o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338462.txt	(No Model.) 
A. BACKUS, Jr. 
BOILER, FURN ACE, 
No. 338,462, 
Patented Mar. 23, 1886; 
Z 
E. 
H 
*74 Z 
7 
7 
A. 
Z5 
Zy 
O 
TSss 
a 
y 
Z 
as 
2 
s 
ZYa. 
O 
-- 
/ 
zza. 
WITNESSES 
 
4e-orzez W 
INVENTOR 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABSALOM BACKUS, JR., OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
B O L E R - FURNAC E. 
SPECIFICATION Sorming part of Letters 
Application filed August 7, 1885 
Patent No. 338,462, dated March 23, 1886. 
. Serial No. 173,852. (No model.) 
To all, who7, it nat? concert: 
Be it known that I, ABSALOMBACKUS, Jr., 
of Detroit, county of Wayne, State of Michi 
gan, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Boiler-Furnaces; and I do here by de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains 
to make and use it, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form a part 
of this specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
an improved furnace designed to secure a 
more thorough combustion of the coal, thereby 
economizing the fuel, preventing smoke, and 
Securing the most thorough utilization of the 
heat. 
My invention consists in the combination of 
devices and appliances hereinafter specified, 
and more particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
Section of a device embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a front section. 
I carry out my invention as follows: A rep 
resents a boiler; B, the combustion-chamber; 
C, a rear bridge-wall; D, a smoke-flue; E, the 
Stationary grate supported upon cross-bars 
e e', or otherwise. 
F is a dumping-grate in the rear of the 
Stationary grate, said grate being pivoted at 
its rear end, as shown at f. 
F is a knee-joint lever having a pivotal con 
nection with the front end of said dumping 
grate, and provided with an operating-bar, G, 
the construction being such that when said 
lever is forced inward the grate will assume 
the position shown in dotted lines, Fig. 1. It 
is obvious that by the use of this dumping 
rate in the rear of the grate E the clinkers 
may be readily removed without disturbing 
the operation of the furnace, or impairing the 
combustion of the fuel, the clinkers being 
crowded to the rear end of the stationary 
grate, where they readily fall into the ash-pit 
H when the rear grate is dumped, 
I is the front wall of the combustion-cham 
ber; J, a door through which fuel may be 
fed to the grate. 
K is my improved arch, located in the front 
of the combustion-chamber, between the grate 
and the boiler-dividing the combustion-cham 
ber, so as to form a coking-oven, B', in the 
front thereof, into which the fuel first enters, 
and after being coked therein is forced back 
upon the rear of the stationary grate, where 
the process of combustion is completed. The 
location of this arch above the front portion 
of the grate in the combustion-chamber ob 
viously confines the volatile products of com 
bustion upon the fuel-bed, and thereby se 
cures thorough combustion, preventing the 
escape of smoke, the waste of fuel thereby, 
and the annoyance arising therefrom. The 
arch IK is inclined from the front toward the 
rear, So as to narrow the throat at its rear end 
between the coking oven and the rest of the 
combustion-chamber and secure the thorough 
combustion of the fuel gases. At the same 
time the inclined arch EK prevents cold air 
from coming in contact with the boiler when 
the door is opened for the admission of fuel, 
or otherwise, and the heated air is permitted 
to circulate in the combustion-chamber above 
Said arch and under the boiler. 
The combustion-chamber is preferably pro 
vided with a longitu (linal division wall, L, 
dividing the combustion-chamber into two 
compartments, each provided with an in 
clined arch, K, Said arches being supported 
at their inlner edges upon the wall L and upon 
their outer edges upon the side walls of the 
combastion-chamber. 
The draft for the combustion-chamber may 
be secured in any desired way. 
I have found that the fuel-doors may be 
left open or adjusted to permit the entrance 
of air first to the coking-chamber with good 
results. 
This inclined arch K may be built in any 
suitablemanner-as, for instance, of arch-brick 
although I do not confine myself thereto, nor 
to any particular manner of Supporting the 
same in the combustion-chamber. The front 
of said inclined arch Kabuts against the front 
wall, I, although it may be extended downward 
in the rear of the door. The front wall, I, sup 
ports the forward end of the boiler, the com 
bustion-chamber being located entirely un 
derneath the boiler, coking-oven, and all. The 
75 
90 
OO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
50 
2 
338,462 
55 
45 
What I claim is 
1. In a furnace, a wall having a flue with 
which the flues of the boiler communicate at 
their forward ends, a combustion-chamber lo 
cated under the forward end of the boiler, an 
arch, K, abutting against the front wall of so 
said chamber, midway thereof, and extending 
over the front half, or thereabout, of the sta 
tionary grate, and a bridge-wall, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a furnace, the combination, with a 
stationary grate, of a dumping grate consist. 
ing of an L-shaped grate-section pivoted by 
the ends of its longer arms to a support, and 
by the ends of the shorter arms to a support 
ing bar or plate pivoted beneath said dump 
ing-grate, substantially as described. 
3. In a furnace, the combination, with a 
stationary grate, of a dumping grate consist 
ing of an -shaped grate-section pivoted by 
its longer arms or bars to a rigid support, and 65 
by its shorter arms to a har or plate having 
pivotal support beneath said grate, and a con 
necting-bar pivotally attached to the sup 
porting-bar, substantially as described. . 
4. In a furnace having a free combustion 
chamber adapted to permit direct radiation 
of heat from the fuel-bed against the under 
surface of the boiler, and an inclined arch, K, 
located in the front portion of the combustion 
chamber and alboat midway between the top 
thereof and the grate, the front of said arch 
abutting against the front wall of the com: 
bustion-chamber to form a coking-oven, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testinhony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
. 
75 
ABSALOM BACKUS, JR. 
Witnesses: 
N. S. WRIGHT, 
M. B. O'DOGHERTY. 
O 
5 ber takes place in clearing the grates. 
front door to the combustion-chamber may be 
left ajar to furnish draft. 
By the construction of the grates above de 
scribed no cooling of the combustion-cham 
I am aware that heretofore a deflector and 
spark-arrester have been used, consisting of a 
curved or arched roof to the connbustion-cham 
ber, having longitudinal and transverse com 
municating passages, and covering the entire 
chamber, excepting a limited passage for the 
products of combustion at the upper forward 
end of the chamber. This is not my invention 
and could not serve the purpose I attain. By 
thus locating the arch well down and inclining 
it downward from the door to its extremity it 
does not obstruct the direct radiation from 
the bed of fuel up against the forward end of 
the boiler, whereas if it were located high 
up it would be interposed, and therefore cut 
off a considerable surface, from such direct 
radiation. At the same time the low situa 
tion and incline of the arch presents its 
bricks or material to a strong heat on top and 
its under surface into close contact with the 
fuel so that the arch thus highly heated ra 
diates its heat directly against the contained 
fuel and greatly facilitates the coking pro 
cess. This highly-heated arch also radiates 
its heat up against the surface of the boiler 
and serves to maintain a strong and substan 
tially uniform heat during the period of charg 
ing. The construction also operates to highly 
heat the incoming air before it emerges into 
35 the combustion-chamber, and as it is obliged 
to traverse the whole length of the arch im 
mediately on the surface or through the body 
of the fuel it is thoroughly commingled with 
the products of combustion that are given off 
I am aware of the patent to J. T. Rich, 
November 1, 1870, No. 108,935, and J. J. 
Hall, February 21, 1882, No. 254,007, and lay 
no claim to anything therein shown. 
4o from the fuel. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338562.txt	(No Model.) 
- E. M. SIMMONS, 
FIFTH WHEEL 
No. 338,562, 
Patented Mar, 23, 1886. 
21(N). 
NGS 
4IIIT 
  
  
S 22 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD M. SIMMONS, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO WILLIAM J. RUSSELL OF SAME PLACE. 
FIFTH- WHEEL. 
S3?ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 338,562, dated March 23, 1886. 
Application filed September 2, 1885. Serial No. 176,030, 
(No model.) 
45 
55 
c and l, and also as a stop when brought in 
contact with the forward-projecting stops did 
on the ends of the upper arc. 
The fifth-wheel is attached to the running 
gear of a vehicle, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, 
with the king-bolt in rear of the forward axle. 
It is obvious that by the construction de 
scribed and shown I am enabled to furnish a 
cheap, durable, safe, and efficient fifth-wheel, 
so arranged as to permit the vehicle-body be 
ing hung low, and obtaining the same results 
in facility of turning the vehicle as if the 
front wheels were arranged to pass under the 
carriage-body. 
What I claim is 
1. In a fifth-wheel, the combination of an 
upper anchor-shaped plate having at its front 
end an are provided with forward-projecting 
end stops, a lower anchor-shaped plate pro 
vided at its front end with an arc having a 
central guide and stop consisting of an up 
ward and rearward projection or lug, and a 
king-bolt for connecting said plates, substan 
tially as described. 
- 2. In a fifth-wheel, the combination of the 
upper plate, A, having a rear arc, b, a perfo 
rated boss, e, and a forward arc, c, provided 
with end stops, dd, the lower plate, C, having 
a rear arc, g, and a forward arc, l, provided 
with a central guide-stop, In, the king-bolt B, 
and the nut k, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EDWARD M. SIMMONS. 
Witnesses: 
FRED C. TEMPLE, 
THOMAS B. WILSON. 
O 
5 
25 
To a 2Z whon it nually concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARD M. SIMMONS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Grand 
Rapids, in the county of Kent and State of 
Michigan, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Fifth-Wheels, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention has relation to an improved 
construction of fifth- wheels for vehicles; and 
it consists in the construction and combination 
of parts, as hereinafter set forth. 
In the annexed drawings, illustrating the 
invention, Figure 1 is a perspective view of 
my improved fifth-wheel. Fig. 2 is a bottom 
plan. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter Ades 
ignates an upper anchor-shaped plate, consist 
ing of a longitudinal bar, C, carrying a small 
arc, b, at its rear end, and a larger arc, c, at its 
forward end. The larger arc c is provided 
at each end with a forward-projecting stop, 
d, for the purpose hereinafter explained. The 
bar at is provided near the small arc b with a 
perforated boss, e, for the passage of the king 
bolt B, said boss serving as a pivot for a lower 
anchor-plate, C, the general form of which is 
similar to that of the upper plate. The lon 
gitudinal bar f of the lower plate, C, carries 
at its rear end a small arc, d, and near this arc 
it has a perforation, h, for receiving the tubul 
lar bosse of the upper plate, the parts being 
secured by a nut, k, on the king-bolt. At the 
forward end of the lower plate, attached to or 
formed on its longitudinal barf, is a large arc, 
l, that is provided centrally on its forward 
edge with an upward and backward project 
ing lug, n, which serves as a guide for the arcs 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338662.txt	(No Model.) 
A. B. FRENZEL, 
WACUUM PAN, 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
No. 338,662, 
Patented Mar, 23, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
A, B, FRENZEL, 
WACU UM PAN, 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 338,662, 
Patented Mar. 23, 1886, 
a. 
: 
2. E. 
22a 
Ga 
z 
277. 
zo. 
Z2. 
y 
7 
zo. 
a. 
a. 
ZET1- 
9 
Za 
N --------- - - - - - 
4. 
S. 
YE - 7-l-2 fl (, 
S. 
- - - 
S. 
-- - - - 
ze. 
A 
Zi 
Z: E 57 
e s 
1. 
Z 
6. 
7 
4, 
1. z - 
6. z 
S. Z. 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithagraphor, Washington, D.C 
 
(No Model.) 
A, B, FRENZEL, 
WACUUM PAN. 
4 sheets-Sheet 8. 
No. 338,662, 
Patented Mar. 23, 1886. 
 
 
a a 
s 
SNSSWSXSSSSSSNSN 
% 
2 
Xaga. SSNSNs 
2 % 
N. PETERS, Phito-Lithographd. washington.o. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
t 
No. 338,662, 
A, B, FRENZEL, 
WACUUM PAN, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Mar, 23, 1886. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ARTHUR B. FRENZEL, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-THIRD TO 
C. H. DELAMATER & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
VACU U M - PAN. 
CSISCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 338,662, dated March 23, 1886. 
Application filed December 21, 1883. Renewed May 22, 1885. Again retiewed Jannary 30, 1886. Serial No. 190,33. (No model.) 
Bolts F, passing through the bottom of the 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR. B. FRENZEL, i V-shaped sides of the pan, the ring D, and 
the plate F, serve to fasten the bottom and 
sides together and the plates D and F to the 55 
top and bottom of the ring D', respectively. 
The two plates are to be fastened in any de 
sirable way to the top and bottom of the ring 
D. 
Braces G G between the plates serve the 
purpose of strengthening and stiffening the 
bottom of the drying-chamber, so that it will 
stand considerable pressure. 
The flange H, around the edge of the dome 
top, is, as shown, provided with the annular 65 
flanges or ribs h h, between which is received 
and held the upper edge of the inner cham 
ber-wall, B. The outer wall, B, of the pan is 
at its upper edge formed with a flange, l', to 
which is bolted the flange on the dome. 
Between the walls B and B are braces b b, 
which serve to strengthen and stiflen the side 
of the chamber and to keep the walls a fixed 
distance apart. A cylindrical chamber, A', 
whose sides are preferably also of sheet or 75 
cast metal, is below the bottom plate, F. Its 
sides B support the rest of the apparatus 
upon their upper edge, as shown in the draw. 
ings, said edge just coming under the outer 
ring, D'. They can be fastened in any de- 8o 
sired way to bottom plate, F, or to the ring D'. 
In the side of the lower chamber, A, is a 
door, H'. 
The central ring, D', around the opening E, 
in the bottom of chamber or pan A, is, as 85 
shown, made with its inner sides flaring down 
ward. Within this ring fits the stopper I, 
which has the frustum-of-a-cone-shaped part, 
I", adapted to fit the ring closely, and when 
inserted in place to have its upper face, i, 9o 
flush with the upper and inner face of the 
plate C. 
Around the base of the part I is a flange, 
I, upon the upper face of which is an annu 
lar packing, i, of any suitable material. In 95 
such base is cut a groove, i, just above the 
flange I, into which groove is sprung or ex 
tends the inner edge of the packing or gasket. 
Said packing, when the stopper is inserted in 
place, comes against the lower face of plate F, IOO 
around the edge of the opening therein, and 
makes a tight joint. The stopper can be fast 
To all auhon, it may concer'12. 
of New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Vacuum-Pans; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 shows a perspective view of my 
machine; Fig. 2, a vertical section of the same 
on line aca; Fig. 3, an enlarged detail sectional 
view of one side of the machine, showing the 
construction of the side and hottom and the 
15 arrangement and construction of the scraper 
and stirrer blades; Fig. 4, a horizontal section 
of the machine on line gy y of Fig. 1; Fig. 5, a 
detail sectional view of one of the scraper and 
stirrer blades and its supporting-arm; Fig. 6, 
a detail plan view of the lower end of the tubu 
lar shaft with the scraper-arms attached; Fig. 
7, a plan view of the discharging-plow which 
I contemplate using with my machine, and 
Fig. S a detail view of the stopper for closing 
the bottom of the drying-chamber. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved apparatus or machine for drying 
paint, blood, scrap, pulp, chemicals, charcoal, 
and other powdered, pulverized, or disinte 
grated substances; and to this end it consists 
in the construction, combination, and ar 
rangements of parts, as hereinafter clearly de 
scribed and set forth. 
In the drawings, A designates a cylindrical 
drying-pan, having the vertiical double sides 
B B, which are U-shaped in cross-section, 
the bottom plate, C, and the dome-shaped top 
D. The two cylindrical shells forming the 
double walls of the pan are connected at their 
bottoms, so that a tranSVerse Vertical section 
of the walls of the pan will appear U-shaped, 
as set forth above. The sides and top are 
formed of sheet or cast metal, while the bot 
tom is made of a steel plate having a central 
opening, E. This bottom plate rests upon 
the ring D', extending around its outer edge, 
and upon the ring D", around the edge of the 
35 
5o central openings, E. 
Below plate D is a metal plate, F. 
- 
IO 
25 
 
 
338,662 
3O 
35 
O 
- 
ened when so inserted in any desired way. 
A handle, I, is provided, extending from its 
lower face, by which it can be removed or re 
placed. Diametrically opposite each other 
are the openings EXK in the outer wall, B, 
of the casing of chamber A, and from these 
openings, extend the short pipes K. 
K.", 
respectively. Between the inner and outer 
walls, B and B, is then a jacket-space, B, ex 
tending entirely around the chamber A, and 
closed at the top and bottom, as shown. Into 
this space open the pipes K. K. Within the 
pipe K is a longitudinal vertical partition, k, 
which extends beyond the end of the pipe to 
the inner wall, B, of the chamber A, so that 
any vapor entering the space B' by the pipe 
will be divided and caused to pass around in 
such space in opposite directions, as indicated 
by arrows in Fig. 4. 
For drawing off any moisture which may 
condense in space B, a small outlet-pipe, K', 
is provided, situated at or near the bottom 
edge of wall B, below the pipe K. 
Between the two plates C and F, forming 
the bottom of the chamber A, is an annular 
jacket-space, L, closed around its outer edge 
by the ring D', and around its inner edge by 
ring D". Into the outer side of this space ex 
tends the pipe L. 
At a point diametrically opposite to the 
pipe L, another pipe, L', extends up through 
the plate F into the space L. 
The dome-top D is provided with a feed 
opening, D", through which the charge of ma 
terial to be dried is put into chamber A. This 
opening is closed by cap D", which can be of 
any construction and fastened in any way de 
sired. 
Through the center of the dome is an open 
ing, F, in which is inserted the cylindrically. 
bored bearing F, for the vertical tubular shaft 
M. This bearing has the neck F, extending 
down within the dome, and the flange F., ex 
tending over the edges of opening F and 
resting upon and fastened to the dome-top. 
The upper face of flange F is provided with 
the annular groove M", in which roll the balls 
22, 
Upon the shaft M is fixed a collar or flange, 
N, having on its under face a groove, n, cor 
responding to groove M and adapted to re 
ceive the upper portions of the balls m m. 
An anti-frictional bearing is thus formed, 
adapted to support the shaft vertically and 
allow of its easy rotation without friction. 
Attached to the top of the dome and sur 
rounding bearing or bushing F is a hood, O, 
from one side of which, near its top, extends 
a pipe, O', connected with pipe K, as shown. 
The tubular shaft M passes up through the 
top of the hood, any suitable kind or means 
of packing being used to prevent escape of 
any vapor from the inside of the hood around 
the shaft while allowing of rotation of the lat 
ter. The upper end of the latter is closed, as 
shown, and has fixed upon it the bevel gear 
wheel P, with which meshes the gear P on a 
2. 
drive-shaft, P, driven by suitable connections 
from any desired form of motor. The shaft 
Misprovided with a series of openings through 
its sides above and below the bearing-piece 
E. The sum of the combined areas of the 
openings in each part of the shaft is prefer 
ably equal to the area of the bore m' of the 
shaft itself. Upon the lower end of the shaft 
is a rigid annular flange or collar, P. Bolted 
or otherwise fastened upon this collar or flange 
on oppositesides of the shaft are the horizon 
tal parallel bars R, preferably made of iron 
of an inverted-T shape in cross-section. In 
stead of two such bars, obviously a greater 
number can be used, attached to the flange, 
so as to stand at angles to those already de 
scribed. To the lower flat sides of these bars 
are attached the upper ends of the V-shaped 
standards or arms S S, one leg of the V be 
ing attached to each bar R, so that the stand 
ards extend downward at right angles to the 
arms R. On each side of the shaft Mare two 
of these vertical standards or arms-one near 
the shaft and one near the outer ends of bars R. 
To the lower ends of arms S are bolted or 
otherwise fastened the scraper-blades T. Each 
of these blades, as shown, extends from one 
inner arm S to the corresponding outer one, 
with its edge parallel to and just above the 
The body 
bottom plate, C, of the chamber. 
of the blade is inclined downward from its 
back in the direction of the movement of said 
blade, the lower ends of the arms S being so 
shaped as to admit of their being fixed thereto 
in such inclined position. To the sides of the 
outer arms are fixed the short horizontal arms 
R" R', to the outer ends of which are bolted or 
otherwise fastened the vertical blades TT, 
the edges of which are parallel with and close 
to the side wall, B, of the chamber A. These 
blades are, as were the horizontal ones, in 
clined outward in the direction of their move 
ment. The horizontal and vertical knives 
will, as situated, serve to scrape the material 
being dried from the bottom and sides of the 
cylindrical chamber, respectively, and will 
keep it well stirred up. 
I contemplate attaching to or suspending 
from the bars R in any desired way a spiral 
shaped plow, U, which is adapted to be swung 
down to rest on the bottom plate, C, when in 
operation, or to be thrown out of operation 
by being swung upward and held or fastened 
against the bars. When down, if it is turned 
in the direction shown by the arrow in Fig. 
7, the material on the bottom plate, C, will 
obviously be carried or forced inward by it 
toward the center of the plate, where the dis 
charge-opening E is. 
The special construction of this plow I do 
not describe in this application, as I intend 
to cover the same in a future application. 
Broadly, it consists of the central annular 
portion, U", by which it is attached to the bars 
R. R. and the spiral blade U", a portion of 
which at least is adapted to rest on the plate 
E when the plow is let down. As indicated 
75 
90 
95. 
loo 
O 
I I5 
I 2S 
 
338,662 
3 
hereinbefore, this plate is preferably made of 
steel, as it can then be made quite thin, while 
being strong enough to stand the steam-press 
ure to which it it may be subjected. It is de 
sirable to have it as thin as possible, in order 
that heat may pass through it with the great 
est possible facility. 
The operation of my drying apparatus is as 
follows: The stopper, being inserted and fixed 
in place within the ring D, closes the central 
opening through the bottom of the chamber 
A. The material to be dried is loaded into 
the chamber through the opening D, and such 
opening is then closed by the cap or cover D'. 
The pipe K is connected with some suitable 
apparatus for producing a vacuum or suc 
tion. Steam is admitted through the pipe 
L into the space L, between the steel plate C, 
forming the bottom of chamber A, and the 
plate F, and circulates throughout such space, 
passing out, together with any moisture which 
may be condensed from it, through the exhaust 
or discharge pipe L. The heat from this 
steam, passing up through the plate C, heats 
the mass of material resting thereon. The 
shaft M is rotated by the gearing described, 
and the bars R. R. and scraper-blades II are 
carried around within the chamber A, the 
blades scraping the material from the bottom 
and sides of the chamber and stirring it up 
thoroughly. A suction is applied at the open 
ing K and pipe K. The heated vapors from 
the material will be drawn up through the 
tubular shaft M, entering through its lower 
end and the openings in its sides near that 
end. From the shaft they will pass out through 
the openings therein above the shaft-bearing 
and into the hood or drum O. From the hood 
they are drawn down through pipes O' and K", 
and then pass around through the space B 
on opposite sides of the chamber A. and out 
through the suction-pipe K. The volume of 
vapor entering space B through pipe K is di 
vided by the partition in such pipe, and the 
two parts of it pass in opposite directions 
around the pan or chamber. A to meet and be 
drawn out together through the pipe K. As 
the heated vapor passes around through the 
jacket-space B, Some of the moisture carried 
by it will be condensed. Such moisture of 
condensation is drawn off by means of the pipe 
K". The heated vapor as it passes around 
outside of the cylindrical wall B of the dry 
ing-chamber heats such wall and the material 
within the chamber in contact with the wall. 
Such utilization of the heat of the vapor aris 
ing from the material being dried to aid in 
heating Such material makes my apparatus 
much more economical than those heretofore 
in use, in which the heated vapor was either 
discharged or allowed to escape directly into 
the air, or was drawn off and away from the 
drying pan or cylinder. It is advantageous 
to have thesides of the chamber or pan warmed, 
as well as the bottom, in order that the upper 
and outer portions of the mass of material 
may not be cooled by contact with cool sides, 
and to prevent any of the moisture of the va 
por within the chamber being condensed upon 
the inner face of such sides. The Scraper and 
stirrer blades scrape the material from the 
bottom and sides, and stir it about continually 
bringing portions of it in contact with differ 
ent parts of the heated surface of the pan. 
Thus burning of the material and sticking 
of the same to the bottom and sides of the pan 
are prevented, and the whole mass is heated 
equally and thoroughly throughout. 
The suction apparatus is designed to draw 
off the moisture-containing vapors within the 
apparatus very rapidly. As the tubular shaft 
M extends downward from the Center of the 
dome into the pan, the vapors arising from the 
drying material will be drawn off rapidly from 
the center of the chamber, and condensation 
of moisture upon the inside of the dome will 
be reduced to its minimum, if not prevented, 
as such vapor does not in its upward and out 
ward passage rise up against and flow along 
the inner face of the done. As is obvious and 
well known, it is advantageous also to have 
within the pan the partial vacuum produced 
by the action of the suction apparatus for draw 
ing off the vapors, as evaporation of the moist 
ure in the material is much accelerated by Such 
vacuum or diminished pressure. When the 
material has become sufficiently dried, the 
scraper-arms are stopped, the steam shut off, 
and the suction apparatus is disconnected or 
its action stopped. When the material has 
cooled, the door in the bottom chamber is 
opened and the stopper is removed from the 
central opening through the double bottom of 
the pan. The spiral plow or discharger U is 
then swung down and the shaft M is caused to 
revolve again. The dried material will, by 
the action of this plow or discharger, be gath 
ered or forced inward toward the center of the 
pan-bottom, where it falls through the open 
ing E down into the chamber below. 
If poisonous substances-as arsenic, white 
lead, &c.-are being dried by my apparatus, 
the door in the chamber below the pan is kept 
closed during the discharging operation and 
until all dust has Settled within Such chamber. 
If the stopper be put back to close the dis 
charge-opening E, a new charge can be put 
into the pan and be operated upon while the 
dust is settling in the lower chamber. Heat 
radiating from the steam-space below the pan 
will then act to still further dry the discharged 
load. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1. In a drying apparatus, a vacuum-pan, in 
combination with a stirrer carried on a tubu 
lar shaft, through which the vapors within the 
pan are drawn off, substantially as shown and 
described. 
2. In a drying apparatus, the closed pan, in 
combination with the hollow shaft carrying the 
stirrer, and means for drawing off the vapors 
within the pan through the shaft, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
I claim is 
35 
AC) 
55 
fo 
75 
90 
IOS 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
338,662 
75 
- 
scribed. 
- 
3. In a drying apparatus, in combination 
with a vacuum-pan, a tube through which the 
air and vapors within the pan are exhausted, 
extending into said pan and below the top 
thereof, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
4. In a drying apparatus, in combination 
With a vacuum-pan having a dome-shaped top, 
an exhaust-tube, through which the air and 
vapors in the pan are drawn off, extending 
down through the dome, and adapted to take 
the air and vapors from a point within the pan 
and below the top of the dome, substantially 
as shown and described. 
5. In a drying apparatus, in combination 
with a vacuum-pan, an exhaust-tube extend 
ing down within the pan to take the air 
and vapor from a point well within the pan 
and away from the top thereof, having the 
open end and a series of aperturesin its sides 
near its end, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
6. A vacuum-pan having on its top a hood 
connected with a suction apparatus, in combi. 
nation with a rotary tubular shaft extending 
through the hood down into the pan, and car 
rying on its lower end an agitator, and pro 
vided with a series of openings through its 
portion which is within the hood, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
7. In combination with the closed pan hav 
ing a hood on its top connected with a suction 
apparatus, the rotary hollow stirrer-shaft ex 
tending through the hood and top, open at its 
lower end and provided with a series of open 
ings through the sides of its portions which 
are within the hood and below the top of the 
pan, substantially as and for the purpose de 
Scribed. 
8. In combination with a pan having in its 
top bearings for a stirrer-shaft, and above such 
bearings a hood connected with means for pro 
ducing a vacuum therein, a rotary hollow shaft 
extending through the hood and down into 
the pan, perforated along its portion contained 
within the hood, open at its lower end, and 
carrying thereon means for stirring the con 
tents of the pan, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
9. A vacuum-pan provided with means for 
heating it at its bottom, and having a jacket 
space around its sides, in combination with 
means for causing the heated vapors from the 
interior of the pan to pass around through 
the jacket-space to heat the sides of the pan, 
substantially as and for the purpose de 
10. In combination with the vacuum-pan 
provided with the steam-space below its bot 
tom and a jacket around its sides, the dis 
charge-pipe for drawing off the heated vapors 
from within the pan, connected with and dis 
charging into the jacket-space, substantially as 
shown and described. 
11. In combination with the vacuum-pan 
having in its top a tubular bushing for the substantially as shown and described. 
stirrer-shaft, and above such bushing a hood, 
the hollow rotary shaft carrying at its lower 
end means for stirring the contents of the pan, 
and at its upper end within the hood provided 
with a series of perforations, the collar on the 
shaft resting on anti-friction bearings on the 
top of the shaft-bushing, and the exhaust-pipe 
connecting the hood with means for produc 
ing a vacuum, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
12. A vacuum-pan provided with a jacket, 
a pipe for admitting heated vapor to the jacket, 
having a partition to divide the volume of the 
vapor and cause portions of it to pass around 
through the jacket-space in opposite direc 
tions, and with a discharge-pipe for allowing 
the escape of the vapor from the jacket-space 
on the opposite side of the pan from the en 
trance-pipe, substantially as shown and de 
13. In combination with the stirrer-shaft, 
the bars attached thereto, the vertical arms 
depending from said bars, and the sharp-edged 
scraper and stirrer blades carried on the lower 
ends of the vertical bars and adapted to scrape 
up and stir the material resting on the bottom 
of the pan, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
14. In combination with the stirrer-shaft 
provided with a flange, the parallel bars fast 
ened to such flange, the vertical arms attached 
to the bars, and the scraper and stirrer blades 
extending between and attached to the lower 
ends of the arms, substantially as shown and . 
described. 
15. The rotary stirrer provided with sharp 
edged scraper and stirrer blades moving close 
to the surface of the pan with which the ma 
terial to be dried is in contact and inclined 
toward such surface in the direction of their 
movement, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
16. In a drying apparatus, the vacuum-pan 
provided with a closed heating-chamber below 
its bottom for the reception of the dried con 
tents of the pan, substantially as shown and 
described. 
17. A vacuum-pan having a discharge-open 
ing through its bottom, means for closing and 
unclosing the same, and a chamber below its 
bottom for the reception of the dried contents 
of the pan, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
18. A vacuum - pan having a discharge 
opening through its bottom, a spiral plow, in 
combination with means for rotating it to 
cause the contents of the pan to be brought 
to and discharged through the opening, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
19. In combination with a vacuum-pan pro 
vided with an opening througll its bottom, a 
spiral plow connected with the rotary stirrer 
shaft, adapted when it is let down upon the 
pan-bottom to force the material on the pan 
bottom toward the central discharge-opening, 
scribed. 
. 
- 
90 
95 
OC) 
lo5 
IO 
I 15 
I 25 
5 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
65 
 
2 
2 
3 
20. In combination with the stirrer-shaft the sides of the pan, substantially as shown 
338,662 
5 
provided with a flange, the parallel bars at- and described. 
tached to the flange, the arms depending from 
the same and carrying blades for Scraping up 
5 the material on the bottom of the pan, and the 
short horizontal arms attached to the Outer 
depending arms, and carrying the vertical 
knives adapted to scrape the material from 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR B, FRENZEL, 
OSCAR F. GUNZ, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
s. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338762.txt	(No Model.) 
D, MOORE 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
SABOT FOR, HIGH EXPLOSIWE PROJECTILES, 
No. 338,762, 
Patented Mar, 30, 1886. 
 
(No Model.) 
D, MOORE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
SABOT FOR HIGH EXPL0SIVE PR0JECTILES. 
No. 338,762, 
Patented Mar, 30, 1886. 
  
 
 
   
 
is 
I 
A. 
A. 
y 
 
NNN 
A. 
?e ?. 
f?????? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL MOORE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
SABOT FOR H GH-EXPLOSVE PROJECT! - ES. 
S53C:"ICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 338,762, dated Mazch 30, 1886. 
Application filed June 9, 1885. Renewed February 1, 1886. Serial No. 190,557. (No model.) 
O 
5 
25 
7o a// ?/i?? it ??? concer?: 
Beit known that I, DANIEL MOORE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Appliances for Dis 
charging Dynamite Projectiles, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to projectiles in which 
are contained dynamite or like powerful and 
Sensitive explosive substances, discharged from 
cannons or fire-arms by ignition of a charge 
of gunpowder; and it consists of certain de 
vices, hereinafter fully described, whereby a 
shell or projectile of any size or weight con 
taining a required quantity of dynamite may 
With a proper quantity of ordinary gunpow 
der be discharged or fired from a gun or fire 
arm Without danger of igniting or exploding 
the dynamite within the bore of the gun, by 
action of the exploded gunpowder, the dyna 
mite remaining intact and unaffected within 
the projectile until it shall have passed out of 
the gun and reached the desired point. 
In the drawings, Figure I illustrates a lon 
gitudinal central section of a gun charged with 
gunpowder, and my improved air-cushion and 
projectile. A is the gun; B, the powder; C, 
the air-cushion; D, the case; E, the projectile; 
F, the igniting-rod; G, the dynamite. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal view of the projec 
tille, case, and air-cushion. Fig. 3 is a longi 
tudinal central view of the case and air-cush 
ion. Fig. 4 is a similar view of the projectile 
proper. Fig. 5 illustrates a construction of 
the air-cushion differing from that of Fig. 3, 
and which is used in conjunction with a pro 
jectile constructed as shown at Fig. 6. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
The cylindrical case D, Fig. 3, may be made 
of any suitable material, and is provided ath 
with an inner annular projection. This pro 
jection his perforated at its center equal in 
45 diameter with the diameter of the lower sec 
tion of the projectile, as shown at i, Fig. 4. 
The diski is fitted into the case D below the 
projection h, and the base-piecek then screwed 
into the bottom of the case D, as shown, thus 
5o forming the air-chamber c. This lase-piece 
4O out the several views. 
35 
55 
k is perforated atl, and is also provided with a 
headed pin, In, passing through it, as shown 
at n. The inner end of this pin in carries a 
fly-piece, O, that may be turned by means of 
the head of the pin n. 
The ignition of the fulminate (shown at p, 
Figs. 1 and 4) for exploding the dynamite is 
effected by means of the rod or plunger F, 
Figs. 1 and 4. This rod F is provided with a 
collar, q, Figs. 1 and 4, to prevent its move 
ment forward, and its end, projecting beyond 
the solid head of the projectile, is covered 
with a hood, . The lower end of this rod F 
sets in a recess formed in a thin metallic dome, 
s, Figs. 1 and 4, directly over the fulminate p, 
which it ignites, when the projectile strikes, 
by breaking the dome 8. 
The air-chamber C may be charged at any 
time, to any required degree of pressure, by 
turning the pin m, so as to carry away from 
the aperture l the fly-piece or arm O. The 
air-tube of an air-pump is then attached to 
the outer end of the opening l, the air forced 
into the chamber C by means of the air-pump, 
and the fly 0 then turned over the aperturel, 75 
after which the air-tube of the air-pump, may 
be detached. The case D thus at its lower 
end is an air-cushion, and the projectile E, 
which is reduced in diameter at its rear end, 
(see Fig. 4) so as to pass through the projec- 8o 
tion h, within the case D, and rests upon the 
diski, and is thus connected, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2, is ready for firing. 
On firing the gun, the case D, with its air 
chamber, moves forward before the inertia of 85 
the projectile is overcome, thus causing the 
disk or piston-headi, on which rests the base 
of the projectile, to compress the air within 
the chamber c to a sufficient degree, as shown 
by dotted lines, Fig. 2, to carry forward the 
projectile with the case, the action of the air 
cushion preventing the explosion of the dyna 
mite within the gun. 
The modified construction of the air-cushion 
and of the projectile, as shown in Figs. 5 and 
6, may be preferable, and the manner of their 
construction is so clearly shown in said Figs. 
5 and 6 as to require no extended description. 
By this mode of construction, Fig. 5, it will 
be observed that the movable diski, as shown Ioo 
90 
2 
338,762 
IC 
20 
in Fig. 3, forms the solid head of a movable 
piston, t, the upper end of which is provided 
with a disk, u, (fastened thereto by means of 
a screw,) which forms a base on which rests 
5 the projectile constructed as shown in Fig. 6. 
This modification obviates the necessity of 
reducing the rear end of the projectile, as 
shown at i, Fig. 4. 
Several well-known devices have heretofore 
been used to discharge projectiles containing 
dynamite without exploding the same within 
the gun; but such has been the nature of the 
devices as to either limit the amount of pro 
pelling force, Weight, range, and effect of the 
shell or projectile, or that the appliances for 
charging the gun were inconvenient, cumber 
Some, and required too much time. 
By the use of my device of a compressed 
air cushion all the above-mentioned objections 
are removed, so that a projectile or shell of 
any desirable weight and size, containing any 
desirable quantity of dynamite, with a suffi. 
cient quantity of gunpowder to give the re 
quired range to the projectile, may be fired 
from any ordinary smooth-bore or rifled gun 
Without danger of exploding the dynamite of 
the projectile within the gun. 
It is evident that my device of a compressed 
air cushion placed in a gun between the pow 
der-charge and the base of a projectile may 
be utilized for the discharge of projectiles 
other than those containing dynamite or like 
substances from a gun, and especially so in 
that class of cannon of great weight and cali 
ber, as such guns require at their first and sec 
ond re-enforce to be of great thickness and 
Weight, that they may sustain the great press 
ure at such parts, caused by the sudden ex 
pansion of the gas generated by the explosion 
4O of the powder, before the inertia of the pro 
jectile is overcome or it commences its for 
Ward movement. 
It is evident that by using my air-cush 
ion in a gun of Such class, discharging heavy 
45 projectiles with a large quantity of powder, 
Such guns may be greatly reduced in weight 
and bulk of material at the first and second 
re-enforce, and yet successfully resist the 
35 
25 
55 
strain thereon, (for the reason that the in 
stantly gradual moving forward of the air 
cushion relieves the strain on said parts of the 
gun, and counteracts the usual Sudden shock 
produced when the explosion of the powder 
charge acts directly upon the projectile while 
it is at a dead rest,) thereby greatly reducing 
the cost of said guns, and rendering them 
more convenient in handling and in transpor 
tation. 
The devices for admitting and retaining the 
compressed air within the air-chamber c may 
be any of the various well-known devices 
other than those shown in said Figs. 1, 2, 3, 5. 
Therefore I do not confine myself to any spe 
cial device for said purpose; and, also, in the 
construction of said air-cushion it may be va- 65 
ried as may be desirable, and I therefore do 
not confine myself to any special mode of 
construction of it. 
The gist of my invention consists in the con 
struction of an air-cushion, substantially as to 
described, so as to attain the result as herein 
before specified. 
What I claim is 
1. A sabot for projectiles, consisting of an 
air-tight casing filled with compressed air, 
and a sliding piston in Said casing, said piston 
being held outward by the compressed air, 
substantially as described. 
2. In combination with the air-tight casing 
containing compressed air, a sliding piston in 
said casing, which piston is held outward by 
the compressed air, and a projectile which en 
ters the casing and bears against the piston, 
as set forth. 
3. In combination with the air-tight casing 
which has a charging-orifice, a stopper cover 
ing said orifice, and a sliding piston in the 
casing, held outward by compressed air, all . 
constitutinga sabot, substantially as described. 
and State of New York, this 11th day of May, 
A. D. 1885. 
. 
Signed at Brooklyn, in the county of Kings go 
75 
m 
DANIEL MOORE, 
Witnesses: 
FRANK. S. MOORE, 
ANDREW W. STEIGER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338862.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. MORRISON & R. SMITH, 
OIL BURNER, 
No. 338,862, 
 
Patented Mar. 30, 1886, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES CHARLES MORRISON, OF WEST HAM, COUNTY OF ESSEX, AND 
ROBERT SMITH, OF BROMILEY, COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND. 
O L BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 338,862, dated March 30, l886. 
Application filed November 22, 1884. Serial No. 148,567. (No model.) Patented in England December 22, 1883, No. 5,836, and in 
France December 22, 1883, No. 159,345. 
O 
To all, whom it may concern.' 
Beit known that we, JAMES CHARLESMOR 
RISON, of West Ham, in the county of Essex, 
England, and ROBERT SMITH, of Bromley, in 
the county of Middlesex, England, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Oil - Burners, (for which we have received 
Letters Patent in England, No. 5,836, dated 
December 22, 1883, and in France, No. 159,345, 
dated December 22, 1883, ) of which the foll 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying dra Wings. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
the construction of burners having two or 
more wick cases or holders of a circular shape, 
at the upper ends, and which are constructed 
from wick cases or holders made for contain 
ing flat wicks, the said wick cases or holders 
being gradually curved, so that while the up 
per part of each wick case or holder is caused 
to assume a circular shape there will be a coni 
cal opening between the lower part of the side 
edges for the admission of air. 
The object of these improvements is princi 
pally to regulate and distribute the supply of 
air to the interior of the outer flame and to 
the inner flame or flames. 
Each wick case or holder of the nature here 
in before described has a conical opening be 
tween the lower part of the side edges for the 
admission of air; and for the purposes of this 
invention we employ a peculiar arrangement 
of division-plates within the airspace or spaces 
between the wick cases or holders, consisting 
of two or more wick cases or holders of a cir 
cular shape, arranged concentrically, and con 
structed in the manner hereinbefore referred to. 
Two or more division-plates are arranged 
that is to say, one, at least, on each side-at an 
angle inclining toward the top of the conical 
openings between the side edges of the wick 
cases or holders. The division-plates commence 
a short distance from the bottoms of the wick 
cases or holders and terminate before reach 
ing the upper ends thereof, and they are so 
constructed as to extend at their lower ends 
across the air-space in which they are arranged 
between the two wick cases or holders, and to 
decrease in width toward their upper ends, at 
which point they are attached to the outer case 
of the inner wick case or holder, or to the in 
ner case of the outer wick case or holder, as 
may be desired. In some cases we arrange in 
front of each of the said inclined plates a di 
vision-plate in a more or less upright position. 
The upper ends of the inclined plates, which 
are in close proximity to the corresponding 
ends of the last-mentioned plates, are made to 
extend slightly beyond the latter. 
Circular burners, constructed of two or more 
flat wick cases or holders, as hereinbefore re 
ferred to, usually have the mechanism for regu 
lating the height of the wick covered by a case, 
which extends over a portion of the conical. 
opening at the lower part of the burner. In 
the larger or compound burners it will be 
found that the partial closing of the said coni 
cal opening, by preventing a sufficient supply 
of air from entering the space or spaces be 
tween the wick-holders, is the cause of dimin 
ishing the intensity of the light obtained, and . 
in order to obviate this difficulty it will be 
found advantageous to form a number of per 
forations in the said case; or, when desired, the 
said case may be constructed to terminate at 
each side of the conical opening. It is desir 
able in all cases that the conical openings be 
tween the side edges of the wick cases or hold 
ers should be in juxtaposition with each other. 
The lower part or parts of each air-space be 
tween the wick cases or holders, and also the 
bottom of the air-space in the center case or 
holder are closed or partially closed. 
We will now proceed to refer to the accom 
panying drawings, from which the nature of our 
said invention will be more clearly understood. 
The same letters of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
Figures 1 and 2 are respectively side eleva 
tion and Veltical Section of a flat Wick case or 
holder, gradually curved, so that the upper 
end assumes a circular shape, while a conical 
opening is left between the lower part of the 
side edges, as hereinbefore described. When 
desired, the upper portion of the side edges 
may be cut away, as shown in Fig. 2, and the 
wick case or holder joined at that point. Figs. 
3 and 4 are respectively top view and plan of 
a wick case or holder of a like construction. 
Fig. 5 is a cross-section of a burner composed 
25 
35 
60 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
338,862 
O 
of two similar wick-cases of a circular shape. 
Fig. 6 is a transverse section of the same. Fig. 
7 is a side view of the inner wick case or holder, 
showing the position of one of the inclined di 
vision-plates; and Fig. 8 is a similar view of the 
inner wick case or holder, with a division-plate, 
in a more or less upright position, arranged 
in front of the inclined division-plates. . 
AA are the wick cases or holders, and at the 
conical openings between the side edges there 
of. 
CC are inclined division - plates, of which 
two or more may be used, and D D are divis 
ion-plates, which are in some cases arranged, in 
a more or less upright position, in front of the 
plates CC. In some cases a plate is arranged 
a short distance in front of the lower part of 
the conical opening in the outside wick-case 
or holder to modify the entrance of air to the 
air-Spaces. 
What we claim is 
1. The combination, with a lamp - burner 
25 
having two or more wick tubes or cases ar 
ranged in substantially parallel positions and 
provided with openings admitting air within 
said tubes, of a series of inclined division 
plates arranged within the space between said 
tubes, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a lamp - burner 
constructed with two or more wick-tubes, sub 
stantially circular in form, and having an air 
space between the same and openings to said 
space and to the center of the burner, of divis 
ion-plates. C C, and division-plates D D, ar 
ranged upon the tubes on said space and open- 35 
ings, Substantially as described. 
JAMES CHARLES MORRISON. 
ROBERT SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. E. VAUGHAN, 
HENRY GRAPES, 
57 Chancery Lane, London, 
54 Great Tower Street, London. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US338962.txt	(No Model.) 
G. E. HART. 
MANUFACTURE OF COMBINED WHEELS AND PINIONS. 
No. 338,962, 
Patented Mar. 30, 1886. 
  
4. YR 
a. 
 
N. Peters. Photo-tithographer. Washington, 2. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE E. HART, OF WATERBURY, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WATERBURY WATCH COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
VANU FACTURE OF COMBINED WHEEL AND PIN E O N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 338,962, dated March 30, 1886. 
Application filed July 30, 1885. 
Serial No. 173,055. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE E. HART, of 
Waterbury, in the county of New Haven, and 
in the State of Connecticut, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in the 
Manufacture of Combined Winding Wheel 
and Pinion; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, in which-- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my wheel 
blank after having been prepared for the re 
ception of the pinion-blank. Fig. 2 is a like 
view of the same after the insertion of said 
pinion-blank. Fig. 3 is a section upon line 
acac of Fig. 2. Figs. 4 and 5 are respectively 
perspective views of the rear and front sides 
of the combined wheel and pinion united and 
completed, and Fig. 6 is a section upon line 
& 2 of Fig. 5. 
Lette's of like name and kind indicate Sini 
lar parts in each of the figures. 
The design of my invention is to lessen the 
labor and expense required fur producing 
combined wheels and pinions; and to this end 
said invention consistS in the method em 
ployed for constructing the same, substan 
tially as and for the purpose hereinafter 
specified. 
In the carrying of my invention into prac 
tice I employ a round disk of sheet metal, A, 
which has substantially the diameter and 
thickness of the finished wheel, and at its axial 
center punch or form in any usual manner 
an internally-toothed opening, a, that corre 
sponds in transverse shape and dimensions 
to the like features of the desired pinion. 
From another and a considerably thicker 
sheet of metal. I now punch a pinion-blank, 
B, which corresponds in transverse size and 
O 
3O 
35 
AO 
shape to the opening ct, and by any suitable 
means then press one end of said blank into 
and cause it to closely fill said opening. The 
length of said pinion-blank B should be sufi 
cient to give to its outer portion the required 
projection when its inner end is flush with the 
rear face of said wheel-blank. The wheel and 
pinion blanks being thus firmly united, the 
whole is completed by providing the former 
With peripheral gear-teeth and the latter 
With an axial opening, b, for the reception of 
an arbor, axial bearing, &c. 
When constructed in the manner shown, 
the wheel and pinion are accurately and firmly 
united and are not liable to become separated, 
and can be produced and combined at a much 
less expense than by any usual method. 
Having thus fully set forth the nature and 
merits of my invention, what I claim is 
The hereinbefore-described method of con 
structing a combined gear wheel and pinion, 
consisting, first, in forming at the center of a 
wheel-blank an internally-toothed opening 
which corresponds in size and shape to the 
like transverse features of the desired pinion, 
next punching or otherwise forming a pinion 
blank which has a length greater than the 
thickness of said wheel-blank, next pressing 
Said pinion-blank into said opening, and, last 
ly, forming at or around the periphery of said 
wheel-blank gear-teeth and within said pin 
ion-blank an axial opening, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing 
I have hereunto set my hand this 18th day of 
July, 1885. 
GEORGE E. EART, 
Witnesses: 
CHARLESS. CHAPMAN, 
GEO. E. TERRY. 
SO 
55 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339062.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 339,062, 
J. KAUFMANN 
WATER CLOSET CISTERN. 
A 267-7, Patented Mar, 30, 1886, 
W T N ESS ES 
-C4-S-6-22e. 
Catl. T. af-bro- 
N. PETERs. Plois-Lithographer, Washington, D., c. 
 
N V E N T R 
9-4e 4%. 
t-C 2-6-ax. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH KAUFMANN, 
OF NEW YORR, N. Y. 
WATER CLOSET C SERN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 339,062, dated March 30, 1886. 
Application filed October 14, 1885. 
Serial No. 17,827. (No model.) 
55 
7O 
75 
To all u?ion, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH KAUFAIANN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York,in the county of New York and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
Ilseful Improvements in Water-Closet Cisterns, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Water-closet cisterns, the object of the same be 
ing to provide a device of this character which 
shall be simple and economical in construc 
tion, durable and efficient in use, and so ar 
ranged as to prevent any stench or smell from 
passing through the cistern and permeating 
the house; and with these ends inview my in 
vention ConsistS in certain love features of 
construction, as will be hereinafter described, 
and pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a longitudinal sectional view of my 
improved cistern. Fig. 2 is a top plan view 
thereof, 
A represents the outer casing of a water 
closet cistern, constructed of any suitable ma 
terial and of any suitable dimensions, and 
having the service-box B extending below the 
same and cast integral therewith. 
The Service-box B is formed with a shoul 
der, Cl, on which is adapted to rest the service 
box plate C, as shown in Fig. 1 of the draw 
ings. The plate C is formed with a central 
opening, l, for the passage of the water from 
the cistern into the service-box, said opening 
having formed around it an upwardly-extend 
ing flage, c, forming a valve-seat, as herein 
after described. This plate is also provided 
with an opening for the admission of the 
cistern supply-pipe D, which latter is pro 
vided on its upper end with an ordinary 
valve operated by a lever and float, (not 
shown,) Said latter opening being provided 
with a downwardly-projecting flange or hub, 
(l, encircling the supply-pipe D. 
The bottom of the box B is provided with 
an opening having a hub or flange, e, formed 
around it, also encircling the Supply-pipe D, 
which is threaded to engage with a thread 
formed in the hub or flange e. This pipe is 
also threaded above the plate C, for engage 
ment with the lock-nut?. It will be readily 
understood that by turning the pipe D, which 
is threaded in the hul) e, the plate C will be 
drawn down tightly on its seat a, and held in 
position by means of the nut, f, a washer, g, 
being inserted between the nut and plate for 
the purpose of rendering the joint water-tight. 
A suitable packing-such, for instance, as red 
lead-is inserted between the edges of the 
plate C and shoulder (t, for the purpose of pre 
venting any water from passing between them 
from the cistern A into the box B. 
The plate C is provided with another open 
ing, having formed around it the hub or flange 
it, provided with a femalescrew-thread, through 
which passes the overflow-pipe E, extending 
from the upper portion of the cistern into the 
lower portion of the box B. 
The box IB has formed in the bottom all 
opening, around which is constructed an up 
Wardly-extending flange, i, the upper edge of 
which is somewhat higher than the lower end 
of the overflow-pipe E. From the opening 
in the bottom of the box leads a pipe, R, to 
the basin of the water-closet, adapted to carry 
the water from the cistern thereto and Wash 
the Same. 
On the top of the flange c, formed around 
the central opening in the plate C, rests the 
valve F, preferably made of lead, and having 
a spindle, l, passing down through the Salme, 
the under side of said valve F having a wash 
er secured thereto by means of a lock-nut, n2, 
fitting on a sleeve, n, secured to the spindle, 
for the purpose of allowing it to rest snugly 
on its seat. The upper end of the spindlel is 
attached to the lever in the closet, by means 
of which said valve is operated, the lower end 
of the spindle being passed down through an 
opening, 0, formed at the junction of the arms 
p, extending across the lower portion of the 
valve-opening b, said lower end of the spindle 
having a pin, ', passing through it, for the 
purpose of preventing the spindle from being 
pulled out at the opening 0. 
Having now described the construction of 
my improvement, I will set forth its operation. 
When the level of the closet (not shown) is 
pulled up, the valve IF is raised from its seat, 
allowing the water in the cistern A to flow 
down through the opening b into the box B, 
the valve being guided in its vertical lnove 
ments by means of the spindlel. The Water 
flows down through the opening in the bottom 
of the box through the pipe k to the basin of 
90 
95 
A C 
O 
15 
35 
 
339,062 
O 
the closet, and continues so to flow until the 
lever is lowered, and the valve Fallowed to 
rest on its seat c. After the valve F has re 
Sumed its position on its seat the flow of Water 
from the cistern will be checked, and the water 
in the box will flow down the pipe lc until it 
reaches the level of the upper edge of the 
flange i, which, as before stated, is somewhat 
above the bottom of the box, thus allowing a 
quantity of the water to remain in the latter. 
As the upper end of the flange i is higher than 
the lower end of the overflow-pipe E, the level 
Of the water is also above the said lower end 
of the overflow-pipe, and therefore keeps it 
constantly submerged. By these means the 
stench or smell arising from the closet-basin 
when in use is prevented from passing up 
through the pipe k into the box B, and up 
through the overflow-pipe, the water in the 
box tightly sealing the lower end of the latter. 
I would have it understood that I do not 
limit myself to the exact construction and ar 
rangement of parts shown and described, but 
hold myself at liberty to make such changes 
as fall within the spirit and scope of my in 
Wention. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The cistern A, formed integral with the box 
B, and constructed with the shoulder a, the 
plate C, constructed with the opening b and 
flanges cd h, the valve F, the outlet-pipe k, 
and overflow - pipe E and inlet-pipe D, the 
said box being formed with the hubs e and i, 
the upper edge of the latter being higher than 
the lower end of said overflow, substantially 
as set forth. 
Signed at Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, this 12th day of Octo 
ber, A. D. 1SS5. 
35 
JOSEPH KAUFMANN. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS HAYNES, 
JOSEPH DERAIODY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339162.txt	(No Model.) 
W. D. CRAY. 
ROLLER CRINDING MILI, 
No. 339,162. 
Patented Apr. 6, 1886. 
 
l 
r 
YS 
Sp 33 
is - 
Eyz 
g USH 
f 
S & Z 
N O Ns ... 
S 
 
P. 
is 
 
 
 
 
n 
se 
 
 
 
Y 
2 
y 
 
S 
A. 
9. 
i 
 
taxi 
4A is 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM D. GRAY, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR TO E. P. ALLIS 
& CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
ROLLER G R N DNG - M. L. 
EC 
A.I.ON forming part of Letters Patent No. 339,162, dated April 6, 1886. 
Application filed July 19, 1884. Serial No. 138,208. 
(No model.) 
To all, whom it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM D. GRAY, of 
Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain In 
5 provementsin Roller Grinding-Mills, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention consists in a peculiar con 
struction and arrangement of mechanism 
whereby the separation of the grinding-rolls 
Io is caused to effect also the stoppage of the feed 
roll, and the closing of the grinding-rolls is 
caused, on the other hand, to start the feed 
roll. 
I have represented in the accompanying 
15 drawings a mill similar in its general construc 
tion and mode of operation to those repre 
Sented in Various Letters Patent of the United 
States hitherto granted to me, with the excep 
tion of the present improvements, which are 
2o embodied therein. For the purpose of illus 
tration I have selected a mill containing two 
pair of grinding-rolls and two feed-rolls, com 
monly designated in the art as a double 
roller-mill, the second feed-roll being driven 
25 from the first in an ordinary manner, forming 
no part of my invention. When applied to 
single mills, the same construction will be re 
tained in every particular as far as the first 
pair of rolls is concerned, but those additional 
go parts which have special reference to a second 
pair of rolls will of course be omitted. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure represents an elevation of a double 
roller-mill having my improvements em 
35 bodied therein, looking against the ends of the 
rolls. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the upper 
part of one side of the mill, looking in the di 
rection indicated by the arrow in Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a vertical section through one side of the 
40 mill on the line a. a. Fig. 4 is a side eleva 
tion of the hub by which the feed-roll is dis 
connected. 
A represents the frame or baseportion of the 
machine, B B the two grinding-rolls mounted 
45 in fixed bearings thereon, and C C the co 
operating rolls mounted in supports D, which 
may be pivoted at their lower ends, as shown, 
or otherwise arranged to permit the rolls C. C. 
to be moved quickly to and from their com 
5o panions, in order that they may be thrown 
into and out of position for grinding. The 
movable supports D of each roll are connected 
adjustably to rods E, which latter have their 
opposite ends mounted on eccentrics F on a 
cross-shaft, G, arranged to rock in fixed bear 
ings on the frame. The two rock-shafts arepro 
vided with crank-arms e, pivoted to a horizon 
tal bar, H, by means of which the operator is 
enabled to adjust the two movable rolls si 
multaneously. 
The machine is provided, as usual, at the top 
with a hopper, I, having two throats or out 
lets to deliver the material to the grinding 
rolls. 
Beneath each of these throats there is 
a horizontal feed-roll, J and J', to effect the 
delivery of the material therefrom in a down 
ward direction to the grinding-rolls there 
under. The two feed-rolls are provided on 
their ends with driving-pulleys K and L, con 
nected by a cross-belt, M, whereby motion is 
communicated from One roll to the other. 
All of the parts above described, with the 
exception of the pulley L, are constructed 
and arranged to operate in the ordinary man 
ner, and are not claimed as of the present in 
vention. The driving-pulley L of the feed 
roll J is mounted on its shaft or journal in 
such manner as to Slide laterally thereon 
while compelled to rotate therewith. This 
connection may be effected by means of a 
screw and slot, as represented in Fig. 3, by a 
spline, or by other equivalent mechanism fa 
miliar to the skilled mechanic. The feed 
roll has its shaft or journal provided at the 
outer end with a second pulley, N, which re 
volves freely thereon, but which is fixed 
against side motion, a connection between the 
two being made by a Screw and groove, as in 
Fig. 3. The hub of the pulley N and the outer 
end of the hub of the pulley L are toothed or 
serrated to engage each other, so that they 
form jointly a clutch by which motion may be 
communicated from the pulley N to the feed 
roll. A spiral Spring, O, is applied around 
the shaft of the feed-roll and inclosed within 
a hollow hub of the pulley L, bearing at one 
end against the hub and at the opposite end 
against a collar on the shaft, as plainly repre 
sented in Fig. 3, whereby it is caused to hold 
the clutch devices normally in engagement, 1oo 
90 
So 
95 
2 
339,162 
45 
55 
drawings, although such prolongation is usual 
ly unnecessary. 
I am aware that various mechanisms have 
been devised for the purpose of effecting sim 
ultaneously the stoppage of the feed-rolls and 
the separation of the grinding-rolls, and the 
present invention is consequently restricted 
to the peculiar construction and arrangement 
of the parts herein shown and claimed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a roller grinding-mill, the combina 
tion of the hopper, the stationary and mov 
able grinding-rolls, the feed-roll, the grinding 
roll-adjusting shaft provided with a spiral 
flange, P, and a driving-clutch on the feed 
roll shaft engaged directly by the spiral flange, 
whereby the rotation of the shaft G in the 
proper direction is caused to effect the disen 
gagement of the clutch. 
2. In a roller-mill, the combination of a 
hopper, a feed-roll, a movable and a station 
ary grinding-roll, supports D for the movable 
roll, the rock-shaft G, devices, substantially 
as shown, connecting said shaft with the mov 
able roll-supports, the spiral flange P, ap 
plied to said shaft, the driving pulley and 
clutch mounted on the feed-roll shaft, the 
clutch being in direct engagement with the 
flange P, and the spring to throw the clutch 
into engagement, whereby the operation of 
the rock-shaft to adjust the grinding-roll is 
caused to effect the stopping and starting of 
the feed-roll. 
WILLIAM. D. GRAY. 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD HOPPIN, 
RICHARD BIRIKHOLZ. 
The hub of the sliding pulley L is provided 
at the inner end with a circumferential flange, 
ct, with which there engages a spiral flange or 
rib formed on a hub, P, which is secured 
firmly to the end of one of the rock-shafts G, 
by which the eccentrics are caused to adjust 
the grinding-roll, as before explained. When 
the rock-shaft is turned to effect the separa 
tion of the rolls, its flanged hub moves the 
clutch-pulley Linward out of engagement 
with the driving - pulley N, thereby causing 
the feed-roll to stop at the same time that the 
grinding-rolls are separated. As the second 
feed-roll is driven from the first, its stoppage 
occurs at the same time. 
From the foregoing it will be readily un 
derstood that the movement of the bar Hin 
one direction has the effect of spreading or 
separating the grinding-rolls to stop the grind 
ing action, and at the same time the effect of 
stopping the feed-rolls. On the contrary, the 
movement of the bar H in the opposite di 
rection will have the effect of starting both of 
the feed-rolls and of bringing both pairs of 
grinding -rolls to their operative position. 
Motion is communicated to the pulley N by 
means of a belt, R, passing thence to a pulley, 
T, which in this instance is applied to one of 
the grinding-rolls, but which may be applied 
to any other suitable rotating part of the mill. 
While I have described herein a mill hav 
ing two pairs of rolls, it will be understood 
that the devices are applicable in like man 
ner to single mills, the bar Hand all the de 
vices on one side of the mill being omitted 
and the adjustment of the parts effected by 
operating the arme, which may be prolonged, 
if desired, beyond the length shown in the 
U 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339262.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE BROWNEN, OF ALTHORP ROAD, UPPER TOOTING, COUNTY OF 
SURREY, ENGLAND. 
PRE PARAT ON OF EXTRACT OF CO CA. 
s 
ECEFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 339,262, dated April 6, 1886. 
E 
Application filed September 15, 1885. 
Serial No. 177,190. (No specimens. 
5 
O 
25 
3 5 
45 
To all who it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE BROWNEN, fel 
low of the chemical Society, of No. 15 Al 
thorp Road, Upper Tooting, in the county of 
Surrey, England, a subject of the Queen of 
Great Britain, have invented an Improvement 
in Beverages Prepared from Extracts of the 
Leaves of the Coca-Plant; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, which will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
I take the leaves of the coca-plant (Ery 
th)'0aylon cocci) and extract them with a sol 
vent-Such as alcohol or water. By preference 
I use dilute alcohol, so as to obtain in solution 
the whole of the active constituents of the leaf; 
Or I may take an extract or solution of the 
Coca-leaf as it is to be found in commerce. In 
either case I proceed to purify the extract or 
solution in such manner as to get rid of inert 
or decomposible matter, which if not removed 
would render a beverage prepared from the 
eXtract Or Solution unstable and liable to de 
composition when stored, and which also would 
cause an unsightly turbidity. I effect this 
purification by precipitation preferably by the 
addition of hydrate or carbonate of magnesium, 
Calcium, or aluminium. After vigorous agita 
tion allow the precipitate to form and sub 
side. I then filter off the purified extract, 
which, if desired, I concentrate; or Idilute it 
with Water and charge it with carbonic-acid 
gas, so forming an aerated beverage, which is 
bottled for the market in the usual way. 
prefer to make my solution direct from the 
Coca-leaf itself, as it enables me to guarantee 
its strength by a previous assay, as some coca 
is unsuitable or inert. 
I make my fluid extract of coca as follows: 
One pound of the coca-leaves is reduced to 
powder and moistened with half a pint of 
spirit of Wine, and, if the previous assay in 
dicates an exceptionally rich or feebly-soluble 
alkaloidal leaf, I may add (previously dis 
solved in the spirit of wine) five grains of citric 
acid. I allow this mixture to macerate for 
about twenty-four hours. I then pack it in a 
percolator and displace with more Spirit of 
Wine until have obtained sixteen fluid ounces 
of percolate. This I remove from the receiver 
of the percolator, and then proceed to displace 
the absorbed spirit from the marc by acidulated 
water. This water is prepared by dissolving 
four grains of citric acid in a pint of water. 
When the leaves are exhausted by this process, 
I concentrate this Second percolate at a low 
temperature to a sirupy consistence and then 
mix it with a pint of water. To this again. I 
add One hundred and twenty grains or there 
abouts of magnesia, or two hundred grains or 
thereabouts of its carbonate, or a similar pro 
portion of the hydrates or carbonate of calcium 
or aluminium. I prefer to use magnesia (MgO.) 
To this mixture I add the first or alcoholic per 
colate and agitate the mixture violently from 
time to time. By this method the acid, resin, 
and tannin are removed from Solution in union 
with the precipitant. After a day or so the 
extract is deprived of its resin, &c., and the 
fluid may be decanted or filtered. By this pro 
cess I obtain a hydro-alcoholic Solution of the 
alkaloids, and essential oil of coca, on which 
its remedial virtues depend, and the resinous 
or inert matters, which would render turbida, 
dilute or aqueous mixture, are separated. This 
extract I now proceed to mix with Water in 
definite proportions, dependent upon the pre 
vious assay, So as to impregnate each bottleful 
of the water with a medium dose of coca-say 
equaling two hundred and seventy grains of 
leaf or 1.2 grain of the alkaloid to one gal 
lon of water. I may add aromatics, if it is 
so desired, and then I proceed to charge the 
coca-water with carbonic-acid gas in the or 
dinary way of aerated waters, and I bottle it 
and prepare it for Sale in the usual manner. 
Such a Solution will fairly represent the bey 
erage COca. It Will present it in a convenient 
form, free frominert or unstable matters, and 
suitable for storage or immediate use. By the 
use of this preparation the crude methods of 
chewing the leaf, making an infusion or tea, 
which soon becomes very objectionable, or di 
luting an alcoholic Solution, which becomes 
turbid, unsightly, and deposits, may be dis 
pensed with and a true beverage obtained con 
taining in full the refreshing and sustaining 
properties of the coca-plant. 
I assay the coca-leaf by percolating the 
powdered leaf with spirit of wine containing 
one grain of citric acid in every two ounces 
55 
75 
9O 
95 
IOO 
2 
339,262 
colate the first obtained or alcoholic percolate 
and a precipitant, (such as magnesia,) agi 
tating the mixture, allowing it to subside, and 
removing the purified fluid from the precipi 
tate, substantially as set forth. 
2. The process described of preparing bev 
erages from extracts of the leaves of the coca 
plant, consisting in obtaining the extract, add 
ing to it a precipitant, (such as magnesia,) 
agitating the mixture, allowing it to subside, 
removing the thus purified fluid from the pre 
cipitate, diluting it, and aerating it, substan 
tially as set forth. 
GEORGE BROWNEN. 
25 
Witnesses: 
JNO. DEAN, 
. 
HERBERT DALE, 
Both of 17 Gracechurch Street, London. 
of the spirit employed, and from the resultant 
tincture I liberate the alkaloid by magnesia, 
and purify with ether. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention, and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
1. As an improvement in the process of pre 
paring beverages from extracts of the leaves 
of the coca-plant, the method of obtaining 
such extracts in purified condition, consisting 
in reducing the leaves to powder, macerating 
with spirit of wine, percolating with addi 
tional spirit of wine, removing this alcoholic 
percolate, displacing the absorbed spirit of 
wine from the marc by an aqueous solution of 
citric acid, concentrating this second percolate, 
mixing it with water, adding to the second per 
IO 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339362.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. BEISER. 
CAPPING FOR FENCES, 
No. 339,362, 
Patented Apr. 6, 1886, 
O 
C 
e 
ed 
<! 
te 
t 
A. 
e C 
a 
1. 
w 
^ 
W 
sw 
a 
e 
1 
a 
E. 
s. 
1 s 
X 
42's 
^ 
2 
 
a 
1. 
JVC vesses. 
6.2% aza 
i.N M 
 
M. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, E.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. BEISER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
CAPPNG FOR FENCES. 
SFESIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 339,362, dated April 6, 1886. 
Application filed September 22, 1885. 
Serial No. 17,803. No model.) 
O 
To all tufton, it 7ay coneer: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES. W. BEISER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
5 of New York, have invented a certain new, 
useful, and Improved Automatic Capping for 
Fences, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
This invention relates to an improved at 
tachment for fences, the object being to pro 
vide a cap-piece which can be applied to any 
fence, and which will prevent cats or other 
animals from climbing over the fence or rest 
ing or moving on the Same. 
To, this end the invention consists in a cap 
piece for fences comprising a strip forming 
the base and having a series of short pickets 
or spikes projecting therefrom, the whole be 
ing pivotally hung by rings and pins between 
two posts or uprights, so that the slightest 
pressure from either side will cause it to swing 
in the direction of such pressure, and thus 
dislodge the animal, as hereinafter more fully 
Set forth and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, in both fig 
ures of which like parts are designated by 
similar letters of reference, Figure 1 is a side 
view in elevation of my said invention and a 
portion of a fence to which it is applied. Fig. 
2 is a section thereof, taken on the line aca, 
Fig. 1. 
a designates the upper portion of a fence of 
the kind usually found in the back yards of 
city dwellings. 
b designates the base of my cap-piece, which 
may be of any desired shape in cross-section; 
but as shown is a flat strip of wood of a length 
to fit between posts c, which may be the ordi 
nary fence-posts or extensions thereof, or 
short posts applied to the fence at any desired 
point and held in place by any suitable means, 
as by nails or screws for instance. 
To the base b are attached short pickets or 
spikes cl. They are preferably secured in 
45 place by dovetailing or wedging them in the 
- 
35 
55 
base, so that their butts will project down 
wardly far enough to prevent any animal from 
passing between the base and the top rail of 
the fence, but still leaving a space sufficient 
to allow the structure to swing freely. Each 50 
end of the base is provided with a ring or sta 
ple, e, by means of which it can be suspended 
on pins f, extending from the posts c. When 
thus suspended, the normal position of the 
base and its spikes or pickets is that shown 
in Fig. 1 of the drawings. The slighest press 
ure, however, from either side will cause the 
structure to swing, deflecting the pickets, as 
the base cants, in the direction from which the 
pressure comes, as shown by the dotted lines 
in Fig. 2. The weight of a cat or other ani 
mal attempting to climb on the base will cause 
it to swing, and the animal will be thrown or 
frightened away by the tilting of the base. 
I propose to make these cap-pieces in Sec 
tions of suitable length-say ten feet-so that 
they can be conveniently packed and trans 
ported. They are inexpensive and simple in 
construction, and do not require skilled labor 
to apply then to a fence, as it is only neces 
sary to mail the short posts to the fence the 
proper distances apart and suspend the piece 
carrying the pickets between the posts by 
means of the rings and pins. 
I do not broadly claim a spiked or pointed 
rotating or swinging reel or fender or capping 
for fences, the same not being, as thus stated, 
original with me. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination of the base b, pickets d, 
and rings or staplese with the posts c and pins 
f, substantially as described, for the purpose 
specified. 
my hand this 17th day of July. A. D. 1885. 
CHARLES W. BESER. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 35 
75 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR. C. WEBB, 
GEORGE H. BOTTS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339462.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. PINKNEY, 
GOVERNOR FOR STEAM AND OTHER ENGINES. 
-- 
No. 339,462, 
Patented Apr. 6, 1886. 
SR E. 
 
 
 
  
2 
 
i 
 
 
 
2 
2 
 
 
 
"774. 
Avevador, 
64, 2%a, 21. 2* 7 
N. Per ERS. Photo-lithographer, Washinstents. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES WILLIAM PINKNEY, OF SMETHWICK, COUNTY OF STAFFORD, 
ENGLAND. 
GOVERNOR FOR STEAM AND OTHER ENG NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 339,462, dated April 6, 1886. 
Application fied October 26, 1885. Serial No. 180,992. (No model.) Patented in England January 21, 1885, No. 878, and in France 
October 9, 1885, No. 171,564. 
Io the following is a specification. 
To all whon, it may conce77: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES WILLIAM 
PINKNEY, of Smethwick, in the county of 
Stafford, England, a subject of the Queen of 
5 Great Britain, have invented Improvements 
in Governors for Steam-Engines and Com 
pressed-Air Engines, (for which I have made 
application for Letters Patent in Great Brit 
aim, No. 878, dated January 21, 1885,) of which 
Myinvention consists in Constructing and ar 
ranging, in the manner hereinafter described, 
the parts of governors for steam-engines and 
compressed-air engines, whereby great sin 
15 plicity in construction and efficiency in action 
are secured. 
I will describe my invention in connection 
with a horizontal steam-engine. 
To the valve-rod or spindle of the engine 
(which said valve-spindle has a reciprocating 
motion given to it, as is well understood) I fix 
a nearly-vertical bracket, to the top of which 
a bell-crank lever is jointed, one of the arms 
of the said lever when it is in its normal posi 
tion being vertical and the other horizontal. 
The normal position of the lever is maintained 
with a certain degree of force by means of a 
spring or springs. The vertical arm of the 
lever carries a bob or weight capable of being 
fixed at any desired height on the said arm. 
The horizontal arm of the said lever acts on 
two horizontal slide bolts in the following 
manner: The said slide-bolts slide upon one 
another. Each of the sliding bolts has a pro 
35 jecting vertical arm on its front end, the arm 
on the upper sliding bolt projecting upward, 
and that on the lower arm projecting down 
ward. The axis of the throttle-valve is in the 
same horizontal plane as the contact-faces of 
On the end of the axis of the throttle-valve 
is a lever, the two branches of which are 
nearly in the same line, each branch having a 
pin, which pins engage, respectively, behind 
15 the arms on the sliding bolts. The upper 
sliding bolt has at its front end a horizontal 
projecting lip, forming a continuation of its 
lower face. 
4o the sliding bolts. 
3O 
SO 
65 
The action of the parts is as follows: When 
the engine is running at a rate not exceeding 
that which, by the adjustment of the bob or 
weight, is decided on as the normal rate, the 
to-and-fro motion of the valve-spindle does 
not occasion any motion of the cranked lever 
upon its center. When, however, the motion 
of the engine exceeds its normal motion, the 
inertia of the bob causes it, when the motion 
is reversed, to lag behind, and the cranked 
lever turns upon its center. The end of the 
horizontal arm is thereby raised when the 
valve-spindle and bob are moving toward the 
throttle-valve, and the end of the horizontal 
arm of the cranked lever at the end of its stroke 
rests upon the projecting lip of the upper slid 
ing bolt, and pushing that sliding bolt forward 
turns the axis of the throttle-valve, and thereby 
closes the Said valve more or less and reduces 
the speed of the engine. The pushing back 
of the upper sliding bolt produces the advance 
of the lower sliding bolt. By the slackened 
speed of the engine the horizontal arm no 
longer engages on the lip of the upper sliding 
bolt, but at its lower position its end is oppo 
site the end of the lower sliding bolt, and acts 
upon it, if the speed of the engine becomes 
reduced; hence by the action described on 
the upper and lower sliding bolts, the posi 
tion of the throttle-valve becomes adjusted so 
as to maintain the normal speed of the engine. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings rep 
resents in side elevation a portion of a hori 
Zontal steam-engine to which a governor con 
structed according to my invention is applied, 
and Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the same, taken 
through the cylinder and throttle-valve and 
parts of the governor. 
The Same letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in both figures. 
a is the case of the slide-valve of the engine, 
and b is the rod or spindle of the slide-valve, go 
having a reciprocating motion effected in the 
ordinary way. 
e is the case of the throttle-valved, and e is 
the spindle of the said throttle-valve. 
The governor constituting myinvention con- 95 
sists of the following parts: On the slide-valve 
75 
2 
339,462 
25 
O 
15 
spindle b a vertical bracket, f, is fixed and 
jointed. To the top of the said bracket is the 
bell-crank lever gg, turning on the center g. 
When the said lever g g is in its normal posi 
5 tion, as represented in Fig. 1, the arm gy is 
vertical, and the other arm, g, is horizontal. 
The normal position represented of the lever 
gg" is maintained by the spring-bolth, carried 
by the bracket f bearing against the heel (f' of 
the said lever. The vertical arm g of the 
cranked lever is screw-threaded and carries a 
bob or weight, i, capable of being adjusted at 
any desired height on the said arm g by the 
screw-nut i, on the top of the said bob work 
ing upon the screw of the vertical arm. 
k l are the two horizontal sliding bolts work 
ing in the guides m, n, the lower edge of the 
top bolt, k, sliding upon the top edge of the 
under bolt, l. The horizontal arm g of the 
cranked lever g g acts upon the said bolts lic l, 
in the manner hereinafter described. The front 
end of the horizontal arm gy of the cranked 
lever is pointed, and the rear end of the top 
sliding bolt, k, is furnished with a lip, l', for 
the pointed end of the arm g to engage with. 
The sliding bolts k l have projecting vertical 
arms k l on their front ends, the arm I of the 
upper sliding bolt projecting upward and the 
arm l of the lower sliding bolt projecting 
downward. (See Fig. 1.) The axis e of the 
throttle-valve d is situated at right angles to 
the sliding bolts kil, and is in the same hori 
zontal plane as the contact-faces of the sliding 
bolts. n n is a lever on the end of the throttle 
valve axis e, the branches of the said lever 
making a very obtuse angle with one another. 
Each branch of the lever is provided with a 
pin, p q, which pins engage, respectively, be 
hind the arms kil on the sliding bolts l; l. 
(See Fig. 2.) 
The action of the parts of the governor is 
as follows: On the engine running at a rate 
exceeding that which by the adjustment of 
the bob or weight is decided on as the normal 
rate, the to-and-fro motion of the slide-valve 
spindle b does not occasion any motion of the 
cranked lever g g upon its center ty, and the 
throttle-valve d is unoperated upon. When, 
however, the rate of motion of the engine ex 
5O ceeds its normal rate, the inertia of the bob 
causes the said bob When the motion of the 
slide-valve spindle is reversed, to lag behind. 
For example, when the slide-valve spindle b 
has completed its stroke in the direction of 
the arrow S, Fig. 1, and begins its return 
stroke, the bob i, lagging behind, performs a 
vertical motion on its center g in the direc 
tion of the arrow , Fig. 1. The pointed end 
of the horizontal arm gy of the cranked lever 
g g (which pointed end in the supposed po 
sition of the slide valve spindle b is clear of 
the lip l') is thereby raised, and as the valve 
spindle b and bob i move toward the throttle 
valve, or in a direction contrary to that in 
65 dicated by the arrows, the pointed end of the 
horizontal arm () of the cranked lever as it 
approaches the end of its stroke rests upon 
the projecting lip I of the upper sliding bolt, 
k, and pushes the said bolt k forward. The 
arna l of the said bolt k is thereby made to 
operate upon the pin p, and through the arm 
in move the axis e of the throttle - valve 
through a small angle, and thus close the 
throttle-valve d more or less and reduce the 
speed of the engine. The pushing back of 75 
the upper sliding bolt, k, produces the ad 
vance of the lower sliding bolt, l, through the 
action of the pin (1 of the lower branch, n, of 
the lever in n' upon the projecting arm l of 
the said lower bolt, l. When, by the partial 8o 
closing of the throttle-valved the engine has 
resumed its normal speed, there is no longer 
any lagging of the bob i, and the pointed end 
g of the cranked lever g g now engages under 
the lip k", and no longer operates upon the 85 
sliding bolt k. The end g of the lever in its 
lowered position is now opposite the end of 
the lower sliding bolt, l, and should the speed 
become reduced beyond the mormal speed the 
pointed end of the lever 9 strikes the end of 9o 
the said bolt l, which bolt, as before described, 
has been pushed forward by the partial clos 
ing of the throttle-valve. The back motion 
thus given to the lower bolt, l, causes it to 
operate upon the axis of the throttle-valve 
through the arm l, pin (), and arm n, and re 
open the said throttle-valve, and the parts of 
the governor resume the normal positions 
represented in the drawings. Thus by the 
action of the upper and lower sliding bolts, 
k l, automatically operated upon by the 
cranked lever carried by the reciprocating 
slide-valve spindle, the position of the throttle 
valved becomes adjusted, so as to maintain 
the normal speed of the engine, as will be 
understood by an examination of the draw 
iy invention is applicable to all kinds of 
vertical as well as horizontal steam-engines and 
compressed-air engines. 
In applying my invention to vertical steam 
engines and to compressed-air engines the 
parts of the governor are constructed, com 
bined, and made to operate substantially in 
the manner hereinbefore described and illus 
trated with respect to a horizontal steam en 
glne. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention, and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that I claim as my invention of im 
provements in govornors for steam-engines and 
compressed-air engines 
1. In a governor for steam and other en 
gines, the combination, with the reciprocat- I 25 
ing valve-rod b, of the bracket?, carrying the 
pivoted bell-crank leverg g, one end of which 
engages with the lip I on the sliding bolt k, 
the heel g, and spring-bolt h, substantially as 
described. 
45 
15 
55 
S. 
95 
IO) 
IOS 
IO 
I 3G 
 
2. In a governor of the construction shown, before described, and illustrated in the accom 
339,462 
3. 
the two sliding bolts kl, operated upon by the panying drawings. 
horizontal arm of the cranked lever gg, for 
automatically closing and opening the throttle. 
5 valve of the engine, the said bolts operating 
lupon branches of a lever on the axis or spindle 
of the throttle-valve, substantially as herein- 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD SRERRETT, 
ARTHUR J. POWELL. 
CHARLES WILLIAM PINKNEY. 
L. s. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339562.txt	(No Model.) 
S. D. LOCKE, 
HARWESTER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 339,562, 
 
Patented Apr, 6, 1886, 
 
s WE 
  
 
 
 
28-by-1.cscs 
S eves 
exas 
1. LS Sy&uovus ZoZocace. 
(No Model.) 
No. 339,562, 
S. D. LOCKE. 
HARWESTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr, 6, 1886. 
G) 
N g'ss 
- 
Armentern 
22 
seem to 
22 
NH SHINIS 
N  VE723 
2NH 
7. 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
928) Evosses 
NAVS Y 
  
  
  
 
N. 
 
l 
SLA1 
SH g) 
3v-uc-4-bot 
Sylva/rows 70-7 locAve. 
SS 3. Yelf for city 
62ees/62.laaz, 
FTERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SYLVANUS D. LOCKE, OF HOOSICK FALLS, NEW YORK, 
HARWESTER. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 339,562, dated April 6, 1886. 
Application filed January 28, 1886. serial No. 190,045. No mode.) - 
55 
To aid two, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, SYLVANUS D. LOCKE, 
of Hoosick Falls, in the county of Rensselaer 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Harvesters, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates mainly to that class of 
harvesting-machines in which the grain, after 
being cut or laid upon the platform, is carried 
Sidewise by raking apparatus up over an ele 
vator, as in the well-known Marsh type, and 
delivered to a binding-table or to an auto 
imatic binder, or dropped upon the ground; 
and for the purpose of properly illustrating 
the various features I have represented them 
in connection with a machine of such con 
Struction. 
The improvement consists in connecting 
with the draft-tongue one arm of an elbow. 
lever hinged to the framing of the machine, 
and to the other arm of said lever a threaded 
rod passing through a corresponding inter 
nally-threaded block or bracket, whereby the 
machine may be tilted by turning said rod, 
and in other combinations and details of con 
Struction hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, Figure I is a perspective 
view of a machine embodying my improve. 
ments; and Fig. 2 is an elevation from the 
Stubble-side of the machine with the grain 
chute broken away and other parts in section. 
The machine consists, primarily, of a plat 
form, A, at the forward edge of which is ar 
ranged a sickle bar or cutter, and upon which 
the grain falls as cut thereby, an elevator 
frame, A, rising from the platform to a point 
above the main drive-wheel, and thence ex 
tending down on the opposite side, two sup 
porting-wheels, B and B, the former of which 
carries the principal weight of the machine 
and serves as the driving-wheel, from which 
motion is transmitted to the operating parts 
of the machine, and the latter being the grain 
wheel, and a strong frame supporting the ap 
paratus on the axle of the drive-wheel. 
The elevator-frame is braced by diagonal 
brace-bars (t, arranged as shown; but this 
feature I have incorporated in the subject 
matter of another application, filed in the 
Patent Office of the United States on the 11th 
day of May, 1883, Serial number 94,633, and 
will not further allude to it herein. 
For the purpose of varying the height of 
cut, the machine is vertically adjustable up On 
the axle of the main or driving wheel, as is 
usual in machines of this class, the outer Sup 
porting-wheel being likewise adjustable, in 
order to maintain the platform in a horizon 
tal position. 
The mechanism which I prefer to use for 
raising and lowering the machine is repre 
sented in Fig. 2, the axle being furnished 
with pinions meshing with segmental racks, 
a lever being provided for rotating the pin 
ions, and suitable detents being employed for 
holding the pinions against rotation after ad 
justment, as in Letters Patent granted to me 
bearing date January 11th, 1881, and num 
bered 236,503, to which reference is made for 
a more full description. 
In adjusting the machine to any consider 
able extent upon the driving-wheel its balance 
is changed somewhat, owing to the segmental 
outline of the standards in which said wheel 
is supported, and it is desirable to provide 
means to compensate for such change, or for 
establishing a proper balance when wanting 
from any cause. It is, moreover, desirable to 
place the seat lower down than has heretofore 
been customary, and in such position that the 
driver may see the binding-table, as well as 
the grain-platform, and that his line of sight 
may strike the standing grain before the cut 
ters at a very moderate inclination. For this 
purpose, and in order, also, to permit the Var 
ious levers and other devices by which the 
different groups of mechanism are controlled 
or adjusted to be brought directly and conven 
iently into the reach of the driver, I mount the 
seat C upon the rearwardly-projecting beam 
C, which runs longitudinally beneath the ele 
vator-frame, the standard c of said Seat being 
seated in a casting, c', which is adjustable for 
ward and backward upon the beam, and is held 
at any desired adjustment by means of a bolt, c', 
passing through thestep orcasting and through 
one of a series of holes in the beam. Thus lo 
cated, the seat is convenient to mount, and the 
driver seated therein commands a view of the 
raking-platform and the binding-table on op 
posite sides of the elevator, and a low-down 
view of the standing grain, besides being in a 
convenient position to reach the lever for rais 
ing and lowering the machine, the device for 
75 
85 
gO 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
40 
SO 
move forward or backward, thereby rocking 
the elbow-lever upon its pivot, and causing it 
to elevate or depress the link, and through it 
the tongue, according to the direction in which 
the rod or shaft turns. 
The mechanism relating to the support and 
adjustment of the seat by itself has been made 
the subject of an application filed January 28, 
1886, Serial No. 190,046, as Division B of the 
original upon which the present is founded, 
and I therefore do not lay any claim to it 
herein; but 
What I do claim is 
1. In combination with the draft - tongue 
hinged orjointed to the framing of the machine, 
an elbow-lever having one arm connected with 
the tongue and the other connected with a 
threaded rod passing through a corresponding 
ly-threaded block or bracket, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. In combination with the hinged tongue, an 
elbow-lever connected therewith, and a thread 
ed rod connected by a universal joint with the 
elbow-lever, whereby the rod is permitted 
both to rotate and to move backward and for 
ward with the lever in adjusting the tongue. 
3. In combination with the tongue hinged 
near the front of the elevator, and with the 
driver's seat located directly in rear of the ele 
vator, an elbow - lever connected with the 
tongue and a threaded rod passing longitudi 
mally beneath the elevator, and at its front 
connected with the elbow-lever by a flexible 
joint and at its rear provided with a crank or 
hand-wheel within reach of the driver in his 
Seat. 
SYIVANUS D. LOCKE. 
55 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
PAUL ARNOLD, 
LEONARD WASSALL. 
339,562 
45 
adjusting the tongue, and the levers for vary 
ing the position of the reel. 
The step or casting c is formed with an in 
clined socket to receive the seat-standard, and 
with a foot-rest, c, to receive the feet of the 
driver. The standard may be bolted in the 
socket; but ordinarily its leverage will be suffi 
cient to confine it therein, and for the purpose 
of staying it when so confined, and to permit 
its ready removal or adjustment, I provide a 
rod, c', having its inner end bent to hookinto 
an eye or staple on the frame of the machine, 
and having a series of perforations at its outer 
end, to receive a hook or pin on the seat-stand 
ard bent at such an angle that after the rod 
has been applied thereto and hooked into its 
eye on the frame it cannot be removed without 
first releasing it from said eye. 
As the adjustment of the machine bodily 
upon the axle tends to change the relation of 
the draft-tongue to the team, and as it is fre 
quently desirable to change the angle of the 
cutters to the ground or to raise or to lower 
them by rocking the harvester upon the carry 
ing-wheels, I have provided means whereby 
the tongue may be moved positively upon its 
hinge, thus causing the front of the harvester 
to sink or to rise, as may be, as the tongue 
conforms itself to the draft. This tongue Dis 
hinged or jointed to the frame, as usual, and 
is connected at a suitable distance from said 
joint by a link, d, with one arm of an elbow-le 
ver, d, the other arm of which is connected 
by a ball-and-socket or equivalent joint to the 
forward end of a rod or shaft, d, which is 
threaded at its rear end, passes through a simi 
larly-threaded arm or bracket, d, and is pro 
vided within reach of the driver's seat with a 
crank, d", or a hand-wheel by which to turn it. 
The rotation of the rod or shaft causes it to 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339662.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 339,662, 
W. JONES. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
TOBACCOBOOKING MACHINE, 
Patented Apr. 13, 1886, 
WITNESSES 
ladi tea; 4. 
A. 
4- 4. 2%-4------ 
 
IA/WEA/TOR 
/.4%4- 
By 
27% a 24-7- 
ATTORA/EY 
(No Model.) 
E. KORTING, 
APPARATUS FOR ELEWATING LIQUIDS, 
Patented Apr. 13, 1886. 
No. 339,663, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
|- 
[-3 
a 
&} 
gssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssss? 
?%s<<<<<<<<<SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS?S? 
?t 
%Nk 
22 
Peters, co-hosraebar, washington, E. c. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339762.txt	
/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339862.txt	(Model.) 
C. P. CORLISS, 
STOP WATCH, 
No. 339,862, 
Patented Apr. 13, l886, 
| 
d 
d 
N 
   
97 6. 
zezzella2 
 
 
   
ssN 
SY 
as NN 
film 
 
 
% 
7. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES P. CORLISS, OF ELGIN, ASSIGNOR TO THE ELGIN NATIONAL 
WATCH COMPANY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
STOP-WATCH. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 339,862, dated April 13, 1886. 
Application filed August 28, 1884. Serial No. 141,651. (Model.) 
25 
5 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Elgin, in the county of Kane, and in the State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Stop-Watches; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, exact description thereof, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, in 
Which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the front 
or dial side of a movement having my in 
provements, a portion of the dial being broken 
away to show the supplemental minutes-hand 
arbor. Fig. 2 is a like view of the opposite 
side of the same. Fig. 3 is an enlarged per 
spective view of the winding-arbor and sec 
tional sleeve separated from each other. Fig. 
4 is a like view of the same combined. Fig. 
5 is an enlarged perspective view of the parts 
which furnish a bearing for the seconds-arbor, 
separated from each other. Fig. 6 is a like 
view of the same combined. Fig. 7 is an en 
larged perspective view of the combined ratch 
et and cam wheels and their connecting parts, 
and Fig. S is an enlarged section upon line a 
ac of Figs. 1 and 2. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
stop-watches; and it consists, principally, in 
the means employed for enabling the timing 
hands to be started, stopped, and set at Zero, 
substantially as and for the purpose hereinafter 
specified. 
It consists, further, as an improvement in 
stop-watches, in a supplemental minutes-hand 
arbor journaled at or Within the axis of the 
main wheel of the winding attachment, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose hereinafter 
shown and described. 
It consists, finally, as an improvement in 
stop-watches, in a supplemental minutes-hand 
arbor, which is journaled within the axis of 
the main wheel of the winding attachment in 
45 a line with the axis of the winding-arbor, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose hereinafter 
specified. 
In the annexed drawings, A represents the 
front or pillar plate of a Watch, and B the back 
plate or winding-bridge, which parts are con 
structed and combined in the usual manner. 
Journaled between the plate A and bridge 
Be it known that I, CHARLES P. CORLISs, of B is a winding-arbor, C, which at its outer end 
is adapted to engage with a push-pin, D, and 
at its inner end is provided with a pinion, c, 
that meshes with and imparts motion to a 
toothed wheel, E, which is pivoted upon the 
outer face of said plate A, and constitutes the 
main wheel of the winding attachment. The 
wheel E is preferably pivoted upon a boss that 
is formed upon the plate A, and is held in po 
sition thereon by means of a washer, e, and 
screwe'; but any desired construction may be 
used for pivoting said wheel in place. 
Journaled within the plate A and bridge B, 
at the axis of the Winding-wheel E, and in a 
line with the axis of the winding-arbor C, is 
an arbor, F, which upon its front end carries 
a hand, f, and, being suitably connected with 
the time-train, operates to register minutes 
upon a Supplemental dial, (7, that is provided 
within the ordinary dial, G. Such location of 
Said supplemental arbor in no manner inter 
feres with the ordinary time-train of a watch, 
and renders practicable the utilization of such 
time-train without change in the construction 
of a stop - Watch, While otherwise a special 
movement differently arranged would be nec 
essary. 
The longitudinal movement of the push-pin 
D is employed for starting, stopping, and set 
ting at zero the timing-hands, and as a means 
for communicating motion from the former to 
the latter I employ a sleeve, H, which is placed 
upon and adapted to move lengthwise of the 
winding - arbor C between the plate A and 
bridge B, and is held outward with a yielding 
pressure by means of a spring, I. The outer 
end of said sleeve impinges upon the inner 
side of the case-Spring K, and the inner end of 
said push-pin upon the Outer side of the same, 
while upon an arm, h, that projects from said 
sleeve radially rearward through said bridge 
is pivoted a pawl, h", which engages with a 
ratchet-wheel, Tu, and when the push-pin is 
moved in Ward rotates Said wheel a distance 
equal to the circumferential length of one of 
its teeth. Upon the outward movement of 
said sleeve said pawl trips over and engages 
with the next Succeeding tooth, and is then in 
position for effecting a farther partial revolu 
tion of said ratchet-wheel when said push-pin 
35 
50 
- 
re 
55 
CO 
So 
go 
95 
OO 
 
2 
339,862 
v 
5 
IO 
is again moved inward. The ratchet-wheel L. 
carries upon its outer face a cam-wheel, M, 
which has contact at its notched periphery 
with levers N, O, and Pfor starting, stopping, 
and setting the hand-carrying arbors at zero, 
said mechanism being of any usual form or 
construction. 
In order that variations in the thickness or 
position of the case-spring K may be compen 
sated and the movement readily adjusted to a 
case, the sleeve H has its interior made con 
siderably larger than the winding-arbor C, 
and is provided with a screw-thread. Into 
said threaded interior is placed a second ex 
teriorly-threaded sleeve, h, which fits loosel 
upon said winding-arbor, and is preferably 
split longitudinally a portion of its length, so 
as to cause it to be firmly held in place by the 
outward spring of its divided portion, while 
free to be rotated by means of a screw-driver. 
The outer end of the inner sleeve, h", now 
forms the bearing against the case-spring K, 
and by turning the former within the sleeve H 
its said bearing end may be extended or, re 
tracted as much as may be necessary to adapt 
it to the position or thickness of said spring. 
In open-face watches, where no case-springs 
are used, the bearing end of the adjustable 
sleeve is extended to and receives the inner 
end of the push-pin. 
The construction described enables the stop 
watch movement to be easily and quickly fitted 
to and placed in any case for which it is adapted 
without other change than can be produced 
by means of a screw-driver. 
Having thus fully set forth the nature and 
merits of my invention, what I claim as new 
S 
1. As an improvement in stop-watches, the 
combination, with mechanism for leturning 
the timing-hands to zero, and with a push-pin 
that is journaled within the case-stem, of a 
. 
55 
50 
sleeve which surrounds the winding-arbor and 
is engaged by said push-pin, and a pawl that is 
pivoted only upon said sleeve and is adapted 45 
to engage with a ratchet-wheel, whereby the 
longitudinal movements of said push-pin will 
be communicated to and cause a step-by-step 
rotation of said ratchet-wheel, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
2. As an improvement in stop-watches, the 
combination of a push-pin which is journaled 
within the case-stem, a sleeve that encircles 
the winding-arbor and is engaged by said push 
pin, a pawl which is pivoted only upon said 
sleeve, a ratchet-wheel that is engaged by said 
pawl and by rotation is adapted to actuate 
mechanism for starting, stopping, and return 
ing the timing-hands to zero, and a spring 
which operates to hold said sleeve with a yield 
ing pressure at the outer limit of its motion, 
whereby the longitudinal motion of said push 
in will cause a step-by-step rotation of said 
ratchet-wheel, substantially a? and for the pur 
pose shown. 
3. As an improvement in stop-watches, a 
supplemental minutes-hand arbor journaled at 
or within the axis of the main wheel of the 
winding attachment, substantially as and for 
the purpose shown and described. 
4. As an improvement in stop-watches, a 
supplemental minutes-hand arbor which is 
journaled within the axis of the main wheel of 
the winding attachment in a line with the axis 
of the winding-arbor, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 21st day of 
July, A. D. 1884. 
. 
CHARLEs P. CORLISS. 
65 
s 
75 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM H. CLOUDMAN, 
H. L. GIVEN, 
- 
25 
3) 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US339962.txt	(No Model.) 
J. N. YELTON. 
BURGIAR ALARM, 
No. 339,962. 
 
Zzz, Z. 
Patented Apr. 13, 1886. 
28). Evlosses 
sal- 
2 
2 
2 
% 
- 
22 
6-c-e-a-so 
2-ce Y 
7.4/. Vezzo 
53\als &bbotvic; 2 6 2 2. 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, b.C. 
h 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JASPER N. YELTON, OF CATAWBA, KENTUCKY. 
BURG LAR-ALARM. 
53CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 339,962, dated April 3, 1886. 
Application filed February 9, 1886. 
Serial No. 191,317. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may conceit: 
Be it known that I, JASPER N. YELTON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cataw 
ba, in the county of Pendleton and State of 
Kentucky, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Burglar-Alarms, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to certain improve. 
ments in burglar-alarms, its object being to 
provide a device of simple and effective con 
struction that will be applicable to the doors 
and windows of buildings, and be so arranged 
that upon opening the door or window to 
which it is applied an explosion will occur, 
and thus signify the presence of burglars and 
alarm the occupants of the building; and the 
invention consists in certain novel features of 
construction and arrangement of parts, as 
will be more fully hereinafter described, and 
particularly pointed out in the claim. 
In the drawings annexed, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view, showing the application to a 
door, of a signaling device embodying the 
features of my improvement. Fig. 2 is a per 
Spective representation of my improvement, 
showing its application to use in connection 
with a window. Fig. 3 is a sectional view of 
the alarm mechanism. 
A is a door; B, the door-frame. 
C C' is a bracket having its part C perfo. 
rated for the reception of screws, by means 
of which it is secured to the door-frame. The 
part C is provided with a longitudinal recess 
for the reception of a bow-shaped spring, D, 
and at its outer end with a recess, F, for the 
reception of a blank cartridge or other ex 
plosive. 
E E is a hammer pivoted to the bracket 
C, as shown at d, in a manner to engage the 
Spring D, and is provided at its impact end 
with a point, d", for effectively engaging with 
the cartridge. 
G G is a door-bolt and socket-plate of ordi 
nary construction. By setting the sliding 
bolt G in the position shown the hammer 
will be set by closing the door either from 
the inside or outside of the building. Should 
the door or window be opened while the 
device is set for action, the bolt will strike 
the portion of the hammer marked E and 
cause the same to explode the cartridge in 
the recess F. By adjusting the bolt G so it 
cannot engage with the hammer, the mechan 
ism will be made inactive and the door or win 
dow may be opened or closed without produc 
ing the effects described. 
Referring to Fig. 2, K and K represent the 
outside and inside sashes of a window. The 
bracket C C is secured to the sash K in a ver 
tical position, as shown. 
H is an arm affixed to or made integral 
with a disk-like body, H, provided centrally 
with a vertical perforation for the reception 
of a bolt, h, which pivotally secures the same 
to a plate, H", affixed to the sash K" by screws 
or other suitable means. 
His a handle secured to the disk for the 
purpose of operating the same. 
It is evident that instead of the device at 
tached to the inside sash, K, any of the well 
known sash-locks may be used. The center 
of the bow-spring bears against the straight 
side of the arm E of the hammer, so as to 
force the hammer downward when tripped, 
and against the flat side of the arm E, so as 
to hold said hammer-lever in an elevated po 
sition until tripped, and then permit it to be 
forced down upon the cartridge, so as to ex 
plode the same. It will be seen that the 
hammer-lever is pivoted directly over the 
crown of the bow-spring, so that the angle 
in shifting below the pivotal point permits 
the single spring to hold and move the lever 
in the opposite direction, as required. By 
grasping and holding the hammer while the 
bolt G or arm H are being adjusted to clear 
the same, it may be set in the position shown 
in Fig. 3, and the door or window opened 
without exploding the cartridge, as occasion 
may require; but this adjustment of course 
can only be made from the inside. 
Having explained the features of my im 
provement, what I claim as new, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
In a burglar - alarm, a bracket provided 
with a longitudinal recess for the reception 
90 
95 
IO 
25 
45 
 
2 
339,962 
 
of a bow-spring and a recess for the recep- 
tion of a cartridge, and an angular lever or presence of two witnesses. 
hammer pivoted in said longitudinal recess 
directly over the crown of the bow-spring, 
5 so as to be operated upon by the same and 
explode the cartridge, in combination with 
an adjustable operating-bolt, substantially as 
described. 
G. W. McKINLEY, 
J. E. MCKEE. 
Witnesses: 
. . 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
, - . 
. . 
JASPER N. YELTON. 
f 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340063.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
No. 340,063. 
H. STOCKMAN. 
LAST SUPPORTING JACK, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1 
Patented Apr. 13, 1886. 
  
E. SHIE 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 340,063. 
 
H. STOCKMAN. 
LAST SUPPORTING JACK. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 13, 1886, 
 
 
(N4 
r 
T f 
Z5 2. 6 
272, 
62 
Z. 
as 
ar 
2 
27 
G - 
a. 
4 / a 
- e. 
NS 
7, 
222 4 
JZ 
G 
7% 
Ay 
A 
a 
-z 
G 
f 
 
(No Mode.) 
H. STOCKMAN. 
LAST SUPPORTING JACK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
No. 340,063, 
t 
Patented Apr. 13, 1886, 
22, 8 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY STOCKMAN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
LAST - SUPPORT N G JACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 340,063, dated April 13, 1886. 
Application filed November 25, 1885. Serial No. 183,956. (No model.) 
w 
65 
base and its attached jack-body turned to the 
To all whon, it naily concern: 
left. Fig. 7 is a top plan view of the sub-base. 
Be it known that I, HENRY STOCKMAN, a 
Fig. S is a bottom plan view thereof. Fig. 9 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
is a top plan view of the base. Fig. 10 is a 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
bottom plan view thereof. Figs. 11 and 12 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
are detail views of parts of the jack-body; and 
new and useful Improvements in Jacks, of 
Figs. 13 and 14 represent modified forms of 
which the following is a specification, re?er 
the pivoted supporting-bar of the base. 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
Referring to the drawings, in which similar 
drawings. 
letters of reference denote similar parts, A 
My invention relates to last - supporting 
designates the sub-base, consisting of a thin 
jacks for shoe-makers' use, and has for its ob 
plate, ct, of metal, provided at its side and end 
ject the provision of means for throwing the 
edges with downwardly-projecting flanges (t", 
jack-body and its contained last into different 
that bear upon the bench or table. 
positions for convenience to the operator, and 
a designates a slot formed at the middle of 
15 in means employed to secure it from displace 
the sub-base for the passage of a locking-bar, 
ment therefrom. 
B, pivoted to the base, as hereinafter de 
To these ends the invention comprises, in 
connection, a sub-base secured to the bench or 
scribed. 
a' (t" designate lugs projecting from the low 
table, a base that supports the last-holding 
er surface of the sub-base at each side of the 
2o jack, a hinged connection between the base 
slot a. I provide the lugs (c' with screw 
and sub-base which allows the base to be 
threaded apertures a', that receive the screw 
turned either to the right or left, and means 
threaded inner end of a rod, C, that extends 
for holding said base in fixed position at any 
thence below the part a through the flange a', 
desired point. 
and is provided upon its outer end with a 
In addition to the above-described adjust 
winged head, c, to operate the rod. The rod 
ment, I provide that the jack-body shall be 
C serves to secure the bar B at different de 
loosely connected to the base, so as to turn 
sired points within the slot a'; and to this end 
freely upon a central pivot thereon in a plane 
the inner end of the rod may either bear 
of motion at right angles to the plane of mo 
against the bar B or said bar may be perfo 
tion of the base without reference to the posi 
rated to receive the end of the rod, as shown in 
tion occupied by the sub-base, and means for 
Fig. 14. 
securing said jack-body at different desired 
at a designate apertured lugs projecting 
points of adjustment upon the base. 
from the upper surface of the sub-base, at one 
The invention further contemplates the pro 
vision of means which, used in connection with side thereof, to which is pivotally connected 
the jack-body, allow a last to be instantly by a rod, d, one end of a frame, D, the oppo 
site end of which is pivoted to the base E. 
placed in position upon or removed from said 
The frame D is in length equal to the width of go 
jack-body, and in means for holding the last 
the sub-base, and consists in side rails, d, and 
securely in position when in use. 
transverserails d". Apertured lugs d", formed 
The invention above set forth is hereinafter 
on the ends of said frame afford passage to the 
fully described, and specifically pointed out in 
rods by which it is connected to the base and 
the claims. 
sub-base, respectively. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
E designates the base, consisting of a thin 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a side 
plate, e, of metal, provided at its edges with 
45 elevation of a jack embodying my improve 
a downwardly-projecting flange, e', which rests 
ments. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the opposite 
upon the sub-base. 
side of the jack. Fig. 3 represents an end 
e' designates an aperture formed at the mid 
elevation thereof. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal sec 
dle of the base, to receive the shank of a screw 
tion through thejack and its attachments. Fig. 
threaded bolt, F, which secures the jack-body 
5o 5 is a transverse section of Fig. 1, showing the 
to the base, as hereinafter described. The 
base and its attached jack-body turned to the 
headlf of the bolt F is square in cross-section, 
right. Fig. 6 is a similar sectional view, the 
75 
IO) 
O 
25 
35 
 
IO 
5 
25 
is held within a socket, e, formed by flanges 
e' upon the lower surface of the base at each 
side of the aperture e, and is provided with 
downwardly-projecting lugs f', between which 
is pivoted the upper end of the adjusting-bar B. 
e designates strengthening-ribs formed upon 
the lower surface of the plate e. The flange e 
of the base is cut away at its sides e'e', for the 
reception of the frame D, one end of which is 
pivoted by a bolt, e, within the cut-away por 
tion e' of the flange e'. 
By reference to Figs. 5 and 6 it will he ob. 
served that the above-described hinged con 
nection between the base and sub-base permits 
the turning of said base either to the right or 
left, the respective ends of the frame D becom 
ing in turn the pivotal point of the base. 
I secure the jack-body to the base E in the 
following described manner, viz: 
e' designates a circular rib formed upon the 
upper surface of the base E, and this rib has 
for its center the aperture e", and fits into a 
circular groove, g, formed in the bottom of the 
jack-body G. The groove g has for its center 
an aperture, g, formed through saidjack-body 
at the middle thereof. The upper threaded 
end of the bolt F projects through the aper 
ture (f', and through a boss, g, projecting from 
the upper surface of the jack-body about said 
aperture. The boss of is provided upon its 
upper surface with cam-faces g, which engage 
similar cam-faces, h, formed upon the lower 
surface of the apertured head of a cam-lever, 
H, placed upon the upper end of the bolt F. 
F designates an adjusting-nut upon the bolt 
above the lever. 
By operating the lever H the jack - body 
may be firmly secured at any point of its plane 
of motion, as will be readily understood. 
The jack-body G comprises a base, G', a toe 
standard, G', having a ridge, g, at its lower 
end, and a fixed heel-standard, G", having a 
rounded upper end, g, and a transverse ap 
erture, g. 
I designates a swinging-heel-standard hav 
ing a bifurcated lower end, the parts i of which 
extend at each side of the standard G", and are 
provided with square apertures i, to receive 
the Squared portion of a lever, J, journaled 
in the aperture g of the standard G. The up 
per end of the swinging standard I is provided 
with an aperture to receive a removable pin, 
i", which is held in place by a set-screw, i. 
The lever-arm J is provided at its free end 
with a slot, through which projects from the 
jack-body a screw-threaded bolt, K, whereby 
any desired degree of tension may be im 
parted to a spiral spring, K', interposed upon 
bolt K, between the thumb-nut lc and lever J. 
The spring IK operates to hold the free end 
of the lever J against the upper surface of 
the jack-body, and through said lever the up 
per end of the swinging standard forward in 
the position shown in Fig. 1, whereby the toe 
of a last placed upon said standard will bear 
firmly upon an adjustable toe rest or block, 
L, having a bifurcated lower end, the parts l 
. 
 
340,063 
s 
s 
l 
so 
of which extend at the sides of and engage with 
vertical grooves m, formed in the sides of a 
casting, M, having a sleeved lower end, n, 
whichfits upon the toe-standard G', and a slot, 
m", that engages the rib g' at foot of said stand 
ard. 
If desired, the upper end of the standard 
G may be apertured, as shown in Fig. 4, to 75 
receive a removable pin similar to that em 
ployed in connection with the swinging stand 
ard I, or said standard may be enlarged longi. 
tudinally and operate in lieu of the casting 
M, and be provided with a series of aper 
tures to receive an adjustable toe-rest. 
I do not limit myself to the exact construc 
tion of parts herein shown and described, as 
I am aware that various modifications may be 
made therein without departing from the 
spirit or sacrificing the advantages thereof 
as, for instance, a spring-pin may be used to 
secure the bar B in lieu of the bar C. 
No claim is broadly made herein for the 
construction of the lever J with the swinging 
heel-support I; as such matter is broadly 
claimed in my application filed September 
29, 1885, Serial No. 178,571. 
92 
. 
I claim- 
1. A last-holding jack having a sub-base 
secured to a suitable support, a base mounted 
thereon, and a frame interposed between and 
hinged, respectively, to the base and sub-base, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a last-holdingjack, a sub-base secured 
to a suitable support, a base mounted thereon, 
a frame interposed between and hinged, re 
spectively, to said base and sub-base, and a piv 
oted holding-bar, substantially as described. 
3. In a last-holding jack, a sub-base secured 
to a suitable support, a base mounted thereon, 
a frame interposed between, extending trans 
versely of and hinged at its opposite ends to 
the base and sub-base, respectively, a holding 
bar pivoted to the base and extending through 
the sub-base, and a locking-bar, substantially 
as described. . 
4. In a last-holding jack, a sub-base secured 
to a suitable support, a base mounted thereon, 
and a frame interposed between and pivotally 
connected at its opposite ends to the base and 
sub-base, in combination with a jack-body. 
having its plane of motion at right angles to 
the plane of motion of the base, substantially 
as described. 
5. In a last-holding jack, and in combina. 
tion, a sub-base secured to a suitable support, 
a base mounted thereon, a frame interposed 
between and pivotally connected at its oppo 
site ends to the base and sub-base, respect 
ively, a holding-bar pivoted at its top to the 
base, and a last-holding jack-body having toe 
and heel supporting standards and locking 
lever, substantially as described. 
6. In a last-holding jack, a sub-base secured 
to a suitable support and provided at its mid 
dle with an aperture to receive the base-hold 
ing bar, and lugs to receive a locking-rod, in 
combination with a base having an apertured 
95 
OO 
IO5. 
O 
IIS 
125 
I 30 
340,063 
3 
25 
35 
having an adjustable toe-support, a fixed heel 
supporting standard having a swinging heel 
support, and a tension-regulating lever, in 
combination with a base, a sub-base, a frame 
interposed between and hinged at its opposite 
ends to the base and sub-base, respectively, 
and the baseholding-bar and locking-rod, sub 
stantially as described. 
10. In a last-holding jack, and in combina 
tion, a sub-base, A., having upwardly-project 
ing lugs on one side thereof, a hinged connec 
tion, as D, pivoted at one end to said lugs and 
at its opposite end to the opposite side of the 
base E, a holding-bar, B, a locking-rod, C, a 
centrally-pivoted jack-body, G, having cam 
face 7, and a cam-lever, H, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY STOCKNIAN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN CALDWELL, 
ROBERT BAIRD. 
IO 
middle to secure the holding-bar, and a frame 
interposed between and hinged at its opposite 
ends to the base and sub-base, respectively, 
substantially as described. 
7. The combination, in a last-holding jack 
having a plane of motion at right angles to 
the plane of motion of its base and provided 
With a toe-standard and apertured heel-stand 
ard, of a removable swinging heel-standard 
having a bifurcated lower end, its operating 
lever, which determines the pressure, and the 
tension-spring, substantially as described. 
S. In a last-holding jack, the combination 
of a jack-body having a fixed heel-standard 
provided with a transverse aperture, with a 
Swinging heel-standard having a removable 
last-receiving pin, a bifurcated lower end hav 
ing apertures, and a spring-controlled lever 
which determines the pressure with which the 
last is held in position, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
9. In a last-holding jack, a jack-body pro 
vided with a fixed toe-supporting standard 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340163.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 340,163. 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
N 
VINNS 
 
W. 0. STROBEI. 
HOT BIAST OWEN, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 20, 1886. 
. 
*??88 
?????TT?TT 
????****************************??RTZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZS 
zzzzzzZzZzZzZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz,L|:|| 
? 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz)= 
??T 
?~ - 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
????|? 
??22222222222? 
? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
VICTOR. O. STROBEL, OF ALLEGHENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
Hot-BLAST oveN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 340,163, dated April 20, 1886. 
Application filed February 5, 1885, Serial No. 154,989. (No model.) 
IO 
the regenerator; Q, lintels over these, arches; 
To all zvho7ro t maly conce77 
R, a separating wall reaching from the top of 
Be it known that I, VICTOR. O. STROBEL of 
the stove downward and dividing the regener 
Allegheny, Allegheny county, Pennsylvania, 
ator into a downtake and an uptake; S, the 55 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
chimney-opening in the brick roof of the 
5 ments in Hot-Blast Stoves, of which the fol 
stove; T, the upwardly-projecting nozzle of 
lowing is a specification. 
this opening; U, the cold-blast valve; V, the 
This invention pertains to improvements in 
chimney-valve seat; W, the gate portion of 
fire-brick regenerative hot-blast stoves; and 
the valve; X, an opening in the stove-wall at 66 
the improvements will be understood from the 
the foot of the chamber below the regenerator; 
following description, takenin connection with 
Y, the segmental bricks of which the chimney. 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
nozzle is constructed; Z, the margin bricks of . 
Figure 1 is a vertical section, on line 6, of a 
the chimney-opening in the brick roof of the 
hot-blast stove illustrating my improvements; 
stove; a, inlets from the atmosphere to the 65 
Fig. 2, a horizontal section on line 1; Fig. 3, 
cooling-cavities of the valve-seats; b, cooling 
a horizontal section om line 2; Fig. 4, a hori 
air outlet from said cavities to the chimney; 
Zontal section on line 3; Fig. 5, a horizontal 
c, pipe connecting such outlet of the hot-blast . 
section on line 4; Fig. 6, a vertical section of 
valve with the chimney; d, cooling-air inlets 
a portion of the regenerator taken upon line 
5; Fig. 7, a plan of the chimney-nozzle; Figs. 
through the hollow stems of the valves for 7o 
chimney and hot-blast; e, aperture leading 
8 and 9, vertical sections of the chimney and 
from the hollow of the chimney-valve to the 
hot-blast valves; Fig. 10, a vertical section, 
chimney; f, pipe connecting the hollow of the 
same plane as Fig. 1, exhibiting the regener 
hot-blast valve with the chimney; g, outlet 
ator in subdivided form, and showing the 
portion of the hollow stem of the chimney- 75 
scraping device in position; Fig. 11, a hori. 
valve; h, sheave and hand-crank on the clean 
zontal section, lines 7 and 8, of the subdivided 
er-fulcrum O; i, scraping-plummet; i, counter 
regenerator, ahd Fig. 12 an elevation of the 
balance-weight connected by chain with clean 
fulcrum-roller for the jet-pipe. 
ing-plummet; k, Figs. 10 and 11 lower and 
In the drawings, A represents the combus. 
coarser portion of regenerator fue-work; l, 8o 
tion-chamber of the stove; B, downtake-flues 
lintels at the top of this portion of the regen 
of the regenerator; C, uptake-flues of the 
erator; m, upper and finer portion of regen 
regenerator, consisting of rectangular flues 
erator flue-work; n, a spar used in place of 
formed by chord and ordinate walls; D, the 
jet-pipe N when the flue-scraper is used. 
chimney-connection; E, a pipe projecting out 
ward from the stove at the base of the com 
represented a three-pass stove of the vertical 
bustion-chamber; F, the gas-valve; G, the gas 
regenerative fire-brick type, the gas igniting 
pipe leading into the pipe E; H, the opening 
at the foot of the combustion-chamber A, ris 
of pipe E into the combustion-chamber, serv. 
ing to the top of the same, descending through 
ing as an inlet for the gas and as the outlet for 
the regenerator-flues B to the chamber at the go 
the hot blast; I, an opening through the stove 
foot of the regenerator, thence ascending 
wall at the foot of the combustion-chainber and 
through the regenerator - flues C and out 
directly beneath the opening H.; J, a valve. 
through the chimney-connection at the top of 
seathinged to the opening I; K, a screw-valve 
the stove. When the stove has been heated, 
-fitted to this hinged seat; L, the hot-blast 
the various valves are manipulated as usual, 95 
valve; M, a fue leading from the combustion. 
and the blast from the cold-blast main passes 
chamber at a point above the level of the open 
through the stove in a direction the reverse 
ing Hinto the chamber at the foot of the regen 
of that justmentioned for the heating medium. 
erator uptake; N, a jet-pipe inserted through 
I support the regenerator-flues without the 
an opening in the stove-wall at the top of the 
use of piers, and without involving arches IC 
combustion-chamber; O, a swiveling fulcrum 
5O journaled in the sill of said opening and sup 
limited in thickness by the thiekness of the 
porting the jet-pipe; P, arches at the foot of walls of the regenerator-flues. The vertical 
In the construction illustrated in Fig. 1 is 85 
r 
25 
3O 
35 
2 
340,163 
S 
O 
15 
3C) 
45 
55 
: 
regenerator-walls are formed, as usual, with a 
thickness at the base portion of about four 
and a half inches. There are two sets of these 
walls, as usual, at right angles to each other, 
producing the usual flues. 
I arrange the 
arches P, of greater thickness than the walls 
directly over them, under some of the walls of 
one of these sets, the arches being under alter 
nate walls or under the third, or fourth, or 
fifth wall, as desired, Fig. 6 illustrating at 
one point one wall between arched walls and 
at another point three walls between arched 
walls. The walls crossing this set of walls are 
supported on lintels Q, which rest upon the 
arches, and the intermediate walls of the first 
mentioned set are also supported by these 
lintels, the wall-work being, of course, all 
built in and bonded together. I thus secure a 
reliable regenerator structure based , upon 
arches of substantial width which do not clog 
the base of the regenerator. 
In Fig. 1 and its cross-sections Irepresent, 
for simplicity's sake, the regenerator-flues as 
being of uniform size and arrangement from 
top to bottom. It is desirable that the 
heating - surface of these flues be increased 
without decreasing the strength of the base 
of the regenerator. In Figs. 10 and 11 I 
illustrate my manner of so doing. I make the 
arches P, about nine inches thick, and I con 
struct the fues k over them with walls four 
and a half inches thick, carrying these flues 
up, say, ten or fifteen feet. At this point I 
span these flues by lintels l, and from them I 
carry upward the smaller flues m with walls, 
say half as thick as the walls below. By this 
means each lower flue k becomes divided into 
four smaller flues, In, as will be clearly un 
derstood from Fig. 11, and at the same time 
the base of the structure is formed with thick 
and substantial walls. This subdivision of 
the walls may take place at any desired point 
in the height of the flues, and it may be ef. 
fected more than once, if desired. - The sepa. 
rating-wall R is subjected to much greater 
heat upon one side than upon the other, and it 
is common to employ a higher grade of fire 
brick in the construction of the face which 
becomes the most highly heated. Differen 
tial expansion results from the difference in 
the heat of the two faces and from the differ 
ences in the grade of fire-brick employed in 
the faces, and it is often extremely difficult 
to Secure durability in the wall. I overcome 
this difficulty by splitting the wall, as shown, 
thus virtually forming a stove in two longi. 
tudinal parts, which may expand independent 
of each other. The wall is built up close, but 
not bonded. The split of the wall may, if 
desired, extend clear to its base; but I pre 
fer to begin it at a point from ten to twenty 
feet above its base. Ithereby secure the bene 
fit of a thick wall at the base, and the sub 
stantial equal temperature at this point per 
mits me to avail myself of this benefit. 
Another feature of my invention relates to 
a means for securing a more uniform heating 
in the regenerator and for avoiding gas de 
posits at the top of the down-pass B. If the 
products of combustion pass up the combus 
tion-chamber, and then down and up through 
the regenerator, the final pass of the regenera: 
tor will not be heated as much as desired, and 
the products will leave deposits at the top of 
the down-pass B. To avoid both these faults 
I cause a portion of the products of combus 
tion to take a short path through flue M, 
Figs. 1 and 4, to the foot of the regenerator, 
whence they move rapidly upward and sub 
ject the final pass of the regenerator to the 
action of the products of combustion, carry 
ing their maximum sensible heat. 
This 
method must not be confused with a plan 
by which gas and air are admitted at the 
foot of the regenerator and there ignited. In 
my plan the combustion takes place in the 
combustion-chamber, and it is a portion of the 
products of this combustion which I cause to 
pass immediately to the foot of the regenera 
tor. The powerful draft through the last 
pass of the regenerator draws these products 
rapidly in and takes from the current, which 
usually moves up the combustion-chamber, a 
large portion of the deposits which usually 
lodge at the top of the first down-pass. The 
flue by which these products find their short 
path taps the combustion-chamber, as shown 
in Fig. 1, at a point just above the point of 
ignition of the gas-that is, the point where the 
gas and air of combustion combine-and has 
its outlet at the foot of the final up-pass of the 
regenerator, the outlet being controlled by a 
slide-plug operated, in the construction ill 
lustrated, by a handle outside the stove, where 
by this flue can be closed when the stove is 
under blast. The flue may be in or against 
the wall of the stove, or disposed centrally, or 
both, as shown in Fig. 4. The valve consists 
of a plug sliding in the flue and serving to 
plug the fue and cut of the outlet-port, or to 
cut off the flue and to plug the outlet-port. 
This flue carries the deposits before mentioned 
to the chamber at the foot of the regenerator, 
and the cleaning-hole X permits the cleaning 
of the chamber and flue. There is the 
usual expansion-space, sometimes packed with 
filling, between the walls of the stove and the 
metal shell, and the gas is liable at times to 
work its way into these spaces. 
Im order to 
prevent the chimney exerting any drafts upon 
these spaces, I arrange for a tight seal at the 
chimney outlet from the top of the regenerator. 
The chimney or chimney-connection D rises 
from the metal roof, and from the brick-work 
of the roof of the final pass of the regenera 
tor a brick nozzle, T, rises sufficiently to en 
ter the ?chimney-connection, in which it fits. 
neatly, thus forming a perfect seal against any 
connection between the chimney and the 
jacket-space. The chimney-connection, where 
it engages the nozzle, may slip somewhat, 
when necessary, thus preventing the nozzle 
being broken by differential novement of the 
brick-work and the metal-work of the roof. 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
IS 
I 25 
340,163 
3 
2? 
25 
The nozzle may be a simple brick curbing 
rising from the brick roof; but I much prefer 
the construction illustrated in Figs. 1 and 7, 
especially where the brick roof of the stove 
is arched, as is usually the case. 
I leave in 
the brick-roof work a circular hole with some 
taper, and I form the nozzle S of a series of 
segmental bricks, Y, reachingendwise from the 
chimney-connection in the metal roof down 
into the hole in the brick roof and fitting the 
taper hole therein. The hole in the brick roof 
in which this nozzle is thus seated I form by 
means of special brick Z, which gives the ta 
pering circular form to the opening, and which 
5 gives a square bearing for the bricks of the 
roof, which abut against these special bricks. 
This construction prevents the strain of the 
roof work distorting the nozzle-seat, and it 
prevents the strain due to the nozzle-seat from 
distorting the roof-work. 
Another feature of my invention relates to 
the manner of preventing damage to the hot 
blast valve and gas-valve by the premature. 
burning of gases near them, while at the same 
time securing the economical advantages of a 
single stove-connection serving for a gas-inlet 
and a hot-blast outlet. The pipe E, Fig. 1, 
communicates with the stove at the base of the 
combustion chamber. It leads to the hot-blast 
main, and is provided with hot-blast valve L. 
The gas is, as usual, also admitted to the stove 
through the pipe E. The hot-blast valve is 
liable at all times to leak a trifle, and there 
fore allow more or less air to move back into 
the pipe E and mingle with the incoming gas, 
which thusignites, thereby damaging the hot 
blast valve and the gas-valve. I obviate this 
difficulty to a great extent by tapping the gas 
pipe E as closely as possible to the side of the 
stove, whereby the least possible resistance is 
offered to the immediate entrance of the gas 
to the stove. The light pressure of the leak 
ing air, together with the draft of the stove, 
will thus serve to draw the gas through its 
single free short channel into the combustion. 
chamber before it ignites. The gas-branch G, 
which taps onto the pipe E, I arrange hori 
zontally for a short distance, and then lead it 
upward. I place the gas-valve F in its verti 
cal portion, where I also place the gas-damper, 
should such be used in connection with the 
main gas-valve. I also turn the pipe E up 
ward, and in this vertical portion I place the 
hot-blast valve L. I thus secure a volume of 
gas uncombined with air directly underneath 
the gas-valve, whereby the tendency of the 
gas-valve to be burned is lessened, and where 
by I am enabled to dispense with ally artificial 
cooling of the gas-valve. 
Another feature of my invention relates to 
the construction and . relative arrangement of 
the inlets for the gas and air of combustion. 
The gas enters the combustion-chamber at H 
from the pipe E, the same pipe serving as the 
outlet for the hot-blast, as before mentioned. 
Immediately below the gas-inlet H, and at the 
foot of the combustion-chamber, I place the 
inlet I for the air of combustion, both the in 
lets having a broad side flare, as indicated in 
Figs. 4 and 5. I am enabled by this disposi 
tion and arrangement of but two openings up 
on what is known as the hot side of the 
stove to effect the commingling and diffusion 
of the air and gas more perfectly than by means 
of a number of openings into the stove, as usu 
ally employed. The inlet I for the air of com 
bustion has a screw-valve, K, by which the 
supply of air is regulated, and the seat of this 
valve forms a door, J, which is hinged to the 
opening I. This arrangement and disposition 
enable this one opening to serve for the sup 
ply and regulation of the air of combustion, 
for the purposes of cleaning the base of the 
combustion-chamber, and as a means for firing 
the stove with solid fuel. 
The drawings exhibit means for cleaning the 
stove and for cooling the valves. These fea 
tures are not described at length in the speci. 
fication, as they are not claimed herein, and 
may form the subject of other patents. 
In connection with the described splitting 
of the wall R, it should be stated that a con 
struction has been proposed in which two 
stoves stand closely side by side, the metal 
shells of the contiguous portions almost touch 
ing each other. Again, the combustion-cham 
her, instead of being included directly in the 
stove, has been in the form of a conduit stand 
ing parallel with the stove, the metal shells in 
the two portions being, as before, almostin con 
tact. In either of these cases it might be said 
that a wall divides two chambers, and that 
such wall is of a dual character. It will be at 
once understood, however, that such construc 
tions do not present to any degree the charac 
teristic of the split wall referred to. . The two 
walls in the constructions alluded to are en 
tirely independent of each other. They pertain 
to two independent structures. There are two 
layers of the shell-metal between them, and 
there is a space between the two layers of the 
metal. The contiguity of the two walls is a 
mere incident to the parallelism of the two 
separate structures to which the walls belong. 
Furthermore, the two structures have circular 
cross-sections, and are contiguous only at the 
point where the two circles approach each 
other. In these constructions one wall, whether 
split or not split, would not answer the pur 
pose for which these walls are employed. In 
my construction a single wall would answer 
fully the purpose of a mere dividing-wall, the 
split of the wall being a feature introduced 
for the purpose specified--a purpose which 
would not be performed by two independent 
walls having a passage between them, through 
which either cooling-air or heating-gas might 
pass. 
In connection with the hot-product fue of 
my construction it may be well to mention 
that in addition to the gas-flue which feeds 
the base of the combustion - chamber it has 
been proposed to supply also an inlet from the 
gas-main to the base of the regenerator, the 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOC 
IEC 
I 25 
4 
340,163 
IO 
gas which is admitted at the base of the re 
generator being supplied with air of combus 
tion at that point, thereby causing the base of 
the regenerator to serve as a second combus 
It has also been proposed to 
tion chamber. 
admit gas and air of combustion at various 
points in the regenerator. 
In my construc 
tion the combustion takes place entirely within 
the combustion-chamber; but I divert a portion 
of the hot products of the combustion imme 
diately to the base of the regenerator. 
ln connection with the description of my 
peculiar arrangement for connecting the final 
uptake of the regenerator with the chimney, 
it may be well to state that it has been pro 
posed that the metal roof of the stove shall be 
free from contact with the brick roof, and that 
the brick-work of the roof should be built up. 
ward to form a lining for the chimney. This 
is really a common and obvious method of 
connecting the chimney-lining with the brick 
work at the roof of the stove; but unfortu 
nately no provision was made by which the 
metal of the chimney could move, or the roof 
move without causing also a movement of the 
chimney-lining, and if the movement of the 
brick-work of the stove was not coincident 
with the movement of the metal work (and the 
movements never do coincide) the tendency 
was to break loose the juncture between the 
chimney-lining and the brick-work of the roof. 
In my construction the brick roof of the stove 
is provided with a nozzle which enters the 
base of the metal chimney a trifling distance, 
and is at liberty to slide therein, thus permit 
ting the metal work and the brick-work to 
partake of independent motions without doing 
damage. 
It has been proposed in topping out chim 
neys for general purposes to set a bushing in 
the top of the chimney, and to set a prolonga 
tion of the chimney over the bushing, the 
bushing thus forming a nozzle, which projects 
upward into the prolongation. In such case 
there was no differential expansion of brick 
work and metal to contend with, and the con 
struction was not adapted to meet the diffi 
culties of such conditions, as the prolongation 
referred to was supported directly by the chim 
ney, and was necessarily bound to rise and fall 
with it. 
In connection with the arrangement of the 
gas-inlet, &c., it should be stated that the gas 
pipe has heretofore been tapped into the hot 
blast main at a point between the stove and 
the hot-blast valve, air for combustion being 
admitted to the connbustion-chamber of the 
stove at a point Some distance above the in 
let, thus avoiding combustion low down in the 
combustion-chamber, and at the same time 
losing the benefits of a portion of the length 
of the combustion-chanber. Air for combus 
tion has been admitted below the common 
opening; but the disposition of the gas and 
hot-blast connections have been such as to re 
sult in a rapid destruction of the hot blast 
valve. 
In connection with the split separating-wall 
acknowledgment should be made of the exist 
ence of contacting-walls forming the inner and 
outer lining of hot-blast stoves and of contigu 
ous arches, which touch each other at their 
inner crowns. 
I claim as my invention-- 
1. In a hot-blast stove, the combination of 
a supporting structure at the base of the re 
generator, chord-walls and ordinate walls ris 
ing from the same and forming flues reaching 
a portion of the height of the regenerator, 
thinner continuations of said walls to the top 
of the regenerator, and thin chord and ordi 
nate walls interposed between said continua 
tions and serving to increase the number and 
decrease the area of the flues in the upper 
portion of the regenerator. 
2. In a hot-blast stove, the separating-wall 
R, split or formed in two thicknesses independ 
ent of but in contact with each other, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a hot-blast stove, the separating wall 
R, solid at its base and split or formed in two 
thicknesses independent of but in contact with 
each other above the solid portion, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of the combustion-cham 
ber, the regenerator, and one or more flues 
leading from the combustion-chamber to the 
foot of the uptake portion of the regenerator, 
for the purpose of forming a short path for a 
portion of the hot products of cumbustion 
from the combustion-chamber to the regener 
ator. 
5. The combination of the combustion-cham 
ber, the regenerator, and the descending flue 
M from the combustion-chamber to the base 
of the regenerator, for the purpose of carrying 
hot products of combustion to the base of the 
regenerator and bringing gas - deposits into 
the channber below the regenerator. 
6. The combination of the combustion-cham 
ber, the regenerator, the descending hot-pro 
duct flue M, and the sliding plug-valve pro 
vided with a handle exterior to the stove. 
7. The combination of the combustion-cham 
ber, the regenerator, the descending flueM for 
hot products and gas deposits, and the clean 
ing-opening X in the wall of the stove. 
8. In a hot-blast stove, the combination, sub 
stantially as set forth, of the brick-work and 
the brick roof of the stove, a metal shell and 
metal roof inclosing the same, a netal chim 
ney-connection joining and supported by the 
metal roof, and a nozzle rising from the brick 
roof and entering the metal chimney-connec 
tion a short distance and forming a slip-joint 
therein. . 
9. In a hot-blast stove, the combination, sub 
stantially as set forth, of the brick-work and 
the brick roof of the stove, the metal shell and 
roof inclosing the same, a metal chimney-con 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
II. ? 
I 5 
I25 
340,163 
nection joining and supported by the luetal 
roof, and a nozzle seating in a tapering opell 
ing in the brick roof and projecting a short 
distance into the chimney-connection and form 
ing a slip.joint therein. 
10. In a hot-blast stove, the combination of 
the brick-work and brick roof of the stove, a 
metal shell and roof inclosing the same, a metal 
chimney-connection joined to and supported 
by the metal roo?, and a nozzle consisting of 
segmental brick with a vertical sectional con 
tour parallel at one end and wedge-shaped at 
the other end, forming a tapering seating in the 
brick roof of the stove, and a short parallel 
slipjoint in the metal chimney-connection. 
11. The combination, substantially as set 
I. ? 
5 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS G. BOYD, 
JAMES A. MCKEAN. 
forth, of the pipe E, projecting outward from 
near the base of the combustion-chamber and 
into communication with the hot-blast main, 
a hot-blast valve between the stove and hot 
blast main, a gas-pipe tapping said pipe be 
tween such valve and the stove, an opening 
into the combustion - chamber directly below 
the opening by which said pipe communicates 
with the stove, and a valve at said opening for 
controlling the admission of air of combus 
tion and for closing such opening when the 
stove is under blast. 
WI('TOR. O. STROBEI. 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340265.txt	J. B. WEST 
HOLDER FOR EMBROIDERY, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 20, 1886. 
No. 340,265, 
2, 
AE 
? 
& & 
--~~~~ - - - - - - - - - - - ------.----8-- 
----- 
------ - - ---- 
 GS)*??Tc) 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
J. B. WEST., 
HOLDER FOR EMBROIDERY. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 340,265, 
Patented Apr. 20, 1886. 
 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
qAAAAAAAAS SAAAAAAAAqAAAqqq qqSSqqqqS SqqqqqSqS qASAA S AASAqiAS SSqqqqqS SqAASLLSSLS 
JONATHAN B. WEST, OF ROCHESTER, ASSIGNOR TO L. N. ASIEL & Co. AND 
BERTHOTD GALLAND, ALL OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
H O D ER FOR E M B R O | 
ID ERY. 
SFECIICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 340,265, dated April 20, 1886. 
Application filed July 31, 1884. Serial No. 139,305. No model.) 
O 
15 
2 5 
To add, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoNATHAN B. WEST, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented an Improvement 
in Holders for Embroidery, Lace, &c., of which 
the following is a specification. 
Embroidery, edgings, laces, &c., have been 
wound upon spools and placed in a cabinet or 
case to hold the same, as set forth in my ap 
plication, Serial No. 109,655, filed October 22, 
1SS3, and the strips of material have been 
passed out through openings and beneath 
guide bars or cleats upon the case, and pins 
have been provided to catch and hold the end 
portions of such strips as they are wound up. 
These devices are also set forth in my afore. 
said application, but in the same the spools 
were represented with tubular axes, and pins 
or rods passing through the same. Under some 
circumstances it is difficult to withdraw the 
pins or rods for allowing of the removal of the 
spools. 
My present invention is an improvement 
upon and modification of the aforesaid device, 
whereby the spools will be held in place, but 
can easily be removed for the introduction of 
other or full spools. Imake use of spools with 
pivot-pins projecting at their ends, and latches 
that are pivoted at the back part of the case 
or cabinet, so that the latches are raised for 
the insertion or withdrawal of the spools, 
and are allowed to drop over and hold the piv 
ot-bins in place after the spools have been in 
serted. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion of a cabinet containing three ranges of 
spools. Fig. 2 is a sectional plan at the line 
ac av. 
Fig. - 3 is am elevation representing the 
pulleys and band for rotating the supporting 
rollers and spools, and Fig. 4 is a detached 
view of the spool. 
The case or cabinet is of suitable size, and 
may be more or less ornamental in construc 
tion. The bottom A, sides B, back D, and top 
E are permanently connected. If the cabinet 
is to hold three ranges of spools, there will be 
two horizontal cross-pieces, F, formingledges, 
and the bottom. A projects at its front edge to 
the same extent as the ledges F, or a ledge, F, 
So is secured to the bottom A, as shown in Fig. 1. 
45 
AO 
There are roller's g g in pairs, each pair being 
adapted to receive one roller or range of roll 
ers. Three pairs of these rollers are shown, 
and they have axes that pass into the side 
pieces, B, of the cabinet, and at one end these 55 
axes project through and receive the pulleys 
h, around which the endless cord or belt k is 
passed, as seen in Fig. 3. The vertical part 
of such cord is in front of the strip i, and passes 
over the guide-pulleys and through holes in 60 
the said strip i to the respective pulleys h, so 
that the rollers are all revolved in the same 
direction when the cord is pulled down. 
The rollers of support the spoolsT, the edges 
of such spools resting upon the rollers; hence 65 
when the rollers are rotated the spools may 
be revolved by the frictional contact of the 
rollers, but those spools that are held by the 
strips of fabric being caught by the needle 
points 0 are not moved by the rotation of the 70 
rollers g beneath them. 
Each spool L is made with circular heads l, 
of pasteboard or similar material, fastened to 
the ends of the axle l, and this axle should be 
of wood, and provided at each end with a pro 75 
jecting pivot-pin, o', of wire, that pass through 
the pasteboard heads and enter the axle. 
The pivot-pins come end to end where there 
are two or more spools in a row, and these pins 
project, and there is sufficient distance between 8o 
the heads l for the latch-arms in n, that project 
from the back bar, p, which bar extends along 
the inner surface of the back of the cabinet, 
and is pivoted, so as to be swung sufficiently 
for raising the latch-arms in out of the way of 85 
the pivot-pins o' when the spools are being in 
serted. It is preferable to support the back 
bar, p, by screws 2, that pass loosely through 
holes in such back bar, so that the desired 
movement can be given to the back bar and 
the projecting latch-arms. The latch-arm at 
one end of the back bar projects to the front 
of the case sufficiently to be used as a lever 
handle, 3, in raising or lowering the latch 
{?Ti]]S, The swinging front plates, s, are pivoted 
near their lower edges, so that they can be 
closed up into the front part of the case or 
cabinet, or swung down horizontally to open 
the case for the reception or removal of the IOQ 
95 
90 
340,265 
spools. These front plates are not as wide as circular heads and projecting pivot-pins, of a 
the openings in the front; hence there are nar 
case to receive the same, rollers to support 
row spaces above the front plates for the strips 
and revolve such spools, and latches to hold the 
pivot-pins and spools while being rotated, sub 
of fabric to be passed out. 
The bars u are provided for the fabric to 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The cabinet-case having front plates piv 
pass beneath as it is drawn off, and there are 
the pins 0, to catch the end of the fabric as 
oted near their lower edges, in combination 
soon as the same is drawn above the ledge F 
with the pins 0, the guide-bars u, and the end 
plates, y, for supporting the guide-bars u, sub- 3o 
and falls against such pins; but instead of such 
stantially as specified. 
bars being in the form of cleats upon the case, 
as in aforesaid application, each bar extends 
3. The combination, with the cabinet-case 
from end to end of the front plate, and it is 
and spools, of the latch-arms in, the back bar, 
supported by the sheet-metal cap-piecess', that 
p, and means for supporting the back bar and 
are provided at the ends of the front plates, 
allowing it and the latch-arms to be moved, 35 
and project therefrom at the places where the 
substantially as set forth. 
bars at are to be received and held. 
Small nails are passed through the cap-pieces 
1884, 
to secure them to the ends of the front plates 
m 
and to secure the bars at in place. 
Signed by me this 17th day 9f July, A. D. 
JONATHAN B. WEST. 
25 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the spools having 
Witnesses: 
P. A. COSTICH, 
E. N. ADAMIS, 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340365.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 340,365. 
H. ROBERTS. 
CORN HARVESTER, 
Patented Apr. 20, 1886. 
-4 
 
 
HE 
Z 
e 
  
 
EEAE-4 as S2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A 
HARRISON ROBERTS, OF BRANDENBURG, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
THIRD TO JAMES A. HARRIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
CORN - HARVESTER. 
SECFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 340,365, dated April 20, 1886. 
Application filed February 14, 1884. Serial No. 120,686. (No model.) 
IC 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRISON ROBERTs, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Brandenburg, in the county of Meade 
and State of Kentucky, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Corn-Har 
vesters; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to letters or fig 
ures of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
My invention has reference to corn-harvest 
ers; and it consists in the improvements here 
inafter described, and set forth in the claims, 
whereby the corn is rapidly and expeditiously 
cut so as to fall on a platform capable of being 
tilted to drop the corn. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a plan 
view, Fig. 2 is a side view, and Fig. 3 is a 
detail view. 
A is the front and B B are the side bars 
composing the supporting - frame of the ma 
chine. Two horizontal parallel bars, C, are 
Secured at their rear ends at or about the cen 
ter of the front bar, A, and are provided with 
guard-rails a. A second rail, D, secured with 
in the frame parallel with the rail A, serves 
as a re-enforce for the several parts. A saw 
blade or cutter - bar, E, plays transversely 
across the space between the bars C in a slot 
formed beneath plates b, and is provided at one 
end with a loop, c, to which is pivotally at 
tached one end of a pitman, d, the other end 
of which is secured eccentrically on a disk, F, 
rigidly mounted on a shaft, e, turning in a 
bearing bolted on the front end of the bar B, 
and having keyed on its other end a bevel 
pinion, f. The said pinion f meshes with a 
bevel gear-wheel, G, turning with the axle H, 
on the ends of which and turning therewith 
are the carrying-wheels I. 
The platform consists of a rigid section, J, 
secured at its upper side to one of the cross 
bars B, and inclining downward toward the 
center. The other section, K, of the platform 
5O is pivoted at or near its upper side by a rod, 
9, embedded at its front end in one of the bars 
35 
55 
B, and passing through bars h of the section 
K, and then secured by a nut, i, to the upper 
end of an arm, j, extending from the end of 
the bar B. 
The section K, though inclining toward the 
lower side of the section J, normally tends to 
drop by gravity away from said section, so as 
to leave an opening between the two. This 
tendency is overcome and the opening closed 6o 
by a cord or cable, k, which is secured at one 
end to the lower portion of section K, then 
passes around a pulley journaled in the sec 
tion J, (dotted lines, Fig. 1) and then around 
a second pulley journaled on the under side 
of the bar D, and thence up and secured to a 
hand-lever, L, pivoted at its lower end to a 
toothed segmental plate, l, secured to the bars 
A. D. A detent, n, Fig. 3, has a shank, n, 
provided with a handle, 0, the said shank 
playing vertically in a sleeve, p, formed on 
the lever L, while the lower end is slotted to 
receive a pin, q, of said lever, to guide the lower 
end of said detent. A ratchet-wheel, s, secured 
on one end of the axle H, is adapted to engage 
a spring - pawl, t, secured on the carrying 
wheel when the machine is moving forward, 
but permits said carrying-wheel to revolve in 
turning without communicating motion to said 
axle H. A pulley, it, keyed on the axle, com 
municates motion by a belt, v, to a pulley, w, 
secured on the lower end of a vertical shaft, 
M, which has a series of radial arms, y, at its 
upper end. The draft devices are connected 
to the front bar, A, at each side of the bars 
C, so that the horses move between the rows 
of corn. A curved standard, Z, Secured to 
the bars AD, carries at its upper end a seat, 
N. As the machine moves forward, the row 
of corn occupies a position in the space be 
tween the bars C, the reciprocating saw E cut 
ting it off, while the armsy, revolving rearward 
ly, throw the cut corn backward onto the 
platform, the inclination of which causes it to 
drop at the point where the lower edges of the 
sections J K meet. When sufficient corn has 
been deposited on the platform to form a bun 
dle, the handle-lever Lis manipulated to cause 
the pivoted section K to drop under the weight 
of the corn and slide the same to the ground, IOO 
90 
75 
I claim 
1. The combination, in a corn-harvester, of 
2 
340,365 
a rectangular supporting - frame, main axle downwardly to the center of the frame, lever 20 
bearing transversely therein and provided and detent devices located on the front of the 
With the carrying - wheels, a stationary and | frame and connected to the pivoted platform 
pivoted platform, J K, secured in an inclined by a cord and cable, a transverse horizontal 
5 converging position in the said main frame at saw or cutter-bar, and parallel guide-bars CC, 
the rear of the shaft, detent devices located on located centrally on the front of the frame, de... 25 
the front of said frame and connected to the vices for operating said saw, and a vertical 
pivoted platform by a cord or cable, parallel shaft bearing at the front of the frame and 
bars C C, extending forward from the center provided with a series of radial arms, and de 
Io of the frame, a horizontal saw or cutter-bar vices actuated from the axle for revolving 
located in transverse guides at the rear of the said arms above the cutter-bar, substantially 3D 
bars C C, and devices located in the front of as set forth. 
the frame for reciprocating said cutter - bar, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, in a corn - harvesting 
machine, of a main frame mounted upon the 
shaft and carrying wheels, inclined stationary 
and pivoted platforms secured at their upper 
ends to each side of the frame and converging 
RTS 
HARRISON X ROBERTS. 
J. F. WoOLFOLK, 
J. K. DITTO. 
Witnesses: 
I5 
) 
his 
mark. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340466.txt	(No Model.) 
R. S., TUCKER 
CARRIAGE. 
No. 340,466, 
 
Patented Apr. 20, 1886. 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
n 
 
 
th Illel 
 
?ease?see,6%T 
-6/ z- A. 4-cert 
647& 
N. PETERs. Photo-lithographer. Washington. C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ROBERT SCHUYLER TUCKER, OF FLUSHING, NEW YORK. 
CARRA GE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 340,466, dated April 20, 1886, 
Application filed February 27, 1886. Serial No. 193,450. 
(No model.) 
55 
So 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT SCHITYLER 
TUCKER, of Flushing, Long Island, State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Carriages, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention is especially adaptable to that 
class of carriages which is commonly known 
as landalus; and it consists in hinging the 
back of the forward seat in such a way as to 
permit the side lights to be folded upon the 
front light in converting the carriage from a 
closed carriage into an open one. 
In the drawings, Figurel represents a side 
view of the body of the carriage, the full lines 
representing the carriage-top down, as when 
the carriage is open, and the broken lines rep 
resenting the carriage-top up, as when the 
carriage is closed. Fig. 2 represents a hori 
Zontal section showing the relative positions 
of the front and adjacent side lights of the 
carriage. 
C is the door. b is the body. 
c is the driver's seat, which is hinged at the 
front, So as to be capable of being thrown for 
Ward to allow the top to be folded beneath it, 
as is customary in this class of carriages. 
d is the frame, which, while in the position 
shown in dotted lines, forms the door-frame, 
and also the Sash, for the side light, e. This 
part d is pivoted to the body of the carriage 
at its lower end, and, when the carriage is open, 
is swung forward on this pivot into a hori 
Zontal position, as at d, Fig. 1. 
f' g are respectively sections of the top, 
which are hinged together, and also to the 
frame h", forming the front of the carriage. 
All these parts occupy, when the carriage is 
open, the positions f, g, and h, respectively, 
which is accomplished by throwing h, which 
is hinged to the frame of the carriage at its 
bottom, forward into a horizontal position be. 
low the driver's seat, and folding the parts f 
and g upon it in that position. The side lights, 
ee', are pivoted at i' i' to the frameh, so that 
they may be swung inward and lie against the 
interior of the front glass or panel, i, while the 
frame his still in a vertical position, and then, 
as the frameh is swung forward into the hori 
Zontal position shown in Fig. 1, it carries with 
it the two side lights e'e', which are thus in 
the folded position below the panel or top sec 
tion, f. 
k shows the position of the back of the for 
ward seat, l, both when the carriage is open 
and when it is closed. Heretofore the back 
k of this seat has been fixed, and conse 
quently it could not extend higher than the 
lower level of the glasses or lights e' without 
interfering with their being folded upon the 
light or panel i, as above described. It has 
therefore heretofore been customary to con 
struct the back l; SO low as to make it very un 
comfortable to a person occupying the forward 
seat. It will be seen from the drawings that 
the back k is constructed so as to extend con 
siderably above the level of the bottom of the 
lights e'e', and thus to form an exceedingly 
comfortable seat. This advantage I am en 
abled to secure by having the back k hinged 
at m in such manner that it may, when re 
quired, be thrown forward into the position 
shown in dotted lines at k", in which position 
it will not obstruct the folding of the other 
parts, and especially the side lights, e, as here 
tofore described. 
The operation of the parts is as follows: 
When it is desired to open the carriage, the 
seat-back k is thrown forward into the posi 
tion shown at k". The side lights, e'e', are 
then swung inward, so as to lie against the 
frontlight, j. The driver's seat is then thrown 
forward, and the parts are folded under the 
driver's seat in the position shown at f, g, and 
h. The top of the rear of the carriage is folded, 
as at n, in the ordinary manner; likewise the 
door lights or windows. When all of the va 
rious other parts have been disposed of, the 
back is returned to its normal position atk and 
the carriage is in the condition to be used as an 
open carriage. A hook, n, may be employed 
for holding the seat-back in position. 
The chief advantage of my improvement lies 
in the fact that it enables me to increase the 
height of the back of the forward seat to an 
extent which will make it as comfortable as 
may be desired. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the forward seat, l, 
the back k, adapted to Swing downward, and 
the forward frame, h, and side panels or lights, 
ICO 
O 
25 
40 
45 
340,466 
e', adapted to be folded, substantially as de- above the level of the bottoms of side lights or 
scribed. 
2. In combination, the forward frame, h, 
pivoted to the carriage-body, the side panels 
5 or lights, e, pivoted to the frameh, the for- 
ward seat, l, and the back k thereof, adapted 
to be swung downward and extending upward 
panels e, substantially as described. 
D. H. DRISCOLL, 
R. J. CODY. 
Witnesses: 
Of 
ROBERT SCHUYLER Tt (KER. 
t 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340566.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 340,566, 
J. T. FLYNN. 
BOOT TREE, 
- 
Patented Apr. 27, 1886. 
CYC-6-74e-o/ 
Johl-4. 
- 
A 
3.T 
&a v%. 
4262-y 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. FLYNN, OF MILLVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
Boot-TREE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 340,566, dated April 27, 1886. 
Application filed December 16, 1885. Serial No. 1 S5,856. (No model.) 
- 
O 
tree. 
To all whom it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, JoHN T. FLYNN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of Mill 
ville, in the county of Worcester and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Boot-Trees, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Myinvention consists of a device, described 
hereinafter, adapted to be combined with the 
leg of a boot-tree to readily secure thereto 
and permit the detachment of the piece of 
leather or other fabric stretched upon the 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
5 a boot-tree in part section, showing my im 
provement. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the por 
tion of the tree adjacent to the attaching de 
view, showing the latter in position holding 
the fabric in place. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of the attachment. Fig. 4 is a plan view 
showing a modification. Fig. 5 is a longitudi. 
nal section showing the hook up; Fig. 6; the 
same showing the hook down. 
The device consists of a hook constructed 
for ready attachment to the leg portion of the 
tree and capable of being turned down into a 
recess thereof, so as to seize and hold securely 
the material upon the tree, and adapted to be 
readily withdrawn from the material to re 
lease the same. 
The hook may be pivoted to a slit within 
the tree and turned down into a notch or re 
cess opposite the said slit. I prefer, however, 
to pivot the hook A to a pivot, a, extending 
through lips or arms b, projecting from a split 
ring or yoke, B, formed by bending a strip of 
metal to the shape shown in Fig. 3, and in 
serting the device in a recess cut for its recep 
tion in the leg of the tree. 
The hook may be stamped out of metal or 
formed in any suitable manner. I prefer, 
however, to make it by bending a piece of 
wire, sharpened at one end, so as to form the 
hook c, the loop e, for the passage of the pivot 
(t, and a stem, f, which projects beyond the 
hook, and serves as a means of readily lifting 
the latter. 
When the device is inserted in the leg of 
the tree, it is used as follows: The sheet or 
strip of leather or other fabric, X, is applied 
to the tree, as usual, and the hook A is turned 
to the position shown in Figs. 3 and 5, and 
the edge of the strip is brought beneath the 
25 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE ROSS, 
LYMAN LEGG. 
55 
65. 
- 
hook, as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 5, after 
which the hook is turned down to the position 
shown in Fig. 6, when the pointed hook por 
tion c will penetrate the fabric and will se 
curely hold the same in the position to which 
it is adjusted. 
It will be noticed that owing to the shape 
of the hook c, which is curved to correspond 
as nearly as may be to a circle having the 
pivot a as a center, the fabric is seized with 
out drawing upon it, and is also held so that 
it will not become loose as the hook reaches 
the position shown in Fig. 6. 
The arm f serves as a ready means of with 
drawing the hook, and the yoke B is provided 
with a notch, y, to receive the said arm, so 
that when the hook is turned down to the po 
sition shown in Fig. 6 no portion of the de 
vice projects to any material extent beyond 
the surface of the tree, and danger of injury 
and displacement is thus prevented. 
The arm f may be bent to one side, as shown 
in Fig. 4 in full lines, or to both sides, as 
shown by full and dotted lines, or it may be 
of any other suitabie shape so as to be readily 
caught between the fingers and lie flat when 
depressed. 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
struction and arrangement of parts shown, I 
claim 
1. The combination, with a boot-tree hav 
ing a recess in the leg, of a hook pivoted ad 
jacent to said recess, and consisting of a strip 
of wire sharpened and bent into a hook at 
one end, having a loop, e, for the passage of 
the pivot, and prolonged to form an arm, f, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a boot-tree, of the 
loop terminating in ears b, and a hook con 
sisting of a strip of wire bent to form a hook, 
c, loop e, and artin f, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, in a boot - tree, of a 
yoke, B, having a notch, y, and ears b, in coin 
bination with a hook pivoted between said 
ears, and provided with a stem, f, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
k 
JOHN T. FLYNN. 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340666.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 340,666, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
E. C. HAWES. 
STEAM TRAP, 
Patented Apr, 27, 1886. 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N NS th 
s IIHH t 
ISs N. 
2%.7% 
sud R 
i 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
N l 
sy 
 
f 
L 
f 
t 
WITNESSES : 
NVENT Fr; 
2a.o. Z26 
14. 4-f64%a. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 340,666, 
E. C. HAWEs. 
STEAM TRAP, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 27, 1886. 
WITN esses: 
NVENTIFR 
r123, 
N. FETERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD C. HAWES, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR TO 
GEORGE HAWES & SONS, OF SAME PLACE. 
STEAM-TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 340,666, dated April 27, 1886. 
Application filed November 3, 1884. Serial No. 147,111. No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD C. HAWES, of 
Providence, in the county of Providence and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented an Im 
5 provement in Steam-Traps, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
that class of steam-traps in which an expansi. 
ble vessel is employed for closing the steam 
to inlet opening of the trap; and it consists in 
the combination of the expansible vessel with 
a separate valve, whereby the valve may be 
uniformly closed to its seat without being sub 
ject to a one-sided or cramping tendency, as 
I5 when the side of the expansible vessel or an 
attachment thereto is made to perform the 
function of a valve, and in the combination 
of a removable screw-cap with the head of the 
adjusting-screw, whereby the screw will be 
2O prevented from turning and the steam will 
be prevented from escaping along the threads 
of the Screw. 
Figure 1 is an axial section of a steam-trap 
provided with my improvement. Fig. 2 is a 
25 perspective view of the shoe for the point of 
the adjusting-screw. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of the valve of the trap. Fig. 4 is an 
elevation of the outer case with the closing 
head removed, showing the supporting-points 
In the accompanying drawings, A is the 
outer case or shell, made in any suitable form 
and having a head, a, and a flange, b, to which 
is secured the removable head B by means of 
Within the chamber C of the trap is placed 
the expansible vessel D, which is partially 
filled with a readily-evaporated fluid, d. 
The steam-inlet aperture E is provided with 
4o a composition bushing, e, which serves to form 
a seat for the valve F, which is constructed 
as shown in Fig. 3, and is adapted to rest at 
its inner end against the side of the expansi 
ble vessel D, so that the said expansible ves. 
45 sell may have a rocking movement without af. 
fecting the proper seating of the valve. 
The bore of the projecting hub f of the re 
movable head B is provided with a screw 
thread adapted to receive the adjusting-screw 
so G, upon the slotted head of which is formed 
a screw-thread, g, which is adapted to fit the 
internal screw - thread of the cap H, which 
serves to cover the head of the screw G and 
3o for the expansible vessel. 
35 the bolts c. 
- 
to form a steam-tight joint around the same, 
thus preventing the escape of steam along the 55 
thread of the adjusting-screw, and also serv 
ing to prevent the screw from accidental turn 
Ilg. 
The central perforation of the head B at the 
side adjoining the chamber C is made in rect- 6o 
angular form in order to provide a loosely-fit 
ting socket, l, for the rectangular shank h of 
the shoe I, which serves to protect the ex 
pansible vessel from the wearing action of the 
point of the adjusting-screw G, the shoe Ibe- 65 
ing prevented from rotation with the rotating 
screw by means of the shank hand the loosely 
fitting holding-socket l. 
The expansion of the fluid d within the ex 
pansible vessel serves to cause a bulging of 7o 
the opposite sides of the same, thus closing 
the valve F to its seat and preventing the es 
cape of steam from the steam-pipes until the 
gradual condensation of the steam to the form 
of water has cooled the contained vapor in 
the expansible vessel sufficiently to cause the 
valve to be raised from its seat by the over 
coming pressure of the steam in the pipes, so 
as to allow the water of condensation to es 
cape under the valve and to pass off through 8c 
the outlet-orifice j of the trap, the operation 
of opening and closing the valve at the inlet 
opening being repeated as often as required 
to allow the water of condensation to escape 
from the steam-pipes to which the trap is at- 85 
tached. 
The expansible vessel is to be supported 
in the chamber C by means of the inwardly 
projecting form of the outer case at the points 
S, which engage with the outer rim of the ex- 9o 
pansible vessel D, as shown in Fig. 4. 
7 5 
I claim as my invention 
In a steam-trap, the combination of the case, 
the removable head, expansible vessel, the 
valve, the adjusting-screw having a screw- 95 
thread at its head, the bearing-shoe prevented 
from rotation by means of the angular shank 
and loosely - fitting holding - socket, and the 
screw-cap adapted for the screw - thread of 
the head of the adjusting-screw, substantially IOC 
as described. 
EDWARD C. HAWES, 
Witnesses: 
SoCRATESSCHOLIELD, 
LEONARD SCHOLFIELD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340766.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 340,766, 
S. COLES, 
ROAD CART 
v/7:/. 
Patented Apr. 27, 1886. 
 
 
 
  
  
A2267 
A SA 
a VIT 7s 
SNT 42 H2 (% 
  
 
 
WITNESSES: 
 
INVENTOR: 
-(2 6-3rve?et 
- - - - 
- 
- - - 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL COLES, OF WALHALLA, NEW YORK. 
ROAD - CART. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 340,766, dated April 27, 1886. 
Application filed November 16, 1885. Serial No. 183,059. (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL CoLEs, of Wal 
halla, in the county of Westchester and State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Road-Carts, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a rear elevation of one of my 
improved road-carts. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
side elevation of the same, taken through the 
line acac, Fig. 1. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
road-carts constructed in such a manner that 
they will be unaffected by the horse motion, 
and will allow the horse to be driven with a 
loose girth, so that in going downhill the cart 
can be held back by the breeching, the girth 
having nothing to do with the motion of the 
cart. 
A are the wheels to the axle B, to which are 
secured the lower parts of the springs C. To 
the upper parts of the springs C are secured 
the end parts of a cross bar, D, which is made 
wide and is slightly rounded upon the upper 
side. 
E is the cart-body, which rests upon the 
cross-bar D, and is so arranged that its cen 
ter of gravity will be directly over the said 
cross-bar. The cart-body Eis secured in place 
upon the cross-bar ID by U bolts or staples F, 
which pass around the lower side of the said 
cross-bar D and are secured to the said cart 
body by nuts, as shown in Fig. 2. The U 
bolts F are made a little larger than the cross 
bar D, so that the cart-body E will have a 
slight rocking movement upon the said cross 
bar D. 
G. are the shafts, which are attached to the 
cross-bar D. With this construction motion 
O 
25 
35 
5 
received from the horse will only rock the 
cross-bar D, and will not affect the cart-body 
balanced upon the said cross-bar, and any Sud 
den jar of the cart can throw the cart-body 
forward or back only so far as to take up the 
play between the cross-bar D and the U 
bolts F. 
If desired, the top of the cross-bar D can 
be made flat, and the part of the cart-body E. 
that rests upon it slightly rounded, without de 
parting from my invention, the essential fea 
ture of which is to give the cart-body a slight 
rocking movement upon its support. 
With road-carts constructed in the usual 
manner it is necessary to have the girth of the 
harness very tight to hold the shafts from an 
up and down movement caused by the for 
ward and backward swing of the cart-body, 
so that in going downhill the holding-back 
strain comes upon the girth and saddle, in 
stead of coming upon the breeching; but with 
my improvement the horse can be driven with 
a loose girth, and the holding-back strain 
comes upon the breeching, as the cart-body is 
freed from the forward and backward swing 
by being balanced upon the cross-bar D, so as 
not to be affected by the motion of the shafts. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
The combination, with the axle bearing the 
springs and the shafts secured, upon the 
springs, of the cross-bar having a convexed 
upper surface and secured upon the shafts 
and the body independently balanced upon 
the cross-bar and having enlarged staples 
loosely embracing the cross-bar, substantially 
as shown and described. 
75 
SAMUEL COLES. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs H. TIBBIT, 
CHARLEs D. SUTTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340866.txt	(No Model.) 
r 
J. W. DICKIES ON. 
RULING MACHINE, 
No. 340,866, 
Patented Apr. 27, 1886. 
WITNESSES: Cas 
44 y.o. 
INVENTOR: 
*%2-et 
BY Mumt 
AITORNEYS, 
t-Lithographer wishington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. DICKIESON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
RULING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 340,866, dated April 27, 1886. 
Application filed September 12, 1885. Serial No. 176,912. 
(No model.) 
2O corresponding parts in both figures. 
To al(, Luhon, it nagy concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES W. DICKIESON, 
of Brooklyn, Kings county, New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
5 in Ruling-Machines, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in machines for ruling 
paper; and the object of my invention is to 
Io provide a new and improved machine for pro 
ducing diagonal lines at any desired inclina 
tion over the usual ruling. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts and details, as will 
I5 be fully described and set forth hereinafter, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved rul 
ing-machine, parts being broken out; and Fig. 
2 is a plan view of the same. 
The ruling-machine is, in general, of the 
25 usual construction, the sheets I being placed 
on the endless bands A, passed over the roller 
A and the pulleys C on the shaft D, then 
passing under the roller E above the roller B 
and upon the belt or apron F, which carries 
3o them under the pens G, held in a bar, H, in 
the usual manner, and spaced the required 
distance. Cords J, passed over the roller E 
and shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2, hold the 
sheets I in the proper position on the apron 
The table IX, over which the bands. A pass, 
is provided with two parallel transverse slots, 
L, through which screw-bolts M are passed, 
which are also passed through longitudinal 
slotSN in a gage, O, above the bands A. Nuts 
P are screwed on the lower ends of the screw 
bolts M. A rod, Q, extends over the bands 
A directly in front of and parallel with the 
roller B, and is held at its ends in lugs or jaws 
45 Q, projecting upward from the table. Sleeves 
R are pivoted on said rod Q, and on each 
sleeve R a sleeve, R, is formed transversely 
to the rod Q, and each sleeve R is provided 
with a binding-screw, R, for holding a rod, 
S, passed through the sleeve, and having its 
front end forked, and in which forked end a 
roller, T, is pivoted, having a rubber ring, T, 
held in its rim, the rubber projecting more or 
less from the rim of the wheel. Springs U 
are connected with the real ends of the rods 
35 or belt F. 
SO 
- 
S, and with a rod, W, held above the rod Q by 
arms V', projecting from standards W on the 
table. 
The machine is driven in the usual manner. 
The operation is as follows: The sheets I, 6o 
which are ruled in the usual manner, are placed 
on the bands A and rested against the gage, 
so that their longitudinal or transverse edges 
are at a certain angle to the direction in which 
the sheets are carried by the bands A. The 65 
rollers T immediately run on the sheets and 
hold them in place until they pass between . 
the rollers E B, and are then held by the cords 
J, which hold them so that they cannot shift 
laterally. The sheets are thus moved under 7o 
the pens G, and thereby lines are drawn on 
the sheets diagonally to the other ruling. 
The gage O can easily be adjusted at any de 
sired angle, to give the diagonal-inclined lines 
any desired angle to the usual ruling. The 75 
springs U press the rollers T on the sheets, 
and the rubber rims prevent slipping of the 
Sheets. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent- 8c 
1. The combination of the machine-table K, 
having a sheet-carrier, a diagonally-arranged 
gage above said carrier, and diagonally-ar 
ranged rollers in advance of the gage, with the 
rollers B E, through which the sheets pass 85 
from the carrier, the endless apron F, the pens 
G above the apron, and the endless cords J, 
for holding the sheet in its gaged position for 
the action of the pens, substantially asset forth. 
with a table and sheet-carrier, of pivoted rods 
carrying rollers above the sheet-carrier, and 
of a gage above the sheet - carrier, substan 
tially as herein shown and described. 
with a table and sheet-carrier, of the rod Q, 
the sleeves R on the same, the sleeves R on 
the sieeves R, the rods S, passed through the 
sleeves R', and the rollers T in the ends of the 
rods S, substantially as herein shown and de- IOO 
Scribed. 
4. In a ruling-machine, the combination, 
with a table and sheet-carrier, of the shaft Q, 
the sleeves R. R, the rods S, the rollers T, the 
rod V, and the springs U, substantially as here- IC5 
in shown and described. 
3. In a ruling-machine, the combination, 95 
2. In a ruling-machine, the combination, 9o 
JAMES W. DICKIESON. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGET. PATTERSON, 
PHILIP ASCHY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US340966.txt	(No Model.) 
J. YOUNG. 
STOCK RACK. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 340,966, 
 
Patented Apr. 27, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
J. YOUNG. 
STOCKRACK, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Apr. 27, 1886, 
 
 
 
 
  
s 
U ls U 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN YOUNG, OF LITCHFIELD, MICHIGAN. 
STOCK RACK. 
SECIFICA.FION forming part of letters Patent No. 340,966, dated April 27, 1886. 
Application filed January 6, 1886. 
Serial No. 1 S7,828. (No model.) 
IO 
35 
4O 
25 
To all, whom it may conce7n, 
Be it known that I, JoHN YoUNG, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Litchfield, in 
the county of Hillsdale and State of Michigan, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Automatic Adjustable Stock - Racks, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
stock-racks, such as make them adjustable in 
their irons and mountings for large and small 
beds and light and heavy work, and in their 
style and construction convertible into a close 
box like a wagon-bed, with a rack extending 
above it convenient for hauling live stock, or 
by extending the rack above the bed outward 
be convenient for hauling bulky produce or 
other merchandise, or by extending the rack 
part much more it is converted into a rack or 
ladder for hauling hay, straw, cornstalks, &c.; 
or the upper rack part may be quickly taken 
off and I have a strong and durable wagon box 
or bed. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
device that can be easily changed or converted 
into a suitable shape to be convenient for 
these various uses, and at the same time be 
Simple, Strong, and durable in its construction, 
adjustable in its parts for convenience in fitting, 
and automatic in its movements, thus supply 
ing a long-felt want. I attain these objects by 
the mechanism illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my rack 
complete as arranged for hauling live stock. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged view representing one cor 
ner of the bed with the rack on it extended, as 
when used for hauling hay, straw, &c., the 
wood parts being represented as broken away. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged view representing one 
corner of the bed and rack with the wood parts 
broken away and the rack parts closed up and 
locked together at the top. Fig. 4 is a one 
half-size detail view of the three parts forming 
the end-gate lock, shown in two ways. Fig. 
5 is a one-half-size detail view of the two parts 
forming the lock for each corner of the rack 
at the top, shown in two ways. Fig. 6 is a 
one-half-size detail view of the end-gate stay 
or clip, and the clip also for the end posts, 
5o shown in two ways. Fig. 7 is a one-half-size 
detail view of the head and arm forming the 
45 
- 
joint, shown in two ways, with its adjustments 
and attachments. Fig. S is a one-half-size de 
tail view of the side hold-up bracket. Fig. 9 
is a one-half-size detail view of the brace and 55 
the adjustable hook and the rack that work in 
connection with it, in all of which views like 
letters refer to like parts. 
The rack is constructed of wood and malle 
able-iron castings. The wood parts consist of 6o 
the side-boards, end-gates, bottom, cleats, rail 
parts, arms, line post, &c., to which the va 
rious parts of malleable iron are screwed and 
bolted, as hereinafter shown and described. 
A. A represent the sides of a wagon - bed, 
and at a represent the back and front end-gates, 
and A the bottom, and P PPP are the bot 
tom battens. These parts are arranged as 
they are in the ordinary wagon-bed, and may 
be of any desired width. 
To the projecting end of each batten P is 
bolted a hold-up bracket-iron, E, arranged 
with serrations on the face of it, e, for adjust 
ment, which are adapted to engage with 
similar serrations, l, on the adjustable hook I, 
and also serrationsh on the arm lock-head H, 
the three parts being clamped together and 
onto the side of the bed A by means of bolts 
and screws, thus being made adjustable to 
suit different widths of sides A and different 
positions for the brace I. In this head His 
pivoted an arm lock-plate, K, arranged so as 
to admit of several adjustments, and also of 
being taken out easily. To this plate K is 
bolted an arm, C, to which is bolted two 85 
or more slats, B B B, and a rack - plate, 
J, which engages with the upper end of 
the brace I. The upper end of the brace I is 
arranged with an opening, i, which allows the 
brace to pass over the web of the rack-plate J, 90 
passing in above at the point j. Thus the 
brace hangs on the rack-plate when at rest, 
and may be easily taken out. These slats B 
B B are designed to extend the whole length 
of the sides A A of the bed, and are secured 
to two or more arms, C, each of which is ar 
ranged with the lock-plate K, head H. bracket 
E, hook L, rack-plate J, and brace I, as de 
scribed, the other side of the bed being ar 
ranged in the same manner. These movable 
adjustable sides, composed of the slats BBB 
and arms C, may be arranged as shown in Fig. 
75 
IOC 
; 
SO 
55 
- 
--- 
The manner in which the arm lock-plate K 
is pivoted in the head H, and the manner in 
which the brace I is arranged to work in con 
nection with the adjustable hook L. and the 
rack-plate J, gives an automatic movement to 
these parts and allows the whole side to be 
raised and lowered at once without locking or 
binding, and in the same manner a whole side 
may be taken off or put on at the same time, 
the lower ends of the braces naturally drop 
ping into their places on the hooks L. L., &c. 
Having thus described the construction, the 
Working, and the uses and advantages of my 
invention so that any one skilled in the arts 
can make and operate the same, what I claim 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is- 
1. In an adjustable stock-rack, the combi 
nation. With the sides A. A., ends at (, bottom 
A", and battens PP, of the bracket-irons E. E., 
secured to sides A. A. and having serrations e, 
the arm lock-heads H. H., and the adjustable 
hooks L. L., substantially as described. 
2. In an adjustable stock rack, the combi 
nation, with the sides A. A., ends at a, bottom 
A', and battens PP, of the bracket-irons EE, 
the arm lock-heads H. H., hooks LL, arm lock 
plates K. K, rack-plates J J, braces II, arms 
C C, and slats BB, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the arms C C and 
lock-heads H. H., of the plates M, secured to 
the end-gates (, a, the eccentrics o 0, pivoted in 
said plates, the levers O O, connected with said 
eccentrics, and the hooks N N, pivoted to the 
| lock-heads HH, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with the swinging side 
slats, B B, connected together by the arms C 
C, and the end slats, D D, connected together 
by the posts did, of the lock-plates R and S, 
Substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
JOHN YOUNG. 
Witnesses: 
JoSEPH. N. CLOUSE, 
WILLIAM. H. TUCIKER. 
---, 
90 
2 
- 
340,966 
2, or adjusted in the several notches of the 
rack-plate J, or be elevated into the position 
shown in Fig. 3. When in this position, the 
arm lock-plate K drops into the notch h' in 
the head H, while at the same time the plates 
R and S at the top interlock, the plate R be 
ing Secured to the top slat, B, and arm C, and 
the plate S is secured to the post d, which 
forms a part of the rack for the end above the 
end-gate a, the cross-slats D D D being Se 
cured to two of these posts d-one on each 
side. The front and back end-gates, at a, are 
secured below by a stay or clip, X, Fig. 6, 
which holds also the post d. Near its lower 
end, M, is a plate secured to the top edge of 
the end-gate a by means of screws, in which is 
pivoted a shaft with a lever, (), on one end 
and an eccentric, o, on the other. N is a 
hook which engages with the eccentric O, one 
end of which is pivoted to the head H in the 
openingh. These form an end-gate lock, and 
the angular arm in holds the postd. These parts 
are provided in rights and lefts, each corner 
of the bed being provided with one; but the 
intermediate ones on each side are used with 
out the clip X and the three parts M, N, and 
O, which form the end-gate lock, as described. 
By arranging double slats D D at the top 
and bottom on one end I provide for a line 
post, Y, (shown in dotted lines,) to slip down 
between them and extend up as high as nec 
essary, to be used when hauling hay, straw, or 
other bulky material when the sides are ex 
tended. 
The various parts of my wagon-bed and 
stock and hay rack combined are secured to - 
gether by means of bolts and screws. The arm 
lock-plate K has an opening, k, in it where it 
strides the web h' of the head. H. By this 
means it may be raised up and taken out by 
moving it toward the center of the bed. The 
sides are easily raised up and adjusted from 
notch to notch, or lowered from notch to notch, 
as desired. The ends and sides of the rack 
may be quickly and easily taken off, leaving 
nothing but the heads H. H., &c., and hooks L 
L., &c., and hold-up irons E. E., &c., and the 
end-gate or corner lock-irons, M, N, and O on 
the bed. 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341066.txt	(No Model.) 
L. H. SMITH, 
WESSEL FOR MEASURING AND TRANSFERRING LIQUIDS. 
May 4, 1886. 
No. 341,066. 
Z 
27 
 
 
 
 
 
72zza esses, 
24-2-4- 
4. W 4.7% 
2, 
446, 
Azz/azzava. 
N, PETERS. Photo-Lithograph 
er. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS H. SMITH, OF 
WESSEL FOR MEASURING A 
ALBANY, NEW YORK. 
NDTRANSFERRING LIQUIDS. 
3ECIFICA.FION forming part of Letters Patent No. 341,066, dated May 4, 1886. 
Application filed June 29, 1885. 
Serial No. 170,194. (No model.) 
O 
IS 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEWIS H. SMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Al 
bany, in the county of Albany and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Vessels for Measuring 
and Transferring Liquids, of which the fol. 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
vessels for measuring and transferring liquids, 
in which the measuring - vessel is provided 
With a gage, and a funnel-form bottom pro 
vided with a valve which can be operated at 
Will, and also with an adjustable stand for 
Support of the vessel when being filled, and 
an upper funnel to facilitate the filling of the 
vessel without liability of its being overflowed, 
all of which will be hereinafter fully described. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
the Vessel with a measuring-gage, by which the 
quantity of liquid therein can be readily 
known, and to provide a funnel-shape bottom 
having a valve, by which the liquid can be 
readily run out or be stopped at will, and to 
provide an adjustable stand which can be set 
at will to support the vessel while it is being 
filled, and be moved out of such position to 
permit the vessel to be applied to a can or 
other vessel when the liquid is to be trans 
ferred. I attain these objects by the means 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure I is a sectional elevation of my im 
proved measuring and transferring vessel. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal view taken at line 1 in 
Fig. 1. 
The Same letters of reference refer to like 
parts throughout the Several views. 
A is the vessel, made, preferably, of sheet 
metal, with ally preferred capacity, as for 
holding one, two, or five gallons, (more or less,) 
and ( is the bail-handle, and a? a side handle. 
B is the bottom, made with a funnel-shaped 
form, and provided with discharge-nozzle b. 
C is a gradually-tapering guard-wall, hav 
ing its lower end connecting with horizontal 
top wall, c, of the body proper of the vessel. 
This top wall is concentric with the opening 
A? in the lower end of said guard or wall, and 
is the limit of the capacity of the vessel, and 
the guard C permits the vessel being filled 
Without overflowing, and permits also a good 
measure of liquids to be taken in a charge of 
the vessel, so as to make up for the almount of 
the liquid which may (when of thick nature, 55 
as molasses) adhere to the sides of the vessel. 
D is a valve provided in the lower portion 
of funnel-bottom B of the vessel. The draw 
ings show that the wall of the nozzle b is ex 
tended upward above the lower end of the 6o 
wall l' of this funnel-bottom, to a short dis 
tance, as wall portion b. The interior or bore 
of this extended nozzle b is made slightly ta 
pering, and with a circular form, so as to adapt 
it to receive a plug or Spigot for opening or 6 
5 
closing it at will. The plug D' is shown to be 
in the form of a spigot, provided with a ver 
tical perforation, d, communicating with the 
horizontal perforation d', which communicates 
with the chamber of the funnel - bottom B 73 
through an opening, e, made in a side of the 
extended portion b of nozzle b. This plug is 
provided with a handle, D', by which it is 
operated. With the form of plug shown I 
make handle D'' with a curved form, prefer- 75 
ably, so that the handle will operate substan 
tially as a crank-handle for revolving the plug 
in its seat in nozzle b, and its finger end e' be 
at the wall of guard C at all times, so that it 
will not be liable to receive on it any liquid 8o 
which may be drawn into the vessel. 
In some cases (as in vessels made wholly of 
glass) I would omit the extension of the noz 
zle upward past the lower end of Wall b of 
the funnel-bottom B, and employ a plainplug, 85 
made, preferably, of cork, and Secured to han 
dle D', whereby the plug can be turned in its 
seat and withdrawn at will, when it is desired 
to discharge the liquid, and be readily closed 
by inserting the plug. 
E is a transparent gage provided with suit 
able division-lines, ac, or other suitable scale or 
gage marks or devices, which will indicate 
smaller denominational measures or fractional 
measures of gallons, quarts, or pints, or of 95 
pounds or ounces, as may be pleferred, and 
be best adapted for use in the particular em 
ployment of the vessel as a measure for liquids 
or fluids. The drawings show this gage to be 
made with a bay form, and with its transpar- Ioo 
ent walls E E set at an angle in relation to 
each other. Though this form of gage is pre 
ferred in most cases to be made with angular 
sides, so that the measures of liquids within 
9C 
25 
35 
45 
 
 
341,066 
5 
O 
IS- 
- 
the same charge of a large measuring-vessel, 
the vessel can be readily viewed from the 
by simply operating the valve to open and 
sides as well as the front of the gage, yet it 
will be seen that a fiat transparent section of 
close the same at each application of the ves 
wall at a line with the wall proper of the vessel 
sel to the several smaller receiving ones, when 
may be substituted, or that any other known 
made successively at gage measure. 
form of gage employed to show the volume of 
By my improvements the one vessel oper 
liquids in vessel may be used. 
ates as a measuring device and as a transfer 
Fis an adjustable stand composed of a foot 
ring device, which is operated at willin a con 
piece, f, and standards.ff', working in suit 
venient manner and in a cleanly way, and with 
outliability of the customer receiving less than 
able sleeves, f', and held by set-screw or set 
screws f". The foot-piece is shown to be cir 
good measure or the seller losing or wasting or 
spilling any portion of the liquor on the floor. 
cular inform, and standards f' (shown by dot 
ted line in Fig. 1, and by full lines in Fig. 2) 
Having described my invention, what I 
are shown to be cylindrical in form, though 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
the former may be made with some other 
form and the latter with a flat or square form 
1. In a vessel for measuring and transfer 
in cross-area, if preferred; or the sleeves f* 
ring liquids, provided with a nozzle hav 
can be dispensed with, and the standards made 
ing a valve which is operated at will for open 
with a flat and wide form, and provided with a 
ing and closing said nozzle, the bay-form meas 
long slot, receiving a guiding-tongue Secured 
uring-gage E, having angular sides projecting 
as a substitute for the sleeves to the sides of 
outward from the walls of the vessel, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
the vessel, with a set screw or screws, can be 
employed to permit the stand being adjusted 
2. In a measure for liquids, the combination, 
with the body of the vessel, provided with a 
in a vertical direction in relation to the ves 
sel, the object being to provide suitable means 
funnel-form bottom having a discharge-nozzle 
for supporting the vessel from the floor while 
provided with a valve, of the adjustable Sup 
it is being filled, and moving this support up 
porting device above described, and adjustable 
ward past the upper end of the nozzle b, so 
at will to a line on or about at the plane of the 
that the foot-piece will permit the latter to be 
discharge end of said discharge-nozzle, sub 
readily inserted in the mouth of a jug, can, 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
or bottle to which the measured quantity of 
3. The combination, with vessel A, provided 
liquid is to be transferred. 
with a funnel-form bottom having a discharge 
In operating with this vessel the operator, 
nozzle, and with a lifting-handle, of an ad 
if the vessel be large or the liquid to be drawn justable stand, F, connected by standards with 
is thick, will let the foot of stand F down be the body of the vessel, and provided with 
low the lower end of nozzle b and secure the guiding-pieces and a set screw or screws for 
sanne, and thereby support the vessel from the 
securing the stand to any adjusted position, 
He will close the nozzle b by means of 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
- floor. 
the handled plug or valve D, and then run into 
4. The combination, with vessel A, provided 
the vessel the amount of liquid to be measured 
with gage E and a lifting-handle, and hav 
and transferred, and by means of bail-handle at 
ing a funnel-shaped bottom provided with a 
or side handle, a?, he will lift the vessel from the 
valve or described equivalent, having handle 
floor, and will also raise the foot of the stand 
D' extended to above the upper end of the 
above the upper end of the nozzle of the fun 
vessel, of the adjustable stand F, connected 
nel-bottom and place the nozzle into the mouth 
with the vessel so as to be raised or lowered 
of the can or jug, or other receiving-vessel, 
at will in relation to the discharge end of the 
substantially as is the practice with funnels, 
nozzle b of the vessel, all substantially as de 
and by handle D' operate the plug or spigot 
scribed, for the operations and purposes set 
of the valve to open the same and permit the 
forth. 
liquid to run down through nozzle b into the 
can or other receiving-vessel. 
With the above-described improvements 
the operator can fill several smaller vessels 
with each a uniform measure of liquid from 
CHARLESSELKIRR, 
ALEX. SELKIRK. 
LEWIS H. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
25 
3C) 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341166.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. PITRAT. 
PRICE SCALE, 
No. 341,166, 
Patented May 4, 1886. 
F. Bl 
Le 
Best 
"E"Fak-Si-Est girsutist 
( 
4. 
fi 
7. 
- 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS E. PITRAT, OF GATILIPOLIS, OHIO. 
PR C E - SCALE. 
 
:354 'i'i 
fi forming part of Letters Patent No. 34:1, l06, dated May 4, i386, 
Application filed August 11, 1885. 
Serial No. 1,26, No model.) 
5 
O 
55 
To att, who in it inctly c07 cen: 
Be it known that I, JULIUS E. PITRAT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Gal 
lipolis, in the county of Gallia and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Couplings for Scales; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable other's skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letter's and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in Scales, and has for 
its olject to provide means whereby the price 
scales described in my lPatent No. 314,717 may 
be attacheti () any ordinary platform-scales, 
so that the money value of a substance at any 
given price per pound placed on the platform 
of the scale can be ascertained without hav 
ing recourse to arithinetical computation; and 
to this elic and to such other's as the invention 
may pert:ain it consists in the peculiar com 
bination alli in ovel coustruction and arrange 
inent of the parts hereinafter more fully de 
scribed, and ointed out, in the claims. 
In the accoli: nying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a top 
plan view, and Fig. 2 is a side elevation, of 
iny improvement. 
Referring to the drawings by letters, A rep 
resents a suitable base which may be of any 
desired for lil. 
B is a carriage, which may also be of any 
preferred for in. This carriage is constructed 
to be moved back and forth on the base A, 
and is in referably mounted upon wheels (, al 
though it inay slide in grooves, as shown, if 
desired. 
Care standards or supports arising from the 
carriage 3, and in these standards is sup 
ported the lever I), which consists upon the 
right or power side of two twin branches, D' 
D", and upon the left side of a single branch, 
D", extending from the pivot-bard at a point 
midway between its connection with the 
branches 3)' D", as plainly shown in Fig. 1. 
The branches D'D' of the lever are each pro 
vided witi, two sets of graduations, b c, and 
the branch is with two sets of graduations, g 
e, similar to those in my patent above referred 
to. The branch I) is designed to be used as 
a balancing-beam, and receives the balance 
weight E, while the branch D'' is to receive 
the weighing-bob F, as in said patent, while 
the carrier G is supported by the rod f con 
necting the ends of the branches D' D". The 
branch D' is simply used as a guide or lever 
for the weight E to slide on to counterbalance 
the scale when adjusted to the varying prices 
of merchandise, as will appear further on. 
H is a standard fixed to the base A, and H' 
is a coupler pivoted to said standard. 
I is a link pivoted to the inner end of the 
coupler H', and its tipper end is knife-edged, 
to engage the desired notch in the branch I) 
of the lever. This link is kept in an upright 
position by means of a ballast-Weight, i, said 
link and weight being made in one piece. Piv 
otally secured to the opposite end of the coup 
ler H is the link 1', similar to the link I, and 
provided with a ballast-weight, i'. 
J represents the bean of a platforin-Scale, 
and j its weighing-bob. 
K is a pivoted bale at the free end of the 
beam, and L is a rod, hooked at each end, con 
necting the bale K with the link i' of the 
coupler. This rod is preferably, though not 
necessarily, provided with a ca. Frie', MI. 
The operation is as follows: Suppose the 
article whose value is to be ascertained has 
just been weighed and still remains on the 
platform of the beam J. Move the scale car 
ried by the carriage B so that the link I will 
fall into the notch of the branch )", indicat 
ing the price per pound of the article being 
weighed. Then move the balancing-bob E 
along on the branch D to the right till the 
branch D" tips up and bears hard enough 
against the link I, to maintain it in place. 
Next move the bobi of the beam J to Zero, 
and remove all the weights from the carrier 
M, when the beam will go up and press up 
ward with a force equal to the down pressure 
exerted by said weights before being removed. 
The bean J being relieved of its counterbal 
ancing-weight the load thereon Will cause its 
free end to rise, and through the connections 
K, L, and I' will cause the ascent of the left 
branch of the coupler FI, which Will cause a 
corresponding depression of the opposite end, 
- 
2 5 
3 5 
8 D 
90 
OO 
 
 
341,166 
O 
15 
. 
. . 
which, being connected to the branch D" by 
the link I, will bear on the graduated beam 
with a force indicated in dollars and cents by 
the weighing-bob F when placed at the point 
of balance. 
It will be noticed that the coupler H' and the 
scale-beam J remain relatively fixed, whereas 
the carriage B and its scale are movable rela 
tive to the coupler and beam J. The position 
of this platform varies as the price per pound 
of the article weighed. 
When the beam J is used for weighing pur 
poses, the carrier M is necessary, but other 
Wise the hooked rod L without the carrier will 
answer the purpose as well so far as comput 
ing money value of an article placed on the 
platform is concerned. 
I do not confine myself to the exact con 
struction shown and described, but reserve the 
right to vary the same so far as consistent with 
the spirit of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination, with an ordinary scale 
beam, of a calculating or price scale, and a 
coupler connecting the two, whereby the net 
value of the article weighed on the scale-beam 
is indicated on the price-scale, substantially 
as hereinbefore set forth. 
2. The combination, with a scale-beam and 
a price-scale, of a coupler-bar pivoted midway 
its ends, and links, one connecting the car 
rier end of the scale-beam to one end of the 
coupler, the other connecting the price-scale 
to the opposite end of the coupler, substan 
tially as described. 
25 
3. The combination of the scale - beam, a 
price-scale, a coupler-bar fixedly pivoted rela 
tive to the scale-beam, links connecting the 
opposite ends of the coupler to the carrier end 
of the scale-beam and to the price-scale, re 
spectively, and a movable platform or car 
riage supporting the price scale, whereby the 
latter may be shifted to correspond with the 
price per pound of the article weighed on the 
scale-beam, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
4. The combination of the scale - beam, a 
base having a standard fixed to one end there 
of, a coupler pivoted to the standard and hav 
ing one end connected to the carrier end of the 
scale - beam, a weighted link pivotally sup 
ported by the opposite end of the coupler, a 
carriage movable on the base, a price-scale 
carried thereby, and having one branch of its 
beam movable through the weighted link, as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
5. The combination of an ordinary scale 
beam, a base supporting a standard at one 
end, a coupler pivoted to the standard mid 
way its ends, a link connecting one end of the 
coupler to the carrier end of the scale-beam, 
and a price-scale supported on said base and 
adjustably connected with the free end of the 
coupler-bar, substantially as and for the pur 
poses hereinbefore specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
60 
65 
JULIUS E. PITRAT. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS BAER, 
A. F. MOORE. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341266.txt	(No Model.) 
T. McSWEENEY. 
PIPE JOINT FOR GAS MAINS, 
No. 341266, 
Patented May 4, 1886. 
2 La al 6. 
2 
S S S 
S 
 
 
 
 
5. 
0. WS ! / 
/ - 
s 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, a c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TERRENCE MCSWEENEY, OFALLEGHENY, ASSIGNOR TO THOMAS A. 
GILLESPIE, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PPE-JOINT FOR GAS MANS. 
SEF:GIEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 341,266, dated May 4, 1886. 
Application filed March 15, 1886. Serial No. 195,208. (No model.) 
5 
O 
55 
65 
nearly in the transverse plane of the shoulder 
To all, whon, it invazy conce71. 
of the bowl, and a corresponding flange, 5, is 
Beit known that I, TERRENCEMICSWEENEY, 
formed within the plain or spigot end of the ad 
residing at Allegheny, in the county of Alle 
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, a citizen of jacent pipe-section, the space between said 
flanges and the shells of the sections forming, 
the United States, have invented or discov 
when the sections are brought together to make 
ered a certain new and useful Improvement 
a joint, an annular supplemental packing 
in Pipe-Joints for Gas-Mains, of which im 
chamber, 6, separated by the thickness of the 
provement the following is a specification. 
shells of the sections from the external pack 
In the accompanying drawings, which make 
ing-chamber, located between the bowl and the 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a longi 
outer surface of the spigot-section, and com 
tudinal central section through a pipe-joint 
municating with said external chamber only 
embodying my invention, and Fig. 2 a trans 
through the joint between the shoulder of the 
verse section through the same at the line aca 
bowl and the end of the shell of the spigot. 
of Fig. 1. 
The chambers 3 and 6 may be packed with 
My invention relates to joints for the con 
any suitable semi-liquid or plastic material or 
nection of cast-iron pipe-sections forming a line 
compound capable of being introduced while 
or main for the conveyance of gas or other flu 
in a liquid condition and of subsequently set 
ids; and its object is to provide a joint of the 
ting or hardening, a compound which is desir 
bowl-and-spigot type of simple and inexpen 
ably adaptable to this purpose being set forth 
sive construction, and which shall effectively 
in a separate application filed by me of even 
resist leakage of fluid from the main. 
date here with. The specific material or com 
To this end my invention, generally stated, 
pound employed is not, however, an essential 
consists in the combination of a pipe-section 
of my present invention, so long as the same 
having a bowl or socket on one of its ends 
possesses the characteristics above stated. 
adapted to receive and form a packing-space 
The packing material is introduced through a 
around the end of an adjacent Section, and an 
pipe, 7, leading into the external packing 
annular internal flange or lip, and a plain or 
chanber, 3, and is prevented from escaping out 
spigot ended pipe-section having a correspond 
wardly therefrom by an external clamp or col 
ing internal flange, Said flanges forming a Sup 
lar, S, which is secured around the spigot-sec 
plemental packing-chamber within the shell 
tion against the outer end of the howl. The 
of the pipe-Sections. 
escape of packing material from the supple 
The improvement claimed is hereinafter 
mental chamber 6 into the main is prevented 
fully set forth. 
by an expansion-ling, 9, of metal, which fits 
In the practice of my invention I form upon 
against the flanges 5 on each side of their abut 
one end of a pipe-section, l, a bowl or socket, 
ting faces, and is maintained closely against 
2, of diameter sufficient to inclose the plain or 
the same by a screw, 10, having right and left 
spigot end of the adjacent pipe-section 1, and 
threads engaging nuts l1 on the ends of the 
form around the same an external packing 
expansion-ling. 
space or chamber, 3, adapted to serve as a re 
The liquid packing material is supplied to 
ceptacle for any suitable semi-liquid or plastic 
the pipe 7 until it fills the outer packing-cham. 
material which is to be supplied to and al 
ber, 3, and, passing by the joint between said 
lowed to solidify under pressure in the cham 
chamber and the supplemental chamber 6, al 
ber. The bowl 2 is reduced in-diameter at and 
so fills the latter chamber. Pressure is then 
adjacent to its outer end, one or more grooves 
applied to the packing material by means of a 
or recesses, 4, being formed circumferentially 
plunger working in the Supply-pipe 7, or in a 
in the reduced portion of its bore, for the pur 
pipe or vessel connected therewith, and is 
pose of receiving, if desired, an end packing 
maintained until the setting or solidification 
of soft metal, which may be callked around its 
of the material in both chambers has been 
outer face in the ordinary manner. An an 
completed. 
nular flange or lip, 5, is formed upon the inner 
The solidified packing, which adheres to the 
surface of the shell of the pipe-section adjacent 
walls of the chambers and fills up all interstices 
to the bowl 2, said flange terminating in or 
90 
CO 
2 
341,266 
35 
4O 
45 
so 
- 
of the joints, forms an effectual barrier to the abutting against the internal flange of the bowl 
leakage of fluid from the main, and, being lo- and forming there with a supplemental pack 
cated perpendicularly to the line of pressure ing-chamber, a packing of soft metal fitted in 
of fluid tending to escape, acts advantageously to the reduced end portion of the bowl, and a 
to resist the same. 
packing of solidified semi-liquid or plastic ma 
In lieu of closing the outer end of the exter-terial filling the larger space within the bowl 
malpacking-chamber, 3, by the clamp 8, as above and the supplemental packing-chamber, Sub 
described, a packing of lead or other soft metal stantially as set forth. 
may be run into the Space of reduced diame- 
4. The combination of a pipe-section having 
ter within the bowl at and near its outer end, a bowl or socket on one of its ends and an an 
filing the same and its recesses or grooves 4, nular internal flange or lip adjacent thereto, a 
and being properly calked, in the usual man- plain or Spigot ended pipe-Section having a 
ner, around the spigot-section and outer end corresponding internal end flange, said flanges 
abutting and forming a Supplemental packing 
of the bowl. 
I claim herein as my invention- 
chamber within the shells of the section, and 
1. A bowl-and-spigot pipe-joint having a an expansion-ring fitting against the flanges on 
supplemental packing-chamber located on the each side of their abutting faces, substantially 
inside of the shells of the connected pipe sec- as set forth. 
tions, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of a pipe-section having 
2. The combination of a pipe-section having a bowl or socket on one of its ends and an an 
a bowl Or Socket on One of its ends and an an- nular internal flange or lip adjacent thereto, a 
nular internal flange or lip adjacent thereto, plain or spigot ended pipe-section having a 
and a plain or spigot ended pipe-section hav- corresponding internal end flange, said flanges 
ing a corresponding internal end flange, said abutting and forming a supplemental pack 
flanges abutting and forming a supplemental i 
ing-chamber within the shells of the sections, 
packing-chamber within the shells of the sec- and an external clamp or collar fitting around 
tions, substantially as set forth. 
the spigot-section and closing the outer end of 
| 
a bowl or socket on one of its ends, which is . 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
reduced in diameter at and adjacent to its outer my hand. 
face, and an annular internal flange or lip ad- 
jacent to the shoulder of the bowl, a plain or 
spigot ended pipe-section inserted into the 
bowl, and having an annular internal flange . . 
3. The combination of a pipe-section having the bowl, substantially as set forth. 
J. SNOWDEN BELL, 
R. H. WHITTILESEY. 
TERRENCE MCSWEENEY. 
Witnesses: 
. Its 
9. 
5 
Cy 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341366.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 341,366, 
W. C. WILSON. 
LIQUID CONTAINING WESSEL. 
Patented May 4, 1886. 
WITNESSES: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM COTTER WILSON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
EIGHTH TO FRANCIS RAYMOND, OF SAME PLACE. 
L. QUID CONTAINING VESSEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 341,366, dated May 4, 1886. 
Application filed September 30, 1884, Serial No. 144,404. 
(No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all whom it may concert. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMCOTTER WIL 
SON, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
and a resident of 138 Fulton street, Brooklyn, 
5 county of Kings, State of New York, have in 
Vented new and useful Improvements in Liq 
uid-Containing Wessels, Oilers, Kerosene-Cans, 
&c., of which the following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to produce 
by an easy and inexpensive means a liquid 
containing vessel that shall possess the prop 
erty of causing its contents to flow freely or in 
drops at will, and free from the disadvantages 
in such vessels as oil-cans, oilers, benzine, var 
nish, or other liquids requiring a vessel that 
shall be capable of being made air-tight or 
open at will. 
Oilers have hitherto been made with a va 
riety of vents, that when new perform their 
functions as desired; but notably when a vent 
tube vents on the interior of the vessel it soon 
becomes clogged by the collection of dust, and 
is thus rendered inoperative. This applies 
particularly where such oilers are used in wool 
en or cotton factories. By this invention such 
clogging is impossible, inasmuch as the large 
area through which the air enters in the air 
pipe, which tapers to a point from the base 
upward, allows any dust that might fall on its 
top to descend downward through the taper 
cylinder, and thus does not allow the dust to 
adhere to its inner walls, as is the case where 
a parallel or bent tube-ventis employed, more 
especially where a clearing-wire is not em 
ployed. Another improvement in this form 
of vessel is that a spring-bottom attached to 
the body of the vessel admits of a double ac 
tion and of attaining a greater air-pressure 
than with ordinary spring-bottom vessels when 
used as oilers. This spring-bottom may be 
applied or not, according to the exigencies of 
the case-as, for instance, when the vessel, 
With its internal air-tube, is made of glass and 
used for any corrosive matter, such as acids, 
45 &c. Then such spring is not needed, nor is it 
when used for kerosene or other packing cans. 
Another advantage is that each can may be 
hermetically sealed, even though an open shaft 
be present in the base of the vessel. This will 
So be found particularly valuable in storing or 
shipping volatile oils, &c. 
35 
Reference to the accompanying drawings 
A, Figure 1, represents the body of a ves 
will more fully illustrate this invention. 
sel; B, the taper air-shaft affixed at the base 55 
of the vessel H. 
Screwed or soldered on. 
D is the spring-bottom, which may be either 
E is a screw-collar affixed to the top of the 
vessel. 
F is a taper socket, through which the spout 
C is drawn up from the vessel. Within the 
spout is secured a wire, M, which rises and 
falls within the air-pipe B, and acts both as a 
guide for the movable spout and as a clearing- 65 
Wille. 
G is a screw-cap, flanged at its base, with a 
packing-pad on the inside of top. It will thus 
be seen that the tube B, when soldered at its 
base H, becomes a rigid pillar, over which the jo 
spout C will rise or fall easily, owing to its ta 
perform, forming, when raised, a perfect dis 
charger of its contents without resort to press 
ure, as in the case of ordinary spring-oilers. 
Moreover, when the spring-bottom D is at 75 
tached, an air-chamber, K, is formed. 
When the thumb is impinged on the small 
hole, as shown by the arrows B, the operator 
can by pressure force out through the large 
opening B a stronger stream and of much 8o 
greater force than is possible when the ordi 
nary spring-bottom is used. This will become 
obvious when we consider that the large vol 
ume of air in the tube B and the chamber Kis 
suddenly compressed by pressure on the sec-85 
ondary bottom D. This will be found of great 
value when applied for oiling during the op 
eration of boring tubes, as by this means a 
stream of great force is thrust forward. 
able spout C telescoped one over the other, as 
when dropped into the can and capped, as at 
Fig. 3. 
Having thus described my invention, I wish 
it to be understood that I vary the form of 95 
vessels and of the material used. For instance, 
I may make the vessel of glass, with a hole in 
the bottom, and insert the air-tube B, by blow 
ing or otherwise, at the joint H. This form of 
vessel I use for acids, inks, sauces, &c. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A vessel having an open tube affixed to 
Fig.2 shows the air-chamber Band the mov. 9o 
IOO 
2 
341,366 
4. In a vessel, the combination of the open 
be dropped within the vessel, and a cap, as G, 
2. The combination, in a vessel, of the ta- for closing the mouth of the vessel, substan 
5. The combination of the fixed air-tube, the 
the base and extending up within the vessel, 
and a movable spout sliding on the fixed tube, air-tube, thesliding discharge-spout adapted to 20 
substantially as described. 
pering air-tube secured to the base, the taper- tially as described. 
ing internal neck, and a sliding discharge- 
Spout, which when raised is held by frictional sliding discharge-spout, and a guide and clear- 25 
contact with the tapering neck, the contents ing-wire, substantially as described. 
of the vessel when discharged escaping be- 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
tween the two tubes and into the discharge- invention I have signed my name, in presence 
spout, substantially as described. 
of two witnesses, this 25th day of September, 
to its base and extending upward, a movable 
discharge-spout sliding on the air-tube, and a 
secondary bottom forming an air-chamber, 
whereby pressure on the secondary bottom will 
force air into the air-tube, substantially as de- | 
scribed. 
3. A vessel having a taper air-tube affixed 1SS4. 
S 
WM. COTTER WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS RAYMOND, 
S. B. WILSON. 
TO 
-- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341466.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. FANCHER 
CIDER PRESS, 
No. 341,466, 
3. 
Patented May 11, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X. N 
COSAC 
 
 
Nye 
 
 
 
 
7%zzzzesses, 
Z7zvezdovy 
^%as 
% Sw-4 (3-24, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A. FANCHER, OF WEST GRANBY, CONNECTICUT. 
COER PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 341,466, dated May 11, 1886. 
Application filed March 23, 1885. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMESA. FANCHER, of 
West Granby, in the county of Hartford and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a certain 
new and useful Improvement in Cider. Presses, 
whereof the following is a description, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
where 
Figure 1 is a top view of a machine embody. 
ing my said improvement. Fig. 2 is a view 
of the same in central vertical lengthwise sec 
tion. 
The title hereinbefore given to this improve. 
ment indicates its purpose-to wit, a press for 
the expression of juice from apples and other 
fruit and the like. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter a 
denotes the frame of the machine in general. 
The letters bb denote two pressing-rollers. 
The letters c and d denote two auxiliary 
rollers. 
The letter e denotes an endless apron, which 
may well be made of stout webbing running 
around one of the pressing-rollers and around 
the auxiliary rollers. 
The letter f denotes a pomace-duct for con 
ducting the crushed fruit upon the apron. A 
grater or grinder may of course belocated im 
mediately over the apron, and in such case its 
delivery would take the place of and be the 
equivalent of the duct. 
In the operation of this machine the crushed 
fruit or pomace falls upon the endless apron, 
as indicated in the drawings, and is carried 
by the apron between the pressing-rollers, 
where the juice is thoroughly expressed and 
falls down upon the catch-board g, which is 
wider than the rolls, and recessed on its face, 
to catch and hold the juice, which juice de 
scends to the lower end of the board and there 
escapes into some proper receptacle through 
a duct or trough made in the surface of the 
lower end of the catch-board. The pomace, 
after passing through the pressing-rolls and 
O 
25 
35 
4) 
45 
55 
75 
Serial No. 159,720. (No model.) 
having the juice expressed, passes over the 
pressing-roll, which is inside the endless 
apron, and is removed from the surface of that 
roll by the scraper h, which is a sort of trough 
arranged transversely of the machine, so that 
the pomace may escape at the ends of this 
seraper. If any of the pomace sticks to the 
endless apron after leaving the pressing-roll, 
it is removed therefrom by the apron-scraper 
i, so as to again fall down upon the rolland 
travel down to the scraper h, where it will be 
properly removed. 
It will be observed that in this machine the 
pomace is delivered upon the inner side or 
face of the endless belt, with the result that 
when the pomace passes between the pressing 
rolls it is between one of the rolls and the belt, 
and as the pressure is exerted the expressed 
juice can and doesfind its way to the outer fac 
ing of the belt, thence dropping to the trough 
beneath, the pomace all the while being held 
securely in place and passed along in its travel 
with the revolution of the roll. 
It will also 
be observed that the catch-board, which 
catches the expressed juice, is practically be 
neath the entire operating mechanism-that 
is, beneath the pressing-rolls-and beneath 
substantially, if not the whole, of the belt, 
so as to catch every drop of juice which falls 
from any point. At the same time the whole 
arrangement is very simple. 
I claim as my invention 
In combination, the pressing-rolls b b, the 
auxiliary rolls, the endless apron e, pomace 
duct f, delivering on the inner side of the end 
less apron, and the catch-board g, underneath 
the pressing-rolls and the apron, all substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
JAMES A. FANCHER. 
Witnesses: 
CoNDIT HAYES, 
WILBUR, RUICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341566.txt	(No Model.) 
J. FINCK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC GAS LIGHTER, 
No. 341,566. 
Patented May ll, l886. 
. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. FINCK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC GAS LIGHTER, 
No. 341,566. 
Patented May ll, l886. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. FINCK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC GAS LIGHTER, 
No. 341,566. 
- 
Patented May 11, 1886. 
N. PETERs. Photo-uthorapher, Washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS FINCK, OF SAN FRANCISCO, 
CALIFORNIA, ASSIGNOR TO WILL & 
FINCK, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC ELECTR C GAS LIGHTER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 341,566, dated May ll, 1886. 
Application filed July 30, 1885. Serial No. 3,093. (No model.) 
To all utilon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JULIUS FINCK, of the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of Cali 
fornia, have invented an Improvement in Au 
tomatic Electric Gas-Lighters; and I hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to that class of electric 
apparatus which is used for lighting gas; and 
inny invention consists in the devices herein 
after described, and specifically pointed out 
in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
electricai apparatus by which any number of 
fixtures, with any number of burners, in the 
same or separate rooms, may be simultaneously 
or independently lighted. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my electric 
gas-lighter. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of same. 
Fig. 3 is a detail of levers G and catches I. 
Fig. 4 is a plan view showing the concentric 
tracks and the levers G, and a diagram of the 
circuit-wires from the tracks. 
A is a gas-fixture, here shown as having 
three burners, though the number of burners 
may be greater or less. This fixture is con 
nected by a pipe, a, with the gas-main, and in 
this connecting-pipe, at a suitable point, is a 
cock, (t", by which the gas is shut off from the 
fixture or turned on. In close proximity to 
the cock at is a bed-plate, B, upon which is a 
circular plate or disk, C, made of non-con 
ducting material, and provided on its surface 
with metallic tracks e. These tracks are cir 
cular and are concentric with each other, the 
number of tracks being equal to the number 
of fixtures which are to be lighted, one of said 
tracks corresponding to the fixture A. The 
tracks are cut into sections by radial spaces, 
and the number of these sectlons is equal to 
the number of burners on each fixture, and 
therefore, as the fixture A has three burners, 
the track which corresponds to it is divided 
into three sections. 
Over the plate C is a bracket, D, on which 
the clock-work mechanism (represented gen 
erally by E) is mounted. The details of this 
mechanism need not be described, further than 
by pointing oute as the vertical shaft rotated 
by the clock-work. On the inner end of this 
shaft is firmly secured a metallic disk, F, to 
which is secured a radial frame, f. In this 
frame is fixed longitudinally a short shaft, (1, 
on which are pivoted the hubs of of the forked 
or angled levers G. 
Springs of are small coil-springs which ent 
circle the shaft (), and, bearing with One end 
against the hubs of of the forked or augled le" 
vers G, serve to hold the hubs g in such posi 
tion that the inner and longer arms of the le 
vers G lie normally out of contact with the 
plate or disk C. 
H are push-spindles carrying arms h", the 
ends of which have pins h", which pass in 
through a suitable guide-bar, and are adapted 
to bear on the outer or shorter arms of the 
levers G. By pushing one of the Spindles the 
pin h" operates against the said arm of a lever, 
G, thereby forcing its inner arm against the 
plate or disk C, whereby it is enabled to travel 
over and in contact with the metallic track C. 
A frame, f, is provided with radial arms.f, 
against which one end of the springs of and 
bear, and has also bearings for the short shafts 
i and ty, the shaft i having pivoted upon it 
small catches I, with the pins i of Which a 
tooth, f, on the hub g' of the level's G is 
adapted to engage when said level's are forced 
back, as heretofore described, whereby their 
inner arms are held against the metallic tracks. 
The catches I are provided with in Wardly 
extending arms i, which come in contact with 
pins c' on the plate or disk C and release the 
catches from their engagement. With the hubs 
of the levers G, whereupon the springs (f of 
said levers return them to their normal posi 
tion, while small springs i return the catches 
to their positions. 
J is a metallic contact-spring Secured to the 
bracket D and bearing on the disk F. 
K is an electro-magnet, having arnature le 
secured to an arm, l, on a spring-shaft, L, 
journaled in a bracket, l'. To this shaft is 
firmly secured a lever, M, which extends down 
by the clock-work, and is provided with a 
bent arm, n, which projects in Wardly and is 
adapted to come in the path of the fan-Wheel 
5 
O 
IS 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
85 
95 
 
2 
341,566 
25 
e' of the clock-work and to be withdrawn 
therefrom, as I shall presently describe. . 
On the outer end of the driving-shaft e of 
the clock-work is a disk, N, having a notch, 12, 
5 into which a small lug, n, on the lever M fits. 
Z is the spark-coil. 
O is the battery. From the carbon pole of 
onejar of the battery extends a wire, P, through 
the spark-coil to a metallic post, p, on the bed 
Io plate B; thence a wire, p, passes to the con 
tact-spring, J, which bears on the disk F. Be 
hind the bed-plate are wires Q, which are in 
metallic contact with inwardly-extending pins 
q from each metallic track c and each section of 
(5 each track. These wires pass to the metallic 
posts R on the bed-plate, from which extend 
wires to the burners. 
T is the return-wire from the gas-pipe sys 
tem to which the burners and fixtures belong, 
2O said wire passing back to the battery and 
joined to the zinc pole thereof. 
On the bed-plate is a push-button, S, with 
which a wire, s, from the carbon pole of the 
battery is connected. A wire, s', extends from 
the push-button to a metallic post, s, from 
which a wire, s, passes to the electro-magnet K. 
From said magnet is a wire, s', to a metallic 
post, s, from which a wire, s, passes back to 
the zinc pole of the battery. 
The operation of the apparatus is as follows: 
It is designed for lighting as many fixtures with 
as many burners as desirable. In the present 
case we will suppose there are four fixtures in 
the same or different rooms of the building, 
each fixture being provided with threeburners. 
The gas is shut off from all these fixtures at 
the cock a. For the four fixtures there will 
be four push-spindles H, four levers G, each 
operated by its own catch I, and four circular 
tracks c, each track being divided into three 
sections, each section representing a burner. 
There will be twelve wires Q behind the bed 
plate, one from each section of each track, 
twelve metallic posts R, and twelve wires , 
one to each burner of each fixture. If the 
same gas-cock controls all the fixtures, it is 
obvious that they must all be lighted simul 
taneously; but if each fixture has its own gov 
erning-cock, then only one fixture need be 
lighted at a time. If this be the case, one of 
the push-spindles His pressed in. This move 
ment, through its arm h and pin h, acting on 
the outer arm of a lever G, forces its inner arm. 
back in such position that it will travel over 
and againstone of the metallic tracks c. When 
in this position the catch I holds it there. 
The push-button S is now pressed in, closing 
its circuit, whereby the electro-magnet K at 
tracts its armature k. This movement of the 
armature, acting through the pivoted shaft 
L, causes the lever M to withdraw its arm m. 
from the path of the fan-wheel of the clock 
mechanism and to withdraw its lug m from the 
notch in of the disk N on the driving-shaft e of 
65 said mechanism. The clock-work mechanism, 
through the shaft e, carries the barf around 
in a circular path, causing the lever G to move 
over and upon its own track c. In touching 
said track it closes the spark-coil circuit, of 
which it forms a part, whereby each burner is 7o 
lighted as the levers move along from one sec 
tion of the track to another. The disk N on the 
outer end of the shaft e, pressing against the 
lugm", holds the lever Mback, whereby its 
arm does not interfere with the fan-shaft. 75 
When the frame f has completed its revolu 
tion, the lug in of the lever M drops into the 
notch in of the disk N, and its arm in moves in 
the path of the fan of the clock mechanism, 
thereby cutting off the power. A little before 8o 
this stoppage the arm i of the catch I has 
come in contact with the pin c' in the plate C, 
whereby it releases the hub of the lever G, so 
that said lever returns to its position. In or 
der to light a second fixture, a second push- 85 
spindle is operated with the same result. The 
lever M is also provided with an arm, n, ex 
tending over the disk N and having an inward 
ly-projecting point, m, with which a small pin, 
n", on the disk is adapted to come in contact. 9o 
The object of this is as follows: When the gas 
is first turned on at the cock, it takes it some 
time to fill the pipes and reach the first burner. 
It is desirable, therefore, to stop the revolu 
tion of the lever G on that section of the track 95 
which corresponds with the burner, and as 
soon as said burner is lighted to let it continue 
its travel. Now, when the push-button is op 
erated to close the electro-magnet circuit, the 
lever at once commences its revolution; but Ioo 
by holding the push-button in, the armature of 
the magnet remains attracted, whereby the 
lever M is thrown over and held in a position 
to cause the point in of the arm on to remain 
in the path of the pinn' on the revolving disk 
This will stop the revolution of the disk 
N. 
and the levers G, and hold them long enough 
for the first burner to be lighted, when, by re 
leasing the button, the rotation of the levers 
continues. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an electric gas-lighter, a fixed metal 
lic track and a traveling lever in contact there 
with, both lever and track being in the spark 
coil circuit to the burners, in combination with 
a mechanism for throwing said lever into and 
out of contact with the track, a clock-work 
mechanism for revolving the lever, and a 
means affecting the clock-work mechanism to 
start and stop it, substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
2. In an electric gas-lighter, the fixed and 
sectional metallic tracks c and the pivoted le. 
vers G, adapted to be brought in contact with 
said tracks, both levers and tracks being in 
the spark-coil circuit from the battery to the 
burners, in combination with a clock-work 
mechanism adapted to revolve the levers, an 
electro-magnet in a separate circuit, and a 
mechanism operated by the electro-magnet act. 
I 25 
Ic5 
O 
I I5 
55 
 
34l,566 
& 
ing through its armature to release and stop 
the clock-work mechanism, substantially as 
herein described. 
3. In an electric gas-lighter, the fixed sec 
tional metallic tracks c and the pivoted levers 
G, adapted to travel in contact with said 
tracks, ill combination with the clock-work 
mechanism having the driving - shaft e, the 
metallic disk F on said shaft, and the frame 
of, carried by said disk and carrying the levers 
G, the contact - spring J on the disk F, the 
electro - magnet IX, having armature k, the 
Swinging lever M, actuated by said armature, 
and having arm n, adapted to move into and 
out of the path of the fan-wheel of the clock. 
work mechanism, a spark-coil circuit includ 
ing the spring J, disk F, frame f, levers G, 
tracks c, and burners, and a separate circuit 
including the magnet K, substantially as here 
in described. 
4. In an electric gas-lighter, the fixed sec 
tional metallic tracksc, having wires Q, connect 
ing each section of each track with the burners, 
as described, and the contact-levers G, adapt 
; ed to travel on said tracks, in combination with 
the clock-work mechanism having shaft e, and 
metallic disk F on said shaft, and frame f, car 
rying the level's G, the contact-spring J on 
said disk, the electro-magnet K, having an 
armature, k, the lever M, actuated by said 
armature and having an arm, m, adapted to 
move into and out of the path of the fam-wheel 
of the clock-work mechanism, the push-but 
ton S, and electric circuit-wires including the 
push-button and electro-magnet, whereby the 
arm n is made to release and stop the clock 
mechanism, to effect and stop the revolution 
of the levers G, and electric circuit-wires of 
the spark-coil, including the spring J, disk F, 
frame f, levers G, and tracks c, substantially 
as herein described. 
5. In an electric gas-lighter, as herein de 
scribed, the pivoted revolving angled or two 
armed levers C, electrically connected with 
the battery, and the tracks c, connected elec 
trically with the burners, in combination with 
the means by which said levers are forced into 
contact with the tracks, consisting of the push 
spindles H, having arms h", with pins h", adapt 
ed to bear on one of the arms of the levers G, 
whereby their other arms are forced in, sub 
stantially as herein described. 
6. In an electric gas-lighter, as described, 
the pivoted revolving angled or two-armed 
levers G, electrically connected with the bat 
tery, and the tracks c, connected electrically 
with the burners, in combination with the 
means for moving the levers into contact with 
the tracks, consisting of the push-spindles H, 
having arms h", with pins h", adapted to bear 
on one of the arms of the levers, and the means 
by which said levers are held in position to 
which they are forced by the push-spindles, 
consisting of the pivoted catches I, engaging a 
tooth on the hubs of the levers, substantially 
as herein described. 
45 
SO 
35 
 
75 
95 
OO 
7. In an electric gas-lighter, the pivoted re 
volving angled or two-armed levers G, elec 
trically connected with the battery, and the 
tracks c, connected electrically with the burn 
ers, in combination with the push-spindles 
H, having arms h", with pins h", by which said 
levers are forced into contact, and the means 
by which they are held in contact and released 
therefrom, consisting of the pivoted catches I, 
engaging the hubs of the lever's, and having 
arms , and the fixed pins c', with which the 
arms of the catches come in contact, substan 
tially as herein described. 
. S. In an electric gas-lighter in which re 
volving contact - levers open and close the 
spark-coil circuit to the burners, the means 
by which the levers are rotated over their con 
tacts and are stopped, consisting of the clock 
work mechanism E, having a driving-shaft, e, 
by which the levers are carried, the pivoted 
lever M, actuated by the armature of an elec 
tro-magnet in a separate circuit, and the al'm 
in on the lever M, adapted to move into or Out 
of the path of the fan-wheel of the clock-Work 
mechanism, substantially as herein described. 
9. In an electric gas-lighter, as described, 
the revolving levers G, electrically connected 
with the battery, and the sectional tracks c, 
connected electrically with the burners, said 
levers forming intermittent contacts with the 
tracks, in combination with the clock-Work 
mechanism for driving the levers, having shaft 
e, with a disk, N, on its top, having a notch, 
n, the lever M, actuated by the armature of an 
electro-magnet in a separate circuit, alld hav 
ing an arm, n, adapted to move into and out 
of the path of the fan-wheel of the clock-work 
mechanism, and a lug, n., bearing against the 
periphery of the disk N, and adapted to drop 
into the notch of said disk, substantially as 
herein described. 
10. In an electric gas-lighter, the fixed sec 
tional tracks c, electrically connected with the 
burners, and the revolving contact-level's G, 
which open and close the spark-coil circuit to 
the burners, in combination with the clock 
work mechanism having shaft, e, by which the 
levers are carried and revolved, the means by 
which the clock-work is started and stopped, 
consisting of the lever M, having an arm, n, 
moving into and out of the path of the fan 
wheel of the clock mechanism, the push-but 
ton S, and electro-magnet K, having armature 
l, operating the lever M, said push-button and 
magnet being in a separate circuit, and the 
means by which the levers G are stopped at a 
given point, consisting of the disk N on the 
top of the shaft e, having a pin, n', and the 
arm in on the lever M, having a point, n', 
adapted, when the lever is moved by the at 
traction of the electro-magnet for its armature, 
to move into the path of the pin, Substantially 
as herein described. 
11. In an electric gas-lighter, the fixed se 
ries of concentric and sectional metallic tracks 
c, having wires from each section of each track 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
I 3O 
34,566 
to the burners, and the pivoted contact-levers the armature is attached, the lever M on said 15 
G, in combination with the push-spindles H, shaft, having arm m, adapted to move into 
having arms h", with pins l', by which said le. and out of the path of the fan-wheel of the 
vers are forced into contact with the tracks, clock mechanism, and a lug, m, and the disk 
5 the means by which the levers are revolved, N on top of the shaft e of the clock-work 
consisting of the shaft e of a clock-work mech- mechanism, having a notch, n, into which the 2d 
anism, having disk F and frame?, carrying said lug fits, substantially as herein described. 
levers, the spring J, bearing under disk F, the 
Spring, disk, levers, and tracks being in the hand. 
Io spark-coil circuit to the burners, and the means 
by which the levers are started and stopped, 
consisting of the push-button S and electro- 
magnet K in a separate circuit, the armature 
k of said magnet, the pivoted shaft L, to which 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
JULIUS FINCK. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. NoURSE, 
H. C. LEE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341666.txt	W. W. LE GRANDE, 
RAILWAY SIGNAL, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May ll, l886. 
ite 
s. 
(No Model.) 
No. 34,666, 
 
 
2. 
- WITWESSEs 
7.<. 65te-2-2-2-e-e6 
r4.3 
IWYEWTOR 
72 % 
2, X26-22.2% 
%4.2%. 53-24 
Attorney 
No Model.) 
(No Mode 
.W. W. L.E GRANDE, 
RAILWAY SIGNA, 
3. Sheet 3-8eet 2. 
89traS8. 
No. 341,666. 
Patented May 11, 1886, 
NC - 
 
2% 
WWESSES 
W 
cC. Cze-2-ee-eeee 
12 
w 
12 
2//l <C2 %22z46 
IWWEWTOf 
Attorney 
(No Model.) 
W 
No, 341 666, 
W. W. LE GRANDE, 
RAILWAY SIGNAL. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
- Patented May 11, 1886. 
 
gas 
22, 2/. 42% 244 
IwVEWTOR 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. LE GRANDE, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR OF 
ELEVEN TWENTY-FOURTHS TO H. R. DERING, W. W. DERING, AND 
T. H. UPPERMAN, ALL OF SAME PLACE. 
RAILWAY-SIGNAL. 
SFECfICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 341,666, dated May 11, 1886. 
Application filed June 29, 1885. 
Serial No. 170,085. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM W. LEGRANDE, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Louisville, in the county of Jeffer 
5 son and State of Kentucky, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Electro 
Mechanical Signal Apparatus; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in electro-mechanical signal devices of that 
class which is provided with an armature ar 
ranged to rotate on its axis in a plane parallel 
with the face of the poles of the electro-mag 
net. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
apparatus for operating electrical signals, 
which can be controlled by the electric cur 
rents either in a common circuit or specially 
arranged circuits. 
My invention consists in the peculiarly 
constructed armature consisting of independ 
ent circular segments of steel rigidly connected 
by a non-magnetic bar adjustably fitted to a 
3O shaft arranged parallel to the cores of an elec 
tro-magnet and adapted to rotate on a plane 
parallel with the face of the poles of the mag 
net,in combination with an electro-magnet. 
My invention further consists in the means 
for permanently magnetizing the armature, so 
that when the current of electricity traverses 
the coils of the magnet in one direction the 
armature will be held in a certain position, 
and that when the current is reversed and 
traverses the coils in the opposite direction 
the armature will be reversed and the signal 
ing device display opposite indications. 
My invention further consists in signal 
magnets, in combination with the main line 
of circuit, whereby the signals are operated 
directly by the current traversing the main 
line circuit. 
My invention also consists in the novel ar 
rangement and combination of elements, as 
35 
The letter B designates my improved arma- 7c, 
will be hereinafter more fully described, and 50 
specifically pointed out in the claims. 
I have fully illustrated my improvements 
in the accompanying drawings, wherein Fig 
ure 1 is a front elevation of the electro-mag 
net, the armature and its shaft, and a signal 55 
fixed thereto. Figs. 2 and 3 are plan views of 
the apparatus, showing the armature in differ. 
ent positions. Fig. 4 is an enlarged view in 
elevation. Fig. 5 is a similar view in plan, 
showing the construction of the armature; and 6o 
Fig. 6 is a plan view of a section or block of 
railroad with my improved devices applied in 
operative connection. 
The letter. A designates an electro-magnet 
of a well - known construction, preferably 65 
mounted in an upright position upon the 
base A. The cores of the electromagnet 
are connected together by a soft-iron yoke or 
bar, a, in the usual manner. 
ture. This is comprised of two flat bars of 
steel, bb, which are bent in circular shape 
and arranged with their ends approaching, 
and are rigidly secured together by a non 
magnetic bar, b. This non-magnetic bar b is 75 
preferably fixed to the arms or segments of 
the armature near the opposite ends of the 
arms, in order that the greater part of each 
arm shall be on opposite sides of the connect 
ing-bar, and thus permit the armature to trav 
erse a greater distance over the poles when 
acted on by the circuit. In the center of the con 
necting-bar is formed an aperture, b, through 
which is passed a shaft, b, which is fixed 
in the connecting-bar by means of a set-screw, 
l. 
Thus the armature may be adjusted to 
any positions on the shaft desired, and there 
secured by means of this set-screw. By the 
same means the rotation of the armature over 
the poles may be limited by moving the seg 
ments laterally. The shaft b is pivoted in the 
base-piece and turns in a hole in the cross 
piece b, supported on standards b. A sleeve, 
c, is fitted to the shaft b, and in the sleeve is 
secured a stop-pin, c', the arm of which pro 
jects upward, substantially as shown, and 
lodges against the edge of the cross-piece b, 
whereby the rotation of the armature is posi 
I5 
45 
2 . 
341,666 
4: 
5 
IO 
25 
tively limited. On the end of the shaft b, pro 
jecting above the cross-piece, is fitted a sleeve 
and socket, c, to which the signal-rod carry 
ing the signal is connected, substantially as 
shown. On the shaft b, preferably below the 
armature, is secured a sleeve, c', having a pin, 
c, projecting therefrom, and to this pin is Se 
cured a cord, c', which is passed over a grooved 
pulley, c', journaled to one of the standards, 
and a weight, c', is attached to the free end of 
the cord, the purpose being to give automatic 
movement to the signal whenever the current 
is broken and turn it to a position of 'danger. 
It will be noticed that when a current of 
electricity saturates the magnets, both a re 
pellant and attractive force is brought to bear 
for holding the signal-banners in a position to 
indicate safety. 
In Fig. 6 of the drawings I have demon 
strated a plan view of an insulated section or 
block of railroad having the electro-magnetic 
signals arranged at each end of the block of 
road, and a battery-box, with opposing bat 
teries therein, and have indicated the course 
of the currents thereon. Referring thereto, 
the letter D designates the battery-box con 
taining a large battery, d, coupled for quan 
tity, and from the negative side of this battery, 
designated d", is carried a conducting-wire, d", 
which is connected with the track-wire d' at 
the other end of the section of track, as desig 
nated at d", and from this point is carried a 
wire, d, which is connected to one side of the 
electro-magnet d", which magnetis of the con 
struction and arrangement of parts or ele 
ments heretofore described. Connected to and 
leading from the other side of this electro 
magnet is a wire, d, which is carried along 
the track and connected to the signal-magnet 
d. From the other side of the signal-magnet 
d, leading from thence to the negative side of 
the battery E, located in the battery-box, is 
another wire, d". This battery E is of smaller 
quantity than the larger battery, d, and for 
the purpose hereinafter mentioned. A wire, 
e, is connected with the copper side of battery 
E, and from thence is extended to and con 
nects with the track-wiree', which is extended, 
as shown, and connected in turn at the other 
end to the positive side of the battery d, thus 
completing a circuit in which the two oppos 
ing batteries, being of relatively different 
powers or strength, act to hold the signals at 
safety when there is no train or other ob 
struction intervening to break the circuit on 
the section or block of road. This condition 
is accomplished by the influence of the large 
battery, d, which, being the stronger, acts with 
controlling force over the weaker current, and 
directs the circuit in the direction indicated by 
arrows, when not interrupted by a train passing 
over the section of track included within the 
circuit or other break in the line. When, how 
ever, a train enters on the block or track from 
either end, the main or stronger battery dwill 
be cut out or short-circuited' by the con 
nection made across the track through the 
wheels and axle of the car, as indicated by the 
crossing arrow in front of the dummy, and the 
smaller and weaker or opposing battery will, 
under this condition, be free to exert its influ 
ence in an opposite direction and throw a 
current in the course indicated by the spears 
across the track through the wheels and axle 
liable to be the most direct conductor in cir 
cuit, as indicated by the crossing spear at the 
rear of the dummy, the effect of the current so 
established being to reverse the polarity of 
the signal-magnets, and thus throw the signals 
to indicate danger. 
It will be perceived from the foregoing that 
I have produced an automatic system of sig 
nals, the movement of which to the respective 
positions of danger and safety 
is 
wholly due to electrical forces. The train or 
other interposed obstruction affecting the cur 
rent acts simply as a commutator or changer 
of the electric current from one direction to 
the other, and these intervening objects are 
the mediums which may be brought into oper 
ation in the entire circuit, through and by 
which the signals are actuated to assume or 
display the respective positions of safety ' 
and danger. 
As one of the elements of my system, I use 
the gravity-weight, as shown in the drawings, 
for bringing the signals to display danger' 
when the circuit is broken or diverted from 
the signal-magnets from any cause whatever. 
In this arrangement but one battery is abso 
lutely essential to supply the current through 
the circuit, the battery, as E, the smaller, being 
used, if desired, merely as an adjunct or aid 
to the gravity attachment. In this arrange 
ment, as in the arrangement of devices as here 
tofore described, the current holds the signals 
to safety,' that being the position of the 
signals when the batteries are on. As soon, 
therefore, as a train enters the block the bat 
tery will be cut out or short-circuited, and 
the operation of the weight brought into play, 
resulting in bringing the signals to display 
danger.' The construction and arrange 
ment of this appliance or gravity attachment 
has been described and stated hereinbefore; 
but it may here bestated that if the circuit is 
broken from any cause whatever a danger-sig 
nal will be displayed. In other words, the elec 
tric current holding the signals to safety 
is a matural and not an artificial one. When 
the battery is cut out or short-circuited, or 
if from any cause whatever the signal-mag 
nets fail to be energized, a natural law of phys 
ics comes into operation and brings the sig 
mals to display danger. 
I make no specific claim in this application 
to the armature shown and described herein, 
as the same will be made the subject of another 
application for Letters Patent. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
Secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with an electrical rail 
Way-signal apparatus, an electro-magnet and 
a shaft arranged parallel to the cores of the 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IO 
I O. 
I 25 
13O 
 
34,666 
; 
: 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
5 shaft to move on a plane parallel to the faces. 
magnet, an armature having independent sec-, necting the free poles of both batteries, said 35 
.tional wings of steel arranged with approach- batteries being of relative different powers, 
ing ends and rigidly connected by a non- substantially as described, and for the purpose . 
magnetic. bar, and adjustably mounted on said stated. 
4. In combination, a battery, a main con 
of the poles of the magnet, substantially as ducting-wire having positive connection with 4o 
described. 
the said battery and extending along the line of 
2. In combination with an electro-magnet, road and parallel thereto, an electro-magnet, 
a shaft mounted in bearings parallel to the an armature mounted thereon, a signal-disk 
ic, cores of the magnet and provided with an adapted to be moved by said armature, a cir 
angle-arm fixed thereto, an armature mounted cuit-wire connected to said electro-magnet and 45 
on said shaft and consisting of two circular extended parallel to the track, a signal-mag 
sections of steel rigidly connected together by a net in connection with said wire and carrying 
non-raagnetic bar with their ends to approach, an armature adapted to move a signal-disk, a 
15 and adapted to move toward and from the battery having negative connection with the 
... poles of the magnet on a plane parallel to the 
last-named signal magnet, and a gravity- 5o 
face of the poles of the magnet, a gravity-weight 
weight adapted to turn the signal-shaft, sub 
suspended from the angle-arm of the said shaft, 
stantially as and for the purpose stated. 
and having its suspending-cord carried in a 
5. The combination of au electrical signal 
20 rotating pulley, substantially as described, 
ing apparatus with two opposing batteries . 
. 
in the same circuit, of different powers, 55 
and for the purpose stated. 
3. In combination, a battery, a main con- whereby the signals are held in position 
ducting-wire having positive connection with of safety 'by the stronger battery, and the 
. the battery and extending along the line of road signal is reversed by the lesser battery when 
. . 
25 and parallel thereto, an electro-magnet, an arm- ! its current is applied, and the signal is re 
ature mounted thereon, a signal-disk adapt- turned to safety' when the stronger cur- 6o 
ed to be moved by said armature, a circuit- rent is restored, substantially as described. 
wire connected to said electro-magnet, and ex- 
tended parallel E. the track, a Stage presence of two witnesses. . 
: 3o in connection with said wire and carrying an 
armature mounted thereon, a signal-disk 
adapted to be moved by the armature, a bat. 
tery having negative connection with said last- 
named signal-magnet, and a circuit-wire con- 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
NTTAL 
WILLIAM w. LE GRANDE. 
. . 
- 
. 
Witnesses:... . 
L. A. BACHUS, 
Tos. NUEssLIN. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341766.txt	UNTTED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENlY OTTO, OF BLOOMINGTON, iLLINOIS. 
BO RNG = BA, 
SPFC}|tE"TCATTON forming part of Tetters Patent 1No. 34.1,766, dated May 11, 1886. 
Application filed IDecember 31, 1885. Serial No, 187,100. (No model.) 
1C) 
15 
Be it knoWn that, I, HENRY OTTO, of Bloom 
ington, in the county of [cIJean and State of 
Illinois, ha,we imwented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Boring-Bars, of Which im 
prowement the folloWing is a Specification. 
My invention relates to metal boring-barS 
for use in drill-preSSes, boring-mills, or latheS; 
and itS Object is to prowide effectiwe and de 
Sirable meanS for adjusting and maintaining 
tWo or more tools or cutterS im proper p0Si 
tion for required diameterS 0f bore, in Suth 
Imanner that the cutters may be readily cali 
pered to the diameter desired, and that tend 
ency to Sprimging of the bar may be aWoided 
and faster' feed admitted Of, 
To this end my invention, generally Stated, 
| comsists in the combination of a radially-Slot 
ted b0ring-bar, tWo or more cutters hawing 
Segmental bearing-faceS fitting against cor 
responding SeatS in the SlotS of the bar, and 
adjusting-nutS engaging threadS On the bar 
and bearing against the neckS Of the cutters. '' 
The improvement claimed is hereiuafter 
fully Set forth. 
25 
In the accompanying draWingS, IF'igure 1 iS 
 a-wjeW in elevation of a boring-bar embody 
ing my in wention, the cutterS being adjusted 
to the least diameter of bore; IF'ig. 2, a longi 
tudinal central Section through the Same With 
the cutterS adjusted to the greatest diameter 
of bore; IR'ig. 8, a tranSwerSe Section through 
the Saume at the line a? ? Of Fig. 2; IF'ig. 4, a | 
longitudinal centTal Section through a bar of 
Smaller diameter, in which the cutters abut on 
their inner faces; F'ig. 5, a wieW in perSpective 
of a cutter detached, and Fig. 6 a front wiew 
of the Same. 
In the practice of my imwention I form in the 
body of the b0ring-bar 1, a Series of radial SlotS 
or receSSes,2, each of Which is of proper Width 
to receive a boring-tool or cutter, 8. A Seg 
mental Seat Or bearing, 4, iS formed at each 
end of each of the SlotS 2, against Which Seats, 
which are cur wed from a common center, but 
with ' different radii, correspondingly-curwed 
bearing-faceS 5 on the bodies of the cutterS 8 
fit When the cutterS are inSerted in p0Sition in 
the slotS. R}|ach Gutter is thus maintained as 
against longitudinal mowement in itS Slot, 
While adapted to be SWung in Wardly or out 
~ 
35 
45 
5? 
Wardly about the center of its bearing-faceS 
and of the end bearingS, 4, of the slot. The 
neckS of the cutterS, which are inclined out 
Wardly at an angle to their bodies, paSS through 
radial receSSeS 6 in the bar in line With the 
SlotS 2, and are widemed at their outer ends to 
afford additional Stock at and adjacent to their 
Cutting-edges. The outWard and in Ward ad 
justmentS of the cutterS 8 for greater or leSS 
required diameterS of b0re are effected by in 
ner and Outer adjusting-mutS, 7 8, each of 
Which engages a ScreW-thread upon the bor 
ing-bar 1. The cutterS are mowed outWardly 
by the inner nut, 7, which bears by a curwed 
Surface around itS upper edge against the in 
mer Sides of the meckS of the cutters, and the 
cutters are mowed tm Wardly and maintained in 
adjusted position by the outer mut, 8, the lower 
p0rtion 0f Which incloses the bodies of the cut 
terS 8, and bearS by a cur wed Surface upon the 
outer Sides of their neckS. 
Im expanding the cutterS to increase the di 
ameter of bore the outer nut, 8, is first re 
leaSed, and the cutterS being Set out to the de 
Sired distance by the immer mut, 7, they are 
clamped firmly in Such p0Sition by the outer' 
mut, 8. 
In reducing the diameter of bore the inner 
| mut is first released and mowed, in I'ewerse di 
rection to that for expanding, to a p0sition 
proper to regulate the distance between the 
outer edgeS Of the Cutters, which are then 
claimped in pOSition, aS before, by the outer 
mut, 8. Either or both of the mutS may be 
groowed or prOwided With holeS On itS periph 
ery, SO aS tO be Operated by a hOSe Or pin 
Wrench, if desired. 
In boring-barS of $1mall diameterS hawing 
tWo cutters only, the SlotS Which receive the 
Same may be extended in Wardly to the axis of 
the bar, So aS to form a Single diametric paS 
Sage, the immer SideS of the bodies of the cut 
terS bearing in StLch caSe One against the 
other, aS ShoWm in Fig. 4. 
The boring-barS and adjusting-nutS are pref 
erably made in Steel castingS, the cutter-slots 
being formed therein by Smooth coreS. 
I claim aS my inWention and deSire tO Secure 
by I/etterS Patent-- 
1. The combination of a, boring-bar, a cut 
ter having a body journaled within a radial 
? 
? 
55 
65 
75 
95 
2 
341,766 
Slot or receSS in Said bar and a meck project 
ing therefrOm, an expanding-nut engaging a, 
SCreW-thread on the bar and adapted to bear 
against the inner Side of the neck of the cut 
5 ter, and a contracting and clamping mut em 
gaging a ScreW-thread on the bar adjacent t0 
the OppoSite end of the cutter, and adapted to 
bear against the outer Side of the neck there 
of, Substantially aS Set forth. 
rO 2. The combination of a boring-bar hawing 
a Series of radial SlotS pr0wided with Seg 
mental SeatS or bearingS at their ends, a Se 
ries of cutters, each inserted in one of Said 
SlotS, and hawing Segmental bearing-faceS fit 
ting againSt the SeatS there0f, and adjusting- [ 5 
mutS engaging ScreW-threadS Om the boring 
bar, and adapted to fit against the inner and 
the outer SideS of the cutters, respectively, 
Substantially aS Set forth. 
~ 
HE}NERY OTTO. 
WitneSSeS: 
~ 
WILLIAMr B. CARTOCK, 
CHARLES R'RIGICSE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341866.txt	(No Model.) 
J. R. ALLGIRE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MACHINE FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF WENEER BARRELS. 
No. 341,866. 
Patented May 18, 1886. 
N 
o: 
4-2. ofeeval 
 
 
(No Model.) 
J. R. ALL GIRE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF WENEER BARRELS, 
No. 34.866. 
Patented May 18, 1886. 
Zzzwazzzz7z. 
a-7%. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JAMES R. ALLGIRE, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS 
AND MARSHALL. D. WILLIAMSON, BOTH OF SAME 
TO GEORGE. F. ADAMS 
PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF VENEER BARRELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 341,866, dated May 18, 1886. 
Application filed January 9, 1886. Serial No. 188,116. (No model.) 
- 
To coll, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES R. ALLGIRE, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Indianapolis, in the county of Marion and 
5 State of Indiana, have invented certain new 
and useful I, provements in the Manufacture 
of Veneer Barrels, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to machines for the 
IC manufacture of veneer barrels; and it consists, 
generally, in certain mechanism, comprising 
endless bands and guide-rolls, for bending the 
veneers constituting the body of the barrel, 
together with the binding strips or hoops, 
15 around a collapsible cylinder of peculiar and 
novel construction, all as fully set forth here 
inafter, so as to firmly compress together and 
Secure immovably in contact while and after 
bending to a cylindrical form layers of veneer 
2O having the grain running in the same direc 
tion. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a barrel-machine, showing 
my improvements. Fig. 2 is a plan view. Fig. 
258 is a sectional elevation. Fig. 4 is an end 
elevation. Fig. 5 is a transverse section of the 
collapsible cylinder. Fig. 6 is a section on the 
line l. 2, Fig. 5, looking in the direction of the 
arrow; Fig. 7, a longitudinal section of the 
3o barrel-body; Fig. 8, an external view of the 
barrel-body. 
The barrel which is to be made by the ma 
chine consists of two layers of veneer bound 
together by hoops, preferably of wood, the 
35 inner layer, a, being narrower than the outer 
layer, b, so as to form at each end an edge or 
bearing, ac, for the head, which is held in place 
by a narrow band or hoop, c. The grain of 
the wood in both sheets of veneer runs length 
4o Wise of the barrel, thereby avoiding the un 
equal expansion of the inner and outer layers 
which results when the grain in one is at an 
angle to the grain in the other. 
It has heretofore been found difficult to 
45 manufacture barrels of two sheets with the 
grain running in the same direction, from the 
fact that it is impossible to so dry or season 
the veneers that they can be made to lie closely 
together without a great expense in the dry 
5O ing process and in the operation of fitting. 
- 
 
My improved machine so securely holds the 
parts together under pressure while rapidly 
bending and securing them that veneers dried 
in the ordinary manner may be used without 
difficulty, whatever may be the position in 
which the two plates are placed in respect to 
each other. 
The frame of the machine consists of side 
pieces, AA, connected by suitable cross-bars, 
B, and supports at the forward end a platform, 
P, and near the center a spindle, d, around 
which turns a collapsible cylinder, C. This 
cylinder may be constructed in any suitable 
manner, so as to be readily held in its ex 
panded position while the body of the barrel 
is being bent around it, and then readily con 
tracted to permit the said body to be slipped . 
off prior to the formation of another barrel 
body. One mode of constructing the cylinder 
to effect this result is illustrated in Figs. 5 and 
6, in which frepresents a plate bent to a cy 
lindrical form, with the ends in contact, the 
portion opposite the ends being riveted to arms 
g, secured to the spindled. At the inner side 
of the plate, near the contiguous edges, are 
riveted short strips forming ears e e, between 
which slides a bar, E, provided with two 
wedge-shaped portions, i i, which, when the 
bar is pushed in the direction of the arrow, 
Fig. 6, will enter between the ears and sepa 
rate them, so as to spread apart the edges of 
the plate, and thereby increase the diameter of 
the cylinder, in which state it is used for bend 
ing the barrel-body; and when the body is to 
be removed the bar is drawn out in the oppo 
site direction, when the edges of the plate will 
come together, diminishing the diameter of 
the plate, as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 5, 
and permit the barrel to be withdrawn. Par 
allel and adjacent to the cylinder C, in suitable 
bearings, turn the guide-rolls 1234, the guide 
rolls 2 3 4 revolving in fixed bearings, and 
the journals of the guide-roll i. projecting 
through angular slots y in the side frames and 
turning in the ends of links jj, jointed to the 
links lik, the rear ends of the latter being hung 
to pivots or pins l, projecting from the side 
frames. Upon a cross-bar, n, extending be 
tween the joints of the linksik, bears a lever, 
F, carrying a weight, W, the action of which loo 
85 
90 
95 
75 
2 
34,866 
o 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IIO 
I IS 
inder, round which they are bent as the han 
tends normally to throw the roller 1 forward 
to the position shown in full lines, Fig. 3, the 
dle I is turned in the direction of its arrow, 
lifting of the lever permitting the parts to 
Fig. 1. As the parts are secured together at 
their inner ends, they will not be displaced 
assume the position shown in dotted lines in 
from their relative positions in the act of bend 
said figure. Around the rollers 1, 2, 3, and 
ing, and as they are free to move one upon 
4 pass a number of endless bands, n, each of 
the other throughout all their remaining por 
which also passes partiy round the cylinder C, 
tions, any excess of material resulting from 
as best shown in Fig. 3, and to a bar, o, at the 
the flattening and compressing of the parts to 
rear of the roller 1 are secured a number of 
guides, p, which prevent any lateral displace 
gether will be worked toward the free ends of 
the parts until the two ends are brought in 
ment of the various bands, the number of 
contact upon the cylinder, and the ends of the 
which corresponds to the number of hoops 
hoop bands or strips are folded down upon 
with which the barrel is to be provided. 
the parts on the body of the cylinder, where 
Against the face of the cylinder C bear a num 
ber of spring-blades, G, each of which occupies 
they are nailed, as shown in Fig. S. The 
pressure of the bands upon the veneers is SO 
a position between two of the bands in n, and 
regulated by adjustment of the weight W as 
extends below a rod, 5, and is secured at the 
outer end to a pendent adjusting-screw link, 
to flatten the inequalities or wrinkles and 
bring both layers closely together at all points, 
6, Supported by and beneath the end of the 
platform P. By the adjustable connection be 
and as the hoop-strips are nailed while the 
parts are held under compression, both by the 
tween the outer end of each spring-blade and 
its supporting-link, the pressure of the inner 
bands in and the spring-plates G, the parts will 
be retained in close contact throughout all 
end of the blade upon the cylinder C can be 
easily regulated. The bands in are of such 
their surfaces after the removal of the body 
length that they will be caused to bear with 
from the cylinder. This removal is effected 
by contracting the cylinder by sliding inward 
great pressure upon the surface of the cylin 
the bar E, as before described, after which 
der when the roller I is carried toward the 
the newly-formed body of the barrel may be 
position shown in full lines, Fig. 3, the weight 
W depressing the lever F, causing it to bear 
slipped off the end of the cylinder through an 
upon the cross-bar m, and thereby forcing 
opening, v, in the side frame, A, after which 
forward the roller, so as to maintain a very 
another body may be bent, formed, and the 
parts fastened together, as before described. 
considerable tension upon the bands. A bar, 
H, is pivoted between ears g g upon the side 
It will be evident that the mode of manu 
facturing veneer barrels above set forth may 
frame, A', and is maintained in a horizontal 
position by a spring-catch, r, secured to the 
be embodied in machines constructed differ 
frame A, and the bar has at the under side a 
ently from that described, that different modes 
of making a collapsible cylinder may be em 
number of notches, s, corresponding in width 
and position to the hoops which are to be 
ployed, the cylinder, for instance, being formed 
placed upon the body of the barrel. To the 
of parallel slats arranged upon bands or rings 
journal of the roller 4 is secured a sprocket. . 
capable of being expanded or contracted. 
Wheel, K, round which a chain, L, passes to 
The bands n may be belts, chains, or thongs 
a sprocket-wheel, M, on the journal of the 
of leather, metal, rubber, or other suitable ma 
terial, and the bearings of the rolleri may be 
roller 3, and a crank-handle, I, is also secured 
to the journal of one of the rollers. 
adjusted by means of screws, instead of by a 
In order to make the body of the barrel, the 
weighted lever and toggles. I prefer the lat 
sheet C of veneer, that is to constitute the in 
ter, however, as it enables the parts to accom 
ner layer, is first placed upon the platform P, 
modate themselves to the work to be per 
and the sheet b, that is to constitute the outer 
formed. 
layer of the barrel-body, is placed upon the 
I do not herein claim the process set forth 
sheet a, but so much farther to the right that 
of manufacturing veneer barrels, as that will 
form the subject-matter of a separate appli 
Some Six or eight inches of the lower sheet 
will be uncovered at the end nearest the bar 
cation for Letters Patent. 
H. Upon the upper sheet, b, are placed the 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
strips t, of thin wood or metal, which are to 
struction and arrangement of parts shown, I 
constitute the hoops of the barrel, the said 
claim -- 
strips being longer than the veneers, and be. 
1. The combination, in a barrel-making ma 
ing placed so far to the right that their inner 
chine, of a collapsible cylinder, guide-rolls. 
ends will be six or eight inches away from the 
arranged adjacent to the cylinder and parallel 
inner edge of the upper sheet, b, each hoop 
to the same, and endless bands passing round 
Strip heing opposite one of the notches or open 
said rolls and partially around the cylinder, 
ings S in the bar H. Nails at are now driven 
substantially as Set forth. 
through the inner ends of the hoop-strips and 
2. The combination, in a barrel-makingma 
through both layers of veneer, so that all the 
chine, of the collapsible cylinder, guide-rolls 
parts are firmly secured together at their in 
arranged adjacent and parallel to the cylin 
ner ends, after which they are pushed inward 
der, endless bands passing round said rolls 
until they are caught between the bands pass 
and partially around the cylinder, and ad 
ing round the roller 1 and the face of the cyl- justing devices, substantially as described, 
O 
25 
45 
50 
65 
341,866 
3 
I5 the purpose described. 
for moving one of the rolls to tighten the 
bands upon the cylinder, as set forth. 
3. The combination of the collapsible cylin 
del', guide-rolls, toggle-links connected to the 
5 journals of one of the rolls, and the weighted 
lever bearing upon said links, and endless 
bands passing round the rolls and partially 
round the cylinder, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, in a barrel-making nia 
Io chine, of the cylinder, rolls arranged adjacent 
and parallel to the same, a series of endless 
bands passing round said rolls and partially 
around the cylinder, and guides p, extending 
between said bands, substantially as and for 
5. The combination, in a barrel-making ma 
chine, of the cylinder, rolls adjacent and par 
allel to the same, bands passing round said 
rolls and partially around the cylinder, spring 
plates G, placed between the bands and bear 
ing at their inner end upon the cylinder, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, in a barrel-making ma 
chine, of the cylinder, rolls adjacent and par 
25 allel to the same, a series of endless bands 
passing round the cylinder and rolls, as de 
scribed, guides p, and spring-plates G, ex 
tending between the bands and bearing at 
their inner ends upon the cylinder, and means, 
3o substantially as set forth, for regulating the 
S. The combination, with the side frames of 4O 
pressure of the spring-plates upon said cylin 
der, as and for the purpose described. 
7. The combination, in a barrel-making ma" 
chine, of the cylinder, rolls adjacent and par 
allel to the same, a series of endless bands ar- 35 
ranged as set forth, platform P, and a guide 
bar immediately above the platform and hav 
ing recessess, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
a barrel-making machine, connected substan 
tially as shown, of a collapsible cylinder Sup 
ported on bearings between said frames, as de 
scribed, and one of said frames having an 
opening or recess, , opposite one end of said 45 
cylinder, as and for the purpose set forth. 
9. The combination, with a barrel-making 
machine, of a collapsible cylinder consisting 
of a bent plate provided at its ends with ears 
e, and a sliding bar having Wedge - shaped 5O 
portions extending between the ears, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
JAMES R. ALLGIRE, 
Witnesses: 
AUSTIN B. PRATHER, 
LESIEE. C. FERREE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US341966.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 341,966, 
 
J. S. THORN & C. LEFFLER 
METATIC ROOFING, TITLE 
Patented May 18, 1886. 
W 
y 
y : 
-Ay, e. 
g 
A. 
w 
? 
y 
/ 
y 
Zz vertfors. 
7%z &zetate %-42e 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT 
 
JACOB S. THORN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PA., AND CHARLES LEFFLER, OF 
BROOKLYN, N. Y.; SAID LEFFLER ASSIGNOR TO SAID THORN. 
WETA. C. RO OFING-TE. 
C3IPEGi FICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 341,966, dated IMay 18, 1886. 
Application filed February 1S, 1886. Serial No. 192,396. (No model.) 
65 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JACOB S. THORN and 
CHARLES LEFFIER, citizens of the United 
States, residing, respectively, at Philadelphia, 
and Brooklyn, counties of Philadelphia, and 
Kings, and States of Pennsylvania and New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Metallic Roofing-Tiles, fully 
described and represented in the following 
Specification, and the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of the same. 
The invention relates to an improved com 
bination and arrangement, in a single dia. 
mond-sliaped metallic plate, of certain fea 
tures adapted to secure improved results when 
the tiles are properly joined together and se 
cured upon a roof, and the improvements con 
sist, partly, in the combination, in a tile hav 
ing diamond-shaped point and having taper 
ing flanges projected inward from the edges 
of Such point, of a rib extended downward 
from the side of the tile toward the point a 
short distance, and a rib connected there 
With and extended upward from the edges of 
the tile toward the middle, parallel with the 
opposed edges of the point, and partly in the 
combination, with a tile having such flanged 
point and such ribs, of a curved longitudinal 
lib extended upward from the point and op 
erating to stiffen the latter and to hold it down 
upon the roof. 
The invention is shown herein as applied to 
a diamond-shaped plate having a point at each 
of its upper and lower ends and opposite 
sides, but it will be seen that the improve 
ments are applicable to a perfectly square 
plate or others of similar form, if applied to 
the roof with one point downward, substan 
tially as described herein. 
We are aware that certain features of our 
invention have been heretofore used in other 
combinations, but the particular arrangements 
of the elements which we employ modifies 
their effect and secures a new result. 
Our invention will be understood by refer 
ence to the annexed drawings, in which Fig 
ure 1 is a plan of one tile. Fig. 2 is an edge 
view of the same lying upon a roof-board. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the same with 
perspective view of the same with the longi 
tudinal rib. 
Fig. 5 is a section across the 
point of the tile on line a' a' in Fig. 1, and Fig. 
6 represents the lower corner of a roof hav 
ing five tiers of tiles laid thereon. 
n is the point or lower end of the tile; n., the 55 
upper corner upon the head of the tile, and 
in the side corners of the tile. A flange is 
formed along the edges of the point, being 
bent inward to rest upon the roof-board (), and 
tapered gradually from its middle a to the 
point b below the side n, where a rib, c, is 
formed upon the edge of the tile and extend 
ed upward to the side corners, n. A rib, d, 
is shown formed in the tile-plate continuous 
with the lower end of the rib c, and extended 
upwardly and inwardly nearly to the middle 
line of the tile, parallel with the opposed 
lower edge of the flanges (, b, the upper ends 
of the ribs d being separated by a space, d, 
to admit the point of the overlapping tile. 
The flanges a, b are applied over the ribs ed 
when the tiles are laid, as shown in Fig. 6, 
with the point in applied in the blank space 
d", and all that part f of the tile above the ribs 
is therefore covered, and may be used as a 
nailing-flange, and be provided with holes f", 
if desired. Such nailing-flange is made flat 
to fit the roof-boards, but the point of the tile 
plate is raised above the boards by the flanges 
a b, and is united to such flat portion by curv 
ing the plate from the point in upward to the 
ribs d, as is shown in Fig. 2. 
As the flanges along the sides of the point 
terminate at the junction of the ribs cd, it is 
obvious that the tile-plate would have no stiff 
ness longitudinally without an additional 
brace, which is provided by forming a longi 
tudinal rib, e, upon the Outer side upon the 
middle line. Such rib is curved to correspond 
with the concave form of the plate, as shown 
in Figs. 2 and 4, and operates as well to im 
part an ornamental appearance to the tile as 
to hold the point of the flanges at a firmly 
downward over the ribs cd, to form a weather 
tight joint. 
The flanges a, b, formed upon the point of 
the tile, also serve to render the points promi 
ment when the tiles are laid upon the roof, and 
Fig. 4 is a thus present the effect of considerable thick 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
- 
So out the longitudinal central rib. 
Tc 
25 
35 
45 
'. 
 
34,966 
5 
IO 
25 
55 . 
- 
both. 
ness in the tile, and produceaeontrast of light 
and shade resulting in a highly - ornamental 
appearance. 
It will be noticed by inspecting the upper 
tier of tiles laid upon the roof in Fig. 6 that 
the angles c' of the ribs a d form a V-shaped 
rib, c, and are laid over one another upon the 
points in of the preceding tier before the flanged 
points of the succeeding tier are applied there 
to. The tiles are thus guided accurately to the 
desired position, and a double security against 
the weather is effected by the junction of two 
sets of ribs, c. d, and the projection afforded by 
the flanges a b, which wholly inclose them 
The curved rib e is not absolutely essential 
to the operation of our invention, and one form 
of the tile is therefore shown without it in 
Fig. 3. 
We are aware that a flange bent inward 
upon the lower edge of a diamond-shaped tile 
is not entirely new, and that ribs formed along 
the upper edges of such a tile have been also 
used to engage with such flanges, and we do 
not therefore claim the same, broadly; but, hav 
ing fully set forth the particular functions of 
each part of our construction and shown the 
manner in which they co-operate, we have 
claimed only our particular improvements. 
The small number of elements embodied in 
our tile to make a good weather-proof joint 
when they are secured together, renders the 
same much more easy of application than if 
provided with any kind of lock joints or re 
quiring any special means for securing the 
same to the roof. Our tile may therefore be 
properly laid upon the roof by an unskilled 
person, and when thus laid those constructive 
features which constitute the weather-joint are 
entirely concealed, with the exception of the 
flange at b, thus avoiding any external appear 
ance of the mechanical construction. 
The flanges (t ) being tapered from the point 
of one tile gradually upward to the point of 
the tile above it, suggests an architectural fea 
ture rather than a constructive element, and 
imparts a purely architectural effect in the 
aggregate. 
The only constructive feature not involved 
in the formation of the weather joint is the 
stiffening-ribe, which, so far from defacing 
the surface of the tile or impairing its archi 
tectural effect renders, the latter still more 
novel and pleasing. 
The use of the short ribs c is not abso 
lutely essential to our invention, and we have 
therefore claimed the same with and without 
such ribs; but, when used, the V shape fur 
nishes a form of joint for the succeeding mem. 
bers of each tier, which greatly assists an un 
skilled operator in properly placing the tiles 
(as is evident from inspection of Fig. 6) and 
also completely intercepts any passage of wind 
or water at such V-shaped joint. 
As the point of the V-rib extends down 
ward, its sloping sides, c. d, direct the wind 
and water that may penetrate the flange a 
sidewise toward the middle of the tiles, and 
thus prevent its penetrating between the edges 
of the same. 
We have not claimed herein the combina 
tion in a tile of a flat head and a curved body, 
as we have claimed the same generically in an 
application copending herewith. 
What we claim herein is 
1. The combination, with a tile having dia 
mond-shaped point, of the flange projected 
inward from the edges of such point, the flange 
being of greatest depth at the point (, of the 
tile and tapered to nothing at the upper edge, 
b, of the exposed surface, and the ribsd, formed 
upon the head of the tile parallel with its op 
posed lower edges and extending to the same, 
and the space d between the upper ends of 
the ribs, the parts being constructed and ar 
ranged substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
2. The combination, with a tilehaving dia 
mond-shaped point, of the flange projected in 
ward from the edges of such point, the flange 
being of greatest depth at the point at of the 
tile and tapered toward its sides, the rib c 
extended downward from each side of the tile 
along the same inclined edges as the flanges 
a band rib d, continuous with the rib c at its 
lower end and inclined upward toward the 
center of the tile parallel with the opposite 
exposed edge of the same, the flange at the in 
clined sides of the point a being adapted to 
embrace and cover the ribs c and d, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with a tile having dia 
mond-shaped head and point, of the flange 
projected inward from the edges of such point, 
the flange being of greatest depth at the point 
a of the tile and tapered toward its sides, the 
outer surface of the tile being flat where it is 
secured to the roof and of concave form where 
it is exposed, the ribs c and d continuous with 
one another and forming a V upon the flat 
part of the tile, as described, and having the 
nailing-surface f between the ribs d and the 
inclined edges at the head of the tile, the said 
parts being constructed and arranged sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with a tile having dia 
mond-shaped point, of the flange projected in 
ward from the edges of Such point, the flange 
being of greatest depth at the point at of the 
tile and tapered toward its sides, and the out 
er surface of the tile being of concave form 
and provided with the ribs c and d, connected 
together and arranged as described, and with 
the central curved rib, e, as and for the pur 
pose Set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
JACOB S. THORN. 
CHARLES LEFFLER. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. L. HART, 
THOS. S. CRANE. 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
125 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342066.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN P. COMINS, OF ELIZABETH, NEW JERSEY. 
RON COATED FRE- BRCK. 
SFEC5:ICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 342,066, dated May 18, 1886. 
Application filed January 28, 1886. Serial No. 190,133. (Specimens.) 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
by change it to metallic iron, so that the said 
Be it known that I, JoHN P. CoMINs, of 
surface of the bricks will receive a coating of 
Elizabeth, in the county of Union and State of 
iron, which will enter the pores of the said 
New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
surfaces, and thus be permanently connected 
useful Improvements in Iron - Coated Fire 
with the said surfaces. When bricks thus 
Bricks, of which the following is a full, clear, 
coated with iron are exposed to coal-fires in 
and exact description. 
the fire-chambers of stoves, ranges, furnaces, 
The object of this invention is to provide, 
and other fire-places, clinkers will not adhere 
and consists in, fire-bricks coated with iron to 
to them, and the fire-bricks will thus be much 
prevent the adhesion of clinkers to the surface more durable and much more effective in pro 
of the said bricks when in use. 
tecting the walls of such fire-chambers from 
the heat than ordinary fire-bricks. 
I will describe a convenient and effective 
method of coating fire-bricks with iron, but do 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
not limit myself to the said method, as the 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
same result may be obtained in various other 
Patent, is- 
- 
ways. The fire-bricks, after being burned in 
As a new article of manufacture, fire-bricks 
the ordinary manner, are painted or covered 
coated with iron, substantially as set forth. 
upon the surfaces to be exposed to the fire 
JOHN P. COMINS. 
with the oxide of iron, preferably, with Prince's 
metallic paint, and are then subjected in a 
kiln or suitable furnace to such a degree of 
heat as will melt the oxide of iron, and there 
JAMES T. GRAHAM, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342166.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 342,166, 
W. H. BANE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
SCREENING OR BOLTING MACHINE. 
Patented May 18, 1886. 
Silsils 
eye 
5 
2O 
Q 
S 
O 
N 
mom 
---. 
N 
ww.m. 
C 
a 
Q 
s 
Inventor : 
wizal. 
/2 46- Attorney : 
4% 5.1% 
Witnesses: 
lovial (duk 
(22% 
s N S S S 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 342,166. 
W. H. BANE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
SCREENING OR BOLTING MACHINE, 
Patented May 18, 1886. 
. 
Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washing" 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM HENRY BANE, OF GALLIPOLIS, OHIO. 
SCREENING OR BOLTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 342,166, dated May 18, 1886. 
Application filed December 18, 1885. Serial No. 186,071. (No model.) 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM HENRY BANE, material. 
To att, whom it may concern: 
of rubber, leather, chains, or similar flexible 
Three-sided castings, P, are ad 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Gal-justably connected to the corner-posts by set 
lipolis, in the county of Gallia and State of 
screws p. Each of the castings is provided 55 
with a staple or keeper, b. The castings on 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Screening or Bolting Ma 
a pair of diagonally-arranged posts have each 
a pulley, c, vertically journaled in its keeper 
chines; and I do declare the following to be a 
b, over which passes a cord or rope, R., having 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
its ends attached to diagonally-opposite cor- 6o 
tion, Such as Will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
ners of the screen, said cord being in connec 
tion with and operated by the wrist-ping on 
Same, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters and figures of ref. 
the crank-arm of the cone-shaft. Elastic Con 
erence marked theron, which form a part of 
nections, Q, secured at one end to the other 
this specification. 
diagonally-opposite corner of the screen have 65 
the remaining ends adjustably connected with 
My invention relates to screening or bolt 
the castings on the second pair of diagonally 
ing machines. 
opposite posts, substantially in the manner 
It consists in the details of construction 
shown, the form preferred being shown in 
shown and more fully hereinafter set forth and 
Fig. 4, in which the end of the elastic con- 7o 
claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure i is a perspective 
nection is adjustably secured between the cast 
ing and a wedge, f', inserted beneath the keep 
view of a machine constructed according to 
my invention, parts being broken away to 
er b. The elastic connections Q may be rub 
ber or coil-spring, as desired. 
better show the structure. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view with the top and grinding-mill and gear 
imparted to the cone the crank on the end of 
ing removed, showing modifications in details 
its shaft will alternately pull and slacken that 
of construction. Fig. 3 is a detail section of 
portion of the cord extending in opposite di 
the lower end of the cone-shaft, showing the 
Wrist - pin adjustably connected there with. 
rections on each side thereof in such manner 
as to cause a side-to-side and up-and-down 
Fig. 4 is a detail perspective view of the cast 
ings on an enlarged scale. 
motion of the screen. The cord pulls against 
The frame of the machine comprises posts 
the elastic connections Q, and, when slackened, 
the tension of said connections gives the nec 
A, upper and lower side and end bars, B and 
essary backward pull to return the screen to 
C, respectively, and the table D. A mill of 
its normal position. That portion of the rope 
the cone and shell type is Supported on one 
to the right of the crank may be dispensed 
end of the table in the usual manner, and 
with and its place filled by a bell-crank lever, 
driven by a train of gearing, the shafts of which 
S, and connections R's, as shown in Fig. 2. 
project to afford a means for the application 
An upwardly-curved guard, T, is attached to 
of a lever, I, having a socket casting, i, to fit 
each side of the screen, to prevent the ground 
the ends of the several shaftsg, L, and n, pro 
material from dropping to the ground. Simi 
vided with the intermeshing gearing J, K, l, 
and N, respectively, whereby power or speed 
lar guards, U, are attached to side bars, at, 
and cause all the material falling from the 
may be had, as occasion may require. 
screen to drop into a drawer or box, V, placed 
The shell E, hopper F, cone G, and the cone 
beneath the screen for the reception of such 95 
bearing supporte are of well-known construc 
tion, and are shown to illustrate the applica 
material. 
A hopper, v, near the front end of the ma 
tion of my improvements. Shaft g may be an 
chine, communicating with the lower portion 
integral part of or separate and keyed to the 
of the shell, is designed to supply Small grain 
cone. Its lower end is provided with a crank 
arm, g, having a wrist-pin, g, adjustably con 
when it is desired to make oat-meal grits, loo 
nected therewith. A shaking-screen, O, is 
cracked wheat, &c. 
suspended beneath the table D by hangers o, 
The operation is manifest. Motion being 75 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
90 
- 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
342,166 
5 lar screen, flexible supports therefor, castings presence of two witnesses. 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, nally-opposite corners of the screen, and keep 
ers on the adjacent castings for guiding said 
is- 
In a bolting machine, the combination of a screen, substantially as shown and described. 
rectangular frame, a crank-shaft, a rectangu- 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
adjustably connected with the four corner- 
posts of the frame, adjustable elastic connec- 
tions between the screen and the castings on 
two diagonally - opposite posts, connections 
IO uniting the crank-shaft with the other diago- 
F. F. THORNILEY, 
A. S. ROUDANNOUR. 
WILLIAMI HENRY BANE. 
RW RAN 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342266.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 342,266. 
J. T. RICH, 
BUTTON. 
Patented May 18, 1886. 
 
a 4 
41 F is, 3. 
3. 
IG, a 
gara 
/ 
M 
3. 
f: f is 7. 
W in Es SES. 
s 
N \v ENTIFR, 
4.2% 
- 
1244. 
Josia A. \\\\ 
%-44:r % 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPH. T. RICH, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
BUTTON 
3?f:CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent Nc. 342,266, dated May 18, 1886. 
Application filed March 11, 1886. 
Serial No. 194,792. (No model.) 
6o 
with relation to each other, or integral, the 
To all, Luhon, it indif concert, 
button 1 and shoe 3 standing parallel with 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH. T. RICH, a citi 
each other, the post 2 being at right angles to 55 
Zen of the United States, residing at Provi 
dence, in the county of Providence and State 
said button and shoe, as shown in Fig. 7, the 
shoe 3 being secured to the post 2, with the 
of Rhode Island, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Buttons; and I 
corners of the squares of the post at right an 
gles to the length of the shoe, as shown in dot 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
ted lines in Fig. S. 
The spring-shank 4 is made from a continu 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
ous strip of spring metal, bent and formed, 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref. 
substantially as shown in the drawings, by 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
striking up and forming two angular indenta 
ings, and to the letters and figures of refer 
tions, 55, located crosswise of the strip, and 65 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
then bending and doubling said strip at the 
this specification. 
center of its length, bringing the two indenta 
This invention relates to a new and useful 
improvement in buttons designed for securing 
tions 55 directly opposite each other, the re 
maining portion of the strip lying parallel 
portions of apparel together; and it consists, 
and adjacent to each other, as fully shown in 70 
essentially, of a button provided with a square 
post fixed at right angles to the button, and 
Fig. 6. The indentations 55 are made at an 
angle of about forty-five degrees, so that when 
an elongated shoe secured to the opposite end 
the strip is bent, as described, the indentations 
of the post parallel with the button, said but 
will correspond with the square of the post 2, 
ton, post, and shoe being integral, the button 
The spring-shank 4 is then placed in position 75 
being further provided with a spring-shank 
on the post 2, between the button 1 and the 
adapted to rotate on the post of the button, 
said shank being provided with angular in 
shoe 3, the post 2 resting in the indentations 
55, as fully shown in Fig. 1. The button is 
dentations corresponding to the squares of the 
post, and adapted to coact with said squares 
then ready for use. 
to retain the Shank in the button-holes of a 
improved button the shank 4 is rotated on the 
garment in a transverse direction to the shoe 
post 2, bringing the shank in line with the 
of the button, to Secure two portions of said 
garment together, all substantially as will be 
shoe 3, as shown in Fig. 2, the shank being 
hereinafter more fully described. 
shown in dotted lines. The shoe and shank 
are then passed through the button-holes in 85 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
each part of the garment until the shoe pro 
button complete. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a side view of the button, cor-jects below the inner surface of the garment. 
responding to its position as in use. Fig. 4 
The button is then turned, bringing the shoe 
3 quartering with the shank 4, which is pre 
is a top view of the same. Fig. 5 is a hori 
vented from turning by the button-holes of 90 
Zontal sectional view on line as a of Fig. 1. 
the garment, in which position the shank is 
Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the spring 
retained by the pressure of the spring of the 
shank detached. Fig. 7 is a side view of the 
metal, the squares of the post coacting with 
button having the spring - shank removed. 
Fig. 8 is a plan view of the same. 
the angles of the indentations, the button as 
suming the position as shown in Figs. 3 and 95 
In the drawings, 1 represents the button, 2 
4 of the drawings. The free ends of the strip 
the post, 3 the shoe, and 4 the spring-shank. 
In carrying out my improvement one end 
of metal comprising the spring-shank 4 may 
be connected together, if desired, after being 
of the post 2, which is square in form, as 
placed in position on the post of the button. 
shown in cross-section in Fig. 5, is secured to 
I am thus enabled to produce a button with IOO 
the under surface of the button 1 at its center, 
the opposite end of said post being provided 
which two parts of a garment may be secured 
with the shoe 3, which is elongated in form, 
together in the quickest and most secure man 
the outer portion being preferably oval, the 
ner. There being practically but two parts 
button, post, and shoe being permanently fixed 
to the button renders it impossible to get out 
In securing two parts of a garment with my 8o 
3O 
35 
45 
2 
342,266 
of order. The angles of the post coacting 
with the angles of the indentations in the 
spring-shank firmly retains said shank in po 
sition in the garment, with no liability of be 
coming easily detached by accident, and a 
strong and reliable button is thus produced at 
a nominal cost. 
Having described my invention, claim 
1. A button comprising a Square post and 
an eiongated shoe formed integral with said 
button, and a bifurcated spring-shank pro 
vided with indentations, said shank adapted 
to rotate laterally upon said post between the 
button and the shoe, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. The button herein described, comprising 
the button 1, having Square post 2 and elon 
gated shoe 3, formed integral with each other, 
--- 
O 
and the spring-shank 4, provided with angular 
indentations 5 5, combined, arranged, and 
adapted for use substantially as specified. 
3. In a button for securing parts of a gar 
ment together, a bifurcated Spring-metal shank 
provided with indentations on opposite sides 
thereof, said shank adapted to rotate laterally 
upon a square post between the button and 
an elongated shoe, said button, post, and shoe 
being integral, arranged for use substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
25 
JOSEPH. T. RCH. 
Witnesses: 
- 
F. A. SMITH, Jr., 
CHARLES GREENE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342366.txt	(No Model.) 
No.342,366, 
  
m 
J. L. L. KNOX. 
METHOD OF BLASTING ROCKs, 
Patented May 25, 1886. 
Hills shall, , 
S. Slith', %, 
a 
 
-- s' re a was . 
T ultil, larly it. 
. 
. C-----------. 
I 
. . . 
. 
far if it, , , i." 
t 
*Ssssssss 
9th 2c2a2- 
% 66%- 
-Sirensor. 
2.f4? 
ze/ 
N.EERs, photo-lthographer, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN L. L. KNOX, OF ALLEGHENY, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
KNOX ROCK BLASTING COMPANY. 
METHOD OF BLASTING ROCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 342,366, dated May 25, 1886. 
Application filed November 24, 1885. 
Serial No. 183,884. (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN L. L. KNOX, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Allegheny, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Methods of 
Blasting Rock, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates more particularly to 
a method of blasting designed to be practiced 
in the opening of quarries having certain pe 
culiar characteristics. 
The object of the invention is to form open 
ends in quarries having any one of the follow 
ing characteristics: First, where there is a 
solid ledge of rock extending indefinitely in 
two directions from the spot to be opened; 
second, where the aforesaid ledge is of too 
great depth to be worked in a single bench, 
and is massive or without open lines of strati 
fication; third, where in either of the above 
cases it is necessary that the vertical cuts shall 
not extend beyond the outlines of the block 
detached; fourth, where there is a hang' of 
rock extending indefinitely in two directions. 
The invention consists in blasting the rock 
in predetermined straight lines, and in charg 
ing with reference to the character of the 
rock, in such manner as to take advantage of 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a solid 
ledge of rock having indefinite longitudinal 
extension and not too great depth to be 
worked in a single bench; Fig. 2, a like ledge 
of massive rock having too great depth to be 
worked in a single bench; Fig. 3, a ledge simi 
lar to the last, but with the blast arranged to 
open the rock without extending the vertical 
cuts beyond the outlines of the block to be 
removed. Fig. 4 represents a hang of rock. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts throughout the different views. 
In the opening of quarries having any of 
the before - mentioned characteristics one of 
two courses is now pursued-viz., either the 
rock is channeled with a channeling-machine 
and the ends thus formed worked from, or a 
blast-hole is sunk to a considerable depth, a 
large amount of powder placed therein, and 
5o the charge tamped and fired. In the first case 
3o its elasticity. 
45 
the work is slow, costly machinery is required, 
and a large number of laborers necessary. In 
the second case an irregular hole results, an 
immense amount of stone is rendered worth 
less, and the surrounding rock is damaged by 55 
rents to a greater or less extent. By my method 
the expense of the blast is less than in either 
case, the rock is split into rectangular-sided 
blocks from the beginning, and absolutely no 
waste incurred, the time required for opening Co 
the quarry greatly lessened, and all the labor 
necessary performed by three men. 
In the practice of my invention I form the 
blast-holes first in the ordinary manner. I then 
ream out oppositely - located longitudinal 65 
grooves in the sides of said hole, care being 
taken that the apices of these grooves are in 
alignment with each other and with the cut 
to be made. The holes are then charged, re? 
erence being had to the character and elastic- 7o 
ity of the rock. 
I wish it to be understood that the form of 
the hole and the method of making it are no 
part of this invention, which consists in charg 
ing the holes with reference to the particular 75 
rock and grouping the holes in a manner to 
produce a specified result. 
I will now proceed to describe the arrange 
ment and relative position of the holes and 
the order of discharging the blasts in quarries 8O 
having the characteristics heretofore specified. 
In Fig. 1 is shown a ledge having indefinite 
longitudinal extension, and not too great 
depth to be worked in a single bench. A is 
the top and B the face of the ledge, and C is 85 
the block to be removed. I first insert in the 
top of the ledge a hole, a, whose grooves are so 
placed that a line joining their apices will 
form a slightly-acute angle with the face B on 
the side next the block C. This hole is then 90 
charged, tamped, and fired. The result will be 
a cut in the direction of the dotted lines ex 
tending downwardly through the rock, for 
wardly to the face B, and rearwardly to a dis 
tance varying with circumstances. Immedi- 95 
ately upon the charge being fired the sides of 
the cleft come together, and the crack is im 
perceptible. The elasticity of the rock is al 
ways sufficient to allow the cut to be made, 
even when said cut fails to reach the face of IOO 
4 
2 
342,366 
IO 
75 
the rock. I next make a second hole, b, at way between the two sides of the neck, and 6o 
Some distance from the first and form its 
grooves so that a line joining their apices will 
form an acute angle with the face of the rock 
on the side next the block C. This hole is 
then charged, tamped, and fired, resulting in 
a cut in the direction of the dotted lines. 
Finally I make a third hole, c, midway be 
tween the cuts first made and formits grooves 
so that a line joining their apices will be par 
allel with the face B of the ledge. This hole 
is then charged and fired, resulting in a cut in 
the direction of the dotted lines, said cut join 
ing the two former cuts at obtuse angles. We 
now have a block, C, separated from the main 
body of the rock, widest at the front, and 
gradually narrowing toward the rear. This 
block may be divided or worked out in any 
Well-known manner. The bench is then 
worked out from the two ends DE, the vertical 
cuts being then all made at right angles to the 
face. Thus all blocks after the first three are 
perfectly rectangular. 
In Fig. 2 is shown a ledge of rock similar in 
all respect to that in Fig. 1, except that the 
rock is of too great depth to be worked in a 
single bench. In this case it becomes neces 
sary to form a false bed before the block C can 
be cut out. I therefore first sink a horizontal 
hole, d, in the face B of the rock at such dis 
tance from the top as I may desire the bed. 
I form the grooves in such manner as that a 
line joining their apices may be parallel with 
the top of the ledge. This hole is then charged 
and fired, resulting in a cut parallel with the 
top of the ledge of a length in either direction 
proportioned to the charge. The block C is 
then cut out in the manner already described, 
and the ends DE worked to the extremities 
Of the false bed. A shot similar to the first is 
then made to continue the false bed, and so on 
until the end of the ledge is reached, if de 
sired. Sometimes it is necessary to avoid the 
back cuts, f(1, in forming the block C. In such 
case (see Fig. 3) the holes a, b are placed equi 
distant from the front and back line of said 
block, the hole c equidistant from both sides, 
and the side holes and back hole equidistant 
from the back corne's of the block. The three 
holes are then charged, tamped, and simul 
taneously fired by means of electricity. The 
cuts thus produced simultaneously reach the 
points of intersection, intercept each other, 
and the gases escape or are condensed before 
the cuts can be prolonged. Thus a block is 
disengaged from the body of the ledge with 
out splitting or marring the surrounding rock. 
In Fig. 4 is shown a hang of rock, in which 
it is desired to work. I first bore a hole mid-l 
make the grooves therein so that a line join 
ing their apices will extend (with a slight di 
agonal deflection) transversely across the 
hang. This hole is then charged and fired, and 
a cut is made which extends entirely across 65 
the hang. A second hole is then inserted near 
the first, whose grooves are so formed as that 
a line joining their apices has a slight diagonal 
deflection in the direction opposite to the first. 
This hole is then charged, tamped, and fired, 7o 
and the result is that a wedge-shaped block is 
disengaged from the surrounding mass. This 
may be worked out in any desirable manner, 
and there remains two ends from which to 
work. 
It will be seen that the success of all the 
hereinbefore-described shots is dependent en 
tirely upon the elasticity of the rock. By 
making the force of the powder expend itself 
in right lines, and employing comparatively 8o 
small charges, cuts are made in the solid face 
of the rock which need not necessarily extend 
to the surface in either direction. The rock 
simply opens momentarily and then closes. By 
combining these blind cuts with ordinary 85 
open cuts-i. e., where the rock is free on two 
or more sides-I am enabled to open and work 
any imaginable character of quarry without 
the loss of any material, without throwing 
fragments, and thereby endangering lives, and 9o 
with scarcely perceptible noise. The charges 
required are necessarily dependent, coeteris 
patibats, on the elasticity of the particular rock, 
and must be properly proportioned thereto. 
- 
Such a charge as might work in one rock with 95 
the greatest success in another might have 
little or no effect, and in a third might overdo 
the work required of it and shatter the rock. 
This matter can only be settled by actual ex 
periment in each quarry, the character of IOO 
stone differing endlessly. 
I am aware that in breaking up blocks of 
ice grooves are made to mark the desired 
planes of cleavage; but 
What I claim as new, and desire to protect los 
by Letters Patent, is 
The described method of blasting rocks, 
which consists in making a series of blast 
holes in the line of desired cleavage, connect 
ing such holes by a groove in the surface of IIo 
the rock, to define the cleavage, and then 
charging and exploding, substantially as set 
forth. 
JNO. L. L. KNOX. 
Witnesses: 
W. D. THOMAs, 
LENOX SIMPSON. 
25 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342466.txt	W, H, R 0 SEWARNE, 
 
Atte 
st. 
Z ????????-? 
 
ntor. 
???? 
????? 
: 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
- - - - 
W. H. R. 0 SEWARNE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
BLAST FURNA.C.E. 
" 
No. 342,466, 
Patented May 25, 1886. 
Fig. 3. 
2 
 
  
  
 
  
???????????. 
 
(No Model.) 
W, H, R 0 SEWARNE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
No, 342,466, 
BLAST FURNACE. 
Patented May 25, 1886, 
Fig. 4. 
 
 
 
 
 
Fi: G .???? 3. 
 
 
Attest. 
????" 
l???? 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
. Z??? 
??? 
???? 
 
?? 
???? ??Ayator ???? 
????? 
? 2 >?a ???? 
????????????) 
?? 
(No Model.) 
W. H. ROSEW ARNE, 
BLAST FURNACE. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 7. 
  
  
 
 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. ROSEWARNE, OF CINCINN ATI, OHIO. 
BLAST -FURNA C E 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 342,466, dated May 25, 1886. 
- 
Application filed October 6, 1884. 
Serial No. 144,871. (No model.) 
. 
To aff7 ?ph ??, it may concer ?: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. ROSE 
WARNE, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Cincinnati, Ohio, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Blast-Furnaces, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
blast-furnaces, its object being to secure a 
more Safe, economical, and efficient charging 
IO of the same while in blast; and it consists in 
the provision and arrangement of double feed 
ing-hoppers and closing valves or bells,' 
and the combination therewith of a distribut 
ing device arranged to properly scatter and 
I5 distribute the charges uniformly in the fur 
nace, all as hereinafter set forth. 
In the Ordinary construction and operation 
of blast-furnaces, the charges are fed to the 
furnace through an opening at the top by 
2O means of a funnel-mouth or hopper,' closed 
below by a conical valve or bell, opening 
downward directly into the body of the fur 
nace. This arrangement necessitates a slack 
ening of the blast when charging, which in 
25 volves loss of time and danger of chilling the 
furnace; or, if the blast is maintained, the 
incandescent gases escape through the hop 
per-opening while charges are being intro 
duced, causing great annoyance and danger to 
3O the workmen employed in charging. More 
over, by this arrangement the charges are 
dumped toward and around the side walls of 
the furnace, where they often chill and form 
scaffolds, requiring a stoppage of the en 
35 tire operation of the furnace for their removal, 
at great outlay, and loss of time and labor. 
Still another objection to existing construc 
tions is the liability of the bell-supporting 
chains to break and allow the valve to drop 
4C into the furnace, which also requires a stop 
page of the furnace and replacing of the bell 
at great inconvenience and loss. 
Myinvention seeks to remedy these objections 
and render the operations of the furinace con 
45 tinuous, without stoppage or loss from any 
of the above-enumerated causes, thereby fa 
cilitating and economizing the furnace opera 
tions in a material degree. 
Mechanism embodying my inventionis illus 
SO trated in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan of a blast-furnace to 
. 
. 
- 
Referring now to the drawings for a more 65 
which my improvements are applied; Fig. 2, 
a central vertical section of the same, showing 
the bells closed; Fig. 3, a central vertical sec 
tion of the same, showing the upper bell open 55 
and the lower bell closed; Fig. 4, a central 
vertical section of the same, showing the lower 
bell open and the upper one closed; Fig. 5, a 
sectional plan of the charge-distributer; Fig. . 
6, a central vertical section of an ordinary 6o 
blast-furnace, showing my improvements ap 
plied in connection with the ordinary hopper. 
Fig. 7 is a detail view of the bell or valve 
shown in Fig. 6. 
explicit illustration of the parts specified in 
the following description, A designates the 
blast-furnace, having an opening, B, at the 
top, through which the charges are introduced. 
In this opening I place two funnel-shaped hop- 7O 
pers, CD, arranged one above the other, and 
provided each with an intermediate shell, cd, 
constituting at the same time a guide for the 
charge and seat for the closing valves or bells 
E. F. 
To the lower shell, d, is attached a distrib 
uting device, G, consisting of a conical ring 
whose annular apex is set within the lower 
hopper as an offset in such relation to the in 
ner wall of the shell d as to divert a portion 8o 
of the down-passing charge outward, while a 
portion passes within the central opening of 
the distributer. 
The two bells EF are each of conical form 
above and terminate below in a shallow par- 85 
tial cone adapted to form a seat against the 
inner wall of the shell in which it rests. To 
the lower bell, F, is secured a stem or rod, e, 
extending upward through a central sleeve at 
the apex of the upper bell, E, so that, as the 90 
bells are to be elevated and depressed alter 
nately, one acts as a guide to the other by 
means of the stem and sleeve. 
Suitable means are to be provided for ele 
vating the bells as required. A convenient 95 
apparatus for this purpose is constructed as 
follows: A two-pronged lever, L, is arranged 
in suitable bearings above the furnace-open 
ing, having its bifurcated ends connected by 
chains, with lugs g at opposite sides of the loo 
sleeve of the upper bell, while a similar lever, 
L, mounted and operating between the prongs 
75 
342,466 
?? 
? 
85 
ing provided with an inner cone and a dis- 65 
2O part being diverted outward and part in Ward. Such a construction. 
of the bifurcated lever, is connected by a chain 
employed without the double hoppers and 
with the free end of the stem e. Thus each 
valves, and the hoppers and valves without 
bell has an independent motion and operation 
the distributer, but the best results are at 
by means of its levers. 
tained with both together. 
Steam, water, or air pressure may be en- 
Heretofore provision has been made for 
ployed as the motive power for operating the charging a hopper with coal, said hopper be 
levers. 
In operating the bells as thus constructed tributing-ring, whereby, upon lowering the 
the necessary clarges of iron ore, coke, and eone and ring, an annular space is formed, 
to limestone are first separately placed in the through which the coal passes and is directed 
upper hopper, C, the bell E of which is then outwardly on all sides. Provision is also made 
lifted into the position shown in Fig. 3, al- for raising the inner cone only, for the pur- 7o 
lowing the entire charge to fall into the lower pose of directing the coal as it is discharged 
hopper, D. The upper bell is then closed and toward the center of the furnace; also, a 
15 another charge placed in the upper hopper, double hopper has been used, having an up 
after which the lower bell is raised to the po- per and lower cone-valve, the former being 
sition shown in Fig. 4, allowing the charge to lowered to charge the feed-hopper and the 75 
fall into the furnace over the distributing-liing, latter valve being opened to discharge the 
by which it is divided, as before indicated, load into the furnace. I make no claim to 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
It will be observed that the opening into 
the body of the ?urnace is always closed, the ter's Patent of the United States- 
1. In a blast-furnace, the combination, with 
alternate action of the bells at no time per- 
mitting the gases to escape. It will be obvi- two hoppel's, one arranged above another, of 
25 ous, therefore, that the charging of the furnace independently-operating valves, having an al 
requires no slackening of the blast. More- tel'nate upward li?t in charging the furnace, 
over, as the bells have their seats upon the Substantially as described. 
2. In a blast-furnace, the combination, with 
upward-flaring walls or shells of the hoppers, 
it is obvious that in case of breakage of the two feed-hoppers, placed one above another, 
3o supporting-chains the bells could not fall into of two independent valves closing said hop 
the furnace, and hence all danger from that pers, level's connected with said valves and 
source is avoided, and, besides, any such break having alternate action, and a conical dis- 9o 
can be repaired without stoppage of the blast. tributing - ring located in the lower hopper, 
3. In a blast - furnace, the combination of 
applying my invention, it may be applied as two hoppers arranged one above the other, 
an addition merely to the existing construc- with closing valves or bells seated within the 95 
tion, and secure in a useful degree many of same and opening by lifting upward, the 
the advantages referred to. Thus, in Fig. 6 lower bell having a stem extended upward 
4o the lower hopper there shown may be con- through a sleeve of the upper bell, thereby 
sidered as the ordinary filling hopper, D', and guiding each other in their alternate action, 
H, the ordinary bell or valve, opening down- substantially as and for the purpose set forth. ICO 
4. In a blast-furnace, the combination, with 
ward. Above these I arrange the additional 
hopper, C, and bell E, constructed and operat- the filling-hopper, of a distributing-annulus, 
45 ing as hereinbefore described, and attach to having a dividing apex or ridge located above 
the bell Ha stem, e, extending upward through the mouth of the hopper and a broad base 
the sleeve of the bell E, and provide the lever- located below the same, whereby the charge Io5 
may be distributed by passing over and being 
connections, as before set forth. 
To the bell H, I attach a distributing ring, divided by the ridge of the annulus, substan 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto Set 
its annular apex offsets a little outside of the 
curved outer surface of bell projected down- my hand in the presence of two subscribing I to 
ward, so that the charge passing down from witnesses. 
the hopper D' upon the outside of the bell H 
55 is divided, part diverted inward through the 
opening of the ring and part outward in the 
usual manner. 
The distributing device may be separately 
While in the foregoing description I have substantially as described. 
5o such as before described, in such relation that tially as described. 
35 shown what I conceive to be the best mode of 
?} 
WILLIAMI H. ROSEWARNE. 
T 
Witlesses: 
IL. MI. HOSEA, 
R. M. HOSEA. 
- 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342566.txt	UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS JOHN BERGEN DABIL, 
OF PENDLETON, OREGON. 
LEARER. 
TRACK - C 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed January 27, 1886. 
- 
- 
cutters.f. 
To aid, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEWIS JoHN BERGEN 
DAHL, of Pendleton, in the county of Umatilla 
and State of Oregon, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Track - Clearers, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the annexed drawings, form 
ing a part thereof, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
track-clearer. Fig. 2 is a side elevation, part 
ly in Section. Fig. 3 is a front elevation. Fig. 
4 is a detail view of the reversible cutter. 
Fig. 5 is a detail sectional view of one of the 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the different figures of the 
drawings. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
simple and effective mechanism for clearing 
railway-tracks of snow. 
My invention consists of a wheel carrying 
radial plates provided on the ends and forward 
edges with reversible cutters, to admit of re 
volving the wheel in either direction. The 
wheel is made of Sufficient diameter to clear 
the entire track, and is journaled in supports 
carried on a flat car and driven by connection 
with a suitable motor. 
Upon the shaft A is mounted a disk, B, and 
the spider C, having radial arms a. The disk 
B and the arms at are grooved radially to re 
ceive the plates D, which fill the space between 
the arms at and the disk, forming compart 
ments b. At the outer end of each plate D is 
pivoted a two-edged cutter, c, which is bent 
along its median line to give the cutting-edges 
the proper inclination for engagement with 
the snow. The cutters 0 may be turned so as 
to bring one or the other of the edges d into 
position for use by turning the lever e secured 
to the pivot of the cutter, which is journaled 
in the disk B. To the front surface of each 
arm a is pivoted a two-edged cutter, f, which 
is bent along its median line, so as to bring 
either of its cutting-edges into position for use 
when the opposite edge lies in the plane of 
rotation of the spider C. 
The shaft Alisjournaled in bearings E, car 
ried by the flat car F, and to the rear end of 
O 
25 
45 
65 
55 
Patent No. 342,566, dated May 25, 1886. 
Serial No. 189,934. (No model.) 
the shaft A is secured a spur-wheel, G, which 5o 
takes motion from a pinion, H., on the shaft I 
of the engine J carried by the flat car. 
The car F is propelled forward by a loco 
motive, and the track-clearing wheel is at the 
same time revolved by the engine J. 
The knives care set according to the direc 
tion in which the wheel is rotated, so that 
they will engage the snow as they are brought 
into contact with it by the continuous rotary 
motion of the wheel. The knives f are auto- 6o 
matically turned on their pivots by the en 
gagement of their advancing edges with the 
snow. The snow taken up by the knives ef 
is received in the compartments b and thrown 
outward by centrifugal force. 
The snow receives sufficient impetus from 
the wheel to be carried out of the vicinity of 
the track, where the track is level, and where 
the track is builton a mountain side the wheel. 
will be made to rotate so as to project the 7o 
snow. from the open side of the track. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
C, and radial plates D, the forward edges and 
ends of the plates being provided with adjust 
able cutters, substantially as herein shown and 
described. 
the shaft A, the disk B, and spider C, secured 
to the shaft, the radial plates D, received be. 
tween the spider and the disk, and the adjust 
able knives cf. pivoted at the ends and edges 
of the plates, substantially as herein shown 85 
and described. 
3. In a track-clearer, the combination of the 
shaft A, the disk B, and spider C, secured 
thereto, the radial plates D, received between 
the spider and the disk, and knives at the ends 9c 
and forward edges of the plates, inclined in the 
direction of the rotation of the wheel, substan 
tially as herein shown and described. 
1. A wheel formed of a disk, B, a spider, 75 
2. The combination, in a track-clearer, of 8o 
LEWIS JOHN BERGENDAHL. 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL REYNOLDS, 
FRANKLIN HALL. 
k 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342666.txt	31 O - 4 
p 35 2 
t 
SR 
LJ U 
Y. V. V.) 
V V VW 
ULF VVi \VVS 
R 
5 42. 666 
>k 
, 
(No Model.) 
%k o node 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. T. WILLIAMs. "" 
ELERO MAGNETIC TRANSMITTER, 
No. 342,666. 
Patented May 25, 1886, 
 
WITNESSES: 
es-A41- 
724-14- 
s 
INVENTOR 
Jaw fil-Aws 
"4:41.7/.4% 
ATTORNEYS 
SUCSTITUTED FCR (CSING COPY 
SEARCH RUU 
(No Model.) 
No. 342,666, 
 
J. T. WILLIAMS, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
ELECTRO MAGNETIC TRANSMITTER, 
Patented May 25, 1886, 
WITNESSES: 
(a4-f-c-? 
224, ---44-y 
INVENTOR 
John T.Y. onws 
A444-4. 4% 
ATTORNEYS 
SUESTITUTED FOR MISSING COPY 
SEARCH ROOM 
(No Model.) 
J. T. WILLIAMS, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
ELECTRO MAGNETIC TRANSMITTER, 
No, 342,666, 
Patented May 25, 1886, 
 
WITNESSES 
(ria el-A-eal-f 
? 24-7-4C-41 
Jov-Y 
INVENTOR 
. Wivvi awe 
ATTORNEYS 
SUCSTITUTED FOR MISSING COPY 
SEARCH RO 
V 
is 
ii 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JoHN T. WILLIAMS, of MOUNT VERNON, NEW YORK. 
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC TRANSMITTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 342,666, dated May 25, 1886. 
Application filed April 16, 1865, 
Seria No. 162,86. No model.) 
20 ices. 
To all whom it maz concern: 
Be it known that I, John T. WILLIAMs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mount 
Vernon,in the county of Westchester and State 
5 of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Electro-Magnetic Transmit. 
ters of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to electro-magnetic 
conveyances or transmitters; and it consists in 
* Io the novel combination of devices hereinafter 
described and claimed, reference being made 
to the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, in which 
Figure il represents a sectional side view. 
5. Fig. 2 is a transverse section in the plane air, 
Fig.1. Fig. 3 is an inverted plan of one of 
... the helices on a larger scale than the previous 
figures, Fig. 4 is alongitudinal section when 
tie cone exterids through more tianiwo lei 
Fig. 5 is a diagram showing the connec 
tions Fig. , the several helices being placed 
in a position parallel to each other, instead of 
their true position in line with each other, in 
order to be able to show said connections. 
25 Fig. 6 is a sectional view of a modification of 
the means for introducing the helices succes. 
sively into an electric circuit. Fig. 7 is an 
clevation showing the guide through the hel 
ices on which the core or carriage travels, 
... 
3O made in the form of a trough, and which may 
be made of any desired cross-section. Fig. S 
Fig. 9 shows 
is a transverse section of Fig. 7. 
the guide made in the form of a skeleton track 
and which may consist of two or more rails. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter A designates a 
tube of brass or any other suitable non-nag 
netic substance. Upon this tube are mounted 
40 at stated intervals, a greater or less-distance 
from one another, a series of helices, BBB 
B, wound upon spools of wood, or other non 
conductor of electricity. 
... The arrangement of the helices apart from 
45 each other enables me to construct my appa 
ratus in curved as well as straight lines. My 
arrangement also lessens the cost of construc 
tion, as less wire is required than when the 
helices are iijuxtaposition, and by lessening 
50 the number of contact-points, which accor. 
plish by thus arranging the helices apart from 
each other the expense of maintaining the ap 
35 Fig. 10 is a transverse section of Fig. 9. 
paratus is reduced. It furthermore, allows 
the carriage to move freely in its track with 
out material resistance from the air, as the air 55 
is free to pass out between the helices. 
In the example shown in Figs.l., 2, and 8 the 
tube A is made of brass, having one end of 
the wire from each helix brazed or soldered 
or otherwise metallically connected thereto, 60 
while the other end of each helix is connected 
respectively to a contact-piece, ID ID, which 
has a contact-point, (, of platinum attached 
thereto. (Best seen in Figs. 2 and 3.) 
|- Through the flanges of the spools contain- 65 
ing the helices B B 1313 extends an electric 
conductor, E, which is insulated from the tube 
A and from the helices, and on this conductor 
are mounted a series of magnets, l FFF, 
which, in the example, show in Figs. , 2, 7o 
anti 3, ilave the form of horseshoes, and which - - - 
embrace the helices Bls' Bls, respectively. 
These magnets are so constructed that they 
can swing a limited distance upon the eon. 
ductor in a plane at right angles to the axis of 75 
the tube A. 
G is the body or carriage, which fits the 
tube A, and to which motionis to be imparted. 
In the example shown in the drawings this car 
riage is made in the form of a permanent mag 8o 
net; or a carriage of soft iron may be used, as 
hereinafter described. The opposite poles of 
this magnetic carriage are marked N and Sin 
Fig. 1, while the opposite poles of the magnets 
FFIFF are marked in and s. (See Figs. 2 and 85 
3.) The tube. A connects by a wire, 10, with one 
pole of a generator of electricity-for example, 
a dynamo-clectric machine, H-and the con 
ductor Econnects by a wire, 11, with the oppo 
site pole of said dynamo-machine. 
carriage G is introduced into the tube Ain the 
direction of arrowl, the north pole of agaiet, 
Fis attracted by the south pole S of said car 
riage as soon as the same comes approximately 
opposite to the magnet, and it is brought in 
contact with the platinum point of the contact 
piece ID. A. circuit is closed through wire 11, 
condugtor E, magnet F, contact-piece i), helix 
B, tube A, and wire 10 back to the dynamo-ma 
chine. The helix B is vitalized, and by the I. 
axial magnetism the carriage C is moved for 
ward in the tube A. As soon as the south pole 
Scomes opposite to the north poem of the mag 
net F", the helix B'is vitalized, and a fresh iii. 
When the 9o. 
. 
2 
342,666 
90 
. 
95 
i 
. 
In Figs 
pulse is imparted to the carriage, and so on by 
In Fig. 6 I have shown an example of my 
every helix through which the carriage passes. 
apparatus with a carriage of soft iron and with 
circuit closers actuated by said carriage. 
At the same time, whenever the center or neu 
tral point of the carriage passes the north pole 
B'B'B' are the helices, which are supported 
5 of one of the magnets FFFF the contact upon the tube A in the same manner as in the 
previously made between said magnet and the apparatus shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. The 
corresponding helix is broken, and the vitali- helices connect at one end by wires 222324 
with a wire, 27, which connects with one pole 
zation of this helix stops. 
of the dynamo-machine, while the other ends 
f said helices connect with contact-pieces f' 
Close to these contact-pieces, but insu 
ff. 
lated from the same, are contact-pieces g g g, 
which connect by wires 26 27 28 with a wire, 
29, leading to the second pole of the dynamo 
machine. In the interior of the tube are spring 
tappets l'hill", one for each helix, and the free 
ends of these tappets extend through tube A, 
and are situated opposite the contact-pieces 
f'g''f'' (ffff, respectively. The carriage ( 
is supposed to move in the direction of the ar 
row shown on it in Fig. 6. In the position 
which the carriage occupies in this figure a 
circuit is closed through wires 2523, helix B", 
contacts fg, (the tappet libeing raised,) and 
wires 2729, and as the carriage moves on, the 
tappet l' is raised and the tappet l'is released, 
so that the helix B is vitalized while the helix 
B' becomes devitalized. 
If the apparatus is to be used for transport 
ing purposes, the carriage must be made hol 
low and of a size suitable for the purpose for 
which it is designed, so as to be able to con 
tain the articles to be transported; but when 
used for pushing any article or thing before it 
or for hauling them after it, it may be solid; 
or, if made hollow, may be closed, and it may 
be provided with suitable means for enabling 
one to attach to it such articles or bodies as 
are to be moved or propelled by it through or 
along the tube or track. 
The tube A can be made circular or of any 
other desired cross-section, or a trough or a 
track may be substituted for the tube, the con 
struction being such that the carriage will be 
safely guided and kept therein while permitted 
to move along and through it. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a series of three or 
more helices placed at suitable distances apart, 
and with a tube, trough, or track extending 
through said helices, of a hollow core or car 
riage which can freely pass through said hel 
ices, and a series of circuit-closers, one for each 
helix, detached from said carriage and their 
connections with a dynamo-machine or other 
source of electricity, said circuit-closers being 
actuated by the passing carriage and serving 
to close and to break the circuits through the 
successiye helices in the series, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
shown and described, with a series of helices 
placed inline with each other, and with a mag. 
65 devitalized by the action of the carriage, the hetic core or carriage which can freely pass 
through all the helices, of a series of circuit. 
closers actuated by the magnetic influence of 
In order to impart to the carriage a continu 
jo ous motion through the tube A, it is necessary 
that the length of the carriage and the distance 
between the several helices shall be so propor 
tioned that the successive helices are vitalized 
in time to keep up the motion of the carriage; 
15 or, in other words, the length of the carriage 
must at least be equal to the distance between 
the magnets FF of the helices B Bill order to 
insure its start. After starting, the helices 
may be farther apart; but I prefer the pro 
20 portions above mentioned, in order that there 
may be no dead or neutral point in the appa 
ratus; or, in other words, the carriage should 
be of at least such length that, should the cir 
cuit become broken through accident or oth 
25 erwise, and the core or carriage come to rest, 
it cannot come to rest at any point but that, 
when the circuit is againcompleted, it will be 
in position to be acted upon by the helices, 
and will resume its movement. If desired, 
3o the carriage can be made of any desired greater 
length. 
. 4 and 5 I have substituted for the 
horseshoe-magnets F. F. FF the steel-bar 
magnets FFFFF. FF". When the 
i 
35 carriage is introduced at B, the magnet Fis 
attracted against contact m', Fig. 5, and a cir 
cuit is closed through wire 12, contact n. mag 
net F", wire 20, helix B, and wires 2113 back 
to the dynamo-machine, the helix B is vital 
4oized and causes the carriage to move in the 
direction of the arrow marked thereon in Fig. 
4. When the carriage has reached the po 
sition shown in Fig. 4, the south poles of 
the magnets F and F are attracted against 
45 the contacts s and 8', respectively, Fig. 5, 
while the north poles of the magnets F and F. 
are attracted against their contacts in and at', re 
spectively. Acircuitpasses from the dynamo 
machine through wires 12 and 18, contact', 
so magnet F, wire 19, helices B B', wire 6, 
magnet F", contacts', and wires 17 and 13 back 
to the dynamo-machine, and a small portion 
of the current also passes from the dynamo 
machine through wires 12 and 14 to contact', 
55 thence through magnet F" and wire 15 to the 
helices B BB, and through wire 16, magnet 
F', contact s', wires 17 and 13 back to the 
dynamo-machine, and the carriage keeps mov 
ing in the direction of the arrow marked on 
6o it in Fig. 4. As the movement of the carriage 
proceeds, the magnets FFF are succes 
sively changed until the carriage finally stops. 
In this case the tube A can be dispensed with, 
but the helices BBBBBB are vitalized and 
same as in the example shown in Figs. , 2, 
and 3. 
. 
4 
75 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
h 
SUBSTITUTED FOR MISSING COPY 
SEARCH RUU 
342,666 
35 
closers, one for cach helix, and a tube, trough, 
or track extending through the helices, of a 3o 
magnetic core or carriage arranged to pass 
through said holices in said tube, trough, or 
3. The combination, substantially as hercin' track, said circuit-closers being actuated by 
the magnetic influence of the carriage, sub 
stantially as described. 
(3, "The combination of a series of helices, 
two or more, surrounding a tube, trough, or 
track, and a magnetizable core or carriage free 
and detachctl from the other parts of the ap 
paratus and extending at least from the inside 4o 
of one helix to the inside Qf the second suc 
ceeding helix, together with circuit-closers for 
introducing the said helices into an electric 
circuit, substantially as described. 
constructed to close the circuit througli said 
helix, anta core or carriage constructed to pass 
through said helix and to actuate said mag 
net, substantially as described. 
hand and seal in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witness(es. 
the core or carriage, contacts for said circuit. 
closers, and the connections of these contacts 
and of the helices with a dynamo-machine or 
other source of electricity. 
5 shown and described, of a tube, trough, or 
track, a series of surrounding helices, a mag 
netic carriage constructed to move upon the 
track through the helices, a series of circuit 
to closers actuated by the magnetic influence of 
the carriage, and their connections with a dyn 
ano-nachine or other source of electricity. 
4. The combination, of a metallic tube, 
trough, or track connected to one pole of agen 
15 erator of electricity, a series of helices which 
surround said tube or track, and one end of 
each of which connects with said tube or track, 
a series of contacts, one for each helix and 
connected to the other end thereof, a series of 
2O magnetic circuit-closers, one for each helix, 
and all connected to the second pole of the 
generator of electricity, and a nagnetic car'- 
riage constructed to pass through the succes. 
sive helices, said circuit closers being operated 
25 by the magnetic carriage, substantially as de 
scribed. . 
. 
5. The combination, with a series of helices, 
three or more, provided with a series of circuit. 
7. The combination of a helix, a magnet, 45. 
In testimony whereof Ilhave here unto set my so 
W. FIA IFI., 
E. F. KASTENIUBER. 
JOIN T. WILLIAMS. L. s. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342766.txt	(No Model.) 
I, W, SWALLOW 
NO, 342,766. 
 
 
Y e 
etz 
GRATE BAR, &c. 
Patented May 25, 1886, 
E. 1. 
era 
WITNESSES 
/226.4(aal. 
(2. day-Z 
ice 
INVENTOR 
4-aac 4/32-/- 
4. 27.Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC W. SWALLOW, OF KINGSTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
GRATE-BAR, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 342,766, dated May 25, 1886. 
Application filed December 5, 885. 
Serial No. 184,839. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ISAAC W. SWALLOW, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Kingston, in the county of Luzerne and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Grate-Bars, &c.; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable other's skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
Teference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
Figure I of the drawings is a representa 
tion of a plan view of a grate as applied to a 
locomotive. Fig. 2 is a similar view show 
ing the same in reversed or bottom plan. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse section taken on line a 
ac, Fig.1, showing the grate closed; and Fig. 
4 is a similar section taken online y), Fig. 1, 
showing the grate open. 
My invention has relation to grate-bars for 
Stoves, ranges, locomotive-engines, &c.; and 
it consists in the construction and novel ar 
rangement of parts, as will be hereinafter set 
forth, and pointed out in the claims. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, I will describe this improvement 
as applied to a locomotive grate-bar, which 
description, taken in connection with the ac 
Companying drawings, will be sufficient to en 
able persons skilled in the art to which the 
invention pertains to apply it to a stove, 
range, or the like. 
a designates the fire-box, which is rectan 
gular in form, and is provided with rigid 
longitudinal bars b b, arranged in pairs in the 
end walls of the fire-box, and resting also 
(where more than one section of bars are 
needed) on intermediate cross-bars, cc, near 
the bottom of the fire-box. 
did d are the tumbler-bars, which are free at 
their ends, and are connected intermediately 
of their ends by bolts and nuts e to the upper 
ends of curved arms ff, pivoted in bear 
ing between the cross-bars e c. The tum 
bler-bars d are of solid wrought-iron, and 
rest, when in their normal position, in notches 
in the upper edges of the cross-bars c 0, 5O 
where water-bars are used, in order that the 
water-bars may prevent the tumbler-bars 
from being so rapidly burned out as they 
would otherwise be. The lower ends of the 
pivoted arms f fare straight, and are connect- 55 
ed by slotted bars gg, the ends of said arms 
being pivoted in slots h h and h' by nut-bolts. 
The upper ends of the pivoted arms f are 
curved, as shown, so that when the tumbler 
bars d are raised they will come directly 6o 
over the space between the rigid bars or wa 
ter-bars, as the case maybe, of each pair of the 
latter bars. 
At one side of the grate a double curved 
arm, XX, connects two of the tumbler-bars, 65 
did, and is provided with a straight arm, f, 
at its lower end. These two connected bars 
d d I term the double tumbler-bars.. By 
this construction, when the single tumbler 
bars and the bar d are raised between and 
Over the rigid bars, the bar d of the double 
tumbler-bar next to one wall of the fire-box 
will be lowered, and vice versa. 
- 
The shaking-rod O is provided with arms 
gg', which depend through spaces between 
the adjacent cross-bars c c, and are pivoted 
by nut-bolts in the slots h' of the slotted con 
necting-bars g g, so that all of the tumbler 
bars are operated at one and the same time 
by means of the shaking-lever r, adapted to 
fit the projecting end of the shaking-rod O. 
The heads of the nut-bolts that secure the 
tumbler-bars to their respective arms rest 
in countersinks in the top sides of said bars, 
making the top surfaces of the grate smooth, 85 
and also shielding the thread and nut from the 
The construction is so simplified and ar 
ranged that in case any part becomes worn 
Out or broken it will take but a few minutes 
to replace it. With a new one, as it is only neces 
sary to take off two or three nuts to get out 
any of the several pieces. 
Having described this invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 95 
S 
1. The combination, with the rigid grate 
bars, of the single tumbler-bars, the double 
90 
fire. 
- 
25 
35 
45 
2 
342,766 
tumbler-bar, the slotted connecting-bar, and 
supports, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with a fire-box hav 
ing the horizontal rigid grate-bars, arranged 
5 in pairs, of the single tumbler-bars and the 
double tumbler-bar pivoted below the rigid 
grate-bars, and connected by the slotted con- 
necting-bar, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ISAAC. W. SWALLOW. 
Witnesses: 
F. H. GATES, 
J. BARTON NORRIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342866.txt	(No Model.) 
G. K. G. ARWIN & C. E. HADLEY. 
. 
m 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 342,866. 
TAPPING MACHINE, 
Patented June 1, 1886. 
77 
(AA 2E 
( 
a fan 
to-e 
AZ E. 9A. 
), V 
J 
25 
Ot 
Z3 
 
ZZz. z. 
E 
E 
cities i : 
e 
92 2- C o, i. arz/zra 5 Ca 4,222.2% 
42 reig for 
. 
a 
 
(No Model.) 
G. K. GARWIN & C. E. HADLEY. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 342,866. 
Patented June 1, 1886. 
TAPPINC MACHINE, 
2/Zeg f : 
A Yere 522. 
22e, Geo. (Garza 8 (as ZAZ.262/. 
Z 7% (4%. 4. Zarzecz, 22%. 2 . 
N, PETERS, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
t- 
 
(No Model.) 
G. K. GARY IN & C. E. HADLEY. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
TAPPING MACHINE. 
1886. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE K. GARWIN AND CHARLES 
E. HADLEY, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., 
ASSIGNORS TO E. E. GARWIN & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
TAPPNG - MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 342,866, dated June 1, 1886. 
Application fied October 3, 1s85. 
Serial No. 17S,8S2. (No model.) 
O 
IS 
. 
25 
To all, Luhon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGE K. GARVIN 
and CHARLES E. HADLEY, citizens of the 
United States, residing at New York, in the 
county and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Tap 
ping-Machines, fully described and represented 
in the following specification, and the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of the same. 
The object of this invention is to furnish a 
more effective construction for reversing the 
rotations of the spindle, for running the same 
upward at an increased speed, and for shifting 
the driving-belt by means of a treadle. These 
improvements will be understood by reference 
to the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a tapping 
machine provided with my improvements. 
Fig. 2 is a plan of the head of the machine. 
Fig. 3 is a plan of the bed-plate with the belt 
shifting devices. Fig. 4 is a vertical section 
of the head, the view also including a trip 
lever for automatically reversing the clutch 
mechanism; and Fig. 5 is an external view of 
the tap-spindle, and of the sleeves and other 
clutching apparatus directly attached to the 
spindle. Fig. 6 is an enlarged view of the top 
of the spindle, with the tripping-cone, Fig. 7 
being a transverse Section of the same at one 
side of the latch on line & in Fig. 6. Fig. 8 
is an end view of the upper clutch-sleeve and 
reversing rod and key, with the spindle C 
shown in section. Fig. 9 is a section of the 
clutch devices on line y y in Fig. 4, looking 
downward, the spindle being omitted to in 
troduce an arrow, ct, to show the direction of 
rotation. Fig. 10 is a plan, and Fig. 11 a side 
elevation, of the sloping seats, Fig. 11 being 
projected from Fig. 10, an end view of the key 
e being shown in dotted lines with its beveled 
face in contact with the sloping surfaces. 
A represents the column of the machine, 
upon which is mounted a table, B, adapted to 
support the various fixtures to be tapped. 
C is the spindle of the machine, and D a 
reversing-rod inserted within its bore and fur 
nished with a transverse key, e, to operate 
with the clutching devices. 
e' is a slot formed in the spindle, through 
So which the opposite ends of the key project, to 
engage with seats and dogs which are revolved 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
in opposite directions by sleeves surrounding 
the spindle. These sleeves are fitted, respect 
ively, to the lower spindle-bearing, G, and its 
upper bearing, H, the sleeves being revolved 
in Opposite directions by gearing connected 
with a bevel-wheel, I, operated by a cone 
pulley, J, in the usual manner. The seats s 
are fitted inside the lower sleeve, E, to which 
is attached a bevel-gear, E, meshing directly 
with the gear I. The dogs ', for reversing the 
rotations of the spindle, are attached to the 
lower end of the upper sleeve, F, upon which 
is formed a spur-pinion, F. A pair of spur 
wheels, L II, are fitted to turn together upon 
a stud, y, adjacent to the sleeve F, the wheel 
I meshing with the pinion F. Below said 
pinion a bevel-gear, K", is fitted to turn loosely 
upon the sleeve F, with a spur-wheel, K, 
which neshes with the wheel L, and the 
wheels L. L are so proportioned that, one rota 
tion of the bevel-wheel IS will produce two 
or more rotations of the sieeve F, to operate 
the tap more rapidly during its reverse move 
ment. The sleeves E and F are rotated in 
opposite directions by the action of their re 
spective gearings, and the dogs and seats S 
operate upon the projecting ends of the key e 
to turn the spindle in the same direction as 
the sleeve with which the key is engaged. The 
movement of the reversing-rod and holder is 
sufficient to shift the key from the dogs' to 
the seats s, and the rod is actuated by a 
holder, N, swiveled to its upper end and car 
ried by a rod, N', which is fitted to bearings 
N upon the head of the machine at A', and a 
handle, N, and link n' are pivoted to the rod 
N' to shift the rod by hand. It may thus be 
moved to engage the key e with either the 
dogs or seats s at pleasure; but is pressed 
normally upward to make the key engage 
with the dogs ' by a weight, c, acting through 
a lever, b, upon a collar, a, on the rod N. A 
latch, d, is pivoted upon the bearing N, and 
provided with a hook, d, to engage the holder 
and retain the key in contact with the seats 
S. Such a clutch-key, operated by sleeves re 
volving in opposite directions, is not new; but 
our improvement consists in the particular 
construction of the seats s, which we have 
shown upon a larger scale in Figs. 9, 10, and 
11, to illustrate their construction more fully. 
90 
95 
IOO 
e 
342,866 
The olject of our improvement is to facili 
tate the shifting of the key from the seats to 
the dogs, so as to secure an immediate re 
versal of the rotary movement when the tap 
has penetrated the desired amount, such re 
versal being commonly effected by a cone, f, 
applied to the upper end of the spindle, and 
operating to trip the latch d by contact there 
with. 
A tap, C, is shown affixed to the nozzle of 
the spindle C in Fig. 1, and the operator, by 
pressure downward upon the handle N", ap 
plies the tap to the object which requires tap 
ping when secured upon the table B, and main 
tains such pressure until the tap is engaged in 
the hole which is to be threaded. The con 
tinued rotation of the tap then serves to draw 
the spindle downward, and thus move the cone 
f toward the latch d. The cone is adjustable 
upon the spindle to trip the latch when the 
tap has penetrated the threaded hole a suffi 
cient distance. The latch is shown formed 
with a projection, i, to engage the cone, the 
sloping face of which pushes such projection 
sidewise and detaches the hook (I from the 
holder, which latter is shown in Fig. 2 pro 
vided with a mortise to receive the top of the 
latch. Heretofore, when the cone has thus 
tripped the latch a heavy weight has been re 
quired to withdraw the key from the seats s, 
because of the friction resulting from the heavy 
strain upon them, and the parallelism of their 
sides with the movement of the key. 
Our improvement consists in sloping the 
faces of the seats backward, as shown at s' in 
Fig. 11, and beveling the ends of the key in 
contact there with, as is shown upon the key 
in Fig. 4. therely inducing an immediate lou 
gitudinal movement of the key and rod N' as 
soon as the latch is tripped. 
The seats, to secure durability, are sepa 
rately formed of steel, as segments of a bush 
inserted within a recess, q', in the sleeve E, 
and are formed with tonguess, fitted to corre 
sponding grooves in the sleeve, as shown in 
the section of the sleeve in Fig. 9. Screws s 
are inserted through the outside of the sleeve 
into the tongues to hold the seats in place. An 
arrow, a, in said figure shows the direction of 
the sleeve's rotation, and indicates clearly how 
the sloping faces upon the seats tend to force 
the key upward when relieved from the re 
straint of the latch d, and the upward move 
nent is thus promptly effected with the as 
sistance of a very light weight upon the le 
verb. Such construction, therefore, not only 
dispenses with the greater part of the weight 
heretofore employed to reverse the rod D, but 
secures much greater accuracy and certainty 
in the reversing movement of the clutching 
devices. 
It is obvious that the angle or slopes, Fig. 
l1, may be varied, so as to effect the reversing 
movement at any required rate; but as the 
driving of the tap is effected through these 
sloping Surfaces, it is obvious that their an 
gle should not greatly exceed that which is 
required to overcome the friction of their con 
tact with the key, the driving of the spindle 
being thus effected without any great upward 
strain upon the latch d, while the upward 
movement of the key is greatly hastened when 
the latch is unlocked. 
To adjust the point at which the conefen 
gages the latch, the cone is commonly fitted 
upon a screw-thread, g, upon the upper end of 
the spindle, and in such case has required a 
lock-nut to hold it in its adjusted position. 
To obviate the use of such lock-nut, and to 
hold the cone detachably upon the sleeve, We 
have invented a spring-catch, n, fitted to a con 
tinuous groove, p, formed in the screw-thread 
of, the latch being pivoted at n upon the Cone, 
and provided with a spring, O, to hold it nor 
mally in the groove. The catch is shown fitted 
in a slot in the side of the cone, and projects 
beyond the pivot to receive the pressure of 
the spring and to form a thumb-piece, n, by 
which it may be withdrawn from the groove, 
and when thus withdrawn the cone may be 
held stationary by the hand of the operator, 
while the spindle is rotated through the 
agency of its driving-pulley J to adjust the 
conef to the desired point. 
When thus ad 
justed, the catch is allowed to engage with the 
groove p, and serves to hold the cone securely 
in such position until it requires readjust 
ment. 
In practice we form two grooves, p, at oppo 
site sides of the spindle, to secure a more mi 
nute adjustment of the come upon the thread g. 
The counter-shaft of the machine, carrying the 
cone-pulley J' and fast and loose pulleys on m', 
is shown mounted upon the bed-plate P by 
means of a standard, Q, the latter being con 
structed at its upper end with guides t, to re 
ceive a slide, i, to which are fitted shifters k, to 
guide the fast and loose pulleys in m'. The 
slide is provided between the bearingst with 
an arm, at, to which is jointed the upper end 
of a bell-crank, , and a treadle, h, is pivoted 
upon the bed-plate h' and jointed to the bell 
crank ath", so that the depression of the treadle 
by the operator's foot serves to throw the 
driving-belt (not shown in the drawings) upon 
the pulley m'. A spring, t, is affixed to one 
of the bearings and to a dog, t, upon the slide, 
and operates to hold the belt-guides over the 
loose pulley; and a pawl is pivoted to the 
bed adjacent to the foot-plate of the treadle to 
hold the same downward when depressed by 
the operator, and to thus retain the belt-guides 
over the fast pulley in opposition to the spring 
t". The pawl is provided with a spring, l, to 
keep it normally hooked upon the treadle, and 
with a tail-piece, l, which may be depressed at 
any time when the treadle is locked down to 
release the treadle and permit the spring t' to 
shift the belt-guides and belt gradually over the 
loose pulley in. By this construction the spring 
t" operates to shift the belt without attention 
from the operator after the pawl lis detached, 
and the operator is also able, with equal fa 
cility, to throw the belt upon the fast pulley 
O 
5 
40 
45 
55 
CO 
75 
85 
9) 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
342,866 
3 
whole arranged and operated substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
4. A tapping-machine constructed with a 
column, A, mounted upon a bed-plate, P, and 
provided with a table, B, and operating and 5o 
reversing mechanism, substantially as de 
scribed, and the bed-plate jointly with a coun 
ter-shaft having fast and loose pulleys, a mov 
ble belt-shifter sustained adjacent to the pull 
leys, a treadle pivoted upon the bed-plate and 55 
connected with the belt-shifter, and a pawl 
arranged and operated to hold the treadle 
when depressed, the stopping and starting of 
the tapping mechanism being thus allowed to 
be effected by the foot of the operator, leav- 6o 
ing his hands at liberty to manipulate the ob 
jects applied to the table B, and to operate the 
shifting-handle N", substantially as herein set 
forth. 
of a tap-spindle having a threaded portion 
provided with a longitudinal groove, a revers 
ing clutch mechanism for actuating the spin 
dle, a cone or dog fitted to the screw-thread 
to actuate the clutch-reversing devices, and a 7C 
catch pivoted on the cone or dog and locking 
into the said groove, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
6. In a tapping-machine, the combination, 
with the spindle C, provided with screw 
thread and longitudinal groove, as described, 
of the cone?, fitted to such thread, the catch 
m, pivoted on the cone and fitted to said groove, 
and the spring 0 and tail-piece n', for oper 
ating the catch, substantially as and for the 8o 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
5. The combination, in a tapping-machine, 65 
75 
GEO. K. GARWIN, - 
CHARLES E. HADLEY. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. S. CRANE, 
JOHN T. WILLIAMS. 
3 
15 
by merely depressing the treadlel. The stop 
ping and starting of the machine are there 
fore effected exclusively by the foot of the op 
erator, leaving his hands entirely free to ma 
5 nipulate the working parts at the head of the 
machine, and to remove the fixtures from the 
table as they are tapped. 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of our invention, what we claim is 
1. In a tapping - machine, the clutching 
mechanism consisting in a spindle and two 
sleeves rotated in opposite directions around 
the same, a key inserted transversely in the 
spindle and having beveled ends projected 
therefrom and movable longitudinally with a 
central shifting-rod, projections upon one of 
the sleeves to rotate the spindle in a reverse 
direction, and seats s, affixed within the other 
sleeve around the spindle and formed with 
faces sloped toward the said dogs, and adapted 
both to rotate the spindle by contact with the 
key and to move the shifting-rod longitudi 
nally by pressure upon the beveled faces of 
the key, all combined substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
2. In a tapping-machine having a spindle 
and two sleeves rotated in opposite directions 
around the same, the combination, with a mov 
able key fitted transversely in the spindle, of 
seats s, secured within one of the rotating 
sleeves by tonguess' and screws s, the seats 
being formed with inclined faces s' sloped 
backward from the direction of their rotation, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a tapping-machine, the combination, 
with the spindle C and the surrounding sleeves 
Eand F, rotated in opposite directions, of the 
bevel-gear I, the bevel-gear E, affixed to the 
sleeve E, the pinion F, affixed to the sleeve F 
and rotated in a direction opposite to the wheel 
E, the spur-wheels L. L., mounted to turn to . 
gether upon the stud N, the bevel-wheel K", 
fitted loosely upon the sleeve F and rotated 
by the wheel I, and the spur-wheel K, affixed 
45 to the wheel K", for driving the wheel L, the 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US342966.txt	(No Model.) 
T. JOY CE. 
BATANCED PISTON FOR STEAM. CYLINDERS, 
No. 342,966, 
Patented June 1, 1886, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z7 
C 
- as s 
 
6 
4. 
C 
E E 
 
 
N 
E. 
- - - - 
- - - - - - 
---------------z------ 
-- 
/ 
/ 
? 
f 
| 
\ 
W 
W 
w 
\ 
WITNESSES: 
\, 
| 
| 
 
(6.43, 2 
- BY (i. 
44-624 
- - - - - - - - - 
'ees- 
s 
INVENTOR: 
- 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
peers, photo-Lahographer, Washington, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS JOY CE, OF SCRAN TON, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
BALANCED PSTON FOR STEAM - CYL INDERS. 
5ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 342,966, dated June 1, 1886. 
Application filed February 19, 1886. 
Serial No. 192,544. (No model. 
nearly to the level of the center of the piston 
A. By this construction the surface of the 
upper parts of the ends of the piston exposed 
to the steam-pressure will be reduced, so that 
the downward pressure of the steam will be 
less than the upward pressure to assist in car 
rying the weight of the piston, and thus lessen 
the wear on the lower side of the piston and 
on the lower part of the cylinder. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A piston, A, made substantially as here 
in shown and described, with grooves Ein the 
lower sides of its ends, and with one or more 
perforations, F, in the ends of the said piston 
and leading into the said grooves, whereby 
the weight of the piston will be carried by the 
said steam and the undue wear of the lower 
side of the piston will be prevented, as set 6: 
forth. 
- 
2. The combination, with the piston A, hav 
ing rabbets G in its end parts, at the outer 
sides of the upper parts of its packing-grooves 
C, of the packing-rings D, having flanges H 7c 
on the outer side edges of their upper parts, 
substantially as herein shown and described, 
whereby the surfaces of the end parts of the 
piston exposed to the downward pressure of 
the steam will be lessened, so that the steam 5 
will be made to carry the weight of the piston, 
as set forth. 
3. The herein-described piston A, provided 
with the zigzag grooves E in the lower sides 
of its ends, perforations F, extending through 
the ends into the said grooves, the rabbets G 
in the upper and outer parts of the packing 
grooves C, and the packing-rings D, having 
flanges H on the outer sides of their upper 
parts fitting in the said rabbets, as specified. 85 
THOMAS JOY CE. 
Witnesses: 
JAMEST. GRAHAM, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
IO 
is 
To all whom it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAs Joy CE, of the 
city of Scranton, in the county of Lackawanna 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Balanced Pistons 
for Steam-Cylinders, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
piston, partly insection and part being broken 
away. Fig. 2 is an end elevation of the same, 
the piston-rod being shown in section. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
pistons for steam-cylindel's constructed in such 
manner that the said pistons will be supported 
above the bottoms of the said cylinders, or 
balanced, so as to equalize the wear. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of various parts of the pis 
ton, as will be hereinafter fully described. 
A is the piston, to which the piston-rod B 
is secured in the ordinary manner. Around 
the piston A, near each end, are formed an 
nular grooves C, to receive the packing-rings 
D. In the lower side of the end parts of the 
piston A are formed ZigZag groovesE, extend 
ing up nearly to the level of the center of the 
said piston. In the lower parts of the ends of 
the piston A are formed one or more holes or 
perforations, F, opening into the grooves E, 
so that the steam will enter the said grooves, 
and by its elasticity will support the weight 
of the piston, and thus prevent the lower side 
of the piston A and the lower part of the inner 
surface of the cylinder in which the piston 
works from being worn. 
In the upper side of the end parts of the 
piston A, at the outer sides of the grooves C, 
are formed rabbets G, to receive flanges H, 
formed upon the outer edges of the upper 
parts of the packing-rings D, as shown in Fig. 
45 1. The rabbets G and flanges Hextend to or 
35 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343066.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 343,066. 
 
- 
W. D. READY. 
TEMPORARY BINDER, 
Patented June 1, 1886. 
Zrzzeesses, 
Z722/ezezzoz. 
72/zeeze-Z Zeezz 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. D. READY, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
TEMPO RARY BINDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 343,066, dated June 1, 1886. 
Application filed February 23, 1886. Serial No. 192,896, 
(No model.) 
- 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. D. READY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at South 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Temporary Binders, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to temporary binders 
for newspapers, letters, bills, and other similar 
papers, the preservation of which is desirable 
for future reference. 
The invention consists in the several fea 
tures of construction and combinations of 
parts hereinafter fully set forth, and definitely 
pointed out in the claims annexed to this 
Specification. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a binder constructed according 
to my invention and having application to 
binding-covers. Fig. 2 is a section of Fig. 1 
in the line aca. Fig. 3 is a plan view showing 
a modification. Fig. 4 is a side elevation 
Showing the invention applied to a newspa 
per-file. Fig. 5 is an end elevation, partly in 
Section, of the parts shown in Fig. 3. 
In the Said drawings, the reference-numeral 
1 designates a rigid base-such as a cover or 
leaf-of a binding-book for receiving receipts 
and similar papers. 
Rising from the end 
thereof, at a suitable distance from each other, 
are pins or studs 2, rigidly mounted on said 
base near its end. These pins or studs have 
heads 3, and below said heads they are cut 
away upon two sides to form a flattened shank, 
4, which extends to the base, upon which the 
studs are mounted. The other cover, 5, which 
is used with that described, is preferably pro 
vided with a flap, 6, flexibly connected there 
With, and upon said flap is pivoted a metallic 
Strip, 7, having upon opposite sides, near the 
ends, notches or slots 8, of sufficient size to 
admit the flattened shanks 4. The strip 7 is 
attached at or near its center to the flap of the 
cover, and its notches are cut therein at such 
points that when it is turned upon its pivotal 
point 9 said notches will engage with the 
studs 2, which project through openings 10 
formed in the flap 6. Near the open end of 
each notch or slot 8 is formed a cut, 11, trans 
versely to the length of the slot and extending 
a short distance into the metal upon each side 
thereof. The metal intervening between this 
cut and the edge of the strip is then bent 
slightly upward, forming a tooth or shoulder, 
12, which abuts against the head of the pins 
or studs 2 when the parts are in engagement, 
and prevents the accidental release of the 
strip from said engagement. In order to ef 
fect this result, and to secure a perfect en 
gagement and operation of the parts, the Strip 
7 is formed of elastic metal, and is bent into 
the form shown by dotted lines in Fig. 2, 
whereby not only are the shoulders 12 brought 
at all times into effective engagement with 
the heads of the pins, but the flap 6 is also 
pressed down upon the rigid base or cover 1. 
The papers placed between the binders are 
thereby compressed together and the mass 
rendered compact. 
In applying the device to a newspaper-file 
the studs 2 are mounted upon the staff 1", 
Fig. 4, and the strip 7 is pivoted upon said 
staff at an intermediate point, 9". The con 
struction is in other respects the same, save 
that the studs may be prolonged, and instead 
of having continuous flat shanks they may be 
provided with opposite notches 13, at suit 
able intervals, whereby a series of flattened at 
taching portions is formed. This permits a 
considerable accumulation of papers upon the 
staff without interfering with the efficiency of 
the device. 
When the binder is used with letters orpa 
pers of miscellaneous character, it may be de 
sirable to attach the cover in the mannershown 
in Figs. 3 and 5, the attachable cover 14 hav 
ing a flap, which increases its length and re 
ceives the pivotally-mounted strip 7. This 
latter is applied, however, in the reverse man 
ner from that shown in Fig. 1, whereby in 
folding the cover over upon the papers it will 
cover, conceal, and protect the studs or strip 
engaging with them. In binding for storage, 
with a view to future reference, this is of great 
convenience, as it not only gives better appear 
ance, but covers the sharp points of the studs, 
and prevents the possible injury of surround 
ing objects. 
The index used with this binder may be 
composed of paper sheets 15, having the usual 
marginal letters and notched or cut upon their 
rear edges, as at 16, Fig. 5, to receive the 
75 
85 
90 
95 
CO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
343,066 
studs or pins 2, since the elasticity of the metal 
strip 7 constantly grips the edges of the sheets 
and holds them in place. 
The binder is operated by pressing down 
Ward the ends of the strip 7, and at the same 
time turning it upon its pivotal point to dis 
engage the slots from the studs. The opera 
tion is simple, and the device is clheap, effi 
cient, and capable of adaptation to every form 
of temporary or permanent binder. 
What I claim is 
l. In a temporary binder or paper-file, the 
combination, with headed studs mounted upon 
one member thereof, of a pivotally-mounted 
Strip having slots which engage said studs, 
and provided with lips or shoulders which en 
gage the heads of the studs, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination, with a metallic strip 
pivoted between its ends and bent into the arc 
of a circle, of headed studs mounted upon the 
binder and engaging with slots or notches 
formed in the opposite edges of the strip near 
its ends, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the headed pins 
IO 
25 
formed or mounted upon one part of the binder 
and projecting through the papers and the 
other part, of a pivoted strip having slots in 
its opposite edges, and provided with cuts 
crossing said slots, the metal in front of the 
cuts being bent upward to form shoulders to 
engage the heads of the studs, substantially as 
described. 
4. The combination, with a binder-cover 
having headed studs mounted thereon, of a 
cover having a flexible flap and a curved strip 
mounted pivotally upon said flap, and having 
notches or slots in opposite edges to engage 
with said studs, the flap carrying said strip 
being provided with openings to receive the 
studs and applied reversely, whereby the cover 
will overlie and protect the strip, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
35 
WILLIAM D. READY. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN RING, 
WM. H. JoHNSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343168.txt	(No Model.) 
... 
P. P. GARDNER, 
." 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
CULTIVATOR, CORN PLANTER, RAKE, AND ROLLER, 
No. 343,168. 
Patented June 8, 1886. 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
seas 
es 
WITWESSES 
  
 
 
 
(337 
7 Fazl- s 77 
 
IWWEWTOF 
7. as Attorneys. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
P. P. GARDNER 
OULTIVATOR, CORN PLANTER, RAKE, AND ROLLER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 343,168, 
Patented June 8, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
f I S. S 
SW. S 
N & s 
a S3 
R 
2SS-S 
3. K Q 
 
 
N. 
S 
 
C 
N v. W., RN IWVEYTop 
2& 
7is Attorneys. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
PATRICK P. 
GARDNER, OF BRADFORD, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JAMES 
B. MARTIN, OF KEND ALL CREEK, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CULTIVATOR, CORN-PLANTER, RAKE, AND ROLLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Fatent No. 343,168, dated June 8, 1886. 
Application filed October 21, 1885. Serial No. 180,53S. No model.) 
- 
s 
. 
. . 
I5 pointed out in the claims. 
To all, whoT, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PATRICK. P. GARDNER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Bradford, in the county of McKean and State 
s of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in a Combined Cultivator, 
Corn-Planter, Rake, and Roller, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings. 
d, pivoted or swiveled at its upper end in a 
Supporting-band, D', having apertures d' d', 
through the upper end of which a pin, d", 
passes to pivotally connect said band D' to the 
inclined neck or end of the middle beam. The 
roller is held in a vertical position when the 
device is used as a seeder by means of a pin, 
D', that passes through the lower aperture, d, 
of the band D and the aperture c of the beam; 
My invention relates to improvements in a and when the machine is used as a cultivator 
the band is adjusted so as to bring its lower 
aperture, d, to register with the aperture c. 
and thus bring the roller out of contact with 
the ground. 
E designates a draft-link pivotally connect 
ed at its rear end to a bracket or loop, e, and 
having a longitudinal slot, e, near its front 
end, through which slot, a curved arm, E, 
passes. A wiffletree is connected to an eye at 
the front end of the link E, to draw the ma 
chine forward, and the curved arm E has two 
or more apertures, e, through one of which a 
stop pin, or bolt, e', passes to limit the play of 
the said draft-link E. The upper ends of the 
handles B are braced and connected by cross 
bars b, and the side bars of said handles are 
provided with two or more apertures, b, 
through which the upper ends of the brace. 
rods b are passed to secure the handles firmly 
and securely in position, while at the same 
time permitting them to be adjusted nearer to 
or farther from the frame of the planter, the 
lower ends of said brace-rods b being pivot 
ally connected to eyes b, secured to the rear 
ends of the side beams of the frame. A. 
. 
F designates shovels or cultivator-bladesse. 
cured to the under surface of the middle and 
side beams, a ct, and arranged as shown in 
Fig. 1. 
When the machine is to be used as a 
planter, only the first three cultivator-blades 
- are employed; but when the seed and fertilizer 
dropping devices are to be thrown out, of use 
and the machine used as a cultivator all of the 
cultivator-blades, five in number, are used to 
throw the earth upon the corn or hills. 
G. designates a table or platform secured 
upon the main frame and supporting the hop 
per, its seed-slide actuating devices, the mark: . 
er, and the continuously-moving raker-frame, 
as will be presently described. The table is 
preferably made in two longitudinal sections, 
IO combined seeding and cultivating machine; 
and it consists in the novel construction and 
combination of the various parts, substantially 
as hereinafter fully set forth, and specifically 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my improved seeder and 
cultivator. Fig.2is a bottom plan view. Fig. 
3 is a vertical longitudinal section on the line 
20 ac a' of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a detail view of the 
platform or table for supporting the operat 
ing devices. Fig. 5 is a detail of the clutch 
mechanism for throwing the driving-shaft out 
of gear with the seed-dropping devices. Fig. 
25 6 is a view in detail of one end of the axle or 
driving-shaft. Fig. 7 is a view of the contin 
uously-reciprocating rake and the pressure 
roller. Fig. 8 is a top plan view of the hop. 
per with the slide therein. 
Referring by letter to the annexed draw 
ings, in which similar letters of reference de 
note corresponding parts in all the figures, A 
designates the frame of my improved cultiva 
tor and seeder, which consists of a middle 
35 longitudinal beam, a, and two side beams, a', 
arranged in an inclined position or at an angle 
thereto, and in the same horizontal plane, the 
forward ends of Said inclined beams a' being 
secured or connected to the middle beam, a, 
4o at or near the front end thereof. At or near 
the middle the inclined side beams are con. 
nected and braced by a curved bar, a, and the 
middle beam, a, is provided with bearing 
blocks or shoulders c, to which the forward 
45 lower ends of the handles B are pivotally con 
nected. The forward end of the middle beam, 
a, is bent upwardly or provided with an in 
clined neck, C. The vertical side faces of the 
bent end of the middle beam are recessed as 
D is a bearing-roller journaled in a bracket, 
So at e and have transverse apertures c' cc. 
W 
55 
75 
86 
so 
. 
95 
. 
IOO 
2 
343,168 
O 
2 5. 
35 
go 
95 
 
ceive a fertilizing substance. Each of the 
gg', which are detachably fitted and bolted to. 
compartments of the hopper has a discharge 
gether and to the main frame. A to permit 
opening, l, in its bottom, and each opening is 
ready access to the various parts for the pur 
covered or protected by an independent slide, 
pose of repairs, &c. 
l, which slides work in grooves provided 
H designates the driving and supporting 
therefor in its bottom. Each slide l' can be 
wheels to the rear end of the main frame, said 
adjusted to any desired distance, by hand, to 
wheels being loosely nounted on a shaft, H. 
The driving-wheels are provided with pawls 
regulate the amount of corn or fertilizer to be 75 
distributed, and they can be used to shut off 
h, that are normally kept in engagement with 
the discharge of seed or fertilizer, or they may 
ratchets h" on the shaft H', to rotate the same; 
be adjusted to permit only seed or fertilizer to 
and the ends of this shaft are supported in the 
be sown independently of each other. 
lower ends of supporting - brackets I. These 
M designates the reciprocating seed-slide, 
brackets comprise two arms, i i", arranged at 
: arranged to slide in ways or guides beneath 
an angle to each other, the arm i of each brack 
the hopper, to permit the discharge at prede 
et being pivoted at its front end to a recessed 
termined and at regular intervals, and to se 
portion of the side beams of the main frane 
cure an even and regular planting of the corn 
and the arm i'thereof having two or more ap 
and equal distribution of fertilizer. The re 
ertures, i', through one of which a locking 
ciprocating slide M is provided at one edge 
hatch, I', is adapted to pass to hold the axle 
with a single aperture or discharge-opening, 
securely in place while permitting of its ver 
tical adjustment, said latch E' being pivoted 
on, which lies beneath the discharge-opening 
in the compartment for the corn; and at its 
to the upper face of the rear ends of the side 
opposite edge said reciprocating slide is pro 
beams of the frame. The arms i' are arranged 
vided with a series of smaller openings, m'. 
between the inner faces of the side beams and 
which are arranged to register with and cut 
guide-plates I, and when the latch I is out of 
off the material from the discharge-exit from 
engagement therewith the shaft or axle and 
the fertilizer-compartment of said hopper. 
driving-wheels are free to move or reciprocate 
M" designates a bell-crank lever pivoted to 
up and down on the pivot of the arms i, and 
the table-section g at the junction of its two 
thus accomunodate the main frame for use as 
arms, one arm of said lever being pivotally 
a cultivator, to permit the blades to enter the 
connected to the reciprocating seed-slide M, to 
ground to any desired depth; but when the 
machine is to be used as a seed-planter the 
actuate the same, and the other arm thereof is 
latches E are thrown into engagement with 
slotted at its other end, as at n, and fitted over 
a headed stud, n, to pivotally connect the said 
one of the apertures of each of the arms i, a 
pawl, I', limiting the upward adjustment of 
arm to a reciprocating bar or link, N. This 
reciprocating bar or link N is fitted to slide lon 
the brackets I, by fitting in the angle formed 
gitudinally of the table within a groove formed 
by the arns i i thereof and pivoted to the in 
ner faces of the side beams, a. The driving 
in the lower section, g, thereof, and at its rear 
end it has a lip or tongue, n', that projects 
shaft or axle carries at or near its middle a 
beveled gear wheel or pinion, j, that meshes 
through a slot or cut-away portion, n, of the 
with a similar pinion, j', on a shaft, J, jour 
lower table-section, g, at or near the middle 
maled in boxesi". These boxes j are mounted 
thereof. 
O designates a shaft arranged transversely 
or secured so as to slide laterally in ways or 
across the lower surface of the table G and 
blocks k, Secured to the under surface of the 
the slot ii' in the lower section thereof, and 
table section g, and to the rear one of these 
said shaft journaled in bearings O at the sides 
boxes j is connected a pin of a lever, K, piv 
oted at k" to the table-section g, and extending 
of the table. This shaft is provided with a 
bevel gear-wheel, O, that meshes with a simi 
rearwardly beyond the same within conven. 
lar gear-wheel, O', on the rear end of the shaft 
ient reach of the operator, who grasps the han 
dles B to guide the machine, whereby, when 
J, and said shaft O is revolved through mo 
tion from the driving-shaft H', transmitted by: 
the lever K is adjusted, or its front end thrown 
inwardly toward the middle of the table-sec 
the shaft J and the bevel gear-wheels jij" O'O', 
as clearly shown in Fig. 2. The shaft Opro 
tion g, the journal-box j of the rear end of 
jects at one end beyond the machine-frame and 
the shaft J will also be thrown or moved to 
table, and is provided with a narker-arm, O, 
ward the middle of the table and out of its 
that is rotated and strikes the ground at reg 
normal position, and will carry with it the 
ular predetermined intervals as the shaft O is 
rear end of the shaft J, and throw the bevel 
gear-wheel j of said shaft out of engagement 
revolved, and said shaft is further provided 
with the wheel j of the driving-shaft, this 
with bent crank-arms p, that are connected 
mechanism being provided for throwing the 
near their lower ends by a cross-bar, p, said 
driving shaft out of engagement with the 
crank-arms revolving with the shaft and work 
seed-slide-actuating devices. 
ing in the slot or cut-away portion n of the 
L designates the hopper, secured upon the 
table. , 
P designates a shaft journaled in bearings 
front end of the table G, and divided into two 
compartments, ll, by a vertical partition, l, p on the lower face of the platform, and hav. 
one of said compartments being adapted to ling a crank-arm, q, at its middle that pro 
receive corn or other seed and the other to re-jects through a slot in the table-section g, and 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I 3O 
343,168 
3 
75 
85 
O 
15 
25 
said arm is pivotally connected to a link, Q, O, except when its said link is forced rear 
Wardly by the crank striking its tongue, and 
that works or reciprocates in a groove or guide 
thus oscillate the shaft P and reciprocate the 
in the upper surface of the table-section, and 
at its front end said link Q is provided with a 
raker-frame. The front cross-bar, S, lies over 
tongue, q, that projects through the opening 
the rear end of the link N, and is normally 
kept depressed upon Said link, to keep the 
or slot in, and is normally kept in the path of 
latter in place by means of a spring, s, se 
rotation of the crank-arm of the shaft O, and 
cured at one end within a recess in the upper 
Serves to cause the Shaft P to oscillate in its 
bearings for a purpose presently described. 
table-section, and free at its other end to bear 
The link N has its lip also normally held in 
on said link N and cross-bar S, which serves 
as a pivot for the raker-frame in its recipro 
the path of rotation of the crank of the shaft 
O by means of a spring, ), rigidly secured at 
cating movements. The seed-slide and raker 
frame reciprocating devices are all hid from 
one end to the table-section g, and bearing at 
its opposite free end on a shoulder or lug, ', 
view and protected by the upper table-section, 
of the bell-crank M', this spring serving to 
g', which is recessed or cut away on its under 
hold the reciprocating seed-slide through the 
surface at proper points, to permit of the 
medium of one arm of the bell-crank lever, so 
proper movement of the various devices, said 
that its discharge-openings m m? do not reg 
section of being detachably secured or bolted 
to the table-section g, to permit its ready re 
ister with the openings in the bottom of the 
moval for the purpose of repairs, &c. 
hopper to cut off the flow of seed and fertil 
izer, and in addition to holding the tongue of 
T designates a roller journaled in the side 
the link in the plane of rotation of the crank 
bars of the roller-frame T, the front ends of 
of the shaft O, so that when the tongue of the 
which are pivoted to arms U in rear of the 
link is struck by the crank in its rotation the 
raker - bar S, and Said frame and roller are 
linkN will be drawn rearwardly, turn or os 
free to work or move independent of the raker 
cillate the bell-cranklever M on its pivot, and 
bar and frame, being loosely connected to said 
frame and of such a weight as to keep the 
reciprocate the seed-slide so that its dis 
charge-apertures 0 m. will register with the 
roller in contact with the ground at all times, 
The gear-wheels ji' are keyed on their shafts 
apertures in the bottom of the hopper and 
with the openings, formed or cut in the table 
H. J., so as to permit of their removal and ex 
Section g, to permit the passage of the corn 
change for similar wheels having a different 
and fertilizer from the platform or table and 
number of teeth, so that the seed-slide can be 
operated more rapidly or at a slower rate, to 
hopper to the ground, and after the crank has 
ceased to act upon the tongue of the link to 
vary the distance apart at which the seed and 
draw it rearwardly the spring 'serves to force 
fertilizer are distributed, as will be very read 
said link forwardly again to its normal posi 
ily understood. 
tion, and to draw the seed-slide apertures from 
The machine may be converted into a drill 
coincidence with hopper and platform aper 
by attaching a Conducting tube or spout or 
tures, to cut off the discharge of seed and fer 
boot to the under surface of the middle beam, 
a, so that it will register with the discharge 
tilizer. 
S designates a rake bar having a series of 
openings therein, and guide the seed and fer 
teeth, S's", arranged to act upon the ground, 
tilizer to the hill. The teeth s' of the rake 
bar S are arranged at each end of the said bar, 
to clear the furrow of leaves, stones, &c., said 
rake-bar being arranged in rear of the ma 
and are longer than the teeths' thereof, which 
chine and supported in curved side bars, S', 
are arranged between the outer teeth, s. The 
which extend upwardly and forwardly of the 
shorter teeth, s, serve to gather up the stones 
machine-platform. The side bars, S', are con 
and leaves, &c., and deposit them at regular 
nected together at their front ends by a cross 
intervals by the reciprocation of the raker 
bar, S', which fits between the table-sections 
frame, and when the machine is used as a cul 
50 g g and in a groove in the lower surface of 
tivator the raker-frame ceases its reciprocatory 
the upper section, g. The side bars lie along 
movements, and the raker-teeth s carry the 
side of the side edges of the table or platform, 
stones and leaves, &c., with it, until, when 
and are provided with loops or eyes t at or 
crossing a hill, the longer teeth, s, elevate the 
frame and bar a sufficient distance to permit 
near the point where the ends of the shaft P 
roject from the side edges of the platform or 
the stones, &c., to escape from the teeth s, 
table, the ends of said shaft being bent to form 
and are deposited in the furrow between the 
crank-armst', which engage or fit in the loops 
hills. 
. The operation of my invention is obvious. 
t of the raker-frame SS, and serve to recip 
rocate said frame to give the rake-bar S a con 
When the machine is to be used as a corn 
planter and fertilizer - distributer, the seed 
tinuous vertical movement when the shaft P 
slides l are properly adjusted to regulate the 
is oscillated through motion from the crank 
shaft O, transmitted by the link Q. The weight 
quantity of Seed and fertilizer to be distribut 
ed, and the bevel-wheelf of the shaftJ thrown 
of the raker-frame serves to keep the crank 
into engagement with the bevel-wheel of the 
arm q of the shaft P normally elevated and in 
its forward position, and thus keep the link Q 
shaft H. When the machine is drawn across 
normally pressed forward, so that its tongue 
the field (the horse being attached to the draft. 
link E and the caster-wheel D, and bearing 
lies in the plane of rotation of the crankshaft 
55 p 
35 
45 
95 
IOO 
O 
I i5 
I 25 
4 
343,168 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
wheels H adjusted in a vertical position to 
bring the cultivator-blades out of the ground) 
the driving-shaft H" is rotated, which in turn 
revolves the shaft J and the crank-shaft O, the 
crank of which acts alternately upon the 
tongues of the links Q and N. The link Nos 
cillates the bell-crank lever M', which recip 
rocates the seed-slide, and the slide, link, and 
bell-crank are forced back to their normal po 
sitions by the Spring ', to bring the tongue of 
the link in the path of the crank to be acted 
upon again, to repeat the above movements. 
The tongue of the link Q, when struck by the 
crank of the shaft O, forces said link rear 
wardly and oscillates the shaft P, which in turn 
reciprocates the raker-frame, giving a con 
tinuous vertical movement thereto. 
If it is desired to employ the machine for 
cultivating purposes, the bearing-wheel D is 
adjusted so as to be out of contact with the 
ground and the shaft H" is adjusted so as to 
bring its wheels Habove the plane of the cul 
tivator-blades, to permit them\to enter the 
ground to the required depth, or said shaft is 
disconnected from the latches I, and given a 
free up-and- down movement in connection 
with its pivoted supporting-brackets to accom 
modate itself to the surface of the ground. 
In moving the machine from one field to an 
other the driving-wheel pawls are disconnect 
ed from the ratchets of the shaft H', and said 
driving-wheels are permitted to rotate freely 
on the shaft without affecting the other parts 
of the machine, 
Various changes in the form and proportion 
of parts and details of construction can be 
made without departing from the principle or 
sacrificing the advantages of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
... The combination of a frame, a vertically. 
movable rake-frame pivoted thereto, the seed 
dropping devices, a driving-shaft, a crank 
shaft, an intermediate shaft geared with the 
driving and crank shafts, and mechanism in 
termediate of the crank-shaft and the rake 
and seed-dropping mechanism for simultane 
ously operating the latter, Substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination of a frame, a continu 
ously-movable rake, mechanism on the frame 
for actuating the rake, and a roller pivoted to 
and movable independently of the rake-frame, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the frame, a continu 
ous vertically-moving rake, the seed-dropping 
mechanism, and a roller pivoted to the rake. 
frame, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the frame, the seed 
dropping devices, a marker actuated simulta 
neously with the seed-dropping mechanism, 
and a vertically-moving rake, substantially as 
described. 
5. The combination of the frame, the seed 
dropping mechanism, a marker operated si 
multaneously there with, a continuous verti. 
cally-moving rake, and a roller pivoted to 
the rake-frame, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of the frame, a driv 
ing - shaft mounted therein, a crank - shaft 
geared to the said driving-shaft, a continuous 
vertically-moving rake, and connections be 
tween said crank-shaft and the rake for oper 
ating the latter, substantially as described. 
7. The combination of the frame, a driv 
ing shaft, a crank-shaft geared to the driving 
shaft, a reciprocating seed-slide, a bell-crank 
lever connected to said slide, and a link con 
nected to the bell-crank lever and normally 
held in the path of rotation of the crank of 
the shaft, substantially as described. 
8. The combination of the frame, a driv 
ing-shaft, a crank-shaft geared therewith, a 
continuous vertically-moving rake, an oscil 
lating shaft connected with the rake-frame, 
and having a link normally in the plane of 
rotation of the crank, a reciprocating seed 
slide, a spring-actuated bell-crank lever con 
nected to said slide, and a link pivotally con 
nected to the bell-crank lever and maintained 
thereby in the plane of rotation of the crank 
shaft, substantially as described. 
9. The combination of the frame, a driv 
ing-shaft, a crank - shaft, an intermediate 
shaft geared to the driving and crank shafts, 
the seed-dropping mechanism, a reciprocating 
rake, and a lever for throwing the driving 
and intermediate shafts out of engagement, 
substantially as described. 
10. The combination of a frame, a driving 
shaft journaled therein, a crank-shaft, also 
journaled on the frame, an intermediate shaft 
arranged at right angles to the driving and 
crank shafts and geared thereto, laterally 
movable boxes in which the intermediate shaft 
is journaled, a pivoted lever for actuating the 
boxes to throw the intermediate shaft in and 
out of gear with the driving and crankshafts, 
the seed-dropping mechanisms, and interme 
diate devices between the crank-shaft and the 
seed-dropping devices for actuating the lat 
ter, substantially as described. 
11. The combination of the frame, a driv 
ing-shaft mounted therein, the seed-dropping 
mechanism, a crank-shaft for actuating the 
said mechanism, an intermediate shaft geared 
to the driving and crank shafts, a reciprocat 
ing rake-frame carrying rake-teeth, an oscil 
lating shaft journaled in the frame and having 
crank-arms connected with the rake-frame, a 
link pivoted to the oscillating shaft and ar 
ranged in the plane of rotation of the crank 
shaft, and a roller mounted in a frame and 
pivotally connected with the reciprocating 
rake-frame, substantially as described. 
12. The combination of the frame, a driv 
ing-shaft journaled therein, a crank-shaft, an 
intermediate shaft geared to the driving and 
crank shafts, sliding journal-boxes in which 
the intermediate shaft is mounted, a pivoted 
lever connected with one of said sliding boxes, 
the seed-dropping mechanism, an oscillating 
shaft having a link arranged to be struck by 
. 
7o 
75 
85 
9O 
95 
IOO 
O 
If 5 
I 25 
343,168 
5 
the crank-shaft, a hinged rake-frame connect 
ed with bent arms of the oscillating shaft, and 
a roller pivoted to the rake-frame in rear of 
the rake-bar supported therein, substantially 
as described. 
13. The combination of a frame, a driving 
shaft carrying the bearing-wheels, the brack 
ets I, having the driving-shaft journaled there 
in, and each comprising two angular arms, 
One of which is pivoted to the frame and the 
other perforated, a pivoted latch for each 
bracket adapted to enter one of the apertures 
O 
of one arm thereof and to adjust the bracket 
and driving-shaft vertically, and pivoted 
pawls engaging one arm of the brackets, sub- I5 
stantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own, I have hereto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
PATRICK P. GARDNER. 
. Witnesses: 
MOSES SULLIVAN, 
A. P. EUEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343269.txt	(No Model.) 
f, GEIGER. 
PROJECTILE. 
No. 343,269, 
Patented June 8, 1886. 
 
 
WITWE 
IWWEWOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEONARD GEIGER, OF HUDSON, NEW YORK. 
PROJECTILE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 343,269, dated June 8, 1886. 
Application filed October 20, 1885. Selial No. 180,397. No model.) 
55 
75 
in scraping the residuum out of the barrel, and 
To all whom it naily concern: 
thereby gives greater accuracy in shooting. 
Be it known that I, LEONARD GEIGER, a 
My invention comprises, essentially, a pro 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hud 
son, in the county of Columbia and State ofjectile which, while having a series of slight 
depressions or shallow depressed lines adapt: 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Projectiles, of which the 
ed to receive a lubricant and to keep the bore 
following is a specification, reference being 
of the rifle clean, is without deep grooyes 
designed and adapted to receive expansive 
had therein to the accompanying drawings, in 
gases while in the arm, and which will after 
which- 
o 
leaving it present positive abutting projections 
Figure 1 represents aside elevation of a pro 
against which the air will act, not only retard 
jectile constructed according to my improve 
ing the flight of the projectile, but also tending 
ment. Figs. 2 and 3 are similar views of modi 
fications; and Fig. 4 a horizontal transverse 
to change its direction. 
In my projectile the surface of the body is 
section of the same enlarged. 
scarified or roughened by shallow depressions 
This invention relates more particularly to 
or lepressed lines easily distinguishable from 
that class of projectiles used in small-arms; 
and it consists in the peculiar construction of the deep grooves which form ribs on the Sur" 
face of the projectile which have the faults 
the same, as hereinafter more fully described 
and claimed. 
above mentioned. 
My projectile has a plain cylindrical surface 
Heretofore projectiles have been provided 
which, although comparatively smooth in gen 
with grooves encircling the projectiles or ar 
ranged spirally upon the cylindrical body 
eral outline, has a roughened surface that 
thereof. Such grooves, however, have always 
serves to hold a labricant and to present at 
cleaning-surface to the inner face of the barrel. 
been made sufficiently deep to allow the pas 
sage of the gases of explosion, or have been 
What I claim as new is 
1. A bullet having a cylindrical body pro 
made deep for other purposes. The conse 
vided with a scarified or rough surface formed 
quence of such construction, however, is that 
the displaced metal not only materially re 
over the same by numerous shallow depres 
sions or depressed lines of insufficient depth 
duces the weight of the projectile, but the abut 
ting surfaces formed by the recesses are acted 
to form abutting surfaces, as set forth. 
- P - 
2. A solid bullet having a cylindrical body. 
upon by the atmosphere to retard the project 
with its surface roughened by two series of 
ille. These are serious defects. To overcome 
shallow and closely-adjacent depressed lines 
these difficulties and provide means for lubri 
arranged in opposite spirals, and constructed 
cation and for keeping the barrel clean, I pro 
pose to form in any convenient way, but prefer 
to hold a lubricant without presenting air-abutt 
ably by 'knurling,' a series of shallow de 
ting surfaces, as set forth. 
3. A projectile having a lead body and a 
pressed lines, preferably in the form shown in 
hard-metal coating extendling from its point 
Fig.1-that is to say, with two series of such 
lines set slightly spiral and running in oppo 
rearward, and provided with a series of shal 
site directions. In lieu of this, a single series 
low depressions or indentations of insufficient 
depth to form abutting surfaces, substantially 
of independent lines may be used, as shown in 
Fig. 2, or a series of slight depressions, as 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
shown in Fig. 3; but I prefer the form shown 
in Fig. 1. 
I also prefer that the outer surface 
in 
gence of two witnesses, this 19th day of 
of the projectile shall have a coating of copper, 
Oct...ier, 1885. 
as shown in my Patent No. 306,739; but do not 
limit myself to coated projectiles. The coat 
Witnesses: 
ed projectiles, however, have the advantage 
that the edges of the lines have greater effect 
FRE). WATI, Es, 
CHAs. I, AZIETON. 
IEONART) (EIGER, 
O 
5 
2 5 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343369.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
0), IHAPIP"(KIR, 
000IING AIB IN BEFBIGBBAT0RS, &0, 
INo. 343,369, 
Patented Jtime 8, 1886. 
? 
N? ? 
- FT? ? 
?? 
STS 
- 
- 
? 
ii) 
 
3: 
C 
 
| 
? 
?) 
| 
: 
a 
a) 
---Au) --- 
EIE - 
7 
LTe 
. T) 
- 
 
- 1N?/EINTT IIF??_- 
-lzi/%/4 4? 
R. PETEHs Photo-Lithogragher, Wathington, D.C. 
| 
 
 
UNTTED STATES IPATENT OFFICE. 
CHARIES HAFFCKB, OF IBAIMORE, MARYIAND. 
COOLING AIR IN REFRIGERATORS, &ac. 
gPECIFICATIOINT forming part of Ietters Patent o. 343.369, diated Jume 8, 1886. 
- 
Application filerl March 31, 185 Serial N0.1(0,755. (No model.) 
-- 
- 
- 
IC) 
I5 
25 
Z) 177 717ion, i n a0712en) 
Theblocksofice (represented by ID) 1est on 
Beitlknown that II, CEIARIEs IHAFFCIKE, of|the bars), and are prevented fr0m t0uching 
the City of IBaltimoreand State of Maryland, || the vallsof theice-chamber by means ofstripS 
.have invented Certain Improvements in the 
6, whichadmit ofair Girculatingfreelyal0und 
art of Irigeration, of which the following is a 
the blocks ofice. The trays i Contain Com 
Specification. 
mon Salt or Clloride of S0Citim, and aS the 
Ilhe fiTSt IDart of my invention Irelates to an 
dirip from the meltingice falls thereto itstem 
imulprovedimethod of Ireducingthetemperature 
peratute is lowered by the liquefaction of a 
Of Water IeSulting from the liqmefaction ofice 
portion of the salt. Ilhe Salt-saturated Water 
ina frigerating-Chambertoincreaseitscooling 
Ipasses of to a Ipam, / havingran eSCape-II)illDe, 
infitlence on the surrounding air. 
17, leading to the exterior ofthe chamber. 
Ihe Second part of thesaidinvention relates 
IE is a hopper, formed of Some IDe1forate 
t0 the Construction ofthe frigerating-chamber, 
Imaterial, preferably galvanized Woven Wine, 
Whereby itis adapted to the carrying out of 
to comtain Salt; and it may extend Ipartially Or 
the 1method above alluded to. 
entitely around the Chamber, as inay be I0IIe 
Ille third Ipart ofthe Said invemition relates 
ferred. The salt in the hopper Babsorb8 
t0 IlleamS for abSorbing 1moisture from the air 
moisture from the air in the Chamber, Whicll 
in the frigerating - chamber, and difusin 
air becomes strongly saline and an efective 
throughout the Said chamber a salime atimos 
reservative agent. Water resulting from the 
2o Iphere Which has antiseptic qualities, and 
absorption of moisture by the salt falsto the 
thereby assists in the preservation of meats 
pani, fromwhichitescapesthroughthe10ipei. 
IplaCed in the Chamber. 
The liquefaction of Saltin the h0101)et IE al80 
My improved methodl of increasing the 
lowers the temperature of the airin the Com- 76 
frigerating efect of abody oficein a, Chamber 
artiment C. 
consists, broadly, in conducting the water of 
It maybe wel to combine with the chloride 
liquefaction to aseparatedbody ofsaltorchlo 
of sodium some prophylactic-sucll aS Iper 
1ide Of 80Cium Situated beneath the meltin 
Imangamate of Ipotash-to Clestroy gerimS C011 
ice, Whereby a, 100rtion of the saltis liquefied 
taimedin the Waterresultingfromtheliglefac? 8O 
and the teimperature of the Water and the air 
tion 0fice. 
in Contactitherewith Ireduced, IBy thismethod 
Iam aware that Common Salt) (chloride of 
drain on the ice is lessened at the expense of 
sodium)hasbeencombined Withicein a figer 
Salt, Which is a C0mparatively inexpensive 
ator toincrease the coolingefect of theideby 
aiticle. 
hastening itsliquefaction; butinthe first Ipart 
In the drawings, forminga parthereof Fig 
of my invention, in which I use ide and Salt, 
IIeS II andl II are VertiCal sections of the im 
Iseparate the salt from the ice and Couduct 
IDroWed frigerating-Chainber as Seen from dif 
only water 1esulting from the melting ice t0 
ferent SiCleS. . 
the salt, which Wateris cooled by the ligule 
A is a Chamber, Which may be a room or a 
faction of a portion ofthesalt. IBythis ineamS 9? 
frigerator adapted for household use, having 
I cool the drip-water and the air in Contact 
therewithatithe expense of a Smal guantity of 
Suitable Walls, M. 
- 
IB iS the ice-Compartiment, separated from 
Salt, which is comparatively inexpenSiWe. 
the C00ling-Compartiment C, by means of bars 
IFurther, Iamawarethatchloride of Caldium 
). 
Ilhese bars, which in a large building 
has been exposed in a frigerating-Chamber t0) 95 
Wold Constitute joists, areprovided with me 
absorb moisture from the airthetein; but thiS 
tallic shedding-strips 6, to conduct water re 
salt willinot answer the purpose Which I haVe 
Sulting fron liquefaction of the ice to below 
in view, partily owingto itsextreme deliques 
them and to inclimed removable trays i, sup 
cence, but principally for the reason thatit 
100rted by any Suitable mechamism. The shed 
will inot difuse a salime atimosphere in the IPO 
dingstitips, While preferably constructed to 
chamber. Instead of chloride of Calcium II 
C0ver the upper Sides of the bars), asshown, 
employ chloride ofsodium, which Ifindis Suf 
1maybeattached to their Indersides, as indi 
ficientily deliquescent for all 
practical pur 
cated in dotted lines, IFig. II, 
poses, and by its use Ian enabled to obitain 
85 
35 
45 
 
? 
343,369 
- 
inVentiol- 
a Salineatimil0spllere in the Chumber Wilicll in 
itselfis a 10reserving agent. 
I ClisClain the Ulse Of Combined iCe aind Salt 
inal frige1ating-clamber, as also an exposed 
b00ly of clloride of calcium, but claimas my 
1. Ille 1methodl of Iroducingthetemperature 
Ofair in al frigerating-Cliambet containing ice 
witillotltincreasing the drain on the ice, which 
C0msists in Con(litictingtile Waterresultingfrom 
liquelliction of tle ice to a separated l)0dy of 
clloride of sodium and the brine Irestultant 
from tle Said Claimbet, substantially as and 
for the IDIrp0Se Specifie(1. 
2. In:lfrigerating-cliamber dividledlintotwo 
C01l)artielts ly ileans of bars, the Combilma 
tion Ofal Stll)1001t f01 the ide, a tray to Teceive 
the Clrip fron tle ice, Containing cloride of 
sodinm, and meausto conductithesalt solution | 
to the exteriot of the chamber, substantially 
as al(l fot the purp0se specified. 
3. Ill a frigerating-cliamber, a, 10erforate 
liol)lipet Coltaing cllotide of SoClium, Com 
bined Writh leams to C011(luct the Salt Solutio11 | 
IC) 
15 
2C) 
IeSulting from the ab80rption by the Salt of 25 
moisture from the airintle Chamber, Substan 
tially as and for tle Ipurpose specifiedl. 
4. In combination with a frigerating-Cham 
ber, an exposed body of clloridle of Sodium 
arrangedlto albsorbimoisturefromithe ailin tille 
chamber, and to establishin the Saiddhamber 
a Saline atimosphere, SullDStantially als aln(l for 
the I0IItp0Se Specified. 
5. In combination with a frigerating-cham 
ber, a, 10erforate hopper Containing a body Of 35 
chloride ofsodiumarranged to albsorb 1moist 
Ulre from the air in the chamber, andl to eS 
tal)lishintleSaiClCliamberal Salineatml10SI)hele, 
Substantially as ald forthe Ipurpose Specified. 
hopperdontaining Chloride of S0dium, Sect11ed 
totille Wall of the Said Cliamber, Stubstalintially 
as and for the purp0se specifiedl. 
6. In a frigerating-Chamber, al, 10etforate 4o 
- 
CIHIAIRIIS IHIAIRITCIXII. 
Vit11CSSes: 
JOIN VIIIIAMIs, 
IDANI, IPISHIER. 
-- 
*. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343469.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 343,469. 
J. A. MALONEY. 
CONVERTIBLE TELEGRAPH KEY. 
Patented June 8, 1886. 
G. 
 
t 
El m 
AITTI. 
 
G E. 2-1E 
s 
e 
WITNES 
2ed . zz24. 
M 
2- 
INVENTOR 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Waahington, O.C. 
s 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A. MALONEY, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
CONVERT BLE TELEGRAPH - KEY, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 343,469, dated June 8, 1886, 
Application filed April 20, 1886. Serial No. 199,537. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that, JAMESA.MALONEY, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at Washing 
ton, in the District of Columbia, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Con 
vertible Telegraph-Keys; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
The invention relates to telegraph-keys, and 
has for its object an improvement on the in 
strument shown in my Patents. No. 336,653, of 
February 23, and No. 339,909, of April 13, 
1886, and has special reference to the con 
Struction of the opposite contact, or anvil. 
In my former patents three-separate oppo. 
site contact-points are shown for the lever to 
strike against, while the lever is adapted to 
Operate at any angle of inclination, and would 
Strike an opposite contact or anvil at any point 
of a circle described by its revolution. In 
practice with this key it has been discovered 
that the lever must be carefully adjusted to 
bring the hammer thereonin line with the sep 
arate opposite contacts or anvils on the frame 
against which it is intended to operate. This 
adjustment of the lever involves a loss of time 
in changing the instrument from a vertical to 
a right or left hand instrument, and to over 
come this objection I have devised my present 
improvement. 
The invention will hereinafter be described, 
and particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a plan; Fig. 2, a side elevation, and Fig. 3 an 
end view. 
Reference being had to the drawings and the 
letters marked thereon, A indicates the base 
upon which the several parts of the instrument 
are mounted. 
B is the key or operating-lever, made in two 
parts, a b, arranged in the same lineal plane 
and between which is interposed a leaf-spring, 
c, which renders the lever flexible and imparts 
to it a degree of resiliency capable of return 
ing the lever to its normal position after each 
stroke produced by the hand of the operator. 
The section a of the lever Bis provided with a 
journal, d, which is seated in a journal-bear- : 
ing, e, formed in the post C, which is secured 
to the base A. The journal dis securely held 
in its bearing e by means of a screw, h, which 
is provided with an enlarged head, i, which 
bears against the rear face of the post C while 
the screw engages with the end of the lever 
forming the journal. 
The lever B is secured in any position in 
which it may be desired to operate it by a 
It will be observed that by jour 
set-screw, k. 
naling the lever in the plane of its longitudinal 
axis it rotates thereon, and is capable of being 
operated vertically, right and left hand hori 
Zontally, or at any angle of inclination inter 
nediate of its horizontal plane. To accom 
modate this adjustment of the lever B and to 
provide an opposite contact or anvil adapted 
to receive the impact of the hammer a on said 
lever at any point in its revolution below its 
horizontal plane, I have devised the anvill, 
which may be made of any material which is 
a good conductor and not liable to oxidation. 
In the present instance the anvil l is pro 
vided with a continuous contact-surface, n, 
in the form of an arc of a circle corresponding 
with the sweep of the hammer or upper con 
tact, a?, and is sectared to the base-plate in the 
usual manner. By this construction of the 
anvil a continuous surface, without any break 
in its continuity, is presented to the hammer 
(t on the lever B of the instrument, whereby 
any adjustment of said lever will always find 
an opposite contact against which the ham 
mer may operate below its horizontal plane. 
D is an arm which may be secured to or form 
an integral part of the section a of lever B 
and revolves there with. The arm D projects 
Out from said section at of the lever B imme 
diately over the section b, and is provided with 
a screw, n, which projects through the arm, 
and at its lower end engages with the lever B 
to regulate the space through which said lever 
travels in signaling. 
To prevent any possible lateral movement 
of the lever in signaling, an aperture or seat, 
o, is formed in the lever into which the end of 
the screw in projects. 
Eisan arc-shaped frame, race, or guide, which 
forms a bearing-surface foracushioning-spring, 
p, which is adjusted by a screw, q, supported 
by the lever B. The lever is also provided 
. 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
35 
5. 
 
343,469 
5 
O 
with the usual button, F, and to the base-plate 
A are secured binding-posts CG, and a switch 
lever, JH. 
It is obvious that the contact-surface of the 
anvil can be extended to form a circle should 
it be found expedient. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
l. A telegraph key having a revoluble op 
erating-lever, in combination with an anvil 
provided with a continuous contact-surface 
adapted to receive the impact of the lever at 
any angle at which it may be desired to operate 
the instrument, substantially as described. 
2. A telegraph-key having a revoluble op 
erating-lever, in combination with an anvil 
provided with a continuous contact-surface in 
the form of an arc of a circle, substantially as 
described. 
3. A telegraph-key having a revoluble op 
erating-lever, a space regulating device se 
cured to and revolving with said lever, in 
combination with an anvil provided with a 
continuous opposite contact-surface, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
JAMES A. MALONEY. 
Witlesses: 
B. LEWIS BLACKFORD, 
R. C. TODHUNTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343569.txt	No. 343,569, 
Patented June 15, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
- 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithog 
rather, Washington, E. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 343,569, 
C. W. COOPER. 
HYDRAULIC ENGINIE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 15, 1886. 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. W. 000 PER 
HYDRAULIC ENGINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 343,569, 
Patented June 15, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, R. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 343,569, 
C. W. COOPER, 
HYDRAULIC ENGINE 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N N 
 
 
Zee: 
 
 
(No Model.) 
C. W. COOPER. 
HYDRAUTIC ENGINE 
5 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
No. 343,569, 
- 
Patented June 15, 1886, 
 
N, PEERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, B.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. COOPER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
HY D RAU L- C EN G 1 N E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 343,569, dated June 15, 1886. 
Application filed April 27, 1883. Serial No. 93,069. (No model.) 
To all, ??????, it ??? concerre: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs W. COOPER, 
of the city of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Hydraulic En 
gines, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates, generally, to double 
acting hydraulic engines, which are operated 
by water-pressure to drive pumps or other 
machinery, and which severally comprise a 
double-acting piston working in a cylinder. 
The water-pressure for operating the engine 
may be obtained from any natural source-as, 
for example, a waterfall-or from any artificial 
source-as, for instance, that which may be 
obtained from any kind of pump; but if a pump 
is employed to produce pressure for operating 
the engine a pump having a fly-wheel is pref 
erable. 
The invention relates to the construction 
and method or means of operating both the 
induction-valves which control the admission 
of water under pressure to an engine-cylinder, 
and the eduction-valves, which are independ 
ent of the induction-valves, and which control 
the exhaust or discharge of water from the 
engine - cylinder after performing its work 
therein. 
In carrying out my invention I arrange the 
eduction-valves so that they close in the same 
direction in which water is to pass through 
them, and I connect them together so that the 
closing of one effects the opening of the other. 
I also arrange the induction-valves so that 
they close in the same direction in which the 
water is to pass through them, and also con 
nect them together so that the opening of one 
insures the closing of the other. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with the main cylinder and piston of a dou 
ble-acting hydraulic engine and induction 
valves therefor, of eduction-valves independ 
ent of the induction-valves, closing in the same 
direction in which water is to pass through 
them, and connected as hereinafter described, 
whereby the closing of one effects the opening 
of the other, passages through which water 
passes from the induction-valves to the main 
cylinder, and auxiliary pistons connected with 
the eduction-valves and operative by the press 
ure of water in said passages to shift the educ 
tion-valves. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
The invention also consists in the combina 
tion, with the main cylinder and piston of a 
double-acting hydraulic engine and induction 
valves closing in the same direction in which 
water is to pass through them, and connected 
together, as hereinafter described, whereby 
the opening of one insures the closing of the 
other, of passages through which water passes 6 
from the induction-valves to the main cylin 
der, the induction-valves when closed being 
acted upon by the pressure of water in said 
passages, eduction-valves independent of the 
induction-valves, closing in the same direction 
in which water is to pass through them, and 
connected together as hereinafter described, 
whereby the closing of one effects the opening 
of the other, and auxiliary pistons connected 
with the eduction-valves and operative by the 
pressure of the water in said passages to shift 
Said eduction-valves. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal section of a double acting hy 
draulic engine embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 is a similar section of an engine of modified 
form, also embodying the invention. Fig. 3 is 
a similar section of an engine of another form, 
also embodying the invention. Fig. 4 is a 
similar section of another engine, also embody 
ing the invention. Fig. 5 is a transverse ver 
tical section on the dotted line ac ae, Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 is a longitudinal section of still another 
form of engine, also embodying the invention; 
and Fig. 7 is a transverse vertical section of 
the engine shown in Fig. 6 upon the dotted 
line y J. 
In most of the figures of the drawings the 
engine is shown in combination with a pump 
which is driven by it; but neither the pump 
portion of the apparatus nor the combination 
of the engine and pump is to be considered as 
a part of my invention. 
The invention relates only to the engine or 
driving portion of the machine, and the pump 
merely serves as an illustration of a useful 
purpose to which the power of the engine 
may be applied. 
In the several figures of the drawings I have 
shown only such parts as are necessary to illus 
trate muy invention; but have not fully ilus 
trated all the details of construction-as, for 
instance, the pump-cylinders, valve-chambers, 
&c., and the bolts for securing the several 
75 
85 
IOO 
 
343,569 
90 
95 
OC 
5 
I.3 
I I5 
5 
IO 
25 
parts together; but all su clh features will be 
readily understood by skilled mechanies fa 
miliar with hydraulie apparatus. 
The engine shown in Fig.1 includes two sin 
gle-acting engine pistons and cylinders, which 
constitute the piston and cylinder for a double 
acting engine and an intermediate double-act 
ing pump piston and cylinder for raising a 
comparatively large quantity of water to a 
height or pressure less tham that from which 
the engine derives its supply. 
A designates the pump-cylinder, which may 
be provided with suitable suction and dis 
charge valves. (Not here shown.) This cylin 
der is provided with inlet and outlet ports s, 
controlled hy such valves. 
B designates the pltmp-piston which works 
in said cylinder, and may be provided with 
any suitable packing. In this instance the 
ends of the cylinder A have secured to them 
engine-cylinders C C, which together consti 
tute the cylinder of the double-acting engine 
and which are of smaller diameter, and D D 
designate plungers or pistons attached to or 
formed with the piston B, and which work in 
said engine-cylinders C C. These pistons or 
plungers are hollow, and communicate through 
holes a with the cylinder A on opposite sides 
of the piston B, and the passage through them 
is controlled by valves E. E", which have long 
stems b l', extending through the pistons D D 
and abutting against each other in the piston 
B. The said steins do mot conne in absolute 
contact; but they are separated by a flexible 
diaphragm, c, in the piston B, which prevents 
leakage through the pistol), and they are of 
Such length that the valves E E can never be 
both closed at the saime tine. The opeming 
movements of the valves E E are limited by 
pins c, which enter slots c' in the valve rods 
or stems b lo'. 
Upon the backs of the valves E E are se 
cured auxiliary pistons FF, which have their 
outer ends of reduced diameter, for a purpose 
hereinafter described, and which are adapted 
to enter cylinders G G' in the ends of the cyl 
inders CC. These auxiliary pistons should 
be about half the area of the pistons D D'. 
H designates the induction-valve piece, 
Which as here shown, consists of a simple 
cylinder adapted to close on either of two 
Seats, dd, in a casing, H, into which the inlet. 
pipe H enters. The piece II therefore con 
Stitutes two valves. Each seat d d is formed 
With side openings, 1, and ribs or guides 2, and 
at the ends of the casing H' are chamberse e', 
into one or the other of which the water passes 
when the valve is open, and from which pipes 
ff lead to the ends of the auxiliary cylinders 
G. G. The chambers e e and pipes ff sim 
ply form passages, through which water passes 
from the valve to the engine-cylinders C C. 
The valve-piece H always opens outward 
relatively to the engine-cylinders-as, for ex 
ample, it moves toward the left hand to ad 
mit water to the right-hand clylinder C, and 
Vice versa. In starting the engine the valve 
piece H may be operated manually by means 
of the push-rods s'. As shown in the draw 
ings, the water enters through the valve-seat 
d, chamber e, and pipef, to the left-hand en 
gine-cylinder C, and forces the pistons D B D' 
toward the right. The valve E is at this time 
closed, but the valve E is open, and the water 
in the cylinder C passes through said valve 
and the hollow piston ID' into the cylinder A. 
on the right-hand side of the piston B, and 
augments the discharge therefrom. At the 
Same time the cylinder A, on the left-hand side 
of the piston B, is being filled with water by 
Suction. This Innovement continues un til the 
piston F enters the cylinder G', whereupon 
the water in that cylinder will be forced back 
ward into the cylinder C, while the smaller 
part of the piston F is entering and until the 
piston comes to so tight a fit that no water can 
pass. Then the pressure on the piston D will 
be partly balanced by the pressure on the 
Slmaller area of the piston F, and before the 
pistons can move farther to the right the press 
ure, acting upon the difference in area between 
the pistons D and F, must become great enough 
to do the work, because, as the pressure in 
creases in the chamber C, it must necessarily 
become equally high in the pipe f and cham 
ber e' before the valve-piece H can be forced 
from its seat d against that pressure. If a fly 
wheel pump is employed to supply water un 
der pressure through the pipe H I*, the momen 
tum of the fly-wheel of said pump will cause 
the additional pressure to be obtained on the 
piston ID the instant there is any check to the 
current supplied througll the pipe H, and the 
movement of the pistons toward the right will 
continue until the pressure produced in the 
pipe f' and chamber e by the movement of the 
small piston F into its cylinder G', acting on 
the right-hand end of the induction - valve 
piece H, moves it away from the seat d' and 
closes it on the Seat d. The water from the 
pipe H then has free passage through the 
chamber e' and pipef" into tlue auxiliary cyl 
inder G', and by reason of the momentum of 
tle fly. Wheel of the pump which supplies the 
water, or of the water itself, the pressure is in 
creased in the cylinder G' until it is sufficient, 
by acting through the valve-stems b l', to move 
the valve E fron its seat. The water in the 
cylinder C then has a free outlet through the 
hollow piston D into the cylinder A on the 
left-hand side of the piston. At the same time 
that the pressure on the auxiliary piston F. 
opens the valve E it will close the valve E, 
alud if said valve is not entirely closed when 
the larger or tightly-fitting part of the piston 
F leaves the cylinder G' the friction of the 
water in passing between the cylinder and the 
Sinaller part of the piston will retain a press 
ure behind the piston F sufficient to complete 
the closing of the valve E. In point of fact 
the valve E would be entirely closed by the 
current, even if the piston should entirely 
leave the cylinder G' before its closing move 
ment is completed. A Slmall quantity of wa 
55 
?? 
65 
 
343,569 
3 
5 
O 
ter might, however, escape through the valve pistons is somewhat smaller than the area of 
E before it is entirely closed, and to prevent 
the valves. This arrangement of the induction 
this loss of power I make the pistons FF of 
and eduction valves is particularly desirable, 
reduced diameter at the ends, so that they 
because the cliest or casing wherein they are 
may penetrate the cylinders farther in their 
all arranged may be placed in any suitable 
situation relatively to the engine and pump, 
entering movement before confining the water 
to reverse the stroke, and as a consequence 
and at a distance therefrom, if desired, and 
the pipes ff. h. h may be prolonged and con 
will have sufficient movement on the reverse 
stroke to close the valves E E before leaving 
nected, as here shown, with the chambers e e' 
the cylinders. As soon as the piston F leaves 
g of'. As here shown, the valve His closed 
the cylinder G', the pressure in mediately falls 
onto the seat d", and the water is entering 
to that necessary to move the engine by acting 
the cylinder C through the pipef, and forc 
on the larger area of the piston D', and the 
ing the pistons D B D' toward the right, the 
pistons D', B, and Dare then all moved toward 
water in front of the piston D' exhausting 
through the pipe h' and chamberg, valve E, 
the left hand to make the return-stroke. 
Although I have stated that the momentum 
chamber g, and pipe g". This operation con 
of a fly-wheel on the pump which supplies the 
tinues until the auxiliary piston Fenters the 
water through the pipe H is depended on to 
small cylinder G', and thereby increases the 
increase the pressure automatically when the 
pressure in the pipef' and chamber e' suffi 
auxiliary pistons FF are entering and leav 
ciently to move the valve-piece H from its 
ing their small cylinders G G', the same result 
seat d". By the pressure in the pipe f' and 
might be attained by the monentum of the 
chamber e' the valve-piece H will be moved 
water in the supply-pipe H, if the later be 
over sufficiently to close the side openings, 1, 
long enough. 
in the seat d, and hence the water from the 
Although I have here shown two separate 
pipe H will no longer exert any tendency to 
cylinders, CC, and two pistons, D D, they 
hold said piece H against the seat d. As soon 
are each only single-acting-one piston, D, 
as this takes place, the chamber e' is, through 
forcing the pump-piston B toward the right 
the chamber e, pipef, cylinder C, and pipe h 
and the other piston, D', forcing it toward the 
in momentary communication with the cham 
left-and therefore the two cylinders and their 
berg, and hence the pressure in both the cham 
pistons form but one double-acting engine. 
be's e' and g is balanced; but as the area of the 
In the form of apparatus shown in Fig. 2 
valve E is larger than that of the piston i', 
the construction and arrangement of the cyl 
said valve remains seated. As soon, how. 
inder A and its ports s, the piston B, the cyl 
ever, as the valve-piece H, by the combined 
inders C C G G', and their pistons D D F F 
action of the pressure in the passage e' and 
are the same as before described, except that 
from the inlet-pipe H, is forced onto its seat 
there are no water-passages through the pis 
d, the pressure accumulates or increases in 
tons D D, and the auxiliary pistons FF are 
the chamber e? until it is sufficient, acting on 
the auxiliary piston i', to open the valve E 
formed on or attached rigidly to them. The 
auxiliary pistons FF need not, however, be 
and close the valve E. The piston D is there 
attached to the pistons D D'. They might be 
upon relieved of pressure, and the increased 
independent of said pistons D D, but so ar 
pressure in the cylinder G' forces the piston 
ranged that the pistons DD would abut against 
F, together with the pistons D B D, toward 
and move them in terminating their move 
the left. As soon as the piston F leaves the 
ments. This latter arrangement might in 
cylinder G', the pressure of water falls, and, 
deed be preferable, because the accurate align 
acting on the whole area of the piston D", 
ment of the auxiliary cylinders G G with the 
makes the return-stroke of the several pistons 
cylinders C C will not be necessary. 
D. B. D. In this example of my invention, 
also, the two single-acting cylinders and pis 
The construction and arrangement of the 
casing H', the inductiou-valve piece H, with 
tons C C D D' constitute a single double-act 
ing engine. 
its seats did, the inlet-pipe H', the chambers 
e e', and pipes.ff' are all as before described. 
In Fig. 3 I have represented a double-act 
The eduction-valves EE are arranged in cham 
ing engine which may be employed for work 
bers gg, which communicate, through open 
ing pumps or for other kinds of work. In 
this case C designates the engine-cylinder and 
ings controlled by the said valves, with all in 
D the piston thereof, which transmits power 
termediate chamber, g, from which leads a 
discharge-pipe, g. The valves E E' are con 
through its rod D'. 
nected by a rod or stem, b, so that the closing 
The arrangement of the induction-valve 
piece H, its chest or casing H', provided with 
of either valve effects the opening of the other, 
seats d d and inlet-pipe H', is the same as 
and the valve-chambers g g are connected by 
pipes h h' with the ends of the cylinders C. C. 
previously described, and from the casing the 
Between the chamberse e' and the adjacent 
water passes through either seat and into the 
chambers, gg, are openings or Small cylinders 
passage or chalmber e or e. Opposite the ends 
a' a', in Willich work auxiliary pistons i i", at 
of the induction-valve are arranged rods f"f, 
which are each adapted to slide in a bearing, 
; tached to or formed with the valves EE, and 
by their movements controlling the opening 
f", and are moved away from the valve by 
springs f, arranged between the bearing and 
and closing of said valves. The area of these 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
13C 
343,569 
O 
a collar, f, on each rod. Said rods are con 
nected with the upper ends of levers or piv 
oted rocker-arms J J', which are fulcrumed 
at g, and the lower ends of which are acted 
upon by push pins or plungers hill", extending 
from the chambers e e' through the heads of 
the cylinder C, and against which the piston 
D may strike. Each pin or plunger has a hole, 
h", through it, and when in the position shown, 
where they are normally maintained by the 
springs f, or into which position they are 
forced by the pressure in the chambers e e', 
these holes afford communication between the 
chambers e e' and the cylinder C. The educ 
tion-valves E TE' are connected togethier or 
push against one another, and are arranged in 
chambers g of', which communicate with an in 
termediate chamber, g, from which leads the 
outlet-pipe (r. With the eduction-valves are 
connected auxiliary pistons i i", which work 
in cylinders a' a, and these cylinders are con - 
structed with side openings, 1, and intermediate 
guides, 2, so that when the auxiliary piston is 
moved into the position of the piston i the wa 
ter can pass freely from the chamber e into 
the chamberg, and thence to the cylinder C 
on the left side of the piston D. When the 
parts are in the position shown, water can pass 
freely from the inlet-pipe Hinto the chamber 
e, and thence through the auxiliary cylinder 
a' into the cylinder C, to force the piston ID to. 
ward the right, the valve E being at the same 
time open, so that the water can exhaust from 
the right-hand side of the piston D, through 
the valve E, and out of the discharge or ex 
haust pipeg. This operation continues until 
the piston ID strikes the plunger h", and when 
it does this, the plunger, is moved to cover its 
port h' and cut off communication between the 
chamber e' and cylinder C, and by its move 
ment it acts on the rocker arm or lever J', 
and pushing in the rod f" against the induc 
tion-valve piece H, moves the said valve-piece 
away from its seat d' and allows water to en 
ter the chamber e. The movement of the 
plunger h' into the passage or chamber e' in 
creases by the amount of its bulk the pressure 
therein, and the increased pressure thus pro 
duced will suffice to start the valve-piece H. 
from its seat d", and the rocker-arm J and 
rod fare only to be employed, if desirable, to 
insure such starting movement of the valve 
piece from its seat d". As soon as the valve 
piece H is thus moved over sufficiently to re 
strict the flow through the seat d and slightly 
open the seat d, the increased resistance of. 
fered to the downward movement of the wa 
ter in the pipe H by such restricted flow will 
:ause the water by its momentum to increase 
the pressure in the passage or chamber e', and 
such increased pressure will complete the 
movement of the valve-piece H, and, by acting 
on the auxiliary piston i', will close the valve 
E" and open the valve E. During the pas 
sage of the valve-piece H from one seat to 
the other the water-pressure per square inch 
on the closed eduction-valve E and on the 
right-hand side of the auxiliary piston i' is 
equal, and because of the greater area of the 
valve E it is still held to its seat until the 
valve-piece H completes its movement. 
If 
there were now a very slight leak from the 
left-hand end of the cylinder C past the pis 
ton ID, the pressure on the valve E would be 
relieved, as there is no water entering on that 
side, and the pressure on the auxiliary piston 
i' would at once move it and effect the closing 
of the eduction-valve E and the opening of 
the opposite valve, E, without further increase 
of pressure. If such a leakage is deemed de 
sirable, it may be provided for by grooving 
the cylinder C, as shown dotted at i. 
If, 
on the contrary, the piston D is absolutely 
tight, the pressure on the auxiliary piston i' 
will immediately increase by reason of the 
momentum of the column of water in the pipe 
H', which, after the valve-piece His closed on 
the seat d, has no outlet until the piston i. 
moves, or by reason of the momentum of a 
fly-wheel on a pump which supplies water 
through the pipe I", and such increased press 
ure on the piston i' will overcome the pressure 
on the valve E and open the latter, and at the 
same time close the valve E. A free exhaust 
is thus provided from the left-hand end of the 
cylinder C, and the water from the chamber 
or passage e' entering the right-hand end of 
the cylinder C, through the auxiliary cylinder 
a' into the cylinder C will effect the return 
stroke of the piston D. 
I have here shown the valve-seats for the 
valves E E as formed in casings or cylinders 
if, which are but slightly larger than the 
valves, and at a short distance beyond the valve 
seats are formed with openings 1, like those 
before described. This is advantageous, be 
cause when one of the auxiliary pistons-the 
piston i, for example-has moved sufficiently 
to enable it to open the passage into the cyi 
inder C the valve E will have nearly covered 
the openings 1 in its seat, and will have nearly 
stopped the flow of water, although it can still 
move far enough before it finally seats to al 
low a large water-passage through the auxil 
iary cylinder a and past the piston i, to admit 
water to act on the piston D. 
In Figs. 4 and 5 I have represented a very 
simple form of hydraulic engine, which is pro 
vided with a fly-wheel, and may be employed 
for any kind of work. The valves of this en 
gine are automatically shifted by the mo 
mentum of the fly-wheel without the necessity 
of any mechanical connection between it and 
the valves. 
C designates the cylinder, and D the piston, 
of a double acting hydraulic engine, the pis 
ton-rod D" being connected by a cross-head, 
D", and connecting-rod D', with a crank, D", 
on a shaft, D", said shaft being also provided 
with a fly. wheel, D. 
The induction-valve piece H, like those be 
fore described, is adapted to move between 
the seats did, to control the passage of water 
from the inlet-pipe H to the chamber e or e, 
25 
35 
??) 
SO 
65 
75 
85 
go 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
343,569 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
which are in direct communication with the apertures h" through them, as have the plun 
ends of the cylinder C. 
gers h" h", so as to permit, the escape of water 
Near the ends of the cylinder C are dis 
from the passage e e' when the auxiliary pis 
charge-ports it 
le", which communicate with 
tons i i" are moved into their cylinders. When 
chambers gg, wherein are eduction-valves E 
the piston D in its movement toward the 
E, which control the passage of water to the 
right strikes the piston K", it will move the 
intermediate chamber, g, and thence to the 
latter, and cause an increase of pressure in the 
Outlet-pipe, g. The valves E E are connect 
water chamber or passage e' sufficient to start 
ed so that when one is open the other is closed, 
the induction-valve piece H in its movement 
and with them are connected auxiliary pistons 
toward the seat d". 
ii, preferably of smaller area than the valves 
In all the examples of my invention above 
working in auxiliary cylinders a? a, to which 
described I have shown, with slight differ 
ports O o' lead from the ends of the cylinder 
ences in form, but one kind of induction and 
C. The ports lik' are arranged at such a dis 
eduction valves; but obviously valves of other 
tance from the ends of the cylinder that the 
forms may be used, provided they are adapted 
piston D will cover them as it terminates its 
to operate substantially as herein described. 
stroke; but the ports o o' are arranged nearer 
I have described but one induction-valve 
the ends of the cylinder, and are never covered 
piece for each engine; but this valve-piece is 
by the piston. 
always used in connection with two seats, and 
In the drawings the valve-piece His moved 
is practically two valves, and always opens in 
away from the seat d, and water passes freely 
an outward direction from the engine cylin 
from the pipe Hinto chambere, and thence to 
der or cylinders. Iftwo separate induction 
the cylinder C, forcing the piston D toward the 
valves connected by a beam or lever or by a 
right. During this time the eduction-valve 
rod were used, they would operate similarly 
E is open, and water can escape freely from 
to the single valve-piece H, and would be the 
the right-hand side of the piston D. As soon 
equivalent thereof. 
as the piston D in its movement passes the 
The combination of the induction - Valve 
port k, the exhaust is cut off, and the pressure 
piece H with the casings containing the seats 
of the water on the right of the piston is in 
did, and each comprising a cylindric portion 
creased instantly by the further movement of 
close to the seat and openings 1 beyond Or in 
the piston, induced by the fly-wheel in com 
ward of said cylindric portion, is very desi 
pleting the revolution of the crank D, and acts 
rable, because by the time the valve in mov 
on the right-hand end of the valve-piece H, 
ing begins to uncover the openings 1 adjacent 
and on the auxiliary piston i. The valve. 
to one seat it has nearly covered the openings 
piece H, having equal area at each end, is moved 
adjacent to the other seat, and has nearly shut 
first, and is thrown over onto the seat d, open 
off the supply of water through the last-named 
ing the Water-supply to the passage e' and 
seat, although it still has a considerable move 
right-hand side of the piston D. The auxiliary 
ment before finally seating. By this means I 
piston i is also moved to close the valve E 
am better enabled to utilize the pressure of 
and open the valve E, and the slight move 
water directly from the supply-pipe for com 
ment of the piston D toward the right after 
pleting the movement of the induction-valve 
the valve-piece H is closed against the seat d, 
piece after its initial movement. 
produces a sudden decrease of pressure on the 
I do not limit myself to the construction of 
valve E, which will allow of its opening in 
the valve-seats did above described, as the 
stantly. 
same result might be attained by employing 
This engine should be provided with an air 
valves and valve-seats of other constructions. 
chamber, H*, connected with the pipe H as 
The eduction-valves are always connected 
close as possible to the cylinder C, as shown 
or so constructed that the closing of one effects 
in Fig. 5, and then the excess of water dis 
the opening of the other, and they will always 
placed by the piston D after the port k is 
open inward relatively to the ends of the cyl 
covered, and beyond what is required to move 
inder which they control. 
the valve-piece H will be driven back for the 
By way of recapitulation, and to better ex 
plain the principles that govern the changing 
moment into the air-chamber before men 
tioned. 
of the induction-valve piece H, I will state that 
The fly-wheel of this engine may be made 
it is changed by the greater pressure in the pas 
to turn in either direction. It will only be 
sage e or ethan in the other, and that this 
necessary to turn the wheel manually for half 
greaterpressure is produced at the propertimes 
a turn in the direction desired, and it will 
in this wise: The water passing, for example, 
then continue to rotate in that direction. 
through the seat dandpassage e, acts upon the 
The engine shown in Figs. 6 and 7 is like 
left-hand side of the piston D, and when it 
that shown in Fig. 3, except that instead of 
drives this piston so far to the right that the 
the rods ff the levers JJ and the plun 
piston F" penetrates the cylinder G' in Figs. 1 
gers lh, for shifting the valve-piece H, I em 
and 2, or that the plunger his driven into the 
ploy pistons KK", working in cylinders ll, 
chamber e' in Fig. 3, or the plunger K into 
which communicate with the water passages 
the cylinder l' in Fig. 6, the water in the pas 
or chambers e e', and are pushed toward the 
sage e' becomes confined and shut off from the 
cylinder C by springs m. These pistons have right-hand chamber C, and consequently from 
75 
85 
90 
95 
?. ? ? 
IC5 
O 
II 5 
". 
: 
 
6 
343,569 
communication through it with the exhaust 
through the valve E, that is then open. When 
ever the Water becomes so confined in the pas 
sage e", it exerts a pressare pon the smaller 
plunger or piston F, Figs. 1 and 2, and through 
it a backward pressure on the piston D', and 
in effect reduces the area of the piston for 
driving purposes by an amount equal to the 
area of the piston F. Whenever this occurs, 
a momentary slowing of the motion of the pis 
tons in Figs. 1 and 2 takes place, which causes 
the pressure on the pipe H to suddenly in 
crease, first, by the momentum of the sud 
denly-checked water-column; secondly, by the 
reduction in the friction of water flowing 
through the said pipe, and, thirdly, by the 
momentum of the fly-wheel pump, if such a 
pump is used to force water through the pipe 
H'. This increase in pressure serves to con 
tinue the motion of the piston, notwithstand 
ing the reduction in effective area, until the 
valve-piece H is driven over onto tlhe seat di 
by the water confined in the passage e. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 the increased pressure in 
the passage ef' is produced, first, by the en 
trance of the auxiliary piston F into the cyl 
inder G', and as soon as the valve-piece H is 
moved sufficiently to restrict the flow through 
the seat d and slightly open the seat d" the 
momentum of the water in the pipe H, due 
to its flow through the seat di being restricted, 
will increase the pressure in the passage e' sufi 
ciently to complete the movement of the valve 
piece H, and close the valve E and open the 
valve E. 
In Fig. 3 the movement of the plunger it 
into the passage e' will produce an increase of 
pressure thereill, and after the valve piece H 
is moved to restrict the flow of water through 
the seat d the momentumn of the water in the 
pipe H will still further increase the pressure 
in the passagee, and close the valve-piece upon 
the seat d. 
Practical experience with one of these en 
gines has shown that water obtained under 
pressure directly from city mains will serve 
to drive and reverse the engine without the aid 
of a fly-wheel pump. 
In Fig. 4, when the piston D passes the open 
ing k and confines the water in the passage e. 
the full area of the piston is exposed to the 
backward pressure in that passage, and conse 
Quently any increase of pressure in the pipe 
II' acts equally on both sides of the piston, and 
does not serve to move it farther against the 
confined water in the passage e' to open the 
valve-piece H. Therefore a fly-wheel attached 
to the engine so that its momentum acts di 
rectly upon the piston I) through its rod D', as 
already described, is necessary to continue the 
motion of the piston sufficiently to change the 
valve-piece H and reverse the si roke. 
In all the engines it is essential that at the 
7? 
termination of any stroke the passage e or e' 
shall be shut off from communication with the 
exhaust end of the engine-cylinder, so that the 
water may be confined in that passage until 
the valve-piece H has been changed to the 
other seat, and the combination of these pas 
Sages with the induction and eduction valves 
and auxiliary pistons arranged to operate as 
above described, I consider to be the impor 
tant features of my invention. 
It will be observed that in all examples of 
my invention which I have shown and de- 75 
scribed the eduction-valves are separate from 
the induction-valves. 
The example of my present invention which 
is shown in Fig. 3, and in which the main pis 
toll as it nears the end of its stroke acts 
through suitable mechanical connections to 
start the induction-waive from its seat, is not 
specifically claimed herein, but forms the sub 
ject of my application for Letters Patent, Se 
rial No. 201,047, filed May 4, S86. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the main cylinder. 
and piston of a double-acting hydraulic en 
gine and induction valves therefor, of educ- g0 
tion - valves independent of the induction 
valves, closing in the same direction in which 
water is to pass through then and connected 
together, as described, whereby the closing of 
one effects the opening of the other, passages 95 
through which water passes from the induc 
tion-valves to the main cylinder, and auxil 
iary pistons connected with the eduction 
alves and operative by the pressure of water 
in said passages to shift the eduction-valves, 
substantially as herein described. 
2. The combination, with the main cylinder 
and piston of a double-acting hydraulic en 
gime and induction-valves closing in the same 
direction in which water is to pass through 
them, and connected together, as described, 
whereby the opening of one insures the clos 
ing of the other, of passages through which 
wat er passes from the said induction-valves 
to the main cylinder, the induction-valves 
when closed being acted upon by the pressure 
of water in said passages, eduction-valves in 
dependent of the induction-valves, closing in 
the same direction in which water is to pass 
through them, and connected together, as de 
scribed, whereby the closing of one effects the 
opening of the other, and auxiliary pistons 
connected with the eduction-valves and op 
erative by the pressure of water in said pas 
sages to shift said valves, substantially as 
herein des*1ilbed. 
OC) 
IO 
II 5 
CHA.S. W. COOPEIR. 
Witnesses: 
(CII ANIIDILER HALI, 
FREDR. HAYNIES. 
5 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343669.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
COMBINED SEWING MACHINE AND WORKHOLDING FRAME FOR STITCHING 
THE INSOLES OF SEHOES, 
E, MEISE. 
No. 343,669, 
 
Patented June 15, 1886. 
s . 
2 
. 
. 
3 
e? 
t 
M 
. 
. 
- 
". 
l 
r 
". 
(No. Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
COMBINED SEWING MACHINE AND WORKHOLDING FRAME FOR STITCHING 
E. MEISE. 
THE INSOLES OF SHOES. 
Patented June 15, 1886. 
No. 343,669. 
Rhes E. 
v(73.4 
26-e--- 
== 
 
N e 
&larz Miecze 
?y is 67 
-2' 4. 
3.N 
a& 
 
 
zzas S--- 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDUARD MEISE, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
COMBINED SEWING-MACHINE AND WORK-HOLDING FRAME FOR STITCHING THE INSOLES OF SHOES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 343,669, dated June 15, 1886. 
Application filed April 6, 1885. Serial No. 161,274. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDUARD. MEISE, of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in a Combined Sew 
ing-Machine and Work-Holding Frame for 
Stitching the Insoles of Shoes; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof. 
My invention relates to apparatus for cov. 
ering the insoles of shoes-such as cork soles 
and Similar removable inner soles--its object 
being to provide means for the cheap and 
rapid manufacture of the same. Heretofore 
the only method in general use for securing the 
covers on the cork or other bodies of these in 
soles has been to paste the overlapping edges of 
the canvas or canton-flannel cover to the body, 
and, after drying, sew this canvas cover and 
the oil-cloth cover to the body at the same 
time, the canvas covering one face of the body 
and overlapping onto the other face thereof, 
and the oil-cloth covering the other face of the 
body and hiding the overlapping edges of the 
canvas cover. The principal cost in this 
method of manufacture was the pasting, and 
this pasting also made the edges of the insole 
stiff and prevented its fitting so neatly in the 
shoe. On account of the flexible character of 
the materials, however, no means has hereto 
fore been devised for sewing on the covers 
without stretching out of shape and wrinkling 
the canvas cover, and no commercially perfect 
goods have been so made. 
In an application for patent made by me of 
even date herewith, filed April 6, 1885, Serial 
No. 161,275, I have described a method of 
manufacture by which the difficulties hereto 
fore encountered in sewing on the covers have 
been overcome and the pasting entirely done 
away with, thus reducing the cost of manu 
facture and producing a more desirable in 
This method consists, generally, in 
sole. 
stretching the canvas or flannel cover over 
one face of the body of the insole, and while 
so stretched turning the overlapping edge of 
said cover onto the opposite face and Sewing 
it to the body. My present application re 
fers to apparatus I have devised for practic 
ing this method in connection with the ordi 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
a 
nary sewing-machine generally employed for 
the manufacture of these insoles. 
It consists, essentially, in the combination 
of a bottomless or hollow frame correspond 
ing in shape to the body of the insole, for Sup 
porting said body and stretching its cover 
over one face thereof, and stitch - forming 
mechanism operating within the frame to sew 
the cover to the body while it is supported in 
the frame. 
It also consists in combining with this bot 
tomless or hollow frame and stitch-forming 
mechanism an overlapper acting to turn over 
the overlapping edge of the canvas or flannel 
cover upon the opposite face of the body of 
the insole in position to be sewed thereto. 
It also consists in imparting to this Over 
lapper a reciprocating movement, to enable it 
to fold down the overlapping edge more per 
fectly. 
It also consists in apparatus for imparting 
to the overlapper this reciprocating move-.. 
ment. 
It also consists in certain details of coln 
struction, as hereinafter specifically set forth. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe the same 
more fully, referring to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view illustrating 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view thereof, 
and Fig. 3 is an enlarged cross-section of the 
frame supporting the body and Canvas cover, 
and Figs. 4 and 5 are detail views. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in each. 
My invention is illustrated in connection 
with what is known as the 'Singer Vibrat 
ing-Presser Sewing-Machine,' this machine 
being found especially adapted for the manul 
facture of these insoles; but it may of course 
be employed with other sewing-machines, and 
it is not necessary to fully describe the feed 
ing and stitch-forming mechanism, as this is 
well understood by the skilled mechanic, and 
varies according to the machine with which 
my apparatus is employed. 
The body a of the insole is formed of cork, 
pasteboard, or similar material, and the bot 
tom cover, b, of canvas or canton-flannel, while 
SO 
95 
OO 
2 
343,669 
 
O 
the top cover, c, is generally formed of oil 
cloth. The canvas cover b corresponds in 
shape to the body a, and is sufficiently large 
to forman overlapping edge, b', which is turned 
over the edge of the body and overlaps on the 
opposite face thereof, and the top cover, c, 
corresponds substantially both in size and 
shape to the body. The framed, within which 
the canvas cover is stretched over one face of 
the insole, is made of metal or gutta-percha, 
and corresponds in shape to the body of the 
insole, the inner edge thereof being substan 
tially the same shape and size, and the body 
being wide and thick enough to make a stiff 
frame suitable for supporting the insole during 
sewing, the frame being formed bottomless or 
hollow, to permit the sewing of the insole and 
its cover when stipported therein. Extending 
arotind the base of the inner face of the frame 
d is the lip d', to support the insole and cover 
-therein, the canvas cover b being placed over 
the framed, and the body a being pressed into 
it; thus stretching the canvas cover over the 
lower face of the body, in which position the 
arts are ready for the sewing operation. The 
infier face of the frame is preferably made 
dovetailed, its upper edge corresponding in 
size to the body of the insole, and said face then 
receding slightly, and, as the body of the sole 
is slightly elastic, whin it and the cover are 
pressed into the frame it is first compressed 
slightly and then expands into the dovetailed 
seat, and so stretches the cover more perfectly 
aid holds it within the fraine. 
Secured to the bed-plate E of the sewing 
machine by screws e, in the ordinary inainner 
of securing attachinents to the inachine, is the 
plate f, having the guide-rollerg secured to 
the plate g and extending ott at the forward 
end of the plate f, just back of the needle-bar 
h of the sewing-inachine; the plate g having 
a slot therein aid being adjustable on the plate 
if by means of suitable set-screws, g. This 
guide-rollerg overcomes frietion between the 
framed and the apparatus, forming a guide 
therefor and being just back of the needle-bar 
the proper distance for the stitching of the in 
sole; the frained being pressed against this 
idle roller and guided thereby during the sew 
ing of the insole. Seetired to the plate f is the 
overlapper l, the lip or knife l of which ex 
tends out over the framed and acts to turn 
the overlapping edge l' of the canvas cover b 
over the body a and down upon the saine in 
position to be caught by the presser-foot of 
other feeding mechanism,k, of the machine; so 
that the overlapping edge is turned or folded 
down upon the upper face of the body just be 
fore the sewing operation, and is held by the 
overlapper until caught by the feeding meeli 
list or uintil after the needle eliters the iiii 
terial. 
The overlapper may either be stationary 
during the greater part of the sewing opera. 
5 tion; in this case extending out in the position 
shown in Fig. 2, or may be made reciprocating, 
in order to fold the material down in a direct 
35 
45 
SO 
25 p 
66 
75 
95 
line from the edge of the insole, so that there 
is no stretching or wrinkling of said material 
except at the ends, where it is necessarily 7o 
folded on account of surplus material, the lat 
terform of overlapper being preferred by me. 
When the overlapper is reciprocating, as 
guides on the 
shown, it moves in suitable 
plate f and its lip l' extends out in front of the 
needle-bar, and the reciprocating motion of 
the overlapper is obtained in any suitable 
manner from any part of the sewing-machine, 
that shown in the drawings being the form 
preferred by me, as the power is obtained 
without the addition of any cam apparatus to 
the machine or the cutting away of the body 
or frame of the machine. 
In the ordinary construction of the machine 
before referred to the horizontal or power 
shaft is notinted in the horizontal arm of the 
machine and at its forward end has the cam 
wheel t, which operates the needle-bar, and 
through a suitable lever, u, operates the press 
er-bar k, a friction - wheel, t, extending be 
yond the face of the cam-wheel t, pressing on 
this lever u, and the said lever it; in order to 
give room for its movement, extends through 
a stfitable slot in the side of the arim of the 
machine. Pivoted on said arm at n is the 
lever in, the upper end of which presses against 
the back of the lever it, so that the movement 
of the lever u is imparted to the lever an. 
This levef it is connected at its lower end to 
the lever n, pivoted to the plate f at n', the 
opposite end of the lever n being connected 
to the erank-lever p, which is pivoted to the 
plate f at p, and at its opposite end is con 
neeted to the reciprocating overlapper l, the 
lever in moving the lever n and causing said 
lever it to draw upon the lever p, which, 
tlirough its arm p, presses forward the over 
lapper. Connected to the arm p of the lever 
paid to the rear end of the plate fat f is the 
spring r, and when the overlapper is pressed 
forward, as above described, said spring r is 
expanded, and as soon as the pressure on the 
upper end of the lever m is removed, this 
spring by its contraction draws back the over 
lapper to its normal position, (shown in Fig. 
1,) at the same time through said lever mech 
anisih causing the upper end of the lever m to 
follow the movement of the lever at, so as to be 
in position to be pressed out by said lever 
when it is desired to again push forward the 
overlapper. 
I have described the lever an as pressing 
against the lever it, but it is evident that said 
lever could be connected to the lever u and 
form part thereof, or the lever n be operated 
by another calm-face on the cam-wheel t. 
In order to facilitate the withdrawal of the 
overlapper, as is iecessary in some cases, as 
referred to hereinafter, to provide suitable 
means for diseonnecting the bar I from the 
eiid of the lever n, the preferred form of suchr 
mechanism being shown in the drawings, the 
lever n having the stud n' at the end thereof, 
while the bar q has the slot s on one side 
O 
O 
I T5 
I 25 
343,669 
3 
O 
25 
35 
45 
thereof, within which said stud in fits, thus 
connecting the bar to the lever, the bar being 
held in connection with the lever by the spring 
s' and holding the parts in the proper connec 
tion to operate the overlappers until the op 
erator by drawing upon the extension or handle 
?t of the bar a draws it off said stud, pressing 
down the flat springs', when the spring r by 
drawing upon the arm p of the lever p draws 
back the overlapper and holds it back until 
the bar is again connected to the lever n. 
The Operation of the apparatus is as follows: 
The operator places the canvas cover b over 
the frame d, and presses the body a down into 
the frame, so stretching said cover over the 
bottom face and bending it up over the dges 
of the body, the canvas cover and body being 
supported on the lip d' of the frame, so that it 
does not come in contact with the bed-plate 
of the machine to any great extent, and any 
pressure on the upper surface of the body will 
not be liable to press the said cover and body 
Out of the frame. The frame thus forms a 
rigid support for the flexible cork or other 
body of the insole, so that it can be much more 
easily handled by the operator, and he can 
feed it to the machine without liability of dis 
arranging the cover thereon. As it is gen 
erally desired to secure both the bottom or 
canvas cover and the top or oil-cloth cover to 
the body by one row of stitching, he generally 
places the oil-cloth cover a on top of the body, 
So as to coincide therewith, as shown, and he 
then raises the presser-bar k, and places the 
frame under the same, the frame resting against 
the guide-rollerg, and the overlapper lenter 
ing over the frame, but under the oil-cloth 
cover, the overlapper, as the frame is pushed 
under it, turning down the overlapping edge 
b of the canvas cover on the upper surface of 
the body (, and so acting to turn down the 
overlapping edge under the top cover, between 
it and the body. The machine is then started, 
and as the sewing proceeds the overlapper 
continues to turn over the edge band holds it 
down between the body and top cover until it 
is grasped by the feeding mechanism l, or un 
til the needle enters the material, the needle 
passing first through the top cover, then 
through the overlapping edge b of the bottom. 
cover, thence through the body a, and thence 
through the bottom cover, and sewing all these 
parts together With one seam or line of stitch 
ing. As the operation continues, where the 
overlapper has the reciprocating movement, 
as above described, it is drawn back until the 
forward end of its lip passes off the body a, 
so that it extends only above the framed, and 
then is pushed forward in a direct line to the 
edge of the body, and so acts to turn; down 
the overlapping edge in a direct line from the 
edge thereof, so that there is no liability of its 
stretching or wrinkling the material by draw 
ing it diagonally from the edge of the body, 
the reciprocating overlapper thus acting to 
press the overlapping edge down flat upon 
the body, except at the ends of the insole, 
where the material of the overlapping edge is 
necessarily folded upon itself on account of 
the surplus of material around the convex 
contour of the insole. This operation Con 
tinues until the sewing is almost completed, 
but as the lip l' extends under the top cover 
when it approaches the point where the stitch 
ing was commenced, it is evident that it must 
be withdrawn to permit the stitching of the 
cover around its entire edge, as the lip Would 
strike against the stitching where it was com 
menced. To withdraw the overlapper, the 
operator, by means of his fingers, draws on the 
extension of of the bar q until it is disconnected 
from the lever n, when the overlapper will be 
drawn back by the spring , and the stitching 
can be continued until finished around the en 
tire edge of the insole, the insole being thus 
finished completely. 
If desired, my improved apparatus may be 
employed for first stitching the canvas cover 
to the body, and the top cover be secured 
thereto by a separate row of stitching; but 
this is not necessary, and would simply in 
crease the expense of manufacture. The op 
eration is rapid, and the operator's only care 
is to hold the top cover in position with the 
body of the insole. The stretching of the 
canvas cover on the body requires but little 
time, and consequently the cost of sewing is 
not increased over that of the old method of 
manufacture, the entire cost of pasting being 
saved. As all pasting is done away with, the 
insole is flexible and readily conforms to the 
body of the shoe, and the article produced is 
more desirable than the insoles made by the 
previous methods of manufacture. 
No claim is made herein for the frame for 
supporting the insole, except when employed 
in combination with the stitch-forming appa 
ratus, the same forming the subject-matter of 
a separate application for patent, filed Novem 
ber 14, 1885, Serial No. 182,807. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of a bottomless or hol 
low frame corresponding in shape to the body 
of the insole, for supporting said body, and 
stretching its cover over one face thereof, and 
stitch-forming mechanism operating within 
the frame to sew the cover to the body while 
it is supported therein, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination of a bottomless or hol 
low frame corresponding in shape to the body 
of the insole, for supporting said body and its 
cover, an overlapper extending over the frame 
and acting to turn the overlapping edge of the 
cover down onto said body of the insole, and 
stitch-forming mechanism for sewing the cover 
to the body, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of a frame correspond 
ing in shape to the body of the insole, for sup 
porting said body and its cover, a reciprocat 
ing overlapper extending over the frame and 
acting to turn the overlapping edge of the 
cover down onto said body, and stitch-forming 
75 
80 
IOO 
fo5 
tIO 
I I5 
I 25 
- 
4 
343,669 
5. The combination of a bottomless or hol- 
mechanism for sewing the cover to the body, said cam-wheel and overlapper, for imparting 25 
a reciprocating motion to the overlapper, Sub 
substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of a frame correspond-stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
7. In sewing-machines, the combination, 
ing in shape to the body of the insole, for sup- 
porting said body and ifs cover, an overlap- with stitch-forming mechanism and the cam 
per extending over the frame and acting to wheel t, of the attachment-plate f, secured to 
turn the overlapping edges of the cover down the bed-plate, the reciprocating overlapper l, 
onto the body, stitch-forming mechanism, for levers n p, pivoted thereon, connecting-bar 0, 
sewing the cover to the body, and means for spring-arm , and lever m, pivoted to the ma 
withdrawing the overlapper, substantially as chine-arm, substantially as and for the pur 
Set forth. 
8. In sewing. machines, the combination, 
low frame corresponding in shape to the body with stitch-forming mechanism, of the attach 
of the insole, for supporting said body and its ment-plate f, reciprocating overlapper l, le 
cover, a roller guiding the movement of the vers in and p, connecting-bar q, having a re 
frame, an overlapper extending over the frame movable connection with the lever n, and 4O 
and acting to turn the overlapping edge of the spring , substantially as and for the purposes 
cover down onto the body, and stitch-forming set forth. 
mechanism for sewing the cover to the body, 
In testimony whereof I, the said EDUARD 
substantially as set forth. 
6. In sewing-machines, the combination of 
stitch-forming mechanism, the cam-wheel t, 
the overlapper l, and lever and spring mech- 
anism, substantially such as described, between 
MEISE, have hereunto set my hand. 
JAMES I. KAY, 
J. N. COOKE. 
EDUARD MEISE, 
poses set forth. 
35 
y 
D 
9. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343769.txt	(No Model.) 
W, T, LEWI. 
BOILER SWEEPER, 
No. 343,769, 
Patented June 15, 1886. 
 
WITNESSES; 
/Q-2-c6% 
14-y-to- 
 
NWENTOR: 
272 
by 4..."; 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM T. LEVI, OF CHARLESTON, WEST VIRGINIA. 
BOL. E. R. SWEEPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 343,769, dated June 15, 1886. 
Application filed July 1, 1884. Serial No. 136,549. 
(No model.) 
: 
IS 
To all, uhon, it Tay concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM T. LEVI, of 
Charleston, in the county of Kanawha and 
State of West Virginia, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in a Boiler - Sweeper 
Connection, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
sweeper for cleaning scales and sediment from 
boilers, tanks, and stills, that can be used while 
pressure is on; and it consists of the combina 
tion of parts, including their construction, 
substantially as hereiuafter described and 
claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which Sihuilar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figurel is a sectional elevation of the con 
nection as applied to a boiler, and Fig. 2 is a 
face view of the same with the rod in section. 
Into a suitable screw-threaded aperture in 
the head of a boiler or still, A, and as near 
the bottom thereof as possible, is screwed the 
pivotal universal - joint connection for the 
sweeper-rod. My improved construction of 
this connection is illustrated in the drawings. 
The box at is provided at its base with the 
external thread, a?, and at its open end with 
the internal thread, a. Below the thread a the 
hox is formed with an internal annular offset, 
forming the annular shoulder i. In the bot 
ton of the box at is a central circular aperture, 
k, and around this aperture is formed the con 
cave seat h. 
In the box a, and fitting the seat h, is a dia 
metrically-apertured ball, b. A packing-gland, 
g, is provided for the aperture through the 
ball. The rod c, carrying the sweeping or 
4o scraping brush or head d, passes through the 
ball b, and packing of makes a steam - tight 
joint around the rod. A screw-ring, f, the 
inner diameter of which is less than that of 
the ball b, is screwed into the open end of the 
35 
55 
box a. Between this ring and the shoulder i is 45 
a packing-ring, e. By this construction the 
ball is held steam-tight in the box. The ball 
thus seated is capable of universal movement 
to allow manipulation of the rod, and as the 
rod can also be slid endwise every portion of So 
the bottom surface of the boiler can be reached 
and cleaned by brush d, and this sweeping op 
eration can be performed when the boiler is 
in use or under steam-pressure, so that there 
need be no loss of time. For steamboats, 
where the boilers require frequent cleaning, 
that is a great advantage. The rod c is in Sec 
tions screwed together, to allow of its being 
drawn out and disconnected to prevent its cor 
rosion. The last section is to remain in the 
ball, with the brush drawn up, so as not to rest 
on the bottom and cause burning of the brush, 
and this section is made as short as possible, to 
prevent it projecting too far at the front of the 
head. This connection can readily be applied 
to any horizontal boiler and remain as a per 
manent attachment, ready for use at any time. 
It is preferably placed near the hand-hole 
plate. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent. is 
As an improved article of manufacture, the 
universal-joint connection for a boiler-sweeper 
to a boiler, consisting of the box (t, provided 75 
with the external screw - thread, a, the aper 
ture k in its base, the concave seat h around 
said aperture, the internal annular shoulder, i, 
and the internal screw-thread, ct, above Said 
shoulder, the ball b, diametrically apertured 8o 
and provided with the packing - gland g, the 
externally-screw threaded ringf, and the pack 
ing-ring e, substantially as described. 
WILLIAM T. LEVI. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. FISHER, 
L. E. MICWHORTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343869.txt	(No Model.) 
J, TOMNEY. 
BURGIAR ALARM, 
No. 343,869, 
Patented June 15, 1886. 
all, N. 
I 
IIf 
J E 
is 
U 
s 
S 
s 
. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES TOMNEY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BURGAR-ALARM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 343,869, dated June 15, 1886. 
Application filed December 24, 1885. Serial No. 186,634. (No model.) 
Io coverings for the safes or vaults. 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JAMESTOMNEY, of New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
5 provement in Burglar-Alarms, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My improvement relates to electric burglar 
alarms which are employed to protect safes 
and vaults, and comprise electric protective 
The object of my present improvement is to 
increase the security of such an electric burg 
lar-alarm by providing a simple means where 
by a different rheostat or resistance device 
5 may be introduced into the electric-circuit 
alarm from time to time. Additional security 
is offered in this way, because, even if a burg 
lar should ascertain what particular amount of 
resistance happened to be in the circuit of an 
2O electric burglar-alarm at any particular time, 
he would not gain any advantage from the 
knowledge if the resistance were changed 
afterward and before he made any attempt at 
burglary. 
I have already obtained Letters Patent for 
a mechanism whereby different resistances 
could be introduced into the circuit of an elec 
tric burglar-alarm from a distant point-as, 
for instance, an office connected with the elec 
3o tric circuit of the premises guarded and hav 
ing watchmen stationed in it. 
My present improvement consists of a sim 
ple combination of mechanical appliances, 
whereby the inmates or tenants of the guarded 
35 premises or structure can from time to time 
change the resistance in the circuit there. 
The accompanying drawing is a diagram 
matic view of an electric burglar-alarm em 
bodying my improvement. It represents an 
4o alarm of the kind which has a circuit extend 
ing through a guarded structure-such, for 
instance, as a house or place of business-and 
thence to an office where watchmen are kept. 
I have marked the words Guarded Struct 
45 ure upon the drawing to indicate the por 
tion which represents the house or place of 
business guarded. I have also marked the 
word Office upon that part of the drawing 
which illustrates the place where the watch 
5o men are kept. 
25 
s 
 
A designates a casing or envelope, such as 
is commonly used to inclose a safe. 
B designates a rotary shaft or rod, which is 
supported in a portion of the casing or en 
velope, so as to extend through to the interior 55 
thereof, and also beyond the exterior. It may 
be made of any suitable material. 
C designates a spool mounted upon the shaft 
B, and preferably affixed thereto, so as to move 
in unison there with. This spool will prefer- 60 
ably be made of insulating material. 
The shaft B, or at least a section of it, b, will 
be made of metal. The insulated wire D is 
fastened at one end in electrical contact with 
the shaft B or its section b, and passing thence 65 
to the spool is wound in several layers or con 
volutions thereupon. Between the first layer 
or convolution and the second layer or convolu 
tion a loop of the wire is extended to a wheel, 
E, of insulating material that is affixed to the 7o 
shaft B, and provided on its periphery with a 
number of metallic plates, eeee". As shown, 
the aforesaid loop is connected to the plate e' 
and is in electrical communication therewith. 
Between the second layer or convolution of 75 
the wire on the spool and the third layer or 
convolution a loop is formed and extended to 
the plate e of the wheel E. This loop is in 
electrical contact with the plate e. Between 
the third layer or convolution of the wire on 8o 
the spool and the fourth layer or convolution 
of this wire a loop is extended to the plate e' of 
the wheel E and fastened in electric contact 
to the said plate. The outer end of the wire 
on this spool is connected electrically with the 85 
plate e' of the wheel E. 
I have only shown a spool having four lay 
ers or convolutions of wire upon it combined 
with a wheel having a corresponding number 
of plates upon its periphery. The number of 90 
the layers or convolutions of wire and plates 
may, however, be increased or diminished at 
pleasure. 
F designates a finger of spring metal im 
pinging against the shaft B or the section b 95 
thereof. It is therefore in electrical commu 
nication with the wire D on the spool. From 
this finger F a line-wire, L, extends to the 
office, where watchmen are kept, and there 
connects with a galvanometer, G. The wire L. Ico 
2 
343,869 
O 
is passed in and out through the case A, so as 
to form loops therein. I have shown but one 
of such loops, but any desired number may 
be used. The galvanometer G has two coils, 
between which a needle is arranged so that it 
may freely vibrate. The wire L is connected 
with one of the coils, the two coils are connected 
together by an intermediate wire, and a wire, 
W, extends from the other coil to one pole of a 
battery which has its other pole connected by a 
wire, H', with an earth-plate, H. A wire, I, ex 
tends from the galvanometer-needle to a bat 
tery, I', a wire, I, extends from the battery I 
to the electro-magnet of an electro-magnetic 
bell, I, and wires II extend from said elec 
tro-magnet to metallic contact-pieces J'J', with 
either of which the needle of the galvanome 
ter may make contact when vibrated. 
K designates a finger, made of spring metal, 
impinging upon the periphery of the wheel 
E. A wire, K', extends from the spring-finger 
K to and through the case A in a manner 
similar to the wire L, and thence to an earth 
plate, K'. If the case A should be ruptured 
and either of the wires L. K be broken or cut, 
the circuit will be broken and a signal at once 
transmitted to the central office. 
The shaft B may be rotated to bring any one 
of the plates e'e e'e' of the wheel E into con 
tact with the spring-finger K. The different 
portions of the wire D on the spool may be 
introduced into the electric circuit of the burg 
lar-alarm at the guarded structure. For in 
stance, if the shaft B be so turned as to bring 
the plate e' of the wheel E into contact with 
the spring-finger K, then only the first or in 
nermost layer or convolution of the wire D 
upon the spool will be introduced into the cir 
cuit. If the shaft B be so turned as to bring 
the plate e into contact with the spring-finger 
K, then the first and second layers or convo 
lutions of the wire D will be introduced into 
the circuit. If the shaft B be so turned as to 
bring the plate e into contact with the spring 
finger K, then the first, second, and third lay 
ers or convolutions of the wire D will be in 
troduced into the circuit; and if the shaft B be 
so turned as to bring the plate e' of the wheel 
E into contact with the spring-finger K, then 
all of the wire D will be introduced into the 
circuit. 
It will be advantageous to provide the shaft 
B with an index-finger, b, and to arrange up 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
on the casing or envelope A a dial-plate marked 
with numbers corresponding to the numbers 
of layers or convolutions of the wire D on the 
spool. Then the person turning the shaft B 
will know how many of the layers or convo 
lutions of such wire he is introducing into the 
electric circuit. The contact-pieces J J will 
need to be adjusted into different positions 
when the number of layers or convolutions of 
the wire D in the circuit is varied, so that they 
will not touch the needle of the galvanometer. 
Whenever a change in the resistance of the 
electric circuit is made, the needle of the gal 
vanometer will be vibrated so as to touch one 
of the contact-pieces J'J', and thereupon the 
electro-magnetic bell I will ring an alarm. It 
will be understood that the layers or convolu 
tions of the wires D are, in fact, a series of 
rheostats or resistance devices, any number of 
which may be introduced into the circuit. It 
will be seen that the wheel E and spring-finger 
K, in fact, constitute a hand-switch, whereby 
the different rheostats or resistance devices 
may be introduced into the circuit. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an electric burglar-alarm, the combi 
nation of a main circuit, an electric protective 
covering for a safe or vault, a number of rheo 
stats or resistance devices, a hand - switch 
whereby any number of the latter may be in 
troduced into said main circuit, and an indi 
cator for indicating the change in resistance, 
substantially as specified. 
2. In an electric burglar-alarm, the combi 
nation of a main circuit, a number of rheo 
stats or resistance devices, a rotary wheel hav. 
ing metal plates insulated from each other and 
connected with the said rheostats or resistance 
devices, a spring-finger in contact with such 
wheel, and an indicator for indicating the 
change in resistance, substantially as specified. 
3. In an electric burglar-alarm, the combi 
nation of a main circuit, a number of rheo 
stats or resistance devices, a hand-switch where 
by any number of the latter may be introduced 
into said main circuit, and an indicator for in 
dicating the change in resistance, substantially 
as specified. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. TOMNEY. 
EDWIN, H. BROWN, 
DANIEL H. DRISCOLL. 
90 
95 
OO 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US343969.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 343,969. 
 
 
O. STEVENS. 
TRACTION ENGINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 15, 1886. 
t 
. 
iii. 
N 
ay 
S 
S 
S 
 
S 
gains 
2 
S 
SSS 
\ 
Y 
Q 
Y 
sis 
N 
(No Model.) 
No. 343,969, . 
O. STEVENS. 
TRACTION ENGINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 15, 1886. 
 
Zres. 6. 
cl 
2 
Z729. 2, 
Z77 
e 
s 
 
Z/2 - 9. 
-22 
7. 
O 
--- 
3% 
m 
Q -- 
Z. 
is 
Z 
Z2 
sa 
ZZ 
a - 
an 
s 
d 
Z727. S. 
Zzt. . 
s 
Sz - 1 
S. S 21 - 1 
1 . 
- 
- 1 
  
 
Z7-cleve-co2-r 
it. Pereis, Photo-Lithographer, washington, c.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OTHO STEVENS, OF SPRING VALLEY, MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO JEROME A. STEVENS, OF SAME PLACE. 
TRACTION - ENGINE. 
Sk:CiFiCATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 343,969, dated June 25, 1886. 
Application filed July 24, 1884. Serial No. 138,694. (No model.) 
its side being broken away to show the gearing 
To all whon, it naily concern: 
within. 
Be it known that I, OTHO STEVENS, a citi 
Like letters designate corresponding parts 
Zen of the United States, residing in Spring 
Valley, in the county of Fillmore and State of in all of the figures. 
The boiler V, shown as a horizontal boiler, 
Minnesota, have invented certain Improve 
has a frame or casting, A, bolted to its under 
ments in Traction-Engines; and I do hereby 
side, near its front end, the main part of the 
declare that the following is a full and exact 
casting being directly over the front axle, F. 
description thereof, reference being had to 
A brace portion, A, extends obliquely back 
the accompanying drawings, making part of 
ward and upward, and at its rear end is also 
this specification. 
bolted to the lower side of the boiler. This 
My invention consists, first, in the means by 
frame or casting not only serves as a strong 
which the boiler is mounted upon the front 
and firm support for thefront end of the boiler, 
axle of the engine; second, in the improved 
but it has mounted upon it the gearing by 
construction and arrangement of the gearing 
which poweris communicated to the front axle. 
whereby driving-power is communicated to 
Thus, though any construction of transmitting 
the front axle and a swiveling movement is 
gear may be employed, I have indicated in Fig. 
allowed thereto; and, third, in an improved 
1 a driving-shaft, W, a driving-wheel, X, on 
device whereby a differential motion is allowed 
the said shaft, and an intermediate gear-wheel, 
to the front wheels, to allow a free turning 
movement when the engine is directed out of Y, between the gear-wheel X and the gear 
socket E, which matches with the said gear 
a straight line, and the driving-gear still re 
wheel Y. For the purpose of mounting this 
main coupled to the axle when the engine is 
transmitting-gear the frame or casting is di 
directed straight forward, all substantially as 
vided, and has an opening in its middle length 
hereinafter set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
wise thereof, as shown, to receive the said gear 
and furnish bearings for their shafts or jour 
resents a side elevation of a portion of the 
nals. The brace part A. receives the driving 
boiler of a traction-engine, of the frame-work 
and transmitting gear. The main part of the 
on which it is mounted over the front axle, 
casting forms a spider, in which is mounted and 
and of the driving-gear for the front axle; Fig. 
partly incased the gear-socket E, and in the 
2, a front end view of the same, a portion of 
latter is incased the gear-ball D on the axle F, 
the gear being shown in vertical section in the 
for allowing a turning or swiveling movement 
plane of the axis of the front axle; Fig. 3, an 
to the said axle while it is being rotated by 
end view of the gear-ball on the front axle; 
the gearing, including the said gear-socket. 
Fig. 4, a side view of the gear-socket used in 
The gear-socket has no shaft or journal proper 
connection with the gear-ball on the axle; Fig. 
to turn in bearings of the case A, and this is 
5, a central axial section of the two parts.com. 
to allow a large extent of swiveling movement 
posing the gear-socket, shown separate, but 
to the front axle, as indicated by dotted lines 
opposite to each other; Fig. 6, a perspective 
in Fig. 8, there being wide openings in the 
view of one of the anti-friction rollers against 
sides of the gear-socket to allow the said axle 
which the socket-gear revolves; Fig. 7, a side 
to turn to oblique positions; but in order to 
view of the front axle, having the gear-ball 
properly mount the gear-socket in the casting 
thereon; Fig. 8, a side view of the front axle 
A, the peripheries of the two sides of the gear 
in part, and of the ball-gear thereon, in con 
socket are made cylindrical, or otherwise equiv 
nection. With an axial vertical section of the 
alently formed, to serve as enlarged journals 
Socket-gear around the ball-gear; Fig. 9, a side 
or ways upon which Sets of anti-friction roll 
view of a portion of the front axle, a central 
ers B B are mounted by their journals c c in 
vertical section of a part of one of the fore 
the spider of the casting A, whereby the socket 
wheels on the said axle, and of the differential 
gear is held in place and turns with little fric 
gear between the axle and wheel, and also of 
its inclosing and carrying case; Fig. 10, a side 
tion. 
The gear-socket E is made in two parts, as 
view of the differential-gear case, portions of 
O 
25 
35 
55 
75 
So 
95 
IOC 
343,969 
IO 
shown in Fig. 5, for introducing the ball-gear 
D therein, one part, K, having the gear-teeth 
formed thereon and the other part, L, fitting 
into the open side of the partlK. The two parts 
are secured together by bolts HH, as shown 
in Fig. 4, or in any other suitable or usual 
manner for similar constructions. 
The ball-gear D, rigidly keyed to the front 
axle, F, is coupled to the socket-gear E by 
means of projecting pins GG, fitting and play 
ing in grooves a ac, formed in the interior pe. 
riphery of the gear-socket. These coupling 
pins are provided with steel anti-friction 
sleeves ss, whereby the friction is reduced 
when the ball swivels in the socket. 
For forming the differential gear between 
the front axle and each wheel thereon a gear 
wheel, O, is fastened to the axle, and another 
gear-wheel, P, is fastened to the hub R of the 
wheel, as shown in Fig. 9, the axes of the two 
gear-wheels being in line and the two wheels 
being side by side, but notin contact with each 
other. Of course the gear-wheel P is to be 
loose on the axle. This gear-wheel is a little 
less in diameter than the gear-wheel O, and 
gears into a set of double pinions, NN, formed 
in one, one being larger than the other, and 
having their journals in bearings of the inclos. 
ing and carrying case M, as clearly shown. 
From the above-described construction it is 
obvious that the gear-wheel P will turn a lit 
tle more rapidly than the other. The effect 
is that when the engine is going straight for 
ward the gear-wheels and their pinions lock 
the wheel on the axle without turning thereon; 
but if the engine is directed out of line the 
wheel that travels in the largest curve, either 
going backward or forward, will turn faster 
3O 
35 
than the other wheel, this connecting-gear 
freely allowing it, without any binding or 4o 
straining of parts, while no resistance what 
ever is offered to the free turning of the en 
gine, either to the right or left. 
45 
55 
65 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with the boiler V, the 
frame or casting A provided with the brace 
portion A", on which the transmitting drive 
gear is mounted, and with a spider in which 
is mounted the socket-gear E, substantially as 
and for the purpose herein specified. 
2. The combination of the casting or frame 
A provided with a set of anti-friction rollers, 
BB, turning in bearings thereof, the socket 
gear E, turning in a spider of the casting and 
having enlarged journals revolving in contact 
with the friction-rollers, and the ball-gear D, 
having projecting pins G. G., provided with 
anti-friction sleeves ss, which play in grooves 
acac of the socket-gear, substantially as and for 
the purpose herein specified. 
3. The combination of the front axle having 
a gear-wheel, O, thereon, the wheel-hub R, 
having a gear-wheel, P, thereon, of a little 
smaller diameter than the gear-wheel O, and 
the double pinions NN, one a little larger in 
diameter than the other, gearing respectively 
into the said gear-wheels, substantially as and 
for the purpose herein specified. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 9th day of June, A. D. 
1884. 
OTEO STEVENS. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. E. ROBISON, 
ASA. R. BURLESON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344069.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. WAUGHN. 
ROLL FOR TEATHER WORKING MACHINES 
No. 344,069, 
Patented June 22, 1886. 
Y2Year-vesses. 
o. 3 goaX-el. 
Zzz 2-e22-22 
(2644e- 
y 
- 
a zeo??ve. 
 
N. PeTERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPH. W. VAUGHN, OF PEABODY, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
VAUGHN MOROCCO MACHINE COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
ROLL FOR LEATHER-WORK NG MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 344,069, dated June 22, 1886. 
Application filed April 5, 1886. Serial No. 197,8S9. (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JosEPH. W. WAUGHN, of | pressed from the hide or skin may flow, there 
by enabling the water to find its way to the 
Peabody, in the county of Essex, State of ground more readily than it would if said 
Massachusetts, have invented a certain new 
flanges 45 were united to form a continuous 
and useful Improvement in Rollers, of which 
flange, this feature being of especial advantage 
the following is a description sufficiently full, 
in treating very wet hides and skins. The rows 
clear, and exact to enable any person skilled 
of flanges being also composed of short flanges 
in the art or science to which said invention 
or sections, are more convenient and less ex 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
pensive to construct. The short or auxiliary 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
flanges 46 are of the saune height as the main 
forming part of this specification, in which 
flanges 45, but do not extend entirely across 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
the spaces between the rows which are formed 
roller, and Fig. 2 a diagram showing the ar 
by the flanges 45, thus leaving a space, 49, be. 
rangement of the flanges. 
tween the rear ends of the short flanges and 
Like letters of reference indicate corre 
the front faces of the main flanges, which 
sponding parts in the different figures of the 
serves as a channel to assist in carrying off 
drawings. . 
the water expressed from the hide or skin, 
My invention relates to that class of rollers 
and causing it to drop to the ground. The 
which are employed in machines for putting 
edges of the flanges may be angular or rounded 
out, striking-out, fleshing, Scouring, and un 
in any degree, or in accordance with the work 
hairing hides and skins in the manufacture of 
they are required to perform, and when 
leather; and it consists in the novel construc 
rounded may be safely applied to the grain 
tion and arrangement of parts hereinafter 
side of the hide or skin. The long or main 
fully set forth and claimed, the object being 
flanges 45 remove the light fleshings from the 
to produce a more effective and desirable ar 
hide or skin and stretch it downward, and also 
ticle of this character than is now in ordinary 
diagonally outward, while at the same time 
S0. 
the short or auxiliary flanges 46, which stand 
The nature and operation of the improve 
nearer to a right angle with the longitudinal 
ment will be readily understood by all con 
axial line of the roller than the flanges 45, 
versant with such matters from the following 
stretch it laterally or more nearly in a line 
arallel with said axial line. When con 
In the drawings, W' represents the body of 
structed with angular edges, the flanges read 
the roller, and at a the journals, the body be 
ily remove the lighter fleshy parts of the hide 
ing preferably composed of wood, and pro 
or skin; but they may be so constructed as to 
vided with a band or hoop, 2, at either end. 
render the machine adapted to green-shave or 
The roller is provided peripherally with a se 
remove the heavy or thick fleshings, if de 
ries of main flanges, 45, arranged in rows, 
sired. As the the flanges 45 of the roller all 
which start from a circumferential line at 48, 
start from a common circumferential line, 48, 
and pass spirally around the body of the roll 
the hide or skin at the part corresponding 
er outwardly to either end, as shown in Fig. 
therewith would not be properly put out' 
1. The main flanges 45 are respectively pro 
or treated if the flanges 45 only were used, or 
vided at uniform distances apart on their sides 
if the short flanges 46 on the line 48 were ar. 
or faces with short auxiliary flanges 46, which 
ranged in regular order, and therefore the 
are preferably slightly curved and stand at an 
short flanges at that point are irregularly ar- 95 
angle of about forty-five degrees to the bodies 
ranged, as shown. The shoulder portions of 
of the main flanges. The auxiliary flanges 
a hide or skin are usually somewhat baggy' 
may be formed integral with the main flanges, 
or full, and in order to perform the work 
or made separately, as desired. The ends of 
properly it should be put out or stretched in 
the flanges 45 overlap each other, spaces 47 
either direction from the shoulders. The line 
being left between the overlapped ends to 
48, or starting-point of the flanges 45, is there 
form channels, through which the water ex 
fore placed a short distance to the left of the 
explanation. 
85 
- 
- 
75 
IOO 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
 
s 
344,069 
O 
25 
center of the roller, in order to bring it over 
the shoulders of the hide or skin and enable 
that portion to be properly put out or treated. 
The starting-point of the flanges or line 48 
may, however, be located at the center of the 
roller to the right of the center, if desired. By 
overlapping the ends of the flanges 45 said 
flanges are caused to stand at a different angle 
with respect to the longitudinal axial line of 
the roller than they would standatif arranged 
end to end or in a continuous line, thereby 
producing somewhat better results than would : 
be attained by arranging them as last de 
scribed, and also forming channels 47 for car 
rying off the water. I do not, however, con 
fine myself to overlapping the ends of the 
flanges 45, as they may be arranged end to 
end or in a continuous line and perform their 
functions satisfactorily; neither do I confine 
myself to leaving the spaces 47 between the 
ends of said flanges when they are overlapped, 
as they may be "overlapped and the ends left 
in contact, or approximately so, and thereby 
greatly increase their efficiency whether the 
spaces 47 are left between the overlapped ends 
or not; neither do I confine myself to the 
use of any special number of auxiliary flanges 
on the main flanges, as one or more may be 
employed. 
explained my invention, what 
Having thus 
1. In a roller of the character described, the 
body W", provided peripherally with a series 
of main flanges, 45, having one or more aux 
I claim is- 
. . . 
. . . . . . 
. 
. 
. . . . . 
- . . 
. . 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
35 
45 
4. 
55 
iliary flanges, 46, said main flanges being ar 
ranged in rows which start at or near the cen 
ter of said body and extend spirally around the 
same outwardly to either end thereof, substan 
tially as described. 
2. A roller having a series of peripherally 
disposed scraping or cutting flanges arranged 
in rows which pass spirally around or par 
tially around the body thereof, certain of said 
rows starting at a circumferential line or point 
which is located between a line drawn trans 
versely through the center of said roll and 
one of its ends, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
3. In a roller of the character described, the 
main flanges 45, having one or more auxiliary 
flanges, 46, said main flanges being arranged 
in rows which start at or near the center of 
the roller, and pass spirally around the body 
thereof, and have their ends overlapped, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a roller of the character described, the 
main flanges 45, having one or more auxiliary 
flanges, 46, said main flanges being arranged in 
rows which start at or near the center of the 
roller and pass spirally around the body there 
of, said main flanges having their ends over 
lapped and separated to form the channels 47, 
substantially as set forth. 
. 
JOSEPH. W. WAUGHN. 
Witnesses: 
C. A. SHAW, 
E. L. SAWYER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344172.txt	(No Model.) 
W. C. DENMEAD, 
ROTARY WALWE, 
No. 344,172. 
Patented June 22, l886, 
   
S N 
 
 
... 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
N 
 
  
 
1. N 
21%x 
 
N 1 
| / 4,424 
o%. 82. 
\ 
?ame one 
440//ias-C. 
(4,- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. DENMEAD, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
ROTARY VALVE. 
CFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Paterst, No. 344,172, dated June 22, l886. 
Application filed November 28, 1885. Serial No. 184,148. (No model.) 
The arrow in Fig. I shows the direction of 
flow of the steam or water. The cylindrical 
ends d of the valve fit in the casing; but it 
is not necessary that the joints thus formed 
should be steam-tight, as the said ends do not 
at any time cover the inlet and outlet aper 
tures e and f, but merely answer the purpose 
of guides. The stem D, which passes through 
a stuffing-box, E, in the bonnet F, has a T-head, 
which rests in a recess, g, in the upper cylin 
drical end of the valve B and serves to turn 
the valve. The T-head of the stem D pre 
vents the withdrawal of the stem, except by 
first removing the bonnet F. It will be under 
stood that as the segmental plate C wears it is 
forced out and against the shell, and a tight 
joint constantly maintained. The pressure 
being on the plate C alone, there is practically 
no wear on the guiding ends of the valve, and 
thus when the plate is entirely worn out an 
other can be substituted therefor at a nominal 
expense. 
I claim as my invention 
In combination with the shell A, the cylin 
drical valve B, cut away centrally and perfo 
rated, substantially as shown, and the loose 
segmental plate C, substantially as specified. 
WILLIAM. C. DENMEAD. 
35 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
JNO. T. MADDOX, 
WM. T. HOWARD. 
5 
To all, whon, it invally concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM C. DENMEAD, 
of the city of Baltimore, and State of Mary 
land, have invented certain Improvements in 
Rotary Walves, of which the following is a 
specification. 
In the description of the said invention 
which follows reference is made to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part hereof, and 
in which 
Figure I is a longitudinal section of the im 
proved valve, and Fig. II a cross-section of 
the same. Fig. III is a section taken on the 
dotted line acac, Fig. I. 
Fig. IV is a similar 
view of Fig. III, except that the position of 
the valve is changed. 
A is the shell, accurately bored to an uni 
for in diameter. 
B is the rotary valve, which consists of a 
cylindrical plug cut away at the center to ad 
mit of the passage of the water or steam from 
One end of the shell to the other when the 
said valve is open or placed as shown in 
Fig. IV. 
C is a segmental plate inserted loosely in a 
rabbet, a, in the face of the valve B, which 
serves to form a close joint with the inner sur 
face of the shell A. The central part, b, of the 
valve B is provided with holes c, to allow of 
steau or water under pressure acting directly 
on the rear or inner face of the plate C, to form : 
a tight joint when the valve is closed. 
IC 
2C 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344272.txt	(No Model.) 
S. B. HART, 
GRAIN DRILL, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 344,272. 
Patented June 22, 1886. 
 
 
  
Iufni Ham 
 
(No Model.) 
S. B. HART, 
GRAIN DRILI, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 344,272, 
Patented June 22, l886, 
 
&4- 
1 
6. 
2...watt- 
sawki (a. 
chwitzczov 
4easy 3.76alf 
* /aecy Ala 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STACY B. HART, OF PEORIA, ILLINOIS. 
GRANDRILL. 
S}PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 344,272, dated June 22, 1886. 
Application filed November 17, 1885. Serial No. 183,142. 
(No model.) 
55 
Zo all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STACY B. HART, of 
Peoria, in the county of Peoria and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Grain-Drills, of which the 
following is a description, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which are made 
a part of this specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means in a grain-drill whereby both the width 
and the depth of the planting can be quickly 
and easily regulated, and whereby the drill 
may be so arranged that in transporting it 
from place to place, or in turning it at the 
ends of the rows, the hoes shall be clear of the 
ground. 
To this end my invention consists, first, in 
the combination, with the drill-frame, of an 
arm pivoted thereto having a wheel or wheels 
mounted on its free end, and a latch or other 
means for engaging with said arm to hold it 
in various positions, whereby the hoes are 
held wholly above the ground or permitted 
to enter the ground to any desired depth; and, 
second, in the combination, with the drill 
frame and side bars, which bear the hoes, 
pivoted thereto, of the handles loosely con 
nected with Said Wings and stationary guides 
or guide-rings, which act as fulcrums for said 
handles; and, also, in the various sub-combi 
nations, herein fully described, and definitely 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of my improved grain-drill. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the Same With the hopper and con 
ductor-tubes removed, and a portion of the 
curved bar F cut away. Fig. 3 is a detached 
view of the arm H. Fig. 4 is a detached view 
of the shoulder h. Figs. 5 and 6 are detailed 
views of the devices for raising the hoes above 
the ground, Fig. 5 being a side view, and Fig. 
6 a rear view, of the same. 
A. A represent the center bars or main 
frame of the drill, and C the seed-box or hop 
per secured thereto. 
B B represent side bars or wings, which are 
pivoted at their forward ends to the frame A 
A, and swing in a substantially horizontal 
plane, and the hoes b b, &c., are secured to 
said wings and connected with the hopper by 
any appropriate conductor-tubes. 
a represents the wheel which supports the 
forward end of the drill. 
Near the rear end of the frame A. A? a curved 
arm, E, is fastened, which has upon its ends 
the guide-rings e. e. This precise construc 
tion is not insisted upon, since the require 
ments of the invention are, that some station 
ary devices shall be provided which shall 
guide the handles in their motion and act at the 
same time as fulcrums for said handles when 
they are employed as levers, and any devices 
which perform this double function I regard 
as the equivalent of the guides herein de 
scribed. 
D D' represent handles, which pass through 
said guide-rings e e', respectively, and are 
fastened at their lower ends to the wings BB, 
respectively, preferably by means of the sta 
ples or rings did, which makes a loose con 
nection between them. 
If the bandles D D, or either of them, be 
pushed inward, it is evident that the ringsee' 
will act as fulcrums, and that the lower ends 
of the handles will thrust against the wings 
B B and cause them to swing upon their piv. 
ots outward, and that thereby the width of 
the rows made by the hoes will be increased, 
and that a force in the opposite direction ap 
plied to the handles will produce a contrary 
motion in the wings, and thereby decrease the 
width of the rows. 
It is desirable to have some means for fast 
ening or latching the Wings in any desired po 
sition, and also means for readily unlatching 
them to enable the operator to suddenly change 
the width of the rows, if desired. The prefer 
able form for accomplishing this result I con 
sider to be the construction shown in the draw 
ings, wherein a curved bar, F, is shown to be 
fastened to the center bar A. Upon the up 
per faces of the wings B B are bolted the 
plates G, each plate having integral there 
with a curved arm, g, which extends over 
the upper face of the curved bar F, thereby 
serving to hold the wings in substantially the 
same plane, and relieve the pivots of much of 
the weight of said wings. To the plate G is 
pivoted the latch (f, having its free end turned 
downward, the Said latch lying in Substan 
tially the direction of the bar F. Attached 
to the latches of are the rods d' d', which ex 
tend along the handles D D, and have on 
their ends the finger-rings did within reach 
of the operator. Upon the upper face of the 
bar F are notches or depressions f, into which 
75 
8. 
9O 
95 
ICO 
IOS 
O 
25 
45 
 
344,272 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
the end of the latch drops by its own weight 
when released, thereby retaining the wings 
B B in a fixed relative position until the latch 
is lifted by means of the rod d". Near the rear 
end of the center bars, AA,is pivoted an arm, 
H, which preferably has along its rear face the 
shoulders or notches h. h. On the free end of 
the arm His mounted one or more (preferably 
two) wheels, II. The length of this arm H. 
and height of the wheel together is such that 
when they hang straight down from the bar, 
or nearly so, the hoes b b, &c., are held free 
from the ground. Back of the pivotal point 
of the arm Ha latch, K., is pivoted to said cen 
ter bar A. This latch in its preferable form 
consists of two arms lying nearly at right an 
gles to each other, the lower arm, k, being 
adapted to engage with the shoulders upon 
the arm H. The other arm, k, acts as a lever, 
by which the latch is disengaged from its con. 
nection with the arm H, and also acts as a 
weight, which forces the arm k forward, and 
holds it in constant contact with the arm H. 
The notches or shoulders h. h. are so ar 
ranged upon the arm H that when the latch 
K engages with the upper one, h, it holds the 
hoes wholly above the ground. When it en 
gages with the lower shoulder, it permits the 
hoes to sink into the ground to the fullest ex 
tent designed; when with an intermediate 
notch, only partially into the ground. 
In the preferable construction, as illustrated 
in the drawings, the arm H consists of two 
parts-flat bars-lying side by side, and the 
shoulders h h' are projections from pieces of 
iron fastened between Said bars. The lower 
shoulder is a part of a slotted piece, h, and 
a bolt, h, passes through the said slot. This 
piece h' can be moved up and down, and 
bolted in the desired position, thereby regu 
lating the depth which the hoes are permitted 
to sink into the ground. 
The operation of this part of the device is 
as follows: When the latch K is disengaged 
from the arm H, which is usually done by an 
upward kick against the arm k" from the foot 
of the operator, the weight of the machine 
throws the wheels and arm H backward, and 
the hoes sink into the ground. When it is 
desired to remove the hoes from and hold 
them above the ground, for the purpose of 
transportation or to turn the machine at the 
end of the rows, the machine is lifted by the 
handles, and the wheels fall by their own 
weight beneath the frame, where they are 
automatically locked, as before described, by 
the latch K. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the frame of a 
grain-drill, of a depending arm pivoted there 
to, having shoulders upon its rear face, a 
wheel or wheels mounted upon its free end, a 
latch pivoted to said frame, and means for 
holding said latch in constant contact with 
said arm, for the purpose specified. 
- 
55 
65 
 
75 
2. In a grain-drill, the combination, with 
the grain-drill frame, of a depending arm 
pivoted thereto, having a wheel or wheels 
mounted upon its free end, and having shoul 
ders projecting from its rear face, one or 
more of which shoulders are vertically adjust 
able, and a latch pivoted to the grain-drill 
frame and adapted to engage with said shoul 
ders, for the purpose specified. 
3. In a grain-drill, the combination, with 
the frame thereof, of a depending arm pivot 
ed thereto, having a wheel or wheels mounted 
upon its free end, and having shoulders upon 
its rear face, and a latch consisting of a bent 
lever pivoted at its angle to the drill-frame, 
and having its lower end adapted to engage 
with said shoulders, and having its other 
arm weighted, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
4. The combination, with the frame of a 
grain-drill, of a depending arm pivoted there 
to, consisting of two bars lying parallel to 
each other, a wheel or wheels mounted upon 
the free end of said arm, and a slotted piece 
bolted between said parallel bars, having a 
rearwardly-projecting shoulder, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination, with the frame of a 
grain-drill and hoe-bearing side wings piv 
oted thereto, of handles loosely connected 
with said wings, and devices rigidly attached 
to said frame, which act as fulcrums, and 
serve to guide and support said handles, for 
the purpose specified. 
6. The combination, with the frame of a 
grain-drill, of hoe-bearing side wings pivoted 
thereto, handles loosely connected with said 
wings, and stationary guides for said handles, 
for the purpose specified. 
7. The combination of the grain-drill frame, 
and hoe-bearing side wings pivoted thereto, 
with handles loosely connected with said 
wings, stationary guides for said handles, 
and means for locking said Wings at any point 
in their movement, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
8. The combination, with the grain-drill 
frame and hoe-bearing side wings pivoted 
thereto, and means for swinging said wings 
upon their pivots, of a curved bar having 
notches upon its face, latches pivotally con 
nected with said side wings and adapted to 
engage with said notches, and means for re 
leasing said latches, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
9. The combination of the grain-drill frame, 
and hoe-bearing side wings pivoted thereto, 
with a curved arm secured to said frame, 
rings upon the outer ends of said arm, and 
the handles which pass through said rings 
and are loosely connected with said wings, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
STACY B. HART. 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
125 
Witnesses: 
E. L.THURSTON, 
L. H.ILL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344372.txt	(No Model.) 
A. B. HACKMAN. 
r 
WIRE GATE, 
No. 344,372, 
Patented June 29, 1886, 
 
- Z2-27-27- 
Z-2 
i. 
C ir 
Y, 
- ZZ 7-4- 75.1/- 7 
2 
O 
a 
Cy 
WITNESSES 
(6.2%-244. 
22, 
- 
INVENTOR 
, 6-2-y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AARON B. HACKMAN, OF PENROSE, ILLINOIS. 
WRE GATE. 
CPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 344,372, dated June 29, 1886. 
Application filed March 26, 1886. Serial No. 196,683. (No model.) 
5 
O 
15 
To ali, whom it naiy concern: 
space of time, and, owing to the small number 
Be it known that I, AARON B. HACKMAN, a 
of parts used and the simplicity of their con 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pen 
struction, at a very slight cost. 
rose, in the county of Whiteside and State of 
Barb-wire may be substituted for the plain 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
wire shown in the drawings, where so desired. 
Improvements in Wire Gates; and I do de 
The gate is closed by locking it to a post, B, 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
set in the ground at a suitable distance from 
act description of the invention, such as will 
the post A. The wire A' is made of such a 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
length that the gate will be about equal in 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
length to the distance between the two posts 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
A and B. Near the upper end of the post B, 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
I pivotally secure a lever, C, which closes the 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
gate and holds it in its closed position in the 
tion. 
operation of the same. This lever C, I prefer 
Myinvention relates to gates for wire fences, 
ably form of a single metal rod, as shown in 
and it aims to provide a cheap and simple 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3. One end, C, is inserted in 
gate, as shown in the accompanying drawings; 
the post B, and in such a manner that it will 
and it consists, essentially, in a lever provided 
be allowed to turn freely, but cannot be readily 
with an eccentric portion for closing the gate 
removed from the post. The rod C is given a 
and holding it in its closed position, as will be 
double bend close to the post, and a third bend 
hereinafter fully described, and pointed out in 
a proper distance from the post, so as to form 
the claim. 
the crank C and the handle C. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a front 
D is a hole made in the ground close to the 
elevation showing my gate open. Fig. 2 shows 
lower end of the post B, the purpose of which 
it closed. Fig. 3 is a detail sectional view on 
will presently appear. 
the line aca, Fig. 1; and Figs. 4 and 5 are de 
The operation of my gate is simple and will 
tail views showing a modification. 
be readily appreciated. In Fig. 1 the gate is 
A designates the gate, which is of a very 
shown partially open. To close the gate, the 
simple construction. It consists of two posts, 
lower end of the post A* is set in the hole D 
A' A', and a wire, A, secured to and connect 
and the post A' held close to the post B. The 
ing the two posts. The post A'is immovable, 
lever C is then turned downward, when the 
its lower end entering the ground to a suffi 
crank portion C will be caused to bear against 
cient depth to secure the post, as will be un 
the post A and carry it forward. The lever 
derstood. The post A is movable, and is con 
C is given a half-revolution, which will bring 
nected to the post A in the manner I will now 
it into the position shown in Fig. 2, closing 
describe. One end of the wire A is fastened 
the gate. The lever is so constructed that it 
around the post A' near its upper end, and at 
will bind against the post A* sufficiently to 
a suitable distance therefrom. The wire is 
hold the gate against the tension of the wire, 
then carried to the post A and inserted through 
and will hold the gate in its closed position. 
an opening formed through the said post. It 
To open the gate it is only necessary to reverse 
is then bent downward to about the middle of 
the operation just described. 
the post and passed through a second opening 
The peculiar construction of the gate shown 
back toward the post A. It is then carried 
and described is particularly advantageous, 
to the post A and inserted through openings 
as by the arrangement of the wire A* the gate 
in said post in opposite directions in the man 
can be easily stretched so as to hold the wire 
ner just described of passing and repassing it 
taut. 
through the post A', after which it is carried 
While I prefer to use the peculiar form of 
back to the post A', and secured thereto near 
lever shown most clearly in Fig. 3, and here 
its lower end in any desired manner. It will 
inbefore described, I do not wish to be limited 
thus be seen that I provide a gate which can 
thereto in building my gate. Where so de 
be built with very little labor, in a very short i sired the analogous construction shown in Figs, 
95 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
344,372 
O 
4 and 5 could be used without departing from 
the principles of my invention. In Figs. 4 and 
5 I have shown the lever G as an ordinary L 
shaped lever, the shorter arm being pivotally 
secured in the post B, and provided with an 
eccentric, E. It will be seen that this con 
struction will have the same operation as that 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. I prefer, however, 
to use the first-mentioned, as it is cheaper and 
simpler. 
I am aware that a wire gate has been drawn 
taut and held closely by a horizontally-swing 
ing latch-lever pivoted to a post on one side 
of the gateway, and do not claim such as my in 
vention. 
Elaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The combination, with the gate, comprising 
a fixed and movable post and wire connecting 
the two posts, of a second post located at a 
distance from the fixed post of the gate on the 
opposite side of the gateway, forming a stop. 
for the movable post, and a substantially right 
angled lever having the shorter arm journaled 
in the fixed post and provided with an eccen 
tric or crank to bear on the inner side of the 
movable gate-post and draw the gate taut, the 
longer arm bearing on the outer side of said 
post to hold it close against the fixed post, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
AARON B. HACKMAN. 
Witnesses: 
J. K. ESEILEMAN, 
MATT. E. WILLGER, Jr. 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344472.txt	(No Model.) 
W. BAUER. 
ROLLER MIL, 
NO. 344,472, 
Patented June 29, 1886. 
2 (1. 
 
 
712Zvesses. 
6, 
1verzar 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELM BAUER, OF SAN CARLOS, SANTA FE, ARGENTINE REPUBLIC. 
ROLLER. M. L. L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Iletters Patent No. 344,472, dated June 29, 1886. 
Application filed January 18, 1886. Serial No. 188,816. (No model.) 
round by the cylinders, against the sides of 
which are applied scrapers d or brushes, to 
prevent the ground product adhering to the 
rollers from being carried again between the 
latter. An opening, a, is provided at the top 
of the casing, immediately above the bite of 
the cylinders, for the introduction of the ma 
terial to be reduced by the cylinders. 
Having thus described my invention and 
the manner of employing the same, what I 
claim as my invention, and wish to have se 
cured to me by Letters Patent of the United 
States of America, is 
The combination, with the rollers of a roller 
mill, of the central hopper or receptacle, c, 
and receptacles of on opposite sides thereof, 
the scrapers d, applied to the parts of the rollers 
over the side receptacles, (), and the adjustable 
flaps.f, applied between the several receptacles, 
substantially as and for the purpose herein 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
WILEELM BAUER, 
35 
45 
SO 
Witnesses: 
FRANZ HASSLACHER, 
JOSEPH PATRICK. 
To add, whon, it Taly concern. 
IBe it known that I, WILHELM BAUER, a 
citizen of the Argentine Republic, residing 
at San Carlos, Province of Santa F6, in the 
said Argentine Republic, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Roller - Mills, of 
which the following is a specification. 
It has been observed in roller-mills that 
only a part of the meal falls down, while the re 
mainder is thrown to one side by the cylin 
ders or adheres to them. This fact has been 
utilized for the purpose of dividing the meal 
into two or more qualities. 
The invention represented in the accom 
panying drawing consists in a casing for the 
cylinders b b, provided with hoppers or recep 
tacles of beneath the cylinders, to receive the 
different grades, said receptacles being Sepa 
rated from one another by longitudinal parti 
tions, which may be adjusted by means of the 
flaps f, hinged at h, to vary the proportion of 
the product falling into the different hoppers 
or receptacles, there being a central longitudi 
nal hopper, c, or receptacle immediately be 
neath the bite of the rollers, to receive the pro 
duct directly failing therefrom, and at each 
side thereof one or more other receptacles, g, 
to receive the product which is carried partly 
5 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344573.txt	(No Model.) 
M. G-ALE, 
ANTI FRICTION BEARING, 
No. 344,573, 
Patented June 29, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
S 
SS 
N 
& 
WITNESSES: 
o%-44. 
-6 &c.e4 
(A fo 
INVENTOR: 
74%- 
By lungsge 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
MORGAN G-ALE, OF NEAR SANTA ROSA, SAN SALVADOR, C 
ENTRAL 
AMERICA. 
ANT-FRECTION BEARNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 344,573, dated June 29, 1886. 
Application filed November 19, 1885. Serial No. 183,277. 
(No model.) 
To al?, u?ion, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, MORGAN GALE, of near 
Santa Rosa, Republic of San Salvador, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Anti-Friction Bearings, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. . 
My invention relates to the construction of 
bearings for vertical shafts that revolve at a 
high rate of speed, and are required to sup 
port considerable weight. 
The invention consists of certain details of 
Construction and combinations of parts, as 
will be hereinafter described, and specifically 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
Corresponding parts in all figures. 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional elevation of 
the Connbined devices. Fig. 2 is a horizontal 
sectional view taken on line a. a. of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation at right angles 
to Fig. 1 and Fig. 4 is a sectional plan view 
taken on line y y of Fig. 1. 
Referring to the specific construction of the 
sfep and bearing illustrated in the drawings, 
A is a vertical shaft, to which is secured a col 
lar, B, by means of set - screws a (, or other 
Suitable means of attachment. 
Below the collar B the shaft. A projects 
through a pillow-block, B, and a box, C to be 
in Ore Specifically explained, and finally termi 
nates in a step, D, the shaft being reduced in 
diameter, as shown at b. This step D con 
sists, essentially, of a hollow casting, c, with 
in which the shaft-guiding cup or socket cl fits, 
being held in the desired position by keys 
e e, which pass through apertures formed in 
the flangef of the socket d, and enter grooves 
formed in the side walls of the casting c. This 
Casting is So formed that there is an annular 
oil - chamber, i, about the socket d, which 
chamber is fed by proper oil-ducts leading 
thereto. About in a line with the bottom of 
the shaft A are the two oil ducts o o, leading 
from chamber i to the interior of the socket d. 
O 
25 
JO 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
The weight of the shaft A, and any load it 
may carry, is taken up by a series of anti 
friction balls, lll, that rest within a groove, 
g, formed on the upper side of the pillow 
block B", a corresponding groove, g, being 
formed on the under side of the collar B, SO 
that the step D merely acts as a guide for the 
lower end of the shaft A and not as a Weight 
supporting device. 
The box C, to which the pillow-block B is 
bolted, is provided with three or more con 
verging slots, in n, in which there are fitted 
bearing-blocks 'n', made from any of the 
well - known anti - friction bearing metals. 
These blocks n' n' are adjusted to or from the 
shaft, as the necessities of the case require, 
by the adjusting - screws N N, that engage 
with threaded sockets formed in the box C. 
By such an arrangement as has been de 
scribed, the shaft. A may be revolved at a high 
speed, and may be made to carry quite a 
Weight, as is required in the case of the verti 
cal shaft of an amalgamating pan, and by the 
provision made by the adjusting devices of the 
box C it becomes almost immaterial whether 
the weight carried by the shaft A is equally 
distributed on all sides or carried by one side 
alone. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with the vertical re 
volving shaft A, of a collar, B, pillow-block 
B', anti-friction balls l l l, box C, bearing 
blocks n' ', and the adjusting - screws N N, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, with the vertical re 
volving shaft A, of a collar, B, pillow-block 
B', anti-friction balls l l l, the box C, bearing 
blocks n' 2", adjusting-screws N N, and a foot 
guiding step, D, substantially as described. 
MORG AN GAILE. 
Witnesses: 
JOS. M. HARRISON, 
FRANCIS LANGTOIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344673.txt	
/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344773.txt	(No Model.) 
J. S. DUFFEE, 
WEATHER STRIP, 
No. 344,773, 
Yws. 
Patented June 29, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
li 
r 
s 
"| 
Eges, Y4 2 
2 
ressessess 
-sell). 
ill. 
8woovilot 
72%zz/S Zea/2.2. 
33 Zzs &Letovacy &2%% 
-as 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN S. DUFFEE, OF RICHMOND, INDIANA. 
WEATHER a SR P. 
5t?fcIICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 344,773, dated June 29, 1886. 
Application filed April 19, 1886. Serial No. 199,444. (No model.) 
the rod d projects beyond the end of the 
bracket is regulated, and consequently When 
the rod is brought in contact with the frame 
of the door the throw of the bar F and also 5O 
the eccentrics E is acted upon with greater Or 
less force to bring the rubber strip in contact 
with the threshold. 
When the door is opened, the strip at is 
raised flush with the lower edge of the bracket 55 
C by means of a spiral spring, H, inclosed in 
a casing, I, open at both ends. The tension 
of the spring His regulated by an adjusting 
screw, h, having a disk, k, on its inner end, 
which bears on the end of the spring to Con- 6o 
press the coils to any degree required. The 
opposite end of the spring His provided with 
a bearing-disk, i, for the end of the bar F to 
come in contact with, and both the rod d and 
screw h have slotted heads for engaging there- 65 
with a screw-driver for turning them. 
The spring H, as will be understood, forces 
the bar F back to its normal position When 
pressure is removed from the rod d, and 
through its connection with the rubber strip 7c 
at the latter is elevated. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
shank, c, an adjusting or gage device, G, en 
gaging there with, and terminating in a rod d, 
for turning it, in combination with the Spring 
H, contained within the casing I, and adjust 
ing screw h, for regulating the tension of the 8c 
spring, the plate D, having the strip (, alld 
connected to the plunger-bar by links b, and 
pivoted eccentrics E, arranged to operate sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
hereunto subscribed luy name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
JOHN s. DUFFEE. 
The plunger-bar F, having a screw-threaded 75 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 85 
Witnesses: 
OLIVER E. MITCHELL, 
CHARLES C. BINKLEY. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN S. DUFFEE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Rich 
mond, in the county of Wayne and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Weather-Strips; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, refer 
ence being had to the annexed drawings, mak 
io ing a part of this specification, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a front eleva 
tion of my invention, partly in section; Fig. 2, 
a cross-section taken on line acac of Fig. 1, 
15 and Fig. 3 a detail perspective view of one of 
the plates connected to the end of the bracket 
to which the operating parts of the weather 
strip are connected. 
The present invention has for its object to 
2O provide a simple and easily-operating weather 
strip that will effectually and accurately close 
the space between the shut door and the 
threshold; and it consists in the details of con 
struction, substantially as shown in the draw 
25 ings and hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the door, and B the threshold, the door 
having connected to its lower edge a bracket, 
C, extending the entire width thereof. Within 
3o the bracket Cissupported a metal plate, D, of 
a length equal to that of the bracket, and hav. 
ing secured thereto a rubber or felt strip, a, 
to form a tight and closed joint between it 
and the threshold. 
35 The plate D is connected to eccentrics E by 
means of linksb, said eccentrics being pivoted 
to the bracket C, and also to a plunger-bar, F. 
The distance of stroke of the bar F is regul 
lated by an adjusting or gage device, G, which 
4o engages with a screw-threaded shank, c, on 
the end of the bar. The gage G. terminates at 
its outer end in a short rod, d, which passes 
through an opening in a plate, e, secured to 
the inner end of the bracket C, a similar plate, 
45 f, being attached to the opposite end thereof. 
TBy means of the gage G the distance which 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344874.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. SEBOLD. 
LITHOGRAPHERS ARM REST. 
No. 344,874. 
Patented July 6, 1886, 
F. G. W. 
Sitweases 
4%22- 
2-473- 
', 
A4, 4 of 24 
ssy 4a &lffe tic (6-a--/3,co 
Jween to: 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographor, Washinston, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. SIEBOLD, OF HOBOKEN, NEW JERSEY. 
LITH OGRAPHERS ARM, REST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 344,874, dated July 6, 1886. 
Application filed February 1, 1886. Serial No. 190,552. 
No model.) 
45 
SO 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN H. SIEBOLD, of 
Hoboken, Hudson county, State of New Jersey, 
have invented a new and Improved Lithog 
rapher's Arm - Rest, of which the following 
specification is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
This invention relates to an arm-rest to be 
used by lithographers in engraving upon stone. 
One of these rests is placed at the right and 
the other at the left side of the stone, while a 
board is placed upon the rests, so as to partly 
cover the stone. Upon this board the arm of 
the lithographer rests while he engraves upon 
the exposed part of the stone's surface. 
The arm-rest is so made that it may be raised 
or lowered, thus acconimodating it to stones 
of different thicknesses. 
The invention consists in the various ele 
ments of improvement hereinafter more fully 
pointed out. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of my arm-rest, showing it raised 
or distended. Fig. 2 is a bottom view of the 
upper plate. Fig. 3 is a top view of the lower 
plate. Fig. 4 is a side view of the rest, show 
ing it folded up. 
The letter a represents an upper plate, and 
b a lower plate, of square or other form, con 
nected by four (more or less) pivoted links, c. 
Into a groove cut into the lower face of the 
plate a there is placed a longitudinal rod, d, 
the ends of which are secured to the plate by 
suitable blocks, e. The rod dis surrounded by 
a sliding sleeve, f, which may be clamped to 
the rod in any position by a set-screw, g. To 
accommodate the shank of this set-screw, a 
portion of the lower face of plate a is cut away, 
as shown in Fig. 2. 
To the sleeve f there is pivoted the upper 
end of a bar, h, the lower end of which is piv 
oted to the plate b by a block, i, Fig. 3, or in 
other manner. Directly beneath the rod d 
there is cut into the upper face of the plate b 
a longitudinal groove, j, to accommodate the 
bar h when the device is folded up. 
It will be seen that when the bar h is in its 
most upright position the plates a b are at 
their greatest distance apart, while the greater 
the inclination of the bar the nearer the plates 
come together. 
To raise the upper plate, a, the set screw g 
is loosened and the plate is lifted up by the 
hand. The links c and the bar h will thereby 
"be swung into a more or less upright position. 
When the desired height of plate a has been 
reached, it is locked in place by tightening 
the set-Screw. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of plates a, b, connected 
by pivoted links c, with rod d, sleeve f, set 
screw 0, and bar h, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination of plates a, b, connected 
by pivoted links c, with rod d, sleeve?, set 
screw 0, and bar h, the plate b having groove 
j for accommodation of bar h, substantially as 
specified. 
JOHN H. SIEBOLD. 
Witnesses: 
ROB. H., ROY, 
F. W. BRIESEN. 
EO 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US344975.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 344,975. 
E. E. MILLER, 
OIL CAN. 
Patented July 6, 1886. 
WITNESSES 
 
INVENTOR 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES 
PATENr OFFICE. 
EDGAR. E. MILLER, 
OF CANTON, OHIO. 
OL 
CAN. 
Application filed January 11, 1886. Serial No. 18S,216. 
No model.) 
5 
O 
To all, uhon, it Tually concern: 
Be it known that I, EDGAR. E. MILLER, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Canton, county of Stark, State of Ohio, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Oil-Cans, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, making part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
oil-cans, and particularly relates to that class 
of oil-cans adapted to carry about the person 
in a pocket or game-bag or other suitable re 
ceptacle; and it consists in providing a nose 
piece or spout that may be revolved in its con 
nection with the can, and through which oil 
may be discharged at different points in the 
circle described in its revolution, excepting 
the inner quarter of said circle, and that may 
be turned back to a point of rest by the side 
of the can, and thereby reduce the space oc 
cupied by the can, and means for securing the 
nose in a position of rest and preventing oil 
from dripping from the nose when so turned 
back and Sectired. 
My invention also relates to the details and 
combination of parts as described and set 
forth in the claims. 
In Figure 1, letter A represents the oil-can, 
which may be made of hard rubber or any 
suitable light metal, stamped into any of the 
well-known and approved flat oval forms, hav. 
ing Spring or elastic sides (, or having a coiled. 
wire Spring placed in the can between the 
sides, to force them apart after being pressed 
together to eject oil, or may be of any of the 
usual forms of oil-cans, as shown in Fig. 7. 
The neck b of the can terminates in a head, d, 
which forms a gland, f, for the tapering turn 
plugg. Through the neck b there is an open 
aperture extending from the inside of the can 
to the inside of the gland f. 
The spout B is 
bent to a line at a right angle with a line 
drawn longitudinally through the center of the 
turn-plug and tapers down to a small point or 
nose. On the turn-plug is formed a groove, 
as shown by letter h, Fig. 3. This groove ex 
tends over about three-fourths of the circum 
ference of the turn-plug, and is in such posi 
tion as to correspond with the aperture in the 
3O 
45 
SO 
55 
f 5 
neck b when the plug is placed in the gland 
in which it may be revolved, that part, e, of the 
face of the plug which is under the spout pass 
ing over the aperture before mentioned. 
When the spout is turned back on the side of 
the can, communication is cut off between the 
can and the Spout, and no oil can pass from 
the can into the spout; but when turned to a 
point shown by the dotted lines i, Fig. 2, the 
groovel will be brought over the aperture in 
the neck b, and oil may pass out of the can 
and through the spout, and at any desired 
point or angle to the neck of the can in the 
circle from a to ac, (see Fig. 2.) the oil flowing 
through the neck of the can into the groove h 
and out through aperture into the spout B; 
but when the spout is turned back on the side 
of the can, as shown in Fig.1, the face e of the 
plug of will rest against the wall of the gland 
fand over the aperture in the neck b, shutting 
off the flow of oil from the can. To Secure 
the spout in this folded position, a rest, E, Fig. 
6, is provided, which is formed substantially as 
shown, having on its front side an offset and 
inclines, ii, from the ends upward and inward, 
and a center depression, k, in which the nose 
or free end l of the spout may rest, and an up 
ward projection, m, having on its front face an 
inlay, , of rubber or other plastic material, 
which rests against the nose of the spout, closing 8C 
it, So as to prevent oil that may be in the Spout 
when turned to that position from escaping. 
This rest Emay be so attached to the can that 
the flexibility of the can will hold the rubber 
stopper in tight against the nose of the spout. 
After the spout is placed in position the wash 
er O may be placed over the end of the turn 
plug and the screw p turned in, the flange rest 
ing on the rim of the gland, and by this means 
the turn-plug kept tight in the gland. 
The can A shown in Fig. 2 is the same as 
that shown in Fig. 1, and hereinbefore de 
Scribed, except in the construction of the head 
U and the adaptation of the spout W thereto. 
In this case there is formed in the head U a 
valve-seat, t, as shown in Fig. 5. From this 
valve-seat there extends an openway, S, through 
the neck t to the can. The spout W, Fig. 4, is 
provided with a valve, c, in the face of which 
there is a groove, u', circling around in the 
90 
75 
ICO 
344,975 
2. As an article of manufacture, an oil-can 
having a head, U, provided with a valve-seat, 
it, having an aperture, 8, for the oil to pass 
through, a center perforation, u', spout W, hav- 4o 
ing a centerpin, v, adapted to the perforation 
it, in which it may be rotated, and a valve, w, 
adapted to cover and close apertures, a groove, 
t", in the face of the valve, and an aperture, u, 
extending from the groove at into the spout, 
these parts operating jointly for the purpose 
of opening and closing a passage-way from 
the inside of the can out through the spout, 
and for changing the direction of the same, 
substantially as described, and for the purpose 5o 
Set forth. 
3. The combination, with an oil-can having 
a movable spout, of a stop adapted when the 
spout is turned to an inoperative position to 
engage the same and close the end thereof, for 
the purpose of preventing any oil that may be 
in the spout from escaping, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. The combination, with an oil-can having 
a movable spout, of the stop having inclines i 
and upward projection, m, the latter adapted 
to close the end of the spout when the latter is 
turned to an inoperative position, substantially 
as set forth. 
hand this 8th day of January, A. D. 1886. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 65 
45 
55 
EDGAR. E. MILLER. 
Witnesses: 
W. K. MILLER, 
CHAS. R. MILLER. 
O 
face of the valve from u to a, and a perfora. 
tion, u, extending from the groove into and 
out through the spout W. The stem gy is passed 
through the center perforation, at', in the head 
U, and the parts are secured in their proper 
Working relations by the washery and nut of, 
and when so secured the valvew, with the spout 
W, may be rotated on the valve-seat it, and when 
the spout is turned back over the side or top 
of the can the solid face of the valve no will rest 
Over the apertures, cutting off the flow of oil 
from the can; but when it is turned as shown 
by the dotted linesi, Fig.2, bringing the groove 
at Over the apertures, oil may pass from the can 
into the groove, thence through aperture it, 
and out through the spout W at any point de 
Sired in the circle from a to ac. The nose of 
the spout is held in position when folded or 
turned back over the side of the can by the 
device shown by Fig. 6, and hereinbefore de 
scribed. When used on the ordinary can, as 
shown in Fig. 7, the spout may be folded and 
Secured either to the side or top of the can, 
and when so constructed and arranged pro 
duces an article of manufacture of great value. 
Having thus fully described the nature and 
object of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of an oil-can having a 
head secured thereto, the latter provided with 
an aperture or passage for the oil, a movable 
spout secured to said head, and having a groove 
adapted to register with the oil-aperture in 
the head, and an aperture connecting the 
35 groove with the interior of the spout, and de 
vices for securing the spout to the head. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345075.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 345,075. 
 
WITNESSES 
O22-73 
J. L. QUACKEN BUSH, 
FENCE POST, 
Patented July 6, 1886. 
Z% Z 
4. 
3. 3 y21so 
INVENTOR; 
A. 
2% 
AORNEYS, 
N. FEERs, photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAY L. QUACKENBUSH, OF PORTLAND, OREGON. 
FENCE - POST. 
S32ECECA.ON forming part of Letters Patent No. 345,075, dated July 6, 1886. 
Application filed September 16, 1885. Serial No. 177.249. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
- 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAY E. QUACKENBUSH, 
of Portland, in the county of Multnomah and 
State of Oregon, have invented a new and Im 
proved Fence-Post, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to metal posts for 
fences, and has for its object to promote the 
stability of the posts, and also to provide a post 
that is light, strong, durable, and inexpensive, 
and which shall give substantial support to 
the fence-wires. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
titl res of construction and combinations of 
parts of the fence-post, all as hereinafter fully 
described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, in 
Which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
fence -post as set into the ground. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view of the screw ground-plate. Fig. 3 
shows the lower end of the post with a sur 
face ground-plate applied. Fig. 4 is a plan 
view of the surface ground-plate, and Fig. 5 
is a Cross-section of the upper part of the 
fence-post. 
The fence-post is made with a bar, A, of plate 
metal, which is rolled, pressed, or cast at its 
upper or above-ground portion in concavo 
convex form, as at a, and with a flange, a?, 
along one edge; but the bar may have a flange 
along its other edge also, as indicated by the 
dotted lines at a' in Fig. 5. The lower or em 
bedded part of the post-bar A is formed into 
a screw, B, which is tapering, and is pointed 
like a gimlet, so as to enter the ground easily, 
and the screw is sharpened all along the pe 
riphery of its thread, so that it will not lift 
the earth much, if any, but will compress the 
earth tightly around the threads, to make a 
more secure fastening for the post in the ground 
by the screw than would a screw having a 
blunt peripheral edge, or otherwise shaped so 
it wouldlift the earth considerably and force it 
away from the threads. 
The letter C indicates a ground-plate, which 
is made separate from the bar A, and of metal, 
and in helical form, so as to constitute about 
one complete turn of a screw, the forward edge, 
55 
65 
c, of which is sharpened, so that after the plate 
C is run on the screw Bas far as it will go the 
post-bar may be screwed into the ground D 
until the plate C rests by its entire under face 
on the ground-surface, or until the entire plate 
is embedded in the ground, as shown in Fig.1. 
The peripheral edge c of the helical ground 
plate C is sharpened, so that the plate lifts the 
earth little or none, and packs the earth solidly 
about it, to make a strong and reliable anchor 
to the upright part A B of the post. The 
central aperture, b, of the plate C is elongated, 
and the opposite marginal portions, bb, of 
the plate at the aperture b are shaped to form 
a nut corresponding with the thread of the 
screw B, so that the post-bar A B cannot be 
drawn from the embedded ground-plate C, but 
must be unscrewed to remove it therefrom. 
The flange a' of the post-bar A is notched or 
slotted angularly, as at E, and the fence-wires 
F are passed one into each of the notches, and 
the tongues or points e of the flange then are 
hammered across the notches, so as to bind 
the wires F tightly therein and to the post, as 
shown at e' in Fig. 1. Wood or metal strips 
may be woven into the wires between the posts 
as a warning to persons or stock that they are 
approaching a barrier and to prevent sagging 
of the wires. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 the ground-plate C, instead 
of being made helical to screw into the ground 
like the plate C, above described, is made in con 
cavo-convex form, and has a central elongated 
aperture, b, with margins b b, shaped to form 
a nut for allowing the plate to be screwed on 
the post-bar Aas far as it will go, and then the 
end B of the post will be screwed into the 
round ID until the concaved lower face of the 
9. 
plate C is drawn down on and into the ground 
sufficiently to cause the earth to fill and pack 
hard into the concavity of the plate, as in Fig. 
3, whereby the air will partially be expelled 
from below the plate, and the air-pressure on 
top of the plate assists the screw B and the 
actual bearing of the under side of the plate 
on the ground to hold the post erect and firmly 
to place. 
It is evident that the concavo-convex cross 
sectional form of the parta of the post-bar A IOO 
gives the postgreat strength, and the method of 
securing the fence-wires in the flange a' is very 
90 
75 
95 
345,075 
O 
simple and effective, and that whichever of 
the ground-plates C or C be used the posts 
will stand firmly to give substantial support 
to the fence-wires. Furthermore, the entire 
fence-post is very light, strong, and durable, 
and maybe made at a low cost. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, in a fence-post, of a 
post-bar, A, provided with a tapering screw, 
B, at its lower end, and a separable ground 
plate, C, having an aperture, b, marginally 
shaped at b' b, substantially as shown and de 
scribed, whereby the ground-plate may be 
screwed on the post-bar and the post-bar then 
screwed into the ground, to clamp the ground 
plate thereto for steadying the post, as set 
forth. 
2. The combination, in a fence-post, of a 
2O post-bar, A, provided with a tapering screw, 
B, at its lower end, and a separable ground 
plate, C, having an aperture, b, marginally 
shaped as at bli', and said plate Chaving aheli 
cal form, substantially as shown and described, 
whereby the ground-plate may be screwed on 25 
the post-bar, and the post-bar and ground 
plate may be screwed into the ground, as and 
for the purposes herein set forth. 
3. The combination, in a fence-post, of a 
bar, A, provided with a flange, as at a, hav- 3o 
ing slots E, and having a tapering screw, B, at 
its lower end, and a separable ground-plate, 
C, having an aperture, b, marginally shaped as 
at b b, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed, and for the purposes set forth. 
JAY L. QUACKENBUSH. 
Witnesses: 
L. P. W. QUIMBY, 
J. THOS. HICKEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345175.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 345,175, 
 
J. W. POTTER, 
EXTENSION TABLE SLIDE, 
Patented July 6, 1886. 
S 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. POTTER, OF POTTERVILLE, MICHIGAN. 
EXTSENS ON - TABLE SLOE. 
SSR, CECATION iforning part of letters Patent No. 345,175, dated July 6, 1886. 
Aplication fied March 6, 1886. Serial No. 194,293. (No model.) 
O 
To all tufton, it inctly conce772, 
Be it known that I, JAMES W. POTTER, o 
Potterville, in the county of Eaton and State 
of Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Extension-Table Slides; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
My invention is an improved table-slide; 
and its object is provide a construction which 
will not be liable to fracture, and at the same 
time will be cheap to manufacture. 
In the drawings I have represented simply 
the three slides of one side, not deeming it 
necessary to show the duplication of these. 
parts or the table itself, as the invention is 
applied to the table in the usual manner. 
The table in other respects may be of any de 
sirable make. In these drawings I have shown 
but three slides; but it will be obvious that 
more or less may be used, according to the 
length to which it is desired to extend the 
table. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents in perspective three slides, the up 
per one being detached and turned back, so 
as to expose its under side to view. Fig. 2 
shows two of the slides in side clevation and 
the other in longitudinal section. 
The slides are represented at A B C. The 
slide A is formed with a channeled opening 
having a contracted mouth, c, down to the 
point a, and fitted to this is a metal plate, b, 
which is screwed or otherwise secured to pro 
jecting central rib on the slide B, the project 
ing rib efitting accurately the contracted part 
of the opening in the slide A, and the metal 
plate fitting the channeled portion thereof, as 
plainly shown. The metal plate is of limited 
length, as shown in the drawings. The chan 
neled portion of theslide A ceases at the pointa; 
but the opening 0 continues to the end, and the 
metal plate b, coming in contact with the rear of 
the channeled portion at the point a, serves as 
a stop to prevent further movement of the slide 
in one direction. A dowel-pin, d, projecting 
at the opposite end of the slide B, serves as a 
stop for the slide A when moving in the op 
posite direction, the dowel-pin entering a re 
cess, d, formed in the corresponding end of 
the slide A. The shape of the ribe, as shown 
in the end view, extends only to a point, 1, on 
35 
40 
In the recess formed at one end in the lower 55 
the slide B, and from this point to the oppo 
site end is formed with a groove upon one 
side, (marked 2,) as clearly shown in Fig. 1. 
fice of the side A is screwed or otherwiseSe 
cured a plate, f, which is flush with the outer 
face of the slides and extends in engaging with 
the groove 2 in the ribe, thus serving to hold 
the parts in place, in connection with the 6c 
groove and plate. described in connection with 
the slide A. As the groove 2 only extends as 
far as the point 1, as indicated, the plate f 
will come in contact with the rear wall there. 
of, and thus serve as a stop. The slide B is 65 
formed in a like manner, with the channeled 
groove upon its under face having the con 
tracted opening, and having its opposite end 
formed from the point 3 to the end with a 
plain groove, as described, in connection with 
the under side of the slide A, and the slide C 
is provided with a corresponding rib, e, and 
metal plate at one end and the grooved rib 
and metal plate on the under side of the slide 
B, as before described, and in case another 
slide is used the construction would be dupli 
cated. A dowel-pin is also secured in the 
end of the slide C, and this enters a recess in 
the slide B, and serves to limit its movement 
in one direction. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A slide for extension-tables, consisting 
of a slide, A, grooved centrally upon one side, 
the slide IB, having a projecting rib adapted 
to enter the part of the groove in the slide A, 
a metal plate secured at one end, also adapted 
to enter the groove of the slide A and to be 
held by the walls thereof, in combination with 
a metal plate upon one side of the slide A, 
adapted to enter a groove in the projecting 
rib of the slide B, substantially as described. 
2. In combination, slides having faces pro 
vided alternately with grooves and projecting 
ribs extending the length of the slide, means 
for holding said projecting ribs within the 95 
grooves of the slides, and a metal plate for 
each slide secured to the grooved side thereof 
at one end, adapted to enter grooves formed 
in the under side of the projecting rib, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. A table-slide consisting of the part A, 
having the grooved face, the part B, having a 
CO 
2 
3 i5,175 
5 of its length, a plate secured to one side of the subscribing witnesses. 
projecting rib, with a metal plate secured at in the opposite direction, substantially as de lo 
one end thereof and adapted to the groove in scribed. 
the slide A, a groove, 2, formed in one side of 
Intestimony whereof I have signed my name 
the projecting rib of the part B for a portion to this specification in the presence of two 
slide A and adapted to the grooveb, the stops 
made by the change in the form of grooves in 
the parts A and B at the points a and 1, and 
the dowel-pins adapted to limit the movement 
JAMES W. POTTER. 
-- 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. WAN AUKEN, 
F. M. TAGGART. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345275.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 345,275, 
J. S. BUSH, 
WELL MECHANISM, 
ZAN Patented July 13, 1886. 
 
Sy 
eEA 
3y 
 
O. WAYS 2 
ti 6e 
3 
 
3e (47.2 
/ 
delt. A 
AI W 
IF III 
W ly 
AD. If 
 
Z7 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN S. BUSH, OF TURNPIKE, NORTH CAROLINA. 
WELL WECHANISM 
3 IFC ECAION forming part of letters Patent No. 345,275, dated July 13, 1886. 
Application lied November 12, 1885. Serial Nin 182,553. No model.) 
er height, catches on the rod or cross-bar H, SO 5 
by a hole, e, with a spout or other conveyance 
To all, whoI, ii, inclf concer'70: 
Be it known that I, JOHN S. BUSII, of Turn 
for the water. At a little farther inward than 
pike, in the county of Haywood and State of 
these troughs is arranged the cross-bar K, 4o 
North Carolina, have invented /an Improved 
slightly above it. On each bucket is placed, 
Well Mechanism, of which the following is a 
at the outer side between and a little above 
specification. 
the pivots, an upwardly-turned hook, I, which, 
The special object of the invention is to im- as soon as the bucket has reached the proper 
prove the operation of windlassing up 
from a well, so that as the bucket is turned that the bucket is tilted to discharge into the 
for emptying its contents into a trough or other trough G. Between the bearing d and the 
receptacle the sprocket or elevator wheel will sprocket-wheel is located the block J, having 
be automatically stopped, and in such a way diametrically-opposite notches ji, separated 
that the person who is drawing the water will by a rib, j', in which runs the shaft. On the So 
feel the check instantaneously and prepare to side of the sprocket-wheel A is attached a 
reverse the windlass. 
piece, IK, which catches into the notches of 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a longitudinal block J, thus allowing the wheel to oscillate 
vertical section of the well mechanism, show- a half-revolution in bringing up each bucket. 
ing very clearly the local relation of the parts. 
L is a projecting rim on the side of wheel, 55 
Fig. 2 is a plan view showing the position of to prevent the piece K from being knocked off. . 
Having thus described all that is necessary 
the diametrically-opposite stops or rods which 
to a full understanding of my invention, what 
upset the buckets. 
In the drawings, A represents a Sprocket 
I claim as new, and desire to protect by Let- . 
wheel, and B a chain formed of rectangular 
ters Patent, is- 
links b, jointed alternately to eye-plates b'. 
1. A well mechanism consisting of a wind 
iing-shaft, a sprocket-wheel carrying the arm 
CC are buckets, attached by eyes c 0 to the 
or piece K, a single sprocket-chain, two buck 
bails C. C. These bails have eyes c' c', which 
ets, of which one is on each end of the same 
turn on pivots above the middle of buckets 
which are of greatest weight below these pivots, 
chain, and a block having opposite notches, 65 
so as to hang properly. 
i, as and for the purpose described. 
2. The block J, having opposite notches.jj, 
D is the oscillating shaft, which carries the 
sprocket-wheel A, and is arranged in suitable 
in combination with the piece K, attached to 
bearings, dd, in the uprights D' D'. 
wheel A, as and for the purpose specified. 
E is an ordinary well-box, having the cover 
or roof F to protect the mechanism, and to 
prevent the fall of snow, rain, or hail into the 
well. On the inside are attached the troughs 
or water - receptacles G, which communicate 
J. S. BUS. 
Witnesses: 
J. N. NELSON, 
ARTHUR JORDAN. 
O 
3O 
--- 
6O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345375.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 345,375, 
J. P. FOR BES. 
STEAM. CENERATOR, 
patented July 13, 1886. 
g- outlety-ye - 
22 
E 
C. 
i 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESSE P. FORBES, OF COSHOCTON, OHIO. 
STEAM a GENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 345,375, dated July 13, 1886. 
Application filed May 4, 1886. Serial No. 201,074. 
(No model) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JESSE P. FoRBEs, re 
siding at Coshocton, in the county of Coshoc 
ton and State of Ohio, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Steam-Gen 
erators; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to Which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters and figures of ref. 
erence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to steam engines, and 
pertains particularly to the means for heating 
the Water before supplying it to the generator, 
and to the means for storing the steam after 
being generated, so that in case the supply of 
Water should be momentarily checked the en 
gine will not be stopped. 
It consists in the novel features particularly 
hereinafter set forth and claimed, and shown 
in the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, parts being 
broken away, of a generator of my construc. 
tion embodying my improvements. Fig. 2 is 
a sectional view on the linea a of Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a rear end view having the end plate re 
moved. 
Within the case or furnace A is located the 
flasher B, water-heater, comprising a series of 
connected tubes, 1 2 3, &c., and the steam-res 
ervoir C. The flasher consists of two plates 
separated by a bar or strip, b, located near the 
edge and secured by bolts, forming a steam 
space between the plates the thickness of the 
bar b. The steam generated by the flasher is 
conveyed therefrom to the reservoir C by pipe 
c, and from thence to the engine or point of 
usage by a pipe, c. 18y this means a certain 
amount of steam is stored and held in reserve, 
and may be used to run the engine a few min 
utes, if perchance the flasher should fail to 
generate any steam, owing to a momentary 
check or stoppage of the Supply of water. 
The heat is applied to the under side of the 
flasher, and the reservoir and water-heater 
are located above the same, and are heated by 
radiation from the flasher and by the products 
of combustion which pass through the com 
partment in which they are arranged, The 
tubes of the water-heater are arranged in se 
ries, the one above the other, preferably in 
two series, having the steam-reservoir C lo 
cated intermediate the upper series. They are 
Spaced apart and Supported in Such manner 
that the heat may circulate freely between 
them, the connecting-pipesa a? being sufficient. 
The inlet-pipe a is connected with tube i. 
Pipe a unites the tubes 1 and 2, pipe at the 
tubes 2 and 3, pipe at the tubes 3 and 4, pipe 
a the tubes 4 and 5, pipe at the tube 5 with the 
pump E, and the pipe a the pump and flasher 
B. The opposite ends of the tubes are alter 
nately connected with the upper end of the 
One with the lower end of the other, whereby 
in the case of an accumulation of sediment 
the same may be blown out by disconnecting 
the end of the pipe a from the pump and forc 
ing a stream of water or jet of steam in the 
inlet-pipe, when the sediment will be quickly 
blown out or ejected. 
The operation is as follows: The water en 
ters through pipea into tube 1, and from thence 
through all the other tubes to the pump E, 
from which it is delivered to the flasher, where 
it is converted into steam and delivered into 
the reservoir, from which it is conveyed to the 
point of usage by the pipe c'. The water in 
its passage through the tubes becomes heated 
before being discharged into the flasher, by 
rea,Son of the Small bore of the tubes and the 
extended surface they present to the surround 
ing heating medium. 
A Water-tight compartment, F, is formed in 
the crown of the furnace or case A, and may 
be used as a tank or reservoir to hold a sup 
ply of Water and form a head for the water 
heater. The water may be fed continuously into 
this compartment or at intervals, as desired. 
By this construction a certain percentage of 
heat is again saved, as the water in the com 
partment is partially heated before its intro 
duction into the heater, thus utilizing the heat 
to the best possible advantage. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S-e- 
1. The combination, with the flasher, of a 
series of tubes located above the same, pipes 
alternately connecting the upper end of one 
with the lower end of the other on opposite 
55 
6) 
65 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
345,375 
sides, and a pipe connecting the lower one or 
last of the series with the flasher, substantially 
as described, and for the purposes specified. 
2. The combination, with the flasher and a 
Series of tubes located above the same and al 
ternately connected at their opposite ends, of 
a pipe connecting the lower or last tube of the 
series with a flasher, and a pump located in 
said pipe to draw the water through the tubes 
inforce it in the flasher, substantially as set 
Orth. 
3. The combination, with the flasher and 
water-tubes, arranged as shown, of a reser 
voir or tube for the storage of steam generated 
thereby, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
1 O 
4. The combination of the flasher, a con 
nected Series of tubes located above the same 
and in communication with the flasher, and a 
steam-reservoir or tubular storage-chamber 2d 
located intermediate the series of water-heat 
ing tubes, and connected with the flasher at 
the lower rear corner opposite to that at which 
the feed-water enters the flasher, substantially 
as described, and for the purposes set forth. 25 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JESSE P. FORBES. 
Witnesses: 
R. M. WoORIES, 
CIARLES B. HUNT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345476.txt	(No Model.) 
H. BARRETT & J. J. WARLEY. 
ELASTIC WHEEL TIRE AND DRIVING BAND, 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
- 
No. 345,476. 
Z2 a. 
Patented July 13, 1886. 
Zzz Z 
 2% 55.25%ly 566222 
% 2 
1. 
a 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
H. BARRETT & J. J. WARLEY, 
ELASTIC WHEEL TIRE AND DRIVING BAND, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 345,476, 
Patented July 13, 1886. 
al- 
a eel 
. 
e. 
 
ea- 
e 
 
 
SS 
 
N. PeFERS. Photo-thcgrapher, Washington, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY BARRETT AND JOHN JAMES WARLEY, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
EASTC WHEEL eTRE AND DRVN G - BANO. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 345,476, dated July 13, 1886, 
Application filed December 16, 1885. Seria No. 185,786. (No model.) 
- 
- 
O 
cation. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, HENRY BARRETT and 
JoHN JAMES WARLEY, subjects of the Queen 
of Great Britain, both residing at London, 
England, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Elastic. Wheel-Tires and Driv 
ing-Bands, of which the following is a specifi 
This invention relates to constructing elas 
tic wheel-tires and driving-bands of vulcan 
ized india-rubber over a flat core, consisting 
of a strip or length (or strips or lengths) of 
suitable metal, such as flat spring-steel, or 
of other suitable material, such as ebonite. 
In order to enable our invention to be fully 
understood, we will describe the same by ref. 
erence to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure I is an elevation of a portion of an 
elastic wheel-tire provided with a flat core, 
according to our invention, the core being cov 
ered with a suitable material, such as hemp. 
Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the same. Fig. 3 
is a side elevation of a portion of the core, 
showing the ends thereoflapped over each other 
and connected by a strip of rubber forming a 
spring. Fig. 4 is a similar view to Fig. 3, but 
showing the core without the covering. Fig. 
5 is a longitudinal section of a portion of a 
tire having a core similar to that shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, the ends of the core not being 
lapped over each other. Fig. 6 is a view, on a 
Figs. 7. 
reduced scale, of the complete core. 
and 8 are a plan and cross-section, respectively, 
showing our improvements applied to the 
construction of elastic driving-bands, the core 
being provided with a covering similar to that 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 5. Fig. 9 is an ele 
vation of the two ends of a driving-band pro 
vided with a flat core without a covering, and 
showing the said ends before they are joined 
together. Fig. 10 is a plan, and Fig. 11 alon 
gitudinal Section showing improved means for 
joining the said ends together. 
Similar letters in all the figures represent 
similar or corresponding parts. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 6, a represents 
the flat core, consisting of a strip or length of 
suitable flexible metal, such as flat spring 
So steel, which is shown covered with a suitable 
material, b, such as hemp. The said core is 
formed into a circle or ring of the required 
45 
35 
2. 
size, as shown in Fig. 6, and the ends of the 
core are lappled over each other, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 3. A strip or layer of vulcan 
ized india-rubber, c, is then inserted between 
and attached to the said ends by means of so 
lution or otherwise, so as to form a spring, 
which will allow of the tire being stretched 
when placing the same over the felly of the 
wheel; or, the ends of the core can be merely 
overlapped without being connected by the 
said spring c, and the ends of the core in this 
case would merely slide over each other when 
the tire is stretched, one or both ends of the 
core being provided with a clip or guide, so 
as to prevent the ends of the core separating. 
d, Figs. 1 and 2, is the tire, which is formed 
by covering the core, made as described, 
and shown in Fig. 6, with rubber dough, or 
the compound used to produce vulcanized in 
dia-rubber, which is then cured or treated 
in the manner usual to produce vulcanized 
india-rubber. By these means we thus ob 
tain an endless elastic wheel-tire provided 
with a flat core, which tire can be spring into 
the groove in the rim of a wheel and cannot 
then be easily displaced or removed, as the 
tire, being placed with the core flatwise in the 
rim or felly of a wheel, will be prevented from 
rolling out of its place and coming off the 
wheel, which has hitherto been the source of 
frequent annoyance and loss of time. The tire 
can also be fixed in the rim without the use of 
cement. Further, when the surface of the tire 
has become worn, the tire can be removed and 
replaced in the rim or felly of the wheelin the 
reverse position--that is to say, with the worn 
surface within the rim or felly, thereby allow 
ing of the whole of the tire being used. 
Instead of the flat core being covered with 
fabric, as hereinbefore described, and shown 
in Figs, 1, 2, and 3, the core can be used with 
out the fabric, as shown in Fig. 4. 
The core of the tire illustrated in Fig. 5 is 
the same as that hereinbefore described when 
referring to Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 6, with the ex 
ception that the ends are not overlapped, but 
are brought to within a short distance of each 
other, the elastic material d of the tire inter 
vening between the said ends, in order to give 
the required elasticity to allow the tire to be 
sprung over the felly of the wheel; or, as will 
be well understood, the ends of the core can 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
Oc 
 
2 
345,476 
IO 
15 
be connected by means of a suitable spring, 
which will give the required elasticity. 
Instead of covering the core when of metal 
with material such as hemp, as hereinbefore 
described, and shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 5, it 
may be covered with hard rubber or other 
suitable material. Further, the core itself 
may be formed of ebonite, in which case no 
covering would be required. 
It will be obvious that instead of forming 
the core for each tire in a single length, as 
hereinbefore described, and shown in Fig. 6, 
it may be formed in sections. 
The application of our invention to the manu 
facture of driving-bands for machinery will be 
readily understood by reference to Figs. 7 and 
S, in which a b represent the flat cores made 
as hereinbefore described, a number of which 
are employed according to the width of the 
band. In the drawings the band is shown 
with three strips or cores. Otherwise the band 
is made ill a similar manner to that described 
for the wheel-tires. If the driving-band be 
formed in one continuous piece, the ends of the 
flat core would be joined, by preference, in the 
mannershown in Fig. 3. If otherwise, however, 
the ends of the driving-band can bejoined in the 
manner illustrated in Figs. 9, 10, and 11. For 
this purpose we cut away the elastic covering 
d of the core a for a certain distance at each 
end of the band, as shown in Fig. 9, so as to 
leave the cores projecting therefrom. The 
projecting ends of the cores a are then passed 
one over the other, the ends passing into the 
band between the cores at and the elastic cow 
ering d until the cut-away ends of the elastic 
covering meet. IRivets e (or Screws, staples, 
or the like) are then passed through the band 
at either side of the joint, as shown in Figs. 
10 and 11, so as to connect the parts firmly 4O 
together. By this method we obtain a joint 
which is flush and smooth; or the ends of the 
driving-band can belaced in the usual manner. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of our said invention, and 45 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
we declare that what we claim is 
1. An elastic tire-wheel or driving-band 
having a flat core, the ends of which are joined 
by the insertion of a flat strip or layer of india- 5c 
rubber or like material botween and attaching 
it to said ends, substantially as described. 
2. An elastic vulcanized rubber tire adapted 
to be sprung into a groove in the rim of a 
wheel, and having integral with and inclosed 55 
within it a flat internal metal core covered 
with a suitable material, such as hemp. 
3. An endless rubber band or belt having a 
core or cores of metal or its described equiva 
lent, the ends of such cores being overlapped 60 
and united together within the rubber. 
4. An endless rubber band or belt having 
cores of metal or its described equivalent, thc 
ends of which cores overlap within the rubber, 
and with a piece of rubber interposed between 65 
these ends, as and for the purpose described. 
II. BARRETT. 
J. J. VARLEY. 
Witnesses: 
G. T. REDFERN, 
J. W. PRICE. 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345576.txt	(No Model.) 
C. B. DAWIS, 
APPARATUS FOR SEALING CANS, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 345,576 
Patented July 13, 1886. 
S. 
it:::: Y 
st 
i N 
NasaaSSSSSS St. 
N 
R 
SSSSSSSSSSNYSSYS 2. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
is at SNS 
s 
2 
 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz2. 2zzzzzzzzzzS f 
SS 
Zzzesses. 
LILE III 
z72azzazz72a2a2a2zzazza2za N3. 
/62(z-za 
266/32-14- 
23.8 e 3.3a. 
7 
piers. Photo-Lithographer, Washing". 
(No Model.) 
C. B. DAWIS. 
APPARATUS FOR SEALING CANS 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 345,576. 
Patented July 13, 1886. 
S SS Ii 
22 easilises 
 
H 2 
SSR 
2ee tie 
c 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
2 73 
ZZH 
S23 
|||| 
N 
S 23S | 
2 2), 
2. 24, a 
ill 
2. 
... 
2 
...SSSSSSS's 
se 
 
issSNSN se: 
a^ 
2 
W 
S f S $ 
Z7. 
- Z / 7. 
(57. 
ev2%-es e. 5. 
z32.5i. A. 
Z 7-le-3-7. 
N. EERS, Photo. Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
C, B, DAWIS, 
APPARATUS FOR SEALING CANS, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 345,576. 
Patented July 13, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z 
O - 
 
 
(c.N st 
 
 
 
27.6n esses. 
-Zozz/62zzar. 
%20ozer. 
3.13-14 - 3.2/774 A. 
(2%. 6'-0aetz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIIY LER B. DAVIS, OF CIII C A GO, ILLINOIS. 
A PPARATUS FOR SEAL ING CANS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 345,576, dated July 13, 1886. 
A nplication filed January 20, 1886. Serial No. 189,166. No model.) 
55 
To all thon, it mally concern: 
IBe it known that I, CHYLER IB. DAVIs, 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi. 
cago, in the county of Cook, State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful m 
provements in Apparatus for Iermetically 
Sealing Cans, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had therein to the 
accompanying drawings. 
This invention as relation to a machine for 
hermetically sealing cans, and the general ob 
ject in view is to subject a large number of 
cans to the action of a soldering implement, 
which, together with the cans, is confined in 
a machine from which the air is exhausted, 
and to provide means for manipulating from 
the outside of the machine, both the soldering 
implement and the cans within the machine; 
and the invention consists in certain features 
of construction hereinafter described, and par 
ticularly pointel out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure is a cen 
tral vertical section of a machine embodying 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan with a portion 
of the top removed, the hand - wheel being 
shown lower than in Fig. 1. 
Figs. 3 and 4 
are details hereinafter described; and Fig. 5 is 
a central vertical section illustrating a modi 
fication in the construction of the body por. 
tion of the machine. Fig. 6 is a vertical sec 
tion, and Fig. 7, a plan, of a modification of 
the means employed for presenting successive 
cans to the soldering implement. Figs. S and 
9 are modifications of the manner of mount 
ing the soldering implement, and Figs. 10 and 
11 are details of the table-operating mechan 
ism. Fig. 12 is a side clevation partly in sec 
tion, and Fig. 13 a plan, with a portion of the 
top removed, of a straight machine embody. 
ing my invention; and Figs, 14 and 15 are de 
tails of the same. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in all the figures of the drawings. 
It is well know in the art of preserving 
foods that the cans are filled or nearly so, with 
the article to be preserved, and the coverse 
cured in position upon the body of the can, 
said covers, however, being provided with a 
snall vent or aperture, through which the air 
in the can is exhausted, when said aperture 
is sealed, usually by melting a drop of solder, 
so as to close the same. 
The machine which I have devised is so COrl 
structed that a number of cans may be placed 
therein and consecutively brought into posi 
tion in proximity to a soldering-tool, which, 
being properly heated, may be caused to melt 
a pellet or other form of solder which is placed 
upon each can, whereby the vent in the can 
nay be closed, the machine also being pro 
vided with suitable means for exhausting the 
air from within the same and from the calls 
arranged in the machine. 
The principal elements of the machine em. 
bodying my invention comprise a casing, which 65 
constitutes the body of the machine, in which 
is arranged a table, upon which a number of 
cans may be placed in a series, means for 
moving the table with the series of cans there 
on, so as to bring each can to the soldering im 
plement and to conduct each of the calls from 
the soldering implement, a chamber,in which 
the soldering implement is suspended, S0 ar 
ranged as to communicate with the portion of 
the body of the machine in which the cans are 75 
arranged, and a device connected with the 
body of the machine and adapted to produce a 
facuum or partial vacuum therein, the connec: 
tions of one within the several other parts 
being such that the external atmosphere shall 
not have access to the interior of the machine, 
and yet permit the necessary movement of the 
entire mechanism, to accomplish the work in 
view. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
case or body of the machine, which may be 
either circular or straight in general outline, 
and which is provided with a cover, A, Se 
cured by bolts or otherwise to the body. This 
cover may extend completely across the body, 
as shown in Figs. 5, 12, and 13, or, as shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, 6, and 7, may extend only over 
that portion of the body in which the cans are 
arranged. In this latter form of cover a cast 
ing, A', substantially circular in contour, and 
having an upright wall, A, terminating in it 
horizontal flange, A", is employed to complete 
the body portion of the machine. (See Fig. 1.) 
Within the body of the machine is arranged 
a table, B, which, in machines that are circu 
lar in contour, may be mounted upon a pivot 
or center, B, formed on the bottom of the case, 
the table being provided with a central hub, 
B', in which is secured a shaft, B", having a 
Sc 
90 
IO 
45 
345,576 
15 
5 
O 
25 
hand-wheel, B, by which the table may be re 
volved from the outside of the body of thema 
chine. The shaft B passes through a stuffing 
bOX, B, arranged upon that part of the cover 
or top of the machine through which the shaft 
passCS. 
Instead of the mechanism just described for 
supporting and rotating the table, I may pro 
vide anti-friction rollers B", (see Figs. 6, 10, 
and 11) mounted either in slots formed near 
the edge of the table and upon screws or bolts 
B", crossing said slots; or may form slots or 
all annular groove in the bottom of the case 
(See Fig. 11) and mount the anti-friction roll 
er's B" therein, and in either arrangement of 
said anti-friction rollers I may a range the 
shaft Bhorizontally, and provide it with the 
hand-wheel B", and with a friction disk or 
roller, B', arranged to bear upon the upper 
Surface of the table I, so that by rotating the 
hand-wheel B" the table B may be rotated so 
as to bring any one of a series of cans, C, to a 
desired point or position within the machine. 
In either arrangement of the shaft and hand 
Wheel a stufting-box, li, or an equivalent con 
struction is necessary, to prevent ingress of air 
at the time the air is exhausted from the inte 
rior of the machine. It is of course under 
stood that in case the body of the machine is 
3o straight the table B is substantially one-half 
the length of the case, in order that it may be 
moved from one end to the other thereof by 
means Of the hand-wheel 13. 
In both constructions, as thus far described, 
the talble is adapted to receive and present for 
Soldering a row of cans, the operation of the 
parts being such that after a can is soldered 
another Succeeding can is presented for the 
Sanne Operation. 
communicating with the portion of the body 
of the machine through which the cans are 
moved is a soldering-chamber, D, which in 
this instance, is constructed of glass, and is 
mounted upon the case in a manner to pre 
5 vent access of external air at the joint between 
the chamber and the case. An aperture, ID, is 
formed in the soldering-chamber I), through 
which the handle E of the soldering-tool 
passes. A rubber tube, F, is at one end se 
cured in position, so as to communicate with 
and cover the aperture ID' by means of a band, 
G, which passes around the chamber D, and is 
bent to form ears G", through which passes a 
bolt, G, encircled by a coiled spring, G, 
abutting against one of the ears (and against 
the nut G'. The band G is provided with an 
apertured enlargement, G, adapted to permit 
the passage therethrough of the rubber tube 
F, which may, if desired, be provided with a 
Spherical or other enlargement, F, and an 
annular lange, F, adapted to rest against the 
outer surface of the soldering-chamber. The 
opposite end of the rubber tube F is secured by 
a cord, ferrule E, or other suitable means, in 
an air-tight manner, to the handle E of the 
soldering implement. A rubber band, II, may 
also be inserted between the band G and the 
SO 
55 
35 
65 
90 
8 
wall of the soldering-chamber, to serve as a 
cushion or packing, to permit of expansion and 
contraction of said chamber, caused by the 7o 
heat of the soldering-iron, without breaking 
the Same by reason of the contact or compres 
Sion of the metal band G thereon. 
By the construction thus far described, with 
regard to the mounting of the soldering-tool, 
it will be seen that the coiled spring G" and 
bolt G', and that the ears G' of the band may 
be separated from each other, so as to permit 
of a complete removal of the band from the 
chamber, so that the handle of the soldering 
implement may be disconnected therefrom. 
I represents the soldering tool or copper 
proper. In this instance it is centrally bored, 
as at I, for the reception of a section of the 
handle, a thumb-screw, I, serving to remov 
ably secure the copper to the handle-section. 
J represents what I have designated as a 
section of the handle of the soldering imple 
inent; and it consists in a rod bent to form a 
ring, or, it may be a succession of rings or 
coils J, one terminal, J, of which is inserted 
into the bore I of the copper, and the other 
terminal, J, of which into a coupling, K, hav 
ing thumb-screws KIX, by which said coup 
ling is removably secured to the handle E prop 
er, and to the section terminal J'. A collar, L, 
is also mounted upon the terminal J, adjusta 
bly, in order to servc as a gage for determin 
ing the extent to which the terminal J' shall 
be inserted into the copper. 
Certain features of construction with regard 
to the soldering tool and chamber herein 
shown and described are also shown and de 
scribed in a companion application, No. 145,6S5, 
filed by me October 16, 1884, and are not there 
fore herein claimed. 
By the provision of the coil or coils or other 
form of extension of the handle of the solder 
ing implement, I prevent in a marked degree 
the conduction of heat from the soldering-cop 
per proper to the handle proper of the solder 
ing implement, and to the walls of the solder 
ing - chamber. Furthermore, in substituting 
one copper for another, I may also substitute 
one section for another, so that when one sec 
tion becomes heated a cool one may take its 
place, and thus the convection of heat to the 
soldering-chamber may be greatly reduced, if 
not entirely overcome. 
It is apparent that the object of employing 
a glass soldering-chamber is to permit of a 
clear inspection of the work being performed 
within, so that the soldering-tool may be ac 
curately directed to the vent oil each can as it 
is brought beneath the soldering-chamber for 
the closure of its vent. 
In Figs. 12 and 13 I have indicated a con 
struction of a soldering-chamber differing 
from that shown in the remaining figures; but 
I do not herein claim any of said features of 
construction, as they are more particularly 
illustrated and described in a companion ap 
plication filed herewith. 
Communicating with the body of the ma 
OO 
s 
O 
IIS 
3O 
5 
) 
5 
O 
25 
5 
chine is a pipe, M, having a stop-cock or valve 
M", which pipe also communicates with a 
chamber, N, from which, by any suitable means, 
the air is exhausted, the connection with the 
exhaust-pump or other device being by means 
of a pipe, N'. 
In cases where I construct machines which 
are straight, I provide at each end thereof a 
(loor, O, having a latch, O', by which the same 
1may be closed hermetically. Said door com 
municates with the portion of the body of the 
machine in which are arranged the cans upon 
the table 13 therein. In the other forms of 
machines shown the whole or a portion of the 
cover A" may be removed, or any suitable 
door may be provided to give access to the 
interior, for the purpose of placing cans therein. 
Taving described the construction of my 
machine in its different forms, the operation 
is as follows: A number of cans, sufficient in 
the instance of a circular machine to fill the 
annular portion provided for the reception 
and passage of the cans, are placed therein, 
and in case of a straight machine such number 
of cans would be limited only by the capacity 
of one-half the entirelength of the body of the 
machime, the soldering-chamber D being ar 
ranged substantially at the middle of the ma 
chine. When the cans are placed upon the 
table B, the door or cover is closed in such a 
manner as to prevent access of the external 
atmosphere into the body of the machine, 
when the next step of the operation is per 
formed, which is to exhaust the air from the 
body of the machine, each can, however, hav 
ing been previously provided with a pellet, 
drop, Ol' other form of solder placed upon 
the cover thereof and over or near the vent 
therein. In order to exhaust the air from the 
machine, the valve M' is opened, when the 
air passes into the vessel N. The valveM" 
is again closed, and by rotating the hand 
wheel 3' each can is successively brought 
beneath the soldering-chamber and under the 
soldering implement therein, the copper I of 
which has been previously heated, when, by 
elevating the exterior end of the handle E, the 
copper is lepressed and brought into contact 
With the solder, which is melted, and a suc 
ceeding can in the row or series is then brought 
to position and soldered in a like manner. 
When all of the cans have been soldered, they 
are removed, and another set or series are sub 
jected to the same operation. 
Instead of providing a door in the top A in 
the forms of the machines shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
5 
345 
576 
65 
and 5, the cans may be placed upon the table 
when the Soldering-chamber is removed, and 
through the opening communicating from the 
can-receiving portion of the machine with the 
soldering-chaluber. 
It is apparent that by providing a separate 
though communicating soldering-chamber less 
air is required to be exhausted from the ap 
paratus than when the can receiving and Sol 
dering chambers are merged into one high 
chamber, as heretofore constructed. 
The flexible connections for the soldering 
copper and chamber are not broadly claimed 
herein, as they for in the subjects-matter of 7o 
claims in my application No. 145,6S5, aloove 
mentioned, and in another application, No. 
1S9,167. 
Having thus fully described my invention 
and its operation, what I claim is 
1. A machine for hermetically sealing cans, 
comprising a case having an annular can re 
ceiving chamber, a separate communicating 
soldering-chamber provided with a soldering 
implement, and a call-table adapted for move 
ment along and within said annular can re 
ceiving chamber, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with a glass soldering 
chamber, I), of a soldering implement com 
prising a main handle-section flexibly mounted 
upon and passing through a wall of the chalm 
ber, a removable copper, and a removable han 
die section, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with the claimber I), 
of the metal band (, the bolt G', nut (i', flexi 
ble tube F, and spring (, substantially as 
Specified. 
4. The combination, with the soldcring 
chamberl), formed of glass, of a flexible flanged 
tube, l, the band G, and the rubber packing 95 
or cushion II, subst:unitially as specific d. 
5. The combination of the soldering-cham 
ber I), formed of glass, the band G, the bolt G', 
nut G', coiled spring G", rubber tube IF, and a 
soldering-tool handle secured within the tube ICO 
F, and passing through the wall of the cham 
bor, substantially as specified. 
6. The combination of the body or case A, 
the table 13, the anti-friction rollers B, the 
shaft I3, and the friction-disk B, substantially 
as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
IC5 
(YI, IER J. DAVIS, 
Witnesses: 
CARL R. SHERWOOD, 
IENRY BOOTI. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345676.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 345,676, 
W. FEIGEL. 
RONING "Friental July 20, 1886. 
Av. Z. 
a 
  
  
 
 
N A 1 
 
in 
- 
A. 
t 
 
e 
Zza. 
ties 
 
(-, 
. 
- 
. 
 
  
 
 
Willies. 
 
 
 
 
 
isye 
Evenir. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM FEIGEL OF BUTLER, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RON ING - BOARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 345,676, dated July 20, 1886. 
Application filed November 27, 1885. Serial No. 184,003. (No model.) 
55 
O 
- 
- 
hook h from the plate i. The leg can then be 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
folded up, and the act of turning it will draw 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM FEIGEL of 
the spring out of the slot. On again bringing 
Butler, in the county of Butler and State of 
the leg into a vertical position the spring will 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Ironing-Boards; and Idohere. 
enter the slot, and will automatically secure the 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
leg in place. 
I will now describe the mechanism which I 
exact description thereof. 
employ for fixing the inner end of the board to 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
a table or other support. A strip or bar, m, 
ironing-boards for use in laundry work; and it 
is fastened transversely to the ironing-board 
consists in novel means for securing and ad 
at a short distance from the inner end, and a 
justing such boards in position for use. I will 
clamp-finger, n, is fastened to or made integral 
describe it with reference to the accompanying 
with a leaf-spring, n, one end of which is se 
drawings, in which 
cured at a point, n, to the forward part of the 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section of 
strip m. The back and free end of the clamp 
the board on the line y y of Fig. 4. Fig. 2 is 
finger projects back of the strip, so as to be 
a reduced plan view of the bottom of the board 
opposite to the rear portion of the ironing 
When its supporting mechanism is folded up 
board. There are preferably two of these 
and the board is not in use. Fig. 3 is a side 
clamp-fingers, each attached by its own spring 
view thereof when adjusted for use. Fig. 4 is 
to the strip m, as shown in Fig. 2. The func 
a vertical cross-section on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
tion of the spring n is to serve as a flexible 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
connecting device, on which the clamp-finger 
in each. 
may be moved to and from the ironing-board. 
In the drawings, a represents the ironing 
Its spring action is preferably away from the 
board, which is of ordinary configuration, as 
latter. Bolts S traverse and are fixed to the 
shown in Fig. 2. Near the outer end of the 
ironing - board and the strip in, and extend 
board and on its under side a leg or support, b, 
through holes or slots in the clamping-fingers 
is hinged by means of pintles c and hinge 
The outer ends of the bolts are Screw 
Sockets d. This support preferably consists of 
2. 
threaded, and are fitted with thumb-nuts t, by 
a horizontal cross brace or bar, b', at whose 
turning which the clamp - fingers in may be 
ends are the pintles c, while two crossed pieces 
moved up toward or suffered to spring away 
are affixed at their upper ends to the brace b', 
from the ironing-board. 
and constitute the supporting - leg proper. 
to represents a washer interposed between 
Thus constructed, the leg can either be set so 
the nuts t and the bottom of the finger n, to 
as to depend vertically from the board, as shown 
prevent wearing of the latter. 
in Figs. 3 and 4, or it may be folded up against 
To secure the board to the ledge at of a Wains- . 
the under side of the board, as in Fig. 2. In 
coating or table, the board a is placed so that 
the latter case it may be conveniently held by 
its rear end shall rest upon the ledge and the 
a thumb - button, e, which is pivoted to the 
rear end of the clamp-fingers in shall be on the 
board, and is adapted to engage one of the cross 
under side of the ledge. The thumb-nuts tare 
braces of the support. When the leg is verti 
then screwed up, so as to clamp the fingers in 
cal, it is held rigidly in that position by means 
against the ledge, as shown in Fig. 1. Thus 
of a leaf-spring arm, f, which is fixed at its 
arranged, if the leg b be dropped so as to rest 
lower end to the face of the leg b by means of 
upon the floor the board will be held rigidly in 
screws f', or otherwise, and extends upward 
lace. To increase the efficiency of the clamp, 
into a slot, h, in the under side of the board. 
the end of the finger may be provided with a 
A base-plate, i, covers a part of this slot, and 
projecting sharp spur or stud, n, which Will 
when the end of the springfis within the lat 
enter the body of the ledge u and prevent slip 
ter a projecting hook, h, at the end of the spring 
ping of the board. 
engages the plate and holds the leg in position. 
My improved ironing-board is of great util 
So When it is desired to fold up the leg, the spring 
f is passed back far enough to disengage the ity. The catch f h" confines the leg b in an up 
IOO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
345,676 
right position, and prevents it from being sists of a perforated metal plate of stand, 10, 20 
It forms a 
kicked or otherwise accidentally knocked out fixed to the surface of the board a. 
of place, the result of which might be to loosen convenient support for hot irons and prevents 
the board and upset its supported irons. 
them from scorching the board. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
5 The peculiar advantage of the form of clamp 
shown is its easy adjustability to fit ledges or to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
The combination of an ironing -board pro 
projections of different thickness. It will also 
hold the board with great security, and is of vided with a recess, h, and plate i, a leg or 
such construction that it is not in the way of support pivoted to said board, and a spring 
Io the person using the board. As shown in Fig. catch, f, attached to the leg, and having a 
2, the clamps are preferably set near the sides hooked end adapted to enter the recess and 3o 
of the board. This gives a wide fastening- engage the plate, substantially as and for the 
surface and prevents slipping or turning of purpose specified. 
the board laterally. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
a base-plate for the attachment of the clamp- 
ing -fingers, is also to serve as a batten to 
strengthen the board. 
A useful addition to my improvement con- 
I5 The function of the strip m, besides acting as hand. 
WIILIAM FEIGEL. 
25 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS W. BAKEWELL, 
R. H. WHITTLESEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345776.txt	(No Model.) 
W. R. FOWLER. 
MILK COOLER 
No. 345,776, 
Patented July 20, 1886. 
 
NS 
 
61st/2art- 
7%-4%.2%, 
122222-2-e? 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, b. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. FOWLER, OF LAFAYETTE, INDIANA. 
MK COOLER. 
SPFCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 345,776, dated July 20, 1886, 
Application filed March 4, 1886. Serial No. 194,008. No model.) 
O 
25 
15 
To all, whon, it mally concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMR. Fow LER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at La 
fayette, in the county of Tippecanoe and State 
of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Milk-Coolers; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the annexed drawing, 
making a part of this specification, and to the 
letters and figures of reference marked there 
O. 
The present invention has reference to that 
class of milk-coolers provided with a deep and 
a shallow water-tank communicating with each 
other through pipes constructed to form traps 
to exclude the air, and is designed as an im 
provement on my former patent of January 
26, 1886, No. 334,767; and it consists in pro 
viding the shallow tank with an ice-chamber, 
a removable shelf for supporting the ice, and a 
drip-tube connected thereto, and of sufficient 
length to extend down below the water-level in 
Said tank, substantially as shown in the draw 
ing, and hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawing, which is alon 
gitudinal section of the cooler, A B represent, 
respectively, the deep and shallow tanks, which 
are preferably lined with sheet metal, as shown 
at C, and are each provided with a cover, CD, 
having suitable ventilators, b, for carrying off 
the impurities arising from the milk contained 
in the pans which are placed in the water. The 
tanks above described are formed with double 
walls having a filling of charcoal or other suit 
able non-conductor of heat, as are also the cov 
ers to Said tanks. The tank B at its outer end 
is provided with a pipe, c, for supplying wa 
ter thereto, and a bucket, E, is connected to 
4o the end of the tank which surrounds the pro 
jecting end of the pipe, and extends above it, 
the bucket receiving the water from the pump 
or spring, and thus avoids the necessity of 
making a connection to the pipe when filling 
the tanks. The tanks AB communicate with 
each other through a pipe, d, and the water is 
discharged through a pipe, e, at the end of 
tank A, the several pipes above described hav 
ing downwardly-extending elbows, which come 
below the water-level to form traps for the 
exclusion of air, which would otherwise pass 
from one tank to the other. 
45 
SO 
The above-described construction is the same 
as in my former patent, and the improvement 
thereto consists in the ice-chamber F, which, 55 
like the tanks A B, is formed with double 
walls containing a heat-non-conducting filling, 
and has a sheet-metal lining, f, a cover, G, 
with ventilator?. The ice-chamber Fextends 
some distance above the tank B, and forms an 60 
extension thereto, and has connected to one of 
its side walls bracketsh, for supporting there 
on a shelf, H, upon, which the ice is placed, 
said shelf being formed hollow, with a filling of 
charcoal or other heat-non-conducting mate. 65 
rial, or, if preferred, simply a sheet-metalpan 
or shelf may be used without constructing it 
hollow. This pan or shelf rests upon the 
brackets and is not attached thereto, thus en 
abling it to be removed for cleaning or other 70 
purposes, and has connected to it a drip-tube, 
i, which is of sufficient length to extend down 
below the water-level in the tank B, as shown, 
to prevent any drippings from the ice entering 
the milk, should the pans be placed near it, and 
also to prevent the air passing up the tube. 
The purpose of the ice-chamber is to cool 
the water in the shallow tank as it passes there 
from to the deep tank when the water from 
the pump or spring is not sufficiently cold to 
reduce the milk to the required temperature. 
The cold air produced by the ice does not 
pass from the shallow to the deeper tank, but 
remains in the former-mentioned tank for the 
express purpose of reducing the temperature 
much lower. This is considered necessary, for 
the reason that after the cream is taken off the 
milk, and it is desired to keep the cream a 
few days, the temperature of the cream must 
be much lower than that of milk. 
The course or circulation of the cold air in 
the tank B and ice-chamber F is indicated by 
the arrows; and to drain the tanks of water for 
the purpose of cleaning, the tanks are provided 
with suitable pipes, l, having plugs or faucets 
at their lower ends, as found desirable. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is- 
tank communicating with each other through 
a pipe, and provided, respectively, at their 
outer ends with a discharge-pipe and a sup 
ply-pipe, the several pipes having elbows to 
In a milk-cooler, one deep and one shallow I Od 
95 
Y 
. 
2 
345,776 
act as traps, in combination with an ice-cham- 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
ber forming an extension to the shallow tank hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
and arranged above it, and provided with a of two witnesses. 
shelf or pan for the ice, and a drip-tube con- 
5 nected thereto and extending down below the 
water-level in said tank, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
J. L. CROFT, 
JOHN W. BEASLEY. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM R, FOWLER 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345876.txt	(No Model.) 
H. C. BERRY, 
HEATING APPARATUS. 
No. 345,876, 
 
Patented July 20, 1886. 
1. 
2% 5 
 
Wido7 NZ 
INVENTOR: 
Jf6 (2. 
BY twi-6- 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, d, C, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. BERRY, OF WAUSEON, OHIO. 
HEATING A PPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 345,876, dated July 20, 1886. 
Application filed April 29, 1885. 
Serial No. 63,863. (No model.) 
io 
5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY C. BERRY, of 
Wauseon, in the county of Fulton and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and Improved 
Heating Apparatus, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention, as enubraced in this applica 
tion, consists in the construction and arrange 
ment of the fire-pothereinafter fully described, 
and specifically pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a cross-sectional elevation of my 
improved heating apparatus. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional plan view of the same on the line aca, 
Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional plan view of the 
under side of the grate-support. Figs. 4 and 
5 are detail views of parts of the apparatus. 
The fire-pot A has the exterior flange, A', 
at its top and the tongues A* at the bottom. 
On the top of the flange A three or more ap 
ertured lugs, A", are formed, through which 
hooks B on the lower ends of rods B are 
passed, the hooks B on the upper ends of the 
Said rods being passed through apertured 
lugs C on the inner side of the outer casing, 
C, which casing has an inwardly-projecting 
flange, C, on which the flange A of the fire. 
The flange Cacts as a safe 
pot can rest. 
guard in case the rods B or one of then should 
break or burn out, as said flange would then 
Support the fire-pot in operative position un 
til a new rod or rods could be supplied. A 
pin, ID, projects from the fire-pot or vessel A 
through a slot in the casing C. Below the 
fire-pot arms E project from the inner surface 
of the casing C toward the middle, and sup 
port a ring, F, having a rabbet, F, or lugs 
formed on its inner edge, which ring Fis sur 
rounded by a ring, G, having a series of lugs, 
G",.On its under side, the ends of the lugs be 
ing beveled, and the lugs having apertures G. 
The ring Grests upon the arms E, the tops of 
which are beveled down to both sides, as shown 
in dotted lines in Fig. 4. Within the ring F 
a circular grate, H., fits, which is convex-in 
clined from the middle toward the edge, and 
has its edge rabbeted to fit the rabbet F on 
the ring F. A handle, J, secured to the un 
der side of the circular grate projects through 
a slot in the casing C. A bolt, K, is passed 
through the middle of the grate H, and on its 
top a spider or star grate frame, L, is held, 
which rests upon and is adapted to turn on 
the grate H. A handle, M, is secured or held 
on the lower end of the bolt, and projects 
through a slot in the casing C. 
The apertures G in the lugs G' of the ring 
G serve to receive the end of a key or rod for 
turning the said ring. 
The operation is as follows: A key is ap 
plied on the pin D, and the basket or vessel 
A is turned, and as it is suspended it is raised 
and lowered alternately, and the distance be 
tween the tongues A and the ring G is alter 
nately increased and decreased, and has rotary 
motion, whereby the ashes and other accumu 
lations are removed or caused to drop through 
the grate H and through the space between 
the tongues A and the ring G. By means of 
a rod or key passed into apertures G' the ring 
G can be worked to and fro, and as the bev 
eled lugs G' work over the beveled arms the 
said ring is vibrated, and the clinkers, cinders, 
ashes, &c., resting on the rings F and G are 
loosened or moved. By means of the handle 
J the grate H can be turned in the ring F, 
and the ashes, &c., caused to work through 
the slots, &c., in the grate H. As the said 
grate is convex-inclined, the ashes, &c., work 
down the same to the edges. By means of the 
handle M the spider-grate L can be turned 
over the surface of the grate H, whereby ashes, 
cinders, &c., are worked through the slots in 
the grate or out over its edges, and clinkers, 
&c., on the said parts are broken or removed, 
or both. 
The parts described can be used separately 
or in combination, and can be constructed, in 
whole or in part, of cast-iron or other suitable 
metal. 
I am aware that a fire-pot has been provided 
with a series of depending swinging bars 
around its lower edge, a grate being connected 
with the lower ends of the bars; also, that the 
inner side of the shell or casing of a stove has 
been provided with a series of flanges, on 
which the flanges of a series of circular fire 
55 
75 
9O 
95 
OO 
35 
45 
 
345,876 
pot Sections have been supported, and I do 
not claim such, broadly, as of my invention. 
I do not claim in this application the par 
ticular construction of my grate with its sur 
Founding ring resting on the grate-supporting 
arms, nor the pivoted spider, as I reserve the 
right to claim the same in a separate applica 
tion. 
I am also aware that a deflector mouth 
piece has been rigidly suspended by hooked 
rods a few inches below the lower end of the 
magazine, to direct the fuel into the fire-pot 
and deflect the gases from the magazine, and 
I do not claim the same as of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the casing having 
a grate, of a fire-pot above the grate and rods 
loosely connected to the upper end of the fire 
pot and to the inner side of the casing, sub 
Stantially as set forth. 
IO 
5 
2. The combination, with the casing having 
an interior flange, of the cylindrical fire-pot, 
Open at both ends and provided at its upper 
end with a fange resting on the flange of the 
casing, and rods loosely connected to the cas 
ing above the fire-pot and to the upper edge 
of the fire - pot, substantially as set forth, 
whereby should the rods break the flanges 
will support the fire-pot, as described. 
3. The combination, with the casing C, hav 
ing the flange C, the eyes C above the flange, 
and a grate, of the rotary and vertically-mov 
able fire-pot A, having a flange, A', around 
its upper edge, and eyes A* on its upper edge, 
and the rods B, having hooks at their oppo 
site ends engaging the eyes C and A', respect 
ively, substantially as set forth. 
35 
HENRY C. BERRY. 
Witnesses: 
J. C. KING, 
M. SLUSSER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US345976.txt	(No Model.) 
A. LANDON. 
SAND AND WATER FEEDING MECHANISM, 
No. 345,976, 
a/CD 
 
Patented July 20, 1886. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT LANDON, OF RUTLAND, VERMONT. 
SAND AND WATER FEED ING MECHANS M. 
3PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 345,976, dated July 20, 1886. 
Application filed Setember 24, 1885. Serial No. 177,995. (No model.) 
From the upper end of the pump projects the 
Be it known that I, ALBERT LANDON, of spindle c, which passes loosely through one 
of the cross-beams b of the frame A, and car- 55 
ries a pulley, d, which connects with a pulley, 
d, on the main shaft D by means of a cross 
bolt, d". This main shaft D is mounted in the 
two front uprights a a of the frame A, and is 
driven by a large driving-wheel, E, which im- 6o 
parts revolution to the screw-pump B through 
the intermediate gearing above described. 
The tank C, which supports the lower end 
of the screw-pump, is sunk below the level of 
the floor and should set low enough to give 65 
proper fall to the water and sand returning 
from the saw-gangs. This tank receives the 
water and sand to be raised by the screw-pump, 
and is provided with a water-supply pipe, e, 
having a cock, e, to regulate the supply, and 
with an overflow-pipe, f. Sand is fed into the 
tank C from a hopper, F, which should be 
large enough to hold as much sand as may be 
required. This hopper is located above the 
tank C, and has a covering of wire screen, 75 
which separates all gravel and mud from the 
sand as it is thrown into the hopper. 
In the bottom of this hopper is arranged a 
screw-conveyer, F, operated by a spur-wheel, 
G, mounted on one end of the same, an en- 8o 
gaging-pawl, G', and a pitman, H, pivoting 
to the vibrating arm of a lever, H', having 
connection with one end of the main shaft D. 
The feed or speed of the screw-conveyer F is 
regulated by moving the vibrating arm of the 
lever H through the screw-hub I, mounted on 
the side of one of the front uprights at of the 
frame. On the revolution of the screw-punp 
B its paddles or agitators thoroughly mix the 
sand and water and cause the lighter impurities 
to rise and pass out through the overflow-pipe 
The sand and water raised by the pump is 
discharged from its upper end into a trough, 
J, from whence it is conveyed by a pipe, h, to 
a trough, J, located above the stone to be 
sawed. This trough has a perforated bottom, 
through which the sand and water passes 
to the stone and SaW-gangs, and is caught by 
a pan, K, below the stone. From this pan 
the sand and water is returned to the tank C 
by means of a pipe, L. The screw-pump B 
should be long enough to discharge the sand 
and water at a point high enough to have 
proper fall down to the saw-gangs, and the 
To ald Luhon, it may conce77. 
Rutland, in the county of Rutland and State 
of Vermont, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Sand and Water Feeding 
Mechanism; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full and exact description of the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Sand and water feeding mechanism for use in 
connection with stone-sawing or other pur 
poses requiring a similar application of Sand 
and Water. 
My object is to supply mixed sand and wa 
ter to the saws or rubbing-beds and afterward 
return it to the tank from whence it was taken, 
to be freed from all impurities, and to be re 
applied to its original purpose on the stone or 
other bed. This I accomplish by mechanism 
So cheap and simple and with machinery op 
erating so slowly and regularly that the destruc 
tive effect of sand and water common to all other 
devices for similar uses is almost completely 
overconne. Such mechanism is illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, to which atten 
tion is invited, and in which 
Figure 1 represents my improved sand and 
water feeding mechanism, combined with a 
block of stone and a gang of saws, and Fig. 
2 a vertical section of the screw-pump en 
ployed for lifting the mixed sand and water. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts. 
A denotes a suitable frame-work or support 
consisting of four uprights, a a, and as many 
cross-beam, bb. Within this frame-work stands 
the inclined screw-pump B, made preferably 
in the form of the old Archimedean screw, 
and inclosed by a metal or wooden casing, B, 
provided near its lower end with an annular 
series of paddles or agitators, B, for a pur 
pose hereinafter explained. The spindle or 
shaft running through the center of the screw 
pump B may be a hollow cylinder or pipe, and 
so arranged that its lower end may inclose 
and set on a pivot, c, placed in a tank, C, 
which pivot should be sufficiently long to reach 
a socket inclosed in said spindle or shaft above 
the surface of the sand and water in the tank 
and out of the reach of its wearing action. 
- 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
45 
so 
345,976 
IS- 
- 
distance between its threads is preferably I feeding hopper having a wire screen, and a 
about equal to one-fourth of its diameter, and 
screw-conveyer arranged in its bottom, sub- 35 
When thus constructed should stand on an 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
angle of about sixty-five degrees. 
4. In an apparatus of the character de 
A screw-pump like the one herein described, 
scribed, the combination, with a screw-con 
is made twelve inches in diameter and geared 
veyer arranged in the bottom of the sand 
to make sixty-five revolutions per minute, will 
hopper, of intermediate gearing with the driv 
lift each minute eighty gallons of sand and 
ing-shaft for operating and regulating the 
water to any desired height. To empty the 
speed of said conveyer, substantially as and 
pump, its motion is reversed by crossing the 
for the purposes described. 
belt d the other way. 
5. In an apparatus of the character de 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
scribed, the combination, with the screw-con 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
veyer F of the hopper F, of the spur-wheel 
G, pawl G', pitman H, screw.hub I, and le 
1. In an apparatus of the character de 
ver H', having a vibrating arm passing through 
scribed, the combination of a sand-and-water 
said hub and pivoted to said pitman, Sub 
tank and a revolving shaft carrying a spiral, 
stantially as described. 
and having bearings in the frame and tank, 
6. In an apparatus of the character de 
and inclosed by a cylinder having paddles or 
scribed, the combination of a revolving shaft 
agitators on the Outside of its lower end, Sub 
carrying a spiral, and inclosed by a cylinder 
stantially as described. 
having paddles or agitators on the outside of 
2. In an apparatus of the character de 
its lower end, and the sand-and-water tank C, 
scribed, the coin bination of a sand-and-water 
provided with the pivot c, having its socket 
tank having supply and overflow pipes, a sand 
or bearing in said shaft above the surface of 
feeding hopper arranged above said tank, 
the sand and water, substantially as and for 
and a revolving shaft carrying a spiral, and 
the purposes set forth. 
having bearings in the frame and tank, and 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
inclosed by a cylinder having paddles or agi 
presence of two witnesses. 
tators on the outside of its lower end, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In an apparatus of the character de 
scribed, the conubination of a revolving screw 
pump, a tank below the same, and a sand 
GEORGE B. SPENCER, 
C. CLARK. 
ALBERT LANDON. 
Witnesses: 
45 
SO 
55 
O 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346076.txt	(Model.) 
No. 346,076, 
T, TOSKE, 
POCKET, CGARETTE MACHINE, 
Patented July 20, 1886. 
 
 
N. PETERs, photo 
Lithograph 
er. Washington, D.C., 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS TOS KE, OF R 
ICHMOND, INDIAN A. 
POCKET CIGARETTE-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed October 19, 1885. 
Patent No. 346,076, dated July 20, 1886. 
Serial No. 180,233. Model.) 
25 
IO 
To aid, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAs ToSKE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Richmond, 
in the county of Wayne and State of Indiana, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Pocket Cigarette-Machines, of which 
the following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to that class of cigar 
ette-machines which are portable and held in 
the hand while operated. 
The said invention consists, chiefly, in the 
combination of a frame in two hinged sections, 
with two rolls journaled respectively in said 
Sections, an apron attached at its ends to said 
rolls, a squared journal for one of said rolls, 
and a rack pivoted to the journal of the other 
roll and engaging said squared journal to pre 
vent the rotation of the roll to which said jour 
nal belongs, substantially as and for the pur 
pose hereinafter set forth. 
This invention also consists in additional de 
tails of construction and combination, as here 
inafter set forth and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents an end elevation of my machine. Fig. 
2 represents an elevation of the opposite 
end from that in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents a 
vertical cross-section showing the apron, the 
Wrapper, and the tobacco in position. Fig. 4 
represents a similar central vertical cross-sec 
tion showing the tobacco enveloped in the 
wrapper and formed into a cigarette. Fig. 5 
represents a perspective view of my machine, 
showing its parts in position with the wrapper 
placed upon the apron, and the tobacco in the 
Wrapper ready to be rolled into form; and Fig. 
6 represents the end of the shaft of one of the 
rolls furnished with the corrugated knob, show. 
ing the shaft to be square at that portion where 
the clamp-bar embraces it. 
The frame of my cigarette-machine is in two 
hinged sections, each section consisting of two 
heads or endplates, in and n, rigidly connected 
by a rod, a. A pivot-rod, b, passes through 
lugs formed on the inner faces of the lower ends 
of said heads m and in of both sections, hinging 
said sections together. The apron-roll d is 
journaled in the upper ends of heads in and n, 
5c of one section, and the other roll, called the 
smooth roll, c, is simply journaled in the 
upper ends of the heads in n of the other sec 
45 
65 
tion. A prono is attached at its ends to said 
rolls, respectively. All the journals of said 
rolls are extended through the heads in n, and 55 
one journal of each roll is provided with a 
milled head for convenience of operation, that 
of roll c, as shown in Fig. 5, being at the right 
hand end and marked h, while the milled head 
of roll d is at the left hand and marked h'. The 
journal to which this latter head is attached is 
squared near said head, as shown at h, Figs. 
5 and 6, in order that it may be engaged by a 
toothed rack, i, pivoted on the corresponding 
journal of roll c. This rack is provided with 
a series of teeth having between them spaces, 
any one of which will fit upon the squared 
journal h". By shifting the latter from one of 
these to another, the distance between the rolls 
c and d is regulated so as to allow for a greater 7o 
or less charge of tobacco. On the other jour 
nal of apron-roll d a hook, i, is pivoted, which 
is arranged to catch over the corresponding 
cylindrical journal of rollic when lowered. The 
lower end of heads an are cut away at the inner 
edge, t, as shown, to avoid contact. 
The paper cigarette-cover is indicated by e 
in the drawings, and the tobacco-filling by j. 
The operation is as follows: Open the ma 
chine and wind the apron upon the apron-roll 
d, leaving belly enough to the apron to hold 
Drop the 
sufficient tobacco for a cigarette. 
notch-bar upon the square parth of the apron 
roll journal, which will hold the apron-roll in 
place while changing. Place the paper wrap 
per with one edge under the smooth-roll crest 
ing the wrapper upon the apron, the edge of 
it projecting upward over the apron-roll d. 
Then distribute the tobacco evenly on the pa 
per, resting the front portion of it against the g 
smooth roll c, pressing the tobacco down into 
the belly of the apron between the two rolls. 
Then raise the notch-bar from the journal and 
close the machine and fasten it with the catch 
hook i at the opposite end, holding the machine 95 
in the left hand with the smooth roll c next to 
you, and grasping both rolls firmly between 
the thumb and finger of the left hand. Then 
turn the roll cover toward you until the cigar 
ette is formed in the apron between and be- IOO 
neath the rolls. Then turn the apron-roll d 
by the thumb-piece at the left-hand end gently 
and sufficiently to press the cigarette into a 
compact and proper condition. Then moisten 
85 
75 
346,076 
at h", the roll c, journaled in the other section 
of the frame, the aprono, attached at its ends 
to said rolls respectively, and the racki, which 
is pivoted to roll c, and is provided with a se 
ries of teeth for engaging the said squared part 
h, the interval between the two rolls being 
regulated by using at will one or another of 
the spaces between the teeth of said track for 
holding said squared part, substantially as set 35 
forth. 
3. The rolls c d, the hinged plates n n n n, 
rods (t, and b, and aprono, in combination with 
the hook i, pivoted to one journal of roll d, and 
arranged to engage the corresponding cylin- 4O 
drical journal of roll c, and the rack i, pivoted 
on the other journal of roll c, and arranged to 
engage the corresponding journal of roll d, 
which is prismatic, as shown, the teeth of Said 
rack and the shape of the latter journal Serv- 45 
ing to lock the rold, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS TOSKE. 
Witnesses: 
W. T. DENNIs, 
JAS. W. NICHOLS. 
IO 
the protruding edge of the paper wrapper with 
the tongue to make it adhere. Then turn the 
Smooth roll c by the thumb-knob at the right 
one or more times, which presses the edge of 
the wrapper against the body, to which it ad 
heres. This is the last and finishing movement. 
When you raise the catch-hook, open out the 
machine fully and remove the cigarette com 
plete and perfect. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a pocket cigarette-machine, the com 
bination of a frame in two hinged sections, with 
two rolls journaled respectively in said sec 
tions, an apron attached at its ends to said rolls, 
a. Squared journal for one of said rolls, and a 
rack pivoted to the journal of the other roll 
and engaging said squared journal to prevent 
the rotation of the roll to which said journal 
belongs, substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
2. In a pocket cigarette-machine, the com 
bination of the hinged sections of the frame, 
With the apron-roll d, journaled in one of said 
Sections, and having one of its journals squared 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346176.txt	(No Model.) 
S. N. SMITH, 
ACING HOOK, 
No. 346,176, 
Patented July 27, 1886. 
 
c 
a 
- 3 - 
F 
2/ - 
(Ne 
te, 
, 
F. G. 
2. 
\e 
WTN E 
-Z14. 4- 22.2% 
EIG 
NVENTR. 
w 
Out 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN N. SMITH, OF PROVIDENCE, REIODE ISLAND. 
LAC NG - HOOK. 
5CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 346,176, dated July 27, 1886. 
Application filed May 12, 1886. Serial No. 201,947. (No model.) 
IO 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN N. SMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, and residing in 
the city and county of Providence and State 
5 of Rhode Island, have invented an Improve 
ment in Lacing-Hooks, of which the follow 
ing description, in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification, like let 
ters on the drawings representing like parts. 
In lacing-hooks employed on dress fabrics, 
gloves, and other articles of apparel it is nec 
essary, as is well known, to provide sufficient 
space or opening between the hook proper and 
base or shank portion to permit the passage 
15 of a lacing-cord between the parts, so as to be 
engaged or retained by the hook; and various 
constructions have been employed to retain 
this necessary feature, and yet prevent, to a 
certain extent, laces and other fine and deli 
2O cate fabrics from being caught upon the hooks, 
and thus avoid damage to such articles as well 
as annoyance and trouble to the wearer. 
The object of this my present invention is to 
provide a lacing-hook of such construction as 
25 will prevent, to a great extent, laces and other 
articles from being caught by the hook proper 
of the lacing-hook when in use. 
To this end the invention consists, primarily, 
of a lacing-hook composed of a base portion 
3o having means to secure it to fabric, a dome or 
boss preferably formed thereon, and an arm 
provided with a hook having a crown which 
extends backward and more or less over and 
above said arm, with its face end toward the 
35 boss or dome of the base, as hereinafter fully 
set forth, and particularly pointed out in the 
claim. 
Figure 1 shows in plan view my improved 
lacing-hook; Fig. 2, a side elevation thereof, 
c and Fig. 3 a vertical longitudinal section of 
Fig. 1. 
In the present instance the lacing-hook is 
formed and struck up from a single piece of 
metal, and is composed of the dome or bossa, 
the wings or ears b, having eyes c to enable 45 
the lacing-hook to be secured to fabric, and 
the lateral arm d, which parts constitute the 
base portion of the lacing-hook. The arm d 
has integral there with the necke and crownf, 
the said neck and crown forming the hook 5o 
proper, as shown. The crown fextends back 
wardly over and above the arm d, and toward 
the dome or boss (t, there being shown suffi 
cient opening or space between the free end 
or portion of said crown next the dome and 55 
the dome itself to permit the passage of a cord 
or lace between them. The dome is also shown 
as extending above the planeline of the base of 
the crown f, whereby in practice the sloping or 
rounded walls of the dome, in connection with 6o 
its height, prevent the catching of laces and 
other delicate fabrics on the hook, since the 
said sloping walls have the effect or tendency 
of causing the threads of lace brought in con 
tact therewith--as by being drawn or brushed 65 
against them, to be thrown off therefrom in 
the line or curve of said walls. 
The form of hook shown, besides its other 
features of novelty and utility, presents a 
unique and novel appearance, and is well de- 7o 
signed for the purposes for which it is more 
especially intended-namely, to be employed 
in connection with fabrics for ladies' dresses 
and other garments. 
I claim- 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
lacing-hook formed from a single piece of 
metal, and cousisting, essentially, of a base 
portion having ears with openings or eyes, a 
dome, a, an arm, d, the necke, and crown f, 8O 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
75 
STEPHEN N. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
GILMAN E. JoPP, 
HENRY B. ROSE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346276.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 346,276, 
 
 
 
H, FREDERICKS. 
WIAT AND SAMPLE CASE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
3 
N & 
  
 
Na 
sans 
(No Model.) 
H, FREDERICKS, 
WIAL AND SAMPLE CASE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 346,276, 
Patented July 27, 1886, 
 
N 
 
 
&N 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HERMAN FREDERICKS, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
VAL AND SAMPLE CAS E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent To. 346,276, dated July 27, 1886. 
Application filed May 15, 1886. Serial No. 202,23?. (No model.) 
O 
TO (47 tuflon, it 7 city conce7n: 
Beit known that I, HERNIAN FREDERICRs, 
of Jersey City, in the county of Hudson and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Vial and Sample Cases, 
of which the following is a specification. 
Although my invention is more particularly 
intended for physicians' medicine-cases for 
holding a variety of medicines in different 
sized bottles or vials, the invention is equally 
applicable to cases for traveling salesmen and 
others for holding samples of liquors or other 
articles of merchandise. 
The invention relates to boxes or cases 
which are composed of two sections hinged 
together, so as to swing away from each other 
in opening, and which are provided with 
hinged leaves or boards for holding bottles or 
Samples; and the object of the invention is to 
provide means which, when the box or case is 
opened upon a table or other flat surface, will 
automatically support the leaf or leaves of the 
case in elevated positions, so that ready access 
may be had to the bottles or samples which 
are carried upon the leaf or leaves. 
The invention consists, essentially, in the 
combination, with a case composed of two 
Sections hinged together, of a leaf or leaves 
for holding bottles or samples, and which are 
hinged within the case parallel with the 
hinges of the case, and extensible connections 
between the leaf or leaves and the sections of 
the case, whereby when the case is opened 
the leaf or leaves will be automatically ad 
35 justed to and supported in elevated position, 
to afford ready access to the bottles or samples 
which are upon the leaf or leaves. These ad 
justable connections may advantageously con 
sist of a system of lazy-tong levers, and the 
invention will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a vertical section of a box or case 
containing three hinged leaves connected with 
each other and with the box or case according 
to my invention, showing the same in the 
positions which they occupy when the box or 
case is closed. Fig. 2 is a section similar to 
Fig. 1, but showing the box or case open; and 
Fig. 3 is a section similar to Fig. 2 of a box or 
case in which a single leaf only is connected 
3O 
45 
AO 
SC 
55 
with the sections of the case according to my 
invention. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring first to Figs. 1 and 2, A. A designate 
the two sections of the box or case, which are 
hinged together at b, so that they may be 
closed, as shown in Fig. 1, or opened out upon 
a table or other flat surface, as shown in Fig. 2. 
Within this case I have represented a single 
leaf, B, which is hinged at b, parallel or in 
line with the hinges b, connecting the sections 
A. A of the case; and I have also represented 
two other leaves, B, which are hinged at l', 
parallel with the hingel, connecting the Sec 
tions of the case. 
The leaf B, which is at the right hand of 
Fig. 2, I have represented as joined to the sec 
tion of the case by flexible material c-such 7o 
as leather-which may form the pocket or end 
portion of the leaf lis', and which also consti 
tutes a hinge to enable the leaf to be swung 
relatively to the section A of the case in 
which it is arranged. 
I use the term leaf' or 'leaves' as ap 
plied to the parts Band B, because such parts 
are arranged in the case similarly to the leaves 
of a book; but these leaves may be made of 
stiff paper-board, wood, metal, or any other 8O 
suitable material, and they may be hinged in 
the case in any suitable manner, provided 
their hinges are approximately parallel with 
the hinges which connect the sections A of the 
case. These leaves B B are provided with 
suitable means for holding bottles d of differ'. 
ent sizes, to contain different medicines or 
samples, or with other means for holding other 
samples of goods. Where the leaves are to 
hold bottles they may be provided with bands 
or sheaths d', which may be formed of leather, 
india-rubber, or any other suitable material, 
and into which the bottles or vials are slipped. 
One or more of the leaves may likewise be 
provided with a pocket, e, for holding pre 
scription-papers or papers for powders, in 
case the invention be embodied in a physi 
cian's medicine-case. 
From the above description it will be un 
derstood that when the case A A is opened, 
as shown in Fig. 2, the selection of any par 
ticular bottle and its withdrawal from the leaf 
90 
OO 
2 
346,276 
25 Selected and removed. 
will be greatly facilitated if the leaves are au- cases for holding medicines or other fluids in 55 
tomatically adjusted to and supported in the bottles I prefer to employ the construction of 
position shown in Fig. 2 by the very act of the case shown in Figs. 1 and 2, because ini 
Opening the case. This result Isecure bypro 
that case the leaves B and the bottles or vials 
carried by them never assume horizontal po 
5 Viding extensible connections between the 
sitions, and hence there is but little chance of 6o 
several leaves B B, and also between the 
the contents of the bottles leaking from them 
leaves B and the sections A of the case; and 
or being spilled. When the case is closed, all 
a durable and desirable extensible connection 
the bottles or vials are in a vertical position, as 
may consist of lazy - tong levers C, which are. 
shown in Fig. 1, and in the opening of the 
to formed of thin metal strips connected at f with 
case the leaves B do not swing down lower 65 
the sections A of the case, and at the points 
than is shown in Fig. 2; and even if the bot 
f with the several leaves B. B. Such a sys 
tles were full there would be no leakage from 
tem of extensible connections may be provided 
them when tilted at the angle shown. 
at One or each end of the leaves B. B. When 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
15 the case is closed, as shown in Fig. 1, the con 
nections C adjust themselves automatically to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a case composed 
the positions shown in Fig. 1, and when the 
of two sectionshinged together at the back so 
case is opened, as shown in Fig. 2, the con 
as to open away from each other, of a leaf or 
nections C likewise adjust themselves to the 
leaves for holding bottles or samples, and 
20 position there shown, and sustain the leaf B 
which are hinged within the case parallel with 75 
in vertical position and the leaves B in in 
clined positions, so that the bottles or samples 
the hinges of the case, and extensible coanec 
carried upon all the leaves can be very readily 
tions between the leaf or leaves and the sec 
tions of the case, whereby when the case is 
reached and the desired one or more of them 
opened the leaf or leaves will be supported in 
elevated position, to afford ready access to the 8o 
The case A A may have a handle or strap, 
bottles or samples, substantially as herein de 
D, whereby it may be carried in the hand, 
and it may be provided with any suitable 
scribed. 
catch or lock. 
of sections hinged together, of a leaf hinged 
The example of my invention shown in Fig. 
at the meeting and hinged edges of the sec-85 
3 differs from that above described in that the 
tions, and other leaves hinged within the sec 
middle leaf, B, only, which is hinged at b, 
tions, said leaves baving provision for holding 
and extending upward from the meeting edges 
bottles or samples on one or both sides, and 
of the sections A, is sustained by the extensi 
extensible connections between the leaves and 
35 ble connections C. In this figure the extensi 
case-sections, whereby the leaves will be sup- go 
ble connections C also consist of lazy - tong 
ported in elevated positions when the case is 
levers attached at fixed points f to the sec 
opened, substantially as herein described. 
tions A of the case, and at the point f' to the 
3. The combination, with a case composed 
leaf B. This case also has the leaves B, which 
of sectionshinged together, of a leaf or leaves 
40 are hinged, one in each of the sections A; but 
for holding bottles or samples, and which are 95 
these leaves B", as here shown, are not con 
hinged to the case-sections, and extensible 
nected with the leaf B, and may, one or other 
connections consisting of lazy-tong levers ex 
of them, be separately lifted into an inclined 
tending between the leaf or leaves and the sec 
position when it is desired to select a bottle or 
tions of the case, whereby when the case is 
Sample from them. 
opened said leaf or leaves will be supported roo 
From the above description it will be un 
in elevated position, to afford ready access to 
derstood that my invention adds but very 
the bottles or samples, substantially as herein 
little to the cost of the case, and it provides 
for adjusting the leaves automatically to and 
described. 
So holding them in vertical or properly-inclined 
HERMAN FREDERICKS. 
positions, to afford access to the bottles or sam 
ples supported by them when the case is 
opened. 
Where my invention is to be embodied in 
2. The combination, with a case com 
Witnesses: 
C. HALL, 
FREDK, HAYNES. 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346376.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARSHALL C. LEFFERTS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE 
CELLULOI) MANUFACTURING COMPANY. 
PROCESS OF PRNTING UPON OR DECORATING THE SURFACE OF CELLULOD, 
31ECEEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 346,376, dated July 27, 1886, 
Application filed December 29, 1885. Serial No. 187,016. (Specimens.) 
IC 
25 
3 5 
To alZ wifton, it may concer'70: 
Beit known that I, MARSHALLC. LEFFERTS, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in the Process of 
Printing upon or Decorating the Surface of 
Celluloid, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
The invention relates to an improved pro 
cess of printing or decorating a surface of cel 
luloid or analogous compound of pyroxyline. 
It may be used in connection with any coin 
pound having the characteristics of celluloid. 
The invention consists in printing upon or 
otherwise applying to the pyroxyline surface, 
in a suitable ink or color, the desired design, 
and afterward subjecting the surface and im 
pression thereon to heat and pressure, as here 
inafter more fully described. 
To illustrate and explain my process, I will 
first describe the treatment of a piece of mate 
rial in the form of a thin sheet. 
Having applied the design to the sheet, by 
meals of a press or otherwise, I place the sheet 
bearing the impression in what is known as a 
'steam-table press,' with the printed face of 
... the sheet in contact with a polished plate or 
surface. Arranged in this way, the sheet and 
the impression it bears are suljected to the 
proper degree of heat and pressure-say from 
one hundred and eighty (180) to two hundred 
and thirty (230) degrees Fahrenheit-for about 
a minute, the pressure being about six hun 
dred pounds to the square inch. In working 
sheets of the thickness of one-sixteenth of an 
inch, or of greater thickness, the pressure will 
not be SO great, only that degree of pressure 
being required which may be necessary to flow 
the surface of the sheet and effect a satisfactory 
impression. If the sheet is thin, it will be de 
sirable to back it up with a layer or layers of 
blotting-paper or other elastic material, for 
the purpose of preventing or correcting inac 
curacies and defects, which are likely to be 
caused by any inequality or irregularity in the 
plate or sheet. To prevent the sheet from ad 
hering to the backing, a layer of any non-adhe 
sive substance-such as metal, tin-foil, or cellu 
loid-which has been properly oiled or lubri 
cated may be interposed. 
If desired to impart a finished or calendered 
surface to both sides of the sheet, the desired 
object may be accomplished by a sheet of pol 
ished metal, which will be placed in contact 
with the reverse side of the sheet of celluloid. 
In treating thick pieces of material there is 
danger of the heat and pressure causing the 
material to flow, whereby the impression will 
be blurred or distorted. This danger I obvi 
ate by performing the operation in a die or 
receptacle in which the material is so closely 
and compactly fitted that its shape is pre 
served, and any displacement of the decorated 
surface thus prevented. Any die or mold 
which will prevent a change in the surface 
that carries the impression may be made use of 
My process is useful in connection with all 
kinds of printing, and in using the word de 
sign?' I intend to include every species of in 
pression, simple or complex, in the whole 
range of the printer's art. Inks of different 
kinds may be used. The only requirement is, 
that the ink shall be of such a nature that a 
sharply-defined impression can be produced 75 
and of such strength or density that a small 
quantity only is necessarily used to give the 
desired impression. Inks which spread easily, 
or which require to be used freely, are not de 
sirable. I have found that excellent results 
may be obtained with aniline ink, such as is 
used for rubber stamps in office-work. I do 
not, however, confine myself to the use of an 
ink of any particular kind; nor do I limit my 
claim to any particular method of printing; 85 
nor to the use of plates, types, or stamps of 
any particular kind. The nature of the ink 
and unanner of causing the application of the 
design may be greatly varied, according to cir 
cumstances and the results that are desired. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The process herein before described of ap 
plying a design to a surface of celluloid or 
analogous compound, which consists in, first, 
applying the design to the surface, and, sec 
ond, subjecting the surface bearing the design 
to heat and pressure, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The process herein described of applying 
a design to a surface of celluloid or analogous 
compound, which consists in, first, printing or 
95 
9O 
So 
OO 
2 
- 
346,376 
otherwise applying the design in ink or color, 
and, second, subjecting the surface bearing the 
design to the action of heat and pressure while 
it is in contact with a polished surface, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The process herein described of applying 
a design to sheets of celluloid or analogous com 
pound, which consis's in, first, applying the 
design in an ink or color, and, second, subject 
ing the sheet, while interposed between an 
elastic backing and a polished surface, to the 
action of heat and pressure, substantially as 
Set forth. 
4. The process of applying a design to a sur 
IO 
5 
face of celluloid or analogous compound, which 
consists in preventing the displacement of the 
design by confining the surface to be decorated 
in a suitable mold or die, and applying the 
heat and pressure while the surface is thus con 
fined, substantially as set forth. 
Signed at Newark, in the county of Essex 
and State of New Jersey, this 19th day of De 
cember, A. D. 1885. 
MARSHALL C. LEFFERTS. 
Witnesses: 
ISAAC F. ROE, 
ABRAHAM MANNERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346476.txt	(No Model.) 
M, W, HENIUS, 
CORSET TRIMMING, 
No. 346,476, 
Patented Aug. 3, 1886. 
24. 37 
7:#4. 
21. 
 
7:#5. 
21. 
Z 
4/77/72 a gag, 
-6-6-4-(z) 
//7 V277/7/-, 
24a, W, 4-4-e- 
PEERs, photo-thographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MAX W. HENIUS, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
CO RSET-TR M M N G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 346,476, dated August 3, 1886. 
Application filed November 11, 1885. Serial No. 182,424. (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MAX. W. HENIUS, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Bridge 
port, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Corset-Trimmings and 
Similar Articles; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to make 
and use the same. 
My invention relates to small metallic arti 
cles-such as, for example, hinges, corset-trim 
mings, &c.--that are ordinarily held in place 
by rivets. 
The object of my invention is to furnish this 
class of articles ready for use-that is, with the 
rivets securely held in place-so that hand 
labor in placing them in the holes at the time 
the articles are secured in place is wholly dis 
pensed with, this being a very important item 
to manufacturers using large quantities every 
day-as, for example, in the manufacture of 
CorsetS. 
Various plans have been devised for secur 
ing metallic trimmings of this general class in 
place for use; but none has proved practical 
and adapted for general use except rivets 
when the articles are to be attached to metal. 
As corset-trimmings and similar articles are 
now placed upon the market, the rivets come 
separate therefrom and have to be placed in 
the holes by hand, which is a source of great 
inconvenience to the mauufacturer who uses 
them. This is true even when goods are han 
dled in small quantities, and when used in 
large quantities in manufacturing the opera 
tion of placing the rivets in place is an item of 
considerable expense. In the manufacture of 
corsets, for example, from three to five hooks 
are placed upon the front of each corset, each 
hook being ordinarily secured in place by two 
or three rivets. As this portion of the manu 
facture is now carried on, each rivet has to be 
set in a hole by hand, making from six to fif 
teen operations that are required just to pre 
pare the trimmings for attachment in place in 
the manufacture of each corset. In order to 
wholly overcome these objections without in 
creasing the cost of the trimmings as placed 
upon the market, I have devised the novel 
25 
35 
45 
Figure 1 is a perspective illustrating my in- 55 
In Fig. 3 I have illustrated my preferred 75 
A indicates a corset - hook, hinge, or any 65 
construction and arrangement of which the 
following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
vention as applied to a corset-hook; Fig. 2, a 
similar view illustrating my invention as ap 
plied to a hinge; Fig. 3, an enlarged section of 
a corset-hook, hinge, or other article, illustrat 
ing my preferred form of holding the rivets in 6o 
place; Fig. 4, a similar section illustrating an 
other way of holding the rivets in place, and 
Fig. 5 a cross-section illustrating still an 
other way of holding the rivets in place. 
small metallic article; and B, rivets fixed there 
in independently of any other means by which 
the article is to be secured in place for use. 
The essential principle of my inventionis, that 
the rivets themselves shall be so constructed to 
that when once placed in position in the article 
they will remain there without anything be 
ing done to the article itself, and without the 
assistance of other devices. 
form for holding the livets in place, which is 
to provide a shoulder or enlargement, C, at the 
base of each rivet, just under the head, so that 
when the rivet is forced into place it is held 
there by a drive fit. It will be understood, of 8o 
course, that in the drawings the rivet is very 
much enlarged and the shoulder is exagger 
ated. It is simply necessary in practice that 
the shoulder shall be slightly larger than the 
diameter of the hole, but of course not large 85 
enough to require great power to force it in. 
In Fig. 4 I have illustrated another means 
of accomplishing exactly the same result, which 
is to split the head and a portion of the body 
of the rivet, as at D. The act of splitting will go. 
slightly spread the two parts of the rivet, so 
that When forced into the hole in the corset 
hook or other article the rivet is firmly held 
there by the springing of its parts. 
a cheaper Way of holding the rivets in place. 
This form of my invention requires a special ma 
chine, which will be made the subject of a future 
application. In this form the rivets are formed 
in the holes, the Wire being automatically Ioo 
pushed through the holes a predetermined 
distance, and then cut off a short distance back 
In Fig. 5 I have illustrated still another and 95 
2. 
346,476 
of the corset-hook, hinge, or other article. A analogous articles having holes, of solid riv- 15 
blow is then struck upon the stump of wire lets, each of which is provided with an enlarge 
projecting back of the article, which flattens ment, whereby when placed in said holes the 
down the metal of the wire, as at E, forming rivets are held there by friction alone, the ar 
5 a head to the rivet, and also expands the metal ticle being thus made ready for attachment 
in the hole sufficiently to hold the rivet there without further operation upon either article 20 
firmly. 
my invention may be varied within reason. presence of two witnesses. 
thereof. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
MAX. W. HENIUS 
d 
It should be understood that the details of 
Io able limits without departing from the spirit 
Having thus described my invention, I 
The combination, with corset-trimmings and 
claim- 
Or rivet. 
Witnesses: 
A. M. WoOSTER, 
C.E.RUGGLES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346576.txt	(No Model.) 
J. N. BRIGGS, 
APPARATUS FOR PLANING CAKES OF ICE FOR STORING, 
No. 346,576, 
Patented Aug. 3, 1886. 
  
-- 
- 
- - ESS 
m 
f76.4 
Witnesses: 
5 (70.2 
76% feature. 
Interator: 
s 
u?. WAA/G Gs, 
by W.A. "ge: 
of torney. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. 3. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN N. BRIGGS, OF COEYMIANS, NEW YORK. 
A PPARATUS FOR PLAN N G CAKES OF C E FOR STORNG. 
SPECIFICATIOIN forming part of Letters Patent No. 346,576, dated August 3, l886. 
Application filed April 7, 1 SSG. Scrial No. 19s, 111. (No model.) 
to (t/l, whon it Taly conce77: 
| 
Be it known that I, JOHN N. BRIGGS, of 
Coeymans, in the county of Albany and State ! 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in the Apparatus for Planing 
Cakes of Ice for Storing, of which the follow 
ing is a Specification. 
Y 
Much difficulty has heretofore been expe 
rienced in properly storing ice for use in warm 
Weather by reason of the unequal thicknesses 
of the different cakes of ice, whereby an un 
even and broken surface of the upper layer of 
the mass was produced, which greatly inter 
fered with the sliding of the cakes over the 
Surface, and involved excessive labor and ex 
pense in the proper storage of the ice. To 
remedy this difficulty recourse has commonly 
been had to chipping off the upper surface of 
the ice after each layer has been placed in the 
house. This, while it partially remedied one 
trouble at a great cost, produced another as 
great by reason of the chips of ice falling into 
and filling up the vertical spaces formed around 
adjoining cakes for the purpose of drainage 
and to facilitate the removal of the cakes from 
the mass. 
The object of my invention is to remedy 
this difficulty, to provide facilities for the 
more effectual drainage of the water produced 
by the melting away of the ice, to afford a 
In Ol'C certain foothold for the Workman en 
ployed in storing the ice, and to facilitate the 
Separation of the cakes in summer. 
To this end any invention consists in reduc 
ing or planing the cakes of ice for each layer 
to a uniform thickness, and at the same time 
grooving or corrugating the upper surface of 
each cake, so as to form ridges for affording a 
Suitable foothold, and ?urrows or channel-ways 
for the passage of the drainage-water, and also 
presenting less contact surface between the 
cakes to freeze together. 
In the accompanying drawings, which are 
herein referred to, and form part of this speci. 
fication, Figure 1 is a side elevation of my re 
ducing apparatus applied to an ice-house ele 
vator; Fig. 2, a transverse section of the same 
at the line ac a'; and Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are rc. 
spectively a detached and enlarged side ele 
vation, front elevation, and end elevation of 
a preferred form of chisel for the cutter-head 
of my reducing apparatus. 
As illustrated in the drawings, A repre 
sents an inclined elevator or railway commonly 
used for raising the ice into the ice-houses, a 
small portion of the same only being show ll; 
3, the endless chain, provided with cross-bars 
b for moving the cakes of ice up the inclined 
railway. The said chain may be operated by 
steam or any suitable motive power. 
The said parts, being common and Well 
known, do not constitute any part of my in 
vention, which consists of the following parts: 
C is the cutter-head, secured to the free ends of 
the side links, D, and bearing on each of the 
lower string-pieces, a, of the inclined railway, 
so as to extend entirely across the latter. The 
upper face of said cutter - head, which is a 
straight bar or plate, is fixed at an acute all 
gle to the inclination of the string-pieces (t, 
and upon it are secured a series of chisels or 
cutter-teeth, E. The latter are preferably 
made in the triangular prismatic form shown 
in Figs. 3, 4, and 5, with the lower end formed 
in a sharp point. These are arranged with 
their cutting-points ranged on a straight line, 
or nearly so, that will be parallel with the 
forward edge of the cutter - head, and So as 
to leave a clear space between the several cut 
ters, as shown in Fig. 2, and by this means 
grooves are formed in the ice with a slightly 
greater depth at the center line of each, said 
grooves being separated by a ridge equal to 
the width of the space between the teeth. 
These cutter-teeth are held in place at their 
upper ends by a cross-bar, e, which passes 
over all the tecth and at their lower ends by 
conical-headed tap-bolts c', which are inserted 
in the spaces between the teeth. Springs F 
are secured to the under side of the clutter 
head (, to prevent the cake of ice which is be 
ing planed from being thrown up by the ac 
tion of the cuttel-toeth. 
The links I) are pivoted to the boxes d, which 
are placed at a sufficient height from the string 
pieces (t to bring the links D at an acute angle 
to the inclination of said string-pieces, and by 
this arrangement the force applied to the ice 
to effect the planing will tend to press the 
cutter-head down firmly upon the top of the 
string-pieces (t. The boxes cl are adjustably 
fixed to the studs (t', and are provided with 
racks cl, which engage with pinions d", secured 
to a cross-shaft, d", that is operated by a crank, 
O 
3. 5 
SO 
7 5 
90 
95 
JOO 
2 
346,576 
When preferred, the cutter-head. C may be 
provided with cutter-teeth of a different form 
from those shown in the drawings-as, for in 
stance, a series of flat chisel-pointed cutters, 
or of any other preferred form, may be sub 
stituted, and such cutters may be spaced apart 
or fixed close together side by side; and, when 
preferred, the cutter-head C, provided with 
cutter-teeth E, may be rigidly bolted in posi 
tion on the string-pieces a, and in such cases 
the means herein described for adjusting Said 
cutter-head may be dispensed with. 
By providing the cutter-head with narrow 
cutter-teeth I facilitate the repairing of the 
cutting mechanism, for the reason that only 
the space injured needs to be repaired, where 
as by use of the wide cutter commonly used, 
when an injury is done at one part of the cut 
ter the entire cutting-edge must be ground to 
remedy the injury. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The cutter-head C, provided with a series 
of narrow cutter-teeth or chisels, E, which are 
separately removable from said cutter-head, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination, with a cutter-head that 
is pivoted at its rearmost edge to the frame 
work of the elevator by means of links, which 
are rigidly attached to said cutter-head, and 
which are arranged at an acute angle to the 
inclination of said elevator, of the cross-shaft 
G, provided with arms 0, and the rods g for 
connecting said arms with the cutter-head, the 
said arms and rods forming toggle joints, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
3. The inclined railway A and endless chain 
B of an ice-elevator, in combination with a 
cutter-head, C, which is connected to said ele 
vator by means of links D, that are pivoted to 
boxes d, provided with racks d", the said racks 
being adapted to engage with pinions d' on the 
shaft d", as and for the purpose herein speci 
fied. 
4. The combination, with a cutter-head, C, 
held in a fixed unyielding position during 
the operation of planing cakes of ice, of the 
springs IF, fixed to the rearmost side of said 
cutter-head, and adapted to bear upon said 
cakes of ice and prevent them from being dis 
placed during the said operation of planing, 
as herein specified. 
JOHN N. BRIGGS. 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. LOW, 
S. B. BREWER. 
75 
90 
IOO 
IOS 
d", so that by turning the shaft d the pivotal 
points of the links D can be readily raised or 
lowered, as occasion may require. For the 
purpose of raising and lowering the cutter 
head C, the latter is connected by adjustable 
rodsg to arms 9', fixed to the crossed shaft G, 
Which is operated by the hand-lever g. The 
arms 9 and rods of form toggle-joints to hold 
the cutter-head C down to its work, and the 
normal position of said cutter-head is usually 
Where it will bear upon the upper side of the 
String-pieces (; but in dressing ice to a greater 
thickness than that produced by the cutter 
head bearing on the string-pieces a the boxes 
d can be raised up and the cutter-head C cor 
respondingly blocked up, as indicated by the 
dotted lines in Fig. 1, the adjustability of the 
rods 9 permitting such changes to be made. 
The operation of my apparatus is as follows: 
The cakes of ice are placed on the elevator A, 
So that a cross-bar, b, of the constantly-mov. 
ing endless chain B will engage against the 
rearmost edge of the cake, and so that the lat 
ter Will be in condition to slide upon the rib 
bons at of the elevator. As the cake of ice is 
brought in contact with the cutter-head, the 
sharp points of the cutter-teeth E will pene 
trate the ice at the required height from the 
bottom of the cake and remove any excess of 
the thickness, the line of fracture following 
the line formed by the wide base of the cutter 
teeth, while the pointed ends of the cutter 
teeth penetrate deeper into the cake and form 
the grooves in the upper surface of the cake, 
as hereinbefore described. This action is con. 
tinued until the cake of ice has been sub 
jected to the action of the cutter-teeth over 
its entire length, and the finished cakes are 
then carried by the motion of the endless 
chain to the point of delivery, from whence 
they are removed and stored in the ice-house. 
The cakes of ice are stored in the ice-house in 
layers, with the grooved surface uppermost, 
So that the bottom surface of the successive 
layers will rest on the ridges of the grooved 
surface of the cakes in the next layer below, 
and it will readily be seen that the grooves in 
the upper surface of the cakes will form per 
fect channel-ways to carry off the drainage 
water from each layer into the vertical spaces 
which are always left between the blocks of 
Ce. 
The corrugated upper surface of each layer, 
while it does not interfere with the easy slid 
ing of the cakes upon the surface of each lay 
er, will afford a stable footing for the work 
man, So that he can perform his work to better 
advantage. 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346676.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 346,676, 
 
H. NIEHOFF, 
COAL RECEPTAOLE, 
Patented Aug. 3, 1886. 
NWENTOR 
MLuvov 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY NIEHOFF, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
COAL REC EPTACLE. 
PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 346,676, clated August 3, 1886. 
Application filed March 29, 1886. 
Serial No. 197,065. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
(To ald Luhon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY NIEHOFF, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and Improved Coal-Receptacle, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
This invention is the construction of an im 
proved form of coal-receptacle, the object of 
the invention being to provide a receptacle 
which will effectually prevent the escape of 
dust into the room or apartment within which 
the receptacle is located, and which will per. 
unit of the withdrawal of the coal by means 
of a shovel, the receptacle being so arranged 
that only a portion of the lower compartment 
from which the coal is taken for use is filled 
at any one time. 
To the ends named the invention consists of 
a receptacle provided with a curved bottom 
and a partial interior partition, whereby the 
receptacle is divided into two compartments, 
a stop or bolstering plate being arranged be 
low the partition for a purpose to be herein 
after described; and the invention further con 
sists of the construction and arrangement of 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully described 
and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a front view of my improved 
coal-receptacle. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional 
elevation of the same, taken online acac of Fig. 
351, the extensible portion being, however, 
shown in its extended position; and Fig. 3 is 
a sectional plan view taken online pygy of Fig. 2. 
In the drawings above referred to, A repre 
sents the main box or body of my improved 
4o form of coal - receptacle, which is, as illus 
trated, preferably in the form of a cylinder; 
but the body A could be square, oblong, or 
any other shape desired without departing 
from the spirit of my invention. This box or 
45 body A is mounted in any manner desired upon 
an ornamental base, B, and its bottomais curved 
downward from the forward side of the recep. 
tacle, and then upward to meet the rear wall of 
said receptacle. At a point just upon a level 
5o with the forward edge of the bottom a there is 
a door, C, provided with an appropriate catch 
and mounted by means of an Ordinary form of 
hinge, as b. Just above the opening that is 
closed by the door C there is arranged a rear 
wardly-inclined partition, D, preferably made 55 
of sheet metal so cut as to be provided with . 
ears c c, and then bent to the form indicated 
in the drawings, the said partition being held 
in position by means of rivets d, which are 
passed through apertures formed in the walls 
of the main body A, and through other aper 
tures formed in the lugs or ears c. 
It will be noticed that the partition D does 
not extend entirely across the box A, but that 
there is an opening, E, between the lower edge 
of the partition and the rear wall of the re 
ceptacle; but this opening is partially closed 
by a stop or deflecting-plate, F, arranged be 
low the partition D, and secured and held 
in place by means of lugs or ears f and rivets 
gy, as indicated. An extensible section, H, is 
fitted within the main receptacle A, and held 
in any position desired by means Ofa Set-screw, 
h, which enters a groove, i, formed in the out 
er face of the extensible section, but not run- 75 
ning entirely to the bottom of said section, so 
that when the section is raised the Set-screw h 
will prevent its withdrawal from the main 
body A. 
The upper end of A is formed with an out 
wardly and then inwardly curved bead, k, the 
edge l of which fits close against the outer face 
of the extensible section; but when the exten 
sible section is lowered to the position shown 
in Fig. 1, the bead k is partially covered by 
an ogee or other form of molding, I, that is 
carried by the extensible section. The de 
vice described is provided with a cover, N. 
In operation, if it is desired to place a large 
annount of coal in the receptacle the Section H 
is drawn ofit to the position shown in Fig. 2, 
in which position it is held by the set-screw h. 
The coal is then filled in, and, striking upon the 
partition D, will fall against the deflecting-plate 
F and will be thrown upon the curved bottom 
a; but owing to the position of the plate F the 
coal will not extend farther forward than the 
points. (Shown in Fig. 2.) In removing the 
coal the curved bottom (, permits of the use of 
any ordinary form of shovel that will enter the IOO 
door C, and I find that by imparting such a 
curve as is represented in the drawings to the 
85 
95 
2 
346,676 
said bottom a the filling of the shovel is greatly 
facilitated. As the coal is withdrawn from 
the receptacle the section H may be lowered 
to the position shown in Fig. 1. 
In practice I prefer to make my receptacle 
of a size adapted to hold two scuttles of coal 
when the parts are adjusted to the position 
shown in Fig. 1, or to hold three scuttles when 
the parts are adjusted to the position shown 
in Fig. 2. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the main body A, 
having a door, C, and a bottom, a, curved as 
shown, of the downward-inclined, partition D, 
secured to the inner side of the body over the 
. 
O 
door, an opening, E, being formed opposite 
the door, and the inward and downward in 
clined plate F, secured to the body below the 2d 
opening, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the outer tubular 
body, A, having closed sides and bottom, and 
a Set-screw, h, near its upper end, of the inner 
tubular section, H, open at its top and bottom, 25 
i closed at its sides, and provided with a vertical 
groove receiving the inner end of the set-screw 
h, and a cover for the inner section, substan 
tially as set forth. 
HENRY NIEHOFF. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD KENT, Jr., 
C. SEDGWICK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346776.txt	(No Model.) 
L. C. RODENBERGER, 
PR0TECTOR FOR B00TS OR SHOES, 
No. 346, 776. 
 
Patented Aug 
3, 1886. 
$XXXXXXXX $ $XXX}} 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX) 
$%$$% ? ?XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX) 
(XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX) 
?XXXXXXXXXXX) } ?XXXXXXXXX}} 
&(XXXXXXXXXX}} 
KS 
() 
(XXXXX) 
(X) % 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
AORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
LEV I C. RODEN BERGER, 
OF MEDFORD, OREGON. 
PROTECTOR FOR BOOTS O R SHOES, 
ELPIECI:FIECATION forming part of uettrs Patent No. 346,776, dated August 3, 1886, 
Application filed January 15, 1886. Serial No. 189,771. 
(No model.) 
I O 
M 
To all avhom, it muually concern: 
Be it known that I, LEVI C. RODENBERGER, 
of Medford, in the county of Jackson and State 
of Oregon, have invented a new and Improved 
Protector for Boots and Shoes, of which the 
following isa specification, reference being had 
to the annexed drawings, forming a part there 
of, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a boot with 
my improved protector applied. Fig. 2 is an 
inverted plan view. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of a modified form of the protector. Fig. 
4 is a detail perspective view of the heel-pro 
tector. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the different figures of the 
drawings. 
The object of my invention is to furnish a 
removable protector for the soles of rubber 
boots and shoes, to protect the soles against 
cutting andl wearing, and also to prevent the 
person wearing the boot or shoe from slipping. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction and arrangement of parts, as here 
inafter fully described, and pointed out in the 
claim. 
The plate A, forming the body of the boot 
protector, is provided on its under surface 
with series, of diagonal grooves crossing each 
other and forming diamond-shaped projections 
a. The plate is shaped by the process of 
stamping, or in any other convenient way, 
to adapt it to the form of the sole of the boot, 
and the edges of the plate are turned upward, 
formning flanges b, which embrace the edges of 
the Sole of the boot, and are provided at op 
posite ends with apertured ears c c'. To the 
ears c c' are secured straps dl d' by means of 
rivets, one of the straps, d, being provided 
with a buckle, b', and the other laving holes 
formed therein to receive the tongue of the 
buckle. The straps d' are provided with a 
buckle in a similar way. The strap B, which 
passes around the heel of the boot, is split at 
its end, and the part e is secured to the ear c'. 
The part e' is secured to the strap d' near the 
buckle b'. The strap B prevents the metallic 
sole Afrom slipping forward on the boot, while 
25 
- JO 
45 
5Co 
To protect the heel of the boot against wear, 6o 
My improved boot and shoe protector is de- 65 
the straps dl d' bind the plate A closely to the 
Sole of the boot. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown a form of sole-pro 
tector similar to that already described; but 
having in addition to the side flanges, b, a cap, 
f, formed on the toe thereof, for receiving the 
toe of the boot. The straps dl dl, used in con - 55 
nection with a protector of this form, extend 
from the ears c c" om ome side of the plate A 
to the ears on the opposite side, and are pro 
vided with buckles, as in the other case. 
I apply to it a heel-plate, C, curved to con 
form to the shape of the heel, with its ends g 
bent upward along the inner vertical edge of 
the heel. 
signed to be worn by miners in placer mining 
in connection with rubber boots. The rubber 
boots which are ordinarily worn to protect the 
feet from water are rapidly destroyed by the 
contact of the soles of the boot with Sand and 
gravel displaced by the water in mining. 
My improved protector provides an auxil 
iary sole for the boot, and thus prevents the 
wear of the boot. 
My improvement may also be used with ad 
vantage in connection with boots worn by 
brakemen or others who require a boot that 
will not slip, the roughened surface of the pro 
tector preventing the wearer from slipping. 
The plate or auxiliary sole may be made of 8o 
metal, rubber, or any other suitable material. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
roughened on its under surface and provided 
with side flanges, b, and ears c c", the straps d 
d', provided with buckles b', and the split strap 
B, secured to the ears c c and straps dl dl, sub 
stantially as herein shown and described. 
In a boot and shoe protector, the plate: A, 85 
LEVI C. RODENBERGER. 
WitneSSeS: 
W. F. WILLIAMSON, 
R. T. LAWTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346877.txt	(No Model.) 
J. WERDOL., 
JACQUARD MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1886. 
WTNESSES 2% 
-zez26 
  
|NVENTOR 
 
(No Model.) 
J. WERDOL, 
JACQUARD MACHINE. 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 346,877, 
Patented Aug. 3, 1886. 
s 
4 i 
 
 
% 25 HRSH 
HE-3. 
H-HE-1 HE tai- 
is 
H-H - 
Aa34 
S - a 3 
%C3% 
2 (2 
1. 
I 
 
 
 
8 
a 
2 
i 
2. 
A. 
4. 
12 
53 2C2 
H- s- as ZEC2 
: HSFS 23 
-HSE, 
7 Time-N-IBC2 
N (28C3% 
S2 
2 
z 
Y 
 
Hills 
s 
 
 
-- 
S 
7 
WITNESSES G-15 
4%z276.2% 
- 
| 
d 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. WERDOL, 
JACQUARD MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 346,877, 
Patented Aug. 3, 1886. 
- - - - - - - - - - 
- - - - - - - - - - - 
OSOSOCOSOCOSO 
O)(O)xO(OXOXO 
OO-O-O-O-O-O-O. 
(OXOXOXOXOXO. 
QSSSCSOSQSQSO 
O 9599.9999 
F.C.. 4 
c 
2 
Ay 
F.C. 6 
2. 
WITNESSES 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 346,877, 
J. WERDOL, 
JACQUARD MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1886, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JULES WERDOL OF PARIS, FRANCE, 
JACQUARD MACHINE 
SIPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 346,877, dated August 3, 1886. 
Application filed January 3, 1884. Serial No. 116,365. (No model.) Patented in France May 15, 1883, No. 155,454; in England 
January 19, 1S84, No. 1,751, and in Belgium February 1, 1884, No. 64,020. 
55 
65 
75 
The horizontal needles i, the number of which 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
correspond with that of the lifting-wires i', are 
Be it known that I, JULES WERDOL, a citi 
supported at their ends by the plates H and 
zen of the Republic of France, residing at 
H', respectively, made of wood or metal, per. 
Paris, in the Republic of France, mechanical 
forated with one thousand two hundred and 
engineer, have invented certain new and use 
forty-eight holes at least, (according to the 
ful Improvements in Jacquard Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
size of the machine,) in which the needles 
slide freely. The rear ends of the needles i 
In order that my invention may be fully 
are bent forward, forming loops i', in which 
nnderstood, I will proceed to describe it with 
engage vertical pins i, serving to retain them 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
without hindering their longitudinal move 
which 
ment. On each horizontal needle, at one point 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
in its length opposite the lifting-wires i, Fig. 
machine, the carriage being in its rearward 
7,is a heel, i, designed to pushback the hooked 
position. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal sec 
ends of the lifting-wires which are to remain 
tion of the same, looking from the opposite 
stationary while the others are raised. 
side thereof. Fig. 3 is a front elevation show. 
G is the grate, which consists of a frame 
ing a part of the carriage-frame. Fig. 4 shows 
having inclined plates or blades G', beveled 
a portion of a paper Strip in plan view. Fig. 
off at the upper edges. The grate is elevated 
5 is a plan view of a portion of the grating 
in the usual manner. It is guided during its 
which supports the vertical needles. Fig. 6 
movement by an arm, K, sliding in the slot of 
is an elevation of two vertical needles, the 
grating on which they are hooked being shown 
a standard, K. 
The grate is the means by which the wires 
in dotted lines. Fig. 7 is a plan view of a 
i' with their connections are raised and then 
horizontal needle. IFig. S is a side view of the 
permitted to drop. 
roller and lantern-wheel. Fig. 9 is aside view 
The frames A are formed with V-shaped 
of a pusher. Fig. 10 is a detail view of the 
grooves, in which slide the side plates of a 
vertical needle-frame, showing an end eleva 
carriage moving lengthwise of the machine. 
tion thereof. Fig. It is a plan of one side of 
Each side plate is formed in two parts, CC, 
the machine, the blades of the grate being 
which are adjustably secured togetherby means 
omitted. 
of a screw-bolt, W, and nut V'. 
My Jacquard machine is constructed with 
The reciprocating motion is imparted to the 
a main frame consisting of side plates, A, con 
carriage by a bar, Z, formed with two vertical 
nected by tie-pieces A", supporting the whole 
portions, 22, connected by an inclined portion, 
of the mechanism. 
2", working between two friction-rollers, gg, 
i' are the lifting-wires, formed of thick wire, 
secured to or journaled on a side plate on hori 
bent at their upper ends to form hooks i, 
zontal axes. The bar is secured to the grate 
and bent on themselves at their lower part, 
G by screw a' and stud 2'. The upward move 
and having their ends i' turned up vertically 
ment is imparted to the grate by means of a 
to provide Springs. These wires are main 
cord or strap, O, which is wound on a pulley, 
tained between round parallel cross-bars it, 
O', governed by a belt, O, one end of which 
which are fixed to the frame. The wires i. 
is fixed to a pulley, O", and the other end se 
rest on a perforated board, A, provided with 
cured to a treadle or other power. (Not shown.) 
a hole beneath each wire. Small wooden bars 
The carriage is provided at its rear end with 
i", extending across the machine in each row 
a readjusting-plate, R, for returning the pro 
of wires i, serve to return them to their nor 
jected needles i, and at its front end with the 
mal position after they have been lifted by 
frame C, provided with the bars B, (or series 
the grate G. To these lifting-wires are at 
of seventeen lipped or flanged blades in trans 
tached the connections i, (shown by dotted 
lines,) which correspond to the neck-twines, verse section,) which act on buffers or pushers 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So and these latter with the weaving-threads, j in rear thereof. 
90 
IOO 
346,877 
75 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
To the end frame, C, is fixed, by nuts and 
counter-nuts e, the end of a bar, Z, having 
horizontal portions 2 2', connected by an in 
clined portion, g. This bar receives the hori 
zontal movement imparted to the carriage, 
carrying with it a readjusting-plate, R, for 
the buffers j, said plate being fixed to the bar 
at the rear end of the latter. The inclined 
portion of the bar imparts a vertical move 
ment to two vertical slides, a, by means of 
the friction-rollers of g', journaled on the lat 
ter. A needle-guide, D, formed with holes 
arranged quincuncially like the perforations 
of a portion of the strip " of paper material, 
(shown in Fig. 4.) having for length the width 
of the machine, receives the ends of the ver 
tical needles b. This needle-guide is fixed to 
the lower ends of the slides (t, so as to move 
therewith. To the upper ends of the slides is 
secured a readjusting-plate, R., by means of 
screws f. Thus the slides, needle-guide, and 
the readjusting-plate, supported on the slides, 
all move together, the inclined portion of the 
horizontal bar working between the rollers g 
g", and imparting the vertical movements, the 
amplitude of which is one-sixteenth of an 
inch. The vertical needles b are supported 
by a fixed plate, ac, Seated on a stationary 
frame, av', resting on the frame of the machine, 
and formed with rectangular openings or slots 
quincuncially arranged, (see Figs. 2, 5, and 
6,) the vertical needles being formed with bent 
upper ends, providing hooks which engage 
the bars of the grating a, while their lower 
ends occupy the holes of the needle-guide D. 
The buffers) are mounted opposite the needles 
i. They are sustained at their rear ends by 
the fixed plate O', and their forward ends en 
gage in the eyes l' of the needles b. These 
buffers are provided at their rear ends with 
washers j', against which the readjusting-plate 
R" presses, to return the buffers to normal po 
sition after they have acted on the horizontal 
needles i. The end frame, C, is adjusted by 
set-screws f', to regulate the position of the 
bars B to proper height. 
S is a shaft provided with disks d, having 
pins or studs , which work in the holes of 
the strip 7", (formed of paper material,) and 
serving to guide the latter. The shaft is sus 
pended on the hooks c, secured to the frame 
of the machine by pins or studse', and by the 
hooks c, engaging Studs or pins e" on the hooks 
c", and secured to pins or studs e" on the nee 
dle-guide D, so that the shaft receives a ver 
tical motion with and of the same amplitude 
as the guide D. In consequence of this ver 
tical motion the imperforate portion of the 
paper acts to lift some of the needles b, while 
the perforated portion of the paper permits 
the other needles to remain at rest or in nor 
mal position. 
T is a cross-bar, which unites the hooks c'. 
A lever, L, hinged at the point l to a hook, 
c', at its inner end, and supported by a hook, 
K, and a spring, p, on the same hook, c, at 
the outer end, supports a friction-roller, g, 
- 
which bears on the pins l of a lantern-wheel, 
l, on the end of the shaft S, to hold the shaft 
stationary while the strip o' acts on the nee 
dles l. 
P is a plate perforated with holes corre 
sponding with those of the guide D, and sup 
porting the strip , which is drawn rearward 
of the machine by the pins or studs'. The 
strip is held on the pins or studs by a latch or 
plate, t, extending from the guide D, to which 
it is secured. 
The shaft S is moved by a bent bar, Z, se 
cured to the grate G, and bearing on a fric 
tion-roller, g, turning in the arm in of a bell 
crank lever, M, connected to clicksh and h' in 
the usual manner. 
q q are jointed bars acted upon by a spring, 
u, for changing the feeding of the strip. The 
clicks h h' engage the pins l of the lantern 
wheel to shift the strip. 
The machine is operated as follows: The 
cord or strap O on the pulley O' being pulled 
down, turns the latter and the pulley O' and lifts 
the cord O, and the grate G, secured thereto, 
raises those lifting-wires i' whose hooked ends 
are over the plates or blades G'. The 
upward movement of the grate being contin 
ued, carries with it the vertical bar Z", whose 
inclined portion 2', working between the roll 
ers g g, moves the carriage forward. The 
forward movement of the carriage causes the 
inclined portion 2" of the horizontal bar Z. 
to slide between the rollers gg', thus lowering 
the slides a and parts secured thereto, includ 
ing the shaft S. The upward movement of 
the grate continuing still farther, the arm Z is 
caused to bear on the roller g, and, pressing 
the arm m rearward, lifts the click h, which in 
turn engages a pin on the lantern-wheel and 
causes the latter to turn a minth part of a revo 
lution. The release of the cord or strap low 
ers the grate G, producing the contrary effect 
of all the above movements, except the feed 
ing of the paper material or strip to the ma 
chine, which only takes place with the upward 
movement of the grate. In consequence of 
the lowering of the grate the carriage C re 
ceives a rearward movement, which imparts 
an upward movement to the slides a and 
to their attached parts, including the shaft S. 
In the upward movement the imperforate 
portion of the strip lifts the vertical needles 
thereover, while the needles over the perfora 
tions enter the latter, remaining stationary. 
The needles elevated raise their pushers and 
place them in a position to be struck by the 
hooked bars B of the end frame, C, when the 
carriage is moved sufficiently far rearward to 
push back the lifting-wires by pressing on the 
horizontal wires i. 
the frame in which is 
mounted the shaft S, being suspended on the 
one hand by the hooks c to the frame of the 
machine, and on the other hand connected to 
the guide-bar D by hooks c', moves with the 
slidesa and guide-bar. The space existing be. 
tween the guide-bar and the plate Premains the 
same as they move together. Each vertical 
OO 
Ios 
IO 
If 5 
13O 
 
346,877 
3 
means for operating the vertical needle-guide, 
and means for presenting the pattern-strip to 
the vertical needles, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the main frame with 
the vertical needles, a stationary grating se 
cured on the main frame for supporting the 
vertical needles, vertical slides a, provided 
with a needle-guide, D, and readjusting-plate 
R, and means for operating the slides, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of the vertical needles, 
the vertical slides (, provided with vertical 
needle - guide D, and readjusting - plate R, 
means for operating the slides, and means for 
supporting the vertical needles beneath the 
plate, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the vertical needles, 
a stationary grating, ac, for supporting the ver 
tical needles, formed with rectangular slots 
arranged quincuncially, vertical slides (t, pro 
vided with needle-guide D, formed with holes 
arranged quincuncially, means for raising and 
lowering said slides, and devices, substantially 
as described, connected with said slides for 
presenting a pattern-sheet to the vertical nee 
des. 
J. VERDOL, 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. M. HoOPER, 
EUG. BARBE. 
35 
55 
needle b raised falls again by its own weight, 
aided by a part of the weight of the pusher j 
engaged in its eye; but if, by any cause what 
ever, as a resistance arising from friction, one 
of these needles should not fall and resume its 
normal position, it is nevertheless forcibly re 
placed in its first position by the readjusting 
plate R, which prevents it remaining idle. 
There results from the provision of this read 
Io justing-plate Ran absolute certainty in the 
regulation of the work of the needles, and 
consequently the obtainment of a perfectly 
manufactured product. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
:5 following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
1. The combination of a main frame sup 
porting the whole mechanism with a carriage 
mounted thereon comprisingside plates, an end 
2O frame having lipped bars, a readjusting-plate 
for the horizontal needles or wires, and a read 
justing-plate for the pushers, the horizontal 
needles or wires, perforated plates secured to 
the main frame for supporting the horizontal 
25 needles or wires, the pushers, a perforated 
plate for supporting the rear ends of the push 
ers, means for operating the carriage, the ver 
tical needles, a stationary grating secured to 
the main frame for supporting the vertical 
3o needles, a vertically - sliding needle - guide, 
s: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US346977.txt	(No Model.) 
H.H. BARNARD. 
BUTTON HOLE CUTTER, 
No. 346,977. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1886. 
 
77 
Go 
O 
A4. 6 
O 
22- is 
it. --O 
- Y15 
7%.7 
WTNESSES : 
(2.2. Z - 
IN VENT or : 
2%z 47 3.a. 
. 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY H. BARNARD, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE BAR 
NARD ATTACHMENT COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BUTTON. HOLE CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 346,977, dated August 10, 1886. 
Application filed lebruary 10, 1886. Serial No. 191,394. No model.) 
To all whom it invazy concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY H. BARNARD, 
of Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in 
the State of New York, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Button-Hole Cut 
ters, of which the following, taken in connec 
tion with the accompanying drawings, is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to that class of but 
ton-hole cutters which punch an eye at the 
end of a slit. 
Heretofore in button-hole-cutting machines 
the aforesaid cutters have been attached to 
their usual operating-levers at fixed points, 
and in Such a manner as to preclude adjust 
ment of the position of the cutters in relation 
to their co-operating devices when necessary. 
It is the object of this invention to obviate 
the aforesaid defects; and to that end my in 
vention consists in the improved construc 
tion and combination of parts hereinafter de 
scribed, and specifically set forth in the claims. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a front 
elevation of a button-hole-cutting machine em 
bodying my improvements. Fig. 2 is a top 
plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is an end view 
of the upper lever of said machine. Fig. 4 is 
a detached view of the supplemental block, 
which is carried on the aforesaid lever. Fig. 
5 is an end view of the lower lever, which car 
ries the cutter. Fig. 6 is a detached view of 
the cutter, and Fig. 7 is a top plan view of the 
supporting-block of the cutter. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A. A represent, respectively, the lower and 
upper levers of an ordinary button-hole-cut 
ting machine, said levers being arranged par 
allel, one directly over the other, and hinged 
at one end, and made to approach and recede 
from each other at their free ends by a cam 
lever, C, pivoted on the upper lever, and en 
gaging with a notch in the upper end of an 
arm, D, projecting from the lower lever, as 
represented in Fig. 1 of the drawings. 
On top of the free end of the lower lever, A, 
is mounted the cutter-supporting block B, ha, 7. 
ing guide-ribs b b, bearing against opposite 
sides of the lever, and thus sustaining said 
bloek laterally in its position. By means of 
a screw, c, passing through a longitudinal slot 
in the lever, and inserted from the under side 
thereof and engaging a screw-threaded socket 
in the block B, the latter is secured to the le. 
ver adjustably longitudinally thereon, so as 
to allow said block to be shifted to properly 
center the cutter to the cutter-passage through 
the table T under the co-operating block fon 
the upper lever. 
The button-hole cutter I form of two sepa 
rate and distinct parts, one of which consists 
of a round tubular punch, m, which has its 
base screw-threaded, and is screwed thereby 
into a corresponding screw-threaded vertical 
socket, o, near one end of the block B, and 
can be unscrewed therefrom when required 
for repairs or renewal. The other part of the 
cutter consists of a straight knife, n, which is 
seated in a groove, o', in the top of the block 
B, and abuts at one end against the side of the 
punch n, as represented in Fig. 5 of the draw. 
ings. The knife n is detachably secured in its 
seat by set-screws ll, inserted through theside 
of the block Band pressing against the side of 
the knife. 
By forming the button-hole cutter of the 
punch on Separate from the knife in, and con 
necting said parts to one and the same support 
ing-block B, and making them detachable there 
from independently of each other, in the man 
ner hereinbefore described, said cutter has a 
firm support when in its operative position, 
and if either part of the cutter becomes in 
paired it can be readily removed from its sup 
port for repairs or renewal without disturbing 
the other part, and when either of said parts 
is detached it can be ground or sharpened ac 
curately, conveniently, and expeditiously. 
If desired, the straight knife in can be formed 
with cutting-edges along two or more of its 
sides, so that by turning the knife within its 
plane said cutting-edges can be successively 
brought into use as the previously-used edges 
become worn. 
d represents a block which is adjustably se 
cured to the under side of the upper lever, A', 
in a manner similar to the attachment of the 
cutter-supporting block B, hereinbefore de 
scribed-i. e., the said block d reaches across 
the lever A', and is provided at opposite ends 
55 
60 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOC 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SQ 
2 
346,977 
Io upper end with a head, by which it bears on the shown. 
15 cutter carried on the lower lever, A. 
1. In combination with the cutter and the 35 
. 
with upward-projecting flangesh h, which abut 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
against opposite sides of the lever, and thus as new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
prevent said block from shifting laterally on is- 
said lever. The lever is provided with a lon- 
5 gitudinal slot, a, as shown in Fig. 2 of the lever A', the block d, provided with the rab 
drawings, and through this slot passes the bet e, the supplemental block f, seated in said 
screw i, which is inserted from the top of the rabbet, and the clamping-plate 9, applied re 
lever and enters a screw-threaded socket in movably to the side of the block d and engag 
the block d, the screw being provided on its ing the block.f, substantially as described and go 
top of the lever, and is thus enabled to draw 
2. In combination with the lever A and the 
the block dtightly against the lever. The cutter adjustably secured on said lever, the 
slot a allows the block d to be shifted, so as to lever A, provided with the longitudinal slot 
bring it into proper position in relation to the a, the block d, provided with guide-flanges h 45 
h, and adjustably connected to the lever A 
The under side of the block d is formed with by the attaching-screw i, passing through the 
a rabbet, e, in which is seated the supple- slot a, and the supplemental block f, attached 
mental block f, which applies the requisite to the block d, all constructed and combined 
pressure to that portion of the cloth which is substantially in the manner specified and 5o 
block being therefore usually made either of 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
copper or brass, so as to obviate injury to the my name and affixed my seal, in the presence 
cutting-edge of the cutter after it has pene- of two attesting witnesses, at Syracuse, in the 
trated the cloth. The supplemental block f county of Onondaga, in the State of New York, 55 
plate, g, which is clamped on the side of the 
block d and presses against the side of the 
supplemental block.f. Said plate is also pro 
vided with upward projectionsh h, which abut 
3o against opposite sides of the lever A', so as to 
sustain the plate laterally on the lever. 
25 is detachably secured in the rabbet e by a this 5th day of February, 1886. 
2c to be cut by the button-hole cutter in m, said shown. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. DUELL, 
FREDERICK H. GIBBS. 
HENRY H. BARNARD. L. s. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347077.txt	(No Model.) 
H. K. WEALAND 
BAG. HOLDER. 
No. 347,077. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1886. . 
III. 
HIT THIS 
- 
 
 
INVENTOR 
%ry 42. 16.4.4 
ATTORNEY 
- 
& - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY K. WEALAND, OF DURLACH, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO WILLIAM 
ROMIG, OF LINCOLN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
BAG-HolDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 347,077, dated August lo, 1886. 
Application filed March 31, 1886. Serial No. 197,287. (No model.) 
m 
y 
- 
specification. 
15 in which 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY K. WEALAND, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Dur. 
lach, in the county of Lancaster, State of Penn 
5 Sylvania, have invented certain Improvements 
in Bag-Holders, of which the following is a 
My invention relates to improvements in 
devices for holding bags upright while being 
Io filled; and it consists in the construction and 
combination of the various parts, as herein 
after fully described and claimed, and as 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, and 
Figure I is a side view of my bag-holder 
mounted upon a wheeled platform. Fig. II 
is a side view, in full and dotted lines, of the 
different positions of the parts which hold 
2O the bag. Fig. III is a front view of the slot 
ted post and the adjusting device, and Fig. 
IV is a vertical section of the same parts on 
the line acac of Fig. III. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
25 out the several views. 
A platform, A, having two fixed rollers, B, 
attached to its rear, and one, C, pivoted to 
it in front, in order that it may be moved 
from place to place, and its direction while so 
3O moved readily changed, supports a vertical 
slotted post, D, at the center of its front end. 
The part of the device which serves to hold 
the bag up is composed of a supporting-arm, 
F, divided into sections ff, jointed or hinged 
35 together at Z. A ring or short cylinder, E, 
is rigidly attached to the outer end of the 
section f of the arm F. A second ring, G, 
adapted to fit into the first and secure the 
end of a bag therein, is hinged to the upper 
4o edge of the arm-section fat g', near and in 
rear of the joint Z., by means of a short con 
necting-rod, g. The front section, f', of the 
arm F has a screw-thread cut on the front 
end, and passes through the vertical slot d 
45 in the post D, and through and is fixed in the 
slide H, which embraces the rear face of the 
post. It also passes through a bearing-plate, 
K, on the front side of the post, having guides 
k, that engage the inner sides of the slot in 
5c said post, and is secured by the thumb-nut M. 
 
55 
55 
75 
By loosening the thumb-nut the height of 
the holder can be readily adjusted to conform 
to the various lengths of the bags to be filled, 
while the use of the slide Hand plate K serves 
to preserve the arm F in a horizontal position 
whenacted upon by the weight of a bag upon 
its rear end. The joint Z, which connects the 
two sections of the arm F, permits the Whole 
bag-holding device to be raised without alter 
ing the position of the said rod in the slot in 
the post, removing all obstructions to the tying 
up of the mouth of the bag. 
In using my bag-holder the ring G is raised, 
the upper end of the bag Y is passed through 
the ring E and turned or looped over its top, 
and the ring G is then closed back into its 
original position, thus preventing the end of 
the bag from being drawn from its place in 
the lower ring. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a bag-holder, with 
the slotted post D, of the slide H, embracing 
one of the slotted faces of the post, the bear 
ing-plate K on the opposite side of said post, 
having guides k, that engage the inner sides 
of said slot, the screw-threaded arm F, hav 
ing a bag-supporter attached thereto, and the 
thumb-nut M, substantially as and for the pur 
2. In a bag-holder, the combination, with a 
slotted post, of a sectional jointed support 
ing-arm adjustable vertically in the said slot 
and having a screw-thread cut on its front 
end, a nut, means for holding the said arm in 
a horizontal position in the slot of the post, a 
ring for supporting the end of a bag, rigidly 
attached to the end of the rear section of the 
arm, and a ring for securing the end of a bag 
in said supporting-ring, having a short rod 
hinged to the rear section of the arm, as and 
for the purpose herein specified. 
pose specified. 
a . 
" 
. 
H. K. WEALAND. 
Witnesses: 
W. J. FoRDNEY, 
WM. R. GERHART. 
go 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347177.txt	(No Model.) 
I. W. HEYSINGER, 
HAIR, CRITIMPER, 
No. 347, 177, 
M 
Patented Aug., 10, 1886, 
 
 
 
 
 
KAYNAYANAYURVAS 
Q2SYYNSSYN 
NAYANANANANANANAYO 
KZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
 
  
 
WITNESSES; 
 
INVENTOR 
Vase ?W. s egy 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC W. HEYSINGER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
HAIR-CRIMPER. 
SPECIFICAZION forming part of Tuetters Patent No. 347, 177, dated August ILO, 1886. 
Application filed  pril 19, 1886. Serial No. 199.395. (No model.) 
W 
To all avhom, it may concernu. 
Be it known that I, ISAAC W. HEYSINGER, 
of Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvement in Hair 
Crimpers, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the drawings accompanying and forming apart 
of this specification, in which- 
Figure I shows in cross-section and perspec 
tive a hair-crimper enabodying my invention 
in one of the subordinate fornus in which it is 
applicable. Fig. 2 is a like view of one of my 
crimpers, showing the parallel strips of metal 
or wires, between which I run a row of stitches, 
and having the stiffening re-enforce, as here 
inafter described. : Fig. 3 is a cross-section of 
one of my crimpers, which differs from Fig. 2 
im showing a two-ply strip of re-enforce instead 
of one folded over. Fig. 4 shows a crimper 
using only a single metal strip of less width 
than the body of the crimper, which has a 
body of tough paper or fiber or like material 
without an outside covering, and in which the 
row of stitches passes alongside the metal strip 
and through the body a foresaid. Fig. 5 shows 
a similar crimper to Fig. 3, except that the 
re-enforce of paper or fiber lies between the two 
parallel wires or metal strips, and is protected 
by a covering of fabric, which I show cemented 
down at its overlap, the constituent i elements 
of the crimper being all cemented together as 
made, as shown in the Letters Patent No. 
218,300, dated August 5, 1879; or the cover 
alone may be cemented down at its fold or 
overlap. 
Fig. 6 shows a crimper similar to 
that shown in Fig. 4, except that two parallel 
wires are used and the stitching is done be 
tweem, no cover of fabric being used. Fig. 7 
shows a similar crimper in which the re-en 
force is made by a wrapping of tow, cotton, 
soft paper, or i fabric, the row of 'stitches be 
tween the wires holding the cover and all the 
parts in place. This form is particularly use 
ful for large rolls or curlers. Fig. 8 shows a 
crimper havinga single metallic strip in which 
the cover and re-enforce of paper are both 
folded around the core together and seamed 
down by the row of stitches; and Fig. 9 is a 
longitudinal section through the middle line of 
a length of crimper-stuff marked at various 
points where it is to be cut apart to form dif. 
ferent crimpers, and shows the row of stitches, 
the cover of fabric, the re-enforce of paper, 
felt, vulcanite, cloth, or other material, and the 
metallic strip. 
The lettering in all the figures is uniform. 
My present invention is designed to be an 
improvement upon that secured to me by Let 
ters Patent No. 309, S54, granted December 30, 
1884, the advantages of my present invention 
being greater cheapness, ease of stitching, and 
capacity for greater bulk than in the inven 
tion covered by my former Letters Patent 
a foresaid. 
While the different figures show a number 
of subordinate forms differing somewhat in de 
tail, the essential features of my invention, in 
whole or part, will be found to be common to 
all. My invention relates to the construction 
of a hair-crimper intended to hold strands of 
hair, when twisted around the same, from um 
rolling, by making the crimper of an elon 
gated soft-metal non-elastic body, so that the 
ends thereof may be bent around the strand of 
hair and securely hold the same, being adapt 
ed for use repeatedly, according to the ability 
of the material to stand repeated flexion with 
out breaking. 
In my Letters Patent a foresaid I constructed 
my crimper by folding around a soft-metal 
cor?-strip a cover of fabric which was secured 
to the said core-strip by a seam running along 
the said crimper, and uniting the Said cover 
of fabric to the said core of metal. I usually 
formed my seam by a l'ow of stitches which 
passed through the cover of fabric, and also 
through the metal core-strip, thus sewing both 
together from end to end. The crimper there 
in shown and described is an excellent on?, 
and when made of light metal is easily sewed 
through, especially if the metal be lead, which 
is what I usually employ; but in larger sizes 
the weight of the lead and its cost become an 
objection, and the sewing or seaming is done 
with more difficulty. I have therefore devised 
the present improvement upon the said in 
vention, which consists, essentially, in the 
employment of a pair of parallel Wires lying, 
perhaps, an eighth or three-sixteenths of an 
inch apart, which Said wires may be of soft 
iron, brass, or other ductile metal, and con 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
I 5 
25 
35 
45 
 
347, 177 
necting them together with a re-enforce or sup- | 
port of paper, vulcanizedlfiber, felt, tow, cotton, 
soft rubber, or any like substance, so as to pre 
vent folding in ward along the seam, and insure 
tlhe requisite form and resistance of the body of 
the crimper, and covering this compound core 
with a layer of fabric seamed down longitudi 
nally along the crimper, either by a row of 
stitches, which is what I prefer to use, or in 
certain cases by a cemented edge, which said 
seam may run along the middle line of the 
crimper, or may extend in a spiral around tilhe 
same, as set fortilh in my former Letters Pat 
ent a foresaid. When I cement my covering 
to tlhe core, I make no clainn to this construc 
tion, broadly, as the same is covered by the 
Letters IPatent No. 21S, 300, dated August 5, 
1S79, but limit myself to the specific construc 
tion slhown and described. 
Imstead of using a double wire, or two par 
allel wires, I sometinnes use only a single wire, 
which I prefer to place to the right or left of 
the middle line, and then run my row of 
stitches alongside the same and througlh the 
re- en force. 
I sometimes also do not use a 
covering of fabric, but make my re-enforce of 
tough board properly prepared, such as may 
lbe obtained in tlie 1nmarket, of leatlherette, kid, 
or other skin, or like material of various kinds, 
stretch my parallel wires along the strips of 
tlhe same, w lich I fold over and secure by a 
line of stitches down the mididle, or an equiv 
alent seam of any other kind, though I prefer 
to use the sewed seam as being better, meater, 
more flexible, and stronger in use. The punc 
tures of the needle and the pliability of the 
thread assist in making the crimper more 
flexible, while tlhe wires furnish the stiffiness 
and ductility required to hold the hair. 
WVilhen I make up large rolls for curlers or 
crimpers, I sometimes wrap them around the 
two parallel wires with a re-enforce of pulpy 
or so?ti materialsuch as tow, soft paper, &c.  
and run my row of stitches between the said 
wires, to secure all together. 
I am aware that crimpers have been made 
by covering a so?t-metal wyire or strip with 
hemp and applying to the same a covering of 
fabric. I am also al ware that Sheets of leadl 
and strips of lead and paper have been used, 
folded together, for doing up the lhair, from 
time immemorial, and that artificial flower 
stems, bonnet and brace wire, woven-wire 
braids used by wig- makers, electrically-insu 
lated wires for Rulminnkor?' coils or transmis 
sion of electricity, and multitudles of other an 
allogous constructions consisting of strips of 
paper or like material and an interposed 
wire, tlhe whole covered by fabric, have been 
in use for many years. I am also aware that 
bonnet-wires have been wrapped with fabric 
in a spiral, and that in certain English pat 
ents and elsewhere electric wires have been 
wrapped witlu an insulating fabric cemented 
fold to fold in a spiral form; but I make no 
claim, broadly, to any of the above features, 
but limit myself to tlhe specific features here 
in shown and described. 
Referring to the drawings, A. is the covering 
of my crimper, which I prefer to make of a 
long strip of muslin or other fabric widle 
enough to inclose the crimper - body, on all 
sides, and have an overlap or seam, through 
which I usually run a row of stitches on a 
sewing-machine, as is fully set fortill in niny 
Letters Patent of December 30, 1 SS4, afore 
Said. 
The body of my crimper consists of a strip 
of metal soft and ductile enough to bend freely 
without breaking, but firm enough to lhold se 
curely when the end is folded over andi pinched 
down upon a strand of lair. Around this 
metallic strip, as shown in Fig. 1, where the 
edges come together fiush on one side, is 
wrapped a re-enforcing strip of paper' or other 
material, such as has been hereinbefore men - 
tioned in this connection. The row of Stitches 
ID will pass through the upper layer and over 
lap" of the cover A, the re-enforce C, the metal 
core-strip B, and the lower layers of re-enforce 
and cover below, thus lholding all together from 
end to end. It is obvious that the re-en force 
C enables a much larger bodied crimper to be 
made tlhan could be done by stitching through 
a heavy metal body, I3, which would tilhus be 
come, by its size, too rigid to be folded over 
readily, and would be heavy in use and costly 
to make. By varying the thickness of the 
re - en force crimpers swollen in the middle  
may be readily produced, as I do in my Let 
ters Patent hereinbefore mentionedl, by vary 
ing the size of the lead core. 
In Fig. 2 the folded re-en force, instead of 
passing entirely around the core-strip, has a 
sectional form something like a letter U, lying 
sidewise, and in the bifurcation are two strips 
of wire, which for cheapness may be iron wire, 
such as bonnet- wire, either covered or plain, 
as the needle does not penetrate the core-strip, 
but passes between the two parallel wires of 
which it is composed, while the re- en force C 
keeps the form and bulk intact. To form this 
crimper in a sewing-machine no detailed de 
scription will be necessary. A guide, like a 
hemmer, turns the outer covering, A, around 
the core B. C. The folded re- en force is made by 
feeding the paper strip into a hemmer within 
the one for the cover A, and the wires are 
guided, as in cording cloth, by a two-eyed 
cord-guide, so that all three elements are de 
livered under the needle in the form shown in 
Fig. 2. The feed, take up, and other adjuncts 
are fully described in my Letters latent afore 
said, dated December 30, 1S84, No. 309, S54, 
and I use the sanne devices in this invention. 
In Fig. 3 I show the same arrangement as 
in Fig. 2, except that the re- en force, instead 
of being folded over at the edge, as at C, 
Fig. 2, consists of two Separate strips, C C, 
between the outer edges of which lie the par 
allel wires B B, the whole inclosed by the 
strip of fabric A, stitched down between the 
O 
I 5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
8 5 
(OC) 
I o5 
I O 
I 2O 
I 25 
347, 177 
5 
I O 
I 5 
N 
parallel wires B and B' by the stitched e seam 
D. The fabric is fed to the machine almost 
precisely as in Fig. 2, except that the two 
eyed corder has a slot or space above and be 
low, so that the two strips and the two wires 
all go under the needle through the same 
guide, while the strip of fabric is turned over 
the outside. 
In Fig. 4 I show but a single wire, B, but I 
do not stitch through this wire, as shown in 
Fig. 1. The wire B lies alongside the row of 
stitches, and the space on the opposite side is 
filled by the surplus C' of the re-enforce C, 
which is left wide enough to turn down and 
keep the crimper in form. 
 
In Fig. 4 I do not show a covering of fabric, 
as the re-enforce may be made of a felted ilma 
terial or of tough pap?r, which, when surfaced 
or indented, may be made to look .very well 
and render excellent service at less cost than 
were an outer covering of fabric added. The 
stitched seann D, Fig. 4, thus passes through 
the overlap and upper fold of C, then along 
side the wire B and through the under side 
of C. 
In Fig. 5 Ishow the parallel wires BB' sep 
arated by some interval, which interval I fill 
with a long strip of paper or other material 
having a thickness equal to that of the wires, 
so that a triple core is made consisting of two 
side strips of metal and a middle one of tough 
paper, C. Around the whole is tightly folded 
the covering-strip of fabric A, which is over 
lapped and seamed along its upper side. This 
seam in Fig. 5 I show as being cemented 
down to the upper fold of fabric, so as to make 
a firm and a flexible joint. The cement may be 
ordinary fish -glue or any other cement de 
sired, but I prefer to use a cement which will 
resist the action of innoisture. I therefore or 
dinarily employ either an elastic cement of 
gutta-percha made with a proper solvent or of 
india-rubber; or I use a cement of fish-glue and 
bichromate of potash applied from a dark box, 
which becomes insoluble when exposed to the 
light. 
Fig. 6 I show a stitched seam, D, a double 
wire, B B', and a re-enforce properly surfaced 
so as to show handsomely, and of properly 
prepared material, but without a covering of 
fabric. 
Fig. 7 shows the covering of fabric A and 
the parallel wires B B', while Cis a layer of 
bulky and soft material rolled around the 
wires or otherwise applied so as to secure a 
large bulk. The row of stitches D is not made 
with a hard enough tension to draw the sides 
together. This form I use for making curlers 
or round and large bodied braiders for the hair. 
Fig. 8 is a simple modification of Fig. 1, in 
9 
 
which - the covering of fabric A and non-me 
tallic re-enforce C are laid upon each other, 
and both wrapped around the core, which may 
be a single strand of wire or of two parallel 
wires, and then seamed down by the row of 65 
Stitches D. 
It will be seen that by the use of ny present 
invention such luair-crimpers as I describe 
may be made at a very low cost and in great 
variety, and that they are well adapted to the 7o 
purposes for which they are intended, and may 
be used for other analogous purposes for which 
they are suitable. 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 75 
S- 
1. A hair-crimper consisting of the parallel 
soft- metal core-strips B B', the re-enforce C, to 
give form and body thereto, the covering-strip 
of fabric A, and the stitched seam D, the whole 8o 
constructed substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
2. In a hair-crimper, the parallel wires or 
Strips of soft metal, B B'', the interposed re-en 
force of non-metallic material, C, and the cov 
ering-strip of fabric, A, having overlaid seam E, 
cemented or stitched to secure the sides there 
of together, substantially as described. 
3. As an article of manufacture, a hair 
crimper consisting of an elongated piece of 9O 
non-elastic material having one or more par 
allel wires of soft metal and a covering or re 
enforce of non-metallic material, said covering 
and said wire or wires being held together by 
a, stitched seam, the stitches of which pass 95 
alongside the said wire or wires and through 
the said re-enforce, said re-enforce being suffi 
ciently rigid to prevent the sides of the crimper 
from folding over when in use along the said 
stitched seam, substantially as described. 
4. A length of crimper stuff consisting of 
two parallel soft-metal wires supported by a 
non-metallic re-enforce and covered by a strip 
of fabric folded over, and having an overlap 
ping seam secured to the opposite edge of the 
said strip of fabric from end to end, so that 
the said length of crimper stuff may be cutinto 
suitable lengths for hair-crimpers without un 
rolling or fraying, substantially as described. 
the wire or wires B B', or their equivalent, and 
the re-enforce C, in combination with the cov 
ering-strip of fabric folded over the said body, 
and having the edges thereof joined by a seam 
or cement unaffected by the moisture of wet II 5 
strands of hair, substantially as described. 
ISAAC W. EHEYSINGER. 
5. In a hair-crimper, the body consisting of IIo 
IOO 
Witnesses: 
J. LOREN HEYSINGER, 
M. B. FENNINGER. 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347277.txt	(No Model.) 
P. PRICE & J. EIB. 
DEVICE FOR CONNECTING PIPE TO BORE HOLES FOR ARTESIAN WELLs, 
Patented Aug. 10, 1886. 
No. 347,277. 
a "l 
Z. 
Ca 
H a 
4. 
C 
... 
 
 
 
ST NW 
i Y 
7 
AN 
a 4 
C 
- NH|| N2 
-- 
- 
NZN |--|--|-- N N V 
N.N. 
EN 
V N 
N 
&\ 
|| || 
N 
N 
y 
. i 
B 
IWWEWTORS 
(akes (tic V 
John Seiy, 
4,462.4% 
" 
. 
- 
- - - 
- 
by 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PARKER PRICE AND JOHN LEIB, OF SANDY RUN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DEVICE FOR CONNECTING PIPE TO BORE-HOLES FOR ARTESIAN WELLS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 347,277, dated August 10, 1886. 
Application filed May 15, 1886. 
Serial No. 2C2,341. No node.) 
?o a ZZ whon, it nagy concern. 
Be it known that we, PARKER PRICE and 
JoHN LEIB, citizens of the United States, re 
siding at Sandy Run, in the county of Luzerne 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Devices 
for Connecting Pipe to Borc-Holes for Arte 
sian Wells; and we do declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to letters or figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a side elevation. Fig. 2 is a vertical section 
Fig. 3 is a horizontai 
on line acac, Fig. 1. 
section on line yy, Fig. 2. 
Our invention relates to devices for connect. 
ing pipe to bore-holes; and it consists in the 
construction and novel combination of parts, 
as hereinafter described, and pointed out in 
the claim. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the pipe, of suitable 
length, with a movable gland, D, attached 
E designates a collar, which is either shrunk 
or screwed onto the end of the pipe A, and 
this collar E is of the same diameter as the 
bore-hole H, so that the packing F may be 
held in place when forced down by the gland D. 
thereto. 
. . 
w 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
The clamp C is made in two halves, which 
are bolted tight to the pipe A by bolts a a. 
Four set-screws, bb b b, are employed to force 
the gland D down on the packing F, which 
closes the bore-hole Haround the pipe A and 
prevents any leakage. 
The object of this device is to save the ex 
pense of tubing the bore-hole, and may be 
made of any size, from one inclh to six feet in 
diameter, to suit the size of the bore-hole; and 
it prevents water or anything else from either 
entering the hole at the top or coming out of 
the hole from the bottom, except through the 
pipe A itself. It is intended that nothing 
whatever shall pass the packing F. 
Having described this invention, what we 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The combination, with the pipe, of the 
movable gland, the collar shrunk or screwed 
on the end of the pipe, the sectional clamp 
secured to the pipe by bolts, the four headed 
set - screws in the sectional clamp, and the 
packing around the pipe below the movable 
gland, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
- 
PARKER PRICE. 
JOHN LEB. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE COOK, 
CHAS. T. TOMBLER. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347377.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 347,377, 
W. J. PRINGLE. 
WELT, DRILLING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 17, 1886. 
. . 
 
- local (3. Z. 
7 1.7 
7/ 
98)ibvesses 
8woovilot 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 347,377, 
W. J. PRINGLE. 
WELL, DRILLING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
  
f 
a) CY, 
7. 
SS S 
2N 
12N 
 
 
2 
- 
- 3vowbot 
9 ), 2-lee 
a 
&fex &lf fot11 ct 
98). Evlossey 
C763,4- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM JOHN PRINGLE, OF BALLTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WELL-DRILLING MACHINE. 
. SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 347,377, dated August 17, 1886. 
Application filed May 15, 1886. Serial No. 202,240. 
(No model.) 
V. 
7 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, WILLIAM JOHN PRINGLE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Ball 
town, in the county of Forest and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Well-Drilling Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
machines for drilling Artesian and oil wells; 
and it consists in the peculiar construction and 
combination of devices that will be more fully 
set forth hereinafter, and particularly pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
a portion of a well-drilling machine provided 
with my improvements. Fig. 2 is an end 
view. Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view of 
the same on line y y of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a ver 
tical longitudinal sectional view on line acac of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a detail view. 
A represents the sills of a drilling-machine, 
and B represents vertical standards, which are 
secured to the frame of the machine, and have 
bearing-blocks C at their upper ends, in which 
is journaled the usual shaft, D, having the 
usual friction-wheel, E, for actuating the sand 
pump reel. 
F represents a vertical standard having its 
lower end dovetailed to a dovetailed groove, 
(t, made in one of the sills, and G represents a 
key or wedge, which is inserted between one 
side of the groove a and the depending dove 
tailed foot of the standard F, so as to secure 
the said standard firmly to the sill A. 
h represents a shoe, which is provided with 
longitudinal slots I in its lower sides, and is 
secured to one of thesills A opposite the stand 
ard F by means of bolts K, which pass down 
through the slots I and enter the sill. The 
shoe is thus made longitudinally adjustable on 
its sill, as will be very readily understood. 
L represents a lever-arm or standard, the 
lower end of which is pivoted between up 
wardly-extending ears l, with which the shoe 
is provided. From the inner side of the said 
pivoted lever or standard project horizontal set forth, substantially as described. 
brackets l, having vertical openings t at their 
inner ends. 
which are reduced to form spindles, and are 
journaled in the openings l of the brackets l. 
In the center of the plate Mis made a rectan 
gular opening, n, in which is fitted a block, 
N, the inner side of which is provided with 
projecting lugs n, that bear against the sides of 
the openings in. The said opening is of a suffi 
cient size to permit the block N to freely move 
therein. 
O represents the shaft of the sand-pump 
reel, one end of which is journaled in an open 
ing made in the upper end of the standard F, 
and the opposite extremity of the said shaft is 
journaled in the block N. The sand-pump 
reel shaft has the usual friction-pulley, P, to 
bear against the friction-wheel E when the le 
ver L is moved rearwardly, so as to impart 
the motion of the said friction wheel E to the 
sand-pump reel in the usual way. The Sand 
pump reel is also provided with the usual 
brake-pulley, R, for stopping the motion of the 
reel. 
By pivoting the plate M to the inner side 
of the lever L, and locating the block N in an 
opening made in the said plate, and journal 
ing one end of the sand-pump-reel shaft in the 
said block N, it will be readily understood 
that a universal joint is formed between the 
said pump-reel shaft, and the lever L, whereby 
the said lever may be moved to shift the Sand 
pump reel to any desired angle without un 
8 
shipping the said reel from the said level'. 
The shoe H is made movable, as before de 
scribed, in order to permit the friction-pulley 
P to be adjusted, and thereby caused to bear 
against the friction-wheel E when the lever L. 
S 
is in a vertical position. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination of the pivoted lever L, 
having the bracket l, the vertical plate M, 
9 
journaled in the said bracket and having the 
opening m, the block N, secured in the Said 
opening and free to turn therein, and the Sand 
pump reel having one end journaled in the 
said block, substantially as described. 
9 
2. The combination of the pivoted lever L, 
and the sand-pump reel, and the universal 
joint connecting one end of the said sand-pump 
reel to the said pivoted lever, for the purpose 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
M. represents a vertical plate, the ends of presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES CABLE, 
CHAs. DINSMOOR. 
WILLIAM JOHN PRINGLE. 
O 
T 5 
3C) 
s 
v, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347477.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
No. 347,477, 
A. J. EDDY. 
MEAT CUTTER, 
Batented Aug. 17, 1886. 
 
 
|-S EEZ EZ. 
 
 
W777 agazg, 
(2: 2/672. 
Se 
C-4% 
/7 2.ya/, 
ere 
N. PeteRS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ALFONZO J. EDDY, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
RUSSELL & ERWIN MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE). 
MEAT CUTTER. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 347,477, dated August 17, 1886. 
Application filed December 28, 1885. Serial No. 186,836. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALFONZO J. EDDY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Britain, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Meat-Cutters, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
meat-cutters of the class which have a set of 
rotary cutters and stationary shear-blocks; and 
the object of my improvement is to increase 
the efficiency of the machine. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of my meat-cutter with the case 
opened. Fig. 2 is a transverse section of the 
same with the case closed, the plane of section 
being indicated by the line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
is a vertical section on line y y, Fig. 1 of a 
part of my cutter-viz., a portion of the case 
and shear-blocks. Fig. 4 is a like view of my 
cutter, partly in elevation, the plane of section 
being indicated by the line & 2, Fig. 1; and 
Fig. 5 is a detached side elevation of the shear 
blocks with part of them turned on their con 
necting-rod. 
A designates the lower part of the case, and 
B the upper part. The shaft C has a spiral 
flange or feeding-screw, a, at one end and a 
gang of cutters at its other end. The shaft at 
the cutter end is octagonal, and the hole in the 
oblong cutters b is of a corresponding form, so 
that as said cutters are slipped on the shaft, 
with washers between them, they can be ar 
ranged to stand with the points of one cutter 
one-eighth of a revolution in advance of the 
adjoining cutter, and so on throughout the 
series. A shaft having a feeding-screw at one 
end and a gang of spirally-arranged cutters at 
the other end is old in meat-cutters and not of 
my invention. The case is provided with a 
hopper, D, and on its inside with inclined ribs 
over that portion of the length of the case which 
is occupied by the feeding-screw a. The cut 
ters act against a gang of shear-blocks, c, set 
in the lower part, A, of the case within a socket, 
d, the bottom of which socket slants toward 
the delivery end of the case. These shear 
blocks are connected by a rod, g, Figs. 4 and 
5, which extends through their shanks. The 
general form of the shear blocks is best seen 
in Fig. 2. Their bottom edge is fitted to and 
rests upon the bottom of the socket d and inner 
wall of the case. At their upper inner cor 
ners they are fitted closely up against the 
periphery of the washers between the cutters 
on the shaft, as shown, so that the meat cannot 
pass around with the cutters. 
The shanks of 
the shear-blocks are thicker than their bodies, 
so as to form spaces between the shear-blocks 
for the cutters to pass through. The shear 
blocks may be made of uniform thickness 
throughout and properly spaced on the rod 
gby suitable filling. The knives shear against 
that side of the shear-blocks which faces the 
feeding-screw, with the exception of the last 
cutter, which shears against the end of the 
case at the spouth. The tops of the shear 
blocks, in so far as some features of my inven 
tionis concerned, may be all of the same height, 
but the best construction, according to my pres 
ent belief, is to make the cutting-edge of the 
first block the highest and slightly concave, 
as shown in Fig. 2, the cutting-edge of the 
next block more concave and a little lower, so 
that the series or gang of blocks at the middle 
portion of their cutting-edges presents a sur 75 
face which gradually slants toward the de 
livery-spout h, as shown in Figs. 3 and 5. 
With shear-blocks. thus formed and held on 
the rod g they only require to be slipped into 
place within the socket and case, and can 
readily be removed for cleaning when desired. 
Turning them into different positions on the 
rod will make nearly the entire surface of said 
blocks accessible for cleaning. 
By making the series of shear-blocks so as 
to present a surface which gradually slants to 
ward the delivery-spout, as described, the 
spout used in connection therewith can be cast 
in halves on the two parts of the case, while 
at the same time the shear-blocks are believed 
to be set in the most effective position. Such 
construction also facilitates the delivery of the 
meat from the machine. 
A meat-cutter constructed as herein de 
scribed is very rapid and efficient in its action. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a meat-cutter, the combination of a 
95 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
2 
347,477 
series of revolving knives with a correspond 
ing series of removable shear-blocks seated in 
the case, the middle portion of the cutting 
edge of the successive shear-blocks being grad 
ually lessened in height as they approach the 
discharge-spout, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the gang of rotary 
cutters mounted on a shaft and separated by 
washers, and the gang of shear-blocks which 
extend from one side of the case to the periph 
ery of the washers between the cutters, and 
having their bottom edges resting upon the 
bottom of the socket d and inner wall of the 
case, while their upper inner corners are fitted 
closely up against the periphery of said wash - 5 
ers, substantially as described, and for the pur 
pose specified. 
3. The combination of the series of rotary 
cutters, the gang of removable shear-blocks, 
and the spouth, having its inner end formed 20 
into a shear-block for the adjoining cutter, 
substantially as described, and for the purpose 
specified. 
ALFONZO. J. EDDY. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. S. BISHOP, 
M. S. WIARD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347577.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 347,577, 
--- 
J. DAVIES. 
OIL CUP, 
e1e7 7. 
Patented Aug. 17, 1886. 
a S Sess 
II 
 
 
x - TT X 
 
 
 
2252.2%5, 
, 
, , 
NIN NIN 
- NHH-IN - 
NZN 
-N 
N 
(2 2 
5% 3 
N m 
A. 
 
Y 
e/e7. 3 
y 
o/7. 2 
 
  
 
2 
Y 
. 
. 
. 
> S 
S 
a 
- WITNESSES 
/2-,- 
-6 2 (e 
e 
- 
INVENTOR 
%24 
BY Murvy g 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN DAVIES, OF PECKVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
O L. CUP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 347,577, dated August i7, 886. 
Application filed March 8, 1886. Serial No. 194,433. 
(No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, JoHN DAVIES, of Peck 
ville, in the county of Lackawanna and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Oil-Cups, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional side elevation of my 
inproved oil-cup. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
same, partly in section, through the line aca, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a sectional plan view of the 
same, taken through the line y), Fig. 1. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
oil-cups for oiling journals, steam-cylinders, 
and other frictional surfaces, constructed in 
such a manner that they can be readily ad 
2O justed to deliver more or less oil, to deliver 
thicker or thinner oil, and to prevent the de 
livery of oil, as may be required. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of various parts of the oil 
cup, as will be hereinafter fully described. 
A is the base-plate, which is provided with 
a screw-threaded projection, B, to be screwed 
- into the bearing or cylinder to which the oil 
cup is to be applied. The base A is perfo 
3o rated centrally for the discharge of the oil, and 
has a screw-threaded projection, C, in the cen 
ter of its upper side, upon which is screwed 
the lower end of a tube, D. The upper end 
of the tube D is screwed upon a correspond 
35 ing projection formed upon the lower side of 
the top plate, E. The two plates, A E, have 
flanges upon the outer parts of their adjacent 
sides, to receive and confine the ends of the 
glass cylinder F, that forms the wall of the oil 
4o cup, and which is clamped in place by screw 
ing the top plate, E, down upon the con 
necting-tube D. The connecting-tube D has 
numerous apertures through its sides for the 
free passage of the oil to the discharge-per 
45 foration through the base-plate A. The to 
plate, E, has an aperture formed through it, 
through which the oil-cup is supplied with oil, 
and which is closed by a screw-plug, G 
Through a central perforation in the top 
25 
55 
plate, E, passes the stem H, the lower end of 5o 
which is tapered and fits into the upper end 
of the discharge-perforation in the base-plate 
A, so that the quantity of oil discharged can 
be readily regulated by adjusting the said 
stem H. 
In the inner part of the perforation through 
the top plate, E, is formed a screw-thread, 
into which fits a screw-thread formed upon 
the correspouding part of the stem H, so that 
the said stem can be adjusted by turning it. 
The part of the perforation that passes through 
the outer part of the top plate, E, is counter 
sunk, and into it is screwed the gland I or 
perforated screw - plug, the perforation of 
which receives and fits upon the smooth part b5 
of the stem H above its Screw-thread. The 
upper part of the stem H. passes through a 
perforation in the inner end of the arm J, and 
is connected with the said arm by a tongue and 
groove or other suitable means, so that the 
said stem can be turned to adjust it by means 
of the arm J, while the said arm can move up 
and down upon the said stem freely. 
To the outer part of the arm J is attached, 
or upon it is formed, a downwardly-project 
ing pin, K, to enter one or another of a series 
of perforations, L, formed in the upper side 
of the outer part of the top of the plate E, 
and which are numbered or otherwise marked 
to indicate the quantity of oil that will es 
cape when the stem. His adjusted to bring 
the pin K over either of the perforations L, 
so that the pin IK and perforations L serve as 
a gage in adjusting the arm J and stem H. 
The pin K and perforations L also serve as a 
fastening to keep the arm J and stem H from 
being jarred out of place. With this con 
struction the stem H can be readily adjusted 
to prevent any oil from escaping when the 
machinery is stopped. The arm J is secured 
in place upon the stem. Hby a cap, M, screwed 
upon the upper end of the said stem. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
An oil - cup constructed substantially as 
herein shown and described, and consisting of 
the base-plate A, having central perforation 
95 
90 
347,577 
and screw-threaded projections, the top plate, the said stem, and having pin K, whereby the 
E, having gage-perforations and countersunk | discharge of the oil can be readily regulated 
central screw-threaded perforation, the per- or prevented, as set forth. 
forated connecting-tube l), the exterior glass 
5 cylinder, F, the stem ET, having central screw- 
thread and tapered at the lower end, and the 
sliding arm J, placed upon the outer end of 
II. M. EDWARDS, 
H. L. TAYLOR. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN DAVIES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347677.txt	(Model.) 
No. 347,677, 
W. N. WHITELEY. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1, . 
HARWESTER, 
Patented Aug. 17, 1886. 
 
(Model.) 
W. N. WHITELEY. 
HARWESTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 347,677. 
m 
Patented Aug. 17, 1886. 
 
 
 
W 
W 
Sox\\ 
RVES 
SVEWR A. 
 
(Model.) 
W. N. WHITELEY. 
HARWESTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 347,677, 
Patented Aug. 17, 1886. 
284 vices 
u/ /eaf-26 - 
AN- 
72x26wrver 
% 52C 
/ 
Zz 
&etovic /-6. azz), N 
(622O (25.4 
f 
S4 
 
(Model.) 
W. N. WHITELEY. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 347,677. 
HARVESTER, 
Patented Aug. 17, 1886. 
, 
ta 
; 
3. 
1-1/uo.1/O 
no. 1, 17%/ey 
8 
- N 
28ib-losso 
y \ . 
J/h (34.2N. 
K 
Sos/W 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM N. WHITELEY, OF SPRINGFIELD, OHIO. 
HARVESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 347,677, dated August 17, 1886. 
Application filed September 19, 1885, Serial No. 177,532. (Model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM N. WHITELEY, 
of Springfield, in the county of Clark and State 
of Ohio, have invented new and useful In 
provements in Harvesters; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full and accurate 
description of the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my ma-. 
chine from the front, with the binder detached. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the same from. 
the rear, with the binder detached. Fig. 3 is 
a perspective view of the same from the rear, 
With the clover-bundler attached. Fig. 4 is a 
perspective view of the clover-bundler de 
tached. Figs. 5 and 6 are plan views showing 
the butter and fulcrum in different positions. 
It is frequently desirable to employ the har 
vesting-machine for cutting oats, clover, flax, 
&c., and bundling the same without binding, 
and for these purposes it is not desirable to em 
ploy the machinery of the automatic binder. 
Therefore I construct a clover attachment and 
adapted to be attached to the harvester in the 
same place occupied by the automatic binding 
attachment, and to receive the cut crop in sub 
stantially the same manner as received in the 
receptacle or on the table of the automatic 
binder attachment. It may be hung in the 
Same. Supports as those used to support the 
automatic binding attachment, so that at any 
time said binder may be removed and the 
clover attachment substituted, or vice versa, 
making, as it does, two separate and distinct 
machines -in operation-that is, to combine 
with the harvester a proper automatic-binder 
delivery or a clover-attachment delivery. 
A is the main frame, which is supported on 
the main wheel B at one end and the grain 
wheel C at the other end, and carries a cut 
ting apparatus at D, the usual canvas carry 
ing-belt, and the elevator F. 
G is the tongue, and H is the receptacle 
platform, on which the grain is discharged by 
the elevator. In relative arrangement these 
parts are similar to the harvester-binder as 
usually constructed. 
s 
This harvesting-machine is adapted to be 
used with an automatic binder, and also with 
a clover or bundling attachment, as desired, 
by simply removing one and putting the other 
in its place, the same elevator and belting 
attachment being employed with both, it be 
ing necessary in both cases to draw down the 
cut grass and stalks from the belts. The butt 
ing attachment is even more important upon 
the hand-delivery clover attachment than With 
the automatic binder, there being nothing ex 
cept the butter to clear the belt at the front 
corner at the side delivery end of the har 
Wester. 
Heretofore a variety of butting devices have 
been employed; but I prefer the butter herein 
I shown, having a positive action in Striking 
and forcibly moving the grain or grass from 
the belts downward on the platform, with 
means for changing at will the angular posi 
stion and range of action of the butter. 
The automatic binder preferred and best 
adapted is that known as the Appleby' 
type, and is designated by the letter P. 
Both the binder and clover or flax bundler 
I have platforms H alike, and also similar head 
and foot rails, the former running in loops a, 
attached to the binder-frame, and the latter 
supported in the forked standard b, so that 
they are completely interchangeable so far 
as attachment to the machine is concerned. 
The elevator-frame F is provided with a lat 
eral arm, I, extending outward and down 
ward from its upper front corner. 
The 
extremity of this arm supports a joint 
stud, J, to support the fulcrum-plate and 
frame K of the butt-board L, which is sup 
ported at its outer end upon said frame K by 
means of a connecting joint-rod, M, which, 
while the fulcrum-plate Kremains stationary, 
permits the butt-board to vibrate longitudi 
nally. The inner end of the butt-board L is 
attached by a joint-bearing, d, to the crank N., 
by which the inner end of said board is car 
ried around in a circular direction and has 
imparted to it a circulatory reciprocation, 
which acts upon the butts of the grain at the 
point of discharge from the elevator-belt to 
forcibly move the grain backward and down 
ward with directory force over the platform 
H toward the binder. The position of the 
joint-rod M will determine the position of the 
field of and direction in which this motion 
will act, and by swinging the fulcrum-plate K 
on its joint on the stud J said joint-rod and 
90 
95 
CO 
IO 
35 
40 
45 
 
re 
347,677 
TO 
IS 
3O 
45 
the outer end of the butt-board will be thrust 
farther rearward or drawn farther forward. 
This change of positions is shown in Figs. 5 
and G. When thrust rearward, the butt-board 
Will stand oblique to the forward course of the 
grain, and acts throughout its extent to in 
part a lateral motion to the grain. When it 
is drawn forward, the butt-board will stand 
approximately parallel with the course of the 
grain, and only its inner end, carried by the 
crank N, will act upon the grain. Between 
these two positions there may be any number 
of intermediate positions of adjustment, ac 
cording to the angular position of the fulcrum 
plate K. A. hand-rod, O, is jointed to the 
fulcrum-plate R, and extends therefrom to a 
position convenient to the hand of the attend 
ant, so that he may change the angular posi 
tion of the butt-lboard at any moment. For 
convenience said rod is passed through a loop, 
e, on the clevator-frame, and said rod is pro 
vided with a series of stop-notches, f, to en 
gage the loop e, and a spring, ty, to maintain 
said notches and loop in cngagement. 
The clover or ?lax bundler (shown detached 
in Fig. 4 and in working position in Figs. 1 
and 2) consists of the side rails adapted to rest 
in thc loops at on the elevator-frame IF and the 
standard b on the frame A, with a platform, 
H, mounted thereon, and uprights h, to sup 
port the pivoted head i, to which the slats 
or fingers k are attached. The fingers k are 
sufficiently long to reach the platform H. 
and prevent the escape of the clover or flax. 
The head i is also provided with a stud, l, 
projecting downward from the axis, and to 
its extremity a hand-rod, m, is attached, so 
that said head and fingers can at any time 
be caused to swing outward to release and 
dump the clover or ?lax accumulated on the 
platform FI; but to hold the rod n and the 
fingers k in position without the constant at 
tention of the attendant a stop - catch, n, is 
attached to said rod to catch over the edge 
of the upper plank of the elevator-frame F. 
By attaching the hand-rod in below the axis of 
the Swinging ?ingers the weight of grain or 
grass l'esting upon said fingers causes the latch 
to remain in place, and when released causes 
the fingers to swing outward to discharge, and 
the attendant is only required to exert suffi 
cient strength in the first place to release the 
latch, and in the second place to pull the fin 
gel's back in place. This is a material in 
provement over those bundle-carriers which 
were dumped by forcibly pulling the support 
from under the lundles, or those which, being 
unlatched, were expected to be self-closing. 
In practice the weight of the clover or flax 
on the platform II, and resting against the fin 
gers k, will always keep the stop n in engage 
ment with said plank, and to discharge the ac 
cumulated bundle it is only necessary to raise 
the end of the rod in, when the bundle will be 
discharged by gravity. 
IBy the structure 
above described all the strains upon the hand 
rod are tensile, and its liability to be broken 
as well as the labor of the attendant are re 
duced. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. In combination, in a grain-harvestingma 
chine, an elevator-frame and two endless ele 
vator-belts, a butting device for forcibly mov 
ing the grain downward and inward from said 
elevator-belts, and a detachable clover or flax 
bundling attachment provided with a receiv 
ing-platform and retailing-fingers, as set forth. 
2. In combination, in a grain-harvesting ma 
chine, the elevator-frame and elevator-belts, 
the rollers whereof are mounted on said frame, 
loops (t, and forked standard b, and a clover 
or flax bundling attachment provided with re 
taining-fingers, and adapted to be attached by 
said loops and standard, and a reciprocating 
butting-board to forcibly remove the cut grain 
or grass from the elevator downward and in . 
ward on the platform, as set forth. 
3. A clover-bundling attachment for a har 
vesting-machine, having bearings whereby it 
is adapted to seat in the same supports which 
hold the automatic binder, provided with re 
taining-fingers depending from a shaft which 
is journaled on the frame above the incoming 
grass, combined with an operating hand-rod 
attached to said shaft at a point below its axis, 
and a suitable latch on said rod to retain the 
parts in operative position, whereby all the 
strains upon said hand-rod are tensile. 
4. The elevator and receptacle platform of 
a harvester and binder, a butter whereof one 
end is carried by a crank in a circular path, 
combined with a swinging fulcrum-plate, K, 
a joint-rod to connect one end of the Same 
with the free end of the butter, and an end 
wise-moving controlling hand-rod, O, where 
by the angular position of said butter and its 
field of motion may be changed at will, and 
whereby the cut grass is forcibly removed 
from the elevator-belts, as set forth. 
5. The butter I, carried at one end by the 
crank N, and at the other end by the swing 
ing joint-rod M, combined with the pivoted 
fulcrum-plate IX, jointed to the permanent 
standard J, and the end wise-moving control 
ling hand-rod O, whereby the angular position 
of the butter may be changed by the attend. 
ant at Will. 
WILLIAMI N. WHITELEY. 
Witnesses: 
W. T. BEVITT, 
LEWIS PHILLIPS. 
65 
ICO 
O 
I i5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347777.txt	(Model.) 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
P. DIEHL. 
TENSION DEVICE FOR SEWING MACHINEs. 
No. 347,777. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1886. 
NPETERS, Photo-lthographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(Model.) 
P. DIEHL, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
TENSION DEVICE FOR SEWING MACHINES, 
No. 347,777. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1886. 
 
 
 
as 
2 39 
SS 
(4. 
2 
 
 
 
A12 (zoesses. 
 
Z722/ezzza27. 
3. 
 
peeRS, Photo-lithographer. Washington. . . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP DIEHL, OF ELIZABETI, NEW J ERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE SINGER 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY OF NEWJERSEY. 
TENS ON DEVICE FOR SEWING - MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forning part of Letters Patent No. 347,777, dated August 24, 1886. 
Applicatin filed Octoler, issi5. Serial No. 179,2S7. (M. del.) 
5 Sion. 
5 
65 
To all zuhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILIP DIEHL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Eliza 
beth, in the county of Union and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Tension Devices for Sewing 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and effective t. read-controlling mech 
anism, which is more particularly adapted to 
a rotary hook or looper chain-stitch sewing 
inachine, in which the needle-bar is operated 
by a rock-shaft pivoted in the upper part of 
the fraine or bracket-arm of the machine. To 
this eud I provide an automatic or intermit 
tent tension, which is adapted to be opeated 
by the needle-bar rock-shaft, and between this 
intermittent tension and the spool from which 
the thread is drawn I place a light check-ten 
sion, which exerts a slight but constant drag 
on the thread, so as to hold the latter properly 
when it is released by the intermittent ten 
In connection with the tensions above 
referred to I prefer to use an intermittent 
check-tension near the needle to exert a slight 
drag on the thread during the time the needle is 
out of the work, so that the thread will be held 
clear of the point of the needle when the latter 
descends to pierce the work. 
In the drawings forming part of this specifi 
cation, Figure 1 is a side elevation of a sew 
ing-machine embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 is a rear end view, partly in section, on line 
22, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail section on line 
33, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a plan view showing the 
Fig. 5 is a 
intermittent and check tensions. 
detail view of the automatic check - tension 
Spring. 
A denotes the frame of the machine, in the 
lower part of which is journaled the driving 
shaft, carrying at its rear end a fly and pulley 
wheel, B, and at its forward end an ordinary 
chainstitch rotary hook or looper, C. The 
wheel B carries a crank-pin, D, connected by 
a pitman, E, to the rear arm, f, of the rock 
shaft F, pivoted on center screws, a, attached 
to the upper part or arm portion of the frame end of the long arm of the lever K, so that a (OO 
A. The rock-shaft F has at its forward end 
an arm, f', connected by a link, G, to a block 
or collar, h, attached to the needle-bar H, the 
latter carrying an ordinary eye-pointed nee 
dle, it'. 
From the foregoing it will be obvious that 
when power is applied to the wheel B the rock 
shaft F will be operated to reciprocate the nee 
dle-bar and the needle carried by the latter, 
with the co-operating rotary hook C, will form 
chainstitches in the usual manner. 
Sustained by the bracket i is a check-ten 
Sion, I, consisting in the present instance of a 
pair of ordinary tension-disks held in contact 
by a light coil-spring surrounding the pin, 
which supports the disk, the stress of Said 
spring to adjust the tension being regulated 
by a thanub-nut on said pin in the usual man 
ner. The tension I is preferably placed above 
or in line With the spool-pin L, as shown in 
Fig. 1. 
To the top of the frame A, near the rear 
end thereof, is attached the automatic or in 
termittent tension consisting of a block, J, an 
elbow or bell-crank lever, K, pivoted to said 
block, and a coil-spring, k, the latter being 
placed in a bored out recess in said block, so 
as to press outward against the longer arm of 
aid leyer, thus serving to hold the shorter 
arm of the latter in contact with the top of 
the block. The end of the short arm of the 
lever K extends slightly beyond the block and 
the latter is provided with small projections j', 
one on each side of said arm, said projections 
having open or slotted eyes or thread-holes. 
The lower end of the long arm of the lever K 
is curved, and is arranged adjacent to the arm 
f of the rock-shaft F, so that said arm in its 
vibrations will impinge against Said end at in 
tervals, and will thus move said lever in op 
position to the stress of the spring k, to lift 
the short arm of the lever from its bearing 
surface at the top of the block J to release the 
thread. To thread the tension, the thread is 
drawn into the hole in one of the projections, 
j, around and beneath the end of the short 
arm of the lever K, and then into the hole in 
the other of said projections. 
In Fig. 3 the arm f of the rock-shaft F is 
shown as being just in contact with the curved 
further movement of said arm in the direction 
indicated by the arrow adjacent thereto in said 
95 
go 
75 
O 
5 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
347,777 
Owing to the delicate and accurate manner 
in which the thread is controlled by the de 
vices above described they largely contribute 
foward rendering my machine capable of very 
high rates of speed for which it is more par 
ticularly intended. 
The cutting device shown in Fig. 1 of the 
drawings is enbraced by my application No. 
179,286, filed simultaneously herewith, and is 
therefore not claimed in this application. . 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a sewing-machine, the combination, 
with an automatic or intermittent tension, of 
a constant check-tension placed between the 
intermittent tension and the spool or other 
source of supply of the thread, and an inter 
nnittent check-tension between the former in 
termittent tension and the needle, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. In a sewing-machine, a bracket arm or 
frame, a block secured thereto, a rock-shaft 
having an arm, a bell - crank tension - lever 
pivoted to said block, one arm of said lever 
being arranged in the path of the said rock 
shaft arm, combined with a spring for press 
ing the other arm of said tension-lever against 
a bearing-surface afforded by the said block, 
whereby said tension-lever is adapted to clailip 
and release the thread alternately, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the rock - shaft 
and its arm, of the block J, having projections 
j, with thread-holes, the lever K, pivoted to 
said block, and the spring k, substantially as . 
set forth. 
4. In a sewing-nachine, the combination, 
with the face-plate having an opening, of a 
bent tension-spring attached to the inside of 
said plate and extending outward so that its 
lower end will bear against the outer side of 
said plate, and a device reciproc atting with the 
needle-bar and adapted to engage said spring 
at intervals, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a sewing-machine, the combination, 
with face-plate, the needle-bar and operating 
mechanism for the latter, comprising the col 
lar or block h, of the inclined and bent ten 
sion-spring M, attached to the inside of said 
face-plate, but having a bearing-surface out 
side of the latter, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
PHILIP II) EHL. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES G. GREENE, 
WM. H. DUSLEE. 
s 
7. 
75 
8: 
95. 
TOO 
IC5 
5 
O 
t 5 
25 
35 
figure will lift the short arm of said lever from 
the top of the block J and release the thread. 
This action occurs just after the hook Chas 
caught the loop of the needle-thread and the 
needle-bar is rising to tighten the last stitch, 
and thus the intermittent tension will hold the 
thread during the greater part of the time that 
the needle bar is descending, and while it is 
lising to throw out a loop for the hook, and 
will then release it to permit the needlebar 
and rotary hook to draw sufficient thread from 
the spool or source of supply for the next 
stitch. 
Attached to the inside of the face-plate a? 
of the frame A is a light check-tension spring, 
M, which extends outward through an open 
ing in said plate, and then downward, so that 
its lower end will bear against the outer side 
of said plate. Said end is normally held in 
contact with the outer side of said plate by 
the stress of the main portion of the said 
spring, and is li?ted or pushed away there 
from at intervals by the contact of the block 
or collar h on the needlebar with the inclined 
lower portion of said spring inside of the face 
plate a'. The spring M is provided at the 
outer end of its bend with an open hole, m, 
into which the thread can be drawn to bring 
it beneath the bearing-surface at the lower end 
of said spring. 
The thread passes from the spool (indicated 
by dotted lines in Fig. 1) or other source of 
supply through the light check-tension I to 
the intermittent or automatic tension, and 
thence through a guide-eye, N, to a hole in 
the top of the needle-bar H, which serves as 
a take-up, passing from the latter downward 
beneath the bearing-surface of the automatic 
check-tension M to the needle. The latter 
tension exerts a slight friction on the thread 
as the needle descends until the point thereof 
reaches the work, when the block or collar h 
impinges against the spring M, and lifts the 
lower end thereof from the face-plate, as above 
described to release the thread which remains 
unaffected by this tension until the needle in 
its ascent has nearly or wholly cleared the 
work. 
By arranging the tension devices in the 
manner above described-to wit, with the con 
Stant check-tension between the main auto 
matic or intermittent tension and the spool 
or other source of supply of the thread, and 
the internittent check-tension between the 
main internittent tension and the needle-I 
am enabled to control the thread with a nicety 
and exactness which I deem to be impossible 
with any other arrangement of these devices. 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347877.txt	(No Model.) 
A. KIDD. 
FEED NUT, 
No. 347,877. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1886. 
  
 
 
 
 
  
% 
% 2 N. 
in 
O 
Li s ME HZ 
7 % % 
f HK 
s 
SS II 
A 
i N 
R 
SS 
 
 
 
cease 
TNESSES 
a 4/42624 
PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR 
42422a-2-zee-e Jazeed 
By 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER KIDD, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
FEED - NUT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 347,877, dated August 24, 1886. 
Application filed January 27, 1885. Serial No. 154,185. (No model.) 
To all whom it may eoncern: 
ing wound on a mandrel, the section of the 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER. KIDD, a bar being - or T shaped to give form to the 
citizen of the United States, residing at Jer- thread E. E. E. E., then fitted to the bore of the 
sey City, in the county of Hudson and State shell AA, and held in place by the follower- 25 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and useful nut D. In the present instance I have shown 
Feed-Nut for Rock - Drills, of which the fol. the bar in the shape of a T. 
lowing is a specification. 
One of my chief objects is to have the fiber 
My invention relates to feed-nuts used on of the metal of which the threads are formed 
rock-drills for feeding down the drill. 
The object of my invention is to provide a nut, and so increase its durability. 
I am not aware that any feed-nut such as I 
cheap and easy way of renewing the thread in 
the nut without the expense and trouble of mak- have described has heretofore been in use, and 
ing an entire nut and cutting the thread from 
I desire to secure by Letters Patent the follow 
ing: 
the solid metal. 
attain this object in the 
15 manner illustrated by the accompanying draw. 
The combination of the outer shell, the spi 
rally-coiled T-shaped bar, and the follower 
ing. 
to follow the circular course all through the 3o 
35 
TO 
- 
ALEXANDER, KIDD. 
the entire nut. 
The figure is a part sectional drawing of nut, as described. 
AA is the outer shell of the nut secured to 
Witnesses: 
20 the frame of the machine by the jam-nut B. 
CC is a spiral, formed by a bar of metal be- 
JOHN BAIN, Jr., 
R. A. MCCABE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US347977.txt	T. J., STRICKLAND. 
BICYCLE PEDAL. 
. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
, 
No. 347,977, 
 
7%4. 
WITNESSES : 
INVENTOR; 
% 23%, 
Varzuk 
arc "- 'EgyS. 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS J. STRICKLAND, OF RANDOLPH, MASSACHUSETTS. 
B. CYCLE a PEDAL 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Fetters Patent No. 347,977, dated August 24, 1886. 
Application filed November 28, 1885. Serial No. 184,183. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAs J. STRICK 
LAND, of Randolph, in the county of Norfolk 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Bicycle-Ped 
als, of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
bicycle-pedals, and especially to the pedals 
used on bicycles for racing. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved pedal which is so con 
Structed that the rider's foot cannot slip on 
the Same, and the sole of the foot can rest only 
on the flat side of the said pedal. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts and details, as will 
be fully described and set forth hereinafter, 
and then pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure I is a plan view of my improved 
bicycle-pedal. Fig. 2 is a cross sectional view 
of the same. 
The two end plates, A, are provided with 
the prongs or extensions B, which serve as 
guards to prevent the foot from slipping off 
the pedal, and each end piece is provided 
With an aperture, C, through which the shaft 
is passed on which the pedal revolves. Be 
tween the said end plates, A, the two U 
shaped pieces D, of spring sheet metal, are 
held, the open parts of said pieces D facing 
each other, and the Said pieces being provided 
in their end edges with the tongues E at the 
curved parts of the pieces, which tongues are 
passed through slots in the end pieces, A, 
whereby the said pieces D are held on the 
pieces A in Such a manner that the free or 
inner edges of each piece D can be pressed 
together, the spring-tension in the pieces D 
forcing the said edges from each other again. 
Parts of the said pieces D are punched out to 
form the Spurs or prongs F, which project 
from the outer surfaces of the said pieces D 
at the top and bottom, the prongs being at the 
closed ends of the pieces D. 
The two pieces D are surrounded by a piece, 
G, of buckskin or like leather or fabric, or 
other material, in the manner shown, through 
which covering the prongs F project, the ends 
of the prongs being slightly above the surface 
of the covering. 
The rider places his foot on the upper flat 
side of the pedal and presses the upper part 
of the pedal downward, as the free ends of 
the pieces D can give slightly under the press 
ure of the foot, and thereby the prongs F are 
moved slightly toward each other and grip on 
the sole of the shoe more firmly, allowing the 
push-and-pull movement. 
The buckskin covering prevents slipping of 
the foot, and also prevents the toe part of the 
foot from being forced in between the free 
edges of the said pieces D. 
When the edge of the pedal is at the top 
and the rider places his foot on the said top 
edge, the pedal is tilted and brought into such 
a position that the flat side will be at the top, 
ready to receive the foot. 
The pedal is very light, as it is made main 
ly of sheet metal. It is safe, strong, and re 
liable, and can be used on any bicycle or tri 
cycle. 
The pieces D can be punched full of holes 
for the purpose of making the pedal light, 
while it retains its strength. 
Having fully described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. A bicycle-pedal formed of two end pieces, 
between which two U-shaped pieces of sheet 
metal are held, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
2. A bicycle-pedal formed of two end pieces, 
between which two U-shaped pieces of sheet 
metal are held by tongues formed on the end 
edges of the U-shaped pieces and passed 
through slots in the end pieces, substantially 
as herein shown and described. 
3. A bicycle-pedal formed of two endpieces, 
between which two sheet-metal pieces pro 
vided with spurs or prongs are held, substan 
tially as herein shown and described. 
4. A bicycle-pedal provided with prongs 
or spurs and a leather or other like covering, 
through which the said prongs or spurs pro 
O 
25 
45 
55 
yo 
75 
90 
95 
w 
! 
347,977 
ject, substantially as herein shown and de- to and facing each other, substantially as here: 
scribed. 
5. In a bicycle - pedal, the combination 
with the two end lates, A, of the two U. 
5 shaped pieces D, held between the said end 
pieces at the closed parts of the said pieces 
D, the open sides of the pieces being adjacent 
THOMAS J. STRICKLAND. 
in shown and described. 
Witnesses: 
E. F. SHAW, 
R. W. TuRNER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348077.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 348,077. 
 
T. A. WATSON. 
TELEPHONE. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1886. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS A. WATSON, OF EVERETT, 
TELEPHONE COMPANY, OF 
ASSIGNOR TO THE AMERICAN BELL 
BOSTON, MASSACEIUSETTS. 
TELEPHONE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 348,077, dated August 24, 1886. 
Application filed June 15, 1880. Serial No. 11,765. (No model.) 
When constructed in the proportions shown 6o 
The lever f should be of light stiff material, 7O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
according to the well-known mechanical prin 
Be it known that I, THOMAs A. WATSON, of 
ciple of the lever, the movement of the ex 
Everett, county of Middlesex, State of Massa 
tremity of the lever connected with the dia 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
phragm will be greater than that of any inter- 55 
5 Telephones, of which the following descrip 
mediate point thereof in the ratio of the whole 
tion, in connection with the accompanying 
length of the said lever to that of the portion 
drawing, is a specification. 
between the said intermediate point and the 
My invention relates to telephones, and has 
fulcrum g. 
for its object to increase the amplitude of the 
Io vibrations of the diaphragm which gives out 
in the drawing, the amplitude of movement of 
the sound, or of the armature or vibrating 
the end of the lever fand the connected dia 
contact electrodes, or other device used to pro 
phragm h will be about three times as great as 
duce a varying electric impulse, thus increas 
that of the armature e, and the effect of the 
ing the loudness and volume of the sound 
vibrations of the said diaphragm h on the air 65 
to produce sound-waves will be considerably 
greater and will produce considerably louder 
The invention is herein shown embodied in 
a magneto-telephone; and it consists in con 
sound than a diaphragm vibrated in the ordi 
necting the armature of the magnet thereof 
nary way by the direct magnetic impulses. 
with a diaphragm by a mechanical device for 
2O increasing range of movement, herein shown 
hard tough wood having a compact grain be 
as a simple lever, the connected armature and 
ing found very good for this purpose. 
diaphragm taking the place of the usual dia 
If it is desired to use the telephone as a 
phragm, which itself forms the armature of 
transmitter, the amplitude of vibration of the 
and is vibrated by the magnet. 
armature e should be increased, which may be 75 
25 When the instrument is to be used as a trans 
done by constructing the telephone with the 
mitter, the armature and diaphragm should 
positions of the diaphragm and mouth-piece 
be so connected that the movement of the 
and the armature and magnet reversed, the 
former is greater than that of the latter, so 
diaphragm being connected with the lever at 
that the currents induced will be stronger, and 
some intermediate point, and the armature.8o 
3o consequently have a more powerful effect upon 
secured to the free end thereof; or the parts 
the receiving-telephone. In some cases it may 
may remain in the same position relative to 
be desirable to increase the amplitude of move 
the lever, which should then be pivoted at a 
ment of the vibrating point of a microphone 
point between the armature and diaphragm 
or battery-transmitter. 
and nearer the latter, as at in, instead of g. 85 
The drawing shows a plan view of a mag 
When the same instrument is to be used as a 
neto-telephone embodying my invention, part 
transmitter and receiver, suitable pivots may 
being shown in section. 
be provided at g and in, and the lever con 
The magnet a is shown as a horseshoe-mag 
nected with and vibrated on the one or the 
net, suitably supported, as at b, in proper 
other, as desired. It is obvious that a lever of 90 
4O position to have its poles c, provided with the 
this description can also be used in connection 
usual induction-coils, d, act on the armature e, 
with the contact-electrodes of a microphone or 
of suitable size and form to be strongly affected 
battery-transmitter when it is desired to have 
thereby. The armature e is rigidly attached 
the vibrations of the movable electrode of dif 
to a lever, f, having one end pivoted at g and 
ferent amplitude from those of the diaphragm. 95 
45 the other end rigidly connected with the dia 
I do not limit myself to a lever as the means 
phragm h, which is placed in front of the usual 
for increasing the range of movement or am 
Sound-chamber and mouth-piece, i, and may be 
plitude of vibration of one of the movable 
of any desired material not necessarily mag 
parts set in motion by the other, as other me 
netic. By this arrangement it will be seen 
chanically-equivalent devices for transmitting IOO 
5O that any vibration imparted to the lever f will 
I and increasing motion may be used. 
be transmitted to the diaphragm, and that 
| 
I5 received. 
3 
I claim 
2 
348,077 
1. In a telephonic instrument, a diaphragm 
3. The combination of a diaphragm, arma- T5 
2. In a telephone, an armature-lever ar- scribing witnesses. 
to receive or impart sound-waves, combined ture-lever, and magnet adjustable with refer 
with a lever rigidly connected therewith to en- ence to the armature-lever, substantially as 
able a point on the said lever to have a vibra described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
tory movement of greater amplitude than that 
of the diaphragm, substantially as described. to this specification in the presence of two sub- 2d 
ranged in contact with the diaphragm and 
provided with an adjustable fulcrum, substan- 
tially as described, whereby on changing the 
fulcrum the vibrations of the armature or of 
the diaphragm may be communicated from 
either to the other with an augmented or di- 
minished force. 
Jos. P. LIVERMORE, 
N. E. C. WHITNEY. 
O 
 
THOMAS A. WATSON. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348177.txt	(No Model.) 
E, TOTMAN, 
SANDPAPERING MACHINE. 
r 
No. 348,177. 
He 
H. 
 
y 
Patented Aug. 24, 1886. 
gy 
it is 
EAEPE 
I 
Aff 
act 
a; 
ev 
i. 
a 3 de 
A 'C/ 
s 2 
S! 
 
varurviv y 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDSELL TOTMAN, OF HINSDALE, ILLINOIS. 
SAND PAPERING MACHINE. 
3P tic: "ICATION criming part of Letters Patent No. 348, l77, date 21 August 24, l886. 
Application filed April 15, 1885. 
Serial No. 162,266. (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDSELL TOTMAN, of 
Hinsdale, in the county of Du Page and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Sandpapering-Machines; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
Sandpapering-machines; and it consists in the 
matters hereina?ter described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
. The machine herein shown as embodying 
my invention consists, essentially, of an end 
less traveling band or belt of canvas or other 
flexible material provided upon one side with 
an abrading-surface, suitable supporting-roll 
ers for the belt, one of which is driven in or 
der to properly actuate the said belt, and one 
or more loose rollers mounted in a pivotally 
supported swinging frame, adapted to bear up 
on a part of the belt between the supporting 
rollers thereof, said roller or rollers and the 
band being laterally movable upon the ma 
chine-frame, so that they may be shifted from 
side to side of the surface of the object oper 
ated upon, as will hereinafter more fully ap 
pear. 
The invention will be more fully understood 
by reference to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the machine em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
Section of the same, taken upon line acac of Fig. 
1. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical transverse section of 
the same, taken upon line y y of Fig. 1. Fig. 
4 is a detail perspective view of the loose or 
bearing rollers, the devices for supporting the 
latter, and the parts of the band adjacent 
thereto. Fig. 5 is a detail view illustrating 
the construction of the device containing but 
a single roller. 
In the said drawings, A are longitudinal 
frame-pieces of the machine, supported upon 
suitable vertical posts, A. 
B and B are the supporting-rollers for the 
band, which are mounted in bearings b at the 
opposite ends of said frame. 
C is the endless abrading-band. 
D ID are loosely-pivoted rollers located be 
tween the upper and lower parts of the band. 
E are side bars, in the ends of which the 
said rollers D are journaled, and IF is a frame 
provided with side bars, FF, to which the 
bars E are pivoted, said frame being itself 
pivoted and adapted to slide freely upon a sta 
tionary transverse rod, G, held at its ends in 
the side pieces of the frame. 
The rollers BB' are arranged approximately 
in the same horizontal plane, and the loose 
rollers ID ID are placed between said rollers, 
and are adapted to rest upon the middle por 
tion of the lower part of the band C, so as to 
press said lower part of the band downwardly 
upon an object placed beneath it. As herein 
shown, the roller B is driven to communicate 
motion to the belt, suitable belt-pulleys, B", 
being placed upon the shaft of Said roller for 
this purpose. 
The object of the pivoted frame F is to retain 
the rollers D in proper position upon the belt 
during the movement of the latter, and the 
bars E, which are pivoted centrally to the bars 
F' of the frame F, as before described, ob 
viously permit a relative vertical movement 
of said rollers, so that the latter may operate 
with equal pressure upon the belt. As here 
in shown, the arms F are preferably extended 
at their ends beyond the rollers, and a cross 
bar, I, is located upon the machine-frame, so 
as to form a stop or rest to limit the down Ward 
movement of the arms and rollers when the 
panel or other object is removed from beneath 
the belt. 
By the construction above set forth, it is ob 
vious that when the belt C is driven in the di 
rection, for instance, of the arrows in the 
drawings, the rollers D D, which are adapted 
to press and roll freely upon the lower part of 
the belt, will press the latter against the sur 
face of the object placed beneath said belt, 
with a pressure depending upon the Weight of 
the rollers. The abrading-surface of the band 
is thus held in contact with the Surface to be 
operated upon by a constant and yielding 
pressure calculated to cause an effectual and 
even abrading action. The rollers being free 
to rise and fall through a considerable distance, 
and also having a relative vertical movement, 
they will obviously adjust themselves perfectly 
to variations in the position of the surface be 
35 
45 
So 
Co 
85 
95 
OC 
2 
348,177 
IO 
25 
ing operated upon-such, for instance, as may 
be caused by differences in the thickness of 
panels or by slight irregularities in the sur 
face thereof. 
5 The band C may be made of any width 
found desirable or convenient, depending upon 
the width of the articles to be operated upon 
and other considerations. It is often found 
desirable, however, to operate upon panels 
with raised edges, and for this purpose the 
belt may be desirably made relatively narrow, 
and means provided for shifting it laterally, so 
that it may be used upon narrow sunken sur 
faces, and moved laterally so as to operate 
15 upon all parts of such sunken surfaces wider 
than the belt. This latter construction is pres 
ent in the machine illustrated in the draw 
ings, in which the band C is made consider 
ably narrower than the rollers B B, and the 
frame F, carrying the rollers D D, is adapted 
to slide laterally upon the pivot-rod G, and is 
provided with arms or guides H. H., arranged 
to engage the opposite edges of the belt C, so 
as to hold the edges of the belt flush with the 
ends of the said rollers D. D. By this con 
struction, when the frame F is moved later 
ally, the belt C will obviously be carried 
with it. 
As shown in the drawings, the frame E is 
provided with an arm or handle, F, extend 
ing laterally over the side pieces of the frame, 
which may be grasped by the hand to move 
the belt and rollers laterally in operating upon 
the entire width of the panel or other object. 
In carrying out my invention, any suitable 
supporting devices may be provided for prop 
erly sustaining beneath. the belt the panel or 
other object to be finished. As herein shown, 
a longitudinally-movable carriage, K, is pro 
vided, which is supported upon suitable roll 
ers, k, upon the machine-frame, said carriage 
being provided with cross-pieces K', upon 
which the object--such, for instance, as a pan 
el, L-may be placed. The carriage K may 
45 be moved by hand to carry the panel endwise 
beneath the belt, or any suitable well-known 
device for giving a longitudinal reciprocatory 
movement to said carriage may be employed 
for actuating it automatically. Any well 
so known automatic means may also obviously 
be used for giving a lateral reciprocatory move 
ment either to the frame For to the support 
ing device for the work, so as to cause the said 
belt to operate upon the entire width of the 
In Fig. 5 another form of the device is illus 
trated, in which is used only a single roller, 
D, journaled in a frame, F, so as to freely rise 
and fall in the manner before described. In 
5o this figure a spring, M, is shown as applied to 
the frame F, so as to aid in forcing the roller 
toward the work. Such spring may be found 
desirable in cases in which the roller or rollers 
are not sufficiently heavy to give the required 
55 pressure, or when the belt is arranged other 
wise than horizontally, as shown. The form 
of the device embracing a single roller, D, may 
55 panel. 
 
sometimes be found desirable in practice, but 
preferably two rollers set close together (as 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4) are used, for the 7o 
reason that by this construction a greater area 
of the belt is presented to the work, and the 
said belt is prevented from cutting into the 
surface of the wood in case the movement of 
the latter is temporarily arrested, as is liable 75 
to occur when the pressure is given by a sin 
gle roller. In case it is found desirable to use 
a weight, instead of the spring M, (shown in 
Fig. 5,) such weight may be applied to the 
frame E in any desired manner-as, for in- 8o 
stance, is shown in Fig. 4, in which such 
weight, as indicated at f, is placed upon a 
cross-piece attached to the extremities of the 
arm F. The band C may be made of canvas . 
or other suitable material, and the abrading- 85 
surface thereof may be formed by a layer of 
sand or emery paper applied to the band, or 
by a coating of sand, emery, or other abrading 
material applied in any suitable way to the said 
band. 
As a means of tightening the belt C when 
desired, the bearings b of the rollers BB, in 
stead of being attached directly to the frame 
pieces A, are mounted upon separate longitudi 
nal bars A' A', which are held upon the upper 95 
surfaces of the said frame-pieces by bolts a in 
serted through slots in the said bars, so that 
the latter may be moved longitudinally and 
clamped at a desired distance apart. The said 
bars are desirably held in grooves in the up 
per surfaces of the frame - pieces, and are 
brought close together at their inner ends, 
and tap-bolts a inserted in the end of one 
bar in position to bear against the adjacent 
end of the other bar at each side of the ma 
chine, so as to enable the bars to be forced 
longitudinally apart for the purpose stated. 
As shown in the drawings, the bolts a? are in 
serted through plates a, secured to the end of 
one bar, and their heads are adapted to rest 
against plates a, secured upon the opposing 
end of the other bar. The construction above 
described enables the belt C to be readily re 
moved from the rollers for repairs or other 
purposes, the bars A at the side of the machine 
opposite from the pulleys B" in this operation 
being loosened by removing the bolts a, when 
the bars may be removed, together with the 
bearings b, and the belt slipped over the ends 
of the rollers. 
I I5 
9O 
OO 
IO 
- 
I claim as my invention- 
1. The combination, with the machine-frame, 
a traveling abrading-band, and supporting 
rollers therefor, of one or more movable roll 
ers adapted to hold and press the band upon 
the work, and a horizontally-arranged swing 
ing frame affording bearings for said movable 
roller or rollers and pivotally connected at 
one end to the machine-frame, substantially as 
described. . 
2. The combination, with a traveling abrad 
ing-band and supporting-rollers therefor, of 
one or more movable rollers bearing upon the 
inner surface of the band, a swinging frame 
. 
348,177 
3 
supporting the movable roller or rollers, and 
a stop for limiting the movement of the rollers 
toward the work, substantially as and for the 
purpose Set forth. 
5 3. The combination, with the machine-frame, 
a traveling abrading - band, and supporting 
rollers therefor, of two movable rollers adapted 
to bear upon the inner surface of the band, a 
swinging frame pivoted upon the machine 
IC frame, and bars E E, affording bearings for 
the rollers and pivoted to the swinging frame, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with the machine-frame, 
a traveling abrading - band, and supporting 
I5 rollers for the band, of a movable roller or 
rollet's adapted to rest upon the inner surface 
of the band, said band and movable roller or 
rollers being laterally movable with reference 
to the work, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. . 
5. The combination, with the machine-frame, 
a traveling abrading - band, and supporting 
rollers for the band of greater length than the 
width of the band, of a movable roller or roll 
er's located in contact with the inner surface of 
the band, a swinging frame supporting the 
rollers and having laterally-sliding connection 
with the machine-frame, and guides H. H., for 
the belt upon said frame, substantially as and 
25 
3o for the purpose set forth. 
35 
6. The combination, with the machine-frame 
and the abrading-band C, of rollers B B for 
the band, means for actuating one of said roll 
ers, rollers D D, resting upon the lower part 
of the band, a swinging frame, F, supporting 
said rollers D D, a stationary pivot - rod, G, 
for the frame, and a cross-bar, I, affording a 
stop to the downward movement of the frame, 
substantially as described. 
7. The combination, with the machine-frame 
having longitudinal frame-pieces A, grooved 
in their upper surfaces, the abrading-band C, 
and the supporting-rollers B B for the band, 
of slotted bars A' A', resting and sliding in 
the grooves of the frame-pieces and supporting 45 
the bearings of said rollers, tap - bolts a, in 
serted in the ends of one bar of each pair of 
bars and bearing against the adjacent end of 
the other bar of the pair, and clamp-bolts in 
serted through the slots of the bars A' A' and 5o 
the frame - pieces, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I affix my signature in presence 
of two witnesses. 
4) 
EDSELL TOTMAN. 
Witnesses: 
C. CLARENCE POOLE, 
OLIVER E. PAGIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348277.txt	(No Model.) 
F. T. GILBERT, 
ROTARY WATER METER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 348,277. 
Patented Aug. 31, 1886, 
WITNESSES 
ze 33-c. 
By 
it. Peters. Photo-Lithographs, Washington, d. c. 
 
WWENTOR 
f/2.e4.4- 
?ecov, V6 
ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
F. T. GILBERT, 
ROTARY WATER METER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 348,277, 
Patented Aug. 31, 1886. 
2. 
77 S ? 
4 / 32T 
* /hav, Y(s 
ATTORNEYs 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANKLIN T. GILBERT, OF WALLA WALLA, WASHINGTON TERRITORY. 
ROTARY WATER-METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 348,277, dated August 31, 1886. 
Application filed November 14, 1885. Serial No. 182,826. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it nail? concern: 
and from e' to fit is horizontal and flush 
Beit known that I, FRANKLINT. GILBERT, against the bottom side of the wheel. This 
of Walla Walla, in the county of Walla Walla, bottom of the case may be cast in one piece 55 
Washington Territory, have invented a new with the case; or a part of it, as from e to 
5 and useful Improvement in Water-Meters, of e' to f, may be made in a separate plate and 
which the following is a description. 
fastened down by a screw, as shown in Fig. 
MIy invention relates to water-meters of that 3. The bottom of the case from d to d is not 
class in which a rotating wheel is arranged a straight incline or true plane; but it is 6o 
Within a case, and is provided with wings curved, bellied, or hollowed out to a larger 
Io mounted upon radial axes in the wheel, and capacity than that which would be filled by the 
which Wings are adapted to act like pistors to wings or pistons for a special purpose, here 
take the pressure of water coming in through inafter described. From d to e, however, the 
an inlet-pipe to turn the wheel, and which bottom is straight in radial direction, as is also 65 
wings gradually turn upon their axes into a from e to e' and from e' to f. A part of the 
I5 horizontal plane in their passage over an in- incline from e to e' is, however, cut away, as 
cline bed as they move toward the outlet-pipe. at h, in order to give greater clearance to the 
My invention consists in certain features of water in escaping to the outlet D, and said 
improvement upon this form of meter, whereby incline e to e may (instead of being a solid 7O 
the parts are made to act more certainly, posi- plane) be formed as circular inclined ribs, 
2O tively, and efficiently, as hereinafter fully de- which, while they serve to raise the Wings of 
Scribed. 
the wheel, as hereinafter described, secure the 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the meter with additional advantage of a greater clearance for 
the cover removed, and showing the wheel the water in escaping to the outlet D. The 75 
within. Fig. 2 is a vertical central section wheel B is formed with radial spoke-sections 
25 through the line ac a' of Fig. 1, showing the and alternating triangular spaces, in which fit 
cover applied to the top of the meter. Fig. 3 the correspondingly-shaped wings E, which, 
is a perspective view of the meter-case. Fig. when shut up into the same plane with the 
4 is a perspective view of the rotating wheel. wheel-frame, form a solid disk. The Wings E 8o 
Fig. 5 is a perspective view of one of the have journals ('b', which fit, respectively, in 
3o wings of the revolving wheel, and Fig. 6 is a to the bearings ab in the wheel, and are thereby 
section through of y of Fig. 3. 
sustained therein upon axes radial to the 
In the drawings, A represents the case of wheel. One of these sets of bearings (the 
the meter, which is provided (see Fig. 3) with outer set, b, preferably) is made open at the 85 
an inner peripheral recess, m, and a central top, so that the wing-journals may be readily 
35 step-bearing, n. In this peripheral recess fits fitted into or lifted out of the wheel. The hub 
the outer edge of the wheel-frame B, Fig. 4, of the wheel has also stop-lugs p, against which 
while to the center of this wheel-frame is the wings bear when in a vertical position, and 
keyed (see Fig. 2) the spindle B, which rests by which pressure is transmitted from the 9o 
in the step-bearing and supports the wheel, wings to the wheel. Now, it will be seen 
4O and permits it to turn with the least amount of that as the water enters at C and passcs into the 
friction. The case A is formed with an inlet, case through the opening () at top of Wallf d 
C, and an outlet, D, at which points in the it strikes (see Fig. 6) against the Wings of the 
case the chamber formed therein is of the wheel, which wings are thus quickly thrown 95 
greatest depth. At the point where the water into a vertically-pendent position, and the 
45 enters there is a vertical wall, fall, through the pressure of the water then forces the wheel 
top of which a slot, (i, is formed, which gives around, the inclined surface of the bottom 
passage to the water from the inlet C to the serving to gradually fold the wings into a 
interior of the case. The bottom of the case horizontal position as they pass around to the Io ) 
from this point to disabellied incline. From higher level, ef, and as the wheel turns its 
5O d to e it is a conical plane with straight ra- spindle B is made to turn a gear-wheel, IB, 
dial lines. From e to eit is again inclined Fig. 2, which is connected with any suitable 
as a helical plane with straight radial lines, train of registering-gears, which are made to 
- 
 
348,277 
O 
register the revolutions of the wheel; and, the 
discharge of the meter for each revolution be 
ing known in quarts, gallons, or other definite 
measures, it is obvious that the meter is thus 
made to measure the amount of water passed 
in any given number of revolutions. Just 
above the registering mechanism there is se 
cured a glass plate, A", whose edge is clamped 
down a threaded flange, o, by a screw-threaded 
ring, A, which closes on the registering mech 
anism with a water-tight joint, suitable pack 
ing or gaskets being used at the joint for this 
purpose. 
I will now describe the purpose of the curved 
Or hollowed bottom did of the case. If the 
bottom of this part of the chamber should fit 
tightly against the lower edge of the wings, 
the latter would not promptly drop to their 
proper position when they pass off of their 
2O high level ef, for the reason that there is al 
ready a pressure of water beneath them suffi 
cient to hold them up. By hollowing out the 
bottom surface a greater capacity is given this 
part of the chamber than the vertical depth of 
the wings, and the water has a chance to pass 
around the lower edge of the wings as they 
successively drop to a vertical position, and 
they are thus enabled to secure a prompt, posi 
tive, and effective action, which is so necessary 
to accurate measurement. For the same pur 
pose I also hollow out the lower side of the 
cover A', as shown at i, Figs. 2 and 6, which 
also prevents the wings from sticking by suc 
tion to the top plate when they are required to 
drop from their parallel contact therewith. 
To let the water escape from between the wing 
and the top plate as the wing passes up incline 
e e' to the higher level, ef, the top plate is 
also hollowed out at the point on its under 
In order that the wheel with its wings may 
move sensitively and smoothly, with as little 
friction as possible, they are made (as is also the 
lining of the case) of some such light non-cor 
45 rosive material as hard rubber, celluloid, &c., 
4o side, as at , Fig. 6. 
25 
35 
I do not claim, broadly, a water-meter hav- 5o 
2. The case having inlet C and outlet D, a 65 
and to secure the prompt dropping of these 
light wings I form a chamber, c, in the lower 
edge of the wings, and load it with mercury, 
lead, or other substance. 
ing radially-hung wings, as this has been done 
before; but, 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. A water-meter consisting of a circular 55 
case, having an inlet and outlet and an in 
clined bottom, a rotating disk or wheel having 
triangular openings with radial bearings, and 
wings of a corresponding shape and size jour 
naled in said bearings and adapted to fold up 6o 
into the openings or drop down to form pis 
tons, and a registering mechanism connected 
to said wheel, all combined substantially as 
shown and described. 
bellied or curved incline, d d", conical portion 
de, incline ee', and horizontal portion ef, in 
combination with a rotating wheel having ra 
dially-hung wings, as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with the case having 
inclined bottom, and the wheel arranged 
therein and having radial bearings, of the 
wings E, pivoted or hung radially in said 
wheel, and having their lower edges weighted 75 
or loaded, as described. 
4. The meter-case having an inclined bottom 
and a vertical wall, f d, with opening of at the 
top of said wall, in combination with the ro 
tating wheel having radially-hung wings, as 
described. 
5. The combination, with the case having 
inclined bottom and upper level, ef, of the 
rotating wheel with radially-hung wings and " 
the top plate having cut-away space ", as and 85 
for the purpose described. 
FRANKLIN T. GILBERT. 
Witnesses: 
SOLON C. KEMON, 
CHAS. A. PETTIT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348377.txt	(No Model.) 
0 
0 Cie 
No. 348,377, 
 
H. BOWE. 
CANDLE BURNER. 
Patented Aug. 31, 1886. 
WITNESSES 
2Se: 
 
INVENTOR: 
(1- 
BY -eungs, 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HUBERT BOVE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CAN DE BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 348,377, dated August 31, 1886. 
Amplication filed May 15, 1886. Serial No. 202,274. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HUBERT BOVE, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Can 
dle-Burners, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention while applicable to candle 
burners for family and general use is more 
especially designed for use in churches, chap 
els, &c., upon the altar and other candles 
Which are usually of a large size and exposed 
to drafts that cause them to sweal. 
The main object of the invention is to pre 
vent such swealing or running of the melted 
Wax, sperin, or grease down the side of the 
candle, and like other candle-burners my im 
proved burner rests as a shield upon the top 
of the candle and descends by its gravity with. 
the burning candle. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction and arrangement of parts, all as here 
inafter fully described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section of a 
candle-burner embodying my invention and as 
in use upon a burning candle, which is shown 
only in part. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section of 
the same upon the line ac a' in Fig. 1. 
A is the upper part of the burner. This part, 
which may be of sheet metal, is of a hollow 
conical or truncated cone-shape, and is so con 
tracted at its upper and smallest open end as 
to rest upon the top of the burning candle B; 
but said upper end is constructed to extend 
above the body of the candle, and flared or 
Curved outward where so extended so as to 
form a cup or collar, b, integral with the body 
of the cap or part A, and having shelving in 
terior sides, whereby the melted wax, &c., of 
the candle will not only be prevented from 
running down the candle, but also over or 
down the outside of the burner in case of the 
lighted candle being exposed to a draft and 
the melted wax or sperm, &c., will be held in 
place around the burning wick. 
C is the lower part of the burner connected 
to the upper or cap A-as, for instance, by 
O 
20 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
three or other suitable number of bolts, c. 
This base part C, which is in the form of a 
ring with its central opening, d, of Sufficient 
size to receive the candle freely or loosely 
through it, is of considerable weight to hold 
the cap part. A firmly upon the candle. To 
insure the burner, however, always being sus 
tained in an erect position when in use, and to 
prevent it from tipping sidewise and to make 
it gradually follow down the candle as the lat 
ter burns away, the base part C is provided 
with three or any other suitable number of 
screws, f, adjustable from its exterior and pro 
jecting inwardly toward the body of the call- 65 
die and with their inner ends suitably round 
ed or shaped to present easy guiding surfaces 
for the burner on or against and down the Can 
dle. These adjustable steadying guides or 
screws also serve to adapt the burner to irreg- 70 
ularities in the thickness of the candles to 
which the burner is suited-that is, to varying 
thicknesses at different parts of the candle 
and will answer, if desired, to make the same 
burner apply to candles of different standard 75 
SIZeS. 
Disa cylinder, tube, or burner-body, arranged 
between the cap A and base C of the burner, 
and of considerably larger cross dimension than 
the candle, so as to give a free air-Space be 
Said body D may be 
tween it and the candle. 
made either of opaque, transparent, or trans 
lucent material-as, for instance, of sheet 
metal or of glass. When made of sheet metal, 
it should have perforations 0 in its sides alike 
to supply air to keep the candle from soften 
ing or melting and to furnish air for keeping 
up the combustion when the burner, by the 
consumption of the candle, rests upon the 
candle stick or holder. As, however, it may 
not always be convenient or desirable to have 
these perforations in the sides of the body D, 
especially when said body is made of glass, I 
provide the basepart or ring C with any number 
of air-passages, h, adapted to admit air from 
the exterior to the interior of the body D, even 
when the latter rests upon the candle stick or 
holder, for the same purpose or purposes as 
the perforations in the sides of the body. 
top of the candle, so that it may readily be 
lighted or extinguished by the ordinary means 
My burner it will be perceived exposes the IOO 
8) 
90 
95 
3 
348,377 
like extension, a lower ring-shaped portion 
having a series of air-passages, an intermedi 
ate body portion, bolts for securing the sev 
eral parts together, and guiding and steady 
ing screws in the base of the same, substan 
tially as herein shown and described. 
2. The combination, with a candle-burner 
having an opening in its base for the passage 
of a candle through the same, of guiding and 
steadying screws in the said base, substan 
tially as herein shown and described. 
HUBERT BOVE. 
25 
Witnesses: 
A. GREGORY, 
EDGAR, TATE. 
employed for such purposes-as, for instance, 
those used in lighting and extinguishing tall 
altar-candles. It essentially differs from other 
candle-burners provided with a chimney and 
having rods on the candlestick made to form 
guides for the burner as it follows the burning 
candle; also differs from shade or globe hold 
ers for candles carried by rings which rest 
upon the candle and closely hug but follow 
down the candle as it is consumed. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. An improved candle-burner, consisting 
15 of a conical upperportion having a flaring cup 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348477.txt	(No Model.) 
S. H. SHORT & J. W. NESMITH, 
ELECTRIC RAILWAY, 
No. 348,477, 
Patented Aug. 31, 1886. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIDNEY H. SHORT AND JOHN W. NESMITH, OF DEN VER, COLORADO. 
ELECTRIC RAILWAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 348,477, dated August 31, 1886. 
Application filed December 18, 1885. 
Serial No. 1S6,067. (No model.) 
To all whom it inva? concern: 
Be it known that we, SIDNEY H. SHORT and 
JOHN W. NESMITH, of Denver, in the county 
of Arapahoe and State of Colorado, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Electric Railways; and we do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same. 
Our invention relates to an electric railway, 
such as that shown in an application filed by 
us in the United States Patent Office on the 
7th day of November, 1SS5. 
The invention relates to the non-conducting 
bar and its contacting-strips which are carried 
in connection with the motor or translating 
devices, and continually break the circuit of 
the main conductor and cause the current to 
be diverted through the motor or translating 
device. 
The invention consists of the special con 
struction of the conducting-strips which are 
fixed to the insulated bar, whereby any short 
circuiting of the current through the main con 
ductor at the instant when the non-conducting 
bar with its strips is in connection with the 
circuit-closers of two sections is avoided. 
In connection with this invention we use the 
insulated conductor and circuit-closing pieces, 
the Springs at their ends in connection with 
moving bar having strips, in the same general 
manner as explained in our aforesaid applica 
tion. 
Instead of the insulated block in one of the 
strips connected to the helix and an armature 
With connections to the motor to avoid short 
circuiting, and to maintain the current upon 
the motor-connections, we use a simple con 
struction and arrangement of the strips alter 
nately arranged and extending to one end only 
of the non-conducting bar, and we have also 
devised an arrangement of the conducting 
strips whereby one is around each end and ex 
tending a part of the way back upon the un 
occupied part of the non-conducting bar to 
prevent sparking. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a diagram representing an arrangement of the 
conducting-strips on the insulated bar. Fig. 
2 shows the same construction with the posi 
5o tion of the insulated bar shifted to the left. 
Fig. 3 shows the same general construction 
with a modified form of the strips on the in 
sulated bar to prevent sparking. 
The conductors are shown at (, b. c, each 
one of these representing an insulated section 
with bare contact-springs 1234 at their ends, 
adapted normally to form the electric connec 
tions between the sections, and adapted also 
to be removed from each other and to return 
automatically into electric contact. 
A represents the non-conducting bar, which 
is to be carried upon the car or other moving 
body proceeding upon the railway. It is 
made of a length adapted to reach and overlap 
two of the spring-connections at the same 
time-that is to say, it will reach the next pair 
of the spring-circuit closers before leaving the 
next preceding. It will be understood that 
the spring-contacts are the only points of the 
conductors which are bare, and the non-con 
ducting bar A is always in contact with one 
pair at least of the springs. The bar has con 
ducting-strips, as in our said application, ar 
ranged upon its surface on opposite sides to 
bear upon the springs, and thereby to form 
electrical connections between the conductor 
and the motor on the car. The conductor (as 
well as the motor) is carried upon this car or 
other moving body, as explained in said ap 
plication; but to prevent short - circuiting 
through the conductor when the bar is in con 
tact with two sections, the two metallic strips 
a; and 1, which are attached to the insulated bar 
carried by the car, are not applied to the bar 
on either side (as in our said application) with 
both their ends even at the ends of the insulated 
bar, but one end of a terminates at the end of 
the insulating-bar and the other end of a does 
not extend to the opposite end of said bar. On 
the oppositeside of the insulating-bar the strip 
y is arranged in the same manner, but at the 
opposite end. Just as the bar is in connec 
tion with two circuit-closers at once the cir 
cuit closer lhas one of its contacts against the 
Strip ac, and the other contact, 3, of circuit 
closer 1 is immediately on the insulated bar. 
The opposite side of circuit-closer 2 is also im 
mediately on the bar. Therefore no current can 
pass over the wirely to short-circuit the motor 
or the line-wire. The other side, 4, of the cir 
cuit-closer 2 is against the strip ty, and the cur 
rent will flow over the wire a into the strip a 
35 
55 
75 
IOO 
2 
348,477 
sectional conductor, the parts being combined 
and operating substantially as described. 
3. In combination with a suitable way, a 
conductor composed of insulated sections hav 
ing bare contact ends adapted normally to 5o 
close the connections between the sections and 
to be separated and return automatically to 
their normal position, an electric motor or 
translating device carried upon the way, a 
non-conducting bar carried with the motor 55 
adapted to separate the bare ends or contacts 
at any point and to hold them open until its 
forward end reaches the next contact-points, 
conducting-strips on said bar extending to one 
end only on one side and to the other end only 6o 
on the other side of the bar, and electrical con 
nections between said strips and the motor and 
translating device, all substantially as de 
Scribed. 
conductor composed of insulated sections hav 
ing bare contact ends adapted normally to 
close the connections between the sections and 
to be separated and to return automatically to 
their normal position, an electric motor or to 
translating device carried upon the way, a 
non-conducting bar carried with the motor, 
adapted to separate the bare ends or contacts 
at any point and to hold them open until its 
forward end reaches its next contacts, con- 75 
ducting-strips on said bar extending to one 
end only on one side and to the other end only 
on the other side and turned over the ends, 
and electric connections between said strips 
and the motor or translating device, all sub- 8c 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
4. In combination with a suitable way, a 65 
- 
SIDNEY H. SHORT. 
JOHN W. NESMITE. 
Witnesses: 
WM. G. EVANs, 
HOWARD EVANS. 
. 
up through the wire 0, the motor M, and the 
wire p to the strip , and out onto the section 
of the wire c, as indicated by the arrow. Now, 
before the right-hand end of the insulating-bar 
5 with its strips shall have left the circuit-closer 
2 to move in a left-hand direction, the two con 
tact-pieces of circuit-closers 1 will be on the 
strips ac and ), as shown in Fig. 2, and there 
is no possibility for a current from either the 
Io motor or the main line to pass over the Section 
of wire b until the two parts of the circuit 
closer at 2 shall have come together. 
Fig. 3 represents another method of putting 
strips on the insulating-bar. As shown, a 
15 does not terminate at the end of the bar, 
but is bent around its end, so that it laps 
back on the same side to which the strip 
y is attached, but it does not come into 
contact with the end of y, and there is 
2O considerable space left between their ends, 
thus exposing the insulated bar. In the same 
manner gy is bent around the other end of the 
bar. The object of thisis to allow the contact 
pieces of the circuit-closers to be short-cir 
25 cuited threugh the bent end of the metallic 
strip before it shall have passed from between 
them, thereby avoiding any sparking on leav 
ing a circuit-closer. 
We claim as our invention 
1. In an electric railway, an electric motor 
adapted to be carried upon the car and elec 
trically connected with conducting-strips on an 
insulating-bar, also carried with the car, the 
contact-strips covering only part of the length 
35 of the bar and acting in connection with con 
tact-pieces of a sectional conductor, the parts 
being combined and operating substantially 
as described. 
2. In an electric railway, an electric motor 
adapted to be carried upon the car and elec 
trically connected with conducting-strips on an 
insulating-bar, also carried with the car, the 
contact-strips covering only part of the length 
of the bar and being turned over the ends and 
4S acting in connection with contact-pieces of a 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348577.txt	(No Model.) 
C. R. PEASLEE. 
POWER SHEET METAL GR00 WING MACHINE. 
No. 348,577. 
Patented Sept. 7, 1886. 
N 
S) 
N 
ae/ca is esses; 
re. -, -6-26 
2%. 
S. 
 
! 
N. 
Ze were Zerg 
C22-7-2es 7. Zasz. 
-Zy /laday ?ad ?lacock w 
22's 12/or zeys: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES R. PEASLEE, OF LOUIS WILLE, KENTUCKY. 
POWER SHEET META - GRO OVING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 348,577, dated September 7, 1886. 
Application filed April 12, 1886. Serial No. 198,550. 
(No model.) 
O 
i 5 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES R. PEASLEE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in 
Louisville, in the county of Jefferson and State 
of Kentucky, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Power Sheet-Metal-Grooving 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. My invention relates to grooving-machines 
for compressing and finishing folded or inter 
locked sheet-metal seams. The machines 
heretofore commonly in use for this purpose 
have ordinarily consisted of a goose-neck 
frame, on the lower limb of which the seam is 
placed, while the upper limb carries a travel 
ing head or slide, upon which is mounted a 
grooving-roller. As this roller travels back 
and forth over the stock or seam, being re 
volved by a crank by hand, the seam is com 
pressed between said roller and the lower limb 
of the goose-neck, the upper limb of the goose 
neck serving as a guide for the traveling head 
or slide which carries the roller. Such ma 
chines are comparatively slow in operation, 
and, owing to the fact that the spring of the 
goose-neck is liable to be considerably greater 
when the roller head or slide is near the outer 
and free end of the limb (the leverage then be. 
ing great) than when near their inner ends, 
uneven and unsatisfactory work is often pro 
duced, especially in folding and seaming heavy 
stock. 
In my invention two power-driven groov 
ing-rollers are employed, one flat and the 
other grooved, and mounted one on each of 
the limbs of the goose-neck at the outer or free 
end thereof. The boxes or bearings of one of 
these rollers-the upper one, preferably-is 
adjustable up and down by a hand-screw, so 
that any desired degree of pressure may be 
exerted upon the stock or seam as it passes 
between the rollers. The grooving-rollers be 
ing both stationary on the outer ends of the 
goose-neck limbs, the same degree of pressure 
45 will be exerted throughout the whole length 
of the seam on all parts thereof as it passes or 
feeds between the rollers, and uniform and 
perfect work may therefore be done. The 
lower roller is driven by power from a pulley 
shaft through a sprocket chain and wheels. 
The pulley-shaft has two oppositely-driven 
loose pulleys, and the sheet-metal stock or 
seam, after being passed into the goose-neck 
between the rollers, is then passed out or back 
by reversing the motion of the grooving-roller. 
This is done by means of a sliding double 
clutch on the pulley-shaft, which engages first 
one and then the other of the oppositely-mov 
ing driving-pulleys. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, and in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a machine embody 
ing my invention. Fig. 2 is a side elevation 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail view of the 
reversing mechanism. Fig. 4 is a front end 
view. Fig. 5 is an enlarged view of the roll 
ers. Fig. 6 is a similar view showing the form 
of the rollers employed for corner or angle 
work. Fig. 7 is a detail view of the treadle or 
lever for operating the clutch, and Fig. 8 is a 
section on line 8 S of Fig. 2. 
In said drawings, A represents the goose 
neck frame of the machine, having two limbs, 
a and a, with a slot or open space, a, between 
said limbs for the sheet or sheets of metal be 
ing seamed to pass into. 
B B are the two grooving-rollers, the lower 
one, B, having a groove, b, in its periphery 
for the folds of the seam and the upper being 
smooth. The rollers B and B are mounted in 
vertical slots a' in the limbs at and (c. The 
shaft b' of the lower roller is journaled in suit 
able bearings on the limb a near its end. The 
shaft b of the upper roller, B, is journaled on 
a vertically-adjustable forked slide, C, mount 
ed in suitable guides, c, on the limb a', so that 
the roller B may be adjusted to and from the 
roller B. This adjustment is effected by a 
screw, D, having a collar, d, which fits against 
a cap piece, d", secured to the limb a', through 
which cap-piece the screw passes and enters 
a threaded hole in the slide C. The screw D 
is furnished with a hand-wheel, d, and by 
turning the screw the rollers B and B may be 
made to exert any desired degree of pressure 
upon the stock or seam passing between them. 
The shaft l of the roller B extends through 
transverse slots a' in the limb at, to permit of 
the vertical adjustment of the roller. The 
depth and width of the groove b in the roller 
B corresponds to the seam or folds in the 
sheet metal to be compressed. 
The shaft b' of the non-adjustable roller B 
SO 
35 
75 
95 
IO 
 
348,577 
5 
IO 
e 
is furnished with a sprocket-wheel, E, and is 
driven by a chain, F, from the pulley-shaft G, 
which is provided with a sprocket-wheel, g. 
The pulley-shaft G is furnished with two loose 
pulleys, H and H', driven in opposite direc 
tions, each provided with a clutch-surface, h. 
The double-faced clutch h", between said pull 
leys H and H', slides on the shaft G, and the 
shaft is caused to revolve with the clutch by 
a pin or key, h", which passes through a slot 
in Said shaft. By moving the clutch h' into 
engagement with one or the other of said pull 
leys H H the rollers B B are driven in one 
direction or the other, as may be desired, to 
pass the Seam or stock in or out of the goose 
neck. The pulleys H and FI may be conven 
iently driven in opposite directions by simply 
employing a straight belt for one and a cross 
belt for the other. The cluch l' is moved into 
and out of engagement with the pulleys H and 
H by a bell-crank lever, K, having a yoke, k, 
On one end connected with said clutch, and op 
erated by a treadle or lever, k", through a con 
necting rod or link, k". A spring, f, serves 
to hold the clutch in engagement with the for 
Ward driving - pulley, H, except when the 
treadle or lever k" is depressed. 
T. represents a gage or guide for the edge of 
the sheet, to assist the operator in guiding the 
Sean between the rollers. It is mounted in a 
hollow boss, l, in the goose-neck, and is ad 
justable to and from the rollers B B to ac 
Commodate sheets of different widths. Its de 
pending arm t is furnished with a vertically 
adjustable rest, l, to support the edge of the 
sheet. 
The seam or fold throughout its whole length 
comes twice between the grooving-rollers 
Once as the sheet passes in and then again as 
it passes back or out-and the pressure on 
every part of the seam is alike. 
In Fig. 6 the periphery of the rollers B and 
B is shaped to receive and compress a lock 
Sean at the corner of a square can. 
The upper roller, B, is not driven posi 
tively, except by friction with its companion 
roller, B. 
The machine is designed to operate upon 
interlocked or folded seams uniting two flat 
sheets of sheet metal together, or such seam 
uniting the two flat sides of a square or rect 
angular sheet-metal can. In Fig. 6 the seam 
and two sheets of a square can being operated 
upon is indicated in place between the rollers 
B and B. In Fig. 5 the seam uniting two flat 
sheets in the same plane is shown between the 
rollers B and B. 
In operation the outer edge 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
Witnesses: 
D. E. MAPOTHER, 
DAVID J. KUEBLER. 
75 
of the sheet being operated upon will abut 
against the vertical arm l of the guide L, and 
rest upon the adjustable ledge or rest lithere 
of. When operating upon a seam uniting two 
flat sheets together in the same plane, the rest 
l will be adjusted on about a level with the 
metal point of the rollers B B, as indicated 
in Fig. 4 or Fig. 2. When operating upon 
angle work, as in Fig. 6, the rest i will be cor 
respondingly adjusted, so as to support the 
outer edge of the sheet, and in both cases the 
gage or guide L will be adjusted in or out, so 
that the depending arm t may abut against 
the outer edge of the sheet. 
I hereby disclaim the devices shown and de 
scribed in Letters Patent Nos. 57,980, 61,791, 
78,677, and 337,427. 
- 
I claim 
1. A sheet-metal-grooving machine consist 
ing in the combination, with a goose - neck 
frame, of a pair of grooving-rollers mounted on 
the outer ends of the limbs of said goose-neck, 
sprocket-wheels E and g, chain F, pulley-shaft 
G, oppositely-driven pulleys H and H', hav 
ing clutch-faces h, and double clutch h", sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with goose-neck frame 
A, having limbs at a', and slot a', of rollers 
B and B, said roller B having groove b, and 
said roller B' being journaled in an adjustable 
slide, C, sprocket-wheels E and g, chain F, 
pulley-shaft G, oppositely-driven pulleys H 
and H', having clutch - faces h, and double 
clutch h", substantially as specified. 
3. A sheet-metal-grooving machine consist 
ing in the combination, with a goose-neck 
frame, of a pair of grooving-rollers mounted 
on the outer ends of the limbs of said goose 
neck, sprocket-wheels E and g, chain F, pull 
ley-shaft G, oppositely-driven pulleys H and 
H', having clutch-faces hand double clutch h", 
and a gage or guide, T, for the outer edge of the 
sheet as it is fed between said rollers, substan 
tially as specified. 
4. The combination, with goose-neck frame 
A, having limbs at and a', with slot a between 
said limbs, of roller B, having groove b, and 
roller B", adjustable slide C, and screw D, 
sprocket-wheels E and g, chain F, pulley 
shaft G, pulleys H and H", having clutch-faces 
l, double clutch h", and lever K, substantially 
as specified. 
CHAS. R. PEASLEE. 
90 
9 5 
OO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348677.txt	(Model.) 
No. 348,677, 
2 I) 
J. S. LAKE. 
BR00M CORN SIZING MACHINE, 
Furt 
  
 
 
  
UEFI 
List".7". "HY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESSE S. LAKE, OF PLEASANTVILLE, NEWJERSEY. 
BROOM - CORN - SZING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 348,677, dated September 7, 1836. 
Application filed July 6, 1885. Serial No. 170,833. (Model.) 
rear ones extend above the top of the distrib 
uting-table A and form standards, which, in 
connection with the standards A", form a sup- 55 
port for the feed-table B. 
B' is a feed-table above the front end of the 
machine. Thus I have my feed-tables above the 
machine, which does not take up any floor 
space, thus making it very convenient when 6o 
space is limited. 
DDD are cylinders extending across the 
machine and may be of any desired number 
or size. C is an endless apron passing 
around the said cylinders DDD". Said apron 65 
C is composed of belts P, (which may be made of 
chain, leather, or any other known suitable 
material; said belts P being of any desired 
width or number,) and cross-slats marked H. 
Said slats H have notches (marked H') cut in o 
their outer edges, so as to pass over the short 
metal strips A" and over the slideway J', and 
rest and slide on the level top or table A 
when the machine is in motion. Said slide 
way J" is raised above table - top A" as much 
as the metal Strips A", and is for the cut 
ends of the corn to slide along. Saidslideway 
J' extends from the knives E and G to the rear 
open space e, partly shown in Fig. 1. 
piece, A. Said standard IF has a semicircular 
piece cut out of its rear edge large enough to 
form a space for the cylinder D and endless 
apron C to revolve in. Said semicircle forms 
the continuation of the slideway J'. Said 85 
standard F has a steel plate, F, firmly set in 
flush, or nearly So, With its outer face. Said 
knife E is firmly fastened to the standard F. 
near its upper end, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, 
with its cutting-edge over and abreast of the ga 
plate F, and is just far enough out from the 
plate F to allow the outer end of the project 
ing blades of the knife G to pass between them, 
thus preventing the knife E and the project. 
ing blades of the knife G getting apart when 95 
cutting. The point of Said knife E extends 
onto the circular part of the knife G, and thus 
prevents its catching. 
It is plain that the knives E and G form a 
cutting device something like a pair of scis 
sors, and will cut with a very slow motion, 
thus Saving the power it would require to get 
up speed. The knife G is firmly fastened to 
one end of the cylinder D', and is revolved 
F is a standard firmly fastened to the side so 
73 
IOO 
25 
5 
To all, usion it may concer'7. 
Be it known that I, JESSE S. LAKE, a citi 
zen of the United States residing at Pleasant 
ville, in the county of Atlantic and State of 
New Jersey, have invented a new and useful 
Broom-Corn-Sizing Machine, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
broom-corn-sizing machine that will occupy a 
o small space, that will permit of one, two, or 
more operators feeding at the same time, that 
will do its work more correctly than has here 
tofore been accomplished, and at the same 
time require but a small amount of power to 
run it. 
I attain these objects by the mechan 
ism illustrated in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a top view with feeding-table B 
removed and feeding-table B, partly broken 
away. Fig. 2 is a side view of the machine. 
Fig. 3 is a front view of the machine. Fig. 4 
is a plan view of the standard F. Fig. 5 is a 
plan view of the knife G. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
A. A. are side pieces of the machine. 
A' A' are the end pieces. 
A' is the top. This top has an open space 
on one side, which is narrower at the front end 
of the machine and widening out by a series 
of step-like notches, A", to the rear end of the 
machine. Each different width of spacee thus 
formed is cut so that its front end is about one 
halfinch wider than its rear end, and the space 
on the notched sides of the open Spacese have 
preferably metal strips A* fast to their edges, 
extending the length of each different width 
space e and rises about three-eighths of an 
inch above the top of table A', and forms a 
slideway for the brush ends of the corn, and 
as the spaces e are narrower at their rear ends 
the cut end of the corn is gently forced against 
the guide-piece A", and thus kept even, which 
is of great importance. 
Heretofore broom-corn-sizing machines have 
had no guide-pieces for the cut ends of the corn, 
and some of the ends Will get too far out and 
some too far in, and as the brush ends are the 
first to drop through openings, they drop in 
so the wrong boxes and are unevenly sized, 
which cannot be the case with my machine. 
A are the legs of the machine, and the two 
45 
35 
40 
r 
2 
348,677 
- 
inder D'. 
with it. Said knife G may have any number 
of blades. The slats H on endless apron Chave 
to be just far enough apart to allow one of said 
slats H to be just abreast one of the blades of 
knife G as it revolves. 
F" is a fly-wheel fast on the shaft of the cyl 
I is a supporting-strip, fastened one end to 
the standard F and the other to the standard 
A, just high enough to be even with the up 
per side of the feeding belt or apron C, and is 
for the purpose of keeping the corn from tip 
ping off the apron C as it is being carried un 
der or to the knives E and G. 
J is a piece (or it may be several strips) of 
cloth, leather, or any other known suitable 
material, one end of which is fast to the top 
A" at its front end under the cylinder D', or 
nearly so, and the other end is fast to the un 
der side of the feed-table B, and is just tight 
enough to cause it to have a slight pressure 
against the cross-slats II. 
L. L L L L are cross-pieces fastened on the 
under side of the side pieces, AA, exactly be 
tween each different-sized space. Said pieces 
are made Square, and are So fastened that one 
corner is up. (Show in in Figs. i. and 2.) 
B" B" B" B" are bearings for the cind cylin 
ders, D D'. 
J" is a guide-strip to keep the slats H in 
place. 
K is a spring (or it may be a weight) fast 
ened to the rear edge of the ?eed-table B, and 
passes under the said table B' between the 
knives E and G and the end of the slats H, 
and presses slightly on the corn and prevents 
its jumping from said knives E and G as it is 
cut. 
The operation of my machine is: Put the 
cylinder D'in motion, which would carry with 
it the endless apron C, (Said motion may be 
by foot or other power,) and place the corn 
on the apron C between the slats l1, which 
may be done by one or more operatives at a 
time. Said corn will be carried to the knives 
E and G, and the piece J will keep it in place 
between the slats H. until it passes onto the 
table-top A, and is swept over the distrib 
5O 
55 
uting-spaces into boxes or baskets set to re 
ceive it. 
I am aware that prior to my invention siz 
ing-tables were well known and long used for 
sorting apples, oranges, potatoes, and other 
things. I therefore do not claim such a com 
bination, broadly; but 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A broom-corn-sizing table provided with 
distributing-apertures of different widths, each 
of which gradually narrows toward its rear 
end, the raised strips A" at the inner edges of 
said apertures, and the guide-strip A, for 
keeping the cut ends of the corn even as it 
passes over the distributing-apertures, sub 
stantially as described and shown. 
2. in a broom-corn-sizing machine, a rotary 
cutter having projecting or radial blades, in 
combination with a stationary knife or cutter, 
and a stationary plate, between which latter 
and the stationary knife the radial blades pass, 7o 
and are thus prevented from springing out of 
line of action as the corn is being cut, said 
stationary knife having its lower spring ex 
tending onto the circular or unbroken por 
tion of the rotating cutter, whereby contact 75 
with the radial blades is avoided, substan 
tially as described and shown. 
3. The knives E and G, in combination with 
the standard F, plate F, and cylinder D, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 8o 
set forth. 
65 
4. In combination, the endless apron C, the 
notched slats II, and raised limetallic strips A", 
whereby the cut corn is held a little above the 
top of the table A", and is thus more surely 85 
carried over the distributing-apertures with 
out being ridden over by said cross-slats H, 
substantially as shown. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereto set my hand this 23d day of June, 9o 
SS5. 
JESSE S. LAKE. 
Witnesses: 
DANIEL L. RISLEY, 
ANNIE. T. RISLEY. 
25 
3 5 
 
N 
N. 
O 
CO 
r 
ey 
CS 
2 
-H 
C 
gid 
a cys 
A 
go 
did 
--- 
-- 
Cld 
- 
S 
O 
O 
Cld 
Cld 
S 
m 
O 
CD 
It is hereby certified that in Letters Patent No. 34S,677, granted September 7, 
1886, upon the application of Jesse S. Lake, of Pleasantville, New Jersey, for an 
improvement in Broom-Corn Sizing-Machines, an error appears in the printed 
specification requiring the following correction: In line 73, page 2, the word spring 
should be stricken out and the word point inserted instead; and that the said Letters 
Patent should be read with this correction therein that the same may conform to the 
record of the case in the Patent Office. 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 21st day of September, A. D. 1886. 
SEAL. 
Countersigned: 
--- 
R. B. VANCE, 
Acting Commissioner of Pottents. 
D. L. HAWKINS, 
Acting Secretary of the Interior. 
- 
e 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348777.txt	Z. T. RENO, 
SLIDE WALWE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet; i. 
Patented Sept. 7, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
No. 348,777, 
P. G. 
2 
2 - 
- - s 2 
<S 
Z N Gy W NW 
  
 
 
 
 
 
F. G. A. 
  
WITNESSES 
33, 
A 
 
MZ 
& Y to 
O. 
("(s 
% 
3-cryov five 
NVENTOR 
F. G. 5 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 348,777, 
Z. T, RENO 
SLIDE WALWE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 7, 1886. 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
SN 
. 
RSSS 
N 
N 24 ?SS 
N= EN 
()~ ~ ||N 
N 
Z N 
Z 
WITNESSES 
3 3.3. 
| NVENTOR 
fee/oy, o/s4/6. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ZACHARY TAYLOR RENO, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA. 
SLIDE-VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 348,777, dated September 7, 1886. 
Application filed December 21, 1885. 
Serial No. 1S6,363. No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To a 27, whon, it may conce/72. 
Beit known that I, ZACIARY TAYLORRENO, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Orleans, in the parish of Orleans and State of 
Louisiana, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Slide-Valves for Steam-Engines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
slide-valves and the manner of admitting steam 
to them, so that the water of condensation may 
largely free itself previous to passing through 
the slide-valve in the cylinder; also, to provide 
a balanced or nearly balanced slide-valve hav 
ing a central steam-opening through it and 
having steam-pressure top and bottom of the 
valve which works over the steam-ports and 
allows the steam to exhaust into the steam 
chest, into which high steam does not enter; 
also, to provide a valve and steam-ports in 
valve-seat of engine-cylinder that will permit 
a rapid discharge of exhaust-steam, which is 
especially desirable in locomotives and high 
speed steam-engines. These objects are ob 
tained by the mechanism shown in the accom 
panying drawings, in which like letters refer 
to like parts. 
Figure 1 represents a longitudinal section 
through the slide-valve, the steam-chest, and 
steam-ports of a steam-engine cylinder. Fig. 
2 is a face view of valve-seat of engine-cyl 
inder. Fig. 3 is the face view of the bottom 
of the slide-valve. Fig. 4 is a horizontal sec 
tion of slide through line A B, Fig. 1, and 
shows, also, the valve-seat under the valve with 
the relative position of valve and steam-ports 
in valve - Seat at the end of extreme throw 
of valve. Fig. 5 is a similar view as Fig. 4, 
but shows the valve just beginning to admit 
steam and the relative size of exhaust-open 
ing. Fig. 6 shows a longitudinal section of 
valve with a regulating-cock through it. Fig. 
7 is a longitudinal section of part of a steam 
engine cylinder and piston and arrangement 
of double slide-valves. 
Steam enters steam-pipe C, Fig. 1. At D 
is a short pipe turned and fitted so it will slide 
in a bored hole of steam-chest cover E. The 
sliding pipe D is solid at bottom G, and forms 
a piston. When steam is lightly turned on 
pipe C, the condensed water in the pipe is 
driven out through holes H and drip-pipe I. 
As the pressure increases, the piston D de 
scends, overcoming the resistance of the spiral 
spring J until the holes Hin pipe D open into 
the chamber K, when the entrance to pipe I 
is cut off and steam enters chamberlK, presses 
on piston L, which works in cylinder j, formed 
by lower part of steam-chest cover E, and a 
steam joint is made by packing-rings M. The 
lower face of piston L presses an upper face of 
the valve N. The steam passes through holes 
k in piston L, thence through hole O in valve. 
N. The lower part of hole O is enlarged to 
just the extent that is necessary to make its 
area slightly less than the area of the inside of 
the piston L, so that the valve N may be nearly 
balanced, but held down by the greater press 
ure on top. 
At PQ are the ports through which pass 
alternately high and exhaust steam. The 
steam exhausts into the steam-chest R and 
passes out through hole S. 
At Fig. 4 the relative positions of valve N 
and openings P and Q in valve-seat S are 
shown when wide open. The steam is enter 
ing opening Q and exhausting out of opening 
At Fig. 5 the relative positions of valve N 
and valve-seat S are shown when steam colm 
mences to enter and steam begins to exhaust. 
It will be seen that by the shapes of the open 
ings in valve N and the openings P and Q in 
valve-seat that at all parts of the stroke the 
exhaust is larger than the steam-opening, even 
if the valve be set without any lead on the 
exhaust. This is obtained by the combined 
curved and straight lines on same opening in 
valve-seat S, and the circular or curved shaped 
opening O in valve N. 
I do not confine myself to using the herein 
described valve N in combination with the de 
scribed steam-openings in valve and valve 
seat, as the valve N can be used equally as 
well with parallelogram or other shaped open 
ings in valve and valve-seat; but I prefer the 
herein-described shapes. Nor do i confine 
myself to using the described balance-valve 
N in combination with the described mechan 
ism for removing condensed water from steam 
pipe, as the valve N can be worked advan 
P. 
- 
9O 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
45 
 
348,777 
. 
and thence escapes through hole i into es 
. 
cape-pipe. 
. 
What I claim, 
and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A solid valve provided with a direct con 
tinuous steam-passage through it from top to 
bottom face, in combination with a piston and 
cylinder over the valve, the piston resting on 
top face of valve, substantially as described. 
2. A solid slide-valve having a direct con 
tinuous central steam-passage through it, in 
combination with steam-ports in valve-seat 
provided with straight and curved edges to 
each port for the purpose of obtaining a free 
and rapid exhaust, substantially as described. 
3. The herein-described slide-valve N, in 
combination with the piston E, the cylinder 
j, the spring J, and the piston D, provided 
with the holes H to allow the water of con 
densation to pass out of steam-pipe through 
drip-pipe I, substantially as described. 
35 
4o 
45 
ZACHARY TAYLOR RENO. 
Witnesses: 
FREDERIC Cook, 
EDWARD J. BLANCHARD. 
O 
tageously without such mechanism as well as 
with it, as shown at Fig. 7, in which the valve 
N of Figs. 1, 3, 4, 5 becomes valve Y. 
Fig.6 shows a cock, T, through hole O in 
valve N. 
U is a socket-wrench handle fastened to 
cock T, and passes through a stuffing-box in 
end of steam-chest, with a handle outside to 
regulate at will the flow of steam immediately 
at the steam-openings P and Q. 
V is the valve-stem. 
This cock Tin valve N will not be used gen 
erally; but I desire to show and describe the 
arrangement if I should ever desire to use it. 
Fig. 7 shows part of a steam-engine cylin 
der, W, and piston X, and arranged for dou 
ble valves YY and double valve-pistons ZZ. 
The valves Y Y are connected together in 
any suitable way, as at a. The steam-pipe b 
branches to each steam-chest cover c. The 
steam passes in through holes d and holese in 
Valves Y. 
The drawings at Fig. 7 show the steam 
port b receiving full opening of steam. The 
port g is full open, through which the exhaust 
steam is passing out into the steam-chest h, 
i 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348880.txt	(No Model.) 
W. W. AWERELL. 
INSULATING CONDUIT, 
No. 348,880, 
Patented Sept. 7, 1886, 
: 
i 
; 
-- 
S. 
l 
t 
- 
?t- 
V 
t 
; 
(; 
: 
; 
d-te-2' = -2 = -- - - ----------- - 
- - - - 
- - 
- - 
1 - - 
- 
r 
1- 
:1 
sa 
- - - - - 
- 
a 
p. 
t 
i 
l 
: 
t 
: 
--- 
J. 
t 
& 
--- 
122zezozoz 
Zrzazzaze MezzereMZ 
azz 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. AVERELL OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
NSUATING - CONDUT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 348,380, dated September 7, 1886. 
Application filed June 26, 1885. 
Serial No. 109,857. (No model.) 
55 
55 
io 
75 
To all, u?ion, it notif concer'72: 
Beit known that i, WILLIAM W. AVERELL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
vented new and useful Improvements in Insu 
lating-Conduits, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
insulating-conduits for the purpose of trans 
mitting electrical energy to a motor by which 
a public conveyance is propelled, or for un 
derground wires, or both; and it is the pur 
pose of my invention to provide simple and 
efficient means for accomplishing such results 
without loss of energy, except by friction, from 
the point of its generation to place or places 
where it is applied. 
It is also the purpose of my invention to 
provide a simple and efficient return-circuit, 
and to prevent the current from being short 
circuited by accident. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure. 1 is a 
transverse vertical section of a road-bed, illus 
trating one method of applying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same with part 
of the road-bed removed. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
cross-section showing a modification. 
In the Said drawings, the reference-numeral 
1 designates the streetway or that portion of 
it containing the road-bed of a street-railway. 
The numeral 2 denotes the rails, laid in the 
usual manner, and in Fig. 2 I have represent 
ed a cal' running upon said rails and driven 
by an electric motor, 3, which may be of any 
known or suitable construction. 
In order to utilize the electrical energy for 
propelling cars it is necessary to expose the 
st 'face of Olle side of an electric conductor to 
the totich of a wheel or brush having good 
conductivity, in order to take up the requisite 
current for actuating the motor which may 
be attached to the car, as shown, or mounted 
upon a separate truck. When the conductor 
is used upon a street of a city or large town, 
it is necessary that its insulating-bed should 
be composed of material suitable for a pave 
ment which will withstand the wear and tear 
of travel. To obtain practical results from 
such a system it is also necessary that the 
electrical energy, after passing through the 
motor, should be returned to its source through 
a metallic circuit or to the earth. This return 
may be made through the rails of the road, or 
in the manner hereinafter described. 
In carrying my invention into operation, I 
provide a continuous box or open trough, 4, 
which is placed upon its bottom upon a Wooden 
stringer, 5, buried in the ground at such depth 
as to leave the edges of the box ?lush with the 
surface of the street or pavement. This box 
or trough is preferably made of channel-iron, 
Wrought into shape and having suitable flanges, 
6, projecting laterally from its bottom, where 
by it may be spiked or bolted to the Wooden 
stringer 5. 
It is also provided with outwardly 
projecting flanges 7 upon its upper edges for 
a purpose presently to be described. 
In order to give a perfect insulation to the 
box, vertical wooden planks S are placed upon 
the stringer 5 near its edges and just outside 
the flanges 6. These planks are flush with 
the roadway or pavement, and the space be 
tween them is filled in with the same insulat 
ing material used within the trough, and more 
fully described hereinafter. 
Within the box or conduit 4 may be ar 
ranged any suitable number of separate con 
ductors, 9-such as electric - motor, electric 
light, and telephone wires, &c.-leading out at 
different points to houses, stores, or hotels. 
These wires are laid or embedded in the same 
insulating material, consisting of all asphaltic 
concrete, composed, substantially, of asphaltic 
cement and silica, and possessing those quall 
ties requisite for an insulating underground 
conduit. When the box 4 is being filled with 
the asphaltic concrete, an I-rail, 10, is laid cen 
trally therein, with its upper surface exposed 
and flush with the surface of the compressed 
concrete. This rail forms the conductor for 
the electrical energy. 
Upon one end of the car is centrally mount 
ed a spring-arm, 11, on the end of which is 
journaled a roll, 12, both the arm and the roll 
having good conductivity. The elasticity 
of the former is such as to preserve complete 
contact between the roller and the I-rail, and 
the current is carried to the motor by a wire, 
13, held to the arm 11 by a binding-post. 
Upon the opposite end of the car, or at any 
suitable point, are mounted two elastic con 
ducting-arms, 14, of similar construction, each 
90 
IOO 
O 
4) 
45 
 
348,88) 
carrying metallic rollers 15, and arranged at 
such distance apart that said rollers shall rest 
upon the flanges 7. These rollers are connect 
ed by Wires 16 with the motor 3 in such man 
her that they receive the electrical energy after 
it has passed through the motor and conduct 
it to the flanges of the box, whereby it is re 
turned to the place of generation. As a mod 
ification of this construction, I may sink the 
tough or box 4 beneath the surface, as seen in 
Fig. 3, and form an open channel, 17, in the 
roadway over the X-rail 10, insulation against 
lateral contaet being effected by fining the 
vertical sides of the channel with wooden 
strips 1S. In such case the wheel 12 will drop 
into the channel and lie upon the rail, the con 
struction being in other respects the same, ex 
cept that the return circuit, if desired, be made 
by means of the rails of the road. In order to 
keep the exposed surface of the rail 10 free 
from accumulation of dirt or other foreign 
matter, a brush, 19, is mounted upon the for 
Ward end of the car in such manner as to bear 
upon the rail and remove such matter from it, 
leaving it clear for the contact of the wheel 
12. 
prefer to make the conducting-rail 10 
of copper, though other metals may be used, 
the size in cross-section being proportioned 
to the desired power and to the conductiv 
ity of the metal used. The asphaltic con 
crete in which the rail is embedded should be 
laid at a temperature not less than 200Fahr 
enheit, and should be perfectly compressed. 
The box 4 may, as shown, belaid centrally 
With relation to the rails, or it may be laid 
beside one of them. The-rail may be dupli 
cated for the return-circuit, and brushes may 
be used, instead of rolls, to take up and 6. 
turn the electrical energy. 
In Letters Patent No. 293,214, granted to 
me the 12th day of February, 1 SS4, for an im 
ProVelment in asphaltic concrete conduits the 
mannel of preparing and laying the insulat 
ing material in which the I rail is embedded 
is fully described. 
As I have already mentioned, the insulat 
ing material in which the conducting-rail and 
other electrical conductors are embedded must 
be of a character to withstand the severe wear 
to which it is subjected by the traffic of large 
cities. The comparatively indestructible chair 
acter of the asphaltic concrete. I enploy for 
this purpose is clearly shown by the fact that 
substantially the same material patented to 
me the 14th day of January, 1SS, has been 
in constant use upon the principal thorough 
fares of Washington city for eight years past 
Without material deterioration. 
It Will be seen that my invention contem 
plates a twofold purpose-viz., the mechan 
ical anchoring of the conducting-rail in such 
manner that it shall not be displaced and the 
insulation of the same. I effect, both of these 
objects by laying the rail in soft cement, which 
is then allowed to set, whereby it is held in 65 
place with great strength and firmness, and at 
the same time fully insulated. I do not, there 
fore, limit my present invention to any espe 
cial composition of cement, provided only that 
it is of proper insulating character and pos 
sesses such a degree of strength and durabil 
ity as to render it capable of use for the pur 
pose. 
Heretofore a conducting-rail has been laid 
in a street-railway and partly embedded there 
in, the head of the rail projecting above the 
surface. In this construction, however, the 
rail is described as being fairly 'insulated 
only, and the material in which it is laid is 
not an asphaltic non - conducting cement, 
Moreover, with a rail having the head raised 
above the surface there is some obstruction of 
the roadway as far as relates to the passage of 
teams. In my invention the conducting-rail 
is wholly embedded and covered, save as to its 
tread, in a non-conducting cement, which not 
only insulates it, but serves as a smooth, hard, 
and comparatively indestructible roadway, 
which affords complete insulation, together 
with convenience of travel. 
75 
90 
95 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a body of cement, 
of a conducting-rail insulated thereby and 
wholly embedded therein, save as to its upper 
surface, which is exposed, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. An electric conductor for motors for rail 
way-cars, consisting of a conducting-rail, a 
non-conducting body of asphaltic concrete in 
which said rail is buried, and an insulated roo 
metallic box containing said concrete and 
serving for the return-circuit, substantially as 
described. 
3. An electric conductor for motors for rail 
way-cars, consisting of a rail embedded in a 
non-conducting body of asphaltic cement, an 
insulated iron box containing said concrete, a 
wheel mounted on the car and running on the 
conducting-rail, and wheels also carried by the 
car and running on the flanged edges of the I IO 
insulated box, said wheels being connected 
with the motor to take up the energy from the 
rail and return it through the box, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The combination, with a body of asphaltic 
cement, of a conducting-rail embedded there 
in save as to its upper surface, and a conduct 
ing wheel or brush moving upon said exposed 
surface, substantially as described. 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig- I2O 
II 5 
- WM. W. AVERELL. 
Witnesses: 
y 
JAMES L. NORRIS, 
J. A. RUTHERFORD. 
O 
45 
SO 
55. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US348980.txt	(No Model.) 
A. M. LANE. 
ESCAPEMENT LEVER FOR TIME PIECES, 
No. 348,980, 
Patented Sept. 14, 1886. 
y, zassag 
- 
/7 v2/7/2/, 
/72, 
in. PETERS. Photo-tithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AL AIER ON AI. LAN E OF MERIDEN, CONNECTIC UT. 
ESCAPE MENT LEVER FOR ME. PECES. 
G-3 CEFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 348,980, dated September i4, 1886. 
Application filed February 6, 1886. Serial No. 190,97's. (No model.) 
5 
C, 
25 
To (t(/, 7thon, it inctly concei'i: 
Be it known that I, ALMIERON Mi. LANE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Meri 
den, in the county of New Haven and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Escapement-Levers, 
of which the following is a specification. 
Mly invention relates to improvements in 
escapement-level's for marine clocks; and the 
objects of my improvement are to lessen the 
cost of production and to produce a lever 
which shall be very durable and accurate. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of my lever, together with the 
verge and the shaft upon which they are 
mounted. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same. 
and Fig. 3 is a plan view of the blank from 
which lay said lever is formed. All of said 
figures are on an enlarged scale. 
A designates the shaft, B the verge, and C 
the escapement - lever. As in prior clocks, 
this lover is provided with a poise at one end 
and at the other end with a fork having a cen 
tral slot and a guai'(-)in for Operation, 'C- 
spectively, in connection with the pin and 
crescent of the balance-Wheel. 
Heretofore the guard-pin in levers of this 
class has been male of a separate piece and 
secured to the lever iy Screws, livets, and 
analogous fastenings, and oftentimes of wire 
bent up and secured by one end to the lever 
within the hole made to receive it. This pin 
has generally been secured by both riveting 
and soldering one end to the lever; but some 
times the soldering has been omitted. Such 
a constructioll is not only expensive, but con 
siderable labor is required after the lever is 
made to bring the guard-pin to the exact 
length required, and even when fitted it is 
very liable to become loosened, so as not to op 
erate pl"operly. 
In my ever the end which serves as a poise 
I have marked (t, the folk having the central 
 
slot is marked b, and the guard-pin is marked 
c. 
I first blank out the lever C in the form 
shown in Fig. 3, without any proper slot in 
the end which is to form the fork; but I form 
at the middle of this end the guard-pin c, 
which, however, projects longitudinally be. . 
yond the end of the rest of the blank. This 
blank is then placed in a combined cutting 
and swaging die, which acts to simultaneously 
cut the blank on the parallel broken lines 
shown in Fig. 3 and bend or swage the metal 
So cut into the form represented in Figs.1 and 
2, thereby offsetting the body of the guard 
pine from the slot of the fork and bringing 
the Outel' portion of said pin into a plane at 
one side of the longitudinal plane of the lever 
C, and drawing its end inward into proper 
Working position, which, in the particular con 
struction show 1), is in the same transverse 
plane as that of the end of the fork. By this 
construction I save the expense of drilling the 
lever and of riveting and soldering the guard 
pin therein. The construction is not only more 
economical at first, but the construction is so 
accurate that no ?itting is required, and the 
guard pin or point is so rigid as to be very du 
rable, and not likely to be accidentally dis 
placed. 
The verge herein shown is made the subject 
Of anothel' application of even date here with. 
I claim as any invention 
The herein-described escapement-lever, hav. 
ing the guard-pin c, whose body is offset from 
the slot of the fork, said fork, guard-pin, and 
body of the lever all being formed of one piece 
of sheet metal the thickness of which is sub 
stantially represented in the finished lever, 
substantially as described, and for the pur 
pose specified. 
Witnesses: 
AIMERON MI. LANE. 
JAAIES SHEPARD, 
JOHN EDWARDS, Jr. 
45 
75 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349080.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 349,080, 
J. E. BINGHAM, 
HORSESHOE, 
Patented Sept. 14, 1886. 
th. 
WITNESSES 
a/ aw 
%, 
INVENTOR 
4 & e-ye 
ATTORNEY. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN E. BINGHAM, OF WALLA WALLA, WASHINGTON TERRITORY. 
HORSE SHOE, 
SPECEFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 349,080, dated September 14, 1886. 
Application ?ited February G, 1886. Serial No. 191,056. 
(No model.) 
. 
To aid vion it; nay concern. 
I overcome the liability of the heel parts of the 
shoe twisting or turning beneath the foot of 
Be it known that I, JoHN E. BINGHAM, a 
the animal when traveling over rough surfaces. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Walla 
Walla, in the county of Walla Walla and Ter 
These objects I attain by the means illus 
ritory of Washington, have invented a new 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I is a plan view of a horseshoe embody 
and useful Horseshoe, of which the following 
is a specification. 
ing my invention; and Fig. 2 is a perspective 
in detail of a portion of the toe-piece and of 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in the formation of shoes 
One of the side pieces, the said view illustrat 
ing more clearly the construction of each at 
for horses and mules; and it consists substan 
the ends where they are movably united or in 
tially in the same as constructed and attached, 
and in such other details as will hereinafter 
terlocked. 
be distinctly described, and pointed out in the 
Reference being had to the several parts by 
specification and claims. 
the letters marked thereon, A represents the 
front or toe piece of the shoe, whose outer or 
Horseshoeshave heretofore been constructed 
exterior edge is formed of a contour correspond 
in Several separate pieces, not united or con 
nected with each other, but brought more or 
ing to the forward end of a horse's foot, and 
whose inner edge may be of any preferred con 
less near to each other when applied to the 
tour, as long as its two ends remain as broad or 
hoof. Other shoes have been formed of sev 
wide as is consistent with the object to be at 
eral pieces and united at the toe or at the sides 
tained. Those ends of the toe-piece are cor 
by joints of different sorts, but all riveted to 
gether or fastened together by equivalent 
respondingly formed with a depression or re 
means and allowing more or less perfectly of 
cessa, while that part of the metal constituting 
expansion of the shoe at the heels; but in my 
the inner side walls of such recesses are formed 
adjacently with a projection, b, mortised or 
judgment all these shoes have failed to fully 
cut away from beneath, as represented at c, 
accomplish what is needed. So far as I am 
and that part thereof forming the outer side 
aware no shoe has yet been devised which, 
while sufficiently protecting the hoof, at the 
Walls of the recesses is formed at the end in 
the shape of a double bevel, as seen at d. The 
same time will allow the hoof to grow and ex 
tend in all directions in a free and natural 
recesses a tend or incline toward each other, 
manner. A natural hoof grows out quite rap 
or, in other words, are coincident with the outer 
edge of the toe-piece, the object of which will 
idly at the toe, and also spreads in all direc 
tions as it grows, so that after a short time, if 
be described hereinafter. 
allowed its natural course, it is larger at its 
BB represent the two side pieces, which 
Complete the formation of the shoe, and which 
bottom surface than it was when the shoe was 
are formed at their inner ends with a tongue, 
attached. With the shoes in use this natural 
e, corresponding to in shape and fitting in the 
tendency is restricted by the imperfect char 
acter of the shoe, and consequently malforma 
recesses a, the said side pieces being also 
formed with a projection, l', and a mortise, c', 
tions of the hoof and foot result. 
The object of the present invention is to so 
by which to overlap or interlock with the cor 
respondingly-formed ends of the toe-piece. 
construct a shoe as to permit a ready accom 
The side pieces are formed on the opposite 
modation thereof to the growth or extension 
of the hoof in all directions-namely, at the 
side of the tongs of a contour to conform to 
that marked d on the toe-piece. (See the let 
heels, the sides, and the toe---and also to ac 
ter d.) The toe-piece A is provided around its 
commodate the side expansions thereof, par 
ticularly at the heels, when in action. 
front with nail-holes, by which to secure the 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
same to the toe of the hoof, while the side 
pieces are similarly provided with like holes, 
vide a broader bearing-surface at the point 
where the several parts are united, and which 
both as shown. 
object is accomplished by the peculiar form of 
I have indicated that the several pieces of 
the connection or joint employed, and by which which the shoe is composed are peculiarly 
55 
75 
Su 
90 
OO 
5 
O 
35 
40 
45 
 
349,080 
O 
25 
35 
fastened to the hoof. The ordinary shoe, or a 
shoe substantially in one piece, is usually se 
cured by three or four nails along each side 
of the shoe and hoof, leaving the toe without 
mails and also none near the heels. Under 
these conditions the side growth and exten 
sion is restricted, and the foot becomes more 
or less deformed, being cramped, and the sides 
of the foot and heels contracted as a conse. 
quence. When such a shoe is nailed at the 
toe and sides also, as the hoof grows out and 
extends the toe parts tend to draw the shoe 
forward, and the heel parts to draw it back 
Ward, or, at least, to keep it, stationary, and thus 
constant strain is exerted by the shoe through 
its nail-?astenings, lindering and cramping 
the natural growth of the hoof. If the shoe 
is prevented from following the extension of 
toe, the hoof overgrows the shoe at that point, 
and the Shoe has often to be taken off and re 
set. The toe of the hoof affords the very best 
opportunity for nailing and securely fastening 
the shoe to the foot, and it is also the point at 
which the greatest force is exerted, throwing 
the greatest strain upon the shoe there also. 
In order, therefore, to secure the shoe at this 
most advantageous point, and also to cause 
or permit the toe-piece of the shoe to keep 
pace with the growth and extension of the 
toe portion of the hoof, I construct the shoe 
in several pieces, and, while connecting the 
pieces for greater strength and utility, I keep 
the connection movable, so that the several 
pieces may readily accommodate or adjust 
themselves to any enlargement or exten 
Sion of the hoof by growth, and also be main 
tained in a perfect fit. With every exten 
Sion of the hoof in a forward direction the 
toe-piece will be carried forward, and as the 
sides extend at the same time the side pieces 
will be carried away and outwardly and away 
from the toe-piece without injuriously af. 
fecting the joint connection, all this being 
permitted or accomplished by reason of the 
peculiarity of the connection of the parts and 
of the manner of nailing the pieces to the foot, 
as will be seen by a study of the drawings and 
what has been stated. I would state that the 
toe-piece should not comprise more than about 
one-third of the whole shoe, the side pieces 
each being also a third, as otherwise an im 
perfect result is the case, which I have ascer 
tained from practice. As the horse in using 
his foot alternately brings his foot to the ground 
With more or less force, or bears more or less 
Weight upon it, and then raises it, the heel 
portions of the foot, expand and contract to a 
greater or less extent if permitted to have 
natural action. It is sometimes desirable to 
limit this expansion and support the hoof 
from too great a strain in this direction. It 
will be readily seen that the tonguese e, fit 
ting into the recesses it (t, regulate and limit 
the degree of this expansion according to the 
closeness of the fit, and that the tongues or the 
recesses may be filed away at the points indi 
cated by the dotted lines to allow of more ex 
pansion. 
I have herein represented a particular ?o I'm 
of construction or connection between the toe 
and side pieces; but it will be understood that 
I do not intend limiting myself thereto, as tlis 
form is simply selected to perform the function 
of a broad bearing for the shoe at these points, 
and to permit the extensions and expansions 
of the hoof, as hereinbefore stated, and it is 
evident that many variations could be re 
Sorted to il the folian of innovable contectio). 
1Iaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to Secure by Lette's Pat 
ent, is 
1. As an article of manufacture, a lorseshoe 
constructed of a toe-piece and two side pieces, 
each at lapted for attaclment to a hoof, and 
formed at their contiguous ends with corre 
sponding recesses and tongues which follow 
or tend in a direction parallel with the gen 
eral contour of the shoe, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
2. As an article of manufacture, a horseshoe 
constructed of a toe-piece and two side pieces, 
each adapted for attachment to a hoof, and 
formed at their contiguous ends with corre. 
sponding recesses and tongues, which follow 
the general contour of the shoe, the said pieces 
being also formed with overlapping projec. 
tions extending inwardly at the point of junct 
ure thereof, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the toe-piece 
having nail-holes, and provided with recesses 
ca, which tend inwardly toward each other, 
and projections b, mortised as slown, of the 
side pieces, also having nail-holes, and each 
provided with a tonguc, e, corresponding to 
the recesses a, and a projection, l', nortised 
as at c, substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
Od 
95 
O 
I O5 
JOIN E. BIN (HAN. 
In presence of - 
GEO. T. THOMIPSON, 
C. M. ST EARN.S. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349180.txt	(No Model.) 
B, E, SERGEANT. 
FEED WORK FOR SAW MILIS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
No. 349,180, 
Patented Sept. 14, 1886. 
ESEE 
---O 
Sri L 
(No Model.) 
No. 349,180. 
 
B, E, SERGEANT. 
FEED WORK FOR SAW MILLS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 14, 1886. 
 
ETEC 
 
EE 
Egli A. 
ea 
s 
V 
F. 
A. 
p 
 
 
 
O 
---- afe 
s 
, 
- 
r 
m 
N 
no as 
nowanas 
t 
- 
Sister 
IN-1 
S. 
% Tanama 
a 
neer. 
: El Til 
E. 
E. 
M 
e. 
an 
(42%-42% 
&rea 
G 6, 21-2- 
By ?cay 6 
AITORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN E. SERGEANT, OF GREENSBOROUGH, NORTH CAROLINA. 
FEED-WORK FOR SAW-MILLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 349,180, dated September 4, 1886. 
Application filed April 9, 1886. Serial No. 198,387. (No model.) 
55 
75 
8) 
w 
To all whom, it may concern. 
tion-wheel, E, which has its friction-surface on 
its edge or periphery, and which is feathered 
Beit known that I, BENJAMINE, SERGEANT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
on the shaft D', and which shaft runs length 
Greensborough, in the county of Guilford and 
wise of mill or at right angles to counter-shaft 
C, and has suitable boxes fastened to frame of 
State of North Carolina, have invented a new 
mill and set-collars to keep it from slipping 
and useful Improvement in Variable Friction 
Feed for Saw-Mills, of which the following is 
end wise. This friction-wheel E is moved for 
a description. 
ward and backward on shaft D* by lever F, 
Figure 1 is a plan view; and Fig. 2 is a ver 
fulcrumed at the bottom to frame A, and to 
tical section through the line a a of Fig. 1, 
which lever is attached a rod, G, with bracket 
arms H. H., carrying the wheel forward and 
looking in the direction of the arrow. 
My invention is designed for the purpose of 
backward from center of disk, giving motion 
both ways to the carriage. On the other end 
furnishing saw-mills with a variable friction 
of shaft D', near its bearing, is fastened a pin 
feed for the forward and backward motion of 
the carriage, and to employ but one lever to 
ion-wheel, I, which engages with a larger bevel 
give the movements, and which lever is de 
wheel, J, which is fastened on the end of the 
signed to have only a forward and backward 
feed-shaft K, which has suitable bearings in 
frame A, and on the other end of which, out 
movement. 
side of frame A, is a pinion, L, which engages 
A is the saw-frame. B is the saw mandrel, 
mounted on boxes on frame A, and having saw 
with the rack on the carriage and drives the 
same. The advantages of this arrangement 
Son one end and driving-pulley P on other 
end, and a cone-pulley, P, near driving-pull 
of a variable friction-feed is that by the use 
ley, next to its box. This cone P is connected 
of a counter-shaft with cone-pulleys there is 
to its mate P on the counter-shaft C by a belt, 
no end pressure on the saw-mandrel. More 
over, the disk, instead of being limited to 
and is driven by the mandrel B. One end of 
the speed of mandrel by the use of counter 
this counter-shaft C is hardened steel, which 
fits into and is pressed endwise by an adjusta 
shaft with cones and belt, can be run to tWO 
or three times the speed of mandrel, which 
ble box, b. This box has within the same two 
permits the use of a small friction-disk and a 
steel or chilled buttons, l'b, with convex sides, 
against which the shaft presses endwise, and 
large sliding friction - wheel, giving a large 
which runs in tallow to prevent heating and 
amount of power for the draft of the carriage. 
The belt also does part of the work of the fric 
This box is secured to frame A. by two 
Wea. 
bolts, c c, that fasten the box to the frame by 
tion-wheels and gives relief where most needed. 
two nuts, c' c', being tightened up against the 
Where but one lever is used, and the stop is 
frame. The ends of these bolts pass through 
made in the center of the disk, it is very de 
ears on the sides of the adjustable box, and 
sirable, in order to make a quick stop, to not 
have springs did bearing against the box, and 
have to go far from the center; hence the value 
outside nuts, ee, by which means any loose. of the high speed and small disk. 
There is 
ness or wear by friction may be taken up or also another very useful feature about this 
any degree of pressure required can be had, 
mill, and this is a hood, O, over the journal 
and a vibrating or yielding pressure on face of 
box next to the Saw. This hood is the same 
friction-disk D is obtained in place of a rigid 
height as the two rollers R on each end of the 
preSSure. On the other end of counter-shaft 
frame. When the timber leaves the first roller, 
it cannot drop down by reason of this hood, 
C is the friction wheel or disk D, which has its 
friction-face on its side, and which side is faced 
and in running the timber back it cannot catch 
with leather or other suitable material. This 
on the box, and if the end of the timber or 
plank drops below the level of the rollers it. 
friction wheel or disk is fastened on the end of 
the counter-shaft C, which latter does not come 
will rise up and pass over the hood by reason 
through to the face of disk. This disk is pressed 
of the large and regular incline of this hood. 
in suitable contact (by the adjustable box al 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
ready described) against a leather-faced fric 
claim as new is 
O 
35 
45 
SO 
90 
95. 
OO 
2 
349,180 
1. In a variable saw-mill feed mechanism, friction-disk, bracket-arms carrying the fric 
the combination of the main shaftB, bearing tion-wheel, a horizontal rod attached to said 
r-shaft arms, and a vertical lever connected to the 
the saw and driving-pulley P", 
in pulley P, and having a friction-disk,I), wheel, and gears connecting it to the carriage 20 
tided with rod. a feathered shaft bearing the friction- || || || || 
is 
to gears for connecting the same to the carriage drel next to the saw, as and for the purpose 25 
on one end thereof and a spring-seated bearing shaft and pinion, as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with the saw-frame and 
at the other, a friction wheel, E, arranged in 
a plane at right angles to the friction-disk, its mandrel be: ring a circular saw, S, of an 
means for adjusting tie same laterally, and arched or inclined hood arranged over the man 
pinion, substantially as shown and described. described. 
2. The combination of the saw-mandrel, the 
yielding counter-shaft arranged parallel there. 
to and connected to the handrel by a belt, the ; 
is friction-wheel arranged at light angles to the 
Witnesses: 
; ; ; ; ; W. E. ALLEN, 
\ , II. A.D Eli M.A.N. ; ; 
IBENJAMIN 
EANT 
I 
; 
; ; ; ; ; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
|| 
| 
; 
; 
; 
; 
  
; 
; 
: 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349280.txt	(No Model. 
J. 0, JOY CE. 
WISE, 
No. 349,280. 
Patented Sept. 14, 1886. 
 
 
Oil Infa 
 
S. 
 
2. 
) is 
 
  
 
 
S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 
2 %as 2 
  
  
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB O. JOYCE, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
WISE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Eetters Patent No. 349,280, dated September 14, 1886. 
Application filed June 25, 1886. Serial No. 206,252. (No model.) 
w 
50 
55 
To alluvihon it may concern: 
Be it known that. I, JACOB O. Jo YCE, a 
resident of Dayton, in the county of Mont 
gomery and State of Ohio, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Wises, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a vise which is 
adapted to be rigidly attached to a bench or 
Support. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
rapid motion for moving the sliding jaw to 
open and close the device. 
The invention also relates to a new method 
of constructing the parts, so as to cheapen the 
cost of construction and render them efficient 
and durable, all of which will be set forth in 
the description of the accompanying draw 
ings, making a part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal central section of 
my improvement. Fig. 2 is a section online 
Fig. 3 is a section on line y if, 
at ac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 1. 
1 represents the base of the vise, which is 
rigidly attached to a bench or block. 
2 represents the stationary jaw, which is 
rigidly attached to the base, so as to form a 
shell or opening, with bearings 3 4 56 at the 
front and rear end of the shell, to support the 
movable-jaw arm 7. 
N 
S represents the movable jaw. 
The arm 7 is preferably made of shell form, 
as shown in cross-section, Fig. 2. 
It rests at the rear end upon bearing-lugs 6, 
and upon front bearing, 5. Within the shell 
is secured a stationary nut, 9, which is rig 
idly secured to the base 1, and provided with, 
say, left-hand screw-threads. 
10 represents a nut rigidly attached to the 
movable-jaw arm 7, and provided with screw 
threads running in the opposite direction 
from those in nut 9. 
11 represents the screw-rod, provided with 
threads engaging with those in nuts 9 and 10. 
The forward end of screw-rod 11 is rigidly se 
cured to a guide-head, 12. 
13 represents a cylindrical socketjournaling 
in bearing 14, pierced in the outer end of the 
jaw-arm. This socket is provided with a 
m 
guideway or bore, 15, in which fits and slides 
the head 12. 
16 represents an annular flange cast upon 
the barrel of the socket 13. It engages with 
a semicircular groove, 17, formed in the outer 
end of the jaw-arm, under the base of jaw 8. 
In order that the guide 16 and the screw 12 
may be readily removed and inserted, I pro 
vide a detachable segmental flange, 18, which 
fits in a bearing formed in the base of jaw 8, 
and is held in position by a set-screw, 19. By 
detaching the screw 19 segment 18 is removed, 
and the head 13 taken out without removing 
the jaw-arm. 
22 represents lips for facing the jaws, which 
may be of any desired form and configura 
tion. 
23 represents a hole pierced through the 
cylindrical head, by means of which the screw 
rod II is turned. As this rod is revolved, 
the movable jaw is driven outward or in, the 
nut 10 traveling with the jaw and multiplying 
and increasing the rapidity of the movement. 
The head 12 slides back and forth in its guide 
way, so as to permit action of the screw-rod. 
The object of the collar 16 and the groove 
14 in the journals is simply to pull the cylin 
der 13 out and in with the travel of the mov 
able jaw. The friction and draft-strain is all 
borne by the nuts 9 and 10. This is an im 
provement over the form of vises in which the 
pressure is imparted to the movable jaw 
through a flange or collar, as the friction is 
lessened and the leverage increased by the 
use of screws in the manner herein specified. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new is- 
1. The combination, in a wise, of the sta 
tionary jaw 2, having the rigidly-attached nut 
9, the movable jaw 8, having its arm 7 pro 
vided with the rigidly-attached nut 10, the 
cylinder 13, having an angular Socket and 
journaled to rotate in the outer end of the 
movable jaw, and loosely engaging the same 
to move therewith, and the right-and-left-hald 
screw-rods engaging the nuts, and having an 
angular head, 12, which slides in the cylinder 
as the movable jaw is adjusted, substantially 
as described. 
- 
90 
95 
O 
25 
45 
349,280 
2. The combination of the stationary and 
movable jaws, the nuts, the cylinder jour- my hand. 
naled to rotate in the outer end of the mov 
able jaw and movable therewith, and pro- 
5 Vided with an angular socket, and the right 
and-left-hand screw-rod having an angular 
head, 12, which slides longitudinally in the 
Socket of the cylinder as the movable jaw is 
adjusted, substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN L. H. FRANK, 
F.I. Jo YCE. 
In testimony whereof. I have hereunto Sct, Io 
JACOB (). JOY CE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349380.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 349,380, 
E. BAZIN. 
ELECTRIC BATTERY, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1 
Patented Sept. 21, 1886. 
S. 
E. 
(No Model.) 
No. 349,380. 
E. BAZIN. 
ELECTRIC BATTERY, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ERNEST BAZIN, OF PARIS, FRANCE, 
ELECTRIC BATTERY. 
SIPECIFICATION forming part of Ketters Patent No. 349,380, dated September 21, l886. 
Application filed April 6, 1886. Serial No. 197,928. (No model.) Patented in France October 13, 1885, No. 171,643. 
\ 
O 
55 
To all, whom it may concern. 
half-Zincs, in the form of segments of circles, 
which are all fixed and stationary, as already 
Beit known that I, ERNEST BAZIN, civil en 
gineer, and chevalier of the Legion of Honour, 
mentioned. 
a citizen of France, residing at Paris, in the 
On a frame, (t, of a special form and dimen 
French Republic, have invented a new and 
sions, the two cast-iron sides bl' rise and are 
useful Improvement in Electric Batteries 
bolted, for supporting the axis of the shaft o 
with Fixed Zincs and Rotating Carbons, of 
of the carbons. At their summits they re 
which the following is a specification, and for 
ceive a cross-bar, d, of mahogany or other o 
which I have obtained Letters Patent in 
wood, to which are suspended the Zincs, as 
France, No. 171,643, dated October 13, 1885. 
described. This cross-bar d is terminated by 
This invention consists in a battery having 
handles d", which admit of its removal, or of 
putting it into position. A perforated plate, 
the Zinc or positive electrodes stationary, and 
causing the negative or carbon disks only to re 
e, which bears the troughs of all the elements, 55 
volvein the exciting-liquid, which, in this case, 
is raised and lowered between the sides b l' 
is or may be bichromate of potash or soda. 
of the frame by aid of a fly-wheel, f, govern 
This arrangement, which is necessary for the 
ing, by bevel-wheels.ff', an endless screw, h, 
properand efficient working of the battery, also 
fixed to and supporting the table e. Columns 
h'h', sliding in the base of the frame, guide the 7o 
facilitates the renewal of the Zincs, when so re 
quired, and also admits of gradually and pro 
movements of the table and insure its per 
gressively immersing them in the liquid in 
fectly level movement. One of the ends of 
the Same progressive manner as the carbons. 
the frame b is cast with the bracket m, Sup 
These Zincs are in the form of segments of 
porting the electric motor in. In this manner 
circles, each electrode consisting of two seg 
several may be placed side by side and con 
ments, each one of which is mounted by bolt 
nected in the most suitable and practical man 
ing or otherwise attaching it to the prongs of 
ner. The electric motor in receives the cur 
a two-pronged fork, thus leaving a space or 
rent from one of the elements of the battery 
opening between each, giving free passage of 
for communicating motion by a series of 
wheels, 1234, to the shaft 0 of the carbons. 
the current to the carbons. The shafts of these 
forks pass through openings made in a bar 
This shaft 0 receives on insulated parts the 
CrOSSing above the head of the frame and 
brass jaws of sockets, kk', which are screwed 
together for firmly holding two carbon disks, 
mounted in supports fixed to its bed, so that 
these elements hang from this bar, which is 
c c'. Each of the elements is formed of a zinc, 
provided at each end with handles by which 
constructed as described, (vide Figs. 2, 4, 5,) 85 
and four carbons arranged two on each side of 
the whole series of Zincs can be lifted, lowered, 
or completely removed from the liquid, for 
the zinc electrode and coupled, as will be here 
arresting the action of the battery, or for re 
inafter mentioned. The outside carbons, c, 
newing the Zincs when so required. The two 
are plain disks; but the inner ones, c, are 
perforated with holes or openings sufficiently go 
sides of the Zincs formed by the two segments 
large not to diminish or check the passage of 
of a circle are near the two sides of the porous 
cell into which they plunge. The axis on 
the electric current. India-rubber rings i, 
locked between the jaws of the sockets k l' 
which the carbons are mounted passes between 
the Spaces formed between these two parts of 
and the carbons, form tight joints. The seg 
the Zincs. By this method the Zincs and car 
ments of circles forming the zinc electrodes 
are bolted or otherwise attached to prongs 
bons being in close proximity internal resist 
in in of a fork, the shaft p of which passes 
ance is lowered. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
through an opening, q, in the insulated Cross 
a side elevation of a battery embodying my in 
bar d, where it is solidly fixed by bolting or 
any other appropriate method. The parts 
vention, seen partly in section, for showing 
a & of the Zincs are placed transversely across 
certain parts essential to the system. Fig. 2 
is a corresponding side view; Fig. 3, a plan 
the shaft o-that is, this shaft passes between 
showing the method of coupling the elements. them without touching them, so as not to in 
Figs, 4 and 5 are a front and side view of the ?terfere with its rotation. They are close to 
75 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
- 
349,380 
35 
45 
with that of the carbons, and that both are 
equally progressive and proportionate one 
with the other. If necessary, all the Zincs can 
be removed simultaneously by seizing the 
handles d' d' of the cross-bar d and lifting it 
from its supports. 
I claim as my invention and desire to Secure 
by Letters Patent 
1. The fixed positive electrodes or Zincs con 
structed as described-that is to say, of two 
segments of a circle, 2, 2', connected to the two 
prongs of a forked piece, the shaft p of which 
is held in insulated supports in and combined 
with the cross-bar d at the head of the franc 
of the apparatus, so that they hang suspended 
from this bar. 
2. The negative or carbon electrodes con 
structed of two carbon disks arranged, as de 
scribed, in pairs on each side of the Zincs, the 
two outside carlos being plain while the 
inside pair nearest the Zincs alone are perfo 
rated, substantially as described. 
3. The carbons on a shaft, combined with 
means, substantially as described, for 'evolv 
ing said shaft, and with the forked segmental 
Zincs & 2" and cross-bar (l, said Zincs straddling 
said shaft, substantially as Therein described. 
ERNEST BAZIN. 
Witnesses: 
IROIT. M. HoOPER, 
AT, III(NSE 3I. T.I.Y. 
the sides or walls of the porous cells a, into 
which the Zincs plunge. These cells are placed 
in the troughs 9 of the elements. The electric 
current passing from the carbons to the Zincs 
through the exciting-liquid is conducted from 
the Zincs by the terminals aca, mounted on the 
supports q of the cross-lar d, the conducting 
wires being connected to other terminals, , ), 
mounted on a bar, r, covered with insulating 
Substance permanently placed in front of the 
axis, where the Zincs and carbois are mounted. 
The terminals ) communicate with the sup 
ports S of the brushes t, which are in contact 
With the carbons. The circuit is established 
in a simple manner without rendering the re 
moval of the electrodes difficult or expensive. 
One of the zinc terminals, a connects with the 
motor, and so does one of the carbon terminals, 
21, as shown in Fig. 3. 
Action: The carbons a c' being fixed on the 
shaft 0 (common to all) and the Zincs sus 
pended from the cross-bar (l, as already de 
scribed, the plate c is raised with the troughs 
(1 it supports, so as to plunge the Zincs and car 
bons in the bichromate - of- soda or potasl 
liquid. The current is at once established. 
The motor ) is set in motion and causes the 
requisite rotation of the carbons for preventing 
polarization. 
The Zincs are stationary, but it should be 
observed that their in mersion is in lison 
IO 
2 5 
3O. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349481.txt	(No Model.) 
B. W. CLAPP & S. AINSWORTH, 
TOBOGGAN, 
No. 349,48l. 
Patented Sept. 21, 1886. 
Sis Bat32kNYitz 
WITNESSES: 
a ver 
INVENTOR; 
 
BY 
622, 26-ee, 
N. PEFERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN W. CLAPP AND SEYMOURAINSWORTH, OF SARATOGA, SPRINGS, 
NEW YORK, 
TO BOGGAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 349,48l, dated September 21, 1886. 
Application filed November 28, 1885. Serial No. 184,180. (No model.) 
- 
O 
IS 
25 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
suitable manner. The forward ends of the 
Beit known that we, BENJAMIN W. CLAPP 
side bars, F, are left free, to give the requisite 
and SEYMOUR AINSWORTH, both of Saratoga 
elasticity to the forward end of the toboggan. 
Springs, in the county of Saratoga and State 
The corners of the forward end of the tobog 
5 of New York, have invented a new and useful 
gan are connected with the side bars, F, or the 
Improvement in Toboggans, of which the fol. 
side slats, A, by twisted or braided cords I, 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
in the ordinary manner, and to the lower parts 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
of the said cords is attached the draw-cord J 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in the ordinary manner, as indicated by the 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
dotted lines in Fig. 1. With this construc 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
tion the bearing-surface of the toboggan will 
Figurel is a side elevation of our improved 
be free from screw or rivet heads or counter 
toboggan. Fig. 2 is a sectional end elevation 
sinks to cause friction and scratch the ice, and 
of the same enlarged, taken through the line 
will polish easily and quickly, so that the to 
boggan will run faster and wear longer than 65 
at ac, Fig. 1. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
toboggans constructed in the ordinary manner. 
toboggans constructed in such a manner that 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
they will be stronger, stiffer, and more dura 
we claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ble, and will cause less friction than ordinary 
ters Patent-- 
toboggans. 
1. A toboggan having its bottom formed of a 
The invention consists in the construction 
series of boards or slats each provided with a 
longitudinal central rounded bearing-surface, 
and combination of various parts of the to 
boggan, as will be hereinafter fully described. 
and a flange at each side of the said bearing 
A represents the slats that form the bottom 
surface, substantially as described, whereby 
of the toboggan, and which are made with 
provision is made for reducing and presenting 75 
their middle parts raised longitudinally and 
smooth bearing-surfaces, as set forth. 
rounded, as shown at a, and with flat flanges 
2. In a toboggan, the combination, with the 
b along their side edges, forming a ribbed 
cross-pieces B, of the bottom boards or slats, 
A provided with the longitudinal central 
friction-surface. The slats A are secured to 
the cross pieces or beams B by nails, screws, or 
rounded bearing-surfaces, a, and side flanges, 
rivets C, passing through the side flanges of b, the said boards being secured to the cross 
the said slats, and through the said cross-pieces by rivets or screws, substantially as de 
pieces B, or by screws D, passing through the 
scribed, whereby provision is made for facili 
cross-pieces B and into the thicker middle 
tating the securing of the boards, and projec 
35 parts of the slats A, or the slats A can be se 
tions and indentations on their bearing-sur 
cured at their side flanges and middle parts 
faces avoided, as set forth. 
3. An improved toboggan, consisting of the 
at the same time. The forward ends of the 
slats A are curved upward and rearward to 
boards or slats A, having the rounded pro 
give the usual shape to the forward end of the 
jecting bearing-surfaces at and side-flanges, b, 
4o toboggan. The end parts of the cross-pieces 
the cross-pieces B, having the recessed pro- 9e 
B have projections E formed upon or attached 
jections E at their ends, and the side bars, F, 
to their upper sides, which projections are re 
secured in the said recessed projections of the 
cessed on top to receive the side bars, F. By 
cross-pieces, substantially as herein shown and 
this construction thesidebars, F, will be raised 
described. 
45 above the side slats, A, sufficiently to adapt 
them to serve as hand-rails. The side bars, 
F, can be secured to the cross-pieces B by 
screws G, as shown at the right-hand end of 
Fig. 2, or by rivets H, as shown at the left 
so hand end of the said figure, or in any other 
BENJAMIN W. CLAPP. 
SEYMOUR AINSWORTH, 
HoRACEM. SAWYER, 
JESSE STILES. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349581.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 349,581. 
 
H. W. GETMAN, 
WRENCH, 
Patented Sept. 21, 1886. 
Is HIS 
M 
AHITI; Ar 
 
aimsig ILA EID 
EAmigil 
Init 
 
 
 
N, PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY W. GETMAN, OF ILION, NEW YORK. 
WRENCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 349,581, dated September 21, i886, 
Application filed July 7, 1886. Serial No. 207,808, (No model.) 
surface of said lever. Between these over 
hanging flanges d and the upper surface of 
the lever D is secured one end of a suitable 
curved spring, E, the other end of which spring 
is passed down between the rear vertical por- 6o 
tion of the lever, through the projection or . 
bracket C and the enlarged or flanged portion 
a', and rests against the rear end of the said 
lever, thus holding the same by reason of its 
elasticity and bearing against the eye or bridle 65 
B in its normal forward position. From this 
it will be seen that the cross-bar b serves as a 
fulcrum for the lever D, and that by depress 
ing the outer end of the said lever the lower 
end thereof will be caused to retract, the en- 73 
larged or flanged portion a permitting the 
easy accomplishment of this result by reason 
of entrance thereinto of the actuating-spring. 
It will be observed that I provide in the 
outer forward end of the lever A a suitable 75 
approximately square-shaped opening or aper 
ture, F, and immediately in rear thereof a sec 
ond similar but smaller opening or aperture, 
F, thus providing means for the operation of 
nuts not capable of being acted upon by my 8o 
invention above described. By making the 
lever or arm. A concave I thereby reduce the 
weight of the same, as also the quantity of 
material. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 85 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the lever or arm, 
the eye or bridle, and the bracket having the 
cross-bar, of the lever having shoulders and 
serrations, and the spring actuating said lever, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. The lever having serrations at its lower 
inner end and overhanging flanges on its outer 
portion, and the spring secured by said flanges, 
as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with the eye or bridle 
having an enlarged or flanged portion, and the 
projection or bracket having the cross-bar, of 
the lever fulcrumed on said cross-bar, and the 
spring secured at one end to said lever and 
resting against its lower end, substantially as 
shown and described. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. . 
90 
95 
CO 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY W. GETMAN, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resid 
ing at Ilion, in the county of Herkimer and 
5 State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Wrenches, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention pertains to certain new and 
useful improvements in nut-wrenches, the 
same being adapted for application to nuts of 
different sizes; and it consists in the detailed 
construction, combination, and arrangement 
of the parts, substantially as hereinafter fully 
set forth, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional elevation of my invention. 
Fig. 2. 
2O is a plan view thereof, and Fig. 3 is a detail. 
In carrying out my invention I employ a 
preferably malleable-iron concave lever or 
arm, A, which at its forward endis curved out 
wardly and downwardly a suitable distance, 
25 as at a, and to the end of this downward por 
tion is cast integral therewith a nearly-square 
eye or bridle, B, which on its rear side is pro 
vided with an enlarged or flanged portion, a?, 
the purpose of which will appear farther on. 
To the upper rear end of this eye or bridle B 
is castintegral therewith an upwardly-extend 
ing projection or bracket, C, the rear portion 
of which is in direct alignment with the en 
larged or flanged portion (t' of the said eye or 
35 bridle, and the forward ends of theside pieces. 
of this bracket Care connected by a cross-bar, 
b, the purpose of which will soon appear. 
D is a small spring-actuated lever, which 
consists of a vertical and a curved portion, the 
outer end of the latter being provided with a 
flattened portion, for application thereto of the 
thumb of the operator, and the upper end of 
the vertical portion of this lever is provided 
with suitable notches, forming corresponding 
shoulders or projections, did, between which 
and in the said notches the cross-bar b, above 
described, is designed to rest, the same serving 
as a fulcrum therefor. This lever D is pro 
vided on its lower inner end with serrations 
or indentations d', for the more secure imping 
ing against the surface of the nut being acted 
upon, and upon the outer surface of the curved 
portion of this lever the same is provided with 
two corresponding overhanging flanges, d, . 
55 which extend a suitable distance over the outer 
45 
 
HENRY W. GETMAN. 
Witnesses: 
MOSES J. FLANDERS, 
ARTHUR. H. CLAPSADDLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349681.txt	(No Model.) 
W. BENJAMIN. 
WHEELBARROW, 
No. 349,68l. 
Patented Sept. 28, 1886. 
 
WITNEE 
NVENTOR 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM BENJAMIN, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO JOHN BLAUM, OF SAME PLACE: 
WHEELBARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 349,681, dated September 28, 1886. 
Application filed January 22, 1884. Serial No. 11S,2S). (No model.) 
55 
75 
75 
I5. 
20 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMBENJAMIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, haveinvented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Metal. Wheelbarrows, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to wheelbarrow's made 
of metal; and my object is to make a wheel 
barrow that is strong and durable, and that is 
easily put together and easily taken apart. 
I alm aware that wheelbarrows made of 
metal having tubular handles or sides are 
not new; but where such handles are fastened 
to the tray by clips the bolts or rivets holding 
the clip soon enlarge the holes in the tray 
through which they pass, or split the bottom 
of the tray by the springing of the handles, 
thus allowing the parts to separate. Where 
cross-bars are used that necessitate making a 
hole in the tubular sides or handles, the pipe 
or tube is very much weakened, and soon 
breaks at the hole. Where cross-bars are used 
that have an eye on each end that are fastened 
by shrinking them onto the sides or handles, 
Such cross-bal's cannot be taken off the han 
diles to ship the barrow without destroying the 
CrOSS-bars. 
By my invention, as hereinafter described, 
the wheelbarrow can be readily taken apart for 
shipment, and as readily put together, forming 
a rigid substantial barrow. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view of the Wheelbarrow from the under 
side. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the front cross 
bar. Fig. 3 is an elevation of the back cross 
bar and legs. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The tray A is formed in any of the prevail 
ing styles, and the handles or sides B of the 
frame are made of tubes. The front cross-bar, 
D, is a flat piece of metal, having eyes K at 
each end, as shown at Fig. 2, which eyes K. 
encircle the tubular handles B. The eyes K. 
are of nearly the same diameter internally as 
the external diameter of the tube handles, and 
each eye is made in two parts, which parts are 
secured together by bolts FF, as shown. 
trated, are composed of the cross-bars and 
movable portions or clips, which may be 
pressed toward the cross-bars and there held, 
each by one or more bolts, to clamp the side 
bars in place. . The part of the clips or eyes K. 
and L that encircle the side bars or handles B 
must be formed somewhat smaller than the 
outside diameter of the handles B, so that 
when the bolts are screwed together they will 
draw the eyes tightly around the handles, thus 
making a rigid and substantial frame With or 
without the tray. The back cross-bar, C, is 
also made of flat or bar iron, having an eye, 
L, at each end, of the form shown at Fig. 3. 
The eyes L are made in two parts, and are se 
cured to each other by the bolts FF. On the 
under part or half of the eyes L a socket, E, is 
formed on each, as shown at Fig. 3, into which 
socket the legs G are inserted, while the other 
ends of the legs are held to the cross-bar by the 
bolt H. If holes are made in the bottom of 
the tray in proper position to correspond With 
the holes in the cross-bal's C and D, the t'ay 
will be a templet to put the whole wheelbar. 
row together by. 
The barrow can be put together very expe 
ditiously by inserting the bolts F into the 
holes in the bottom of the tray made to receive 
them, and through the holes in the brace CD. 
Then lay the handles B in place, the other 
parts of the eyes K L having the bolts F. 
through all. The bolts F will fasten the tray 
and eyes together. Then, if the bolts F are 
inserted and screwed together, the eyes KL 
will rigidly clasp and clamp the handles B. 
I am aware that clips and clamping-eyes 
have been used in various situations, and I 
make no claim to such devices otherwise than 
as specifically applied by me. 
I am aware that a wheelbarrow-frame colm 
posed of two side bars and two cross-bars pro 
vided with eyes which fit upon the side bars 
and shrink thereon, as shown and described in 
the Patent No. 246,584, have been made; but 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a wheelbarrow, the combination, with 
the metal tray, of the cross-bars CD, for sup 
porting and strengthening the bottom of the 
same, and the side bars or handles, B, the 
. 
The eyes K and L, in the construction illus- cross-bars being provided with eyes of adjust- roo 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
349,681 
able size, and bolts by which said handles may being provided with eyes of adjustable size for 
be detachably clamped therein, substantially the reception of the handles, and bolts for de- Io 
as set forth. 
tachably clamping the handles therein, sub 
2. The herein-described frame for a wheel- stantially as set forth. 
WILLIAM BENAMIN. 
- 
5 barrow, consisting of the front and rear cross- 
bars, CD, for supporting and strengthening 
the bottom of the tray, the substantially par- 
allel side bars or handles, B, the cross-bars 
Witnesses: 
ALONZO GAUBERT, 
W. C. WREN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349782.txt	(No Model.) 
G. R. BUFFHAM. 
WENTIATOR, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
... 
N, PETERs, Photo 
thographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE R. BUFFHAM, OF PORT CHESTER, NEW YORK. 
VENT LATOR. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 349,782, dated September 28, 1886. 
Application filed February 1, 1886. Serial No. 190,403. (No model.) 
- 
O 
15 
25 
To all whon, it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGER. BUFFHAM, 
of Port Chester, in the county of Westchester 
and State of New York, have invented an Im 
provement in Window-Ventilators, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Letters Patent Nos. 205,999 and 215,791 have 
been granted to me for improvement in ven 
tilators, in which glass is made use of for the 
plates that rest one against the other, and such 
glass was perforated to form the ventilating 
openings. 
My present invention is for lessening the 
cost of manufacture, for allowing different col 
ors of glass to be used, for strengthening the 
ventilator itself, and for lessening the risk of 
injury to the pane of glass into which the ven 
tilator is inserted. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation of 
the ventilator complete, Fig. 2 is a section 
of the same at the line aca. Fig. 3 is a sepa 
rate view of a part of one side of the stationary 
ring. Fig. 4 is a similar view of the moving 
ring, and Fig. 5 is a section at the line if y of 
Fig. 4. 
I make use of two rings, by which the ven 
tilator is secured into the opening cut in the 
pane of window-glass, or other place where the 
ventilator is made use of. The ring Ais made 
with an internal rim, a, and an inward flange, 
l, and the ring B is of a size to surround the 
rim a, and there are screws or bolts C, by which 
the rings are clamped upon opposite sides of 
the pane of glass or other support, and rings 
of india-rubber or other soft material are intro 
duced between the rings A- aliud Band the sur 
faces of the glass, to make the joints water 
tight and to effectually prevent the ring turn 
ing. The ventilator is made of sections of 
glass with intermediate openings. These sec 
tions may be either cut out or pressed into 
shape, preferably the latter, and said sections 
of glass are ornamented to a greater or less ex 
tent, if desired, and it is preferable to make 
45 use of colored glass in one of the wheels and 
plain or frosted glass in the other. The sec 
tions E, of glass, are connected together at or 
near the middle, and at their outer edges the 
are received into and supported by the rim F, 
that is of a size to pass freely into the rim (t, 
and to be turned therein. This rim F has an 
inward flange, 2, on one edge to support the 
outer ends of the glass sections E, and there 
are clip-pieces 3 applied at each of the outer 
corners of the glass sections to hold the said 
glass sections into the rim F, and to prevent 
said sections becoming loose. These clip 
pieces are preferably separate from the ring F 
and soldered into place; but they may be made 
as part of the ring, and there is a thumb-piece 
or knob, 4 upon the rim F, by which the same 
may be moved to open or close the ventilator, 
and the inward flange, b, is removed for a suffi 
cient distance to allow for the motion of this 
thumb-piece 4, and to form stops in opening 
and closing the ventilator. The sections of 
glass G are received at their outer edges into 
a rim, 6, that is of a size to pass into the rim 
(t. The flange portions 7 of the rim 6 and the 
clip-pieces 8 hold the outer edges of the glass 
sections G firmly within the rim 6; and it is 
now to be understood that in putting the ven 
tilator together the rim F, with its glass sec 
tions E, is to be inserted into the internal ring, 
a, and rest upon the inward flange, b. After 
this the section of glass G and their rim 6 are 
to be inserted into place within the internal 
rim, (, with the surfaces of the glass sections 
G resting upon the surfaces of the glass sec 
tions lE, and tilhem the rinn 6 is to be soldered 
into place, or the parts fastened by screws or 
pins within the internal rim, a, thereby hold 
ing the trium F and glass sections IE in their 
proper positions, but allowing them to be 
turned in opening and closing the ventilator. 
In all instances the adjacent surfaces of the 
glass set directly against each other and the 
outer edges are beveled, as shown in Fig. 2, to 
facilitate the securing of the same into the 
metal frames. 
The mode of construction thus described is 
available with any desired connection between 
the respective glass sections in the middle por 
tions of the respective wheels, and the central 
connections can be made of either glass or 
metal. I have, however, represented two hub 
pieces, H and K, with a central rivet, I, the 
respective hub-pieces being recessed for the 
reception of theipner ends of the glass sections, 
y, and these ends of the glass sections are secured 
into place by plaster-of-paris or other cement. 
This ventilator may be introduced into an 
opening in a plate or pane of glass, or it may 
be connected with the lead or other frames of 
35 
O 
- 
9O 
?? 
65 
75 
I OC) 
 
349,782 
25 
35 
the rim 6, for connecting such sections togeth 
er, the rim F being between the flanges band 
the rim 6, and the said rim 6 being perma 
mently secured withill the rim (t, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination, in a ventilator, of sec 
tions of glass E and G, rims for supporting the 
same, and the inward flanges and clip-pieces 
for holding the outer ends of the respective 
sections of glass within the rims, substantially 
as Set forth. 
4. The combination, with a stationary and 
turning wheel in a ventilator, of the rings A. 
and B, and the rings of rubber or similar yield 
ing material between the same and the surface 
of the glass, and the Screws for clamping the 
parts, substantially as specified. 
Signed by me this 22d day of January, A. 
D, SS6. 
? 
GEO. R. BUFFHAMI. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
WILTILIAMI (G. MOTT. 
5 
O 
casement-windows. Each section of glass may 
be surrounded by a metal frame, if desired. 
I do not claim two disks containing sections 
of glass, one turning on the other, as these have 
before been proposed; but the glasses have been 
of uniform thickness, and the surfaces of the 
glasses in the different sections did not come 
into contact, and consequently could not close 
tightly. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A ventilator formed of sections of glass 
with intermediate openings, and two frames or 
rims for supporting su clh sections and for al 
lowing one frame or rim, with its sections of 
glass, to be moved upon the other frame or rim 
in opening or closing the ventilator, the adja 
cent faces of the glass being in contact, and the 
outer edges of the sections being beveled where 
they are secured in the rims, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. The metal ring A, having an internal rim, 
a, and flange b, in combination with the sec 
tions E, of glass, the rim F, for connecting such 
sections together, the sections G, of glass, and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349882.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 349,882, 
W. B. GETTY, 
ROAD CART, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 28, 1886. 
747, 2. 
s 
 
2. 
- 22 
m 
27 
-4 
---Z----- 
s 
E 
2 
2 
rti ks 
2 
a s 
: 
s 
28iticssos 
C2.426767-4 rv 
o 
( 2. 2 2 
&g 6x dryin 
N. PETERS, Plioto-Lithographer, wishingisis. D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. B. GETTY. 
ROAD CART, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
NO. 349,882, 
Patented Sept. 28, 1886. 
 
NT 
Ages. 21. 
A-Ns. Es C 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
928) it vesses 
Svvua V-Boz. 
M 
i 
SS 4& effez vici 
N. P.TERS. holo-Lithograpler. Washington. D. C. 
Zla a 12Y 
fa2-7-6-a 
2z4% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM B. GETTY, OF HICKSVILLE, OHIO. 
ROAD - CART. 
g:ECIFICAON oriming part of letters Patent No. 349,882, dated September 28, 1886. 
Application filed August 4, 1886. Serial No. 210,034. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM B. GETTY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hicks 
ville, in the county of Defiance and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful. Im 
provement in Road-Carts, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
road-carts; and it consists of the peculiar com 
bination and novel construction and arrange 
ment of the various parts for service, sub 
stantially as hereinafter fully set forth, and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
road-cart with an improved seat-frame which 
shall be SO Suspended and arranged that the 
objectionable motion given to the thills or 
shafts by the draft-animal in this class of ve 
hicles, and which is known as the horse 
motion, shall be effectually overcome, where 
by a comfortable and easy motion will be given 
to the occupant of the vehicle. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide an improved seat-frame and suspending 
devices therefor, which shall be very simple 
and strong in construction, not liable to get 
out of order or disarranged, and cheap and 
inexpensive of manufacture. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate a road-cart embodying my invention, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation with the carrying 
wheels removed. Fig. 2 is a top plan view 
corresponding to Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a rear ele 
vation. Fig. 4 is a detached perspective view 
of the seat-frame, and Fig. 5 is a like view of 
the rear spring and the suspending devices for 
the seat-frame. Fig. 6 is a longitudinal ver 
tical sectional view on the line acac of Fig. 2. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like let 
ters of reference denote corresponding parts 
in all the figures, A designates the axle of my 
improved road-cart, which is preferably bent 
upwardly at its middle so that the middle por 
tion thereof is out of line with the ends, and 
B the shafts orthills, which extend rearwardly 
to the axle, and are rigidly connected thereto 
by means of the clipsb, which embrace the axle 
and the rear ends of the thills, as clearly 
The thills are curved downwardly at 
shown. 
their rear ends, as at b, and the thills are thus 
elevated at their front ends into a higher posi 
tion than at their rear ends, so that the lower por 
tion of the seat-suspending frane C is located 
beneath the plane of the front or higher ends of 
the thills, which are connected and braced by 55 
a cross-bar, B, to which is pivotally connected 
the single-tree B, as is usual in this class of 
devices. 
The seat carrying or suspending frame C 
preferably consists of the side rails or bars, C, 6o 
which are inclined or arranged diagonally with 
relation to each other and bent upwardly at 
their front ends in curved lines, as at c, the 
upright or vertical standards C, and the trans 
verse rails or bars C, which connect the side 
rails, C, at or near the rear ends thereof, so 
as to provide a platform or support for the 
feet of the driver or occupant of the vehicle. 
These rails or bars C, that form the support or 
platform for the feet, are secured to the side 
rails, C, in any suitable or preferred manner 
for strength and stability, and the front or 
foremost of the said rails is curved longitudi 
nally, so as to assume substantially the form 
of a bow or segment, the ends thereof being 
rigidly affixed to the seat carrying or support 
ing frame, as described, while at its middle 
the said segmental bar or rail is provided with 
a slot or mortise, c', in which the rail or bar im 
mediately in rear thereof is fitted to strengthen 
the platform or support. This platform or 
support is provided with two stirrups or stops, 
D, which are each bent from a single piece of 
metal to form an open loop, and is affixed to 
the segmental-shaped rail or bar of the plat 
form and the side rails, C, one of the loop 
shaped stirrups being arranged on each side 
of the platform or support of the seat-carrying 
frame C. 
The vertically-disposed standards C of the 
seat-carrying frame C are arranged at the rear 
ends of the latter and in a slightly-inclined 
position, the said standards being preferably 
formed in a single piece with the side rails, C, 
of the frame C, and at its upper end each of 95 
the standards is provided with a horizontal 
arm or bar, e, which extends or projects rear 
wardly from the standard, and to which the 
seat E is rigidly affixed in any suitable or 
preferred manner, the seat being of any ap- Ico 
proved pattern. The said rails C of the seat 
carrying frame and the vertical standards or 
85 
75 
IS 
25 
45 
2 
349,882 
s 
25 plV 
uprights thereof are braced and strengthened 
by means of diagonal rods or bars F, the rear 
ends of which are rigidly affixed to the stand 
ards, and the front ends thereof are likewise 
secured to the bent or curved ends c of the 
said rails, the said front ends of the rods or 
bars being bent or inclined upwardly to form: 
the angular arms f, which are provided at their 
free ends with spaced lugs f', which are dis 
posed in vertical lines at the extreme free ends 
of the side rails, C, of the seat carrying or sup 
porting frame, the function of these spaced 
vertical lugs being hereinafter explained. 
The vertical standards or uprights CC of 
the seat-carrying frame are each provided 
with brace-irons G, which are rigidly secured 
to the same on their inner sides, and the lower 
ends of these brace-irons are inclined or curved 
rearwardly to form the arms g, which extend 
or project beyond the vertical faces of the 
standards, and to the free ends of the extended 
arms g of the brace-irons are pivotally con 
nected the lower ends of vertically-disposed 
links or shackles H. by means of a suitable 
ivot pin or bolt. The upper ends of these 
shackles or links are pivotally connected to 
the free ends of a spring-support, I, which is 
disposed in a vertical position immediately be. 
neath the seat, and thereby partially pro 
tected and concealed from view. The ends of 
this support I are curved or bent upwardly 
and then downwardly, so as to assume the 
shape of hooks, to the free ends of which the 
shackles are pivotally connected, as herein. 
before described; but this shape or form of 
the ends of the support can be varied without 
departing from the principle of my invention. 
The supportIis rigidly affixed in any suitable 
manner, and at its middle to a block, J, which 
in turn is secured to a spring, K, which is ar 
ranged transversely across the vehicle and ex 
tends from one shaft to the other thereof. This 
spring K is arranged in close proximity to the 
axle, and it lies on a plane beneath the axle, 
said spring being arranged in front of the axle. 
and in rear of the seat carrying or supporting 
frame C. The ends of this spring K are bent 
or curved over upon themselves, as at k, and 
the free bent ends of the spring are pivotally 
connected to the thills at the rear ends there 
of by means of a pin or bolt which passes: 
through aligned openings in vertical lugs at 
the rear of the thills, although this form of 
pivot-connection of the spring with the thills 
can be varied. This spring K serves as the 
support for the rear end of the seat and its 
carrying-frame, and the front end of the said 
frame is suspended beneath the thills and out 
of contact therewith by means of curved springs, 
L, which are rigidily secured to the thills at: 
one end, and pivotally connected at their other, 
ends with the vertical lugs f at the front of 
the side rails, C, of the said seat frame. The. 
springs L are each formed of a single piece of 
elastic or resilient metal, and they are ar 
ranged beneath and in line with the thills, so. 
as to be concealed and protected by the thills 
mal. 
X . 
partially. The seat-carrying frame C is thus 
suspended beneath the axle and the thills and 
entirely out of contact with the said parts by 7o 
resilient and yielding supporting devices, 
whereby the objectionable jogging motion 
that is imparted to the thills and the axle, 
and which is known to the art by the name of 
horse motion, is entirely overcome, the 75 
seat being given an easy and agreeable mo 
tion, which is much sought after in this class 
of devices. The seat-carrying frame is sus 
pended beneath the thills, so that the seat, 
which occupies an elevated position on the 8o 
frame, is substantially on the same line or 
plane as the front elevated portion of the 
thills, which is sufficient to permit the driver 
to see his way in driving and guiding the ani 
The rear curved ends of the thills are braced 
and strengthened by means of rods or bars M, 
which are rigidly affixed at their front ends to 
the elevated or higher portions of the thills, 
and the rear ends are secured to the lower por- 9c 
tion of the thills at or near the point of con 
nection of the thills with the axle. 
N designates a hanger, which depends from 
the axle at one side thereof, and to the lower 
ends of the hanger is secured a step, n, by 95 
means of which the occupant of the vehicle 
can very readily alight or enter the vehicle. 
The seat-carrying frame is very light, sim 
ple, and strong in construction, and the con 
nections intermediate of the said frame and the Ioo 
thills and axle are also very simple, strong, 
and of sufficient elasticity to insure an easy 
and resilient motion to the seat. 
To further insure an easy motion to the 
seat and its frame the support I is also made Io5 
of spring or elastic metal, which will yield 
and give to the motions of the frame. 
The device is very light and simple in con 
struction, and can be manufactured for a com 
paratively small sum. 
Slight changes in the form and proportion 
of parts can be made without departing from 
the spirit or sacrificing the advantages of my 
invention. 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a road-cart, the combination of an 
axle, the thills connected to the axle, a sus 
pended frame arranged between the thills and I2o 
axle and beneath the plane thereof and carry 
ing an elevated seat, the front springs affixed 
to the thills and pivotally connected to the 
front part of the suspended frame, a trans 
verse rear spring arranged in front of the axle I 25 
and connected at its ends with the rear ends 
of the thills, a spring-support secured to the 
middle of the spring, and the vertical shackles 
pivotally connected to the suspended frame 
and the free ends of the spring-support, sub- 13c 
stantially as described, for the purpose set. 
2. In a road-cart, the combination of an 
axle, the thills connected to the axle, a sus 
Having thus fully described my invention, II5 
IIO 
forth. 
a 
- 
IO 
JS 
45 
55 
 
349,882 
3. 
O 
pended frame arranged between the thills and 
axle and beneath the planethereofand carrying 
an elevated seat, the curved front springs af. 
fixed rigidly to the thills at one end and piv 
otally connected to the front end of the sus 
pended frame, a transverse spring arranged 
in front of the axle and having its extremities 
bent around the rear ends of the thills and piv 
otally connected thereto, a spring-support se 
cured to the middle of the transverse spring, 
and the vertically-disposed shackles pivotally 
connected to the suspended frame and the free 
ends of the Spring-support, Substantially as 
described, for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, in a road-cart, of the 
thills, an axle, a frame carrying a seat, the 
front Springs connecting the frame with the 
thills, the rear transverse spring, the block 
secured to the transverse spring at its middle, 
the spring-support affixed to the block and 
having the curved ends, the brace-irons af. 
fixed to the seat-frame, and the pivoted ver 
tical shackles intermediate of the free ends of 
the Spring-support and the brace-irons, sub 
4. In a road-cart, the combination of an 
axle, the thills connected with the axle, a 
frame carrying a seat and comprising the side 
rails, the platform -bars connecting the side 
5 stantially as described. 
5. In a road-cart, the combination of an 35 
rails and the uprights on which the seat is 3o 
secured, and the rear and front springs, KL, 
arranged and connected, as described, for sus 
pending the frame out of contact with the 
thills and axle, substantially as described. 
axle, the thills connected thereto, a suspended 
frame comprising the diagonal side rails or 
bars having the upwardly-curved front ends, 
the transverse rails or bars connecting the 
side rails near their rear ends, a segmental 4o 
cross-bar having a mortise in its rear side in 
which one edge of one of the transverse bars 
is fitted, and the vertically-disposed stand 
ards affixed to the rear ends of the side bars 
and carrying a seat at their upper ends, and 45 
the front and rear springs arranged, as de 
scribed, for suspending the frame from the 
axle and thills and out of contact therewith, 
substantially as described, for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM B. GETTY. 
Witnesses: 
F. M. THOMPSON, 
FRANKL. FORLOW. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US349982.txt	(No Model.) 
T. F. CONKLIN. 
CASTER, 
NO, 349,982, 
Patented Sept. 28, 1886, 
Z-Z. 
III . 
I I 
2 
? - - - - - 
2, 
 
 
 
267 a 
 
 
5S-1 x y 
S - 2 
A2.2%zessee : 
l6%-24c 
4 & 6% ?h 
42.2122262. 
76.4.264. 
2 fa-6 4.e.--8 
41/fazezaeze. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODORE F. CONRLIN, OF FOND DU LAC, WISCONSIN. 
CASTER, 
3PECIFICATIOTT formining part of Letters Patent No. 349,982, dated September 28, 1886. 
Application filed November 9, 1885. Serial No. 182,245. (No model.) 
2O frame in a changed position. 
To al., whom, it may conceria: 
Be it known that I, THEODORE F. CONKLIN, 
of Fond du Lac, in the county of Fond du 
Lac, and in the State of Wisconsin, have in 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Casters; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof. 
My invention relates to casters; and it con 
to sists of certain peculiarities of construction, 
as will be hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, Figure l represents a side 
elevation of one form of my caster in operative 
position; Fig. 2, a bottom plan view; Fig. 
I53, a sectional view on line at ar, Fig. 2, with 
the shell omitted; Fig. 4, a top plan view of 
the guide-frame; Fig. 5, a vertical longitudi 
nai section of another form of my invention, 
and Fig. 6 a similar view with the guide 
A represents a base-plate preferably formed 
with an upwardly-projecting shell, (t, so as to 
render my caster more applicable to articles 
of furniture having legs; but for trunks or 
25 such furniture not supported by legs this 
shell (1 may be omitted. The under face of 
the base-plate A is provided with an annular 
groove, b, and suitable perforations, through 
which latter are passed screws c, or similar 
3o fastening lineans fol' Securing the caster to the 
article upon which it is intended to be used. 
Pivotally secured to the base-plate A by 
means of a rivet or bolt, d, is a guide-frame, 
B, having a semicircular Outer edge which 
35 projects beyond the base-plate to form a buf 
fer, e. Depending from this guide-frame B 
are ears.f, to which are journaled a main roll 
er, C, and also depending from said guide 
frame are housings (/, in which are journaled 
4O friction-rollers D, which latter operate in the 
annular groove b of the base-plate A, and are 
entirely incased by said groove and the hous 
ings, so as to exclude dirt or other matter 
having a tendency to clog or otherwise inter 
45 fere with the perfect working of my device. 
It is obvious that instead of forming the 
base-plate A with an annular groove, b, I may 
substitute therefor an annular bead, h, and 
provide the friction-roller D with channels i, 
as illustrated by Figs. 5 and 6, and thereby so 
obtain the same results without departing 
from the spirit of my invention, irrespective 
of the particular form of annular guide. 
By extending the guide-frame B so as to 
come beyond the base-plate, and having its 55 
outer edges semicircular, said guide-frame 
will readily sheer off from any obstruction 
With which it may come in contact, and thus 
permit a free working of the several operative 
parts. 
The entire caster being exceedingly simple 
of construction can be cheaply manufactured, 
and is not liable to get out of order, and at 
the same time will sustain a great amount of 
weight and operate without any material 65 
amount of friction. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
having an annular guide upon its under side, 
a pivotally-connected guide-frame having a 
semicircular outer edge extended beyond said 
base-plate, a main roller journaled to said 
guide-frame, and friction - rollers also jour. 75 
haled to the guide-frame and adapted to come 
in operative contact with the annular guide on 
the base-plate, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
have hereunto set my hand, at Fond du Lac, 
in the county of Fond du Lac and State of 
Wisconsin, in the presence of two witnesses. 
THEODORE F. CONRAIN. 
A caster consisting of a suitable base-plate 7o 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I So 
Witnesses: 
A. LANGE, 
E. H. GILLET. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350082.txt	(No Model.) 
T. R.UEDIGER, 
WIRE FENCE GATE, 
No. 350,082, 
Patented Sept. 28, 1886, 
 
im. 
ses a 
E. Eig 
2 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODOR RUEDIGER, OF CHASKA, MINNESOTA. 
WRE - FENCE GATE. 
iPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 350,082, dated September 28, 1886. 
Application filed July 3, 1886. Serial No. 207,084. (No model.) 
5 
O 
55 
To all tufton, it inlay conce77. 
Be it known that I, TIEODoR RUEDI(; ER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chas 
ika, in the county of Carvel' and State of Min 
nesota, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Wire-Fence Gates, of which the 
following is a specification. 
For the purpose of convenience in entering 
or for passing through fields inclosed by wire 
fences, it is necessary to so construct the latter 
as to provide gateways or passages at various 
places; and to this end the wires of such fences 
have been attached to a vertical bar and the 
latter connected with a post by means of de 
vices that allow convenient detachment of said 
bar when required. 
My invention pertains to an improvement 
in the devices for thus (letachably connecting 
such bar to the post; and it consists in the 
construction and combination of parts, as 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of a wire fence with my 
invention applied to form a gate, which is 
shown locked. Fig. 2 is a front view of the 
Same, the gate being unlocked. Fig. 3 is a 
perspective of the locking devices detached. 
Figs. 4 and 5 are views corresponding to 1. 
and 2, and representing a modification. 
I Will first describe the invention shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, 3. 
The letters A and B indicate two posts, 
which may be set at the usual or any pre 
ferred distance apart. Those wires, C, which 
extend in one direction are attached to post 
A, and those, D, which form the gate are at 
tached to the other post, IB, and to a vertical 
bar, E. The wires D and bar IE therefore 
constitute the gate proper. The means or de 
vices I employ for detachably connecting this 
bar to post A embody my invention. Said 
devices consist, mainly, of the curved lever F 
and the curved catch G. The said curved ever 
F is pivoted at its angle to the front of the post 
A, and provided with an aperture, (, at the 
end of its shorter alm. The catch G is a flat 
metal plate secured in horizontal position to 
the middle portion of bar E. The front end 
of the catch is curved downward aid provided having its outer end curved and provided with IO 
with a lateral pin, c, that is adapted to enter 
the hole (t in lever F. 
To lock the catch G to lever F, the pin c is 
inserted in the hole (t, in the latter, as shown 
in Fig. 2. Then to lock the gate the lever 
is turned on its pivot in the direction indicated 
by arrow in Fig. 2 until it reaches the position 
shown in Fig. 1, when, the point, (, c, of en 
gagement of catch and lever being below the 
fulcrum of the latter, the parts remain self 
locked, and the gate IDE is held stretched taut 
and closed. To unlock and release the gate 
the lever F is reversed-that is to say, turned 
backward, as per arrow in Fig. 1, to the po 
sition shown in Fig. 2, when the catch may be 
easily disengaged from the lever. To take up 
slack in the gate-wires D, I employ a wedge, . 
H, which is inserted between bar E and the 
bent inner end of catch G. To permit adjust 
ment of the latter, it is slotted and secured to 
the bar by screw's d. 
In Figs. 4 and 5 I show a modification. 
The lever Fis secured vertically to the post A 
by screw-eyes or other suitable bearings, in 
which it is free to rotate on its axis. Its up 
per end is bent to form a crank-handle, and 
the lower end bent laterally and provided with 
an aperture to receive the catch G', whose 
outer end is bent laterally inward and also 
(lownward. The catch is forged in one piece 
with or otherwise permanently attached to a 
plate, f, which is slotted to receive screws that 
secure it to the gate-bar E. This construction 
and means of attachment permit adjustment 
of the catch to take up slack. The adjustment 
is made by means of a nut, H, applied to the 
threaded inner end of the catch, as shown. 
It will be seen that by turning the crank 
level F from the position shown in Fig. 5 to 
that shown in Fig. 4 the lock is effected, on 
the same principle and by essentially the Same 
operation as in the case of the devices illus 
trated in Figs. 1, 2, 3, before described. I 
thus provide cheap and efficient means or 
devices for securing and releasing a section of 
a wire fence, so that it may be conveniently 
used as a gate. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of the catch G, attached 
to the gate-bar E in horizontal position, and 
the pin c, with the level pivoted to the post, 
and having its shorter arm curved and pro 
95 
25 
3 5 
O 
SO 
 
2 
350,082 
x. 
vided with an aperture adapted to receive said for securing it to the bar, and a wedge for ad 
pin, all as shown and described, whereby the justing it to take up slack, as shown and de- Io 
parts are locked by turning the lever until the scribed. 
curved end of the catch passes beyond or 
2. The combination, with the post, the full- 
crumed lever, the gate-bar E, and wires D, of 
the catch G, which is slotted lengthwise, screws 
5 around its pivotal bearings, as specified. 
THEODOR RUEDIGER. 
Witnesses: . 
AMOs W. HART, 
ERROL E. HART. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350184.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. A. BENNINGER. 
SYSTEM FOR PREVENTING WESSELS FROM SINKING 
No. 350,184, 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
es 
SYSTEM FOR PREVENTING WESSELS FROM SINKINC. 
J. A. BENNINGER 
No. 350,184, 
Patented 00t, 5, 1886. 
 
 
 
ar 
YYYYYYYYYYYYY 
V 
% 
 
(N 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIN. A. BENNINGER, OF 
LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
SY STEV FO R PR EVENT NG 
VESS ES FRO V S 1 N K || N. G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 350,184, dated October 5, 1886. 
Application filed May 18, 1886. Serial No. 202,530. (No model.) 
5 
iO 
To all Iv/von, it 7-agy concern: 
Be it known that I. JoLIN A. BENNINGER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Louis 
Ville, in the county of Jefferson and State of 
Kentucky, have invented certain new and use 
?ul Improvements in Systems for Preventing 
Vessels from Sinking; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
other's skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to means for prevent 
ing Yessels from sinking should they spring a 
leak from any cause; and it consists in the 
employment, both inside and outside of a ves 
sel's hull, of a system of bags or buoys all com 
lununicating by means of pipes with a common 
reservoir containing a gaseous element in a 
highly condensed or compressed state, said 
pipes being provided with suitable valves for 
regulating the flow of gas to the bags, floats, 
or buoys, and Said bags being provided with 
flexible connections, all of which constitute a 
new and improved system, whereby even un 
der most adverse and extraordinary circum 
stances a leaking vessel and its cargo can be 
kept afloat and conveyed safely into port, as 
will be fully understood from the following de 
scription, W?aen taken in connection with the 
annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of a two-masted ves 
sel, showing the flexible bags, sacks, or buoys 
Which are applied on the outside of the hull. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal central section of the 
vessel, showing the bags or sacks which are ap 
plied on the outside of the hull between decks, 
and also the system of pipes which form com 
nullication between them and a gas or air 
holder. Fig. 3 is a cross-section through the 
hull, taken in the vertical plane indicated by 
dotted lines a on Fig. 2, showing some of the 
exterior and interior bags or sacks inflated 
and other's collapsed. Fig. 4 is an enlarged 
Sectional detail in perspective, showing two of 
the exterior Sacks or butoys and their ("hain 
and tube connections. 
Before describing my improved system and 
its details I will state that I am aware that 
ags, buoys, bulk-heads, and other like vessels 
have long been employed for raising Slinkell 
vessels, and also for keeping ships afloat in 
case of their spiringing a leak, Said bags or 55 
buoys being filled with atmospheric air by 
pumping the same into then after they are 
sunk, and then displacing the water which 
they contained. This slow method of render 
ing the submerged bags buoyant is not al- 6o 
ways practicable, and is notherein claimed. I 
am also aware that vessels have been provided 
interiorly with flexible bags permanently at 
tached and provided with an air-forcing en 
gine for filling them, and thus preventing a 65 
vessel from sinking for Want of tenable space 
for water, and this feature I broadly disclaim. 
The drawings represent my improved buoy 
ing system applied to the hull of a two-masted 
schooner; but it will be obvious from the fol- 7o 
lowing description that it may be applied to 
larger or smaller sailing vessels, or to vessels 
provided with stean, propelling-power. 
A designates the hull of the vessel; B, the 
decks, and C C bulk-head compartments, if the 75 
latter be used. Between the decks, and pre? 
erably in close relation to the inner sides of the 
hull, I suitably attach a series of flexible bags 
or sacks, D, which may be made of canvas, 
satuated or otherwise treated to lender then). So 
gas-tight and fire-proof. These bags may also 
be strengthened by flexible bands or flexible 
netting, so that when they are collapsed they 
occupy very little space, and when dilated they 
will resist considerable internal pressure. 
prefer to make the bags tubular with bulging 
ends, as shown in the drawings; but their size 
and shape will depend upon the position they 
are required to occupy in the hold of a vessel. 
I have above stated that these bags Ol' Sacks 90 
D are suitably attached to the hull; but in 
some cases they may be renovable and ar 
ranged in spaces which may be necessarily left 
between boxes, bales, or other pieces of cargo. 
The said bags or sacks on each side of the lon- 95 
gitudinal center of the vessel are connected to 
gether by short tubes (, provided with suitable 
trap-valves, all openiug in one direction and 
at the bow or stern, as the case may be. The 
bags or sacks communicate by a pipe, C. With ICO 
an air or gas holder, lE, adapted for containing 
air ol' gas undel' great pressure, or a liquid 
such, for instance, as liquid carbonic acid 
which, when set free, will instantly expand 
I S5 
I 5 
5 
4 5 
5) 
m 
350,184. 
into the bags or sacks, thus rendering them 
highly buoyant and dispensing with pumping 
engines. The pipe-connection c should be pro 
vided with a gas-tight cock, d, by means of 
which an attendant can regulate the flow of 
gas to the bags and cut off the flow at will. 
When these internal bags or sacks, D, are 
charged with air or gas, they fill up and ren 
der air-tight the spaces between or about the 
objects that surround them and form the cargo. 
G G designate what I denominate 'main 
pipes,' which are suitably secured to the sides. 
of the hull inside and preferably located be 
low the upper deck. These pipes communi 
cate with the gas-holder E. At suitable in 
tervals along the said mains G are unions g, 
provided with cocks f', the handles gy of which 
are preferably connected by a rod or chain, k, 
to the handles of the cocks f", so that when 
the rod or chain k is moved endwise to dis 
charge gas into the mains or to cut off all of 
the cocks in the unions or branch pipes of the 
mains will be simultaneously moved, and the 
bags H will be quickly filled with gas or air. 
HH designate several series of flexible bags 
or buoys, which are preferably made and 
strengthened like the bags or sacks used in 
side of the hull. These bags or buoys H may 
be of any desired shape and size; but I prefer 
to make them of the shape represented in Figs. 
1 and 4, and to connect each series together by 
chains h, and to establish communication be 
tween the buoys by means of flexible pipes i, 
preferably provided with trap-valves v, like 
the valves of the pipes connecting the bags or 
sacks D. The pipes j of each series of buoys 
Hare provided with screw-couplings adapted 
for connecting them gas-tight to the unionsg 
or branch pipes of the mains G. G. 
It will be observed from the above descrip 
tion that when the bags or buoys D and Hare 
arranged as shown in the annexed drawings, 
they all communicate with one common gas 
holder, E, so that in the event of the hull be. 
ing stove in said bags and buoys inside and 
outside of the hull can be filled with a buoy. 
ant gas almost instantly and by one person, 
who can regulate the charge of the bags or 
buoys according to the necessity of the case. 
The external buoys, when not in immediate 
use, can be hauled inboard and compactly 
stowed away. When an accident requires 
their use, a rope is thrown over the side of the 
vessel, either at the stem or stern, both ends 
being held inboard, and this rope is drawn be 
The coupling-pipe j of one 
neath the keel. 
end of a series of buoys H is attached to a 
union of one main G, and by means of said 
rope the other end is drawn under the hull and 
attached by the pipei to a union of the other 
main G. It will thus be seen that each series 
of buoys H communicates with the mains G. G. 
and gas-holder, thereby allowing the several 
external series of buoys to be quickly charged 
with gas. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
If desired, the bags, sacks, or floats-D used 
inside of the vessel's hull may be, and for some 
vessels will be, connected together in trans 
verse series, like the external buoys, H, and 
provided with means for coupling them to the 
mains, each coupling device being provided 
With an independent cock. By this means any 
one or more of the series can be charged with 
gas or compressed atmospheric air from the 
gas-holder, according to the emergency. A 
single two-way cock applied to a pipe which 
communicates with the compressed gas or air 
holder E, and also with the internal and exter 
nal series of bags, floats, or buoys, will suffice 
to charge them simultaneously with the buoy 
ant element. 
In practice I shall employ well-known press 
uregages applied to the holder E, and also to 
the bags, to prevent undue strain. 
It is essential in carrying out my invention 
that means, such as I have described, should 
be employed for filling the buoys on the out 
side of the vessel from the reservoir E inde 
pendently of the means for filling the buoys 
used inside of the vessel; also, that the cocks 
which are applied to the branch pipes of each 
main pipe G should be connected, as described, 
so that all of the cocks can be simultaneously 
opened. 
Having described this invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The combination, with a vessel's hull, of 
collapsible bags connected together in a series 
by means of pipes provided with valves and 
located at the middle of the length of the bags, 
also connected together by means of chains 
near their ends, the supply-pipes j, coupled to 
branch pipes of main pipes located along the 
sides of the vessel inside thereof and commu 
nicating with a reservoir adapted to contain 
compressed air, and the cocks applied to said 
branch pipes and connected by their handles 
to an endwise-movable rod, by which all of 
the cocks can be opened simultaneously, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
2. A vessel's hull provided with collapsible 
bags or floats connected together by means of 
vertical pipes and chains in several series and 
communicating with mains inside of the vessel 
by means of pipes provided with valves adapt 
ed to be moved by a single rod, the reservoir 
with which said mains communicate, and the 
collapsible bags located inside of the vessel, 
communicating with each other and also with 
said reservoir by means of pipes provided with 
a cock, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
* JINO. A. BENNINGER. 
Witnesses: 
" 
... 
GEORGE MARKER, 
FRANK SENN. 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350284.txt	(No Model.) 
J. ANDERSON, 
TWO WHEELED WEHICLE. 
N0, 350,284. 
 
Patented 00t, 5, 1886. 
- W7vesses 
Kiya fewy 
4%. cal-- 
Wve/77 
9 & 2wdwr 
"tigates. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN ANDERSON, OF JACKSON, MICHIGAN. 
Two-WHEELED VEHICLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 350,284, dated October 5, 1886. 
Application filed August 16, 1886. Serial No. 210,996. (No model.) 
on, the screw-shanks 7 passing through the 
holes 14. The nuts 8 are then screwed onto 
the shanks 7, forcing and holding the foot 
piece firmly up against the under side of the 
axle and securing the hanger firmly in place. 
An ordinary metal strap or rod having holes 
to receive the screw-shanks 7 may obviously 
be substituted for the foot-piece without de 
parting from my invention. The brace or rod 
13 is fastened to the thills in the usual manner. 
17 is a metal spring, secured to the arms 22 
22 by a screw, 21, and a clip, 20, near the end 
of said spring which is toward the seat. At 
the loose end of the spring 17 is turned the 
eye 18. The elasticity of the fastening of the 
arms 22 to the cross - piece 15 can be made 
greater or less by placing the clip 20 nearer to 
or farther from the screw 21. The arms 22 22 
are secured to the cross-piece 15 of the thills 
by an L-shaped staple, 19, which passes through 
the eye 18 on the spring 17. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I wish to claim and secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination of the thills provided 
with the screw-shanks 7, the foot-piece 9, nuts 
8, and a hanger or goose-neck for supporting 
the spring above the axle, substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. The combination of a spring-support, 5, 
having a base provided with a concave sur 
face, and a clip having its surface convex to 
fit the concavity of the base of the spring-sup 
port, substantially as shown and described. 
3. The 'combination of the spring 17, having 
an eye, 18, turned in the end thereof, the clip 
20, screw 21, and L-shaped staple 19, consti 
tuting a fastening for the arms 22, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two witnesses. 
S- 
- 
- 
7 
JOHN ANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
JOSLAH. B. FROST, 
A. A. LECLEVE. 
(5 
25 
r 
- 
O 
5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN ANDERSON, of 
Jackson, in the county of Jackson and State 
of Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Methods of Attaching the 
Seats of Two-Wheeled Vehicles, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates especially to improve 
ments in the method of attaching the seat of 
that kind of two-wheeled vehicle usually called 
a sulky' or road cart. 
The object of my improvements is to pro 
vide a method of securing the seat of a two 
wheeled vehicle which shall render the seat 
readily adjustable and easy-riding. I attain 
these objects in the way illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the seat 
Secured in position. Fig. 2 shows the fasten 
ings which secure the semi-elliptical spring to 
the axle, separated so as to show distinctly the 
individual parts. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the 
foot-piece. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the seat 
separated from the vehicle. 
Similar figures refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The seat 1 is provided with the braces or 
rods 22. Said rods are secured to the center 
of the semi-elliptical spring 3 by the clips 4. 
The semi-elliptical spring 3 is secured at each 
end by a Swinging link to a hanger, 5. 
The method of securing the hanger 5 to the 
axle is as follows: Said hanger is placed on the 
axle near the spindle, the under surface, 11, of 
the pedestal coming in contact with the upper 
surface of the axle and the elevated portion 16 
of the hanger toward the center, as shown in 
Fig. 1. The thills are then secured in place, 
the surface 12, Fig. 2, coming in contact with 
the upper surface, 10, of the pedestal of the 
hanger, and the screw-shanks 7 coming on 
each side of the axle and the pedestal 10 11 of 
the hanger. 
The surfaces 12 and 10 should be 
respectively convex and concave, so that the 
hanger will be prevented from moving along 
on the axle. The foot-piece 9 is then placed 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350384.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 350,384. 
A, K, NESBITT, 
PAINTING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 5, 1886. 
62 
21- 
a  2, 
Zaf 
// w 
7.  
Z'2 Z. 
4 
t 
l a 
ce 
Sa. 
d 
 
WITWESSES 
(No Model.) 
No. 350,384, 
- 
A, K, NESBITT, 
PAINTING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 5, 1886. 
 
  
   
 
  
  
 
t 
 
 
 
 
 
Za. YE sess lar 
(2S, 
Air 
7 
 
  
 
 
  
 
sale 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
gton, D.C. 
Y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AMOS KEENY NESBITT, OF ALTON, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-FOURTH TO 
HARRY B. STARR, OF SAMIE PLACE. 
PANTING-MACHINE. 
$32ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 350,384, dated October 5, 1886. 
Application filed March 20, 1886. Serial No. 195,974. (No model.) 
2O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, AMOs KEENY NESBITT, 
of Alton, in the county of Madison and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use. 
5 full Improvements in Painting-Machines; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
to thereon, which form part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
painting-machines, being an improvement on 
a patent granted to me on the 6th day of Oc 
tober 1885, and numbered 327,815. 
The object of the invention is to apply paint, 
Yarnish, or other decorative or preserving 
liquid to fence palings, strips, wires, &c., thus 
much hastening the operation of painting and 
similar operations. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel arrangement of parts hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section of 
ny improved painting-machine. Fig. 2 is a 
similar view of a modification. Fig. 3 is a 
transverse vertical section of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 
a similar view with the reel removed. Fig. 
3O 5 is an end elevation partly in section. Fig. 
6 is a similar view showing a modification. 
Fig. 7 is a perspective of one of the brushes. 
Fig. S is a perspective view of a side painting 
brush. Fig. 9 is a perspective of the paint-re. 
ceptacle. 
A designates the frame of the machine sup 
ported upon proper legs, and having a trough, 
A, with a semi-cylindrical bottomlined with 
metal, preferably galvanized iron. The end 
of the trough A is provided with a valve, a, 
to draw off the paint from said trough when 
necessary. 
B is a shaft having its end journaled in end 
pieces of the trough and turning therein con 
Centrically with its semi-cylindrical bottom. 
BB are disks secured upon and turning 
with the shaft B, and provided with the serra 
tions or teeth b on their edges. The said disks 
are situated, respectively, near the ends of the 
b'b' are wires passing under the disks and 
50 trough A. 
45 
concentric there with, and having their ends 
Secured to the main frame. 
C is an inclined table at the end of the trough 
opposite the valve a the inclination of said 55 
table being downward toward said trough. 
D is a rectangular vertical framerising from 
the main frame at the junction of the inclined 
table and trough. The said frame consists of 
the vertical side bars, dd, having the longitudi- 6o 
nal grooves d' on their inner surfaces, the 
transverse upper and lower bars, d' d', re 
spectively, and the movable transverse bar d, . 
having its ends traveling in the grooves d. 
The bars d and d have central notches or re- 65 
cesses, ee', on the facing Surfaces, which notches 
are dovetailed to receive and hold the COrre 
spondingly dovetailed frames of the brushes 
EE, respectively. The bard has between it 
and the bar d, near the ends of the same, the 
coiled springs F, and between itself and the 
bard the similar springs, ff. The said springs 
aid in maintaining the position of the bar d". 
G is an adjusting-screw, passing through a 
threaded central opening in the bar d, and 75 
impinging on the spring (/, which rests upon 
the bard. By means of said screw and spring 
the frames, with the brushes, are held in con 
tact with the work, and their pressure may be 
varied at will. 
His an inclined draining trough or board, 
having a dovetailed projection, h, on its back, 
adapted for insertion in the notch e' when the 
brush E is removed therefrom and when it is 
only desired to paint one side of the paling. 
I is a paint-receptacle adapted to be secured 
to the frame D and used in connection with 
the draining-board when only one side of a 
pailing is to be painted. The upper portion 
of said receptacle is hopper-shaped, and it has 
at its lower end a foot, i, provided with the 
escape holes or perforations i i", and between 
which and the draining-board the palingspass. 
The mode of operation is as follows: When 
the pallings are to be painted the trough A is 
partially filled with paint, the palings are 
placed with their edges between the serrations 
of the disks B and the shaft B rotated so as to 
pass the palings through the paint. They are 
then removed and passed between the brushes 
which wipe off the Superfluous paint and prop 
erly distribute that remaining. The super 
90 
85 
95 
SO 
- 
IC) 
g 
350,384 
2. In a painting-machine, the combination 
of the frame of the machine, the paint-recep 
tacle capable of attachment thereto, the bar d", 
adjustable upon the frame D by means of a 
Spring and adjusting-screw, the brush Secured 
to said bar d", and the draining-board secured 
to the lower part of the frame D, substantially 
as specified. 
3. The painting-machine composed of the 
main frame provided with the trough A, the 
inclined table C, the frame D, secured to the 
main frame at the junction of the paint-trough 
and inclined table, the detachable brushes E 
E, provided with the fenders J J, the pivoted 
spring-controlled side brushes, K, the shaft ro 
tating in the paint-trough, the toothed disks 
thereon, the detachable paint-receptacle, and 
the detachable draining-board, all constructed 
and arranged substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
AMOS KEENY NESBITT. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
HARRY B. STARR, 
J. W. WARREN. 
fluous paint escapes into the trough. The 
brushes have secured to their sides rubber 
fenders J J, which l'egulate the manner in 
which the palings pass between the brushes, 
and also tend to keep the bristles in position. 
When the palings are to be painted on one 
side only the paint-receptacle I is attached to 
the frame D, as described, and the draining 
board to the bar d'. The paint then flows out 
of the perforations i' onto the upper surface of 
the palings and is distributed by the upper 
brush, E, the draining-board carrying the 
superfluous paint to the trough A. Where it 
is desired to paint more perfectly the edges 
of the palings, small brushes IX are pivoted 
upon the upper surface of the bar d on each 
side of the brush E, and are pressed into con 
tact with the edges of the palings by the springs 
lic secured to the bar d, as shown. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. In a painting-machine, the combination 
of the paint-trough having the semi-cylindri 
cal bottom, the shaft rotating thereon, the 
toothed disks secured to the shaft, the Wires 
passing below said disks concentric therewith, 
and the adjustable brushes attached to the 
frame of the machine. 
. 
Io 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350484.txt	(No Model.) 
N. C. GILL MORE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
CHUTE FOR BRANDING CATTLE AND HORSES. 
No. 350,484. 
Patented Oct. 12, 1886. 
& 
z 
titly 
as eS2 sea 
S 
T 
lessellitsen 
Ell 
I ss 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
E. E.H. E. A 
A-T-3-AT-TTE 
T. e. 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A 
I 
 
 
 
 
2%. C. 24. T. 2. 
/24/7.4/ 
"Taz722 a 
N. PETERS Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
N. C. GILLMORE, 
CHUTE FOR BRANDING CATTLE AND HORSES. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 350,484, 
 
Patented Oct. 12, 1886. 
928)iticssos 
4% C Wea, 
-12z 6.6%-1. 3v-uo vitot 
siz, alterns 
N. PEERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
N. C. GILLMORE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
CHUTE FOR BRANDING CATTLE AND HORSES, 
No. 350,484. 
Patented 00t, 12, 1886, 
   
H 
WS 
O c Z 
 
 
 
C1 
C 
C. 
ca. 
EeREeRoc 
 
 
 
 
C A. 
At 
6 is 
7 22ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ2ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ2ZZZZZZZZZZZZ29. 
WSEs SNENESSI 
2Z3 
123 
a 
As 
2 
6 a cy 
sits 
. 
 
282.vlossos 
sy4- t tot110 
N. feeRs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
NATHAN C. GILLMORE, OF LARAMIE CITY, WYOMING TERRITORY. 
CHUTE FOR BRAND ING CATTLE AND HORSES. 
2.CAFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 350,484, dated October 12, 1886. 
Application filed May 6, 1886. Serial No. 201,333. (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
clined frame, and provided at their outsides 
Be it known that I, NATHAN C. GILLMORE, with hinge-plates d' and eye-plates d", as fully 
of Laramie City, in the county of Albany and 
shown in Fig. 2. The doors D are hinged to 
Territory of Wyoming, have invented a new 
the frame-beams C" by means of their plates d', 
and useful Improvement in Chutes for Brand 
and bolts set through the same, and plates c. 
ing Cattle and Horses; and I do hereby de 
on said beams. They are also provided at 
clare that the following is a full and exact de 
their outer sides with pins d, connected there 
scription of the same, reference being had to 
to, by cords or chains for use in securing the 
the accompanying drawings, and to the letters 
position of the doors, as shown in Fig. 2, by 
inserting the pins into the eye-plates d on the 
of reference marked thereon. 
The object of this improvement is to provide 
doors D, and eye-plates c' on the beams C. 
an appliance for facilitating the labor and less 
Any other suitable hinging and latching de 
ening the expense of branding cattle and 
vices may be substituted for the plates and 
horses, and that is also applicable to breaking 
pins shown. 
The object of providing the clamping-frames 
and taming the latter. These results are at 
tainable by the mechanism illustrated in the 
with the close doors D ID is to prevent danger 
drawings here with filed as part hereof, s 
to and injury of frightened or fractious animals 
that might accrue from their kicking or other 
which the same letters of reference denote the 
wise getting their limbs through an open 
same parts in the different views. 
- 
Figure 1 is a plan view representing a brand 
frame. 
ing chute embodying the features of my im 
E and E are rollers supported by axial pins 
provement. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
projecting from brackets bolted to the tops of 
same. Fig. 3 is a front elevation with parts 
the frame-beams A. 
broken away and parts adjusted for more fully 
F is a roller supported by a hanger, F, fixed 
showing the construction and relation of dif. 
to the lower side of each of the frame-beams 
ferent features. Fig. 4 is a front elevation 
A in line with the peripheries of the opposite 
with parts removed that are fully shown in 
rollers, E. E. 
other figures. Fig. 5 is a longitudinal verti 
H H represent windlasses at each side of the 
cal section. Figs. 6 and 7 are perspective de 
frame-work, supported by standards h h, bolt 
tail representations. 
ed to the platform B', and provided with cranks 
A A' A' A' is an angular frame, made pref. 
h', for operating the same as occasion may re 
erably of wood beams, suitably secured to each 
quire. The windlasses H H are provided 
other, substantially in the order shown, and 
with ratchet-plates h", adapted to engage with 
to a base-frame composed of longitudinal and 
a pawl which may be affixed to the platform 
transverse sill-beams BB, provided with a 
B or standards h, or other practicable posi 
floor or platform, B, connected to each other 
tion, as may be deemed advisable. 
- 
in the ordinary manner. 
G G represent ropes or chains connected to 
C C represent the parts of two inclined 
the windlasses HH', thence over the pulleys or 
frames, made of wood beams, preferably, suit 
rollers EE, and under the rollers F to the 
ably secured to each other, and provided at 
opposite frame parts, C, with which they are 
the lower ends of their parts C with hinge 
connected by means of eyes g g or otherwise. 
plates c', by means of which they are pivotally 
The front end of the appliance is provided 
connected to corresponding hinge-plates, b, 
with upright beams or strips a, which form, in 
fixed to the platform B within the frame AA 
connection with the upper transverse beam, 
A'. The frame parts C are provided on the 
A, and lower transverse end beam, B, a frame 
insides with curved formation, as shown at c 
for a door, K, connected to one of the uprights 
in Fig. 7, and at their outsides with hinged 
a by hinges.f. (Fully shown in Fig. 4.) The 
plates c' and eye-plates c, for a purpose here 
door K is provided near its top with a small 
inafter explained. 
round door, K, hinged thereto, as shown at 
DDD are doors or partial sides to the frame. 
f', and f' is a hook fixed to the doorin position 
work CC, having their insides conforming to to engage with a staple, ct, in the upright a, 
the curved part c of the parts C C in the in- and thereby secure the position of the door, as 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
95 
IOC 
2 
350,484 
35 
45 
55 
by the hinged frames and the doors D, they 
are under perfect control, and the most vicious 
can be managed or branded with perfect safety 
to the operator. 
I am aware of the invention of a branding 
chute consisting of one fixed frame and one ad 
justable frame adapted to be moved toward 
the fixed frame by means of a rope or chain 
connection with winding mechanism attached 
to the fixed frame, forming one side of the de 
vice, as set forthin Letters Patent No. 252,345, 
bearing date January 17, 1882. I do not claim 
such construction; but 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The combination of two oppositely-inclined 5 
frames fixed to a platform, two oppositely-in 
clined frames hinged to the platform between 
the fixed frames, and provided with doors, as 
shown, the rollers fixed to the horizontal 
beams of the stationary frames, the windlasscs 
fixed to the platform at opposite sides of the 
structure, and the ropes connecting the wind 
lasses with the adjustable frames over and un 
der the rollers fixed to the horizontal beams 
of the stationary frames, all arranged to oper 
ate as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
NATHAN C. GILLMORE, 
Witnesses: 
CHARLESW. BRAAIEL, 
OTTO GRAMM. 
Io operated on into the same. 
shown in the last - mentioned figure. The 
curved projections or parts of the beams C 
and doors D may be made integral with the 
Same, or may be obtained by suitably-formed 
5 pieces fixed to straight parts, as indicated at 
d in Fig. 6. 
In the application of the mechanism its rear 
end is connected with the wall or fence of an 
inclosure adapted to guide the animal to be 
When a herd of 
cattle or horses is to be branded it is driven 
into the inclosure, and the animals are one by 
one driven into the appliance between the 
frames CC and doors D, the curved formation 
15 of which is adapted to fit the bodies of the ani 
mals. The windlasses are then put in motion, 
and the frames C C and doors D are thereb 
y 
drawn together against the bodies of the ani 
mals, when the pawls will engage with the 
2O ratchets and hold the frames and doors against 
the body of the animal in a manner to prevent 
any violent action of the latter. The central 
or end doors, D, which come opposite the shoul 
ders, trunk, or haunches of the animal, may be 
23 opened and the branding-iron applied to any 
part of the body desired, after which the door 
K is opened and the animal passed out to 
make place for others. 
The doors D may be opened for handling 
3o animals to be tamed or broken, and the door 
K may be opened to make an aperture for use 
in handling and petting animals to be famed 
about the head. 
When the animals are in the clamps formed 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350584.txt	(No Model.) 
C. E. FRITTS, 
METHOD OF MAKING ISOCHRONAL HAIR SPRINGS, 
No. 350,584, 
Patented Oct. 12, 1886. 
Zasz. 4. 
St. 
() IN 
INVENTOR 
62.4.6.2.24 
Attorney 
 
WITNESSES 
3S 
W 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E, FRITTS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
METHOD OF MA KING ISOCHRONAL HAIR-SPRINGS. 
g?ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 350,584, dated October 12, 1886. 
Application filed March 26, 1884. Serial No. 125,520. (No modcl.) 
- 
55 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs E, FRITTs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
provements in the Art of Making Isochronal 
Hair-Springs for Chronometers, Watches, and 
other Articles, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
In making isochronal hair-springs the usual 
course with flat springs is to raise the outer 
coil up by means of two elbows or bends, and 
to Curve this coil toward the center over the 
other coils, such a spring being known as a 
Brguet spring. This kind of spring re 
quires great skill and experience to shape prop 
erly, and is also difficult to harden and temper 
properly, and is, consequently, expensive to 
make. It also requires considerable depth in 
the movement, owing to the room occupied by 
its two Superposed coils with the necessary 
Space between them, and therefore can only be 
used in movements of considerable thickness. 
My improvement consists in forming a ter 
minal curve for isochromal purposes in the 
Same plane as the rest of the spring, so that it 
can be used in any watch, however thin. It 
call also be formed without the distortion and 
injury to the metal which is commonly pro 
duced in forming the Brguet spring. The 
terminal curve being in the same plane as the 
other coils, my spring is free from the tend 
ency to twist which the Brguet spring has, 
and which interferes with perfect isochronal 
action. 
Furthermore, it consists in giving to the 
Spring the desired form or configuration, and 
then giving it the desired temper or hardness 
equally and perfectly throughout its entire 
length while held in the form which it is to 
permanently have-something very difficult, 
if not impossible, to do with the Brguet 
Spring, on account of its peculiarly irregular 
and straggling form, but easy to do with this 
form of spring. 
My invention also consists in the means for 
forming the spring in the proper shape and 
holding it so while giving it the desired 
hardness or temper. I thus produce an isoch 
ronal flat hair-spring having a terminal curve 
in the same plane as the body of the spring, 
and having a uniform hardness or temper 
throughout its entire length-something en 
tirely new-and it can be made about as 
cheaply as the ordinary flat springs. 
Figure 1 represents the means for forming 
this spring, both in plan and in perspective. 
Fig. 6 shows a spring thus made. Fig. 2 is a 
modification for making two or four Springs 
at once, and Fig. 3 shows the winding-arbor 
for making four springs. Fig. 4 represents a 
modification for making a spring such as shown 
in Fig. 7, and Fig. 5 is a modification for mak 
ing two or four at the same time. 
In Fig. 1 is shown, in plan at the top and in 
side view below, a thin plate, A, of steel, copper, 
brass, or any other suitable material on which 
is formed an elevated ring or templet, (t, 
whose height is equal to the breadth of the 
proposed spring, and whose thickness is sub 
stantially equal to the distance between the 
outer coil and the over-coil. At e is a slit 
or opening through which the spring - Wire 
w is wound in by the usual arbor, N, with 
the slot in in its top. The lip 1 is suitably 
rounded to give a gradual curve to the Spring 
wire, which, after the cavity within ( is filled, 
is bent back over the lip c at 1 and around 
The spring-wire having been 
the circle a. 
inserted in the slot of the arbor i, and pro 
jecting through the opening c, the cover B is 
put on and held by friction, by the pins p p, Ol' 
otherwise. One or both of the pins p may be 
screws. The arbor being turned and the Wire 
wound into the cavity till filled, in the usual 
way, the ends are then turned backward around 
the ring a to any desired distance, and then 
twisted around one of the pins p or over the 
edge of the box A, to secure the ends. When 
the spling is to be thus wound backward more 
than half a turn, outside of the bend d, the 
screws or pins pp must be replaced by Some 
other means for holding the plates together, as 
by a nut on the outer end of the winding-ar. 
bor or otherwise. This is the method I pre 
fer, as the outermost wire then covers the other 
and protects it from the air while hardening 
and tempering. Its shape Will be slightly dif 
ferent from the other, and may either be used 
for suitable purposes, or the over-coil can be 
broken off when finished, thus converting it 
into the usual hardened and tempered flat spi 
ral spring, while the other is a spring of my 
improved form. If the space required be 
75 
So . 
85 
95 
O) 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
2 
350,584 
O. 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
tween the different coils of the spring is great 
er than would be produced by winding two 
springs up together, as described, three or 
more may be wound together and made at 
once, either all alike, as just explained, or one 
or more of the wires may be cut off at the 
opening c before hardening and tempering. 
Fig.2 shows two openings through the ring 
(t, So that two or four springs of my improved 
form may be made at once, in the manner al 
ready described. When they are to be held 
firmly during the entire hardening and tem 
pering process, I prefer to not make the ring 
ct of uniform thickness, as shown in Fig. 1, but 
With the end 2 of the segment slightly thicker 
than the lip 1, so that as the over-coil is wound 
around the ring at it will ride evenly on top of 
the wire bent over the lip 1, and the over-coil 
Will thus be either concentric with the balance 
axis or slightly divergent, as may be preferred 
in each case. 
The slotted end n of the winding-arbor N, 
Fig. 3, may be cylindrical; but it would be 
better to make the quadrants slightly snail 
shaped, so that each wire, when it reaches the 
next slit, will be raised to the level of the top 
of the wire therein, and so will ride evenly 
upoll it without any bend or departure from 
the true spiral form in the coil. 
It is of course understood that different es 
capements or kinds of movements may require 
different forms to be given to the over-coil in 
order to secure isochronal action in each case. 
and the elevated part or templet a must be so 
shaped as to give it such form, and while the 
form shown in Fig. 6 will be satisfactory in 
lmost cases, it may be necessary in others to 
have the over-coil less curved, or in some sup 
posable cases even curved in the opposite di 
rection; but it will very seldom be required 
to diverge more than shown in Fig. 7. This 
shape is imparted by means of the mold or 
templet a, formed as in Figs. 4 and 5, as al 
ready described. My method of making springs 
is therefore capable of securing isochronism in 
a flat spiral spring in any supposable circum 
Stances. 
In the process of ascertaining the precise 
form of spring required to produce isochronal 
action in any particular movement, I would 
say that the action of the spring can be va 
ried in different ways-as (1) by changing the 
length from the center to the bend d, (2) by 
changing the length from the bend d to the 
stud S, or (3) by changing the diameter or 
the shape of the bend d. The first item de 
pends on the thickness of the spring-wire and 
the space between the Winding arbor and the 
ring or templet a. The second item can be 
changed after the spring is formed, hardened, 
and tempered by moving the stud Salong the 
outer coil. This over-coil, as before stated, 
may be of any length desired by the watch 
maker in each case, either a part of a circle 
or turn, or one or more full turns outside of 
the bend d, all being in the same plane as the 
central spiral. The third item is preferably 
varied while constructing the spring. The 
bend is shown in the drawings assemicircular, 
but may be of any other form necessary to se 
cure perfect isochronism in any particular 
case, and to cause the outer end of the central 
spiral to approach the center (or balance-axis) 
in proportion to the force of the pull upon the 
bend d when the balance is revolved, so as to 
keep the inner spiral from being either drawn 
or pressed bodily in any direction, and cause 
it to remain always truly concentric with the 
balance-axis, so that the balance-pivots will 
not be pressed by the spring against the sides 
of their jewel-holes, as is well understood by 
watch-makers to be necessary. For instance, 
instead of d, Fig. 6, being semicircular, the 
inner spiral may retain its own proper form 
to d, and the over-coil may curve inward to 
Ward that point, where they may be united 
by a short bend in the spring; or, per contra, 
the over-coil may be regular to d, and the in 
ner spiral curve outward to meet it; or the 
short bend may be midway between the two 
spirals, and both be suitably curved to it, so 
as to avoid bringing the two reversed spirals 
any closer together, except near the bend d. 
All this may be ascertained as well under. 
stood by those versed in the art by careful 
trials with a movement having such a train, 
escapement, balance, &c., as the proposed 
springs are required to be isochronal With, so 
that when the spring under trial has been 
brought to perfect isochronism its form shall 
be a correct guide for shaping the templet for 
use in manufacturing duplicates thereof, so 
that ordinary spring-maker's may then readily 
make them in any desired number. It is only 
necessary, after the proper form has been as 
certained by calculation or experiment, to 
construct a mold or templet which will hold 
the spring in said form while the necessary 
hardness, temper, or set is given to the over 
coil or terminal curve. I call the part d d in 
Fig. 7 a terminal curve, because, although 
straight, it is one of the possible forms or curves 
of the terminal coil. . 
These springs can be used either with or 
without a regulator. In the latter case the 
terminal curve d d, Fig. 6, may be moved 
through the stud S to adjust the spring for 
isochronism, and the watch may then be rated 
by means of the balance-screws. In the case 
of Fig. 7, or any other irregular form, the stud 
may be made adjustable, and preferably in 
the form of a screw-clip, which is caused to 
grasp the spring did between its jaws when 
placed at the proper point. 
If a regulator is used with the Spring, Fig. 
6, it works along the terminal curved d, as 
usual, e representing the two pins of the reg 
ulator. If the terminal curve cl d is not col)- 
centric with the balance-axis, the regulator 
center can be set central with the curve of the 
over-coil dd. In the case of the curve, Fig. 
7, the regulator can move in a straight line 
along the terminal curve. 
I do not give directions for hardening, tem 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
IO5. 
I 
f) 
I 25 
I 30 
h 
 
350,584 
55 
5 
IO. 
25 
40 
45 
. 
pering, setting, polishing, coloring, &c., as 
they are well understood by those versed in 
the art, and any desired process may be fol 
lowed in making my springs. I would also 
Say that in some cases it may be desirable to 
make the outer coil (shown as parallel to the 
Over-coil dd in Fig. 6) diverge somewhat. 
from the spiral form for a greater or less dis 
tance back from the bend d, either in order to 
bring did concentric with the balance-axis or 
for isochronal purposes. This is easily done 
by altering the spring when finished, or by 
making it as desired, by causing the interior 
surface of the templet a to take the form de 
sired, instead of making it in a circular form, 
as shown. 
There are many other ways in which, with 
out departing from the principle thereof, the 
details of my invention may be varied to suit 
particular cases, as will readily occur to those 
Versed in the art. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. That improvement in making isochronal 
hair - springs which consists in bending or 
Winding the spring-wire into a spiral form, 
then forming upon the outer end an over-coil 
in the same plane as the other coils, giving 
said over-coil the form or curvature required 
for securing isochronal action in the conditious 
for which the spring is intended, holding the 
Spring in said form, and giving it the proper 
hardness, temper, or set while so held in its 
final form. 
2. That improvement in the art of making 
hair-springs isochronal which consists in form 
ing upon the spring an over-coil in the same 
plane as the other coils, and givingit the prede 
termined isochronous form or curvature, which 
will secure for the spring an isochronal action. 
3. That improvement in the art of making 
hair-springs isochronal which consists in form 
ing upon the spring an over-coil in the same 
plane as the other coils, but reversed in direc 
tion, and giving it an isochronous form or 
curvature. 
4. That improvement in the art of making 
isochronal hair-springs which consists in hav 
ing the outer portion formed in a terminal 
curve in an opposite direction, but in the same 
plane as the rest of the spring. 
5. That improvement in the art of making 
- 
w 
CtWe. 
hair-springs which consists in making the 
spring with a reversed over-coil and terminal 
6. In a box or device for use in making 
isochronal hair-springs, a mold, or templet 
having a configuration suitable for giving the 
desired shape to a terminal curve in the same 
plane as the rest of the spring, and adapted 
for holding it in said shape while giving the 
spring the proper hardness, temper, or set. 
7. A box for use in making hair-springs, 
having a cavity for the spiral portion and a 
templet for forming the terminal curve in the 
Same plane. 
8. A box or device for use in making hair 
springs, having a cavity for forming the spi 
ral portion, a mold or templet for giving the 
required shape to the outer coil and terminal 
curve in the same plane as the spiral portion, 
and a cover for confining the spring in its po 
sition. 
9. A device for use in making hair-springs, 
consisting of a box having a cavity for the 
spiral portion and a templet for forming the 
terminal curve in the same plane as the spiral 
portion, a cover for confining the spring, and 
a winding-arbor, substantially as set forth. 
10. That improvement in the art of making 
isochronal hair-springs which consists in roll 
ing a part of the spring-wire in spiral form, 
then forming the remainder into a suitable 
over-coil and terminal curve in the same..plane 
as the rest of the spring, and giving the entire 
spring the desired hardness, temper, or Set 
uniformly from end to end while held in its 
final form. 
11. That improvement in the art of making 
isochronal hair-springs which consists in hav 
ing the body of the spring and the isochro 
nizing over-coil and terminal curve in the same 
plane. 
12. That improvement in the art of making 
isochronal hair-springs which consists in mak 
ing the spring in two spirals, one outside of 
the other and reversed in direction, connect 
ed by a bend in the spring, the whole being in 
one piece, and both spirals formed in the same 
plane. 
4 
CHARLES E, FRITTS. 
Witnesses: 
D. H. HoPKINSON, 
EDWIN CLARK. 
85 
90 
95 
IO) 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350684.txt	(No Model.) 
D. KESSLER, 
COMBINED HARROW AND CULTIVATOR. 
No. 350,684, 
 
Patented Oct. 12, 1886, 
S. Z Z; 
S C2 N* \ \ \7 N2 
SS) / V 
Af 
"EWS, 4 's 
N 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID KESSLER, OF WILLIS, KANSAS. 
COMBINED HARROW AND CULTIVATOR. 
...PECIFiCATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 350,684, dated October 2, 1886. 
Application filed May 25, 1886. Scrial No. 203,225. 
(No model.) 
55 
To all whom it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID KESSLER, of 
Willis, in the county of Brown and State of 
Kansas, have invented a new and useful Im 
5 provement in a Combined Harrow and Cultiva 
tor, of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my combined har 
row and cultivator, shown as adjusted for cul 
tivating listed corn. Fig. 2 is a sectional side 
elevation of the same, taken through the bro 
ken line at ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a front eleva 
tion of the Same. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
combined harrows and cultivators constructed 
2O in such a manner that they can be readily ad 
justed for cultivating listed corn, or surface 
corn, or for ordinary harrowing, and which 
shall be reliable and effective in operation with 
either adjustment. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of various parts of the com 
bined harrow and cultivator, as will be here 
inafter fully described, and then claimed. 
A are the side bars of the harrow, which in 
cline from each other toward their forward 
ends, and are connected at their ends by cross 
bars B. 
Care two parallel bars, placed at such a 
distance apart as to pass along the opposite 
sides of a row of plants, and which are secured 
by bolts D to the under sides of the cross-bars 
B, upon the opposite sides of and equally dis 
tant from the centers oftlaesaid bars B. Blocks 
or bars E are interposed between the upper 
edges of the parallel bal's Cand the lower sides 
of the cross-bars B, to bring the lower edges of 
the said bars C to the desired distance from 
the lower sides of the said cross-bars B, as the 
depth of the listed furrow may require. Sev 
eral ll-les are follmed in the cross-bars B to re 
ceive the bolts D, so that the parallel bars C 
can be readily adjusted at a greater or a less 
distance apart, as may be required. 
F are the handles, the lower parts of which 
are passed through keepers attached to the 
rear cross-bar B, and their lower ends are 
bolted to the lower side of the cross-bar G, 
bolted to the upper sides of the side bars, A, at 
a little distance from the said rear cross-bar 
B. The rear parts of the handles F are con 
nected by a round, H. 
To the side bars, A, and to the front cross 
bar B are attached harrow-teeth I, which are 
inclined to the rearward, as shown in Figs. 1. 
and 2, and which are designed to cultivate the 
ridges between rows of listed corn, as illus 
trated in Fig. 3. 
To the opposite sides and 
the centers of the parallel bai's C are secured 
teeth J, to cultivate the bottoms of the listed 
furrows at the opposite sides of the rows of 65 
plants, as illustrated in Figs. 1 and 3. The 
teeth IJ are secured in place by wedge-keys 
K, as shown in Fig. 2, so that the said teeth 
can be readily adjusted to enter the soil to any 
desired depth. 
To the rear cross-bar IB, at a little distance 
from the outer sides of the parallel bal's C, are 
attached the forward ends of plow-beams I, 
the rear parts of which are curved downward, 
and to their lower ends are attached or lipOn 
them are formed cultivator-teeth M, to plow 
down the shoulders of the ridges and throw 
the soil around the plants. The plants are 
protected from the soil thrown by the cultiva 
to'-teeth M by an arched fender, N, the fol'. 
ward ends of the sides of which are connected 
with the rear ends of the parallel bars C by 
bars O. 
To the rear part of the top of fender N is at 
tached the lower end of a standard, P, the upper 
end of which passes through a slot in the round 
H, and is secured in place by a pin or bolt, Q, 
passing through it and through the said round 
H. Seveal holes are formed through the 
standard P to receive the pin Q, so that the 
rear end of the fender N can be readily raised 
and lowered to allow more or less soil to pass 
around the plants, as may be required. 
When the machine is to be used as an ordi 
nary harrow, the bars or blocks E are removed 95 
from below the cross-bars B, and placed above 
the said cross-bars, and the beams and plows 
Li MI and the fender N are detached. In this 
case harrow-teeth IR are attached to the cross 
bars B at the opposite sides of their centers to 
cultivate the space between the bars C. 
The draft can be applied to the machine by 
means of a clevis, S, attached to the center of 
the forward cross-bar B, or by means of draw 
IOO 
25 
-45 
 
2 
350,684 
IO 
1. A combined harrow and cultivator, con- 
from the soil, as set forth. 
rods T, connected at their forward ends by a 
3. In a combined harrow and cultivator, the 
ring or link, U, and connected at their rear combination, with the inclined side bars, A, 
ends with staples or studs V, attached to the for. the cross-bars B, the parallel bars C, the ha? 3O 
ward cross-bar B at the opposite sides of and row-teeth I J, and the handles F. H., of the 
equally distant from the center of the said beams and cultivator-teeth LM and the fen 
CrOSS-bar. 
der N, substantially as herein shown and de 
Having thus fully described my invention, scribed, whereby the shoulders of the ridges 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters will be plowed down and the plants protected 35 
Patent- 
4. The combined harrow and cultivator 
sisting of diverging side bars connected by herein shown and described, comprising the 
CrOSS-bars, harrow-teeth projecting below said diverging side bars having harrow-teeth, the 
side and cross bars, ERE central E. central EE, harrow teeth, 4. 
parallel bars having teeth projecting below the cross-bars, cultivator - teeth on the rear 
the said teeth on the side and cross bars to crossbar, the handles connected by cross-piece, 
Work the ground between the ridges, substan. the fender formed of a ?-shaped plate pivoted 
tially as set forth. 
to the rear ends of the centralbars between the 
combination, with the inclined side bars, A, connected to the rear end of the fender and se 
and the crossbars B, provided with harlow cured adjustably to the handle cross-piece, 
teeth I, and the handles F H, and cross-bar G, substantially as set forth. 
of the parallel bars C, the fastening-bolts D, 
the bars or blocks E, connected with the said 
parallel bars and cross-bars, and the teeth J, 
substantially as herein shown and described, 
whereby the ridges and furrows of listed plants 
can be readily cultivated, as set forth. 
2. In a combined harrow and cultivator, the Eyes and a vertical adj this, 
C. W. FOX, 
C. M. CRAWFORD. 
DAVID KESSLER. 
Witnesses: 
--- 
45 
--w 
-- 
5 
2O 
---. -- 
25 
y 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350784.txt	(No Model.) 
E. R. THURMAN. 
STATION INDICATOR 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 350,784, 
Patented Oct. 12, 1886. 
 
LANHAMS. 
 
SNSSN w 
a 2 
3 NS 
w 
N 
 
 
 
  
&S al &ltrot victs 
C.4 s4-Y-2 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C., 
 
(No Model.) 
E. R. THURMAN. 
STATION INDICATOR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EDWIN, R. THURMAN, OF NASH VILLE, TENNESSEE. 
STATION IND CATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 350,784, dated Cctober 12, 1886. 
Application filed July 26, 1886. 
Serial No. 209,128. (No model.) 
To all whon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN, R. THURMAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Nashville, in the county of Davidson and State 
of Tennessee, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Station - Indicators, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in sta 
tion-indicators; and it consists of the peculiar 
combination and novel construction and ar 
rangement of the various parts for service, 
substantially as hereinafter fully set forth, and 
specifically pointed out in the claims. 
The primary object of my invention is to 
provide an improved station indicator which 
will inform passengers of the train of the 
name of the station which the train is ap 
proaching, and simultaneously Sound an alarm 
to call or direct the attention of the passengers 
to the apparatus and the name of the station, 
thereby avoiding the necessity of having the 
brakeman or conductor call out the name of 
the station as the train approaches it. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide an improved indicator With means where 
by the indicator-ribbon can be moved or fed 
in either a forward or reverse direction, so 
that the apparatus can be adapted to inform 
passenge's of their destination, whether the 
train be running either forward or backward. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide the indicator with improved clutch-and 
lever mechanism which will be automatically 
released from the driving-gear and returned 
to their normal positions when the strain or 
pull on the operating-cord is released, so that 
the apparatus is ill condition for instant use 
at all times; and, finally, the object of my 
present improvements is to provide an im 
proved indicator which will possess superior 
advantages over all others of its class that 
have preceded it in points of simplicity, 
strength and durability of construction, cheap 
ness of manufacture, and reliability and effi 
ciency of operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate a station-indicator embodying my pres 
ent improvements, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion. Fig. 2 is a side elevation with the in 
closing-case broken away. Fig. 3 is an end 
view of the device as shown) in Fig. 2. Fig. 
4 is a vertical sectional view on the line aca 
of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 5 is an enlarged detail view 
of the clutch mechanism. 
Fig. 6 is a vertical 
I transverse sectional view oil the line / y of 55 
Fig. 2. Fig. 7 is a detail view of the sliding 
carrying - plate and the can o' tumbler for 
actuating the same. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like 
letters of reference denote corresponding 
parts in all the figures, A designates the inclos 
ing-case of my improved station-indicator. 
This case may be of any approved form and 
material, and at its front it is provided with 
a viewing-opening, (t, which is covered by a 
plate of glass or other transparent substance, 
So that the names of the stations on the travel 
ing ribbon B can be very easily and readily 
seen through the said opening by the passen 
gers to inform then of their destination or of 
the names of the stations which the train is 
approaching. This ribbon B is of any ap 
proved material-canvas or other suitable 
Substance--and the names of the stations of 
the railroad through or by which the train 
paSSes are suitably inscribed Ol' stamped on 
the ribbon, preferably transversely across the 
face thereof. 
B B" designate the feeding rolls, whicli are 
arranged one above the other and in rear of 
the supporting-rollers b'l', which are arranged 
one above the other in like manner as the 
feeding-rollers. These supporting-rollers b'l 
are loosely journaled on suitable shafts, b, . 
which are fitted or supported in a suitable 
frane, b, that is rigidly a?fixed within the in 
closing-case A, and the said rollers are ar 
ranged one above the other and immediately 
in rear of the viewing-opening in the inclosing 
case A, so that the indicator traveling ribbon 
is exposed to view, and the names thereon can 
be easily discerned by the passenger's seated 
in the cars. The roller b is arranged in line 
with the feed roller, drum, or spool B, and 
the roller b is arranged in like manner with 
the other drum or spool, B, and the ends of 
the traveling ribbon are secured or affixed to 
the said feeding drums or spools in any suit 
able manner; or it may be an endless ribbon. 
The feed drums or spools B B are fitted on 
suitable shafts or pins, b', each of the said feed 
drums or spools being provided at its ends 
with enlarged metallic heads b, ole of which 
has a hub or projection that is provided with 
a central countersunk portion, ill which is fit 
ted the conical point of a binding-screw, l, 
which is provided with an enlarged finger 
piece, and works in a threaded opening that 
95 
75 
SO 
IOO 
O 
25 
40 
So 
 
350,78. 
us 
IO 
2O 
25 
AO 
45 
SO 
55 
is formed in a metallic plate, b, which is rig 
idly affixed to a vertical support or standard, 
b', within the case A. One end of each of the 
spools or drums is supported by the binding 
screw, and the speed or rapidity with which 
the drum rotates can be governed or regulated 
by tightening or releasing the said screw. The 
heads b at the opposite end of the drums or 
spools are provided with transverse ribs c, 
each of which is fitted in a groove or channel, 
c', that is formed in a hollow sleeve or hub, C, 
which is journaled so as to rotate freely in a 
suitable opening in a vertically-disposed bear 
ing-plate, C. This bearing-plate C is affixed 
very rigidly or securely by means of screws 
or other suitable fastening devices to a verti 
cal wall or partition, C, within the case A, 
and the sleeve or hub C is extended through 
the bearing-plate, SO as to provide an extended 
bearing-surface for the spindle or shaft b of 
the drum or spool, and thus render the oper 
ation of the drum or spool very steady. One. 
of these hubs and bearing-plates is provided 
for each of the spools or drums, and the spin 
dle or shaft of the drums is extended through 
the hub or sleeve and made square in cross 
section, as at b" in Fig. 2 of the drawings, so 
that the ribbon can be moved in either direc 
tion by rotating the drums or spools, this op 
eration being effected independently of the 
mechanism for automatically feeding the rib 
bon. When the train approaches or passes a 
station. 
To the vertical wall or partition C of the 
case, which separates the feed and supporting 
rolls and the ribbon from the driving mech 
anism, is rigidly affixed a base, D, which con 
prises a flat metallic plate, which is provided 
with suitable openings for the passage of the 
screws o' bolts which secure the base to the 
partition, as will be very readily understood. 
Edesignates the shifting or sliding plate, that 
is supported upon the base D in any suitable 
manner and arranged a short distance in front 
of the Same, SO as to be out of contact there 
with, to permit it to slide very freely and eas 
ily upon its supports. This shifting plate is 
designed to carry the operative devices or 
driving mechanism, and is provided for the 
purpose of changing the relative position of 
the driving-gearing to the feed drums or spools, 
to actuate either one or the other, and thus 
move the traveling ribbon in either forward 
The shifting plate is 
or reverse direction. 
provided with recesses or slots d at its corners 
or any other suitable place, through which are 
passed headed pins or studs d", that are rigidly 
affixed in the base D, and by means of these 
headed pins the shifting plate is supported on 
the base-plate, while it is permitted to have 
the requisite free movement back and forth 
thereon for the purpose above explained. 
F designates a rotary cafn or tumbler, which 
is arranged at or near the lower side of the 
base and the shifting plate, and this cam is 
provided with three straight faces, f, which 
serve to throw or move the driving-gearing 
. 
on the shifting plate in or out of gear with 
either one of the feeding drums or spools. This 
cam is provided with an angular opening, f, 
into which the squared end of a key or other 
suitable implement can befitted, to rotate the 
said cam in either direction, and this cam is 
fitted on a pin or shaft, f', that is supported 
in the base D, a suitable slot or opening, f, be 
ing provided in the shifting plate, so that the 
key or other suitable implement in the hands 
of the brakeman can be passed therethrough 
and fitted in the cam to actuate the latter. 
The cam is thus arranged in rear of and con 
cealed from view by the shifting plate, and its 
angular faces fact upon a rib or flange, f', 
that is arranged on the rear face of the sliding 
or shifting plate in such proximity to the can 
that the latter will act upon them very effect 
ively. 
The shifting plate E is formed near its up 
per and lower sides with recesses or cut outs, 
which divide the plate into two portions, e'e', 
which are connected by a cross-bar, e, and in 
these recesses are arranged the spindles ot 
shafts of the feed drums or spools, and of the 
pinions B, that are rigidly secured on the 
shafts of the said drums in any suitable man 
ner. This shifting plate is further provided 
with transverse openings or apertures c, in 
which are journaled the shafts of the driving 
gear-wheels, hereinafter described, and the 
plate has a longitudinal slot, e, at the middle 
of the connecting-bar, through which passes a 
stop-pin, e, as shown in Fig. 7, to assistin lim 
iting the movement of the said shifting plate, 
the said stop-pin being Secured to the base D. 
G. and H designate the driving gear-wheels, 
which are journaled on Suitable pins or shafts, 
9, which enter the openings e' in the shifting 
plate and are secured thereto, and the said 
wheels are arranged in a vertical position on 
the shifting plate E, said wheels being of any 
suitable diameter, and they mesh or gear with 
one another, so that both are rotated simul 
taneously. The gear wheel G is arranged on 
the portion e' of the shifting plate and carried 
by the same, and through the center of this 
wheel passes a shaft or pin, g, that is affixed 
rigidly in the shifting plate, the wheel being 
held on the shaft out of contact with the shift 
ing plate, so that it will rotate very freely. 
This gear-wheel G is designed to be thrown 
into gear with the pinion B on the shaft of 
the upper feed drum or spool, B, to rotate the 
latter and the traveling ribbon in one direc 
tion, and the gear-wheel H is designed to be 
thrown into mesh or gear with the pinion B 
on the shaft of the feed drum, or spool B at 
the lower side of the apparatus, to rotate or 
feed the latter and the ribbon in the other or 
reverse direction, the cam F being rotated to 
move the shifting plate backward and forward, 
in order to throw the driving gear-wheels in or 
out of mesh with their respective pinions. The 
driving-wheel His provided at its center with 
an enlarged hub, h, which projects outwardly 
beyond one of the vertical faces of the wheel, 
75 
OO 
IC5 
O 
If 5 
350,784 
, 
3 
5 
O 
25 
40 
s 5 
for a purpose presently described, and through 
this hub passes a shaft or pin, h", which is se 
cured in one of the openings e' of the shifting 
plate, the wheel H being arranged out of con 
tact with the plate, or substantially so, where. 
by it will rotate very freely and easily on its 
shaft. This driving-wheel is further provided 
With a rim or flange, h", which projects later 
ally therefrom and incloses the hub of the same, 
and this rim, or flange is arranged concentric 
with the axis of the wheel and at the periph 
ery of the latter, so that the swinging arms of 
the clutch mechanism, hereinafter described, 
will be free to act on the said peripheral rim. 
I designates as winging lever, which is pivot 
ed at Ol' near its middle upon a suitable post or 
arm, i, that is arranged lll a horizontal posi 
tion and extends outwardly from the shifting 
plate, and to the ends of this swinging lever are 
secured knobs or finger-pieces i, which are to 
be grasped by the hand of the brakeman, or to 
which a pull-cord, hereinafter described, is 
connected to operate the said lever. The in 
ner end of this post is rigidly affixed to the 
horizontal armj of a vertical plate, J, which is 
arranged immediately over the drive-wheel G, 
and arranged out of contact there with by 
means of suitable posts, j', that are affixed to 
the base D, the said vertical plate being pro 
vided on its side opposite to the arm j with 
another arm, j', which is secured by the same 
Screw or shaft, ty, that supports the driving 
wheel C, whereby the vertical plate is very 
rigidly and firmly secured or held in place. 
The swinging lever I is free to move in a ver 
tical line at its ends, and to the lever is affixed 
a segment, R, which is also supported on the 
shaft which forms the center thereof, and when 
the lever I is moved or oscillated this segment 
is also moved by the lever, so as to actuate a 
gear-wheel or pinion, l, that is journaled on 
the hub of the drive-wheel H, so as to rotate 
loosely on the hub, as will be readily under 
stood. The segment K is provided with the 
arms k", which serve to support the toothed 
rim, and the inner ends of the arms k" are 
formed into a hub, which is fitted on the shaft 
or post of the lever I, and the lever and segment 
are normally forced away from the drive 
wheels and held in proper position relative 
thereto, and returned to their normal position, 
when pull on the operating cold is released, by 
means of a coiled spring, L, and a fixed nut, 
L', the former of which is interposed between 
the segment and the plate J. and the latter is 
screwed on the exteriorly-threaded end of the 
post i of the lever I, against the hub of the 
arm AI, said nut I having a binding-screw, l', 
which works in a suitable threaded opening 
therein and binds on the posti, to more securely 
hold the nut in place. 
M designates an arm which is fitted on the 
post and arranged exteriorly to the swinging 
lever. This arm normally depends from the 
post in an inclined line Ol' position, and at its 
lower end it is provided with lateral pins in 
m", the former of which serves to limit the 
- 
downward movement or play of the Segment 
K and the lever I by one of the arms k of the 
segment coming in contact with the said pin, 
while the latter pin, in', projects through a slot, 
m", in the case, and serves to indicate the posi 
tion of the arm on a scale, MI, on one of the 
sides of the inclosing-case A. The arm M is 
fitted tightly on the posti, and it can be turned 
thereon by pressure of the hand, so that the arm 
and its stop-pin can be adjusted around the post, 
and the length of the stroke or movement of the 
lever and its segment can be varied to feed the 
ribbon to a greatel' or less extent, as may be 
desired. It will be seen that when one end of 
the swinging lever I is depressed the opposite 
end thereof will be elevated, and as the seg 
ment is affixed to the lever it will be actuated 
simultaneously there with to rotate the pinion 
of the clutch mechanism, and thus move the 
drive. wheels and the pinion of one of the 
drum-shafts; and upon the release of the pull 
or tension of the operating-cord on the lever 
the spiral spring L, which is connected at one 
end to the segment, will return the segment to 
its normal position and raise the lever I, so 
that the apparatus is in condition for instant 
Operation again. 
N designates the clutch mechanism, which is 
arranged or inclosed within the peripheral rim 
or flange of the drive-wheel H, which it is de 
signed to actuate, and this clutch mechanism 
consists of an oscillating disk or plate, n, the 
radial integral arms ', the swinging arms in", 
which are loosely fitted at their inner ends in 
notches or recesses it' in the edge of the cen 
tral disk or plate, n, and arranged between the 
rigid arms and the retracting-springs n', inter 
mediate of the rigid and swinging arms. The 
central disk or plate, ), is provided with a suit 
able opening, through which is passed the hub 
h of the drive-wheel H, and the swinging arms 
are beveled Ol' inclined in opposite directions 
at their outer ends, so that one of the edges 
thereof can Cone ill contact with the inside 
periphery of the rim or flange to rotate the 
latter, as presently described, while the rigid 
arms terminate a short distance within the rim 
or flange, so that they are out of contact there 
with and do not affect the operation of the 
same. The central disk or plate is fitted 
loosely on the hub of the drive-wheel, so as to 
rotate independently of the same, and the said 
disk is connected with the pinion k in any 
suitable manner, so as to oscillate or move si 
multaneously there with when the latter is 
actuated by the segment and level. The free 
ends of the Swinging lever I are fitted between 
guides O, which are carried by the shifting 
plate. These guides are arranged at the ends 
of the swinging lever, and comprise segmental 
plates Ol' bars, which are arranged parallel 
with each other, (see Fig. 6,) and between 
which the lever is arranged, and the extremi 
ties of these segmental guide-plates are affixed 
to posts o, which are secured upon the shift 
ing plate to Support the guide-plates out of 
contact with the driving-wheels. The swing 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
EO 
I I5 
I 25 
: 4 
350,784 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
ing-lever is provided at its ends with hooks, 
eyes, or other equivalent devices, i', to which 
one end of an operating-cord, i, (see Fig. 6,) 
is connected, which leads to a suitable point 
in the car or coach within convenient reach 
of the brakeman or conductor, who is to oper 
ate the apparatus by pulling upon the cord. 
P designates a brake, which comprises a 
curved piece or plate of metal that bears 
against the outside of the peripheral flange of 
... the drive-wheel H, and one end of this brake 
is fitted between brackets or posts p and p', 
which are secured upon the shifting plate and 
- arranged a short distance apart, one of the 
said brackets having a binding-screw, p", which 
I5. 
bears against the brake to hold it very securely 
in place. 
R designates the alarm mechanism, which 
is also carried by the shifting plate and adapt. 
ed to be operated by one of the driving-wheels, 
preferably the wheel H. This alarm mechan 
ism consists of a small gear-wheel or pinion, 
R, that is journaled on a suitable shaft or 
spindle that is secured in the shifting plate, a 
25 ratchet, r, affixed to the gear-wheel and rotat 
ing therewith, an oscillating block, ), which 
is journaled on a pin that is affixed in the 
shifting plate, and provided with an arm, ', 
which is adapted to be actuated by the ratchet 
to oscillate the block, and a bell-hammer, r", 
and a bell, '', that is fitted on the upper 
threaded end of a standard, q, and held thereon 
by means of clamping-nuts (1'. The gear-wheel 
R meshes with the driving-wheel H, and when 
35 the latter is rotated the gear-wheel R is like 
wise actuated, and the ratchet impinges upon 
the arm of the oscillating block to move the 
bell-hammer backward and forward and cause 
it to strike the bell, and thus give an alarm to 
attract the attention of the passengers to the 
apparatus and notify them of the name of the 
station. The bell-hammer is normally im 
pelled forward and in contact with the bell by 
means of a coiled spring, q, which is coiled 
around the pin on which the block is journaled, 
and when the ratchet is rotated it merely 
withdraws the hammer from the bell, and as 
each tooth of the ratchet releases the hammer 
the spring impels it forward against the bell 
to alarm. 
This being the construction of my improved 
station-indicator, the operation thereof is as 
follows: The traveling ribbon is first wound 
upon one of the spools or drums by fitting a 
suitable key or implement to the shaft or spin 
dle thereof and turning the said drum until 
the name of the first station is exposed to view 
through the inclosing-case, through the view - 
ing-opening therein, care having been first 
taken that the driving-wheels G H are out of 
gear with the pinions on the drum-shafts by 
moving the shifting plate a very slight dis 
This operation is performed by the 
talace. 
brakeman before the train starts on its trip, 
and after the apparatus has been adjusted the 
shifting plate is moved so that one of the gear 
wheels, G or H, meshes with one of the pin 
45 
40 
SO 
ions of one of the feeding drums or Spools. 
As the train approaches a station the brake 
man or conductor pulls upon the cord to de 
press one end of the Swinging lever I and 
move the segment, which in turn actuates the 
clutch mechanism to feed the drum H, and also 
the drum G, whereby the pinion and the drum 
in gear with one of the driving-wheels will be 
rotated a limited distance. The downward 
movement of one end of the swinging lever is 
limited by one end thereof coming in contact 
with one of the posts of the segmental guides 
or segment K, fast to the lever, coming in con 
tact with the pins n' of the stop-arm M, and 
simultaneously with the feeding of the travel 
ing ribbon the alarm mechanism is actuated 
to attract or draw the attention of the travel 
ers to the apparatus. When the strain or 
pull on the cord is released, the lever and seg 
ment are returned to their normal positions by . 
the retracting-spring L, and the clutch is re 
leased from the drive-wheel and also returned to 
its normal position by the segment K, actuating 
the gear pinionk, which is fast on the hub of the 
clutch wheel or disk n, so that the apparatus: 
is again in condition for instant operation. 
These operations are continued each time a 
train approaches Ol' passes a station, and upon 
the return-trip of the train the brakeman shifts 
or moves the shifting plate so that the other'. 
drive-wheel will actuate the spool or drum 
that has been thrown out of use before, and 
when the cord is pulled the ribbon is drawn 
or pulled in the reverse direction, to expose 
the names on the ribbon in reverse order to 
that in which they were displayed on the pre 
vious trip of the train. 
My invention can also be adapted to street 
and other cars, and the names or numerals of 
the streets instead of Stations can be inscribed 
on the ribbon. 
Various slight changes in the form and pro 
portion of parts and details of construction 
can be made without departing from the spirit 
of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a station-indicator, the combination 
of the drums or spools, a shifting plate ar 
ranged to one side of the drums, the driving 
wheels geared togethe) and alternately engaged 
with or geared to one of the feed - drums, a 
Swinging lever carried by the plate, and clutch 
mechanism connected with and actuated by 
the swinging lever for feeding the driving 
wheels, substantially as described, for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. In a station-indicato), the combination. 
of the drums or spools, a traveling ribbon sup 
ported thereon, a shifting plate arranged to 
one side of the drums, the driving-wheels car 
ried by the plate and geared together, a swing 
ing lever supported on the shifting plate and 
arranged out. of line with the drive-wheels, 
mechanism intermediate of the lever and one 
of the driving-wheels for operating the latter, 
. . 
. 
IOS 
I IC 
I 25 
350,784 
5 
and alarm mechanism actuated simultaneously, 
with the driving-wheels, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In a station-indicator, the combination 
of the drums or spools, a traveling ribbon Sup 
ported thereon, a drive-wheel geared to one 
of the drums, a swinging lever arranged to 
one side of the drive-wheel, a toothed segment 
connected with the swinging lever and actu 
ated thereby, and clutch mechanism geared to 
the segment for rotating the drive-wheel, sub 
stantially as described, for the purpose 
forth. 
4. In a station-indicato), the combination 
of the drums or spools, a traveling ribbon, a 
driving-wheel geared to one of the drums, a 
swinging lever arranged to one side of the 
drive-wheel, a toothed segment connected to 
the lever and actuated simultaneously there 
with, clutch mechanism geared to the segment 
for actuating the drive-wheel, a spring for re 
turning the lever and segment to their normal 
position and releasing the clutch mechanism 
from the drive-wheel, and the alarm mechan 
ism actuated by the drive-wheel, substantially 
as described, for the purpose set forth. 
5. In a station-indicator, the combination 
of the drums or spools, a drive-wheel geared 
to one of the drums, a swinging lever, a seg 
ment connected to the lever, arranged to one 
side of the drive-wheel and actuated thereby, 
clutch mechanism geared to and controlled by 
the segment and adapted to rotate the drive 
Wheel, alarm mechanism geared to the drive 
Wheel, a spring connected with the lever for 
retu:)ing the same and the segment to their 
normal positions and simultaneously release 
the clutch mechanism, and a fixed arm, M, 
having the stoppin arranged in the path 
the segment for limiting the movement there 
of substantially as described. 
6. In a station-indicato!', the combination 
of the drums or spools, a traveling ribbon 
thereon, a shifting plate arranged to one side 
of the drums and ribbon, the geared driving 
wheels carried by the plate and geared alter 
mately with one of the said feed-drums, alarm 
mechanism actuated by one of the drive-wheels 
simultaneously with the feeding of the travel 
ing libbon, a Swinging lever, and clutch mech 
anism intermediate of the lever and one of the 
driving-wheels, substantially as described, for 
the purpose set forth. 
7. In a station-indicator, the combination 
of a Swinging lever, a segment actuated simul 
taneously there with, a spring for J'eturning 
the lever and segment to their normal condi 
tions when a pull upon the lever is released, 
clutch mechanism geared with the segment 
and actuated thereby, a drive-wheel rotated 
by the clutch mechanism, the drums, and a 
ribbon, substantially as described, for the pur 
pose set forth. 
S. In a station-indicator, the combination 
of the drums, a drive-wheel geared to one of 
the drums, a traveling ribbon, a swinging le 
ver arranged out of line with the drive-wheel, 
75 
90 
a segment actuated simultaneously with the 
lever, and clutch mechanism geared to the 
segment and arranged to engage the drive 
wheel, and comprising the central disk, the 
rigid arms, the Swinging arms, and the spring, 
substantially as described, for the purpose set 
forth. 
9. In a station-indicator, the combination 
of the drums or spools, a traveling ribbon, a 
shifting plate, the geared drive-wheels carried 
by the plate arranged to one side of drums 
and ribbon, a swinging lever, a segment actu 
ated simultaneously with the lever, a spring 
for returning the lever and segment to their 
normal conditions, and clutcl mechanism 
geared to the segment and having the spring 
actuated swinging arms adapted to bind 
against one of the drive-wheels when the seg 
ment is actuated to feed the said driving 
wheel, and released therefrom upon the retro 
grade movement of the segment, substantially 
as described, for the purpose set forth. 
10. In a station-indicator, the combination 
of the drums, the traveling ribbon, a shifting 
plate arranged to one side of the drums and 
ribbon, the driving-wheels carried thereby and 
geared together, a swinging lever, a segment 
actuated simultaneously there with, an adjust 
able arm for limiting and varying the stroke 
of the segment and lever, clutch mechanisml 
intermediate of the segment and one of the 
drive-wheels, and alarm mechanism actuated 
simultaneously with the movement of the rib 
bon, substantially as described, for the pur 
pose set forth. 
11. In a station indicator, the combination 
of the drums, a traveling ribbon thereon, the 
shifting plate, the driving - wheels carried 
thereby, a rotary cam or tumbler bearing 
against the shifting plate arranged to one side 
of the drums and ribbon, for moving the latter, 
a swinging lever pivoted on the plate, the 
segmental guides for the level', and clutch 
mechanism intermediate of the lever and one 
of the drive - wheels for rotating the latter, 
substantially as described, for the purpose 
set forth. 
12. In a station-indicator, the combination 
of the drums, a traveling ribbon thereon, the 
shifting plate, a swinging lever carried there 
by, the driving-wheels geared together and 
carried by the plate arranged to one side of 
the drums and ribbon, clutch mechanism in I2O 
termediate of the level and one of the drive 
wheels, and alarm mechanism comprising the 
gear-wheel having a ratchet, an oscillating 
block having an arm and the bell-hammer, and 
a bell supported on a standard, substantially 
as described, for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
105 
I 25 
95 
IOC) 
O 
5 
EDWIN. R. THURMAN, 
Witnesses: 
- 
WM. N. MOORE, 
H. T. BERNITARD. 
5 
IO 
/ 
3o 
15 
SO 
5 
5 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350884.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 350,884, 
T. R. HYDE, Jr. 
WIND 0 W SHADE BAR, 
Patented Oct. 12, 1886. 
R-R-R-R-R-R-R-FRIF 
UNZ 
28 ta te s 6 e 6. 
B> SE 
2K22***24.-.-.-.-.- 
- 
?3. S 4-t: 
SHTA, 
e Ulla 1 , e r1 { /G. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, p: C 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THEOPHILUS R. HYDE, JR., OF WATERBURY, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE SCOVIILIL MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
VfV NO O VAV-S HAD E BAR. 
PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 350, 884, dated October 12, 1886. 
Application filed June 7, 1S86. Serial No. 204,300. (No model.) 
The bar is made from thin sheet metal 
doubied into Ushape, as seen in Fig. 5, A rep 
resenting the doubled bar, the space between 
the doubled sides corresponding in thickness 
substantially to the thickness of the shade, IB 55 
representing the shade, and so that the lowel' 
edge of the shade may be embraced by the bar, 
the metal appearing on both sides. The upper 
edge of the bar is ornam?nted by scalloping or 
other wise, and its surface may be made highly 6o 
ornamental. A part of the ornamentation con 
sists of a series of openings, a, through both  
sides alike. These openings not only add to the 
ornamentation, but serveas a means for secur 
ing the bar to the shade. The openings are 65 
of a shape to receive the two legs of a tack, b, 
such as commonly called paper-fasteners. 
These tacks are made from sheet metal, pref 
erably with a spherical head, the two legs flat 
thin metal, and so that the two legs passed 7o 
through the opening in the bar and through 
the shade extend to the opposite side, where 
they are bent down upon the reverse sidle, as 
seen in Fig. 3, the head being the face side, as 
seen in Figs. 1 and 6. The number of these 75 
tacks nnay be according to the taste of the per 
Son applying the bar. 
To make the bar adjustable, so tlhat the same 
bar will be i adapted to shades of various 
widths, I construct it in three parts, as seen 8o 
in Figs. 1 and 2, C representing the one endl 
part, and D representing the other end part. 
E represents the central or intermediate part. 
"The part E is doubled so as to embrace the 
other partsthat is, the space between its 85 
two sides corresponds to the thickness of the 
part C, and as seen in Fig. 4, the several 
parts are correspondingly perforated, and so 
that when applied and properly adjusted tacks 
may be introduced through the perforations 9o 
in the one part E, thence through correspond 
ing perforations in the parts C C and through 
the shade, and bent down upon the reverse 
side, as seen in Fig. 2. The end parts, C, at 
their extreme outer end are constructed with 95 
a projectiolu, dll, Which is doubled back upon 
the reverse side of the bar, so as to close the 
end of the bar, and as seen in Fig. 2. 
In adjusting the parts the two end portions 
are placed to bring the closed end against the Ico 
- 
|- 
To all av ?vom, it 7nnally co7ce5'7v. 
Be it known that I, THEOPHILUS R. HY DE, 
Jr., of Waterbury, in the county of New Ha 
ven and State of Connecticut, bave invented 
5 a mew Improvement in Window-Shade Bars; 
and I do hereby declare the followinig, when 
taken in connection with accompanying draw 
ings and the letters of reference marked there 
on, to be a full, clear, and exact description 
Io of the same, and which said drawings consti 
tute part of this specification, and represent, 
Figure 1, a face view of the lower portion of 
a shade, showing the barattached; Fig. 2, an un 
I 5 der side view of the bar, looking up, parts in 
section; Fig. 3, a longitudinal central section 
through the bar at the connection; Fig. 4, a 
vertical section through the bar at the point 
of connection between the two parts of the 
2o bar; Fig. 5, a vertical central section through 
the shade and single portion of the bar; Fig. 
6, a face view showing the ban' made as in a con 
tinuous piece; Fig. 7, a top view of the bar, 
showing the method of connecting the end; 
25 Fig. S, a modification in the method of attacin - 
ing the bar to the shade. 
This invention relates to an improvenuent in 
the constructioun of the bar employed at the 
lower end of window shades for the purpose 
3o of stiffening the edge, and to afford a means for 
attachment to the pull. The more common 
construction of this class of bars is to simply 
introduce a wood barthrough a pocket. formed 
by doubling the lower end of the shade. 
35 Metal brs have, however, been employed for 
this purpose-as, for illustration, in the form 
of a tube having a longitudinal slit at one 
side, and through which the shade is intro 
duced and secured within the bar by an en 
4o largement of the shade within the bar, so that 
the metal surface of the bar appears upon the 
outside. 
It is to the class of bars which are made 
from metal that my invention particularly re 
45 lates, and has for its object to produce a metal 
bar which shall be highly ornamental, and at 
the same time afforded at a very low price; 
and tille invention consists in the construction, 
as hereinafter described, and particularly re 
5o cited in the claims. 
 
IO 
edge of the shade, and then the part Eapplied. 
The central part, E, is provided with the pull 
IF, hung thereto. The bar, however, may be 
made of any given length and cut to the re 
5 quired length for the shade, so that the bar 
will be in a single piece throughout, as repre 
sented in Fig. 6, the turned end d being pro 
duced as the bar is cut-that is, the outer side 
left longer than the inner side, as seen in Fig. 
7, and so that the longer side may be turned 
back upon the other side, as seen in Fig. 2. 
The pull F is applied to the bar in the central 
position, and in the same manner as before 
Instead of applying tacks as a means of se 
curing the bar to the shade, and which I pre 
fer, they may be otherwise secured, and so as 
to add to the appearance of the bar-say as by 
running a cord through the perforations and 
2o shade, as indicated in Fig. 8, the cord appear 
ing in alternate spaces on the front and in in 
termediate spaces on the back. 
I do not broadly claim a doubled strip of 
sheet metal adapted to inclose the free end of 
25 a window-shade, as such, I am aware, broadly 
| 
considered, is not new, 
described. 
I 5 
- 
- 
9 
Y 
3 
I claim- 
1. A window-shade bar coiisisting of two 
end portions, CD, niade from sheet metal 
doubled into U shape, and so as to receive the 3C 
edge of the shade between the two sides, com 
bined with a central portion, E, doubled to 
embrace the end portions, C D, and the said 
portions constructed with a series of perfora 
tions, by which they may be adjustably secured 35 
together and secured to the shade, substan 
| tially as described. 
2. A window-shade bar consisting of the 
two ends portions, C D, made from sheet metal 
doubled into U shape, and so as to receive the 4o 
edge of the shade between the two sides, com 
bined with a central portion, E, doubled in 
like manner into U shape, and , so as to em - 
brace the end portions, CD, the said threepor 
i tions perforated as a means for securing the 45 
parts together and all to the shade, combined 
with a pull hung to the said central portion, E, 
substantially as described. 
THEOPHILUS R. HYDE, JR. 
Witnesses: . 
M. TL. SPERRY, 
F. J. KINGSBURY, Jr. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US350984.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. LIN WILLE, 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH, 
6 Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 350,984. 
 
Patented Oct. 19, 1886. 
Ss Sarka is 
 SNSSNSZ 
INVento R= 
1%aez24/ 
perers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington P. 
(No Model.) 
No. 350,984. 
 
J. H. LIN VILLE, 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented 00t, 19, 1886. 
 
 
 
WNviNESSES 
2-& 4, 2. 5-76. 
NVeNtor 
1/a2 a 
1eyeeaayee 
N PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. H. LIN WILLE, 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH, 
6 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 350,984, 
 
Patented 00t, 19, 1886. 
X E. 
i 
t 
Y 
(S (2) 
f MITNs 5ES - 
862-4 of f.ezv 
INVENTORs 
4/o-rea 
Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. H. LIN WILLE, 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
 
 
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 350,984, 
J. H. LIN WILLE. 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
 
-- 
------ 
 
 
|||| 
5 
ed 
Ocs 
00-00 
Oc 
vivine SSES 
2- -2, 
-6 
5. 
4%-44 
%. 
3. 
OO 
co-oo-oo-oo-oo--- do -oo 
commox) 
Od 
Ocm00 S roo 
CO muc0 
i. 
00 ml 
-mod 
na 
1. 
nVento 
R 
16eyeeae 
2 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. H. LIN VILLE, 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 350,984, 
Patented Oct. 19, 1886, 
 
WITNESSES: 
42,724 %zags 
INVENTR 
122 4 
2422 
N. Perers, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB H. LIN VILLE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE INTERNATIONAL PRINTING TELEGRAPH COMPANY, OF CAMDEN, 
NEW JERSEY. 
PRINTING-TELEGRAPH. 
SFECIFICATION forning part of Letters Patent No. 350,984, dated October 19, 1886. 
Application filed October 16, 1885. Serial No. 180,10. No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
55 
6: 
. 
To all u?ion, it inctly concern. 
Be it known that I, JACOB H. LIN VILLE, of 
the city and county of Philadelphia, in the 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Printing 
Telegraphs, of which improvements the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to a printing-telegraph 
system and apparatus of the class in which 
rotating type - wheels controlled by escape 
ments are used in connection with impression 
devices operated by electro - magnets, and so 
organized as to be employed for printing mes 
sages, stock - reports, and other financial or 
commercial matters with increased rapidity 
and accuracy in page form on sheets of paper, 
or upon continuous rolls of paper, in lines, in 
paragraphs, or in columns-that is to say, 
telegraphically printing messages, stock-le 
ports, &c., similar in form and arrangement, 
on the transmitting-instruments imultaneous 
ly with their transmission to a receiving-in 
strument, or printing on instruments which 
may be combined or which may be so organ 
ized as to be operated interchangeably as a 
transmitter or receiver, Ol' which may be SO 
organized as to be operated as an independent 
transmitter or receiver, the change from a 
combined transmitting-instrument to a receiv 
ing - instrument being readily accomplished 
without auxiliary gearing or motive power, 
through the manipulation of a switch, as here 
inafter fully explained. 
My invention consists, generally, in the or 
ganization of the following systems of appa 
ratus, and of combining in One or more instrul 
ments all or any of the specific features as may 
be desired for the particular purpose, embrac 
ing, first, a paper-carriage with suitable feed 
ing mechanism applicable to and susceptible 
of use in such combined transmitting and re 
ceiving instruments or in separate and inde 
pendent transmitting and receiving instru 
ments for telegraphically printing on flatpages, 
&c., from a continuous roll of paper; Second 
ly, improved devices for feeding the paper to 
space between lines by the recoil movement 
of the carriage during its excursion; thirdly, 
suitable mechanism for bringing the paper 
carriages of any number of receiving-instru 
ments into unison for cutting out of circuit all 
Of the instruinents connected in a continuous 
circuit, and for closing the circuit or circuits 
of such particular instruments as it may be 
desired to print the message on, through suit 
able mechanism and electrical devices oper 
ated from any transmitter in such series of 
instruments; fourthly, a novel construction of 
indicator-plate in a transmitting-instrument, 
with radial circuit closing arms and character 
rods actuated by the depression of any char 
ter-key, as will be hereinafter more particul 
larly explained, and, finally, the organization 
of the electrical circuits for operating any or 
all of the combined instruments as receivers 
from any transmitter in the series, or for op 
erating any number of instruments organized 
as receivers on separate lines radiating from 
a transmitter located at a central station. 
The paper-carriage carrying the roll of pa 
per upon which impressions are to be made 
traverses backward and forward on a platform 
extending from the real' of the transmitting 
or receiving instruments or combined instru 
inents, and supports the paper-rollers, circuit 
interrupting switches, feeding - rollers, and 
mechanism operating there with, and having 
guides for Supporting the paper in a vertical 
position behind the type-wheel and contigu 
ous thereto, so that the impressions made up 
on the paper occupy an unobstructed view at 
all times in front of the operator on a trans 
mitting-instrument, and the impressions re 
corded on a receiving-instrument are in like 
manner visible to and convenient, for reference 
by recipients, thereby rendering the invention 
especially valuable for recording long mes 
Sages, stock-quotations, &c. 
When a series of page-printing telegraph 
instruments are employed on continuous tele 
graphic lines, it becomes necessary to bring 
the respective paper-carriages to unison, in 
order that all the instruments may commence 
spacing letters in a line from Similar points 
with reference to the margin of the paper on 
all of the instruments. To accomplish this 
result it is essentially requisite to lock each 
paper-carriage at a predetermined point, or 
preferably at the end of its retrograde move 
ment, and to maintain it in such position until 
all the carriages in the series are in similar po 
sitions, and then, by simultaneously releasing 
9O 
IOO 
350,984 
Io pressions. 
the respective carriages, to cause them to travel 
in unison. 
It is essential in printing-telegraphs to pro 
vide means whereby a transmitting-operator 
5 may be capable of cutting out of circuit all 
the receiving-instruments in a series, and of 
Connecting in circuit ad libitum, the particu 
lar receiving - instruments in the series on 
Which it may be desired to recoid the im 
Without a unison device page-printing in 
paragraphs in columns, &c., in a series of 
connected instruments is impracticable, and 
Without a 'cut-out' and circuit-closing de 
15 vice to individualize the instruments the same 
message Would be printed simultaneously on 
all the instruments, involving expensive waste, 
unnecessary resistance in the circuit, and an 
appreciable increase of battery-currents, and 
2O especially obviating the essential requirement 
of Secrecy in transmission. 
To overcome these objectionable features is 
one of the objects of my invention, which I 
accomplish by utilizing the force of the re 
25 coiling paper-carriage for breaking the cir 
cuit through the operative electro-magnets of 
the receiving-instruments at the moment the 
left-hand margin of the paper has been reached, 
and automatically shunting the line-circuits 
3O by branch lines running in reverse directions 
through the coils of a differential electro-mag 
net, one coil of which electro-magnet revolves 
the circuit-closers by a step-by-step or ratchet 
novelment, and when these circuit-closers are 
35 revolved to a predetermined point in their 
peripheries they close the main lines around 
the break and through the electro-mag 
nets of any instrument to which it may be de 
sired to transmit a message, leaving the re 
4O maining Ireceivers in the series inoperative, or 
they close the circuits of all the instruments 
in the series simultaneously after the paper 
carriages have been brought to unison. Mo 
tion is imparted to the revolving circuit-clos 
45 ers by a differential electro-magnet in the 
branch circuit through which is sent over one 
line a number of electrical pulsations corre 
sponding to the number of the instrument in 
the line which it is desired to bring into cir 
5O cuit, or to print on, numbering, of course, 
from a terminal station. One pulsation brings 
a single metallic bearing on the insulated cir 
cuit-wheels into contact with circuit-springs 
which close the line around the break to the 
55 instrument numbered, say, one, without, how 
ever, breaking the branch circuit. Two pull 
sations break this circuit again in number one, 
rotating the metallic bearing of number two in 
to contact with its circuit-closing springs, and 
5O so on in succession, one instrument of a higher 
number is brought into circuit and the preced 
ing one disconnected until the instrument is 
reached on which it is desired to print the mes 
sage. This restores the main circuit through 
65 the circuit-closing device until one pulsation 
is sent simultaneously, over both lines by the 
releasing-key, or otherwise, which, while re 
75 
95 
leasing the linison-latch of the type-wheels, 
closes the local printing-circuit, operating to 
move the paper-carriage one notch, thereby 7O 
breaking the branch main-line circuit through 
the circuit-closing electro-magnet, and restor 
ing the original line to that particular instru. 
ment. The circuit-breaker to send pulsations 
is preferably a revolving circuit - breaking 
wheel with as many makes and breaks as there 
are instruments in the line, and with a regis 
tering-dial on which is indicated the number 
of instruments connected in series or other 
wise. A pointer on this dial indicates the 
number of pulsations sent to line and the rela 
tive movement of all the circuit-closing de 
vices. The circuit, in the transmitter to this 
circuit-breaker is a branch of the main line 
normally broken when the circuit-breaker is 
stopped on a break or at Zero. 
After the transmission of a message each 
individual operator turns his circuit-breaker 
to zero, thereby enabling any operator start 
ing from the zero-point to revolve the circuit 
closers of all the instruments in the series 
until the desired receiving-instrument, as in 
dicated on the dial operated, is in circuit. 
All the instruments, or any number, may be 
simultaneously connected by adjusting the cir 
cuit-closing contacts in the revolving disks so 
as to close the circuits simultaneously. To 
bring the circuit-closers to the same initial 
point, or to unison, a mechanical device is 
placed on the shaft of the circuit closers, which 
locks it at a point corresponding With the zero 
of the dial, and an ordinary electro-magnet is 
placed in the first branch circuit above men 
tioned, with both lines passing independently 
through its respective coils, rendering it in 
operative by impulses on one line while the 
differential electro-magnet is rotating the cir 
cuit-breaker, yet operative to release the uni 
son-latch when impulses are sent on both lines, 
rendering the differential electro-magnet inop 
erative. 
Since pulsations on both lines simultane 
ously render inert the differential electro 
magnet, the contact on the circuit-closer will 
not be moved when pulsations are sent to 1 I5 
move the paper-carriage. The main-line cir 
cuits in the transmitter are broken at the 
main-line circuit-breaker when the type 
wheels stand at unison duling this operation. 
The transmitting-instrument may be organ 
ized similarly to the other instruments, and its 
circuit-closers operated synchronously. One 
of the main-line circuits is normally connected 
through the coils of an electro-magnet which 
responds only to prolonged impulses on this 
line, its armature-lever being linked to a rock 
ing arm held laterally by fixed jaws, and 
through which a square shaft carried by the 
paper-carriage freely moves. This shaft actu 
ates levers and pawls, which, at each impulse t3. 
through this electro-magnet (at any position 
of the paper) revolves the feed-rollers one 
notch, feeding the paper the space between 
two lines. The other main line is normally 
I 25 
OO 
ICS 
O. 
2. 
350,984 
connected through another electro-magnet, re. on the key-board B, operate bell-crank level's 
sponding only to prolonged pulsations, the 
b", resting upon a series of bearings, b", rigidly 
armature-lever of which magnet is coupled to 
secured to the curved guides bat different 
a shaft to which the automatic device for re 
radii under the character-keys, and imparting 
leasing the paper-carriage is attached. One 
longitudinal motion to the respective series of 
prolonged impulse on this line releases the 
rodsb", equal in number to the character-keys, 
paper-carriage at any point in its excursion, 
lying horizontally and radiating from the same 
allowing it to recoil and feed the paper a 
common center in which is placed the shaft 
space between two lines. 
b' of the line - circuit breaker. Concentric 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
there with is placed a metallic segment of a 
my invention, Figure 1 is a top or plan view of 
cylinder, b', preferably perforated with square 
a transmitting-instrument, showing the key 
holes b', in series directly over each other and 
board and keys and operative mechanism em 
equally distant from one another-that is to 
braced therein. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation, 
say, from center to center-the entire number 
partly in section, of the same. Fig. 3 is a top 
of holes b' being equal to the divisions on the 
or plan view of the paper-carriage and mech 
type-wheels C. These rods b' pass through 
anism operating there with. Fig. 4 is an end 
the curved guides b", that form the steps there 
view of the paper-carriage, showing in con 
for, and are limited in their forward move 
junction therewith the individualizing mech 
ment by shoulders b', abutting against the me 
anism and electro-magnetic devices for oper 
tallic segment b", or pins b, abutting against 
ating the same. Fig. 5 is a rear elevation of 
the fixed guides b", the rods u" being normally 
Fig. 6 is a top view with the plat 
the Same. 
held back by spiral springs b" against or con 
form removed, showing the circuit-breaker and 
nected with one branch of the bell-crank le 
unison-Stop of the individualizing mechanism. 
vers b", the other branch supporting the key 
Fig. 7 is a detailed view of the unison fusee or 
stems b", through which pass pins b', limit 
spiral. Figs. S and 9 are respectively theo 
ing the backward throw of the character-keys 
retical diagrammatic views showing the ar 
and rods b', and thereby bringing the termi 
rangement of the electrical circuits and oper 
nals of these rods clear of the interior surface 
ative mechanism embodying my invention in 
of the metallic segment l'. 
combined transmitting and receiving instrut 
On the indicator-shaft b', carrying the cir 
ments. Fig. 10 is a front elevation of the dial 
cuit-breakers NN', are as many metallic arms 
plate and individualizing circuit-breaker; and 
l" as there are Series of holes b' in the metal 
Fig. 11 is a longitudinal section of a combined 
lic segment l', these armsb", being secured to 
transmitting and receiving instrument, show 
an insulated hub, b", on the indicator-shaft b, 
ing, also, the paper-carriage and paper-feeding 
and located in the same horizontal planes with 
and individualizing mechanism. 
the respective banks of rods b', and on equal 
In order that the description and operation 
divisions of the circle corresponding with the 
of the receiving-instrument may be fully ap 
number of banks of these rocls. One of these 
preciated, I will now describe, by reference to 
rods b' is a unison-rod, b, and is not operated 
the drawings, the principal features and ele 
by a character-key, but has a backward notion 
ments embodying a transmitting-instrument 
to the forward one of a character-key, and vice 
and the mode of transmitting currents of elec 
versa, imparted to it by a rock-shaft, b, with 
tricity to a receiving-instrument. 
depending a rins l' passing alongside of each 
A key-board, B, rigidly secured to the base 
radial line of rods l', which is moved forward 
plate A of the instrument, is arranged some. 
by pins l' in the rods l', giving a reverse mo 
what similar to the key-board of a type-writ 
tion through a lever, l', on the same shaft, 
ing machine, with buttons, arranged in con 
and a link attachment, b, to the depending 
centric arcs, on which are engraved letters, 
lever b, which, by a pin, b", on the unison-rod 
figures, punctuation-marks, &c., with blank 
b", withdraws it upon the depression of any 
and unison keys, also arranged in concentric 
character-key. The end of the unison-rod ly, 
arcs, with a blank key, b, for spacing between 
passing through the metallic segment b, is 
words, a unison-key, b, for releasing the insu 
made of insulating material. 
lated rod b, a key, b, for releasing the insu 
The circuit-breaker, escapement, compound, 
lated unison-rod l and unison-latch h", a key, 
differential, printing, ratchet, and relay mag 
b, for spacing between lines, a key, b", for re 
nets, Scape-wheels, spacing-wheel, clutches on 
leasing the paper-carriage A" at any point in 
a loose sleeve on the type-wheel shaft, centrif. 
its excursion, a key, l', for spacing between 
ugal adjustable governor, paper-spring, and 
lines at any point in the excursion of the pa 
mechanism for actuating and operating these 
per-carriage, a key, b", for releasing the unison 
several elements and parts, form the subject. 
of the individualizing circuit-breaker, and a 
matter, in conjunction with certain other fea 
key, b, for duplicating letters. 
tures, of an application for a patent, Serial 
The type-wheels C have letters, figures, 
No. 175,131, filed by me under date of August 
punctuation - marks, and blank and unison 
24, 1885; and I therefore do not wish to be 
spaces corresponding to the characters, fig 
understood as claiming these several elements 
ures, &c., on the key-board B. 
and parts herein Separately, but only in con 
The character-keys, arranged concentrically 
nection with new and improved features to be 
5 
IO 
25 
4 5 
SO 
5 5 
65 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
1 I5 
I 25 
 
4. 
350,984 
O 
... I5 
hereinafter fully described, which form in con 
junction there with the subject-matter of this 
application. 
On the indicator-shaft b' is a circuit-lbreak 
er, N, single for single-line instruments, and 
double for instruments operated by double 
lines and escapements. As the type-wheel C 
revolves, the circuit-breakers N N on the in 
dicator-shaft b' send electrical pulsations over 
the lines to operate alternately the escapement 
electro-magnets I and I", the compound or du 
plex relays HH", and differential electro-mag 
nets JJ, and rotate the type-wheels C, while pull 
sations on both lines, simultaneously closed by 
the electro-magnet G, operate both the electro 
magnets H H', closing the local circuits to en 
ergize the paper-feeding electro-magnets and 
the printing electro-magnets of the receivers 
in combined or lindependent instruments. The 
bars b', insulated from the indicator-shaft b', 
revolve so as to strike against any one of the 
character-rods b' which may have been pro 
jected by the depression of a key beyond the 
surface of the indicator-segment b' into the 
path of the revolving arms b, and also to 
strike the insulated unison-rod b' when none 
of the keys have been depressed. A circuit 
spring, b", bears on the insulated hub b", car 
rying these arms b, and is connected with the 
binding-post b, insulated from the machine. 
When a key has been depressed, the type 
wheel C of the transmitter revolves as many 
characters as there are rods b' between the 
starting-point or unison-rod band the char 
acter depressed. When it is stopped by the 
pin represented by the key and metallic rod 
b", the circuit is closed from a local battery, 
Q, (one pole of which is in circuit with the 
body of the indicator-segment b,) through the 
springs b", line l", electro-magnet G, line l", 
key b, line l", springs', to the metallic block 
marked to send on the insulated commu. 
tator S, thence by springs', through line l', 
to the ratchet electro-magnet E, and thence to 
the impression electro-magnets D, and return 
ing by line l" to the other pole of the local 
battery Q. This energizes the ratchet electro 
magnet E and the impression electro-magnet 
D of the transmitter, and causes the printing 
hammer d to impress the paper against the 
type-wheel C, printing the desired letter as 
depressed on the key-board B, and as indi 
cated by the rod b' in the indicator-segment 
b', while the ratchet electro-magnet E draws 
back the arm a. When the key is restored, 
the withdrawal of the rod b' breaks the elec 
trical contact, the hammer drecoils, the spring 
a withdraws the arma, and the pawla, catch 
ing in a rack, A', in the paper-carriage A, 
moves the same the space between the letter 
printed and the succeeding letter. The ratch 
et electro-magnet E is secured to the platform 
A", carrying the paper-feeding mechanism. 
When the type-wheels C of the transmitter 
and receiver have been stopped at the letter 
depressed, the local circuit of the transmit 
ting-instrument is automatically closed, as de 
--- 
scribed, which energizes the electro-magnet 
G, attracting its tongue g", on which is an in 
sulated bar, g, for bringing the circuit-springs 
g g g g into contact, closing the circuit into 
both mainlines simultaneously through branch 
lines l l 
l 2, passing around the circuit 
breakers NN', through lines l and l', to the 
compound or duplex relays HH, closing the 
local circuits by the relay-tongues h and the 
contacts l' through the ratchet electro-mag 
nets E and printing electro-magnet D of the 
receivers in circuit, and simultaneously mak 
ing impressions and feeding the paper the 
space between two letters on the transmitter 
and receiver. 
The paper is normally held out of contact 
with the type-wheel Cby an adjustable spring, 
c", secured to the top plate, c', of the machine 
by a pivoted stud, c', adjustable by a slotted 
arm, c, moving on a stud-pin, c', on which is 
a clamping-nut, c', for adjusting the spring c" 
When the printing 
to its proper position. 
hammer distrikes the paper C, this spring c' 
is pressed backward under the type-wheel C, 
and when the hammer d' recoils the Spring c" 
moves the paper C out of contact with the 
type-wheel C, thus regulating the distinctive 
ness of the impression, preventing blurring, 
and enabling the printing to be done on flag 
surfaces. 
The specific features embodying my inven 
tion will now be hereinafter more particularly 
explained. 
In the drawings, Figs. 8 and 9, as aforesaid, 
represent theoretical diagrammatic views of 
the principal operative devices and circuits 
in a combined instrument, or in Separate or 
independent transmitting and receiving instrul 
ments connected with line and local batteries, 
showing the indicator - segment and circuit 
breaker of the transmitter, and devices for 
sending currents to a distant receiver, and for 
printing simultaneously on both instruments. 
The switch Sand the commutators S and S in 
Fig. 8 are shown as turned to send and the local 
circuit closed to operate the printing devices 
of a transmitter, and to sendimpulses to the line 
of a distant receiver. If the switch Sin Fig. 9 
be turned to line marked to receive, the 
circuits will be changed by the commutators S 
and S, so that the currents from line will op 
erate the compound or duplex relays HH, 
the escapement electro-magnets I and I, and 
both branches of the differential electro-mag 
nets JJ alternately, and the local circuit 
from the body of the instrument by line, as 
shown in Figs. 8 and 9, indicating electrical 
connection through the same into the tongue 
h, thence through contact h", linel", springss", 
metallic block marked to receive, springs', 
lines l', l', and I 
will operate the printing 
electro-magnet D and ratchet electro-magnet 
E of a receiver. Turning the switch Sto 
receive also disengages the insulated uni 
son-rod b in the indicator-segment b of a 
combined instrument, and engages a clutch, 
c, on the type-wheel shaft c with the loose 
25 
35 
Jo 
45 
55 
Co 
75 
85 
IOO 
IO 
I (5. 
I 25 . 
 
350,984 
5 
75 
SO 
sleeve on the same, carrying the scape-wheels 
CC, together with the star or letter-spacing 
wheel C and disk-wheel C, with the spiral C 
for the unison-latch h". 
I and I are escapement electro-magnets, 
which vibrate alternately by rapid alternating 
impulses of direct current sent over the lines 
by the circuit-breakers N N' and springs n in 
in n. Their armatures operate double-pallet 
dead-beat' or wedge-pallet escapement-le 
vers i i", each working into separate scape 
wheels C'C' on the same shaft, c, so arranged 
that each electrical impulse permits the ad 
vance of the type- wheel C the space between 
two letters, and each break of the circuit a 
similar movement. There are half as many 
makes and breaks on each disk of the circuit 
breaker and one-fourth as many teeth on each 
scape-wheel as there are divisions on the type 
wheel when two escapements are used, and 
the instruments are so arranged that they 
print a letter on each make or break of the 
electrical circuit. 
The compound or duplex relays H. H. per 
form the function of drawing the tongue h in 
to contact with the printing-circuit contact h" 
when energized by the combined currents si 
multaneously entering at the binding-posts p 
p' through the lines ll", leading from a trans 
initter, and from these binding-posts the cur 
rents pass by lines l't' to the springss's, con 
tacts marked receive of the commutator S, 
and springs', thence by line l" through the 
electro-magnet L, thence by line l to the dif. 
ferential electro-magnet J, thence, say, to the 
right around the differential electro-magnet 
J and by line l'i through the coils of the es 
capennent electro-magnet I, and thence by line 
l" through the coils H of the compound relay, 
and thence, again, by the line l' to junction 
with the main linel, the other line, l', from 
the spring s passing through the electro-mag 
met K, thence by line l' to the differential 
electro-magnet J', thence passing in a reverse 
direction, say, to the left, around the differen 
tial electro-magnetJ'and by linel" to the coils of 
the escapement electro-magnet I, thence again 
by line l'around the coils H" of the compound 
relay to the line l', and thence to the main 
line l", as hereinafter more fully described. 
When the currents enter alternately by these 
lines, the two distinct electro-magnets HH' 
comprising the system are energized alter 
nately, resulting only in the vibration of the 
compound armature-lever h", (to which the 
tongue his connected by a pivoted strap-coup 
ling, h",) without moving the tonglleh. Coupled 
to the tongue h is a bell-crank lever, h, piv 
oted at one end, and its armb' extending over 
the horizontal disk-wheel C, Figs. 8 and 9, 
which has a spiral groove and projection, into 
and against which bears a pin on the unison 
latch h", rocking on the support l', and drawn 
downward and sidewise toward the shaft c of 
the type - wheel C by springs h" in the side 
and below said latch, respectively. As the 
type-wheel revolves, the spiral carries the uni 
son-latch h' toward the periphery of the disk 
wheel C, and by one or more revolutions it 
reaches the end of its path and locks the type 
Wheel Cat unison with the type-wheel C of the 
transmitter. If, however, the compound or 
duplex relays H H be energized by both line 
Currents simultaneously, both armatures will 
be attracted, and the tongue h will be drawn 
forward, tripping the unison-latch h" by the 
bell-crank lever h out of the groove of the 
spiral C, whereupon the arm h is thrown 
against the shaft of the type-wheel C, and thus 
begins its travel anew on the spiral; hence 
it is evident that the unison-latch I cannot 
lock the type-wheel C, if simultaneous print 
ing-currents are sent one or more times during 
one revolution of the type-wheel. 
Since it is negessary to send such impulses 
to make Spaces and impressions, or to rotate 
the paper-cylinder, which should be done at a 
space or at unison, and since vibrations alter 
nately over the lines are necessary to rotate 
the type-wheels to unison, and since printing 
is to be effected on makes and breaks of cul 
rent, some other device is required, not only 
to hold the type at a blank space or at unison 
While printing-currents are simultaneously sent 
Over the lines actuating the tongueh, (displac 
ing the unison-stop and closing the local cir 
cuit of the receiver,) but to hold the type-wheel 
C rigidly at each character to be printed on 
breaks of line-circuit, and to release it by con 
tinually vibrating or attracting the armature 
while alternate impulses are passing over the 
lines through the escapement-magnets I and I'. 
The differentially - wound relay J, with its 
tongue j and arm j', is such a combination as 
is well adapted for effecting these results. The 
line-wires pass in opposite directions around 
the cores of the differentially-wound relay J. 
The serrated or letter-spacing wheel C has as 
many indentations as there are characters and 
blank spaces on the type-wheel C. This dif. 
ferentially-wound relay J will become charged 
by the rapidly-recurring alternate impulses, 
yet will be inert when currents pass in both 
directions around its cores, and by its lug or 
projection j and spring flock the type-wheel 
C at any indicated character-space when the 
printing-current is sent simultaneously over 
the lines, and will also lock it at blank or 
unison when once stopped at unison by the 
unison-latch h". 
It cannot alone arrest the 
type-wheel C at unison, because its armature 
is permanently attracted or vibrated by the 
alternate impulses required to move the scape 
wheels C'C'; but it can lock the type-wheel 
C at any letter or space when printing, or 
when the compound Irelays H H are energized 
by currents sent sinultaneously over the lines 
to close the local circuit through the ratchet 
and printing electro-magnets. 
The type-wheels C are brought into unison 
by withdrawing the unison-rotd b of the trans 
mitter through the action of the unison-key b', 
thus permitting the circuit-breakers N N to 
make one or more revolutions before releasing 
. . 
90 
95 
ICO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
3O 
55 
65 
 
6 
350,984 
pay 
the unison-rodb". After allowing the receiver by the traversing movement of the carriage 
to stop at unison the latch cannot be released, 
Without the intervention of springs on the 
except by simultaneous electrical impulses on 
arms, thus obviating unnecessary resistance of 
both lines. To prevent the operator from 
springs on the arms a' to withdraw the pawls. 
sending before the type-wheel of the re 
As the paper-carriage Arecoils under the in 
ceiver is released, I employ a unison-key, b, 
fluence of the coil-springs (t or a Weight, the 
normally locking the unison-rod b, and pre 
arms a and pawls a' are given a downward 
venting any character-keys from being de 
movement, imparting a rotary motion to the 
pressed. Before sending, the operator presses 
ratchet-wheels (t, feed-rollers a ", and guide 
rollers a', moving the paper forward and up 
the releasing-key b, the block b" on the stem 
of the key t, releases the unison-rod land 
Ward the space between two lines of the print 
character-keys, the insulation b on the back 
ing. The dogs a retain the ratchets at in 
of the blockb" compressing the circuit-springs 
position during the printing of another line, 
s's', closing the branch local circuit t through 
while the pawls a' are gradually drawn up 
the circuit-springs sis", closed by the unison 
ward by the plane until they enter the next 
rod b and by lines 78 it?" i 
i", springs s's', 
notch or tooth of the ratchet-wheels a, just, 
and line l', energizing the electro-magnet G, 
however, before the carriage again recoils. 
which closes the circuit of both lines through 
The pawls at and dog a' are released from the 
the receiver, releasing the unison-latch h", but 
rack A" by means of a tripping device consist 
leaving the type-wheels Clocked at unison by 
ing of the T-shaped bar (t" and the two pins 
a'a' upon the upper side behind the pawl a 
the arm j on the tongue j of the differential 
electro-magnet J. The keys are now operated 
and dog a', and pin a, extending downward 
successively, keeping the unison-rod b with 
to engage in the latch a'. The T-shaped bar 
a" is pivoted to a shaft, a, extending through 
drawn until it is necessary to effect unison. 
the platform, and is driven forward undel the 
To avoid a closed circuit through the electro 
pawl a and dog a' by a projection, a', on the 
magnet G after the type-wheel C and circuit 
carriage A", striking the projecting pin a, 
breakers N N start, the local branch circuit t 
is automatically broken by the separation of 
and causingit to become locked through the ac 
the circuit-springs s'is', when the unison-rod 
tion of the latch a'. In this position the dog 
a' is detached by means of the pin a', and the 
l" is withdrawn. 
pin a engages in the spring-latch a', retain 
A platform, A, is secured to the rear end of 
the base-plate A, having a supporting-frame, 
ing the dog a' out of position. With the rack A", 
A', for certain parts of the instrument. Upon 
and the next attraction of the armature and 
lever a of the ratchet electro-magnet E de 
Said platform A are rails (ta, on which the 
paper-carriage A', supporting the paper-roll 
taches the pawl a from the rack A", causing 
ers A", paper-guides A", rack A", and circuit 
it to lock on the pin (t". The carriage Aim 
springs at a' traverse, carrying and feeding the 
mediately recoils, and just before it reaches 
paper on which impressions are to be made in 
the end of its travel a stud, a', on the carriage 
A depresses the spring-latch a', permitting 
a flat sheet, C, in a vertical direction in front 
of the type-wheel. Forward motion step by 
the T-shaped bar a to return to its normal 
step to space between letters is imparted to 
position under the action of a spling, thus 
the carriage by the lever at and pawla, work 
releasing the pawls a and dog a', which re 
in the straight rack A", the reciprocating 
sume positions in contact with the rack A", 
motion of the levera and pawla" being effected 
ready to commence spacing between lette's 
by the ratchet electro-magnet E and spring a. 
from the left-hand margin of the paper. 
A dog, ct, retains the rack A" in position at 
The plates Z are made of hard rubber or 
other suitable insulating material, and have 
each throw of the lever as and pawl (t". The 
forward movement of the carriage is resisted 
projecting ribs 2 g', which are secured to the 
by a coiled spring, (, or it may be by a weight, 
carriage-frame A and move in unison there 
c", attached to a cord passing over a pulley, 
with. Above these projecting ribs or flanges 
(t". This coiled spring is secured upon a shaft, 
& 2", at one end thereof, are two long metallic 
(t", attached to the platform A', one end of 
springs, 2" 2", standing free from the faces of 
which spring is secured to an arm, A', de 
the plates Z and pressing at one end on me 
pending from the carriage-frame A". 
tallic bearings 2' on the projecting flanges 2 
As the carriage A" moves forward upon the 
a'. Theinsulated springs a' 2", attached to the 
platform A' by insulated supports 2', bear at 
rails a ct, so as to feed the paper from left to 
right hand margin in front of the type-wheel 
their ends on the springs 2'2', and at right 
angles thereto preserving electical colntact 
C, the tension of the coiled spring (t is in 
during the forward movement of the carriage 
'reased, so that it is sufficient to return the 
carriage to its initial starting-point when the 
A', breaking or interrupting the circuit of the 
pawl a and dog a' have been automatically 
main lines during the recoil of the carriage 
and closing the circuit just before the carriage 
released. Attached to the rear portion of the 
instruments is a straight inclined plane, a ", 
completes its backward movement. The in 
the projecting flange a' of which fits loosely 
sulated springs & 2", having a downward tend 
ency, press on the upper surfaces of the springs 
into a notch, a, of the arms a', attached to 
the sliding pawls a, causing a vertical recip 
22' until they arrive at the ends of their. 
path clear of these springs when they snap 
rocating motion of the arms (t" and pawls a' 
90 
95 
IIO 
IIS 
12S 
130 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
. 4O 
55 
65 
350,984 
O 
25 
SC 
down Ward into contact with the metallic bear 
ings 2" in electrical connection with the springs 
33". By the return movement of the carriage 
the insulated springs : :" are made to travel 
the insulated shelves : :", passing under the 
ends of the springs 3" 2' on the metallic bear 
ings 3", ready to again ride upward over these 
circuit-springs by the next forward movement 
of the paper-carriage A. The printing-ham 
mer d is operated by the electro-magnet D in 
the same local circuit with the ratchet. mag 
net E. 
The operation of the apparatus when print. 
ing will now be described by reference to the 
theoretical diagrammatic views of two com 
bined instruments and electrical circuits, illus 
trated in Figs. S and 9 of the annexed draw 
ings, showing the operative parts and circuits, 
When in the former view the switch S is set 
to Send, and while in the latter view the 
SWitch S in a similar instrument is set to 
receive; both instruments being connected 
in series by a double telegraphic line; or the 
instruments may be two of a series of instru 
ments looped into the main lines. The line 
battery may be either located at one end of or 
On the lines, and the electrodes connected to 
earth at the terminal stations. 
The double 
lines from the main-line battery M are con 
nected to earth by line l', and to the binding 
posts p p' by lines i 
l; thence by lines ll 
to the circuit-springs ss' in contact with the 
metallic blocks marked to send on the 
commutator S of the transmitter; thence to the 
Springs s s by lines l l to the circuit-break 
ing springs in 
on the circuit-breakers N N'; 
thence by springs in n' to lines l l to the auto 
matic circuit-breaker O through springs o o, o, 
and o' to lines land l, springs 2" and 2" and by 
springs 3 and 3' to lines l and l; thence to 
the line binding-posts p" p". Branch circuits 
l"l'extend from the springs in and n' to the cir. 
cuit-springs g and (f', thence by springs (7" and 
(f" when closed by the movement of the tongue 
of the magnet G and lines l and 2 to the 
main lines land l. The branch lines l and l' 
in this instrument, operative when employed 
as a receiver, Fig. 9, enter at the binding 
posts p p', and are connected to springs ss by 
lines ll', and when the commutator S is 
turned to receive metallic: contact is made 
with the springs s' s. The commutator S be 
ing turned to receive, the main lines ll, oper 
ative in a transmitting-instrument, are broken 
at the commutator S, and the main lines "l 
through the circuit-breakers N N and lines l' 
1 to the commutator - springs s' s. From 
spring s" one line of the receiving - circuit 
passes by line ", magnet I, line l' in one di 
rection-say to the right-around the differ 
ential magnet J; thence by line l'i through the 
coils of the escapement-magnet I"; thence by 
line 7 through the coils H of the compound 
relay; thence by line 7 to intersection with 
the line l; thence to the circuit-breakers O 
and Z and the binding-post p" by the main line 
hereinbefore described, the other line, start 
ing from spring s of the commutator S, pass 
ing by line 7" around the coils of the electro 
magnet K; thence by line l', passing in a re 
verse direction-say to the left-around the 
differential electro-magnet J'; thence by line 
l" to the coils of the escapement electro-mag 
net I; thence around the coils H" of the com 
pound relay, and by line l" to intersection 
with the main line l"; thence by circuit break 
ers O Z, line P, to the binding-post p". 
The main lines l and l connect with the 
receiving-instrument at the binding-posts p 
and p", Fig. 9, passing through the springs s' 
and s and s' and s in electrical connection 
through the metallic block receive on the 
commutator S, in the same direction as that 
just described for transmitting through the 
magnets K, L, J J', II", and HH", lines land 
l", (the lines l and l now being normally 
broken at the commutator - block marked 
Send;''') thence to circuit-breaker O, springs 
0 0 and 0 and o'; thence by lines l and l to 
the circuit-breakers Z, through springs 2', 2', 
g", and 3", lines l and " to the binding-posts p" 
p', from which the lines may be extended by 
lines l and l' to another instrument, or 
through a series of instruments or to earth. 
A local battery, Q, is required at each trans 
mitting-instrument to energize the electro 
magnet G, for closing both line-circuits simul 
taneously through the electro-magnets H. H. 
of the receiver, in order to close the local cir 
cuit through the ratchet electro-magnet E and 
printing electro-magnet D, for feeding the pa 
per and for making impressions. One pole 
of the local battery Q of each instrument is 
connected by line l 
to the binding-post p"; 
thence by line l to an uninsulated post, b", on 
the indicator-segment b'; thence, when con 
tact is made between arm b' and a character 
rod, b', by insulated arm b', hub b, circuit 
spring b", to the insulated post b; thence by 
line l' through the coils of electro-magnet G; 
thence by line l" through the duplicating-key 
l 
to the circuit-spring s', metallic block 
marked to send on the commutator S', cir 
cuit spring s" to line f", ratchet electro-mag 
net E; thence to printing electromagnet D, 
returning by line l" to the binding-postp, and 
by line l" to the other pole of the local bat 
tery Q. 
In the receiving-instrument, with the com 
mutator S' turned to receive, the local cir 
cuits pass by line linto the body of the in 
strument at the uninsulated post l on the 
indicator-segment b', the insulated arms b" of 
which now rotate out of contact with circuit 
closing character-rods l'. The current from 
the body of the instrument passes by a line, 
as indicated in Figs. S and 9, connecting the 
same with the compound or duplex relay. 
tongue h, and to the contact h", insulated post 
l, line l", to springs", to the metallic block 
marked to receive, Fig. 9, and spring s", 
lines t" and f', to the ratchet electro-magnet 
E and printing electro-magnet D, and return 
ing by line l' to the binding-post p, thence by 
90 
95 
IIC) 
I I5 
1 25 
13C 
 
350,984 
line l" to the other pole of the local battery Q. 
In the receiver this circuit is closed by the ac 
tion of the compound relays H. H', closing the 
tongue 1 on the contact h", when these electro 
magnets are energized by pulsations on both 
lines simultaneously. The branch local cir 
cuit employed only in transmitting-instru 
ments starts at the post b on the indicator. 
Segment b", and passes by line 
to the keyb, 
normally open, thence by inel to the electro 
magnet G, through this electro-magnet and 
line I" to the key l, normally closed, to line 
l", circuit-springs', to the block marked to 
'send,' Springs', line-l", ratchet electro. mag 
net E, and printing electro-magnet D, line l', 
to the post p", and thence by line i to the lo. 
cal battery Q. The extension or secondar 
branch extends from one end of keyb by line 
l", and is closed at the springs s' and sl. b 
pressing the releasing keyb" and insulated cam 
b" of the transmitter, and is normally closed 
at the Springs s" and s', and automatically 
broken at these springs is s' by the first 
movement of the insulated rod b, withdrawn 
by pressing any character-key. This second 
ary branch is closed from springs is through 
line " With the trunnions of key band line it 
of the primary branch local circuit. Press 
ing the releasing-key b closes the secondary 
branch of the local circuit t at the springs st 
s", energizing the electro-magnet G, and the 
Current Sent Over both main lines is available 
in the receiver, not only for releasing the uni 
Son-latch by energizing both branches of the 
duplex electro-magnets, but for closing the lo 
cal circuits at the contact hi? through the ratch 
et electro-magnet E and printing electro-mag 
net D, thereby moving the paper-carriage A. 
one notch on the receiver, and this secondary 
branch local circuit t being closed by its pri. 
mary circuit through the metallic block 
marked to 'send in the transmitter, Fig. 8, 
springs s's', and line l' through the ratchet 
electro-magnet E and printing electro-magnet 
D, moving the paper-carriage one notch on the 
transmitter. 
When a character-key has been depressed, 
the double circuit-breakers NN' revolve, send. 
ing pulsations alternately over the lines to 
operate the escapement electro-magnets I and 
I, Fig. 9, and to cause a synchronous move 
ment of the type-wheels C. When any arm, 
b", Fig. 8, strikes a projecting character-rod, 
t", in the indicator-segment b", the circuit 
from the local battery Q is closed through 
lines ll", electro-magnet G, lines to it, to the 
spring s', block marked to send of the 
commutator S, spring s', line l', ratchet elec 
tro-magnet E, and printing electro-magnet D 
of the transmitter, causing the lever, arma and 
the pawl at to be drawn backward so as to en 
gage in a notch in the rack A" and the ham 
mer d", to impress the paper against a char 
acter on the type-wheel C. The electro-mag 
net G, being energized, closes both branches of 
the main lines l' l' simultaneously through 
the springs (f, g, g, and of of the transmitting 
instrument with lines l', l', and I", and l, l, 
l, l, and l' to the receiver, and the local cir 
cuit from the body of the receiver is closed by 
the action of the duplex relay H and the 
tongue h and contact h through line l", spring 
s", metallic block marked to receive, spring 
s', lines land l' to the ratchet electro-magnet 
E and printing electro-magnet D, thence by 
linest" to post p, energizing these electro-mag 
nets and drawing back the arma and pawl a 
and the printing-hammer d", to impress the 
paper against the type-wheels of the receiv 
ing-instrument. The main-line currents at the 
same time passing through the differential 
electro-magnets J and J' neutralize the same, 
releasing the tongue j and locking the type 
wheel C by the arm i' engaging with the ser 
rated wheel C. Upon releasing a character 
key the local circuit is broken at the indica 
tor-segment b of the transmitter and the elec 
tro-magnet G is demagnetized, breaking the 
line-circuits at the springs (f, g, g, and g, 
stopping the double-line pulsations and inter 
rupting the local circuit at the contact h", the 
hammerd recoils, and the lever-arm (t, drawn 
backward by the spring a, moves the paper 
carriage A" a space between two letters on 
both transmitting and receiving instruments. 
If a character-key is depressed until a letter 
is impressed, and while the character-key is 
held down, the key bin the local circuit is 
depressed, momentarily breaking the local cir 
cuit in the transmitter, the type-wheels C will 
remain at the same letter, while the breaking 
and closing of the line by the electro-magnet 
G will cause a repetition of the printing and 
feeding movements, thereby rapidly repeat 
ing the inpression of any letter or character, 
and greatly increasing the speed of transmis 
sion. If, while both instruments are standing 
at unison, pulsations are sent simultaneously 
over both lines by making and breaking the 
branch local circuits of the transmitter at the 
keyb, the ratchet electro-magnet E and print 
ing electro-magnet D of the transmitters and 
receivers will be actuated, and the paper-car 
riages will be moved simultaneously to space 
between paragraphs, the blank on the type. 
wheels at unison preventing the making of 
impressions. 
The apparatus and electrical circuits for 
maintaining the paper-carriages in unison, and 
for placing any one or more of a series of re. 
ceiving-instruments in circuit, and for cutting 
the operative parts out of circuit in the re 
ceiving-instruments for releasing the paper 
carriage, and for feeding the paper between 
lines at any point in its excursion, will now be 
explained. 
When the paper-carriage. A'is released and 
recoils to the initial point of its excursion, an 
arm, a, attached to the frame of the paper 
carriage, strikes the circuit-springs o' and o' of 
the automatic double-circuit switch. O, closing 
them against the back contacts o' and o', break 
ing the main-line circuits and closing the 
branch lines l' and l', one line, l', passing 
35 
45 
55 
70. 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
350,984 
9 
O 
3O 
35 
SO 
through one branch of the differential electro 
magnet X and independent electro-magnet Y, 
and by line l' into the springs of the commu 
tator S, and the other line, l', in a reverse di 
rection through the other coils of the differ 
ential electro-magnet X and the independent 
electro-magnet Y', line l', circuit-spring s'. 
A circuit-breaker, W, Fig. 10, with a point 
er, w, arm w', and notched rim ac", is attached 
to each transmitter in a branch of one of the 
main-line circuits. 
To the platform A', or elsewhere in each in 
strument used as a receiver or transmitter. are 
secured the differential electro-magnets X X" 
and independent electro-magnets Y Y', one 
coil of each of the electro-magnets X and Y 
being in connection with the circuit-breaker 
W through the binding-post p, lines 2 and l', 
springs', line l', independent electro-magnet 
Y', differential electro-magnet X, line l', cir 
cuit springs o o', line l', circuit springs 2: 3, 
and line l' to the binding-post p". The other 
branch of the main line is connected from the 
binding-post p' through the electro-magnets 
X and Y by line l", one branch of the double 
circuit breaker b", normally-open line l', cir 
cuit spring s, line l", through the branch Y 
of the independent electro-magnet Y', and in 
a reverse direction through the differential 
electro-magnet X, line l", circuit-springs o' 
and o' of the automatic circuit-breaker O, line 
l, circuit-springs 2' 2", line l, and to the bind 
ing-post p. 
A branch line, l", from the arm of key b", 
normally open, connects line I" with line l", 
through this key when depressed. When the 
key b" is closed, it connects line l" with linel". 
Lines l and l connect lines l and l' with 
lines t" and l' when the double-circuit-closing 
device b" is closed. 
The individualizing circuit-breaker may 
have any number of divisions-that is to say, 
metallic contacts and insulations. The one 
shown in Fig. 10 of the drawings has twenty 
four divisions, c' representing metallic con 
tacts or makes, and 0' insulations or breaks. 
This individualizing circuit-breaker W has a 
metallic hub, w, insulated from its shaft, and 
insulated springs ac" c' for effecting contacts 
of makes and breaks corresponding with the 
metallic contacts 0' and instilations u' on the 
periphery of the circuit-breaker W. The in 
sulated spring c" bears upon the metallic bub 
ac' in electrical connection with the contacts ac'. 
The arm u' and the pointer at are rigidly at 
tached to the shaft of this cil'cuit breake'. 
A spring-click, v', is attached to the arm at', 
and the rim v' of the dial-plate is serrated 
with as many lotches as there are metallic 
contacts on the circuit-breaker W. 
The dial no should be numbered with figures 
corresponding with the lumber of insulations 
on the circuit. breaker W. When the index 
w indicates Zero on the dial-plate, the individ 
ualizing circuit- closer U on the platform A 
of all the instruments in the series should 
- 
likewise stand at unison or Zero, and the cir 
cuit-springs at' should bear on an insulation 
on the circuit-breaker W. 
The individualizing circuit-closer U is car 
ried on a shaft, it', supported in bearings at and 
w", attached to the platform A'and carrying the 
double circuit breaker U, the spiral or fusee 
u, Fig. 7, the ratchet-wheel at", the metallie 
hubs at and at of the circuit closers insulated 
from each other and from the shaft it. This 
circuit-closer U has metallic contacts at 
at at 
corresponding points in their peripheries and 
in electrical connection with their respective 
hubs u' and u". The insulated springs at at 
bear on the hubs, and the springs at and t 
bear on the periphery of the circuit-closer U. 
The armature u' of the electro-magnet X. 
is attached to a bent lever, u, supported in 
trunnions at' and u', which lever actuates a 
pawl, it', when the electro-magnet X is ener 
gized by the lines ll" and branch lines land 
l", leading from the circuit-breaker W of the 
transmitter, and revolves the ratchet-wheel 
u" one notch at each make and break of cir 
cuit. There are, however, as many notches 
on the ratchet-wheel at' as there are contacts 
on the circuit-breaker W. A click attached 
to the platform A prevents the retrograde 
movement of the ratchet-wheel it". A tongue, 
t", pivoted in trunnions u', is solicited later 
ally and vertically downward by suitable 
springs, u' and u", causing the tongue w to 
travel laterally by the rotation of the spiral or 
fusee it until it arrests the shaft it' by contact 
with the pin u. The armature at of the in 
dependent electro-magnets Y and Y is at 
tached to a bent lever, u', supported in trun 
nions u". A retractile spring, u", is adjusted 
so as to resist the attraction of the single coil 
of the electro-magnet Y'. 
By revolving the arm u' of the circuit. 
breaker W twice, (the double switch O being 
open, as described.)and thereby sending pulsa. 
tions through the coils of the electro-magnets 
X' and Y, the arm u' will come into contact 
with the pin u' on the fusee or spiral tin all the 
instruments and arrest the circuit-closers U 
in unison with the circuit-breaker W. Of 
course, it will be understood that the index w 
of the dial-plate must point to Zero when the 
circuit-Closers are at u Ilison. 
When the key b" is depressed, and the cir 
cuits are simultaneously closed through lines 
l", l', l', l, l', and t and electro-magnets Y 
and Y', the armature it 
will be attracted, 
while the electro-magnets XX Will neutralize 
each other, and the bent lever it will release 
the unison alm or tongue u" from the stop at', 
and the springs ut" u' of the arm u' will return 
this tongue to its initial point, ready to com 
mence its travel ane W. 
The metallic contacts at and t' on the cir 
cuit-closer U are set at any number that may 
be desired-say at No. 1-SO as to be brought 
into contact with the springs at and it, when the 
ratchet-wheel at' is moved one notch to close 
75 
90 
95 
IOC) 
I IO 
IIS 
I 25 
10 
350,984. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the main - line circuit of the first receiver 
through springs u, u', t, and c and lines t" 
l' l'97" around the automatic switch O. 
Each instrument in the line has its metallic 
points u and it of the circuit-closer U set 
one division behind that of the metallic points 
on the circuit closer of the preceding one, so 
that by turning the circuit breaker W each in 
strument in line is successively brought into 
and cut out of circuit until the instrument is 
reached upon which it may be desired to record 
impressions. 
The method and manner of spacing between 
lines at any point in the excursion of the paper 
carriage will now be described: 
A square or feathered shaft, k, is held with 
in and supported by bearings on the frame 
A* of the carriage, noving there with during 
its excursion. To this shaft k is secured an 
arm, k, bifurcated at one end and engaging 
with a link, k", by means of suitable bearings. 
The arm k, held laterally by the arms k", has a 
square or feathered hole permitting the shaft 
k' to move freely through it, yet preventing 
any rotation of it therein. A link, Ic", connects 
the arm k to the bent lever k of the armature 
k' of the electro-magnet K. On the extremi 
ties of the shaft l are fixed arms le", carrying 
pawls le", held in contact with the ratchets a 
by the spring k. 
Upon the depression of the key b" when the 
instruments in circuit stand at unison, and the 
main lines are broken at the circuit-breakers 
N N', but closed at the double switch, O, the 
branch lines t and l are closed at the spring 
s', and thence through lines I'll l 
l to 
the binding-post p into the main-line circuit. 
This pulsation energizes the electro-magnet 
K, and turns the ratchet at of the feed-roller 
a one notch, feeding the paper the space be 
tween two lines. 
To release the paper-carriage at any point 
in its excursion, the key b is depressed while 
the main-line circuits are open at the circuit 
breakers N N at unison, closi fig the branch 
main lines landl" through the spring s" of the 
commutator S, thence by line l" to the magnet 
Land by lines it'll to the binding-postp', and 
thence to the other instruments in circuit or 
to ground. When the magnet L is energized 
by a pulsation on this line, its armature L', at 
tached to its lever (t", linked to an arm, a, 
pivoted to the shaft (t", Fig. 6, or the armature 
L may be secured to the arm (t, as shown in 
Figs. 8 and 9, secured to the shaft of the auto 
matic releasing T-shaped bar (t", is attracted, 
oscillating this t-shaped bar laterally, and 
causing it to be locked by the spring-latcha', 
engaging with the pin (t". This movement of 
the T-shaped bara" causes the pins a' and a 
to release the dog a' and pawl a from the rack 
A", permitting the carriage at any point in its 
excursion to return to its initial point for pre 
senting the left-hand margin of the paper to 
the type-wheel. The recoil of the carriage re 
leases the T-shaped bar from its spring-latch 
a", as hereinabove fully explained. . 
l 
f 
The paper-carriage of the instruments con 
nected in circuit are brought to unison by 
sending successive pulsations over both lines 
by depressing the key b while the type-wheels 
are at unison, which closes the branch local 
circuit through the relay G, thus closing both 
lines simultaneously and energizing the ratchet 
electro-magnet E, as hereinbefore described, 
on both the transmitting and receiving instru 
ments. This causes the respective paper-car 
riages to travel until automatically released; 
or all the paper-carriages in the series may be 
released by depressing the key b". When the 
paper-carriages recoil, the arm a ", attached 
to the frame a of the carriage. strikes the 
springs oo of the automatic double switch. O, 
breaking the main-line circuits through the 
compound relays H H', as previously de 
scribed, and closing the branch circuits 
through the differential and independent elec 
tro-magnets XX and YY", respectively. The 
local circuit through the ratchet electro-mag 
net E cannot now be closed by the compound 
relays Ef H'. The individualizing circuit 
closers U are then revolved by turning the 
circuit-breaker W until the branch lines l, 
l", l, and l are closed around the double 
. switch O, which again restores the nuain-line 
circuits through the compound relays H. H. 
This switch O is thereafter closed by the first 
movement of the paper - carriage A, which 
restores the main-line circuits through the 
double switch O. The paper-carriages of the 
respective instruments will now, of course, 
start on their excursion in unison, and at each 
recoil movement of said carriages the inter 
ruption of the mainline circuits by the circuit 
breakers Z, will indicate to the operator the 
moment when each carriage is returning to its 
initial starting-point. 
The main-line circuits for operating the mag 
nets H, I, J, K, L, X, and Y by main-line bat 
teries have been hereinbefore fully described; 
but I do not, however, confine myself to such 
method of operating them, as these magnets 
may be energized and operated by local-bat 
tery circuits controlled by relays in the main 
lines, in a manner well understood by persons 
skilled in electrical Science. 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination,in a printing-telegraph, 
of a transversely-traveling paper - carriage, 
wheels attached to said carriage and traveling 
over rails secured to a horizontal platform, a 
paper-roller held in bearings in the sides of 
said carriage, and feed-roller's journaled in the 
frame of said carriage below the plane of the 
type-wheel, said feed rollers operating to feed 
the paper upward through Vertical and lat 
eral straight guides, the said guides being so 
arranged that the paper is presented in a flat. 
sheet in front of the type-wheel without ob 
struction to the impressions, substantially as 
described. 
2. In printing telegraphs, a double switch, 
75 
IOC 
O 
I i5 
25 
35C,984 
11. 
75 
95 
IOC 
I IO 
IO 
substantially as described, in each instrument, 
automatically operated by the recoil move 
ment of a paper-carriage to interrupt the cir 
cuit through a compound relay employed to 
close the local circuit through a ratchet elec 
tro-magnet operating to advance the paper 
carriage in each receiver, and an individualiz 
ing-circuit breaker, substantially as described, 
operating from any transmitter in the circuit 
to close the circuit in both transmitter and the 
receiver connected in the same main-line cir 
cuits around said automatic double switch, 
whereby the paper-carriages of a number of in 
struments connected in Series are arrested at 
5 unison, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
3. The combination, in a printing-telegraph, 
of a transversely - traveling paper - carriage, 
wheels attached to said carriage and traveling 
over rails secured to a horizontal platform, a 
paper roller held in bearings in the sides of 
said carriage, vertical and lateral straight 
guides secured to said carriage, feed-rollers 
journaled in the frame of said carriage below 
said guides, a spacing-rack attached to the 
lower part of said carriage, ratchets attached 
to said feed-rollers, clicks Secured to the sides 
of said carriage for retaining said ratchets, and 
sliding arms movable vertically in supports 
secured to said carriage, carrying pawls engag. 
ing in said ratchets, all arranged substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. The combination, in a printing telegraph, 
of a transversely-traveling paper-carriage mov 
ing laterally in fixed supports and carrying 
the paper-roller, feed-rollers, and spacing-rack, 
ratchets attached to said feed-rollers, clicks 
secured to the frame of said carriage for re 
taining said ratchets, sliding arms movable in 
supports secured to said carriage and carrying 
pawls engaging in said ratchets, and a fixed in 
cline plane engaging with said sliding arms, 
imparting thereto a vertically - reciprocating 
motion, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
5. The combination, in a printing telegraph, 
of a transversely-traveling paper carriage mov. 
able laterally in a horizontal plane on and be 
tween fixed Supports, and carrying there with 
the paper-roller, ?eed-rollers, and spacing-rack, 
ratchets attached to said feed rollers, clicks se 
cured to the frame of said carriage for retaining 
said ratchets, sliding arms movable in supports 
secured to said carriage and carrying pawls 
engaging in said ratchets, an incline plane at 
tached to a fixed support engaging with sail 
sliding arms, an automatic signaling-circuit 
interrupter, and a double-contact arm moving 
over the circuit-springs of said interrupter to 
maintain a closed circuit during the forward 
movement of said paper-carriage, and over the 
insulations of said interrupter, during the re 
trograde movement of said carriage, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
6. The combination, in a printing-telegraph, 
of a transversely - travelihg paper - carriage, 
wheels attached to said carriage and traveling 
over rails secured to a horizontal platform, a 
paper-roller held in bearings in the sides of 
said carriage, feed-rollers journaled in the 
frame of said carriage below the plane of the 
type-wheel, vertical and lateral guides secured 
to said carriage, a rack actuated by a pawl at 
tached to a lever, its armature actuated by a 
ratchet electro-magnet in the same electrical 
circuit with a printing electro-magnet for mov 
ing said carriage step by step in one direc 
tion, and a spring or weight for returning said 
carriage in the opposite direction, substan 
tially as described. 
7. The combination, in a printing-telegraph, 
of a transverseiy - traveling paper - carriage, 
wheels secured to said carriage and traveling 
over rails secured to a horizontal platform, a 
paper-rolle) held in bearings in the sides of said 
carriage, feed-rollers journaled in the frame 
of said carriage, vertical and lateral guides se 
cured to said carriage, a spacing-rack attached 
to said carriage, ratchets attached to feed-roll 
ers supported in the frame of said carriage, 
clicks seculed to the sides of said carriage for 
retaining said ratchets, sliding arms movable 
in supports secured to said carriage and carry 
ing pawls engaging in said ratchets, a print 
ing hammer and an electro-magnet attached to 
a fixed support, and a ratchet electro-mag 
net in the same electical circuit with said 
printing electro-magnet, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
S. The combination, in a printing-telegraph, 
of paper-guides attached to a carriage travel 
ing laterally within fixed supports for present 
ing the paper in a flat sheet and directing it 
vertically in front of the type-wheel without 
obstruction to the impressions, an electro-mag 
net, lever-pawl, dog, and rack to feed the pa. 
per step by step to space between letters, and 
an incline plane, pawl-arnas, pawl, and feed 
rollers to feed the paper vertically to space 
hetween lines by the recoil movement of the 
paper-carriage during its excursion, substan. 
tially as hereinbefore set forth. 
9. The combination, in a printing-telegraph, 
of a printing-hainner and an electro magnet 
attached to a fixed support in rear of the pa. 
per, a local circuit and printing and ratchet 
electro-magnets included in said circuit and 
energized thereby, and an armature - lever 
carrying a pawl and retracting-spring to move 
the paper-carriage when the circuit is inter 
rupted, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
10. The combination, in a printing - tele. 
graph, of a transversely-travelling paper-car 
riage, wheels secured to said carriage and 
traveling over rails secured to a horizontal 
platform, an arm attached to said carriage and 
moving therewith, an autonatic double switch, 
and two telegraphic lines connected thereto, 
said alm at a precletermined point in its ex 
cursion actuating Said double Switch, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
11. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a laterally-traveling paper-carriage 
- 
25 
35 
5 O 
- 
2 
350,984 
75 
85 
IO 
I5 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
4c 
45 
. 
. 
carrying an arm which, at a predetermined 
point in its excursion, automatically actuates 
a double switch, breaking the line-circuits 
through the escapement and differential elec 
tro-imagnets, and the compound relay con 
trolling the local circuit, means, such as de 
scribed, for again closing the main-line cir 
cuits through said electro-magnets, and means, 
such as described, for energizing the printing 
electro-magnet and the ratchet electro-mag 
net moving said paper-carriage, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
12. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a transversely-traveling paper-car 
riage moving over a fixed plane, said carriage 
carrying an arm which, at a predetermined 
pointin its excursion, automatically breaks the 
main-line circuits through the escapement and 
differential electro-magnets and the compound 
relay controlling the local circuit through the 
printing electro-magnet and the ratchet elec 
tro-magnet actuating the paper-carriage, and 
means, such as described, for closing said cir 
cuits, one of said line-circuits passing in one 
direction through the coils of a differential 
electro-magnet and through one branch of an 
independent electro-magnet, and the other in 
a reverse direction through the coils of said dif 
ferential electro-magnet and directly through 
the other branch of the independent electro 
magnet, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
13. In a printing-telegraph, the combina 
tion, with a transversely-traveling paper-car 
riage carrying a paper-roller, fixed rollers, and 
spacing-rack, of ratchets attached to said feed 
rollers, clicks for holding said ratchets in po 
sition, sliding arms movable in supports at 
tached to said carriage, a fixed incline plane 
engaging with said arms and imparting there 
to a reciprocating motion, main-line-circuit 
contact springs and interrupters for signal 
ing the movement of the paper and carriage, 
said carriage being moved step by step in one 
direction by a pawl attached to a lever, an 
electro-magnet attached to a fixed support 
actuating a lever through which moves freely 
a square or feathered shaft supported within 
the frame of the paper-carriage, and means, 
such as described, for feeding the paper Step 
by step between lines, and an armature actus 
ated by an electro-magnet secured to a fixed 
support and operating a releasing device for 
returning the carriage to its normal position 
by the action of a spring or weight, Substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
14. In a printing-telegraph, the combina 
tion, with an individualizing device consisting 
of a shaft, ratchet, contact-springs, and a uni 
son-fusee, of a differential electro-magnet, with 
its armature, lever, pawl, and retracting-spring 
for operating the ratchet of said individual 
izing device, and an electro-magnet with in 
dependent coils, with its armature, lever and 
retracting-spring for releasing the unison-fusee 
of said individualizing device, Substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
15. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a differential electro-magnet, with 
its armature-lever and pawls for actuating 
ratchets, a circuit-breaker and unison-fusee on 
the ratchet-shaft, a pivoted unison-latch, and 
means, such as described, for releasing said 
| unison-latch, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
16. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a transversely traveling paper-car 
riage, wheels attached to said carriage and 
traveling over rails secured to a horizontal 
platform, a spacing-rack attached to said car 
riage, a ratchet electro-magnet supported 
upon said platform, with its armature-lever, 
pawl, and spring for moving said carriage step 
by step in one direction, and an automatic re 
leasing device, as described, secured to said 
platform and operated by said paper-carriage, 
for permitting the retrograde movement of 
the same, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
17. The character-rods of a printing-tele 
graph transmitter in several horizontal series 
radiating from the center of and equidistant 
from one another around an indicator shaft and 
segment, and arranged in series vertically above 
each other, the number of rods in each horizon 
tal series corresponding with the series of open 
ings in the indicator-segment, and the entire 
number of character-rods, including the uni 
son-rod, corresponding with the divisions on 
the type-wheel, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
18. The combination, with the radial char. 
acter-rods, of a printing-telegraph transmit 
ter arranged in series vertically and horizon 
tally, and susceptible of a reciprocating lon 
gitudinal movement, a metallic hub insulated 
from the indicator-shaft, metallid arms radiat 
ing from said hub at determinate angles and 
at heights, respectively, corresponding with 
the character-rods, and impinging against 
said rods when longitudinally advanced, and 
an insulated metallic'spring bearing on said 
hub, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
19. The combination, in a printing telegraph 
| transmitter, of character-rods radiating from 
an indicator-shaft and arranged in series one 
above the other, the rods in each series equal 
to and corresponding with the series of open 
ings in said indicator-segment and divisions 
on the type-wheel, a segmental perforated in 
dicator Segment concentric with the indicator 
shaft, and insulated arms on said shaft, ar 
ranged radially therefrom and in such posi 
tions as to impinge against said series of char 
acter-rods when longitudinally advanced, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
20. The character-rods of a printing-tele 
graph transmitter, radiating from the center 
of and equidistant from one another around 
an indicator-shaft and arranged in series above 
each other, each series equal in number to the 
openings corresponding there with in the in 
dicator-segment and the entire number of open 
- 
95 
TOO 
ros 
I IO 
1 IS 
2 
 
350,984 
13 
IO 
2 5 
35 
s 
ings equal to the divisions on the type-wheel, 
in combination with the bell-crank level'S 
hinged to supporting steps of character key 
stems inpinging against said bell-crank level's 
for advancing said rods horizontally, pins for 
limiting the forward movements of said rods, 
and springs for withdrawing said arms, sub 
stantially as described. 
21. The character rods of a printing-tele 
graph transmitter, radiating from an indicator 
shaft, arranged in series corresponding with 
the number of openings in the indicator-seg 
ment, in combination with a unison-rod hav 
ing an insulated contact of levers and pins op 
erating to withdraw said unisoil-rod by the ad 
vance of any character rod, and vice versa, 
substantially as described. 
22. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of two telegraph main lines, an auto 
matic double switch for breaking the main 
lines and closing branches thereof through a 
differential electro-magnet actuating the in 
dividualizing circuit - close', an independent 
coil electromagnet, and a circuit-breaker for 
signaling included in said main lines, Substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
23. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a differential electronagnet with its 
armature-lever and pawl, a click and ratchet 
for revolving the circuit-breaker, the circuit 
breaker and contact being adjustable on its 
shaft, and contact-springs for closing the cir 
cuit around the break in the main lines at the 
automatic cil cuit-breaker, Substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
24. The combination, in a unison stop, of a 
fusee on a revolving shaft, a unison latch and 
pin susceptible of vertical and lateral motion, 
and bearing on the spiral in said fusee, springs 
for soliciting the latch vertically and laterally, 
an armature-lever, retracting spring, and trip 
ning-lever, and an electro-magnet with inde 
pendent coils for releasing the unison latch, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
25. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a local battery, ratchet and printing 
electro-magnets, and a relay in the circuit of 
said battery, said circuit being closed by con 
tact between the revolving arms and charac 
ter-rods, and a duplicating-key with its con 
tacts normally closed in said circuit, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
26. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a relay in the printing circuit, of a 
transmitter energized by said circuit, with its 
armature lever and contact-springs for simul 
taneously closing the mainline circuits, and a 
conpound relay in a receiver energized by 
said circuits, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
27. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two telegraphic main 
lines connecting the transmitting-instrument 
with the receiving instrument, with local bat 
teries and circuits for both instruments, com 
mutators for changing said line and local cir 
cuits, a loose sleeve on the type-wheel shaft 
carrying scape-wheels, a unison-spiral, spac 
ing-wheel, and a clutch for connecting said 
sleeve with the type-wheel shaft, thereby com 
bining the actuating parts of a receiver with 
the Same train of gearing, and motive power 
employed for operating a transmitter, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
28. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery, two telegraphic main lines 
connecting the transmitting-instrument with 
the receiving instrument, local batteries and 
circuits for both instruments, commutators, 
such as described, for changing the line and 
local circuits, means, such as described, for 
combining the actuating parts of a receiver 
with the same train of gearing, and motive 
power employed for operating a transmitter, 
and the local circuit of the transmitting-in 
strunient closed by contact of the arms of the 
indicator segment with any of the series of un 
insulated character-rods of said segment ad 
vanced end wise and broken by the withdrawal 
thereof, Substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
29. The combination, in a printing- tele. 
graph, of a battery, two main lines for connect 
ing a series of transmitters and receivers, local 
batteries and circuits for the transmitters and 
receivers, commutators, such as described, for 
changing the line and local circuits, means, 
such as described, for combining the actuating 
parts of a receiver with the same train of gear 
ing, and motive power employed for operating 
a transmitter, the local circuit of a transmitter 
closed by contact of revolving arms with un 
insulated character-rods projected through an 
indicator-segment and broken by the with 
drawal thereof, and the local circuit of a re 
ceiver closed by an electro-magnet responding 
to double-line impulses, substantially as de 
scribed. 
30. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery, two main lines, local bat 
teries and circuits for transmitters and re 
ceivers, commutators, such as described, for 
changing the line and local circuits, means, 
such as described, for combining the actuating 
parts of a receiver with the same train of gear 
ing, and motive power employed for operating 
a transmitter, the local circuit of a receiver 
closed by an electro - magnet responding to 
double-line inpulses, the escapement, differ 
ential, and compound relay electro-magnets 
of a receiver responding to alternate impulses 
in the main lines, said compound relay at 
tracting ibcth armatures, and the differential 
electro-magnet inert by simultaneous pulsa 
tions over both lines, Sabstantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
31. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines for 
connecting the transmitter and receiver, local 
batteries and circuits for the transmitter and 
receiver, commutators, such as described, for 
changing the line and local circuits, means, 
such as described, for combining the actuating 
parts of a receive1 with the same train of gear 
75 
90 
9. 
OO 
IOS 
IIO 
15 
I 25 
IO 
25 
45 
SO 
55 
14. 
ing, and motive power employed for operating 
a transmitter, the local circuit of a receiver 
closed by an electro-magnet responding to 
double-line impulses, the escapement, differ 
ential, and compound relay electro-magnets 
of a receiver responding to alternate impulses 
over the main lines, said compound relay at 
tracting both armatures by simultaneous pull 
sations, and the differential electro-magnet in 
ert by simultaneous pulsations over both lines, 
and a relay in a local circuit of a transmitter 
With contacts to close the main lines simul 
taneously, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
32. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines for 
connecting the transmitter and receiver, local 
batteries and circuits for the transmitter and 
receiver, commutators, such as described, for 
changing the line and local circuits, means, 
such as described, for combining the actuating 
parts of a receiver with the same train of gear. 
ing, and motive power employed for operating 
a transmitter, the local circuit of a receiver 
closed by an electro - magnet responding to 
double-line impulses, the escapement, differ. 
ential, and compound relay electro magnets 
of a receiver responding to alternate impulses 
over the main ines, said compound relay at 
tracting both armatures by simultaneous pulsa 
tions, and the differential electro-magnet inert 
by simultaneous pulsations over both lines, a 
relay in a local circuit of a transmitter with 
contacts to close the main lines simultaneously, 
a dial with a revolving individualizing circuit 
breaker in a branch of the main lines of a 
transmitter, a key in a branch of the main 
lines of a transmitter to close both lines simul 
taneously, and keys in other branch circuits 
of a transmitter to close either main line, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
33. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery, two main lines for con 
necting the transmitter and receiver, local bat 
teries and circuits, commutators, such as 
described, for changing the line and local cir 
cuits, means, such as described, for combining 
the actuating parts of a receiver with the same 
train of gearing, and motive power employed 
for operating a transmitter, and a differential 
electro-magnet in both a transmitter and a re 
ceiver to revolve a circuit-closing device, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
34. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery, two main lines, local bat 
teries and circuits, commutators, such as de 
scribed, for changing the line and local cir 
cuits, a differential electro-magnet in the trans 
mitter and receiver to revolve a circuit-closer, 
and an electro-magnet with independent coils, 
and means, such as described, actuated there 
by to release a unison-latch, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
35. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, local 
batteries and circuits, a differential electro 
magnet and an independent-coil electro-mag 
- - 
350,984 
net in said circuits, a circuit-closer, and means, 
such as described, for revolving the shaft car 
rying the circuit-closer, a unison-fusee on said 
shaft, and means, substantially such as de 
scribed, for locking the same at unison with 
the revolving circuit-locker at the zero-point 
of its dial, substantially as and for the pur 
OSes set forth. 
36. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, local 
batteries and circuits, a differential electro 
magnet and an independent-coil electro-mag 
net in said circuits, and means, substantially 
such as described, for actuating the same, an 
automatic double switch operated by the pa 
per - carriage in its retrograde movement, 
breaking the main-line circuits through the 
compound relay, escapement, and differential 
electro-magnets, and closing the branch cir 
cuits around the same through the differential 
and independent-coil electro-magnets that act 
late the rotary branch-circuit closer and re 
lease the unison-latch, a circuit-closing device, 
and means, such as described, for revolving the 
shaft carrying the circuit-closer and unison 
fusee, and means, such as described, for lock 
ing the same at unison with an insulation on 
the circuit-breaker corresponding with zero on 
its dial, substantially as and for the purposes. 
set forth. 
37. The combination, in a printing- tele 
graph, of a battery and two telegraphic main 
lines, local batteries and circuits, a differential 
electro-magnet and an independent coil elec 
tro-magnet in said circuits, and means, sub 
stantially such as described, for actuating the 
same, a circuit-closing device, and means, such 
as described, for revolving the shaft carrying 
the circuit closer, a unison-fusee, and means, 
such as described, for locking and releasing 
the same at unison with the revolving circuit 
breaker in a transmitter, and an automatic 
switch operated by the paper-carriage in its 
retrograde movement, breaking the main-line 
circuits in the transmitter and through the com 
pound relay, escapement, and differential elec 
tro-magnets of the receiver, and closing the 
branch circuits through the differential and 
independent-coil electro-magnets, the main 
line circuits being again closed by branch lines 
connecting the springs brought into electrical 
contact by the revolving circuit-closer, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
38. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery, two telegraphic main 
lines, a transversely-traveling paper-carriage 
moving in a horizontal plane, circuit-springs 
in said main lines attached to said carriage, 
and straight circuit-springs and insulations se 
cured to said plane to maintain closed circuits 
in said main lines during the forward move 
ment of the paper-carriage, and to interrupt 
the circuits in said main lines during the ret 
rograde movement of Said carriage, Substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
39. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery, two telegraphic main lines, 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
I 5 
I 25 
 
350, 
984. 
5 
circuit-breakers at the transmitter, an elec 
tro-magnet in a local circuit of the transmitter 
operating a double switch to close both lines 
when the printing circuit of the transmitter is 
closed, and an individualizing circuit-closer at 
the transmitter and receiver in the main limes, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
40. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, cir 
cuit - breakers at the transmitter, an electro 
magnet in a local circuit of the transmitter 
operating a double switch to close both main 
lines, an individualizing circuit-closer at the 
transmitter and receiver in the main lines, 
and an automatic switch, which by the move 
ment of the paper-carriage breaks the main 
lines and closes a branch of said main lines, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
41. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, cir 
cuit-breakers at the transmitter, an electro 
magnet in a local circuit of the transmitter 
operating a double switch to close both main 
lines, an individualizing circuit- closer at the 
transmitter and receiver in the main lines, a 
ulison device for Said circuit-closer, and an 
automatic switch by which the movement of 
the transversely - traveling paper - carriage 
breaks the main lines and closes branch cir 
cuits of said main lines, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
42. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, cir 
cuit-breakers at the transmitter, an electro 
magnet in a local circuit, operating by means, 
such as described, for closing both main lines, 
an individualizing circuit-closer at the trans. 
mitter and receiver in the main lines, an au 
tomatic circuit-breaker which by the move 
ment of the paper carriage breaks the main 
line and closes branch circuits thereof, and cir 
cuit-springs in contact with the circuit-closers 
included in a branch circuit to close the break 
in said main lines, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
43. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery, two telegraphic main lines, 
circuit-breakers at the transmitter, an electro 
magnet in a local circuit for actuating a dou 
ble switch to close both main lines, an indi 
vidualizing circuit-closer at the transmitter 
and receiver in the main line, a unison device 
and circuit-closer operated through single-line 
pulsation and released through simultaneous 
pulsations over both lines, a circuit-breaker 
and indicating-dial, and a double-line key in 
branch circuits of the main lines at the trans 
mitter, substantially as and for the purposes 
Set forth. 
44. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, a 
branch of the main lines normally open in the 
transmitter connected to the main lines of the 
receiver at a point beyond where they are 
broken by the commutators, and passing 
through an electro-magnet responding only to 
prolonged impulses, said electro-magnetse 
90 
75 
95 
cured to the supports carrying the paper-car 
riage, its armature-lever being connected to 
the shaft on which is pivoted the arm for au 
tomatically releasing the pawl aud dog from 
the rack moving the paper-carriage, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
45. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two telegraphic main 
lines, a branch of the mainine circuit.S nor 
mally open in the transmitter connected to the 
main lines of the receiver at a point beyond 
where they are broken by the commutator S, 
an electro-magnet in one of the main-line cir 
cuits, the armature-level of said electro-mag 
net being connected to the shaft on which is 
pivoted the i-arm for automatically releasing 
the pawl and dog from the rack moving the 
paper-carriage, and a key, l', in said branch 85 
circuit to send prolonged impulses to energize 
said electro-magnet, and operating to release 
the paper-carriages in both the transmitter 
and receiver at any point in their excursions, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
46. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two telegraphic main 
lines, a branch of the main lines normally open 
in the transmitter connected to the main lines 
of the receiver at a point beyond where they 
are broken by the conmutators, and passing 
through an electro magnet secured to supports 
carrying the paper-carriage, said electro-mag 
net being energized by sending prolonged im 
pulses by a key in said circuit, its armature 
actuating a lever through which a square or 
feathered shaft pivoted on the paper-carriage 
freely moves, and arms attached to the ends of 
said shaft - carrying pawls engaging in the 
ratchet-wheels of the feed-rollers and operat 
ing when a key is depressed to feed the paper 
on both transmitter and receiver at any point 
in the excursion of the respective paper car 
riages, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
47. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of the electro-magnet K, Secured to the 
platform carrying the paper-carriage, the ar 
mature-lever k, linked to the arm k", held lat 
erally and sliding freely without revolving on 
its shaft, said shaft being secured between 
bearings Supported on the paper-carriage, arms 
k", and pawls k" on said shaft for feeding the 
paper at any point in its excursion, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. . 
4S. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of the electro-magnetL, secured to the 
platform supporting the paper-carriage, the 
armature L, levera", arma', shaft a, and au 
tomatic releasing device at", substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
49. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a unison device consisting of a fusee, 
u, a latch, it", springs u" u', magnets YY", with 
its armature it", bent lever at', and retracting 
spring t, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
50, The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a circuit-closing device consisting 
- 
IO.) 
I IO 
I I5 
25 
IO 
5 
2 5 
45 
5 5 
 
6. 
IO 
2O. 
25 
35 
45 
-- 
of the differential magnet, XX", with its arma 
ture it", lever u, and spring u", and the pawl 
u", ratchet-wheel it", dog at", circuit. closing 
contacts at 
at', and circuit-springs u, u', t, 
and u', substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
51. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, with an automatic circuit-switch, such 
as described, operated by the recoil movement 
of the paper-carriage to break the main-line 
Circuits and to close a branch circuit, of a 
transversely-traveling paper-carriage, by the 
for Ward movement of which the automatic 
circuit-switch breaks the branch circuit and 
closes the main line, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
52. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, an in 
dexed dial with its circuit-breaker in one line, 
a circuit-closer and differential electro-mag. 
net in said line, a branch circuit of said lines 
closed by an automatic switch, whereby the 
Original main lines are broken, and means, 
Substantially such as described, for revolving 
Said circuit-closer to restore the main lines 
around the switch without restoring the origi 
nal main lines or breaking the branch circuit, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
53. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, an in 
dexed dial with its circuit-breaker in one line, 
a differential electro-magnet and an independ 
ent-coil electro - magnet in branches of the 
main lines, and an automatic double switch, 
whereby the course of the original main lines 
is changed from the escapement, compound 
relay, and differential electro-magnets of a re 
ceiver to said differential electromagnet op 
erating to revolve a circuit-closer to restore 
the main lines around said double switch with 
out restoring the original main lines through 
the same or breaking the branch circuits there. 
of, and said electro-magnet with independent 
coils in Said branch circuits operating to re 
lease the unison-latch of said circuit-closer, 
Substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
54. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of the insulated circuit-springs a 2", 
the metallie bearings 2 &" in electrical con 
nection there with, the insulations & 2", sup 
ported on the transversely-traveling paper 
carriage A', and the insulated bearing-springs 
2 2', secured to the platform A', substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
55. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, an in 
dividualizing circuit-breaker, W, in a branch 
of the main-line circuits normally open in the 
transmitter, the differential electro-magnets 
on the transmitter and receiver, one of the 
coils of each of said electro-magnets being 
brought into circuit with the circuit-breaker 
W through the operation of an automatic 
switch, and a circuit-closer revolved by said 
3. 
75 
65 
printing 
electro-magnets, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
56. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, dif. 
ferential and independent-coil electromagnets 
included in branch circuits of said main lines, 
and an individualizing circuit-closer operated 
by said electro-magnets, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
57. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two telegraphic main 
lines, a double-line-circuit-closing key, b', 
normally open in branches of said main lines, 
and an automatic double switch, O, for con 
necting the main lines to other branch circuits 
and the electro magnets XY, included in the 
latter branch circuits, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
58. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of an incline plane, a ", having a pro 
jecting flange, a', fitting loosely into a notch, 85 
a', the arms a', attached to a sliding dog, a, 
causing a vertical reciprocating movement of 
the paper-carriage without the intervention of 
springs, substantially as described. 
59. The combination, with a printing-tele 
graph, of an automatic device for releasing 
the paper. carriage, consisting of a pivoted 
arm, (t", pins a' a' (t", spring-latch a', and , 
arms a' ('", rigidly secured to the paper-car 
riage A, substantially as described. 
60. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, a key, 
b', normally open in a transmitter in a branch 
of the main lines connected to one of the main 
lines beyond the commuta' or S, the electro 
magnet L in the circuit of said main line, and 
the armature-lever of said electro-magnet con 
nected to an automatic releasing device, as de 
scribed, said electro-magnet, when energized 
by prolonged pulsations through the depres 
sion of said key, operating to release the pa 
per-carriage at any point in its excursion, sub 
stantially as described. 
61. The combination, in a printing - tele 
graph, of a battery and two main lines, a key, 
b", normally open in a transmitter in a branch 
of the main lines, connected to one of the main 
lines beyond the commutator S, the electro 
magnet K in the circuit of said main line, 
and with its armature-lever, link, shaft, and 
pawls, said electro-magnet, when energized by 
prolonged pulsations through said key, oper 
ating to feed the paper step to step to space 
between lines at any point in its excursion, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to the foregoing specification in the presence 
of two subscribing witnesses. 
9O 
95 
IIo 
I I5 
IOO 
JACOB H. LIN VILLE. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs F. ZIEGLER, 
LOUIS H. KUEBLER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351084.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT M. WILSON, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
FOLD ING GATE, 
SPHCIE'TCATION forming part of Letters Patent. No. 351.084, dated October 19, 1886. 
Application filed June 23, 1886. Serial No. 206,039. (No modul.) 
2C) 
25 
70 ?zZZ zof207?a, Z 772azg/ ?207a772* 
Be it known that I, ROBERT M. WILSON, of 
BOSton, in the county of Suffolk and Commom 
Wealth of MaSSachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Folding Gates; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full and exact deScription thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawingS, and 
to the letterS of reference marked thereon, 
making a part of this Specification, in Which 
Figure 1 is a, Side elevation of my improwed 
folding gate extended SO as to close the gate 
Way; R'ig. 2, a Similar elevation, partly in Sec 
tion, of the gate When partly folded to open 
the gateway; F'ig. 8, an elevation of the gate 
5 When completely folded to Open Wide the gate 
Way, and Fig. 4 a detached sectional wiew 
illustrating a modification in the commection 
of the brace-barS with the picketS. 
My invention relates to that claSS of folding 
gateS or gratingS Which are constructed of a 
Series of parallel barS Or pickets connected by 
tranSwerSe hinged barS and connecting-braces, 
So that the paralleliSm of the bars or pickets 
Shall be constantly maintained in all positions 
of the gate. 
It has for itS object to dispenSe with the ne 
ceSSity of auxiliary SupportS resting upon the 
ground or Other extraneouS baSe, and to sim 
plify the construction of the gate and leSSen 
the cost of its manufacture. 
It consists, chiefly, in the combination, with 
a Series of longitudinally-Slotted pickets or 
palings, Of a SWinging brace-bar hiraged to the 
; outer end of each picket  palling, to extend 
thence through the longitudinal SlotS in the 
two adjacent picketS On one Side thereof Said 
bars being SO Shaped aS to permit the picketS 
to close together and inclose and conceal the 
brace-bars, as hereimafter fully described. 
In the accompanying drawingS, A. A repre 
Sent the two end pOStS Or picketS Of the fold 
| 
ing gate, and B BB itS intermediate parallel 
bars or picketS. The picketS are preferably 
made of turbular barS Or rods, but may be of 
solid stripS longitudinally Slotted, aS herein 
after described. . 
To the top and bottom of the outer picket, 
A, and of each picket BB in the gate, a brace 
5? bar, C, is pivoted tO Swing thence into a di 
agonal position inclined toWard the inner post, 
A7, of the gate When the pickets are Spread 
apart and the gate thereby extended. Each 
brace-bar C, thuS pivoted to the top or bot 
tom of a poSt, A., or picket B, is made long 55 
enough to reach, when exteuded at atm augle of 
about forty-five degrees therefroma, to the far 
ther edge of the Second adjacent picket, and 
it is formed with offsetS d d/ at the two points 
in itS_length which, when the bar is extended, 6c 
Shall be about midway between each pair of 
|picketS interSected by it. Each offset (d and 
d' is of a length Sufficient to bring the inner 
edge, e, of the bar above the Offset in a right 
line, which, if extended, shall be outside of 65 
the Outer edge, f, thereof below the Same, while 
each post or picket to Which a brace-bar is 
pivoted is longitudinally Slotted or receSSed 
inwardly from the pi wot G far enough and to 
a Sufficient depth to receive and inclose fully 7c 
So much of the brace aS is included between 
itS pivotal end aud a line draWn to connect 
itS immer and Outer edgeS, e.f, acrOSS itS first 
offset. When the brace C is Sw ung into line 
parallel with Said p0st or picket, as above de- 75 
scribed, the portion thereof projecting by rea,- 
son of itS first offset, d, from the first picket in 
lime parallel therewith, and included between 
the first and Second offsets, is inclosed by or 
within a longitudinal Slot in the opposite face 
of the mext adjacent picket When the picketS 
are closed together, the Slot, being cut entirely 
through to permit the Outer end of the brace 
beyond itS Second offSet to project through it 
and paSS, when the picketS are closed together 
in like manner aS described intO a longitudi 
nal slot formed in the third Succeeding picket. 
The slot in the first picket next to that to Which 
a brace is pivoted, and through which Said 
brace is carried, iS S0 extended aS to permit a, 
movement of the brace tranSwerSely through 
and longitudinally along Said Slot until the 
straight portion of the brace between its two 
offsets is wholly inclOSed within the Slot. The 
second picket beyond that to Which the inner 
end of the brace is pivoted receives the Outer 
free end of the brace, and iS SO Slotted as to 
permit said end to Slide longitudinally therein 
as the picketS are draWn together until that 
portion of the brace beyond itS Second offset, 
d', is folded and inclosed Wholly within the 
slot. The outer end Walls, ? ?, of the Several 
slots, against Which the braceS Strike When the 
gate is fully extended, Serve each as a positive 
3? 
 
 
LO 
4? 
45 
5 
IO 
15 
? 25 
.. 
... 
Stop and a conStant Support for the outer edge 
of each brace, and from their arrangement, as 
described, prevent, a further Separation of the 
|picketS SO SOOm aS the braces have attained am 
angle of forty-five degrees. 
By the use of a double Set of braces pivoted" 
and cot) mected in manner aS described, the ome  
to the upper and the other' to the lower ends 
of the pOStS and picketS Of the gate, each set 
tO incline at a corresponding angle from the 
tOp and the bottom, respectively, toward an 
intermediate dentral line, not only is an abSO 
lute paralleliSm of the postS and pickets main 
tained during each mowement and in each po 
Sition thereof, but a longitudimal play of . the 
|pickets, Or of either of them, is prevented, and 
the Whole are firmly and properly braced and 
Stayed to constitute an efficient gate which 
Shall be Self-supporting without the need of 
 auxiliary StayS, prOps, Or SupportS betwee 
the tWO ends thereof. 
~ 
The outer free end of each of the lower set 
of braceS may be notched on itS Outer edge, 
aS Shown at ', Fig. 2, -to engage the edge of 
the end Wall of the slot in the picket through 
which it playS when the pickets are Spread 
fully apart. I contemplate, also, in the com 
Struction of heavy gates, pivoting the outer 
end of each brace to a block, K. (See Fig. 4,) 
fitted to Slide freely longitudinally within the 
longitudinal receSS or tubular chamber in the 
|picket, although Such am attachment is mot 
eSSential; alSO the elimployment of tWo hori 
ZOntal tierS of hinged tie-bars, M M, pi woted 
to each of the pickets A and A', and to the 
central picket, the two_tierS being connected" 
by wertical barS N, pi woted to the hinged joints 
of the barS M M, So as to couple them, the tie 
' barS being of Such length as that they will re 
main at an angle to each other when' the gate 
is fully extended, (See F'ig. 1,) in readiness to 
fold freely aS the gate cloSeS, in manner as 
illustrated in H'ig. 8. 
The outer_picket, A., of the gate may be 
prowided With a friction-roller, I, at the foot 
thereof, or other equiwalemt | Support, which 
will permit, itS free mowement to and from the 
inner pOSt, the latter being fixed in the cus 
 
tomary manner.  
My folding gate, constructed as described, 
admitS of being drawn out or" folded in to 
open and cloSe it, one bar' or picket at a time, 
as illustrated in H'ig. 2. In the operation 
thereof the free .. ends of the diagonal braces 
C C Slide up and down in the slots in the 
|picketS B B, tO Which they extend, and are 
prewented from drawing out therefrom by 
the oppOSite action of the tWo setS of braces 
inclining tOWard each other, each set being 
limited in movement by the bearing of the 
outer edge of the brace-bars included therein, 
with the .. endS ? ? of the SiotS in the pickets 
through Which Said brace-barS extend, the 
length of the SlotS being, aS described, So pro 
portioned aS to prewent a further expansion 
of the gate 'When the picketS have been spread 
apart uniformly to the required distance, and 
~ 
35 
45 
55 
 
351,084 
75 
* 
... } and in the line of their movementS. 
| thereupon operate to lock and Support all the 
parts, the interSection of the picketS by the 
brace-bar's Ser'wing to firmly brace and Sup 
port them laterally aS Well as longitudinally 
AS the 
brace-bar's C C fold into the longitudinal SlotS 
or recesses in the picketS B B, SO aS tO per 
mit the pickets to be brought closely together, 
the gate will fold copmpactly into the Smallest 
pOSSible compaSS. 
; ... I am aware that gateS have heretOfore been 
constructed consisting of Series of upright pick 
ets having croSSed connecting-braceS pivoted 
to the picketS at two or more central pointS, 
and hawing upper and lower pointS of con*  
nection formed by pinS or Studs arranged to 
Slide vertically within Side grOOweS or SlotS 
formed in the picketS, the picketS being ar 
ranged to slide upon a baSe-Support laid acrOSS 
the gate-opening; but my invention differS 
therefrom in that the braceS do not crOSS each 
other, are not pivoted to the picketS at tWo 
or more points, but each at One end only, and 
are not fitted with pinS or rivetS Sliding in 
grooweS in the picketS to retain them in place, 
but are left free at their outer ends, and in the ' 
fact, also, that the picketS are, When placed up 
'right', 'Supported in their central position with 
their parallelism unchanged Without the need 
of a separate base-Support Or track acrOSS the 
gate-opening. '' 
~ 
9? 
95 
I claim as my invention 
1. A folding gate Or grating constructed of rCO 
a Series of parallel mowable picketS, each 
formed With a Series of longitudinal SlotS or 
recesses therein, in combination with brace 
bars pivoted, each at one end. Only, to the op 
posite ends of each picket, to extend thence, 
when the picketS are Spread apart, diagonally 
With an imWard inclination, each through a Slot 
in the mext picket and into a Slot or receSS in the 
third picket, Said barS being Severally formed 
with lateral offsets between the pickets, where 
by when the picketS are cloSed together the 
brace-bars shall be brought into parallel lines 
With .the pickets, and the first length of each 
between itS'piwot ' and first offset Shall be in 
closed within the slot in the picket to which 
it is pivoted, itS Second length between itS 
first and Second ffSetS Shall project laterally 
into and through the Slof in the Second picket 
and be covered thereby, and itS Outer length 
beyond the Second offset shall project laterally 
into and be cowered by the  Slot in the third 
picket, all Substantially in the manner and for 
the purpose herein Set forth. 
2. The combination, in a folding gate, with 
a longitudinally-Slotted picket and with brace 
bars pivoted to each end thereof and formed 
with offsetS in itS length tOfold laterally against 
the picket and into a Slot therein, of a Second 
parallel picket longitudinally Slotted to per 
mit the brace-barS to paSS laterally through 
the Same, and a third parallel picket Slotted 
to receive the ends of Said interSecting brace 
bars, Substantially in the manner and for the 
purpose herein Set forth. 
I IO 
I T5 
IL 2O 
351.084 
8. The combination, with a tunbular or lon 
gitudinally-receSSed picket in a folding gate, 
of a block Sliding length WiSe withim Said picket 
and a brace-bar piwoted to Said Sliding block, 
5 Substantially im the mammer and for the put'- 
pOSe herein Set forth. 
4. The combination, in a folding gate, of a 
Series of, longitudinally-Slotted pickets, fold 
ing brace-bars pivoted to each end thereof and 
rO formed with offsetS to permit the brace-bars 
to fold into the Slotted pickets, and tWo tiers 
of transwerSe tie-barS coupled by connecting 
bars, which are pivoted to the joints of the 
tie-bars, all Substantially in the manner and 
for the purpose herein Set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this Specification in the presence of tWo Sub 
Scribing WitmeSSeS. 
IR, M. WILSON. 
WitneSSeS: 
EDWIN H. JOSE, 
W. H. BAKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351185.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 35ll 85. 
- 
/ 
/6 
as 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
H. A. MANSFIELD, 
FIRE EXTINGUISHER 
Patented 00t, 19 
1886. 
`N . .- 
No.s? 
N?s(a)=SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
&   
No.ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
/7 v/2/7 747 - , 
a. 
a 
al 
y 
HE 
a. 
======No. 
N. PETERS. Poto-Lithographer. Wasli. 
oil. . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY A. MANSFIELD, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
HALF TO HENRY M. HARRINGTON, OF SAME PLACE. 
FIRE-EXTINGUISHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 351,185, dated October 19, 1886. 
Application filed May 17, 1886. Serial No. 202,309. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY A. MANSFIELD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Bridgeport, in the county of Fairfield and 
5 State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvenments in Fire-Extin 
guishers; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
IO skilled in the art to which it appertains to make 
and use the same. 
My invention relates more especially to the 
class of fire-extinguishers which are adapted 
to be carried about by hand, and has for its 
I5 object to simplify and improve the details of 
construction without increasing the cost of 
manufacture, so that the device will be dura 
ble, capable of remaining charged for a long 
period of time without its efficiency becoming 
2O impaired, instantaneous and certain in opera 
tion, and adapted to be recharged an unlimit 
ed number of times. 
With these ends in view, I have devised the 
simple and novel construction, of which the 
25 following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
numbers being used to indicate the several 
parts of the device. 
It has heretofore been a serious objection to 
3o this class of devices that owing to inherent de 
fects of construction they have become wholly 
unreliable after remaining charged for a few 
months. In numerous instances serious loss 
has been occasioned by their refusing to oper 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a central longi 
tudinal section of the generating-cylinder with 
the chemical reservoir and discharge-pipe in 
elevation; Fig. 2, an enlarged sectional view 
4O of both generating-cylinder and chemical res 
ervoir; Fig. 3, a section corresponding with 
Fig. 2 on the line acac, Fig. 4, a transverse Sec 
tion on the line y if, looking down; Fig. 5, a 
similar section on the line & 2, looking down; 
45 Fig. 6, a plan view of the cap, the operating 
lever being shown as in the opened position; 
Fig. 7, a similar view in the closed position, 
and Fig. 8 an enlarged plan view of the chemi 
cal reservoir detached. 
35 ate at all. 
 
Similar numbers denote the same parts in 5o 
all the figures. 
It is of course well understood that this 
class of fire-extinguishers are charged by fill 
ing the generating-cylinder with some suita 
ble chemical solution, and filling the reser 
voir with another chemical solution, and that 
the device is operated by allowing the chemi 
cal to escape from the reservoir into the gen 
erating-chamber, the rationale being that a 
great volume of carbonic acid gas is generated, 
which finds its escape through the discharge 
tube, carrying quantities of fluid with it. 
1 indicates the generating-cylinder, which 
is preferably made of wrought iron or brass, 
and screw-threaded at opposite ends to re 
ceive a cap, 2, and bottom 3. 
4 is a discharge-tube, which extends from 
near the bottom of the generating-cylinder in 
to the cap and communicates with an opening, 
5, therein. 
6 is a discharge-nozzle, which is tapped in 
to the cap and communicates with opening 5. 
7 is a chemical reservoir, which is prefera 
bly made of vitreous material, as glass or por 
celain, and is provided at its top with a slot, 
8, for a purpose presently to be explained, and 
at its bottom with an opening, 9, near the side, 
as shown, through which the chemical in the 
reservoir escapes into the generating-cylinder 
when the reservoir is in the opened position. 
The reservoir is held in place within the gen 
erating-cylinder by a bracket, 10, which is 
provided with a curved arm, 11, partially sur 
rounding the reservoir, and a slot, 25, engaged 
loosely by a lug, 26, upon movable rest 27. 
The rest is provided with a valve, 12, which 
is adapted to close the opening in the bottom 
of the reservoir. This valve consists, prefer 
ably, of a solid piece of rubber, which is se 
curely attached to the rest. 
13 is a stump upon the rest, which I use as an 
additional support for the chemical reservoir. 
As the reservoir rests partially on the stump, 
there is less friction upon the curved arm, so 
that the reservoir will turn easily in use. 
14 is a rod, which is tapped into the cap and 
extends downward through the rest, the lower 
end thereof being screw-threaded. A nut, 15, 
90 
55 
95 
351,185 
IO 
a 
eSeWO. 
at the lower end of this rod, permits the rest 
to be drawn up close to the bottom of the chemi 
cal reservoir, thus causing the valve to close 
opening 9 so perfectly as to insure that there 
will be no leakage of the chemical within the 
16 is an operating-shaft, which passes through 
the cap and is provided at its lower end with 
a cross-piece, 17, which engages slot 8 in the 
chemical reservoir. 
18 is an operating-lever at the outer end of 
the shaft. 
19 is a recess in the under side of the cap 20, 
packing in said recess, and 21 a boss upon the 
shaft which holds the packing in the recess, 
thus preventing leakage at the top should the 
cylinder be placed in other than a vertical po 
Sition. 
22 is a cap which covers the discharge-noz 
zle when the device is not in use. 
23 is a handle engaging ears upon cap 2 for 
convenience in transportation. 
In order to avoid the possibility of any pre 
cipitated chemicals getting into the discharge 
tube I have provided a strainer, 28, which 
may be made of wire or perforated sheet metal, 
and is placed over the lower end of the dis 
charge - pipe. This strainer keeps the dis 
charge-pipe clear at all times, no matter in 
what position the device may be placed, so 
that no clogging can take place to affect its 
action. 
To charge the device the cap is removed and 
the chemical reservoir with it. The reservoir 
is filled with proper chemical solution, and 
then turned, so that valve 12 engages opening 
9, nut 15 being tightened up to close the valve 
firmly into place. The generating-chamber is 
then filled, or nearly so, with the other chemi 
cal and the cap 2 screwed back into place. 
Cap 22 is then screwed upon the discharge 
nozzle, and the device is ready for use when 
occasion requires. 
To operate the device cap 22 is removed and 
the operating-lever turned in toward the left. 
As the cross-piece upon this lever is in engage 
ment with slot 8 in the top of the reservoir 
the latter must turn when the handle is moved. 
It is only necessary to move the reservoir suf 
ficiently to carry opening 9 away from the 
valve. This permits the contents of the chemi 
cal reservoir to pass into the generating-cyl 
inder instantly, thus generating carbonic-acid 
gas, which finds its escape with the fluid 
through the discharge-nozzle. 
It will be seen that the parts are so construct 
ed that none of them can be affected by the 
chemicals ordinarily used, and that instanta 
neous action cannot fail to take place the mo 
ment lever 18 is moved. In order to prevent 
the possibility of this lever becoming dis 
placed in transportation or from any other 
cause, I have provided a spring, 24, upon the 
top of the cap, which engages said lever, hold 
ing it firmly against movement in either di 
rection until the spring is pressed down. 
It will be apparent that the various details 
7o 
of construction may be varied within reason 
able limits without departing from the spirit 
of my invention. 
- 
I claim 
1. In a fire-extinguisher, a generating-cyl 
inder having a discharge-pipe, and an operat 
ing-shaft having a cross-piece at itslower end, 
in combination with a chemical reservoir hav- 75 
ing a slot, 8, engaged by said cross piece, an 
opening at its opposite end, and a rest provided 
with a valve adapted to engage said Opening. 
2. In a fire-extinguisher, a chemical reser 
voir having a slot, 8, at one end and an open- 8o 
ing at its other end, in combination with a 
rest, whereby said reservoir is supported, and 
which is provided with a valve to engage said 
opening, and an operating-shaft having a cross 
piece adapted to engage slot 8, whereby the 85 
reservoir may be turned to remove the open 
ing from the valve. 
3. In a fire-extinguisher, a rotating chem 
ical reservoir having an opening, 9, at one end, 
in combination with a vertically-movable rest, 9o 
whereby said reservoiris supported, and which 
is provided with a valve adapted to close said 
opening, a threaded rod, 14, which passes 
through said rest, and a nut upon said rod, 
whereby the valve is forced tightly against the 95 
reservoir after the latter has been turned into 
position. 
4. In a fire-extinguisher, bracket 10 and rest 
27, having valve 12, in combination with a 
chemical cylinder having an opening adapted IOO 
to be closed by said valve, a slot, 8, and an 
operating-shaft having a cross-piece adapted 
to engage said slot. 
5. In a fire-extinguisher, the cap having a 
recess, 19, packing, and an operating-shaft IOS 
having a boss, whereby the packing is held in 
place, and a cross-piece, 17, in combination 
with rotating chemical reservoir having an 
opening, 9, and a slot across its top which is 
engaged by the cross-piece, whereby said res- IIo 
ervoir may be turned to operate the device. 
6. The operating-shaft having lever 18 and 
cross-piece 17, in combination with a rotating 
chemical reservoir having an opening, 9, and 
a slot, 8, which is engaged by said cross-piece, I (5. 
a rest for supporting the reservoir, and a 
spring, 24, which locks the lever in the closed 
position. 
7. The operating-shaft having cross-piece 
17, and the chemical reservoir having slot.8 I2O 
and opening 9, in combination with a movable. 
rest having a valve adapted to engage said 
opening, a threaded rod adapted to pass 
through said rest, and a nut engaging the rod, 
whereby the valve is pressed against the open- I25 
ling. 
-- 
8. In a fire-extinguisher, a chemical reser 
voir made of vitreous material and provided 
with means for engagement, as a slot across 
its top, and with an opening in its bottom, near I3O 
the sides, for the purpose set forth, in combi 
nation with a valve adapted to close said open 
ing, and an operating device-for example, a 
lever-having a cross-piece to engage the slot, 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
s 
351,185 
3 
whereby the reservoir may be rotated to dis- 
charge its contents. 
9. The generating-cylinder rest 27, having 
Valve 12, and a discharge-tube having a strain- 
5 er, 28, to prevent precipitated chemicals from 
entering the tube, in combination with chem- 
ical reservoir 7, having slot 8 and operating- 
shaft 16, having cross-piece 17, whereby the 
reservoir is turned away from the valve. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in Io 
presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY A. MANSFIELD. 
Witnesses: 
A. M. WOOSTER, 
C. E. RUGGLES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351285.txt	(No Model.) 
A. H. RITCHIE, 
MACHINE FOR THE REDUCTION OF W00D TO PAPER PULP, 
No. 351,285. 
Patented Oct. 19, 1886. 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
3.2%z 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
-1-e 
S S SS S 
INVENTOR 
Yai 
ATTOR//EYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. H. RITCHIE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
MACHINE FOR THE REDUCTION OF WooD TO PAPER-PULP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 351,285, dated October 19, 1886. 
Application filed August 25, 1885. Serial No. 175,275. (No model.) 
To all whon, it in aly concern. 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER. H. 
RITCHIE, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Machines 
for the Reduction of Wood to Paper-Pulp, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates, primarily, to the con 
struction and arrangement of the grinder or 
grinding-wheel, and, secondly, to the placing 
of the feed boxes or hoppers to conform to the 
shape of the grinder, as will be explained. 
My invention consists in forming a wheel 
with beveled edges or corners, said beveled 
portions being sufficiently large to constitute 
grinding-surfaces, and in placing the emely or 
other grinding material upon these beveled 
surfaces and upon the periphery of the wheel. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
grinder whose grinding-surfaces are less lia 
ble to crack and fly off than those which em 
ploy broad peripheries with the emery or other 
grinding material on them alone. For in 
stance, in this class of machines now in use 
grinding-surfaces sixteen or seventeen inches 
wide are employed. These are liable to, and in 
fact often do, break and fly off, owing to their 
great breadth. By dividing them up, as I do, 
and making the different grinding-surfaces 
about twelve inches wide, this difficulty is 
avoided. 
Anothe)' advantage of my lilachine arises 
from the fact that the hoppel's or feed-boxes 
may be placed farther apart, the result being 
that the grinder may be thoroughly cleaned 
by means of the water between the different 
boxes, thus preventing regrinding of the pulp. 
The boxes are arranged in gangs transversely 
of the gl'inder, and correspond in number to 
the number of grinding-surfaces. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, Fig. 
ure 1 represents an end elevation of the grinder, 
with portions of the inclosing-casing and the 
hoppers cut away. Fig. 2 is a sectional view 
on the linea a, Fig. 1. 
The grinder or emery-wheel A is provided 
with a flat portion, A", on the periphery and 
beveled portions A* on both sides. These 
Io 
15 
2 5 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
three parts constitute the grinding-surfaces of 
the wheel; but they are not limited to this 
number, as they may be increased to four, five, 
or more without departing from the Spirit of 
my invention. 
The grinding-wheel turns on a suitably 
journaled axle, B, and is inclosed by a casing, 
C. The bottom of the casing may be arranged 
in any suitable manner for withdrawing the 
pulp. Resting upon and extending into the 
casing nearly as fair as the grinding-wheel are 
the hoppers or feed-boxes D D' D, E E E, 
and FFF". They are set in perpendicular 
positions corresponding to the grinding-Sur 
faces against which they are set. 
The hop 
pers are provided with doors G, into which 
the wood, & 3., to be reduced is fed, and with 
pistons and piston-rods H, to which pressure 
may be applied in any suitable manner. 
Water-pipes J open into the casing, and are 
so arranged that the grinding-wheel may be 
flooded just after it passes from beneath a 
hopper, so that all pulp may be washed from 
it and the aforesaid wheel or grinding-surface 
may be perfectly clear and clean by the time 
it reaches another hopper. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new therein, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for the reduction of wood to 
pulp, a grinder or grinding wheel having three 
or more grinding surfaces, as set for'th and 
2. In a macline for the reduction of wood to 
pulp, the wheel having grinding surfaces on 
the periphery and on the beveled portions, as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination of a grinder and the 
hoppers or feed-boxes arranged in gangs or 
rows transversely of the aforesaid grinder. 
4. The combination of the casing having one 
or more row's of hoppers or feed-boxes set into 
it, as described, and the grindling-wheel hav 
ing a grinding-surface on its periplery and 
grinding-surfaces on its beveled politions, as 
shown and described. 
shown. 
- 
ALEXANDER. H. RITCHTE. 
Witnesses: 
HERBERT KNIGHT, 
WMI, E. KNIGIT, 
55 
75 
SO 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351386.txt	(No Model.) 
C. M. LUN GREN. 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 351,386, 
 
 
REGENERATIVE GAS BURNER. 
Patented 00t. 26, 1886. 
 
S.i V 
wa 
 
 
 
 
g 3: 
2 
-4 
67 
2 
e 
a 
S. 
a. 
/ 
C 
| 
s 
% 
T. dez 
i 
Sell 
a 
23 
\ 
J12Z22esses." 
SS 
2 
Z72ce27722 : 
27, p 
-Z57 / 2's were 16 E. 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithograph.cf. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
C. M. LUN GREN. 
RECENERATIVE CAS BURNER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 351,386, 
 
Patented 00t 
26, 1886. 
JW2722 esses. 
162 2. 
1-2-2. 
~ 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES M. LUNGREN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR, BY MIESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE SIEMENS LUNGREN COMPANY. 
REG ENERATIVE GAS BURNER, 
SFE:C: EICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 351,386, dated October 26, 1886. 
Application filed June 26, 1884. 
Serial No. 136,052. (No model.) 
lC 
To all whon, it may concern.' 
Be it known that I, CHARLES MI. LUNGREN, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Gas-Burner's, of 
Which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to regenerative gas 
burners, and more especially to a form de 
Scribed in another application for patent here-- 
tofore filed by me, and patented June 24, 1884, 
No. 300, S79, and consisting of an inverted gas 
burner, a flame plate or surface over which 
the flame is directed, and an upwardly-extend 
ing flue for the escape of the products of com 
bustion. 
My invention consists in certain combina 
tions of parts and peculiarities of construction 
designed to produce better combustion and to 
give greater luminosity to the flame, which 
combinations and constructions will be herein 
described in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, and will be then specified in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical central section of a burner contain 
ing the improvements herein claimed. Figs. 
2, 3, 4 are vertical Sections of burners, show 
ing modified ways of carrying out the inven 
tion. Fig. 5 is a cross-section through the gas 
burner tubes. Fig. 6 is a horizontal cross 
section illustrating the arrangement of the air 
ducts or passages conveying air to the root of 
the flame. 
G, Fig. 1, indicates a gas-tube by which the 
burner is supported, and which conveys gas 
to the gas-burner. At the lower end of said 
tube is a gas-chamber closed at the bottom by 
a suitable plate, G', while from said chamber 
extend downwardly a series of tubes, g (), 
(shown in cross-section, Fig. 5,) which are open 
at their lower ends, and are properly arranged 
to project aflame over a flame plate or director, 
D, of preferably porcelain or other refractory 
material. 
Instead of a series of tubes, the bui'ner may 
consist of an annular chamber having open 
ings either in the lower edge or in its outer 
Wall near the bottom, as shown in my previ 
ous application. The plate D may be of any 
desired form or shape, and I do not limit my 
self in this respect. It may be supported by 
its lower edge, as shown, or by the top, and 
it may be a separate piece, as shown, or be 
formed by contracting the lower end of the 
air-shell A. A button or deflecting-surface, 
B, of any suitable kind, placed below the flame 
and suspended by a rod, R, serves to deflect 
air outwardly against the flame and the flame 
outward and over the plate D. Air is deliv 
ered to the root of the flame and On one or both 
sides thereof through the chamber or tube in 
which the tubes of are contained. The passage 
for the egress of the flame and air is made suf 
ficiently contracted to cause the air-current to 
come into direct and full contact with the flame 
at its root. 
A. A? indicate two shells or chambers, one 
within the other, and connected by a series of 
radiating passages, a ct, as indicated in Fig. 6. 
The outer shell, A, is provided with a down 
ward extension, C, for causing the flames and 
products of combustion to sweep inward away 
from the globe C, which latter is hung from 
and closes the mouth of the tube A. The tube 
A supports the chimney F, through which the 
products of combustion and heated air escape. 
after circulating around the cross-tubes a (, 
and heating the air conveyed through the lat 
ter to the chamber formed by the tube A', and 
through the latter to the root of the flame. 
A' indicates an outer shell or hood depend 
ing from the shell A, and surrounding the 
Outer ends of the tubes at (t. 
Sindicates a reflector hung from A'. Air is 
brought to the tubes ( a through the hood A'. 
In order to do away with the tendency to 
redness or want of luminosity in the body and 
tip of the flane which may exist when the 
burner is constructed as thus far described, so 
that the passages at the root of the flame are 
arranged to cause the air to strike the flame 
fully, I provide an additional air-supply for the 
body and tip of the flame through the bottom 
or top of the globe by the devices to be now 
described. 
Hindicates a tube, which extends through 
an opening in the bottom of the globe, and is 
hung from the rod R by any suitable means, 
or is otherwise supported. Its upper end opens IOO 
90 
75 
95 
2 5 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
351,386 
beneath the deflecting-plate B, and between 
its flaring mouth and the under surface of the 
plate B air is delivered to the body of the 
flame. The additional air thus stipplied is 
heated in its passage to the flame through the 
chamber or conduit, one wall or surface of 
which is formed by said deflecting-plate. The 
bottom of the tube His partially closed by a 
button upon the rod R, which button may be 
Screwed up and down to adjust the amount of 
the additional air-supply thus provided. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 2 the ad 
ditional air is supplied between the edges of 
an opening in the bottom of the globe and the 
edges of a glass-plate,K, closing said opening. 
The edges of the plate or of the opening, or 
both, are made irregular or provided with suit 
able crimps, corrugations, grooves, or slots, to 
permit air to enter in limited or regulated 
quantity. What heat is imparted to the ad 
ditional air-supply thus provided comes from 
contact with the sides of the globe. 
In Figure 3 the additional air-supply is ad 
mitted at the top of the globe, and is heated by 
the shell C, through which latter the heated 
products of combustion pass. The globe is 
hung from a perforated ring, E, suitably at 
tached to or supported by the shell A, and 
the air enters through said perforations. The 
shade S is in this instance hung from the same 
ring, so as to assist in collecting and deliver 
ing the air through said openings, and to also 
prevent back-draft or tendency of the flames 
to escape through said openings. 
For this 
purpose the shade preferably extends below 
the level of the flame. Instead of being a 
shade, the part S. might be of glass or other 
translucent material. 
In the modification of my invention shown 
in Fig. 4 the additional air supplied to the 
body of the flame is not only heated by the es 
caping products of combustion, but also by 
contact with the under side of the deflecting 
plate or body, as in Fig. 1. In this instance 
the deflector B is formed at the bottom of a 
tube or shell, B, contained within the burner 
and connected at its top with the chamber 
formed by shell A', so that a portion of the 
air entering through the tubes at a, and heated 
by the escaping products of combustion, may 
pass through the tube. B and be delivered to 
the body and tips of the flame. The tube or 
shell B is hung from the rod R, ol' supported 
in any other suitable manner in the position 
shown. In the drawings it is shown as sup 
ported by a nut, b, which is provided with ra 
diating arms attached to the interior of the 
tube B, and is adjustable on the rod so as to 
vary the position of the deflecting plate or 
Surface B, formed upon or attached to its low 
er end. 
If desired, the gas-burner' may be made with 
out any air-passage through it, and the whole 
of the air to supply the under surface of the 
flame may be admitted through the base of the 
globe, or part of it through the base and a 
portion through the top. 
- 
I do not limit myself to any particular form 
of gas tip or burner, nor to any particular 
shape or configuration of flame plate or Sur 
face over which the flames are made to sweep. 
The construction and arrangement may be va 
ried in other ways without departing from the 
spirit of my invention, and the arrangement 
shown in the various figures of drawings may 
be used in various combinations for the Same 
bulner. 
I am aware of the English Patents No.3,742, 
July 31, 1883, and No. 4,109, August 28, 1882, 
and Imake no claim to the constructions show ll 
therein. 
What I claim as my invention is-- 
1. The combination of an inverted annular 
gas-burner, an air-chamber surrounding the 
burner and provided with vertical walls, said 
chamber having an inlet for air at its upper 
end and an outlet for air at its lower end, an 
escape-flue surrounding the air-chamber and 
provided with vertical walls, a flame-director 
formed by an outward and upward continua 
tion of the outer wall of the air-chamber, ter 
minating in line with the vertical wall of the 
escape-fue, leaving a horizontal passage for 
the flames and products of combustion be 
tween the end of said flame-director and the 
end of said escape-flue, and an inclosing-globe, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination of an inverted annular 
gas-burner, an air-chamber surrounding the 
burner and provided with vertical walls, said 
chamber being connected with the outer air at 
its upper end by passages which lead across 
the escape-flue, and provided with an outlet 
for air at its lower end, an escape-flue Sur 
rounding the air-chamber and provided With 
vertical walls, a flame-director formed by an 
outward and upward continuation of the Outer 
wall of the air-chamber, terminating in line 
with the vertical wall of the escape-flue, leav 
ing a horizontal passage for the flames and 
products of combustion between the end of 
said flame-director and the end of said escape 
flue, and an inclosing-globe, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination of an inverted annular 
gas-burner, an air-chamber surrounding the 
burner and provided with vertical walls, said 
chamber having an inlet for air at its upper 
end and an outlet for air at its lower end, an 
escape-flue surrounding the air-chamber and 
provided with vertical walls, a flame-director 
formed by an outward and upward continua 
tion of the outer wall of the air-chamber, ter 
minating in line with the vertical wall of the 
escape-fue, leaving a horizontal passage for 
the flames and products of combustion between 
the end of said flame-director and the end of 
said escape-flue, an inclosing-globe, and air 
inlets arranged between the outer edges of the 
globe and the escape-flue, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
4. The combination of an inverted annular 
gas-burner having downwardly-directed ori 
fices for the emission of gas at its lower end 
25 
35 
45 
So 
65 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
ISIO 
I I5 
5 
Io 
- I5 
 
35l.,386 
3 
O 
and a deflecting-button beneath its lower end, 
an air-chamber surrounding the burner, said 
chamber having an outlet for air at its lower 
end and connected at its upper end to an air 
conduit leading to it from the outer air across 
the escape-flue, an escape-flue, the lower end 
of which surrounds the upper part of the air 
chamber, an inclosing - globe, and air-inlets 
arranged between the outer edge of the globe 
and the escape-flue, substantially as specified. 
5. The combination of an inverted annular 
gas-burner having downwardly-directed ori 
fices for the emission of gas at its lower end, 
an air-chamber surrounding the burner, said 
chamber having attached to its lower end a 
flame-director springing from its extreme low 
er end and formed integral with the sides there 
of, said chamber being connected at its upper 
end to an air-conduit leading to it from the 
outer air across the escape-flue, an escape-flue, 
the lower end of which surrounds the upper 
part of the air-chamber, an inclosing-globe, 
and air-inlets arranged between the outer edge 
of the globe and the escape-flue, substantially 
as specified. 
6. The combination of an inverted annular 
gas-burner composed of a ring of tubes open 
at their lower ends for the emission of gas, an 
air - chamber surrounding the burner, said 
chamber having an outlet for air at its lower 
end and being connected at its upper end to 
an air-conduit leading to it from the outer air 
across the escape-flue, the lower end of which 
surrounds the upper part of the air-chamber, 
an inclosing-globe, and air - inlets arranged 
between the outer edge of the globe and the 
escape-flue, substantially as specified. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 23d day of 
June, A. D. 1884. 
CHARLES M. LUNGREN. 
Witnesses: 
THOs. TooMEY, 
J. F. COFFIN. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351486.txt	(Model.) 
No. 351,486, 
A, BOEKER, 
WICKER CASE FOR BOTTIES. 
77 
Zzz-Z, 
A 
 
i 
t 
5% 
s 
s a 
2 
t 
tv/ 
242 a 
727-zzzzz7-Z2 
7722.97z-Zeezer 
y Zacy4 rers 
f7ez7s. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
N. PEERs. Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTON BOEKER, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
WCKER CASE FOR BOTTLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 351,486, dated October 26, 1886. 
Application filed January 25, 1886. Serial No. 180,692. (A?odel.) 
... O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ANTON BOEKER, of the 
city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have 
invented a certain new and useful Wicker Case 
5 for Bottles, &c., of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing part of this specification, and in which - 
Figure 1 is a front view with parts broken 
out. Fig. 2 is a vertical section at 22, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a horizontal section at 33, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a bottom view. 
This is a wicker case to contain bottles, &c., 
which can be removed from the case. 
5 A is the bottom, which I prefer to make of 
wood. Beneath the bottom pass two wires, 
BC, at right angles to each other, said wires 
being preferably let into the bottom and held by 
the staples D. These wires Band C are carried 
up to the top of the body E, beside or in place 
of four of the ribs F, upon which the wicker 
work of willow or other material, G, is woven. 
The upper ends of these wires are turned over 
the upper edge of the body, forming loops or 
25 eyes b, b, and c, respectively. The loop or 
eyeb' forms the lower member of the hinge by 
which the lid His connected to the body, the 
upper member, i, of the hinge being formed 
upon one end of the Wire I, which forms one of 
the ribs, passing through the apex of the lid 
and to the front edge, where it is formed into 
a loop, constituting the haspi, and which en 
gages over a loop, b, formed in the wire B. 
Thus it will be seen that when the hasp is en 
gaged on the loop b there is continuous wire 
connection around the case, beneath the bot 
tom, and over the apex of the lid by means of 
the wires B and I. The wires Chave formed 
on them loops c', constituting ears, to which 
4O. are connected the ends of the bail J, so that 
35 
there is continuous wire-connection around the 
bail and beneath the bottom of the case by the 
wires J and C. The bail has a handle, J'. 
K is a bottle contained in the case. At L. 
are springs or soft pads upon which the bot- 45 
tle rests. These springs may be composed of 
spiral wire, as shown in Fig. 2, or of some solid 
elastic substance-such as cork or india-rub 
ber-as shown in Fig. 3. 
made fast. 
M is a padlock, by which the lid may be 5O 
I claim as my invention 
1. A case consisting of a body, E, of Wicker 
work, bottom A, lid H., of wicker-work, Wire 
B, threaded through the body and under the 55 
bottom, having a loop, b, near the top of the 
body, and eyes b b' turned over the body, Wire 
I, threaded through the lid, having an eye, i. 
threaded through the eye band turned under 
the lid, and a loop, i, receiving the loop b, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. A case consisting of a body, E, of wicker 
work, solid bottom A, wire B, threaded through 
the body and under the bottom, having a loop, 
b", near the top of the body, and eyes bb' 65 
turned over the body, wire C, at right angles 
to the wire B, threaded through the body and 
under the bottom, having ears c' c' formed 
therein near the top of the body, and eyes C c 
turned over the body, a bail, J, secured to the 7o 
ears, a lid, H., of wicker-work, and a wire, I, 
threaded through the lid, having all eye, i, 
threaded through the eyeb' and turned under 
the lid, and- a loop, t, receiving the loop b, 
substantially as shown and described. 
ANTON BOEKER. 
Witnesses: 
SAML. KNIGHT, 
GEO. H. KNIGHT. 
w 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351586.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 351,586, 
D. EISOLT. 
'. EXTENSION CHAMFER KNIFE. 
Patented 00t, 26, 1886. 
 
 
W 
2222222. 
-27 Patsy (4-6-vs. 
-zzzzze. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DEMUs EISOLT, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN. 
EXTENSION CHAMFER-KNIFE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 351,586, dated October 26, 1886. 
Application filed May 18, 1886. Serial No. 202,497. 
(No model.) 
15 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DEMUs EISOLT, of Mil 
waukee, in the county of Milwaukee and State 
of Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Extension Chamfer 
Knives; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof. 
My invention relates to implements for 
Io chamfering kegs or barrels; and it consists in 
a hand-tool made extensible and adjustable 
to the required length, as will be more fully 
Set forth hereinafter. 
In the drawings, Figure. 1 is a perspective 
view of my said tool extended, and Figs. 2 
and 3 are details. 
My device consists, primarily, of two parts, 
A and B, the former consisting of the straight 
parts a and a', united by the oblique bent 
parta, all cast or otherwise solidly formed in 
one piece, while the part B consists of the 
similarly-bent parts b b' b, exactly corre 
sponding to the part A, so as to slide thereon, 
and having, in addition, the upwardly - ex 
tended part b, terminating in a shank at 
right angles to its length to receive the han 
dle B, while the handle A of the part A is 
driven on the shank of said part in the direc 
tion of its length. At the end of the part B 
3o nearest the handle of A is a downwardly-pro 
jecting loop, c, secured to B to receive A, 
while at the opposite end of Athere is an up 
wardly-projecting loop, c, secured thereto to 
receive B. C is another loop, secured to the 
35 portion a of the part A adjacent to its bent 
portion a, and receiving also the portion b of 
the part B. This loop has a screw-threaded 
perforation on top to receive a set-screw, C, 
whereby the parts A and B may be held rig 
4o idly together after receiving the desired ad 
justment. 
My device is designed to chamfer the barrel 
or keg after it is headed, and in operation the 
pivot-screw D is pressed into the barrel or 
45 keg head after the desired adjustment of the 
parts A and B has been secured, and the tool 
used after the ordinary manner of a common 
non-extensible chamfer - knife. In order to 
secure still further adjustment the portion a 
5o of the part A is provided with a series of 
screw - threaded perforations, d d, and the 
 
55 
1. In a hand-tol for chamfering barrels, 75 
screw-threaded end d of the pivot-screw D is 
screwed into either one of them in accordance 
with the adjustment desired. In this manner 
my tool is applicable to any size of keg or 
barrel, from eighths to whole barrels, and thus 
takes the place of a set or series of the old 
style chamfer-knives. 
E is the blade of my tool, which is made 
removable, and secured by screws e e to the 
suitably recessed or shouldered portion b of 
the part B. 
I propose to supply a series of removable 
blades, E, with each tool, if desired, so that 
different bevels or chamfers may be given to 65 
the barrels or kegs, as required, the rest of the 
tool being the same. Besides this, the blade 
can be easily removed-as for grinding-or if 
broken can be readily replaced at small cost, 
the parts A and B being thereby utilized with- 7o 
Out extra expense. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let. 
ters Patent, is 
kegs, &c., the combination of two extensible 
parts, one sliding upon the other, one of then 
carrying the blade, and both having handles, 
and a set-screw for holding the two parts rig 
idly in contact at any desired degree of exten 
sion, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a hand-tool for chamfering barrels, 
kegs, &c., the combination of two extensible 
parts, one sliding upon the other, each con 
sisting of two horizontal portions, at different 85 
levels united by integral oblique central por 
tions, one part carrying a blade, and both hav 
ing suitable handles, and the end of each ex 
tensible part farthest from its handle being 
provided with a loop to receive the other ex 
tensible part, with another loop secured to one 
part adjacent to the described oblique portion 
thereof and passing around the other part, 
and a set-screw passing through said loop 
and adapted to bear against the said other 
extensible part, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a hand-tool for chamfering barrels, 
kegs, &c., the combination of two extensible 
parts, one sliding upon the other, and con 
nected together by loops, one of said parts 
carrying the blade, and the other provided 
with a series of pivot-seats, and both provided 
95 
IOO 
s 
 
351,586 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
5 the said seats, substantially as set forth. 
have hereunto set my hand, at Milwaukee, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
consin, in the f Milwaukee and State of Wis: 
in the county o 
EMUS EISOLT, 
sence of tWO witnesses. 
; 
: 
: 
; 
: 
: 
Witles 
S 
H.G. UNDERWool 
N. E. OLIPHANT. 
: 
: 
: 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351686.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 351,686. 
M. A. BANCROFT. 
PRINTING. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oot, 26, 1886, 
l i 
- w - -an-a- 
a 
A4 
woyeudo-d's nevraf : 
 
 
109-dod'sanbvrar 
left 
www.www.ww. 
SSSSSSSE 
-e 
esses stals sists 
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
No. 351,686, 
 
M. A. BANCROFT, 
PRINTING, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented 00t, 26, 1886. 
7 - A RAAN 
a. 
- - 
Est". 
re 
ill 
as 
l 
h f 62 
| 
4 
72 72 esses:- 
v 67&LA- 7% & 6-7%. 
* 42. 2 . 
(24orrez/s. 
k21 
(2)y A. 2% 22s 
Zave ror 
(No Model.) . 
. 
. 
. 
No. 351,686, 
 
 
M. A. BANCROFT, 
PRINTING, 
. 
s 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Oct. 26, 1886. 
-- 
ss C2- a.eX 
E. 
. .T res 
. V.PK< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAJOR A. BANCROFT, OF BLUNT, DAKOTA TERRITORY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO ISRAEL E. YOUNGBLOOD, OF SAME PLACE, 
PRINTING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 351,686, dated October 26, 1886. 
Application filed August 11, 1886. Scrial No. 210,637. (No model.) 
- 
ling. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MAJOR A. BANCROFT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Blunt, 
. in the county of Hughes and Territory of 
5 Dakota, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Printing, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
IO the art of printing, whereby handsome and 
attractive designs may be produced from a 
form made up from ordinary movable print 
ing material-as type, borders, brass rules, or 
ornaments-by allowing only such portions of 
I5 the form to print as are required to bring out 
the design sought, without mutilating any of 
the material which is prevented from print. 
The invention consists in an improved meth 
2O od of accomplishing the above result, which 
will first be described in connection with the ac 
companying drawings and then clearly pointed 
out in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure I shows a tympan 
25 bearing an impression of the form to be print 
ed from, the dotted lines indicating portions 
of the tympan to be cut out; and Fig. 2 is a 
like view with those portions removed. Fig. 
3 illustrates the manner of obtaining the off. 
3o set on a sheet which is to be made the frisket 
sheet, and Fig. 4 represents said sheet bearing 
the offset. Fig. 5 illustrates this frisket-sheet 
cut out in accordance with the design offset 
from the tympan; and Fig. 6 represents said 
35 sheet applied to the grippers, forming a 
frisket. 
In carrying out my invention I first take 
an impression of the form on the tympan A of 
the press, as shown in Fig. 1, after which I 
4o cut the tympanthrough certain portions of the 
impression in such manner that what remains 
of the impression will form the desired design, 
as illustrated in Fig. 2. I next ink the design, 
preferably by one or more impressions from 
45 the form in the press, for the purpose of pro 
ducing a distinct offset, as seen in Fig. 4, by 
another impression on a sheet of smooth-sur 
faced paper, B, large enough to extend one 
and one-halfinch at each end beyond the grip 
5o pers C, as seen in Fig. 3. However, before 
. 
e 
 
. 
taking this offset I make guide-marks on the 
paper B, and also on the tympan, as shown at 
m m, to enable me to replace the sheet in the 
same position while attaching it to the grip 
pers to form the frisket after the offset has 
been cut out, as hereinafter described. After 
taking the offset, which I use as a guide in 
cutting, I cut out that portion of the frisket 
sheet B which bears the offset. Instead, how 
ever, of following the exact outlines of the 
6 
entire offset while cutting, it is more conven 
ient and preferable in practice to follow the 
contour of the offset, just clearing it, except 
at the points or places where the original im 
pression on the tympan has not been changed 
by the cuts therein, at which points or places 
the line of cut is given greater clearance from 
the offset, as indicated by dotted lines d in 
Fig. 4. 
In another application, filed by me on the 
17th day of December, 1885, Serial No. 185,940, 
the following claims are now pending and in 
process of adjudication, to wit: 
'1. The combination, with a form of type 
placed on the bed of a printing - press, of a 
frisket, the portions which overlie the part 
of the form from which it is desired to take 
an impression being cut out, and a tympan 
having the portions which underlie the part 
of the frisket covering the part of the form 
not to be printed from cut out, substantially 
as described. 
2. As an improvement in the art of print 
ing, the method herein described of taking 
an impression from certain portions of an un 
broken form, consisting in cutting out those 
parts of the frisket which overlie those parts 
of the form from which an impression is to 
be taken, and removing those parts of the 
tympan-sheet which underlie the part of the 
frisket covering the part of the form not to be 
printed from, then applying paper to the 
frisket and tympan so prepared, and taking 
the impression, substantially as described.' 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is-- 
The improved method of printing herein 
described, consisting in first taking an im 
pression of the form upon the tympan, then I 
Having thus described my invention, what 9 
- 
s 
n 
s 
OO 
2 
351,686 
cutting out such portions of the impression 
design, then taking all offset upon the frisket- 
sheet iron the design O ESA, then 
5 cutting out the offset on the frisket-sheet, and 
finally taking an impression on the sheet to 
be printed, substantially as described. 
the tympan as are not to be E. E. presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
MAJOR A. BANCROFT. 
t 
Witnesses: 
FRED O. KIMBALL, 
THOMAS P. KANE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351786.txt	(No Model.) 
A. P. MASSEY. 
AUTOMATIC CAR BRAKE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 351,786, 
Patented Nov. 2, 1886. 
ITNESSEs. 
2%-22 
-ez, 
t 
NVENTOR 
-4//24.4% 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT P. MASSEY, OF WATERTOWN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
EAMES WACUUM BRAKE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC CAR-BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 351,786, dated November 2, 1886. 
Application filed June 21, 1886. 
Serial No. 205,772. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERT P. MASSEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wa 
tertown, in the county of Jefferson and State 
of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Automatic Car 
Brakes; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
Myinvention relates to the valves that regu 
late the distribution of fluid-pressure between 
a reservoir and a diaphragm or cylinder for 
actuating brakes. 
I am aware that various devices have been 
made for operating the valves between a res 
ervoir and a brake cylinder or diaphragm au 
tomatically, and that some have attempted to 
hold the valve midway of its stroke by springs 
or by varying the area of the diaphragm. My 
device is not like these, but consists in op 
posing two diaphragms or pistons to one an 
other by means of an intermediate lever or 
bell-crank in such a manner that as the posi 
tion varies from one extreme of the stroke to 
the other the effective leverage of one dia 
phragm or piston to move the valve is con 
stantly decreasing, while the effective lever 
age of the other is constantly increasing. In 
this way, by varying the pressure in the train 
pipe more or less, the valve can be moved to 
any part of its stroke and held there. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the ap 
paratus as applied to a car for operating the 
brakes by producing a vacuum in the brake 
diaphragm. The valve is shown in section. 
Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the same. Fig. 3 
is a section showing the lever and fulcrum. 
Figs. 4 and 5 show a modification of the same 
device. Fig. 6 shows the device applied to a 
valve for actuating the brake by air-pressure. 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 4, A is a shell inclosing 
the apparatus and connected with the reser 
voir R by pipe 7'. 
R is a reservoir, in which is maintained a 
vacuum by means of an ejector or pump. 
through the train-pipe Tand the check-valvet. 
T is a pipe running through the train, in 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
4o 
45 
 
SO. 
55 
6o - 
which a vacuum is produced by an ejector or 
pump. 
t is a check-valve, which allows the air to 
pass from the reservoir to the pipe T, but 
checks any flow into the reservoir. 
D is a flexible diaphragm, exposed on its 
inner side to the vacuum in the reservoir, and 
on its outer side to the vacuum in the train 
pipe. 
E is a valve for regulating the flow of air 
from the brake diaphragm or cylinder to the 
reservoir. 
F is a stem connecting valve E with dia- - 
phragm D directly in Figs. 1 and 2, and 
through bell-crank G and connecting-rod fin 
Fig. 4. 
His a diaphragm for modifying the action 
of diaphragm D, and is connected with it and . 
the valve by connecting-rod f and bell-crank 
G, Fig. 4, or link G', leverg, and linkg, Figs. 
1 and 2. 
r 
75 
, 
the brake. 
f is a fixed fulcrum. 
J is a valve for admitting air and releasing 
K is a lever connecting the release-valve 
with the valve E. 
L is a pipe communicating with the dia: 
phragm M, to which the brake-levers are at 
tached. 
O is an opening allowing the atmosphere to 
act upon the outside of diaphragm H. 
N is a closed chamber connected with train 
pipe T. 
Fig. 6 shows a valve in ordinary use for air 
pressure brakes, as modified by this device, 
in which P is a slide-valve moving over port 
p and p. p is a port leading to brake-cylin 
der. p' is a port leading to open air. S is a 
piston connected to slide-valve by stems. U 
is a port connecting inside of valve-case above 
the piston S with the storage-reservoir. Vis 
a port connecting inside of valve-case below 
the piston S with the train-pipe. W is a pis 
ton for modifying the action of piston S. X 
is a bell-crank attached to a fixed fulcrum, a. 
Y is a link connecting piston W with bell 
crank X. y is a link connecting stems of pis 
ton S with bell-crank X. 
The action of the device is essentially the 
95 
S 
351,786 
same whether diaphragms or pistons are used 
to actuate the valves, and whether the brakes 
are applied by producing a vacuum or by air 
pressure, only the valves need to open in re 
verse ways in the two cases. 
The operation is as follows: The reservoir 
R, Fig. 1, is charged with fluid-pressure either 
above or below the atmospheric pressure by 
means of a pump or ejector through the traill 
pipe T and check-valvet. This train-pipe is 
also connected with the chamber N without 
any valve, so that the pressure in the train 
pipe and the chamber N is always alike. The 
chamber A is open to the reservoir R through 
pipe. When the pressure in the train-pipe 
and in the reservoir is equal, the diaphragm ID 
will be in equilibrium and have no tendency 
to move the valve E. 
As a vacuum-brake, when the Vacuum is the 
same in the train-pipe and in the reservoir, 
the diaphragm l) will be in equilibrium; but 
if the vacuum in the train-pipe T be partially 
destroyed the increase of pressure on the out 
side of the diaphragm D will press it in and 
open the valve E. If now, the Vacultlim in the 
train-pipe be restored, the diaphragm D will 
rise and close the valve. If the apparatus 
consisted simply of the diapluragm D and the 
valve E, arranged as described, the diaphragm 
I would move its whole limit; whenever the 
pressure varied enough to make it move at 
all, and the brakes would be applied with full 
force or would be all off. To enable the valve 
to be moved slowly and held in any desired 
position, the diaphragm H is added. This 
diaphragm is exposed to the fluid-pressure of 
the reservoir on one side and to the atmos 
phere on the other. 
It is collanected with the 
main diaphragm D by means of link G, lever 
(7, and link ('. Figs. 1 and 2, (or by link F, 
bell-crank G, and link f, Fig. 4.) at such an 
angle that it offers a constantly-increasing re 
sistance to the movement of the diaphragm D 
and the valve E attached. The leverage of 
diaphragm D to revolve lever 9, Figs. 1 and 2, 
or bell-crank G, Fig. 4, about fulcrum f is 
constantly decreasing as the valve opens, while 
the leverage of diaphragm H through links 
G", to resist such motion about fulcrum f", is 
constantly increasing. For instance, when ar 
ranged, as shown, with the valve closed, the re 
sistance to the movement of the valve is 0.12 
of the vacuull ill the reservoir. Whell the 
valve has moved one-fifth of its stroke, the re 
sistance would be 0.25. When the valve has 
moved two-fifths of its stroke, the resistance 
would be 0.33. When the valve has moved 
three-fifths, the resistance would be 0.5. When 
the valve las moved four-fifths, the resistance 
would be 0.7. When the valve has moved its 
full stroke, the resistance would be 0.9 of the 
pressure in the reservoir. This enables the 
engineer to control the location of the valve 
at will by regulating the pressure in the train. 
pipe. 
It is obvious that by changing the angle be 
tween the diaphragm and the lever 9, Figs. 1 
and 2, or by connecting the diaphlagms or 
pistons to different points of the bell-crank G, 
Fig. 4, any varying resistance may be obtained 
that may be desired. 
To show that this device may be applied to 
any kind of valve which is operated by valry 
ing pressure on different sides of a piston Ol' 
diaphragm, I show it in IFig. 6 as attached to 
what is commonly known as the triple 
valve'-a valve in general use with brakes 
when a pressure exceeding the atmosphere is 
used. In this device the valve IP is moved 
over the ports p and p", for the purpose of ap 
plying or releasing the brakes by means of the 
piston S, which is exposed on the lower side 
to the pressure in the train-pipe through the 
port V, and on the upper side to the pressure 
in the reservoir through the port J. When 
these are in equilibrium, the valve remains up 
and the brakes are off. To apply the brake's 
the pressure in the train-pipe is reduced. The 
excess of pressure in the reservoir then loves 
the piston, and with it the valve P, so as to 
close the exhaust-port p and admit air from 
the reservoir to the brake-cylinder through 
port p. 
It is evident that when the differ 
ence in pressure is sufficient to start the pis 
ton and valve it will move it through its whole 
stroke. A spring could be adjusted to offer 
resistance to full stroke for any given press 
ure in the reservoir; but a slight variation of 
the pressure would vary the position of the 
valve so much as to make it inoperative. By 
the addition of a piston, W., exposed to the res 
ervoir-pressure on one side and the atmos 
pheric pressure on the other, and connected 
to the main piston by meals of a bell-crank, 
N, or its equivalent, revolving on a fixed full 
crum, a, the resistance varies as the Valve trav 
els over its ports, and is always proportional 
to the pressure in the reservoir. As piston S 
moves down, the leverage of link of to turn X 
albot it fulcrum,' is constantly decreasing, while 
the leverage of link Y, to resist the motion of 
X about fulcrum ar, is constantly increasing. 
This variation can be adapted to suit any case 
by varying the length of the leverages or the 
angle between then, and when fixed to suit the 
travel of any valve it will work equally well 
for all pressures in the reservoir. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I desire to claim and Secure by Letter's Patent 
S 1. In a car-brake operated by fluid-press 
ure, a valve actuated by two pistons or dia 
phragms connected to the valve at different 
angles, so that the effective leverage of one 
piston or diaphragm will decrease and the ef 
fective leverage of the other piston or dia 
phragm will increase as the valve approaches 
or recedes from its position when closed, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a car-brake operated by fluid-press. 
lure, the diaphragms D and H, in combination 
with the leverg and the fulcrum f", for actu 
75 
85 
IOO. 
O 
I I5 
5 
O 
25 
55 
65 
351,786 
3 
In testimony whereof I, the said ALBERT P. 
MASSEY, have hereunto set my hand. 
ALBERT P. MASSEY. 
Witnesses: 
A. H. SAWYER, 
J. M. FAIRBANRS. 
ating a valve regulating the flow of air to or 
from a brake cylinder or diaphragm. 
3. In a car-brake operated by fluid-press 
ure, the diaphragms D and H, in combination 
5 with bell-crank G. and fulcrum f", actuating 
a valve regulating the flow of air to or from a 
brake cylinder or diaphragm. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351886.txt	(No Model.) 
G. R. POEL. 
CICAR OUTTER, 
No. 351,886, 
Patented Nov. 2, 1886. 
 
Wzzzeess,eS : 
-64.2/ 
e-or-owl 
w 
n 
Zzverzzori 
George 3.2% 
2zzo'72e2/. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washingto: D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE R. POHL, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO FRED. HUGLE, OF SAME PLACE. 
C CAR. CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 351,886, dated November 2, 1886. 
Application filed February 8, 1886. Serial No. 191,205. (No model.) 
Io make and use the same. 
25 sume their normal positions. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGER. POHL, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Cigar-Cutters; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
My invention relates to improvements in 
cigar-cutters; and the object of my invention 
is to produce a cigar-cutter by which the tips 
of cigars can be cut by introducing them into 
15 a machine, preferably of outline in the form 
of a dog. or other animal and placed in a rear 
ing position, so that the part cut off will pass 
through a tube extending from the front 
toward the rear of the machine, where it 
2O can be received in a suitable receptacle of 
any kind, if desired; also to produce means 
for operating the cutting-knife, consisting of 
one or more levers and other devices that will 
cause the levers, after being operated, to re 
My invention consists in the construction of 
certain parts and arrangement of parts, as 
will be more fully described hereinafter, and 
specifically pointed out in the claim, refer 
so ence being had to the accompanying draw: 
ings and the letters of reference marked 
thereon. 
Similar letters indicate like parts in the dif. 
ferent figures of the drawings, in which 
35 Figure 1 represents a side elevation of my 
improved cigar-cutter partly broken away and 
insection. Fig. 2 is a detached view showing 
the cutters. Fig. 3 is a detached view of the 
Cutter. 
In the drawings, A represents the main body 
or frame of the machine in the shape of a bull 
dog placed in a rearing position, as if about 
to spring upon a person, but detained. It is 
preferably made in two parts and secured to 
45 gether after the operating parts have been 
introduced, and it may be cast to a suitable 
base, a, or may be secured by screws, or bolts 
to a counter or other suitable place. It is cast 
... of malleable cast-iron, brass, compositioni, or 
So other suitable metal, and instead of being in 
 
- 
the shape of a dog, it may represent a bear, 
monkey, cat, tiger, or any other animal. The 
body is made hollow, and the cutting-knife. 
B made preferably of triangular shape, (see - 
Fig. 3,) and is attached to a lever, C, which 55 
is fastened to a shaft, c, journaled in thesides 
of the frame. The lever C has an angular 
form, and is provided with a series of teeth, 
d, that mesh or engage with teeth e of a seg 
ment-wheel, D, which is secured to a shaft, f, 6o 
journaled also in the sides of the frame. The 
segment-wheel D is attached to lever D', and 
is provided with a lug, g, to which a spring, 
E, is attached at one end, while the other end 
of said spring is secured to the body of the 
machine. The shaft c of the lever C is made 
of triangular or square shape, to prevent said 
lever from revolving on the shaft, and the 
shaft of the segment-wheel may also be made 
square, if desired. 
7o 
The movable cutting-knife is arranged in . 
the lower part of the front of the machine, 
which may be made in the form shown in fig- . 
ures, and a tube, F, is arranged so as to re 
ceive the part cut out of the cigar, and the 
tube passes out at the rear of the machine, 
where a suitable receptacle of any kind may 
be placed to receive the cuttings. The tube is 
preferably arranged at an angle of about forty 
five degrees, so that no particles will lodge in 
it. The mouth of the receiving-tube is made 
slightly flaring, to facilitate the entrance of 
the pieces of cigars cut out of the tips. 
The operation is as follows: The cigars are 
introduced into the front of the machine, and 
the lever is pressed upon, when it will partly 
revolve the segment-wheel, which imparts an 
upward movement to the knife B, which then 
cuts a triangular piece out of the tip of the 
cigar. The piece of the cigar is received into 
the mouth of the receiving-tube, and passing 
through it may be caught in a suitable recep 
tacle, placed at the rear part of the frame. 
The spring attached to the lug of the segment 
wheel and the frame serves to return the cut- 95 
ting-knife and levers to their normal positions. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
Iclaim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
is The cigar-cutter herein described, consist. Ico 
85 
. 
75 
2 
351,886 
ing of the frame A, provided with inclined 
tube F, pivoted bell-crank lever C, having nature in presence of two witnesses. 
cutting-knife B, and teeth d, meshing with 
teeth c on a segment-wheel, D, which is at. 
5 tached to lever D, and provided with a lug, g, 
for attachment of spring E, all arranged as 
and for the purpose specified. 
F. O. MACK, 
T. C. BRECHT, 
In testimony whereof I hereby affix my sig 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE. R. POFHL, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US351986.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 351,986. 
W. J. LANE 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
4 Sheets -Sheet, 1. 
Patented Nov. 2, 1886. 
 
AS (X S W 2. RAN ( W2 
 
2%% 
3 (.26444, 
 
a 24%C- 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. J. LANE. 
STEAM ENGINE, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
... 
/ 
(No Model.) 
No. 351,986. 
W. J. LANE 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 2 
a 2.6 
l886. 
6. 
Y 
M 
2 
t 
w 
V 
- 
w 
r 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
-- recree 
a V 
A 
y 7% 
V v. 
M 
- 
- 
- 
A 
, M. 
W 2 Wv. M. V 
S&W 
w N. 
R NM 
S. NY 
NSW SN N S. 
2 y 
Z7zzeyazoy 
//777-Z, aze 
& 22, 2e. 
1. 
N referS Photo-Litigraphst. Wallinois, O.C., 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 351,986. 
 
 
  
3. 
W. J. LANE. 
STEAM ENGINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Nov. 2, 1886. 
 
  
 
V 
W 
A. 
S WN 
a 
32NSSN 
22NZaal 
 
1. 22 
2. 
s 
N 2 
s 
2 
M 
N N 
% 
2NN s 
s 
T y 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM J. LANE, OF POUGHKEEPSIE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF TWO. 
THIRDS TO JOHN GRIFFEN LANE, OF POUGHKEEPSIE, NEW YORK, AND 
WILLIAM HENRY FIELD, OF GREEN WICH, CONNECTICUT. 
STEAM-ENGINE. - 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 351,986, dated November 2, 1886. 
Application filed June 16, 1886. Serial No. 205,348. (No model.) - 
IO 
I5. 
3O 
35 
- 
- 
cylinders mounted on a shaft, with piston or 
To all whom it may concern: 
pistons connected to another shaft out of line 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM J. LANE, of 
with but parallel to the first or cylinder shaft, 
Poughkeepsie, in the county of Dutchess and 
and all inclosed in a steam-chamber connected 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
5 useful Improvement in Steam-Engines; and I 
with the exhaust. 
It consists, secondly, of a steam cylinder or 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
cylinders mounted on a shaft, and substantially 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
radial or at right angles thereto, with its pis 
The invention set forthin the following speci 
ton or pistons connected to a wheel or radial 
fication relates to what have been called 're 
volving-cylinder engines. Of these various 
arm mounted on a shaft out of line with the 
first or cylinder shaft, the cylinder or cylin 
forms have been devised; but none, so far as I am 
ders and piston-connections with the wheel or 
aware, have been put into practical use by rea 
arm being inclosed in a steam-space connected 
son of certain difficulties inherent in the ma 
with the exhaust, whereby the piston and its 
chines heretofore devised, as hereinafter ex 
plained. 
connections are all lubricated. 
It consists, thirdly, of an exhaust-passage 
To overcome these difficulties, and thereby 
into the chamber inclosing the steam-cylinder 
to provide an engine capable of high rate of 
and piston-connections, arranged to discharge 
speed, and having the now well-recognized ad 
exhaust-steam across the chamber and against 
vantages arising therefrom, is the general ob 
the connection-points and other working parts. 
ject of my invention. This high rate of speed 
It consists, fourthly, of cylinders mounted 
is due, primarily, to the general principles of 
upon a shaft With their pistons and connec 
the engine hereinafter described, in which pis 
tions inclosed in a steam-chamber, with pas 
tons and cylinders are used with the working 
effect derived therefrom, but with no absolute sages from the said chamber to the bearings 
5 reciprocating motion of parts whatever, and 
of the shaft. 
It consists, fifthly, in a special construction 
only rotary motion. As in an engine of this 
of a divided sleeve forming an immediate bear 
kind all or most of the working parts revolve, 
ing-surface of the shaft, whereby the steam is 
and there are no reciprocating parts whatever 
conducted to all parts thereof. 
to be brought to and started from a state of rest. 
It consists, sixthly, in forming a steam-pas 
at each semi-revolution, but all working parts 
sage through the bottom of the piston to the 
revolve about centers continuously in one di 
rection, it follows that a much greater speed joint of the connection with the piston, where 
by this inner joint is lubricated. 
of parts may be allowed than in cases where 
It consists, seventhly, of an improved con 
the strains due to absolute reciprocation cause 
struction of the piston and piston-connection, 
an earlier limit. With the high speed there. 
the piston being made hollow from its outer 
arises a difficulty, heretofore not provided for, 
end, with the connection hinged to the bottom, 
of constantly and perfectly lubricating these 
whereby the long bearing is provided for the 
parts-an object absolutely essential to be pro 
piston and the connectionis shortened with cor 
vided for in a machine moving at a high rate 
responding reduction in the diameter of the 
of speed. Further, it is essential that the 
engine. 
working parts should be in compact form, for 
It consists, eighthly, of a direct connection, 
the reason that the high speed, with its con 
by means of a pitman or link, between the pis 
sequent centrifugal force, would beincompati. 
ton of the cylinder mounted upon one shaft 
ble with a large diameter of the engine. There 
fore the principal special objects which I have 
and the wheel or radial arm on another shaft 
out of line but parallel with the cylinder 
had in view relate to the overcoming of these 
shaft. 
difficulties; but I have,in connection with these, 
sought also to introduce improved details of 
tween the cylinder or cylinders and the wheel 
construction, which I have found necessary in 
part or arm, whereby the two shafts are kept 
in unison. , 
... My said invention therefore consists, first 
It consists, tenthly, of a yielding pressure 
and generally, of a rotary steam cylinder or 
5o practically carrying out my invention. 
45 
It consists, ninthly, of a link-connection be. Ico 
55 
75 
90 
95 
 
351,986 
I5 from the larger. 
5 ling the position of the cut-off valve. 
collar applied to the cylinder-shaft acting in 
opposition to the outward steam-pressure. 
It consists, eleventhly, of a worm or screw 
and its connection for changing and control 
It consists, twelfthly, of a compound engine 
consisting of large and small cylinders ar 
ranged radially on a shaft, with pistons and 
piston-connections from each piston to a wheel 
IO or radial arm on another shaft out of line with 
the cylinder-shaft, with steam-induction pas 
sages to the smaller cylinder or cylinders, 
steam-passages from the exhaust of the smaller 
to the larger cylinders, and exhaust-passages 
It consists, finally, in details of construction, 
all as hereinafter set forth, and particularly 
indicated in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
2O represents the engine in perspective, with the 
upper portion of the inclosing - case broken 
away to show the wheel and cylinders. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of a horizontal section taken 
longitudinally of the shaft. Fig. 3 represents 
25 a vertical transversesection on line acac of Fig. 
2, the inlet and exhaust ports being shown in 
dotted lines. Fig. 4 is a section on line y 
y of Fig. 2, showing the bearing for the shaft. 
Fig. 5 is a section on line & 2 of Fig. 2. Fig. 
3o 6 shows a side elevation of the inlet and ex 
haust ports, with the position of the cylinders 
and the ports indicated in dotted lines. Fig. 
7 is a similar view of a compound form of en 
gine. Fig. 8 is a perspective view showing 
35 more clearly theinlet and exhaust ports adapt. 
ed to a compound form of engine. Fig. 9 is a 
detail Sectional view. 
In the drawings, A indicates the cylinder 
shaft, the inner end of which carries one or 
4o more cylinders, B. I have shown four of these 
cylinders set radially on the end of the shaft 
at equal distances, that being a convenient 
number. The cylinders in this single-acting 
form of the engine are of equal size, and are 
45 fixed to the central hub, b, which is secured to 
the end of the shaft. The cylinders are open 
at their outer ends, and receive and exhaust 
steam through ports c in the hub, which open 
laterally in the end of the hub. The end of the 
5o hub through which these steam-ports open is 
ground to fit against the corresponding face 
of the casing. The induction-port leads from 
the steam-Supply pipe D, and is shown at din 
the face of the casing represented in Fig. 6. 
55 This port is elongated in the face of the casing 
on a circular path concentric with the center 
of the shaft and on a line with the path of the 
steam-ports in the hub, and is provided with a 
variable cut-off, as shown in Fig. 6, and is here 
6o inafter explained. The exhaust is through a 
similar curved elongated port, d, in the said 
face, and this communicates at d, Fig. 2, with 
a passage, 3, into the interior of the case, as 
shown in Figs. 2 and 6. The supply and ex 
65 haust are indicated by the arrow in the said 
figures. The form of the pistons is also shown 
in Fig. 2 at E. They are cup-shaped, with 
- 
the open end outward, and the piston-connec 
tion Fishinged to the bottom of the pistonby 
means of threaded bolts f, inserted through the 
outside of the piston through a T-head on the 
end of the connection. The space within the 
hollow piston is sufficient to permit the rela 
tive swinging motion of the connection F. The 
outer end of the piston-connection is provided 
with a T-head similar to that of the interior 
end, and is connected by a similar bolt, f', to 
the overhanging flange g of the wheel G, or to 
the end of a radial arm in place of the wheel. 
This wheel G is fixed to the end of the shaft H, 
mounted in bearings in the case in a line aside 
from but parallel with the line of the shaft A. 
In the machine represented in the accompa 
nying drawings the pistons are four inches in 
diameter and the lines of the two shafts are one 
and one-half inch apart. The pistons are car 
ried in their circular path about the shaft A as 
a center, giving three inches stroke to the pis 
ton. The part G is shown in the form of a 
wheel having a continuous ring or flange, g; 
but the precise form is not essential, as radial 
arms could be made to serve the same purpose. 
The hub of the wheel G is fixed to the inner 
end of the shaft H. Openings h are made in 
the wheel G opposite the outer ends of the cyl 
inders, and across each of these openings, on 
the outside, is fixed a bar, i, in which is a pin, 4, 
projecting inward. On the outer end of each 
cylinder is a corresponding pin projecting out 
ward. The pins on the bari are at an equal dis 
tance from the center of the shaft H, and the pins 
on the outer ends of the cylinders are also at an 
equal distance from the center of the shaft A. 
The pins are also all at the same distance from 
the centers about which they revolve. These 
pins are connected by links of a length between 
centers of bearings equal to the distance be 
tween the axial lines of the shafts A. H. This 
connection keeps the parts in just relation to 
each other, the power being exerted by the 
piston-connections. The links simply turn on 
their bearings, maintaining always the same 
absolute position and offer a minimum of fric 
tion, and being nearly opposite the exhaust 
port in the case, they always are lubricated by 
the oil carried by the steam. The two shafts 
thus connected manifestly rotate in the same 
direction and in unison, the cylinders upon one 
and the pistons upon the other; but the orbits 
being eccentric and the centers within the 
space common to both, the space between the 
inner end of any cylinder and the point of 
attachment of the outer end of its piston-con 
nection will vary constantly in the revolution 
of the whole. The piston therefore does not 
reciprocate, but is simply carried about a cen 
ter with slight oscillation, and the piston and 
cylinder have movement with relation to each 
other only as their paths diverge or converge. 
In this way all the advantages of a cylinder 
and piston engine are obtained without abso 
lute reciprocation and the necessary limitation 
which it imposes upon the speed. In order to 
avoid the use of cross-heads and to reduce 
75 
90 
OO 
IO 
I 5 
4. 
35,986 
3. 
vertical and longitudinal line, the parts being 
the diameter of the engine, the pistons are 
separated to leave a space for the passage of 
made hollow, open at their outer ends, and 
closed at their inner, as heretofore described. the steam. They are shown at mand m, in 7 
This enables me to provide a long bearing 
plan in Fig. 2 and in section in Figs. 4 and 5, 
and in Fig. 2 the inner sleeves are partly 
surface with all its known advantages, and 
broken away down to the shaft. I have shown 
allows also the short connection and diminished 
two of these divided sleeves on each side, be 
diameter and lessened centrifugal force. This 
force extending outward on all revolving parts, 
cause in this case the shaft has no outward 
bearing, and two bearings are therefore placed 
together with steam-pressure acting in the same 
within one hub or case. They are inclosed in 
direction only, keeps all slack in bearings con 
an outer bearing or hub of the case, in which 
stantly taken up, and there is therefore no 
they are held adjustably by means of set-screws 
need for provision for taking up on any inte 
rior bearing-surfaces. This force will be al 
8, and the halves of each sleeve are connected 
by a light screw, 9, sufficiently strong to hold 
ways sufficient to keep the oil supplied to the 
the parts in proper relation to each other, but 
outer connection joints, but will tend to keep 
capable of bending to give slight movement 
it away from the inner connection joints in the 
necessary for any adjustment of the set-screws 
To remedy this 
bottom of the hollow pistons. 
8. The outer sleeve parts, m, are grooved pe. 
and to properly lubricate their joints, I bore 
ripherally, as shown at 11, and this groove 
the bottom of the piston, as shown at 7. This 
connects with the longitudinal passage be 
admits the steam to the T-shaped end of the 
tween the half parts of the sleeve above and 
connection, which is cylindrical and bears on 
below, whereby the steam is conducted both 
a corresponding surface on the inner face of the 
to the upper and lower parts of the shaft. 
piston, forming a steam joint. A hole, 18, is 
The tube in connects with the peripheral groove 
made in line with the hole 7 in the T-shaped 
underneath to carry off a part of the exhaust 
end to the pin, and thereby the latter is lubri 
steam, together with the water of condensa 
cated by the oil carried by the steam pressing 
tion. The bearing - face of the hub of the 
outward. The T-shaped end of the connec 
tion bearing upon the corresponding surface in 
wheel G is smaller than the face of the sleeve 
m, against which it bears, and this permits 
the bottom of the hollow piston acts as a valve. 
the passage of steam into the space between 
to close and prevent the escape of the steam 
through the piston. Both the pressure of the 
the sleeve-halves. 
To admit steam to the cylinder-shaft A, a 
steam and the centrifugal force tend outward 
passage, 12, is formed leading from the ex 
and hold all the parts in contact. In the ar 
haust-passage 3 into the space between the 
rangement shown all these parts balance each 
halves of the sleeves. In other respects the 
other. The power applied is in a succession 
construction and arrangement of the bearings 
of pulsations of pressure wholly in the same 
of the shaft A are the same as those heretofore 
direction, and the movement is steady and 
By this construction any pressure 
uniform. The exhaust-passage has been shown 
described. 
to close the bearing by setting up on the screws 
as directed laterally against the revolving cyl 
88 sets up the bearing uniformly throughout 
inders and other working parts connected 
its whole length, and at the same time allows 
there with, whereby the steam and the oil car 
the bearing to keep in line with the shaft, by 
ried by the steam is directed against the parts 
reason of the pivotal action upon screws 88 
requiring lubrication; but in order that lubri. 
cation of all the parts may be accomplished I 
at or near the middle of the length of the bear. 
ing. These two bearings may or may not be 
have inclosed the whole working mechanism 
in close proximity, as herein shown. A sin 
in a case, K. This, for convenience, though 
gle bearing inclosed in a rigid case, as shown, 
not necessarily so, is represented as cast in 
is all that is necessary when the shaft has an 
two lower parts with a base, and with a bear. 
other bearing. 
ing for the shaft integral with these parts, and 
It Will be apparent that the pressure of the 
with a cover, k, completing the case. This 
steam will tend constantly to force the hub of 
forms a chamber wholly inclosing the steam 
the cylinder away from the bearing. In order 
cylinders, the revolving wheel, and the parts 
to compensate for this, a collar, O, is fixed upon 
connecting the cylinders and wheel,into which 
the shaft A, and is formed with pockets, in 
space the steam is directly exhausted. From 
which are located coiled springs o. These 
this chamber steam passes through an exhaust 
bear against a disk or washer, P, loose on the 
passage, L, and passages n n to the atmos 
shaft, and bearing against the end of the hub 
phere. The passage L is located a little above 
or outer bearing, Q. The Washer is connected 
the lowest part of the chamber, as shown in 
with the collar by means of a pin, q, so that 
Fig. 3, in order that some water of condensa 
it revolves with the collar. The springs are 
tion may he permitted to accumulate in the 
made of such strength as to overcome the 
bottom of the chamber, which will support a 
pushing effect of the steam and to hold the 
thin film of oil, and serving a further lubrica 
hubb constantly against its bearing; but as 
tion of the parts as they revolve. 
the force of the steam nearly equals that of 
In order to provide for the automatic lubri 
the springs the friction between the surfaces 
cation and the accurate adjustment of the 
shafts, I have devised improved bearings in which the parts are located is slight. This 
therefor. These consist of sleeves divided on yielding pressure, which can be adapted to 
- 
I5 
2O 
25 
3o 
35 
4C 
45 
SO 
55 
6o 
65 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
EO 
I 25 
 
351,986 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
slightly overbalance any given pressure of 
steam, is therefore capable of maintaining a 
practically steam-tight joint between the sur 
faces in which the ports are located at all 
times and with a minimum of friction. 
It is 
also capable of acting as a relief, in case of 
Water entering the cylinders, to prevent break 
age of parts. A similar collar and disk, o' o', 
are provided on the shaft H, but with slight 
pressure of spring. Outside of this collar are 
the driving-pulleys P, keyed to the shafts. 
The engine, as shown in the drawings here 
with, takes Steam at the commencement of the 
stroke of the piston, may carry up to one-half 
stroke, at which point it is cut off, expands 
during the remaining one-half and commences 
exhausting when the outstroke has been nearly 
completed, and exhausts practically during 
the whole return-stroke, as in this construc 
tion Cushioning is unnecessary for smooth 
running and clearance is small. 
In Fig. 3 the steam-passages in the hub are 
shown in side view, and the location of these 
passages is more clearly shown in Fig. 6 at c. 
They take steam successively while passing 
the port of the steam-passaged in the casing 
and exhaustin passing the port of the exhaust. 
passage 3. The length of the steam-port de 
termines the point of cut-off. The point of 
cut-off is made variable by means of a slide 
Q, fitted to move in the curved recess in the 
face of the bearing. This is operated by 
means of a rod, q', connected with a worm 
located in a recess back of the cut-off Q, and 
beyond the end of the steam passage or port 
d. The back of the cut-off Q has a section of 
female Screw-thread formed therein to corre 
Spold With that of the worm, and is thus con 
nected with the rod q, which (shown in the 
figure) has a knob on the end, by which it 
may be manipulated by hand; but, manifestly, 
the rod is adapted to be connected to a gov. 
ernor in the ordinary manner. 
In Figs. 7, S. and 9 I have shown the prin 
ciples heretofore explained applied to a com 
pound engine. In Fig. 7 the cross-section 
shows the larger cylinders, B, placed opposite 
each other. Steam from the main pipe D is 
taken through a steam-passage, , (shown in 
dotted lines in Fig. 8,) into the small cylinder 
in the manner hereinafter described. This is 
exhausted through the steam - passage s into 
the Steam chamber S on the outside of the cas 
ing; thence it is taken through the steam-pas 
Sage t into the large cylinder, and exhausted 
through the passage u, as heretofore explained. 
Relative sizes of cylinders are determined by 
rules known to those skilled in the art, and 
the construction of the large and small cylin 
ders, their pistons, and connections is the 
same as heretofore explained. The engine 
may be controlled as to speed by an ordinary 
goverlor on the supply-pipe D, attached and 
run in the usual manner, and oil is supplied 
through the usual automatic lubricator at 
tached to the steam-Supply pipe. 
75 
85 
I claim as my invention 
1. A rotary steam-cylinder mounted on a 
shaft, with a piston connected to another shaft 
out of line with but parallel to the cylinder. 
shaft, with suitable induction and exhaust 
passages, the cylinder and piston being in 
closed in a steam-chamber connected with the 
exhaust, substantially as described. 
2. A steam-cylinder mounted on a shaft at 
right angles thereto, with its piston connected 
to a wheel or arm mounted on a shaft out of 
line with the cylinder-shaft, said cylinder hav 
ing suitable induction and exhaust passages 
with the cylinder and piston, with its connec 
tion with the wheel or arm being inclosed in 
the steam-chamber connected with the exhaust, 
substantially as described. 
3. Two or more steam-cylinders mounted ra 
dially on the end of the shaft and arranged to 
balance each other, having pistons connected 
to a wheel or arms radially mounted on a shaft 
out of line with the cylinder-shaft, with suitable 
induction and exhaust passages, the cylinders 
and pistons, with their connections with the 
wheel or arms, being inclosed in a steam-cham 
ber connected with the exhaust, substantially 
as described. 
4. The cylinders mounted radially on the 
end of the shaft, with suitable induction-pas. 95 
sages, the pistons, with their connections, and 
the wheel or radial arms, all inclosed in a steam 
chamber, and an exhaust-passage arranged to 
discharge across the chamber, whereby the 
connection joints and other working parts are 
lubricated, substantially as described. 
5. Cylinders mounted upon the shaft, with 
their pistons and connections inclosed in the 
steam-chamber, and a steam-passage from the 
said chamber to the bearings of the shaft, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. In combination with the shaft and its con 
nections working in steam-chamber, the di 
vided sleeve forming the immediate bearing 
surface of the shaft, and the steam-passage 
leading thereto, all substantially as described. 
7. In combination with the cylinder revolv 
ing upon the shaft within an inclosed steam. 
space, and having a piston and piston-connec 
tion jointed thereto, a steam-passage through 
the bottom of the piston, whereby the inner 
hinge-joint is lubricated, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
8. In combination with the cylinder mount 
ed on the shaft, and the wheel or arm on an 
Other shaft out of line with but parallel to the 
cylinder-shaft, the connection hinged directly 
to the piston and to the wheel or arm, where. 
by cross-heads are avoided. 
9. The hollow piston, in combination with 
the revolving cylinder fixed to the shaft, and 
the piston-connection hinged to the bottom of 
the hollow piston, and at the outer end hinged 
to the wheel, the whole being inclosed in the 
steam-chamber, substantially as described. 
10. The combination, with the cylinder 
mounted on the shaft in radial line thereto, 
OO 
I O 
i5 
351,986 
midway circumferentially between said screws, 
and exhaust-steam passages along the shaft 
between the two parts of the bearing-surface, 
substantially as described. 
15. The combination of revolving cylinders 
connected with a flat valve or port surface, 
also rotating, a corresponding stationary Sur 
face with curved ports therein, and springs to 
produce a yielding and limited pressure be 
tween said surfaces, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
16. In combination with a revolving flat 
valve-surface, a stationary flat valve-surface 
with elongated ports, and a cut - off valve 
adapted to change the length of the steam 
port, as set forth. 
17. In combination with a revolving flat 
valve-surface, a stationary flat valve-surface 
with elongated ports, and a cut-off valve op 
erated by means of a screw to change the 
length of the steam-port, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM J. LANE. 
35 
45 
SO 
Witnesses: 
JOHN G. LANE, 
JOHN M. JANES. 
5 
O 
I-5 
of the hollow piston and the connection hinged 
to the bottom of the piston at its inner end, 
and at its outer end hinged directly to the 
wheel or radial arm mounted on a shaft out of 
line with the cylinder-shaft, substantially as 
described. . 
11. A link-connection pivoted to the cylin 
der at one end, and to the wheel at the other 
end, the link being in a plane parallel with 
the movement, whereby the cylinder and wheel 
part are kept in unison, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
12. A compound engine consisting of large 
and Small cylinders arranged radially on a 
shaft, with pistons and piston - connections 
from each piston hinged to a wheel or radial 
arms on another shaft out of line with the cyl 
inder-shaft, with steam-induction passages to 
the smaller cylinder or cylinders, steam-pas 
sages from the exhaust of the smaller to the 
larger cylinders, and exhaust-passages from 
the larger, all substantially as described. 
13. A cylindrical bearing divided longitudi 
nally, inclosed in a rigid case or sleeve, and 
rovided with a screw on either side at the 
center of its length, and also with steam-pas 
sages, for the purpose set forth. 
14. Acylindrical bearing divided longitudi 
nally, inclosed in a rigid case or sleeve, and 
3o provided with a screw on either side, a screw 
25 p 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352086.txt	(No Model.) 
H. J. ENNIS. 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
ELECTRICAL TICKET EXHIBITING MACHINE, 
No. 352,086, 
Patented Nov. 2, 1886, 
rises 
282-1-1-cocy: 
-6-e 14try, m 
-6-4 6-(2474 
Z(hy A 5.ca, 
Petes, int-.ithographer. Wasitington. . C. 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
H. J. ENNIS. 
ELECTRICAL TICKET EXHIBITING MACHINE, 
No. 352,086. 
Patented Nov. 2, 1886. 
if 
-- 
f 
G 
C 
- . . . 
. 
 
928), Ericsses; 
 
 
7%ry 4-4-4 
 
(No Model.) 
H. J. ENNIS. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
ELECTRICAL TICKET EXHIBITING MACHINE, 
No. 352,086, 
Patented Nov. 2, 1886. 
 
68)iticssos. 
6. r/vy, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY J. ENN Is, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, 
JOHN E. TALTY, OF SAME PLACE. 
r 
ASSIGNOR TO 
EECTRICAL TC KET-EXHIBITING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,086, dated November 2, 1886. 
Application filed May 28, 1886. Serial No. 203,573. (No model.) 
75 
25 
O 
15 
To a 27, Zv/voir, if noty concern: 
Beit known that I, FIENRY J. ENNIS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements in 
Electrical Ticket-Exhibiting Machines; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letter's and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to machines for auto 
matically feeding and exhibiting successive 
tickets at a window or windows in a face-plate 
or casing, for the purposes of attractive adver 
tising, for educating the young to the differ 
ences in shape and configuration of letters, 
and of animals, illustrations of the different 
kinds of which may appear upon the tickets, 
and for the purposes of playing games for 
amusement-as, for example, illustrating the 
manner and methods of stock-exchanges and 
the rapid and varying changes that take place 
in the prices of various stocks. I wish it to 
be understood, however, that my improved 
machine may be used for various purposes, 
the ends of which can be subserved by the 
rapid exhibition of successive tickets, the faces 
of which may contain any desired marks, let 
tel's, sign, indication, or illustration. I wish 
it also to be understood here at the outset 
that Some of the improvements and combina 
tions of parts and devices claimed herein by 
me may be used without the others, and in 
machines organized in different ways, and 
also that the details may be varied without 
departing from my invention and from the 
claims therefor herein made. 
I have made some radical improvements in 
ticket feeding and exhibiting machines, and I 
will describe them as embodied in a machine 
for illustrating and exhibiting stock quota 
tions, as an example of their operation, my 
said improvements being organized in the best 
way now known to me for that purpose. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
5o improved ticket feeding and exhibiting ma 
chine, and to improve the construction and 
organization of various parts of Such ma 
chines; and my invention consists, generally 
stated, in a novel method of feeding the tick 
ets, and in certain novel combinations of parts 55 
and devices, which I will first describe in 
detail as organized in the preferred way, as 
stated above, and will then particularly recite 
them in claims at the close of this specifica 
tion. 
In the accompanying drawings, which show 
my improved machine for feeding and exhib 
iting tickets, Figure 1 is a front elevation of 
the improved apparatus. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation of said machine, with a portion of the 
ticket-box or receptacle broken away. Fig. 
3 is a view partially in side elevation and par 
tially in vertical section on the line 33 of Fig. 
4. Fig. 4 is an enlarged partial plan of and 
partial section through the machine on the 
line 4 4 of Figs. 2 and 3, showing more par 
ticularly the motor which drives the feed-roll 
ers, and the organization of the circuit-break 
ers and arrangement of parts for disconnect 
ing the motor from the feeding mechanism. 
Fig. 5 is a rear view of the face-plate and por 
tions of the mechanism connected there with, 
parts of the apparatus being in section. Fig. 
6is a diagrammaticillustration of the operative 
parts, showing more clearly the general or- 8o 
ganization of the machine and the running of 
the circuits of the electrical portions thereof. 
A base-board or platform, A, is provided 
with a vertical face-plate, B, which may be 
supported by two side posts, C C, or in any 
other suitable way. This face-plate B is pro 
vided with one or more Windows or openings, 
bb, (preferably two,) through which the illus 
trations, signs, marks, quotations, or other in 
dications on the tickets are exhibited. Below 
the said windows b b is another opening, b', 
through which the ticket or tickets which have 
been exhibited at the openings b b may be dis 
charged on the feeding or before the feeding 
of a new ticket or tickets by the machine for 95 
exhibition at the Windows b b. The mechan 
ism for feeding the tickets is located behind . 
the face-plate B, and is organized to feed the 
tickets successively and at predetermined in 
tervals-say two at every half-minute. This IOC 
85 
35 
45 
- 
 
2 
- 
352,086 
IC) 
25 
35 
45 
interval of succession is determined and an 
nounced by a clock, D, which sounds an alarm 
and throws the feeding mechanism into opera 
tion, (say at every half-minute,) so that a ticket 
or tickets is fed successively at regular inter 
vals to exhibit its indication at the windows, 
while just before the feeding operation is com 
menced, the fact thereof is announced by the 
alarm to call attention thereto. The clock D 
may be one of well-known or ordinary con 
struction, except as mentioned below, and is 
preferably located at or near the top of the 
face-plate B, so as to have its indications (time) 
conspicuously displayed. 
The tickets to be fed and exhibited are prop 
erly piled, with their indicating-faces upward, 
in a ticket box, rack, receptacle, or guide, E, 
just back of the face-plate and above the ticket 
feeding mechanism of the machine. This tick 
et-box is preferably a skeleton box vertically 
arranged upon a supporting-frame, F, where. 
by the tickets may be readily inserted in the 
box, and descend by gravity gradually, as the 
lower ones are positively fed out of the box 
for exhibition. 
In order to relieve the lower tickets and the 
feed mechanism of the weight of a large pile 
of tickets, I may employ a brake-plate, e, from 
which the tickets may slip to supply the place 
of the few below said plate as they are fed out 
by the feeding mechanism. The supporting 
frame F of the ticket-box is also the support 
ing-frame of the feeding devices, which arear 
ranged at the back of the face-plate B. Said 
Supporting-frame F preferably consists of two 
side plates, ff, between which various parts 
of the feeding mechanism are mounted, and 
of supporting-posts f'f'-one at the rear end 
of each of said side plates, f, for example. 
The front ends of said side plates are prefera 
bly secured to or supported by the back face 
of the face-plate B. 
The feeding mechanism of the machine pref. 
erably consists of two feed-rollers, G. G., one in 
front of the other and somewhat lower in its 
plane of revolution, the shafts of which are fit 
ted to revolve in suitable bearings in the side 
plates, ff, of the frame F, between which said 
rollers revolve. Said feed-rollers are located 
just beneath the lower open end of the ticket 
box or guide E. Said feed-rollers are geared 
together, so as to revolve in the same di 
rection and at the same speed, by a train of 
gearing, H. I prefer two feed-rollers beneath 
the ticket-box to feed the tickets forward posi 
tively; but of course the number may be 
greater or less than two. One feed-l'oller in 
my experience does not operate so well as the 
two, but may of course be employed in some 
cases. The feed - rollers are operated inter 
mittently or at intervals as the tickets are to 
be fed, and they are driven by a gear-connec 
tion, I, with the revolving armature-shaft J of 
an electro-magnetic motor, K, having suitable. 
circuit-connections with a galvanic battery, 
L, or other source of electricity. 
In rear of the face-plate Bis mounted a plate, 
MI, so as to form a space or passage, m, at the 
rear of the face-plate B, through which the 
tickets are fed or dropped and in which they ; c. 
are held for the proper length of time with 
their indications exhibited at the windows of 
said face-plate. The sides of this passage in 
are closed, but it is open at top and bottom. 
The upper end of the plate M is bent back- 7: 
wardly and ends just, in front of the first feed 
roller G. In order to form a guide-slot for the 
tickets to the feed-passage 77, I provide a plate, 
N, which is preferably adjustable vertically 
by a slot and set-screw, for example-the low- 8c 
er edge of which lies just above the upper end 
of the plate M. The ticket-slot m', therefore, 
may be just of sufficient width to permit the 
feeding through it by the rollers G G of a sin 
gle ticket at a time, and avoid accidentally or 85 
irregularly feeding more than one at a time, 
which would disarrange the operation of the 
machine. The lower end of the ticket-passage 
m is open for the discharge of the tickets 
through the opening bin the face-plate B after go 
they have served their purpose at the windows 
b b. The tickets, as they drop from the ticket 
passage n, fall on an inclined shelf or chute, 
b", which directs them regularly out to the 
front of the machine through the discharge- 95 
opening l' in the face-plate thereof. 
Mounted upon the back of the face-plate B 
and plate M, secured thereto, are several rock 
shafts. A rock-shaft, O, is fitted to rock on 
the back of the face-plate B, and is provided Ico 
with a lateral or crank arm, o, and is connect 
ed through said armo by a wire or link, or 
other connection, p, with a lateral or crank 
arm, p', of a rock-shaft, P, fitted to rock on the 
back of the plate M. Said shaft P has bent Io5 
fingers p' p' secured thereto, the bent ends of 
which pass through slots or openings p" ))" in 
the plate M, so as to lie across the ticket-pas 
Sage m, and this is their normal position. 
Above the rock-shaft P is another rock-shaft, I Io 
Q, fitted to turn or rock on the back of the 
plate M. This shaft Q is provided with bent 
fingers (1 g of qi, and the shaft is weighted-as 
at , for example-so that the lower fingers, 
q q., extend through opening qi" (fill the plate II5 
M, and project across the ticket-passage m. 
This is their normal position. The upper bent 
ends of the upper fingers, q' (', are also adapt 
ed, when the shaft is rocked, to enter open 
ings q f' in the plate M, and project across the I2O 
ticket-passage n, in which event, of course, 
the lower fingers, q q., are withdrawn from 
across said ticket-passage. Above the rock 
shaft Q is another rock-shaft, R, fitted to turn 
on the plate MI, and provided with bent fin- 25 
gers ' ', the lower bent ends of which pass 
through openings '' in the plate M, and pro 
ject across the ticket-passage way n, in the 
normal position of said shaft. Projecting rear 
wardly from said shaft is a lateral arm, R, 13o 
which is an electric-circuit making and break 
ing arm. It carries contact wires or devices 
*-two in this example-one of which, r", 
dips into mercury-cups or makes contact with 
50 
55 
65 
 
352,086 
3 
O 
- 
electro - conducting substance or contacts, 
forming part of the electric circuit, including 
the electro-magnetic motor K. 
I have before stated that the clock mechan 
ism D controls the operation of the machine, 
and it is, consequently, automatic in its oper 
ation; and I have also stated that just before 
(preferably) a feeding operation of new tick 
ets an alarm is Sounded to announce the feed 
ing operation. The tickets which have al 
ready been exhibited are discharged, prefer 
ably just before the sounding of the alarm, 
and the preferred connections with the clock 
mechanislm are as follows: The rock-sha?t O 
has a second lateral or crank arm, o, linked or 
jointed to one end of a pivoted lever, S, the 
opposite end of which lever is fitted to engage 
the periphery of a cam, T, which is connected 
With or forms part of the clock mechanism, 
and is revolved once-for example, at the end 
of every half minute. The pivoted bell-ham 
iner U is also attached to the lever S, near its 
outer end, the weight of which, with the 
connecting links and shafts, keeps the outer 
end of the lever S down, and the inner end 
thereof bearing on the periphery of the cam T. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
Supposing the ticket rack or box to be pro 
vided with a number of tickets the indications 
of which are to be successively exhibited at the 
windows of the machine, the circuit through 
the motor is completed, (for example, by a 
suitable circuit making and breaking key of 
ordinary construction, which may be mounted 
at a convenient point on the base board of the 
apparatus,) and its armature shaft rapidly re 
The feed - rollers, through the gear. 
volves. 
connection with the motor-shaft, also slowly 
revolve, and the lowermost ticket is fed for 
Ward through the ticket-slot in', and drops down 
upon the bent ends of the fingers p" p" of the 
rock-shaft P, which catch and prevent the pas 
Sage of the ticket entirely through the passage 
m. The Weight of the ticket pushes aside the 
fingers of the rock-shafts Q and R, and they 
offer no opposition to its passage. The posi 
tion of the fed ticket is now such that its indi 
cation is exhibited at the lower one of the two 
exhibition windows bb, which openings may 
be double, to separate and render more dis 
tinct separate portions of the indications on 
the ticket. 
The electric circuit being still un 
broken, another ticket is fed into the passage. 
Way m, and is caught and held upon the ends 
of the upper fingers, q'g'', of the rock-shaft Q, 
which fingers were projected across the ticket 
passage by the camming action of the first tick 
et, which forced the lower fingers, q q., of said 
shaft outward, and holds them in that position, 
as the ticketis held and supported by the fingers 
. There are now two tickets in the passage. 
Way, and the top one is exhibiting its indica 
tions through the upper Window, b, in the face 
plate of the machine simultaneously with the 
exhibition of the lower ticket through the lower 
window. The feeding of the second ticket 
stops the feeding operation, and this by reason 
of forcing out of the ticket-passage the ends of 
the fingers r of the rock-shaft R and holding 
them out as long as the ticket is supported 
upon the fingers g of the rock-shaft Q. The 
crowding out of the fingers r 'obviously rocks 
the shaft Rupwardly, and raises the outer con 
tact end of the arm R, thus breaking the elec 
tric circuit and stopping the rotation of the 
electro-magnetic motor. The two fed tickets 
thus stand exhibiting their indications. When 
the interval between the revolutions of the 
cam T elapse and said cam is revolved, the 
inner end of the lever S is cammed down and 
its outer end raised, elevating the bell-hammer, 
and, by the connections p and rock-shaft. O, 
also rocking upwardly the rock-shaft P. This 
withdraws the fingers p" p" from across the 
ticket-passage m, and permits the lower ticket 
to drop out of said passage and be discharged. 
This lower ticket out of the way, the weighted 
rock-shaft Q also assumes its normal posi 
tion, with its lower fingers entering the 
ticket-passage, and as its upper fingel's are 
withdrawn, the upper ticket, no longer Sup 
ported, in turn drops down, and pressing aside 
the lower fingers of the rock-shaft, Q, is also 
discharged out at the discharge, opening b' in 
the face-plate B. Just at the completion of 
the discharge of the tickets from the passage 
m, the cam T has completed its revolution, and 
the weight of the parts causes the inner end of 
the lever S to drop back into the notch of said 
cam, and the hammer U to strike the bell U' 
and announce another feeding operation, which 
takes place as before, from the fact that the 
motor is again started, owing to the making 
of the contact by the contact-arm R, which 
was released for that purpose when the upper 
ticket dropped upon the withdrawal of the 
supporting-fingers g g of the rock-shaft Q. 
The operation thus continues, and two tickets 
are fed successively and at regular intervals 
to exhibit their indications at the windows b b. 
I have found it desirable, owing to the high 
speed which the motor shaft attains during the 
feeding operation, to automatically discon 
nect said shaft from the feed-rollers when the 
operation of said rollers is to cease on the feed 
ing of the second ticket; otherwise a partial 
feeding of a third ticket takes place, from the 
momentum of the motor-shaft after the circuit 
is broken by the feeding of the second ticket, 
and this tends to the disarrangement of the 
operation of the machine. I accomplish this 
by a clutch-connection, V, between the motor 
shaft and the pinion or gear I, and control the 
clutch by an electro-magnet, W, and a lever, 
W, said lever being connected with the clutch 
at one end, and having an armature, c, oppo 
site said magnet at the other. 
The circuit is 
completed through the magnet W by the con 
tact wire or connection 
of the contact-arm 
R at the same time it is completed through 
the motor-coils, and the armature w is drawn 
to the magnet and the clutch thrown into driv 
ing-connection with the pinion I and gear 
train H. Of course when the motor-circuit is 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
SS 
70 
95 
IOO 
lO5 
IO 
II5 
I25 
I 30 
 
4 
352,086 
broken, the electro-magnetic clutch-circuit is 
broken, and a spring, X, withdraws the clutch 
and disconnects the motor-shaft from the feed 
roller gearing, so that the revolution of the 
motol-shaft may come gradually to an end 
Without feeding effect after the circuit is au 
tomatically broken at the end of the feeding 
operation. I have shown two separate cir. 
cuits connecting the motor-coils and the clutch 
magnet coils; but it is obvious that one cir 
cuit and battery may be used instead of two. 
I have thus fully described my improvements 
as embodied in a machine for feeding tickets 
SO as to exhibit the indications of two tickets 
at a time at separate windows. If the tickets 
contain illustrations of letters of the alphabet 
thereon, the contrast in form and appearance 
of two separate letters is very distinct. After 
a Sufficient interval for instruction, two more 
contrasting letters are shown, and soon, so that 
an automatic educational machine is produced, 
which may advantageously be employed in ed 
ucating the young; or different tickets may 
have various advertisements thereon, to be 
rapidly exhibited in conspicuous places; or the 
machine may be used for playing games of 
amusement, or for exhibiting stock quotations, 
by having the name of a stock and a fraction 
of value thereon, the ticket appearing at the 
upper window indicating a rise in the price of 
the stock, and that at the lower window a de 
preciation of another stock. 
I have devised special improvements in the 
clock mechanism, by which the cam T may be 
revolved at regular intervals-say every half 
minute-and that matter will be duly claimed 
by me in another application. The manner of 
rotating the cam at the determined or desired 
intervals forms no part of the present applica 
tion. 
I do not claim the method herein described, 
as that forms the subject-matter of a separate 
application. 
IO 
an 3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
s 
I claim as my invention- 
1. The combination, with a vertical ticket 
rack or box, of a roller-feeding mechanism lo 
cated in the lower end and forming the bottom 
of Said rack or box, consisting of two or more 
flexible-faced rollers revolving in different 
planes, as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of a ticket-receptacle, 
ticket-feeding mechanism, a motor to drive said 
feed mechanism, and a clutch-connection be 
tWeen the motor and feed mechanism auto 
matically operated by the action of the tickets 
in transit, as set forth. 
65 
3. The combination, in a ticket-exhibiting 
machine, of a ticket-feeding mechanism and a 
clutch connecting said mechanism with a prime 
motor, said clutch being automatically Con 
trolled by the operation of feeding the tickets, 
as set forth. 
4. The combination, in an automatic ticket 
exhibiting machine, of a ticket-feeding mech 
anism located under a ticket-receptacle, and an 
electric motor, with a clutch-connection be-, 
tween said motor and feed mechanism auto 
matically controlled by an electro-magnet, and 
a battery operating both motor and magnet Si 
multaneously, as set forth. 
5. In an automatic ticket-exhibitor, the Com 
bination, with a ticket-receptacle, of a roller 
feeding mechanism located below said ticket 
receptacle and in contact with the lower or un 
dermost ticket, and means, substantially as 75 
described, for automatically controlling the 
feeding mechanism by the action of the fed 
tickets while falling by gravity when dis 
charged from said feed mechanism, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. In a ticket-exhibitor, the combination of 
a ticket-receptacle, the tickets within said re 
ceptacle, an electric motor, a feed mechanism 
for the tickets, and connections between said 
motor and feed mechanism to operate the feed 
and discharge the tickets, a clutch controlling 
said feed, a lever intermittently operated by 
the mechanism of a clock, and holding and re 
leasing at intervals the tickets as they fall by 
gravity from the feed, as set forth. 
7. The combination, in an automatic ticket 
exhibitor, of a ticket-receptacle, a ticket with 
in said receptacle, and a ticket-feeding mech 
anism, an electric motor having connections 
with said feed mechanism to operate the same, 
a clutch which controls said feed, a lever in 
termittently operated by the mechanislm of a 
clock, means for arresting and releasing the 
tickets as they fall by gravity from the feed 
mechanism, and for connecting and discon 
necting the clutch from the feed mechanism, 
said means being controlled by the intermit. 
tent action of said lever, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
hereto in presence of two witnesses. 
9) 
95 
HENRY J. ENNIS. 
Witnesses: 
R. W. BISHOP, 
S. J. FRIEDENHEIMER. 
EO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352186.txt	C. C. HENDERSON. 
CORN AND SEED PLANTER, 
Patented Nov. 9, 1886. 
A'zo. 1 
(No Model.) 
No. 352,186. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES : 
26%. 427.7%.2e 
% (64.4% y 
 
INVENTOR 
6-4 6-12%a. 
J/7(a.e...a...C. 
ATTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES CARROLL HENDERSON, OF WARREN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CORN AND SEED PLANTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,186, dated November 9, 1886. 
Application filed June 11, 1886. Serial No. 204,876. (No model.) 
- 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that, CHARLES CARROLLHEN 
DERSON, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Warren, in the county of Warren and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Corn and Seed Planting Machine, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
seed-planters, and has for its object to provide 
a device that will mark and space the ground 
uniformly, plant two or more rows at the same 
time, deposit the seed in any desired quantity 
in each hill, and place the seed in the ground 
to any desired depth. The mechanism for at 
taining these objects will be hereinafter more 
fully set forth in the specification, and pointed 
Out in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of the seed-planter. 
Fig. 2 is a detail side view of one of the drive 
Wheels, showing the interior flange, and shaft 
pulley, resting and moving upon said flange; 
Fig. 3, a detail front view showing the seed 
conductor and its connection with the main 
crank-shaft; Fig. 4, a detail side view of the 
seed-reservoir, slide-valve therein, valve-pull 
er, telescopic seed-conductor, and valved plant 
ing-foot; Fig. 5, a plan view of seed-slide 
valve and seed-opening; Fig. 6, a side view of 
F? shaft-rest and valve-opening mechanism for 
3o planting-foot; Fig. 7, a front view of same, and 
Fig. 8 a plan view of lever for raising the 
planting devices. 
it will be seen that the device consists of a 
seed box or reservoir, A, supported upon an 
axle, C, of any desired length, (its front side 
being flush with the front of the axle,) depend 
ing simply upon the number of rows to be 
planted at one time. Each of the drive-wheels 
B has an interior and circumferential flange, 
P, to guide and support friction-wheel F, 
which imparts motion to the transverse crank 
shaft E secured thereto. The crank-arms i 
on the cranks i of shaft E are made adjusta 
ble on said cranks by means of set Screws or 
boltsk, which pass through openings in each, 
as shown in Fig. 3. There will be as many of 
these crank-arms and cranks on shaft E as 
there are rows to be planted, and their oper 
ation will be explained hereinafter. 
The seed-dropping mechanism consists of an 
automatic slide in the box A, a telescopic de 
livery-tube, and a valved planting-foot. In 
the bottom of box A a slide-valve, a, is placed 
and extends beyond the sides, and is slotted at 55 
its front end and connected to the puller L by 
means of a bolt, a?, working in a slot in the 
front end of the slide. An opening, T, per 
mits the Seed to pass from the slide to seed 
conductors D, which deliver it into planting- 6o 
shoes M. The puller L is made angular, as 
shown, and has its upper end pivoted to the 
front side of the box. A by means of a staple, 
its lower end being secured to a strap, f', by a 
bolt or pin, f. This strap f is secured to the 65 
upper end of the seed-conductor and swings 
in conjunction with the upper half of said con 
ductor. 
The seed-conductor consists of two parts. 
The upper part, d, is hinged to the front of 7o 
the axle C, the axle having a groove cut in it, 
as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 4, to permit the 
conductor to swing back and forth. The lower 
portion, D, of the seed-conductor telescopes 
over the upper part, d, (which at its top is 75 
concaved to receive the seed,) and is secured to 
the crank-arm i' by means of a cross-shaped 
clasp, the front part, b, clasping the seed-con 
ductor, and the rear part, b, encircling the 
crank-arm i, and holds it sufficiently tight to 8o 
permit the seed-conductor to move up and 
down and reciprocate with the reciprocal 
| movement of the crank-arm. 
Referring more particularly to the drawings, A set-screw, m, tightens and holds the seed 
conductor to the crank-arm after it has been 85 
determined what depth the planting-foot shall 
enter the ground. As the shaft E and crank 
arm i reciprocate, the lower part, D, of the de 
livery-tube moves up and down over the up 
per part, d, thus giving the telescopic move. 9o 
ment before referred to. 
The planting - foot consists of a wedge 
shaped receptacle, M, on the lower end of tube 
D, and provided on its rear face with a door, 
S", hinged at S. A rod, n, is secured to the 95 
hinged door S of foot M, and extends upward 
parallel to the plane of the conducting-tube. 
A strap, N, is adjustably secured to the side 
of shaft-rest G by means of a set-screw pass 
ing through a longitudinal slot in said strap, IOO 
and can therefore be adjusted vertically to 
meet the upper end of rod in. The object of 
20 
25 
 
352,186 
this is as follows: As the planting-foot and 
Seed-conductors move forward they approach 
the vertical, and when they have reached their 
lowest point (the end of the foot being in the 
5 ground to its extreme depth) the upper end 
of rod in strikes the shoe v at end of slide N, 
which causes the rod n, to swing forward 
slightly, carrying the door back, and thus 
opening the door and permitting the Seed to 
Io escape. As soon as this full movementis conn 
pleted and the conducting-tubes are moving 
back the rod passes from beneath the shoe, 
and the door is again closed by means of the 
spring contained within the chamber of the 
15 planting-foot and secured to said door. The 
shaft E and wheels F are held down upon the 
flange P of wheels B by means of suitable 
springs, , in the boxing, thus preventing slip 
ping of the wheels in their motion. The shaft 
2O rests are made in two parts, G. G', and made 
vertically adjustable by means of set-screws 
W, which pass through slots in the piece G', 
Fig. 6. A rod, O, extends across the front of 
the seed-box A, and is pivotally secured there 
25 to by staples u, driven into the box. The ends 
of this rod are bent forward, forming bearings 
for rods H, which at their lower ends encircle 
the shaft E. A short arm, 2, Fig. 8, is also 
bent forward, and has depending from it a 
3O chain, I, which is secured to the central crank 
arm, i, to turn up said Crank-arm at the same 
time the shaft is being raised, which is accom 
plished by means of the lifting hand-lever h, 
made integral with the shaft 0. The distance 
35 between the rows is obtained by the distribu 
tion of the planters along the axle. Thus, if 
it is desired to have four feet between the rows, 
place the outside planters two feet from the 
center of tire of wheel B to the center of plant 
4O ing-foot M, the remaining ones will be placed 
four feet from center to center of said plant 
ing-feet. In this machine the wheels do their 
own marking, for as the machine is turned the 
outside wheel follows the track of the former 
The complete operation of the device is as 
follows: As the wheels B move forward they 
cause the pulleys F to move by friction on the 
flange P, and as the shaft E is rigidly secured 
5o thereto this shaft commences to turn and re 
ciprocate the crank-armsi'. This in turn causes 
the planting-feet and seed-conductors to be 
raised and moved forward, giving the spacing 
movement desired. Now, as these tubes move 
55 forward, the puller L attached thereto (and 
to the slide-valve () moves forward, drawing 
out the valve and permitting the seed to drop 
into the delivery-tube D, and from thence in 
foot MI; but as the tubes commence to reach the 
6O vertical the puller L and slide-valve a move 
back and are again ready to withdraw the 
seed. The tubes D and planting-feet move, 
when in the ground, practically in an oval arc; 
hence the point of foot M reaches the ground 
65 at the inner end of the longer axis, then passes 
into the ground and reaches its greatest depth 
at the lower end of the shorter axis, and then 
45 inside wheel, and so on. 
 
90 
moves outwardly along the curve until the 
crank-arm moves up to its highest position, 
when the planting foot travels on nearly a to 
straight line for four feet, and then again 
enters the ground, and this movement is con 
tinuous for all the planting-feet and their 
actuating mechanism. When the end of the 
field is reached, the driver simply li?ts lever 75 
h up and back to the vertical, which in turn 
lifts the shaft E and crank-arns, through 
the intervention of rods H and chain I. 
When the turn has been made, the lever h. 
is again thrown forward and the machine is 
again ready for action. It may be here stated 
that as the crank-arms it rise the tubes D are 
carried up and telescope with d, and as the said 
arms descend the tubes D descend with them. 
But four valve - pullers are really needed, 85 
two at each end of the outer end valves. The 
remaining valves can be operated by a bar 
running across the ends and joined, as in a 
gang movement. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a seed-planter, the combination, with 
the driving-wheels provided with an internal 
circumferential flange, of pulley-wheels Sup 
ported by and moving upon said flanges, said 
wheels actuating a shaft which imparts notion 
to the planting mechanism, as Set forth. 
2. In a seed-planter, the combination, with 
the internally-flanged driving-wheels and fric 
tion-pulleys supported by and moving there 
on, of a crank-shaft provided with adjustable 
crank-arms, as set forth. 
3. In a seed-planter, the combination, with 
the flanged driving - wheels, friction - pulleys, 
and crank - shaft having adjustable crank 
arms, of seed-delivery tubes adjustably se 
cured to said crank-arms, said tubes telescop 
ing within each other, as set forth. 
4. In a seed-planter, the combination, with 
the seed-reservoir and sliding valves in bot 
tom thereof, of seed-delivery tubes, said tubes 
being of unequal diameter and moving one 
within the other, one part of said tubes being 
hinged to the axle, the other one adjustably 
secured to a crank-arm on the actuating-shaft, 
as set forth. 
5. In a seed-planter, the combination, with 
the seed-reservoir and delivery - tubes, of a 
planting-shoe provided with a hinged door, 
said door having an arm projecting upward 
and adapted to engage with a shoe on a rod or . 
strap adjustably secured to the shaft-bearings, 
whereby the door in said shoe is automatically 
opened and closed as the foot passes through 
the ground, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a seed-planter, the combination, with 
the seed-box and delivery-tube, of a slide-valv 
in the seed-box, and a valve-puller secured to 
said valve and delivery-tube and pivotally se 
cured to theseed-box, substantially asset forth. 
7. In a seed-planter, the combination, with 
the seed-box and delivery-tubes, of the axle C, 
having frontrecesses to accommodate the back 
R 
OO 
IO 
II5 
J 25 
352,186 
M 
3. 
... 
" 
8. In a seed-planter, the combination, with erating mechanism, of the shaft O, pivoted to I5 
9. In a seed-planter, the combination, with 
ward movement of the delivery-tubes, as set 
forth. 
the seed-receptacle, crank-shaft E, and its op 
the seed-receptacle, delivery-tubes, and plant- the seed-box and provided with a hand-lever, 
5 ing-feet provided with a door and arm extend- the end rods secured thereto and to the crank 
ing upwardly therefrom, of a foot in the path shaft, and the chains I, attached to shaft O, and 
of R E. said foot being St E. E. the adjustable crank-arms, as set forth. 
justable rod or strap attached to the shaft 
bearings, whereby the movement of the deliv. 
Io ery-tubes causes said arm to come in contact. 
with said foot and open and close the doors, as 
set forth. 
JoHN AUGUST BEURSTEDT, 
CHARLES EDWARD GIFFIN. . 
CHARIES CARROLI, HENDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
V 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352286.txt	(No Model.) 
C. ALKINS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MANUFACTURE OF RAI, BRACES, 
No. 352,286. 
... Patented Nov. 9, 1886. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. ALKINS, 
2 sheets-sheet 2. 
MANUFACTURE OF RAIL BRACES, 
No. 352,286. 
Patented Nov. 9, 1886. 
 
N 
N 
N 
SNS 
 
 
 
22 
 
N 
S-4 
- 
NN 
77%za32. 
4 / 
5 
Z72eavez22d 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES ALKINS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MANUFACTURE OF RAIL-BRACES. 
SPECIEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,286, dated November 9, 1886. 
Application filed August 10, 1886. Serial No. 210,510. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
To alZ Luflon, it may coneer'7. 
Beit known that I, CHARLESALKINS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in the Manufacture of Rail-Braces, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to the manufacture of 
rail-braces which are employed for the purpose 
of bracing the rails of a railroad, particularly 
at frogs or switches, or at points where bends 
or curves occur in the road. These braces are 
usually constructed with a base portion adapt. 
ed to be spiked down upon a cross-tie or other 
appropriate bed, and with an abutment rising 
from said base portion and adapted to fit 
against the rail. Prior to my invention rail 
braces of such character have been formed of 
cast metal, the abutment being necessarily 
2O cast solid, in order to insure the requisite 
strength and durability. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to 
produce at a reduced cost and in a more con 
venient way a rail-brace possessing in a high 
degree both strength and durability, and in 
volving all of the advantages without the dis 
advantages of the old construction of rail 
braces; second, to rapidly and economically 
produce a rail-brace possessing all of the nec 
essary features of strength, durability, and 
adaptability to its destined purpose, and at 
the same time involving the employment of 
considerably less metal than in the old con 
struction of brace, whereby a saving in mate 
rial is effected and the cost of production 
lessened, without weakening or otherwise de 
tracting from the serviceability, of the brace; 
third, to effect a considerable lessening of the 
time and labor heretofore incident to the manu 
facture of rail-braces, thereby reducing the 
cost of their manufacture and permitting large 
orders to be filled rapidly. 
In carrying out my invention the rail-brace 
is stamped and struck up by dies from a blank 
of wrought or malleable iron or steel in a 
manner to convert the blank into a suitable 
base provided with a hollow abutment adapted 
to engage the rail in order to effectively brace 
the same. As Will be hereinafter seen, the 
blanks can be sheared from a strip or oblong 
plate without loss of material, and the said 
blanks then cut or trimmed S0 as to shape 
45 
35 
v 
them with reference to the desired ultimate 
. 
shape of the abutting end or face of the hol- 
low abutment, and to the particular way in 55 
which it is desired said hellow abutment shall 
bear against or engage the rail. It will be 
obvious that in the production of said braces 
considerably less time and labor will be in 
volved than in the production of the old brace 
of cast metal, particularly for the reason that 
the provision of molds for forming the cast 
ing is rendered. unnecessary, and that said 
braces will be lighter and more economical 
than the old construction of cast-metal rail 
brace, on account of the saving effected in the 
material of which the brace is formed. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a metal strip or plate, which may be cut 
or sheared along the lines l1, in order to pro-7o 
vide without Waste of material any suitable 
number of blanks. Fig. 2 represents one of 
said blanks cut away at the corners of its wider . 
end. Fig. 3 represents in perspective a rail 
brace struck up from the blank of Fig. 2. Fig. 
4 represents the blank of Fig. 2...notched at its 
wider end. Fig. 5 represents in perspective 
the rail-brace struck up from the blank of Fig. 
4. Fig. 6 is a side elevation of the rail-brace 
of Fig. 5 applied to a rail, which latteris shown 
in cross-section. Fig. 7 represents a section 
on linea ac, Fig. 6, with the rail principally 
Fig. 8 shows inside 
shown in side elevation. 
elevation the brace of Fig. 3 applied to a rail, 
which latter is shown in cross-section. 
The length of the blank is conveniently de 
termined by the width of the plate or strip, 
which is sheared along lines 1 oblique to its 
length and alternately converging and diverg 
ing toward one of the side edges of said plate 
or strip, whereby each blank gradually widens 
from one end to the other. This widening up 
of the blank toward one end is desirable, in or 
der to provide material for the formation of 
the hollow abutment, whereby after the forma- g5 
tion of said hollow abutment the base portion 
of the brace will have a rectangular or proxi 
mately rectangular shape, the material in ex 
cess of the rectangular shape prior to the sub 
jection of the blank to the dies being taken up 
in the formation of the hollow abutment. Af. 
ter the blank has been formed as indicated in 
Fig. 1 it can be cut at its wider end with ref. 
erence to the desired ultimate shape of that 
75 
OO 
352,286 
O 
25 
portion of the brace which is designed to bear 
against or engage the rail. A desirable mode 
of thus shaping or trimming the blank is illus 
trated in Fig. 2, wherein the two corner por 
5 tions at the widest end of the blank are cut or 
trimmed off, as at 22. In order to produce 
from the said blank a rail-brace, it is subjected 
to the action of dies, which operate to strike 
up its wider end portion, so as to form the 
hollow abutment 3, which rises from the base 
portion 4 and stands intermediate of the two 
longer side edges, 5, of said base, in order to 
leave at each side of the abutment a base-flange, 
6, consisting of a portion of the width of the 
I5 base. By previously shearing off the two afore 
said corners of the blank the frontendedgepor 
tions, 2, of the base diverge outwardly toward 
the rear end of the brace, so that when the brace 
is applied they will lie oblique to the length 
of the rail. This feature permits the abutting 
end of the brace to be set sufficiently close 
up to the rail, it being observed that by reason 
of the inclination of the upper side of the 
base of the rail B the brace, if made from a 
squared blank, would at its base strike the 
rail-base too near the edge of the latter. Each 
one of said baseportions 6 of the base is at an 
appropriate point in its length formed with a 
bend, 7, corresponding to the transverse curva 
tures of the base of the rail, in order that this 
end portion of the brace may fit the said rail 
base, as in Fig. 8, wherein the rail B is shown 
in cross-section with the brace of Fig. 3 ap 
plied. In said Fig. 8 the brace shown in per 
spective in Fig. 3 is shown with the top por 
tion of its hollow abutment fitted against the 
under side of the tread b of the rail, in which 
way the brace can be wedged between the 
tread b and base b of a railroad-rail. That 
4o portion of the brace which is presented to the 
rail may be and is herein, for convenience, 
termed its front or face end. The hol 
low abutment is arched or substantially V 
shaped in cross-section, and has its highest 
point at the front end of the brace, from which 
said point the top and side walls of the hollow 
abutment incline downwardly, so as to gradu 
ally decrease in height toward the rear end por. 
tion of the brace, the rear termination of the 
abutment being desirably between the two ends 
of base of the brace, Substantially as shown. The 
bends 7 in the brade form shoulders which fit 
upon the base of the rail, while the highest 
portion of the hollow abutment serves as a 
55 shoulder which abuts and bends against the 
under side of the tread, thus permitting the 
brace to be firmly wedged in between said two 
portions of the rail. It will be observed in 
said Fig. 3 that the base is rectangular in out 
6o line, the reduction in width of the wider por 
tion of the blank of Fig. 2 being due to the 
formation of the hollow abutment, which, when 
the blank is struck up, takes up all material 
previously found in the extra width of the 
In Fig. 4 the blank A is shown formed simi 
larly to the blank of Fig. 2, but has a seg 
65 blank. 
35 
45 
mental or semicircular shaped portion re 
moved from its widest end, so as to provide 
between its two oblique edge portions 2 a semi- 7o 
circular notch, 8. When this form of blank is 
struck up by the dies, so as to form the hollow 
abutment 3, Figs. 5, 6, and 7, Said abutment, 
while similar in other respects to that of Fig. 
3, will at its highest front end have a curve or 75 
concavity, 9, which matches and receives a 
portion of the tread b of the rail, as in Figs. 
6 and 7, wherein the brace fits the base b of 
the rail, while its abutment fits the side edge 
portion of the same. 
It is understood that the metal blanks could 
be struck up to form hollow abutments vary 
ing in shape from those herein shown, and 
that the blanks can be composed of either steel 
or wrought or malleable iron. The form of 85 
blanks herein shown is, however, particul 
larly well adapted for the purpose, and the 
shape of the abutment is especially desirable, 
since the material is utilized in a most eco 
nomical manner, and an exceedingly strong go 
and at the same time comparatively light rail- . 
brace produced. 
The base portion of the brace will be pro 
vided with any suitable arrangement of notch 
or notches and holes for the spikes by which 95 
the brace is to be secured in place, said notch 
and holes being conveniently formed by the 
dies simultaneously with the operation of 
striking up the hollow abutment and other 
wise shaping the brace to the contour of a rail. loo 
In conclusion, it may be observed that the 
dies serve to strike up the blank between its 
two side edges for a certain portion of the 
length of its wider end, in which way the width 
of the blank at said wider end affords ample 
material to form an abutment of sufficient 
height at its front end. The abutment, being 
of substantially inverted-V shape, is exceed 
ingly strong, since it is arched in cross-section 
and united with a large portion of the base 4. 
What I claim as my inventionis 
1. The improvement in the art of manufac 
turing rail-braces consisting in striking up a 
metal blank into a hollow abutment rising 
from a base, with its front or abutting end and 
said base shaped to the portions of the rail 
against which the brace is to bear, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The improvement in the art of manufac 
turing rail-braces consisting in striking upbe 
tween the two opposite side edges and at one 
end portion of a metal blank a hollow abut 
ment, with its front or abutting end shaped to 
the portions of the rail against which it is to 
bear, substantially as described. 
3. The improvement in the art of manufac 
turing rail-braces consisting informing an ob 
long metal blank widening toward one end, and 
striking up a length of the wider end portion 
of said blank into a hollow abutment, with its I 30 
front or abutting end and the material left as a 
base shaped to the portions of the rail against 
which the brace is to bear, substantially as de 
I I5 
IC5 
O 
Scribed. 
w 
M 
 
352,286 
IO 
4. The improvement in the art of manufac 
turing rail-braces consisting in forming an ob 
long metal blank, A, widening toward one end, 
shearing or cutting off the corners at its wider 
end, as at 22, and striking up said blank into 
a hollow abutment, 3, rising from a base, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The improvement in the art of manufac 
turing rail-braces consisting in forming the 
blank A, cutting the same to form a notch, 
substantially as described, in one of its ends, 
and striking up said blank into an abutment, 
3, rising from a base, and at its highest point 
shaped to the curvature of the edge portion of 
the tread of a rail, substantially as set forth. 
6. The blank A for a rail-brace, wideningto 
Ward one end, substantially as described. 
7. The blank A for a rail-brace, widening to 
Ward one end and cut away at the corners of its 
wider end, as at 22, substantially as described. 
8. The blank A for arail-brace, widening to 
ward one end and notched at its widest end, as 
at 8, substantially as described. 
9. A struck-up metal rail-brace having a 
hollow abutment rising from a base, substan- 25 
tially as described. 
10. The struck-up metal rail-brace formed 
with the hollow abutment 3, rising from a base, 
4, substantially as described. 
with the hollow abutment 3, provided with a 
concavity, 9, and rising from a base, substan 
tially as described. 
11. The struck-up metal rail-brace formed 3o 
CHARLES ALKINS. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. G. PAGE, 
L. S. LOGAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352386.txt	(No Model.) 
A. E. BAILEY. 
PORTABLE WARMING APPARATUS, 
No. 352,386, 
Patented Nov. 9, 1886, 
AF 
(2 
a & 
SS 
t agE 
). 
yellege 
4672 
 
 
 
 
 
E. Ye 32Si2 
Sg|U 
39a 
M 
za 
HIH 3 
4x4 El YSEE. 
TTC 
as EYs 
E 
E. 
S. s S. 2 ca E. 
s: E. ca, 
Es E. 
fe 
SAze 
IP 2" 
ea awa 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A N N A. E. BAILEY, OF CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS. 
PORTABLE WARMING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,386, dated November 9, 1886. 
Application filed December 15, 1885, serial No. 185,702. (No model.) 
IO 
To all, Luhon, it 7ay concern: 
Beit known that I, ANNA. E. BAILEY, of Chi 
cago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in a Portable Warming Appara 
tus, of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description, that will enable others to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to a warming device 
that is more especially intended for the use of 
persons employed on street and grip cars; 
the object being to provide a portable device 
that is so constructed as to be adapted for use 
by persons who, from the nature of their em 
ployment, are compelled to perform their dul 
ties in a standing and exposed position. 
Figure 1 is a back view in perspective of a 
device embodying my improved features; 
Fig. 2, a vertical section; Fig. 3, a broken 
front view; Fig. 4, a horizontal section in the 
plane 4, Fig. 2; and Fig. 5, a broken away 
sectional detail. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
body or water - reservoir of a semicircular 
shape, open at the back, and consisting of the 
vertical part at and the horizontal part a'. 
This body is formed of double walls act, with 
sufficient space between the same to provide 
the continuous water compartment or space 
B, as shown in Fig. 2. The chambered base 
C is provided for the reception of the heat 
ing-lamp (t. b is a removable false bottom, 
5 which will be ordinarily composed of soap 
stone, baked clay, or other suitable material 
adapted to temper the heat. 
D is a vent or escape tube, which will pre 
vent the water from becoming too hot or a 
pressure forming in the hot-Water compart 
The apparatus is charged by remov 
ment. 
25 
ing the plug b, while the handles did provide 
means for lifting or carrying the device. 
In using the warming apparatus the person 
will step in at the open side and stand on the 
bottomb, the overcoat extending down out 
side of the upper part of the device and al 
lowing the heat generated to ascend with a 
gentle radiation and diffuse itself throughout 
the clothing, thus keeping the body of the 
person using it warm as well as the feet. This 
arrangement also fully protects the feet and 
lower part of the limbs from the draft which 
comes up through the grip-slot in the bottom 
of the car. 
The grip-cars used on cable roads are usu 
ally open all around, and the driver is neces 
sarily exposed to the severity of the weather, 
and is required to remain in a standing posi 
tion, and cannot move around in the least for 
exercise, thus being compelled to suffer a great 
deal from the cold. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a warming apparatus, the combina 
tion, with the semicircular body A, open at 
the back and consisting of the vertical part a 
and the horizontal part a, constructed double 
so as to provide a water-space between, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a portable warming apparatus consist 
ing of a semicircular body having double walls 
to form a water-receptacle, a chambered base, 
a heating device inserted in said base, and an 
escape or vent tube, all constructed and ar 
ranged to operate substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
ANNA. E. BAILEY. 
Witnesses: 
L. M. FREEMAN, 
V. STANWOOD. 
45 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352486.txt	(No Model.) 
W. R. PATTERSON, 
GAIWANIG BATTERY, 
 
 
 
N, PETERs, Photolithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. PATTERSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WESTERN ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
GALVANIC BATTERY. 
S?:CI:ICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,486, dated November 9, 1886, 
Application filed May 24, 1886. Serial No. 203,119. (No model.) 
To all zu filo7nn, ib 702.at/ co7ucern: 
Be it known that II, WILLIAM R. PATTER 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented a certain new and use 
ful. Improvement in Galvanic Batteries, of 
which the following is a full, clear, concise, and 
exact description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawing, forming a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to galvanic batteries; 
and it consists, first, in using sufficient non 
conducting oil upon the surface of the liquid of 
the battery to prevent chemical action upon 
the connecting-wires at the points where they 
are united with the elements of the battery. 
My invention also consists in inclosing the 
chloride-of-silver element in a glass tube, said 
glass tube bcing Open at both ends and pref. 
erably suspended above the bottom of the jar, 
the opening at the top of the tube coming be. 
low the lower Surface of the oil. 
Heretofore it has been usual in chloride-of 
silver batteries to wrap the chloride-of-silver 
element with cloth or parchment-paper to pre 
vent contact with the zinc. Sometimes, also, 
a block of rubber has been placed between the 
elements for the same purpose, the elements 
being bound together by rubber bands. When 
cloth or parchment has been used, in order to 
examine the chloride-Of-Silver element it has 
been necessary to remove it from the battery 
and unwind the Wrapping. In the use of 
a block of rubber it is found that particles of 
silver or zinc becoming detached will fall and 
lodge upon the block of rubber, thus forming 
electrical connection between the two elements. 
By the use of a transparent tube, as herein de 
scribed, the chloride of-silver elements may be 
readily inspected at any time Without removal 
from the jar. This tube being open at both 
ends allows the liquids to circulate freely and 
prevents connection between the silver and 
zinc elements. 
45 In the accompanying drawing I have shown 
a sectional view of a cell of battery embody 
ing my invention. 
The liquid a may be a solution of sal-ammo 
niac, such as is commonly used in chloride-of. 
silver batteries. The chloride-of-silver ele 
35 
3O 
 
5 s 
?? 
? 
solder. 
ment b and the Zinc element are suspended by 
their connecting-wires d and e, which pass 
through the cork finserted in the jarg. The 
connecting-wired is of silver, and is prefer 
ably bent at its lower end to form a support 
for the glass tube. h. The Oil i is sufficient to 
Cover the joint between the zinc element and 
its connecting-Wire e, which, on account of the 
protection of the non-conducting oil, may be 
of Copper instead of silver, as heretofore re 
quired, and may be connected with the zinc by 
Oil has heretofore been used upon the sur. 
face of galvanic batteries to retard evapora 
tion and prevent the salts from forming in crys 
tals on the side of the jar. A non-conducting 
oil, however, has not been used, to my knowl 
edge, to prevent galvanic action at the junc 
tion of dissimilar metals. If the junction be. 
tween the copper wire and the zinc element 
were covered with the sal-ammoniac solution, 
there would be injurious local action between 
the copper and the zinc, and between the cop 
per and the silver there would be injurious 
galvanic action. Even when silver wire has 
been uscd to connect with the zinc injurious 
local action has not been avoided. Non-con 
ducting oil therefore may be used to advantage 
With a silver connecting-wire, and in any case 
when solder is used at the joint the non-con 
ducting oil is of great advantage. The joint 
between the connecting-Wire and the zinc elle 
ment has also been painted or paraffined here 
tofore, but the results have been unsatisfactory. 
It is found better to close the jar by the 
cork for otherwise to prevent spilling the 
liquid. The jar, however, may be left open, 
in which case the wires are simply bent over 
the upper edge of the jar. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with the chloride-of 
silver element of a galvanic battery, of a trans 
parent non-conducting tube open at both ends 
inclosing Said element, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
2. In a galvanic battery, the combination, 
With the Zinc element, of a copper connecting. 
Wire, and an insulating-oil upon the surface 
Of the liquid COvering the joint between said 
75 
8 
90 
95 
352,486 
3. In a galvanic battery, the chloride-of-sil- purpose specified. 
5 spective connecting-wires, in combination with name this 20th day of May, A. D. 1SS6. 
Zinc element and its copper connecting-wire, silver element, the upper end of said tube be- Io 
as described. 
Ver element and the Zinc element and their re- 
non-conducting oil floating upon the liquid of 
the battery and covering the joint between the 
Zinc element and its connecting-wire, and a 
transparent tube surrounding the chloride-of- 
ing below the oil, Substantially as and for the 
In Witness whereof I hereunto subscribe my 
WILLIAM R. PATTERSON. 
Witnesses: 
? 
GEORGE P. BARTON, 
E. H. MCCUILLOCH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352586.txt	(No Model.) 
H. G. SWOPE. 
CORN DRILL, 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 352,586. 
Patented Nov. 16, 1886. 
Azz 1. 
 
avia esses: - 
4. C. Jirdinastor. 
Zvezzor: 
7 
 
azszzorreezy. 
ETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washingto 
 
(No Model.) 
H. G. SWOPE, 
CORN DRILL, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 352,586. 
Patented Nov. 16, 1886. 
 
Alitzzesses: 
20.0/irdinastora. 
-zerzu 427 
-e1%ree-62e2 1. 
2. 
e2, 
 
(No Model.) 
H. G. SWOPE. 
CORN DRILL, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 352,586. 
Patented Nov. 16, 1886. 
 
Atitvesses: 
A. (Virazaszoa. 
- 
Zzverzifor: 
ev%. --6-4-74 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE. G. SWOPE, OF LIBERTY, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO THE RUDE 
BROTHERS MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CORN-DRILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,586, dated November 16, 1886. 
Application filed September 10, 1886. Serial No. 213,209. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HoRACE G. SWOPE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Liberty, in 
the county of Union and State of Indiana, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Corn-Drills, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to that class of corn 
drills known as double-row drills,' and 
wherein the widths of the furrows can be 
changed, as desired; and it has for its object 
improvements in construction as well as in 
creased efficiency of this class of machines. 
The novelty of my invention will be herein 
set forth, and specifically pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, 
Sheet I, is a plan view of my improved ma 
chine. Fig. 2, Sheet 2, is a side elevation of 
the same. Fig. 3, Sheet 2, is a detail view, 
showing the Seed-boxes raised and the driv 
ing mechanism out of gear. Fig. 4, Sheet 3, 
25 is a plan view of one of the seed-spouts, ad 
justable hoe-bracket, and furrowing and cov 
ering shovels. Fig. 5, Sheet 3, is a bottom plan 
view of one of the feed-spouts. Fig. 6, Sheet 
3, is a sectional elevation through the dotted 
line a a of Fig. 4, With the feed-spout removed. 
Fig. 7, Sheet 3, is a plan view of the adjusta 
ble hoe-bracket. Fig. 8, Sheet 3, is a detail 
side elevation of one of the lifting-levers and 
its connections. 
The same letters of reference are used to in 
dicate identical parts in all the figures. 
As seen by reference to Figs. 1 and 2, the 
main frame of the machine is composed of an 
axle, A, carrying at its ends stub-spindles, 
upon which the carrying-wheels B are secured 
and revolve, said wheels having secured to the 
inner sides of their hubs driving sprocket 
wheels (t. Secured and extending rearwardly 
from the axle are two beams, C, connected at 
their rear ends by a beam, D, and by a trans 
verse shaft, E. 
Between the beams C are two central beams, 
F, secured near their rear ends to the beam D, 
and serving to Support the seat-beam G., pro 
vided with its seat H, and between the for 
ward projecting ends of which the pole or 
45 
So 
3O 
35 
55 
65 
tongue is secured. A rear caster-wheel, I, is 
swiveled, by means of arms J and any Suita 
ble pivot pin or bolt, to the rear of the main 
frame at its middle. 
The seeding apparatus is carried upon two 
secondary frames suitably hinged to the axle 
at its outer end. Each of these secondary 
frames is composed of two bars, K, united by 
tie-rods and spacing-thimble L, and provided 6o 
upon its outer side with a bracket, b, in which 
is journaled a sprocket-wheel, c, in line With 
the sprocket-wheels at upon the hubs of the 
wheels B. A drive- chain, d, connects the 
sprocket-wheels a and c. 
Secured to or formed integral with the 
sprocket-wheels c are small pinions e, meshing 
with an inverted crown-pinion secured upon 
the lower projecting end of the feed-plateshaft 
within the feed boxes or hoppers M, whose in 
terior feeding mechanism may be of the usual 
or any suitable construction. These feed 
boxes are pivoted at their forward ends by 
means of arms g to lugs h upon the beams K, 
and have at their rear ends bracket-arms i, 75 
to the outer rear sides of which vertically-ad 
justable plates j are secured, each of said plates 
carrying an outwardly-projecting stud or pin, 
k, confined in segmental slots l in crank-arms 
N, whose lower ends are pivoted, as at in, to 8o 
the outer sides of the outer beams K. A rod, 
n, is hooked to each of the crank-arms N, 
extends forward, and is adjustably pivoted to 
a plate, o, upon each end of the axle, or to any 
other convenient fixed point upon the main 85 
frame above the axis, upon which the Second 
ary frame is vibrated; and the arrangement of 
the parts is such that when the secondary 
frames are in a substantially horizontal posi 
tion, with the machine at work, the pinsk will 
be at the rear lower ends of the slots l, and the 
pinions f will be in engagement with the pin 
ions e, so as to receive motion from the sprocket 
wheels c and a and drive-chain d, to cause the 
operation of the drilling mechanism; but when 
ever the secondary frames are raised So as to 
bring the hoes out of contact with the ground 
as intransporting the machine-the act of rais 
ing the secondary frames will, through the me 
dium of the rods in, push back the slotted 
crank-arms N, which in traveling back will 
raise the pinsk, thereby lifting the seed-boxes 
95 
IOO 
 
e 
352,586 
25 
O 
sufficiently to cause the disengagement of the 
pinions ef, thus throwing the feeding mechan 
ism out of gear. 
It will be observed that the slots l have in 
clined shoulders near their upper ends, so that 
the pins k are more abruptly and quickly 
lifted near the ends of the backward stroke of 
the arms N. 
To enable the driver from his seat to readily 
lift the secondary frames, I provide two levers, 
O, pivoted near the forward ends of the beams 
C, as at p, Fig. 8, from which levers pivoted 
rods P extend back and are connected to the 
upper ends of the bell-crank arms Q, extend 
ing from sleeves R, pivoted upon the outer 
ends of the shaft E. The lower ends of these 
bell-crank arms have outwardly - projecting 
pins or studs q, which are confined in a hori 
zontally-slotted bracket, S, secured upon each 
of the inner beams, K, of the secondary frames. 
By drawing back the levers O the bell-crank 
arms are so rotated as to lift up the secondary 
frames sufficiently high to bring the shovels 
out of the ground and throw the seeding mech 
anism out of gear by the same operation. The 
rods P are so pivoted to the levers Othat when 
the latter are drawn back their pivoted points, 
as seen in Fig. 8, are brought below the piv 
oted points of the levers, thus forming a lock. 
Toes r upon the lower forward ends of the 
levers come in contact with a flange, 8, or other 
suitable stop, to prevent the levers O from 
being thrown too far forward and the second 
ary frames from being lowered beyond their 
proper working position: 
The hoe-conduits T, Figs. 2 and 6, have se 
cured to their lower front ends the furrow 
shovels U, and to lugs V, projecting from their 
rear sides, curved covering-shares W, which 
are adjustably attached thereto by a pivot 
bolt, .t, and a locking-bolt, u, which engages 
with notches or perforations v in the lugs V. 
This hoe-conduit is pivoted at its rear end, as at 
w, to lugs upon the under side of a slotted plate, 
X, which is provided on its forward under side 
with a perforated lug, a, passed through an 
aperture in the forward projecting end of the 
hoe-conduit and adapted to receive a wooden 
brake-pin, l'. The plate Xis flat upon its top 
and provided with transverse slots c', by which 
it is adjustably secured to the under side of 
the beams K by means of bolts passed through 
said beams and slots. The plate is sufficiently 
wide and theslots sufficiently long to change the 
widths of the furrows from three and one-half 
feet to four feet, (more or less,) as is desired. 
The plate X is likewise provided with an aper 
ture, d, just over the top of the hoe-conduit, 
and receives in its upper end the feed-spout A, 
which spout is held in place by a slotted clip 
plate, e, and a thumb-screw, f'. The upper 
end of the feed-spout is flaring and comes un 
der the delivery-aperture of the seed-box. 
When the width of the furrows is adjusted by 
5 sliding and clamping the plates X, the feed 
spout has to be turned to accommodate the 
change. This is done by loosening the clip 
O 
35 
45 
55 
O 
plate, lifting the spout, whose lower end is 
provided with teats g', which engage with 
notches h. in the aperture d', and reinserting 
it in its properly-adjusted position, and re 
clamping it with the clip-plate. 
It will be seen from this construction that I 
have a perfectly - balanced and rigid main 
frame supported on three wheels in such man 
ner that the weight of the machine is in no 
wise thrown upon the horses' necks; also, that 
in adjusting the width of furrows the sec 
ondary frames carrying the seeding apparatus 
do not have to be moved, as in other machines 
of this class; also, that the operator is so 
placed upon the machine as to enable him to 
control its operation and to See at all times 
that it is working properly. Again, it will 
be observed that the covering - shares form 
practically a part of the hoe conduit or stand 
ard, so that in case an obstruction is net sufi 
cient to break the pin b the shares W. as well 
as the shovel U, could swing back out of the 
way. 
I am aware of the State Of the art as set 
forth in the patent to Fulghan, January 29, 
1878, and to Runstetler, August 17, 1886, and 
do not claim the construction therein shown. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a double-row corn-drill, the combina 
tion, with a rigid main frame supported upon 
two carrying and driving wheels, and a rear 
caster-wheel, of two independently hinged and 
vibrating secondary frames united to the main 
frame at each side thereof, and carrying the 
seeding mechanism and furrowing-hoes, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a double-row corn-drill having a main 
frame supported on wheels, and vibrating sec 
ondary frames hinged thereto, of the seed-boxes 
hinged to said secondary frames, seeding mech 
anism within said boxes, driving mechanism 
actuated by the main wheels, and connecting 
mechanism, whereby when said secondary 
frames are lowered the seeding mechanism and 
driving mechanism are automatically thrown 
into gear, and whereby when said secondary 
frames are raised the seeding mechanism and 
driving mechanism are automatically thrown 
out of gear, substantially as described. 
3. In a double-row corn-drill, the combina 
tion, with the main frame, the secondary vi. 
brating frames, hinged thereto, and seed-boxes 
hinged to said secondary frames, of the seg 
mentally-slotted crank-armshinged to said sec- . 
ondary frames, secured to a fixed point upon 
the main frame, and connected to the seed 
boxes by studs confined in the segmental slots, 
whereby the raising and lowering of the sec 
ondary frames causes a corresponding raising 
and lowering of the seed-boxes for the purpose 
of throwing the seeding and driving mechan 
ism out of and into gear, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination, with the driving-sprock 
ets upon the hubs of the main wheels, and the 
sprockets journaled to the secondary frames, 
io 
75 
9O 
95 
OC 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
i 
352,586 
B 
iO 
35 
7. In a double-row corn-drill having a main 
frame and vibrating secondary frames hinged 
thereto, laterally - adjustable plates secured 
to said secondary frames, said plates having 
secured to their under sides the furrowing 
hoes and covering-shares, whereby the width 
of the furrows may be changed by the adjust 
ment of said plates on the secondary frames, 
substantially as described. 
8. The laterally-slotted plate X, adjustably 
secured to the secondary frames, provided with 
a seed-aperture, d, and having hinged to its 45 
under side at the rear a combined furrowing 
hoe and covering-share conduit, having the fur 
rowing - hoe and covering - shares rigidly se 
cured thereto, and held up in working posi 
tion by the break-pin b at its forward side, 
substantially as described. 
9. The plateX, provided with the adjusting 
slots c' and notched seed-aperture d', in com 
bination with the adjustable seed-spout A, 
provided with teatsg', and the furrowing-hoe 
and covering-shares hinged to the under side 
thereof and supported by a break-pin, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
10. The combination, with the adjustable 
slotted plate X and feed-spout A, of the fast 
ening-clip e, for securing said feed-spout to 
said plate, substantially as described. 
5 O 
HORACE G. SWOPE. 
Witnesses: 
S. B. RUDE, 
J. W. CONN AWAY. 
5 
O 
25 
and provided with driving-pinions, said two 
sets of sprockets being connected by drive 
chains, of the vibrating secondary frames hav 
ing the seed-boxes hunged thereto, and the 
crown-pinion normally meshing with the pin 
ions on the sprockets on the secondary frames 
and connected with the seeding mechanism, 
with connecting mechanism, substantially as 
described, whereby the raising of the second 
alry frames causes the tilting of the seed-boxes 
and the crown-pinions to be thrown put of gear 
with the sprocket-pinions, and whereby the 
lowering of said frames causes said pinions to 
be thrown into gear, substantially as described. 
5. In a double-row corn-drill, the combina 
tion, with the main frame and the secondary 
franes, of levers pivoted to the main frame 
and united to the secondary frames by bell 
crank arms and connecting-rods, substantially 
as described, whereby the vibration of Saidle 
vers causes the raising or lowering of the sec 
ondary frannes either simultaneously or inde 
pendently, substantially as described. 
. The combination, with the inclined slot 
ted crank-arms N, pivoted to the Secondary 
frames and united by a rod, n, to a fixed point 
upon the main frame, of the seed-boxeshinged 
to the secondary frames, and provided with 
studs entering the slots of the arms N, whereby 
the vibration of said arms caused by the rais 
ing and lowering of said frames effects the rais 
ing and lowering of the seed-boxes, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352686.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 352,686. 
J. L. GILBERT. 
BALING PRESS. 
5 sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
N. Peters. Photo-liktegrapher. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 352,686. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
|| 
Photo-liriograph 
?: 
INWENTOR: 
???? 
???/ 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
No. 352,686. 
 
J. L. GILBERT, 
BANG PRESS. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 
16, 
1886, 
WITNESSES 
WE 
R 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. perERs. Photo-Lithographer. washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 352,686. 
J. L. GILBERT. 
BALING PRESS. , 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
??????? 
ATTORNEYS, 
. PEEs. Photo-ihographer. Waslingto. D. C. 
No. 352,686. 
Patented Now, 16, 1886, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
 
 
 
| 1 
INVENTOR: 
??? 
???? 
???? 
AITORNEYs. 
BY . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH L. GILBERT, OF LEBANON, OREGON. 
BALNG apRESS. 
SPECIPICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,686, dated November 16, 1836. 
Application filed February 23, 1886, Serial No. 192,944. (No model.) 
25 
5 
IO 
55 
?? 
onal strips at a', the vertical timbers being rig 
To all whom it may concern: 
idly secured to the longitudinal strips, which 
Be it known that I, JosFPH L. GILBERT, of 
strips are preferably bound with iron strips b 
Lebanon, in the county of Linn and State of 
b, the said vertical strips being supported by 
Oregon, have invented a new and Improved 
under cross-bars, bib'. In order that the parts 
Baling-Press, of which the following is a full, 
may be still more securely held together, I 
clear, and exact description. 
arrange truss-rods c c upon each side of the 
My invention consists in the construction 
press, said truss-rods extending between the 
and arrangement of parts, as will be herein 
forward and rear uprights, act. The chamber 
after fully described and claimed; and thein 
A is closed by two lids or covers, CC, each 
vention consists of a novel arrangement of the 
of which is so hinged to its supporting cross 
baling-chamber, and ofan arrangement where 
bar as to project beneath the bar when closed 
by the rope through which the power is ap 
to the position shown in Fig. 4, so that all up 
plied is automatically locked in place when 
ward pressure upon the hinged sides of the 
the power is relaxed; and the invention fur 
covers is borne by the bars d or d, to which 
ther consists of an approved and novel form 
of knotter arranged to operate upon cords or 
the said covers are hinged. 
Upon the upper side and close to the edge 
wires held by a novel arrangement of spools; 
of the covers there is a cross-bar, e or e, and 
and the invention still further consists of cer. 
to the upper face of these cross-bars I secure 
tain novel features of construction, and cer 
metallic strips e'e", which project outward 
tain novel combinations of parts, to be herein 
on either side beyond the outer edge of the 
after more precisely described, and specifically 
strips a?, the cross-bars e e' being arranged to 
pointed out in the claims. 
fit between said bars a? a. In order that the 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
lids or covers may be securely held in place 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
during the operation of compressing the bale, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
I provide such clamping devices as are best 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
shown in Fig. 5, said devices consisting of a 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved bal 
lever, f, one end of which is pivotally con 
ing-press, wherein the parts are shown as in 
nected to a bracket, f', said bracket being se 
position to receive the hay or other material 
curely fixed to a block attached to the outer 
to be pressed. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
side wall of the baling-chamber A. There are 
press with the back lid and spools removed, 
four of these levers, one for either end of each 
the posts supporting the frame upon which the 
of the strips e'e', the levers being brought. 
spools are mounted being shown in section. 
into engagement with the said strips by means 
Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sectional view of the 
of links gg, which are loosely connected to 
press, the parts being shown in the position 
the levers and arranged so that when the le 
to which they are moved when the hay or other 
vers are moved upward they may be brought 
material is being delivered to the press. Fig. 
into engagement with the hooked endsg' of the 
4 is a similar view, except that the parts are 
strips e" or e', and, being moved to the posi 
shown in the position they assume when the 
tion shown on the left in Fig. 5, will act to 
bale has been pressed and is ready to be tied 
force the covers to their seats within the baling 
prior to the time it is forced from the press. 
chamber, thus compressing any hay or other 
Fig. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken on line 
a 
of Fig. 4, and Figs. 6 and 7 are enlarged 
material that may have been put within the 
baling-chamber. The seats of the lids or covers 95 
detail views illustrating the construction of 
consist of two small projecting shelves, h. h, as 
45 
the knotter. 
best shown in Figs. 3 and 5, the position of 
Referring now to the general construction 
the shelves being such that when the lids rest 
illustrated in the drawings above referred to, 
thereon they will be substantially in a hori 
A is the baling-chamber, and B an extension 
ZOntal plane. 
thereof, in which the operating mechanism is 
The door D, through which the completed 
arranged. The chamber A is braced and sup 
ported by vertical timbers a a and longitudi- bale is ejected from the press, ishinged to the 
SO 
75 
- 
90 
IOO 
-- 
 
es 
352,686 
R 
75 
85 
9O 
95 
ICDO 
IO5 
IO 
II 5 
I 25 
IO 
inner side of a cross-bar, h", that is supported 
is mounted in the forward end of the chamber 
by the forward posts, a a, the slats h", which 
B, as best shown in Figs. 3 and 4. 
constitute the inner face of the gate or door, 
A heavy cord, O, is fixed to the axle H, 
being formed so that they project upward in 
and from there led over the sheave N, then 
side of the bar h", as shown best in Figs, 3 and 
around the sheave N', then back and around 
4. These inner face-strips, h', are arranged 
the sheave N', and finally up to the cross-bar 
vertically, while the outer strips, h', are ar 
M", as best shown in Fig. 3, to which cross 
ranged horizontally and project outward om 
bar it is securely tied. A second rope, o, is 
either side of the strips h", so that when the 
wound around the axle Hin the direction op 
gate D is closed the said outer strips will bear 
posite to that in which the rope O is wound, 
against the outer facings of the posts a, thus 
and is led forward from the axle to a sheave, o', 
defining the position of the gate. 
carried close up by the follower J, then back 
In order that the gate may be held in firm 
and around a sheave, o', fixed in position in the 
position, and be able to resist the strain to 
end wall of the chamber B, then along the 
which it is necessarily subjected during the 
outer face of said end wall to a sheave, o', and 
process of compressing the bale, I provide a 
then forward to an eye, p, where the knot of 
heavy cross-bar, E, one end of which is sup 
the rope is made fast. 
ported by a link, F, that is secured to a block 
Above the axle H there is arranged a frame, 
fixed to the side of the baling-chamber, as 
P, upon which I mount three spools, U U U, 
shown best in Fig. 2. This link Fprojects 
upon which the cord or wire with which the 
out beyond the forward end of the baling 
bales are to be bound is wound, the wires or 
chamber, and the end of the bar E is inserted 
cords shown at S S S being led forward over 
therein, the other end of the bar resting upon 
the front cross-bar of the frame, then down 
a strap, G, in which there is formed an eye, i, 
and through eyes t, fixed to the rear cross 
timber, d", then down between the vertical 
and in order that this end of the croSS-bar E 
may not be forced outward a lever, G', is 
strips which constitute the forward face of 
mounted above the strap G, the projecting 
the follower, then between the strips which 
end of said lever being provided with a pin, i', 
constitute the flooring of the chamber A, then 
arranged to enter the eye i of the strap G, any 
up between the strips h" of the gate D, and 
accidental displacement of the parts being pre 
finally up over the needle of a knotter, R, the 
vented by a spiral spring, i", arranged as shown 
ends of the cords being looped in order that 
best in Fig. 1. 
they may be hitched upon said knotter-needle. 
Just back of the baling-chamber A there is 
Such being the general construction of my 
improved form of baling-press, the operation 
mounted an axle, H, upon one end of which 
there is secured a large wheel, H', and upon 
is as follows: The baling-chamber having been 
this wheel H there is wound a rope, I, which 
filled with hay or other material to be com 
is led forward, as best shown in Fig. 1, so that 
pressed, the covers or lids CC are closed and 
it may be operated upon by a horse or other 
clamped to place, thus partially compressing 
source of power. 
the material within the baling-chamber. A 
The follower J is arranged so as to be recip 
horse hitched to the end of the rope I is then 
rocated within the chamber A, and consists, 
started forward so as to move the wheel H in 
essentially, of a number of vertically-arranged 
the direction of the arrow shown in connec 
strips, jij, that are carried by cross-bars j' j, 
tion there with in Fig. 1, which motion of the 
wheel H" will start the axle H forward, so that 
to the center of which cross-bars there are se 
cured the follower-guides KK, which project 
the rope O will be wound thereon, the rope o 
outward through the rear wall of the chamber 
being at this time unwound from the said axle. 
B, the follower proper being rigidly braced 
As the rope O is wound upon the axle H the 
by barski'k', which abut against the blocks k", 
follower J will be forced forward within the 
that are fixed to the follower-guides K, as best 
chamber A until the hay is compressed and 
shown in Figs 3 and 4. 
the parts moved to about the position shown 
Just behind the blocks k' there are con 
in Fig. 4; and it will be readily understood 
nected the two forward legs, L. L., of a toggle 
that as the joints of the toggle-lever are ex 
lever, of which the legs L L are arranged to 
panded as the follower advances within the 
bear against stops l, formed at the rear of the 
chamber A, the effect of the power applied 
chamber B, each of the legs L being provided 
will be increased-that is to say, a more ad 
vantageousleverage is obtained as the follower 
with a cross-block, l, which projects over the 
follower-guides K and over shelves m, fixed 
advances, and consequently the effect of the 
: to the side walls of the chamber B, as clearly 
power increases with the necessities of the 
shown in Fig. 2. The legs L carry upwardly 
case. After the bale has been sufficiently com 
projecting arms M, which are united at their 
pressed the cords S are severed at a proper 
upper ends by a cross-strip, M'. The follow 
point, so that their ends may be carried for 
er-guides K carry two sheaves, N and N', the 
ward and passed around the loop under the 
sheave N being mounted in bearings fixed to 
needle, u of the knotter R, the ends of the wire 
being brought into engagement with the hook 
the upper faces of the said guides, while the 
sheave N' is mounted in bearings fixed to the 
at of the needle it. When the parts have been 
under side of said guides. A third sheave,N', I brought to this position, the needle is drawn - 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
7 
352,686 
3 
within its casing ) by a hooked lever, S, ar 
ranged as best shown in Figs. 6 and 7, which 
movement will slip the loop first thrown about 
the needle over the ends of the wire with 
5 which the second loop is formed, so that a firm 
knot will be tied. When the horse is stopped 
to permit of this tying of the knot, the rope I 
is held in position by means of a cam-faced 
clamp, 20, beneath which the rope I passes, 
IO being carried forward between the clamp and 
its seat, as best shown in Fig. 1. After the 
bale has been tied as described the catch of 
the gate D is thrown off and the horse again 
started forward, so that the follower will be 
15 advanced to force out the completed bale, but 
at this time, when no special amount of press 
ure is required, it will be seen that it is simply 
the wheel and axle and the movable pulleys 
that are called into play. 
2O. When it is desired to return the parts of the 
press to the position they should be in in order 
that a new lot of hay or other material may be 
placed within the baling-chamber, the motion 
imparted to the wheel H" during the operation 
2 5 of pressing the bale is reversed, the necessary 
power being supplied by an attendant, who 
turns the wheel by means of its handle H'. 
At this time the rope 0 is wound upon the axle 
H, and, as will be readily understood from an 
3c inspection of the drawings, acts to withdraw 
the follower from its position within the cham 
ber A. 
This baling-press is mounted on small wheels 
WV, and may be drawn to or from the place 
35 where the baling is to be done by the horse 
employed to supply the power used in operat 
ing the press. 
. Such a press as I have described may be 
built for an extremely small figure, and is 
4O very convenient, in that the hay has only to 
be raised a few feet from the ground. More 
over, the power is applied upon scientific prin 
ciples and without waste. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
45 What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the frame having 
the chambers AB, of the follower J, the longi 
tudinally-moving guides KK, having the up 
5o per and lower pulleys, N. N', the pulley N, 
journaled on the frame between the follower 
and the pulleys N N', the axle H, journaled in 
the frame above the guides K, the toggle-lever 
LL, the arms L resting at their lower ends on 
- 
Witnesses: 
J. V. KEEBLER, 
A. G. WILLIAMs. 
the forward ends of the guides, and the arms 55 
L bearing against the rear end of the frame, 
the arms M, extending upward from the arms 
L., a rope secured to the arms M, passed down 
ward over the pulley N', thence to and around 
pulley N', back over the pulley N, and for- 6O 
ward to the axle and there secured, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the frame having 
the chambers AB, of the follower J, the longi 
tudinally-movable guides KK, having the up- 65 
per and lower rear pulleys, NN', and the for 
ward pulley, o, the pulley N", journaled on 
the frame between the follower and the pulley 
N, the axle H, journaled in the frame above the 
guides, the toggle-levers LLM, the rope O, 7o 
secured at its opposite ends to the arm Mand 
- axle, respectively, and passed around the pul 
leys NN"N", as shown, the pulleys o" o'", jour 
naled in the upper rear corners of chamber B, 
and the rope 0, wound on the axle in the direc. 75 
tion opposite to the rope O, extending forward 
around the pulley o' on the guides, thence rear 
ward around the pulleys o' 0", and secured to 
the guides on the side opposite the pulley 0, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the frame having 
the chambers AB and the follower, of the two 
part cover C C, the spools, and the knotter R, 
mounted on the forward section, C, at its free 
end, whereby when the material is pressed 85 
within the space covered by the section C the 
section C may be raised to allow the operator 
to pass the end of the cord to the knotter, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
apertured casing v, of the sliding needle u, 
mounted therein and notched transversely to 
? the knotter-hook u', substantially as set 
orth. 
5. In a baling-press, the combination, with 95-. 
a baling-chamber, of lids or covers CC, that 
are provided with strips e'e', and leversif, 
carrying links g, substantially as described, 
and for the purpose specified. 
and its gate D, of a cross-bar, E, link F, a 
strap, G, formed with an eye, i, a lever, G, 
and a pin, i, substantially as described. 
JOSEPH L. GILBERT. 
6. The combination, with a baling-chamber Ioo 
4. The combination, with the longitudinally-90 
8o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352787.txt	(Model.) 
W, P. SIS SON, 
RULER, 
No. 352,787. 
Patented Nov. 16, 1886, 
 
 
 
N. Peters, Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM P. SISSON, OF GARNETT, KANSAs. 
RULER 
S2ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,787, dated November 16, 1886. 
Application filed May 24, 1886. Serial No. 203,152. (Model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. P. SISSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Gar 
nett, in the county of Anderson and State of 
Kansas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Ruler Attachments, of which 
the following is a description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
ruler for ruling lines, with such attachment 
for connection with the hand as shall facilitate 
the use of the ruler and render the work of 
book-keeping very much more convenient and 
expeditious, and avoid the slipping of the . 
ruler and the making of false lines or blots. 
The drawing is a perspective view of the 
ruler provided with its attachment, and show 
ing its relation to the hands when in use. 
The ruler A has attached to it a tubular 
socket or folded clamp, B, into the opening in 
which the little finger of the left hand is in 
serted, in which position the ruler is firmly 
connected to the hand. When in use, this con 
nection serves to firmly hold the ruler from 
slipping from the side pressure of the pen, and 
when not in use the left hand, with the ruler 
attached, is removed from the page with the 
ruler still attached to it, in which relation the 
ruler is quickly applied to and removed from 
the paper, as may be required, thus saving 
much time for the book-keeper, and rendering 
his work more convenient and less liable to be 
marred by irregular lines or blots. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
As a new article of manufacture, a ruler hav 
ing attached thereto a finger socket or clamp, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
WILLIAM P. SISSON. 
Witnesses: 
J. G. JoHNSON, 
J. A. GILMORE. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352887.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 352,887. 
G. W. POTTER. 
SLEIGH RUNNER, 
Patented Nov. 16, 1886, 
PETERs. Phate-Lithographer, washingtor... C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
e 
GEORGE W. POTTER, OF ALBION, NEW YORK. 
SLEGH in 
RUNNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,887, diated November 16, 1886. 
Application filed August 27, 1885. Renewed 
July 12, 1886. Serial No. 207,823. No model.) 
5 
O 
To aid whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. PoTTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Albion, 
in the county of Orleans and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Sleigh-Runners, of which the follow 
ing is a description. 
The object of my invention is to provide. 
sleighs, sleds, and cutters with runners or 
shoes which shall cause less friction and be of 
greater durability than iron or steel shoes; 
and my improvement consists in making the 
runners or shoes of annealed or toughened 
glass, of suitable shape and thickness, which 
15 may be attached to the sleighs as iron or steel 
shoes are commonly fastened. 
Figurelisa side view ofa sleigh, and Fig. 2 is 
a cross-section of its runner with my glass shoe 
attached. 
2O In the accompanying drawings, Arepresents 
. 
. 
. 
. 
25 
the glass shoe attached to the iron or wooden 
runner B. C is an intermediate strip of suit 
able material, the dotted lines showing the 
location of the bolts where the same are used 
to fasten the shoe. 
I do not claim any method of attaching run 
ners to sleighs; but 
I do claim as my invention 
1. A sleigh having shoes of annealed or 
toughened glass attached to the runners, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. A sleigh having shoes of annealed or 
toughened glass, and strips C, both shoes and 
strips being attached to the runners, substan. 
tially as set forth. GEORGE W. POTTER. 
Witnesses: 
FREDERIC G. BEACH, 
EDWARD E. MIX. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US352988.txt	(No Model.) 
A. BRIDGMAN & J. CHALLONER. 
WOOD POLISHING MACHINE 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 352,988. 
Patented Nov. 23, 1886, 
- 
7222 (esses/ 
Y3- 
- 
17zee/ceo's 
e-(4-2- 27-24 
424/ 
7A07'yees 
N. PETERs, Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
A, BRIDG MAN & J. CHALLONER, 
WOOD POLISHING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 352,988, 
 
Patented Nov. 23, 1886, 
72%rce S5 el3 32. 
  
77(2ecaozy 
%azze gy 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D.C., 
 
- UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ALMON BRIDGMAN, OF BERLIN, AND JOHN CHALLONEROF OMRO, ASSIGN. 
ORS TO THE YATES MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OR BERLIN, WIS. 
wooD-POLISHING MACHINE. 
PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 352,988, dated November 23, 1886. 
Application filed November 12, 1885. Serial No. 182,561. (No model.) 
O 
25 
ing two plates, one diametrically opposite the 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ALMON BRIDGMAN, 
other. 
Along each of the straight longitudinal 
of Berlin, in Green Lake county, Wisconsin, 
edges of the several segmental plates G G is a 55 
and JOHN CHALLONER, of Omro, in the county 
of Winnebago and State of Wisconsin, have 
bar, a, affixed to the arms EE" or FF, the outer 
invented new and useful Improvements in 
surface of which bar is a little within the cir 
Wood-Polishing Machines; and we do hereby 
cular contour of the surface of the plates G. G., 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
which bar is provided in its outer surface lon 
gitudinally with a groove adapted to receive 
exact description of said invention, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
a strip-like keeper, b. This keeper b is held 
in position by screws or bolts c c, passing 
to letters or figures of reference marked there 
through it and through the bar a into an iron 
On, which form a part of this specification. 
. 
Our invention, to be hereinafter distinctly retaining-strap, d, which strap d is supported . 
claimed, relates to improvements in that class 
in mortises in the arms E E or FF and runs 65 
just beneath and parallel with the bar a. 
I5 of Wood-polishing machines adapted to smooth 
Over the surface of the plates G G is placed 
and polish lumber by the contact there with of 
the Sand-covered surface of a rapidly-rotating. 
the Sand-paper covering, lined or Cushioned 
cylinder; and our invention pertains espe 
with carpet and sheets of rubber, which car 
pet, rubber, and sheets of sand-paper are held 7o 
Cially to the construction and means for oper 
in position by their ends being placed beneath 
ating this sand-covered cylinder, which is an 
improvement upon the cylinder secured to us 
the keeper bb, which are drawn and held down 
by Letters Patent of the United States, of Sep 
to their seats by the screws or bolts c C. 
Both sets of arms EE and FF are provided 
tember 25, 1883, No. 285,728. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
with rigid collars e and f, respectively sur- 75 
a perspective of the cylinder and the attached 
rounding the shaft A. The arms of one set, 
mechanism for operating it. 
Fig. 2 is a hori 
FF, are made rigid to the shaft A by means 
of set-screws LL through the collarsff, turn 
Zontal section of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
ing against the shaft, while the other set of 
section of Fig.1. Fig. 4 is a central cross-section 
arms, EE, and their supported devices have 8o 
of the cylinder. Figs. 5, 6, and 7. are details. 
Figs. 8 and 9 are perspectives, parts being re 
a short lateral reciprocal movement on the 
shaft A. To permit of this reciprocal move 
moved to show other parts more distinctly. 
ment of one set of arms carrying two of the 
The same letters refer to like parts in all 
sectional segmental plates, the arms E E of 
the views. 
The driving-shaft A is supported on andro 
this set are located outside of and a little dis- 85 
tates in bearings B B on the frame C. Motion 
tance from the arms FF of the other set, and 
the arms E E are each provided with rigid 
is communicated to the shaft. A by a belt from 
lugs or guides gg, projecting inwardly, which 
the power-supplying mechanism running upon 
guides g g enter corresponding grooves or re 
the pulley D, which is rigid on shaft A. The 
polishing or sand-paper-covered cylinder is 
cesses, h. h, in the arms FF, which recesses 9o 
are adapted to receive and permit said guides 
supported on and rotates with the driving 
to slide freely therein, whereby while said 
shaft A, and consists of two sets of radial arms, 
arms E E are permitted to reciprocate freely 
centrally pierced by shaft A, each set of arms 
being in pairs, EE and FF, one set of double 
on shaft A they are caused to rotate With the 
arms FF, which are rigid on the shaft. The 
arms being at or near each end of the cylin 
object of this reciprocating movement is to 
der. These radial arms E E and FF sup 
cause the microscopic lines made by the sand 
port on their outer ends the segmental sectional 
cylinder on the surface of the material being 
plates G. G of the cylinder, upon which the 
polished to cross and recross each other, 
several sand surfaces are fixed. . Each segmen 
whereby a smoother surface is produced than ICO 
tal sectional plate is attached to the ends (on 
the same side of the shaft A) of the same set could otherwise be obtained. To get this re 
of arms E E or FF, each set of arms carry- ciprocating movement, we provide a sleeve, 
95 
45 
A 
 
2 
352,988 
in pairs rigidly, the sections in each pair be 
ing diametrically opposite each other, and at 
least one pair of these sections being free to 
move longitudinally on its driving-shaft, and 55 
being connected with mechanism whereby a 
reciprocal lateral motion is given to such sec 
tions, all substantially as described. 
2. In a wood-polishing machine, a rotating 
polishing-cylinder formed in longitudinal sec- 5o 
tions in pairs, each of which pairs has diamet 
rically-opposite sections, in combination with 
a sleeve, H, having a cam-groove, k, rotating 
on the shaft of the cylinder and making less 
or more revolutions than the cylinder, Said 65 
pairs of sections being each connected with 
and guided by said cam, whereby a lateral al 
ternating reciprocal movement of the pairs of 
sections is secured, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
3. In a wood-polishing machine, the radial 
arms F F, in pairs rigid on shaft A, and pro 
vided with recesses h. h, in combination With 
the radial arms EE, sliding on shaft A, and 
provided with guides g g, substantially as de- 75 
7o 
scribed. 
- 
4. In a wood-polishing machine, the cylin 
der-carrying driving-shaft A, provided with 
pulley D, in combination with sleeve H, pro 
vided with pulley i and collar i, and the col- 8C 
lar i provided with a cam-groove, lc, whereby 
a differential motion between said sleeve and 
said shaft and a reciprocal motion to be given 
to mechanism connected with said sleeve and 
rotating on said shaft is provided for, all sub-85 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination of radial arms E and F, 
rotating with shaft A, and rigid projecting 
arms l, having travelers m m, with sleeve H, 
having rigid collar i, provided with cam-90 
groove k, rotating freely on shaft A, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ALMON BRIDGMAN. 
JOHN CHALLONER. 
Witnesses to Bridgman: 
A. D. McINTYER, 
H. G. BRIDGMAN. 
Witnesses to Challoner: 
J. A. MARKLEY, 
O. B. OSBORN. 
5 on and the other set with the shaft A. 
H, encompassing the shaft A at its end oppo 
site the pulley D, in which sleeve the shaft 
rotates freely, and which sleeve in turn ro 
tates freely in the bearing B. On the outer 
5 end of this sleeve His the fast band-pulley i, 
by and through which motion is communicated 
to the sleeve from the power-supplying mech 
anism. On the inner end of the sleeve His 
the collari, rigid to the sleeve H, the collari 
o and pulley i being so adjusted on the sleeve 
Has not to permit any lateral motion of the 
sleeve in the bearing B. About the collar i 
in its periphery there is a continuous inclined 
or cam groove, k. The arms E and Fare each 
5 provided with an arm, l, rigid thereto, and 
projecting outwardly therefrom and diamet 
rically opposite to each other, each of which 
arms carries. On its outer end a Swiveled but 
ton or traveler, m, adapted to enter and travel 
o in the groove it, by means whereof, when the 
sleeve H revolves somewhat slower or faster 
than the sand-cylinder, as it is intended to do, 
the segmental sections of the cylinder are 
caused to reciprocate laterally slowly, one set 
The segmental sectional plates G. G. and G 
G' are supported in pairs, each pair being on 
the outer ends of the same arms, one plate of 
each pair opposing or balancing the other 
c plate of the same pair, so that an equilibrium, 
not only of weight, but of centrifugal motion, 
will be constantly maintained. For this pur 
pose we preferably construct our cylinder in 
four parts, on two sets of double arms; but the 
5 same objects might be attained in substantially 
the same manner by three or more sets of 
double arms, with a corresponding number of 
sections or segmental plates, which would be 
merely a modification of the form shown in 
For convenience in constructing and mak 
ing repairs, the outer arms, E. E., are each 
made in halves and bolted together at the cen 
ter, as shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 9. The sleeve 
5 His provided with apertures in n, for lubri 
cating the shaft Atherethrough. 
What we claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a wood-polishing machine, a rotating 
o polishing-cylinder formed in longitudinal sec 
tions, which sections are connected together 
o the drawings. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353089.txt	(No Model.) 
 
J. A. SMITH, 
EXERCITSING MACHINE, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES : 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS, 
perERs, photo-Lithographer. Washington, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN ALEXANDER SMITH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
EXERCI SING-MACHIN E. 
S5ECIEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 353,089, dated November 23, 1886. 
Application filed August 10, 1886. Serial No. 210,579. (No model.) 
55 
- 
eration. 
To aZZ ?p/L??, i? ??? ???-???r?, : 
Beit known that I, JOHN ALEXANDERSMITH, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and Improved Exercis 
ing-Machine, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved exercising-machine, which 
is simple in construction and effective in op 
The invention consists of various parts and 
details and combinations of the same, as will 
be fully described hereinafter, and then pointed 
out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional side elevation of my 
improvement. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
upper Weight. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the 
lower weight hereinafter more fully described, 
and Fig. 4 is a front elevation of the swivel. 
The bracket A, of suitable size and shape, 
is secured to a wall or other convenient place 
at a desired distance above the floor, and is 
provided with a socket, B, in which turns and 
is supported the swivel C, having the stand 
ards D, on which is mounted to rotate the pull 
ley E, over which passes a rope, F, passing 
centrally through the said swivel C. 
To one end of the rope F is secured the bot 
tom weight, G, having the apertures G' G', 
through which pass the guide-rods H, attached 
with their upper ends to hooks I on the 
bracket A, and fastened with their lower ends 
to the cross-piece J, through the center of 
which passes the bolt K, held with its lower 
end on a hook, L, secured to the floor, and on 
the upper screw-threaded end screws the nut 
M down upon the cross-piece J. 
The tension of the guide-rods H can be ad 
justed by Screwing the nut Mup or down. 
Any number of weights N can be placed on 
top of the bottom weight, G, so as to increase 
the weight to belifted. Each of these weights 
N is provided with a slot, N', which permits of 
placing the weight N over the rope F and the 
guide-rods H. The weights N are also pro 
vided on the bottom with apertures N', and 
on the top with lugs N, which fit into the cor 
responding apertures, N, of the following 
weight N, thus preventing the weights N 
from slipping off. The bottom weight, G, is 
also provided with lugs N. 
A stopper, O, is placed on rope F, and fits 
into the central aperture, N', of the weightsN. 
The other end of the rope F is provided with 
a hook, P, on which is held the link Q, Sup 
porting the rope or cord R, provided with the 
handles S, of usual construction. 
Above the bracket A is attached to a bracket 
on the wall an arm, T, carrying oil its outer 
end the pulley U. 
The operation is as follows: The operator 
takes hold of the handles S, and by pulling on 
the same lifts the weights G and N upward, 
thus exerting a strain on his muscles. Then 
the operator lets the handles S gradually back, 
so that the weights G and N slide downwardly 
on the guide-ropes H. 
It will be seen that in whatever direction 
the operator pulls the swivel C will turn ac 
cordingly in its socket B, thereby throwing 
the pulley E in the direction of the pulling, so 
that the rope F passes freely over the pulley 
E, and an easy sliding of the weights G and N 
on the guide-ropes His obtained. The rope 
F may also be passed from the pulley E over 
the pulley U, and the above-described opera 
tion in lifting and dropping the weights G and 
N is repeated by pulling on or releasing the 
handles S. 
Any number of weights N may be placed on 
the bottom weights, G, so as to increase the 
weight to be lifted, and the top weight, N, is 
then held securely in place by the stopper O 
being pressed into the central aperture, N, in 
the plate N. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In an exercising-machine, the combina- - 
tion, with the bracket A, having the socket B, 
of the swivel C, carrying the pulley E, the 
rope F, passing over said pulley E, and the 
weight G, substantially as shown and described. 
2. In an exercising-machine, the combina 
tion, with the bracket A, having the socket B, 
of the swivel C, carrying the pulley E, the 
rope F, passing over the said pulley E, the 
weight G, attached to the rope F, and the ad 
justable guide-rods H, on which slide the said 
weight G, substantially as shown and described. 
IOJO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
W 
2 
353,089 
3. In an exercising-machine, the combina- mounted on the arm T, supported above the 
tion of the bracket A, having the hooks I, with bracket A, substantially as shown and de- I5 
the guide-rods H, the cross-bar J, on which the scribed. 
lower ends of the rods Hare fastened, the bolt 
5. In an exercising-machine, the rope F and 
5 K, hooked on the hookT, and the nut J, screw- the swivel C, carrying the pulley E, in com 
ing on the said bolt K and resting against the bination with the bottom weight, G, attached 
cross-bar J, substantially as shown and de- to the said rope F, the weights N, and the 2d 
scribed. 
stopper O, for holding the weights N in place, 
4. In an exercising-machine, the rope F, the substantially as shown and described. 
JOHN ALEXANDER SMITH, 
IO handles S, and the weights G and N, in com- 
bination with the swivel C, carrying the pulley 
E, and supported by the bracket A, the ad- 
justable guide-rods H, and the pulley U, 
Witnesses: 
. 
THEO. G. HOSTER, 
. C. SEDGWICK. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353189.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
R, WHITE. 
SOCKET FOR PUNCHEs, 
Patented Nov. 23, 1886, 
 
Oz 
No. 353,189. 
f2. 
III; ADZ, 
 
  
  
 
"El 
2A I 
N 
 
 
 
  
 
E% S 
 
 
27 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROLLIN WHITE, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SOCKET FOR PUNCHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent Eo. 353,189, dated No7 ember 23, 1886. 
. A pplication filed January 2, 1886. Serial No. 187,478. (No model.) 
O 
. 
cation. 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, ROLLIN WHITE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Lowell, 
in the county of Middlesex and Commonwealth 
of Miassachusetts, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Sockets for 
Punches, of which the following is a specifi 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
punch-Sockets, and is especially designed to be 
applied to punches for drawing cartridge 
shells and similar articles drawn from metal. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a sectional elevation of my im 
proved punch-Socket, a punch, a die, and a 
part of the die-holder, the middle portion of 
the punch and of the punch-socket being 
broken out; Fig. 2, an elevation of a part of 
the head of a machine in which and the nuts 
by which the punch-socket is held, a punch, 
the die, and a part of the die-holder, the die 
and holder being in section, and the lower part 
of the socket and the lower nuts being broken 
away to show the manner of holding the punch. 
In drawing cartridge-blanks and similar ar 
ticles drawn from metal much difficulty is ex 
perienced in having the drawing-punches pass 
into the die exactly in line with the axis of the 
die-opening, and even where the punch is cor 
rectly Set it is liable to be moved from the 
exact line of the die-opening. I remedy this 
defect by allowing the punch to automatic 
ally adjust itself by a peculiarly-constructed 
punch-socket. I secure in the head B of a 
machine, which is caused in practice to have 
a reciprocating motion, a holder or sleeve, L, 
by means of nuts land check-nuts l', which 
turn on the screw-threaded endportions of said 
sleeve above and below the head. This holder is 
laterally adjusted to bringit and the punch car 
ried by it directly over the die-opening which 
corresponds to it, and as near as possible in 
line with the axis of the die. In the lower 
end of Said holder L is a cylindrical opening, 
l, into which opening is screwed a hollow cy. 
lindrical plug, L. 
The plug Li is provided in its upper end 
with a hemispherical cavity, in which rests a 
ball, L', and the sleeve above said cylindrical 
opening l is chambered out to fit the upper 
portion of said ball. The ball L'has a down 
wardly-tapering central opening, l, which re. 
ceives a tapering plug, L, in the lower end of 
which is secured the upper end of the punch. 
Above the plug, within said holder, in a ver 
tical opening larger than said plug, is a block, 
L', which is adapted to slide in said opening. 
The upper side of the block L'is preferably 
provided with a projecting teat, l, which is 
Surrounded by a spiral Spring, i, which presses 
upon the block L. A screw, Li, turning ver 
tically in a screw-threaded hole in the top of 
the holder L, compresses the spring between 
it and the top of the block L, and allows the 
punch to yield vertically, and thereby adjust 
itself laterally to the die. 
The screw L is preferably provided with a 
When the punch is properly 
check-nut, L. 
adjusted in its seat, it may be limited in its 
lateral motion by the screws l', which turn 
radially in the plug L'against the shank of the 
punch, the opening in Said plug being greater 
punch. The screws I 
than the shank of the 
aid in bringing the punch in line with the 
axis of the die, but should not press upon the 
shank with sufficient force to prevent the free 
vertical movement of the punch. 
It will be seen that in operation, as the punch 
enters the die-opening, the resistance offered 
by the blank in the die will tend to raise the 
enlarged portion of the punch or conical plug 
L from its seat in the ball L", and the punch 
is then at liberty to move laterally to adjust 
itself to the die, in which position it may be 
secured by the screws l', or may be allowed 
to move freely. The resistance necessary to 
raise the punch from its seat is regulated by 
the spring being more or less compressed be 
tween the block L. and the screw L. 
In many cases it is advantageous to make 
the conical plug Land the punch in one piece, 
thus making it a punch with an enlarged head, 
the action being the same in either frm. 
Should the screws l'be turned up, so as to 
preSS upon the Shank of the punch from all 
sides, it will be seen that when the punch is 
raised from its seat, as above described, it will 
move as if pivoted at the point at which the 
screws press, and move to adjust itself to the 
opening of the die. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of a holder having at its 
w 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
9O 
95 
IOO 
2 
353,189 
O 
lower end a chamber, a cylindrical plug se 
cured in said chamber, said plug having a 
central opening and a hemispherical cavity in 
its top, a ball having a central conical open 
ing, a punch having a conical head adapted to 
be received into said conical opening, and a 
punch, substantially as described. 
2. The conbination of a holder having at its 
lower end a chamber, a cylindrical plug se 
cured in said chamber, said plug having a 
central opening and a hemispherical cavity in 
its top, a ball having a conical central open 
ing, a punch having a conical head adapted to 
be received into said conical opening, two or 
more screws turning in screw-threaded holes 
in the lower part of said plug radially to the 
punch, and a punch, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a holder having atits 
lower end a chamber, a cylindrical plug se 
cured in said chamber, said plug having a cen 
tral opening and a hemispherical cavity in its 
top, a ball having a central conical opening, a 
punch having a conical head adapted to be re 
ceived into said conical opening, a punch, a 
4. The combination of the head, the holder 3o 
spring, and a screw passing through the top of 25 
said holder and adapted to compress said 
spring between said screw and the upper end 
of the conical head of said punch, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
or sleeve provided at its ends with external 
screw-threads, and having in its lower end a 
chamber, the lower end of said chamber being 
provided with an internal screw-thread, a cy 
lindrical plug having an external screw-thread 35 
to engage with the threads of said chamber, 
and having a central vertical opening and in 
the top a hemispherical cavity, a ball having 
a central conical opening, a conical plug 
adapted to fill said conical opening, and hav- 4o 
ing a central orifice to receive the upper end 
of a punch, and a punch, substantially as shown 
and described. 
ROLLIN WEITE. 
Witnesses: 
HERBERT R. WHITE, 
ALBERT M. MOORE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353290.txt	(No Model.) 
R. E. DEANE. 
OWEN PLATE, 
No. 353,290, 
Patented Nov.30, 1886. 
s = } 
. c. 
 
WITWESSES 
IWVEWTOR 
N. PereRs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROYAL E. DEANE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
OVEN - PLATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 353,290, dated November 30, 1886, 
Application filed July 17, 1885. Serial No. 171,857. (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROYAL E. DEANE, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a certain new and useful improvement 
in bottons or plates particularly adapted to 
Ovens used for cooking, but also suitable for 
use in similar situations where heat is applied 
or contained; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a description of said invention in 
Such full, clear, concise, and exact terms as to 
enable any skillful person to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, wherein like letters of reference 
indicate corresponding parts throughout the 
Several views. 
The chief object of my invention is to pre 
vent the Warping or buckling of the oven 
bottom or plate under the varying tempera 
tures to which they are necessarily subjected, 
resulting usually in open cracks or uneven 
Surfaces, and diminishing their efficiency and 
requiring frequent repairs and renewals. 
AS ordinarily constructed the oven bottoms 
or plates of cooking ranges and stoves consist 
of a single piece of cast, wrought, or sheet 
iron, and are especially liable to warp or crack. 
I accomplish my object by making the oven 
bottom or plate in sections or parts and con 
necting these sections or parts together so as 
to form an even and flat surface covering the 
entire Space, each section or part having down 
turned flanges at all adjacent edges, by and 
through which the component sections or parts 
may be securely bolted or riveted together. 
The number of sections or parts advisable or 
necessary Will depend, of course, upon the size 
and shape of the Whole area or surface, and can 
easily be determined and regulated according 
to the necessities of each particular situation 
by any skillful mechanic. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings for 
illustration, Figure 1 shows a top, and Fig. 2 
a bottom, plan of an oven bottom or plate of my 
improved construction, consisting, as shown, 
of four sections or parts covering an oblong 
area. It is here shown detached. 
Each of the sections or parts is furnished 
with downturned flanges upon all the inside 
elges and with upturned flanges on its out 
side edges. Where the area is large enough in 
length or breadth, or both, to require several 
Sections or parts in either or both directions, 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
all the inner sections or parts should have 
downturned flanges on all sides, and only the 
Outer rows of sections or parts be provided 
With upturned flanges on their outside edges. 
Each section can be cast, wrought, or stamped 
into its peculiar form by ordinary methods 
Well known to the art. Adjacent flanges are 
correspondingly punched or perforated and 
Secured together by bolts or rivets through the 
downturned flanges, whereupon all the sec 
tions form an even whole, much stiffer and bet 
ter adapted to resist varying temperatures and 
maintain its shape than any of ordinary con 
struction. 
Besides, each section, being of 
Smaller surface and braced by its flanges, is 
in itself stronger than usual. When all the 
sections are secured together, as described, 
forming a whole with a smooth and even up 
persurface, the upturned flanges on the outside 
edges of the outer sections together form a 
continuous upturned flange around the out 
side of the oven bottom or plate, whereby it 
can be secured to the walls of the oven by bolts 
or rivets, as just described. No flanges should 
be formed upon the sides of the sections next 
to the oven-door when in place. 
Besides the advantages of stiffness and re 
sistance above enumerated the downturned 
flanges form, as it were, a series of compart 
ments confining the heat, and causing quicker 
heating with more even distribution of the 
heat. There is also an additional advantage 
Secured by my construction, for single sections 
can be removed and repaired, or a new section 
substituted, without detaching or repairing the 
whole bottom or plate and with greater econ 
Omy. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
A bottom or plate for ovens, consisting of 
sections constructed with downturned flanges 
on all inner or inside edges and upturned 95 
flanges on all outer or outside edges, secured 
together by bolts or rivets, and forming a 
whole with even and smooth upper surface 
adapted to be similarly secured to the wall of 
an oven, in the manner and for the purpose 
substantially as Specified. 
90 
ICO 
--- 
75 
So 
ROYAL E. DEANE, 
Witnesses: 
EDMUND E. WAN DIEU, 
GEORGE RAWLINS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353390.txt	CENTRIFUGALLY ACTING DRYING MACHINE FOR CLOTH, &c. 
D. M. WESTON, 
(No Model.) 
No. 353,390. 
Patented Nov. 30, 1886. 
 
 
222222222 
3 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID M. WESTON, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CENTRIFUGALLY-ACTING DRYING-MACHINE FOR CLOTH, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 353,390, dated November 30, 1886. 
Application filed July 24, 1885. Serial No. 172,595. (No model.) 
To all typhomy, it may concer?: 
Be it known that I, DAVID M. WESTON, of down to cause the oil to be thrown off the spin 
dle into the curb bellow its lip. The spindle 
Boston, county of Suffolk, and State of Massa- has a bearing only at its foot, and the bearing 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
is a yielding bearing. 
5 Centrifugally Acting Drying-Machines for 
The whirl at its upper end has a small neck, 
Cloth, Yarn, &c., of which the following de 
upon which is secured a metal flange, d, which 
scription, in connection with the accompany 
serves to support the lower end of a reel, E, 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters on 
composed, as herein shown, of cross-piecese e 
the drawings representing like parts. 
and bars e, properly secured or bolted to- 6c 
ro This invention has for its object to provide 
gether, and having at its center a sleeve, e, to 
a machine by which cloth, yarn, &c., may be 
fit over the spindle B, the reel traveling with 
- the spindle, preferably by reason of the fric 
-- 
quickly dried. 
In accordance with my invention, I have 
tion of itslower end against the top of the disk, 
such friction being considerable when to the 65 
provided a balanced spindle with a reel and 
15 inclosed the same in a case or curb, the cloth 
weight of the reel is added the weight of the 
to be dried being wound upon the reel, and 
cloth or other material wound upon it. 
thereafter the reel with the cloth thereon is 
The arms e' of the reel are shown as termi 
rotated rapidly by the spindle. 
nated within the outer edges of the barse", so 
My invention in a centrifugal drying-ma 
that a roll of cloth or other material may be 7? 
2O chine consists, essentially, in a balanced spin 
readily put upon and removed from the reel 
through the top of the casing F, provided with 
dle combined with a reel, the construction and 
operation being substantially as hereinafter 
a cover, f', and properly supported on the base 
particularly set forth and claimed. 
A, the casing having an opening at its bottom 
Figure 1 in partial section and elevation rep 
plate, which is surrounded by a curb, f, that 
25 resents a drying-machine embodying my in 
prevents the escape of water upon the whirl 
vention; and Fig. 2, a top view of the reel 
and belt, the casing in practice being connected 
alone, the dotted line showing the line of sec 
with a suitable pipe, , to lead outward the 
tion of the reel and spindle. for Fig. 1. 
water or dye forced out of the cloth or other 
The base A of the machine has at one end 
3o an upright, A, supporting the usual belt-pull 
The cloth or other material to be dried in 
leys, A, (one of which is shown,) which drive 
the piece will be placed or wound upon the 
the belt A, passed about the sleeve-whirl B, 
body of the reel, so as to be rotated with the 
fast to the spindle B, the pintle of which en 
reel while the latter is rotated rapidly by the 
ters a bolster, (, provided with a flange, a?, sup 
spindle, the speed being sufficient to cause the 
35 ported by a yielding block or ring, 2, prefer 
hollow bolt of cloth or other material to be ex 
ably of india-rubber, a second like block, 3, 
panded by reason of centrifugal force, the ex 
resting upon the upper side of the flange, and 
pansion being to such degree. as to expunge 
being held down by a cap, b, the block 2 rest 
the Water or other liquid from it, leaving the 
ing upon a plate or ring, c, attached to the bed 
cloth or other material dry. 
4o or base A by screws c, the bolster being thus 
Instead of the particular form of reel shown, 
supported Substantially as in centrifugal ma 
I may employ any other usual reel. 
chines described in other patents granted to me. 
The stand. A has a bracket, g, which sup 
ports. the fulcrum of a lever, h, having con 
The interior of the bolster and the exterior 
of the pintle are tapered slightly, and the bol 
nected with its lower end a rod, it', provided 95 
45 ster at its lower end is provided with a step, 
with a brake-shoe, h, the said lever having 
b', screwed thereto and having an oil-chamber, 
connected with it above-its fulcrum a rod, h, 
the step having a foot, b, placed in a hole in 
provided with a brake, h", a spring, h, acting 
the bed-plate. The upper part of the bolster 
normally to hold both brakes from the whirl 
is provided with a curb or flange, b, to catch oil, 
and from the pulley. 
5o and the pintile just above the bolster is pro 
Thespindleabove the whirl is provided with 
vided with a conical collar, r, with its base 
a copper or other acid-resisting tube or shield, 
85 
75 
IOO 
material. 
- 
r 
- 
2 
353,390 
n, for the liquid thrown from some kinds of 
cloth contains acid. 
The hollow sleeve e' of the reel is placed 
loosely over the spindle, and its attached shield 
5 and the reel may be readily removed from or 
be placed on the spindle, and in practice each 
machine may be provided with a number of 
reels, which may be wound with cloth or other 
material and be ready for application to the 
spindle and means, substantially as described, 
to rotate it, with a skeleton reel applied thereto 
and rotating with it, and adapted to receive a 15 
bolt of cloth to dry it by centrifugal action, 
substantially as set forth. 
Intestimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
DAVID M. WESTON. 
I claim- 
The combination of an upright balanced 
^. 
G. W. GREGORY, 
F. CUTTER. 
???? 
Io spindle. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353490.txt	(Model.) 
No. 353,490. 
f 
77C. 2. 
iaS A 
   
 
 
Y 
N  
S SS 
S 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
J. R. GOEHRING, 
DOUBLE TUBE INJECTOR, 
Patented Nov. 30, 1886. 
s 
  
 
 
  
  
s s 
S. 
% 
SNS S. 
FIG.1. 
% 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
&za Al 
, isa 
S{ 
V & 
 
N-g risisters S 
SS is N. 
Z2S 
Sae 
S 
 
6 % S. . 
. 
d DN %& 
SNSSS 
 
 
NSS 
FIG. 2. 
Weatresses : 
V76/. go fif- 
Z7 verv?oz. 
Johur 7. Goe? rzg 
Zy 7tts V2&zorreys 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN R. GOEHRING, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
HENRY BELFIELD AND T. BROOM BELFIELD, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
) OUBLETUBE NJECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 353,490, dated November 30, 1886. 
Application filed August 9, 1886. Serial No. 210,425. (Model.) 
& 
To all tv ho7, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN R. GOEEIRTNG, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
delphia, Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
5 Improvements in Double-Tube Injectors, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention consists of certain improve 
ments in that class of injectors known as 
'double-tube' injectors, in which two sets of 
Io steam-nozzles and combining - tubes are em 
ployed, the objects of my invention being to 
render the injector automatic in its action, to 
dispense With the use of special steam and 
overflow valves, and to simplify and cheapen 
I5 the construction of the injector. These ob 
jects I attain in the manner which I will now 
proceed to describe, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section, partly in 
2O elevation, of an injector constructed in ac 
cordance with my invention; Fig. 2, a trans 
verse section, partly in elevation, on the line 
1 2, Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a sectional view on a re 
duced scale, showing a modification of one fea 
25 ture of the invention; and Fig. 4, a sectional 
view of another modification. 
My invention, as above stated, relates to that 
class of injectors in which two sets of steam 
nozzles and combining-tubes are employed, 
3o the first or forward set lifting the water and 
imparting the primary forward impulse to the 
jet, and the second or rear set imparting an 
additional impulse, the object being to render 
the injector self-adjusting without the use of 
movable nozzles. 
In the earlier types of injectors of this class 
such as that shown in Giffard's English patent 
of July 23, 1858-each set had its own steam 
supply and overflow, and in the operation of 
the injector it became necessary to manipu 
late a number of valves in order to start the 
injector in the first instance, or when from any 
cause the supply-column became broken. Since 
the Giffard patent numerous modifications of 
the double-tube injector have been devised, 
with the view of simplifying the operation of 
the same; but, so far as I am aware, none of 
these modifications is available for the pro 
duction of a practical instrument which can 
So be operated by manipulating a single valve, 
35 
45 
and which will be perfectly automatic in its 
action-that is to say, capable of lifting the 
column of water in the first instance, forming 
the jet, projecting it into the boiler or other 
reservoir under pressure, and re-forming the 55 
supply-column, if the latter from any cause 
becomes broken. 
My improved injector has been constructed 
with the view of attaining these objects, and 
practice has proven that it is efficient for the 
purpose. 
A is the casing of the injector, having 
branches a, b, and d, to which are secured by 
suitable couplings the steam-supply pipe a, 
the water-supply pipe b, and discharge-pipe 
d", respectively. 
In the injector are suitable internally 
threaded partitions, to which are secured the 
first or forward steam-nozzle, B, the first or for 
ward combining-tube, D, and an annular plug, 
f, the latter forming the forward end of the 
second or rear combining-tube, F, the rear end 
of the first combining-tube, D, projecting some 
distance into the mouth of this plug f, and 
the annular space of intervening between the 
plug and the rear end of the combining-tube 
D, forming a second or rear steam-nozzle. The 
rear combining-tube thus extends from the dis 
charge end a of the forward combining-tube, 
D., (where the steam from the nozzleg meets 
the water from the said tube,) to a point, ac', 
which is the point of least diameter of the 
tube F, the portion of said tube in the rear of 
this point ac' being the delivery-tube. All of 
the steam-nozzles and combining-tubes are in 85 
the same axial line, the nozzle B, tube D, and 
plug f being introduced through an opening 
at one end of the casing, which opening is pro- . 
vided with a screw-cap, c, and the tube F be 
ing adapted to a threaded opening, to which 
it is introduced from the opposite end of the 
casing, the object of this construction being 
to simplify the casting and fitting together of 
the parts, and hence decrease the cost. The 
nozzle B and combining-tube D are so propor 
tioned that the jet issuing into the combining 
tube will cause a partial vacuum in the branch 
b and pipe b', and thus tend to raise the col 
umn of water in the latter. 
95 
90 
The continuity of the rear combining-tube, Ioo 
2 
353,490. 
 
25 
O 
F, is interrupted by a space, i, and by a series 
of perforations, m, forming overflow-passages, 
the area of the lateral discharge from these pas 
Sages being greater than the combined areas of 
5 both steam-nozzles, so as to permit the escape 
into the overflow-chamber of the steam from 
both nozzles without causing back-pressure. 
The rear combining-tube is contained in the 
overflow-chamber G, which is separated into an 
inner and an outer portion by apartition, n, to an 
openingin whichisadapted a valvep, which will 
be closed to its seat by gravity. In starting the 
injector the pressure of steam in the inner por 
tion, of the overflow-chamber causes this valve 
to rise. The steam thus finds its way to the 
outer portion of the chamber and escapes 
through the discharge branch G'; but as soon 
as the jet is formed it. overcomes the pressure 
in the boiler and passes through the rear com 
bining-tube without escaping from any of the 
openings therein, the valve p then closing to 
its seat, so as to prevent the drawing in of any 
air to mingle with the jet. 
It will be observed that both the forward 
steam-nozzle, B, and the rear steam-nozzle, g, 
communicate with a conmon steam-chamber, 
So that both nozzles are supplied with steam 
simultaneously on opening the valve in the 
steam-pipe, and there are no overflow-passages 
except those in the rear combining-tube-that 
is to say, between the points a and ac'. The 
partial vacuum for causing the water to rise 
in the Supply-pipe b is therefore one due to 
the action of both steam-nozzles-that is to 
Say, the first nozzle, instead of discharging 
against atmospheric pressure, as it would have 
to do if the first combining-tube communicated 
with an overflow-chamber, discharges into a 
partial vacuum caused by the action of the 
Second nozzle; hence the partial vacuum pro 
duced in the supply-pipe is much nearer a 
perfect vacuum than it would be in the ab 
sence of the aid afforded by the second nozzle, 
and in consequence I am enabled to lift a col 
lumn of Water of a greater height than is pos 
sible when but a single nozzle is used, or when 
the first nozzle of the series discharges against 
atmospheric pressure, the vacuum, moreover, 
being such that when from any cause the 
column is broken it will be re-formed without 
the necessity of manipulating any portion of 
the instrument, the valve in the overflow 
chamber being automatic in its action, so that 
it is free to open whenever there is any over 
55 flow, and free to close when the velocity of the 
jet is such as to cause it to pass through the 
combining-tube into the boiler. 
Owing to the fact that the rear steam-nozzle 
of my in proved injector is an annular one 
6o surrounding the discharge end of the forward 
combining-tube, the rear combining-tube is 
necessarily of considerable internal diameter, 
and I am therefore enabled to form in said 
combining-tube overflow-openings or escape 
65 passages having an aggregate area equal to 
or greater than the combined area of the two 
steam-nozzles, thus permitting a free overflow 
45 
35 
 
75 
85 
d 
Of steam in starting the injector, while at the 
same time the continuity of the internal Sur 
face of the rear combining-tube is not inter 
rupted to such an extent as will materially in 
terfere with the free passage of the jet through 
the tube when said jet has been formed and 
has attained the proper velocity to permit it 
to enter the boiler. 
Instead of forming perforations in the rear 
combining-tube, F, as shown, said tube may 
consist of a series of short sections with inter 
vening spaces i, as shown in Fig. 4; but the 
use of the perforations is preferred, and the 
final overflow-openings in the tube should be 
at or near the point of smallest diameter of 
the same, in order to insure the proper for 
mation of the jet and the imparting thereto 
of the velocity necessary to cause it to over 
come the pressure which it has to resist. 
- 
The valve p in the overflow-chamber may 
be confined to its seat by suitable means when 
the feed-water is of a high temperature, or 
when it is desired to blow steam back into the 9) 
water-supply pipe for thawing out the same 
or for any other purpose. 
Although I have shown in the drawings but 
two sets of steam-nozzles and combining-tubes, 
more than two sets may be used, if desired, 
the overflow-chamber communicating with the 
rear combining-tube of the series. 
Although for the purposes of facilitating the 
construction of the injector, and providing a 
straight course for the jet through the same, Ioo 
it is advisable to locate all of the nozzles and 
combining-tubes in the same axial line, the 
main features of my invention are applicable 
to injectors in which the parts are not so ar 
ranged-as shown, for instance, in Fig. 3. 
I have described my injector as a lifting-in 
jector, and it is especially designed as such; 
but it should be understood that the injector 
is operative as well if the water enters the same 
under pressure. 
I am aware that it has been proposed to 
construct an injector having two or more sets 
of steam-nozzles and combining-tubes, and 
with overflow-passages formed wholly in the 
rear combining-tube of the series; but all such 
injectors, so far as I am aware, have been pro 
vided with valve mechanism whereby steam 
is caused to enter the nozzles successively, the 
jet from the first nozzle lifting the water and 
filling the injector before steam is allowed to 
ass to the second nozzfe for forcing the water 
into the boiler. Such valve mechanism, it will 
be evident, would effectually defeat the object 
of my invention, the essential feature of which 
is the admission of steam simultaneously to 
both nozzles in starting the injector, so that the 
first nozzle discharges into a partial vacuum, 
caused by the action of the second nozzle. 
I claim as my invention 
1. An injector having two or more sets of I3o 
steam-nozzles and combining-tubes, the noz 
zles receiving steam simultaneously in starting 
the injector, and the overflow-passages being 
formed wholly in the rear combining-tube of 
II5 
I 25 
O 
353,490 
3 
Io and having an area equal to or greater than 
2. An injector having two or more sets of formed wholly in the rear combining-tube of 3o 
the series, and having an area equal to or greater steam-nozzles and combining-tubes, the nozzles 
than the combined areas of the steam-nozzles, receiving steam simultaneously in starting the 
all substantially as specified. 
injector, and the overflow - passages being 
5 steam - nozzles and combining -tubes, all ar- the series, and having an area equal to or greater 
ranged in the same axial line, the nozzles receiv- than the combined areas of the steam-nozzles, 
ing steam simultaneously in starting the in- the point of final overflow being at or near the 
jector, and the overflow-passages being formed point of least diameter of said rear combining 
wholly in the rear combining-tube of the series, tube, all substantially as specified. 
5. An injector having two or more sets of 
the combined areas of the steam-nozzles, all steam-nozzles and combining-tubes, the noz 
zles receiving steam simultaneously in starting 
substantially as specified. 
3. An injector in which forward and rear the injector, and the overflow-passages being 
combining-tubes arranged in the same axial distributed throughout the length of the rear 4O 
I5 line are combined with a forward steam-nozzle combining-tube from its forward end to the 
discharging into the forward end of the first point of least diameter, and having an area. 
combining - tube, and a rear steam - nozzle equal to or greater than the combined areas of 
formed by an annular space around the rear the steam-nozzles, all substantially as specified. 
end of the forward combining-tube, both noz- 
2O zles receiving steam simultaneously in starting to this specification in the presence of two sub 
the injector, and the overflow-passages being scribing witnesses. 
formed wholly in the rear combining-tube, and 
having an area equal to or greater than the 
combined areas of the steam-nozzles, all sub- 
4. An injector having two or more sets of 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 45 
35 
25 Stantially as specified. 
JOHN R. GOEHRING, 
Witnesses: 
JoSEPH. H. KLEIN, 
HARRY SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353591.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 353,591. 
C. ROBERTS 
CORN SHELLER AND SEPARATOR 
Patented Nov. 30, 1886. 
 
I 
HESH 
st as 
WVVVVVVVSS 
Zarea 22 p. 
45-res 7 eaed 2s. 
Z2/2 z-92. 
Z///uzo 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CYRUS ROBERTS, OF THREE RIVERS, MICHIGAN. 
CORN SHELLER AND SEPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 353,591, dated November 30, 1886. 
Application filed January 29, 1886, Serial No. 190,215. (No model.) 
6 O 
65 
To all whon, it inval/ concern. 
Be it known that I, CYRUS ROBERTs, of 
Three Rivers, in the county of St. Joseph and 
State of Michigan, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Corn Shellers and 
Separators; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in the construction of 
corn shellers and separators of that class in 
which the shucks or husks are removed from 
the ears presented to the machine, the corn 
'shelled from the cobs, and then separated 
from the husks and cob, after which the husks 
are separated from the cobs, which are then 
delivered from the machine in separate and 
distinct piles. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
what may be termed a low-down' shelling 
cylinder, that may be fed by the operator from 
the ground without theintervention of an eleva 
tor With carriers and other separating devices, 
by means of which the mass of corn, cobs, and 
husks, as they are delivered from the husking 
and shelling cylinder, are carried rearwardly 
and upwardly, and in their progress the corn is 
first separated from the husks and cobs, and 
then the husks from the cobs, and each of the 
two latter are sent out at the tail of the ma 
chine, entirely separated from each other, and 
deposited in separate piles, while the corn is 
delivered at such a height from the ground as 
to allow it to be received in bags placed under 
the delivery-spout, or in wagons or cars for 
transportation in bulk without handling. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction of the various parts, their relation 
to each other, and combination, as more fully 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a vertical central longitudinal 
section of my improved machine. Fig. 2 is a 
top plan of the same. 
In the drawings, A represents a suitable 
frame supported upon proper wheels, as shown, 
for ease in transportation from place to place, 
and in turn Supporting the operating parts of 
the machine. 
B is a husking and shelling cylinder of any 
preferred construction adapted to the purpose, 
and to deliver the material passing from it 
onto an endless belt or carrier, the construc 
tion and operation of which will be hereinafter 
| explained. 
B' is the case inclosing the cylinder for husk 
ing and shelling, and it is provided with a 
hopper, E, into which the operator shovels the 
corn to be operated upon. 
C is a slide adapted to enlarge or diminish 
the discharge-throat D of the case, through 
which the husking and shelling cylinder dis 
charges the corn operated upon. Of course 
the cylinder must be provided with means 
for driving it; but as the cylinder, its case, and 
such means do not form a necessary part of 
this invention, a further description of their 
construction is deemed unnecessary here. 
F is a floor, extending under the case, which 
incloses the husking and shelling cylinder, and 
thence rearwardly and upwardly, as shown, to 
the point a; and G is a riddle or sieve located 
at the end of such floor, suitably or in the or 
dinary way supported and provided with a 
bell crank lever, H., for giving such riddle the 
necessary vibration. This bell-crank lever is 
connected by means of the pitman b to the 
crank-disk c on the shaft I. 
J J are sprocket-wheels or pulleys, over 
which the carrier runs at the forward end of 
the machine; and J'J' are other similar wheels 
or pulleys, over which the carrier runs at the 
rear end of the machine. 
K is the main driving-shaft, from which, 
through the intervention of suitable gearing, 
the husking and shelling cylinder is driven. 
Upon the overhanging end of this shaft Kisse 
cured the sprocket-wheel M, over which runs 
the chain N. M' is a similar wheel on the 
shaft I, near the opposite end of the machine, 
over which such chain also runs, and upon 
this shaft I there is secured a pinion, e, which 
engages with and gives motion to the shaft Li, 
through a wheel, f, secured thereon, and to 
the sprocket. wheels J J' and the carrier which 
runs over the same. 
The carrier O, to which a rearward motion is 
given through the sprocket-wheels over which 
it runs and by means of the mechanism already 
described, is provided with transverse slats 
h; and such carrier being formed of two chains 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
45 
353,591 
or belts running upon sprocket-wheels on 
either side of the machine, such slats form 
bridges or connections between the two chains, 
and, in the passage of the carrier to the rear, 
pass along upon the floor F, underneath the 
guide-wheels O', and along and over the in 
clined portion of the floor F, carrying the 
material which has been delivered from the 
cylinder along said floor F, which prevents 
the corn from falling through, each succeed 
ing slat taking a portion of the material de 
livered from the cylinder and carrying or 
scraping it up onto the riddle, G, through which 
the corn falls onto the inclined board or 
guide G", thence onto the inclined plane H', 
whence it falls into the spout I', from which 
it is delivered to suitable bags hung on the 
outside of the machine. 
P is a fan located underneath the inclined 
portion of the floor F and inclosed in a suita 
ble case, P, which sends a current of air up 
through the throat R to the chamber above, 
where the current is divided by means of the 
valve or adjustable wing-guide R', and, pass 
ing through the corn falling from the rid 
dle, carries the chaff out the opening S into 
the rear end of the machine. A portion of 
the air-current passes between the inclined 
board G' and the bottom of the riddle, and 
through such riddle with sufficient force to 
lift the lighter husks as the husks and cobs 
travel to the rear from this part of the rid 
dle, and separates such husks from the heavier 
cobs, and blows them out at the tail S of the 
machine and deposits them upon the ground 
in the rear of such machines. The heavier 
cobs are carried by the carrier to the rake 
T, which is secured to the frame T, which 
is hung from the top of the case A by suita 
ble supports, k. The head m of such rake T 
is connected by a suitable rod to a bell-crank 
lever, U, which is connected by means of a pit 
man, n, to the eccentric c on the shaft I, whereby 
a vibratory motion is given to such rake, the 
teeth of which are of a sufficient distance apart 
to allow the cobs to drop through them onto 
the ground or into a spout, U', whence they 
Inay be conducted by any of the known devices 
to any point desired, while the forcing of the 
wind through the riddle carries the husks 
themselves directly to the rear over the ends 
of such rake. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
It will be seen that by the use of the carrier 
all the material delivered from the shelling 
cylinder is carried up to the riddle, where the 
corn is separated from the husks and cobs and 55 
is cleaned by the air-blast as it passes to the 
outlet, and a portion of the blast being di 
rected through the rear end of the riddle after 
the corn has been sifted out, lifts the lighter 
husks above the cobs, which are too heavy to 
be affected by the blast, and drives such husks. 
out at the tail of the machine, while the cobs 
fall by their own gravity through the spaces 
between the rake-teeth, and thereby a complete 
separation is had of the corn from the cobs 
and the husks, and the two-latter are separated 
from each other and deposited outside of the 
machine in separate piles. 
- 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, with the shelling-cyl 
inder and an inclosing-case therefor, of a floor 
extending beneath said cylinder and thence 
upwardly and rearwardly, a riddle independ 
ent of said floor and situated upon a plane 
above said cylinder, and a carrier running un 
der said cylinder, over said floor, and over the 
surface of the riddle, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the riddle and the 
bell-crank lever H, of the revolving shaft I, 
cam-diske on said shaft, and the pitman b, con 
necting said cam-disk and lever, the rack T, 
shaft L, bell-crank lever U, and pitman con 
necting the lever U and cam-disk c, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination, with the case and the 
frame T, suspended from the top of the case, 
of the rake T, secured to said frame, the bell 
crank lever U, connected with said frame, the 
shaft I, and connections, substantially as de 
scribed, between the lever U and shaft I, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
4. The combination, with the shelling-cyl-, 
inder and the floor extending thereunder and 
thence upwardly and rearwardly, of the fan 
case constructed to form a throat, R, spout I, 
and incline H', the riddle G, the inclined guide . 
G', and wind-guide R, all substantially as 
shown and described, and for the purpose 
specified. 
CYRUS ROBERTS. 
75 
85 
90 
Witnesses: 
- 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
E. J. SCULLY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353691.txt	(No Model.) 
S, D. LOCKE, 
RAILWAY CROSS TIE, 
No. 353,691. 
Patented Dec. 7, 1886, 
 
22S)zzzzzzzzzzzzgzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzSS 
a/arSSs 
RSSNS 
s 
e 
22 
a. zza 
R-422 
YYA 
4. 
zza 
 
I EIH 
al 
WITNESSES = 
INVENTDR = 
& 
 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washingtol, O.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SYLVANUs D. LOCKE, OF HOOSICK FALLS, NEW YORK. 
RAILWAY CROSS-TE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 353,691, dated December 7, 1886. 
Application filed May 5, 1886. Serial No. 201,136. (No model.) 
25 nal sections riveted together. 
To ali, whon, it malf concern: 
Be it known that I, SYLVANUs D. LOCKE, of 
Hoosick Falls, in the county of Rensselaer and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Railway Cross 
Ties, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the employment in 
railways of iron or steel for cross-ties for Sup 
porting the rails, and is an improvement on 
Io the cross-tie shown and described in my ap 
plication No. 200,26S, filed April 27, 1886, to 
which reference is made for a more particular 
, description hereof. 
The objects of my improvement are, first, 
I5 to produce a cross-tie that can easily be formed 
or rolled in a rolling-mill and that shall be 
light while having the requisite strength and 
stiffness as well as the necessary superficial 
area to support the greatloads carried; second, 
2O to provide iron or steel ties with vertical cross 
flanges or anchor-plates to hold the ties from 
Slipping endwise or the track from lateral dis 
placement, and, third, to construct a cheap 
cross-tie rolled as to its body in two longitudi 
That others skilled in the art may make an 
use my invention, I will describe its construc 
tion and operation, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, making a part of this 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, with a cross 
Section in the foreground, of a railway, show. 
ing my improvements. Fig. 2 is a longitudi 
nal section forward of the center, showing the 
35 longitudinal rib or flange tapering from the rail 
outward, and also showing the central cross 
flange or anchor. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sec 
tion showing the rib or flange continued to 
the ends of the tie and another form of the 
4O cross-anchor. Fig. 4 is a plan or top view of a 
cross-tie, showing broken sections of the rails 
Secured thereto; and Fig. 5 is a view in cross 
Section of a cross-tie and one form of anchor 
plate cut through the rivets that secure the 
Heretofore the cross-ties supporting the rails 
(as affirmed in the aforesaid application) have 
been made of wood, that last on an average 
Only about six years. Many attempts have 
5O been made to construct them of iron that, 
properly coated to prevent oxidation, would 
be almost indestructible. 
3O Specification, in which 
one reason or another, have all been failures. 
Either the ties have been too costly or too 
heavy and massive, or they have offered too 55 
narrow a seat for the rails, or have covered 
too small an area of the road-bed. The de 
mand is for an iron or steel tie that shall cost 
but a little more than a common wooden tie. 
If heavy and massive, as those made of stone, 
the track, if uneven, is too unyielding, and 
the rails and rolling-stock are sooner pounded 
or worn out. If the rails rest. On a narro W 
seat on the tie, they are much more liable to 
break and the number of ties to the mile will 
be greatly increased. A very serious objec 
tion to the use of iron or steel ties has been 
the insecurity of the track against lateral dis 
placement. The light iron or steel ties, and 
particularly the rolled-metal ties, as hereto- 70 
fore made, offer but little resistance against 
end slipping or displacement. Not being anch 
ored in the roadway, as is the wooden tie with 
its embedded ends and irregular outline, the 
metal tie has been insecure in its position, and 
the track therefore liable to dangerous slid 
ings or displacements. The iron or steel tie 
must be firmly anchored in the roadway, and 
at the same time it must be strong and inflexi 
ble. 
To meet all of these requirements, some of 
them conflicting, is the object of this inven 
tion. 
A represents the ordinary T-rails, and B the 
double or single flanged cross-tie shown in the 
aforesaid application No. 200,248, but without 
the vertically bent-down ends constituting the 
anchors therein shown and claimed. In lieu 
of these end anchors, I use herein an inde 
pendent plate, b, rolled, cut and punched of go 
the form desired, and firmly secured crosswise 
of the tie by rivets or bolts c. This anchor 
plate should at least extend the full width of 
the tie, and reach down eight inches or more 
in the roadway. With the earth firmly packed 95 
underneath the ties and against the anchor 
plates, the track (if the latter are broadenough) 
will be securely held against lateral slipping. 
or displacement. This separate central anchor 
plate may be on the tie wherever desired; but IOO 
prefer to use it about or at the center of the 
tie, as shown. If two to each tie are used, 
they should be put near the ends of the tie, 
75 
These attempts, for say, near the rails. 
45 plate. 
sm 
 
- 
holes punched in the ties. These holes are 
punched near the vertical ribs or flanges a, 
and are so gaged apart as to give the proper 
width of track. They should also be so 
punched as to bring the clips on each section 35 
of the tie and opposing each other, as shown 
in Fig. 4. 
. 
What I claim is 
1. In a railway, a cross-tie rolled in two 
separate longitudinal sections or angle-bars go 
and riveted together, the whole being bent 
down as to its ends to conform to the slope of 
the roadway, substantially as described. 
2. In a railway, a cross-tie rolled in two sep 
arate longitudinal sections and riveted to. 45 
gether as to their vertical flanges, combined 
with a central anchor-plate to hold the track 
against lateral slipping or displacement, sub 
stantially as described. 
in two longitudinal sections, with their verti 
cal flanges riveted together, and having the 
rails secured to each section by shouldered 
and clamping clips, combined with a central 
anchor-plate, substantially as described. 
SYLVANUS D. LOCKE. 
3. In a railway, a metallic cross-tie rolled 5o 
2 
- 
353,691. 
The form of tie I prefer, and which is one 
of the parts of this invention, is represented 
in Figs. 4 and 5. It consists of two angle 
bars rolled of the desired form and then 
5 punched and riveted or bolted together, as 
shown. In practice it is found quite difficult 
to roll a plate, B, with a flange, a, deep enough 
to secure the requisite strength and stiffness. 
of the tie without making it heavy. 
It is, 
Io however, quite easy with V-shaped rollers to 
roll simple angle-bars, and by rolling them 
with one web, say, four or five inches wide, 
and the other, the narrow, web, say, two or 
three inches wide, and bolting or riveting the 
15 two bars B with their narrow webs together, 
as shown, a cheap and effective tie is secured. 
Of course the anchor-plate b is as well adapted 
to this form of tie, or almost any form of tie, 
as to that shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. This tie 
2o B'B' should be bent down to conform to the 
slope of the roadway, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. 
The rails may be secured to the ties in any 
desired way; but I prefer to use the simple 
clip d, of forged or cast metal, and use one on 
25 each side of each rail to a tie. These clips 
have shoulders against which the edges of the 
flanges of the rails abut, and their upper por 
tions firmly clamp the flanges and so securely 
hold the rails on the ties, where they are se 
3o cured by bolts f, that pass through them and 
 
Witnesses: 
N. W. LoCKE, 
E. J. LOCKE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353791.txt	(No Model.) 
J. LAMORE AUX. 
BUTTON ATTACHING MACHINE, 
No. 353,791. 
Patented Dec. 7, l886. 
 
 
242 
2 
ra 
WITWESSES 
Y 
IWVEWTOR 
2% Aumaa varioca 
\l. &. Q-ow- 
2. 47, 
Attorney. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JEREMIAH LAMOREAUX, OF FREMONT, MICHIGAN. 
BUTTON ATTACHING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 353,79, dated December 7, 1886. 
Application filed June 5, 1886. Serial No. 204,216. 
No model.) 
To all whom it notif concern: 
Beit known that I, JEREMIAHLAMIOREAUX, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Fre 
mont, in the county of Newaygo, State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Button-Attaching Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the accom 
panying drawings. 
This invention relates to certain novel im 
provements on button - fastening machines 
which are especially applicable to the improved 
machine-for which Letters Patent were granted 
to Slater and Lamoreaux, March 30, 1886, and 
numbered 339,024; and my object is to improve 
this machine and nake it more valuable by the 
means which will be fully understood from the 
following description, when taken in connec. 
tion with the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a left-hand side eleva 
tion of my improved button-attaching machine, 
indicating by the aid of dotted and full lines 
the boxes in their two positions. Fig. 2 is a 
perspective view of the machine complete. 
Fig. 3 shows in perspective the spring-actuated 
tripping device applied to the main feed-tube. 
Fig. 4 is a sectional end view in detail of Fig. 
3, showing a button in position to be caught 
by its eye with a clinching device. Figs. 5, 
6, 7, and 8 are detail views of my improved 
automatic feeding device. Fig. 9 shows a fast 
ele. 
As fully explained in the Letters Patent 
above mentioned, the object is to automatic 
ally feed buttons to a given point, and simul 
taneously with this button-feed to also feed 
automatically clinching devices for the eyes 
of the buttons, and to force the barbs of the 
clinching devices through the button-eyes, 
through the cloth or leather, and then clinch 
the fasteners by a single act of pressure on a 
tread le. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the base of my im. 
proved machine, and B the upright portion 
thereof, which terminates in a goose-neck, B, 
and which is constructed with a vertical guide, 
B', all of which may or may not be formed en 
tire. 
C indicates a vertical plunger, which is al 
lowed vertical reciprocating movement, and 
which may have a slight depression in its up 
per end. Above this plunger, and guided by 
the enlargement on the overhanging end of 
the goose-lneck B, is a tapered pointed anvil, 
D, the lower end of which may also be made 
concave or otherwise recessed. This anvil 
is vertically adjustable in its socket by means 
of a set screw, (t. (Shown in Fig. 2.) 
I will here state that the plunger C may be 
depressed by a spring and quickly thrown up 
to give the clinching blow by means of a 
treadle, one end of which is attached to the 
lower end of the plunger. 
F designates a feed-tube, which is curved at 
its lower delivery end and slotted on one side, 
the slot terminating in a recess, b, adapted to 
allow the button to be withdrawn from it at 
proper times. The upper end of this button 
delivery tube F is suitably connected to a hop 
per, G, and also to an extension, F, of a tube 
therein, the upper or receiving end of the lat 
ter communicating with a channel, F, in the 
bottom of the hopper, as shown in Figs. 5 and 
6. This hopper G is provided with a hinged 
door, G', connected by an arm, c, and a cord 
or chain, G', to an arm, c', which is rigidly se 
cured to the plunger C, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. The said button-holding hopper is con 
nected by a chain, H', to a hopper, H, adapted 
to contain the button-fastener, which latter 
hopper is arranged in about the same incline 
plane with and parallel to the hopper G. 
I designates a rod, curved as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2, and connected at its lower end to the 
arn c'. The upper end of this rod is passed 
through a tube, I, and adjustably connected 
thereto by a set-screw, e. The said tube is 
connected by a spring-arm, I, to the button 
feed tube F, and the lower end of the spring 
arm is upturned and passes through a perfo 
ration in the tube F, and serves as a lower catch, 
I, for the buttons, as shown in Fig. 3. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 I show, in combination with 
the spring-actuated tube I'', a curved finger, I, 
the upper part of which is turned down into 
the tube F, and adapted to engage succes 
sively the buttons from the top of this tube. 
Now it will be seen that at each depression 
of the plunger C one button is released and 
O. 
25 
30 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
353,791 
25 
30 
35 
5. 
O 
and button-fastener hoppers, respectively, the 
button and button-fastener guides, the plun 
ger and anvil, and the devices for automatic 
ally and successively releasing and arresting 
the buttons and fasteners, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination, in a button-attaching 
machine, of two flexibly-connected hoppers, 
substantially as described, hinged to the main 
frame, means for simultaneously vibrating 
these hoppers, fixed guides leading therefrom 
to the points of delivery for the buttons and 
The channel and tube h Hare especially fasteners, trapping devices therefor, a plun 
ger, and an anvil, substantially as described. 
5. In a button-fastening machine, a movable 
hopper, grooved at F, and provided with a 
slotted tube, F, in combination with a station 
ary feed-tube, F, a button trapping and re 
leasing device, a plunger, an anvil, and means 
described for connecting the plunger to the 
said hopper, substantially as described. 
6. In a button-fastening machine, the com 
bination therewith of a vibrating hopper, H, 
a guide, H, a depression, h, a guide for the 
fasteners, a spring, I, actuated by a tappet on 
the plunger C, a tripping and releasing de 
vice, and a clinching device, substantially as . 
described. 
7. In a button-fastening machine, the com 
bination, with the vertically - reciprocating 
plunger and an anvil coincident-therewith, of 
vibrating button and fastener hoppers, guides 
therefor, and tripping and releasing devices 
applied to the guides, the whole arranged as 
shown, described, and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
8. In a button-attaching machine, the com 
bination, with the two vibrating hoppers, of the 
arm - rest N. therefor, the stationary guides 
leading from the hoppers, and clinching de 
vices, substantially as described. 
9. In a button-attaching machine, the com 
bination of the cut-off V with the hopper G, 
adapted to receive vibrating motion, and a 
stationary guide - tube, as shown, described, 
and for the purpose specified. - 
10. The combination, with the button-guide 
and feed-tube, of the spring-actuated tube I', 
connected to the rod I, the releasing-lip I, and 
the arresting - catch I, substantially as de 
11. The combination, with the fastener 
guide, of the spiring-arm actuated by a tappet, 
l, on the plunger C, the catch l, and arresting 
pint, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JEREMIAE LAMOREAUX. 
another caught and held. The tube F, which 
I have been describing, is connected by the 
bracket-straps B B to the goose-neck B of 
the main frame, as clearly shown in Fig. 1. 
The lower perforation, b, of the tube F is ar 
ranged in alignment with the plunger and its 
anvil. 
Hindicates the hopper for the button-fast 
eners, which is provided with an angular tube, 
H', at the terminus of an angular channel, h, 
(shown in Figs. 7 and 8;) also with a hinged 
cover, g, and with a top chambered portion, 
9. 
designed for receiving and guiding the fast 
15 eners into a curved slotted and inclined guide 
way, L, which leads down to and is secured to 
the top of the frame-head B. By this guide 
the fasteners are successively fed to the point 
of clinching by means of an angular arm, l, 
and pin , fixed to a curved spring, L, located 
below the guide L, and adapted to be actuated 
by a tapping pin or stud, t, fixed to the plun 
ger C. (Shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings.) 
The hopper H, which, as above stated, is 
connected to the hopper G by a chain, H, is 
connected at i to a bracket-fixed to the frame 
portion B. 
Atkk the two hoppers G and Hare hinged 
to their respective supports, so that they are 
vibrated, and in the operation of the machine 
assume the positions indicated in full and dot 
ted lines, Fig. 1, they being supported, when 
depressed, by the arm N. 
' 
At W, Figs, 1 and 2, Ishow a valve or cut-off 
which prevents the escape of buttons from 
the hopper: G when it is tilted back. 
It will thus be seen by reference to the 
above description that I employ movable hop 
pers, each having one end attached to the 
main support and the other. end allowed to 
vibrate, which hoppers are provided with 
openings so adjusted that they are adapted for 
alignment with their respective feeding-guides, 
the said movements being synchronous with 
the vertical movement of the plunger C. I 
thus render it unnecessary to be constantl 
y 
feeding the machine with buttons and their 
fasteners by hand. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. In an automatic button - attaching ma 
chine, the combination, with a button-guide, 
of a vibrating or shaking hopper and a feed 
ing device, constructed as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. In an automatic button - fastening ma 
chine, the combination, with a fastener-guide, 
of a vibrating or shaking hopper and a feed 
ing device, constructed and arranged as shown, 
described, and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a button-fastening machine, the com 
bination of two connected vibrating button 
JoHN J. LAMOREAUX, 
R. C. SMITH. 
scribed. 
- 
Witnesses: 
O 
- 
45 
So 
55 
 
 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO5. 
IO 
II5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353891.txt	(No Model.) 
C, H, SMITH, 
SNAP HOOK, 
 
N. PeFERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, E.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. SMITH, OF NEW HAVIEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO. O. B. 
NORTH & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
SNAP ????. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 353,891, dated December 7, 1886. 
Application filed October 4, 1886. 
Serial No. 215,217. (No mode.) 
55 
75 
To all, ?y/u??, i? ??? ??????r?: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES H. SMITH, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new Im 
provement in Snap-Hooks; and I do hereby de 
clare the following, when taken in connection 
with accompanying drawings and the letters 
of reference marked thereon, to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, and which 
said drawings constitute part of this specifica 
tion, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a top view of the hook complete; 
Fig. 2, an under side view of the hook; Fig. 
3, a sectional side view, looking upon the 
spring M; Fig. 4, a transverse section cutting 
centrally through the hub; Fig. 5, a recessed 
side view of the tongue; Fig. 6, an opposite 
side view of the tongue; Fig. 7, an under side 
view of the tongue; Fig. 8, the spring M de 
tached; Figs. 9, 10, and 11, modifications. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in that class of snap-hooks in which the body 
is constructed with a hook at one end, and at 
the other end provided with means for attach 
ment, and in which a spring-tongue is hung 
in a recess in the body at the Securing end 
and SO as to Swing in the plane of the hook, 
the object of the invention being to cast the 
tongue and hook in their final complete shape 
and avoid the bending of the parts in assem 
bling or the mechanical introduction of a pivot, 
upon which the tongue may swing. 
In another application I have shown and 
described a construction in which the same 
object is accomplish by making the tongue 
spring an open helical Spring, and so that un 
der its expansion in an axial direction, after 
the tongue and the spring have been intro 
duced in the recess in the body, the spring will 
make engagement between the tongue and the 
body, so as to hold the tongue in place. By 
the present invention I retain the tongue 
spring in its usual shape and accomplish the 
same result by the introduction of an inde 
A represents the body, terminating at one 
end in the hook B and at the opposite end in 
the usual loop, C. The body is constructed 
with a longitudinal recess, D, in the plane of 
the hook, and in this recess the tongue E is 
arranged, the width of the recess correspond 
ling to the hub F of the tongue, and so as to al 
low free play of the tongue. 
In one side of the tongue a concentric re 
cess, G, is formed to receive the spring. On 
the reverse side of the hub is a concentric re 
cess, H., (see Fig. 6,) which opens to the lower 
side of the hub, as seen in Fig. 7. 
In the side of the recess in the body corre. 
sponding to the recessed side of the tongue 
a concentric inwardly-projecting stud, I, is 
formed.. The depth of the recess in the hub 
is somewhat greater than the length of the 
coil portion of the spring J, the spring J be 
ing coiled, (by preference the usual coiled-wire 
spring employed in this class of hooks,) the 
coils terminating at each end in an arm, one 
of the arms bearing against the body of the 
hook and the other against the tongue in the 
usual manner, and as seen in Fig. 3. 
Within the recess in the tongue I preferably 
form a shoulder, K, near the outer end of the 
ECeSS. 
On the side of the recess in the body oppo 
site the stud I is a like concentric stud, L, 
which corresponds to the concentric recess 
H in that side of the tongue. In introducing 
the tongue the opening from the recess Hiper 
mits the tongue to pasS into the recess in the 
body over the stud L, and until the tongue 
comes to a bearing thereon, as seen in Fig. 4. 
M is an auxiliary spring, preferably a flat 
helical spring, as seen in Fig. 8, detached, its 
diameter corresponding to the Outer end portion 
of the recess in the tongue and so as to rest upon 
the shoulder K. The extent of this spring is 
somewhat greater than the distance from the 
shoulder to the outer edge of the tongue, but 
so that the spring may be compressed within 
the plane of the hub of the tongue. 
In assembling the parts the spring Jis placed 
into the recess in the hub of the tongue in the 
usual manner. Then the spring M is intro 
duced, and rests against the shoulder K. The 
tongue is now settinto the recess in the body, the 
spring M being compressed to such an extent 
that it may pass the stud I. The opening 
through the spring corresponds to the stud, 
and so that as the tongue is forced to its place, 
with the spring M compressed, when the hub 
has arrived in the recess to its proper concen 
tric position, and the spring M left free, its ex 
go 
95 
IOO 
35 
45 pendent Spring. 
2 
 
353,891 
IO 
25 
pansion will cause it to pass onto the stud I, a concentric recessin one of its sides, a spring 
as seen in Fig. 4. The stud thus takes a bear 
to actuate the tongue, and a Second spring 
ing within the spring M, while the spring M 
arranged in the said concentric recess in the 
takes a bearing within the hub, and thus the 
hub of the tongue, the said spring adapted for 6 
5 spring and stud I form the pivot between the 
contraction and expansion in the direction of 
tongue and body, and because of the expan 
the axis of the hub, the corresponding side of 
sion of the spring onto the stud,to make such 
the recess in the body constructed to receive 
engagement, the tongue cannot be removed, 
the said second spring under its expansion in 
except by again compressing the spring, and 
said axial direction, substantially as described, 55 
such compression cannot be conveniently 
and whereby said spring substantially forms 
made, and never can occur accidentally. The 
the pivot upon which the said tongue SWings. 
spring J performs its usual function in the 
2. In a snap-hook, the combination of the 
opening and closing of the tongue. 
body A, constructed with a hook at one end 
The stud L, in the recess upon the opposite 
and an attaching loop at the other end, and 
side of the hub, aids somewhat in the support 
with an open recess at the loop end in the 
of the tongue; but it is not essential, and may 
plane of the hook, said recess constructed 
be omitted altogether, as seen in Fig. 9. 
with an inwardly-projecting stud, I, in one 
While I prefer to support the spring M on 
side of the recess, the tongue having its hub 
a shoulder in the tongue, as I have described, 
corresponding to said recess in the body and 75 
2O the shoulder may be omitted, as seen in Fig. 9, 
constructed with a recess, G, in the side of the 
and the spring M rest against the coils of the 
hub toward the said stud I, a spring to actuate 
the tongue, and a second spring, M, arranged in 
spring J, and accomplish the same result. 
I have represented the spring M as a flat 
said concentric recess in the hub of the tongue, 
helical spring, and this I prefer; but it may be 
the said spring adapted for contraction and 
a disk-spring, as seen in Fig. 10, and accom 
expansion in the direction of the axis of the 
plish the same result. 
hub, the external diameter of the spring cor 
Instead of forming the stud I in the recess in 
responding to the internal diameter of the 
the body, with which the spring M may en 
said recess, and the internal diameter of the 
gage, the body may be constructed with a recess 
spring corresponding to said stud I, substan 
corresponding to the spring and into which the 
tially, as described, the said spring M being 
spring will expand when the parts are assem 
adapted to engage the said stud I when the 
bled, as seen in Fig. 11. 
?? 
parts are assembled and form the pivot upon 
It will be apparent that the spring Mis in no 
which the tongue may swing. 
way necessarily dependent upon the spring J, 
3. The combination of the body A. termi 
and that any known spring may be substituted 
nating at one end in a hook, B, and at the other 
for the Spring J-as, for illustration, a flat, 
end in an attaching-loop, C, constructed with 
spring fixed in the body, as indicated in broken 
a recess at the loop end in the plane of the 
lines, Fig. 3. By this construction I am ena 
hook, the body and the said tongue constructed . 
bled to avoid openings which appear in the 
with a concentric. recess upon one side, a heli 
construction shown and described in the other 
cal spring, J, arranged in the said recess, one 
applications to which I have referred. . 
arm of Said spring taking a bearing upon the 
body and the other arm of the spring taking 
Certain features found in the hook in this 
application are also shown in two other ap 
a bearing upon the tongue, and a second spring, 
plications, Serial Nos. respectively 213,995, 
M, arranged in the said concentric recess in 
45 213,996. I do not wish to be understood as 
the hub of the tongue, the said spring adapted 
claiming anything in this application which 
for contraction and expansion in the direction 
I have claimed in the said two other applica 
of the axis of the hub, the corresponding side 
tions. 
of the recess in the body constructed to re 
ceive said second spring under its expansion 
in said axial direction, substantially as de 
scribed. 
40 
35 
. 
ICO 
I claim 
1. In a snap-hook substantially such as de 
scribed, the combination of the body, con 
structed with a hook at one end and an attach 
ing device at the other end, and with an open 
recess, D, at the attaching end in the plane of 
55 the hook, a tonguehaving a hub corresponding 
to said recess in the body and constructed with 
CHARLES H. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
A. H. JACKSON, 
G. H. ScRANTON, Jr. 
wh 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US353991.txt	(No Model.) 
IF, TAYLOR, 
BRACKET FOR SINKS, 
 
 
2/242 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FITCH TAYLOR, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNORTO HIMSELF, 
THOMAS R. BROWN, AND R. PITT OWEN, ALL OF SAME PLACE. 
BRACKET FOR SINKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 353,991, dated December 7, 1886. 
A. 
Application filed April 19, 1886, Serial No. 199,336. No model.) 
V 
of the brackets, and are secured to the flanges 
at of the sink by means of screws or bots d. 
These confining-clamps thus provide a simple 
and efficient means of confining the sink to 
the brackets and simplify and cheapen the 
construction of said brackets, inasmuch as 
they render unnecessary the formation of a 
double or slotted top bar on the bracket, as in 
devices of this class formerly manufactured. 
The clamp D may have at the top a flange 
projecting outwardly, as shown in Fig. 3, or 
the flange may project inwardly, as shown in 
Figs. 4 and 5, the top bar of the bracket in 
this case being recessed, as shown, for the re 
ception of said flange. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination of the sink having end 
flanges and the opposite supporting-brackets, 
with clamps D, bolted to said end flanges of 
the sink and embracing the top bars of the 5o 
supporting-brackets, all substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
35 
45 
FITCH TAYLOR. 
Witnesses: 
J. R. MASSEY, 
WM. V. MASSEY. 
I5 
To all uvholm, ibi 7nnally concern. 
Be it known that I, FITCH TAYLOR, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Philadel 
phia, Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
5 Improvements in Brackets for Sinks, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple, cheap, and efficient means of securing 
the elud flanges at the top of a sink to the top 
IC bars of the Supporting-brackets, and this ob 
ject I attain in the manner which I will now 
proceed to describe, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view showing my im. 
proved device for confining the flange of the 
sink to the bracket; Fig. 2, a transverse sec. 
tion showing the sink and both of the brack. 
ets; Fig. 3, a perspective view, on a larger 
Scale, of the confining device detached from 
the bracket and sink; and Figs. 4 and 5, views 
showing a modified for in of bracket and con. 
fining device. 
A represents an ordinary kitchen-sink hav 
ing top flanges, a, a, at each end; and B B are || 
25 the opposite Supporting-brackets, on the top 
bars, b, of which the end flanges, a a, of the 
sink rest, as shown in Fig. 2. In order to 
confine the flanges vertically to said top bars 
of the supporting-bracket I use clan)ps D, 
3O which embrace the lower edges of the bars b 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354091.txt	(No Model.) 
No, 354,091. 
W. A. P. BICKNELL, 
PUMPING ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented De C, 14, 1886, 
 
3SNuy 
S. 
SS SS 
S. 
SSS 
|H| 
a" 
vs 
s 
. 
e 
52 
a 
g 
s: - 
 
E) 
Ta. 
/7 a.o. a (2-(6-4-4 
y 
2- /7% 
Aes 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
W. A. P. BICKNELL, 
PUMPING ENGINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
   
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
W. A. P. BICKNELL. 
PUMPING ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 14, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
No. 354,091. 
  
 
 
 
(S 
Y 
Tziyitl'iirii, 
Ayy INNs. 
S 
N 
/ 
s 
 
S) 
N 
%L2%s st 
N RN 
S $2%2 2N. 
SS|| 3 ||NSS, 
NNg"E" 
NN 
SH N 
NN 
teSNS S 
 
N 
2 
& 
-6zzesz. 
u-2 
h 
Z7zaleza (27 
/22e, all a 6' 62-4-4 
N. PereRS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, b. c. 
16ed 
'izz, 
. 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. A. B. BICKNELL OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM 
A. PERRY AND CHARLES C. WORTHINGTON, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
PUM PNG a ENG NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 354,091, dated December l4, 1886. 
Application filed August 4, 1886. 
Serial No. 2:9,956. (No model.) 
O 
3O 
35 
55 
65 
To all, Luhon, it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMI. A. P. BICK 
NELL, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at New York, county of New York, and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pumping - Engines, 
fully described and represented in the follow 
ing specification and the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of the same. 
This invention relates to that general class 
of engines which are known as "direct-act 
ing, and particularly to an engine of this 
class which is designed for pumping liquids, 
or, in other Words, a direct-acting pumping 
engine. In an engine of this class, the same 
as in other classes of engines, it is of course 
desirable, for the sake of economy, to use the 
steam expansively. This has heretofore been 
accomplished in some cases by the use of com 
pound cylinders, and in some cases by the em 
ployment of one or more auxiliary or conn 
pensating cylinders and pistons, which is or 
are arranged to act in opposition to the main 
steam piston or pistons during the first part 
of the stroke of the engine, and in conjunction 
there with during the last part of the stroke, 
as shown and described in the United States 
Letters Patent granted to C. C. Worthington, 
January 29, 18S4, No. 292,525, and in several 
subsequent patents to the same inventor. 
It is the object of the present invention to 
provide means by which the steam can be used 
eXpansively in a direct-acting pumping-en: 
gine without the employment of compound cyl 
inders or other means for securing an even dis 
tribution of the power throughout the entire 
stroke, and yet without resulting in a spas 
modic or noisy action of the engine or an ir 
regular discharge of the liquid from the force 
main. 
My invention is based upon the discovery 
that where the force-main of the pump is of 
sufficient length the moving column of liquid 
in the force-main can, by reason of its inertia, 
be made to perform the same or substantially 
the same function as a fly-wheel-that is to 
say, the column of liquid can, by reason of 
its inertia, be made to absorb or take up the 
excess of power developed by the engine dur 
ing the first part of the stroke, when the press 
ure in the steam cylinder or cylinders is great 
est, and will then give up this absorbed power, 
so as to aid the engine during the last part of 
the stroke, when the pressure in the steam cyl 
inder or cylinders is reduced by reason of the 
expansion of the steam. In order that the 
column in the main may perform this func 
tion, it is of course necessary that the usual 
air-chamber which is located at or near the 
force-chamber should be omitted. 
As a full understanding of my invention 
can be best given by an illustration and de 
scription of an engine embodying the same, 
all further preliminary description of the in 
vention will be omitted and a description of 
Such an engine given, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in sec. 
tion, of a single direct-acting pumping-engine 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional elevation, upon an enlarged scale, of the 
steam end of the engine, or engine proper, and 
a part of the Water end of the engine, or pump 
proper. Fig. 3 is a Sectional elevation, upon 
a still larger scale, of the cataract apparatus 
for controlling the operation of the main steam 
valve. Fig. 4 illustrates a modification, which 
will be hereinafter explained; and Fig. 5 is a 
diagrammatic plan view illustrating the man 
ner in which the invention may be applied to 
a duplex pumping-engine. 
Referring particularly to Figs. 1 and 2, it is 
to be understood that A represents the steam 
cylinder, and B the water-cylinder, of an ordi 
nary Single direct-acting pumping-engine. The 
piston C of the steam-cylinder is connected di 
rectly to the plunger D of the water-cylinder 
by the piston-rod (, in the usual manner. The 
cylinder A is provided with the usual induc 
tion and exhaust ports, 23, which are controlled 
by an ordinary slide-valve, 4. The water-cyl 
inder B is provided with the usual suction and 
force chambers, FG, the former of which com 
municates with the Suction main H, and the 
latter with the force-main K. The force-cham 
ber G is not provided with the usual air-cham 
ber to equalize the flow from the force-cham 
ber to the main, but the force-main is provided 
at a considerable distance from the pump with 
what I term an 'equalizer, which is arranged 
to exert a yielding pressure upon the column 
of water in the force-main at that point, and 
9O 
95 
ICC 
2 
354,091 
IO 
I5 
2O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
thus permit the portion of the column which 
is between the equalizer and the pump to move 
at a varying velocity without affecting substan 
tially the velocity of the column beyond the 
equalizer. 
The equalizer may be made in different ways. 
. As shown in Fig. 1, it consists of an air-cham 
ber, L, which is about the size of or slightly 
larger than the air-chamber usually located at 
the force-chamber. The distance which the 
equalizer should be removed from the pump 
that is to say, the length of the column of liquid 
in the force-main between the equalizer and 
the pump-will depend largely upon the di 
ameter of the force-main, thesize of the pump, 
the length of the stroke, the speed at which it 
is run, the head against which the pump is 
working, and the weight of the liquid being 
pumped. ASSulming the liquid to be pumped 
to be water, the diameter of the force-main 
twelve inches, the diameter of the pump-plun 
ger twenty inches, the length of stroke thirty 
six inches, the number of strokes per minute 
forty, and the head two hundred feet, the length 
of the column between the pump and the equal 
izer should be about five hundred feet. 
The force-main K will preferably be pro 
vided just beyond the equalizer with a check 
valve, 34, the purpose of which is to prevent 
the reaction of the column of liquid in the 
main beyond the equalizer, and also to pre 
vent that part of the force-main from becom 
ing emptied in case it should be found neces. 
 sary to take the pump to pieces for any pur 
pose. 
The valve 4 of the cylinder A may be oper 
ated in any of the ways common in this class 
of engines. The valve-operating mechanism 
will, however, preferably be of the form shown, 
which will now be described. The valve-chest 
E of the cylinder A is so formed as to provide 
at its ends two small cylinders, b, into which 
fit pistons or plungers 30, which are connected 
by a rod, 31, and are arranged so that their 
inner ends abut against the opposite sides of 
a projection formed on the top of the valve 4. 
The small cylinders b are provided with sin 
gle induction and discharge ports 1, which are 
controlled by a small slide-valve, 5, located in 
a small steam-chest, e, on the top of the steam 
chest E. 
Steam is admitted to the chests Ee through 
the usual induction-pipes, 3233, and, after be 
ing used in the cylinders Ab, is exhausted into 
the usual exhaust-pipes, 10 ll. The inner one 
of the pistons 30 is provided with a rod, 12, 
which passes through the end of the steam 
chest and is connected to a small piston, 35, 
which works in a cylinder, c, located at the 
end of the steam-chest E. The cylinder c is 
filled with oil or other liquid, and is provided 
with a duct, 6, which extends from end to end 
of the cylinder, and is controlled by a cock or 
valve, 7, by which the duct can be opened to 
a greater or less extent, so as to regulate the 
circulation of the liquid from one side to the 
other of the piston 35. In addition to the duct 
6, the cylinder c is provided with two ducts, 8 
9, which extend from the opposite ends of the 
cylinder, and open into the cylinder at points 
distant from its ends about two-thirds of its 
length. These ducts are controlled by out 
wardly-opening check-valves 1314, which are 
arranged as best shown in Fig. 3. The valve 
5 is provided with a rod, 29, which passes 
through the end of the steam-chest e, and is 
connected to a short arm extending from a 
rock-shaft, 36, having a second arm, 37, the 
lower end of which is connected to the piston 
roda in any of the common ways. 
The engine may be provided with any suit 
able form of cut-off apparatus. The apparatus 
which is shown for this purpose is of substan 
tially the same form as that shown in the Let 
ters Patent No. 292,525, before referred to. 
It consists of two oscillating plugs or valves, 
28, which are arranged in the induction-ports 
2, and are provided with arms 27, which are 
connected by a rod, 26, which is in turn con 
nected to a lever, 25, which is connected by a 
rod, 24, with the piston-rod a. 
The operation of the engine thus organized 
is as follows: In describing this operation it 
will be assumed that the engine is in operation 
and that the parts are in the position shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2, the engine having just com 
pleted its inward stroke. It will be observed 
that just before the parts arrive in this posi 
tion the arm 37 will have rocked the shaft 36, 
so as to move the valve 5 into position to per. 
mit the steam to enter the inner one of the cyl 
inders b, and at the same time permit the 
steam already in the outer one of the cylinders 
b to be exhausted. As the steam enters the 
inner one of the cylinders b, it will move the 
pistons 30 35 outward, and thereby commence 
to shift the valve 4. This will take place just 
before or just as the piston Carrives at the 
end of its stroke, as shown in Fig. 1. As the 
pistons 30 35 are thus moved, the liquid in 
the cylinder c will be forced to circulate 
through the duct 6 from one side to the other 
of the piston 35, and the duct 6 being com 
paratively small, the liquid will flow through 
it slowly, thereby preventing the pistons 3035 
from moving quickly, so as to shift the valve 
4 suddenly. This slow movement of the pis 
tons 30 and the valve will prevent the livesteam 
from being admitted in front of the piston C 
before it has fairly come to rest, and will se 
cure the necessary pause or dwell at the end 
of the stroke, to permit the column of liq. 
uid between the pump and the equalizer to 
come to rest and the pump-valves to come 
to their seats without slamming, and to pre 
vent undue strain upon the engine. The 
duration of the pause at the end of the stroke 
can be readily varied and regulated by adjust 
ing the cock or valve 7 of the cataract appa 
ratus, so as to permit the liquid to circulate 
more or less rapidly through the duct 6. The 
pistons 30, thus set in motion, will continue to 
move the valve 4 slowly until the valve com 
mences to uncover the induction-port 2 at the 
75 
90 
OO 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
354,091. 
3 
O 
40 
45 
inner end of the cylinder A, so as to admit 
steam behind the piston C, to start it upon its 
outward stroke. As soon as this takes place, 
it is desirable that the valve 4 should make 
the remainder of its stroke quickly, so as to 
fully open the induction-port 2 as quickly as 
possible. This is accomplished by means of 
the duct 8 and valve 13. 
It will be observed 
that during the first part of the movement of 
the pistons 3035 the piston 35 covers the in 
ner end of the duct 8, but just as the valve 4 
commences to uncover the port 2 the inner 
end of the duct S is uncovered by the piston 
35, and this permits the liquid in the cylinder 
c to raise the valve 13 and flow freely through 
the duct 8 to the other side of the piston 35, so 
as to offer very little resistance to the piston, 
and allow it and the pistons 30 and the valve 
4 to be moved quickly by the steam for the re 
mainder of their Stroke. 
As soon as the valve has been shifted, as just 
described, the full pressure of the steam will 
be exerted upon the piston C, to start it upon 
its outward stroke, and the power thus de 
veloped will be expended in starting and mov 
ing the column of liquid in the force-main. 
During the first part of the stroke, when the 
steam is acting at full pressure on the piston C, 
the power developed by the engine will be in 
excess of what is required to move the column 
of liquid at the mean or average velocity re 
quired, and the consequence will be that this 
excess of power will be expended in accelerat 
ing the velocity of the column, and thus the 
column Will, as the piston approaches the mid 
die of the stroke, acquire a greater velocity 
than is required. This extra velocity will not 
be imparted to the whole column, however, 
but only to that part of the column which is 
between the pump and the equalizer, and will 
result in compressing the air in the chamber 
L. After the engine has made a part of its 
stroke-Say about Olne-third, more or less-the 
valve 28 at the inner end of the cylinder A 
will arrive in position to cut off the further ad 
mission of steam to the cylinder, and the pis 
ton C will proceed upon and Cornplete its stroke 
under the expansive force of the steam already 
in the cylinder. As the steam expands in the 
cylinder, its pressure of course decreases, thus 
reducing the power of the engine until, as it 
nears the end of the stroke, the power will fall 
below what is required to move the column of 
liquid in the force-main. That part of the col 
umn between the pump and the equalizer, hav 
ing, however, been accelerated during the first 
part of the stroke, will, by reason of its inertia, 
aided by the decreasing power of the engine, 
continue in motion, but at a decreasing ve 
locity during the last part of the stroke, and 
thus permit the engine to complete its stroke. 
During the last part of the stroke, and during 
the pause before the commencement of the next 
stroke, the air in the chamber L, which was 
compressed during the first part of the stroke, 
will expand, and thus maintain a uniform or 
practically uniform pressure at that point, and 
secure a uniform flow of the liquid through 
that portion of the force-main beyond the air 
chamber and a uniform discharge of the liq 
uid from the force-main. 
From what has been said it will be seen that 
that portion of the column of liquid in the 
force main which is between the pump and 
the equalizer is made, by reason of its inertia, 
to perform the same function as a fly-wheel 
that is to say, it takes up the excess of power 
developed by the engine during the first part 
of the stroke, when the power is greater than 
is required, and gives off this power during 
the last part of the stroke, when the power de 
veloped by the engine is less than is required. 
It will be seen, however, that this result could 
not take place if the pump were provided with 
the usual air-chamber at or near the force 
chamber, as in such case the excess of press 
ure of the steam at the commencement of the 
stroke Would simply impart additional ve 
locity to the pump-plunger, which would cause 
the air in the air-chamber of the pump to be 
compressed, but would not impart any addi 
tional velocity to the column in the force 
main. From this it would result that when 
the steam-pressure was reduced during the 
last part of the Stroke by the expansion of the 
steam the air in the chamber would expand 
and offer the same or substantially the same 
resistance to the pump-plunger, and as a result 
the engine would not be able to complete its 
stroke. 
As the piston C arrives at the end of its 
outward stroke, it will cover the exhaust-port 
8, and be brought to rest in the usual manner 
by cushioning upon the Small amount of steam 
confined in the end of the cylinder. Just be 
fore the piston Carrives at the end of its stroke 
the valve 5 will be shifted so as to open the 
port 1 to admit steam to the Outer one of the 
cylinders b, and the piston C will then make 
its inward stroke in the same manner as just 
described. 
When the engine is in operation, the column 
of liquid in the force-main may not, owing to 
its inertia, come to rest at once upon the con 
pletion of the stroke of the piston Cand plun 
ger D, but continue to move in the main dur 
ing the pause or dwell of the piston and plun. 
ger. This movement of the column will have 
a tendency to draw the liquid through the 
pump, and Will raise all of the suction and 
force valves, as indicated in Fig. 2; but the 
pause of the engine at the end of the stroke 
Will allow time for that portion of the column 
between the pump and the equalizer to come 
to rest, So that the valves will come to their 
seats and not be slammed by the starting of 
the plunger upon its return-stroke. 
It has already been stated that the pause 
or dwell of the piston C at the end of the stroke 
can be readily varied by adjusting the cock 
or valve 7 so as to permit the liquid in the 
cylinder C to circulate more or less rapidly 
from one side to the other of the piston. 35. 
From this it follows that the cock or valve 7 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
O 
20 
25 
4. 
y 
354,09. 
r 
can be made to operate as a governor to regu 
late the speed of the engine. 
For this pur 
pose the cock 7 is provided with an arm, 15, 
which is bifurcated at its end and straddles a 
disk, 16, which is secured to the end of a small 
plunger, 17, which enters a small cylinder or 
chamber, 18, formed below the cylinder c, as 
best shown in Fig. 3. The chamber 18 com 
municates by a pipe, 24, with the force-main 
K. at or beyond the equalizer. The disk 16 is 
provided with a spring, 19, which is arranged 
to act in opposition to the plunger 17, and is 
of sufficient strength to just counteract the 
pressure which exists in the main when the 
engine is operating at its hormal speed. 
From this arrangement it results that when 
ever the pressure in the main is increased be 
yond the proper point this increased pressure 
will be communicated to the plunger 17, and 
will overcome the tension of the spring 19 and 
operate the cock 7, so as to check the flow of 
the liquid from one side to the other of the 
piston 35, and thus lengthen the pause of the 
piston C at the end of the stroke. As soon as 
the pressure in the force-main is reduced, the 
spring 19 will again open the cock 7. The 
spring 19 is provided with an adjusting-screw, 
20, by which its tension can be regulated, as 
may be required. 
From what has been said it will be see 
that the volume of air in the chamber L is, in 
effect,a cushion or spring-or, in other words, 
a yielding connection-interposed between 
that part of the column of liquid which is 
beyond the air-chamber and that part which 
is between the air-chamber and the pump, its 
function being to permit the part of the col 
umn next to the pump to move at varying ve 
locities without materially affecting the ve 
locity of the part beyond the air-chamber. 
This being the case, it is apparent that other 
means than the volume of confined air may 
be employed to effect the same result. For 
example, as illustrated in Fig. 4, the equal 
izer is in the form of an accumulator, and ac 
complishes the same result. As shown in said 
figure, the chamber L, instead of being filled 
with a body of air, is provided with a plunger, 
38, which is acted on by suitable weights, 39. 
The action of the equalizer thus formed is the 
same as the body of confined air. As the ve 
locity of the column of liquid between the 
chamber L and the pump is accelerated and 
its pressure increased during the first part of 
the stroke, the plunger 38 will be raised, and 
as the velocity and pressure decreases during 
the last part of the stroke the plunger will 
fall. Of course it will be understood that the 
plunger 38 may be acted on by a Spring, in 
stead of being weighted, or that the chamber 
L may be a cylinder having a piston which is 
acted on by either a weight or spring. Since 
the action of the body of confined air or the 
weighted or spring-pressed plunger or piston 
is, in effect, but a yielding weight or connec 
tin interposed between the two parts of the 
column in the force-main, it is evident that 
--- - - 
any form of equalizer which will perform this 
function will secure the desired effect, and 
will therefore be within the scope of the in 
vention. In some cases the equalizer may 
consist of a simple stand-pipe located at the 
point occupied by the chamber L. In such 
case the liquid will simply rise in the stand 
pipe during the first part of the stroke and 
fall back to its normal level during the last 
part of the stroke. When a stand-pipe with 
an open end is employed, it must of course be 
somewhat higher than the head against which 
the pump is Working. . 
The present invention can be applied to du 
plex as well as to single pumping-engines. 
In such case each side of the engine will be 
provided with an independent force-main ex 
tending from the pump to the chamber L, as 
illustrated in Fig. 5. From the chamber L. 
only a single main is necessary; or two or 
more independent pumps may be connected 
to the chamber L. in the same manner as the 
two sides of the duplex engine. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a pump, of the 
force-main connected thereto without the in 
tervention of an air-chamber and an equal 
izer, substantially such as described, located 
at such a distance from the pump that the col 
umn of liquid in the main between the equal 
izer and the pump will have sufficient inertia 
to perform the function of a fly-wheel, and ar 
ranged to exert a yielding pressure upon the 
column in the main, whereby that portion of 
the column between the equalizer and the 
pump may move at varying velocities without 
affecting substantially the velocity of the col 
umn beyond the equalizer, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination, with the pump, of the 
force-main connected thereto without the in 
tervention of an air-chamber and an equal 
izer consisting of the chamber L, containing 
a volume of confined air located at such a dis 
tance from the pump that the column of liquid 
in the main between the equalizer and the 
pump will have sufficient inertia to perform 
the function of a fly-wheel, and arranged to ex 
ert a yielding pressure upon the column in the 
main, whereby that portion of the column be 
tween-the equalizer and the pump may move 
at varying velocities without affecting sub 
stantially the velocity of the column beyond 
the equalizer, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the cylinder c, 
having the duct 6, and the piston 35, forming 
the cataract apparatus, of the cock or valve 
7, the chamber 18, having the plunger 17, con 
nected to said cock or valve, and the pipe 24, 
connecting said chamber with the force-main 
K, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
4. The cataract apparatus consisting of the 
piston 35 and the cylinder c, having the duct 
6, and the ducts 89, provided with the valves 
1314, substantially as described. . 
5. The combination, with a direct-acting 
7o 
9O 
95 
IOO 
II5 
35 
45 
55 
 
354,09. 
5 
IO 
pumping - engine and its force - main, of an 
equalizer, substantially such as described, lo 
cated at such a distance from the pump that 
the column of liquid in the main between the 
5 equalizer and the pump will have sufficient 
inertia to perform the function of a fly-wheel, 
and arranged to exert a yielding pressure 
upon the column in the main, whereby that 
portion of the column between the equalizer 
and the pump may move at varying Veloci 
ties without affecting substantially the velocity 
of the column beyond the equalizer, and means, 
substantially such as described, whereby the 
speed of the engine is regulated by varying 
the length of the pause of the engine at the 
end of each stroke, substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with a direct - acting 
pumping - engine and its force - main, of an 
equalizer, substantially such as described, lo 
cated at such a distance from the pump that 
the column of liquid in the main between the 
equalizer and the pump-will have sufficient 
inertia to perform the function of a fly-wheel, 
and arranged to exert a yielding pressure 
25 upon the column in the main, whereby that 
7. The combination, with the pump and its 35 
portion of the column between the equalizer 
and the pump may move at varying Veloci. 
ties without affecting substantially the velocity 
of the column beyond the equalizer, and means, 
substantially such as described, whereby the 3O 
main valve of the engine is moved slowly up 
to the point where the admission of steam be 
gins and quickly thereafter, substantially as 
described. 
force-main, of an equalizer, substantially such 
as described, located in the force-main and ar 
ranged to permit the inertia of the column in 
the main to aid the engine during the last 
part of the stroke, thereby permitting the 4O 
steam to be used expansively, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto Set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
W. A. P. BICKNELL. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES A. HoWEY, 
JAS, J. KENNEDY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354191.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 354,191. 
H. D. HATHAWAY, 
REAPER AND MOWER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 14, l886. 
N. 
VEWTOR 
ES a 4ae. 
is 
Attorneys 
H. D. HATHAWAY. 
REAPER AND MOWER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2 
Patented Dec. 14, 1886. 
t 
(No Model.) 
No. 354,191. 
 
7\ y24 All III 
as ill. 
ed 
r 
All 
s 
WITWESSES 
244. 
2. 
WWEWTOR 
z/A/ 
J21 AttorneyS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARLOW. D. HATHAWAY, OF ANTWERP, NEW YORK. 
REAPER AND MOWER. 
SPECIFICATION iorming part of letters Patent No. 354,191, dated December 14, 1886, 
Application filed April 3, 1886. Serial No. 197,688. (No model.) 
Be it known that I, HARLOW. D. HATEIA 
I5 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a mower, showing of the main frame. 
65 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and ion, 25, on the rear end of the double-crank 5.5 
Ic which it appertains to make and use the same, 
I is the inner shoe of the finger-bar I, which 6o 
2O view of the double cutter, showing the upper hinged brace-rods 17 and 18 to the curved bar 7o 
frame in boxes FF, and is provided with a 
To all, Luhon, it nail? eO7 cert: 
miter-gear, G, which engages a miter-pinion, 
WAY, a citizen of the United States, residing at H., on a sleeve, 19, which is also provided with 
Antwerp, in the county of Jefferson and State a cog-gear, 20, which latter gear engages a pin 
useful Improvements in Reapers and Mowers; shaft 29. The pitman-rods 10 and 30 are con 
and I do declare the following to be a full, nected at their inner ends to the double crank 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 40 of the shaft 29 by collars 10'10" at the for 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to Ward end of the arm 30'. 
reference being had to the accompanying draw- shoe I is connected to the outer end of the 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference curved coupling-bar J, the inner end of Said 
marked thereon, which form a part of this bar J being hinged between bearings KK, pro 
Specification. 
jecting from the forwardly-projecting arm 30 
my improvements applied. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
It is the finger-bar, which is connected at its 
longitudinal sectional view of the same. Fig. inner end to the inner shoe, I, which latter is 
3 is a detail view of the track-cleaner, showing provided at its forward end with a small guide 
its arms attached. Fig. 4 is a cross-sectional wheel, L, and is connected by pivoted or 
and lower guard. Fig. 5 is a detail view of J, and to a bearing, M, near the rear end of the 
the devices for releasing the foot-lever and main frame on the under side of the latter. 
throwing the operating mechanism into gear. The coupling-bar J is connected intermediately 
Fig. 6 is a sectional view of the clutch and its of its ends with a quadrant, J', projecting from 
tion with one of the supporting-wheels. Fig. bearing N' for the lever N is provided with 
7 is a view of the inner side of one of the gears teeth N' on its upper edge, which are engaged 
1 and a cross-section of the axle, showing the by a spring-actuated detent, N, which is con 
bolts in position. Fig. S is a detail view of trolled by a small lever, N, connected with the . 
3O one of the supporting-wheels, showing a ratchet lever N, to withdraw the detent N from the 8O 
applied thereon. Fig. 9 is a detail view of teeth of the bearing N'. 
One of the gears 1, showing the axle E in cross- 
There are two sickles, P Q, connected one 
Section and a pinion thereon engaging the said to each of the pitman-rods 10 and 30, SO as to 
gear; and Fig. 10 is a detail view of the hand- be reciprocated at the same time in opposite 
ment to the main frame. 
The finger - guards are each made in tWO 
and it consists in the construction and novel the latter part being the longer of the two. 
combination of parts, as hereinafter described, The teeth or knife points project beyond the 
13 is the track-cleaner at the outer end of the 
companying drawings, A designates the main sickle-bar. This track-cleaner is double, and 
frame of the machine, which is mounted on the is pivoted to the lear end of the Outer shoe, S. 
axle B, the latter being supported by the driv. The rear end of the outer shoe, S, is provided 
11 designate the internally-toothed gears, detents S, seated in the sockets of the track 
which are keyed fast to the driving shaft or cleaner, SSS being the arms of the track 
axle B, and the teeth of the gears 1 L engage cleaner. 
pinions pp on the ends of the rear transverse 
T is the driver's seat, which is so located as 
85 
My invention relates to reapers and mowers; parts-an upper part, C, and a lower part, b 
25 actuating parts, showing the same in connec- the fulcrum-point of the lifting-lever N. The 75 
4O and pointed out in the claims. 
Referring by letter and number to the ac- 
upper finger-guards. 
45 ing-Wheels C and D. 
with teeth S', which are engaged by Spring- 95 
5o driving-shaft E, which is journaled on the main to permit the driver to conveniently handle IOO 
m 
35 lever, showing its locking device and attach. directions one above the other. 
90 
2 
354,191 
the lifting-lever, and also to permit him to 
operate the foot-lever 7, to throw the machine 
in and out of gear. 
22 designate ratchets on the inner faces of 
the hubs of the drive-wheels. 
33 are dogs inside of the hubs of the inter 
nally-toothed gears 11. 
4 designates the springs, four at each side, 
that hold the dogs 33 normally in place in en 
gagement with the ratchets 22. 
55 are the clutches that draw the dogs 33 
out of engagement with the ratchets 22. 
al 
66 are the gear-shifters, which are connected 
at their outer ends to the clutches 55, and at 
their inner ends to a foot-lever, 7, on opposite 
sides of its fulcrum. 
dindicates pins or bolts, which pass through 
the springs 4, and are secured at their outer 
end to the dogs 3. These pins or bolts have a 
stop-nut on their outer ends, and pass freely 
through an aperture in the clutch. 
Guide-caps 8 8 are connected to the upper 
face of the frame of the machine, near the 
edges of the same, and the clutch-shifters 66 
work beneath the guide-caps 88. 
9 designates a spring-catch provided with a 
shoulder, 40, and a projecting foot-piece, 41, 
the latter of which may be pressed down upon 
to release the foot-lever 7 and throw the oper 
ating mechanism in gear. By pushing the 
foot-lever 7 forward, it will be forced into en 
gagement with the spring-catch 9, and the 
mechanism for operating the sickles will be 
thrown out of gear. 
The miter-gears and cog-gears on the main 
frame are covered by a hinged cap, 60, which 
protects these gears from the weather. 
The boxes in all instances in this construc 
tion are provided with rawhide linings, which 
lining possesses the advantage of preventing 
any two pieces of metal from coming together 
at the points where used, and never wears the 
shaft out of true or round, runs stiffer and 
easier, and does not become heated, and never 
needs refilling. 
Having described this invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S-as 
1. The combination, with the main frame 
and the supporting and driving wheels pro. 5o 
vided with ratchets on the inner ends of their 
hubs, of the internally-toothed wheels keyed 
to the axle inside of the driving-wheels, and 
provided with the spring-pressed dogs in their 
hubs, the gear-shifters connected to the foot-55 
lever, the shouldered spring-catch for engag 
ing the foot-lever, the transverse driving-shaft 
provided with the end pinions and the inter 
mediate miter-gear, the sleeve 19, provided 
with the miter-pinion H and cog-gear 20, the 6o 
double-crankshaft, the pitman-rods 10 and 30, 
the hinged brace-rods connecting the inner 
shoe to the frame, the cutter-bar pitman-rods, 
and the double knives, substantially as speci 
fied. 
2. The combination, with the main frame 
secured to the axle mounted in the support 
ing and driving wheels, provided with ratchets 
on the inner faces of their hubs, the internally 
toothed gears secured to the axle and pro- 7o 
vided with the spring-pressed dogs in their 
hubs, of the gear-shifters 66, secured at their 
inner ends to the foot-lever 7, the spring-catch 
9, the rear transverse driving-shaft with end 
pinions and an intermediate miter-gear, the 75 
double-crank shaft with pinion near its rear 
end, the pitman-rods secured to the double 
crank shaft and to the reciprocating knives, 
the hinged lifter-bar, and the chain and levers 
for raising, holding, and lowering 
bar and cutter-bar, substantially as specified. . 
3. The combination, with the finger-bar and 
the outer shoe, provided at its rear end with 
the teeth, of the track-cleaner comprising the 
spring-pressed detents and the arms held in 85 
the Sockets, substantially as specified. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
the lifter- 8o 
65 
HARLOW. D. EIATHAWAY. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY ROBINSON, 
- ALEXANDER PRICE. 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354291.txt	(No Model.) 
D. WILLIAMSON. 
INSULATING JOINT, 
No. 354.29l. 
Patented DeC. l4, 1886, 
 
s 6 ZANIE % M 
S. 
i. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
Svitiesses 
1.3- ... achine 
isis. 
Cougal, 
6. 
t 
3rvovitov 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID WILLIAMSON, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
INSULATING-JOINT. 
SEECEICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 354, 29), dated December 14, 1886. 
Application filed March 19, 1886. 
Serial No. 1,797, (No model.) 
55 
To at 22 it flon, it 7) city conce7n 
Be it known that I, DAVID WILLIAMSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Hartford, in the State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Insulating-Joints, of 
which the following is a specification, illus 
trated by the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to the art of joining 
electrically. conductive solid bodies together 
in such a manner that said bodies when joined 
shall be mechanically immovable relatively 
to each other, and at the same time shall be 
electrically insulated from each other. 
The object of my invention is to utilize 
mica, asbestus paper, and other laminated 
non-conductors whose if dividual laminations 
are mechanically weak and fragile, in the for. 
nation of an insulated joint which shall be 
strong and unyielding in all directions, and 
particularly in directions parallel to the length 
and breadth of such laminations. To accom 
plish this result the described laminations are 
applied in a peculiar form and manner be 
tween the otherwise contiguous portions of 
two conductors, while the latter are clamped 
upon Said laminations by means of a screw. 
The special merit of the invention is that 
certain fire-proof insulators which are com 
monly known or conveniently produced in 
laminated forms alone are thus utilized as 
practically entire and unlaminated insulators. 
The resulting insulated joint is adapted to 
be used in all situations in which other insu 
lated joints have commonly been used. 
By the aid of drawings I proceed to point 
out the best mode of constructing and apply 
ing my invention. 
Figure 1 in the drawings is a side view of 
two hollow cylindrical conductors united by 
my improved joint. Fig. 2 is a section of Fig. 
1 through the common axis of said conduct 
ors. Fig. 3 is a sectional view of two conduct 
ive blocks or plates united by my improved 
In these figures, A. and Bare two bodies which 
are to be joined together. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 bodies A and B are hollow 
rods or cylinders, body A. being smaller than 
body B. In Fig. 3 bodies A. and B are blocks, 
slabs, or plates of conductive material having 
contiguous plane surfaces, but being in other 
respects of any fortuitous size and shape. A 
and B, as presented in these views, are typical 
forms to which other joinable bodies may con 
veniently be reduced. 
The typical forms of A and B, as presented 
in Figs. 1 and 2, will appear, from the follow 
ing description, to be substantially the same 
typical forms which are presented by A and B 
in Fig. 3. To relative forms similar to those 
presented in one or the other of these in 
stances, therefore, it is necessary to reduce any 
two bodies which are to be united by my in 
proved joint. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 one end of cylinder A is pro 
vided with a head or annular projection, C, 
while the other end of the same is threaded 
externally, as a screw, and is provided with a 
nut, D. Cylinder B surrounds the main part 
of cylinder A, leaving a space, E, which is 
filled With air, or with some other non-con 
ductive substance, between said cylinders. An 
internal notch at each end of cylinder B pre 
sents a shoulder, F, which is at right angles 
with the common axis of said cylinders. At 
each end of cylinder B a number of washers, 
annular disks, or laminations of mica are fitted 
upon cylinder A, between said cylinder B and 
the projecting head C and nut D of said cyl 
inder A. These disks may conveniently be 
formed of unequal sizes, some being smaller 
and located within cylinder B and adjacent to 
shoulder F, while others, being radially larger 
than the hollow interior of cylinder B, are lo 
cated beyond the ends of that cylinder. The 
adjacent parts so separated by mical disks are 
firmly clamped together against such disks by 
means of nut D, which is screwed on tight for 
that purpose. 
In Fig. 3 the bodies A and B are reduced to 
the typical form (already considered) by means 
of a contiguous perforation containing the 
screw H. If this screw, which extends through 
body B without contact there with, and which 
is turned snugly into body A, be regarded as 
equivalent to body Ain Fig. 2, and if body A 
in Fig. 3 be regarded as equivalent to nut D, 
it is evident that the joint in both cases is 
substantially the same. 
As a modification of the simple joint already 
described, I have presented in Fig. 3 a double 
joint of the same character formed by repeti 
tion. 
75 
85 
90 
95 
ICO 
5. 
O 
35 
45 joint. 
so 
 
2 
354,291 
O 
45 
So 
5 
O 
In order that any two conductors may be 
united by my improved joint, it is necessary 
that they should be reduced relatively to each 
other to the typical form which is illustrated 
in the drawings. When such conductors are 
So reduced to that typical form, as illustrated 
in Figs. 1 and 2, or as illustrated in Fig. 3, the 
formation of my improved insulating joint re 
quires that a number of disks of mica or lami 
nations of other fire-proof insulating material 
surrounding one of said conductors should be 
placed one upon another in blocks or groups 
of any desired or convenient aggregate thick 
neSS, and should, by means of a screw or its 
equivalent, be clamped rigidly in position be: 
tween said conductors. 
Such being the manner of constructing my 
improved insulated joint, it is obvious that the 
Same is mechanically firm and rigid, that the 
bodies A and B are effectually insulated from 
each other, and that the insulation will not be 
impaired by heat. . 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent 
1. Between two electrical conductors, an in 
Sulating joint composed of perforated disks 
which are formed of insulating material and 
are clamped together in groups, each of which 
is partly countersunk in one or the other of manner and for the purpose specified. 
said conductors, substantially in the manner 
and for the purpose specified. 
2. An insulating joint formed between adja 
cent parts of two electrical conductors by means 
of mica disks which are of unequal area, and 
are clamped together upon a screw in groups, 
each of which is countersunk in one or the 
other of said conductors, substantially in the 
manner and for the purpose Specified. 
3. Two electrically-conductive solid bodies 
which have a tubular and a cylindrical por 
tion, respectively, in combination with disks 
or laminations of insulating material which 
are clamped together at right angles to the 
common longitudinal axis of said tubular and 
cylindrical portions in groups, each of which 
is partly within and partly without said tubul 
lar portion, substantially in the manner and 
for the purpose specified. 
4. An insulating joint consisting of a cylin 
drical conductor which is partly within a hol 
low or tubular conductor, and is separated 
therefrom by disks of fire-proof insulating 
material arranged at right angles with the lon 
gitudinal axis of such cylindrical conductor 
and clamped together in two groups, which 
are partly within said tubular conductor and 
partly without the same, severally, Substan 
tially in the manner and for the purpose 
specified. 
5. An indefinite number of insulating disks 
or washers arranged at right angles with two 
electrical conductors and clamped between the 
same in a group, which is partly countersunk 
in one of said conductors, substantially in the 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set, 
my name in the presence of two witnesses. 
DAVID WILLIAMSON. 
WESLEY H. HoLWAY, 
WILLARD EDDY. 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354391.txt	(No Model.) 
0, CARPENTER, . 
RUBBER, DAM CLAMP, 
No. 354,39). 
Patented Dec. 14, 1886, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIVER CARPENTER, OF OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA. 
R U BBER - DAM CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 354,391, dated December 14, 1886. 
Application filed September 9, 1886. Serial No. 213,180. (No model.) 
2C 
IC 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OLIVER CARPENTER, of 
Oakland, Alameda county, State of California, 
have invented an Improvement in Rubber 
Dam Clamps; and Thereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the same. 
Myinvention relates to operative dentistry, 
and particularly to the class of clamps which 
are used for holding rubber dams in place 
around the tooth. 
My invention consists in a novel jointed 
frame, carrying in its ends the separate and 
removable jaws, and a set-screw, by which the 
I5 jaws are made to clamp tightly on the tooth, 
all of which I shall hereinafter fully describe. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and effective rubber-dam clamp which 
may be applied, by reason of its separate re 
movable jaws, to any of the ten anterior teeth 
in each jaw, for the purpose of holding the 
rubber dam back from the labio-cervical cavi 
ties in said teeth while filling such cavities, or 
which may be applied in other suitable posi 
tions. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings for 
a more complete explanation of my invention, 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my rubber 
dam clamp. Fig. 2 is a view showing its ap 
plication. 
The frame A, which is made somewhat of a 
horseshoe shape, consists of two parts or sides 
jointed together at (t. 
The ends of these sides 
are bent, and have secured in them the oppos 
ing jaws B. These are separate from the frame, 
and consist of flat pieces of metal, the free ends 
of which are filed, so as to fashion them to the 
exterior surface of the tooth upon which they 
are intended to fit. 
The particular shape of the ends of the jaws 
- depends upon the teeth which they are to fit, 
and I may therefore have a number of jaws 
previously fashioned to approximately the 
curvature of the various teeth, and may then 
file them down to suit the case, either while 
in the frame or before being inserted. To 
readily accomplish this fitting of the jaws to 
the several positions in which they are used, I 
provide that their connection with the frame 
A shall be a removable one, so that such jaws 
35 
45 
may be used as any give11 case requires. In 
this my invention differs essentially from the 
ordinary curved clamps at present in use, and 
which consist of a single piece of spring metal 
having its ends adapted to fit but a single tooth, 
and so highly tempered as to render it an im 
possibility to file them down to fit other teeth. 
This connection between the jaws and the 
frame, though it may be of any character 
adapting them to be readily removed and re 
placed by others, I prefer to make in the fol 
lowing manner: 
The ends of the sides of the frame are pro 
vided with slits, into which thejaws are slipped, 
and are secured in their seats by means of the 
screwsb. A set-screw, C, passes through the 
frame from side to side, being threaded in one 
side, and playing loosely in a slot in the other 
side, thus providing for the expansion or con 
traction of the parts of the frame. As I have 
heretofore mentioned, the clamp is intended 
more particularly for use in keeping the rub 
ber dam back from the labio-cervical cavities 
of the ten anterior teeth in each jaw while fill 
ing such cavities. On account of the position 
of these cavities, it is very difficult to keep the 
edge of the rubber dam back. It is usually 
done at present by means of the spring-clamps, 
to which I have heretofore referred, the use 
of which, in many cases, is uncertain, because 
of their tendency to spring from position, as 
they do not fit the teeth perfectly. 
The application of my clamp is shown in 
Fig. 2, where the clannp is seen in position 
upon the tooth D, and is holding the rubber 
dam Eback. By reason of the previous prep 
aration of the ends of the opposing jaws they 
fit accurately the tooth, and when the frame 
is set up by means of the screw C they bind 
firmly and accurately upon said tooth, and the 
clamp has no tendency whatever to spring from 
lace. 
', 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A rubber - dam clamp comprising the 
curved hinged frame A, the jaws B in the 
slotted ends of said frame, and the set-screw 
C, by which said frame is expanded and con 
tracted, substantially as herein described. 
55 
75 
9O 
95 
IOO 
2 
354,391 
2. A rubber - dam clamp comprising the 
hinged frame A, having slits in its ends, the hand. 
jaws B, inserted in said slits and secured by 
the screws b, said jaws having their free ends 
5 fashioned to the surface of the tooth to which 
they are fitted, and the screw C, by which the 
frame is expanded and contracted, substantially 
as herein described. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. NoURSE, 
H. C. LEE. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
OLIVER CARPENTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354491.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 354,491. 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
W. M. STEINLE. 
CIGAR MACHINE, 
Patented Dec. 14, 1886. 
ESENESSE3SE 
3SSESSES 3. 
 
 
 
  
N Il 
it. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. M. STEINE, 
CIG AR MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 354,491. 
Patented Dec. 14, 1886. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM M. STEINLE, OF ALLEGHENY CITY, ASSIGNOR TO THE RALEIGH 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CGAR-MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 354,491, dated December 14, 1886. 
Application filed September 3, 1884. Serial No. 142,100. (No model.) 
- 
O 
Wrapper. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. M. STEINLE, 
of Allegheny City, in the county of Allegheny 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Cigar-Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description thereof, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which - 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
cigar-bunching machine. Fig. 2 is a section 
Fig. 3 is a plan view 
on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
of a portion of the machine. Fig. 4 is a front 
elevation. Fig. 5 is a vertical section on the 
liney y of Fig. 4, showing the bunching de 
vices in another position. 
Figs. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 
10 are detail views, 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
wherever they occur. 
The purpose of my invention is to make 
what is called the bunch of a cigar-that 
is, the body of the cigar without the external 
The frame of the machine consists, mainly, 
of two side pieces, ct, in which the operative 
parts are mounted, and which are in turn sup 
ported upon a suitable table, (t. Journaled 
in theside pieces, ct, is a shaft, b, upon which is 
mounted loosely a frame, c', which carries a 
segmental roller-plate, c. An Oscillating or 
vibrating motion is given to the roller-plate c 
in one direction by a lever, d, through link d", 
crank d, shaft b, arms.ff', and pins f, and in 
the reverse direction by a spring, e. The le 
ver d is pivoted to the frame a, and is con 
nected with the shaft b, so as to turn it, by 
means of a pivoted link, d, which in turn is 
pivoted to a crank-arm, d, which is keyed to 
the shaft b. Projecting from the shaft b, in 
side of the frame a, are two arms, f, which are 
rigidly secured to the shaft, so as to be moved 
when the latter is turned. On the ends of the 
arms f are other arms f', the outer ends of 
5 which are connected together by a cross-bar, 
f', formed, preferably, with a grooved or con 
cave face, and near the end of each of the arms 
f', adjacent to the cross-bar f', is a laterally 
projecting pin, f. These pins f bear on the 
w 
edges of the frame c. (See Fig. 3.) The frame 
c' of the plate c is pivoted loosely on the shaft 
b; but the pins.f, projecting beyond the ends 
of the cross-bar f', catch on the inner edges of 
the frame c, so that when the lever dis drawn 
forward by the workman the plate c will be 
moved in the same direction by means of the 
arms ff' and pins.f. (See Figs. 5 and 10.) 
When the lever d is moved in the opposite di 
rection, it simply releases the plate c, and 
thereby permits the spring e to act on the 
frame c and restore the plate c to its normal 
position. (See Fig. 1.) 
Thespring e consists of arod having a strong 
coil, e", below the shaft b, one end being at 
tached to the side of the framea, as at e, and 
the other to the frame c' at e, the rod being 
bent over the shaft b between the coil e and 
the point of attachment e. This spring is so 
tensioned that when the plate c is drawn for 
ward by the operator, occupying a position in 
the rear of the table a, the spring is tight 
ened, so that when the lever d is released it 
will throw the plate c back to its normal po 
sition. 
Extending over the face of the plate cisaloose 
belt, g, which in width is equal to or slightly in 
excess of the length of the cigar-bunch to be 
made. One end of this belt is fastened to the 
edge of the plate c at g', and the other end, af. 
ter passing over the rolls g and g, is fastened 
to a tension-roll, g, the rolls g and g being 
journaled in the frame a and the Foll g in the 
frame c'. The belt g is of sufficient length to 
form a bight or loop, g, for the reception of the 
tobacco between the edge of the plate c and 
the side of the roll g. 
Secured between the two side pieces, a, is 
the inclined back a, in which is placed a slid 
ing mold, h, containing any desired number of 
blocksh', for receiving the cigar-bunches from 
the machine. Secured rigidly to the rear side 
of the shaft b is a short arm, h, and pivoted 
thereto is a pawl, h, the end of which plays 
over the surface of the molds h. When the 
lever d is drawn in the direction of the table 
a', the end of the pawl h", catching in one of 
the molds l', pushes the sliding mold h up a 
certain regulated distance, so as to bring the 
- 
25 
35 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
2 
354,49. 
molds one by one into position to receive a 
finished bunch from the bunching-frame. The 
mold his retained in its proper position by 
means of the tension-plate h", which bears 
5 against one edge, and is capable of retraction 
for the purpose of removing the mold. This 
tension-plate is caused to have an elastic bear 
ing against the edge of the mold h by means 
of the pivoted levers h, which are caused to 
Io press against it at opposite ends by means of 
the spring h". When it is desired to remove 
the frame h, the levers h" are turned so as to 
throw the points of attachment of the spring 
h over the centers of the pivots of the levers. 
15. When the mold is restored to position, the le 
vers are turned the other way, so as to cause 
the pressure of the spring h" to act inwardly 
against the tension-plate hi. 
Thus constructed and arranged, the opera 
2O tion of my improved machine is as follows: 
The parts being in the position shown in Fig. 
l, the tobacco which constitutes the filler of 
the cigar is placed in the loop or bightg and 
the binder or inner wrapper is placed on top. 
25 The workman, occupying a position back of 
the table a', then draws the lever d toward 
him, whereupon the link d", through crank 
arm d", keyed to shaft b, arms ff', and pins f, 
take up the loosely-mounted oscillating frame 
3c c, thereby causing the plate c to move down 
Ward past the roll g, so as to cause the belt 
9 to close around the bunch of tobacco i, as 
shown in Fig. 5, one end of the belt being 
fastened to the roll 9. The movement of the 
35 frame c draws the belt g around the bunch i 
and over the surfaces of the rolls gg, caus 
ing the bunch to be rotated or rolled in the 
bight (in such a manner that the filler is en 
circled by the binder and a cylindrical bunch 
to of the proper size and form is produced. The 
vibration of the plate c causes the point g' to 
pass below the roll g and to take up the slack 
of the belt g, so as to eject the bunch there 
from, as shown in Fig. 10. The edge of the 
45 frame c, which projects beyond the edge g' of 
the plate 9, is covered with a cross strip or 
plate, c', which forms a ledge, upon which the 
bunch i may rest as the frame is being restored 
to its normal position by the action of the 
5o spring e, as shown in Fig. 1. When the bunch 
i is ejected from the belt g, it falls on the concave 
edge of the barf", as shown in Fig. 10. The 
workman then moves the lever d back to its 
normal position, as shown in Fig. 1, the plate 
5 and its frame c being caused to move with or 
follow the lever by the spring e. After the 
plate c comes to its normal position, as shown 
in Fig. 1, the workman continues to push the 
lever d toward the mold h until the cross-bar 
6of pushes the bunch off of the plate cinto the 
recess h of one of the blocks h. This con 
tinued movement of the cross-bar or ejector 
independently of the oscillating frame c is 
possible, because the oscillating frame is 
65 loosely mounted on the shaft b. The next 
forward motion of the lever d in forming the 
next bunch causes the pawl h" to push the 
mold h up one space, so as to bring the next 
block, h", in position for receiving the next 
finished bunch from the bunching mechanism. 7o 
The roll (f" is made up of a central shaft and 
disk-like sections, as shown in Fig. 7, and is 
of the proper shape to give the desired form 
to the bunch. The pawl his adjustable so as 
to give a longer or shorter movement to the 75 
mold-frameh by means of a slot, h, in the arm 
h"; or, if desired, this slot may be made in the 
pivoted end of the pawl. 
In Fig. 9 Ishow the construction of the ten 
sion-rollerg'. This roller is provided with a 8o 
slot, g, in which the end of the belt g is se 
cured by means of the clamp screw g. 
In Fig. 8 I show the use of a continuous 
belt, g. In this case the guide-roll gis Sub 
stituted for the roll g and the latter put in 85 
another position, and both ends of the belt 
are secured in the slot g'. An advantage of 
this construction consists in the fact that if 
the belt g becomes worn at the bight g it can 
be shifted so as to bring another portion into 9o 
that position, and thereby distribute the wear 
over the whole surface. 
A great advantage of my machine is its sim 
plicity of construction and the fact that it is 
under the perfect control of the workman. It 95 
is very rapid in its operation, and its use en 
ables one operator to make not only a very 
much greater number but also very much bet. 
ter cigar-bunches than by hand, so that labor 
is saved and the quality of the product is im 
proved. 
On the 13th day of February, 1885, I filed 
an application, Serial No. 155,842, for certain 
improvements on this class of cigar-bunching 
machines, and I hereby disclaim any subject 
matter claimed in said case, to which refer 
ence is hereby made for the purposes of this 
disclaimer. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for forming cigar-bunches, 
the combination of a curved oscillating form 
ing-plate with a forming-roll past which the 
forming-plate vibrates, a slack belt extending 
over the surface of the same and Over the 
roll, so as to form a bight or loop for receiving 
the tobacco between them, an ejector which 
vibrates with the oscillating plate, and mech 
anism for moving the ejector, substantially as 
and for the purposes specified. 
2. In a machine for forming cigar-bunches, 
the combination, with a forming-roll and slack 
belt, of a curved Oscillating forming-plate 
loosely journaled on its shaft, a shaft having 
a crank-arm, a lever pivoted on the frame of I25 
the oscillating forming-plate, a link which con 
nects the lever with the crank - arm of the 
shaft, an ejector actuated from the shaft, and 
mechanism for reversing the movement of the 
. 
oscillating forming-plate when released, sub- I3o 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
3. The combination of the curved oscillat 
ing forming-plate and forming-belt, with a 
shelf or ledge for receiving the bunch when 
If S 
too 
TIO 
354,493. 
3 
IO 
discharged from the forming-belt, and a cross 
bar, with mechanism for reciprocating it to 
eject the bunch from the ledge, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
4. In a cigar-bunching machine, the combi 
nation, with a forming-Foll and slack belt, of 
an Oscillating forming-plate, a reciprocating 
ejector which vibrates with the plate, a slid 
ing mold, and a shaft having crank-arms from 
which the plate, ejector, and mold are actu 
ated, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
5. In a machine for bunching cigars, the 
combination, with bunching mechanism, of 
the sliding mold, pivoted spring-levers, a ten 
sion-plate actuated by the Spring-levers and 
arranged to bear on one edge of the sliding 
mold and a pawl actuated from the bunching 
mechanism for moving the mold, substantially 
6. The oscillating forming plate and its re 
20 as and for the purposes specified. 
ceiving-ledge, in combination with an inclined 
mold and a reciprocating ejector, f', arranged 
under the forming-plate for transferring the 
bunch from the bunching mechanism to the 
mold-cavity, substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
7. In a cigar-bunching machine, the combi 
nation, with the forming-roll and oscillating 
forming - plate, of an endless band or slack 
belt and the longitudinally - slotted grip or 
clamp -roller provided with a clamp-screw 
which permits the shifting or adjustment of 
the belt to compensate for wear, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 30th day of August, A. D. 1884. 
WILLIAM M. STEENLE. 
35 
Witnesses: 
THOs. LIGGETT, 
THOAIASB. KERR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354592.txt	(No Model.) 
W. W. BROWN. 
INSTRUMENT FOR PLUMBING THE CORNERS OF BUILDINGS. 
No. 354,592, 
Patented Dec. 21, 1886. 
A2a-2. 
 
f 
YS 
ZZZZZZZZZZZAf 
 
 
 
 
  
 
C, YT 
 
 
  
 
 
sists 
NSN 
NSNS 
Z22a. 
C 227 
 
4 
Zve ZoP. 
%22r. W. &eter 
YV 
esses. 
-(-6.6 44-3- 
A cy4%. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM WOOD BROWN, OF MANCHESTER, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
NSTRUMENT FOR PLUMBING THE coRNERS OF BUILDINGs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 354,592, dated December 21, 1886. 
Application filed June 4, 1886. 
Serial No. 204,165. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may goncern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM WoODBROWN, 
of Manchester, in the county of Hillsborough 
and State of New Hampshire, have invented 
a new and useful improvement in Instruments 
for Plumbing the Corners of Buildings in Pro 
cess of Erection. 
The following is a specification of my inven 
tion. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
plummet that may be easily clamped upon the 
angle of a wall, and serve as a guide by which 
to lay the masonry without the necessity o 
frequent use of a plumb-rule. 
w 
The invention consists of an instrument hav 
ing a base provided with a clamping mechan 
ism, by means of which it may be securely fast 
ened to the angle of a wall, an upper adjusta 
ble table fitted with screws for adjusting the 
same, and having small spirit-level tubes fixed 
in its upper Surface as guides in adjustment, 
and a graduated standard at right angles (per 
pendicularly) with the tubes referred to. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure 1 is a plan of the instrument attached 
to a brick wall. Fig. 2 is a vertical diagonal 
section on a line corresponding with the clamp 
ing-rod a e. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical cross-section 
on the line aca. 
lC, 
25 
In the drawings, A is the base. 
(t, and at are rods threaded on one end to re 
ceive the nuts b, and having the other end 
adapted to enter a joint of the masonry. These 
35 rods and nuts serve to securely clamp the in 
strument to the work. The base-plate e pro 
jects a little into the angle to aid in support 
ing the instrument. 
The upper table, B, is fitted with the spirit 
4o level tubes d and d and carries the upright C, 
which may be graduated to assist in laying a 
standard number of courses of masonry to each 
foot in height. 
45 
55 
75 
| fff are thumb-screws used in adjusting the 
upper table, B, the level position of which is 
indicated by the bubbles in the tubes d and d". 
The Spring Dholds the upper and lower parts 
of the instrument together, and allows the up 
per table, B, to be adjusted in any direction 
by the thumb-screws f. 
The instrument is used as follows: The base 
plate c is inserted in a level joint of the angle 
of the brick-work, and the hooked endsee of 
the clamp-rods are inserted in vertical joints, 
one on each side of the angle. Then by turn 
ing the nuts b b the instrument is securely fast 
ened to the angle. The upper table is then 
brought to a level by use of the screws f, its 
level position being indicated by the bubbles 
in the tubes did, said tubes being at right an 
gles to each other. The table B when properly 
adjusted will be level in all directions. 
The graduated edge of the standard C being 
fixed at right angles perpendicularly with both 
the tubes d and d, it is evident that when the ta 
ble B is adjusted said edge will be perfectly 
plumb, and the corner of the wall if laid to 
said edge will be plumb also. 
What I claim is 
In an instrument for plumbing masonry, a 
base provided with a projecting plate to enter 
a joint in the angle of the wall, and armed 
with clamping mechanism consisting-of rods 
adapted at one end to enter joints in the work, 
and provided at the other end with a threaded 
portion and a nut working thereon, in combi 
nation with an adjustable table provided with 
adjusting-screws and spirit-level tubes, and 
carrying a graduated standard fixed at right 
angles perpendicularly with said tubes, all 
substantially as shown and described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
WILLIAM WOOD BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
LUTHER C. BALDWIN, 
JULIAA. BALDWIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354692.txt	T. H., CONNELLY. 
DEVICE FORTRANSMITTING POWER, 
Patented Dec. 21, 1886. 
(No Model.) 
No. 354,692, 
41, 
 
WITWESSES 
IWWELWTOR 
Attrney 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lith:grapher, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS H. CONNELLY, OF PHOENIX PARK, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING POWER. 
5?ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 354,692, dated December 21, 1886. 
Application filed July 29, 1886. Serial No. 209,418. No model.) 
- 
IO 
3O 
invention would be used; and Brepresents the 
To all tw/ion, i? ??? ?????? ?: 
Be it known that I, THOMASH. CONNELLY, 
beveled gear mounted on said shaft meshing 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
with a crown-Wheel, C, having a wrist-pin set 
Phoenix Park, in the county of Schuylkill and 
in its face, to which is secured a pitman, D. 55 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain Instead of the connections described, it will be 
new and useful Improvements in Devices for obvious that other and equally well-known at 
Transmitting Power; and I do hereby declare tachments may be used for the purpose. 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
The pitman D is connected at its lower end 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
to one corner of the frame E, and gives a vi- 6o 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
bratory movement to the frame proper, but a 
vertical reciprocating movement to the longi 
to make and use the same. 
Myinvention relates to devices for communi 
tudinal sides thereof. This frame is composed 
cating motion from one point to another at a 
of the end pieces, a. a, one being located at the 
distance therefrom, and while applicable to 
entrance to the mine or in proximity thereto, 
many situations is particularly useful in trans 
while the other is arranged within the mine or 
mitting power from an outside source topump 
other place in convenient position to operate 
ing or other machinery located within mines 
the machinery through suitable connections, 
or like places where economy of space is de 
similar to those above described, it being un 
sired, or where it would be impossible or in 
derstood that these end pieces must be in such 
convenient to have the engine proper or other 
relative positions as to be in direct line with 
motive power. 
each other. They are pivoted centrally on 
My object is to provide a simple and eco 
trunnions d, as shown in Fig. 2, or in any other 
nomical mechanism for transmitting the power 
suitable manner. The ends of the pieces a, a 
from an engine or other sourcelocated outside 
are connected by parallel cables bb, which are 
of the mine to a machine or machinery within 
pivotally secured thereto, so that though the 
the same through an intermediate cable and 
ieces a a move in the arc of a circle the par 
frame, which may be of any extent to corre 
allel cables will be reciprocated vertically. 
spond to the depth of the mine. 
The cables are of the same length, and are pro 
The invention consists, primarily, of an os 
vided with tightening devices, either such as 
cillating frame composed of two end pieces 
those shown at c in Fig.2 or of any other suitable 
centrally mounted, one at the surface and one 
for the purpose. The cables upon each side 
in the mine, their ends being connected by 
being drawn taut,it will be seen that the power 
applied through the pitman D will be trans 
cables with a suitable connection at one or 
both ends of each of the oscillating end pieces, 
mitted through the cables to the opposite end 
whereby at the upper part motion is communi 
of the frame, and from thence to the machin 
cated to the frame, and at the lower end trans 
ery to be driven, either by means of a pitman, 
mitted to the machinery within the mine or 
K, as shown in Fig.1, or by other suitable con 
other place. 
nection. The downward movement of the pit. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents the 
man, when connected to the left-hand end of 
driving machinery located outside of the mine, 
the frame, will have the effect of a push upon 
with the frame for transmitting the power to 
the cable of this side and a pull on that of the 
the interior of the mine. Fig. 2 represents a 
opposite side, and as both are taut there can 
side elevation of the frame, showing the sup 
be no slack, whatever be the length of the ca 
porting-timbers in section. 
bles. 
It will be understood that while Ihave shown 
In case the mechanism should be used at an 
the mechanism as arranged vertically, it may angle or horizontally, it would be desirable to 
be located horizontally or at an angle, though use supporting and guiding pulleys for the ca 
the latter situation would probably prove rare. 
In the figures, A represents the driving-shaft 
Instead of having a pitman-connection at 
5o of the engine or other motive power located one corner of the frame, a second pitman may 
outside of the mine or similar place where my be connected with the opposite corner to give 
bles to take off any strain upon them. 
35 
45 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
354,692 
increased power, and the same arrangement 
may be provided below, so as to transmit the 
power to two different machines or machinery 
without in any degree innpairing the efficiency 
of the apparatus or lessening its power. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent of 
the United States, is 
A device for communicating motion, consist 
ing of two straight rocking beams, one ar 
ranged to receive motion from any source of 
power and the other to transmit the same, and 
intermediate cables arranged parallel to each 
O 
other throughout their whole extent between 
the rocking beams, and fixed directly to the 15 
inner opposite ends of said beams upon each 
side of the pivotal point thereof, whereby a 
practically rigid frame is provided, combined 
with suitable connections for receiving and 
transmitting power, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
2? 
THOMAS H. CONNELLY. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. J. WADLINGER, 
JAS. F. MCCARTHY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354793.txt	(No Model.) 
s 
No. 354,793. 
W. H. KNIGHT. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR FOR RAEWAYS, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 21, 1886. 
NC 
| Y. 
w 
7-ty---it 
/ 
\----/ 
Y----/ 
IILITIET 
EIIRI 
G. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
Fill" 
i. 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
ILLITITLEMILLIII:HyLIII, 
EE- EPHER 
... ITTF 
ITT 
 
vilwesses 
3ruent or 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D. c: 
422- . 
(No Model.) 
No. 354,793, 
W. H. KNIGHT. 
LECTRIC MOTOR FOR RAILWAYS, 
E 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Deo, 21, 1886, 
 
 
 
  
 
nitresses 
 
 
T-T 
a re-ri-r SC 
H-H - - - - - - 
TTE III CCT 
EHe 2 
42N 
4 
O 
 
 
Nite-A 
IITTTTTT 
EAH - 22 
y 
O 
d 
w 
a bid F. 
 
 
O 
N. PeFERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington D. G. 
(No Model.) 
W. H. KNIGHT. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR FOR RAILWAYS 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 354,793, . 
 
Patented Dec. 21, 1886. 
Witvesses. 
. 
3DS. 
Suventor 
72- 2. 
N. P.ERs, Photo-thographewashington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER H. KNIGHT, OF CTLEVEL AND, OHIO. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR FOR RAILWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 354,793, dated December 21, 1886. 
Application filed May 11, 1885. Serial No. 165,100. (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
3O. 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
- 
tion. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER H. KNIGHT, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Cleveland, Ohio, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Electric Motors for 
Railways, of which the following is a specifica 
Myinvention consists in the combination of 
two electric motors in the same circuit and 
Connected to a common load, the motors each 
having means for shifting their commutator 
brushes and a common device for actuating said 
e.S. 
It further consists in the application of two 
motors so combined to an electric railway. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1 
and 2 illustrate the invention as applied to an 
electric locomotive. Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 illus 
trate the invention when the two motors are 
upon separate trucks of a car or train. Fig. 
1 shows a six-wheeled electric locomotive, the 
three axles being rigidly journaled in frame C. 
A and B are two electric motors suspended 
between the axles, and having their armature 
shafts also rigidly journaled in frame C. Upon 
each armature-shaft are two pinions, P, mesh 
ing with gear-wheels on the axles, so that the 
two motol's when in action will co-operate in 
giving rotation to the locomotive-wheels and 
propelling it. a. and b are the respective com 
mutators of the two motors, and acy and ac' y' 
are the brushes. The brushes are adapted to 
be moved around the commutator in any of 
the well-known ways. In this case the brush 
holders DDare adapted to be shifted in either 
direction by means of levers dd, which are 
connected at their upper ends by cross-bar E. 
Through a vertical slot in E projects a pin, p, 
from hand-lever F, which moves over anotched 
segment, G. The two motors will be both 
connected in circuit with the main conductors 
of the railway in any of the well-known ways, 
and I have found that both sets of brushes may 
be so adjusted as to be simultaneously moved 
by a common lever and both kept at the point 
of least sparking and both motors be con 
trolled at will, independently of the circuit 
through them. 
Instead of both motors being combined in a 
single locomotive, they may be upon separate 
trucks of a car or train and both be controlled 
from a single point. 
i 
" 
. 
. 
Figs. 3, 4, and 5 illustrate the construction 
of a swivel-truck adapted to be driven by an 
electric motor and to be placed under a carin 
the usual way. 
A frame is formed by the two stringers CC 
and the cross-beams C C, and the two axles 
are journaled rigidly in this frame. From 
each stringer a hanger, H, depends between 
the two axles upon which the motor is set, its 
armature-shaft being geared to the wheels, as . 
in Figs. 1 and 2. The motor is not shown in . 
full, in order that the construction of the truck 
may be clearer; but its positionisindicated by 
the two small railsh h, which extend between 
the hangers H and carry the motor. 
Upon each stringer Care set four coil-springs, 
T, one on each side of each wheel, and four 
cross-bars, B, extend across the truck and rest 
upon these springs, as is more clearly seen in 
Fig. 5, which is an end view with the beams 
C Cleft off. From these bars B are suspended 
by hangers b the two spring-boards S, one over 
each axle of the car. On each spring-board 
are two elliptic springs, K, upon which rests 
the bolster carrying the king-bolt. This bol 
ster is made up of the two I-beams N, connect 
ing the cross-beams M, which rest directly 
on the springs K. A block, R, is bolted be. 
tween beams N N and carries the king-bolt O. 
Each set of cross-bars B are fastened together 
by means of braces a. a, and between these 
braces and the bolster are buffers c c, which 
prevent too great side swing of the latter. 
By means of the arrangement just described 
the car-body will be supported from the truck 
through intermediate springs in the usual man 
ner, while the motor and car-wheels will be 
rigidly connected to a common frame, so that 
their gearing will not be affected by the spring 
ing of the car-body. 
When two or more such trucks are placed 
under a car or train, it will be, of course, of 
especial importance that their motors, should 
have their commutator-brushes controlled from 
a common point. This can be done in any 
mechanical way; but it is more conveniently 
attained by electrical means, as is shown in 
the diagram, Fig. 6. Upon each motor I place 
a smaller motor having its armature geared to 
the brush-holder, so as to shift the brushes in 
one direction or the other, according to the 
direction of its rotation. These small motors 
- 
85 
95 
IOO 
2 
354,793 
 
3C) 
35 
5 
IO 
are in series in the same circuit, which may be 
a branch circuit from the main conductors -- 
and -, as is shown in the present instance. 
The direction of current in this circuit is con 
trolled by lever L, which is placed at some con 
venient point on the car or train where the 
driver may be stationed. This lever I oper 
ates a pole-changer in the circuit, which is of 
ordinary construction, and need not be mi 
nutely described. When in its vertical posi 
tion no current passes through the small mo 
tors and they remain at rest; but when it is 
moved a current passes of a polarity deter 
mined by the direction of movement and actu 
ates the motors to shift the brushes in One di 
rection or the other. Amy electro-dynamic 
devices may be employed in lieu of the mo. 
tOS. 
The main motors will be tightly inclosed, so 
as to be protected from the dirt, and in order 
that the driver may see the commutator of 
one motor it will be necessary to provide an 
aperture in the box inclosing the motor, which 
shall permit the commutator to be seen by 
him, and he will know that when one com 
25 
... mutator is free from injurious sparking the 
others will also be in the same condition. 
This aperture may be directly over the mo 
tor, and is preferably covered with glass; but 
in some cases it will be necessary to provide a 
tube and reflector, so that the motor can be 
placed at a distance from the driver. This 
latter case is illustrated in Fig. 6, where a tube, 
W., enters the inclosing-box and leads from 
the commutator to the driver's station, a mir 
ror, w, being placed in the angle of the tube, 
and a glass plate, v, being placed over the 
outer end of the tube. If the truck be mov 
able relatively to the car-body and the driver's 
stand be on the latter, it is preferable that the 
tube be fixed to the truck and its end ar 
ranged so that observations can be taken wher 
ever it may be relatively to the car-body. 
The swivel-trucks may be constructed with 
three axles instead of two, another motor be 
ing added, as in Figs. 1 and 2, and the truck 
would not, of course, be swiveled if it were 
the only one on the car. 
Any number of motors may, of course, be 
rovided with a common brush-shifting de 
5O p vice without departing from the spirit of my 
invention. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination of two electric motors 
in the same circuit, mechanically connected to 
a common load, movable commutator-brushes 
for each motor, and a common shifting device 
for said brushes. 
2. The combination, with two separate 
trucks of a car or train, of an electric motor 
on each truck in the same circuit and con 
nected to the axles of the trucks, movable com 
mutator-brushes for each motor, and shifting 
devices for said brushes controlled from a com. 
mon point. 
3. The combination, with two swiveled 
trucks and a car-body supported thereon, of 
an electric motor on each truck connected to 
the axles and a common controlling device 
for said motors situated on the car-body. 
4. The combination, with two axles of a 
swivel-truck, of an electric motor suspended 
between them and having an operative me 
chanical connection therewith, and a bolster 
carrying the king-bolt placed over said motor 
and supported on springs from the axles. 
5. The combination, with two axles of a 
swivel-truck, of an electric motor suspended 
between them and having an operative me 
chanical connection therewith, and a bolster 
carrying the king-bolt and supported on 
springs at points on either side of said motor. 
6. The combination, with three axles of an 
electrically-propelled vehicle, of two electric 
motors supported between them and geared 
to all three of the axles. 
7. The combination, with three axles of an 
electrically-propelled vehicle, of two electric 
motors supported between them, a gear-wheel 
on each axle, and the pinions driven by the 
motors and actuating said wheels. 
8. The combination, with an electric motor 
and mechanism driven thereby, of a control 
ling device for the motor, consisting of mova 
ble commutator-brushes, electro-magnetic act 
ulating devices therefor, and a manual con 
troller in the circuit of said electro-magnetic 
devices, whereby the motor may be controlled 
at the will of the operator. 
9. The combination, with two electric mo 
tors having movable commutator-brushes, of 
an electro-magnetic brush-shifting device for 
each motor and a common electrical controller 
for said devices. 
10. The combination of two electric motors 
in the same circuit having a common load, a 
controlling device for each of said motors in 
dependent of said circuit, and actuating mech 
anism for said devices adapted to be operated 
from a common point. 
11. The combination of two electric motors 
in the same circuit having a common load, a 
controlling device for each motor independent 
of Said circuit, and electro-dynamic mechan 
ism actuating said devices and included in a 
common circuit. 
12. The combination, with an electric mo 
tor and mechanism driven thereby, of a con 
trolling device for the motor, consisting of 
movable commutator-brushes, electro-mag 
netic actuating devices therefor, and a manual 
pole-changer in the circuit of said electro 
magnetic devices, whereby the motor may be 
controlled at the will of the operator. 
13. The combination, with an electric mo 
tor, of an inclosing-case therefor having an 
aperture opposite the commutator of the mo 
tor, so as to permit inspection thereof, and 
means for controlling the motor from without 
the case. 
14. The combination, with an electric mo 
tor, of an inclosing-case therefor having an 
aperture opposite the commutator of the mo 
65 
45 
55 
- 
. 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
IIS 
I 25 
2) 
 
354,793 
- 
. 
3 
tor, so as to permit inspection thereof, and 
means for controlling the sparking of the com 
mutator from without the case. 
15. The combination, with an electric mo 
tor, of an inclosing-case therefor having an 
aperture opposite the commutator of the mo 
tor, so as to permit inspection thereof, a glass 
covering the same, and means for controlling 
the sparking of the commutator from without 
the case. 
16. The combination, with a car or locomo 
tive, of a propelling electric motor therefor, 
an inclosing-case for said motor, and means 
outside said case for controlling said motor, the 
case having an aperture in view of the driver 
permitting an inspection of the commutator 
of the motor. 
w 
IO 
17. The combination, with a car or locomo 
tive, of a propelling electric motor therefor, 
an inclosing-case for said motor, an aperture 20 
in said case, and a mirror reflecting the light 
from the commutator of the motor through 
said aperture to the eye of the driver. 
18. The combination, with an electric mo 
tor, of an inclosing-case therefor, means out- 25 
side of said case for controlling said motor, 
and a mirror reflecting the light from the com 
mutator through an aperture in the said case 
to the eye of the driver. 
WALTER H. KNIGHT. 
Attest: 
E. M. BENTLEY, 
ALBERTE, IYNCH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354894.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 354,894. 
 
A, GAMARD. 
FOIDING COOP. 
Patented Dec. 28, 1886. 
Z '67. 2. 
asse-R-FE ha? 
Eastestzaria retatases Earl 
E-le 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington. d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED GAMARD, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA, 
FOLDING CO. O. P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 354,894, dated December 28, 1886. 
Application filed January 26, 1886. 
Serial No. 189,860. (No model.) 
l, 
O 
To aii, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALFRED GAMARD, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at New Or 
leans, in the parish of Orleans and State of 
5 Louisiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in a Folding Coop; and Is 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, and to the letters and figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form apart of this speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to that class of recep 
tacles for the transportation of vegetable pro 
duce, barn-yard fowls, and the like, which, for 
Convenience, are adapted to be folded into a 
narrower space when returned to the shipper. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrative 
of the invention, Figure 1 represents an end 
view of the receptacle in position for use, a 
portion being shown as broken away to illus 
trate the manner of hingeing the end boards. 
Fig. 2 represents an end view of the same in 
a partially-folded position, the end boards be 
ing folded upon the bottom of the receptacle. 
Fig. 3 represents a top plan view of the re 
ceptacle. Fig. 4 represents aside elevation, 
and Fig. 5 represents a side elevation when 
the receptacle is completely folded. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts throughout the several views. 
A indicates the bottom of the receptacle, 
provided with the three cross-pieces B B'B' 
Secured thereto. To the under side of these 
cross-pieces are secured the iron straps D D' 
D', bent upward and looped at their ends. 
The bottorin A and the cross-pieces are cut 
away, as shown, so that these loop ends shall 
not extend beyond the plane of the edges of 
the bottom piece, where they would be ex 
posed to accidental blows, tending to wrench 
off the Said bands. 
The top of the receptacle is made up of the 
side pieces, E. E., provided with a suitable 
number of cross-pieces, F. FFF, to which 
are attached the longitudinal slats G. G., &c. 
A hinged door, H, is provided for the inser 
W 
25 
35 
45 
5o tion and removal of the contents. 
At each end of the top piece, and midway 
between said ends, are secured the iron bands 
L. L LL L'L', looped at their outer extremi 
ties. The top piece is cut away or slotted at 
its corners and midway of its sides for a simi- 55 
lar purpose to that for which the bottom is in 
like manner slotted, as above described. 
The sides of the receptacle are composed of 
slats M. M', riveted or otherwise secured to 
the iron bands NN", looped at each end, as 6o 
shown, and connecting-links O O' O, &c., 
uniting these bands with each other and with 
the top and bottom bands, D L. The ends of 
the receptacle are composed of two doors, C 
C, hinged to the bottom thereof in such man- 65 
ner as to open inwardly and fold down upon 
said bottom. These doors are provided with 
hasps PP, which are adapted to engage With 
staples upon the cross-pieces FF, and be Se 
cured thereto when the doors are in the posi 
tion shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 4. The door 
hinge consists of a pin passing through the 
cross-piece E and bottom A, and bent at right 
angles through the loop of a strap attached 
to the inner side of the door. Twohinges are 
provided for each door. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
The receptacle being in the opened condition, 
(shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 4,) in order to fold 
it for transportation it is necessary to release 
the hasps PP from their staples and fold the 
doors C C down upon the bottom A. The 
sides are then caused to bend inwardly, as 
shown in Fig. 2, whereupon they fall down 
and rest upon the said end pieces, as shown in 
Fig. 5, which represents the receptacle as en 
tirely closed and ready for shipment. 
I am aware that it has been heretofore pro 
posed to provide a folding receptacle of the 
kind described with end doors folding in 
Wardly and inwardly-folding sides, and I do 
not broadly claim the same as of my inven 
tion; but 
What I do claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
A folding receptacle of the kind described, 
consisting of hinged end pieces folding in 
wardly, side. pieces folding inwardly, said side 
pieces being composed of bands looped at each 
end,slats secured to said bands, and links con- IOO 
90 
75 
W 
W 
2 
s 
354,894 
necting said bands with each other, a top and 
a bottom piece cut away at their corners and presence of two witnesses. 
midway of their length, bands secured to the 
top and bottom at each end and midway 
5 thereof and extending outwardly to the cut 
away portions, and links located within the 
cut-away portions and connecting the top and 
bottom bands with the side bands, substan- 
tially as described. 
JOS. MAILLE, 
L. P. PAQUET. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in Io 
ALF, G AMARD. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US354994.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 354,994, 
 
sa 
 
 
W., TUTTLE, 
AIR HEATING STOWE, 
Patented Dec. 28, 1886, 
SNs - 
M 
as SS 
1 SEI 
WN 
s 
|- - - - - 
 
| 
i 
its 
3 " 
SSI 
77 
  
 
 
  
 
ASSESSNSIES 
Essaye 
. 
IV 
E-- A 
Y Sas 
SAAAW 
Inventor, 
i 
&4 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM TUTTLE, OF DOWAGIAC, MICHIGAN. 
A R a HEATING STOVE. 
a. 
SIPECIFICATION forming part of Fetters Patent No. 354,994, dated December 28, 1886. 
Application filed December 15, 1885. Serial No. 185,708. (No model.) 
55 
9O 
95 
ICO 
- 
O 
25 
To all tufton, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM TUTTLE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Do 
wagiac, county of Cass, State of Michigan, 
have invented a new and useful Air-Heating 
Stove, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of stoves 
which have air-passages between the fire-box 
and the exterior inclosure or jacket of the 
stove; and it has for its object certain improve 
ments below described and claimed. 
In the drawings forming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a vertical section on line 
22 in Fig. 3; Fig. 2, a vertical section on line 
33 in Fig. 4; Fig. 3, a cross-section on lines 
0 0 in Figs. 1 and 2; Fig. 4, a cross-section on 
lines 11 in Figs. 1 and 2; and Fig. 5 is a side 
view, looking from a point at the left hand of 
Figs. 2 and 4, with portions of the stove broken 
away, showing a change in construction, here 
inafter described. 
Referring to the letters marked on the draw 
ings, B is the interior fire-place of the stove, 
the lower part of which is ordinarily termed 
the fire-box;' but for convenience of de 
scription I shall term the whole fire-place B 
the fire-box. 
The Ordinary grated bottom is shown at it. 
The front draft is shown at c, the door at , 
the rear damper or draft at c, the stove-base 
at F, and P is the ash-pit. 
The two Walls CD, having a heat-space, r, 
between them, constitute the exterior inclosure 
of the stove, leaving a vertical air-passage, A, 
on both sides of the fire-box B, between said 
fire-box and inclosure. 
The well-known object of the air-passages. A 
A is to allow the air to circulate from below 
the stove up through the passages and out 
into the room at the openings at the top of the 
stove. (See the arrows in these passages AA 
in Fig. 2.) If the stove were provided with 
, simply the wall C, ordinarily termed a 'jack 
et,' the air in the passages would be heated 
Only by the radiation from the heated surface 
45 
of the fire-box wall, and the wall C would be 
Comparatively cool or contracted with the wall 
D in my construction, which is heated by the 
fire and heat entering the heat-space' between 
the walls C. D. Furthermore, the wall C is 
also heated by the fire and heat in said heat 
spaces, for which reason the air in the pas 
sages A A receives an additional heat. . Of 
course the outer wall, D, surrounds the stove, 
Fig. 4, while the walls C inclose the air-pas 
sages on the sides of the fire-box. 
The fire-box, near the top, is provided with 
a partition, a, separating the heat-space r 
from the fire-box, the angled part being per 
forated at t, and provided with a damper, e, 
to regulate the draft of the fire-box, Fig. 1. 
The arrows in the heat-space r in the differ 
ent figures show the course of the heat and 
Smoke. 
The design is that when the fire is first made 
the draft c' is left open and the draft c closed. 
When the fire gets to burning, the draft will 
be largely direct, as indicated by the arrows 
in the fire-box in Fig. 4; but when the fire is 
under good headway the draft c' is closed and 
the draft c opened, when the draft will be 
what I term a return-draft, as shown by 
the arrows in the fire-box in Fig. 3, the fire 
and heat then all entering the heat-space r, as 
shown by the arrows in said space in Figs. 3 
Of course the drafts and dampers may be 
arranged to produce different results and de 
grees in the draft, as desired and which use 
may Suggest. 
I should have stated that the heat-spaces r 
do not communicate with each other on the 
back end of the stove until they get above the 
dampere, as the drawings show. These heat 
passages r are only on the sides of the fire 
box, the ordinary air-passage being between 
said passages and the fire-box, and the for 
Ward end of the heat-passages r opens into 
the fire-box, said open end receiving the heat, 
as before explained, when draft c is closed and 
draft c is open. The heat-spaces may be pro 
vided with a bridge or partition, R, as in Fig. 
5, to retard the passage of the heat, if desired. 
In this use the door v would be at the oppo 
site end of the stove, and the course of the 
heat is shown by arrows in Fig. 5. The parti 
tions R are approximately vertically central in 
the Space or passage, and are preferably at an 
oblique angle. They serve as deflectors to the 
rising heat, retarding the passage of the same, 
causing it to be longer in passing throughout 
the passages to the draft-pipe. 
and 4. 
35 
75 
r 
- 
SO 
 
2 
354,994 
Having thus described my invention, what passages being closed from the fire-box and 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters the other end of said passages opening into the 
Patent, is- 
fire-box, substantially as set forth. 
5 a fire-box, a wall on each side, inclosing, in unto subscribed my name in presence of two 
In testimony of the foregoing I have here- 15 
In an air-heating stove, the combination of 
C. unction with the fire-box wall, an air-space witnesses. 
eading verticaliy through the stove, and an 
outer wall encircling the stove and separated 
from the outer wall of the air-spaces, forming 
IO heat-passages on the sides of the stove only, 
the lower portion of the rear end of the heat 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM TUTTLE. 
r 
DUMONT A. SHEPARDSON, 
E. C. SOUTHARD. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355095.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 355,095. 
 
Q, MACNIDER, 
STEP LADDER, 
Patented Dee, 28, 1886, 
WITNESSES 
6.a. 
r 
INVENTOR 
2%ue. 
ATTORNEYS, 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
QUINTIN MACNIDER, OF BELLEVILLE, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
STEP- ADDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 355,095, dated December 28, 886, 
Application filed September 13, 1886. Serial No. 213,432. (No model.) 
a 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, QUINTIN MACNIDER, 
of Belleville, in the Province of Ontario and 
Dominion of Canada, have invented a new and 
5 Improved Step-Ladder, of which the follow 
ing is a specification, reference being had to 
the annexed drawings, forming a part thereof, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
Io step-ladder, showing it in dotted lines in po 
sition for use, and Fig. 2 is a front elevation 
Of the Same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in both views. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a step-ladder which may be inclined at differ 
ent angles, and which will maintain the steps 
in a horizontal position. 
My invention consists of a step-ladder com 
posed of two pairs of side bars pivoted to the 
ends of the steps and to the top step or plat 
form, and provided with legs having curved 
upper ends and pivoted to the front side bars 
and passing through staples on the rear side 
bars, all as hereinafter fully described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Two pairs of side bars, A A', are pivoted 
to the ends of the steps B and to the under 
surface of the platform C. The side bars A, 
are pivoted to the ends of the steps, near their 
front edges, and the bars. A to the ends of the 
steps, near their rear edges. This construc 
tion allows all the steps B to remain parallel 
with each other and with the floor, while the 
35 bars A A' are inclined at any required angle, 
To the bars A", near their upper ends, are 
pivoted the curved upper ends of the legs D 
D', the ends being curved on a semicircle 
whose radius is equal to about half the dis 
4o tance between the center of the front bar, A', 
25 
55 
and the rear of the bar A. The curved ends 
of the legs DD pass through staples EE in 
serted in the side bars A, near their upper 
ends, and the curved part of the legs D is pro 
vided with serrations a, which engage the sta- 45 
ple E and hold the legs and bars A A' in any 
position in which they may be adjusted. The 
legs DD are also provided with a stoppin, 
b, which limits their rearward motion. As 
the legs D D are swung on their pivots to ar- 5o 
range the ladder for use, the side bars, AA, 
will swing over and the steps will maintain 
their horizontal position, as indicated in dot 
ted lines in Fig. 1. 
The platform C is preferably inclosed by 
side pieces, c, forming a convenient receptacle 
for brushes, &c. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters. 
Patent 
1. In a step-ladder, the combination of the 
steps B, the side bars, A A', pivoted to the 
ends of the steps, near the front and rear 
edges, the legs D, provided with curved up 
per ends pivoted to the front side bars, A, 
and the staples E, attached to the rear bar, A, 
and receiving the curved ends of the legs, Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination of the steps B, the side 
bars, A A', pivoted to the steps, near their 
front and rear edges, the legs D, having curved 
and serrated ends, and the staples E, attached 
to the rear bars, A, and adapted to engage the 
serrations of the legs D, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
Q. MACNIDER. 
65 
Witnesses: 
GEO. A. WEMP, 
JAMES BROWN. 
s 
m 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355195.txt	(No Model.) 
L. MINCH. 
GASK, 
No. 355,195. 
Patented Dec. 28, 1886. 
 
 
los 
sae se (~ 
Z72 vezzor, 
 
-ZZozzzas /Zzzec/2, 
RS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, d.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS MINCH, OF HIGHLANDTOWN, MARYLAND. 
CAS K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 355,195, dated December 28, 1886. 
Application fied August 26, 1886. Serial No. 211,910. (No model.) 
23 
O 
To all, whon, it may conce77. 
Beit known that I, LOUIS MINCH, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Highlandtown, 
in the county of Baltimore and State of Mary 
land, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Casks; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in the 
construction of casks or large barrels for beer 
and other malt liquors. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
I5 means for gaining access to the interior of the 
large casks or barrels used in breweries, &c., 
for storing beer, ale, or other malt liquors, 
wines, &c., and from which these are drawn 
into small kegs or bottles; and it is well known 
that said casks or barrels require thorough 
cleaning or repitching, &c., and therefore ac 
cess must be had to the interior, and a large 
opening is required, which must be closed se 
curely and so as to prevent leakage, as the press 
ure in such casks or barrels is often very great, 
being caused by the generation of carbonic and 
other gases, or also by fermentation, &c.; and 
with this object in view my invention consists 
in providing said casks, barrels, or hogsheads 
with a large opening in the head for gaining 
access to the interior, and closing said opening 
by a plate bedded against a packing in the 
edges of a frame secured to the cask oriits sides 
and top, while the lower ends of its sides, as 
well as the bottom of the plate, fit into the croze 
of the cask to prevent leakage, and said plate is 
arranged on the inside of the barrel or cask and 
fits against said metal frame secured, as stated, 
to the head of the barrel or cask, and said plate 
is held in place by a strong bolt and clamping 
bar. 
It also consists in the construction of certain 
details and the arrangement of parts, as will 
be more fully described hereinafter, and spe: 
cifically pointed out in the claims, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings and 
the letters of reference marked thereon. 
Similar letters indicate like partisin the dif. 
ferent figures of the drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents alongitudinal section of 
a barrel having my improvement attached. 
. 
35 
45 
7? 
55 
?? 
Fig. 2 is a front view of the frame and plate 
for the opening. Fig. 3 is a vertical Section 
on the line ac ac of Fig. 2. 
In the drawings, A represents a large cask, 
barrel, or hogshead having the heads ( and b. 
In the head a an opening, c, is made for gain 
ing access to the interior of said cask, &c. This 
opening is made close to the bottom, and is 
preferably of the shape shown in Fig. 2, in 
which the upperpartissemicircular, while the 
lower part conforms to the contour of the cask 
or barrel. Around the opening, on three sides, 
is closely fitted a frame, B, of metal or other 
suitable material, which is securely bolted to 
the head of the barrel by bolts d, whileitslower 
side fits into the croze of the cask, notches be 
ing cut in the croze to receive the flanged ends 
of the frame B. The frame is made beveling, 
and has a flange, e, bearing against the inner 
side of the head, while another flange or seat, 
f, serves as a bearing-surface for the plate C. 
This plate is rabbeted on three of its edges, and 
between it and the frame any suitable packing, 
f', of rubber or other material, is placed, while 
the lower edge of said plate is placed in the 
croze of the cask to form a tight joint when the 
plate Cis clamped toits seat. Abolt, D, passes 
through the plate, and a clamping-bar, E, ex 
tends across the frame on its outer Side and 8O 
firmly secures the plate in its place. 
To prevent any displacement of the frame B 
transversely from the head a, suitable wood 
screws or bolts, g, are employed, as best seen 
in Fig. 3, while the longitudinal strainistaken 
by the bolts d, which are provided with nuts d", 
to secure them more firmly and prevent the 
pulling out of the head. 
The size of the frame and door-plate may be. 
varied as desired and according to the size of 90 
the barrel or hogshead for whichitisintended. 
Any number of bolts may be used to secure the 
frame. 
The operation is as follows: The frameis first 
securely fastened in place on the head of the 95 
barrel by the longitudinal and transverse bolts, 
and after it has been washed out, repaired, 
Scraped, pitched, &c., the plate is drawn up to 
its recessed seat, and is then secured by the 
clamping-bar and bolt and nut. 
It will be readily seen and understood by 
those skilled in the art that this device is very 
75 
ICO 
 
2 
355,195 
simple and efficient. It can be readily applied 
to old as well as new barrels, casks, &c. It af. 
fords an easy and large space for gaining ac 
cess to the interior. The gum washer may be 
inserted in a groove, if desired. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination of a barrel, cask, &c., 
having a metal frame secured hybolts on three 
Sides, and with the lower ends of its sides in the 
Croze, as shown, with a plate rabbeted on three 
of its edges and secured against a packing on 
the seat and in the croze by a bolt and nut and 
a clamp-bar, all as shown and specified. 
IO 
2. The combination of a barrel, cask, &c., 
having a frame, B, provided with a flange, e, 
and seat.f, and secured by bolts d and g, with 
a plate, C, having rabbeted edges and secured 
by a bolt, D, and clamp-bar E, all arranged as 
shown and herein set forth. 
In testimony whereof I hereto affix my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
O 
LOUIS MINCH. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS BEYER, 
T. C. BRECHT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355296.txt	(No Model.) 
I. BEST. 
W0OL COMBING MACHINE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 355,296, 
Patented Jan. 4, 1887. 
f:ANS// 
S; 
S/ANSSSS, 
(E7/7 
(N, 
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
I, BEST. 
WOOL COMBING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 355,296. 
Patented Jan. 4, 1887. 
 
SPY. 
4 
i 
- 
N 
s 
sa 
1 
v) 
S 
A-SP 
a 
S. s 
s 
. 
Sg 
s 
S 
s Nes r 
-- a 
ill 
Is 's- 
S 
: ISS. ----------- 
Vs 
eS 
N 
--- 
S 
A. 
a 
| 
h 
--- 
NQ 
N 
--- 
? 
w 
, 
Y------S 
w &g 
I. BEST. 
WOOL COMBING MACHINE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Jan. 4.887. 
 
S 
t"a, 
 
 
 
s 
 
Y 
(No Model.) 
No. 355,296, 
 
 
p 
f 
(No Model.) 
No. 355,296, 
 
I. BEST, 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
W0OL COMBING MACHINE, 
Patented Jan. 4, 1887. 
(No Model.) 
No. 355,296, 
 
I, BEST, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
W0OL COMBING MACHINE, 
Patented Jan, 4, 1887. 
N. PETERs. Phate-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
h 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC BEST, OF LAWRENCE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
wool-COMBING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 355,296, dated January 4, 1887. 
Application filed January 19, 1885. Serial No. 153,305. (No model.) Patented in England January 31, 1885, No. 1,407. 
O 
15 
25 
as with its vibrating end resting on said bed. 
To all, whon, it naily concern: 
Fig. 11 is a view similar to Fig. 10, but show 
Be it known that I, ISAAC BEST, of Law. 
ing the sliver-box as at 2, on the bar shown 
rence, in the county of Essex and State 9f Mas 
in Fig. 5. Fig. 12 is a similar view, but show 
Sachusetts, have invented a new and useful 
5 Improvement in Wool - Combing Machines, 
ing the sliver-box as resting on said bar at 3. 
Fig. 13 is also a similar view, but showing the 
which will, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, be hereinafter fully described, 
sliver-box as resting on said bar at 4. Fig. 14 
and specifically defined in the appended claims. 
is likewise, a similar view, but showing the 
sliver-box as resting at 5 on said bar. Fig.15 
This invention has for its object certain 
improvements in wool - combing machines, 
is a similar view, but showing the sliver-box 
as resting at 6 on said bar. 
whereof the well-known Noble comb is an 
In said drawings, A represents the circular 
example, and it is shown in the accompanying 
drawings, in connection with the usual parts 
rotating bed on which the several sliver-boxes 
B are pivotally mounted in the usual manner, 
of that comb, and will, in connection with said, 
drawings, be hereinafter fully described and 
as shown. The sliver is shown at a. as passing 
from the ball at the base of the machine, 
claimed. 
through guides C, and thence into the boxes, 
English Patent No. 2,189, dated June 23, 
and b represents the large circle comb plate, 
1873, and granted to Thomas Whitehead and 
all said parts being arranged to revolve around 
Henry Walton Whitehead, for the invention 
of improvements in Noble's combing-ma 
a common center, and to operate in the well 
chines,' representing in the drawings thereof a 
knoWn manner. 
The incline-bar for vertically actuating the 
machine of the class to which my invention 
sliver-boxes is shown at d, the same being Se 
relates. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
cured in position by rode. The usual knives, 
view, taken as viewed from the interior of the 
which raise the sliver above the teeth in comb 
plate b, are shown at c, and f represents the 
machine, and showing a section thereof with 
lny improvements thereto applied. Fig. 2 is a 
guide or cover on which the sliver moves af. 
ter being raised by knives c, till it arrives at 
vertical radial section taken as online Z, Fig. 1, 
the tangential junction of the larger circle 
and showing in elevation all beyond that line 
comb plateb and the lesser circle-comb i. The 
as viewed from the right in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is 
usual feeding-plate is shown at g, supported 
a top or plan view of the parts shown in Fig. 
by arm h. 
1. Fig. 4 is a view similar to Fig. 3, but 
In my improved machine I arrange the feed 
Omitting my improvements, and adding the 
ing-plate g at a greater distance than hereto 
drawing-rolls and coacting belts. 
Fig. 5 is a 
side elevation of my improved incline-bar, by 
fore from the Small circle-comb i, and I em 
ploy an additional set of knives, (shown ati, 
which the sliver-boxes are vertically actuated. 
Fig. 6 is a view similar to Fig. 5, showing said 
Fig. 1.) I also form the incline-bard with the 
elevations and depressions shown in Fig. 5, 
bar as heretofore formed. Fig. 7 is a detached 
elevation showing my auxiliary comb, its car 
instead of with the usual single elevation, 36, 
as shown in Fig. 6. 
I further employ an ad 
40 rier and returning - spring. Fig. 8 is a de 
ditional dabbing-brush, k, and a reciprocating 
tached elevation-showing the cam and lower 
drawing-comb, l, said brush and comb being 
part of the vibrating lever by which the aux 
iliary comb is horizontally reciprocated. Fig. 
actuated in the manner and by means next to 
be described. The dabbing-brushkis carried 
9 is a detached sectional elevation, the section 
by the lever n, having at its outer end the 
being taken on a radial line through the large 
horizontal slot int', the said brush being pro 
circle-comb, and the elevation showing my 
vided with a shank, k", having a vertical slot, 
auxiliary dabbing-brush and part of the arm 
k, through which and the slot in passes the 
by which it is supported and actuated. Fig. 
attaching-bolt in, (see Figs. 1 and 2,) so that 
10 is a radial vertical section through the cir 
5Ocular bed of the machine, and showing a sliver- the said bolt has a capability of being ad 
box, the sliver and guide, the box being shown justed not only vertically in reference to its 
35 
55 
75 
9O 
9 5 
ICO 
355,296 
r 
proximity to said lever, but laterally with ref. 
erence to its distance from the pivot n, on which 
the lever vibrates. Said lever is actuated by 
pitman p, which is vertically reciprocated 
by wrist-pin q in crank-disk s, mounted on 
and driven by arbor t, which also carries pin 
ion u, engaged and driven by gear v, Secured 
on arbor w, which latter also carries the bevel 
gear ac, engaged and driven by a similar gear, 
y, secured on and driven by vertical arbor 2, 
which may be, and preferably is, rotated by a 
pinion, 37, secured thereon below the bed D of 
the machine, said several parts being prefer 
ably secured to bed D by a small suppleinental 
bed, E. 
The auxiliary comb l is mounted on a car 
rier, S, Fig. 7, to which it is secured by bolts 9, 
which pass through slots 10 in the carrier, 
and are secured in the comb. A spiral spring, 
11, is at one end attached to a small stud se 
cured in the carrier and at the other to one of 
the bolts 9, so as to automatically return the 
comb to the position shown in said Fig. 7 when 
liberated from the sliver, which latter, by the 
rotary movement of the comb b, will, when comb 
l is engaged therein, move said comb l coinci 
dently with said comb b. Said comb. lhas also 
an automatic rising-and-falling motion, for the 
purpose of engaging and releasing the sliver, 
and it has also a horizontal reciprocating move-, 
ment toward and from the comb b. This last 
movement is secured by means of the following 
devices: An arm, 12, extending from carrier 8, 
passes through and is supported by bearing 
21. It is also pivotally connected with rock 
ing lever 13, pivoted upon stud 14, and carry 
ing at its lower end a pin, 15, which engages in 
the groove in the side of cam-disk 16, mounted 
on and rotated by arbor up, driven as described. 
This arrangement of devices will, from the 
form of the cam-groove shown in Fig. 2, im 
part to comb la movement toward and from 
comb b at each revolution of arbor v. 
To impart the rising-and-falling motion to 
comb l an eccentric, 17, is also secured on said 
arbor ac, the strap 18 of which is pivotally con 
nected with a stud, 19, rigidly secured to rod 
20, which passes through and slides in bearing 
26. Upon the top of said rod 20 is secured 
the bearing 21 of arm 12 of the described comb 
carrier 8, and by the rotation of eccentric 17 
said rod 20, its cap or bearing 21, and the 
comb-carrier 8 and comb l will be vertically 
reciprocated to an extent sufficient to engage 
and disengage teeth 27 with and from the fiber 
in comb b. The cam 16 and eccentric 17 
are So arranged that the rising motion of the 
comb will occur when it is close to comb b, as 
shown in Fig. 2, while its falling motion takes 
place when it is farthest from b, and conse 
quently after it has drawn the fiber, which it 
engages in its rising movement inward to the 
extent of the described horizontal movement. 
A clearer, 22, is attached to and supported by 
fixed arm 23, it being arranged to slide line 
ally thereon by means of a slot in its arm 35 
and a bolt passing through the same into said 
75 
arm 23. In the arm of said clearer is a piti, 
25, between which and arm 23 is arranged the 
spring 24, secured at its fixed end to arm 23, 
and so arranged as to habitually force clearer 
22 toward the teeth of comb l, as shown in Fig. 
2, yet allowing the clearer to be moved inward 
by the engagement there with of the teeth of 
the comb when it moves inward. 
The operation of the machine, when pro 
vided with my said improvements, is described 
as follows: As the slivers respectively pass 
under feeding-plate g their boxes B will pass 
up over elevation 2 of incline-bar d, Fig. 5. 
This raises the boxes to the position shown in 
Fig. 11, and the angle thus produced between 
the box and bed A by such change of position 
of the box from that shown in Fig. 10 serves 
to increase the length of sliver projecting be-, 
yond the mouth of the box. As the boxes 
pass toward the end of feeding-plate of they 
move down into depression 3 in bard, as shown 
in Fig. 12, thereby slightly folding between 
them and said comb b the increased length of 9o 
sliver which resulted from the rise of the boxes 
at 2 on bar d. As the boxes pass on and the 
slivers are liberated from the piate g they are 
raised clear of the teeth of comb b by knives 
j, and at the same time the boxes are corre 
spondingly raised by elevation 4 of bar d, as 
shown in Fig. 13, whereby the slivers will by 
their inherent elastic expansion extend them 
selves as far inside of comb b as they were ex 
tended from the boxes by the rise of the same 
at elevation 2 of said bar, as shown in Fig.11. 
As the boxes next pass down into depression 5 
of bard, as shown in Fig. 14, the dabbing-brush 
k depresses the fiber into the teeth of comb b, 
when combi, by its described rising action, will 
engage the fiber thus extending inside comb 
b, and by the backward movement of said 
comb l the short fiber or noil,' as it is termed, 
will be drawn close to the end of the fiber, 
thereby leaving that portion of the fiber be: 
tween combs b and l cleared and freed from 
the short fiber or noil. Said comb l (by its 
sliding action on its carrier 8, as already de 
scribed, and as shown in Fig. 7) travels with 
the fiber as the same is carried along by rotary 
comb b, and is depressed and cleared there 
from at the monent when it is at the end of 
its inward movement, and is then returned by 
the action of its spring 11, as before stated. 
The length of said comb l is such that it thus 
acts several times upon the same fiber, and it 
is provided, as shown in Fig. 7, with sections 
of finer and coarser teeth, in order that when 
first acting on the slivers and arranging the 
longer fibers the coarser teeth shall be oper 
ative, and when the noil is largely drawn to 
the end of the slivers and the long fibers ar. 
ranged, then the finer teeth shall complete the 
work. After the fiber has been fully acted on 
by comb t the boxes mount elevation 6 of 13o 
bar d, as shown in Fig. 15, and coincidently 
there with the slivers or fiber is raised from 
the teeth of comb b by clearing-knives c, 
whence the fiber passes onto and along guide 
I (5 
I 25 
IO 
95 
OO 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
65 
 
5 
355,296 
3. 
f, which terminates at the point of nearest ap- for the said teeth to slip over the fiber, or for 
proach of combs b and i, where, as soon as the the latter to become wedged into the base of 
the comb, as would be the case if the said 
fiber leaves said guide it is sunk into said ro 
comb reciprocated in the arc of a circle. 
tary combs by the usual dabbing-brush, 28, 
5 thereby driving the noil, already gathered 
near the ends of the fiber, closely among the 
teeth of small comb i. As the slivers are raised 
clear of comb b by the action of knives c, and 
the rising of the sliver-boxes upon elevation 
6 of bar d, the fiber, which by the action of 
comb l is somewhat stretched, will retract 
toward said boxes to an extent to bring the 
center of that portion which has been cleared 
by said comb l at the dividing-line between 
combs b i, where they most nearly approach 
each other, and so that said cleared fiber will 
be sunk equally in each of said combs by brush 
28. As the combs move on, and part of the 
separating fiber is taken by each, that which 
remains with and projects inward from comb 
b is extracted by the drawing-rolls 30 in the 
usual manner, and is thence carried by belt 31 
through belt-guide 32, and thence by belt 34 
to drawing-rolls 33, where the two slivers re 
unite and pass on to the usual receptacle, while 
the noil which had been by reciprocating comb 
l gathered at the inner end of the slivers, so 
as to be driven into combi, as described, and 
which there remains while rolls 33 withdraw 
the long fibers by engaging their ends farthest 
from the noil, is raised by clearing-knives 29 
and discharged from the connb. 
By the operation of the means added by 
my invention the long and short fiber can be 
more perfectly separated than has hitherto 
been practicable with rotary combs, as the 
noil is gathered by my supplemental comb 
close to the end, and so as to be sufficiently 
compacted in the small rotary comb to allow 
the detached long fibers that project from the 
periphery of the comb to be extracted by the 
drawing-rolls 33 without dislodging the al 
ready-gathered noil, which is afterward dis 
charged, as stated. Besides this, the described 
action of my reciprocating comb l is such that 
the long fibers, which project inward from 
comb b after the separation at combs b i, are 
drawn from comb b by rolls 30 more free from 
the short fiber or noil than if my devices were 
not employed. 
From the foregoing it will be apparent that 
the horizontal in Ward and outward movements 
of the comb l, as well as the vertical move. 
ments thereof, are in right lines, so that the 
teeth of the said comb are always precisely 
vertical, and there is therefore no tendency 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the rotary combs 
b and i and the sliver-boxes B, of the feed 
ing-plate g, knives i, brush k, comb l, knives c, 
brush 28, and bar d, having elevation 2, ar. 65 
ranged to coact with plate g, the depression 3, 
arranged between the said plate and knives i, 
the elevation 4, arranged to coact with the 
said knives j, the depression 5, to coact with 
. 
brush k, and elevation 6, arranged to coact 7o 
with the knives c, all substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the rotary combs 
b and i and the sliver-boxes B, of the feeding 
plate g, arranged inside of the comb b, the 
knives.j, brush k, comb l, knives c, the guide 
f, brush 28, and the bar d, having elevation 2, 
arranged to coact with the plate 9, the de 
pression 3, arranged between said plate and 
knives i, the elevation 4, arranged to coact 
with the said knives i, the depression 5, al 
ranged to coact with the brush k, and eleva 
tion 6, arranged to coact with the knives c, all 
Substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the rotary comb 
b and the sliver-boxes B, of the comb l, a car 
rier, as 8, to which the said comb is secured, 
said carrier having an arm, as 12, a bearing or 
guide, as 21, through which said arm passes, 
mechanism for operating said arm to recipro 
cate the comb l in a right line horizontally, 90 
and mechanism for reciprocating the said 
bearing or guide vertically, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. The combination, with the rotary comb 
b and the sliver-boxes B, of the comb l, hav 
ing teeth at that end thereof which first en 
gages the fiber at a greater distance apart than 
the teeth at the other end of the said comb, 
and mechanism for imparting vertical and 
horizontal movements in right lines to the said I 
comb l, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with the rotary comb 
b, the sliver-boxes, the comb l, and operating 
mechanism for the latter, of the clearer 22, its 
carrying-arm, and a spring for forcing said 
clearer outward after it has been moved in 
ward by the said comb l, substantially as set 
forth. 
ISAAC BEST. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES SPEED, 
PETER W. LY ALL. 
3O 
45 
55 
95 
O 
, 
O 
- 
Y 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355396.txt	No. 355,396, 
HEDGE TRIMMER, 
Patented Jan. 4, 1887. 
 
  
????. ? (ilemarv 
?????? his 
is eltozaes /7re Slade a 
/0/ A, fou? 
r. PETERS. Photo-LithKegraph 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN P. HILEMAN, OF ARROWSMITH, ILLINOIS. 
HEDGE-TRIMMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 355,396, dated January 4, 1887. 
Application filed March 20, 1886. Serial No. 195,992. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
7o aZ v7on, it nag/ conce7n: 
Be it known that I, JoHN P. HILEMAN, of 
Arrowsmith, McLean county, Illinois, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements in 
Hedge-Trimming Machines; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, making a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve. 
ments in hedge-trimming machines; and it has 
for its objects to provide certain improved 
means whereby the cutting mechanism is oper 
ated and controlled, as more fully hereinafterset 
forth. These objects are attained by the means 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
sy 
which- 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
the improved invention, and Fig. 2 represents 
a top plan view thereof. 
In said drawings, the letter A indicates the 
main frame, constructed preferably of wood, 
and having side uprights, B, which, are con-, 
nected and braced by a cross-beam, C. 
D indicates a master-wheel, which is fast 
ened to the shaft E. On said shaft is mounted 
a bevel gear-wheel, F. The wheel F gears 
with a pinion, G, which transmits its motion to 
the bevel-wheel H, and thence through the 
pinion I to the shaft K. On this shaft is se 
cured a miter-wheel, L, which gears with a 
miter-wheel, L. A crank - wheel, M, is se 
cured to the Shaft K. 
N is a shaft journaled on the supplemental 
frame, and having at one end the miter-wheel 
I, and provided on its other end with crank 
The letter P indicates a horizontal cutter 
bar, which operates to cut the top of the hedge; 
and R, a vertical cutter-bar to cut the side of 
the hedge, the said cutter-bars being actuated, 
respectively, by the pitmen S and T. The pit 
man S is actuated by the crank-wheel M, and 
the pitman T by the crank-wheel N'. 
To render the apparatus adjustable to dif. 
ferent heights, I employ a frame-work which 
is vertically adjustable on the standards B. 
The cutter - bars and their immediately-at 
5o tached operating mechanism are also raised and 
lowered with the adjustable frame. 
U U indicate two side parallel bars, notched 
wheel N. 
? 
? 
?? 
at U", so as to slide on the standards B. There 
are three transverse bars secured to the bars U. 
These bars are lettered Q, Q Q. There is also 
a fourth bar, Q, on the top part of the mov 
able frame, which lies parallel with the side 
bars, U. There is a series of retaining-plates, 
R', for holding the shafts K N in position. 
These plates are secured to the tops of the 
horizontal bars. 
Z is a vertical rotary shaft provided with a . 
collar, Z, which supports it in an opening in 
a cross-bar, Z. Said cross-bar has its ends 
secured to the standards B. The cross-bar Q 
is provided with an opening for supporting 
the shaft Z and holding the same and its wheel 
H in line. Said shaft is provided on its lower 
end with a bevel gear-wheel, X, which meshes 
with the main shaft-wheel F. 
V V are two vertical rack-bars, secured at 
their upper ends to the side bars, U U, of the 
movable frame. The notches V' on these bars 
Ware engaged by cog-wheels Won a shaft, V. 
The ends of this shaft are journaled to the side 
frame-bars, A. 
Ware guide-pieces on the inner sides of the 
frame-pieces A, for holding the rack-bars V in 
line. 
This rod is held in position on its lower end 
by means of an arm, Y, which extends inward 
from one of the frame-pieces. This arm is 
provided with an opening for the reception of 
the rod, said rod being provided with a collar, 85 
W', to prevent it from sliding down through 
the opening in the arm-piece Y. The end of 
the rod is provided with a worm, W, which 
meshes with a worm-wheel, W, on the shaft 
V. The rod extends rearward and upward on go 
about an angle of forty-five degrees, and it is 
provided on its outer end with a crank, W, 
near the driver's seat Y', whereby said crank 
is accessible to the driver when seated. The 
rear end of the rodW may be suitably mounted 95 
and supported by any convenient form of arm 
or bracket. 
As there is often a furrow along the side of 
hedges, and it being desirable to maintain a 
uniform height of the top cutter-bar, P, the ico 
following mechanism is devised to meet this 
emergency: The small wheel A is journaled 
in a vertical piece, A*. To Said piece is se 
cured a right-angled projection, A'. 
Wis a rod for elevating the adjustable frame. So 
75 
. 
??. 
???? 
.. 
-.. 
2 
355,396 
I. ? 
(5 
2O. 
A are vertical flanged guides secured to the 
side of standards B. These guides permit of 
a vertical adjustment of the piece A* therein. 
B' is a lever, secured at its lower end to the 
right-angled piece A. Said lever is fulcrumed 
to a short arm, B. 
B' is a notched standard on the rear cross 
frame-piece. Said standard is provided with a 
lever-retaining frame piece, B. 
B' is a spring on the lever for holding the 
same in any one of the notches. 
The inner end of the cutter-bar P is hinged 
to one end of the cross-piece Q. A chain, C, 
is secured at one end to said bar. A pin, C, 
is fixed in the top of the cross-piece Q. The 
chain is adapted to engage said pin by any 
one of its links, whereby the angle of inclina 
tion of the cutter-bar may be adjusted. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
By rotating the rod W the worm W thereon, 
through the medium of the worm-wheel W', 
rotates the shaft V*. The cogs V' on said 
shaft elevate or lower the rack-bars V. When 
said rack-bars are moved vertically, the top 
horizontal bars, U, Q, Q, Q, and Q, and the 
mechanism mounted thereon, are also moved. 
The cutter - bars are also moved with said 
bars and mechanism. The shaft Z is longi 
tudinally grooved on its upper side. Said 
shaft is provided with a bevel gear-wheel, H. 
Said shaft and wheel are united by key or 
spline. The wheel is movable on the shaft. 
When the adjustable frame is raised or low 
ered, the wheel His moved on its shaft, so as 
35 to conform to the changed position. The ob 
ject of the adjustable frame is to raise and 
lower the cutter-bars. 
Having thus described my invention, what II 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1. The combination, with the main frame 
having fixed vertical standards thereon, of a 
supplementary frame provided with vertical 
and horizontal cutter-bars, said frame being 
45 vertically adjustable on said standards, where 
4O IS 
25 
by the cutter-bars may be raised and lowered, 
substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with themainframehav 
ing fixed standards thereon, of a vertically-ad 
justable frame provided with cutter-bars, both 5o 
vertical and horizontal, the horizontal cutter 
bar being hinged to the adjustable frame and 
provided with means, substantially as speci 
fied, for varying the angle of inclination of 
said bar and securing the same in any desired 55 
position, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the main shaft E, of 
the bevel gear-wheels EFX, HII, and IL L, and . 
of the shafts to which said wheels are respect 
ively secured, of the crank-wheels M and N' 6o 
and their pitmen ST, and of the vertical and 
horizontal cutter-bars, all arranged and oper 
ated substantially as described, and for the 
purposes set forth. 
4. The main shaft E, bevel gear-wheels FX, 65 
HI, and LL, the shafts to which said wheels 
are respectively secured, the crank-wheels M 
and N', and pitmen ST, the gear-wheel Hbeing 
vertically movable on its shaft, in combina 
tion with a vertically-adjustable frame, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purposes 
set forth. 
5. The main shaft E, bevel gear-wheels FX. 
H I, and LL, and the shafts to which said 
wheels are respectively secured, the gear-wheel 
H being vertically movable on its shaft, and 
the vertically-adjustable frame provided with 
rack-bars V, in combination with the shaft.V.", 
provided with cogs and a worm - wheel, as 
specified, and the crank-rod W, provided with 
the worm for engaging the worm wheel, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 14th day of 
January, 1886. 
75 
JOHN P. FILEMAN. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. SLADE, 
M. S. SILADE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355496.txt	(Model.) 
No. 355,496. 
H. M. ALBERT. 
PAPER BOX OR BASKET, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 4, 1887. 
---?----- 
W. 
 
ATTOR//EY 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(Model, ) 
H. M. ALBERT. 
PAPER BOX OR BASKET, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 355,496. 
Patented Jan. 4, 1887. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A 
HUGH M. ALBERT, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
PAPER Box OR BASKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 355,496, dated January 4, 1887. 
Application filed March 11, 1886. Serial No. 194,785. (Model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HUGH M. ALBERT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Day 
ton, in the county of Montgomery and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Paper Boxes or Baskets for 
Carrying Fruits, Oysters, or other Moist Sub 
stances, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the accom 
panying drawings. 
My improvements relate to paper boxes for 
carrying fruits, oysters, and the like; and the 
objects of my improvements are to provide a 
water-tight paper box of straw-board with a 
thin Manila-paper pasted lining, loose only at 
the outside folds or laps, whereby the two lay 
ers of paper are integral to form the inner walls. 
of the box, and the lining cannot be injured 
or torn in nesting the boxes for transporta 
tion, or pulled out from the straw-board in 
pulling the boxes out of each other. The 
straw-board is strong, admits of the use of the 
thinnest material as a water-prooflining, and 
is not liable to split at the bends. The two 
paper layers are pasted together only at those 
parts which form the inner walls of the box, 
while at those parts which form the outside 
folds or laps the lining is unattached to the 
straw. board, to allow it to be lapped at two 
sides with the latter. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure represents the thin water-proof blank 
paper lining; Fig. 2, the straw-board blank. 
Figs. 3 and 4 are similar views of blanks of 
Fig. 5 represents the box 
in perspective, one of the folded or lapped 
sides being shown open; and Fig. 6 shows a 
vertical section of the box. 
The dotted lines in the several blanks indi 
cate the folds or creases and the full lines in 
the Straw-board blanks indicate the cuts. The 
blanks being cut, the thin-paper blank K, Fig. 
1, is placed upon the straw-board blank L, 
Fig. 2, and the sections at a BB of each pasted 
together across the bottom, leaving the corner 
35 different patterns. 
45 
55 
sections, 0 cc c, of each separated, thus form 
ing the two blanks integral at those parts 
which form the bottom b and the sides a B of 
the box. The four sides at a B B are raised to 
form the box, while the four corner sections, 
c, of the thin-paperlining are turned andfolded. 
Orlapped in between the straw-board sections a 
and its corner sections, c, the latterlapping on 
the outer side of the box, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The bail of wire e is bent to form hooks.f, 
which pass through the straw-board parts a 
and c c at the folded sides and secure them 
together. It will be understood that the blanks 
are cut of the same size, that the thin lining 
is not cut at the creases, and that the sections 
or portiops included within the dotted lines 
1 2 3 4 5678, extending from the four edges 
across the bottom b, as in Fig. 1, are pushed 
to the corresponding portions of the straw 
board blank, Fig. 2, so as to render them in 
tegral. This leaves the triangular portions c 
of the paper lining and the corresponding por. 
tions c of the straw-board unattached, to be 
folded and lapped to make a water-tight box, 
in which the lining is folded and lapped upon 
the outer sides of the Sections a ct of the straw 
board, while the sections e c of the latter are 
lapped upon each other on the outer sides of 
the sections at at upon the folds of the lining. 
I claim 
The improved paper box herein described, 
consisting of the straw-board blank cut to form 
the bottom, sides, and intermediate lapping cor 
nerparts of the box, and ofalining of thin-water 
proof paper adhesively united at the sections 
which form the inside walls of the box and 
disconnected at the lapping corner parts, in 
combination with a bail uniting the lapped 
parts, substantially as described. 
In testimoriy whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HUGH MI. ALBERT. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES C. YoUNG, 
RUDOLPH WOLF. 
f 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355596.txt	(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
STOP MOTION MECHANISM FOR, CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINES. 
No. 355,596. 
Patented Jani, 4, 1887. 
G. DAVIDSON. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UI 
HE IEA'? 
22 E. J. 
TIET first ississista-T 
I Nina SEs Se2 
G 
and to 
Saggage 
gigsgs.gi 
fi 
Z7. 
)77, zesses 
-6224-6, 4%- 
4.a. s.a.s.lic War 4% 
Zzzre 7z Zoz" 
3ve .42% 
 
  
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
G. DAVIDSON, 
STOP MOTION MECHANISM FOR, CIRCUIAR KNITTING MACHINES. 
No. 355,596. 
Yezzvesses 
-?7%zz- /, V7%-. 
Zzzreza Zo 7 
4ez.2% 
. Peters. Photo-iihographer, washington.D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
G, DAWIDSON, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
STOP MOTION MECHANISM FOR, CIRCUIAR, KNITTING MACHINES 
No. 355,596. 
Patented Jan. 4, 1887. 
hir Im 
T 
yoff 
|| 
d 
| 
2 
Q. 
N 
11, AS 
w 
WITNESSES: 
424, 4 6%- 
,64. af/3.44. 
. Ferers. Fhoto-lihographer, Washingtor, d. c. 
 
%ze &aezzle INVENTOR 
BY 
7%ze. ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE DAVIDSON, OF PARIS, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
STOP-MOTION MECHANISM FOR CIRCULAR-KNITTING MACH NES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 355,596, dated January 4, 1887. 
Application filed July 29, 1884. Serial No. 139,06t. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE DAVIDSON, of 
Paris, Province of Ontario, Dominion of Can 
ada, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Stop-Motion Mechanism for Circular 
5 
Knitting Machines, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
My invention relates to apparatus for oper 
ating the usual and ordinary stop-motion 
mechanism of circular - knitting machines. 
This apparatus, to which my invention as an 
improvement relates, consists of a pivoted 
lever that is drawn out by its handle against 
the force of a spring to put on the driving-belt 
of the machine from which power is derived, 
and Which lever engages with a pivoted latch 
that is held down to its engagement by a latch 
pin. On a tripping-rod to keep the driving-belt 
on and the lever drawn out, the said tripping 
rod being arranged between the vertical sides 
of an inverted-U-shaped standard, with bear 
ings in the top of the latter, and at the bottom 
of said standard, so that the said tripping-rod 
can be turned therein to release the latch-pin 
and latch, and thus trip the lever and throw 
off the driving-belt of the machine, to stop the 
rotation of the latter. 
To provide improved means for automatic 
ally operating the hereinbefore-described shift 
ing mechanism when a yarn is broken or the 
bobbin has been run off is the object of my 
invention. 
My invention, therefore, consists in the novel 
construction of the parts and their combina 
tion, as will be hereinafter fully disclosed, and 
Specifically, as is pointed out in the claims 
made hereto. 
Accompanying this specification, to form a 
part of it, there are three plates of drawings 
containing six figures, illustrating my inven 
tion, with the same designation of its parts 
by letter-reference used in all of them. Of 
these illustrations, Figure 1 shows a side eleva 
tion of a part of a rotary knitting-machine with 
the ordinary stop-motion connected there 
with, and showing also my invention applied 
thereto to operate said stop-motion. Fig. 2 
illustrates a plan view of a part of the machine 
table and the bed of the machine partly in 
section, and showing also the pivoted belt 
shifting or shipping lever with the adjustable 
45 
-- 
bracket affixed thereto, the latch-pin, the latch, 
the tripping-rod, and the spring connected to 
the lever. Fig. 3 shows, as detached from the 
machine, a view of a pivoted lever that is op-55 
erated to trip the belt by turning the tripping 
rod. Fig. 4 shows, as detached from the ma 
chine, a view of a pivoted drop-catch, a series 
of which are arranged on the side of the knit 
ting-machine cylinder, that shown in this rep- o 
resentation being illustrated in larger propor 
tion than those upon the cylinder, to better 
show its details. Fig. 5 is a perspective of a 
pivoted yarn-holder constructed with an an 
gular end and an offset-arm. This figure illus. 65 
trates also the plate by which the said yarn 
holder is conneuted to a supporting-standard 
and made adjustable thereon. Fig. 6 is an 
enlarged detail view in perspective, showing 
the yarn-guides, the bracket carrying the yarn- 7o 
holder, and a part of a cylinder with a pivoted 
catch thereon. 
The several parts of the knitting-machine, 
its stop-motion mechanism, and the apparatus 
containing my invention for operating the 75 
same are designated by letter-reference, and 
their function is described as follows: 
The letter C designates the machine-cylin 
der, N the needles, W the web, and T the ma 
chine-table. 
The stop-motion is designated as follows, 
the letter U indicating an inverted. U-shaped 
standard attached to the table, R the trip 
ping-rod adapted to turn in the top and bot. 
ton of said standard, and P a horizontally. 85 
projected latch-pin on said tripping-rod. 
The letter L. designates the latch of the stop 
motion mechanism, said latch being pivoted 
at o in the brackets bb, attached to the stand 
ard U. 
The letter I indicates a belt shipping lever, 
which is pivoted at M, and Sindicates a spring, 
which at its inner end is connected to a ring 
through which the machine-shaft passes, and 
at the other end to the said lever-I, so that 95 
said lever is drawn out by its handle H to put 
on the beit against the force of said spring. 
The letter Odesignates an adjustable bracket 
on the said lever, the inner end of which presses 
against the latch L when the inner end of the Icc 
latter is beneath and held down by the latch 
pin P, Thus when the lever is drawn out to 
9O 
w 
35 
 
2 
355,596 
O 
5 
put on the belt it is held so as to keep the belt 
on and the machine running by the engage 
ment of the bracket O on the said lever with 
the latch L, and the engagement of the latter 
with the latch-pin P on the tripping-rod R. 
Now, when the rod R is turned by any means, 
its latch-pin P runs from off the end of the 
pivoted latch L, the latter turning upwardly 
on its outer end by the pressure of the spring 
lever, and the latter slips from off the latch, 
the lever being drawn inwardly by the spring 
to unship the belt. 
To automatically operate the tripping rod 
to throw off the belt and stop the machine 
when a thread of yarn is broken or fails in 
continuity to feed the machine, I employ the 
following mechanism. 
The letter J designates a series of catches 
that are arranged on the exterior of the knit 
ting-machine cylinder, each of which is piv 
oted at t, so that they can be turned down on 
their pivotal connection, and the letter i' in 
dicates an incline projected upwardly from the 
machine-table, which engages with the under 
side of said catches to turn them up, so as to 
bring their lower surface parallel with the bot 
tom edge of the knitting-machine cylinder 
after having been turned down. 
The letter d designates a lateral projection 
made on the outer face of each of the catches. 
The letter A indicates a standard, upon 
which, by means of a bracket, B, there is at 
tached an upright plate, m, having adjustably 
pivoted thereto a yarn-holder, h. This yarn 
holder is provided with a projecting arrin, a, 
and is pivoted at its upper end in the holder 
plate m at , and at its lower end is formed. 
with an angular termination, p, the purpose 
of the termination being to keep the holder 
resting on the yarn as the same is passing into 
the machine between the yarn-guides in n. 
When the angular termination p' is on the 
yarn, the holder is held up, and when the yarn 
breaks or fails to hold up the yarn-holder the 
yarn-holder falls to a vertical position, the 
upper part resting in the recess l of the pro 
jection p" on the holder-plate n, the project 
ing arm a pointing inward toward the cylin 
der C. When the yarn-holder h is thus down, 
its arm a', as the machine revolves, comes in 
contact with the next one of the catches J, to 
engage with its top rounded surface, k, so as 
to force downwardly the catch, as shown at J' 
of Fig. 1. 
The letter Edesignates a curved lever formed 
with the turned-up ends e' and e, and pivoted 
to the standard G at g, so as to be horizontally 
moved outwardly and inwardly at its ends. 
The letter K designates a projecting arm on 
the tripping-rod R of the belt-shipping mech 
anism. 
The operation of the mechanism thus con 
structed to operate the tripping-rod is as fol 
lows: When the yarn Y is regularly passing 
into the machine, the angular end of the holder 
h rests on the yarn at a point between the two 
yarn-guides n n, and when the yarn breaks or 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
55 
 
75 
ceases to sustain the holder h. the latter falls 
on its pivoted connection, and in its descent 
its arm a is carried into position to engage 
with and turn down on its pivoted connection 
the adjacent one of the series of catches J, 
brought in contact with said arm a by the 
revolution of the machine-cylinder. When 
this dropping catch falls, a projection, d, on its 
side engages with the upturned end, e, of the 
curved lever E, forcing this engaging end out 
wardly, and the opposite upturned end, e, to 
engage with the arm K of the tripping-rod R, 
so as to force the latter around on its pivotal 
connection, releasing the latch-pin, latch, and 
belt-shipping mechanism to stop the machine. 
Where yarn breaks or fails to be supplied 
to the machine in continuity, blemishes and 
irregularities occur in the web, and to avoid 
these contingencies by the automatic opera 
tion of the machine is what my invention is 
designed to effect. 
I am aware that a mechanism has been used 
which consists of yarn-holders hinged to a 
frame, and which holders, when released by a 
break in the yarn, fall down upon one side of a 
pivoted balance, to raise the other side of the 
latter and engage with one of the nuts on the 
machine-cylinder, so as to turn said frame 
and balance horizontally, which, being con 
nected with an arm. on the tripping-rod, are 
thus caused to trip the belt-shipping mechan 
ism and stop the machine. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire. to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination, with the belt-shipping 
mechanism and the cylinder of a rotary knit 
ting-machine, of a yarn-holder pivotally sup 
ported and formed with an angular termina 
tion at its free end and an intermediate later 
ally-projecting arm, catches pivoted to the 
outer face of the cylinder, and a trip-lever 
having upturned ends to engage with the said 
catches, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the belt-shipping 
mechanism and the cylinder of a rotary knit 
ting-machine, of a yarn-holder pivotally sup 
ported and formed with an angular termina 
tion at its free end and an intermediate later 
ally-projected arm, catches pivoted to the 
outer face of the cylinder and having cam 
surfaces k and projecting pieces d, and the 
lever E, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the cylinder of 
the machine and the table thereof, of the 
catches J, pivotally attached to the cylinder, 
and the incline i', fixed on the table, substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose stated. 
Signed at Paris, Province of Ontario, Do 
minion of Canada, this 27th day of May, 1884, 
and in the presence of the two witnesses whose 
names are hereto written. 
GEORGE DAVIDSON. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT SHEPHERD, 
GEORGE DAVIDSON, Jr. 
90 
OO 
In 5 
I IO 
I I5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355696.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. H. KNIGHT, 
PORTABLE FURNACE, 
No. 355,696. 
Patented Jan, ll 1887. 
 
Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. H. KNIGHT, OF WASHINGTON, D.C., ASSIGNOR TO THE ECONOMY 
KINDLING WOOD STOVE COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PA. 
PO RTABLE FURNACE. 
S&ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 355,696, dated Januaryll, 18-7. 
Application filed July 11, 1885 Serial No. 171,336. (No intolel.) 
5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
to 
65 
To a 27 tuhon, it inclf concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM E. H. KNIGHT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Portable Furnaces, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had therein 
to the accompanying drawings, making a part 
of this specification, and to the letters of ref. 
erence marked thereon. 
My invention relates to portable furnaces, 
and has for its object the provision of an arti 
cle of the class named adapted to be used in 
connection with a stationary range, cook, or 
parlor stove during the summer months, or at 
times when it is desirable to employ a quick 
fire for cooking or for other purposes, and at 
the same time as equally desirable that the 
temperature of the room wherein said stove 
and furnace are employed be kept at the lowest 
possible point. 
The invention is fully shown in the accom. 
panying drawings, described in the specifica 
tion, and pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a vertical longitudinal section through 
a portable furnace embodying my invention. 
Fig.2 represents a top planaview thereof. Fig. 
3 is a bottom plan view. Fig. 4 represents an 
end elevation. Fig. 5 represents a cross-sec 
tion on line aca of Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is a similar 
cross-section on the liney y of Fig. 2; and Fig. 
7 is a horizontal longitudinal section on the 
line 2 of Fig. 5. 
In the drawings, wherein similar letters of 
reference denote similar parts, A designates 
the exterior shellor case, consisting of thesides 
( C, ends (ta, bottom c, and top B, having 
Openings b b, to receive cooking utensils. The 
bottom a' of the shell is provided at or near 
its middle with an opening, C, for the passage 
of products of combustion. 
C designates an open-ended cap attached to 
the sides and one end of the smoke-exit C, to 
provide a strong draft through said exit. The 
cap C is shown and claimed in one of my for 
mer cases in this art, and may or may not be 
used herein. 
D designates an air-opening in the end a 
of the shell A, said opening communicating 
through flues D' D* with the interior of the 
combustion-chamber E. If desired, the open 
ing D in the end a' of the shell may be located 
near the lower edge of said end, just above the 
bottom a of the shell. The opposite end, a, of 55 
the shell A is provided with an opening, F, 
covered by a hinged flap, F. The opening 
F is connected by an open-ended box, F, with 
an opening, F, in one end, e, of the combus 
tion - chamber E, thus providing a door, F, 
through which communication may be had with 
the combustion-chamber. The opposite end, 
e', of the combustion chamber is imperforate 
and forms one side of the air flue D'. 
e' designates the sides of the combustion 
chamber, both of which are provided with cut 
away portions eat their upper edges to form 
passages for the products of combustion. 
e' designates tongues projecting upward from 
the sides e, between the cut-away portions e 
thereof. 
In practice the tonguese" may be omitted, 
as such tongues are not essential to the prac 
tical working of the furnace. 
e designates the bottom of the combustion 
chamber, said bottom having a series of open 
ings, e, formed therein to admit air to the com 
e designates flanged bars placed upon the 
bottom e of the combustion-chamber and pro- 8o 
jecting upward therefrom to support fuel. A 
grabe may be substituted for the barse', if de 
sired. 
By reference to Figs. 5, 6, 7 it will be ob 
served that a portion of the bottome of the com- 85 
bustion- chamber E and one end, e, thereof 
extend to and bear against the sides at of the 
inclosing-shell A, thus forming, in connection 
with said sides and one end, a?, of the shell, air. 
flues D'D', whereby to conduct air from the go 
opening D to the perforated bottom of the com 
bustion-chamber, and thence to the fuelin said 
chamber. 
G designates a partition extending obliquely 
from the inner surface of the bottom a of the 95 
... shell A to the lower surface of the bottom e of 
the combustion-chamber. Said partition ex 
tends transversely across the shell, from side 
to side thereof, and from one edge of the open 
ing Cin the shell upward in an inclined direc- too 
tion to the point at which the apertures e in 
the bottom of the combustion-chamber termi 
bustion-chamber. 
75 
- 
sis 
355,696 
O 
nate, thus completely preventing direct com 
munication between said apertures e and the 
smoke-exit, and at the same time forming one 
end of the lower air-flue, D'. The partition G. 
is secured to the respective bottoms of the shell 
A and combustion-chamber E. 
By the above-described construction it will 
be understood that the combustion chamber 
E is centrally arranged within the inclosing 
chamber; that the partition G is arranged in 
mediately below the middle of the said com 
bustion-chamber and above a smoke-exit situ 
ated in the middle of the bottom of the inclos 
ing-shell. I attach importance to this con 
struction, as thereby a portable furnace is pro 
vided capable of being used upon any form of 
stationary stove or range without requiring 
special devices to hold it upon such station 
ary stove, as well as a furnace wherein the fuel 
may be centrally disposed, which disposition 
of fuel has been found by me to produce the 
best results in furnaces of the class named. 
As hereinbefore stated, an opening may be 
formed in the end a of the shell A, such point 
indicated by dotted lines an in Fig. 4. If de 
sired, the bottom of the connbustion chamber 
may be cut away between the upper edge of the 
partition G and the end e' of said chamber, and 
in lieu thereof a grate of any desired configura 
tion may be used. Also, if desired, a flap of 
any configuration may be employed in connec 
tion with the air-opening D, to limit the sup 
ply of air admitted to the combustion chamber. 
The operation of my improved furnace will 
be readily understood without further descrip 
tion. 
Modifications of the herein - described in 
provement may be made without departing 
from the spirit of or sacrificing the advantages 
of my invention-as, for instance, the parti 
tion G may extend from end to end of the 
inclosing-shell instead of across said shell, as 
herein described, provided always the general 
relation of the parts-to wit, smoke exit, in 
clined partition, and perforated bottom of the 
combustion-chamber-be maintained. 
Having thus described my invention, 
claim 
1. In a portable stove, the combination, with 
the walls or casing of a stove having an exit 
opening in the bottom and a draft-opening at 
one end, of the grate, consisting of a perforated 
plate of sheet metal and an inclined plate con 
nected to or made integral with said grate, 
said plate extending forward beneath the grate 
and connected to the bottom between the draft 
45 
55 
 
3. In a portable furnace, the combination of 75 
and exit openings, and dividing the space be 
low the grate into an air-chamber and a smoke 
flue, said exit-opening being located under the 
grate, substantially as and for the purpose set 6o 
forth. 
2. In a portable furnace, the combination of 
the following elements, namely: an inclosing 
shell having smoke-exit at or near the middle 
of its bottom, air-opening, and door commu. 65 
nicating with the combustion- chamber, top 
having apertures to receive cooking utensils, 
centrally-arranged combustion-chamber hav 
ing a perforated bottom, and an inclined im 
perforate partition extending below the per?o. 7c 
rate bottom of said combustion-chamber and 
between the perforations in said bottom, and 
the smoke exit or opening in the bottom of 
the inclosing-shell, substantially as described. 
an inclosing-shell, A, having a Smoke-exit at its 
bottom, air-opening D, and top B, having open 
ings to receive cooking utensils, with a cen 
trally-arranged combustion chamber, E, situ 
ate within said inclosing-shell and provided 8 
with sides, ends, and a perforate bottom, door 
F, communicating with said combustion-cham 
ber, and an inclined imperforate partition be 
low and connected at one edge to said combus 
tion-chamber E, and extending thence beneath 85 
the air-openings therein to and connected to 
the bottom of the shell A above the smoke 
exit, at or near the middle thereof, substan 
tially as described. 
an inclosing-shell having a smoke-exit about 
the center of the bottom thereof and a centrally 
arranged combustion-chamber having a per 
forated bottom, the walls of the inclosing-shell 
and combustion-chamber arranged in parallel 95 
lines, with an imperforate partition extending 
forward beneath the perforated bottom divid 
ing the space thereunder into an air-chamber 
and Smoke-fue. 
5. In a portablestove, the combination, with 
the walls or casing of the stove having an exit 
opening in the bottom, substantially below the 
grate, and a draft opening at one end of the 
grate, of an inclined plate extending forward 
beneath the grate and connected to the bottom 
of the stove between the draftand exit openings. 
In testimony whereof I hereto affix my sig. 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
4. In a portable furnace, the combination of 9o 
WILLIAM H. H. KNIGHT. 
ICO 
ICS 
Witnesses: 
JOS. FORREST, 
WILLIAM H. GIVEN. 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355796.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. STEWAR.T. 
POT COWER. 
No. 355,796. 
Patented Jan, ll l887. 
227-7- 
 
 
37 
 
 
8-v-ue---bot 
Jennie M.Szezwarz. 
S$g ea elitovie4. 41%us 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JENNIE. M. STEWART, OF CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE HALF 
TO HENRY F. THEBAULT, OF COOK COUNTY, ILLINOIS. 
PO - COVER. 
$35ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 355,796, dated January ill, l887. 
Application filed August 26, 1886. 
Serial No. 211,930. (No model.) 
IO 
To all Lulon, it notif CO72cern. 
Beit known that I, JENNIE. M. STEWART, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Cedar Rapids, in the county of Linn 
and State of Iowa, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Pot-Covers, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My improvements have relation to pot-cov 
ers of that kind wherein a controllable vent is 
provided for the escape of the liquid; and the 
object is to improve existing devices of the 
kind by providing the vent with a slide hav 
ing a hand-shield to screen the hand while the 
hot contents of the pot are being drained. 
I have fully illustrated my invention in the 
accompanying drawings, wherein Figure l is 
a plan view of a pot-cover having the im 
proved slide and hand shield attached; and 
Fig. 2 is a central sectional view on the line 
acac of Fig. 1. 
Reference being had to the drawings, the 
letter A. designates the pot-cover constructed, 
as usual, with the depending pot-flange 1 to 
hold it in the pot. The lid or cover may be 
of any kind of sheet metal adapted to the pur 
pose. On one side of the lid are punched a 
series of vent-holes, 2, which are preferably 
arranged in rectangular disposition with the 
outer row near the edge flange of the cover, 
and along the sides of the area covered by these 
vents are secured the flanges 3, under which 
the slide is held. These side flanges are of 
about the same length as the body of the slide, 
or a little longer, in order that when drawn 
back, and the handle meets against the cover 
handle the slide will not be entirely with 
drawn from its seat under the flanges. The 
handle 4 of the cover is set to one side of the 
center of the lid, with its apex or center on a 
4o line with the horizontal center of the slide, to 
give convenience and room for manipulating 
the slide. 
5 
3 
5 
2 
The letter B designates the slide and shield. 
This consists of a sheet-metal plate having that 
part 5 covering the vents formed to set under 
the flanges 3, and its end to reach well to the 
rim-flange of the cover and the shouldered 
part, as at 6, the shoulder serving as stops to 
prevent the slide from moving outward far 
ther than required, and then having its upper 
part struck up, forming the hand-shield 7, to 
which is attached a handle, 8. This hand 
shield is made large enough in area to serve 
as a guard or screen to deflect the rising steam 
and keep it from striking the fingers or hand. 
The handle 8 serves as a hold to the fingers in 
pulling the slide back to open the holes and 
in pushing it forward to cover them. 
I am aware that a pot-cover has been made 
having holes and a semicircular disk to slide 
horizontally over then, and that hinged cov 
ers have been used to set over similar vents. 
My improvement consists in forming a slide 
with a hand-shield and a handle attached to 
the shield. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The improved pot-cover herein described, 
comprising the cover A, provided with a se 
ries of vents or holes, and parallel side flanges 
secured along the sides of the area covered by 
said vents, the handle 4, and the shouldered 
slide B, formed with a hand-shield, 7, struck 
up from the body and provided with a handle, 
8, substantially as described. 
In witness whereof...I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two attesting wit 
SSeS 
al 
JENNIE. M. STEWAR.T. 
Attest: 
T. N. WHITTAM, 
HENRY F. THEBAULT. 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
 
" . 
. 
is 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355896.txt	(No Model.) 
S, S, STEWART, 
 - = 
No, 355896 
IBAN 0, 
Patemted Jam, Ill, 1887, 
WTNESSES: 
?. 34%, 
 
N, PETERS, Pholic-Lithographer, Wathington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES IPATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUI SWAInisTEWART, OF IPHIAIDIIPHIA, IPINNSVIVANIA 
BANJC). 
SPECIFICATIONI formin part of Iletters Patent No.355896, dated January 11, 1887. 
A10pligation filed August 26, 1886. Serial No. 311,904. (No m0(tel.) 
IC) 
10 (1// 170071, iA 71/7/ (2072ce772. 
iBeit known that I, SAMIUEI, SWAIMISTEW? 
ART, a Citizen of the United States, residing 
in the City and County of IPhiladelphia, State 
of PenIDSylvania, haveinventeda newand tlse 
ful Improvement in IBanjos, which improve 
mentis fullyset forthintille followingspecifica 
tioy and accompanying dawings i wicl 
Figure1 represents a view of the back of a | 
banjo embodying Iny invention. 
ITig. 2 Irel)- 
1esents a partial Side elevation and IDartial Ver- | 
tiCal Section thereOf 
Similat letters of reference indicate Corre 
spolding Iparts in the two figules. 
My invention Consists of a banjo laving 
means for bricing the leck thereof and a(l- 
justing the II)itch of the Same. 
IReferrilig to the CiraWings, A represents a 
l)aujo, Wilich, in general Irespects, is of Well 
lknoWIn C0mStruction. 
| 
IBrepresents a,burot brace, whichis formed 
of 1metal or 0tiller Suitable Imaterial an(l rig 
idly Secured atione end to the back of the heel 
of the ineck Cof tlle banjo, and adjustably Con 
5 mected at the other end witithe irin II) of the 
banjo opposite to the neck, the Conluection of 
the bar With tlle Irim l0eing accomplished hy 
meams of a SCtew, IB, wilith is freely passed 
through the Irin, or swiveled theretio, and fit 
ted in a threaded opeling in theadjacenten(l 
0f the ba1. 
It Will be Seen that l)y turning tle SCrew II 
the bar is CaulSed toim10alt In01e or leSS Strain 
On the leel end Of the leek, S0 that the pitCla 
of the leck 1may l)e Changed or adjusted tela) 
tively to the extent thatis desite(l to Set out 
thestitings, the fretorfinger-boar(J, orthe ineck 
itself, the latter turning on tho rilin as a fill 
- 
3C) 
35 
-- 
-- 
WitimeSSeS: 
JOEIN A. WIEDERSHIEIMI, 
A. IP. GIRANT. 
- 
Cruin, the screw IF, Which passes throtligh the 
Irim and Illeck, being elliployed inainly for pre 
Venting shifting of the ineck on the Irim. Iur 
thermore, the baracts as a brace, Whereby the 
ineck is firmily attached to the rimand the in 
strument vastly stifened and strengthemed, 
1000ucilig superior restultsintle performance 
thele011. 
IHavingthus described myinvention, What II 
claimas inew, and desire to secture by ILetters 
IPatent, is- 
1. Albanjo laving a imetallic brace Irigidly 
secured to the ineck of the instrument and ad 
justably Coninected with the Irim by a Screw 
Swiveled in Said itin, al substaintially as de 
SClibetl. 
2. A banjollaving a 1metallic l)rade Secured 
to the leck of the instrument, on the back of 
the heel there0f, aind Coninected With the Itill 
by a Screw Swiveled in said rim, al substan 
tially as and fol the I0IIrpose Setforth. 
3. In a baijo, the ineck A, in C0mlbination 
with metallic brace IB, rigidlysecured thereto 
outside of therim, the im ID), and screw IB, the 
latter lbeing swiveled in the Irim and working 
in the end ofsaid brace IB, all substantiallyas 
4. A banjohawingits neck CC0mmected With 
the Irilin ID by the Screw IE, Which Ipermits Said 
1neck tottlirn On the 1imas a filicrum, and the 
brace IB, which is adjustably Conuected with 
Said Itim and Secul red to the back of the heel 
0f Said leck, Sul)stantially as desCribed. 
deSCitil)ed. 
- 
S. S. STEWAIRT. 
45 
55 
65 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US355996.txt	(No Model.) 
J. L., JOY CE, 
EGG CARRIER, 
No. 355,996, 
Patented Jan, ll, 1887. 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. c. 
 
- 
i. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH L. JOYCE, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
EGG-CAR RER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 355,996, dated January ill, 1887. 
Application filed June 1, 1886. Serial No. 203,743. (No model.) 
IC 
55 
To all whon, it may concern. 
cross each other at the point where the springs 
Beit known that I, JosFPHL. Joy CE, of New 
or holders are to be set. 
Haven, in the county of New Haven and State 
Care the springs, which are formed, asin my 
of Connecticut, have invented a new Improve 
previous patent, from wire, bent at their lower 
ment in Egg-Carriers; and I do hereby declare 
end to form a shank, D, of a length greater 
the following, when taken in connection with 
than the thickness of the two strips, and so as 
accompanying drawings, and the letters of ref. 
to form a shoulder, E, to take a bearing upon 
erence marked thereon, to be a full, clear, 
the upper surface of the strips. The springs 
and exact description of the same, and which 
from the shoulder are bent outward, upward, 
said drawings constitute part of this specifica 
and curved inward to form clasps, as shown 
tion, and represent, in 
in my previous patent. 
Figure 1, a perspective view of the plate, 
The shanks D of the springs are set through 
showing three sets of springs set therein; Fig. 
the two thicknesses or strips and bent down 
2, an under side view of a portion of the same; 
upon the reverse side, as seen in Figs. 2 and 3. 
Fig. 3, a section cutting through the strips at 
The springs being set through the strips at the 
their crossing, and showing the springs in 
crossing firmly secure them together, and so 
Serted; Fig. 4, a single spring detached; Fig. 
combine the strips as to form a complete plate 
5, a modification in the construction of the 
or base for the holders, and because of the 
plate. 
grain of the wood of the transverse strips 
This invention relates to an improvementin 
crossing the grain of the longitudinal strips 
the egg-carrier for which Letters Patent of the 
the plate is made very strong, and yet but a 
United States, No. 314,942, were granted to me, 
fractional part of the weight necessary when 
dated March 31, 1885. In that patent the in 
the plate is made from a single thickness of 75 
vention consisted in a plate having several sets 
wood. 
of wire springs thereon, each set composed of 
The size of the plate, and consequently the 
Several springs, and each spring a single wire, 
number of strips, will depend upon the size 
One end of each of said springs inserted through 
of the package in which the carrier is to be 
the plate and bent down upon the reverse side, 
placed. As represented in Fig. 1, the plate 
the projecting portion of the said single spring 
is designed for one dozen holders. 
bent outward on the upper surface of the plate 
Instead of making both thicknesses in the 
and curved upward and inward, so as to form 
form of strips, one thickness-say A-may be 
clasps to receive and embrace the egg. The 
made from a single piece, as indicated in Fig. 
plate was made from a single thickness of 
5, the grain running longitudinally, and upon 
wood or other suitable material, and in order 
this transverse strips may be placed, crossing 
to attain sufficient strength a very considera 
the grain of the plate A. The springs being in 
ble thickness of wood was necessary, which 
troduced through the two thicknesses bind 
made the packages heavy. 
them together, as in the first illustration, and 
The object of my invention is to increase the 
the same increase of strength is attained with 
strength of the plate, and at the same time re 
but a slight addition of weight, as the strips 
duce its weight; and it consists in strips of 
may be very thin. 
Wood laid transversely across other strips or 
What I claim as an improvement upon th 
plate, as the case may be, so that the grain of 
invention described in Letters Patent No. 
the wood of the transverse strips will cross the 
314,942 is 
grain of the longitudinal strips or plate, and 
1. An egg-carrier consisting of a plate com 
the springs set through the transverse strip 
posed of two thicknesses of material, the one 
and strip or plate beneath serve to secure the 
thickness composed of strips transversely cross 
parts together, as more fully hereinafter de 
ing the other thickness, combined with sev 
scribed. 
eral sets of spring-holders, each set composed 
Preferably I employ longitudinal strips A, 
of several springs, each spring being a single 
and combine with these longitudinal strips 
wire, one end of each of said springs inserted 
transverse strips B. These strips may be made 
through the two thicknesses and bent down 
from very thin wood. The strips are made to upon the reverse side, and the projecting por. 
90 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
  
 
... 
" 
"All 
2 
tion of the said single spring bent outward on strips at their crossing, bent down upon the to 
the upper surface of the plate and curved up- reverse side, and the projecting portion of the 
ward and inward, substantially as described. 
said springs bent outward on the upper surface 
2. An egg-carrier consisting of a series of of the plate and curved upward and inward, 
5 longitudinal strips, with a series of strips trans- substantially as described. 
355,996 
versely crossing the longitudinal strips, corn- 
bined with sets of wire springs, each set com- 
posed of several springs, the springs of each 
set having one end inserted through the said 
Witnesses: 
JoHN E. EARLE, 
ERED C. EARLE. 
JOS. L. JOYCE. 
s 
y 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356096.txt	(No Model.) 
N. S. & E. R. BOW DISH. 
COMPRESSED SEAM FOR BOATS, 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NELSON s. BOWIDISH AND EDVARD R. BOWDISH, OF SKANEATELEs, N. Y. 
COMPRESSED SEAM FOR BOATS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 356,096, dated January 18, 1887. 
Application filed August 21, 1886. Serial No. 21,535. (No model.) 
5 
45 
IO 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, NELSON. S. BOW DISH 
and EDWARD R. Bow DISH, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Skaneateles, in the 
county of Onondaga, State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Compressed Seams for Boats, &c., of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to boats, and espe 
cially to the construction of the joints or seams 
forming the sides or shell thereof, the object 
of the invention being to produce a seam or 
15 joint which shall not require calking, but 
which by the action of moisture will form a 
water-tight joint. 
Other objects of the invention, together with 
certain advantages secured thereby, will be 
hereinafter set forth, and the novel features 
will be particularly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
cross section of a portion of a boat sufficient 
in extent to illustrate our invention. Fig. 2 
is a longitudinal vertical section of a plank 
embodying one feature of our invention, ver 
tical sections on lines q and y being shown at 
each end of the figure. Fig. 3 is a filling-strip 
shown in side elevation and in cross sections 
3o on lines a b at each end of the figure, said strip 
also embodying a feature of our invention. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical transverse section of two 
planks jointed in accordance with our inven 
tion. Figs. 5 to 9, inclusive, are modified 
35 forms of joints, each embodying our inven 
tion. 
Like letters refer to like parts in all the 
figures. 
A represents a knee, B the keel, and C the 
gunwale, of a boat, all of which are of any de 
sired usual construction. 
D represents the planking forming the sides 
of the boat. Each of the planks D is grooved 
at opposite edges, as shown at D', by any suit 
able tool, and the material at the bottom of 
the groove is by any suitable tool or machin 
ery compressed, as shown at D', so that in 
reality the groove D'' is deepened by the com 
pression or condensation of the fiber of the 
El represents a filling-strip, which is first 
50 material. 
Now, it will be seen that when two planks 6o 
made wider than necessary to fill the com 
pressed or deepened grooves of two adjacent 
planks. The wide filling-strip is then com 
pressed at opposite edges, as shown at E, 55 
whereby it is made of a width substantially 
equal to the distance from the bottom of one 
compressed groove to that of another in two 
adjacent planks. 
are placed edge to edge, with a filling-strip ar 
ranged in the grooves thereof, any moisture 
which gains access to the grooves, to the filling 
strips therein, or to the compressed fibers of 
either, acts to expand the material, so as to 65 
cause the same to swell, and thus produce an 
absolutely water-tight joint. 
Various forms of joints may be employed and 
still be within the scope of our invention. For 
example, taking the plainest form of joint, as 7o 
illustrated in Fig. 9, in which the groove D'and 
the strip E are rectangular each-that is to say, 
the groove and the strip are compressed, the 
former so as to deepen it, and the latter edge 
wise, so that the fiber is condensed, where- 75 
by the same operation takes place when 
the material becomes wet or moistened, as 
hereinbefore described. Now, in depressing 
the groove its outline at the bottom may, as 
shown, be either rectangular, concave, con 
vex, or beaded, and the strip may be at its 
opposite edges of similar form, as shown, and 
even other forms than those illustrated may 
be adopted, in accordance with the material 
employed or the judgment of the builder, the 
gist of our invention being in the compression 
of the material in the plank or strip, or both, 
so that when moistenedit shall expand to pro 
duce a water-tight joint or seam. It is appar 
ent that this form of joint may be applied to 
useful purposes in other vessels which are re 
quired to be water-tight. 
If preferred, a softer material may be used 
for the filling-strips than that of which the 
planking is made, whereby a quicker action 
or expansion of the strip will occur than of 
the planking itself, which, for the purpose of 
maintaining the symmetry of boats, renders the 
use of material not easily affected by water 
preferable. 
Planking having joints constructed in ac 
cordance with our invention may be secured 
90 
95 
IOC) 
 
" 
" 
" . 
. 
. 
. 
356,096 
2. In a boat, grooved planking having the 
fiber thereof compressed along the groove, in 
combination with a filling-strip having the 
fiber at the edges thereof compressed, substan 
tially as specified. 
3. In a boat, the combination of planks 
grooved along their edges, and having the bot 
tom of the grooves compressed in concave 
form, with a filling-strip compressed edgewise 
and having a V-shaped edge adapted to enter 
the concavity in the bottom of the groove of 3o 
the planks, substantially as specified. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
25 
NELSON. S. BOW DISH. 
EDWARD R. BOW DISH. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD DENT, 
EUGENE C. ALLEN. 
IO 
in position by any suitable means. In this 
instance we have illustrated nails F, one or 
two of which are passed through the planks 
and knee A and then clinched. 
Planking having a filling-strip of any mate 
rial not affected by moisture can be com 
pressed in Such manner as to render the seam 
tight without the action of moisture, and in 
stead of compressing the planking at the bot 
tom of the groove it may be compressed along 
the top of the walls thereof, whereby the com 
pressed fiber will operate as hereinbefore de 
scribed. 
Having described our invention and its op 
eration, what we claim is 
1. In a boat, planking having compressed 
grooves, in combination with a compressed 
filling-strip arranged therein, substantially as 
specified. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356196.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 356,196, 
 
P. ELEY. 
SOLDERING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
rty- 
Patented Jan. 18, 1887. 
2. 
s R 
S S 
R y 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, b. c. 
(No Model.) 
P, ELEY. 
SOLDERING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 356,196. 
Patented Jan. 18, 1887. 
 
A2272.6SS CS: 
Z222/2, 22.2 1. 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP ELEY, OF BAYONNE, NEW JERSEY. 
SOLDERING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 356,196, dated January 18, 1887. 
Application filed November 18, 1886. Serial No. 219,255. (No model.) 
r 
O 
20 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILIP ELEY, of Ba 
yonne, Hudson county, in the State of New 
Jersey, have invented a certain new and use. 
5 ful Improvement in Soldering-Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The invention may be applied to the solder 
ing of rectangular cases of various sizes and 
adapted for various purposes. I will describe 
it as applied to the manufacture of ordinary 
five-gallon cans for storing and transporting 
petroleum. 
It will be understood that the metal has been 
previously bent around to form the sides, and 
that the ends have been previously manufac 
tured, one end having the proper nozzle to 
serve as the upper end, and that the ends 
have been inserted in their proper places and 
slightly confined by the ordinary means. 
I employ a horizontal wheel of from ten to 
fifteen feet radius, with means for turning it 
slowly and steadily. It carries a series of 
holders for the cans, arranged equidistant or 
otherwise around the periphery. An attend 
ant introduces the cans at one point, and an 
other attendant changes them end for end at 
another point. The other movements are au 
tomatic. 
An open-top VeSSel is mounted under each 
can-carrier. This carries solder kept in a 
melted condition by a sufficient gas-flame. The 
can is held in an inclined position, and is kept 
the proper time with one of the joints at the 
lower end immersed slightly in the solder. 
35. After a sufficient period to properly heat the 
thin sheet metal and effect the soldering, the 
can is automatically lifted out of the solder, 
partially turned so as to present another joint, 
and then again lowered. This proceeds until 
the four joints at the bottom are soldered. 
Then the can is by hand or by machinery lifted 
entirely out of its support and turned and again 
placed in the support in position for soldier 
ing the other end. It is again similarly treated 
until all the joints of the opposite end are sol 
dered. The can is then by a sufficiently long 
movement lifted out of the holder. The fin 
ished cans may be stored in piles, or may, as 
fast as delivered, be carried through a suitable 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 
this specification, and represent what I con 
So labeling-machine. (Not represented.) 
45 
- 
sider the best means of carrying out the in 
wention. 
- 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the stationary 55 
parts, with a sufficient portion of the revolving 
horizontal wheel to show its operation. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section on the line acacih Fig.1. 
Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are details on a larger scale. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section in the plane of the 6o 
center of one of the can holding and turning 
devices. The heavy lines show the can in po. 
sition for soldering. Fig. 4 is a corresponding. 
section, partly in elevation, showing the can 
holder and its contents elevated in the act of 65 
being turned. Fig. 5 is an inclined or face 
view seen in the direction indicated by the 
arrows in Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is a vertical section 
corresponding with Fig. 2, but showing a modi 
fication. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures where they 
OCC. 
A is a fixed platform, of cast-iron or other 
suitable material. In the center is a bearing 75 
for a central upright shaft, B, on which is cen 
tered the large horizontal wheel B, carrying a 
series of rings, B, supported on the wheel B 
by the posts B. 
CC are metallic soldering-pots mounted on 
the wheel B, near the periphery, each having 
Bunsen burners c, or other burners, supplied 
with gas through a pipe, c, leading from a cen 
tral passage in the upright shaft B, which is 
connected with the street-main. (Not repre- 85 
sented.) The solder-pots C are kept nearly 
filled with melted Solder. 
The rings B stand in the inclined positions 
represented. In each traverses a series of 
wheels, d, which support a can-holder, D, go 
which loosely incloses a can, M, with liberty 
for it to move endwise, as will presently ap 
pear. The interior of the ring B' is circular, 
except that there is a notch, b, in its lower 
side adapted to receive the several wheels das 95 
they are presented successively, to aid in hold 
ing the can-holder in the correct position to 
dip the joints in the solder without immersing 
any part very deeply. 
ID, in the positions represented. The plat 
form Asupports a series of brackets, A, which 
support each a bar, E, in the inclined position 
represented. Each is capable of sliding end. 
Each can-holder is provided with four pins, Ioo 
 
5 a quarter-revolution at each passage. 
2 
wise, subject to the force of a spring, F. These the correct position. The wheel B is driven 
are arranged in such positions that they are 
by a worm, I', carried on a nearly-horizontal 
struck by the pins D', to effect the turning of 
shaft, I, which is supported in fixed bearings, 55 
the can-holders, and, consequently, of the cans, 
and receives motion from the belt I through 
a pulley, I. 
A series of brackets, B, are mounted on the 
The springs F under the bars E perform an 
wheel B in the positions represented. Each 
important function. They allow the corner of 
supports a bar, G, which is capable of sliding 
the can-holder ID to be depressed in commenc- 6o 
end wise. Its upper end carries a wheel, H, 
ing each quarter-revolution, and follow it up 
of proper form to support the lower end of the 
as it rises in completing such motion. Its 
can. When the can is in an inverted position, 
elastic force acting against the corner of the 
the nozzle or mouth, as also any handle with 
can-holder aids to insure the completion of the 
which its top may be provided, is accommo 
quarter-revolution. . 
dated in a cavity in the interior of the wheel. 
Modifications may be made in the forms and 
I5 The lower end of the bar G is forked and car 
proportions. I can employ a greater or less 
ries an anti-friction wheel, G'. This wheel 
number of the solder-pots with their heating 
traverses on a circular rail, A, which per 
means and of the can-carriers and their sup 
forms an important function. Its upper edge 
ports B'. I can use a larger or smaller wheel, 7o 
is not level, but, on the contrary, is formed 
B, correspondingly modifying the other por 
with inclined elevations or cams A", arranged 
tions. I can, when working in a small Way, 
as shown, which lift the wheel G and its 
dispense with the mechanism for ejecting, and 
connections, and consequently lift the can 
can remove the finished cans by hand. I can 
during the period while it is being turned. 
turn the wheel B by other means. 
A longer cam, A', is introduced at one place, 
In the modification shown in Fig. 6, instead 
the effect of which is to hold the can M in the 
of carrying the small anti-friction wheels B 
elevated position for a considerable period. 
on the wheel B and allowing them to run on 
During the passage of each can-holder past 
a smooth surface on the platform A, I mount 
this long cam A', the attendant lifts out the 
the corresponding anti-friction wheels in fixed 
can, turns it end for end, and replaces it. After 
bearings in A and allow them to act against 
the can has traversed and been turned the 
a smooth surface on the under side of B. I 
proper number of times before reaching the 
can with either construction mount the cam 
long cam A', then has had its ends reversed in 
surface A' farther inward and at a lower level, 
passing this long cam, and has again dipped 
correspondingly elongating the rod G. 
three times, turning between each dip and the 
Various other modifications may be made 
35 next, so as to complete the soldering of all its 
by any good mechanic without departing from 
joints, the wheel Gis acted on by a cam, which 
the principle or sacrificing the advantages of 
is of much greater height than the others. 
the invention. 
This lifts the bar G and wheel H, and with 
them the can M, to such an an extent and so 
briskly as to lift the can Mentirely from the 
can-holder, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3. 
It is then taken care of by other means, and 
on the sinking of the wheel H again to its 
original position it is ready to receive a fresh 
can and commence a second round of opera 
tions. 
The wheel B is provided with a number of 
bearing-wheels, B, which traverse on the 
plane upper surface of the supporting-plat 
form A, or on rails which may be specially 
provided for them. They serve to maintain 
the wheel B and the parts carried thereon in 
I claim as my invention 
The solder-pots C, and their heating means 
c c', carried on the wheel B, in combination 
therewith, and with the can-holders D, and 
means for raising, turning, and lowering the 
cans, arranged for joint operation, Substan 
tially as and for the purposes herein specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand, at New York city, New York, this 
21st day of October, 1886, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
CHARLES R. SEARLE, 
M. F. BOYLE. 
85 
90 
95 
3O 
45 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP ELEY. 
356,196 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356296.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OTTO STEUER, OF DRESDEN, SAXONY, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO JACOB 
RUTSEN PALEN, 
REPRODUCING 
OF SAMIE PLACE. 
WRITINGS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 356,296, dated January l8, 1887. 
Application filed February 28, 1886. Serial No. 192,908. (No specimens.) Patented in Germany October 14, 1884, No. 31,821, 
and in England November 8, 1884, No. 14,756. 
- 
cation. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OTTO STEUER, of the 
city of Dresden, in the Kingdom of Saxony and 
German Empire, have invented certain new 
and useful improvements in the process of re 
producing wood-cuts, type-writings, and other 
printed matter direct from the original, (for 
which a patent was granted to me in Germany 
under No.31,821, bearing date the 14th of Octo 
ber, 1884, and in England under No. 4,756, 
bearing date the 8th of November, 1884,) of 
which I declare the following to be a specifi 
My invention relates to an improved pro 
cess for producing manifold copies of printed 
matter, type-writings, wood-cuts, and other 
matter. 
In order to effect the manifold reproduction 
of Such said printed matter, engravings, wood 
cuts, and other matter, the object to be repro 
duced is first well saturated with a protective 
solution composed of glycerine, tannic acid, 
and water, then well rinsed with water, and 
the parts to be reproduced treated with auto 
graphic ink by means of a suitable inking 
roller or in other appropriate manner. 
In consequence of the previous treament of 
the original With the protective preparation, 
ink will only adhere to those parts covered by 
printers ink, whereas those parts left free are 
protected by the said preparation from taking 
up any quantity of ink. The positive so pro 
duced or written or drawn in autographic 
ink is now laid on a brightly-polished metal 
lic plate or lithographic stone and repeatedly 
passed through the rollers of my improved 
press, as described in the specification relat 
ing thereto, so as to transfer the autographic 
ink of the positive to the said brightly-pol 
ished metallic plate or lithographic stone, thus 
producing a negative copy on the said plate or 
stOne. After the said metallic plate or litho 
graphic Stone has been provided, as afore 
mentioned, with the negative of the original 
Writing, drawing, or printed matter in auto 
graphic ink, the said brightly-polished metal 
lic plate or lithographic stone is treated with 
the aforenamed protective mixture of glycer 
line, tannic acid, and water, and is then provided 
with ink by means of a suitable inking-roller 5o 
or in other appropriate manner. I prefer to 
ink the said plate or lithographic stone by 
passing the same repeatedly between the up 
per or inking roller and the middle roller of 
my improved press, which is the Subject of a 55 
separate application filed October 2, 1885, bear 
ing serial number 178,848. 
The paper or other matter to which the ink 
adhering to the negative on the brightly-pol 
ished metallic plate or lithographic stone is to 6o 
be transferred is now placed over the said neg 
ative and passed between the pressure-rollers 
of a suitable press, whereby the exact and true 
copy of the original will be found reproduced 
on the aforesaid paper or other matter. After 65 
the paper has been removed, the brightly-pol 
ished metallic plate or lithographic stone is 
again inked, paper applied to the surface of 
the same, and a second copy produced in like 
manner as aforesaid, and so on, So that many 7o 
hundreds of reproductions or copies can be pro 
duced which are in all respects perfect fac 
similes of the original engraving or printed, 
drawn, or written matter. 
certained the nature of my invention and in 
what manner the same is to be performed, what 
I claim is 
The process of reproducing printed matter, 
type-writings, wood cuts, and other printed 8O 
matter direct from the original by Saturating 
such said matter with a protective mixture of 
glycerine, tannic acid, and water, rinsing the 
same in water, treating the same with an au 
tographic ink, and transferring the same to 85 
the negative plate, Substantially as and for the 
purpose described in the foregoing specifica 
tion. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
WitneSSeS. 
Having now particularly described and as- 75 
OTTO STEUER. 
Witnesses: 
OTTO WoLFF, 
PAUL DRUCIKMLLER. 
O 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356396.txt	(No Model.) 
C. G. OTIS. 
EXPOSIWE PROJECTIE, 
No. 356,396. 
Patented Jan. 18, 1887. 
  
 
  
 
ESS - 
 
: 
 
b 
2 
2 %% 22.22% 
2 
22%az2 2 
22%22 
22. 2.22%2,222,22222 
SN 
w 
 
  
 
 
WITWESSES: 
(e SAA-ca- 
24-44- 
 
INVENTOR 
worve & Ovvas 
BY' 
-4 
A 4 g sf 
4TTOIR.WEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES G. OTIS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
EXPOSIVE PROJECT LE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 356,396, dated January 18, 1887. 
Application filed September 10, 1886. Serial No. 23,233. (No model.) 
55 
75 
5. 
O 
(5 
2) 
i 
To all, whon, it nay conce71. 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs G. OTIs, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Brooklyn, 
in the county of Kings and State of New York, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Explosive Projectiles, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
novel explosive projectile which when fired 
Will not explode prematurely from the shock 
imparted to it by the explosion of the charge 
in the gun or cannon from which said projec 
tile is fired. 
To such end my invention consists in the fea 
tures and construction of devices hereinafter 
described and claimed, reference being made 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of my pro 
jectile. 
Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the same. 
In the drawings, the letter A. designates the 
Outer shell or body of my projectile, in which 
is formed a chamber, B, filled with the explo 
SWC. 
C is a tubular cap, closed at one end by a 
head, (t, which fits closely over the tail end of 
the projectile. Before the projectile is in 
Serted into the gun this cap is passed over the 
tail end of the projectile, as shown in Fig. 1, 
and then the projectile, together with the cap, 
is So placed in the gun that the head a of the 
cap C rests against the charge. 
AS the charge in the gun or cannon explodes 
the cap C will be driven forward over the body 
of the projectile, thereby compressing the air 
between the head a and the tail end of the 
Salme, forming an elastic cushion behind the 
latter and imparting to it gradually and with 
out shock the force developed by the explosion 
of the charge in the gun. By this method a 
projectile charged in the ordinary way with a 
high explosive may be fired from a gun or 
cannon without danger of premature explosion 
from shock. 
If the projectile is to be fired from a rifled 
cannon, the cap C is provided at its rear end 
with a flange, b, which will be expanded and 
driven into the rifle-grooves by the explosion 
of the charge behind the same, while the com 
pressed air in the cap will impart a similar 
tendency to a similar flange, c, with which pro 
jectiles for rifled cannon are usually provided, 
so that both the cap and the projectile will be 
rotated together as they are fired from the gun, 
while at the same time the expanding flange 
on the projectile will form an air-tight joint 
between it and the cap C. 
As the projectile is caused to revolve on its 
own axis when it is fired from a rifled cannon, 
it will be found necessary that the explosive 
charge contained in it be firmly secured in the 
chamber B, so as to revolve with it and pre 
vent the generation of heat by friction between 
the charge and the body of the projectile. 
This I accomplish by dividing up the chamber 
B by means of partitions or projections d or 
when the explosive is contained in a canister, 
D, as shown in the drawings, I Secure the can 
ister firmly in the chamber B and divide up 
its interior by partitions or projections, as 
above indicated. - 
To insure a proper position for the project- . 
ile in the cannon, a narrow ring, e, is secured 
around its forward end, thereby insuring the 
coincidence of the axes of the projectile and 
the bore of the cannon. 
The head ( of the cap C is made convex on 
its outer face, as shown in Fig. 1, so that the 
force of the exploding charge in the cannon 
will have a tendency to expand the rear end 
of the cap C, press its Walls closely against the 
sides of the bore, and assist it in forming an 
air and gas tight joint between the rear end of 
the cap and the bore of the cannon. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Tetters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the shell A, having 
at its rear extremity the expansible flange c, 
and containing the explosive charge, of the 
cap C, arranged on the rear end of the shell 
and provided with the attached rear closing 
head, (t, convexed on its outer face, so that the 
force of the exploding charge in the cannon 
will expand the rear end of the cap, Substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
2. The combination, with the shell A, con 
taining the explosive charge, and having at its 
rear extremity the expansible flange c, of the 
cap C, arranged on the shell and having at its 
rear end the expansible flange b, and attached 
convex closing-head a, which is acted on by 
95 
IO3 
45 
SO 
 
2 
356,396 
the exploding-charge in the cannon to expand flangeb, and arranged on the rear of the shell, Io 
the rear end of the cap, substantially as and substantially as and for the purposes described. 
for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
3. An explosive projectile consisting of a my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
shell, A, containing the explosive charge, and scribing witnesses. 
provided on its forward end with the ring e, 
and at its rear extremity with the expansible 
flange c, and the cap C, having the convex 
rear closing-head, a, carrying the expansible 
CHARLES G. OTIS. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUFF, 
OTTO HUFELAND. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356496.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 356,496, 
 
N. P. OTIS. 
ELECTRICAL ELEWATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Jan. 25, 1887. 
N 
l, ?az, Saozy 
Zaz va ZZZZ7ZZ 
N. PEERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
re 
(No Model.) 
 
| Q 
II 
Z. 
or "G) 
oz 
N. P. OTIS, 
ELECTRICAL ELEVATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jam, 25, 1887. 
a 2 
727.2 
(3) O-g-H 
sess/ 
N 
3 
O 
H-e 
Azza 52. 
537 - 27% 
- B I. 
filly (i. 
ZzZvazzzz7zz 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NORTON P. OTIS, OF YONKERS, NEW YORK. 
ELECTRE CA. E. LEWATO R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 356,496, dated January 25, 1887. 
Application filed June 14, 1886. Serial No. 205,115. (No model.) 
To all, whom it navy concern. 
Be it known that I, Norton P. Otis, a citizen 
of the United States, and a resident of Yonkers, 
Westchester county, New York, have invented 
Certain new and useful Improvements in Elec 
trical Elevators, of which the following is a 
specification. 
In that class of hoisting and elevating ap 
paratus in which electromotors have hereto. 
fore been employed the connections and ar 
rangements have generally been such as to 
render it necessary to put the elevating en 
gine or appliances which operate more di. 
rectly upon the cage into sudden connection 
With the motor after the latter is in full opera 
tion, it being necessary to permit the shaft of 
the motor to acquire a certain speed before 
throwing it into connection with the other 
parts of the apparatus which offer any resist 
ance to its movement. The sudden starting 
or connection of the motor and elevating-en 
gine running at or approximating a maximum 
power results in jolts and strains, which are 
most objectionable and detrimental. It has 
also been the practice in such apparatus for 
the engineer or attendant stationed at the 
point where the switch is located to throw the 
current into the motor by hand, either by 
means of the graduating or common switch, 
which results in great inconvenience and loss 
of time. In order to avoid these objections I 
provide means for throwing the operating en 
gine or mechanism, whatever may be its char 
acter, into action upon the elevating mech 
anism gradually and preferably automatically, 
and I also provide means for automatically 
and gradually throwing the current into the 
motor, and I thus throw the resistance of the 
engine at its full operation against the motor 
only after the latter has acquired Or approxi 
mates its maximum power or speed, so that 
the preliminary movements of the motor are 
effected with but little resistance. 
The character of the apparatus used for 
Operating the elevator cage or platform will 
determine to a greater or less extent the char 
acter of the devices employed for varying the 
resistance and for throwing the hoisting mech 
anism gradually into action, and for varying 
the strength of the current. I will therefore, 
for the purpose of fully setting forth my in 
vention, describe it in its different applica 
tions to both hydraulic elevators and eleva 
tors driven directly from electric motors, the 
latter being directly or indirectly the prime 
mover in all cases. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
shows sufficient of a hydraulic elevator, pump, 
and electromotor driving the pump to illus 
trate my invention in connection with this 
class of machines. Figs. 2 and 3 are plan 
views illustrating my invention in connection 
with other forms of machines. Fig. 4 is an 
elevation of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a view illustrat 
ing a modification; Fig. 6, a plan illustrating 
a form of switch to cut out or increase the re 
sistance to the current from the generator. 
In Fig. 1. A represents a hydraulic elevat 
ing-engine, which, as shown, may be similar 
to what is known as the * vertical engine, 
or it may be of any other well-known construc 
tion, so as to operate upon the cage either 
directly or through the medium of flexible 
suspensories (t, so as to raise and lower the 
cage within the well. 
In the construction of engine shown in Fig. 
1, the piston in the cylinderb of the engine is 
moved by the pressure of water from an ele 
wated tank, C, conducted to the cylinderthrough 
a pipe, c, and discharged from the cylinder 
through a pipe, d, into the tank D, a valve 
device, E, regulating the flow of the water 
in a manner too well known to require further 
description. A pump, F, exhausts the Water 
from the tank D through a pipe, 2, and forces 
it through a pipe, f, into the upper tank, C. 
The pump is suitably connected to an electro 
motor, G, so as to be driven thereby. For 
instance, a belt, g, extends round a Small 
pulley upon the shaft of the motor to a larger 
pulley upon the crank-shaft of the pump. 
The motor G is of any suitable construction, 
and receives through conductors h h' the cur 
rent that imparts movement to the arnature 
Shaft. 
A pump of the ordinary construction, made 
as shown in Fig. 1, would start into full Op 
eration immediately upon the starting of the 
motor, and the full power of the pump would 
thus be opposed to the power of the motor, 
either preventing the starting of the motor al 
together in some instances or throwing great 
strains upon the various parts of the machine. 
To prevent such a result, I provide means 
TO 
3O 
45 
75 
9O 
95. 
ICO 
356,496 
2 5 
3. 5 
whereby the power of the pump is applied to 
raising water only as the parts of the pump 
acquire their maximum speed. One means of 
effecting this is through the medium of a chan 
nel, permitting the Water to circulate from 
one side of the piston to the other until the 
motor has acquired the requisite speed, when 
the size of the channel will be obstructed grad 
ually until it ceases to offer a passage for the 
Wate. 
In the construction slown the circulating 
passage is in a pipe, H, connecting the oppo 
site ends of the cylinder i and containing a 
valve at i, connected with the governor J, de 
riving its motion from any moving part of the 
pump or motor, the connections being such 
that when the balls of the governor are down 
the channel in the passage H will be opened; 
but as the speed of the pump and governor in 
creases the circulating-channel will be grad 
ually closed. 
When the motor is first put in operation and 
the engine moves slowly, the passage of water 
back and forth through the circulating-chan 
nel offers but little resistance to the movements 
of the parts of the pump; but as the speed in 
creases the channel is obstructed until it is en 
tirely closed, when the pump will work effect 
ively to lift the water to the upper tank. 
- By the arrangement described I not only ef. 
fectually prevent the strains which result from 
the Sudden starting of the pump in case it is 
thrown into quick connection with an electric 
motor operating at full speed, but I am also 
able to start the motor while it is in connec 
tion with the pump, as the shaft of the motor 
can turn readily and with little resistance un 
til it acquires or approximates its maximum 
Speed and is capable of working effectively. 
The electrical motor is gradually started by 
the use of a variable resistance controlled by 
a switch, L, or any similar device, whereby 
the resistance to the current may be gradually 
reduced, or whereby the strength of the cur 
rent may be gradually increased, by the ad 
justment of the operating handle or lever m, or 
other movable device; and in order to prevent 
the passage of a destructive current to the mo 
tor I place a safety-catch or fusible plug, M', 
in the conductor. 
One form of resistance-switch is shown in 
Fig. 6, in which S8S represent resistance-coils 
having separate terminals 99 in line, and 10 
a cylinder having a series of insulated contact. 
pieces arranged to increase or decrease the re 
sistance in circuit from the battery 11 to the 
conductor 12 through additional coils as the 
cylinder is turned. 
The switch L. may be connected to be oper 
ated by the attendant within the cage, and in 
Some instances it may be moved automatically 
through the medium of appliances operated by 
Variations of the water-level in the upper or 
lower tank, or by variations in the air-press 
5 lure. When air is used as the motor-fluid or in 
connection with water. 
| 
90 
In the drawings the operating device is a 
float, q, arranged within the lower tank, D, 
upon an arm connected to the shaft , carry 
ing a second arm, '', connected through the 7o 
medium of rods and a bell, crank lever, B', 
with the operating-arm of the switch L. When 
the water accumulates in the upper tank and 
sinks in the lower tank, so that there is a suffi 
ciency or surplus of power, the descent of the 75 
float will move the handle of the switch so as 
to cut off the current and stop the motor. 
When, on the contrary, the water decreases in 
the upper tank and increases in the lower tank, 
the float will be lifted and the motor will be 8o 
Set in operation. 
It will be seen that the movement of the 
float gradually stops or starts the motor, and 
that by means of the regulating devices de 
scribed the motor is allowed to acquire its full 85 
speed before it is brought to operate against 
the full resistance of the pump, and that such 
resistance is thrown in so gradually that there 
is no sudden strain or jarring of the parts of 
the machine. 
The governor may be used for gradually 
bringing the pump into operation after the 
motor acquires its full speed, or after it has be 
gun to move with such rapidity as to operate 
effectively by other means than those above 95 
described. For instance, in connection with 
another form of hydraulic machine, the gov 
ernor may be arranged, as shown in Fig. 2, to 
operate a lever, f', connected to a shifting 
bar, R, which, when the balls of the governor too 
are thrown out, transfers the driving-belt Q 
from the loose pulley P to the tight pulley P. 
of the counter-shaft P', from which the driv 
ing-shaft of the pump F is driven. The gov 
ernor J is driven from the motor, and is so Io5 
constructed and adjusted that it will not shift 
the belt until the motor acquires or approxi 
mates its maximum speed, and as the belt is 
gradually transferred to the fast pulley P there 
is sufficient friction and slip to prevent the IIo 
too sudden starting of the pump. 
I have termed the device J a governor,' 
under which term I include any of the various 
appliances which may be employed to regul 
late the position of the valve, shifting-bar, or II.5 
equivalent device according to the speed at 
which the governor is driven, and Itherefore 
do not limit myself to any particular form of 
governor. 
be used for permitting the shaft of the motor 
to acquire a certain degree of speed before 
throwing it into operative or effective connec 
tion with the engine or devices that-operate 
directly or indirectly to move the cage. In 125 
some instances this is secured by interposing 
between the armature and its shaft a spring, 
which upon the sudden revolution of the arma 
ture is wound without imparting immediate 
movement to the shaft. Such an arrangement I.3o 
is shown in Fig. 5, where the springs is con 
nected to the armature W at 3 and to the shaft 
Other means than those described may also I2O 
45 
55 
 
356,496 
 
3 
X at 4, and the armature moves loosely upon 
the shaft, so that it may make a number of 
revolutions and acquire a certain speed before 
it is called upon to pint the shaft into working 
operation, the Spring being gradually com 
pressed and the shaft gradually started in op 
eration, but moving fully with the armature 
only after the spring has been wound to its 
greatest tension. A like device may be inter 
posed at any point between the motor and the 
pump or lifting-engine. 
When the motor is used to operate a belt 
elevator and it is desirable to stop and start 
the motor by hand, as is frequently the case 
where the elevator is not used continuously, 
greater facility and convenience can be secured 
by the use of such an arrangement as is shown 
in Figs. 3 and 4, in which N is a counter-shaft 
having a wide pulley for receiving the shift 
ing belts MM, which give motion to the lift 
ing power. The switch Li is operated by an 
independent hand-rope, R, which lead to the 
car or platform of the elevator, in the same 
manner as the main hand-rope R', which is 
used to start and stop the elevator during the 
movement of the engine, by moving the shift 
ing-bar R, which carries the belts MM, to and 
from the center or fast pulley of the lifting 
power shaft R. 
By interposing a spring, as shown in Fig. 5, 
between the pulley P and its shaft in Fig. 3, 
the elevating-engine may be thrown into op 
eration more gradually than when the pulley 
P is secured fixedly to the shaft. 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
struction and arrangement of parts shown, I 
claim 
1. In an electric elevator apparatus, a cage, 
mechanism for raising and lowering the cage, 
an electromotor for driving such mechanism, 
and automatic power-transferring devices, sub 
stantially as described, whereby the motor is 
thrown automatically into operation upon the 
Said mechanism only as it acquires or approxi 
mates its full power, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with a cage and cage 
elevating engine and with an electromotor for 
operating said engine, of a governor and con 
nections, substantially as set forth, whereby 
the elevating-engine is put gradually into ef. 
fective operation by said governor as the elec 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
tronotor acquires or approximates its maxi 
mum power, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with an elevating-en 
gine and cage operated thereby, of an electro 
Inotor connected with the engine, a governor, 
and connections, substantially as set forth, 
whereby the engine is maintained out of ef. 
fective working condition until the motor has 
attained a predetermined speed, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination, with the electromotor 
and an elevating-engine, of an automatic cir 
cuit-controlling device, whereby the gradual 
Starting of the motor is automatically effected, 
and mechanism whereby the engine is gradu 
ally and automatically put into Working op 
eration as the speed increases, substantially as 
described. 
5. The combination of an elevator-engine, 
a cage, an electromotor and a current-con 
trolling device, and automatic mechanism in 
dependent of the cage and its connections to 
move the current controlling device, substan 
tially as described. 
6. The combination, with the electric motor, 
Variable resistance, resistance - switch, and 
pump and tank, of a float controlled in posi 
tion by the water in the tank and connections 
between the float and the resistance-switch, 
substantially as described. 
7. The combination, in an elevator, of an 
electrical motor, cage, elevating-engine, and 
power-transferring governor whereby the-mo 
tor is thrown into operative effect upon the 
engine after the motor has begun its move 
ments, substantially as described. 
8. The combination, with the pump of an 
elevator-engine and with the motor-engine, 
of a circulating-passage between the ends of 
the pump-cylinder, a valve in said passage, a 
governor driven from the pump or motor, and 
connections between the governor and valve 
whereby the latter is closed as the speed of the 
pump increases, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
NORTON P. OTIS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMEs S. FITCH, 
MARTIN BLAUVELT. 
55 
65 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356597.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. NIT 
CHELL. 
- 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
BUFFER FOR GAS COIPRESSOR, WAVES, 
No. 356,597. 
Patented Jan. 25, 1887, 
E % E. N 
2 
2 
: 5. SSA 3. %32zz 
- 
% 
NS 2 
S3 NSC 
C NNS 
 
 
   
 
 
 
% 
SS 23. 
2.2. 
Ya: 
... les: 
SSSSSSSSSSSr. 
SS S&S 
S2: SiN . 
RNS 
A SNSN 
- 
2 %2 
WITNESSES 
As /N- 
44 Aze-ZZz62 
(24a e a-2-g &{ 
|AVERTOR 
-%2-4ea.--se 
By 
Aliorney 
(No Model.) 
W. L. MITCHEL. 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
BUFFER FOR GAS COMPRESSOR, WALWES. 
No. 356,597. 
Patented Jan, 25, 1887. 
 
WITNESSES 
ef / 2/227%2222 e - 
2 - 7, 
(24- 22-624 
in VENTOR 
1%-e- -6.22-242 ea 
5%-41%- 
By 
Aitorney ease 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
MARCUS L. MITCHELL OF ST. LOUIS, 
MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO THE DE LA 
VERGNE REFRIGERATING MACHINE COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BUFFER FOR GAS COMPRESS OF WAVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 356,597 dated January 25, 1887. 
Application filed October 22, 1885. 
Seria No. 180,675. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
O 
To all willon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MARCUs L. MITCHELL, 
of the city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve. 
ments in Buffers for Gas. Compressor Walves, 
of which the following is such a full, clear, 
concise, and exact description as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which my invention 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
My invention relates more especially to gas 
compressors for refrigerating-machines which 
use a cooling, sealing, and lubricating liquid, 
forming what is known also as a liquid pis 
tion,' and may be adapted to both vertical and 
horizontal compressors used in such machines, 
and also to use in connection with gas-com 
pressors for other than refrigerating purposes. 
In some vertical gas-compressing cylinders 
heretofore constructed the discharge-valve has 
... been made to lift up into a dome or valve 
chamber located above the compressor-cylin 
der, and into which dome or chamber the 
compressed gas is discharged by the lifting of 
this valve during the upward or compression 
gas and 
stroke of the compressor-piston. The 
oil thus discharged into the dome or valve 
chamber of the compressor is conducted there. 
from by a discharge-pipe communicating there 
with, and leading to what is termed an oil 
separating tank. 
The discharge-valve in 
such complessors, which is preferably cup 
shaped, made of metal, and of necessity very 
large, is also very heavy. If the height to 
which this valve may be raised or lifted in the 
dome of the compressor is not limited by some 
mechanical means, the force exerted upon it by 
the compressed gas entering the dome, being 
variable, will at times raise the valve much 
higher than is really necessary to allow a free 
passage of the compressed gas and oil, and 
the weight of the valve would cause it to de 
scend with considerable force, and oftentimes 
before the end of the discharge - period, in 
which case it would strike the valve-seat at a: 
time when such seat was not flooded by or sub 
merged in oil, and thus an injury to either 
the valve or the valve-seat would inevitably 
ensue. In some gas-compressors for refriger 
ating-machines the discharge-valve has been 
25 
35 
made to work in ways or guides, and the list 
of the valve has been limited by projections or 
stops on such guides; and in some instances 
the projections for limiting the upward move 
ment of the valve have been made to extend 
all around the dome or waive-chamber. It 
Was found, however, that when these projec 
tions or stops were located low enough to form 
a sufficiently-small passage for the compressed 
gas and oil as that its flow into the valve-chani 
ber or dome would be retarded to the extent 
requisite to cause it to exert the necessary 
pressure. upon the valve to hold it against 
such projections or stops and keep it from re 
seating during the discharge-period, the up 
per edges of the discharge-valve cup soon be 
come burred by being constantly knocked 
against the stops. In consequence of this 
continual hammering some portions of the 
valve would become larger in diameter, and it 
would eventually refuse to reseat after being 
lifted by the discharged gas; and not only so, 
the valve would sometimes break, thus caus 
ing delay and annoyance, and not infrequently 
serious losses to the owner of the machine, who 
depended upon its continuous and perfect 
working. Aside from this, the great and disa 
greeable noise which in such construction was 
occasioned when the machime was running at 
a high speed-say fifty or sixty revolutions per 
minute-was alsoa serious objection, and, more. 
over, there was danger of breaking the valve or 
guide-stops by running the machine to its other 
wise full capacity, and it was therefore neces 
sary, in order to insure safety, that the machine 
should be run at a moderate speed, which of 
course lessened its daily performance. 
To avoid these objections and to prevent the 
delays and losses already mentioned, as well 
as to increase the working capacity of thema 
chine, is the object of my invention, which 
consists in providing a buffer to receive the 
valve when lifted or forced upward without 
burring or breaking it, and in addition thereto 
in providing a cushion which will render 
noiseless the movement of the valve against 
the buffer. 
In the drawings similarletters represent cor 
responding parts. 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of a 
single-acting gas compressor and dome or 
. . 
- 
85 
go 
95 
ioo 
...--- 
2 
356,597 
3O 
o 
15 
valve-chamber, such as is used in some refrig- ure above the pressure of the gas enteriug the 
erating-machines which circulate a cooling, 
compressor is injeri ed into the compressor 
sealing, and lubricating liquid, and showing 
through the oil-illet H, either by means of a 
also a buffer secured within the dome above 
pump or other device. The piston F, near the 
the discharge-valve, which is provided with a 
end of its dowlaward stroke, dips into the oil 
recess or depression corresponding to the head 
in the bottom of the compressor, and a quan 
of the buffer. IFig. 2 is a central vertical sec 
tity of oil equal to tie quantity injected dur 
tion through the dome, discharge-valve, dia 
ing the downward stroke of the piston also 
phragm - plate, and upper part of the com 
passes through the openings in the piston. 
pressor-cylinder on a larger scale. In this fig 
Upon the return or upward stroke of the pis 
tire the buffer-head is shown as correspond 
ton F the gas contained in the compression 
ing to the valve-cup, but the recess in the bot 
chamber of the compressor will be compressed 
tom plate is omitted, the outlets in the up. 
to a pressure a little above the pressure ob 
wardly-projecting walls forming the valve 
taining in the done or discharge-valve clian 
cup being located sufficiently high to cause 
ber A, when the discharge-valve M will lift 
the valve to retain a portion of the oil, which 
and be forced against the buffer B, the head of 
forms a cushion for the buffer. Fig. 3 is a like 
which enters the valve cup, as shown in Fig. 
view, but shows the buffer. as seculed within 
2, and when the valve M has the recess formed 
the dome, and also a recess in the bottom plate 
by the walls on (shown in Figs. 1 and 3) the 
of the discharge-valve. This figure also shows 
head of the buffer enters such recess. The 
the under side of the buffer-head concave, and 
rapid passage of the compressed gas through 
shows the edges of the head beveled and cor 
the aperture in the diaphragm-plate will pre 
responding to the beveled edges of the recess 
vent the valve M from descending until the 
in the bottom plate of the waive. 
moment when the oil which is lying above the 
A represents the done or discharge-valve 
piston is being forced through the valve-pas 
chamber; B, the buffer, the under side of which 
sage, and the valve will fall upon the oil, which 
is preferably concave, while C represents the 
foods the lower portion of the dome A, thus 
diaphragm-plate with the valve-seat c, and E 
submerging the valve-seat, and consequently 
the outlet from the done for the gas and oil. 
the seating of the valve will be noiseless. The 
From this outlet the gas and oi Inay passinto 
oil now contained in the dome flows through 
an oil-separating tank, (not shown,) which in 
the openings m' into the valve and fills its cup 
refrigerating-machines is generally interposed 
up to the lower edge of such openings, and if 
between the compressor and a gas-condenser, 
the recess formed by the walls in be present in 
the latter not appearing in the drawings. In 
the bottom plate of the valve Mi this recess 
this tank, to which the gas and oil flow from 
will also be filled with oil. When the valve 
the dome or valve-chamber, the oil is sepa 
Mis again lifted toward the bufferB, the head 
rated from the hot compressed gas. 
of the buffer will be net by the oil contained 
. In all the figures M represents the cup 
in the valve-cup, which it must displace before 
shaped discharge-valve, and in Figs. 1 and 3 
the valve can strike it, and if a recess beformed 
in the projecting walls surrounding a recepta 
in the bottom plate of the valve the buffer. 
cle for oil, which I sometimes make within 
head must also displace the oil contained 
the base or bottom plate of the discharge-valve, 
therein. In either case the valve will be so 
and which is preferably but slightly, larger 
eushioned by the oil as that the seating thereof 
than the head of the buffer B, but correspond 
will be noiseless. 
ing to it in Shape as near as may be, and into 
By constructing the discharge-valve so that 
which oil-receptacle the head of the buffer en 
it will receive and retain a portion of the oil 
ters when the discharge-valve is lifted. 
admitted by it to the dome or chamber such 
In each figure m' an' represent openings in 
oil will always be present when the machine 
the upwardly-projecting walls forming the cup 
is in operation, and thus a cushion will be 
of the discharge-valve, for alternately admit 
presented to the buffer-head before the valve 
ting oil to and discharging it from the cup of 
strikes against it, and by means of such eush 
the valve M. 
ion I am not only enabled to avoid the noise 
In Fig. 1 F represents the compressor-pis 
occasioned by the use of large discharge-valves 
ton; f, the piston-valve, and f' the piston-rod; 
constructed as heretofore, but all liability of 
G, the suction-nozzle or gas-inlet; 0, the suc 
Eig the parts is obviated, and the ma-. 
. 
tion-valve, and f the oil-inlet. 
irie can consequently perform a greater 
C 
The piston F is actuated in the usual way, 
amount of work within a given time, because 
and when it moves upward a partial vacuum 
of the fact that it can be run at a much higher 
is created below it, and as the suction-valveg 
rate of speed. 
lifts the gas fills the compressor. Upon the 
My invention may be applied to single or 
downward stroke of the piston a partial vac 
double acting compressors using a liquid base, 
uum is created above it, the piston-valve f 
and the oil may be injected into the lower or 
iifts and the Stiction-valve gy closes, and the 
upper chamber of the compressor, and either 
gas passes through the openings in the piston 
during or after the suction-stroke of the pis 
between the ribs did to the upper or compres 
ton or during or before the compression-stroke. 
sion chamber of the compressor. Puring this 
It may also be applied to horizontal compress 
period a certain quantity of oil under a press 
ors, provided the valves of such compression 
II 25 
130 
90 
IOC 
Ios 
O 
I 5 
45. 
so 
55 
65 
356, 
597 
cylinders lift vertically or at right angles to 
the center line of such compressors. 
I may employ differently-shaped buffers, 
valves, and domes from those described, but 
5 in practice I prefer to use metallic cup-shaped 
valves, bell-shaped domes and buffers, as 
shown. The li?t of the valve may be made ad 
justable; but having determined the proper 
lift of valves of every size in compressors 
to using a cooling, sealing, and lubricating liquid 
I prefer to have the bufferstationary, and thus 
prevent the use of unnecessary or moving 
parts in the dome. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1 5 I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a gas-compressor having a dome or 
chamber, the combination of a buffer secured 
in such dome or chamber with a discharge 
2O valve adapted to move toward the said buffer, 
such valve having a recess or depression 
therein corresponding substantially to the 
buffer-head, and adapted to receivesuch buffer 
head when the valve moves up to the same, 
2. In a gas-compressor having a dome or 
valve-chamber, the combination of a buffer 
25 substantially as described. 
located within such dome or chamber with a 
discharge-valve adapted to hold and retain a 
portion of the liquid admitted by it to the 
chamber and to present the retained liquid to 
the head of the buffer, whereby the valve is 
prevented from coming in contact with the 
buffer-head until it has displaced the liquid 
retained by the valve, substantially as andfor 
the purpose set forth. 
3. In a gas-coin preSSorlising a cooing, seal 
ing, and lubricating liquid, the combination 
of a buffer secured within the discharge-valve 
chamber with a cup-shaped discharge-valve 
having therein an oil-receptacle corresponding 
substantially to the shape of the buffer-head 
and adapted to hold a liquid whereby a cushion 
for the buffer may be formed of the liquid con 
tained in such receptacle or recess, which is 
thus made to neutralize or render noiseless the 
concussion occasioned by the forcing of the 
valve up to the buffer-head, substantially as 
described. 
ARCUS L. AITCHELL. 
Witnesses: 
WM. A. HAREN, . 
LOUIS KAUFMANN. 
35 
40 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356697.txt	(No Model.) 
F. SQUIER, 
STAPLE EXTRACTOR, 
No. 356,697. 
Patented Jan. 25, 1887. 
77%. j. 
Zd 
17 
s 
 
 
TE: ) 
2. 
or-C-C-co a- 
Y.2-4---Y 1-2-4- 
z-axi/ (Szz. ze 
1M/ENTOR 
Aiiorney 
Z/ 44%-2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK SQUIER, OF HAMBURG, IOWA. 
STAPLE EXTRA CTO R. 
SSPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 356,697, dated January 25, i.887. 
Application ited September 2, 1886. Serial No. 212,523. (No model.) 
ciently to enable the jaws to embrace the 
To ali Zvikoi, ii. 7 a? concer. 
staple to be extracted, grasp the staple so that 
Be it known that I, FRANK SQUIER, a citi 
the horizontal fence-wire that passes through 
Zen of the United States, residing at Hamburg, 
the staple will fit in the grooves in the face of 
in the county of Fremontand State of Iowa, have 
the jaws and press downward upon the le 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
vers, upon which the block E will bear against 
in Staple-Extractors, of which the following is 
the face of the post and form a fulcrum for the 
a specification, reference being had therein to 
levers in forcing the staple out of the post. 
the accompanying drawings. 
The purpose of the grooves in the face of the 
My invention has relation to all improved 
device for extracting the staples that secure jaws is to enable them to get a sufficient hold 
upon the staples to withdraw them quickly and 
fence-wires to fence-posts. It is designed to 
easily. 
produce a cheap and effective device for this 
By this device the staples can be extracted 
purpose; and it consists in certain novel fea 
quickly and without injury or bending, so 
tures of construction, that will be more fully 
that they may be used again, if desired. 
hereinafter particularly pointed out and 
This improvement forms a cheap and very 
claimed. 
valuable tool for use in repairing or taking 
In the drawings annexed, which illustrate 
down wire fences, as will be obvious. 
my invention and its application, Figure 1. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
represents my device in side elevation in the 
act of withdrawing a staple from a fence-post. 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
Fig. 2 represents a perspective view of the de 
S 
In a device for extracting staples from the 
vice, and Fig. 3 a detail sectional view. 
posts of wire fences, the levers A and B, suita 
In these figures, the letters A and B desig 
bly recessed and pivoted together at their for 
mate two levers recessed and pivoted together 
ward ends, forming jaws A" and B, the said 
at their forward ends in a manner similar to 
jaws being provided with grooves extending 
the ordinary tongs or pinchers, so as to form 
laterally across their faces for the passage of 
jaws A and B, the inner surfaces of which 
may be roughened or corrugated, as shown. 
the fence-wire while the device is in operation, 
in combination with the angled fulcrum-block 
Across the rounded faces of the said jaws. A 
B are formed grooves C, for the purpose here 
E, secured to the under. side of the lever B, 
the said block being provided with a lug, F, 
inafter set forth. 
fitting in a recess in the lever B, all arranged 
To the under side of the lever. B, and at or 
substantially as described. 
near its forward end, and by means of the piv 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
otal bolt D of the levers, is secured an angle 
presence of two witnesses. 
iron or block, E. On the rear end of this 
block or piece is formed a lug or teat, F, which 
fits in a recess formed in the lever B on its 
under side and aids the bolt D in rigidly se 
curing the said block E to the lever. 
To use my device, spread the levers suffi 
A. L. HOLMES, 
J. N. HARRIS. 
FRANK SQUIER, 
Witnesses: 
w 
45 
SO 
S5 
65 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356798.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 356,798, 
- 
A. B. SNYDER. 
RAILWAY SIGNAL 
Patented Feb. 1, 1887. 
OCCCCCP-A- 
P-Orrao are sous-ar-R-Ore. 
a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A\\\\\\\\ 
v. 
V 
\ 
 
W 
 
  
  
  
 
E = Iu. . 
. 
. 
1 
 
 
47 a.s. 
2% (7 2%e24. 
62%. 624. 
P2-2 (72L/2-4. 
4. AFTORE. 
... refers, proto-Skagrapher, 
achington D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM B. SNYDER, OF LOUISVILLE, OHIO. 
RAWAY - SiGNA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 356,798, dated February 3, 1887. 
Application filed August 28, 1886. Serial No. 212,054. (No model. 
C 
I5 
25 out in the claim. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM. B. SN YDER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Louis 
ville, in the county of Stark and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Railway-Signais; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, reference being 
had to the annexed drawings, making a part 
of this specification, and to the letters and fig 
ures of reference marked thereon, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view. Fig. 2 is a 
detached view of the bar or rod and a portion 
of the pipe. Fig. 3 is a top view showing the 
operating-spring in its normal position. Fig. 
4 is a top view showing the operating-spring 
forced to the side of the railway-rail by means 
of a car-wheel. 
The present invention has relation to that 
class of railway-signals designed and calcu 
20 lated to signal the approach of a train of cars 
at a street-crossing; and its nature consists in 
the different parts and combination of parts 
hereinafter described, and particularly pointed 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
In the accompanying drawings, A represents 
the operating spring, which may be substan; 
tially of the form shown in the drawings, and 
is placed by the side of the railway-rail, as 
shown. One end of said operating-spring is 
attached to the sliding block B, substantially 
5 as shown, the opposite end being attached to 
the rod or bar a. 
The top of the spring A extends a short dis 
tance above the top of the railway-rail, so that 
as the wheels of a train of cars pass over said 
operating-spring it will be forced down to a 
level with the top of the railway-rail, and as 
soon as a wheel has passed said operating 
spring it will assume its normal position, 
thereby operating the signal, as hereinafter 
To the free end of the operating-spring is 
securely attached the rod or bar a. This rod 
or bar may be formed in sections of any de 
sired and convenient length, and said sections 
5o securely held together by means of the screw 
threaded thimbles b, as shown in the draw 
5 described. 
ings. For the purpose of holding the rod or 
bar a in proper position it is placed in the 
pipe C, as shown. It will be seen that by 
placing the rod or bar a within the pipe C the 
movements of said rod or bar will not be in 
terfered with by snow or ice. 
At the place where it is desired to locate a 
signal the segment or support D is attached to 
the ties, substantially as shown in the draw 
ings, and to the segment or support Dare piv 
oted the arms E, substantially as shown. To 
the bottom or lower ends of the arms E are 
attached the rods or bars (t. To the outer side 
of the segment or support D is located the post 
or standard F, to the top or upper end of which 
is attached the arm G, to which arm is attached 
the signal-bell H., said signal-bell being so ad 
justed that it will be between the upper ends 
of the arms E. 
It will be seen that as the arms E are vi 
brated by means of the operating-spring A. 
and the rods or bars a they will strike against 
the bell H, and thereby indicate the approach 
of a train. 
For the purpose of preventing the train from 
operating the signal as it is leaving said sig 
nal, I place the end of the operating-spring A 
toward the signal a short distance away from 
the railway-rail, as shown in the drawings, so 
that, as the wheels of a train pass the operat 
ing-spring A they will force the spring away 
from the railway-rail, and as soon as each 
wheel has fully passed said spring it will be 
forced into its normal position by Jueans of the 
spring . 
To hold in proper position the operating 
spring A and the sliding block B, the metal 
plate J is securely attached to the ties at the 
side of the railway-rail, as shown in the draw 
ings, said plate being provided with the ribs 
or bars a c, which are for the purpose of hold 
ing the sliding block B in proper position, and 
are so arranged that the block B will slide 
away from the rail as a train of cars passes 
the operating-spring going away from the sig 
nal proper. 
The spring I may be substantially of the 
form shown in the drawings, and is securely 
attached at one end to the blockK, or its equiv 
alent, the opposite end resting and pressing on 
the sliding block B, as shown in the drawings. 
lingS. 
- 
65 
75 
Od 
2 
356,798 . 
 
It will be understood that an operating- will indicate the exact distance the train is 20 
from the Street. 
5 of a train in either direction. 
spring and its different parts is to be placed 
on each side of the street where it is desired 
tolocate a signal, so as to indicate the approach 
It will be seen that by my peculiar arrange 
ment my signal will take the place of a watch 
man in cities, and can also be placed at all 
street-crossings at very little expense, and will 
To at all times indicate the approach of a train of 
cars. It will also be seen that by the ringing 
of the signal-bell drop-gates can be dispensed 
with, as the operating-spring can be so ad 
justed that the signal-bell will continue to ring 
I5 until the train arrives at the street-crossing. 
In cities the operating-spring A is designed to 
be located a certain distance from the street 
(for example, say forty yards from the center 
of the street,) so that the first sound of the bell 
The combination, with the spring A, the 25 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
pivoted arms E. E., and the rod a, connecting 
said spring and pivoted arms, of the standard 
F, having an arm, G, and the bell H, suspended 
from said arm G in the path of the pivoted 
arms EE, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presenc 
of two witnesses. 
3O 
ABRAHAM. B. SNYDER. 
Witnesses: 
ROWLAND C. BURDICK, 
FRED. W. BOND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356898.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 356,898, 
A. SHEPARD, 
HAND DRILL. 
Patented Feb, l, 1887. 
 
 
''r 
 
s S. 
 
6 - 
W//7aaega, 
3.4.6%-24%2. 
- 
//7/27/7/a/. 
4-2a af-444, 
N. PETERs, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
42% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AMOS SHEPARD, OF PLANTSVILLE, CONNECTICUT. 
HAN D D R L. 
SPECIFICATION iorming part of letters Patent No. 356,898, dated February 1, 1887. 
Application filed November 8, 1886 . Serial No. 218,252. No model. 
O 
portion of said wheel which is represented in 
To all whon, it may conce77. 
Section. In order to support the wheel A and 
Be it known that I, AMOS SHEPARD, a citi 
prevent it from tipping or springing away 
zen of the United States, residing at Plants 
ville, in the county of Hartford and State of from the pinion B under severe strain, I em 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and ploy the plain grooved roller G, the groove in 
useful Improvements in Hand-Drills, of which which is of a size to receive freely the project 
ling teeth of the gear-wheel A, as shown. This 
the following is a specification. 
I collar is loose upon the rod D, being merely 
My invention relates to improvements in 
slipped thereon before the parts areassembled, 
hand-drills of the class that are driven by a 
and held in place longitudinally on said rod 
bevel gear-wheel and pinion; and the object 
by the engagement of the teeth of the wheel A. 
of my in provement is to simplify the con 
with the groove of said roller. 
struction and to improve the efficiency and 
This construction is very simple and inex 
convenience of the machine. 
In the accompanying drawing the only fig 
pensive. When there is but little strain upon 
the wheel A, said wheel moves freely without 
ure is a side elevation, partly in section, of 
necessarily revolving the roller. 
If, however, 
my drill. 
My improvement relates to the means for 
the wheel A is so strained as to cause it to 
bear with any considerable force upon the 
supporting the gear-wheel A, so as to hold it 
in proper engagement with the pinion B of 
roller, said roller revolves with said wheel by 
the drill-head or chuck C. The general form 
frictional contact and holds said wheel in en 
and construction of the drill is old--that is to gagement with the pinion B, and without any 
say, drills have heretofore been made with a tendency to cramp or bind. The edge of the 
single shaft or rod, D, a breast-pad, F, on one roller being smooth, there is no danger of its 
end, the head or chuck C and pinion B at the catching and drawing in clothing or other ob 
other, and between the ends of said rod the jects, as there is when a pinion is used at this 
handle E on one side and the driving gear 
wheel A, mounted on a stud opposite the han 
dle. Such drills have also been provided with 
a pinion like the pinion B, but secured by col 
lars to the rod D, so as to engage the teeth of 
the wheel A at a point diametrically opposite 
said pinion. All of said prior art is hereby 
disclaimed. 
I form the teeth of the wheel A. So as to 
leave a shoulder on each edge-that is, at the 
ends of the several teeth, as shown by that 
I claim as my invention- 
The herein-described hand-drill, having the 
toothless grooved supporting-roller G, with the 
teeth of the wheel. A fitted thereto, substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
EDWIN G. LEWIs, 
PETER HUTTON. 
AMOS SHEPARD, 
Witnesses: 
- 
place. 
- 
- 
O 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US356999.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. HALE. 
- 
HYDRAULIC ENGINE, 
No. 356,999, 
Patented Feb, l, 1887. 
 
R - Puu-a-ra-St. 
. 
g 
k2ZZZZZZZZ 
X 
s 
  
 
V2 
es TC 
 
StraaS Sax as a San San 
r 
y 
ass= 
Y 
A 
R 
 
t 
 
D N 
 
 
/zzzzazi 
Ca(cf.4/( 
R 
w fo-v-221-(2-w, 
Ziva zzzzz 
Z27 642-4. 
42-4- ~ a2z44 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
" 
. 
WILLIAM E. HALE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE HYDRAULIC 
ELEVATOR COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
HYDRAULIC ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 356,999, dated February 1, 1887. 
- 
Application filed January 10, 1884, Serial No. 117,087. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM E. HAILE, of 
Chicago, Cook county, Illinois, have invented 
certain Improyements in Hydraulic Engines, 
of which the following is the specification. 
My invention relates to that class of water 
engines usually employed for elevators, in 
which the piston is moved in one direction by 
the pressure of water from a supply-reservoir 
and in the other direction by the weight of the 
load while the water circulates from end to end 
of the cylinder; and my invention consists in 
means, fully described hereinafter, whereby to 
permit a ready circulation of the water when 
5 all connection with the supply is cut off. 
In the drawings, Figure is an elevation in 
part section, showing my invention as applied 
to a hydraulic engine having a horizontal cyl 
inder. Fig. 2 is a sectional elevation of a ver. 
tical-cylinder engine embodying my invention. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation of a vertical cyl 
inder-engine receiving the motor-fluid at the 
opposite end from that shown ini Fig. 2. 
In hydraulic engines used for elevators it is 
common to circulate the water from one side 
of the piston to the other as the piston is moved 
either out or in, according to the structure, by 
the weight of the load, the circulating-channel, 
either in the cylinder or exterior circulation 
pipes, being in communication with the motor 
fluid under pressure. This communication in 
the described engines is essential, as the pis 
ton-rod on one side of the piston contracts the 
water-space at such side, so that the water in 
the larger space on the opposite side cannot be 
transferred, while the water from the piston 
rod side will not fill the opposite space, and a 
partial vacuum would result upon any trans 
fer. The communication with the source of 
supply affords opportunity for the escape of 
water from one side of the piston and supplies 
the deficiency if the circulation is in the oppo 
site direction. 
To avoid the necessity of maintaining the 
water in the cylinder under constant pressure 
from the source and yet permit a free circula 
tion, I construct the valvedevice, of any suita 
ble kind, so as to close the supply-pipe when 
the piston is moving under the load and the 
So water is circulating; and I also provide a com 
munication between the water-circulating pas 
sage and a separate open tank, so that the Wa 
ter required to supply the deficiency, or which 
is in excess, may pass freely between the tank 
and the cylinder. 
When the cylinder is horizontal, as shown 
in Fig. 1, and the water from the supply-pipe 
A acts upon the outer or piston-rod side of the 
piston B to force it to the opposite or inner 
end, S, of the cylinder C, the communication 
is made with he tank T. (which may be the 
usual discharge-tank) through a pipe, a, com 
municating with the end of the cylinder from 
which the water is discharged when the load 
is lifted. This pipe a dips below the water in 
the tank, and the water will have a free pas 
sage to the cylinder when there is any defi 
ciency within the cylinder-as, for instance, 
when the valve D is in the position shown in 
Fig. 1 and the water is circulating from the 
forward to the rear end of the cylinder-the 
volume in front of the piston diminished by 
the displacement of the piston-rod being in 
sufficient to supply the space at the rear. 
Un 
der these conditions the water will be drawn 
and will rise freely from the tankinto the cyl 
In Fig. 2 the invention is illustrated in con 
nection with a vertical-cylinder machine, where 
the weight of the load depresses the piston and 
the pressure of water from the supply-pipe A 
lifts it. In this case the pipe a extends to and 
communicates with the upper or discharge end 
of the cylinder, and when the water circulates, 
on the descent of the piston, through the pipes 
G. Hand valve-case I, permits the excess from 
below the cylinder to pass to the tank. 
In Fig. 3 the vertical-cylinder engine is con 
structed to lift the load under pressure on the 
top of the piston, the load lifting the piston. 
In this case, also, the discharge end of the cyl 
inder communicates with the tank through the 
pipe a, and the tank supplies the deficiency 
when the water from above passes below the 
piston as the load lifts the latter. 
In each case there is a free communication 
between the water-tank and the cylinder, and 
the water to supply any deficiency within the 
cylinder or any surplus therefrom passes auto 
matically from or to the cylinder without the 
45 
inder. 
- 
35 
40 
3O 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. .O. 
15 
20 
. 
. 
. 
i 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
It is difficult to pack 
control of any cocks or valve appliances, with 
gine having supply, circulating, and discharge 
out any manipulation by the attendant, and 
pipes, of a pipe independent of said pipes and 
without the necessity of providing any remedy 
extending from the discharge end of the cylin 
against the undue escape of water from the 
der and affording a free communication be-, 
tween the same and a tank, substantially as do 
Supply. Source. 
the piston and piston 
. 
and for the purpose set forth. . 
. 
rod of a vertical-cylinder engine so that air 
3. The combination, in a hydraulic engine, 
will not pass into the upper end of the cylin 
of a cylinder, and supply, circulating, and dis 
charge pipes, and valve, and a pipe independent 
der and water flow downward past the pitston 
when the engine is at rest if the lower end be 
of said supply, circulating, and discharging 45 it 
open, as is the case when the 
pipes and extending from the discharge end of 
pipe a commu 
inicates with said end. . 
the cylinder to an open tank, as and for the pur 
... To prevent the escape of the water and the p 
. 
. 
. 
ose set forth. . 
admission of air under such, circumstances, I 
4. The combination, with the working cyl 
provide the lower end of the pipe a with a 
inder, and supply, circulating, and discharge 
check-valve, e, as shown in Fig. 3, which closes 
pipes, of a supply-tank communicating with the 
under the weight of the column above and pre 
cylinderthrough a passage independent of said 
vents any downward discharge. While this 
pipes, provided with a valve arranged to open 
valve closes the pipe when the engine is at rest, 
automatically to admit water freely to the cyl 
there is no obstruction of the pipe when the 
inder, substantially as described. 
: 
water is in circulation, and that in the tank 
5. In a hydraulic elevator, a cylinder con 
| 
rises to supply the deficiency in the cylinder, 
taining the working-piston, and provided with 
the valve being only a safety adjunct to pre 
supply, discharge, and circulating pipes in 
vent loss, when the engine is at rest if leakage 
communication with a water-tank through a 
should occur, and having no effect so far as the passage independent of said pipes, provided 
with a valve arranged to close under pressure 
circulation is concerned. . 
from within the cylinder, substantially as de 
I claim 
1. The combination, with the cylinder and scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed Iny name 
supply, circulating, and discharge pipes, and 
In test 
ply, circulating, and discharge pipes, and 
valve of a hydraulic engine, of a water tank and 
pipe to afford an independent communication 
between the discharge end of the cylinder and 
the tank, substantially as and for the purpose 
2. The combination, with a hydraulic en 
to this specification in the presence of two sub-65 
scribing witnesses. 
CHARLEs E. IFOSTER, 
F. I. FREEMAN. 
WILLIAM E. HALE. 
y whereof Il 
Witnesses: 
gned Iny 
5S 
described. 
6o 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
: 
. 
- 
- 
- 
. . 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
: 
: - 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
: 
- 
- 
- 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US357100.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 357,100, 
A. J. ROSS, 
PLOW. 
Patented Feb, l, 1887, 
 
 
8 fansfe 
reliu?FHE 
Will EMIERE 
S 
aga; itse 
O 
 
 
 
- Z. 
 
, 
Wve vesses. 
( c2ce 
7%. 
a 
N. PETERS. Pyoto-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
Zvezeez. 
(, Z724 %% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
s 
ALBERT J. ROSS, OF HOLLIS, TEXAS. 
PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 357,100, dated Februaryl, 1887. 
- 
Application filed November 4, 1886. Serial No. 217,992. (No model.) 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT J. Ross, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Hollis, in the county of Madison and State of 
Texas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Plows; and I do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to make 
and use the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, and to letters or fig 
ures of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a side elevation. Fig. 2 is a transversever 
tical section on line a ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
rear elevation. Fig. 4 is a portion of a plan 
View, and Fig. 5 is a portion of a bottom view 
of the beam. 
My invention relates to plows; and it con 
sists in the construction and novel combina 
tion of parts, as hereinafter described and 
claimed. . 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the plow-beam, which 
is preferably made in two longitudinal parts 
or sections, B C, which are rabbeted in the 
vertical inner faces at DE, to form a throat or 
recess, F, when the two parts are joined, said 
arts B C being secured together by bolts G. 
H. I are the plow-handles, which are se 
cured to the plow-beam, near the rear end of 
the latter, by bolts, and are preferably let into 
recesses J in the outer faces of the plow-beams. 
The plow-standard Kishinged or pivoted 
on a double - crank rod, L, the journals of 
which rod have their bearings in the plow-beam 
near the front end of the throat or recess F. 
The front wall of the recess F inclines from 
above downwardly and rearwardly, while the 
rear wall of said recess F is parallel with said 
front wall. The recess F is slightly enlarged 
along the track of the double crank to permit 
the latter to move through its arc when the 
plow-point M strikes or meets with an ob 
struction, and also after the plow-point passes 
over the obstruction and is being returned to 
its normal position by the spring N. The up 
per end of the spring N is connected with the 
plow-standard K, which latter extends some 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
distance above the plow-beam, in order to pro 
vide sufficient leverage for the spring N. 
A perforated plate or bar of metal, P, is con 
nected to the lower end of the spring N, and 
this plate P is retained in a bifurcation or re 
cess, Q, in the rear end of the plow-beam by a 
transverse rod, R, which is 'inserted into 
aligned holes S in the rear end of the plow 
beam, and is passed through either one of the 
holes in the plate P, as may be necessary to 
regulate the tension of the spring. The 
strength of the spring should be regulated in 
accordance with the size of the plow and the 
strength of the team employed to draw the 
plow. 
As a modification, I may and do pivot the 
plow-standard to the outer face of the plow 
beam instead of Within the recess F, in which 
case the plow-standard is pivoted to a single 
crank instead of to a double-crank rod. The 
plow-beam is provided with a gage-wheel, T, 
near its front end. A slotted plate, U, is se 
cured upon the plow-beam so that the slot in 
the plate will be aligned with the recess or 
throat in the beam, its object being to serve as 
a wear-plate to protect the plow-beam at this 
point and prevent it from being worn away by 
the action of the pivoted or hinged plow 
standard. 
Having described this invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination, with the plow-beam, of 
the plow-standard hinged to a crank-rod jour 
naled in the plow-beam, the tension-spring 
connected to the plow-standard and provided 
with the adjusting-plate, and the key or rod 
for securing the adjusting-plate in place, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the recessed plow 
beam, of the double-crank rod, the plow 
standard thereon, the tension-spring, the ad 
justing-plate, and its securing rod or key, sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
A. J. ROSS, 
Witnesses: 
- 
M. Y. RANDOLPH, 
F. S. WILCOX, 
55 
75, 
35 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US357200.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 357,200, 
M. E. C. HOPKIRK. 
HAT PROTECTOR, 
Patented Feb. 8, 1887. 
WITNESSES: T 
/&e Czz 
INVENTOR: 
7% %/6%/( 
 
Photshographs, Washington, c. 
6 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARY ETTA COWLES HOPKIRK, OF AGENCY, IOW.A. 
HAT-PROTECTOR. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 357,200, dated February 8, 1887. 
Application filed April 19, 1886. Serial No. 199,347. 
(No model.) 
O 
2) 
25 p 
. To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARY ETTACOWLEs 
HOPKIRK, of Agency, in the county of Wa 
pello and State of Iowa, have invented a new 
and Improved Hat-Protector, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to hat-protectors in 
tended particularly for covering ladies' head 
wear, and has for its object to provide a sim 
ple, inexpensive, portable, and readily-adjust 
able device of this character which may be 
quickly applied to and removed from a hat or 
bonnet withoutinjuring its delicate trimmings, 
and may be adjusted to fit small or large hats 
with facility. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction and combinations of parts 
of the hat-protector, all as hereinafter fully de 
scribed and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate. 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is an under side view of the hat 
rotector in open condition. Fig. 2 is a ver 
tical sectional elevation of the protector with 
the extension or enlarging piece attached and 
drawn in at the lower edge as when in use, and 
Fig. 3 is an inside face view of a portion of the 
extension-piece. 
The main body portion A of the hat-protector, 
which alone will be used to cover hats of small 
or medium size, consists of a piece of some 
light water-proof fabric-such as rubber cloth, 
oiled silk, or the like-and preferably bound 
around the margin at the inside with a facing, 
a, of some suitable fabric, adding strength to 
the water-proof material of the covering. 
At the inner face of the body fabric A, Ise 
cure, in any suitable manner, a couple of nar 
row strips, BB, of suitable fabric, forming cas 
ings through which draw strings or tapes C C 
are run. . . 
At opposite edges of the facing a are attached 
series of small rings, DE, respectively, through 
either series of which rings a cord or draw 
string, as at F, may be passed and then drawn 
up and tied, as presently explained. 
The extension-piece G of the hat-protector 
consists of an endless strip or band of light 
water-proof fabric, like that of the body fabric 
A, and preferably hemmed over or provided 
at opposite edges at the inside with bindings 
or facings gg, to which are attached the series 
of rings HII, respectively, through which cords 
may be passed. 
When the protector is to be used on a small 
or medium sized hat or bonnet, the draw-strings 
C will be tightened more or less to conform the 
body A of the protector somewhat to the size 
and shape of the hat, and the strings C will be 
tied. The draw-string F having been adjusted 
in the marginal series of rings D, the protector 
fabric. A will be laid gently over the hat or 
honnet, and the string F will then be drawn 65 
up and tied to hold the protector to place. 
To apply the protector to a large hat or bon 
net, the draw-strings C will be properly ad 
justed and tied, and the draw-string F will be 
removed from the ringsD of the body A of the 
protector, and will be run through the series 
of rings I at one edge of the extension-piece G., 
and another draw-string, J, will be run through 
the inner series of rings E on the body fabric 
A, and also through the series of rings H at 
the upper edge of the extension-piece G, the 
rings E H being of like number, and whereby, 
when the string J is drawn into the propersize 
and tied, the extension-piece G will be held to 
the body part A, and the latter will overlap 
the piece G all around for a distance equaling 
the space between the two series of ringsD E, 
or about the width of the facing a, or for a 
sufficient distance to prevent rain and snow 
from beating through at the top of the piece 
G. onto the hat or bonnet, over which the pro 
tector thus arranged will be placed, whereupon 
the draw-string F, now in the rings I, will be 
drawn upon and tied, as indicated in Fig. 2, 
to hold the enlarged protector securely over go 
the hat or bonnet. 
There may be but one draw-string C, or more. 
than two, fitted into casings in the body fabric 
A, as the size of the latter may require; but 
two, as shown, will ordinarily be used. 
It is obvious that a hat-protector made with 
draw-strings atitsinner face around the crown 
-and after the strings are properly adjusted to 
shape the crown of the protector-may be ap 
plied over a hat without danger of crushing 
frailtrimmings on the hat, which would not be 
possible with protectors intended to be applied 
over a hat prior to tightening up and tying a 
single marginal 
-String. Furthermore 
75 
95 
IOO 
- 
- 
35 
45 
 
6) 
357,200 
35 
the marginal rings, through which the fasten- proof fabric, and provided with marginal rings 
to receive a fastening draw-string, substan 
ing draw-string Fis run, allow the string to be 
tially as herein set forth. 
tightened easily and quickly without twist 
4. A hat-protector made with a body por. 
ing the protector around on top of the head 
tion, A, formed from flexible water-proof fab 
5 Wear, and whereby damaging strains on the hat 
ric, and provided with draw-strings, as at C, 
trimmings are avoided, which would not be the 
around the crown, and with marginal rings, as 
case if a string or elastic were used within a 
at D, to receive a fastening draw-string, sub 
draw-casing. Furthermore, by placing the 
stantially as herein set forth. 
draw-strings C within the casings B on the 
5. A hat-protector made with a body por- 4o 
body part A. of the protector, the draw-strings 
tion, A, having a series of rings, E, within its 
O will not beliable to catch upon and injure deli 
margin, and with an extension-piece, G, pro 
cate trimmings when the protector is removed 
vided with rings Hat opposite edges, a draw 
from the hat, as will readily be understood. 
string, J, uniting rings EH, and a fastening 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
draw-string, as at F, passed through rings I, 45. 
I5 what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
substantially as herein set forth. . 
. . 
Letters Patent, is 
6. A hat-protector made with an imperfor 
1. A hat-protector made with an imper?o 
rate body portion, A, formed from flexible wa 
rate body portion formed from flexible water 
ter-proof fabric, and provided with crown 
proof fabric, and with draw strings applied 
draw-strings C and two series of marginal 
2O around the crown of the protector upon its in 
rings, DE, and with an extension-piece, G, 
ner face, substantially as herein set forth. 
provided with rings HI at opposite edges, a 
2. A hat-protector made with an imper?o 
draw-string, J, uniting rings EH, and a fast 
rate body portion formed from flexible water 
ening draw-string, as at F, passed through the 
proof fabric, and with draw-strings applied 
rings I, substantially as and for the purposes 55 
around the crown of the protector and within 
25 casings secured upon the inner face of the pro 
tector, substantially as and for the purposes 
herein set forth. 
3. A hat-protector inade with an imperfo. 
3orate body portion formed from flexible water 
MARY ETTA (OWIES HOPKIRK. 
H. J. BROWN, 
J.T. REYNOT,IDs. 
Witnesses: 
herein set forth. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US357300.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 357,300, 
J. W. ADAMS, 
BOLT THREADING MACHINE. 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 8, 1887. 
it 
III NRI 
III, III 
I 
IHF Hedee 
HHHHHH) 
{REE 
III 
I 
as 
 
 
 
  
 
  
S.H.I. 
 
S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington. E.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. W. ADAMS, 
BOLT THREADING MACHINE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 357,300. 
Patented Feb. 8, 1887. 
 
III 
71%zasses. 
2.7% 
24-72% 
EtERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. W. ADAMS, 
BOLT THREADING MACHINE. 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 357,300, 
Patented Feb. 8, 1887. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
sessS 
se AeS 
s 
Ee 
al sease 
2 
 
Korax 
Ea Eas 
 
 
 
NEyS& 
ENF) 
  
 
s 
3, 
E( 
  
 
 
 
  
S 
As 7 on 
> r3. N else3 
S sys 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
S. 
Ele I E. 
N 
 
s In 
(No Model.) 
J. W. ADAMS, 
BOLT THREADING MACHINE. 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 357,300, 
Patented Feb. 8, 1887. 
 
 
  
 
s 
B% s 2 2 
N . 
  
 
Eise, i.e. 
ceases 
lite 
assas: R a 
i E. 
Eli EE 
MMM 
3 
  
 
  
 
 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Z. 
71%zeals 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. ADAMS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
BOTTH READ NG MACH NE. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 357,300, dated February 8, 1887. 
Application filed September 27, 1886. Serial No. 214,587. (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES W. ADAMS, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
cago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Bolt-Threading. Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
bolt-threading machines in which a revolving 
split head or die-carrier is automatically actu 
ated to advance the threading dies or chasers 
toward or withdraw them from the bolt on a 
line radial to the line of rotation of the head 
and the dies without stopping or reversing 
the machine, but is more particularly designed 
as an improvement on the invention set forth 
in United States Letters Patent No. 318,678, 
granted me May 26, 1885. 
The prime object of this invention is to sim 
plify the construction of the machine set forth 
in said Letters Patent, by dispensing with a 
number of parts of Said machine, and at the 
same time accomplish all the objects and re 
sults thereof. 
Another object is to so construct the ma-. 
chine that the power thereof may be utilized 
for positively opening and closing the head 
during the continuous operation of the ma: 
chine, whereby springs or other tension de 
vices for accomplishing one or both of these 
objects may be dispensed with. 
Another object is to utilize the locking-pins 
for opening and closing the split head, whereby 
separate and distinct tongues, liable to frac 
ture and injury, and slotted external guide. 
plates for this purpose are dispensed with, 
and the opening and closing devices are con 
cealed within the head and so inclosed that no 
dust can l90ge or accumulate between the 
working-faces of said opening and closing de 
vice and the head; to provide means for util 
izing the power of the machine to positively 
open and close the head during the continuous 
operation of the machine, whereby the auto 
matic operation of these parts is insured at the 
proper time; to provide a device for adjust 
ing the dies in a radial line both toward and 
from the axis of the head, and to provide other 
details of construction, all as hereinafter de 
scribed and illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which- 
. 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
bolt-threading machine embodying my inven 
tion; Fig. 2, a plan view thereof; Fig. 3, a trans 
verse vertical section thereof on linea ac, Fig. 
2; Fig. 4, a detail plan view of the devices em. 
ployed for operating the mechanism for open 
ing and closing the head; Fig. 5, an enlarged 
detail transverse section thereof; Fig. 6, a ver. 
tical section through the revolving head on 
line y), Fig. 8, showing the position of parts 
when the head is closed; Fig. 7, a similar 
view showing the head open; Fig. 8, a face 
view of the head closed; Fig. 9, a similar 
view of the head open; Fig. 10, detail views 
of the key employed for opening, closing, and 
locking the head; Fig. 11, detail views of the 
steel bushing set in the head in which the 
key operates; Fig. 12, a detail view showing 
the connection between the dies and the ad 
justing-screws thereof; Fig. 13, a central ver 
tical section through the head, and Fig.14 an 
enlarged transverse section through the spring 
pin and calm-collar for Operating the same. 
Similar letters of reference indicate the same 
parts in the several figures of the drawing. 
The general operation of this machine is al 
most identical with that of the patent afore 
said, although the mechanisms employed for 
producing the same are essentially different, 
the chuck-carriage carrying the blank bolt be 
ing moved forward by hand-power until the 
free end of the blank is engaged by the closed 
revolving head, after which the operation of 
cutting the thread upon the blank serves to 
draw the chuck-carriage forward. This fur 
ther forward movement of the said carriage is 
utilized for the purpose of actuating the mech 
anism employed for automatically opening the 
head and releasing the bolt when a thread of 
sufficient length has been cut thereon, permit 
ting the removal, or, rather, withdrawal, of said 
bolt by moving the chuck-carriage backward 
to its first position, where the threaded bolt is 
removed and a blank inserted, upon which the 
same operation is repeated. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A indicates a frame or casting for 
supporting the operating parts of my machine, 
hollow in the upper part thereof, so as to form 
an oil-receptacle in which to catch and retain 
the oil fed to the bolts during the operation of 
cutting the thread, and from which receptacle 
the oil is drawn off and again fed to the bolts, 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
357,300 
IO 
25 
35 
in the usual manner, as will hereinafter be 
explained. The upper surface of this cast 
ing A forms a table or guideway, A, upon 
which rides the chuck-carriage A, for feeding 
5 the bolt-blank to the cutter-head, the back 
ward and forward travel of which is accom 
plished by means of a cog-wheel, B, sleeved 
upon the screw-shaft B, employed for opening 
the chuck-jaws between a bearing therefor on 
the carriage and the hand-wheel B, for oper 
ating the same, which cog-wheel engages a 
toothed rack, C, rigidly secured to or cast 
upon the table, the said cog-wheel, for con 
venience of operation, being provided with a 
segment hand-wheel, C, by means of which 
the chuck-carriage may be readily moved back 
and forth upon the table. 
Upon the rear end of the table is mounted a 
casing or head-block, D, of any desirable con 
figuration, forming a bearing for a hollow 
shaft, D', extending longitudinally there 
through, to which a rotary motion is imparted 
by means of a cog-wheel, ), mounted upon 
the rear end of said shaft, and meshing with a 
smaller cog, D', mounted upon a supplemental 
shaft, E, to which power is applied by means 
of a cone-pulley, E, secured on the outer end 
of said shaft. 
Screwed or otherwise rigidly secured to the 
opposite end of the hollow shaft D is a head. 
block, F, upon the face of which away from 
the shaft lie the split heads or die-carriers F, 
the latter being held in position by means of 
a dovetail connection, F, between said split 
heads and the head-block. When mounted 
upon the end of the shaft D, the face of the 
head-block and forward end of the shaft are 
flush, in order that the die-carriers may slide 
freely toward and away from the axis of said 
shaft during the operation of opening and clos 
ing the Split head, in which movement said 
split head is guided by the dovetail tongue 
and-groove connection between the split head 
and the head-block. As in my said patent, 
the die-carriers, when taken together, are cir. 
cular in cross-section and are provided with 
radial slots in the outer faces thereof, in which 
work the dies G, rigidly secured in their re 
spective slots by the short bolts or set-screws 
G, and adjustable longitudinally toward or 
away from the axis of rotation by means of 
screws G, working through corresponding 
screw-threaded openings in the split head or 
die-carriers, and lhaving a swivel connection 
with the outer end of the dies, as clearly illus 
trated in Fig. 12. These Screws, as before 
stated, furnish the means for adjusting the 
dies to the desired size of bolt to be threaded, 
the swivel connection between the die and 
screw enabling the moving of the die either 
toward or away from the bolt, and the set 
screw G' furnishes the means for retaining the 
dies rigidly in position after being properly 
adjusted, to further which end they are slightly 
countersunk in the face of the die-carriers, as 
shown in the drawings. 
For the purpose of opening and closing the 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
split head I employ the angular keys H, rig 
idly secured at the end thereof, by means of 
pins 0, or other suitable devices, to a flanged 7o 
sleeve or collar, H', loose upon the hollow 
shaft D, the means for reciprocating which 
will be described in detail farther on. 
The angular keys H are preferably formed 
circular in cross-section, and consist of a 
main straight portion or body and an angle 
portion, the end being bentor otherwise formed 
at an oblique angle to the main body, SO as to 
form double inclines on the opposite sides 
thereof. The straight portion of these keys 
work loosely through the head-block Fat any 
desired point between the inner and outer pe 
ripheries thereof, but preferably at about the 
point indicated by dotted lines in Figs. 8 and 
9, suitable bushing being provided at this 
point, so that they may be renewed when suf. 
ficiently worn, and thus reduce the cost of re 
pair of the machine. 
The free inclined ends of the keys project 
into recesses formed in the inner faces of the 
split head, having walls inclined to correspond 
with the end of the keys, which recesses, for 
convenience of substitution in case of wear, 
may be formed in bushings H", set into re 
cesses extending partly or entirely through the 
die-carriers, the forward ends of which are 
closed by screw-plugs I, so as to protect the 
wearing-surfaces from dust, and also to fur 
nish a means of access to the keys when, from 
any cause whatever, it should be found desira 
ble to remove the keys. While the operation 
of these keys in general is similar to that of 
the device employed in my said patent for per 
forming the same operation, they are essen 
tially different both in detail of construction 
and directly the reverse in its operation, and 
all of the working parts are concealed from 
observation and protected from the possibil 
ity of lodgment thereon of dust and dirt, thus 
promoting the durability of the parts. Fur 
thermore, the tongue or key in this head is 
movable, and operates upon the inclined walls 
of the recesses in the die-carriers to open and 
close the head; and it will be observed that 
with this construction the key or tongue may 
have a configuration combining strength and 
utility not practicable in the old form, and, in 
addition thereto, the Strain upon the key is 
greatest where the strength is greatest-that 
is, at the farthest part of the incline, away 
from the outer end thereof-SO that the liabil 
ity to fracture the end thereof that exists in the 
prior construction is entirely avoided. 
When the head is closed, a short portion of 
the straight part of the key is projected be. 
yond the inclined walls of the recesses in the 
die-carrier to and in engagement with a straight 
portion thereof, and by this engagement locks 
and prevents the head from opening until the 
key is withdrawn. Thus it will be seen that 
these keys not only perform the functions of 
the tongue and double incline for opening and 
closing the head, but subserve the further pur 
pose of lock-pins, and hence Supplemental pins 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
IOO 
357,300 
3. 
O 
30 
A machine constructed after the manner just 9o 
are not at all necessary in view of the strength ver, M, pivoted at M to the casing D, and 
of the keys, owing to the present location, con 
provided with a pin, N, adapted and arranged 
- 
struction, and operation of said keys. 
to come in contact with the rear face of the 
From the foregoing it will be understood 
collar H', thus causing the said collar to slide 
5 that the opening and closing of the head is 
forward upon the shaft, D and close the head. 
accomplished by the longitudinal reciproca 
However, before the head is closed, the spring 
tion of the flanged sleeve or collar H upon 
pin for opening the same must be withdrawn 
the shaft D', and to this end I have provided 
from engagement with the cann-groove in 
a cam-groove, J, in the periphery of said col 
the collar; otherwise the collar could not be 
lar, into which is designed to project and work 
slid forward, or if slid would be immediately 
a spring-seated pin, J, held in a suitable 
returned; and to accomplish this I have pro 
bracket or casting, J, cast with or otherwise 
vided one or more cams, N', located in the 
rigidly secured to and projecting a short dis 
straight portion of the cam-groove J, one of 8o 
tance from the front face of the casting D be 
which, during the continuous operation of the 
low the said collar, as more clearly shown in 
machine, is designed to ride down and force 
Fig.1. When the head is closed, as shown in 
the pin within its casing until the groove 
Fig. 6-that is to say, when the collar is at 
therein is engaged by the lever-catch, when 
the said pin will be retained in its depressed 
the limit of its movement toward the head 
the spring-seated pin registers with the plain 
position until the lever-catch is again oper 
or smooth surface Jof the collar H', but is not 
ated to release it by the forward travel of the 
chuck-carriage in feeding a bolt to the head 
in contact therewith, because it is held down 
during the cutting operation. 
within its casing by means of a spring-catch or 
hook-lever, K, pivoted upon the casing J, the 
hook end of which engages an annular groove 
described has numerous advantages over the 
prior constructions, prominent among which 
25 formed upon the said pin just below the up 
per end thereof. During all this time the 
are the strength and durability of the parts, 
heads are supposed to be closed and engaged 
which are, enhanced by the protection of the 
in the operation of threading a bolt, during 
operating-faces thereof from the possibility of 95 
and by means of which operation the chuck 
the lodgment of dust and dirt thereon, par. 
carriage is drawn forward by the feed of the 
ticularly in the construction of the head; and 
blank to the dies, carrying with it a rod, L, 
an equally important advantage arises from 
rigidly secured at one end to the side thereof, 
the employment of the power of the machine 
the free end of which works loosely through a 
to positively open and close the head, dispens 
guide-plate, L, rigidly secured to the table 
ing with any spring-tension or other indirect 
A'. The free end of the lever-catch K also 
or yielding mechanism for performing either 
works through the plate L beneath, and is 
one of the operations, thereby reducing the 
prevented from rising too high by the rod L, 
number of the parts, and consequently the cost 
against which it is held by a spiral spring, 
of manufacture, and promoting the simplicity 
I, seated in a socket provided for its recep 
of the machine as a whole to a maximum de 
4o tion in the plate L, and at the proper point 
of the forward travel of the chuck-carriage, 
Referring again to the mechanism for oper. 
ating the chuck-carriage, it is proper to add 
when the bolt has been threaded a sufficient 
length, a stop, M, rigidly but adjustably mount 
that an important advantage is gained by 
sleeving the actuating-gear of said carriage 
ed on the rod L, comes in contact with the free 
45. end of the lever-catch K, which, riding upon 
upon the screw-shaft employed for opening 
the inclined surface thereof, is depressed suf 
and closing the chuck, for by so sleeving said 
ficiently to release the spring-seated pin from 
gear the same shaft is utilized in the manipu 
its other hooked end, when the said pin im 
lation both of the chuckjaws and the carriage, 
mediately rises into contact with the collar H', 
and the actuating devices of said jaw and car 
and at the proper point shoots into that por 
riage are not only more convenient of manip 
tion of the cam-grooye in Said collar extend 
ulation by the operator, but he is enabled to 
ing into the plain portion J thereof, where. 
produce a longer stroke of the carriage by a 
upon the inclined walls of said cam-groove 
single movement than is practically possible 
cause the collar to immediately slide longi. 
when the carriage is actuated by a lever and 
tudinally upon the shaft D', carrying with it 
cog below the carriage and working upon an 
the keys H, thereby forcing the split head 
axis independent of the screw - shaft for the 
to open and release the bolt. At this time, of 
jaws, as in my former patented construction. 
course, the forward travel of the chuck-car 
The usual detachable chip-pan is supported 
riage ceases, by reason of the release of the bolt 
and carried upon the chuck-carriage, in which 
by the cutting-dies, which, as before stated, 
to catch the chips and shavings, and also the 
imparts to the carriage its forward movement, 
oil supplied to the bolt during the threading 
and the carriage is free to be returned to its 
operation, a constant feed of oil to the bolt 
being supplied from an overhanging pipe, O, 
first position by the hand mechanism herein 
before described; but just before reaching the 
connected with a pump, O', operated by an 
5 end of its backward travel a stop, M', mounted. 
eccentric, O, on the shaft D'between the cas 
on the rod L some distance forward of the stop. 
ing D and gear-wheel D', which pump draws 
its supply from the reservoir in the upper 
M, comes in contact with the free end of a le 
gree. 
55 
35 
IOO 
IO5 
- 
O 
II 5 
357,300 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
part of the frame A, into which the oil sup 
plied to the bolts drains through the bottom 
of the chip-pan. 
I am aware that prior to my invention ma 
chines for a similar purpose to mine have had 
keys rigidly secured to the die-carriers and 
provided With angular ends engaging corre 
sponding angular recesses in the sliding col 
lar, both of said keys and the recesses in the 
die-carriers having two straight portions in 
different planes connected by an inclined or 
angular portion; but in a construction of this 
character the strain on the keys in opening 
and closing the split head or die-carriers is 
not only centered in the collar, but said keys 
exert a leverage on the die-carriers tending 
not only to cause then to bind on the head 
block, but to strain the keys and require an 
objectionable degree of power to actuate the 
die-carriers. Furthermore, in the construction 
referred to the form of angle of the keys and 
recesses is such as to render the device prac 
tically inoperative, the inclined walls of the 
recesses necessarily opposing each other, as 
also do the Walls of the straight portions, these 
straight portions of the keys and recesses, 
which are designed to lock the dies against ac 
cidental movement at each end of their stroke, 
serving this purpose so effectually that when 
once the dies are separated and locked by the 
impinging of the aforesaid straight surfaces 
against each other they cannot be again closed, 
for the lock cannot be broken without fractual 
ing the keys. With my device, however, all 
of these objections are obviated, the inclined 
walls of the recesses opposing the straight por 
tions in Such manner that a dead-lock between 
the moving parts could not possibly occur, 
even were keys having two straight portions 
employed, for by reason of this construction 
the ends of the straight portion would be ren 
dered absolutely useless, and therefore per 
form no function, and the strain upon the keys 
being centered in a direct line with the resist 
ance--that is, in the die-carriers-any undue 
leverage on the keys is therefore effectually 
avoided and the die-carriers rendered opera 
tive by the minimum power. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a bolt-threading machine, a sliding 
Support and the die-carriers, said die-carriers 
being provided with recesses the walls of which 
are angular, in combination with keys rigidly 
secured to the said sliding support and pro 
vided with angular ends engaging the angular 
recesses in the die-carriers, whereby the strain 
on said keys is centered in the die-carriers dur 
ing the operation of closing and opening the 
head, substantially as described. 
2. In a bolt-threading machine, the sliding 
collar and the die. Carrier, one of said members 
being provided with recesses having double 
inclined walls and a straight portion, the in 
clined walls being opposed by the straight por 
tion, in combination with keys rigidly secured 
to the other member and provided with angu 
lar inclined ends corresponding with and en 
gaging said recesses, substantially as described. 
3. In a bolt-threading machine, the sliding 
collar and the die-carriers, said die-carriers 
being provided with recesses having double 
inclined walls and a straight portion, the in 
clined walls being opposed by the straight por 
tion, in combination with keys rigidly secured 
to the collar and provided with angular ends 
engaging the recesses in the die-carriers, Sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a bolt-threading machine, the die-car 
riers provided with recesses in the inner faces 
thereof, having double inclined walls and a 
straight portion, and means for Supporting and 
guiding said die-carriers, in combination with 
keys having angular or inclined ends corre 
sponding with and engaging the recesses in 
said carriers and means for longitudinally re 
ciprocating said keys, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
5. In a bolt-threading machine, a rotating 
shaft and head-block mounted on the end 
thereof, the die-carriers working on the face 
of said head-block and provided with recesses 
on the inner faces thereof, having double in 
clined walls and a straight portion, and a con 
nection between Said carriers and the head. 
block, in combination with keys or pins hav 
ing bent or inclined ends engaging the recesses 
in the die-carriers and means for longitudi 
nally reciprocating said keys, substantially as 
described. 
6. In a bolt-threading machine, a rotating 
Shaft and head - block mounted on the end 
thereof, the die-carriers working on the face 
of said head-block and provided with recesses 
in the inner faces thereof, having double in 
clined walls and a straight portion, and a con 
nection between said carriers and the head 
block, in combination with a sliding collar 
mounted on said shaft, keys or pins secured 
to said collar, working freely in said head 
block and having bent or inclined ends engag 
ing the recesses in the die-carriers, and means 
for longitudinally reciprocating said carrier, 
substantially as described. 
7. In a bolt-threading machine, a rotating 
shaft, ahead-block mounted on the end thereof, 
the die-carriers working in the face of said 
head-block and provided with recesses on the 
inner faces thereof, having double inclined 
Walls and a Straight portion, and a connection 
between said carriers and the head-block, in 
combination with a sliding collar mounted on 
the said shaft, keys or pins Secured to said col 
lar, working freely in Said head-block and hav. 
ing bent or inclined ends engaging the recesses 
in the die-carrier, an annular cam-groove on 
said collar, a spring-seated pin for engaging 
Said groove, and a guide and Support for said 
pin attached to a Stationary portion of the 
frame, substantially as described. 
8. In a bolt-threading machine, the rotating 
shaft and a sleeve or collar sliding thereon, 
provided with an annular cam-groove, in com. 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IO) 
IOS 
I IC 
I 25 
357,300 
5 
5 
bination with a spring-seated pin for engag 
ing Said groove and a guide and support for 
said pin attached to a stationary portion of 
the frame, substantially as described. 
9. In a bolt-threading machine, the rotating 
shaft and a sleeve or collar sliding thereon 
provided with an annular cam-groove, in com 
bination with a spring-seated pin for engaging 
said groove, a stationary support therefor, and 
a catch device for holding said pin free from 
contact with the collar, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
10. In a bolt-threading machine, the rotat 
ing shaft and a sleeve or collar sliding thereon 
I5 provided with an annular cam-groove, in com 
bination with a spring-seated pin for engaging 
said groove, a stationary support therefor, a 
catch device for holding said pin when de 
pressed, and radial cams or projections on 
said collar for depressing said pin, substan 
tially as described. 
11. In a bolt-threading machine, the rotat 
ing shaft, a sleeve or collar sliding thereon 
provided with an annular cam - groove, a 
Spring-seated pin for engaging said groove, 
and radial cams or projections on said collar 
for depressing the pin, in combination with a 
lever-catch for holding said pin when de 
pressed and means for releasing said catch, 
substantially as described. 
12. In a bolt-threading machine, the rotat 
ing shaft, a sleeve or collar sliding thereon 
provided with an annular cam - groove, a 
Spring-seated pin for engaging said groove, 
radial cams or projections on said collar for 
depressing the pin, and a lever-catch for hold 
ing said pin when depressed, in combination 
with the chuck-carriage, a rod rigidly secured 
thereto, and a stop mounted on said rod for 
depressing the free end of the lever-catch and 
releasing the said pin, substantially as de 
13. In a bolt-threading machine, the rotat 
scribed. 
35 
- 
- 
3O 
55 
ing shaft, a sleeve or collar sliding thereon 
provided with an annular cam - groove, a 45 
spring-seated pin for engaging said groove, 
radial cams or projections on said collar for 
depressing the pin, a lever-catch for holding 
said pin when depressed, and a lever pivoted 
at one end and bearing against the collar in-, 5O 
termediate the ends thereof, in combination 
with the chuck-carriage, a rod rigidly secured 
thereto, and stops mounted on said rods adapt 
ed to engage the free ends of said lever and 
the lever-catch alternately during the back 
ward and forward travel of said carriage, sub 
stantially as described. 
14. In a bolt-threading machine, the sleeve 
provided with an annular cam - groove, the 
spring-seated pin, cams for depressing said pin, 
and the lever-catch, in combination with a rod 
actuated by the chuck-carriage and provided 
with a stop engaging the lever-catch, a guide 
for said rod, and a spring-seat for the free end 
of said catch, substantially as described. 
15. In a bolt-threading machine, the Sup 
porting-frame, the guideway or table thereof, 
and a toothed rack cast with or otherwise rig 
idly secured to said table, in combination with 
a cog-wheel loosely mounted on the screw 
shaft of the chuck-carriage engaging said rack 
and a hand-wheel or lever secuired to said cog 
wheel, substantially as described. 
16. In a bolt-threading machine, the Sup 
porting-frame, the guideway or table thereof, 75 
and a toothed rack secured thereto, in combi 
nation with the chuck-carriage, the movable 
jaws thereof, the screw-shaft for operating said 
jaws, and a cog-wheel loosely mounted on said 
shaft engaging the rack and provided with a 8o 
hand-wheel or lever secured thereto, substan 
tially as described. 
JAMES W. ADAMS, 
Witnesses: 
W. W. ELLIOTT, 
WILL R, OMOHUNDRO. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US357400.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 357,400, 
S. T. MoCANLESS, 
BALING PRESS, 
Patented Feb. 8, 1887. 
 
 
 
52.77zzaea, Z 27 2.276 s 
& 22e (2ee, 
122-. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL. T. McCANLESS, OF CARTERSVILLE, GEORGIA. 
BANG a PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 357,400, dated February 8, 1887. 
Application filed October 7, 1886. Serial No. 215,572. (No model.) 
. 
O 
ES 
55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
of Cartersville, in the county of Bartow and 
State of Georgia, have invented a new and use 
5 ful Improvement in Baling-Presses; and I do 
hereby declare that the following "is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
Myinvention is an improved device for com 
pressing hay, cotton, and like substances; and 
the object of the invention is to embody the 
operating parts in a simple and economical 
manner, and to provide a machinehaving great 
power and capable of being operated by hand 
or suitable driving power without great ex 
penditure of labor. . 
The invention therefore consists in certain 
devices and combination of devices whereby 
these objects are attained. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows the device in side elevation. Fig. 2 is 
a detail in Section. 
In these drawings, A is the sill, made of any 
suitable material, having secured to it suitable 
upright posts, PP, which support the frame of 
the machine. The box or frame O, in which 
the rammer works, rests upon the sill, and is 
also attached to the upright posts PP in any 
suitable manner. Integral with this box O 
and at one end thereof is the packing-box B, in 
which the material to be compressed is placed, 
and in which the rammer works. In the sides 
of this box B, and extending the whole length 
thereof, are cut slitsa, through which, when the 
bale has been formed, binding material for the 
same may be passed. The box B is provided 
with a door, C, through which the finished bale 
is removed, and said door, when secured in 
place, serves as one wall of the baling or com 
pressing chamber. This box B is also pro 
vided with a cover, D, to prevent the material 
from being forced out at the top. Pawls b, 
provided with a suitable number of teeth, are 
pivoted on the box at 0, and these teeth are 
adapted to engage with a bar, G, its ends pass 
ing through the central slit at and projecting 
out upon either side of the box, said bar being 
placed in front of the follower-beam and being 
pushed along with it. 
The follower mechanism consists of the beam 
So H, supported by suspension-arms SS, said 
arms being attached at the top to the cross 
pieces e e, which connect the tops of the up 
Beit known that I, SAMUELT. MCCANLESS, right posts, and pivotally secured to the beam 
H by loop-connections f. This means for Sup 
porting the beam H thus allows it to be swung 
back and forth. This beam is adapted to be 
moved either by suitable driving-power or by 
hand. In order to operate it by power, I pro 
vide a balance-wheel, K, to which power may 
be applied by a suitable driving-pulley. On 6o 
the same shaft with this wheel is a face-plate, 
L., on the circumference of which, in any rela 
tion to the center thereof, by the wrist-pin n, 
is secured the pitman M. The other end of 
this pitman is secured to the beam in any suit- 65 
able way, and when the wheel is revolved the 
beam is swung back and forth. In order to 
operate the beam by hand, a suitable handle, 
N, is provided at the end of the beam. The 
pitman is disconnected from the beam, and the 7o 
operator grasps the handle N and actuates the 
beam to and fro. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
The material to be compressed is fed in at the 
top of the box, and the ram, being set in no- 5 
tion, swings forward against the material to be 
compressed. While the ram is being retracted 
for another blow, the bar G is inserted into 
place directly in front of the material under 
going compression, and the pawls bb, falling 8o 
down upon the ends, hold it in position and 
prevent it from slipping back by reason of the 
elasticity of the hay, cotton, or other material. 
When sufficient quantity of material has been 
compressed to form the required bale, the ram 85 
is withdrawn, and the bar held against the mate 
rial by the pawls, and keeps it compressed un 
til it can be properly bound. The door is then 
opened, and the first-mentioned bale then acts 
as a back for another bale to be formed, and g ) 
said bale first formed is forced out by the sec 
ond bale. It will be understood that instead 
of the bar G being placed in position after the 
ram has been forced forward, it may at first 
be placed directly in front of the ram and 95 
forced along with it, thus acting, when it is 
locked by the pawls bb, to prevent the elastic 
ity of the material from forcing back the ram. 
It will be understood that the posts Support 
ing the beam H may be dispensed with, as the IOO 
beam can just as well be attached between tWO 
trees, or else pivoted to the side of the barn. 
3O 
O 
45 
2 
- 
357,400 
O 
25 
I claim- 
ing the naterial in its compressed position 
1. The combination, in a hay or cotton press, after it has been compressed by successive 
of a compression-chamber and aram suspended strokes of a reciprocating ram, and means 
in rear of said chamber from suitable support- for reciprocating said ram, consisting of the 
ing-posts and adapted to enter the chamber in fly-wheel adapted to be actuated by suitable 
its forward movement to compress the nate-power, the face-plate on the same shaft there 
rial contained therein, substantially as de- with, and the pitman connected to said face 
scribed. 
plate at one end and secured to the beam at 
2. In a hay or cotton press, the combination the other end, whereby when the wheel is ro. 
of a compression-chamber, a bar adapted to be tated the pitman will throw the beam forward 
inserted in front of the rammer to hold the against the material and back, substantially as 
material in its compressed position, pawlst b, described. 
for holding said bar in its advanced position, 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
and a reciprocating ram suspended from suit- to this specification in the presence of two sub 
able posts adapted to compress the material scribing witnesses. 
by intermittent strokes, substantially as de- 
scribed. 
3. In a hay or cotton press, the combination 
of a compression-clhamber, a device for hold- 
SAMUET, MCCANLESS. 
- 
Witnesses: 
C. McEw EN, 
G. F. PATTILT.O. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US357500.txt	(No Model.) 
C. G. OTIS, 
SHEL, 
No. 357,500, 
Patented Feb. 8, 1887. 
A. 
2. 
S2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
A '4- 
ce 
A. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
sATE 
sea 
OO 
si. 
  
 
 
WITNESSES : 
-4-4---/ 
IWWEWTOR 
wove & Otve. 
BW 
w 
. . 
. 
. 
ATTOEWEYS ' 
N. Peers, photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
::::: . 
. 
. " 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
> 
-- 
hex 
CHARLES G. OTIS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
A 
SHELL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 357,500, dated February 8, 1887, 
Application filed July 22, 186. Serial No. 208,748. (No model.) 
-- 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES G. OTIS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings, and in the State of 
5 New York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Projectiles, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to explosive project 
iles in which explosives--such as dynamite 
are used which are apt to explode by shock; 
and it consists in the combination, with the 
outer shell of the projectile having a chamber, 
of a canister containing the explosive fitted 
into said chamber, an air-cushion behind said 
canister, and a stop engaging the canister to 
hold the latter in the position to which it is 
thrown in the shell by inertia at the time of 
starting the shell. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
section of the projectile when at rest. Fig. 2 
is a longitudinal section showing the position 
of the canister after the projectile has been 
fired from a gun. Fig. 3 is a modification of 
the retaining-stop. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter. A designates the 
outer shell or body of my projectile, in which 
is formed a cylindrical chamber, B. In this 
chamber is placed the explosive, which, in the 
3o example shown in the drawings, is incased in 
a canister, C, which is provided with a pack 
ing, e, and fits closely into the chamber B, but 
is so much shorter than the same that when 
the canister is up against the forward end 
35 thereof sufficient air-space will remain be. 
tween the rear end of the canister and the plug 
D, which closes up the chamber B, to form an 
air-cushion behind the canister of sufficient 
elasticity to overcome the shock imparted to 
4o the projectile and the explosive contained in 
it, caused by being fired from an ordinary gun 
or cannon, and prevent the premature explo 
sion of the explosive in the projectile from said 
As the charge in the cannon from which this 
projectile is being fired explodes, the sudden 
shock will drive the latter suddenly forward, 
while the inherent inertia of the canister, 
to which no force has been directly applied, 
So will cause the air behind the canister to be 
compressed by this sudden forward motion of 
the outer shell until this inertia shall have 
shock. 
45 
 
been overcome, when the air behind the can 
ister will again expand and force the canister 
forward to its normal position against the for. 55 
ward end of the chamber B. This reaction of 
the air-cushion would force the canister against 
the forward end of the chamber with sufficient 
force to cause the explosion sought to be 
avoided by the air-cushion, above described. 
To avoid this I employ a retaining-stop, which 
acts upon the side of the canister, as I will now 
explain. In Figs. 1 and 2 this retaining-stop 
consists of a spring-pawl, a, mounted in the 
outer shell of the projectile, which engages 
ratchet-teeth b, cut into the side of the canis 
ter. In Fig. 1 the canisteris shown in its nor 
mal position against the forward end of the 
chamber B, and in Fig. 2 the canisteris shown 
in the position assumed after the projectile 
has been fired from a gun, being held in this 
osition by the pawla and the ratchet-teethb. 
In Fig. 3 a modification of the retaining-stop 
is shown, which consists of a ball, c, loosely 
placed in an inclined groove, d, the backward 75 
motion of the canister, caused by the shock, 
having a tendency to roll said ball into the 
deeper portion of the grooved, while the mo. 
tion of the canister in the opposite direction, 
caused by the reaction of the air-cushion, will 
cause the ball to rollinto the shallower portion 
of this groove, thereby jamming it against 
the canister and holding it in position. 
I do not desire to confine myself to the forms 
of retaining devices here shown; but any other 
suitable device may be used. 
When the length of the projectile is not an 
objection, a column of atmospheric air of suffi 
cient length, which, when compressed by the 
shock of firing, will prevent the canister from 
striking the rear end of the chamber, may be 
used; but when it is necessary to confine the 
projectile to a length that will not permit suffi. 
cient atmospheric air to be placed between the 
canister and the rear end of the chamber, I g5 
force compressed air into the space behind the 
canister, and thereby form an air-cushion of 
sufficient stiffness to prevent the latter from 
striking the rear end of the chamber B. 
either by a percussion-primer, a time-fuse, or 
any other well-known means. 
The vacuum created in front of the canister 
by the forward motion of the shell as the same 
The charge in the canister may be exploded too 
85 
90 
2 
357,500 
5. Letters Patent, is 
position to which it is thrownin the shell by in 
is being fired assists the air-cushion behind 
ertia at the time of starting the shell, substan 
the canister in preventing the latter from strik 
tially as described. 
ing the rear end of the chamber B. 
in testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
hand and seal in the presence of two subscrib- I5 
The combination, with the outer shell of a 
ing witnesses. 
- 
projectile having a chamber, B, of the canister 
A. 
C, fitted into said chamber, an air-cushion be. A Witnesses: 
hind the canister, and the retaining-stop en 
Io gaging the canister for holding the latter in the 
OTTo HUFELAND, 
WILLIAM MILLER. 
s 
-- 
CHARLES G. OTIS. L. s. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US357600.txt	T. J. HOUGHT ON. 
HARNEss ATTACHING DEVICE FOR, VEHICLES, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) . 
No. 357,600, 
Patented Feb. 15, 1887. 
 
 
 
Mz A35s 4 at 
2. 
. 
 
GSY Y ASSSSS-AO . 
222 2A 
ZZZZZZZZ2ZZZZZZZZZ 
WITNESSEN 
3fe 
(e, o/au- 
E. 2/ 
2z4A 2% 
2 242 
. Peters, photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
T. J. HOUGHT ON . 
HARNESSATTACHING DEVICE FOR, WEHICLES, 
No. 357,600, 
Patented Feb. 15, 1887. 
2.2% S/Esases, 
SNSSN66). NSNS 
d 
- 
Luis 
WiT NES & E & 
(2, 424 - 
4- 
24-7 /(24 
- 
NVENT OR 
2-1/4% 
2. 
22. 
Af 4. 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS J. HOUGHTON, OF LANCASTER, PENNSYLVANIA. 
HARNESS - ATTACHING DEVICE FOR VEHICLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 357,600, dated February 15, 1887. 
Application filed September 3, 1886. Serial No. 212,592, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, TEIOMAs J. HouGHTON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Lan 
caster, in the county of Lancaster, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Hitching Animals to Vehicles, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the manner of hitch 
ing horses between the shafts of vehicles; and 
the objects of my improvements are, first, to 
prevent accidental variation of the length of 
the traces or breeching in hitching the horse 
in the shafts, and, second, to have the trace 
and breeching attached and the shaft sup 
ported at the same point on each side of the 
horse. 
The results I accomplish by the at 
tainment of these objects are to always hitch 
up the animal with the same length of trace 
and breeching, so as to cause its movements to 
be immediately communicated to the vehicle, 
to prevent injury to the animal by making the 
breeching too tight and the danger of its be 
ing struck behind by making them too long, 
and to avoid the special fastening and loosen 
ing of the traces and breeching in hitching and 
unhitching. These objects I accomplish by 
the mechanism illustrated in the accompany. 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my device; Fig. 2, 
a view of the inner face of the tug-clasp plate, 
With part of the spring cut away; Fig. 3, a 
side view of the clasp closed, part of the plate 
being cut away to show the operating mech 
anism; and Fig. 4, a view of the same with the 
clasp open to receive the tug. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The tug A, which supports the shaft S, has 
a buckle, B, attached to the front edge of its 
inner side, and a ring, C, to the rear edge, to 
which the trace b and breeching c (shown in 
dotted lines in Fig.1) are respectively secured. 
On the lower face of the shaft S, where the tug 
embraces it, there is secured a plate, D, on the 
under side of which the tug-clasp E is fastened. 
The back end, e, of the clasp passes through 
and is pivoted in a slot, d, in the plate D, at f. 
This end e is connected with the vibrating end 
g of a spring, G, seated on the inner face of 
the plate, by the link F. The spring G is U 
shaped, one arm, g, resting on the plate and 
having a recess, h, cut into its outer end, which 
engages and bears against a correspondingly 
shaped bearing-plate, H, fastened on the face 
of the plate, the other arm being free and actu 
ating the clasp E to close when open. The 
bend of the spring rests in a recess, i, in the 
side of the lug I, fastened to the plate D. When 
closed, the front end, e, of the clasp rests against 
the plate in a collar, K, fastened to the said 
plate, and has a hole in the end which engages 
a teat, t, on the face of the plate, in the center 
of the collar. 
There is a trigger, L, pivoted in the slot d, 
at ), immediately back of the rear end of the 
clasp E, the front end of which is formed with 
a hooked catch, l, adapted to engage with a 
notch, e, formed in the base of a segmental 
lug, M, on the rear end of the clasp E. The 
trigger is located on the under side of the plate 
D and has an arm, n, through which the pivot 
y passes, projecting into theslot, with a shoul 
der, na', on the rear side, as a bearing for a 
spring, N, fastened to the inner face of the 
plate D and arranged to act thereon and to 
force the trigger into engagement with the 
notch e. 
The parts of the mechanism projecting be 
yond the inner face of the plate D are received 
by a suitable opening in the bottom of the shaft. 
When the clasp is opened to receive the tug, 
as shown in Fig. 4, it is brought into engage 
ment with the trigger, and after the tug is in 
proper position, by pressure upon the trigger 
the clasp is free to be closed by the action of 
the spring G. 
As will readily be seen, any forward or 
backward motion communicated by the ani 
mal to the vehicle is done through the tugs 
which support the shafts, and when the horse 
is hitched or unhitched the only thing neces 
sary is to connect the tug with or disconnect 
it from the clasp. 
I do not limit myself to the precise construc 
tion herein detailed, as it is evident that many 
slight changes in the construction and relative 
arrangement of the several parts of my de 
vice might be resorted to without departing 
from the spirit of my invention, but consider 
myself at liberty to make such changes as fairly 
fall within the spirit and scope of my invention. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOC 
O 
25 
40 
 
357, 
600 
act to keep the same closed, a trigger pivoted 
near the clasp, and a spring seated in the re 
cess and actuating the said trigger to engage 
in a notch in the clasp to hold the same open, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination, with the shaft, of a piv 
oted clasp adapted to be opened to receive a 
shaft-tug, a spring acting to close the clasp 
when open, a trigger pivoted near said clasp, 
and a Spring actuating said trigger to engage 
: With and hold the clasp open, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
THOMAS J. HOUGHTON. 
- 
25 
Witnesses: 
GEO. A. LANE, 
WM. R. GERHART, 
1. The combination, with the shaft-tug and 
shaft having a recess therein, of the slotted 
plate secured over said recess, the clasp piv 
oted near one end in the slot in the plate and 
constructed to have the other end opened to 
receive the shaft-tug, and the spring located 
in the recess and connected with the pivoted 
end of the clasp and acting to keep the other 
end thereof closed, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. . 
2. The combination, with the shaft having 
a recess therein, of the slotted plate secured 
over said recess, the clasp pivoted in the slot 
in the plate and constructed to be opened to 
receive a shaft-tug, the spring located in the 
recess and connected with the clasp So as to 
. 
. 
. 
. 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US357700.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 357,700. 
 
R. COWEN. 
KNEADER FOR INDIA RUBBER, &c. 
p: 
e. 
Patented Feb. 15, 1887. 
Within E2 is s E. 
2-ca- < (25 
e e 
7%. 6 p.a. Y 
Zoe-2 (6eeveze/. 
2-6-y rsrcycz teers 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT CowPN, OF, CAMBRIDGEPORT, AssIGNOR TO THE BOSTON WOVEN 
HosE COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Pateat No. 357,700, dated February 15, 1887, 
KNEADER FOR INDIA-RUBBER, &e: 
Application filed July 31, 1886, serial No. 509,648. (No model.) 
 
% 
To alt whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, RoRERTCOWEN, of Cam 
bridgeport, county of fiddlesex, and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improvement 
5 in Kneaders for India-Rubber, &c., of which 
the following description, in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters on the drawings representing like 
parts. 
ro This inavention has for its object to provide 
a self-feeding apparatus to be used in reducing 
or kneading substances. 
My invention has for its more particular 
object to provide a continuously-operating 
15 kneader to be used in kneading or working 
up gutta-percha or india-rubber. 
Prior to my invention gutta-percha or india- 
rubber has been fed between rollers, which 
crush or reduce the material placed between 
20 them, the said material falling from between 
s the rollers upon the floor or into a suitable re 
ceptacle, from whence it is taken by a work 
man and again placed between the said rollers. 
My present invention has for its object to 
25 provide a self-feeding apparatus, and thus 
make the process of kneading india-rubber or 
other material continuous, thereby dispensing 
with the constant services of a workman to 
feed the material into the apparatus. 
3o My invention consists, essentially, of feed 
rollers, between which the gutta-percha, india 
rubber, or other material is passed, combined 
with an endless belt to receive the said mate 
rial from the rollers and feed it again into the 
bite of the said rollers, as will be described. 
My invention also consists of feed-rollers, 
between which the gutta-percha or like mate 
rial is passed, and an endless belt to receive the 
said material from the rollers and feedit again 
4o into the bite of the said rollers, combined with 
a cleaner to remove particles of material ad 
hering to the endless belt. 
Figure 1 is a vertical transverse section of 
my unproved self-feeding kneader, the section 
45 being taken on linea ar, Fig. 2; and Fig. 2, a 
top or plan view of Fig. 1. . 
The sides A A', united by cross braces or 
rods a, provided with usualnuts, a, constitute 
a supporting-frame for the apparatus. Each 
5o side A A' is provided with alongitudinal slot, 
a, (see dotted lines, Fig. 1,) the said slot, re 
35 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. . 
. . 
. . 
. ." 
is fed. 
ceiving within it boxes bib', which form jour 
nal-bearings for shafts bb, respectively, the 
said shafts having mounted thereon rollers b 
b. The shaft bat one side of the apparas 55 
has mounted upon it a belt-pulley, and 
grooved pulley, c, and at the oppositeside of . 
the apparatus the said shaft has alited on 
it a pinion, c', in mesh with a gear, d, on the 
shaft b, the reliers b is through said pinion 6o 
aad gear rotating in opposite directions. 
... Each side A A', as herein shown has se: 
cured to its top by screws e. a fender, c', hav. 
ing its sides shaped as shown in Fig. 1 to 
conform to the periphery of the rollers b'b, 65 
the said leaders and rollers forming a hopper, 
lite which the gutta-percha or india-rubber 
The gutta-percha or india-rubber is first fed 
into the hopper referred to by the workman, 7o 
and is carried between the rollers. The india. 
rubber as it passes from the rollers falls upon 
an endless belt, d, passed over aroller, d, below 
and at the frontend of the apparatus, the said 
roller being supported in bearings d, attached 75 
to the sides AA, the said bearings beig 
herein shown as bars provided with a series 
of notches, d, in one of which the journals of 
the said roller rest. The endless belt dispair 
ried below the rollers b'b', one sheet or fold 8o 
being passed around a stationary cross-bar or 
roller, d, secured to the sides A.A at the rear 
of the apparatus, the other sheet 6f fold press 
ing against the roller 5, the said endless belt . 
being then passed 8ver a roller, d, having its 
bearings in arms d, the said arms being piv 
oted or hinged, as at d, to the sides A. A. 
In operation the rollers b b are rotated, as 
indicated by arrows 12, Fig. 1, by a be' 
in 
the pulley c, the said belt being driven 
ue 
rotation of a main or counter shaft, or in other 
well-known manner. The gutta-percha or in 
dia-rubber or other material, in a crude state, 
is placed by the workman in the hopper re 
ferred to, where it is bitten or seized by the 95 
rollers bb and carried betweenthem, it fall 
ing upon the upper fold of the endless beltd as 
it passes from the rollers. As the gutta-percha 
falls from the rollers upon the endless belt dit 
'is carried upon the said belt, between it and the 
roller b, to the top of the said roller, the belt 
moving in the direction indicated by arrow 
s 
. 
. 
Ioo 
2 
357,700 
5 
20, Fig.1. As the endless belt passes over 
the roller din the direction indicated by ar 
row 15 any particles of gutta-percha which 
might adhere thereto are removed therefrom 
by a cleaner e, shown as a brush revolving 
in the same direction as the roller d, as indi 
cated by arrow 16, the gutta-percha brought 
up by the endless belt and the particles re 
moved therefrom by the said cleaner being 
to again fed into the bite of the ruiterst, 
be again passed between said rollers, theae. 
...tion of the said rollers upon the gutta-percha 
or other like material being continued until 
the said material has been kneaded into a soft 
and pliable mass. The shaft e^ of the cleaner 
which removes the particles of material ad 
hering to the belt has its bearings, as shown, 
on top of the sides A A', and is secured in po 
sition by capse", . (see Fig. 2,) the said cleaner 
being rotated by a belt or rope, e, passed 
about a pulley, e', on its shaft e, and about 
the grooved pulley con the shaft b, the said 
belt or rope being crossed to impart reverse 
rotation to the said shaftband cleaner-shaft e. 
The gutta percha or other like material is 
fed continuously into the bite of the rollers b' 
b' until it has been sufficiently kneaded; but 
when it is desired to remove the said material 
the arnas dwill be turned from their full-line 
into their dotted-line position, (shown in Fig. 
... 1) the endless belt. d. at such time hanging 
loosely below the rollers b b, as shown by 
. dotted lines. 
The bearings d for the roller d, being 
notched, permit the said roller to be adjusted 
in its bearings to take up any slack in the 
endless belt which might arise after the said 
belt has been in operation for some time. 
35 
25 
. 3C 
. 
 
45 
I claim 
1. In an apparatus for kneading gutta-per- 4o 
cha, india-rubber, and like material, feed-roll 
ers between which the material is passed, com 
bined with an endless belt to receive the said 
material from the rollers, arranged across the 
space between the said rollers and extended 
under and partially about one of the said 
rollers, substantially as described, whereby 
he materiai delivered upon the said belt is by 
it again returned to the bite of the said rollers 
at their receiving side, to be again acted upon 5o 
E. the said rollers, as and for the purpose set 
orth. 
2. In an apparatus for kneading gutta-per 
cha, india-rubber, and like material, feed-roll 
ers between which the material is passed, an 
endless belt to receive the said material from 
the rollers, arranged across the space between 
the said rollers and extended under and par 
tially about one of the said rollers, substan. 
tially as described, whereby the material de 
livered upon the said belt is by it again returned 
to the bite of the said rollers at their receiving 
side, to be again acted upon by the said roll 
ers, combined with a cleaner to remove par 
ticles of material from the endless belt, sub- 65 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. . . 
55 
ROBERT COWEN. 
Witnesses: 
G. W. GREGORY, 
F. L. EMERY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US357800.txt	(No Model.) 
E. A. WESCOTT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
SAFETY GUARD FOR RAILWAY CARS, 
No. 357,800, 
 
 
Patented Feb. 15, 1887. 
N 
t 
. 
ser-- : 
s ei. 
sei gas: 
 
s 
1222222%2: 
6.-le A. We?e-6- 
2 for 62.) 
-27%zzeys. 
perers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
E. A. WESCOTT, 
SAFETY GUARD FOR RAILWAY CARs. 
No. 357,800, 
Patented Feb, 15, 1887. 
 
  
SGSSS 
\ 
To 
N N WN 
/ 
(SN 
 
222-azzz. 
e 4, rease? 
fift. 
Mh 0. (WKri?h 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
i 
EARL A. WESCOTT, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO MILTON BLANCHARD, OF SAME PLACE. 
SAFETY GUARD FOR RALWAY CARS. 
SPECIFICATION iorming part of Letters Patent No.357,800, dated February 15, 1887. 
Application filed June 29, 1886. Serial No. 206,585. 
No model.) 
k 
To aid, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EARL A. WESCOTT, of 
Minneapolis, in the county of Hennepin, and 
in the State of Minnesota, have invented cer 
5 tain new and useful Improvements in Safety. 
Guards for Railway-Cars; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof. 
My invention relates to safety-guards for 
Jo railway-cars; and it consists in certain pecul 
liarities of construction, as will be fully de 
scribed hereinafter with reference to the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure I represents a side elevation of a por 
15 tion each of two railway-coaches having my 
invention applied thereto; Fig. 2, a rear ele 
vation of the apron; Fig. 3, an edge view of 
this apron; Fig. 4, a detail transverse section 
showing the manner of attaching the guard 
2O Sections to the car, and Fig. 5 a top plan view 
of an inspection-gate. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, AA rep 
resent portions of railway-coaches having my 
safety-guard attached thereto. That portion 
25 of the guard that is Secured to the coachbod 
ies is preferably constructed of wood, though 
other suitable material may be employed, and 
said portion of the guard is usually composed 
of a series of longitudinal sections, B, that are 
3O secured to the under side of the respective 
coaches at or near the outer edges of the lat 
ter throughout their length, including the 
platforms C, said sections being of sufficient 
Width in a vertical direction as to come down 
35 to within a suitable distance of the ground, 
and Outside the wheels. 
The guard-sections B are preferably com-- 
posed of horizontal strips (t, joined to vertical 
strips b, these latter being arranged at suitable 
4O intervals and bolted or otherwise suitably se 
cured to hangers c, that depend from the un 
der side of the coach-bodies. These guard 
Sections are braced and prevented from swing 
ing by means of rods d, each having one of its 
45 ends detachably secured at or near the bottom 
of a section, and the other likewise connected 
to the under side of the coach, as shown by 
Fig. 4, said rods being arranged at Suitable 
intervals. 
In order to permit workmen to pass under 
So 
6) 
the coaches for the purpose of inspecting the 
trucks, repairing, &c., I provide one or more 
of the guard-sections with a door, D, that is 
illustrated in detail in Fig. 5, and those sec 
tions that come at the ends of the coaches are 55 
provided with openings ef, for the respective 
ends of the truck-springs E and axle - boxes 
F, these end sections having the lower one of 
their horizontal strips a extended, as shown 
at a', Fig. 1, so as to come out in line with the 
sides of the adjacent platforms G, and are se 
cured to vertical hangers g, that depend from 
said platforms. Secured to the steps H of the 
platforms G are apron-sections II, that form 
extensions of the main guards, and are pro 
vided with slots h, through which pass the 
vertical hangers g, said apron-sections being 
composed of suitable flexible material, prefer 
ably strong canvas. The stiffening-strips i of 
each apron-section I has secured thereto plates 7o 
l, to which are secured the inner ends of spi 
ral or other suitable springs, in m', the outer 
ends of these latter parts being connected to 
strips in n', said apron-sections overlapping 
each other when the coaches are coupled to- 75 
gether. When the coaches are united, the 
strips n', secured to the apron-sections I, are 
detachably connected to the springs in', that 
are in turn secured to the plates (, attached to 
the stiffening-strip i on the apron-section I. 
The strips in are united at their inner ends by 
means of the springs in to the plates k on the 
stiffening-strip i of the apron-section I, While 
their outer, or free ends pass through slots p in 
this latter section to come over upon the One, 
I, as illustrated by Figs. 2 and 3. 
By the construction of the apron-sections 
and the means for uniting the same, as above 
described, they are allowed free movement, 
one upon the other, to compensate for the Va 
rying motion of the coaches while running, 
especially in passing around curves in the 
track, to thereby prevent straining or tearing 
of said sections. 
The main guard-sections Brender it impos 
sible for a person falling from the end or side 
of the coaches to be struck or run over by the 
wheels, and the apron composed of the sec 
tions II being connected to the steps of the 
coaches to fill the gap between each two there- IOO 
95 
ing of a depending structure secured to the 
body of the cars, outside the wheels thereof, 
and extended to within a sufficient distance of 
the ground, and flexible apron-sections secured 
to the steps or platforms of each car to form 
extensions of the main structure, the oppos 
ing apron-sections of each two cars throughout 
a train overlapping and having a yielding 
play one upon the other, as set forth. 
5. In a safety-guard for railway-cars, that 
consists of a depending structure secured to 
the body of the cars, outside the wheels there 
of, and extended to within a sufficient distance 
of the ground, and flexible apron-sections that 
are secured to the car steps or platforms to 
form extensions of the main structure, the 
apron-sections of one car provided with suit 
able springs that engage the apron-sections on 
the opposing car, and the latter of said sec 
tions having connected thereto by suitable 
springs securing-strips that come outside over 
the former sections, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand, at Minneapolis, in 
the county of Hennepin and State of Minne 
sota, in the presence of two witnesses. 
EARL A. WESCOTT. 
Witnesses: 
MILTON BLANCHARD, 
E. R. BRENT. 
SO 
55 
fo 
357,800 
4. A safety-guard for railway-cars, consist- 35 
EO 
25 
of persons falling from said steps or the plat 
form are likewise prevented from being struck 
or run over by the wheels, as the tendency is 
to throw such person clear of the track. 
Although I have described my invention 
more particularly in connection with railway 
passenger-coaches, the same is equally appli 
cable to freight or street cars. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
l. A safety-guard for railway-cars, consist 
ing of a depending structure secured to the 
bodies of said cars, to come outside the wheels 
thereof and extend to within a sufficient dis 
tance of the ground, and detachably-united 
apron-sections of canvas or other suitable ma 
terial secured to the respective car steps or 
platforms of each car to form extensions of the 
main structure, as set forth. 
2. A safety-guard for railway-cars, consist 
ing of a depending structure secured to the 
bodies of said cars throughout their length, 
and outside the wheels thereof, and this struct 
ure provided with inspection doors and open 
ings for the ends of the truck-springs and axle. 
boxes, as set forth. 
3. A safety guard for railway-cars, consist 
ing of a series of sections, each comprising 
horizontal and vertical strips arranged at suit 
able intervals, each section removably con 
nected to a car-body, and detachable brace 
rods secured at their respective ends to said 
sections and under side of the car, as set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US357900.txt	(No Model.) 
D. T. BOYLE, 
AUTOMATIC HOSE REEL. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 357,900, 
Patented Feb. 15, 1887. 
Z5 
6 
7. 
Z V 
e17 
7. 
ere 
C 
C/ 
TH 
ae 
m 
2 
62 A 
12zesses. 
5-s--- 
- 
Zzzez 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
D. T. BOYLE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 357,900, 
AUTOMATIC HOSE REEL. 
Patented Feb. 15, 1887. 
 
E 
al war--- 
 
a 
 
 
 
ege e aarara 
 
 
 
Eas s E es 
 
 
 
p 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL T. BOYLE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
EDWARD S. McDONALD, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC HOSE REEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 357,900, dated February 15, 1887. 
Application filed April 16, 1886. 
Serial Ng. 199,154. (No model.) 
To all, whon it may concei'n: 
Beit known that I, DANIELT. BOYLE, a cit 
izen of the United States of America, residing 
at Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Automatic Hose-Reels, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to devices for coiling 
hose that is connected with the stand-pipe in 
buildings in such a manner that it is instantly 
ready for immediate use and that, on removing 
the hose from the reel, will turn on the water 
automatically; and it consists, principally, of 
arms arranged to swing from a horizontal to a 
vertical position, upon or around which arms 
the hose is coiled, and of devices that, on re 
moving the hose-nozzle from its holders, will 
automatically uncouple the arms to swing and 
release the hose to drop upon the floor; also, 
in a connection between the hose-holding arms 
and a stand-pipe valve, by which, on drop 
ping the hose, the water will be turned on au 
tomatically, all as will be more fully herein. 
after described and specifically claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a perspective view of my reel with 
the hose wound thereupon; Fig. 2, a similar 
view of the reel after disconnecting the hose; 
and Figs. 3, 4, and 5 represent elevations and 
vertical sections of parts detached. 
Corresponding letters in the several figures 
of the drawings designate like parts. 
A and A denote two standards secured. 
against a wall-board, B, and constituting the 
frame for the reel. These standards, for con 
venience, and for making them light and yet 
strong, I have composed of wrought-iron pipe 
sections a, connected by T-couplings b, and 
with their ends to elbow-couplings c, that again 
are connected to disk-plates d, secured by 
wood-screws against the wall-board B. Be 
tween these standards A A and into T-coup 
lings b are pivotally secured two horizontal 
shafts, E and F, each provided with two ra 
dial arms, e and f, secured to near the ends of 
such shafts. These shafts and their arms are 
also made of pieces of Wrought-pipe connected 
Above shaft E and parallel there with is pro- 55 
by T-couplings, and the end of the arms are 
closed by acorn-shaped caps, screwed there 
upon. Upon the center of each shaft E and 
F is sleeved, and secured by a set-screw, a cam 
collar, I and J. 
jected through a hole in standard A a shaft, 
K, one end of which is socketed in standard 
A and the other end is journaled in a bracket, 
L, forming one-half of the clasp for holding the 
coupling end of the hoze-nozzle MI. This shaft 
K, E also prefer to make of pipe, and for hold 
ing it laterally in position I Secure upon it a 
collar, l, that bears against standard A. 
Upon shaft K is secured, by a set-screw, a 
crank, i, engaging with the toe of cam I of 65 
shaft E, for Sustaining such shaft on a position 
that its arms e will be on a horizontal line. 
Adjacent to bracket L is secured upon shaft 
K, by a set-screw, a hook-cam, k, and the bifur 
cated hub portion of a curved arm, N, is loosely 
sleeved upon such shaft, embracing hook-cam 
k, which arm forms the Outer half of the clasp 
for holding the coupling end of the hose-nozzle 
M, and between the hub-shanks of such arm 
is pivoted a dog, n, that will engage with the 
hook of cam k for sustaining the arm N on its 
upright position. The pointed end of nozzle 
M is held in a V-shaped spring-clasp, O, se 
cured upon a separate wooden block fastened 
against the wall. On turning shaft F to 
raise its arms to a horizontal position its cam 
J will butt against the lug of a plate, P, se 
cured against the wall-board B by wood-screws, 
and will prevent the arms from being raised 
above the horizontal line. The arms e being 
locked on their horizontal position by crank 
i, engaged with cam I, the hose Q is wound 
upon these arms and under arms f, that are 
suspended by the hose to be on their horizon 
tal position, and the nozzle M is placed into 
clasp O and between bracket L and curved 
arm N, which latter, on being turned upward 
against such nozzle M, will be locked on its 
vertical position by dog in engaging with cam 
hook k, and when such hose is to be used b 
grasping and removing the nozzle, the arm 
N, being turned away, will rotate shaft K. 
with crank i, which latter thereby will be dis. 
y 95 
90 
75 
fC) 
25 
35 
AO 
45 
 
357,900 
forth. 
engaged from cam I, whereby shaft E is re. i, substantially as and for the purpose set 
leased for its arms e to swing downward and 
the hose suspended thereon to drop to the 
2. In a hose-reel, the shaft E, having arms 
floor, whence, on pulling it along, it will 
e and cam I, and the shaft K, having crank i, 
straighten out. 
in combination with shaft F, having armsf, 
The hose Q may be permanently coupled to 
and cam J., engaging with the lug of a plate, 
the stand-pipe R or to a valve or faucet, S, se 
P, all substantially as and for the purpose set 
Cured to such stand-pipe, and to this valve S the 
forth. 
shaft E may be coupled in such a manner that, 
3. In a hose-reel, the shaft E, having arms 
on releasing such shaft, the dropping of arms 
e and cam I, and shaft F, having arms f, in 
e by the weight of the hose will open such 
combination with shaft K, having crank i, 
valve to turn on the water. In the drawings 
hook-cam k, and arm N, with dog in, all con 
structed and arranged substantially as and for 
I have shown one such device that may be ap 
plied, in which the faucet S is provided with 
the purpose set forth. 
a crank, S, for operating it, and which crank 
4. In a hose-reel, the combination of the 
is coupled to a crank, t, mounted upon a shaft, 
following elements, viz: shaft E, having arms 
at, that is a rigid extension of shaft E. By 
e and calm I, and shaft F, having arms.f, shaft 
this arrangement, as will be seen, the rotating 
K, having crank i, hook-cam lic, and arm N, 
motion of shaft E, with its arms turning from 
with dog n, bracket L, and clasp O, the whole 
being constructed and arranged substantially 
a horizontal to a vertical position, will be 
transmitted to the faucet or valve. However, 
as described, to operate as specified. 
I do not wish to be restricted to this particu 
5. In a hose-reel, the combination of the 
lar construction, since, according to the rela 
following elements, viz: shaft E, having arms 
tive positions of the hose-reel and stand-pipe 
e and cam I, shaft K, having crank i, hook 
valve, the connections may require a different 
cam k, and arm N, with dog n, bracket L, clasp 
arrangement. 
O, shaft F, with arms f and cam J, and plate 
It will be readily seen that the above-de 
P, the whole being constructed and arranged 
scribed hose-reel has many advantages over 
substantially as described, to operate as speci 
rotary reels, it being more simple, cheaper to 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
manufacture, takes up less room, is easier to 
attach, is less liable to get out of order, and 
the hose is quicker unwound and therefore 
more ready for immediate use. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
DANIEL. T. BOYLE. 
fied. 
M 
What I claim is 
1. In a hose-reel, the shaft EF, having arms 
ef and cam I, and the shaft K, having crank 
Witnesses: 
ANTON SCHOENINGER, 
HARRIs W. HUEHL. 
4C 
5 
55 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358000.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 358,000. 
 
. 
J. R, ODGERS, 
NUT LOCK, . 
Patented Feb. 15, 1887. 
WWSwisssss 
7%.2%agists. 
rSly & wb-y 
c% &c., d1-0 
n 
CaScrives a 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C., 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN RODGERS, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
NUT. LOC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 358,000, dated February 15, 1887, 
Application filed March 4, 1886. Serial No. 194,073. 
(No model.) 
In operation the wire c is first bent in the 
form described. The loop i is placed over the 
bolt at and the nut b screwed in place. The 
locking portion, which is bent at a right angle, 
is forced in place, the short curves d andf 55 
resting on the flange g of the rail, thus pre 
venting the nut b from turning or becoming 
loose. 
The wire or rod may be bent in a number 
of ways equally as effective as that described, 
(see Figs, 2 and 3,) without departing from the 
spirit of my invention. Therefore I do not con 
fine myself to the exact forms as shown and 
described. 
I prefer to use a nut-lock such as shown at 
Fig. 3 when an angular fish-plate is used in 
making the joint of the rails. The space be 
tween the lower side of the nut band the flange 
of the splice-bar g is not sufficient to allow 
either of the other two shown to be used. 
It will be observed that the coil i Serves as 
the nut-washer, and that I have two points, 
ce, of impingement against two edges of the 
nut, and two points of impingement upon the 
rail-base. 
Ian aware that in Letters Patent No. 67,469 
a nut-locking device is shown having but one 
bearing against the edge of the nut, and but 
one bearing below the lower edge of the not; 
and such device I disclaim, believing it to be 
inefficient for the purpose intended. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
IS 
the coil i, bent at c 0 to impinge at two points 
against two edges of the nut, and arched be 
low the nut so as to afford two points, df. Of 
impingement upon the rail-flange, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, in a wire nut - lock 
formed of a single piece, of the rectangle C c, 
the two bearings dif, and the coil i, as shown 
and described. 
1. The improved wire nut-lock consisting of 85 
90 
75 
JOHN RODGERS. 
Witnesses: 
W. C. BARR, 
MI. E. HARRISON. 
w 
to 
To aid, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN RoDGERs, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Pittsburg, in 
the county of Allegheny and State of Pennsyl 
5 vania, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Nut-Locks; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it per 
tains to make and use the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
nut-locks, the object being to provide a nut 
lock of simple and durable construction that 
may be readily applied or detached for the 
purpose of removing the nut; and with this 
end in view my invention consists in a single 
piece of spring-wire bent in a peculiar form, 
one end of which is looped or wound about 
the bolt, as will be more fully set forth here 
inafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of my improved nut-lock as 
25 applied to the nut and bolt of a railway-rail 
joint. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of a modifica 
tion of my improvement. Fig. 3 is a side ele 
vation of another modification, showing the 
manner of attaching the same to the nut, the 
sides of which are in a horizontal and verti 
cal position, or the nut having a quarter-turn, 
as shown by the dotted lines on the drawings. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 
5 is a front elevation of a modification of the 
others shown. 
To put my invention into practice with the 
ordinary bolt, ct, and nut b of a railway-rail 
joint, I provide a spring-wire or light rod, 
c, and loop one end of the same about the bolt 
a, which takes the place of a washer. The wire 
or rod ( is now bent downwardly a short dis 
tance, and with a reverse curve forms an arch 
beneath the nut lb. The curve of the rod c is 
again reversed and allowed to rest against the 
under side of the nut b, and continuing along 
this side until bent at a right angle to fit neatly 
along one of the vertical sides of the nut b. 
The short curves d and fon the lower portion 
of the wire c rest on the outwardly-project 
45 
5o ing flanges g of the railway-rail. 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358100.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. YOUNG. 
NAII, MACHINE, 
No. 358,100, 
Patented Feb. 22 887. 
2. 
 
SS 
  
 
Si 3. St 
E% ZE 7. 
  
ES 
 
 
EEE 
 
Z WiTMESSES 
4 
  
  
 
 
 
N 
N 
 
 
a Jam-Azizi my 
2. ASAZE 2 
EEEEEEE 
Eat SaaS 
immuno a 
sers, 
y 
 
 
 
s 
I 
EEE 
a Oro 
IWWEWTOE 
9 Z/ft. Young w 
%ay,24 
Attorneys 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH M. YOUNG, OF JOHNSTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
NA - MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 358,00, dated February 22, 1887. 
Application filed May 7, 18; 6. serial No. 201,486. (No model.) 
5. 
To cult, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH M. YoUNG, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Johns 
town, in the county of Cambria and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Nail and Spike Ma 
chines; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to letters or figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of a plan view. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudi 
nal section. Fig. 3 is a transverse section 
through the feed-rolls, and Fig. 4 is a trans 
verse section showing the head-block, &c. 
Fig. 5 is a detail. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
nail-cutting machines, the main object being 
to cut the nails rapidly and without loss of 
material from a prepared strip of iron hav 
ing on each edge a head-flange; and it consists 
in the construction and novel arrangement of 
parts, hereinafter described, illustrated in the 
drawings, and pointed out in the claims hereto 
appended. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the main frame of the 
machine, of general rectangular form, Sup 
ported on proper legs, and having journaled 
upon its sides the transverse shaft B, which 
can be rotated by means of the crank-handle 
b, or by a pulley and belt from any suitable 
source of power. 
c is a wheel or disk sectared upon the shaft 
B and carrying the cutter-dies C C upon its 
periphery. The said dies are of similar shape 
and are Secured upon the periphery of the 
wheel cat diametrically-opposite points. The 
die C has the shank-cutting edge c, the head 
cutting edge c, and the cutting-edge c, uniting 
the former two edges and at right angles to 
each. The head-cutting edge c projects out 
ward beyond the shank-cutting edge c and is 
adjacent to the inner surface of the wheel c. 
The shank-cutting edge c is beveled or in 
clined from its meeting point with the joining 
cutting-edge c outward and toward the center 
of the wheel c. The cutter-die C has cutting 
edges c', c, and c, in all respects similar to 
the edges of the die C, except that the head 
cutting edge is adjacent to the outer surface of 
the wheel c, and the shank-cutting edge is bev 
eled or inclined inward and toward the center 
of the said wheel. 
D is a pinion on the shaft B, outside of its 
bearing, adjacent to the crank-handle b, and 
meshing with a gear-wheel, d, the axle of 
which has a bearing in the side of the main 
frame A. The said gear-wheel meshes with a 
gear-wheel, d", also having its axle journaled 
in the side of the main frame, and which 
meshes with a pinion, d, on the end of the 
axle of a feed-roller, E, extended outside of its 
bearing. The pinion d meshes with an equal 
sized pinion, d, on the extended axle of a 
roller, E, situated vertically above the roller 
E. The ends of the axles of said rollers have 
bearings in journal-boxes resting within the 
journal-frames FF, which rise from the main 
frame A at suitable points, the lower journal 
boxes, e, being fixed in position, while the 
upper journal-boxes, e, are rendered verti 
cally adjustable by means of the screws e, 
which pass through thread-openings in the top 
rails of the frames F, and have their ends im 
pinging upon said boxes, so that the distance 
between the rollers E E can be altered to Suit 
different thicknesses of metal in the nail-plate. 
G is the nail-plate, having on its opposite 
edges the head-flanges gg, respectively, which 
flanges stand out from each side of the plate, 
the web of the latter being of uniform thick 
ness. The said flanges enter the opposing 
circumferential grooves g g in the rollers E 
E when the nail-plate is fed between said 
rollers. 
Secured to the end of the main frame A is 
a feeding-table, g, on which the end of the 
nail-plate is rested when the said plate is to 
be fed to the rollers. 
His a guide-plate secured to uprights ris 
ing from the main frame and situated on the 
inner side of the rollers in position to receive 
on its upper surface the nail-plate after the 
same passes the rollers. h. is a similar but 
longer plate overlapping the plate H. Be 
tween the two is the guideway for the nail 
plate to enter and move toward the cutters. 
85 
95 
IOO 
f O 
25 
45 
 
2 
358,100 
to 
75 
it h are transverse bars having their ends 
secured to proper points of the main frame 
and overlying and secured to the plate h, so 
as to keep the same down in position to prop 
erly guide the nail-plate. 
The cutter - dies C C are secured to the 
wheel c on the upper dies, the lower dies and 
operating mechanism being as follows: , 
I is an eccentric on the shaft B, near the end 
opposite to that carrying the crank-handle b, 
and having attached an eccentric rod or pit 
man, i, which has its end pivoted to the end 
of the outer arm of a lever, J, pivoted near 
its center upon the lid of the main frame A. 
The end of the inner arm of the said ever is 
pivoted to one end of a link-bar, i, the other 
end of which is pivoted to the inner rail or 
head-block, k, of a vibrating frame, K, the 
outer rail, k', of which is connected to the said 
head-block by the link-bar I, having its ends. 
pivoted upon the head-block and outer rail, 
respectively. Both the head-block k and outer 
rail, l', are pivoted near their centers upon 
the bed of the main frame, so that they will 
vibrate parallel to each other when actuated 
by the eccentric-rod, lever J, and link-bar i. 
L is a vibrating lever pivoted about cen 
trally upon the bed of the main frame at a 
point a sufficient distance outward from the 
rail lic and considerably shorter than said rail. 
l is a link-bar having one end pivoted upon 
the rail k' and the other end upon the lever 
L, the pivot-points of said link-hair being on 
the same side of the pivot-points of the rail k' 
and lever L. As the distance between the 
link-bar and pivot of the lever L is shorter 
than that between the same and the pivot of 
the bar k, the link-bar will have a larger an 
gle of vibration than the said rail or than the 
frame K. 
m n' are link-bars having the Outer ends 
pivoted, respectively, to the ends of the inner 
and outer arms of the vibrating lever L and 
their inner ends to the rectangular reciprocat 
ing die-blocks M. M', which have their edges 
beveled, so as to move in beveled or dovetailed 
ways in 
ni", made transversely in the head 
block lic of the frame K. The inner ends of the 
blocks M M are provided with the cutting or 
shearing edges in it, respectively, and the blocks 
are situated one on each side of a die-block, O, 
secured to the head-block I, and vibrating 
therewith, the said block Ohaving on itsinner 
end a shearing or cutting edge, o, as shown. 
P is a guide and holding bar having its ends 
secured to the head-block k, outside of the die 
blocks MM", and provided on its under surface 
with grooves PP, to receive the upper parts 
of the head-flanges g g of the nail-plate G. 
The parts are so arranged that the frame K. 
as it vibrates presents the cutting-edge of the 
die. block O adjacent to and parallel with the 
edge of the cutter-die C as the same is brought 
to said block by the rotation of the wheel c, and 
at the same time the die-block M is retracted, 
so that the head-cutting edge c will cut the 
flange 9 to form one side of the nail-head, while 
the shank-cutting edge c' cuts the web of the 
nail-plate, and the die-block Misprotracted to 
support the projecting part of the flange 9, 
which forms part of the head of the next suc 
ceeding nail. When the frame K. vibrates in 
the opposite direction and the cutter-die C 
comes to the block O, the said succeeding nail 
is cut from the nail-plate and finished, as de 
scribed above in regard to the first nail or the 
first cut on the nail-plate. 
Having described this invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a nail-cutting lnachine, the combina 
tion of the cutter. dies CC, each provided with 
the edges c' c c' and secured to the periphery 
of the wheel c, the grooved roller's EE, act 
uated by gearing from the main shaft, the guide 
plate H, the eccentric I and pitman i, the lever 
J and link-bar i, the vibrating frame K, the 
cutter-bar O, attached thereto, the vibrating 
lever L, the link-bar l, the link. bars in in, and 
reciprocating die-blocks MM", all constructed 
and arranged substantially as specified. 
2. In a nail-machine, the combination of the 
cutter-dies Secured to the periphery of thero 
tating wheel on the main shaft, the roller E, 
rotated by means of gearing from the main 
shaft, the roller. E", rotated from the roller E 
and rendered vertically adjustable by the slid 
ing journal-blockse and set-screwse", the guide 
plate H, the vibrating frame actuated by means, 
substantially as described, from the main shaft, 
the oppositely-reciprocating die-blocks MM, 
the die-block O, moving with the vibrating 
frame, and the guide-bar P, secured to the vil 
brating frame and provided with the grooves 
p for the head-flanges g g of the nail-plate G, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereoff affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPI . YOUNG. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. P. LINTON, 
NICKEL A. EICHENSEEIER, 
ICO 
IOS 
I5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358200.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. HAWKES, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
COMPOUND FOR TREATING COAL AND OTHE R F UEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 358,200, dated February 22, 1887. 
Application filed August 26, 1886. Serial No. 211,922. (No specimens.) 
O 
To all whom, it nually concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. HAWKES, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Compounds for Treating 
Coal and other Fuel, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention relates to a new compound 
for treating coal and other fuel; and its object 
is to consume Smoke, gas, and soot, and thus 
cause a Saving of the fuel. 
The improved compound consists of the fol 
lowingingredients, in about the following pro 
portions, viz : four pounds sal-ammoniac, 
twenty pounds sal-niter, fifteen pounds sal 
soda, twenty pounds Glauber's salt, forty-one 
pounds common salt; total, onehundred pounds. 
These ingredients may be mixed together in 
any manner in or about the proportions as 
aforesaid, and preferably finely pulverized, 
and the mixture is then dissolved in a suit 
able amount of hot water to make a Saturated 
solution, and to said solution is added cold 
water according to the nature of the fuel for 
which it is to be used. In practice I add a 
greater quantity of Water for soft fuel and less 
for hard fuel, 
m 
I usually dissolve six pounds of the mixed 
ingredients in about eight gallons of water, 3o 
and this quantity is applied to each ton of fuel, 
Such as coal. 
The liquid compound is to be sprinkled over 
the coal or other fuel when in bulk or when 
in the act of filling a bin or other receptacle, 35 
or in any other suitable manner, according to 
the nature of the fuel, and the liquid allowed 
to dry before the fuel is ignited, or the fuel 
used immediately after treatment, accCording 
to the use for which it is intended. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
A compound for treating fuel, consisting of 
sal-ammoniac, sal-niter, sal-soda, Glauber's 
salt, and common salt, and water, mixed to 45 
gether in the proportions herein described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses, on this 24th day of August, 
A. D. 1886. 
claim is 
4O 
WILLIAM E. HAWKES, 
Witnesses: 
ALBAN ANDREN, 
HENRY CHADBOURNE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358300.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MOSES SAMELSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MANUFACTURE OF LIQUID EXTRACTS OF COFFEE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 358,300, dated February 22, 1887. 
Application filed September 10, 1885. Serial No. 176,743. (No specimens.) 
O 
15 
To all whom it may concern: 
which has been allowed to stand a compara 
Beit known that I, MosEs SAMELSON, oftively few days loses many of its delicate prop 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
erties. 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
By the ordinary process of making coffee 
S the Manufacture of Liquid Extracts of Coffee, 
much of the flavoring matter and that which 55 
which improvement is fully set forth in the gives to the coffee its greatest delicacy of flavor 
following specification. 
will pass off by evaporation. The process 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
which I am now about to describe can be used 
liquid coffee containing properties which have 
in the treatment of the coffee-bean in its natu 
never been secured in liquid coffee made in 
any other way. 
ral condition, as well as the roasted coffee- 6c 
bean and the roasted and ground coffee-bean, 
To enable those skilled in the art to under 
all of which it is intended to include in the 
stand the nature of my invention, I make the 
word coffee' used alone, except when it ob 
following statement of the nature thereof, 
viously refers to the liquid. 
All coffee possesses in a greater or less de 
A quantity of coffee, preferably freshly 
gree properties which give to it its flavor. 
ground and freshly roasted in the ordinary 
The flavoring matter consists 
way, is placed in a vessel, and a sufficient 
First, of certain volatile aromatic oils and 
quantity of water is then added to thoroughly 
fatty substances, which can be extracted from 
saturate it. As a general rule a quart of wa 
coffee at quite a low temperature by the pro 
ter will properly saturate a pound of coffee. 
cess hereinafter described, but which, by rea 
The whole is kept at a temperature of about 
son of their volatile nature, at high tempera 
40 Fahrenheit for three or fol: hours. The 
tures evaporate. 
quantity of water that can be used to the best 
Second, of caffeine and kindred substances, 
advantage, as well as the temperature and the 
5 which can be extracted from the coffee-bean 
length of time, will vary somewhat with dif- 75. 
at a moderate temperature by the process here 
ferent kinds of coffee and with different Con 
inafter described. These substances are also 
ditions of the coffee. 
somewhat volatile, and when heated to a high 
At the end of the period of saturation the 
temperature are liable to be to a greater or less 
mixture is placed in a cylinder, the sides of 
extent lost. 
which have small perforations or openings, u 
Third, of various astringent acids, known as 
and the mass is subjected to a very high press 
caffeo-tannic acid, caffeic acid, and by 
ure, preferably at least two hundred thousand 
other names. These acids can only be ex 
to six hundred thousand pounds, to separate 
tracted from the coffee at a high temperature, 
the liquid from the coffee. The openings 
and as liquid coffee is ordinarily made there 
should be so small that the liquid alone will 85 
is an undue predominance of the flavor of the 
pass through. This pressure should prefer 
astringent acids on account of the greater or 
ably be continued until the liquid is entirely 
less evaporation of the other classes of flavor 
separated from the coffee. The liquid thus 
- 
ing matter. 
obtained should be used to saturate fresh cof 
It will be obvious to any person skilled in 
fee, and the operation above described can be 
the art that the process hereinafter described 
repeated as many times as may be necessary. 
may be varied in its details without materially 
Obviously the manner in which and means by 
departing from the invention. 
which this pressure is applied are immate 
To retain and preserve in liquid coffee all 
rial. Any ordinary press capable of giving 
the flavors produced by the three classes of 
the required pressure may be used-such, for 
flavoring matter hereinbefore described has 
example, as the box-presses described in Let 
not hitherto been accomplished. The volatile 
ters Patent granted to Geo. B. Boomer, July 
nature of much of the flavoring matter can be 
8, 1884, and numbered, respectively,301,794 
readily appreciated from the well-known fact and 301,795. As such presses constitute no 
95. 
o 
50 that in a normal temperature roasted coffee part of my invention, and are, moreover, fully roo 
30 
35 
45 
2 
358,300 
15 
25 
O 
and clearly explained in the patents above re 
ferred to, it is not thought necessary to de 
Scribe them herein. 
The liquid will be found to contain vol atile 
aromatic oils and fatty substances, which serve 
to give delicacy and flavor to the coffee, but 
which, by the ordinary method of making cof 
fee, are in part or wholly lost, by reason of their 
Volatile nature, at high temperatures. This 
liquid will not contain any considerable quan 
tity of caffeine or kindred flavoring matter or 
astringent acids, both of which exist in the 
coffee, but will not be extracted therefronto 
any great extent. The coffee from which the 
liquid has thus been extracted is again placed 
in any proper vessel, -saturated with fresh 
Water, and, thus saturated, is allowed to stand 
for some thirty hours, the mass being kept at 
a temperature of about 90 Fahrenheit. The 
amount of water requisite for this saturation 
will generally be very nearly the same as that 
required for the first saturation; but the 
amount of water, as well as the temperature 
and the time necessary, will vary somewhat 
With the different kinds of coffee and the con 
ditions of the same. The liquid is again sepa 
rated from the solid by subjecting the satu. 
rated mass to a very heavy pressure, in the 
manner heretofore described, or in any other 
convenient way. This process can be repeated 
as often as may be desired. The product ob 
tained will be a liquid containing a large 
amount of caffeine and kindred flavoring mat 
ter, which serve to give delicacy and fullness 
of flavor to the coffee, but which, by the or 
35 dinary methods of making coffee, are to a 
great extent lost, owing to their somewhat 
volatile nature at a high temperature. 
The 
dried coffee is again saturated with hot water, 
preferably at but not above boiling-point. 
It is not intended that the coffee should be 
boiled. On the contrary, this is to be 
avoided, as it extracts from the coffee flavor 
ing matters which are very disagreeable to the 
taste, and which will not be extracted by any 
of the processes described in this application. 
If water be taken at the boiling-point and the 
coffee saturated therewith, the latter would 
not of course be boiled, as the temperature of 
the water would immediately be lowered sev 
eral degrees. As a general rule, about the 
same amount of water will be necessary as in 
the previous Saturations. 
The saturated mass 
is allowed to stand for half an hour. The 
amount of water, the degree of heat, and length 
of time requisite will vary somewhat with 
different kinds of coffee and the condition 
thereof. The liquid is then separated from the 
solid by the means heretofore described, or in 
any other convenient way, and the operation 
may be repeated just as heretofore. The re 
sult will be a liquid containing astringent 
acids, which give to the coffee a bitter taste 
and form the 'heavy parts of the coffee. 
The three liquids obtained from the three pro 
cesses aforesaid are then mixed together, and 
the mixture will be found to have a high de 
SO 
55 
gree of richness and fullness of flavor, owing 
to the preservation of a great proportion of 
the best of the flavoring matters of the coffee, 7o 
as hereinbefore described. 
The number of times that each of the oper 
ations aforesaid must be repeated may of 
course be. varied. A good result is produced 
by repeating them until the entire mass of the 75 
three liquids obtained has the same weight as 
the coffee which has been worked by them, 
and about one-half the bulk of said coffee 
that is, a pound of coffee-will produce a pint 
of the liquid. At this degree of concentration 8o 
about three tea-spoonfuls of the liquid can be 
added to half a pint of water, heated prefer 
ably to about the boiling-point, and when 
mixed with it the mixture is in a proper condi 
tion to be taken as a beverage, and the result 85 
of the mixture will be a cup of liquid coffee of 
much more than the usual strength of liquid 
coffee used as a beverage, even when the same 
is carefully prepared, and containing a rich 
ness and variety of flavors resulting from the 9o 
causes heretofore set forth. The liquid coffee 
thus highly concentrated can be placed in air 
tight bottles or other proper receptacles, and 
the flavor of the liquid will be preserved for 
a very long time, and it can be used with great 95 
convenience in traveling, as well as in the 
household, the result being a much finer and 
richer and more full-flavored liquid coffee 
than is ordinarily obtained in the household. 
- Concentrated liquid coffee has heretofore roo 
been made for the most part by condensation, 
which involved the loss of many portions of 
the finest flavoring matter of the coffee, for 
reasons which will be obvious. 
dated July 6, 1880, granted to David J. Gue 
and Joseph C. Grant. The function of the 
pressure in that patent was to force the water 
through the coffee, and by a repetition of a 
filtering process under pressure the flavoring 
matter was supposed to be extracted. By my 
process the flavoring matter is extracted from 
the coffee before any pressure is exerted, and 
the pressure is exerted for the purpose of sep 
arating the liquid from the solid. In that 
patent there is no suggestion of the necessity 
of a very heavy pressure, such as my process 
requires, nor of the three different classes of 
flavoring-matters and of the treatment which 
it is necessary to use in regard to each. As 2. 
matter of fact, the process therein (lescribed 
would not enable one skilled in the art to 
make a good liquid coffee. Other differences 
besides those that I have pointed out will be 
obvious. 
The operations that I have described can be 
performed to the greatest advantage when 
large quantities of coffee are used. 
Apart from the use of the three liquids fla 
vored with different classes of flavoring-mat 
ters mixed together, they may be used sep 
arately for many purposes, or insub-combina 
tions of one with any one of the others. Each 
one of the three liquids in the concentrated 
I am aware of Letters Patent No. 229,697, Io5 
II. 
- 
IIo 
I 3G 
25 
358,300 
3 
lo 
form that I have described is a novel product this liquid from the coffee, substantially as 
described. 
so far as I am aware. 
3. The method of extracting the flavoring 
What claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
matter of coffee, by saturating the same with 25 
1. The method of preparing aliquid extract water at a low temperature, separating the 
of coffee, by saturating the coffee first with liquid from the coffee by application of a high 
water at a low temperature, then with water degree of pressure, again saturating the coffee 
at a medium temperature, and then with water 
with water at a medium temperature and sep 
at about the boiling-point, and finally nixing arating this liquid from the coffee by pressure, 3C 
together the three liquids thus obtained, sub- and again saturating the coffee with liquid at 
stantially as described. 
a high temperature and separating this liquid 
2. The method of treating coffee to extract, from the coffee by pressure as before, substan 
the flavoring-matters therefrom, by first satu- tially as described. 
rating the coffee with water at a low temper. 
ature until the aromatic oils and fatty sub-specification in the presence of two subscrib 
stances are extracted, separating the liquid ing witnesses. 
from the coffee, again saturating the coffee with 
MOSES SAMELSON. 
water at a medium temperature and separating 
this liquid from the coffee, again saturating 
the coffee with water at a high temperature, 
but without boiling the coffee, and separating 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 35 
Witnesses: 
C. F. MATHEWSON, 
JAMES F. HORAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358401.txt	(No Model.) 
B. KUHNS, 
CORN PLANTER ATTACHMENT, 
No. 358,401, 
Patented Feb. 22, 1887. 
 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN KUHNS, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
CORN PLANTER ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 358,401, dated February 22, 1887. 
Application filed May 7, 1886. Serial No. 20,468. (No model.) 
O 
O 
35 
55 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
seed-tube. The spout or tube B is adapted to 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN KUHNS, of fit against the rear side of the seed-tube, and 
Dayton, in the county of Montgomery and its valve C is notched at the upper end, or 
State of Ohio, have invented certain Improve 
otherwise adapted to engage with the valve 
ments in Corn-Planter Attachments, of which 
D of the seed-tube in order to receive motion 
the following is a specification. 
therefrom. 
My invention has reference to that class of 
two-row planters in which a front frame pro 
vided with furrow-opening runners and seed 
dropping mechanism thereon is connected to 
a rear wheeled frame through the medium cf 
flexible joints and adjusting devices under the 
control of the attendant, and in which the 
dropping of the seed is effected through tubes 
at the heels of the runners. 
The invention consists in various improve 
ments, hereinafter specifically described, hav 
ing reference, principally, to a supplemental 
detachable tube on the runner to distribute 
fertilizing material, in a hopper cast complete 
in One piece with a flanged top, and in in 
proved means for supporting the check-row. 
ing mechanism from the hopper. 
With the exception of the peculiarities 
5 hereinafter described, the planter may be of 
any ordinary or approved construction. In 
the accompanying drawings I have shown only 
Such parts as are necessary to an understand 
ing of my invention. The runner represented 
in the drawings is of ordinary form, having a 
Spout or seed-tube at its heel end with a vi 
brating valve therein to retain the charges of 
Seed momentarily near the surface of the 
ground, as usual. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the rear end of 
an ordinary corn-planter runner having my 
supplemental fertilizer-tube attached. Fig. 2 
is a top plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
side elevation of a hopper, partly in section, 
showing the check-row bar and its supporting 
bracket and the hopper-support. Fig. 4 is an 
end view of the same. Fig. 5 is a side eleva 
tion of a bracket in a modified form. Fig. 6 
is a plan view of one of the feed-hoppers, one 
side being shown partly in section. 
When it is desired to deposit a fertilizer in 
connection with the seed, I provide for the 
Seed-tube of each runner an attachment-such 
as represented in Figs. 1 and 2-consisting of 
a conductor-spout, B, containing a vibrating 
valve, C, substantially the same as that in the 
When it is desired to drill the fertilizer, the 
valve C is removed. 
Devices of any appropriate character are 
provided for securing the supplemental tube 
firmly in position and permitting its removal 
at Will. I prefer to employ as a means of at 
tachment hooks a, formed on the upper end 
of the spout B and adapted to engage with 
the upper end of the seed-tube. Ears b are 
also formed on the detachable spout and pro 
vided with set-screws c, to bear against the 
sides of the seed-tube and prevent the acci 
dental separation of the parts. The fertilizer 
spouts may be supplied through supplemental 
hoppers, or in any other appropriate manner. 
In machines as at present known in the 
art the seed boxes or hoppers E are com- 75 . 
monly constructed of wood with a metal top 
plate or flange, or with metal bodies, and a 
separate metallic flange secured thereto by 
bolts. For the purpose of simplifying and 
cheapening the construction, and of stiffening 80 
and strengthening the body of the hopper, so 
that it may be made of lighter material, Icon 
struct each of the hoppers complete in one 
piece of cast metal, with a flange or rim turned 
inward at the top to support the removable 85 
lid or cover. This construction of the hopper 
is plainly shown in Figs. 3 and 6, in which f 
represents the inwardly-extending flange at 
the top, and g lugs or ears cast in the inner 
corners to receive vertical fastening-bolts h, 
which are extended downward through the 
base-plate N, securing the hopper firmly 
The formation of the flange f inte 
thereto. 
gral with the body of the hopper avoids the 
necessity of molding and casting the parts 
separately and the labor of fitting and fasten 
ing said parts together. 
The seed-tube, forming the heel end of the 
runner, is provided at its top with a horizontal 
flange, m, bolted to the top of a cross-bar, n, 
of the runner-frame, as usual. As difficulty 
is frequently experienced by the breakage of 
this casting in the angle at the upper corner 
of the bar, I provide it, as shown in Figs. 1. 
go 
95 
CO 
358,401 
- 
: 
valve I). 
ing and attaching the separate linn heretofore 
employed and giving to the side walls greater 
strength. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is-- 
1. In a corn-planter, the metallic hopper 
cast complete in one piece with the upright 
Walls, and the continuous inwardly-extending 
flange or rim around its entire top to reduce 
the top opening, receive the lid, and strengthen 
the walls. 
2. In combination with the runner having 
the seed-tube and the vibratory valve D, the 
separable tube IB and the valve C, mounted 
therein, and adapted, substantially as de 
scribed, to engage and receive motion from 
3. The attachment for a corn-planter runner, 
consisting of the tube or conductor B, pro. 
vided with the suspending arms a, and with 
the ears b, and screws c. 
4. In a corn-planter runner, the seed-deliv 
(ery tube provided with the horizontal flange 
in and the vertical ears b, whereby it is adapted 
for attachment to both the horizontal and ver. 
tical faces of the supporting-bar . 
5. In a corn-planter, the bracket horizon 
tally slotted at its upper and lower ends and 
adjustably secured to the hopper, the bar to: 
support the check - rowing mechanism, the 
block underlying said bar and adapted to in 
terlock with the bracket, and the vertical con 
necting-bolt. 
6. In a corn-planter, the supporting-bracket, 
having at its top a horizontal arm provided 
with notches or serrations, in combination 
with the bar to sustain the check - rowing 
mechanism, the intermediate block ribbed or 
toothed to interlock with the bracket, and the 
connecting-bar. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 27th day of March, 1SS6, in the pres. 
ence of two attesting witnesses. 
. . . 
. . 
. 
: 
. 
. 
. 
BENJAMIN KUHNS. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER. S. WOLLASTON, 
CHAS. H. SCHAEFFER. 
SO 
55 
65 
5 
8c 
8 5 
5 
O 
and 2, with laterally-projecting lugs o, which 
are seated against and bolted firmly to the 
I rear vertical face of the bal' . 
This construc 
tion is found in practice to fully overcome the 
breakage before referred to. 
At the present time it is a common practice 
to employin connection with this class of mal 
chines check-rowing mechanism supported by 
a bar, l, sustained from the hopper. In order 
to support this bar firmly in place and to ad 
mit of its adjustment to different positions, as 
demanded, I have devised the improved 
bracket F, such as represented in Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5. At its foot the bracket is adapted to 
fit against the outer wall of the hopper, and is 
provided with horizontal slots p, which re 
ceive fastening-bolts q, passing through the 
wall of the hopper. This attachment permits 
the bracket to be adjusted horizontally for: 
ward and backward. At its top the bracket 
is formed with a horizontal arm, ', which 
supports one end of a cross-bar, k, or a metal 
block, s, which in turn supports one end of 
the cross-bark, to which latter the check-row 
ing mechanism will be attached in any ordi 
nary manner. The arm a' is slotted longitu 
dinally to receive a vertical bolt, t, by which 
the bar, and its supporting-block are locked 
in position, and at the same time their adjust 
ment forward and backward is permitted. 
I The upper face of the arm' is notched, as 
shown in Fig. 3, or serrated, as shown in Fig. 
5, and the under face of the blocks made of 
corresponding form to interlock firmly there 
with, and thus prevent the parts from being 
thrown out of adjustment. 
I am aware that a hopper-body has been cast 
with inwardly extending arms or lugs at its 
top to receive bolts for securing a separate top 
or rim thereto, and this construction I do not 
claim, my invention being restricted to a hop 
per which is cast complete in one piece, with 
a continuous inwardly-extending rim around 
its entire upper edge integral there with, said 
rim adapted to reduce the top opening to re 
ceive the lid, and to stiffen or strengthen the 
side walls, thus avoiding the expense of form. 
O 
:25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358501.txt	(No Model.) 
G. M. STRONG. 
METHOD OF UNITING EYES TO HAME IRONS, 
No. 358, 50l., 
Patented Mar. 1, 1887. 
Re 
 
WITNESSE5. 
%2-42%- 
6, 6, /7-276 
 
fig-l. 4./.4% y 
O), 2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE M. STRONG OF BOST ON, MASS ACHUSETTS. 
VETHOD OF UNING EYES TO HAVER ONS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 358,50l., dated March l, 1887. 
Application filed June 14, 1886. Serial No. 205,153. 
(No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGEM. STRONG, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in the Method of Uniting 
Eyes to Hame-Irons, of which the following, 
taken in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, is a specification. 
My invention relates to the union of terret 
and draft eyes to hames, the object being to 
provide a strong and cheap method of uniting 
these eye-pieces, which are usually made of 
composition, to the iron part of the hames, 
and to avoid the use of rivets or screws. 
These objects I accomplish by the mechanism 
shown in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is an elevation showing one of the 
hame-irons with a terret-eye and draft-eye 
attached. Fig. 2 is a section taken on line Y 
Y of Fig. 1, the parts L and K being repre 
sented as unbent. Fig. 3 is a section taken 
on the line Y Y of Fig. 1, in which the parts 
L and K are represented as bent down onto 
the hame-iron A. Fig. 4 is an enlarged view 
of that part of the hame-iron to which the 
draft-eye is attached, and Fig. 5 is a perspec 
tive view of a draft-eye unattached. 
In the drawings, A represents the hame 
iron, which is made in the usual manner, ex 
35 
cept that at the places to which the eyes are 
attached recesses C and D are formed, as 
shown plainly in Figs. 2 and 4. The eyes B 
and H are made substantially alike, and each 
is provided with overlying lips K and L. 
My method of uniting the eyes to the hame 
iron is this: First, both of the parts which are 
to be brought in contact are carefully cleansed, 
then covered with solder, and the parts pressed 
firmly together and brought to a temperature 
sufficient to melt the solder, or, in other words, 
to sweat the parts together. The next step is 
to press down the overlying lips L and K, 
so that the thing produced would appear like 
the section shown at Fig. 3. This pressing 
down of the overlying lips may take place 
while the parts are still hot, so that a soldered 
union may take place between them. 
I claim 
The method of uniting eyes to hame-irons 
by the following steps: first, forming in the 
hame-iron recesses D and C; second, bend 
ing down the overlying lips L and K; third, 
sweating the parts together, substantially as 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
GEORGE. M. STRONG. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK. G. PARKER, 
E. C. SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358602.txt	(No Model.) 
N0, 358,602, 
. 
J. E., EMER, S0 N. 
METAL PICKET FOR FENCES, 
Patented Mar, l, 1887. 
-/zz / 
1727, 2. 
889itv.cosce 
% 4 
// Y 10-2 
vvvcwtoz 
3314 fis lttozy?c? ofez-J6-2767-6 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT (OFFICE, 
JAMES E. EMERSON, OF BEAVER FALLS, PENNSYLVANIA. 
METAL PI C KET FOR FENCES. 
sPEcIFICATToN forming part of Letters Patent No. 358,602, dated March 1, 1887. 
Application filed March 9, 1886. 
Serial No. 194631. (No model. ) 
20 
25 
IC) 
2o a!" vhom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES E. EMERSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Beaver 
Falls, in the county of Beaver and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Metal Pickets for 
Fences, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the accom 
panying dra Wings. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
sheet-metal corrugated and barbed picket for 
fences-a picket that will be cheap, light, 
strong, and durable, and a picket that will 
supply a commercial demand as an article of 
trade and manufacture; and it consists in the 
construction of the picket and the means pro 
vided thereon for attaching it to the perma 
ment parts of a fence, as will be fully herein 
after described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a long 
strip of thin cortugated sheet metal with barbs 
projecting on its front side and punched out of 
the sheet metal, so as to have one side thereof 
left umcut from the metal picket, and a simi 
lar part punched toward the oppositeside, or 
on the back of the picket, and show's how sev 
eral pickets may be cut Without waste of ma 
terial from the same long strip of metal. Fig. 
2 represents a section or broken-off top part 
of a picket, and show's how the picket is at 
tached to a horizontalrail or suspending-wire. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section of the picket seen in 
Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 4 is a cross-sectional view 
of a modification of the longitudinal corruga 
tions or bends in the blank strip from which 
the finished picket is cut. Fig. 5 show's a 
section of a fence With the pickets attached 
A represents the metalpicket, preferably of 
thin steel in strips, corrugated longitudinally 
in curved form, and pointed at its upper end, 
(?, and erotched at its lower end, a, and hav 
ing barbs a projecting from the convex side 
of the corrugations a, and a center barb, a, 
punched to the Oppositeside in the center cor 
rugation, a, of the picket A, asseen in Figs. 
1 and 3. The sharp-angled crotch a at bot 
tom of picket A shows that the long strip of 
corrugated thin metal is so cut to save metal, 
5o the crotch being made by cutting the top of 
another picket from this crotch, thereby sav 
ing much in the length of the strip from which 
the pickets are cut, as seen in Fig. 1, where 
the upper point, a, of One picket is shoWn re 
40 
theretO. 
45 
35 
. 
moved from the erotch a' of the upper picket. 
The points 1 and 2 of the crotch are utilized 
to strengthen the fence by driving them into 
the ground, as seen in Fig. 5, where 1/3/rep 
resent the surface of the ground; or, if y 3) 
represent a timber sill, the points 1 and 2 
will rest upon or may beslightly driven into 
such sill, as also seen in said Fig. 5, and in 
either case will tend greatly to impart lateral 
strength to the line of fence; or the pickets 
may be square at their bases and rest upon 
the ground or the Wood sill. 
In Fig. 5 ashort section of a fence is shown 
in which the pickets A are secured to hori 
zontal wiresB, between thefixed posts C C, by 
means of the barbs a; but where wood rails 
D D (shown in dotted lines between the fixed 
posts C) are used the pickets Will then be se 
cured to the rails D by means of screws or 
nails d. (Seen in Fig, 3.) 
A picket for a fence, whether secured to 
horizontal Wood rails between the fixed posts, 
or horizontal suspending-wires made of thin 
strips of steel, corrugated and barbed, is light 
and imexpensive, as Well as very durable. 
I am aware that corrugated metal fence 
rails with barbs thereon, pickets corrugated 
longitudinally, pickets barbed but not corru 
gated, have been in use; but I do not claim 
such constructions alone; nor do I claim a 
metal picket When secured in a fence to a sus 
pending-wire by a projecting clamping-barb, 
as such construction is in use; but, 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A thin metal picket having longitudinal 
corrugations a' and d', Sharp point a, crotch 
a', and barbs a and a, constructed in the 
manner and for the purpose described. 
2. Alongitudinally-corrugated metal picket 
having the point (, at one end and the crotch 
a' and points 1 and 2 at the opposite end, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. A thin metal picket having longitudinal 
corrugations (' anda', sharp point a, barbs a 
and a, in the manner and for the purpose 
described. 
In testimony Where of Iaffix my sigmature in 
presence of two Witnesses. 
JAMES E. EMERSON, 
WitmeSSes: 
NEWTON CRAWFORD, 
W. H. RUFF 
55 
75 
9O 
95 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358702.txt	(No Model.) 
W. SHRIWER & W. M. PEARD, 
SCHOOL SEAT AND DESK, 
No. 358,702, 
 
Patented Mar. 1, 1887. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
WNESSES: 
%3ta. 
12/22gs 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
: E. 
2 
XS 
y 
SS 
2 
asu 
NVENORS: 
-Q- 
w 
s 
A. 
ToRNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM SHRIVER AND WILLIAM M. PEARD, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENN 
SYLVANIA; SAID SHRIVER ASSIGNOR TO SAID PEARD. 
SCHOOL SEAT AND DESK. 
SIPECIFICATION forming part cf Fetters Patent No. 358,702, dated March 1, 3,887. 
Application filed February 4, 1886. Serial No. 190,802. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To ali, whom, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM SHRIVER 
and WILLIAM M. PEARD, both citizens of the 
United States, residing in the city and county 
5 of Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
School Desks and Seats, which improvement 
is fully set forth in the following specification 
and accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section of a 
school desk and seat embodying our invention. 
Fig. 2 represents a view of a portion thereof, 
taken at the back. Figs. 3 and 4 represent 
views of detached parts. Figs. 5, 6, 7, 8, and 
1 5 9 represent views of detached parts on an en 
larged scale. Fig. 10 represents a section of 
the seat joint on an enlarged scale. Fig. 11 
represents a horizontal section in line a ac, 
Fig. 1. 
2d Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in the Several figures. 
Our invention consists of a novel fastening 
for the parts of a desk, as will be hereinafter 
set forth. 
It further consists in the seat of the desk 
adapted to be automatically folded, when not 
in use, by means of springs connected thereto, 
as Will be hereinafter set forth. 
It further consists of a novel construction of 
3O afriction joint for the Seat-arms and standards. 
The matter describing the foot-rests and fast 
eners of the desk to the floor in this specifica 
tion, and illustrated in the drawings, is not 
claimed herein, but is reserved, and will be 
35 described, illustrated, and claimed in another 
application, the Serial number of the same be 
ing 225,144. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
standards of a school or other desk, which are 
4o formed of cast metal, and B represents the 
top of Said desk. Rising from the upper end 
of the standards A are tongues C, and secured. 
to the under side of the top are heads D, hav 
ing grooves E, said tongues and grooves be 
45 ing dovetailed or of wedging form, whereby, 
when the tongues are fitted in the grooves and 
a horizontal sliding motion is imparted to the 
top, the tongues are tightened in the grooves 
and interlocked therewith, and thus the top is 
So firmly secured to the standards and reliably 
retained in position thereon. 
65 
F represents the back of the desk, the same 
having secured to its inner side heads G, with 
grooves G'. Formed on the standards, and 
facing the back, are tongues H, said tongues 55 
and grooves being dovetailed or of wedging 
form, whereby, when the tongues are fitted in 
the grooves and a downward motion is im 
parted to the back, the tongues are tightened 
in the grooves, and thus the back is firmly 6o 
secured to the standards.and reliably retained 
in position thereon, it being noticed that the 
upper portion of the back abuts against the 
adjacent end of the top B, and prevents dis 
placement of the latter. 
J represents the seat, and K the Supporting 
arms thereof, said seat having on its under 
side heads L, with grooves L. Formed on 
said arms K, on the upper edges thereof, are 
tongues M, said tongues and grooves being 7o 
dovetailed or of wedging form, whereby, when 
the tongues are fitted in the grooves and a 
rearward motion is imparted to the seat, the 
tongues are tightened in the grooves and in 
terlocked there with, and thus the seat is firmly 75 
secured to the arms K and reliably retained 
in position thereon. 
The foot-rest N is provided on its ends with 
grooved heads P, and the cross-bars Q of the 
standards have tongues Q, Said tongues and So 
grooves being dovetailed or of wedging form, 
whereby, when the tongues are fitted in the 
grooves and the foot - rest advanced, the 
tongues are interlocked in the grooves, and 
thus the foot-rest is firmly secured to the 85 
standards and reliably retained in position 
thereon. 
R represents downwardly-projecting heads 
on the under side of the feet of the Standards. 
Secured to the floor of the apartment on which 90 
the desk is placed are socketSS, with grooves, 
the grooves being dovetailed or of wedging . 
form, whereby, when the heads are fitted in 
the grooves and the standards advanced, the 
heads are interlocked in the grooves, and thus 95. 
the desk is firmly secured to the floor and re 
liably retained in position thereon. 
The several heads D, G, L, and P and the 
sockets S are threaded, whereby they may be 
screwed into the part to which they are at- IOO 
tached, and thereby firmly held in position, 
and said heads may be turned so as to increase 
 
358,702 
A represents a cross-bar, which is formed 
the friction with the tongues and grooves, 
whereby the respective parts are reliably con- with the standards A, and has cast or other 
nected, and looseness of the same is prevented. 
wise connected with it a hook, A, for the 
purpose of conveniently holding a school-bag 
The seat is self-acting or automatical in its 
folding action. For this purpose we employ 
or other article on the Side of the desk. 
coiled springs T, one end of each of which is 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
connected with the arm K and the other end 
with the adjacent portion of the standards, it 
ters Patent, is 
1. A desk having attaching devices whereby 
being seen that the arms are pivoted to the 
either the top, the back, or the seat may be 
standards by screws or bolts U. 
On the inner faces of the arms K and adja 
detachably Secured to the frame, said devices 
cent portion of the standards, at the pivotal 
consisting of tongues fastened to the frame 
portion of the arms, are circular flanges V V, 
and screw - threaded pieces having heads 
respectively, the flanges Ventering the flanges 
adapted to be secured to said tongues, all sub 
V and rotating thereon. Stops W. W' are 
stantially as described. 
formed adjacent to the flanges, the stops W 
2. In a desk, arms pivotally connected t 
being adapted to abut against the stops W', 
the side standards, and provided with tongues 
whereby the bolts. U are relieved of strain, 
wedge-shaped in form, in combination with a 
whether the seat is in folded or unfolded po 
Seat having at or near its ends screw-threaded 
grooved pieces adapted to hold said tongues, 
sition. 
LugS X are also formed on the inner faces 
Substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
of the standards adjacent to the flanges V, and 
3. In a desk, the side standard, A, having 
laterally-projecting lugs Xintegral there with, 
project laterally therefrominto segmental slots 
Y, formed in the arms K, thus also providing 
in combination with the arm K, pivotally at 
stops for the arms K. Lugs Y are also formed 
tached to said standard A. by bolt U, and hav 
with the standards, the same being so disposed 
ing the Segmental slot Y, in which said lug X 
operates, and the coil-spring T, one end of 
that the Springs are held between the same 
and the flanges W near the inner ends of said 
which is connected to the arm K and the other 
Spring, so that displacement of the springs is 
end to the standard A, all substantially as de 
prevented. 
scribed. 
Z represents friction-washers, which are fit 
4. The standard A, having laterally-project- r 
ted on bolts U on the side of the arms K, and 
ing lugs X and circular flange V, in combina 
tion with segmentally-slotted arm K, pivotally 
prevented from rotation by means of the lugs 
X, which, after passing through the slots Y, 
secured to said standard and provided with 
enter openings in said washers. The contigu 
the circular flange W and the spring T, all 
substantially as described. 
ous faces of the Washers and arms are formed 
With cams Z", which are in frictional contact, 
5. The standard A, having the lugs X and 
especially when the arms are moved. The 
Y and circular flange V, in combination with 
arm K, having the segmental slots Y and cir 
bolts U have on their ends nuts Z, between 
cular flange V', and spring T, all arranged and 
which and the Washers Z are spring - Washers 
operating substantially as described. 
Z. Lugs Z are formed on the outer faces of 
the Washers Z, and overhang the spring-washers 
6. The standard A, having the laterally-pro 
Z, and serve to hold the latter in position, and 
jecting lug X, in combination with the seg 
mentally-slotted arm K, pivotally secured to 
also prevent rotation of the nuts Z, when the 
bolts U are screwed therein, as shown in 
said standard by bolt U, and the friction 
Fig. 10. 
washer Z, placed on said bolt outside of said 
arm, and having opening therein to receive 
It Will be seen that when the seat is moved 
the lug X, all substantially as and for the pur 
to fold or unfold the same the cams Z come 
in contact, whereby when the washers are 
pose set forth. 
forced laterally the consequentincreased press 
7. The standard A, in combination with an 
ure of the spring occasions increased friction 
arm pivotally connected thereto by a bolt and 
of the part, whereby the motion of the seat 
a washer secured to said standard, but outside 
arms is retarded-a feature of importance, 
of said arm, the contiguous faces of said washer 
as slamming or abruptness of motion of the 
and arm being formed with cams, substan 
seat is prevented. 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
On the outer or under side of the arms K, 
near the pivotal portion thereof, are shoulders 
Z, which are so disposed that when the seat 
is lowered said arms abut against shoulders or 
projections Z on the standards, whereby the 
bolts U are relieved of the weight of the seat 
and occupant thereof. 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
A. P. GRANT. 
WM. SHRIVER, 
WM. M. PEARD. 
Witnesses: 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IC5 
IO 
I 5 
.O. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358802.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 358,802, 
P. G., BROWN. 
- EXTENSION LIGHT FIXTURE, 
Patented Mar. 1, 1887. 
BY 
INVENTOR, 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER G. BROWN, OF SCHENECTADY, NEW YORK. 
EXTENS ON Li GHT! FIXTURE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 358,802, dated March 1, 1887. 
Application filed October 30, 1884. Serial No. 146,845. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER G. BROWN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Schen 
ectady, in the county of Schenectady and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Extension Light 
Brackets, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings. 
In a patent granted to me on the 14th day of 
October, 1884, for an extension light-bracket 
I have shown and described a lamp-frame sup 
ported by chains or cords wound upon the 
grooved periphery of a spring-drum and pass. 
ing Over friction-rollersjournaled upon stand 
ards projecting from the supporting bed-plate 
Of the said drum. In this instance the effect 
ive power of the spring to maintain in equi 
librium lamps of different weights could be. 
varied within large limits by decreasing or 
increasing the facility with which the said 
rollers were capable of revolving upon their 
pinions or shafts, the adjustment being ef 
fected by providing said shafts at one end with 
a slotted head and at the other with a screw 
thread, permitting them to be screwed a greater 
or less distance into the standard, a corre 
sponding friction being exerted by the screw 
heads upon the ends of the rollers. 
In my present invention I have devised 
means, hereinafter described and claimed, for 
transferring this tension directly to the body 
of the drum, or in some instances directly to 
the shaft of the drum. 
By means of my improvement, moreover, I 
am enabled to guard against a too sudden de 
Scent of the lamp when the latter is being 
pulled down, the tension or friction against 
the cylinder or its shaft tending to check rapid 
rotation. Moreover, uponlessening or releas 
ing the tension during the upward progress of 
the lamp the springs' power becomes largely 
increased, the cylinder or drum acting quickly 
to take up the slack of the chain as the lamp 
is lifted by the hand. 
In the accompanying drawings I have illus 
trated the means preferred by me in carrying 
out my invention. 
In the several figures like letters indicate 
like parts. 
55 
Figure 1 represents a planview illustrating 
my improvement, a part being shown broken 
away to disclose the arrangement of parts. 
Fig. 2 represents a side view, and Fig. 3 a de 
tail perspective, of one of the parts. 
The spring - drum, grooved or flanged, as 
shown, is preferably of the construction de 
scribed in my former Letters Patent above 
referred to, and for that reason need not be 
minutely described herein. 
A represents the base-plate, BCD the three 
flanges within which the chain E is wound, 
and F the guide-rollers over which the chain 
passes to the lamp-frame G. These rollers 
are mounted upon pinions or shafts H, attached 
to an angle-piece, J, pivoted to the base-plate 
at K and having a perforation at Linto which 
enters the screw stop-pin M. 
The angle-piece J is preferably provided 
upon its outer surface with a layer, Z, of wood, 
rubber, soft metal, or the like, to prevent wear 
ing away of the lower flange, B, of the spring 
drum. 
The parts being arranged as described, the 
operation of my invention is as follows: The 
screw Misscrewed in a distance proportionate 
to the amount of pressure desired to be ex 
erted upon the lower cylinder-flange by the 
bearing-surface of the angle-piece when the 
lamp is in place. The cords or chains being 
adjusted to the length desired, and the spring 
being brought into play, as detailed in my 
former patent, the lamp will remain in equi 
librium at whatever point it may be located by 
the hand. The Weight of the lamp being sus 
tained by the rollers F, is transmitted from 
them to the pivoted angle-pieces J, and con 
sequently causes these latter to impinge against 
the lower flange, B, of the spring-drum, oc 
casioning frictional resistance to the revolu 
tion of the said drum or cylinder upon its 
shaft. When the lamp is elevated by the hand 
to raise it to a higher position, this friction is 
relieved, and the drum revolving immediately 
takes up the slack of the cords or chains. The 
tension is, however, not so great as to pre 
vent or seriously interfere with the lowering 
of the lamp at a moderate degree of Speed. 
If, however, the lanp is suddenly pulled 
downward, the frictionis very largely increased IQo 
95 
90 
75 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
2 
358,802 
and acts as a check upon the movement of the 
cylinder, and hence upon the speed with which 
the chains or cords unwind. 
It is evident that, without departing from 
the spirit of my invention, the contact between 
the friction-pieces and cylinder may be se 
cured at some other point than the outer rim 
of the lowest flange of the latter. 
I am aware that it has been heretofore pro 
posed to conduct the cord of a spring-drum 
over a roller mounted upon the free end of a 
pivoted friction-brake, the said friction-brake 
being applied to the edges of the drum, and I 
do not claim such construction. 
f 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
1. In an extension light-bracket, the combi 
nation, with a friction-brake, of a revolving 
spring-drum having one of its ends parallel to 
and injuxtaposition to the bearing-surface of 
the brake, and a lamp-sustaining cord or chain 
connected with the drum and passing over the 
free end of the brake, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In an extension light-bracket, the combi 
nation, with a pivoted friction-brake, of a re 
volving spring-drum having one of its ends 
parallel to and in juxtaposition to the bearing 
surface of the brake, a friction-roller upon the 
free end of the brake, and a lamp-sustaining 
cord or chain connected with the drum and 
passing over the roller, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
: 
3. In an extension light-bracket, the combi- 35 
nation, with a pivoted friction-brake, of a re 
volving spring-drum, a lamp-sustaining cord 
or chain connected with the drum and passing 
over the free end of the brake, and an adjust 
able stop-pin for regulating the friction, Sub- 4o 
stantially as shown and described. 
4. In an extension light-bracket, the combi 
nation, with a pivoted friction-brake, of a re 
volving spring-drum having one of its ends 
parallel to and in juxtaposition to the bearing- 45 
surface of the brake, a lamp-sustaining cord or 
chain connected with the drum and passing 
over the free end of the brake, and an adjust 
able stop-pin for regulating the friction, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In an extension light-bracket, the combi 
nation, with the angle-brake J, pivoted at K 
and perforated at L, of the revolving spring 
drum and its lamp-sustaining cord or chain 
passing over the free end of the brake, and the 55 
adjustable stop-pin M, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
50 
PETER G. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
ALEX. F. VEDDER, 
J. E. ORCHARD. 
O 
15 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US358902.txt	(No Model.) 
J. R. WEBSTER 
BALING PRESS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 358,902, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
mini?t 
All TETTE 
AC). 
III" in III; 
NASC-1 
A 
a Rin 
it 
98), triesses 
&976, , , 
Awak 8pts 
 
53 ya-4, elitesiege 
341.u.c.14 to S 
GR, 26.2 
CeCe3-rza 
(No Model.) 
J. R. WEBSTER, 
BALING PRESS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 358,902, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
'. 
  
 
  
 
 
- - 
w 
Yur - 
ill s 
e. 
As. 
311-uo-4to 
e1/226.sver 
f A374, 
- or 
33 
%2s &lifeti c.181 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH RICHARD WEBSTER, OF WORTH VILLE, KENTUCKY. 
BANG - PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 358,902, dated March 8, 1887. 
Application filed November 15, 1886. Serial No. 218,939. 
(No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
O 
15 
. 5 is a detail view of the cam-lever. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front elevation the other pawl. 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
oted to the cross-head I, and are adapted to en 
gage the ratchet-teeth H. One of the Said 
Be it known that I, JoSEPHRICHARD WEB 
pawls is provided near its lower end with a 
STER, a citizen of the United States, residing 
rearward-extending shoulder, R. 
at Worthville, in the county of Carroll and 
S represents a lever, which is pivoted to the 
State of Kentucky, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Baling - Presses, of 
outer side of one of the shoulders or lugS K, 
which the following is a specification. 
and the said lever extends across the front Side 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
of one of the bars F. The short arm of the le 
baling-presses; and it consists in the peculiar 
ver S bears against the inner side of one of the 
construction and combination of devices, that pawls R, and the long arm of the said lever 
has a shoulder or offset, S', which is adapted 
will be more fully set forth hereinafter, and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
to bear on the upper side of the shoulder R of 
of a press embodying my improvements. Fig. 
T represents a lever, which is provided at its 
inner end with an eccentric cam, T. This cam 
2 is a side elevation of the same with a portion 
extends through the slots G, and from the cen 
of the frame broken away. . Fig. 3 is a hori 
ter thereof, on opposite sides, project trun 
Zontal section taken on the linea: a of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the press. Fig. 
nions T, which bear between the bars F. The 
can also bears upon the upper side of the 
A represents a rectangular base or ground 
croSS-head I. 
U represents a cross-head, which is arranged 
frame, from the center of which rises a verti 
cal frame, B, comprising the vertical standards 
between the vertical ratchet-bars F and bears 
C, the cross-beam D, connecting the upper ends 
on the upper side of the cam of the lever T. 
This cross-head U is provided at its center, on 
of the standards, and the cross-beam E, con 
opposite sides, with lugs or shoulders V, that 
necting the standards at a suitable distance be 
extend into the slots G, and to the face of one 
low the beam D. 
of the said lugs or shoulders is pivoted a lever, 
F represents a pair of vertical bars, which 
W, which is similar to the lever S, and has its 
connect the central portions of the beams D 
long arm provided with an offset or shoulder, 
and E. These bars F are arranged at a suit 
able distance apart, and are provided with ver 
W, that is similar to the offset or shoulder S. 
X represents a pair of pawls, which are piv 
tical slots G, which are in line with each other. 
The outer edges of the bars Fare provided with 
oted to the ends of the cross-head U and en 
the downwardly-extending ratchet-teeth H. 
gage the ratchet - teeth H. One of the said 
pawls is provided near its lower end with a 
I represents a cross-head, which is arranged 
rearward-extending shoulder, X. 
between the vertical bars F, and is provided 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
at its center, on opposite sides, with project 
By moving downwardly on the long arm of the 
ing lugs or shoulders K, that enter the slots G. 
lever W the pawls X are tripped from the 
From the center of the cross-head I depends a 
ratchet-teeth, and by moving downwardly on 
vertical rod, L, that is provided at its lower 
the long arm of the lever S the pawls R are 
end with the plunger or follower M. 
tripped and disengaged also from the ratchet 
No press-box is here shown in which the 
teeth. As the Weight of the weightSP exceeds 
plunger or follower works, as the said press 
that of the cross-heads, the follower or plun 
box. may be of any desired suitable construe 
ger, and the cam-lever, the said cross-heads, 
tion. 
cam-lever, and follower or plunger are raised 
On the under side of the beam D, near the 
to the upper side of the frame B. As soon as 
ends thereof, are grooved pulleys N. To the 
the levers W and S are released the pawls X 
ends of the cross-head I are attached ropes O, 
and R become engaged with the ratchet-teeth. 
which pass over the pulleys N, and to the de 
In order to cause the follower or plunger to be 
pending ends of the said ropes are attached 
weights P. 
lowered, the lever T is turned from the posi 
R represents a pair of pawls, which are piv. 
tion indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 2 to the 
45 
SO 
 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
358,902 
35 
45 
55 
cross-head I, having the lugs K, working in the 
Said slots, the said cross-head being arranged 
between the ratchet-bars, the follower or plun 
ger depending from the cross-head I, the 
Weights connected to the said cross-head to 
raise the latter, the pawls R, pivoted to the 
cross-head I and adapted to automatically en 
gage the ratchet-teeth, the lever T, having the 
eccentric can extending through the slots G. 
and bearing on the cross-head I, the said cam 
having the trunnions projecting between the 
ratchet-bars, the cross-head U, arranged be 
tween the ratchet-bars and bearing on the up 
per side of the cam, and having the shoulders 
V, entering the slots G, the pawls X, pivoted 
to the said cross-head U, to engage the ratchet 
teeth, and the levers to disengage the pawls R. 
and X from the ratchet-teeth, for the purpose 
set forth, substantially as described. 
3. In a press, the combination of the cross 
head I, carrying the follower, detents, pawls, 
or dogs for the cross-head, a cam-lever, T, act 
ing against the cross-head, weighted devices 
for the cross-head I, and detents or pawls for 
the lever T, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
own I have hereto affixed my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH RICHARD WEBSTER, 
Witnesses: 
T. L. HARRISON, 
G. W. MAY. 
O 
position indicated in solid lines in the said fig 
ure, thereby causing the cam to force the lower 
cross-head, I, and the plunger downwardly on 
the ratchet-bars. The pawls R then engage 
5 the ratchet-teeth, so as to prevent the weights 
from raising the cross-head, and the lever Tis 
then turned upwardly, which causes the cross 
head Uto slide downwardly between the ratch 
et-bars a distance corresponding to the space 
in which the cross-head I is previously low 
ered. The pawls Ximmediately, by their own 
gravity, engage the ratchet-teeth, and the le 
ver T is then operated, as before described, 
thereby causing the cross-head I and the plun 
ger or follower to be again lowered; and this 
operation is repeated until the cross-head I 
reaches the beam E. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination, in a press, of the ratch 
et-bars F, the cross-head I, having the pawls 
to engage the ratchet-teeth, and the plunger or 
follower attached to the said cross-head, the 
cam-lever T, bearing on the cross-head I and 
free to move between the ratchet-bars, the 
cross-head U, bearing on the cam-lever and 
having the pawls to engage the ratchet-teeth, 
the levers to disengage the pawls from the 
ratchet - teeth, and the weights to raise the 
cross-heads and the cam-lever when the pawls 
are tripped, substantially as described. 
2. In a press, the combination of the verti 
cal ratchet - bars F, having the slots G, the 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359002.txt	(No Model.) 
M. W. BAILY. 
HEAT REGULATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 359,002, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
 
 
Z 
2725 
I 
WITNESSES: 
-6 &eactor 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYs 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
M, W, BAILY. 
HEAT REGULATOR, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 359,002, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
(27%z 3. 
ea 
ava? 
ta 
ava 
af 
WITNESSES: 
-6 fearie?, 
 
2.E. 
N. Peters, Photo-uthographer. Washington, D.C. 
ATTORNEYS, 
d 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MIFFLIN W. BAILY, OF POTTSTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
HEAT REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed March 15, 1886. 
Patent No. 359,002, dated IMarch 8, 1887. 
Serial No. 195,270. (No model.) 
To all, whom it nay concern. 
Be it known that I, MIFFLIN WOODWARD 
BAILY, of Pottstown, in the county of Mont 
gomery and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented a new and Improved Heat-Regulator, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
a heat-regulating apparatus, the object of the 
invention being to provide a means whereby 
the draft of the furnace may be regulated from 
the apartment within which the heat is deliv 
ered, and whereby, when less heat is required 
in the apartment, the draft of the furnace may 
be checked, and, conversely, when more heat is 
required in the apartment, the draft of the 
furnace may be adjusted so that the fires will 
burn freely. 
The invention consists in a register provided 
With two openings controlled by a valve and 
adapted for connection by pipes with the 
smoke-pipe and ash-pit of a furnace, as will 
be hereinafter more particularly set forth. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a face view of my improved heat 
regulating attachment, the grating, however, 
being removed and certain portions of the ap 
paratus being shown in section. Fig. 2 is a 
sectional plan view of the apparatus, taken on 
line at a of Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 is a diagram 
illustrating the relative arrangement of the 
furnace and regulator. 
In the drawings above referred to, A. repre 
sents a circular casing that is in communica 
tion with the smoke-pipe of the furnace through 
the medium of the flue or tube B and with the 
ash-pit beneath the fire-box of said furnace 
through the medium of the flue or tube C, the 
openings BC to the two flues being controlled 
by a valve-plate, D, that is mounted on one 
end of a lever, E, the opposite end of the lever 
being provided with a knob, e. The lever Eis 
mounted upon a central shaft, F, that is sup 
ported in two bearings, C, a, the bearing a be 
ing fixed to the rear wall of the chamber A, 
while the bearing a' is carried by a cross-bar, 
G, arranged across the face of the chamber, as 
shown, the parts being so proportioned that 
by turning the lever Ethe valve-plate may be 
moved to open or close the way to either of the 
flues BC. 
Referring now more particularly to Fig. 3, 
it will be seen that the flue B, as above stated, 
leads to the smoke-stack I of the furnace H, 
and it will be readily understood that when 
air is admitted to said smoke-stack through 
the open front of casing A and the flue B the 
draft of the furnace will be checked. It will 
also be seen that the flue C leads into the ash 
pit of the furnace, so as to deliver air beneath 
the grate J, so that when the valve-plate D is 
moved from the front of the opening to the 
flue C the fire will burn freely, the valve be 
ing so arranged that when removed from in 
front of the opening to the flue C the opening 
to the flue B will be completely closed. 
From the arrangement described it will be 
seen that the draft of the furnace may be regu 
lated, as desired, from the apartment within 
which the heatis delivered; but, in order that 
the draft may be regulated from a position 
close to the furnace as well as from the apart 
ment, I have provided the shaft F with a pull 
ley, K, about which there is passed a cord or 
chain, L, which passes over sheaves oc, mounted 
as shown best in Fig. 1, and finally over a 
sheave, M, that is provided with a crank-arm, 
N, the construction being such that by simply 
turning the crank-arm the valve-plate D may 
be thrown to a position to regulate the draft, 
it being understood, of course, that the said 
valve-plate might be moved to an intermedi 
ate position, so as to admit air through both 
flues B C at the same time. 
The apparatus described not only serves to 
perfectly regulate the draft of the furnace, but 
also acts to thoroughly ventilate the apart 
ment from which the filaes B and C lead. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The regulator for furnaces herein shown 
and described, consisting of a casing open at 
one side and having peripheral openings, and 
a valve mechanism for opening or closing said 
openings, substantially as set forth. 
2. The casing A, having adjacent peripheral 
openings BC, shaft F, arm E, and valve D, 
concentric with the periphery of the casing 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9O 
95 
IOC) 
 
359,002 
tiguous, and of a valve for controlling said 
openings, substantially as shown and described. 
6. The combination, with the smoke-outlet 
and the ash-box of a furnace, of flues connected 
at their inner ends with said smoke-outlet and 
ash-box and open at their outer ends, and a 
valve mechanism for closing said outer ends, 
substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination, with a furnace, of flues 
B C, leading from said furnace to a chamber, 
A, a valve, D, mounted on a lever, E, sheaves 
K, c 0, and M, and a chain, L, substantially as 3o 
described. 
25 
MIFFLIN W. BAILY. 
Witnesses: 
A. C. LESHER, 
A. S. MACK, 
and closing one opelling or partially closing 
both, according to its adjusted position, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with the casing A, hav. 
ing openings B C, shaft F, arm E, and valve 
D, of the pulley K on shaft F, pulley M, chain 
L, and guide-sheaves c c, substantially as shown 
and described. 
4. The combination, with the smoke-pipe 
and ash-pit of a furnace, of a register having 
two peripheral openings controlled by a valve, 
and pipes connecting said register with the 
furnace, substantially as shown and described. 
5. The combination, with a furnace, of a flue 
extending to the apartment to be heated from 
the ash-box of said furnace, and a flue extend 
ing from the Smoke-pipe of the furnace to said 
apartment, the openings of said flues being con 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359102.txt	(No Model.) 
T. S.H.A.W. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY TESTING MINE GASES. 
No. 359,102, 
- 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
 
e 
Aa 
awa 
e 
e 
s: Sesigs 
S. 
 
 
Z/7/WASSAS. 
2 
..a INVEN 7OAR 
 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
T. SHAW. 
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY TESTING MINE GASES. 
No. 359,102, 
 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
<2 Y s4., 1-4 we wroe 
JZ/TAVASSAS. 
3.26% 
242a1,2- 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D, C, 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
T. S.H.A.W. 
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY TESTING MINE GASES, 
No. 359,102. 
 
D 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
- 
Z/7/VASSAS. 
IWPENTOR 
( 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, , C. 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
T. SHAW. 
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY TESTING MINE GASES 
No. 359,102, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
a 7 o?. 1-4 INVENTOR 
77 WESSES 52, 
 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
T SHAW. 
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY TESTING MINE GASEs. 
No. 359,102, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
ITN AA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SSSSSY CNes, 
63SYT x22 
J277AVASSAS. 
a 2 27%. 2,4 
ANJEWTOR 
 
N. perers, photo-Lithographer, was unston. 
(No Model.) 
T. S.H.A.W. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 6, 
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY TESTING MINE GASES, 
No. 359,102, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
 
  
 
S 
 
SSS 
4 
S. 
S. S. 
SSS 
 
Zzyzzzzz7ZZ 
asser Y fell. 
w 
? 
42-72e. 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet, 7. 
T. S.H.A.W. 
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY TESTING MINE GASES, 
No. 359,102, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
- 15|| 
V 
ce 
i 
s N 
5 
K 
I es 
LIHEY ISKS 
AN Af 
ATE 
| 
s 
4. a Y : /\ /NA 2 
NNNNN MNN 
  
 
N 
 
 
G T Saeros 
S. 
R 
V 
s 
i I es 
c1 oz76-- 1, 4 INVENTOR 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
T. SHAW. 
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY TESTING MINE CASES, 
No. 359,102, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
 
 
SSSSSSSSSSS SNS SNS 
NSN 
NS SSNS 
NNNNNNNNS 
N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS SHAW, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY TESTING MINE-GASES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 359,102, dated March 8, 1887, 
- Application filed June 3, 1886. Serial No. 204,096. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS SHAW, M. E. of 
the city and county of Philadelphia, Pennsylva 
nia, have invented a new and Improved Ap 
paratus for Automatically Testing Mine-Gases; 
and I hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon. 
My invention is an apparatus whereby the 
gases from mines are automatically carried to 
a testing-station, and automatically tested, and 
whereby, when said gases are dangerous, the 
fact is indicated, all as hereinafter claimed. 
In order to enable others to use and prac 
tice my invention, I will proceed to describe 
its construction and operation. 
On reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form part of the specification, 
Figure 1 represents an end view of all the ap 
paratus used above the mines; Fig. 2, a side 
view of the same; Fig. 3, a top view of the 
same; Fig. 4, a vertical section through the 
center of the gas-tester; Fig. 5, a vertical sec 
tion of the valve for reversing the gas or air 
currents; Fig. 6, a vertical section of the mech 
anism actuated by the partial vacuum; Fig. 
7, the pneumatic signal ald valve, &c., to be 
located in the mines; and Fig. S represents 
the appa'atus in position and in connection 
with the mines, all for the purpose hereinafter 
explained; Fig. 9, a perspective view of the 
whistle and indicato), and Fig. 10 a diagram 
illustrating the general features of all appa 
ratus for carrying out my invention. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the Several views. 
When explosive gases, or gases which on 
combining with air form explosive gases, first 
enter a mine or a chamber therein, they rise to 
the upper part of the chamber and gradually 
fill the latter from the top, so that the lower 
strata of air in which the men work will only 
indicate danger after the chamber is so full 
of gas that it is difficult to avoid the conse 
quences of its presence. 
Attempts are made by inspectol's to test the 
gases by elevating safety or indicating lamps 
to the tops of the mine-chambers; but they 
are then So far removed from the inspector 
that it is impossible for him to ascertain the 
indications which can only be properly un 
derstood. Any means of remedying these 
difficulties and affording a sure and immediate 
indication of the presence of dangerous gases 
must be of such a character as to be practically 
employed by unskilled labor and not liable to 
get out of order or useless from the necessary 
rough usage to which the same is subjected in 
mines. The means I have devised meet the 
requirements I have specified, and can be best 
understood in their general features by refer 
ence to the diagram, Fig. 10. In said dia 
gram Y represents one of the chambers of a 
lmine; X, the vertical shaft; Z, a communicat 
ing level or gallery, and p a pipe leading from 
a high point in the chamber Y to the sur 
face. The pipe p is put into communication 
with an exhaust-pump, it', Fig. 1, and a small 
pipe, n, from the latter leads to a metallic 
gun or cylinder, e, having a contracted open 
ing at one end opposite a flame or incandes 
cent igniter, d, and at the other end a loose 
piston, h, opposite a gong, k, With a Spring, 
(, for retracting the piston. 
If the pump is now put into operation, the 
air will be exhausted from the pipe p by the 
pump, and will be drawn from the top of the 
chamber X and forced through the gun e. So 
long as air alone is thus conducted no other 
effect results; but should a gas which is ex 
plosive or an explosive mixture of air and gas 
be drawn into the tube p and forced into the 
gun e it will, upon meeting the flamed, be 
ignited, and the charge within the gun will 
explode, driving the piston outward against 
The pres 
the going and Sounding the latter. 
ence of a dangerous gas is thus indicated in a 
few moments after it begins to enter a cham 
ber, and long before it can accumulate in dan 
gerous quantities or be brought into contact 
with the lights at the miner's level. A sepa 
rate pipe leads from each. Working-chamber 
of the mine to a separate gun or indicator at 
the surface. 
As will hereinafter be explained, each gun 
is provided with means-as a self- closing 
valve or contracted passage-way-to prevent 
the gas and flame from traveling back to the 
mine-chamber, and it will be understood that 
the parts indicated in said diagram may be 
3O 
AO 
45 
55 
7 5 
So 
QO 
ICO 
 
359,102 
O 
25 
45 
55 
variously constructed to automatically propel the attendant the signaling device which has 
and conduct the gases and afford an automatic been operated by the dangerous gases. Such an 
indication of their presence. For instance, 
indicator is generally advisable, as two signals 
the pump may be constructed in different ways, 
may be simultaneously operated in a gang of 
and the gas may be ignited by an incandes 
a dozen or more, and without such indication 
cent body, a flame, or an electric spark. The 
the attendant would be at a loss to determine 
indicator, instead of being a gong, may be a 
the chamber in which the gases are present. 
piece of traveling paper, which is punched by 
The gases are driven into the gun e through 
the piston; or the gases may be blown against 
a small pipe, n', communicating with the ro 
a chemically-prepared surface, which becomes 
tary pump or blower l', with which the pipe 
colored only on the presence of a dangerous 
p communicates, and when an explosive gas 
gas. In either case, however, it will be seen 
or mixture is thus introduced it flows out of 
that there is a constant automatic withdrawal 
the port 4 and is ignited, the force of the ex 
of gas or air from an elevated point in each 
plosion closing the valve f and forcing out the 
working-chamber of the mine, and the char 
piston h against the gong and throwing back 
acter of the gas thus withdrawn is indicated 
the indicator m, and this will be repeated at 
at the surface in a manner to convey immedi 
short intervals so long as repeated charges of 
ate information to the attendant at a central 
explosive gas are introduced into the gun. 
point. 
The entire amount of gas drawn from the 
While the apparatus having the general fea 
chamber by the pump is not thrown into the 
tures specified will effect the indication at the 
gun; but I provide the pump with an over 
Surface of the character of gas in the mine, it 
flow-pipe, p, through which the Surplus gas 
has the further advantage of also affording 
escapes, a valve at o' controlling the amount 
means of signaling from the central station 
of escape. 
and back to the chamber. Thus by obstruct 
In order to permit the end of the pipe p to 
ing the flow of air from the pump h", or by re 
be readily carried to the top of the mine-cham 
versing the current by air-pressure from an 
ber and there secured, I provide such end with 
other pump or a reservoir through the pipe 
a flexible terminal pipe-section, p", and at the 
'u', the current may be forced back through 
end of this flexible section I Secure a nozzle, 
the pipe p and out of the inner end through a 
u", provided with an eye, 7, by means of which 
whistle, D, and by closing the inner end of 
to suspend it in an elevated position or to se 
the pipe p the increased pressure in said pipe 
cure a cord for raising and lowering it, and at 
may be made the means of sounding a whistle 
the end of the nozzle I place an ordinary whis 
at the central station. 
tle, D. A valve-casing containing a valve, s, 
Having stated the general features of my 
opening inward and covered by gauze 23, to 
invention, I will now set forth in detail the con 
keep out dirt, communicates with the nozzle, 
struction of the various parts as I have used 
so as to admit the air or gases through the noz 
them, it being understood, however, that such 
zle to the conducting-pipe when the pump is 
constructions may be greatly varied without 
started. When a reversecurrentissent through 
departing from the essential features of my in 
the pump, the whistle is sounded, and by in 
wention. 
termitting the current distinct sounds may be 
In Fig. 8 the central station is shown as ar 
made in accordance with any desired prear 
ranged in an engine-house, to which all the 
ranged system, so as to afford a means of send 
pipes p lead from the different chambers Y of 
ing messages of any character back into the 
the mine. Within this house is arranged the 
indicating and signaling apparatus, more fully 
The reverse current may be forced back by 
illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 9. Said 
the pump; but I prefer to use a reservoir, i', 
apparatus is Supported by a frame-work hav 
containing air under pressure, and a valve de 
ing two platforms or tables, in na". On the ta 
vice, J, whereby to cut off the flow to the pump 
ble n' are supported the gong k and the gun 
through the pipe p, and at the same time put 
e, the construction of which is more fully illus 
the reservoir into communication with the 
pipe. 
trated in Fig. 4. The gun is a hollow cylin 
der, and the piston h constitutes, also, a valve, 
In the construction shown the valve device 
closing the rear end of the cylinder and held 
J is in the line of the pipe p, and consists of a 
in its closed position by the bow-spring g i. 
casing, n, divided by two perforated parti 
At the opposite end of the cylinder is a valve 
tions, 171S, into three chambers, 91011. The 
casing, a', containing a port, 3, and hinged 
valve-stem " has a terminal head, 12, and is 
valve?, provided with a stop-arm, f, limiting 
surrounded by a spring, 13, which lifts it and 
its outward movement and tending to keep it 
carries two valves, 1415, one adapted to a seat 
open. Beyond the port extends a nozzle hav 
on the partition 17 and the other to a seat on 
ing a small terminal port,4, opposite the flame 
the partition 18. 
d of a lamp, c. 
The pipe p communicates through an inlet 
There is a port, 5, in the top of the cylinder, 
port with the chamber 10, and through an out 
and a hinged armfalls over the same, so as to be 
let-port With the chamber 9, and a pipe, it', 
swung back to the position shown in Fig. 4 
leads from the reservoir i' to the chamber 11. 
when an explosion occurs, thereby indicating to The valves 1415 are so arranged that when one 
0. 
O 
85 
go 
95 
IO3 
IOS 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
359,102 
3. 
. 
is on its seat the other will be off its seat. So be able to supply differently-constructed de 
long as the parts are in the positions shown in 
vices which will effect the same results as those 
Fig. 5 the gas or air flows freely along the pipe 
set forth, which, however, have proved most 
effective in actual operation. Neither do I 
p and through the chambers 109 of the valve de 
here claim, broadly, the method of signaling 
vice and to the pump; but should it be desired 
by a single pipe with sounders at opposite 
to signal back to the mine the valve-stem is 
ends, and means for operating said sounders 
depressed, when the valve 14 will take its seat, 
by varying the flow in the pipe, as this will 
cutting off communication with the pump, and 
constitute the subject of a separate applica 
the valve 15 will be carried from its seat, and 
the air will flow from the pipe at and chamber 
tion for Letters Patent. 
In the apparatus shown the revolving shaft 
11 to the chamber 10 and back through the 
of the pump is driven by a belt, c', passing 
pipe p to the inner end of the pipe, when the 
round pulleys, as shown in Fig. I, from a 
whistle will be sounded. Thus as soon as the 
shaft, ac, to which motion is imparted from 
attendant is automatically notified by the sig 
any adjacent driving-shaft; but this arrange 
inal device that there is dangerous gas in a 
ment will be varied when a differently-coln 
chamber, he can by depressing the valve-stem 
structed pump is used. In some cases the 
send a back-current through the pipe p and at 
punp h" may be employed to fill and maintain 
once notify the miners of their danger, or send 
the reservoir i' with air under pressure. 
any desired instructions. 
I find that mixtures of air and light carbu 
The apparatus may also be the means of sig 
reted hydrogen, in which the proportion of 
naling from the mine to the station. Thus the 
the latter varies from six to twenty-five per 
variation of pressure in the pipe p may be 
cent., are explosive to varying degrees, and 
made the means of admitting air to a whistle, 
'', at the station, and the compressing of the 
that the above-described means suffice to indi 
cate the presence of any such mixtures in a 
flexible section p' of the pipe p will serve to 
manner which is perceptible to the most igno 
prevent the entrance of air or gas, and by 
causing an exhaust or partial vacuum vary 
rant and in attentive workmen or attendants 
and with apparatus that the most unskilled 
the pressure and make the signal. A device 
workmen can operate without danger of in 
for this purpose is shown in Fig. 6, in which 
pairing its efficiency. 
I is a casing containing a chamber, 20, covered 
by a flexible top or diaphragm, c', connected 
As before stated, it is intended that each 
part of the mine requiring to be tested shall 
to a pivoted weighted lever, b', by a link, and 
be provided with a separate tube and auto 
to the stem of a valve, 2, covering a port, 2', 
lmatic gas testing and indicating contrivances, 
from which a pipe, na', leads to the whistle r. 
all under the control of one operator at the 
The port 2' leads from a chamber in a valve 
testing station, so that all parts of the mine 
casing, K, Fig. 5, with which a branch, u, of 
are under constant supervision, and constant, 
the pipe at' communicates, so that when the 
accurate, and infallible tests of the air or gases 
valve & uncovers the port 2' air under pressure 
in each part of the mine are made, enabling 
will pass from the reservoir i' to the whistle 
the superintendent to know the workings of 
7', and will sound the latter. The pipe p com 
each section without the usual unavoidable 
municates with the chamber 20, and if the 
and often fatal delays attending the use of 
inner or mine end of said pipe p is closed by 
testing means heretofore employed. 
temporarily compressing the flexible section 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
p", the exhaustion of the air by the pump will 
struction and arrangement of parts shown, I 
decrease the pressure in the pipe and in the 
chamber 20, and the diaphragm c' will sink, 
claim 
1. In an apparatus for testing gases of mines, 
moving the valve 2 from the port 2", when the 
a series of automatic testing devices arranged 
air from the reservoir will escape to and sound 
at a testing-station, a series of pipes each ex 
the whistle ', and by alternately compressing 
and releasing the pipe-section p' a series of 
tending from a mine chamber to one of the 
signals may be made, according to any prede 
testers, and a pump whereby a continuous 
stream of gas is caused to pass from each cham 
termined system, which will enable the miners 
ber to each tester, all substantially as set forth. 
to send any desired information to the central 
2. The combination, in an apparatus for 
station. The same result will ensue if the air 
testing gases of mines, of a series of automatic 
is traveling back through the pipe, the stop 
testing devices at a station, each having an 
page of the flow increasing the pressure in 
igniter, a series of pipes each leading from 
chamber 20, lifting the diaphragm, and raising 
one of the mine-chambers to one of Said appa 
the valve above the port 2'. 
ratus, and a pump whereby the gases are 
To prevent any confusion of signals, each 
whistle 'is provided with a hinged indicator, 
caused to pass from each chamber to each 
tester, all substantially as set forth. 
n", Fig. 9, like the indicator in, which is thrown 
3. The combination of a tube leading from a 
back by the air-current, and indicates that a 
mine-chamber, a pump for propelling the air 
whistle has been Sounded. 
through said tube, a gun connected by a pipe 
I do not limit myself to the precise construc 
tion of signaling and indicating and blowing 
with said tube to receive a portion of the air 
thus withdrawn from the mine, and an igniter 
apparatus shown, as any skilled mechanic will 
OO 
IO5 
I is 
I 25 
I 30 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
O 
45 
65 
 
4. 
359,102 
IC 
5 of the cylinder, substantially as described. 
whereby the contents of the gun are fired when 
the same are explosive, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. The testing apparatus consisting of a hol 
5 low cylinder or gun receiving the air or gas to 
be tested, a port at one end, an igniter oppo 
site said port, and a movable piston arranged to 
operate an oral alarm when the charge in the 
gun is fired, substantially as described. 
5. The combination of a cylinder, a tube for 
conducting thereto gases to be tested, a piston 
sliding in the cylinders, a gong arranged to be 
struck on the outward movement of the piston, 
and an igniter arranged opposite an exit-port 
6. The combination of the testing-cylinder 
provided with an exit-port and valve at one 
end, an igniter opposite said port, a sliding 
piston in the cylinder, a spring retracting said 
2O piston, a gong arranged to be sounded on the 
movement of the piston, and an indicator ar 
ranged to be moved on the explosion of gases 
in the cylinder, substantially as described. 
7. The combination of the testing-cylinder 
25 provided with a port, with a hinged indicat 
ing-arm for covering said port, and a gas in 
let, escape, and igniter, substantially as set 
forth. 
8. The combination of the testing appara 
3O tus, substantially as described, and a tube ex 
tending into the mine and provided at the in 
ner elid with a flexible section, and means for 
Suspending the end thereof in an elevated po 
sition, substantially as and for the purpose set 
9. The combination of the tester, a tube ex 
tending into the mine, a terminal flexible sec 
tion, and a nozzle constructed to be secured in 
an elevated position, substantially as described. 
10. The combination of the tester, a tube ex 
tending into the mine, a whistle secured to said 
tube, and means for propelling the air outward 
and backward in said tube, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
35 forth. 
4O 
45 
55 
6o 
11. The combination of the tester, a tube ex 
tending into the mine, a whistle at the inner 
end of the tube, a pump for driving the air out 
ward through said tube, an air-reservoir, and 
a valve whereby the air-reservoir may be put 
into communication with the tube to drive a 
current of air back through the same, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
12. The combination of the tube, the testing 
apparatus at one end, a whistle at the other, 
a pump, an air-reservoir, and a valve whereby 
to cut the pump from communication with the 
tube and put the latter into communication 
with the reservoir, substantially as set forth. 
13. The combination of the tester, the tube - 
leading to the mine, the chamber, the pump, 
the air-reservoir, the whistle adjacent to the 
tester, a valve controlling the flow of air from 
the reservoir to the whistle, and a chamber 
covered by a flexible diaphragm connected to 
the valve and communicating with the tube, 
substantially as described. 
14. The combination of the tester, a tube, 
a pump, a pressure apparatus communicating 
with the tube and connected with a valve, a 
whistle, and a port controlled by said valve for 
the passage of air to the whistle, Substantially 
as described. 
15. The combination of the tube, the tester, 
the whistle at the inner end of the tube, a 
whistle at the outer end of the tube, an air 
reservoir, and a valve and connections con 
structed to control the flow of air to the outer 
whistle according to the pressure in the tube, 
and a second valve constructed to control the 
flow of air between said tube and the pump 
and between said reservoir and the tube, Sub 
stantially as described. 
THOMAS SHAW. 
Witnesses: 
J. HUGHES, 
J. LOGAN FITTS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359202.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. CARR, 
DOOR CHECK 
- 
No. 359,202, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1887. 
28itv.cscs 
-6-e 2z 
 
7.24%.16.a. yetter 
" "7 S2 tea, i.e., 
Z62 
O1. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH E. CARR, OF FRANKFORD, PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, AS 
SIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JACOB Y. MARTINDALE, OF SAME PLACE. 
D O C R. CHECK 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed Sept2mber 6, 1886 
Patent No. 359,202, dated March 8, 1887. 
. Serial No. 212,830. (No model.) 
O 
To all livion, it nay coice; 1. 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. E. CARR, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Frank 
ford, in the county of Philadelphia and State 
Of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Door. Checks; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to door-checks; and it 
consists in the combination of a suitable base 
or bracket, a block eccentrically pivoted there 
to, and a ring within which the block is adapted 
to turn freely. 
It also consists in other details, which will 
be fully pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 show's my inven 
tion applied to the lower edge of a door. Fig. 
2 is a front elevation of the device, and Fig. 3 
is a section on line a'a of Fig. 2. 
A represents a bracket provided with suit 
able holes for screwing it to a door. The 
bracket is also provided with a centrally-lo 
cated hole, and with the projection (t' to serve 
as a stop, as hereinafter described. 
B is a block, preferably of triangular shape, 
the corners being grooved, as shown in Fig. 3. 
It is provided with a knob, b, and with an eccen 
tric stud, b', which fits in the centrally-located 
hole of the bracket, and is free to turn within 
it. The block carries a ring, C, provided with 
an interior flange, c, which loosely fits in the 
grooves b' in the corners of the block. The 
periphery of the ring is grooved to receive a 
square rubber ring or tire, c', which acts with 
friction against the floor. The normal posi 
tion of the ring when the door is closed is up 
and over against the projection a, where it lies 
4o until required for use, when it is pushed back, 
3O 
S 
3. 
drops down in contact with the floor, and holds 
the door in the position desired. To release 
the door the knob lb should be turned, causing 
the block to turn within the ring and raise it 
from the floor without friction. This motion 
lifts the ring directly from the floor and avoids 
the friction due to rubbing or sliding the pe 
riphery of the check against the floor, inci 
dent to an eccentrically-hung disk. 
It is obvious that this device may be suc 
cessfully used on inside blinds which extend 
to the floor. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. A door-check consisting of the combina 
tion of a bracket and block eccentrically piv 55 
oted thereto, and a ring, within which the 
block turns freely, as described. 
2. In a door-check, the combination of an 
eccentrically-pivoted block, provided with pe 
ripheral grooves, and a ring having an inte 
rior flange adapted to fit in the grooves and 
allow of a free movement of the bioclc within 
the ring, as set forth. 
3. In a door-check, the combination, with 
an eccentrically-pivoted block, of a ring pro 
vided with a rubber tire, and adapted to slide 
on said block when the block is turned within 
it, substantially as described. 
4. In a door-check, the block B, provided 
with knob b, eccentric stud b', and exterior 
grooves, in combination with ring C, provided 
with flange c and external groove, and the rub 
ber ring c', as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
yo 
- 
JOSEPH. E. CARR, 
Witnesses: 
FRED. L. HOFF, 
HARRY R. JOHNSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359303.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 359,303, 
  
R x-N 
SKSG 
G. WESTINGHOUSE, Jr. 
FLUID PRESSURE MOTOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar, 15, 1887. 
N SIN t 
NNNN 
S. 
s 
 
YS 
2 
NE fNSSE373 St 
NSNs EEE 
WZS 
% 
V R N222ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
N 
 
 
2NN : 
st 
E. 
NYZ 
2S ZN 
35 2 2. 
6 
2 
ASSES-15 
NiI2F% Sz 
SN22 
N33.5%, 
N.Z.4 
2. 
N25%:N3,122 
SNZENS 22 
S333, 
S12. 33 
A 22S2 
SN 
N 
 
 
R 
 
 
2 2 2 ELLIM NIn 
- is 
  
R SNSF, 55. 
 
 
& A. ///E 
 
SAS 2-6, 
AWWA/WZZ1A 
47-sevzow (22% 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
G. WESTINGHOUSE, Jr., 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 359,303, 7-2 
FIUID PRESSURE MOTOR 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
m 
W/ re. 
w 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE WESTINGHOUSE, JR., OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FU O - PRESSURE IV OTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 359,303, dated March 15, 1887. 
Application filed August 30, 1886. Serial No. 212,177. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE WESTING 
HOUSE, Jr., residing at Pittsburg, in the county 
of Allegheny and State of Pennsylvania, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, have invented or dis 
covered a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Fluid-Pressure Motors, of which improve 
ment the following is a specification. 
In the accompanying drawings, which make 
part of this specification, Figure 1, Sheet 1, is 
a vertical sectional view of my improved fluid 
preSSure motor, showing the valve mechanism 
shifted to admit fluid-pressure to one side of 
the piston, also showing the valve mechanism 
by which impulse or movement is imparted 
from a distant station to operate the motor 
valves, the pipe connecting the two being 
broken away, except at its ends. Fig. 2, Sheet 
2, is a vertical sectional view, to an enlarged 
Scale, of the Operators or distant station valve 
mechanism; and Fig. 3 is a view in sectional 
elevation of the upper portion of a pair of 
such valves connected as in use for operating 
the motor in opposite directions, the plane of 
section in this figure being at right angles to 
that shown in Fig. 2. 
My present invention relates to certain im 
provements in the valve-actuating mechanism 
of fluid-pressure engines or motors. 
In an application for patent filed by me Au 
gust. 30, 1886, Serial No. 212,180, I have de 
scribed and claimed a fluid-pressure engine or 
motor having a power-piston, a distributing 
valve, two small pistons inclosed within the 
valve-chamber, connected with and operating 
the distributing-valve, valve-governed escape 
ports for moving the valve-controlling pis 
tons by difference of fluid-pressure thereon, 
and electrically-controlled mechanismfor open 
ing the escape-valves at the pleasure of the 
operator. 
My present invention consists of certain 
combinations of an engine or motor having 
pistons, valves, and ports, substantially as 
shown and described in said prior application, 
with mechanism for operating the escape 
valves by force applied through a fluid, pref. 
erably a liquid column inclosed within pipe 
connections, as hereinafter more fully described 
and claimed. 
In the drawings, A represents a cylinder in 
closing a packed piston, A. A stem, A, ex 
tends from this piston through a suitable stuff. 
ing-box, A, and may make connection, di 
rectly or indirectly, with the apparatus or 55 
mechanism to be actuated thereby. 
Fluid-pressure is admitted to either side of 
the piston from valve-chamber C by passages 
a ca, and is exhausted to the outer air by in 
termediate passage, a. A slide-valve, a, mov- 6o 
ing on the seat a, controls supply and exhaust 
of fluid-pressure. Movement is given to the 
valve by two pistons, c c, fixed upon a com 
mon tubular stem, c', such stem having a one 
sided enlargement at or near its center, with 65 
recess or socket c therein to receive the up 
per part of the valves. The valve-governing 
pistons c e may either fit loosely within the 
cylindrical valve-chamber C; or by preference 
Small channels or passages care made along 7o 
the chamber-wall in the path of the pistons, 
or through the body of the pistons, thereby 
providing for passage of fluid in small quan 
tities from the inner to the Outer sides of the 
pistons. Fluid, by preference air under press- 75 
ure,is supplied to the valve-chamber between 
its inclosed pistons by any suitable pipe-con 
nections leading from a reservoir, compressing 
apparatus, or other source of Supply. If fluid 
be permitted to escape from either end of the 8o 
valve-chamber outside one of the valve-pis 
tons c, an excess of fluid-pressure will be ex 
erted on the pistons in the direction of such 
escape, thereby moving them and the distrib 
uting-valve a in that direction. When such 85 
escape is closed, the leakage or limited flow 
past the piston will soon restore equilibrium 
of pressure. 
In order to make provision for such escape 
and to control opening and closing the same, 93 
ports e are made in the chamber ends or heads, 
leading by passages e to the exterior air. 
These ports are opened and closed by valves 
e, which abut or rest against stems e, extend 
ing inward within the tubular passage c of 95 
stem c'. Springs e' hold the valves to their 
seats with a definite degree of pressure, as 
sisted somewhat by fluid-pressure upon the 
inner ends of stems e, admitted within the 
stem c' through central port, c. 
In order to unseat the valves and permites 
cape, rods or stems e are extended from the, 
valve outward through the portse and through 
an axial passage, d, into a piston-chamber, d, 
IOO 
3O 
35 
45 
2 
359,303 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
I5 bers through the plugs. . 
formed in the cases ol' shells D, which latter-- 
one at either end---screw into the ends of and, 
in effect, form heads for the piston-chamber C. 
Pistons are fitted to move in the chambers 
5 d", such pistons having stems i, extending in 
ward to or nearly to the ends of valve-rods e. 
The pistons are packed to prevent leakage 
past them, and yet afford freedom of move 
ment, by means of diaphragms I, bound at 
Io their peripheries between the abutting shoul 
iders d of the shells D and plugs D', which lat 
ter screw into and close the ends of the piston 
or diaphragm chambers, except in the central 
pipe-like passages, d, leading to such cham 
. 
The pistons I are held against the dia- | 
phragms I' by springsi, having some prede 
termined degree of tension or resistance to 
compression--say twenty-five pounds, (more or 
bless.) If fluid, by preference liquid, filling the 
passages d' and the space on the outer sides of 
the diaphragms be subjected to a compressing 
I force greater than the resisting power of the 
springs, the diaphragms I will be bent or de 
flected inward, as represented on the left, 
Fig. 1, thereby pressing the piston I and stem 
i inward against valve-rode, and forcing the 
valve from its seat. Such unseating of the 
valve permits escape of fluid-pressure through 
porte', and causes the pistons c and valve a 
to move to the left, as shown, in position to 
admit fluid-pressure to the right of the main 
piston and open the passage on the left to the 
exhaust. 
In Fig. 1 the valve a is shown shifted to the 
left, as above described; but the piston is on 
the right, not having yet moved in response to 
fluid-pressure, which might enter through 
right-hand porta. When fluid or liquid press 
ure in passage d' is released or falls below the 
power of spring i", the latter forces the piston 
outward, thereby permitting the compressed 
spring e', assisted by fluid-pressure on stem e", 
to seat valve e and close the escape. This be 
ing done, the leakage or limited passage of 
fluid-pressure past the piston c will soon re 
store equilibrium of fluid - pressure on the 
valve-pistols. 
Provision is also made in this motor for 
making and breaking electric circuits, both by 
movements of the valve-operating mechanism 
and by the piston at the ends of its stroke. 
This feature of construction is not claimed 
herein, however, but is included in the sub 
55 ject-matter of a separate application filed by 
me of even date here with. 
Make and break by the valve mechanism is 
secured by connecting the metal parts of the 
engine in circuit, and also binding-postsMM, 
which latter are secured to but electrically in 
sulated from the plugs or shells DD by hard 
rubber or equivalent sleeves m'. The inner 
ends, In, of these posts are in position to make 
contact with the inner ends of piston-stems i, 
when the latter are moved inward to open the 
escape-valves. Consequently the circuits con 
nected to the posts and the pistons will be 
45 
4O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
; ; 
: 
; 
it 
: 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. . 
. 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Od : 
IO5 
O 
. 
. 
; 
; ; ; ; ; 
; 85 . 
In apparatus of this class employed 
The piston make and break is secured by 7o 
made and broken by making and breaking 
contact between the parts in and i. 
means of a stem, b, carrying a button, b, which 
makes contact at the two ends of piston-stroke 
with springs bb, secured to posts bb, which 
latter are secured to but electrically insulated . 
. 
. 
from the shell B, cast on the head of the main 75 . 
cylinder. Circuits connected to the posts b' 
b' or ll will be made and broken by the move 
ment of the piston. The circuits thus made 
dependent upon the movements of the engine 
may be employed for various purposes, as de- 8o 
scribed in the separate application referred to, 
and among others they may, if desired, be made 
to actuate some signal by which it may be 
known whether some desired movement of the 
engine has been effected. 
; 
erate switches, signals, locks, and other parts 
or appliances connected with a railway-track, 
it is ordinarily required to control the opera 
tion of the same from some central or common go 
station more or less distant. To this end a 
pipe or tube, H, is connected to each plug D' 
by couplingh. These pipes are extended in 
length from each end of the valve mechanism 
of the motor to the cabin or stand of the oper 
ator, where each makes connection by suitable 
coupling with the pipe end r of an operators 
valve mechanism R. As before stated, I pre 
fer to use liquid in this pipe-connection H, 
and of the various liquids which may be used 
therein to communicate pressure or impulse I 
prefer one like alcohol, or petroleum, or other 
equivalent liquid not liable to congeal or be 
frozen. Such liquid or other fluid medium is 
forced into the connecting - pipe under such 
pressure as practically to exclude air or other 
compressible gas or vapor and to secure a col 
umn or body of uniform density. In practice 
the liquid composing such column may be con 
fined wholly within pipe H, or it may enter 
and partially fill the chamber in shell Rof the 
valve mechanism, which may be made of suffi 
cient length for this purpose, as hereinafter 
described. If the liquid is contained wholly 
within pipe H, open communication is af. 
forded to it from chamber R, by passage r. 
Pressure to be communicated through the 
column or pipe is imparted by fluid, by pref. 
erence air, under pressure of sufficient degree. 
This is done as follows: 
To the upper end of shell R is screwed an 
elbow-shaped upper shell or case, 7, closed at 
its upper end by screw-plug or other equiva 
lent stopper, r", having therein an annular 
port, , for admission of air under pressure. 
Air thus supplied passes downward between 
the wings of upper valve-stem, n, filling the 
chamber below. At the angle of the elbow, 
and extending downward therefrom, is a 
valve plug or bushing, S, having therein ports 
s s', leading from supply-chamber down 
ward and laterally to the tubular or pipe-like 
passage r", through the elbow-piece r"; also, a 
port, s, in line with and below ports, opens 
II5 
I 25 
2 
359,303 
3 
O 
into a valve-chamber, s, and thence by port 
s' to open air. The bushing s, in the lower 
end of this valve-chamber, affords a guide for 
valve-stem N, on the upper end of which is 
S formed the escape-valve in, seating upward 
against and closing the port s. This valve 
has a pin extension, n, thereon, adapted to 
enter and fill or practically close the passage 
s', like a piston, and thus prevent escape in 
case the conical portion in of the valve is not 
properly seated by reason of insufficient lift 
on the stem N. A reduced stem, n', extends 
from pin in upward through ports sands, and 
abuts against or enters a socket-passage, n', 
in the supply-valve n, which latteris formed 
on the lower end of winged stem in, and seat 
ing downward closes port s from above. A 
light spring, r", seated between the collar in 
on stem n' and the inner end of plug above, 
presses valve n upon an escape-valve, n, away 
from the respective seats or ports. Upward 
lift of sufficient force upon the stem N will 
seat escape-valve n and open supply-valve n", 
thereby permitting air-supply under pressure 
to pass through ports S S to passage , and 
thence to the upper side of collar or valve 
ring m. This ring or collar moves loosely on 
the upper winged end, p, of stem P, and it is 
held in place thereon between a nut, p, se 
cured on the upper end of the stem, and a 
spring, p, below, seated upon a collar, p, on 
the stem. 
Pressure of inflowing fluid upon the upper 
face of valve or ring m, if in excess of the re 
sistance of spring p, will depress such valve, 
permitting the fluid supply to pass downward 
through the wing-passages p to the chamber 
R below. This pressure will be operative 
upon the liquid or other equivalent medium, 
whether the same is contained within pipe H 
or whether it enters and partially fills cham. 
ber R', and being communicated through such 
medium will be effective in moving the dia 
phragm L and opening the escape-valvee of 
the engine, as before described. When up 
ward lift on stem N is released, the spring " 
will seat valven', closing the supply and open 
ing the escape-valve m. The escape thus af. 
forded will reduce fluid-pressure in passage , 
so that fluid-pressure below the ring-valve m, 
plus the pressure of spring p", will lift the valve 
and seat it upon the under face of nut p, there 
by preventing fluid escape past the same. As 
the passage r is open to the external air by 
ports s s' there will be practically atmos 
pheric pressure only to oppose the pressure 
confined below the ring - valve m. Conse 
quently the stem P will be raised toward or 
against the stop r" by such pressure, assisted 
somewhat by spring p' below, thereby unseat 
ing the valve u, formed on the lower end of 
the stem, and opening an escape-port, u', formed 
in the bottom plug, R., of the shell or case. 
If the liquid column is confined to pipe H, this 
escape may open directly to the exterior air, 
either by side port, u, or by an open port in 
the end made by removing the screw-plug u', 
95 
such escape taking place when valve u is 
raised. If, on the other hand, the liquid col 
umn terminates in chamber R, I prefer to 
make pipe connection u from port at to a small 
tank or reservoir, U, fixed at sufficient height 
above the pipe EI to insure sufficient liquid in 
the case R at all times to fill pipe H. As the 
valve it is raised the pressure upon the liquid 75 
will be relieved by forcing a portion of the 
liquid, in case liquid is contained in chamber 
R", into the tank, thereby in either case pro 
viding for quick release or cessation of the 
force or impulse exerted upon the liquid col 
umn. Slow leakage past the valve in-such 
as is incident to valve-piston mechanism 
of this character-will permit the liquid in 
tank U and chamber R to return to a common 
level. The valve u may be seated or returned 
to normal position either by the weight of the 
stem P and valve m or by pressure of inflowing 
fluid thereon, so as to impart to the liquid the 
desired impulse. The operation of valve im, 
stem P, and valve at, both in admitting fluid 
supply, imparting impulse to the liquid col 
umn, and in relieving pressure below the valve 
m, is automatic, prompt, and efficient, and is 
substantially the same, whether liquid is pres 
ent in the chamber R or not; but if present 
the tank U performs an important function, 
not only in affording convenient means for 
maintaining liquid-supply without introduc 
ing air into the pipes, but also in providing 
relief from pressure or impulse without Waste 
of liquid; also, to this same end the shell R. 
may be made of considerable length-say six 
inches, more or less-in order that valve m may 
be clearly above the level of liquid, and there 
by prevent discharge of liquid upward. 
The stems N for supply and exhaust fluid 
may be lifted in any convenient and suitable 
manner, either by hand or by means of suit 
able mechanical contrivance. In Fig. 3 two 
of the valve mechanisms are shown connected 
together, each being connected by separate 
pipes H to its appropriate end D' of the mech 
anism, for shifting the distributing-valve a of 
the engine, as before described. 
Fluid-supply is by a passage, 0, in upper con 
necting-bar, W, and the relief or escape may be 
either directly to the exterior air or by separate 
pipe-connections to tank U. The two valves are 
secured by flanges k to any suitable support, 
K, and their stems N are lifted by a rocking 
bar, T, upon the ends of which the stems rest, 
and the stems are raised alternately by rock 
ing the pivot t, which carries the bar. This 
may be done either by hand or by mechanical 
contrivance, and I reserve for a separate ap 
plication suitable interlocking apparatus for 
effecting these movements in predetermined 
order with reference to other operations to be 
performed on or about a track. 
Either fluid 
supply valve in will be opened, as desired, ac 
cording to the movement of the rocking bar 
T in one or the other direction, and when said 
bar is moved into its middle or horizontal po 
sition both the fluid-supply valves will be 
IOO 
IC5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
25 
35 
45 
4. 
359,303 
6. In combination with the valve-shifting 7o 
5. In combination with the valve-shifting 
mechanism of a fluid-pressure motor, an in 
closed fluid column for transmitting impulse 
without expenditure of fluid, and a movable or 65 
flexible partition between the valve mechan 
ism and the fluid column for transmitting the 
impulse of the fluid column to the valve mech 
anism, substantially as set forth. 
mechanism of a fluid-pressure motor, a column 
of liquid for communicating movement to the 
valve mechanism from a distance, and Valve 
mechanism for directing fluid under pressure 
upon the liquid column at the distant station, 75 
substantially as set forth. 
7. A valve mechanism having, in combina 
tion, a valve-governed supply and exhaust 
ports at its upper end, and a valve-governed exit 
at its lower end, the valve for the latter exit 8o 
having an upwardly-extending stem with a 
valve movable thereon opening downward to 
permit fluid passage and Seating upward 
against and lifting the stem hy fluid-pressure 
on the under side, substantially as and for the 85 
purposes set forth. 
8. In mechanism for subjecting a liquid 
column to fluid-pressure, the combination of 
a case receiving a portion of the liquid at its 
lower end, valve-governed ports in the case 9o 
above the liquid for supply and exhaust of 
fluid-pressure, a valve within the case above 
the level of the liquid, such valve opening 
downward to admit fluid-pressure to the liq 
uid and seating upward to close the passage, 95 
and a valve-governed exit below the level of 
liquid, the valve to such exit being opened by 
upward pressure upon the valve above the 
liquid, substantially as set forth. 
liquid to fluid-pressure, the combination of a 
case having open communication with the liq 
uid, valve governed ports above the level of 
liquid for supply and exhaust of fluid-press 
ure, a valve-governed exit below the level of IOS 
liquid, and a liquid reservoir or receptacle 
communicating with the exit, substantially as 
set forth. 
10. The combination of rock-shaft t, bar T, 
valve-stems N, resting upon the bar on either IIo 
side of the shaft and li?ted alternately by rock 
ing movements thereof, fluid-supply valves n, 
and springs r", acting to automatically seat 
said valves when the rock-shaft is moved to 
central position, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
9. In mechanism for Subjecting a column of IOO 
II5 
GEO. WESTINGHOUSE, JR. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. WHITTLESEY, 
J. SNOWDEN BELL. 
automatically seated and both fluid-exhaust 
valves opened by the springs . 
Pressure communicated to the liquid col 
umn, as above described, will be transmitted 
5 almost instantaneously to and be effective on 
the diaphragm I, and while I prefer to use air 
as a medium of communicating such pressure 
to the liquid, yet other fluid medium, or even 
a liquid medium, may be emyloyed; also, in 
Io stead of subjecting the liquid column to direct 
contact with the air or equivalent fluid, the two 
may be separated by a diaphragm or by mov 
able piston or other equivalent yielding device 
by which pressure may be communicated from 
75 one to the other. Such partitions are not es 
sential, but are referred to as modifications, 
which may, if desired, be made in details of 
construction, which I consider as coming with 
in my invention; also, for the purpose of im 
2o parting inpulse to the liquid column other 
means than fluid-pressure may be employed 
for example, a mechanically-actuated plunger; 
or fluid - pressure may be admitted to and 
turned from the liquid column by a three-way 
25 cock or other equivalent device. I prefer, 
however, to emplow for this purpose the valve 
mechanism herein shown and described, be 
cause best adapted to fill all the requirements 
of use. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. The method herein described of impart 
ing movement from a distant station to the 
valve-shifting mechanism of a fluid-pressure 
engine or motor, consisting in connecting such 
35 mechanism with the distant station by a con 
tinuous inclosed column or body of liquid and 
giving movement or impulse to such column 
by subjecting the same to pressure at the dis 
tant station, substantially as set forth. 
2. A fluid-pressure engine or motor having 
a main piston, a distributing-valve, pistons 
for moving the distributing-valve, and escape. 
valves for reducing fluid-pressure on one side 
of the valve-pistons, in combination with suit 
45 able mechanisms for unseating the escape. 
valves, and a fluid column for communicating 
impulse or movement to the valve mechanisin 
from a distance, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of distributing-valve a, 
pistons c c, escape-valvese, pistons I, and fluid 
pressure diaphragms I, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. In a fluid-pressure motor, the combina 
tion of a distributing valve, pistons for shift 
55 ing the valve, escape-valves for reducing fluid 
pressure on one side of the piston, flexible 
diaphragms exposed on One side to a fluid 
column, pistons abutting against the dia 
phragms and the escape-valves, and springs 
6.a for holding such latter pistons against the dia 
phragms, substantially as set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359403.txt	(No Model.). 
J. PETTINGER. 
AXLE AND WHEEL. 
No. 359,403, 
Patented Mar, 15, 1887. 
  
 
  
 
 
NS = 
7 
A. 
w 
 
Z5 
k RSNN A.O. 
S N 22222222 
N 
7 
  
WITNESSES: 
24, P 
 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN PETTINGER, OF CARPENTERIA, CALIFORNIA. 
AXE AND WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 359,403, dated March 15, 1887. 
Application filed June 13, 1884. Renewed August 9, 1886. Serial No. 210,447. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
- 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN PETTINGER, of 
Carpenteria, in the county of Santa Barbara 
and State of California, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Wheels and Axles, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of my in 
provement, taken longitudinally with the axle, 
parts being broken away. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation, partly in section, of the middle part 
of the wheel. 
The object of this invention is to promote 
simplicity in the construction and convenience 
and durability in the use of Wheels and axles. 
The invention consists in a wheel and axle 
constructed with a hub cast solid with a hol 
low spindle and an annular flange and a cup 
flange. Upon the spindle is placed a hollow 
axie, which is Secured in place by a binding 
rod passing through the said spindle and hub. 
With the hub and its solid flange is connected 
by bolts an annular plate for clamping the 
spokes in place. The annular clamping-plate 
and its bolts and the ends of the hubs and bind 
ing-rods are covered and concealed by a cap 
screwed upon the edge of the said annular 
plate, as will be hereinafter fully described. 
A represents the hub, which is cast solid 
with the outer end of the hollow spindle B. 
Upon the inner end of the hub Alis formed an 
annular flange, C, against which the inner 
ends of the spokes D rest, and which is perfo 
rated to receive the fastening-bolts E. The 
adjacent sides of the ends of the spokes D are 
tapered to fit against each other, while their 
ends rest against the sides of the hub A, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Fis an annular plate 
which fits upon the outer end of the hub A, 
and is perforated to receive the fastening-bolts 
E. A bolt, E, is used for each pair of spokes 
D, the adjacent sides of which are recessed to 
receive the said bolts, as shown in Fig. 2, so 
that the inner ends of the spokes will be held 
securely in place by the plate F and bolts E. 
Upon the outer side of the flange Cisformed 
a cup-flange, G, forming an annular recess be 
tween the said flange and the hollow spindle B 
to receive the end of the hollow axle H, placed 
upon the said spindle, and which is secured 
in place by the rod or long bolt I, passed 
through the two spindles B, and having nuts 
J, Screwed upon their ends. The outer ends 
of the hubs A are countersunk to receive the 
nuts J, so that the ends of the binding-rods I 
and the Outer sides of the nuts J may be flush 
With Or a little below the surface of the outer 
end of the said hub A, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The outer end of the hub A, the outer ends of 
the bolts E, and the annular plate F are cov 
ered and concealed by the cap K, screwed upon 
the Outer edge of the said plate F, as shown 
in Fig. 1. The rod I passes through rubber 
or other suitable packing, L, placed in the 
ends of the hollow spindle B, as shown in Fig. 
l, to Center the said rod and preventinoise when 
the vehicle is in use. The spindles B of the 
two wheels are made of such a length that 
their inner ends will nearly meet at the center 
of the axle H. 
M is an oil-cup, from which a hole leads 
through the side of the hollow axle H at its 
center, so as to introduce oil into the space 
between the adjacent ends of the spindle B. 
To the axle H, near its ends, is secured an 
other oil-cup, N, from which a hole leads 
through the side of the said axle H, so as to in 
troduce oil into the space between the outer 
parts of the axle H and spindle B. 
With this construction the rod I and the 
two spindles B will revolve together within 
the axle H, except when one of the said wheels 
moves faster than the other, in which case one 
of the said spindles will turn upon the said rod. 
Another advantage of this construction is 
that the bearing-surfaces can be oiled without 
its being necessary to remove the wheels, and 
that the outer surface of the wheels and axle 
will not beliable to have oil upon it, to soil the 
clothes coming in contact with the said surface. 
Having thus described my inventipn, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In an axle and wheels, the hub A, cast 
solidly with a hollow spindle, and at its inner 
end with an annular flange, said flange having 
cast upon its inner side a tubular or cup flange, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In an axle and wheels, the hub A, cast 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
IOO 
359,403 
solidly with a hollow spindle and with an 
annular flange at its inner end, said flange be 
ing cast with a tubular or cup flange upon its 
inner side, in combination with the hollow 
axle H and the binding-rod I, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In an axle and wheels, the hub A, hav 
ing a hollow spindle and an annular flange, 
the annular plate F, bolts E, and the cap K, 
screwed upon the periphery of the plate F, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with a hollow axle, of 
hubs having hollow spindles cast integral 
5 
O 
therewith, and a bolt extending through the 
hollow spindles for Securing the hubs upon the IS 
axle, substantially as shown and described. 
5. The combination, with the hollow axle 
FI, the spindles B of the hubs A, and the fast 
ening-bolt J, of the packing L, substantially 
as shown and described, and for the purpose 20 
Set fortl. 
JOHN PETTINGER. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT STRATIIEARN, 
ETTA. AARCY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359504.txt	(No Model.) 
F. F. FOSTER, 
STED PROPELLER, 
No. 359,504, 
Patented Mar, 15, 1887. 
i  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK F. FOSTER, OF MOUNT PLEASANT, MICHIGAN. 
SLED PROPELE.R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 359,504, dated March 15, 1887. 
Application filed July 29, 1886. Serial No. 209,397. (No model.) 
IO 
2) 
35 
- 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FRANK F. FosTER, of 
Mount Pleasant, in the county of Isabella and 
State of Michigan, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Velocipede-Sleighs; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, ciear, and exact description thereof, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in the construction of 
velocipede-sleighs. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction, arrangement, and combination of 
the various parts, all as more fully hereinafter 
Set forth. 
Figure l is a side elevation of my improved 
velocipede-sleigh. Fig. 2 is a top plan of the 
Same, and Fig. 3 is a rear elevation. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, A represents the 
main and longitudinal bed-piece of a frame, 
the rear end of such bed-piece being journaled 
upon the shaft B, while to the forward end of 
such bed-piece is secured, in any suitable man 
ner, a sleigh, C, of any suitable construction. 
Upon one end of the axle B is secured a bob 
runner, D, and upon the opposite end of such 
axle, which is bent. substantially in the form 
shown in Fig. 3, is secured the drive-wheel E, 
the periphery or tire of which is spiked or 
studded, as shown. 
F is a side bar of the Supporting frame, the 
rear end of which is secured to the axle B, 
whileitsforwardendisconnected by the brace 
rod G to or near the front end of the bed-piece, 
A, the whole of such frame preferably being 
made of gas-piping. The inner end of the 
hub of the main driving or traction wheel'E 
is squared preferably, upon which is securely 
fastened a sprocket-wheel, H, from which the 
drive-chain Iruns to a similar sprocket-wheel, 
J, Secured upon the end of the treadle-shaft 
K, which latter is journaled in proper bear 
ings across the rectangular portion of the sup 
porting-frame, and by means of which motion 
is imparted to the drive-wheel. 
45 
 
55 
75 
L is the seat, which is secured upon suitable 
standards, M, vertically adjustable in brack 
ets N, secured to the bed-piece A, the seat 
being braced by the rods O. 
P is the stem of the hand-lever R. To this 
stem P are secured the crank-arms S, from 
which rods T lead to and connect with a simi 
lar crank-arm, U, suitably secured to the 
sleigh in any such manner that, by partially 
rotating or turning the stem P by means of 
the hand-lever R, the sleigh may readily be 
guided in the desired direction. 
The operation of a device of this character 
is So well understood that it is not deemed 
necessary to enter into a description thereof. 
What I claim as my invention is 
I. The combination, with the bed-piece A, 
journaled at its rear end on the axle B, and 
the sleigh C on the forward end of said bed 
piece, of the bob-runner D on one end of said 
axle in line with said sleigh and the drive 
wheel E on the other end, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination of the bed-piece A, 
journaled at its rear end on the axle B, the 
sleigh C on the forward end of said bed-piece, 
the bob-runner D on one end of said axle in 
line with said sleigh, the drive-wheel E on the 
other end of said axle, the side bar, F, and the 
diagonal brace-l'ods G, connecting said side 
bar with the front end of said bed-piece, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the bed-piece, 
drive-wheel, sleigh, and bob-runner, of the 
lever R, having stem P, crank-arms S on said 
stem, the crank-arm U on said sleigh, and the 
rods T, connecting the crank-arms SU, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
4. The combination, with the bed-piece A, 
of the brackets N, secured thereto, the stand 
ards M, vertically adjustable in said brackets, 
the seat Li, secured upon said standards, and 
the brace-rods O, substantially as described. 
FRANK F. FOSTER, 
. 
Witnesses: 
WM. T. WHITNEY, 
E. J. VAN LEU VEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359604.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 359,604. 
 
J. F. HANNA, 
WIRE FENCE 
Patented Mar, 22, 1887. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
w 
JOHN F. HANNA, OF NEAR MOMENCE, ILLINOIS. 
wiRE FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 359,604, dated March 22, 1887. 
Application filed June 8, 1886, Serial No. 204,557. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN F. HANNA, a biti 
Zen of the United States, residing near Mo 
mence, in the county of Kankakee and State 
of Illinois, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Wire Fences, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of wired 
fence having strands of wire constructed into 
Sections for erecting the fence, and the objects 
are to provide an improvement in construct 
ing lengthy wired sections, dispensing with end 
pieces, and substituting appropriate connec. 
tions for the wire ends of the sections attached 
to improved section-posts that assist in rap 
idly straining, erecting, and substantially sup 
porting the fence, possessing superior advan 
tages in point of economy and durability. 
This invention, which is an improvement 
on the portable wire fence for which Letters 
Patent No. 343,171 in the United States were 
issued to me on June 8, 1886, consists in parts 
and details, as will be fully set forth herein 
after. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in the figures. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a portion 
of two ends of One wired section attached to 
posts, representing the method of erecting the 
fence. 
Fig. 2 represents the form of a de 
tached knot as constructed for one end of the 
section-wires. Fig. 3 represents a detached 
oblong grip. ring screw-bolt device for the 
other end of the section. Fig. 4 represents a 
metal-braced section-post detached and staked 
down on a foundation to the ground. Fig. 5 
shows a section-spool having fastenings con 
necting the grip-ring bolts and nuts of the sec 
tion. 
My improvements have reference to lengthy 
wired section fences composed of barb, plain, 
or twisted wire strands of the same length and 
wood or metal slats that can be stapled to or 
twisted between the wire strands, leaving the 
ends of the sections open for attaching appro 
priate connections to each strand of wire by 
having knots formed on one end of the section 
wires, as represented detached in Fig. 2, by 
the method of looping the end of wire O around 
end L, pointing down and bending end L of 
the other wire over the loop and end O, then 
under and around the wire strands, pointing 
up and connecting the oblong open grip-ring 
bolt device, as shown detached in Fig. 3, for 
the other end of the section-wires by inserting 
the ends of the wire through the open ring, 
Securely closing the said ring on the wire and 
bending the wire ends around the bolt in op 
posite directions, and then, as represented in 
Fig. 5, attaching the oblong grip-ring bolts 
and nuts of the section end to a spool com 
posed of wood cross pieces and slats adapted 
for the purpose by having staple-eyes attached 
thereto, and keys for connecting said bolts, as 
shown, and rolling the entire section thus con 
nected thereon for erecting the fence. This 
method of handling the lengthy sections pre 
vents the wires from tangling, kinking, and 
locking, and therefore the spools having fast 
enings are indispensable appendages in erect 
ing such formed wired sections, and can be 
operated by any suitable device for rolling 
and unrolling, facilitating the building of the 
fence with speed by attaching the outer ends 
of the wires of the section on the spool, each 
having knot-connections to a post, as herein 
after described. 
The improved posts assistin erecting, strain. 
ing, and Substantially supporting the fence, 
and each consists of a wooden upright having 
the center of metal link-band H bolted to the 
base of said upright, and two short diagonal 
metal braces, D D, having eyes formed on 
their lower ends, riveted securely between the 
sides of said link-band, thereby forming a 
socket at each end of said band, as shown de 
tached in Fig. 4, for two metal-ringed wooden 
stakes, S, which, when driven in the ground, 
serve to clamp the metal link-band H and 
braced post firmly on its foundation of stone 
to the ground. 
The fence can be erected by the method 
shown in Fig. 1 by staking down to the ground 
post A on a foundation and staying Said post 
with a portable brace, C, having a stayed arm, 
F, bolted near the center of said brace, that 
is also staked to the ground. The end of each 
wire strand having connection - knots is 
clamped to post A separately by a tapering 
metal key inserted through the eyes of two 
staples driven the greater part of their length 
into said post, as plainly shown in Fig. 2, 
55 
83 
90 
ro 
25 
35 
SO 
 
359,604. 
55 
I am aware that improvements in wire fences 
for straining the strands of wire by screw 
bolts fitted on end posts and bolts that have 
perforated heads for the wire to enter and form 
a loop over the bolt-head by twisting around 45 
the wire strand have been represented here 
tofore. I do not wish to be understood as 
broadly claiming here the metal link-band H, 
which I have previously represented in the pat 
ent referred to, nor the device of the oblong 5o 
grip-ring screw-bolt, nor the staple and key 
connection for fence-wires; but I hereto have 
shown said devices applied as a useful auxil 
iary for fastening the connections of wired 
section-fence. Therefore, 
What I claim as new and useful, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with post A, provided 
with staples arranged in pairs, and Securing 
keys, the fence-section, the ends of the wires 6o 
of which are passed between the staples of 
post A and are united and secured thereto 
by the wire knots and said keys, as shown 
and described, the postl3, having perforations, 
and the grip-bolts secured to the section-wires, 65 
Intermediate posts of the same form can behaving threaded shanks passed through said 
post and held in position, substantially as de 
scribed, for the purpose set forth. 
2. In combination with post A, metal link 
H, attached to the base thereof, and braces D 
D, secured to said post at their tops and hav 
ing eyes formed on their lower ends for the 
reception of the rivets, securing them between 
the sides of the link-band, whereby a socket 
is formed at each end of said band, as and for 75 
the purpose set forth. 
thereby securing the knots that prevent the 
wire from twisting or moving, and thus avoid 
ing friction and wear, and also facilitating the 
detaching of the knots for moving the fence. 
5. Then the section is unrolled from the spool on 
the line of ground for the fence, and the sec 
tion grip-ring bolts at the other ends of the 
Section-wires are detached from the spool and 
inserted through another similar post, B, and 
Then the post B, 
secured by threaded nuts. 
in a vertical position, as shown in Fig. 1, is 
connected by two metal straining-hooks, PP, 
fitting the post, having a ring for attaching 
to any suitable stretching device, by which 
I5 the entire section can be strained at once to 
the desired tension, and the post B staked 
down on its foundation to the ground and 
braced by another portable brace in the same 
manner as post A until another section is con 
nected to post Bin like manner and strained 
from a similar post. Then the second port 
able brace can be removed for staying the last 
section-post. The wires of the section are 
regulated by the threaded nuts of the grip 
ring bolts to an even tension. 
set upon foundations and attached to the sec 
tiou-wires between the connecting-posts A and 
B any distance apart desired. 
3o The improvement of providing section-con 
nections in constructing the section substi 
tuted in lieu of section end pieces for the wire 
ends that are attached to improved posts for 
erecting and straining the entire section at 
once is of superior advantage in point of econ 
omy, reducing the bulk and weight of the sec 
tions, facilitating the erection of the fence with 
speed, and substantially supporting the fence, 
that is well adapted for a portable or a durable 
JOHN F. TIANNA. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. RICE, 
HENRY S. HANNA. 
- 
4o stationary wired section-fence. 
O 
25. 
35. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359704.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. BANKER 
FAUCET FOR OTL CANS, 
No. 359,704, 
Patented Mar, 22, 1887. 
Afroesoed: 
C. S. 
(a 
 
/* 422.6 
r. pters, Pata-litrographat, wastingtok. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. BANKER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FAU CET FOR O a CAN S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 359,704, dated March 22, 1887. 
Application filed February 2, 1887. 
Selial No. 226,216, (No model.) 
5 
25 
35 
To aii, who1), it inctly coincern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. BANKER, 
of Brooklyn, county of Kings, State of New 
York, and a citizen of the United States, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Faucets for Oil-Cans, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
My invention relates to a faucet-nozzle of 
cans adapted to hold oil or other fluids; and 
my invention consists in the hereinafter-de 
scribed improvements upon the faucet-screw 
for which Letters Patent were granted March 
25, 1884, No. 295,794, to Michael O'Connor. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a faucet con 
taining my improvements, and Fig. 2 is a ver 
tical central sectional view of the same. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
A is the metallic plate which serves to at 
tach the faucet, device to a metal can. 
B is the sheet-metal screw-socket, the inner 
or lower end of which is enlarged so as to form 
a chamber, b, from which extends the dis 
charge-spout l'. The plate, the chamber, and 
the screw-socket are preferably all formed of 
one and the same piece of sheet metal. 
C is the valve, the body of which is a sheet 
metal screw-stem, c. On the inner or lower 
end of the stem e is a disk or flage, c', which 
may be of the same piece of metal with said 
stem. Upon this disk or flange is placed and 
supported the packing-piece c'. The screw 
stem fits into the screw-socket B. Upon the 
upward or outer end of the stem c is a thumb 
piece, c', fixed thereto, by means of which the 
stem and its valve are operated to be screwed 
up and down in the socket, and the valve to be 
thus opened and closed. When the thumb 
piece is turned so as to open the valve, the 
chamber b is opened all round, and the oil or 
other contents of the can passes freely to the 
discharge-spout. 
My improvements on the screw-faucet above 
described, which is substantially that shown 
in the Letters Patent No. 295,794, hereinbefore 
mentioned, are as follows: 
E is a chamber formed on the plate A con 
tiguous to the chamber b, and communicating 
therewith through an opening, l', in the wall 
of the chamber b, as shown. This chamber E 
has an opening in its outer wall, as at e, lead 
ing externally of the device, as shown. By 
this means I provide an air vent or inlet to 
the faucet, thus improving the discharge of 55 
the oil through the chamber b and spout b, 
and at the same time preventing the oil from 
escaping through the air-vent when the can 
is being emptied to the exterior of the can, 
any oil which may pass through the vent l' 
being caught in the chamber E, and flowing 
back thence through said opening b into the 
chamber b, and thence to the body of the can. 
The venting of the faucet is thus accomplished 
at the same time that the soiling of the exterior 65 
of the faucet, and can by the escape of the oil 
at the vent is prevented. 
My further improvement consists in a flat 
collar, F, fixed upon the stem G and placed at 
such a distance above the disk or flange c 7c 
relatively to the thickness of the packing 
piece c that said packing-piece lies loosely 
between the said collar and flange, and has ver 
tical play on the stem between said collar and 
flange. I prefer to form an annular corruga- 75 
tion or rib, f, on the under or inner side of 
the plate A, arranged to engage against the 
upper face of the packing-piece c. By means 
of this arrangement of the packing-piece, when 
the valve is closed, said packing-piece will not 8c 
be rotated with the stem and the flange c, as 
it would if tightly clamped between and held 
by said flange and a cap on the stem imping 
ing on the packing; but said packing-piece 
when brought up against the plate A will re- 85 
main stationary while the stem and flange c' 
are further rotated to tighten the valve on its 
seat, whereby the wear of the packing-piece 
by friction against the valve-seat is avoided. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by. Letters Patent, is 
1. In a vented screw-faucet for fluid-holding 
vessels, the combination, with the attaching 
plate A, giving the valve-seat, the screw-socket 
B, the chamber b, directly at the inner end of g5 
said socket and having spout l', and the 
threaded valve-stem c, carrying valve C, ar 
ranged to play in Said socket, of the chamber 
E, contiguous to said chamberl, and communi 
cating therewith by opening l', and having an 
air-vent, e, as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
90 
It O. 
 
359,704 
2. In a screw-?aucet for fluid-holding vessels, and the packing-piece c, seated loosely be 
the combination, with the attaching-plate A, tween said flange and collar on said stem, as Io 
giving the valve-seat, the screw-socket B, and described, and for the purpose specified. 
the chamber b, directly at the inner end of said 
socket and having spout b', of the threaded 
valve-stem c, arranged to play in said socket, 
and having on its inner end the disk or flange 
c', and above such flange the fixed collar F, 
A. G. N. VERNIILYA, 
A. S. EITCH. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. BANKER. 
l 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359804.txt	(No Model.) 
G. C. McLAUGHILIN, 
MOSQUITO NET SUPPORTING FRAME FOR FOLDING BEDSTEADS. 
No. 359,804. 
Patented Mar, 22, 1887. 
 
N 
4. 
Y 
N 
s  
Azzeerazor. 
2. l.2%2%a. 
4, 4. 4221 
KzS 
& 2.4%-4 42-e- 
7/zzzzesses. 
954. ?. 
1. '3e ry, 
SVS-Stawisk 
N. PETERS. Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE C. McLAUGHILIN, OF SEDALIA, MISSOURI. 
MOSQUITO-NET-SUPPORTING FRAME FOR FOLDING BEDSTEADS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 359,804, dated March 22, i887. 
Application filed November 8, 1886. Serial No. 28,26?. (No model.) 
IO 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE CANNON MC 
LAUGHLIN, a citizen of the United States, re 
siding at Sedalia, in the county of Pettis and 
State of Missouri, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Mosquito-Net-Supporting 
Frames for Folding Beds; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to folding bedsteads 
provided with frames for supporting mosquito 
nets; and it consists, first, in a folding frame 
for supporting mosquito-netting, so constructed 
and adapted to be connected to the stationary 
and movable portions of an upright folding 
bedstead that when applied in position, and 
the movable portion of such upright bedstead 
is swung outward and downward a portion of 
said frame will be caused to rise above the top 
of the bedstead and the net-supporting portion 
of the frame to form an angle with the stand 
ard portions, thus giving greater elevation to the 
frame and bringing the netting which is applied 
on the Same horizontally or otherwise suitably 
over the bedding or sleepers thereon; secondly, 
in a ?olding frame for supporting mosquito 
netting upon a folding bedstead, so constructed 
and connected to the stationary and movable 
portions of such folding bedstead that upon 
Swinging the movable portion thereof upward 
and inward said frame will be caused to assume 
its normal folded condition within the bed 
stead, and thus become inclosed and put en 
tirely out of sight, and in certain combinations 
of parts, as will be hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a perspective view of my invention and an up 
right folding bedstead as adjusted for use. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section of the same as in Fig. 1, 
and Fig. 3 is a similar section showing the 
bedstead and mosquito-net-supporting frame 
as folded. 
A represents the stationary upright frame 
or case of a folding bedstead, and B the mova 
ble bed-supporting portion of the folding bed. 
stead, this latter portion being provided at its 
upper edge with the usual hinged sliding trans 
verse head-section board, C, and pivoted at a, 
as usual, to the side uprights of the frame or 
55 
case A, and balanced, or nearly so, by a weight, 
b, on its head end, or by means of suitably-ap 
plied springs, as usual. 
The bedstead thus far described may be re 
garded as of the ordinary construction, and to 
such construction of bedstead, or to any other 
known construction operating substantially on 
the same principle, my invention, which I will 
now describe, may be applied as follows: 
To the front of the hinged and sliding board 
Ceye-staples or lugs f, or other suitable means, 
are applied, one near each end, and to each 
lug a bifurcated or other suitably-constructed 65 
upright, or nearly so, standard portion, E, of 
the mosquito-net-supporting frame is pivoted, 
as shown, said standard portions passing 
through staples or guides g of the stationary 
case A. To the standards Eframed bars E 
are connected near their ends by short jour 
nals or pivots, as h, and the mosquito-net 
supporting framed bars E are caused to as 
sume, with the upright standards E, a certain 
altitude before unfolding, and it is caused to 
rise still higher, to gradually adjust itself to a 
horizontal position, while the bedstead is be 
ing gradually adjusted to the open condition 
show D in Figs. 1 and 2, this result being accoul 
plished by the combined agency of the con 
nected parts-to wit, the board C, acting di 
rectly upon said standards, and cords or chains 
i, attached by one of their ends to the sta 
tionary case A and by their other ends to the 
removable portion B, said chains or cords 85 
pulling down or resisting the tendency of the 
short lever end of the mosquito-net-support 
ing framed bars E, to rise after the upright 
standards have performed a part of their up 
ward movement and while they are complet 
ing the remainder of their movement. The 
chains being flexible, they offer no obstruc 
tion to the folding of the bed - supporting 
frame and the mosquito-net-supporting framed 
bars, they allowing the longer lever end of the 
framed bars to descend with the uprightstand 
ards, while holding the shorter lever end of 
the framed bars in a manner to steady the de 
scent of the standards E and framed bars E 
until the said framed bars Estand vertical, or Ioo 
nearly so, alongside the standards E, where 
upon the chains or cords yield and descend 
with the framed bars E and the uprightstand 
ards E into the stationary case A. 
90 
95 
25 
35 
45 
359,804. 
A when the part B is swung outward and 
downward, and be inclosed within said case 
when swung upward and inward, as herein 35 
described and illustrated. 
As indicating the state of the art prior to 
my invention, I refer to Patents No. 204,340 
and No. 326,316, and would state that I do not 
claim constructions such as are claimed or 4O 
shown in these patents. 
What I claim is 
1. The attachment for folding bedsteads, 
consisting of the mosquito-net-supporting 
frame pivoted near one of its ends to standards, 45 
and provided at one end with cords or chains, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination of the mosquito-net-Sup 
porting frame, the chains or cords connecting 
the frame and the stationary part of the bed 
stead, and the standards pivoted to the mos 
quito-net-supporting frameat one of their ends, 
and at their other ends pivoted to the movable 
part of the bedstead, the combination being 
such that the standards are raised and lowered 55 
by the said movable part of the bedstead to 
fold and unfold the mosquito-net-supporting 
frame, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
GEORGE C. McLAUGHILIN. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. FLETCHER, 
M. C. FLETCHER.. 
From the foregoing description, in connec 
tion with the drawings, it will be seen that 
the movable portion B of the bedstead, when 
swung upward and inward, as shown in Fig. 3, 
pulls the sliding board C downward, and along 
with it the uprightstandards, and that thereby 
the mosquito-net-supporting frame is folded 
and caused to descend into the case A and be 
come entirely inclosed, and during this opera 
tion the board C has perfect freedom to make 
its adjustments upon the cleats d or in grooves, 
accordingly as the bedstead may be constructed 
with cleats or grooves. 
It will be seen that the movable part B of 
the bedstead when swung outward and down 
Ward causes the hinged sliding board C to rise, 
thereby moving the upright standards Eup 
Ward, so that they extend out above the sta 
tionary case A, and simultaneously with the far 
ther rising of the said standards, the mosquito 
net-supporting frame, being held at the rear by 
the chains i, is caused by the combined action 
of the part B upon the standards E and of the 
chains i upon the framed bars E to assume a 
horizontal or nearly horizontal position over 
the bed-supporting portion B, turning on its 
short journals h from the vertical position 
shown in Fig. 3 to the position in Figs. 1 and 2. 
My invention of a folding mosquito-net-Sup 
porting frame may be modified in its arrange 
ment accordingly as the style of folding bed 
stead may require, and still rise out of the case 
IC) 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US359905.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. STEVENSON, 
m 
HEADING FOR WINDOW SHADES, 
No. 359,905, 
Patented Mar, 22, 1887. 
SEs iii. EEE 
 
Z/32/277 essels' 
6. 
'Ae-, 
t K 
w IN 
Z724/7/22, 
974% g-r 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JAMES H. STEVENSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
HEAD ING FOR WIND OWs SHADES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 359,905, dated March 22, 1887. 
Aplication filed IFelt liary 11, S87. 
Serial No. 22,293. (No model.) 
To all. Zvi on, it Tay concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES H. STEVENSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvementin Headings for Window-Shades; 
and I hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
My improvement relates to an article of 
manufacture to be secured to the lower edges 
of window-shades and afford a receptacle for 
the weight bar or stick with which such shades 
are commonly provided. 
It is the common practice to turn up and 
sew upon itself the material forming a win 
dow-shade to produce the receptacle to con 
tain the weight bar or stick. This manner of 
construction is attended with various objec 
tions, principal among which is the weaken 
ing effect upon the material produced at the 
line of the stitches, whereby, owing to the fre 
quent handling of the shade at the lower edge, 
particularly to lower it, it gives at the ends of 
the line of Stitches. 
It is my object to provide a heading of par. 
ticular construction for application to the 
lower edge of a window-shade, whereby par 
ticularly the objection above set forth shall be 
overcome and the material forming the shade 
strengthened or re-enforced toward its lower 
edge rather than weakened; and it is further 
my object to produce a new article of usefull 
ness in its purpose. 
To this end my invention consists in a new 
article of manufacture comprising a heading 
for window - shades, formed of two layers of 
fabric secured flatwise together toward their 
longitudinal edges to produce a longitudinal 
opening, affording a receptacle for the weight 
bar, and a flap above the opening at which to 
secure the heading to the edge of the shade. 
My invention further consists in certain de 
tails of construction and combinations of parts, 
all as hereinafter more fully set forth. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows a piece of my 
35 
40 
45 
 
improved heading in front elevation, and Fig. 
2 is a transverse section of the same, taken on 
the line 22 of Fig. 1. 
A is the fabric, formed in two layers, r and 
r', secured together toward their edges, as 
shown at a and ly, to produce the opening q, to 
receive a weight-bar of the kind usually pro 
vided on window-shades, and preferably two 
flaps, p, above the opening q, to embrace the 
lower edge of the shade to which it shall be 
applied, and secured by stitching through the 
flaps the interposed fabric of the shade. One 
flap may answer the purpose, though two are 
more desirable. The lower edge of the head 
ing is provided with fringe o and tassels n. 
I prefer to form my improved article entire 
in the weaving, as shown, since thereby it is 
more desirable than if formed of separate lay 
ers ' ', fringe, and tassels, all secured together 
by sewing. 
The heading of my improved construction 
is designed particularly for use on the shades 
of the windows of railway - cars, though of 
course it is not limited to such particular ap 
plication. 
What E claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a head 
ing for window-shades, comprising two layers 
of fabric secured flatwise together toward their 
longitudinal edges, and having a longitudinal 
opening, q, and a flap, p, above the opening, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a head 
ing for window-shades, comprising two layers 
of fabric, and ', woven flatwise together to 
ward their longitudinal edges, and having a 
longitudinal opening, q, flaps p above its open 
ing, and fringe 0 at the edge below the open 
ing, the layers, flaps, and fringe being integral, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
JAMES H. STEVENSON. 
In presence of 
C. McDONOUGH, 
J. W. DYRENFORTH, 
50 
65 
5 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360005.txt	(No Model.) 
A. C. FAIRBANKS. 
BANJO, 
No. 360,005, 
Patented Mar, 29, 1887. 
S 
SIAI 
D=G=E, IEDs T 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
co. Maxacoarsmaradws "I 
W 
 
 
 
 
5. 
 
2 
K d1 s sN. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT C. FAIRBANKS, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
BANJ O. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 360,005, dated March 29, 1887. 
Application filed April 6, 1883. Serial No. 90,859. No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ATIBERT C. FAIRBANKs, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Banjos, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
banjo with mechanical devices and mode of 
construction whereby the musical tone is in 
creased and the volume of sound is rendered 
melodious, and the resonance is more melliflu 
ous than those heretofore constructed; and it 
consists in the construction, combination, and 
arrangement of the several parts of the banjo, 
as hereinafter more fully described, and set 
forth in the claims. 
Figure 1 represents a sectional elevation of 
a portion of a banjo embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 represents a perspective view showing 
different portions of the same. Fig. 3 repre 
sents a sectional elevation showing other por 
tions. Fig. 4 represents an elevation showing 
other portions connected with the banjo hoop 
and rim. Fig. 5 represents a plan of a strain 
ing-hook detached. Fig. 6 represents a per 
spective view of a straining-bracket detached. 
A represents the hoop of a banjo, formed of 
bent Wood. The head edge, on the peripheral 
or Outer corner, has formed therein a rectan 
gular or other shaped groove, B, leaving the in 
Ward or interiorportion, C, projecting slightly 
beyond the said outward portion, A, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 3, and within this channel or 
groove so formed is fitted the tube D, the 
outer face of which is in the same plane as the 
periphery of the said hoop, and projects be 
yond the edge of the said interior or inward 
portion, C, and is provided in its projecting 
portion with a series of openings or holes, E, so 
as to permit a free ingress and egress of air 
within and from the interior of said tube D, so 
as to produce bell-like or ringing musical sound 
vibrations or waves from the vibrations of the 
parchment b, resting upon the said tube when 
stretched thereon by means of the grooved metal 
straining-hoop H, through the action of the 
straining-hooks F and I, connected together by 
the right and left hand screw-threaded strain 
ing-nuts J, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. Now, 
in order that the said straining-hook F may 
have a firmer bearing at its hook end K within 
the groove, and upon the contacting edge sur 
face of the said metal hoop H, said hook end 
K is flattened and expanded, and is increased 
in width of bearing-surface there with, so as to 55 
prevent its canting or slewing about upon the 
edge of the said hoop H, and thereby render it 
necessary to adjust the positions of said hook 
ends there with, in order that the said straining 
hooks may stand at right angles with and acroSS 6o 
Said hoop H and wood hoop-rim A, as shown. 
This construction renders the said hooks more 
ornamental without materially increasing the 
cost, as the wire of suitable size to form the 
screw-threaded portion is quickly 'struck up' 65 
with suitable dies to give it the oval face and 
desired finished appearance and bearing-sur 
face upon the edge of the said metal straining 
hoop H. The said grooved hoop H is pro 
vided on its interior bottom edge with a suit- 7c 
able groove, within which the straining-wirect 
is applied within the fold around the edge of the 
parchment head b, as heretofore. Now, in or 
der to secure and attach to the said wood hoop 
rim A the straining-brackets S in a cheap, 75 
simple, and expeditious manner, I provide the 
said wood hoop A with a peripheral groove, M, 
near its lower edge, and then spin or force 
thereon a metal hoop, N, which is turned in 
wardly over the lower edge of said hoop A, 8o 
and provided at intervals with holes or open 
ings P, adapted to receive therein the hook R, 
provided upon the rear face of the bracket S, 
the opposite side or outer face of which has 
formed thereon a projection, T, provided with 85 
a groove, c, and a hole, e, within which is fitted 
the hook end portion of the opposite straining 
hook, I, formed of suitable wire and provided 
with a screw-threaded portion adapted to the 
thread formed in the said straining-nut J. The go 
said hook R. of the said bracket S is received 
within the said peripheral groove M, formed 
in the said wood hoop-rim A. (Shown in the 
several figures of the drawings.) The banjo 
stock or handle U is connected with the said 95 
hoop-rim A in a very permanent manner by 
applying to the dowel or extension V, which 
passes through the said wood hoop or rim A, 
a metal bracket, W, which fits within a recess 
formed within the said extension V, as shown IOO 
in Figs. 1 and 2, its projecting end portion be 
ing provided with a screw-threaded hole, 
within which is fitted a set-screw, Y, the screw 
threaded end of which has a bearing against a 
25 
35 
O 
45 
g 
360,005 
O 
metal washer or plate, Z, which contacts with 
the inner face of the said wood hoop-rim A, so 
that When said screw-bolt or set-screw. Y is 
turned in the right direction the shoulder of 
the stock or handle U is brought to bear very 
firmly against the outer face of the said wood 
hoop-rim A, so as to render the connection 
Very rigid, and permit of being disconnected 
when desired, and tightened therewith, in case 
of shrinkage or from other causes, by simply 
turning Said set-screw in the right direction. 
I am aware that heretofore a metallic ring 
has been supported at several points in its 
periphery by means of pins or projections se 
cured to the inner rim or body of the banjo. 
Therefore I do not broadly claim a resonant 
l'ing. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1. The combination, with a banjo-rim con 
I claim is 
structed of Wood and having a peripheral 
groove, of the perforated metallic resonant 
ring, a membrane or head, and means to 
stretch the membrane over said ring, Substan 
tially as described. 
2. The bracket S, having the hook R and 
projection T, provided with the groove c and 
hole or cavity e, adapted to receive and retain 
the straining-hook I in position therewith, as 
Set forth. 
3. The combination, with the hoop or rim 
A and stock U, having the square extension 
V passing through said rim, of the bracket W, 
secured to the said extension and provided 
with a set-screw, Y, as described. 
25 
ALBERT C. FAIRBANKS. 
Witnesses: 
SYLVENUS WALKER, 
CHAS. S. GOODING. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360105.txt	(No Model.), 
C. F. MORRILL, 
WATCH CASE 
No. 360,105, 
Patented Mar, 29, 1887. 
   
  
 
 
 
 
& S 
f 
it assassessee 
assassi 
i" sittilities. It 
itz I it 
SUT His N & 
Qy ElizaAaaaaaaaaaaaaZe 
Yaaa. 
& 
: 
y 
 
aire 
a Y IN-7 
N S. SNNUS 
Wife?ses. 
26.6 
p 
Avezzar, 
CZarves AA/o/vw. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES F. MORRILL OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
WATCH. CAS E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 360,105, dated March 29, 1887. 
Application filed January 4, 1886. Serial No. 187,535. (No model.) 
15 
25. 
To all, whon, it 7alf concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLESF. MORRILL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of Massa 
5 chusetts, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Hunting-Watch Cases; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
Io which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form apart of this speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to watch-cases, and 
has for its object the construction of a hunt 
ing, stem-winding, dust-proof case, within 
which is to be inclosed a movement. 
Myinvention consists, chiefly, in the combi 
2O nation of a movement-box having its back 
closed, as well as its sides, with an exterior 
cover of similar construction, within which it 
is nested, and an interposed ring-shaped core 
On which the Outer cover is formed as a matrix. 
It also consists in the combination, with said 
parts, of a dust-ring within said movement 
bOX, and a bezel held between the case and the 
dust-ring, as hereinafter set forth. 
The drawings represent, in Figure 1, a ver. 
3o tical central section of a watch-case embody 
ing my improvements. Fig. 2 is a modifica 
tion in the attachment of the crystal; while Fig. 
3 represents a section of the pendant and pend 
ant-arbor, as herein constructed. 
In the drawings, A represents the base-metal 
core, cast of the desired form and then fin 
ished in a lathe. This, as will be seen, is 
rounded upon its lower exterior portion, to be 
adapted and to conform with the back portion 
4O or cover, B, of the watch-case proper, which 
is to be made of Some valuable material. This 
back is to be struck up from an integral plate, 
and hence will be seamless. After being struck 
up it is inclosed and compressed about the 
45 core A, which serves as a matrix. Thus where 
the two are completed and adapted to receive 
a movement-box they form an integral com 
ponent part of the watch-case. 
Upon the interior face of the core A, I have 
So cast or cut an annular slot, (t, for purposes 
35. 
hereinafter explained. 
 
Contrary to general practice, I propose to Se- 65 
At C, I have represented a movement-box 
formed integrally of some low-grade metal, 
plated or otherwise, and upon which is con 
structed an exteriorly-projecting lip, b, while 55 
a riser, c, is cut interiorly of said box. The 
lip b is adapted to support the movement-bOX 
upon the core, while the riser c, as is usual, 
engages with a dust-ring, D, inclosing the 
movement. Both said movement-box and 6o 
said dust-ring are inclosed at the sides and 
back, forming broad shallow saucer - like 
cells, the one nested within the other, the core 
A being between them. 
cure the crystal-holding bezel d to the dust 
ring, as shown in Fig. 2, or, if preferred, in 
the manner represented in Fig. 3, in which 
the bezel is not employed, but the crystal F is 
set into the dustring D. As is usual in hunt- 7O 
ing-cases, the spring-actuated front cover, G, 
is hinged to the core A, and is provided with 
the ordinary plate-spring, e, which is to be con 
tained within the annular slot (t, before men 
tioned. Located diametrically opposite there- 75 
to is the catch-springf, similarly fitting within 
the slot and adapted to hold the cover G closed. 
It will thus be seen that I have provided, in 
fact, two watch-cases, one within the other, the 
exterior one being mainly composed of some 8O 
high - grade or valuable metal, and consists 
Of the cast base-metal core A, SeameSS back 
B, and spring-actuated cover G, while the Sec 
ond or interior case is composed of the follow 
ing parts: The movement-box C and dustring 85 
D, to which is secured the crystal-holding bezel. 
By this means a dust-proof case or box is ob 
tained containing the movement, which is it 
self contained within the case proper, for the 
purpose of more fully protecting the move- 9o 
ment from dust and dampness, the exterior 
case serving to give the entire device a rich 
and tasty appearance, since it is composed of 
gold, silver, or analogous materials. 
taining my improvements, especially in pend 
ant-set movements, it is frequently necessary 
to remove the pendant-arbor, as it projects 
through into the interior of the case and pre 
Sents an obstacle to the introduction of the 
movement. Accordingly I have endeavored 
to form a pendant-arbor which shall be capa 
In fitting the movement within a case con- 95 
CO 
2 
360,105 
O 
ble of easy and ready removal, and have 
shown this arbor at 9 as capable of endwise 
movement within an exteriorly screw-threaded 
annulus, h, which tightly engages with a sleeve, 
H. This sleeve is inclosed within the hollow 
tubular bore of the pendant I, and is secured 
therein by a screw, j, which is adapted to en 
gage with a peripheral slot, k, cut in the sleeve 
H, before mentioned. I am aware, however, 
that a pendant-arbor capable of endwise move 
ment within a screw-threaded annulus Secured 
to the pendant has been employed; but to re 
move the arbor the annulus must be un 
screwed and disengaged from the pendant, 
while in my device the removal of the retain 
ing-screw i will not only very easily and suc 
cessfully accomplish the same result, but in a 
very much shorter space of time. 
I claim 
1. An outer cover and movement-box, each 
consisting of a shell closed at bottom and sides 
and nested together, as shown, in combination 
with an interposed annular metallic core, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. An outer cover, B, and movement-box C, 
closed at sides and bottom and nested to 
gether, as shown, in combination with an in 
terposed annular core, A, a dust-ring, D, ar 
ranged within said movement-box, and a bezel, 
d, held between said dust-ring and said core, 
Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
CHARLES F. MORRILL. 
Witnesses: 
H. E. LODGE, 
F. CURTIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360205.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. C. COGHILL & C, H, UNSELT. 
COMBINED FERTILIZER, DROPPER AND HILL FORMER FOR 
TOBACCO PLANTS, 
No. 360,205, 
Patented Mar, 29, 1887. 
WITNESSES 
(62.6% 
A6474% 
22 , E,se 
AITORNEYS, 
INVENTOR: 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. C. COGHILL & C. H. UNSELT, 
COMBINED FERTILIZER, DROPPER AND HILL FORMER FOR 
TOBACCO PLANTS, 
No. 360,205, 
s 
Patented Mar, 29, 1887. 
 
 
% % 
W. 
SIS 
WITNESSES: 
C6, CW. 
u/2/3.../2. A.A. 
a/O . 
7a, 
INVENTOR: 
-6. 24-24 
A6274. 
P. lunge 
1. 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C., 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. COGHILL AND CHARLES H. UNSELT, OF PADUCAH, KENTUCKY. 
COMBINED FERTLIZER-DROPPER AND HILL-FORMER FOR TOBACC0-PLANTS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 360,205, dated March 29, 1887. 
Application filed July 26, 1886. Serial No. 209,116, (No model.) 
O 
To all Zuhon, it naily concern, 
Beit known that we, JOHN COLMAN CoGHILL 
and CHARLES H. UNSELT, both of Paducah, 
in the county of McCracken and State of Ken 
tucky, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Combined Fertilizer-Droppers 
and Hill-Formerg for Tobacco-Plants, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the machine, 
parts being broken away. Fig. 2 is a front 
elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
of the same, part being broken away. Fig. 4 
is a sectional side elevation of a part of the 
same, showing the arrangement of the ferti 
lizer-dropping apertures, and Figs. 5 and 6 
illustrate a modified arrangement of the seed 
dropping devices. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
combined fertilizer-droppers and hill-formers 
for tobacco-plants, constructed in such a man 
ner that the fertilizer can be dropped at the 
proper places, covered with soil to form a hill, 
and the soil packed to form places for the 
plants, and which shall be simple in construc 
tion and convenient in use. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of various parts of the ma 
chine, as will be hereinafter fully described. 
A represents a beam, to the rear end of 
which is attached a vertical standard, B. To 
the opposite sides of the middle part of the 
beam A are secured the forward ends of the 
handles C, the rear parts of which are sup 
ported and held in the desired position by the 
round D, attached at its ends to the said handles 
C, and attached at its center to the upwardly 
projecting end of the standard B. 
To the beam A., at a little distance from the 
standard B, is secured the upper end of the 
upright bar E, upon the forward side of the 
lower end of which is formed, or to it is at 
tached, a point, F, to cause the said end to en 
ter the soil readily. Upon the rear side of the 
lower end of the upright bar E is formed, or 
to it is attached, the forward end of a horizon 
talbar, G, the rear end of which passes through 
the lower part of the plate H, and has a nut, I, 
screwed upon it, or is secured to the said plate 
by other suitable means. The plate His ver 
tical, and is secured to the forward side of the 
lower end of the standard B by a bolt or other 
Suitable means. To the rear side of the lower 
part of the upright bar E is secured, by a bolt 
or other suitable means, a vertical plate, J, of 
a less size than the plate H, as shown in Fig. 
2. To the lower end of the standard B is at 
tached a horizontal plate, K, as shown in full 
lines in Fig. 1 and in dotted lines in Fig. 2. 
To the beam A. and the standard B is secured 
a box or hopper, L, to receive the fertilizer. 
To the inner sides of the lower parts of the 
sides and ends of the hopper L are attached 
triangular cleats M, to guide the fertilizer into 
the center of the lower part of the said hop 
per, where it rests upon the dropping-plate N. 
The dropping-plate N rests upon the bottom 
of the hopper L beneath the cleats M, and is 
pivoted near one end to the said bottom, as 
indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 2. In the 
plate N, near its free end, is formed an aper 
ture, O, to receive the fertilizer and carry it 
to the discharge-aperture P, formed through 
the hopper-bottom beneath the forward cleat, 
M, so that no more of the fertilizer can escape 
through the aperture P than is carried to it 
by the aperture in the plate N. The free 
end of the plate N projects, and to it is at 
tached the end of a cord or chain, Q, which 
passes around a guide-pulley, R, pivoted to 
the lower forward corner of the hopper L. 
The other end of the cord Q is attached to the 
lower arm of the elbow-lever S, which is piv 
oted at its angle by a staple or other suitable 
means to the handle C, in such a position that 
its upper arm can be readily grasped and op 
erated by the hand that holds the said handles 
to move the free end of the plate N forward 
and drop the fertilizer. When the lever S is 
released, the dropping-plate N is drawn back, 
to again receive fertilizer, by a spiral or other. 
spring, T, One end of which is connected with 
the free end of the said slide, and its other end 
is attached to the lower rear corner of the hop 
per L, or other suitable support. 
In using the machine the land is marked 
with cross-marks, across which the machine is 
drawn at right angles. As the machine is 
drawn forward the plate J brushes aside the 
lumps and crowds and pushes the soil before 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
8) 
85 
IOO 
360, 2O5 
it, forming a small bank, while at the same 
time the plate H pushes soil beforeit, forming 
a larger bank. As each cross-mark is reached 
the lever S is operated to drop the fertilizer, 
which is scattered by falling upon the bar G, 
and at the same time the machine is raised, 
causing the plate J to pass over the soil pushed 
before it, and causing the plate H to carry for 
ward the upper part of the soil pushed before 
it, cover the fertilizer, and form a hill to re 
ceive the tobacco -plants. As the plate H 
passes the cross-mark the machine is lowered, 
bringing the plate K down upon the top of the 
hill, marking the hill, and packing the soil, so 
that it will not fall in and fill the hole formed 
by the peg before the plant has been placed in 
the said hole. 
In the modification shown in Figs. 5 and 6 
the aperture P in the bottom of the hopper L 
is formed beneath the rear cleat, M, and the 
guide-pulley R is pivoted to an arm, R., ex 
tending from the standard B, the cord Qin this 
case being attached to the upper arm of the el 
bow-lever S and the spring T being arranged 
at the opposite side of the plate N; otherwise 
the arrangement of the machine is the same. 
When the parts are arranged as in Figs. 1 
to 4, the fertilizer will be dropped in the check 
and the operation will be as hereinbefore de 
scribed; but when the arrangement is as shown 
in Figs. 5 and 6 the fertilizer will be dropped 
just as the machine is passing over the check, 
IO 
(5 
25 
30 
40 . 
and the plate Hwill rollit onto the next check. . 
Two holes, P, may be formed in the bottom of 
the hopper L, as shown in full and dotted lines 35 
in Fig. 6, and the machine be constructed for 
use either way. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the beam A. and 
the standard B, of the upright bar E, secured 
to the beam in front of the standard, and pro 
vided with the point F and rearwardly-pro 
jecting bar G, the plate H, secured to the 
standard B and to the bar G, and the plate J, 
secured to the upright bar E, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
2. The combination, with the beam A, the 
standard B, the hopper L, and a fertilizer- 5o 
dropping mechanism, of the upright bar E, 
having a point, F, at its lower end, the hori 
zontal bar G, conneeted with the lower end of 
the bar E, the plates HK, attached to the . 
standard B, and the plate J, attached to the 55 
bar E, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed, whereby the fertilizer can be covered, 
hills formed to receive the tobacco-plants, and 
the soil of the said hills packed, as set forth. 
JOHN C. COGHILL. 
CHARLES H. UNSELT. 
45 
Witnesses: 
M. V. CHERRY, 
J. T. POWELL. . 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360305.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J. KIRBY, 
SAW MILL SET WORKS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 360,305. 
Patented Mar, 29, 1887. 
772.aesses: 
Varves 7.7zrz, 
Z7zvezzo.7, 
ts 4ZZ/s. - 
 
(No Model.) 
J. J. KIRBY, 
SAW MIL SET WORKS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 360,305. 
Patented Mar, 29, 1887. 
Z267.4. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES J. KIRBY, OF MOLINE, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAMS, WHITE & 
CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
SAW M L SETWORKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 360,305, dated E?tarch 29, 1887. 
Application filed August 16, 1886, 
Serial No. 211,024. (No model.) 
its upper face and grooved to receive the slid- 5o 
ing knee C, as shown in both figures. In or 
der to move the knee upon the head-block, it 
is formed with a rack which meshes with a 
pinion mounted rigidly upon the set-shaft D, 
as is usual. 
Eindicates what may be termed the base' 
or lower section' of the head-block, which is 
bolted rigidly at each end to the timbers A of 
the carriage, and it is upon the upper face of 
this base or lower section that the body or up- 6o 
per section, B, of the head-block with its knee 
slides. The upper face of the base or lower 
section, E, is grooved, as clearly shown in Fig. 
2, to form a seat for the body or upper Section, 
B, and prevent side play or lateral movement 65 
thereof. 
Near the forward end the body B is pro 
vided with a depending guiding-bolt, F, which 
projects down through a slot in the base or 
lower section, E, and is furnished at its lower 7o 
end with a nut, G, as shown in Fig. 1. 
At or near the rear end the base or lower 
section, E, is provided with a screw-bolt, H, 
which passes vertically through a slot in the 
body or upper section, B, as shown in Fig. 1. 75 
By means of the bolts F and H the body or 
upper section is guided in its movements and 
held firmly to its seat upon or in the base or 
lower portion. It will also be observed that 
by means of the bolts F and FI adjustment 
may be made to compensate for wear. 
Journaled in the base or lower portion, E, 
near its rear end, is a shaft, I, which extends 
parallel with the shaft D, which latter is jour 
naled in and moves with the bodies or upper 
sections, B, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the shaft 
I being provided with a hand-lever, J, and 
with an eccentric, K. 
L indicates a link or block connecting the 
shafts D and I. This block freely encircles the 
set-shaft D, so as to allow the latter to turn, 
and the plate at its bottom end encircles the 
eccentric K, rigidly secured to shaft I, as 
shown in FigS. 1, 2, and 3. 
Now it will be seen that as the shaft I is ro 
tated in its bearings by means of the hand 
lever J the eccentric K is also rotated, and the 
latter, acting through the link or block I, 
90 
95 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMEs J. KIRBY, of the 
city of Moline, in the county of Rock Island 
and State of Illinois, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Saw-Mill 
Carriages, of which the following is a specifi. 
cation. 
This invention relates to saw-mill carriages, 
and has reference more particularly to the de 
Io vices for receding the head-blocks and their 
knees, in lieu of offsetting the carriage when 
gigging back. 
To this end the invention consists in mak 
ing each head-block of two parts, one of which 
I5 is rigidly bolted to the frame-work of the car 
riage, While the other part, which carries the 
knee, is movable toward and away from the 
SaW. 
The invention further consists in combining 
2O. With the head-block and knee, constructed as 
above set forth, a hand-lever for advancing or 
receding the movable sections of the head 
blocks. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a cross-section 
25 of a saw-mill carriage, showing my improve 
ments applied thereto; Fig. 2, a rear end view 
of the head-block and knee; Fig. 3, an en 
larged detail view, and Figs. 4 and 5 views 
illustrating certain modifications. 
3O In Saw-mills, and particularly band - saw 
mills, when gigging back past the saw after a 
cut has been made, the saw is liable to touch. 
the face of the log and mar the same. To ob 
viate this difficulty, it is customary either to 
35 offset the entire carriage or to deflect the saw, 
in case of band-saw mills. These plans are 
objectionable, the first because of the power 
required and the difficulty of maintaining good 
Working adjustments, and the second because 
4o of the effect upon the saw. I therefore move 
simply the head-blocks with their knees, as 
will now be explained. 
A. A indicate the longitudinal timbers or 
sills of a saw-mill carriage, and B indicates 
5 one of the head-blocks carried thereby, from 
two to five being commonly used on one car 
riage. The head-block resembles in its gen 
eral construction and appearance those now in 
common use, and is or may be made open on 
 
360,305 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
55 
moves the set-shaft horizontally a short dis 
tance. 
As the set-shaft is journaled in the body or 
upper section of head-block B, any lateral or 
horizontal movement of the set-shaft causes a 
Similar and equal movement of said body or 
upper section of the head-block upon the base 
or lower section, as indicated by the dotted 
lines in Fig. 1. In thus moving back the rela 
tive positions of the knee and the body of the 
head-block are not in the least affected. As 
the Set-shaft D extends from onehead-block to 
the other, of course when one of them is re 
ceded the others will be receded correspond 
ingly. 
The shaft I may extend parallel with the 
set-shaft throughout the entire length of the 
latter, and it may be provided with an eccen 
tric and a connecting link or plate at each 
head-block, and though this is not essential it 
is advisable. It will be seen that the shaft I 
may be provided with one or more handles at 
different parts of its length, so as to operate it 
from either end of the carriage. 
The present invention is not restricted to 
the particular devices for moving the main 
head-block upon the base or lower section, as 
it is apparent that other and equivalent means 
will suggest themselves to the skilled me 
chanic. 
In Figs. 4 and 5 are shown modifications of 
the device which will accomplish the same re 
sult as is attained by the construction shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. In Fig. 4, in lieu of the 
eccentric, an arm, secured rigidly to the shaft 
I, is employed, the arm being pivotally con 
nected to the main head-block or the set-shaft 
by a link. In Fig. 5 a single leveris employed, 
the lever being slotted and engaging with a 
stud or pin upon the main head-block. A 
screW might also be employed to move one 
part of the head-block upon the other; but any 
of the arrangements shown are preferred, as 
the action is much more rapid than that se 
cured by a screw. 
When the hand-lever is thrown forward, the 
centers of the set-shaft, the eccentric, and the 
journal of the hand-lever are all in a straight 
line, and the head-block thereby locked in po 
sition. 
It will be apparent that the hand-lever may 
be pivoted directly to the carriage instead of 
to the base or lower section of the head-block, 
and it will likewise be observed that the en 
tire head-block may be made to slide back and 
forth, in which case only suitable bearing. 
blocks would be needed where the head-blocks 
rest upon the carriage, the operating-shaft in 
such case being journaled in the carriage 
framing. 
In some cases it may be found desirable to 
move the main head-block B upon its base E 
by means of a steam or air actuated piston. 
I am aware that it has been proposed to 
construct a saw-mill carriage in two parts, 
the upper part provided with head-blocks and 
swiveled upon the lower part, so that either 
end of the upper part might be thrown to 
ward or away from the saw for taper Sawing, 
and this I do not claim. 
My object is to move the log bodily, and 
at both ends equally toward and from the 
saw-a result not attainable by nor contem 
plated in the construction above set forth. 
Having thus described my invention, What 
I claim is- . 
1. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a head block or support (one or more) upon 
which the log may rest adjustable in the di 
rection of its length transversely across the 
carriage wholly independent of any move 
ment of the latter. 
- 
2. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a head-block made in two parts, one part be 
ing rigidly affixed to the carriage and the 
other part longitudinally movable across the 
carriage upon the fixed part. 
3. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a two-part head-block mounted thereupon 
and a hand-lever adapted and arranged to 
move the body or upper portion of the head 
block toward and from the SaW. 
4. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a series of head-blocks, each consisting of a 
base or lower section rigidly affixed to the car 
riage and an upper section or body mounted 
and adapted to slide upon the base or lower 
section, a series of knees mounted upon the 
main head-blocks, a set-shaft for moving...all 
the knees and journaled in the sliding bodies, 
a hand-lever pivoted to a fixed part of the car 
riage, and a connection, substantially such as 
shown, between the hand-lever and the set 
shaft. 
5. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a head-block consisting of a fixed base or 
lower section and a sliding body or upper Sec 
tion mounted upon the fixed base, the tWO 
parts being respectively grooved and tongued, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a head-block consisting of a fixed base or 
lower section, a sliding upper section mounted 
on said base, and screw-bolts F and H, each 
secured to one section and projecting through 
a slot in the other. 
7. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a series of head-blocks, each consisting of a 
base or lower section rigidly secured thereto, 
a series of bodies or upper sections mounted 
upon the first and provided with knees, a set 
shaft for moving the knees journaled in the 
sliding bodies of the head-blocks, a hand-lever 
pivoted to the base or lower sections of the 
head-blocks and provided with an eccentric, 
and a link or plate encircling the eccentric 
and the set-shaft. 
8. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a head-block mounted thereupon and consist 
ing of two parts, one secured rigidly to the 
carriage and the other adapted to slide upon 
the stationary part, and a lever pivoted to the 
75 
90 
IOO 
IO 
I I5 
I25 
360,305 
3 
O 
carriage or to the stationary part of the head- lengthwise upon the fixed section without de- I5 
block and connected with the sliding part, 
Substantially as shown. 
9. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a head-block mounted thereupon and com 
prising two sections, one rigidly affixed to the 
carriage and the other adapted to slide upon 
the fixed section, a knee mounted upon the 
sliding section and provided with a rack-bar, 
a set-shaft journaled in the sliding section and 
adapted to actuate the knee, and a device, 
substantially such as shown and described, 
for moving the sliding portion of the head. 
block with its knee and setting mechanism 
stroying the relative adjustment of the knee 
and head-block. 
10. In combination with a saw-mill carriage, 
a series of two-part head-blocks consisting of 
fixed and sliding parts, knees mounted there: 2O 
on, and knee-actuating mechanism, substan 
tially as described, mounted in the sliding 
part of the head-blocks. 
JAMES J. KIRBY. 
Witnesses: 
SAML. S. DAVIS, 
J. B. OAKLEAF. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360405.txt	(No Model.) 
F. BAIN. 
LUBRICATOR, 
No. 360,405, 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
 
22 - 
Zzzvezzzzz 
%.5%. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FOREE BAIN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
LUBRI CATO R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 360,405, dated April 5, 1887. 
Application filed November 22, 1SS3. 
Serial No. 112,525. (No motel.) 
IO 
25 
35 
To att, wholl it may eoncern: 
Be it known that I, FORE BAIN, a citizen 
of the United States, and a resident of Chicago, 
Cook county, Illinois, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Lubricators, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to lubricators and to 
means for adjusting and regulating the same 
so that the flow or feed of the lubricating sub 
stance-such as oil-may be accurately con 
trolled in accordance to the amount of work 
done and the requirements of the machine; 
and it consists in a method of and means for 
controlling the supply of lubricating material 
by the agency of electro-magnetism. 
In fast-running machinery in which the 
journals are automatically lubricated-as, for 
instance, electric generators or motors--a 
great deal of attention is necessary in order to 
prevent the journals becoming hot. The 
supply of lubricating material must be kept 
up, and at the same time if too much is sup 
plied it is thrown off by the centrifugal ac 
tion of the journal, and the lubricantis wasted, 
besides being thrown upon the machine, floor, 
and other surrounding objects. 
The most practical lubricator of which I am 
aware is one in which the valve is manually 
operated to turn on or off the supply of lubri 
cant and to regulate its flow according to the 
necessities of the case. Besides requiring con 
stant attention, it often happens that the at 
tendant forgets to properly set the oiler or 
turn it off when the machine is stopped for 
any cause. In the first instance the journal 
quickly heats, and consequently Wears, re 
quiring more power to drive it, and in the 
second the journal bearing or box becomes 
flooded and overflows, or when the machine is 
started the lubricant is thrown off by the ro 
tation of the journal. My invention is intended 
to overcome these difficulties, to economize in 
the use of the lubricant, and at the same time 
to regulate the flow thereof so that a sufficient 
quantity is supplied to keep the journal prop 
erly lubricated in accordance with the amount 
of work brought to bear upon it. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
shows a manner of applying my invention to 
an electric generator or motor. Figs. 2, 3, 4, 
5, and 6 are ways of applying it to other ma 
chinery. 
 
55 
I will first describe one way of applying my 
invention to an electric generator similar to 
the one shown in my Patent No. 2S7,610, 
granted to me October 30, 1883. 
Upon the top or any other convenient po 
sition on the machine is placed a vessel, C, 
containing the lubricating material and being 
connected by a channel or passage, c, with the 
shaft or journal D of the machine, running in 
the journal bearing or box E. 
A suitable valve or cock, F, or other con 
trolling means, is placed in any convenient po 
sition so that it will control the passage c, and 65 
to this valve is fastened a rod or lever, B, of 
any material, preferably non-magnetic. Upon 
the rod B is adjustably secured, by a screw or 
otherwise, a ball or weight, G, of magnetic ma 
terial. The normal position of this rod B when 
the machine is not running is in a perpendicu 
lar position. As soon as the machine is started 
in operation the pole-piece A of the field-mag 
net becomes energized and attracts the ball or 
weight G upon the rod B, and causes it to as 
Sume more or less approximately a horizontal 
position, thereby opening the valve or cock F 
accordingly. 
It is understood that the field-magnet pol 
A is energized more or less according to the 
amount of work done by the machine, and it 
consequently attracts the ball G more or less, 
it acting as an armature to the magnet A, 
opening the valve F and allowing the lubri 
cant to be fed to the journal in proportion to 
the amount of work done, and consequently 
the journal and its bearing or box is lubri. 
cated to the proper amount, so that no oil or 
other lubricant is Wasted. 
When the machine stops for any cause, it is 
obvious the ballor weight will not be attracted, 
and will resume its normal position, (substan 
tially perpendicular,) and the valve being thus 
closed the lubricant cannot flow and flood the 
bearing. The ball being adjustable, the proper 
ratio of movement may be accurately obtained 
between the magnetic power of the field-mag 
net A and the amount of lubricant necessary 
to properly Supply the journal, and this ratio 
is maintained in accordance with the strength 
of the current generated in the machine. 
In Fig. 2 the pendulous arm or lever is 
shown as being supplied with a coil or helix, 
M, which is electrically connected with some 
95 
75 
TOO 
2 
360,405 
 
 
 
55 
allow a fresh annount of lubricant at each move 
ment. By this means it is obvious the amount 
of oil supplied to the bearings will depend upon 
the speed of the engine. 
Many other similar applications of the prin 
ciple of my invention will be apparent. 
Other devices than a cock or valve may be 
used to control the flow of the lubricant-as, 
for instance, electric capillary tubes--or, in 
short, any device or arrangement that is sub 
ject to electric or magnetic influence. 
fo 
What I claim is 
1. The method, substantially as herein set 
forth, of lubricating the bearings of an electric 
generator or motor, which consists in auto 
matically controlling the feed or flow of the lu 
bricant to the bearings by and in accordance 
with the varying electric current produced or 
work done by the generator or motor. 
2, The combination, substantially as herein 
set forth, with a lubricator having a suitable 
valve or cock, of an electro-magnet for operat 
ing said valve, and means whereby the opera 
tion of the magnet is controlled by the work 
done by the machine being lubricated. 
3. The combination, substantially as herein 
set forth, with an electric generator or motor, 
of a lubricator, the valve of which is provided 
with means whereby its position is controlled 
in accordance with work done by said genera 
tor or motor. . 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
set forth, with an electric machine, of a lubri 
cator, an arm or lever attached to the valve of 8o 
the lubricator, and an adjustable magnetic ball 
or weight attached to the arm, whereby the 
valve may be operated by the varying strength 
of the magnetic field. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
85 
75 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
- 
- 
FOREE BAIN. 
Witnesses: 
WM. HARRISON FRENCH, 
R. WATERMAN. 
IO 
25 
- 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Or motOr. 
part of the circuit of the machine and acts upon 
a mass of iron, H, which may be part of the 
generator or motor, or attached thereto. . 
In Fig. 3 a differentform of valve is show, 
and the arm or lever Bis operated upon by the 
coil or magnet M, placed in proper position 
and connected electrically with the generator 
In Fig. 4 a similar arrangement is shown, 
the operation of which will be readily under 
stood. . 
Fig. 6 shows an electro-magnetplaced upon 
top of the cup and adapted to lift the iron 
valve inside of the cup, more or less, accord 
ing to the strength of the current flowing 
through the helix of the magnet M. 
It is obvious that the lubricator, may be ap 
plied to machines or bearings other than elec 
trie generators or motors, and to other parts 
than the journals and bearings therefor, and 
the flow of the lubricant controlled by the elec 
tric current from a generator of any kind. 
Many modifications of the details of the ar. 
i rangement of the device will readily suggest 
themselves to those skilled in the art, and I 
wish it distinctly understood that I do not cons 
fine myself to any of the details shown, they 
serving only to illustrate the principle of my 
invention, which will be applied in a manner 
to suit the requirements of each particular case. 
The valve or other controlling device may 
be arranged to be opened and closed intermit 
tently, as by the opening and closing or shunt 
sing of the electric current, which operation 
may be governed by the movement of thema: 
, chine being lubricated, and this is especially 
useful in steam or gas engines. 
In such in 
stances the electricity may be supplied from 
One arrangement of this kind is 
any source. 
shown in Fig. 5, where the cross-head con 
nected to the pitman p moves upon the bear 
ings o o, the valve F of the oil-cup C being op 
erated by the making or breaking of the elec 
tric circuit at each reciprocation of the pitman, 
5 which is arranged to interrupt the circuit-wire 
l, thereby operating the valve for an instant to 
- 
35 ma 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360505.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 360,505, 
 
C, E, ANDERSON, 
FENCE MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
s 
& Q 
N 
S) R 
) 
 
 
 
 
 
. 
N 
 
 
f 
 
928) twices 
2. 
22 
7 A1 
622222 
267 
- 
is 
 
e, 42 assee 
Zeze $72. 
1262-6- 
(No Model.) 
C, E, ANDERSON. 
FENCE MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 360,505. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A.-e) 
V 
S 
s 
 
S Y 
22.252222 
N 
& 
R. 
2 
SS N 
as N. 
* 
R. 
NS 
S N 
 
 
 
 
 
- 
  
 
  
 
 
 
28i-bvesses R 
4-c. 3%, 
N. perERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES EDWARD ANDERSON, OF LA PORTE, INDIANA. 
FENCE MACHINE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 360,505, dated April 5, 1887. 
Application filed January 22, 1887. 
Serial No. 225,158. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs EDWARD AN 
DERSON, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at La Porte, in the county of La Porte and 
State of Indiana, have invented new and use. 
ful Improvements in Fence-Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
machines for making slat and wire or picket 
fences; and it consists of the peculiar combi 
nation of devices and novel construction and 
arrangement of the various parts for service, 
Substantially as hereinafter fully set forth, and 
specifically pointed out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
machine for making picket fences which shall 
possess Superior advantages over others of its 
class which have preceded it in points of sim 
plicity, Strength, and durability of construc 
tion, ease of adjustment, efficiency of opera 
tion, and cheapness of manufacture. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide an improved socket in which the rotary 
twister is free to rotate or turn without the 
aid of trunnions, shafts, or other like supports, 
So that when the driving - slide passes the 
twister it can be readily removed from its 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide an improved device for regulating and 
varying the width between the pickets; to 
provide an improved tension mechanism for 
holding the several strands of wires under 
equal tension, and for permitting them to be 
simultaneously slackened to the same extent 
whenever the tension thereon has become so 
great as to render the insertion of the pickets 
and twisting of the wires difficult, and, finally, 
to provide an improved reel for carrying the 
wires from which the several strands for the 
fence are taken. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of a Wire and picket fence ma 
chine embodying my invention, showing a por 
tion of the fence. Fig. 2 is a front elevation 
of the machine removed. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
sectional view of the machine on the line at a 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a detached perspective 
view of the twister and its socket. Fig. 5 is 
a detail view of one form of my tension de 
vice, and Fig. 6 is a horizontal cross-sectional 
Socket. 
- 
view thereof on the line of y of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 
is a detail view of another form of the tension 
device. Fig. S is a detail view of the wire-reel. 
Fig. 9 is a detail sectional view through a por 
tion of the bar L and one of the tension de 
vices thereof on the line & 3 of Fig. 1. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like 
letters of reference indicate corresponding 
parts in all the figures, A. designates the car 
rying-frame of a picket-fence-making machine 
of my invention, which comprises the vertical 
parallel uprights a a? and the parallel trans 
verse bars a, rigidly fastened or secured to 
the uprights at suitable points of the length 
thereof. The lower terminal ends of the up 
rights are covered and braced by a transverse 
runner-plate, a, and, furthermore, by a diag 
onal brace, a', whereby a firm, strong, and 
light frame is provided. This frame is con 
veniently moved and manipulated by a han 
dle, B, which is rigidly affixed to the rear side 
thereof, said handle comprising a vertical bar, 
b, and diverging legs l', which are rigidly af. 
fixed to the uprights of the carrying-frame. 
C designates the driving or actuating slide, 
which is arranged between and guided by the 
bars a, and it bears against the bar (t. 
This 
slide is operated vertically by means of a lever, 
C, which is pivoted at one end to the bara' of 
the carrying-frame, and the lever is connected 
with the slide through the medium of a link, 
c, which is pivoted to the bar at one end and 
to the lever at an intermediate point of its 
length to insure the easy operation of the slide 
with a minimum exertion of power. To the 
side or face of the slide which opposes the in 
ner face of the upright at are rigidly affixed 
two, three, or any higher number of metallic 
racks, D, which are spaced equidistant from 
one another. These racks are carried with 
the slide in its reciprocating movements, and 
they each actuate a rotary twister, E. These 
twisters comprise flat metallic disks, which 
have a series of gear-teeth formed entirely 
around their peripheries to engage the teeth of 
the racks, and the twisters each have two open 
slots, e, formed at diametrically-opposite points 
in their peripheries for the reception of the 
wires which partially form the fence. These 
twisters are devoid of shafts, trunnions, or other 
like axial supports; but they merely rotate 
55 
yo 
So 
85 
95 
IOO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
AO 
SO 
 
9. 
360,505 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
freely in Segmental Sockets F, which are affixed use the nut is tightened to such a degree that 
at proper intervals to the inner side of the up 
the shaft and its wheel cannot be rotated 
right at of the carrying-frame. These sockets 
readily, and they thereby check the rotation 
are cast or formed in a single piece of metal, 
of the windlass and hold the wires connected 
and they are formed with a groove or channel, 
thereto under the proper tension; but When 
fin which the flat twister-disk is placed. 
the wires become too taut, so as to be difficult 
The Socket is made in the form of an open 
to twist, the shaft and its wheel yields to the 
ring With the channel f formed on its inner 
strain, and thereby permits the windlass to turn 
Side, So that sufficient space is left between its 
and slacken the strain on the wires in the pro 
portion to the strain or pull exerted by the 
terminal ends to permit the twister to be re 
moved and replaced with ease, so that the 
Sae. 
Wires can be readily placed therein. When 
In the device shown in Fig. 7 I employ a 
the machine is in operation, however, the 
sliding rack-bar, K, the teeth of which engage 
tWister is prevented from lateral play by the 
with a ratchet, K, which is rigidly affixed to 
Walls of the channel in the socket and from 
one end of the windlass-shaft. This rack-bar 
edgewise movement by the socket and rack on 
is retained or held in place and guided at its 
lower end by a fixed guide, l', on the frame of 
Opposite sides thereof, so that when the rack is 
the tension device, while the upper end thereof 
moved With the slide the twister is turned or 
is normally depressed by a spring, K, SO that 
rotated to twist the wire, and it is only when 
the teeth thereof will be kept in engagement 
the rack has been elevated above the twister 
that the latter can be removed from its socket. 
with the ratchet-wheel; and the said bar is 
Although I have only illustrated two twisters 
elevated, when the wires are unduly strained, 
in the accompanying drawings, I would have it 
by the windlass, so as to relieve them and per 
undel'stood that I do not intend to confine my 
mit them to be operated With ease. 
self to that or any other specific number of such 
L? designates an auxiliary tension-bar inter 
mediate the tension.Iand the twisting-machine. 
devices. 
To the Outer side bars, a , of the carrying 
This tension-bar is connected with the frame Of 
frame are rigidly secured supporting frames or 
the tension device I by means of the swivels 
brackets H, the parallel armsh, of which project 
and the loop l', connected to the swivels and 
OutWardly from the frame for a suitable dis 
the frame i. The tension-bar is provided on its 
tance. Gage-blocks I are swiveled or jour 
opposite sides with two fixed plates or Wash 
naled in the outer extremities of these arms, so 
ers, M, and against these fixed Washers are 
that they can be turned or adjusted to vary the 
pressed the movable plates M'. These mova 
distance between the pickets of a fence, or to 
ble plates have central openings, through 
build fences in which the pickets are placed at 
which and the fixed plates and bar are passed 
Varying intervals. The pivots are placed out 
tension-bolts in, having nuts in', by means of 
of line With the center of the swinging gage 
which the pressure of the movable plates upon 
blocks, so that the distances between the pivots 
the wires can be varied. 
and opposite side edges of the blocks are un 
N designates the reel for the wire. This 
equal, thus providing two means for gaging 
reel is capable of horizontal rotation around a 
the pickets, and the width of the blocks pro 
central spindle, n, which is fixed to a trans 
vides another means for further gaging the 
verse piece, ', mounted upon runners, SO tha. 
pickets. 
it can be conveniently drawn across the field. 
L. designates the tension device, which com 
The four arms of the reel are each provided 
prises a suitable support or frame, i, between 
with fixed vertical pins o, around which are 
forwardly-extending parallel arms i, of which 
coiled the wires for the fence; and the coils of 
is arranged a windlass, I', over which are 
wire for the upper, lower, and intermediate 
strands are separated from one another by 
Coiled or Wound the several strands of wire 
from the fence. The frame of this tension de 
removable division - boards O, which are 
Vice is Suitably supported on or connected to 
placed crosswise upon one another and Over 
a fixed Stake, I, or other object, as seen in 
the pins 0. 
Fig. 1 of the drawings, and the shaft of the 
When the reel is being prepared for use, a 
Windlass is extended at one end beyond its 
large coil is first placed thereon around the 
bearing in the frame or support. On this ex 
pins, then a division-board, O, is placed above 
tended end of the shaft is rigidly affixed a 
it, another coil of wire is then placed above 
small gear-wheel, j, which meshes with a cor 
the first board, another board is then placed 
respOlding wheel, f', on an endwise-movable 
on the reel at right angles to the first board, 
shaft, J, Which is journaled in the frame i in 
and so on until the desired number of coils 
real of the Windlass. The opposite end of 
have been placed on the reel. By thus pro 
this endwise-movable shaft is exteriorly screw 
viding the reel with a number of separate coils 
threaded, on which is screwed a nut, j, which 
the Several Stands for the fence can be made 
bears against the frame i. By means of this 
without cutting the wire, and thus the strands 
nut the shaft can be moved back or forth to 
can be made in one continuous piece. The 
cause the gear-wheel thereon to bind with 
wires are first passed through a fixed guide, p, 
greater or less force against the frame, and 
on the transverse piece of the runners after 
thereby govern the revolutions of both the 
they pass from the reel. 
This being the construction of my invention, 
shaft and its wheel. When the tension is in 
75 
OO 
95 
OO 
IO 
I 5 
I 25 
65 
 
360,505 
3. 
the Operation thereof is as follows: The wires 
from the reel are first secured to a post, as 2, 
and the reel then drawn to a suitable distance, 
Where the wires are passed over the windlass 
5 of the tension device I, which is suitably an 
chored in place, the wires of the coils upon 
the reel remaining intact. The tension-bar is 
now connected with the tension device, and 
the Wires are then properly separated and 
IC passed between the fixed and movable clamp 
ing-disks, which thereby serve to hold the 
wires in place, in addition to holding them un 
der proper tension. The first picket is now 
inserted between the wires, and, the machine 
I5 having been previously adjusted in proper 
position SO that the wires are passed through 
the twisters thereof, the lever is now operated 
to rotate the twisters in one direction. The 
machine is now moved a limited distance, 
2O another picket inserted, and the lever oper 
ated to rotate the twisters in the reverse di 
rection, and so on until the desired number of 
pickets have been inserted to build the fence 
to the tension device, the gage-blocks being 
25 employed to regulate the distance between the 
pickets. 
I do not desire to confine myself to the exact 
details of construction and form and propor 
tion of parts herein shown and described as 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for making picket fences, 
35 the combination of a carrying-frame, the open 
sockets affixed to the frame, a slide working 
in the frame opposite the sockets and having 
the racks, and the twisters fitted in the sock 
ets and gearing with the racks on the slide, 
2. In a machine for making picket fences, 
the combination of a suitable frame, the me 
3o an embodiment of my invention. 
4o substantially as described. 
4. A socket for the twister of a machine for 6o 
tallic segmental sockets rigidly affixed to the 
inner sides of the frame and each having an 
internal groove or channel, the reciprocating 45 
slide working opposite the openings in the 
sockets and carrying the racks, a lever for Op 
erating the slide, and the twisters having the 
slots and fitted in the channels in the Sockets 
to gear with the racks on the slide, Substan- 5O 
tially as described. 
3. In a machine for building picket fences, 
the combination of an open frame, the fixed 
sockets arranged within the sides of the same, 
a slide working in the opposite side of the 55 
frame to the sockets, the twisters fitted in the 
sockets and geared to the slide, a lever piv 
oted to the frame, and a link intermediate of 
the lever and slide, substantially as described. 
making picket fences, comprising a segmental 
casting having an interior groove or channel 
and with a space between its terminal ends to 
permit of the insertion and removal of the 
twisters, substantially as described. 
5. In a machine for making. picket fences, 
the combination of the fixed bracket secured to 
the carrying-frame of the machine and a gage 
block journaled in the bracket, the trunnions 
or shaft being arranged to one side of the cen- 7o 
ter of the block, substantially as described. 
6. A tension device for machines for mak 
ing picket fences, comprising a suitable frame, 
a windlass journaled therein, an endwise 
moving shaft geared to the windlass-shaft, and 75 
means for controlling the rotation of the end 
wise-moving shaft, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
55 
CHARLES EDWARD ANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. F. GRAF, 
T. W. BUTTERWORTH, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360606.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. McDOWELL & T. MEDFORD, 
No. 360,606, 
TRUNK ATTACHMENT, 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
i 
 
  
 
 
 
a- 
: 
; 
Sa 
---------.S.------------------------ 
m 
a 7 
C. 
- 
Y 
1. 
/2 
g 2 
% 
% 
a./ A 
3. 
W. % % W % 2 % 
 
WITNESSES 
9%. 626-24. 
- 
Yey 
/3 
2- . 16 
INVENTOR: 
AE' 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. Pereas, Photo-Lithographer, washingtok. 
 
N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. McDOWELL AND THOMAS MEDFORD, OF HUNTINGTON, W. V.A. 
TRUNK ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters 
Application filed October 28, 1886. 
Patent No. 360,606, lated April 5, 1887. 
Serial No. 217,461. (No model. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES E. McDow ELL 
and THOMASMEDFORD, both of Huntington, in 
the county of Cabelland State of West Virginia, 
5 have invented a new and Improved Trunk At 
tachment, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
Our invention relates to the construction of 
an improved attachment for trunks, the at 
1C tachment being of the class illustrated, de 
Scribed, and claimed in our application No. 
214,564, filed in the United States Patent Office 
on the 25th day of September, 1886. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
I5 drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a cross-sectional view of a trunk 
provided with our improved attachment, the 
2O trunk being represented as it appears when 
open and the tray as in the position in which 
it is designed to be supported by our attach 
ment. Fig. 2 is an enlarged detailed view of 
the central portion of the attachment. Fig. 3 
25 is an edge view of the attachment, the two 
lengths of the attachment being shown in par 
tial central section; and Fig. 4 is a central lon 
gitudinal section of a portion of the attach 
Inent. 
In the drawings, 10 represents the body of a 
trunk, to which the lid II is connected in the 
ordinary well-known manner, which lid is rep 
resented in Fig. 1 in the position it assumes 
when the trunk is open. 
35 To each end of the trunk there is pivotally 
connected a link, 12, in the upper ends of 
which links there are formed two cuts, between 
which cuts the metal is bent inward to form a 
projection, 13. A link, 15, is pivotally con 
4o nected to the link 12 at a point below the pro 
jection 13, connection between the two links 
being established by a rivet, 16. This link 15 
is formed with an aperture, 17, upon either 
side of which the metal of which the link is 
45 formed is bent upward, as shown at 2. The 
opening 17 is so placed that when the links 
are moved so that they will be parallel the 
projection 13 will enter the opening 17, said 
projection striking against the under inclined 
So face of the bent-up portion 2 of the link 15 as 
the two links are moved to the positions in 
which they are shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 4. 
3O 
The upper end of the link is pivotally con 
nected to the end of the trunk-tray 20, connec 
tion being established at a point near the for. 55 
ward edge of the tray. 
If desired, the link 15 may be provided with 
a sleeve, 1S, which may be pushed downward 
over the upper end of the link 12 after the 
parts have been adjusted to the position in 6o 
which they are shown in Fig. 1-that is, after 
the tray has been raised so that its real edge 
will rest upon the upper face of the lid li 
when said lid is in the position in which it is 
shown in Fig. 1, and after the two links 1265 
and 15 have been moved to a position so that 
the projection 13 of the link 12 will enter the 
aperture 17 of the link 15. When the parts 
are so adjusted, the attachments will serve to 
support the forward edge of the tray 20; but 7o 
when it is desired to return the tray, so that it 
will rest upon the cleats 21, that are secured 
in the usual manner to the trunk-body 10, 
each attachment is simply pressed outward 
that is to say, toward the ends of the trunk-- 75 
after which the attachments may be shoved - 
inward toward the back in the direction of the 
arrows shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the attachment 
being folded downward to the position in which 
it is shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1, it being 8 
of course understood that if the sleeves 1S are 
employed in connection with this style of at 
tachment such sleeves would be moved up 
ward to the position in which the sleeve is 
shown in Fig. 1 prior to the buckling of the 85 
two links of each attachment. . 
We are aware that the upper member of a 
trunk-stay has been pivoted to the lower mem 
ber below the end thereof, the projecting end 
of the lower member having a recess, into go 
which a projection on the adjacent side of the 
upper member was adapted to Snap, and We 
do not claim the same as of our invention. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
we claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 95 
Patent 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, a 
trunk attachment for connecting the body and 
tray, comprising the link 12, having a projec 
tion, 13, near its upper end, and the link 15, IOO . 
pivoted at its lower end to the link 12 below 
projection 13, and on the same side, and having 
an aperture, 17, to receive the Said projection, 
and bent outwardly, as at 22, to form opposite 
r -- 
 
360,606 
inclines, extending from the opposite sides of 17 and bent-up portions 2, and a trunk-tray, 20, IO 
said aperture to the opposite edges of the link, to which the upper ends of the linkS5 are piv 
to allow the projection to ride up either incline otally connected, all substantially as described. 
JAS. E. McDOWELL 
t 
THOMAS MEDFORD. 
Sn K &N 
5 forth. 
d Snap into the aperture, substantially asset 
2. The combination, with a trunk-body, of 
links 12, pivotally connected thereto and formed 
With projections 13, links 15, connected to the 
links 12 by rivets 16, and formed with apertures 
Witnesses: 
ZENAS MARTIN, 
J. E. CAMMACK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360706.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 360,706, 
J. S. LIND QUIST. 
WINDMILL. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2. 
A2 
SS 
a. 
SSS 
a22ZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
SSSSSSSSIs 
... peers. het-tographe 
r, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN S. LINDQUIST, OF SWEDEBURG, NEBRASKA. 
WIND MILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 360,706, dated April 5, 887, 
Application filed November 27, 1886. Serial No. 220,033. (No model.) 
55 
To a/Z Zwhom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN S. LINDQUIST, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Swedeburg, in the county of Saunders and 
State of Nebraska, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Windmills; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication, and in which 
Figure J is a perspective view of the upper 
portion of my improved windmill. Fig. 2 is 
a vertical axial sectional view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a top plan view, and Fig. 4 is a per 
Spective detail view, of one of the arms and 
its Vane and operating mechanism. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
My invention has relation to windmills hav. 
ing horizontal shafts and having means for 
automatically bringing the vanes to stand at 
a more obtuse angle to the wind as the force 
of the wind decreases and at a more acute an 
gle to the direction of the wind as the force of 
the Wind increases; and it consists in the im 
proved construction and combination of a mill 
of that class in which the wind-wheel of the 
radiating vanes will serve as guide-vanes, the 
Vanes being secured to that end of the shaft 
which projects away from the point from 
which the Wind comes, as hereinafter more 
fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, the numeral 
1 indicates a cylindrical box secured in the top 
of the frame supporting the mill, and a sleeve, 
2, is journaled in the same, having a flanged 
collar, 3, at its upper end, projecting over the 
upper end of the box or bearing and having 
Suitable lugs or stops, 2, bearing against the 
lower end of the bearing, the flanged collar 
and the stops thus securing the sleeve within 
the bearing. 
The upper side of the flanged collar is pro 
vided with two diametrically-opposite hori 
Zontal bearings, 4, in which the shaft 5 of the 
lmill is journaled, and an outwardly and up 
Wardly projecting frame, 6, is secured above 
and outside of one of the bearings, having a 
sheave, 7, journaled in its outer end and a 
sheave, 8, journaled in its upper end. 
All 
arm, 9, projects from this frame and is pro 
vided with a counterpoise, 10, which counter 
balances the wind-wheel, which is secured at 
the other end of the shaft. 
The wheel consists of a number of Vanes, 13, 
pivotally secured upon the radiating arms ll 
by means of the perforated lugs or ears 14. 
The outer portion of these arms is preferably 
made round and braced at their ends by means 
of the rods or braces 15, and the inner portion 
is provided with an outwardly-facing shoul 
der, 12. 
The outer or rear ends of the Vanes have 
their outer corners curved or rounded toward 
the side to which the ears project, so that 
they will cause the arms and shaft to rotate 
when they are exposed to the action of the 
wind striking them from the direction of their 
inner edges. 
Bell-cranks 16 are pivoted at their bends 
upon the inner ends of the arms, bearing 
against the shoulders upon the same, and the 
ends of the arms of the bell-cranks, which pro 
ject parallel with the vanes, are pivotally con 
nected to the same, while the outwardly-pro 
jecting arms of the bell-cranks are provided 
with rods 17, pivoted to the arms with their 
outer ends and pivoted to a disk or flange, 1S, 
with their inner ends. This disk or flange 
projects at the outer end of a sleeve, 19, which 
slides upon and turns with the main shaft, and , 
the inner end of the sleeve is provided with 
another flange, 20. 
A frame, 21, fits around this sleeve between 
the flanges, and is provided at its ends with 
anti-friction rollers 22, journaled to bear with 
their edges against the inner sides of the two 
flanges, and two parallel horizontal rods, 23, 
have their ends secured to the ends of this 
frame and slide in longitudinal perforations 
24 in the ends of the boxes for the main shaft, 
parallel with the shaft and at both sides of 
the same, having a transverse yoke, 25, secured 
with its ends to the other ends of the sliding 
rods, the said yoke being placed within the 
sheave-bearing frame at that side of the verti 
cal sleeve. 
A chain or rope, 26, is secured to the mid 
dle of the yoke and passes over the sheaves in 
75 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
3D 
45 
SO 
 
2 
360,706 
The lower end of the chain or l'ope regulating 
the position of the vanes may be secured to 
the frame of the millin any well-known method, 
thus securing the vanes at a certain angle, 
and when the weight is released from the 45 
chain or rope the vanes will stand with their 
forward ends pointing toward the wind and 
with their faces parallel to the direction of the 
The wind bearing against Wind, when the mill will stand still, there be 
Any suitable mechanism may be connected 
to the drive-shaft or main shaft for the pur 
pose of conveying the motion of the same to 
the ground and for converting it, if required, 
the hollow flanged vertical sleeve offering suf 
ficient space for the admission of the necessary 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
In a windmill, the combination of a shaft 
journaled across the top of the Supporting 
frame, radial arms secured upon its outer end, 
the outer portions of which are round and the 
inner portions provided with outwardly-facing 
shoulders, vaneshaving perforated lugs or ears 
upon one side, bell-cranks upon said arms, 
one end of each of which is pivotally secured 
to one of each of said vanes, a flanged sleeve 
upon said shaft, rods pivotally secured to said 
bell-cranks and to Said sleeve, and means, sub 
stantially as described, for moving said sleeve. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
the frame, pending through the vertical sleeve 
and having a weight, 27, at its lower end. It 
will now be seen that when the mill is set up 
in operative position the wind will force the 
Wheel to stand at the side of the vertical box 
and frame opposite to the side from which the 
wind comes, and with the inner or forward 
ends of the vanes projecting toward the direc 
tion of the wind. 
the curved portions of the vanes will rotate ing no resistance against the vanes. 
them, and the weight attached to the chain will 
serve to draw the yoke toward the outer end of 
the frame, drawing the flanged sleeve inward 
upon the shaft and placing the vanes with 
their faces presented to the wind, while the 
tendency of the wind bearing against the 
longer outer portions of the vanes will be to 
tilt them with their forward ends pointing 
toward the Wind, so that by adjusting the 
weight at the end of the chain the vanes may 
automatically be set at different angles, ac 
cording to the strength of the wind, so that the 
Speed with which the wheel and shaft rotate 
may always be the same. The flanged vertical 
sleeve, turning within the vertical bearing, will 
allow the wind to revolve the entire shaft 
and mechanism, so as to bring the wheel to 
stand in a position opposite to the direction 
from which it comes, and it will be seen that the 
guide-vane usually found in this class of mills 
will thus be dispensed with, the wheel itself 
Serving as a guide-vane. The arm having the 
counterpoise will counterbalance the weight 
of the wheel, and will also counterbalance the 
strain of the wind upon the wheel, which will 
be a drawing strain with the direction of the 
wind, instead of the usual pushing strain with 
the direction of the wind found in windmills 
having a guide-vane and having the wheel 
facing the wind at the end of the drive-shaft. 
JOHN S. LIN DQUIST. 
PETER ANDERSON, 
LOUIS BIAKESTOD. 
gearing. 
' 
--- 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360806.txt	(No Model.) 
F. W. HOFELE, 
TELESCOPIC LADDER, 
Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 360,806. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
 
H t 
N 
Y 
S 
 
By 
zero 
ATTDhiveys 
N. Peters, phots-ithographer, Washington. E.C. 
. 
 
3 
(No Model.) 
F. W. HOFELE, 
TELESCOPIC AIDDER, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 360,806, 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
72 
Z 
Z- 
2. 
a 
Z 
C 
4. 
e 
s 
Z, 
Z? 
A. 
As 1 
Z37 
4. 
- 
--- 
4 
Z2 
7%, 
Ges Z7 
WITNESSES 
G 7 
%/64 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
az 
A. 
Ra 
e is 
 
IWWENTOR 
"3,461.-- 
ATTOREYS. 
(No Model.) 
F. W. HOFELE. 
TELESCOPIC LADDER, 
7 sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
 
 
 
4. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
z 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) - 
No. 360,806, 
 
F. W. HOFELE. 
TELESCOPIC LADDER, 
Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
WITNESSES; 
./27/ 
2416. 
- 
N. perers, Photo-thographer, Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR 
of 2.2/2, 64. 
BY 2%-46 
ATToRNErs. 
(No Model.) 
F. W. HOFELE, 
TELESCOPIC LADDER, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 360,806. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
N 
Y 
N/2. 
Liter 
witnesses: 
-Y-76%4 
475.) 2.7% 
2% "446. 
investon / 
ATTOREYS. 
F. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington. C. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 360,806. 
F. W. HOFELE. 
TELESCOPIO IADDER 
Sheets-Sheet 6, 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
7. 2 y/NVENTOP 
7. 2% 2. fans - 
MATTORNEYS. V 
s 
... perERs, photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 360,806. 
F. W. HOFELE, 
TELESCOPIC LADDER, 
sheets-sheet 7. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1887. 
WITNESSES: 3. 
te 
l? 
4.7.1%. 24. 
ATTORNEYS 
 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FERDIN AND W. HOFELE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO EBEN s. 
ALLEN, OF SAME PLACE. 
TELEscoP 
C LADDER. 
Patent No. 360,806, dated April 5, 1887. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed July 24, 1886. Serial No.208,911. (No model.) Patented in England September 13, 1886, No. 11, C21, and in 
France December 13, 1886, No. 177,856. 
5 
IO 
25 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FERDINAND W. HoFELE, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
haveinvented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Telescopic Ladders, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve. 
ments in the telescopic ladder for which Let. 
ters Patent of the United States have been 
granted to me heretofore, No. 232,968, dated 
October 5, 1880, said improvements relating 
to certain details of construction by which said 
ladder can be handled in a more reliable and 
effective manner when being extended or tele 
Scoped, so that the same can be used with 
greater advantage by fire departments, for port. 
able army observatories, for hoisting safes, and 
for other purposes; and the invention consists 
of Certain details of construction and combi 
nations of parts, which will be fully described 
hereinafter, and finally be pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a side elevation of my improved 
telescopic ladder, shown as supported in folded 
state on the truck. Fig. 2 is a side elevation 
of the ladder, showing it in raised position and 
ready to be extended. Fig. 3 is a side eleva 
tion of the same, drawn on a smaller scale, and 
shown entirely extended. Fig. 4 is a side eleva 
tion of the telescopic ladder, drawn on a larger 
Scale, and showing the mechanism for extend 
ing the same. Fig. 5 is a vertical transverse 
section on the line a ac, Fig. 1, drawn on a 
larger scale. Figs. 5" and 5' are details of the 
tiller-shaft and its locking device. Figs. 6 
and 7 are respectively a side view and an end 
view of the mechanism for raising and locking 
the main posts. Fig. 8 is a vertical section of 
the front part of the truck, showing the device 
for automatically unlocking the hose - reel. 
Figs. 9 and 10 are details of the telescopic lad 
der, showing the ice scrapers; and Figs. 11 and 
12 show my improved telescopic ladder ap 
plied, respectively, for use as an army observa 
tory and for hoisting safes and other heavy 
objects. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
In the drawings, A represents the truck 
frame, on which my improved telescopic lad 
der L is supported. The truck-frame A is 
made of any suitable construction, and Sup 
ported on the fifth-wheel of the front axle and 
on a bolster of the hind axle, the position of 55 
which is regulated by a tiller mechanism of 
the usual construction. 
The truck-frame A is re-enforced by a light 
iron truss-frame and provided near the ends 
with upright main posts BB, one at each side, 6o 
and intermediately between the same with 
shorter posts or standards, B, the latter being 
preferably made of wrought-iron. The stand 
ards B are provided at their upper ends with 
keepers b, for supporting the auxiliary posts 65 
C C in inclined position, said posts C C being 
hinged at their lower ends to the truck-frame 
A close to the upright main posts B B, and 
provided at their upper ends with pulleys d. 
The main posts B B are also provided with 7o 
pulleys at a. at their upper ends, which pulleys 
guide the ropesa, that are attached to the aux 
iliary posts C C, and provided at their oppo 
site ends with handles a, by which the ropes 
a can be readily taken hold of for hoisting or 
lowering the auxiliary posts C C. 
To the hinged posts C are pivoted locking 
hookse, which are guided in quadrantal keep 
erse', and adapted to be locked to pins e of the 
main post B, as shown in Figs. 2, 6, and 7. The 
raising of the auxiliary posts Cinto upright p0 
sition is accomplished by the ropes a without 
difficulty, as the intermediate standards, B, 
support the posts C in inclined position, from 
which they can be raised in a quicker and 
easier manner than when the hinged posts C. 
are lowered down to the beams of the truck 
frame, as in my former patent referred to. 
When the hinged posts C are locked to the 
upright posts B of the truck-frame A, the 
telescopic or extension ladder L, which issup. 
ported on the truck-frame and applied to the 
same by the pivot-shaft I, can be readily raised 
from a horizontal into a vertical position by 
ropes E, which are attached to the main posts 
of the extension-ladder and passed over the 
pulleys d at the upper end of the auxiliary 
posts C to the hoisting-drums F, which are 
located, respectively, at the front and rear 
trucks of the truck-frame A. 
95 
90 
75 
ICO 
 
2 
- 
360,806 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
75 
The raising of the extension-ladder L on its 
pivot-shaft is readily accomplished by wind 
ing the front rope E on the front drum F, 
and simultaneously unwinding the hind rope 
E from the hind drum F, until the extension 
ladder arrives in a nearly-vertical position, 
upon which the hind rope is slowly unwound 
and the front rope simultaneously wound up 
until the ladder arrives in upright position, as 
shown in Fig. 2. When the extension-ladder 
is in upright position it is secured to the ground 
by means of the foot-screws L., which, like the 
construction of the extension-ladder and the 
leveling mechanism for adjusting it into ver 
tical or inclined position, are fully described 
in my prior patent referred to. 
To prevent the truck-frame from changing 
its position during the operation of raising the 
extension - ladder L, when the truck is on 
slightly-inclined ground, or when the same is 
Pulled uphill, it is provided at both sides 
With SWiveled truck-braces A", which are sup 
ported in keepers alongside of the beams of 
the truck and dropped whenever required for 
use. They are provided with pointed ends, 
So as to 'bite' the ground. 
A rigid tool-platform, G, is suspended, by 
fixed hangers G', below the truck-frame A, at 
the middle of the same, and provided with 
side steps, G, said platform G and steps G." 
Serving to Support a number of tools and im 
plements, and also Some of the attendants re 
quired for handling the extension-ladder when 
arriving at the place of use. Back of the 
driver's seat is supported, on fixed hangers of 
the beams of the truck-frame and the fifth 
wheel of thefront truck, a platform, G, (shown 
in Fig. 8,) on which the foreman takes his 
Place, so as to ring the bell arranged below 
the driver's seat and direct from this position 
the different movements of the extension.lad 
der when raising or lowering the same. 
In connection with the hinged auxiliary 
posts C is arranged a device for automatically 
unlocking the hose-reel H when lifting said 
posts. This unlocking device is shown in Fig. 
S, and consists of a chain or rope, r, that is 
attached to the lower end of one of the auxil 
iary front posts C, and passed over a pulley, ', 
of one of thefront main posts B, and then down 
Ward to a check-pawl,", that is pivoted to a 
bracket-plate on the front main post B. The 
payl?"engages a ratchet-wheel, , on the shaft 
of the hose-reel H. When the hinged post C 
is lifted and firmly locked to the fixed main 
post B, the chain or rope r is stretched, so as 
to lift the pawl" out of engagement with the 
ratchet-wheel , and unlock thereby the hose 
reel automatically, so that when the ladder L 
is extended the hose unwinds from the reel H. 
Without requiring the separate unlocking of 
the Same. 
The extension-ladder L is provided with 
four hinged and extensible braces, L, that are 
placed in inclined position when the ladder 
is in raised position, as shown in Figs 2 and 3. 
When the extension-ladder has been 1aised, 
properly leveled, secured to the ground by the 
foot-screws L, and the extension-braces L. 
placed in position, a hoisting-drum, Li, at the 
base of the extension-ladder L is operated in 
the usual manner. The hoisting-drum Lop 
erates four endless hoisting-chains, L', which 
pass around sprocket-wheels of the drum and 
over suitable guide-pulleys, in n, near the same, 
and guide-pulleys na', at the upper ends of the 
first ladder-section, to the lower ends of the 
second ladder-section, and from the same over 
the guide pulleys in back to the drum. The 
upper ends of the first ladder-section are also 
connected by chains L, which pass over pull 
leys in of the third ladder-section, with the 
lower ends of the same, as shown in Fig. 4, so . 
that on hoisting the second section of the 
ladder, by turning the drum L', the third sec 
tion is simultaneously raised by the chains 
L. As the first and second ladder-Sections are 
connected by four endless chains with the 
hoisting-drum Li, which latter engages the 
chains L' by means of the sprocket-wheels 9o 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 4, they impart 
thereby a positive motion to the second ladder 
section, both in extending and telescoping, 
without relying at all on the weight of the sec 
ond telescoping section in lowering the same. 
This is an essential feature of the present ap 
plication, as thereby any danger in extending 
or telescoping the extension-ladder is avoided, 
even in case any one of the endless chains 
should break. The turning of the drum L is 
accomplished by means of a crank-shaft and 
suitable gearing, in connection with the usual 
pawl-and-ratchet devices, brakes, &c. (Not 
shown in the drawings.) 
By the positive motion imparted by the 
hoisting-gear described, any obstruction caused 
by the formation of ice on the side posts or 
rails of the upper sections of the ladder can 
be readily overcome. For this purpose the 
first and second section of the ladder L are 
provided with transverse scrapers ss, (shown 
in Figs. 9 and 10,) which scrapers remove any 
ice that may have been formed in cold weather 
on the rails of the second and third sections 
when lowering the same after use. 
To the main section of the ladder is attached 
a seat, T, for the tiller-man, which seat is ar. 
ranged back of the tiller-wheel I. To the sec. 
ond and third ladder-sections are attached 
firemen's platforms TT, which serve as stops 
when the ladder is telescoped, so as to protect 
the hoisting-gear from being injured by con 
tact with the lower ends of the telescoping 
ladder-sections. 
The tiller-wheel I is keyed to a tiller-key, 
K, which is made of two sections-a lower sec 
tion, K, which is supported in a bracket-bear 
ing, K, of the truck-frame A, and provided 
with a pinion, K, and an upper longer sec 
tion, K, which is pivoted to the lower section, 
K', and connected to the tiller-wheel T, as 
shown in Fig. 5. The upper section, K, of 
CO 
IOS 
IO 
115 
I 25 
360,806 
75 
the tiller-key K is passed through slots i in 
forms of the ladder-sections, so as to direct the 
the side posts of the third or upper ladder 
water in any desired direction for effectively 
section, and fitted by its square upper end 
reaching the source of fire, or getting to the 
into a Square recess in the hub of the tiller 
upper floors of high buildings by means of the 
Wheel, which is connected to the upper end of 
drop-bridges. When the telescopic ladder is 
the tiller-key K by a spring-key, i, and chain 
used as a portable observatory, a platform is 
or rope i, as shown in Figs. 5 and 5. The 
arranged at the upper end of the third ladder 
hub of the tiller-wheel I is connected by bolts 
section, as shown in Fig. 11, while when the 
to a flanged collar, i, which is fitted to a ring 
ladder is used for hoisting safes and other 
shaped rail, i', of the supporting-frame of 
heavy objects the extension - ladder is pro 
the tiller-wheel I. When the extension-ladder 
vided with a truss-beam at the upper end and 
It is to be raised, the spring-key i is detached 
with brace-beams in place of the drop-bridges, 
from the tiller-key, so that the latter is auto 
as shown in Fig. 12. 
matically disconnected from the tiller-wheel 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
by the raising of the ladder. When the ex 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
tension-ladder is lowered down to the truck 
1. The combination of a truck-frame having 
frame A, all that is required is to guide the 
fixed main posts with auxiliary posts hinged 
tiller-key through the slots i of the third or 
to the truck-frame and intermediate posts 
upper Section of the ladder, and through the 
provided with keepers at the upper ends for 
collar 
into the hub of the tiller-wheel I, 
supporting the hinged posts in inclined posi 
after which the spring-key is replaced, and 
tion, substantially as set forth. 
thereby the tiller-wheel locked in reliable 
2. The combination, with a truck-framehav 
manner to the tiller-key, without the use of 
ing fixed main posts near its ends and shorter 
any detachable parts that are liable to get lost 
intermediate posts having keepers at the up 
in Operating the ladder. The oscillating mo 
per ends, of hinged auxiliary posts supported 
tion of the tiller-key K, when detached from 
in inclined position on the intermediate posts 
the tiller-wheel, is confined in one direction 
and locking devices by which the hinged posts 
by a stop device formed by the eccentric lower 
are locked to the upright main posts, substan 
end of the upper section, K, (shown in Fig. 
tially as set forth. 
5",) so that the tiller-key cannot drop and in 
3. The combination, with the truck-frame 
jure any one of the attendants when the ladder 
having fixed main posts and hinged auxiliary 
is raised. 
posts, of a device for automatically unlocking 
The extension-ladder Lisprovided with the 
the hose-reel when raising the hinged front 
usual accessories-such as hinged bridges, 
posts, substantially as set forth. 
guy ropes, water-hose, hose - couplings, and 
4. The combination, with a truck-frame, of a 
nozzles-as is more fully described in the be. 
telescopicladder supported on the same, a tiller 
fore-mentioned Letters Patent No. 232,968, 
wheel supported on a guide-frame of the ladder, 
While the specific construction of the exten. 
a tiller-key made in two sections, a lower sec 
sion-ladder is fully described in the Patent 
tion and an upper section pivoted to the lower 
No. 244,059, dated July 12, 1881, to which ref. 
section, and a locking device for attaching or 
erence is made. 
detaching the tiller-key to or from the tiller 
Though the operation of my telescopic lad 
wheel, substantially as set forth. 
der has been described to some extent in con 
5. The combination, with a truck-frame, of 
nection with the different parts, I will briefly 
a telescopic ladder supported on the same, the 
recapitulate the main steps of the same. The 
uppermost ladder-section of which is provided 
first step consists in raising the inclined posts 
with slots above the tiller mechanism, a tiller 
C into upright position by the hand-ropes a a, 
key formed in two sections, of which the up 
and locking them to the fixed main posts B. 
per section passes through the slots in the lad 
Simultaneously therewith the hose-reel is un 
der-section, a tiller-wheel, a guide-frame for 
locked. The extension-ladder Listhen raised 
said tiller-wheel, and a spring-key for holding 
into upright position by the ropes E and wind 
the tiller-key to the hub of the tiller-wheel, 
ing-drums of the front and rear trucks. Be 
substantially as set forth. 
fore raising the ladder the tiller-man has to 
6. The combination of a truck-frame, an ex 
release the tiller wheel by withdrawing the 
tension - ladder pivoted thereto, a hoisting 
spring-key from the tiller-key. The ladder is 
gear composed of a drum having Sprocket 
next adjusted into vertical or inclined posi 
wheels, endless chains that are passed around 
tion, as required, and secured to the ground 
said sprocket-wheels and connected with the 
by the foot-screws at the base of the same. 
first and second sections of the ladder, guide 
The ladder is then extended by means of the 
pulleys for said endless chains, chains connect 
endless chains and hoisting - gear, and sup 
ing the first and third ladder-sections, and 
ported in position by the inclined extension 
pulleys for guiding said chains, substantially 
braces of the same and suitable guy-ropes. 
as set forth. 
The hose are lifted simultaneously with the 
7. The combination, with a truck-frame, of an 
extending of the ladder, so as to be ready for 
extension-ladder pivoted to said truck-frame, 
use. The firemen then mount the extension 
a hoisting-gear for extending the ladder-sec 
ladder and take up their positions on the plat- tions, and chains connecting the first, second, 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
IIS 
I25 
I 30 
Cy 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
 
A. 
360,806 
and third sections of the ladder, the second and . 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
third ladder-sections being provided with fire-invention I have signed my name in presence 
men's platforms that act as stops for the lad- of two subscribing witnesses. 
der-sections when telescoping the same, sub- 
; 
- 
- 
- 
- 
FERDIN AND W. HOFELE. 
5 stantially as set forth. 
8. An extension-ladder the lower sections 
of which are provided with transverse scrap- 
ers at the upper euds for removing the ice 
when telescoping the ladder-sections, substan- 
Io tially as set forth. 
Witnesses: , , , 
, 
PAUL GoFPEL, 
MARTIN PETRY. 
, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US360906.txt	(Model.) 
F. PEARCE & J. JONES. 
I,00K FOR ALARM BOXES. 
No. 360,906. 
Patented Apr. 12, 1887. 
22 S 
NS N SS N 
N 
 
 
 
N 
ify 
S SNS S S 
O 
 
  
  
 
 
ATTORNEY.S. 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK PEARCE, OF NEW YORK, AND JAMEs JONES, OF BROOKLYN, N. Y. 
OCK FOR ALARM BOXES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Aletters Patent No. 360,906, dated April 12, 1887. 
Application filed December 14, 1886. Serial No. 221,518. (Model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, FREDERICK PEARCE 
and JAMES JoNES, residents, respectively, of 
New York city, New York county, New York, 
and Brooklyn, Kings county, New York, have 
jointly invented an Improvement in Locks for 
Alarm-Boxes, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
made to the accompanying drawings. 
Our invention relates to trap-locks for alarm 
boxes; and it has for its object to simplify the 
construction of these locks and make the trap 
ping 9f the key more secure, as will be more 
fully hereinafter set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view of the face of the lock, which is secured 
to the door, a portion of the face-plate being 
broken away to show the interior mechanism. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view showing the position 
of the parts when the key is trapped. Fig. 3 
is a view, partly in section, of the hinged rear 
plate of the lock, showing the mechanism for 
opening said plate. Fig. 4 is a similar view 
showing another position of the same parts. 
Fig. 5 is a vertical section on the line k.k, Fig. 
2. Fig. 6 is a vertical section on the line ec, 
Fig. 2. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the 
tumbler which traps the key. Fig. 8 is a view 
of the key which operates the catch device on 
- 
the rear plate. 
A is the lock-case, which is provided with 
a face-plate, B, secured to it by screws on one 
face, and a back-plate, D, which plate may be 
cast with the case A. Sliding between guides 
b dis an ordinary bolt, E. Pivoted on the 
stude, attached to case A, are a number of 
tumblers, F, G, and H, each forced downward 
by a spring, f, bearing against a lug, g, on the 
upper side of the case A. Each tumbler has 
a notch, h, which, when the tumbler is raised 
to a proper height by the corresponding sur 
face in the notched heel i of the key I, allows 
the lug i on the bolt E to enter the several 
notches li. The outer tumbler, H., has a heel, 
l, which, when the tumbler is raised by the 
key from the position shown in Fig. 1 to that 
shown in Fig. 2, cants upward and passes over 
the lower part of the key-hole J, preventing 
the heel i of the key Ifrom being drawn out. 
Thus the key is trapped in the case. In order 
to hold this tumbler Hin the elevated position 
to which it has been raised by the key, it is 
provided with a projection, n, (see Fig. 7,) 
which projection during the upward move 
ment of the tumbler engages the beveled sur 
face of a dog, L, carried on a spring, M. This 
spring is secured at n to the back of the plate 
D. The beveled dog L projects from said 
spring M through a hole in the plate D, as in 
Fig. 6. The ascending projection m on the 
tumbler H forces said spring M and dog L. 
backward until the projection is above the 
dog, as in Figs. 2 and 6, when the dog, meeting. 
With no further resistance, is again forced in 
ward by the spring M, getting under the pro 
jection m, and thus prevents the tumbler H 
from returning to its original position and 
from releasing the key. 
When the key is to be released, the spring 
M is drawn back, and the dog L, releasing the 
projection n, the tumbler His returned by the 
spring f to its normal position, whereby the 
lkey-hole J is uncovered, so that the key may 
be withdrawn. The spring Mmay be attached 
to a cover, N, hereinafter described, in which 
case the tumbler H will be released by the 
opening of the cover. 
To prevent access to the spring M, except 
by the persons having proper authority to re 
lease the key I when trapped, the rear of the 
lock-case A is covered by a plate or cover, N, 
hinged to the case Aata. This plate or cover 
also serves to inclose and prevent access to the 
heads of the screws which pass through the 
openings a? in the case A and secure the lock 
to the door. 
On the inner face of the plate or cover N is 
a rib, O, having a groove, o, in its inner edge. 
A block, P, having a groove in its edge is also 
secured to the plate N by screws or otherwise, 
and in the way, formed by this block P and 
the rib O, slides a block, Q, forced upward by 
a spring, R, that is attached to a stud, ', on 
the hinged rear plate, N. The block Q has a 
longitudinal slot, q, for the key S, Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5, and a forwardly-projecting catch, s, se 
cured to its outer face, which catch passes 
through an opening, t, in the rear face, D, of 
the case A, and engages the upper edge of 
said opening when the plate or cover N is 
closed, as in Fig. 5. 
In the edge of the block Q, next to the block 
P, are several holes, in which are cylinders or 
slides U, V, and W of varying lengths, and 
- 
5 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOX) 
 
2 
360,906 
5 
O 
I 5 
2 
35 
registering with these holes are similar holes 
in the block P, in which are the cylinders or 
slides X, Y, and Z of varying lengths, the lat 
ter cylinders or slides being forced outward 
by coiled springs a y 2, located in the block 
P behind the cylinders or slides XYZ. The 
lengths of the cylinders U W WXYZ are 
such that when the indented key S is inserted 
in the slot q the cylinders UWW will be forced 
toward the edge of the block Q until their ends 
are in line with the surface of the said edge, as 
shown in Fig. 3, so that the block Q may be 
forced downward to release the catch is from 
its engagement with the case A. Now the plate 
or cover N can be opened. 
As Soon as the key S is withdrawn from the 
block Q, the springs a y 2 force the cylinders 
NYZ outward, and with them the cylinders 
UVW, until the cylinders XYZ enter partly 
into the block Q, as in Fig. 4, preventing any 
movement of the block Q up or down. It is 
therefore apparent that to either open or close 
the hinged plate or cover N, the key S must 
he inserted. The cylinders U W W and XY 
Z are not necessarily cylindrical, but may be 
of any cross-section. 
As the key S is always in the possession of 
a controlling officer and keys I in the hands 
of other persons, it is insured that the key I 
call not be released when onceit has raised and 
caused to be caught the tumbler Huntil the 
person having the key S opens the hinged rear 
plate, N. 
The mechanism herein described has sundry 
advantages over that shown in our Patent No. 
280,506, most important of which is the omis 
sion of the lower case, B, which is shown in 
Said former patent, for holding the trapping. 
tumbler. 
Having now described our invention, what 
1. In a trap-lock, the trapping-tumbler H, 
lhung on the same stude which holds the other 
tumbler or tumblers, and provided with a heel, 
l, which, when the tumbler His raised, covers 
a portion of the key-hole, and means, substan 
tially as described, for holding the tumbler in 
we claim is 
SO 
the raised position, in combination with bolt 
E, adapted to be moved forward and back 
ward by the key while the key is trapped, Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a trap-lock, the trapping-tumbler H, 
having a heel, l, which, when the tumbler is 
raised by the key, covers a portion of the key 
hole, combined with the spring-dog L, for hold: 
ing said tumbler in a raised position, Said 
spring-dog projecting through a hole in the 
back-plate D of the lock, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In a trap-lock, the combination of a lock 
case and a tumbler within said lock-case for 
trapping the key, with the hinged cover N, 
secured to the lock-case, with a separate lock 
for locking said hinged cover N, and with the 
dog L, inclosed by said cover, said dog being 
adapted to operate in conjunction with the 
key-trapping tumbler, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. In a trap-lock, the combination of the 
case A, a tumbler, H, pivoted within said case, 
said tumbler having a projection, m, and heell, 
and a dog, L, carried by a spring and extend 
ing through a hole in the back of the lock 
case, with the hinged cover N, for preventing 
access to said spring and dog, said hinged 
cover having means for locking it to the case 
A, substantially as described. 
5. The door N, sliding block (), having lock 
ing-catch s thereon, and the spring R, in con 
bination with the transverse locking-cylinders 
U X and fixed abutment P, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
6. The combination of the lock A and its 
bolt E with the key I, key-trapping tumbler 
FI, tumbler-holding dog L, hinged door N, for 
concealing said dog L, and secondary lock Q 
U X, for locking said door N to the case A, 
and key S, for unlocking the same, as speci 
fied. 
FREDERICK PEARCE. 
JAMIES JONES. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs G. MI. THOMAs, 
HARRY M. TURK. 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361006.txt	(No Model.) 
F, GIRTANNER, 
STRAW BURNING ATTACHMENT FOR STOWES, 
No. 361,006, 
Patented Apr. 12, 1887. 
  
 
w Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED GIRTANNER, OF BIG STONE CITY, DAKOTA TERRITORY, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO CASPER HATZ AND FLORIAN J. HATZ, BOTH OF SAME 
PLACE. 
STRAW - BURNING ATTACHMENT FOR STOVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 361,006, dated April 12, 1887. 
Application filed July 10, 1886. Serial No. 207,701. (No model.) 
sing the said opening and located at a slight 5o 
I5 
2O ing-strap. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRED GIRTANNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Big 
Stone City, in the county of Grant, Dakota 
5 Territory, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Straw-Burning Attachments for 
Stoves, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Io straw-burning attachments for stoves; and it 
consists in the peculiar construction and com 
bination of devices that will be more fully set 
forth hereinafter, and particularly pointed out 
in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my invention attached to a cooking 
stove. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal sec 
tional view of the same. Fig. 3 is a detailed 
perspective view of the valve and its adjust 
A represents a fire box or receiver, which is 
rectangular in shape, and has its outer or front 
wall, B, inclined, thereby making the fire 
box or receiver wider at its upper side than at 
25 its lower side. In the front inclined wall, B, 
is located a hinged door, C, which is provided 
with a damper, D, to admit air to the fire-box. 
The rear wall, E, of the fire-box is formed with 
a rearwardly - projecting neck or flange, F, 
3o which fits in the opening made in the front 
side of the stove Z, to receiveit. The said neck 
or flange corresponds in size to the opening in 
the said stove, so as to form a tight joint 
therewith. By arranging the said neck at the 
35 lower side of the fire-box it will be observed 
that when the neck is inserted in the opening 
in the stove the fire-box is prevented by the 
neck from toppling outwardly from the stove 
and overturning by any sudden jar or from 
4o other causes, the neck thus serving as a means 
for securely connecting the fire-box to the 
stove. 
The receiver or fire-box may either rest upon 
the hearth of the stove, as shown in Fig. 2; or, 
5 where the stove is not provided with the 
hearth, the receiver is constructed with sup 
porting-legs G. 
In the top of the fire box or receiver is made 
an opening, H, and from the said top, surround 
distance therefrom, is a vertically-extending 
flange, I, which is cut away on its front side at 
the center to form a notch, K. By thus pro 
viding the flange I for the opening H and 
forming the said flange at a slight distance 
from the sides of the opening the latter is pro 
vided with a shoulder, L, on which the lower 
open end of the drum M is supported. The 
said drum may be of any suitable size and 
shape, and is a closed at its upper end, and 6o 
provided with a handle, N. Near the lower 
end of the drum is a hinged valve, O, which 
extends nearly entirely across the drum, so as 
to form a bottom therefor, and to the free edge 
of the said valve is hinged a curved down 
wardly and forwardly extending metallic 
strap, P, which is provided on one edge with 
a series of notches, R. The outer end of the 
said strap passes through a slot, S, which is 
made in the front side of the drum, at the bot 
tom edge thereof, the said lower and outer end 
of the strap also passing through the notch K 
in the flange. By engaging one of the notches 
R in the edge of the strap with that part of 
flange I which forms one end of the slot S75 
it will be seen that the hinged valve O may be 
turned to any desired inclination in the lower 
side of the drum and secured therein in any 
desired position, thus permitting the straw, 
which is placed in the upper portion of the So 
drum, to be fed to the fire-box in any desired 
quantity. As the said valve O extends nearly 
across the drum, and is provided with a strap, 
by means of which it may be tilted or inclined 
to any desired position, it will be seen that I 
am enabled to entirely dispense with the use 
of a poker for stirring the straw in the drum, 
in order to feed it to the fire, as it is only nec 
essary to lower and raise the free side of the 
hinged valve successively a few times in order 
to dislodge the straw and cause it to descend 
into the fire-box. The valve is also effective 
in causing the straw to be fed evenly to all parts 
of the fire-box, thus preventing the straw from 
being consumed only on one side or end of the 
fire-box and leaving the other untouched. 
The fire-box is made wider at its upper side 
than at the bottom, and is provided with the 
go 
95 
 
2 
. 
36,006 
25 
35 
inclined front side, B, so as to leave no space posed to provide a fire-box attachment for a 
for ashes or partially-burned straw to settle stove and a drum for the said fire-box, in or 
and accumulate in the fire-box, and the in- der to feed straw thereto as fuel, and this 
clined front B is also useful in directing the broadly I disclaim. 
draft in a slanting direction under the flame 
I am also aware that it has heretofore been 
and fuel, thus causing the fuel to be entirely proposed to provide the drum with sliding 
consumed. The ashes which gradually accu- dampers in its ends, and this also I disclaim. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
mulate in the fire - box may be discharged 
therefrom through the neck F by taking the claim 
fire-box from the stove and inclining it so that 
Astraw-burning attachment for stoves, com 
the ashes will slide downwardly and outwardly prising the fire-box having the outwardly and 
on its bottom. The inclined front also permits upwardly inclined front wall, B, provided with 
a secondary draft down through the hearth of a damper, the neck F on the rear side near the 
the cook-stove, as shown in Fig. 2, and this bottom, the feeding-drum resting upon the top 
causes a secondary and thorough combustion of the fire-box, and the hinged adjustable valve 
of the burning fuel sucked through the neck in said drum, substantially as described. 
by the upper draft. (See arrows, Fig. 2.) 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
The flange I on the upper side of the fire- my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
box fits closely around the lower edge of the presence of two witnesses. 
drum, thereby firmly securing the latter to . 
the fire-box and obviating the necessity of 
having to tie it in position in order to prevent 
it from being overturned. 
I am aware that it has been heretofore pro 
CASPER IIATZ, 
W. R. MOWIUS, 
ERE) GIRTANNER 
Witnesses: 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361106.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 361,106. 
ENVELOPE GUMMING AND DRYING APPARATUS, 
C. WOLF, 
Patented Apr. 12, 1887. 
legs. 
 
Sir 
ES 
Ho: N 
N S. R R 
EHESS 
Naire 
Sir 
INHHS 
R 
m t 
IEE 
s 
R 
  
 
WITNESSES: 
() 
NVESTOR 
ATTORN EY. 
perERs, photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CLARENCE WOLF, OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
ENVELOPE GUMMNG AND ORY NG APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 361,106, dated April 12, 1887. 
Application filed IDecember 15, 1885. Serial No. 185,717. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CLARENCE WOLF, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing in the city 
and county of Philadelphia, State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Envelope Gumming and Drying 
Apparatus, which improvement is fully set 
forth in the following specification and accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a partial front view and 
partial vertical section on line aca, Fig. 2, of 
an envelope-gumming apparatus embodying 
my invention. Fig. 2 represents a partial side 
elevation and partial vertical section thereof. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the two figures. 
Myinvention relates to improvements in en 
velope-gumming apparatus; and it consists in 
the combination and arrangement of parts, as 
hereinafter described and claimed, whereby an 
envelope is reliably fed to the apparatus, se 
curely held in position, and carried to the past 
ing device and gummed the full width of its 
flap, finally being discharged at the same side 
of the revolving drum as the feed. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a ro 
tating drunion which envelopes to be gummed 
are placed; and B represents an endless strap, 
which is passed around guide-rollers C and 
said drum A, the envelopes resting directly 
against said strap, and arranged so that por 
tions of their flaps are exposed so as to be 
gummed by the brush or gumming device D, 
these features being well known and forming 
no part of the present invention. 
Erepresents an endless wire, which is passed 
around guide-rollers F, and likewise around 
the drum outside of the strap B, for holding 
the envelopes on the drum, it being seen that 
the wire occupies a position centrally in rela 
tion to said strap, and that both the strap and 
wire pass nearly around the entire circumfer 
ence of the drum, so that the material fed be-, 
tween the strap and the wire is discharged or 
set free on the same side of the drum as that 
on which it is delivered. 
The envelopes are passed downward through 
guide-rollers C and an opening in the frame 
B', as usual, and directed between the strap 
B and wire E, and there laid and clamped in 
such manner that portions of their flaps are 
exposed ready for gumming, in which position 
the envelopes are conveyed to the gumming 
device, and then around the drum, in order to 
dry. 
As the wire is in contact with the flaps it 
covers but a small portion of the centerthereof, 
the same being the thickness of a fine line and 
presenting an insignificant obstacle to the com 
plete gumming of the flaps at said center. The 
remainder of the exposed portions of the layers 
of flaps are entirely uncovered. Consequently 
the gumming device is permitted to apply the 
gum to said flaps the extreme width of the 
Same, so that when the envelope is to be used 
it may be reliably closed or sealed, especially 
at the sides of the flaps. 
I am aware that it is not new to employ tapes 
or straps for holding the sides of the flaps of 
envelopes during the gumming operation, the 
same covering said sides, whereby the latter 
are prevented from being gummed, and thus 
remain bare. 
In lieu of a wire, E, I may use an endless 
cord or band of any suitable material. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
An apparatus for gumming envelopes, con 
sisting of the frame B, with opening therein, 
the feed-rollers C, located as described, the 
drum A, the endless wire E, and strap B, the 
wire arranged centrally of said strap, the guide. 
rollers C and F, and the gumming device D, 
the feed and the discharge of the machine be. 
ing on the same side of the drum thereof, all 
substantially as described. 
o 
75 
CLARENCE WOLF. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
A. P. GRANT. 
5 
O 
I5 
25 
3 5 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361206.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 361,206, 
 
E. C. BY AM. 
CURTAIN FIXTURE. 
Z72%. Z. 
Patented Apr. 12, 1887. 
7 z-e za za 2 
22%. 2-yeC, 
re; eit 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EBER. C. BYAM, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF TWO THIRDs To 
JOHN A. STEWART AND JAMES S. 
CURTAIN 
FIXTURE. 
BAKER, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed August 21, 1884. 
Patent No. 361,206, dated April 12, 1887, 
Serial No. 141,198. (No model.) 
55 
The invention consists in an improved con- as shown, and the bearing I at such a dis- 7o 
to any desired 
To all vi?ion, it nay concern. 
the window can be shaded, and 
degree. 
Be it known that I, EBER C. BYAM, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
Heretofore, so far as I am aware, separate 
of New York, have invented a certain new 
bearings have been used to catch and hold 
and useful Improvement in Curtain-Fixtures; 
the cords D G; and the latter, when attached 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
in line, to stand vertically with the spool, 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
brings its bearing so far in that the edge of 
reference being had to the accompanying 
the curtain cannot overlap the casing without 
drawings, in which 
running against the bearing in lowering. My 
Figure 1 is an elevation showing a window 
present invention consists in constructing 
with the curtain-fixture applied. Fig. 2 is a 
these two bearings in one piece, that for the 
perspective view of the cord-fastening. Fig. 
cord D being attached to the casing outside 
3 is a plan view of the same, the casing to 
the curtain and that for the cord G. standing 
which it is attached being shown in section. 
inward in line with its cord, but projecting 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of one of the roller 
forward away from the casing, so that the edge 
cord bearings. 
of the curtain can run under it. 
I represents 
My improvement relates to curtains which 
the bearing for the outer cord, D, and I the 
can be adjusted higher or lower on the win 
bearing for the inner cord, G. These two 
dow by means of cords, and can also be rolled 
bearings are united by a connection, I, the 
or unrolled, at whatever position it is placed, 
whole being cast or formed in one piece. 
so as to shade any part of the window. 
These bearings both stand angularly outward, 
struction of the cord-bearing, whereby it is 
tance from the casing that the edge of the 
adapted to both cords, and stands off away curtain can overlap the casing and run freely 
from the casing, so that the curtain can run 
up and down behind the bearing. This obvi 
freely up and down, as hereinafter more fully 
Fates a difficulty which has heretofore been 
experienced in this class of fixtures, the cur 
described. 
In the drawings, A shows the casing of an 
tain having to be made narrow to prevent 
running against the bearing, or else the bear 
ordinary window. B is the curtain-roller, and 
ing having to be located out of a vertical line 
C is the curtain which winds thereon. 
D is a double cord for raising or lowering 
with the spool, in which case the cord will 
the roller. The doubled length of the cord 
not wind well on the spool. By this means 
passes up over a bearing, E, at the top of the 
also the device is stronger, stiffer, and more 
window. Here it divides into two branches, 
substantial, is easier to apply, as a less num 
one of which, D', extends downward and is 
ber of screws are used, and it is also much 
attached to an open hanger, F, which sup 
cheaper. The bearings are provided with 
ports one end of the roller, and the other, D, 
suitable slits or openings, a. a, in which the 
extends across the window, passes over an 
cords catch and bind to hold them in place. 
other bearing, E, then extends downward, and 
The outer cord, D, is provided with knots b 
is attached to a hanger, F, that supports the 
b at given intervals apart, to hold more se 
curely. 
other end of the roller. IBy this means the 
roller can be raised or lowered bodily by draw 
The spool consists of one fixed head, d, pro 
ing on the cord D. 
vided with a square shank, f, that is driven 
G is another cord, which winds on the spool 
into the end of the roller, and one loose head, 
H, attached to the end of the roller. By op 
d, that has a square hole, through which the 
erating this cord the curtain can be rolled up 
shank passes and by which it is clamped 
or down on the roller, at whatever adjustment against the end of the roller. 
The cord-bear 
the roller may be placed. Thus any part of ing E consists of a square shank, h, that is 
90 
95 
75 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
361,206 
5 cord. 
driven into the casing, and two hooks or lugs, ling offset or standing out away from the cas 
ing, so that the curtain can run freely behind 
ii, between which the cord passes. 
it, and the two bearings being connected by a 
I disclaim, simply and broadly, a cord-bear 
ing having a wedge-shaped slit for holding the 
central web, as herein shown and described. I5 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
witnesses. 
by Letters Patent, is 
A cord-bearing consisting of a casting made 
in one piece, having two slitted bearings for 
to the two separate cords, each bearing covering 
its vertical line with its cord, the inner bear. 
R. F. OsCOOD, 
P. A. COSTICH. 
Witnesses: 
EBER C. BYAM. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361306.txt	(No Model.) 
: 
W. P. MARTIN 
No. 361,306. 
 
STEREOTYPE PLATE HOLDER. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1887. 
|| || 
2 
3 
2 
3. E. 
6 
HeH 
C 
E 
EC 
Z7 
ZZ 
4 
E. 
HE 
HE 
 
 
  
feasas 2affa 
Za. 
 
7 c 2 
Z/2Zresses; 
Z2/622 ZO; 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. P. MARTIN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STEREOTYPE PLATE HOLDER. 
SPSCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 361,306, dated April 19, 1887. 
Application filed July 2, 1886. Serial No. 206,954. (No model.) 
. 
| reotype or electrotype plates to the blocks on 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. P. MARTIN, which they are mounted, this being considered 
necessary owing to variation in the size or pro 
portion of the plates in the form. When So 
secured, the plates cannot be raised or moved 
for the purpose of underlaying or to correct 
false register. 
With my device fine adjustment may be made 
to any possible position on the block and with 
great facility without disturbing the blocks or 
plate-holders in the forms. 
The face of the plate-holder has an index 
consisting of a number of lines parallel with 
the sides and ends. The lines should prefer 
ably be ruled at distances apart equal to mul 
tiples of some standard type-body-as nonpa 
reil or pica-and may be numbered or lettered. 
I am aware that a stereotype-plate holder 
has been patented in which there are swiveled 
rods provided with right and left screw-clamps 
extending across the block. This precludes 
placing of the stereotype in any other than a 
central position on the plate-holder. 
An extensible or composite plate-holder has 
also been patented in which the clamps on all 
sides of the plate-holder were independent, 
but a portion of the plate-holder was made to 
move with the clamp. This form of plate 
holder would not permit of the adjustment of 
the plate to any but a central position without 
changing the furniture. 
My plate-holder or block can be made up as 
a page in a form and the plates and size thereof 
changed at will and adjusted to any desired po 
sition on the holder.block without unlocking 
the form. 
To all whon it may concern: 
residing at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Ste 
reotype-Plate Holders, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had therein 
to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to stereotype-plate 
holders, and is more especially intended for 
use with stereotype or other plates which may 
require to be adjusted off the center, sides, or 
corners of the holding or base block. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan or face 
view of the device complete. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tion on line a ac, Fig. 1. 
A indicates the stereotype - plate holder, 
which has preferably a wooden body bound 
With metal; but the body portion may be of 
metal, if desired. 
The letters BB, &c., indicate grooves in the 
plate-holder. These grooves extend inwardly 
from the sides and ends of the plate-holder, 
but do not extend entirely across the same. 
The end grooves are in position parallel with 
the sides of the block or plate-holder, and the 
side grooves are parallel with the ends of the 
block. 
In each groove there is a swiveled screw 
threaded rod, C, and this rod bears a clamp, 
D, which engages the edge of the plate in usual 
manner. The screw-shaft Cisturned by means 
of a rack-engaging pinion, E, as is well known 
in the art, to move the clamp D toward or away 
from the medial line of the block. Each 
screw-rod and clamp is similar to such as have 
been used heretofore. 
There should be, by preference, three clamps 
and rods on the side of each block or plate 
holder and two at each end. Then, if the cen 
ter of the plate is brought to the proper posi 
tion by the two middle clamps, the ends can 
be moved to position a little oblique to the 
sides of the block, and there retained by the 
other clamps. This is sometimes necessary in 
registering plates in the form, especially in 
colored work. 
It is a frequent practice to nail or tack ste 
I claim 
A stereotype-plate holder having marginal 
clamps and having indicating-marks on its face 
to designate the position of the plate relatively 
to the margin, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM P. MARTIN, 
W. A. BARTLETT, 
M. P. CALLAN, 
Witnesses: 
5 
IO 
5 
25 
45 
55 
85 
R 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361407.txt	(No Model.) 
G, GER ONIMI & G, WENINI, 
CREMATION FURNACE 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 361407, 
41 
 
Patented Apr. 19, 1887. 
729. Z. 
ZN 7.N/S (NZNY 
WZTINUZNZ NZTWSZ 
N-2 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
y 
f 
 
 
ch 2 
 
 
 
42.2% 
is i. G. ify 
goes to 
6 afe'ie. " 
: 
Sz 
N22 
 
72% veys w 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
G. GER ONIMI & G. WENINI, 
CREMATION FURNACE, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1887. 
N NF 
rve 
. 
. 
. 
. 
No. 361,407. 
d Z27, 2. 
 
a' 
. 
2 
1. 
3 
t a 
a -2. 9. 
. 
 
 
g 
w 
c c 
 
 
ZZ95. 
 
%e2 Z07 
- - - 
 
2. 
eZZ 
3 
 
2Es 2. 
O 2 
1.2% % 
2 23-Z C. 
5 
2 % 2. 2 
7%, 
  
 
SSScalater sax 
72%. 5. 
Z 
T 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GIUSEPPE GERONIMI AND GIUSEPPE VENINI, OF MILAN, ITALY. 
CREMATION-FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 361,407, dated April 19, 1887. 
Application fied January 19, 1886. Serial No. 189,099. (No model.) 
IO 
35 
25 
To al., whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GIUSEPPE GERONIMI 
and GIUSEPPEVENINI, subjects of the King of 
Italy, and residing at Milan, in the Kingdom 
5 of Italy, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Cremation-Furnaces, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
Cremation-furnaces; and the object of this in 
yention is to produce a compact and simple 
furnace which produces readily, by means of a 
Combustible gas, the high degree of heat neces 
sary for the successful cremation of corpses, 
and in which the products of the primary com. 
15 bustion of the corpse are repeatedly subjected 
to further combustion, whereby all the gases 
emanating from the burning corpse are com 
pletely oxidized and rendered inodorous and 
harmless before they are emitted into the sur 
rounding atmosphere. 
Our invention consists, to these ends, of the 
improvements in the construction of the cre 
mation-furnace, which will be hereinafter fully 
Set forth, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, consisting 
of two sheets, Figure 1 is a longitudinal cen. 
tral Section of ourimproved cremation-furnace. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal section of the same in 
linea ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an elevation of the 
carriage upon which the corpse is placed. 
Fig. 4 is a longitudinal sectional elevation in 
line aca, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 5 is a horizontal section 
in line y 21, Fig. 1. Figs. 6 and 7 are cross 
sections in linea: a and y), Fig. 4, respect 
ively. Fig. 8 is a sectional elevation of the 
secondary gas-burner on an enlarged scale. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the several figures. 
A represents the cremation chamber or oven 
of the furnace, made oblong in form, and hav 
ing at its front end an opening, a, provided 
with a vertical sliding door, a?, through which 
the corpse to be cremated is introduced into 
the chamber A. The floor or bottom a of the 
45 latter is provided with rollers a, for facilitat. 
ing the movement of the plate or slab upon 
which the corpse is placed. The combustion 
chamber and the passages connected therewith 
are constructed of fire-brick or other refractory 
SO material capable of sustaining the high degree 
of heat which is maintained in the furnace. 
B represents the gas-burner, arranged at the 
opposite or rear end of the furnace, and com 
municating with the cremation-chamber A. by 
a horizontal passage, b, and openingsb'. The 55 
passage b is provided at both ends with tubes 
b', which admit external air to the passage for 
the purpose of assisting in the combustion of 
the gas. The gas-burner B consists of a verti 
cal gas-tube, c, and an air-tube or nozzle, c', 
arranged within the gas-tube and opening near 
the mouth of the gas-tube, as clearly shown in 
Fig.1. The gas-burner receives the combusti 
ble gas from a gas-generator, D, which is ar 
ranged in a subterranean vault in rear of the 
furnace, and which is connected with the gas 
pipe c by an elbow-pipe, d. The gas-genera 
tor D is composed of a gas-generating cham 
ber, e, which is provided with a grate, e, at 
the bottom and a feed-opening, e, at the top, 7o 
having a sliding cover, e. 
E represents a feed hopper or funnel ar 
ranged above the feed-opening e, and pivoted 
to the top of the gas-generator, so as to be 
laterally movable toward and from the feed- 75 
opening. The chamber e is filled with short 
blocks of wood or other suitable material, 
which are ignited at the bottom of the cham 
ber, while the wood in the upper portion of 
the chamber is distilled by the heat of the 8c 
burning wood below and generates a combus 
tible gas. The admission of air to the gas 
generating chamber is controlled by suitable 
dampers, e, in the ash-pite'. The charges of 
wood are placed in the feederE, with the wood 
resting upon the covere'. Upon opening the lat 
ter the wood drops down into the generating 
chamber e, and, this being accomplished, the 
cover is quickly closed. In this manner fresh 
wood is fed from time to time into the generat 
ing-chamber while the operation of cremation 
is going on. The gas-generator is preferably 
mounted on wheels, which run on rails, so that 
upon disconnecting the generator from the 
elbow-piped and air-pipef the generator can 95 
be moved to a more convenient or accessible 
place when required to be cleaned or repaired. 
F represents an air-heating jacket, which 
incloses the generating-chamber e, and which 
forms an intervening air-passage, f, to which 
the external air is admitted at the bottom. 
The air becomes heated in passing through 
the jacket F by contact with the generating 
chamber e, and is then conducted by the pipe 
9O 
IOO 
 
2 
361,407 
IO 
I5 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
SS 
. 
f to the air pipe or nozzle c of the gas-burner 
B. The chamber e thus forms at the same 
time an air-heating and gas-generating cham 
ber. 
9 represents a pipe which admits external 
air to the gas-passage b above the gas-burner 
B. The flame and hot gases issuing from the 
burner B pass through the passageb, in which 
they are supplied with additional air from the 
pipes 0 and g and enter the cremation-cham 
ber A through the openings l'. In passing 
through this chamber the gases are further 
Supplied with additional air for combustion, 
Which air enters through passages g', arranged 
in the side walls of the cremation-chamber. 
The openings band air-pipes to at the head 
of the chamber. A converge and direct the 
flame upon the upper portion of the corpse, 
While the air-jets, entering through the side 
passages, f', direct the flame upon the lower 
portion of the body. 
H represents horizontal return - flues ar 
ranged underneath the floor a of the cham 
ber A and communicating with the latter at 
their front ends by openings h, through which 
the gases dive into the flues H. 
I represents gas-burners arranged in the 
front portions of the flues H, for the purpose 
of Subjecting the gases which enter the flues 
to a Secondary combustion. 
Each burner I is 
provided with a horizontal gas-pipe, i, which 
is open at its inner or rear end, and which re 
ceives the gas from a vertical pipe, i', to which 
the gas is supplied by a pipe, i, from a mani 
fold, i, connected with the elbow-pipe d. 
it is a horizontal air-pipe, which is arranged 
Within the gas-pipe i and admits external air 
to the mouth thereof for burning the gas issu 
ing therefrom. An additional air supply en 
ters the upright pipe i' through an elbow. 
pipe, i. The gases entering the flues H from 
the chamber Ameet the flames and gases issu 
ing from the burners I, thereby effecting a 
secondary combustion and consuming any com 
bustible matter contained in such gases. 
The rear ends of the ?lues H turn inwardly 
and connect with the upper end of a diving. 
flue, J, which is connected by a horizontal ?lue, 
K, with the chimney L. 
M represents a gas-burner arranged at or 
near the junction of the flue Kwith the chim 
ney L, and receiving the gas from the mani 
fold i' by a pipe, n. 
in is an air-pipe, which supplies external air 
to the gas-burner M for effecting the combus 
tion of the gas. By this means the gases which 
escape from the flue Kare subjected to a third 
combustion as they enter the chimney and be 
fore they escape into the outer air, thereby 
still further reducing the possibility of any 
gases or vapors escaping into the outer air 
without being completely oxidized and ren 
dered inodorous and harmless. The gas-burner 
Mispreferably provided with a conical spread 
er, m, for distributing the flame over the 
mouth of the flue K. 
O represents small auxiliary furnaces ar 
ranged in the rear part of the cremation-?ur 
nace, on oppositesides of the gas-burner B, and 
communicating with the gas-passageb by open 
ings o. These furnaces are used for heating 
the cremation-furnace sufficiently to start the 
draft, and they may also be used between two 
cremating operations for preventing the appa 
ratus from getting cold. 
P represents the carriage upon which the 
corpse is placed before introducing the same 
into the cremation-chamber A. The carriage 
P is provided with wheels p, which run on 
rails placed in front of the cremation-chamber. 
This carriage is also provided with rollers p, 
upon which is placed the plate or slab which 
supports the corpse. 
The operation is begun by starting a fire first 
in one and then in the other auxiliary furnace 
O and urging these fires until the apparatus is 
sufficiently heated to light the gas at the burner 
B. While the fires are burning in the furnaces 
O gas is generated in the apparatus D, and 
when the temperature of the cremating-fur 
nace has been sufficiently raised the gas is ig 
nited at the burners B, I, and M. The hot air 
which is supplied to the main burner B mate: 
rially increases the temperature of the furnace. 
When the gas is burning, the fires in the aux 
iliary furnaces O can be extinguished. When 
the temperature in the cremation-chamber has 
risen to about 800 centigrade, the apparatus 
is ready to receive the corpse. The slides or 
valves of the air-openings in the chamber A 
are now opened, the carriage P is moved 
against the front end of the oven, the door a 
is opened, the corpse resting on the slab or 
plate is moved into the chamber A, and the 
door is closed. The progress of the operation 
can be observed through side openings formed 
in the chamber A and covered with transpar 
ent panes. The intense heat to which the 
corpse is subjected and the Supply of air to the 
clhamber A effect in part a combustion and in 
part a distillation of the corpse, and the gases 
and vapors resulting therefrom are further 
consumed by the second combustion effected 
by the burners I in the return-?lues H, which 
burners also supply additional air to the gase 
ous mixture in the flues. The final combus 
tion of any remaining unconsumed combusti 
ble matter is effected by the burner M in the 
chimney. When the operation of cremation 
is completed, the gas is shut off, the furnace 
is permitted to cool, and the plate or slab con 
taining the ashes is removed from the furnace. 
If it is desired to conduct Several crema 
tions consecutively, the gas is shut off, the ashes 
are removed, and another corpse is introduced 
into the chamber A and the gas turned on 
again. The gas and air pipes are provided 
with suitable dampers or valves for regulating 
the Supply of gas and air. 
The gas produces the necessary intense heat 
in a comparatively short time, and does not 
cause an admixture of foreign substances with 
the human ashes. 
The gas-generator herein described can be 
75 
IOO 
O 
I 25 
 
36.407 
3. 
advantageously used where a supply of com 
bustible gas is not otherwise obtainable; but 
it is obvious that such gas derived from any 
other source may be used. 
We claim as our invention 
1. In a cremation-furnace, the combination, 
With the oven, of a primary gas-burner where 
by the oven is heated, a draft-passage through 
which the products of the primary combustion 
escape from the oven, and a secondary gas 
burner arranged within said draft-passage, 
Whereby the products of the primary combus 
tion escaping from the oven are subjected to a 
Secondary combustion, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. In a cremation-furnace, the combination, 
With the oven, of a primary burner whereby 
the oven is heated, a draft-passage through 
which the products of the primary combustion 
escape from the oven, a secondary burner ar. 
ranged near the inlet end of said draft-passage 
and effecting a secondary combustion, and a 
tertiary burner arranged in said draft-pas 
Sage, and whereby the products of the second 
ary combustion are subjected to a tertiary 
combustion, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a cremation-furnace, the combination, 
with the oven, of a primary gas-burner located 
at one end of the oven and provided with an 
air-supply conduit, a draft-passage through 
which the products of the primary combustion 
escape from the oven, and a secondary gas 
burner located in said draft-passage and pro 
vided with a separate air-supply conduit, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the oven A, of a 
primary burner composed of an air-supply 
conduit, c', and a surrounding gas-conduit, c, 
an exit-flue, H, and a secondary burner ar 
ranged in said flue, and composed of an air 
conduit, h, and a surrounding gas conduit, i, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with the oven A, of a 
primary burner composed of an air-supply 
conduit, c, and a surrounding conduit, c, and 
an auxiliary air-supply conduit opening into 
the oven above said primary burner, Substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the oven A, of a 
O 
2) 
45 
55 
8. In a cremation-furnace, the combination, 65 
primary gas-burner, B, a passage, b, connect- 5O 
ing said burner with one end of the oven, re 
turn-flues H, arranged below the oven and 
connected with the opposite end thereof by 
openings h, and secondary gas-burners ar 
ranged in said exit-flues below the openingsh, 
substantially as set forth. 
7. In a cremation-furnace, the combination, 
with the oven, of a heating and gas-generating 
chamber, a gas-conduit connecting said cham 
ber with the oven, an air-heating passage en- 6C 
veloping the said heating and gas-generating 
chamber, and an air-conduit conducting the 
heated air to the gas-burner in the oven, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
with the oven, of a heating and gas-generating 
chamber, a gas-conduit connecting said cham 
ber with the oven, an air-heating passage en 
veloping said heating and gas-generating cham 
ber, and an air-conduit surrounding the gas 
conduit and opening at the mouth of the gas 
conduit in the oven, substantially as set forth. 
9. In a cremation-furnace, the combination, 
with the oven, of a gas-conduit leading to the 
oven, an air-conduit conducting hot air to the 
gas-burner, means, substantially as described, 
whereby the air is heated, and a secondary 
air-passage admitting outside air to the gas 
burner, substantially as set forth. . 
10. In a cremation-furnace, the combination, 
with the oven, of a gas-burner communicating 
with the oven, a descending draft-passage con 
necting the oven with a chimney, and an aux 
iliary furnace, O, communicating with the 
oven, substantially as set forth. 
Witness my hand this 8th day of December, 
1885, at Buffalo, New York. 
85 
75 
- 
GIUSEPPE GERONIMI. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. J. BONNER, 
OSCAR SCHAUB. 
Witness my hand this 24th day of December, 
1885, at Milan, Italy. 
GIUSEPEPE VENINI. 
Witnesses: 
ADOLF RINDERKNECHT, 
HERM, HEIAT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361507.txt	J. T. HAMBAY. 
METHOD OF MAKING PIPE FITTINGS, 
No. 361,507, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1887. 
 
(Y /N 
% 
27. 
2 
  
 
 
WS ed  
At 6, 
 
 
M 
 
 
 
 
 
JNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES T. HAMBAY, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
METHOD OF WAK NG P PE - F 
NGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent INo. 36,507, dated April 19, 1887. 
Application filed January 28, 1886. Serial No. 190,021. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMEST. HAMBAY, re 
siding at Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny 
and State of Pennsylvania, a citizen of the 
United States, have invented or discovered 
certain new and useful Improvements in the 
Method of Forming Wrought-Iron or Steel 
Pipe-Fittings, of which improvements the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
In the accompanying drawings, which make 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a sec 
tional elevation of the dies employed in bend 
ing and nozzling the blank. Fig. 2 is a simi. 
lar view of the dies employed for completing 
the bending operation. Fig. 3 is a view sini 
lar to Fig. 1, showing the manner of bending 
and flanging or nozzling a double blank for a 
cross. Figs. 4 and 5 are sectional elevations 
of the dies for welding single and double 
blanks, respectively. Figs. 6 and 7 are plan 
views of single and double blanks. Fig. 8 is a 
view in side elevation of a saddle-connection. 
The invention herein relates to certain im 
provements in the method of manufacturing 
fittings for pipes for the conveyance of fluids. 
These fittings have heretofore been formed of 
cast metal, which is an objectionable material 
for many reasons--e.g., the liability of the for 
mation of sand or blow holes during casting, 
and their easy destruction during the forma 
tion of a joint. 
The object of the invention herein is to pro 
vide for the formation of Wrought-iron or steel 
fittings-such as T's and crosses-from a suit 
ably -formed blank by a series of flanging, 
bending, and welding operations, said fittings 
to have when finished a wall of approximately 
uniform thickness throughout, and to be free 
from holes and other defects, and to have such 
elasticity as to render it capable of being some 
what stretched or strained during use without 
liability of cracking, and resuming its normal 
size when released from Strain. 
My improved method consists, generally 
stated, in forming one or more laterally-pro 
jecting collars or nozzles by a flanging opera 
tion on a rectangularly-shaped plate, bending 
said plate around a cylindrical mandrel, and 
then welding the meeting edges of said plate 
together. The flanging or nozzling operation 
is effected in a manner Similar to that emi 
ployed in forming flue holes or nozzles in 
boiler-plates; but in thus treating a plate of 
unifor in thickness the metal which forms the 
collar or nozzle will be stretched, the stretch 
or elongation of the metal being greatest at 
the outer end of the collar, and hence the 
sides of the collar will be made tapering, as 
will be clearly understood. In order to ob 
viate this defect, the plate 1 is provided with 
a circular enlargement or projection, 2, at that 
point where the collar or nozzle is to be formed, 
the extra amount of metal thus incorporated 
in the blank being proportioned and arranged 
to compensate for the stretch or elongation 
effected by the flanging operation. 
The blanks with the enlargements are pref. 
erably formed by rolling between suitably-con 
structed rolls, although they may be formed 
by forging in continuous lengths, the enlarge 
ments being formed at suitable distances apart, 
Such distance being proportional to the size of 
the pipe for which the Ts are intended. The 
blanks for croSSes are provided with two en 
largements or projections, 2, formed at a dis 
tance from each other equal to one-half of the 
circumference of the pipe, measuring from 
center to center, with which they are to be 
used. The next step in the operation of form 
ing either T's or crosses is to drill a hole, 3, 
through the center of the enlargements 2, said 
holes serving as a guide for the punch or flang. 
ing-tool during subsequent operations, and to 
facilitate the opening out of the enlargement 
under the action of the punch. The holes 3 
may, if desired, beformed during the rolling 
operation, the rolls being provided with pro 
jecting pins and corresponding sockets. The 
blanks thus prepared are placed on the female 
die 4, Fig. 1, the hole 3 being arranged in the 
axial line of said die, which is attached to the 
anvil of a suitable press. The forming and 
clamping die 5 is then forced down, imparting 
to the body of the blank its initial trough-like 
form. While this die 5 holds the blank against 
the die 4, as shown, the punch 6 is caused to 
descend through the circular opening in the 
die. The point of the punch enters the hole 
3, and passing down through the hole will 
spread the Same and force the metal of the en 
largement 2 back into the recess 7 of the die 
4, thus forming the collar or nozzle 8. 
It will 
be observed that the dies 4 and 5 grasp the 
blank around the edges of the projection 2, so 
55 
75 
9.) 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
OO 
36,507 
, 
described, is employed. This blank is given 
that all the swaging action of the punch op 
erates on the metal of the projection, and that 
the proper contour and nozzled in the same 
the enlargement is thickest or has the greatest 
manner, and with dies essentially similar to 
body of metal at the point where the greatest 
those employed in making the preliminary 
stretch or elongation is effected-i. e., around 
bend and nozzling the T-blanks. After bend 
ing and nozzling 
the blank, the edges 16 of 
the hole 3. 
In making crosses or double T's, the above 
the blank are bent out at about right angles 
preliminary bending and the flanging or noz 
to the nozzle. The nozzle is then threaded 
Zling operation is duplicated, as shown in Fig. 
and the flanges drilled for the reception of the 
clamping-bolts. A completed saddle for a 
3. The blank is next placed on the die 9, the 
collar or nozzle 8 being located in the recess 
branch connection is clearly shown in Fig. 8. 
10 of said die, the mandrels 11 and 12 are then 
When a small nozzle or collar is formed on 
moved up. The mandrels 12 serving as a former 
a large T-i.e., one with thick walls-a re-en 
around which to bend the blank, and the 
forcement or enlargement of the plate is not 
mandrel 11 entering the collar or nozzle, thus 
necessary, as there will be sufficient metal in 
serving to prevent any distortion thereof. 
the thick Walls. A plain plate can therefore 
The bending dies 3 are then moved forward 
be used. 
to wrap the blank around the mandrels 12. 
No claim is made herein for any of the ap 
paratus employed in carrying out my improved 
After the retraction of the bending-dies 13, the 
welding-die 14 is forced down to weld the over. 
method, as such apparatus will form the sub 
lapping scarfed edges of the blank. This ject of other applications to be filed in due 
welding operation completes the T with the 
exception of the internal threading of the 
same, which can be effected in a suitable ma 
chine. In making crosses or double T's a 
fourth mandrel, 15, is inserted into the other 
nozzle after the bending-dies have operated, 
so as to preserve the shape of the second 
nozzle. 
It will be understood that the blank is heated 
and reheated during the above operations as 
often as necessary to keep the metal in the 
proper plastic condition. 
It is frequently necessary to make branch 
connections in pipe-lines at points where no 
provision was made for such connection dur 
ing the laying of the pipe-line. To make such 
branch connection, a saddle,' as it is termed, 
is clamped around the pipe at the point where 
the connection is to be made. This saddle 
consists of a metal plate curved to fit the curva. 
ture of the pipe, and provided with a nozzle 
for connection with the branch line and later 
ally - extending flanges, through which the 
clamping-bolts are passed. I propose to make 
these saddles, which are usually of cast metal, 
of wrought-iron or steel. 
In making these 
saddles a blank similar to the T-blanks, above 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. As an improvement in the art of manu 
facturing wrought-iron or steel Ts, crosses, 
and like fittings for pipes for the conveyance 
of fluids, the herein-described method, which 
consists in re-enforcing a portion of a suitably 75 
shaped blank, nozzling or flanging the re-en 
forced portion, and then imparting the desired 
shape to the body portion of said blank, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. As an improvement in the art of manu 
facturing T's, crosses, and like fittings for 
pipes for the conveyance of fluid, the herein. . 
described method, which consists in re-enforc 
ing a portion of a suitably-shaped blank, noz 
zling or flanging the blank at re-enforced por 
tion, imparting a circular form to the body 
portion of the blank, and finally welding to 
gether the adjacent edges of said blank, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
DARWIN S. WoLCOTT, 
R. H. WHITTLESEY. 
JAMES. T. HAMBAY. 
time. 
- 
Witnesses: 
50 
55 
9O 
O 
25 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361607.txt	Y 
(No Model.) 
W. R. BAKER, 
MOWER 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 361,607. 
Patented Apr. 19, l887. 
W. 
t 
P 
I AE SLE 
4 S. NSN 
E\ 
 
 
N2 
 
 
 
NVENTOR 
WillZiara R. Barer. 
But 7zis Attorneys 
N PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 361,607, 
W. R. BAKER, . 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
MOWER. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1887. 
- 
. 
/ 
1. 
M 
as 
R 
a . Y. 
V 
/ S- s e 
: S. -O. 
v SS 
AR 
N Y 7 
WITNESSES 
%229 6. 26.1% 
NVENTOR 
But 722s Attorneys 
WiZZzazza A, Baer. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 361,607, 
 
W. R. BAKER 
MOWER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1887. 
 
CN s 
 
St \ 
WITNESSES 
NVENTOR 
%9 62. o6.4% 
By 7s an."tota77 A. Ba/er 
lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
h 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. BAKER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE McCORMICK 
HARVESTING MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MOWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 361,607, dated April 19, 1887. 
Application filed March 12, 1885. Serial No. 158,625. (No model.) 
To all whon, it nay concern: 
and rear arm of the forked coupling, and the 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. BAKER, a 
lever and tilting chain with its bell-crank. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
A represents the main or driving wheels of 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
the machine; B, the main frame with incased 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
gearing; C, the driver's seat; D, the draft 
Improvements in Mowers, of which the fol 
tongue, and E the cutter crank-shaft, the 
lowing is a specification. 
arrangement of these being such as usual in 
mowers now in the market, and not requiring 
My invention relates to that class of mowers 
further description. 
known as two-wheel hinge-bar front-cut ma 
chines in which there is a floating and rock 
To the bracket e, which shields the connec 
ing finger-bar connected to the main frame by 
tion between the pitman and Wrist-pin, and 
a coupling-frame and thrust-bar; and it con 
in front thereof, I hinge on a diagonal pivot 
sists in hinging the coupling-arm and the 
pin, f, directed inward toward the axle and 
inner wheel, a coupling-arm, F, which may be 
thrust-bar to the main fraine between the car 
rying-wheels upon diagonal pivots arranged 
of the usual form, but which, for lightness and 
upon the same axis with the rear pivot in 
increased strength, I prefer to make as shown 
close proximity to the axle; in combining with 
that is, it is cast hollow, in one piece of gradu 
the coupling-arm and thrust-bar, both hinged 
ally-enlarging diameter toward the inner shoe, 
upon a common diagonal axis, and with the 
and near its free end is forked or provided 
finger-bar a tilting lever having its weight 
with an offsetting arm, F, which extends rear 
arm substantially in line with said axis, in or 
wardly at right angles to the main arm, for the 
der that the rising and falling of the finger 
purpose of supporting various parts, as here 
bar may not essentially affect the adjustment 
inafter explained, until it reaches and passes 
of the cutter-bar; in a hollow coupling-frame 
slightly beyond the heel of the inner shoe, 
forked at its end to embrace the inner shoe of 
when it curves upon itself and terminates in 
the finger-bar and having a recurved head on 
a spherical head or ball, f, to form one mem 
ber of a universal coupling with the inner 
the rear arm of the fork and a vertical shielded 
guideway in the front arm; in combining with 
shoe. Directly in front of this ball the ex 
the forked coupling-arm a thrust-bar pivoted 
tended main arm has a vertical recess or way, 
to the main frame upon the same diagonal 
f', formed in said arm and in a downward off 
hinge with said coupling-frame and bolted 
set from the same, and closed or shielded at 
rigidly to a seat upon the rear arm of the fork; 
top and bottom, as well as at the sides. 
in combining with a wing or spur on the front 
A thrust-bar, G, is rigidly bolted to a seat 
arm of the forked coupling a lead-wheel re 
formed upon the rear end of the arm F, and 
ceiving the point of said wing within its re 
is hinged to the main frame just beneath the 
enteringly-curved rim, to act as a rolling shoe 
axle by a diagonal pivot, g, inline with or upon 
the same axis as the pin, by which the coup 
or inside divider, and in various other details 
ling-arm is hinged, the purpose of these diag 
ofstructure, hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a top plan view 
onal pivots being to keep the finger-bar in 
of a mower embodying my invention, the 
line, notwithstanding its flexions, and also to 
tongue and finger-bar being partly broken 
more effectually resist the leverage of the fin 
ger-bar. 
away. Fig. 2 is an elevation thereof from the 
In front of the coupling-arm and integral 
divider side. Fig 2" is a detail showing the 
fore part of the coupling-fork and inner shoe therewith, or rigidly affixed thereto, is a wing, 
and the connection between the two. Fig. 3 g, flaring outwardly and forwardly and termi. 
is an enlarged detail in Section of the lead- nating in a point or spur. A vertical slotted 
wheel and the connection between it and the elongated boss, g, upon this wing receives a 
coupling-arm; Figs. 4 and 5, enlarged details bolt, g, securing thereto a tubular stub-axle, 
showing the arrangement of the inner shoe g", supporting the lead-wheel H, which is thus 
7 S 
90 
95 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
361,607 
5 
O 
20 
25 
35 
made to carry the weight of the coupling-arm 
and parts which it supports, and which may 
be adjusted up and down along the slotted boss 
to change the height of the inner end of the 
finger-bar. This lead-wheel is hollow, and is 
open on one side, except, as shown in Fig. 3, 
for a re-entrant rim, h, which forms an angular 
chamber, h", within the tread. Into this cham 
ber the point or spur of the wing piece pro 
jects, coming close to the edge of the rim and 
being entirely shielded thereby, so that the 
wheel and the wing-piece together form in ef. 
fect both an inner divider and a rolling-shoe. 
The inner shoe, I, has at its rear or at its 
wheel end a spherical socket, i, for the recep 
tion of the ball in the rear fork of the coup 
ling-arm, and on its toe an anti-friction roller, 
i", which is received into and fits snugly within 
the shielded recess or way in the front fork. 
Behind this it is curved to substantially fol 
low the curved outline of the tread of the 
lead-wheel, and merges into the finger-bar K 
practically on a line with the inner face of said 
wheel. 
To the inner or divider side of the rear fork 
of the coupling-arm is pivoted a bell-crankle 
ver, L, one arm, l, of which connects by a short 
chain, l, with the front part of the shoe, so as 
to lift it within its guideway, thus tilting the 
finger-bar, and yet permitting it to be further 
lifted by any sinuosity of the ground or by 
any obstruction. The other arm, l, of the bell 
crank is connected by a link, l, with a lever, 
M, pivoted at the rear of of the axle and hav 
ing the usual segment-rack, m, and detent. The 
location of this lever is such as to bring its 
lower or weight arm substantially in line with 
the diagonal axis of the coupling-arm and 
thrust-bar, so that the tilting adjustment of 
the finger-bar will be practically undisturbed 
by flexions or movements of the floating or 
coupling frame formed by the coupling-arm 
and thrust-bar. On the other side of the rear 
fork and beneath the thrust-bar is pivoted a 
gag-lever, N, the lower arm of which comes 
against a lateral spur, n, from the heel of the 
inner shoe, and the other arm has a socket, n', 
in which the thrust-bar is received, and is con 
nected by a chain, n, With the lifting-segment 
o and actuating-lever O on the main frame, so 
that whenever this actuating-lever is moved 
to take in the chain the gag-lever will first act 
upon the finger-bar to lift its outer end, and 
will then, if the movement of the lever is con 
tinued, catch upon the thrust-bar and lift the 
finger-bar and floating frame bodily. 
In order to lighten the draft or pressure of 
the floating frame upon the ground, a stirrup, 
P, is hinged to the draft-tongue, and to this 
is attached the clipp, for the double-tree. A 
link, p, connects this stirrup with the thrust 
bar about opposite the tread of the Carrying 
wheel, so that as the stirrup is rocked by the 
draft of the team the link will draw upon the 
thrust-bar and tend to raise it and the parts 
to which it is rigidly attached, or which, by 
means of the gag-lever, are so locked to the 
others as to be compelled 
to follow their move- . 
mentS. 
I am aware that in Letters Patent granted 
to J. B. Kershaw, June 15, 1869, No. 91,347, a 
ball-joint is shown between the finger-bar and 
coupling-frame at the heel of the inner shoe; 
but in such joint the ball is upon the shoe and 
the socket upon the rear fork of the coupling 
frame, so that it is directed forward, and is 
peculiarly liable to catch and collect the fine 
gritty dust that is stirred up from the stalks 
and stubble in the passage of the machine, thus 
causing the joint to clog and grind, wearing it 
out rapidly. In my machine, on the contrary, 
the socket, being upon the heel of the shoe, 
has its mouth directed to the rear, and thus 
serves the twofold function of member of the 
joint and shield therefor. 
I claim 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, in a two-wheel hinge-bar 
front-cut mower, of a main frame and a coup 
ling-frame hinged thereto between the carry 
ing-wheels by diagonal pivots arranged upon 
the same axis, and the rear pivot being adja 
cent to and beneath the axle. 
2. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, in a two-wheel hinge-bar 
front-cut mower, of a main frame, a coupling 
arm hinged thereto by a diagonal pivot, and 
a thrust-bar hinged also to the main frame 
close to the axle by a diagonal pivot on the 
same axis as the pivot of the coupling-arm, 
both pivots being within the carrying-wheels. 
3. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, in a two-wheel hinge-bar 
front-cut mower, of the main frame, the forked 
coupling-arm hinged thereto by a diagonal 
pivot, the tilting or rocking finger-bar carried 
by said coupling-arm, and the thrust-bar rig 
idly secured to the rear fork of the coupling 
arm and hinged to the main frame by a diago 
nal pivot in continuation of the other. 
4. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of the hollow forked coup 
ling-arm having a spherical forwardly-pro 
jecting head on the rear fork and a vertical 
shielded recess in the front fork, and the in 
ner shoe having a spherical socket engaging 
with said head and an anti-friction roller on 
its toe entering in and playing within said re 
CSS. 
5. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of the wing-piece and the 
lead-wheel having a re-entering rim which 
embraces and shields the point of said wing 
piece. 
6. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the coupling-arm, its 
wing-piece, and the lead-wheel turning on a 
stub-axle from said Wing-piece and having a 
re-entering rim which embraces and shields 
the point thereof. 
7. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of the forked coupling-arm, 
5 
SS 
75 
CO 
Io5 
IO 
IIS 
I 25 
361,607 
- 
- 
3 
5 
its diagonal hinge, the thrust-bar and its di 
agonal hinge, and the tilting-lever having its 
link-arm arranged substantially in line with 
the axis of said diagonal hinges. 
8. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of the forked coupling-arm 
hinged to the main frame by a diagonal pivot 
pin, the inner shoe hinged to the rear fork of 
said coupling-arm and playing, as to its toe, 
to in a vertical recess in the front fork, the 
thrust-bar, also hinged to the main frame by a 
diagonal pivot-pin in line with the first, the 
bell-crank pivoted to the rear fork and con 
nected by chain-links with the front of the 
I5 shoe, the tilting lever from the main frame 
having its link-arm substantially in line with 
the diagonal pivots, and the link connecting 
the bell-crank with said link-arm. 
9. The combination, substantially as here: 
2O inbefore set forth, of the forked coupling-arm, 
the inner shoe connected with the rear fork by 
a hinge-joint and controlled at its toe by a 
vertical guide or recess in the front fork, the 
thrust-bar bolted to said rear fork, the gag 
25 lever pivoted to the rear fork and having a 
socket for the reception of the thrust-bar, the 
lateral spur from the heel of the shoe with 
which the lower arm of the gag-lever engages, 
and the lever upon the main frame connected 
3O with the upper arm of the gag-lever. 
10. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of the forked coupling-arm, 
its forwardly-projecting wing-piece, the lead 
wheel supported on a stub-axle from said 
wing-piece and embracing and shielding its 35 
point, and the inner shoe hinged to the rear 
fork by a universal joint and having its toe 
restrained and guided by the vertical recess 
in the front fork and shielded on its inner 
side by said lead-wheel. 
11. The hollow forked coupling-frame con 
structed, substantially as described, of a sin 
gle casting with rearwardly-extending armter 
minating in a recurved spherical head, and 
with vertical shielded guideway in the front 15 
all. 
12. The hollow forked coupling-frame 
formed as a single casting, having the rear 
member of the fork arranged at right angles 
to the other and inwardly curved at its end 5o 
and terminating in a spherical head, and the 
forward member provided with a vertical 
guideway for the toe of the shoe and with a 
forwardly-extending wing-piece, substantially 
as described. 
4O 
WILLIAM R. BAKER, 
Witnesses: 
- 
PAUL ARNOLD, 
S. C. A. HoLTH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361707.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MATHEIS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING LEATHER, &c. 
Patented Apr. 26, 1887. 
No. 361,707, 
Figil. 
I 
O2 
- t 
A. 
y 
l 
- - - - 
X---- 
a 
See 
nes 
is 
rec - - - - - - 
-T 
af 
f 
til 
3A2) 
Q d 
2. 
| 
ZD 
2- S Fig.2. 
se 
i l 
5XY-1ASA 
3. | 
Ea/ 
HIT 
C 
N77 Nt(2)| 
GO N 
E 
Sa 
Fig. 
- rsa. 
INVENTOR; 
o/272/ Zovaez Sr. 
Ay 
7ttorney 
i 
ATTEST: 
3.24. 
o 
 
(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. MATHEIS. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING LEATHER, &c. 
No. 36 l707, 
Patented Apr. 26, 1887. 
Ey'EUin), 
 
P 
% 
 
"I'll'Us 
2 
(as N 
III 
 
 
 
  
s 
e 
aE. 
- 
E. 
--- 
y'swak 
6%atz, --. 
As 
INVENTOR: 
Vo/272, Mazz/2e2S1 
see-ests 
fteorvey 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN MATHEIS, OF OTTAWA, ILLINOIS. 
MACHINE FOR CUTTING LEATHER, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 36l,707, dated April 26, 1887. 
Application filed September 4, 1886. Serial No. 212,668. 
No model.) 
SS 
75 
To all tufton, it half concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN MATHEIS, a citi 
zen of the United States, and a resident of Ot. 
tawa, in the county of La Salle and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Machines for Cutting Leather 
and Similar Materials, of which the following 
is a Specification. 
The invention relates to a machine for cut 
ting materials-such as leather-into strips 
suitable for shoe-strings, fly-nets, shoe-uppers, 
&C., and card-boardinto strips suitable formak 
ing paper boxes, or any similar material into 
equal or unequal strips or bands. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
machine which will cut material-such as 
leather or card-board-into strips having par 
allel and smooth edges, which may be of cheap 
and simple construction, and which may be 
easily sharpened, reference being had to the 
cutting-edges. 
The invention consists in the features of con 
struction and combinations of parts herein 
after fully described and claimed. 
In order to illustrate the practical manner 
of carrying out the invention, and to enable 
others skilled in the art to which the invention 
appertains to make and use the same, draw 
ings are hereunto annexed and described, in 
which similar letters represent corresponding 
elements, and in which each part referred to is 
designated by a single character. 
Figure 1 is a general top view of the ma 
chine. Fig. 2 is a general side view. Fig. 3 
is a sectional view at a in Fig. 1, the rollers 
not being shown in section; and Fig. 4 shows 
the frame containing the cutting-knives of the 
machine. 
The machine consists of the combination of 
two parallel rollers, the one, A, located, di 
rectly above the others; B, gearing-such as 
cog-wheels C-connecting the said rollers; 
means-such as a screw, D, and blocks E, held 
by guides F-for adjusting the distances be 
tween said rollers; longitudinal feeding-teeth 
G upon one roller; circular grooves H. upon 
both rollers, having sides I perpendicular to 
the axes of the rollers, and the grooves being 
located directly opposite each other; cutting 
edges J, slanting toward the imaginary line 
connecting the axes of the rollers, and to each 
located in one groove of each roller; shanks 
- 
IK for said cutting-edges, curving downward 
and then outward relatively to the lower roller, 
the thickness of the shanks being equal to the 
width of the grooves; spacing-blocks L., equal 
in thickness to the distance between any two 
grooves; a stationary frame or socket, M, for 
holding said shanks and blocks; a clamping 
screw,N, passing through said frame and press 
ing upon said blocks and shanks; a platform, 
O, opposite said cutting-edges for supporting 
any material to be cut, and an adjustable 
guide, P, upon said platform and having a 
slot, Q. 
When a piece of material (not shown, as it 
is not a part of the device) is passed over the 
platform Q and between the rollers A and B 
while rotating, its course against the knife 
edges J, it is cut into strips equal in thickness 
to the spaces between the shanks K. The 
teeth G help to propel the material. 
By loosening the screw N the cutting-edges 
or knives may be removed and readjusted to 
cut strips of almost any width by removing 
one or more knives and replacing them by 
blank shanks-i.e., by blocks like L, only of 
the same thickness as the shanks. While the 
cutting-edges are removed they may be easily 
sharpened, being nearly straight cutting-edges 
and like an ordinary plane or jackknife. 
An advantage over previous constructions 
in the manner of securing the knives in place 
is found in the fact that by simply loosening 
the screw N any one or all the knives may be 
instantly removed from the frame or socket M, 
which holds them in place, while in machines 
of this class as heretofore constructed each 
knife has been individually secured, thus mak 
ing the removal of the knives slow and tedious. 
It makes no difference particularly, nor as to 
an item of patentability, whether the lower or 
upper roller has the feeding-teeth G. It is not 
necessary that the cutting-edges should incline 
exactly to the same extent as shown in the 
drawings, nor that there should be more than 
one cutting-edge. Any kind of well-known 
gearing may be substituted for the cog-wheel C. 
Having now stated the object of the said in 
vention, having described its practical reali 
zation by reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, and having particularly ascertained the 
manner in which the same operates to accom 
plish the said object, what I claim is 
TO 
IS 
20 
25 
35 
5) 
9O 
95 
OO 
2 
36,707 
5 or socket securing all of said knives in place, 
4. The combination, with a supporting- 2d 
frame, of feed-rollers, cutting-knives, a plat 
2. The combination, with a supporting- form for supporting the material, and a guide, 
In witness whereof I have hereunto affixed 
1. In a cutting-machine, the combination, roughened, said rollers having peripheral 
with a supporting-frame, of feeding-rollers grooves, knives or cutters fitting in said 
having peripheral grooves, knives or cutters grooves, a frame or socket, M, and the screw 
fitting in said grooves, and a removable frame N, as set forth. 
substantially as set forth. 
frame, of feed - rollers having peripheral P, having a slot, Q, as described. 
grooves, knives or cutters fitting in said 
a removable frame or socket securing the of two subscribing witnesses. 
knives and blocks in place, substantially as 
Set forth. 
3. The combination, with a supporting- 
5 frame, of feeding-rollers, one only of which is 
o grooves, blocks fitting between the knives, and my seal and signed my name in the presence 25 
JOHN MATHEIS. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
E. S. ENYORT, 
CHAS. E. BUTTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361807.txt	(Model.) 
No. 36,807, 
E. C. BARTON. 
GONG BELL, 
Patented Apr. 26, 1887. 
  
 
 
d i 2 
y 
27272 esses, 
C -s /6C-240-----/ 
Heats 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIJAH C. BARTON, OF EAST HAMPTON, CONNECTICUT. 
GONG-BELL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 361,807, dated April 26, 1887. 
Application filed July 23, 1885. Serial No. 72,445. (Model.) 
55 
To all whom, it naily concern: 
Beit known that I, ELIJAH. C. BARTON, of 
East Hampton, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Gong - Bells, of 
which the following is a description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
wherein 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the base-plate of 
one of my improved bells with the gong re 
moved, one position of the hammer and strik 
ing mechanism being shown in dotted outlines. 
Fig. 2 is a side view of my improved bell, look 
ing from the left, the gong being shown in dot 
ted outline. Fig. 3 is a view of the same in 
section lengthwise through the lever - shaft. 
Fig. 4 is a front view of a door-plate, showing 
the relative arrangement of the bell-lever and 
the retaining-plate, in this case the name-plate. 
My invention relates to the class of bells 
known as 'gong-bells;' and it consists in the 
combination of the several parts making up 
the striking mechanism, and in details of one 
or more of them, as more particularly herein. 
after described. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter a 
denotes the base-plate of the bell, which is 
preferably of metal cast to shape; b, the cen 
tral standard that supports the gong c, d, the 
hammer pivotally supported on the plate, near 
one side thereof, with the tongue e, having the 
oblong loop or slote', in which works the outer 
end of the mainspring f, the inner end of it 
being fast to the base-plate or standard. This 
cam-slote' is preferably formed by the angular 
bend in the wire, as shown in the drawings; 
but it may be obviously formed in any other 
convenient manner. This loop has on its op 
positesides the cams so placed with relation to 
each other that the end of the sliding link that 
serves to connect the spring f with the tongue 
on one side and the bell-wire or crank-arm on 
the other side may be slid past each other, and 
the distance between the ends of the cams is 
sufficient to allow the end of the spring or link 
and of the bell-wire, respectively, to reach the 
end of the cam at about the same time that the 
side of the tongue-lever encounters the stopg 
or g'. In the form shown the tongue is made 
of wire, and its pivot is formed by winding the 
wire in a spiral coil, the lower end of the coil 
being formed into an oblong loop, e, that is 
bent sharply at the ends of the loop, and is also 
bent about midway of the sides, substantially 
as shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings. This 
tongue is held in place on the pivot by means 
of the bent ping, which is fast to the base 
plate and overhangs the upper end of the coil 
in the tongue. The upright part of this pin 
forms a stop, against which one side of the loop 
of the tongue strikes at one limit of the play 
of the tongue, and the other side of the loop 
strikes against the stop 9 at the opposite limit . 
of the play of the tongue. 
The crank-arm h has in one end an angular 
opening, by means of which it is so attached 
to the spindle i' that it is moved by the rota 
tion of the spindle, and the outer end of the 
crank-arm is hooked into or similarly engages 
and connects with this loop or slot, so that it 
may slide along its inner surface on the part 
not traversed by the end of the springf. 
My device is intended especially for use on 
a door, and when attached to one the bell 
lever i is preferably located just below the 
name-plate j and under the edge of it, so that 
the plate serves to hold the lever and its spin 
dle from being pulled out. This office, how 
ever, can plainly be as well served by a rose 
or collar. 
The bell is rung by pushing downward upon 
the lever i, the crank-arm being thus turned 
and the tongue pulled over to the position 
shown in dotted outline in Fig. 1, the peculiar 
shape of the loop (or of the slot, which is its 
equivalent) causing the tongue to move ab 
ruptly during the latter part of its movement 
and strike against the stop g, so as to throw 
the hammer violently against the gong and 
thus sound it. While the tongue is being thus 
pulled over by the crank-arm the leverageofthe .. 
mainspring is decreased by the slipping of its 
end along the loop (or slot) nearer to the pivot 
post; but as Soon as the pressure on the lever 
is removed the recoil of the springf pulls the 
tongueback with a constantly-increasing lever 
age and a final abrupt motion similar to that 
already made, but...in the reverse direction, the 
end of the crank-arm sliding along in the loop 
or slot in the tongue to a point nearer the 
pivot-pin. 
The link k is inserted through the flanged 
75 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
95 
O) 
2, 
. 
36,807 
25 
straighter, lighter, and shorter, the whole op 
erating equally as well as in the form shown 
in the drawings. 
I am aware that it is not new to connect the 
spring or operating-pull directly with the loop 
in gong-bells of this class, and that it is not 
new to combine or to use a stop for the tongue 
at each limit of its play in combination with 
the swinging tongue, and such I do not broadly 
- 
35 
claim. 
I claim as my improvement 
In a gong-bell, in combination with a base 
plate and sounding-shell, a Swinging hammer 
with a tongue, e, having an oblong cam slot or 
loop, e, with an angular bend in the side parts 
of the loop or slot, and the mainspring con 
nected on one side of the loop, and the bell 
pull connected on the other side of the loop, 
all substantially as described. 
ELIJAH C. BARTON. 
Witnesses: 
H. R. WILLIAMS, 
A. C. TANNER. 
O 
edge of the base-plate and looped about the 
bend of the crank-arm, so as to adapt the bell 
to be used as a pull-bell as well as a lever-bell, 
the bell pull or wire being connected to the 
outer end of the link. 
It is obvious that the several parts of my 
device are capable of change in their arrange 
- ment without departing from my invention, 
the main feature being the use of the tongue 
with the peculiar angular slot, so connected 
with the mainspring and the pull as to change 
the leverage of the power to move the tongue 
and aid in producing the abrupt termination 
of the stroke of the hammer, and where a sin 
gle stroke only is desired, instead of the double 
one of the device herein described, one side 
only of the loop or slot in combination with 
the pull and spring need be used. 
It is desirable to use a comparatively light 
spring, and this is better accomplished by in 
serting a short link between the end of the 
spring and the loop or slot in the tongue, and 
by the use of a similar short link between the 
link and crank-arm the latter may be made 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US361907.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. STORRs. 
RAILROAD CROSSING, 
No. 361,907, 
r 
Patented Apr. 26, 1887. 
NSNSS 
 
WITNESSES: ' 
gave 767, 
y 
aga 
X 
S. 
S SSS S 
2%a-424. 
e 
In VENTOR 
Voor?. ... ?orry. 
By , / 
AITORNEYs 
PATENT OFFICE. 
J OSEPH 7. 
STORRs, OF NEW LONDON, CONNECTICUT. 
RAF RCA a CROSSNG. 
SP3: 332'EC.A.E.C.T. forcing part of letters latent No. 36,907, dated April 26, 1887. 
Application filed January 13, 1887. Serial No.224,236. (No model.) 
5 
55 
To call, iv:ho), it may coice'72: 
Be it in own that i, JOSEPH. W. STORRs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Londoil, in the county of New E.ondon and 
State of Connecticut, have invented new and 
useful improvements in Railroad-Crossings, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
railroad-crossings, as set forth in the following 
specification and claims and illustrated in the 
accG2a3.nying dir2 Wings, in Wiich-u- 
Figure is a plan yievy of a railroad-cross 
iig, parts being "circved. Fig. 3 is a section 
in the plane 4: 3, Fig.1. 
Eig. 3 is a section in 
the gla?ne 3, 3}. Fig. i. 
Similar lettersiggiease corresponding parts. 
The lette's A, B indicate rails of a railway 
running in one direction, and C D indicate 
rails of a railway running in another direction, 
Rail - sections G H are shown as abutting 
against the rails D, so that the wheels of a, car 
or locomotive can pass uninterruptedly in the 
direction of arrow 1 along tine rails D and 
rail-sections G. H. The rails Care intended to 
be siniilarly connected as the rails D; but the 
rail-sections between the rails Chave been re 
moved to expose certain parts to view. 
The i'ail-sections E F, between the rails B 
in the exa Bipie shown is: the drawings, are at 
some distance from the rails B, or do not abut 
against the rails B, and said rail-sections EF 
in such example shown in the drawings do 
not obstruct passage along the rails CD. The 
rail-sections between the rails. A have been 
renoved to expose certain parts to view. 
The rail-sections C F and E F, with their 
bases UV and W X, are capable of longitudi 
nai motioi on a suitable base or support, J. 
Guides or ways I, for the bases U W and W. 
X of the rail-sections G. H. and E F, prevent 
said rail - sections from becoming displaced, 
while leaving said rail-sections free to move 
longitudinaily. 
Bolts or pins Q, passing 
through suitableslots in the rail-sections, hold 
said rail-sections together, while leaving said 
rail-sections free to move longitudinally inde 
pendently of one another. 
When a cai' or locomotive moves toward 
the grossing along the tracks A B in the di 
rection of arrow 2, the wheels of said car or 
locomotive strike against arms or projec 
tions.K., connected to the rail-sections G. Ji, so 
that, said rail-sections G are noved away 
from the rails D. The motion of the rail-sec 
tions G H imparts motion to bell-crank levers 
L. M., connected to said rail-sections. Said 
bell-crank evers move about suitable pivots 
or fulcrums, N. When the rail-sections G. H. 
are noved away from the rails D, as just 
stated, one of the bell-crank levers LM im- 6o 
parts motion to the rail-section F, and causes 
said raii-section F to move toward one of the 
rails B, while at the same time the other rail 
section, E, is moved toward the other rail B, 
as will he holy. explained. 
The rail-sections EF are connected by suit 
abie devices-such as pivots T-to an arm cr 
plate, S, swinging about a pivot, R. The mo 
tion of the rail-section Etoward one of the rails 
B imparts motion to the rail-section Etoward 
the other rail B. Said rail-sections EF can 
thus be moved to abut against the rails B, so 
that an unbroken passage will be formed along 
the rails Band rail-sections EF. 
The connection between the rail-sections G 
H and EF is such that when the rail-sections 
G H close the passage along the rails D the 
rail-sections EF rest out of the path of wheels 
moving along the rails CD, and when the rail 
sections EF close the passage along the rails 8C 
B the rail-sections GH rest out of the path of 
wheels moving along the rails A.B. Suitable 
bell-crank levers, LM and O P, impart mo 
tion to the rail-sections between the rails A 
and between the rails C. The various rail 
sections are so arranged that the fail-sections 
E F move in common with the rail-sections 
between the rails C to connect or break the 
passage along the rails CD, and that the rail 
sections G H move in common with the rail 
sections between the rails. A to break or con 
nect the passage along the rails A.B. The bell 
crank levers LM and O P swing about suit 
able fulcrums, N, and said bell-cranks are con 
nected to the rail-sections by suitable means, 
such as pivots or pins e. 
To move the rail-sections GH or EF, I can 
also employ toes Z, which are adapted to rise 
above and to move to the level of the rails A. 
B C D. Said toes Z are connected to levers or 
bell-cranks at b, moving about suitable piyots, 
c, in suitable arms, d, Figs. 2 and 3. The 
bell - cranks a b are connected by suitable 
means-such as pins f-to the rail-sections G 
75 
95 
IO) 
- 
2.5 
 
2. 5 
3. 5 
45 
50 
36,907 
jo 
75 
85 
90 
95 
O 
IS 
30 
H or E. F. As seen in Fig. 2, the motion of 
the toes Z toward the rails D will move the 
rail-sections G. H., so as to form a continuous 
passage along the rails D. Similar toes, Z, 
on the rails B, when pressed toward said rails 
B, will move the rail-sections E F to form a 
continuous passage along the rails B. 
To prevent snow, dirt, or obstructions from 
lodging in the paths of movement of the ends 
of the rail-sections, I use guards Y to cover or 
shield said paths. Said guards Y, as seen in 
the drawings, can be formed of two plates or 
shields of elastic material, such as spring 
Inetal. By making the stem of a rail-section 
(as, for example, the stem F of the rail-sec 
tion F, Fig. 3) with a tapering edge, said stem 
will force said spring-shields of the guard Y 
apart when said rail-section F moves toward 
said guard Y. When said rail-section has 
noved away from said guard Y, the spring 
shields of said guard approach closely enough 
to one another to keep off dirt, snow, and ob 
structions. 
The rail-sections between the main rails A. 
25 B C D in the example shown in the drawings 
are adapted to be operated automatically. If 
desired, a lever, or any suitable device to be 
operated by hand or by foot, or otherwise, can 
be applied in any well-known way to operate 
the rail-sections; but I prefer an automatic 
operation of said rail-sections. 
In the drawings my invention is shown as 
being applied to railways consisting of lines 
of rails placed in pairs, such as the rails AB 
or the rails CD; but said invention can be 
applied to railways consisting of only one line 
of rails each, as is the case with some kinds 
of railways-for example, elevated railways, 
where the cars are suspended from or run 
along a single line of rails. When the rail 
sections are connected by levers or arms S, as 
shown in the drawings, it is only necessary to 
have a tappet or arm, K, on one rail-section, 
as the movement of one rail-Seetion (as, -for 
example, the rail-section H) will operate the 
other rail-section; but I prefer to have a tap 
pet or arm, K, applied to each rail-section. 
By placing the working parts of the rail 
road-crossing on a smooth support-such, for 
example, as a suitable base-plate, J-said work 
ing parts will be enabled to operate easily. 
By having the rail-sections automatically 
operated by a wheel or wheels of a car or lo 
comotive the presence of an attendant to op 
erate the rail-sections is not required. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the main-line rails, 
such as D, of two rail-sections, such as GH, ar 
ranged against each other in the main-line 
rails and slidable longitudinally one against 
the other in opposite directions, so that the end 
of one section is moved toward one rail of the 
main rail-line and the opposite end of the 
65 other section is simultaneously noved toward 
the other rail of the main rail-line, substan 
tially as described. 
40 
35 
45 
- 
described. 
2. The combination, with a main rail-line, 
such as D, of two rail-sections, such as, G H, 
arranged side by side in the main-line rails 
and slidable longitudinally in opposite direc 
tions one against the other, substantially as 
3. The combination, with the main-line rails, 
such as B D, running in different directions, 
of pairs of rail-sections, each pair arranged 
side by side and inserted in the main lines, and 
each pair of sections slidable longitudijally in 
opposite directions one against the other, and 
connections between the several rail-sections, 
substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with mainline rails, as 
B D, running in different directions, of pairs 
of rail-sections inserted in the main lines, and 
each pair arranged side by side and slidablelon 
gitudinally in opposite directions one against 
the other, and the bell-crank lever LM, hay 
ing one arm attached to one section of one 
pair and the other arm attached to one sec 
tion of another pair, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with a main rail-line, 
such as D, of two rail-sections, such as GH, 
inserted into said main line, said two rail-see 
tions being movable with respect to one an 
other, and said two rail-sections being con 
nected by a lever or arm, S, substantially as 
set forth. 
6. The combination with a main rail-line, 
such as D, of two rail-sections, such as G. H., 
inserted into said main line, said two rail-sec 
tions being movable with respect to one an 
other and being connected by a leyer or arra, 
S, and one of said rail-sections being provided 
with a tappet or arm, K, substantially asset 
forth. 
. . 
with a main rail-life.. 
such as D, and two rail-sections, such as G i. 
inserted into said main line, said two rail-seg. 
tions being movable with respect to one an 
other and being connected by a lever or arm, 
S, of a toe, Z, and a connection or arm, a b, 
communicating with one of said rail-sections, 
substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination, with a main rail-line, 
such as D, and two rail-sections, such as GH, 
inserted into said main rail-line, said two rail 
sections being movable with respect to onean. 
other, of a tappet or arm, K, applied to each. 
rail-section, substantially as set forth. . 
9. The combination, with a main rail-line, 
such as D, affd two rail-sections, such as GH, i. 
inserted into said main rail-line, said two rail . 
sections being movable with respect to one an 
other, of shields or guards Y, protecting the 
E. of said rail-sections, substantially as set 
10. The combination, with a main rail-line, 
such as D, and two rail-sections, such as GH, 
inserted into said main line, said two rail-sec. 
tions being movable with respect to one an 
other, of a bolt or pin, Q, passing through a . 
slot or slots for connecting said rail-sections, 
substantially as set forth. 
ii. The combination, with a main rail-line. 
7. The combination, 
forth. 
. . 
. . 
- 
| 
loo 
iO5. 
Io 
25 
. 
25 
130 
36,907 
such as D, and two rail-sections, such as GH, 
inserted into said main line, said two rail-see 
tions being movable with respect to one an 
other, of guides or ways E for said rail-sec 
tions, substantially as set forth. 
12. The combination, with the main -line 
rails, such as ID, of two rail-sections, such as G 
H, arranged side by side in the main-line 
rails and slidable longitudinally in opposite di 
rections one against the other, and an actuat 
ing device to engage a wheel or "yheels pass 
O 
3 
ing along said main-line rails and rail-sections 
for sliding the latter longitudinally one upon 
the other, as set forth. 
my hand and seal in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set i5 
JOSEPH. W. STORRS. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
LAURENCE. W. MINER, 
CHAS. W. BARNS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362007.txt	(No Model.) 
W. HOIDGE, 
WASHING MACHINE, 
No. 362,007. 
Patented Apr. 26, 1887, 
5 - 7. 
A7 
6. 
I 
9 
Wizati 
\ . 
| 
Sass 
- 
-- a--as 
2 = S - - - er 
iT 1. 
Iri?hingir 
WITWESSES 
 
ZZezze Z.2% 
 
2 ZZ 
V 
IWWEWTOR 
(&azz Zoaze 
Attorne/1 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington .C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HODGE, OF EASTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WASHING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,007, dated April 26, 1887. 
Application filed December 30, 1886. Serial No. 223,014. (No model.) 
SO 
55 
thereby forming a sort of spring-flap. To the 
inner side of the cylinder C is arranged 3. 
lever, G, whose short end bears against the 
spring-flap F, affording a means for opening 
said spring-flap. Openings are made in the 
sides of the cylinder C, through which the 
lever is operated. 
To the side of the tub A, on which the spur 
gear E is placed, the upright H is pivoted, 
said upright being provided at its upper end 
with a lug, h, which forms a bearing for the 
spur-gear J, secured to the lugh in any suit 
able manner. The spur-gear J is provided 
with the handlej, through which the power 
is applied. The upright H is connected to 
the bearing B by the spring K, which keeps 
the spur-gears E and J constantly in gear. 
At one end of the tub and near the cylinder 
is arranged the brush L. On each side of the 
tub are secured bracketsl. From said brack 
ets l to the end of the tub the parallel guide 
strips in are placed. To each end of the brush 
L the plates M are secured, provided with the 
perforations m', which receive the guide-strips 
m, giving to the brush a uniform backward 
and forward motion. The brush L is kept in 
contact with the cylinder by means of the 
springs N, arranged in rear of the brush. 
In using my invention I open the spring 
flap by means of the lever and insert a por 
tion of the goods to be washed. Then by clos 
ing the flap the article is held fast. After 
having placed the cleansing material in the 
tub, I apply the power, thereby revolving the 
cylinder and bringing the goods or articles to 
be washed in contact with the brush at every 
revolution of the cylinder. 
It will be seen by examination of the brush 
and its spring-connections that it is self-ad 
justing, and no matter how thick the goods 
to be washed are the brush will always have 
a firm and steady pressure. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let. 
ters Patent, is 
The combination, with the tub A, of a re 
volving cylinder, C, supported on spring 
bearings BB, secured to the sides of the tub, 
a section, F, of said revolving cylinder made 
75 
8. 
90 
95 
IO 
25 
35 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM HoDGE, of 
Easton, in the county of Northampton and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Washing-Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it pertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to Washing-machines, 
and more particularly to that class known as 
the cylinder' washing-machine, the object 
being to provide a device of this character 
that will be strong and durable in its con 
struction and efficient in its operation. 
The invention further consists in the details 
of construction and combination of parts here 
inafter fully described, and pointed out in the 
claim. 
In the drawings, Figure I represents a side 
view of my invention with parts cut away to 
show the interior construction; Fig. II, a plan 
view. Figs. III and IV illustrate parts in de 
tail. 
A represents the tub. Upon each side of 
the tub A. and at opposite points are secured 
the bearings B B, which support the hollow 
revolving cylinder C. The bearings B are 
composed of the straight piece a, which is 
formed with an offset at al. The said bear 
ings are secured by staples l upon the sides of 
the tub A, which embrace the straight portion 
To the under side of the offset a? are ar 
(t. 
ranged the springs b, which bear upon the 
sides of the tub and regulate the height of the 
cylinder in relation to the tub. The bearings 
B are formed at the top with recesses c, in 
which the shaft of the cylinder rests and is 
held in place by the straps c'. 
The revolving cylinder C is provided with 
the shaft D, which projects on either side of 
the cylinder. To the end d of the said shaft 
is rigidly mounted a spur-gear, E. At any 
point on the periphery of the cylinder I make 
a section, F, of said cylinder removable and 
hinge it to the cylinder, and to the inner side 
of said section F the springs if 
are attached, 
each of which is also attached to the cylinder, 
 
362,007 
removable and provided with a lever, G, for specification in the presence of two subscrib 
opening and springs f for closing it, a brush, ling witnesses. 
L., sliding on guide-strips, said brush pro 
vided with springs N to keep it in engage 
5 ment with the cylinder C, substantially as de- 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
THEO. T. KING, 
GUS STEWAR.T. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM HODGE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362107.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 362 
107, 
 
C. R. PENFIELD. 
METALLIC BARREL. 
Patented May 3, 1887. 
at as aware-arrata as 
arta are arXaxacaweeteer awara 
easae 
 
 
-v2zzeesses 
-ea-, 46 (3.4%, 
w 
a 
az S/zzo.722 e2/s, . 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES R. PENFIELD, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
METAL C BARREL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,107, dated May 3, 1887. 
Application filed September 2, 1886. Serial No. 212,510. (No model. 
C 
- 
the requisite amount of bilge, and then are 
given a slight longitudinal bending, so as to 
strengthen them sufficiently, and also to give 
the barrel which they are to form the proper 
rotundity. At the same or another operation 
the side flanges, 1 1, are bent up to nearly 
right angles with the body of the staves. Cor 
rugations or ribs 22 are next formed near the 
ends of the blank, a short distance beyond the 
ends of the side flanges, and this space be 
tween the corrugations and the ends of the 
flanges forms the croze, as will be further on 
explained. These bending operations, though 
described seriatin, are, it will be understood, 
to be performed by one operation by some 
powerful pressing device-such, for instance, 
as a hydraulic press-suitable dies of course 
being employed to accomplish the purpose. 
The stave thus constructed, it will be seen, is 7c 
very stout, and by reason of the several arches 
and projecting flanges is able to stand any 
amount of hard usage without losing its shape. 
Now, in order to form a barrel from the 
above staves it is only necessary to set them 
up with the flanges 22 in contact with those 
of the next stave, and then to place the hoops 
on and drive them to their proper positions, 
after the manner of making ordinary wooden 
barrels. 
As the flanges at the side of the staves have 
a broad bearing upon each other, they are ef. 
fectually prevented from slipping by, and will 
therefore act in the same manner as ordinary 
wood staves. If desired, instead of having the 
flanges come close together, as shown, they 
may be bent slightly either inward or outward, 
as shown in Figs. 5 and 6-in the latter case to 
give elasticity to the barrel or to permit of 
applying some sealing material to the cracks go 
thus formed, or in the former case to permit 
of sealing or galvanizing on the inside and 
permitting the galvanizing material to fill the 
crevice formed therein. 
To all won, it half concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs R. PENFIELD, 
of Rochester, in the county of Monroe and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Metallic Barrels; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
and to the figures and letters of reference 
marked thereon. 
My invention has for its object to provide a 
packing and storing barrel constructed of 
metal that shall resemble in appearance the 
ordinary wooden barrel, but shall be much 
stronger, lighter, and altogether more desirable 
for use, whether used as a receptacle for liquids 
or as a dry or 'slack' barrel; and it consists 
of a barrel constructed of metallic staves fash 
ioned somewhat after the manner of wooden 
staves and fastened together, preferably, by 
hoops, or which may be soldered, or hooped 
and galvanized, if desired; and it further con 
sists in certain novelties of construction and 
combinations of parts, which will be herein 
after fully described, and pointed out in the 
claims at the end of this specification. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view of a bar. 
rel constructed in accordance with my inven 
tion; Fig. 2, a longitudinal and Fig. 3 a cross 
section of the same. Fig. 4 is a perspective 
view of one of the staves; Figs. 5 and 6, views 
of the joints between the edges of the staves; 
Figs. 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11, views of modifications 
of the croze and means of fastening the heads 
therein, and Fig. 12 a view of the stave-blank. 
Figs. 13, 14, and 15 are views exhibiting vari. 
ous means of strengthening the chine. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures indicate the same parts. 
A represents a barrel constructed in accord 
ance with my invention, resembling, as far as 
outside appearance is concerned, an ordinary 
wooden barrel, constructed of the staves B, 
and fastened together by means of hoops C, as taching the head may be varied in many ways, 
as may also the construction of the head. For 
The staves Bare made from a blank of sheet instance, a plain metal head without flanges 
(such as shown in Fig. 7) might be employed, 
in this case the edge of the metal disk being 
confined between the corrugation and the ends 
of the flanges 11, the ordinary hoop beingap. 
The manner of forming the croze and at- g5 
metal, preferably steel, such as shown in Fig. 
12, with the side flanges, 11, being forced by 
5O powerful pressure into the shape shown in Fig. 
4-that is, they are bent transversely to give 
25 
35 
45 ordinarily. 
55 
6o 
a. 
75 
OO 
 
362,107 
plied to the outside of the staves, pressing 
them inward and strengthening the chine, as 
shown; or, if desired, a concavo-convex head 
might be employed having a flange around it, 
as shown in Fig. 8, adapted to be confined in 
a manner similar to the device shown in Fig. 
7, but having the projecting flange turned 
down. 
In Fig. 9 I have shown the tops of the 
flanges on the staves inclined, forming the un 
der side of the croze inclined and a wooden 
head applied thereto, and this device may be 
used in connection with a head composed 
partly of wood and partly of metal, aca, the 
two side pieces of metal being provided with 
flanges if y, projecting beneath the wooden 
piece 2, as shown in Fig. 11, and they may be 
provided with upwardly or downwardly pro 
jecting flanges adapted to fit the croze. 
In Fig. 10 I have shown a double corruga 
tion or two ribs, at a, on the end of the stave, 
the groove between them constituting the 
croze, and this construction I regard as a par 
ticularly good one, because it relieves the ends 
of the longitudinal flanges 11 of all pressure 
upon them. 
Barrels constructed as above may be used 
for liquids, in which event I propose to line 
them with some form of cement in order to 
make a tight joint between the staves, or to 
galvanize them, so as to render them non-cor 
rosive, and also to fill the insides of the seams 
with the galvanizing material; or I also pro 
pose to use then for dry substances, in which 
case the barrel can beformed, in the usual man 
mer, without the use of cement or galvanizing 
material, the hoops being relied upon to fasten 
the whole together, and when thus used one 
of the flanges 1 may, if desired, be dispensed 
with, a tight joint being made by one flange 
with the plain edge of the next stave. 
The barrel as a whole is much stronger and 
lighter than the wooden barrels ordinarily in 
use, and is practically indestructible. The 
staves individually are much stronger by rea 
son of the bracing and arching, and, further. 
more, it can be used as a knockdown bar 
rel when used for dry or semi-liquid materials, 
the spring in the metal flanges serving to pre 
serve a practically - tight joint between the 
staves. There are no seams or corrugations on 
the outside of the barrel, and nothing to pre 
vent its being rolled and manipulated after 
the manner of ordinary barrels. 
The chine may be strengthened by a band of 
metal extending around the inside, if desired, 
as shown in Fig. 13, or by employing an end 
hoop with an internally-projecting flange, as 
in Fig. 14, and the end of the staves may, if 
desired, be strengthened by forming a solid 
rib in lieu of the corrugation 11 for forming 
the croze, as in Fig. 15. 
Various modifications will at once suggest 
themselves to those skilled in the art, and 
therefore I do not desire to be confined to the 
exact construction herein shown. 
I claim as new 
1. The herein-described barrel, consisting of 
the metallic staves having the corrugations at 
their ends and the flanges at the sides, and 
the hoop or hoops for securing them together, 
substantially as described. 
2. The herein-described barrel, consisting of 
the metallic staves curved so as to form the 
bilge, having the corrugations at their ends 
and the flanges at the sides, and the hoops for 
securing them together, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. The herein-described barrel-stave, con 
structed of sheet metal bent transversely SO 
as to form the bilge, and having theinwardly 
turned flange at the side and the corrugations 
or ribs at the ends, substantially as described. 
4. The herein-described barrel-stave, con 
structed of sheet metal bent transversely So 
as to form the bilge, and having the inwardly 
turned flanges on both sides thereof, and the 
corrugations or ribs at the ends, substantially 
as described. 
5. The herein - described barrel-stave, con 
structed of sheet metal bent transversely so 
as to form the bilge, having the flanges at the 
sides and the corrugations at the ends forming 
a portion of the croze, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. The herein described barrel-stave, con 
structed of sheet metal, having the flanges at 
the sides, terminating a short distance from 
the ends, and the corrugations at the ends, co 
operating with the ends of the flanges to form 
the croze, Substantially as described. 
7. The herein-described barrel, constructed 
of sheet-metal staves, bilged as shown, having 
the flanges at the sides, the corrugations at 
the ends, forming with the ends of the flanges 
the croze, the sheet-metal heads, and the hoops 
for securing the whole together, substantially 
as described. 
CHARLES R. PEN FIELD. 
Witnesses: 
DE L. CRITTENDEN, 
W. D. ARMATAGE. 
O 
35 
O 
45 
SO 
65 
75 
CO 
ro5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362207.txt	H. DECHENT. 
SHOW CASE FOR OUTLERY, 
s 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 3, 1887. 
is A. 
3S - 3 
33 
32, 
3, 
3) 
9 
8 
7 
6 
is 
49 so. 2 p. 23 2. 
y 
. 
-------------------------re-retric 
elease Il-sal, all -- w are - - - - - -s or or--r 
w 
--- 
- I 
40 g is it s: 
---- ---e. 
i 
m 
: 
f 
4 : 32 E. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, p. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 362,207. 
3. 
 
  
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 362,207. 
H. DECHENT 
SHOW CASE FOR, CUTLERY, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 3, 1887. 
d 
cl KZ 
Yes. 
INVENTOR 
Supas 
OR is 
Cl 
 
N, ETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
%- ATTORNE4. 
  
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEINRICH DECHENT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SHOW CASE FOR CUTLERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,207, dated May 3, 1887. 
Application filed August 14, 1886. Serial No. 210,879. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HEINRICHDECHENT, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Show-Cases for Cutlery, of which the fol. 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved show. 
case for cutlery, and more especially as a show 
case for pocket - knives, whereby large num 
bers of the same can be conveniently exposed 
to view either in the show window or case, and 
readily Sold at less loss of time and inconven. 
ience than in the present mode of exhibiting 
and selling pocket-cutlery. 
The invention consists of a show-case for 
pocket-cutlery, which is provided with a sam 
ple-board, on which are supported by suitable 
fastening devices a large number of different 
styles of pocket-knives or other cutlery, said 
Sample-board being supported by upright side 
standards, which, together with the sample 
board, support horizontal detachable guide. 
rods, that serve to support by means of rollers 
movable boxes having hinged front and top 
25 lids, and as many partitions as there are num 
bers on the corresponding tier or row of pocket 
knives on the sample-board. The guide-rods, 
also the cutlery-boxes, are detachable from the 
supporting-standards, and the latter capable 
of being folded on the bottom of the case, so as 
to take up less space for shipment. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents a plan view of my improved show-case 
for pocket-cutlery. Fig. 2 is a side elevation; 
Fig. 3, vertical transverse section on line aca, 
Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a rear elevation of the same; 
Fig. 5, a top view of one of the movable cut 
lery storage-boxes; and Fig. 6 is an enlarged 
cross-sectional view of my improved show 
case for cutlery, the boxes being removed. 
Fig. 7 is a front view of the frame, the side 
pieces being folded. Fig. 8 is a plan view of 
the under side of the top plate. Fig. 9 is an 
end view of the case folded. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A in the drawings represents the support 
ing-frame of my improved show-case for pock 
et-cutlery, which frame is made of a bottom or 
50 base, a, and upright side frames, bb, and a 
45 
3O 
35 
detachable top plate, d, which serves as a sam 
ple-board for a large number of knives or 
other cutlery. The top plate or sample-board, 
d, is provided at the top with a horizontal 
shelf, d, that is also provided with a number 55 
of rows, preferably four, for receiving Sam 
ples of knives or other cutlery, each row being 
preferably adapted to hold about twelve 
knives. Between the rows fastening devices 
d are provided for holding the samples of 6o 
pocket-cutlery on the plated. Each Sample 
is numbered correspondingly to the corre 
sponding compartment in the cutlery storage 
boxes B, of which there are arranged as many 
as there are rows of tiers of sample cutlery on 65 
the sample-plated. 
The storage-boxes B are divided by parti 
tions into compartments, of which there are 
preferably twelve, and each compartment is 
of a sufficient size to contain about a dozen Or to 
more pocket - knives. Each storage - box is 
provided with hinged front and top lids, which 
lids are closed by a hook and eye or other suit 
able fastening devices, and said boxes are pro 
vided at the ends with rollers, by which they 75 
are supportted on the horizontal rods C, which 
are suitably supported in upright side frames, 
b b. By means of the rollers the storage-boxes 
can be moved readily on the guide-rods C or 
pushed back thereon, according as one or the 8o 
other box is to be opened, in which cases the 
boxes above the one intended to be opened are 
preferably pushed out of the way, so as to fa 
cilitate the opening of the top lid. 
B can also be detached and placed sidewise 
on the bottom frame, a, and then the side 
frames, b, which are provided with the hinges 
e and locking devices e', can be folded down 
upon the boxes B, as shown in Figs. 7 and 9, 
and then the sample-board d, which is pref 
erably hinged to the top of the front piece of 
the base by eyes and hinge-rod, can be de 
tached and placed on the top of the boxes B 
and folded sides b, as shown in Fig. 9. 
If desired, the casing, instead of resting on 
the base, can be so placed as to rest on its back 
when the shield disat the bottom of the front. 
The rods C must then be arranged at rightan 
gles to the position they have in the drawings. ICO 
When the rods C are detached the boxes 85 
9S 
90 
362,207 
The cutlery show-case can either be placed 
into a glass-covered show-case of the ordinary 
construction or placed simply on the counter 
in the store. It can also be used as a pocket 
knife exhibitor in show-windows, in which 
case the storage-boxes are preferably detached 
and kept at a suitable place in the store. In 
either case the sale of the pocket-cutlery to 
the public as well as to the store-keeper is 
greatly facilitated, as the selection can be easily 
made and a corresponding pocket-knife be 
readily taken out of the corresponding num 
bered compartments of the storage-boxes. The 
show-case may also be adapted for other cut 
lery, such as shears, table-cutlery, &c. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. A show-case for cutlery, consisting of a 
supporting-frame, a sample-board at the front 
or top of said frame, said sample-board being 
TO 
(5 
25 
provided with fastening devices for the cut 
lery, and numbers, and storage - boxes sup 
ported in ways of the frame and provided with 
correspondingly - numbered compartments, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. A show-case for cutlery, consisting of a 
supporting-frame having hinged side stand 
ards, and a detachable front sample-board, de 
tachable guide-rods supported by said guide 
frames, and partitioned storage-boxes for the 
cutlery, provided with rollers for being guided 
on said rods, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
HEINRICH IDECHENT. " 
Witnesses: 
C. LINCOLN CUTLER, 
W. ROSS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362308.txt	(No Model.) 
J. O'BRIEN. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
COMBINED FLANGING MACHINE AND DRILL PRESS. 
No. 362,308, 
Patented May 3, 1887. 
ge 
6 
A 
Z. 
 
2Witvacoscs 
(20/indiman of: 
/ u- 
f 
A 
53 hio &ltto: victs 
311-ucvtoz 
Aca OAzew, 
  
   
 
(No Model.) 
J. O'BRIEN, 
m 
COMBINED FLANGING MACHINE AND DRILL PRESS. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 362,308, 
732, a 
-age 
 
Patented May 3, 1887. 
ses. 
. 
s s Af 
. 
. 
|Z Z 
77 
tZ, 
 
I 
T 
HT 
O 
O 
d 
7 
f 
ZD 
L 
g 
7/ 
f 
Zy 
3 
W 
EVV 
y & 
v 
at' 
d 
s|| 6 
O 
R 
A. 
 
A Z72, 4, 
28itv.cssos 
(70.0%zarnaz A. As 
724 
2 
w 
S3 his &letov victov 
341.uovtov 
Ozo OZrzer. 
W6//ho 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN OBRIEN, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
COMBINED FLANG NG-MACHINE AND DRILL-PRESS. - 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,308, dated May 3, 1887. 
Amplication filed October 1, 1886. Serial No. 216,518. (No model.) 
To all, u?ion, it navy concern. 
Beit known that I, JoHN OBRIEN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at the city 
of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have in 
vented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Combined Boiler-Flanging Machines and 
Drill-Presses, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, and in which- . 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the device, 
showing it in position as a flanging-machine. 
Fig. 2 is a detail perspective view of a boiler 
head, showing a flanged flue-hole. 
Fig. 4 is 
a similar view before the hole is flanged. Fig. 
3 is a similar view to Fig. 1, showing the de 
vice in position as a drill-press. Figs. 5 and 
6 are vertical sections through the device that 
is used on the machine when applied as a drill 
press, the shaft being shown in side view. 
Fig. 7 is a vertical section through the chuck 
arrangement and former, and also the anvil or 
support of the flanging mechanism. 
My invention relates to an improved ma 
chine intended for interchangeable use as a 
flanging-machine or a drill-press, and which 
can be readily and quickly changed from one to 
the other; and my invention consists in fea 
tures of novelty hereinafter fully described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, A 1epresents a 
frame supported by a suitable base, B, and 
having extensions A, through which passes a 
vertical shaft, C, journaled in boxes C, by 
which it is connected to the extensions A of 
the frame. This shaft is provided with a cog 
wheel, D, with which it has a feather-and 
groove connection, and into which meshes a 
pinion, D', on a driving-shaft, D", provided 
with tight and loose pulleys D, and which is 
secured to the frame A by journal-boxes D'. 
The shaft C is thus turned; but its free verti. 
cal movement, owing to its feather-and-groove 
connection with the cog-wheel D, is not inter 
fered with. 
When the device is in use as a flanging-ma 
chine, there is conflected to the shaft C a le. 
ver, E, fulcrumed on a standard, E, extend 
ing upward from the frame A, the outer end 
of the lever terminating in a handle, E. 
As a means for connecting the shaft to the 
lever, I have shown a collar, F, connected to 
- 
the end of the lever by means of a link, F, 
which slips over the upper end of the shaft and 
is held thereon by a connecting-pin, F, the 
collar being connected to the link F by a bolt, 
E. On the lower end of the shaft is secured 
a chuck, G, which receives the non-circular 
end H of a hollow clutch-collar, H', the teeth 
on the lower end of the collar meshing into 
teeth on the upper end, I', of the collar I, as 
shown in Fig. 7. The collar is screw-threaded, 
to receive a screw-threaded shaft or rod, J, 
which feeds the former downward as the shaft 
C is turned. 
The anvil or table L, on which rests the piece 
of metal M, being flanged, is made hollow, as 
shown in Fig. 7; but in this, perse, I claim no 
invention. 
Surrounding the shaft C, near the upper 
journal-box, C, is a sleeve, N. Surrounding 
this sleeve N, and having screw-threaded con 
nection there with, is a second sleeve, N, hav. 
ing an upper flange, N', bolted to the upper 
extension, A', and the upper box, C, and the 
lower end of this sleeve is preferably provided 
with a flange, N. 
On the lower end of the sleeve N is formed 
or secured a hand-wheel, N', for turning said 
sleeve, whereby it is caused to move up or 
down, according to the direction in which it is 
turned, by reason of the engagement of the 
threads on its exterior with the threads on the 
interior of the fixed sleeve N'. 
N is a collar fitting loosely on the shank C. 
below the hand-wheel and sleeve N, and pro 
vided with a binding-screw, N, and T a col 
lar similarly fitted upon said shaft above the 
sleeve, and likewise provided with a binding 
screw, P, whose end is adapted to enter a 
slight depression, C, in the shaft C. This col 
lar is of such diameter that it may rise and 
fall freely within the hollow sleeve N' when its 
binding-screw is screwed in, so as to clamp it 
to the shaft. When both of these collars are 
clamped to the shaft by their respective bind 
ing-Screws, one above and one below the sleeve 
N, as shown in Figs. 3 and 6, it is manifest 
that there can be no relative longitudinal 
movement between the parts C, N, N', and T, 
and that the shaft C or sleeve N may revolve 
freely independently of each other, the collars 
N and T moving with the shaft; hence, to 
move the shaft longitudinally in its bearings, 
- 
IO 
I5 
2. 
25 
30 
35 
SO 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
362,308 
5 
O 
either upward or downward, it is simply nec 
essary to turn the hand-wheel N'in one or the 
other direction, as may be required to pro 
duce the desired result. 
When the device is being used as a drill 
press, the collar and former H and I are re 
moved, and a tool, O, Secured in the chuck G. 
The lever Eis next disconnected from the shaft 
C by removing the pin For the bolt F. (the lat 
ter is shown removed in Fig. 3.) and the shaft 
C is fed by the hand-wheel N. 
It will now be seen that when the sleeve N. 
is turned downward in the sleeve N' by means 
of the hand - wheel N the drill will be fed 
down upon its work, the shaft C being pre 
vented from slipping through the sleeve N. as 
it is turned down by means of the collar N., 
and when the wheel is reversed and turned in 
the other direction the drill will be raised, ow 
ing to the shaft C being prevented from slip. 
ping or moving in the sleeve N by the collar T. 
- When the device is used as a flanging-ma 
chine, there is no connection between the shaft 
C and either of the sleeves, the hand-wheel N', 
or the collar N'; but the shaft works freely 
through them, and operates as though those 
- 
parts were not present. . 
It will thus be readily understood how the 
I device can be quickly changed from a machine 
suitable for flanging boiler - heads or other 
pieces of metal to a drill-press, and how, by 
simply turning outward on the screws IP and 
N", the feed can be changed to make it suitable 
for a flanging-machine. 
I claim as my invention-- . 
1. In a combined flanging-machine and drill 
press, in combination with a vertical shaft pro 
vided with means for the attachment of the 
former or feeder and mechanism by which it 
is rotated, the inner sleeve provided with a 
hand-wheel and surrounding the shaft, station 
ary outer sleeve having screw-threaded con 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
. 
. 
. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
Go 
65 
7o 
nection with the inner sleeve, and collars lo 
cated above and beneath the inner sleeve, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a combined flanging-machine and drill 
press, a vertical shaft and mechanism for ro 
tating it, in combination with an inner sleeve 
provided with a hand-wheel, a pair of collars 
located, respectively, above and below said 
sleeve, and having screws for securing them to 
the shaft, whereby the latter is held against 
longitudinal movement, in either direction inde 
pendently of the sleeve, and an outerstationary 
sleeve having screw-threaded connection with 
the inner sleeve, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. In a combined flanging-machine and drill 
press, a vertical shaft and mechanism for ro 
tating it, in combination with a lever remov 
ably connected to the shaft, a sleeve provided 
with a hand-wheel and surrounding the shaft, 
loose collars surrounding the shaft located, re 
spectively, above and below the sleeve and hav 
ing clamp-screws, and an outer stationary sleeve 
having screw-threaded connection with the in 
ner sleeve, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
4. In a combined flanging-machine and drill 
press, in combination with the vertical shaft 
and mechanism for rotating it, a lever remov 
ably connected to the upper end of the shaft, 
a sleeve surrounding the shaft and provided 
with a hand-wheel, collars located above and 
beneath said sleeve and provided with set 
screws for securing them to the shaft, and the 
outer stationary sleeve having screw-threaded 
connection with the inner sleeve, all arranged 
and operating substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
- 
JOHN O'BRIEN. 
In presence of - 
GEO. H. KNIGIIT, 
JOS. WAIILE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362408.txt	(No Model.) 
F. A. WESTBROOK & W. S. COOK. 
OAR COUPLING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 362,408, 
 
Patented May 3, 1887. 
WA------. 
7 
r- 
77-z t/7 
fo. 7(a4-6, 
74 a? 62, 4, 
(No Model.) 
No. 362,408, 
 
F. A. WESTBROOK & W. S. COOK. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
CAR COUPLING, 
z Patented May 3, 1887. 
  
 
Z2 2S2 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
y2 
NSs zSz asAs2 2x -asses 
2ZKZWFS2.. Sa 
 
& 
a (7-92-7eal-e-r- 
gizzee. 
 (2C4 
72 ( 
77-zi as-7/22 
- 36%. , 
 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK A. WESTBROOK AND WINFIELD. S. COOK, OF PORT JERVIS, N.Y. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,408, dated May 3, 1887. 
Application filed January 26, 1887. Serial No. 225,564. (No model.) 
25 
--- 
O 
views. 
To all, whon, it Tay concern: 
Be it known that we, FRANK. A. WEST 
BROOK and WINFIELD. S. Cook, of Port Jer 
vis, in the county of Orange and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and usefullm 
provements in Car-Couplings; and we do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable other's skilled in the art to which it 
pertains to make and use it, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
car-couplings; and it consists in the combina 
tion and arrangement of parts, which will be 
more fully described hereinafter, whereby an 
automatic coupling is produced. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a coupling em 
bodying our invention. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation of the same. Fig. 3 is a front view, the 
draw-head being removed. Figs. 4 and 5 are 
horizontal sections taken at right angles to 
each other. Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9 are detail 
A represents the draft-timbers, between 
which the car-coupling is placed; B, the dead 
Wood, beyond which the buffer-blocks C pro 
ject, in the usual manner. The inner sides of 
the draft-timbers A are recessed, so as to re 
ceive the rub-irons D, which are bolted in po 
sition, as shown, and also to receive the flange 
upon the front end of the box E. This box is 
flanged at both ends, and these two flanges are 
made to catch in the recesses of the draft-tim 
bers, as shown, and the box is then secured 
rigidly in position by Suitable bolts, which are 
passed horizontally through both the timbers 
and box, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
The bottom portion of this box. E is made 
slightly rounding, and through this bottom is 
formed a suitable opening to allow the lower 
end of the automatically-acting wedge to pro 
ject down therein as it takes up the wear of 
the different parts. Through each end of this 
5 box E is also formed openings, through which 
the rod F, connected to the rear end of the 
draw-head G, passes. Placed upon the rod F, 
inside of the box, are the two flanged sleeves 
HI, and between the inner ends of these two 
5o sleeves is placed the buffer-spring J. When 
the draw-head Gis in its normal position, the 
sleeves are in the position shown in Fig. 4; but 
35 
40 
when the draw-head is forced backward the 
parts assume the position shown in Fig. 5. 
The front end of the sleeve I projects through 
the front end of the box E when the draw-head 
is in its normal position; but when the head 
is forced backward its rear end strikes the 
frontend of the sleeve I, compressing the spring 
J and forcing the sleeve H backward. The 
rear end of the rod F then projects beyond the 
rear end of the box E, as shown in Fig. 5, car. 
The 
rying the nut K. and wrench L with it. 
rear. end of the rod F is made screw-threaded, 
and the nut K is screwed thereon, so as to 
regulate the tension of the spring J when the 
parts are in their normal position, as shown in 
Fig. 4. This wrench L is provided with ob 
long openings through it for the rear end of 
the rod F to pass through, and upon its inner 
side are formed the two flanges M, which catch 
over the notched flange upon the nut K, as 
shown in Figs, 2 and 5. Inside of the upper 
flange, M, is formed a tooth, stud, or projec 
tion, N, which is made to catch in one of the 
notches or recesses formed in the edge of the 
nut K, so that this projection N can be applied 
alternately to one notch after the other in the 
nut K, for the purpose of screwing it into any 
desired position. Passed over the rod F is a 
washer, O, and an automatically-acting wedge, 
P, which has an oblong opening through it, as 
shown in Fig. 5. The rear end of the spring J 
presses against the washer O, and the washer 
presses against the wedge P, as shown. The 
front end of the sleeve His recessed and made 
tapering, so as to receive the Wedge P. As 
the parts wear or the tension of the spring be 
comes relaxed the wedge gradually sinks 
downward upon the rod F, so as to keep the 
tension of the spring about the same. As the 
wedge P drops downward its end projects into 
or through the opening in the bottom of the 
box. E. 
The front end of the draw-head G is sup 
ported by the stirrup Q, which projects across 
the under side of the draft-timbers, and which 
is provided with the flanges or lugs R, which 
extend up between the timbers, and which 
stirrup has formed upon one end the support 
S for the coupling -link. This support has 
a T-shaped head or projection, upon which 
the coupling-link is hung when not in use. 
The flanges R. receive the draw-head between 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
s 
362,408 
75 
them, and hold it in position so that it can 
have no lateral play. Through the top of the 
head G is cut a slot, through which the hook 
T is passed. This hook T, having the exten 
sion or tail T formed on its rear end, has a 
recess cut in its lower edge, so as to catch over 
the link, as shown in Fig. 5, and has a sharp 
point or projection, which drops in a corre: 
sponding recess in the bottom of the head G. 
This hook T is placed upon the bolt U, which 
is square at that point where it passes through 
the hook, so that the bolt cannot be turned 
without moving the hook T and tail T corre 
spondingly. Upon one end of the bolt U is 
formed a bend or projection, W, and to the 
other end of the bolt is secured a second pro 
jection, V, which extends in the same direction 
as the other. When the front end of the hook 
T is raised upward, the rear ends of the two 
projections V and the tail T are turned down 
ward, and as the front end of the bolt T drops 
downward the projections and tail rise upward. 
Journaled in suitable bearings upon the 
draft - timbers A. are the two end wise - mov 
ing levers W, which have their inner ends 
extending into and supported by the sleeve X, 
which is provided with the cams Y. This 
sleeve X extends directly over the rear end 
portion of the head G, so that when the sleeve 
X is caused to partially revolve by either one 
of the levers W the cams Y will be depressed, 
so as to act upon the projections V and tail T 
on the end of the hook, as seen in Fig. 2, 
and thereby raise the coupling-hook T at its 
front end. Each one of the levers W is made 
angular at its inner end, where it passes into 
the sleeve X, so that when the lever is caused 
to partially rotate the sleeve X will be made 
to partially turn at the same time. Each one 
of the levers is provided with a stop-flange, Z, 
which, by striking against the side sill of the 
car, limits the distance that the lever shall be 
moved outward. The outer end of each lever 
Z is formed into a handle, as shown, so that 
the lever can be partially turned for the pur 
pose of raising the front end of the coupling 
hook whenever so desired. Secured to each 
of the side sills is the box or journal A', in 
which the lever W is journaled, and the box 
is provided with the flanges B, which extend 
upward along the outer side of the side sill, as 
shown in Fig. 6. These flanges B are sepa 
rated from each other at their centers, so as to 
form a recess to receive the bent outer end of 
the lever W, when the lever is turned partially 
around, so as to bring its handle part into a 
raised position. When it is desired to lock 
the coupling-hook T in the raised position 
shown in Fig. 2, so that the cars will not couple 
when running together, one (or both) of the le. 
vers Wis pulled endwise until its stop Zstrikes 
against the side sill of the car, when the outer 
end of the lever is turned upward in front of 
the flanges B, and then the lever is pushed 
endwise, so that its handle part will catch in 
the recess between the two flanges, and thus 
prevent the lever from turning back. While 
the lever is held in this position the cams Y 
are bearing down upon the two projections V 
and tail T", so as to keep the front end of the 
hook T in a raised position, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The coupling-head G has a lengthwise move 
ment, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5, so that when 
the cars run together the head can be forced 
backward. When it is desired to effect a coup 
ling, a link is forced into one draw-head by 
pushing it against the rounded front end of the 
hook, which rises and permits the link to pass 
under. The end of the link then rests against 
the stop-lug 4 and the under side of the hook 
at Q rests on the top of the link, always 
keeping it in a horizontal position. When 
the two draw-heads run together, the outer end 
of the link passes into the advancing draw 
head, raises the front end of the hook, and 
couples the two cars together. The levers W 
do not have to be operated to effect the coup 
ling, unless they have been previously set not 
to couple. The tail T and the projections V 
are made long enough so that when set not to 
couple, the draw-head, tail T, and projection 
V can move backward and forward under the 
calm. The hook provided with the tail and a 
single cam may be used, if so desired, thus 
dispensing entirely with the projections V, or 
the projections may be used and the tail dis 
pensed with, just as may be preferred. 
In case it is desired to apply the levers W, 
the sleeve X, the rod U, and the coupling-hook 
to draw-heads of ordinary construction, the 
hook is inserted through the slot in the head, 
the rod or bolt U is passed through the hook 
and the head, the sleeveX, provided with the 
cams, is attached to the inner ends of the levers: 
W, and the rod Fis passed through the spring, 
the automatically-acting nut, and the bearing, 
which is secured in position between the draft. 
timbers, as shown in Fig. 9. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim 
1. The combination of the draw-head, the 
draft-timbers, the boxE, the rod F, connected 
to the draw-head, the sleeves HI, spring J, the 
wedge P, washer O, and a nut placed upon the 
rear end of the rod, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the draw-head, the 
rod F, connected thereto, the box E, the nut 
K, provided with a notched flange, the wrench 
L, provided with the flanges M, and the pro 
jection N, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of the draw-head, a 
coupling-hook, the rod U, which is passed 
through the draw-head and hook, and which 
is provided with the projections V, with the 
sleeve X, provided with cams, and the levers 
for operating the sleeve, Substantially as speci 
fied. 
4. The combination of the draw-head, the 
coupling-hook, the rod U, provided with pro. 
jections V, the sleeve X, provided with the 
cams Y, and the levers W, provided with stops 
for catching against the side sills of the car, 
substantially as shown. 
5. The combination of the draw-head, the 
95 
ICC 
IOS 
I to 
is 
120 
125 
5 
O 
(5 
25. 
35 
o 
45 
so 
55 
6 o 
65 
362,408 
-- 
3 
coupling-hook, the rod U, provided with pro- provided with a cam, Y, and the operatingle 
jections, the sleeve provided with cams, the ver or levers for causing the sleeve to revolve, 
levers W, bearings A, and the flanges B, sub-substantially as shown. 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
stirrup Q, provided with the T-shaped head 
S, the flanges R., and the draw-head, substan- 
tially as specified. 
7. The combination of the draw-head, the 
Io hook T, provided with a tail, T, the sleeve X, 
6. The combination of the draft-timbers, the in presence of two witnesses. 
FRANK. A. WESTBROOK. 
WINFIELD. S. COOK. 
5 
Witnesses: 
W. E. McCoRMICK, 
FRED SCHWEIKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362509.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 362,509, 
A. W. HAZELRIGG, 
SIGNAL LANTERN, 
Patented May 10, 1887. 
 
 
 
 
 
56 As 
firi 
IITs 
raress R 
3N 
2. 
: 2A 
  
O 
E. 
Q 
- 
2 
2 
2. 
S. 
SS 
A. 
928)ievicssos 
22 26 
m 
4-1 
3-vuov to 
N. Perers, photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT W. HAZELRIGG, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
SIGNAL-LANTERN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,509, dated May 10, 1887. 
Application filed October 25, 1886. Serial No. 217,102. (No model.) 
IO 
r 
described. 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT W. HAZEL 
RIGG, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Indianapolis, in the county of Marion and 
State of Indiana, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Signal-Lanterns, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in a 
signal-lantern for which Letters Patent No. 
326,293 were granted September 15, 1885, to 
'myself and others. 
The objects of my improvements are to pro 
vide improved means for operating the screw 
slotted cylinderby means of which the colored 
glass shade is raised and lowered, and im 
proved means for preventing the shade-sup 
port from revolving, all as hereinafter fully 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
invention. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the device, partly 
broken away. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of a 
lantern-lamp having my improvements, one 
half being shown in section. 
A is the oil-reservoir. 
B is the base-plate, having a central depres 
sion, c, in which the oil-reservoir A is mounted. 
A metallic cylinder, D, having spiral grooves 
d in its periphery, is arranged to fit over and 
turn freely upon the outside of the oil-reser 
voir. A metallic ring, g, is arranged to slide 
easily over cylinder D, and is provided with 
studs h, which project inward and engage the 
spiral grooves in the cylinder. 
For the purpose of preventing the ring g 
from revolving about the oil-reservoir while 
being moved vertically by the rotation of the 
cylinder D, one or more of the studs h projects 
inward beyond the cylinder D and engages a 
vertical grooved guide, i, formed in the oil 
reservoir or secured thereto. 
Ring g supports a red or other colored tubu 
45 
55 - 
5 
lar glass shade, i, which has a flange, k, on its 
lower edge, and is held in place on the ring 
by spring-clipsi, which are secured to the ring 
and engage said flange. 
For the purpose of preventing the cylinder 
D from sliding upward, a washer, m, having 
radial arms in, which engage and rest upon the 
upper edge of the cylinder, is secured to the 
top of the oil-reservoir by the burner o. The 
red shade is raised or lowered by the revolu 
tion of the cylinder D, ring g being prevented 
from turning with the cylinder by the stud h 
engaging the grooved vertical guide i. 
In my former invention the revolution of 
the cylinder was effected by the operator tak 
ing hold of the lug which projected from the 
lower edge of the cylinder downward through 
a semicircular slot in the base. Said slot 6o 
greatly weakened the base, and to avoid this 
difficulty I secure upon the outer surface of 
cylinder D, near its lower edge, a toothed 
rack, p, which is engaged by a small gear 
wheel, r, journaled in suitable bearings in the 65 
side of the central depression, c, of the base. 
The cylinder is revolved by the operator turn 
ing the wheel r. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination, with the base and the res- 7o 
ervoir of a signal-lantern, the former formed 
with a depressed portion, c, of the spirally 
grooved cylinder fitting loosely over said res 
ervoir, so as to turn thereon, and provided 
with toothed rack p, the shade-support having 75 
inwardly-projecting studs which engage the 
grooves in the cylinder, a vertical guide for 
said support, the shade, and gear-wheel , all 
combined and arranged to co-operate in the 
manner and for the purpose specified. 
ALBERT W. HAZELRIGG. . . 
Witnesses: 
H. P. HooD, 
W. M. HOOD. 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362609.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 362,609, 
 
J. E. CLATOR. 
EXTENSIBLE LADDER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 10, 1887. 
E. 
(No Model.) 
No. 362,609, 
 
J. E. CLATOR. 
EXTENSIBLE LADDER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 10, 1887. 
N. PeFERS. Photo-lihographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN E. CLATOR, OF WHEELING, WEST VIRGINIA. 
EXTENSIBL E ADDER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,609, dated May 10, 1887. 
Application filed March 12, 1887. Serial No. 230,680. No model, 
t 
IO 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN E. CLATOR, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wheel 
ing, in the county of Ohio and State of West 
Virginia, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Extensible Ladders, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of exten 
sible ladders employed by firemen; and the 
purpose thereof is to mount such ladders upon 
a Suitable truck and so arrange them that they 
can be elevated at the required angle and 
then extended to the necessary length by the 
strength of a single operator. 
I5 . It is also a purpose of my invention to pro 
vide simple extension-braces which will draw 
out by their own gravity and automatically 
lock at any point to support weight upon the 
ladder. 
My invention also contemplates the provis 
ion of simple means whereby the extensible 
ladders may be elevated-adjusted to any angle 
between the horizontal and the perpendicular, 
and securely braced and held in such posi 
tion, the several adjustments being all made 
25. by a single operator easily and expeditiously. 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
novel features of construction and combinations 
of parts hereinafter fully set forth, and defi 
nitely pointed in the claims which follow this 
description. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is an 
elevation taken from the rear end of the truck 
in Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a central vertical section 
of the parts shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a plan 
view of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a side elevation 
showing the ladders stowed upon it in posi 
tion for transportation. 
Fig. 5 is a detail 
view, enlarged, showing the method of oper 
ating the braces. Fig. 6 is a partial elevation 
taken from the rear end of the truck. Fig. 
7 is a detail view showing the construction of 
the extensible braces. 
In the said drawings, the reference-numeral 
45 1 designates a truck supported upon four 
wheels and having a length and width suit 
able for the purpose. Upon said truck-body, 
between the ends thereof, is erected a pair of 
vertical standards, 2, braced upon each side 
so by inclined braces 3 and connected at or near 
their tops by a strong cross-piece, 4. Upon 
the forward end of the truck are uprights 5, 
35 
X 
5 
55 
65 
Strongly braced by inclined pieces 6. These 
uprights are united at the top by a cross-piece, 
7, and from the latter depend two parallel 
slightly - Curved rods, S, the lower ends of 
Which are Securely fastened to the floor of the 
truck. 
The extensible ladders 9 and 10 are of any 
suitable construction, and are connected to 
slide one upon the other in any ordinary man 
ner. The lower extremities of the first sec 
tion, 9 are provided with eyes 11, which run 
upon the parallel curved rods 8. 
Pivotally connected to the truck 1, be 
tWeen the uprights 2 and the rear end of the 
truck-body, is a brace, 12, composed of two 
parallel bars connected below by cross-braces 
13. At their upper ends these bars are pro 
vided with hooks 14, which engage with the 
side bars of the ladder 9, but slide readily 
thereon. Upon each bar is journaled aroll, 15, 
Which rests against the under edge of theside 
bar of the ladder and rolls thereon as the brace 
turns upon its pivotal support 12. 
To the cross-bar 16, which connects the up 
per ends of the parallel bars of the brace 12, 
is attached, by a cord, 17, a block, 18, and to 
the foot of the ladder-section 9 is similarly at 
tached a block, 19, the two being connected in 
the usual manner of a compound pulley by a 
rope, 20. This rope, after its final engagement 
With the block 19, is carried over a pulley, 21, 
and thence to a shaft, 22, both the latter being 
upon the truck, the first at or near the foot of 
the rods 8 and the last in rear thereof. 
When the extensible sections 9 and 10 are 
stowed, they rest upon the cross-bar 4 of the 
uprights 2, a Seat, 23, being mounted on sec 
tion 9 for this purpose, and by the gravity of 90 
the rearward-extending portions the foot of 
the ladder-section 9 is raised, the eyes 11 slid 
ing up on the rods 8 until the parts are in the 
position shown in Fig. 4, the brace 12 extend 
ing toward the rear of the truck and forming 95 
With the ladder an acute angle. 
If it is now desired to elevate the ladders, 
the operator revolves the shaft 22 by means of 
a crank, 24, Winding the cord 20 thereon and 
putting a strain upon the blocks LS and 19. Ioo 
The rope 20, passing over pulley 21, acts upon 
the block 19 in Such direction as to draw the 
foot of the ladder down upon the rods 8, and 
as the rope acts upon the brace 12 at a disad. 
85 
2 
362,609 
vantage, owing to the angle formed by the lat 
ter with the ladder, the foot of section 9 will 
be drawn down to the floor of the truck be 
fore the brace 12 begins to rise. During this 
5 movement the ladders simply turn on the 
cross-piece 4; but when the eyes 11 reach the 
foot of the rods S and the strain upon the rope 
is increased the brace 12 begins to rise, the 
rolls 15 moving on the under side of the lad 
Io der-section 9 until the required elevation is 
reached. After this adjustment is effected the 
section 10 is extended longitudinally on the sec 
tion 9 by means of a shaft, 25, on the latter, 
upon which Winds a rope, 26, passing from 
I5 said shaft over a pulley, 27, and thence to an 
eye on the lower end of section 10, being the 
usual construction of extension mechanism in 
apparatus of this class. 
Upon the rear end of the truck are stand 
ards 28, connected near the top by a cross-bar, 
29. Upon this bar is supported a frame, 30, 
composed of two parallel bars extending for 
Ward and downward and connected to the truck 
between the standards 2 and the fore end. 
25 Braces 31 give a rigid support to the frame and 
preventits longitudinal movement. Upon the 
parallel bars of the frame 30 rest bars 32, con 
nected by links 33, which permit the bars 32 
to rise somewhat off the bars 30. Upon the 
latter are supported the projecting ends or 
trunnions of a bar, 34, connecting the lower 
ends of an extensible brace composed of two 
sections, 35 and 36, the latter sliding within 
the former and between cleats 37 on both sides 
thereof. 
The upper end of the section 36 is pivotally 
connected at 3S to the upper part of section 
10 of the ladder. Section 36 of the brace is 
raised or extended by a rope, 39, extending 
from an eyebolt, 40, on the foot of said section, 
up over a pulley, 41, on the top of section 35, 
thence down, passing in rear of a pulley, 42, 
journaled between lugs 43 on the cross-bar 34, 
thence over a pulley, 44, on the end of the 
45 frame 30, and finally over a rope-shaft, 45, 
journaled in the end of the truck. 
Upon the cross-bar 34 is pivotally mounted 
a latch-lever, 46, having a detent-shoulder,47, 
which is thrown by a weight, 48, inward or 
toward the brace. This lever is normally in 
engagement with the cross-bar 49, connecting 
the foot of the section 36, as shown in dotted 
lines, Fig. 5. A lever-frame, 50, pivoted upon 
the frame 30 and having its ends connected to 
55 the bars of frame 32, serves to raise the latter 
off the bars of the frame 30 when desired. 
By operating the rope-shaft 45, the latch 
lever 46, being engaged with cross-bar 49, will 
cause the lower end of Section 35 of the brace 
to ride up the inclined frame 30, as indicated 
in Fig. 5. When the foot of said section 
reaches the upper end of the frame 30, the 
latch is cast off, and, the shaft 45 being again 
rotated, the section 36 is extended upon sec 
65 tion 35 to any required distance. Notches 51 
are formed in the rails 32, having square 
shoulders at one end and inclined faces ex 
O 
35 
tending toward the end of the frame. As the 
trunnions of the brace-section 35 move up 
ward on the frame 30 they will simply raise 
the bars 32 as they pass said notches; but upon 
lowering the brace the said bars must be raised 
by operating the lever-frame 50. A ratchet, 
52, and pawl 53 hold the shaft 45 against the 
strain of the rope 39, and similar means are 75 
provided on each of the rope-shafts employed. 
To give the extremity of the extensible lad 
der 10 all possible support, as well as to steady it 
laterally, I provide extensible side braces, 54, 
pivotally connected to frames 55 on the lad 
der-section. These braces are made in two 
parts held together by clips 56 and sliding 
upon each other. A ratchet, 57, formed on 
one part, and a pawl, 58, pivotally mounted 
on the other, permit the extension of the 85 
braces, but prevent them from shortening, the 
pawl being constantly held in engagement with 
the ratchet by a spring, 59. The lower ends, 
60, of these braces are sharpened to engage 
readily with the earth. By this invention the 
entire apparatus may be readily operated by 
a single person. 
Heretofore an extension-adder mounted on 
a truck-frame has been raised by an extensible 
brace comprising two sections and a rope and 95 
windlass to extend the sections, the upper sec 
tion being connected with the extension-lad-. 
der and the other section having a roller at 
its lower end to travel on an inclined plane by 
the action of another rope and windlass. Such, too 
therefore, I do not broadly claim. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The combination, with a truck, of exten 
sible ladder-sections resting on a raised sup- fo5 
port on said truck, rods to which the foot of 
the ladder is connected by eyes movable on said 
rods, a brace pivoted to the truck in rear of 
the ladder-support and having sliding connec 
tion with the ladder, pulleys connecting the 
end of said brace and the foot of the ladder, 
and a pulley on the truck near the foot of the 
rods guiding the ladder-foot, over which the 
rope passes to the rope-shaft, whereby the foot 
of the ladder will be first drawn down and the 
top lifted subsequently, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with the extensiblelad 
der, of the extensible brace provided with trun 
nions at its lower end, an inclined frame on 
which the trunnions move, a latch-lever lock 
ing the sections of the brace together, and an 
extending rope running from the extensible 
sections behind a pulley on the foot of the 
brace, over a pulley on the inclined frame, and 
to the rope-shaft, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the extensiblelad 
der-sections, of an extensible brace, an inclined 
frame on which the lower end of said brace 
moves, a weighted latch-leverlocking the brace. 
Sections together, rails lying upon and linked 
to the rails of the inclined frame, a lever-frame 
raising said rails, and an extending rope pass. 
ing from the brace sections behind a pulley on 
II5 
IO 
362,609 
3 
the foot thereof, over a pulley on the end of 
the inclined frame, and to the rope-shaft, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination, with a truck-frame and 
5 the extensible ladder-sections carried thereby, 
of an extensible brace for raising the ladder 
sections, and the pair of extensible brace-sec 
tions disconnected from the truck-frame, and 
the sections of each brace slidable longitudi 
nally one upon the other and arranged at op 
posite sides of the ladder, one of said sections 
having a ratchet and the other having a slot 
and a pawl, the acting end of which extends 
through the slot to engage the ratchet, sub 
5. The combination, with the truck having 
the support 4 and the cross-bar 7, of the curved 
rods 8, the ladder-sections 9 and 10, the brace 
I5 stantially as described. 
O. 
12, having rolls 15, the pulleys 18 and 19, the 
pulley 21, rope-shaft 22, and rope 20, substan- 20 
tially as described. 
6. The combination, with the ladder-sections 
9 and 10, of the inclined frame 30, the rails 32, 
linked thereon and having notches 51, the 
brace-sections 35 and 36, having trunnions at 25 
the lower end, latch-lever 47, pulley 42 on the 
foot of the brace, the pulley 44 on the frame 30, 
and the extension-rope 39, substantially as de 
scribed. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 3o 
JOHN E. CLATOR, 
Witnesses: 
GRIFFITH B. JoNES, 
J. H. STAMP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362709.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BLAIR, 
FOUNTAIN PEN. 
No. 362,709, 
Patented May 10, 1887. 
STS 
2% 
2 
8 
S. 
2. 
N- - - - 
S. 
Sr. 2 
- 
- 
   
  
F 
2/ 
 
 
 
 
2 
 
 
% 
 
  
 
F. G. M. 
WITNESSEG 
C2-2-224-cel-4- 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographor, Wishington, D.C. 
 
INVENTOR 
34. 
17.2, 
42-62-722224 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BLAIR, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FOUNTAIN-PEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,709, dated May l0, l887. 
Application filed February 21, 1 SS7. Serial No. 228,308. 
No model.) 
O 
To add violin, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN BLAIR, a British 
Subject, residing at New York, in the county 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
and Improved Fountain-Pen, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to a fountain-pen of 
Superior construction, which will permit a 
steady flow of ink to the pen, and will absorb 
the residue of ink beneath the pen when the 
pen is put away. 
The invention consists in the various fea 
tures of improvement. hereinafter more fully 
pointed out. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a Vertical longitudinal Section of a pen pro 
Vided with my improvement. Fig. 2 is a bot 
ton view of the pen-plug, partly in section. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse section on line a ac, Fig. 
Fig. 4 is a similar section on line y), Fig. 2. 
2. 
Fig. 5 is a detail edge view of the feed-tongue 
e. 
Fig. 6 is a detail side view of the absorb 
ent-strip f. 
The letter C represents the usual hollow han 
dle or reservoir containing the ink and adapted 
for the reception of the pen-plug. This plug 
consists of a corrugated tubular shell, b, into 
the rear end of which is slipped and tightly 
held a projecting soft-rubber tube, c, which 
makes a tight joint between the plug and the 
holder. In to the forward end of the corru 
gated tube b there is placed a second smaller 
corrugated tube, d, which abuts against the 
edge of the rubbertubec. The pen A is slipped 
into the tube d until it strikes the edge of tube 
c. The corrugation of tube d will serve to hold 
the pen in place without the use of the usual 
pen-holding device. In this way the entire 
lower surface of the pen may be subjected to 
25 
the action of the ink-feeding device. This de 
vice consists of a flat flexible but stiff tongue, 
e, which is laid against the lower surface of the 
pen and has a double bend, so that the point 
of the tongue bears against and follows the 
The tongue e is held 
movements of the pen. 
in place by a strip of wood or other absorbent, 
f, which is placed beneath the tongue and pro 
jects rearwardly out of the pen-plug and into 
the handle (, so as to be exposed within such 
handle. 
In use the ink passes between the pen A and 
the tongue e to the point of the pen. The Strip 
f serves, besides holding the tongue in place, 
to close the opening beneath the tongue against 
the ink. After the pen has been used, and 
when it is put into the pocket, with the point 
up, the ink above tongue e will flow upon Strip 
if and be absorbed by such strip, thus prevent 
ing sediment from re. entering the handle. At 
the same time the flow of ink can be regulated 
by said strip by moving the same forward or 
backward, as required. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of hollow handle a with 
a tubular pen-plug containing rubber tube c, 
and with the flat bent feed-tongue e, and the 
absorbent strip f, placed beneath the tongue 
and projecting into the handle, substantially 
as specified. 
2. The combination of handle ct with tube b, 
containing rubber tube c and corrugated tube 
d, and with the bent feed-tongue e and the ab 
sorbent strip f, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
a 
JOHN BLAIR. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY E. ROEDER, 
E. W. BRIESEN. 
 
"I'll 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362809.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. WOODLEY. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
FAUCET HOLE AND STOPPER, COMBINED, 
No. 362,809, 
Patented May 10, 1887. 
77 gy. Z. 
- 
f M 
 
--- 
Af 
1%go 
e G 
NYYY 
e 
s 
Z- 
97. r 
2 - 
A m 
 
 
A 
t 
 
 
 
2 N N N -Z 
SNihaliS N 
, SH 
in FMF 
2. 
H 
2 
Z727. Z 
o 
7 
1- 
22 
- 
 
 
772 verzo 7": 
 
(No Model.) 
W. J. WOODLEY. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
FAUCET HOLE AND STOPPER, COMBINED, 
No. 362,809, 
Patented May 10, 1887. 
A 9. 5. 
  
(k 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Sext 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM J. WOODILEY, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
FAUCET-HOLE AND STOPPER COMBINED. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,809, dated May 10, 1887. 
Application filed February 12, 1886. Serial No. 191,779. (No model.) 
7o 
To all, whon it nail? conce77: 
Referring to Fig. 1, the outer plate, A, is 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM J. WooDLEY, 
provided with a semicircular grooved flange, 
a resident of the city and county of San Fran. 
m, in which the adjustable movable plate c. 55 
cisco, State of California, have invented a new 
acts, and near the end of this fiange, on each 
5 and useful Improved Faucet-Hole and Stop- side, is a stop - pin, n, which controls the 
per Combined; and I hereby declare that the movement to the right or left of the movable 
following is a full, clear, and exact description plate. This plate, having the form shown in 
Fig. 1, is pivoted on a bolt, d, which extends 6) 
of the same, reference being had to the accom - 
through the outer and inner plates, A B, and 
panying drawings. 
to My invention relates to a device for pre- is held rigid by a washer and nut on each 
venting the flow and waste of fluid while stop 
end. Attached to the movable plate is a 
pering or broaching vessels containing beer, 
guard, l, for the stopper 0, which latter is 
wine, or other liquids. 
threaded. The movable plate is provided f5 
The following description fully explains the 
with two threaded holes-one, f, for the stop 
nature of my said invention and the manner 
per, and the other, i, for the faucet. Around 
in which I proceed to construct, apply, and 
the sides of the head of the stopper there is 
use the same, the accompanying drawings be 
a row of small holes, g, for the spoke of a 
ing referred to by figures and letters. 
wrench to fit in and turn the stopper. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the device, 
The action of the adjustable movable plate 
showing the outer plate with a semicircular 
c is shown in Fig. 2. The stopper () is screwed 
grooved flange, the adjustable movable plate 
into the hole f, which connects with the outer 
with holes for stopper and faucet, the guard 
end of tube b of the inner plate, whereby the 
for stopper, and the faucet. Fig. 2 is a ver 
liquid is prevented from flowing out of the 75 
tical Section through Fig. 1, showing the 
keg or barrel while it is preparing for broach 
stopper applied. Fig. 3 is a horizontal sec 
ing. The faucet, is then inserted in the hole i 
tion through Fig. 1, showing the stopper out 
in the movable plate, Fig. 3, and a turn to the 
right of the movable plate brings the end of 
and the faucet inserted in the hole in the 
movable plate. Fig. 4 is a horizontal section 
the ?aucet over the tube b, into which the fau. So 
cet is screwed, and the broaching of the vessel 
showing the inner plate left off and the man 
her of attaching the outer plate. 
Fig. 5 is a 
is completed without any ?low or waste of the 
front elevation showing another modification 
liquid. The faucet may at any time be with 
of the device. Figs. 6, 7, S, 9 are views of 
drawn from the tube and the adjustable moval 
the Same. Fig. 10 is a vertical section of the 
ble plate turned to the left against the stop- 85 
device modified for application to the side of 
pin, which action brings the stopper over the 
a barrel, showing the oblong plate with tube 
tube b, into which it is screwed, and the fall 
and the stopper and guard on the sliding plate. 
cet is then unscrewed from the hole i and re 
Fig. 11 is a front elevation of the same, show. 
anoved. 
ing the sliding plate with holes for stopper and 
faucet. 
tion to beer or wine vessels, or to vessels for 
holding any fluids; but it is especially adapted 
My device for a stopper and ?aucet-hole in 
kegs and barrels and similar vessels consists 
for application to large wine-casks, whereby 
of two circular plates, one of which is let into 
they may be readily broached without trouble 
the inner Surface of the head and the other 
or waste. I do not, however, confine myself to 95 
a device for original application to a keg, bar 
into the outer surface of the same, both plates 
forming an even surface with the head. The 
rel, or cask, as by a simple modification the 
plates are attached to the head of the keg or 
device may at any time be applied to other 
barrel by screws or bolts 0, which pass through 
vessels. For example, in Fig. 4 I show a modi 
them and are secured on the inside by wash 
fication of my device in which I omit the inner (OO 
ers and nuts. The inner plate, B, has a 
plate, B, and have the tube a for the faucet and 
threaded tube, b, which forms part of the plate 
discharge attached to and forming part of the 
and is the hole for the faucet and the discharge 
outer plate, A', the said plate being attached to 
of the fluid. 
the head of the keg or other vessel by wood 
This device is adapted for original applica- 90 
25 
35 
 
2 
362,809 
5 
O 
15 
25 
Screws q. In all other respects the construc 
tion and action in this modification are simi 
lar to the foregoing description. 
Figs. 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 show another modification 
of the device. In this form a split socket, b^, 
is employed, into which a tube or socket, b^*, 
is Screwed from the exterior of the head. Both 
these parts b and b** are formed separately 
from the plates. The remaining portions of 
the device are substantially the same in these 
figures (5 to 9) as has been already described. 
Figs. 10, 11 show the device modified for 
application at any time to the side of a barrel 
or cask. The plate R is oblong and conforms 
to the shape of the vessel, and has on each side 
a grooved flange, s, for the action of the slid 
ing plate t. Attached to this plate, which has 
holes.fi for the stopper and the faucet, are the 
stopper g and the stopper-guard l which also 
serves to move the sliding plate. The sliding 
plate moves in the parallel grooved flanges, 
and its movement is controlled by stop-pins 
in n' on the ends of the plate R. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is-- 
1. An improved attachment for casks, bar 
rels, &c., consisting of a plate secured mova 
bly upon the receptacle adjacent to its outlet 
opening and formed with two openings, a 
stopper located in one of said openings, and a 
faucet or spigot located in the other opening, 
the movements of said plate serving to bring 
the faucet and the spigot in operative position 
relative to the discharge-opening of the recep 
tacle, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
- 
2. An adjustable plate for attachment to the 
head of a keg or barrel, adapted to move in a 
semicircular grooved flange and provided 
with a threaded hole for the introduction of a 
faucet, a threaded hole for the action of a 
stopper, and a stopper-guard, substantially as 
described and set forth. 
3. The combination of circular plate A, hav 
ing a semicircular grooved flange, m, and stop 
pins n, circular plate B, having a threaded 
tube, b, pivot-bolt d for adjustable plate, and 
screws o, for attaching plates A. B. With the 
adjustable plate c, having a threaded hole, i, 
for a faucet, k, a threaded hole, f, for stopper 
g, and a stopper-guard, l, as described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of a circular plate, A", 
having a threaded tube, a, a semicircular 
grooved flange, m, stop-pins n, and a pivot 
bolt, d", for the adjustable plate, nut v, for Se 
curing said plate, and wood-screws q, for at 
taching plate A to head of keg or barrel, with 
the adjustable plate c, having a threaded hole, 
i, for a faucet, k, a threaded hole, f, for stop 
per 9, and a stopper-guard, l, as described, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination, with a swinging plate 
having two openings in it, of a plug inserted 
in one opening and a faucet inserted in the 
other, said plate being pivoted upon the head 
of a vessel in such position as to cause the 
openings in it to register with the bung-hole, 
as set forth. 
WM. J. WOODLEY. L. s. 
55 
1 
Witnesses: 
- 
m 
SADIEE. SMITH, 
ALPHONSO B. SMITH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US362909.txt	(No Model.) 
W., TUCKER. 
NUT AND BOLT LOCK, 
No. 362, 909, 
Patented May l0, 1887. 
  
   
 
2 a. 
-71 s 
 
 
23 3a, 22 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM TUCKER, OF EAST BROOKFIELD, ASSIGNOR OF ONE HALF TO 
m 
GEORGE C. PROUTY, OF CHARLTON CITY, MASSACHUSETTS. 
N UT AND BOT - O C K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 362,909, dated May 10, 1887. 
Application filed March 26, 1886. Serial No. 196,676. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all, whon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAAI TUCKER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at East 
Brookfield, in the State of Massachusetts, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Nut and Bolt Locks, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention relates to that family of nut 
and bolt locks in which the nut and bolt are 
of Ordinary external appearance and the lock 
ing device acts upon the thread of the bolt. 
The present invention consists, primarily, 
in a novel combination of parts formed by 
providing the bore of a nut, or a socket-hole 
into which a screw or bolt is to be screwed, 
with one or more frictional brake-blocks, of 
Wood or the like, so as to provide for resist 
ing the unscrewing of the nut or bolt and the 
strain involved in adequately compressing the 
frictional brake-blocks, and so that the lat 
ter are hermetically inclosed while the bolt is 
in place, so as to be unaffected by the ele 
ments, such locking device involving no pe. 
culiarity whatever in the bolt nor injury to 
its thread, while I am thus enabled to provide 
punched or drilled nuts and socket-holes from 
the largest sizes in bridge-work and heavy 
machinery to those of very minute size with 
said locking device. 
This invention consists, further, in a nut 
provided with said locking device as a new 
manufacture. 
A sheet of drawings accompanies this speci 
fication as part thereof. 
Figure 1 of the drawings represents a top 
view of a punched nut provided with a lock 
ing device according to this invention. Fig. 
2 is an elevation of a bolt provided with said 
nut, the latter in section on the line 22, Fig. 
l. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section of said nut 
before its application to a bolt, and Fig. 4 rep 
resents a vertical section of a bolt-socket pro 
vided with said locking device. 
Like letters of reference indicate correspond 
sing parts in the several figures. 
In each embodiment of this invention the 
locking device comprises one or more fric 
tional brake-blocks, a, which may be of hard 
Wood, vulcanized fiber, or any suitable re 
3O 
35 
55 
65 
These brake-blocks S 
silient solid Substance. 
are fitted to and tightly fill lune-shaped re 
cesses , which extend laterally from the bore 
b of the nut N or bolt-socket S into its Walls, 
and are closed on all other sides. The brake 
blocks extend originally into the bore to the 
depth of the thread, or thereabout, as Shown 
in Fig. 3, so as to be compressed and her 
metically inclosed by the entering bolt B. fit 
ted to said nut or socket, the thread of the 
bolt cutting or embedding itself into the inner 
faces of the brake-blocks. In turn the brake 
blocks resist backward rotation of the nut or 
bolt sufficiently to render the same 'locked' 
for all ordinary purposes without impairing 
the thread of the bolt or affecting the external 
appearance of either. 
I am aware that nuts have been provided 
with circumferential internal recesses, and also 
with recesses extending through the nut from 
top to bottom or from bore to side, such re 
cesses being filled with plastic or Soft ad 
hesive or elastic substances, including leather 
and rubber, and with fibrous packing capable 
of being drawn between the threads of the nut 
and the bolt. 
The brake-blocks of my nut 
and bolt locks are substantially rigid, and the 
recesses into which they are fitted extend out 
ward from the bore and have their greatest 
width at the bore, so as to be filled through 
the latter. Moreover, these recesses are ec 
centric, so as to preclude any turning of the 
brake-blocks with the nut or bolt without fast 
ening the brake-blocks therein otherwise than 
by the bolt itself. 
Having thus described my said improve 
ment in nut, and bolt locks, I claim as my in 
vention and desire to patent under this Speci 
fication 
1. The combination, with a bolt, of a coull 
terpart having its threaded bore provided 
with a lune-shaped lateral recess eccentlic to 
the axis of the bolt, and a brake-block, of Wood 
or the like, tightly filling such recess and con 
pressed within the same by the thread of the 
bolt, substantially as herein specified, for the 
purposes set forth. 
2. A nut for screw -bolts, provided internally 
with lune-shaped brake-blocks, of Wood of the 
8) 
90 
 
"I" st 
362,909 
like, which tightly fill eccentric lateral re- bore, so as to be tightly closed on all sides 
cesses in the walls of its threaded bore, having 
when the nut is applied to a bolt, substantially 
their greatest width at said bore, and origi 
as herein specified. 
nally project to the inner circumference of its 
thread, said brake blocks being adapted in 
form and size to be inserted through said bore, 
and Said recesses communicating only with said 
GEORGE E. FORBEs, 
W. J. TUCKER, 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM TUCKER, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363009.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 363,009, 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
W. S. SHERMAN, 
HAME TUG ATTACHMENT, 
z-Z 
Patented May 17, 1887. 
3,4- 
A. 
Niki 
   
 
 
 
Leg 
  
M 
(Oct. 
xiii 
1III it 
 
22 
" 
E. 
e 
 
s 
. 
E V 7" 
.11 
; 
23 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIS S. SHERMAN, OF MARINETTE, WISCONS IN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE THIRD 
TO AUGUST WITMEYER, OF SAME PLACE. 
HAME-TUG ATTACHMENT. 
SiRCIFICATION forming part cf Letters Patent No. 363,009, dated May 17, 1887. 
Application filed March 7, 1887. Serial No. 229,917. (No model.) 
To add, whon, it inval/ concern 
Be it known that I, WILLIS S. SFIERMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mari 
nette, in the county of Marinette, State of Wis 
S COllsil), have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements. in Hame-Tug Attachments, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
IO This invention has relation to hame-tugs; 
and my object is to provide a device of the 
above character, that is simple, cheap, and dura 
ble, that can be easily attached and detached 
from the hame, and which will have a verti 
I5 Cal Swinging movement or oscillation in con 
formity with the movement of the trace caused 
by the motions of the animal, securing a square 
pull upon the tug. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
do tion will appear in the following description, 
and the novel features of the invention will 
be particularly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation of a hame-tug constructed in accord 
25 ance with my invention, the same being con 
nected to a hame. Fig. 2 is an end elevation 
of the hame-loop. Fig. 3 is a side view, por 
tions being shown in section; and Fig. 4 is 
plan view of the blank from which the hame 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
A represents one side of a hame of any 
usual construction, in the sides of which and 
35 at Suitable distances apart are inserted a pair 
of Screw - eyes, IB, through which is adapted 
to pass the hame bolt B", which may be either 
screw - threaded in said eyes, as shown, or 
formed with a head and nut, as desired. 
C represents the tug-loop, in this instance of 
semicircular form, the ends of which are per 
forated and screw-threaded for the reception 
of a bolt, C, upon which is rotatably mounted 
a sleeve or friction-roller, C, adapted to receive 
45 the forward end of the trace, whereby wearing 
of the same upon the boit C is obviated. 
D represents a metal strap, perforated as at 
D' ID' D", and bent to form a circular aperture, 
D', and formed with shoulders D. The arms 
5O of the strap D are adapted to embrace the tug 
3O Strap is formed. 
 
55 
CO 
loop C, and upon the latter are formed oppo 
sitely-located lugs C, adapted to take into and 
form a pivotal support for the tug-loop by 
passing through the apertures D' thereof, 
whereby the vertical oscillation or Swing given 
the trace by the motion of the horse, or the 
varying position of the back and of the tug, is 
imparted to the loop and permitted by reason 
of its being pivoted to the strap D, the Wear 
accruing from said Swing coming upon the 
strap D and lugs C, instead of on the forward 
end of tug on roller C. A binding-pin, C, 
inserted through the apertures Dof the strap, 
serves to connect the ends thereof, whereby it 
is strengthened, and also serves the purpose 
of limiting the pivotal action of the two cle 
ments, the strap and the tug-loop. 
By forming the blank D with the cut-out or 
apertured center D' the strain in the com 
pleted strap comes upon the bolt B", at or near 
each end thereof, and directly at the points 
where said bolt is secured to the eyes IB. Aside 
from this advantage, it lessens the contact 
surface of the strap and bolt and renders the 
weight of the former less. 
the bending of the strap. 
- 
Should it be desired to place my attachment 
upon the face of a collar instead of the side, as 
shown, it is apparent that the tug-loop C may 
be bent to conform to the collar. 
Having thus described my invention and its 
operation, what I claim is 
1. In the hame-tug herein described, the 
combination of a semicircular or U-shaped 
tug-loop provided with lugs at opposite sides, 
with a hame-strap perforated for the recep 
tion of said lugs and for pivotal connection with 
the tug-loop, and bent to form an eye for the 
reception of a bolt suitably connected with the 
hame, substantially as specified. 
2. In the hame-tug herein described, the 
combination of a U-shaped tug-loop provided 
with opposite lugs, with a hame-strap bent to 
embrace said loop and perforated for the re 
ception of the lugs, and provided with a stop 
for limiting its pivotal movement on said tug, 
substantially as specified. 
3. The hame-strap herein described for 
hame-tugs, formed of a metal blank and with 
transverse shoulders, whereby the blank when ico 
It also facilitates 75 
90 
95 
2 
363,009 
bent forms an eye for the reception of a hame 
bolt, and perforated for attachment to and in 
combination with a tug-loop, substantially as 
specified. 
4. The combination of the tug-loop C, hav 
ing the lugs Carranged at opposite sides, with 
the strap D, perforated as at D i)' D', and 
formed with ribs D, and with the eyes B and 
bolts B, C, substantially as specified. 
5. The combination of the hame A, eyes B, 
S 
to 
and bolt B, with the strap D, perforated as at 
DDD", and the limiting and binding bolt C, 
and the tug-loop C, having lugs C, bolt C, and 
collar C, substantially as specified. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 15 
WILLIS S. SHERMAN. 
Witnesses: 
AMOS HOLGATE, 
W. J. RAICHE. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363109.txt	(No Model.) 
C, BILLUPS. 
PIOW, 
No. 363,109, 
Patented May 17, 1887. 
  
(fits 
N 7. 
. 
t 
I.WWEWTOR 6% 
as-a-...--> 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CEALY BILLUPS, OF NORFOLK, VIRGINIA. 
POW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 363,109, dated May 17, 1887. 
Application filed February 23, 1887, Serial No. 228,530. 
No model.) 
To all, u?ion, it inlay concern. 
Be it known that I, CEALY BILLUPS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Norfolk, 
county of Norfolk, State of Virginia, have in 
vented new and useful Improvements in 
Plows, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in plows; and it consists, 
substantially, in the same as constructed, and 
in such peculiar arrangement and combina 
tions of parts, as will hereinafter be more par. 
ticularly described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
The invention has for its object to so con 
struct both the mold-board and the point of 
the plow for attachment to the standard that 
their adjustability may be readily effected 
without removal of the nuts by which they are 
secured, and also by such construction to en 
able the parts to be cast and removed from 
the sand without a core. 
Further, the invention has for its object to 
provide simplified means by which the piow 
beam may be readily adjusted vertically at its 
rear end to vary the inclination of the point or 
share and be quickly secured to said adjust 
ment. Further, to so attach the handles to 
the standard that they may be conveniently 
varied or adjusted to position; and, finally, the 
invention has such additional objects in view 
as will more fully appear from the descrip 
tion hereinafter following. 
Before proceeding with the details of con 
struction and arrangement of the parts con 
tributing toward my invention, I would state 
that I am aware that the objects Sought to be 
accomplished by me are not new, broadly, as 
they have all been accomplished heretoforein 
different ways; but the purpose gf the present 
invention is in the main to so siliplify the ar 
rangement, construction, and combinations of 
these parts as that their cost is reduced to a 
minimum, and many inconveniences hereto 
fore experienced greatly overcome. . 
Referring to the accompanying sheet of 
drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation of a 
plow embodying my invention, and Fig. 2 a. 
rear view thereof. Fig. 3 is a detail Sectional 
view of a portion of the standard, beam, and 
handles, the same indicating more clearly 
the manner of adjusting the rear end of the 
beam for regulating the pitch or inclination of 
the point or share.' Fig. 4 is a similar 
view to Fig. 3, wherein a modification of the 
adjusting frame or device is illustrated. Fig. 
5 is a top or plan view of the point and mold 
board, together with a portion of the stand 
ard in section, this figure showing the manner 
of attachment of said point and mold-board 
to the standard by means of bolts and secur 
ing-nuts. Fig. 6 is a similar view to Fig. 5, 
showing the manner of attachment of the same 
devices as when the mold-board is made in two 
parts. Fig. 7 is a longitudinal Sectional view 
of the plow share or point to show its con 
struction for attachment to the standard. Fig. 
8 is a like view of the mold-board for a similar 
purpose. Fig. 9 is a perspective detail of the 
adjusting frame or device, to which the rear 
end of the plow-beam is secured in such man 
ner as to have a slight swing or play hori 
zontally; and Fig. 10 is a similar view of a 
modification of such device. Fig. 11 is a rear 
elevation of the serrated yoke either attached 
to or formed with thie standard, and in which 
the adjusting-frame for the beam works. 
Reference being had to the several parts by 
the letters marked thereon, A represents the 
plow-standard slotted at its upperforwardend, 
as at a, and having rearward of Such slotted 
portion a yoke or receiver, b, the said yoke be 
ing either formed with the standard or sepa 
rate therefrom and suitably attached, the same 
in either case to have the recess c, and pro 
vided on its rear side with the notches or Ser 
rations d. 
B represents the plow-beam, attached to the 
standard by a bolt, e, extending into the slot 
a and secured by means of a nut, as shown. 
Passing downwardly through the rear end of 
this beam is a pin or bolt, f, provided on its 
lower end with a lip, f', fitting beneath the 
projecting ledge or top of the adjustable frame 
or device C, and between the extendled corners 
gig thereof, as shown, thus allowing the neces 
sary limited play of the rear end of the beam. 
in a horizontal plane. This device C is formed 
with extended sidesh h, by which to embrace 
the two sides of the yolke b, while between 
these sides a rib, i, extends, adapted for en 
gagement with the notches or serrations of 
- 
C) 
5 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
 
363,109 
The manner of securing both the mold-board 
and point to the standard is by the screw-bolts 
q and , which pass through the slots of the 
ribs and that of such standard and are pro 
vided with tightening-nuts, as shown. It is 
evident that adjustments of either can be made 
without entire removal of the nuts, and that 
from the constructions thereof they can be 
cast without a core. In some instances I 
propose to construct the mold-board in two 
parts, (see modification, Fig. 6,) in which 
event each part will have the slotted ribs to 
corresponding or opposite sides of the stand 
ard; but the same bolt, and nut will suffice to 
hold them in place in either case. Again, also, 
when making the mold-board of a single piece 
I may employ a rib, c, on each side of the stand 
ard and formed with Said mold-board. For a 
view of the internal construction of the latter 
see Fig. 8. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a plow, the combination, with the stand 
ard having yoke d and curved slot in, and 
formed or provided on oppositesides with pro 
jections ll, of the device C, having extended 
corners and embracing and engaging the yoke, 
the beam, the pin?, passing through the beam 
and engaging the device C between its corners, 
and the handles D, passing between the pro 
jections l l and adjustably secured in the slot 
m by a bolt and nut, substantially as described. 
2. In a plow, the combination, with the stand 
ard having yoke b, constructed as described, 95 
of the device C, having extended sides and 
corners gg, and sides h h, embracing the yoke, 
the beam, and the pin f, passing through the 
beam and engaging the device C between its 
corners, substantially as described. 
3. In a plow, the combination, with the stand 
ard formed with the slot in, of the plow-point, 
recessed as at s, and formed or provided with 
rib t, having the notch it, and a bolt and nut 
securing said point to the standard, substan 
tially as shown, and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a plow, the combination, with the stand 
ard having slot in and flange v, of the point 
having recess s, and formed or provided with 
notched rib t, the mold-board also formed with 
a notched rib, and bolts and nuts for adjusta 
bly Securing said point and mold-board to the 
standard, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit. I 15 
CSSeS. 
ro5 
IIO 
OO 
CEALY BILLUPS. 
Witnesses: 
K. H. GAYLE, 
L. ROYSTER. 
6o ciding with notch n of the standard. 
2O 
5 
such yoke, thus enabling an adjustment of the 
inclination of the standard, the parts C and b 
being held together by means of a screw-bolt, 
j, passing through the holek of the former and 
5 resting in the recess c of the latter, and se 
cured by a nut, as shown. In Figs. 4 and 10 I 
have illustrated a modified form of this ad 
justing-frame C, and wherein, instead of hav 
ing the lip of the bolt fitting beneath the pro 
to jectingledge of the top, I have shown the pin 
or bolt as working within a slot of the top, 
which projects forwardly of the plow, as shown, 
instead of rearwardly thereof, as in the first 
instance. 
l l indicate projections formed on each side 
of the plow-standard at its upper rearward 
end, between which the handles Dare allowed 
a slight movement forwardly and backwardly, 
and these handles are supported in a curved 
slot, n, of the standard by means of a bolt and 
nut, as shown. It is evident that a small 
curvature of this slot will suffice for as full ad 
justment of the handles as is required in prac 
tice, it only being necessary to loosen the nut 
25 and again tighten it when the adjustment has 
been effected. The forward lower end of the 
standard is formed with a slot, n, and it is 
through this slot that the securing-bolts o and 
p for the point and mold-board are passed, 
3o the parts being secured in position by tighten 
ing the nuts q and '. 
E represents the plow share or point, which 
is recessed, as at S, for the reception of the 
point of the standard, (see Fig. 7,) and is 
formed beneath to one side of such recess with 
a rib or flange, t, having in its rear edge a 
slightly-curved notch, u, the said rib fitting 
snugly or closely against the side of the stand 
ard (its slot, registering with the slot in thereof) 
when the point is secured in place. The 
standard is formed or provided on its side be 
neath the slot with a slightly-inclined plane 
or flange, v, upon which the lower edge of the 
rib t rides on inserting the point, and b 
y 
which the latter is assisted in being held to its 
place after being secured in position. If de 
sired, a similar rib may be provided on the 
bottom of the point to fit against the opposite 
side of the standard in like manner, a single 
bolt and nut only being required in either 
CaSe. 
F represents the mold-board, which is fit 
ted to the front of the standard, with its lower 
edge conforming to and resting upon the up 
55 per edge of the point E. The said mold-board 
is also provided with a rib, c, projecting from 
its inner side, and which is provided with a 
notch, w, extending inward or upward from 
its lower edge, such notch registering or coin 
35 
O 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363209.txt	(No Model. ) 
G. H. CHESEBR, 0. 
PHOTOGRAPHIC PRINTING FRAME. 
No. 363,209. 
Patented May 17, 1887. 
 
N. Peters, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GILES H. CHESEBRO, OF TO LED O, OHIO. 
PHOTOGRAPHIC-PRINTING FRAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 363,209, dated May 17, 1887. 
- Application filed February 1, 1887. Ser'al No. 226,201. (No model.) 
- 
To aid, whon, it may concers: 
Be it known that I, GILEs H. CHESEBRO, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Toledo, 
in the county of Lucas and State of Ohio, have 
invented a new and useful Device in Photo 
graphic Printing, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
photograph printing and vignetting frames; 
and it consists in the peculiar combinations 
and the construction, arrangement, and adap 
tation of parts, all as more fully hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
s 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view of the printing-frame, showing 
the wire frame in place; and Fig. 2 is a simi 
lat view with the wire frame unhooked and 
raised for the insertion of the vignetter and 
tissue paper or other material. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, A des. 
ignates a printing-frame of any approved con 
struction, provided upon one side with looped 
hinges C, which engage one side of the quadri 
lateral wire frame B, all four sides of which 
are convex in a vertical plane, with the convex 
side toward the printing-frame. 
E E are spring-clasps secured to the oppo. 
site sides of the frame A, and are each pro 
vided with a slot, F, which engage catches or 
. 
O 
35 
lugs D on the wire frame B, thus securing the 
said frame in place when desired. The hinges 
C form loops, which permit a vertical play of 
the wire frame. The rear side, a, of the quadri 
lateral Wire frame is not in axial line with the 
hinge, but forms an offset there with, as shown. 
By means of this construction the four sides 
of the quadrilateral frame will always firmly 
clamp the vignette and tissue, and the thick 
ness of the layers does not make any difference. 
What I claim as new is 
1. The combination, with the printing-frame, 
of a quadrilateral wire frame loosely hinged 
on one side of said frame and provided with 
spring-hasps on the opposite sides, and with 
thesides bent convexly downward, all substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, with the frame A and 
the hooked hinges C, secured to one side there 
of, of the wire frame B, loosely engaging the 
So 
loops of said hinges and having its sides bent 
convexly downward, the spring-clasps E, se- ... 
cured to said fraine A, and the catches D on 
the frame Bengaging said clasps, substantially 
as described, and for the purpose specified. 
GILES H. CHESEBRO. 
45 
Witnesses: 
JNo. W. ENRIGHT, 
S.J. MILLs. 
IO 
2O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363311.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 3633ll, 
A, B, ARNOLD. 
HALTER TRIMMING, 
Patented May 17, 1887. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington. ... c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ALONZO B. ARNOLD, OF GLADBROOK, IOWA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
ROBERT C. McCORNACK, OF SAME PLACE. 
HATER on TRM M N G, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 363,311, dated May 17, 1887. 
Application filed October 1, 1886. Serial No. 215,070. (No model.) 
- 
IO 
To aid, whon, it may concern 
Beit known that I, ALONZO B. ARNOLD, a 
citizen of the United States of America, and a 
resident of Gladbrook, in the county of Tama 
and State of Iowa, have invented an Improved 
Halter, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My object is to save time and labor in mak 
ing halters, and to produce an improved halter 
at a reduced cost; and my invention consists 
in the construction of a device adapted to 
couple a piece of rope with a leather strap 
and in combining four of the couplings-two 
leather straps, one piece of rope, and a metal 
ring-as hereinafter set forth, pointed out in 
my claims, and illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of one of my 
metal coupling devices, and Fig. 2 a perspec 
tive view of my complete halter. 
c is a curved metal tube, and b a loop cast 
integral therewithin a mold. The device may 
vary in size, as required, to suit ropes and hal 
ters of different sizes and strength. V-shaped 
notches in the open ends of the curved tube 
allow the ends to be readily compressed to 
clamp fast to a rope passed through the tube. 
To construct a halter, I take a single piece of 
rope and slip thereon four of the tubular 
couplings and clamp them fast to the rope (by 
simply pressing the edges of the notched open 
ends inward upon the rope) in four different 
positions, two of them equidistant from the 
center of the rope and the two others equal 
distances from the ends of the rope, as shown 
in Fig. 2. I then pass the ends of the rope 
jointly through a metal ring and double them 
backward, and bind them together by bend 
ing around the doubled portions pieces of wire 
4o and twisting the ends of the wires together and 
pressing them into the rope, or by wrapping 
25 
35 
A 
45 
wire around them, or in any suitable way. I 
next pass a leather strap, d, having a buckle 
on its end, through the loops b of the two 
couplings nearest the center of the rope, and 
also through a metal ring on the joined ends 
of the rope, and buckle the strap. I also 
fasten a buckle to the loop b of one of the 
couplings nearest the joined ends of the rope 
by means of a piece of leather and a rivet and 
a leather strap, f, to the mating coupling, as 
clearly shown in Fig. 2. 
Complete, strong, durable, neat, and cheap 
halters are thus produced that can be readily 
fitted and applied to horses and other animals 
in a common way. 
I am aware that a curved tubular loop hav 
ing an eye on its convex side has been used 
to connect suspender-ends with a buckle in 
such a manner that the suspender-ends could 
slide back and forth in the said tube; but a 
metal coupling device consisting of a curved 
tube having an integral loop and slots in its 
ends, and adapted to be permanently fixed to 
a rope and adjustably and detachably con- 65 
nected with a leather strap, is novel and 
greatly advantageous in constructing halters. 
I claim as my invention- 
1. A metal coupling device adapted to be 
fixed to a rope and detachably connected with 7o 
a leather strap, consisting of a tube, a, having 
an integral loop, b, and slots in its ends, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
2. A halter composed of a single piece of 
rope, four metal tubes having loops project- 75 
ing from their sides, a metal ring, two leather 
straps, and two buckles, constructed as de 
scribed, and for the purposes stated. 
- 
ALONZO B. ARNOLD, 
Witnesses: 
A. O. ARMINGTON, 
G. B. EMERSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363411.txt	. 
(No Model.) 
B, C, MOLLOY, 
APPARATUS FOR AMALG AMATING GOLD. 
2 Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 363,4ll, 
Patented May 24, 1887. 
 
O 
Z 
Y. 
 
- 
- 
- a 
- - - - - 
2 
O P 22ZZZZZzzzzzzzzzzzz) 
SSgeiz:22:32,2223222222a. 
liticiali Le 
SYSSSSSSSaaaaaaaSSYaaaaan SNS 
o as st 
2. 
(No Model.) 
B. C. MOLLOY. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
APPARATUS FOR AMALG AMATING GOLD. 
No. 3634ll. 
2Witv.css.cs 
6%/ 
4eze (?ee, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Patented May 24, 1887 
R) 
2 
%zaza 
Svity c -1 to 
% 7%%/ 
, 53 
yi 
0 
littove 2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BERNARD CHARLES MOLLOY, OF LONDON, ENGLAND, 
A PPARATUS FOR A VAGA MATING GOD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 363,411, dated May 24, 1887. 
Application filed April 27, 1886. 
Serial No. 200,316. (No model.) 
5 
5 
IO 
To all, uhon, it noty concern: 
Be it known that I, BERNARD CHARLES 
MOLLOY, of 3 Elm Court Temple, in the city of 
London, England, barrister-at-law, member of 
Parliament, and a subject of the Queen of Great 
Britain, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Apparatus for Amalgamat 
ing Gold and other Precious Metals; and Ido 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. . 
My invention consists in apparatus which, 
without the application of any fixed pressure 
or force, Secures an intimate and continued 
contact between the particles of the crushed 
ore or compound containing the gold or other 
precious metals with the surface of the mer 
cury to be used for the purpose of amalgama 
tion. 
To facilitate an explanation of the invention, 
I will describe an apparatus with certain di 
mensions and of a particular form; but I do 
not confine myself to any particular form, size, 
Ol' shape. 
Figure 1 is a plan, the central spindle, with 
its pulley, being removed; Fig. 2, a vertical 
section; Fig. 3, a fragmentary detail, enlarged; 
Fig. 4, a fragmentary detail, enlarged, show. 
ing a removable stirrer; and Fig. 5 an enlarged 
view of Fig. 2, the cross-bar D and pulley being 
omitted. 
A A' A is a circular tray thirty-six inches 
inside diameter, the sides of which, AA, may 
be three inches high. This tray or vessel, it 
is evident, should be capable of containing 
fluids, and sufficiently solid in its construc 
tion. 
BB is a disk, say, thirty-five inches outside 
diameter, the sides of which may be two or 
three inches high, so as to rise higher when in 
action than the sides AA, or, where the over 
flow is arranged at a particular point, higher 
than such overflow. It has an opening in the 
center nine inches in diameter, fitted to which 
is the hopper B. B. A cross-bar, MM, is fit 
ted so as to centrally span this aperture. 
This cross-bar may be made of iron two inches 
wide, one-fourth of an inch thick, and pierced 
So in the center with a square hole, through which 
the spindle passes freely without in any way 
35 
45 
supporting the disk, but yet capable of caus 
ing the disk to revolve, 
S is a spindle, which, passing through the 
cross-bar M. M., works in the base-socket, as 55 
shown. The upper end of the spindle passes 
through and works in the fixed cross-bar D, 
and is fitted with a crown - driving wheel, E. 
The object of this spindle arrangement and 
cross-bar can be obtained by other well-known 
devices. 
OO are wire-like stirrers, which may be at 
tached to the spindle, and which, by agitation 
merely, keep the ore suspended in the Water. 
The tray, which is fitted with the tap G, con 
tains mercury an inch deep, (more or less,)the 
mercury rising to about one-half an inch from 
the top of AA or other overflow. The disk. 
B B floats upon the surface of the mercury, so 
that their respective surfaces are in contact. , 
This floating of the disk, in connection with 
its capacity to rise and fall freely, enables it to 
follow the irregular motion of the irregular 
centrifugal wave and automatically to adapt 
itself to any depth of mercury in the outer pan. 75 
It will be seen that, due to this loose joint at 
the aperture in cross-bar HH, the disk can be 
removed at any time by merely lifting up the 
spindle. 
The outside of the disk may be fitted with 
wire-like stirrers o'o', (which are not scrapers,) 
adjustable and removable, so as to prevent 
when necessary the settling of the treated ore. 
The spindle may be fitted with stirrers O O, 
to keep the ore from settling in the hopper B' S5 
B'. The lower end of the hopper is cut away, 
sloping outward to the mercury, as shown at 
ac. (See Fig. 3.) 
When the apparatus is in action, the ore (or 
ore and water) is conducted by any suitable 9o 
means into the hopper, and the Supply prop 
erly regulated. The motion given to the pull 
ley E acting upon the spindle causes the disk 
to revolve. The revolution of the disk may be 
obtained by other suitable and convenient 
means. The number of revolutions may be 
twenty (more or less) to the minute. As the 
disk revolves the ore floats under the bevela, 
and then, with the centrifugal wave, creeps 
under the disk in a thin layer, and then, by 
the centrifugal action, is worked outward on 
the surface of the mercury, while the circular 
so 
95 
O 
 
2 
363,41. 
- 
O 
action of the disk drags it laterally, so that 
the ore is worked spirally outward, rolling 
upon the surface of the mercury till it reaches 
the uncovered mercury in the open space be 
tWeen the outside of the disk and the inside 
of the tray. Here the Wet ore is prevented 
Settling or clogging, the ore being held in sus 
pension in the Water by the action of the out 
side stirrers, O'. The slimes, thus kept in a 
state of agitation by the stirrers, rise till they 
Overflow and pass away free from any parti 
cles of mercury, because, due to the agitation 
of the slimes, the specific gravity of the mer 
cury is free to carry any such particles down 
to the body of the mercury in the tray. This 
overflow may be all around or only at a given. 
point, as may be found convenient. The ore 
Will thus by the action of the disk have been 
rolled on the surface of the mercury from ten 
to fifteen seconds. 
The speed of the revolutions, and the length 
of contact may be regulated in accordance 
With the character of the ore. 
The parts A A' A and B B may be con 
structed of wood, ebonite, slate, iron, or other 
Suitable material. 
When the mercury is electro - chemically 
quickened, the apparatus is fitted with a por 
ous diaphragm, PP, as herein stated. When 
the electro-chemical arrangement is used, if 
iron or other metal is used, care must be 
taken to Secure the necessary insulation, so 
that the current shall pass from the anode 
through the electrolyte and diaphragm to the 
mercury cathode. 
In order to prevent the sickening and 
'flouring of the mercury by, (among 
other) such ores as arsenical pyrites, I pre 
serve the quickness of the mercury by the 
following means: I interpose between the bot 
ton of the tray A A' A a porous diaphragm, 
PP, fitting tightly to the sides, which leaves 
a space or compartment, H., of, say, one inch 
between the diaphragm and the bottom of the 
vessel AAA; and this space may be conven 
iently filled with sand. This porous dia 
phragm may be constructed of porous plate, 
cement, skins, non-resinous wood, and many 
other substances, and I do not limit myself to 
any particular material for the diaphragm, as 
there are many materials suitable for this pur 
pose. The compartment His fitted with car 
bon, platinum, lead, or other suitable anode, 
P', having an electrical connection. Where 
leather, for instance, is used to form the dia 
phragm, then the compartment H H may be 
the same size as and fitting to the bottom of 
what would then be the top rim of the tray A 
AA, the leather diaphragm intervening and 
the two boxes being clamped together tightly. 
The diaphragm, may conveniently be sup 
ported by a bed of sand saturated with the 
electrolyte, and so that the diaphragm itself 
in every case is saturated with the electrolyte. 
The diaphragm is covered to the depth of, say, 
one-half an inch with mercury, and which 
thus rests upon or against the diaphragm, but 
75 
so that the surface of the mercury is lower 
than the level of the overflow. This body of 
mercury has an electrical connection, which 7O 
may beformed, say, by a platinum Wire resting 
in the mercury and passing through the Sub 
stance of the side of the tray (and, of course, 
where necessary, insulated) at any convenient 
point. The mercury here will constitute the 
cathode, and is connected by means of the 
platinum wire with the zinc or negative pole 
of a voltaic battery of two or more couples in 
series, as may be deemed sufficient, or With 
the negative pole of any other electromotor 
such as a dynamo-machine-while the carbon 
or other anode in the compartment H is Con 
nected with the positive pole of the Same 
electromotor. An inclination should be given 
to the diaphragm, where necessary, to prevent 
the accumulation of oxygen on its under Sur 
face, and outlets for escape should be made 
round the higher edges, but so as not to break 
the supporting and containing surface of the 
diaphragm and tray. When the electrolyte 
is, for instance, dilute sulphuric acid or the 
solution of an alkaline sulphate, then the 
evolution of oxygen may be avoided by the 
use of the metal lead as the positive electrode 
or anode, in which case a peroxide of this 
metal is formed. In this latter case the lead 
anode may conveniently be coated with porous 
lead. 
The aqueous electrolyte contained in com 
partment H may be any which will give hy 
drogen at the mercury cathode, or hydrogen 
and a metal electropositive to hydrogen. For 
example, sulphuric acid diluted with twelve 
parts of water, to give hydrogen at the cathode; 
or a solution of caustic soda, or of a salt. Of 
soda, to give hydrogen and sodium at the 
cathode. Diaphragms of leather are unsuit 
able with alkaline solutions. When the ap 
paratus is in action-for example, with a Solu 
tion of caustic soda-I use an electro-motive 
force, which in ordinary cases need be no 
higher than four volts. 
This electro-motive 
force will cause the evolution of hydrogen at 
the cathode, (such evolved hydrogen being the 
excess of the quantity required to form hydro 
gen amalgam,) and a small proportion of the 
alkaline metal will also be separated. An 
amalgam of sodium and mercury containing 
but a small proportion of the former metal 
would when used as a positive element in con 
junction with a carbon negative and an aque 
ous electrolyte give an opposing electro-mo 
tive force of less than three volts. Such an 
amalgam could therefore, as is well under 
stood, be obtained by means of an electro-mo 
tive force of four volts. 
The electrical resistance in the circuit con 
stituted by the apparatus being very small, 
electrical power is not wasted. I do not limit 
myself to any definite electro-motive force, 
but in every case it must be greater than the 
counter electro-motive force generated within 
the apparatus itself. 
When dilute sulphuric acid is the electro 
- 
IOO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
13O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
S. 
363,4ii 
3. 
lyte, I prefer to use an anode of lead; but when 
the electrolyte is an alkaline solution this 
metal should not be employed. In such a case 
I prefer to employ carbon, platinum, or cop 
per. The apparatus being thus sofar arranged 
and the electrical connections duly made, then 
the current of electricity will pass from the 
anode in compartment H, through the aque 
ous electrolyte and diaphragm to the mercury 
Cathode, and produce the desired hydrogen 
amalgam at the expense of the hydrogen, re 
sulting from the decomposition of the electro 
lyte, the oxygen being retained or evolved at 
the anode. These conditions. being secured, 
the crushed ore and water are passed into the 
hopper and under the disk, as previously de 
scribed. A jet of water may play on the ore 
as it escapes from underneath the disk. The 
difference in the specific gravity of the ore and 
the mercury makes the separation of the ore 
and the mercury and the carrying away of the 
former easy under the conditions named. 
Y is a tube or tubes through which the elec 
trolyte may be supplied. By these means the 
particles of gold, or ore carrying gold, and all 
float-gold will be brought into intimate con 
tact with and rolled in the body of the mer 
cury, maintained in a quick or unsick 
ened condition. The ore so discharged will 
have thus passed through and been rolled over 
and against a considerable quantity of surface 
of quick mercury, by which a prolonged con 
tact between the mercury and the ore will 
have been secured. When lead is used as the 
anode and becomes oxidized, it may be reduced 
by reversing the current after the mercury has 
been withdrawn, using the same electrolyte, 
and using carbon as an anode against the per 
oxide of lead (which is to be reduced) as the 
45 
SO 
55 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention 
and in what manner the same is to be per 
formed, I declare that what I claim is 
1. In an amalgamating apparatus, the Com 
bination of a pan with a disk having a central 
hopper and means for revolving the Same, a 
mercury-containing vessel having a porous dia 
phragm separating the mercury which con 
stitutes the cathode from a carbon or other 
anode in an aqueous electrolyte, and suitable 
electrical connections, as and for the purposes 
described. 
2. In an amalgamating apparatus, the Com 
bination of a pan, a disk carrying a central 
shallow hopper for the ore, beveled at its lower 
edge, means for revolving the same, a porous 
diaphragm between the disk and the bottom 
of the pan and separating the mercury which 
constitutes the cathode from a carbon or other 
anode in an aqueous electrolyte, and suitable 
electrical connections, all as and for the pur 
poses described. 
3. In an amalgamating apparatus, the com 
bination of a pan, a disk having stirrers at its 
periphery and carrying a central shallow hop 
per for the ore, such hopper being beveled at 
its lower edge, means for revolving the same, 
a porous diaphragm between the disk and the 
bottom of the pan and separating the mer 
cury which constitutes the cathode from a 
carbon or other anode in an aqueous electro 
lyte, and suitable electrical connections, all as 
and for the purposes described. 
BERNARD CHARLES MOLLOY, 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED GEORGE BROORES, 
JOHN GOODEL. 
O 
th. 
4o cathode. 
 
III, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363511.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 363,5ll, 
W. C. DODGE, 
TOWE, RACK 
AX67. /. 
Patented May 24, 1887. 
(6) 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. DODGE, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
TOWEL-RACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 363,511, dated May 24, 1887. 
Application filed November 29, 1886. Serial No. 220, 156. 
(No model.) 
m 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. DoDGE, of 
Washington, District of Columbia, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Towel-Racks, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to that class of devices 
denominated towel-racks; and the invention 
consists, primarily, in forming the rack of a 
single piece of wire bent to the required form, 
and in certain details of construction, as here 
inafter more fully described. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a rack com 
plete with a towel attached. Figs. 2 and 3 are 
front views of the same, showing slight modifi 
cations; and Figs. 4 and 5 represent certain 
other modifications. 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
simple and efficient device that can be fur 
nished very cheaply, and can be made orna 
mental, if desired. 
To make a towel rack on my plan, I take a 
piece of wire about two and a half or three 
times as long as the width of an ordinary towel, 
and about the diameter of that ordinarily used 
to form the spiral springs for bed-bottoms, and 
bend one end of it over, so as to form an open 
hook, b, as shown in Fig. 1. Then, about an 
inch from this hook, I bend the wire to a ver 
tical position, as indicated at f, Fig. 1, and 
about two inches from the angle f, I give the 
wire one entire turn, thereby forming an eye, 
(t, as shown, and at the point which is to form 
the opposite end of the rack bend it so as to 
form another eye, a, then extend it down to 
form a vertical portion, B, corresponding to 
the part B, then make a bend, f', correspond 
ing to the bend fat the right-hand end, extend 
the wire out horizontally a distance corre 
sponding to the part which has the hook b 
formed on it, then bend it laterally at a right 
angle, and extend it across to the point of be 
ginning or hook b, all as clearly shown in Fig. 
1. By this method I form of a single piece of 
wire the two end brackets, B and B, united at 
top by the part A and the supporting-rod C, 
this latter being left sprung outward a little 
at its free end, so that when the towel T has 
been slipped thereon and the free end is 
placed in the hook b it will be held secure 
therein, and the towel be held properly in 
place and a little distance from the wall to 
7o 
55 
which the rack is secured, the eyes a serving 
the purpose of holes for the screws or nails that 
are to hold the rack in place, as shown. 
Instead of forming the right angle f in the 
brackets B and B, the lower bar or rod, c, may 
be thrown out from the wall the required dis 
tance by curving the posts B and B, as shown 
in Fig. 4, either plan being adopted, as the one 
or the other may be found most convenient in 
manufacture. So, too, the eyes a and a, in 
stead of being formed by bending the wire 
around in a circle, as shown in Fig. 1, may be 
made in the form of a loop, as represented in 
Fig. 5, thereby avoiding the crossing of the wire 
upon itself, as is done in Fig. 1; or the eyes 
may be dispensed with and the wire be simply 
bent at a right angle at the corners, as repre 
sented in Fig. 3, a nail or screw at these cor 
ners serving to hold it in place; or the eyes 
may be formed at other points on bar A. 
If it be desired to make the article more or 
namental, it may be secured by clips or cor 
ner-pieces E, as shown in Fig. 2, these being 75 
preferably formed of sheet metal, and stamped 
with a groove in them to receive the wire at 
the corners, as shown, so that when fastened 
to the wall, as represented, they will hold the 
rack securely in place. 
Instead of two clips, a single one may be 
used by placing it at the center, as shown in 
Fig. 3. When two are used, as represented 
in Fig. 2, that portion of the bar. A shown in 
dotted lines may be cut out or omitted, as the 85 
clips E will hold the brackets securely in po 
sition, the same as the part A does in Fig. 1, 
where the clips are not used. When a single 
clip E is used, as shown in Fig. 3, the bar A. 
may be continued entirely across, as in Fig. 1, go 
if it be designed for use with an endless towel; 
but if designed to be used for supporting the 
other style of towel ordinarily used in bed 
rooms, then the hook b may be dispensed with, 
and the bar C and the brackets B and B, with 95 
the bar A, may all be made of a single piece, 
as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, the part A in Fig. 
3 having its ends terminating at the center of 
the clip E, as shown in dotted lines, or simply 
extend under the clip far enough to be held se 
curely in place. 
It is obvious that the supporting-rod C, in 
stead of being made integral with the bracket 
B', as represented in Fig. 1, may be made of a 
8O 
IOO 
IC 
25 
35 
45 
363,5ll 
O 
separate piece and be hinged or joined thereto 
by an eye joint and operate the same. So, 
too, instead of being made integral with the 
two brackets B and B, as represented in Figs. 
2 and 3, it may be a separate piece, and be held 
in eyes formed on the projecting ends of the 
brackets; but that would require more labor 
and material, aud hence I prefer to make the 
entire rack, aside from the clips, of a single 
piece of wire. 
The clips E and the whole rack may be made 
of brass, and may be gilded or plated, thus 
rendering it highly ornamental. The form 
shown in Fig. 1 will be made more especially 
for kitchen use and the like, and it will ordi 
narily be made of wire bronzed, and without 
any clips, thus producing a very cheap and yet 
efficient article for the purpose designed, while 
the style shown in Figs. 2 and 3 may be made 
of more expensive material and highly orna 
mental, as the clip or clips may be made in a 
great variety of designs and of various sizes, 
thus adapting the rack to be used wherever 
and under all the varying conditions in which 
such an article can be required. It can be 
made by machinery, and can be turned out 
rapidly and in large quantities and at a very 
small cost. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A towel-rack composed of wire bent to 
form the two end brackets, B and B, and the 
towel-supporting rod C, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. In combination with a towel-rack Com 
posed of wire bent to form the end brackets, B 
B, and the towel-supporting rod C, one or more 
metallic clips, E, substantially as shown and 
described. 
35 
W. C. DODGE. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER. S. DODGE, 
WILLIAM W. DODGE. 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363612.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 363,612, 
FG. A. 
 
M. DES CARDS, 
CARDING MACHINE, 
Patented May 24, 1887. 
F. G3 
Witnesses 
2%-4.9%e 
84.26% 
N. rerers, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
--------- 
MICHEL DESCARDS, OF PONT-SAINT-PIERRE, EURE, FRANCE. 
CARDING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 363,612, dated May 24, l887. 
Application filed January 15, 1887. Seial No.224,443. (No model.) Patelted in France April 6, 1886, No. 175,901. 
55 
To all tufton, it nail? conce77. 
Be it known that I, MICHEL DESCARDS, a 
citizen of France, residing at Pont-Saint 
Pierre, in the Department of Eure, France, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Carding-Machines, (which has been patented 
to me in France by Letters Patent No. 175,291, 
dated April 6, 1886,) of which the following is 
a specification. 
The principal object of the invention is to 
enable the large carding-cylinder to be per 
fectly cleaned automatically or by mechanical 
appliances. The automatic cleaning of the 
large cylinders of cotton-carding machines has 
heretofore been practiced; but its efficiency 
compared with hand-cleaning has heretofore 
been so small that its use has been abandoned 
in large part, the newest and most approved 
carding-machines, or many of them, being not 
provided with automatic cleaning apparatus. 
It is beyond doubt that a carding-machine 
in which the clothing of the large cylinder is 
well cleaned gives a product much superior 
to that from one working with an imperfectly 
cleaned cylinder, and there is, therefore, a real 
advantage in employing automatic cleaning 
which can be caused to act several times a 
minute, whereas by hand the cleaning can be 
performed practically only about four to six 
times a day, provided, of course, that the me 
chanical operation removes the film perfectly 
to the bottom of the card-teeth as can be done 
by hand. This condition, however, has not 
been obtained heretofore, because, first, in 
ordinary card - clothing the teeth are very 
closely set; second, the angular form of the 
teeth is an obstacle to the removal of the fila 
ments which are engaged by their feet or lower 
parts, and, third, the teeth, in consequence of 
the parallelism of the sides of the iron or steel 
wire from which they are made, whether this 
be cylindrical, triangular, or rectangular, have 
the same cross-section from top to bottom. 
Under these conditions the cotton or other text 
ile material gets into the clothing, packs 
there, and can only be removed by a hand-op 
erated cleaning - card whose teeth penetrate 
into spaces between the teeth and withdraw the 
packed material. I overcome these difficul 
ties by replacing upon the large cylinder and 
the licker-in' the ordinary card - clothing 
with needles, whose straight conical form per 
mits the complete removal of the packed ma 
terial by the cleaning-cylinder as often as it is 
desired, and with a thoroughness which leaves 
nothing to be desired. The quality and regul 
larity of the carded fleece are not at all im 
paired. With these needle-cards placed upon 
the said cylinder, the men for cleaning the 
large cylinder are dispensed with, since no 
manual attention is necessary. 
For insuring the greatest thoroughness in 
the result, the carding-needles in the large 
cylinder should be spaced more widely than 
the teeth of ordinary card-clothing; their pro 
jection beyond the cylinder should be only 
about four to five millimeters; they should be 
simply inclined, and should be without hook 
or bend, and they should taper considerably, 
that form assisting marvelously in the removal 
of the packed material without its being nec 
essary for the teeth of the cleaner-roll to enter 
I would remark, also, 
between the needles. 
that in the clothing composed of needles the 
teeth of the latter are not even visible With a 
strong lens, whereas in the ordinary clothing 
the so-called points are easily seen with the 
naked eye, and are in fact elliptical or rectan 
gular Surfaces, according as the iron wire is 
cylindrical or flat. This last consideration 
shows that the carding action of the needles is 
infinitely superior to that of ordinary card 
All the Organs of the carding-machine may 
be provided with needles instead of the ordi 
nary card-clothing. In this case no sharpen 
ing will be necessary. Far from becoming 
dull by work, the needles preserve their fine 
points, and even become sharpened. The life 
of the needles will therefore be considerable, 
compared to that of the ordinary clothing. 
The results which are or may be obtained 
by the present invention are, first, a carding 
constantly improving; second, a large produc. 
tion, since it is no longer necessary to stop the 
cards to clean the teeth at the bottom; third, 
economy in the attendance, the carding being 
effected entirely by automatic or mechanical 
means; fourth, with equal quality in the pro 
duct, twice the quantity; fifth, with equality 
teeth. 
. 
gO 
95 
O 
35 
SO 
 
g 
363,612 
90 
85 
of production, a product superior to that made 
by ordinary cards. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification, one mode in which 
5 the invention is or may be applied is repre 
Sented. 
Figures 1 and 2 are side view and plan, re 
spectively, of so much of a cotton-carding mas 
chime as is needful to explain the practical 
1c carrying out of the invention. Fig. 3 contains 
detail views (in different planes) of the needle 
clothing. Fig. 4 is a view in elevation of a 
mechanical belt-shipper employed in the mal 
chine for putting the cleaner-roll into and out 
15 of action; and Fig. 5 is a partial view in eleva 
tion, on an enlarged scale, of one of the nee 
dles, designed to show the conical or tapering 
form thereof; but it will be understood that the 
precise degree of taper is immaterial. 
The same letters indicate like parts in all 
the figures. 
The machine shown comprises the frame A, 
the lap. delivery rollers a' a', the grooved 
feeder B, the trough C, in which the feeder 
25 turns, the licker-in D, the large cylinder E, the 
top cards or flats, E, the doffer F, the doffer 
comb G, the drawing-rolls H, the Worker I, 
the clearer I for the worker I, the clearer-roll 
L for the large cylinder, the cylinder L for 
carding the cotton on the roll L and for re 
turning it to the circulation by its contact 
with the large cylinder E, the belt-shipper M, 
and operating mechanism. 
The licker-in D and the large cylinder E 
are provided each with rows of needles I, Fig. 
3, in place of the ordinary card-clothing. The 
needles are secured at equal distances apart 
in bars 2, (which bars may be of lead with the 
needles soldered therein,) So as to form a se 
ries of combs, which are Secured in grooves 
prepared for them in the peripheries of the 
cylinders. Each comb being placed in the 
appropriate groove is cemented therein by 
plaster or other similar material, 3, so that the 
needles project obliquely therefrom, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 3. These bars can be placed 
close together, or not so close, and may be made 
fine, or not so fine, according to the material to 
be carded. The teeth on the cleaner-roll L. 
are set with the needles on the main cylinder 
that is, the teeth as they pass the needles are 
projecting in the same direction as the said 
needles. The cleaner-roll revolves with the 
main cylinder, as indicated by the arrows. 
The top cards or flats, E, are or may be 
cleaned automatically by the mechanism in 
actual use. The cleaning-roll I is or may be 
provided with ordinary card-clothing. 
The large cylinder E is provided at one end 
with the pulley J, fast on the shaft thereof, 
and also with a loose pulley alongside the same, 
and at the opposite end With the two fast pull 
leys J and R. The machine is driven by a 
belt on pulley J. A. CrOSsed belt, 5, on pulley 
65 R communicates motion to the licker - in D 
through the pulley R. Acrossed belt, 6, on 
pulley J communicates motion to the cone K, 
through the pulley K and the shaft on which 
said pulley and cone are fastened, and a belt, 
7, between the cone K and the cone K", com- 7o 
municates motion to the cleaner. roll I, the 
cone K" being fast on the shaft of said roll. 
The two cones are set in opposite directions, 
so that the cleaner-roll L is driven at a greater 
or less speed, according to the position of the 75 
belt 7. When the belt is at the larger end of 
the cone K and small end of the cone K", the 
rotation of the roll L should be Such that the 
surface speed is at least about one-fifth greater 
than that of the large cylinder, so as to remove 8o 
the packed material from the large cylinder. 
When, however, the belt is shifted to the op 
posite ends of the cones, the surface speed of 
the roll L is smaller than that of the large 
cylinder E, and the latter takes up the material 
which has not already been removed by the 
cylinder L. The beltis shipped from one end 
of the cones to the other by means of the belt 
shipper M, which is pivoted to the bracket N', 
and is actuated or controlled by the cam N, 
the said cam being fast on a shaft, O', jour 
naled in the bracket N', and driven by the 
bevel-gears OO from the shaft of the doffer F. 
The stationary cross-piece Q should be 
placed as near as possible to the worker I, in 95 
order to render more perfect the division of 
the filaments. 
The worker I and its clearer I are or may 
be driven by the mechanism in ordinary use 
for driving the like parts. The roll II, as 
shown, is driven from the shaft of the worker 
I by a crossed belt, 8, on pulley L". 
The cylinders, D, E, L, and Lought to be 
incased or provided with means of any ordinary 
or suitable kind at the lower part to prevent 
dispersion of the down or dust. 
The operation is easy to understand. The 
lap or roll of cotton a is fed to the licker-in D, 
which draws the fiber into the machine. This 
fiber is WOrked by the various cards and is 
mostly taken off by the doffer. The part not 
removed is cleaned from the needle-teeth by 
the cleaner roll L, when the belt is properly 
shifted to give it a greater speed. The mate 
rial which it removes is carded by the cylinder 
II, which delivers it again to the large cylinder. 
The machine could be simplified by dispensing 
with the cylinder L, the cleaning rolli, being 
placed near the licker-in D, so that the latter 
Would remove the material therefrom. The 
flats are Working-cards as well as the worker I. 
I do not restrict myself to any particular 
materials, proportions, and dimensions, nor 
to any particular arrangement of accessory 
parts, nor to other details, nor to any particular 
form ol System of cards in carding machines 
to Which the invention may be applicable in 
Whole or in part; but, on the contrary, I ex 
pressly reserve to myself the invention and the 
Several parts thereof in all its forms and for all 
the uses to which it may be adapted. 
It may not be amiss also to observe that dur 
ing the cleaning of the main cylinder the feed 
ing of the material to the licker-in could be 
45 
SO 
S5 
OO 
IOS 
EO 
I I5 
I 25 
- 3S 
 
363,612 
 
3 
arrested in any ordinary or suitable way, and 
also that the invention is not restricted to op 
erating mechanism whereby the cleaner is 
brought into action periodically by mechani 
cal means-such as the camN and gearing O O", 
for example. 
I claim as my invention or discovery 
1. The combination, with the series of work 
ing-cards and the doffer, of the large cylinder 
covered by said series of working-cards and 
provided with the obliquely-projecting needles 
in place of the ordinary card-clothing, the 
cleaner-roll having its teeth set with the said 
needles, and the mechanism whereby during the 
cleaning operation the said cleaner-roll is re 
volved with the main cylinder at a greater 
speed, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the series of work 
O 
ing-cards and the doffer, of the licker-in and 
the main cylinder, each provided with the ob 
liquely-projecting needles in place of the ordi 
nary card-clothing, and the said cylinder being 
covered by said series of working-cards, the 
cleaner-roll having its teeth set with the nee 
dles on the main cylinder, and the mechanism 
whereby during the cleaning operation the said 
cleaner-roll is revolved with the main cylinder 
at a greater speed, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib- 3o 
ing witnesses. 
25 
MICHEL DESCARDS. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. HANCELARD MEREAU, 
EMILE LUTZ. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363712.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
W. W. WILLS. 
HUSK CUTTING ATTACHMENT FOR CORN SHELLERs. 
No. 363,712. 
Patented May 24, 1887. 
 
4'illiam (WWills. 
 
VEWTOE 
Attorney 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
W. W. WILLS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
HUSK CUTTING ATTACHMENT FOR CORN SHELLERS, 
No. 363,712. 
22S 
Patented May 24, 1887. 
 
, 
, 
- 
2-/ 
William YY Wills 
IWWEWTOF 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM WALLACE WILLS, OF PALMYRA, VIRGINIA. 
HUSK - C UTING ATTACHMENT FOR CORN - SHELLERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 363,712, dated May 24, 1887. 
Application filed October 21, 1886, Serial No. 216,851. (No model.) 
- 
To all, whon, it invay concern: 
these sprocket-wheels being connected to each 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM WALLACE 
other by an endless chain, D, the alternate 
links of which are provided with projecting 
WILLS, a citizen of the United States of Amer 
ica, residing at Palmyra, in the county of Flu 
ears did, which serve as supports for the knives 55 
vanna, and State of Virginia, have invented 
or cutters E, which are secured removably 
certain new and useful Improvements in Husk 
thereto by means of bolts e. 
Cutting Attachments for Corn-Shellers; and I 
The cutters, as shown in Fig. 2, may bear 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
ranged on alternate opposite sides of the chain, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
or each link may be provided with a pair of 6o 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
cutters, as shown in Fig. 3; and the links to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
which the cutters are attached are provided 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
with inclined sides, as shown at f, so that the 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference 
cutters will be located at an angle with the 
marked thereon, which form a part of this speci 
chain. 
Instead of employing circular cutters, I may 
fication. 
My invention relates to certain new and use 
use a blade, as shown in Fig. 5, and, if desir 
ful improvements in husking devices for corn 
able, these blades or circular cutters may have 
shellers, the object of my invention being to 
serrated edges. 
provide a simple, cheap, and effective means 
One of the shafts to which one of the sprocket 
for separating or cutting the husk which in 
wheels is attached extends outwardly, and is 
provided with a beveled cog-wheel, which en 
closes the ear of corn, so that it will be readily 
removed by the shelling devices; and to this 
gages with a cog-wheel attached to a shaft 
end my invention consists in an attachment 
which has on its opposite end a larger beveled 
which is applicable to corn-shellers, the same 
cog-wheel, which is driven from any suitable 
being adapted to be placed in the feeding 
shaft of the corn-sheller, the gearing being so 
arranged as to drive the chain carrying the 
spout thereof, so that the husks will be cut into 
small pieces, said attachment consisting, es 
cutters at a high rate of speed. 
sentially, of an endless chain lhaving knives or 
The frame a, which supports the endless 
chain and sprocket-wheels, is provided ad 
cutters attached thereto, as will be hereinafter 
fully set forth, and pointed out in the claims. 
jacent to the opening a, through which the ear 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
of corn passes, with partition-boards F, which 
trate my invention, Figure 1 is a sectional 
will prevent the ear of corn being carried to 
ward either of the sprocket-wheels. 
view of a corn-sheller, showing my invention 
applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
tional view of my improvement, showing the 
When the ear of corn, with the husk thereon, is 
same detached from a corn-sheller. Fig. 3 
placed in the spout ct, which is inclined, the 
is a plan view of a portion of the endless chain, 
cutters, which are carried by the endless chain, 
showing circular cutters attached thereto. 
which revolves at a high rate of speed, come 
Fig. 4 is a side view of one of the cutters de 
in contact with the husk on the ear of corn so go. 
tached, and Fig. 5 is a side view of a cutter 
as to Sever or cut the same, so that the husks 
or modification of my invention. 
will be removed therefrom when the ear of . 
A refers to the corn-sheller, which may be 
corn reaches the shelling-disks, which not only 
of ordinary construction, said sheller being 
remove the grains therefrom, but also the 
preferably provided with feed and picker 
husk. The husk, which is cut in small pieces, 95 
wheels A A', or other shelling apparatus, a 
falling upon the screen G, is carried to a suitable 
reciprocating screen, G, and a blast-fan, H. 
receptacle or falls upon the ground, while the 
Within the spout a of the corn-sheller, so 
corn passes through said screen and falls into 
as to occupy a position transversely with the 
a suitable trough, 9, and while falling is sub- 
same, is located my improved husking device, 
jected to a blast, which will remove any par- Ioo 
which consists, essentially, of shafts BB, upon ticles of husk therefrom which may pass 
which are rigidly secured sprocket-wheels CC, through the screen. The husks, when removed, 
75 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
363,712 
are in a condition to be fed to stock as fodder, 
and at the same operation of husking the shell 
ing is performed. 
By employing an endless chain with cutters. 
thereon instead of rigid cutters, and placing 
the same at an angle, several decided advan 
tages are gained, as by allowing the chain a 
certain amount of play the cutters will only 
sever the husk and will not injure the grain, 
as the ear of corn merely rests upon the lower 
cutters, while the weight of the upper portion 
of the chain is sufficient to sever the husk and 
is not sufficient to injure the grain, and by 
placing the cutters at an angle the ear of corn 
is assisted in its downward movement toward 
the shelling mechanism. 
The attachment hereinbefore described may 
be applied to corn-shellers having a series of 
spouts, and in such a case it is only necessary 
to use a single chain with cutters attached 
thereto. 
By providing the circular disks and attach 
ing them rigidly to the chain, when the cut 
ting-edges become dulled, said disk may be 
turned so as to present a new edge to the husk. 
I claim 
1. In a device for husking or cutting the 
husks of ears of corn, the combination of the 
sprocket-wheels, an endless chain carrying 
cutters, and a frame provided with an opening 
through which the ear of corn is passed, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, substantially as de 
scribed, of a corn sheller provided with a feed 
spout, and a husk-cutting mechanism consist 
ing of sprocket-wheels arranged on either side 
of the feed-spout, and an endless chain pro 
vided with cutters adapted to travel across 
the feed-spout. 
3. The combination, with a corn-sheller pro- 4o 
vided with a feed-spout, of a transverse frame 
intersecting said feed - spout and provided 
with an opening and partitions on either side 
of said opening, and a husk-cutting mechan 
ism supported in the transverse frame, the 45 
same consisting of a suitably - driven chain 
having cutters attached thereto, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination, substantially as de 
scribed, of a corn-sheller provided with a feed 5O 
openirg, and a husk-cutting device consisting 
of sprocket-wheels, an endless chain mounted 
upon said wheels to travel across the feed-open 
ing, and cutters secured to the chain at an an 
gle to the line of motion. 
5. In a husk-cutting device for corn-shellers, 
the combination of a suitable supporting-frame 
having sprocket-wheels journaled therein, and 
having an opening, through which the ear of 
corn is passed, and an endless chain provided 6o 
with cutters which project within the inner 
surface of the chain, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination, with the husk-cutting de 
vice, consisting, essentially, of sprocket-wheels 65 
and a chain provided with cutters, of a shell 
ing mechanism, a screen for separating the 
corn from the husks, and a blast-fan, Substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 7o 
WILLIAM WALLACE WILLS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES K. GALT, 
W. O. THOMAS. 
15 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363812.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 363,812, 
S. A. DREWRY. 
ABDOMINAL SUPPORTER, 
Patented May 31, 1887. 
 
f.26azzaze 
4% - (-)-r 
44/4evy 
asy 72 fiz 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
w 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SARAH A. DREWRY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ABDOMINAL SUPPORTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 363,812, dated May 31, 1887. 
Application filed March 29, 1887. Serial No.232,830. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SARAH A. DREWRY, of 
New York, county of New York, and State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Abdominal Supporters, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, making part of this speci 
fication. 
My invention has for its object to prevent 
the narrow or comparatively narrow supporter 
from turning, in consequence of the weight of 
the abdomen, upon the great trochanter as a 
fulcrum, and thus riding up out of its proper 
position. By means of the pockets into which 
the hip-bones fit the supporter is held from 
riding up at the sides, and by means of long 
projecting narrow points on the back the whole 
structure is prevented from rotating about the 
hip-bone pockets. 
My invention also has for its object to so 
Support a scrotal bag as to give the firmest 
pOSSible support with the minimum amount of 
irritation and friction to the parts; and it con 
sists in connecting the pouch or bag by a se 
ries of supports to the two body parts of the 
abdominal supporter, in front and in rear, by 
tapes attached to the lower part of the web 
bing forming the hip gores. This webbing, 
being somewhat elastic, affords a yielding sup 
port, and the long points or upward exten 
Sions of the body of the supporter in the rear 
prevent undue strain upon the upper part of 
the scrotum-bag, which would be exerted if 
the lower front part of the abdominal sup 
porter Were to ride up or get out of place in a 
manner common to other supporters. 
This invention may be regarded as an im 
provement upon the supporter covered by my 
former patent, No. 239,943, and the construc 
tion shown, by which the objects recited are 
attained, will be understood from the follow 
ing description with reference to the draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a rear elevation of my improved 
abdominal supporter; and Fig. 2 is a front ele 
vation of the same, showing the scrotal sup 
porter attached. 
AA indicate the two parts constituting the 
body of the abdominal supporter, made of stout 
and comparatively-unyielding cloth, and ex 
tended upward at the rear in two points, F 
and F. 
B is a strip of elastic material or fabric, 
which unites in the rear the two body portions 
proper and allows for expansion in the girth, 
due to certain movements or positions of the 
wearer. Other vertical strips of elastic ma 
terial may be inserted at any other desired 
points to give a certain amount of elasticity, 
when desired. 
The front edges of the supporter are secured 
either by straps a and buckles a, as shown, or 
lacings may be used, if preferred. 
Portions are cut away from the sides of the 
supporter, giving the lower edges an arched 
form, to conform generally to the contour of 
the great trochanter, over which said edge is 
intended to be fitted. Within the opening 
thus formed is secured a gore, D', which thus 
forms a pocket, in which the hip-bone rests, 
and about which, as a sort of fulcrum, the 
whole supporter may rotate vertically to a 
Small extent. 
The gores D'D' may each be of a single piece 
of woven fabric, the lower parts at D having 
an elasting filling, while the upper parts may 
be inelastic and gathered in or given greater 
or less additional fullness, as the particular 
shape of the wearer may require. This gore 
may, however, be made entirely of inelastic 
material, with its upper part gathered. 
It will be seen that the pockets effectually 
prevent the supporter from slipping down or 
riding up. 
With a supporter of this construction the 
shoulder straps and perineal straps can both 
be omitted. Where the gore is of inelastic 
material, strips of inelastic material similar to 
B should be inserted back of the gores D'D', 
and between said gores and the ends of the 
supporter, and they may be inserted at the 
points, if required. 
With this construction of supporter not only 
is the structure kept in place under all neces 
sary movements of the body, but there is a 
great freedom from undue pressure on the 
great trochanter or the ovarian region and 
room for the spreading of the abdomen later 
ally, supported, as it is, from below upward 
and inward. Without the novel extensions 
upward at FF it sometimes may happen that 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
SO 
 
2 
363,812 
the weight of an unusually large abdomen, or 
in case of advanced pregnancy, the supporter 
may turn too much upon the fulcrum of the 
great trochanter and the abdomen be left in 
sufficiently supported. The extensions FF 
effectually prevent this undue turning and the 
resulting sagging in front. 
By actual experience it has been found that 
no ordinary form of belt or support will effect 
ually carry a scrotum bag or support yielding 
just as much and no more than is needed for 
comfort. 
The scrotal bag is made of two pieces, ff, 
and is Supported at its upper end adjustably 
by being buttoned over one of a series of but 
tons, f', secured to the lower front part of the 
body proper of the abdominal supporter. To 
the lower edge of the scrotal bag are attached 
two tapes, k h, which at their other ends are 
furnished with metal loops to be secured upon 
buttons k", attached to the lower parts of the 
hip-gores, as indicated. 
I am aware of V-shaped openings over the 
hips in Supporters and of similar openings filled 
with a piece of elastic, which, however, is not 
held full or gathered at its upper part to form 
a pocket for the hip-bone, as in my invention. 
I am aware, also, that many supporters are ex 
tended upward in the rear, some extending 
even to the shoulder-blades; but these exten 
sions are not combined, as in my supporter, 
Having described my invention, what I claim 40 
I claim nothing new in the construction of 35 
with the hip-bone pockets, and hence are for s 
a different purpose and operated in an en 
tirely different manner. 
the scrotal bag proper, as that may be of any 
preferred form in use. My invention consists 
in giving the bag an entirely new form of 
yielding Support. 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination,in a comparatively-nar 
row abdominal supporter or belt, of a hip 
pocket gore made full at its upper arching 45 
edge, and the two upturned rear extensions, 
FF, as and for the purposes described. 
2. The combination, with an abdominal Sup 
porter formed with gathered hip gores and ex 
tensions FF, of the scrotal bag ff, attached 
in front to a series of buttons upon the front 
main portion of the supporter and in rear by 
tapes to buttons secured on the lower portions 
of the hip-gores, all substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 28th day of March, A. D. 1887. 
So 
55 
. 
SARAH A. EDREWRY. 
Witnesses: 
CURTIs B. PERRY, 
IRENE COLLIER. 
5 
IO 
25 
3O. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US363912.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 363,912. 
G. H. REGAR & O. T. MOOCK. 
CONDUIT FOR TRACTION RAILWAYS, 
Patente 
O 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
HHHHH 
H HHHHH 
H) s 
H 
Eli H 
t 
HHHHH 
HHHHHHN 
FTTT if H 
H HHE 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. REGAR AND OTTO T. MOOCK, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, 
ASSIGNORS OF ONE-THIRD TO JOHN B. MAYER, OF SAME PLACE. 
CONDUIT FOR TRACTION RAILWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 363,912, dated May 31, 1887. 
Application filed March 11, 1887. Serial No. 230,557. (No model.) 
. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGE H. REGAR 
and OTTO T. MOOCK, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Philadelphia, in the county 
of Philadelphia, and State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Conduits for Traction Railways, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to conduits for trac 
tion railways, and especially for iron conduits 
that are laid in the northern and northwest 
ern parts of the country and exposed to a 
freezing climate. 
The object of our invention is to so con 
struct that part of the conduit known as the 
''grip-slot' that it will not be affected by the 
expansion and contraction of the Soil between 
the rails in freezing weather. 
Our improvement consists in constructing 
the slot-rails independent from the conduit 
proper and anchoring the slot-bars to the 
track or sleepers, as is illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a top view of a traction-railway 
conduit constructed according to our inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the same 
in line with the center of the grip-slot. Fig. 
3 is a vertical cross-section of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 
shows three views of the brace rods and keys. 
Fig. 5 shows enlarged views of the supporting 
legs for supporting the grip-slot bars and con 
Ilecting them to the conduit by a joint. Fig. 
6 shows two views of the brackets by which 
the supporting-legs are connected to the con 
duit. Fig. 7 is a cross-section showing a modi 
fication in the form of the grip-slot rails or 
bars. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
A represents the side of a sheet-iron conduit, 
which conduit is constructed in the usual man 
ner, with the exception that we make the open 
ing at the top formed by the top flanges, a a, 
wider apart than in the old manner of con 
struction, and under these flanges we place the 
grip-slot rails BB. To these rails, at proper 
distance apart, we fasten by a rivet (see Fig. 5) 
the supporting-legs DD. The lower end of 
these legs are jointed by a pin to brackets FF, 
out the several views. 
IO 
25 
45 
65 . 
55 
which brackets are riveted to the sides of the 5o 
conduit, as shown in Fig. 2. 
From each of the supporting-legs D is an 
iron brace-rod, E. On one end of this rod is 
cut a screw-thread for a nut. In the other end 
is punched a slot having rounded ends, as 
shown in Fig. 4. The end of the brace-rod E 
on which the thread is cut is made to pass 
through the wooden sleeper on which theiron 
track is laid. The end in which is formed the 
key-slot is passed through a part of the leg D, 
and on each side of the rib of the leg is driven 
in the slot a split key, which split is opened 
after being driven in, as shown in Fig. 5. The 
lower end of the leg D is connected by a small 
stud-pin, G, to the bracket F. The stud-pin 
G is kept in its place by a split pin, as shown 
in Fig. 5. It will be seen in Figs. 1 and 3 that 
the brace-rods E lie between the paving 
blocks, the spaces under and above the rods 
being filled with gravel. 
As above described, and shown by the draw 
ings, the slot-bars B B are connected by brace. 
rods EE to the track-sleepers, and when the 
slot is once adjusted by the screws on the rods 
the width of the slot will not be affected by the 75 
freezing soil expanding on eaeh side of the 
conduit, because the top plates, a a, may slide 
Over the top without forcing the slot-bars B B 
closer together. 
Fig. 7 shows a modification in the forms of 
plates at a. and bars. B B. 
It is obvious that our improvement is ap 
plicable to conduits for traction railways oper 
ated by a moving cable or by an electric cable. 
We do not confine ourselves to any particular 
mode of construction; but 
Having as above described our invention, 85 
We claim- 
In a traction-railway conduit, the combina 
tion of independent slot-bars B B, support. 9o 
ing-legs D D, brackets FF, stay-rods EE, and 
rail-sleepers SS, all substantially as shown, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
- 
GEORGE H. REGAR. 
OTTO. T. MOOCK. 
- 
Witnesses: 
JoHN SHINN, 
JOHN DOLMAN, Jr. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364013.txt	(No Model.) 
NO, 364,013, 
W. HALKYARD, 
BUTTON FASTENER, 
- 
- 
Patented May 31, 1887. 
al 
9: 
Fig. 4. 
- - - - - - 
A3 
. 
7 
11 
age; 
/9 
Fig. 5 
WINESSE5. 
7224, 24% 
ca. 44. A 
InVET2: . 
72, a 4-4- 
24%.1%; 
 
o 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HALKYARD, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
BUTTON-FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 364,013, dated May 31, 1887. 
Application filed March 19, 1886. Serial No. 195,788. (No model.) 
SO 
55. 
To aid whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM HALRYARD, 
of the city and county of Providence, and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Button-Fast 
eners, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to the devices known 
as button-fasteners,' which are designed to 
fasten and maintain the button securely in op 
erative position. 
The objects of my invention are to simplify 
and cheapen and to render more durable and 
efficient this class of devices. 
To the above purposes my invention con 
sists in the certain new and useful construc 
tion and arrangement of the several parts of 
the device, as hereinafter fully described and 
claimed, 
The views are all enlarged in the accompa 
nying drawings, in which Figure 1 represents 
a top view of a blank of my fastener as cut 
from sheet metal before being struck up. 
Fig. 2 represents a top view of my fastener, 
the securing-clips being struck up into oper 
ative positions. Fig. 3 represents a side view. 
of Fig. 2 inverted. Fig. 4 represents a side per 
spective of my fastener, with a button (shown 
in broken lines) fastened therein by means of 
the securing-clips engaging with the button 
shank. Fig. 5 represents a modified form of 
my fastener in blank. Fig. 6 represents the 
same as Fig. 5, but with the securing - clip 
struck up. 
In the said drawings like numbers designate 
like parts throughout. 
Referring to the drawings, 7 designates the 
base-plate, which is a flat disk. Near the 
center of the base-plate 7 is punched or cut 
out the four-sided diamond-shaped frame 8, 
having the arms or clips 11, and which is in 
tegral with said base - plate at the point 9, 
From the side of the frame 8, opposite the 
point 9, extends the flat tongue 10, which is 
integral with the frame. Both the frame and 
the tongue are cut out from the base-plate to. 
gether when said plate is cut from the sheet 
. 
- 
metal. The holding arms or clips 11 of the 
frame S are struck up into the securing-clips, 
which lie in planes oblique to the base-plate 
7 and with their tips closely together, as shown 
in Fig. 2. The tongue 10 is left in normal po 
sition, and lies in the plane of the base-plate 
flush with the surfaces of the same, and has a 
certain degree of resiliency given to it when 
displaced by virtue of the connected point 9. 
The button 13, Fig. 4, has its shank placed 
in the securing - clips 11 by first raising the 
outer free end of tongue 10 clear above the 
upper surface of base - plate 7 and thread 
ing the shank thereon, then sliding the but 
ton along the tongue and snapping it into the 
securing-clips 11, when the tongue 10 springs 
back into its home or slot 12 and leaves the 
button confined in the securing clips by its 
Shank. 
In Figs, 5 and 6 I show a modified form, 
wherein but one V-shaped securing-clip, 11, 
is formed, together with its tongue 10, which 
here extends to the edge of the base-plate 7 
and has the same spring action as in the pri 
mary form by virtue of the connected point 9. 
In the modification the securing - clip or 
holding-arm is struck up in an almost ver 
tical position, Fig. 6, and a button may be se 
cured to it by snapping it into the securing 
clip 11, as above described in Fig. 4. 
In using my fastener to mount a button on 
fabrics, leather, or the like, in the usual man 
ner, the shank of the button is forced through 
a perforation in the material and drawn to 
the opposite face, where the tongue of the 
fastener is passed through said shank, which 
is Snapped into the securing clip or clips, as 
before described. The material in this case 
lies between the button-head and the upper 
surface of the base-plate, which bears suugly 
against the under face of the material and 
maintains the button securely in operative po 
sition. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, as hereinbefore set 
forth, with a base-plate, of two substantially 
V-shaped securing clips or arms cut from re 
verse sides of the base-plate and bent up to 
So 
85 
95 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
364,03 
ward each other and a tonguehaving a free end the other end with the integral tongue 10, and 
and integral with both of the said securing the clip11, bent up nearly at right angles to said 
clips or arms, substantially as and for the pur- plate and tongue, substantially as described. 
pose herein described. 
WILLIAM HALKYARD. 
2. The combination, with the base-plate 7, 
of the V-shaped securing-clip 11, integral at 
one end with said base-plate and provided at 
M. F. BLIGA, 
J. A. MILLER, Jr. 
Witnesses: 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364113.txt	(No Model.) 
J. JACOBS, 
ILUMINATING, TILE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 364,113. 
Patented May 31, 1887. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 364,113, 
J. JACOBs. 
ILLUMINATING TILE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 31, 1887. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
???? 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB JACOBS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ILLUMINATING-TILE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 364,113, dated May 31, 1887. 
Application filed December 15, 1886, Serial No. 221,669. (No model.) 
To all vi?ion, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB JACOBs, of New 
York, in the county of New York, and in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Illuminating - Tiles; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, making a part of this specification, in 
Which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my exte 
rior and interior lenses separated from each 
Other. Fig. 2 is a like view of the same com 
bined and in position within a supporting 
frame. Fig. 3 is a section upon line aca, of 
Fig. 2; and Fig. 4 is a like view of the same, 
laying a modification in the form of the inner 
e.S. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
The design of my invention is mainly to 
enable illuminating-tiles to be rendered more 
attractive in appearanne by the use of colored 
glass without material interference with the 
light transmitting capacity of the tiles; to 
which end said invention consists, principally, 
in an illuminating-tile in which the light 
openings contain glass lenses that are each 
adapted to receive and contain a separate cen 
trally-located lens, substantially as and for the 
purpose hereinafter specified. 
It consists, further, as an improvement in 
illuminating-tiles, in a lens which is adapted 
to fit into and be secured within the light-open 
ing of a tile, and is provided with a central 
opening that is adapted to receive and con 
tain a separately-constructed lens, substan 
tially as and for the purpose hereinafter shown. 
It consists, further, as an improvement in 
illuminating-tiles, in a lens which is fitted into 
and secured within one of the light-openings, 
and has a central opening, and a second lens 
that is secured within and fills the latter, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose hereinafter 
set forth. 
It consists, finally, as an improvement in 
illuminating-tiles, in a lens which is composed 
of an inner section and an outersection that are 
constructed separately and afterward united, 
substantially as and for the purpose herein 
after shown and described. 
In the carrying of my invention into prac 
tice I usually employ a metal tile, A, in which 
the light-openings ( and c are square, and ar 
ranged in parallel lines, as shown, and each 55 
of such openings is provided around its lower 
edge with an inwardly-projecting supporting 
ledge, a. 
Within each light-opening a is placed a cor 
respondingly-shaped glass lens, B, which sub 
stantially fills the space laterally, and is held 
in place therein by a cement joint, C, that is 
made in the usual way between the inner walls 
of said opening and the outer sides of said lens. 
Within the central portion of the lens B is 
provided an opening, b, which is preferably 
round, and near the lower end of the same is 
an inwardly - projectingledge, l', that corre 
sponds to and performs the same office as the 
ledge a' of the tile A. Said opening b receives 
and contains a correspondingly-shaped lens,D, 
which rests upon and is supported by the ledge 
b', and is secured in place by the cement joint 
E, which is formed between the periphery of 
said lens D and the sides of said opening b. 
Either or both of the lenses B and D may 
be colored, and they are preferably formed 
from different-colored glasses, while the cem 
ent used for the joint E may also be colored, 
if desired, by which means the appearance of 8O 
the tile both from without as well as from within 
is materially enhanced and beautiful effects 
rendered easy of production. When one of 
said lenses is made from uncolored glass, the 
light-transmitting capacity of the tile is but 85 
slightly diminished. 
When it is desired to ventilate the space in 
closed by an illuminating-tile, I provide some 
or all of the lenses D with a central opening, 
d, which is small at its outer end, and from 90 
thence inward has a regularly-increasing di 
ameter, by which construction a free outward 
movement of air is practicable, while the in 
ward passage of rain is nearly impracticable. 
the round form of the inner lens are preferably 
employed, any other form of either may be 
used without departing from the spirit of my 
invention. 
While the square form of the outer lens and 95 
75 
n 
what I claim is 
Having thus fully described my invention, IOO 
1. An illuminating-tile in which the light 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
364,113 
within and fills the latter, substantially as and 15 
for the purpose set forth. 
4. As animprovement in illuminating-tiles, 
a lens which is composed of an inner section 
and an outer section that are constructed sepal 
rately and afterward united, substantially as 20 
and for the purpose shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 2d day of De 
cember, 1886. 
Witlesses: 
JACOB JACOBS. 
ALEXES R. LATSON, 
AUGUST C. NANZ. 
openings contain glass lenses that are cach 
adapted to receive and contain a separate cen 
trally-located lens, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. As an improvement in illuminating-tiles, 
a lens which is adapted to fit into and be se 
cured within the light-opening of a tile, and is 
provided with a central opening that is adapted 
to receive and contain a separately-constructed 
lens, substantially as and for the purpose shown. 
3. As an improvement in illuminating-tiles, 
a lens which is fitted into and secured within 
one of the light-openings and has a central 
opening, and a second lens that is secured 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364213.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 364,213, 
P. BUTLER, 
CARTRIDGE SHELL. 
Patented June 7, 1887. 
Y&\\\esses 
39S SS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL BUTLER, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CART R D G E - SHE L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 364,213, dated June 7, 1887. 
Application filed May 28, 1885. Serial No. 166,903. (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
To all, whon it nagy concern: 
Be it known that I, PAUL BUTLER, of Low 
ell, in the county of Middlesex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Cartridge-Shells, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to metallic cartridge 
shells; and it consists in preparing the paper 
Or other fibrous re-enforce of such shells with 
Some composition in the nature of a filling 
material and inserting it into the shell under 
conditions which will cause it to fit to the 
metal Of the shell with the effect and substan 
tially as hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a rear end 
view of a metallic cartridge-shell. Fig. 2 is 
a side view of the same, partly in section, 
showing the re-enforce. 
A is the metallic shell, and B is the re-en 
force formed of paper or some similar fibrous 
material. The shell is stanped and drawn 
from soft metal in the usual manner, and the 
re-enforce is inserted in any usual and well 
known manner. When the paper re-enforce 
is made in the usual way by stamping or 
pressing out the paper, however, it is found 
practically impossible to draw the shell down 
below a certain degree of thinness, because 
the amount of moisture contained in the pa 
per under ordinary atmospheric conditions 
causes the re-enforce to shrink away from the 
metal of the shell slightly at the line b of the 
Seam between them. This allows the gases 
created by the explosion of the powder to en 
ter the Seam between the re-enforce and the 
metal of the shell all around, or in some parts 
of it around the line b, and to exert great 
force upon the metal at this point, and to fre 
quently SO burst or strain it as to render the 
shell incapable of being reloaded and used 
repeatedly, unless the metal is left of sufficient 
thickness to resist this strain. If the metal 
be made thicker at this point or line and from 
it toward the head of the cartridge-shell, and 
thinner from any point or place toward the 
Open end of it, to Save metal, the unequal re 
Sistance of the different thicknesses of metal 
will cause the force of the explosion to burst 
the shell at the junction of such thick and 
5O thin portions. Thus the thickness of the shell 
45 
35 
O 
at the line b practically regulates its thick 
ness elsewhere in its cylinder. It is to over 
come these difficulties and enable the shells to 
be made thinner and effect a saving of metal 
in them, while retaining sufficient strength for 55 
use, as described, that my invention is made. 
Before inserting the re-enforce B in the 
metallic shell I Soak the same in some Sub 
stance or composition which will expel the 
moisture from it, and fill its pores and fibers, 60 
So as to preserve its proper elasticity and pre 
vent its shrinking away from the metal, as 
described, and which will also remain in the 
re-enforce under the ordinary conditions of 
heat, and exposure to which such shells are 65 
subject, and not be absorbed therefrom into 
the powder by capillary attraction or absorp 
tion, and so destroy the explosive properties 
of the powder. For this purpose I have 
found stearine, or Japan Wax, or beeswax, or 70 
other similar wax, or a compound of wax and 
tallow, or wax and similar substances in which 
no free oleine exists, quite sufficient. The 
proportions of wax and tallow may be some 
what varied, according to the density of the 75 
paper and length of time which it is soaked 
therein; but I have found one-fourth part of 
tallow and three-fourths parts wax melted 
together to be efficient, and a soaking of fif 
teen or twenty minutes for paper of the density 
commonly used. 
In all cases where tallow or any lubricant 
containing oleine is used as an ingredient care 
must be used to not employ a sufficient pro 
portion of the same in the mixture to have 85 
the oleine escaping from the re-enforce and 
causing shrinkage of the same and injury to 
the powder under subsequent keeping of the 
loaded Shell. 
Any other similar substances to the above 
described mixture of wax and tallow, or mix 
tures thereof, may be used-such as gums or 
resins-which will accomplish the result de 
sired-i. e., remain in the re-enforce and be 
elastic and non-shrinkable. 
It may be found expedient to warm or heat 
the re-enforce after being soaked in the water. 
proofing elastic substance or compound, as 
above described; but I have found the heat 
generated by the punch in stamping the re- IOO 
90 
 
| 
- 
. 364,213 
enforce into place in the shell amply sufficient therefron, and fixed in the botton1 and firmly lo 
to seat the re-enforce in place and cause it to against the outer cylindrical wall of the cham 
adhere to the metal of the shell in most cases. ber of the shell by pressure, substantially as 
What I claim as new and of my invention described. 
- 5 S The combination of the metal shell A with 
the elastic non-shrinkable re-enforce B, formed 
of paper Saturated with the moisture-proof 
elastic Substance, or mixture non-absorbent 
PAUL BUTLER, 
Witnesses: 
DAVID HALL RICE, 
LEPINE HALL RICE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364313.txt	(No Model.) 
T. J. SKILLIN. 
GRAIN SCOOP, 
No. 364,313. 
Patented June 7, 1887. 
e/azzey 
 
---, -, 
Zzz /e7 zeoza. 
42-24.6% 
N. perERs hoto-thographer, Washington, O.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS J. SKILLIN, OF OAK PARK, ILLINOIS. 
GRAN-SCO OP. 
SPECIFICATION icrming part of Letters 
Application filed January 24, 1887. 
Patent No. 364,313, dated June 7, 1887. 
Serial No. 225,231. (No model.) 
IO 
20 
25 
To aid, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAs J. SKILLIN, of 
Oak Park, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Grain-Scoops, of which the 
following is a description, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a grain 
SCOOp having my improvement attached there 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged side view in detail 
tO. 
of a portion of a scoop, showing a modifica 
tion of Said construction. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
in detail of a part of one of the sides of said 
Scoop, showing the manner of adjusting the 
bail; and Fig. 4 is an inside view of the cast 
ing to which the lower end of the bail is at 
tached. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in the different figures. 
My invention relates to that class of grain 
SCOops which are provided with two handles 
one at the rear and one at the front-whereby 
the load may be suspended directly from the 
hands of the operator, instead of being sup 
ported upon the end of the usual handle or 
lever. The objection is raised to this kind of 
scoop that it cannot be satisfactorily used by 
workmen of varying size, for the reason that 
the handles, being the same distance apart in 
all cases, might be too close together for one 
operator and too far apart for another, while 
some workmen would prefer to have the for 
Ward handle movable. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
these objections and to provide an adjustable 
handle which may be either rigid or loose, 
as desired, and which may be adjusted at will 
to meet the requirements of different work 
men. I accomplish this object in the man 
ner hereinafter more particularly described 
and claimed. 
A in the drawings represents the body of a 
grain-scoop, to the real end and at the top of 
which is rigidly attached a handle, B, Fig. 1. 
Preferably about one - third of the distance 
from front to rear, and upon the respective 
sides of said scoop, are riveted or otherwise 
attached sector-shaped castings C C, the bot 
toms of which extend to points near the bot 
tom of the scoop. Said sectors, respectively, 
are preferably cast or formed in one piece, as 
shown in Fig. 2, and are so adjusted to the 
scoop that the arc C of each may extend above 
the top of the scoop. In the bottom of each 
of said sectors is formed a recess, c, (better 
shown in Fig. 4.) adapted to receive the lower 
ends of the depending parts D'D' of a bail, 
D. Each of said recesses e is provided with 
a lug, c', which is shown in Fig. 4, which 
passes loosely into a perforation in the lower 
end of said bail, as indicated in dotted lines 
in Fig. 2. 
In each of the arcs C are preferably formed 
curved slots C, concentric with the lug c', 
through which slots are passed bolts d, pro 
vided with thumb : nuts d', upon tightening 
which the bail may be rigidly attached to the 
sector; but if left loose the bail may swing to 
the limit of said slot. 
In lieu of forming the sector in one piece, 
as shown in Fig. 2, which I prefer to do, as it 
stiffens the sides of the scoop, the ends of the 
arcs C C may be riveted to the sides of the 
scoop, as shown in Fig. 1, while separate in 
dependent ears or plates C may be secured to 
said sides, to which the lower ends of the bail 
may be attached in like manner, as hereinaf 
ter described. It is obvious that by means of 
the thumb-nuts d' d', or other well-known fast 
enings, the bail B may be adjusted and rig 
idly secured at any required distance from the 
handle B, thus adapting the distance of the 
scoop-handles to the requirements of different 
workmen; or the bail D may be allowed to 
swing loosely, if preferred. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. An adjustable bail for grain-Scoops, the 
depending ends of which are loosely attached 
to the sides of the scoop, provided with means 
for adjusting the handle of said bail at vary 
ing distances from the rear handle of the scoop, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination, with a grain-scoop, of 
a bail loosely attached to the sides thereof, the 
handle of which is arranged to swing in the 
arc of a circle, and means, as the arcs C'C' and 
set-screws, for adjusting said bail at any point 
45 
SO 
90 
95 
CO 
2 
364,33 
w 
in Said arc, substantially as and for the pur- thumb - nuts, for clamping said bail to said 
pOSes Specified. 
sectors, substantially as and for the purposes 
3. The combination, with a grain-scoop, of described. 
Sectors attached to the respective sides thereof, 
5 a bail the ends of which are attached to the 
bottom of said sectors, the arcs of which are 
slotted, as described, with means, as bolts and 
D. H. FLETCHER, 
J. B. EALPENNY. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS J. SKILLIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364413.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J. HIGGINS, 
SHUTTER FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERAs, 
No. 364,413. 
Patented June 7, 1887. 
-Z'-9. -/ 
Z 
 
e 
Z 
  
INVENTOR: 
Ayviron. 
g 
Cui. 
ATTORNEYS, 
BY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN J. HIGGINS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO E. & H. T. ANTHONY 
& CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
SHUTTER FOR PHOTOGRAPHC CAMERAS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 364,413, dated June 7, 1887, 
Application filed April 9, 1857. Serial No. 234,230. (No model.). 
2O 
I5 both time and instantaneous pictures. 
To aid, whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, JOHN J. HIGGINs, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
5 Shutters for Photographic Cameras, of which 
the following is a ful, clear, and exact de 
Scription. 
This invention relates to that class of shut 
ters for photographic cameras known as ro 
IO tary shutters, which are provided with an 
aperture; and the invention consists in a ro 
tary camera-shutter of novel construction, sub 
stantially as hereinafter described, and pointed 
Out in the claims, and which is adapted to take 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in Which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is an exterior longitudinal view of 
the front tube of a camera with my invention ap 
plied and as adapted to take instantaneous or 
other pictures, the shutter proper being sup 
posed to work, as in the case of other shutters, 
25 in between the lenses of the instrument; but 
the invention is not restricted to such interme 
diate position of the shutter relatively to the 
lenses. Fig. 2 is a front end view of the same 
With the shutter in position ready to be thrown 
3O after focusing, but omitting the front tube of 
the Camera; and Fig. 3, a similar view with the 
shutter in position after it has been thrown. 
Fig. 4 is a front view of the shutter as adapted 
to take time-pictures. 
35 A is the front tube of the camera, on which 
the shutter, referring to the device as a whole, 
is arranged and may fit into by screwing or 
B represents the movable plate of the shut 
4o ter or shutter proper, having anaperture, b, in 
it eccentric to the axis or pivot c, upon or 
about which it turns. 
C is the shutter-tube provided with a trans 
verse plate or diaphragm, D, having an aper 
45 ture, d, which is concentric with the lenses, 
that may be arranged one on either side and at 
a suitable distance from the opposite faces of 
Said diaphragm. The pivot c is attached to 
this diaphragm D, and the movable plate or 
So shutter proper, B, is arranged to work closeup 
Otherwise. 
a 
and over said diaphragm through a suitable 
slot or opening in the side of the tube C. 
. Upon the face of the rotatable plate B is a 
projection, e, which serves both as a handle to 
manipulate or turn said shutter proper, by 55 
and, as will be hereinafter described, as a bear 
ing for a spring used to throw said shutter 
when taking a picture. Attached, also, or piv 
oted, as at 0, to the diaphragm D, is a spring 
lever catch, E, which passes out through the 6o 
side slot in the tube C, and has a tooth, f, ar 
ranged to press or bear upon the periphery of 
the shutter proper, R, and to engage as re 
quired with one or other of two notches, h h', 
in the peripheral portion of said shutter or f 5 
movable plate. This lever-catch Eis designated 
to be manipulated either directly by hand or 
by an attached cord, or by the usual pneumatic 
operating device used in other shutters. Said 
lever-catch E may be located in any desired 7o 
position. 
To take a time-picture, reference will mainly 
be made to Fig. 4, commencing, however, with 
Fig. 2, which represents the shutter proper, B, 
as in its closed position before adjusting it for 75 
focusing. Said shutter is adjusted from its 
position shown in Fig. 2 to that represented 
for it in Fig. 4 by releasing the spring catch 
E from the notch hand turning the shutter by 
its handle e to the position shown for it in 8o 
Fig. 4, when the spring-catch E engages with 
the notch h and holds the shutter in its newly 
adjusted position with its aperture B coinci 
dent with the exposing-apertured in the dia 
phragm D. After focusing, the shutter B is 85 
again closed into the position shown in Fig. 2 
by simply moving the shutter in direction of 
the arrow ac, this movement being facilitated 
by the beveled shape of the notchh. The plate 
to be photographed is then inserted in the cam- 9o 
era. To take the picture, the catch E is re 
leased from its engagement in the notch h', and 
the shutter B is then moved to the position 
shown in Fig. 4, the catch E again engaging 
with the notch h. After the necessary time- 95 
exposure has been made, the shutter B is once 
more closed, as before, by turning it in direc 
tion of the arrow, Fig. 4, until the catch Een 
gages with the notch h'. 
-- 
To take an instantaneous picture, there is 1oo 
y 
a. 
 
364,413 
55 
IO 
23 
45 
fitted over the forward portion of the tube C 
an outer ring or open-faced cap, F, capable of 
being turned, but not too freely, or so that it 
may b2 held at its adjusted set on or around 
the tube C. This device F constitutes a holder 
of the spring used to throw the shutter proper, 
B. Said spring, which may be a simple strip 
of steel G, is secured at its one end to or round 
the cap F, and projects loosely or freely for the 
greater portion of its length beyond or outside 
of Said cap in the same plane as the latter. 
This spring G is designed to act under or 
against the handle e as a bearing to quickly 
throw the shutter when released. Said spring, 
however, may be otherwise applied to throw 
the shutter, subject to a shortening or length 
ening of the active portion of the spring to 
vary its power, substantially as hereinafter 
described. 
The movable apertured plate or shutter 
proper, B, is first turned by its handle e to focus, 
as hereinbefore described, and after focusing 
further turned to bring its aperture b to the 
left or back of the apertured in the fixed plate 
D, as shown in Fig. 2, when the catch E will 
engage with the notch h' to hold the movable 
plate B as thus set. In this last adjustment of 
Said plate B its handle e will bear down on 
the spring G and force it more or less down on 
and around the outer ring, F, so that when the 
spring catch E is released, and held released 
from engaging with either notch h h", said 
Spring G, by its tension on the handle or bear 
ing e, will fly out or up and rapidly rotate 
or throw the shutter to give the necessary 
exposure through the apertures d b, and to 
carry the aperture b beyond or to the oppo 
site side of the apertured, as shown in Fig. 3. 
To prevent jar consequent upon this quick 
throw of the shutter B by the sudden arrest 
of it at the end of its stroke, I attach to the 
end, side, or face of said shutter, as at i, a 
spring, FI, which, as the shutter B completes 
its throw, is brought in contact with and ex 
erts an elastic friction upon, as it passes over, 
a stationally rubbing surface plate, I, project 
ing in a plane parallel with the shutter's travel 
from the fixed ring C, thus giving an easy and 
gradual stop to the shutter. As it is desira 
ble, however, to vary the speed of the mova 
ble shutter B, so as to give a longer or shorter 
exposure while being thrown by the spring G, 
the open-faced cap F is turned by hand more 
or less, as required, upon or around the fixed 
ring C in cither direction, accordingly as it 
is required to lengthen or diminish the expos 
ure, the setting or turning of the cap Fin the 
one direction-say to the left-giving a greater 
and longer action of the spring G upon the 
handle or bearing e to throw the shutter B 
more rapidly, and the setting or turning of 
said cap F in the opposite direction giving a 
lesser or shorter action of the spring G upon 
the handle or bearing e to throw the shutter 
less rapidly. To regulate this varied throw 
of the spring with precision I arrange upon 
the shutter B a graduated scale, k, and pro 
vide the spring G, or it might be the cap F, 
carrying the spring, with an index, l, whereby 
the setting or turning of said cap to give any 
desired length of exposure may be determined. 
The scale, instead of being arranged upon the 
shutter, may be located in any other desired 
position. Furthermore, the spring G, as herc 
in before observed, may be otherwise applied to 
lengthen or shorten its active portion, and so 
to vary its throwing power. 
Thus it might 
have a fixed position, or be otherwise attached 
than described, and the bearing against which 
it acts to throw the shutter be made variously 
adjustable, or the throwing- tension of the 
spring may be otherwise regulated. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The circularly-adjustable open-faced cap 
or ring F and a spring, G, in combination with 
the apertured rotary shutter B, provided with 
a handle or bearing, e, and the tube C and its 
apertured diaphragm D, essentially as speci 
fied. 
2. The spring catch E, in combination with 
the apertured rotary shutter B, provided with 
a handle or bearing, e, and notchesh h", the tube 
C, with its apertured diaphragm D, and the 
circularly-adjustable cap F and spring G, sub 
stantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with the tube Cand its 
diaphragm D, of the rotary apertured shutter 
B, having a handle or bearing, e, and the cir 
cularly-adjustable open faced cap or ring F, 
with spring G, and a graduated scale, essen 
tially as and for the purposes herein described. 
JOHN J. H. GG INS. 
Witnesses: 
C. SEDG WICK, 
E. M. CLARK. 
90 
IOC 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364513.txt	(No Model.) 
F. HEINZ. 
CAR COUPLING, 
No. 364,513. 
Patented June 7, 1887. 
N 
l 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
a 
V 
sa 
 
 
 
 
is 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK HEINZ, OF ATCHISON, KANSAS. 
CAR a COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 364,523, dated Jine 7, 1887. 
75 
Application filed April 14, 1887. 
Serial No. 234,785. (No model.) 
work relatively with the draw.head, or any 
To all whom it inval/ concern: 
suitable draw-head. 
Be it known that I, FRANK HEINZ, a citi 
To each inner side of the frame-work B is 
Zen of Bohemia, residing at Atchison, in the 
secured two ways, F. F. Within these ways 55 
county of Atchison and State of Kansas, have 
slide two platforms, G. G', having rollers dig 
S invented certain new and useful Improve. 
secured to their under sides, which traverse 
ments in Car-Couplers; and I do declare the 
the bottom of the frame-work to the plat 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
form G, traversing the whole distance of the 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
length of the frame-work, while the platform 6o 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
G' traverses but half of its length, an in- 
- 
Io tains to make and use the same, reference be 
clined perforation being made in the bottom 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, and 
of the frame-work at the point where the meet 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
ing ends of the platforms GG'form a junction. 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
At this point also is made a stop by means of 65 
tion. 
the upper part of the lower part or section of 
This invention relates to improvements in 
the bottom, by which means the platform G' 
car-couplings; and it has for its object to fa 
can descend no farther, but can ascend simi. 
cilitate the coupling and uncoupling of adja 
larly to the platform G to form a junction at 
cent CarS. 
the mouth of the draw-head. Loosely pivoted 73 
To this end the invention consists in the 
in the upper end of the frame-work is a roller, 
novel construction and arrangement of the 
H, and adjacent to said roller and secured 
several parts, as will be hereinafter more par 
within an inclined slot, h, is a triangular or 
ticularly described, and specifically pointed 
nearly triangular piece of metal, I, having 
out in the claims. 
a flat steel spring secured to the under side, 
In the accompanying drawings, to which 
which serves to give motion or spring to the 
reference is had and which fully illustrate my 
J is a coiled 
free end of the metallic strip I. 
invention, Figure 1 is a perspective view of 
spring formed upon the center of a bent rod, j, 
my device, showing the coupling pin in posi 
which has one end Secured to the under side 
tion when the car is coupled; and Fig. 2 is a lon 
of one or the lower end of the platform G' and 
gitudinal sectional elevation of the same, show. 
the other end secured to the rod b, which is in 
3O ing the pin raised or in the position when the 
turn secured to the outer or lower end of the 
cars are uncoupled. 
side pieces, EE, of the frame-work. 
In the drawings, the letter Aindicates a car 
The functions of the roller H, metallic strip 
to the under side and forward end of which is 
I, and coiled spring J serve to operate and 
secured one or the inner end of a tilting or in 
elevate the platforms G', upon which the link 
clined frame-work, B, secured pivotally to the 
rests upon the contacting car and assists in 
inclined side pieces, E. E., constituting a part 
passing it into the draw - head, where it is 
of the frame-work B at its outer or lower end, 
coupled by the coupling-pin, which will be 
by means of a rod, b, the inner or free end 
hereinafter referred to. 
previously referred to being regulated or ad 
K is the draw-head, which may be of the 
4o justed by means of vertical spiral springs b'l 
ordinary or any preferred construction, pro 
interposed between the under side of the free 
vided with the usual mouth or opening and 
end of the tilting frame-work B and a cross 
having perforations lic k therein for the re. 
piece, C, secured to theside pieces, EE, in the 
ception of a couplingpin, L, having an eye, l, 
center of which is a perforation, c, through 
in the top, through which a link is passed and 
which a pin, D, passes for the purpose of 
which also passes through an eye formed upon 
steadying and holding in place the springs l' 
a projecting portion, , of the angular coup 
b'. Secured to the upper part of this cross 
ling-rod M. This coupling-rod M is provided 
piece C, at each end, is a flat bowed spring, (not 
with weights upon the ends of its rear pro- IOo 
shown in the drawings,) which, in conjunction 
so with the spiral springs l'b', serves to facilitate jecting arms, N; and also secured at one end 
the adjustment of the free end of the frame- thereto is another rod, In, which connects with 
95 
15 
35 
 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The frame-work B E E, having the plat 
forms G. G., rollers g if, ways F F, triangular 
plate I, and roller H, in combination with 
springs b b, cross-piece C, and spring J, ar 
ranged and operating as described. 
2. The combination, with the frame-work B 
EE and its attachments, constructed as de 
scribed, of draw-head K, angular rod M, bent 
spring O', coiled spring N, coupling-pin L, and 
curved bar or rod P, all arranged and operat 
ing as herein described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
TFRANK HEINZ. 
- 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
F. H. FINLEY, 
H. J. ENNIS, 
364,513 
a Weight, m', at the other end of said rod and 
top of the car. 
The coupling-pin L is surrounded by a coiled 
spring, N; and secured to the under side of the 
5 forward part of the car is one end of another 
bent spring, O', which lies within the opening 
formed by the projecting portion of the hori 
Zontal angular coupling-rod. Secured to the 
draw-head, upon its upper surface and in rear 
to of the coiled spring O, is a curved rod, P, which 
is linked at its free end to the free end of the 
bent spring O'. Interposed between the rear 
end of the draw-head bar and a cross-piece, 
Q, is a spiral spring, R, whereby motion is 
5 given to the draw-head bar and relieves the 
force of the contacting cars. 
The coupling and uncoupling of the cars 
will be obvious when taken in connection with 
the foregoing description and accompanying 
2O drawings. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364614.txt	MANUFACTURE OF HAY AND MANURE FORKs, 
No. 364,614, 
Patented June 7, 1887. 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
(7 N S227 
S-22 
Sr. 
is a 7% 
2 
27, 26. 
CA Cozzee - 
f 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER CHRISTIAN EMMERIK ULDALL OF COPENHAGEN, DENMARK. 
MANUFACTURE OF HAY AND MANURE FORKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 364,614, dated June 7, 1887. 
Application filed January 22, 1887, Serial No. 225,095. (No model.) 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER CHRISTIAN EM 
MERIKULDALL, a subject of the King of Den 
mark, residing at Copenhagen, in the King 
dom of Denmark, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvementsin Apparatus for and 
Method of Forming Forks; and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the blank for my 
improved hollow fork. Figs. 2 and 2 show, re 
Spectively, in plan view and in side view a part 
ly-finished fork resting in the lowerintaglio die. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view of the up 
per and lower dies and of the blank. Fig. 4 
is a similar view showing the blank in a die 
giving a still further folding to the blank. Fig. 
5 is a similar view showing the edges of the 
blank brought together. Fig. 6 is a plan view 
of a die for giving the prongs or tines of the 
fork their proper lateral curve, and Fig. 7 is 
a longitudinal vertical sectional view of a die 
giving the final curve to the prongs or tines of 
the fork. 
- 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
My invention has relation to forks used for 
agricultural purposes, such as hay and dung 
forks; and it consists, first, in the improved 
method of and apparatus for manufacturing 
hollow-pronged forks, and, second, in theim 
proved construction of the hollow-pronged fork 
produced by the method as hereinafter more 
fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter a 
indicates the portion of the blank which is in 
tended for the socket of the fork for the inser 
tion of the handle, and band bindicate the por 
tions of the blank forming the tines or prongs. 
This blank, which for a two-pronged fork is of 
Substantially the same shape as shown in Fig. 
1, is placed in an intaglio die, A", having a 
small concavity in its face corresponding in 
shape to the general outline of the blank, and 
upon the blank, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4, the 
dies first used having less of an indentation 
and raised portion, respectively, than the dies 
used afterward, the dies gradually bringing 
the edges of the blank to curve upward and 
toward each other, as shown in Fig. 4. The 
blank is thereupon placed between two dies, 
B and B, the lower one of which is formed 
with a shallow recess or indentation corre 
sponding in shape to the form of the pressed 6o 
blank, and the upper die is formed with a re 
cess, C, having inclined or beveled sides and 
a flat bottom, as shown in Fig. 5, the branches 
of the said recess gradually tapering toward 
their points, and the inclined sides of the re 
cess will serve to close the edges of the blank 
and give the pressed and nearly-finished blank 
the proper shape. The blank is now heated 
and the edges, which are pressed close together 
by the last process, are welded together, where: 
upon the blank is placed into a die or former 
formed by two parts, D and D, which inclose 
the socket and the outer sides of the prongs, 
when a plunger, D", of a blunt and rounded 
wedge shape is inserted between the prongs, 
spreading them and giving them the proper 
lateral curve. 
It now remains to give the prongs the proper 
curve transverse to the plane through the 
socket and prongs, and this is accomplished 
by placing the blank between two dies, Eald 
E", respectively formed in their faces with a 
recess corresponding to the shape of the fork, 
and having, respectively, a concave and a con 
vex curved face, so that the upper portions of 85 
the prongs may be curved into a plane below 
the plane between the points of the prongs and 
the socket. The fork is now so far finished 
that all which remains is to temper it and to 
sharpen and finish the fork for market, and it go 
will be seen that a very light article is ob 
tained on account of the prongs being hollow, 
while the prongs will be equally as strong as 
solid prongs and possess comparatively greater 
elasticity and yielding power than the Solid 95 
and heavier prongs. 
When forks with more than two prongs are 
manufactured, the dies will of course have their 
respective recesses and raised parts formed to 
75 
7 O. 
So a plunger or die in relief, A, is forced down correspond to the shape of the many-pronged Ioo 
IO 
I5 
25 
35 
45 
 
g 
364,614 
35 
2. The iniproved apparatus for manufactur 
ilig hollow-pronged forks, consisting of in 
taglio and relief dies, a blunt and rounded 
Wedge-shaped plunger, a forked die, and two 
dies having, respectively, a convex and a con. 
cave face, as and for the purpose shown and 
Set forth. 
3. In an apparatus for manufacturing hol 
low-pronged forks, the combination of a fork 
shaped die having prong-receiving grooves or 
receSSCS in the inner sides of its branches and 
a blunt rounded wedge-shaped plunger having 
grooves in its sides, as and for the purpose 
shown and set forth. 
4. In an apparatus for manufacturing hol 
low-pronged forks, the combination of two 
dies, one of which has a shallow recess, and 
tle other one has a recess the sides of which 
are beveled or inclined toward each other and 
having a flat bottom, as and for the purpose 
shown and set forth. 
5. As an improved article of manufacture, a 
fork having tubular or hollow welded and 
SW aged prongs, as and for the purpose shown 
and Set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
DeSence of two witnesses, 
PETER, CITRUSTIAN EATERK DALL 
Witnesses: 
FREDERIK. Wolf, 
RASMUS WEEKE. 
45 
So 
S5 
C) 
blank, and the plunger in the die giving the 
lateral spread to the prongs will be divided 
into a number of parts, each corresponding to 
the Space between two prongs, the entire op 
eration and method of manufacture being the 
She as With the two-pronged fork, the only 
difference being the difference in the shape of 
the dies. 
The dies are here shown flat, one die being 
forced down upon the other; but it follows that 
the dies may be formed upon rollers between 
which the blanks may be fed, in the same man. 
her as a number of other metallic objects are 
Cut Orformed from rough blanks inserted be. 
tween Toller-dies-as, for instance, links and 
similar objects. 
Numerous other modifications may be made 
in the construction of the several parts of the 
lies and other machinery for manufacturing 
the forks without departing from the spirit of 
ly invention, which changes all may suggest 
themselves during the manufacture of theim 
plements. 
Haying thus described my invention, Iclaim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States-- 
The improved method of manufacturing 
hollow-pronged forks, consisting in gradually 
curving the edges of a flat fork-shaped blamic 
between dies, uniting the edges by welding, 
and then giving the fork the desired lateral 
and transversecurve of the prongs, as and for 
the purpose shown and set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364714.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 364,714. 
 
B. J. HEALY. 
TWO WHEELED WEHICLE. 
Patented June 14, 1887. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
BYRON J. HEALY, OF KALAMAZOO, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO JOHN GALLI 
GAN AND FRANK N. HORN, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
TWO, WHEEED VEHICLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 364,714, dated June 14, 1887. 
Application filed April 29, 1887. Serial No. 236,577. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
- 
Beit known that I, BYRON J. HEALY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Kalama 
Zoo, county of Kalamazoo, State of Michigan, 
have invented a new and useful Two-Wheeled 
Vehicle, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to that well-known 
class of two-wheeled vehicles the body or seat 
bars of which are fulcrumed at the forward 
end and are supported by springs from the 
axle; and it has for its object a peculiar for 
mation of the supporting-springs and a novel 
association of them with the body and axle, 
as below described and claimed. 
In the drawings forming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a side elevation, with one 
wheel removed and the rear part of one thill 
broken; Fig. 2, a plan of about one-half of 
the vehicle; Fig. 3, enlarged lettered details 
from Fig. 1, showing a change; and Fig. 4 is 
a rear view of lettered details, with parts in 
section on dotted line 11 in Fig. 2. 
Referring to the lettered parts of the draw. 
ings, B are the thills; D, the seat-bars of the 
body, fulcrumed at the forward end, and C the 
axle, all substantially as heretofore disclosed. 
The spring a is composed of a single piece 
of spring metal in the form of two connected 
coils inverted in their relative position to each 
other, each coil being substantially alike in 
shape and size. The inner end of the rear 
coil is attached to the axle so that the coil sur 
rounds the axle, and the inner end of the for 
ward coil, in Fig. 1, is rigidly attached to the 
end of a bar, c, extending laterally from the 
body of the vehicle. This bar c is at an ob 
lique angle to a horizontal plane, and by that 
means exerts a coiling-leverage on this end of 
the spring when the body swings down, bring 
ing the bar c to a horizontal plane; also, when 
the body is borne farther down by a heavier 
person, or by two persons in a double-sized 
seat, the action is to pull forward on the spring 
a, as well as to close the coil, and the spring 
is thus greatly stiffened for bearing the heavier 
weight. 
The relation of the body and spring is such, 
in connection with the points of attachment 
shown and the fulcrum of the body, that the 
vertical swing of the body exerts a like action 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
on each coil of the spring. So far as this lat 
erally-extended bar c is concerned, it is not 
new with me as a spring-support or point of 
attaching a spring which supports the body 55 
from the axle, and, if preferred, the end of 
the spring may be attached to the seat-bar or 
foot-slat of the body. Of course it will be un 
derstood that both sides of the vehicle are like 
the side here shown. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown the forward end of 
the spring a hinged or jointedly attached to 
its support c. This plan may be adopted 
when desiring to construct a vehicle for two 
persons or a very heavy person and yet have 
it suitable for one person. The body and 
spring in this instance have a freer action un 
der the weight of a single person than in Fig. 
1, and if two persons are in the seat the bar 
c, in assuming a horizontal plane, contacts 7o 
with the spring at the back side of the bar, 
and in this condition the spring action is the 
same as if the end were rigidly attached, as in 
Fig. 1. In Fig. 4 the bar c is on top of the 
T-bar D, and takes the place of one of the 
foot-slats. f is a truss attached at each end 
to the ends of the bar c, and contacts the 
lower edge of the single flange of the T-bar. 
This strengthens the bar c, and hence it may 
be lighter material. I prefer this construction 
to that in Figs. 1 and 2. 
I form a little niche in the under edge of the 
T-bar, for the truss f to fit into and obviate 
lateral displacement thereby. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
The combination of the body, fulcrumed at 
the forward end, and the axle, with the spring, 
consisting of two connected coils made from a 
single strip of metal, said coils being inverted 90 
in their relative position to each other, the 
inner end of the rear coil being rigidly attached 
to the axle, and the inner end of the forward 
coil being attached to the body in the relation 
shown, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony of the foregoing I have here 
unto subscribed my name in presence of two 
witnesses. 
95 
75 
BYRON J. EIEALY. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. O. B. HALL, 
SAMUEL FOLZ. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364814.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 364,814. 
 
E., & H. GANGWER, 
TOWEL RACK. 
Patented June 14, 1887. 
WITNESSES: 
-6 (6.47- 
6624,-4- 
&al 4 - 
$7%.47% T INVENTORS: 
BY 
44.4, -Z, a 4-4- 
AITORNEYS 
Photo-littingraphur. Washi 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD GANGWER AND HERBERT GANGWER, OF WEATHERLY, PENNSYL 
WANIA. 
TOWE a RACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 364,8l4, dated June 14, 1887, 
Application filed April 2, 1887. Serial No. 233,368. (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, EDWARD GANGWER 
and HERBERT GANGWER, of Weatherly, in 
the county of Carbon and State of Pennsylva 
nia, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Towel-Racks, of which the following, 
taken in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
This invention consists in a novel construc 
tion of a towel-rack in which towel-support 
ing rollers are journaled on spindles arranged 
axially in line with each other and coupled 
together by intervening elastic connections, 
said rack being thus rendered flexible, and 
by the deflection of its central portion causing 
the towel to be retained in its proper central 
position, on the rack; and the invention also 
consists in certain peculiarities of the details 
of the construction of the spindles and their 
elastic connections and supporting-arms, and, 
furthermore, in a novel construction of a 
bracket especially adapted for supporting the 
aforesaid flexible spindles, all as hereinafter 
more fully described and specifically set forth 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front view of our improved towel-rack. Fig. 
2 is an end view of the same, and Fig. 3 is a 
perspective view of the flexible spindles with 
their supporting-arms and attaching-prongs, 
all formed of a continuous piece of wire. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
at a represent two spindles arranged axially 
in line with each other and coupled together 
at their adjacent ends by a spiral spring, b. 
From the opposite ends of the spindles pro 
ject radially the arms c c, from which are ex 
4o tended return-shanks did, which are parallel 
with the spindles and terminate with vertical 
attaching-prongs e. e. Said spindles, with the 
intervening spiral spring and supporting-arms 
and shanks c c and dd and attaching-prongs 
e e, we form of a continuous piece of wire. 
r represent the towel-supporting rollers, 
which are journaled on the spindles a. a, and 
are obviously connected thereto before bend 
ing the wire into the shape of the arms c c, 
shanks did, and prongs e. e. 
A represents the bracket on which the 
towel-rack is to be supported. Said bracket 
is formed with vertical sockets S s, adapted to 
receive endwise the attaching-prongs 
ee. The 
SO 
45 
35 
- 
C 
upper ends of the sockets are provided with 
notches in n, in which the shanks did rest when 
the towel-rack is mounted on the bracket. By 
seating the aforesaid shanks in the notched 
portions of the sockets said shanks are to a 
certain degree braced and locked, so as to pre 
vent the attaching prongs e e from turning in 
the Sockets. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A towel-rack comprising spindles ar 
ranged axially in line with each other and 
coupled together by intervening elastic con 
nections, and rollers journaled on said spin 
dles, as set forth. 
2. In a towel-rack, the combination of spin 
dles arranged axially in line with each other 
and coupled together by a spiral spring inter 
posed between the adjacent ends of said spin 
dles, and rollers journaled on said spindles, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of the spindles a. a. and 
spiral Spring b, formed of a continuous piece 
of wire, and the rollers ' ', journaled on said 
spindles, substantially as described and shown. 
4. The spindles a a, formed with the radial 
arms c c, return-shanks did, and attaching 
prongs e e, all in one piece of wire, in combi 
nation with the rollers " " and sockets ss, sub 
stantially as described and shown. 
5. The spindles a. a, intermediate spiral, b, 
radial arms c c, return-shanks did, and attach 
ing-prongsee, all formed of a continuous piece 
of wire, in combination with the rollers "r, and 
sockets s s, substantially as described and 
shown. 
6. The bracket A, formed with sockets ss, 
having notches. n n, in combination with the 
spindles a ct, formed with the intermediate 
spiral, b, radial arms c c, return-shanks did, 
and attaching-prongsee, of a continuous piece 
of wire, and the rollers ' ', mounted on said 
spindles, substantially as described and shown. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto 
signed our names and affixed our seals, in the 
presence of two attesting witnesses, at Weath 
erly borough, in the county of Carbon, in the 
State of Pennsylvania, this 29th day of March, 
1887. 
EDWARD GANGWER, E. s. 
HERBERT GANGWER, L, s. 
- 
Witnesses: 
R. B. EADIE, 
GEO. H. JONES. 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US364914.txt	(No Model.) 
T. FARMER, 
CAR COUPLNG 
No. 364,914, 
Patented June 14, 1887. 
17 
Z727. -Z. 
/7 
ITWESSES 
21- 
r 
4-1. a two 
Attorney 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS FARMER, OF OIL CITY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CAR. COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 364,914, dated June 14, 1887. 
Application filed March 12, 1887. Serial No. 220,728. (No model.) 
N 
S 
25 
35 
5 
To all, whom it may concern: 
which it may be operated from either side of the 
Be it known that I, THOMAS FARMER, re-car. The lever is fulcrumed in journal-bear 
siding at Oil City, in the county of Venango 
ings F, secured to the transverse sills or beams 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
G. at the ends of the car in such manner that 
the loop may be raised to clear the hooks of 5o 
certain new and useful Car-Coupling; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
the draw-bars or engage the same at Will. 
The letter Hindicates a curved spring. Two 
clear, and exact description of the invention. 
This invention relates to certain improve. 
of these are secured to each end of the car on 
opposite sides, in Such position as to engage 
ments in car-couplers; and it has for its ob 
the bent outward ends of the coupling-levers, 55 
Ojects to so construct the coupling mechanism 
and hold the same, whether thrown up or down, 
and devices that the same can be operated from 
to prevent accidental shifting. The loop of 
either'side of the car, thereby avoiding the ne 
the levers is made heavy enough to overbal 
cessity of entering between the contiguous ends 
ance the full weight of the same, so that when 
of the cars composing the train, thus obviat 
down over the hook its gravity will tend to 6o 
ing all danger of injury to the train-hands, 
keep it in position. 
and enabling the cars of the train to be read 
The letter I indicates two pivoted links se 
ily uncoupled in case of accidents, so as to pre 
cured to the respective draw-heads of the car. 
vent the spread of fire throughout the train in 
These are intended to be used in coupling with 
case oae or more of the cars should become 
a car having an ordinary coupling-head, in- 65 
ignited, as more fully hereinafter specified. 
stead of the loose links heretofore employed. 
These objects I attain by the means illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
As constructed it will be seen that the coup 
ling devices may be operated entirely from the . 
. 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of the 
sides of the car without any necessity of work 
contiguous portions of two cars of a train, 
ing between the same, and that by means of 7o 
showing my coupling mechanism; Fig. 2, a 
the curved spring the coupling-lever may be 
detached perspective view of a coupling-lever 
held either up or down, thus avoiding the dan 
forming part of my invention; and Fig. 3, a 
ger attendant upon the ordinary methods of 
detached perspective view of one end of a car, 
coupling. 
showing the coupling-lever and spring for 
holding the same when elevated. 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
The letter A indicates two contiguous cars 
of any description, and B the draw-bars there 
S 
The combination, with the draw-heads of the 
of, which are secured underneath the cars in 
cars having hooked extremities, of the coup 
any convenient manner. The projecting ends 
ling-levers journaled in bearings secured to 8o 
of the draw-bars are bent upwardly, and are 
the ends of the cars, the said levers being pro 
beveled on their outer faces, so as to cause the 
vided with bent arms at their projecting ends, 
loop of the coupling-lever to ride up and over 
and the curved springs, whereby the levers 
the ends of the same automatically when the 
are held in upright position, substantially as 
cars come together, in case the loop of said 
specified. 
coupling-lever should be down, thus prevent 
THOMAS FARMER. 
ing injury to the same when the cars abut. 
The letter C indicates the coupling-levers. 
These consist each of a metallic rod bent cen 
trally, so as to form a loop, D, and at right an 
45 gles at each end, so as to form handles E, by 
Having thus described my invention, what I 75 
Witnesses: 
R. B. MIAGEE, 
J. F. MAGEE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365015.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
T. W. MOORE 
WELOCIPEDE. 
No. 365,015, 
Patented June l4, 1887, 
WITNESSES: 
(NS N 
7. 
f 
f 
ATTORNEY 
 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
T. W. MOORE 
WELOCIPEDE 
No. 365,015. 
Patented June 14, 1887. 
E. 
 
2 
f 
fM 
w 
: 
z 
-A2Z e 
WITNESSES 
 
SNS was 32 
ATTORNEY 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS W. MOORE, OF PLAINFIELD, NEW JERSEY. 
WELO CPE DE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 365,015, dated June l4, 1887. 
Application filed February 21, 1887. Serial No. 22S,237. No model.) 
To (t2Z auhon, it naiy concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS W. MOORE, of 
Plainfield, Union county, New Jersey, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Tricycles, of which the following is a specifi 
Cation. 
My invention consists of improvements in 
tricycles, whereof the essential features are, 
first, a contrivance of the same in the general 
appearance of and so that the operator rides 
it substantially in the manner of the bicycle; 
Second, in improved contrivance of treadle 
mechanism for working the cranks; third, in 
improved anti-friction gear for the main wheel; 
and, fourth, in a guard attachment for coln 
Cealing the feet and protecting the dresses of 
the riders, all as hereinafter fully described, 
reference being made to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved tri 
Cycle. Fig. 2 is a side elevation. Fig. 3 is a 
detail of the anti-friction gear of the main axle 
in Sectional elevation on line acac, Fig. 4, and 
On an enlarged scale. Fig. 4 is a vertical 
transverse section of Fig. 3. 
Figs. 5 to S, in 
clusive, are details of the joint contrivances of 
the treadle mechanism, and Fig. 9 is an out 
line of a modified form of treadle mechanism 
that may be employed. 
Together with two small balancing and guid 
ing Wheels, ct, placed in front of the main wheel 
b, Ilocate the seat cabove said main wheel and 
suitably forward of its axis, substantially like 
the bicycles of that class in which the small 
Wheel is placed in front, and thus I make a 
tricycle in which the operator's position is the 
Same as, and the whole general appearance 
is like that of, the bicycle, which brings these 
tWO kinds of machines into much greater simi 
larity and closer alliance than as heretofore 
constructed, and is a matter of importance, in 
that it enables ladies to ride them and men 
unskilled in the bicycle to enter into more in 
timate association and competition with the 
bicycle-riders than heretofore. 
In carrying out this part of my invention a 
suitable bed-frame, dd, seat stanchions e, and 
fore bar, f, are provided, in which the main 
Wheel b is mounted at the rear, in the lisual 
Way, and the axle of the guide - wheels is 
coupled to the front end of said frame by the 
O 
25 
SO 
55 
OC 
usual joint, ty, for steering purposes, With a 
toothed segment, h, on the axle and a pinion, 
i, or it may be any equivalent means for 
working and controlling the guide - wheels 
with a steering-shaft, j, and wheel k, suitably 
located in front of the operator. 
For the treadle-gear, I propose to mount 
each treatlle l on one arm of the first joint of 
a lazy-tongs system of transmitting-levers, of 
which the other arm is pivoted at in to the 
bed-frame for a fulcrum, and the other extrem 
ity of the system is connected to the crank n, 
the fulcrum and treadles being SO placed rela 
tively to the main wheel that the treadles are 
located at the front of said wheel, so that 
ladies may work them from the seat located in 
the position of the bicycle-seat. In the con 
struction of these lever systems, I arrange each 
pair with about two to one (more or less) of 
leverage in favor of the treadle, whereby I in 
crease the force on the crank and attain greater 
speed. 
To avoid lateral vibration in the joints of 
these lever systems, and at the same time to 75 
provide easy joints that will not wear slack, I 
construct the joints o, uniting the lever of each 
pair, with a pivot, p, having a wide head, (1, 
for firm seating laterally against the side of 
the lever, and much longer than the thickness 
of the two levers, with an arched washer, s, 
under the head of the projecting end, and fit 
a washer, t, with friction-rollers at, on said pivot 
between the levers. The base of washer S is 
flanged over the edges of the lever to which it 
is fitted, as shown by dotted line , for sub 
stantial Seating. 
For the joints at, connecting the ends of the 
levers, I make a wide fork, a, in the end of 
one of Said evers, with a face-plate extension, 
y, of one of the members of the fork, and fit 
the sides of the other lever snugly between 
the forks, with bearing-ribs 3 in the forks and 
on the face-plate, insuring the desired lateral 
stability. The terminal lever connecting with 
the crank is extended beyond the joint 0, and 
thus the crank and levers of the lever system 
will not be on centers at the same time, espe 
cially if the extension be bent up or down; or 
it may be the crank will then be at an angle af. 
fording leverage while the treadle-levers are 
passing centers. This lever system of treadle 
8O 
GO 
ICO 
 
365,015 
5 
40 
45 
1. The extension-lever treadle mechanisms 
filcrumed by one arm and fitted with a treadle 
on the other arm of the first pair of levers, and 
connected by the other terminal of the system 
with the crank, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the treadle-levers, 
of the anti-friction-roller washers interposed 
between the levers and fitted on the lever-piv. 
ots, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, in the treadle - lever 
joints o, of the extension-pivot, bow-washer, 
and the anti-friction-roller washer interposed 
between the levers, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the face-plate exten 
sion y of the joint-fork ac and the bearing 
ribs & of the lever fitted in the fork, substan 
tially as described. 
5. The combination of the ring e' with the 
anti-friction rollers c', or their equivalents, on 
the journal, and the rollers f' in the stanchions, 
substantially as described. . . 
6. The combination of the oil-channels in 
the ringsg' with the roller-pivots fitted in said 
rings, substantially as described. 
7. The combination, in a tricycle, of a pair 
of guiding and balancing wheels located for 
ward of the main driving-wheel, the operator's 
seat located over the front portion of the driv 
ing-wheel, treadles extended to the front of the 
main wheel, orthereabout, and a basket guard 
located between the guiding-wheels and sur 
rounding the treadles at the front and the sides 
back of said guiding-wheels, so as to conceal 
the feet of the operator both at the front and 
sides, substantially as described. 
- 
THOMAS W. MOORE. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN WoLF, 
W. J. MORGAN. 
mechanism is alike applicable to bicycles as 
well as tricycles. 
I may use the elbow-lever treadle a? and 
connecting-rod b', (represented in Fig. 9,) in 
Stead of the above-described extension-lever 
System, in Some cases. 
For an anti-friction contrivance of the axle 
bearings of the main wheel for an easy and 
fast-running machine, I fit the anti-friction 
rollers c, commonly used on the journals d", 
within an outer ring, e, which is carried on 
the rollers f' on fixed pivots in the stanchions 
e, connecting said anti-friction rollers c' with 
rings g at each end, which keep them prop 
erly spaced. The ringe', thus combined with 
the anti-friction rollers c' of the axle and roll 
ers f' of the stanchion, materially lessens the 
friction and enables the machine to run lighter 
and faster. With the slight grooves in the 
axle and ring indicated. at t, balls may be 
used instead of the rollers c, and I propose 
to use them when preferred. I construct the 
irings g with a little flange, h, projecting out 
wardly from the inner edge, and slightly off. 
set from the outside, to form a slight groove 
for conducting oil, which may be poured into 
said grooves through oil-holes i' in the stan 
chions, along the rings to the pivots f' of rollers 
c', for lubricating them. The guard k", of 
woven wood or wire, is applied to the bed 
frame and stanchions to conceal the feet and 
ankles of the operator and protect the dress 
from the wheel b, said guard being made with 
openings at on for the treadle-levers to work 
through when the guard is preferably turned 
into the spaces between the levers and the 
wheel. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
20 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365115.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 365,115, 
S. O. BIGNEY. 
ORNAMENTAL CHAN. 
Patented June 21, 1887, 
 
 
WITNEE 
(a6.7% 
277 
724. 
34: 
A 
25 
t; 
8% Azz% 
44 
NL PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIDNEY O. BIGNEY, OF ATTLEBOROUGH, MASSACHUSETTS. 
ORNAMENTAL CHAN. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 365,115, dated June 21, 1887. 
Application filed May 10, 1887. Serial No. 23,093. (No model.) 
O 
2 
To all, Luhon, it inctly conce7'70: 
Be it known that I, SIDNEY O. BIGNEY, of 
Attleborough, in the county of Bristol and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Ornamental Chains; 
and I hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification. 
This invention. has reference to an improve-- 
ment in the construction of ornamental chains, 
as will be more fully set forth hereinafter. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the improved 
chain on an enlarged scale. 
Fig. 2 is a face } 
view of the same, and Fig. 3 is a sectional 
view showing one of the connecting-links be 
fore the Same is closed. 
In the drawings, ct at (, are the links forming 
the main portion of the chain. They may be 
of any desired form or size, but are usually 
small rings, such as form the units in what are 
known in the art as roller' chains. 
l b are the connecting-links, usually bent 
from wire, and preferably of square or nearly 
Square cross-section. 
c care short pieces of tubular wire. 
The links act, connecting-links b b, and pieces 
of tubular wire having been first formed, the 
connecting-link is passed through the link (t, 
the tubular wire c is inserted into the next 
link at, and the ends of connecting-link b are 
forced into the piece c of tubular wire. The 
corners of the Square connecting-link bearing 
against the interior surface of the tubular wire 
firmly retain the ends, and they do not require 
to be secured by solder, thereby causing a large 
Saving in labor, and also producing a chain 
more flexible than a soldered chain, while the 
Same is equally as strong. 
The tubular-wire pieces c inserted into the 
main links (t greatly increase the ornamental 
appearance of the chain, and, as the Wear comes 
largely on these pieces c of tubular wire, the 
durability of the chain is materially increased. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Lettel's 
Patent 
1. In an ornamental chain, the combination, 
with the links at a and the connecting-links b 
l, of the tubular pieces e c, constructed to re 
ceive the connecting-link, as described. 
2. The combination, with the links ( a. and 
connecting-links b b, of the tubular pieces c c, 
constructed to receive the ends of the Connect 
ing-links, as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the links ( ( and 
connecting-links b b, of the tubular pieces e c, 
constructed to receive the ends of the connect 
ing-links and secure the same by frictional 
contact, as described. 
SIDNEY O. BIGNEY. 
Witnesses: 
M. F. BLIGH, 
J. A. MILLER, Jr. 
35 
O 
45 
55 
 
B. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365215.txt	(No Model.) 
R. E. WILLIAMS, 
REFLECTOR FOR LAMPS, 
No. 365,215, 
Patented June 21, 1887. 
FIVESSES 
IWWEWTOR 
Attorneu-4 
s. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT E. WILLIAMS, OF DALLAS, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO T. 
G. HAMMER, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA. 
REFLECTOR FOR LAMPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Paterat No. 365,215, dated June 21, 1887. 
Application filed September 20, 1SS6. Serial No. 214,003. (No model.) 
I5 adjusted to an ordinary lamp. 
curvature of that portion of the surface of the 
To aid u?ion, it inctly concern: 
reflector which is in a vertical line through 
Be it known that I, ROBERT E. WILLIAMS, 
said bail, the ends of said wire being attached 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
to a collar, D, by passing the ends through 
Dallas, in the county of Dallas and State of 
holes in said collar, curving them around in a 
5 Texas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Reflectors for Lamps, &c.; 
bead, H, and soldering them fast. 
The wire loop ?its sufficiently tight in the 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
bail to hold the reflector in any desired posi 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, and the collar turns freely enough to al 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the 
low the reflector to be swung around the light 
Io art to which it appertains to make and use the 
to any desired place. The adaptability of the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
reflector to be tilted upon its attachment pro 
vides for its performing the office of a shade 
fication, and in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my reflector 
as well as of a reflector. 
Fig. 2 is a 
This reflector may be made of any desired 
material, glass or metal, and may be changed 
similar view of the same attached to a lamp 
and so adjusted as to adapt the lamp for stu 
Somewhat in shape, if desired. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
dent use. Fig. 3 is a back elevation of the 
leflector and its means of attachment, and 
claim 
2d Fig. 4 represents a plan view and cross-sec 
In a reflector for lamps, the combination of 
a collar provided with a bead and laving two 
tion of the attachment. 
holes through said bead, a looped wire the 
Like letters of reference indicate correspond 
ing parts throughout the several figures. 
looped portion of which is curved and the 
ends of which are also curved and passed 
My invention has relation to reflectors for 
through the holes in said collar and rigidly Se 
25 lamps and to means for attaching the same; and 
it consists in the improved construction and 
cured within said bead, and a shell the upper 
combination of parts constituting the same, as end of which is provided with a hole and the 
lower with a bail for securing the same upon 65 
will be hereina?ter fully set forth. 
the curved portion of Said loop. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
3o sents the reflector, which is in form an ellip 
soidal shell provided near one end with an 
opening for the lamp chimney and at the other in presence of two witnesses. 
end with means for connecting it to a lamp. 
Said means consist of a flat bail, B, secured 
35 to the back of the reflector, through which 
passes a looped wire, C, bent in the plane of 
the loop into an arc which conforms to the 
Witnesses: 
ALEX. E. BOU("LIE, 
N. G. TURNEY. 
45 
55 
ROBERT E. WILLIAMS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365315.txt	(No Model.) 
J. L. MITCHELL, 
ROTARY WALWE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
- - - 
- 
- 
No. 365,315. 
3. Hill. 
Patented June 21, 1887. 
Fig. 2. 
2 
 
 
 
2Z. 
 
  
 
 
WITNESSES: 
m 
?erv wave. 
INVENTOR : 
(-tacte? ( 
By CKaa /3-cor 
AITORNEY. 
 
(No Model,) 
J. L. MITCHELL, 
ROTARY WALWE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, . 
No. 365,315, 
Patented June 21, 1887. 
Hill. 
See 
  
  
  
a. 
d . 
444444444444444 ZZ  &2 
xz 
 
a 
WITNESSES : 
m 
O. 6. o-cal- 
Ave 
INVENTOR: 
f. 
Maz-4-(e. 
BY CKao /3.ucco 
ATTORNEY. 
N. PerERS, photo-Lithographer, Washington. ), C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JONAS L. MITCHELL OF LOGAN, OHIO. 
ROARY WAVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 365,315, dated June 21, 1887. 
w 
Application filed October 5, 1886. Serial No. 215,334. (No model.) 
To cult, whom it may concern. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Logan, 
in the county of Hocking and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
provements in Rotary Valves, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved cut-off 
Valve, the object of which is to provide for 
the adjustment of the wearing parts, whereby, 
When the same become loose in consequence 
of Wear they may readily be tightened up 
Without taking the valve apart. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, (two sheets,) in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of the en 
tire valve. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of 
the valve-case, taken in a direction transverse 
to that shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a view of 
the valve-stem separate, part being shown in 
Section. Fig. 4 is a view of the valve-stem 
and Wedge-shaped valve-plug expanders. Fig. 
5 is a section of the valve-stem and expand 
ers on the line acac of Fig. 4. Figs. 6 and 7 
show both end and cross-section views of the 
adjustable two-part valve-plug. Fig. 8 is a 
view of the screw-gland. Fig. 9 is a longi 
tudinal section of the entire valve, taken on 
the same line as Fig. 2. Fig. 10 is a sectional 
view of a steam-cylinder, showing the im 
proved cut-off valve applied thereto. 
Fig. 
11 shows the gear attachment for operating 
the valve on the steam-cylinder. 
The Valve-case A has at the inlet b a screw 
threaded connection, and at the outlet can 
other similar connection. The case is provided 
at the inlet side with a semicircular divide or 
partition, d, which forms two diverging inlet 
passage ways, d. The valve-seat e is on each 
side of the way d. 
by the valve-plug C at diametrical opposite 
points. The two passage-ways are of the same 
area or capacity. This is a useful feature, as 
thereby the pressure of the fluid is on oppo 
site sides of the valve-plug, and is equal on 
opposite sides. The valve therefore is a non 
pressure valve. 
On one side of the valve-case is an opening 
or bearing, f, for the valve-stem C, and on 
the opposite side is a screw-neck, f, for the 
Screw-gland g. The valve-stem C' is round at 
each end. The end f' fits in the case-bear 
Beit known that I, JoNASL. MITCHELL, a ingf, and the end g its in the screw-gland 9. 
Between the round ends the -valve-stem is 
Square, as at h, and a rigidly-fixed collar, j, 
Separates each round end from the square 
part. One of these collars bears against the 
case around the opening or bearing f', and the 
other collar is in contact with the screw-gland 
g. This latter, therefore, by pressingendwise 
on the valve-stem, makes a steam-tight joint. 
The valve-stem at one end has alongitudinal 
bore which extends from the end to the square 
parth, whereat is a cross-mortise, i. A screw 
threaded bolt, k, fits the said longitudinal bore 
of the stem, and has at its inner end a round 
head, k", which carries loosely a cross-head, i. 
The cross-head occupies the cross-mortise iin 
the stem and projects laterally from each side. 
By turning the threaded bolt k the cross-head 
i' may be moved back or forth in the cross 
mortise, for a purpose hereinafter set forth. 
The valve-plug C is made in two parts. (See 
Figs. 6 and 7.) 
Each part has an exterior 
rounded surface, e, to fit the valve seate on 
the case. Each part also has three sides, simi 
lar to a letter U, and one part is enough 
smaller than the other to fit within it, as shown 
in Fig. 9. Each part also has an internal in 
clined side, m. That end of each valve-plug 
where the inclined side is thickest rests against 
one of the collars i. Two wedge-shaped or 
tapering expanders, F, unite the valve-plug C 
with the valve-stem C, so that when the stem 
is partly rotated the valve-plug will also be 
partly rotated. The said two expanders Fare 
shorter than the square part h of the valve 
stem and set on opposite sides thereof between 
the two collars j. The outer sides, l, of each 
expander are parallel, and one side, In, is 
Both ways d are cut off wedge-shaped or tapering, whereby when on 
the valve-stem the two tapered sides n are 
opposite each other, and these tapered sides 
are in contact with the inclined sides in of the 
valve-plug. The parallel sides l of the ex 
panders fit close on the valve-stem; but the 
other sides fit loose, or with a space between. 
This is to allow the valve-plugs C to adjust 
themselves in the event their surfaces e wear 
unevenly. Both sides l of each expander 
have a notch, i, and the notches in the two 
expanders coincide or confront each other. 
O 
45 
55 
7 O 
So 
OO 
 
365,315 
55. 
and means, substantially as described, for op- 45 
erating said expanders, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. In a cut-off valve, the combination, with 
the casing, the valve-plug made in Sections 
one within the other, the expanders F, also 
made in sections and having notches i'i, of the 
valve-stem C, having bolt lic, with mortise and 
cross-head to operate said expanders on the 
valve-stem, and the collars ji, as shown and 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a cut-off valve, the combination, with 
the casing provided with an inlet and outlet 
and a screw-gland, the valve-stem, constructed 
as described, of the plug made in sections one 
within the other, with rounded surfaces e cand 
inclined sides an in, as shown and described, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a cut-off valve, the combination, with 
the casing having an inlet and outlet, the screw 
gland 0, the valve-stem C, having rounded 
upper and lower portions, f' (f', engaging the 
bearings of the case and gland, said stem also 
provided with collars if, and a squared por 
tion, h, between the collars, of the valve plug 
C, made in sections one seated within the 
other, as shown and described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
5. In a cut-off waive, the combination, with 
the casing, constructed as described, the gland 
1, the valve-stem C, working in Said casing 
and gland, provided with an opening, i, and 
longitudinal bore, the bolt kin said bore, hav 
ing head k", provided with cross-head it, work 
ing in said opening, of the expanders F F, 
having notches i i", engaging said cross-head, 
as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
65 
75 
the presence of two witnesses. 
JONAS L. MITCHELL. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN B. COCHRAE, 
J. J. GILLIESPIE. 
O 
The laterally-projected ends of the movable 
cross-head i' occupy the notch i' in the ex 
panders, and thereby when the threaded bolt 
Ic moves the cross-head the two expanders also 
move along the square part h of the valve 
stem, and the tapered sides an of the ex 
panders move along the internal inclined sides, 
m, of the plug. Thus it will be seen that if the 
valve-plug C is loose in the valve-seat e the 
movement of the expanders F will tighten it 
up. An annular space, n, is formed around 
each collari, which may be filled by steam or 
other fluid. The end f' of the valve stem has 
attached a lever, ty, whereby the valve is con 
trolled or shifted to effect, the cut-off. 
As a cut-off valve, this device is effective 
and satisfactory, and the described construc 
tion allows of the valve-plug being adjusted 
to the seat without taking the valve out. The 
adjustment is effected from the outside by the 
Screw-threaded bolt c. By this means engi 
neers are saved all trouble in taking up lost 
motion and looseness of fit induced by wear. 
This valve is applicable to many purposes 
or uses. It may be used on steam-engines, 
Steam and air pumps, air-compressors, and 
other machines. In Fig. 10 it is shown applied 
as a cut-off to a steam-cylinder. 
The letter O designates the cylinder, p the 
steam-chest, q the steam-pipe, ' the exhaust, 
and S the piston. Four valves C are here 
employed, and with each valve a divide or par 
tition, d, forms the diverging inlet-passage ways 
d". The valves are properly connected and 
operated by a rod, t, attached to the valve 
lever g. 
The operation will be readily understood. 
Having described my invention, I claim and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
States 
1. In a cut-off valve, the combination, with 
the valve-stem, constructed as described, of the 
tapering expanders FF, having notches i i", 
capable of vertical motion on the valve-stem, 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365415.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 365,415. 
 
L., TIMMINS, 
CAR COUPLING, 
Patented June 28, 1887. 
tra 
% 
Z 1. -) 
A 2. %f 
- 1 
| EAELY 
H4% 
| 
 
 
 
 
- 
 
 
-7| 
 
 
w 
Z% 
Azo FEA 
al 
 
    
 
 
ECAe 
Sises real 
o 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LINDSAY TIMMINS, OF NEW CARLISLE, OHIO. 
CAR-COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 365,415, dated June 28, 1887. 
Application filed March 23, 1887. Serial No.232,143. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, LINDSAY TrMMINs, a 
Citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Carlisle, in the county of Clark and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Car-Couplers, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
car-couplings; and the invention consists of a 
draw-head having a pin-support to allow it to 
drop down and enter an incoming link, and 
another pin-support which will not allow the 
pin to drop down when its head is met by an 
other draw-head, the peculiarities of which 
will hereinafter more fully appear. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, and in which like 
reference-letters indicate corresponding fea 
tures, Figure 1 represents a vertical section 
of a draw-head, showing one of my pin-sup 
ports in partial section and partial elevation; 
Fig. 2, a front or face view of the draw-head, 
showing both of my pin - supports applied 
thereto; Fig. 3, a like view of the vertical or 
SWinging support; Fig. 4, a partial plan and 
Sectional view showing the horizontal support 
projected into the pin-aperture; and Fig. 5, 
a partial sectional and front view, also show. 
ing the horizontal support projected into the 
pin-aperture and the pin supported thereby. 
The letter A refers to the draw-head, con 
structed of metal and provided at the upper 
side with a sleeve or collar, B, which serves 
to prevent the pin from tipping over when 
supported by the horizontal support, as seen 
in Fig. 5, the position or altitude of the said 
support determining the length of the sleeve. 
The head is also provided with a narrow slot, 
C, which receives the vertical or swinging 
support, and which is sufficiently deep to allow 
the support to swing back far enough to clear 
the coupling-pin, and far enough to prevent 
the link from injuring it, the link itself being 
met by the wall C. The upper portion of the 
head is also cored out, as seen in Fig. 6, to 
leave recesses C", in which the support is piv 
oted, and into which it recedes when in the 
position shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1. This 
its ends 
turned upward at F and provided with holes 
- 
plns. 
through which extends a pivot-pin, G, a hole 
also being cored out in the draw-head from 
each side to the pin-aperture H. There are 
two pivot-pins, one at either side. This sup 
port further consists of a curved arm, I, which 
extends down into and vertically across the 
link-passage in the head and is engaged by 
the incoming link in the act of coupling and 
thrown back into the recess C, thus removing 
the bar E from under the coupling-pin and 
allowing it to descend. In some cases, if de 
sired, the bar E may have its ends turned, as 
seen in Fig. 3, and fitted into the holes in the 
draw-head, thus dispensing with the pivot 
The horizontal support consists of a hook, 
J, pivoted to the draw-head, as to a lug, K, 
extending from the sleeve B, and having a 
projecting end, L, which enters a hole in the 
sleeve and extends partly across the path of 
the coupling-pin, whereby it serves to support 
that pin as seen in Fig. 5. Thus it will be 
seen that my coupling provides for support 
ing the pin and allowing it to automatically 
drop into the link, and also provides for sus 
taining the pin against dropping down when 
it is desired to prevent the coupling of cars, 
although they are brought against each other. 
It should be observed that the arm I will like 
wise recede into the slot, even though the in 
coming link be carried by a lower car and be 
projected into the head in an inclined posi 
tion, as seen in dotted lines in Fig. 1, the ad 
vantage of allowing the arm to extend back 
out of reach of the link being that it prevents 
the link from mashing and injuring it. 
It 
should be noted that the recesses C" in the up 
per portion of the head allow of this free rear 
ward travel of the support. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a car. coupling, the combination, with 
the draw-head, of a pivoted depending pin 
support, a pin fitted vertically in the head and 
supported by said support, and an arm ex 
tending down and adapted to be engaged by 
an incoming link, of a horizontal pivoted sup 
ort and a hole through which it can be pro 
jected to sustain the coupling-pin. 
2. In a car. coupling, the combination, with 
SO support consists of a bar, E, having 
25 
35 
40 
55 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
2 
365,415 
5 
a draw-head having a sleeve on its upper face, 
of a hook pivoted to said sleeve and having 
an end adapted to be projected through the 
sleeve and partly across the coupling-pin path. 
3. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-head having a sleeve on its upper face 
and a hook pivoted to said sleeve and having 
an end adapted to be projected through the 
sleeve and partly across the coupling-pin path, 
Io of a bar pivoted to the head and extending 
across the pin-path and under the upper half 
of the head, and an arm extending downward 
from the bar and across the path of an incom 
ing link. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 15 
Witnesses: 
CHASE STEWART, 
A. A. YEATMAN. 
L. TIMMIINS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365516.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
No. 365,516, 
H. A. GROTHOLT MAN. 
BEAN CUTTER, . 
Patented June 28, 1887. 
(SVA, 
8 
 
 
Z722/ezzor. r 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY A. GROTHOLTMAN, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA. 
BEAN - CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 365,516, dated June 28, 1887. 
K 
Application filed February 15, 1887. Serial No. 227,728. (No model.) 
. 
- 
O 
IS 
To aid, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EENRY A. GROTHOLT 
MAN, of Fort Wayne, in the county of Allen 
and State of Indiana, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Bean-Cutters, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
new and useful improvements in machines for 
slicing beans for pickling and other purposes, 
so that the machines will be simple in con 
struction, and rapid and effective in operation. 
The invention consists in a novel construc 
tion and combination of parts, as hereinafter 
fully described, and particularly pointed out 
in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. . 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved bean-cutter. Fig. 2 is a sectional ele 
vation through one of the feed-tubes and a 
cutter-knife co-operating there with. Fig. 3 
is a sectional elevation of the machine. Fig. 
4 is a detail plan view of the rotary cutter 
disk. 
The support C, which may be a table-top, 
is formed with the circular opening C, over 
which is placed the casing of the machine. 
The casing consists of the cylinder B, open 
at its lower end and received thereat in 
groove formed in a ring, D, secured to the 
support C, around the top of the opening C 
therein. The upper end of the cylinder B is 
covered by a circular head, F, formed in its 
under face with a peripheral groove to receive 
the upper edge of the cylinder B. 
On the top of the head Fis secured the ver 
tical D-shaped frame A, which supports the 
driving mechanism. Long vertical bolts f 
are passed through each end of the frame A, 
through the projecting edge of the head F, 
outside the cylinder B, through the ring D 
and the support C, and receive nuts on their 
lower threaded ends. By Screwing up these 
nuts the bolts fmay be drawn tight to firmly 
secure the parts of the machine together and 
to the support C. 
so In one side of the D-shaped frame A is 
45 
55 
journaled a short horizontal shaft, G, the 
outer end of which carries a crank-arm, a, 
while on the inner end is mounted a bevel 
gear-wheel, c, which engages with a bevel gear 
wheel, b, on the central vertical shaft, d. The 
vertical shaft d is journaled in the straight 
arm of the D-shaped frame A, passes down 
through the head F, and receives on its lower 
end the cutter-disk r. The cutter-disk 
is 
held between nuts screwing on the lower 
threaded end of the shaft d, whereby it may 
be adjusted vertically and clamped firmly in 
place thereon. At equal intervals on the disk 
r", near the periphery thereof, are provided 
raised blocks, on which are secured by screws 
or otherwise the flat cutter blades or knives 
12, and in front of the blades openings s are 
formed in the disk. The green beans to be 
sliced, are fed through openings e in the head 
F, and are guided by the tubes m, inclined in 
the direction of rotation of the cutter-disk r, 
into the path of the cutter-blades. The cut 
ter-disk is revolved by means of the crank 
arm and bevel-gear described, and the cutter 
blades m, revolving parallel and closely to the 
lower ends of the inclined guide-tubes m, so 
as to shave the same, quickly and smoothly 
slice the beans, the pieces of which fall through 
the openingss in the cutter-disk and through 
the open bottom of the casing into a suitable 
receptacle placed beneath the support C. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The bean-cutter consisting of the outer 
casing having head F, and downwardly-pro 
jecting inclined feed-tubes, the vertical shaft 
d, screw-threaded at its lower end and pro 
vided with disk-shaped cutter-head , with 
slicing-knives, and nuts arranged upon the 
threaded end upon opposite sides of the cut 
ter-head for adjusting the latter vertically, a 
crank-shaft, G, and bevel-wheelsb c, connect 
ing the crankshaft to the vertical shaft, and 
the frame A, mounted upon the head F, and 
forming bearings for both the vertical shaft 
and the crank-shaft, and having a portion 
of the frame extending over the bevel-wheels, 
all combined substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
95 
OO 
2 
365,516 
having the opening C, the grooved ring D described. 
surrounding the opening, the cylinder IB, the 
head F of the cylinder, and the vertical frame 
5 A, in which the driving-gear is mounted, of 
long bolts f, passed through the frame, head, 
ritag, and support, and nuts screwed on the 
Witnesses: 
2. The combination, with the support, C, ends of said bolts, substantial 
ly as shown and 
IIIENRY A. (ROTIOLTMIAN 
JOIN DREIBELIBISS, 
THOS. S. HIELLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365616.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. LOMBAS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MACHINE FOR MANUFACTURING AND BLEACHING SUGAR, 
No. 365,616. 
is 1... 7 
Patented June 28, 1887. 
e 
& S 
 
  
 
 
 
- 
v. 
311-uc11 fez: . 
N. Peteks, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. A. L.0MBAS. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR MANUFACTURING AND BLEACHING SUGAR, 
No. 365,616. 
w 
sessesses a 
 
 
  
2 S. e2 
28itv.cscs - 
Wind/muk A, 
Zeze2a1 
 
33 4. &lt; 
a 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH A. LOMBAs, OF LOCKPORT, LOUISIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO PHLEGIE R. MELANCON, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR MANUFACTURING AND BLEACHING SUGAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 365,616, dated June 28, 1887. 
Application filed March 10, 1887. Serial No. 230,378, (No model.) 
C 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH A. LOMBAs, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Lockport, in the parish of La Fourche' and 
State of Louisiana, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Machines for Man 
ufacturing and Bleaching Sugar; and Idohere 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, and 
in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section 
of my improved machine for manufacturing 
and bleaching sugar. Fig. 2 is a transverse 
sectional view of the same through the plane 
indicated by the broken line ac a' in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a plan or top view of the machine 
with the arched top part or cover removed. 
Fig. 4 is a section through the casing which 
incloses the fan-wheel or bucket-wheel. Fig. 
5 is a perspective view of the outside of the 
machine; and Fig. 6 is a detail view of the 
tubular slotted shaft upon which the revolv 
ing drum or cylinder is mounted, showing also 
the swiveled steam-pipe for connecting said 
tubular shaft with the steam-supply when de 
sired. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond. 
ing parts in all the figures. 
My invention has relation to that class of 
machines which are used for bleaching the 
sugar as it comes from the coolers; and 
it consists in the construction and combina 
tion of parts of the improved inachine, which 
will be hereinafter more fully described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying two sheets of drawings, 
the letter A. designates the outside casing of 
the machine, which has an arched top, B, pro 
vided with an air-outlet, C, and a hinged cover, 
D, adapted to be swung back, so as to rest 
against the air-pipe or any other suitable sup 
port, as indicated in dotted lines. The lower 
part of the box or casing A is provided with 
a jacket, E, forming a chamber, F, surrounding 
the casing on all sides and extending under its 
5o bottom part, as clearly shown in the sectional 
45 
35 
- 
W 
views. 
: 
Upon one side of the casing A is another 
box or casing, G, which forms a steam-tight 
box for the fan-wheel or bucket-wheel H, the 
fans or buckets of which are so disposed that 
they will receive and be acted upon by a jet 
of steam entering the casing through the steam 
nozzle I. The central shaft, J, of the fan 
wheel coincides with the tubular central shaft, 
K, of a revolving drum or cylinder, L, made 
of finely - perforated sheet metal, fine wire 
gauze, or any other suitable material. The 
tubular shaft K of this drum is provided 
with two longitudinal slits or narrow slots, M 
M, extending from end to end within the cyl 
inder, and the other end of central shaft, K, 
is boxed in bearings in that side of the casing 
A in such a manner that the swiveled head N. 
of the steam-pipe O may be connected to the 
tubular shaft at will. Said steam-pipe O is 
provided below its swiveled head with a stop 
cock or faucet, P, so that the steam may be 
shut off during the operation of connecting or 
disconnecting the swiveled head N with the . 
tubular shaft K. 
The steam by which my machine is operated 
is fed to it through the main steam-pipe Q, 
one end of which is connected with a boiler, 
the exhaust from a steam-engine, or any other 
source of a steam-supply, while its other end 
terminates, as we have seen, in the steam 
nozzle I, which enters the fan-box G, and re 
volves the fan-wheel within the same. An 
other steam-pipe, R, forms an outlet or ex 
haust from the fan-box, conducting the steam 
into the steam-chamber F, so as to thoroughly 
heat the contents of the box by steam. This 
last-named steam-pipe R has a branch pipe, 
S, which communicates with pipe O, the sev 
eral pipes being provided at suitable points 
with proper stop-cocks, valves, or faucets for 
regulating or shutting off the supply of steam. 
The bottom of the steam-chamber F is pro 
vided with a pipe, T, for carrying off the 
water of condensation and excess of steam. 
The revolving drum or cylinder L is pro 
vided with a door, W, through which it is filled 
with sugar in the form or at the stage in which 
this comes from the so-called coolers,' and 
in one of the heads of the cylinder is another 
door, U, which registers with a door or slide, 
U, in the casing A, and through these two 
55 
6o w 
65 
O A 
75 
85 
95 
ICC 
 
i 
2 
365,616 
, 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Fo 
a minimum. 
doors U' and U the sugar, after undergoing the 
bleaching process in the cylinder, may be with 
drawn by the use of scrapers and other suit 
able implements. The cylinder L is further 
5 provided with two or more wings or flanges, 
X, extending from end to end, and the use of 
which will be hereinafter set forth. 
The entire machine is mounted at a proper 
height upon suitable supports, so as to admit 
Io of the insertion of molasses-pans underneath 
it, adapted to receive the fluid molasses through 
the outlet Y in the bottom of the casing A. 
Having thus fully described the construc. 
tion of my machine in its various parts, I shall 
15 now describe the operation of the same, which 
is as follows: As has been already stated, the 
sugar, after it is taken from the coolers, is 
placed within the drum or cylinder L until the 
same is full, when the door V is closed. The 
20 steam is then turned on, which causes the fan 
wheel to revolve rapidly, so as to rotate the 
drum or cylinder with a speed of about one 
thousand revolutions per minute, more or less. 
At the same time, or at the beginning of the 
25 bleaching process, the swiveled head N of the 
steam-pipe O S is connected with the tubular 
slitted shaft K, and the stop-cock P is opened, 
so that steam will enter the tubular shaft and 
escape in opposite directions through the slits 
3o M.M. in the same. After the contents of the 
cylinder have become sufficiently moistened 
and heated by this steamjet to cause the crys 
tals of sugar to adhere together steam is again 
shut off by closing the stop-cockP, and by the 
35 rapid revolutions of the foraminated drum or 
cylinder L the molasses and other coloring 
matter contained in the Sugar is expelled 
through the fine apertures in the cylinder. 
This process of expelling the molasses from 
4o the grains of Sugar is further facilitated by the 
wings or flanges N upon the outside of the 
cylinder, which, by the rapid revolutions of 
the latter, expel the air from the interior of 
the casing A, so as to form a partial vacuum 
45, within the same, the expelled air escaping 
through the outlet C in the arched cover. 
The steam being fed continuously through the 
pipe R to the steam-jacket E F causes the 
sides and bottom of the casing A to be 
5o thoroughly heated, so as to cook and thicken 
the molasses as it escapes from the revolving 
cylinder and is collected in the bottom of the 
casing A. By making the cover of this cas 
ing A arched, as shown, the molasses, which 
5 is thrown upon this cover by the rapid revo 
lutions of the cylinder, will flow or drip from 
this covel' down into the casing, and be col 
lected at the bottom of the same, where it is 
subjected to the cooking process. The degree 
?o of heat in the bottom of the casing may readily 
be regulated by means of a suitably-constructed 
faucet or valve on pipe R. 
By this machine and process the sugar 
within the drum is bleached very rapidly, 
65 and as the cylinder is rotated, preferably by 
means of steam, which, if desired, may be the 
waste steam or exhaust-steam from all engine 
running the cane-mill, or any other machinery, , 
, 
it will be seen that the whole process of 
bleaching by my machine may be reduced too 
a minimum of cost. The same steam which 
operates the fan-wheel by which the cylinder 
is revolved serves to cook the molasses which 
escapes from the cylinder and collects in the 
bottom of the casing within which the cylin 
der is mounted and revolves, and by properly 
grading the heat of the molasses-receptacle in 
the lower part of the casing the molasses may 
be brought to the proper consistency for 
granulating into sugar in the coolers, without 
any intermediate step or process, after which 
it is ready for feeding into the cylinder again 
to be bleached and form merchantable bleached 
sugar. Thus it will be seen that I not only 
bleach the sugar rapidly and thoroughly, but 85 
that I have, by the use of my improved ima 
chine, hereinbefore described, reduced the 
cost of manufacturing and bleaching sugar to 
Whenever, it is desired to cloan out the cyl 
inder and the other parts of the machine after 
the sugar and molasses have been removed 
from the same, this may readily be done by 
turning on the steam, so that steam will per 
wade the interior of the cylinder, as well as 
all parts of the exterior box. By then opening 
the faucet or pipe Y the water of condensation 
containing the dissolved sugar and impurities 
may be drawn off, leaving the machine per 
fectly clean. When it is desired to dry the 
machine after such cleaning, the steam may 
be turned off again by turning the swivel-head 
N away from its connection with the tubular 
shaft, when by the revolutions of the cylinder, 
owing to its fans or wings X, the cold air 
which is sucked through the tubular shaft into 
the machine will be thoroughly agitated 
within the casing A, and then expelled through 
the air-outlet C. 
It is obvious that the revolving cylinder 
may be revolved by means of a pulley and 
belting, gear-wheels, friction-wheels, or any 
other of the well-known mechanical appliances 
for producing a rotary motion, without de 
parting from that part of my invention; but 
on the score of economy, as well as for the 
other reasons stated in my specification, I pre 
fer to rotate the cylinder by means of a fan 
wheel rotated by a jet of steam, as hereinbe 
fore described. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
1. The combination of the casing contain 
ing the revolving cylinder, the steam-jacket 2 
5 
enveloping the lower part of said casing, the 
foraminated cylinder revolving within the 
casing and provided with two or more longi 
tudinal exterior flanges, the box containing the 
fan-wheel and provided with an inlet and out 
let for steam, the fan-wheel or bucket-wheel 
inside of said box, and the central shaft of the 
i is 
IC5 
IOO 
- 
. 
. 
. 
O 
365,616 . 
. 
3. 
forth. 
cylinder connected to the shaft of the fan 
wheel so as to revolve with the same, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the cylindrical drum 
or cylinder, the tubular shaft slitted longitu 
dinally on opposite sides within the same, the 
fan-wheel or bucket-wheel whereby said cyl 
inder is revolved, and a steam-pipe adapted 
to be connected or disconnected at will with 
the tubular cylinder-shaft, substantially as set 
3. The combination of the casing contain 
ing the revolving cylinder, the steam-tight 
fan-box, the steam-inlet to said box, the steam 
outlet or pipe leading from said box to the 
steam jacket, the steam-jacket enveloping the 
lower part of the casing within which the cyl 
inder revolves, and the branch pipe leading 
from the last-named steam-pipe to a swiveled 
head, adapted to connect the steam supply 
with the central tubular shaft of the revolving 
cylinder, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the casing containing 
the revolving cylinder, the steam-jacket en 
veloping the lower part of the same, which 
's 
. 
. . . 
. 
O 
25 
forms a molasses-receptacle, the molasses-out 
let in the bottom of said casing, the revolving 
cylinder arranged within the casing and pro 
vided with longitudinal exterior wings or 
flanges, the arched top or cover provided with 
a hinged part or section, and the air-outlet in 
the arched cover, through which the airinside 
of the casing may be expelled by the rapid 
revolution of the flanged cylinder, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. In combination with the casing A, pro 
vided with a steam-heated molasses-receptacle 
in its bottom part, the revolving cylinder pro 
vided with a central tubular shaft slitted 
longitudinally from end to end within the cyl 
inder between the heads of the same, and pro 
vided with exterior longitudinal wings or 
flanges, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH. A. LOMBAS. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS BAGGER, 
AUGUST PETERSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365718.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F. WINCHELL, 
CRUSHING AND GRINDING MILL, 
No. 365,718, 
Patented June 28, 1887. 
 
 
 
   
an 
 
 
E = 5.3. 
z/244- 
MWEWTOR 
-f-a-4ttorey s. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. WINCHELL OF SPRING FIELD, OHIO. 
CRUSHING AND GR INDING MILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 365,718, dated June 28, 1887. 
Application filed Seltenber 18, 18; 6. Serial N. i. 213, SS8. 
(No model.) 
55 
To all w/von, it inval? conce77. 
chamber, by means of the slotted lugs G. The 
Be it known that I, JAMES F. WINCFIELL, 
ends of the yoke are turned down, so as to 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
maintain the yoke within the slots in the lugs, 
Springfield, in the county of Clark and State 
while at a convenient point, preferably about 
the middle thereof, it is provided with a screw 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use. 
ful Improvements in Crushing and Grinding 
threaded opening and a binding-nut, H, the 
Mills, of which the following is a specification, function of which is to engage the under side 
of the plate and to force and hold it in place 
reference being had therein to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
against the chamber proper, the edges of the 
This invention relates to certain new and 
plate being shouldered or otherwise con 
useful inprovements in crushing and grinding 
structed to bind against the edges of the aper. 
mills, having special reference to the crushing 
ture into which it is fitted. The ends of the 
chamber thereof, and is designed to provide 
plate are also shouldered, the metal consti 
for automatically allowing of the escape of for 
tuting the same being shown in Figs. 2 and 3, 
and designated by the letter I. The yoke is 
eign substances-such as metal, stones, &c.- 
in the manner more particularly hereinafter 
constructed either of cast-iron or other mate. 
pointed out. 
rial, or an alloy, or of any material which is 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
comparatively fragile; or, if not a material of 7o 
part of this specification, and on which simi. 
this character, then of such size as will with 
stand a given amount of pressure, and beyond 
lar letters of reference indicate the same or 
corresponding features 
which that will break or yield sufficiently to 
Figure 1 represents a transverse sectional 
give room for the passage of the substance 
view of a crushing-chamber and crusher, show. 
which occasions the unusual strain. I con- 75 
ing my improvement applied thereto and a 
template, however, making the yoke itself of 
foreign substance caught between the two; 
ample capacity to stand the excess of strain, 
and its points of support-as the lugs G-of 
Fig. 2, a like view showing the result in the 
position of the yielding part and the escape 
such size and material as will withstand only 
of the foreign substance, and Fig. 3 an in 
the strains incident to the usual operation of So 
verted plan view of the crushing-chamber. 
the machine, but which will give to the undue 
The letter A. designates the crushing-cham 
pressure which is brought to bear in the cham: 
ber of a grinding-mill of the usual or any ap 
ber by the presence of foreign substances of 
proved construction, usually constructed of 
the character already alluded to. 
cast-iron. The shaft B carries the crusher C, 
and also the grinding-heads. (The latter not 
stance, as a stone, is seen caught between one 
of the ribs E and an adjacent portion of the 
shown.) The material is fed into the chamber 
in any approved way. 
crusher. 
The letter D designates a plate or portion 
It is obvious that the crusher must instantly 
of the chamber, the same being constructed 
cease its rotation, (which is in the direction 
of the same material, preferably, as the cham 
of the arrow in this example,) or that the sub 
ber and adapted to fit an opening formed 
stance must be crushed or the rib yield. As 
The plate, by preference, is of such 
it is impossible for the crusher to immediately 
therein. 
length as to extend the entire, or as near as 
come to a stop, and as such substances will 
practicable the entire, length of the crusher 
not ordinarily give, or if they do their frag 
or that part of the machine which does the 
ments would be in the way, it results that the 
actual crushing, and is generally provided 
parts must be broken unless one or the other 
will yield. By my invention the portion of 
with longitudinal ribs E, which serve to hold 
the material under operation against the ac 
the chamber against which the substance is 
tion of the crusher, so as to more readily 
forced-as the plate D-yields, as seen in Fig.2. Iod 
In this illustration the yoke is seen to have 
effect its reduction. 
The letter F designates a yoke or other bar, 
broken about the middle and the plate to have 
consequently dropped and permitted of the 
which extends beneath the plate D and con 
nects with a support at either end, as the passage of the obstructing element, 
As illustrated in Fig. 1, an obstructing sub. 85 
95 
5 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
365,718 
O 
The plate D may be constructed of one or 
more parts, and may constitute such portion 
of the chamber as is found necessary to meet 
the particular circumstances. I do not con 
fine myself to any particular construction or 
material, the essential idea of the invention 
being the yielding wall. 
I am aware that concaves in thrashing-ma 
chines have been constructed in parts sup 
ported by springs, and which were adapted to 
yield to obstructions; and I am also aware that 
mills have been made in which the shell was 
composed of a series of movable plates held 
in normal position by springs and adapted to 
yield when unduly pressed upon, and I there 
fore disclaim such devices, the distinction be 
tween them and mine being essentially this, 
to wit, that my crushing-chamber is composed 
of a fixed and non-yielding part having an 
2O opening therein, and of a removable part fit 
ted to said opening and sustained by a bar or 
other means sufficiently strong to withstand 
the strain of ordinary operation, but not strong 
enough to stand strains in excess thereof, and 
which, upon giving, allows the obstructing ele 
ment to escape from the chamber through the 
opening occupied by the removable part. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
25 
3o Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a crushing-cham 
ber having an opening therein, of a removable 
plate fitted to said opening, and a yoke of 
frangible material, by which said plate is sup 
ported against the ordinary strains and re- 35 
leased when undue pressure is exerted. 
2. The combination of the crushing-chamber 
having slotted lugs depending from the sides . 
thereof, an opening in the bottom portion, 
a plate having shoulders extending around 
it and fitted to said opening, ribs projecting 
inwardly from the plate, and a cast-iron 
yoke supported by said lugs and having a set 
screw about the middle thereof, which binds 
against said plate and holds it in place. 
3. The combination, with a crushing-cham 
ber composed of a fixed portion having an 
opening therein and a removable plate hav. 
ing shoulders at its edges and ribs projecting 
into the chamber, of afragile yokesecured at its 
ends to the chamber and provided with a bind 
ing-screw at an internediate point, which bears 
against said plate, and a crusher mounted to 
operate in the chamber. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES F. WINCHELL. 
55 
45 
Witnesses: 
M. A. BALLINGER, 
EDWIN L. BRADFORD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365818.txt	(No Model.) 
I??J?J0HNST0N, 
AUT0MATIC SIGNAL FOR DRAW BRIDGES, 
N0?365,818. 
 
Patented July 5?1887? 
gQ 
 
% 
N. PETERS Photo-Liliegrapher?Washington D.C. 
UNITED STATEs PATENT OFFICE? 
LEONARD J.JOHNSTON OF BERGEN POINT NEW JERSEY. 
AUTOMATIC SIGNAL FOR DRAW-BRIDGES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No.365,818,dated Juay5?1887. 
Applicationfiled January11?1886. Serial No.188.189. 
(No molel.) 
* 
ger. 
To aZZ Zonon ?t 7maz/ conce772? 
Beit knownthat I LEONARDJ.JOINSTON, 
of Borgen Point inthe county of Hudson and 
State of NewJersey have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in AntomatieSignals for 
Draw-Bridges;and Iherebydeclarethefollow 
ing to be a full and clear description thereof 
The object of thisinventionistoConstructa 
signal which will be automatically displayed 
when the bridge Commences to Open, thereby 
giving timely warning to a railway-train to 
teams orto individuals to keep offrom dan 
The invention willbe readilyunderstood by 
reference to the accompanying drawings of 
which? 
Figure 1 is aside elevation of one end of a 
bridge fittedwith myimproved antomaticsig 
nal Fig.2is a plan of the Same Showingthe 
bridgejust Started to Open and the Signal in 
dottedlinesthrownoutoverthe roadway Fig. 
3is an enlarged detailedelevation oftheoper 
atingmechanism formoving thesignal which 
saidmechanismisactuatedbythebridge Fig. 
4 is an enlarged plan of the partShownin Fig. 
3. Figs.5and 6 show an equivalent modifi 
Cation of the mechaniSm for OperatingtheSig 
nal from the bridge Fig.7 is an edge view 
of the end of the draw 
The bridge Ais supposed to be ofthe ordi 
nary form of draw-bridge and the abutment 
A? is also Such aSiS in Common uSe At SOme 
distance from the bridge-sayatfive hundred 
or at one to two thouSand feet therefrom, if 
required-Ierectapost B by the side of the 
roadway Bytheside of this post,9nd hinged 
toit,Ierectarockingpost C from thetopend 
of which projects a lateral arm C' which Car 
ries the signaltarget or lantern C" adapted to 
swing outoverthecenter oftheroadwaywhen 
thesignalis tobedisplayed and bythesideof 
the roadway when the signalis housed. The 
two positions are shown respeetively in ful! 
andin dotted lineSin Fig.2. 
The bottOnn end 
ofthe post Calso Carries another lateral arm, 
C" whichisused to operateit as hereinafter 
Aweight W or a springin lieu theregf.is 
engagedwith the outer end of the arm C" by 
imeansofa Suitablecord orrodconstructedand 
described. 
? 
3O 
35 
45 
 
arrangedso aStorotatetherocking post Cone 
quarterofaturn and therebythrowthesignal 
arm C' perpendicularly out over the roadway, 
the movement being autoinatic at every open 
iing of the bridge aS hereinafter described. 
On the abutment A? nearthe endwith which 
the bridgeAengages,isanelbow-lever,D, piv 
oted in a reCeSS below the Surface Or fl00r of 
the abutment So that one arm a is below the 
Surface and the other arm d?,projectsslightly 
above the Surface working in a Slot in a plate 
whichis flush with said surface orfloor. 
To the end of the vertical arm d'isattached 
on end ofawireropeorrod E the otherend 
ofwhichisattached tothelowerarm C" ofthe 
post C The end of the horizontal arm d Car 
ries afriction-roller i working in a vertical 
plane transversely to the length of the arm. 
On the end of the bridge or draw A, which 
engages with the abutunent is an inclined 
plane p for engagement with the friction 
roller aS Shown in Fig.7 So aSto depress the 
horizontal arm dwhenthe bridge is closedland 
allowit torise when the bridgeis open The 
efect ofthis constructionisthat assoonasthe 
bridge Starts toopen the arm d following the 
Opening movement of the bridge causes the 
leverDto makeasuficientmovement,(operat 
ing through the connecting rod or Cord E to 
the rocking post C,whichis rotated outwardly 
by the actuating Spring orweight Won being 
released by the latch-lever D.) to cause the 
Signal C" to Swing out Squarely over the road 
way and when the bridge closes the return 
ing end of the bridge Strikes the arn d and 
moves the lever D So as to return the signal 
by the side ofthe roadwayinits housed posi 
tion In lieu ofthismechanismanequivalent 
one is shownin Fig.5 Inthisfigurethearm 
C" of the rocking post C is connected by the 
cord or rod Ewiththelatching-piece F,which 
is connected with thefloor ofthe abutment by 
the latching-lever F' The latch piece Fis, 
whenthe bridge is closed thrown over by its 
lever F' So aSto engage with the latching-lug 
fon the bridge?floor and in this position the 
signal C"is held inits housed position bythe 
side ofthe track; but as Soon as the bridge 
Starts to open the lug f movinglaterallywith 
the bridge away from the latch-piece F un 
35 
75 
95 
365,818 
fastensit and this releasestheshaft orpost C. 
and thereby permits the spring orweight W 
to throw the signal out over the roadway as 
before In the construction shown in Figs.5 
and 6 the bridge in opening as already ex 
plained willunlatch thesignaland theweight 
will carrythesameto thedanger" position; 
but therestorationofthesignaltothe'safety" 
positionis in this construction accomplished 
by the attendant and not automatically upon 
the closing ofthe bridge. 
Having thus described my invention what 
IClaim as new and desiretosecure by Letters 
| 
Patent iS?? 
1?Anautomaticsignalfordraw.bridges,con- | 
sisting of a rotating post erected at Some diS 
tance from the end ofthe bridgeand Carrying| 
at itStop end a lateral arm adapted to Carry 
the signal and beturned out directlyoverthe 
roadway when the signal is thrown, and, in 
combination with Said rotating signal-post an 
actuating device,asaweightorSpringattached 
directly to the post So as to Swingit outover 
the roadwaywhen desired and with a rod or 
cord attached to the Said rotating post byone 
of its ends and with a latch-piece on the 
bridge-abutment by its other end the whole 
arranged to Operate the?Signal automatically 
on the opening of the bridge in the manner 
described and Set forth. 
j 
* 
- 
*2. Adraw-bridge providedwith downward 
ly-curved transverse Signal-operating Seats at 
its ends in combination with friction-rollers 
adapted to operate thereon whenthe bridgeis 
opened or cloSed and attached to Operating 
leversfulorumedtotheabutment ofthe bridge, 
and connected bymeansofropes,rods,0r Simi 
lar attachments with a rotating Signal-post 
located at Someconsiderable distance from the 
bridge and actuated bya directly-attached op 
erating spring orweight So as to throw the 
signal-arm afixed to thetopend ofthesignal 
post outovertheroadwaywheneverthe Swing 
ing ofthebridge movesof ofthe rolleronthe 
engaging end of the abutment-lever Substan 
tially as Shown and described. 
3. Thedownwardlyandtransverselycurved 
operating-roller Seat at the end of a draw 
bridge engagingwith and operatingthe roller 
d and its lever D, and in Combination there 
with the connectingropeorrod E Signal:post 
C and the actuating-weight W substantially" 
aS Shown and deSCribed. 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand - 
in presence of two witnesseS. 
IEONARD J.JOHNSTON 
WitneSSeS: 
ABRAHAM V JOHNSTON, 
DANIEL R. GARDEN 
35 
45 
IO 
?O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US365920.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 365,920, 
G. H. HOL GATE. 
WATER CLOSET, 
Patented July 5, 1887, 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D, C, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. HOLGATE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WATER CLOSET, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 365,920, dated July 5, 1887. 
Amplication filed August 14, 1886. 
Serial No. 20,881. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. HoLGATE, 
of the city and county of Philadelphia, and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented an Im 
provement in Water-Closets, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention has reference to water-closets; 
and it consists in certain improvements, all of 
which are fully set forth in the following speci 
fication, and shown in the accompanying draw. 
ings, which form part thereof. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
suitable means to prevent disease due to the 
vapors and the effluvia arising from the waste 
pipe or sewers in connection with the closet. 
In carrying out my invention I provide the 
discharge or waste pipe with suitable valves 
or traps, forming a practically tight pipe-com 
partment, which normally is filled with a dis 
infectant or antiseptic gas, which offers an im 
passible barrier to injurious and disease-bear 
ing gases from the waste-pipe and sewer. The 
antiseptic may be stored in a vessel under 
sufficient pressure to liquefyit, and be admitted 
intermittently in small quantities into the said 
compartment, whereby its pressure, upon es 
caping, being greatly diminished, it is immedi 
ately gasified. The admission of this anti 
septic gas is controlled by a suitable valve, 
which is preferably actuated by one of the 
moving parts used to discharge the contents 
of the basin or bowl directly or indirectly. 
I do not limit myself to any particular dis 
infectant medium, though I prefer liquefiedan 
hydrous sulphurous acid and carbonic acid 
as a binary fluid stored in suitable carboy 
under pressure to keep it liquefied. This gas 
acts under pressure, endeavoring to escape, 
and is utilized to automatically close the valve 
by which it is liberated after the same has 
been tripped. 
This invention, while especially adapted to 
water-closets, may be applied to various other 
purposes-such as sinks, wash-basins, and any 
apparatus having connection with the sewers. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional ele 
vation of a water-closet embodying my inven 
tion, and Fig. 2 is a perspective view illus 
trating the tripping device for actuating the 
A is the bowl, and B is the bowl-cup or 
Waste-valve. 
C is the waste-pipe, and connects with the 
SeWer, and may have the usual trap, D. Thevalve 
of the bowl A may be operated in the usual 
manner by the handle H and rod G. This 
part of the apparatus could be made as is com 
mon in the numerous kinds of apparatus for 
this purpose already in the market. 
E and F are two valves, (shown as slide 
Valves,) and operate to cut off a section of the 
waste-pipe C, forming a compartment, S; and 
Said valves may be operated by levers J, con 
necting with the valve-rod C by rod and lever 
I, whereby all of the valves may be simultane 
ously actuated by the operation of the waste 
It is immaterial what the construc 
handle. 
tion of these parts may be, provided they per 
form the duty of creating a compartment in 
the waste between the bowl and sewer, pref. 
erably of small capacity. Into this compart 
ment an antisepticisintermittently discharged 
by a nozzle, N, and its pipe L, connecting 
With a carboy or vessel, K, containing the 
antiseptic or disinfectant, preferably of anhy. 
drous, sulphurous, and carbonic acids as a bi 
nary fluid. This vessel or carboy is discon 
nectable with said nozzle and its pipe by coup 
ling M. 
The nozzle is provided with a valve, O, to 
control the discharge of the liquefied antisep 
tic gases, and has its valve-rod P preferably 
extending within the compartment S. To 
work this valve intermittently for an instant, 
in the act of closing the valves E and F, I 
provide the following device: An upright 
arm, Q, is pivoted to one of the valve-plates 
and is normally retained in an upright posi 
tion by a spring, q. When the said valve is - 
moved to close the compartment, the arm Q 
strikes the end of the valve-rod P and opens 
the valve, allowing a discharge of the disin 
fectant or antiseptic into the said compart 
ment; but almost as quickly as opened the sta 
tionary cam projection R throws the arm Q to 
one side, allowing the valve O, by means of a 
spring or the pressure of the antiseptic gases, 
to instantly close. By this means we only 
have an intermittent discharge of a very small 
quantity of the antiseptic fluid; but said fluid 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So antiseptic valve. 
95 
ICO 
g 
365,920 
being gasified, the instant it escapes, the en 
tire compartment is filled and rendered proof 
against the passage of any injurious sewer 
gases or germs of disease which may emanate 
from the sewer or the Waste-pipes. 
It is immaterial what form of intermittent 
valve-actuating device might be used, as there 
are a large number of ways of accomplishing 
the result. 
In the construction shown all of 
the valves are operated by the same handle, H, 
for convenience and surety of working; but the 
particular constructions there shown might be 
modified in various ways. Furthermore, if 
the valve B is tight and a trap, D, secure, the 
5 gas from the nozzle M might be admitted be. 
tween these two, dispensing with the valves 
E and F; but I prefer at least to use the valve 
F in addition to the valve B, as in that case I 
would have a compartment entirely out of 
contact with the waste-water, which would 
form a better obstruction to the passage of 
gases which might arise therefrom. 
I do not limit myself to the particular anti 
septic here set out, as any of the well-known 
antiseptics in the market may be used, though 
I by far prefer the sulphurous acid and car 
bonic acid as a binary fluid, and under suffi 
cient pressure to make it liquid and cause it 
to be self-propelling through the nozzle and 
capable of gasifying upon escaping from the 
said nozzle into the compartment. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the waste or sewer 
pipe, of a gas-tight compartment, valves to 
open and close said compartment intermit 
tently, all antiseptic-discharging nozzle open 
ing into said compartment, a valve to open or 
close said nozzle, and a device to open said 
nozzle only upon closing the compartment 
valves, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. The combination, with the waste or sewer 
pipe, of a gas-tight compartment, valves to 
open and close said compartment intermit 
tently, an antiseptic-discharging nozzle open 
ing into said compartment, a valve to open or 
close said nozzle, a device to open said nozzle 
only upon closing the compartment-valves, 
and a spring to instantly close said nozzle 
valve after the discharge of the antiseptic, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination of the waste or sewer 
pipe, a gas-tight compartment contained 
therein through which the discharge must 
pass, a water seal below said compartment, 
the bowl, the discharge-valve, valves to open 
or close the compartment to form a direct 
communication between the bowl and sewer 
through the seal, and an antiseptic-discharge 
nozzle opening into said compartment, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
4. The Combination of the waste or sewer 
pipe, a gas a tight compartment contained 
therein through which the discharge must 
pass, a water seal below said compartment, the 
bowl, the discharge-valve, valves to open or 
close the compartment to form a direct commu 
nication between the bowl and sewer through 
the seal, an antiseptic-discharge nozzle open 
ing into said compartment, and a trip-valve 
for said antiseptic-discharge nozzle, which ten- . 
porarily opens when the compartment-valve 
is closing, but is always closed when the com 
partment-valve is open, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
5. The combination, with a waste or sewer 
pipe, of a compartment therein through which 
the waste water passes, valves to open or close 
said compartment into or out of the waste 
pipe, an antiseptic-discharging nozzle opening 
into said compartment, a valve to control the 
admission of the antiseptic, and automatic de 
vices controlled by the movement of the com 
partment-valves to actuate the valve govern 
ing the admission of antiseptic, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
G. The combination, with a waste or sewer 
pipe, of a compartment therein through which 
the waste water passes, valves to open or close 
said compartment into or out of the Waste 
pipe, an antiseptic-discharging nozzle opening 
into said compartment, and a trip carried by 
one of the valves to the chamber to intermit 
tently actuate the valve governing the admis 
sion of antiseptic, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
7. The combination, with a waste or sewer 
pipe, of a compartment therein through which 
the waste water passes, sealing-valves to open 
or close said compartment, an antiseptic-dis 
charging nozzle opening into said compart 
ment, a valve in said nozzle to control the ad 
mission of the antiseptic, a trip device to open 
Said nozzle-valve for an instant upon closing 
said compartment sealing-valves, and a vessel 
containing an antiseptic under pressure, where 
by it forces itself into the compartment in 
form of a gas when liberated, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
8. The combination, with a waste or sewer 
pipe, of a compartment therein through which 
the waste water passes, sealing-valves to open 
or close said compartment, an antiseptic-dis 
charging nozzle opening into Said compart 
ment, a valve in said nozzle to control the ad 
mission of the antiseptic, a trip device to open 
said nozzle-valve for an instant upon closing 
said compartment sealing-valves, and a vessel 
containing anhydrous, sulphurous, and car 
bonic acids as a binary fluid under pressure, 
whereby it forces itself into the compartment 
in form of a gas when liberated, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
9. The combination of the bowl, the waste 
pipe therefrom, the operating-handle, the 
bowl, cup, or valve actuated by said handle, 
valves to shut off a portion of the waste-pipe 
into a compartment, and an antiseptic - dis 
charge nozzle opening into said compartment, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified, 
- . 
- 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
365,920 
O 
10. The combination of the bowl, the waste 
pipe therefrom, the operating - handle, the 
bowl, cup, or valve actuated by said handle, 
valves to shut off a portion of the waste-pipe 
into a compartment, connections between said 
valves and handle, whereby they are operated, 
and an antiseptic - discharge nozzle opening 
into said compartment, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
11. The combination of the bowl, the waste 
pipe therefrom, the operating - handle, the 
bowl, cup, or valve actuated by said handle, 
valves to shut off a portion of the Waste-pipe 
into a compartment, an antiseptic-discharge 
nozzle opening into said compartment, a valve 
in said discharge-nozzle, and a trip actuated 
by the movement of the operating-handle to 
intermittently open said nozzle-valve, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
12. The combination of the bowl, its waste 
pipe, a valve for the discharge of the contents 
from the bowl into the Waste-pipe, a valve to 
shut off a portion of the waste-pipe to form a 
compartment, a valved antiseptic-discharge 
nozzle to admit an antiseptic into said com 
partment, and suitable lever - connecting de 
vices to operate both the Waste - discharge 
valve and the antiseptic-discharge valve, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony of which invention I hereunto 
set my hand. 
25 
GEO. E. HOLGATE. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. H. BANNARD, 
W. PRESTON EITCKS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366020.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 366,020, 
J. W. ORPHY, 
LANTERN, 
Patented July 5, 1887, 
- - - - - 
His 
 
 
acon Him 
  
d 
7 
A. 
a as 
Z eas; 2ns 
7Nsea 
Affas 
3,4t. 
Z7vre; fax: 
g3. af 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. ORPHY, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE C. T. 
HAM MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
LANTERN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 366,020, dated July 5, 1887 
Application filed August 10, 1885. 
Serial No. 173,966. (No model. . 
. 
. 
" 
To all vilon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, JoHN W. ORPHY, of the 
city of Rochester, in the county of Monroe 
and State of New York, have invented a cer. 
5 tain new and useful-Improvement in Lanterns; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a lantern 
showing my improvement. Fig. 2 is a cross 
section of the samein line acac of Fig. 1, looking 
down upon the globe-holding disk. Fig. 3 is 
a vertical section of Fig. 2 in line y J. 
Fig. 4 
is an elevation of a fragment of one of the 
side tubes, showing the means for raising and 
Supporting the globe. Fig. 5 is a section in 
line & 2 of Fig. 1. 
My improvement relates to side-tube lan 
terns, and more particularly to the devices for 
raising and supporting the globe above the 
burner, so that the latter can be easily lighted. 
The improvement is as follows: 
A indicates the fount or oil-pot; BB, the 
25 side tubes; C, the globe or chimney; D, the 
globe-supporting disk, and Ethe bell or holder 
for the top of the globe. The bell has a tube, 
a, which slides up outside the tube b, to which 
the top of the side tubes are attached, and this 
exterior tube, a, is pressed down by a coiled 
spring, c. The construction above described 
is common in lanterns. 
The following features constitute my inven. 
tion: 
G. is a rod or shaft having at its lower end a 
ring, d, to which the globe-holder Disattached, 
and at its upper end a finger-piece, f, by which 
it is raised. The main portion of this shaft is 
a straight length, and rests in an eye or bear 
ing, g, on the inside of one of the side tubes 
in such a manner that it can be slid up and 
down vertically, and can also be turned around 
axially, for a purpose presently to be described. 
The loop d at the lower end is of such size as 
45 to form a base to the globe-supporting disk D, 
and also to fit loosely over the top of the cone 
H, and when in place it rests on top of a square 
shoulder, h, Fig. 3, of the cone, and holds the 
latter in place. k is a bearing consisting of a 
So flat strip with a wedge-shaped lower end, which 
35 
3O 
- 
is secured to the inside of the side tube a little 
distance above the upper end of the rod G and in 
line with it, as clearly shown in Figs. 1 and 4. 
When in place, the globe rests between the 
disks DE, and the cone is held down by the 55 
pressure of the globe resting on it. To raise 
the globe, the thumb is placed under the lugf 
of the rod G, and sufficient pressure is applied 
to slide the rod up through the bearing k, with 
the globe and holder attached, and overcom - 6C 
ing the pressure of the coiled spring c at the 
top of the lantern. As the rod rises its upper 
free end strikes the wedge-shaped bearing k, 
which springs it slightly outward without im 
peding its upward movement, and the friction 65 
against this bearing is sufficient to hold the 
globe elevated at any point if the hand is re 
leased. If desired, a spring-catch of any de 
sired form can be used at the top to catch and 
hold the rod. 
One advantage of this invention is a single 
rod, located at one side on the side tube, hav 
ing a free sliding movement, by which the hand 
in raising the device is removed from the great 
heat of the lantern. 
advantage is the use of such a rod at the side, 
fitted in an eye or bearing so that it can be slid 
up and down vertically and capable also of 
being turned axially. The object of this is so 
that when the globe is removed from the lan- 8o 
tern and the globe-holder D is raised above . 
and clear of the burner it can be swung off 
entirely to one side of the burner, as indicated 
by the dotted lines, Fig. 2, thereby leaving the 
whole top of the burner free and exposed, by 
which means the parts can be readily separated 
for cleaning or otherwise. This is important 
in cleaning the lamp from dust and char which 
collect there, and which are not readily re 
movable where the globe-holder is simply 
raised but cannot be swung off to one side. 
By this construction, also, the globe can be 
readily removed without raising the globe 
holder D from the cone H, since the dome can 
be raised indepenpently; whereas in some 95 
other lanterns of the kind the upper and lower 
disks that inclose the globe are tied together 
by rods and both must be raised together. 
I is a finger-piece attached to the outer tube, 
a, that slides over the inner tube, b, at the top IOO 
Another and particular 75 
85 
 
g 
366,020 
4C 
of the lantern. The inner tube has longitudi 
3. The combination, with a tubular lantern, 
nal slots man, Fig. 5, and the finger-piece has of the perforated plate for supporting the 
an extension, p, forming an arm that passes 
globe, the rod to which it is secured, a bearing 35 
Crosswise through both slots. By pressing up 
for the rod, attached to one of the side tubes, 
5 against the finger-piece the bell top of the lan. 
in which it can be moved vertically and also 
tern will be raised independently of the lower 
rotated, and a catch with which said rod en 
gages for holding it in elevated position when 
disk, D, as before described, and therefore the 
globe can be applied or removed without re 
desired, substantially as described. 
moving the disk D from the cone. The shaft 
4. In a tubular lantern, the combination, 
Io p, passing through the slots, forms a guide to 
with the lamp, side tubes, spring-pressed bell 
the top in moving up and down, and also pre 
guided on the dependent central tube, the 
vents turning. 
globe, and the perforated plate supporting the 
globe and resting loosely upon the burner, 45 
s I claim 
the lifting-rod supported by guides on One of 
the side tubes, said rod being provided with a 
thumb piece and attached to the perforated 
plate on which the globe is supported, whereby 
the globe and bell can be elevated against the 5o 
pressure of the spring by the action of the lift 
ing-rod on the perforated plate, the globe 
when relieved from the pressure of the spring 
and bell can be turned to one side of the 
burner, and the bell can be raised independ. 55 
ently to release the globe, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
1. The combination, with the burner and side 
15 tubes of a tubular lantern, of the globe, a dome 
at the top, and the holder or plate at the bot 
ton, the single rod supporting the bottom 
plate and extending upward, the bearing on 
the side tube for the rod, and the thumb-piece 
2C at the top of the rod, said rod and bearing being 
adapted to permit a turning motion of said 
rod On its longitudinal axis, whereby the plate 
may be turned away from the burner, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the burner and side 
tubes, of the globe, the plate on which it rests, 
the rod secured to the plate, a catch or hold 
ing device on one of the side tubes, a bearing 
for said rod, with which said rod engages, and 
3O a thumb-piece on the rod, serving both as a 
means for lifting the rod and plate and for dis 
engaging the catch, substantially as described. 
JOHN W. ORPHY. 
25 
Witnesses: 
R. F. OSGOOD, 
CHAS. BERGENER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366120.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 366,120. 
J. E. LEE. 
MANUFACTURE OF SPLINTs, 
Patented July 5, 1887. 
 
 
 
JAZ?wood, Zee 
???tod?? 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J. ELLWOOD LEE, OF CONSHOHOCKEN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MANUFACTURE OF SPLINTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 366,120, dated July 5, 1887. 
Application filed February 7, 1887. Serial No. 226,836. (No model.) 
- 
?$ 
s 
?? 
openings. A slight roughness is left on the 
To all, ?????, it may concer?: 
Be it known that I, J. ELLWOODLEE, a citi 
outside of the splints in the formation of the 
Zen of the United States, residing at Consho 
perforations in order to prevent the bandages 
hocken, Montgomery county, Pennsylvania, 
from slipping. The splints are also prefera- 55 
have invented certain Improvements in the 
bly mickel-plated, for purposes of cleanliness 
Manufacture of Splints, of which the follow 
and to prevent oxidation. 
ing is a specification. 
To make the splints applicable to either the 
The main object of my invention is to so 
right or left limb, I proceed in the following 
construct splints for surgical use that a less 
manner: I first take a plaster cast of either 
number of Splints than heretofore will be re 
the right or left limb for which the splint is to 
quired to make a complete set for the various 
be used. For instance, to make either of the 
different fractures of the limbs of the human 
splints shown in Figs. 1 and 2, a cast is first 
body. 
taken of either the right or left leg-say of the 
Sets of splints as heretofore made usually 
left leg, as shown in Fig. 3. I then cut the 
include different splints for the right and the 
plaster mold into two halves on the dotted 
left limbs. Ordinary splints which are made 
line, Fig. 3, and remove that half, A, which 
to fit the right leg, for instance, cannot well 
has the less prominent curves or recesses 
be used for the left leg, since they would not 
formed in it by the contour of the leg. Into 
adapt themselves to the shape of the limb with 
the box containing the remaining half, B, is 
placed the right leg, and plaster-of paris is 
that closeness and comfort which is essential 
for the proper knitting of the fractured bones. 
then poured into the space a, Figs. 4 and 5, 
ISO construct my improved splints that they 
left by the removal of the half A. There is 
may be applied with equal effect to the right 
thus formed a compound mold, shaped on one 
or to the left limbs for which they are sever 
side by the most prominent projections or 
ally constructed, so that a complete set of my 
curves of the left leg and on the other side by 
improved splints need not exceed twenty-one 
the most prominent projections or curves of 
in number, even including two different sizes 
the right leg. From this mold a metal die is 
One for adults and one for children. 
made by casting, and in connection with the 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
die there is formed a corresponding matrix, by 
a side view of what is termed a tibia and 
means of which the metallic splints are 
fibula splint applied to the lower part of the 
stamped up to the form of diethat is, with 
leg for fractures and other injuries of the leg 
curves on one side to conform to the larger out 
below the knee, especially those at or about 
line of the right limb and on the other side to 
the ankle-joint. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view of a 
conform to the larger outline of the left limb. 
patella-splint for fractures of the femur to the 
These splints can thus be applied to either 
middle of the tibia and fibula. Figs. 3, 4, and 
limb, for they are sufficiently flexible trans 
5 are sectional views of molds, illustrating the 
versely, owing to the thinness and lightness 
manner of making the splints; and Fig. 6 is a 
of the metal, to be conformed closely to all 
rear view of a patella-splint constructed in 
parts of the limb by the bandage. In other 
accordance with my improvement. 
words, they are sufficiently flexible and plia 
My invention may be carried into effect with 
ble to be closed in to fit the limbs. accurately, 
splints made of different materials; but the 
with but little more pressure than is ordinarily 
used in binding on the bandage; but longi 
kind I prefer to use are metallic and made of 
very thin copper-about one-eightieth of an 
tudinally the splints are quite stiff and rigid. 
inch in thickness-so that they are very light; 
Instead of making the compound mold in 
and as they are made trough-shaped, they are 
the manner above described, I may take sepa 
flexible and pliable transversely and yet quite 
rate casts of the right and left limbs, and af. 
firm longitudinally. 
ter cutting each cast in two halves those 
As shown in the draw 
ings, perforations are formed in the metallic 
halves which have the largest recesses may be Iro 
splints to allow of ventilation and to allow se- joined together to make the compound mold, 
cretions and moisture to pass off through these to be used as before described. 
90 
95 
75 
IO 
25 
40 
SO 
366,120 
Although I have illustrated my invention 
as applied only to splints for legs, it will be 
understood that splints for other parts of the 
body may be made in the same Way. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The mode herein described of making 
Splints applicable to either the right or left 
limb, Said mode consisting in first making a 
Compound mold of the right limb on one side 
and of the left limb on the other, forming dies 
from such compound mold, and pressing the 
Splints into shape by the dies thus made. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a splint 
5 
O 
shaped on one side to the larger outline of a 
right limb and on the other side to the larger 5 
outline of a corresponding left limb, but flexi 
ble transversely to conform to either limb, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 20 
two subscribing witnesses. 
m 
J. ELLWOOD HLEE. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. D. CONNER, 
HARRY SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366220.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 366,220, 
J. A. JOHNSTON. 
STEAM WASHING MACHINE, 
Patented July 12, 1887. 
AITWESSES = 
...w 
IWYEWTOR 
Attorney 
peTERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington.D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JONES A. JOHNSTON, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
STEAM WASHING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 366,220, dated J uly 12, 1887. 
Application filed February 2, 1885. Serial No. 154,665. (No model.) 
5 
O 
- 
which- 
to all willon, it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, JoNES. A. JoHNSTON, of 
Rochester, New York, have invented certain 
Improvements in Steam Washing-Machines, 
of which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to certain improve. 
ments in steam Washing-machines, which im 
provements are fully described in the follow 
ing specification and the novel features thereof 
specified in the annexed claims. 
My improvements in Washing-machines are 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partially in sec 
tion. Fig. 2 is an end view. Fig. 3 is a cen 
tral transverse section. Fig. 4 is a plan view, 
the cover of the condensing-chamber being re 
moved. Fig. 5 is a plan view, the condensing 
chamber being removed. 
My improved Washing-machine consists, es 
isentially, of a suitable vessel or boiler, A, pro 
vided with a perforated false bottom, B, the 
perforated steam-distributer C, and condens 
ing-chamber D. The boiler A is made of any 
suitable shape and dimensions for the amount 
of work to be performed. The false bottom 
B, which may be made of either perforated 
sheet metal or of wire-cloth, is supported in 
the boiler at a short distance above its bot 
tom in any Suitable manner. I prefer to make 
the false bottom removable, and for this pur 
pose it is conveniently supported by the legs 
F, Fig. 1. Above the false bottom is placed 
the steam - distributer C, which consists of 
a tube of any suitable shape or dimensions 
formed of wire-gauze or perforated sheet 
metal, and supported in position by the steam 
passage E, which is open at the lower end, 
which rests on the false bottom and commu 
nicates freely with the distributer C. The 
steam-passage may be made either of wire 
gauze or perforated sheet metal. One or more 
steam-passages, E, may be used, if desired. The 
distributer and passage are preferably con 
nected together, so that they can be removed 
together from the boiler. As shown in the 
drawings, the boiler is preferably made smaller 
toward its bottom, as this construction facili 
tates shipment in nests. Above this boiler is 
I claim 
placed the condensing-chamber D, which con 
1. The combination, with the receptacle A, 
sists of a suitable tray or vessel having a re. I having the perforated false bottom B and the 
movable cover or lid, G, and having its bot 
tom provided with one or more openings, H, 
through which the steam escapes from the 
boiler into the chamber, and a number of 
smaller perforations, I, through which the con 
densed steam falls back onto the clothesin the 
boiler. The condensing-chamber is also pro 
vided with openings J J on its ends or sides, 
or both, for the admission of air, which assists 
in the circulation of the steam. 
The operation of my improved washing 
machine will be readily understood. The 
space in the boiler below the perforated false 
bottom having been partially filled with water, 
the clothes to be washed are introduced into 
the boiler above the false bottom and around 
the steam-distributer. The condensing-cham 
ber is arranged in place above the boiler and 
heat applied in any convenient Way to the 
lower part of the boiler. The steam rising 
from the Water passes through the steam-pas 
sage E and is discharged by the distributer 
through the mass of clothes in the boiler, 
thereby thoroughly steaming and cleansing the 
same and causing a constant movement among 
them, so that every part of each piece is sub 
jected to the operation. 
The steam which es 
capes from the boiler passes through the open 
ing or openings H, and, being in large part 
condensed in the condensing- chamber, falls 
back through the openings I into the clothes 
in the boiler, which are thereby kept continu 
ally moist. The bottom of the condensing 
chamber may be inclined in one or both di 
rections, in which case a single perforation, I, 
or row or series of perforations, will answer 
the purpose required; but I prefer to provide 
a series of perforations distributed over the 
bottom, as represented in the drawings. The 
condensing-chamber is not essential to the ac 
tion of the distributer; but I prefer to employ 
it, as it prevents the drying of the exposed 
surface of the clothes in the boiler. 
I have demonstrated the utility of my im 
provements in washing-machines by practical 
trials of the most thorough character. 
I hereby expressly disclaim the inventions 
shown and described in United States Letters 
Patent Nos. 135,708, 112,760, and 159,196. 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
go 
95 
Ou 
366,220 
wire gauze steam-distributer C, connected to 
said false bottom by the perforated passage E. 
and projecting a short distance above it, of 
the condensing-chamber D, constituting the 
cover for the receptacle, provided with the 
perforations I in its bottom, whereby the 
clothes placed in the receptacle upon the false 
bottom will be thoroughly steamed by the pas: 
sage through them of the steam from the dis 
tributer, and the latter passing up through and 
into the chamber D will be condensed and the 
water allowed to drip back upon the clothes, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the receptacle A, 
having the perforated false bottom B and the 
wire-gauze steam-distributer C, connected to 
- 
O 
15 
said false bottom by the perforated passage E, 
of the condensing-chamber D, constituting the . 
cover for the receptacle, provided with the 
perforations I in its bottom and the perfora 20 
tions J in its ends, whereby the clothes placed 
in the receptacle upon the bottom and distribu 
ter will be steamed by the passage of the steam 
up through them, and the latter will be con 
densed in the chamber D and the water allowed 25 
to drip back upon them, substantially as de 
scribed. 
JONES A. JOHNSTON. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. B. SELDEN, 
L. A. KANE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366320.txt	(No Model.) 
D. B. JAMES. 
MINER'S CANDLESTICK. 
No. 366,320. 
Patented July 12, 1887. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID B. JAMES, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, ASSIGNOR TO FRANK 
A. HUNTINGTON, OF SAME PLACE. . 
V. NERS CAND EST CK. 
SPECIFICATION forning part of Tetters Patent No. 366,320, dated July 12, 1887. 
Application filed August 30, 1886. 
. 
IO 
To all whon it naily concern. . 
Be it known that I, DAVID B. JAMES, of 
the city and county of San Francisco, State of 
California, have invented an Improvement in 
5 Miners' Candlesticks; and I hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the same. 
My invention relates to a novel candlestick 
for miners' use. 
It consists in the devices which I shall here 
inafter fully, describe and claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawing for 
a more complete explanation of my invention, 
the figure is a perspective view of my device, 
showing the manner of holding the candle in 
place. 
The coil A is formed of one or more turns 
of wire, and is made of sufficient diameter to 
allow a candle to be placed in it loosely. From 
the upper side of the coil the wire is carried 
upward and curved, as shown, so as to form a 
pointed hook, B, which may be hung upon a 
projection of rock within the mine or upon 
other points where it is desired to support the 
candle. From the lower end of the coil the 
wire extends backward, and another coil of 
one or more turns is formed at C, from which 
the wire is again carried forward beneath and 
beyond the first coil, A, as shown at D. The 
elasticity of the second coil forces the arm ID 
beneath the first coil, A, when there is no can 
dle within it, but when the candle has been 
placed within this coil, so that its lower end 
projects just beneath the coil the arm D will 
press against the side of the candle, and will 
thus hold it firmly within the coil, and prevent 
its slipping out. When the candle is burned 
down very short, the arm D may be allowed to 
pass beneath the coil and the bottom of the 
4O candle will rest upon this arm, the candle be 
ing held upright by the turns of the coil until 
it is all burned out. The arm D has its end 
pointed, so that it may be thrust into a tim 
ber or into a crevice in the rock. The coil C. 
25 
45 
55 
60 
75 
Serial No. 212,265. (No model.) 
serves as a handle by which to press it in if it 
is desired to hold the candle in this manner, 
instead of by means of the hook B, before de 
scribed. The weight of the parts which pro 
ject upon each side of the candle-holding coil 
A is such that when hung loosely by the hook 
B the candle will remain in a nearly or quite 
upright position, and by this construction 
either the hook or the point D may be em 
ployed to suspend the candlestick, according to 
convenience. 
I am aware a mine's candlestick has been 
constructed of a single piece of metal, having 
a coil or return bend, which forms a handle, 
said candlestick being also provided with a 
socket within which the candle is held, and a 
pointed end. Such construction Itherefore do 
not broadly claim as my invention, wherein the 
candlestick is composed of a single wire bent 
to form two coils, and having a pointed hook 
at one end by which the device may be hung 
upon a projection of rock, and a pointed arm 
adapted to be thrust into a timber- or into a 
crevice in the rock. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An improved candlestick composed of a 
continuous piece of wire having the two coils 
A and C and a spring arm, D, extending from 
the coil C, bearing against the side of the can 
dle beneath the coil A, and having its end 
pointed, substantially as herein described. 
2. The candle-holding coil A, the coil C, and 
elastic arm D, projecting beyond and beneath 
the coil A, in combination with the hook-ex 
tension B, substantially as herein described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
DAVID B. JAMES. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. NoURSE, 
H. C. LEE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366420.txt	(No Model.) 
LE ROY MOWHINNEY. 
PLOW. 
No. 366,420, 
Patented July 12, 1887. 
 
e2ZA 47-esses. 
12 eez Ao 2. 
2W6 
F 
/ 
S. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LE ROY McWHINNEY, OF CRESTON, IOWA. 
PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent INo. 366,420, dated July 12, 1887. 
Application filed February 24, 1887. Serial No. 22S,745. 
(No model.) 
O 
45 
fo at Ufon, if notZy concern. 
Be it known that I, LE ROY MICWHINNEY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Creston, in the county of Union and State of 
Iowa, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Plows, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
plows; and its object is to cut and pulverize 
the Soil from a short distance below the sur 
face upward, SO as not to turn the same over 
and expose the ammonia and other fertilizing 
agents contained therein to the action of the 
atmosphere, by which they would be in part 
absorbed and the soil thereby weakened. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with a large V-shaped or double-bladed plow 
share or colter, the edge of which is arranged to 
penetrate and run under the surface of the 
soil, of a number of vertical soil-cutting knives' 
or blades rising from the upper surface of the 
She 
It consists, further, in certain details of con 
struction and arrangement, hereinafter de 
scribed, pointed out in the claims, and illus 
trated in the drawings, in which 
Figure is a perspective view of the im 
proved plow seen from the front. Fig. 2 is a 
reversed plan of the same, showing how the 
arms of the colters are connected. Fig. 3 is a 
sectional view. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, A 
designates the plow-beam, and B the handles 
attached thereto in the usual manner. 
CC are the opposite and similar arms or 
blades of the large V-shaped share or colter, 
the point of which is in front, and c c are ver 
tical flanges standing downward from the 
meeting edges of said arms, and secured to 
gether by the nuts and bolts c, as shown in 
Fig. 2. The free ends of said flanges are 
stayed by the rails c' c, which run from each 
flange to the under surface of the correspond 
ing arm, C. 
D is the lower part of the plow-beam, se 
cured between the flanges c c by one of the 
bolts and nuts c' immediately in the rear of 
the angle formed by the arms of the colter. 
The said colter inclines downward from its 
rear edge to its point and front edge, so that 
the said point and edge enter the soil and run 
thereunder. 
EE are vertical blades standing from the 
upper surface of the colter at suitable points, 
and having their edges which are in front 
- 
able. 
curved upward and backward, or convex, so 
as to cut the soil above the colter more easily 
than could be done by straight or concave 
edges. 
l' Fare blades having convex cutting-sur 
faces, and secured to the bent-down rear ends 
of the arms C. The said blades have their 
rear ends bent inward, so as to throw the cut 
soil toward the middle line of the part of the 
ground worked by the plow, when the same is 
necessary. 
Both the blades E and F are detachable, as 
it is sometimes desirable to run the plow so 
as to loosen up the surface of the Soil with 
out cutting the same. 
In operation the broken and cut Soil runs 
over the rear edge of the colter; but, if de 
sired, the latter may be run entirely below the 
Soil. 
The plow is easily guided, requires little 
power, comparatively, to run it, and the blades 
may be extended on each side as far as desir 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. In a plow, the share having the rearward 
diverging horizontal arms having their upper 
sides inclined downward to their front cut 
ting-edges, the vertical knives or cutters F, 
Secured to the outer ends of the arms and 
projecting rearward therefrom, and having 
their rear ends curved inward toward each 
other, and the vertical knives E, arranged at 
suitable distances apart on the intermediate 
portion of the arms, for the purpose set forth, 
substantially as described. 
2. The herein-described plow, consisting of 
the beam A, the handles B B, the W-shaped 
share or colter C C, inclining downward from 
its front edge to its rear edge and point and 
provided with the flanges c c, the bolts and 
nuts c', holding the said flanges together and 
the plow - beam to the flanges, the vertical 
knives E, having front cutting-edges, and the 
knives F, secured to the bent-down edges of 
the arms C of the colter and having their rear 
ends turned inward, all constructed and ar 
ranged substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
LE ROY MCWHINNEY, 
Witnesses: 
J. B. HARSH, 
B. BURCH, 
90 
95 
CO 
IO5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366520.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
C. A. & C. M. SMITH, 
WENTILATING RAILWAY CARS, 
4. sheets-sheet 1. 
No. 366,520, 
Patented July 12, l887, 
 
 
WiFL ES 5 B S. 
s 
 
 
U 
Inve?tors, 
PETERS. Photo-lithographer, Washington, , C. 
(No Model.) 
C. A. & C. M. SMITH, 
WENTILATING RAI, WAY CARS, 
4. Sheets--Sheet 2. 
No. 366,520, 
Patented July 12, 1887. 
 
N 
y 
N 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
: 
& & 
) 
H= 
s 
"Y 
I rve Fors. 
Czeezes 62/5/22/2 
(Weaz-zes 22.577 eat. 
6, 6 rosy %-27-7 ce. 
peers, Photo-Lithographer. Washings'... C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 366,520, 
 
C. A. & C. M. SMITH, 
WENTILATING RAILWAY CARS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented July 12, 1887. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, 
(No Model.) 
C. A. & C. M. SMITH, 
4. sheets-sheet 4. 
No. 366,520, 
VENTILATING RAILWAY CARS, 
Patented July 12, l887. 
 
WIEl Ess E is 
3. 2( 
25,262- 
In v B F Oro. 
l 
6%rzes 7, 97-dea 
S. Photo-Lithographor, Washington, E. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. SMITH AND CHARLES M. SMITH, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ASSIGNORS TO LEWIS J. BIRD, TRUSTEE, OF SAME PLACE. 
VENTATING RAI LVVAY. CARS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 366,520, dated Jaly 12, 1887. 
Application filed October 26, 18S5. 
Serial No. 180,949. (No model.) 
, 
O 
To all, whon, it Tictly conce71. 
ments to enable our invention to be under 
Be it known that we, CHARLEs A. SMITH stood. Fig. 2 is a plan view, with part of the 
and CHARLES M. SMITH, of Boston, county of monitor roof and of the top of the car-body 
Suffolk, and State of Massachusetts, have in 
and of the side walls broken out to show the 
5 vented an Improvement in Ventilating Rail 
interior. Fig. 3 is an end view of Fig. 1. Fig. 
way. Cars, of which the following description, 
4 is a section of Fig. 1, looking toward the 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
right. Fig. 5 is a section of Fig. 1 in the line 
ings, is a specification, like letters on the 
aca', looking in the same direction. Fig. 6 is 
drawings representing like parts. 
a detail showing the top of the floor of the car, 
Our invention has for its object to ventilate 
the latter being partially broken out to show 
railway-cars of the class shown and described 
the keelsons, cross-braces, floor-beams, and 
in the application of C. M. Smith, Serial No. 
spaces between the keelsons, and then at the 
215,545, filed October 7, 1886, in a novel and 
right the parts last referred to as below the 
efficient manner. 3.31 3 (, ; , 
floor are all broken away except the smoke 
The upper portion of the cited y, composed 
pipes, they being above the bottom or under 
of metal plates, as described in said applica 
side of the car-body. Fig. 7 is a detail of the 
tion, is provided externally with a monitor 
monitor roof, the figure being a partial cross 
top having longitudinal air-passages, one of 
section; Fig. 8, a longitudinal sectional detail 
which co-operates with the ribbed braces em 
of the hood, the box therein, and valve; Figs. 
2O ployed to strengthen the car atitsinner side to 
9 and 10, details of the windows shown in Fig. 
supply air to the car, the air entering the said 
7; and Fig. 1 is a partial vertical section 
passages through valves placed under the 
showing part of the upholstery as broken out. 
platform-hood, one or the other being oper 
The car - body A, composed of numerous 
ative as the air-inlet, according to the direc 
sheets or plates of metal riveted together, as 
25 tion of the movement of the car, while the 
in application Serial No. 215,545, is provided 
other passage serves to conduct the vitiated 
at its upper side with a monitor top composed 
air from the car, preferably through usual 
of metal plates b b, (see Figs. 4, 5, and 7,) 
ventilators in connection there with. The 
joined to the body, and together to form longi 
fresh air is conveyed from the passages in the 
tudinal passages B B B, (herein shown as 
3o monitor top to the space below the car-floor 
three,) the plates l b, comprising the monitor 
by means of the ribbed braces referred to. 
top, being connected with the body and with 
The space below the car-floor, and between 
each other by means of angle-irons b' and riv 
it and the interior of the cylindrical car-body, 
ets b, as best shown in Fig. 7; but it will be 
receives the pipes used in heating the car, and 
understood that the said junction may be made 
35 the heat introduced into the car is that in 
by flanging the plates l and inserting the riv 
duced by indirect radiation, the fresh atmos 
ets directly through them. 
pheric air introduced into the space. between 
Each passage 13, at the sides of the monitor 
the floor and body and therein warmed by the 
top, has one or more windows, B", opening into 
heating-pipes entering the car through regis 
it from the interior of the car-body, and at its 
4o ters in the floor, which, besides affording an 
outer side the monitor top has one or more 
ample supply of warmed fresh air, also ob. 
windows, B, preferably one, for each window 
viates all danger of fire, for the heater, which 
B', the said windows Band B" serving for the 
is not herein shown, but described in applica 
admission of light into the top of the car. 
tion Serial No. 213,237, is arranged entirely 
The top of the car, at suitable intervals, has 
register's B-such as shown in Fig. 5-to per 
In Summer the spaces below the registers 
mit the exit of air from the car-body into the 
may be provided with boxes containing cool. 
space B, the outer case or part of the monitor 
ing materials to thus cool the air. 
top having usual ventilators, B", to effect the 
Figure 1 in side elevation, partially broken 
removal of the air from the spaces B. 
to out, represents a sufficient portion of a rail 
The central passage, B, opens at each end 
way passenger-car embodying our improve 
immediately under the platform-hood C, the 
45 below and outside the car. 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
2 
- 
...' 
- 
366,520 
The smoke-pipes and the pipes connecting 6o 
the furnaces and extended through the space 
d act to heat the air introduced therein, and 
the said air is delivered through registers d" 
in the floor F, one register being preferably 
in the passage-way between the seats G. 
. 
2. A car-body composed of metal plates 75 
We claim 
1. A railway-car body composed of metal 
plates riveted together and having a metallic 
monitor top divided longitudinally to form 
passages B B, the former for the reception of 7o 
air to be introduced into the car and the latter 
for the reception of air from the car, combined 
with ventilators in connection with the pas 
sage B, substantially as described. 
riveted together, and the metallic monitor top 
thereon provided with an air-supply passage, 
B, open for the reception of air, combined 
with hollow braces D, to sustain the interior 
of the cal-body, the floor F, supported a little 8O 
above the interior of the lower part of the car 
body, and registers in the car, the said braces 
being provided with openings for the reception 
of air from the passageB and for the discharge 
of air into the spaced below the floor, sub- 85 
stantially as described. 
3. The car-body composed of metal plates 
riveted together, and the metallic monitor top 
having the air-spaces B B", and the air inlet 
and outlet passages B" and B, respectively, 90 
combined with windows B" and B, located, 
respectively, in the monitor top and on the 
upper part of the car-body, substantially as 
described. 
hood C, and the boxes C, located below and 
close to the under side of the said hood, and 
the valves C in the said boxes, combined with 
the monitor top having the passage B for the 
reception of air, and with the hollow braces Co 
D to conduct air into the spaces below the 
floor of the car, substantially as described. 
5. The metallic car. body composed of sheets 
of metal riveted together, and the floor F, 
combined with two or more keelsons at each I o5 
side of the longitudinal center of the car, the 
said keelsons being provided with openings 
for the circulation of air in the space below 
the floor and below it and the body and the 
keelsons, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
4. The car - body, its connected platform 95 
IO 
CHARLES A. SMITEI. 
CHARLES M. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
G. W. GREGORY, 
F. L. EMERY. 
end of the passage being protected by a box, 
C, screened at its open face, (see Figs. 1 and 
8,) the box containing an inwardly - closing 
valve, C, (best shown in the enlarged detail, 
5 Fig. 8,) the said valve being supported on a 
horizontal pivot, 5, and counterbalanced or 
weighted at its lower edge, as at C*, (see Fig. 
S,) So as to normally close the air-inlet passage 
B" to cut off the entrance of air into the pas 
Sage B, as shown at the left in Fig. 1, except 
When the speed or direction of movement of 
the car is such as to cause the air coming un 
der the said hood to overcome the weight or 
Counter-balance C*. Of the two Valves held 
I5 in this way only that one at the front end of 
the car, or the end in the direction in which the 
car is moving, will be opened. The air enter 
ing the passage B will find exit therefrom 
through a series of holes, 6, opening into the 
2O spaces 7 of the ribbed braces D, which, as 
herein shown, are made of wrought metal 
rolled into the shape shown at Fig. 11, and 
thereafter bent into annular form, the diame 
ter of the said ribbed braces externally being 
25 just the size and shape of the interior of the 
car-body in cross-section, the external flanges 
of the said ribbed braces being secured in 
place by suitable rivets, 8, (see Fig. 11,) the 
flange 10 at the inner or central portion of the 
said braces being drilled at proper intervals 
to receive the rods or supports R, which aid 
in retaining the upholstery in position, the 
said upholstery being shown and described in 
the application, Serial No. 215,543, filed Octo 
ber 7, 1886. 
The hollow ribbed braces D, (see Fig. 11.) 
referred to, at or below the floor F, have suit 
able openings, 14, (see Fig. 11,) to enable the 
air driven into the said spaces 7 from the pas 
Sage B to be discharged into the air-spaces d 
d below the floor and extending from end to 
end of the car. 
The space between the under side of the 
floor and the inner side of the car-body, (see 
Fig. 4.) is divided into several small spaces d 
d by the keelsons e e, as set forth in the ap 
plication, Serial No. 215,545, the said keelsons 
having, at suitable intervals, openings 15, (see 
Fig. 11,) in number sufficient to enable a uni 
form circulation of air to be maintained in the 
spaces below the car and between it and the 
car-body. 
The cential spaced will receive in it the 
smoke-pipe f and other pipes in connection 
with the furnace or furnaces for heating the 
car, the said pipes and furnaces being shown 
and claimed in another application, Serial No. 
213,237, filed September 10, 1886, to which 
reference may be had. 
30 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366620.txt	(No Model.) 
 
J. N. CLOUSE, 
WEHICLE WHEEL. 
 
 
N. Peters, Photo-lthographs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH N. CLOUSE, OF TOLEDO, OHIO. 
VE H | CLE-WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 366,620, dated July 12, 1857. 
Application filed June 17, 1886. Serial No. 205,511. 
(No model.) 
O 
To all ?yholm, if may concer?: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPHI IN. CLOUSE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Toledo, 
in the county of Lucas and State of Ohio, have 
invented new and useful Inprovements in 
Wheels for Vehicles and other Uses, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
metal wheels for vehicles, and especially such 
wheels as are used for children's carriages and 
velocipedes and bicycles; and the special object 
of my invention is to construct a metal hub 
for wheels (such as are usually termed sus 
pension-wheels) so that all of the parts com 
posing the hub may be cast in such a manner 
that there will be no labor in fitting it up but 
boring out the box and tapping and threading 
the nut and box. Second, my object is to pro 
vide a wheel that can be easily repaired and 
easily finished up for nice work, the size of 
wheel and number of spokes being varied to 
Suit the work on which it is to be used. I 
attain these objects by the mechanism illus 
trated in the drawings, and in the manner 
herci nafter described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
center section of the hub with a section of the 
lim. Fig. 2 is a front side view of the hub 
with a section of the rim. Fig. 3 is an end 
view of the sleeve box, and showing the posi 
tion of the spokes. Figs. 4 and 5 are side and 
edge views of the head-flange. In all of which 
views like letters refer to like parts. 
C is a box terminating at one end in a sand 
band, c, and provided at the other end with a 
thread to receive a nut, H. A. flange also ex 
tends out from the box C, having a series of 
arms or wedges, DD, &c. The exterior of the 
box C is provided with one or more projecting 
ribs or stops, I. A loose flange, F, which has 
a hole in it which fits the exterior of the box C, 
and an opening also in it to receive the stop I, 
is provided also with a series of arms or 
wedges ID D, &c., and each flange also is pro 
vided with a series of grooves, f, on the in 
side. 
The spokes B B are the usual return-spokes, 
two in one, the ends of which are riveted at (, a 
45 
55 
in the rim or felly A and return around the 
arms or Wedges ID D. 
E is a sleeve having grooves in the ends of 
it which correspond to the grooves f in the 
flanges F, &c. The interior of the sleeve E 
fits over the exterior of the arms or wedges 
DD, the inclined backs of the arms D D serv 
ing to tighten up the spokes B B by being 
forced in, and the nut H. tightened, so as to 
bring the flanges up solid against the sleeve E. 
I design to vary the size of the hub and the 
number of spokes to suit the size of the wheel 
and the strength required. In case a spoke is 
broken, the wheel can be repaired by remov 
ing the nut H. and the box C, if desired, and 
replacing them again when desired, the whole 
forming a neat, strong, cheap, and compact 
Wheel. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a metal wheel for vehicles and other 
uses, the box C, with its sand-band c, flange 
and arms or wedges D D, &c., in combination 
with the nut H and flange F, with its arms 
or wedges D D, &c., substantially as described 
and specified. 
2. In a metal wheel for vehicles and otlher 
uses, the box C, with its sand-band c, flange 
and arms or wedges D D, &c., stop I, nut II, 
flange F, with its arms or wedges D D, &c., 
and the grooves ff, &c., in combination with 
the spokes B IB and B* B* and felly A, sub 
stantially as Sct forth. 
3. In a metal wheel for vehicles and other 
uses, the combination of the box C, Sand-band 
c, flange and arms DD, grooves ff, nut H, 
flange F, and arms D D and grooves ff, 
sleeve E and grooves ff, and spokes B B and 
B B", and felly A, all substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereu nto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
heSSOS. 
w 
JOSEPII N. CLOUSE. 
75 
Witnesses: 
C. S. CURTIs, 
J. A. CIIASE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366720.txt	(No Model.) 
H. GOLD WATER, 
APPARATUS FOR REFINING ILLUMINATING AND LUBRICATING OILS, 
No. 366,720, 
Patented July 19, l887. 
1 w 2222 
1722 esses: 
 
N. PEERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
HENRY GOLD WATER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO JAMES TYROLER, 
OF SAMIE PLACE. 
- 
APPARATUS FOR REFINING LLUMINATING AND LUBRICATING OLS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 366,720, dated Jaiyl.9, l887. 
Application filed May 6, 1886. 
Serial No. 201344. No model.) 
2O retort is avoided. 
To all whon, it naily conce7'Fu: 
Be it known that I, HENRY GOLD WATER, of 
the city and county of New York, in the State 
of New York, have invented a certain new and 
5 useful Improvement in Apparatus for Refining 
Illuminating and Lubricating Oils from Crude 
Petroleum, of which the following is a specifi. 
cation. 
Letters Patent issued to me February 2, 1886, 
Io No. 325,281, set forth an apparatus in which 
certain novel provisions are made for arresting 
and returning unevaporated particles which 
are carried up with the light vapor. Such are 
usually of a denser or less volatile grade of oil; 
I5 but the oil thus arrested and returned differs 
in important points from the mass which re 
mains in the retort. I have devised apparatus 
by which the mixing of the particles thus ar 
lested with the mass of crude material in the 
I conduct the arrested particles into one or 
more smaller vessels or retorts arranged near 
the main retort and favorably conditioned to 
receive a gentle heat by which the contents 
25 may be evaporated. The volatile portion is 
led away to a condenser. The denser portion 
of the separated product thus treated is drawn 
off either continuously or at intervals. In 
stead of a series of traps divided by a consid 
3o erable.space, as shown in my former patent, I 
employ a single vessel of considerable height 
tapered from the lower end upward, so as to 
present favorable surfaces over which water 
may flow. A single reservoir at the top re 
35 ceives water, which is allowed to flow in a thin 
sheet, or any other convenient form, down the 
exterior of the vessel. 
It is arrested in an an 
nular chamber provided around the bottom 
and led away. The vapors in rising through 
4o this vessel are passed successively through 
contracted apertures in a succession of hori. 
Zontal plates or platforms. The arrested 
particles are allowed to return from stage to 
stage within this single chamber, and the va 
45 por, becoming more and more perfectly sepa 
rated from the unevaporated material, is dis 
charged from the top, the conditions being 
similar to my former apparatus in the fact of 
the same water being used as a cooling medium 
5O at all the stages, the rising vapor meeting the 
Water at first in its Warnest conditions and at 
My improved apparatus is intended to sepa- 6o 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 65 
the successive stages encountering it at a lower 
temperature. 
It has been found of advantage to introduce 
the vapor of water-steam-tomingle with the 55 
hydrocarbon vapors and liquids to be after 
ward separated from the refined product. I 
employ means for effecting this at several 
stages in the progress of my vapors. 
rate more completely petroleum and analogous 
oils into the desired grades with a more than 
usual degree of perfection, and to treat large 
quantities continuously and rapidly. 
this specification, and represent what I con 
sider the best means of carrying out the inven 
tion. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section; IFig. 2, a 
transverse section. Fig. 3 is a horizontal sec. 7c 
tion on the line y) in lig. 1, on a larger Scale; 
and Fig. 4 is a cross-section on a larger scale. 
This figure corresponds to Fig. 3, but with 
some of the parts omitted. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A is the main retort, set in masonry, and 
exposed to the heat of a furnace below. It 
will be understood that any ordinary or suit 
able means are employed for regulating the 
heat applied to this and to the other portions 
of the apparatus which are exposed to the ac 
tion of the fire. 
B B are pipes of liberal size, leading upward 
and obliquely toward each other from two 
points in the upper portion of the retort. 
They deliver the vapor with the material car 
ried there with into the upper portion of a 
chamber, E, in which the first part of the 
separation of the unevaporated particles is 
effected. The end of each is equipped with a 
broad plate, IB, which extends upward and 
downward, and aids to arrest circulation and 
induce a quiescent condition of the vapor after 
its delivery in the chamber against a hollow 
partition, F, which extends across the upper 
portion of the interior of chamber E. This 
hollow partition F performs four important 
functions: first, of mechanically arresting all 
unevaporated material, the particles being 
projected against it by their momentum, and 
adhering to it and trickling down; second, 
75 
90 
95 
IOy 
2 
- - - 
366,720 
75 
arresting and limiting the vigor of the circu 
lation of the vapor, so as to induce the quies 
cent condition which is favorable to the com 
plete separation of the unevaporated particles; 
third, cooling the vapor projected against it, 
and thereby condensing the most volatile por 
tion; and, fourth, forming within the parti 
tion F a chamber in which an exactly uniform 
temperature is maintained by the constant im 
pact of the hot vapor on the exterior, in which 
chamber the unevaporated liquid descending 
from above may find a liberal supply of heat 
to insure the evaporation and rise of the por 
tions which are sufficiently volatile to evapo 
rate at that temperature, while those portions 
which are not sufficiently volatile descend and 
drop from the lower edge. This action is due 
to the fact that the vapors fresh from the re 
tort which rise through the pipes B and are 
projected in two strong currents against the 
hollow partition F are hotter than the va 
pOrs, which have traversed the chambers 
above, and are especially hotter than the ma 
terial descending through F. My arrange 
ment insures a just sufficient addition of mod 
erate heat to F to enable it to re-evaporate the 
volatile elements in its contents without re 
evaporating the denser elements. 
The unevaporated portions, either separated 
from the vapor in its first reception into E or 
returned into it through the hollow partition 
F, collect in the bottom of E. Instead of 
transmitting them from thence back into the 
main retort or still A, to mingle with the 
crude material there contained, I lead them 
down through pipes G, one at each side, which 
communicate, respectively, with side chambers 
or sub-retorts, H, arranged within the same 
furnace, and exposed to the desired amount of 
heat. In this they are redistilled, the vola 
tile portions rising through a pipe, I, and 
flowing away to a condenser, which may be of 
any ordinary or suitable construction, in which 
they are reduced to a liquid form, and either 
with or without further treatment subsequently 
barreled or otherwise stored. 
J are pipes controlled by valves.j. Through 
these the unevaporated material is drawn from 
the sub-retorts Heither constantly or at inter. 
vals. This may be subsequently treated in 
the main still A, or other suitable apparatus, 
to further separate its constituents, if desired. 
Kare pipes leading from the sub-retorts into 
the upper portion of the main still A. These 
are controlled by valvesle, and may be opened 
at intervals to afford a free communication 
between these parts when desired. The vola 
tile products from these side chambers or 
sub-retorts procured by condensing the vapor 
rising through the pipe I are illuminating 
oils of great density and high illuminating 
powers, corresponding to what is generally 
known in the trade as signal-oil. The va. 
pors which rise through the chamber E and 
are treated in the upper portions of the ap 
paratus are of a lighter and more volatile char. 
acter. They produce the kerosenes, naphthas, 
and other light oils. The separations to which 
these materials are subjected may be more or 
iess extended. I will represent apparatus for 
separating once before the vapors rise into 
what I term the bell, corresponding to the 
series of traps in the former apparatus. 
L are pipes of suitable capacity leading from 
the two chambers into which the casing E is 
almost completely divided by the hollow par 
tition F. The vapor rising through these is 
discharged into the upper portion of a casing, 
M, being discharged against a central parti 
tion, N, therein, which extends from the top 
downward nearly but not quite to the bottom. 
This partition need not be hollow. It does 
not serve as a means for leading down une 
vaporated material; but it performs an im- . 
portant function in presenting a suitable sur 
face to arrest the particles of liquid which still 
remain mechanically suspended or otherwise 
carried along in the vapor. It also aids to 
check the motion of the vapor and reduce it 
to the quiescent condition which is desirable 
for the further separation of the unevaporated 
parts. All the liquid material here arrested, 
as also that which trickles down from the ap 
paratus above, to be presently described, is 
led down through the hollow partition F into 
the base of E, and is led into the side cham 
bers, as before described. The vapor, now 
pretty effectually separated from particles of 
unevaporated liquid, rises through the two 
pipes O and joins into one, P. There are 
some conditions under which this vapor may 
be condensed and stored without further treat 
ment. When this is desired, I close the valve p 
and open a valve, q, controlling a pipe, Q, which 
extends laterally from this part of the appa 
ratus to a suitable condenser. 
Steam is received from a boiler (not repre 
sented) through a pipe, S, which is branched 
as follows: Two branches, S', lead to the corre 
sponding side chambers, H. When the cocks 
s', controlling these branches, are open, steam is 
admitted in any desired quantities therein. 
Another branch, S", controlled by a cock, s', 
leads the steam into the base of the casing E. 
Another branch, controlled by a cock, s', leads 
steam into the pipe S". This should only be 
When, as may 
used when the cock q is open. 
usually be preferred, the vapor is to be fur 
ther treated to separate the denser and dis 
charge only the lighter portions, the valve q 
is kept closed and the valve p open. 
Under 
these conditions the vapor rises from Pinto 
the bell W, where it passes a series of hori 
Zontal partitions, Y. The vapor traverses suc 
cessively through short pipes Y', extending 
upward from each. The liquid condensed in 
the bell at the several stages gathers on the 
upper surfaces of these partitions, and de 
scends through pipes Y, which extend a little 
distance downward from the several parti 
The liquid thus obtained gathers in 
tions. 
the bottom of the bell, and may, if desired, 
be led away through a pipe (not represented) 
to be stored or further treated. I prefer, for 
90 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
6 p. 
 
366,720 
: 
3O 
S 
O 
general purposes, to return this liquid and 
mingle it with the particles mechanically sep 
arated below. All will be properly separated 
in the side chambers, H. 
The condensation in the bell is effected by wa 
ter presented to the exterior. The upper edge 
of the bell has a rim, W, into which water 
flows through a pipe, U, controlled by a cock, 
al. The upper edge of this rim should be 
maintained exactly level, so that the water 
Will flow over uniformly and trickle down on 
the exterior. Provisions may be made, if de 
sired, for compelling this water to traverse 
Spirally. It bathes the exterior of the bell. 
On its first introduction into the reservoir on 
the top of the bell its temperature is low. In 
its moving in a thin sheet over the exterior of 
the bell it becomes raised in temperature; but 
it is still capable of effecting some condensing 
of the volatile vapors in the lower portion of 
the bell. The whole surface is effective for 
Condensation. 
W is a lip or rim encompassing the bottom 
of the bell. 
X is a pipe which leads away the water ar. 
rested thereby, and conveys it to a tank or 
drain. (Not represented.) 
The unevaporated vapors rising from the 
bell flow through a pipe, Z, to a condenser. 
The product is more uniformly conditioned by 
reason of its having been subjected to succes 
sively cooler surfaces in the bell, and having 
correspondingly parted by fractional distilla 
tion with its most easily condensable portions. 
One advantage due to my combination and 
alrangement of the apparatus is, that I get a 
larger proportion of dense oil and get it more 
completely separated both from the lighter 
elements and from the denser-the paraffine 
and tar. This is due largely to the action in 
my side chambers or sub-retorts, H, and the 
passages connecting these with the other parts; 
but it is also due in part to the favorable con 
ditions for separating in the hollow partition F. 
I am aware of the patent to A. Millochau, 
No. 53,167, dated March 13, 1866, for condens 
ing a portion of the vapor from an outer still 
and carrying the liquid thereby obtained into 
an inner still to be further treated; and also of 
so 
the patent to T. McGowan, dated May 16, 1882, 
No. 257,961, in which condensed portions are 
returned first to a retort outside and afterward 
transferred to the main retort. I do not claim, 
broadly, the returning of condensed products 
to a different clhamber from the first or main 
let Ort. 
Modifications may be made in the forms and 
proportions of the apparatus without depart 
ing from the principle or sacrificing the ad 
vantages of the invention. 
I can duplicate or triplicate or otherwise 
increase the extent of the surfaces and the vol 
ume of the chambers or casings. Provisions 
may be made for separately taking away the 
liquids gathered on the several horizontal par 
titions Y in the bell. 
I can dispense with the provisions for intro 
ducing steam at some of the points represented. 
I attach importance to the introduction of 
steam at the several stages for its well-known 
effect in softening the action. The steam-pipes 
constitute in their combination with my ap 
paratus a means of applying and diffusing 
heat and hastening away the vapors to expe 
dite the action of the apparatus. 
I can use the apparatus successfully with 
only one of the side chambers, H. 
It may be 
made larger thanishere shown. I can employ a 
separate fire for heating it instead of, as shown, 
exposing it in the same ?urnace as the main 
retort. I can providescreens or other devices 
for varying the relative temperatures of the 
retorts. I propose under some circumstances 
to inclose a chamber corresponding to the sub 
retort, H in the interior of the main retort A, 
providing the connections, as here shown, for 
leading away the vaporized portion and drain 
ing off the unevaporated either constantly or 
at intervals. Such an arrangement offers ad 
vantages in the uniformity of the heat which 
it would receive, being transmitted through 
the medium of the general contents of the main 
retort; but, on the other hand, the sub-retort 
exposed to direct heat outside can act more 
efficiently. I prefer the arrangement shown. 
I propose under some circumstances to employ 
two or more of the chambers E, with their hol 
low partitions F mounted one albove another. 
In such case the drippings from the upper 
most will descend, protected by the sides of 
the partition from any disturbance, through 
the chamber below, and thus be transmitted 
from one to another, as many as may be desired. 
In each the descending liquid will be inclosed 
within walls of a slightly higher temperature 
under conditions eminently favorable to a deli 
cate separation, the parts which are more Vola 
tile separating and rising, while the parts 
which are less volatile continue their descent. 
It will be understood that any ordinary or 
suitable provisions may be employed for gradu 
ating the heat in the furnace and for attaining 
all the ordinary adjustments. The introduc 
tion of the crude material and the discharge 
of the unevaporated portions from the main re 
tort may be conducted in the ordinary manner. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a distilling apparatus, the combina 
tion of the nain retort A, sub-retorts I, a suit 
able furnace for heating the same, the chamber 
E, seated thereon, a pipe connecting the bot 
tom of the chamber E with the sub-retort, and 
pipes for leading off the vapors from the re 
tort and sub-retort, substantially as described. 
2. In a distilling apparatus, the combina 
tion of the main retort A, sub-retolts H, and 
means for heating the same, the pipes IX, con 
necting the sub-retorts with the main retort, 
suitable controlling means, as the valves k, for 
said pipes, the chamber E, the pipes B, con 
necting this chamber with the main retort, and 
pipes G, connecting said chamber with the 
sub-retorts, all arranged to operate as herein 
specified. 
45 
4O 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
IC5 
O 
I 5 
I 25 
H 
4 
366,720. 
tion of the retort A, sub-retorts H, and chamber 
E, connected as described, and means for heat 
ing the same, the steam-pipe S, with branches. 
connecting the same to the pipe Q, sub-retorts 
H, and chamber E, respectively, substantially 
as herein specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand, at New York city, this 3d day of May, 
1886, in the presence of two subscribing wit 
GSSeS. 
HENRY GOLD WATER. 
2O. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. JoHNSTONE, 
M. F. BOYLE. 
3. In a distilling apparatus, the combina 
tion of the retort A, means for heating the same, 
chamber E, seated thereon, pipes BB, connect 
ing the retort A and the chamber E, and par 
tition-plates B B, extending from the top 
and across said chamber nearly to the bottom 
thereof, forming three chambers therein and 
receiving the pipes B B, the return-passage, 
the chamber M above the chamber E and con 
nected there with by means of the vapor-pipes 
L T, and partition N, extending from the top 
of said chamber across the same and nearly to 
the bottom, all substantially as described. 
4. In a distilling apparatus, the combina 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366822.txt	(No Model.) 
J. DU FRANES. 
COMBINED TENONING AND MORTISING MACHINE, 
No. 366,822. 
Patented July 19, 1887. 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSEs: 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH DU FRANES, OF NORTEI TOPEKA, KANSAS. 
COMBINED TEN ONING AND MORTS ING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 366,822, dated July 19, 1887. 
. Application filed October 2, 1886. Serial No. 215,152. 
No model.) 
5 
IO 
2) 
25 
35 
O 
5 
To all whom it mCity concern: 
Beit known that I, JosEPH IDU FRAN Es, of 
North Topeka, in the county of Shawnee and 
State of Kansas, have invented a new and Im 
proved Combined Mortising and Tenoning 
Machine, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to a foot-power mor 
tising and tenoning machine; and the inven 
tion consists, principally, in a practicable com 
bination of the two machines. 
The invention also consists in the feed mech 
anism, and in the means for holding and plac 
ing the cutters. 
The invention also consists of the construc 
tion, arrangement, and combination of parts, 
all as hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
Corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure l is a front elevation of my com 
bined mortising and tenoning machine. Fig. 
2 is a Sectional elevation of the same, taken on 
the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a detailed soc 
tional plan view taken on the line) y of Fig. 
2, and Fig. 4 shows one of the tenoning-knives. 
A represents the upright frame of the ma 
chine supported upon the base A and legs 
A, and constructed to form the ways BB, in 
which the frame C is vertically reciprocated 
for causing the mortising knife at and tenon 
ing-knives 
b, carried thereby, to perform 
their work. The mortising-knife at is not car. 
ried directly by the frame C, but is held in a 
cylindrical stock, D, held in the sleeve D, 
made a part of the plate D', which is attached 
to the upper end of the frame C by a bolt, D', 
Which passes through a slot, in the plate D, so 
that the plate may be adjusted back and forth 
upon the frame C by the screw D', to change 
the position of the knife a, as the work may 
require. The stock D is adapted to be turned 
in the tube D by the handled, for turning the 
knife ( to cut both sides and ends of the mor 
tise. 
The knives b b are secured by cleats and 
Screws, or other obvious means, to projections 
ce of the side pieces, c c, of the frame C, and 
are each formed with a diagonal cutting-edge, 
b', as shown in Fig. 4, to cut and remove the 
55 
83 
90 
timber T upon both sides to form the tenon t. 
(Shown clearly in Fig. 3.) The frame C is 
vertically reciprocated, to cause the knives b 
and a to do their work, by means of the treadle 
E, connected to the frame by the connecting 
rod E and the connected springs E" and E, 
the former connected to the frame C by the 
projection c', the latter held stationary upon 
the studs c' c', attached to the main frame A. 
The timber T to be worked is supported 
upon a table, IF, held to the front of the main 
frame A. by the heavy bolt F, passed through 
the table and through the cleat F at the back 
of the frame A, so that by loosening the nut 
upon this bolt the table may be raised or low 
ered according to the width of the timber to 
be worked. 
G represents a holding and feed frame for 
holding and feeding the timber to the knives. 
This is attached to the table F by a bolt, G", 
passed through the horizontal board G', at 
tached to the lower edge of the frame G, as 
shown clearly in Figs. 1 and 3. Within the 
frame G is held the sliding feed-plate G", which 
is provided with a bent arm, g, and clamp 
screw f', for clamping the piece of timber T to 
the front surface of the feed-plate G", as shown 
clearly in Fig. 1. The plate G is adapted to 
be moved longitudinally in the frame G, for 
feeding the timber to and from the knives, by 
the screw II, which works in a screw-threaded 
opening made in the outer bar, g, of the frame 
G, and passes through a screw-threaded open 
ing in a cleat, h, attached to the feed-plate, as 
shown clearly in Fig. 3. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Lotter's Patent, is- 
The vertically-sliding frame C, carrying the 
block D", and screw D", for adjusting the block D' 
horizontally, and the knife-stock D, held in the 
sleeve D' of the block D", in combination with 
the table F, frame G, horizontal sliding plate 
G", provided with the clamp () and screw ty', 
and the tenoning-knives b, attached to oppo. 
site sides of the frame C, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
w 
JOSEPH IDU FIRANES. 
Witnesses: 
J. R. EMERSON, 
J. W. PACIS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US366922.txt	(No Model.) 
D. L. BURNETT & L. DE LISLE. 
RAILWAY CROSSING, 
No. 366,922. 
 
Patented July 19, 1887. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL L. BURNETT AND LEON DE LISLE, OF FLORISANT, MISSOURI. 
RALWAY CROSSING. 
37ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 366,922, dated July 19, 1887. 
Application filed April 29, 1887. 
Serial No. 236,557. No model.) 
O 
5 
25 
To all, whon, it 1) city conce7'Iv. 
Be it known that we, DANIEL L. BURNETT 
and LEON DE LISLE, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Florisant, in the county of 
St. Louis and State of Missouri, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Rail 
way. Crossings; and we hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip. 
tion of the same. 
The drawing illustrating our invention is a 
perspective view of a crossing, one section be 
ing displaced the better to show the construc 
tion and manner of connecting the several 
parts. 
Railway-crossings as now commonly con 
structed have their cross-rails and guard or 
guide rails supported by filling-blocks' or 
packing - blocks, as they are commonly 
termed, and the several rails are secured to the 
2O cross-ties by means of spikes. This construc 
tion is objectionable, because of the liability 
of the flange of the car-wheel being broken by 
striking the filling-blocks, and also from the 
tendency of the guard or guide rails to spread 
or become displaced by the breaking of either 
rail or bolts, or by the loosening of the spikes. 
The spreading of the rails and the fracture of 
rails, bolts, and wheel-flanges are of common 
occurrence at all times, but more frequently 
occur in frosty weather. It is also the plac 
tice in laying the ties for a railway-crossing to 
arrange them the same as at other parts of the 
track-that is, transverse or at right angles to 
the line of rails-and as a consequence the 
rails of the crossing, are not well supported 
against lateral thrusts, as it is desirable they 
should be. 
The objects of our present invention are to 
dispense with filling-blocks, so as to avoid in 
4O jury to the car-wheels; to so secure the cross 
rails and guard or guide rails that the spread 
ing or displacement thereof will not occur un 
der any ordinary Wear and tear; to support the 
crossing-rails and guard or guide rails by such 
an arrangement of the ties that the crossing 
Will resist lateral thrust from either direction 
equally well and will not be materially affected 
by expansion and contraction due to changes 
of temperature, and to proyide a supplemental 
Support for the passing wheels, so as to obvi 
ate the sagging and hammering incident to old 
wheels and wheels whose treads are much worn. 
35 
45 
sy 
To accomplish these several objects the cross 
ties are preferably arranged diagonally, so as 
to support both tracks. Outside supplemental 55 
rail sections (or twin rails) are used at the 
crossings, over which the outer or unworn pe 
ripheral surface of the wheel passes. The rails 
are riveted to and supported on bed-plates 
which are secured to the cross-ties by lag- Co 
screws, and other minor features of construc 
tion are adopted, all as will hereinafter more 
fully appear. 
We will now proceed to describe the pre 
ferred form of our invention more fully, so 65 
that others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains will be enabled to apply the same. 
In the drawing, A indicates the ties of one 
of the tracks at points outside of or beyond the 
crossing, which ties are placed in the usual 7O 
manner, or at right angles to the track, and the 
ties of the other track are of course placed in 
like manner. 
B indicates the ties of the crossing. These 
ties are preferably placed diagonally or an 
gling, as shown, so as to support and bind all 
the crossing rails or sections, the object of 
which is to sustain the crossing against lateral 
or racking motion, and obviate the evils 
consequent on the expansion and contraction 
of the devices from changes of temperature. 
This is an important feature, as it is not prac 
ticable in crossings to allow long distances be 
tween joints, and thus compensate for expan 
sion and contraction, as can be done in other 
parts of the track. 
11 and 22 indicate the rails of the inter 
secting tracks. The inner ends of said rails 
are also, by preference, supported on the di 
agonally-arranged ties B, which support the 
crossings. 
3 indicates bed - plates, which should be 
of such length as to extend beyond the cross 
ing, so as to support the inner 'ends of the 
track-rails. We have found a width of two 
and one-half (2) feet, and a thickness of three 
quarters (::) of an inch to answer admirably 
for these bed-plates. 
The bed-plates 3; if desired, may be let into 
the ties to prevent lateral and longitudinal ICO 
displacement, and should be secured by lag 
screws 4, placed at intervals of four (4) or six 
(6) inches, (more or less.) To said bed-plates 
3 the rail-sections constituting the crossings 
95 
8O 
75 
. 
366,922 
IO 
- 
are secured by rivets or bolts 5 at short inter 
vals. Owing to this method of securing the 
bed-plates and rails of the crossings, the rails 
are much better supported, which is desirable, 
as short lengths are used for crossings, and in 
case of fracture there is little chance of dis 
placement of the pieces. 
6 6 and 77 indicate the cross-rail Sections 
forming the quadrilateral of the crossing, and 
said cross-rail sections are arranged on and 
across the bed-plates 3 at the proper angles and 
gage, so as to leave the proper intervals for the 
wheel-flanges, all as is well understood by 
railroad engineers. They are secured to the 
line-rails of their respective tracks by fish 
plates 8, or in any other suitable manner, and 
to the bed-plates 3 by rivets or bolts, as here 
in before specified. At the several inner an 
gles of the crossings are arranged the guard 
or guide rails 9, which are secured to the bed 
plates 3 by rivets or bolts 10, in like manner 
as the rails, and are bound to the rails 66 and 
77 by bolts 11 and stretcher and brace sleeves 
12, which not only support the rails and guard 
rails against spreading, but divide up and dis 
seminate the strain. This construction and 
connection of the guard-rails not only dis 
penses with the commonly employed filling 
block, but decreases the wear and injury to 
the wheel-flanges, and to that extent lessens. 
the damage to the passing train and to the 
crossing. 
On the outside and in close proximity to the 
cross-rails 66 and 77, forming the quadrilat 
eral or crossing, are supplemental rail-sec 
tions 13, which are secured to the bed-plate by 
rivets 14 at short intervals, and are supported 
by the bolts 11 of the guard-rails, and, if de 
sired, by additional bolts, which may be used 
to connect them with cross-rails 6 and 7. These 
supplemental rails 13 are of the same, or sub 
stantially the same, height as the rails 6 and 
7, and receive the outer and unworn tread 
of the passing wheel, thus counteracting any 
tendency of the wheels to sag or hammer in 
passing the crossing. It is of course well un 
derstood that the constant wear of the wheel 
tread is on the part next to the flange, and 
that the wheel-tread distant from the flange 
will in ninety-nine cases out of a hundred be 
perfect long after the tread next to the flange 
is worn down. 
In order to facilitate the mounting of the 
wheel on the supplemental rails 13 without jar 
25 
35 
45 
75 
- 
or hammering, which might occur if the inner 55 
tread of the wheel was much worn, it is de 
sirable to slope or bevel the outer ends of the 
supplemental rails, as indicated at 15. As 
this portion of the wheel-tread distant from 
the flange passes over the supplemental rail 
13 the wheel cannot sag or drop, nor can it 
materially hammer or injure the crossing. 
In addition to the advantages pointed out 
in the body of the specification, our improved 
crossing will possess greater strength, stabil 
ity, and durability than any crossing now in 
use or known to us. 
Having thus described the nature and ad 
vantages of our invention, what we claim, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a railway-cross 
ing, of diagonally-arranged ties, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
2. The combination, with a railway-cross 
ing, of supplemental (or twin) rails arranged 
to the outer side of the crossing-rails, stubstan 
tially as and for the purposes specified. 
3. The combination, with a railway. cross 
ing, of supplemental (or twin) rails having 
sloping ends, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
4. The combination, in a railway-crossing, 
of diagonally - arranged ties, bed-plates ar 
ranged thereon, and cross-rails riveted to the 
bed-plates, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
5. The combination, in a railway-crossing, 
of diagonally - arranged ties, bed-plates se 
cured thereto by lag-screws, and cross-rails 
riveted at short intervals to the bed-plates, 
substantially as and for the purposes specified. 
6. The combination, in a railway-crossing, 
of diagonally-arranged ties, bed-plates se 
cured thereto by lag-screws, cross-rails riveted 
to the base-plates, supplemental rails arranged 
to the outer side of the cross-rails, guard-rails, 
and bolts and brace or stretcher sleeves for 
connecting the guard, cross, and supplemental 
rails, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 21st day of 
April, 1887. 
go 
95 
DANIEL L. BURNETT. 
LEON DE LISLE. 
OO 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT NEWTON, 
FRED JOHNSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367022.txt	(No Model.) 
H. S. BREWINGTON, 
FLO UR, OR MEAL SIFTER 
No. 367,022, 
Patented July 26, 1887. 
ar 
O 
m 
 
2% 
B 
Inventor 
2- 7446-62 
m. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY S. BREWINGTON, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
FLO U R OR MEA S FTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of ?etters Patent No. 367,022, dated July 26, 1887. 
Application filed March 18, 1887. Serial No. 23394. (No model.) 
O 
3O 
35 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY S. BREWINGTON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bal 
timore, in the Slate of Maryland, have in 
vented new and useful Improvements in Flour 
or Meal Si?ters, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
flour-sifters, which will be hereinafter more 
fully described, and pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming part 
of this specification, Figure 1 is a vertical 
cross-section of the sifter on line acac of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 2 is a bottom plan view of Fig. 1, also 
showing a cross section of the handle in broken 
lines. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the agitator 
modified. 
A is the body of the si?ter, made of tin or 
other sheet metal. The top edge is sloped 
from the front to the handle, so that the sifter 
can also be used as a scoop to take the flour 
or meal from a bag, box, or barrel. This body 
is of the ordinary construction and crimped for 
measuring the flour, &c. 
B is a handle, elliptical in cross-section, hav 
ing a hole, b, bored through it. 
at is a brace 
extending from the short side of the body A 
to support the upper end of the handle B. 
a? is a box extending from the bottom of the 
body A and immediately under the brace a, 
having a hole, (t", on the top side immediately 
in line with a hole, (t", in the brace a. 
C is an agitator, which may be made of wire 
and of the shape shown in Fig. 3 and in broken 
lines in Fig. 2, and to be much less in diame 
ter than the body, so that the distance it will 
travel when the body is vibrated will produce 
a jar to the body. 
A wire, C, (shown in Fig. 1) extends from 
the brace (, on top of which it is riveted, 
through the handle B, to which it is securely 
fastened, down through the hole a' in box a', 
where it can be bent at right angles, and then 
pass horizontally through the box a", and also 
through a slit, b, in the side of the shell A, 
which is made long enough to admit of a free 
vibration of the agitator, which is formed in 
any practical manner by wires c e c c, coln 
nected to the straight wire C by solder or oth- O 
erwise, as in Fig. 2 in broken lines; or the 
main wire C may be continued to curve around 
the various bends, and thus form the agitator 
and handle-wire of one piece, as shown in Fig. 
3. Where the wire crosses itself, it may be 55 
bent over, so that the bottom part will be on 
a plain surface. The handle B may be made 
independent of the agitator, and its arm c' can 
be securely fastened to the handle at its bot 
tom inside of the box (t. 
In the bottom of the body A is a fine wire 
screen, D. (Shown in section in Fig. 1 and 
in plan in Fig. 2.) The bottom A' of the body 
is left open. 
section to give a firm hold for the hand, as 
seen in Fig. 3 in broken lines. 
I am aware that an agitator has been oper 
ated by means of the handle where the wire 
was extended from the top and over the shell to 
and down the side through a tube inside of 
the shell. In my device I dispense with that 
wire and connect the arm of the agitator di 
rectly to the bottom of the handle, thus sim 
plifying the construction and making it at a 75 
less CoSt. 
The handle B is flat, round, or oval in cross- (5 
GO 
I claim 
The combination of the body A, slotted at 
b, the perforated bottom D, the top arm, Cl, 
the hollow bottom arm or box, (t", the wire 8o 
agitator C, having an arm extending through 
said arm or box and an upwardly-bent portion 
journaled in both arms, and the handle B, rig 
idly secured upon said portion, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. . 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I hereto affix my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
S5 
HENRY S. BREWINGTON. 
Witnesses: 
PH. H. HoFFMAN, 
THOS. IRELAND ELLIOTT, 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367122.txt	(No Model.) 
B. TOULOUSE & J. DELORIEUX. 
3 sheets-sheet 1. 
No. 367,122. 
WINE PRESS, 
Patented July 26, 1887. 
 
 
 
 
A. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
M-f 
ENIE 
A 
I K. las 
ACTHE 
"THEssa 
7 - IHE 
III 
SELE IHE 
 
| 
F2 
O 
r|. Elsi, X 
w 
6. Lif 
E. 
| 
1Y 
InDEntors: 
&zzazz/24a2. 
WEzi. 
 
N. releRs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
B. TOULOUSE & J. DELORIEUX. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 367,122, 
Patented July 26, 1887. 
WINE PRESS, 
 
 
 
 
 
| s 
 
Wifle 55 ES: 
2. Zaz4 
A2 % 
e 
- 
By 
N. Peters Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
ILE If Dr.S. 
?innare??. ag-94. 
fia. ae?ar-ce 
1\ 
s 
(No Model.) 
B. TOULOUSE & J. DELORIEUX. 
WINE PRESS, 
. 
. 
. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 367,122, 
Patented July 26, l887. 
4 - 
7 
2.2%  
W Z. % 
-7 E. 
a EZ. 
% 
CK 
SIS 
Z3. 
77. 
333 
928)iitvlosses 
344-uo vitov 
33 A. 3.22.6% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BERNARD TOULOUSE AND JOHN DELORIEUX, OF SAN FRANCISCO, 
CATIFORNIA. 
WNE PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Eletters Patent No. 367,122, dated July 26, 1887. 
Application filed August 2, 1886, Serial No. 211,943. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Within the upper end of the collar C are 
arranged the friction wheels or rollers G, upon 
Be it known that we, BERNARD Toulouse 
which the lower face of the flange H of the 
and JOHN DELORIEUX, citizens of the United 
States, residing at San Francisco, in the county 
combined mortise. wheel and threaded sleeve 
of San Francisco and State of California, have 
moves. The mortise-wheel is constructed with 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
the usual mortises, I, and from the periphery 
ments in Wine-Presses, of which the following 
of the wheel extend the radial arms I* for con 
is a specification, reference being had to the 
venience in running the threaded sleeve and 
accompanying drawings, in two sheets. 
wheel up or down upon the vertical screw irre 
Our invention relates to certain improve 
spective of the movement of the levers con 
ments in that class of wine-presses in which a nected to the collars C and D. The lower end 
vertical screw and nut are employed, together of the collar D rests upon the mortise-wheel 
With a mortise, wheel and cotter keys or and works around the threaded sleeve D*, 
wedges; and our improvements consist in cer- which is formed integral with the mortise- ( 
tain novel construction and arrangement of wheel through the medium of the lever-arm 
collars and combination levers, whereby a cast upon one side of the collar having an 
cumulative power is obtained and the press- elongated slot, J, formed thereon, within which 
works a crank-pin, J, passing through the 
lure augmented. 
slot and entering a hole in the jointed and 
The nature of these improvements and the 
pivoted lever D" at the end of the crank-arm 
manner in which we proceed to construct, com 
bine, and use the same to accomplish the de 
D' of the collar C, and thus the compoundle 
sired end and object are fully set forth and 
vers of the press are formed and combined. 
explained in the following description, the 
The crank JX works in a frictional sleeve, K. 
Said drawings being referred to by letters and 
The collar D is provided with mortises L, 
figures. 
within which the wedges or cotter-keys M 
Figure 1 is a view in elevation of our wine 
play up and down as the collars and threaded 
nut are operated. The lower portion of these 
press. Fig. 2 is also a view in elevation, 
wedges or keys are beveled, as shown, and 
showing the combination-levers. Fig. 3 is a 
plan of the same, showing the operating-lever 
enter the mortises of the mortise wheel or disk 
in operation. It will thus be seen that the 
turned outward the full stroke. Figs. 4, 5, 6, 
7, and S are views in detail of different parts 
threaded sleeve, with its mortise wheel or disk, 
of the mechanism. Fig. 9 is an enlarged ver. 
operates between the two movable collars C. 
and D, while the lower end of the nut is kept 
tical Section of the entire press. " 
Let A represent the vertical stationary screw 
in position upon the friction-rollers in the up 
Which passes through the follower-piece B. 
per end of the collar C by the hooked lugs F. 
In practice the threaded sleeve is first screwed 
The vertical screw carries the two collars Cand 
D, and between these two collars the threaded 
down with the hands by means of the radial 
mortise-wheel E is operated by a system of 
arms of mortise-disk until the lower collar, C, 
rests upon the follower-piece, in which posi 
combination-levers, to be hereinafter fully de 
tion the combination-levers are operated back 
Scribed. 
The collar C is provided with a flange, C*, 
ward and forward by the long lever-handle 
Which in operation rests upon the top face of 
shown in Fig. 1, when the keys or wedges will 
the follower-piece B. Upon oppositesides of 
rise and fall alternately within the slots of the 
the collar Care cast the posts or studs FFX. 
collar-D and mortises of the disk or mortise 
wheel E, and turn the threaded sleeve down 
The latter extending outwardly forms an arm, 
ward on its vertical screw with as great speed 
to be also hereinafter fully described. The 
as the movements of the operating-levers will 
upper ends of these posts or studs have in 
impart, the two levers working in unison upon 
Wardly-projecting hooks or lugs F, to receive 
the frictional crank-pin, the latter traveling 
and retain the flange of the combined mortise 
in the elongated slot as the reciprocating move 
wheel and threaded sleeve D*, as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
ments of the levers are made, 
IOO 
 
2 
367,122 
5 airy threaded screw-shaft, the lower collar, C, of the crank-pin, whereby a united operation 20 
Having thus described our invention, what traveling crank - pin operating therein, the 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat- lower collar, C, having the rigid arm D', and 
the lever D, pivotally connected to arm D' 
ent, is- 
1. The combination of the vertical station- and connecting with said upper arm by means 
having flange C*, hooked posts F and F, crank- of the levers is secured, substantially as de 
arm D', and the series of friction-rollers G, scribed. 
arranged in said collar, the collar D, provided 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing we 
. 
to lever D, crank-pin J, and the combined mor 
tise-wheel and threaded sleeve, all constructed, 
arranged, and operating substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination of the upper collar hav- 
I5 ing an arm formed with an elongated slot, a 
a. slotted arm, the jointed and pivoted have hereunto set our hands and seals. 
FENAERSEQ SE. E. 
MJ to 
W 
Witnesses: 
C. W. M. SMITH, 
CHAS. E. KELLY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367222.txt	(No Model.) 
L. C. H. MILLER. 
CONVERTIBLE BED STEAD. 
2 Sheets-Sheet. 2, 
No. 367,222, 
Patented July 26, 1887. 
 
sN 
? 
--- 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS C. H. MILLER, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
CONVERT BLE BED STEAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 367,222, dated July 26, 1887. 
Application filed April 16, 1887. Serial No. 235,047. No model.) 
O 
15 
Be it known that I, LOUIS C. H. MILLER, 
of Louisville, in the county of Jefferson and 
State of Kentucky, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Convertible Bed 
Steads; and Idohereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
convertible bedsteads. 
The object is to provide an inexpensive bed 
stead of simple construction, which may be 
quickly lengthened or shortened, or trans 
formed into a cradle. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
fully described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in perspective of my improved bed. 
Fig.2 is a transverse section through the guide 
and guide-rails. Fig. 3 is a view in side elle 
vation of the bedstead, showing the rockers 
attached thereto, the rockers being in section; 
and Fig. 4 is a view in elevation of one of the 
rockers, showing in dotted lines the devices for 
renovably securing it to the legs. 
3O A represents the head-board, and B the foot 
board of the bedstead, each constructed in any 
approved manner and supported on legs C. 
Connecting the head and foot boards are the 
sides D, constructed in the form of interlock 
ing longitudinally-sliding sections. Section 1 
of these consists of a pair of parallel bars, a 
a', the former having a groove, b, in both of 
its sides, and the latter being plane, and pro 
vided on its upper face with one or more 
O guides, c, adapted to engage with the grooves 
b. Section 2 consists also of a pair of parallel 
bars, dd, formed substantially similar to the 
bars a. a, but located in converse order be 
tween the bars a a'-in other words, in such a 
manner that the bara is immediately adjacent 
to bar d, the guides c rigidly secured on the 
upper face of the latter, having upwardly and 
inwardly extended flanges adapted to enter 
the grooves b, and the bars a and d being ad 
5Ojacent to each other, the guides c in this case 
being located on the bard with its flanges in 
sliding relation with the grooves b in the bar 
45 
35 
 
w 
a. Between the bars did cross-pieces d are 
Secured. 
It is evident that other means might be re 
sorted to for permitting the sides to slide. For 
example, an ordinary dovetail joint would ac 
| complish the same result. Pinsor lugs ein the 
sides prevent the bedstead from being length 
ened too far, and the removable sections E, 
consisting of the parallel bars and cross-pieces, 
are adapted to be placed in the open spaces E 
formed in thesides when the bedstead is length 
ened to its utmost. If desirable, these remov 
able sections might also be extensible, so as to 
fill the spaces E, whatever their size. 
The bottom of the bedstead consists of or. 
dinary slats, which form the entire bottom 
when the bedstead is compressed or arranged 
for use as a cradle, and to fill the space F, 
which would remain in the bottom. When ex 
tended its full length, the slatted section F is 
hinged to the bottom. This section is simply 
folded over onto the bottom when compressed 
as a cradle. 
G G' represent removable rockers provided 
at suitable distances apart with plates g, hav 
ing an outwardly-projecting lug, g', the head 
of which is slightly enlarged. At or near the 
lower end of each leg a plate, h, is secured, 
having a slot, h, the lower end of which is 
sufficiently large to receive the head of lugg', 
and the upper end restricted to a size narrower 
than the head of the lug, so that when the lug 
is slid into this restricted portion of the slot it 
is secured therein against lateral displace 
ment, the only means for removing the rocker 
being by raising the bedstead and removing 
the rocker until the lugsg' have slid into the 
enlarged ends of the slots, from which they 
may then be removed laterally. 
It is evident that slight changes might be 
resorted to in the form and arrangement of the 
several parts described without departing from 
the spirit and scope of my invention; hence 
I do not wish to limit myself to the particular 
construction herein set forth, but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a head and foot 
board, and sides secured to one of said boards, 
of side rails secured to the other board and 
loosely connected to the sides, and the remov 
75 
IOO 
367,222 
able side sections adapted to be placed between 
the side rails on each side when the bedstead 
is extended. 
2. The combination, with a lead and foot 
board, and sides secured to one of said boards, 
of side rails secured to the other board and 
loosely connected to the sides, the removable 
side sections adapted to be placed between the 
side rails on each side when the bedstead is 
extended, and the sectional bottom, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. In a bedstead, the combination, with a 
head and foot board, of the extensible sides 
connecting the head and foot boards, said sides 
consisting of plane and grooved parallel bars, 
the former having clamp-guides secured there 
on for sliding engagement with the grooves, 
and the removable side sections adapted to be 
O 
placed between the parallel bars of the exten 
sible sides, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with head and foot 
boards secured to legs, sides secured to one of 
said boards, side rails secured to the Other 
board and loosely connected to the sides, and 
the removable side sections adapted to be 25 
placed between the side rails when the bed 
stead is extended, of the rockers removably 
secured to the legs, substantially as Set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib- 3o 
ing witnesses. 
LOUIS C. H. MILLER. 
VWitneSSeS: 
CHIARLIES I REIN EDEL, 
M. S. SAITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367323.txt	(No Model.) 
0, 367,323, 
s 
S 
 
C. H. SHAFFER. 
FIRE EXTINGUISHER 
Patented July 26, l887. 
S 
s 
76) . 
sq 
- 
t 
S 
s 
n 
sy 
N 
(S 
ra) 
72 ZZ-2 s. 2 s, 
(AO76&Ala-e 
7-72- 21-272-227, 
22e27%g 
N. reters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. SHAFFER, OF ROCKFORD, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO JONES, WOODRUFF & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
FIRE-EXTINGUISHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 367,323, dated July 26, 1887. 
Application filed September 20, 1886. Serial No. 214,071, (No model.) 
- 
To aid whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES H. SHAFFER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Rockford, in the county of Winnebago 
5 and State of Illinois, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Fire-Extinguishers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to automatic fire-ex 
tinguishers known as the dry-pipe system,' 
Io employed mainly in buildings, and in which 
a system of pipes are distributed through the 
building to supply water when required, and 
in which automatic sprinklers controlled in 
their operation by heat are connected with 
15 the Water-distributing pipes at proper inter 
vals. Its object is to render this class of fire 
extinguishers more efficient, and for this pur 
pose I employ electro-magnetism in the form 
known as the closed electric circuit.' 
This application of electro-magnetism in 
connection with the dry-pipe system and its 
construction and operation will be hereinafter 
more fully described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
25 an elevation of portions of a fire extinguish 
ing apparatus embodying my invention, and 
sufficient to illustrate its construction and ap 
plication. Fig. 2 is an elevation, partly in 
section, showing the position of sonne of the 
3o parts when the electric circuit is broken; and 
Fig. 3 shows the line-wire in its supports on 
the pipes in isometrical view. 
In the figures, 1 represents a supply-pipe in 
tended to connect with the water-supply. This 
35 supply-pipe 1 is provided with a valve, 2, to 
close the end of the pipe against the pressure of 
the water. . The valve 2 in this instance is of 
disk form, with its stem supported in a stuffing 
box, 3, and is held to its seat by toggle-levers 
4o 4 and 5, which connect the projecting end of 
the valve-stem with a vertical yoke, 6, rising 
from the stuffing-box. The arm 5 of the tog 
gle-levers is produced in bell-crank form, hav 
ing a horizontal lever-arm, 7, supporting a 
5 weight, S, employed to flex the toggle-joint 
and lift the valve from its seat or permit it 
to rise under the pressure of the water. A 
set-screw, 9, is employed to control the posi 
tion of the toggle-joint connection of the tog 
so gle-levers to limit them in their adjustment 
substantially to a line relatively with their 
The connecting-rod 10 is provided with a 7o 
pivotal connection. A connecting-rod, 10, is 
pivotally connected at its lower end to the 
free end of the weighted lever-arm 7, from 
which it rises through an insulated opening in 55 
the free end portion of a circuit-closing spring, 
11, fixed to the case 12, inclosing the magnets, 
and its upper end is fitted to engage a trip 
lever, 13, having a pivotal connection with the 
magnet-case. 
The free end of the trip-lever 13 engages the 
hook-latch end of an armature, 14, pivoted in 
position to engage the pole ends of the elec 
tro-magnets 15, supported in the case 12. An 
adjustable spring, 16, is employed to carry the 65, 
armature from the magnets when the electric 
circuit is broken, and an adjusting-screw, 17, 
is employed to limit the outward movement 
of the armature. 
tappet-stop, 17, to engage the insulating-bush 
ing forming the opening in the free end of the 
circuit-closing spring 11, to cause it to de 
scend with the downward movement of the 
rod and engage the free end of the circuit. 75 
closing arm 18, fixed to the magnet-case, for 
a purpose hereinafter to appear. By this con 
struction and arrangement of the parts the 
connection of the trip-lever with the connect 
ing-rod and with the armature, as shown in 8o 
Fig. 1, with closed circuit, will hold the valve 
to its seat and prevent the escape of water 
from the supply-pipe; and with broken or 
open circuit the armature will be liberated, 
and the spring-action will disengage it from 85 
the trip-lever, which will permit the weight to 
carry the parts to their position, (shown in 
Fig. 2,) open the valve, and permit the water 
to flow from the supply-pipe. 
connected with the water-supply pipe, and 
may be distributed through the building in 
which the apparatus is employed to any ex 
tent required. In this instance distributing 
pipes sufficient to illustrate the application 95 
and working of the apparatus are employed, 
and consist of a horizontal pipe, 19, connect 
ing the supply-pipe with a vertical pipe, 20, 
provided with an outlet-valve operated by the 
hand-wheel 21, fixed on the projecting end of too 
its valve-stem. A horizontal distributing. 
pipe, 22, is connected with the vertical pipe, 
A system of water-distributing pipes is go 
- 
w 
w 
367,323 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
the circuit-closing arm. 18, fixed to the magnet 
CSE 
A branch wire, 32, is employed to connect 
the spring circuit closer 11 with the wire 26, 
employed to connect the magnets 15 with the 
battery in such a manner that if from any 
cause the circuit controlling the opening of 
the valve 2 to the water-supply pipe should 
be broken the opening of the valve will cause 
the spring circuit-closer 11 to engage the cir 
cuit closing arm IS, as shown in Fig. 2, com 
plete the electric connection through the alarm. 
bell, and cause it to ring, giving notice of the 
opening of the electric circuit controlling the 
valve to the Water supply. In this construction 
and arrangement of the parts the breaking or 
opening of the electrical circuit controlling 
the valve to the water supply operates to close 
the circuit to the alarin-bell automatically, 
and the closing of the circuit controlling the 
valve to the Water-supply opens or breaks the 
circuit to the alarm: bel. 
In adjusting the apparatus for use the valve 
to the water-supply is closed and tle parts 
adjusted to close the electric circuit to hold it 
in its closed position. The water is then 
drawn from the distributing-pipes by means 
of the outlet-valve, after which it is closed. The 
sprinklers are then adjusted and their valves 
closed, which fits the apparatus for use. 
and is designed to be fixed to the under face 
of the ceiling of the apartment in which it is 
employed or suspended therefrom in any suit 
able manner. This distributing-pipe 22 is 
provided at proper intervals with sprinklers 
23, which may be any of the known varieties 
capable of use in connection with my improved 
apparatus; but I prefer my improved sprink 
ler shown, described, and claimed in my 
application for patent executed August 21, 
1886, now on file in the United States Patent 
Office and pending office action. Of this 
sprinkler I do not deem a detailed description 
necessary in this application, further than 
that the sprinkler employed is held in posi 
tion to exclude the water by means of a two 
part clasp-bar, 24, having a solder-connection 
capable of separating at a low temperature to 
admit the water to the distributing apparatus 
of the sprinkler. 
An electric battery, 25, which may be any 
of the known varieties best adapted for closed 
circuit purposes, and may be located at any 
convenient point relatively with the electro 
magnets 15, is employed. The battery 25 is 
connected by connecting wires 26 to the elec 
tro-magnets 15 and to the system of water 
pipes through the medium of the trip-lever 
13, which in its connection with the valve 
mechanism communicates with the water 
pipes. 
The battery is also connected with the 
I claim as my invention--- 
water-pipes by a line-Wire, 27, extending to 
1, In, a fire-extinguisher, the combination, 
with a water-supply pipe, water, distributing 
or beyond the sprinkler farthest from the bat 
tery on the line of the pipes, at which point 
pipes connected there with, and a valve to con 
it connects with the pipes, forming a complete 
trol the admission of the water to the distrib 
uting-pipes, of a normally. closed electric cir 
outgoing and return circuit. The line-wire 
in this instance is supported in insulating 
cuit, an electro-magnet within the closed cir 
brackets 2S, fixed to the pipe preferably at or 
cuit, and a lever having the weighted arm of 
a valve-controlling lever suspended from its 
near the sprinklers, and within the bracket 
supports the line-wire has a solder-connection, 
short arm and the armature of the magnet in 
29, of a low-melting temperature. 
engagement with its long arm, whereby the 
With the several parts of my improved fire 
Valve is held closed when the armature is in 
extinguishing apparatus constructed and ap 
contact with the pole of the magnet, substan 
plied substantially as shown and described 
tially as set forth. 
heat produced from fire within the vicinity 
2. In a fire-extinguisher, the combination, 
with a water-supply pipe, water-distributing 
of the sprinklers, or any one or more of them, 
will melt the solder joining the two parts of 
pipes connected therewith, and a valve to con 
the clamp-bar 24 and permit the valve in the 
trol the admission of water to the distributing. 
sprinkler to open. The heat will also melt 
pipes, of a normally-closed electric circuit, an 
the solder employed to connect the line-wire, 
electro-magnet within the closed circuit, and 
break the electric circuit, demagnetize the elec 
a lever having the weighted arm of a valve 
controlling lever detachably suspended from 
tro-magnets, release the armature, and permit 
the spring to disengage it from its hook-latch 
its short arm and its long arm in engagement 
connection with the trip-lever, and permit the 
With a shoulder or hook on the armature of 
weight to descend, open the valve, and admit 
the magnet, whereby the valve is held closed 
the water to the system of pipes to be dis 
when the armature is in contact with the pole 
charged through the open sprinkler or sprink 
of the magnet and allowed to open when the 
armature is withdrawn from the pole, sub 
lers. 
An electro-magnetic alarm-bell, 30, of any 
stantially as Set forth. 
3. In a fire-extinguisher, the combination, 
of the usual constructions capable of use in con 
nection with my improved fire-extinguishing 
With the normally-closed electric circuit, made 
apparatus and located in any convenient or 
Separable by the action of heat, the valve for 
admitting water to the distributing-pipes, and 
desirable position, is electrically connected 
with the battery by means of a wire, 31, passed 
an electro-magnet within the closed circuit, of 
an electric alarm, a stationary arm electrically 
from its connection with the battery to con 
nect with the electro-magnets of the alarm- connected with the alarm, and a spring-arm 
bell, and terminating in its connection with having its free end in engagement with amoy. 
75 
85 
90 
OO 
IO 
I (5 
I 25 
I 30 
367,323 
3 
able section of the valve controlling mechan 
wire supports attached to the distributing 
ism and adapted to engage the said stationary 
pipes near the sprinklers, and solder-connec 
tions joining the wire near the bracket-sup 
arm when the valve is opened and form an 
electric circuit through the battery and alarm, 
port, whereby the heat which separates the 
substantially as set forth. 
wire at the soldier-connection will open the 
4. The combination, with the water-supply 
solder-closed sprinkler nearest thereto, sub 
pipe and with the distributing-pipes connected 
stantially as set forth. 
there with, of a valve, toggle-lever mechanism 
9. The combination, with the water - dis 
for operating the valve, the electro-magnet, and tributing pipe in a normally-closed electric 
the connection between the armature of the circuit and a wire having solder - connections 
fusible at a low temperature, the wire being 
magnet and the toggle - lever mechanism, 
attached to the distributing-pipe by insulat 
whereby the admission of water to the dis 
tributing-pipes is controlled by the breaking 
ing-brackets, of a sprinkler connected with 
the distributing-pipe, said sprinkler being pro 
of the electric circuit, substantially asset forth. 
5. The combination, with the weighted arm 
vided with a solder-connection fusible at a low 
temperature to liberate the sprinkler, substan 
of the toggle-lever mechanism to the valve 
and with the armature to engage the poles of 
tially as set forth. 
the magnets, of a trip-lever and rod-connec 
10. The combination, with the rod connect 
ing the weighted arm of the toggle-levers, with 
tion of the armature with the weighted arm 
of the toggle lever mechanism, substantially 
the trip-lever, and with the circuit-closing arm 
to the alarm-bell, of a circuit-closing spring 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
to engage the circuit-closing arm, substantially 
6. The combination of the trip-lever mech 
anism connecting the armature with the 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
weighted arm of the toggle-lever mechanism 
11. The combination, with the supply-valve 
of the valve, electro-magnets electrically con 
and the toggle-levers for operating the valve, 
of the set-screw for regulating the adjustment 
nected with the trip - lever mechanism and 
with the battery, and a line-wire connecting the 
of the levers in line with their pivotal connec 
battery with the water-supply pipes complet. 
tions, substantially as set forth. 
ing the electric circuit, said circuit having 
12. The combination, with the normally. 
solder-connections fusibleatalow temperature, 
closed electric circuit, the magnet within the 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
circuit, and a water-supply valve held in closed 
adjustment by the armature of the magnet 
7. The combination, with the normally 
when in contact with the pole, of a spring hav 
closed electric circuit, the supply and the dis 
tributing pipes, of the sprinkler secured to the 
ing an adjustable tension adapted to automati 
distributing-pipe, and the insulating wire-sup 
cally release the armature of the magnet from 
porting bracket attached to the distributing 
the valve-controlling mechanism when the cir 
pipe in a position near the sprinkler, for the 
cuit is broken, and the set-screw for determin 
purpose substantially as set forth. 
ing the throw of the armature, substantially 
8. The combination, with the distributing 
as set forth. 
pipes in a normally-closed electric circuit, with 
a magnet, and with mechanism for controlling 
a supply-valve, of solder-closed sprinklers se 
cured to the distributing - pipes, insulating 
SAML. N. JoNES, 
A. O. BEEIEL. 
CHARLES H. SHAFFER. 
w 
Witnesses: 
- 
- 
Io 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
b 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367423.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. MENDENHALL. 
SWEAT PAD FASTENER, 
No. 367,423, 
Patented Aug. 2, l887. 
 
a let 
m-TE 
Fig. 3. - (- 7 
  
"I 
- 
 
Aly. 4. 
g (3 %.A. 
#et 
 
NPETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washiso. 
a CfSlacorte 
'yi, - s' 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
o 
JOHN C. MENDENBALL, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
SweAT-PAD FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 367,423, dated August 2, 1887. 
Application filed March 30, 1887. Serial No. 233,072. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN C. MENDENHALL, 
of Indianapolis, county of Marion, and State 
of Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
5 ful Improvements in Sweat-Pad Fasteners; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which like letters refer to like parts. 
Io My invention relates to the construction of 
devices for holding sweat-pads in place under 
harness collars and hames, and will be under 
stood from the following description. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a side 
15 view of the lower end of a pad with my device 
riveted thereto. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section 
through the collar, pad, hame, and my fasten 
ing device when all the parts are in proper po 
sition for use. Fig. 3 is a top view of my de 
2O vice, and Fig. 4 is an edge view of the same. 
The pad p is made, in the usual manner, of 
canvas stuffed with hair and stitched through. 
The fastener consists of a leather strap, l, 
one end of which is riveted directly to the pad, 
25 the other end forming a straight and stiff pro 
jection, p, that has a double use-namely, it 
provides a seat for the hameh, preventing it 
from wearing the collar, and at the same time 
making a firm bearing, upon which the hane 
3o rests when in position, as shown in Fig. 2. 
This projection also forms a handle for lifting 
the fastener up from over the rim of the collar 
which it clasps, and by means of which the 
parts can be readily and quickly separated by 
35 the driver. The fastener, as has been said, 
consists of a flexible leather strap, l, and from 
a point just above the pad and around to about 
the point where the hame would touch the 
strap a metal band, m, (preferably of steel,) is 
4o placed, forming a stiff backing, and the leather 
beneath conforms to the curved shape which 
the metal plate is formed to take and forms a 
sort of loop, which is intended to be slipped 
over the smaller rim of the collar, as shown in 
g5 Fig. 2. When thus slipped over the collar, 
and the hame set in place, its under side rests 
upon the top of the projection p', and all parts 
are firmly bound together and held in place 
when the hame is buckled. 
I am aware that sweat-pad fastenings are not 
new, and that straps and springs have been 
used in various ways for holding the pad to the 
53 
collar; but none of these present the features 
of the device shown in the present application. 
In some cases metal springs have been used 55 
and fastened to a sort of wire-loop hinge pro 
vided with eyes, through which rivets are 
passed, fastening the hinged section to the pad, 
and a metal strap or spring is connected with 
this hinge, which slips over the rim of the col- 6o 
lar; but the metal spring abrades and wears 
away the collar, and the manner of connecting 
it to the pad by eyes is objectionable, as likely 
to pull out or tear away, and no handle is pro 
vided with such spring for lifting the loop over 65 
the collar-rim to get it out of the way. Again, 
where the spring is riveted directly to the pad, 
a peculiar strain is brought upon the spring 
band about a half-inch above where it is riv. 
eted, and it commonly breaks off at that point. 70 
I remedy this objection and difficulty by mak 
ing the fastening mainly of a flexible band or 
strap of leather, which is riveted directly to 
the pad, and forms a safe and flexible joint at 
any point beyond the rivets, which will not 75 
break, like steel springs, while I re-enforce 
these straps at all points along the curve of 
the loop by a metal band, which is notaliowed 
to rest upon or to touch the collarat any point, 
it being lined, as it were, by the leather fast- 8 
ening which is beneath it. Again, the metal 
part of my device stops short of the projection . 
p', which is long enough to make a flat and 
elastic seat for the hame, keeping it from wear 
ing and chafing the collar, and when the hame 85 
is removed this bearing part provides a han 
dle for lifting the loop of the spring over the 
rim of the collar. These peculiar features of 
my invention render it advantageous over oth 
ers in the respects mentioned. 
I do not broadly claim the use of straps or 
springs for fastenings for sweat-pads, but only 
the peculiar construction herein described, 
combining the valuable features of both strap 
and spring in a new and useful manner not 95 
heretofore known. 
What I do claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is the following: 
1. The Sweat-pad fastener composed of the 
leather strap, having the metal backing an ico 
over the central portion, forming a spring. 
loop to encircle the fore-roll of the collar, and 
the leather extension p", which provides a yield 
ing seat for the hame when the latter is in po 
go 
 
 
2 
367,423 
sition, and a handle when the hameis removed, the latter secured at one end to the pad p, in 
the whole secured at one end to the pad p, sub- combination with such pad, substantially as 
stantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
5 leather strap l, having the metal backing in hand this 26th day of March, 1887. 
described. 
2. The sweat-pad fastener composed of the 
Over the central portion, forming a spring 
loop encircling the fore-roll of the collar, and 
a leather extension, p", which provides a yield- 
ing seat for the hame when the latter is in po- 
to sition, and a handle when the hame is removed, 
JOHN C. MIENDENHALL. 
Witnesses: 
C. P. JACOBS, 
E. B. GRIFFITH. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367523.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 367,523, 
B. F. HOUGH 
BURGLAR ALARM. 
Patented Aug. 2, 1887. 
SS Z 
O s % 
SS S 
N SS % 
s 
 
 
  
  
 
se 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN F. HOUGH, OF SANDUSKY, OHIO. 
BURG LAR-ALARM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 367,523, lated August 2, 1887. 
Application filed October 30, 1886. Serial No. 217,629. (No model.) 
5 reel and cover removed therefrom. 
65 
fo all livion, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN F. Hou GH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Sun 
dusky, in the county of Erie and State of Ohio, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Burglar-Alarms, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
burglar-alarm and property - protecting ma 
chines in which there is a connection made be 
tween the property to be protected and the 
machine and an electrical battery in such a way 
that when the property is disturbed an elec 
trical circuit is made through the machine and 
battery, and by means thereof an alarm is 
sounded; and the object of my improvement is 
to insure a connection between the machine 
and battery in such a simple and safe manner 
that the connection cannot get out of order. 
I attain this object by the mechanism illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure l is an elevation of the machine. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view of the machine, the 
Fig. 3 is 
a detailed view of the reel. Figs. 4 and 5 are 
detail views of the cover and detent-pin. Fig. 
6 is an additional view showing the relation 
of the eccentric to the circuit - closing spring. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the Several views. 
A is a solid brass plate secured to the base of 
the machine by means of screws. B is also a 
solid brass plate secured to the base of the 
machine by means of screws. 
F and G are two separate binding-posts of 
the circuit. 
C is a metallic spring attached to A, the left 
electrical connection, by means of a screw, and 
making a connection with the battery by com 
ing in contact with platinum point on plate B. 
D is a metallic lever made fast to the inte 
rior of the machine by means of an arbor, and 
extending outside of the machine. 
E is a metallic spring which is connected 
with the body of the machine, and which forces 
lever D to make connection with spring C. 
L is a cord or wire, one end of which is se 
cured to the reel, the other end passing through. alarm. 
one of the holes in lever D and through eye 
let R, over the machine, and is attached to the 
object to be protected. 
The action of these parts is as follows: To 
the ploperty to be protected is attached one 
end of the cord L, and when the property is 
disturbed this cord L. pulls lever D, which 55 
acts upon spring E, and this movement de 
taches spring C from the notch on the end of 
lever D, and spring C is thus allowed to make 
contact with platinum point on plate B, and 
thereby in this simple manner making a cir 
cuit through the battery and sounding the 
alarm. 
His the reel, and in Fig. 6 the relations of 
crank M., arbor N, and the eccentric O are 
shown, and the relation of the eccentric to the 
circuit-closing spring C is made manifest; and 
these four parts of the machine, H, M, N, and 
O, form virtually one body and work together. 
The purposes of the reel are various, and are 
shown as follows: First, the machine is set for 
use by turning the reel once around, or until 
a click is heard, then stop, leaving the handle 
of the crank M at the bottom of the center. The 
machine is now set for use and is clear of all 
connections with the circuit - closing device. 
Second, the reel, now free, can be used for un 
winding or winding the cord or wire L with 
out interfering with any of the interior parts 
of the machine. To illustrate, when the cord 
or wire L is attached to the thing to be pro 
tected and is passed through one of the eyes of 
lever D, and then attached to the reel, the ten 
sion of the cord or wire L can be changed at 
will by turning the reel, and, secondly, the wire 
or cord to extend from the machine to the ob 
jects to which they are attached may be con 
cealed, if desired, and wound upon the reel, 
readily unwinding when required for use. 
The reel can be used as an electrical switch or 
cut-off, as the current causing the alarm can 
be broken by the eccentric O by making one 
revolution of the reel, leaving the handle of the 
crank M. at the bottom center. Thus the cur 
rent is always broken when the instrument is 
set for use, and so remains until the property 
intended to be protected is disturbed, which 
disturbance closes the circuit and sounds the 
Several cords or wires besides the stationary 
85 
75 
90 
95 
IOC) 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
59 
2 
- 
367,523 
O 
cord or wire attached to lever ID can be used 
and applied to as many different objects or 
rooms, thus saving the expense of extra ma 
chines for different apartments. The same bat 
tery and alarm-bell can be utilized for an elec 
trical door-bell without interfering with the 
other purposes of the machine. 
The metallic pin I is used to fasten the reel 
after the cords have been adjusted for use, and 
this is done by removing pin I from the hole 
Pover the lever D and inserting it in the hole 
Q in the reel and top plate, which hole will 
appear when the handle of the crank M is in 
the center of the bottom plate. This pin I is 
also used to prevent the machine from being 
thrown off (causing an unnecessary alarm) 
while placing the cords or wires or in wind 
ing up the reel, by placing pin I in hole P. 
over lever D on the outside. 
K is the top plate with recl attached. 
I am aware that prior to my invention burg 
lar - alarm or property - protecting machines 
have been made operating in conjunction with 
electrical batteries. I therefore do not claim 
such combination, broadly; but 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, in a burglar-alarm or prop 
erty-protecting machine, of the reel H, the 
crank M, the arbor N, and the eccentric O, 
attached and used in connection with movable 
pin I, the base of the machine with pin - re 
ceiving holes P and Q, the detent - lever D, 
the pin I, the contact-spring C, and the plates 
A and B, for the various purposes specified, 35 
substantially as shown above. 
2 5 
BENJAMIN F. FOUGH. 
Witnesses: 
BENJAMIN F. LEE, 
JoSEPEI C. PIERCY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367623.txt	(No Model.) 
SPRING HOE ATTACHMENT FOR CULTIVATORs, SEED DRILLs, &c. 
Patented Aug. 2, 1887. 
No. 367,623, 
C, R, HARTMAN, 
w 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
Oued f 
- N-ratesterer--- 
rear- 
 
- 
 
A 
IIHRISH 
sity - 
1 
 
s 
N 
S. 
N 
R fe ; : 
H INVENTOR: 
E 
& 's 
64- %rty 
BY /ttoor  
N 
N 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES R. HARTMAN, OF VINCENNES, INDIAN A. 
SPRING HOE ATTACHMENT FOR CULTIVATORS, SEED-DRILLS, &c, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 367,623, dated August 2, 1887. 
Application filed December 22, 18S6. Serial No. 222,307. (No mode.) 
5 
) 
25 
45 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs R. HARTMAN, 
of Vincennes, in the county of Knox and State 
of Indiana, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Spring Hoe Attachments for 
Cultivators, Seed-Drills, &c., of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention consists in an improved spring 
hoe attachment for plows, cultivators, seed 
drills, and other similar agricultural imple. 
ments, which will be hereinafter fully de 
Scribed and claimed, and which possesses 
Superior advantages in the points of efficiency 
in operation, compactness and simplicity in 
construction, and the ease with which it may 
be applied in its operative position to any 
plow, cultivator, &c. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improve. 
ment in connection with a cultivator - shoe. 
Fig. 2 is a detail view of the bracket. Fig. 3 
is a detached sectional view. Fig. 4 shows a 
slightly different construction, and shows the 
invention in connection with the boot of a 
drill; and Fig. 5 is a detail view of the form of 
bracket shown in Fig. 4. 
The same letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
The object of the attachment is to furnish a 
locking device which shall hold the shovel of 
the implement to which it is attached with the 
requisite rigidity under ordinary strain while 
at work, but which shall yield to extraordi 
nary strain to prevent breakage of the shovel 
or hoe, dispense with the objectionable re 
moval of wooden break-pins, give the shovel 
the greatest possible sweep in proportion to the 
bulk of the attachment, bring the shovel back 
quickly to the precise depth in the ground at 
which it formerly stood when the obstruction 
is passed, and be strong and durable and 
adapted for use on various agricultural im 
plements. 
A represents the backet of the attachment, 
formed with the downwardly-projecting piece 
a', for its attachment by bolts upon the beam 
of the plow or cultivator, as shown, the for 
ward upwardly-curved arm, a, the bearing or 
fulcrum-head a' at its rear end, and the side 
To the rear end or fulcrum-head, a?, of the 
. 
On the inner sides of the flat connecting- 7o 
bracket A are pivoted what are normally the 
lower ends of the straight fulcrum-links B, 
against the outer side of the upper ends of 
which are pivoted, by the bolt H, the upper 55 
ends of the connecting-links C, and on this bolt 
H, between the upper ends of the fulcrum 
links B, is pivoted the lower or rear end of 
the curved lever D, which is curved, as shown, 
nearly in the form of an arc of a circle, and 6o 
to the forward end of this lever is pivoted the 
rear end of the rod E, which passes through 
the inclined aperture in the upper end of the 
arm a of the bracket, and has on its outer 
upper threaded end a nut, E, and that part of 65 
the rod between this nut and the end of the 
arm a is encircled by a heavy spiral spring, F, 
the strength or tension of which may be in 
creased by screwing down the nut E'. 
links C, near their lower ends, are formed the 
lugs J, which fit in the side openings in the up 
per end of the shank or foot-piece, as the case 
may be, and form a pivot for the upper end 
of the shank, the transverse bolt K at the 
lower ends of the plates Cholding them to the 
sides of the shank, and so keeping the lugs J 
in the break-pin holes in the end of the shank. 
It will be seen that normally the tension of 
the spring F holds the rod E and lever D 
drawn forward, with the connecting-links C 
resting firmly against the shoulders a of the 
bracket, or the fulcrum-links B resting against 
the shoulders (t", (shown in Fig. 4.) when that 
form of bracket is employed, and the shovel 
resting in its normal position, the pivots G 
and H being very nearly in a vertical line or 
at dead-centers, and by this arrangement the 
shovel is held firmly and rigidly in its opera 
tive position. On striking an immovable ob 
struction of any kind the extra strain will 
overcome the tension of the spring, when the 
shovel will be swung back and up, thus draw 
ing down the connecting-links, which in turn 
swing the fulcrum-links out and down at their 
outer ends, thus drawing the curved lever 
backward, down over but clear of the fulcrum 
head, and drawing back the rod F, the result 
of the peculiar shape and arrangement of the 
links and lever being as follows: As the up 
per ends of the fulcrum-links sweep or are 
swung from the point L to the point M the 
95 
OO 
5o projections or shoulders, a. 
 
367,623 
O 
Compression of the spring F is nineteen thir 
ty-seconds of an inch, and the lower ends of 
the connecting-links are then at N, having 
moved but fourteen thirty-seconds of the dis 
tance through which they eventually move, 
while as the shovel continues to swing up the 
upper ends of the fulcrum-links move from 
the point M to the point S, the additional 
compression of the spring for this movement 
being but one thirty-second of an inclu, and 
With this one thirty-second-of-an-inch colm 
pression of the spring the lower ends of the 
connecting-links sweep from the point N to I, 
moving eighteen thirty-seconds, or the greater 
part of the distance of the entire distance 
through which they travel. Thus it will be 
seen that by raising the fulcrum-point Habove 
the limit of the stroke of the point or ends G, 
I get the larger half of the sweep of the 
shovel-eighteen thirty-seconds-with only 
one-twentieth of the compression of the spring 
required for the entire sweep, thus effecting a 
great economy of space and enabling the at 
tachment to be constructed in a wonderfully 
Compact form. As soon as the shovel is re 
lieved from or passes over the obstruction the 
power of the spring gains rapidly as the point 
G rises above the fulcrum-point H, and the 
shovel is jerked back with sufficient force to 
retake the same angle and depth in the soil as 
before, and the attachment is again locked as 
before, the shoulders a' or a', as the case may 
be, setting the limit of the back-stroke of the 
Spring. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
Connection with the accompanying drawings, 
the construction, operation, and advantages 
of my invention will be clearly understood. 
It will beseen that the attachment can be read 
ily applied to a cultivator, seed-drill, or plow of 
ordinary construction, as shown in the several 
views of the drawings, and when attached di. 
rectly to a foot-piece of ordinary construction, 
as shown in Fig. 4, the bolt K, in addition to 
preventing the lugs J from conning out of the 
brake-pin holes of the foot-piece, will at the 
same time prevent spreading and breaking of 
the upper end of the foot-piece, while enabling 
the front wall in the upper end of the foot 
piece to be dispensed with. 
All the parts of the attachment, except the 
spring, are made of malleable iron, and the at 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
tachment is therefore very inexpensive. Any 
other suitable form of spring may be employed 
instead of the spiral spring here shown, if de 
sired. 
In Fig. 4 I show the bracket A as clipped to 
the beam, and having its depending portion 
extended down on the left instead of the right 
side of the beam; but, if desired, this form of 6o 
bracket may have its portion (t' arranged to 
extend on the right of the beam, as Will be 
understood from Fig. 5. In Fig. 4 the in 
vention is shown in its application to a drill 
boot, and the bracket has shoulders a', which 
are abutted by the fulcrum-links B, the shoul 
ders a being dispensed with in this case, the 
line of draft being at such angle that the bars 
C could not abut shoulders (t. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The herein-described attachment, consist 
ing of the bracket formed with the downward 
projection, the fulcrum-head at its rear upper 
end, the forward-curved arm having the open 
ing in its upper end, and the side shoulders, 
the fulcrum-links, the connecting-links, the 
curved lever, the rod, and the spiral Spring, 
all constructed and arranged as herein set forth. 
2. The attachment consisting of the bracket 
formed with the downward projection, the full 
crum-head, the forward arm having the open 
ing in its upper end, and the side shoulders, 
the fulcrum-links, the connecting-links formed 
with the lugs on their inner sides, the curved 
lever, the rod having the threaded upper end, 
and the nut and the spiral spring, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a shank, foot-piece, 
or drill-tooth of the usual construction and its 
beam, of the herein-described attachment con 
sisting of the bracket formed with the down 
ward projection, the fulcrum-head, the for. 
ward arm having the opening in its upper end, 
and the side shoulders, the fulcrum-links, the 
connecting-links formed with the lugs on their 
inner sides, the curved lever, the rod having 
the threaded upper end, and the nut and the 
spiral spring, substantially as set forth. 
90 
75 
CHARLES R. HARTMAN. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS A. MEYER, 
J. C. ADAMS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367724.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 367,724, 
W. S. PAIN. 
PNEUMATIC CASH CARRIER, 
Patented Aug. 2, 1887. 
A. 
, a 2. 2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARD S. PAIN, OF CAMBRIDGE, MASS ACHUSETTS. 
PNEU MAT C CASH - CARRE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 367,724, dated. August 2, 1887. 
Amplication filed Octoer 28, 1856. 
Serial No. 217,419. No model. 
scribed. 
To all Zwhom, it nail? concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLARD S. PAIN, of 
Cambridge, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Pneumatic 
Cash-Carriers, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
apparatus for pneumatic cash-carriers-such 
for instance, as are shown and described in 
Letters Patent of the United States, dated De 
cember 29, 1885, No. 333,397; and the inven 
tion consists, in combination with a pneumatic 
tube for the transmission of a cash-carrier, &c., 
therethrough by the operation of any suitable 
bellows or air-motor, of an indicator suitably 
constructed and arranged for operation by 
said bellows or air-motor, whereby it will in 
dicate whether the carrier placed in the tube 
for transmission therethrough and the bellows 
or air-motor operated has been transmitted 
through the tube and delivered or ejected 
therefrom at the other end, or is within the 
tube, all substantially as hereinafter fully de 
In the accompanying sheet of drawings is 
illustrated the present invention as applied 
to a pneumatic cash-carrier apparatus con 
structed and arranged for operation substan 
tially as described and shown in said patent, 
Figure 1 being a perspective view of such ap 
paratus at the cashier's desk or table or cen 
tral station, with the present invention ap 
plied thereto; Fig. 2, a detail vertical section; 
Fig. 3, a detail vertical cross-section; Fig. 4, 
a detail sectional view, and Fig. 5 a detail 
front view. Figs. 2, 3, and 5 are enlarged. 
In the drawings, A represents a cashier's 
desk or table or central station, from which 
the three pneumatic tubes B, C, and D lead 
to their respective sales counters or stations, 
(not shown in the drawings,) each tube being 
secured to the head E of its transmitting 
standard F, secured to the top G of the table. 
His the bellows, secured by its top board, 
J, to the under side of the board G, and each 
standard F has communication there with by 
a separate pipe, K, secured to the bellows 
board K and the table-board G. 
Cords T are attached to the bottom board, 
M, of the bellows, on each side, and respect 
ively extend around pulleys N on the side up 
- 
rights, P, and pulleys Q on a treadle, R, and 
secured to the uprights, the treadle being piv 
oted to the uprights and arranged to be oper 
ated at a at the front of the table. The lower 
open end of each head E of the transmitting 
standards F where the carrier is inserted is 
closed by its valve when the carrier is placed 
therein for transmission through its tube. 
Other valves are arranged in connection 
with the bellows and the pipes leading there 
from, whereby all the tubes can be closed as 
to their air-communication with the bellows, 
except the tube through which the carrier is 
to be transmitted. 
Pressing down the treadle closes the bellows, 
forcing air into the tube in communication 
there with, causing the carrier, if placed therein, 
to travel through said tube to its sales counter 
or station, all substantially as described and 
shown in said patent, and needing no more 
particular description herein. 
The object of the present invention is, in the 
use of pneumatic cash-carriers, to enable the 
operator, after he has inserted a carrier in the 
tube and operated the bellows or other air 
motor to transmit it through such tube to the 
sales counter or station, to ascertain at a glance 
whether the carrier has been delivered or 
ejected from the tube at such station or is still 
within the tube. 
Secured to each head E by an arm, b, is a 
box, T, in which is a small bellows, U, secured 
by its board d to the side e of the box, its board 
f being free to move within the box for the 
proper operation of the bellows, as usual in 
bellows. The bellows-chamber V has commu 
nication with the chamberg of the head E by 
a passage, h, through the board d and arm b, 
as shown in Fig. 2 in section. 
In front of the bellows U is a partition or 
board, l, on which is pivoted at an an index 
pointer, W, its lower arm, Y, having an elon 
gated slot, n, connected to and arranged to 
slide over a headed pin, , secured at the end 
of the movable bellows-board?, its other arm, 
t, pointed at its end at, and in position for ob 
servation through an opening, Z, in the cover 
of the box. On this partition l, at the left-hand 
upper corner of the opening Z, is stamped or 
printed the word Out,' and at the opposite. 
corner the word In. 
The operation is as follows: Having placed 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
o 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
 
367,724 
5 
O 
2C. 
25 
35, 
45 
that the carrier is in the tube. 
a carrier within the head E to the tube through indicating, with the apparatus in operation, 
which it is desired to transmit it, close the 
valve S and operate the bellows, which, 
Any suitable form of bellows can be used, 
through the air-pressure, will force the carrier 
or in lieu of a bellows a common valve; or 
along and through such tube to the station at 
the bellows or valve can be arranged over an 
the other end and eject it therefrom. As the 
opening in the tube, &c., its movements alone 
carrier moves along or is stationary within the 
indicating as to the condition of the tube. 
tube air will pass through the passage h into 
The indicator can be applied as well to the 
the indicator-bellows U, opening it by moving 
tube at the sales-counter or single station. 
its board f from its board d, as shown in Fig. 
Although this invention is described and 
3 in section, carrying with it the arm Y of the 
shown in connection with the cash-carrier ap 
indicator W, and correspondingly moving its 
paratus described in said patent, it is obvi 
pointing end at in the opposite direction to and 
ous it can be applied to other forms of cash 
over the word In, as shown in dotted lines 
carriers operated by air either by pressure or 
in Fig. 2, indicating that the carrier is within 
by exhaustion of the air; but when operated 
the tube, and the pointer will remain in such 
by exhaustion of the air the indicator-bellows 
position so long as the carrier is in the tube 
should be an exhaust-bellows and the point 
and the bellows are operated; but the instant 
ers be reversed in their movements, the 
the carrier is delivered or ejected from the tube 
words In and Out' being accordingly 
changed. 
the air has free passage from the bellows 
through the tube, and therefore will not then 
In lieu of the words In and Out, any 
pass to the indicator-bellows U, which will im 
other words or any suitable indicating marks 
mediately close from the force of its spring , 
can be used, or only one used; or both may 
returning in such movement the index-pointer 
be dispensed with and the pointer be ar 
W to its normal position, or over the word 
ranged to be seen in the opening when the 
** Out, indicating that the carrier is out of or 
carrier is in the tube, and disappear when out, 
has been delivered or ejected from the tube. 
or vice versa. 
With the carrier in the tube and the bellows 
Having thus described my invention, what 
H operated, its resistance to the air-pressure 
I clain is 
causes air to pass to the indicator-bellows and 
1. The combination, with a tube for the 
operate it, as described, and if the operator in 
transmission of a carrier, &c., therethrough 
working the apparatus observes that the 
by the operation of a bellows or other air 
pointer is at the word In, he knows the car 
motor, of a pneumatic indicator having com 
rier has not been delivered or ejected from the 
munication with said tube or bellows or other 
tube, and will again and again operate the bel 
air-motor, so that the indicator, in the passage 
lows until the pointer returns to the word 
of air from or to the bellows or other air 
Out, indicating the carrier has been deliv 
motor as it is operated, will show or indicate 
ered from the tube, when he ceases his opera 
whether the carrier, &c., is in or out of said 
tions. The indicator is placed at the head Eas 
tube. 
a convenient place for observation thereof; but 
2. The combination, with a tube for the 
obviously it can be attached to any convenient 
transmission of a carrier, &c., therethrough 
place on the apparatus or elsewhere, it only 
by the operation of a bellows or other air 
being essential that its bellows shall have air 
notor, of an indicator consisting of a bellows 
communication with the tube or bellows or 
or valve having communication with said tube 
other air-motor for the air to pass thereto for its 
or bellows or other air-motor for operation 
proper operation. 
thereof, substantially as and for the purpose 
The power of the bellows-spring can be 
specified. 
adjusted to suit the force or pressure of the 
3. The combination, with a tube for the 
bellows H and the resistance of the Uarrier 
transmission of a carrier, &c., therethrough 
thereto when in the tube. 
by the operation of a bellows or other air 
The index-pointer shown in Fig. 2 can be 
motor, of an indicator consisting of a bellows 
dispensed with, and a pointer or indicator 
or valve and an index or pointer connected 
arranged on or near the end of the movable 
thereto, having communication with said tube 
board f of the bellows, as shown, for in 
or bellows or other air. motor for operation 
stance, in Fig. 5, which is a view in detail of 
thereof, substantially as and for the purpose 
such an arrangement, W being the indica 
specified. 
tor or pointer, secured to the end of the mov 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
ing board f and projecting through a slot, e, 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
in the cover, the words In and Out be. 
(SSOS. 
ing reversed, as shown in said figure. The 
figure represents the bellows in its normal 
position or when the tube is empty. In dot 
ted lines the bellows is shown as open, with 
the indicator or pointer at the word ' In, 
EDWIN W. BROWN, 
PIERCY BRYANT, 
WILLARD S. PAIN. 
Witnesses: 
6 5 
75 
90 
95 
IC5 
II) 
I I5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367824.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 367,824, 
B. MASSETIH. 
DRILLING PACKER FOR OIL WELLS, 
 
-------------?--- 
3. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N, Peters. Photo-ithographer. Washington, B.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN MASSETH, OF KARNS CITY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DRILLING-PACKER FOR oil-WELLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 367,824, dated August 9, 1887. 
Application filed January 29, 1887. Serial No. 225,849. (No model.) 
O 
15 
2? 
To all ?y/uoj?, i?; ??? ????????: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN MASSETH, of 
Karns City, in the county of Butler and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Drilling-Packers for Oil 
Wells; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description thereof. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the construction of oil and gas weils and in 
packing devices used therein. It is illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the entire 
packing device, including an upper and a lower 
packer. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal axial section 
showing the upper packer and the tool which 
I use in packing both packers. Fig. 3 is a 
similar section showing the lower packer. 
Like symbols of reference indicate like parts 
in all of the figures. 
Heretofore in drilling deep wells it has been 
customary, after drilling below the fresh-water 
veins, to insert a string of casing, so as to shut 
off the water. The tools are then inserted 
within this casing, and a hole of less diameter. 
25 is drilled down to a point below the salt-water, 
veins. A second string of casing is then let 
down into the well, extending from the top of , 
the well within the first casing to the bottom 
of the hole. This casing confines the salt-water 
3o and excludes it from the hole below. The re 
mainder of the well is drilled down below the 
second casing by tools let through it. The dis 
advantage of this method of drilling is that it. 
requires the use of a large amount of casing, 
and by reason of the fact that the second cas 
ing extends from below the salt-water veins 
entirely to the top of the well any gas which 
may be produced between these points and 
which might otherwise be utilized is wasted. 
In the practice of my invention, after drill 
ing to a point below the fresh water and hav 
ing cased it off, I drill again to a point below 
the level of the salt-water, as before described. 
I then insert into the hole a sufficient number 
of casing-sections to extend from the bottom: 
of the hole to a point just above the salt-water. 
These sections are provided with two packing: 
devices, one at the base and the other at or 
near the top, and when these packers are set 
the salt-water is confined between them. In 
| stead of the rubber packer at the base, the cas 
ing may be otherwise sealed at that point-for 
example, by means of sediment placed at the 
bottom of the hole, the casing being driven 
into the sediment. The hole is then drilled 55 
down through the packed casing-sections as 
much farther as may be desired. The packing 
casing then rests on and is supported by a 
ledge at its base, and is therefore very firmly 
held in place, and by reason of the fact that it 6o 
only extends a little above the level of the salt 
water it is of comparatively small weight and 
expense. By reason of the fact, also, that the 
packer does not extend up to the level of the 
ground it affords an unobstructed exit for gas 65 
escaping above the salt-water. 
I shall now describe the construction of the 
apparatus which I prefer to use in the prac 
tice of this method of drilling, and shall first 
describe the upper packer, and shall then pro- yo 
ceed to the description of the lower packer and 
the mode of adjusting both packers. 
In the drawings, 2 represents a section of the 
oil-well casing. The upper packer consists of 
two rubber tubes, 3 and 4. The lower tube, 75 
4, is fitted within the mouth of a collar, 5, 
which is screwed to the casing 2, and a fol. 
lower, 6, interposed between the casing and 
the end of the packer, where it fits within the 
collar 5, serves to hold the packer in place. 
The upper end of the tube 4 is interiorly bev 
eled or flared. The upper packer-tube, 3, fits 
loosely around the casing 2, and at its lower 
end is conical or wedge-shaped and fits within 
the flared mouth of the ring4. Above the ring 
3, and resting on its squared upper edge, is a 
lead ring, 7, which fits loosely around the cas 
ing 2. 
S is a conical wedge having a hollow cylin 
drical bore. At the lower end it fits around 
the casing 2, and is secured thereto by means 
of screw-threads 9. These screw-threads are 
few in number or shallow, so that they may 
be easily broken by jarring on the wedge S. 
The widest part of the Wedge S is uppermost, 95 
and its outer surface is preferably provided 
with a series of upwardly-directed annular 
teeth or ridges, b. The function of the wedge 
8 is to expand the packing-rings in the man 
ner which I shall hereinafter describe. Its 
upper end is thickened and provided with a 
seat, as at c, for the operation of the jarring 
tools. 
14 is a ring made. of cast-iron or some other 
35 
45 
So 
8O 
90 
IOC) 
2 
4. 
367,824 
4 
5 
O 
- 
easily-frangible material, which is set within 
in the recess between the cinds of adjoining 
sections of the casing 2. 
It is to this ring that 
the tool by which the casing is lowered into 
the well is attached. This tool is shown in 
Fig. 2. It consists of a stock, 18, whose up 
per end is threaded at di to adapt it to be at 
tached to the string of drilling-tools. At the 
lower end of the stock there is a piece of tub 
ing, 19, which is provided with an annular pro 
jecting flange or nut, e. This tubing is fitted 
within the ring, and the flange is on the under 
side of the ring. The flange thus supports all 
the sections of the packing-casing, and when 
the stock is secured to the drilling-tools it af. 
fords means whereby the whole apparatus may 
be lowered into the well. 
In order to provide for the passage of the 
apparatus through the water in the well-hole, 
I perforate the tubing 19 with holes f above 
the flange e and above the ring 14. The water 
rushes through these holes when the casing is 
lowered, and so offers no obstruction to it. 
Near the top of the stock 18 is an annular 
collar, 20, which is adapted to rest upon the 
top of thc wedge S on the seat c. 
It is by 
means of this collar that the wedge is forced 
down to expand the packers. 
I do not desire to limit myself to the pecu 
liar annular shape of the ring 14, since any 
frangible seat arranged in an analogous way 
inside the casing may be substituted. 
I shall now describe the construction of the 
lower packer, which is also provided with two 
packing-rings, 10 and 11. The upper pack 
ing-ring, 10, is secured to a collar, 12, which 
is screwed to the lower end of one of the sec 
tions of the casing, and is also screwed to the 
upper end of the casing-section next below. 
The lower packing-ring, 11, is affixed to the 
upper end of a collar, 15, which is screwed to 
the section of casing 16 below the casing-sec 
tion 2, and fits around it, as shown in the 
drawings. The collar 15 is loosely mounted 
on the casing 2; but it is preferably provided 
with frangible wooden pins 17, which pass 
through the casing 2, the casing 16, and the 
collar 15, so as to hold these parts together 
firmly enough to enable the casing to be low 
ered into the well, but not so firmly that they 
may not be broken by jarring. The lower 
end of the casing 2 is preferably provided 
with a shoulder, 0, which is adapted to en 
gage with the corresponding shoulder, f', on 
the collar 15, and to hold the parts together if 
the pins should accidentally break. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
In order to pack the casing the tool 1S is first 
secured to the ring 14, and the casing is then 
lowered into the well until its lowest section, 
16, rests upon the bottom of the hole, as shown 
in Fig. 1. The lower packer is first adjusted. 
This is done by jarring upon the ring 14, (shown 
in Fig. 2,) and the effect of this jarring is to 
break the wooden pins which connect the cas 
ing 2 with the collar 15, and to cause the cas 
ing 2, carrying with it the packing-ring 10, to 
descend within the section 16 and within the 
collar 15. The action of the wedge-shaped end 
of the ring 10 upon the flared mouth of the 
ring 11 forces the latter outward against the 
side of the well, so as to pack it, as will be 
readily understood. After the packing is ?in 
ished, the ring 14 is broken by jarring upon 
it with increased force. In order to pack the 
upper packer it is necessary to break the con 
nection between the wedge S and the casing 2. 
This is done by jarring upon the seat ( at the 
upper end of the wedge sufficiently hard to 
break the thread 9. When this thread is broke), 
further jarring upon the seat c will exert a 
downward pressure upon the ring 7 and will 
force the packing-ring 3 downward between 
the outside of the casing and the inside of the 
ring 4, so as to bulge the latter ring outward 
against the side of the well. After a time the 
resistance of the ring 4 to the further descent 
of the ring 3 causes the lower end of the wedge 
8 to enter the space between ring 7 and the 
outside of the casing 2. After spreading the 
ring 7 the wedge S will enter, forcing itself 
between the ring 3 and casing 2, and will ex 
pand the ring 3 outwardly against the side of 
the well. 
The packing produced by this device is very 
solid and effective, and the use of the two rings 
in the upper and lower packers is of great 
benefit in producing this result. I do not de 
sire to limit myself solely to the use of these 
double packing-rings; nor do I claim them 
specifically herein, since I have made them 
the subject-matter of a separate application 
for Letters Patent. 
In packing wells I have found that there is 
danger of the packer - casing becoming dis 
placed by reason of upward pressure of water 
and gas, and by reason of the fact that in drill 
ing the toolis are apt to loosen the casing by 
striking against it. To prevent this I have 
devised an arrangement of catches or dogs, 21, 
which are pivotally set in recesses on the out 
side of the apparatus with their points upper 
most. They are provided with springs 22 or 
like mechanism for projecting them. In low 
cring the packer-casing into the well these 
dogs offer little or no resistance; but if any 
upward force be exerted on the casing the 
dogs will catch on the sides of the well and 
will prevent the casing from being raised. 
The use of the lead ring 7 is of great impor 
tance, because it protects the upper edge of 
the ring 3 during the packing operation and 
enables the action of the jarring after the 
threads 9 are broken to be exerted in forcing 
the ring 3 within the ring 4 before the wedge 
enters the space inside the packing-ring. 
One of the principal features of advantage 
of the whole packer is that it can be packed 
by the ordinary drilling-tools and does not 
need the casing to be extended to the top of 
the well to manipulate it. 
I claim 
1. The method hereinlbefore described of 
constructing deep wells, which consists in drill 
90 
95 
IOO 
I I. ? 
2 5 
35 
45 
55 
367,824 
3 
45 
SO 
ing to a point below the level of the salt-wa 
tion 16, a frangible ring, 14, secured to the sec 
ter veins, then inserting a casing into the hole 
tion 2, and a tool connected with the ring, 
with its lower end below and with its upper 
whereby the casing is lowered into the well 
end above the salt-water veins, sealing the 
and is jarred, substantially as and for the pur 
space between the casing and well both above 
poses described. 
and below the salt-water veins, and then drill 
7. In a packer-casing, a frangible ring, 14, 
ing through this casing, substantially as and secured therein, and a tool attached to the ring 
for the purposes described. 
and having a perforated hollow portion ex 
2. A packer for deep-well casings, consist- tending above the ring, substantially as and 
ing in the combination, with the casing, of an for the purposes described. 
expansible packer-ring surrounding the cas 
8. In a packer-casing having an upper and 
ing, and a cone secured to the casing above 
a lower packer, a cone for expanding the up 
the packer-ring by a frangible connection, 9, 
per packer, a frangible ring, 14, secured to the 
substantially as and for the purposes described. 
casing to afford means for expanding the lower 
3. A packer for deep-well casings, consist 
packer, a cone for expanding the upperpacker, 
ing in the combination, with the casing, of 
and a tool connected with the said frangible 
an expansible packer-ring, a cone mounted 
ring and having a shoulder which is arranged 
above the packer-ring, and a lead ring, 7, in 
to bear on said cone, Substantially as and for 
terposed between the cone and the packer 
the purposes described. 
ring, substantially as and for the purposes de 
9. The combination, with a packer-casing, 
Scribed. 
of a packing-ring arranged on one section, 16, 
4. The combination, with a packer and the 
of the casing, a cone for expanding the ring, 
casing to which it is applied, of upwardly-di 
mounted on another section, 2, thereof, which 
rected dogs pivotally mounted on the casing, 
section 2 is arranged to move telescopically 
substantially as and for the purposes described. 
on the section 16, and a frangible connection, 
5. The combination, with a packer and the 
17, uniting the said sections, substantially as 
casing to which it is applied, of upwardly-di 
and for the purposes described. 
rected dogs pivotally mounted on the casing, 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
and springs for projecting them outward, sub 
my hand this 12th day of January, A. D. 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
1887. 
6. The combination, with a packer-casing, 
of a packing-ring arranged on one section, 16, 
of the casing, and a cone for expanding the 
ring, mounted on anothersection, 2, of the cas 
ing, arranged to move telescopically on the sec 
BENJAMIN MIASSETH. 
THOMAS W. BAKEWELL, 
JAMES H. BAKEWELL. 
Witnesses: 
- 
O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US367924.txt	(No Model.) 
H, A, PERSHING. 
00MBINED PETIT LEDGER AND BLOTTER. 
No. 367,924, 
Patented Aug. 9, 1887. 
28i by cooey 
 
%2 
pays 
sy/3 &lt;betwe 
- 
N, PETERS, Photo-thographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY ALBERT PERSHING, 
COMB NED PETIT LE 
OF SOUTH BEND, INDIANA. 
DGER AND BLOTTER. 
O 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed April 1, 1887. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY ALBERTPERSH 
ING, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
South Bend, in the county of St. Joseph and 
State of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvementsin Combined Petit Ledger 
and Blotter; and I do declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to the letters and figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
Like letters refer to the same parts through 
Out the Several views. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvementsin devices for the purpose 
of keeping the transient or trivial accounts of 
merchants in alphabetical order in a system 
atic, compact, and convenient form for refer. 
GCO, 
The invention is particularly designed as an 
improvement upon the device shown and de 
scribed in the Patent No. 323,729, dated Au 
gust 4, 1885. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view of my improved ledger closed. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view with the top cover 
thrown back. Fig. 3 is a similar view with 
the top thrown back and the tablets partially 
turned on their pivot. 
Referring to the details of the drawings, A 
and B are two stiff covers, connected by a 
flexible back, a. In the upper corner of the 
leaf B, I place the pivot or staple C. 
D is a tablet fixedly secured to said cover B 
in any suitable way, preferably by the staple 
d, and alike staple in one or more of its cor 
ners, so that the said tablet may be removed 
when it has been filled up or when desired. 
The tablet consists of a quantity of blank 
55 
Patent No. 367,924, dated August 9, 1887. 
Serial No. 233,271. (No model.) 
leaves, bill-heads, or the like, separated by 
blank leaves, each having a different letter of 45 
the alphabet, into nine separate parcels, each 
separating blank leaf projecting below the bill 
heads sufficiently to expose the letters of the 
alphabet thereon, thus forming a marginal in 
dex. 
F and Gare similar tablets pivotally secured 
at one corner only by the staple C, so that said 
tablets can be revolved on said staple when de 
sired, as indicated in Fig. 3. 
By this construction I provide a petitledg 
er in which the account of any one individual 
may be readily turned to, and if the account of 
the individual in question should happen to be 
upon the second or third tablet, it can be 
reached by simply turning the first or the first 6o 
and second tablets, as the case may be, upon 
the pivot C, thus avoiding the necessity of 
opening the book further, and i? occasion should 
require the three tablets may be all displayed 
at the same time, which the construction of 65 
the Patent No. 323,729 prevents. 
It is evident that, although I show and pre 
fer to use three tablets, the number may be 
varied without departing from the spirit of my 
What I claim to be new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with the covers A B, 
flexible back a, connecting the same, and the 
tabletD, fixedly secured to the inner face of one 
of said covers, of the staple C and a plurality 
of tablets, indexed as described, and pivotally 
secured at one corner by said staple, substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
invention. 
75 
- 
in presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY ALBERT PERSHING. 
W 
Witnesses: 
ABRAHAM L. BRICK, 
NEWTON JACKSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368024.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. SMITH, 
GLOVE OR SHOE BUTTONER, 
No. 368,024, 
Patented Aug. 9, 1887. 
 
Witnesses, 
?h. %-of-14-yed 
l! vs NTER 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington,d4C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES B. SMITH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE STANDARD 
PENCIL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
GLOVE OR SHOE BUTTONER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 368,024, dated August 9, 1887. 
Application filed March 3, 1887. Serial No. 229,572. No model.) 
O 
IS 
25 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES B. SMITH, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at New 
York, county and State of New York, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Pocket Glove or Shoe Buttoners, of which the 
following, taken in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a full and complete speci 
fication. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
neat, convenient, and compact pocket glove 
or shoe buttoner. 
My invention consists in combining a closed 
wire loop glove or shoe buttoner of the form 
shown with a cylindrical case open at the ends 
only, into which it can be slid when not in 
use. A solid head is secured to the end of the 
case, and this is provided with notches through 
which the wire sides of the buttoning-loop 
pass, and these notches also serve the purpose 
of strengthening and steadying the loop when 
in use. The case may contain a sliding pen 
cil, as shown. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view of the 
device with both pencil and glove-buttoner 
slid into the case. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
with the buttoning-hook fully withdrawn and 
the pencil partly withdrawn. Fig. 3 is a rear 
end view of the cylindrical body of the case. 
Figs. 4 and 5 are views of opposite sides of the 
buttoning-loop when removed from the case. 
Fig. 6 is a view of the inner body portion. Fig. 
7 is a view of the buttoner closed when con 
structed without the pencil. 
a is a plain thin tubular case flanged over 
inwardly at the rear end and provided with 
the diametrically-opposite notches at a. 
b is a globular cap having grooves upon op 
posite sides. One of these grooves is shown at 
To b is soldered a tube, b, in which 
a spiral slot, h, is cut. A pin, i, set in the lead 
holderl, works in this sloth, and also in a lon 
gitudinal slot in the smaller tube, m, which 
4Of Fig. 6. 
45 
55 
turns inside of b, and itself contains the lead 
holder. The further description of these parts 
is, however, unnecessary, as they are the same 
as those usually employed in the construction 
of propelling-pencils. 
c is a tip. 
d is the button hook or, more properly, 
loop, to which is soldered at the open end a 
slotted hollow cylindrical piece, e, of such 
diameter as to closely fit the inside of the 
outer case. This has a slot, e, extending com 
pletely through it, and one or more slips or 
saw-cuts, e, to render it more elastic. The metal 
of this cylindrical end is thin enough to per 
mit it to slide freely over the parts of the pro 
pelling-pencil, and yet it has sufficient elas 
ticity to hold it in any position, either in or 
out, and to make the sliding motion smooth 
and steady. 
I am aware that combinations of a button 
hook and a pencil have been made, that but 
ton-hooks sliding into a case have been in use, 
and that even the combination of a loop glove 
buttoner with a pocket propelling-pencil in 
which the wire forming the loop slid into the 
cylindrical case by slots in that case has been 
in use, and I therefore do not claim, broadly, 
the combination of a propelling-pencil with an 
adjustable buttoner; but 
What I do. claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is- 
The combination of the cylindrical case ct, 
open at the end and provided with the notched 
head b and the notches a, and the elastic wire 
loop d, of the form shown and having the cylin 
drical end e, all constructed and operating 
substantially as shown. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 28th day of February, 1887. 
JAMES B. SMITH. 
- 
- 
Witnesses: 
W. C. MAINLAND, 
GEO. E. SONNEBORN. 
75 
80 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368124.txt	(No Model.) . 
W. E. BENNETT, 
w 
METHOD OF SECURING BUTTONS TO MATERIALS, 
No. 368,124, 
Patented Aug. 9, 1887. 
Witnesses: 
re-re. 
- 
or. 
|NW ENT DR 
74 & /3tzo. 
 
N. refeRs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER E. BENNETT, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO EDWARD P. MERWIN, OF SAME PLACE. 
METHOD OF SECURING BUTTONS TO MATER ALS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 368,124, dated August 9, 1887. 
Application filed June 30, 18S6. Serial No. 206,674. (No model.) 
O 
25 
5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER. E. BENNETT, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in the Method of Se 
curing Buttons to Materials, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to the operation of 
attaching shoe-buttons to button-pieces of 
boots or shoes by metallic fastenings; and it 
consists in engaging the loop of a wire staple 
With the eye of a button, forcing the prongs of 
said staple through the piece of leather or 
Other material to which the button is to be 
attached, and turning the ends of the staple 
prongs around a cord or wire laid against the 
inner surface of said piece, as I will now pro 
ceed to describe. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure it represents 
an edge view of a part of the button-piece of 
a boot or shoe, showing buttons attached in 
accordance with my method. Fig. 2 repre 
sents a section on line acac, Fig.1. Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5 represent perspective views showing 
different stages of the operation of securing a 
- 
button by my method. 
The same letters of reference indicate th 
same parts in all the figures. 
In the drawings, a represents the portion of 
a boot or shoe upper to which the buttons b 
are applied. 
c e c represent the metallic fastenings, which 
are staples engaged with the eyes of the but. 
tons and having their prongs passed through 
the upper and bent over or clinched at the 
inner side of the upper around a cord, d, (or, 
as an equivalent thereof, a wire,) of such size 
that it is capable of being embraced by the 
bent-over or clinched ends or prongs of the 
fastenings. Said cord is placed on the inner 
side of the upper, and the prongs of the fast 
enings are bent around it, as best shown in 
Figs. 2 and 5, the bent prongs being preferably 
compressed so closely against the cord or wire 
that the latter cannot easily slip lengthwise 
through them. . 
The cord constitutes a stay, which prevents 
the staple from being pulled through the but 
So ton-piece, and also prevents the button-piece 
from being stretched between the buttons. I 
35 
45 
prefer to use strong linen cord as the material 
of the stay, but may use any suitable fiber or 
metal. 
. I prefer to form the staple in the eye of the 55 
button by first inserting the end of a piece of 
wire of indefinite length in the eye of the 
button, then cutting a staple-blank from said 
wire, (said blank passing through the button 
eye, as shown in Fig. 3.) I then bend Said 
blank into staple form and force its prongs 
into the button-piece, and finally bend the 
points of the prongs around the cord d, as 
shown in Fig. 5. 
If desired, the staple may be formed prior 
to its insertion in the button-eye. I prefer 
the mode first described, however, as it enables 
the button to be attached by a machine which 
successively feeds the wire into the eye of the 
button, cuts off a blank, (which is left in the 
eye of the button, as shown in Fig. 3,) bends 
the wire into staple form, forces the prongs 
through the piece a, and turns the points of 
the prongs over the cord, the last-named op 
eration being effected by a suitably-formed 75 
die, against which the prongs are forced while 
they are being driven through the button 
piece. 
A machine organized to operate as above 
indicated forms the subject of a separate ap- 8o 
plication for Letters Patent, filed by E. P. 
Merwin and myself, December 13, 1886, Se 
rial No. 221,436. 
The staples may be made either of round or 
flat wire. 
I am aware that a button has been Secured 
by a staple having rings or loops at the ends 
of its prongs, and a retaining -pin passed 
through said loops and corrugated to fit the 
same; but in this fastening the pin does not 
extend continuously from button to button 
and the ends of the wire staple are not tightly 
clinched about the pin to bind the latter and 
prevent it from slipping. 
My improved method, involving the employ 
ment of a continuous cord or Wire and the 
tight clinching or binding of the ends of the 
staple around the cord or wire, differs from 
any method of securing buttons of which I am 
aWae. 
95 
90 
Oy 
I claim- 
The improved method of attaching buttons, 
- 
 
368,124 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name Io 
the same consisting in inserting a wire blank 
in the eye of the button, bending said blank to this specification, in the presence of two Sub 
into stable form while in said eye, forcing the scribing witnesses, this 19th day of June,1886. 
prongs of the staple through the button-piece, 
5 placing a continuous cord or wire against the 
WALTER, E, BENNETT. 
inner surface of said piece, and tightly clinch 
ing or binding the points of the staple around 
the cord, so as to prevent the cord from slip- 
ping, as set forth. 
Witnesses: 
C. F. BROWN, 
A. D. EIARRISON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368224.txt	(No Model.) 
C. L. McGLOTHLEN. 
RAILWAY TRACK. 
No. 368,224. 
4 e^4/, / 
Patented Aug. 16, 1887. 
- A?p2. 
SN N: a. 
Y--- 
29 
2 
Y 
3. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES L. McGLOTHLEN, OF STUART, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-FOURTH TO 
WILLIAM. F. GOULD, OF DES MOINES, IOW.A. 
RALWAY-TRACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 368,224, dated August 16, 1887. 
Application filed February 10, 1887. 
Serial No. 227,196. (No model.) 
O 
To ald, whon, it navy concer'72: 
Be it known that I, CIIARLES L. McGLOTH 
LEN, a citizen of the United States of America, 
and a resident of Stuart, in the county of Guth 
rie and State of Iowa, have invented a new I invert the guard-rail. 
and useful Improvement in Railway-Tracks, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My object is to save labor and expense in 
forming and applying guard-rails to track 
rails, in frogs, crossings, switches, and street 
intersections, or wherever desired, and to pro 
duce an improved track and railway. 
My invention consists in the combination 
of a section of a rail of common form with a 
track-rail, as hereinafter set forth, and pointed 
out in my claims, in such a manner that the 
ball of the section used as a guard-rail will 
fill the space between the ball and the flange 
of the track-rail and abut against its web to 
re-enforce the track-rail, and the flange of the 
same section will extend vertically and par 
allel with the ball of the track-rail to engage 
the flanges of car-wheels and to facilitate the 
crossing of wagons at Street intersections. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
a top view of a section of a track having one 
of my guard-rails attached. Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse section of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a top view 
of a track-rail and a paved street-intersec 
tion; and Fig. 4, a transverse section thereof, 
showing the paving abutting against the flange 
of the guard-rail. Fig. 5 is a transverse sec 
tion of a track and guard in which the flanges 
of the guard-rail are fitted to the track-rail, 
as required, to lower the top edge of the guard. 
Jointly considered, these figures clearly illus 
trate the construction, novelty, and utility of 
my complete invention. 
A represents a guard-rail, and IB a track 
rail. To adapt a piece of a common railway 
rail to be utilized as a guard-rail, I cut away 
the flanged base and the web from each end 
of the piece, as clearly shown in Fig. 1, and 
drill holes through the ball that is left to pro 
ject at each end, and then fasten it to a track 
rail by placing the ball of the piece against 
the web of the track-rail and passing bolts 
through coinciding holes formed in the web 
of the track-rail. 
Cutting away the base and web from the 
ends may be dispensed with by drilling holes 
through the ball and web and base at each 
end, or at any intermediate point, and using 
longer bolts to clamp the piece fast, as re 
quired, to serve as a guard rail. The corners 
at the ends of the flanges of the guard are 
preferably rounded off. When the top edge 
of the flange of the guard-rail becomes worn, 
At curves in a track, where there is great 
lateral pressure and strain on the rails, the 
pieces can be bent into concentric shape with 
the curve of the rails and fastened thereto to 
re-enforce them and to provent car - wheels 
from becoming derailed. 
At street-intersections entire rails or long 
pieces are bolted to the insides of the track 
rails in such a manner that their balls will 
fill the spaces under the balls of the track 
rails, and their flanges will extend parallel 
with the same rails to form an abutment 
against which wooden planks or paving-blocks 
of any form or substance desired, ballasting, 
or any kind of filling material will pack, 
while the top edges of the flanges will pre 
serve open grooves aside of the balls of the 
track-rail, as required, for the passage of the 
flanges of the wheels of the locomotives and 
cars that are advanced back and forth on the 
tops of the rails. The guard-rails thus placed 
also prevent the feet of persons and animals 
from being caught under the balls of the 
track-rails, and facilitate the crossing of the 
track with a wagon, sled, or other vehicle 
commonly used on a common street or public 
highway. 
I am aware that in street - railway rails 
pieces of rails have been fixed aside of track 
rails in an upright position to engage the car 
wheels as they passed over the track. 
I am also aware that angle-irons and tim 
bers have been fitted together and jointly fixed 
to railway - rails at crossings; but my man 
ner of combining pieces of railway-rails direct 
with the track-rails, so as to form guards and 
grooves for the flanges of the wheels passing 
over them, is novel and greatly advantageous. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of a section of a rail 
way rail and guard with a track-rail, substan 
tially as and for the purposes stated. 
2. The combination of a railway-rail or sec 
tion of a railway-rail with a track-rail and 
paving or filling material, substantially as and 
for the purposes shown and described. 
L. F. ZIEGER, 
P. L. SEWER. 
Witnesses: 
(IIARLES I, McGLOT III.E.N. 
25 
35 
55 
9O 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368324.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. CR, AIG, 
COMBINED LATCH AND LOOK. 
No. 368,324. 
Patented Aug. l6, l887. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
-------- 
--- 
JOHN C. CRAIG, OF FENELON FALLS, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
COMBINED LATCH AND LOC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 368,324, dated August 16, 1887. 
Application filed May 5, 1887. Serial No. 237,164. (No model.) Tatented in Canada March 15, 1887, No. 26,236. 
O 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN CHARLESCRAIG, 
of Fenelon Falls, in the Province of Ontario, 
in the Dominion of Canada, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Com 
bined Latch and Lock; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being 
had to the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan of the interior of my im 
proved latch and lock, the bolt advanced as 
when latched. Fig. 2 is a like view showing 
the bolt retracted from latching position. Fig. 
3 is a like view of the parts when the bolt is 
advanced locked. Fig. 4 is a like view of the 
parts when the bolt is retracted locked. Fig. 
5 is a view of the bolt detached from the case 
and provided with tumblers, and Fig. 6 is an 
edge view of the same. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
gravitating-lever latches and locks, and has 
for its object to effect lifting the lever by a 
tappet or cam to withdraw the latch-bolt and 
subsequently projecting the latch-bolt by a 
key to cause the lever to lock the same. 
My invention consists of a gravitating lever 
having an arm provided with a stud and a bolt 
slotted at the heel to receive the stud, so that 
by lifting the lever the bolt is retracted, and 
projecting the bolt by a key brings the end of 
the bolt outside the stud on the lever-arm, 
whereby the bolt cannot be fully retracted 
without application of the key to return the 
slot to the stud. 
1 is the lock-case, the cover removed to show 
the interior; 2, the holes for screws to fasten 
the lock to a door. 
3 is a post, and 414 stop-pills, all cast with 
5 is a tappet journaled in the cover and 
back of the lock-case, and has a socket to re 
ceive a knob-spindle. 
On post 3 is sleeved pivotally a gravitat 
ing elbow-lever, 6, the horizontal arm of 
which impinges against pin 4, and the ver 
tical arm is provided with a stud, 8, which en 
the lock-case. 
35 
45 
gages a T-shaped slot, 9, in the heel of the 
latch-bolt 10, and said bolt has an opening, 11, 
opposite key-hole 12 in the lock-case to re 
ceive the bit of a key, and an opening, 13, to so 
receive stop-pin 14 to limit the forward move. 
ment of the bolt when reciprocated by a key 
entering the key-hole 12 and engaging with the 
side of opening 11 in the bolt. The key turn 
ing in the opening raises the heel of the bolt 5 
and projects the same, so that the slot in the 
heel passes from engagement with the stud of 
the lever, and said stud will then engage with 
the end of the bolt by said end dropping onto 
a teat, 7, on lever 6, which supports such bolt 6o 
horizontally. When the bolt is thus locked 
outward, pressure will then succeed in only 
partially forcing the same into the lock-case, 
the limit being reached when the lever strikes 
stop-pin 4. 
The bolt 10 may be provided with tumblers 
15, having an opening, 16, coinciding with 
opening 11. The tumblers are hung on a pin, 
17, projecting from opposite sides of the bolt, 
so that they may be on one or both sides there- 7o 
of, and the bolt be reversed to suit doors open 
ing to the right or to the left hand. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a latch and lock, the combination, with 
the lock-case having stop-pin 14 and key-hole 75 
12, of bolt 10, having a T-shaped slot in the 
heel and openings ill 13 in front, gravitating 
lever 6, engaging the bolt, and tappet 5, inde 
pendently journaled in the case to lift the le. 
ver, as set forth. 
2. In a latch and lock, the combination of 
bolt 10, having a T-shaped slot in the heel, 
and opening 11, opposite to the key-hole in 
the lock-case, tumblers 15, pivoted to the bolt, 
said tumblers having a T-shaped slot and 85 
opening 16 corresponding to the opening and 
slot in the bolt, and gravitating lever 6, as set 
forth. 
J. C. CRAG, 
8o 
65 
--- 
Witnesses: 
JoHN R. HAND, 
HENRY T. FLYNN, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368424.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 368,424, 
 
A. RIGG, 
ENGINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 16, l887. 
n 
S l 
Witnesses: 
on A. S. War. 
a k--- & fa-4- 
17verdor: 
/zre/wr 72.767 
Zy/zs /2zorrveys 
2%z-rz. 
pETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washinstan, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
A. R.G. G. 
ENGINE 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2 
No. 368,424, 
 
Patented Aug. 16, 1887. 
Wodresses: 
of- &, Gau-3- 
77 verdor. 
&y Meas (/2eorveys 
27%z72-yeaza 
N. PETERs. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
A. RIGG. 
ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 368,424. 
 
 
Patented Aug. 16, 1887. 
24 2. 
2ZZZZZZZZZZZZ2 E 
22 
% 
 
N 2 
%%| ||2 
ENN N. 
2NS 
s E. N., 
RS tza 2 N 32 
N R 
s y N 
NME" 
& Lll 2 % -cz  N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
RS 
N N 
PEERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR RIGG, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 368,424, dated August les, l887. 
Application filed February 2, 1886. Serial No. 190,599. (No model.) Patented in England May 16, 1885, No. 6,047. 
55 
To all, whon, it may concern 
Be it known that I, ARTHURRIGG, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, 
residing in London, England, have invented 
certain Improvements in Engines, (for which 
I have obtained British Patent No. 6,047, 
dated May 16, 1885,) of which the following is 
a Specification. 
My invention consists of certain improve 
ments in the construction of that class of ro 
tary engines in which a number of motive 
power cylinders are caused to revolve around 
One center, while the pistons with their rods 
revolve around another center; and my inven 
tion further consists in means for obtaining a 
scientific method of regulation, either by al 
tering the stroke (where a non-elastic medium 
is the power) or by varying the rate of expan 
Sion, (where an elastic fluid is the source of 
power.) 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation, and Fig. 2 a transverse ver. 
tical section on the lines B D, Fig. 1, of an 
engine embodying the special features of my 
invention. It is represented as having three 
cylinders, numbered I, II, and III, respect 
ively; but the exact number of cylinders em. 
ployed may be varied, as desired. Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5 represent front views of the three cylin 
ders taken apart, so as to indicate the construc 
tion of their ports more plainly than can be 
Seen in Fig. 1, where these cylinders are su 
perposed on each other. Fig. 6 represents a 
front view of the distributing-valve, showing 
its inlet and outlet ports. Figs. 7, 8, and 9 
are views of a device whereby variations in 
the rate of expansion of the elastic motive 
fluid may be obtained. 
The circle A B D, Fig. 1, may be regarded 
as the rim of a wheel. This wheel is overhung 
upon its bearings and is free to turn upon and 
around a center marked O, Fig. 2. Project 
ing from its circumference there are studs b, 
as many in number as there may be single or 
double acting cylinders constituting one en 
gine. These are equidistant and at angles of 
one hundred and twenty degrees apart when 
three cylinders are used. On another center, 
which may be at a fixed or changeable dis 
tance or eccentricity from O, around which 
the above-mentioned wheel revolves, there is 
a stud, C, mounted on any suitable standard 
or support, as at C". This stud C serves as a 
center around which each and every cylinder 
revolves. 
The piston of the cylinder I is represented 
at the bottom of its stroke and ready to receive 
pressure. The piston of the cylinder II is rep 
resented as having moved partly out, and when 
each cylinder reaches the point Kits piston 
will have reached the extreme limit or end of 
a stroke, and exhaust should have begun. 
Thus during half of a revolution (from A to 
K) the pistons move out, while in half a revo 
lution (from K to A) the pistons move in. 
It will be understood that the piston of each 
cylinder in revolution passes through corre 
sponding phases, all the said pistons succes 
sively traveling radially outward or inward 
distances each equal to twice the distance 
apart or eccentricity of the centers O and C, 
and these movements or reciprocations are not 
absolute in relation to the earth, but only rel 
ative in regard to cylinders and pistons, re 
spectively. . 
To each cylinder there is a port, (marked p' 
p' p' for the cylinders I, II, and III, respect 
ively.) In the drawings these ports are shown 
as being made through the central bosses, PP 
P, with which the cylinders are furnished, 
and by means of which they are mounted to 
turn upon the pin C. P is the boss of the cyl 
inder I, P is the boss of the cylinder II, and 
P is the boss of the cylinder III. The inlet 
and exhaust passages are shown at V and E, 
illustrated as being made through an adjust 
able piece, C, on the standard or support C. 
for the center C. The passages from the cyl 
inders made through the aforesaid bosses and 
communicating with these passages V and E 
bend to a right angle, as shown in Fig. 2, and 
form channels from inside the cylinders to the 
passages V and E, which open on a faced side, 
ac, of the piece C, against which the boss IP 
bears. The openings of the said passages at 
the face a have a radius corresponding to that 
of the slots in the cylinder-bosses, as seen in 
Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6, which respectively show 
the passages or ports through the bosses of each 
cylinder and the face ac, the said passages or 
ports being marked p' p' p". The passages 
marked q are those made through the bosses 
of the cylinders I and II, to allow inlet to and 
exhaust from the cylinder or cylinders behind 
them to pass through the said bosses. 
The valve-slot V serves as inlet to, and the 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
45 
2 
368,424 
75 
other, E, for exhaust from, each cylinder as the 
portin its boss revolves and comes opposite to 
one or other of the valve-ports V and E. The 
slots or passages g g through the boss of the 
cylinder I are superposed over the ports p 
and p' of the cylinders II and III when these 
are in their proper working position, and the 
slot or passage q in the boss of the cylinder 
II similarly is superposed over the port p" of 
the cylinder III, so that an open passage is 
always provided for the supply and exhaust 
of cylinder II through the boss of the cylinder 
I, and also for cylinder III through the bosses 
of the cylinders I and II. It is obvious that 
however many cylinders may be employed in 
One engine similar provision can be applied. 
An engine constructed according to my in 
vention can be driven either by an elastic or 
by a non-elastic fluid pressure, or by explosions 
of mixed gases requiring only appropriate dis 
tribution of ingress and egress for the par 
ticular motive agent employed. 
When an engine thus constructed, as already. 
described, and illustrated by Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 
and 6, is intended to be driven either by an 
elastic-fluid pressure--such as steam-or by a 
non-elastic-fluid pressure-such as water-it 
can be governed (that is, regulated as to speed 
or power) by a throttle-valve or its equivalent, 
diminishing the pressure as required, and such 
valve may be controlled by a governor. This 
method, however, is not conducive to an eco 
nomical use of either an elastic or a non-elastic 
fluid, and it is desirable to adopt a construc 
tion which shall enable variations to be made 
in the point where expansions begin when an 
elastic fluid is used, and to vary the volume 
of a non-elastic fluid without altering the num 
ber of revolutions an engine thus driven shall 
make in any given time. The details of these 
systems differ somewhat from each other, and 
I will now proceed to describe my method for 
varying the rate of expansion in the case of an 
engine constructed according to my invention 
and intended to be driven by an elastic fluid. 
Whatever permanent relationships subsist 
as to the commencement or termination of ex 
haust can be determined by a fixed angular 
length of its port in conjunction with that of 
the cylinder-port in question. Similarly, any 
desired lead for the inlet can be perma 
nently fixed by proper location of the leading 
end of the port from which a supply is obtained. 
The point of cut-of-that is, where expan 
sion begins-is determined by the angular loca 
tion of the hinder end of that port from which 
a supply is obtained, and so long as the ter 
mination of such port remains fixed so long 
will the rate of expansion remain constant, 
just as in an ordinary engine unprovided with 
a variable cut-off valve, and any change in 
the angular length of an inlet-valve port or of 
the cylinder-ports, by adding to or taking from 
the hinder end thereof, will cause a corre 
sponding change in the cut-off and in the rate 
of expansion. I take advantage of this ex 
pedient for the purpose ofregulating how much 
elastic fluid shall be used in such engines as 
are made with revolving cylinders having 
means for inlet and exhaust arranged substan- 7o 
tially as herein described, and intended to be 
governed by placing their rates of expansion 
under the control of any suitable or convenient 
regulating influence, whether operated by 
hand or by governor. 
A method by which changes can be made in 
the angular length of an inlet-port is shown 
by Fig. 6. It consists in dividing the inlet 
port as to its angular length into spaces, and 
these can be successively closed by a slide or 8o 
shutter, T, turning on a center, t, Figs. 7, 8, and 
9, passing over and closing one or more spaces 
successively, as desired. This shutter there 
fore constitutes an expansion - valve, and by 
connecting it or any other valve arranged to 85 
effect a corresponding result to any suitable 
governor an automatic regulation of expan 
sion can be secured and a regular speed main 
tained, as already well understood in relation 
to ordinary engines. Whether steam or other 90 
elastic fluid be expanded in each cylinder, as 
in simple engines, or whether it be expanded 
in imore than one cylinder, as in compound or 
triple expansion engines, arrangements can be 
carried out by which such engines shall be 95 
regulated by varying their rates of expansion 
and by placing such changes under the con 
trol of a proper governor. 
For marine and other purposes it may be de 
sirable to provide an engine that can be re- IOO 
versed, or that can be reversed and also regul 
lated, by having its rates of expansion varia 
ble at will in either one or both directions of 
motion. So far as mere reversal is concerned 
a simple removal of the centers of motion of IO5 
cylinders and wheel, respectively, will accom 
plish that object, (as described for inelastic 
fluid engines;) but for elastic-fluid engines I 
prefer to use a valve that changes inlet into 
outlet, or vice versa. 
When it is desired to construct a compound 
engine according to my invention, two dis 
tinct sets of wheels and cylinders, as described, . 
may be arranged to drive opposite ends of the 
same shaft, one set exhausting into the other, I I5 
or such engines can drive independent shafts; 
or, if preferred, compound engines can be con 
structed, according to my invention, as one sys 
tem of cylinders revolving on the same stud, 
permitting steam or other elastic fluid to ex- I 20 
pand in two or more cylinders consecutively. 
When it is desired to regulate or govern the 
power of an engine constructed according to 
my invention that is intended to be driven by 
a non-elastic fluid-such as water-I alter the I25 
piston-stroke, while always admitting a full 
supply of such fluid, and this alteration in 
stroke is brought about by changing the ec 
centricity or distance between those centers 
upon which the wheel and cylinders respect. 13o 
ively revolve. As the centers O and C, Fig. 
1, approach each other, so does the piston 
stroke and therefore the engine-power dimin 
ish until they coincide, in which case there 
IIO 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
65 
 
368,424 
3. 
O 
5 
would be 110 pistofi - stroke as the engine 
turned round. Indeed, whatever may be the 
eccentricity or distance measured between the 
Center of main shaft and that of the stud, 
around which all the cylinders revolve, it 
Will be found exactly one-half of whatever 
Stroke the pistons may have in relation to the 
cylinders, just as in an ordinary reciprocating 
engine the piston stroke usually equals twice 
the radius of its crank. 
In engines constructed according to my in 
vention any change in eccentricity or dis 
tance between the centers and the main shaft 
and cylinders causes an alteration in the 
stroke of all the pistons in relation to all the . 
cylinders of any one motor, and I take advan 
tage of this circumstance for regulating such 
prime movers as are intended to be driven by 
inelastic fluids for determining the amount of 
fluid-pressure expended during each revolu 
tion. This control may be exercised by hand 
or by a governor, so as to secure a uniform or 
nearly uniform speed of rotation and proper 
relationships between speed, power, and ex 
penditure of pressure. 
Whenever, therefore, an engine constructed 
according to my invention, with separate re 
volving cylinders, is required to give a variable 
power, or has to be governed or regulated as 
to Speed, power, or quantity of fluid expended, 
I take advantage of the ready means for chang 
ing the stroke of all the pistons by simply 
varying the distance between the centers C and 
O of cylinder and wheel, respectively. Thus 
the quantity of fluid is caused to vary as de 
sired. If it be arranged that the center C shall 
travel beyond the center Otoward the oppo 
site side-namely, toward K, Fig. 1--then mo 
tion Will recommence and power will increase 
until Capproaches and at last reaches its final 
limit toward K; but the direction of such 
movement will be reversed. Thus from an 
engine so provided power can be had in either 
direction of motion. 
In Figs. 2 and 6 the stud or center C, upon 
which all the cylinders revolve, is shown upon 
a slide which can be moved backward or for 
Ward and held in any position, so as to give 
any desired eccentricity, and thus any desired 
stroke to the pistons. Such movement of the 
Center C can be produced by the direct action 
of a feed-screw, S, Figs. 2 and 6, by hand or 
otherwise; but where a relay action is desired, 
hydraulic rams may be employed to provide 
Whatever power may be needed to produce 
the required changes of eccentricity. When 
governing a non-elastic-fluid engine so pro 
vided with hydraulic rams, valves may bear 
ranged to determine their movements, and 
Such valves may be placed under the direct 
control of a governor. 
Engines with revolving cylinders can be 
constructed according to my invention to be 
driven by explosions of gases, and necessary 
Supplies (say of coal-gas and atmospheric air) 
can be provided by pumps of any usual con 
struction, or else some one or more of the re 
25 
35 
55 
60 
volving cylinders may serve as pumps, while 
others receive those impulses which set the 
entire system in motion. The valve arrange 
ments already described will suffice to ex 
plain how inlet and outlet can be arranged and 
modified, however desired; only it may be 
generally advisable that inlet of gases shall 
occupy a separate portion of the valve or op 
posite faces of such as are concerned with de 
terminations of explosions. 
When an engine constructed according to 
my invention is driven by extraneous power 
in a direction opposite to that of its own 
proper motion, and its usual exhaust can 
draw a supply of fluid, then the motor be 
comes converted into a pump, and a pump of 
varying capacity, when used with a non-elastic 
fluid, whenever the eccentricity is capable of 
regulation, as described. These features are 
of importance when such an engine is used 
for such purposes as hoisting, as its power can 
be varied according to demand, and, more 
over, it can be changed into a pump for low 
ering or the like, and it will thus serve as a 
brake, pumping back some of the fluid into 
the main supply at the same pressure as origi 
nally received. 
I wish it to be understood that I do not 
confine myself to the use of any particular 
number of cylinders, nor do I restrict myself 
to the exact and only details of construction 
which have been described; but I hold my 
self free to make use of any known or con 
venient mechanical contrivance or combina 
tion that may be useful in conjunction with 
the main or essential features of my inven 
tion. 
75 
85 
90 
95 
I claim as my invention 
1. A rotary engine having a number of cyl 
inders separately mounted upon a common 
stud or center, on which they revolve, with a 
wheel which turns upon another center and to 
which the piston-rods are connected, substan 
tially as described. 
2. A number of cylinders having separate 
bosses provided with inlet and exhaust ports, 
and a central stud upon which said cylinders 
are separately mounted by their bosses, in 
combination with pistons and a wheel to which 
the piston-rods are connected, all substantially 
as specified. 
3. A rotary engine having separate cylin 
ders revolving around a common center and 
adapted to vary their angular positions rela 
tively to each other during revolution, and 
having means, substantially as set forth, for 
varying the rate of expansion of the motive 
fluid or the strokes of the pistons, all substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
ARTHUR RIGG. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. MILLS, 
CEIAS. JAS, JONES, 
Both of 47 Lincoln's Inn Fields, London, TV. C. 
ICO 
IOS 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368524.txt	(No Model.) 
C. FISHER 
CATIE FOR BRIOGES, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No, 368,524. 
Patented Aug, 16, 1887. 
4/ITVESSES 
ZZazz Z.3%cerezo, 
WTA..-7lave 7ve 77vazzzl. 
IW"VIEWTOH. 
az. 7.2. 
%, 2 - 
Attorigey 
 
N PETERs. Phelo. Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES FISHER, OFMANITOWOC, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO GEORGE B. BURNETT, OF SAME PILACE. 
GATE FOR B ROGES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 368,524, dated August 16, 1887. 
Application fled December 22, 1886. Serial No. 222,246. (No model) 
IO 
25 to the operating devices of the gate. 
To al vfonv ib may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLIES FISHIER, of 
Manitovoc, in the county of Manitowoc and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain new 
5 anduseful Improvements in Gates for Bridges; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as Will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use the 
S3le. 
Myinvention has reference togates fordraw 
bridges, and has for its object to increase the 
eficiency of Such constructions, to render the 
operation both automatic and positive, and 
simplify the general character of such de. 
VCCS, 
In the accompanyingdrawings, forming part 
of this specification, Figure 1 is a view in ele 
vation of my improved bridge-gate and oper. 
ating appliances, looking from the direction 
in Which the draw is located. 
Fig. 2 is a 
Side view of Fig. 1, a portion of the drawbe 
ing represented to illustrate the relative oper. 
ation of devices carried thereby with respect 
Fig. 3 
isa detail view of part of the draw, and Fig. 
4 is another detail view, 
Upon the supporting timberand framework 
of the bridge proper is located the central 
roadway, A, ateach side of which is a path or 
footway, B B, as usual. Transversely beneath 
the central roadway, A, and at the point 
Where the gate is located, is a beam, C, at or 
near each end of Which is mounted a vertical 
rod or standard, D, which extends upateach 
side of the roadway A, as represented in Fig. 
1. A Washer or collar, a, is rigidly mounted 
on each standard D, preferably a short dis 
tance from the upper end thereof, and on the 
extreme end of each standard is also rigidly 
secured a secondwasher, b, forming a stop, 
the purpose of which Will be hereinafter ex 
plained. 
El refers to a horizontal rail, which is ex 
tended transversely across both the road and 
pathways, as seen most clearly in Fig. 1, and 
the said railis provided with eyes c, through 
Which pass the rods D, the said eyes beinglo 
cated between the washers a b, but normally 
5o resting on and supported by the washers a. 
From the rail E depends a series of rods, d, 
3o 
45 
which, together with lower beam, A, com 
plete the gate structure proper and extend 
into and through agroove formed transversely 
in the floor of the road and pathways, and 
registering vertically with the rail E. above. 
At the side ofeach pathway is a vertical slot 
ted standard, e, into which the ends of the rail 
El extend and are guided. A beam, F, islo 
cated transversely beneath the bridge proper, 
and has playinghorizontallytherethrough and 
near each end thereofa bolt, f the front ends 
of which are formed into horizontal eyesg, 
while the rear portion of each bolt is bent 
downwardly and inwardly, for a reason to be 
hereinafter explained. 
h refers to a bracket secured on the rear side 
of the beam F, and perforated to Support the 
outer end of each bolt. 
On the outer side of a beam, C, bellow the 7o 
beam F, are secured ears i, in Which bears a 
horizontal rod, H, the ends of which extend 
up vertically through the eyes g of the bolts f 
above. An arm, j, extends out horizontally 
from the center of the rod H, and carries a 75. 
roller, l. A coil-spring, ll, is attached at one 
end to the arm j and at its other end to the 
beam F, and tends to normally maintain the 
eyes g of the boltsff close to the front of the 
said beam F, and consequently the roller-arm 8o 
jin a horizontal position. 
From the under side of the bridge proper, 
and at some distance back from the Open part 
thereof, depends a bracket, , to the lower por 
tion of which is pivotally secured one end of 85 
a beam, J, the other end of which extends 
through and beyond the Supporting frame 
work of the bridge proper to a point beneath 
that occupied by the end of the draw When 
the latter swings into position. The free end 
of the beam J. carries a short shaft, upon which 
turnsa roller, K. The frame-work of thebridge 
proper is provided with two vertical bars, LL, 
paralel, as shown in Fig. 1, and serving as 
guides for the end of the beam J, which carries 
an anti-friction roller, m, ateach side, to facili 
tate the free movement of said beam between 
said guides. 
A chain or cable, M, is secured at one end 
to the under side of the bridge-abutment, then 
passes down and around a pulley, n, on the 
upper side of the beam J, then around a pul 
9) 
2 
368,524 
5 
IO 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ley, o, on the under side of the beam A. of the 
gate, and is finally secured to an eyebolt, p, 
on the upper side of the beam J. 
Aguide roller orpuley, q, is located per 
manently beneatheach pathway; and serves as 
a guide for a chain or cable, 8, which passes 
over the same and is connected at one end to 
one of the ends of the gate-beam A, While the 
other end of said chain or cable suspends a 
weight, S. 
One of the timbers N, forming the adjacent 
end of the draw, has secured on its front side 
a metal bar, o", which is secured in position 
by means of earst and fastening-bolts. The 
end portions of the bar o areinclinedupWard, 
as shown in said Fig. 3. On the other side of 
the beam Nare secured the ends of a triangu 
lar-shaped bar, T, forming a depending pro 
jection. When the drawis in place, the parts 
occupy the position ilustrated in Fig. 2-that 
is to say, with the plate O depressing the 
roller-arm j, solas to retain the boltsffin a 
retracted position, While the bar Tibears upon 
and holds the beam Jin a depressed position, 
so that the gate-beam A. occupies a position 
considerably bellow the bridge proper. Now, 
when the draw is swung away from the end of 
the bridge-abutment the plate O" and bar T 
move out of contact respectively with the 
roller-armj and beam J, so that the latter is 
elevated through the traction of the Weights, 
thus elevating the gate-beam to the position 
shown in Fig. 1, closing both road and path 
Ways. 
It will be noticed that the relative shape of 
the plate O and bar Tis such that the beam J 
begins to ascend as soonias the draw moves, 
whereas the contact of the plate O with the 
roller-armj is maintained for some time after 
the beginning of such movement on the part 
of the draw, and the projection of the bolts f 
does not occuruntil one of the inclined ends 
of the plate Ois reached, after which the roller 
armj begins agradual ascent, so that the bolts 
ffgradually move into position and arrive in 
proper position when the gate-beam passes 
above them, so that the beam will be locked 
againstany downward movement. 
By bending downward and inward the ends 
of the boltsff, I provide againstany possible 
bending orderangement of parts which might 
occurowingto anyinterference with the proper 
and free ascent of thegate-beam. In my con 
struction, if the boltsffarrive infull position 
before the gate-beam has ascended toits limit, 
any subsequent movement of said beam will 
be readilly accomplished by means of a roller, 
u, placedon the upper corner of said beam, 
whichroler contacts with the inclined portion 
of the bolt andgraduallyforcessaid bolts out of 
the path of the beam until the lateris passed, 
after which the bolts move beneath the beam 
and lock it in position. 
I preferto soslot the road and pathways 
that the rail E. Will, when the gate has de 
scended, rest in and be flush with the road 
way. Inas muchas the footways are generally 
much higher than the roadway, the flooring 
and beams of the latter Will have to be cutto 
a depth coincident with the slot in the road 
way, in order that the rail may rest therein: 
andas the width of the slot is small it Will 
not be inconvenient nor interfere With travel 
on the pathways. Instead, however, of cut 
ting the footways as above explained, the slot 
therein may bejust suficient to receive the 
ends of the rail, whichare bent to accomo 
date themselves to the height of the path 
Ways. y having the rail play freely between the 
washers a b the following advantage is Se 
cured: Should any one on the verge of the 
bridge get his foot over the slot therein, so 
that the descending rail comes down upon it 
the rail canbe lifted to such an extent as Will 
permit the foot to be removed from beneath 
the same to prevent injury. 
UU designate rollers for supporting the 
ends of the bridge-draw. 
I do not limit myself to the precise con 
structin herein described and set forth, as I 
reserve the right to apply the improvements 
to various bridge constructions without de 
parting from the spirit of my invention. 
I claim- 
1. The combination, with a bridge, of a 
draw, a vertically-movable gate, a beam piv 
otally secured beneath the bridge, locking 
mechanism arranged upon the bridge proper 
to be engaged by mechanism arranged upon 
the draw, and weights secured to the gate 
beam to elevate thegate asthe drawis opened, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with a bridge, of a 
draw, a pivoted beam, J, a vertically-mov 
able gate provided with Weights, devices de 
pending from the drawto engage the free end 
of the beam J., and locking devices arranged 
beneath the bridge to engage With a projec 
tion from the draw, said locking devices be 
ing adapted to be released to permit the ris 
ing of the gate as the drawis opened, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a slotted bridge 
portion, of a gate, a beam pivoted at one end 
bellow the bridge, rollers located on the other 
end, vertical guides for said rollers, a connec 
tion between said beam and gate, and a draw 
adapted to depress said beam, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. The combination, with a slotted bridge 
portion, of a gate having a beam beneath the 
bridge, a bridge-beam having locking-bolts 
playing therethrough, the rear end of said 
bolts being inclined, a roller, u, on said gate 
beam, and projections on the draw for de 
pressing the gate and retracting the bolts, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with a slotted bridge 
portion, of a gate consisting of a beam, stand 
ards, rail, and rods, the said rail being mov 
able relative to the standards, a draw, and de 
M 
95 
85 
9o 
IOO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I25 
368,524 
3 
to the Same and to the beam, substantially as ro 
Set forth. 
Intestimony whereof I have signed this 
Specification in the presence of two subscrib. 
ing Witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLIES FISHIER. 
OTTo SONSTHAYEN, 
HARVEY F. HUBBARD. 
vices operated thereby for efecting the de 
Scent of the gate through the slot, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6, The combination, with a slotted bridge 
5 portion, of a gate, a draw, devices operated 
thereby for efecting the descent of the gate, 
beam F, eyeboltsfa rod, H, havingits ends 
bent up to engage said eyebolts, a projection 
located on Said shaft, anda spring connected 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368624.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 368,624, 
722. Z. 
H. STANTON. 
STEAM BOILER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
Patented Aug. 23, l887. 
 
N, Perers, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
H. STANTON, 
STEAM BOILER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. ' 
No. 368,624, 
Patented Aug. 23, 1887. 
C 
36 ho &letovinct 
311-uc11 to 
2%ty-eiz7. 
f, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY STANTON, OF FLUSHING, OHIO. 
STEAM - BOLE. R. 
SPECIFICATION (oriming part of Letters Patent No. 368,624, dated August 23, 1887. 
Application filed January 3, 1887. 
Serial No. 223,257. (No model.) 
IO 
5 
To all whon, it naily concein. 
Beit known that I, HENRY STANTON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Flushing, 
in the county of Belmont and State of Ohio, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Steam-Boilers, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had therein 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a central vertical longi 
tudinal section of a steam-boiler; Fig. 2, a 
transverse section through the line acac of Fig. 
1. 
Fig. 3 is a similar section to that shown in 
Fig. 1 of a modification. Fig. 4 is a plan of 
a modification of the connections between the 
boiler and Water-bridge. Fig. 5 is a sectional 
detail of a clearing device, and Fig. 6 is a de 
tail of an air-tube and its connections. 
This improvement relates more particularly 
to that class of boilers which are provided with 
water-bridges in their fire-boxes; and the in 
vention consists in the peculiar combinations 
and construction and arrangement of parts, as 
hereinafter more particularly described, and 
then definitely pointed out in the claims. 
Referring now to the details of the drawings, 
A represents a boiler of the ordinary locomo 
tive type, having a water - bridge, B, pref. 
erably provided with a heating-space, b, but 
this heating-space may be dispensed with, 
as shown in the detail, Fig. 5. I have found 
that there is a great tendency in these water 
bridges as heretofore constructed to burn out 
at the extreme upper part, owing to the steam 
which rises there expelling the water there 
from, and to remedy this is the main object of 
my invention, which I accomplish by means of 
the devices now to be described. In the ex 
treme upper end of the bridge I arrange a 
pipe, C, having its upper side slotted for its 
whole length, and connect it to the boiler at its 
opposite ends by the pipes D D'. Through 
the pipe D and a stuffing-box, d, at one of the 
elbows runs a rod, E, supplied with a scraper, 
F, (see Figs. 2 and 5,) which, if moved back 
ward and forward occasionally, Will keep the 
slot in the pipe clear. Through the other con 
necting-pipe, D', runs a small pipe, G, (see 
Fig. 6,) closed by a petcock, g, which allows 
the air confined in the highest point of the 
water-bridge to escape when the boiler is be 
ing filled with water, 
45 
SO 
25 
35 
At the lower end of the water-bridge are two 
pipes, H H', which connect the lower parts of 
the boiler and the water - bridge. In these 
pipes work right and left hand screws I I, 55 
which, as they are revolved by the gearing J, 
worked by a small engine, K, create a strong 
current of water from the boiler through the 
water-bridge and into the top of the pipe C, 
from whence it passes through the pipes D D'' 60 
into the upper part of the boiler. 
Instead of making the water-bridge in the 
form shown in Figs. 1 or 5, I may sometimes 
make it with an extension, B, as shown in 
Fig. 3, with tubest, through which the pro- 65 
ducts of combustion may pass on their way to 
the main tubes L. 
To enable the products of combustion to ob 
tain access into and pass out of the heating 
space b, and to provide additional heating 
surface, I provide the water-bridge with tubes 
b'b', so arranged that the products of com 
bustion must take a circuitous course in its 
passage through the heater, as shown by the 
IOWS 
Instead of making the screws or circulating 
apparatus force the water directly into the 
water-bridge, the screws may be worked in a 
separate tube, MI, which is connected with the 
lower end of the water - bridge and passes 
around and behind the furnace, as shown in 
dotted lines in Fig. 1, from whence it is con 
nected with the boiler by a pipe, N. The screws 
in this case are preferably operated by the ar 
rangement of gearing shown in Fig. 4, in which 
O is a pinion on the shaft of the screw, which 
meshes in a spur-gear, P, mounted on a shaft, 
Q, which works through a stuffing-box, R, in 
the side of the casing S. This shaft Q carries 
another and larger wheel, T, which meshes 
with a pinion, U, on a shaft, W, to which mo 
tion is given by a small independent engine, 
W, by which arrangement the speed of the 
shaft that runs through the stuffing-box R is 
greatly reduced, notwithstanding that the screw 
is given a tolerably rapid motion. It will be 
seen that by this construction a continual forced 
circulation of the water in the bridge is caused 
by the screws forcing the water from the boiler 
through the water-bridge and out at the slot 
ted pipe C, whereby the top of the bridge 
is not only prevented from burning, but there 
95 
8. 
9O 
IOC) 
 
2 
368,624 
I5 will not stop the circulation. 
is induced a better circulation through the 
boiler, whereby its steaming capacity is very 
largely increased. 
For convenience in repacking the stuffing 
5 box R, and for other purposes, I provide the 
pipes with gate-valves XXX, as shown in 
Fig. 4; but they are not absolutely necessary 
to the operation. 
It is evident that any convenient means for 
to turning the screws may be employed, and I do 
not limit myself to the plans shown. It is also 
evident that should the screws be stopped for 
any purpose there will be a circulation through 
the water-bridge, as the screws, when at rest, 
I do not intend to limit myself to screws for 
driving the water into the water-bridges, as it 
is evident that other water-impelling devices 
may be employed, if preferred; nor do I in 
tend to limit myself to screws of opposite twist, 
as a single screw may be employed, if desired, 
in which case I should prefer to arrange it as 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3. 
Having thus described what I now consider 
25 the preferable plans of carrying out my inven 
tion, but without thereby limiting myself to 
the construction shown, what I claim as new 
S 
1. In combination with the water-bridge of 
3o a steam-boiler, a water-impelling device, as I, 
to create a forced circulation through said 
bridge, substantially as described. 
' 
2. In combination with the water-bridge of 
a boiler, one or more screws working in the 
path of the water in its passage from the boiler 35 
to the water-bridge, substantially as described. 
3. In combination with the water-bridge of 
a boiler, multiple screws of opposite twist 
working in the path of the water and an inde 
pendent engine for operating the same, sub- 4o 
stantially as described. 
4. In combination with the water-bridge of 
a boiler, the slotted pipe C and a rod, E, hav 
ing a handle at one end and a scraper at the 
other, working through the slot in the pipe C 45 
and over the top thereof, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. In combination with a water-bridge, B, 
having a pipe extending to the outside of the 
boiler, said pipe provided with an internal pipe 5o 
having one end terminating in the highest part 
of said bridge and its outer end provided with 
a petcock, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
presence of two witnesses, this 1st day of Jan 
uary, 1887. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature, in 55 
HENRY STANTON. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM WILSON, 
J. W. HOLLINGSWORTH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368724.txt	D 29 - 1 13 
D2 S75 
A U 
XR 
EX 
36 S. 724 
 
E, LOUCKS. 
BALL PLAYER'S GLOWE. 
Patented Aug. 23, 1887. 
(No Model.) 
No. 368,724, 
 
Zozzz zaaaaa. 
2%W (12a2a. 
Zaa/e7222r 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICF. 
EIDW IN LOU (KS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO VES, LA RESLEE N. ("()., 
OF SAMIE PACE. 
BALL-PLAYER'S GLOVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 368,724, dated August 23, l887. 
Application filed April 25, 187. Seri; No. 2:43, 3s. No nil ).) 
O 
To at 7 won it 7 at conce77. 
Be it known that I, EDWIN LOUCKs, of New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Ball. Players' Gloves, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The special object of this improvement is to 
produce a simple, cheap, and inexpensive 
glove or protector for the hands of ball-play 
O'S, 
I will describe in detail a ball-player's glove 
embodying my improvement, and then point 
- Out the novel features in a claim). 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front view of a glove enodying my in 
provelinent. Fig. 2 is a back view of the sane. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre. 
Sponding parts in both figures. 
A lesignates a piece of leather or other suit 
able material, which is shaped to approxi 
mately conform to the palm of the hand. 
I3 designates a strap, preferably made of 
elastic material-such, for instance, as cloth 
having india-rubber woven into it. This strap 
extends from the back of the piece A, and is 
adapted to extend around the hand, so as to 
Secure the piece A in place at the front of the 
palm of the hand. This strap B is fastened to 
the piece of leather A by metallic fastenings 
or rivets (t. As shown, these fastenings or riv 
cts are of the kind known as hollow rivets, be 
ing made in the form of eyelets, but they may 
be of other forn. 
C designates a strap, which may be of leather. 
; It is intended to pass around the thumb. Its 
ends are secured to the piece A. It extends 
3O 
from the back of this piece A. At one eld it 
is secured to the piece Aly one of the last en 
ings or rivets (t. At the other end it is secured 
by a rivet, b, to the piece A. The fastening ()' 
rivet b may be like the fastenings or rivets it. 
l) designates a strip, which may be male of 
soft leather, and which is considerally longer 
than the piece A is will. It is fastened at 
intervals to the piece A in such nailler as to 
form loops between the points of connection 
thereto. Through these loops the finge's mily 
be passed. The connection hetween the strip 
I) and the piece A is nale ly fast (inings or 
rivets c. These fastenings or rivets may be 
like the fastenings or rivets it and l. 
at enabled to pro 
duce a glove for all - players which will be 
serviceable, cheap, and extremely durable, he 
cause the metallic fastenings (or rivets for in a 
connection between the parts which may le. 
easily and cheaply made and will reclude 
them from being easily separated. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Pateni, is 
A ball-player's glove comprising a piece of 
leather or other suitable material, A. adapted 
to cover the pall of the haci, a looped stra), 
as D, Secured at the ends all let W (in the 
loops to the piece A by rivets, a stra), as 13, 
and a strap, as C, also secured to the licce A 
by rivets, substantially as specified. 
By my improvement 
EI) WIN LOUCKS. 
Witnesses: 
M A U RICE J. I.O.A (I, 
ID. II. I) RSC'()I.i. 
O 
S 5, 
Go 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368824.txt	(No Model.) 
J. GER ARD, 
MEAT CUTTER, 
2 sheets-sheet l, 
No. 368,824, 
Patented Aug. 23, 1887. 
2 
Z27 2. 
C 
s 
Erz Z, fisz, 
 
 
- 
WS 
Z 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
( No Model.) 
J. GER ARD. 
MEAT CUTTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 368,824. 
Patented Aug. 23, 1887, 
   
 
 
 
  
 
2ZZZ22zzzzzzzzzz 
M 
% 
Z2 2 
tA 
2 2 
2 
2 
--- 
SN 
SSSSS 
2 %ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
2 
Z 
77 
B 
Z2 zzza2 
 
 
 
A. 
SYS r 
% NN's ras 
 
2 
s 
22zZ. 
2 
22 
N 
2ZZZZZ2ZZ2ZZZZZ2zzzzzzzzzzzz) 
2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN GFRARD, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO LANDERS, 
FRARY & CLARK, OF SAME PLACE. 
MEAT. CUTTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 368,824, dated August 23, 1887. 
Application filed May 16, 1887. Serial No. 238,290. (No model.) 
To all whon, it Tay conce77: 
Beit known that I, JoHN GifRARD, of New 
Britain, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented a new Improve 
5 ment in Meat - Cutters; and I do hereby de 
clare the following, when taken in connection 
with accompanying two sheets of drawings 
and the letters of reference marked thereon, 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
Io same, and which said drawings constitute part 
of this specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a delivery-end view of the ma 
chine; Fig. 2, a side view; Fig. 3, a top view; 
Fig. 4, a longitudinal central section showing 
15 the arbor and perforated cylinder in partial 
side view; Fig. 5, a delivery-end view of the 
machine; Fig. 6, a longitudinal central section 
through the case, showing the ribs on its sur 
face; Fig. 7, a transverse section through the 
2o perforated cylinder and the case; Figs. 8, 9, 
and 10, modifications. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
machines for cutting or mincing meat or simi 
lar plastic substances, and particularly to that 
25 class which consist of a cylindrical case hav 
ing a hopper at one end for the introduction of 
the meat, with a revolving arbor concentri 
cally in the case, carrying a spiral or screw 
like rib as a means for forcing the meat 
3o through the case, and the case provided with 
spiral ribs of a different pitch from the spiral 
blade of the arbor, whereby as the meat or 
material is forced through the case it is more 
or less disintegrated by the action of the re 
35 volving spiral rib and the stationary ribs in 
the case, and in which some means is provided 
at the delivery end for final action upon the 
meat to reduce it to its proper minced or cut 
up condition. 
Various devices have been employed at the 
delivery end of the machine as a means for 
the supplemental or final cutting. In some 
cases it has been a perforated plate forming 
the delivery end of the case, with a revolving 
45 cutter,in connection with the arbor, adapted to 
work across either the outside or inside of the 
perforated plate, or both, so that as the meat, 
under the action of the forcing device, is driven 
through the perforations the revolving cutter, 
so acting in connection with said perforations, 
severs the portions of the meat which enter or 
4o 
protrude through the perforations in the plate, 
and thus produce the final cut or mincing op 
eration. In other cases stationary cutters have 
been arranged in the case at the delivery end 55 
and revolving cutters arranged upon the arbor 
to work in connection with the said stationary 
cutters to mince the meat. 
The object of my invention is to dispense 
with such cutters, whereby the machine is to 
simplified, a less number of parts required, 
the cost of manufacture reduced, and the ca 
pacity of the machine increased; and it con 
sists, essentially, of a case and a forcing de 
vice adapted to force the material through the 65 
case, with a revolving hollow cylinder arranged 
within the case at its delivery end, the axis of 
which hollow cylinder is longitudinally in the 
case, the cylinder perforated, and the sur 
rounding portions of the case provided with 7o 
ribs, against which said perforated cylinder 
will work, the said forcing device adapted to 
force the material into the space between the 
surface of said cylinder and the walls of the 
case and into the perforations of the cylinder, 75 
so that the perforations in the revolving cyl 
inder will Work in connection with the Sur 
rounding ribs in the case as cutters to cut off 
the portions of the material which are so 
forced into the perforations in the cylinder, 8o 
as more fully hereinafter described. 
A represents the case, which is preferably a 
hollow cylinder. Near one end it is provided 
with a hopper, B, by which the material to be 
cut or minced may be introduced. The cyl- 85 
inder is substantially closed at its one end, C, 
and through this end an arbor, D, is arranged 
longitudinally and concentrically through the 
case, the outer end of the arbor being adapted 
to receive a crank or other device, by which 9o 
rotation may be imparted to the arbor. At 
the other end of the arbor it terminates in a 
hollow cylinder, E, concentric with the axis 
of the arbor, and which extends through that 
end of the case, and so as to take a bearing 95 
therein for the support of that end of the ar 
bor, the case being closed around this hollow 
cylindrical portion E. 
Between the hopper end of the case and the 
hollow cylindrical portion E the arbor is pro- Ioo 
vided with a spiral rib, F, and the interior of 
the case is provided with spiral ribs G, the 
 
368,824 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
pitch of which should be greater than that of 
the pitch of the spiral rib on the arbor, as seen 
in Fig. 6. The spiral rib of the arbor is of a 
diameter corresponding to the internal diame 
ter of the ribs G, so that the spiral rib F may 
work in substantially close contact with the 
spiral ribs G in the case. This arrangement 
of the spiral rib on the arbor and the spiral 
ribs in the case is a well-known construction 
in meat-cutting machines. 
The diameter of the cylindrical portion Eis 
somewhat less than the internal diameter of 
the portion of the case which surrounds it, so 
that between the surface of the cylindrical 
portion E and the surrounding wall of the 
case is a concentric chamber, H. Upon the 
inner surface of this chamber one or more ribs, 
I, are formed, (see Figs, 6 and 7,) preferably 
in a longitudinal line, and which extend to the 
surface of the hollow cylindricai portion E, 
and So that that cylindrical portion will re 
volve in substantially close contact with the 
said ribs, 
The cylinder E is perforated with numerous 
holes, a, of a size corresponding to the work 
required. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The meat or material to be cut or minced is 
introduced through the hopper B in the usual 
manner. The blade of the revolving arbor re 
ceives the meat and forces it through from the 
receiving end of the cylinder. In its passage, 
and under the action of the spiral blade of the 
arbor and the ribs in the case, it is more or 
less disintegrated. The spiral blade of thearbor 
forces it toward the delivery end, and finally 
into the chamber or Space H in the case sur 
rounding the revolving hollow cylinder E, and 
this force causes the meat to enter the perfo 
rations in the revolving cylinder, and as the 
cylinder revolves the meat is brought into 
contact with the stationary ribs in the case, 
which ribs, in connection with the perfora 
tions in the cylinder, serve as cutters, so that 
the portions of meat which have been forced 
into the perforations in the cylinder are sev 
ered from the mass and drop into the cylinder, 
the perforations being again immediately 
filled by the pressure upon the meat, so that 
under the constant revolving cylinder and the 
constant forcing the perforations are constantly 
filled and the cutting continued, the meat pass 
ing out at the open end of the cylinder E in a 
completely cut-up or minced condition. 
The body of the arbor gradually increases 
in diameter from the receiving or hopper end 
to the hollow cylinder, as indicated in Fig. 4, 
so as to make the passage of the meat into the 
chamber with leSS resistance than would be the 
case were the body of the arbor of equal di 
ameter throughout and the entrance to the 
chamber abrupt. 
Preferably the cylindrical portion Eis made 
tapering outward and the working-gurface of 
the surrounding ribs of corresponding shape, 
as clearly seen in Fig. 4. The end C of the 
case is made removable, so as to open that end 
of the case; and as a convenient means for se 
curing the removable end the case is con 
structed with a projecting hook, L., upon each 
side, and the end Cisconstructed with projec 
tions M, each carrying a headed screw, O, 
adapted to engage the hooks IL on the case, as 
seen in Fig. 2, so that by imparting a partial 
rotation to the end C, as indicated in broken 
lines, Fig. 1, it will be disengaged from the 
hooks L, and so as to be readily removed, and 
when so removed the arbor, with the cylinder, 
may be readily withdrawn from that end of 
the case for cleaning and other purposes. 
By means of the screws O the head may be 
moved longitudinally into or out of that end 
of the case, and the arbor being constructed 
with a shoulder to bear against the inner sur 
face of the end C, as seen in Fig. 4, such ad 
justment of the head will produce a corre 
sponding adjustment upon the arbor, so that 
the tapering hollow cylinder may be forced 
into closer contact with the surrounding ribs 
or withdrawn for greater freedom, as occasion 
may require, thus producing an adjustment of 
the connecting devices. 
For ordinary work I prefer the spiral rib as 
a forcing device, and this may be with or with 
out the internal ribs on the case, such being a 
common construction in this class of cutters; 
but I may substitute for the spiral rib a piston, 
as indicated in Fig. 8, as a forcing device. In 
that case it will be better to apply an independ 
ent arbor to the cylinder, extending from that 
end of the case, as also seen in Fig. 8, by which 
revolution may be imparted to the revolving 
cylinder; but in the employment of a piston 
as the forcing device there will not be the pre 
liminary cutting or disintegration of the meat 
before it reaches the cutting-cylinder. I there 
fore do not wish to be understood as limiting 
the invention to any particular forcing device 
in the case to drive the material through the 
perforations in the revolving cylinder. 
Instead of making the perforated cylinder 
tapering, it may be made of equal diameter, as 
also seen in Fig. 8; but the tapering is prefer. 
able, because it permits adjustment. 
The cylinder may be made as a separatepart, 
independent of the arbor, as indicated in Fig. 
S, or it may be made as an integral part of the 
arbor, as seen in Fig. 4, the latter being de 
sirable when the arbor is constructed to form 
the forcing device, as seen in Fig. 4. In any 
case the inner end of the cylinder is preferably 
closed. 
In the chamber surrounding the perforated 
cylinder the ribs may be parallel with the axis 
of the cylinder, or may be in spiral shape, as 
seen in Fig. 9. 
In some cases it may be desirable to impart 
a more rapid revolution to the cylinder than 
to the arbor. In such case the cylinder will 
be made independent of the spiral portion of 
the arbor, the said spiral portion of the arbor 
made tubular, and the cylinder provided with 
an arbor which will extend through the tubu 
lar arbor, and at the power end of the machine 
75 
85 
90 
95 
OO 
IOS 
C 
If 5 
I 25 
368,824 
3 
the two arbors provided with independent 
driving devices, as indicated in Fig. 10. Un 
der this arrangement a differential velocity 
may be imparted to the forcing-arbor and the 
cutting-cylinder, or the arbor may extend from 
the cylinder in the opposite direction, as seen 
in Fig. 8, the power being applied to the ar 
bors at their respective ends of the case. 
I claim 
1. In a machine for cutting meat and simi 
lar purposes, the combination of a case to re 
ceive the material to be cut, a revolving perfo 
rated hollow cylinder in the delivery end of 
said case, the case constructed with a chamber 
around said revolving cylinder and the walls. 
of said chamber constructed with one or more 
longitudinal ribs extending substantially to the 
perforated surface of said hollow cylinder, and 
a forcing device adapted to force the material 
in the case into the chamber surrounding said 
cylinder and through the perforations in said 
cylinder, substantially as described, the perfo 
rations of said cylinder acting in connection 
with the surrounding ribs as cutters to sever 
the material forced into the said perforations. 
2. The combination of a case provided with 
a hopper at one end, through which the mate 
rial may be introduced to said case, an arbor 
concentrically and longitudinally through said 
case adapted to be revolved, the said arbor con 
structed with a spiral rib from the receiving 
end of the case toward the opposite or delivery 
end and the said arbor at the delivery end of 
the case terminating in a hollow cylinder, the 
said cylinder perforated and open at its outer 
end, the case constructed with a chamber 
around said perforated cylinder, and the said 
chamber provided with one or more longitudi 
nal ribs, against which said revolving cylinder 
may work, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a case adapted to re 
ceive the material to be cut, an arbor arranged 
concentrically in said case, said arbor con 
structed with a spiral rib extending from the 
receiving end of the case toward the delivery 
end, the said arbor constructed at the delivery 
55 
end with a hollow cylinder made as an integral 
part of said arbor, the said cylinder opening 
through the delivery end of the case, the said 
cylinder perforated, the case constructed with 5o 
a chamber surrounding said perforated cylin 
der, and the said chamber provided with one 
or more ribs, against which the perforated sur 
face of said cylinder is adapted to work, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination of a case adapted to re 
ceive the material to be cut at one end, a forc 
ing device adapted to force the material re 
ceived in the case toward the delivery end of 
the case, a revolving tapering cylinder in the 6o 
delivery end of the machine and opening there 
from, the inner end of the cylinder closed, the 
case constructed with a chamber surrounding 
said tapering perforated cylinder, and the said 
chamber provided with one or more ribs, 65 
against which the said perforated surface of 
the cylinder is adapted to work, substantially 
as described. 
5. The combination of a case constructed 
with a hopper at one end, through which ma- 7o 
terial may be introduced to the case, an arbor 
arranged longitudinally and concentrically 
through said case, the said arbor constructed 
with a spiral rib extending from said receiving 
end of the case toward the delivery end, the said 
arbor at the delivery end terminating in a hol 
low cylinder, the surface of which within the 
case contracts in diameter outward, the said 
contracting surface of the cylinder perforated, 
the case constructed with a chamber surround- 8o 
ing said tapering surface of the perforated cyl 
inder, and the said chamber provided with one 
or more ribs, against which said perforated sur 
face is adapted to work, the opposite end of 
the case removable and made adjustable 85 
against that end of the arbor, substantially as 
described. 
75 
JOHN GERARD. 
Witnesses: 
ALEX. BEATTY, 
J. C. ATWOOD, 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US368924.txt	(No Model.) 
G. F. KRIEGER. 
FIRE ARM, 
No. 368,924, 
Patented Aug. 23, 1887. 
 
Z22-2 
-1 Sps 
 
SOO) & & 
S s S 
NS 
5 
 
 
 
 
  
9 
Nasasa 
N? O O O O 
4N4a-A 4 
Sas 
 
I 
as 
  
 
S. -4 
O SSR 
53 RS 
P 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE F. KRIEGER, OF SPRING FIELD, ILLINOIS. 
FIRE ARM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 368,924, dated August 23, 1887. 
Application filed April 28, 1887. Serial No. 236,473. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
3 5 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE F. KRIEGER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Springfield, in the county of Sangamon and 
State of Illinois, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Fire-Arms, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to fire-arms and the 
purpose thereof is to provide a shotgun or 
rifle with a group of shot-projecting tubes 
having accurate parallelism and all communi 
cating at the rear with a suitably-constructed 
shell-chamber, whereby the impulse of the 
charge is communicated simultaneously to 
each of the shot-tubes. 
It is also my purpose to improve the con 
struction of multiple barrels of this kind, by 
which a perfectly parallel alignment is secured 
without the necessity of special mechanism by 
which the shot-tubes are formed. 
The invention consists in the several novel 
features of construction and new combinations 
of parts hereinafter fully set forth, and defi 
nitely pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a transverse section, and Fig. 2 is a central 
longitudinal section, of a gun-barrel which con 
tains my invention. Fig. 3 is a cross-section 
of the shell-chamber of Fig. 1. Figs. 4 and 5 
are respectively a cross-section and a central 
longitudinal section of a gun-barrel, showing a 
modified form. Fig. 6 is a section of Fig. 5 
on the line 6 6. Figs. 7, 8, 9, and 10 are cross 
sections and longitudinal sections of two dif 
ferent forms of cartridges. Fig. 11 is a par 
tial section showing the shell loaded with shot 
in place of bullets. Figs. 12 and 13 are re 
Spectively an edge and plan or face view of 
the wad used in the cartridge. Figs. 14 and 
15 are cross-sections of gun-barrels, showing 
different constructions, but both formed in ac 
cordance with my improved method of align 
ment. 
In the said drawings, the reference-numeral 
1 denotes the gun-barrel, formed, preferably, by 
the method of coinstruction hereinafterset forth. 
The barrel contains or consists of a group of 
Separate barrels, 2, having equal diameter, and 
in the rear end of the barrel is a shell-chamber, 
3, formed by boring out the breech and shrink 
ing in a metal cylinder, 4, having an interior 
which is polygonal in cross-section, the num 
ber of sides being proportioned to the number 
of barrels or bores 2. 
I have shown in the drawings a gun having 
a group of seven barrels, and in Figs. 5 and 6 
a group of three barrels only, the diameter of 
the latter being such as to adapt them to the 
use of bullets, for which purpose the barrels 
are provided with a rifle-twist, 5. 
The numeral 6 denotes the shell used with 
the shotgun having seven barrels. This shell 
is polygonal in cross-section, to accurately fit 
the shell-chamber 4, its length being such that 
when its flanged head 7 lies in the counter 
sunk end S of the breech its other end will 
abut against the open rear extremities of the 
barrels. 
The shell is divided into a powder-chamber, 
6", which lies just in front of the head 7, and 
a group of shot-tubes, 9, which must correspond 
in number, diameter, and arrangement With 
the shot-barrels 2, or with the rifled barrels 
when the latter are used. Each charge of shot 
10 is confined by a wad, 11, of felt or other 
suitable material, placed between the load and 
the powder. Holding the load is a Wad, 12. 
(Shown in Figs. 12 and 13.) This wad is com 
posed of a metal disk having cuts 13, running 
inward from its edge, said disk being combined 
with a thin card-board disk, 14. When in 
serted in the barrels, these wads are outwardly 
convexed, as shown in Fig. 11, and their elas: 
ticity not only holds them firmly in place, but 
when discharged they act as scrapers upon the 
wall of the tube. The polygonal form of the 
shell outwardly affords a convenient means 
whereby the shot-tubes 9 may be caused to 
register accurately with the barrels 2. Imay, 
however, construct the shells differently and 
secure the same result in other WayS. 
I have shown a hexagonal shell and a trian 
gular; but I may use an octagonal body, or any 
polygonal shape, provided the polygonal be 
regular. 
As a preferable method of manufacturing 
the gun-barrels shown, I construct them of two 
parts--an outer barrel, 14, and an inner core, 
15, the latter being round or polygonal in 
cross-section, as shown. 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
45 
 
368,924 
alignment and provided with a shell-chamber 
which communicates with all of Said tubes, in 
combination with a shell having shot-tubes 
which register with those of the barrel and a 
powder-chamber common to all of said shot 
tubes, substantially as described. 
2. A shell for fire-arms, composed of a metal 
cylinder having in one end a group of tubes 
for containing the shot and in rear of said 
tubes a powder-chamber common to all, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. A gun-barrel consisting of the external 
hollow shell and a core having a central bore 
and a series of bores formed in and around its 
external surface, said core being arranged 
within and joined to and covered by the ex 
ternal shell, substantially as described. 
4. A gun-barrel consisting of an outer shell 
and a separate inner core shrunk thereinto, 
and having a series of aligned bores of uniform 
diameter formed directly in and around its 
surface which is next the outer shell, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
35 
45 
GEORGE. F. KRIEGER. 
Witnesses: 
AUG. SOHULZE, 
WM. L. GARDNER. 
IO 
My improved manner of construction is as 
follows: I first form in the core 15 a central 
bore, 2, and after being perfectly straightened 
to line, I mill in its exterior surface six equi 
distant slots,2', from which the other bores are 
formed. This enables me to secure a perfect 
alignment of each of the six from the central 
One, and insures absolutely accurate aligning. 
After the core is finished it may be shrunk 
into the barrel 14, or the two may be united 
in any Suitable manner. 
By my invention it will be seen that a num 
ber of separate loads of either small shot or 
bullets may be discharged by a single charge 
of powder, each load being carried by a sep 
arate barrel. 
I may form the group of barrels by making 
each tube separately, arranging them in a gang 
within the outer barrel, and filling in the in 
terspaces by any suitable metal in a molten 
State. 
When the barrel is finished, by boring the 
core 15, milling the slots 2', and then shrink 
ing or welding the core into the outer barrel, 
the said slots are then bored out to exactly the 
proportions of the central bore, 2. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A gun-barrel composed of a group of sep 
arate shot-tubes having similar diameters and 
- 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369024.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. NORCROSS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
DIE FOR METALLIC ROOFING PLATES. 
No. 369,024 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
as . 
W. M. NOR CROSS, 
DIE FOR METALLIC ROOFING PLATEs. 
No. 369,024, 
s 
Patented Aug. 30, 1887. 
 
WITNESSES: 
a2a : -/62 if 
Zz.7. 
NVENTOR 
m 13.2%- 
N, PETERS. isoto-Litrographer, Washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. NORCROSS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR 
TO THE CORTRIGHT METAL ROOFING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
DiE FOR METALLIC ROOFING-PLATEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 369,024, dated August 30, 1887. 
Application filed May 3, 1887. Serial No. 236,920. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whon, it may concerns 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM.M. NORCROss, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
.delphia, county of Philadelphia, State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Dies for Metallic Shingles or 
Roofing-Plates, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in the 
upper and lower dies, together with their ac 
cessories, of power-presses used in the final 
stage of forming interlocking anti-capillary 
margins on metal roofing-plates, being an im 
proved device for giving the interlocking side 
or sides of such plates their final fold, contour, 
and set,' after they have been subjected to 
the initial stage of having the side or sides 
which are to bear them formed by any con 
venient method into Z-shaped folds of suita 
ble widths. By means of my device I pro 
duce, at a single die-pressing operation, out 
of these initial Z-shaped folds a margin 
adapted to receive and interlock with the mar 
rying edge or edges of similar metal roofing 
plates and to form therewith a tight joint, 
this margin consisting of what may be de 
scribed as a slotted tubular socket composed 
of a portion of the plate bent under and com 
pacted with itself, the doubled edge thereof 
turning in a rim toward the nailing-flange, 
while the free or short part of the above 
plication, after a sufficient interval, returns by 
a reverse half-turn in a single thickness out 
ward under this rim, beyond which it extends 
into and forms the nailing - flange aforesaid. 
Subsidiary parallel folds may also, if desired, 
be used in conjunction with the above-de 
scribed Socket, as by forming one upon the 
edge or other convenient part of the nailing 
flange, but, not being essential, will be passed 
here with the mere suggestion. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to 
form such an interlocking marginal socket 
upon a prepared metal roofing-plate at a sin 
gle operation; Second, to form two or more 
such conduits at the same time on a single 
plate, whether they be on adjoining or oppo 
site sides; third, to make the operation auto 
matic; fourth, to form and bend the involuted 
rim constituting one side of the slotted socket 
at the same time and operation, as that in and 
by which the sides and turns of the initial Z 
shaped folds are also brought to their ulti 
mate structural distribution; fifth, to give this 
marginal structure when formed on a metal 
roofing-plate such a set that the relation of 
its parts as a whole will remain constant to 
their established positions when released by 
the separation of the press from the formative 
faces of the dies and their accessories, and, sixth, 
to construct and adapt to press-dies such ac 
CeSSOries as are calculated to form and define 
the inner contour of such a slotted socket. 
Reference being now had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication, and in which similar letters of refer. 
ence refer to corresponding parts throughout 
the several figures, they will be found to illus 
trate the mechanism and adjuncts by which in 
practice I have obtained the above objects 
with most useful results. Of these, Figure 1 
is a plan view of the lower die's acting face. 
Fig. 2 is a like view of the acting face of the 
upper die. Fig. 3 is a vertical section of both 
upper and lower dies, taken onlineXXof Figs. 
land 2. Fig. 3; is an enlarged sectional view 
of the buffer-block and filleted edge of the 
lower die, the forming-swage, and the push 
ing-toes of the upper die, showing their posi 
tion, when the upper and lower dies are close 
together. Fig. 4 is a vertical section of the 
dies, taken on liney y of Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 
5 is a plan or top view of the dies and their 
accessories when assembled for use. Fig. 6 is 
a plan view of the lower side of one of the ac 
cessory formative swages, to which is ap 
pended, by dotted lines, an end elevation of 
the same. Fig. 7 is an inverted transverse 
section of a portion of a metal roofing-plate 
provided with such an interlocking slotted 
socket and a nailing-fange. 
In general, my device consists, when adapted 
to form these interlocking margins. upon ad 
joining sides of a prepared blank, of the follow 
ing parts: A rectangular steel lower die, A, 
Fig. 1, provided upon two adjoining extremi 
ties of its otherwise square plane formative 
surfaces, with two ridges or fillets, LL, which 
lie at right angles to each other and on their 
inner sides, ll, rise vertically from said plane 
surface of lower die, A, their height therefrom 
being equal to the total thickness of the socket 
99 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SC 
369,024 
5 
IO 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
when folded, less the thickness of the plate of 
which it is made. Said fillets LL, moreover, 
have convex slanting backs O O", connecting 
their rounded summits 0 o' with the outside 
edges of the die proper, which, if it extend 
farther than the line formed by the intersec 
tion of these surfaces, serves only to form an 
additional seat, M, Figs. 1, 3, and 4, for an ac 
cessory forming-swage, D, Fig. 6, of which 
more will be said hereinafter. The remaining 
two sides of lower die, A, have stop-rims SS, 
formed by bolting to them (bolts SS, &c.,) thin 
strips of metal, so as to project slightly, as at 
s's, Figs. 3 and 4, beyond its formative face. 
An upper or ram flatter die, B, Fig. 2, is 
provided on its formative face with narrow 
rectangular slots b b, that lie, when the two 
dies are brought together, in the guides of a 
power-press both within and parallel to the 
fillets LL, Figs. 1, 3, and 4. The distance 
that then separates their outer edges, bl, and 
the inner edges, ll, of the fillets L L being 
equal to the major transverse axis of the 
socket that they are adapted to assist in form 
ing, while their length depends upon and cor 
responds with that of the inner or back 
fold thereof. In these slots b b sliding shut 
ters ll), having attached to their upper sides 
at suitable intervals cylindrical disks l'b, &c., 
are fitted. These shutters, when the dies are 
apart, are kept normally protruded from the 
faces of the upper die, B, by the action of 
spiral springs, as shown at i i" of Figs. 3 and 
4. These are maintained under CompreSSion 
by screw-caps II, &c., Fig. 5, Screwed into 
the tapped ends 2 n', &c., of cylindrical holes 
TT, &c., that are bored in line with the major 
longitudinal axis of the slots bib' part way 
through the top of the upper die, B, and at 
right angles to its acting face. They are also 
of such size and interval as to Correspond and 
register with the above-described disks b'l', 
&c., for which the lower ends of these holes, 
as shown in tt, &c., of Figs. 4 and 5, form 
SeatS. 
Accessory forming-swages DD, Figs. 3,3,5, 
and 6, are composed of flat steel plates, that are 
in plan view elongated rectangular parallelo 
grams, but in transverse section wedge-shaped, 
with their thin sides l'ounded off into semi 
cylindrical truncations of a diameter equal to 
the minor transverse axis of the Socket that 
they are adapted to assist in forming, (shown 
in section in the convex semicircles d' d' of 
Figs. 3, 4, and 6,) the length of their wedge 
sides being equal to the length of the flange 
they are adapted to form. These swages D D 
are also provided on one side (which, when in 
use, is the under one) with a groove, d, of Figs. 
3 and 6, and d of Fig. 4, running parallel to 
their said wedge sides, and of such a contour 
and depth as to constitute the female part of 
the fillets LL, with which they are adapted 
to register, save only that the mouths of these 
grooves are wider than the bases of their corre. 
sponding fillets by a space approximately equal 
to two thicknesses of the roofing-plates that 
95 
they are to assist in bending, and also saving 
that the edges formed by the intersection of 
the flat sides of these grooves did and the ad- 7o 
joining plane surfaces of swages DD'in which 
they are formed are slightly chamferred or 
rounded off, the distance between said flat 
sides did and the rounded ends d' d' being 
equal to the major transverse axis of a finished 75 
socket. 
Should it be desired to apply one of these 
swages by hand, I form it, as is best seen in 
Fig. 6, with extended lugs or ears C C upon 
either end thereof, and to bring it into po- 8o 
sition I employ buffer-blocks G G, Figs. 3, 
3, and 5, securely fastened by bolts Q, Q and 
dovetailed tenons of g, engaging with corre 
sponding female parts at either end of the ex 
tended side M of lower die, A. These blocks 85 
are provided on their upper surfaces with par 
allel planes g g, inclining toward the face of 
the lower die and extending at their outer ends 
from it to a height above its general plane 
equal, or preferably more than equal, to the 
joint height of the fillet L and that of the 
above-described initial folds of a blank when 
placed thereon, as indicated at Z in the heavy 
black line P of Fig. 3. The other or inner 
ends of these incline planes g g end in two 
seats distant in a right line from the inner or 
flat side, l, of the fillet L by a space that is equal 
to the shortest distance in a right line from the 
flat side d' of the grooved to the back d" of the 
Swage D plus at least twice the thickness of Icc. 
the metal which is to be folded, said seat being 
formed by the intersection at right angles of 
notching-planes g g of Fig. 3, of which the 
terminal pair tiglie in the same general plane 
and form continuations of the auxiliary seat 
M, Fig. 5. 
In conjunction with the above - described 
buffer-blocks, I secure by bolts e e, &c., to the 
upper or top side of the upper die, B, and just 
Within them and at right angles to the under 
lying shutter-slotb', right-angled downwardly 
pointing pushing-toes F F, provided on their 
lower extremities with planesff", that lie in 
the Same general plane and parallel to but 
projecting below or beyond the plane of the 
formative face of the upper die, B. They, 
moreover, terminate on their sides incarest to 
the die in right-angled notches so constructed 
and located as to form re-entrant angles of 
Sufficient size to clear those portions of the 
Swage D which underlie their ends when said 
swage is brought home to its seat, as herein 
after described. If, however, it is desired to 
make the mechanism entirely automatic, Ise 
curely fasten upon the anvil-bed of the power 
press (see Figs. 4 and 5) vertical pillars KK, 
and by screwing their reduced lower ends, K 
K', into holes tapped therein at equal and con 
venient distances from the side bearing the 
fillet L of the lower die, A, when in position 
on said anvil, the height of these pillars being 
about equal to that of the Summit of this fillet 
L when thus assembled in the press. These 
pillars I connect on a line with the general 
II5 
I 25 
O 
369,024 
3 
O 
IS 
35 
45 
55 
plane face of the lower die, A, with a pivot 
shaft, K, upon which rock-shafts k k' are en 
gaged and carried by means of elongated slots 
k'k. These rock-shafts are of equal lengths 
and extend part way toward the adjacent side 
of the lower die, A. They carry, rigidly se 
cured-to wit, welded-to their inner or un 
slotted extremities, the accessory swage D', 
so that when assembled it lies inserted be 
tween the acting faces of both dies A and 
B, with its wedge side d' pointing between 
them and the side carrying the groove d 
turned toward the lower one, A. To the 
center of the back d of the swage D', I also at 
tach, as by the ring r, one end of a spiral 
spring, R, the other or outer end of which is 
carried off at right angles to said side d' and 
attached under moderate tension to some 
higher and convenient fixed part--as to guide 
of the power-press. In conjunction with this 
device I secure by boltsee, &c., to the top or 
upper side of the upper die B, and just within 
and at right angles to the axis of the underlying 
shutter-slot b', right-angled downward-point 
ing pushing-toes EE, Figs. 4 and 5, provided 
on their lowerinside parts with parallel planes 
cc,inclining outward and downward from their 
beginning or intersection with the inner sides, c' 
c, of said toes, which should likewise be paral 
lel to and equidistant from the nearest side,b, 
of the slot bin the upper die, B, and extend 
ing below the general plane of said dies forma 
tive face to the above-mentioned line of inter 
section with the incline planes c' c' for a dis 
tance at least equal to and preferably greater 
than the thickness of the back or butt end d' 
of the swage D'. 
In order to put the above-described mech 
anism into operation, it is only necessary to as 
semble the several parts, as shown in Figs. 3, 
4, and 5, and to attach the dies in the usual 
way to the ram-head and anvil-sockets of a 
power-press. Then to insert over the seat M, 
face down and between the separated dies, a 
blank metallic roofing-plate that is provided 
on two adjoining sides with suitable Z-shaped 
folds, and otherwise being of prescribed gage 
and dimensions, placing it so that the stop-rim 
S' of the lower die, A, guides one of its unbent 
edges until the other is arrested by the stop 
rim of the opposite side, the exterior fold of 
one of the initial Z-shaped folds at the same 
time sliding along, and as it turns embracing 
the wedge side of the accessory swage D. The 
blank then rests its sides, carrying these folds 
lying upon and projecting slightly beyond the 
fillets LL. The swage Disnext to be inserted 
over the seat Mbetween the outer fold of the re 
maining side, so that its back d" rests upon the 
incline planes g g . The press is then put into 
operation, and upon the separation of the dies 
the roofing-plate is withdrawn by means of the 
handle H. The swage D is, lastly, slid out 
from the convolutions of the margin it has as 
sisted in forming, which, like the adjoining 
one, will be found to be insection, fairly illus 
trated in Fig. 7, of which P is the plate, 'the 
fold compacted upon itself, gy the involuted 
rim, a the rounded back, ) the free side of the 
margin, and N the extension, which constitutes 7o 
the nailing flange. 
Of course in an operation such as above de 
scribed, in which two adjoining sides are thus 
pressed, it is necessary that the corner of the 
plate should be cut away so as not to interfere 
with the bending of the margins; but as this 
is also a matter of necessity, even in the pre 
liminary stage of forming the initial Z-shaped 
folds, and is well understood by sheet-metal 
workers, it is here passed as unnecessary to 
further describe. Moreover, while the pre 
ceding mechanism and mode of operation have 
been gone into in great detail as being the 
best mechanism and way that I have devised 
of producing these results, still all the parts 
therein described are neither essential nor 
necessary to carry the main features of my in 
vention into practical use. 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. As a device for fashioning the rim on the 
doubled edge of the above-described metallic 
roofing - plate socket, the hereinbefore - de 
scribed Wedge-shaped former D, provided with 95 
a longitudinal groove, d, in combination with a 
pair of power-press dies, A and B, one of 
which is provided with a fillet, L, the whole 
adapted to register and interact, substantially 
as hereinbefore described. 
2. As a device for swaging the rim on the 
doubled edge of the above-described metallic 
roofing - plate socket, the hereinbefore-de 
scribed wedge-shaped former D, provided with 
a longitudinal groove, d, in combination with 
a pair of power-press dies, A and B, one of 
which is provided with a fillet, L, and the 
other with a sliding shutter, b, the whole 
adapted to register and interact, substantially 
as and for the purposes hereinbefore de 
Scribed. 
3. In the manufacture of metallic roofing 
plates, a pair of power-press dies, A and B, 
one of which is provided on its acting face 
with fillets LL and guide-stops SS, the other 
being provided on its acting face with sliding 
shutters b b normally protruding from the 
slots b b, which lie, when the dies come to 
gether in use, parallel to but within said fil 
lets, in combination with cuneiform swages D 
D", provided, respectively, with longitudinal 
channels did and truncated wedge ends did, 
substantially as and for the purposes herein 
before described. 
scribed metallic roofing-plate socket, a pair of 
power-press dies, A and B, provided with fil 
lets LL, buffer-blocks G G', shutters bb, and 
pushing-toes E E and FF, in combination. 
with accessory forming-swages D D, provided 
with longitudinal channels did, and beveled 
flanges terminating in rounded edges d', one 
of which formers, D, is further provided with 
extended lugs C C, the bail h, and handle H, 
4. As a device for fastening the above-de- 125 
I I5 
O 
120 
IOO 
369,024 
IO 
for application by hand, while the other is at 
tached to a retractor, (spring R,) and rock 
shafts KK, pivotally connected by the slots 
IX' K, and the pivot-shaft k" to the fixed pil 
lars KK", and adapted to work automatically 
by the interaction of the several parts, the 
whole being substantially as and for the pur 
poses hereinbefore described. 
5. As a device for fashioning the above-de 
scribed metallic roofing-plate sockets, a pair 
of power-press dies of the desired polygonal 
acting face provided thereon with fillets LL", 
guides SS, banking abutments, (the shutters 
b'b",) pushing-toes E E FF', and buffer-blocks 
G G', in combination with two or more acces 
sory forming-swages, DD, provided with lon 
gitudinal channels d d and beveled flanges 
terminating in rounded edges d' d', and one or 
more of which swages, D, being further pro 
vided with a handle, FI, and extended lugs C 
C, are adapted for application by hand, the 
remainder being attached to (spring) retract 
ors R and rock-shafts K Is", pivotally con 
nected by slots l'l and pivot-shafts li" to ad 
jacent fixed pivots, (pillars KK",) and adapted 25 
to work automatically, the whole being sub 
stantially as and for the purposes hereinbefore 
described. 
6. In the manufacture of metallic roofing. 
plate sockets, a pair of power-press dies, A and 
B, of which one, B, is provided on its face with 
a slot, b, and holes TT, &c., in which a shut 
ter, t)", provided with disks b, &c., is normally 
protruded by springs i i", &c., compressed un 
der screw-caps I I, &c., into seats it, &c., 
while the other is provided with a fillet, L, 
having a vertical side, l, and a convex back, 
O, uniting in a rounded summit, o, in combi 
nation with a cuneiform swage, D, provided 
with a groove, d, and rounded truncation d', 
adapted to register with said shutter l', and 
fillet L, substantially as and for the purposes 
herein before set forth. 
35 
WILLIAM M. NORCIROSS. 
Witnesses: 
CHARIES F. ZIEGIER, 
JoSHUA MATLACK, Jr. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369124.txt	 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 369,124, 
T. POWERS. 
CAMERA STAND, 
Patented Aug. 30, 1887. 
N Ns SN 
a %N& 
Ni z-?NY 
 
 
N A 
  
 
 
Z 
in 
T. re. 
e E. 
WITNESSES: 
' 
INVENTOR: 
-6 dayce 
- 
BY Muru s 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS POWERS, OF PERRYVILLE, ASSIGNOR TO JASON C. SOMERVILLE, 
OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
CAMERA. STAND 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 369,124, dated August 30, 1887. 
Application filed May 10, 1887. Serial No.237,755. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS POWERS, of 
Perryville, in the county of Perry and State of 
Missouri, have invented new and useful Im 
5 provements in Camera-Stands, of which the 
ollowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to photographic-cam 
era stands for gallery and other uses, in which 
the bed or platform is made capable of being 
Io raised or lowered and of being adjusted to oc 
cupy different angular positions; and the in 
vention consists in novel constructions of the 
same and in the means and certain automatic 
stops used for operating the bedorplatform, and 
for holding it at its different adjustments, sub 
stantially as hereinafter described, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure1 is a vertical longitudinal section of 
my improved camera-stand, with its bed or 
platform adjusted to occupy an angular posi 
tion relatively to the horizon. Fig. 2 is an end 
elevation of the same, and Fig. 3 a horizontal 
section upon the line acac in Fig. 1. 
A is a stationary frame mounted upon a 
base, B. This frame, which may be an open 
one, serves to guide and receive down within 
it a rising and falling center frame, CC'. 
D is the bed or platform on which the cam 
era, when being used, is placed. Said bed or 
platform is hinged at or near its one end, as 
at b, to the one end of the top or table C of 
the center frame, down on which the platform 
rests when required to occupy a horizontal po 
sition. 
The center frame, C C, and with it the bed 
or platform D, is raised, and its drop, if de 
sired, controlled by turning in a suitable di 
rection a horizontal barrel or shaft, c, on which 
may be fitted a crank or handle, d. This bar 
relor shaft, which is intermediate of the length 
of the stationary frame A, and has its bear 
ings in the upper portion thereofat a suitable 
height from the floor, extends across the frame 
A, and has attached to it the one end of a band 
like strap or other flexible connection, E, 
So which passes down from said shaft, under or 
round a roller, e, in the lower portion of the 
center frame, CC, and up to the top of the sta 
tionary frame A, where it is made fast at its 
Opposite end, so that by turning the shaft ein a 
given direction the flexible band or connec. 55 
tion E will serve to lift the center frame as re 
quired. Said center frame is quickly and au 
tomatically held at any point in its lift by a 
peculiar stop, G, which consists of a lever-like 
Clamp fitted to loosely rock at its inner end 
upon or with a cross-shaft, f, mounted upon 
the upper portion of the stationary frame A. 
The outer or opposite end of said lever clamp 
or stop G is bent and spread to form a free 
strap-like loop, g, that embraces in a loose : 
manner the one upright of the center frame,C 
C. When said center frame is lifted, then the 
fiction of its upright, which passes through 
the loop 9, against or on said loop, will raise 
the clamp or stop G to an approximately hori. 
ZOntal position, or so as to relieve it from 
pressure on the moving upright. So soon, 
however, as the operator ceases to lift the cen. 
ter frame, C C, and releases hold of its lifting. 
shaft, c, then the strap like portion g of 75 
the clamp G will be relieved of all lifting 
force, and its tendency to drop, combined with 
any slight reaction from its raised position of 
the center frame, CC, will cause the loop-like 
end of the clamp G to fall and tightly wedge 
or bear against the upright of the center 
frame, the Weight of the latter, together with 
any superincumbent Weight it may carry, add 
ing to the binding or holding action of the 
clamp. Thus, it will be seen, the tilting clamp 85 
G operates automatically to instantly hold the 
center frame at any height the operator may 
desire. 
When it is required to lower the center 
frame, CC, then the outer or loop end of the 
tilting friction-clamp G is slightly lifted by 
means of a lever, H, pivoted at h to the sta 
tionary frame and connected with the tiltin 
clamp by a link, i. 
- 
The bed or platform D is tilted or adjusted 
to any required angle by means of a prop or 
leg, I, hinged, as at k, to or near the free end 
of the hinged or rocking platform, and ar 
ranged to pass freely down through apertures 
l in the one end portion of the table C of the roo 
95 
45 
25 
30 
35 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
369,124 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
rising and falling center frame, and freely 
through an aperture, m, in a tilting clamp or 
stop, J, pivoted or hinged at its one end, as at 
n, to the center frame. After the bed or plat 
form D has been raised to any desired angle 
and lifting force released from it, then its 
weight and the tendency of it and of the tilting 
friction-clamp J to drop, will cause the pend 
ent prop or leg I to be instantly and auto 
matically gripped by the tilting clamp,there 
by immediately and securely holding the bed 
or platform at its required angle. The mo. 
ment, however, the tilting clamp J is touched 
to raise it, or is slightly raised- -as, for instance, 
by pushing up upon an attached rod, S--the 
clamp is released and the bed or platform D. 
drops. 
. . 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent- 
1. In adjustable stands for photographic 
cameras, the combination of a stationary frame, 
a rising and falling guided center frame car. 
rying the bed or platform on which the cam 
era is to be placed, and an automatic tilting 
clamp or stop having a free strap-like loop 
embracing an upright of the rising and falling 
frame, and which clamp or stop has a central 
arm pivoted to the stationary frame, but oper 
3oating to bind or lock and hold the latterim 
mediately upon lifting force being released 
from the center frame, substantially as speci 
2. In adjustable stands for photographic 
cameras, the combination of the stationary 
frame A, the rising and falling center frame, C 
C, guided in its up-and-down movement by 
said stationary frame, the tilting bed or plat 
form D, carried by said center frame and pro 
fied. 
; ; 
. 
. 
. . 
; 
. 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
; 
; 
. 
. 
20 
25 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
vided with a hinged pendent prop or leg 4o 
passed through an automatic tilting clamp or 
stop and a rod connected to the said clamp or 
stop, and the automatic tilting clamp or stop 
G, having a free strap-like loop embracing an 
upright of the rising and falling frame, and 45 
which clamp or stop has a central arm piv 
oted to the stationary frame, essentially as 
shown and described. . 
3. In adjustable stands for photographic 
cameras, the combination of the stationary 5o 
frame A, the rising and falling guided center 
frame, CC, the tilting bed or platform D, car 
ried by said center frame and provided with 
a hinged pendent prop or leg passed through 
an automatic tilting clamp or stop and a rod con-55 
nected to the said clamp or stop, the barrel or 
shaft c, the flexible lifting band or connection 
E, and an automatic stop adapted to catch or 
hold the center frame upon lifting force being 
removed from it, which stop is provided with 5o 
a free strap-like loop embracing an upright of 
the rising and falling frame, and which stop 
has a central arm pivoted to the stationary 
frame, substantially as specified. 
4. In adjustable stands for photographic. 65 
cameras, the combination, with the rising and 
falling frame C C, and the bed or platform D. 
pivoted or hinged thereto, of the pendent prop 
or leg I, pivoted or hinged to the platform, and 
the automatic tilting clamp or stop J, through 7o 
which passes said leg and the rod connected 
to said clamp or stop, substantially as shown 
. 
and described. . . 
. 
THOMAS POWERS. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
Witnesses: 
HENRY G. KIESLER, 
JAAIES C. NOELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369224.txt	(No Model,) 
E, F, BATCHELDER. 
ICE. WEIOCIPEDE, 
No. 369,224, 
Patented Aug. 30, 1887. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN F. BATCHELDER, OF 
CONCORD, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
CE - VE 
O CRED E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 369,224, dated August 30, 1887. 
Application filed May 25, 1887. 
Serial No. 239,346. (No model.) 
IO 
I5 
25 
35 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWIN F. BATCHELDER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Con 
cord, in the county of Merrimac and State of 
New Hampshire, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Ice-Velocipedes, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
Velocipedes designed to be used onice or snow, 
having means for propelling and guiding 
Somewhat in the same manner as an ordinary 
bicycle; and to these ends the invention con 
sists, essentially, in providing the extremities 
of the front forks and backbone of an ordinary 
bicycle-frame with runners, the front forks be 
ing extended for the purpose. 
It also consists in mounting a propeller 
wheel between the front forks; and my inven 
tion relates more particularly to shielding this 
wheel and bracing the forks with the runners 
in such a manner as to give strength and sta 
bility to the structure. 
Two other important features of the inven 
tion are the manner of mounting the propeller 
wheel and means for limiting the swinging 
movement of the back runner. 
In order that my invention may be more 
fully understood, I will proceed to describe it 
With reference to the accompanying drawing, 
which represents a perspective view of my 
machine. 
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 represent, respectively, 
the front forks, backbone, rear fork, head, 
handles, seat, and step of an ordinary bicycle, 
which, being of ordinary construction and all 
well known, need no specific description. 
A is the propeller-wheel, having hub A', 
spokes a?, and teeth or projections a, the rim 
being designated by A". 
B is the shield for said propeller-wheel, hav 
ing secured to its extremities the runners B 
B', on opposite sides of the wheel A, these 
runners being riveted to enlargements 1' at 
lower ends of the front fork. 
C is the rear runner, carried by the prongs 
C, pivoted at c, and having vertical extension 
c, for limiting its rocking movement. 
The spokes a? of the wheel are screwed into 
the hub and riveted to the rim alternately on 
opposite sides thereof, and the teeth a are tri 
angular in shape, and also riveted alternately 
The shield is supported on the frame by 75 
on opposite sides of the rim. These teeth or 
projections are well adapted to engage the 
surface of the ice or snow, and are made thin, 
though thick enough for strength, to prevent st 
any sidewise movement or slipping of the ma 
chine. The wheel is driven by ordinary cranks, 
to be operated by the feet of the rider. 
In order to insure uninterrupted contact be 
tween the teeth of the wheel and the surface 6o 
of the ice, and also to prevent the weight of 
the machine being borne by the wheel, and 
consequently taken off the runners-as, for 
example, when the machine passes over some 
unevenness in the surface-I provide a verti. 65 
cally-movable bearing for the wheel, which 
consists, essentially, of a block, E, mounted 
on two vertical rods, E. E. E. E", whose ex 
tremities are secured in enlargements 1* in the 
two parts of the fork, and on which the jour- 7o 
nal-block may freely slide. By this arrange 
ment the wheel Will be held in contact with 
the surface merely by its own weight and the 
pressure put upon it by the rider. 
passing the head or joint of the forks through. 
a hole made therein. The extremities of this 
shield are bent down and riveted or otherwise 
secured to the meeting adjacent ends of the 
two front runners, which are brought together 8o 
in such a manner that they spread the desired 
distance apart on the ground, being secured 
in this position by the braces E". These 
braces E" are formed of rods so bent as to ex 
tend downward from the forks at an angle, 85 
their extremities being secured by nuts to the 
extremities of the vertical slide-rods of the 
movable bearing. This arrangement, it will 
be seen, will give strength and stiffness to the 
structure and still not sacrifice an important go 
and necessary feature of velocipedes-viz., 
lightness. The vertical arm on the rear run 
ner-frame is designed to prevent the tipping 
forward of the runner when the same strikes 
any unevenness in the surface. 
I am aware that it is not new to join the 
front and rear runners by a curved rod or bar 
conforming to the shape, and therefore do not 
claim this, broadly; nor is such the equivalent 
of my shield rigidly attached at its center to Ioo 
the joint of the forks, so as to be continually 
over the wheel and extend down in front and 
95 
45 
 
2 
369,224 
35 
45 
55 
E. E., interposed in the forks, of runners on 
which said forks rest, whereby the wheel may 
readily pass over any unevenness, as described. 
4. In an ice-velocipede, the combination, 
with the front forks carrying the movable 
bearings consisting of blocks E and nutted 
rods E, of the braces E", having their ex 
tremities secured by said nutted rods E and 
bent portions secured to the runners, as shown. 
5. The combination, with an ice-velocipede, 
of the runner C, carried by fork CC, which 
has vertical extension c, the whole pivoted in 
fork 3, as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination of forks 1, having in 
terposed vertical rods E" E, braces E'E', se 
cured by nuts on the ends of said vertical rods, 
runners B. B", shield B, wheel A, having the 
movable bearing-blocks E, sliding on rods E, 
and cranks D, with handle 5, saddle 6, and 
backbone 2, having step 7 and pivoted runner 
C, all arranged substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
7. A fork for ice-velocipedes, having the 
arms separated and the parts having enlarge 
ments 1", for making connection with the run 
ners by rivets or screws and to the adjacent 
end of the arm by nutted rods E. E", said 
nutted rods being also adapted to secure the 
ends of braces, as herein shown and described. 
EDWIN, F, IBATCHELIDER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. M. CJIASE, 
W. J. DAVIS. 
5 
O 
behind in such a manner that the rider is pre 
vented from coming in contact with the wheel 
when riding straight forward or turning, or 
even when handling the machine from the 
ground. 
It is obvious that the shield could be secured 
in any convenient way to the braces, though 
it is preferred to gain strength and stability 
by connecting its ends to the ends of the run 
ners, as shown; or the shield might be used 
without the lower connections-as, for ex 
ample, on an ordinary bicycle. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
1. A propeller - wheel for ice-velocipedes, 
consisting of a hub, through the center of which 
is secured an axle, and having screwed into it 
the spokes, the other ends of which spokes are 
riveted alternately on opposite sides of a flat 
metallic rim, to which are also riveted in 
verted-V-shaped teeth, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
2. In an ice-velocipede, the combination of 
the toothed wheel and supporting-frame, sub 
stantially as herein described, with a curved 
shield supported on said frame and having its 
extremities secured to the meeting adjacent 
extremities of the runners, as and for the pur 
Ose set forth. 
3. The combination, with an ice-velocipede 
having a propeller. wheel with bearings inver 
tically-movable blocks E, mounted on rods 
2. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369325.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS DOOLEY, OF TOLEDO, OHIO. 
INCRUSTATION-PREVENTIVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 369,325, dated September 6, 1887. 
Application filed September 24, 1886. Serial No. 214,470. (No specimens.) 
To all tufton, it 7play concern; 
Be it known that I, THOMAs DOOLEY, a citi 
zen of Great Britain, residing at Toledo, in 
the county of Lucas and State of Ohio, have 
5 invented a new and useful Composition of 
Matter to be Used for the Removal and Pre 
vention of Incrustations in Steam-Boilers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My composition consists of the following in 
Io gredients, combined in the proportions stated, 
viz.: caustic soda, 40 Baum, one gallon; po 
tatoes, one pound; sugar, four ounces; sal 
ammoniac, one ounce; Indian meal, three 
pounds. These ingredients are to be thor 
I5 oughly mingled by agitation over a slow fire 
till the compound attains the consistency of 
jelly. 
2O 
In using the above-named composition one 
pound of the compound should be used to each 
ten horsepower of a steam-boiler. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
The herein-described composition of matter 
to be used for the removal and prevention of 
incrustations in steam-boilers, consisting of 25 
caustic soda, potatoes, sugar, sal-ammoniac, 
and Indian meal, in the proportions specified. 
THOMAS DOOLEY. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN T. MAHER, 
WM. HARMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369425.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 369,425, 
 
Patented Sept. 6, 1887. 
N 
G. H. BENJAMIN. 
HEATING APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l, 
A. sa 
f/8 S 
S. 
z2S2E 2 
 
2Z2 
M 
2 
2 
R 
azzzzzz 
% 
; 
2 
2 2 
2222222 
s 
st 
R 
s 
 
s 
w 
v 
N 
A. 
r 
4%- -222/ 
7%-7. 
In ETOR 
7 
(No Model.) 
G, H, BENJAMIN, 
HEATING APPARATUS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 369,425, 
- 
Patented Sept. 6, 1887. 
 
  
  
 
 
& 
IS 
 
 
 
- 
I 
S. 
S S 
S 
N 
S 
l33 
R 
S2ttata aga 
a. 
N S 
S. 
 
RA 
2 
3. 
3. 
2%zzes S% 
2 
 
a22ZZZZZZZZ 
N 
 
 
 
 
S 
s 
S 
R SS 
R 
i. 
2. 
 
2 
2 
3H 
S 
3 
All 
2 
3441?t 
Ef I 
5HT 3.5  
2 
t 
2 
4. 
3. 
3. 
5 
222zza II % y 
BiH (SA 
SH 
- 
2 
2 
3. 
S. 
S 
s 
WITNESSES 
series 
f/WWEMTOR 
2/22-2. 24.1% 
. Peters, Foto-ithographer, Washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. BENJAMIN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
HEAT N G A PPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 369,425, dated September 6, 1887. 
Application filed April 6, 1887. Serial No. 233,940. (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE H. BENJANI IN, 
a resident of the city, county, and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Ilaprovements in Heating Apparatus, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to heating apparatus 
of the class more especially adapted for use 
upon railway-cars or similar vehicles, although 
applicable for heating purposes generally. 
My invention consists in combining with a 
Series of pipes adapted to convey live or ex 
hallst steam, and primarily generated in any 
Suitable boiler, a pipe or pipes located in the 
immediate proximity of said steam-conveying 
pipes and adapted to contain a stationary or 
circulating body of non-freezing liquid such 
as Will absorb the heat of the steam and sub 
Sequently radiate the heat so acquired. By 
means of Such an apparatus and the contained 
body of liquid may store a portion of the 
heat derived from steam generated, for in 
stance, in the boiler of a locomotive-engine at 
tached to a train of cars which are primarily 
heated by the direct radiation of the steam 
and have the stored heat available as a sec 
ondary source of heat to maintain for a time 
the temperature of such cars should the pri 
mary Source of heat-i. e., the steam-be by 
ally reason realdered unavailable. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate my invention, similar letters of reference 
indicate like parts. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal elevation of my 
improved device, showing the arrangement of 
the Steam-pipes and the sealed fluid-drum as 
regards each other. The inclosing-cover for 
the pipes is shown broken away and made 
either of sheet metal or wire-gauze. Fig. 2 is 
a similar view, and shows in place of the sealed 
fluid-drum a pipe or drum through which a 
liquid may be made to circulate. The inclos 
ing-cover for the pipes is shown perforated 
along its base. Figs. 3 and 4 are respectively 
an end view of Fig. 1 and a section on the line 
ZZ of Fig. 2. Figs. 5 and 6 are longitudinal 
Sections of Figs. I and 2, one of the steam 
pipes also being shown partially in section. 
Figs. 7 and 8 are respectively transverse sec 
tions on the line NX of Fig. 5 and Y Y of 
Fig. 6. 
In the drawings four steam pipes, A, are 
shown arranged parallel to each other and so 
as to include between them a drum, B, adapted 
to contain a non-freezing liquid or body, S, 
and preferably a liquid having large storage 
capacity for heat. Thus I may use a solution 
of the acetate of soda or potash or of any other 
neutral or analogous salt. A solution of chlo 
ride of sodium in water does well enough for 
all ordinary purposes. The drum is adapted 
to be hermetically sealed for the purpose of 
preventing the evaporation of the liquid when 
heated. 
Where a solid material is employed in the 
drum, dry sand will be found to be as useful 
as any other substance for the purpose of ab 
sorbing heat, 
The steam-pipes A. are threaded on their 
ends, and are screwed into the tapped holes in 
the cored boxes C at either end. 
D is a steam-pipe connected to one of the 
boxes and to a main steam-pipe from the 
Source of steam-supply, or it may be connected 
directly to the source of supply. The source 
of Supply may be any suitable portable or sta 
tionary boiler, and I may use live or exhaust 
Stean), as is most convenient. 
D is a pipe connected to a steam-trap or to 
a return-pipe to the boiler, so that the water 
of condensation may be conveyed from the 
steam-spaces. The steam-pipes A, which may 
be of any convenient number and arranged in 
any Suitable manner external to the drum B, are 
shown as inclosed in a sheet-metal covering, 
E, the object of which is to confine the radi 
ated heat from the steam-pipes A. to the vicin 
ity of the drum B. The water in the drum is 
thus heated much more quickly than where a 
wire-gauze, F, or perforated metal covering 
C is employed, although both of the latter 
may be used to advantage to create a circula 
tion of air, and so promote ventilation. 
In placing my improved heater upon cars 
running over a long line of road, and which are 
likely to be detained by accident or snow 
blockade, I prefer to so arrange the drums B 
that the liquid may be made to circulate 
throughout the pipe system of the car, when 
influenced by heat generated in any suitable 
device in the car or under it and independ 
ently of the steam system-as, for instance, by 
a stove. 
Figs. 2 to 6 show such an arrange 
Innent as far as the drum is concerned. 
75 
SO 
85 
90 
95 
OC 
IO 
35 
O 
45 
SO 
369,425 
55 
charged with a heat-absorbing material, and 
two or more tubes arranged concentrically 
without and in close relation to said vessel 45 
and adapted to transmit steam or other heat 
ing-fluid, substantially as described. 
2. An improved heater comprising a vessel 
charged with a heat-absorbing material, tWO 
or more tubes in close relation to said vessel 
adapted to receive steam or otherheating-fluid, 
and an inclosing-tube within which said vessel 
and tubes are located, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. An improved heater comprising a vessel 
charged with a heat-absorbing material, two 
or more tubes in close relation to said vessel 
adapted to receive steam or otherheating:fluid, 
and an inclosing perforated covering therefor, 
substantially as described. 
4. An improved heater comprising a vessel 
charged with a heat-absorbing material, two 
or more tubes in close relation with said ves 
sel, and hollow coupling-boxes for connecting 
said tubes together, said tubes and boxes 
adapted to receive steam or other heating 
fluid, substantially as described. 
5. An improved heater comprising a vessel 
charged with a circulating heat-absorbing mal 
terial, two or more tubes in close relation with 
said vessel, coupling-boxes for connecting said 
tubes together, provided with annular steam 
spaces, and openings through the body thereof 
for the passage of the pipes connected with the 
vessel containing the heat-absorbing material, 
said tubes and boxes adapted to receive steam 
or other heating - fluid, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 4th day of March, 1887. 
7 O 
75 
GEO. H. BENJAMIN. 
Witnesses: 
TRAJANO G. ToRRES, 
JAMES F. FOGERTY. 
IO 
IS 
25 
a. 
The connection and arrangement of the sys 
tem of piping with an auxiliary heater is not 
described in this specification, as it forms the 
Subject of a separate application for Letters 
Patent made by me and filed simultaneously 
herewith. 
To the drum Bare connected the pipes HH', 
which pass through the openings C of the 
boxes C, the steam-space I being annular in 
shape when the boxes C are so formed. The 
pipes H may, as stated, be connected to any 
suitable heating device. I prefer, however, 
to use a stove and equalizing-reservoir of the 
well-known Baker type.' 
By means of the arrangement of pipes as 
described all questions of expansion and con 
traction between the pipes, conveying the 
steam and the drum containing the liquid are 
eliminated. The drum is free to move on the 
steam-pipes and the pipes on the drum. 
. The operation of the device is simple. The 
heat of the steam circulating in the pipes A is 
partially radiated throughout the space to be 
heated and partially absorbed by the fluid S 
in the drum. The fluid in the drum, when 
adapted to circulate, is set in motion by the 
acquired heat from the steam, or from the stove 
or heating device in connection with the drum. 
Thus it will be observed that when the 
steam-supply is cut off, the heat absorbed by 
the liquid will be radiated throughout the car 
and will serve to maintain the temperature of 
the car for a considerable time, the length 
of time within which the heat will be radiated 
depending upon the rate of and capacity for 
heat-storage of the fluid in the drum. 
I am aware that a hermetically-sealed pipe 
containing a solution of a salt has been in 
closed in a larger pipe through which steam 
was conducted, and such I do not claim. 
I claim as my invention 
1. An improved heater comprising a vessel 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369526.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. HYDE. 
BUCKLE, 
No. 369,526, 
Patented Sept. 6, 1887. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICR. 
JAMES C. HYDE, OF WEST HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE WEST 
HAVEN BUCKLE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BUCKLE. 
3PI3CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 369,526, dated September 6, 1887. 
Application filed July 18, 1887. Serial No. 244,582. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that, I, JAMES C. HYDE, of West 
Haven, in the county of New Haven and State 
of Connecticut, have invented a new Improve 
5 ment in Buckles; and I do hereby declare the 
following, when taken in connection with ac 
companying drawings and the letters of re?er 
ence marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, and which said 
IC drawings constitute part of this specification, 
and represent, in 
Figure 1, a face view of the buckle, showing : 
the tongue-bar and one end of the frame in 
partial section; Fig. 2, the blank from which 
I5 the tongue-bar is formed; Fig. 3, a transverse 
section of the blank struck into double semi 
circular shape; Fig. 4, a side view of the bar 
complete; Fig. 5, the wire tongues detached; 
Fig. 6, a transverse section through the tubu 
20 lar bar, cutting through one of the openings 
d; Fig. 7, a transverse central section through 
the buckle; Figs. 8, 9, 10, and 11, modifica 
tions. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
25 that class of buckles which consist of a four 
sided frame with a bar longitudinally across 
it midway between its two sides, the said bar 
supported in two ends of the frame and carry 
ing tongues adapted to swing in the frame, 
3O but so as to take a bearing upon one side of 
the frame. In a general and common con 
struction of this class of buckles the tongue 
bar and tongues are cast complete, the ends 
of the bar pointed, so as to take bearings in 
35 the recesses in the ends of the frame. Such 
cast bars and tongues are unavoidably rough 
and the ends of the bar are as unavoidably ir 
regular, which renders the tongues liable to 
displacement from the frame. In another 
4c class the tongue-bar is made a permanent part 
of the frame and the tongues bent around the 
frame, so as to swing thereon. This construc 
tion makes the buckle expensive, as some pro 
vision must be made to prevent longitudinal 
45 play or movement of the tongues upon the 
bar. 
The object of my invention is to simplify 
the construction of the buckle and produce a 
tongue-bar which is certain to be of uniform 
50 length and to form perfectly-shaped points 
 
for the pivots upon which the tongue-bar will 
turn. 
A represents one side of the frame; B, the 
opposite side, upon which the tongues bear; 
C C, the two ends which connect the said two 55 
sides, forming a rectangular frame of common 
construction. Midway between the two sides 
and on the inside of each end of the frame a 
cavity, a, is formed to receive the ends of the 
tongue-bar in the usual manner. 
I make the tongue-bar D from sheet metal. 
To do this I cut a blank from sheet metal, as 
seen in Fig. 2, the length of which is the ex 
treme length required for the tongue bar, and 
the width of the blank corresponding to the cir- 65 
cumference required for the tongue-bar. 
The 
two ends of the blank terminate in two W 
shaped points, b. 
This blank, in suitable dies, 
is struck into semicircular shape each side the 
longitudinal central line, and so as to form two 7o 
semicircles in transverse section, as seen in Fig. 
3. These semicircles continue through the ex 
treme points b b, so that each end of the said 
semicircular portions terminates in the form of 
one-half a cone. Then the two parts are doubled 75 
together, so as to form a complete cylinder 
terminating at each end in a conical point, as 
seen in Fig. 4, so that a tubular bar is pro 
duced having a conical point at each end, 
adapted to set into the recesses at in the frame, 8o 
the said points forming pivots upon which the 
bar may oscillate. The conical ends of the 
tongue-bar are set in the recesses in the frame 
by spreading the frame and then closing it 
upon the conical ends of the tongue-bar in the 85 
usual manner for introducing this class of 
tongue-bars. The tongues, which are usually 
two for this class of buckle, under this con 
struction are made from Wire, as seen in Fig. 
5, the wire being bent into U shape, the two 
legs pointed. Through one side of the tubular 
bar apertures did are formed, corresponding 
to the two legs of the U-shaped tongue-piece, 
as seen in Fig. 4. These may be made in op 
posite sides of the blank, as seen in Fig. 2, 
one-half in each side, so that when doubled to. 
gether, as in Figs. 4 and 6, the notches in the 
two sides will complete the openings. As the 
two sides are doubled together the body por 
tion of the tongue-piece is laid between them, loc 
95. 
9O 
2 
369,526 
with the legs projecting therefrom, as seen in 
Fig. 1. The closing of the tube around the 
two legs serves to confine the tongue-piece in 
the bar and make it a permanent part thereof. 
The length of the legs of the tongues is such 
as to permit the tongues to rest upon the bar 
B of the frame, as seen in Fig. 7. 
Instead of making the openings in the edges 
of the tongue-piece, the openings may be made, 
Say, centrally, as indicated in broken lines, Fig. 
2, and as also seen in Fig. 8. By this con 
struction the tongue-bar is extremely light and 
strong and the pivot-points are of the nicest 
construction, and the uniform length of the bar 
is insured, thereby possessing advantages over 
a cast-metal tongue-bar. 
The tongues nuay be formed as a part of the 
tongue-bar, as seen in Figs. 9 and 10, the 
tongues projecting from one side of the blank, 
as seen in Fig. 9, and so that when the parts 
of the bar are brought into the tubular shape, 
as seen in Fig. 9, the tongues will project 
therefrom, substantially as do the wire tongues 
before described. While therefore preferring 
the bent-wire tongue-piece, I do not wish to 
be understood as limiting the invention to that 
particular construction, the essential feature 
of the invention being the tubular tongue-bar 
terminating in conical ends. 
If but a single tongue is required, the wire 
may be bent in L shape, as seen in Fig. 11, 
and this may be the shape for the two tongues, 
if required, and if more than two tongues are 
required this same shape will permit the em 
ployment of as many tongues as are desirable, 
it being understood that the openings are made 
in the tubular bar according to the number of 
tongues required, and that the tongues are 
bent into right-angular shape, so as to form a 
body to be inclosed by the tubular bar; or if 
the tongues are made an integral part of the 
bar, the blank is cut accordingly. 
I claim 
1. The herein-described buckle, consisting 
of a frame composed of two sides connected 
by ends, the inner side of the respective ends 
midway between the two sides constructed 
with recesses to receive the tongue-bar, com 
bined with the tongue-bar of tubular shape, 
55 
65 
75 
the said tubular bar terminating at each end 
in conical points and the bar provided with 
one or more tongues projecting therefrom 
adapted to oscillate in the frame with the 
tongue-bar and to bear upon the frame, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A buckle consisting of a frame of rect 
angular shape, the two ends of which are con 
structed upon their inner side with recesses to 
form bearings for the ends of the tongue-bar, 
combined with the tongue-bar constructed 
from sheet metal, the blank therefor being in 
width corresponding to the circumference of 
the bar and terminating at each end in two 
V-shaped points, the portions of the blank 
each side the longitudinal central line struck 
into semicircular shape in transverse section, 
and the said blank doubled to bring the oppo 
site edges together and the pointed ends one 
over the other, so as to form a tubular bar 
with conical ends, the said bar provided with 
tongues adapted to bear upon the frame, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. A buckle consisting of a frame of rect 
angular shape, the two ends of which are con 
structed upon their inner side with recesses to 
form bearings for the ends of the tongue-bar, 
combined with the tongue-bar constructed 
from sheet metal, the blank therefor being in 
width corresponding to the circumference of 
the bar and terminating at each end in two 
V-shaped points, the portions of the blank 
each side the longitudinal central line struck 
into semicircular shape in transverse section, 
the blank also constructed with openings cor 
responding to the number of tongues with 
which the buckle is to be provided, one or 
more tongues made from wire bent into right 
angular shape, the said blank doubled around 
the body portion of the tongue, so as to bring 
opposite edges of the blank together and the 
pointed ends one over the other and so as to 
form a tubular bar with conical ends, substan 
tially as described. 
JAMES C. HYDE. 
Witnesses: 
FRED C. EARLE, 
J. H. SHUMWAY. 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369626.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. WRIGHT 
TRANSOM LIFTER 
No. 369,626, 
7%. Z 
Patented Sept. 6, 1887. 
729. 2. 
 
 
 
 
E. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GRAN VILLE W. WRIGHT, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
SARGENT & COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TRANSOM-LFTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 369,626, dated September 6, 1887. 
Application filed July 5, 1887. Serial No. 243,336. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
5 
25 
35 
45 
to all, whon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, GRAN VILLEW.WRIGHT, 
of New Haven, in the county of New Haven 
and State of Connecticut, have invented a new 
Improvement in Transom-Lifters; and I do 
hereby declare the following, when taken in 
connection with accompanying drawings and 
the letters of reference marked thereon, to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
and which said drawings constitute part of this 
specification, and represent, in 
Figure l, a top view of the arm with the eye 
attached as for the right-hand side of the tran 
som; Fig. 2, the same arm as inverted for the 
left-hand side of the transom, the eye portion 
being in section; Fig. 3, a side view of the eye 
detached. Fig. 4 represents the method of 
forming the arm directly upon the eye. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
that class of transom-lifters which consist of 
an arm fixed to the transom and extending out 
ward therefrom, and to which a system of rods 
and levers is applied, so that through said arm 
the transom may be opened or closed. A con 
nection is made to the arm by a joint, the axis 
of which is parallel with the transom, and this 
connection must be made at one side of the 
edge of the transom; hence the arm is neces 
sarily made of substantially L shape, and be 
cause of this - shape the lifter is adapted only 
to one side of the transom unless the lifter be. 
made convertible. This joint is usually made 
in the form of an eye on the upper end of a 
lever or rod Set on to a trunnion formed on the 
end of the arm, the eye being secured to the 
arm by various devices. To make the arm con 
vertible from right-hand to left-hand side of the 
transom the eye must be inverted. The at 
tachment of the eye to the arm, So as to pre 
vent its accidental displacement, is a very con 
siderable part of the cost of manufacture. 
The object of my invention is to make a con 
vertible arm and simplify the connection be 
tween the arm and the system of rods or levers. 
In the illustration, Fig. 1, A represents the 
arm as set, say, for the right-hand side of the 
transom; B, an eye hung to the outer end of 
the arm, and C the rod which extends from 
the eye. 
In Fig. 2 the same letters indicate the same 
parts as set for the left-hand side of the tran 
SOI), 
- 
To hang the eye upon the arm, I first cast the 
eye B of the requisite shape, as seen in Fig. 3, 
with a hole through it for the trunnion or bear 
ing of the arm. The shank D of the eye is screw 
threaded, to receive the corresponding screw 
threaded end of the rod C. I form the trun 
nion E with a collar, a, at the inner end of the 
trunnion, and a like collar, b, at the outer end 
of the trunnion, integral with the arm itself, 
the collars being respectively each side the 
eye B. To thus make the collars integral with 
the arm, I form a mold, as indicated in Fig. 4, 
in which a cavity is formed corresponding to 
the arm A, the trunnion E, and the collars a b, 
having previously cast the eye B. Into this 
mold the eye B is set, as indicated in Fig. 4, 
in its proper relation to the cavity in the mold. 
Then metal is poured in to fill the mold, which 
flows through the eye and into the cavities on 
the sides of the eye, to form the respective col 
lars, the eye being first treated to a coating of 
plumbago or other suitable material to pre 
vent the too close contact of the metal poured 
therein. When removed from the flask, the 
eye hangs freely upon the trunnion of the arm 
and securely held there by the respective col 
lars a, b, and from which it is impossible to re 
move it without destroying the arm. This 
makes a simple and extremely cheap joint, yet 
one which is not liable to accidental derange 
ment, and it is easily convertible from right to 
left by simply inverting it, as from the position 
in Fig. 1 to that in Fig. 2, the shank of the eye 
permitting it to rotate on the rod C, which con 
nects it with the system of levers and rods for 
the operation of the transom. 
I claim 
The herein-described improvement in tran 
Som-lifters, consisting of the eye B, adapted to 
receive the end of the rod C, and the arm A, 
having its outer end extending through the 
eye to form the trunnion E, and with collars a 
b on the respective sides of the eye, the said 
trunnion and collars formed as an integral part 
of the arm, Substantially as described. 
GRAN WILLE W. WRIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
WM. S. CookE, 
CHAS. L. BALDWIN. 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369726.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 369,726, 
WITNESSES 
E., LLOYD, 
JAR FOR WELL BORING, 
Patented Sept, l3, 1887. 
%NW 7 W. 
% Z% Nas 
A. 7 %N 
N 
Z2-2 af, z - 
1/WWEA/TOR 
A TORNEY S. 
N. pet ERs, Photo-Lithcgrapher, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EVAN LLOYD, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO 
JUNIUS A. McCORMICK AND WILLIAM JOHNSTON, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
JAR FOR WELL-BORING. 
SPECIFICATION cIrning part of Letters Patent No. 369,726, dated September 13, 1887. 
Application filed August 13, 1886. Serial No. 210,791. 
(No model.) 
wa" 
To all, whon, it navy concern. 
Be it known that I, EVAN LLOYD, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Pittsburg, in 
the county of Allegheny and State of Penn 
5 Sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Jars for Well-Boring; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
Io drawings, which form part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in jars for well-boring, and has for its object 
to provide a jar which shall be simple in form 
I5 and construction, and less liable to become 
broken or fractured than the jars now in use. 
It will be understood that this jar is not in 
tended to aid in imparting a blow to the tool, 
but simply to loosen the same from its inn 
2O pression in the stone. Various devices have 
been constructed to accomplish this end, but 
have been unsuccessful for the reason that they 
have been imperfectly made. . In most cases 
the jars have been formed in several pieces, 
25 and the long steel sides joined to the pins and 
boxes (usually made of iron) by welding. At 
this point it has been found in practice that 
the jar will break, causing an untold amount 
of trouble in fishing the tool out of the well 
3C and a great expenditure of time and money. 
The liability of the jar to break is usually 
the result of welding two strips of steel into 
one common head, which produces more or 
less straining in one of the sides; hence when 
35 ever a weld of this character is made the jar 
is weakened accordingly. 
I propose to avdid all the above - named 
difficulties by forming a jar out of two solid 
pieces of steel, each forged to the proposed 
4o shape, and uniting the two portions in such a 
manner that there will be no danger of the 
same becoming separated, or by forming the 
boxes and eyes of iron and welding on the 
square, where there will be no danger of the 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
illustrating my improvements, Figure 1 is a 
side view of my improved jar; Fig. 2, a simi 
lar view showing the grooves in which the 
so lugs are free to play; Figs. 3 and 4, views show 
45 weld in any manner weakening the tool. 
In accordance with my invention I construct 55 
ing the two portions separated for the sake of 
clearness; and Fig. 5, a sectional view on line 
acac of Fig. 2, showing only a portion of the 
Jal'. 
the jar in two solid pieces and forge each to 
the approximate form required for connection 
and practical use. That portion, member, or 
section of the jar to which the sinking-bar is 
to be attached, and which is designated by let- 6o 
ter A, I form by reducing a bar to an elon 
gated cylindrical shape of suitable dimensions, 
having the square neck i and the eye or socket 
E. I then flatten that portion which is to be 
coupled to the other portion of the jar, so as 65 
to produce a web, E, with lugs or flanges b c 
extending laterally therefrom at or near the 
lower end of said web. These flanges or lugs 
take the place of the pins usually employed, 
and being made integral with the web are 7o 
stronger and less liable to break or bend than 
the pins. The other member or section of the 
jar, (designated by letter B.) after being 
forged to a cylindrical shape and reduced to 
form the necki, is split or cut in the direction 75 
of its length, and on a diametrical line from 
its upper end to a point near its neck i, as 
shown at k, and if required the kerf is slit or 
expanded by means of a mandrel or expand 
ing-tool. In the sides of the section B, at 8o 
right angles to the kerf k, longitudinal slots 
de are formed for the reception and play of 
the lugs bc. The two members are now united 
by springing the walls or sides fg of the sec 
tion B apart while the latter is in a heated 85 
condition, and then inserting the web portion 
Einto the kerf k, and fitting the lugs b c into 
the slots de. When the section B cools, the 
two members will be closely united; but suf 
ficient play will be allowed to permit the one go 
to work a short distance independently of the 
other, as required in the operation of jars. 
Should it be found desirable, the box D and 
eye E may be formed separate from their re 
spective sections and welded on the Square at 95 
the points lettered i to the jar members A B, 
the rest of the jar being formed substantially 
as before described, the boxes and eyes, how 
ever, being made of iron, which can be read 
ily welded at the points i i without danger of Ioo 
2 
369,726 
weakening the jar. This modification is pro-. 
posed for the reason that the box in which is 
secured the stem and the eye which forms the 
connection for the sinking-bar may, under the 
constant jarring caused by the successive lift 
ing and dropping, sometimes become crystal 
lized if formed of solid steel, while an iron box 
or eye will not be so affected. 
It will be seen from the foregoing that a jar 
constructed as herein before described will pos 
sess great advantages over those now in use. 
The jar proper is formed of solid steel and its 
members united, so as to avoid all possibility 
of their separating, while the box and pin, if 
formed separate, are welded at a point where 
there is no danger of weakening the tool by 
such a connection. 
Having described my invention, what I de 
sire to claim and secure by Letters Patentis 
1. The method of connecting or coupling 
together the slotted member B, having kerf 
k, to the member A, having the web E' and 
lugs bc, which consists in heating the kerfed 
or slotted member, springing its sides apart 
while heated, and then inserting the webbed 
member in place, substantially as described. 
2. As an improved article of manufacture, 
ajar for well-boring apparatus forged in two 
pieces out of solid steel and united by apply 
O 
15 
20 
25 
30. 
45 
ing heat to the kerfed or slotted member, and 
springing its sides over the flanged portion of 
the other member, substantially as described. 
3. In a jar for well-boring, the combination, 
with the portion A, having the head and neck 
formed substantially as described, the lugs b 
c, formed integral therewith, and the portion 
B, having kerf k, and grooves de, adapted to 
receive and retain the lugs, as set forth. 
4. In a jar for Well-boring apparatus, the 
combination of the portion A, forged in a solid 
piece, and the portion B, formed in like man 
ner, having the kerfic, formed by slitting the 
body, and further shaping the same upon a 
mandrel, substantially as described. 
5. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a jar for well-boring formed by forging the jar 
proper out of solid steel, and having the box 
and eye made of iron and connected to the 
body by welding at the necks, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 12th day of 
August, 1886. 
EWAN LLOYD. 
Witnesses: 
A. A. MOORE, 
JNO. E. ATCHESON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369826.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. WALLACE, 
GENERATING GASOLINE BURNER. 
m 
No. 369,826, 
Patented Sept. 13, l887. 
 
E s 
 
e 
A. C 
v S. 
--- ?ist 2 
E- 
9. 
7. 
== 
6 - 711 III 
27 
S. 
E. 
13 
z 27. 2. 
7. 
z 
g/ 
HL 
LE 
 
EEE 
  
- 7. 
-7 7. 3. 
 
 
 
 
E. 
  
77 
 
 
  
 
 
-Z. 
% | 
A G 3 
SELE 
 
 
N 
N 
A 
 
 
(0/aaZe esses : 
safe--, -6-6-26. 
J.-Aezzzzez (Za ZZace 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
J. BENNETT WALLACE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO GEORGE M. 
CLARK & COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
GENERATING GASOLINE-BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 369,826, dated September 13, i887. 
Application filed March 21, 1887. Serial No. 231,647. (No model.) 
To aii, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, J. BENNETT WALLACE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
5 nois, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Generating Gasoline-Burners, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
the device for moving the deflecting - tube 
Io whereby the Vapor is deflected from the induc 
tion-tube of the generating-burners of gasoline 
Stoves to the under side of the burner base 
plate, for the purpose of keeping the latter hot 
when the stove is not in use, and particularly 
I5 to the form of Such device employed with ver 
tical deflectors and induction-tubes. These 
vertical deflectors are hinged at the top, and it 
has been customary to position them by means 
of wires some eight inches in length project 
2O ing to the front and rigidly attached to the 
deflectors, so that when the outer ends thereof 
are vibrated vertically the deflectors are caused 
to swing upon their hinges, thereby moving 
the lower end of the deflectors into acting po 
25 sition over the mouth of the needle-valve of 
the burner, or away therefrom, as desired, the 
deflector being held in position by frictional 
contact between it or the wire and a stationary 
surface located upon the valve or other con 
3O venient part of the burner. The deflector 
wire, when made to project in this manner and 
having this vertical vibratory movement, is 
It is peculiarly 
subject to some objections. 
subject to gravity, owing to its length and the 
35 thumb-piece with which it is usually provided 
at its free end, and unless its friction device is 
fully operative it is liable to fall from its up 
per to its lower position when such change is . 
not desired, and as the friction-surfaces are apt 
4o to wear away or become separated by bend 
ing, this liability to displacement through grav 
ity is very considerable. The wire is also in 
such close proximity to the needle-valve stems 
of the other burners fed by the generating 
45 burner as to render it liable to accidental dis 
placement by the user when operating such 
valve-stems. Any lateral blow or force ex 
erted upon the wire will also tend to separate 
the friction-surfaces, and thus render the de 
5o vice inoperative, except in one position-viz., 
the lower One. 
s 
 
55 
My present invention is designed to remove 
these objections and to otherwise improve the 
method of positioning and holding the de 
flector. 
It consists in the positioning and holding 
mechanism hereinafter specifically described 
and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, and in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate like parts, Fig 
ure I is a side elevation of a generating-burner 
the deflector whereof is operated by my im 
provement. Fig. 2 is a plan of the same, the 
burner proper and its base being partly broken 
away. Figs. 3 and 4 are enlarged side views 
of the deflector and its immediate operating 
mechanism, showing the two positions thereof. 
Fig. 5 is a rear elevation of the parts shown in 
Figs. 3 and 4. Figs. 6 and 7 are vertical sec 
tions of the mixing-tube and deflector, the lat 
ter being shown in both positions. 
In the drawings, A. represents the burner 
proper, a the base-plate, B the mixing-tube, 
C the deflector-tube, (hinged at c,) and D the 
needle-valve, of a generating-burner, the valve 
being operated by the hand-wheel d. 
ASSO - 
ciated with this burner are other needle-valves 
for regulating the other burners of the stove 
which are fed from the generating - burner 
shown, the stems of such other burners being 
indicated at E, and all projecting to the front 
of the stove in a horizontal plane. 
The deflector-tube may form a portion of the 
mixing-tube, as explained in patent to me, No. 
314,404, and it is moved into and out of posi 
tion by turning the rotatable wire shaft IF, 
journaled at f, upon the mixing-tube, and con 
nected to the deflector by the crank G and pit 
mang. The friction for holding the deflector 
against accidental movement is obtained be 
tween the arm H upon the deflector and the 
stationary lugh upon the side of the valve 
cylinder. With this operating device gravity 
upon the part of the operating-wire which is 
positively sustained in its bearings f is abso 
lutely prevented from operating the deflector, 
and side or other pressure upon the operating 
wire does not tend to separate the friction-sur 
faces, and it is not easily operated by acci. 
dental contact, as is the vibrating wire. 
The wire F extends nearly at right angles 
8 5 
OO 
2 
369,826 
The swinging vertical deflector-tube of a 
to the stems E of the needle-valves, so that the 
user is not likely to mistake it for either of said generating gasoline - burner, in combination 
stems, and it is so far removed therefrom as to with the rotatable shaft, the crank and the 
be safe from accidental contact with the hand pitman for moving said deflector, and the fric 
5 when actuating the needle-valves. It and the tion devices Handh, for holding it against ac 
mechanical connections can also be connected cidental movement, substantially as specified. 
to the deflector when positioned back of the 
induction-tube, as in the former construction, 
J. BENNETT WALLACE. 
and Without any change in the shape thereof 
Witnesses: 
H. M. MUNDAY, 
LEW. E. CURTIS. 
Io or in the location of the friction-surfaces. 
I claim- . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US369926.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 369,926, 
S. G. DETWLER 
TITLE HOLDER FOR PICTURES, 
Patented Sept, l3, l887. 
s 
 
 
 
  
s I  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL G. DETWILER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, 
TTE HOLDER FOR PICTURES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 369,926, dated September 13, 1887. 
Application filed August 11, 1887. Serial No. 246,661. 
(No model.) 
O 
To al., whom, it may concern: 
ever, provided at its lower end with a suitable 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL G. DETWILER, 
pull-button or tassel, e, by which it can be 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
withdrawn from the casing and exposed below 
of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
the frame of the picture, as shown in Figs. 1 
certain Improvementsin Title-Holders for Pic 
and 2. 
tures, of which the following is a specification. 
The title, description, key, or other matter 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
is either printed or pasted upon the face of the 
framed picture with a title-holder that can be 
sheet D, and if it is desired to consult the same 
moved into and out of view, and this object I 
at any time the pull-button e may be drawn 
attain in the manner fully described hereinaf. 
down to the position shown in Fig. 1, and also in 
ter, reference being had to the accompanying 
dotted lines in Fig. 3, in which position the 
drawings, in which 
title or other matter can be easily read, the ti 
Figure 1 is a face view of a picture with the tle-sheet being then allowed to spring backinto 
title-holder exposed. Fig. 2 is a perspective the casing B out of sight. It will thus be seen 
View of the rear of part of the picture-frame with 
that neither the face of the picture nor that of 
the title-holder attached thereto. Fig. 3 is a 
the frame is marred by the title-sheet, as the 
detached perspective view of the title-holder, 
casing for the latter is secured to the back of 
and Figs. 4 to 9 are views of modified forms of 
the frame out of view. 
the device. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown the title-sheet sus 
My invention has been designed especially 
pended in the casing by means of two coiled 
for use on the pictures of public or private 
springs in place of the flat spring shown in 
galleries which are not sufficiently extensive 
Fig. 3. 
to Warrant the publication of a catalogue. In 
In some instances the frame may be recessed 
such cases it is frequently desirable that visi 
and the casing B inserted into the space thus 
tors should have some means of informing 
formed, so that its back will be flush with the 
themselves as to the titles of the pictures, the 
back of the frame, or the casing may rest upon 
names of the artists, &c., without a resort to 
the flange formed on the frame, as shown in 
the plan of marking the titles, &c., directly 
Fig. 5, the frame being cut away sufficiently 
on the frames, the latter plan being expensive 
to allow the title-sheet to pass between the 
and inadmissible, where, as in show-rooms or 
frame and the wall. 
studios, for instance, the pictures in the frames 
The title-sheet may be wound upon a roll 
are frequently changed. In some cases, more 
similar to an ordinary spring shade-roller, as 
over, it is desirable to give more than the 
shown in Figs. 6 and 7, the frame being re 
mere title of the picture. For instance, it may 
cessed for the reception of the roller. 
be wished to add a short description or a key 
In Fig. 8 I have shown the title-sheet piv 
giving an outline of the picture and descrip. 
oted at d to the casing B and provided with a 
tive memoranda, and my invention provides 
spring, e, which tends to retain the sheet in 
for this. 
the casing. A spring need not be used in all 
Referring to the drawings, A is the frame of 
cases to return the title-sheet to its place in the 
the picture, to the back of which is secured 
casing. For instance, in Fig. 9 I have shown 
the casing B of the title-holder, which may be 
a title-sheet held in place in the casing by a 
made of tin, paper, or any other suitable ma 
friction-spring, the sheet being both with 
rial, and is in the present instance provided 
drawn and reinserted by hand. 
with wings bb at its lower extremity, by which 
When the casing B is made of paper, it may 
it is attached to the back of the frame A ad 
be secured to the back of the picture or frame 
jacent to the lower edge of the same, as shown 
by glue or cement. 
in Fig. 2. 
Within the casing B is the title-sheet D, made 
of any suitable material and connected to the 
upper portion of the casing by a Spring, E, 
which has a tendency to draw the title-sheet 
into the casing, said title-sheet being, how 
I claim as my invention 
1. A picture-frame having a recessed por 
tion, in combination with a title-sheet movable 
into and out of said recessed portion of the 
frame, all substantially as Specified. 
2. The combination of a picture-frame with 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
369,926 
5 
a title-sheet supported adjacent to the edge of spring supporting said title-sheetin the casing, 
the frame and free to be moved outward, so as all substantially as specified. 
Intestimony whereofI have signed my name 
to be visible beyond the frame, all substantially 
as specified. 
to this specification in the presence of two 
a spring-supported title-sheet carried thereby 
all substantially as specified. 
y 
4. The combination of a picture-frame, a cas- 
ing secured thereto, a title - sheet contained 
Io within but movable from said casing, and a 
3. The combination of a picture-frame with subscribing witnesses. 
SAMUEL G. DETWILER. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN E. PARKER, 
HENRY HOWSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370026.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. SWEETLAND, 
No. 370,026, 
WEIGHT POWER. 
Patented Sept. 13, l887. 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZOE 
?? 
MYNMANYAMAMANMAYAMAMAYAYA 
? 
oto-lithographer, Washingto 
n, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JEROME. B. SWEETLAND, OF PONTIAC, MICHIGAN. 
VM E G HT - POVV ER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 370,026, dated September 13, l887. 
Application filed March 23, 1887. Serial No. 232,124. 
No model.) 
The opposite end of 55 
To all typhom, i? ??? ????????: 
Beit known that I, JEROMEB. SWEETLAND, 
of Pontiac, in the county of Oakland, and in 
the State of Michigan, have invented a certain 
new and Useful Improvement in Weight 
Power; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, making a part of this 
Specification. 
This invention relates to an improved mo 
tive power, which is especially designed for 
Operating churns and other like machines; and 
it consists in the combination, with a helically 
grooved drum rotated by a weight and cord, 
of a train of wheels, a winding-up device, 
and a driving-shaft bearing a pinion and de 
tachably connected to the winding-up shaft of 
the Wheel-train by a pin entering an annular 
groove in said winding-up shaft, all of which 
will be fully understood from the following 
description, when taken in connection with the 
annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of my improved 
churn-power. Fig. 2 is an elevation of one 
side thereof. Fig. 3 is an enlarged diametrical 
Section through the winding-drum, its spur 
Wheels, and bearings. Fig. 4 is a diametrical 
Section through the winding-up shaft, its spur. 
Wheels, and bearings, and the driving-shaft 
and its Spur-wheel, showing the coupling for 
the driving-shaft. Fig. 5 is an enlarged sec 
tional detail showing part of the driving-shaft 
and winding-up shaft and their coupling. 
Referring to the annexed drawings by let 
ter, A designates a suitable standard adapted 
to Sustain in a convenient position my im 
proved power, and A' designates a rectangu 
lar oblong plate, vertically slotted at a a and 
adjustably secured to said standard A by bolts 
and nuts act, as shown in Fig. 1 of the an 
nexed drawings. 
B designates a horizontal shaft, which is 
journaled in bearings b b, secured to the plate 
A, and which has keyed on it a pinion spur 
Wheel, c, and a ratchet-wheel, d, between 
which wheels a large spur-wheel, C, is loosely 
applied on the said shaft B, and engaged with 
it by means of a spring-actuated pawl, c', piv 
oted to the face of wheel C and engaging with 
the ratchet-wheel d, as clearly shown in Fig. 
2. This shaft B, which I denominate the 
winding-up' shaft, is adapted to receive a key 
on the squared end e. 
shaft B has an annular groove, f, near one 
end, and on this end is fitted the socketed end 
of a driving-shaft, E, bearing fast on it a pin 
ion, g. By means of a screw-threaded pin, f, 
entering groove f, the shafts B E are connected 
together so that they can rotate independ 
ently of each other, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 
The pinion-wheel c on shaft Bengages with a 
large spur-wheel, F, which is keyed on the 
elongated hub h of a helically-grooved wind 
ing-drum, G, from which depends a rope, 0, 
carrying a suitable weight, W. This drum 
G is journaled by its hubs h h' in bearings 
ii, rigidly secured to the edges of the plate 
A', as clearly shown in Fig. 3. The large 
spur-wheel C, which I have above described 
as applied loosely on the shaft B and engaged 
with it by means of a pawl and ratchet-wheel, 
engages with a pinion spur-wheel, j, keyed om 
one end of a shaft, H, which passes freely 
through the hubs hit of the hollow drum G, 
and has keyed fast om it alarge spur-wheel, I, 
which engages, with the pinion () on the driv 
ing-shaft E. 
It will be seen from the above description 
that by applying a key or crank on the ende 
of shaft B and turning this shaft in the direc 
tion indicated by the arrow on Fig. 2, the cord 
w) can be wound upon the drum G without over 
riding, and the weight Wraised. The weight 
W now acts to rotate the drum G, which, act 
ing through the medium of wheels F c, shaft 
B, and the pawl and ratchet, rotates the large 
wheel C. This wheel in turn transmits rapid 
rotation to the driving-shaft E, through the 
medium of pinion i, shaft H, and the large 
spur-wheel I. The shaft H has a compara 
tively slow rotation, and it may be utilized 
for giving motion to a grindstone or other de 
vice. By reason of the pin-and-groove coup 
ling between the driving-shaft E and the 
winding-up shaft B these two shafts receive 
one a fast rotation and the other a compara 
tively slow rotation. The slotsa ( through 
the plate allow the motor to be adjusted higher 
or lower, as circumstances may require. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
is 
75 
95 
I OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
2 
370,026 
 
5 
?? 
1. The combination, in a weight-motor, of pawl with the ratchet-wheel d, the drum G, 
journaled in bearings on the bearing-plate 25 
and having keyed on one of its extended hubs 
or journals the spur-wheel F. which engages 
with the pinion c, the shaft H, passing freely 
through the drum G and having its bearings 
in the journals thereof, the pinioni, keyed 
upon the shaft H and engaging with the spur 
wheel C, the spur-wheel I, keyed upon the 
shaft H, the pinion g, having its bearing on 
and being loosely coupled to one end of the 
shaft B, the said pinion being located upon a 35 
shaft, E, and engaging with the spur-wheel I, 
and the weight and its cord, substantially as 
described. 
Intestimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature, in presence of two witnesses, this. 24th 4o 
day of February, 1887. 
the bearing-plate, the shaft B, journaled in 
suitable bearings on the said plate and having 
keyed on it the pinion c and ratchet-wheel d, 
the spur-wheel C, loosely secured upon the 
shaft B and engaging by a spring-actuated 
pawl with the ratchet-wheel d, the drum G, 
journaled in bearings on the plate A and 
having one of its hubs extended beyond its 
bearing, the spur-wheel F, keyed upon the 
said extended hub of the drum and engaging 
With the pinion c, the shaft H, passing freely 
through and having its bearings in the hubs of 
the said drum, the pinion j, keyed upon the 
shaft H and engaging with the spur-wheel C, 
and the weight and its cord, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a weight-motor, the combination of 
the bearing-plate, the shaft. B, journaled in 
bearings on the said plate and having keyed 
on it the pinion c and ratchet-wheel d, the 
spur-wheel C, secured loosely on the shaft B 
and engaging by means of a spring-actuated 
JEROMIE B. SWEETLAND. 
Witnesses: 
CHIAS. E. STRATTON, 
NELSON C. BELL. 
 
 
It is hereby certified that Letters Patent No. 370,026, granted September 13, 1887, 
upon the application of Jerome B. Sweetland, of Pontiac, Michigan, for an improve 
ment in Weight-Powers, was erroneously issued to the said Sweetland as owner 
of the patent; that said Letters Patent should have been issued to Lincoln H. Smith, 
of Council Bluffs, Iowa, as sole owner, he being the assignee of the entire interest; and 
that the said Letters Patent should be read with this correction therein that the Sale 
may conform to the record of the case in the Patent Office. 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 14th day of February, A. D. 1888. 
SEAL. 
Countersigned: 
BENTON J. HALL, 
Commissioner of Pottents. 
D. L. HAWKINS, 
Acting Secretary of the Interior. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370126.txt	(No Model.) 
T. A., EDISON, 
ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION OF POWER, 
No. 370,126, 
 
Patented Sept. 20, 1887, 
ATTECST: 
6676.4.4, 
to-ty 
s 
INVENT OR; 
V<-- Y 6-1. 
:- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS A. EDISON, OF MENLO PARK, NEWJERSEY. 
ELECTRICAL TRANS MISSION OF POWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 370,126, dated September 20, 1887. 
Application filed June 7, 1883. Serial No. 97,326. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS A. EDISON, of 
Menlo Park, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
5 usefullmprovement in Electrical Transmission 
of Power, (Case No. 568,) of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to the running of in 
dependent electro - dynamic motors-that is, 
Io Separate motors not connected with the same 
driving shaft-by current produced by two 
or more electrical generators, and has for its 
object to regulate simultaneously the gener 
ation of current by such generators according 
15 to the number of motors in circuit from them 
Or the speed at which such motor or motors are 
run. While such simultaneous regulation of 
the generators is applicable to the running of 
a single motor, or of a number of motors ar 
2O ranged in any suitable manner, yet I prefer 
to use it in connection with a number of in 
dependently-controllable electro-dynamic mo 
tors provided with means for removing indi 
vidual motors from operation without affect 
25 ing the remainder of the motors. The motors, 
therefore, are preferably arranged in series, 
with their field-coils in independent shunts, 
each shunt being provided with a regulating 
resistance, and shunts are formed around the 
3o motors for cutting them out of circuit. There 
are, however, very many other ways in which 
the motors could be arranged. For instance, 
in multiple arc across main conductors, with 
their fields either in series or in separate mul 
35 tiple-arc circuits; or the fields may be ener 
gized from a separate local source and regu 
lated simultaneously, the armatures being 
either in series or multiple arc. 
In carrying out my invention the manner 
4o of arranging the generators so that they may 
be simultaneously regulated is as follows: 
The armatures of the two or more dynamo 
electric machines which are employed as gen 
erators are placed in Series, and the field-coils 
45 of all the machines are included in a single 
shunt-circuit. This circuit is provided with 
an adjustable resistance, by adjusting which 
the current in the shunt is regulated, and 
therefore the generation of current by all the 
So machines is regulated simultaneously. This 
arrangementis illustrated diagrammatically in 
the accompanying drawing. 
AA are dynamo-electric machines, and B 
B electro-dynamic motors. The motors B B 
are connected in series in the main circuit 12. 55 
The field-coils of each motor are in a shunt 
circuit, 34, and each shunt-circuit is provided 
with an adjustable resistance, R. Around the 
motor B is formed a shunt, 5 6, provided 
with a circuit-controller, C, for cutting the mo- 6o 
tor out of circuit. The generators A A are 
also connected in series, and the main conduct 
ors 1 2 extend from them. 
Ashunt-circuit, 78, from the main conduct 
ors includes the coils of the field-magnets of 65 
both generators, and an adjustable resistance, 
R", is placed in this shunt for regulating the 
generators simultaneously. 
It is evident that any desired number of gen 
erators could be employed in connection with 7o 
any number of independent electro-dynamic 
motors. 
As motors are placed in or cut out of circuit, 
the resistance R is adjusted to regulate the gen 
eration of current according to these changes, 75 
so that current enough is always Supplied for 
the motors in use. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with mechanically-in 
dependent electro-dynamic motors, of two or 8o 
more dynamo or magneto electric machines 
arranged in series connected with said motors, 
said machines having all their field-coils con 
nected in one circuit, and said circuit being 
provided with an adjustable resistance, sub- 85 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of two or more mechani 
cally -independent electro - dynamic motors, 
with their armatures connected in Series, a 
shunt around the armature of each motor, in- 9c 
cluding its field-magnet coils, and an adjustable 
resistance in each shunt, with two or more dy 
namo-electric machines arranged in series con 
nected With Said motors, said machines hav 
ing all their field-coils connected in one cir- 95 
cuit, and said circuit being provided with an 
adjustable resistance, substantially as set forth. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
1st day of June, 1883. 
THOS. A. EDISON. 
Witnesses: 
H. W. SEELY, 
EDWARD H. PYATT, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370226.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. YOST 
RAILROAD TIE, 
No. 370,226, 
Patented Sept. 20, 1887. 
 
WITNESSES: 
1. 
 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. YOST, OF MIDDLETOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAILROAD - T. E. 
3PECIFICATION forming part of Isetters Patent No. 370,226, dated September 20, 1887. 
Application filed May 12, 1887. Serial No. 238,012. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all vivot it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES WESLEY YOST, 
of Middletown, in the county of Dauphin and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and Improved Railroad-Tie, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to railway-ties, and 
has for its object to provide an inexpensive, 
effective, and durable metallic railway - tie 
which Will afford ample support to the track 
rails, and may be easily and quickly laid with 
the rails to form a substantial road-bed for 
railways. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction of the railway-ties and 
their combination with the rails, all as herein 
after described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional elevation 
longitudinally through my improved railroad 
tie, which is broken away at its central part, 
and a transverse section of the track-rails which 
are held to the tie, the section being taken on 
the line acac of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view 
of the tie and rails. Fig. 3 is a plan view of 
the end of the main plate or bar of the tie, 
which lies beneath the rail chair or shoe; and 
Fig. 4 is a Side view with the tie in a trans 
verse section on the line y), Fig. 2. 
The railroad-tie consists of a bed or base 
plate, A, of proper length to Suit the gage of 
the railway-track, and two chairs or shoes, B 
B, one held near each end of the bed-plate A 
and adapted to lock the rails C C to the tie, 
as presently explained. 
The metal of the bed-plate A is slit and 
pressed up to form two tongues, D D, one near 
each end of the plate, the tongue D being 
adapted to lock against and over the outer 
base-flange, c, of the left-hand rail C, and the 
tongue D' adapted for locking over the inner 
base-flange, c', of the right-hand rail. Near 
these tongues D D, the bed-plate is punched 
or pressed to form slots E, and preferably a 
pin or bolt hole, F, also, and at some distance 
from the tongues DD the bed-plate is punched 
out to form two pairs of L-shaped slots, G. G., 
one pair at the end of the plate near the right 
3O 
40 
45 
5 O 
5 5 
hand rail C and the other inside the left-hand 
rail C, and near the middle of the plate, as 
shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings. 
The chairs or shoes B are each made of a ; 
metal plate of about the same thickness as the 
bed-plate A, and are slit and pressed to form 
pendent lips H, which are adapted to enter 
the bed-plate slots E, and the chairs, also, are 
formed with slots I, through which the bed 
plate tongues D D' pass to overlock the rail 
flanges. The chairs Bare also slit and punched 
or pressed to form tongues J J', One tongue in 
each chair, and these tongues are adapted to 
lock, respectively, against and over the inside 
flange, c', of the left-hand rail and the outside 
flange, c, of the right-hand rail. The chairs 
are also slit and pressed to form a pair of 
pendent tongues, KIK, which are adapted to 
lock into the slots G at each end of the bed 
plate. Holes in the chairs allow bolts or pins 
M to be passed through the chairs into the 
holes F of the bed-plate. 
In laying the ties and securing the rails of 
the track, the bed-plate A, with the chairs B 
IB on it, will be slipped under the rails, and 
the rails will rest on the chairs when the 
latter are positioned to allow the rail-flanges 
to clear the tongues D DJ J of the chairs, 
the chair-slots I allowing this adjustment of 
the chairs on the bed-plate, and when the 
chairs are pressed up Snugly to the rails, by 
lifting or prying up the bed-plate, the bed 
plate will be driven end wise toward the right 
hand, which will cause its tongues D ID' to 
engage the rail-flanges C c', and also cause the 
chair-flanges J J' to engage the rail-flanges c' 
c, and will also cause the chair-tongues K, 
which had been entered through the broad 
parts of the slots G, to enter the narrow parts 
of said slots and lock firmly beneath the bed 
plate. At this time the tongues H of the 
chairs will stand nearly in line with the bed 
plate slots E, and a few blows on the right 
hand ends of the chairs opposite the tongues 
will bring the tongues to register with the 
slots E, into which they fall or spring by the 
elasticity of the chairs, and when the bolts or 
pins M are passed through the chairs and the 
bed-plate, and held either by nuts or cotter 
pins, the attachment of the rails and ties will 
be complete. 
To remove the rails, it is only 
75 
SC 
90 
O 
. 
s 
necessary to remove the bolts M, when they 
are used, and wedge up the ends of the chairs 
until their tongues H are lifted from the bed 
plate slots E, and a few blows of a hammer on 
the left-hand end of the bed-plate will loosen 
the entire tie from both rails, as will readily 
be understood. 
It is not necessary that the bolt M be used 
with the lock of the chairs at H with the bed 
plate slots I, or the bolts may be used without 
the lock HI; but the use of both the lock and 
bolt is at present preferred. 
It is obvious that when these ties are used 
the rails cannot spread and cause derailment 
of the cars, and the chairs give strength to the 
tie and relieve the bed-plate of all direct wear 
of the rails, thus requiring renewal of the chairs 
only after long use of the track, and should the 
rails be broken by frost or otherwise the broken 
pieces will be held to place securely by the 
tongues, and thus prevent serious accidents. 
Both the bed-plates and chairs may be fin 
ished complete by stamping or pressing them 
out when red-hot, just as they leave the plat 
ing-rollers, and whereby they may be produced 
very cheaply, and the fiber or grain of the 
metal will not be broken or weakened, as 
would be the case were the steel plates stamped 
or pressed out when cold. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A railroad-tie comprising a bed-plate, A, 
provided at each end with an upturned tongue, 
as D, and slots G, in combination with chair 
Io 
15 
25 
35 
370,226 
plates B, formed with a slot, I, a tongue, as J, 
and pendent locking-tongues K, and a device 
locking the chairs to the bed-plate, substan 
tially as described, for the purposes set forth. 
2. A railroad-tie comprising a bed-plate, A 
provided at each end with an upturned tongue, 
as D, and slots G and E, in combination with 
chair-plates formed with a slot, I, a tongue, as 
J, and pendent locking-tongues K, and a lock 
sing device for the chairs and bed-plate, com 
prising a tongue, H, on the chair entering the 
slot E of the bed-plate, substantially as de 
scribed, for the purposes set forth. 
3. A railroad-tie comprising a bed-plate, A, 
provided at each end with an upturned tongue, 
as D, slots G. E., and hole F, in combination 
with chair-plates formed with a slot, I, a tongue, 
as J, pendent locking-tongues K, and a pend 
ent lip, H, and a bolt or pin, M, entering the 
chair and bed-plate, substantially as described, 
for the purposes set forth. 
4. The combination, with railroad-rails C - 
C, of ties formed of a bed-plate, A, provided 
with upturned tongues D D' and slots G, and 
chair-plates formed with slots I, and tongues 
J J', and pendent locking-tongues K, and a 
locking device holding the chairs to the bed 
plate, said tongues D DJ J' engaging the 
base-flanges of the rails, substantially as de 
scribed, for the purposes set forth. 
45 
55 
6) 
CEHARLES. W. YOST, 
Witnesses: 
THOS. M. YoST, 
Jos. For N. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370326.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 370,326, 
 
A. DROIT, 
CALCINING APPARATUS, 
 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
as: 
(No Model.) 
No. 370,326. 
 
 
A. DROIT, 
CAL CINING APPARATUS 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 20, 1887. 
% % ^ , 
N 
S 
% N S % 
```` N 
N 2 
- 
t 
/7ZZzzesses. 
N. PETERS, 
hographer.-wnshington, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT DROIT, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
CAC INING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 370,326, dated September 20, 1887. 
Application filed July 14, 1887. 
Seria No. 244,237. No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
m 
. 
. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERT DROIT, a citi 
Zen of the Republic of France, residing in 
Paris, in said Republic, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Apparatus for Cal 
cining Carbonate of Soda and other Substances, 
of which the following is a specification, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
lingS. 
This invention has especially for its object 
the calcination of the bicarbonate of soda, ob 
tained by the ammonia process. The condi 
tions to be fulfilled in such calcination are as 
follows: First, it is necessary to treat large 
quantities of the bicarbonate at a time; sec 
Ond, the bicarbonate is a bad conductor of 
heat, and to heat it in all its parts it is neces 
sary to stir it to prevent the formation of 
crusts on the heated surface; third, the appara 
tus should permit the collection of the gas and 
Vapor disengaged; fourth, the product having 
to be calcined highly to have a convenient 
density, the apparatus is quickly destroyed, 
and it is necessary to construct it as durable 
as possible to facilitate the repair. 
. The apparatuses heretofore employed to cal 
cine by direct heating are generally formed of 
a cast-iron kettle or of a horizontal cylinder. 
These apparatuses are fixed. The heating be 
ing direct, the firestrikes upon a restricted sur 
face and the iron is quickly burned. The soda 
is stirred by very complicated agitators, which 
incompletely scrape the heated surfaces, be 
cause of the rapid deformation which the ap 
paratuses are subject to under the influence of 
the heat. 
My invention consists in the combination, 
as hereinafter described and claimed, of a ro 
tary cylinder, a rotary shaft, and articulated 
stirrers and scrapers contained in said cylin 
der, and a surrounding furnace having a fire 
place on one side. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a longitudinal and nearly central 
Section of an apparatus constructed accord 
ing to my invention. Fig. 2 is an end view of 
the same, and Fig. 3 a transverse section of 
the same. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
C designates the rotary cylinder, placed in 
an arched furnace, F, heated by a fire-place 
which ranges along the whole length of one 
side of it. This cylinder is mounted on four 
rollers, G*, keyed upon two horizontal shafts, 
A. One of these shafts receives a continuous 
rotary motion, which it communicates to the 
cylinder C* by the intermediation of the roll 
erS G*. 
The axis of the cylinder C* is traversed by 
the shaftB, which receives a rotary motion in 
a reverse direction to that of the cylinder. 
This shaft passes through a stuffing-boxin one 
end of the cylinder, saidstuffing-box being fur 
nished with asbestus packing. It is supported 
at its other extremity by a fixed tubular bear 
ing, Ti, inserted through the other end of 
the cylinder. A second stuffing-box packed 
with asbestus prevents the escape of gas at 
this end. 
The shaftB* carries two cast-iron blades, LP, 
carried by arms L., articulated by pivots * 
to flanges B, keyed on the shaft. These blades 
by their own weight scrape the surface of the 
cylinder during about a half-revolution, and in 
order that their action may be more energetic 
they are formed with numerous teeth in the 
direction of their length, the teeth of one 
blade corresponding with the spaces on the 
other blade. 
The tube Tk carries a nozzle, M*, which is 
keyed to it, and which debouches in the up. 
per part of the cylinder. 
The charging and discharging of the bicar 
bonate into and from the cylinder are made by 
two doors, P8, provided in one of the heads, 
and furnished with means for making them air 
tight. The exit of the gas, which is disengaged 
during the reaction, takes place through the 
nozzle M* and the fixed tube T8. 
A shaft, Ni, receiving motion through a 
pulley and belt, carries an endless screw which 
gears with a wheel, Ok. Two pinions, H-8 
Hi, mounted on the same shaft with the worm 
wheel Oi, communicate their movement, the 
first to the shaft B* through the intermedia 
tion of the wheel I* on the said shaft, and the 
second to the cylinder C8 by the intermedia 
tion of the wheel K*. This latter pinion H* 
may slide on its shaft in order to permit the 
throwing out of gear when it is required to 
charge or discharge the cylinder. 
95 
CO 
O 
35 
45 
So 
370,326 
The advantages which result from the em. 
ployment of this apparatus are considerable; 
the rotary cylinder is heated uniformly, and 
consequently is more durable. The decom 
5 position of the bicarbonate will be more rapid, 
because the heating-surface is greater. The 
articulated and toothed stirrers produce an 
energetic stirring and prevent the formation 
of adherent crusts of soda. 
Io What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination of the rotary cylinder C-8, 
the rotary shaft fitted to bearings in the ends 
of said cylinder and having flanges B within . 
the said cylinder, the arms F, pivoted to said 5 
flanges, the scrapers LP, carried by said arms, 
- and the inclosing-furnace F, having the fire 
place on one side, substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
ALBERT DROIT. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL CURALF, 
LOUIS QUATREHOMMES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370426.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 370,426. 
6. 
: 
Fr. Sas 
A, STARK 
FOLDING BED 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1887, 
d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A5%zz/ZZozez 
A. 
M. PEERs. Photo-thographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 370,426, 
4. A. ..If 
24? A? 
Af 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
A, STARK, 
FOLDING BED, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1887. 
ice 
P- - - 
AA 
Zyy 
Z7 
s ...-e- 
w 
2 
- 
7 
7 
E 
reel 
Z24 t = F 
IT 
|e 
4SEEL2 ai =le 
N 
- - - 
A 
729.3. 
27 
. 
A. 
as 
A. 
N 
27 A 2.2. 
O 
2 
e 
2 & 
N 
AZ 
C 
31 
2 
4. %, 
Z. 
(it 
- 
-7N? N N I 
ca 52. 
W. C. 
7. 
Cz- -2 / 
A. 
ISI 
o 
4/ 
 
Z72eesses. 
-6&774 ZZozez. 
4)-Kgll-11- 
h 
S vok 
&assus ev 
- 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 370,426, 
 
3 sheets-sheet S. 
A, STARK, 
FOLDING BED, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1887, 
6%zzzesses. 
aS27zzZ5Zaz-e/ 
& 2)-4- 
Zzzar 
Jaan Star 
class S. Salr-zzy. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW STARK, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
FOLDING BED. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 370,426, dated September 27, 1887. 
Application filed October 4, 1886. Serial No. 215,249. 
(No model.) 
. 
To all, Luhon, it mug? concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW STARK, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Folding Beds, which are fully de 
scribed and claimed in the following specifica 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part thereof. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing the 
bed embodying my invention in horizontal po 
sition as when unfolded and ready for occu. 
pancy. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the de 
vice, showing the appearance when folded up 
in a vertical position and draped. Fig. 3 is a 
sectional plan of the mechanism, parts broken 
away, the bed being in horizontal position, all 
upholstery and drapery being removed. Fig. 
4 is a longitudinal vertical section showing the 
bed horizontal. Fig. 5 is a similar section 
showing the bed half-raised-that is, about 
midway between the horizontal and vertical 
positions. Fig. 6 is a similar section showing 
the bed vertical. Fig. 7 is a diagram illus 
trating the course of the several parts in their 
movement from the horizontal to the vertical 
position and their relative proportion for the 
purpose of causing such movement. 
The purpose of my invention is to provide 
a bed and means for sustaining it, such that 
the bed may be raised from the horizontal po 
sition to the vertical by elevating the head and 
keeping the upper surface outward, so that 
when vertical and standing close against the 
wall the covers of the bed, rather than the un 
der side, shall be exposed to view, whereby ex 
pensive or elaborate cabinet-work may be 
made unnecessary to conceal the bed, as is 
usual when folding is so effected that in the 
vertical position the under side is exposed. 
I also so construct the mechanism that the bed 
may be shifted from one position to the other 
without changing the position of its support 
ing head-frame and by the application of very 
little force, however heavy the bed and its cov 
ering may be, and, also, so that in the vertical 
as well as in the horizontal position it shall be 
stable without using any locking device. In 
cidentally, also, I aim to cheapen the construc 
tion without diminishing the serviceability or 
ornamental appearance of the structure, 
a 
stand against the wall and not to be required to 
be moved in order to change the bed from hori 
ZOntal to vertical or from vertical to horizon 
tal position. It will be obvious from the here 
inafter-contained description that this head 
frame may be entirely dispensed with and the 
bed and its operating mechanism be secured 
to the floor or walland supported in the hori 
Zontal position merely by a bracket upon the 
wall or any simple support resting upon the 
floor. The only additional purpose of the 
head-frame is to sustain the drapery by which 
the bed may be concealed when vertical. 
B represents the bed proper, which in Fig. 
1 is shown with bedding and covers complete, 
and in Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 is shown merely in 
skeleton, of which is B are the side frame 
bars, B'B' the head and foot bars, and B a 
woven-wire bed-spring stretched between the 
bars B. 
Cis a foot-frame, which is preferably formed, 
as represented, of gas-pipe, comprising the end 
bows, CC, having their shorter arms, C", piv 
oted to the bars B at bib' at a distance from 
the front end of the side bars, which is some 
thing less than the height of the bars B from 
the floor when said bars are horizontal, that 
distance being also substantially equal to the 
length of the shorter arms of the bows C. The 
upper end of the longer arms, C''', of said bows 
C are connected by the foot-rail C. 
D' are two parallel equal lever-arms of a 
rock-shaft, D, said shaft and arms together 
forming a U-shaped frame. The rock-shaftD 
is held in the bearings d", which are secured to 
the floor A of the frame A, close in the angle 
between the said floor and the rear uprights, 
A'A'. Said uprights are preferably braced 
by the end brackets, A, which form with them, 
respectively, angles or corners, said corners 
being connected at the top by the top bar, A. 
The head-frame is further stiffened by the head 
bar A, which is of such width and is connected 
to the rear uprights, A, at such a height as to 
extend from a point below the level of the up 
per surface of the bedding as high as desired, 
in order that it may appear as an ornamental 
head-board, as seen in Fig. 1. To the floor of 
the frame A, inward from the two ends, are 
secured the upright brackets A", which are 
connected at their upper ends by the bar A', 
A is the head-frame, which is designed to and are provided with the ledgesa, upon which 
75 
95. 
IOO 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
. 
370,426 
25 
35 
the head-bars B of the bed rest when the lat 
ter is horizontal, and these brackets may be 
connected by the cross-bar A, which serves as 
a further stiffening for the frame A. The le 
ver-arms D are pivoted at their outer ends, 
respectively, to the side bars, B, on the inner 
surface thereof at the point d approximately 
midway of the length of the bed. The exact 
position will be hereinafter explained. The 
lever-arms D are connected, respectively, to 
the arms C" of the bows C by the links E. 
Said links are pivoted to the lever-arms, re 
spectively, at ee', a short distance inward 
from the pivots d', and are pivoted to the arms 
Catc'c' distant from the pivots b'b'somewhat 
farther than the pivots e'e' are from the piv 
ots d' d'. The relation of these several dis 
tances will be hereinafter more specifically ex 
plained. 
FF are heavy spiral springs connected to 
the side bars, B, at a point forward of or be 
low the pivots of the lever-arms D' to the said 
bars, and at the other end to the lever-arms 
D", preferably or most conveniently at the piv 
ots e. 
The operation of this structure is as follows: 
When the bed is horizontal, as in Fig. 4, the 
head-bar B' rests upon the ledge a' of the 
bracket A, and the bed is prevented from es 
caping from that support by the connection of 
the lever-arms D', linkE, and foot-frame C, as 
follows: The bed must move toward the foot 
in order to escape from the ledge. The lever 
arms D', which are connected to the bed and 
must move with it, can move toward the foot 
only by moving in a curve about the axis of their 
rock-shaft. If they should thus move, the foot 
of the bed would thereby be depressed before 
the head had escaped from the ledge; but the 
foot is sustained by the frame C, whose arms 
Care nearly vertical under the bed. In or 
der that the foot may descend, therefore, the 
frame C must swing on the pivots b, either to 
ward the foot or toward the head. The links 
E connect the arms C" and the lever-arms D', 
so that the frame cannot Swing toward the foot, 
and so that they cannot swing toward the head 
without swinging the lever-arms D upward; 
but, as stated at the beginning, in order that 
the bed may escape, said lever-arms must swing 
downward. The bed is therefore stable in the 
position shown in Fig. 4. When it is desired 
to shift it to the vertical position, the foot-rail 
C being seized by the hand and a slightpressure 
being exerted upon the foot of the bed, the 
foot-frame C being simultaneously pushed to 
ward the head, the bed will tip head upper 
most, and the head will follow the course in 
dicated by the curved line 115; 1820 in Fig. 
7, until the position of all parts is as shown in 
Fig. 6. In this position the bed is vertical. 
The links E are approximately vertical, but 
have swung just past the pivot of the arms C" 
of the side bars, B, and the lever-arms D, also 
nearly vertical, lean slightly forward, while 
the foot C" of the end bows of the frame Crest 
upon the floor A of the head-frame A. In the bed resting solidly on the ledge a'. 
order that this position may be possible, ob 
viously the length of the lever-arms D must 
be slightly greater than the distance of the 7o 
pivots d from the foot of the bed-frame and 
must be equal substantially to the sum of the 
link E and the distance between the pivots e. 
and d and the distance from the extreme foot 
of the bow C vertically to the pivot c'. It is 75 
also obvious that the said distance cannot 
vary much from the sum of the distance be 
tween the pivots d' and b and the length of 
the arm C" from its pivot to the extreme bot 
tom. In making this movement the head of 8o 
the bed follows very nearly a vertical course 
until the position of the parts is that indicated 
by the numeral 15 in Fig. 7. From this point 
until the arm C" reaches the front edge of the 
floor A the head of the bed describes a short 8 5 
curve forward. (Shown between the numer. 
als 15 and 19 in Fig. 7.) At the latter point 
the link Eis vertical, and since the lever-arm D' 
is still swinging upward, further movement will 
lift the foot-frame from the floor. This move- 9C 
ment being slightly assisted by the hand of the 
operator, will cause the foot-frame to run onto 
the floor A of the head-frame, direct vertical 
movement being substituted for the gradual 
upward-swinging movement which would re- 95 
sult from the continued movement of the foot 
frame toward the head-frame in the absence of 
the floor A. While the foot rises thus verti 
cally, the bed swings on the pivots d", while 
the lever-arms rock over their shaft toward roo 
the head-frame, causing the head of the bed to 
describe the curve 153 to 18, and while the 
foot thus moves over the floor inward the head 
moves outward through the curve m', so that 
at its final position the bed is substantially to 5 
vertical, being suspended in that position on 
the pivots d the greater portion of its length, 
and therefore its weight being below said piv 
ots. The link E having passed forward of the 
pivot b', if the lever-arms D should now rock I Ic) 
forward under the weight of the bed swinging 
on the pivots d', they would necessarily swing 
the foot-frame about the pivots b' forward, in 
stead of backward over the course by which 
they reached their present position; but said II 5 
frame is stopped against such forward swing 
ing movement by the contact of its arm C' 
with the cross-bars B of the bed-frame. In 
some cases I use a small block, b, in order to 
effect the stoppage at exactly the right point Izo 
to hold the bed vertical. Neither the weight 
of the bed, therefore, nor any pressure applied 
directly to it, either downward or by pulling 
it forward at the head, can cause it to swing 
from a vertical position; but when it is desired 125 
to lower the bed to horizontal position, the 
operator, seizing the foot-frame and drawing 
it forward, will cause it to retrace the course 
before described until it reaches again the 
horizontal position. 
The spring F tends to fold the bed up as 
soon as the head is lifted clear of the bracket 
A', but it is not sufficiently strong to prevent 
It is 
I3O 
O 
(5 
SO 
55 
65 
370,426 
3. 
calculated, however, to be strong enough to 
substantially relieve the operator of the weight 
of the bed while raising it from horizontal to 
vertical position, so that in the operation only 
sufficient force is required to overcome the 
inertia and friction of the mechanism, except 
at the commencement of the lifting movement, 
while the bed is nearly horizontal, and then 
but little force is required with the assistance 
of the spring to move it. By the time the bed 
reaches the position shown in Fig. 5 the force 
exerted by the spring is sufficient to sustain 
it without the assistance of the operator, the 
loss of contractile reaction of the spring up to 
that point being more than compensated by 
the gain in leverage due to the change of an 
gle between the lever-arms D and the line of 
construction of the spring. As the bed rises 
from this point, its center of gravity, which is 
about at the middle point of its length, rises 
but little, and consequently but little force is 
required to complete the movement of the bed 
to its vertical position. 
An important purpose of the head-frame is 
to Sustain the inclosing-drapery, and for this 
purpose a cornice, G, may be secured to the 
upper end of the head-frame, and curtains, as 
G' G', hung therefrom, and when the bed is 
horizontal they may be drawn aside and se 
cured by the loops (f, as shown in Fig. 1. 
When the bed is vertical, the curtains may, 
if desired, be released from the loops and fall 
in front of the bed, as seen in Fig. 2, or they 
may be allowed to remain, as seen in Fig. 1, 
the bed-covers and foot-frame presenting, with 
the obliquely-draped curtains, a sufficiently or 
namental appearance. 
The advantage of the above-described con 
struction of the bed-frame and its operating 
mechanism, when considered in relation to the 
cornice and curtains sustained thereby, is that 
by reason of the fact that the head or end of 
the bed next to the curtain-supporting frame 
is uppermost when the bed is vertical, and 
rises to that position by following an approxi 
mately vertical course from the position where 
it rests when the bed is horizontal, the bed 
is capable of being passed up behind the cur 
tains from below, so that they need not be 
drawn aside at the top in order to allow the 
bed to be shifted from one position to the 
other. 
It will be apparent upon inspection that the 
relative lengths of the several parts and the 
distance between their pivots must either be 
carefully computed or ascertained by experi 
ment, in order to give the head of the bed the 
described movement-that is, along a line ap 
proximately vertical, and which does not at 
any point pass back of the vertical plane of 
the back of the head-frame-and at the Same 
time to permit the closing of the bed without 
materially varying the foot-frame from its up 
right position, and to cause the structure to 
be stable in the upright position, by reason. 
of the links E having passed forward of the 
pivots b'. The exact proportions necessary 
to produce these results can be mathematically 
calculated for each case, depending upon the 
height of the head and foot of the bed from 
the floor when the bed is horizontal, the length 
of the bed, the rise from the floor of the room 
to the floor of the head-frame, and the prox 
imity of the bed when vertical to the head 
frame. Such calculation, however, will not 
usually be necessary; but the proportions can 
be ascertained with sufficient accuracy by ex 
periment. The proportions shown in the draw 
ings are substantially those which I have found 
most convenient and best adapted to secure the 
desired results. It will be seen that when the 
link E passes the pivot b' the arm 'C' is ex 
actly, and the lever-arm D' is nearly, in line 
with the pivots d and c, and since the dis 
tance b to c is greater than the distanced to e, 
if a slight error has been made in the propor 
tions of the parts, the bearings of eithere' or 
c' must be slightly slotted to allow the link E. 
to pass the pivot b'. The difficulty arising 
from a slight error in the proportions of the 
several parts may be thus corrected. 
I consider it preferable to pivot the arms D' 
to the bed-frame near the middle of the length, 
for the reason that if pivoted below the mid 
dle the bed will be lifted higher than neces. 
sary in order to be brought into the vertical 
position, and if pivoted much below the mid 
dle the lower end of the lever-arms D must 
be pivoted much farther back than the head 
of the bed, thereby compelling the bed to stand 
farther out from the head-frame, and thus pre 
venting the compactness which is one of the 
chief advantages of folding the bed into up 
right position. 
In order that the operation of the bed in 
raising or lowering may be easy and reliable, 
and in order that the tendency to swing later. 
ally and cramp the pivots may be prevented, 
it is essential that the two lever - arms D' 
should be rigidly joined, so that they shall with 
certainty move alike, and be kept in the same 
plane throughout the entire movement; and 
for this purpose the construction shown, which 
makes them rigid arms of a common rock 
shaft, is important. I prefer to make said 
lever-arms and their rock-shaft of one con 
tinuous piece of metal tubing bent into the re 
quired form, since thereby I obtain the de 
sired rigidity and fixedness of the relation be 
tween the arms at very small cost. For a like 
reason I prefer to make each of the bows C of 
gas-pipe, and to connect them by a cross-rail, 
C, also of pipe, rigidly jointed to both bows 
by the Tse'. Obviously the longer arm, c, of 
the foot-frame and the cross-rail C might be 
dispensed with; but, in addition to improving 
the appearance, the foot-rail makes a most con 
venient handle by which to operate the bed, 
and by keeping the arms C" in rigid relation 
to each other causes them to operate precisely 
alike, and thus avoids cramping or twisting 
the bed. 
I am aware that heretofore there have been 
constructed folding beds having the bed con 
25 
45 
7 o 
75 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
370,426 
5 
tion and greater range in the choice of mate 
rial for curtains than if it were necessary to 
provide for their withdrawal every time the 
bed was raised. 
I do not therefore claim, 
broadly, the use of such draped heading or 
cornice, but only the combination of it with 
the bed when constructed, as described, to en 
ter behind the drapery from beneath. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with a rigid bed-frame, 
of lever-arms E)', rigidly connected and piv 
oted to the bed-frame at one end, and at the 
other end pivoted at a fixed line below one end 
of the bed-frame, and supports for each end of 
the bed-frame, substantially as set forth. 
2. In combination with a rigid bed-frame, 
rigidly-connected lever-arms D', pivoted at one 
end to the bed-frame, and at the other end piv 
oted at a fixed line below one end of the bed 
frame, a fixed support for that end of the bed 
frame, and a pivoted support for the other end 
pivoted to the bed-frame, and links connect 
ing said pivoted support to the lever-arms, 
said links being longer than the distance, meas 
ured longitudinally on the bed-frame, from the 
pivots of the lever-arms to the pivots of said 
pivoted supports, whereby said pivoted sup 
ports may remain substantially vertical while 
the lever-arms change their direction as the 
bed is swung upward, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In combination with the rigid bed-frame 
and the head-frame, the U-frame made of one 
piece of metal pipe, comprising the rock-shaft 
D, and bent to form its lever-arms D', made of 
metal pipe and pivoted to the head-frame and 
to the rigid bed-frame, whereby the bed-frame 
may be operated relatively to the head-frame . 
without danger of cramping, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. In combination, the bed-frame, the lever 
arms D', the foot-supporting arms C", and the 
links E, connecting the arms D and C", the 
bed-frame having a stop, as b', to arrest the 
foot-support C", the several parts being rela 
tively pivoted and proportioned, substantially 
as set forth, whereby, when the bed-frame is 
vertical and the foot-support is against the 
stop thereon, the link Eisforward of the pivot 
b', substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand, this 30th day of September, A. D. 1886, 
in the presence of two witnesses, at Chicago, 
Illinois. 
ANDREW STARK. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. S. BURTON, 
G. G. JACKSON, 
95 
(O 
IOS 
I IO 
O 
I5 
25 
nected to the head-frame by parallel links or 
levers, and having the foot-frame also pivoted 
to the bed, so that the foot-frame being moved 
toward the head-frame causes the bed to swing 
upward at the head and downward at the foot, 
and thus assume an upright position with the 
top or cover outward; but in all such struct 
ures heretofore made, so far as I am aware, 
the two parallel levers or links which connected 
the bed to the head-frame and caused it to have 
the peculiar movement described were inde 
pendent of each other-that is, were not con 
nected rigidly together-so that their parallel 
ism throughout the entire movement of the 
bed was assured independently of the paral 
lelism of the head and foot frames in such 
movement. The result in all such former 
structures is that it is necessary to move the 
foot-frame with great care to keep it parallel 
with the head-frame, or else the levers or links. 
become cramped on their pivots, and not only 
is the operation rendered very laborious, but 
danger is incurred of breaking the pivots or 
links. In the structure herein shown, on the 
contrary, the two parallel lever-arms D be 
ing rigidly joined to a common rock-shaft, and 
preferably, as illustrated, formed integrally 
with such shaft, no such difficulty or danger is 
encountered, and it results that this structure 
may be changed from the position wherein the 
bed is horizontal to that in which it is vertical 
by seizing the foot-frame even at one corner 
only, and without any pains or effort to pre 
serve its parallelism with the head-frame, and 
35 notwithstanding such one-sided application of 
the force, the bed can be raised and the struct 
ure closed up into the position shown in Fig. 
6 by a child using only one hand; and I do 
not claim, broadly, the structure which yields 
the general movement hereinabove described, 
but wish to be understood as claiming it only 
when the lever-arms are rigidly joined. 
I am also aware that curtained cornices have 
heretofore been employed to drape the head 
of or top of a folding bed when folded into up 
right position; but such devices have hereto 
fore been used only in connection with beds 
adapted to fold up by swinging in an arc about 
a center located underneath such cornice, so 
that it was necessary to draw aside the curtains 
or drapery in order to admit the bed behind 
them; but in the present structure the move 
ment which the bed receives, permitting it to 
enter endwise upward from below the cornice, 
allows it to pass behind the draping-curtains 
without the necessity of first withdrawing 
them, thereby dispensing with the necessity 
for mechanism to adjust the curtains and sim 
plifying the mode of hanging them, and per 
mitting a much greater variety of ornamenta 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370526.txt	(No Model.) 
F. J. BIGGS & S. PARDOE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 370,526, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1887. 
SASH FASTENER, 
 
Fi. l. 
WITNESSES: 
5eotye fA (of a sex. 
d 
&wev.2222-22 *3232 
are povvu)- a 2-ce 
If their Attorneys, 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. C 
(No Model.) 
, 
F. J. BIGGS & S. PARDOE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 370,526, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1887. 
SASH FASTENER, 
y 
ITNESSES : 
262sza) 
INVENTORS: 
4 / . . 
23%22a2 
Ay the 4torneyS, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washigton, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICKJAMES BIGGS, OF LONDON, AND SAMUEL PARDOE, OF KILBURN, 
COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND: SAID PARDOE ASSIGNOR TO SAIL) 
BIGGS. 
SASH a FASTENER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 370,526, dated September 27, 1887. 
Application filed July 10, 1886. Serial No. 207,675. (No model.) Patented in England February 23, 1886, No. 2,601, and in 
Germany April 19, 1886, No. 2,826. 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, FREDERICK JAMES 
BIGGS, of Leadenhall Buildings, in the city of 
London, and SAMUEL PARDOE, of 90 High 
5 Road, Kilburn, in the county of Middlesex, 
England, both subjects of the Queen of Great 
Britain, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Sash-Fasteners, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to fasteners for the 
meeting rails of window-sashes, its objects be 
ing to prevent the success of nefarious attempts 
to open the window from the outside, and to 
enable the sashes to be fastened more securely 
and lessen their liability to rattle when fast 
ened. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure L is 
a perspective view of our improved fastener, 
showing it locked or fastened. Fig. 2 is a 
plan thereof. Fig. 3 is a side elevation there 
of showing the meeting-rails in section; and 
Fig. 4 is a front elevation showing the catch 
open. The remaining figures illustrate a modi 
fied construction, of which Fig. 5 is a perspec 
tive view, and Fig. 6 is a side elevation show 
ing the meeting-rails in section. 
Referring to the drawings, A A' are the 
meeting rails or bars of the sashes. 
B is a plate secured to the rail Aby screws or 
otherwise. C is a plate secured to the rail Ain 
like manner. 
D is the latch or locking-arm of the fastener, 
pivoted at a to the plate B, and E is the usual 
spring, engaging with the latch D in the ordi 
nary manner. 
The plate B is formed along its front with a 
rib, b, projecting upward, and the plate C is 
formed along its rear edge with a channel 
piece, c, into which the ribb on plate B pro 
jects when the rails or bars meet. 
On the plate C is formed a hook, F, which 
projects to one side and which, by preference, 
is slightly sloped and rounded on its under 
side, so as to admit of the more facile engage 
ament or disengagement of the latch. D there 
with. We so apportion the height of the 
channel-piece c and so slope or taper the un 
der side of the latch. D that when the latch is 
locked into the hook F it shall bear tightly 
upward on the under side of the hook F, thus 
wedging all together by reason of the taper 
ing of the under side of the latch and the slop 
ing or rounding of the under side of the hook F. 
Thus the turning out of the latch exerts an up 
ward pull on the plate B, thereby drawing 
the upper sash upward while pressing the 
lower sash down. A projection, d, is, by pref 
erence, formed on the latch D, and in locking 
the sashes this shoulder rides against the 
curved front face of the hook F, and thereby 
acts to draw the two sashes together by reason 
of the eccentric curve which is given to the 
face of the hook. 
As clearly seen in Fig. 3, when the meet 
ing-rails A A' are together it is impossible to 
insert a knife or instrument between the plates 
BC, and so push back the latch D and open 
the window. The latch, by bearing firmly on 
the channel-piece c and hook F, prevents the 
sashes from being rattled by the wind or other 
cause of vibration. 
The plates B C, with the rib and channel 
piece, may be of any desired length. In fact, 
they may, if required, extend the whole length 
of the sash, and so tend to exclude or decrease 
draft. 
Figs. 5 and 6 illustrate a modification of our 
fastener, the construction of which is precisely 
the same as that of the form already described, 
with the exception that the hook F is omitted 
from the plate C and the projection d is omit 
ted from the lever D. 
The operation does not differ from that of 
the construction first described, except that, 
because of the omission of F, the outer end of 
the lever is not kept pressed down by any part 
of the plate C. Consequently the strength of 
the fastening is dependent upon the rigidity 
and strength of the pivotal mounting of the 
lever D. The upward thrust of the lower sash 
is transmitted through the channel-piece c to 
the lever ID, and is resisted partly by the piv. 
ots of the lever and partly by the abutment of 
a projection, f, thereon, which stands nearly 
over the channel-piece, against the under side 
of the head g of the pivotal mounting of the 
lever. 
Our invention thus constructed is not of 
35 
45 
So downward on the channel-piece c and tightly equal strength with the construction shown in IOO 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
2 
370,526 
Figs. 1 to 4 unless made of thicker material turned out, to stand over said channel-piece 
and greater weight; but, nevertheless, it is su 
and under said beveled hook, substantially as 
perior in strength to most sash-fasteners of 
set forth, whereby the latch is pressed down 
this character now in use, since the upward 
by the bevel of said hook, bears downwardly 
thrust of the lower sash is exerted against the 
upon said channel-piece, and draws upwardly 
locking-lever as close as possible to the pivot 
at its pivot. 
or fulcrum thereof, whereas in other prior 
3. The combination, to form a Sash-fastener, 
fasteners this thrust has commonly been ex 
of the plate B, formed with a projecting flange 
erted against or close to the free outer end of 
at its front edge, the plate C, formed with a 
the lever. 
channel-piece at its rear edge to engage said 
flange when the window is closed, and with a 
hook, F, in front of said channel-piece, bev 
eled on its under side, and the latch D, piv 
oted to the plate B, and adapted to turn out 
wardly over the channel-piece and under the 
hook, and beveled on its under side, whereby 
it wedges downwardly against the channel 
piece, being itself pressed downwardly by the 
hook, substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto signed 
our names in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The combination, to form a sash-fastener, 
of a back plate formed with a projecting flange 
at its front edge, a front plate formed with a 
channel-piece at its rear edge to engage said 
flange when the window is closed, and a latch 
pivoted to the back plate, adapted to turn hori 
Zontally outward over the front plate, and 
formed with an inclined under surface which 
presses downwardly on said channel-piece 
when the latch is turned outwardly, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination, to form a sash-fastener, 
of the plate B, the plate C, formed with a pro 
25 jecting channel-piece and with the hook F, 
beveled on its under side, and the latch D, 
pivoted to the plate B and constructed, when 
FREDERICK, JAMES BIGGS. 
SAMUEL BARDOE. 
Witnesses: 
JoSEPHPASFIELD, 
WALTER T. BROWNE. 
35 
45 
IO 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370626.txt	 
 
COAL CARRYING CAR, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1887. 
 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. JENKINS, J.R., OF BELLEFONTE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
COA La CARRY NG CA R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 370,626, dated September 27, 1887. 
Application filed April 22, 1887. Serial No. 235,735. (No model.) 
. 
IS 
25 
To all up???, i? ??? ????????: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. JENKINS, 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Bellefonte, in the county of Centre, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Lorries or Cars for 
Carrying Coal to the Coking-Ovens, of which 
the following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawing. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
lorry-cars for conveying coal to the coking 
OVES. 
The object of my invention is to construct a 
self-propelling lorry-car for hauling coal from 
the mines or other source of supply to the 
coking-ovens, thus dispensing with mules 
and separate and independent engines with 
separate and independent tracks for the same. 
My invention consists in extending the 
frame-work of the car beyond the body of the 
lorry and mounting on one end of the 
frame-work a steam - boiler and om the other 
end a small engine, through which power is 
applied to the axle to propel the car or lorry. 
In the drawing forming a part of this appli 
cation I have shown my improved car and 
engine combined in a side elevation. 
In the manufacture of coke the railroad 
tracks are usually laid on top of the ovens, 
the usual way of hauling the cars over the 
ovens being by mules; but this method, for 
various reasons, is objectionable and expen 
sive. 
Attempts have been made to haul the cars 
35 by means of wire ropes, and also with separate 
and independent locomotives; but on account 
of the excessive cost these plans have not gone 
into general use. . 
In the case of separate and independent lo 
comotives it is necessary to lay an independent 
track for the locomotives, as the track-gage of 
the lorry is usually too wide for the small en 
gines used. 
Referring, now, to the drawing, Aindicates 
the frame-work of the car or lorry, mounted on 
suitable wheels or trucks, B, said frame-work 
being extended at each end beyond the trucks, 
so as to form a support at one end for the 
steam-boiler C, while the other end is designed 
to support the engine D. 
45 
40 
, 
E is the body of the car or lorry, in which 
the coal to be carried is placed, said body be 
ing supported above the frame - work A by 
suitable posts, F, or in any other convenient 
manner. The body of the car or lorry is made 
in the usual hopper-shaped form and is pro 
vided with a suitable trap-door, as is common 
in this class of cars. 
The boiler C may be of any desired form, 
but preferably of the vertical type, the steam 
space of which is connected to the engine ID 
by means of a suitable pipe, G, said pipe be 
ing controlled by a throttle-valve, H. 
The engine D may be of any suitable size or 
kind; but by preference I use a pair of small 
reversible engines, the piston or pistons of 
Which are connected to crank-arms I on the 
shaft K, the operation of the engine being 
Controlled by means of the levers L and con 
necting - rod M, or in any other convenient 
lane. 
- The shaft Kis provided with two sprocket 
Wheels, N, one at each side, (only one shown,) 
over which the sprocket - chain O is passed. 
P are sprocket-wheels secured to the axle of 
the car, over which the sprocket-chain O is 
also passed, and by which power is imparted 
to propel the car from the engine D. 
I do not limit myself to this particular man 
ner of propelling the car, as I may have the 
car so constructed as to mount the engine and 
boiler on one end of the same and use a train 
of spur or cog gearing for driving the car. 
Having thus described myinvention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
1. A device for conveying coal to the coking 
ovens or kilns, consisting of a car having the 
coal - hopper and an engine and boiler 
mounted on the same trucks, said engine be 
ing connected to the trucks of the car in the 
manner described, whereby the car can be pro 
pelled from place to place, as set forth. 
2. In a lorry or coal car for carrying coal 
to the coking-ovens, the combination of the 
platform A, extending beyond the body of the 
car and at each end thereof, with the boiler C 
at one end and the engine D at the other, and 
the body E, for carrying the coal, supported 
above the platform, provided with suitable 
65 
75 
90 
95 
CC) 
s 
370,626 
trapdoor, substantially as and for the purpose substantially as described, for connecting the 
Set forth. 
3. In a lorry or car for carrying coal to the 
In testimony, whereof Iaffix my signature in 
coking-ovens, the frame A, mounted on suit- presence of two witnesses. 
able wheels and provided with the hopper E, 
in combination with the boiler C, located at one 
end of the frame, and the engine D, mounted 
on the other end of the frame, and devices, 
H. C. VALENTINE, 
J. H. LINGILE. 
engine with the axle of the car, as set forth. Io 
WILLIAM R. JENKINS, J.R. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370727.txt	W. P. CLOUGH, 
PHOTOGRAPH CARD, 
. 
Patented Sept. 27, 1887. 
. 
(No Model.) 
No. 370,727. 
 
7-Ue-to 
N. Peters, Photo-thographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM P. CLOUGH, OF BOSTON, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO GEORGE. F. 
LORING AND SELWYN Z, BOWMAN, BOTH OF SOMERVILLE, MASSACHU 
SETTS, 
PHOTOGRAPH a CARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 370,727, dated September 27, 1887. 
Application filed March 10, 1887. Serial No. 230,362. (No model.) 
O 
25 
': 
By interposing a corrugated strip between 7O 
many different ways and yet form a metallic 
edge for the card. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown the material forming 
the edge of the stiffening-strip as bent upward, 
5 Photograph-Cards, of which the following de- as at 3, to form an edge for one part of the 
card, and bent downward, as at 4, to form an 
edge for the other part of the card, so that the 
two pieces 34 together form a metallic edge 
for the card. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown the stiffening strip 
as bent into tubular form, as at 5, to thus serve 
as an edge for the card. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown the edge as formed 
by merely bending the outer portion of the 
strip downward to lie against the edge of the 
lower part of the card, and then bending the 
strip over upon one face of the card and 
thereby form a metallic edge for the body 
part of the card. 
the different layers or plies of the card the 
latter will not become warped and bent out of 
true. 
It is obvious from the foregoing that the 
form of stiffening-strip may be variously modi- 75 
fied and yet come within the scope of my in 
vention. 
If it should be considered preferable, I may 
employ a corrugated metallic or other rigid or 
unyielding strip extending from edge to edge 8O 
of the card. 
I claim 
1. The card at and the anti-warping or 
stiffening strip having the flat portion 2, sub 
stantially incorporated with and inclosed by 85 
the card, as set forth. 
2. The card a and the stiffening or anti 
warping strip having the flatportion 2, firmly 
incorporated with and inclosed by the card at 
its edge, and having a projecting portion cov 
ering the edge of the card, substantially as de 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM. P. CLOUGH. 
To al., whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. P. CLOUGH, 
of Boston, county of Suffolk, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters 
and figures on the drawings representing like 
partS. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
cards-as, for instance, photograph - cards 
With a stiffening device to prevent the same 
from being warped or bent out of true. 
The invention consists in a card made of two 
IS layers or sheets of paper, or other suitable 
material, combined with a metallic or rigid 
stiffener interposed between the piles or layers 
of material, as will be described. The card 
may be made of one thick piece of paper having 
2O its edges split, to thereby subserve the same 
purpose as when composed of two independent 
layers secured together. The stiffeneris pref. 
erably made of metal cut in strip form, and 
suitably bent, so that one part of the strip may 
enter between the different layers or plies of 
material and another part overlie the edges 
of the material to form a metallic edge for the 
card. 
Many forms of stiffening-strips may be de 
3c vised to carry out the essential feature of this 
invention, which I consider come within the 
scope of this invention. 
Figure 1 shows in plan view a photograph 
card provided with a stiffening strip embody 
5 ing this invention; Figs. 2, 3, and 4, sectional 
details of a portion of a card, each showing a 
different form of stiffening-strip. 
The card a is preferably made of two inde 
pendent pieces or layers of paper, or other 
to material, united together, or it may be made 
of one thick piece of material having its edges 
split or separated in two parts. 
The stiffening-strip herein shown is com 
posed of metal, or other rigid substance, bent 
5 to form a flat portion, as 2, which enters be: 
tween the different plies or layers of the card 
and the overlying-edgeportion. The flat por 
tion 2 is preferably corrugated longitudinally, 
or has barbed points to penetrate each layer 
5o of card, and the edge portion may be bent in 
BERNICE. J. No YES, 
F. L. EMERY, 
Scribed. 
- 
. 
Witnesses: 
m 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370827.txt	(No Model.) 
J. S., STRINGER. 
COFFEE POT, 
No. 370,827. 
Patented 00t. 4, 1887. 
WITNESSES: 
C2 c.162 
4ta. 
-re 
6-O . 
 
n perers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
BY 
INVENTOR: 
year. 79 
%is 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSIAH. SPURGEON STRINGER, OF COLUMBIA, ALABAMA. 
coFFEE-Pot. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 370,827, dated October 4, 1887. 
Application filed June 26, 1884. Renewed November 26, 1886. Serial No. 219,967. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSIAH. SPURGEON 
STRINGER, of Columbia, in the county of Henry 
and State of Alabama, have invented a new 
and Improved Coffee-Pot, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved coffee-pot which is simple 
in construction, produces good coffee rapidly, 
and extracts all the aromatic and flavoring ex 
tracts from the pulverized or ground berries. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with a pot, of a filtering-bag in the same, which 
bag has a string secured to its top and bottom, 
by means of which string the bag can easily 
be reversed. 
The invention further consists in the combi 
nation, with a pot, of a lid having an opening, 
a cup formed on the lid and over the opening, 
and a cup in the first-mentioned cup, the latter 
cup having a bottom opening which can be 
closed by a valve or plug. 
The invention also consists in parts and de 
tails and combinations of the same, as will be 
fully set forth hereinafter. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawing, forming part of this specification, in 
which a longitudinal sectional elevation of my 
improved coffee-pot is shown. 
The pot A, which may be made cylindrical 
or tapering, has a handle, B, and a spout, C, 
the lower end of the spout being near the bot 
tom of the pot. An annular band, D, is se 
cured on the inner surface of the pot, at the top, 
to form an annular groove, D', along the top 
edge of the pot, which groove is to contain 
cold water for sealing the lid E and prevent 
ing any escape of steam. A filtering-bag, F, 
made of muslin or any other suitable material, 
is secured to a ring, G, fitting within the band. 
ID, and having a ledge, G', adapted to rest on 
the upper edge of the band D and thus hold 
the filtering-bag in the pot. A button, H, pro 
jects from the inner surface of the ring G, 
5 which button serves as a handle for the ring. 
Astring, I, is secured to the inner surface of 
the bottom of the bag, and is provided at its 
upper end with a loop which is passed over 
the button H. A ring, J, rests in the bottom 
part of the bag to keep it distended. On the 
middle of the top of the lid E a cup, L, hav 
O 
55 
ing an open top, is formed, and in the middle 
of the lid E. an opening, M, is formed, which 
is covered by the part N, preferably consisting 
of a few layers of fabric or a sponge. A cup, 
O, which is slightly tapered or provided with 
an extension-bead, fits within the top of the 
cup L, and is provided with a lid, P. A 
transverse plate or ledge, Q, is secured in the 
cups O, near the top. A small aperture, R, is 
made in the bottom of the cup O, and may be 
closed by a plug, R, or other device, or may 
be left open. A tapering tube, S, projects 
downward from the lid Etoward the middle 
of the pot, and on its lower end a cup, T, is 
secured, which is adapted to contain water, and 
thus form a seal to prevent the steam from ris 
ing up through the tube S. 
The pot is used in the following manner: 
The ground or pulverized coffee is placed in 
the bag F, and then cold water is poured into 
the groove D. The lid Eisplaced on the pot, 
the cup O is filled with cold water, and then 
hot water is poured through the tube S into 
the sack or bag F. The opening R in the cup 
O is preferably left open, so that a continuous 
stream of cold water can flow upon the cloth 
N, over the opening Min the cover E, whereby 
all steam that passes up through the layers of 
cloth or fabric is condensed. When the potis 
tilted to pour out coffee, the ledge Q. in the 
cup O prevents the water in the cup O from 
being poured out at the top. The cup O must 
be so placed that the ledge Q is on that side 
corresponding to the side from which the spout 
C projects. 
The string I prevents the bag from passing 
into and stuffing the lower end of the spout C, 
and by means of the string the bag can easily 
be inverted to remove the grounds and clean gos 
the bag. 
The pot can be used for preparing tea as 
well as coffee. In place of the string I, a spring, 
chain, &c., may be used. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with the pot, of a filter. 
ing-bag held therein, a ring in the lower part 
of said bag to hold it distended, and a string, 
I, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the pot having a 
95 
IO 
25 
 
370,827 
substantially central opening in the top com 
municating with its interior, of the part N., 
partially obstructing said opening, and a wa 
ter-reservoir above and communicating with 
the opening for delivering Water thereto, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a coffee-pot, the combination, with the 
ring G, of the filtering-bag F, secured on the 
same, and the string I, secured to the bottom of 
the bag and held by a button on the ring G, 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
4. The combination, with a coffee-pot, of the 
ring G, the filtering-bag F, secured to the same, 
the string I, and the button H, secured on 
the inner surface of the ring, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
IO 
15 
5. The combination, with the pot A, of the 
lid E, provided with the cup L and having the 
central opening, M, the fabric N over said 
opening, and the cup O, fitting in the cup L. 
and having the opening R, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
6. The combination, with the pot A, of the 
lid E, having a central opening, M, the fabric 
N, the cup L on the lid, the cup O, having an 
opening, R, in its bottom, and the ledge Q. in 
the cup O, substantially as herein shown and 
described. 
. 
JOSIAI SPCRGEON STRINGER, 
25 
Witnesses: 
J. I. DARI:Y, 
D. F. M. DOUGAL.D. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US370927.txt	(No Model.) 
H. O. CANFIELD. 
BUSTLE, 
No. 370,927. 
Patented 00t, 4 l887, 
 
 
 
  
SM 
42.72 
S22 
S 
y 
& 2 
S 
Y 
8WR 
E. 
d 
 
2 
7. 
S/ 
2 
S 
as 
s 
SZ 
SS 
y 
RW 
n 
les 
S 
- A 
>NHm 
S S 
Eas N 
t 
HaOYS, 
75 . t 
| 
AY 
Ys. N? A. 
S. 
N 
Y y 
 
  
 
St.C. 
3-verbe. 
Ptv.co-cia r 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY O. CANFIELD, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
CANFIELD RUBBER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BUSTLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 370,927, dated October 4, 1857. 
Application filed June 8, 1887. Serial No. 241,783. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY O. CANFIELD, 
residing at Bridgeport, in the county of Fair 
field and State of Connecticut, have invented 
a certain new and useful Improvement in Bus 
tles; and Idohereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale, 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
bustles. 
The object of the present invention is to 
afford a simple and efficient means of con 
structing a bustle that may be made to fold 
flat against the person of the wearer when a 
sitting position is assumed, and that will be 
instantly caused to resume an extended form 
usual to such appendages or supports to the 
Skirts of female attire. 
A further object is to construct a bustle that 
may be folded and resume its shape without a 
complication of parts, and that can be produced 
rapidly in quantity at a low initial cost, 
With these objects in view my invention 
consists in certain features of construction and 
combinations of parts, that will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings making a part of 
this specification, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
in section, showing the interior of the bustle 
and the attached retractile spring. Fig. 2 is a 
detached view of the spring. Fig. 3 shows an 
other form of the springin position on a bustle. 
In the drawings I have only shown one side 
Or half of a bustle; but the construction of the 
other side or half is in all respects similar to 
the side shown. 
A represents one of two body-pieces, pre?. 
erably made of elastic metal, and enveloped 
With a fibrous cover. To these body-pieces eye 
lets are affixed, to permit a cord to be inserted, 
that is useful to change the form of the bustle 
and make it project more or less, as may be de 
sired. 
Upon the body-strips A, near their outer 
edges, the eyelet-bars Bare preferably secured 
by flexible bars, bands, or lacings, that permit 
a hinged action of the bars B upon the body 
strips. These eyelet-bars Bare perforated at 
spaced intervals to receive securing-eyelets, 
by which the flat spring-bows CCC are piv 
otally attached to have a swinging motion 
upon these points of connection. 
Upon the upper spring-bows, CC, similar 
flat bows, DD, are pivoted, to permit them to 
vibrate. The spacing-tape E, or other flexi 
ble band, is attached at properpoints upon the 
spring-bows C C C to hold these bows in hori 
Zontal and parallel position when the bustle is 
uncompressed, the tape E being connected at 
its upper end to the securing - band A', by 
which the bustle is held in place upon the 
wearer. 
The device by which the spring-bows CC, 
&c., are held in normal position, and that per 
mits a folding action of these bows, is shown 
in Fig. 1. It consists of two spiral springs,F, 
one on each side, constructed of spring-Wire, 
and having their ends extended about at a 
right angle to each other. The springs Fare 
attached, preferably, upon the inner surface 
of the eyelet-bars B, near their lower ends, to 
cause the coils of the springs to formjoints, as 
the upright extended ends c of the springs are 
affixed to the inner surface of the eyelet-bars 
B, while the horizontal short extensions d are 
secured by their outer ends to the lower spring 
bow, C, the tension of the spiral springs hold 
ing the lower spring-bow about at right angles 
to the vertical body-strips and eyelet-bars. 
It is evident that the elevation or upward 
swinging movement of the lower bar, C, Will 
permit the other spring-bows above it to be 
folded, and that a release of this spring-bow 
will by the action of the spiral springs F 
cause an automatic resumption of projected 
adjustment of the series of spring-bows, to ex 
tend the skirts of the wearer, the collapse of 
the bustle being effected when a sitting or re 
clining position is assumed by the person 
wearing it. 
In Fig. 3 another form of the springs shown 
in Fig. 1 is exhibited. In this device the spi 
ral springs Fare formed on one piece of spring 
wire bent into a bow shape. The form and size 
of the wire bow S adapts it to lie against the 
inner surface of the lower flat spring-bow, C, 
the center of the bow S. being loosely secured 
in contact with the bow C by a loop of the 
spacing-tape E, to prevent the displacement of 
bow S and cause the bow-spring C to be actu 
go 
95 
Ico 
Io 
25 
35 
2 
370,927 
; 
. 
; 
. 
; 
. 
; 
. 
; 
. 
; 
; 
: 
. 
. 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
. 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
ated by the vertical folding of the bow S. The band, supports for carrying the spring-bows, 25 
Spiral springs F are located near the points of spring-bows pivoted to said supports, and a 
pivotal connection of the lower flat spring-tape connecting the bows and waistband, of 
bow, C, with the eyelet-bars B, and their free two flat coiled springs, each having a short 
5 ends care bent into eyes, through which eye-upper arm and a longer lower arm, the short 
lets or rivets are inserted through the eyelet-upper arms being attached to their respective 3o 
bars B to secure these ends to the bars. It will spring-bow supports and the longer lower 
be seen that this form of construction will arms to one of the spring-bows, substantially 
afford the same advantages as the style of as set forth. 
2. In a bustle, the combination, with a waist 
the bow S, when made to swing upwardly by band, body-strips, eyelet-bars, and spring 35 
pressure, such as is incidental to the assuming bows pivotally secured to the eyelet-bars, of a 
of a sitting or reclining posture by a wearer, spring having two spiral coils formed of its 
will have a hinged movement or yielding action body integrally at opposite points, attached to 
15 of its integral spiral springs F, and that these, the eyelet-bars by its ends and to the lower 
from their tension, will instantly cause a down-i spring-bow intermediate thereof, substantially 4o 
Ward movement of the bar C, and the series of as set forth. 
connected bars C, &c., to extend the bustle. In testimony whereof. I affix my signature in 
Io spring-bow extenders shown in Fig. 1, and that 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
: 
; 
; 
; 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
it to take its normal shape when presence of two witnesses. . 
; ; ; ; 
2O. Such a pressure is relaxed. . 
s 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters. 
Patent, is- 
1. In a bustle, the combination, with a waist- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; ; ; 
HTNR v in r: A N 
HENRY O. CAN FIELD. 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
Witnesses: 
; 
; 
WILLIAM. T. HAVILAND, 
WM. D. BISHOP, Jr. 
; 
: 
; 
; 
 
i 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371027.txt	06, COMPOSITIONS, 
COATING OR PLASTIC, 
95- was 
'-- a--- 
- 
4. so 
class 37,027 . 
V ycly cut Cemean? EXAERE, 
on cws 
(vyweal 
Swaced ove 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL BOOG, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
COMPOST ON OF MATTER FOR MAKNG MITATIONS OF STALACTTES AND GROTTO-WORK. 
SPECIFICATION forming art of letters Patent No. 37,027, dated October 4, 1887. 
Application filed June 28, 1887. Serial No. 242,730. (No specimens.) 
obtained with any well-known and convenient 25 
35 
To all willion, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MICHAEL BOOG, a citi. tool, so that the whole structure shall imitate 
zen of the United States, residing at the city a grotto in miniature, with stalactites, stalag 
of New York, in the county of New York and mites, and recesses. The composition is then 
5 State of New York, have invented a new and I allowed to set and soon becomes artificial stone 
of great durability. On account of this com 
useful Composition of Matter to be Used in 
position being water-proof, it may not only be 
Making Imitations of Stalactites and Grotto 
Work, of which the following is a specifica 
used to make ornaments for the mantel-piece 
or table and the like, but also for ornamenta. 
tion. 
Io My composition consists of the following in 
tion in aquariums and fountains and in simi 
gredients, combined in the following propor 
lar places. 
tions, viz. Hydraulic cement forty parts plas: 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
ter-of-paris, twenty parts sand ten parts; 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
aga 
in small fragments, ten parts; 
The herein-described composition of matter 
parts. 
5 One dust, ten parts; inseed oil, ten p. 
to be used for making imitations of stalactites 
At these ingredients 
tigh Water 
and grotto-work, composed of hydraulic cem 
to make the mass of about the consistency of 
ent, plastero?paris, Sand, miga irgldust 
and E. the s: specified 
ordinary mason's plaster. Then, having made 
a frame of wire of any desired shape, Itake linen 
In witness whereof Ihereunto set my hand in 
20 or cotton rags, and having smeared them Wilth 
presence of two witnesses. 
sEEE I wind them around 
the Wires until a sufficient body has been ob 
tained. 
then apply the composition, still in 
a plastic state, to the outside of the body thus 
C. E. McDoNALD, 
FREDR. W. RUBIEN. 
MICHAEL BOOG. 
Witnesses: 
as 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371127.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TIAN HAGEMANN, OF LONDON, ENG. 
RT DOMEIER AND JOSEPH GLATZ, OF 
ALBERT DOMEIER AND OTTO CHRIS 
LAND, ASSIGNORS TO SAID ALBE 
BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
PROCESS OF RECOVERING G 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 371,127, dated October 4, 1887. 
LYC E RINE FROM SOAP. LYES. 
Application filed March 18, 1887. Serial No. 231,357. (No specimens.) 
O 
To ald, whon, if invay concern. 
Be it known that we, ALBERT DOMEIER and 
OTTO CHRISTIAN HAGEMANN, residents of 
London, England, have invented an Improved 
5 Process for Treating Soap-Lyes for the Pur. 
pose of Obtaining Glycerine and other Pro 
ducts Therefrom; and we do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, complete, and ex 
act description of Said process. 
The objects of this invention are, first, to 
obtain glycerine and other useful products 
from soap-lyes, and, second, to remove impuri 
ties from the glycerine. 
In carrying out our invention we proceed as 
I5 follows: The spent iyes are collected in a suit 
able tank, whereupon there is added to them 
a small proportion of caustic lime, baryta, 
alumina, or any earthy or metallic oxide or 
hydrate capable of combining with the soapy 
2O and fatty matters that are contained in the 
In ordinary cases it will suffice to add 
lye. 
about two pounds of the lime to about one 
hundred gallons of the lye. The lime, or its 
above-mentioned equivalents, produces an in 
25 soluble precipitate, which quickly settles to 
the bottom of the tank in which the operation 
is performed, and thus the lye is purified from 
a large proportion of the fatty matters it con 
tained. We next boil the lye down to the 
3o salting-point'-that is to say, we concen 
t rate it until it is Saturated with Salt. This 
eliminates a considerable quantity of the Wa. 
ter, reduces the bulk of the lye, and brings it 
into the best condition for subsequent treat. 
35 ment. We now draw off the lye into another 
tank and mix with it an insoluble silicate 
such as silicate of alumina (kaolin) or silicate 
of magnesia, glass-flour, or finely-divided sil 
ica-the mixing being by preference effected 
to while blowing air through the lye. A good 
proportion is the addition of about one and 
one-half pound of kaolin to sixty gallons of 
lye. We now add an excess of hydrochloric 
or other acid, and continue the blowing of air 
45 for some time after the acid has been added, 
allowing the resultant precipitate to settle, 
whereupon we draw off the clear lye. By an 
excess of hydrochloric acid we mean such a 
quantity of acid as will show from one to one 
and one-half per cent. of free acid to the origi- so 
nal bulk of the lye. The exact quantity to be 
added depends, necessarily, upon the fatty and 
resinous matter contained in the lye. By the 
addition of the acid the fatty and resinous 
constituents of the lye are rendered insoluble, 55 
and, being liberated from the solution in the 
presence of the finely-divided kaolin, combine 
mechanically with the same, forming a heavy 
precipitate, which quickly subsides, leaving 
the lye clear and bright. 
It will be seen from the above statement that 
the object of the kaolin or its equivalent is, to 
an extent, of a mechanical character-namely, 
to mechanically combine with the insoluble 
resinous matter, causing the same to fall to the 65 
bottom of the lye. Any matter that will per 
form this function is by us regarded as equiva 
lent to the kaolin, and we find, among others, 
that instead of kaolin a small proportion of 
light petroleum or other oil may be used. In 7o 
: this case the petroleum rises to the surface of 
the lye and brings with it the separated fatty 
and resinous acids, which can be conveniently 
skimmed off. It requires, however, consider 
able agitation to render this process available, 
and even then the separation is not as good 
and clear as by the kaolin method. We now 
add to the lye Soda, either caustic or carbonate 
of soda, the same being added in such pro 
portion as to render the liquor faintly alkaline; 
and we heat the lye to about 80 centigrade 
and allow the resulting precipitate to settle, 
drawing off the clear lye. The object of add 
ing the soda is to purify the lye from albumin 
ous matters, which coagulate and fall to the 
bottom. Instead of soda, any other suitable 
alkali may be added to the lye. Finally, we 
boil the lye to about 150 centigrade, thereby 
evaporating more water, causing the salt which 
is carried in the lye to crystallize. This salt may 
be washed and used over again in the manufac 
ture of soap. The lye, purified from soapy and 
fatty matters by the first operation-namely, the 
addition of lime-from fatty acids and resinous 
acids by the third operation-namely, the ad 
dition of acid and kaolin-and from albumin 
ous matters by the fourth operation-namely, 
the addition of soda-is thus by the final evap 
95 
 
371,127 
- 
treatment. 
orating process concentrated, so as to elimi 
nate the remainder of the water and most of the 
salt, giving us asafinal product crude glycerine, 
which is fit for distillation without any other 
In many instances the first operation 
namely, that of adding lime-is not essential, 
as the third operation-namely, the addition 
of acid and kaolin-will also suffice by itself 
to eliminate the fatty and soapy matter; but 
this requires more acid and renders the process 
more expensive. If the spent lye is at once 
treated with the hydrochloric acid and kaolin 
without previous treatment With lime, it must 
nearly always be done in a thin state-that is, 
before it is boiled down to salting-point. This 
in most cases is necessary on account of the 
difficulty experienced in boiling down a soapy 
lye, from its tendency to froth and boil over. 
By adding the line this difficulty is overcome, 
and the second process of boiling down is ren 
dered practicable; yet of course by omitting 
the first and second processes and starting on 
the spent lye with the hydrochloric acid and 
kaolin we arrive at the same result, but at 
greater expense and less convenience. 
As to the third process-to wit, that of add 
ing kaolin and an excess of hydrochloric acid 
we may state that, although other suitable acid 
may be used, hydrochloric is by far the best, 
because it produces chloride of sodium, (com 
mon sait,) which, when recovered, can be used 
over again indefinitely in the manufacture of 
SOap. 
As to the fourth operation-namely, puri 
fying the lye from albuminous matters-it is 
necessary to have the lye neutral in order to 
get the best result, and accordingly it is neu 
tralized with carbonate or caustic soda, or other 
alkali, which, in conjunction with the hydro 
chloric acid used in operation No. 3, helps 
form chloride of sodium. 
We will here recapitulate in brief our pro 
cess of treating lye for the purpose of obtain 
ing its valuable constituents. This process 
involves the addition, first, of lime; second, 
boiling it down to the salting-point; third, 
mixing it with kaolin and hydrochloric acid; 
fourth, mixing it with soda, and, fifth, con 
centrating it until the salt is crystallized and 
the glycerine formed. Out of this lye we have 
removed, first, by the addition of lime, cer 
tain of its fatty constituents; second, by the 
boiling, a certain quantity of its water; third, 
by the acid and kaolin, its resinous and fatty 
acids; fourth, by the addition of soda, its al 
buminous constituents, and fifth, by the final 
concentration, the salt. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The process herein described of recov 
ering glycerine from lye, which consists in 
adding thereto, while air is blown through the 
lye, an excess of acid in the presence of an 
insoluble silicate, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
2. The process of recovering glycerine from 
lye, which consists in adding to it an acid in 
the presence of a current of air and of an in 
soluble powder to serve as a mechanical car 
rier of the resulting precipitate, said precipi 
tate being the insoluble resinous and fatty acids 
that were originally contained in the lye. 
3. The process of preparing lye for the ex 
traction of glycerine, which consists in adding 
thereto an excess of acid in the presence of a 
mechanical carrier in the nature of an insolu 
ble powder of the resulting precipitate, and 
afterward adding an alkali to said lye for the 
purpose of removing the albuminous matters 
therein contained, as specified. 
4. The process herein described of extract 
ing salt from lye, which consists in adding 
thereto acids in the presence of an insoluble 
powder constituting a mechanical carrier of 
the resulting precipitate, and afterward add 
ing an alkali to the lye and then boiling it 
down until the salt it contains crystallizes and 
glycerine is separated, as set forth. 
5. The process of extracting salt and glyc 
erine from lye, which consists in first adding 
lime; second, boiling the lye down to the salt 
ing-point; third, adding acid in the presence 
of an insoluble powder constituting a mechan 
ical carrier of the resulting precipitate, then 
adding alkali, and finally boiling the lye down 
until the salt crystallizes and glycerine is sep 
arated, as set forth. 
6. The process of recovering salt and glyc 
erine from spent lye, which consists in adding 
lime, then acid in the presence of a mechani. 
cal carrier of the nature of an insoluble pow 
der of the resulting precipitate, then soda, 
and finally boiling down the lye until the salt 
it contains crystallizes and glycerine is sep 
arated, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification, in the presence of 
the subscribing witnesses, at London, this 28th 
day of February, 1887. 
ABERT DOMIEER. 
OTTO CHRISTIAN HAGEMANN. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY G. FREEMAN, 
J. MAY, 
Both of 9 Birchin Lane, London. 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
CO 
30 
4) 
5 s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371228.txt	(No Model.) 
L. H. TAYLOR. 
STEAM COOKER, 
No. 371228, 
Patented Oct. 11, 1887. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
LAWRENCE. H. TAYLOR, OF MERCER, 
MAINE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
FRANK SMITH, OF SAME PLACE. 
STEAM - COO KER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 371,228, dated October lil, 1887. 
Application filed May 11, 1887. 
Serial No. 237,860. (No model.) 
K 
IO 
I5. 
To all, whom it Tay concern: 
Be it known that I, LAWRENCE. H. TAYLOR, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Mer 
cer, in the county of Somerset and State of 
5 Maine, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Steam - Cookers; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to steam-cookers of 
that class which employ condensing covers to 
condense the steam which would otherwise be 
spent, so that but very little water is required 
to do the cooking, as the water of condensa 
tion is used over and over, and the flavor of 
the fruit or vegetables is preserved and not 
allowed to saturate the surrounding atmos 
phere. 
The object of this invention is to improve 
this class of cookers and simplify the cost of 
construction of the same, and increase their 
efficiency and convenience for use. 
The improvement further consists in the 
novel features of construction, hereinafter more 
3O fully described and claimed, and shown in the 
annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a steam 
cooker embodying my invention; Fig. 2, a 
vertical central sectional view on the line aca 
of Fig. 1, showing the device applied to a ket 
tle, the upper portion of which is shown by 
dotted lines; Fig. 3, a perspective view of the 
condensing-cover. 
The cooker is composed of the vessel A, for 
holding the substance to be cooked, the sup 
port B, and the condensing-cover C, which 
comprises or is made up of an outer and in 
ner shell, D and D, respectively, the plate D', 
and the mouth-piece D". The outer and inner 
shells are preferably basins inverted and hav 
ing their edges soldered to the plate or ordi 
nary cover, D", thereby forming the two com 
partments-the water-compartment d and the 
steam-space d". The outer shell, D, is cen 
5o trally apertured, and the mouth-piece D", which 
45 
is a patty-pan of ordinary construction having 
the bottom removed, is secured to the shell D 
about the aperture therein. That portion of 
the cover D' opposite the steam-space d is 
provided with a series of different-sized open- 55 
ings. The larger opening is for admitting the 
steam into the steam-space, where it is con 
densed by the cooling medium in the compart 
ment d, and the smaller openings allow the 
Water of condensation to escape back into the 
vessel. The spouts e surround the smaller 
openings; but the larger opening, E, is left as 
formed by the punch. 
The support is composed of two pans, F and 
G. The pan G is placed within the pan F, and 
is soldered thereto, and that portion of the 
bottom of the pan F opposite the pan G is cut 
away, so as that the vessel A may rest upon the 
bottom of the pan G, which is perforated and 
designed to fit within the end of a small pan, 
while the sides of the pan F, which are per 
forated, overlap and embrace the same; or the 
support may be placed in the pot with the 
edges of the pan F resting upon the shoulders 
of the pit of the said pot. In practice the 
substance to be cooked is placed within the 
vessel A, which is set upon the support, and 
the support is placed over a pan or in a pot or 
kettle, and resting upon the pit of said pot or 
kettle. The cover is next placed in position. 
The steam arising enters the steam - space 
through the opening E, and is condensed 
therein, and escapes by way of the tubes e, 
which hold the condensing-cover in position 
upon the vessel A. 
. If desired to cook more than one lkind of 
food at the same time, use a pot or kettle in 
the manner set forth, and fill the space be 
tween the outside of the vessel A and the in 
ner sides of the pot or kettle with the second go 
kind. The third kind is placed in a steamer, 
such as is in common use. The steamer is then 
placed over the pot or kettle in the usual man 
ner, when the condensing-cover is placed in 
position upon it. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination, with the plate having 
different-sized openings and the short tubes IOO 
85 
75 
95 
 
37,228 
extended from the smaller openings, of the 
outer and inner shells secured to the plate, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. The herein shown and described condens 
ing-cover, composed of the outer and inner 
shells, the plate secured to the shells and form 
ing two compartments, and provided with dif 
ferent-sized openings opposite the inner com 
partment, the short tubes surrounding and 
projected from the smaller openings, and the 
mouth-piece, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the vessel, of the 
IO 
support composed of the two pans F and G, 
constructed as described, and the condensing 
cover composed of the shells D D, the plate 
D', and the mouth-piece D", substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ILAWRENCE. H. TAYLOR. 
Witnesses: 
RUHAMAH CROSWELL, 
HENRY T. CROSWELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371328.txt	(No Model.) 
M. T. JONES. 
CUFF HOLDER, 
No. 371,328, 
Patented 00t, ll, 1887. 
(0/z12 cesses, 
2-4 Zisy 
--- 
Zeavezzo 
(776ceroovy (a/2 - 727--es 
a 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MARIANA T. JONES, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
CUFF HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 371,328, dated October 11, l887. 
Application filed August 11, 1887. Serial No. 246,693. (No model.) 
The shank 2, at a point intermediate its 
length, is bent to present a loop, 6, the ex 
tremity of which loop is also bent over, as at 
7, backward toward the shank portion, to 
thereby form a hook or shield, which receives 
the end or point of the pin 5, so that the at 
taching device for the cuff holder resembles an 
ordinary Safety-pin. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown the hook-shaped 
button-engaging end as open at the side instead 
of at the end, as shown in Fig. 1, which con 
struction is equally desirable. 
By making the cuff-holder of a single piece 
of wire, as herein shown, it may be very cheaply 
made, and its construction permits it to be 
very easily operated. 
To all whom, it may concern, 
Be it known that I, MARIANA T. JoNES, of 
Boston, county of Suffolk, and State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Cuff-Holders, of which the following descrip 
tion, in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, is a specification, like figures on the 
drawings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object to construct 
a cuff-holder, especially adapted for ladies' 
use, which may be easily and quickly applied 
and will securely hold the cuff in position. 
The cuff-holder herein to be described is 
made of wire or equivalent material, one end 
of which is bent to form a hook-shaped button 
engaging portion, and the other end is over 
turned upon the shank portion to serve as a 
I claim 
pin to penetrate the material of the sleeve. 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
The shank portion at a point intermediate its 
cuff-holder made of a single piece of wire, it 
length is bent to form a loop, which loop is 
comprising a shank portion, 2, a button-en 
gaging hook, 3, at one end, the pin 5 at the op 
afterward bent or overturned to form a hook 
or shield to receive the end or point of the pin. 
posite end, and a hook, 67, formed by bend 
Figure 1 shows in plan view a cuff-holder 
ing the wire, as shown, at an intermediate 
embodying this invention, and Fig. 2 a similar 
point of the shank 2, to receive the end or point 
of the pin, substantially as described. 
view of a modified form of cuff-holder. 
The wire or strip of material is of suitable . In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
length to form the shank portion 2, one end of to this specification in the presence of two sub 
which is bent to form a hook-shaped loop, 3, 
having a narrow neck, 4, and an enlarged cir 
cular portion, which receives the shank of the 
cuff-button. The other end of the Shank 2 is 
turned over upon the shank for a suitable dis-, 
tance to form, a pin, 5, the end of which is 
sharpened or pointed, to thereby penetrate the 
material of the sleeve or other article. 
MARIANA T. JONES. 
Witnesses: 
BERNICE. J. No YES, 
F. L. EMERY. 
scribing witnesses. 
15 
55 
IC 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371428.txt	(No Model.) 
J. L. COOK, 
THILL COUPLING, 
No. 371,428, 
Patented 00t, ll, l887, 
C 
2. 
o 
2se 
% 
 
WITWESSES 
2-1. 
6 
6- 
a. 
.- 
IWWEWTOR 
Maves Z. (ooA. 
Attorhegs 
 
(UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES L. COOK, OF SPRING FIELD, ILLINOIS. 
THILL COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 371,428, dated October ll, 1887. 
Application filed June 30, 1887. Serial No. 243,054 (No notel.) 
O 
To a/Z u?ion, it 7 city concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMIES L. COOK, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at Spring 
field, in the county of Sangamon and State of 
5 Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Thill-Couplings; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
thill-couplings; and it consists in the novel con 
struction and arrangement of devices, is here 
inafter specified and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal vertical sectional view of a thill 
coupling constructed according to my improve. 
ments. Fig. 2 is a transverse sectional view 
of the same on line acac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
view of the double-armed lever removed, and 
Fig. 4 is a cross-section taken on the lines y ly 
of Fig. 3. 
The letter A of the drawings represents a 
clip attached to the axle-tree in the usual man 
ner by nuts and screws. This clip is con 
structed with a bifurcated front extension, 
(marked IB,) which is adapted to receive the rear 
end of a thill and hold it securely by means of 
a pin or bolt, C, as shown in Fig. 1 of the draw - 
ings, the bolt requiring no thread or nut. 
The letter D represents a casting, the upper 
end of the rear wall of which is curved rear 
Wardly, as shown at a, and adapted to clasp 
the eccentric-shaped and double-armed lever, 
hereinafter described, and the bottom portion 
of said casting constitutes a rectangular recess 
for holding a rubber block, also hereinafter 
mentioned. 
The letter E represents a lever provided 
with two arms, as shown in Fig. 3. The cen 
tral portion of this lever, which is clasped by 
the curved extension of the casting D, is made 
round in cross-section, while its ends between 
Said round portion and handles are cam 
shaped, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3 of the draw 
lings. 
H represents a block of rubber 
which rests in the rectangular recess formed in 
casting D, and is constructed with a concave 
So upper face, which, when on duty, rests against 
The letter 
3O 
3. 5 
 
the lower side of the thill, as shown in Fig. 1. 
I usually provide a plate, (marked c,) which 
is interposed between the bottom of the recess 
in casting D and the rubber block H. 
The letter 9 represents a thumb-screw, which is 
5 
is passed through the bottom of the casting D, 
in a threaded opening, with its point resting 
against the bottom of plate c, the point being 
riveted into a countersink to prevent the 
thumb screw from coming out. 
My invention is operated as follows, namely: 
After the Several parts have been placed in po 
sition the arms of the calm-lever E are turned 
downwardly, each arm of which fits closely 
over the ends of the pin or bolt C and holds 65 
the same Securely. The thumb screw 9 is then 
turned until the desired pressure is obtained 
against the lower side of the thil, and the work 
is completed. 
It is ol) vious that by this construction the 
cam-shaped lever will hold its arms securely 
over the ends of the pin or bolt C, and by means 
of the thumb screw of the rubber block can be 
given Such a pressure against the thill that all 
rattling and noise will be avoided. The pin 
or bolt C, being held in position by the cann 
lever E, (which can be raised or lowered by 
loosening the thumb screw,) does away with 
the necessity of a nut on the bolt, enabling the 
operator to uncouple the tlit with ease and 
rapidity. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a thill-coupling, the combination, with 
the clip having the perforated lugs, of the an 
gular casting adapted to receive the rubber, 85 
the thill-bolt, and the cam-bolt having the le. 
vers or arms adapted to embrace the ends of 
the thill-bolt, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, in a thill coupling, of 
the casting adapted to receive the rubber block, 9C 
and the cam-bolt forming a fulcrum for the said 
casting and having lateral arms adapted to pre 
vent the displacement of the thill-bolt, sub 
stantially as specified. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 95 
JAMES T. COOK. 
Witnesses: 
SHELBY C. DoRWIN, 
HENRY BURNS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371528.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAGNUS SWENSON, OF FORT SCOTT, KANSAS. 
VANU FACTURE OF SUGAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 371,528, dated October 11, 1887. 
Application filed December 20, 1886. Serial No. 222,909. (No specimens.) 
any effect on the cane-sugar, so that its libera- 5c 
acid in the calcium carbonate is a very weak 45 
My invention relates to the diffusion process tion does no harm. 
In the diffusion process of making sugar from earth is insoluble and neutral. 
To a 20, whon, it navy concern: 
Be it known that I, MAGNUs SWENSON, a one, so that the free acids from the chips at 
citizen of the United States, residing at Fort once combine with the lime and liberate the 
Scott, Kansas, have invented certain Improve. carbonic acid until the solution becomes neu 
ments in the Manufacture of Sugar, of which trail. The carbonic acid is too weak to have 
the following is a specification. 
of making sugar; and the object of my inven- 
I am able to use an excess of the carbonate 
tion is to prevent the inversion of the cane-su- without detriment to the sugar, because the 
gar in the diffusion-battery-an object which I surplus of the carbonate over that needed to 
attain by adding a carbonate of the alkaline neutralize the acids remains inert and un- 55 
changed, since the carbonate of the alkaline 
earths to the diffusion-bath. 
sugar-cane the vegetable or organic acids in the 
Instead of calcium carbonate, I may use any 
cane-chips which diffuse out into the surround- other convenient carbonate of the alkaline 
ing water tend to convert the cane sugar into earths-such as carbonate of magnesium, or 6. 
grape-sugar, and various attempts have been strontium, or barium; but I prefer calcium 
made to prevent this invertive action of the carbonate on account of its cheapness and ef. 
organic acids in the cane by adding lime or bi- fectiveness for the purpose. 
I claim as my invention 
sulphite of lime or other materials to the bath 
or battery; but such attempts have met with 
1. As an improvement in the diffusion pro- 65 
no practical success, for various reasons which cess of making sugar, the mode herein de 
it is not necessary to detail. I have found that scribed of preventing the invertive action of the 
by the employment of carbonates of the alka- organic acids in the cane-chips upon the sugar 
line earths in the diffusion-battery this invert- during the process of extraction, said mode 
ive action of the organic acids can be effectu- consisting in adding to the diffusion-bath a 73 
carbonate of the alkaline earths, substantially 
ally stopped. 
bonate of calcium-by preference in the form 
2. As an improvement in the diffusion pro 
of precipitated chalk, for instance-or other cess of making sugar, the mode herein de 
convenient form of carbonate of lime, and I scribed of preventing the invertive action of 75 
reduce it to a fine powder. This powdered the organic acids in the cane-chips upon the 
calcium carbonate is added to the cane-chips sugar during the process of extraction, said 
as they are fed into the cells in an amount ex- mode consisting in adding to the diffusion 
ceeding that needed to neutralize the vegeta- bath calcium carbonate, substantially as set 
ble acids of the juice. It may be added either forth. 
dry or suspended in water, care being taken, 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
however, to have it uniformly distributed in to this specification in the presence of two sub 
the chips. When the vegetable acids in the scribing witnesses. 
cane chips diffuse out into the surrounding 
water, they are neutralized by the finely-di- 
vided calcium carbonate, and their invertive 
action on the cane Sugar is thus prevented. 
The combination of the lime and carbonic 
In carrying out my invention I take car. as Set forth. 
MAGNUS SWENSON. 
rtr 
Witnesses: 
E. A. MUNSET, L, 
E. F. WARE. 
8o 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371628.txt	(No Model.) 
A. L. RICH, 
BUSTLE, 
No. 371,628, 
Patented Oct. 18, 1887. 
al 
S 
2. 
al 
ta 
Still 
NHL 21 
2NiFi esses 
J/2/2-4-4- 
2.7%te.--aw 
& Luc - fot 
1%-4... < /2-4 
S$ 4. ftet 11 e -% 6-- A6. 
N. Peters, Phot&-Lithographsr, washington, u.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM LINCOLN RICH, OF ALLEGHENY CITY, PENNSYLVANIA, 
BUSTLE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 371,628, dated October 18, 1887. 
Application filed July 11, 1887. Serial No. 243,997. 
(No model.) 
... O 
15 
20 
To all, whom it may concern: 
It is evident from this construction that the 
bows C when pressed up will spring back to 
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM LINCOLN 
RICH, a citizen of the United States, residing 
their normal position when released from the 
at Allegheny City, and State of Pennsylvania, 
pressure by reason of the torsional strain to 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
which the wires would be subjected. On the 
in Bustles, of which the following is a full, 
reverse or rear side of the plate A, and near 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
its bottom, I securely rivet a light elliptical 
had to the accompanying drawings, making a 
steel spring, 1, as shown in Fig. 2, the trans 
part of this specification, in which 
verse width of which is regulated by the tape 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
i, passing through holes provided for the pur 
bustle with my improvements attached. Fig. 
pose in the leaf of the spring, as shown in Fig. 
2 is a horizontal Section through the linea at 
2. By this simple means the bustle can be 
of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section through 
readily adjusted to any desired size, and yet 
the line y y of Fig. 1. 
be pleasant and comfortable to the wearer. 
My invention relates to bustles; and it con 
J is the ordinary belt for securing the bustle 
to the person, and may be attached to the bustle 
sists in the combination and arrangement of 
the devices herein described and claimed. 
in any well-known and convenient manner. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will proceed to de- I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
scribe the exact manner in which I have car 
ried it out. 
1. In a bustle having means for attachment 
In the drawings, A represents a vertical 
to the person of the wearer, the vertical cen 
centrally - disposed plate provided with the 
trally-disposed plate A, provided with perfo 
perforated flanges (, a, and having on top a 
rated flanges a, in combination with the spring 
metal loop, B, for a purpose hereinafier ex 
bows C C, having eyes at their inner ends, 
plained. 
whereby the said ends are secured to the plate, 
CC represent suitable spring-bows having 
substantially as described. 
their inner ends, c, provided with eyes through 
2. In a bustle having means for attachment 
which pass the headed rivets D, by which the 
to the person of the wearer, the vertical cen 
trally - disposed plate A, having perforated 
ends of said bows are rigidly secured to the 
plate A. The ends of the bows C Care passed 
flanges, in combination with the spring-bows 
through the holes a? in the flanges a before 
CC, having eyes at their inner ends, whereby 
being riveted to the plate, as shown in Fig. 1. 
said ends are secured to the plate, and the wire 
At desirable points along the semicircular 
loop F and tapes E, for supporting said bows, 
portions of the bows CC are formed eyes d, to 
substantially as described. 
which are attached the tapes E, for securing 
3. In a bustle having means for attachment 
the bows in their proper positions in the usual 
to the person of the wearer, the centrally-dis 
posed plate A, and the spring-bows having 
manner. Across the top of the plate A, Ise 
cure the elongated Wire loop F by passing it 
their ends secured thereto, in combination with 
through and riveting it within the loop B, as 
the elliptical spring I, for adjusting the size of 
shown in Fig. 1. 
the bustle, substantially as described. 
The tapes E are secured at their lower ends 
to the bottom wire, C, and their upper ends, 
after passing through the eyes in the wires, are 
secured to the loop F, whereby the several 
wires are supported and prevented from sag 
ging. 
ABRAHAM LINCOLN RICH. 
W. M. BRINER, 
JAMES BEMY, Jr. 
Witnesses: 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371728.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
T. ALEXANDER, 
ANIMAT TRAP, 
No. 371,728. 
Patented 00t, 18, 1887. 
 
 
 
 
 
A. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TONY ALEXANDER, OF BOGUE CHITTO, MISSISSIPPI. 
AN MALTRA P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 371,728, dated October 18, 5.887. 
Application filed September 3, 1887. 
Serial No. 248,695. (No model.) 
5 5 
65 
To al., u?ion, it in a concern: 
Be it known that I, TONY ALEXANDER, of 
Bogue Chitto, in the county of Lincoln and 
State of Mississippi, have invented a new and 
Improved Animal-Trap, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to an animal-trap for 
which I filed an application for United States 
patent on the 8th day of June, 1887, Serial No. 
240,639. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved animal-trap in which the 
trigger operates with great ease and certainty. 
The invention consists of hinged catches 
adapted to engage the jaws or prongs, and of 
a platform pivoted on the catches and resting 
against the sides of the jaws when the catches 
engage the latter. 
The invention also consists in the construc 
tion and arrangement of certain parts and de 
tails and combinations of the same, as will be 
fully described hereinafter, and then pointed 
out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improvement 
in an open position. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional ele 
vation of the same on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a front end elevation of the same. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of my improvement 
in a closed position. Fig. 5 is an enlarged sec 
tional side elevation of the trigger in place on 
the jaws or prongs on the line y y of Fig. 3. 
Fig.6 is a similar view of the same on the line 
a & of Fig. 3; and Fig. 7 is a sectional elevation 
similar to Fig. 5, but showing the trigger dis. 
engaged from the jaws. 
My improved animal-trap is provided with 
a base, A, consisting of two side arms, A, and 
a forwardly-extending curved plate, A, which 
is bent upward and downward sufficiently to 
hold the trap in nearly a horizontal position, 
as illustrated in Fig. 4. On the base A is held 
a post, B, on which are fulcrumed the prongs 
or jaws C, of the same construction as those 
illustrated and described in my previous ap 
plication above referred to. The prongs Care 
operated on by a spring, D, in the same manner 
as those shown in my application above men 
tioned. 
Near the ends of the side beams, A", of the 
base A are formed the upwardly-extending 
pivots E, on each of which is fulcrumed a catch, 
F, provided on its upper inner end with a 
shoulder, F, adapted to engage the top edge 
of the respective prong or jaw C. On each 
catch F is pivoted an arm, G, secured to the 
under side of the platform H., of suitable width 
and length, and held in a horizontal position 
when the trap is in an open position. 
Each arm G is provided on its front edge 
with a point, G, adapted to engage the outside 
of the respective prong C when the shoulder 
F of the catch Fengages the top edge of said 
prong, as illustrated in Figs, 5 and 6. Each 
arm G is also provided near its inner end with 
an offset, G', adapted to engage the inner edge 
of the catch F, so as to prevent the platform H 
from swinging too far backward when the trig 
ger is disengaged, as illustrated in Fig. 7. 
The operation is as follows: The operator 
presses the spring D downward, so as to be 
enabled to place the prongs or jaws C in a 
nearly horizontal position, as illustrated in 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3. The operator now takeshold 
of the platform H and moves it upward, there 
by causing the catches F to swing upward on 
pivots E until the shoulders F of the 
their 
catches engage the top edges of the prongs C. 
The operator now releases the pressure on the 
spring D, and the latter, pressing against the 
fulcrumed ends of the jaws, causes an upward 
pressure on the jaws or prongs, so that the 
shoulders F of the catches F are firmly held 
in place. It will now be seen that the inner 
ends, G', of the arms G rest against the outer 
side of the prongs C, thus holding the platform 
H in a central position, as shown in Figs. 5 
and 6. The trap is now set, and if an animal 
steps on the platform H, then the point G' 
presses against the prong C, thus forming full 
crums for the arms G, which are caused, with 
the platform H, to swing downward, thereby 
pushing the shoulders F over the top edges of 
the prongs C, which thus become free and fly 
upward by the pressure of the spring D. 
It will be seen that the catches Fare disen 
gaged from their prongs C by the action of the IOC) 
75 
90 
95 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
37,728 
platform H and its arms G, which latter push 
the shoulders F off of the prongs C. Thus it 
will be seen that the trigger operates with 
great ease and certainty. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In an animal-trap, the combination, with 
pivoted catches adapted to engage and lock the 
prongs or jaws in place, of a platform provided 
with arms pivoted on the said catches and serv 
ing to disengage the said catches from the 
prongs or jaws, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
2. In an animal-trap, the combination, with 
the prongs or jaws, of hinged catches adapted 
to engage the said prongs or jaws, and a plat 
Cy 
Witnesses: 
E. M. CLARK, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
form provided with arms pivoted on the said 
catches, the arms engaging one side of the 
prongs, so as to push the catches off the prongs 
when the animal steps on the platform, sub 
Stantially as shown and described. 
3. In an animal-trap, the combination, with 
a base provided with upwardly-extending piv 
ots, of prongs fulcrumed on a post held on the 
said base, a spring for operating the said prongs, 
catches fulcrumed on the said pivots on the 
base, and a platform provided with arms piv 
oted on said catches, substantially as shown 
and described. 
TONY ALEXANDER. 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371828.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 371,828, 
| A. DE BRYNK. 
BREECH L0ADING ORDNANCE, 
Patented Oct. 18, 1887. 
?22222222222222,222.No. 
22:222222. 
22:22222222 
A. 
22 
 
? Z 
N ? 
 
 
 
?????? 
Sekon- &? . K??? ?? 
??? 
???? 
? 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTHONY DE BRYNK, OF 
BREECH-LOAD 
ST. PETERSBURG, RUSSIA. 
NG O RD NAN CE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 371,828, dated October 18, 1857. 
Application filed November 10, 1886. Serial No. 218,497. (No 
France November 3, 1886, No, 179,432; in Belgium November 
tria-Hungary March 28, 1886, No. 45,338 and No. 11,190, and in Spain January 5, 1887, No. 6,429. 
model.) Patented in England October 20, 1886, No. 13,404; in 
5, 1886, No. 75, 128; in Italy Decenber 30, 18-6, XLII, 335; in Aus 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
Zo a ZZ tvZvon, zt 7nnaly conce77. 
Be it known that I, A. DE BRYNK, second 
captain Imperial Russian marine artillery, of 
St. Petersburg, in the Empire of Russia, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Guns, (for which I have obtained patents in 
Great Britain, dated October 20, 1886, No. 
13,404; in France, November 3, 1886, No. 
179,432; in Belgium, November 5, 1886, No. 
75,128; in Italy, December 30, 1886, No. 335, 
Vol. 41; in Spain, January 5, 1887, No. 6,429, 
and in Austria-Hungary, March 28, 1886, No. 
45,338 and No. 11,190,) of which the following 
is a specification. 
Figure 1 of the annexed drawings represents 
partially a longitudinal section and partially 
a plan of my improved gun. Fig. 2 represents 
a vertical section on an enlarged size of the 
screw-stopper. Fig. 3 is a plan of the same. 
The gun consists of a core, AA, and aljacket, 
BB, firmly united together by means of a ring, 
CC, and a nut, DD. 
The core A A consists of an internal tube, 
which may be re-enforced by rings or cylin 
ders shrunk upon its exterior, or by wire 
wound upon its exterior surface and under 
tension, or by any combination of the afore 
mentioned rings, cylinders, and wire. The 
core contains the entire bore of the gun. 
The jacket reaches only up to the middle 
part of the gun and may be a single piece of 
metal or made up in parts held or united to 
gether by rings or cylinders shrunk or screwed 
on its exterior or by Wire wound under ten 
SOh 
In the rear part of the jacket B is screwed a 
breech-cylinder, act, which contains the lock 
ing mechanism, of ordinary or any desired 
construction. On the breech end of this cyl 
inder is shrunk on its exterior a ring, C C, to 
which is pivoted the breech-locking mechan 
ism, the whole being firmly held together by 
an external ring, c c, which prevents all ex 
pansion of the rear end of the jacket and se 
curely holds the ring C in place. On the front 
end of the breech-cylinder at are pins did, to 
prevent the independent turning of the core. 
The frontend of the jacket is screw-threaded, 
and a ring, ee, with trunnions, is shrunk upon 
55 
65 
the jacket immediately in the rear of this 5o 
screw-threaded part. 
The joint ring C has on its rear end also a 
screw-thread, but in opposite direction to that 
of the jacket. This ring has, besides, an in 
terior shoulder or recess, f. 
The nut D is double-threaded and in oppo 
site directions. Its threaded parts do not 
reach entirely to its ends, but leave at each 
end of the nut a plain annular surface which 
bears upon the front end of the jacket on one 
side, and on the other side upon the rear-end of 
the ring C, thus enabling the nut D to be easily 
centered. Two pressing or stopper bolts, hi, 
are lodged in the nut D, as represented on 
Figs. 2 and 3. Each of these bolts consists of 
three parts, 1, 2, and 3. The screw bolt 1 
is fitted with a head having indentations 
which correspond to the screw-threads of the 
jacket B and ring C, respectively. The bolt 
l is Surrounded by a nut, 2, lodged in the 
corresponding cavity of the nut D and fitted 
with a flange, 4, by which it is supported in 
the said cavity. To prevent its lifting it is 
held down by a ring, 3, screwed into said cav 
ity and provided with holes 55 for the key. 
The nut 2 is provided on its upper surface 
with a slot, 6, for a corresponding key. 
The purpose of the screw-stoppersh his to . 
prevent unscrewing of the nut D by shooting. 
The jacket B is frecly drawn upon the body 
of the gun from its breech end. Then the nut 
D is placed, and finally the joint-ring C. By 
rotating the nut D the ring C and the jacket 
B are drawn together, and when the stopper 
bolts are tightly screwed down the whole sys 
tem is firmly held together, and the core is 
prevented from longitudinal motion, as well 
as from turning, because the pins did of the 
breech-cylinder enter in corresponding cavi 
ties of the core. 
The proposed construction of the gun has 
for its object, first, making it possible to turn 
the core of the gun upon its main axis when 
the Wearing away or scoring of any part shall 
make such an operation necessary; second, 
making it possible to separate the gun into 
masses to facilitate transportation and in such 
a manner as to render it possible to reassem 
75 
go 
95 
2 
371, 
828 
ble and to mount them on the gun - carriage 
without resort to the cranes or other heavy ap 
pliances necessary for existing guns of the same 
size; third, making it possible to interchange 
the parts of one gun with corresponding parts 
of another one. 
The interior tube of the core is made of soft 
steel by forging, tempering it in oil, and an 
nealing it to the required degree. It is suf 
ficiently thin to avoid all undue internal 
Strains and at the same time to insure its me 
chanical qualities being the best possible and 
equal throughout its whole mass. The dimen 
sions of the re-enforcing rings or cylinders are 
to be made accordingly. The number of the 
series of re-enforcing rings or cylinders, as 
also the external diameter of the core, are de 
termined by the condition that the core should 
present sufficient elastic resistance to tangen- | 
tial Strains on the circumference of the trans 
verse sections of the bore in shooting, and, on 
the other hand, that the metal of the inner 
tube could not be deformed after re-enforcing 
it by rings or cylinders or wire. 
The jacket or its parts are cast of soft steel, 
and then reheated, tempered in oil, and an 
nealed. 
By the use of a thin inner tube and re-en 
forcing rings and cylinders of comparatively 
little dimensions it is possible to manufacture 
guns of the largest calibers and dimensions 
without the aid of the big foundry and forg 
ing appliances which are una voidable in man 
ufacturing guns of the same kind by ordi 
nary systems. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the core of a gun and 
a separable jacket fitting over the breech part 
25 
35 
- 
2. The combination of the core of a gun and 45 
of said core and carrying the breech-cylinder 
for the end of the core, with a joint-ring, C, 4o 
adapted to be passed over the core from the 
opposite end, and a nut uniting the jacket and 
joint-ring over the core, all substantially as 
specified. 
a jacket fitting over the breech part of the 
core, with a joint-ring adapted to be drawn 
over the core from the opposite end, and a 
nut having plain annular parts on its oppo 
site ends and screw-threaded in opposite di- 5o 
rections to unite the joint-ring and jacket over 
the core, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination of the core of a gun, a 
jacket fitting over the breech part of the core, 
a joint-ring adapted to be placed over the core 55 
from the opposite end, a nut, D, screw 
threaded in opposite directions and uniting 
the ring and jacket, and screw-stoppers in the 
nut to lock the latter in position, all substan 
tially as specified. 
4. The combination of the core, a jacket fit 
ting over the breech-piece of the core, a joint 
ring, and a threaded nut uniting the joint-ring 
and jacket, and a screw-stopper for the nut, 
consisting of a screw-bolt having teeth corre. 65 
sponding with the threading on the ring and 
jacket of the gun, an inner nut, and a retain 
ing-ring for the latter, all substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
A. DIE BRYNK. 
Witnesses: 
N. TsCHIEKALOFF, 
L. VOSS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US371928.txt	(No Model.) 
 
C. A. DAWIS, 
RAILWAY OAR, 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 25, 1887. 
(No Model.) 
N0, 37. 
928. 
C. A. DAWIS, 
RAILWAY CAR 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Oct. 25, 1887. 
Ve?? esses: 
(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
  
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
Y 
CHARLES A. DAVIS, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
RA WAY CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 371,928, dated October 25, 1887. 
Application filed August 30, 1887. Serial No. 248,298. 
(No model.) 
To all, ?????, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs A. DAVIS, of 
Washington, in the District of Columbia, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Railway-Cars, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to a railway-car es 
pecially designed for the transportation of 
horses; and it consists in a novel construction 
and arrangement of partitions, whereby I am. 
enabled to carry a large number of horses in 
a given Space conveniently and safely, to pro 
vide for readily feeding and watering them, 
to carry a sufficient quantity of feed for a long 
I5 journey, and in other respects to lessen the 
difficulties of transportation and the dangers 
incident thereto. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a horizontal section of a car, showing the ar 
rangement ofstalls, doors, &c. ; Fig. 2, an en 
larged view of a portion of the same, designed 
to show more clearly the manner of hinging the 
partitions which separate the stalls; Fig. 3, a 
transverse vertical section; Fig. 4.a perspective 
view showing the arrangement of the partition 
next to the aisle or alley-way at the mid-length 
Of the car; Fig. 5, a sectional perspective view, 
and Fig.6 a detail view, of the connecting-sec. 
tion of the partitions. 
A. indicates the body of the car, which may 
be made of Ordinary dimensions, but which I 
prefer to make fifty feet in length, in order to 
carry eighteen horses in each car, that length 
enabling me to accommodate said number with 
Out Crowding or inconvenience. 
B indicates an aisle or alley extending along 
One side of the car from the door Cof that side 
to One end, and B indicates a similar aisle or 
alley extending from the door C of the other 
side to the opposite end. 
These aisles or alleys 
are separated from the body or interior of the 
car by partitions D, of such height as will per 
mit the horses to stand comfortably with their 
necks above them and their heads in the aisles. 
They are sustained by posts or uprights D', 
extending from the floor to the roof of the car, 
and are permanent structures, designed to re 
main fixed in position. 
The posts D'are arranged at distances apart 
equal to the intended width of the stalls, and 
Serve to support the hinged front sections, a, 
of the partitions E, which separate the stalls, 
and in like manner the rear sections, b, of the 
partitions are hinged to posts or uprights F, 
which support the sides of the car and are 
spaced to correspond with the posts D'. In 
some cases it may be found expedient to brace 
the posts F with iron or steel, which, being 
thin, will leave space between them, into which 
the rear Sections, b, of the partitions may swing 
or fold when thrown back to permit the en 
trance or exit of horses, and also adding some 
what to the length of the stalls. This, how 
ever, is a matter of option. 
The partitions E are each composed of three 
parts, the front sections, a, hinged to posts D', 
the rear sections, b, hinged to posts F, and an 
intermediate connecting-section, c, which is 
made removable, and which serves, when in 
place, to maintain the front and rear sections, 
Ct. and b, in line, and to prevent the lateral 
swaying or bulging of the partitions. With 
this object in view, the middle section, c, is 
provided on each face with one or more heavy 
metal straps or bars, d, which either project 
beyond the ends of the section and lie against 
opposite faces of the sections a and b, as indi 
cated in Figs, 1, 2, 3, aud 4, or are hooked at 
their ends to enter eyes made fast to the sec 
tions (, b, as in FigS. 3 and 4. . 
If it be desired to provide means for draw 
ing the sections a, b c tightly together or strain 
ing the partition in the direction of its length, 
S0 that it shall have no lateral play, the middle 
Section, c, may be furnished with a hook, e, at 
One end to engage in an eye, f, of the adjoin 
ing section, and with a sliding bar, g, having 
a hooked end projecting from the opposite end 
of the middle section and adapted to engage 
in an eye, h, of the section adjoining that end, 
the sliding bar being jointed to a hand-lever, i, 
pivoted at one end to section c and serving to 
move the bar longitudinally in either direc 
tion. This will be readily understood upon 
referring to Fig. 5, in which the hand-lever i 
is shown pivoted to a plate or block, i, bolted 
or otherwise secured to section c of the parti 
tion and jointed to the sliding barg in such 
manner that by raising the hand-lever and 
moving it toward the hooked end of barg said 
bar will be thrown forward beyond the end of 
section c, and that by moving the hand-lever 
in the reverse direction the bar will be drawn 
back. The piyots lc and t of the lever and bar 
IOC) 
 
371,928 
are so located that when the lever is brought 
to a horizontal position, as in Figs. 3 and 4, 
they Will fall in line with each other and with 
the eyeh, and thereby hold the bar against 
movement until the hand-lever is manually 
lifted. The sections a b c of the partition be 
ing thus constructed and furnished, the sec 
tions a and b are swung into alignment and 
the intermediate section, c, applied and made 
to connect them, as above explained. If only 
the flat bars or straps d be used, lugs m will be 
applied to the faces of the sections a and b, to 
limit the descent of the bars. All edges should 
be rounded to prevent injury to the horses. 
At the mid-length of the car an alley-way or 
passage, G, extends from side to side of the 
car, dividing it into two sections. This pas 
sage-Way is bounded by the partitions of the 
first stall of each section, and consequently ex 
tends obliquely across the car, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2; and in order that the car-doors 
C and C may come properly opposite the ends 
of this passage - Way they are arranged, as 
shown in Said figures, in positions out of line 
with each other transversely of the car, or di 
rectly opposite the ends of said passage-way. 
This arrangement enables the horses to pass 
straightinto or out of said passage-way through 
the doors and avoids turning, that would other 
wise be necessary, and which is always unde 
sirable. 
The partitions immediately adjoining the 
alley-way G are constructed somewhat differ 
ently from the others, in order that they may 
be folded back out of the alley-way G and out 
of the way of doors CC. Their arrangement 
is clearly shown in Figs. 2 and 4, in which the 
front n of the first stall on each side of pas 
Sage G is shownhinged to its postD' on the front 
side thereof-that is, the side facing the longi 
tudinal aisle or passage B-and at a distance 
The outermost edge 
from the front corner. 
of the front n is designed to swing from its 
normal position in line with partition D to a 
position at right angles there with, or across 
the aisle B, and no post is placed at the outer 
corner of said stall. The forward section, a, 
of each of said partitions is hinged to and 
moves with the front in, and when said front 
is swung across aisle B, as indicated by dotted 
lines in Fig. 2, the section a folds against it, 
as also indicated by dotted lines. The rear 
section, c, of each of the stalls adjoining the 
passage G is hung to one or the other of the 
doors C C, and may either be lifted off its 
hinges or made to Swing against or into the 
face thereof, so that it may be slid back with 
the door. By thus arranging these partitions 
they may be quickly and effectually thrown 
out of the Way to give ample space for turning 
the horses in entering or leaving the car at 
either side. 
To retain and support the fronts an in proper 
position, I extend a heavy hook or rod, H, from 
the side of the car to the outer corner of each 
of said fronts and drop its hooked end into an 
eye or staple, o, on the front n, thus holding 
85 
it securely against movement, yet permitting 
the attendants to readily enter the aisles B by 
simply lifting the rod or bar. The sections a 7o 
and b of the remaining partitions are designed 
to swing, as indicated by dotted lines, into po 
sitions parallel with the partitions D and the 
side walls of the car; but if the sections at of 
the second partition each side of passage G. 75 
remained in such position they would inter 
fere with the clear space secured by folding 
back the fronts in and sections a of the first 
stall each side of said passage. I therefore 
Swing said sections a ofeach of the second par- 8o 
titions from the passage G far enough around 
to lie flat against the previously-folded section 
a of the first partition each side of the pas 
sage, as indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 2, 
thereby Securing a large clear space. 
The aisles B B are designed to permit the 
passage of attendants in front of the stalls to 
feed and water the horses or otherwise attend 
to then, and are also intended to contain 
troughs for watering or feeding the horses, go 
racks for hay, and bins or boxes for storage of 
feed. 
The troughs I are made double and are 
placed in front of the posts D', projecting 
equally to either side thereof, with the excep 
tion of those for the stall at each end of the 
car, the troughs of which are single. From 
the upper side of each trough a double-walled 
box or guard, J, rises sufficiently high to pre 
vent the horses from getting their heads over 
it, these boxes projecting the same distance 
from the fronts of the stalls as do the troughs. 
K indicates a slatted partition, made on the 
lazy-tongs' principle, and thus adapted to 
fold closely together or to be drawn out, as 
required. One such partition is hung to each 
alternate post D' and arranged to fold into or 
to be drawn out of the box or casing J thereof, 
to open or close the aisle B between stalls. By 
this arrangement I am enabled to open the 
aisle for passage of attendants, or to close it to 
prevent the horses from biting one another or 
eating one another's food. The slatted parti. 
tions, which will advisably be of metal, will be 
held in their extended condition by means of 
hooks L or other simple fastenings. They 
will be folded back, except at night or while 
feeding. 
Thepartitions K of all the stalls, except the 
first one each side of the passage-way G, are 
made long enough to extend down between 
and to the bottom of the trough I when ex 
tended; but those of said first stalls must, 
when folded, reach only to a point just above 
the troughs. The reason of this is that the 
troughs of these stalls are required to slide or 
move endwise to clear the fronts in of said 
stalls, in order that said fronts may swing 
across the aisles B. To permit such sliding, 
these troughs are formed with ears p, Fig. 4, 3o 
which hang upon guide-bars q, divided at the 
lines of the hinges on which the fronts n swing, 
and secured, one part to the fixed partition 
B and another to the front in. When fronts 
I 25 
I EO 
IIS 
LC, 
y 
25 
30 
35 
4.O 
45 
SO 
55 
371,928 
- 
3. 
in are to be swung across the aisles, the troughs 
been so used for many years; hence no claim 
Overlapping them are slid back clear of them, 
is made thereto, except in connection with the 
and after the fronts are restored to position 
apron. The apron and the kicking-bar may 
the troughs are moved back. 
be continuous, or in separate lengths or sec 
Directly in front of the troughs I and above 
tions, one for each stall, as deemed advisable. 
them are hay-racks M, the fronts of which are 
From the bar O' a rope, chain, or band, T, 
hinged at their lower edges to permit hay to be 
passes over pulleys or through guides to the 
readily placed within or behind them, after 
farther side of the car, and hangs down in 
which they may be pressed back and held at 
aisle B within convenient reach of the attend 
any desired angle by chains r or other fasten 
By drawing down upon the rope T the 
ant. 
ings. In this way I am enabled to compress 
kicking-bar and apron may be raised up out 
the hay and to pack it into small compass, 
of the way to facilitate the entrance and exit 
thus preventing it from being too freely pulled 
of the horses, the chain or band being made 
out by the horses and wasted. 
fast upon a hook or cleat at the side of the car. 
N indicates a water-tank, of which there are 
U indicates a chest or bin extending along 
two, one for each series of stalls. These tanks 
the aisle B, beneath the troughs I, to contain 
extend lengthwise of the car, near the roof and 
grain or other feed. 
the outer wall thereof, but sufficiently removed 
Owing to the oblique position of the parti 
therefrom to leave an air-space behind and 
tions, a triangular space, V, is left at each end 
of the car, which may be occupied by attend 
above each tank. 
O indicates an apron or guard, which may 
ants or used for storage of hay or other mat 
be of wood, veneer board, straw-board, sheet 
ters. 
metal, or any other light material, suspended 
The tanks are connected by a pipe, W, from 
from the upper part of the car in front of the 
which rises a funnel, W, through which water 
Water-tank, one in front of each. The guard 
may be supplied to both tanks at once. The 
or apron, or the support from which it is sus 
funnel should be covered with a cap to exclude 
pended, should reach to the roof of the car, so 
dust and cinders, except while filling the tanks. 
that the air above the tank shall be confined 
It will be observed that the stalls are so ar 
within the space between the roof, the outer 
ranged that all the horses stand with their left 
wall of the car, and the apron, and prevented 
sides toward the passage G, and this is an im 
from circulating through the rest of the car. 
portant feature, because it is from this side 
that an attendant naturally approaches a 
The tanks being over the rear ends of the 
stalls, the heat and gases arising from the ma 
horse, and in a short time the horses become 
nure and much of the heat given off by the 
so accustomed to being approached from this 
bodies of the animals will ascend to and be 
side that they become restless and fractious 
confined within the space immediately sur 
if the attendant go to the other side instead. 
rounding the tanks, and thus prevent the wa 
To attain this result the aisle B should be at 
ter from freezing in cold weather. 
the left-hand side of the car looking from the 
From each tank a pipe, P, extends across 
middle toward the end, as shown in the draw. 
the end of the car to the aisle B at the oppo 
lingS. 
In loading the car the sections c of all the 
site side, and thence down to a convenient 
level, where it terminates in a faucet, Q, which 
partitions are removed and the sections a b 
swung toward the middle passage, G, the par 
enables the attendant to draw water from the 
tanks at a convenient point for delivering it 
titions immediately next to the passage being 
to the horses. The water will be carried in 
folded across the aisles Band into the doors C C, 
buckets to the horses, it having been found 
(or unhooked from the latter;) then the horse 
that where it is allowed to stand for a consid 
is led into the end stall and retained therein 
by swinging out the sections a, b and applying 
erable time in troughs it becomes more or less 
foul, and the horses will mot drink it. Each 
the section c of the partition which separates 
pipe P is further furnished, close to the tank 
the end stall from the next, and so on through 
with which it connects, with a valve, R, and 
out both series, the hooks or rods being put 
up after the last partition is in place. 
just in advance of said valve with a vent 
pipe, S, extending to the top of the tank. The 
Under my construction and arrangement II 
purpose of these is to enable the attendant to 
am enabled to lead all the horses into or out 
discharge all the water from the pipe to pre 
of the car at either side thereof, instead of be 
vent freezing therein, which is done by clos 
ing required to back the last horse in or the 
ing valve R and opening valve Q, the air en 
first one out, as is necessary with some of the 
tering through vent S and allowing the water 
cars now in use. In this way I avoid much 
of the trouble and danger incident to the use 
to run off. 
The apron or guard O is provided at its 
of certain cars heretofore employed. 
lower edge with a rounded bar or beam, O, 
As the main outer doors of the car cannot 
be opened while the sections b of the partitions 
which, when the apron is in its normal or 
lower position, extends across the rumps of 
are swung out for use, I provide each of said 
the horses and prevents them from kicking. 
main doors with a supplemental door, X, of 
Such a swinging beam or bar has long been 
sufficientsize to permit an attendant to readily 
applied to horse-stalls in stables for the same enter or leave the car, this smaller door being 
purpose, and straps and bands have likewise secured in any convenient manner, 
IS 
15 
20 
25 
35 
1 ? 
45 
?? 
65. 
7? 
75 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
TO 
IIS 
I 25 
I 30 
 
4 
371,928 
O 
The horses are haltered, and the halters are 
carried in pairs to alternate posts-that is, to 
the posts to which the partitions Kare applied. 
These partitions prevent the horses from reach 
5 ing their heads into the adjoining stall at one 
side, and the halters are made short enough 
to prevent their reaching into the adjoining 
stall at the other side; hence the necessity for 
partitions Kacross the aisles B between all the 
stalls is avoided, and their location at alter 
nate posts is made sufficient. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a car, a series of partitions, each con 
15 sisting of a front and a rear hinged section, and 
an intermediate detachable section serving to 
connect the front and rear sections, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In combination with sections a and b of 
the partitions E, provided with eyes or staples, 
intermediate sections, c, provided with hooks 
to enter the eyes, substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. In combination with partition-sections a 
and b, provided with eyes fand h, intermedi 
ate section, c, provided with a hook to enter 
eye f, and with a sliding bar, g, having a 
hooked end to enter eye h, and a lever, i, 
jointed to said sliding bar and pivoted to sec 
3o tion c, substantially as described and shown, 
whereby the bar g may be moved longitudi 
nally and made to draw the partition-sections 
firmly together or release them, as required. 
4. In a car having a transverse passage-way, 
35 as G, a partition at either side of said passage 
way consisting of parts a, b, and c, the part a 
being hinged to a stall-front, n, which is in turn 
hinged at its inner edge to a post, D', whereby 
the partition - section a is adapted to fold 
4o against the front n, and the two to swing away 
from passage-way G. 
25 
5. In a car, the combination of a series of 
stalls, a water-tank in the upper part of the 
car over the rear ends of the stalls, and a guard 
or apron in front of the tank, substantially as 15 
shown, and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a car, the combination of a series of 
stalls, a water-tank in the upper part of the 
car over the rear ends of the stalls, an air-space 
between the tank and the side and top of the 5o 
car, and a guard or apron in front of the tank, 
substantially as shown, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
7. In a car, the combination of a series of 
stalls, a water - tank above the rear ends 55 
thereof, an apron or guard suspended from the 
top of the car in front of the tank, and a beam 
or bar secured to the lower edge of the apron 
or guard and serving as a kicking-bar, as ex 
plained. 
8. In combination with folding stall-front in, 
a trough mounted and arranged to move lon 
gitudinally upon guides on the front thereof, 
whereby it may be brought into position for 
use or moved back to permit the stall-front to 65 
swing or fold back. 
9. In combination with partitions E and 
aisle B, troughs I, located in said aisle, and ex 
tensible partitions K, adapted to be stretched 
across the aisle to prevent the horses from 7o 
reaching the troughs of other stalls. 
10. In a car, the combination, with the outer 
door thereof, of a stall-partition having one of 
its sections hung or attached to said outer 
door, substantially as and for the purpose set 75 
forth. 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand 
CHARLES A. IDAVIS. 
Witnesses: . 
WALTER. S. DODGE, 
ANDREW PARKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372028.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 372,028, 
C. J. KINTNER. 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
ELECTRICAL SAFE LOCK, 
Patented Oct. 25, 1887. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
(62d67 vesses; 
Z7ave 72-z27. 
(No Model.) 
No. 372,028, 
 
 
C. J. KINTNER, 
ELECTRICAL SAFE LOCK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented 00t, 25, 1887. 
 
 
." 
'N 
S. 
R 
Sa' 
N 
Sr. 
SQS 
s: 2Se2 
O3S 
r 
2. 
K 
RNil 
N 
SS 
W 
3. 
s 
St. "E 
/RS ''. 
O 
s 
s 
- 
l 
il 
"is a bit 
- 
N - 
N 
MYeeze esses. 
it 
r-R 
is 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washingtan.C. 
(No Model.) 
. 
No. 372,028, 
C. J. KINTNER, 
ELECTRICAL SAFE LOOK 
3 sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Oct. 25, 1887. 
COczeesses. 
26%-4----e. 
Zvez7az27 
31. a 1 
C 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES J. KINTNER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
EECTRICAL SAFE LOC K. 
SPECIFICATION ioning part of letters Patent No. 372,028, dated October 25, 1887. 
Application filed May 16, 1887. Serial No. 238,440. 
(No model.) 
O 
23 
25 
To all, whom it nail? concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs J. KINTNER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of Penn 
5 Sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Combination Safe, or . Vault 
Locks, of which the following description, 
taken in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, is a full and exact specification. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of a safe, showing the door closed, and a well 
known form of combination disk and knob, 
together with the bolt-drawing crank located 
just below said disk and knob. Fig. 2 is a 
I5 vertical cross-section of Fig. 1, taken on line 
a lac, Fig. 1, and showing the interior mechan 
ism in elevation. Fig. 3 is a vertical eleva 
tion of the interior of the door with the lock 
Controlling mechanism and bolts as seen look 
ing outward from the back of the safe toward 
the front. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the bolt 
drawing apparatus, bolts, and mechanism for 
rotating the magneto generator, together with 
the unlocking-magnet and its armature. Fig. 
5 is a vertical elevation of Fig. 4, showing the 
bolt-bar thrown into locking position. Fig. 
6 is an elevation of the locking parts only, 
showing the bolt-bar in position to be drawn, 
the driving-gear shown in Fig. 5 being re 
moved to better show said parts. Fig. 7 is a 
detail view of the main locking - armature. 
Fig. 8 is a plan view of the tumblers or combi 
nation - disks, electrical contact springs and 
plates, and the spindle with its combination 
knob, two of the disks being cut away to show 
their interior construction. Fig. 9 is a cross 
section of Fig. 8, showing the electrical con 
tact-plates and contact-springs for making the 
combinations, and also showing the interior 
of one of the disks. Figs. 10, 11, 12, and 13 
are detail views of parts of the tumblers or 
combination-disks, being similar to those in 
Connon use in the Well-known forms of conn 
bination-locks, and only shown and described 
here to better facilitate the construction of my 
complete apparatus in all its details. Fig.14 is 
a diagrammatic view, partly in section and 
partly in elevation, all that part connected di 
rectly with the bolts being shown turned ninety 
degrees from the interior face of the door to bet 
ter display the parts, the whole being designed 
to show the position which the several parts 
35 
SO 
O 
5 
I will first describe the drawings in detail, 7o 
assume when the safe is locked and the bolts 
in position. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
My invention consists in certain improve 
mentS in Combination-locks and mechanism 
connected therewith, whereby such locks are 
controlled through the agency of electricity. 
In order that those skilled in the art to which 
my invention appertains may fully under 
stand the same and be enabled to construct 
and use it, I will now proceed to disclose it in 
the following specification, taken in connec- 65 
tion with the drawings above referred to, and 
to this end will particularly point out in the 
claims at the end of this specification that 
which constitutes my improvements. 
alluding to each part and its functions, and 
will then describe the mode of operation of 
the whole apparatus at length, together with 
the essential advantages which I claim for the 
S. 
Prior to my invention combination-locks 
embracing What is known as combination 
wheels or disks, one for each combination, 
and capable of assuming respectively as many 
positions as there are numbers on the exterior 
disk or dial-plate, were provided each with a 
notch in its face, into which what is known as 
the gate' falls when the combination has 
been correctly made and all of said notches 
arranged in line beneath the gate bar, after 
which, by turning the combination - spindle 
slowly to the right, the gate acts mechanically 
upon a tumbler and turns it so that the bolts 
can be drawn through the agency of the bolt 
handle. 
By my invention I do away with the gate 
entirely and substitute therefor a series of 
insulated electrical contact-plates ranged 
around the said disks in succession, one such 
plate for each number formed on the dial-plate 
on the outside of the safe. Upon these con 
tact-plates bear contact-springs, which are 
adapted to complete an electrical circuit, when 
the combination is correctly made, from the 
magneto - generator or a voltaic battery 
through an electro-magnet or equivalent de 
vice, and thereby release a locking-bolt and 
permit the bolts to be drawn. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents an 
75 
95 
2 
372,028 
O 
3O 
O 
45 
55 
ordinary safe, and D the door thereof, shown 
closed in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, with the bolts in 
place. 
O is a spindle of conical form, such as is in 
common use in safe-locks, and has on its ex 
terior end the usual numbered combination 
dial, Q, with the knob K for manipulating it. 
On its inner end is screwed and keyed a disk, 
D". The spindle O extends through this disk, 
as shown in Fig. 8, into a concentric cylin 
drical bearing, which latter is integral with a 
yoke, Y, securely attached by screws X'X' to 
the inner surface of the door. Before this yoke 
is put in place the disks D'D' D'are slipped 
onto this concentric bearing extension, the in 
ner one, D', abutting snugly against the yoke 
Y, but free to turn on said bearing. A spac 
ing-washer, U, Fig. 12, is then slipped on the 
bearing, its spline of fitting in a groove adapted 
to it, as seen in Fig. 9, thus abutting against 
disk D', separating it from the succeeding disk 
D', which is now slipped on the concentric 
bearing, followed by another spacing-ring U, 
and finally disk ID", against which abuts a flat 
ring or washer held in place by a steel open ring, 
U'. (Seen in Fig. 13 and in places in Fig. 8.) 
Each of these disks D, D, D", and Disprovided 
with a pin, P, on its left-hand lateral face, 
which is free to rotate in a groove, K, of the 
next left hand disk and to take against a lug, 
L', on ring R, journaled loosely on an inwardly 
extending portion of said disk, (see Figs. 8, 9, 
10, and 11) and thereby pick up said next 
left-hand disk and cause it to rotate in the 
same direction as the preceding disks, so that 
after the knob IK has been rotated three or 
more times in either direction successively 
all of the disks will be mechanically connected 
together, and will therefore rotate together, 
and all the numbers l l l 1 on said disks will 
be in line. (See Fig. S.) 
It will be observed that the notches K of 
disks D* D' D' (see Figs. 9 and 10) are respect 
ively three times as wide as lugs L or pins P. 
This is for the purpose of bringing all of the 
contact-plates on the disks always to the zero 
point on rotating spindle O continuously three 
or more times in either direction and stop 
ping with dial Q at zero. These features, 
however, embracing the matter of collecting 
the disks, are not novel with me, being well 
known to those skilled in the art, and are only 
explained briefly here to enable one to make 
the complete apparatus. 
Upon each disk D' D'D' D' is rigidly fixed 
an insulating-ring, J, of hard gutta-percha, 
glass, asbestus, or other material which is a 
good electrical insulator, and will also with 
stand extreme heat in case of fire. Upon 
the exterior surface of these rings is inlaid a 
series of electrical conducting-plates, 1 2 3 4 5, 
&c., in this instance twenty on each disk, cor 
responding exactly with the numbers found on 
the exterior dial, Q, as shown in Figs. 1, S, 
and 9. 
It will be observed that each plate consists 
of two parts electrically insulated from each 
. 
75 
Scribed. 
other by screw-holes, and that electrical con 
tact between these parts is made by screws, as 
shown in Fig. S, screw-holes being provided 
between each pair of plates, into which screws 
1' 2", &c., may be placed when it is desired to 
change the combination. 
Instead of double plates separated by screw 
holes, as shown, each disk may be provided 
with a continuous metal ring or band on one 
side and contact-plates on the other, Separated, 
as before, by screw holes. Upon this ring or 
band and the plates, or upon the double sets 
of contact-plates, as described, rests a series of 8o 
contact-springs, S S S S S', held firmly in 
sliding contact there with by screws extending 
into a block of insulating material, G, similar 
to that which composes the rings J, and firmly 
secured to the yoke Y, as shown in Figs. 8 and 
9. The two end springs, SS', are single, while 
S', S', and S are of double form, for a purpose 
which will be hereinafter described. 
This constitutes all of the apparatus for malk 
ing the combinations, a complete electrical cir 
cuit being made when the combinations are 
found from the generator M, Fig. 14, by wire 
w, magnet M', wire w, springs S S S S'S', 
disks D D' D'D'D' by the proper metal plates 
and screws thereof, as will be hereinafter de 
I will now proceed to describe the bolt 
mechanism and the apparatus for releasing 
the same, together with the generator, circuit 
connections, and mechanism for drawing the 
bolts. 
Referring now to Figs. 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, Z 
represents a crank on the outside of the safe, 
attached to a spindle or shaft, O', similar in 
form to spindle O. (See Figs. 2, 4, 5, and 14.) 
The double function of this crank and spindle 
is to rotate the armature of the magneto-gen 
erator MI and to draw the bolts when the 
draw.bolt has been released. The armature 
is rotated by the pinion o and cog-wheel C, 
the latter keyed to sleeve W, which sleeve 
fits round the extended end of spindle O', 
and is connected thcreto by a well - known 
form of locking - ratchet, I, and pawl p, the 
ratchet I being attached directly to the shaft 
or spindle O' and the pawl p to sleeve W by 
an arm, as shown clearly in Figs. 2 and 5. 
This magneto-generator M may be of any well 
known type which gives straight or direct 
currents such as will energize an electro-mag 
net, and is attached to the door of the safe by 
screws, as shown. 
Z Z are the commutators for changing al 
ternating currents to direct currents, in a man 
ner well understood by electricians. 
B is a draw-bolt pivotally fixed to the bolt 
frame B" at or near its center of gravity by a 
pin or bolt, e. It is provided near its center 
with a notch, N', into which the lug IF on shaft 
O' is adapted to take when said shaft is ro 
tated to the left and the draw.bolt is down 
in the position shown in Fig. 6. The extreme 
right-hand end of draw-bolts B (see Figs. 5 
and 6) is made sufficiently beavy to act as a 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
372,028 
3 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
counter-balance to the other end thereof, so as 
to relieve the armature-lever A. from undue 
pressure when this latter end of said lever is 
held up by said armature-lever. It should 
not, however, be sufficiently heavy to entirely 
overbalance said left-hand end, which bolt 
should, when released, fall down by its own 
weight into the position shown in Fig. 6. 
M is an electro-magnet attached to frame G., 
and has two armatures, A and A, the united 
function of which is to lock the draw-bolt B 
in its upper position, as shown in Fig. 5, so 
that as long as it remains in this position, no 
matter in which direction the crank Z may be 
turned, the lug F, attached to shaft O' and ro 
tated there with by said crank, cannot take in 
notch N', and hence the bolts cannot be drawn 
until said draw-bolt is permitted to fall down, 
as shown in Fig. 6; nor can they be forced 
back in any other way, inasmuch as the draw 
bolt B is firmly held by the locking-armatures 
in the notch N, which is a part of frame G, 
attached also to the door by bolts, as seen in 
Figs. 5 and 6. The armature A acts as a lock 
ing-lever to A', so as to make the whole more 
secure; but it may be omitted, if desired. 
L is a bell-crank lever pivoted to the frame 
G, having a hook, h, on its lower arm, and a 
roller, r, on the upper arm, against which the 
draw.bolt B' falls when down, so as to cause 
said bell-crank lever to hook up and retain 
the locking-armature A, for a purpose which 
will be hereinafter described. Armature-le 
ver A, carrying armature A, is provided with 
the usual back-stop, and both it and armature 
A have the customary retaining springs, al 
though, if desired, adjustable weights may be 
used instead of the springs SSS, such 
weights being well - known equivalents of 
springs for retaining or withdrawing thearma 
tures of electromagnets and similar purposes. 
H H are openings through the armature 
lever A-H to permit the draw-bolt B to pass 
through said lever when the bolts are being 
drawn, and H' to permit the locking-armature 
A to pass through saidarnature-lever A when 
both armatures are drawn up on energizing 
magnet M. 
In Fig. 14 I have shown a battery, BA, on 
the outside of the safe, having one binding 
post, b, attached to the zinc pole thereof, and 
a circuit-connection through the safe-door to 
an interior binding post, a, by a wire,a, (shown 
in dotted lines,) and the other or copper pole 
connected to another binding-post, b, fixed di 
rectly to the door, and thereby put in metallic 
connection with binding screw won the inner 
side of the safe. This arrangement is merely 
precautionary to avoid all possibility of a 
failure on the part of the magneto-generator, 
which latter may also be arranged on the out 
side of the safe, if desired, and all the mechan 
ism necessary for rotating its armature may 
be similarly located, its commutators ZZ be: 
ing connected directly to binding-posts bib', 
thus having only the bolt drawing lug F on 
shaft o' in connection with the draw-bolt, the 
bolts, circuits, and combination mechanism 
inside the Safe. 
The wire from battery B A to binding-post 
l' may go inside the safe between the door and 
itsjamb, but must in every instance be care 
fully insulated with some non-combustible 
material-as glass, clay, or asbestus. In this 
connection. I would add that the entire wire 
circuit, including that embracing magnet M. 
and armature of the magneto-generator M", 
should be insulated with such fire-proof mate 
rial, so as to withstand extreme heat in the 
event of fire, and if a dynamo is used its ar 
mature and field-magnets should be wound 
with the same kind of insulated wire. 
I prefer to wind the magnet M' in its con 
struction in layers of wire running always in 
the same direction-that is, by winding on its 
core a layer of wire, say, from left to right, and 
then returning to the starting-point by car 
rying the wire back parallel to the core, or at 
right angles to the first layer, and then wind 
ing again from left to right, and so proceeding 
until the magnet is complete. Such a magnet 
is much more powerful than magnets as ordi 
narily wound. This feature, however, is not 
novel with me, and I lay no claim to it. 
I will now describe the mode of operation. 
The combination by which the safe is to be un 
locked having been selected by inserting the 
metallic combination-screws 1 2 3 4 in the 
desired screw-holes in disks D' DD" D', re 
spectively, Figs. 8 and 9-as, for example, 1' 
in plate 2 for disk D', 2' in plate 6 for disk D", 
3 in plate 10 for disk D", and 4 in plate 14 for 
disk D'-and the door of the safe having been 
closed, with the bolts thrilst into position, I 
will disclose how the safe may be unlocked. 
Turn knob K. Several times to the left, not less 
than three or four, and stop with the index of 
dial Q indicating 2, the plates of the several 
disks having been aligned so as to be in line 
with corresponding numbers on said disks Q. 
This will bring all of the plates 2 under their 
springs S S S S S', and spring S will be in 
electrical contact with said plate 2, as will also 
the left-hand half of spring S'. 
Now turn the 
knob Kslowly to the right two complete revo 
lutions and such a fraction of a revolution as 
will bring the index of dial Q to indicate the 
number 6. This will bring plate 6 under the 
second half of spring S and the first half of 
spring S', the disk D having remained sta 
tionary during this second part of the opera 
tion. The electrical circuit is now found to 
be complete from spring S by plate 2, screw 
1", first half of spring S', second half of spring 
S', plate 6, screw 2, and first half of spring S. 
D' now remains stationary as well as D. Now 
turn to the left one complete revolution and 
advance until the dial of Q indicates 10, when 
plates 10 will be placed under the second half 
of spring S and the first half of spring S', and 
the circuit will be completed through said 
openings and screw 3, (not shown,) D' DID 
now remaining stationary. Finally turn knob 
K to the right until the index indicates 14, 
IOO 
I IO 
II.5 
2C) 
I 25 
 
4. 
372,028 
25 
and plate 14 will now be under the second half 
of spring S and the single spring S', the cir 
cuit being complete through said springs, 
plates, and screw-plug 4 (not shown) to wire 
5 o', Fig. 14, post o' by metal of safe door, to 
binding-post ac, wire 0, to commutator Z", 
through the armature of the magneto-genera 
tor, to second commutator Zby Wire ac, binding 
post a', magnet M', wire c, to starting-point S, 
Io so that if said magneto-generator is rotated or 
the poles of battery B.A. are attached to bind 
ing-posts b la current of electricity will be : 
set up and magnet MI energized. 
To operate the magneto-generator the oper. 
15 ator turns the crank Z, attached to spindle O', 
Figs. 1, 2, 4, and 14, so as to rotate cog-wheel 
C and lug or arm F on said shaft in the direc 
tion of the arrows. Cog-wheel C meshes with 
a pinion, o, fixed to the almature of the mag 
2O neto, MI, and the rotation thereof generates a 
current of electricity in magnet M', thereby 
causing the armatures A' A' to be drawn up, 
and allowing the draw-bolt B to drop into the 
position shown in Fig. 6 and cause the bell 
crank lever L to lock or hook up the locking 
armature A', as shown, so that when the gen 
erator is stopped said armature will not lock 
the first-named armature-lever A, and thereby 
prevent the draw-bolt B' from being returned 
to the position shown in Fig. 5, until the end 
of said draw-bolt has been brought into direct 
contact with the beveled shoulder of the lever 
A and forced it back against the tension of: 
spring S', as will be hereinafter more fully ex 
plained. The draw bolt being now in position 
shown in Fig. 6, and the generator stopped 
with the crank Z in such position that ling or 
arm E is out of direct contact with draw - bot 
B', the operator reverses the rotation of said 
crank and turns slowly until lug or al'm IF 
strikes notch N in the draw-bolt. The back 
ratchet, now failing to rotate the generator, 
slides freely under pawl P, and the draw-bolt, 
B is forced back by lug F, carrying with it 
45 the bolt-frame 3 and bolts IB, the left-hand 
end of said draw-bolt IB passing now through 
the opening II of armature-lever A (see Figs. 
5, 6, and 7) a sufficient distance to allow the 
bolt-frame and boits to come in contact wit, in 
5o frame G and stop further rotation, but not far 
enough to release the lug or arm F on its con 
tinued rotation in the direction indicated. The 
door may now be opened. 
35 
To close the safe, first close the door, and then 
55 turn crank Z, and hence lug F, one complete 
revolution in the direction indicated by the 
arrows, Fig. 14, so that lug F shall leave the 
notch N' and be brought in firm contact with 
the bolt-frame IB. This will force the lolt-grale : 
6o B, and with it the bolts B, into position, and 
as lug or arm F continues its rotation and draw 
bolt B is drawn out of the opening H it will 
coine into contact with said draw-bolt and lift 
it, thereby bringing the free end thereof into 
65 direct contact with the bevel-shoulder of the 
locking armature-level A, forcing it toward 
the pole of magnet M', and at the same time 
75 
95 
Co 
85. 
allowing the bell-crank lever L to release the 
second locking-armature A, but not until the 
first lever has been forced sufficiently near to 
the magnet to preclude lever A* from falling 
into the locking position. When the lug F 
li?ts draw-bolt B" to its extreme height into 
notch N, both armatures are drawn back by 
their springs SS, and the draw.bolt is secured, 
as shown in Figs. 5 and 14, and the bolts are 
thrust into place and cannot be drawn until 
the combination is again formed, it being pre 
sunied, of course, that the combination already 
found was destroyed by turning knob IK in 
either direction, as is usual in existing combi- . 
nation-locks. The whole of this mechanism 
on the inside of the safe is inclosed in a metal 
case hinged to the door and accessible only 
when tle door is opened, so that the combina 
tion may be changed at pleasure or the parts 
oiled, if desired. Such a case is shown in Sec 
tion about thic mechanislf in Fig. 2. 
The wires ac, constituting the circuit, should, 
in addition to their non-combustible in Still 
tion be covered with metal strips or other 
equivalent means to Secure them against being 
tampered with by unauthorized persons when 
the loor is open. 
I will now recite soine of the advantages 
which my invention possesses over existing 
connlination-locks. 
First. By means of its peculiar construc. 
tion and of the fact that no intinations can 
be had at any time during the process of Seck 
ing the combination of any of the numbers 
which make up said combination, I provide : 
lock which no expert can pick. In all of the 
existing locks with which I am familiar a burg 
lar call select, the numbers of the combina 
tion by the sense of touch or hearing, and, hav 
ing once determined the location, he can easily 
pick the lock. With my lock this is impos 
sible, as no indication can in any way be had 
of the number's until the complete combina 
tion is set up. 
Second. I utilize one more numbel' or colm 
lbination-disk than any lock known to me, as 
in well-known forms of locks one disk, D', is 
utilized to mechanically draw the tumbler, 
while I use said disk as an additional coln bi 
nation disk, thus getting increased security 
with four disks. 
Third. The bolt-drawing shaft or spindle in 
ordinary safes is mechanically connected to 
the bolt-frame IB in such manner that a burg 
lar can wrench it off, while in my lock it is 
only nechanically connected after the combi 
nation is found, it being perfectly free to turn 
it both directions, the same as the combina 
tion-spindle, after the safe is locked. 
I am Well aware that it is not new with me 
to operate or control the bolts of safes by a 
battery-generator of electricity, nor to control 
the circuit to a bolt-controlling electro-magnet I.3O 
within a safe by two combination-spindles ex 
tending through the safe door, each spindle 
governing an independent set of contacts in a 
circuit containing the bolt-controlling magnet, 
I 25 
O 
I O5 
I IO 
I I5 
372,028 
5 
55 
5. In a safe-lock, a spindle for withdraw- 45 
the bolts, the whole being under control of an 
operator at the outside of the safe or structure 
to be protected. 
ing the bolts, a draw-bolt for aiding said spin 
dle in the withdrawal of the bolts, and a lock 
ing-lever for holding said draw-bolt out of 
the path of the spindle, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. In an electro-magnetic safe-lock, a mag 
neto or dynamo generator located wholly 
within the structure to be protected, a spindle 
geared to the armature of said magneto or 
dynamo generator, means for withdrawing the 
bolts lying normally out of the path of an arm 
on said spindle, and an electro-magnet with 
an armature adapted to control the bolt-draw 
ing apparatus, substantially as described. 
7. In an electrical safe-lock, a series of disks 
for controlling the continuity of a single cir 
cuit normally open at a series of points equal 
in number to the number of disks, a series of 
contact-plates on said disks equal in each in 
stance to double the number of numbers on 65 
the dial of the combination-spindle, means at 
selected points of each disk for electrically 
connecting two of the plates, and springs bear 
ing on said disks and plates for completing 
the continuity of the circuit, in combination 7o 
with an electrical generator and electro-mag 
netic mechanism for controlling the bolts, sub 
stantially as described. 
8. In an electrical safe-lock, a single spindle 
carrying two or more disks with contact- 75 
plates, electrical connections, as described, 
and electro-magnetic means for controlling the 
bolts, substantially as described. 
CHARLES J. KINTNER, 
Witnesses: 
JoHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
JAS. F. KELLY. 
and I make no claim to such features. I be. 
lieve, however, that it is new with me to com 
bine with a safe-lock electrical circuits, bolt 
controlling magnets, and a dynamo or mag 
neto generator, the circuits being controlled 
by combination mechanism, and Ilay special 
stress on using such a generator with a safe, in 
that it can be controlled from the exterior of 
the safe and will not be destroyed by fire, as 
would an ordinary voltaic battery on extreme 
heat. 
Haying thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
l. A combination-lock consisting of a series 
of combination-disks, a spindle carrying said 
disks, electrical contact-plates on the disks, 
contact springs or surfaces bearing on said 
plates successively as the disks are rotated, 
and an electrical circuit embracing an electri 
cal generator and electrical mechanism for con 
trolling the bolts, substantially as described. 
2. In a combination-lock, an electrical cir 
cuit normally open at two or more points, a 
spindle carrying disks with contact-plates, the 
number of disks being equal to the number of 
normally-open points in the circuit, an electro 
magnet in the circuit, and means, substantially 
as described, for controlling the bolts of a safe 
or vault. 
3. In an electrical combination-lock, a nor 
mally-open circuit and bolt-controlling mech 
anism in said circuit, in combination with a 
magneto or dynamogenerator, all of said parts 
located wholly within the safe, substantially 
as described. 
4. In a combination-lock, an electrical cir 
cuit normally open at two or more points, a 
spindle and means for controlling the circuit at 
said points, and an electro-magnetorequivalent 
device in said circuit, with means for locking 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372128.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 372,128, 
MACHINE FOR ROUNDING AND BACKING BOOKS, 
Patented Oot, 25, 1887. 
AAAAAAAAAAAA 
 
 
 
SN 
44 est. 
A2 2/2224.02. 
N. PereRs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) , 
7. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
E. CRAWLEY. 
MACHINE FOR ROUNDING AND BACKING BOOKS, 
No. 372,128, 
- 
Patented 00t, 25, 1887. 
ES E 
EA EE 
 
 
 
 
3 to 
is is 2 E 
E E 3 E 
 
 
irear EEEEEEE 
E2FEEE 
 
 
y E EE 
E CE 
is E 
El 
E. 
E. 
Ea\ 
E 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
Ay, 2 
p (). ap. 
724 
. p3 
-II 
Title 2. 
m" P4 
At 1 
E. 
72 kill 
E 
 
Azest. 
22.7%fza. 
%22Egz. 
NPEERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
2 
E. E 
EE % 
a E 2 
E E 2 
2 
4. 
II - || E 
u 
 
 
: 
Sea 
f 2 
E sc & 
E S4 
4 
9. 
E ER 
Es 
(No Model.) 
" Sheets-Sheet 3, 
E. CRAWLEY. 
MACHINE FOR ROUNDING AND BACKING-BOOKS, 
No. 372,128, 
Patented 00t, 25, 1887. 
E 
s 
e 
. 
.." 
f 
so 
... 
R 
E. 
S. 
E 
C 
... 
C 
S. 
e 
O 
R 
E. 
Eas 
...) 
s 
- 
S. 
E. 
N. Pereis, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
n 
 
(No Model.) 
- - - 
E. CRAWLEY. 
Sheets-Sheet 4. 
MACHINE FOR ROUNDING AND BACKING BOOKS, 
No. 372,128, 
Patented 00t, 25, 1887. 
O2e?, 24-ee. 
1722/222a27. 
6%r 62. 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
E. CRAWLEY. 
MACHINE FOR ROUNDING AND BACKING B00KS, 
7 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
(No Model.) 
No. 372,128, 
Patented 00t, 25, 1887. 
Tri-- - 
- -...-- 
 
Ay, 25. 
am' 
F2 El 7.3/ 
 
  
 
 
 
 
s 
 
N. PETERS,Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
Sheets-Sheet 6. 
E. CRAWLEY, 
MACHINE FOR ROUNDING AND BACKING BOOKS, 
No. 372,128, 
Patented 00t. 25, 1887. 
  
 
 
 
ill 
ZZZZZZ2 
 
Z27, 8. 
 
 
73 
N, 
 
 
 
 
3 SES 
 
N. Perers, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
7 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
 
. 
MACHINE FOR ROUNDING AND BACKING BOOKS, 
E. CRAWLEY, 
No. 372,128, 
Patented Oct. 25, 1887. 
N.PETERS, photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN CRAWLEY, OF NEWPORT, KENTUCKY. 
MACHINE FOR ROUNDING AND BACKING Books. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 372,128, dated October 25, 1887. 
Application filed March 7, 1885. Serial No. 158,038. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWIN CRAWLEY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of the 
city of Newport, in the county of Campbelland 
State of Kentucky, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Machines for 
Rounding and Backing Books, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in that 
class of machines wherein both the operations 
of rounding and backing the book are carried 
on in the same machine. 
Chief among the various improvements con 
stituting the several principal features of my 
invention are, first, improved mechanism for 
enabling the movable jaws to pinch or grasp 
the book; secondly, improved mechanism for 
supplementing the mechanism just mentioned 
under said first heading in tightly pinching or 
grasping said book; thirdly, improved mech 
anism for enabling the movable jaws to hold 
the book stationary and firmly in position 
while the book is being backed, the object of 
these improvements being to relieve (as herein 
after set forth) certain operative parts of the 
machine from undue strain and consequent 
wear and tear; fourthly, an improved clutch 
whereby the operation of the machine can be 
quickly checked, and thereby in case of acci 
dent prevent injuring the mechanism, and also 
the book. 
The several other features of my invention 
and the advantages arising from their use, con 
jointly or otherwise, will be fully hereinafter 
set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, making part 
of this specification, Figure 1, Sheet l, is a 
vertical central longitudinal section of a round 
ing and backing machine embodying my in 
vention. Fig. 2, Sheet 2, is a plan view of the 
rods and other devices for imparting motion 
directly to the mechanism acting immediately 
upon the book, and also a plan view of the 
main shaft and its provisions for imparting 
motion to said rods and devices. Fig. 3, Sheet 
3, represents atop view of the gearing, whereby 
power is applied to and removed from the said 
main shaft. Fig. 4, Sheet 4, is a side view of 
the mechanism for bracing the reciprocating 
jaws when the latter are in position for back 
ing the book, the cross-bar of said mechanism 
- 
being in section; secondly, showing the quad 
rants or arms for oscillating the plate for 
backing the book and the immediate mech 
anism for operating the quadrant, the shaft 
and sleeve being shown in vertical section 
transverse to the shaft; thirdly, showing in 
elevation the mechanism for operating the 
clutch; fourthly, showing in part the mechan 
is in for adjusting the center on which the for 
ward quadrants oscillate, part of such mechan 
ism being in elevation and the cross-bar being 
Fig. 5, Sheet 5, is a front ele 
shown in section. 
vation of the gearing referred to in Fig. 3, and 
also of the mechanism for adjusting the cen 
ter on which the forward quadrant oscillates, 
the cross-bar being shown in elevation, and 
also showing, lower down, in elevation, the 
cross-bar for bracing the reciprocating jaws 
when the latter are in position for backing the 
book and the uprights or slide pieces, whereby 
said bar is supported and on which it slides. 
Fig. 6, Sheet 5, shows in front elevation the 
rounding-rollers, the chains for giving a for 
Ward motion to the rollers, the lever for oper 
ating said chains, and also shows the belt and 
weight in position for giving a return motion 
to the rollers, and also shows the device for 
preventing the back of the book from spring 
ing upward while being rounded, and also 
shows the center screw for operating the car 
riage, and shows the side hand-screw for 
locking the carriage, the lugs for supporting 
the movable table, and the tubular rest. Fig. 
7, Sheet 3, represents in section the upper 
rounding-roller, the spring for preventing the 
back of the book from springing upward while 
being rounded, and the bar for supporting said 
spring, and shows in elevation the reciprocat 
ing roller-support and the adjustable journal 
box located in said reciprocating support and 
carrying the roller journal. Fig. 8, Sheet 6, 
shows in section, enlarged, the center screw 
mentioned in the description of Fig. 6 andlock 
nut, and shows a stop-screw andlock-nut there 
for, the stop-screw being shown in elevation. 
Fig. 9, Sheet 5, shows in side elevation, seen 
from that side of the machine which is at the 
right hand in Fig. 2, the chains and belt and 
weight referred to in the description of Fig. 6. 
Fig. 10, Sheet 3, shows a front elevation and 
also a side elevation of the chain and of the 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
372,28 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
sleeve to which it is fastened, and also illus 
trating the mode of connecting the chain to 
the sleeve. Fig. 11, Sheet 6, is a view in per 
spective of the removable table, its immediate 
supports, and the preferred manner in which 
the table is connected to said supportS. Fig. 
12, Sheet 4, is a side elevation of a part of 
the carriage for carrying the rounding-roll 
ers, and connected thereto a rocking base for 
the arm which carries the guides for locat 
ing the book when first inserted in the ma 
chine. Fig. 13, Sheet 3, shows a side view 
and also a top view of the arm referred to in 
the description of Fig. 12. Fig. 14, Sheet 4, 
is a perspective view of the bar and straps 
suspended therefrom for adjusting the centers 
on which the forward quadrants oscillate; also, 
the arms for supporting those center's, the rear 
quadrants, the sleeve to which they are at 
tached, the shaft on which the sleeve oscillates, 
the adjustable level of the sleeve, the pitman 
and crank by which said sleeve is operated, 
and shaft-carrying pinion for operating Said 
crank, and also showing Weight for balancing 
the quadrants and parts attached thereto. 
Fig. 15, Sheet 6, shows in side elevation the 
adjustable journal-box or carriage for Sup 
porting the journal of the shaft carrying the 
sleeve referred to in the description of Fig. 
14, and also shows in section (detailed view) 
the said journal-box and the slide it moves on 
and an end of the shaft, it (said box) carries, 
the section being taken through the line XX 
of said side elevation and looking at the said 
section from the rear of the inachine, and also 
shows in section (detailed view No. 2) the 
rear end of the box or carriage, the adjusting 
screw-rod and cap, the Section being taken at 
the line Z, Z, of said side elevation. Fig. 16, 
Sheet 6, shows a top and side view of the cross 
bars referred to in the description of Fig. 5, 
the bars being here shown detached. Fig. 17, 
Sheet 6, shows in end elevation, full sized, four 
typical forms of plates for backing books, such 
forms being of my invention. Fig. 18, Sheet 
6, is a perspective view of the bar to which 
the plates of the preceding figure are attached 
and showing one plate in position attached to 
the bar. Fig. 19, Sheet 5, is a front elevation 
of the oscillating frame which carries the 
jaws and the toggle-joint for vertically recip 
rocating the upper jaw and the worms and 
wheels for operating nuts (also shown) for ad 
justing the height of the upper jaw above the 
lower jaw, and thereby regulating the pinch 
of the book. This figure also slows a front 
elevation of the jaws in position in Said frame; 
also shows the guides for steadying the lower 
ends of the rods that carry the upper jaw. 
At the foot of Said figure is also shown a detail 
view of the cross-bar which carries the Said nuts 
and toggle. Fig. 20, Sheet 4, is a front eleva 
tion, enlarged, of the upper jaw, showing the 
springs attached to the upper jaw and upright 
rods carrying the upper jaw, and also below 
at the left shows a cross-section, enlarged, of 
the aforesaid device taken at the dotted line 
XX, and at the right shows an end view of the 
device shown in the upper part of this figure. 
Fig. 21, Sheet 3, is a pian view of the toggles 
for throwing the jaws over and back. Fig. 22, 
Sheet 3, is a top view of the toggle (shown in 
Fig. 1 as located at the base of the machine) 
for operating the toggles shown in Fig. 19. 
Fig. 23, Sheet 6, is a side elevation of an im 
proved device for supporting a rod operated 
on by a cam, below showing a top detached 
view of the yoke and roller of said device; 
also a view, detached, of the cam and its devices 
for receiving said yoke and roller. Fig.24, Sheet 
5, shows a side view and also a bottom view of 
the braces (shown at the lower left-hand corner 
of Fig. 1) for bracing the shaft which operates 
the toggle which operates to open and close the 
jaws, which toggle is referred to in the descrip 
tion of Fig. 19. Fig. 25, Sheet 5, is an enlarged 
view of one of the nuts referred to in the de 
scription of Fig. 19. Fig. 26, Sheet 3, is a 
side elevation, partly in section, of the device 
for throwing out of gear and disconnecting the 
rod that reciprocates the upper rounding 
roller and also for raising the roller and hold 
ing it up, as described. Fig. 27. Sheet 2, 
shows at the left a side elevation of the lever 
for operating the chains, which in turn oper 
ate the rounding-rollers, the chains being 
shown in Figs. 6, 9, and 10, and shows at the 
center an elevation of the end of said lever, 
looking at that end of the lever which is at the 
left hand in said elevation, and also shows at 
end view of the carriage-piece shown on the 
center of the lever in the said side elevation. 
The lever herein referred to is shown in Fig. 
1. This Fig. 27 also shows a side view of the 
stop-plate and also a view of the screw and lock 
nut, enlarged, for Setting said carriage-piece. 
Fig. 28, Sheet 4, shows views, enlarged, of the 
devices shown at the top of Figs. 1 and 5 for 
adjusting the bar which regulates the position 
of the center on which the backing-plate op 
erates the devices shown in this figure, being 
a top view of the adjusting-nut, a side eleva 
tion, and also a top view of the stop-collar for 
locking the said nut, and also a side elevation of 
the screw, decreased, with the groove in which 
the feather or pin of the lock-collar moves. 
Fig. 29, Sheet 2, shows five detail views of the 
clutch for throwing the machine into and out of 
action, Detail No. 1 being a side elevation of the 
two parts of the clutch in position on the shaft. 
Detail No. 2 is an edge view, and No. 3 a side 
view of the collar, with trunnions, which fits 
onto that end of the clutch which is at the 
right hand in Detail No. 1. Detail No. 4 is a 
view in perspective of the collar which holds 
the said trulanion-collar in place, and Detail 
No. 5 is a top view of the forked lever (shown 
in position in Fig. 4) which engages with the 
trunnions and enables the two main portions 
of the clutch to be thrown in and out of en 
gagement with one another. Fig. 30, Sheet 6, 
Detail No. 1 is a . 
shows four detail views. 
perspective view, enlarged, of the hand-lever 
for working the forked lever shown in Fig. 4. 
90 
95 
ICO 
IOS 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
372,128 
3 
Detail No. 2 shows in perspective, enlarged, 3, 4, 5. This gear C is rigidly fixed on main 
a stop-pin that engages with hand-lever. 
De-shaft B. With gear C' meshes pinion C", Figs. 
tail No. 3 is a front elevation of the upper 
1, 3, 4, 14. (See Figs. 3, 4, aud dotted lines in 
right-hand corner of the machine, showing the 
Fig. 1.) The pinion C" is rigidly fixed on shaft 
means (i.e., bracket) for supporting the main 
C", Figs. 1, 3, 4, 5, 14, journaled in the side A 
lever, and showing said lever at its junction 
of the machine and carrying crank D, Figs. 1, 
with such support. Detail No. 4 is a top view 
3, 4, 5, 14. Crank D is pivotally connected to 
of the corner of the machine, and shows the 
the lower end of a rod, D", Figs. 1, 3, 4, 14, 
bracket, the lever removed, the bracket being 
whose upper end is pivotally connected to and 
shown in side elevation in Fig. 4. Fig. 31, 
operates the adjustable lever D, Figs. 4, 14, 
Sheet 6, shows in horizontal section the devices 
which latter oscillates the sleeve D', Figs. 1, 4, 
for carrying and adjusting the bar which sup 
14. The operating length of the lever Dis 
ports the backing-plate and the quadrant by 
determined by the position of the set-pin D, 
which the plate is oscillated. Fig. 32, Sheet 
Figs. 4, 14, in the slot D, Figs. 4, 14, of the 
6, shows the guide-arm and guide - carriers 
said lever D, and determines the length of the 
and guides when down and in position to stop 
arc of oscillation of the quadrants D, Figs. 
the book, the carriage, rounding rollers, book, 
1, 4, 14, fixed to sleeve D, oscillating on shaft 
and guide-arm being shown in section, taken 
D, Figs. 1, 4, 14. 
in a plane running parallel to the length of 
A preferred means for changing the position 
the machine. Fig. 33, Sheet 6, shows the 
of the arc of motion of the said quadrants is as 
oscillating piece, its supporting-base, guide 
follows: Rigidly attached to sleeve D'' is lug 
arm, guide: carriers, and guides. the oscillating 
D', Figs. 1, 4, 14, whose end comes between the 
piece, its base, the guide-arm, and the upper 
lugs D', Figs. 4, 14, on the collar D', Figs. 4, 
ends of the guide-carriers being shown in sec 
14, to which latter, in the present instance, the 
tion taken in a vertical plane transverse to the 
lever D" is rigidly attached. Through the lugs 
length of the machine at the dotted line XX 
D" and the lug D" passes a screw-rod, D', Figs. 
of Fig. 12, the view being taken looking from 
4, 14, screwed or fixed to the lugs D', but loose 
the rear of the machine toward the front of 
within lug D". On this screw-rod D are the 
the latter. Fig. 34, Sheet 7, is a side view, in 
set-nuts ID' D", Figs. 4, 14, one of said nuts 
elevation, of the preferred detailed construc 
on one side of the lug D and the other of said 
tion of the mechanism for swinging the jaws. 
nuts on the other side of the lug D". By means 
backward and forward. Fig. 35, Sheet 7, is a 
of this screw-rod D" and said nuts D" the po 
side elevation of the preferred mechanism for 
sition of the lug D", in respect to the lugs D' 
actuating the brace-bar for steadying or braic 
is altered at will, and thus the position of the 
ing the jaws while the book is being backed, 
sleeve and its quadrants in relation to the rod. 
and showing the brace-bar in section, the sec 
D', and consequently the position of the arc of 
tion being taken at the dotted line XX, Fig. 
motion of the quadrants, is changed. 
36. Fig. 36, Sheet 7, is a top view of the pre 
It is to be remembered that the collar D'' is 
ferred form of cross-bar. 
loose on the sleeve D. 
A, Figs. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, 30, indicates the right 
The arcuate surface of each of the quadrants 
side of the frame of the machine, and A', Figs. 
D' is provided with cogs respectively meshing 
1,2,3,5,6, indicates the left side of the machine. 
with cogs on the arcuate surface of the adja. 
The preferred means of connecting these sides 
cent opposing quadrants, D', Figs. 1. 4, 31, the 
together is as follows: The sides A A' are con 
latter oscillating on a center or pin, D, Figs. 
nected at their upper front portions by the 
1, 4, 14, 31. This pin D is supported in the 
cross-piece A, Figs. 1, 6, 21, and at their lower 
ends of the arms D', Figs. 1, 14, the other ends 
front portions by the cross-piece A", Figs. 1, 2, 
of said arms D' being rigidly attached to the 
3, 26, and at their upper rear portions by the 
shaft D. . . 
cross-piece A, Fig. 1, and at their lower rear 
Rigidly attached to the quadrants D is the 
portions by the cross-piece A, Figs. 1, 2, 3.22. 
frame D', Fig. 31, consisting of the two broad 
The main shaft B, FigS. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 23, is 
flat end projections, D' D", Figs. 1, 31, con 
supported by and journaled in boxes BB, 
nected together by a cross-tie portion, D", 
Figs. 2, 3, respectively located at the respect 
Figs. 1, 31. In each of the end portions, D' 
ive sides A A' of the said frame. 
D", is a slot, D", Figs. 1, 31, and in one of 
The series of gearing for operating the main 
these slots fits one of the lugs D", Figs. 18, 31, 
shaft consists of the loose pulley C, tight pulley 
of piece D", Figs. 1, 18, 31, and into the other 
C, fly-wheel C, and pinion C, all revolving 
of these slots fits the other of the lugs D'". 
loosely on a stud or pin, C, fixed to and project 
The piece D" is held in position and adjusted 
ing from the side A" of the frame, Figs. 1, 3, 5. 
back and forth to the desired points in said 
The pulley C", fly-wheel C, and pinion C are 
slots by the screws D'D', Figs. 1, 31. To the 
all rigidly connected together. The pinion C 
forward portion of said piece D'' is attached 
meshes with the gear-wheel C, Figs. 1, 3, 5, 
the backing-plate D', Figs. 1, 17, 18, 31, and 
and gear C is rigidly fixed to shaft C, Figs. 1, 
secured by the bolts D". Figs. 17, 18, 31. Each 
3, 4, 5, 29, and is concentric therewith. Run 
of the center pivots or pins, D", is supported 
ning loose on the shaft C, at the other side of 
within adjustable limits by means of its re 
the machine, is the clutch-pinion C, Figs. 1, 
spective adjacent rods D", Figs. 1, 4, 14. The 
3, 4, 5, 29, meshing with a gear, C, Figs. 1, 2, 
cross-bar D", Figs. 1, 4, 5, 14, 16, has near each 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
15 
372,128 
95 
1 OC 
I I5 
5 
IO 
To one of in said end ID'. 
end a lug, ID". Figs. 1, 4, 5, 14, 16. 
these lugs D" the upper end of one of these 
rods D is pivoted, and to the other of these 
lugs D" the upper end of the other of these 
rods D is pivoted. The cross-bar D" is sup 
ported by and slides on the upright screw-bars 
D", Figs. 1, 4, 5, 28, rigidly attached at their 
lower ends to the frane of the machine. The 
cross-bar ID" is capable of adjustment verti 
cally, preferably, by means of the nuts D' D" 
D" D', Figs, 1, 4, 5, 2S, as follows: On each 
upright screw-bar D" are two nuts, as D", one 
of these nuts being below the cross-bar D* and 
the other above the said cross-bar. These 
nuts may be caused to pinch the cross-bar D' 
tightly between them, or, as will sometimes 
be necessary, they may be set apart, so as to 
allow the cross-bar a little play between them. 
Each nut, is set at the desired point on its re 
spective upright bar by means of a lock-col. 
lar, D', Figs. 1, 4, 5, 2S. For engagement 
with said lock-collar, each nut, D is provided 
with radial slots D", Figs. 1, 4, 5, 28. The 
lock-collar D'' is provided with a lug, ID". 
Figs, 4, 28, which enters one of the slots D' 
in the adjacent nut, and with a feather. D', 
Fig. 2S, which enters a longitudinal groove, 
D", Figs. 1, 2S, in the upright screw-bar ID". 
The feather D* and lug D" are preferably 
made in one piece. 
In setting a nut D" its lock-collar is slid 
away from it until the lug D" is withdrawn 
from a Siot of the nut. The latter is then 
screwed up or down on its screw-bar D to 
the requisite point. The lug D" of the lock 
collar is now inserted in the adjacent slot of 
the nut and the latter is locked, and its collar 
is prevented from rotating on screw-bar D" 
by means of the feather D" in the groove D", 
Figs. 1, 2S. The lower lock-collar on each 
screw-upright D" is held up to place against 
its adjacent nut by means of a spring, D", as 
shown in Fig. 5. A counterbalance-Weight, 
D", Figs. 1, 4, 14, rigidly attached at the rear 
side to sleeve D', operates to balance the four 
quadrants D' D'D' D'' and the intermediate 
connected mechallism. 
The preferred mode of adjusting the press 
ure of the backing-plate against the book to 
be backed is by adjusting the shaft D, and the 
mechanism for adjusting said shaft is as fol 
lows: Each end of shaft D is journaled in 
its carriage D", Figs 1, 15, sliding on its re 
spective frame, one of said frames being A and 
the other A. The rear end, D", Figs. 1, 15, 
of the carriage receives the forward portion 
of a rod, D', Figs. 1, 15, which latter fits in a 
recess in said carriage and can turn therein. 
The rod carries two shoulders, one, D", di 
rectly in front of the carriage end D", and the 
other, D', Fig. 15, directly behind said carriage 
end, and these shoulder's prevent the rod from 
slipping lengthwise through the said end of 
said carriage. A cap, D", Fig. 15, screwed to 
said end D' of said carriage, keeps the rod 
D" from slipping out at the top of its bearing 
This rod is rearwardly pro 
vided with a screw-thread engaging a female 
screw in the lug D", Figs, 1, 4, 15, fixed to 
and projecting upward from the adjacent por 
A hand 
tion of the frame of the machine. 
wheel, D", Figs. 1, 15, enables the rod to be 
easily turned, thereby moving the carriage D" 
forward or backward, as desired, and a set 
screw, D, Fig. 15, screwed into the cap D' 
aforesaid, engages one of the holes in shoul 
der D* and prevents the rod D' from turning 
after the latter has been set at the desired 
point. 
The preferred mechanism for working the 
upper one of the jaws which hold the book 
while it is being backed is as follows: To the 
brace A is pivoted one end of the arm F, 
Figs. 1, 2, 22, the other end of said arm being 
pivoted to the arm F, Figs. 1, 2, 22, which 
latter in turn is pivoted by pivot F to the 
rod F, (shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1.) Figs. 
1, 2. The arms F and F constitute a toggle 
The mode of operating this toggie is 
joint. 
as follows: The roller F, Figs. 1, 2, is piv 
oted to one of the arms of the toggle, pref. 
erably to the arm F. This roller IF" fits in a 
groove in cam F, Figs. 1, 2, centered on and 
fixed to main shaft B. The rod F may be 
supported on any suitable bracket or shaft. 
In the present instance the shaft C is made 
use of for supporting the said rod F, the lat 
ter being pivoted thereto. To the same end 
of arm F as rod F, and to pivot F. Figs. 1, 
2, 22, is pivoted one end of the compound 
thrust-rod F, Figs. 1, 2, constructed substan. 
tially as follows: The lever F is constructed 
in two parts, F and F, Figs. 1, 2, the por 
tion F running through a bracket or portion 
of part F., and secured in place by a nut, F", 
Fig, 1, screwed onto part F forward of said 
bracket. A spring, F", Figs. 1, 2, is com 
pressed between the rear end of arm F and 
the stop F", Figs. 1, 2, on arm F. This stop 
F" is preferably a nut engaging a thread on 
arm F for the purpose of regulating the ten 
sion of the spring F". The portion F is free 
to slide forward in part F as the tension of 
spring F" is overcome. The object of this 
compound thrust-rod is to allow the mechan 
ism closing the jaws holding the book to be 
backed to yield (instead of breaking) when a 
book of uncommon thickness to which the 
jaws and mechanism have not been previ 
ously adjusted is by chance inserted into the 
jaws. The forward end of the compound 
thrust-rod is pivoted to the lever F', Fig. 1, 
which latter is fulcrumed on shaft F, Figs. 1, 
2. This shaft is suitably supported, as in jour 
nals, in the sides A A' of the machine, and is 
preferably braced by brackets F", Figs. 1, 2, 
24, connected to forward brace, A'. 
On shaft Fis fulcrumed the lever F, Figs. 
1, 2, preferably made in one piece with lever 
F'. To the free end of this lever F is piv. 
oted the lower end of rod F, Figs. 1, 2, and 
the upper end of the latter is in turn pivoted 
35 
O 
5 
65 
372,128 
5 
- 
25 
35 
5 
(5 
85 
to a lug, F", Figs. 1, 19, rigidly attached to 
the lower portion of the upper plate or limb, 
F", of the toggle FF, Figs. 1, 19. 
compound rod FFF" may take the place of 
rod F', a rigid rod taking the place where the 
Said compound rod is now employed. In the 
event of such change this compound yielding 
rod Will become a pull rod instead of a thrust 
or push rod, and be similar, as regards the lo 
cation of the spring, to the pull-rod RR, Fig. 
2. The upper portion of the upper limb of 
said foggle is pivoted by pivot F, Figs 1, 19, 
to the oscillating frame F, Figs. 1, 19, car 
rying the jaws, the said oscillating frame be 
ing pivoted at pivot F", Figs. 1, 19, to the 
lower portion of the sides A A' of the ma 
chine. 
Each of the limbs FF' of the toggle is pro 
vided with stop F", Fig. 1, and these stops 
(when the toggle is closed) impinge against 
each other and prevent the toggle from pass 
ing its center. The lower link or limb, F, 
of this toggle is pivoted at its lower end to the 
yoke or piece F", Figs. 1, 19. This yoke is 
provided at each end with an eye or forked 
extremity, F, Fig. 19, which embraces a nut, 
F, Figs. 1, 19, 25, whose screw thread en 
gages a screw on the upright rod F, Figs. 1, 
19, 20. The nut F is prevented from slip 
ping through the openings in piece F by the 
annular flanges F, Figs. 19, 25, of the nut. 
At the lower side of the nut, and rigidly at 
tached thereto and concentric therewith, is a 
toothed wheel, F, Figs. 1, 19, 25, and for 
convenience this wheel may take the place 
and operate instead of a lower annular flange. 
Each wheel F engages a worm, F, Figs. 1, 
19, and these two worms are connected by and 
4o rigidly attached to a shaft, F, Figs. 1, 19, 
journaled in suitable lugs, F, Fig. 19, which 
latter prevent longitudinal motion of the shaft. 
The shaft is rotated by suitable means-pref. 
erably, as shown, by a hand-wheel, F, Figs. 
1, 19, peripherally provided with square 
teeth-and after being set is locked in position 
by a pawl, F, Fig. 1. The nuts F, wheels 
F, shaft F, and hand-wheel Fare to simul 
taneously adjust vertically the upper jaw, F". 
For the purpose of the better keeping the 
upright rods F steady and in line with the 
oscillating frame F", the arms F, Figs. 1, 19, 
are provided, suitably secured to said frame 
F', and respectively embrace the rods. Near 
their upper ends a portion of the upright rods 
is confined to the slideways F, Fig. 19, in 
oscillating frame F", and they are thereby 
permitted to slide vertically in said frame. 
The upper extremity of each upright rod F. 
is provided with a slot, F", Fig. 20, through 
which latter passes a snugly-fitting lug, F", 
Figs. 19, 20. These lugs are rigidly attached 
to the upper jaw, F", Figs. 1, 19, 20. To the 
under side of this upper jaw is rigidly at 
tached a steel plate, F", Figs. 19, 20, which 
projects beyond the rear side of the jaw in an 
edge, F, Fig. 20. 
Connected to the upper jaw, F", preferably 
at the side, as shown, by straps F, Figs. 19, 
20, are the flat springs F, Figs. 19, 20, secured 7o 
It may be here remarked that the yielding from slipping down through their straps by 
flanges or shoulders at their upper edges. 
These springs extend down and then under 
the jaw toward the beveled edge of the plate 
F". The end of each spring shoulders in a re- 75. 
cess, F, Fig. 20, in the plate F", which re 
cess extends rearward from the front edge of 
the plate to near the beveled edge of said 
plate. This spring is bent at a less angle than 
ninety degrees, and when not under pressure 
Stands at a distance from the under side of the 
jaw, but when pressed upon closes into the 
recess in said jaw. When a book is placed 
between the upper jaw, F", and the lower 
jaw, J, Figs. 1, 19, as the upper jaw descends 
the heel of the spring strikes first, and as the 
jaw continues to descend the pressure of the 
spring forces any wrinkling or buckling of 
the book rearward into the back of the book. 
As the spring is forced upward, the upright go 
portion of the spring slides through the strap 
F', and the spring is deflected from its nor 
mal position to an angle of about forty-five 
degrees. 
I will now describe the mechanism which 
co-operates to impart to the oscillating frame 
the required action and to hold it to its re 
quired positions. 
On the main shaft B is fixed a cann, J, Figs. 
1, 2, 23, having a groove, J, Figs. 1, 23. To 
the reciprocating piece J J', Figs. 1, 2, 23, 
is pivoted the roller J. Figs. 1, 23, which lat 
ter fits in the cam-groove J. The rear part, 
J', of the reciprocating piece is provided with 
the fork J, Figs. 1, 2, 23. The two inner Io5 
edges of these limbs are parallel, and the 
limbs are in the same vertical plane. The 
fork J straddles the hub Ji, Figs. 2, 23, of the 
cam, the limbs of the fork respectively fitting 
into an annular groove, J, Figs. 1, 2, 23, in 
said hub, and keeps the reciprocating piece 
J J in line. 
The reciprocating rod J J is preferably 
provided with means for adjusting its length 
and taking up wear. These means consist as II 5 
follows: The piece J is screwed into piece 
J" and secured by a lock-nut, J', Figs. 1, 2, 23. 
The forward end of rod JJ is pivoted to one 
end of lever J', Figs. 1, 2, and the other end of 
lever J" is rigidly secured to shaft J", Figs. i., I2O 
2, and the latter is journaled in the sides of 
the machine. Rigidly attached to said shaft 
are the levers J'J', Figs. 1, 2, and to the 
forward ends of these levers J J' are respect 
ively pivoted the rods J J', Figs. 1, 2, 21, 
and the upper ends of the latter are respect 
ively pivoted to the respective knuckle-joints 
of the toggles J. J. J.J.", Figs. 1, 21. 
The forward end of the piece J' of each 
toggle J. J." is pivoted to brace 'A' at the up 
per forward corner of the machine. The rear 
end of each of the pieces J" of said toggles is 
pivoted by pivot J, Figs. 1, 19, 21, to the 
front of the oscillating frane F, a little below 
45 
55 
- 
95 
I IC 
25 
372,128 
5 
O 
2:) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the lower jaw, J. (See Figs. 1 and 21.) The 
upper or working side of lower jaw, J, is 
provided with a facing of steel in the form of 
a steel plate, J", Figs. 1, 19, 21, similar to the 
plate F" on the upper jaw, F". 
I will now describe the mechanism for ver 
tically reciprocating the cross bar K, employed 
to brace the jaws F and J. 
On the main shaft B is rigidly fixed a 
grooved can, K", Figs. 2, 4, whose construc 
tion is similar to that of cam J., already de 
scribed. A reciprocating rod, KK", Figs. 1, 
2, 4, and its attachments is similar to rod J 
J, already described, and is operated by its 
Cam K'as rod JJ was operated by cam J. 
Lever K, shaft K", levers K' K', and rods KS 
K, Figs. 1, 2, 4, are similar in construction, 
attachment, and in operation to the corre 
sponding levers, J", shaft J, and levers J J', 
and rods J J'. The upper ends of the rods 
KK are respectively pivoted to the respect 
ive lings K" K", Figs. 1, 4, 16, of the cross-bar 
K. Figs. 1, 4, 16. This cross-bar K slides up 
and down on fixed bars IX", Figs. 1, 4, 5, se 
cured to the sides of the frame. 
I will now describe the mechanism for rais 
ing and lowering the guide-arm L, Figs. 1, 13, 
32, 33. 
Rigidly fixed on main shaft B is the grooved 
can L, Fig. 2, similar to cam J, and operated 
thereby is the forked reciprocating rod L L', 
Figs. 1, 2, with its attachments similar to rod 
J. J. The upper end of forked lever LL is 
pivoted to a lever, L, Fig. 1, rigidly fixed to 
shaft L", Fig. 1, suitably supported on bear 
ings on the left hand frame, parallel to the 
length of the machine. On the forward end 
of this shaft is a lever, L, Fig. 1, capable of 
sliding on the said shaft in the direction of the 
length of the latter, and prevented from turn 
ing on the shaft by means of a feather. To 
lever L is pivoted rod Li, Figs. 1, 33, and the 
upper end of this rod L is pivoted to a lug, L", 
Figs. 1, 13, 33, on arm L. 
The object of the sliding connection between 
lever L and shaft L is to enable lever L to 
continue always perpendicular to the guide 
arm L as the latter is shifted in position. 
Each end portion of the carriage T, Figs. 1, 
6, 12, is provided with a pair of uprights, L' 
L", and these serve as guides for the respect 
ive journal-boxes of the upper roller, R, Figs. 
1, 6. The journals of the lower roller, R, 
Figs. 1, 6, fit in bearings in the carriage at 
the base of the uprights. (See Fig. 12.) 
I will now describe the mechanism for swing 
ing the guide in a peculiar manner away from 
t book before it (the guide) rises perpendic 
To the rear one of the left-hand pair of up 
rights L" is hinged, at L", Figs. 1, 12, an os 
cillating piece, L", Figs. 1, 12, 33, to which 
the aforementioned arm L is pivoted by means 
of the pivot-pin L', Figs. 12, 33. To the outer 
end of this arm L are fixed the guide-carriers 
L", Figs. 32, 33. Each of these carriers L 
carries its guide-piece or guides L", Figs. 32, 
ularly. 
p 
33. In rounding and backing large books 
the forward edges of the guide-pieces L" are 
preferably concaved, and the swinging motion 
which is imparted to the guide pieces L." L" 
in moving away from the book before rising 
becomes essential in order to prevent these 
guide-pieces from hooking under the book 
and injuring or shifting the latter as they are 
elevated out of the way. 
In Fig.1 the guide-arm L is shown elevated, 
with the guide pieces removed. The guide 
arm is drawn down by rod L, aforementioned, 
and as it (the arm) moves down its shoulder 
L", Figs. 1, 13, 33, impinges against the side 
of the oscillating piece L'. As the arm L con 
tinues to be drawn down it acts as a lever 
upon the oscillating piece, and brings down 
said piece until the bottom of the latter strikes 
the upper edge of the supporting-base L', 
Figs. 1, 12, 33. The arm L has now reached 
the lower end of its movement, and the guides 
L. L are now in position to stop the book at 
the desired point as it (the book) is intro 
duced between the rounding - rollers R. R. 
When the guide-arm is to be elevated, the rod 
L rises and the guides swing rearward and 
upward as the oscillating piece L", with guide 
arm I, is rising from the base L', thereby 
clearing the book. This upward rearward 
movement is primarily caused by the spring 
L", Figs. 1, 12, 33, raising the oscillating piece 
L from its base L, this spring L" being fixed 
in or secured to the base and pressing against 
the lower side of L. The upward movement 
of this oscillating piece is arrested by any suit 
able device-as, for example, stop-piece L", 
Fig. 12. As soon as the oscillating piece 
L' ceases to rise, the arm L is raised vertically 
by the rod L to the position shown in Fig. 1, 
and it and the guides are out of the way of 
the jaws and other mechanism. This last 
nanned vertical movement of the ari L after 
the oscillating piece has risen is provided, 
instead of a further swinging movement, to fa 
cilitate compactness in the machine. 
I will now describe the mechanism that re 
ciprocates the upper roller, R., Figs. 1, 6, 7, 
9, 32, which latter operates in connection with 
lower roller, R, Figs. 1, 6, 9, 32. 
Fixed on main shaft B is the grooved cam R, 
Fig. 2, similar to cam J. Forked reciprocat 
ing rod R. R., Fig. 2, and its attachments are 
similar to rod JJ, heretofore described, and 
its engagement with grooved cam R." and its 
hub is similar to the engagement of rod JJ 
with can J and its hub. The forward end of 
rod R. R. is connected to a compound pull-rod, 
R. R. Figs. 1, 2, 26. Rearward the piece R 
has a hollow extremity, and through the rear 
end of this extremity passes the end of the rod 
piece R, and is continued on and passed 
through the guide R, Fig. 2, fixed to the rod 
piece R. The rod-piece R is free to slide in 
the rod-piece R and guide R. Screwed onto 
the rod-piece R in the rod piece R is a nut, 
R", Fig. 2, free to slide within said rod R. 
Between the nut Rand the rear end of the 
75 
95 
IO 
IO 
I25 
372,128 
7 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
rod-piece R is a spiral spring, R", Fig. 2, the 
resilience of which is regulated by the said 
nut R. Rearward of the end of rod-piece R 
is a stop, R", Fig. 2, on piece R, which stop 
prevents the rod-piece R from being drawn too 
far into the rod-piece R by the spring R', and 
so serves, in conjunction with nut R', to regu 
late the resilience of said spring R. The for. 
ward piece, R, of the compound pull-rod R' 
R is pivotally connected to a lever, R., Figs. 
1, 2, 26, rigidly attached to the shaft R', Figs. 
1, 2, 26, Suitably journaled in the sides of the 
machine. To this same shaft, R', are rigidly 
connected the levers R. R., Figs. 1, 2, 26. 
To each of the levers R is pivoted its re 
spective rod R", Figs. 1, 2, 26, and these rods 
R" are pivoted to the sliding yoke R", Figs. 1, 
6, 7, that carries the upper roller, R. When 
preferred, compound rod R. R* may be solid 
and the capacity for yielding be embodied in 
the rods RR", in which event each of the 
rods R' will be compound and provided with 
Spring and be similar in construction to that 
now presented in the compound rods RR. 
The preferred means for adjusting the up 
per roller so as to regulate the distance to which 
it shall approach the lower roller and for rais 
ing the upper roller at will and throwing it 
out of connection with the mechanism for ver 
tically reciprocating it is as follows: The 
piece R is united to piece R by a screw-thread, 
and the piece R has a hook, R, Figs. 1, 2,26, 
which, when the compound pull-rod R R is 
dropped, engages the pin R", Figs, 1, 26, on 
the upper end of lever, R. For more con: 
veniently lifting the rod R. R. from pin R. 
and lowering it to engage said pin, and also 
for rotating part R to lengthen or shorten R 
R, I provide a suitable handle, as R.", Figs. 
1, 2, 26, connected to said hook R' on rod R. 
By disengaging the hook R' from the pin and 
rotating the piece R the compound pull rod 
RR is lengthened or shortened by the screw 
thread uniting the portions R. R. of the pull 
rod. As the pull-rod is shortened, the upper 
roller is made to approach closer to the under 
roller, and vice versa. Thus the rollers are 
adapted to pinch a thicker or thinner book. 
Fixed on shaft R at any convenient point 
thereo is a hand-lever, R', Figs. 2, 26, and 
pivoted to lever R." is the hook R", Figs. 2, 
26, which latter (when hook Ris disengaged 
from the pin R' and lever R." is brought for 
ward) engages the upper edge of the station. 
ary piece or brace A" of the machine. This 
action of lever R elevates the upper roller, 
R, and renders it inoperative for the time 
being. 
I will now describe the mechanism for rotat 
ing the rollers R. R. 
Fixed on the main shaft B is a grooved cam, 
S, Fig. 2, with its hub operating a forked re 
ciprocating rod, SS, Figs. 1, 2, respectively, 
similar to cam J., hub J, and rod JJ, and simi 
larly united together. The forward end of 
the reciprocating rod SS is pivoted to double 
lever S, Figs. 1, 2, 6, 27, fulcrumed at the in 
side of the frame A of the machine. On the 
forward end of this lever is an adjustable car 
riage, S, Figs. 1, 6, 27. This carriage is ca 
pable of sliding on lever S', and is set at any 
desired point along the length of the lever by 
means of the screw-rod S. Figs. 1, 6, 27, which 
latter is in turn locked by set-nut, S. Fig. 27. 
The screw rod S is prevented from longi 
tudinal movement, by having one end stepped 
in a recess, S, Fig. 27, in the lever S, near the 
fulcrum of the latter, and also by having the 
collar S, Fig. 27, engaging the plate S", Fig. 
27, fixed to the end of lever S. The under 
side of lever S is provided with a channel, 
S", Fig. 27, running longitudinally with the 
lever. S". The carriage surrounds the lever S, 
and from the lower portion of said carriage 
rises the lug S', Fig. 27, fitting into channel 
S". The screw rod S' passes through an in 
teriorly screw-threaded opening in this lug 
S" and engages the screw-thread thereof, so 
that by turning the screw-rod the carriage is 
moved on the lever S, as aforesaid. Suitably 
pivotally attached to the upper portion of 
the carriage S are the chains S', Figs. 1, 6, 
9, 10. These chains may be of various con 
structions; but the preferred kind of chain is 
shown in the drawings. Both of these chains 
pass up and against an idler, S', Figs. 1, 6, 9. 
One of these chains (the right-hand) then 
passes rearward under the pulley-sleeve S', 
Figs. 6, 9, of the lower roller, R, and then 
passes partially around the sleeve, and is then 
fastened to the latter. The other of these 
chains (the left-hand one) passes up in front of 
the idler S and the pulley-sleeve S", Figs. 6, 
9, 10, actuating the shaft of the upper roller,R, 
and then passes rearward and partially around 
said sleeve, and is then fastened to said sleeve. 
The chains are respectively wound far enough 
around their respective sleeves to enable the 
roller when rotated by its respective actuat 
ing-chain to rotate far enough to produce the 
desired effects hereinafter explained. The 
principal objects of providing a pulley-sleeve, 
as S", separate from and adjustable upon the 
shaft of its roller R or Rare, viz: first, when 
the rollers wear in one place, the rollers can 
be reset, so as to present a fresh surface to the 
action of the book; secondly, in case of break 
ing of the chain the pulley-sleeve can be reset 
and adapted to the reduced length of the 
chain; thirdly, ease of manufacture and of con 
struction in the first instance is subserved. 
The preferred means for causing the rollers 
R. R* to rewind the chains S and return to 
their first position consist of the strap S, Figs. 
6 and 9, and weight S". (See Figs. 6 and 9.) 
The chains S S are preferably of metal, as 
they need to be so constructed as that they 
will not be in any wise elastic. Being non 
elastic they will impart an even and decisive 
movement to the rounding rollers. Such a 
movement is necessary to secure from the said 
rollers a perfect action in rounding the book 
and presenting the same to the jaws. One end 
of the strap S is fastened to the shank of 
75 
95 
IOC 
I o5 
O 
II5 
I25 
8 
372,128 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
o 
75 
So 
85 
90 
roller R and wound around said shankin a di 
rection contrary to that in which the chain S' 
on the other end of said roller is wound. The 
Strap Snow runs up and over the idle-pulley 
S", Figs. 1, 6, and 9, and thence passes down 
against idle-pulley S", Fig. 9, and thence un 
der the pulley attached to weight S", and then 
upward over idle-pulley S", (see Fig. 9,) and 
thence forward, under, and up and around the 
shank of the roller R." in a direction contrary 
to that in which the chain S on the other end 
of Said roller is wound, and is there fastened 
to said shank. The strap secured at both ends 
forms a loop and upholds the weight S" by 
means of the pulley attached to the latter. 
The pulley enables the weight to shift along 
the strap and rise and fall with the latter, and 
at the same time exert a positive force to turn 
the rollers, which it will do whenever the 
chains are relaxed. The strap may be coiled 
any desired number of times upon itself on 
each roller-shank, and thus the power of the 
Weight to turn the roller will be increased or 
diminished, according as the strap is rolled 
more or less on and around said roller-shank. 
The idle-pulleys S', S', S', and S9 are suit 
ably pivoted to the carriage T. This carriage 
T, Figs. 1, 6, 9, 12, 32, and 33, consists, in gen 
eral, of a metal bridge whose ends are respect 
ively supported and guided by the forward 
and top ends of the frame AA. 
The means for adjusting the position of the 
Said carriage and for setting it when adjusted 
and holding it steady are as follows, viz: In 
the forward end of the cross-brace A" (see Fig. 
1) is a rod, T., (see Figs. 1, 6, and 8,) ar 
ranged to turn loosely therein. The rear end 
of this rod is screw-threaded and engages a 
female screw in a lug, T, (see Figs. 1 and 32,) 
fixed to the carriage T. The rotation of rod 
T by means of the hand-wheel T (see Figs. 
1, 6, and S) moves the carriage forward or 
rearward, as desired, and when the carriage 
is adjusted to the desired position the lock 
nut T, Figs. 1 and S, engaging a screw-thread 
on the rod in the vicinity of the cross-frame 
A, is turned and locks the rod T from shift 
ing. To further lock the ends of the carriage 
T and keep them steady I provide the clamp 
ing-screw T., (see Figs. 4 and 6,) located in 
the side of the machine. This screw passes 
through a slot, T, Fig. 4, in the side A of the 
frame, and is screwed into a lug, T, Fig. 6, 
fixed on the carriage and moving in con 
tact with the inside of the frame A. On the 
outer end of the screw T is a shoulder, which 
bears against the frame A at the sides of the 
slot. By tightening the screw the adjacent 
end of the carriage is rigidly held in position 
and the carriage prevented from oscillating 
on the center screw. rod, T. When the jaw 
frame F" is at the extreme point of its forward 
movement, it is steadied by means of the abut 
ting-screw T9, Figs. 1 and 8, and the latter 
can be adjusted forward or rearward to a 
proper position by means of its screw-thread 
engaging a female screw in the rear end of 
center screw - rod, T. When adjusted, the 
abutting-screw is locked by the lock nut T". 
(See Fig. 8.) The adjustment of this screw 
T9 also enables the operator to enlarge or de 
crease the size of the joints of the book with 
out changing any of the other adjustments of 
he machine. 
To enable the operator to better guide the 
book between the rolls a tubular rest, T", (see 
Figs. 1, 6, and 32,) suitably attached to the 
carriage T, is provided. Curved rods N, Fig. 
1, are provided to prevent the book from Cui'l- 
ing downward and striking the lower jaw. 
They are hinged at their forward ends to the 
carriage T. The rear ends of these rods re 
spectively pass through the respective open 
ings N' N, Figs. 1 and 19, in the oscillating 
frame F, immediately under the steel plate 
J' of the lower jaw. These stationary rods 
pass freely through the frame F" as the lat 
ter oscillates. 
For enabling the operator to have on hand 
a supply of books within his ready reach I 
provide a table, T', Figs. 1 and 11, prefer 
ably removable. In the present illustrative 
instance it is constructed as follows: The table 
proper, T', is mounted on a metallic frame 
work, T', (see Figs. 1 and 11.) provided with 
hooks T. T., (see Figs. 1 and 11,) these hooks 
respectively engaging the eyes in lugs T"T", 
(see Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6,) fixed to theside 
A" of the frame. The table is prevented from 
swinging by the hook T" (see Figs. 1 and 11.) 
engaging the top of the side A" of the frame. 
To prevent the book while being rounded 
from cocking up and striking the upper jaw 
I provide the spring N, Figs. 1, 6, and 7, fast 
ened at one end of the cross bar N, Figs. 1, 6, 
and 7, connected to the sliding yolkes R'. 
The spring N passes from said bar N' upward, 
then rearward over the top of the roller R, 
then downward, terminating in a foot substan 
tially on a level with the bottom of the roller IR. 
I will now describe the mechanism for Oper 
ating the clutch and quickly stopping the ma 
chine. 
C, as aforementioned, indicates the clutch 
pinion running loosely on shaft C. The coup 
ling member P. Figs. 4 and 29, of the clutch 
slides on the shaft C in the direction of the 
length of the shaft, but is compelled to turn 
therewith by means of a feather, P, Figs. 3, 
4, 5, and 29, and groove connection, the length 
of the feather and groove being parallel to the 
length of the shaft. On the boss of the coup 
ling member Pfitsa ring, P, Fig. 29, provided 
with trunnions PP, Figs. 4 and 29, and held 
to place on the boss by the collar P, Figs. 4 
and 29. The boss turns loosely within the 
ring, as the latter does not revolve. The trun 
nions PP respectively engage the respective 
forks P, Figs. 4 and 29, of the lever P, Figs. 
4 and 30. Said lever P is fulcrumed at a suit 
able point, as P, Fig. 4, by a bracket rigidly 
attached to the frame of the machine. 
To enable the operator to manipulate the 
lever P by one continuous movement it is 
OO 
(C 5 
IIc. 
I 25 
372128 
9. 
90 
constructed as follows: provide near the front 
of the machine a rest, P, Figs. 4 and 30, upon 
which the forward end of the lever moves. 
The short hand-lever P', Figs. 4 and 30, is con 
nected to the forward end of the lever P', as 
follows: A pivot at P', Figs. 4 and 30, makes 
a pivotal connection between said hand-lever 
P" and lever P. The pivoted end of the hand 
lever P' has an inclined plane, P, Fig. 30, 
whose path is concentric with the pivot. At 
the end of this inclined plane is the stop P', 
Fig. 30. Resting on the incline plane P is the 
shoulder P", Figs. 4 and 30, of the adjustable 
vertically-moving stop-pin P, Figs. 4 and 30. 
This stop-pin P' is upheld and guided by 
passing through flange P, Figs. 4 and 30, at 
tached to the forward end of lever P. The 
lower end of the stop-pin passes through the 
end of the lever P', and is also guided and 
supported hy the lever. When the stop-pin is 
at the lower end of the inclined plane P', it 
drops into opening P', Fig. 30, in the bracket 
P", or past the end of the latter when the said 
opening is omitted, and the bracket is thereby 
utilized as a stop. Supposing the coupling 
members P and C to be interlocked, then to 
disengage them the following movements take 
place: The hand-lever P' is drawn toward the 
operator. This operation turns the said lever 
P' and forces the stop-pin P7 up the inclined 
plane P'. This movement disengages the stop 
pin P from engagement with bracket P by 
lifting the foot of said pin above and away 
from said bracket. The operator continues to 
draw the lever P' toward himself, and the 
stop P now strikes pin P and converts the 
hand-lever P' and lever P (so long as the op 
erator continues to draw the lever P' toward 
himself) into one rigid lever, which (as the op 
erator continues to draw the hand-lever P'to 
ward himself) operates to disengage the coup 
ling members P and C. 
In order to engage the coupling members P 
and C the operator pushes the short hand-le 
wer P' away from him, and the said hand 
lever swings until the shoulder P', or equiva 
lent stop, reaches the stop-pin P", and the 
hand-lever P and lever Pare now converted 
into a rigid lever; and as the operator con 
tinues to push the hand-lever from himself the 
coupling members P and C are made to en 
gage one another, and the stop-pin P' drops 
and engages the bracket or stop P', and the 
lever P is locked in position. 
Among the advantages of the clutch and of 
its application at the point shown is this: In 
case of any stoppage of any part of the ima 
chinery or any obstruction thereof the oper 
ator is enabled to instantly stop the operating 
mechanism and get rid of the momentum of 
the fly-wheel, as the latter, by the action of the 
clutch, is entirely cut off from all connection 
with the operating mechanism. 
I will now describe, in general, the mode in 
The rounding-rollers having been adjusted 
to properly grasp a book of a certain thick 
ness, the book is inserted between the said 
rollers, the back of the book resting against 
guides L.", which latter have also been prop- 7o 
erly adjusted. The upper rounding-roller, R, 
now descends and impinges or presses on the 
book, and the latter is compressed between 
rounding rollers R and R. The guides L' 
now rise out of the way. The rounding-roll- 75 
ers. R and R now perform that part of a 
revolution which they have been adjusted to 
perform, so that they rotate enough to throw 
the book rearward far enough to pass the book. 
between the jaws and cause the back of the 8o 
book to project sufficiently far beyond the rear 
edge of the jaws to enable the backing device 
to form on the book the proper-sized joint. 
While the book is passing rearward, owing to 
the action of the rollers in rounding, there is 
a strain brought on the back of the book, which 
frequently causes the back of the book to curl 
up or down. 
Any tendency of the book to curl up is pre 
vented by spring N, and any tendency of the 
book to curl down is prevented by the rods 
. The upper jaw, F", now descends, 
and as it descends the heels of the springs F. 
F' first strike the upper side of the book, and 
as they (the springs) are pressed upon their 95 
action is such as to smooth out all buckling or 
wrinkling of the book previously caused by 
the action of the rounding-rollers. The up 
per jaw, F", still descends, and the book is 
now firmly grasped between the jaws F" and 
J, and at this moment the rounding-roller R 
rises, and the rounding-rollers release their 
grasp of the book. 
The jaws now swing rear 
ward, and bring the back of the book in con 
tact with the vibrating backing - plate E)'. 
The pressure which this plate D'' exerts upon 
the back of the book is regulated by the screws 
D". The pressure which this plate D'' exerts 
upon the joints of the book is regulated by the 
nuts DDD" D". The book being backed, 
the jaws, now move toward the operator, at the 
same time releasing their grasp on the book. 
As the book moves forward toward the oper 
ator it impinges against a second book already 
placed between the rounding-rollers by the 
operator, and is shoved out rearward from be 
tween the jaws by this second book, the latter 
taking the place between the jaws formerly 
occupied by the first book. This first book is 
now removed by the operator. 
Ordinarily, the mechanism heretofore de 
scribed for actuating the toggles J'J' should 
be constructed so as to yield both on the shove 
and the pull of the rod J, and to provide for 
this necessity I have constructed the rod J 
as shown in Fig. 34, to wit: One portion, J", of 
the rod is made as a sleeve, and the other por 
tion is a rod, J", provided with shoulders, 
flanges, or equivalent stops J". Each end 
portion of the rod J' carries its spring J, 13th 
and each spring J" is compressed between its 
adjacent collar, J', sliding on rod J', and the 
I 25 
I I5 
ICO 
IO 
... O 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
65 which my machine operates. 
. 
0 
372128 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
90 
7 5 
adjacent stop, J. Each spring keeps its col 
lar J' against the adjacent shoulder or stop, 
J', of the rod J'. 
The resilient or elastic force or power of the 
springs J"J" is regulated, preferably, by mak 
ing the stops J adjustable on the rod J' by 
means of a screw-connection there with. When 
ever the rod J' is subjected to a thrust or pull 
greater than the springs J" are set to resist, 
the appropriate spring J will yield and save 
the mechanism from injury. Whenever a 
book is accidentally displaced when grasped 
by the jaws, the rod J' must yield in its thrust, 
and when the jaws are returning toward the 
rounding rollers, and a book should be mis 
placed between the said rollers or so turn up 
as to strike the front side or sides of the jaws 
and not enter between them, the rod J must 
yield in its pull. 
Ordinarily, the mechanism for vertically re 
ciprocating the cross-bar IK, employed to brace 
the jaws F and J while the book is being 
backed, should be constructed to yield on the 
pull of the rod K. To provide for this ne 
cessity I have combined with the cross-bar K 
and each of the rods K the following devices: 
Instead of pivoting the upper end of rod K' 
directly to the cross-bar IX, I pivot said end 
of the rod IK to the lower end of the rod K'. 
(See Figs. 35 and 36.) The latter is provided 
with shoulder K' below the cross-bar K. This 
rod K'slides in the end portion of the cross 
bar K, preferably through an eye of the latter, 
(see Figs. 35 and 36,) and projects above the 
said crossbar. On this portion of the rod K' 
which projects above said cross bar K is a 
spring, R', which is compressed between the 
said cross-bar and a stop, K', at the upper 
end of said rod. The resilient power or push 
of the spring K' may be regulated by render 
ing the stop K'adjustable, preferably by means 
of uniting the stop K to the rod K' by a 
screw-threaded union. While the jaws are 
moving toward the backing-plate, should there 
happen to be an obstruction between them and 
the said backing-plate, the jaws are prevented 
from making their full movement in that di 
rection and are directly in the way of the 
cross-bar K, and obstruct the descent of the 
latter as drawn down by rod K. The spring 
Know yields and allows the rod K' to carry 
out its full downward movement. Without in 
jury to the mechanism. 
Instead of the backing-plate D', a cam 
shaped plate or a roller or segment of a roller 
may be employed, and may be substituted as 
an equivalent element for the backing-plate in 
the following claims, wherein the backing 
plate appears as an element, and this may be 
done without altering the features of inven 
tion covered by such claims. 
In relation to the cams heretofore men 
tioned it may be remarked that the groove in 
each cam is so shaped as to produce the proper 
movement, and the cams are so placed on the 
main shaft, as B, as to make these movements 
at their proper time. 
While the various features of my invention 
are preferably employed together, one or more 
of said features may be employed without the 
remainder, and, in So far as applicable, one 
or more of said features may be employed in 
connection with mechanism for rounding and 
backing books, or for both rounding and back 
ing them, other than that hercin specifically 
shown and described. 
What I claim as new and of my invention, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The compound yielding rod F. FF, in 
combination with the toggle F F. lever F'F', 
rod F, toggle F" F', and jaws F and J, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination of the frame F, pivoted 
at F", jaws F7 and J, toggle F" F", arm F", 
connected rigidly to one of the toggle-arms at 
an angle thereto, rod F, levers F. F', and 
means for operating the latter, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination of the lower jaw, J, and 
upper jaw, F", rods F", supporting the latter, 
yoke-piece F, nuts F, toothed wheels F, 
and worms F, shaft F", hand-wheel F, and 
frame F", substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the upper jaw, F", 
of the springs F", connected thereto and bent 
under the said jaw, substantially as set forth. 
5. The upper jaw, F", provided with re 
cesses F, and the springs F, respectively en 
tering said recesses, as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
6. The upper jaw, F", provided with re 
cesses F and the springs F", and straps F' 
F', through which the shanks of the springs 
respectively slide, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
7. The combination of the rounding-rollers 
R. R', spring N, bar N', and the yolkes R. R.", 
substantially as set forth. 
S. The combination of a backing device, 
D', arms D D, sliding carriage D", screw. 
threaded rods D", and lugs D", substantially 
as set forth. 
9. The combination of the sliding carriage 
D", screw-threaded rod D", provided with 
shoulders D"l)', cap D", set-screw D", and lu 
D", arms D', and oscillating backing-plate 
D', substantially as set forth. 
10. In a machine for rounding and backing 
books, the combination of the lever P, stop 
pin P', stop-bracket P', hand-lever P', pro 
vided with incline plane P' and stop P. P., 
and clutch member P, substantially as set 
set forth. 
11. The combination of lever D, rigidly at 
tached to collar D", provided with lugs D'ID", 
lug D", rigidly connected to sleeve D', bolt ID", 
connecting lug D" to lugs ID' D", lock-nuts D' 
D' on said bolt D", sleeve D', quadrants D7 
D' D", frame D', cross-bar D", and backing 
plate D, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
12. In the mechanism for operating the back 
ing-plate, the combination of lever D, sleeve 
D", to which quadrants D D, are rigidly at 
- 
OO 
IC5 
IIO 
g I I5 
 
372,128 
1. 
-- 
tached, shaft D, sliding carriages D', 
R., yokes R. R', and rounding roller R, sub 
Quad 
rants DD", frame D', cross-bar D", suitably 
stantially as set forth. 
supported, and the backing plate D', connected 
20. In the mechanism for holding the cen 
to the cross-bar D', substantially as set forth. 
ter on which the backing-plate oscillates, the 
13. The combination of the main shaft B, 
center pins, DD", supported by arms D'D', 
cam K', adjustable rod K' K', lever K, shaft 
supporting-rods D" D', cross-bar D", nuts 
K", levers K K, rods KK, cross-bar K, bars 
D', and uprights D" D", in combination with 
K" K", and jaw F", substantially as set forth. 
backing-plate D", substantially as and for the 
14. The combination of the reciprocating 
purposes set forth. 
rods KK, pivoted rods K' K', cross-bar K, 
21. The center pins, D D, rods D" D", 
through which said rods K' pass, springs IX', 
cross-bar D, threaded upright bars D'D", 
stops K", bars K" K", and jaw F", substan 
and nuts DDD" D", in combination with 
tially as set forth. 
backing-plate D', substantially as set forth. 
15. The combination of the cross-bar K, bars 
22. The combination of springs D", collars 
K" K", and jaws F" and J, substantially asset 
D", each provided with a feather, D', and a 
forth. 
lug, D', nuts D", each provided with grooves 
16. The mechanism for elevating the upper 
D", screw-threaded upright bars D", each 
rounding-roller out of working position, con 
provided with a groove or slot, D", cross-bar 
sisting of rods RR", levers R. R', shaft R', 
D", and backing-plate D", substantially as 
hand-lever R', hook R', and stop-piece A", in 
described. 
combination with said upper rounding-roller, 
23. The combination of strap S', weight S', 
R, substantially as set forth. 
rounding-rollers R. R', and metallic chains S' 
17. The mechanism for adjusting the dis 
S', substantially as set forth. 
tance of the rounding-rollers from one another, 
24. The combination of the oscillating piece 
consisting of the reciprocating elastic com 
L', arm L, provided with guides LL", and 
pound screw-rod R. R. R., spring R", nut R, 
carriage T, as and for the purposes set forth. 
slide R, and stop R", in combination with the 
25. The combination of the book-guides, 
rounding rollers and connections, substan 
oscillating piece L, base-stop L', stop-piece 
tially as set forth. 
L", and spring L", substantially as set forth. 
18. The reciprocating compound screw.rod 
26. The combination of the oscillating piece 
part R', L", guide carrying arm L, pivoted to piece 
R. R. R', provided with a notch in 
rod Rhand or thumb wheel R", pin R", and Land provided with stop L', and recipro 
lever R', in combination with the rounding 
cating rod L, substantially as described, and 
rollers R. R. and their connecting mechanism, 
for the purposes set forth. 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
19. The combination of main shaft B, can 
R, reciprocating rod R. R., yielding rod R. 
R, lever R, shaft R, levers R. R., rods R' 
JNo. W. STREHLI, 
O. M. HILL. 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN CRAWLEY. 
-- 
45 
55 
O 
35 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372228.txt	(No Model.) 
No, 372,228. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
E. F. McINTYRE. 
PLOW STANDARD, 
Patented Oct. 25, 1887. 
Attentor; 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 372,228, 
2 sheet-sheet 2, 
E. F. McINTYRE, 
PLOWSTANDARD, 
Patented Oct. 25, 1887. 
- 
Yzznesses 
a 
& Assy.--& 
Aue for: 
42-2243 
22.2%. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
- 
EDGAR F. McINTYRE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PLOW-STANDARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 372,228, dated October 25, 1887. 
Application filed February 21, 1887. 
Serial No. 228,347. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern 
Be it known that I, EDGAR. F. McINTYRE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Plow-Standards; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable other's skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention consists in a novel and im 
proved construction, as will be hereinafter de 
scribed and specifically claimed, of that de 
scription of plow-standard which is formed 
with a curved neck above the mold-board, and 
thereby facilitates the discharge of weeds, 
grass, and other foul stuffs upon the furrow 
side of the plow. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front view of my improved plow-standard, 
and Fig. 2 a rear view of the same. Fig. 3 is 
a front view of the said standard connected to 
a plow-beam, and with mold-board, share, and 
landside applied in their proper positions. 
Fig. 4 is a horizontal section in the line acac of 
Fig. 1, looking downward. Fig. 5 is a hori 
zontal section in the line y), a portion of the 
standard below being broken away. Fig. 6 is 
a horizontal section in the line & 2, looking 
upward. Fig. 7 is a top view of a portion of 
the standard. Fig. 8 is a side view of the 
standard as seen from the land side, and Fig. 
9 is a side view of the same as seen from the 
furrow side. 
My plow-standard A, as represented in the 
accompanying drawings, has its neck portion 
a crooked or curved between numbers 1 and 
2 on the landside, as shown in Fig. 7, as well 
as in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 8, and 9. From Figs. 1 
and 2 it will be seen that the curve on the 
landside near No. 1 throws the neck inward 
from the land side of the plow toward the fur 
row side of the same, also that the remainder 
of the curve is so slight that the greatest pro 
45 jection-say at yy-of the standard is only a 
little beyond the landside. By this construc 
tion the necessary curvature for directing the 
weeds inward over toward the furrow side is 
secured, and at the same time no land-side 
... 
" 
projection of the standard which would inter- 5o 
fere with the plowshare plowing as deep as 
desired is presented. 
The furrow-side edge of the curved neck a 
corresponds very closely in shape to the land 
side curved edge, as is illustrated by the draw- 55 
ings. The standard below No. 1 is formed 
with surfaces, as b b' b, which are adapted to 
the constructions and forms of the mold-board 
B, share C, and landside D, which parts are : 
applied upon these surfaces, as illustrated in 6o 
Fig. 3. Instead of forming the standard be 
tween the landside-shoulder c and the beam 
head d with a brace which projects out land 
sideward from near No. 1, I construct it in 
form of either the letter U or V, as illustrated 65 
in Figs. 2, 5, and 6, and so slope and shape 
the rear surface, as illustrated in said figures, 
with respect to the landside and beam-head d 
that, while the rear portion of the U or V of 
the standard serves to strengthen and act as a 7o. 
stay to the front portion, it does not offer any 
undue obstruction to the plowshare entering 
the soil as deep as required. This construc 
tion is very light, yet strong and enduring. 
are tied together about midway of the height 
of the standard by a cross-lug, f, which is cast 
in relief from the front body of metal by which 
said portions are united as one piece, thus leav 
ing a passage, e, between said metal and the 
lug. This lug is located near No. 1, and its 
construction is plainly illustrated in Figs. 2 
and 4; and at the top of the standard the said 
two portions of the U or V construction are 
tied together by the beam-head d, said beam 
head having a vertical oblong opening, g, 
through it for the passage of the fastening 
bolt h or a fastening and staying rod which 
connects the plow-standard to the beam. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that my plow-standard is constructed 
with the neck crooked or curved to the land 
side of the plow, and then comes back with a 
rear contortional segmental twist to a center 
draft, and that it is constructed in horizontal 95 
section in the form of about the letter U or V, 
the united portions of the U or V standard 
constituting strong supports or braces mutu 
The two portions of the U or V standard 75 
9o 
25 
35 
 
372,228 
IS 
O 
ally to each other; also, that the landside brace 
or support formed by the rear portion of the 
U or V standard extends back in a parallel 
line, or very nearly so, with the heel of the 
landside and runs the whole length of the plow 
standard from the beam-head d to the foot of 
the standard, thereby forming a seat for the 
landside to be bolted upon; and while this is 
the case the said rear portion of the U or V 
standard is a firm stay and brace to the other 
or front curved neck portion of the standard, 
it beginning at the front landside edge of said 
curved neck as a homogeneous part thereof 
and extending back even with the mold-board 
rear edge of the same. The curved neck of 
the standard forms, as usual, a curved guide 
with a surface similar to the surface of the 
mold-board for conducting and easing the pas 
sage off of weeds, grass, and all foul stuff into 
the furrow being made by the plow, there to 
be buried or covered by the furrow-slice as it 
falls from the mold-board. This weed-guide, 
as is well known, is very important, as it pre 
vents the choking of the plow between the 
mold-board and the beam and avoids the ne 
cessity of stopping and li?ting the plow out of 
the ground for the purpose of clearing away 
the clogging matter. 
The advantage gained by making the staud 
ard of U or V form or with two flanges is this: 
The standard is braced in two directions, it 
being formed with two concave sides, one to 
the landside of the plow and one to the rear 
of the same, as illustrated in the drawings. 
The land ward side of the plow overcomes the 
extra strain which would naturally come from 
having a standard curving to the landward 
side of the plow. Fig. 3 of my drawings shows 
the rear and front of the brace of my improved 
standard, and it being of a concave form re 
sists effectually the immense strain which 
comes upon the neck a of the plow-standard 
from the front or cutting edge of the plow, 
caused by the horses lifting up the end of the 
plow-beam or by the plow suddenly striking 
against roots or stones. 
Plows with curved necks as heretofore con 
structed have not to the extent required been 
able to resist the extra strain caused by the 
team lifting on the end of the plow-beam, or 
by the sudden jar caused by the plow striking 
against obstacles in the ground. Provision 
has heretofore been made for protecting plow 
standards with curved necks against breakage 
sidewise; but the neck has been left wholly 
unprotected in rear on account of not having 
a flange or brace at that part to resist the 
strains caused by the team lifting on front end 
of plow-beam. Again, difficulty has been ex 
perienced where an auxiliary brace has been 
provided in a way different from my inven 
tion, in this, that the brace by projecting over 
the landside too far makes the plow side heavy 
and prevents deep plowing on account of the 
brace touching the ground on the landward 
35 
4 5 
SO 
65 
side of the plow. With my invention this 
difficulty is wholly overcome by the U or V 
shaped brace-standard, which while being per 
fectly braced at the curved neck, both land. 
ward and rearward, has its bracing portion in 
a parallel line (or nearly so) with the landside 
of the plow, and thus allows the plow to do 
deep plowing, and at the same time lessens 
side draft by not rendering the plow side 
heavy. 
From the drawings, Figs. 2 and 4, it will be 
seen that the lug f forms a cross-bar, upon 
which a hooking screw-bolt rod (not shown in 
the drawings) which fastens the beam to the 
standard may be hooked or fastened, and thus 
the plow-beam relieved of much of the strain 
which comes upon the plow-standard when 
the team lifts on the end of the beam or the 
share strikes any obstacle in the ground. 
While I regard it the most proper way of 
constructing the standard to have the rear 
flange extend from the beam-head to the land 
side-seat, and to form the seat or flange to 
which the landside, share, and mold-board are 
fastened, I would say that the plow-standard 
may be made with the rear brace only run 
ning part way down from the head d, and yet 
serve a useful purpose. I would also state 
that the plow-standard, of U or V form in 
horizontal section and with the peculiarly 
crooked and curved neck, may be made light 
of either cast or wrought metal, malleable iron, 
or steel; or the lower portion might be of cast 
metal while the upper partis of wrought metal, 
or vice versa, and these portions firmly united. 
I would also state that the cross-lug f, forming 
a cross-bar for the fastening bolt-rocl, might be 
dispensed with and the beam fastened, as 
usual, by a bolt and nut; but I prefer to pro 
vide the plow-standard with said lug. The 
shape of the standard represented in the draw 
ings is such that the front edge of the stand 
ard is rounded and the beam-head does not 
project over in front, and thus the guiding 
throat of the neck is left clear and Smooth be 
neath the plow-beam in front of plow, thus 
giving the weeds, grass, and foul stuff great 
freedom to pass along without anything but 
the friction of the surface on which they move 
to detain them. 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
I O5 
IO 
II5 
What I claim is 
1. The plow - standard comprising beam 
head d, guiding and weed-discharging crooked 
or curved neck portion a, and having seats for 
landside, share, and mold-board, said standard 
being of U form in horizontal section, and the 
rear portion of the U-standard being parallel, 
or nearly so, with the landside, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
2. The plow - standard comprising per?o 
rated beam-head d, guiding and weed-discharg 
ing crooked or curved neck portion a, and 
cross-bar f, and having seats for landside, 
share, and mold-board, said standard being of 
U form in horizontal section, and the rear por 
I 25 
372,228 
8 
tion of the U-standard being parallel, or nearly 
so, with the landside, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
3. The combination, in the plow-standard 
5 A, of U form in horizontal section, and with 
its rear portion parallel, or nearly so, with the 
landside, and having its neck crooked or 
curved, as at a, and provided with seats for 
landside, share, and mold-board, all as and for 
the purpose herein described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EDGAR F. MCINTYRE. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN J. RYAN, 
JOHN J. FANNING. 
Io 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372328.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 372,328. 
 
W. H. & H. W. PICKETT. 
PIPE THREAD PROTECTOR. 
Patented Nov. 1, 1887. 
A 2 
 
Z 22, 
- Z 
l 
, 
 
eye/e- 
INVENTOR; 
BY Muell 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. PICKETT AND HARRY W. PICKETT, OF WARREN, PENNSYLVANIA. . 
PIPE-THREAD PROTECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION ioriming part of Letters Patent No. 372,328, dated November 1, 1887. 
Application filed February 5, 1887. Serial No. 226,7c3. (No model.) 
. 
. 
. . 
- 
. 
. 
25 and pipe. 
20 corresponding parts in all the figures. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
tector to engage the pipe-thread, or but a part. 
Beit known that we, WILLIAMH. PICKETT of a thread may be formed on the protector, 
and HARRY W. PICKETT, both of Warren, in or the equivalent of a thread or part of a thread 
the county of Warren and State of Pennsyl- may be formed on the protector by a series of 55 
5 vania, have invented a new and Improved internal spirally-ranging projections, B, pro 
Pipe-Thread Protector, of which the following duced, preferably, bypressing the metal of the . 
is a full, clear, and exact description. . 
protector from the outside, and as will be un 
Our invention relates to a guard for protect 
derstood from Fig. 4 of the drawings, and 
ing exterior threads on the ends of pipes from 
these thread formations B may extend but 6o 
Io injury during handling or transportation, and . 
partly around the protector, or more than once. 
has for its object to provide a simple, inex 
around it, as above described for the threadB. 
pensive, and efficient device of this character. 
It is obvious that a protector having an in 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
ternal thread near its outer end and provided : 
tures of construction of the pipe-thread pro 
at its outer end with an inbent flange to over-65 
I5 tector, as hereinafter fully described and 
lap the end of the pipe to which it is applied. 
claimed. . 
. 
may be made by casting it or spinning it, in 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
one piece of metal; but we prefer to make the 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
protector from sheet metal, and by the follow 
ing process. We first cut a blank to proper 7o 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
size, and by using a die, either flat-faced or in 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of our im 
roller form, we impress the thread B or thein 
proved pipe-thread protector as applied to use. 
dentations B, forming a thread, into the metal. 
on the end of a pipe. Fig. 2 is a central lon 
..We then roll up the metal and join its edges, 
gitudinal sectional elevation of the protector 
preferably by a double hook lap joint, C, 75 
Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional elevation. 
similar to that employed in joining the seams 
of the protector viewed from the inner end, and 
of ordinary stove-pipe. The end flange, a, of 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of a modified form of 
the protector may be bent up either by the die. 
the protector, partly broken away and in sec. 
at the same time that the internal thread is 
formed, or the flange may be spun or upset 8o 
tion. 
3o We make the thread-protector Ain the form. 
after the ends of the metal plate are joined, as 
of a ring or annulus, and preferably of sheet 
may be preferred. 
metal, and with an inturned flange, a, at its 
We specify the advantages of our improve 
outer end, which laps upon the end of a pipe, 
ment as follows: By forming the internal 
D, to which the protector is applied, as pres 
thread, partial thread, or a few threads on the 
inside of the protector near its outer end it 
On the ring-protector there is formed an in 
may be very much more quickly applied to 
ternal thread, B. We prefer to make this 
the pipe thanis possible with protectors hav 
thread by pressing it up by roller or other 
ing screw-threads cut or produced on them 
dies from the main body of the plate of the 
for their entire length, and which require to 
4o ring, and we form the thread B quite near the 
be turned upon the pipe many times to en 
outer end of the ring, or so it will screw upon 
tirely cover the pipe-thread, while with our 
or over but a few threads of the pipe to which 
device it is simply slipped bodily over the 
the protector is applied, and the body of the 
pipe-thread until the thread B strikes the . 
protector inside of the thread will be long 
... 
pipe threads, and a few turns of the protector 
2.45 enough to quite snugly fit over and completely 
suffices to hold it securely to the pipe so it 
cover the threads d on the end of the pipe D, 
fully covers the pipe-threads. Furthermore, 
as shown. 
the end flange, a, forms a complete protection 
In practice we may form but one continu 
to the end or leading thread of the pipe, which 
ous thread Bon or in the protector, as shown 
it is most important to assure, and the end 
50 in Fig. 3; but, if preferred, two or three or more 
flange, a, also provides, in connection with the 
of such threads may be produced on the pro 
internal thread or threads of the protector, a 
35 ently explained. 
95 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
... 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
"O 
2 
lock to the protector on the pipe when the 
protector is screwed fully home onto the pipe, 
and this locking feature of the flange is par 
ticularly valuable in a protector having a par 
5 tial or whole thread or but a few threads near. 
its outer end, and, finally, a screw-thread pro 
tector made as herein described and claimed 
is not only very effective for its purpose, but 
it may be made at a trifling cost. 
It will be understood that we do not limit 
ourselves to the formation of a partial thread, 
a whole thread, or two or more threads at the 
interior of the protector near its outer end, as 
the thread or threads may be formed on or 
(5 pressed into the protector near its inner end; 
but the construction with threads at or near 
its outer end is preferred, because of the ease 
of application of protectors so made to the 
pipes, as above described. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
. 
. 
. 
372,328 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, 
the pipe-thread protector having on its inside 
a thread or threads at its one end, while the 25 
remainder of the protector is plain or un 
threaded throughout, substantially as shown 
and described, and for the purpose set forth. 
2. As an improved article of manufacture, 
the pipe-thread protector having on its inside 3o 
|tition threads at its one end, while the 
remainder of the protector is plain or un 
threaded throughout, said threaded end of the 
protector also having a ninbent flange adapted 
to cover the end of a pipe, substantially as 35 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
W. H. PICKETT. 
HARRY W. PICKETT. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES W. KITCHEN. 
THOS. O. SLATER 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372428.txt	(No Model. ) 
T. O'BRIEN, 
WELOCIPEDE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 372,428, 
Patented Nov. 1, 1887. 
 
(No Model.) 
T. O'BRIEN. 
WELOCIPEDE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 372,428, 
Patented Nov. 1, 1887, 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS O'BRIEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
WELOC PEO E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 372,428, dated November 1, 1837. 
Application filed February 18, 1887. Serial No. 228,010. (No model.) 
55. 
To all, Luhon, it nay concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAs O'BRIEN, of 
the city and State of New York, have invented 
an Improvement in Bicycles, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
In my present invention I make use of two 
Wheels and a yoke-shaped frame passing at the 
sides of the main wheel and extending along 
to the socket for the fork of the steering 
wheel, and I place the seat for one rider upon 
a standard rising from the main frame in front. 
of the driving-wheel, and for the other rider 
upon standards at the rear of the machine; 
and the driving mechanism consists of pendent 
treadles and links connecting to cranks upon 
chain-wheels, having chains that pass to wheels 
upon the shaft of the main driving-wheel. 
The frame is braced to a yoke that passes over 
the driving - wheel, and to which the mud 
guards are connected. 
In Some features my present invention is 
similar to that shown in my Patent No. 347,503, 
the present device, however, being a bicycle, 
and not a tricycle. 
In my application No. 22S,326, filed Feb. 
ruary 21, SS7, the frame receives the two 
driving-wheels of a tricycle, and there are 
two Seats upon the frame. I do not, there 
fore, herein claim the two seats, one before the 
other, where the seats are between the two 
wheels. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation of 
the bicycle. Fig. 2 is a plan of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a separate plan view of the basket 
for holding luggage. Fig. 4 is a front view 
thereof. 
The main wheel A and the front or steering 
wheel, B, are of any ordinary construction. 
C represents the fork of the steering-wheel, 
and 2 the mud-guard for the same. 
3 are the side braces for holding the mud 
guard, and 4 is the shaft or pivot for the forks 
and steering-wheel. 
The main frame of the machine is preferably 
tubular; the side pieces, 5, of the said frame 
converge toward the front and back, and 6 is 
a half-circle connection at the back end, and 
7 is the tubular socket, to which the side pieces, 
5, converge, and to which they are connected, 
and through this socket the pivot-shaft 4 passes. 
This frame may be made of one pipe bent up 
to shape, or it may be made of separate pieces 
of pipe coupled or brazed together. 
The yoke S is attached at its lower ends to 
the side pieces, 5, of the frame, and it passes 
up over the main wheel A, and a pin, 70, pro 
jecting from this yoke, receives a socket, 9, into 
which a staff, 10, may be inserted carrying an 
umbrella or a flag, and there are braces 11 ex 
tending diagonally between the yoke S and the 
side pieces, 5, of the frame, to stiffen and 
strengthen said frame, and the mud-guards 12 
are attached at their upper ends to tie Socket 
9 and at the lower ends to the frame at the 
half-circle 6 and a cross-piece, 13, respectively. 
The axle 14 of the wheel A is in bearings 
upon the under sides of the frame 5, and there 
are chain-wheels D upon the outer end of said 
axle, and endless chains 15 to the chain 
wheels E, that are upon separate gudgeons or 
shafts projecting from brackets 16, that ex 
tend down below the side pieces, 5, of the 
frame, and to these chain-wheels Ethe cranks 
17 are attached, and from the crank-pin of 
each crank 17 there is a second crank, 18, ex 
tending so as to form compound cranks for 
the respective connecting-rods 20 and 21. 
Upon the cross-piece 13 is a vertical stand 
ard, F, carrying the seat G, and said stand 
ard is preferably made as a column con 
taining a rod, 22, at the upper end of which 
the Seat is fastened, so that the seat can be 
raised or lowered and clamped by the screw 
23. In Fig. 2 the metal frame of the seat G 
only is shown. The same, however, is to be 
covered with leather or any other suitable ma 
terial. 
The pendent links 2526 hang from the front 
edge of the seat-frame G, and they are each 
preferably made of a tube with a rod inside 
it, so as to vary the length to suit the rider, 
and the parts are clamped, when adjusted, by 
the screws 27. The foot-pieces or treadles H. 
are applied at the pivots 29, that unite the 
lower ends of the respective links 25 26 and 
connecting-rods 20. 
It will now be understood that the rider, 
seated upon the seat G, propels the vehicle by 
the action of the feet upon the treadles H, the 
lower limbs of the leg swinging forward and 
backward at the knee. 
There is a second seat, K, upon standards 
75 
SO 
90 
OO 
IO 
25 
. 3O 
35 
O 
45 
2 
372,428 
 
5 
O 
25 p 
35 
45 
90 
. 
75 
In order to hold the parts in position, it is 
T, that are tubular, and the seat can be 
preferable to extend the arm 56 behind the 
raised or lowered and clamped similar to the 
shaft 57, and provide a swinging link, 62, with 
seat G, and there are pendent links 30 and 
a clamp - screw, 63, so that the link may be 
treadles N upon the pivots 31, that unite the 
links 30 to the connecting-rods 21, and the brought into action to clamp the arm 56 and 
rider upon the seat Kaids in propelling the hold the same when the wheels 49 are in con 
bicycle by moving the legs in a similar man- tact with the ground, or when they are raised 
ner to the rider on the seat G; and it will be up from the same. 
observed, upon reference to Figs. 1 and 2, 
I provide a basket, P, preferably of wire 
that the compound cranks will not have any work, with a central opening in the bottom, 
dead-center, because the crank-pins for the so that the basket may be set over the socket 
connecting-rods 20 pass the horizontal center 9, and the sides of this basket should extend 
plane after the crank to which the connecting- downwardly and rest upon the pins 65, that 
rods21 are attached, thus equalizing the action project from the braces 11; and it is preferable 
of the treadles. 
o arch the bottom of the basket, as seen in 
Upon the upper end of the pivot-shaft 4 is Fig. 5, so that it passes over or rests upon the 
a fork with lateral projecting tubes 35, through mud - guards 12. This basket is adapted to 
which passes a rod, 36, with handles 37 at the carry bundles or baggage, and when not re 
ends. By these the rider upon the seat G can quired it is easily lifted off. 
It is preferable to make the mud-guards 12 
turn the pivot-shaft 4 and steer the bicycle, 
of sheet metal, and trough-shaped sectionally, 
and the rod 36 can be partially revolved in 
and to attach them by screw-bolts at theirlower 
the tubes 35, and in so doing the brake is ap 
ends to the frame and at their upper ends to the 
plied, as next described. 
sides of the tubular socket 9, and this tubular 
The brake Q is upon the end of a lever, 38, 
socket 9 sets over a pin, 70, that projects at the 
ivoted at 39, and to the upper end of the le 
upper end of theyoke 8, so that by removing the 
ver 38 a bent lever, O, is connected. The pivot 
bolts at the lower ends of the mud-guards the 
40 of this bent lever O is supported by a fork, 
socket 9 and the mud-guards can be lifted off 95 
41, that extends out from the standard F, and 
to give easy access for cleaning out the under 
the parts are strengthened by the braces 42, 
sides of the mud-guards. 
that pass forward to the tubular socket 7. The 
I claim as my invention 
arm 43 is fastened firmly to the rod 36, be 
1. The combination, in a bicycle, with the 
tween the inner ends of the tubes 35, and there 
main driving-wheel and front steering-wheel 
is a link, 44, extending from the arm 43 to the 
and its fork and pivotal shaft, of a tubular 
bent lever O, and the joints at the ends of this 
supporting frame extending horizontally at 
link are preferably ball joints to allow the 
the sides and passing around the back of the 
pivot-shaft 4 to be turned in steering the bi 
cycle without interfering with the brake, as 
main wheel and connected at the front thereof, 
the said brake is applied by swinging the han- the converging side pieces, 5, and socket 7, 
forming the forward part of said frame, bear 
dles 37 upwardly, turning the rod 36, and 
moving the links and lever-connections to the ings for the axle of the main wheel, connected 
to the tubular supporting-frame, the vertical 
brake. The weight of the handles 37 causes 
yoke passing from the sides of the frame up 
them to drop, when not in operation, and re 
over the main wheel, and the diagonal side 
lease the brake. 
A step, 47, is applied at the back end to aid braces acting with the yoke to stiffen the hori 
in mounting to the seat K, and it is convenient Zontal frame, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, in a bicycle, with the 
to have a second step, 75, at the front part of 
main driving-wheel and front steering-wheel 
the machine. 
and its fork and pivotal shaft, of a tubular 
The steadying-wheels 49 are at the lower ends 
supporting-frame extending horizontally at 
of the swinging bars 50, and these are pivoted 
the sides and passing around the back of the 
at their upper ends to the side pieces, 5, of 
main wheel and connected at the front thereof, 
the frame, and there are slides 51 around the 
the converging side pieces, 5, and Socket 7, 
bars 50, and links 52 to short shafts 53 in bear 
forming the forward part of said frame, bear 
ings upon the under sides of the frame 5, and 
ings for the axle of the main wheel, connected 
crank-arms 54 and links 55 to the arm 56 upon 
to the tubular supporting-frame, the vertical 
a shaft, 57, that is provided with handles 58 
yoke passing from the sides of the frame up 
at its ends, and said shaft is in bearings 59 
over the main wheel, and the diagonal side 
upon the frame or arm 60, that extends out 
braces acting with the yoke to stiffen the hori 
from the seat-frame K. By turning the han 
dles 58 and shaft 57 the slides 51 will be raised 
zontal frame, and vertical tubular columns 
upon said frame at the front and rear of the 
or lowered upon the swinging bars 50, and 
main wheel, and the seat-rods and seats sup 
the links 52 will swing the bars 50 and steady 
ing-wheels 49 forward until the wheels rest ported by said columns, substantially as set 
upon the ground and hold the bicycle up ver. forth. 
tically while the rider or riders mount into 
3. The combination, in a bicycle, with the 
the seats, or when moved in the opposite di- main driving-wheel and front steering-wheel 
rection the steadying - wheels are raised, as and its fork and pivotal shaft, of a tubular 
supporting-frame extending horizontally at 
shown in Fig. 1. 
OO 
Ics 
O 
1 I5 
I 25 
 
372,423 
3 
the sides and passing around the back of the 
main wheel and connected at the front thereof, 
the converging side pieces, 5, and socket 7, 
forming the forward part of said frame, bear 
5 ings for the axle of the main wheel, connected 
to the tubular supporting-frame, the vertical 
yoke passing from the sides of the frame up 
over the main wheel, and the diagonal side 
braces acting with the yoke to stiffen the hori 
to Zontal frame, and vertical tubular columns 
upon said frame at the front and rear of the 
main wheel, and the seat-rods and seats sup 
ported by Said columns, and pendent links 
from the seat-frames, treadles, and cranks, and 
I5 connecting-rods for driving the main wheel, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, in a bicycle, of main 
and steering wheels, a frame passing around 
the main wheel and connecting the two wheels, 
2o a vertical column and seat in front of the main 
wheel, two vertical columns upon the rear part 
of the frame at each side of the main wheel, 
and a seat-frame upon said columns, pendent 
links from the respective seat-frames, treadles, 
25 connecting-rods, cranks, chain - wheels, and 
chains, by which the main axle and wheel are 
driven, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, in a bicycle, with the 
side frames and steadying-wheels 49, of the 
swinging bars 50, links 52, and crank-arms 54, 3O 
pivoted to the side frames, the slides 51, con 
necting the bar's 50 and links 52, the shaft 57, 
and handles 5S, and the links 55 and arms 56, 
connecting the crank-arms and handle-bar or 
shaft 57, respectively, whereby the Swinging 35 
movement of the handles operates the steady 
ing-wheels, substantially as specified. 
6. The main wheel A, brake Q, steering 
wheel B, and its fork and pivot-shaft, in colm 
bination with the lever 3S, bent lever 0, the 40 
link 44, arm 43, and the handle-bar, tube, and 
handles, whereby the movements of the han 
dles actuate the brake, substantially as speci 
fied. 
Signed by me this 15th day of February, 45 
SS7. 
THOMAS O'BRIEN. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCRNEY, 
WILLIAM G. MIOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372528.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. FOWLER. 
HORSE DETACHER, . 
No. 372,528. 
Patented Nov. 1, 1887. 
 
 
 
 
 
SSS, 
 
 
S. 
 
O 
n22%27 
I WITWESSES 
of a f cteface 
IWWEWTOR 
-62 
N. petes. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. C. FOWLER, OF CHANEYVILLE, MARYLAND. 
HORSE-DETACHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 372,528, date; November 1, 1887. 
Application filed May 19, 188. Serial No. 238,760. No model.) 
To all lu?hon, it 77 (If concern: 
Be it iknown that I, JOSEPH. C. FOWLER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cha 
ney ville, in the county of Calvert and State of 
Maryland, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Detaching-Whiffletrees; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, Such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to Which it appertains to make and use the 
S. 
My invention consists of a detaching- whi?. 
fletree, as hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure L is 
a face view of my whiffletree. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tion thereof on the line aca, Fig. J. Fig. 3 is 
a section on the line y), Fig. 1. Figs. 4 and 
5 are detail views. 
In the accompanying drawings my whiffle 
tree is represented at A, Fig. 1, with the detach 
ing - Wires B B thereon. These wires have 
hooks b, Working in the eyes a, to hold the 
traces securely on the eyes at the end of the 
whiffletree, or to push the traces free from the 
whiffletree, and thus detach the horses. 
O 
25 
At the center of the whiffletree is a slide, C, 
having a double or V-shaped cam for the pur 
pose of working the detaching-wires BB as fol 
lows: The slide Chasa notch, c, on its under side, 
which engages with catch D, and thus locks 
the slide, which is pressed down by the spring 
E. The chain or wire F passes through the 
eye or guide G within the reach of the driver. 
By a slight pull on this wire the slide C is raised, 
and thus unlocked, and then a further pull 
brings the double or V-shaped cam into action, 
and thus moves the wires B B and detaches 
the horses by tripping the traces. 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
In a horse-detaching device, the slide C, pro 
vided with a catch or lock, in combination with 
the wire or chain F, substantially as set forth. 
JOSEPH. C. FOWLER, 
IS 
35 
Witnesses: 
IEROY L. CHANEY, 
JOHN E. PLUMMER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372628.txt	(No Model. ) 
No. 372,628, 
 
J. W. LESLIE, 
CURTAN RING OR, HANGER, 
Patented Nov. 1, 1887. 
e6/67.65ses. 
(44.4 %-4 / 
--ex (a ----- 
2N 
77 Coveyziao 
el/04/azaeozz74 Zetae 
2, 6.7% a. 
%a2 
n, PETERS Photo-Lithographer. Washington, 2. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J. WILLIAMLESLIE, OF EVERETT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TOISAAC WATTS, 
OF WAVERLY, AND JOSHUAC. WILLIS, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CURTAN RING OR HANGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 372,628, dated November 1, 1887, 
Application filed June 28, 1887. 
Serial No. 242,733, (No model.) 
The yoke or frame c is made of substan 
tially the same length as the roller-receiving 
recess, and in the sides 2 of said yoke or frame 
the journals of the friction-roller a have their 
bearings. The extreme ends of the yoke or 
frame are overturned, as best shown in Figs. 4 
and 5, and enter recesses cut in the ring com 
municating with the roller-receiving recess. 
Each side 2 of the yoke or frame is provided 
With two outwardly-extended ears, 20, the up. 
per sides of which are made straight and the 
under sides inclined, so that when the frame 
is placed in the roller-receiving recess and 
pressure is applied the ears 20 will spring be. 
neath the material forming the ends of the re 
cess, as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 2. 
The ears or projections 3 and the ears 20 
serve as locking devices to lock or wedge the 
yoke or frame firmly in place, so that the roller 
("alway's has an even bearing upon the pole. 
While I have herein shown ears 20 and 3 as a 
means for locking the yoke or framein position, 
it is obvious that the said yoke or frame may be 
provided with laterally or outwardly extended 
projections of any desired shape and number. 
I claim 
In a curtain-ring, the tubular ring a, having 
a roller-receiving recess, combined with a yoke 
or frame having lateral or outwardly extended 
projections or ears, said yoke or frame carrying 
the friction-roller (c. and being placed in the 
roller-receiving recess and held by the said pro 
jections, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
J. WILLIAM LESLIE. 
45 
50 
55 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
BERNICE. J. No YES, 
B. DEWAR. 
5 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, J. WILLIAM flESLIE, of 
Everett, county of Middlesex, and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improvement 
in Curtain Rings or Hangers, of which the fol 
lowing description, in connection with the ac 
companying drawings, is a specification, like 
letters on the drawings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object to improve 
the construction of the curtain ring or hanger 
shown and described in application for Letters 
Patent, Serial No. 235,308, filed by me April 
19, 1887. In the curtain-ring shown in the said 
application a yoke or frame was placed in a 
roller-receiving recess cut in the tubular ring, 
the yoke being sprung in said recess; but in 
practice the said yoke or frame would move 
in the recess, so that the said roller would not 
at all times have an even bearing upon the pole. 
In accordance with this invention the yoke 
or frame carrying the friction-roller is provided 
with outwardly-extended ears or projections 
which bear against the interior of the tubular 
ring when said yoke or frame is placed in po 
sition, the said ears or projections serving to 
lock the frame firmly in place. 
Figure 1 shows in elevation a curtain-ring 
provided with a friction-roll having its bear 
ings in a yoke or frame constructed in accord 
ance with this invention; Fig. 2, a section on 
the dotted line acac of the ring shown in Fig. 1; 
Fig. 3, a cross-section of the ring, taken on the 
dotted line, 2, Fig. 2; and Figs. 4 and 5, de 
tails of the yoke or frame removed from the 
Tling. 
The tubular ring at is cut away upon its in 
ner side, as at a', to form a roller-receiving re 
cess, the material at the sides of the recess be 
ing bent inwardly to form smooth longitudi. 
nal edges. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372728.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. WATSON. 
SHANK STIFFENER FOR BOOTS OR SHOES, 
No. 372,728, 
Patented Nov. 8, 1887. 
Af'tig. A. 
A ty. 3 
29.4 
Atzzesses. 
24.7%. 
172/e7zfor. 
t/erenzaz 41.7%iozz 
N. PE? ERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, E. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JEREMIAH MEARS WATSON, OF SHARON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SHAN KSTFFENER FOR BOOTS OR SHOES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 372,728, dated November 8, 1887, 
Application filed November 30, 1885. Serial No. 18,281. (No model.) 
O 
3O 
35 
To aid whom, it mally concert 
Beit known that I, JEREMIAEI MEARSWAT 
SON, of Sharon, in the county of Norfolk, of 
the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in the 
Manufacture of Shoe-Shank Stiffeners; and I 
do hereby declare the same to be described in 
the following specification, and represented in 
the accompanying drawings, of which 
Figure 1 is a transverse section, and Fig. 2 
a botton view, of a shoe-shank stiffener of my 
improved kind. Fig. 3 is a transverse section 
of its two parts, as sewed together and ar 
ranged for being SO connected. 
My invention enables me to utilize much of 
what is generally condemned as waste pieces 
of Sole-leather, such as, though long enough, are 
not of sufficient width for being converted into 
an entire Shank-that is, one without a seam 
extending from end to end of it. 
In carrying out my invention, the nature of 
which is defined in the claims hereinafter pre 
Sented, I take two pieces, A and B, of leather, 
each of which is of a suitable width and length, 
and has one longitudinal edge of it straight; 
and I Scarf or bevel the piece at such edge in 
manner as shown at C in Fig. 3, SO that the 
plane of the beveled edge shall be at an acute 
angle with the outer surface of the piece when 
the two pieces are arranged together, face to 
face, in manner as shown in Fig. 3. Having 
thus beveled the two pieces and arranged 
then flatwise against one another, as shown in 
Said Fig. 3, I connect them by stitching or 
Sewing b, going through both transversely, 
Somewhat loosely, and at the vertex of the an 
gle which their beveled edges make with each 
other. Having done this, I turn both strips 
outwardly from each other until their beveled 
edges meet in close contact, as shown in Fig. 
1, in which case the two strips or pieces A and 
B will stand at an obtuse angle to each other, 
transversely of them. 
If desirable, the pieces can be glued or other 
. 
wise connected together at their edges in con- 45 
tact; but, generally speaking, the Stitching 
will suffice, it serving by its arrangement not 
only to secure them to each other, but to oper 
ate like a hinge to admit of their being turned 
or moved outwardly into an inclination with 5O 
each other, as represented in Fig. 1. 
The shoe-shank stiffener so made may be 
re-enforced, when desirable, by one or more 
pieces of material properly applied to it. By 
constructing it of two pieces beveled on their 55 
inner edges and laid face to face, so that their 
beveled edges shall stand at a re-entering an 
gle, and connecting said pieces by stitches go 
ing through both transversely at the vertex of 
the angle, such pieces can afterward be 
readily turned into positions, as shown in Fig. 
1, in which the beveled edges are represented 
as in close contact throughout both of them. 
By making the stiffener in two pieces instead 
of one, there are benefits to be obtained. The 
requisite arch is given in a simple way, as the 
pieces are united without crimping or shaping 
the leather. Also, by this greater elasticity 
is imparted to the stiffener, so that while the 
stiffeiner stiffens the shoe at the same time it 
has an elastic, yielding, relieving rigidity in the 
shoe-shank. 
I claim 
1. AS ath improved manufacture, a shoe 
shank stiffener, substantially as described, 
composed of two separate pieces of leather or 
material beveled on their longitudinal con 
nected edges and stitched to each other, as set 
forth. 
2. As an improved manufacture, a shoe 
shank stiffener composed of two separate 
pieces of leather or material inclined to each 
other transversely, and longitudinally con 
nected, as set forth. 
JEREMIIAH MEARS WATSON. 
fo 
5 
Witnesses: 
R. H. EDDY, 
R. B. TORREY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372828.txt	(No Model.) 
G. WAN WAGENEN, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 372,828, 
STOVE FOR HEATING CARS, &c. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1887. 
Sall 
\ Pal arease PPPPP assof 
ill-L-I-S- 
See: "If I 
S. SSYSNSSNNSSNS & 
al 
S. 
S. 
aS SS 
SN 
al 
N Sywy S3 
Sarass 
As 
B 
s N 
SSNeaza 
s wr 
W 
s 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 372,828, 
G. WAN WAGENEN. 
STOVE FOR HEATING CARS, &c. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1887. 
 
 
Y 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographe), Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE WAN WAGENEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STOVE FOR HEATING CARS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 372,828, dated November 8, 1887. 
Application filed February 18, 1887. Serial No. 228,015. (No model.) 
IC 
- 
: 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE WAN WAGENEN, 
of the city and county of New York, in the 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Stoves for Heating 
Cars and Boats or Wessels, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. . 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
stove which has its exterior so protected and 
which is so inclosed that in case of the stove 
being overturned or crushed the fire cannot 
escape from confinement, nor can the exterior 
of the stove become heated to a red heat. 
In carrying out my invention I surround 
the stove proper by a jacket or shield, which 
is of Wrought metal, and which is preferably 
double or composed of two parallel walls, af. 
fording an air-space between the stove and 
the inner wall of the jacket and between the 
two walls of the jacket. The doors of the 
stove and in the jacket-walls may slide hori 
zontally, and I. provide a curved latch or 
hook which is pivoted to the door and engages 
a locking projection on the casing or part 
which is closed by the door, and which is of 
such construction that in any position of the 
stove, save that in which the door will gravi 
tate to closed position, the latch or hook will 
remain engaged with the lock or projection 
- 
to hold the door closed. 
- 
The invention consists in novel combina 
tions of parts particularly hereinafter de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section of a stove embodying my 
invention, and having a tubular jacket or 
shield with double air-spaces which entirely. 
incloses the stove. Fig. 2 is a horizontal sec 
tion of the stove upon the plane indicated by 
the dotted line a ac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a plan of 
a rectangular tubular brace or distance piece, 
which is employed to maintain the top plates 
of the double jacket at the required distance 
apart, and in which is the smoke-outlet, pro 
tected by a grating. Fig. 4 is a front eleva 
tion, on a larger scale, of a portion of the up 
right wall of the stove or one of its jackets, 
having a horizontally-sliding door, which is 
locked in closed position by a latch or hook 
embodying my invention; and Fig. 5 is a view 
similar to Fig. 4, showing the position of such 
parts when the stove is overturned, and illus 
trating how the curved latch or hook, even in 
that position, holds the door closed. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre- 55 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A designates the fire-pot of the stove or the 
stove proper, which may be of cast-iron, and 
which has in it a grate, B, of any ordinary 
construction, below which is an ash-pan, B. 6o 
The top of the cast-metal shell forming the 
stove is closed by a plate, A", which may be 
secured thereto by bolts or otherwise, and in 
this top is a smoke-outlet, C, which is protected 
by a grating, c. 
I have here represented the stove A as sur 
rounded by a double jacket or shield, which 
is composed of bottom plates, D D', upright 
walls D D, and top plates, D. D. Between 
the double walls of the jacket or shield and 7o 
between the inner Wall and the stove proper, 
A, there are formed air-spaces did. The stove 
body A can never come in contact with the 
inner wall, D, of the double jacket or shield, 
nor can the inner and outer walls, D'D', of 75 
such double jacket or shield come in contact, 
because of pins, braces, projections, or dis 
tance-pieces, d, which extend across or bridge 
over the two air-spaces d d". These projec 
tions, braces, or distance-pieces may consist 8o 
of pins riveted fast in the upright walls D'D 
of the double jacket, those in the outer wall, 
D', bearing at their inner ends against the in 
ner wall, D', and those on the inner wall bear 
ing against the stove A. The top plate, D, of 85 
the double bottom has similar pins or projec 
tions, d, riveted to it and on the ends of which 
the bottom of the stove A is supported, and 
between the bottom plates, D D, are distance 
pieces d', which may consist of thimbles or 90 
sleeves surrounding rivets d', by which the two 
bottom plates, D D', are secured permanently 
together. The doublejacket or shield is made 
either of wrought metal--such as thick sheet 
iron or thin iron plate, and in order to fa- 95 
cilitate the replacement of the stove A when 
burned out, I may make the two cylindric up 
right walls, DD, in semicircular or cylindric 
sections, as shown in Fig. 2, or in sections of 
other form united by vertical and separable ico 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
372,828 
5 
IO 
25 
joints d". 
I have here shown these joints as: 
formed by riveting angle-irons d' to the sec 
tions of the upright walls D'D', and bolts d' 
inserted through the outwardly-extending ra. 
dial flanges of such angle-irons. Even if the 
stove be overturned and crushed the fire call. 
not escape from the stove proper, A, and in 
case the jacket or shield is crushed or flattened, 
and even if the stove proper be broken, the pins, 
braces, or distance-pieces d' will prevent the 
walls of the stove from making contact with 
the inner wall, D", of the jacket or slield and 
will prevent contact of the walls D* D'of the 
jacket or shield with each other. 
At the top of the stove I have represented 
tubular distance pieces or braces D', which 
may be rectangular in their horizontal plan 
view, as shown in Fig. 3, and flanged at top 
and botton. The tubular distance-pieces or 
braces ID' surround and have formed. Within 
them smoke-outlets C, which are continuous 
and coincident in both the stove A and the 
double top plates, D'D', and in each case these 
openings C are protected by gratingSc, and at 
the top is a nipple or projection, C, with 
which the smoke-pipe may be connected. Even 
if this nipple or projection Clbecomes knocked 
off and the smoke-pipe detached and the stove 
overturned, the fire cannot escape because of 
the strong bar-gratings c, which protect the 
sunoke-outlet in the several plates forming the 
top of the stove and top of the jacket or shield. 
Above the gratings c, I have shown scrapers 
or cleaners c, with which are connected handles 
c, extending to the exterior of the jacket or 
shield, and by these scrapers or cleaners the 
gratings c can be kept free from dust and dirt. 
The scrapers or cleanel's c' are by their handles 
c reciprocated across the gratings c in a di 
rection transverse to the length of the bars 
and spaces in such gratings. 
As before described, the bottom plates, D 
D', are securely riveted together and the up 
right walls D'D' are connected therewith by 
separable joints d. 
The tubular distance pieces or flanged braces 
D' may have their lower flanges permanently 
secured by riveted joints d' respectively to 
the stove top plate, A', and the lower top plate, 
D, of the jacket or shield, and their upper 
flanges may be secured by separable joints d", 
formed by bolts or screws to the top plates, 
D' ID5. 
I have here represented the stove or heater 
as designed for heating water to produce a cir 
culation of hot water through the radiating 
pipes in the car or other locality, and in the 
stove is a coil, E, for Water-circulation, and 
which, by the inlet-pipe e and the outlet-pipe 
e', may be connected with the radiator system. 
In cases where it is simply desired to heat 
air the water-coil E or heater may be removed, 
and through holes fin the bottom plates, D 
D', and in the top plates, D'D', a circulation 
of air upward through the air-spaces did may 
be maintained and the air heated by contact 
with the stove and inner jacket walls. The 
walls D'D' of the jacket may also be perfo 
rated at f. 
The stove A and the upright jacket-walls 
D D have coincident doors F, which are fit 
ted to the horizontal slideways f' upon the 
upright walls of the stove and jacket, and 
corresponding ash-pit doors H, which are fit 
ted to horizontal slideways h. These doors 
will be arc-shaped, as shown in Fig. 2, so as 
to form a circular section of the stove and 
jacket, and in Figs. 4 and 5 I have represented 
a very secure fasteuing which may be em 
ployed for each of the doors. The door repre 
sented in Figs. 4 and 5 is supposed to be one 
of the fire-doors F, fitted to the slideway f' 
upon the stove-body A, or in a like manner 
fitted upon either of the walls D'D' of the 
jacket or shield. It will be understood that 
the same construction also applies to the ash 
pit doors H. I have represented by the ar 
rows S in Figs. 4 and 5 the direction in which 
the door F must move to open, and I have 
represented as pivoted to the door at is a 
curved hook or latch, I, which is of peculiar 
construction and has a shoulder or beak, i, en 
gaging a projection, i, upon the stove-casing A. 
The latch or hook I may swing in a loop or 
keeper, J', secured to the door F. The latch 
or hook I is bowed or curved inward and 
downward relatively to the sliding door F 
from its pivot ito its shoulder i i", which en 
gages the projection i. This latch or hook I 
is so formed that gravity will, in all positions 
of the stove which would cause the door to 
slide open by gravity, hold the latch or hook 
in Secure engagement with its locking projec 
tion i, and in all those positions of the stove 
wherein the hook or latch I will fall away 
from the projection i gravity will cause the 
door F to keep closed against the stop i. For 
example, when the stove is overturned or 
thrown upside down, with its vertical axis at 
an inclination, in which position the door is 
represented in Fig. 5, the gravity of the latch 
or hook which is exerted on the line of the 
arrow s still holds the said latch or hook in 
engagement with its locking projection i. I 
have shown applied to the door F a damper, 
f", which has a sliding movement in guides 
or ways f', and which is provided with slots 
f, which may by its movement be brought 
into and out of coincidence with correspond 
ing slots f' in the door. The ash-pit doors H 
will usually be provided with such dampers, 
and the fire-doors F may, if desired, also be 
provided with similar dampers, as shown in 
Figs. 4 and 5. 
In order to prevent the latch or hook I from 
being kicked upward or accidentally disen 
gaged from its projection i', I have represented 
a guard, I', as Secured to the door F below the 
hook or latch I, and shielding or protecting 
the lower edge of the latter, so that contact 
cannot be made with it. 
The grating or guard c, composed of metal 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
IO 
IIS 
I 25 
 
372,828 
- 
3. 
5 
(C 
25 
bars or rods arranged parallel and having nar 
row spaces between them, is preferable to a 
guard or shield of wire-gauze or perforated 
sheet metal, because not so likely to clog with 
wet soot and dirt, and this is particularly true 
when there is used a scraper or cleaner c', which 
tends to jar the bars of the grating and pre 
vent the accumulation of Soot and dirt. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a stove, of a double 
jacket or shield, forming two air-spaces com 
pletely inclosing the stove at the bottom, sides, 
and top, and having pins or projections secured 
at one end in the double jacket or shield and 
extending across both air-spaces, to prevent 
contact of the stove with the inner jacket-wall 
and contact of the jacket-walls with each other, 
substantially as herein described. 
2. The combination, with a stove, of a jacket 
inclosing the stove and provided with pins, 
braces, or projections bearing against the stove, 
and composed of an upright cylindric wall 
made in separable sections secured together 
by vertical joints, and top and bottom plates 
to which the sections of the upright wall are 
secured, substantially as herein described. 
3. The combination, with a stove and a jacket 
or shield completely inclosing the stove, each 
having at the top a Smoke-outlet protected by 
a grating composed of parallel bars and inter 
vening spaces, of a cleaner or scraper for each 
outlet, and having a handle accessible from 
outside the jacket or shield for reciprocating 
the scraper or cleaner in a direction transverse 
to the length of the bars and spaces, substan 
tially as herein described. 
4. The combination, with the stove, of a 
double jacket or shield inclosing the stove and 
composed of the bottom plates, D D, the up 
right walls D D, both being maintained out 
of contact with each other and with the stove, 
and the upright Walls having fire and ash-pit 
doors coinciding with those of the stove and 
the top plates, D D, with the interposed 
flanged distance-pieces or tubular braces D, . 
through which is the smoke-outlet, substan 
tially as herein described. 
O 
45 
5. The combination of the inner stove and 
a double jacket or shield entirely inclosing 
it and consisting of the two bottom plates, 
D D, riveted together and having interposed 
between them and between the upper plate, D, 
and the stove bottom braces or projections, the 
upright walls D'D', each composed of sepa 
rable sections united by vertical joints and de 
tachably secured to the bottom plates, D D, 
and the top plates, D'D', detachably secured 
to the upright walls, and the tubular flanged 
distance-pieces or braces D', each perma 
nently riveted at its lower flange to a plate 
and having its upper flange detachably boited 
to the plate above, Substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
6. The combination, with a stove and a 
double jacket or shield completely inclosing 
the stove and having at the top a smoke-outlet 
through the stove and double top of the jacket 
or shield, the smoke-outlet in each of the top 
plates of the stove and double jacket being 
protected by a grating, of tubular braces in 
terposed between the jacket-walls and between 
the stove and the inner jacket-wall, and serv 
ing to hold said walls or top plates at proper 
distances apart and surrounding the grated 
smoke - outlets, substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
7. The combination, with the stove and the 
horizontally-sliding door, of the curved latch 
or hook I, lying against the face of the door 
and pivoted at one end to the door, and the 
projection upon the outside of the casing, 
with which the latch engages, substantially as 
herein described. 
8. The combination, with a stove and a hori 
zontally-sliding door, of the curved latch or 
hook I, pivoted at one end to the door and 
hooked at the other end, a projection, i, on 
the casing, with which the latch engages, and 
a guard, I, secured to the door beneath the 
latch or hook and shielding the lower edge of 
the latch, substantially as herein described. 
GEO. WAN WAGENEN. 
- 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
C. E. SUNDGREN. 
- 
7 O 
75 
90 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US372928.txt	(No Model.) 
R. A. POTTER, 
PRICE INDICATOR AND PRESSURE REGULATOR FOR GAs METERs. 
No. 372,928, 
 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
7624-z/A22ez 
Zavezzar 
'%.4.4.4%uez 
172ty 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT A. POTTER, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
HALF TO EMERSON W. PERRY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PRICE-NDICATOR AND PRESSURE-REGULATOR FOR GAS-METERS, 
SPECIFICATION ioming part of Letters Patent No. 372,928, dated November 8, 1887. 
Application filed February 26, 1887. Serial No. 229,034. (No model.) 
To all, u?ion, it Inva? CO7 ce/'72: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT A. POTTER, a 
citizen of the United States of America, and a 
resident of Jersey City, in the county of Hud 
son and State of New Jersey, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Consumers' 
Meters, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
One essential feature of this invention re 
lates to the combination, with the consumer's 
meter, of an automatic gas-account-indicating 
hand and a permanently - fixed graduated 
scale adjustable to indicate such account in 
money-notations for the varying prices of gas. 
A secondary essential feature relates to the 
combination, with the meter, of a novel-con 
structed automatic pressure-regulating appa 
ratus to pass the gas through the meter With 
a normally-regulated and suitably-reduced 
pressure for the economy and proper distribu 
tion of the gas from the meter to the gas 
burners. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a central longitudinal vertical Section 
of a meter with my improvements. Fig. 2 is 
a front elevation of the same, the front cover 
shown removed. Fig. 3 is a lateral vertical 
section of the same, the section being taken 
through its regulation-chamber. 
A represents the meter - case, in which is 
made the usual liquid-chamber, B, containing 
the usual meter-wheel, C, for measuring the gas 
and to operate the registering - wheels, and 
usual volume-indicating hands, DD D. The 
measured gas passes from the top of Said 
chamber through the gas-outlet E from the 
meter for distribution to the burners. On the 
rear end of the meter are arranged the several 
flat chambers F, G, H, and I, of which the 
chamber F is furnished with the gas-inlet J of 
the meter, and said chamber communicates 
with the liquid-chamber B by means of the 
opening K, to permit the filling of the liquid 
chamber from the chamber E, which is also 
furnished with a proof or overflow plug, IL, to 
obtain the proper level of the liquid. Partly 
within the chamber F is arranged the cham 
ber G, having a side passage, M, into the 
chamber F, a little above the level of the 
liquid in the latter chamber, permitting the 
gas to flow from said chamber F into the 
chamber G. Partly above the chamber G and 
above the chamber is arranged the chamber 
H, in which is employed an inverted float, N, 
and two vertical gas-pipes, O and P, of which 
the pipe O is attached to the top side of the 
chamber G, and the pipe P to the top side of 
the chamber I. Said chamber His furnished 
With Water or other liquid, and has the over 
flow plug Q, to regulate the level of said liquid. 
On the side of the top of the pipe O is made 
a flat inclined valve-seat, O', and a flat regu 
lating-valve, R, is hinged and attached either 
to the pipe O or to the top of the chamber G, 
as shown. Said float N is hinged or pivoted 
to the top side of the chamber I, as shown, 
and the loose end or side of the float opposite 
the valve R has a pivoted link, S, attached to 
the loose end of said valve, so that by the mo 
tion caused from more or less gas-pressure 
above the liquid within the float said valve is 
caused to close or move open and allow lessor 
more gas to flow under said float, and thereby 
automatically regulate the pressure of the gas. 
The regulated gas from under said float passes 
through the pipe Pinto the chamber I, from 
which it passes through the bend-pipe T into 
the usual gas-chamber on the rear part of the 
meter-wheel C. By means of the plugs U any 
condensation in the chambers I and G may be 
drawn off. 
The chamber His furnished with the plug 
V, for drawing the liquid from it. 
In Order to adjust the buoyancy of the float 
N to the desired pressure of the gas to be de 
livered from the meter,said float N is furnished 
with the adjustable sliding weight W, which 
is attached upon the curved guide-bar W', 
fixed over the top of the float, so that said 
Weight may be set nearer or farther from the 
fulcrum of the float and secured by a suitable 
Set Screw on said guide-bar and said buoyancy 
thereby obtained. 
On the front side of the meter are arranged 
the usual dials and hands for registering the 
amount in cubic feet of gas passing through 
the meter. On the same side is arranged a 
permanently-fixed and semicircular dial or 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
2 
372,928 
35 
1. The combination, with a consumer's me 
ter and its registering train of wheels, of the 
hand Y, mounted on a proper shaft rotated by 
suitable connections from the registering train, 
and the arc-shaped scale X, having the price 
indicating divisions thereon, and a movable 
indicating-finger on hand Y, all Substantially 
as specified. 
2. The combination, with a gas-consumer's 
meter, of the regulating devices for the gas 
applied thereto, comprising the series of cham 
bers F, G, and I, the chamber H, above cham 
bers I and G, connecting with both through 
tubes P and O, respectively, the hinged float 
N and its water-seal in chamber II, Surround 
ing tubes P and O, the adjustable weight W 
and its supporting - rod W" on float N, the 
hinged valve R at the mouth of tube O, and 
the link S, pivotally connecting said valve 
with the end of float, N, so that the movement 
of the latter causes valve R to regulate the 
passage of gas through tube O. all constructed 
and arranged to operate substantially as speci 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 27th day of Janu 
ary, 1SS7. 
fied. 
- 
ROBERT A POTTER. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. H. CLARKSON, 
A. R. FRYER. 
Io 
scale, X, and a central hand, Y, with an adjust 
able finger, Z. Said scale X consists of a num 
ber of semicircular spaces, a b c d, each to in 
dicate the account in money for gas consumed 
5 at such a price of gas per thousand feet, and 
the space a represents the scale of account at 
the price of gas at one dollar per thousand 
feet, and the space b the account at the price 
of gas at One dollar and twenty-five cents, or 
the next higher price of gas, per thousand feet, 
and to follow with the remaining spaces in like 
order; and said circular spaces are divided 
with equally - distributed radial lines, each 
in radial spaces 1 2 3 4 5, commencing with 
the amount marked therein for the first thou 
sand feet, and to each following the amount 
added of one thousand feet more than the 
space has marked before it, as clearly shown. 
The central hand, Y, is connected with the 
2O clock-Work of the meter with properly-speeded 
gear to advance from one radial space to the 
following, and in like order for each thousand 
feet with its dials and hands D. The finger 
Z, is adjusted and secured by its set-screw op 
posite the proper circular space correspond 
ing to the price of gas per thousand feet to which 
the meter is applied, so that as the meter ad 
vances, and indicates the amount in feet con 
sumed, the finger Z indicates the amount in 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
3O money due for consumed gas. 
to Secure by Letters Patent, is 
. 25. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373028.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 373,028, 
F. D. RANDOLPH. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1887, 
BICYCLE, 
 
  
 
:(((() 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK D. RANDOLPH, OF PLAINFIELD, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
HALF TO ROBERT GORTON, OF SAME PLACE. 
BICYCLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 373,028, dated November 8, 1887. 
Application filed August 17, 1887, Serial No. 247,192. (No model.) 
- 
. 
- 
25 
I5 
To all willion it inval/ concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANK D. RANDOLPH, 
of Plainfield, in the State of New Jersey, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
5 ment in Bicycles, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The invention relates to the head-bearing, 
upon which the leading-wheel and backbone 
Swing relatively to each other. It is im 
Io portant that this bearing should be so con 
structed as to be readily adjustable to com 
pensate for wear, and yet be so secured when 
adjusted that it cannot work loose. 
The objection to all the styles of bearings 
now in use of which I am aware is that no 
matter how tightly they may be screwed up 
in use they become loose from the constant 
jarring of the machine and require constant 
attention and frequent adjustment. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and practical arrangement for obviating 
this difficulty, which may readily be applied 
to the styles of machine now in use with bu 
slight alteration and small expense. 
The construction and operation will be fully 
understood from the following description and 
drawings. 
Figure 1 is a top view of so much of a bi 
cycle-head as is necessary to illustrate the in 
3O vention; Fig. 2, a vertical section there 
through on the line 22 of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a 
tranverse section on the line 33 of Fig. 2; 
Fig. 4, a sectional view of the locking 
sleeve detached, also taken on the line 22 of 
35 Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a bottom view of the lock 
ing-sleeve. Fig. 6 is a view of the upper ver 
tically-adjustable bearing plug or bolt; and 
Fig. 7 shows a modified construction, the view 
being taken on the same line as in Fig. 3. 
A represents an ordinary socket-head, in 
which the vertical bearing-pin B, with which 
the backbone is rigidly connected, works. The 
upper adjustable bearing consists of a screw 
threaded plug, C, working in the threaded 
socket A, and recessed to form a conical bear 
ing for the pin B. This arrangement, omitting 
the illustrated construction of the plug C, is 
Common, and the parts are usually Secured by 
a lock-nut on the upper end of the plug. In 
So my improved construction, however, the mouth 
45 
t 
of the socket A, above its screw-threaded 
portion, is enlarged, as at a, and is preferably 
conical in vertical section, and oval or of other 
irregular or non-circular shape in cross-sec 
tion, though the base of the sleeve and bottom 55 
of opening may be round and shade off into 
an oval. The portion c of the plug C at this 
point, instead of being screw-threaded, is pro 
vided with a circular hub or enlargement hav 
ing vertically-cut teeth or ribs or corrugations (c 
c. The upper end, c, of the plug is reduced 
in size and screw-threaded for the reception 
of the ordinary lock-nut c'. To securely lock 
the bearing the locking-sleeve D is employed. 
". . 
Its interior bore, d, is shaped to correspond 65 
with the portion c of the plug and its exterior 
contour to fit the opening or socket a. Pref. 
erably it is slit on one side at d, to allow play 
and give it elasticity. When the bearing is 
properly set or adjusted, the locking-sleeve D to 
is dropped into place over the plug C, its in 
terior teeth, ribs, or corrugations interlocking 
with those c' on the hub and the lock-nut 
screwed up. Obviously it will be impossible 
for the bearing to work loose, since the shape 75 
of the socket a and sleeve Dare such that the 
sleeve cannot turn therein. 
The construction illustrated is that which I 
prefer; but of course any mechanic can vary 
it without departing from the invention. If 8c 
the socket-opening a were of the same diame 
ter as its screw-threaded portion and the size 
of the portion c of the plug reduced to afford 
room for a locking-sleeve, of course the princi 
ple would be the same. So, also,it is not ma- 85 
terial that the socket and sleeve should be 
conical invertical section or of any particu 
lar cross-section. The invention may, there 
fore, be stated to consist in part of the com 
bination of the socket-head and bearing-pin, 
the adjustable bearing-plugs, a locking-sleeve 
for locking the plug, and devices for locking 
the sleeve or preventing its rotation. It will 
be understood, therefore, that in this aspect of 
the case the shape of the socket and sleeve 
are really immaterial provided some means be 
supplied whereby the sleeve may be locked. 
In Fig. 7 is indicated a socket, a, circular in 
cross-section and having recesses ac, into which 
lugsy on the sleeve enter. 
95 
ICO 
 
2 
373,028 
IO 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the socket-head, the 
bearing-pin, and adjustable bearing-plug, a 
locking-sleeve enveloping the plug and pre 
5 venting its rotation, and means for locking the 
sleeve against rotation, for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. The combination of the socket-head, the 
bearing -pin, an adjustable bearing - plug, a 
locking-sleeve enveloping the plug aud pre 
venting its rotation, means for locking the 
sleeve against rotation, and the lock-nut on 
the end of the bearing-plug. 
3. The combination of the Socket-head hav 
I5 ing the Screwrthreaded portion and an opening 
above it of irregular cross-section, the bear 
ing-pin, the bearing-plug vertically adjustable 
in the screw-threaded portion of the socket 
and having a ribbed or toothed portion, C, and 
2O a locking-sleeve having an interior bore shaped 
to interlock with the portion c, and an exterior 
contour to fit said opening in the socket-head, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the socket-head A, 
the bearing-pin B, the plug C, having the por- 25 
tion c, the sleeve D, constructed substantially 
as described and adapted to be seated in the 
opening of the socket-head, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
5. The combination of the socket-head A, 
the bearing-pin B, the plug C, having the por: 
tion c, and the slit sleeve D, conically shaped 
in vertical section and oval in cross-section 
and adapted to be seated in the opening of 
the socket-head, for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto Sub 
scribed my name. 
35 
FRANK D. RANDOLPH. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT GORTON, 
JOHN H. WAN WINKLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373129.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 373,129. 
J. E. CARROLL, 
ROOF WALLEY. 
Patented Nov. 15, 1887. 
C 
2s. 
S A2 at 
g 
bla 
%2 
Az 47.Z. 
Zi 
( 2. 
A. S 
ZO 
k. 
e2 
WITNESSES: 
M?. 
p 
INVENTOR 
eZo/777. 62zzoze, 
7eez 
eZZoy'zz7. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN E. CARROLL OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RO OF WALLEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 373,129, dated November 15, 1887. 
Application filed July 26, 1887. 
Serial No. 245,311. (No model.) 
IO 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN E. CARROLL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city and county of Philadelphia, and State of 
Pennsylvania. have invented certain new and 
useful Improvementsin Roof-Walleys, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription, reference being had to the accom - 
panying drawings, of which - 
Figure l is a transverse section as applied 
to a valley between two roofs, the protecting 
shingle being on one side removed. Fig. 2 is 
a longitudinal section, in perspective, of the 
two overlapping plates detached from the roof. 
This invention is an improvement in metal 
lic roof-valley plates for covering the V-shaped 
gutter formed between the contiguous inclined 
sides of two adjacent roofs; and its object is to 
provide such a plate whereby the water within 
the same will be carried away and prevented 
from flowing or coming into contact with the 
wooden part of the roof under circumstances 
hereinafter mentioned. 
One feature of the invention consists in pro 
5 viding the said plates with longitudinal ledges 
or bends, so as to leave a channel on the sides 
of the inclines of the plate, above the bottom 
or apex thereof, said channel being covered or 
adapted to be covered by the usual metallic or 
wooden shingles, thereby leaving a protected 
passage-way for the overflow-water from rain 
or melted snow and ice, which may back up 
into the channel when the central main chan 
nel or gutter is filled up with ice, snow, or 
other obstruction. 
Another feature of the invention consists in 
providing the overlapped ends of the succes 
sive plates with transverse corrugations, there 
by leaving a comparatively great space be 
tween the overlapping ends of the lower and 
upper superposed plates, in order to avoid the 
capillary attraction which, when the plates 
are smooth andeven, and therefore close-lying, 
sometimes causes the water to find its way up 
between the plates to the boards to which they 
are nailed, and thus rendering the wood liable 
to decay. 
Referring to the drawings, AA, Fig. 1, are 
two roofs whose contiguity forms a V-shaped 
valley, W, along which are secured the con 
tinuous lines of metallic plates B, conforming 
to the shape of that part of the roof, and se 
cured to the roof boards by means of the usual 
nails, n. These plates are usually plane, and 
the wooden (slate or metal) shingles c extend 
over the sides or edges, and when ice forms 
within the gutter it frequently occurs that 
water forces its way beneath the overlapping 
shingles to the Wood beneath, thereby injur 
ing the latter and causing it to rot. In order 
to obviate this defect, I form the valley-plates 
as shown-that is to say, I provide along the 
sides of the plates two parallel longitudinal 
bends or ribs, D d, as shown, which form, 
when the shingles E are put on, continuous 
channels F on each side of the apex of the val 
ley. Now, if the latter fills up with ice, the 
water will find its way beneath the shingles E 
into the channels F, (which are protected from 
the snow and ice by the shingles,) and thence 
run off to the roof or to the conducting-spout. 
The upper ridge, d, forms a breastwork against 
the rush or passage of the water to the upper 
edges of the plates-that is to say, when it 
would come into contact with the boarding. 
When metal shingles are employed, instead 
of allowing the lower ends thereof to project 
over the ribs D, I now prefer to turn the same 
down against the side of the lower ridge, D, 
as shown in the drawings. The plates are 
made in sections and the adjacent ends of the 
several sections fit one upon the other, as seen 
in Fig. 2. 
I am aware of the fact that roof-valley plates 
having a single ledge on each side somewhat 
similar to ledges D have been known. 
In order to prevent water being absorbed 
by capillary action between the seams or joints 
of these overlapping plates, and thus drawing 
the water up to the wood-work beneath, I pro 
vide the upper end of each section with trans 
verse corrugations, G, and extend the upper 
or plane end over the same, preferably bend 
ing down its front edge, as shown in Fig. 2. 
Thus air-spaces are left between the plates, 
which, so to say, serve to break up the capil 
lary attraction. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and wish to secure by Letters Patent 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a roof. 
valley plate provided with two longitudinal 
continuous ribs or ridges, as D d, forming an 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
373,129 
intermediate channel, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the roof, the series of 
valley-plates provided with the two longitudi 
5 nal continuous ridges and intermediate chan 
mels, and the shingles covering said channels, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. A roof-valley consisting of a series of su 
perposed plates, of which the ends of the un 
Io der plates are transversely corrugated and the 
overlapping part of the upper plates a plane 
surface, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto affixed 
my signature this 25th day of July, A. D. 1887. I5 
JOHN E. CARROLL. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. NoLAN, 
ANDREW ZANE, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373229.txt	(No Model.) 
C, A, FREDERICKS, 
REFRIGERATOR BUILDING, 
No. 373,229, 
Patented Nov. 15, 1887. 
Fig. l. 
------ 
NN 
 
3 
No.   
WITNESSES: 
Attorney. 
NestERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTIAN A. FREDERICKS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
REFRIGERATOR-BUILDING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 373,229, dated November 15, 1887. 
Application filed July 29, 1887. Serial No. 245,609. (No model.) 
To all whom it ?ay concer?: 
Be it known that I, CHRISTIAN A. FRED. 
ERICKS, a citizen of the United States, and a 
resident of Brooklyn, Kings county, New York, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Improve. 
ments in Refrigerator-Buildings, of which the 
following is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to means for cooling 
rooms or chambers for cold-storage, such as 
Io rooms for storing carcasses of beef, mutton, &c. 
In carrying out my invention I construct a 
tight narrow cold-air reservoir or chamber, 
either within the storage-room or above it, as 
herein shown, and in this reservoir I place a 
15 deep tight vessel for containing the refriger 
ant, which in this case comprises a mixture of 
ice and salt. This vessel is in the nature of a 
tube or pipe of sheet metal, which stands on 
end, and at its upper end projects through the 
20 ceiling into the charging-room above the room 
where the cold-air reservoir is constructed. 
The refrigerant-vessel is covered at its charg 
ing end with a removable cap. An air-con 
duit conducts cold dry air from the bottom of 
25 the reservoir to the storage-room, which it 
enters at or near the ceiling thereof, and a 
ventilating-conduit, which takes air from the 
ceiling or upper part of the storage-room, ex 
tends up into the room above and discharges 
3o said air into the cold-air reservoir at or near 
its top. Thus I obtain a circulation of cold 
dry air downward through the cold-air reser 
voir, the air being admitted to and taken from 
the storage - room at the ceiling. Suitable 
35 dampers or valves are employed for control 
ling the flow of air through the conduits. As 
the film of air in the lower part of the cold-air 
reservoir surrounding the refrigerant-vessel 
becomes extremely cold, and as the air taken 
4o from the storage-room and admitted to the 
upper part of said reservoir is often humid 
and sometimes charged quite heavily with 
moisture from the carcasses in thestorage-room, 
I find that this moisture will collect on the 
5 walls of the refrigerant-vessel in the form of 
frost, and will accumulate thereon at times to 
such an extent as to substantially fill the nar 
row space between the wall of said vessel and 
the adjacent wall of the cold-air reservoir. In 
5o any case the coating of frost forms a sort of 
heat intercepting jacket on the refrigerant 
vessel and impairs the efficiency of the latter 
 
as a heat-absorber. To obviate this difficulty 
and to provide an efficient and simple means 
of preventing the accumulation of frost on the 55 
refrigerant-vessel, as well as to remove the 
moisture from the air passing through the cold 
air reservoir, is one of the most important Ob 
jects of my invention. I effect this result by 
providing the refrigerant-vessel with a narrow 6o 
annular drip aperture or apertures near its 
upper end, through which the brine from the 
charging end or receiver of said vessel will 
ooze or drip and flow on and over the exterior 
surface of the refrigerant-vessel, so as to keep 65 
said surface constantly wet with brine. This 
brine will prevent the formation of frost on 
the surface it covers, and it will also absorb 
the moisture from the air and carry it off into 
the drip pan or trough below. The brine of 7o 
course is furnished by the mixture of ice and 
salt placed in the hopper-like upper end or 
receiver of the refrigerant-vessel. 
In order that my invention may be more 
fully understood, reference may be had to the 75 
accompanying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional elevation of 
a building provided with my refrigerating de 
vices. Fig. 2 is a detached and enlarged view, 
partly in section, of one of the refrigerant-ves- 8o 
sels; and Fig. 3 is a transverse section of said 
refrigerant-vessel on line 33 in Fig. 2. 
Figs. 
4 and 5 illustrate slightly-modified construc 
tions that will be hereinafter described. 
rangement, A represents the storage-room or 
room to be kept cool; A', a room above the 
storage-room, containing the cold-air reservoir 
and refrigerant-vessels, and A* the charging 
room above room A. The rooms A A should go 
have walls and ceilings constructed to prevent 
the passage of heat to the rooms from the out 
side. 
a is the door leading to the storage-room, 
and a? a are suitable windows to admit light 95 
thereto. 
B B are the cold-air reservoirs, in this case 
shown as arranged at the sides of the room A', 
and formed by partitioning off a narrow space 
therefrom with heat-intercepting partitions bb. Ioo 
CC are the upright refrigerant-vessels ar 
ranged in the reservoirs B. B. These vessels 
may stand side by side in the reservoir and be 
set at any desired distance apart. Their num 
In Fig. 1, which shows the preferred ar- 85 
- 
2 
373,229 
ber will depend on the size of the storage-room 
and the reduction of temperature desired. I 
usually construct the vessel Copen at the bot 
tom, and set it on a block or beam, c, which 
will leave space enough for the water to drip 
out below into a drip pan or trough, d, whence 
it will be led away in the usual manner. AS 
sawdust from the ice and other dbris will in 
time accumulate at the bottom of vessel C, 
I usually provide said vessel with an opening 
in its side near the bottom. In the drawings 
a wicket or slide, e, arranged to play in Ver 
tical guides, is shown. This wicket closes 
such an opening; and in partition b may be 
placed a tightly-closing door opposite wicket 
e, to provide access to the latter. Any means 
of cleaning may be used, however. This fea 
ture forms no essential part of my present in 
vention. The vessel C has tight non-aper 
tured walls when in use-that is, the wickete 
will be closed, normally-and the air which 
flows down around vessel C does not come in 
contact with the ice (G. in Fig. 2) at any point. 
At its upper end, which projects up through 
the ceiling of room A', the vessel C is pro 
vided with a somewhat-enlarged hopper-like 
receiver, c*, provided with a cap or cover, c'. 
D is a conduit leading from the lower part 
of reservoir B to room A, which it enters at 
the ceiling. There may be any desired num 
ber of these conduits, and they admit cold dry 
air to the storage-room. Each conduit has a 
valve or damper, g, to cut off and regulate the 
flow of air through the same. 
E is a conduit leading from the ceiling of 
the storage-room up into the room above and 
entering the cold-air reservoir at or near its 
top. This conduit should enter the storage 
room at a point as far as convenient from the 
point where conduit D enters said room. Con 
duit E draws off the warmer moist air from 
room A and delivers it into the top of the 
cold-air reservoir. It is or may be provided 
With a regulating valve or damper, g^, simi 
lar tO that of the conduit ID. There may be 
any desired number of these conduits E. 
Referring most particularly to Figs. 2 and 
3, I will now describe the construction of the 
vessel C and the device or means whereby the 
formation of frost thereon is prevented. Or 
dinarily,in constructing this vessel Imake the 
receiver c separate from the body of vessel C 
and Construct its lower end to slip over and 
fit loosely about the end of said vessel, so as 
to leave between them, where they overlap, a 
very narrow annular outlet or passage,h, Figs. 
2 and 3, down which the brine may drip or 
ooze from the receiver. This downwardly 
directed passage or outlet should be so narrow 
or contracted as to prevent too copious an out 
flow of the brine, but of sufficient width to al 
low a continuous drip. A simple loosely-fitted 
telescope-joint will serve. The brine will al 
Ways keep the passage filled and prevent the 
entry of air thereat, and it will flow down and 
over the vessel by gravity. This drip-passage 
h should be at the upper part of the vessel C, 
so as to keep all the surface of said vessel 
moistened with brine, and I find it convenient 
to form said passage at the junction of the re 
ceiver ex with the body of the vessel. How 
ever, the joint forming the said passage might 
be in the body of the vessel itself at a point a 
little below the receiver. There might also 
be more than one joint of this kind, with a 
drip-passage h at each. This would be ad 
visable where vessel C is very long. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown the upper portion 
of a vessel C as having a joint in its body just 
below receiver c and a drip-passage h thereat. 
In Fig. 5, which is a cross - section at the 
joint, I have shown the outer and upper tubu 
lar member of the joint slightly crimped, so 
as to divide up the annular passage h into 
several passages arranged around the body of 
the vessel C. 
Fig. 5 is on a larger scale than the other 
figures. 
Any similarly-constructed downwardly-di 
rected narrow interstitial passage (or passages) 
will serve, so long as the object sought is ef 
fected, which is to keep the exterior surface 
of the body of vessel C moistened with brine 
from the interior of the vessel above. 
In Fig. 5 the passages h. h. are made some. 
what wide, and are shown as loosely filled with 
some fibrous or textile material, l', which takes 
up the brine like a wick and delivers it to the 
surface of the vessel below. 
It should be understood that while my re 
frigerant-vessel C is open at the bottom, and 
has a wicket-closed aperture, e, for cleaning 
out near the bottom, and has the narrow out 
let-passages h for the brine near the top, it is 
a tight vessel in the sense that the air flowing 
down and around it does not come in contact 
with the ice in said vessel, and is therefore 
kept dry. If the walls of vessel C were made 
of wire-gauze, for example, or of perforated 
metal, my object would be defeated. Having 
a vessel with tight non-apertured walls, I em 
ploy in connection therewith my device for 
preventing frost from forming on said walls. 
If frost should form during the period just pre 
ceding the renewal of the ice and salt, as it 
may to some extent, the brine flowing down 
after the renewal will remove the same com- . 
pletely. 
In my pending application, Serial No. 
235,185, I have shown a refrigerating apparatus 
with a tight cold-air reservoir and a tight re 
frigerating-vessel similar to vessel Carranged 
therein. I have also shownin said application 
conduits for air leading from the storage-room 
at its ceiling to said cold-air reservoir. I wish 
to say that I do not herein claim these features, 
broadly, but only their special arrangement, 
as represented in Fig. 1, and the device for 
preventing the accumulation of frost on the 
refrigerant - vessel. This last-named device 
may, however, be employed on refrigerant-ves 
Sels arranged in various ways, and it is not 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7? 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IIO 
I I5 
I25 
d 
373,229 
3 
limited to the peculiar arrangement of the re 
frigeranti-vessel and cold-air chamber as seen in 
Fig. 1. For example, it is immaterial, so far 
as this frost-preventing device is concerned, 
how the reservoir B is placed with respect to 
the storage-room A, or how the conduits DE 
are arranged with respect to said reservoir. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a refrigerating apparatus, the combi 
nation, with a storage-room, of a deep tight 
contracted cold-air reservoir arranged above 
the ceiling of said room, a deep vessel for the 
refrigerant with tight or non-apertured walls 
arranged in said reservoir, a conduit for cold 
dry air extending from near the bottom of said 
cold-air reservoir to the storage-room and 
opening into same at the ceiling, an air-con 
duit extending from the storage-room at its 
ceiling to the upper part of said reservoir, and 
means, substantially as described, for control. 
ling the flow of air through said conduits, as 
set forth. 
2. A refrigerant-vessel for containing ice 
and salt, provided with a narrow downwardly 
IO 
25 
Witnesses: 
EENRY CONNETT, 
J. L. CAPLINGER. 
? 
3. An upright refrigerant-vessel, C, of elon-3o 
directed passage, h, at its upper part for the 
brine to ooze or drip through over the exte 
rior surface of said vessel, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
gated tubular form, made from sheet metal in 
two parts or sections, the lower section extend 
ing upward into the upper section telescopic 
ally, whereby a narrow downwardly-directed 
annular passage is formed between the two for 35 
the brine to ooze or drip through and from, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. The upright refrigerant-vessel C, pro 
vided with one or more downwardly directed 
narrow oulet-passages, h, close to its body, said 4o 
passage or passages being filled with fibrous 
material, h, to take up and deliver the brine, 
substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 45 
Witnesses. 
- 
CEIRISTIAN A. FREDERICKS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373329.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 373,329, 
C. E. BARBER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
SOFA BED, 
Patented Nov. 15, 1887. 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, oc. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. BARIBER, OF PILATTSBURG, NEW YORK. 
SOFA, B E. D. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 373,329, dated INovember 15, 1887. 
Application filed April 13, 1887. Serial No. 234,666. (No model.) 
To al vihon it nay concern: 
direct alignment with the outer face of the 
Beit known that I, CHARLES E. BARIBER, a 
permanent end section, and both extend par 
citizen of the United States, residing at Platts 
allel with the front face of the post A, but a 
burg, in the county of Clinton, in the State of 
slight distance back of it. Bythis construc 
tion the permanentend section and the folding 
New York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Sofa-Beds, of which the follow 
end section both appear, when the sofais ex 
ing is so full, clear, and exact description of a 
tended, as shown in Fig. 5, to extend from be 
preferred means of carrying out my invention 
neath the post A, and the joints or crevice be 
tween the rear folding end section and of the 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the Same. 
center post, A, are entirely concealed by the 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
post itself When the body is extended. The 
sofa-bed which when extendedshall have every 
front post, A, of the permanent end sectionis 
appearance of a bed without in any way dis 
also grooved at a to receive a corresponding 
closing the fact that it is a folding structure 
tongue on the front ends of the cross-pieces 
which maybe used as a sofa. 
which form the permanent end section. 
Another object of my invention is to con 
The mattress Cis made in the usual man 
structa sofa-bed which when partially folded 
ner, and is hinged at its central portion to 
to resemble a sofa shall beso perfect an imi 
facilitate the folding and extension of thesame 
tation ofa sofa that there will be nothing visi 
at Will. 
ble to indicate that it maybe unfolded and ex 
By reference to Fig. 2 it will be observed 
that the hinge Dis secured to the folding end 
tended to form a bed. 
Another object of my invention is to pro 
section on the outer end of the section insuch 
vide a folding bed and sofa combined, which 
a manner that the extending folding end sec. 
tion Will entirely conceal the leaf of the hinge 
shall beso constructed that there Will be no 
liability of soiling the bed-clothing in opening 
between the outer end of the folding section 
and closing the folding section. 
and the inner face of one side of the recesses 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
in the post A. Bythis construction the screws, 
an end view of my device folded to represent 
mails, or bolts which are used to fasten the 
a sofa. Fig. 2 is a top plan view of part of 
hinges to the folding end sections and to the 
the same. Fig. 3 is a section of Fig. 1, taken 
posts are entirely concealed andare protected 
on the line XX of the former, showing a por 
from coming in contact with the clothing or 
the mattress by the post and by the folding 
tion of one end of the sofa and one of the fold 
ing sections. 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of the 
section. 
The top of the post A is provided with a 
center post, showing the recesses in the post 
cap orhood, E, which is formed integral with 
into which the folding section fits when the 
the post, or which maybe of any ornamental 
latter is extended to convert the device into a 
design and secured to the top of the post in 
bed. Fig. 5 is a detail of a locking device for 
the legs or posts at the rear of the sofa. Fig. 
any desired manner. The object of this cap 
6 is a rear elevation of my improved sofa-bed. 
or hood is, first, to keep the bed-clothing from 
Fig. 7is. a perspective of the same. 
coming into contact with the hinge on the 
In each of the figures the centerpostis des 
folding section. Italso serves a second pur. 
ignated by the letter A. Oneside of this post 
pose of an ornamental cap for the post, which 
is provided with agroove, a, which receives a 
servesto conceal the hinge and the folding 
correspondingtongue on the end of the arm A, 
end section when the device is converted into 
and whichalsoreceivesa correspondingtongue 
a sofa, as shown in Fig. 1. 
on the lower sill, A. These two cross-pieces 
The front face of the post A is provided 
Al and A, together with the front post, A, 
with a shield, F, which extends over the front 
form the permanent end section of the sofa. 
post, and which extends up back of the hinges 
Opposite this permanent end sectionis a fold 
on the folding section and entirely conceals 
ing end section, B, whichishinged to the post 
them from view When the device is used as a 
A in such a manner that when it is extended 
sofa, as Will be clearly seen by reference to 
the outerface of the folding end sectionisin Fig. 1. This I deem of prime importance, as 
55 
65 
9o 
95 
IC 
15 
3) 
35 
45 
373,329 
onitstop and recessed, as shown and described, 
to forma shield on the Outer front face of the 
post, as and for the purposes specified. 
2. In al sofa-bed, the u pright center post 
provided with a shield on its outer frontface, 
and also provided with a cap on its top which 
conceals the hinges from view from the top, in 
combination with the permanent end section 
whichis secured at one side of the post and 
the folding end section which is secured to the 
opposite side of the post, substantially as de 
scribed, whereby When the folding end section 
is extended to convert the device into a bed 
the crevice between the inner end of the fold 
ing end section and the inner end of the per. 
manent end sectionis entirely concealed by 
the shield on the u pright center post, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a sofa-bed, the permanent end sections 
secured to the u pright center post having a 
cap at the upper portion, in combination with 
the folding end sections, whicla are recessed 
at their inner upper ends, hinged to the per 
manent end sections, and the hinge which is 
secured to the folding and stationary end sec 
tions, substantially as described. 
4. In a folding bed, the combination of the 
folding end section provided with a hook and 
a bracket, J, with the side rail provided with 
the plate I, having the recesses lI and II for 
receiving the hook when the folding end sec 
tionis folded and extended, respectively, al 
constructed and combined to operate substan 
tially as described, whereby the look on the 
folding end sections serves the double pur 
pose of keeping the end sections in place 
when folded or extended, and the braclet on 
the folding end section serves the double pur 
pose of supporting the cross piece lX on the 
back of the sofa and of supporting the hook 
on the folding end section, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above as my 
invention I have hereunto set my name, in 
the presence of two subscribing witnesses, this 
13th day of April, 1887. 
CIAS. E. BARBER. 
Vitnesses: 
EWELL A. DICK, 
MARVIN A. CUSTIS. 
5 5 
9O 
there is something quite disagreeable about 
noticing that a sofais designed to be used for 
a bed, and thereis a feeling of delicacy among 
persons Who use this class of sofa-bed which 
makes it disagrecable to have the fact known 
that the sofais a convertible article of furni 
ture, and the exposing of the hinges at the 
ends of the Sofa-bed now in use shows at once 
that the sofa isla folding bed; and my inven 
tion is designed to entirely conceal these 
hinges and the folding sections at the rear of 
the sofa. 
By reference to Fig. 5 it will be observed 
that the folding end sectionis provided with 
a hook, G, whichinooks into a recess, H, in a 
plate, I, on the back rail of the main portion 
of the folding sofa when the legis folded back 
to support the back of the sofa in the position 
shown in Fig. 1. 
When the device is extended, as shown in 
Fig.5, the free end hook, G, slides back toward 
the post A and its into a corresponding re 
cess, II, in the plate I. 
The bracket J on the folding end section 
which supports the hook also serves as a par. 
tial support for the cross piece K. on the por. 
tion of the Sofa which forms the back When 
itis elevated, as shown in Fig. 1. By this 
construction there is no danger of breaking 
the folding end section off from its hinges, 
and it is held both open and closed by the 
same hook, and maybe easily and quickly 
operated. The cross-piece Kon the back of 
the Sofia also Serves to make the back of the 
sofa a more complete imitation of a sofia than 
it would be if this cross-piece IX were omit 
ted. Each of the folding hinged end sections 
is recessed at t a to allow the swinging end 
section to be swung around and straightened 
out into alignment with the permanent end 
Section when the de vice is converted into a 
Sofa-bed. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I believe to be new, and therefore desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a sofa-bed, the stationary and the fold 
ing end sections, constructed and hinged to. 
gether, substantially as described, in combina 
tion with anupright center post having a cap 
IO 
35 
45 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373429.txt	(No Model.) 
W. W. BATCHELDER, Jr. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 373,429. 
OIL WAPOR HEATER, 
Patented Nov. 22, 1887. 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
co'szz- 
NVENTOR: 
BY /Cux. (6. 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
(No Model.) 
W. W. BATCHELDER, Jr. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 373,429, 
OIL WAPOR HEATER. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1887. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
A. Sli 
N. 
3. 21-\ 91st 
T 
Ee-SSai 
Eater 
Ees 
lives 
Ae 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSEs: 
2za ZrzazeA 
(2-4-576, 
A. 
Dry, 3-aa-e- 
INVENTOR: 
P' (cus (6. 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. BATCHELDER, JR., OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
O L-WAPO R HEATER. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 373,429, dated November 22, 1887. 
Application filed February 21, 1887. Serial No. 228,604. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM W. BATCH 
ELDER, Jr., of Boston, in the county of Suf. 
folk and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Oil-Vapor 
Heaters, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to that class of oil 
stoves or heaters in which a wick is employed 
to draw up the oil, which is first vaporized at 
the wick by a small initial flame and then 
passes in the form of an unconsumed vapor up 
to the burner proper, where its heat and light normally touching the same. 
are utilized. 
- 
5 
O 
55 
75 
bears such a close relation to the wick below 
as to permit the result just described. As, 
however, the wick is raised and lowered, the 
space between the wick-tube and the slit va 
ries, and to prevent too great access of air, 
which would permit too great a luminosity 
and an imperfect combustion here, which 
would throw off and deposit soot, I have pro 
vided a compensating-bar, E, whose length is 
equal to the width of the wick and which is 
wedge-shaped on its lower edge, and rests in 
the plane of the wick immediately above and 
The object in 
making the lower edge of this bar wedge 
shaped is to prevent it from spreading later 
ally or smothering the flame to too great an 
extent. As the wick is lowered and the 
space increased between the wick and the slit 
d above, this compensating-bar or follower 
drops down through said slit with the wick, 
reducing the size of the opening and par 
tially smothering the flame, so as to corre 
spondingly reduce the flame at this point in 
proportion to the lowering of the wick, keep 
ing the flame down to a blue line instead of 
allowing it to become luminous and smoky. 
This bar E has also the function by being 
raised above the wick, as shown in dotted lines 
Fig. 2, of allowing free access of air to the 
wick, and a free exposure of the top of the 
latter to allow the flame on the wick to burn 
freely and unobstructed and the production 
temporarily of the maximum amount of heat 
at this point which is needed when the wick 
is first lighted in order to bring up the tem 
perature of the vapor-chamber to a point where 
it does not condense the vapors and produce a 
bad smell. To effect this adjustment of the 
bar its ends pass into slots in vertical guides ee, 
and it has at one side laterally-projecting pins 
ff, which rest upon the upper surfaces of the 
inclined cams gg, attached to a sliding rod, F, 
which extends out through the side of the 
vapor-chamber. Now, as this rod F is slid in 
or out its inclines, sliding beneath the pins.ff, 
cause the compensating-bar to be positively 
raised and lowered independently of its con 
tact with the wick. I do not, however, con 
fine myself to this particular means of adjust 
ment, as other means for raising and lowering 
the bar may be used. I prefer this adjustment, 
95 
IOO 
The main objects of my invention are to pre 
vent the escape of bad odors when the burner 
is extinguished, to increase the heating capac. 
ity of the burner, and to regulate the vapori 
Zation of the oil; and it consists in the pecu 
liar construction and arrangement of parts, 
which I will now proceed to describe with 
reference to the drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical transverse section 
through the burner. Fig. 2 is a vertical lon 
gitudinal section, and Fig. 3 is an inverted 
plan view, of the vapor-chamber. 
A represents the oil-reservoir, from which 
rises the wick-tube B, provided with the usual 
toothed wheels, and a projecting shaft, a, with 
milled disk for raising and lowering an ordi 
nary wick, b. Mounted upon the four feet c 
on the reservoir is the vertical vapor-chamber 
C, which is arranged to tilt at one end, as 
shown in dotted lines, Fig. 2, on one pair of 
feet, to give access to the wick. This vapor 
chamber is a littie wider and a little longer 
than the wick, and its lower end is open and 
rests immediately above the wick-tube. In 
order to cause the ignited wick to vaporize 
the oil without consuming the vapor at this 
point, it is necessary that only enough flame 
should be allowed at the wick to produce the 
Volatilization of the oil, and to effect this the 
relation of the wick and its tube to the vapor 
chamber above is so close as to allow only a 
Small amount of air to combine with the vapor 
at the wick, so that the bulk of the vapor 
passes up the vapor-chamber unconsumed till 
it reaches the burner proper above. 
In the lower part of the vapor-chamber is a 
diaphragm, D, with a narrow slit, d, in it, which 
25 
35 
45 
2 
373,429 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
however, because, while I am enabled to raise 
the bar at will, it leaves it, when seated upon 
the Wick, free to act as a follower to the same 
when raised or lowered, and permits, also, of 
the adaptation of the bar or follower to any 
irregularities of the wick due to trimming-- 
such for instance, as the trimming of one side 
of the wick higher or lower than the other 
thus Securing always a proper position and 
relation of the bar or follower on the wick, 
even if its upper edge be not a true horizontal 
line. For facility in cleaning these parts, as 
well as the interior of the vapor-chamber, the 
diaphragm D with its compensating-bar and 
its attachments are made together removable 
from the bottom end of the vapor-chamber C, 
being held therein by means of pivotal buttons 
h, or by set-screws or other equivalent means. 
Upon the top of the vapor-chamber C is de 
tachably seated the burner-chamber G, which 
fits with a sliding joint onto the top of the 
vapor-chamber, as shown; but the said burner 
and vapor chamber may be made integral, if 
desired. The burner is flanked upon each side 
with downwardly-flaring skirts G'. G', having 
bottoms of perforated metal through which 
air is admitted to support combustion. 
Opening through the sides of the chamber 
G is a series of holes, i, through which the 
Vapors pass, and which vapors at this point 
Come in contact with the air admitted beneath 
the skirts G' and burn in a series of flames. 
From the level of these jets the burner-case 
is extended upwardly with divergent sides G? 
G", and upon the top of the chamber G, and in 
metallic contact with the walls of the latter, 
are one or more upwardly-projecting wings 
H.H. These wings or projections serve two 
very important functions, in that they act as 
heat-conductors to transfer the heat of the 
flame to the vapor - chamber below and by 
raising and maintaining the temperature of 
the Walls and interior of the vapor-chamber 
to so high a degree of heat that no vapor will 
or can remain to escape after the burner has 
been extinguished. With all burners of this 
class as ordinarily constructed vapor will re 
main on the inside surface of the walls and in 
the interior of the vapor-chamber, which va 
por will continue to escape for some time af. 
ter the burner has been extinguished, produc 
ing a very disgusting and nauseating odor. 
With the application of the heat-conducting 
wings or projections this extremely objection 
able feature is completely overcome and 
avoided. 
The wings H. H. not only act as conductors 
to transfer the heat of the adjacent flames to 
the vapor-chamber below, as above stated, but 
they also act as defectors to the currents to 
spread the flames and produce more perfect 
combustion, also affording additional heat-radi 
ating surfaces, thereby considerably increas 
ing the heating capacity of the burner. 
It will be perceived that the outside casing 
of the burner is somewhat longer than the 
Wings H and the chamber G. This is to give 
a. sufficient volume of air to the end jets, which 
would otherwise burn with a high flame and 
Smoke. 
In the outside casing are arranged one or 
more openings covered by a door or slide, I, 
through which access may be had to the jet 
holes in chamber G, to clean them from the 
incrustation which sometimes accumulates. 
These openings may correspond in number 
and size to the jet-holes, and be covered by a 
slide having similar openings, as shown, or 
there may be a single horizontal opening.in 
the casing provided with a hinged or sliding 
door for closing the same. 
In the use of oil-burners of this class it is 
found that a certain amount of oil will un 
avoidably collect upon the top of the reser 
voir and create a bad smell. To avoid this 
smell I have arranged a hood or cover, J, fit 
ting closely to the top of the reservoir at its 
edges and curving to a central outlet directly 
at the wick, so that the draft at the wick Will 
draw these vapors into the vapor-chamber and 
burn them, thus providing an economic and 
desirable disposition of these bad odors, which 
otherwise constitute an objectionable feature. 
At the same time, also, this hood protects the 
volatilizing flame from being extinguished or 
from flickering caused by lateral drafts of air, 
which is also an important advantage. 
In making use of my invention the vapor 
chamber is first tilted on two of its legs to give 
access to the wick, which being lighted the 
chamber is dropped back to its position above 
the wick. The compensating-bar being ele 
wated to its highest position, this permits com 
bustion to take place at the wick only, in which 
condition the burner is left for a few minutes 
until the vapor-chamber becomes sufficiently 
heated. The compensating - bar is then 
dropped down, and the wick raised till it 
comes in contact with the edge of said bar or 
follower, and the vapor which is generated in 
the vapor-chamber is then immediately ignited 
at the jet-holes above, and the burner is then 
in normal operation. 
The compensating-bar, it will be seen, rests 
upon the wick, and follows it in its adjust 
ment up and down, and serves always to keep 
a proper relation between the blue or volatil 
izing flame and the amount of vapors being 
generated, and preventing the smoking and 
clogging of the burner. When the burner is 
to be extinguished, the wick is merely turned 
down until the blue or volatilizing flame dies 
out, which it does gradually without allowing 
any smell, for the vapors produced at this 
point are consumed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is--- 
1. The combination, with the wick-tube and 
a vapor and burner chamber arranged above 
it, of the burner-casing G' G', provided with 
a vapor-outlet and wings H H at the top of 
said burner, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with a wick-tube and 
m 
75 
90 
95 
IOo 
O 
If 5 
I 30 
 
373,429 
3 
it, and a horizontal compensating-bar or foll 
lower resting upon the wick and constructed 25 
with a reduced lower edge, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
6. The combination, with the wick-tube, of 
a vapor and burner chamber arranged above 
it, and a detachable perforated diaphragm ar- 3O 
ranged within the vapor-chamber, and a ver 
tically-adjustable follower for the wick play 
ing through the perforation in the diaphragm, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
a vapor and burner chamber arranged above 
it, and a diaphragm for said chamber with a slit 
and vertically-guided follower or compensat 
ing-bar playing through said slit, and a sliding 
rod with inclines operating upon the follower O 
to positively raise the same, substantially as 
shown and described. 
7. The combination, with the wick-tube, of 35 
W. W. BATCHELDER, JR. 
Witnesses: 
EDWD. W. BYRN, 
SOLON C. KEMON. 
O 
means for raising and lowering the wick, of 
a vapor and burner chamber arranged above 
it, and a vertically-adjustable compensating 
bar or follower resting upon said wick, and 
special means for positively lifting the same 
from the wick independent of the adjustment 
of the wick, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
3. The combination, with a wick-tube, of a 
vapor and burner chamber arranged above it 
and having at its lower end a diaphragm with 
a slit in it, and a vertically-adjustable com 
pensating-bar playing through said slit and 
resting upon the Wick, and means for posi 
tively lifting the same from the wick, substan- ; 
tially as and for purpose described. 
4. The combination, with the wick-tube, of 
a follower resting upon the wick and moving 
with it, and having perfect freedom of motion 
to cant or adjust itself to the irregular edge of 
the wick, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with the wick-tube, of 
a vapor and burner chamber arranged above 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373529.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 373,529, 
 
L. W. LOMBARD. 
CARTRIDGE SHELI, 
Patented Nov. 22, 1887. 
A 27.4 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEVI W. LOMBARD, OF BOSTON, MAssACHUSETTS. 
CARTRIDGE-SHELL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of tetters Patent No. 373,529, dated November 22, 1887. 
v 
Application filed March 21, 1887. Serial No. 231,697. (No model.) 
55 
O 
5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEWI W. LoMBARD, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Cartridge-Shells; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters or figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to cartridge-shells,' 
so called, more particularly those adapted for 
sporting purposes and to be used in shotguns. 
My invention consists in the arrangement 
and construction of a cartridge-shell by which 
two charges may be inserted in said shell, one 
being superimposed above the other, and then 
be successively discharged by means of two 
primers located in the head of said shell, one 
of said primers communicating with the for 
ward charge through a duct, and the other 
primer communicating with the end of the 
rear charge directly. 
The said invention also consists in a car 
tridge having two charges, one on top of the 
other, and two primers, one of which commu 
nicates with the upper or forward charge 
through a duct formed in the wall of the car 
tridge-shell. 
The said invention also consists in a car 
tridge having, two charges, one on top of the 
other, and two primers communicating with 
the rear ends of said charges, all as hereinafter 
set forth. 
The drawings represent, in Figure 1, a cen 
tral vertical section of a cartridge-shell which 
embodies my invention. Figs. 2, 3, and 4 rep 
resent modifications in construction of the 
See 
In said drawings,. A represents a cartridge. 
shell as an entirety struck up from some thin 
sheet metal or other suitable material, and ex 
teriorly of the same general contour as car 
tridge-shells now in use, but somewhat longer 
to enable it to contain two charges in lieu of 
one, as before premised. 
To carry out my improvements, and to en 
able two charges contained in a single shell to 
be successively discharged, I have provided 
in the closed end or flanged head B of said 
shell two holes, ab; adapted to receive primers 
which shall contain some compound to be dis 
charged percussively. 
In Fig. 1, a represents a hole centrally lo 
cated, and to contain, a primer which commu 
nicates with the lower charge, C, while lat 
erally thereof I have disposed a similar hole, 
b, from which extends a small duct, c, formed 
in the present case by a tube, d. This duct 
leads to and communicates with that portion 
of the shell which is occupied by the powder 
of the second or upper charge, D. Thus by 
means of this second primer and the duct lead 
ing therefrom the upper charge can be dis 
charged, to be quickly followed by the lower 
one, should circumstances require. 
By this improved construction of a cartridge 
shell it is evident that every fire-arm having 
a single barrel may be as effective as one with 
two barrels, while the weight of material and 
cost of manufacture are lessened, being much 
in favor of the single-barreled weapon. Fur 
thermore, it is practicable to introduce and 
employ such cartridge-shells in double-bar 
reled shotguns, in which event four charges 
could be rapidly, easily, and effectively dis 
charged. 
There are many obvious and simple modifi 
cations of the above-described cartridge-shell 
which I consider embody my invention, two 
of which are shown in Figs. 2 and 3. In the 
former I have represented the shell as pro 
vided with a semicircular rib, d, in which the 
duct c is to be formed, said rib to be placed 
exteriorly, and thereby leave the bore of the 
shell unobstructed, and so facilitate loading, 
while in Fig. 3 this rib is to extend the entire 
length of the shell, and thus enable a rod to 
be inserted and extract the primer in the 
event of reloading the shell. 
The central 
primer in this construction may be removed, 
as usual. 
A third modification, as shown in Fig. 4, 
represents the duct c as extending from the 
central primer to the upper charge; but this 
method is somewhat objectionable, since it di 
vides the charge, while, furthermore, in load 
ing it requires wads of a special construction 
that is, provided with a central perforation. 
. 
. 
95 
OC 
75 
25 
35 
45 
50 
373,529 
... 
' 
In the event of shells being employed in 
which the exterior rib, d, is employed, a cor 
responding slot must be provided in the cham 
ber of the barrel (not shown) in order to re 
ceive it. 
After the shell is primed I load as usual, 
but insert two wads between the shot of the 
lower and the powder of the upper charge. 
If preferred, two wads may be employed above 
each charge of powder, as it has been fully es 
tablished that better results are obtained by 
such manner of loading. 
The point where the duct c opens into the 
bore of the shell maybe so arranged as to com 
municate about centrally with the powder of 
the upper charge. Thus both charges can be 
varied, and the discharge of both cartridges 
is assured. 
I find by experiment that the construction 
shown in Fig. 3 is the most efficient and prac 
tical form. 
0. 
IS 
I claim 
1. A cartridge-shell having two primers, a 
b, a duct, d, extending from one of said prim 
ers to the forward part of said shell, and an 25 
orifice through which the other primer com 
municates directly with the interior of said 
shell, substantially as set forth. 
2. A cartridge-shell containing two charges, 
one on top of the other, and having a duct 
which extends forward within said shell to the 
forward charge, and an aperture which com 
municates directly with the lower or rear 
charge, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
35 
LEVI W. LOMBARD. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT STIRK, 
H. E. LODGE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373629.txt	(No Model.) 
C, O, YATE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
CASTING MACHINE, 
No. 373,629, 
Patented Nov. 22, 1887. 
2 
2 li, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
. 
  
st H || || | 
2 
| 
| 
1. 
2 2 
22 
a 
A 
| ITTUTILITHIL 
-3. 
St. ily 
I 
until 
 
WiTresses, 
5.3 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographor, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
C, O, YALE, 
CASTING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 373,629, 
Patented NOW, 22, 1887, 
 
E 
4 Et 
2s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES O. YALE, OF ROME, NEW YORK. 
CASTING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 373,629, dated November 22, 1887. 
Application filed March 8, 1886. Renewed October 29, 1887. Serial No. 953,732. 
(No model.) 
O 
15 
2O 
25 
3 O 
55 
Co 
To all whom it may concern: 
anti-friction rolls may be attached to the mov 
ing ring or circle in such a manner as to travel 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs O. YALE, of 
on a track provided for them. It is equally 
Rome, in the county of Oneida and State of 
obvious that either of said rings or circles may 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Casting-Machines; and 
be constructed to move, one being held sta 
tionary. On one angle of the traveling ring 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
or circle I attach a succession of jointed molds 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
of the required shape and form. . These molds 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
are jointed at the lower end, the upper end 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
being free to open when the same passes the 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
pouring-point. The rings or circles are lo 
ings, and to the figures of reference marked 
cated eccentrically to each other, as indicated 
thereon, which form part of this specification. 
in Fig. 1, their eccentric location being deter 
My invention relates to casting-machines; 
mined by the thickness or condition of the 
and it consists in the mechanism hereinafter 
molds. The traveling ring or circle to which 
pointed out and claimed. 
thejointed molds are attachedisintermittently 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a plan view of my improved cast 
moved by ratchets 6, engaged by pawl 7, driven 
by crank S when power is applied. The ratch 
ing-machine. Fig. 2 is a Vertical Section on 
line aca, Fig.1. 
ets and crank should be constructed in refer 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section of 
the hopper, taken on line a. ac, Fig. 1, repre 
ence to the size and number of the molds in 
reference to the traveling ring or circle, as 
senting the same detached from the machine. 
the traveling ring or circle is moved the dis 
Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section view of my im 
proved charging-valve. Fig. 5 represents an 
tance of one mold at a time. A mold is 
brought into position for receiving the metal, 
anode cast in my machine, with its electric 
as indicated at 9, Fig. 1. The metal is poured 
splines cast therein. Fig. 6 is an edge view 
in hopper 10, Fig. 3, held over the mouth of 
of Fig. 5 on line y J. 
Fig. 7 is an edge view 
the mold to guide and distribute the metal. 
of the molds in position to receive the casting. 
Fig. 8 is a perspective view of the molds open, 
As each mold advances to receive the charge 
showing position of splines 0 0 before cast 
of metal, it passes between anti-friction rolls 
11 11, Figs. 1 and 2, which are kept to their 
ling. 
position by coil-springs surrounding the shank 
In the accompanying drawings similar fig 
12 12, Fig. 7. The shanks to these anti-fric 
ures of reference refer to corresponding parts 
throughout the several views. 
tion rolls fit and move in boxes 13 13, Fig. 7, 
In constructing my improved casting-ma 
mounted in the frame, and by this mechan 
ism the mold is held firmly while it is receiv 
chine I provide two rings or circles, 1 and 2, 
ing the charge. For accurately guiding and 
Fig. 1. The outer ring or circle, 2, is sup 
holding the traveling ring or circle to its 
ported in a suitable frame and held stationary, 
work I provide a system of guide-rolls, 14 14, 
and is somewhat larger than ring or circle 1, 
their respective sizes and shapes being graded 
located on either side of the traveling circle or 
according to the purposes or molds to be used, 
rling. 
having reference to their size. I preferably 
For pouring the metal into the mold from 
the furnace I provide charger 15, Fig. 4, hav 
construct the smaller ring or circle of the an 
ing openings 16, 17, and 18, though the latter, 
gle-iron 4. (Shown in cross-section in Fig. 2.) 
however, may be omitted. This charger is 
The ring or circle 1 is mounted to be rotated 
inserted in the furnace with the opening 16 in 95 
on anti-friction rolls 3, Supported on suitable 
bearings, the angle-iron forming the movable the charger extending through the walls of 
the furnace to receive the molten metal, as in 
circle resting on a succession of anti-friction 
dicated in Fig. 2. The discharge end 18 ex 
rolls, forming a track on which the circle trav 
tends over the opening in the molds, a suffi 
els. Three or more of these rolls are prefer 
ably provided. 
It is quite obvious that these cient space being left between the two to Ico 
9O 
7, 
35 
4O 
45 
so 
2 
373,629 
1.O. 
I5 
25 
45 
55 
75 
85 
thereon, and means for moving one of said 
accommodate the hopper for conducting the 
rings. 
metal into the mouth of the mold. For open 
ing and closing apertures 16 and 17 in the 
2. In a casting-machine, the combination of 
charger I provide valves 19 and 19, rigidly 
two rings of unequal size eccentrically located 7o 
5 held on stem 20. These valves are located on 
with relation to each other, one of said rings 
the stem with reference to openings in the 
constructed of angle-iron in cross-section, 
jointed molds rigidly held to the angle-iron 
charger, so that when the valve-stem is drawn 
ring, and means for intermittingly moving the 
out, as indicated in Fig. 4, the molten metal 
rushes into the chamber 21, which is of suf 
ring with the molds attached. 
ficient size to retain metal to fill one mold. 
3. In a casting-machine, the combination of 
two rings of unequal size eccentrically located 
The valves and stem are then moved inward, 
and the valve closing the aperture 16, and at . 
with relation to each other, one of said rings 
the same time opening the aperture 17, thereby 
constructed of angle-iron, jointed molds held 
allows the molten metal to flow into the mold, 
to the angle-iron ring, and means for moving 8 
which is then moved on and another moved 
the ring with the molds attached. 
into position. As the mold moves past the 
4. The combination of the rings of unequal 
pouring-point the same is allowed to separate, 
size eccentrically located with relation to each 
as indicated in Fig. 8, when the casting is re 
other, the jointed molds attached to one of 
moved. The mold is prepared by introduc 
said rings, and means for moving the same. 
ing at the upper end of the mold the thin 
5. The combination, with the stationary 
splines of electric conducting metal, oo, which 
ring, of the movable ring with jointed molds 
are cast into the anode, and applying a solu 
attached thereto, and means for intermittently 
tion of finely-divided carbon, when the mold is 
moving the movable ring. 
ready for receiving another casting, which 
6. The casting-machine having two rings of 9 
work is performed while the ring or moving 
unequal size eccentrically located with reference . 
circle is being moved. 
to each other, with jointed mold mounted on 
25 represents the ornamental depressions in 
one ring, in combination with the anti-friction 
roll located and mounted to engage and press 
told,and 26 the spline on the edges of the 
the parts of the molds together when the 
OC. 
In the drawings the machine illustrated 
metal is being poured, and means for adjust 
was constructed with reference to its use in 
ing said rolls. 
casting lead-bullion anodes. The machine, 
7. The combination of two rings of unequal 
however, is equally adapted for use in casting 
size eccentrically located with reference to 
brass, copper, zinc, antimony, and similar 
each other, one of said rings movable, with 
metals where thin castings are required. In 
jointed molds mounted thereon, anti-friction 
producing thin casting from any of the metals 
rolls mounted to engage and press the parts 
before named great trouble is encountered, 
of the mold together, and means for intermit 
as the metal rapidly chills, thus preventing a 
tently moving the ring and molds. 
perfect casting. To overcome this difficulty 
8. The combination of the jointed molds 
the mold must be free from all gases produced 
attached to a movable ring, a stationary ring 
by heated metal in the mold, as a slight quan 
of different diameter, the two eccentrically 
tity of gas generated by the metal prevents 
located with reference to each other for press 
the same from flowing, thereby producing an 
ing the molds together when the metal is 
imperfect casting. To produce a perfect cast 
ing of the character described it is quite im 
9. The combination of a movable. ring ec 
portant to introduce into the mold the element 
centrically located with reference to a ring 
of non-conductor of heat to prevent rapid 
of a different diameter, carrying the jointed 
chilling. At the same time means must be 
mold and having ratchet-teeth, a pawl for en 
provided for facilitating the flow of the metal. 
gaging the teeth, and a crank for moving the 
in the mold. The troubles hereinbefore set 
awl. 
forth are measurably overcome by forming 
p 10. The jointed molds attached to a mov 
molds 22 22, Fig. 8, from carbon. 
able ring moving in contact with a stationary 
In many instances it is desirable to use a 
ring of different size, the two eccentrically 
metal mold, in which case Iform a carbonated 
located, in combination with a charger located 
surface in the molds themselves by the use of 
at the closing-point of the eccentric, the charger 
a mixture of finely-divided carbon and alco. 
having openings at opposite ends, and two . 
hol or its equivalent, the solution being ap 
valves on a valve-stem for opening and clos 
plied to the face of the molds with a brush or 
ing theinlet and outlet, for the purposes stated. 
its equivalent. By the use of this mixture a 
11. A casting-machine having a rotating 
complete casting may be formed with very 
wheel or ring surrounded by a ring of larger 
little difficulty. 
diameter, the two being eccentrically located 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
with relation to each other, and the jointed 
Letters Patent, is 
molds attached to the rotating ring or wheel, 
1. In a casting-machine, two rings of un 
substantially as set forth. 
equal size eccentrically located with reference 
12. The combination of two eccentric sur 
to each other, with jointed molds mounted faces, one being provided with jointed molds 
poured. 
II.5 
I25 
ICO 
Ic5 
- 
. 
O 
 
373,629 
3 
In witness whereof I have affixed my signa 
ture in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES O. YALE. 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN H. RISLEY, 
M. E. ROBINSON. 
and means for moving the molds, substantially 
as set forth. 
13. The combination of the rotating ring 
carrying jointed carbonated molds and the 
5 stationary ring of larger diameter, the two be. 
ing rotated eccentrically, substantially as set 
forth, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373729.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 373,729, 
A. ESKE, 
DISPLAY STAND. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1887, 
 
Z772 ye72%22,' 
-76er? ZSe 
3%. Z. 
N. pereas photo-Lithographer, Washingto: 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
c 
ALBERTESKE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
O SPAY STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 373,729, dated Noveliber 22, 1887. 
Application filed July 5, 1887. Serial No.243,368. (No model.) 
I 5 
25 
35 
55 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERTESKE. a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Display-Stands; and I hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the class of stands used in stores, and ordina 
lily in the show-windows of stores, to hang 
upon them goods which it is desired to dis. 
play to advantage. 
It is my object to provide a flexible stand in 
contradistinction to the rigid forms hitherto 
in use, by the employment of which a stand of 
comparatively large dimensions may be folded 
to cause its parts to assume various angles 
With relation to each other, whereby it may be 
made to occupy comparatively little space, 
and thus be accommodated to fit within-say 
a show - window of comparatively small di 
mensions--and at the same time afford a large 
almount of space to receive the articles to be 
hung upon it for display. 
My invention consists in a display-stand 
having a stationary upright forming the stand 
ard, a claimp on the upright adapted to be 
tightened and loosened in its position, a lat 
eralarm to support the articles to be displayed, 
extending from the clamp and movable hori 
Zontally to various desired angles with refer 
ence to the standard, and secured, by tighten 
ing the clamp in any position to which it is 
moved. 
Myinvention also consists in a display-stand 
having a stationary upright forming the stand 
ard and carrying a vertical bar or upright 
having a pivotal or hinged connection, by 
-O means of an arm, with the standard to permit 
folding thereof to various desired angles with 
reference to the standard. 
My invention further consists in the con 
struction of the clamp I employ for securing 
and affording the flexibility of connection of 
the folding parts to the standard; and it still 
further consists in details of construction and 
combinations of parts, all as hereinafter more whereby a space, n, is provided between the roo 
fully set forth. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows my improved 
display-stand in all its details, stretched out 
or unfolded, in front elevation. Fig. 2 is a 
similar view of the device in its simplest form. 
Fig. 3 shows the two parts in elevation, form 
ing, when adjusted together upon the stand 
ard or a vertical folding bar, my improved 
clamp; and Fig. 4 is a top view of the clamp 
having the two parts forming it adjusted to 
gether upon the standard, (shown in Section,) 
and to cause the sockets on the lateral edges 
of both parts to coincide like the knuckles in 
a hinge and afford receptacles for the arms or 
connections between the vertical parts. 
A is a post, preferably hollow, and of metal, 
(by preference brass or other ornamental kind,) 
and ordinarily-that is, for the size of stand 
most commonly used-about one-half of an 
inch in diameter and of any desired length. 
The standard A is secured at its lower end in 
a base, B, of some heavy material, such as a 
block of marble, the object being to provide 
a base composed of a material which, without 
being of great dimensions, will be sufficiently 
heavy to outweigh the parts attached to or 
connected with the standard, as hereinafter 
described, and the articles hung thereon for 
purposes of display, and thus render the device 
firm upon the support, as upon the floor or 
base of a show-window. As it is preferable 
that the stand shall be readily removable, it is 
desirable that the standard portion shall be 
supported in a base, B, as described, though 
it may be a fixture by being permanently se 
cured to its support, which is within the spirit 
of my invention. The upper end of the stand 
ard B may be provided with a suitable orna 
mental knob, ". 
C is a clamp, formed in two parts, p and p", 
each comprising one-half or about one-half of 
a longitudinally - split tube, whereby, when 
adjusted together upon the standard A or an 
upright, D, hereinafter described, they will 
surround it and meet at the adjacent edges. 
The socket portion of the clamp conforms to 
the shape of the surface of the object it sur 
rounds, which is preferably cylindrical, as 
shown, though it may be of any other form. 
The part p' is provided on each lateral edge 
with two sockets, o, one near each extremity, 
two sockets on each edge; and the part p has 
a socket, In, between its extremities on each 
edge to fit in the spaces in, when the parts p 
and pare adjusted together, and produce align 
75 
 
2. 
a 
w 
373,729 
O 
3O 
35. 
45 
50 
55 
- 
impaired. 
ment between the sockets o and m, respect 
ively, on the opposite edges. On the convex 
side of its body, between the sockets m, the 
part p is provided with a perforated lug or 
bearing, l, the opening in which extends 
through the body of the part p and is threaded, 
and contains a set-screw, E, serving a purpose 
hereinafter explained. 
The two parts of the clamp C, when adjusted 
about a standard, A, or an upright, D, are 
held together by inserting through the sockets 
0 m, in alignment on both sides of the tubular 
portion, the bent ends of arms For connect 
ing-arms G, as in the case of the pintles or 
hinges; and the set-screw E, by being turned 
to force it against the surface of the object 
supporting the clamp, tends to spread the two 
parts p and p' apart, (their separation, how 
ever, being prevented by the connecting effect 
of the bent ends of the arms,) whereby the 
tubular portion of the clamp is secured in 
place by binding, and a binding effect is also 
produced against the bent ends of the arms in 
the sockets o and m, which serves to afford 
sufficient resistance against turning the arms 
F to retain them in any position to which they 
may be turned, and sufficient friction in hold 
ing the bent ends of the arms G to carry the 
uprights D, as hereinafter described. 
As hereinbefore stated, the simplest form of 
my inproved display-stand is that shown in 
Fig. 2, wherein the standard A. carries any 
desired number of clamps C, one above the 
other, and vertically adjustable thereon by 
means of the set-screws E; and the arms F, 
bent at one end to adapt them to be inserted 
through the lateral sockets o on to hold the 
parts of the clamps C together, and afford hang 
ers of their horizontally. extending parts, for 
the articles to be displayed may be provided 
with ornamental knobs, r", at their horizontal 
extremities. It will thus be seen that the arms 
F may be readily turned in the sockets on the 
clamps supporting them to assume any desired 
angle with reference to the standard and each 
other, and that the clamps may be adjusted at 
will upon the standard. 
The stand, as shownin Fig.1, differs from that 
shown in Fig. 2 in the addition of the uprights 
D and eonnecting-arms G. The uprights D 
are in form like the standard A, but narrower 
in cross-section and lighter, and also provided 
with clamps C, which are of necessity smaller 
than those on the standard. The uprights 
are connected with the standard by arms G, 
bent at opposite ends to right angles to afford 
pintles which enter the Socketso in on adjacent 
edges of the clamps on the standard and an 
upright; and the connection serves also to sup 
port or carry the uprights owing to the bind 
ing effect of the set-screws exerted through 
the parts of the clamps upon the bent ends of 
the arms G or pintles. Thus, when the up 
rights are shorter than the standard, whereby 
they do not extend to the floor or support, 
they are sustained entirely by this binding 
effect of the clamps. They may, however, be 
sufficiently long to extend to and rest upon the 
floor. Any number of uprights, D, may be 
connected in like manner to those shown to 
be connected with the standard, though the 
number added should not cause the combined 
weight of the articles displayed on the stand 
and the parts connected with the standard to 
equal the weight of the base B, when provided, 
so that the stability of the stand may not be 
It is within the spirit of my invention to 
provide only a single upright, D, on one side 
of the standard when the sockets on the clamps 
on the opposite side of the standard may re 
ceive the pintles on arms F or any suitable 
pintles. The outer sockets of the clamps on 
the extreme uprights D may be provided With 
arms F. 
The connection of the uprights with the 
standard and with each other, as described, 
permits, as will readily be seen, folding of the 
parts of the stand to various desired or re. 
quired angles with reference to the standard 
and each other. 
What I claim as new, and desire to Secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a display-stand, the combination of a 
stationary upright forming the standard, a 
clamp on the upright adapted to be tightened 
and loosened in its position, and a lateralarm 
to support articles to be displayed extending 
from the clamp and movable horizontally to 
various desired angles with reference to the 
standard, and secured by the tightening of the 
said clamp in any position to which it is moved, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a display-stand, a clamp, C, compris 
ing a part, p, having lateral sockets in, and a 
set-screw, E, extending through the part p, 
and apart, p', having lateral sockets 0, whereby 
when the parts p and p are adjusted on the 
standard of the display-stand with the Sock 
ets m, and 0 in alignment and connected by 
suitable pintles the set-screw may be tight 
ened against the standard to secure the clamp 
in place and tighten the pintles in the Sock 
ets, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. In a display-stand, the combination of an 
upright, A, forming the standard, an arm, G, 
having a pivotal or hinged connection at one 
end with the standard and extending horizon 
tally therefrom, and an upright, D, Connected 
with the opposite end of the arm G and mov 
able about the standard with the arm in a 
horizontal planeto various desired angles, Sub 
- stantially as described. 
4. In a display-stand, the combination of an 
upright, A, forming the standard, a clamp, C, 
on the standard and vertically adjustable 
thereon, an arm, G, having a pivotal or hinged 
connection at one end with the said clamp and 
extending horizontally from the standard, and 
an upright, D, connected with the opposite 
end of the arm G and movable about the stand 
- 
75 
go 
ICO 
Io5 
(Io 
II5 
I25 
130 
373,729 
3 
ard with the arm in a horizontal plane to vari 
ous desired angles, substantially as described. 
5. In a display-stand, the combination of an 
upright, A, forming the standard, clamp C on 
5 the upright, each comprising a part, p, hav 
ing lateral sockets in, and a set-screw, E, and 
a part, p, having lateral sockets 0, and arms 
F, bent to form pintles inserted through the 
sockets 0 and in, substantially as and for the 
6. In a display-stand, the combination of an 
upright, A, forming the standard, uprights D, 
clamps C on the standard, the uprights D 
each comprising a part, p, having lateral sock 
IO purpose Set furth. 
ets m, and a set-screw, E, and a part, p, hav- I5 
ing lateral socketso, arms G, bent at their ex 
tremities to form pintles inserted into the 
sockets o an of clamps C on adjacent sides of 
the standard and uprights and connecting them. 
together, and arms F, bent at one extremity to 2C 
form pintles inserted into the outer sockets, O 
m, of clamps C on the extreme uprights D, 
substantially as described. 
ALBERTESKE. 
In presence of - 
J. W. DYRENFORTH, 
CHAS. E. GAYLORD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373829.txt	(No Model.) 
M. J. HATCHER 
PLOW, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 373,829, 
Patented Nov. 29, 1887, 
%a'ee, 
af22/2-4--, 
- 
w 
 
IWVEWTOR 
o A. dCa-e-4-- 
2. 6%ala 
Attorney 
(No Model.) 
No. 373,829, 
 
M. J. HATCHER. 
PLOW. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 29, 1887. 
28itv.coccy. 
22: 
3v-uowbot 
8, 
attorneywo 
 
w 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARSHALL JAMES HATCHER, OF MACON, GEORGIA. 
PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 373,829, dated November 29, 1887. 
Application filed March 10, 1887, 
Serial No. 230,404. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARSHALL JAMES 
HATCHER, a citizen of the United States, and 
a resident of Macon, county of Bibb, State of 
Georgia, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Plows, of which the following 
is a full and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, making 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in that class of plows for which Letters 
Patent were granted me. on the 29th day of 
June, 1886. 
My present improvements consist, first, in 
a new and improved plow-foot formed from a 
plate or blank of steel or wrought-iron, the 
center of which is provided with an offset or 
bend, as hereinafter described, in order that 
it may be fitted on the front and sides of an 
Ordinary plow - stock or be secured in rear 
thereof, should the nature of the work so re 
quire. 
The improvements further consist in the 
combination, with said plow-foot, of various 
adjustable and removable sections for adapt 
ing the plow to accomplish the different kinds 
of work for which it has heretofore been nec 
essary to employ several different kinds of 
implements. 
On the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of my improved plow-foot with reversi 
ble blades at each side thereof. Fig. 2 is a 
View showing the rear and under surfaces of 
Same. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a wedge 
Washer for changing the angle of the plow 
blades or sweeps. Fig. 4 is a sectional view 
of a plow-stock with my improved plow-foot, 
share, and landside secured thereto. Fig. 5 is 
a plan of the under side of my plow-foot and 
blades. Fig. 6 represents a reversible scooter. 
Fig. 7 is a view of a shovel attachment for use 
with the scooter or reversible share. Fig. 8 
is a single mold-board, which may be used 
either with the scooter or share when the im 
plement is to be used as a turn-plow. Fig. 9 
is a perspective view of my improved land 
side. Fig. 10 shows the plow-foot with scooter 
and mold-board connected therewith. Fig.11 
is a perspective view of the plow-foot with re 
versible side blades and a diamond-shaped 
share in front thereof. Fig. 12 is a plan of 
the blank from which, my plow-foot is made. 
Fig. 13 represents a plow-foot with lengthened 
side wings, so as to dispense with the use of 
the reversible side blades. Fig. 14 is a per 
Spective view of an ordinary plow-frame with 
my improved plow-foot and a subsoil secured 
to the stock thereof. 
On the drawings, the letter A designates my 
improved plow-foot, which is made from a 
steel or wrought-iron blank, a, the front edge 
of which is preferably cut as shown at b b'. 
(See Fig. 12.) 
The dotted lines G c' c' c' indicate the loca 
tions for bending, so that the central part 
shall be somewhat higher at the rear than at 
the front thereof, the sides perpendicular, and 
the ends or wings inclined rearwardly, as 
shown in the drawings. 
The center of the plow-foot is provided with 
a bolt-hole, d, for the reception of a bolt, e, 
whereby it is adapted to be secured either over 
the front or at the rear of a plow-stock. The 
bolt e is made of sufficient length, to engage 
various sections of the implement, as will be 
hereinafter fully set forth. 
The front edges of the plow-foot are made 
perfectly sharpin order that it may be worked 
without any additional parts whenever de 
Each wing of the plow-foot is provided with 
a single bolt-hole, d' d', for the reception of 
bolts e'e', whereby the reversible blades.ff' 
are secured with either of their ends abutting 
against the adjacent side of the raised portion 
of the plow-foot, and for which purpose the 
said blades are provided, near the opposite 
ends thereof, with bolt-holes, as shown. 
G is a diamond-shaped plowshare, having 
a bolt-bole, 9 g, near each of its longest ends, 
in order that it may be secured to the plow 
foot with either of its longest ends uppermost, 
as shown in Figs. 4 and 11. 
The landside H is composed of a flat piece 
of metal of even width and bent as shown in 
Figs. 4 and 9. Its upper end is provided with 
an elongated slot, h, to permit of its being 
properly adjusted on the bolt c, either at the 
front or rear of the plow-stock, as shown in 
solid and dotted lines in Fig. 4. 
I designates a scooter, one end of which is 
provided with a point, i, and the other with a 
sired. 
a 
55 
75 
8O 
85 
90 
OC 
O 
20 
25 
35 
SO 
 
2 
373,829 
Square or bevel edge. Near each end of the 
Scooter is a bolt-hole, i i", in order that it may 
be Secured in position with either of its ends 
uppermost. 
Kis a shovel attachment having an elongated 
slot, k, for the reception of the bolte, whereby 
it is adjustably secured in rear of the upper 
end of either the plowshare or scooter. 
L. designates a single mold-board provided 
With an elongated bolt hole or slot, l, to per 
mit of its being used, as shown in Fig. 10, and 
thus form a turn-plow. Instead of making 
the mold-board single, as shown, it may be 
made double, so as to throw the earth both 
Ways; or a right and left mold board or plate 
may be used to produce the same result. 
. M is a perspective view of one of a pair of 
Wedge-washers having bolt-slots in therein. 
These washers are intended for use between 
the wings of the plow, foot and the reversible 
blades, to permit of the latter being held at 
different angles of elevation, as the nature of 
the Soil or work may require. 
It will be seen that, with the exception of the 
side blades and washers, all the parts consti 
tuting the different combinations of my plow 
are secured together and to the plow-stock by 
a single bolt, so that in the event of accident 
to any portion or a desire to change the combi. 
nation it is only necessary to unscrew one nut 
and remove a single bolt to accomplish the de 
sired result.. 
By omitting the side blades and securing to 
the front of the foot either the scooter or dia 
mond-shaped share, with right and left mold 
boards immediately in rear thereof, the imple 
ment is adapted to side and bar off cotton, the 
Wings of the foot serving to cut or shave the 
edges of the bar-furrow, thereby siding or dirt 
ing the cotton all at one operation, the attach 
O 
25 
35 
ments serving to throw the dirt to the middle 
of the row and the aforesaid wings to throw 
the dirt to the cotton, and thus siding it with 
one operation, leaving the cotton with dirt to 
it in fine condition to grow, as well as render 
ing the hoeing much more easy and rapid. 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
as new, and desire to secure by Letter's Patent, 
S 1. A plow-foot composed of a blank having 
its rear edge parallel with the central portion 
of its front edge, the balance of the front edge 
having recessed portions b b, the blank bent 
as described, so as to produce a forwardly-pro 
jecting raised center and rearwardly-inclined 
wings, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. A plow-foot composed of a blank having 
its rear edge parallel with the central portion 
of its front edge and the remaining portions of 
the front edge recessed or set back, the blank 
bent and provided with a central and end bolt 
holes, as described, in combination with the 
reversible blades.ff', substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with a plow-foot con 
sisting of a metal plate having an offset in the 
center thereof, whereby it is adapted to fit over 
the front and sides of a plow-stock or in the 
rear thereof, as described, of the reversible 
blades ff', the slotted wedge-shaped washers 
M, and the bolts, whereby the blades are ad 
justably secured to the plow-foot Cinds or Wings, 
Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
MARSHALL J AMIES HATCHER, . 
r 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. HARRIs, 
S. M. JENIKINS. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US373929.txt	(No Model.) 
T. J. GILLETTE. 
GAGE FOR SQUARES, 
No. 373,929, 
Patented Nov. 29, 1887. 
2. 
22 
42 
2 E 4 
2. 
Es. 
-7 
efs 
72. / 
l 
g "a 
2%zzzzasses, 
2%. 5%, 
76-7a, 24/2 
Z722/e72/22:- 
Z7ee-ae2-7620.2e2e. 
2/6ree?, 2-6-2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THURBER. J. GILLETTE, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF TWO 
THIRDS TO DAVID D. GREGORY, OF SAME PLACE. 
GAGE FOR SQUARES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 373,929, dated November 29, 1887. 
Application filed March 22, 18S7. 
Serial No. 231,890. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I. THURBER. J. GILLETTE, 
of Syracuse, county of Onondaga, and State of 
New York, have invented an Improvement in 
Gages for Squares, of which the following de 
Scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters on 
the drawings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a Square. With gages particularly adapted to 
be used by carpenters to accurately measure 
miters in stair stringers, it being also adapted 
for measuring rafters to be used in building, 
as in the roof of a building, and whereby each 
rafter may be cut at exactly the same bevel or 
angle of inclination, so that when the said 
rafter's are erected into position to form the 
frame of the roof the ends of opposite rafters 
Will be matched and the ridge or comb of the 
roof will be made to fall at the center of the 
building and be substantially perfectly 
straight. 
In the manufacture of stringers for stairs as 
heretofore practiced and known to me the 
miters have been marked out by applying 
the square to the board to form the stringer. 
The Workman in marking the stringers is 
guided solely by his eye, and when working 
rapidly it frequently happens that the square 
is not in every case applied to the board or 
timber accurately-as, for instance, when it is 
desired the miter should be twelve inches long 
on one side and ten inches on the other, the 
Workman applying the square to the board or 
timber hurriedly marks twelve and one-eighth 
inches on one side and nine and seven-eighths 
inches on the other, and at the next applica 
tion of the square to the board marks eleven 
and seven-eighths on one side and ten and one 
eighth on the other. It will thus be seen that 
the stringers when placed in position to form 
the sides of the stairs are not matched, so that 
when the boards are nailed thereto the steps 
thus formed are uneven and irregular in size 
and shape. Also, in the marking of timbers 
to form rafters, especially for buildings having 
pitched roofs, the same error occurs, and as a 
result some of the rafters are given a bevel 
differing from other rafters or are made longer, 
which will, it is obvious, result in not only 
throwing the ridge of the roof out of the cen 
ter of the building, but also giving a crooked 
line to the ridge. 
It is the object of this invention to overcome 
the difficulty referred to and to enable a car 
penter to mark stringers, rafters, &c., with 
the greatest rapidity and utmost accuracy. 
My invention therefore consists, essentially, 
of a gage composed of a body portion slotted 
to fit one arm of a measuring-square, the said 
body portion being provided with arms hav 
ing a vertical shoulder or shoulders at right 
angles to the face of the said square, the said 
gage preferably having two shoulders, in order 
that it may be used either side up. 
Figure 1 shows a carpenter's steel square 
with my improved miter-gage applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a view of the gage removed, looking 
at it in the direction of the arrow 2; Fig. 3, a 
view of the gage, looking at it in the direction 
of the arrow 3; and Fig. 4 is a detail to be re 
ferred to. 
The square A is and may be of any usual 
construction, it being provided with usual 
graduations, herein shown as feet and frac 
tions of a foot. Each arm a? a of the Square 
A has fitted upon it a miter-gage, B, which 
consists, as shown in Fig. 2, of a slotted body 
portion, a, having arms a, provided with shoul 
ders a. Each arma'a of the square enters the 
slot 2 of the body a, and the gage is secured 
to the arm of the square on which it is placed 
by a set-screw, b, which acts against an ad 
justing-block, b, which is fitted into the said 
slot 2 and bears against the edge of the square, 
the block b having claws b (see Fig. 4) to en 
gage the sides of the body (tin its normal po 
sition. (Shown in Figs. 1 and 2.) The edge 
or side 3 of the bar b next the edge of the 
square is Smooth. 
The gages may be applied to the arms of the 
square and be adjusted thereon so that the 
faces of the shoulders a will register with any 
desired distance-mark thereon and form a gage 
Or Stop. 
In marking miters for stringers to be em 
ployed in building stairs, the gages will be set 
on the arms a? a at the desired division on the 
scale, the gage on the arm a being shown as 
set at twelve inches and the gage on the arm a 
being set at eight inches, the Zero being the 
apex of the arms. With the gages set as shown, 
- 
90 
95 
OC 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
373,929 
55 
65 
75 
posite rafters correspond and come together 
at exactly the center of the roof, and conse 
quently, the ridge of the roof is kept substan 
tially perfectly straight. 
By means of the arma' and shoulder a the 
square may be applied to the board to be 
measured with rapidity and accuracy, the 
said arm and shoulder forming a bearing to 
rest against the board, thus obviating all dan 
ger of slipping of the square, which might oc 
cur if the said arm and shoulder were not used; 
and, furthermore, the edge of the square meets 
the edge of the board at the point where the 
shoulder a meets the board, so that all calcu 
lations in adjusting the gage on the Square are 
dispensed with. 
It is evident that the shoulder a on the arm 
below the arm of the square may be dispensed 
with, and the arm itself form a bearing-surface 
to rest against the edge of the board; but the 
two arms are preferable, so that the Square 
can be used either side up. 
I claim 
1. A miter-gage for steel squares, consist 
ing of a body portion slotted to fit an arm of 
the square, and provided with an arm, ?t', hav 
ing a shoulder, (c, at right angles to the face 
of the said square, to operate substantially as 
described, 
2. A miter-gage for steel Squares, consist 
ing of a body portion slotted to fit an arm of 
the square, and provided with two arms, a, 
having shoulders a at right angles to the face 
of the square, substantially as described. 
3, The combination, with the arms of a steel 
square, of two miter-gages adjustably fitted 
thereon, and having shoulders a at right an 
gles to the face of the said arms, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
THURBER. J. GILLETTE, 
Witnesses: 
LEONARD W. FILSINGER, 
GEORGE HEIMLICH. 
the Workman applies the square to the string 
ers, the lower shoulder, ct, of each gage rest 
ing against the edge of the stringer, while the 
Square between the gages rests upon the face 
5 or side of the stringer, and when in this posi 
tion the workman marks out the miter. With 
one miter marked out, the square is run along 
the edge of the board until the lower shoulder, 
(, of the rearmost gage arrives in the position 
to just vacated by the foremost gage, a second 
miter being then marked out, 
This is contin 
tled until the desired number of miters has 
been marked. It will be seen that the possi. 
bility of error in marking is reduced to a mini 
15 mum, while at the same time the marking may 
be done very rapidly. 
When it is desired to mark timbers for raft 
ers for buildings having a pitched roof and 
insure true central position for the ridge or 
20 comb of the roof, the gages will be set on the 
Square, their position being adjusted accord. 
ing to the width of the building and the pitch 
desired for the roof. Suppose a building is 
to be twenty-four feet wide and the pitch of 
To 
do this the gage on the long arm a will be set 
at twelve inches, as shown, while the gage on 
the arm a will be set at eight inches. With 
the gages in position, the square is first applied 
3O to the timber or board to form the rafters, as 
in the marking of miters, above described, and 
the bevel for the foot of the afters is formed 
by marking on the board from the apex to the 
shoulder a of the gage on the long arma, the 
35 board being also marked at the other gage to 
form the starting-point from which 
to meaS 
ureagaln. 
The proper length of rafters for the roof is 
obtained by applying the square to the timber 
4o or board twelve times, measuring each time 
from gage to gage, and on the last movement 
the bevel or inclination for the upper end of 
the rafter is obtained by marking on the board 
from the gage on the arm a to the apex of the 
In this Way it will thus be seen that 
the rafters are all of the same bevel and length, 
so that the bevel sides of co-operating or op 
25 the roof is to be eight inches to the foot. 
45 Square. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374029.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
A. G., WOOD & C. S. BROWN. 
MANUFACTURE OF BOOTS AND SHOES, 
No. 374,029, 
Patented Nov. 29, 1887. 
A/G.2 
928)it-vesses 
AXSYL 
S.S syrus. 
S. 
841-ve4-to-S 
Alrvdrew G. Wood- & 
C/tar(es S. 75rowru 
sythev doverazz/24/ 
 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithograplier, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
A. G. WOOD & C. S. BROWN. 
MANUFACTURE OF BOOTS AND SHOEs, 
No. 374,029, 
Patented Nov. 29, 1887. 
 
//G, 5. 
e 
982.vessee 
E.t M S. los W t ou). 
owicQS cuta.g. 
G 3-vvue411oz 
Varudrew. 
.74/ood & 
C/arzes A. Zizonvrv 
&y their chovneyazzzzzzzef 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW G. WOOD, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, AND CHARLESS. 
BROWN, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY. 
MANUFACTURE OF BOOTS AND SHOES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Paterat No. 374,029, dated November 29, 1887. 
Application filed May 28, 187. Serial No. 239,609. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it nazy concern: 
Beit known that we, ANDREW G. WooD, 
of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, and CHARLEs 
S. BROWN, of Camden, Camden county, New 
Jersey, and both citizens of the United States, 
have invented certain Inprovements in the 
Manufacture of Boots or Shoes, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of our invention is to make a 
boot or shoe which is sewed right side out 
with a flexible sole free from tacks or pegs un 
der the wearer's foot. 
Boots and shoes have heretofore been sewed 
right side out by various methods; but most 
of them are objectionable on the ground that 
they produce a more or less stiff sole, which 
is undesirable in some classes of boots and 
shoes, more particularly for the use of ladies 
and children. 
In Blake's patent of May 16, 1865, No. 47,696, 
is described a method of making a shoe sewed 
right side out by using a temporary insole to 
hold the edges of the upper until the sole is 
applied thereto; but the securing-tacks are 
left in the vamp or upper (unless torn out by 
accident) when the insole is removed, and are 
then clinched or embedded into the inner sur 
face of the shoe-sole, and so are left in a posi 
tion to be under the wearer's foot. By our 
method of making theshoewe not only dispense 
With a permanent insole and make the sole as 
flexible as the sole of an ordinary turned 
shoe, but we also free the sole from tacks or 
pegs under the wearer's foot. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view illustrating one of the first 
stepsin carrying out our new method in making 
boots or shoes. Figs. 2 and 3 are sectional 
views illustrating the same step in the manu 
facture carried out in two ways. Fig. 4 is a 
perspective view illustrating a succeeding step 
in the carrying out of our invention. Figs. 5 
and 6 are perspective viewsillustrating in two 
different forms another succeeding step in our 
method. Fig. 7 is a sectional plan view show 
ing the inside of one of our shoes at one stage 
of manufacture; and Figs. 8 and 9 are vertical 
sectional views of the boot or shoe, illustrat 
ing one of the final steps in our method. 
of a temporary insole, which serves the two 
fold purpose of temporarily holding the bot 
tom edges of the upper in position while the 
sole is being secured thereto and also of after 
ward extracting the tacks which have been 
used to secure the edges of the upper to the 
said temporary insole, and which tacks we 
make headless. By this means we produce an 
unturned sewed boot or shoe having no per 
manent insole and with a flexible sole free 
from tacks under the wearer's foot. 
As illustrated in Fig. 1, we secure the bot 
tom edges, a a, of the upper A to the tem 
porary insole B by means of headless tacksb. 
These tacks may be simple headless tacks in 
the first place, as illustrated in Figs. 1 and 3, 
or, if they are headed tacks, when driven in 
the heads should be clipped off after the tacks 
have been driven, so that they then become 
headless tacks. The points of the tacks, being 
driven onto the metal last on which the upper 
is held, clinch themselves on the inside of the 
temporary insole B, as illustrated in Figs. 2 
and 3. 
The temporary insole B may extend through 
out the length of the shoe from toe to the heel, 
as illustrated in Fig. 2, or it may be used in 
connection with a permanent shank-piece, D, 
as illustrated in Fig. 3, in which case the tem 
porary insole B extends from the toe only to 
about the end of the shank-piece D, and 
slightly overlapping it. The edges a of the 
upper having been thus secured in position by 
means of this temporary insole and headless 
tacks, we place thereon the sole E, as illus 
trated in Fig. 4, and secure the sole to the up 
per temporarily and prior to sewing by suit 
able means, such as cement, or by means of 
nails or tacks. We prefer the latter method, 
driving the securing-nails in at suitable inter 
vals, as seen in Fig. 4, and as may be found 
necessary around the edge of the sole, prefer 
ably just within the line of the channel f. 
Where the shank-piece D is used, these secur 
ing-nails e are needed only around the sole 
part, the heel part of the sole being secured to 
the edges of the upper and to the shank-piece 
by permanent nails or tacks e. The shoe is 
then ready to be put on the sewing-machine 
to sew the sole to the upper. Where the 
In carrying out our invention we make use shank-piece D is used and the heel part of the 
sole is secured by tacks e, the sewing is ter 
75 
85 
90 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
 
374,029 
IO 
15 
25 
lminated at the ends of the channels, as illus 
trated in Fig. 5. Where no shank-piece is 
used, but the temporary insole B extends from 
the toe to the heel of the shoe, we prefer, in 
Some classes of shoes, to sew all around, as 
illustrated in Fig. 6. 
AS illustrated in Fig. 7, the temporary in 
Sole B is somewhat less in width and length 
than the inside floor of the shoe, so that the 
line of stitching will be just outside of the 
margin of the temporary insole. 
In other 
Words, the temporary insole should not be 
Sewed to the sole or upper. Where the shank 
piece is used the sewing may be through the 
Shank-piece, and preferably is made so. The 
Sole having been thus secured to the upper, 
With or without the addition of nails or tacks 
e', the temporary insole B is now pulled out 
of the shoe, and at the same time and by that 
means the tacks b, by which the edges of the 
| 
upper were originally secured to the tempo 
rary insole, and thereby held in place, are all 
withdrawn from the inside of the shoe, as 
illustrated in Figs. S and 9, since those tacks 
are headless tacks and have been clinched on 
the inside of that temporary insole. (See also 
Fig. 3.) 
In some cases, if preferred, and particularly 
where cement is used instead of the nails e to 
temporarily secure the sole to the upper, the 
temporary insole B, with its attached headless 
securing-tacks, may be withdrawn from the 
inside of the shoe before the latter is trans 
ferred to the sewing-machine. The shoe thus 
made in accordance with our invention may 
then be finished in any ordinary way by the 
application of a heel and the insertion of a 
suitable thin lining for the floor of the shoe. 
Where the shank-piece D is used, the floor 
of the shoe may be evened by the insertion of 
a thin half-insole in front of said shank-piece 
before the lining is put in. 
It will be evident that in a shoe constructed 
in accordance with our invention, as above 
described, not only is a permanent insole dis-45 
pensed with, but the shoe will also have a 
flexible sole free from tacks under the wearer's 
foot. 
The sole, if desired, may be made thicker 
than the insoled shoe without seriously de 
tracting from its flexibility and yet increasing 
its wearing qualities. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The mode herein described of making 
boots or shoes, said mode consisting in first 
securing the edges of the upper to a temporary 
insole with headless tacks, clinching those 
tacks to the insole, then securing the sole to the 
upper, and finally drawing all the said headless 
tacks by withdrawing the temporary insole 
from the inside of the boot or shoe, all sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The mode herein described of making 
boots or shoes, said mode consisting in first 
securing the edges of the upper to a temporary 
insole and a shank-piece by headless tacks, 
clinching the tacks to the insole, afterward se 
curing the sole to the upper and shank-piece, 
and finally removing the said tacks by with 
drawing the temporary insole from the inside 
of the boot or shoe, all substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
ANDREW G. WOOD. 
CHARLES: S. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. D. CoNNER, 
HARRY SMITH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374129.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
C. B. NOBLE, 
AR OG 
GET 
Patented Nov. 29, 1887, 
? ????OEZ 
%ZAZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZ$ZZZZZZZZZ 
?????????????????????????!!! 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
N, PETERS, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 374,129, 
C. B. NOBLE 
AR OG LIGHT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Nov. 29, 1887. 
 
 
 
 
 
W 
perERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washingto: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLARENCE B. NOBLE, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
A RC || GHT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 374,129, dated November 29, 1887. 
Application filed July 12, 1887. Serial No. 244,049. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all ?????, it may concer?: 
Beit known that I, CLARENCE B. NOBLE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Electric-Arc Lamps, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sae. 
The invention consists in providing im 
proved means for automatically throwing the 
current from one set of carbons to another 
When the former has been nearly or quite con 
sumed. 
It also consists in furnishing an improved 
cut-out, and covers other details, which will be 
fully described in the specification, and more 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate my invention, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the mechanism of my improved lamp, 
two sides of the casing being removed. Figs. 
2 and 3 are respectively side and front eleva 
tions of the mechanism. Fig. 4 is a horizon 
tal section, and Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8 show de 
tails. 
In this application two different forms of 
clutch are shown and described. Figs. 1, 5, 
and 6 show one of them, and Figs. 2, 3, and 4 
the other. 
the rod by substantially, the same mechanism the action of the lamp 
in both instances, and the present invention 
has reference more particularly to this mech 
anism. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, Z is the 
frame of my lanp, and a and a' are two set 
of carbons forming part thereof. 
A and B represent the usual fine and coarse 
wire magnets, which act differentially on a 
common core, c'. Pivoted to the core and to 
a standard, G, is a bar, L, to which, between 
its pivots, is attached a horizontal bar, K, ex 
tending at right angles beneath the said bar 
L. The ends of the bar in the form of lamp 
shown in Fig. 1 are located beneath ring 
clutches d d on the carbon rods T T. The 
clutches are supported on the ends of hooked 
links PP, which are suspended from the ex 
5o tremities of U-shaped formations on the ends 
of a lever, h, which latter is pivoted to an ex 
tension, E, of the standard G. The lever his 
normally tilted, so that one end-say that 
which supports the clutch d-islower than the 
other, being under tension from a spring, gy, 
as shown. The construction is such that one 
end of the bar K rests normally directly un 
der the clutch d, whilethe other endis consid 
erably below the clutch d. As a consequence, 
only the rod T will be acted on when the bar 
K is lifted to establish the arc. It will be un 
derstood that the hooked link P supports the 
ring-clutch in a horizontal position and that 
a tilting of the clutch to grasp the carbon rod 
takes place when the bar strikes against the 
clutch. 
In Figs. 2, 3, and 4 I show a different kind 
of a clutch, being identical with one for which 
I received a patent numbered 346,217 and 
dated July 27, 1886. In this construction the 
clutch d consists of a disk located within the 
hollow carbon rod and supported by two rods 
or wires, w and v. The rod win this instance 
is connected loosely to the disk and the rod 
v is bent at the lower end and hooks into a 
slot in the disk. The latter is permanently 
attached to a brass arm, S, which rests upon 
an insulating-block, R., on the bar K. The 
wire no passes loosely through the said arm S, 
which serves to prevent its moving to one 
The lifting of the rod or wire , due to 
in establishing the arc, 
tilts the disk and raises the positive carbon of 
the a group. The same action has no effect 
upon the other clutch, (which is constructed in 
the same manner,) because the disk is held up 
out of the way of the moving rod, as shown 
in Fig. 3. The lever his connected with the 
movable core b of magnet D. This magnet 
is wound with both fine and coarse wire, 
the fine wire being in the same shunt around 
the arc with magnet B and the coarse wire 
forming a part of the main circuit. The core 
b carries a projection, ly, which plays between 
two pairs of contacts, a? a' and 0 and (t. The 
contact ( is the terminal of the coarse. Wire 
coil on magnet D, and the others are pieces 
separately supported by an insulating-block, 
as shown. 
Referring to Fig. 3, the main circuit enters 
The clutches are acted upon to feed side. 
35 
45 
. 
55 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
374,129 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
the lamp at--, and after passing around mag 
net A branches at A, one branch, 1, going to 
contacta', and the other, 2, to the coarse coil 
of magnet D. Which course the current takes 
depends on the position of the strip b with 
reference to the contacts, as will be now ex 
plained. The normal position of the core b 
is down. The current in passing through the 
lamp energizes magnet A, lifts its core, and ac 
cordingly the bar K. Bar K. tilts the clutch 
d, Which grips the rod and causes it to rise 
and establish the arc. As the carbons are 
consumed and the resistance becomes greater, 
more of the current is shunted into magnet B, 
which operates on the core in the usual way 
and lowers the bar K, allowing the rod to feed. 
The course of the current is now as follows: 
from -- through magnet A, out at A and along 
branch 1 to contact a, through strip b''to con 
tact a', to upper carbon, to lower carbon, and 
to-. When the arc is established, the move. 
ment of bar Kis not long enough to impinge 
against the ring . d', and so rod T and the a: 
carbons only are separated. When, however, 
the carbons are nearly consumed, the resist 
ance increases abnormally and the current in 
the shunt becomes stronger until magnet D 
becomes sufficiently energized to lift its core 
and lift the strip b from contacts a? and a'. 
The full current then passes through the shunt 
Wire, drawing core b up until strip b makes 
contact with o and a. When this contact is 
made, the main current then passes over 
branch Wire 2, through coarse coil on magnet 
D, contact a to strip b", contact 0 to the car 
bons a, and thence to  . The heavy cur 
rent now passing through magnet D holds 
the Strip b against the contacts. The lift 
ing of the core b also causes the tilting of 
lever h to a horizontal position, so that ring 
d is brought within the movement of bar K, 
and as h becomes horizontal at the same time 
core b is elevated the ring d will be lowered 
upon the bar Kand be tilted to grip the rod, 
while the ring d will be lifted away from the 
bar K. The parts are adjusted so that the 
point at which this rod is elevated by bar K 
Will be the point at which the arc is estab 
lished. The ac' carbons will now be consumed 
and fed in the same manner that the a carbons 
were. The main core c is slotted and a block, 
J, is inserted into the slot and hung on a pin 
which passes laterally through the core and 
projects through the side thereof, where it 
has secured to it an arm, e. The block J is 
also slotted to allow the pin c' to slide within 
it, and it has an enlarged base, which extends 
Out beyond the core to rest on the head of the 
magnet B, as will be set forth. The bar L is 
pivoted to this block. The arme extends out 
and over the spring-armature F of a magnet, 
C, which is secured to any convenient part of 
the lamp-frame. The armature is insulated, 
as shown, and has a piece of soft iron, e, se 
cured to its lower face, and is further pro 
vided with contact m, which engages with 
contact n on the head of the magnet C, the 
Then the core continues to set- 75 
latter contact being one of the terminals of 
said magnet. The terminals are in a branch 
circuit around the lamp from -- to -, as 7O 
shown in Figs. 2 and 3. When the Second Set 
of carbons, ac', are burned out, the resistance 
becomes excessive and the magnet B dra WS 
the core down until the block J rests On top 
of the spool. 
tle and the pin c' to move in the slot of Jun 
til arme forces the spring F down so that con 
tact is made between n and 22. The lamp is 
thus cut out or short-circuited, and so long as 
the current passes through magnet C the arma. 8o 
ture F will be held down. The magnet D 
does not act to tilt the lever h until the resist 
ance of the a carbons becomes excessive, OW 
ing to the complete or nearly complete ex 
haustion of the said carbons, or of one of them. 85 
Under other conditions the spring Y coun 
terbalances the pull of the said magnet. The 
core c' may be supported on a spring, which 
can be placed in the hollow core of the mag 
net B, so that when the carbons are normally 90 
feeding the weight of the said core will not 
cause the arm e to bear down upon the arma 
ture F, to cut out the lamp-that is, the Weight 
of the core c is counterbalanced by a Suitably 
placed spring. During the consumption of 95 
the first set of carbons the carbons of the Sec 
ond set are in contact, the upper carbon being 
supported by the lower, and thus the arc es 
tablishing and feeding magnets are relieved 
of its weight. Similarly while the Second set 
is being consumed the unused stub of the up 
per carbon of the a set is resting on the lower 
carbon. In each instance the clutch of the 
set not in use is raised out of the path of the 
bar K. It is evident that the contacts a? and 
a" may be dispensed with and that the branch 
1. may run directly from A to the carbon rod 
T. It is true that in this case there would be 
a circuit through the first set of carbons, or 
what remained of them, after the second set 
began to burn; but the resistance of such cir 
cuit would be so great as practically to cut 
out the first Set. 
OC 
IOS 
What I claim is 
1. The herein-described mechanism for au 
tomatically switching the current from one set 
of carbons to the other, consisting of the mag 
net D, carrying a coil of fine wire which is 
located in a shunt around the arc, and also a 
coil of coarse wire which is adapted to form a 
part of the main circuit, the core of Said mag 
net being movable, connected with the tilting 
lever h, and carrying contact-piece b, in com 
bination with two pairs of contacts so arranged 
that when the piece b' bridges one pair the 
main current shunts the magnet D and when 
it bridges the other pair the main current 
passes through the said magnet, as set forth. 
2. In an electric lamp in which two sets of 
carbons are operated successively, the combi 
nation, with a tilting lever carrying at each 
end a clutch for operating to feed each set of 
carbons, of an arm, K, magnet D and its core, 
and Spring Y', for making operative succes 
O 
II 5 
I25 
374,129 
3 
sively the clutches when they are thrust within the movement of said arm, the said contacts 
its reach by the tilting lever, the motions of completing a circuit to cut out the lamp, sub 
the lever being controlled by the partial or stantially as described. 
entire consumption of a set of carbons, as 
In witness whereof I have hereunto affixed I5 - 
-> 
5 specified. 
my seal and signed my name in the presence 
??????? 
3. In an electric lamp, a slotted core for the of two subscribing witnesses. 
main and shunt magnets, a slotted block slid- 
ing within the slot in the core, a pin passing 
through the core and the slot in said block, 
Io an arm connected with said pin, and a pair of 
contacts adapted to be brought together by 
CLARENCE B. NOBLE. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
JANE W. HUTCHINSON, 
EUGENER. NOBLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374229.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 374,229, 
  
  
 
E. F. W. ZARBOCK. 
BOT, 
Patented Dec. 6, 1887. 
74. 4. 23 s 
see 3 SE S S 
S S s s 2 21 SS 
S 
St S 
W.A-ie==== a 
ex. 7.6%---4--- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNST FRIDRICH. W. ZARBOCK, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
BOLT. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Pateiai. No. 374,229, dated December 6, 1887. 
Application filed Stenbcr 12, 1857. Serial No. 249,4C6. 
(No model.) 
O 
- 
cation. 
To all tufton it nay concern: 
Beit known that I, ERNST FRIDRICH W. 
ZARBOCR, of Cleveland, in the county of Cuy 
ahoga and State of Ohio, have invented eer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Door 
Bolts; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it pertains to make and 
use it, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form part of this specifi 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
door-bolts; and it consists in the combination 
of a Suitable inclosing-frame, an endwise-mov 
ing bolt which is placed therein and pro 
vided with a slot at its rear end for the key to 
pass through, and grooves and flanges to en 
gage with the locking-plate, which is provided 
at one end with a key for moving the bolt and 
at the other with a flange for locking the bolt 
when moved either in or out its full distance, 
as Will be more fully described hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
locking-bolt in which the bolt is both moved 
end Wise and locked in position by the same 
piece. 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section of 
a door-bolt embodying my invention. Fig. 2 
is a perspective of the bolt by itself. Fig. 3 
is a perspective of the locking-plate. Fig. 4 
is a plan view of the locking-plate and the 
bolt, the parts being shown in that relation to 
each other when the bolt is forced outward. 
Fig. 5 is a similar view showing the parts in 
that relation when the bolt is moved inward. 
A represents the inclosing case or shell, 
which is preferably made cylindrical in shape, 
SO aS to be inserted in a hole which is bored 
with an auger. I do not limit myself to this 
precise shape, for it may be varied at will. 
This shell or case is made in two parts, so that 
the bolt and locking-plate can be inserted in 
position, and then the two parts are fastened 
together by means of the pillar or post C, 
which extends horizontally through the case 
and serves both to secure them rigidly to 
gether and as a stop to prevent the bolt from 
being withdrawn from the case in any manner 
until the two parts of the shell have been sep 
arated for that purpose. 
35 
45 
55 
The bolt C is preferably shaped as shown, 
and is provided with theslot D, through which 
the pillar or post passes. Through the inner 
end of the bolt is made a second slot or open 
ing, E, through which the operating - key 
passes, the length of the slot being regulated 
by the distance that it is intended that the bolt 
shall move. The outer end of the bolt is made 
circular in cross-section and is provided with 
the shoulders F, which catch against the flange 
X, formed inside of the outer end of the shell 
or frameA, and which shoulders assist in pre 
venting the bolt from being pulled out of its 
casing in any manner. 
Extending outward from the key-slot E in 
one side of the bolt is the groove G in which 
the operating-pin H on one end of the lock 
ing-plate I catches for the purpose of moving 
the bolt endwise when the locking-plate I is 
turned by the key. This locking-plate has a 
circular flange, I, formed on its opposite side 
from the pin-H, and this flange serves as the 
fulcrum in which the plate turns. The lock 
ing-plate is kept from having any other than 
a turning motion by this flange, and is pre 
vented from becoming displaced by the press 
ure of the bolt against it. The frame or cas 
ing A is thickened at that point where it forms 
a rest or support for the locking-plate, and 
hence the plate can, have no other than a turn 
ing movement, because it is held in position 
upon one side by the frame and upon the other 
Side by the bolt. Upon the opposite side of 
the key-slot E from the groove H the bolt is 
cut away, as shown at Li, and at each end of 
the slot E is formed flanges NO, behind which 
the flange J upon the locking-plate I is made 
to catch. The flange J is at the opposite end 
of the locking-plate I from the pin H, and 9c 
this flange serves to lock the bolt in place after 
it has been moved its full distance either in 
or out, and thus prevents the bolt from being 
forced end wise in either direction. 
When a turning movement is first applied 
to the locking-plate. I by the key, when the 
bolt is moved inward to its full extent the pin 
H on the plate Imoves into the groove G, and 
as the plate continues to be forced around the 
bolt is forced outward until the pin passes out 
of the groove into the slot E. At the same 
time that the pin is being moved forward to: 
85 
95 
75 
ICO 
374,229 
IC 
ward the outer end of the shell or frame A. the 
flange J upon the other end of the locking 
plate I is being forced backward from the 
front of the flange O, where it was keeping the 
bolt from being drawn outward, to back of the 
flange N, where it prevents the bolt from be 
ing forced inward until the locking-plate is 
turned by the key. As this flange passes 
backward from in front of the flange O to the 
rear of the flange N when the bolt is forced 
backward, it passes through the groove Q, 
made in the side of the bolt, as shown. 
By having the flange upon one end of the 
locking-plate and the pin upon the other it 
will be seen that it is only necessary to turn 
the plate so as to cause the pin to move the 
bolt endwise, and then the flange upon the 
other end of the locking-plate serves to lock 
the boltin position so that it cannot be affected 
by any force applied to the lock outside of the 
key. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination of the inclosing shell or 
frame, the locking-bolt cut away at or near its 
rear end and provided with flanges at oppo 
site ends of the key-slot, and a groove extend 
ing from one side of the key-slot, with the 
locking-plate provided with a pin or projec 
tion at one end and a locking-flange at the 
other, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the inclosing shell or 
frame, the endwise-moving bolt provided with 
a flange at each end of the key-slot, and the 
locking-plate provided with a flange for catch 
ing behind one of the flanges and locking the 
bolt in position, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
35 
ERNST FRIDRICI W, WARBOCK, 
Witnesses: 
THEODORE. R. HoFFMAN, 
FRANK. R. WILLIAMS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374329.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 374,329. 
 
S 
H. E. WAITE. 
GALWANIC BATTERY. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
277. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1887. 
i.4 
so 
fe 
- N 
 
 
 
 
r 
 
 
 
 
 
is is st 
Sa2 
2% 
 
2 
t 
ZF 
E-- / 
:aid 
R 
see 
TTE TITTTTTTT 
- - - 
w 
la 
- 
- 
| 
G. 
G). 
R- -...- 
------ 
Strite 
s es 
f 
: 
p 
|T 
I-7 
e. 
TTT 
-- 
! 
A 
sty 
LeHe 
I 
CY 
7. 
W 
- 
--- 
Zaz va ZZZZ7Z. 
(No Model.) 
H. E. WAITE. 
GALWANIC BATTERY, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 374,329, 
Patented Dec. 6, 1887. 
 
ZzZvazzzzzz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY E. WAITE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
GALVANIC BATTERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 374,329, dated December 6, 1887. 
Application filed May 5, 1856. Serial No. 201,223, (No mode.) 
O 
20 
25 
To a 27, whon, it navy conce77. 
Supported slightly above the bottom of the 
Be it known that I, HENRY E. WAITE, a citi 
case is the platform or shelf G, having a rod 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of the 
or rods, H, connected there with and extending 55 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
up through the platform D. These rods H 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Gal 
are provided with screw-threaded ends h, en 
vanic Batteries, of which the following is a 
tering the shelf G or a projection connected 
Specification. 
therewith, and there may be one rod attached 
My invention relates to galvanic batteries 
to the middle, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 6o 
for medical purposes, and has for its object to 
5, or one at each end. Upon this shelf or 
improve the construction and arrangement of 
platform G rests the battery-box I, containing 
Such batteries, whereby they may be more con 
the desired number of cells; and it will be 
veniently handled in use or in carrying from 
seen that the box and contained cells can read 
place to place. 
ily be removed or drawn out for filling or ex- 65 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
amining them. A hydrostat or cover, J, for 
5 improved construction and arrangements of 
the cells is provided with a proper packing, 
parts, substantially as hereinafter pointed out. i, of rubber or other suitable material, to seal 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the jars or cells when desired, and the rear 
forming part of this specification, Figure 1 is 
and front of the case are provided with grooves 7o 
a perspective of the battery closed. Fig. 2 is 
or recesses KK, into which the side edges of . 
a side view of the battery opened. Fig. 3 is 
the hydrostat fit when in position above the 
a transverse section on line 12, Fig. 2. Fig. 
cells, and when the battery is in operation the 
4.js a perspective of the battery-cell, tray re 
hydrostat is removed from its position above 
moved. Fig. 5 shows the battery-tray plat 
the cells and placed in the recess below the 
form. Figs. 6 and 7 are details. 
platform G for convenience of storage. When 
The box or case A may be of any suitable 
the battery is to be transported, the hydrostat 
shape or size to meet the requirements of any 
plate J is placed over the cells with its rubber 
particular battery, and it may be of any suit 
packing next to the jars and its edges fitting 
able material, though I. prefer to make it of 
into the recesses K in the sides of the box, and 
Wood. The top B is preferably hinged to the 
the handles or rods H are screwed down until 
rear side and suitably secured to the other 
the platform G is lifted up and tightly presses 
sides and provided with a handle for conven 
the cells against the under side of the hydro 
ience in carrying the battery. 
stat, and they are thereby effectually sealed 
The front C of the box or cabinet is made to 
and the battery is ready for handling. When 
open either from the center, as indicated in 
the battery is to be used, the rods are un 
Fig. 1, or the side is hinged to one end, as 
screwed, so as to allow the platform G to re 
shown in Fig. 2. 
sume its normal position, when the hydrostat 
Upon a suitable platform or partition, D, 
J is removed from above the cells and placed 
Supported near the upper part of the box or 
in the recess under the platform G. The bat- 9o 
case, are arranged the plates or electrodes for 
tery may then be removed for filling or exam 
the battery, each being connected to the under 
ination, if desired. If it is in proper condi 
side of the platform D and held in position by 
tion, the rod or rods H are raised until the 
the screw-pins d', the upper ends of which 
electrodes are properly immersed in the liquid 
form the terminals for conveniently connect 
in the cells, when the rods H are turned so 
ing up the various battery-cells for use. Also 
that the pins h rest crosswise on the plates P 
arranged upon said platform Dare the desired 
secured to the side of the platform D, and the 
switches or commutators E and the binding 
battery is thus held in operative condition. 
screws -- and -, one of which is connected to 
Any form of switches and electrodes may 
the last plate of the extreme battery-cell and 
be used for applying the electricity, and in 
the other is connected to the cord and plug F, 
Fig. 7 I have shown one convenient way for 
so that any desired number of battery-cells 
arranging the ordinary hand or sponge elec 
may be easily included in the circuit between 
trode. In making said electrode a screw, a, 
the binding-posts, 
is soldered to a plate, b, of copper or other 
75 
95 
IOC 
O 
45 
374,329 
suitable metal, and the plate is then spun or 
otherwise formed into the desired shape, pref 
erably similar to that shown in Fig. 7, and the 
sponge or other covering material can be read 
5 ily Secured by tying or otherwise, and the 
Screw not only holds the electrode in its han 
dle, but furnishes a good conducting medium. 
From this it will be seen that my improved 
battery is very convenient and compact, and 
Io well adapted for the purpose for which it was 
intended, while the construction is simple, 
cheap, and durable. 
What I claim is 
1. In a battery, the combination, with the 
I5 case, of a platform supporting the removable 
battery-tray containing the cells and handles 
attached to the platform for raising it, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a battery, the combination, with the 
2O case, of a platform elevated above the bottom 
of the case, a battery-tray supported upon the 
platform, a removable hydrostat arranged 
above the tray, and a recess under the plat 
25 
form to receive the hydrostat, substantially as 
described. 
3. The combination, with a case provided 
with recesses, of the platform, the tray car 
ried thereby and containing the cells, the hy 
drostat adapted to enter the recesses, and 
means for elevating the cells against the hy- 3O 
drostat, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with the battery-plates, 
of a platform carrying the battery-tray, a re 
movablehydrostat, and lifting-handlesattached 
to the tray and adjustably connected there- 35 
with, whereby the tray may be lifted into con 
tact with the hydrostat or with the plates and 
supported in either position, substantially as 
described. 
-- 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 40 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
HENRY. E. WAITE. 
Witnesses: 
WM. A. HARRIES, 
F. L. FREEMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374429.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 374,429. 
W. SCOTT. 
COLLAR BUTTON, 
Patented Deo. 6, 1887. 
 
I ES H 
 
WITNESSES: 
Mexv.2% 
INVENTOR: 
(0aezel yea-zt 
BY CXao M3. u(co-pur 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER SCOTT, OF ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA. 
t 
COLLAR BUTTON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 374,429, dated December 6, 1887. 
Application filed September 30, 1887. Serial No. 251,096, (No model.) 
IO 
To add twf.on, it naily concern. : 
Beit known that I, WALTER SCOTT, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at St. Paul, 
in the county of Ramsey and State of Minne 
Sota, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Collar-Buttons, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved collar 
button, and is illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 shows a front view of a collar at 
tached to a shirt-neckband by the improved 
button. Fig. 2 is a view of the inner sidebut 
ton, drawn somewhat larger than the usual 
size in order to better illustrate it. Fig. 3 is 
a view of the outer side button. Figs. 4 and 
5 are section views of the complete button, 
and show the relative position of the two but 
tons and link when in use. Figs. 6 and 7 are 
Section views, separately, of the inner and 
Outer buttons. Fig. 8 is a view of the com 
plete button in position for the insertion of 
the small or outer side button through the but 
ton-hole. Fig. 9 is a view of the complete but 
ton, in which the outer side button is shown 
in Section and in the same relative position to 
the inner side button seen in Fig. 8. Fig. 10 
is a view, separate, of the link. Fig. 11 is a 
view of the complete button, showing a cer 
tain position of the two buttons. Fig. 12 is a 
view of the complete button applied to a col 
lar and neckband. 
The inner side button, a, is preferably larger 
than the outer side button, b, though this is 
not essential. Each button has a central hole, 
c, and is provided with a bar, dd, which ex 
tends diametrically across the central hole. 
The cross-bar d of the inner side button, a, is 
straight and flush with its surface, and the 
cross-bar d of the outer button is curved or 
arched, whereby the link e, which connects 
the two cross-bars, may rest flat against the 
surface of the outer button when the latter is 
tilted to a position at right angles with the 
45 inner side button, as shown in Figs. 8 and 9. 
En this position the outer button can readily 
35 
25 
30 
- 
Witnesses: 
WM. E. LOWE, 
J. P. ALLEN. 
55 
65 
pass through the button-hole of the collar and 
neckband without wear or injury to them. 
When applying the button to a collar, the 
outer or small button, b, should be passed 
through the button-holes from the side next 
to the neck outward, thus allowing the larger 
button, a, to remain next to the neck of the 
Weae. 
The linke is larger or wider at one end than 
at the other and tapers. This shape gives 
the link greater range of movement on the 
larger button, and also allows it to lie flat on 
the surface of the smaller button. 
The ends of the link e may enter or pass 
through the central hole, c, of the buttons, as 
shown in Fig. 11, thereby allowing the flat sur 
face of the two buttons to more closely ap 
proach each other. One button alone or both 
may have a central hole, c, so as to allow the 
end of the link to enter the hole. 
The particular manner of shaping or con 
structing the buttons need not be here de 
scribed, as any one familiar with the art of 
manufacturing similar articles will readily 
understand this, and my invention will not 
be affected by such matters. 
. 
A collar-button having the several features 
here described is found much superior to or 
dinary stiff button-studs or to separable but 
tons. 
Having described my invention, I claim and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
- States 
1. The collar - fastening herein described, 
comprising two buttons, each having a cross 
bar and a link engaged with each cross-bar. 
2. The collar-fastening herein described, 
comprising two buttons, one or both having a 
central hole, c, and cross-bar, and a link con 
necting the buttons. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
WALTER SCOTT. 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374529.txt	(No Model.) 
G. J. FER GUS ON, 
RAIL JOINT, 
3. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 374,529. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1887. 
 
alie A2s. 
NYies 
2 ei as 
s 
WITNESSES: 
Cieco f &zeta-g 
INVENTOR: 
3... f. 2:9-era 
ATTORNEYS, 
No. 374,529. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1887. 
RAIL, JOINT, 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
1st 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
No. 374,529. 
G. J. FERGUSON. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
RAIL JOINT, 
Patented Deo. 6, 1887. 
 
N 
WITNESSES 
2%. 
INVENTOR: 
BY %m L6 
ATTORNEYS, 
ERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE JONES FERGUSON, OF GREEN VILLE, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
BRAUTHOFFER AND EDWIN F. STAHL, BOTH OF 
EIGHTH TO SAMUEL 
SAME PLACE. 
RAIL.-JOINT, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 374,529, dated December 6, 1887, 
Application filed February 16, 1887. Serial No. 227,830. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE JONES FERGU 
SON, of Greenville, in the county of Hunt and 
State of Texas, have invented a new and use 
5 ful Improvement in Rail - Joints; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure I is a perspective view of the outside 
of rail-joint. Fig. 2 is a similar view of the in 
side of same. Fig. 3 is a bottom view of the 
joint, showing how sand and grit can escape; 
also showing how the retaining-strips are ar 
ranged. Fig. 4 is a cross-section through one 
of the clamps. Fig. 5 is a cross-section through 
one of the bolts and nuts. Fig. 6 shows how 
the camp is applied. Fig. 7 is a detail view 
of the double clamp. Fig. 8 is a detail view 
of bolt, nut, and washer. Fig. 9 is a view 
showing close rail or guard-rail joint. Fig. 
10 shows the single clamp-joint. Fig.11 shows 
the angle-plate. Fig. 12 is a cross-section of 
single clamp and sectional angle-plates. Figs. 
13, 14, 15, and 16 are cross-section views of 
modifications; and Fig. 17 shows a fractured 
rail with angle-plates and clamps applied. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
railroad-rail joint for permanent way-rails, 
modifications and variations in structure be 
ing provided to make the improvement applica 
ble to close joints at switches, frogs, and guard 
rails; and the invention seeks to provide a 
device by which the joints will be made equally 
strong with other parts of the rails; and it con 
sists in certain constructions and combinations 
of parts as will be described. 
The rail Amay be of ordinary construction, 
and may beformed, as usual, with a ball or tread 
4o 1, a web, 2, and a base, 3, the lower surfaces 
of the ball 1 being designated by the letters 
a, while the upper surfaces of the base 3 are 
lettered a. The angle-plates, as shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, 5, and some of the other figures, 
have their lower portions fitted to the base of 
the rail, the inner lower edges of such plates 
terminating near to the center of the base 3, 
and being separated from each other to per 
35 
25 
mit the egress of sand, grit, and the like. 
The tops b of the angle-plates in stich figures 5o 
bear snugly under the ball 1 and a', while the 
edges of the plates next the Web 2 arch out 
wardly between the ball 1 and base 3, for a 
double purpose. In the first place, the recess at 
4, so provided, permits the necessary expan- 55 
sion of the parts under variations in tempera 
ture. Such construction also enables me to 
secure the desired width between the points 
bb of the opposite plates, B, and thereby in 
creases their strength without adding to their 6o 
Weight. 
In their outer sides, close above the base 3, I 
form the plates B with longitudinal grooves b', 
which are tapered in vertical cross-section and 
convergeinwardly, as shown. The openings B 65 
for the bolt. D, formed through these angle 
plates, lead through the base- or inner end 
Walls of these grooves b, and the bolt-hole B', 
through the Web of the rail, is formed close 
above the base, as shown, and being placed 7o 
low, as shown, will firmly sustain strain by be. 
ing in the direct line thereof. 
The bolt-holes in the angle-plates may be 
slotted in the direction of length of said angle 
plates, and the bolt-holes in rails round or 75 
slotted to allow of the necessary expansion and 
contraction of the rails through change of tem 
perature. 
The clamps C are formed to fit under the 
rails, and are bent at c, forming the hook-like 
ends c, which fit in the grooves b' of the plates 
B, and said points of clamps C, fitting tightly 
in grooves in angle-plates, prevent then 
from spreading and becoming loose asportions 
of angle-plates lap over said points. 
The manner of applying the clamps to and 
removing them from the rails will be under 
stood from Fig. 6. Both angle-plates and 
clamps are reversible, which permits of their 
easy application, as no mistake is possible, as 9c 
they cannot be put on Wrong. When applied 
to the rail, the angle-plates being in position, 
the clamps are forced to the positions shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 4. 
Same tightening the clamps by interposing a 
I provide a means of retaining and at the 95 
w 
IO 
 
374,529 
s 
25 
35 
5 
strip of metal, F. This retaining-strip. F is 
made half-oval in cross-section and tapers from 
center to ends. This same object could be at 
tained by angle-plates being thicker in center 
than at the ends. The strips are placed 
against the angle-plates, and the clamps are 
driven from each end onto the strips until 
tight, when the ends of the strips are bent out 
wardly from the angle-plates and prevent the 
O clamps from moving out of place. The bolt 
head D' and nut E will also act as a means of 
preventing the clamps from moving as the 
bolts will be arranged as close to the clamps 
as possible, in order to permit the necessary 
turning of the nut. 
The inner ends of the nut and of the bolt 
head are formed to fit in groove l', and are 
made slightly larger than said groove, so as 
to wedge and bind when forced thereinto. As 
the nut is turned on the bolt, it forces into the 
groove b', which groove forms a tapering con 
cave bearing for the nut and compresses its 
inner end or point, causing it to tightly em 
brace the bolt in addition to binding in its con 
cave bearingb', and also causing the bolt-head 
D' to bind in its groove or concave bearing. 
The bolt-head can also be made oval to pre 
vent its turning in concave bearing. Such 
construction securely locks the nut and pre 
vents the bolt from turning, and also prevents 
the threads from being worn by coming in con 
tact with a portion of angle-plates through 
which they pass, as the tapering point of nut 
and head of bolt will keep the bolt in center | 
of hole and away from side of hole, and also 
prevents the threads from being stripped off, 
as by contracting the nut on the bolt it makes 
a tight fit on an otherwise loose-fitting bolt. 
The contraction of the nut, it will be seen, is 
gradual in proportion to the strain applied, 
making it a safeguard against stripping of 
threads. In the construction shown in Fig. 
9 the concave tapering bearing for the nut is 
formed in a separate washer-plate, K, as shown 
in Fig. 8, instead of in angle-plates, as shown 
in Fig. 5. 
The joint is by the described construction 
made doubly secure, it being held by both the 
clamps and the bolts. It also allows the free 
expansion and contraction in hot and cold 
weather, and by having free expansion in hot 
and cold weather, and by having free egress for 
anything dropping between the rails, the joint 
will be perfectly clean, so that when the ex 
pansion occurs there is nothing to prevent the 
rail ends coming close together. Such sand 
and grit as are discharged by the locomotives 
onto the rails to prevent them from slipping, 
obviously could fill up the joints if exit there 
for were not provided, and also have a tend 
ency to grind the base of rail and angle-bars, 
and thereby cause joint to become worn and 
loose. 
My fastening can be applied without loos 
ening or taking up the rails, and can be ap 
plied to a broken rail without drilling holes, 
so that a set of fastenings or joints may be 
carried by a track watchman and quickly ap 
plied wherever a broken rail is found. 
The device, being short, can be placed be. 
tween ties and does not necessitate the lower 
ing or cutting down of the joint-ties, and it 
consequently can be conveniently used on 
broken joints, or when rails get accidentally 
broken. 
As will be understood from Fig. 4, the 
points or hook ends of the clamps fit tightly 
in the grooves of the angle-plates, and are pre 
vented from opening or spreading by portion 
b'l of angle-plates bearing directly on these 
points C, holding them rigidly in position, and 
thereby preventing the downward and upward 
strain of load from spreading them horizon 
tally, and clamps sustain at c the downward 
strain on the upper parts of such plates, while 
the lower portions of the angle-plates are held 
rigidly to position by portions c' of the clamp. 
This, together with the ball of rail resting on 
angle-plates at a' a' bl', prevents the ends of 
the rails from springing downward while the 
load is directly over the joint. 
The reverse 
or upward strain, it should be understood, 
takes place when the load is about one-third 
the length of the rail distant from the joint, 
and is sustained by the clamps and bolts hold 
ing the angle-plates rigidly, as shown in Fig. 
4 at c, and by holding the parts of angle-plates 
bbb' brigidly to each side of web of rail at 
a'a, and is assisted by wide cross-section of 
angle-plates from b to l', together with the 
points or hook portions of the clamp filling 
the concave surface of the angle-plates, and 
thereby making a solid body of metal in the 
direction of dotted lines a ac, Fig. 4, bracing 
against both downward and upward strain, 
and producing, as claimed, a short rigid joint 
as stiff and strong as a continuous rail would be. 
A short rigid joint has the advantage of 
easy curvature, as each portion of the rail 
has the same strength, and also makes the use 
of irregular joints practical, as it is not neces 
sary for joints to be opposite each other when 
using my improvement-in fact, it would be 
advisable to have then about opposite center 
of other rail, as it is impossible on curves to 
keep them exactly opposite without cutting 
rails or using a short rail. 
When rail joints are close to switch-frogs or 
guard-rails, I use a double clamp, as shown in 
Fig. 7, having end hooks and an intermediate 
double or T-shaped hook, and which clamps 
the angle-plates on both rails and keeps the 
rails the proper distance apart, as well as se 
cures the angle-plates. This is a valuable fea 
ture, as it is difficult to spike rails properly 
when close together; but when rails are so close 
to each other that their bases touch I use the 
fastener shown in Fig. 9, which holds the rails 
rigidly together by hooked ends h h' on clamp 
H, as well as in their relative positions, and 
effectually prevents the guard-rail from turn. 
ing away from the permanent or main rail, 
and thereby destroying its usefulness. 
This improvement is conveniently applied, 
-5 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IC 5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
374,529 
3 
as it is only necessary to cut notches in the 
base of the rails so bolt J can be applied 
through block I, notches between rails, and 
clamp H, when washers K and nut E are put 
on and Screwed up tight, when it cannot be 
displaced accidentally without breaking the 
bolt, and the only portion of bolt project 
ing is directly under clamp H, and therefore 
not exposed to accident. As the ties take the 
downward strain on a guard-rail, it is not nec 
essary to make clamp H very strong, the 
heaviest strain being on the side of guard-rail 
next permanent rail. The block I is so con 
structed that its ends i i fit snugly against ver 
tical sections or webs of the rail, and thereby 
push the bases of the rails tightly into the 
hooks h of the clamp H, while the bolt J, pass 
ing at right angles through the block I and 
clamp H, together with the large flat surface 
of the bottom of the rails, causes the weight of 
train moving on the permanent rail to assist 
in holding the guard-rail to its place. 
The clamp C can be applied hot and shrunk 
to a fit; but I prefer a driven application of 
them. 
To apply my invention the clamps may be 
put on the rail and moved against the joint 
ties. The angle-plates should then be put in 
place. Then start one clamp, if two are used. 
Theninsertends of both retaining-strips. Then 
start the other clamp and drive both clamps 
toward center of angle-plates until tight. Then 
apply the bolts. To keep the holes in angle 
plates and rail in line or register, a short piece 
of iron can be inserted therein, So its ends do 
not project beyond the angle-plates and ob 
struct the movement of the clamps. When 
the clamps are driven to place, this piece of 
iron can be driven out and the bolts applied. 
The nut E at one end is made angular, so it 
can be turned, its other or inner end being 
pointed or made cone shape. When used in 
connection with Washer K, or in a countersunk 
bearing formed in material on which the nuts 
are used, the point of the nut will be compressed 
by the washer or countersunk bearing, and the 
nut will remainlocked even if the boltshould, 
after being tightened, turn in the hole, or 
should the material on which the bolts are 
used shrink. 
In Figs. 10, 11, and 12 I show the construc. 
tion in which but a single clamp is used, and 
in which the angle-plates do not extend under 
the rail. In this construction the clamp is ar 
ranged opposite the joint of the rails, and 
bearing-plates L are arranged under the rails 
within the clamps and have at their outer ends 
upwardly-extended portions provided with 
notches l to receive the bent or hook portions 
of the clamp. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 13 the 
angle-plates terminate above the base of the 
rail and in common vertical planes with the 
outer edges thereof, the rail resting right in 
: the clamp and the retaining-strips bearing be 
tween the clamp and the rail and the angle 
plates, as shown, 
 
75 
85 
M 
In Fig. 14 the angle-plates are shown aster 
minating in line with the upper edges of the 
clamps, and the hook ends of Such clamps are 
shown broader than in the construction shown 
in Fig. 4. 
Fig. 15 shows the angle-plates as terminat 
ing at their lower ends in the horizontal 
plane of the under side of the rail. 
In Fig. 16 the angle-bars are shown as ex 
tended above the clamps and bearing under 
the ball of the rail, but are not lapped over 
the hooked ends of the clamp. 
I am aware of the prior invention of tapered 
or pointed nuts fitting in conical washers, said 
nuts having recesses or slots cut partly or 
wholly through nut to allow of their contrac 
tion on bolt; but I claim as an improvement 
thereon a solid tapering pointed nut made of 
soft tough metal, its point being slightly larger 
than base of conical hole in Washer, so that 
point of nut only is compressed, the larger 
portion of taper offering a solid bearing to 
sustain strain and wedging in conical bearing 
plate, and thereby precluding the possibility 
of wear or friction loosening it; and, further 
more, I avoid the liability of moisture being 
retained in slots or recesses, causing oxidation 
and consequent destruction of bolt and nut, 
and the nut would be rendered difficult of re 
moval without injuring or stripping the thread, 
it being a necessary feature in a practical lock 
nut to be capable of removal and reuse, and 
my improved nut can be produced cheaply on 
account of the omission of SlotS or recesses. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new is 
1. In a rail joint, the combination of the 
rails and angle-plates BB, having longitudi 
nal grooves tapering in vertical cross-sec 
tion, and having projecting portions bb, and 
ciamps C, having hooked ends c, fitting said 
grooves to prevent strain from spreading them 
horizontally, as and for the purpose described. 
2. In a rail joint, angle-plates BB, having 
in their outer sides a longitudinal groove, b', 
and in their inner sides a half-oval recess, 4, 
as shown, and having projections bl to in 
crease their width, and thereby strengthen and 
stiffen them without adding to their weight, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of a plate having a ta 
pering concave or countersunk bearing, a bolt, 
and the nut having its inner end pointed or 
formed tapering, its inner end being slightly 
larger than bearing, so it will be gradually 
compressed on bolt on its being tightened in 
proportion to strain applied, thereby avoiding 
the danger of stripping threads, and said nut 
being constructed solid and capable of removal 
and reuse, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the rails, the angle 
plates having tapering concave grooves, the 
bolt having its head formed to fit in one of 
said grooves, and the nut having its inner 
end pointed or formed tapering, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. The combination of the two rails and 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I25 
.4 
374,529 
8. The combination, in a rail joint having 20 
ner ends pointed or tapered, and the retain 
ing-strips, substantially as set forth. 
an open space for the egress of sand and grit, 
of the rails, the angle-plates B B, the tapered 
retaining-strips F, a clamp, C, bolts D, and 
nuts E, substantially as set forth. 
9. In a rail joint, the combination, with the 
angle-plates and the two clamps C C, of the 
retaining-strips F, made thickest at the center 
and tapering gradually toward their opposite 
ends, substantially as set forth. 
25 
GEORGE JONES FERGUSON. 
Witnesses: 
H. S. SHEPARD, 
WILLIAM WAN GLAHN. 
the angle-plates having grooves b', and the 
hooked ends c' of the clamps fitting in same, 
forming a rail joint, said angle - plates and 
clamps being reversible to permit of their easy 
application. 
6. The combination of the rails, the angle 
plates having longitudinal concave grooves b', 
and projecting portions bb, the clamps hav 
ing hooked ends fitting tightly in grooves b' 
and under parts bib', and the tapering retain 
ing-strips, said angle - plates and retaining: 
strips being thicker at center than at the ends, 
as and for the purpose described. 
7. The combination of the rails, the angle 
plates having tapering concave grooves, the 
clamps having their points fitted to said 
grooves, the bolts, the nuts having their in 
O 
I5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374629.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. REINHARDT. 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBERING MACHINE, 
No. 374,629, 
77.9. Z. Patented Dec. 13, 1887. 
2 % % 2 % % % 2. 2 % 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3 
S WSS: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
S 
 
au/ 
 
 
 
 
s 
s A. 
a 
Z7-2avez lifozr. 
'yoma \,. &what at 
-7ey. 
Zitese: 
c/C/ 
7 zae 
42-4-6-e-, 
... Perers, photo-Lithographer, Washington, B.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. REINHARDT, OF MEMPHIS, TENNESSEE, ASSIGNOR TO JOSEPH 
WETTER, OF SAME PLACE, 
CoNSECUTIVE-NUMBERING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 374,629, dated December l3, l887. 
Application filed August 14, 1886. Serial No. 210,872. (No model.) 
Io 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES H. REINHARDT, 
of Memphis, in the county of Shelby and State 
of Tennessee, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Consecutive-Numbering Ma 
chines, whereby the imprint of any series of 
consecutive numbers may be automatically re 
peated as often as required; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full and exact 
description thereof, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, making a part of 
this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
serial consecutive-numbering head with the 
numeral 9 in line for print: Fig. 2, a vertical 
section in line acac of Fig.1, looking toward 
the type-wheel; Fig. 3, a similar section in 
line y) of Fig. 1, looking from the opposite 
direction toward the type-wheel; Fig. 4, a 
perspective view of the head with its wheels 
in Same position as in Fig. 1 and with a por 
tion of its casing and unit-wheel broken away; 
Fig. 5, a similar view illustrating the wheels 
turned to bring the number 10 in line for print; 
Fig. 6, a plan view of the two type-wheels de 
tached and in position to print the number 
50, and Fig. 7 an end view or diagram of the 
Second-wheel and pawl when in the same posi 
3Otion as in Fig. 6; Fig. 8, a second plan view 
of the two type-wheels detached, illustrating 
them in position to print the number 1, Fig. 
9 being an end view or diagram of the second 
wheel when in the same position as in Fig. 8. 
Fig. 10 is an end view or diagram of the sec 
ond wheel when in the position indicated in 
Fig. 3, the unit-wheel being in position to 
print the number 5, and the second wheel 
blank. Fig. 11 is a vertical section in line a 2 
of Fig.1, illustrating the movement of the 
plunger in the head; and Fig. 12, a diagram 
or end view of the second wheel, illustrating 
a modification in the combination of the two 
segmental ratchets therewith in which they 
are made to complement each other to com 
plete a circle on one side of the wheel instead 
of being located each upon an opposite side of 
the wheel. .. 
My invention relates to consecutive-num 
35 
up with a form of type and to be operated all 
tomatically by the movement of the platen or 
impression-cylinder of the press. 
It has for its object to obtain automatically 
the constant repetition in consecutive order 55 
of a given series of numbers without stopping 
the press, and to render the arrangement of 
type more compact, and this object is obtained 
by the combination, with the unit-wheel com 
mon to all numbering-machines, of a second 6o 
wheel bearing, peripherally, the numbers 
which it is desired to repeat at the left of the 
units, with a blank space following the high 
est of said numbers, this second wheel being 
made to turn forward by means, as hereinafter 
fully described, flot only as is customary-one 
degree or figure at each complete revolution 
of the unit-wheel-but, so soon as the num 
bers thereon have all been brought into line 
of print and the end of the series thereby 
reached, move in unison with the unit-wheel 
until the first number in the series has been 
brought into position to be carried into line of 
print at the next move and to then remain sta 
tionary in readiness to be moved in the cus- 75 
tomary manner to said line of print as the last 
digit on the unit-wheel is carried away from 
said line. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the base-plate, and B the Outer casing, 
of a consecutive-numbering machine or head; 
C, the axial rod upon which the type-wheels 
rotate and the actuating-frame swings; D D, 
the end plates of the SW1nging pawl-frame, 
pivoted upon the rod C and united to move in 
unison by the cross-plate. E.; F, the spring 
seated plunger mounted in one end of the cas 
ing parallel with the end plate, D'; G, Fig. 
11, a lever pivoted at one end to a block, B', 
in the casing B, to extend transversely be- 9C 
tween the end plate, D', and the inner face of 
the plunger within a recess, H, sunk in said 
face, and whose upper and lower edges are in 
clined in opposite directions from a central 
point, thereby forming two opposed angles, a 95 
a, (see Fig. 11,) which are respectively brought 
to bear upon the middle of the lever, so as to 
carry it up and down in unison with the 
movements of the plunger. A pin, b, pro 
55 bering machines of the class adapted be locked jecting from the free end of this lever G, en- IOO 
 
2 
374,629 
5 frame. 
In the operation of this improved numbering- 90 
ters a radial slot, c, in the end plate, D', and pawl, M', is over the blank space of reduced 
by its engagement with said slot the recipro 
diameter on its ratchet-wheel, whereupon the 
cating movement of the plunger is made to 
pawl L will engage its ratchet and turn the 7o 
produce a swinging movement of the pawl 
second wheel one point simultaneously with 
the movement of the unit-wheel. 
A reverse movement of the type-wheels is 
I is the unit-wheel of the head, and J its 
prevented in the customary manner by fixed 
Second wheel. The unit - wheel carries the 
customary type upon its periphery, bearing 
spring-actuated pawls N N', arranged to bear 75 
the nine digits and a cipher, and is formed 
upon the ratchets K and L on the side oppo 
site that on which the pawls K and L engage 
to With a circular concentric ratchet or ratchet 
wheel, K, upon one side or face thereof, hav 
s the same. 
A sliding plate, P, is inserted centrally in a 
ing ten teeth. The notch W, (see Fig. 2.) to 
be engaged by the actuating-pawl when the 
dovetailed seat in the top of the plunger F, to 8o 
cipher is carried into line for print, is made 
move and admit of adjustment in the line to 
which the type on the type-wheels are brought 
15 much deeper than the rest. The second wheel, 
J, carries type representing the numbers to be 
for imprint, and the end plate, D', of the SWing 
imprinted at the left of the units to complete 
ing frame is so cut away as to permit this type 
the series which it is desired to repeat-as, for 
plate to be moved over it into proximity to the 85 
example, 1 to 5, to print and repeat a series of 
unit-wheel of the head, so that an imprint of 
the characters on said slide may be made in 
2O numbers from 1 to 50. The intervals between 
the consecutive type on the second wheel, J, 
close connection with that of the numbering 
are made equal to those on the unit-wheel I, 
type on the wheels. 
excepting the interval between the first fig 
ure, 1, and the last figure, 5, which is left 
head the two wheels are first adjusted so that 
25 Wholly blank. A circular or segmental ratchet, 
the unit-wheel shall present the number 1 to 
L., of less radius than the ratchet-wheel K, 
the line of print, and the second wheel the 
is formed or secured concentrically upon the 
blank following the highest number (5) there 
on, as shown in Figs. Sand 9. As the plunger 95 
face or side of the second wheel next to the 
unit-wheel with as many teeth as there are 
F is carried down by the pressure thereon of 
3O type on Said second wheel, and a second seg 
the platen of the press as it descends to obtain 
an impression from the type number 1 on the 
mental ratchet-disk, M, is formed concentric 
ally upon the opposite face of the same wheel, 
head, the frame D D' is made to swing upon 
having teeth sufficient in number to cover the 
its pivotal axis, and thereby draw the pawls l OO 
arc left blank between the highest and lowest 
K, L and M' back over their ratchets on the 
type-wheels into engagement with a new tooth. 
35 numbers on said wheel, these ratchets being 
So soon as the platen is lifted, and the plunger 
So located with reference to the type-figures 
on the wheel and the pawl which is to engage 
Frises under the action of its springs, the 
pawl K", by reason of its engagement with the IO5 
the ratchet as that the last tooth of the ratchet 
shall pass out of engagement with the pawl 
ratchet K on the unit-wheel, will cause the 
4o when the first of said type is within one point 
latter to turn one point, and thereby bring the 
of the position for imprint, as illustrated in 
type number 2 thereon into line of print; but 
Figs, 3 and 10. The radius of the arc upon 
in the meantime, as the pawl L is held out of 
which these ratchet-teeth are formed is equal 
engagement with its ratchet L by reason of I IO 
to the radius of the ratchet on the unit-wheel; 
the reduced diameter of the latter, (see Fig. 
45 but the radius of the remainder or blank por 
4,) or as an equivalent device by being made 
tion of the disk carrying the teeth is equal to 
shorter than the pawl K", the pawl M, engag 
ing its ratchet-disk M, will carry the second 
that of the recesses in the ratchet L on the in 
ner face of the second wheel. 
wheel forward one point, and the second wheel, I i5 
The pawls actuating, respectively, the three 
J, will continue to be turned in unison with 
5O ratchets K, L, and Mare made to project from 
the unit-wheel I by the action of the pawl M" 
a single plate, d, pivoted upon a rod, e, con 
until said pawl has passed beyond the last 
necting the two pivoted end plates, D D, of 
tooth, 5, on the ratchet M, as shown in Fig. 10. 
the frame, said plate D being actuated by a 
In the meantime the unit - wheel will have I2O 
coiled Spring, f, upon said rod to throw the 
turned far enough to bring the number 5 into 
55 pawls into automatic engagement with the 
line of print; but, the second wheel having 
now been brought into a position where at its 
ratchets. 
The pawls are all of the same length, and as 
next move the first number, 1, thereon will be 
brought into line of print, the actuating-pawl I 25 
the ratchet on the unit-wheel and the outer 
M will thereafter play idly upon the plain 
Tatchet on the second wheel are of the same 
6o diameter, the two outer pawls, K and M', will 
surface of the ratchet-disk M, (see Figs. 3 and 
engage their ratchets simultaneously, while, 
10,) until, by the action of the pawl L, which 
since the diameter of the inner ratchet on the 
occurs once at each revolution of the units 
wheel, by reason of the dropping of the pawl I 30 
Second wheel is less than that of the ratchet 
on the unit wheel, its pawl L is held out of 
Kinto the deep notch. W of the ratchet-wheel, 
65 engagement with its teeth, except at the mo 
(see Fig. 5,) the second wheel has been turned 
independently of the pawl M far enough to 
ment when the first pawl, K, drops into the 
deep notch W of its ratchet, and the third 
bring the first tooth, 1, of the ratchet M once 
S 
374,629 
3 
55 
65 
75 
as that its major radius shall come into posi 
tion for engagement by the pawl immediately 
after the last or highest numeral on the pe. 
riphery of the head has come into line of print, 
so that as soon as the units wheel has com 
pleted its revolution the second wheel shall be 
turned from that point far enough to bring 
the first numeral thereon into position to be 
brought into line of print. The smaller radius 
of the ratchet will then come into position for 
engagement by the pawl, but will be engaged 
only as the unit-pawl drops at each full revo 
lution into its deep notch. By this device the 
same result is obtained as by the use of the 
two pawls Land M and two separate ratchet 
wheels or disks, L and M, first above de 
scribed. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination, in a consecutive-number 
ing head, with its unit type-wheel, the pawl 
actuating said unit - wheel, and mechanish, 
substantially as described, for actuating said 
pawl, of a second numeral type-wheel of equal 
diameter bearing the left-hand figures for 
the numbers in the series to be repeated, 
and having a blank space between the highest 
and lowest figures thereon, a segmental ratchet 
affixed to said second wheel whose teeth corre 
spond in number with the numerals on the 
periphery of said wheel, an auxiliary Seg 
mental ratchet whose teeth cover, at intervals 
corresponding to those between the ratchet 
teeth of the unit-wheel, an arc complementing 
that of said segmental ratchet, and a pawl or 
pawls, substantially as described, moving in 
unison with the pawl of the unit-wheel and 
made to engage said segmental ratchetsin suc 
cession, the one at each revolution of the unit 
wheel and the other at each move of said wheel 
after the highest numeral on the second wheel 
has reached the line of print and until its 
lowest numeral has come within one move of 
said line, all substantially in the manner and 
for the purpose herein set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
JAMES H. REINHARDT. 
95 
Witnesses: 
WM. J. WETTER, 
A. N. JESBERA. 
5 
O 
more into position to be engaged by the pawl 
M", as shown in said Figs. 6 and 7. As the 
pawl-plated now moves forward, carrying the 
three pawls, the first pawl, K, will move the 
unit-wheel I in the usual manner to turnit out 
from 0, Fig. 6, to 1, Fig. 8. The second pawl, 
L', now held out of engagement with its ratchet 
L, will move idly over it; but the third pawl, 
M, engaging the first of the five teeth on 
the ratchet - disk M, will cause the second 
wheel to move in unison with the unit-wheel 
from 5, Figs. 6 and 7, to blank, Figs. 8 and 9, 
and this synchronous movement of the two 
will continue during the revolution of the unit 
wheel until the pawl M has passed back of its 
last ratchet-tooth, 5, as shown in Figs. 3 and 
10, and the type number 1 on the periphery 
of the wheel is in position to be brought into 
line for print at its next move. 
Henceforth 
the pawl M will again be idle, having no teeth 
presented for its engagement until the unit 
wheel has made five revolutions, and thereby 
moved the second wheel five consecutivepoints, 
as above described, the second wheel itself re 
maining idle after it has ceased to be actuated 
by the pawl M until the unit-wheel has com 
pleted its full revolution and its pawl drops 
into the deep notch W, whereupon the pawl 
L?, coming into play, will move the second 
wheel one point and bring the numerall there 
on into line for print, as shown in Fig. 5. 
As a mechanical equivalent for the two sets 
of ratchets LM, one on either side of the sec 
ond wheel, J, arranged to be actuated by the 
two pawls LM, I contemplate the use of a 
single circular ratchet formed on one face only 
of said second wheel, this circular ratchet be 
ing divided into two equal semicircular divis 
ions or arcs, one of which is of a greater ra 
dius than the other, as is illustrated in Fig. 12. 
In such case the major arc is of a radius corre 
sponding with that of the ratchet on the unit 
wheel, so that the pawl L will engage this 
major half of the second ratchet-wheel simul 
taneously with the engagement of the first or 
units ratchet-wheel by the pawl K", but will 
move idly over the minor half, excepting at 
: the moment the first pawl, K, drops into the 
deep notch W of its ratchet-wheel, as already 
described. This ratchet-wheel, of variable 
radius, is so combined with the second wheel 
25 
35 
O 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374729.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 374,729. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
P. BROWNLEY. 
UBRICATOR, 
Patented Dec. 13, 1887. 
S 2 
| NNNNNNNNNNN 
 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
NNNNNNN 
SNS 
H 
BY 
luva 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PATRICK. BROWNLEY, OF ST. JOHN, NEW BRUNSWICK, CANADA. 
LUBRCATO R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Pate?t No. 374,729, dated December 13, 1887. 
Application filed April 26, 1887. Serial No. 236,199. (No model.) 
IO 
15 
35 
To all ?????, i? ??? ????er?: 
formed upon the lower end of a feed chamber, 
Be it known that 1, PATRICK BROWNLEY, a 15, said feed chamber being in turn formed 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain and Ire. with a flange, 16, that is adapted to receive 
land, residing at St. John, in the Province of the bite of a wrench, being square, hexagonal, 
New Brunswick and Dominion of Canada, have or of any other proper form. 
invented new and useful Improvenients in 
The feeding chamber 15 is provided with an 
Lubricators, of which the following is a full, induction valve, 17, that is seated in an aper 
clear, and exact description. 
ture formed in the upper wall of the chamber, 
This invention relates to lubricators of a the stem 18 of this valve 17 projecting upward 
form adapted for use in connection with the through a guiding-socket that is formed in a 
steam-chests of locomotive, hoisting, and other spider, 19, said spider being connected to the 
steam-engines, the object of the invention be- feeding-chamber, as indicated, and the valve 
ing to provide a lubricator which shall not being normally held against its seat by a 
depend upon suction or the formation of a spring, 20. 
vacuum for the proper operation of the lubri- 
In the lower wall of the case forming the 
cator-valves; and to this end the invention feeding-chamber I arrange an eduction-valve, 
consists of a lubricator wherein the feeding- 21, that is preferably formed with a concave 
chamber is provided with induction and educ- lower face, as illustrated. 
Recesses 2 are 
tion valves, the eduction-valve being formed formed in the edge of the valve 21, to provide 
with a stem which bears against the under - for the passage of the lubricating material. 
side of the induction-valve and raises said The valve 21 is provided with a stem, 22, which 
valve from its seat when the said eduction- extends upward, so as to bear against the un 
valve is subjected to the pressure of the steam der side of the valve 17 at times When the 
delivered to the steam-chest, all as will be valve 21 is forced to its seat. 
hereinafter more fully described, and specifi. 
The casting 10 has an internally-threaded 
cally pointed out in the claims. 
flange, 24, that is engaged by an external 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying thread formed on the outer side of a cylinder, 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 25, said cylinder resting upon a packing ring 
in which similar figures of reference indicate or washer, 26. The upper end of this cylinder 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
25 is closed by a cap, 27, which cap is formed 
Figure i is a central sectional elevation of with a centrally-apertured boss or projection, 
my improved form of lubricator, the feed- 28, this boss being internally threaded to re 
chamber valves being represented in the posi- ceive a closing-plug, 29, which is centrally 
tion they assume when the eduction-valve is bored, as shown. 
seated. Fig. 2 is a detail view of the feed- 
The space within the cylinder 25 constitutes 
chamber and its connections, the parts being the oil-supply reservoir or chamber 30, and 
represented as they appear when the induc- through this chamber I pass a tube, 31, one 
tion-valve is seated and the eduction-valve is end of said tube being threaded to engage with 
moved from its seat; and Fig. 3 is a sectional a thread formed in the walls of the passage 
plan view, the view being taken on a line cor. 12, while the other end of the tube is connected 
responding with the line acac of Fig. 1. 
to a short tube, 32, by means of a right and left 
In the drawings above referred to, 10 repre- hand coupling, 33; or the coupling 33 Inight be 
sents the lower casting of my improved form of any other form desired. The tube 32 com 
of lubricator, said casting being formed with municates with an elbow, 34, which engages 
a central bore, 11, a steam-passage, 12, and a with a proper aperture formed in the casting 
valve-chamber, 13, the chamber 13 and the 10, as does also the tube 32, and the elbow 34 
bore 11 being in communication through the is in turn connected with a regulating-cock, 
medium of a passage, 14, while the passage 12 35. A vent-pipe, 36, leads from the chamber 
leads directly to the bore 11. The walls of the 15 upward through the chamber 30 and out 
chamber 13 are threaded, in order that they through the plug 29, as shown. A petcock, 
may be engaged by an external thread that is 37, is arranged, as indicated, so that the con 
75 
95 
IOS 
 
374,729 
2? 
tents of the chamber 30 may be drawn off I claim as new and desire to secure by Letter 
when desired. 
Patent 
The lubricator described is connected to a 
steam-chest through the medium of its threaded 
1. The combination, with the oil-reservoir 
of the feeding-chamber in the bottom thereof 
5 projection3S, and, being so connected, the steam 
a downwardly-opening valve in the bottom o 
entering said steam-chest will be free to enter 
the feeding-chamber, a separate and independ 
the bore 11 to find a partial exit through the 
ent downwardly-closing valve in the top of 
passage 12 and tubes 31, 32, and 34, the amount 
of steam passing through said tubes being 
the chamber, to be raised by the upward move: 
regulated by the cock 35, the idea of so con 
ment of the valve below it, and a vent-tube 
leading into the feeding-chamber, substan 
ducting the steam through the chamber 30 be. 
tially as set forth. 
ing to maintain the lubricant contained within 
said chamber in a liquid condition. The steam, 
2. The combination, with the oil-reservoir 
entering the bore 11, aiso finds its way to the 
having central openings, 11, 14, and 13, in its 
valve chamber 13, and the pressure exerted by 
bottom, of the chamber 15, threaded at its 
the steam will seat the valve 21, thus unseat 
lower end to engage the threaded walls of 
opening 13, and provided with valve-seats in 
ing the valve 17, and as the valve 17 is so un 
its top and bottom, the downwardly-opening 
seated the feeding-chamber 15 will be filled 
gravity - valve 21, having recesses 2, and a 
from the chamber 30, as said chamber is vented 
stem, 22, extending into said chamber, the 
through the tuhe 36; but when the steam is 
separate and independent upper valve, 17, 
cut off from the steam-chest the pressure of the 
atmosphere exerted through the tube 36 will 
having a stem, the spider 19, having a guid 
ing-socket for said stem, and the spring 20 on 
force the valve 21 from its seat and the con 
said stem, substantially as set forth. 
tents of the chamber 15 will be delivered to 
the steam-chest, the valve 17 at this time be 
3. In a lubricator, the combination, with a 
ing forced to its seat by the spring 20. 
bottom casting having a central bore and a 
From the above description of the operation 
valve chamber, of a casing constituting a feed 
ing-chamber, valves arranged in connection 
of my improved form of lubricator it will be 
seen that when the throttle communicating 
with said chamber, a vent-pipe leading to said 
chamber, a storage-chamber within which the 
with the steam-chest of the engine is open the 
feeding-chamber is arranged, a steam-pipe ar 
valve 21 will always be seated, but that the 
ranged in the storage-chamber, and a means 
contents of the chamber 15 will be delivered 
to the steam - chest immediately upon the 
for regulating the supply of steam passing 
through said pipe, substantially as described. 
closing of the throttle, the supply of lubricat 
35 ing material delivered to the steam-chest be 
PATRICK. BROWNLEY. 
ing regulated by varying thesize of the cham 
ber 15. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
Witnesses: 
A 
JAMIEs STRATON, 
R. KELTIE JONES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374829.txt	(No Model.) 
W. A. FRETWELL. 
No. 374,829, 
 
PLOW, 
Patented Deo, 13, 1887. 
2. T. 
6%;PA 52-e 
Attorney 
N.PEFERs. Photo-Lithographer."lashington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM A. FRETWELL, OF REIDSVILLE, NORTH CAROLINA. 
PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 374,829, dated December 13, 1887. 
Application filed September 6, 1887. Serial No. 243,944. (No moe.) 
55 
series of openings,ff, for adjusting the handles. 
To all whon, it Tay concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMA. FRETWELL, The said bars extend rearward to and are 
engaged, respectively, with the opposite han 
of Reidsville, in the county of Rockingham and 
dles E E of the plow at points in the plane of 
State of North Carolina, have invented certain 
the straight portion of beam A. 
new and useful Improvements in Plows; and 
In order to strengthen handles EE and brace 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
the same I employ the outer metal straps or 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
plates, IKK, which are placed on the outer 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
sides of the handles EE, and extend from the 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
bolt D to the rod I, so that in addition to brac 
which form part of this specification,in which 
ing the same they serve as washers for the bolt 
Figure 1 is a rear perspective view of my 
improved plow lying upon its side. Fig. 2 is 
D and nut d and for the bars FF on rod I. 
L designates a metal casting, which is adapted 
a side elevation of the same, part of the plow 
to fit under the turn-plow P, as shown in the 
share being broken away. Fig. 3 shows the 
drawings, and to which the parts of the turn 
plow adjusted as a shovel-plow. Figs. 4 and 
plow are secured, as shown. 
5 are details of various shares which can be 
The casting L is provided in its rear face 
Secured to the plow-beam for converting the 
with a groove or channel, l, which is provided 
plow into a cultivator, &c. 
with suitable openings at distances apart cor 
This invention relates to improvements in 
responding to the openings Bb of the foot of 
convertible plows; and its especial object is to 
the plow-beam. This foot a is adapted to fit 
provide a plow with adjustable and exchange 
in channell, and the turn-plow is secured 
able handles and braces, and so constructed as 
thereto by means of bolts M and nuts m, the 
to be adapted for use in connection with turn 
bolts passing through suitable openings in the 
plows, shovels, cultivators, &c., which can be 
face of the turn-plow and in the casting and 
severally adjusted upon the foot of the plow 
foot a, and are provided with nuts m on their 
beam. 
inner ends, by which the turn-plow is rigidly 
The invention consists in the peculiar and 
but removably secured to the foot a of beam 
novel construction and arrangement of parts, 
hereinafter described, illustrated in the draw. 
A, as shown. 
The casting. L is provided with a side de 
ings, and particularly specified in the claim 
pending flange,N, to which is bolted the mold 
hereto appended. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings by 
board of the plow, the rear end of the mold 
board being connected by a link-bar, n, with 
letters, A designates the beam of the plow, 
the casting at a pointjust below and to one side 
which is made of metal, preferably cast-iron, 
of opening b of foot a, as shown. 
The front 
and which is curved downward and forward at 
of the casting is extended and flattened to sup 
its rear end, forming a footportion, a, as shown. 
port the cutter p of the plow, as seen in Fig. 
This foot a is flattened on its upper front sur 
1, imparting great strength to the cutter and 
face, and is provided with two bolt-openings, 
enabling me to widen the same in casting it, so 
Bb, as shown, the lowest, B, of which is very 
that the turn-plow will cut a broad furrow. 
near the end of foot a, and the upper open 
By connecting the brace bars FF to the ends of 
ing, b, is formed a proper distance above open 
the brace-rod I, a substantial brace-frame is 
ing B, as shown. These openings B b are here 
formed, which acts in connection with the 
inafter referred to. A short distance above 
plow-beam to form a plow-frame of great 
opening b is formed a transverse bolt-opening, 
strength and durability. 
through which passes a bolt, D, which secures 
It will be observed that by reason of the 
the plow-handles to beam A, as shown. 
FF designate connecting brace rods or bars, series of holes.ffin the bars FF the height 
the front ends of which are secured, by a bolt, of the handles or their pitch in relation to the Ico 
G, and nut 9, to the beam A. by means of a plow can be readily varied by adjusting bolt. 
suitable opening, H, formed in said beam at G in different openings of the bars FF. 
It will be observed from the foregoing de 
the beginning of its curvature, as shown. The 
front ends of bars FF are provided with a scription and drawings that the turn-plow P 
85 
75 
95 
... 3 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
It will be observed that the casting Libraces 3o 
vator, &c. 
the turn-plow P strongly, and especially at the 
points which have been considered weakest in 
Such plows, reducing the liability of breakage 
of plow to a minimum should the same be 
come wedged when in use between unyielding 35 
objects, as is obvious. 
2 
is attached to the beam A. by two bolts only, tests to work perfectly in any of its converted 
and that by removing these bolts, which can forms, either as turn-plow, shovel-plow, culti 
be readily done, the turn-plow can be removed, 
and the shovel-plow Q, or the various shovels 
and blades shown in Figs. 3, 4, and 5, can be 
secured to the foot a instead by means of the 
same bolts M and nuts m, said shovels and 
blades being provided with suitable openings 
corresponding to the openings B bin foot a, so 
that when bolted thereon they will bein proper 
working position relatively to the beam of the 
plow. 
When the shovels or cultivators are used on 
the beam A, it is preferable to shift the handles 
EE and bars FF to the positions shown in 
Fig. 3-that is, they are reversed-the handles 
E E being secured to beam A. at opening H by 
bolt and nut Gig, so that the handles lie in the 
same plane as the horizontal portion of beam 
A, while the bars FF are secured to the foot a 
by bolt D through opening C, as shown. The 
points of attachment of bars F E to handles 
EE, however, are unchanged. 
It will be observed from the foregoing that 
I have a very strong adjustable and converti 
ble plow, which has been found by practical 
Having described my invention, I claim 
The combination, with the plow-beam A. and 
handles EE, of the brace-rod I, brace-bars F. 
F, secured at their forward end to the beam, 4o 
and adapted to be secured interchangeably to 
either of the openings C or H in the beam, and 
the straps K, secured to the handles, all sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
own affix my signature in presence of two wit 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my .45 
FI. B. BURNETT, 
S. H. BOYD. 
WM. A. FRETWELL, 
SSS. 
Witnesses: 
374,829 
IO 
IS 
AO 
25 
 
'1. 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US374930.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 374,930, 
J. BROOKS. 
5 sheets-Sheet 1. 
SHEET DELIVERY APPARATUS. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1887. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 374,930, 
J. BROOKS, 
SHEET DELIVERY APPARATUS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1887. 
|[[?T?T?F?N?T?F 
 
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 374,930, 
 
J. BROOKS. 
SHEET DELIVERY APPARATUS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1887. 
J. BROOKS, 
SHEET DELIVERY APPARATUS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1887. 
(No Model.) 
No. 374,930, 
 
(No Model.) 
w 
J. BROOKS. 
SHEET DELIVERY APPARATUS, 
5 sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 374,930, 
Patented Dec. 20, 1887, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BROOKS, OF PLAINFIELD, NEW JERSEY. 
SHEET-DELIVERY APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 374,930, dated December 20, 1887. 
Application filed March 15, 1886. 
serial No. 195,241. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
r 5 
To oil, whon, it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN BROOKS, of Plain 
field, in the county of Union and State of New 
Jersey, have invented an Improvement in 
Sheet-Delivery Apparatus, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to convey th 
printed sheets through between cutting-cylin 
ders and between guide-bars to a superim 
posing-cylinder, around which the first sheet 
is wrapped and brought to correspond with a 
second sheet, and the two are delivered jointly 
to a folding apparatus, and I make use of 
guide-bars and a switch mechanism for direct 
ing the sheets first to one folding-machine and 
then to a second folding mechanism, so as to 
give time for the folding devices to operate in 
Succession. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a diagrammatic 
view representing the manner in which my im 
provements are introduced between the cut 
ting-cylinders and the folding mechanism and 
Fig. 2 is a similar view with the superimpos 
ing-cylinder differently located. Fig. 3 is 
partial plan view of the pulleys and guide 
bars. Fig. 4 is an elevation representing the 
means for raising and lowering the superim 
posing-cylinder. Fig. 5 is a similar view of 
the parts that move the switch-rollers. Fig. 
6 is a section showing the switch-bars and 
switch-rollers in larger size. Fig. 7 is a sec 
tional diagram representing the conveying 
bars and portions of the folding mechanism, 
and Fig. 8 is a section representing a modi 
fication in the superimposing-cylinder. Fig. 
9 shows the superimposing - cylinder in the 
depressed position for wrapping the sheet 
around the same. Fig. 10 is a similar view 
with the superimposing-cylinder elevated to 
discharge the imposed sheets. Figs. 11 and 12 
are views similar to Figs. 9 and 10, except 
that pins are shown for holding the advancing 
ends of the sheet instead of grippers. 
In my improvements make use of metal 
bars for the sheets to run upon instead of the 
tapes heretofore usually employed; but tapes 
may be used in addition, if desired, and I 
raise and lower the superimposing-cylinder 
and provide stationary guide-bars, so that 
when the imposing-cylinder is lowered the 
sheet can be wrapped around the superimpos 
55 
65 
ing-cylinder, and when such cylinder is raised 
the two sheets will be passed on together, one 
lying upon the other between the stationary 
guide-bars; and I use sheet - delivery rollers 
that are raised and lowered to deliver the 
sheets or pairs of sheets through one of two 
channels formed by ranges of guide-bars in 
pairs, with a stationary switch or director for 
the sheets. 
The cutting-cylinders AB are of ordinary 
character. When the cutter entirely sepa 
rates the paper, the advancing end of each 
sheet is lifted and caused to pass off the cut 
ting-cylinder A by lifting-fingers a, that ex 
tend out from a rock-shaft, a, and these are 
moved by a stationary cam, 2, upon the frame 
of the machine, as seen in Fig. 1; but when 
the paper is partially separated and the super 
imposing-cylinder ID travels at an increased 
velocity the sheets are pulled apart, and the 
distance between the superimposing-cylinder 
D and the cutting-cylinders A B has to be 
greater than the length of the sheet to allow 
of the completion of the separation being ef. 75 
fected by the pull upon the advancing sheet. 
The arrangement of devices for this object is 
shown in Fig. 2, and in this case it is prefer 
able to employ the rollers E to give motion to 
the sheet and move it along between the guide. 
bars 4 and 5; but these rollers E E will not be 
needed in the arrangement shown in Fig. 1. 
The guide-bars 4 and 5 are sustained upon 
stationary cross-bars 6 and 7 to the frame of 
the machine, and the ends of the guide-bars 85 
near the superimposing-cylinder D may be 
moved up and down with such superimposing 
cylinder, preferably, by the bars S and 9, that 
are connected to the boxes 10, that support 
the axis of the superimposing-cylinder D, (see go 
dotted lines, Fig. 4;) but these bars may re 
main stationary, as illustrated in Figs. 9 and 
11. It is preferable to make the superimpos 
ing-cylinder and the rollers E E and other 
rollers hereinafter set forth of ranges of pull 95 
leys, so as to permit the ends of the respective 
guide-bars to pass in between the pulleys. 
The superimposing-cylinder Dis raised and 
lowered by the toggle-bars 11, connecting 
rods 12, and cams 13 upon a shaft, 14, that is 
rotated once for each two revolutions of the 
superimposing-cylinder, and the toggle-bars 
OC 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
3. 
374,930 
IO 
are connected with the respective journal- raised and lowered with the superimposing 
boxes 10, there being toggles, cams, and con 
cylinder D, so as to maintain their proper po 
necting-rods at the two sides of the press, and 
sitions in relation thereto. 
the boxes 10 slide in jaws in the frame D' of 
I have shown folding-blades H and H' and 
folding-rollers K K as constituting portions 
the machine. 
Upon the journal-boxes 10 there are the 
of twofolding-machines. These parts and the 
bearings 16, that support the shaft of the im 
devices for moving the knives at the right time 
posing-roller 17, and there is a forwarding 
are well known. I, however, convey the im 
roller, 18, at one side of the superimposing 
posed sheets to these folders between the ranges 
roller D, for a purposehereinafter shown. This 
of bars 32 33 and 3435. These ranges of bars 
roller 18 may be in bearings on the frame of 
are at each side of the folding-blades and par 
the machine; but preferably it is supported 
allel thereto and above the folding-rollers, and 
by arms extending from the boxes 10, and it 
the bars are parallel to the axis of the folding 
should in that case be pressed into contact 
rollers; but in approaching the folding devices 
with the superimposing-cylinder D by springs 
they diverge from the switch-rollers 29 and 30, 
acting on the bearings. The guide-bars 2021. 
as seen in Figs. 1 and 2, and they are at right 
are held stationary at the ends next the super 
angles to the axis of these switch-rollers, so 
imposing-cylinder by the cross bars 2223, and 
that the pair of switch-rollers forward the 
the imposing and delivery operations are as 
sheet along between the ranges of bars 3233 
follows: 
or between the ranges of hars 34 35, according 
The grippers 24 are acted upon by the sta 
to the elevated or depressed positions of the 
tionary cam 25, and this cam is shaped so as 
switch-rollers. The ranges of bars 33 and 34 
to open the grippers 24 shortly after they pass 
unite with the guiding-bar 40, and the ranges 
the forwarding-roller 18; and when the parts 
of bars 32 and 35 are held stationary by the 
5 are in the position shown in Figs. 4 and 9 the 
cross-bars 4243. The shafts of the two switch 
advancing end of the sheet is pressed down by 
rollers 29 and 30 are supported in the bearings 
the imposing-roller 17 upon the surface of the 
45, (see Fig. 5,) that are slid vertically within 
superimposing - cylinder ID, and at this mo 
jaws on the frame of the machine by toggle-bars 
ment the grippers 24 are allowed to close and 
46, rods 47, cams 48, and a shaft, 49. The cross 
grasp the sheet, the cam 25 being shaped to ef. 
bars 50 51 are connected to the ranges 2021 
fect this. The sheet is now carried around 
of bars, and they are moved up and down by 
with the superimposing - cylinder D by the 
and with the journal-boxes 45. When the 
grippers 24, and while this is being done, and 
switch-rollers 29 and 30 are raised, the top of 
just as the rear end of the sheet passes clear of 
the roller 30, coming above the apex of the 
the roller 17, the cam 13 and toggles lift the su 
guiding-bar 40, causes the advancing ends of 
perimposing-cylinder D and roller 17, and the 
the sheets to pass up between the ranges of 
forwarding -roller 18, pressing on the sheet, 
guide - bars 32 33, and thence to the fold 
holds the same to the cylinder D and causes it 
ing-blade H and rollers K; and when the 
to move with the same, and the advancing end 
switch-rollers 29.30 are lowered the bottom of 
of the first sheet comes up in line with the ad 
the roller 29, coming below the apex of the 
vancing end of the next sheet and the two are 
guiding-bar 40, directs the sheets down be 
forwarded together, the one laid upon the 
tween the ranges of guide-bars 34 and 35 to 
other by passing through between the super 
the folding-blade Hand rollers K. 
The ends 
imposing-cylinder D and its roller 17; but at 
of the respective bars 2021 32 35 are bent out 
this time the top of the cylinder D has been 
wardly, as seen in Fig. 6, to insure the proper 
raised above the bars 21, and the sheets are 
delivery and passage of the sheets. The pairs 
driven along between the ranges 20 and 21 of 
of forwarding-rollers N N O O' PP' serve to 
The grippers 24 do not act at this time, 
bars. 
insure a continuance of the movements of the 
because the elevated position of the super 
sheets and their ultimate delivery to the fold 
imposing - roller D has raised the gripper 
ing devices. 
shaft so that the concentric portion of the cam 
In Fig. 7 I have shown the ranges of bars 
25 holds the gripper-crank, so that the grip 
60 61 as receiving the folded sheets of paper 
pers are open and cannot close. Therefore they 
as they pass between the rollers K K, and 
move with the cylinder D, as illustrated in 
these bars guide the sheets between the for. 
Fig. 10, and are out of the way of the advanc 
warding-rollers 62, that carry the sheets along 
ing ends of the sheets as they travel on be 
as they pass between the bars 60 and 61 be 
tween the ranges 20 and 21 of guide-bars to 
neath the folding-knife 64, that carries the 
the pairs of switch-rollers 29 and 30, that seize 
middle of the sheet down between the folding 
the sheets and carry them to the folding de 
rollers 66. 
vices, as hereinafter described. 
The imposing-cylinder D (shown in Fig. S) 
The action of the parts represented in Fig. 
is raised and lowered and operates the same 
1 is identically the same as that of the parts 
as the Superimposing-cylinders, before de 
shown in Figs. 2 and 4, except that the cam 25 
scribed; but, instead of using grippers to carry 
is shaped to allow the grippers to close when 
the alternate sheets around the surperimpos 
near the forwarding-roller 18, and this for 
ing-cylinder, there are pulleys 70, in addition 
warding-roller 18 and the bars 4 and 5 can be 
to the roller 18 and endless belt 71, around the 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
5 
90 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
O 
I 5 
I 25 
374,930 
3 
- 
8C 
85 
respective pulleys to hold the sheet in contact 
with the respective pulleys of the imposing 
cylinder. 
The cylinder D and rollers 17 18 
70 7070 all move up and down together, and 
the cross-bars 8 and 9 and guide-bars 4 and 5 
all move together, and the first sheet is di 
rected downwardly and around the superim 
posing-cylinder D, and then the first and second 
sheets are imposed and passed off between the 
ranges 20 and 21 of guide-bars. 
In Fig. 2 the acceleration of the sheets by 
the more rapid movements of rollers D and 17 
causes the sheets to be drawn apart and the 
space left for directing the respective sheets. 
With the parts arranged as in Fig. I the 
necessary distance between the sheets is ob 
tained by increasing the speed of the switch 
rollers 29 30 and the rollers N NO O' P P. 
The pins a in Fig. 1 are in the cylinder A, 
and pass freely through openings in fingers 
that project from a cross-shaft, a, and the pins 
carry the advancing end of one sheet around 
upon the cylinder A, and then the advancing 
end of the second sheet is taken upon the said 
ins; but then, as the pins pass beneath the 
cylinder B, the fingers a are raised by the cam 
2 coming into contact with an arm on the shaft 
a', so that the fingers lift the front ends of the 
two sheets from the pins and pass them in be 
tween the ranges 4 and 5 of bars to be carried 
to the folding mechanism. When the super 
imposing-cylinder D and roller 17 are used 
with the fingers, as in Fig. 1, the cylinder D 
will receive four or six sheets and then for 
ward them together to the folding devices. 
This improvement is especially useful, as it 
allows for the press being used for different 
kinds of job-work. 
In Figs. 11 and 12 I have shown the pins 24 
as projecting through the cylinder D, upon 
which the advancing end of One sheet is held. 
These pins are withdrawn by the cam 25 at the 
time the cylinder D is raised to discharge the 
forward end of the first sheet with the advanc 
ing end of the second sheet between the ranges 
20 and 21 of bars, and these pins are the 
equivalents of the grippers shown in Figs. 9 
and 10. 
The difficulty generally experienced in the 
use of tapes is that some tapes will be tighter 
than others, and consequently the sheets will 
not lie horizontal and smooth or be fed per 
fectly to the rollers between which they have 
In my present invention the metal 
to paSS. 
guide-bars in pairs are accurate and rigidly 
secured in a horizontal plane and insure the 
perfect movement of the sheets as they pass 
to the rollers, and the sheets are kept smooth. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the cutting-cyl 
inders A B and the ranges 4 5 of guide-bars, 
of the superimposing-cylinder D, the impos 
ing-roller 17, the forwarding-roller 18, the 
movable bearings for the journals of the same, 
and mechanism, substantially as set forth, for 
moving the bearings and raising and lower 
2. The combination, with the ranges of 7o 
ing the imposing cylinder and rollers and the 
ranges of guidebars 20 21, substantially as 
set forth. 
guide-bars 2021 and the switch-rollers 2930, 
of the movable bearings for the journals of 
said rollers and means, substantially as speci 
fied, for raising and lowering the same, and 
the guide-bars 2021 at one end, the station-.75 
ary guiding-bars 40, and ranges 32 33 34 35 
of guide-bars, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the superimpos 
ing-cylinder D and imposing - roller 17 and 
movable bearings for the journals of the same, 
of the ranges of guide-bars and gripper-fin 
gers upon the Superimposing - cylinder and 
mechanism, Substantially as set forth, for rais 
ing and lowering the bearings of the super 
imposing cylinder and roller, substantially as 
specified. 
4. The combination, with the cutting-cyl 
inders and pins for holding the advancing 
ends of the sheets and means, substantially 
as specified, for removing the sheets from 
such pins, of ranges of guide-bars between 
which the sheets are passed as they are dis 
charged from the cutting-cylinder, a superim 
posing cylinder around which the sheets are 
wrapped and caused to accumulate, and ranges 
of guide-bars between which the imposed 
sheets are discharged, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. The combination, with the ranges of 
guide - bars between which the sheets are too 
passed, of a pair of forwarding - rollers and 
means, substantially as specified, for raising 
and lowering such forwarding - rollers and 
guide-bars, and a stationary guiding-bar, 40, 
and ranges of guide-bars 32, 33, 34, and 35, Io5 
diverging therefrom for directing the sheets 
as delivered by the forwarding - rollers be-, 
tween one pair or the other of the ranges of 
diverging guide - bars, substantially as set 
forth. . 
6. The combination, in a sheet-delivery ap 
paratus, of a Superimposing cylinder and 
roller and movable bearings for the journals 
of the same, and means, substantially as speci 
fied, for raising and lowering the said bear 
ings and ranges of stationary guide-bars, sub 
stantially as specified, whereby the sheets are 
imposed when the cylinder is in one position 
and they are discharged upon the guide-bars 
when the cylinder is in the other position, as 
set forth. 
7. In a sheet-delivery apparatus, the com 
bination, with the cutting-cylinders, of ranges 
of metal guide-bars between which the sheets 
are passed, a superimposing cylinder upon 
which the sheets are received and collected 
from between the guide-bars, and a roller for 
pressing the sheets upon the superimposing 
cylinder, Substantially as specified. 
8. In a sheet-delivery apparatus, the com 
bination, with the cutting-cylinders, of ranges 
of metal guide-bars between which the sheets 
95 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
IO 
25 p 
35 
45 
55 
CO 
374,930 
are passed, a stationary guiding-bar, 40, and 
inclined ranges of metal guide-bars 32, 33, 34, 
and 35, diverging from the ends of the first 
guide-bars, and the switch-rollers 29 30 and 
movable bearings for the journals of the same, 
and means, substantially as specified, for 
raising and lowering the switch-rollers and 
guide-bars at one end and directing the sheets 
between one or the other of the ranges of di 
verging guide-bars, substantially as set forth. Ic 
Signed by me this 9th day of March, A. D. 
1886. 
s 
JOHN BROOKS. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
WALLACE L. SERRELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375030.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 375,030. 
A. J. WEED. 
T-SQUARE HOLDER. 
Patented Deo. 20, 1887. 
 
NVENTOR. 
ofaz. f. 24. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR J. WEED, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
T-SQUARE HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forning part of Letters Patent No. 375,030, dated December 20, 1887. 
Application filed May 19, 1887. 
Serial No. 238,801. (No model.) 
25 
To all whon, it nway concern: 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR J. WEED, a 
resident of New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, have invented 
5 a new and useful T-Square Holder, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
T-square holders in which the head of the T 
square is held against the side of the drawing 
To board by the compression of a spring attached 
to and forming part of the holder; and the ob 
jects of my invention are, first, to hold the T 
square in the proper position on the drawing 
board by an implement placed on the T-square 
blade at a distance from the head of the T 
square corresponding to the size of the draw 
ing-board; second, to attach the implement to 
the blade of the T-Square in such a manner 
that it can be instantly adjusted for any size 
of drawing-board consistent with the length of 
the T-square; third, to attach the implement 
to the T-square blade firmly without injury to 
the edge of the blade; fourth, to hold the T 
square in position on the drawing-board by the 
compression of a spiral spring; and, fifth, to 
hold the T-square in proper position at any 
point on the drawing-board regardless of the 
angle which the drawing-board may assume 
froin a horizontal plane. I attain these ob. 
3ojects by the mechanism illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation in perspective of the 
implement. Fig. 2 is a bottom view of the 
implement. Fig. 3 is an end view of theim 
plement, and Fig. 4 is a top view of a draw 
ing-board and T-square with the implement 
attached. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The plate A, having the projections HI un 
derneath, form the body of the implement. In 
each of the projections Hand is drilled a hole 
at an equal distance from the under side of the 
plate A, through which the bar C can slide 
freely. To one end of the bar C is secured the 
head E, the face of which is slightly rounded 
revent it from injuring the grain of the 
tO 
E. when slid along the side of the drawing 
board F. Around the bar C, between the pro 
5ojections H and I, is the spiral spring D, which 
is compressed between the projection I and the 
washer a. Passing through the bar C is the 
pin b, against which the washer ais held by the 
compression of the spring D. The pin b passes 
through the bar C at a point where it will 55 
strike the projection H, thereby preventing 
the bar C from being driven out of the projec 
tion I by the expanding of the spring D, all of 
which is shown in Fig. 2. The clamp B holds 
the plate A firmly against the under side of 6o 
the T-square blade G. The ends of the clamp 
B turn downward at right angles, and are paral 
lel with each other, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3. 
The two ends of the clamp B pass through two 
holes in the plate A, as shown in Fig. 1. 
Secured to the ends of the clamp B are the 
heads or washers c c, as shown in Figs. 2 and 
3. Around each end of the clamp B, after 
they pass through the two holes in the plate A, 
are the spiral springs dd, which, being com. 7o 
pressed between the under side of the plate A 
and the heads or washers c c, hold the plat A 
firmly against the under side of the T-square 
blade G. The screws e e, the lower ends of 
which are pointed, pass through the clamp B, 75 
Fig. 1, and can be adjusted to indent the up 
per side of the T-square blade G sufficiently to 
prevent the implement from sliding thereon. 
To apply the implement to the T-square 
blade, it is taken between the thumb and fin. 
ger of each hand, as shown in Fig. 1, thus 
compressing the springs did and making an 
opening for the T-square blade between the 
clamp B and the plate A. 
When in use, the implement is attached 
firmly to the T-square blade G by the clamp B. 
The spring D, acting through the washer 
a, the pin b, and the bar C, holds the head E 
against the side of the drawing-board F. The 
spring D in holding the head E against the 
side of the drawing-board F in the above com 
binations exerts a reaction against the projec 
tion I, which, acting through the plate A, the 
clamp B, and the T-square blade G, holds the 
head of the T-square J against the side of the 
drawing-board F with a force corresponding 
to the amount of compression which has been 
applied to the spring D. The compression of 
the spring D is varied by placing the imple 
ment on the blade of the T-square nearer to or Ico 
farther from the drawing-board F. 
I am aware that prior to my invention T. 
square holders have been made for holding the 
head of the T-square against the side of the 
45 
65 
9O 
95 
g 
375,030 
drawing-board. I therefore do not claim such ee, the bar C, the head E, the Spring. D, the 
an invention, broadly; but 
washer a, and the pin b, all substantially as 
What I do claim as my invention, and desire shown, for the purpose Specified. 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
ARTHUR J. WEED. 
In a T-square holder, the combination of the 
plate A, having projections HI, with the clamp 
B, the washers c c, the springs did, the screws 
H. EDWARDS-FICKEN, 
A. W. LAW. 
-2 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375130.txt	(No Model.) 
L., COONEY, Jr. 
TWO WHEELED WEHICLE, 
No. 375,130. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1887. 
Y 
 
W. linesses, 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LUKE COONEY, JR, OF KALAMAZOO, MICHIGAN. 
TWO-WHEELED VEHICLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 375,130, dated December 20, 1887. 
Application filed May 16, 1887, Serial No. 238,360. (No model.) 
It will be observed that the part of the 35 
Among the points of utility, aside from the 4o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LUKE COONEY, Jr., a spring shown at c is merely for securely at 
citizen of the United States, residing at Kala-taching and holding the spiral v, and does not 
mazoo, county of Kalamazoo, State of Michi- in any sense have a spring action beyond the 
gan, have invented a new and useful Two- staple S, Fig. 3. 
Wheeled Vehicle, of which the following is a 
specification. 
well-known desirable action of spiral springs, 
This invention relates to vehicles having a may be named simplicity and ease of construc 
body fulcrumed at the forward end to the thills tion, less strain on the thills, and less danger 
or cross-bar of the thills and supported over of the springs breaking. 
Having thus described my invention, what 45 
the axle by spiral springs; and it has for its 
object the below-described construction and I claim is 
peculiar association of parts. 
1. In combination, the fulcrumed body or 
In the drawings, forming a part of this speci-seat-bars, the axle, and the spiral springs at 
fication, Figure 1 is a side elevation with one tached to the sides of the body, and having 
thill broken away and one wheel removed; the rear bars shackled to the axle and the for- so 
Fig. 2, a plan of about one-half the vehicle, wardly-bent barrigidly attached to the under 
and Fig. 3 shows enlarged lettered details in side of the body, substantially as set forth. 
perspective. 
2. In combination, the fulcrumed body, the 
Referring to the lettered parts of the draw- axle, and the spiral springs at the sides of the 
ings, P are the seat bars or body, fulcrumed in body, said springs having the V-bars rigidly 55 
the ordinary manner to the thills, or thill attached to transverse beams beneath the 
cross-bar, if preferred. The spiral springs v body, and having the rear bars shackled to 
have a rearwardly-extended bar, c, attached the axle, substantially as set forth. 
to the axle, (or other suitable support,) pref. 
In testimony of the foregoing I have here 
erably by a shackle, a, and at the inner end of I unto subscribed my name in presence of two 6o 
the spiral the spring extends in a bar, c', for- I witnesses. 
ward, and then rearward in V shape, or any 
other suitable form. This latter bar, c', is rig 
idly attached at suitable points to hold it firmly 
to the beamsi of the body, about in the center, 
as indicated, by staples, in Fig. 3, so as to fix 
the springs v horizontally and laterally pro 
jecting from the sides of the body P, Fig.2. 
LUKE COONEY, JR. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. D. B. HALL, 
EDWARD VROEQINDENUY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375230.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 375,230. 
 
J. W. T.INSMAN, 
PHOTOGRAPHIC ACCESSORY. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1887. 
 
WITNESSES 
64-yele? M. 
as 2 
g 
2 
22 
BY 
INWENTOR: 
of. 
ZZ 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. T.INSMAN, OF KIRKSVILLE, MISSOURI. 
PHOTOGRAPHIC ACCESSORY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 375,230, dated December 20, 1887. 
Application filed June 28, 1887. Serial No. 242,778. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
Cy 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHNW. T.INSMAN, of 
Kirksville, in the county of Adair and State 
of Missouri, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Photographic Accessories, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This invention has for its object the exposing 
in a novel manner on the floor or about the 
base of a subject to be photographed, either 
in front, back thereof, or around the same, 
grasses, Weeds, or grain, green or dry, and 
other vegetable products, including cut flow 
ers, to give a rural or ornamental appearance 
to the picture when photographed. It essen 
tially differs from the mere arrangement of 
flower pots or boxes containing natural 
grasses or flowers, or grasses worked or woven 
into mats in front of or about the subject, all 
of which have a different effect and do not pos 
sess the like conveniences. 
In my invention, which comprises a new 
photographic accessory for holding and ex 
posing objects, as above named, about or 
around the base of the subject, the grasses or 
plants are securely clamped in an upright po 
sition, as if growing. The clamping-frame 
which I use embraces parallel bars of any 
desired length adjustable in relation with 
each other to firmly hold the grasses or plants 
by their stems in between them, and one or 
more cross-feet for supporting the whole in a 
stable manner upon the floor or ground, with 
every facility for moving the same about as 
required, and so as to form any desired angle 
relatively to the plane of the picture to be 
taken. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
4O in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both figures. 
Figurel represents a viewin perspective of a 
female figure in the act of being photographed 
with my improved photographic accessory in 
a given position on the floor relatively to said 
figure or subject. Fig. 2 is a vertical trans 
verse section of the accessory or clamp. 
B the camera, in part, used in taking the pic 
ture. 
the floor in front of or about the subject, and 
serving to securely clamp or hold in an up 
right position in what may be termed sin 
gle file or narrow clusters natural grasses 
and grain D, which will appear as if growing 
in front of or about the figure or subject in the 
picture. 
The accessory C consists of a horizontal 
frame made of wood or any other suitable ma 
terial of any desired length and size, the same 
being made up of a bar, b, secured by Screws 
or otherwise to cross-feet or base-pieces c, that 
serve to give stability to the whole structure 
when placed upon the floor in proper rela 
tion with the subject to be photographed. 
Parallel with the bar b is another like bar, b', 
which is adjustable as a clamping-bar toward 
or from the other or fixed bar, b, by means of 
screws d or otherwise, for the purpose of in 
serting the lower ends or stems of the grass, 
grain, or plants in between the bars b b, and 
clamping them to their places in an upright. 
position, the feet or base pieces c and bars b 
b' lying, respectively, in horizontal and verti 
cal planes or thereabouts. By slightly slack 
ening the screws d, the grass, grain, or plants 
may readily be removed and others substi 
tuted for them when required. . 
The whole device is portable and may be 
used over and over again with the same 
clamped grasses or plants, if desired, and it 
may readily be adjusted to occupy any de 
sired angle in relation with the plane of the 
picture, or any number of these accessories 
may be used in concert and be placed about 
or around the main figure or subject. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In photographic scenic exposures, the 
method herein described of exposing as a 
ground scene grasses, grains, or plants in 
front of or about the subject being photo 
graphed, which consists in mechanically 
clamping said grasses, grains, or plants in an 
upright position, as set forth. 
2. The within-described photographic scenic 
A is the subject being photographed, and accessory, which consists of longitudinal 
clamping-bars adapted to hold between them 
grasses, grains, or plants, means for adjusting 
C is the photographic accessory placed upon said bars relatively to each other, and one or 
45 
25 
30 
35 
90 
IOO. 
 
2 
375,230 
more cross-feet or base-pieces supporting or means for securing and holding it in variable 
carrying the whole, essentially as specified. 
relation with the barb, substantially as shown 
accessory adapted to hold in an upright posi- 
tion grasses, grains, or plants, of the horizontal 
barb, the cross-feet or base-pieces c, and the 
adjustable horizontal clamping -bar b', with 
3. The combination, in a photographic scenic and described. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. TNSMAN. 
MYRON F. STRACK, 
WM. M., PRICE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375330.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BERKEY. 
B00T JACK, 
No. 375,330, 
Patented Dec. 27, 1887. 
- WITNESSES 
zziz 
PereRS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
/ 
 
INVENIOR 
46- T 
PC3%-?, 26 
2% arrows, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS BERKEY, OF GRAND RAPIDs, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THE GRAND 
RAPIDS FELT BOOT COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BOOT - JACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 375,330, dated December 27, 1887. 
Application filed December 4, 1886. Serial No. 220,750. (No model.) 
D is a cleat or brace for strengthening the 
To all, whon, it Trval? concern: 
connection of the foot-piece and the support. 4o 
Be in known that I, JULIUS BERKEY, a citi 
I prefer to construct my improved boot-jack 
Zen of the United States, residing at the city 
of wood, the support B having the grain run 
of Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent and 
ning in a different direction from the grain 
5 State of Michigan, have invented a certain 
in the foot-piece A, so as to give greater 
new and useful Improved Boot-Jack, of which 
the following is a specification. 
strength when connected thereto. The bolt C 45 
Myinvention relates to a bootjack provided 
is preferably provided with a head, so as more 
readily to engage with the hole or ring in the 
with a foot-piece and support for one end of 
heel of the boot shown in Fig. 4. The boots 
Io the boot-jack of peculiar construction, here 
shown in Fig. 4 are designed to represent felt 
inafter described; and the object of my inven 
boots, having attached to the rear heel of each 
tion is to provide a jack suitable for removing 
of said boots my improved back-stay and jack 
felt boots, and which may be used for any 
strap, and my invention in boot-jacks is pe 
boot having a device, in connection with the 
culiarly adapted to be used in connection with 
I5 lower rear part of the heel of such boot, for 
engaging with my improved boot-jack, more 
felt boots constructed as shown in Fig. 4. 
In Fig. 4, S represents the back-stay, and 
fully described hereinafter. This object I ac 
P the opening or ring with which the pin C 
complish by means of the device illustrated 
engages. This form of a felt boot is made the 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
subject of a separate application for a patent 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional view of 
the boot-jack through the pin or screw which 
by me, and is considered no part of the inven 
tion described in this application. 
is designed to engage with the heel of the 
Having thus described my invention, what 
boot. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the 
entire boot-jack. Fig. 3 is an elevation of a 
I claim to have invented, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
25 bolt, pin, or Screw which is used in connection 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
with and formas apart of the boot-jack; and Fig. 
boot-jack adapted to be used with felt boots 
4 shows the boot-jack and the position of the 
which are provided with a socket or aperture, 
feet in removing the boot, 
the boot-jack having the foot-piece A, shaped 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
to fit the foot of the user, and provided with 
A represents the foot-piece raised near the the headed jack-pin C and a suitable support, 
as and for the purpose described. 
center, so as to fit into the hollow of the foot. 
C represents the pin, bolt, or screw driven 
or fastened in any suitable manner in the head 
B represents a standard or support which 
supports one end of the foot-piece A, as shown 
in the drawings. 
JNO. A. COVODE, 
WILL H. G.A.Y. 
3O out the several views. 
2O 
5 5 
35 of the jack. . 
JULIUS BERKEY. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375430.txt	(Model.) 
G. W. SNADO.N. 
CHURN 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 27, 1887. 
II a 
s 
- 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
No. 375,430. 
a T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITWESSES 
 
(Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
G. W. SNAD ON, 
CHURN. 
 
||||||||||||||| 
IWWEWTOR 
Attorney 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington.D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. SNADON, OF WATKINS, MISSOURI. 
CHURN 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 375,430, dated December 27, 1887. 
Application filed February 25, 1887. Serial No. 228,886. (Model.). 
To all, whon, it nail? concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. SNADON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wat 
kins, in the county of Dade and State of Mis 
souri, have invented a new and useful Churn, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
churns, in which the cream-holder is recipro 
cated by mechanism hereinafter specified. 
The object of my improvement is to provide a 
churn of simple construction and of light run 
ning power. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the churn. Fig. 2 
is a side view. Fig. 3 is a vertical section, 
and Fig. 4 is an end view. 
The frame portion A is composed of the legs 
2, connected at the ends by cross-bars, the 
lower cross-bars, 2', being made of sufficient 
width to form rigid supports or fastenings for 
the spring-bars 3, rising vertically therefrom. 
Upon one side, at the upper ends, the legs 2 
are connected with the cross-piece 3, which 
forms the bearing for the gear-wheel B and 
crank journal 4. 
B is a large gear-wheel connected by the 
journal 4 to the Crank or handle 4, and meshes 
with the smaller gear-wheel, 5, journaled to 
- the frame at 6. 
C is a fly-wheel journaled within the frame 
portion opposite to the gear 5, and connected 
to said gear-wheel 5 by the crank-shaft 5. 
D is a rectangular box, closed at its ends, 
sides, and bottom, within which the cream-can 
E is placed. The cream-can E is of tin, or any 
suitable metal, provided at the top with the 
opening 7 and the screw or threaded covering 
7, the opening 7 being large enough to admit 
the proper utensil for removing the butter 
after the churning. Handles are also provided 
for removing the cream-can. The upper frame. 
of the box D projects outward from the four 
corners, as shown at 8, and is bifurcated at the 
O 
15 
25 
35 
ends. Within the bifurcations are pivoted 
the upper ends of the spring-bars 3. 
To the crank portion of the crank-shaft 5' 
vertical posts 9 are journaled, one end extend 
ing below the crank-shaft, and the upper end 
reaching above the shaft and alongside of the 
box D, and having the link-bars 1010 pivoted 
thereto above and below the crank-shaft, the 
outer ends of said link-bars being pivoted to 
depending arms 9 of box D. 
By means of the link-bars so placed the posts 
9 are held in a vertical position on the crank 
shaft, and upon operating the gear-wheels the 
proper vibratory motion is given to the churn 
box, and the spring-bars operating in connec 
tion there with serve to hold the cream-box in 
a horizontal position, and to materially aid 
the same in its vibratory motion, and to re 
lieve the operator from extra work. 
The cream-cah E is removable, and there 
may be two or more of them fitted to the box 
for the convenience of large dairies. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
In a churn, the combination of the frame A, 
the rectangular box D, having the lateral pro 
sections 8, the cream-can E, having the threaded 
cover, the spring-bars 3, pivoted to the projec 
tions 8 and rigidly secured at their lower ends 
to the cross-bars. 2 of the frame, the shaft 5, 
having the crank portion, and having the ver 
tical posts 9, journaled thereon, the link-bars 
10, pivoted below the crank-shaft, the link 
bars 10, pivoted above said crank-shaft, the 
said link-bars being pivoted to the vertical 
posts 9, and to the depending arms 9 of the 
box D, the gear-wheels B and 5, and the fly 
wheel, all constructed as and for the purpose 
specified. 
GEORGE W. SNADON. 
Witnesses: 
DE WITT C. TURNER, 
F. H. HoLLAND. 
55 
fo 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375530.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 375,530, 
G. H. BR 0 WIN. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2; 
FRUIT CRATE. 
Patented Deo, 27, 1887. 
 
?E 
ssssssss!!!<<<<< OZ 
wae,)--~~~~ 
?<<<< 
N 
SAMPiitwossos 
3vvive Mulbot 
> #8 
spersey/ 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, wathington, P. G. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE HENRY BROWN, OF PETERSBURG, VIRGINIA, ASSIGNOR TO ELIZA 
BETH BROWN, OF SAMIE PLACE. 
F R U T C RATE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tuetters Patent No. 375,530, dated December 27, 1887. 
Application filed June 28, 1887. Serial No. 242,788. (No model.) 
5 
O 
I 5 
25 
- 
To all whom, it may concer72: 
- 
Beit known that I, GEORGE HENRY BROWN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Pe 
tersburg, in the county of Dinwiddie and 
State of Virginia, have invented a new and 
useful Improvementin Fruit-Crates, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
fruit-crates, and particularly that kind which 
is used for the transportation of berries; and 
it consists in the peculiar construction and 
combination of devices, which will be more 
fully hereina?ter described, and pointed out im 
the claim. 
The primary object of my invention is to 
provide a fruit-crate which has its side and 
end slats arranged in such a manner that a per 
fect ventilation of the fruit will be provided, 
the current of air passing between the boxes 
or baskets of berries in a horizontal plane and 
upwardly through the same in a vertical 
plane. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide a fruit-crate which is simple and effective 
in its construction, strong and durable, easily 
handled and readily understood, and cheaply 
manufactured. 
I attain these objects by the construction 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, 
wherein like letters of reference indicate simi 
lar parts in the several views, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved fruit-crate with the lid thereof shown 
closed. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical sec 
tion with the divisional partitions in position, 
with some of the baskets removed. Fig. 3 is 
a transverse sectional view of the crate om line 
ar ac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a front elevation, and 
Fig. 5 is a horizontal section. 
A indicates the longitudinal bottom and top 
strips secured to the sides of the crate, and B 
B the vertically-arranged strips secured to the 
longitudinal strips A, as shown. 
On the ends of the box a series of horizon 
tally-arranged strips, C, are provided and se 
cured to vertically-arranged strips C'. The 
vertically-arranged strips C are covered at 
their upper and lower portions by the longi 
tudinal strips A, secured to the sides of the 
box. While the strips B and C are arranged 
at right angles to each other, they are at the 
same time arranged in a vertical plane as to 
their width. In the said crate divisional par 
titions are formed, which are removable from 
the crate, said partitions ID consisting of a 55 
series of horizontally-arranged strips, d, to the 
top surfaces of which transverse strips b' are 
secured, running at right angles to the strips d. 
These partitional strips D, as will be readily 
understood, are for the purpose of separating 6 
the baskets and forming the support therefor 
by coming in contact with the top surfaces of 
the row below. ... Between the strips B B a 
space, B, is left, which is situated in a line 
with the space formed between the baskets 65 
* when arranged in the crate, as shown in Fig. 
1, and more clearly shown in Fig. 5. Thein 
tervening spaces separating the strips C regis 
ter or coincide with the longitudinal spaces 
formed between the rows of baskets in a man- 7o 
ner similar to the spaces separating the strips 
B with relation to the transverse spaces be 
tween the rows of baskets, as before described. 
When the baskets have been arranged 
within the crate, the strips C are inline with 75 
and thereby close the upper edge of the bas 
kets, and thereby prevent any fruit being 
withdrawn therefrom through the openings 
formed between the strips. C. 
ranged in position in the crate, the outer lon 
gitudimal strips, d, rest on the top edges of the 
baskets and close them at this point, prevent 
ing the removal of fruit therefrom through i 
the spaces B' between the strips B B. The 85 
transverse strips b', being mounted on the top 
portion of the longitudinal strips b, leave a 
space between the under side thereof and the 
top surface of the berries contained in the 
basket, thereby providing means for ventila- 9o 
tion, and at the same time preventing the 
berries from being injured by the pressure ex 
erted upon the divisional partitions. 
The bottom of the crate is also provided 
with longitudinally-arranged strips E, having 95 
divisional spaces arranged between the same, 
which permit of ventilation of the berries 
from this point, and also provide a drain 
through which the juice of injured berries. 
may run, and mot remain in the crate and in- Ioo 
jure the other berries therein contained. The 
lid or cover F is provided with a series of 
When the divisional partitions D are ar- 8o 
W 
35 
45 
 
2 
375,530 
strips, S, on its under side, which are adapted 
to engage with the sides of the baskets when 
in position in the crate and hold the said bas 
kets in place, also providing a space over the 
top thereof, which in like manner prevents 
injury to the top surface of the berries, and 
provides an air-passage for the ventilation 
thereof at this point. These strips s are ar 
ranged transversely on the lid or cover F, and 
extend only across the under surface of the 
Said cover to such a distance that sufficient 
Space will be left in each side to the rear and 
front of the under side of the cover as to form 
no obstacle in closing the lid against the top 
of the crate. On the top surface of the lid or 
cover F two transverse strips, F", are secured 
at each end of the said cover, and when the 
Crates entire are arranged for transportation, 
and when one may be placed upon the top of 
another, a space will be le?t between the bot 
tom and the top of the other, (shown in Fig. 
4) whereby the fruit may be ventilated, as 
Will be readily understood. The central lon 
gitudinal strip, E, of the bottom strips of the 
crate extends only to the outer edge of each of 
the lowermost strips, C, of the sides of the 
crate, while the strips E, arranged on each side 
thereof, extend out flush with the vertical end 
strips, C. When two crates are placed end 
to end, an air-space is provided in the end by 
this construction, and an opening will be 
formed in the lower portion of each crate by 
the reduced construction of the centralstrip, E. 
In the construction of crates heretofore 
placed upon the market the slats have been 
usually placed over the divisional spaces 
formed by the adjacent portion of two baskets, 
and the ventilation at this point thereby cut 
off, leaving the plain sides of the basket to 
close with the openings. By my improve 
ment, however, Iso construct the crate that the 
space formed between a row of adjoining bas 
kets will be in direct alignment with the space 
provided between the slats B B. The edges 
of the baskets on the sides of the crates are 
covered by the side strips of the divisional 
partitions D. In the ends of the crate the 
spaces between tlhe adjoining rows of baskets 
also register With the openings between the 
strips C, and in this instance the top edges of 
the baskets are covered by the said strips and 
means provided for preventing the removal 
of fruit from the basket during transportation 
at this point. 
By my improved form of construction it will 
be Seen that I can obtain a perfect unob - 
structed ventilation by providing a construc 
tion which allows a continuous regulation of 
air between and over the baskets of berries at 
all points and at all times, and, further, the 
malicious practice of removing berries from 
crates or boxes is prevented by having the 
tops of the boxes inclosed, as herein set forth. 
The novelty and utility of my improved de 
vice being obviously apparent and apprecia 
ble, it is un necessary to further enlarge upon 
the Samme herein. 
It will be observed that the end horizontal 
strips, C, close the space between the divis 
ional partitions and the top of the baskets, as 
such strips C align with the tops of the bas 
kets, as shown in Fig. 3; also, that when a car 
load of these crates are arranged side by side 
the openings separating the front strips, IB, all 
align with each other, causing an unobstructed . 
ventilation throughout the entire row of crates, 
tlhe open space separating each pair of baskets 
coming in a direct line with the opening be 
tween the strips B, as will be readily Seen upon 
reference to Fig. 5. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
The combination of the crate, comprising 
the vertical strips B, set apart at intervals, 
causing intervening Spaces JB', and the longi 
tudinal strips A, secured to the strips B at the 
top and bottom, said strips AB forming the sides 
of the crate, the horizontal end strips, C, ar 
ranged at right angles to the strips B and set 
apart, causing intervening spaces, and the verti 
cal strips C, secured to the ends of strips C, said 
strips C C' forming the ends of the crate, lay 
ers of baskets filling the interior of the crate 
and arranged with ventilating-spaces between 
them and opposite to the Spaces between the 
strips C, a partition, D, between two of the 
layers of baskets, comprising longitudinal 
strips and transverse strips above the longi 
tudinal Strips, the Strips resting on the two 
sides of each row of baskets and abutting 
against the horizontal end strips, C, of the 
crate, whereby there is secured ventilation 
transversely and horizontally of the crate and 
also between the berries and their covering 
partition D, and the berries are confined se 
curely, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE HENRY BROWN. 
Witnesses. 
WM. M. JONES, 
T. S. BECKWITH. 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
I 5 
25 
45 
SO 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375630.txt	(No Model.) 
R. M. HERMANCE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 375,630. 
STOVE OR RANGE, 
Patented Dec. 27, 1887. 
  
aS ex 
a e 
aaraaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaarasa 
exY. 
 
siblesses 
Z24 A 
24-6%uoso 
3x2 x2.-- 24. 
?4-6 &v-uo 11 tot 
f 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, O.C. 
(No Model.) 
R. M. HERMANCE. 
STOVE OR RANGE 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 375,630. 
 
Patented Dec. 27, 1887. 
N. refers, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 375,630. 
R. M. HERMANCE, 
STOWIE OR RANGE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 27, 1887. 
 
 
 
22 
RUls wYKXAAXAXAMAa Aws. A 
= - a 
St. 
a saataaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaSt E 
al 
s 
S 
or -b. N is 
2 
essesss 
ama 
s 
 
H 
N. perers, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C.' 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD M. HERMANCE, OF 
POUGHKEEPSIE, NEW YORK. 
STOVE OR RANGE. . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 375,630, dated December 27, 1887. 
Application filed January 24, 1887. Serial No. 225,352. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To att, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RICHARD M. HER 
MANCE, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Poughkeepsie, in the county of Dutch 
ess and State of New York, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Stoves 
or Ranges; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters and 
figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
cooking-stoves having low - down reservoirs, 
which improvements will be fully understood 
from the following description, when taken in 
connection with the claims and annexed draw 
ings, in which-- 
Figure l is a perspective view of my im 
proved stove complete. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
section taken in the plane indicated by dotted 
line acac on Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a top view of the 
stove, a portion of the top pot-hole plate be 
ing broken away to expose certain parts be 
low it. Fig. 4 is a vertical transverse section 
through the stove in the plane indicated by 
dotted line ygy on Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a vertical 
transverse Section through Fig. 3, taken in the 
plane indicated by dotted line & e thereon. 
Fig. 6 is an elevation of one side of the stove, 
showing the inclined ventilating-flue. Fig. 7 
is a top view in detail with the top plate of 
the stove removed, showing one of the verti 
cal ascending flues closed at its upper end by 
an extension of the top oven-plate, this being 
a modification of my invention. 
ters, A designates the outer walls of my im 
proved stove, and B the top plate, through 
which are a series of pot-holes, two (a a) of 
which are located directly over the fire-box 
C, four (a) over the horizontal chamber b, and 
two (aa) over the flues in rear of the damp 
ers c c, which latter are applied on a single 
rod, c, in planes at right angles to each other, 
as shown in Figs. 3 and 7. The fire-box C ex 
tends partly into the oven and is located at 
one corner thereof, as indicated in Fig. 3, and 
it is arranged lengthwise of the body A of the 
stove. This fire-box extends partly or wholly 
in the oven D, for heating the same, as well 
as giving more room in the oven and enabling 
me to apply the heat more evenly to vessels 
in the pot-holes, whether the direct damper c' 
is open or closed. The said fire-box C is pro 
vided with an inclined back wall, d, a fuel 
feed, d, a grate, a front door, and an ash-pit 
drawer, as shown in Fig. 2. 
On one side of the fire-box is the main oven 
door k, and on the opposite side of this box is 
a supplemental smaller door, c', both afford 
ing access to the oven. 
Above the oven D and below its top plate, 
B, is the horizontal flue b, the smaller flues, 
b'b', and also an intermediate flue, b. At the 
outlet b of the fire-box, leading into the flue 
b, is a short contracting-plate, b, which not 
only somewhat contracts said outlet laterally, 
but operates to direct the products of combus 
tion toward the front of the flue b before they 
pass into any one of the horizontal flues b'b'. 
It is proper here to remark that when one of 
these latter flues is open the other is closed, 
and vice versa, the dampers c c' being ad 
justed for this purpose. The said contract 
ing plate b not only serves the purpose 
above described, but it also affords a sub 
stantial support for the top plate, B. The 
flue b' communicates with a vertical flue, e, 
which in turn communicates with a horizons 
tal flue, e, on one side of a partition, f, thus 
directing the heated products toward the front 
of the oven beneath the same. From the front 
of the oven the heated products are directed 
backward on the opposite side of the partition 
f, through a flue, e, to and through the flue 
e', and through the flueb' to the common out 
Referring to the annexed drawings by let- let b". This course of the currents takes place 
when the indirect damper c is opened and the 
direct damper c is shut, as shown in Figs, 3 
and 7. 
When the damper c is shut and the damper 
c' is opened, most of the products of combus 
tion pass from the flue-chamber b directly into 
the flueb', and thence out through the pipeb'. 
E designates a low-down reservoir-casing on 
the plate G, in which is suspended the reser 
voir F, Through the wall Garethree passages, 
which communicate with the space surround 
ing the reservoir F. The passage gleads from 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
90 
95 
OG 
2 
375,630 
25 
35 
O 
5 
the vertical fluee into the said spaceg, the pas- 
sage g leads from said space into the vertical 
flue e', and the passage h leads from the narrow 
vertical fluebinto said space g. The passage 
g' is provided with a damper, h", fast on the rod 
h', as shown in Fig. 7. 
When the dampers c l, are open, the pro 
ducts of combustion will pass from the flues e 
h at the back of the oven into the spaceg, and 
thence through the passage g into the flues e' 
b' and out through the passage b", thus highly 
heating the reservoir by utilizing a portion of 
the products of combustion on their way from 
the fire-box to the common outlet b'. 
H designates an inclined flue on one side of 
the body of the stove, provided with one or 
more passages, t, at its bottom leading into 
this flue from the bottom flue, e, beneath the 
oven, and one or more openings, t, leading 
from the top of this flue Hinto the flueb'. 
This gives a direct outlet from the flue e' to 
the escape-pipe b, whether the extension in of 
the top plate of the oven is employed or mot. 
If this extension n is employed, the aperturest 
t should be enlarged, as indicated by dotted 
lines, Figs. 6 and 7. 
It will be observed that I have a passage, s, 
leading through the upper part of the oven 
wall into the inclined flue H, and also a pas 
sage, p, leading from the oven into the flueb. 
By these means I am able to properly venti 
late the oven. 
By reference to Fig. 3 it will be observed 
that I make an aperture, i, through the Wall 
of the reservoir. This is done for the purpose 
of allowing steam to escape into the space g", 
and from thence to pass through aperture of 
into the outlet-?lues. I am thus able not only 
to prevent steam from the reservoir entering 
the room, but also in a great degree to facili 
tate the draft of the stove. 
It will be seen from the above description 
- that when an indirect draft over and under the 
oven is required I open damper c and close 
damper c'. When, as in starting a fire, a di 
rect draft is required, I close damper c and 
open damper c. 
The narrow flue band the vertical flue e are 
at all times in communication with the space 
g surrounding the reservoir F, and this space 
can be put in communication with the outlet. 
flue by opening the damper h". 
Directly above the front oven-door is a reg 
ister, W, the object of which is to admit air in 
regulated quantities into the space b to mix 
with the highly-heated products therein, and 
thus promote the combustion of the smoke 
and gases. By means of this register W the 
heat in the oven can be tempered or regulated 
as may be required. 
I do not wish to limit myself to the exact 
construction herein set forth, as many slight 
changes might be resorted to in the form and 
arrangement of the several parts shown and 
described without departing from the spirit 
and scope of my invention. 
l 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
1. The combination, in a cook stove pro 
vided with an oven and a fire-box, the latter 
being located at one corner of its body, extend 
ing laterally into the oven, of the main flueb, 
directly over the oven and communicating 
with the fire-box, the narrow flue l', commu 
nicating with the main flue b and the Space 
surrounding the reservoir, the reservoir and 
casing therefor attached to the stove-body, the 
flues b and b, situated on each side of the flue 
b and communicating with the flue b, the di 
viding-flue e, communicating with the flue b 
and the flues e' ex under the oven, the flues e. 
ex, the ascending flue e, connecting the flues 
under the oven with the flueb, and the damp 
ers c c, applied to the flues bb, whereby the 
products of combustion may either be directed 
into the outlet directly or down under the Oven, 
substantially as herein described. 
2. The combination, in a cook-stove pro 
vided with an oven and a fire-box, of the res 
ervoir and casing therefor attached to the 
stove, the flue b over the oven, the flueb", con 
necting the flue b with the space around the 
reservoir, the flues b' b, communicating with 
the flueb, the dampers c c', applied to said 
flues, the dividing-flue communicating With 
the flueb' and also with the space surrounding 
the reservoir by the opening g, the flues e and 
e under the oven and connecting the divid 
ing-fluee with the ascending flue e', the as 
cending flue e', communicating with the fuel 
on top of the oven and also with the Space 
surrounding the reservoir by the opening g 
in the wall of the stove, and the damperh', ap 
plied to the opening g, as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
3. The combination, in a cook-stove, of the 
oven D, the fire-box projecting laterally into 
the oven and located at one corner thereof, the 
doors K and c, communicating with the oven 
on each side of the said fire-box, the broad 
flue b over the oven, the flues b and land 
their dampers, the dividing-flue e, communi 
cating with the flue l', the flues e' and e^ un 
der the oven and connecting the dividing-flue 
e with the ascending flue e', the ascending flue 
e, connecting the base-flue ex with the flueb 
on top of the oven, and the inclined flue H, 
connecting the base-flues with the common 
outlet of the stove, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, in a cook-stove, of the 
oven D, the fire-box located at one corner of 
the stove and projecting laterally into the 
oven, the broad flue b over the oven and com 
municating with the fire-box, the flues b b, 
communicating with the flue b, the dampers 
applied to said flues b b, and the flues e e'e 
e, connecting the said flues b b, and the de 
flecting-plate b, located at one end of the fire 
box outlet and partially contracting or closing 
the same, Substantially as described. 
5. The combination, in a cook-stove, of the 
. 
. 
- 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
IOO. 
IO 
IIS 
I 30 
375,630 
3 
oven D, the fire-box C, the broad flue b over 
the oven and communicating with the fire 
box, the flues b'b' on top of the oven and com 
municating with the flueb, the dampers ap 
plied to the said flues b b, the flues e, e, ex, 
and e, leading down at the back and under the 
oven and connecting the said flues b'b', the 
inclined flue H, leading to the common outlet 
of the stove and communicating by means of 
openings with the base-flue ex and the oven D, 
substantially as described. 
6. The combination, in a cook-stove, of the 
oven D, the fire-box located at one corner of 
the stove and projecting laterally into the 
oven, the broad main flue b over the oven, the 
central flue, b, connecting the flue b with the 
space surrounding the reservoir, the reservoir 
and casing attached to the stove, the flues b'b' 
on each side of the said fuel, the dampers 
applied to the flues bb, the flues e, e, e^, and 
e, connecting the flues b'b' and leading down 
around under the oven, the said flue e' com 
municating with the space surrounding the 
reservoir and the steam-space of the reservoir 
by means of openingsg' and i, and the damper 
h', applied to the said openings g, substan 
tially as described. 
IO 
25 
7. The combination, in a cook-stove, of the 
oven D, the fire-box C, projecting laterally 
into the corner of the said oven, the doors K, 
communicating with the oven, the broad flue. 
b over the oven and communicating with the 
fire-box, the damperV, applied to the said flue 
b, the deflecting and contracting plate bat 
one end of the fire-box outlet, the horizontal 
flues b' b, communicating with the flueb, the 
dampers c c', applied to the flues b'l', the ver 
tical flues e e, communicating, respectively, 
with the flues bb, and also with the space 
surrounding the reservoir by means of open 
ings g g, the damper applied to opening g, 
the reservoir and casing attached to the stove, 
and the horizontal base-flues e' e^ under the 
oven and connecting the vertical fuese and e, 
all arranged substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
35 
45 
RICHARD M. HERMANCE, 
Witnesses: 
THEO. L. HERMANCE, 
WM. D. RIGGS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375730.txt	(No Model.) 
H. F. BURKHARDT. 
COMBINED SAW AND PLANER, 
No. 375,730. 
Patented Jan. 3, 1888. 
A's. 7. 
 
2 2. 2 
A. 
R 
7 
. 
7. 
A 
5.2 
a 
s 2 % % 
WITNESSES: 
A 6.3. 
%\Z / 
A 
BY 
NVENTOR: 
ORNEY. 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer. Washington .C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOWARD F. BURKHARDT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
COMBINED SAW AND PLANER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 375,730, dated January 3, 1888. 
Application filed December 13, 1886. Serial No. 221,387. 
(No model.) 
IO 
I5 
25 
To all whom, it may concern 
Be it known that I, HoWARD F. BURR 
HARDT, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing in the city and county of Philadelphia, 
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Combined Saws 
and Planers, which improvement is fully set 
forth in the following specification and accom. 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
Wood saw and planer enabodying my inven 
tion. Figs. 2 and 3 represent sections of por 
tions thereof, respectively on lines a ac and y 
2), Fig. 1, on enlarged scales. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
My invention consists, first, of a gullet-saw 
having secured to it a planing-knife, which is 
located in a throat coincident in position with 
the gullet-lines of the tooth of the saw, where. 
by the gumming of the saw may be continued 
into and beyond said throat, so that service of 
the same does not terminate when gumming 
reaches the throat. 
It also consists of a combined saw and planer 
having a planer-knife with cutting-edges on 
opposite sides, so as to plane both sides of 
the cut or knife made by the saw. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
3. circular gullet-saw, and BB the gullet-lines on 
the sides of the saw coincident with the gul 
lets C of the saw-teeth, serving as guides dur 
ing the operation of gumming the teeth, be 
ing, as is well known, cut or clearly marked 
on the sides of the Saw. In the present case 
only four lines B are shown as sufficient to 
illustrate my invention. 
In the saw, between the periphery and 
center, and passing through the blade, are 
formed throats or recesses D, which, as wiil 
be seen, are bounded on their long sides by 
the gullet-lines B B, so as to be coincident in 
position with the gullets C of the teeth, which 
is of advantage in planing, as the planer-bits 
therein follow in the same line as the cutting 
teeth of the saw, and their relative position 
thereto is easily maintained during the suc 
cessive sharpenings of said teeth. In each of 
the throats are fitted planing-knives E, which 
So have cutting-edges F Fon opposite sides, said 
45 
It will be seen that when the saw is in op- 65 
edges projecting slightly beyond the sides of 
the saw, as most clearly seen in Fig. 2. The 
knives, which are in length shorter than the 
throats, have grooves in their ends, in which 
fit tongues formed on the walls of the throat, 55 
so as to retain the said knives firmly in place; 
but any other suitable means for securing the 
knives in position may be employed, as the 
particular means of fastening the same to the 
blade is not in itself a part of this invention. 6o 
On the face of each of the knives is an open 
ing, G, for the insertion of a pry or other im 
plement for the purpose of removing the Said 
knife from the throat. 
eration the knives act against the cut in the 
wood and plane both sides of the same, and 
it will also be seen that as the saw wears off 
in use the gumming of the teeth may be con 
tinued into the throats D and beyond the 7o 
same, whereby the saw is adapted for service 
until its smallest possible diameter is reached. 
I am aware that it is old to construct a SaW 
having throats for the insertion of planer-bits; 
but I am not aware that the throats formed 
in those having gullet-lines have ever been 
placed as herein described, whereby when the 
saw is worn to the throats it can be sharpened 
past the same, and thus the portion inside of 
the throats may be utilized. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A saw having gullet-lines B Band throats, 
the side walls of which are coincident with the 
gullet-lines B B thereof, and provided with 
planer-bits secured in said throats, all sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A saw provided with gullet-lines B B' 
and planer-bits secured in the throats in said 
saw, each of the said bits having cutting-edges 
on opposite sides of the saw, and the said 
throats being coincident with the gullet-lines 
of the teeth of said saw, all substantially as 
described. 
85 
75 
HOWARD F. BURKEIARDT. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
A. P. GRANT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375830.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 375,830. 
W. F. OLIN. 
GRAIN BINDER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
m 
Patented Jan. 3, 1888. 
II 
C 
feelinoiding Hilltic, 
V 
EAEEEE-41, 
P-O-II- 
9. F 
s 
.. 
4/6th esses C 
7. 
Ers I 
sittiitiit IIT 1, verset' 
as sis 
 
 
N. PETERs, rhoir-lthographer, Washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
W. F. OLIN, 
GRAIN BINDER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 375,830. 
Patented Jan. 3, 1888. 
 
2-H - - 
----- 
a U.S. N. a. 
SEC2''. 
: 
t 
a- 
----- 
E% C t 
WSWSW 
4/ieness 625 
FIG.6. 
Zaz ve it ta. 
Pres, Photo-lithographer, Washington, ... c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. F. OLIN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM DEERING, 
OF SAME PLACE. 
GRAN - B N DER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 375,830, dated January 3, 1883. 
Application fied October 19, 1886. Serial No. 216,655. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
(5 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. F. OLIN, of 
Chicago, Cook county, Illinois, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Self 
Binders, of which the following is a descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, making a part of this specification. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a rear elevation of a binding-ma 
chine having my improvements incorporated 
therein. Fig. 2 is a top plan view of the same, 
the deck, breast-plate, and other parts foreign 
to my invention being omitted. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation of a portion of the clutch mechanism. 
Fig. 4 is a top plan view of the same. Figs. 5 
and 6, a side view and a top plan view of de 
tails of the clutch-tripping devices. 
Referring to the drawings, A is the binder 
frame of the well-known Appleby type hav 
ing horizontal arms at the top and bottom to 
Support the knotter driving-shaft A and the 
needle-carrying shaft A". The needle-carry 
ing shaft A' has at one end a fixed-crank, A. 
- The knotter-shaft. A has fixed on its rear end 
the gear A', provided with a wrist or crank 
25 
pin, A", which is connected by a pitman, B, 
with the crank of the needle-shaft, so that at 
each revolution of the gear A* the needle re 
ceives an upward and downward vibration, as 
in existing machines. 
C represents the horizontal crankshaft, by 
which the packers are carried as usual. This 
shaft is mounted in suitable bearings in the 
frame and will receive a constant rotation 
through driving mechanism of any appropri 
ate character. 
D is the trip and compressor-shaft mounted 
horizontally in bearings in the frame and pro 
vided with the trip and compressor D', and with 
a crank, D'at the rear end, both parts being fixed 
rigidly thereon. The gear A' is formed with 
an irregular cam, E, on its side face. This 
cam engages and moves an anti-friction roller, 
F, mounted on one end of an arm, F, pivoted 
to the frame at the point Flying between the 
frame and the gear A'. The relative positions 
of the cam and the Wrist A are such that dur 
ing the advance of the needle the compressor is 
elevated and moved toward the same to assist 
in the compression of the gavel, and finally 
45 
35 
SD 
-- 
at the proper time the compressor is released 
and permitted to fall in order that the bundle 
may escape, these actions being essentially the 
same as in other machines already known in 
the art. 
In order that the compressor may oppose 
the needle elastically or with a yielding re 
sistance, I provide the moving end of the le 
ver F with a socket or barrel, F containing 
and supporting one end of a spiral compres 
sion spring, F. The upper end of the com 
pressor operating pitman G is jointed to 
the lower end of the stem or spindle F, which 
is extended upward through the barrel and 
the spring, and provided at its upper end with 
a nut, F, bearing on the spring and serving 
as a means for regulating its tension, so that 
the compressor may be sustained with more 
or less force, as the character of the grain may 
demand. When the compressor meets with 
excessive pressure, the spring F will yield, 
and, allowing the pitman G to descend, will 
permit the retreat of the compressor. 
The pitman G is preferably formed with a 
lateral wrist at its upper end, extending 
through and beyond the spindle F, for con 
nection with the tripping devices, as will be 
presently explained. 
The packer-shaft C, as before mentioned, is 
driven constantly, and is provided with a 
sprocket-wheel, C, connected by an endless 
chain, C, with a second sprocket-wheel, C, 
mounted on a stud, C, on the binder-frame, 
and receiving a constant rotation. On the 
stud or axis of the pinion Cismounted loosely 
a pinion, H, which engages and communicates . 
motion to the main gear A'. The pinion H 
carries the dog H', pivoted thereto. This dog 
has a shoulder, against which the semi-fric 
tion rollers H, mounted on the sprocket 
wheel C, engage when the parts are in opera 
tive position. 
The dog is acted upon by a 
spring, H, which has a tendency to keep it in 
position to engage the rolls. When thus en 
gaged, the dog communicates motion from the 
sprocket-wheel to the pinion H, and thence to 
the main gear and knotter-shaft in a familiar 
allie. 
My devices for permitting the above clutch 
ing devices to be engaged at proper intervals 
85 
90 
95 
CO 
2 
375,830 
and to be disengaged at proper times differs 
from the others at present known in the fol 
lowing particulars: 
Pivoted to the main frame, preferably con 
centric with the arm F, is the detent I, adapted 
to reach upward and engage the outer end of 
the dog or pawl H' and throw the same out 
of engagement, in order to stop the motion of 
the pinion H. The detent I has an arm ex 
tended rearward beneath the knotter-driving 
shaft A, terminating in the foot I, which un 
| 
derlies a cam, I', formed on the hub of the 
The detent I is also formed 
main gear A'. 
with a second arm, I, extending rearward and 
pivoted upon the journal which connects the 
pitman G to the spindle F. 
The operation of these parts is as follows: 
The rotation of the packer-shaft C causes the 
packers to compact the gavel against the com 
pressor D', while the pinion H and the main 
The compression of 
gear. A remain at rest. 
the accumulating gavel against the compressor 
D" forces the latter backward, and, rocking its 
shaft D, causes the arm D' to pull the pitman 
G downward against the resistance of the 
spring F. The pitman in its descent acts, 
through the arm I, to throw the detent I out 
of engagement with the dog H', whereupon the 
dog, engaging one of the rollers on the wheel 
C, causes motion to be transmitted through 
pinion H to the main gear A' and its cam. 
The rotation of the main gear through the 
parts before described causes the needle to be 
brought forward and the compressor to be ad 
vanced in the opposite direction. As the pin 
ion H makes four revolutions while the gear 
A makes one, the detent I must be retained 
in such position that the dog H will not strike 
it and disengage the clutch until the pinion 
has completed its fourth revolution, so as to 
complete the binding operation. The rotation 
of the gear A" causes its cam I to bear on the 
foot of the arm I' of the trip I and hold it 
down, and thus it is that the detent is kept out 
of action. At the termination of the binding. 
operation the cam I is carried clear of the de 
tent, and the latter, under the action of the 
spring, disengages the clutch mechanism. 
In order to keep the binding mechanism in 
its normal position and prevent the wheel A' 
from starting backward, as it frequently occurs 
with this form of clutch, I mount the spring. 
actuated pawl K on the wrist A of the main 
gear, the form and proportion of this pawl be 
ing such that when the gear A* reaches the 
- 
proper position of rest the dog falls behind 
and bears against the axis C of the pinion EI, 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
I am aware that grain-binding machines 
driven through a clutch which was disengaged 
by a detent have been provided with auto 
matic means for holding the detent out of ac 
tion until the completion of the binding action; 
but I believe myself to be the first to mount a 
cam on the shaft of the main gear-wheel and 
arrange it to act on the detent. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is- . 
1. In a grain-binder of the Appleby type 
having an overhead knotter-driving shaft, the 
combination of the main gear-wheel A', fixed 
on the knotter-shaft, its driving-pinion H, the 
continuously-rotating driving-wheel C, con 
centric with the pinion, the clutch devices to 
connect the driving wheel and pinion, the 
detent I, to hold the clutch out of action, and 
the can I, carried by the knotter-shaft, and 
acting directly on the detent to hold it out of 
engagement with the clutch, whereby the 
knotter-shaft is enabled to directly control the 
period of action of its driving-clutch. 
2. The gear A', mounted on the knotter 
driving shaft, the driving-pinion engaging di 
rectly therein, and the continuously-rotating 
driving-wheel C, concentric therewith, in com 
bination with the clutch-dog to connect said 
wheels, the clutch-tripping arm I, acting at 
one end directly on the dog, the compressor 
operating spring acting directly on the arm 
to cause its engagement, and the cam on the 
knotter-driving shaft also acting directly on 
the arm to hold it out of engagement. 
3. The detent. I, having arm I, and the stem 
or spindle F, and its encircling spring, in com 
bination with the positively - actuated com 
pressor - actuating lever F, sustaining the 
spring, and the compressor-pitman connected 
at one end to both the lever and the detent. 
4. The compressor - operating lever, the 
spring receiving support therefrom, and the 
stem or spindle passing through the spring, in 
combination with the detent-lever I, and com 
pressor-actuating pitman having one end con 
nected with both the stem and the detent by a 
single wrist or journal. 
WILLIAM. F. OLIN. 
Witnesses: 
J. F. STEWARD, 
WILERED TWINCH. 
65 
73 
75 
90 
IOO 
O 
2) 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US375930.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL FRIEDLAENDER AND BERNEIARD PRIEBS, OF OFFENBACH-ON-THE 
MAIN, GERMANY, ASSIGNORS TO K. OEEILER, OF SAME PLACE. 
PRODUCT ON OF ORANGE AZO DYE STUFFS. 
SPECIFICATION orithing part of Letters Patent No. 375,930, dated January 3, 1888, 
Application filed May 20, 1887. Serial No. 238,894. (Specimens.) 
O 
To all, whon, it Tay concer'7. 
Be it known that we, PAUL FRIEDLAENDER 
and BERNHARD PRIEBs, subjects of the Em 
peror of Germany, and residing at Offenbach 
5 on-the-Main, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Orange Azo Dye-Stuffs from 
tetrazo ditolyl chloride, metatoluylenediamine 
sulpho acid, and salicylic acid, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The orange coloring-matter to which our in 
vention relates belongs to the class of the so 
called azo compounds, and results by the 
action of one molecule of tetrazo-ditolyl chlo 
ride on one molecule of metatoluylenediamine 
I5 sulpho - acid (see Wiesinger, Berichte der 
Deutschen Chemischen Gesellschaft, VII, 464) 
and one molecule of salicylic acid. 
In carrying out our invention we first pre 
pare a solution of the hydrochlorate of tetrazo 
20 ditolyl by mixing thirty-one pounds of sui 
phate of tolidine, twenty-five pounds of muri. 
atic acid, (20 Baum,) and five hundred 
pounds of water, and adding to this mixture 
a solution of fourteen pounds of nitrate of 
25 soda in fifty pounds of water. It must be 
taken care to keep the mixture cool during the 
operation, the end of which is indicated by the 
dissolving of the sulphate oftolidine. The so 
prepared soiution of the hydrochloride of te 
3o trazo ditolyl is then allowed to run slowly into 
a cold solution of 20.2 pounds of meta toluy 
lenediamine sulpho-acid and 21.2 pounds of 
dry soda in one thousand pounds of water. To 
this liquid, which contains a brown insoluble 
35 precipitate, are added sixteen pounds of the 
soda-salt of salicylic acid in five hundred : 
pounds of water, whereupon the whole mix 
ture is allowed to stand at a temperature of 
30 to 40 centigrade until the precipitate 
4o disappears and a clear orange solution results. 
The coloring-matter is then precipitated by 
adding a sufficient quantity of salt, filtered, 
pressed, and dried. 
The chief characteristics of the dye-stuff 
prepared by the above process are as follows: 45 
It has the appearance of a reddish-brown 
powder and dissolves easily in hot water with 
an orange color. It is insoluble in hydro 
carbons. It is precipitated out of its watery 
solution by addition f dilute mineral acids in 
brown-red flakes, which dissolve in concen 
trated sulphuric acid with violet color. It 
shows a striking affinity for the raw-cotton 
fiber, which may be dyed without employ. 
ing any mordant, and stands soaping and di- 55 
lute mineral acids. 
Having thus described our invention and 
the manner of employing the same, what we 
claim, and wish to have secured by Letters 
Patent of the United States of America, is 
1. The process of producing the coloring 
matter herein described, consisting in prepar 
ing a solution of tetrazo ditolyichloride from 
sulphate of tolidine, in adding this solution to 
a solution of met atoluylenediamine sulpho 
acid and afterward adding a solution of sali 
cylic acid, substantially as herein described. 
2. The orange azo dye-stuff herein described, 
consisting of a reddish-brown powder easily 
soluble in hot water with an orange color, in 
soluble in hydrocarbons, and capable of pre 
cipitation from its watery solution by addi 
tion of dilute mineral acids in brown-red 
flakes which dissolve in concentrated sulphuric 
acid with violet color. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
75 
6.) 
6 5 
PAUL FREDLAENDER, 
BERNHARD PREBS. 
Witnesses: 
FRANZ EIASSLACHER, 
JOSEPH PATRICK, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376031.txt	(No Model.) 
G. A. EWENSON & F YOCUM. 
No. 376,031, 
STOCK WATERER, 
Patented Jan, 3, 1888, 
 
3/23S 
762722a-CC- g 
N. Perers, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
6eoye Z.Zvezzso72. 
777-zza7 Z/ocurve 
TWWEWTOE 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. EVENSON AND FRANK YOCUM, OF FINCHFORD, IOWA. 
STOCK-WATERER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 376,031, dated January 3, 1888. 
Application filed August 4, 1887. Serial No. 246,145. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
bent at right angles with each other. The end 
of the member chas attached thereto a weight, 
Beit known that we, GEORGE A. EVENSON 
and FRANK YOCUM, citizens of the United D, which may be, if desirable, adjustable 
States of America, residing at Finchford, in the 
thereon, and the end of said member enters a 
county of Black Hawk and State of Iowa, have 
groove or recess formed in the central portion 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
of the end board of the trough A, the lever en 
in Stock-Waterers; and we do hereby declare 
gaging with the lower portion of the recess, so 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
as to limit the downward movement thereof. 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
The member e of the lever is provided at its 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
end with a transverse pin, in rear of which is 
pivoted a platform, E, the supporting-arms f 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
of said platform being secured to the member 
or figures of reference marked thereon, which 
e of the lever by a suitable pivot-pin, so as to 65 
form a part of this specification. 
embrace said member and rest upon the pin. 
g. At the junction of the members d and e is 
Our invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in devices for watering live 
a transverse pin, F, which is rigidly secured 
stock, the object of our improvement being to 
thereto, said pin carrying at its ends boards 
provide a means whereby a tank or receptacle 
H. H., which are adapted to abut against the to 
may be kept supplied with water to a certain 
rear wall of the trough when the platform E. 
level by depressing the platform; and our in 
is depressed to its full extent. The upward 
play of these boards His limited by blocks h, 
vention consists in the construction and com 
bination of the parts, as will be hereinafter 
which are attached to the inner side of the rear 
fully set forth, and specifically pointed out in 
wall of the trough. The rear wall of the trough 75 
is provided with a pipe, I, which connects the 
the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
same with a water-supply tank. The end of 
this pipe I within the water-tank is encircled 
trate our invention, Figure 1 is a perspective 
by a short section of pipe of larger diameter, 
view of a device for watering live stock con 
or cap, K, said cap being provided with a rod, 8o 
structed in accordance with our improvement, 
I, which is bifurcated, so as to engage with 
one side thereof being removed and the top 
the transverse pin F, which is attached to the 
elevated, so as to show the interior construc 
lever hereinbefore referred to. 
tion, and Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view. 
- The operation of our invention is as follows: 
A refers to a suitable trough, the front end 
and sides being cut away at their upper edges, 
When it is desired that the trough should be 85. 
filled with water to the proper level, the plat 
So as to provide a compartment, the side walls 
form E is depressed. This will cause the 
of the front end thereof being of less height 
weighted end of the lever to be elevated, so as 
than the rear portion of the side walls. Be 
to slide the cap K away from the end of the 
tween the front and rear portion of the trough 
pipe, so that the water will flow from the sup- go 
is a depending board or partition, a, which 
ply tank to the receptacle, and as the trough 
extends slightly beneath the upper edges of 
the front portion of the trough. The rear por 
becomes filled the boards or floats H will rise 
with the water-level, and after the trough has 
tion of the trough or receptacle A is provided 
been filled to the proper level said boards or 
with a hinged top, by which, when elevated, ac 
floats will prevent movement of the lever un 
cess can be had to the interior of the rear por 
til the water is removed from the trough. It 
The upper edges of the front portion 
tion. 
is intended that the water-level should be 
are provided with wire or sheet-iron, which 
maintained in the trough A a slight distance 
will prevent the same being gnawed or eaten 
above the platform E, so that animals in drink 
by the animals. The interior of the rear por 
ing will depress the platform, so as to admit 
tion of the trough is provided with brackets 
a supply of water to take the place of that 
B B, which are rigidly secured thereto and 
drunk. When it is desired to cut off the sup 
provide supporting means for a transverse 
ply from the trough, the platform E can be 
shaft, C, upon which is mounted a weighted 
turned upon its pivot, so as to be in a vertical 
lever having members c, d, and e, which are 
95 
- 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
376,031 
position. The rod L. adjacent to the cap is 
provided with a nut, so that the movement of 
the cap can be adjusted, and the inner side of 
the cap is provided with a suitable cap or 
washer. 
We claim 
1. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of a trough, an elbow-lever pivoted 
within the trough and having its horizontal 
arm weighted and its vertical arm provided 
with a platform, a Supply-tank communicat 
ing with the trough, a valve to close commu 
nication between the tank and trough, and a 
rod connected at one end to the Valve and at 
its other end to the vertical arm of the lever 
near the platform. 
2. In a device for watering live stock, con 
structed substantially as shown, a weighted 
lever pivotally secured within the trough and 
provided with a platform, E, which is pivot. 
ally secured thereto, plates H. H., pivoted to 
the aforesaid lever, fixed stops for limiting the 
movement of the lever in both directions, and 
a rod carrying a cap, said cap being adapted 
to slide over one end of a supply-pipe, sub 
stantially as shown, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of a trough provided with a parti 
tion, an elbow-lever pivoted in rear of said 
O 
25 
partition, a weight carried in the horizontal 
arm of the lever, a platform secured to the ver 
tical arm of the lever to protrude beneath the 
partition, a supply-tank communicating with 
the trough, a valve to close said communica 
tion, and a rod connected at one end to the 
valve and at the other end to the vertical arm 
of the level. 
4. In a device for watering live stock, the 
combination of a receptacle constructed sub 
stantially as shown, a lever pivotally secured 
within said receptacle and provided with mem 
bers c, d, and e, a weight carried by one of said 
members, a platform pivotally secured to the 
lower member of said lever and adapted to be 
held in a horizontal position by a pin, g, plates 
II H, rod L, carrying a cap which is adapted 
to slide over the supply-pipe, and a receSS 
for limiting the downward movement of the 
weighted end of the lever, and blocks for lim 
iting the upward movement of the plates, the 
parts being organized substantially as shown, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE A. EVENSON. 
FRANK YOCUM. 
35 
15 
SO 
Witnesses: 
A. L. SMITH, 
H. C. HEMENWAY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376132.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 376, l32. 
G. C. BAKER, 
RAILWAY TRACK. 
Patented Jan. 10, 1888, 
t 
- 
- 
asse 
 
2 
 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE C. BAKER, OF DES MOINES, IOWA. 
RALWAY-TRACK. 
SPECIFICATION iorming part of Letters Patent No. 376,132, dated J anuary 10, 1888. 
Application filed June 9, 1887. Serial No. 240,738. 
(No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE C. BAKER, a 
citizen of the United States of America, and 
a resident of Des Moines, in the county of Polk 
5 and State of Iowa, have invented an Improved 
Railway - Track, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My object is to facilitate the building of rail 
roads, to reduce the cost of construction and 
repairs, to increase the durability of the rails, 
and to prevent the dangers and accidents in 
cident to the wear of the abutting ends of rails 
in a track. 
My invention consists in the construction of 
: 5 a railway-rail, a railway-chair, a cross-tie, and 
in forming a complete railway track, as here 
inafter set forth, pointed out in my claims, and 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which - 
Figures 1 and 2 are perspective views of 
pieces of my rail, showing the form of its op 
posite sides. Fig. 3 is an enlarged transverse 
sectional view showing my rail and chair com 
bined on a cross-tie. Fig. 4 is a perspective 
Fig. 5 is a top view of a 
section of a track, showing a continuity of the 
top surface of the rail, as required to prevent 
the abutting ends of the rails from wearing 
out more rapidly than their central portions. 
Fig. 6 shows the chairs formed integral with a 
metal croSS-tie. 
My rail of novel form consists of two mating. 
parts, A, that are so constructed that each part 
is complete in itself and can be set on either 
one of its edges on either side of the track, so 
that each piece is reversible endwise and inter 
changeable with any other piece in a complete 
track, as required to facilitate building a track 
or repairing a track. 
The outside face, b, of each piece A is pref. 
erably flat and plain and the inside face c 
concave. The top and bottom faces d incline 
upward from the outside face, b, and inside 
faces f border the concave c and incline in op 
posite directions, as required to fit together 
tightly when combined in a track, so that the 
head or top of a complete rail will be closed 
and practically solid, while its base will be en 
larged upon the chair, as clearly shown in 
25 view of the chair. 
- 
5Q Fig. 3. 
G is a flat-bottomed chair that has an up 
ward projection, h, at its center, tapering in 
ward and terminating with a head, m, that fits 
into the concave c of the rails when their plain 
bordering faces fengage the opposite sides of 55 
the projection h, and their faces d rest upon 
inclined planes n, that extend outward and up 
ward from the opposite sides of the base of the 
projection h. 
in are inclined planes that extend outward 
and downward from the planes in. Perfora 
tions allow spikes to be driven through the 
chair into a wooden cross-tie to fasten the 
chair. and rail jointly in a track; or bolts may 
be used to fasten them to a metal tie. 
r represents an angle-bar or fish-plate fitted 
to the chair and rail, and fixed thereto by 
means of spikes, and without boring the rails, 
to re-enforce the rails and track at the points 
where the rails and chairs are jointly fastened 7o 
to the ties. 
fo 
2. A railway-chair having a vertical projec- 8o 
I claim as my invention 
1. An improved rail for railways, consist 
ing of a straight bar having a concave in one 
of its side faces, and the faces on its edges in- 75 
clined in opposite directions, and the faces 
bordering the concave also inclined in oppo 
site directions, in the manner set forth, for the 
purposes stated. 
tion at its center, and a head or enlargement 
at the top of the projection, and an inclined 
plane on each side of the base of the said pro 
jection, for the purposes stated. 
prising mating rails A and chairs G, jointly 
fastened to cross-ties, in the manner set forth. 
4. Railway-rails having plain side faces, b, 
concave faces c, inclined edges d, and inclined 
faces f, in combination with railway-chairs 9o 
having projections h m and inclined planes in 
and in', substantially as shown and described, 
for the purposes stated. 
3. An improved railway rail and track com- 85 
GEORGE C. BAKER, 
Witnesses: 
J. C. TATE, 
TEIOMAS G. ORWIG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376233.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 376,233. 
D. CAMERON. 
SHEEP SHEARS, 
Patented Jan, 10, 1888. 
 
 
-222 2. 
64-4---ee. 
& Age A 
Zry 
ammil 
Life-E------ 
r 
* all 449 
 
  
 
  
 
S 
is 
Ea 22%a aa 
z 
It 
* - I 
ergo 
ZUU Z. 
Y 
Z reader. 
Zoza Za 4 mere 2. 
aw Aza 72% 
4-6-24%-4, 
m 
m 
- 2 22, 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
DONALD CAMERON, OF DETROIT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO WILLIAM C. 
MOONEY, OF INDIAN LAKE, MICHIGAN. 
SHEEP - SHEARS. 
SPECIFICATION cining part of Letters Patent No. 376,233, dated January lo, 1888. 
Application filed April 21, 1887. 
- 
. 
. 
cutter. 
To all, whom it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, DONALD CAMERON, of 
Detroit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Sheep-Shears; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in sheep-shears of that 
class which are provided with a rotating 
The object of the invention is to construct 
a device for the purpose named wherein the 
rotating cutter is operated by a spring, and to 
provide means for winding such spring during 
the operation of cutting or shearing. 
To this end the invention consists in the 
peculiar construction and arrangement of the 
winding mechanism and the application there 
of to a rotating cutter, and in the various com 
binations of the parts, all as more fully here. 
inafter set forth. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved de 
vice. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same. 
Fig. 3 is an elevation with front plate removed. 
Fig. 4 is an elevation of the cutter and comb. 
Fig. 5 is a horizontal section. Fig. 6 is a per 
spective of the rotating cutter-head removed. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, A represents the 
front table, and B the back table, of a suitable 
frame, the two plates being secured together 
by proper spreaders and girts, CD, respect 
ively. Properly journaled to these plates A. 
B is a shaft or drum, E, carrying a clock 
spring, F, and a drive-pinion, G, said pinion 
and shaft being provided with the usual ratchet 
and pawl and connected by a suitable chain of 
gear to the fan H, as in the ordinary construc 
tion of a clock-movement. 
I is a handle rigidly secured to the plate A 
near one edge thereof, while opposite thereto 
the operating-lever J is fulcrumed to the same 
plate, said lever J being spread under the 
action of the spring K. The short arm of this 
lever is connected, by a proper link, L, to a 
spring - ratchet, M, which engages with a 
55 
Setial No. 235,587. (No model.) 
ratchet, N, secured upon the projecting end of 5o 
the spring shaft or drum E. By operating 
the lever I, as in using a pair of shears, it will 
readily be seen that the spring may be easily 
wound upon the drum. 
At the front end of the plate B is rigidly 
secured a comb or finger-plate, O, the fingers 
of which radiate from a common center, as 
shown. 
P is a cutter-head, carrying upon its outer 
face a gear-wheel, R, which meshes with and 
is driven by the pinion G, the said gear and 
cutter-head being properly journaled between 
the plates A. B. The under face of the cutter 
head is slotted radially from the center to re; 
ceive any desired number of cutter-blades S, 
held in place by screws a, which may also be 
employed to secure the wheel R. upon the cut 
ter-head. 
T are set-screws tapped through the cutter 
head, the inner ends of such set-screws resting 
upon the face of the cutter, and are employed 
for regulating the depression of such cutters 
and their relation to the comb or finger-bar. 
In practice, the parts being constructed and 
arranged substantially in the manner - de 
scribed, the operator, by pressing the lever J 
toward the handle I, causes the spring to be 
wound upon the drum, which latter, through 
the connections named, imparts a rotary mo 
tion to the cutter-head, the cutters of which, S 
being slightly depressed at their outer ends 
in passing over the comb, make a shear cut.' 
By intermittently operating the lever J the 
Spring may be kept Wound up. 
By using a finer comb or finger-bar the de 
vice can be advantageously employed in clip 
ping horses. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In combination with a comb or finger 
plate, O, a rotating cutter-head, P, carryin 
independent cutters S, said cutter-head being 
adapted to be rotated by a spring motor-wheel, 
R, and the screws a passed through said wheel 
and cutter-head into the cutters, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination, With the frame and the 
spring-motor, of the comb O, rotating cutter 
head, cutters carried thereby, and set-screws 
- 
g 90 
95 
O 
25 
45 
2 
376,233 
T, tapped through said cutter-head for regul 
lating the depression of said cutters, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The combination, with the frame, the 
S spring-motor, and the pinion G on the shaft 
of said spring, of the spring-ratchet M, ratchet 
N on said spring-shaft, lever J, link L, con 
necting one end of said lever directly with the 
spring-ratchet, cutter P, gear-wheel R, carried 
thereby, comb O, cutters S, and the set-screws Io 
T, all constructed, arranged, and operating 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
DONALD CAMERON. 
Witnesses: 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
CHARLES J. HUNT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376333.txt	(No Model.) 
H. J. MOORE 
MACHINE FOR SEALING AND STAMPINGEN WELOPES, 
No. 376,333, 
Patented Jan, 10, 1888. 
(6.6% 
1/1. 
A. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOMER. J. MOORE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE BRYANT & 
STRATTON MECHANICAL APPLIANCE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACH NE FOR SEAL ING AND STAM PNG ENVELOPES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 376,333, dated January 10, 1888, 
Application filed August 23, 1886. Serial No. 211,600. (No model.) 
Fig. 4 is a plan view. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HoMER. J. MOORE, re 
siding at No. 209 Washington Boulevard, in 
the city of Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, and a citizen of the United 
States, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Machines for Sealing and Stamping 
Envelopes; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a clear and exact description of the 
nature thereof, sufficient to enable others 
skilled in the art to which my invention ap 
pertains to fully understand, make, and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, making part of this specification, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my device, 
showing an envelope in position thereon. Fig. 2 
is a sectional view on the line XX of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view on the line YY of Fig. 
4. 
Like parts are indicated by the same letter 
in all the figures. 
A is a box or receptacle, water-tight, and pro 
vided with the feet B B, on which it rests. 
C is the cover of such box, having in one 
corner the aperture D and in the opposite cor 
ner the aperture E. At one end it has an ele 
wated chute, F. In this box are two chambers, 
one marked G and the other H, as shown by the 
dotted outlines of such chambers in Fig. 4. 
J is a lever pivoted at K, theside of the box 
having an arm-piece, L, at one end, and curved 
so as to have its other end, MI, at right angles 
to its length. This end M projects into the 
aperture or area-way N, and carries the loose 
slide O. Resting on this slide is a column of 
stamps, P. Q is the cover for the aperture or 
area-way N, pivoted at R, so as to Swing laterally 
and uncover the way when desired. On top of 
the box and covering the aperture E is the 
raised portion S, having the lateral spring 
arm T, carrying the presser-bar U. The por 
tion S has an inwardly-curved arm, W, to which 
is suspended the flap W. Z is a wick which 
passes through the chute F. 
The use and operation of my invention are 
as follows: The chamber G is filled to a suita 
ble height, as indicated in the drawings, with 
water or moistening-liquid. 
The chamber H 
may be filled with ink, the aperture D being 
covered with a suitable lid to protect the same. 
The wick Zis placed so as to extend into the 
The flap W is of such length as to trail 55 
water and then to extend above the top of the 
chute F, its upper end being always moist or 
Wet. 
in the water, and it may be made of any desired 
material. When the envelope is to be moist 
ened and sealed, it is taken in the hand, its up 
per edge brought against the inner surface of 
the part S, as shown in Fig. 1, and its flap car- 6. 
ried over the extending arm and finger V. It 
will be remembered that the noistened flap is 
secured to the finger V, and as the envelope is 
pushed toward the left its flap passes along the 
gummed edge of the envelope-flap and moist 
By continuing the motion 
ens the envelope. 
of the envelope it passes under the spring 
presser-bar U, which lies close to the top of 
the box, and by the pressure thereon it is se 
curely sealed. The envelope is now forced un 
der the cover Q of the aperture or area-way N, 
and in such manner as that its corner where 
the stamp is to be placed passes over and is 
moistened by the wick Z. It is forced for 
ward until the corner to be stamped is di 
rectly over the top of the aperture or area-way 
N. The column of stamps P in the aperture : 
or area-way N are turned with their gummed 
sides upward. The lever J is now operated by 
means of the arm-button LSO as to force its 
end Mupward, thus carrying the slide O and 
stamps P to the top of the aperture or area. 
way N. Here the upper stamp is forced 
against the moistened corner of the envelope 
and by the pressure on the lever is firmly 
glued thereto. The envelope may now be re 
moved and is ready to be mailed. By this 
means I arrange a combined inkstand and en 
velope sealer and stamper. 
I claim this my invention and desire to Se 
cure by Letters Patent 
An envelope-sealer consisting of a moisten 
ing-fluid receptacle and a raised portion hav 
ing an arm which carries a moistening-flap and 
is adapted to pass under the envelope-flap, and 
the spring-presser bar which passes over such 
envelope-flap and seals the same when moist 
ened. 
The above signed by me this 18th day of 
August, 1886. 
- 
HOMER. J. MOORE. 
75 
Witnesses: 
J. E. LINDLEY, 
C. L. HARPHAM. 
S. 
O 
5 
25 
35 
O 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376433.txt	(No Model.) 
F. N, ETHRIDGE, 
HEEL TRIMMING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 376,433. 3 
 
Patented Jan. 17, 1888. 
I 
W T N esses 
 7%.26 
in Venith R. 
AeANA w. ATAlpgas 
(No Model.) 
No. 376,433, 
F. N. ETHRIDGE. 
HEEL TRIMMING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 17, 1888, 
- 13 
  
 
82.27 
s. 
- 
r 
- 
In Ventor. 
35. 
it a y 
 
(No Model.) 
F., N, ETHRIDGE, 
HEEL, TRIMMING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 376,433. 
Patented Jan, ll, 1888. 
 
 
- a 
 
 
 
 
  
EAE 
 
 
22 
% 
Zaz 
As 
P 1 
i. 
 
N 
R3% N N 
tS 
 
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
F. N. ETHRIDGE, 
HEEL, TRIMMING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
Patented Jan. 17, 1888. 
(No Model.) 
wM 
 
 
  
W T N esses 
(No Model.) 
F., N, ETHRIDGE 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 376,433, 
HEEL. TRIMMING MACHINE, 
Patented Jan. 17, 1888. 
Witnesses: 
Inven to R: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK N. ETHRIDGE, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE HALF 
TO JOSEPH M. TAYLOR, OF SAME PLACE. 
HEEL-TRIMMING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 376,433, sate 5 January 17, 1888. 
Application filed July 20, 1887. Serial No. 244,800. (No model.) 
2O. 
?o all uhon, it inctly concern. 
Be it known that I, FRANK N. ETHRIDGE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lynn, 
in the county of Essex and Commonwealth of 
5 Massachusetts, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Heel-Trimming Machines, of which 
the following, taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is an 
IO elevation of the front part of the machine em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a similar 
View of the end of the machine, the line of ob 
servation being as indicated by the arrow C. 
Fig. 3 is the plan of a section on line 33, Fig. 
15 1. Fig. 4 is an elevation showing the side of 
the randing-knife. Fig. 5 is a similar view of 
the front face of the same. Figs. 6, 7, 8, 9, 
10, 11, and 12 are views of certain details to 
be referred to or described hereinafter. 
This invention relates to heel - trimming 
machines; and the object, and nature thereof 
will be fully described, and then specifically 
claimed hereinafter. 
Fig. 10 is a perspective view representing 
25 one of the trimming-knives detached. The 
special formation of the knife may be readily 
ascertained by inspecting this view of the 
drawings. Three of said knives are employed 
to form the trimming-tool or cutter-head, and 
3o Fig. 7 of the drawings represents the three 
knives assembled together. 
Fig. 6 is a section of the assembled cutter 
on line 6 6 of Fig. 7. 
In the machine three knives are assembled 
35 about the rotating shaft A, as shown in Fig. 
3. The curved faces d(see Fig. 7) of the knife 
Shanks are permitted to bear upon the shaft, 
(see Fig. 3,) and the knives are securely bound 
upon the shaft A by means of the nut lc and 
4O intermediate clamping-collars, e. e. To this 
end the collars and knife-shanks have their 
contiguous faces beveled, as shown in Fig. 3. 
Said shaft A is suitably journaled in the col 
umn B, and is revolved by means of belt E, 
Fig. 8 of the drawings is an end elevation of 
a flanged collar, F, and Fig. 9 is a side eleva 
tion of the same. Said collar has a central 
bore to receive the sleeve H, which is an ex 
45 Fig.1. 
m 
- 
55 
tension from the standard B. The collar is 
divided at the point h, and is provided with a 
bolt, m, to the end that it may be clamped 
firmly to the sleeve H. The collar, when not 
tightened by the bolt, is permitted endwise 
movement on the supporting-sleeve H, to the 
end that it may be moved toward and from the 
cutter-head. This arrangement allows knives 
of different width to be used in forming the 
cutter-head without interfering with the col 
lar. To prevent the collar from turning on 60 
the sleeve H when loosened, I employ an or 
dinary spline or key. (Not shown.) The heel 
rest P and guard in are supported by the col 
lar F, and the end wise movement of the collar 
operates to bring the said rest and guard up 
to or away from the cutters, and the desired 
position of these parts relative to the cutters 
having been attained, the whole may be secured 
by simply clamping the collar, as before de 
scribed. To this end the guard in and the 
heel-rest P are made in one piece; or, if in 
separate pieces, they are firmly secured to 
gether. - They are further provided with a 
yoke, S, (see Fig. 12,) to the end that they 
may be readily combined with the collar F, 75 
and also permit adjustment thereon in a di 
rection at right angles to the axis of the col 
lar. The connbination with the collar is ef. 
fected by removing the clip T and passing 
the yoke over the collar and again affixing the 
clip. Said clip is provided with an opening 
to receive the flanged nut w, as shown, and 
the nut is threaded to turn on the screw-study. 
The stud is fixed securely in the collar F, 
and consequently the turn of the nut will cause 85 
the yoke to move on the collar F in a direc 
tion at right angles to the axis of the collar or 
supporting-sleeve H. By this mechanism the 
guard in and rest P may by an appropriate 
turn of the nut v be moved toward and from 
the shaft A and adjusted to the varying sizes 
of the different cutter-heads which may from 
time to time be used. It will be understood 
that the yoke S is prevented by the study 
from turning on the collar, and is thus main 
tained in the position to support the heel dur 
ing the operation of trimming. The faces 10 
of the cutting-knives determine the shape to 
9O 
95 
376,433 
5 
O 
be imparted to the heel by the operation of 
trimming. To this end the heel is placed upon 
the heel-rest P and pressed forward to the 
cutters, which revolve very rapidly and cut 
away the heel until the top lift or extreme 
outer edge of the heel bears upon the guard 
n, whereby the onward movement of the heel 
is then arrested, and thereupon it is slowly 
turned about in the usual way and all parts 
thereof are presented to the action of the cut 
ter. Combined with the cutter-head is a rand 
cutter, 11. This cutter is represented in de 
tail by Figs. 4 and 5 of the drawings, Fig. 4 
being a side elevation and Fig. 5 a face eleva 
tion thereof. Said rand-cutter is secured to 
the end of shaft 12, which shaft is journaled 
in a head-block, 13, which in turn is supported 
by a column, 14. A belt, 15, in parts motion 
to the shaft 12, causing the rand-cutter to 
travel in time, direction, and speed uniformly 
with the trimmer-head. 
It is the purpose of the rand-cutter to travel 
in the rand-crease and trim the edge of the 
heel-seat. To this end it is provided with a 
guard or shield, 16, that bears against the 
shoe-upper and protects it from being injured 
by the sharp edges of the rand-cutter. The 
cutting-edges 17 of the rand-tool overlap a 
portion of the cutters (t, as shown in Fig. 3, 
to which purpose the face of the rand-tool is 
chambered out, so as to receive the end of the 
cutter-head, as shown. In use the rand-cut 
ter travels in between the heel-seat and the 
shoe-upper, and it becomes necessary for the 
rand-cutter in following the curvature of the 
heel to move toward and away from the trim 
ning-cutter, and to permit this movement the 
head 13, in which the shaft 12 is journaled, is 
made in two parts. The upper partisarranged 
to travel in a suitable groove formed in the 
bottom part, and it is provided with anti 
friction wheels 21, to facilitate and make easy 
the endwise movement of the shaft. A spring, 
22, operates to press the shaft 12 forward with 
a yielding pressure. It is desirable that the 
lower edges, 17, of the rand-cutter shall be at 
all times in close proximity to the surface of 
the triminer-cutters at the point or line of 
contact with the heel. It is important, there 
fore, that the rand-cutter shall at this point 
follow the cross-sectional curvature of the 
cutter-face 10 while passing backward or for 
ward, according to the endwise movement of 
the shaft 12. To this end the head 13 is pro 
vided with a suitable tang or stud fitted to 
turn in a socket in the top of column 14, and 
the shaft 12, while moving endwise, also per 
mits a swivel movement that allows the rand 
cutter to conform closely to the curvature of 
the trimmer-faces, and at all times to bear 
closely upon the cutter-faces along the line of 
contact with the heel. 
In operating this machine the workman 
takes hold of the shoe and places the heel 
thereof upon the heel-rest P. He then presses 
2 
the heel forward, to be cut away by the cutter 
surface 10 until the edge of the topmost lift of 
the heel bears upon the guard n, the rand-cut 
ter being allowed at the same time to enter 
the rand-crease. The heel is then turned 
about, and its entire edge-surface is presented 
to the trimmer-cutters in the usual main her. 
The rand - cutter meantime yields and con 
forms automatically to the varying Curvature 
of the heel, and contracts or extends the cut 
ting-surfaces 10 by overlapping more or less 
thereof. The trimming - surface 10 in this 
manner is automatically suited to the vary 
ing height of the heel. 
What I claim as of my invention, and desire 
by Letters IPatent to secure, is 
1. In a heel-trimming machine, the combi 
nation of a shaft and means for revolving the 
same, a trimmer-tool mounted on Said shaft, 
and a heel-rest for supporting the heel, a rand 
cutter mounted on an independent shaft in 
substantially the same axial plane with the 
cutter-shaft, and independent means for re 
volving said shaft and rand-cutter in the di 
rection and uniformly with the trimmer-tool, 
substantially as described. 
2. In the heel - trimming machinc lhercin 
described, the combination of a shaft and 
means for revolving the shaft, a trimmer-tool 
mounted on said shaft, and a heel-rest for Sup 
porting the heel, a rand-cutter mounted on an 
independent shaft in the same axial line as 
the trimmer-shaft and overlapping a portion 
of the trimmer-tool, and independent means 
for revolving the rand-cutter uniformly with 
the trimmer-tool, substantially as described. 
3. In a heel-trimming machine, the combi 
nation of a shaft and means for revolving the 
shaft, a trimmer-tool mounted on said shaft, 
and a heel-rest for supporting the heel, coin 
bined with a rand-cutter, said rand-cutter being 
mounted on an independent shaft in the same 
axial line as the trimmer-shaft and adapted 
to permit movement in line with the axis of 
rotation of the trimmer-tool, and independ 
ent means for revolving the rand-cutter uni 
formly with the trimmer-tool, all substantially 
as described. 
4. In a heel trimming inachine, the combi 
nation of a shaft and means for revolving the 
shaft, a trimmer tool mounted on said shaft, a 
heel-rest, P, for supporting the heel, a top-lift 
guide, n, yoke S, and collar F, said heel-rest 
and top-li?t guide being formed or combined 
in one piece and adapted to permit adjust 
ment, as described, in a line at right angles to 
the axis of rotation of the trimmer-tool, Sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination, in a heel-trimming ma 
chine, of the heel-rest P, top-lift guide n, the 
yokeS, the flange-Supporting collar F, mounted 
on the sleeve H of the trimmer-shaft, screw 
study, and flanged nut v, and trimmer-tool, 
substantially as described. 
6. In a heel-trimming machine, thesha?t 12, 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Go 
65 
o 
95 
OO 
IO 
I 2S 
376,433 
3 
8. The combination of the shaft A, the cut- Io 
the head 13, and the rand-cutter 17, in combi. 
nation with the trimmer-tool carried on an in-ters a, the collars ef, and clamping-nut k, Sub 
dependent shaft, substantially as described. 
7. In a heel-trimming machine, the shaft 12, 
the divided head 13, the spring-cutter 22, the 
rand-cutter 17, and means for revolving the 
cutter 17, in combination with the heel-trim- 
ming-tool mounted upon an independent shaft, 
substantially as described. 
FRANK N. ETHRIDGE. 
w 
stantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
C. Y. ETHRIDGE, 
C. B. TUTTLE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376533.txt	(No Model.) 
A. LINDGREN. 
DRAFT EQUALIZER. 
No. 376,533. 
Patented Jan. 17, 1888. 
22 gree 
2 y - as 
E. 
6. 
g 
- f 
C 
-- 
ress 
y 
Zeala Siz 
A 
91. 
e. 
s 
7. 
i. 
57 C. 
2. 
--et- 
- as: see tes 
lefess 
secretar 
77 
A. 
6. 
as 
ck 
WITWESSES 
Zacovo 7& Z. .9/ec/60 
MY/N M M . 
. . 
. 
IWWEWTOR 
%g, 24427 el 
Y 
24, 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithograpier. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST LINDGREN, OF MOLINE, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE MOLINE PLOW 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
DRAFT-EQUALIZER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 376,533, dated January 17, 1888. 
Application filed October 14, 1887. Serial No. 252,320. (No model.) 
Io mals with a vehicle or implement, 
2O 
I5 such manner that three of the horses may travel four animals. 
I claim is 
To all whom it may concern: 
ends of the levers DD are connected by links 
Be it known that I, AUGUST LINDGREN, of g, or otherwise, to opposite ends of a bar, h, 
Moline, in the county of Rock Island and State which is in turn connected at its middle by a 
of Illinois, have invented certain Improve- coupling, i, to a singletree, E. The levers D 4o 
5 ments in Draft-Equalizers, of which the fol. and Dare connected, respectively, at their 
lowing is a specification. 
outer end by couplingsk to singletrees F and G. 
Draft eveners or equalizers have heretofore | The distance between the fulcrum of the 
been made in a great variety of forms for the lever A and its outer connection, c, is three 
purpose of connecting a number of draft-ani. times the distance between the fulcrum and the 45. 
inner connection, e. Under the above ar 
My invention relates to an equalizer for use rangement it will be perceived that the four 
in Connection with four animals traveling singletrees may be arranged in line, and that 
abreast, and is more particularly designed for the strain applied by the team to the imple. 
Connecting the team with a wheeled plow in ment will be evenly apportioned between the so 
Having thus described my invention, what 
on the unplowed land and the fourth travel in 
the furrow. 
The four-horse equalizer consisting of the 
In the accompanying drawing the figure 
represents a top plan view of my contrivance. lever A, fulcrumed nearer one end than the 55 
Referring to the drawing, A represents a other, the singletree B, attached to the longer 
horizontal lever working on a fulcrum, a, which end of lever A, the doubletree C, attached to 
will be provided with a clevis, b, or other the shorter end of said lever, the levers D and 
means of attachment to the implement. The D', mounted at opposite ends of the double 
long arm of the lever is connected at its ex- tree, the singletrees F and G, attached to the 6o 
25 tremity by a vertical pivot, c, to a link or arm, outer ends of the levers D and D', respectively, 
d, which is extended forward and connected and the intermediate singletree, E, connected 
at its front end to a singletree, B, to which one to the inner and longer ends of the levers D 
of the draft animals is attached. The shorter and D. 
arm of the lever A is connected at its extrem- 
the vertical pivot e' of a doubletree, C, the presence of two attesting witnesses. 
pivot being located at the middle. To the op 
posite extremities of the doubletree I connect 
by vertical pivotsf two horizontal levers, D 
35 D', having their pivots located one-third of 
their length from the outer end. The inner 
3o ity by a clevis, e, or equivalent coupling to hand, this 12th day of September, 1887, in the 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 65 
AUGUST INDGREN. 
Witnesses: 
A. L. CARSON, 
A. A. CRAMPTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376633.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 376,633, 
W. T. CARROLL. 
SELF LUBRICATING PUTTEY, 
Patented Jan. 17, 1888. 
 
 
44 eace 40.42eedle 
928)i? vessey 
(9Boo. 8, &cy- 
3. 
34-uo 14toz 
90 Wow 8. (avuoB2. 
"" " a 42 
N. PeTERs. Photo-Lithographor, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM T. CARROLL OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SELF-LUBRICATING Pull EY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 376,633, dated January 17, 1888. 
Application filed July 28, 1887. 
Serial No. 245,485. (No model.) 
To all wivoni, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM T. CARROLL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Worcester, in the county of Worcester and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Lubricating 
Pulleys; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, which, in connection with the draw. . 
ings making a part of this specification, will 
enable others skilled in the art to which my 
invention belongs to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to a self-lubricating 
pulley or wheel, and to that class which is 
provided with a chamber or receptacle within 
the hub, extending around the bearing, for 
containing the lubricant, and which chamber 
is in direct communication with the bearing 
of the pulley or wheel, so that the same shali 
automatically lubricate its bearings. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
self-lubricating pulley or wheel provided with 
a chamber to hold a large quantity of lubri. 
cant, which will be regularly and evenly ap 
plied to the bearing of the pulley by means 
contained within said chamber without any 
waste, and at the same time the bearing will 
be kept even and Smooth and will not become 
gummed up by reason of the lubricant con 
stantly being in contact there with. 
My invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction of a loose pulley or 
wheel of the class described rotating on a 
shaft or axle, as will be hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and the nature indicated by the claim. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation of a pulley embodying my improve 
ments mounted on a shaft, with a part broken 
away to illustrate the interior construction and 
arrangement thereof. Fig. 2 is a central ver 
tical section on line a ac, Fig. 1, looking in the 
direction of the arrow, same figure. 
In the accompanying drawings, 1 is a pulley 
or wheel of my improved construction, pref. 
erably cast in one piece, with the central por 
tion, 2, and rim 3 connected by the arms 4. 
The central portion, 2, is made hollow, and 
has an annular chamber, 5, formed therein, ex 
tending completely around the hub 6 of the pull 
ley or wheeland in direct communication with 
the bearing of the pulley or the shaft or axle 
7, extending through the hub 6. (See Fig. 2.) 
O 
15 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
- 
The open end or mouth of the annular cham 
ber 5, which extends around and is in direct 
communication with the shaft 7, is of the same 
diameter as the diameter of the chamber 5 it 
self. (See Fig. 2.) 
The annular chamber 5 within the central 
portion, 2, of the pulley contains the lubricant, 
which is inserted through a tube, 8, extending 
through and secured in a hole made through 
one side of the central portion, 2, of the pull 
ley close to the hub 6. (See Fig. 2.) Said 
tube S may have a plug or stopper fitted into 
its outer end to prevent any escape of the lu 
bricant from the chamber 5. 
Within the annular chamber 5 are a number 
of balls, 9, adapted to roll loosely around 
therein and to come in direct contact with the 
shaft 7, upon which the pulley revolves, and 
to apply the lubricant contained within the 
chamber 5 directly to said shaft or the bear 
ing of the pulley by coming in contact there 
With. 
It will thus be seen that as the pulley 1 re 
volves on its shaft the balls 9, contained within 
the lubricant-chamber 5, as above described, 
will be carried around with the pulley and 
at every revolution thereof pass through the 
lubricant in the lower part of said chamber, 
and be carried above the shaft upon which the 
pulley is mounted and drop down on said shaft, 
coming in direct contact therewith, and thus 
applying thereto the lubricant, with which 
they are charged. 
It will be understood that the balls 9 are 
placed within the chamber 5 by inserting them 
through the hub 6 of the pulley before the 
same is mounted on its bearing, and prevented 
from dropping or coming out of Said chamber 
5 by the shaft 7, extending through the hub 6 
of the pulley. 
The advantages of my improved construc 
tion of a lubricating pulley or wheel will be 
apparent to those skilled in the art. When 
the pulley or wheel is at rest, the lubricant and 
balls 9 remain in the lower part of the cham 
ber 5 out of contact with the bearing of the 
pulley. When the pulley revolves, the lubri 
cant contained within the chamber 5 will not 
be in direct contact with the bearing of the 
pulley, but will be regularly and evenly ap 
plied thereto at every revolution of the pulley 
or wheel or when the pulley stops by means 
55 
yo 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
376,633 
of the balls 9, which are contained within the nular chamber for holding the lubricant within 
chamber 5 ald come in direct contact with the hub and in direct communication with the I5 
said bearing of the pulley. 
bearing thereof, the open end of said chamber 
I have shown in the drawings and more es-surrounding the bearing being of the same 
Specially described my invention as applied to diameter as the chamber itself and provided . 
a loose, pulley mounted on a shaft; but the with one or more balls to come in direct con 
same may be equally well applied and used in tact with the bearing of the pulley to apply 20 
connection with wheels mounted and turning the lubricant thereto, substantially as shown 
on axles. 
and described. 
WILLIAM T. CARROLT. 
to 
Having thus described my invention, what 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
A lubricating pulley or wheel having an an- 
Witnesses: 
JoHN C. DEWEY, 
MI. IRALPII DIRYDEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376734.txt	(No Model.) 
W. R. DAWIS. 
CAR COUPLING. 
2 sheet-sheet 1. 
 
No. 376,734, 
Patented Jan, 24, 1888. 
EE 
S. 
s 
--- 
- 
NS 
-P-P- 1. 
eae 
AeSas 
S 
EE 
S2 
2 
sESES 
ESS2E 
SEAS 
E Eas 
7 
N24 
E 
(No Model.) 
No. 376,734. 
   
V. R. DAVIS. 
CAR COUPLING, 
Patented 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Jan. 24, 1888. 
45 s 
e 
E. 
 
 
 
 
ESE 
 
 
 
s 
size 
282.voscy 
eas sy 
 
. 
s ES is 
a 
cana C. 
ES 
sees 
UNITED STATES 
t. 
VAN R. DAVIS, of 
CAR-co 
PATENT OFFICE. 
TEMPLE, GEORGIA. 
UPLING. 
th 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 376,734, dated January 24, 1888, 
Application filed October 6, 1887. 
Serial No. 251,644. (No model.) 
of the link from sudden shocks when the cars 
Be it known that I, VAN R. DAVIS, a citizen are stopped, which would be apt to injure or 
The curved portions of the respect 
ive parts of the draw-bar and link permit the 
link to move laterally for the purpose of coup 
The link at its forward 
end is hooked, as indicated by the letter c, so 
as to engage the similarly-hooked end of the 
The extremity of 
link of the connecting car. 
each link is beveled, as indicated by the letter 
ld, so that when two come together they move 
each other laterally until the hooked portions 
pass and are in position to be engaged. The 
engagement is effected by means of the flat 
springs e, which press the links toward each 
other. 
To the outer ends of the link is secured an 
eye or staple, D, from which extends a chain 
to an upright shaft, E, which is journaled in , 
the truck of the car. The said shaft projects 
above the floor of the car and has a hand-wheel 
at its upper end, by which it may be turned. 
\The said shaft is also squared at g, and has a 
ratchet-wheel secured to it at that point, which 
is engaged by a pawl, h, whereby the wheel 
and the link may be locked to hold the link 
back out of engaging position when required. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S In a car-coupler, the draw-bar B, horizon 
tally pivoted to the shank C, backed by the 
flatspringe, secured horizontally to said draw- . 
bar, and theinward rear-extension grip-piece, c, - 
in combination with the eye D, connected by 
chain to squareshaftB, having ratchet adapted 
to engage with pawl h on platform of car, all . 
arranged and operated substantially as shown 
and specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
To all whom it may concern: 
of the United States, residing at Temple, in break it. 
the county of Carroll and State of Georgia, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Automatic Car-Couplers; and I do ling and uncoupling. 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others, skilled-in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in car. couplers; and it has for its objects. 
to provide for automatically coupling and un 
coupling the cars, so as to prevent the neces 
sity of a road-hand from entering between the 
cars, and thus prevent the accidents attendant 
upon the ordinary methods of coupling and 
uncoupling. These objects I attain by the 
means illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a bottom plan view showing the 
coupler joined. Fig. 2 is a top plan view of 
the coupler detached. Fig. 3 is a side eleva 
tion of the same, and Fig. 4 is a side elevation 
of wheel-shaft and chain connection. 
The letter A indicates the truck of the car, 
and B the draw-bar, secured thereto in the or 
dinary manner. The draw-bar does not ex 
... tend quite to the end of the truck, and at its 
outward end it is slotted horizontally, as shown 
in the drawings, the slot forming a recess 
wherein the shank of the coupling-link C is 
pivoted. The outward end of the draw-bar is 
squared for about two-thirds of its width, as 
indicated by the letter a, the remaining por 
tion of its width being rounded, as indicated 
by the letterb in the drawings. The coupling 
link at the part adjoining the Shank is shoul 
dered, as indicated, about two-thirds of the 
width of the shoulders being squared, so as to 
set firmly against the squared portion of the 
end of the draw-bar and relieve the pivot-pin 
JOEL PHILLIPS, 
THOS, B. GRIFFIN. 
WAN R. DAVIS. 
Witnesses: 
Y 
so 
55 
1. 
65 - 
. 
7o 
75 
. . 
85. 
O 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376834.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 376,834, 
 
J. M. STONE, 
SPOOLING MACHINE. 
- 
Patented Jan. 24, 1888. 
3. 16.&.4-6-2 1 
264/36.v, 
2sez///52Creef 
2%r, herz. w 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPH M. STONE, OF NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO 
... 
THE DAVIS & FURBER MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SPOOLING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 376,834, dated January 24, 1888. 
al 
Application fied January 3, 1887. Serial No. 223,193. No mode.) 
This invention has for its object to provide spooling - machine with my improvements 60 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JosepH. M. STONE, of 
North Andover, county of Essex, and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improvement. 
in Spooling-Machines, of which the following 
description, in connection with the accom. 
panying drawings, is a specification, like let 
ters on the drawings representing like parts. 
a Spooling-machine with readily-operated and 
improved means for raising both ends of the 
Spool positively and uniformly from the drum 
when the spool has been filled with yarn and 
it is necessary to remove it from the machine 
or when it is desired to raise the spool at any 
stage in the operation of filling it. The spool 
raising device acts also, as hereinafter shown, 
to Weight the spool; and when more pressure 
than the weight of the device itself affords is 
needed to force the spool against the drum 
provision is made for increasing the pressure, 
as will be described. I have also provided 
the spooling-machine with mechanism for vi 
brating or reciprocating the guides commonly 
used in such machines. 
Spooling-machines usually have two 'guides,' 
perforated with holes through which pass the 
yarns on their way to the spool, which is 
turned by the drum, the office of the guides 
being to lay the yarn on the spool in short sec 
tions or rings as the guides are vibrated from 
side to side, these guides being provided with 
as many holes as there are yarns to be put 
upon the spool. 
Prior to my invention one of these guides 
has been vibrated-viz., the guide nearest the 
spool--the other guide remaining stationary; 
but thisis objectionable, because the yarn com 
ing from the stationary guide wears creases in 
the rolls, the effect of these creases being to 
injure the yarn and the rolls themselves. Also, 
I am aware that to overcome this difficulty of 
the creases both the back and front guides 
have been vibrated; but whenever this has been 
done, so far as I am aware, the mechanism for 
vibrating the guides has been so arranged that 
the guides have been moved simultaneously in 
opposite directions, which plan did indeed. 
overcome the trouble of the creases on the 
So rolls, but as the guides were moved in oppo 
site directions the yarn was strained and in 
35 
3C 
- 
. 
jured by being conducted alternately to the 
right and then to the left between the guides. 
In this my invention both guides are recipro 
cated simultaneously in the same direction, 55 
and the yarn is not strained and the rolls are 
not creased. 
Figure 1, in front elevation, but partially 
broken out, shows a sufficient portion of a 
added to enable them to be understood; Fig. 
2, a vertical section of Fig. 1 in the line ac; 
Fig. 3, a detail of the right-hand end of Fig. 1, 
chiefly to show the devices moved by the shaft 
. 
of the winding-drum; and Fig. 4, a sectional 65 
detail in the linea', Fig. 3. 
y 
The side frames, A. A held together by 
suitable girts, A', have suitable bearings for 
the reception of the shafts or journals of the 
guide-rolls B B and the winding drum or cyl- 7o 
inder B, all of usual construction, the shaft 
of the said drum or cylinder having a belt 
pulley, B, to receive a suitable belt by which 
to rotate it. The shaft of the drum B has at 
one end a worm, B', which engages a worm - 75 
gear, a, fast on a short horizontal shaft, a, at 
the outside of the frame, the said shaft a hav-, 
ing attached to it, preferably, a double-throw 
cam, a, though one of single throw may be 
used, which acts upon the toe of a lever, b, 
pivoted at b, the upper or opposite end of the 
said lever being slotted or forked to embrace 
a pin or stud, 2, of a bracket or arm, c, (see 
Fig. 3,) the opposite ends of which have boxes 
or hubs, which receive in them the ends of 85. 
two guide-bars, cc, they being secured in 
the said boxes by suitable set-screws, as 78. 
The guide-bars are each provided with a set 
ries of holes for the passage through them of 
yarns w from suitable bobbins or from mule or go 
other cops held in a creel-frame of usual con 
struction, (not shown,) the said guidebars 
being simultaneously reciprocated for a short 
distance in the same direction, thus obviating . 
the cutting of the yarns into the rolls BB, 95 
the movement of both guides in the same 
rather than in opposite directions at the same 
time enabling the strain on the yarns to be 
reduced. The cross-beam D has a series of 
open eyes, d, which serve as guides for the Ico 
yarn. The yarns w are Wound upon a spool, 
E, of usual construction, which derives its 
- 
45 
376,834 
IO 
25 
35 
55 
motion of rotation by contact of the yarn 
with the drum B, on which the yarn on the 
spool rests. 
The journalse of the spool E rest in open 
bearings at the ends of movable spool-lifters, 
herein shown as barse', which are adapted to 
slide in guides e", attached to the frame. work, 
the said spool-lifters having rack - teeth at 
tached to or forming a part of them, which 
are engaged by toothed plates f, which may 
be circular, thus constituting toothed wheels; 
Or they might be toothed segments attached to 
a shaft, f, having its bearings in the frame 
work, the said shaft having attached to it a 
handle, f', extended toward the end of the ma 
chine, where it may be readily taken hold of 
by the operator when it is desired to lift the 
spool E from contact with the drum B to re 
lmove the spool from the drum or to mend a 
thread. Generally the weight of the spool. 
raising device is sufficient to press the spool 
against the winding-drum; but, if necessary, 
this pressure may be increased by adding 
weights, as hereinafter described. 
The spool-li?ters are acted upon by weights 
g, which press the spool toward or against the 
drum B'. The heavier the weights the closer 
the winding of the yarn on the spool, the spool 
lifters rising in the guides as the diameter of 
the mass of yarn on the spool increases. 
One of the toothed plates f is provided with 
a projection, (herein shown as a screw and 
marked 10,) which may be engaged by a lock 
ing device, l, made as a catch pivoted at h", 
Whenever the operator, through the handle f", 
turns the shaft f' far enough to carry the said 
projection under the shoulder 12 of the lock 
ing device, the said locking device when it en 
gages the said projection acting to hold the 
shaft and toothed wheels in such position as to 
keep the spool above the drum B, so as to re 
main at rest even though the drum continues 
to rotate. 
The lower end of the lever b is normally kept 
pressed against the cam, which actuates it by 
means of a spring, n, (see Fig. 1) connected 
at one end to the guide-bar c and at its other 
end to a hook on the frame-work. 
I have herein shown the spool - li?ters as 
toothed bars which are engaged by toothed 
wheels, these latter wheels and their connect 
ing-shaft constituting lifting devices by which 
the spool-lifter and the spool therein may be 
readily lifted bodily from the drun; but prior 
to my invention I am not aware that a spool 
ing-machine has been provided with means 
whereby the spool may be lifted at will from 
the drum by means connected with both ends 
of the spool or its journals, so I do not desire 
or intend to limit my invention to the exact 
form of spool-lifting mechanism herein shown, 
but may use any other well-known equivalent 
devices. 
In my invention both ends of the spool or its 
journals are pressed toward the drum, and by 65 
connecting the spool-li?ters together, as shown, 
by the shaft f it will be seen that both spool 
lifters are made to slide in unison, thus press 
ing both ends of the spool upon the drum with 
equal force. 
I am aware that spooling - machines have 
been made in which a single thread is wound 
upon each spool, the spools being held by slid 
ing carriers, as in the United States Patent to 
Warburton, No. 197,912, dated December 4, 75 
1877, and I do not claim such a machine, as in 
my machine the spool receives many threads, 
making what I term a multiple-thread spool 
ing-machine. 
- 
85 
9O 
ICO 
IO5 
IO 
I 15 
I claim 
1. In a multiple-thread spooling-machine, 
the winding-drum, and separate movable slid 
ing spool-lifterse', located at opposite sides of 
the machine, and guides therefor, combined 
with means to connect and actuate the said 
spool-lifters longitudinally and in unison, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a multiple-thread spooling-machine, 
the winding-drum and separate movable slid 
ing spool-lifters to support and lift the jour 
nals of the spool, combined with lifting mech 
anism including a shaft and gearing to co 
operate with the spool-lifters, substantially as 
described, whereby the said spool-lifters may 
be moved to lift the spool from the drum, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a multiple-thread spooling-machine, 
the winding-drum, the separate sliding spool 
lifters at opposite sides of the machine, and 
means to connect and actuate them to insure 
their longitudinal movement in unison, com 
bined with weights applied to the upper end 
of each of the sliding spool-lifters to force the 
spool against the drum, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The winding-drum, means to rotate it, 
and the separate toothed sliding lifter:bars to 
support the journals of the spool, combined 
with the rotating shaft f' and its toothed gears 
f, to engage with and move the said lifter-bars, 
the projection 10 upon the gearf, and the lock 
ing device h, to engage the said projection 10, 
to operate substantially as described. 
5. The drum, means to rotate it, the worn, 
the guide-rolls B B", the shafta, having an at 
tached worm-gear and cam, and the two guide 
bars c' c', combined with means, substantially 
as described, actuated by the said cam and 
connected to the said guide-bars to reciprocate 
them simultaneously in the same direction, as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
- 
JOSEPH M. STONE. 
Witnesses: 
Jose.PH. H. STONE, 
EBEN A. BALDWIN. 
M 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US376935.txt	w (No Model.) 
J. A. ANIELL0. 
LIFE BOAT, 
No. 376,935, 
Patented Jan. 24, 1888. 
EH H 
  
M 
2 
2 
2. 
al 
sh 
e 
2 
y a 
2 
2 
3N | 
Sall 
2 
2 
altezzaz 
2 
M 
M 
2 
  
SS 
WITNESSES: 
--------- --- a-ma- - 
- 
INVENTOR: 
* - s 
BY flaw 
-- 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
y 
PATENT OFFICE, 
HALF TO 
JOHN A. ANIELLO, OF BILOXI, MISSISSIPPI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
CONSTANTINE OLIVAN, OF SAME PLACE. 
FEa 
BOAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Patent No. 376,935, dated January 24, 1888. 
Application filed October 14, 1887. Serial No. 252,348. (No model.) 
. 
O 
IS 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Co 
25 
10 and 11, and at each end of the boat there is 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoENA. ANIELLO, of a deck, 16, which extends from bulwark to 
Biloxi, in the county of Harrison and State of bulwark, grated floorings 17 being arranged 
beneath these decks, which floorings extend 
Mississippi, have invented a new and Im. 
inward toward the midship section of the boat, 55. 
proved Life-Boat, of which the following is a 
to be there joined to the decks 16 by walls 18, 
full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to the construction of in which there are doorless ports 19, the walls 
18, decks 16, and grated floorings 17 forming 
life-boats, the object of the invention being to 
passenger-compartments A. A cross-beam, 
provide a boat which cannot sink, which can 
not be capsized, and from which the passen 
20, extends across from the section 10 to the 
section 11, just abaft the forward deck, 16, 
gers cannot be washed; and to these ends the 
and this beam 20 serves as the support for a 
invention consists of a boat formed of two air 
mast-socket, 21, which extends downward and 
and water tight side sections and a similar cen 
tral section, grated flooring being arranged 
is secured to the deck or top of the section 12. 
Life-lines may be secured to the bulwarks or 
above the central section and between the side 
other parts of the boat in any ordinary man 
sections, while compartments adapted to re 
ner, such lines, however, not being shown in 
ceive the passengers are arranged at either 
the drawings. 
end of the boat, all as will be hereinafter more. 
ecifically pointed out 
The boat above described may be propelled 
fully described, and sp 
by oars, in which case there would be row- 7o 
in the claims. 
locks upon the bulwarks 15; or, if desired, the 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
boat could be sailed or propelled by a screw 
worked by hand in the usual well-known 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
nanner. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved form 
are above the central section or compartment, 
of life-boat. Fig. 2 is a side view of the same, 
12, it follows that the boat cannot becapsized, 
in partial section, on a line corresponding ap 
and as all three of the main compartments are 
proximately with the line acac of Fig. 1; and 
air and water. tight it will beinpossible to sink 
Fig. 3 is a cross sectional view taken on line 
the boat unless the buoyancy thereof be over-8o 
yy of Fig. 2. 
come by overloading. The passengers of such 
In constructing such a boat as the one form 
ing the subject-matter of this application, I 
a boat as the one above described would be 
placed in the compartments A, and would 
provide side compartments, 10 and 11, and a 
there be absolutely safe, and such compart 
central compartment, 12, all of these compart 
ments could not fill with water, owing to their 
ments being air and water tight, and all being 
grated floorings 17. 
united or connected at both the stem and the 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
stern of the boat. The deck 13 of the com 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
partment or section 12 is very much lower 
than the decks of the compartments 10 and 
Patent- . 
11, and upon the deck 13 I place cross-strips 
O 
air and water tight compartments united to 
4 14, which are securely connected to the side 
gether at the ends and having a passenger 
compartments, 10 and 11, which strips form 
compartment forward and aft, substantially 
the flooring of the main portion of the boat; 
but, if desired, longitudinal strips might be 
. 
. 
as described. 
. 
2. A life-boat formed of three longitudinal 95 
45 placed above the strips 14 in the spaces be 
tween the side edges of the central compart 
air and Water tight compartments united to-- 
gether at the ends and provided with a pas. . 
. 
ment, 12, and the approaching inner side 
senger-compartment forward and aft, the said 
edges of the compartments or sections 10 and 11. 
compartments having grated floorings, sub 
A combing or bulwark, 15, extends upward 
- 
stantially as herein shown and described. 
So from the decks of the sections or compartments 
As the compartments or sections 10 and 11. 75. 
1. A life-boat formed of three longitudinal go 
35 
85 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
IOC 
" 
: 
. 
- 
. . 
. 
 
2 
376,935 
3. In a life-boat, the combination, with the passing above the deck of the section 12 and 
central section, 12, of the side sections, 10 and connected to the sections 10 and 11, bulwarks 
11, above the central section and connected to 15, extending upward from the decks of the 15 
the ends of the said central section, the cross-sections 10 and 11, decks 16, arranged between 
5 bars 14, passing above the disk of the central the bulwarks, grated floorings 17, arranged 
section and connected to the sections 10 and beneath the decks, and partitions 18, having 
11, and the bulwarks 15, extending upward openings 19, which partitions connect the floors 
from the said sections 10 and 11, substantially and the decks, substantially as described. 
as herein shown and described. 
4. In a life-boat, the combination, with a 
central section, 12, of side sections, 10 and 11, 
connected to either end thereof, cross-bars 14, 
JOHN A. ANIELLO. 
Io 
Witnesses: 
N. PITRE, 
SIMRYAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377035.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. LAMSON. 
TROTTING SULKY. 
No. 377,035, 
Patented Jan. 31, 1888. 
 
12772e?ser 
26-44-4- 
-64%-eez 
17zezzor 
736 Q222 4-2- 
Z: v. 
4-4- 
2. 
N. Peters, Photo-likiographer, Washington. . C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. LAMSON, OF SARNIA, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
ROTTING SU KY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,035, dated January 31, 1888 
(No model.) Patented in Canadia February 7, 1887, No. 25,934. 
Applicationi filed June 15, 1887. Serial No. 2-1345. 
O 
To ali, whom, it naily concer'72: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. LAMISON, of 
the town of Sarnia, in the Province of Onta 
rio, in the Dominion of Canada, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Trot 
ting-Sulkies, (which was patented to me in 
Canada, February 7, 1887, No. 25,934;) and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, refer 
ence being had to the annexed drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a top view of my improved 
sulky-frame. Fig. 2 is a rear elevation; and 
Fig. 3 is a section on line XX, Fig. 1. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
sulkies having an arched axle, and has for its 
object to prevent elongation or buckling of the 
axle by the imposed weight of the driver. 
My invention consists of an arched axle hav 
ing an arched bar at opposite sides and secured 
at both ends to the axle, said bars bent out 
Wardly and upwardly higher than the axle 
and connected by the driver's seat, the thills 
secured to said bars, and the singletree at 
tached to the axle. 
1 l are the spindle ends of the arched axle 3. 
2 and 4 are bars bent outwardly and up 
wardly higher than the axle 3, and secured at 
the ends to opposite sides of the axle and con 
nected at top by the driver's seat 5, so that the 
weight of the driver will be thrown on the 
spindles, and thereby prevent elongation or 
buckling of the axle. 
To the top of the arched axle 3 is attached 
the singletree 6 by a bolt or pin, 7, to obtain 
direct draft from the axle at a point directly 
below the drivers seat. The thills 8 are Se 
cured to the bars 2 and 4, and are connected 
by a bow, 9, which at the middle is secured to 
the axle, and the rear ends of the thills may 
be connected by a bar, 10, to give greater sta 
bility. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a sulky, an arched axle, 3, having 
arched bars 24 at opposite sides, connected by 
the driver's seat 5 above the axle, as set forth. 
2. In a sulky, an arched axle, 3, having 
arched bars 24 at opposite sides connected by 
the driver's seat 5, thills 8, secured to said 
bars, and the singletree 6, attached to the axle 
below the driver's seat, as set forth. 
40 
W. E. LAMISON. 
Witnesses: 
JULIUS P. BUCKE, 
GEO. B. DAWSON, 
Of Sa'nia, Solicito)'. 
Of Sarnia, Land Clerk. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377135.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDRICK C. BAUER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SOAP COMPOUND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,135, dated January 31, 1888. 
Application filed March 5, 1887. Serial No. 229,844. (Specimens.) 
O 
To aid, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FREDRICK C. BAUER, 
of Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
new and Improved Soap Compound, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
My improved soap compound is designed 
for the use of mechanics, laborers, and others 
requiring a soap that will quickly and thor 
oughly remove grease and dirt from the hands 
and face. 
My invention consists in combining with 
finely - granulated porous material-such as 
sawdust-a quantity of soap of any approved 
manufacture. 
In carrying out my invention I take granul 
lated porous material, preferably sawdust, 
and screen it to secure uniformity of fineness, 
and I take hard soap of any desired quality 
and dissolve it in Water, in about the propor 
tion of a quarter of a pound of soap to a pint 
of water, and I boil the same until the solu 
tion is complete. I thoroughly mix the saw 
dust with the soap solution, and afterward 25 
spread it out to dry, and when dried it is 
ready for use. 
My improved soap compound is used by 
moistening it with water and rubbing it thor 
oughly upon the skin. 
I am aware that cakes or bars of soap have 
contained sawdust as one of their constitu 
ents, and I do not claim the same as of my in 
vention; but I am not aware that a soap in 
granular form has been composed of sawdust 35 
or equivalent vehicle charged with soap. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
porous vehicle-such as sawdust-charged 
with soap, substantially as set forth. 
A granular soap compound consisting of a 4O 
3C 
FREDERICK C. BAUER. 
Witnesses: 
EMIL G. BAUER, 
MARIE BAUER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377235.txt	(No Model.) 
S. L. CHILD. 
BUTTON OR STUD, 
No. 377,235, 
Patented Jan. 31, 1888. 
 
28). Avocy 
841 u011-Lot 
W 
S$ W. eis 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographer...washington, i. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN L. CEIILD, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
BUTTON OR SUD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,235, dated January 31, 1888. 
Application filed October 18, 1887. Serial No. 252, 17. (No model.) 
To all wiO77, it 7ay conce7n: 
Beit known that I, STEPHEN L. CHILD, of 
Providence, in the county of Providence and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Collar and 
Sleeve Buttons and Studs; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
collar and sleeve buttons and studs, the object 
being to so hinge the shoe to the post that the 
latter need be but slightly longer than the 
thickness of the garment through which the 
post is to be passed. 
A further object is to provide improved 
means for connecting the spring and post, 
whereby the two are inseparable when the 
former is secured within the shoe or button 
head, as the case may be. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in side elevation of my improved but 
ton, showing the shoe in locked position. Fig. 
2 is a similar view showing the shoe in a posi 
tion to enter a cuff or collar band. Fig. 3 is 
a view in vertical section of my improved but 
ton. Fig. 4 is a view showing the several 
parts of the shoe and spring detached; and 
Fig. 5 is a view showing the spring-plate and 
post in their proper position. 
A represents a collar or cuff button or stud 
of any desired design, shape, or material, and 
B a post, bifurcated or plain at one end, as 
desired. This bifurcated or plain end, as the 
case may be, is rigidly secured to the button 
head, and the opposite end, which is bent 
nearly at right angles to the body of the post 
as shown at a, is provided on its oppositeside 
edges with laterally-projecting lugs b, prefer 
ably rounded, so as to save, as far as possible, 
undue wear. 
The shoe C consists of an outer circular 
plate, c, of concavo-convex form, and an inner 
slightly dish-shaped disk, d, the latter having 
a slot, e, formed therein and extending from 
its Center to its periphery, and is also pro 
vided with bearingsf, formed by bending por 
tions of the metal originally occupying the 
place of the slot at right angles to the disk 
and Slotting said bent points at points near 
M 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
65 
the periphery of the disk for the reception of 
the lugs b of the post B. The slot in the disk 
d is as wide as the post to permit the latter to 
move freely therein, and said disk is secured 
to the outer plate in the usual manner. Lo 
cated within the shoe is the spring-plate D. 
This plate is adapted to fit snugly within the 
shoe at the junction of the two sections thereof, 
and can be locked in any desired manner 
against displacement. The plate D is of spring 
metal, and is provided with two parallel slots, 
g, which divide one side of the plate into a 
central tongue, f', and two side arms, h. The 
extreme or free ends of these arms are bent at 
an angle to the body to form abutments or 
bearings for the lugs on the post and securely 
lock the free ends of the post to the spring 
plate when the parts are in position. The 
bent ends of the arms of point toward the plate 
c of the shoe, and the post passes through the 
slot in the disk d and rests with its lugs on 
the arms between said arms and the plate c, 
while the bent end of the post bears against 
the face of the tongue adjacent to the disk d. 75 
The pressure of the spring-tongue against the 
end of the post holds the lugs in contact with 
the arms, and the bent ends of the latter pre 
Went displacement of the parts. By this ar 
rangement of parts the post and disk always 
maintain the same relative positions, and 
hence the Spring-tongue is always in a posi 
tion to exert its pressure against the end of the 
post, it making no difference whatever, so far 
as this pressure is concerned, whether the disk 
is locked against movement within the shoe 
or is loose. The bearings f on the disk d reg 
ister with the slots 0, of the bearing-plate D 
and fit within said slots and form additional 
bearings for the lugs of the post. The slot in 
the plate c is formed on one side of the center 
of the plate, and the bearings fin said plate 
are near the outer edge of the slot, and when 
the parts are in position the bent end of the 
post projects toward these bearings. Hence 
the post, while occupying a position central 
in the shoe, is journaled at one end of the 
Shoe, and hence when the shoe is turned or 
tipped up the edge adjacent to the button 
head is as far removed from the head as the 
disk of the shoe is when the shoe is in its 
locked position. By this arrangement a short 
85 
95 
90 
OO 
2 
377,235 
bearings for the lugs on the post, and a tongue 
adapted to bear against the end of the post, 
35 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a button or stud, the combination, with 
a head and shoe, of a post bent at one end and 
rigidly secured at its opposite end to one of 
said parts and provided at its bent end with 
laterally-projecting lugs, and a spring-plate 
located within the other part and provided 
with arms forming bearings for the lugs on 
the post and with a tongue adapted to bear 
against the bent end of the post, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. In a button or stud, the combination, with 
a head and shoe, one of said parts being slot 
ted on its inner face from its center to its pe 
riphery and provided with inwardly-project 
ing stops or bearings, and a spring-plate lo 
cated in said part and provided with arms 
forming bearings for the lugs on the post and 
with a tongue adapted to rest on the bent end 
of the post, of a post bent at one end and Se 
cured at its other end to the other part of the 
button or stud, and provided at its bent end 
with lateraily-projecting lugs, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this. 
specification in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
S. 
STEPHEN L. CHILD. 
55 
- 
jo 
45 
5O 
Witnesses: 
JOHN N. CHILD, 
FRANK H. JACKSON. 
post of a length just sufficient to accommodate 
the thickness of the garment between the shoe 
and button-head can be used. This feature is 
particularly adapted to studs, as it insures a 
tight fit and prevents any movement or rat 
tling of material after the stud has beenlocked 
in place. Again, by turning in the edges of 
the inner plate or disk of the shoe to form bear 
ings for the post, the disk or inner plate is 
strengthened and hence is enabled to stand 
the strain without bending. 
While I have described the post as being 
rigidly Secured to the button-head and piv. 
oted to the shoe, I would have it understood 
that I do not confine myself to such an ar 
rangement, as it is evident that with a great 
many styles of buttons the post can be secured 
to the shoe and pivoted to the button. I 
Would also have it understood that I do not 
limit myself to the exact construction of parts 
shown and described, but consider myself at 
liberty to make such slight changes as fairly 
fall within the spirit and scope of my inven 
tion. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a button or stud, the combination, with 
a head and shoe, of a post rigidly secured at 
one end to one of said parts and provided at 
its other end with laterally-projecting lugs, 
and a Spring-plate located within the other 
part and provided with arms adapted to form 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377335.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 377,335. 
F. E. SMITH, 
OFFICE TICKLER, 
Patented Jan, 31, 1888, 
 
7/d/2-vesses. 
3.2%-4 
& 722. 
Z7 (vez-titor: 
at Peters. Photo-ithographer, Washington, 
C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK E. SMITH, OF TOLEDO, IOWA. 
OFFICET CKLE. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,335, dated January 31, 888. 
Application filed October 19, 1886. Serial No. 216,690. 
No mode. 
O 
2 5 
To al. Lufton, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANKE, SMITH, of To 
ledo, in the county of Tama and State of Iowa, 
have invented what I call an Office-Tickle,' 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in devices for containing memoranda of all 
business transactions requiring attention on 
some particular day or date in the future; and 
it consists in the construction and arrangement 
of parts, as will hereinafter be more fully set 
forth, and particularly pointed outin the claim 
appended. 
In the accompanying drawing, in which 
similar letters of reference are made to indi 
cate corresponding parts, the figure is a per 
spective view of an office-tickler, showing my 
device as it appears in use. 
Referring by letter to said drawing, Ashows 
one of the partitions forming the days of the 
month; B, one of the partitions, forming the 
months of the year; C, the box or receptacle 
for holding the partitions in place. 
D is a fixed vertical partition near the front 
wall of the box. The interior space between 
the partition D and the rear wall of the box is 
materially less than the width of the month-par 
titions, and thus the said partitions, together 
with the adjustable day-partitions, are retained 
in a semi-vertical position and prevented from 
falling to the bottom of the box. 
A portion of each partition is cut away after 
the manner of a ledger-index, thus exposing 
to view the full number of days in each month, 
and also the full number and name of each 
month in the year. The partitions described 
are adjustable, so that as fast as one day or 
45 
SS 
month shall have past or gone the partitions 
corresponding thereto may be taken out and 
placed back of the day or month preceding it, 
thus making a new date for the following month 
or year, as the case may be. 
From the foregoing description it will be seen 
that a brief history or memoranda of any busi 
ness transaction requiring attention at Some 
particular time in the future can be placed in 
the tickler in front of the partition, indicating 
the proper date when said business should have 
attention, and by reason of the daily and 
monthly adjustment of the partitions, as be 
fore described, all business is brought to an 
immediate notice and upon the very date it 
should have attention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to Secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
A file for office use, consisting of a rectan 
gular box having a fixed vertical partition 
near the front wall, the space between the said 
vertical partition and the rear wall of the box 
being less in width than the intermovable 
month partitions and in combination there 
with, the intermovable month and adjustable 
day partitions unattached to each other and 
provided with extensions of their upper edges 
cut away, as shown, and carrying the proper 
designations of months and days, whereby a 
single series of day-partitions can by interpo 
sition be used with any month-partition of the 
series, all as shown and described. 
FRANK E. SMITH. 
In presence of - 
FRANK CHUBA, 
AGNES BALDWIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377435.txt	(No Model.) 
 
 
J. MoNAUGHT ON & A. BARDSLEY. 
OIL CUP, 
Patented Feb. 7, 1888. 
Atty. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES MONAUGHTON AND ADAM BARDSLEY, OF BRAINERD, MINNESOTA. 
oil-CUP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,435, dated February 7, 1888. 
Application filed September 1, 1887. Serial No. 248,542. (No model.) 
55 . 
. 
. 
- 
. . 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMESMcNAUGHTON 
and ADAM BARDSLEY, both of Brainerd, in 
the county of Crow Wing and State of Min 
nesota, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Oil-Cups, of which im 
provement the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to oil-cups employed 
in the lubrication of guide-bars, crank-pins, 
bearings, &c., of steam-engines and other ma. 
chinery, and its object is to simplify and econ 
omize the construction of the appliance, as 
Well as to facilitate the adjustment of the feed 
and obviate derangement or accidental varia 
tion thereof in service. 
To these ends ourinvention, generally stated, 
consists in an oil-cup having an elastic bridge 
Which exerts a constant pressure upon the 
feed-Spindle and acts to maintain the same in 
any desired position of adjustment. 
The improvement claimed is hereinafter 
fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
side view in elevation of an oil-cup embody 
ing our invention; Fig. 2, a vertical central 
Section through the same; Fig. 3, a plan or 
top view with the cap and feed-spindle re 
moved; and Fig. 4, a vertical central section 
showing another form of cap. 
In the practice of our invention we provide 
an oil-cup the body 1 of which is ordinarily 
cylindrical, but which may be of any other 
preferred form, and which is provided at the 
bottom With a central threaded stem or boss, 2, 
for attachment to the portion of the engine or 
other machine to which it is to be applied. 
A feed-passage, 3, for the delivery of the lu 
bricant extends through the stem 2 and through 
an internal socket, 4, on the base of the cup, 
being outwardly tapered toward the top of 
the Socket 4 correspondingly with the lower 
end of a spindle or needle-feeder, 5, by the 
adjustment of which relatively to the feed 
passage the Supply of lubricant to the latter 
is regulated as desired. 
The spindle 5 carries a head or hand piece, 
6, upon its upper end, by which it may be 
rotated, and is provided with an external 
Screw-thread, 7, below the head, to engage a 
corresponding internal thread on the oil-cup, 
in order to effect its vertical movement when 
rotated. As heretofore constructed it has 
been usual to provide the spindle with a jam 
nut to insure its retention in adjusted position, 
thus involving an element of additional cost 
and additional manipulation in adjustment. 
Under our invention the spindle 5 engages and 
is held, when adjusted, by an internal screw 
thread, 8, formed in an elastic bridge, 9, which 
extends across the upper portion of the cup, 
and by the clamping pressure which it exerts : 
through the thread 8 upon the spindle, main 
tains the same in any position in which it may 
be set, and effectually prevents it from being a 
jarred loose in service, thereby assuring the 
continuance and uniformity of the feed. The 
bridge 9 is split or divided by a central trans- . 
verse slot, 10, cored in the casting, so that its 
central portion constitutes two half-bosses, 
which, when threaded, form half-nuts, and the 
necessary degree of elasticity is imparted by 
slightly springing it apart by a wedge inserted 
in the slot 10 and drilling and tapping out the 
central hole while the half-bosses are thus 
forced apart. The spindle being then prop-. 
erly fitted, the wedge is withdrawn and the 
tendency of the half-nut to spring back, by . 
the elasticity of the metal of the bridge, to 
the position of the bosses as originally formed 
induces and maintains a compression upon the 
spindle, which obviates the necessity of a sup 
plemental fastening device and holds the spin 
dle firmly in position when adjusted, without 
preventing its rotation by hand when required 
to vary the degree of feed. The cup is, as in 
the ordinary construction, closed at top by a 
cap, 11, screwed thereon; or, when applied to 
guides, a sliding cap, as shown in Fig. 4, may, 
if preferred, be employed. 
We are aware that oil-cups having a rod 
feeder held in position by frictional contact 
within the contracted end of an inclosing-tube 
have been heretofore known, as well as oil 
cups in which the upper end of the spindle is 
held and steadied by bent arms or elastic wires 
bearing at their ends against the body, and we 
therefore disclaim, broadly, the interposition 
of an elastic element between the feeder and 
the body of the cup. 
We claim as our invention and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent 
1. In an oil-cup, the combination of a body 
. . 
9O 
95 
too 
O 
25. 
35 
45 
 
2 
377,435 
and an expansible split or divided elastic spindle or feeder externally threaded to en- IC. 
bridge connected to the body, and having an gage the half-lnuts of the bridge, substantially 
internal screw-thread cut within it, substan- as set forth. 
tially as set forth. 
2. In an oil-cup, the combination of a body, 
a transversely-divided elastic bridge connected 
to the body, and having an internal screw- 
thread forming two half-nuts on opposite sides 
of the slot or division of the bridge, and a 
B. M. DE LAMBERT, 
C. E. TAYLOR. 
AE NASTON. 
-N 
Witnesses: 
- 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377535.txt	:No Model.) 
No. 377,535, 
J. N. STEARNS 
NEEDLE LOOM, 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1888. 
s 
w 
s 
WITNESSES: 
W 
64; eWA-(zz, R. 
a cae 
f 
- G evere 1 
(lity's s 
e 
s 
INVENTOR 
& 4% 2, 6%-4 
%-46%- 
ATTORNEY 
 
J. N. STEARNS. 
NEEDLE LOOM, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1888. 
(No Model.) 
No. 377,535, 
 
WITNESSES: 
. 
62%. 232, Zzzazze, 
(a case ox. (2a:vant. 
INVENTOR 
44.1%r, 
. 
2% -- 
"it"? 
(No Model.) 
535, 
 
  
 
 
O 
AN 
E4E77 
Easte? 
 
J. N. STEARNS. 
NEEDLE L00M. 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1888. 
r 
mi? I 
WillIIIT 
E H 
II s 
as 
s 
22 
Az7. (... 
... " 
A 
INVENTOR 
%226.g. 
ATTORNEY 
(No Model.) 
No. 377,535, 
Az/7. 
... 
 
J. N. STEARNS. 
NEEDIE,00M. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1888, 
Al2/6. 
J. 
- isl. 
wiTNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
ATTORN 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN N. STEARNS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
NEEDEs. OOM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,535, dated February 7, 1888. 
Application filed September 11, 1886. Serial No. 213,289. (No model.) 
25 
It has also been proposed to employ two 
To all whom it may concern: 
needles, each provided with a finger to hold the 55 
Beit known that I, JoHNN. STEARNs, of the 
weft, such needles being made to enter the shed 
city of New York, county and State of New 
at or about the same time from opposite ends of. 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
the lay, each needle with its finger being made 
5 Improvements in Needle-Looms, of which the 
following is such a full, clear, concise, and ex 
to carry a weft-thread which forms a loop at 
the point where the needles meet in the shed, Go 
act description as will enable others skilled in 
the loops from both fingers being caught by . 
the art to which my invention appertains to 
pins which pass through the reed and retain 
make and use the same, reference being had 
the filling in a position to be beaten up. This 
IO to the accompanying drawings, forning part 
form of weft-carrier necessitates a juncture of 
of this specification. 
the double ends of the filling at some point 65 
The objections to the use of heavy shuttles 
the weight of which, notwithstanding their 
between the edges of the fabric, and, no mat 
ter whether the juncture is at the same point 
rapid movement through the shed, strains and 
with each pick or is varied by alternate move 
I5 at times breaks some of the warp-threads 
ments of the needles respectively to a greater 
has led to a number of attempts to construct 
or less extent, the double ends will show in the 7c 
a different form of weft-carrier, which, in most 
completed fabric, which is rendered imperfect 
instances, has becn in the nature of a needle. 
and less durable than in cases where each weft . 
It is to that Cass of looms in which a needle 
2O is employed to carry the weft or filling through 
is carried entirely through the shed-- - - - - - 
Attempts have also been made to employ 
the shed formed by the decussations of the 
weft-carriers consisting of forked blades formed 75 
warp that my invention relates, and it is more 
on the free ends of elastic spring-blades wound . 
especially applicable to looms for weaving silk 
upon disks to which the other ends of the . 
. 
and similar fabrics. 
spring-blades were secured, the disks being 
In most needle-looms heretofore constructed 
attached to each end of the lay. With this con 
a single needle playing from one end of the lay 
struction it was proposed to project the forked 8o 
has been employed, and generally in connec 
end by the unwinding of the spring - blade ..., 
tion therewith a shuttle has been used for the 
purpose of passing a selvage-thread through 
from its disk alleng the front of the lay, between 
a series of double finger-guides, and through 
the loop formed by the weft at the edge oppo 
. 
the shed. Such weft-carriers were not, how- 
site that from which the needle enters the shed. 
ever, provided with any means for retaining 85 
With a single needle the selvage will not be 
the weft thread other than hooks which in : 
made the sane at both sides of the fabric, and 
. . 
passing should catch the weft when lifted for. . 
in using a shuttle in connection with it there 
that purpose by the Jacquard or other means , 
, 
35 is always more or less difficulty in regulating 
Many objections might be mentioned to the 
the passage of the shuttle through the loop or 
use of such disks and spring-blades; but a suffi. 90 
in passing the loop over the shuttle if the same 
ciently serious one is the faulty mechanical 
. 
be stationary, and the loom must be stopped 
construction of the device. The length and 
whenever the shuttle needs to be replenished 
elasticity of the spring . blades render them 
4o with thread. In otherlooms a so-called fin 
subject to an undulating and trenulous move-, 
ger' has been employed to carry the filling 
ment, which would occasion annoyance even 
half way throngh the shed, at which point the 
if the contrivance could be made to operate at 
finger was met by a hook entering from the 
all. It wants that quick and positive move-, i. 
opposite side for the purpose of seizing the 
ment without which no weft-carrier can prop 
45 filling and taking it the rest of the way while 
perly perform its function. 
the finger was returning to its original posi 
It may be stated as a fact that none of the 
tion at the end of the lay. Such looms do not, 
devices of the character already mentioned 
however, weave a fabric with both selvages 
and no other form of needle-loom of which I 
alike, and in addition to this objection difficul 
am aware possess the elements necessary, for 
5o ties are liable to be encountered should the 
the production of a fabric with the same rapid 
hook fail to catch the weft at the precise in 
stant when it should pass from the finger to ity and degree of perfection as do looms hay 
ing a shuttle-weft carrier, and this notwith 
the hook. 
IOC 
Ic5 
: 
its 
377,535 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
55 
standing the objections to the shuttle move 
ment which have long been experienced and 
are well known. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
the objections which prevail against the use 
of already-existing we?t-carriers; and to this 
end my invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts, as indicated by the 
claims appended to this specification. 
The drawings represent such parts of a loom 
provided with my improvements as are neces 
Sary to illustrate the new features embodied 
in its construction. 
Figure l is a front view of so much of the 
loom as appears when the cloth-beam and the 
connections on a line therewith are removed 
by the cutting of the frame on the line acac of 
Fig. 2. This figure (1) shows the lay and its 
connections with the loom, the two needles 
and their operating mechanism, and also the 
means for retaining the loop of the filling, 
which is formed whenever one of the needles 
is passed through the shell. The healds and 
harness are not shown, as their operation and 
the formation of the shed are well understood. 
In this figure, however, the crank Z, secured 
to the driving-shaft D, is shown. This crank 
trausnits motion o the harness through the 
level Z, which is shown as having the upper 
portion broken away. Fig. 2 is a right-hand 
end view of the loom, and shows the lay in a 
position which permits of the passage of one 
of the needles through the shed. Fig. 3 is a 
partial vertical transverse section on line 
y), Fig.1, with part of the frame broken away, 
and with the driving-shaft in section on line 
pp, Fig. 5. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section 
taken on line & 2, Fig. 2, showing a portion of 
the reed; also, one of the needles and certain 
other details. Fig. 5 is a detail plan view 
illustrative of the mechanism for operating 
the lay of the parts shown by Fig. 3. Fig.6 
is a vertical section with the shaft in eleva 
tion, taken on the line q q. of Fig. 7, which 
latter figure is an end view of the disk or wheel 
I, having a can groove upon its periphery, 
and which disk is secured to the shaft. H, shown 
in cross-section. Fig. 8 is a plan of the cam. 
L and part of shaft H. Fig. 9 is an end 
view of the bracket F", to which the rod f is 
Secured, as shown in Fig. 1, and a portion of 
the support for the said brackets; and Fig. 10 
is a plan view of the same. Fig.11 is a front 
elevation of the needle-carrier o and a part of 
its supporting-rod, and Fig. 12 is a transverse 
vertical section to show the details of and 
means for connecting the slipjoint O and nee 
dle-carrier, while Fig. 13 is a plan view of the 
parts shown by Fig. 11. 
Figs. 14 and 15 are 
respectively end and plan views of the slip 
joint O, which is attached to the needle-carrier 
O. 
Fig. 16 is a side elevation of the elbow-le 
ver K, (shown in Figs. 1 and 2,) and Fig. 17 
is a transverse section of the same through the 
line r of Fig. 16. Figs. 18, 19, and 20 are 
respectively front, side elevation, and plan 
views of the cam-connection T, secured to the 
shaft H, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Figs. 21 
and 23 are respectively a front elevation and 
plan view of the device for holding the loop 
retainingpin m' and supports for said device; 
and Fig. 22 is a vertical transverse section 
through the liness, Fig. 21. Figs. 24, 25, and 
26 are respectively side, front elevation, and 
plan views of the bracket Q, which oscillates 
on the lay-shaft T and parts adjacent to the 
said bracket. Figs. 27 and 28 are respect 
ively side elevation and plan views of the le 
ver M, which actuates the mechanism for op 
erating the loop-retaining pin m and the sup 
port for the said lever. Fig. 29 is a detail 
sectional view to show the connection of the 
slipjoints N and N'. 
In the drawings the same reference-letters 
indicate corresponding parts whenever re 
peated. , 
A. A represent the uprights of the lay; B, 
the reed of the same. 
C Care respectively fast and loose pulleys 
on the driving-shaft D. 
The mechanism for operating the lay does 
not differ materially from that ordinarily used, 
but certain details thereof are shown in Figs. 
The crank-arms A are secured to. 
3, 4, and 5. 
the divided driving-shaft D by the set-screws 
a, said crank-arms thus forming a practical 
continuation of said shaft. Connected to the 
pin joining these crank-arms is a pitman, B', 
which extends to and connects by a bolt, b, to 
the projecting ears or lugs ec, the bolt being 
held by a split pin, d. The pitman B gives 
an oscillating motion to the lay, which drives 
up the wett-threads after they are introduced. 
E represents a hand - wheel; F, a toothed 
pinion operated by the driving-shaft and gear 
ing with the toothed wheel G, which gives mo 
tion to the cam-shaft H, upon which the disks 
I and cams L are secured. The contour of the 
cam-groove of a disk I appears more clearly 
in Figs 
. 7 and 8, which are details of the same. 
In the cam-groove a pin, i, (shown in Figs, 1, 
2, 16, and 17,) slides and gives motion to an 
elbow-lever, K, the form of which is shown by 
the detail, Figs. 16 and 17. This elbow-lever 
K has a vertical arm, k, which is secured to a 
bracket, J, extending outwardly from the 
frame of the loom. This elbow-lever K is also 
provided with a round extension-bar, k, which 
receives a slip-joint, N, such joint being se 
cured by a threaded stud, N, to another slip 
joint, N, (see Fig. 29,) which slides upon an 
oblique rod, n. (Shown in Fig. 1.) At the 
upper end of the oblique rod n is another slip 
joint, O, the details of which are shown in 
Figs. 12, 14, and 15. The slipjoint O (see 
Fig. 12) is provided with an inner projecting 
boss, h, (shown in the detail figures,) and into 
which boss a threaded stud, o', passes, such 
stud being made to connect with the needle 
carrier o. 
Resting upon a projecting flange, D', Fig. 3, 
of the lay-upright A is an extension angle 
iron, E, at each end of which is a projecting 
arm, e, the same being slotted, as shown at e 
75 
95 
ICO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
 
377,535 
3. 
IS 
2 5 
C 
in Figs. 3 and 9, and bolted to this arm e 
through the slote' is a vertical bracket, F, the 
form of which appearsin Fig. 3. The brackets 
F support a horizontal rod, f, upon which 
Slides the needle-carriero. The construction 
s 
of the needle-carrier is shown in Figs. 11, 12, 
and 13 as consisting of a slide having two up. 
Wardly-projecting lugs, h. h, to which the nee 
dle P is secured by a set screw or other means. 
Each end of the lay is provided with the same 
form of needle-carrier, needle, and operating 
devices. 
. At the side and center of the carrier o and 
integral with it is a projecting boss, h", Figs. 
12 and 13, which has a female thread, and into 
which passes a threaded stud, o, the same be 
ing secured to an inner projecting boss, h., of 
the slipjoint O. (Shown in Figs.12,14, and 15.) 
The oblique rod n is sectared at its lower end 
in alarm, g, of a sleeve, Q', by a set-screw, 
I, the said sleeve being hinged or journaled 
on an arm of a bracket, Q, as shown in Figs. 
24, 25, and 26. At the lower portion of the 
bracket Q are two dovetailed lugs, qi, (best 
shown in Fig. 24.) and fitting in this dovetail 
is an angle-piece, S, which has at its lower ex 
ti'enlity a projection, s, to which is secured a 
ScreW-eye, and a spring, R, is made fast at one 
end in the eye of the screws, the other end of 
such Spring being attached to a screw, q', on 
the sleeve Q. The lower end of the bracket 
Q is made fast to the lay rock-shaft Tby a 
Screw, t. The purpose of the spring R is to 
''et act the sleeve Q" relatively to the bracket 
Q, so as to take up a certain looseness which 
is desirable between these parts as the former 
is vibrated from the elbow-lever K. 
When the shaft II is set in motion by the 
gear-wheels FG, the disk I, having the cam 
groove upon it, revolves with it, and the pini, 
which is made fast to the elbow-lever K, trav 
els the course of the groove and actuates the 
elbow-lever, upon the extension - rod kof. 
which the slip joint N slides, and by its con 
nection With the slipjoint N motion is im 
parted to the rod in. This gives motion also 
to the slipjoint O, which connects with the nee 
de-carriero and causes the same to slide upon 
the rod?, the said needle-carrier o having a 
free movement, because the studo, whichse. 
cures the slip joint O, is allowed to turn 
Within its bosses, thus accommodating itself 
to any position which the slipjoint O may as: 
suine as the rod in oscillates. This movement 
is also unaffected by the swinging of the lay, 
as the sleeve Q q', to which the rod n is se. 
cured, is journaled to the bracket Q, which 
moves upon the lay-shaft. Thus the arrange 
ment of the needle carrier and its operating 
mechanism is adapted to give a rapid and 
positive movement to the needles. 
The mechanism is the same at each end of 
the lay; but an alternate movement through 
the shed is given to the needles by the ar 
rangement of the cam-grooves upon the disks 
I, which operate the elbow-levers K. These 
can grooves give no motion during a certain 
portion of the travel of the pin i, and this per 
mits of a variation as to the time when the 
needles start, and also allows the lay to Swing 
forward and beat up the weft and return be 
tween the time when one needle has passed 
out of the shed and the other one enters the 
succeeding shed. 
The two needles are made so as to taper 
slightly toward the point and of sufficient 
length to carry the we?t the entire width of 
the fabric, and each is rigidly secured to its 
carriers o, so as to have a steady movement. 
Toward the point they are preferably perfo 
rated in several places, as shown at pp', in 
order that the weft - thread may be passed 
through these perforations, and thus a tension 
is secured in a simple and effective manner. 
As the needles introduce the weft alternately 
into the same ply of the fabric-that is, one 
needle passes it in every other shed, while the 
other takes it through those not filled by the 
first-it will at once beseen that the loops at each 
side of the fabric are covered, after being beaten 
up, by the weft which enters from that side. 
This produces like selvages on both sides of 
the fabric. It is, however, desirable in order 
to secure a complete and perfect protection of 
the loops that they should always be formed 
at the same point, which may or may not be, 
precisely at the edge. I find it advantageous 
to form the loops a slight distance inward 
from the edge, thus leaving several selvage 
threads filled only by the we?t which enters 
from that side. 
A very good effect may be produced in this 
manner by using heavier or twisted warp 
threads for the edging beyond the point at 
which the loops are formed, because in such 
case these warp-threads compensate for any 
looseness which might possibly otherwise ap 
pear should the selvage-warp be of the same 
weight as the body of the fabric. 
In order to secure unifornity in the forma 
tion of the loops, I make use of pins n', such 
: pins being set at each edge of the fabric, or as 
near thereto as it may be determined to have 
then. To the shaft H are secured collars L, 
provided with arms or tappets l, (see Figs. 
1, 2, 18, 19, and 20,) each of the said arms or 
tappets being arranged to impinge against and 
thus operate a lever, M, the form of which 
appears more clearly in Figs. 27 and 28. This 
lever M is pivoted to the main frame of the 
loom, as shown at l in Fig. 2, and the oppo 
site end, l, has a cord, it', or its equivalent---as, 
for instance, a chain or a wire-secured there 
to, and the upper end of such cord is attached 
to the outer end of a horizontal rockingle 
ver, m. The oscillating movemcit which is 
communicated to the lever M through the arm 
l, and thence by ineans of the cord u to the 
lever n, produces a vertical movement of the 
in is through a slotted portion of the device 
m, which guides the pin... This, guiding de 
vice is clearly shown in Figs. 21, 22, and 23; 
and appears also in Fig. 3, as well as in Fig.1. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 a cross-piece, G', is shown 
45 
5 5 
6 
75 
95. 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
' 
4. 
377,535 
... 
f. 
O 
as being bolted to the uprights A A of the lay. 
To this cross-piece G' the oscillating lever m 
is pivoted at g, and this lever serves to in 
part an upward movement to the pin m'. The 
device which holds this pin consists of a hol 
low cylindrical tubes, m', provided with a slot, 
m, in which slides a set-screw, m'. The set. 
screw m is securd to a cylindrical bar, n, 
which fits within the hollow cylindrical tube 
m", and this bar moves vertically when actu 
ated by the rocking lever m impinging against 
the set-screw on". 
At the extremity of the bar at is a project 
ing cylindrical bar, n', which has a hole for 
receiving the pinn, which can be adjusted to 
any desired position by means of the set, 
screw in'. The barn' is adjustably secured to the 
bar n' by the set-screw al. The lower end of 
this bar has a screw-eye, n, through the eye of 
which passes a ring, U, and to this ring is at 
tached a cord, u, the lower end of which is 
made fast to a spring, V, the opposite end of 
sueh spring being secured to the bottom bar, 
T, of the lay, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The arm l on the collar I actuates the lever 
MI (from which the upward movements of the 
pin m' are derived) in such time as to cause 
the said pin to. move upward just as the needle 
which has entered the shed from the opposite 
side has reached the limit of its movement and 
3O forms the loop of the filling introduced by it. 
The pin m' passes through this loop and re. 
tains it until the needle has receded and the 
lay swings forward and beats up the filling, 
the pin then being caused to drop down again 
and remain until the same needle introduces 
another filling. The pin at the opposite side. 
acts in precisely the same manner with refer. 
ence to the movements of the other needle. 
Thus the edges of the fabric are made alike on 
both sides, and the loops are covered and pro 
tected. . 
The particular arrangement of the mechan 
ism for operating the loop-retaining pins need 
not be in the form or consist of all the parts 
described, as any operative mechanism for said 
pins which is the equivalent of that herein 
shown and described, and which will actuate 
them when required, may be used. It may 
also be proper to state that the mechanism for 
operating the needles which I have shown and 
described is that which I deem best;Nbut the 
same may be varied in several respects with 
out materially departing from the essential 
features of my invention, which are the em 
ployment of a rigid needle at each end of the 
lay made to introduce the we?t, as described, 
and means for retaining the loops when formed 
at or near each edge of the fabric, as described. 
It is by these elements that I am enabled suc 
cessfully to produce a fabric differing mate 
rially from any heretofore made by a needle 
loom, and at the same time there is a freedom 
from the injuries which result from the use of 
a shuttle-weft carrier. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
45. 
50. 
65 
6o 
55 
3 5 
- 
8: 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. The combination, with the lay having 
ways or guides at its opposite ends, of two 7o 
needle-carriers adapted to reciprocate on the 
said ways or guides, two needles arranged in 
line with each other and of proper length to 
reach entirely through the shed, two rods 
having double slipjoint connections with the 
said carriers, and means for vibrating said 
rods to operate the carriers, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. In a loom, the combination, with the lay 
having at each end a needle of sufficient length 8o 
to reach entirely through the shed, of two car 
riers for the needles, a way or slide at each 
end of the lay and movable there with for each 
of the said carriers, two rods having double 
slipjoint connections with the said carriers, 
two levers having double slipjoint connec 
tions with the said rods, and means for vibrat 
ing said levers, whereby said carriers and 
needles are alternately reciprocated, substan. 
tially as set forth. 
3. In a loom, the combination, with the lay 
having a way or guide, of a needle-carrier 
adapted to reciprocate thereon, a needlese 
cured to the said carrier, a pivoted rod for 
operating the latter, a cam, a lever operated by 
said cam, and double slipjoint connections 
between the said lever and said rod, and be 
tween the latter and the said carrier, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. In a loom, the combination, with a needle, 
a carrier; therefor, the lay provided with a 
way or guide on which the said carrier may 
reciprocate, a cam, an elbow-lever operated 
thereby, the lay-shaft, a bracket secured there 
to, a rod pivotally connected with said bracket 
and having a slip joint connection with said 
carrier, and a double slipjoint connecting the 
said elbow-lever and rod, substantially as set 
forth. . . 
5. The combination, with the lay, of the 
guiding rod f carried thereby, the needle-car 
rier: o, adapted to reciprocate on said rod, the 
needle P, secured to said carrier, the rod n, 
the slipjoint O, the double slipjoint NN', 
the elbow-lever K, the grooved cam I, the 
bracket Q, the sleeve Q, the spring R, and the 
lay-shaft, substantially as set forth. . . 
6. In a loom, the combination, with the lay 
having at each end a needle and means for . 
guiding and reciprocating the needle on the I2O 
lay, of the guiding devices m, having tubes 
m, the barsn', sliding in the tubes, the loop 
retaining pins m, connected with said bars, 
the levers m, the springs V, connected with 
said bars, the levers M, connected with the 
said levers m, the shaft H, and the collars L, 
having arms or tappets, substantially as set 
forth. 
JNO. N. STEARNS. 
IOS 
I 25 
Io 
15 
95 
Od 
. 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
HUBERT. A. BANNING, 
Ely W. F., TOURELIOTTE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377635.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 377,635. 
C. G. OTIS. 
ELEVATOR, 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1888. 
h 
. 
. 
. 
. 
F 
Sit- 
ty 
!--- 
| 
s? --e e-S 
 
| 
6%a-te-1627, 
2%. 4./ 
ITE88E8: 2N- 
 
 
it. 5. 
zz IVENTOR 
Charles C. Otis, 
4 
By 
1 
2 
his ATTORNEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 377,636. 
C. G., OTIS. 
ELEWATOR, 
5 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1888. 
; , .5 
/ 
WITNESSES: it fry 
charts & sty. 
Ag ATTORNEYS. 
 
N, PETERs, Photo-ithographer, Washington, i.e. 
(No Model.) 
No. 377,635, 
C. G., OTIS. 
ELEVATOR, 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
- 
Patented Feb. 7, i888. 
. 
Fig. 
- (SCE 
%Azi--------- 
Z222 3. 412s --- 
to 9 v CA - E v. 
FraZ222222222.GVIZ s 
Pef HF--NN 
n: 
-------------------- 
1. 
7. A 
le 
WITNESSES: 
(26.4%z. 
a- 
INVENTOR 
Charlti G. Ok. 
ji'? AITORNEYs 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
 
 
perERs, phot 
upher, Was" D.C. 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES G. OTIS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
ELEVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,635, dated February 7, 1888. 
Application filed August 18, 1887. Serial No. 247,989. (No model.) 
s 
is the valve - cylinder containing a piston. 
valve, E. S is the supply-pipe, which is con 
nected with the upper end of the cylinder, 
Fig. 1, and also by a port, s, with the valve. 55 
cylinder E, Fig. 2. A second port, s', con 
nects the lower end of the main cylinder D' 
with the valve-cylinder E. The valve E is 
reciprocated to open and close the ports by a 
rack-and-gear connection with a shaft, f, upon 6o 
which is mounted a pulley, F. When the 
valve E is in the position shown by full lines 
in Fig. 2, it closes the ports', and the eleva 
tor-car is stationary; but if it is moved down 
ward to the position shown by dotted lines in 65 
Fig. 2 the water can enter the cylinder be 
neath the piston, as indicated by the arrows 
in said figure. In this case the car can de 
scend, and the water above the piston is forced 
through the supply-pipe and beneath the pis. 7o 
ton. The weight of the car is sufficient to 
cause its descent and the engine does no work. 
If the valve E is moved upward to open the 
ports', the water beneath the piston D can es 
cape through an outlet, e, in the valve-cylin- 75. 
der, and the full pressure of the water comes 
on the upper surface of the piston, whereby 
the latter is caused to descend and the eleva 
tor-car is correspondingly raised, all as usual. 
with valve E, is actuated by means of an end- 
less valve rope, G. Said valve-rope extends 
about a sheave, H, having bearings in boxes 
secured to the beam C at the upper end of the 
elevator-shaft, from thence downward and over 85 
idler-wheelsh h", having bearings in boxes se 
cured to the floor at the lower end of the ele 
vator-shaft, and, finally, it extends around pull 
ley F. The valve-rope G passes in close prox 
imity to one side of the elevator-car A, the two 9C 
strands being in a plane parallel to the said 
side. 
Heretofore the valve-rope G passed through 
the elevator-car and was shifted by the attend 
ant to oscillate the pulley F, whereby the valve 95 
E was moved and the car caused either to rise, 
to descend, or to stop. In my invention the 
valve-rope is moved slightly by the attend. 
ant to open the valve slightly, whereupon the 
rope is moved by the car in its motion to fully 
. . 
open the valve. 
In order to set the carin motion or to arrest 
Referring to Fig. 1, the pulley F, connected 8c 
. 
IOO 
. . 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs G. OTIs, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
5 York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Elevators, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention consists in an improved op 
erating mechanism for elevator - valves in 
which the movement of the elevator is em 
ployed to operate the valve, as is fully set 
forthin the following specification and claims, 
and illustrated in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure1 represents a perspective view of an 
I5 elevator containing my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
central vertical section, on a larger scale than 
Fig. 1 of a portion of the elevator-engine. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional perspective of a second 
ary grip. Fig. 4 is a section in the plane a 
ac, Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a sectional perspective of 
a primary' grip. Fig. 6 is a section in the 
plane y2), Fig. 5. Figs. 7 and 8 are diagrams 
showing the movements of parts. Fig. 9 is a 
sectional elevation of a modified form of grip. 
Fig. 10 is a section in the plane a'a', Fig. 9. 
Figs. 11 and 12 are similar views illustrating 
the movement of the grip. Fig. 13 is a per 
spective view showing the grip.applied to the 
car. Fig. 14 is a sectional elevation of a modi 
fied form of the grip shown in Figs. 9, 10, and 
11. Fig. 15 is a vertical section in the plane 
y' y', Fig. 14. Fig. 16 is a similar section 
illustrating the operation of the grip. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts. 
In the drawings, the letter A designates the 
elevator-car, from which extends a rope over 
a sheave, B, which turns in an axle having 
bearings in boxes that are firmly attached to 
4o the beams C. From the sheave B the rope 
extends beneath a sheave, d, and thence up 
wardly to a beam, c, where it is firmly se 
cured. The sheave d is mounted in a cage 
firmly secured to the rod of the piston D of 
45 the hydraulic engine. This hydraulic engine 
is of a usual construction, and is herein briefly 
described and shown in detail only for the 
purpose of more clearly showing the opera 
tion of the elevator. 
Referring at present to Fig. 2, D'is the main 
cylinder, which contains the piston D, and E. 
35 
25 
3O 
 
2 
377,635 
O 
30 
I5 
its motion, I make use of the following devices 
which engage with the valve-rope E and move 
the same to said effect: The two strands of 
the valve - rope G, Fig. 1, are respectively 
5 adapted to be engaged by two grips, II, which 
I shall hereinafter term the primary grips; 
and said strands are also adapted to be en 
gaged, respectively, by two grips, J J', which 
I term the secondary grips. The primary 
grips II are located at the top of the car, and 
are actuated to engage the valve-rope by the 
hands of the attendant. The secondary grips 
J J are located at the bottom of the car, and 
are actuated by the foot of the attendant. 
Referring to Figs. 5and 6, the primary grips 
II are each constructed as follows: Asleeve, 
Ji, encompasses the rope, and is provided with 
two projections or nibs, if', that are engaged 
by vertical spring-hooks if', carried by a 
bracket, J, secured to the elevator. car. The 
projections or nibs i' i' are constructed with 
rounded faces, so that in descending the same 
will force the spring-hooks if' apart, and the 
hooks will close over said nibs or projections 
25 when the sleeve is at its lowest point. At the 
same time the sleeve can be drawn upward and 
away from the hooks if' when sufficient force 
is applied. The sleeve Ji is slotted for the 
passage of the two jaws J J', which are piv 
oted eccentrically at ji, Fig. 6, to suitable lugs 
rising from the sleeve. The shanks or outer 
ends of the jaws are engaged by the bifurcated 
end of a lever, K or K, which is pivoted at 
k' to a hanger Secured to the roof of the car. 
A suitable handle, k, Fig. 1, suspended by a 
cord attached to the free end of the lever K, 
(or K,) can be used to facilifate the manipula 
tion of the said lever. A spring, f, engaging 
the lever K, holds the same normally against 
a suitable stop, j, when the parts of the grip 
I or I are in the position shown in Figs. 5 and 
6. When the inner end of the lever K is de 
pressed, the jaws J J' are turned about their 
pivots ji, So as to bite into the rope, and on 
further movement of lever the sleeve J* is 
drawn from the hooks if and carried upward, 
together with the jaws JJ, whereby the rope 
is caused to move on its sheaves. When the 
lever is released, the spring freturns the same 
to its normal position against the stop j', and 
in this vibration of the lever the jaws JJ are 
first released from the rope, and then sleeve 
Ji is returned to the grasp of the hooks ff. 
Referring to Figs, 3 and 4, the secondary 
55 grips are each constructed as follows: The 
jaws L. L are carried by arms ll, projecting 
from sleeves L. L., which are loosely mounted 
on vertical spindles ll, secured to a bracket 
or support, L, attached to the bottom of the 
6o elevator-car A. These sleeves L L contain 
inclined cam-grooves it, into which project 
prongs on the end of a foot-lever, M, (or M',) 
which is pivoted at in to a box secured to the 
floor of the car. A spring, n, holds the inner 
65 end of the foot-lever in its upper or normal 
position. When the inner end of the foot-le 
ver is depressed, the sleeves LL are oscillated 
35 
45 
SC 
 
90 
95 
The general operation of the mechanism is to 
about their spindles, and the jaws L L firmly 
grip the valve-rope. 
as follows, Figs. 1, 2, 7, and 8: If the car is at 
the bottom of the shaft and is to rise, the hand 
lever K of the primary grip I is depressed and 
subsequently released, thereby causing the 
valve-rope G to be moved in the direction of 75 
arrows 1, Fig. 7, and the valve E is moved 
from the position shown in full lines in Fig. 2 
and slightly upward, and consequently the pis 
ton D is moved downward, causing a slow mo 
tion upward of the car. Immediately after the 
release of ever K the foot-lever M of the sec 
ondary grip J is depressed and the jaws L. L. 
grip the valve-rope. The car being in motion, 
the valve-rope is moved to fully open the 
valve E, Fig. 7, after which the foot-lever M 
is released by the attendant. 
To arrest the notion of the car while in its 
upward movement, the foot-lever M of the 
secondary grip J is depressed, and the jaws L. 
L thereof grip the opposite strand of the valve 
rope, and consequently the rope is noved in 
a direction opposite to that indicated by ar 
rows 1 in Fig. 7 until the valve E reaches its 
central position, as shown in Fig. 2, when the 
attendant releases the foot-lever. If the car 
is at the top of the elevator-shaft and is to de 
scend, Fig. 8, the lever K of the primary 
grip I is depressed, whereby the valve-rope 
is moved in the direction of arrows 2, Fig. 8, 
and the car is set in motion. The hand-lever 
being released, the foot-lever M of the sec 
ondary grip J is depressed, and the valve 
rope is moved to fully open the valve E, Fig. 
8. To arrest the motion of the car in its de 
scent, the foot-lever M of the secondary grip 
J is depressed. 
If desired, the secondary grip J' can be 
omitted and the primary grip I used to ar 
rest the motion of the car. 
By the use of the grip for starting and stop 
ping the car the said operation is facilitated 
and rendered very certain. 
On inspection of Figs. 7 and 8 it will be 
noticed that the use of both secondary grips 
J J can be dispensed with, if desired, and the 
primary grips II employed to stop the car. 
For instance, to cause the elevator-car to move 
upward the grip I is moved upward to open 
the motor-valve E, and to arrest the motion of 
the car the grip I is thrown into engagement 12o 
With the valve-rope. To cause the car to de 
scend, the grip I is vibrated to open the valve, 
and then the grip I is thrown into engagement 
With the valve-rope to fully open the motor 
valve. To arrest the motion in descending, 125 
the grip I is caused to engage the valve-rope. 
By the use of a single primary grip of ape 
culiar construction and a single secondary grip 
the elevator can be controlled by the use of 
these two grips alone. In this case the pri. 
mary grip is used to start the car in either di 
rection, and the secondary grip is used to ar. 
rest the motion of the same. 
The construction of the primary gripisillus 
I 5 
JO5 
Too 
O 
377,635 
3 
O 
2.) 
25 
45 
85 
9O 
8O 
m 
75 
completely opens the valve, whereupon the 
trated in Figs. 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13, and the 
attendant moves the grip-carrier N to its nor 
construction of the secondary grip in Figs. 3 
mal position, Fig. 10. To check the move-. 
and 4, said latter grip being the same in con 
ment of the car, the secondary grip J is thrown 
struction and application as that used in the 
into engagement with the valve-rope G, where: 
example previously described. In Figs. 9, 10, 
by the latter is moved in a direction opposite 
11, 12 the letter in represents one jaw of the 
to arrow 1, Fig. 7, until the valve E is closed, 
grip-I, which is secured to a horizontal car 
rier, N, that is provided with an interior lon 
when the attendant releases the grip. 
gitudinal guideway for a second carrier, N. 
To cause the car to descend, the grip I is 
caused to grasp the rope, and is moved down 
The carrier N can slide in the direction of its 
wardly to the position shown in Fig.12, whence 
length in the carrier N, and has affixed thereto 
the valve is partially opened, the movement 
the second jaw, n, of the grip. The carrier N 
is provided with trunnions in n, Fig. 9, that 
of the car fully opening the latter, as before. 
bear in a suitable support, n, secured to the 
described. To arrest the motion of the car, 
the secondary grip J is thrown into engage 
wall of the elevator-car, and the carrier N is also 
ment with the valve-rope and Subsequently 
provided with a handle, 0. To the top and 
bottom of the carrier N are pivoted at pp two 
caused to release the same, as before described. 
The primary grip I, above described, and 
levers, PP, that are connected with the slid 
ing carrier N' by pawlspp., which carry pins 
illustrated in Figs. 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13, is in 
engaging hooks or projections pp on the car 
tended to be grasped by the hand of the at 
By depressing the lever P the pawl 
tendant, and is arranged at a convenient height 
rier N. 
p' engages the hook or projection p' and moves 
in view thereof. It is, however, in some cases 
desirable that the grip I should be arranged 
the sliding carrier N outward in the direction 
of arrow 5, and the jaw n' is forced against the 
near the roof of the car, so as to be out of the 
valve-rope G, and the latter is firmly clamped 
way, in which case it is actuated by means of 
Stops p on the 
ropes connected therewith. This modification 
between the two jaws in n. 
levers P. P; prevent the pawls from turning 
is illustrated in Figs. 14, 15, and 16. 
The operating parts of the grip are con 
in the wrong direction when said levers are 
depressed, and a spring, p", holds the lower 
structed, in general, as before. At or near the 
pawl against its stop. A spiral spring, P, re 
end of the levers PPS are lugs q q., which pro 
ject laterally thereform and contain transverse 
turns the sliding carrier to its normal position 
as soon as the actuating-lever P is released. 
openings, through which extend the vertical 
rods g g of a frame, Q. To the heads "q", 
By moving the lever P toward the handle o of 
connecting the rods g g of the frame, are at 
the pivoted carrier N the sliding carrier is 
tached, respectively, ropes S* and S", having 
moved outward, as indicated by arrow 5, Fig. 
suitable handles, sk and s, at their lower. 
10; but each lever PP can be actuated inde 
ends. The rope S passes over pulleys ss. 
pendent of the other. One lever, P, would be 
By pulling down on the rope S-8 the head q 
sufficient to actuate the sliding carrier N'; but 
engages the lever P and draws the same down 
two are used to facilitate the manipulation of 
ward, first, to throw the grip into contact with 
the device. 
the valve-rope G, Figs. 14 and 16, and, sec 
The pivoted carrier N can be vibrated about 
ondly, to turn the carrier Nabout its trunnions 
its trunnions in n' in either direction, so that 
in n, whereby the valve-rope is moved to 
the valve-rod G can be drawn in either direc 
slightly open the valve E. When the rope S" 
tion. When the grip I has a hold on the 
valve-rope and the pivoted carrier N is turned 
is drawn downward, the carrier N is vibrated 
in an opposite direction. 
about its trunnions in the direction of arrow 
As shown in Fig. 14, the links pp can b 
6, Fig. 10, to occupy the position shown in 
Fig. 11, the valve-rope G is moved in the di 
used instead of the pawls to connect the le 
vers PP to the sliding carrier N, said links 
rection of arrow 7, Fig. 10, to open the engine 
being pivoted to the latter, and instead of a 
valve, when the carrier N is turned from the 
spiral spring, P, acting on the sliding carrier, 
position shown in Fig. 10 to occupy the posi 
springs P, acting on the levers PP, can be 
tion shown in Fig. 12, the valve-rope is moved 
in a direction opposite to that indicated by 
used. 
arrow 7, Fig. 10. In the application of these 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
grips to the car (see Fig. 13) the primary grip 
Letters Patent, is 
I is arranged to engage with one strand of the 
1. The combination, with an elevator-car,its 
endless valve-rope G, and the secondary grip 
motor, a valve, and a valve-rope, of a grip car 
ried by the car and having jaws to engage the 
J, which is operated by the foot of the attend 
valve-rope, said grip being adapted to move 
ant, is adapted to engage' With the opposite 
independently of the car in the direction of 
strand of the valve-rope. If the car is at the 
the valve-rope, and a lever for operating the 
bottom of the elevator-shaft (see Fig. 7) and it 
jaws of the grip, whereby the valve can be 
is to be set in motion, the grip J is caused to 
clamp the rope and to move upward, whereby slightly opened, the valve being fully opened 13o 
the valve-rope is moved in the direction of by the subsequent movement of the car while 
arrow 1, Fig. 7, and the valve E is partially the rope is under the grasp of the grip-jaws, 
opened. By retaining the hold of the grip I substantially as described. 
on the valve-rope the movement of the car 
2. The combination, with the elevator-car 
95 
I 25 
OO 
IO5 
IO 
115 
 
377,635 
6. The combination, with a pivoted jaw- 3o 
carrier, N, and a sliding jaw-carrier, N, car 
and with the endless valve-rope, of a primary 
grip carried by the car and having jaws to en 
lied by the same, of a lever pivoted to the car 
gage one strand of the valve-rope, said grip 
rier N and connected with the carrier N, sub 
being adapted to move independently of the 
stantially as shown and described. 
car, a secondary controllable grip carried by 
carrier, N, having a longitudinal guideway, a 
the car and having jaws to engage the second 
jaw-carrier, N, fitted to said guideway, levers 
strand of the valve-rope, and levers for oper 
atting the jaws of said grips, substantially as 
PP, pivoted to the jaw-carrier N, and a con 
necting-link between the levers and the jaw 
described. 
carrier N', substantially as shown and de- 35 
3. The combination, with an elevator-car, a 
motor, its valve, and with the valve-rope, of 
Scribed. 
a grip carried by the car, a lever for operating 
7. The combination, with a pivoted jaw 
carrier and a sliding jaw-carrier, of a pair of 
the jaws of the grip and for imparting a mo 
levers connected with the carrier N', a mova 
tion to the same in the direction of the valve 
rope, and a controllable secondary grip con 
ble frame in engagement with said levers, and 4o 
structed to engage with the valve-rope to close cords or chains attached to the opposite ends 
the valve, substantially as shown and de- of the frame, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
carrier, N, and a sliding jaw-carrier, N', of a my hand and seal in the presence of two sub- 15 
lever connected with the carrier N, for actuat- scribing witnesses. 
ing the same, and a connection between the 
lever and the pivoted jaw-carrier, substantially 
as shown and described. 
5. The combination, with a pivoted jaw- 
4. The combination, with a pivoted jaw- 
W. HAUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 
scribed. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES G. OTIS. L. s. 
w 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377735.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 377,735. 
 
R. M. BIDELMAN. 
PROCESS OF CARBURETING AIR, 
Patented Feb. 14, 1888, 
s 
Z72 ye-222 2. 
72e2e2/MZ52'227-ree 
azir -223 2 %2. 
- N. Peters, Photo-lithographer. Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT MAURICE BIDEEMAN, OF ADRIAN, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
PETROLEUM LIGHT AND HEAT COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PROCESS OF CARBURETING AIR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,735, dated February 14, 1888. 
Application filed April 21, 1887. Serial No. 235,605. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT MAURICE BI 
DELMAN, of Adrian, in the county of Lenawee 
and State of Michigan, have invented new and 
useful Improvementsin Processes of Carburet. 
ing Air; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawing, which forms a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in a process for the manu 
facture of illuminating oil-gas and the appa 
ratus for carrying out such process. In the 
manufacture of such gas by carbureting air 
with the vapors of crude or unrefined hydro 
carbon oils it is necessary that such manufac 
ture should be nearly simultaneous with its 
use, as the tendency of such gas is to con 
dense at certain temperatures, so that it can 
not be stored for future use with economy, 
for condensation not only takes place in the 
holder, but also in the service-pipes. 
The object of the present invention is to so 
manufacture such gas that it will not condense 
under ordinary circumstances, but become 
practically a fixed gas. 
The invention consists in so treating the air 
in its passage through the carburetor that the 
heavier vapors of the hydrocarbons employed 
will not be carried off with the more volatile 
vapors, and that the gas thus made is passed 
through a washer containing strong soapsuds, 
the alkali in which has an affinity for the fatty 
constituents of crude oils, and will take them 
up, and thereby remove those portions that 
tend to condensation, letting a fixed vapor 
pass to the holder, where it may be stored 
until required for consumption. 
In order to better understand this process, 
reference is had to the accompanying draw 
ing, which forms a part of this specification, 
and which shows alongitudinal Sectional view 
of a preferred form of apparatus, and wherein 
A represents a fan or blower for forcing the 
air through the carburetors B by the pipe C, 
leading into the carburetornearest the blower. 
The carburetors are set in Series, as shown, 
and so arranged with dividing-diaphragms D 
that the air entering under pressure at the top 
- 
65 
of the first compartment is compelled to pass 
under the diaphragm and rise in the next 
compartment, passing Out at the top thereof 
into the next carburetor at its top, thence 
downward and under the diaphragm in this 
compartment, and rising in the next, to pass 55 
out at its top, and so on until the gas is con 
veyed from the last compartment to the holder 
E through the pipe F. These carburetors 
may consist of a long box divided in pairs of 
compartments by means of partition-walls G, 
extending from the bottom nearly to the top, 
with intermediate diaphragm, D, pendent 
from the top of the air-tight box nearly to its 
bottom, in order to give the ZigZag direction 
to the air currents described... 
There are several of these chambers en 
ployed, each being divided into two compart 
ments by means of the hanging diaphragms D. 
Each of these chambers is filled with charcoal 
and the charcoal Saturated With any suitable 
hydrocarbon containing some of the lighter 
volatile oils. The air being forced through, 
as described, takes up any of the volatile va. 
pors-preferably the more volatile ones-and 
also a certain amount of the tarry matters. 
present in the oil. 
From the first carburetor the gas is passed 
through soapsuds, which act in two ways, 
first mechanically in washing the gas-that is, 
freeing it of the heavier vapors, whose tend 
ency to be readily condensed is greatly in 
creased by the physical properties of the soap 
suds, as well as by the hydrostatic pressure it 
has to undergo in passing through-and, sec 
ondly, in a chemical way by absorbing the 
tarry matters. 
The gas escaping from the soapsuds has 
been deprived of a portion of its vapors 
namely, the heavier ones-and in its passage 
through the next carbureting-chamber it will 
again be in a condition to take up some more 
vapor, but this time a much smaller amount, 
and consequently a less amount of heavy 
vapors than in the first carburetor. By a re 
peated process of Washing, as before, the heavy 
vapors are again abstracted, and the gas re 
sulting may be now directed into the holder, 
or passed through more carbureting and wash 
ing chambers, if thought necessary. 
95 
75 
. 
IOO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
377,735 
What I claim as new is 
The process of manufacturing illuminating 5 
I use charcoal in the carburetors, as it pre- 
sents a large amount of surface, permits the 
air to pass readily through it with the press- oil-gas herein described, consisting of a series 
ure of a fan-blower, and further prevents the of like operations, each operation comprising 
mechanical abstraction of oil by the blast and two separate steps, the first consisting in forc 
absorbs a relatively large quantity of oil. 
ing the air through a carbureting - chamber 
lutions on account of their chemical and physi-bon, and the second in forcing the air through 
cal properties. 
From the nature of the process it will be un- 
derstood that the washing and carbureting 
chambers may be multiplied to any extent de- 
sired. 
ROBERT MAURICE BIIDELMAN. 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
E. I. SCULLY. 
The soapsuds I prefer to other alkaline so- filled with charcoal saturated with hydrocar- 20 
soapsuds, substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377835.txt	(No Model.) 
F. H. LYMAN & A. J. JOHNSON, 
HOOD WINK. 
 
No. 377,835, 
4, eatented Feb. 14, 1888, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK H. LYMAN AND ANDREW J. JOHNSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, As. 
SIGNORS TO THEMSELVES AND HENRY N. ANABLE, OF SAME PLACE. 
HooDWINK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,835, dated February 14, 1888. 
Application filed December 24, 1886. Serial No. 222,491. (No model.) 
. 
- 
2O ings. 
To all whom it may concern 
Beit known that we, FRANKH. LYMAN and 
ANDREW J. JOHNSON, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Chicago, in the county of 
5 Cook and State of Illinois, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Hood 
winks, of which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to hoodwinks such as 
are used for blindfolding persons in certain 
Io games and amusements and on the stage and 
in secret-society work. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
hoodwink where with to enable the conductor 
of the blindfolded person to easily and con 
15 veniently restore such blindfolded person to 
light from time to time, as may be desired, 
Without at the same time removing the hood 
wink. This object we obtain by means of the 
devices illustrated in the accompanying draw 
Figure 1 is a view of our invention with the 
sight-aperture covered. Fig. 2 is a view of 
the same with the sight-aperture open. Fig. 
3 is a detailed view showing the structure and 
25 relation of the eye-piece to the hoodwink 
proper. 
Like parts are indicated by the same letters 
in all the figures. 
A is a piece of opaque material, preferably 
3o elastic, and molded or fashioned so as to con 
form in general outline to the form of the hu 
man face about the eyes. It is provided at 
each end with keepers B B, in which the se 
curing-strap C is secured. This strap is pro 
5 vided with a buckle, D, and is adapted to be 
buckled about the head of the person wearing : 
the hoodwink, so as to secure the same in po 
sition. In the front of the part A are two eye 
or sight apertures, EE, in such a position as 
4o to fall in line with the eyes of the wearer, and 
when open to permit him to look through 
them. About this sight-aperture are raised 
ribs or feathers FF, inside of which and along 
the narrow margins of the sight-aperture are 
G G are eye-pieces, adapted to rest on the 
ledge about the sight-aperture and forwardly 
projecting covered centerportion. These two 
eye-pieces are connected together by a some 
5o what-flexible band, J', which passes over the 
nose-piece of the hoodwink proper. Each of 
45 narrowledges. 
65 . 
55 
these eye-pieces is connected at its outer end, 
by a flexible band, J, to the keepers, which 
also secure the strap of the hoodwink proper, 
and somewhat above the nose thereof is the 
hook EI. 
The use and operation of our invention are as 
follows: The hoodwink is strapped upon the 
head of the person to be blindfolded, and it is 
to such a degree elastic as to conform to the 
outlines of the face of the wearer. It fits 
closely upon the wearer, and does not permit 
any light to reach his eyes from about its edge. 
The eye-pieces are now brought down so that 
their edges rest upon the margins of the sight. 
apertures, and thus entirely exclude the light 
from the eye of the wearer. If, now, it should 
be desired at any moment to temporarily re 
store the blindfolded person to light, and yet 
to leave the hoodwinkin such a shape that he 
could be again-immediately and without diffi 
culty-put into darkness, the eye-pieces are 
lifted out of the sockets between the ledges or 
feathers where they rest, and are carried up 
ward toward the forehead and suspended on 75 
the hoodwink at the hook H. The piece which 
connects them may be of any desired strength, 
and, while being flexible, should at the same 
time be strong enough to enable the conductor 
to easily lift the two eye-pieces from over the 
eye and Suspend them on the hook above. 
The ledges or feathers keep the eye-pieces from 
slipping out of place on the hoodwink. 
It will be observed that this hoodwink, when 
the eye-pieces are in position, can be readily 8 
5 
packed for shipment and for storage. 
We areaWare that hoodwinks have been here. 
tofore made and patented wherein a tube or 
eye-piece projects forwardly some distance 
from the sight-aperture and has the blinder or 
eye-piece on the end thereof; and our inven 
tion is designed to dispense with these project 
ing parts, which in many instances where the 
hoodwinkis used are extremely inconvenient, 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we desire to claim and patent is as follows: 
1. A hoodwink consisting of a soft fabric 
conforming to the features of the face about 
the eyes, provided with sight-apertures, in 
combination with eye-pieces which set over rco 
the apertures and directly upon the surface of 
the pad. 
90 
 
1 
2 
377,835 
5 secured to each other and adapted to cover hands, this 4th day of December, 1886, at Chi 
2. The combination of the fabric pad, con- cured to the pad by elastic straps, and adapted 
forming to the features about the eyes and to rest on the pad between the eyes and over 
having sight-apertures with surrounding ribs, the apertures. 
and eye-pieces secured to the pad by straps and 
the sight-apertures. 
3. The combination of a soft-fabric pad, 
which conforms to the features about the eyes 
and having sight-apertures and surrounding 
Io ribs, with a strap to secure the pad on the 
head, and eye-pieces connected together, se- 
FRANK H. LYMAN. 
ANDREW J. JOHNSON. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto set our I5 
cago, Illinois. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCEs W. PARKER, 
L. A. GARDINER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US377937.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 377,937, 
J. J. HEYWOOD, 
DRIVING BAND FOR SPINDLES, 
Patented Feb. 14, 1888, 
FIG 
WITNESSES 
FIG 2 
NVENTF 
 
...Perers, Photo-Lithographer, washirtel, p.c. 
m 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN JAMES HEYWOOD, OFFALL RIVER, MASSACHUSETTS, 
DRIVING-BAND FOR SPINDLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 377,937, dated February 14, 1888. 
Application filed May 20, 1887. Serial No. 288,846, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
By means of a proper marking tool or im- 7o 
method of joining the ends. Fig. 6 shows a 
To all whom it may concern: 
part of this band with its ends joined. Fig. 7 
Beit known that I, JoHN JAMES HEYWOOD, 
represents part of a twisted band, one end of 55 
of Fall River, county of Bristol, and State of 
which is marked and the other formed into a 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Bands for Driving Spin 
loop, to which the first end is to be secured. 
The bands A may be either braided or twist 
dles, &c.; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ed, those shown in all the drawings but Fig. 
ing specification, taken in connection with the 
7 being of the former variety. In marking 5o 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of 
bands near both ends, as shown in Figs. 1 
the same, to be a description thereof. 
and 2, the result may be conveniently attained 
This invention relates to bands for driving 
by winding a quantity of the banding around 
Spindles, &c.; and the improvement consists 
and along a cylinder or drum whose circum 
in marking the bands to show just where their 
ference is, say, eight inches greater than the 65 
ends should be joined to produce a finished or 
length the bands are to be, a tension being 
endless band of the right length; and it also 
preferably applied to the banding during such 
consists in tipping the ends of the marked 
winding substantially equal to the tension the 
bands, So Said ends may be readily passed 
bands are to have when in use upon a frame. 
through the body of the band to connect and 
fasten said ends, as hereinafter described and 
plement moved longitudinally of the drum 
claimed. 
two lines eight inches apart are drawn or 
Bands constructed before my invention, as 
marked across the convolutions of banding, and 
far as I am aware, have had no mark or marks 
such convolutions are then cut apart on a line 
thereon to determine just where the ends there 
midway between the lines of marking, thus di- 75 
of should be tied or joined to make the end 
viding the wound banding into distinct bands, 
less band the right length to do its work prop 
the length of each of which between the marks 
erly. In applying an unmarked band to a 
a, a thereon is the desired length the band is 
frame the band is passed around the drum or 
to be when its ends are joined, there being 
cylinder and the whirl of the spindle. It is 
left four inches projecting beyond the mark at 8o 
drawn to what is judged to be the proper ten 
each end for convenience in joining the ends, 
sion, and its ends are tied or joined. Some of 
as indicated at Fig. 1. 
the bands on the frame will be too tight, pro 
When the bands are of the kind having a 
ducing too much friction between the spindle 
loop at one end, as shown in the twisted band 
and its bearings and consuming too much 
power in consequence, as well as causing the 
illustrated in Fig. 7, but one mark, a, is ap- 85 
plied to the band, and that to the end oppo 
bands to wear quickly, and some will be too 
site the looped end b. In such a band the 
loose, the result being uneven work performed 
by the frame. It is very desirable, therefore, junction of the ends is effected bypassing one 
or more strands of the marked end of the band 
that the bands should all be of the same length 
through the loop b until the mark a comes to. 9o 
when on the frame, and this object it is the 
the loop, and then tying said strandsina well 
intention of my invention to accomplish, and 
known manner, the marka, which has been 
in addition thereto to furnish a band whose 
placed the required distance from the loop b, 
ends can readily be passed through its body 
determining the finished length of the band. 
portion to secure said ends. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure1 rep 
that by marking the bands, as described, they 
resents a band marked near its ends to show 
will all be of the same length and have the 
the length the band should be when its ends. 
same tension when applied to a frame, and that 
are properly joined. Fig. 2 shows the same 
skilled labor need not be employed to apply 
with the ends of the band tipped with metal 
the bands, as the marks show so plainly where too 
or other material to facilitate the passing of 
the junction of the ends should be made that 
said ends through the body of the band. Fig. 
boys may do the Work. 
3 shows one method of joining the ends of the 
In securing the ends of bands to each other 
band. Fig. 4 represents a part of the band 
with its ends joined. Fig. 5 shows another the junction may be effected by passing said 
From the foregoing it will be readily seen 95 
 
2 
377,937 
ends longitudinally through the body of the 
band, as shown in Fig. 3, the ends being en 
tered at the marks aa and then pulled through, 
so as to bring the marks a a together, as shown 
5 in Fig. 4, the projecting ends being cut off 
where they emerge. The ends may also be 
joined by returning one end upon itself and 
passing it back longitudinally through the 
body of the band, thereby forming a loop, c, 
Io as shown in Fig. 5, then inserting the other 
end of the band through said loop and pass 
ing said end back through the body of the band, 
each end entering the body at the marks a a, 
and finally pulling upon the ends to close the 
I5 space between the marks, as shown in Fig. 6, 
the ends being cut off where they emerge. 
In order to enable the ends of the band to 
be quickly and conveniently inserted into the 
body thereof at the marks at a, and to be passed 
2O longitudinally through the body the desired 
distance, I provide the ends of the band with 
tips B, of any preferred material and form, as 
shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 5, thereby furnishing 
a band which, from being marked as described, 
25 can have its proper applied length readily and 
easily determined, and from being tipped can 
have its ends quickly and conveniently passed 
through its body to secure the same. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- . 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, a 
braided or twisted band for driving spindles, 
&c., having an indicating mark or marks there 
on, substantially as described, to show where 
the ends should be joined to make the band 
the proper length, substantially as set forth. 
2. As an improved article of manufacture, a 
braided or twisted band for driving spindles, 
&c., having indicating-marks thereon, sub 
stantially as described, to show where the ends 
should be joined to make the band the proper 
length, and having its ends provided with 
tips, substantially as described, to enable them 
to be readily passed through the body of the 
band, substantially as set forth. 
35 
JOHN JAMES HEYWOOD. 
Witnesses: 
EDSON SALISBURY JONEs, 
HENRY J. STAPELTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378038.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 378,038, 
 
 
 
 
 
P. BROWN. 
CAR COUPLING, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 14, 1888. 
 
a 
71 2 
2. 2zza 
Sea 
/ 
 
sz 
N 
WTNESSS 
A. 
. 
. 
2 
INVENTOR, 
an a-stry 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
: 
No. 378,038, 
P. BROWN. 
CAR COUPLING, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
w 
Patented Feb. 14, 1888. 
NVENTOR 
6. YATTORNEY, 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PERRY BROWN, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
CAR-couPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent INo. 378,038, dated February 14, 1888. 
Application filed August 27, 1887. Serial No. 245,059. (No model.) 
W 
O 
5 
25 
which- 
ing in the course of a year. This and the 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PERRY BROWN, a citi 
other features of the invention will be best 
understood on reference to the accompanying 55 
Zen of the United States, residing at Louisville, 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
in the county of Jefferson and State of Ken 
5 tucky, have invented certain new and useful 
tion, and in which 
Improvements in Car-Couplings, of which the 
A designates the draw-bar, the mouth of 
following is a specification, reference being 
which is formed on the arc of a circle, and at 
had therein to the accompanying drawings, in 
one side formed with ears or lugs to receive 6o 
the pin B, upon which is pivoted the hook C, 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of two ad 
at substantially right angles to which is the 
jacent couplings embodying my improvements 
arm C, said hook and arm constituting the 
as they appear when united and upon a curve, 
* clutch.' The clutch (shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
a portion of one of said couplings being shown 
and 3) is cored, as shown, to add strength 65 
in section. Fig. 2 is a similar view with parts 
thereto and decrease its weight, and the outer 
broken away and parts in section, showing 
face of the hook is formed on the arc of a cir 
cle. By previous construction the hinge of 
two couplings, one of old construction and the 
other embodying my improvements. Fig. 3 
the clutch was so placed that the opposite 
draw-head bore on the said hook and the draw-yo . 
is a central vertical longitudinal section 
through one of the couplings shown in Fig. 1. 
head to which it was hinged. Consequently 
Fig. 4 is a top plan of the same, showing the 
the wear was at this point, and the same soon 
clutch thrown back to allow of the coupling became worn, as indicated at a by dotted lines 
being used with an ordinary link. Fig. 5 is a 
in Fig. 2, arid when thus worn not only the 
similar view of the same with parts broken 
clutch, but the draw-bar, has to be thrown 75 
away. I avoid this difficulty by placing the 
away, illustrating the manner of holding the 
clutch in its locked position. Fig. 6 is a side 
hinge of the clutch back of the point of con 
elevation of the locking-dog detached. . 
In this way 
tact of the draw-bar, as shown. 
the wear comes on the clutch, which, if it be 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in car-couplings of that 
comes So worn as not to be of use, can be read- 8o 
class which are termed twin couplings;' and 
ily replaced by a new one at a very small cost. 
it has for its object to provide for the coupling 
The coupling shown at the right of Fig. 2 is 
and uncoupling of the cars on a sharp curve, 
one of old form, with the clutch arranged ac 
cording to my improvement. 
to take the wear off of the draw-head proper, 
and to otherwise increase the durability and 
The peculiar form of the mouth of the draw 
efficiency of the coupling. 
head admits of the coupling and uncoupling 
on, say, a twenty-degree curve, the line 11 
The novelty consists in the peculiar con 
in Fig. i. illustrating the straight line and the 
struction of the draw-head and of the clutch, 
- the means of locking said clutch, and the pe. 
line 22 the angle that the parts assume before 
they bind. The corresponding lines in Fig.2 
culiar combinations and the construction, ar. 
rangement, and adaptation of parts, all as 
will show how soon the parts, by the old con 
40 
struction, will bind after deviating from a 
more fully hereinafter described and claimed. 
In previous constructions of draw-heads the 
straight line. The arm of the clutch works in 
wear of the parts has been on the draw-head 
a recess in the mouth of the draw-head, which 
proper, so that in a short time an entirely 
recess communicates with a chamber, b, in 95 
which works the dog D, pivoted on a trans 
new draw-head has to be substituted. By my 
verse pivot, d, and when the arm of the clutch 
construction the Wear is taken from the draw 
head and all the wear is upon the clutch, 
terminates in a hook, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
which, as it becomes too much worn to per 
and 3, the forward end of this dog also termi 
form proper service, can be readily removed 
nates in a hook, as shown in Fig. 3, to engage Ioo 
and replaced by a new one without disturbing 
the hook of the arm, as shown in said Fig. 3. . 
the draw-head. The cost of a new clutch be 
The rear end of the dog is formed with a notch 
ing very small compared with that of the en 
or curve, as shown, to engage one end of a 
coil-spring, E, which passes through an open 
tire coupling, this will constitute a great sav 
90 
35 
45 
 
2 
378,038 
ing in the draw-bar and is suitably secured at like that shown in the other figures, and Icon 
template using the spring shown in Fig. 3 
its other end within the draw-bar, as shown. 
This spring serves to more firmly and se 
with the dog shown in said figures. 
curely hold the dog in contact with the arm and 
... What I claim as new is 
lock the clutch. The hinging of the clutch in 
1. A draw-head of the character described, 
the position shown permits the same to be 
having its mouth formed on the arc of a circle 
thrown back into the position shown in Fig. 
drawn substantially at right angles to the axis 4o 
4, to allow of the coupling being used with an 
of the draw-head, combined with a clutch piv 
ordinary link, as seen in the same figure. 
oted to said draw-head at the rear of one end 
Instead of forming the dog and the arm of 
of said arc and having the outer face of its 
the clutch of the form shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 
hook formed substantially on the arc of a cir 
3, I prefer that shown in Figs. 5 and 6, in 
cle, as set forth. 
which the dog instead of being hooked at its 
2. The combination, with the draw-head and 
forward end is broadened to strengthen it, and 
the clutch pivoted thereto, of a dog pivoted to 
the arna of the dog instead of being hook 
said draw-head and working in a chamber 
shaped is formed with a flattened end. As the 
therein and engaging the arm of the clutch, 
couplings unite, the arm of the clutch striking 
and a spring secured at one end directly to the 
the beveled end of the dog raises the same and 
rear end of the dog and at its other end to the 
moves by it. When the dog falls, it falls in 
draw-head, substantially as described. 
the path of the arm, and the latter, as soon as 
3. The combination, with the draw-head hav 
there is any strain on the clutch, is caused to 
ing a horizontal recess and a chamber, b, of a 
bear on the side of the dog, as seen in Fig. 5. 
clutch pivoted to said draw-head and having 
This relieves the pivot-pin of the dog of the 
an arm working in said recess, and a pivoted 
direct strain, as will be readily understood. 
dog working in said chamber, with its side en 
In ordinary use upon a straight track the 
gaging the point of said arin, substantially as 
wear comes upon the inner face of the hook of 
described. 
the clutch, and at this point I secure, in any 
suitable manner, so that it may be removed 
presence of two witnesses, this 27th day of Au 
when desired, a steel bearing-plate, as seen at 
F in Fig. 1. As this plate becomes worn, it 
can be replaced by a new one at a trifling ex 
The clutch shown in Figs. 4 and 5 is cored. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature, in 6o 
W. T. RoBERTsoN, 
E. H. BOND. 
. 
. . 
PERRY BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
45 
50 
gust, 1887. 
pense. 
- 
- 
35 
55 
O 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378139.txt	(No Model.) 
B. A. LEGG, 
CHAIN FOR CONWEYERS 
No. 378,139, 
 
 
Patented Feb. 21, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ZZZZZZ$S 
a 
% 
4.62 
<6 42.447. 
f 
P/zz/26sses, 
- -7- 
a 22-ee-1 
W 
NSN 
Nz 
S. SS 
2222222 
SSSSSSS, 
N. PEERS. Phaic-Lithographer, Washington. D. C. 
2E 12 
A72267ezez 
6 
ef-03-Z-3-2t-42 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN A. LEGG, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE LECHNER, 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CHAN FOR CONVEYERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 378,139, dated February 21, 1888. 
Applicatio filed December 18, 1886. Serial No. 221,934. 
No naodel.) 
55 
IO 
To all thon, it noty concern. 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN A. LEGG, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Colum 
bus, in the county of Franklin and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Chains for Conveyers, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a top or plan view. Fig. 3 is a ver 
Fig. 4 is a 
tical Section on line a ac, Fig. J. 
horizontal section on line y 21, Fig. 1. 
The object of this invention is to construct 
an endless carrier which shall run with but 
little friction, and consequently require but 
littlepower and involve a comparatively small 
wear of any of the parts. 
Like letters indicate like parts in all of the 
figures. 
Prior to the date of my invention it was cus 
tomary to construct horse-powers and similar 
machines with metal links arranged in pairs 
at opposite ends of the lags' upon which the 
horse walks, these links being tied to each other 
by rods a little longer than the width of the 
endless platform, and having anti-friction 
wheels mounted upon the ends of those rods 
outside of the ends of the lags to run upon Sup 
porting ways or tracks. In machines of this 
sort it was customary to construct the links 
with lugs or downward extensions at each end 
to receive these rods, in order that the rods 
might take into notches of the wheels trav 
ersed by the endless platform; but in such ma 
chines it would have been impossible to mount 
the anti-friction wheels above referred to be 
tween the links and underneath the lugs. 
Again, in Patent No. 340,321, to Jeffrey, there 
is shown a chain having anti-friction rollers 
surrounding the pintles and traversing a Sup 
porting-track; but in that chain the pintles are 
in line with the side bars of the chain, so that 
the anti-friction-rollers project equally above 
and below the edges of the side bars, whereby 
it is necessary to interpose a series of upwardly 
projecting ears or wings between the conveyer 
bottoms and the side bars. 
My invention relates to side bars provided 
so at their ends with downwardly-projecting lugs 
O 
45 
3O 
 
having pintle-seats, whereby the upper edges 
of the chain-links may be formed on straight 
lines, and thereby adapted to receive and Sup 
port the conveyer-sections throughout prac 
tically their entire length. 
A B C Dindicate, respectively, the bars, the 
legs, and the inwardly - projecting sleeves of 
which the links are formed. Of these parts the 
leg A projects downward from the end of the 
side bar, B, and is provided with a pintle-seat, (t. 
These pintle-seats are by preference slightly 
longer in one diameter than the other, for a 
purpose which will be explained. Each leg C 
is provided at its lower end with an inwardly 
projecting sleeve, D, having a pintle-seat, d, 
which is circular in cross-section and of Sub 
stantially uniform diameter throughout. 
By an examination of Fig. 2 it will be seen 
that the legs A A are not in plane with the 
bars BB, but are connected there with by brack 
ets or offsets b b and strengthening webs or 
plates c e upon their outer faces, and on Fig. 
1 it will be seen that these webs are flush with 
the upper faces of the bars and the ends of the 
legs. 
c care holes in these webs to receive the 
bots or rivets. 
EE are the pintles, each provided at one end 
with a flat head, the opposite end being forked 
or split, thus forming tangs, which, after the 
chain is put together, are riveted over against 
the outer faces of the legs AA, as indicated at 
e e. By preference the pintles are turned 
round, so that when this riveting is effected 
the tangs shall overlap the longer diameters of 
the pintle-seats a ct, whereby the pintles are 
firmly locked in their seats, so as to be incapa 
ble of rotation relatively to the legs AA. This 
form of articulation is very desirable, because 
it insures that the wear shall come principally, 
if not wholly, upon the circular seats in the 
sleeves and the adjacentportions of the pintles, 
thus insuring great durability of these parts. 
FF are anti-friction rollers mounted upon 
the sleeves D D. 
It will be readily seen that by the use of my 
invention anti-friction rollers of large diame 
ter can be used without their projecting above 
the upper or outer faces of the side bars. 
75 
85 
95 
G G represent the deck or flooring of the Ioc 
378,139 
- 
25 
35 
increase in metal which is required with an 
increase in diameter of the rollers is enough to 
increase the length of the lugs one-half of the 
increase of the diameter of said rollers. 
conveyer, which is made in sections of suitable 
length and secured to the chain by bolts pass 
ing through the deck and the holes c' c' in the 
webs or strengthening-plates ( c. 
By thus constructing the links of side bars 
What I claim is 
with downward-projecting legs at their ends 
The herein-described chain for conveyers, 
having the separable side bars provided at their 
to receive the pintles I am enabled to construct 
ends with downwardly-projecting lugs, the up 
a chain which, when straightened out in work 
ing position, has a practically-continuous sur 
per edges of the side bars being substantially 
face to receive and support the platform or 
straight from end to end, in combination with 
deck, which is very desirable under many cir 
anti-friction rollers between the lugs of the 
cuastances, especially when it is requisite to side bars, and the conveyer-sections mounted 
form the deck or flooring of light thin mate upon the upper edges of the side bars, sub 
rial, either wood, metal, straw-board, or other stantially as set forth. 
analogous material for the transportation of 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
weighty substances. 
By the use of my invention I am enabled to 
use anti-friction rollers of quite large diame 
ter with but slight additional weight of metal 
o in the chains, it being apparent that the only 
presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY GUMBLE, 
W. T. MCCLURE. 
BENJAMIN A. LEGG. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378239.txt	(No Model.) 
E Q DARR, 
SWEAT PAD FASTENER, 
No. 378,239, 
Patented Feb. 21, 1888, 
Qibi essee 
(i. 
3v-to-11 to 
pEters. photo-Lithographer. Washington. O. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMORY Q. DARR, OF SHIELBY WILLE, INDIANA. 
SWEATs PAD FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 378,239, dated February 21, 1888. 
Application filed August 17, 1887. Serial No. 247,193. (No model.) 
IO 
- 
To all ition, it navy concern. 
Be it known that I, ENIORY Q, DARR, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Shelby 
ville, in the county of Shelby and State of In 
diana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Sweat-Pads; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of theinvention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to a sweat-pad and 
an improved device for securing it to a horse 
collar, the leading object and purpose of the 
invention being to construct the pad-fastening 
I5 in a novel and peculiar manner; and it consists 
in the construction and combination of parts, 
Substantially as will be hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a perspective view 
of the Sweat-pad in the position that it occu 
pies when on the horse's neck. Fig. 2 is an 
enlarged perspective of the pad when ex 
tended for the purpose of reversing. Fig. 3 
is a cross-section of pad and collar, showing 
the mode of connecting them by my improved 
clamp. Figs. 4 and 5 are enlarged perspec 
tive and side views, respectively, of my im 
proved clamps or fastenings. 
Similar letters of reference designate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
A denotes a Sweat-pad constructed of any 
suitable size and in any desired manner. 
Preferably it consists of a single strip or length 
adapted to encircle the horse's neck. 
At suitable points opposite each other along 
the inner edge of the pad are located the fast 
enings by means of which the pad is held in 
place against the collar. Thus it will be seen 
that each half of the pad-that is, the por 
tion on each side of the horse's neck--is pro 
vided with a fastening, and their location as 
regards the meeting extremities of the pad 
may be varied as the judgment of the man 
who constructs them may dictate; but it will 
usually be found best to have them, as regards 
each other, oppositely located. The mode of 
their connection to the pad is as follows: A 
strip of leather, ct, arranged to pass from a 
point on one side of the pad near its inner 
edge to an opposite point on the other side of 
45 
SO 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
G. W. KINSLEY, 
GEO. M. WRIGHT, 
55 
65 
7 5 
the pad, thus encompassing the edge more or 
less closely, said edge being usually preferably 
more or less thickened, as shown, by reason of 
the stuffing of the pad, is firmly riveted or 
otherwise fastened in this position. The clamp 
or fastening is adapted to slide upon the strap 
a from one end thereof to the other, and thus 
to be changed in position from one side of the 
pad to the other. Said clamp consists of a 
strap of spring metal, B, bent to form two 
curved spring clamping jaws, and provided 
with a loop, b, centrally between the jaws 
which inclose the strap (t. (See Fig. 4.) 
When the pad is to be attached to the collar, 
.it will first be laid upon the horse's neck, then 
the collar placed in position, and afterward 
the clamps B B sprung over the neck-roll of 
the collar, as shown in Fig. 3. It will thus be 
seen that my pad is easily reversible, so that 
either side thereof may be presented to the 
horse's neck. In warm weather a reversible 
pad of this kind is especially desirable, for 
experience has demonstrated that during a 
day's use a pad becomes so saturated with 
sweat as not to dry during the night. 
When the pad is reversible, the dry side can 
be presented to the horse's neck and the satu 
rated side be afforded additional time to dry 
during the following day. 
I am aware that a reversible sweat-pad has 
heretofore been used with a horse-collar, and 
I do not, therefore, claim such reversible pad 
as broadly new with me; but what I do claim 
in connection therewith will hereinafter spe 
cifically appear in the claim. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination, with pad A, of straps 
at a, encompassing the inner edge and secured 
on opposite sides of said pad, and clamps 
BB, having loops bb, that slide on said straps 
at a, substantially as and for the purpose speci 
fied. In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EMORY Q. DARR. 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378339.txt	(No Model.) 
A. C. SMITH, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
DISPLAY STAND FOR NON MAGNETIC WATCHES, 
No. 378,339, 
Patented Feb. 21, 1888. 
 
ADJUSTED -MH'. WilsoCHRONISM 
- 
FITN 
TEMPERATURE. 
WN) 
T 
W 
-- 
eluNINFLUENCED 
MAGNETM 
BY 
7227 esses: 
%-6 (12-4 
Sassy 
--- 
Z72-pezz-Z27, 
12/zreez O572 ZZZ 
have 2-a- 
122-s. 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D, C, 
 
(No Model.) 
A. C. SMITH, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
DISPLAY STAND FOR NON MAGNETIC WATCHES, 
No. 378,339, 
ze apatented Feb. 21, 1888. 
7zzzzesses : 
2/6.212ta. 
R& 2. 
V 
sug 
V 
Z724-e 722.277,' 
-277 elez 6 vez. 
?. 22a 46-7-2aea, 
-2227s, 
s, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED C. SMITH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
DISPLAY-STAND FOR NON MAGNET C WATCHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 378,339, dated February 21, 1888. 
Application filed December 17, 1887. Serial No. 25s,185. (No model.) 
25 
- 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALFRED C. SMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State of 
5 New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Display-Stands for Non 
Magnetic Watches; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of theinvention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
It is a well-known fact that when ordinary 
Watches having magnetic parts are brought 
within the field of a magnet said parts become 
magnetized, and the movement of the watch 
is either stopped, rendered useless, or seri 
ously affected. 
Various kinds of alleged non - magnetic 
watches are in the market and offered for sale 
to persons who have not sufficient skill or no 
convenient means for testing their non-mag 
netic genuineness. 
My invention relates to a novel display-stand 
for the exhibition of non-magnetic watches or 
watch-movements; and the improvement con 
sists, essentially, in a display-stand supporting 
one or more watches or watch-movements and 
one or more magnetsin close proximity to each 
other, so as to show to the purchaser or other 
person inspecting the same that the movement 
of the watch will not be arrested by the action 
of the magnet or magnets; and it further con 
sists in the construction and combination of 
parts hereinafter disclosed in the description, 
drawings, and claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, wherein the 
same reference-letters indicate the same or cor 
responding parts, Figure 1 represents a front 
elevation of the preferred form of my display 
4o stand supporting a series of magnets and a 
watch-movement with its case or cover. Fig. 
2 represents an elevation, and Fig. 3 a vertical 
section, of a modified form of said stand for 
supporting a single Watch and magnet, with 
said watch and magnet detached therefrom. 
The board or tray A of the stand in the sev 
eral figures of the drawings is of rectangular 
shape, supported in an upright or slightly-in 
clined position by a prop, B, and preferably 
so made of wood covered with velvet or other 
45 
35 
An ordinary Watch or movement having 6o 
suitable material. A recess, C, in the tray re 
ceives the watch or Watch-movement and its 
cover or case D, and one or more raised sup 
ports, E, adapted to fit the interiors of the 
horseshoe-magnets F, project above the sur. 55 
face of the tray, so as to hold said magnet or 
magnets radially to the watch or movement, 
with the poles of the magnets in close prox 
imity thereto. 
parts of magnetic metal-such as iron or 
nickel-if placed in the recess C of the stand 
and within the field of the magnets F will be 
come magnetized thereby, and the magnetized 
parts will tend to fix themselves in the direc- 65 
tion of the magnetic meridian and the correct 
balance and movement of the suspended parts 
will be intercepted, thereby rendering the 
Watch useless. In fact such watches are utterly 
ruined when brought near a dynamo, a mag- 7o 
net, or an electrical wire. Non-magnetic 
watches will not be thus influenced, but may 
be safely placed in the recess C of the stand 
within the field of the magnets, and, being 
properly Wound, will keep accurate time not. 
withstanding their close proximity to said mag 
nets. A jeweler or watch-manufacturer may 
thus show his non-magnetic watches to pur 
chasers, who may readily see or test their genu 
ine character. 
The stand shown in Fig.1 has four horse 
shoe-magnets held upon the raised supports E 
and arranged diagonally upon the board and 
radially around the watch or movement hold 
ing recess, with their poles located oppositely 
to each other, and is also provided with raised 
tablets upon the four sides thereof and between 
the said horseshoe-magnets, the tablets being 
respectively marked non-magnetic watches, 
adjusted to temperature,' 'isochronism and 
position,' 'uninfluenced by magnetism. 
The design or configuration of the stand may 
be varied to suit the fancy of the dealer, and 
the raised supports E may be adapted to fit 
the exterior, instead of the interior, of the 
horseshoe-magnets; or any number of watches 
and magnets may be employed, and they may 
be held or supported in various Ways upon the 
board without departing from my invention. 
75 
9o 
95 
Having thus fully described my invention, Ioo 
 
378,339 
its operation, and use or purpose, what I claim 
as new is 
1. In a display-stand, the combination of one 
or more magnets supported upon said stand, 
and a Watch or watch-movement also supported 
upon said stand and arranged in proximity to 
said magnet or magnets for the purpose of at 
tracting attention to the magnetic character 
of said watch or watch-movements, substan 
tially as described. 
2. A display-stand for exhibiting the non 
magnetic character of watches, consisting of a 
tray or board, A, having a central recess, C, 
for receiving a watch or watch-movement, and 
a series of radial supports, E, for holding horse 
shoe-magnets, and arranged to encircle said 
central recess, substantially as described. 
3. A display-stand for exhibiting the non 
magnetic character of watches, consisting of a 
tray or board, A, having a central watch-re 
cess, C, radial magnet-supports E, surround 
ing said Watch-recess, and a series of tablets 
located between said magnet-supports, and 
upon which are inscribed the characteristics 
of the watches exhibited, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
ALFRED C. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT H. TYROLER, 
W. C. PLATT. 
O 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378439.txt	(No Model.) 
J. GALVIN 
BUSTLE, 
No. 378,439, 
Patented Feb. 28, 1888. 
 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JAMES GALVIN, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THOMAS P. 
TAYLOR, OF SAME PLACE. 
BUSTLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 378,439, dated February 28, 1888. 
Application filed December 16, 1887. Serial No. 258,056. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
15 
25 
To all, who, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JAMES GALVIN, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Bridgeport, 
in the county of Fairfield and State of Con 
necticut, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Bustles; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in bustles, and has for its 
object more especially to provide a spring for 
the actuation of bustles of ordinary construc 
tion, which shall be simple and cheap, and not 
liable to displacement or distortion when in 
operative position; and with these ends in 
view tiny invention consists in the details of 
construction, which will hereinafter be fully 
set forth, and then recited in the claim. 
In order that those skilled in the art to which 
my invention appertains may fully understand 
my improved bustle, I will describe the same 
in detail, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective of a bustle contain 
ing my improved spring; Fig. 2, a detail view 
showing the spring detached; Figs. 3 and 4 
slightly modified constructions. 
Similar letters denote like parts in all the 
figures. 
1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 represent the distending 
bows of which the bustle is composed. 
6 is a check or spacing tape, and 7 a suit 
able waistband. 
The spring element consists of the coils 8, 
 
the tangentially-extended member 9, adapted 
for attachment to one of the distending bows, 
the backwardly - turned section of wire 10, 
which extends through the coils, and the men 
ber 11, arranged to be secured to the outer bow 
by means of an eyelet, 12, or in any other suit 
able manner. 
In the assembled bustle the ends of all the 
bows are pivoted upon that portion of wire 
designated as '10, and the attachment of the 
members 9 and 11 to the top and bottom bows 
serves to keep the bustle normally distended 
by the spring action of the coils. The closing 
of the bustle convolutes said coils, which, when 
pressure is released, expand the bustle to its 
full size. The advantages of this peculiar 
spring are, that the section of wire 10 affords 
an exceedingly convenient pivot for the bows, 
and that said section by passing through the 
coils protects them from lengthwise expansion, 
and to a certain degree from lateral distor 
tion. 
O 
45 
SO 
I claim as my invention 
The combination, with the collapsible dis 
tending bows and a suitable waistband and 
check-tape, of the coiled spring, one end of 
which is secured to the inner bow, and the 
other end of which is passed backward through 65 
the coils and the extremities of the bows and 
is bent upward and secured to the outer bow, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES GALVIN. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. HUBBARD, 
S. S. WILLIAMSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378539.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. BOTSFORD & T. L. CHURCH, 
DRAFT SHACKLE FOR WEHICLES, 
No. 378,539, 
Patented Feb. 28, 1888. 
Q8),41-cascay 
2..- Aic (%a-vu-arc 
%22r 7-a-?a-2.f. 
311 be 11tets, 
P 
sit-atterneys. 
Lithographer. Washington. O. C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
w 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. BOTSFORD, OF AUBURN, AND THOMAS L. CHURCH, OF SYRA. 
CUSE, NEW YORK. 
D RAF on SHACK E FOR WEHICLES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 378,539, dated February 28, 1888, 
Application filed July 17, 1886. Serial No. 208,322. 
(No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES E. BOTSFORD, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding in the city of Auburn, Cayuga county, 
5 and State of New York, and THOMAS L. 
CHURCH, also a citizen of the United States, 
residing in the city of Syracuse, county of 
Onondaga, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in a 
Draft-Shackle, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of the invention is to have a draft 
shackle for vehicles that will always be tight 
and close around the bolt connecting it with 
the clip on the axle-tree, preventing any noise 
or rattling, and also to have a shackleby which 
shafts or poles can be removed or attached 
quickly. We attain these objects by the mech 
anism illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in Which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the shackle 
closed, and Fig. 2 represents the same open. 
In the drawings, the letters A A represent 
the eye of the shackle. Fig. 1 represents the 
shackle with the eye A A closed around the 
bolt E of clip attached to the axle-tree of 
carriage. Fig. 2 represents the shackle with 
the eye open- and spring thrown up so as to 
remove the thills. 
B B represent the two parts of the shackle, 
the one part hinged to the other at point H. 
C represents an adjustable yoke around the 
two parts of the shackle. 
Drepresents the spring which presses the 
yoke Conto the shackle BBand keeps it closed 
tightly around the bolt E. 
E represents the bolt to which the clip is 
attached. 
F represents a tight collar around the bolt 
and rests against the pin G. The collar F and 
the pin G prevent the spring D from sliding 
along the shackle-bar J. 
25 
40 
- 
H represents the hinge of the shackle, and 
by means of which the shackle may be opened 
and shut when the spring D is pushed down 45 
to the collar F. 
The two parts B B are made on an incline, 
So that when the shackle is attached to the car 
riage the adjustable yoke C is pressed along 
the incline by spring D, closing the eye AA 5o 
and holding it firmly around the bolt E, thus 
making any rattling of these parts an impos 
sibility. The slight opening in eye AA, as 
shown in Fig. 1, is to provide for any wear of 
bolt E, permitting the eye to close as the bolt 55 
may wear, the pressure from the adjustable 
yoke C and spring D keeping the eye A. A 
firmly in place around bolt E. 
To attach or detach thills or pole with this 
shackle only requires a slight pressure from the 
thumb and fingers, pressing back yoke C and 
spring D to the collar F, and thus permitting 
the eye A A of shackle to open, as in Fig. 2. 
In the drawings the letters represent the va 
rious parts of a draft-shackle as follows: AA, 
the eye; E, the bolt of clip on axle-tree of car 
riage, said bolt resting in the eye of shackle 
when thills or pole are attached to carriage; 
B B, the two parts or jaws of the shackle, the 
one part hinged to the other; C, the adjust 
able yoke; D, the Spring; H, the hinge, hinged 
with or without a rivet; F, the collar; G, the 
pin; J, the bar of the shackle. 
65 
We claim as our new invention 
A draft-shackle comprising two hinged jaws, 
BB, a divided eye, AA, a yoke, C, and spring 
D, all combined and operating as above de 
scribed, together forming an improved self 
adjusting draft-shackle for vehicles. 
75 
JAMES E. BOTSFORD, 
THOS, L. CHURCH, 
Witnesses: 
E. O. WHEELER, 
JOHN M. BRAINARD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378639.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 378,639, 
C. H. WILMOTH, 
RATCHET DRILL STOCK, 
Patented Feb. 28, 1888. 
   
 
 
22: W2. 
928i-tv coco, 
6.2. 2. 
3v-uov to 
6%. 4. 724.7%. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washitston, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CORYDON H. WILMOTH, OF TERRE HAUTE, INDIAN A. 
RATCHE OR 
a STOCK 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 378,639, dated February 28, 1888. 
Application filed August 13, 1887. Serial No. 246,833. (No model.) 
To all, uhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CORY DON H. WILMOTH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Terre 
Haute, in the county of Vigo and State of In 
diana, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Ratchet Drill-Stocks, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
a ratchet drill-stock for which Letters Patent 
No. 365,214 were issued to me June 21, 1887. 
The object of my present improvement is to 
facilitate the manufacture of the drill-stock 
and to provide a novel, stronger, and more 
practical arrangement of its working parts. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
improvement. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation having a small 
portion broken away. Fig. 2 is a plan at a, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a vertical section. Fig. 4 is 
a transverse section at b, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a 
transverse section at c, Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a 
transverse section of the tool-holding shaft at d. 
i. 7 is a plan of the under side of the ratchet 
COIal. 
My invention as described in the above-men 
tioned Letters Patent consists, essentially, of a 
short shaft having a socket in one end to re 
ceive a drill-shank, a ratchet-wheel secured to 
Said shaft, a handle having bearings in which 
the shaft revolves, an operating-lever mounted 
on the shaft so as to turn thereon, and carry 
ing a pawl which engages the ratchet-wheel 
and turns the shaft when the operating-lever 
is turned in one direction, a second ratchet 
wheel, also secured to the shaft, a collar mount 
ed on the shaft SO as to turn about said second 
ratchet-wheel, and carrying a pawl which en 
gages the ratchet-wheel, and provided also with 
cog-teeth on the periphery of the collar, which 
engage similar teeth formed on a lever which 
is pivoted to the handle and is connected to 
the operating-lever, the arrangement being 
Such that the shaft is driven in the same direc 
tion by both the forward and backward move 
ment of the operating-lever. There is also a 
feed-screw for forcing the drill against the work 
and means for operating said screw. 
In practice it has been found necessary to 
form the above-mentioned collar in several 
pieces in order to properly embrace the second 
ratchet-wheel, aid it is necessary to secure 
. 
these pieces forming the collar together after 
they have been mounted on the shaft, which 
is inconvenient and expensive. In my pres 
ent improvement this difficulty is avoided as 
follows: 
A is the drill-shaft, having a socket, s, adapt 
ed to hold the drill-shank. 
B is the handle. The handle is perforated 
at one end to form a bearing, f, for the shaft. 
On the shaft is formed a collar, C, having on 
its upper side an annular recess, 0, Fig. 6. In 
this recess are formed depressions at h h, in 
which are pivoted pawls i i, which are each 
supported at their free ends by a spring, f, 
Fig. 1. 
Mounted on the drill-shaft, immediately 
above the collar C, is a cog-wheel, D, having 
formed on its under side an annular projection 
fitted to turn easily in the recess g, and having 
a series of ratchet-teeth, k, which engage the 
pawls i, as clearly shown in Fig. 1. Wheel D 
is held in place on the shaft and in engagement 
with the pawls i by a collar, E, which is screwed 
onto the shaft against a shoulder at l, Fig. 3, 
so that the cog-wheel D is held so as to turn 
easily between the collars C and E. 
F is a plate resting at one end on a stud, n, 
projecting from the handle B, the plate being 
secured by a bolt, n, and forming at its other 
end a bearing for the shaft A. 
His a ratchet-wheel secured to shaft. A by 
a key, O. 
I is the operating-lever, forked at one end 
to embrace the ratchet-wheel and perforated 
so as to turn on the shaft. Lever I carries a 
pawl, p, which engages the ratchet-wheel H. 
J is a lever pivoted to the handle B on the 
stud in, and having teeth ', which intermesh 
with the cogs of wheel D. The other end of 
lever J is slotted at t and is attached to the 
operating-lever, so as to move there with, by a 
Stud, at. 
The upper end of shaft A is bored out and 
screw-threaded to receive the feed-screw L, 
which has a keyway, , extending nearly its 
entire length, and is turned by means of a 
notched wheel, w, having a pin, l, which pro 
jects into the keyway of the screw, and which 
is turned at the will of the operator by means 
of a rod, ac, having its end notched to engage 
the wheel w, and which is held normally out 
- 
O 
3O 
45 
75 
95 
IOO 
t 
378,639 
- 
of engagement with the wheel by a spring, ), 
and is forced into engagement by the bell-crank 
lever 2. 
In operation lever I, being moved toward 
the left, engages ratchet-wheel H and turns 
the drill-shaft in the same direction, at the 
same time operating lever J and turning wheel 
D in the opposite direction, the ratchet-teeth 
of said wheel slipping idly over the pawls i. 
Lever I being now moved in the opposite di 
rection, the ratchet-teeth k of wheel D engage 
the pawls i on C and turn the drill-shaft in the 
same direction as when the operating-lever 
moved toward the left. The drill-shaft is thus 
rotated in one direction by both movements 
of the operating-lever. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a ratchet drill-stock, the combination, 
with the drill-shaft, the ratchet-wheel secured 
thereto, the operating-lever mounted on the 
shaft and carrying a pawl which engages said 
ratchet-wheel, the handle, also mounted on the 
IO 
15 
shaft, and the toothed lever pivoted to the 
handle and attached to the operating-lever, of 
the recessed collar C, having one or more 25 
pawls, i, pivoted in the upper face thereof, 
and the cog-wheel arranged to turn on the 
shaft and to intermesh with said toothed lever, 
and having on one side a ratchet-toothed an 
nular projection arranged to engage the pawls 3O 
on the collar, in the manner and for the pur 
pose specified. 
2. In a ratchet drill-stock of the above-de 
scribed class, the combination of the drill-shaft 
having the recessed collar C, the pawls piv- 35 
oted in said recess, the cog-wheel D, having 
the ratchet-teeth k, the collar E, the handle B, 
and the lever J, all arranged to co-operate sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
CORY DON H. WILMOTH. 
Witnesses: 
M. CARSTEN, 
A. M. HOOD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378740.txt	(No Model.) 
W. P. TRACY, 
CASTER SOCKET, 
No. 378,740, 
Patented Feb. 28, 1888. 
 
i 
 
 
 
zesa, 
2%% decze--- 
Z7(avezza7. 
1-2-1/2 722^, 
Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM P. TRACY, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
CASTER SOCKET. 
SPECIFICATION forning part of Isetters Patent No. 378,740, dated February 28, 1888. 
Application filed March 24, 1887. 
Serial No. 232,309. No model.) 
To all willon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM P. TRACY, of 
Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent and State 
of Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Caster - Sockets; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
My invention is an improved socket for 
CasterS. 
It consists of a socket made out of one 
piece of sheet metal with a spring formed by 
longitudinal slots in the body of the metal. 
It has also a plug in the upper end which 
serves as a cap-piece. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a piece of sheet metal out of which 
the shell or socket is formed. Fig. 2 repre 
sents the socket inside elevation. Fig. 3 shows 
a section on line acac of Fig. 2. 
In the piece of sheet metal A are two lon 
gitudinal slots, a, extending, preferably, near 
to the end. The sheet metal of the required 
to length and width to form the shell or socket 
for the spindle of the caster-wheel is wound 
upon a former into cylindrical shape. The 
cap-piece B is formed with a circumferential 
groove, and when in place the sheet metal is 
pressed down into the groove to hold itse 
curely in place. The plug, which thus forms 
the metal cap, strengthens the shell and serves 
as a bearing for the upper end of the spindle. 
The strip, which is narrow, as shown, between 
the two slots, is bent inwardly about the mid 
dle of its length, and forms a strong yielding 
stop to hold the spindle in place. It yields 
sufficiently to allow the head of the spindle to 
pass it when inserted. Opposite the bent por 
tion of the strip I also bend in the shell to 
form a corresponding rigid stop on the other 
side. The lower part of the shell is prefer 
ably made flaring, for convenience in inserting 
the caster-spindle. The bent portion of the 
strip is shown at c. It should be bent in suffi 
ciently to hold the Spindle, but not to bear 
thereon hard enough to prevent the free turn 
50 
55 
ing, and, being continuous with the metal of 
the shell at both ends, it has sufficient rigidity 
to form an effective stop without bearing forci. 
bly against the spindle, 
This socket or shell may be cheaply formed, 
being cut, as indicated, from sheet metal and 
then rolled upon a mandrel or former. It is 
also strong and durable, and the in Wardly 
bent portion of the strip, acting in connection 
with the inwardly-bent portion of the shell 
shown at 1 on the opposite side, forms a very 
Secure stop to retain the spindle in place. 
I do not claim, broadly, a caster - Socket 
formed of a single piece of metal with a spring 
formed integral therewith combined with an 
interior stop or end bearing. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A shell for casters composed of a single 
piece of sheet metal provided with slots par 
allel to each other throughout their whole ex 
tent, whereby a strip of metal is left between 
them connected at each end to the body of the 
shell, the said material being swaged down, so 
as to present a curved spring surface on the 
interior of the shell adapted to hold the spin 
dle by friction, combined with a cap-piece, 
substantially as described. 
2. A shell for casters composed of a single 
piece of sheet metal, said sheet metal being 
provided with parallel slots to leave a strip of 75 
metal between them connected at each end, 
the said material being swaged down to pre 
sent a curved spring surface to the spindle, an 
interior spur or projection upon the opposite 
side, and a cap-piece having a depression 
formed therein to receive and hold the upper 
end of the shell, substantially as described. 
Intestimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
Scribing witnesses. 
WILLIAMI P. TRACY. 
Witnesses: 
E. L.WEDGWOOD, 
G. G. WITMAN, 
IO 
25 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378840.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 378,840, 
G. W. HYATT & W. DICK. 
THILL COUPLING, 
Patented Feb. 28, 1888, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. HYATT AND WILLIAM DICK, OF THREE MILE BAY, NEW YORK. 
THE COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 378,840, dated February 28, 1888. 
Application filed September 17, 1887. Serial No. 249,949. 
(No model.) 
5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, GEORGE W. HYATT and 
WILLIAM DICK, both residents of Three Mile 
Bay, in the county of Jefferson and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Thill-Couplings; and we 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
Io which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification, 
and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of our new 
and improved thill-coupling. Fig. 2 is a cen 
tral vertical sectional view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a perspective view showing the elastic 
blocks in position within the clip, with the 
thill-iron removed; and Fig. 4 is a perspective 
detail view showing the several parts sepa 
rated from each other. 
The same letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in all the figures. 
Our invention consists in a new and improved 
25 thill-coupling for preventing the thill-iron 
from rattling in the clip, and which will be here 
inafter fully described and claimed. 
Referring to the several parts by letter, A 
indicates the clip, which is secured in the usual 
manner on the fore axle, as shown, and which 
is formed with the forwardly-projecting par 
allel ears BB, which are formed with the reg 
istering apertures C, through which passes the 
bolt D, on which the end of the thill-iron E is 
35 pivoted, this bolt having on its threaded end 
the usual nut, F, so that it may be removed 
When desired to remove the thills. These ears 
B B are of sufficient length to leave a space, 
G, behind the rounded pivoted end of the thill 
Hindicates the bolt, which extends up be 
hind the end of the thill-iron through the space 
G, the lower end of this bolt being formed with 
the broad flat head H', which forms, practi 
45 cally, a base-plate, on which the lower rubber 
block rests. This bolt His likewise formed 
With a slight curvature, to conform somewhat 
to the curvature of the rounded end of the 
thill-iron, behind which it extends, this curva 
So ture depending somewhat on the width of the 
space behind the thill-iron, and if there is suf. 
ficient space behind the thill-iron this bolt may 
4o 1ron. 
3O 
f5 
be left perfectly straight. The upper portion 
of this bolt is screw threaded. 
I indicates the lower rubber block, the rub 
ber or cushion of my new and improved thill 
coupling being in two pieces-a lower and up 
per block. This lower block is nearly three 
cornered in general outline, and is formed with 
a central vertical aperture, J, through which 
the bolt H. passes, the block being forced down 
on the bolt, so that its lower flat side, I, rests 
squarely upon the broad flat head H of the 
bolt. In placing the device in operative po 
sition the threaded portion of the bolt is then 
pushed up back of the thill-iron through the 
space G until the slightly-curved beveled for 
ward side of the lower rubber block presses up 
against the lower inner part of the rounded 
pivoted end of the thill-iron. The upper rub 
ber block, K, is then placed on the upper part 
of the bolt H. This upper rubber blockis also 
nearly three-cornered in outline, and is formed 
with a central vertical aperture, K, through 
which the bolt H passes, and when this upper 75 
block is pushed down on the upper part of the 
bolt above the thill-iron its slightly-beveled 
rear side, K", will conform to the shape of the 
upper part of the clip A, against which it 
presses, while its forward under side is curved 
to fit the upper inner side of the rounded end 
of the thill-iron, against which it bears. The 
upper rubber block being thus placed in posi 
tion on the bolt H, a flat thin metal plate, L, hav 
ing a central aperture, L, is placed upon the 
upper end of the bolt, so as to rest upon the flat 
top of the upper rubber block, and the lower 
side of this plate is formed with about four 
downwardly - projecting points or teeth, k, 
which stick into the flat top of the rubber 
block and hold the plate in place, preventing 
it from turning on the top of the rubber block 
when the tightening-nut is screwed down to 
bind the rubber blocks in operative position. 
Above this plate La nut, M, is screwed down 
upon the upper end of the bolt H, bearing 
down upon the plate L, which thus diffuses the 
pressure over the top of the upper rubber 
block, and it will be seen that by thus screw 
ing down the top nut, M, the lower and upper 
rubber blocks are drawn together, So as to 
press firmly against the pivoted rounded end 
of the thill-iron, and thus effectually prevent 
all rattling; and as the rubber wears and 
IOO 
378,840 
5 
t) 
permits rattling all that is necessary is to 
screw down the top nut, M, on the bolt H to 
make the coupling as tight and free from rat 
tling as before. A space is left between the 
inner ends of the two blocks to permit of this 
adjustment. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
the construction, operation, and advantages of 
our invention will be readily understood. It 
will be seen that our new and improved thill 
coupling is simple and strong in construction 
and will not get out of order. By the con 
struction shown and described we obtain a di 
rect and even pressure against the thill-iron. 
The rubber upper and lower blocks may be 
constructed, as set forth, with the space be 
tween their inner ends; or their inner end por 
tions may be made tapering or beveled and 
overlap, which would effect precisely the same 
results. The bolt Hican be straight or slightly 
curved, as required or desired, and its size 
may vary according to the size of the space 
back of the thill-iron. 
It will be seen from the foregoing that our 
new and improved thill-coupling is simple and . 
strong in construction and exceedingly efficient 
in its operation. It can be applied easily and 
in a few moments by merely passing the headed 
bolt with the lower block of rubber on it up 
back of the thill-iron, then placing the upper 
rubber block in position, putting the pressure 
plate L on, and screwing down the retaining 
3O 
and tightening nut M, the device being thus 
placed in position without removing the thill- 35 
iron from the clip A. 
Our device is the only one which can be used 
successfully on a platform wagon by making 
the rubber blocks large enough. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States, is 
In a thill-coupling, the combination of the 
clip provided with the forwardly-projecting 
parallel ears formed with registering aper- 45 
tures, the thill-iron of ordinary construction, 
and the pivotal bolt with apertured rubber 
blocks, the upper one of which is formed with 
flat upper and lower and curved forward and 
rear portions, while the lower one is formed 
with a curved forward and flat upper, lower, 
and rear portions, the curved threaded bolt 
having at its lower end the flat plate, upon 
which the flat base of the lower rubber block 
is seated, the perforated plate having the 
points or teeth upon its lower face, and the re 
taining and adjusting nut. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereunto affixed our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
55 
GEORGE W. HYATT. 
WILLIAM DICK. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT FISH, 
ALBERT D. CURTIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US378940.txt	(No Model.) 
E. H. S.H.A.W. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING GASEOUS FUEL OR ILLUMINATING GAS. 
No. 378,940, 
Patented Mar, 6, 1888. 
5E 
 
s 
N 
O 
S 
O 
S 
Nin 
N t 
y 
NH 
S 
al 
 
 
- 
se 
s 
S. s 
S. 
N 
s 
N 
N 
S. R 
W 
 
Y  SS3 
, SS N 
S S 
3 & 
2 
A. 
& S$ zzzzz7% 
a 
s 
2 
s 
 
Witnesses 
Wall  wand. It 
5 
adventor 
ZEdueyanshaw, 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
E. H. SHAW. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING GASEOUS FUEL OR, ILLUMINATING GAS, 
No. 378,940, 
ot Patented Mar, 6, 1888. 
 
ZVaZN7 
2 
Sis EE 
AA 
r 
 
  
 
 
 
 
assists Wigs 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
... ." 
N N R N 
N 
E. EN 
ESEEN 
22N 
s 
 
 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithograpber, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN, H. SHAW, OF BOSTON, ASSIGNOR OF NINE-TENTHS TO WILLIAM B. 
FRINK AND ANDREW W. HAYES, BOTH OF REVERE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING GASEOUS FUE OR LLUMINATING-GAS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 378,940, dated March 6, 1888. 
Application filed March 23, 1887. 
Serial No. 232,113. (No model.) 
IO 
- 
cation. 
To add whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWIN, H. SHAW, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Apparatus for Manu 
facturing Gaseous Fuel or Illuminating. Gas, 
of which the following, taken in connection 
With the accompanying drawings, is a specifi 
My invention relates to apparatus for manu 
facturing gaseous fuel or illuminating-gas from 
petroleum, mineral fats, and other oils and 
steam; and it consists in certain novel features 
of Construction, arrangement, and combination 
f5 of parts, which will be readily understood by 
reference to the description of the drawings 
and to the claims to be hereinafter given. 
Figure I of the drawings is a sectional eleva 
tion of an apparatus embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal section online acac on Fig. 
1. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section on line yy on 
Figs. 1 and 2. Figs. 4 and 5 are respectively 
a plan and an end view of the current-breaker 
or atomizer; and Fig. 6 is a central longitudi 
nal section of the oil-heating steam-chamber, 
with the spiral oil-pipe in elevation. 
In the drawings, A is a furnace having a 
downdraft, in which A is the fire-chamber; 
A, the grate; A, the downdraft combustion 
chamber, the walls of which are inclined in 
ward, and are formed of fire-bricks B, in 
closed in the metallic shell or casing B, pro 
vided with the upwardly-opening doors C C, 
the whole being supported by the vertical 
plates D D, stayed by braces D D, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
The fire-bricks which form the end walls of 
the lower combustion or retort chamber, A, 
are constructed or arranged to form steps or 
shelves a, a?, and a, upon which rest the ends 
of the retort E, composed of a series of tubes, 
b,b,b,b,b', and b, arranged relative to each 
other and connected together in the order 
named by the half turns or bends ec, as shown 
in Figs, 1 and 2. 
Within each of the tubes b, b, l, b, b', and 
b' is placed a cylinder, F, of wrought or cast 
iron or other suitable material, having its ends 
conical or pointed, and having set therein a 
5o series of radially-projecting pins or lugs, dd, 
45 
35 
3O 
extending to the inner periphery of the in 
closing-pipe, said pins or lugs being made, 
preferably, diamond-shaped in cross-section, 
and so set in said cylinder as to present effect. 
ive obstacles to a direct flow of the current of 55 
steam and oil through said tubes, thereby caus 
ing the steam and oil to be thoroughly mixed. 
The tube b is connected at one end with the 
exterior pipe, e, provided with the union-coup 
ling f, for convenience in Setting up the appa 
ratus, said pipe e connecting at e' with the 
short vertical tube.g., provided with a current 
breaking cylinder, F, and connected in turn 
to the valve-casing G, to the opposite end of 
which is connected the steam-supply pipeh, 65 
provided with the steam-cock H, as shown. 
The valve-casing G is provided with a side 
branch, in which is...formed a valve-seat for the 
valve i, to be operated by the screw-stem i and 
the hand-wheel; and to said branchis screwed 
one end of the spirally-coiled pipei, inclosed 
in the steam-chamber J, as shown in Fig. 6, 
the other end of said pipe-coil leading to a 
pump or other means of forcing oil through 
said coil into the valve chamber G, where it 
is joined by the jet of steam from the pipel, 
and is forced thereby along the tube g, past 
the current-breaker F, along the pipe e, and 
successively through the tubes b, b, b, b, b', 
and b, and thence through the pipe k to the 
cooler K, from which the gas evolved is con 
veyed through the pipel to the holder, (not 
shown,) and from which it may be drawn for 
consumption. Steam is admitted to the cham 
ber J through the pipes and discharged there 
from through the pipes'. (See Fig. 6.) 
L is a sediment-collector, provided with a 
glass gage, m, for determining the height of 
the sediment contained therein, and also with 
a cock, n, for drawing off said sediment when 
desired. 
MM are the grate-bearing bars, supported 
upon the ledge o, formed in the side walls of 
the furnace; and pp are the grates, made, pref. 
erably, of fire-brick and fitted to V-shaped 95 
grooves in the inner inclined sides of the bear 
ers MM, as shown in Fig. 3. 
N is an air-supplypipe leading from the pipe 
k to a pump or blower, (not shown,) and pro 
vided with a valve, N', by which the flow of Iog 
90 
75 
378,940 
1. In apparatus for manufacturing gas, a 
retort composed of an outer cylindrical shell, 
an inner cylinder having its ends closed and 
conical or rounded, and a series of radially 
projecting pins or lugs set in or formed upon 
said inner cylinder and extending to the inner 
periphery of said outer shell. 
2. In apparatus for manufacturing gaseous 
fuel or illuminating-gas, and for other like pur 
poses, a retort composed of a series of parallel 
tubes connected together by half turns or 
bends, and a series of inner cylinders having 
closed conical or rounded ends and diameters 
less than the inner diameters of Said tubes, lo 
cated within said tubes, and each provided 
with a series of pins or lugs projecting radially 
therefrom and extending to the inner periphery 
of its inclosing tube or shell. 
3. The combination of the furnace casing or 
shell, fitted with fire-bricklining provided with 
the steps a, a?, and a, so constructed and ar 
ranged that each step below the upper one pro 
jects into the furnace farther than the one above 
it, the fire-grate MIp, the oil-inlet pipe e, the 
gas-outlet pipe k, and the multitubular retort 
E, all constructed and arranged substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination, with a furnace and a 
retort exposed to the heat thereof, of a steam 
supply pipe and an oil-supply pipe arranged to 
discharge their contents into the same cham 
ber, a discharge pipe leading from said cham 
ber to the retort, and a current-breaking cyl 
inder located in said pipe between said retort 
and chamber and provided with radially-pro 
jecting lugs or pins extending to the inner pe 
riphery of the inclosing cylindrical casing, as 
shown. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses, on this 8th day of March, 
A. D. SS7. 
EDWIN H. SHAW. 
Witnesses: 
N. C. LOMIBARD, 
WALTER. E. LOMBARD. 
50 
55 
75 
90 
air into the pipe k may be regulated so as to 
mix with the gas, as it escapes from the retort 
and before it enters the cooler, the proper 
amount of atmospheric air to produce the best 
result. Heating the oil before it comes in 
contact with the steam reduces the amount 
of steam necessary to mix there with, and as a 
consequence reduces to a minimum the amount 
of carbonic-acid gas evolved. The passage of 
the combined oil and steam through the tube 
g and past the current-breaking cylinder F, by 
breaking up the current and agitating the ma 
terial, causes the oil and steam to be pretty 
well mixed before reaching the furnace. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
Steam being admitted to the chamber J and to 
tle pipe leading from the source of steam-Sup 
ply to the valve H, and oil being admitted to 
the coilj, if the valves H and i are opened, a 
jet of steam and a stream of oil meet in the 
valve chamber G, and by the pressure of the 
steam the two fluids are carried through the 
pipeg past the current-breaker or atomizer 
F', the pins d of which serve to agitate the 
fluids and tend to break up the direct flow and 
mix the two fluids together, after which the 
partially-mixed fluids are forced along the 
pipee into the lower retort, b, thence to the sev 
eral sections of retort-coil l', l, b, l', and b, 
passing in each of saidsections a current-break. 
ing cylinder, the pins in which obstruct the 
direct flow of the current and causea thorough 
mixing of said fluids by virtue of the agitation 
created by said obstructions at the same time 
that said retorts are subjected to the heat of 
the furnace, the result of which is that the 
mixed fluid becomes volatilized or changed to 
a gas, which flows through the pipe k to its 
junction with the pipe N, where it is mixed 
with a suitable amount of atmospheric air, and 
is then discharged into the cooler K, and thence 
through the pipel to the holder, as described. 
The downdraft is produced by placing the fire. 
grate above the retort, closing the top of the. 
furnace, and making the connection with the 
chimney beneath the retorts or at the bottom 
of the furnace, as shown. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379040.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. ANDERSON, 
BRICK KILN. 
7 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 379,040, 
Patented Mar, 6, 1888. 
miREHHHHHHH, 
HHSHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH%N 
H E. A N 
 
Z. 2 SS 
HIA 
 
 
 
2 
E. 
  
 
 
MM 
in TV, 
22 % 
% % & 
Air 
2SAH 
SAH 
2S1 
33 H &s 
%ax|| 
33&Hill & UEFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
% 2 
N 
, Y NNN 
W. 2. 
3%. , WN 
Z/ % as 5 e 2, 
(56.4%-2- 
NY - Z re-vez-67. 
of C-122-- 
(No Model.) 
No. 379,040. 
  
  
J. C. ANDERSON. 
BRICK KILN, 
7 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar, 6, 1888. 
ar SN 
NN 
N 
 
Mr. 
Racery N s 
N 
N 
SS 
N 
T 
SS 
- 
al-N 
C 
C 
SS 
N 
N 
SS 
 
n 
Ed 
N 
N 
N N N N N. N N N N 
M 
N 
ser 
Nort. A 
wazaravaara waza 
r 
201 alr16w 
22 
SS 
- a 
r 
N, PEERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 379,040 
 
J. C. ANDERSON. 
BROK KIN. 
Sheets-Sheet 3. 
?----===========F 
h!!!!!!!!!!!!=* 
@ 
 
 
 
 
za 
 
4:2 
(2,Z2ZZZZZZZZ) 
(ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N. PEERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, i. 
?.  ** 
2- ?  E = == 
S.ZZ-gzzzzzzzzz@- 
- --U 
N. 
-$$ 
J. C. ANDERSON, 
BRICK KILN, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Mar, 6, 1888. 
 
Zzzzzzzz 
(No Model.) 
-NO 
379,040, 
 
 
No.IIIIII|:VIITHII 
(IIIIIIIIIIIIIII] 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 379,040, 
J. C. ANDERSON, 
BRICK KILN. 
7 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Mar, 6, 1888. 
  
  
  
  
   
 
  
YN r \r WWN 
RNSSSNSSSSSSSSNSSV NSSNSNN: 
S NN N N N SNSS SN NS 
N28 
SNNN 
Q 
15 5. 
34-3 N3 3S3 3. II) 
H|| 
Hill S. 223 
3. 
a 2 
N  
3. 
3. 
3 
3 22 
33 
s 
I N 
2 3 
  
  
 
. 
- 
- 
 
AP2 
N N 
is 
27--e. is es, 
- 1722 
e4e-r Slal 
Y. 
(No Model.) 
No. 379,040. 
J. C. ANDERSON. 
BRICK KILN. 
7 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Mar, 6, 1888, 
   
 
 
 
 
i. 
 
HILITIII 
N 
sEs  
t 
NSN & SS 
l 
Z/4%, sle , 
 
  
- Z 72/Z/ e-727 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 379,040. 
} ||||||||||||| 
####### 
||||||||||| 
##### 
 
 
  
 
 
J. C. ANDERSON. 
BROK KILN, 
7 Sheets 
Sheet 7. 
Patented Mar, 6, 1888. 
------- 
----- 
l 
--- 
r 
F 
l 
-- 
------------ 
- 
II.5. 
-------- 
------ 
--fe 
-- 
- 
At 
HHHHHHHHHH 
???tN 
||||||||||||||| 
IIIIIIIIIIII 
sa' coastarri arsers 
s: 
% (free ses, 
te-ee-2 7, 
Z 
T. C. 12-tea-taa1-, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES C. ANDERSON, OF HIGHLAND PARK, ILLINOIs. 
BRIC Ka K. 
N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 379,040, dated March 6, 1888. 
Application filed August 1, 1887. Serial No. 247,204. (No model.) 
2 
O 
To all twhon, it may concern 
Be it known that I, JAMES C. ANDERSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at High 
land Park, in the county of Lake and State of 
5 Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Kilns for Burning Brick, 
of which the following, taken in connection 
With the accompanying drawings, is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
the method of and apparatus for burning brick 
and other clay articles, and belongs more par 
ticularly to that class of kilns known as con 
tinuous or progressive burning kilns. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
kiln for the continuons and progressive burn 
ing of fine brick, in which the same are kept 
free from the fumes and deteriorating effects of 
direct contact with the products of combus 
tion. 
My invention consists in the devices herein 
after described, by which brick are burned in 
a kiln having two tunnels through which two 
trains of cars carrying the brick to be burned 
are caused to pass in opposite directions by 
heat transmitted through the walls of the tun 
nels without bringing the bricks in contact 
with fumes and deteriorating flames of the 
fire, and, furthermore, in utilizing the heat of 
the brick already burned to water-smoke and 
partially burn the brick before they reach th 
furnaces. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure1 is a verti 
cal sectional end view of my improved kiln, 
taken on the line X X of Fig. 2 through the 
furnaces. Fig. 2 is a horizontal sectional view. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view of a portion of the 
division-wall separating the two tunnels. Fig. 
4 is a top or plan view of the kiln with a por 
tion of the roof removed. Fig. 5 is a hori 
Zontal sectional view of the kiln, showing the 
loaded cars therein with spaces between the 
Fig. 6 is a top or plan view 
stacks of bricks. 
of one end of the tunnel, a portion being 
broken away to show the openings between 
the two tunnels. Fig. 7 is a vertical sectional 
end view of a car with a load of bricks thereon 
and the body shown in dotted lines. Fig. 8 is 
an end view looking into the kiln. Fig. 9 is 
So a top or plan view of the tracks leading to and 
from the tunnels. Fig. 10 is a side view of a 
45 
25 
30 
35 
40 
frame on which the car-bodies are supported, 
and from which they are lowered onto the 
trucks after the load of bricks has been 
burned and brought out of the kiln. Fig.11 
is an end view of the frame mentioned above, 
with a loaded car standing underneath, ready 
to receive the car-body. Fig. 12 is an end 
view of the kiln, showing the doors closed and 
the cars therein in dotted lines. 
In the burning of brick as commonly prac 
ticed much time is wasted or consumed by 
having to use low fires in the water-smoking 
process, and then there is another loss of time 
in firing to bring the temperature of the kiln 
and the bricks therein up to the whiteheatre. 
quired, while still another loss of time, but 
not to so great an extent, is caused in raising 
the temperature of the kiln and the bricks 
therein up to the final burning or pottery 
point. 
By the apparatus hereinafter described I 
am enabled to burn the brick in a much shorter 
space of time for the following reasons: First, 
that the temperature of the kiln is always the 
same, the cars when they first enter the kiln 
being introduced at a point where the tempera 
ture is lowest, but is sufficiently high to warm 
the bricks and carry of the water smoke be 
fore it is moved up to a point opposite the 8o 
furnaces; second, the cars being narrow and 
the pile of bricks thereon being also narrow, 
the mass of bricks to be burned is more sus 
ceptible to the heat of the furnaces, and much 
more readily burned than if laid in a class of 85 
kilns where greater width is required for profit 
ably burning. 
A indicates the kiln, which is composed of 
two parallel walls, B and C, and a central or 
partition wall, D, dividing the kiln into two go 
longitudinal chambers or tunnels, E and F, 
each being covered by separate arches, which 
rest upon and are supported by the partition 
wall D and the outer walls, B and C. The kiln 
is by preference about two hundred feet in 95 
length, in order to hold eight cars each twenty 
five feet long in each tunnel, and wide enough 
to receive the cars adapted to travel on the 
tracks located in each tunnel. 
of and occupying a position near the center of 
each tunnel, said furnaces being of the ordi 
G are the furnaces, located in the outer walls IOO 
 
: 
379,040 
I5 kiln may be made of common brick. 
lary kind, having the tisual grate-bars, ash 
pits, doors, and draft-regulators, 
That portioi of the kilii occupied by the 
furnaces is double-walled, so as to form a 
5 chamber or flue, H, leading from each furnace 
and over the tunnel and then through open 
ings I in the central or partition wall, D, and 
again over the top of the second tunnel and 
into a flue, K, in the outside wall of the kiln 
IO to the stacks T, located at each end of the kiln 
for utilizing the heat on this side of the line 
of incoming cars. These walls or linings M 
are composed of fire-brick or other refrac 
tory material, but the other portions of the 
AS before intimated, the furnaces on each 
side of the kiln open into the spaces H in the 
arches of the tunnel, the bricks to be burned 
to be protected from the branding effects of 
2O the flame by the lining or interior wall, the 
heat being transmitted to the articles to be 
burned, and burns them to the pottery-point, 
the milder portion or middle of the flame be 
ing thrown over to and around the other tun 
25 nel to raise the temperature of the bricks on 
the car in this tunnel to a white heat before 
this car is brought opposite the furnace, and 
in this manner the bricks are burned without 
coming in contact with the products of com 
3O bustion and renders this system specially de 
sirable for burning special brick and brick on 
which it is desired to fix colored ornaments or 
decorations in metallic colors. 
By reference to Fig. 2 it will be noticed that 
35 the furnaces are not opposite each other, al 
though on opposite sides of the kiln, and that 
the middle portion of the flame passes over to 
and around the opposite tunnel to do the in 
itial heating of the brick on the car located at 
4o that point, the brick on said car being raised 
to a white heat, and that the final burning 
takes place on each car after it has passed the 
furnace in the opposite tunnel, it being under 
stood that the two trains of cars pass through 
45 the tunnels in opposite directions, as indicated 
by the arrows in Fig. 2, and that as fast as the 
bricks on the cars lying in front of the furnaces 
are burned to the proper point the cars in 
both tunnels are pushed forward one step or 
So the distance of one car, thus allowing one car 
of burned brick to be taken from the exit end 
of each tunnel and a fresh car-load of green 
bricks to be run into the entrance end of each 
tunnel. 
The partition-wall D is provided with nu 
merous perforations, N, through which the 
Waste or escaping heat from the newly-burned 
brick passes to the cars on the tracks in the 
adjacent tunnel to heat the bricks on the cars 
6o nearest to the furnaces to a red heat and to 
dry and water-smoke the bricks on the cars 
nearest the ends of the tunnel, suitable open 
ings, O, being left in the walls of the tunnels, 
which communicate with the flues K, and 
65 through which the water smoke, as soon as it 
rises, is immediately drawn into the stacks 
55 
90 
95 
75 
without coming in contact with the burned 
lyrick in the other tunnel. 
The cars of which the brick are burned are 
of the ordinary goldola type used generally 
on railroads, and of a size sufficient to carry 
the largest-capacity car-load, such size being a 
platform about twenty-five feet long by seven 
feet wide, and when the bricks are piled thereon 
sufficient to hold from eight thousand to ten 
thousand pressed brick, and the floors of Said 
cars, together with the running-gear, are pro 
tected from the heat in the following manner: 
P indicates a layer or layers of asbestus felt, 
placed over the floor of the car, over which is 
placed a layer of heavy sheet metal, Q, the 
ends of which are bent down so as to project 
into metallic gutters R, secured to the sides of 
the tunnels below the fire-line, and by which 
means the running-gear of the cars is pro- 85 
tected from the action of the heat. T is an 
other layer of asbestus placed upon the sheet 
iron layer Q, and U indicates a layer of hol 
low fire-brick laid upon the layer of asbestus 
T, thus completely insulating or protecting 
the tops of the cars from the heat. The fire 
proof tiles are held in position by the angle 
irons V, and upon which the body of the car 
W is designed to rest after the bricks have 
been burned and the cars run out of the kiln. 
For the purpose of more readily placing the 
car-bodies in position on the trucks I have a 
frame-work, A, over the tracks leading from 
the kiln, under which the loaded car is run 
and the body let down by suitable devices onto Ico 
the car and around the bricks contained there 
on, where the bricks are packed around by 
straw, as will now appear, and the car run to 
market. 
so as to be interchangeable, and the body of 
the empty or return car is left in position on 
the frame-work to be placed on the outgoing 
car, and in this way only one box or body is 
necessary to be in place at a time at each end IIo 
of the tunnel to fully equip the outgoing car. 
I have shown a second layer of tile, V', on top 
of the floor-tile U, having heat-spaces for the 
purpose of communicating a full heat to the 
bottom rows of the brick, in order to bring I 15 
them up to the same shade of color as those on 
top, and in this way I am enabled to burn the 
brick of a uniform color, obviating the neces 
sity of subsequently sorting the bricks, such 
sorting and shading to color being necessary 
by the methods heretofore used of burning this 
kind of brick. 
In an application filed by me of even date 
herewith, Serial No.247,205, I have described 
and claimed the process of burning brick in a 
continuous kiln by passing two trains of cars 
loaded with the brick to be burned through 
tunnels in opposite directions, said brick be. 
ing burned by the direct and transmitted heat 
from suitable furnaces located at both sides of 13o 
the tunnels, the heat of the burned brick on 
the cars in one tunnel being imparted to water 
The car-bodies W are made of uniform size, fc5 
I 25 
379,040 
3 
tunnels and through flues in the sides of the 
tunnels, and then to the stacks located at each 
end of the tunnels, whereby the outgoing heat 
or tail of the flame is utilized to water-smoke 
-and heat the brick without bringing the fumes 25 
in contact with the Same. 
3. Inkilns for burning brick of the character 
described, the openings Oin the arches of the 
tunnel, which communicate with the flues K, 
whereby the water-smoke is carried away from 3O 
each tunnel without coming in contact with 
the burned brick in the opposite tunnel. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two Sub 
scribing witnesses, on this 15th day of August, 35 
A. D. 1887. 
: 
J. C. ANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
L. W. SINSABAUGH, 
J. C. CUSHMAN. 
smoke and partially burn the green brick on 
the cars in the adjacent tunnel, and such I do 
not wish to claim in this application. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
5 claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A kiln for burning brick, &c., composed 
of two parallel tunnels for the continuous pas 
sage of cars of loaded brick, with a furnace in the 
to oater wall of each tunnel, said furnaces com 
municating with a flue or chamber which passes 
over both tunnels, as set forth, whereby the 
bricks are burned by the heat transmitted 
through the inner walls of the tunnels without 
15 bringing the articles into direct contact with 
the products of combustion. 
2. A kiln for burning brick of the character 
described, the furnaces of which are located at 
both sides of the tunnels, said furnaces com 
2O municating with flues which pass over both 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379140.txt	(No Model.) 
W. P., TRACY, 
RAILWAY CAR STEP. 
No. 379,140, 
Patented Mar, 6, 1888. 
Z22, Z. 
2 
|| || t 
t 
I | 
- ZZ 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM P. TRACY, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF TWO. 
THIRDS TO WILLIAM R. SHELBY AND ABE M. AMBERG, OF SAME PLACE. 
RAILWAY-CAR STEP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 379,140, dated March 6, 1888. 
Application filed October 18, 1887. 
Serial No. 252,671. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMP. TRACY, of 
Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent and State 
of Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
5 Improvement in Railway-Car Steps; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to railway-cars, and 
particularly to the steps thereof. Its object 
Ic is to provide an extensible step in addition to 
the three steps in ordinary use, the fourth step 
being adapted to be held up against the bot 
tom of the rigid steps during the time the train 
is in transit and to be lowered to form a fourth 
I5 step when the train comes to a stop at a sta 
tion. Such a step is very desirable, as it is 
well known that in order to clear any obstruc 
tions (which may be found upon all railroads) 
the car-steps are located at a considerable dis 
2O tance from the ground, and it is found neces. 
sary to either have the cars run alongside of the 
platform some distance above the ground, in 
order to come within a reasonable distance of 
the lower step of the car, or else, where the 
25 cars come in upon the same level as the plat 
form, to provide a portable box which serves 
as an additional step. 
My invention consists of an extensible step 
secured beneath the fixed steps of the car and 
3o adapted to be moved into position positively 
in advance of the bottom of the fixed series to 
form a fourth step and to be returned automati 
cally by releasing the devices controlling its 
movement. 
The invention further consists in the details 
of construction, all as hereinafter fully set 
forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a rear perspective view of the steps and a por 
4o tion of the platform, representing the step as 
extended. Fig. 2 represents a sectional view 
through the steps. 
In the drawings, A represents the platform 
of the car, and B the steps leading therefrom, 
45 this being of ordinary construction. The ex 
tensible step is Supported on an angular ex 
tended end of a frame, C. The body of this 
frame is composed of angular metal, which 
provides upon either side a flange, a, and these 
5o flanges are fitted to guiding-lugs which are se 
35 
N 
. 
fo 
55 
cured to the inner surfaces of the side pieces 
of the steps. These guiding projections have 
flanges which embrace the flanges of the frame. 
This fratne is adapted to slide in the guiding 
projections for limiting the movement therein, 
and in its lowest position the step is below 
and in advance of the last fixed step of the se 
ries. The frame is arranged to slide approxi 
mately parallel to the line of the fixed steps 
and is strongly supported by means of the 
guiding projections from the side, a weight 
upon the step tending to bind the frame in the 
embrace of the said projections. Pins or suita 
ble stops may be provided at the upper part 
of the frame, as shown at b, to limit its down 
ward movement. 
In its normal position the extensible step is 
beneath and in close contact with the under 
step of the fixed series, and is held so with the 
frame in its upper position by means of a ten 
sional spring or springs coiled about a rod, f, 
extending across beneath the second step, the 
said rod being in connection with the frame 
by means of a slotted arm or arms, c. Ears 
d project from the center of the cross-bar e of 75 
the frame, and between these ears the slotted 
portions of the arm c fit, being held in place 
by means of the pins passing through the 
ears and the slot of the arm. The rod f is 
supported in the side pieces of the step by 
means of a bracket in the center toward the 
two pieces. A coiled spring Surrounds the 
rod at each end, one end of the spring being 
fastened to the under end of the step and the 
other end to a collar fixed to the rod, so that 
in the lowest position of the frame and step 
secured thereto these springs are under ten 
sion. Upon the outer end of this rod is se 
cured a toothed segment, F, and in connection 
with this segmentis a vertically-arranged rack. 
bar, G, having a guide, as shown at 9, at its 
lower end, with its upper end terminating in 
a handle located at the sides of the steps di 
rectly beneath the ordinary iron railing found 
at the end of cars. In order to extend the 
step, this handle is moved vertically, which 
moves the segment in gear with the teeth 
thereof, and this operation turns the rod f and 
moves the frame to its lowest position to ex 
tend the step through the arm c, connected Ioo 
90 
95 
379,140 
to hold said frame normally in one position, a 
segment upon the end of said rod, and a rack 
bar terminating in a handle for operating said 
bar against the tension of its spring or Springs 
for changing the position of the step, Substan 
tially as described. 
4. The combination, with the steps of a car, 
of an extensible step supported by a frame 
sliding in curved ways, a slotted arm con 
nected to the upper part of the said arm and 
in connection with the rod held under spring 
tension, a segment secured to said rod, and a 
rack-bar terminating in a handle for operating 
said segment to move the bar and frame against 
the tension of the spring, Substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. The combination, with the steps of a rail 
way-car, of a sliding frame moving in guides 
in line with the line of the steps, a step se 
cured to the ends of said frame with spring 
devices for holding said step against the bot 
tom of the lower of the fixed steps normally, 
and with positively-operating devices for ex 
tending the step beneath the plane and in ad 
vance of the fixed step of the series, substan 
tially as described. 
6. In a railway-car, a sliding frame, a step 
secured to the ends of said frame, a slotted 
arm in connection with the upper part of the 
frame for moving the same, a bar under spring 
tension secured to said arm, a segment con 
nected to said bar, a rack-bar terminating in 
a landle for operating said segment, and the 
spring-latch for holding said handle in an 
elevated position, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM P. TRACY. 
45 
55 
65 
o 
75 
Witnesses: 
G. A. WOLF, 
A. M. AMIBERG. 
O 
rigidly to the said rod. A spring-catch, h, 
engages with a notch in the operating-rod and 
holds the step in its extended position. By 
releasing the operating-lever from this spring 
catch the springs upon the rod e exert their 
force and through the fixed arm retract the 
frame, which draws the step snugly beneath 
the bottom step of the fixed series. In order 
to take up the shock by the action of the 
springs in retracting the frame, I provide a 
suitable buffer beneath the second step, against 
which the frame strikes in its upward move 
lment. 
I do not limit myself to the precise operating 
devices shown, as these may be varied without 
departing from the spirit of my invention. 
Neither do I limit myself to the arrangement 
of parts, as, instead of having the step extend 
ing by positive means and closing automati 
cally, the parts may be reversed and the steps 
opened automatically and closed positively, 
though I prefer the arrangement above de 
scribed. I may employ two arms c instead 
of the one shown, and position them at either 
end of the cross-bar e. 
25 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a railway-car, an extensible step at 
tached to a sliding frame, positively-operating 
devices for lowering the step, and automati 
: cally-operating devices for raising it, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a railway-car, a sliding frame having 
a step attached thereto, said frame and step 
being normally in a raised position under 
spring-tension, an operating-lever for posi 
tively lowering said step, a shaft for receiving 
the action of the operating-lever, and inter 
mediate connections between Said shaft and 
frame, substantially as described. 
3. In combination with a cal' and with the 
steps thereof, an extensible step supported by 
a sliding frame, a rod under tension adapted 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379240.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 379,240, 
R. W. MILLER. 
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER, 
- 
Patented Mar. 13, 1888. 
A. v. 
Z 
Afc. 2 
2 
Z 
 
 
as 
 
32 3 a 
1. 
Fig. 7 
art. 3. 
*;2 rec (ig/o. 
fief 
Fict. 5 
7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD W. MILLER, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
NEW YORK AND NEW HAVEN AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER COMPANY, OF 
NEW YORK, N. Y. 
AUTOMATC FIRE - EXTINGUISHER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 379,240, dated March 13, 1888. 
Application filed January 17, 1887. Serial No. 224,520. (No model.) 
Io form a part of this specification. 
To all uhon, it may concert, . 
As herein shown, my invention consistS in 
a nut, N, arms PP, and a tie composed of U 
Be it known that I, RICHARD W. MILLER, 
residing at New Haven, in the county of New 
shaped pieces TT, as shown. The said nut 5c 
is screwed over the lower end of the said sleeve 
Haven and State of Connecticut, have in 
and provided upon the opposite faces of its 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Automatic Fire-Extinguishers; and I do de 
upper end with slotted lugs O O. In the op 
posite faces of its lower end are formed verti 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being 
cal slots Q Q, which are in line with the lugs 55 
had to the accompanying drawings, which 
aforesaid. 
The arms PP, which are preferably formed 
from sheet metal, are pivoted at their upper 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
automatic fire-extinguishers, the object being 
ends in the lugs OO of the nut, from which 
they hang in vertical planes. They are pro- 6o 
to simplify and cheapen their construction and 
vided with inwardly-projecting shoulders RR, 
improve their general efficiency in use. 
arranged to enter the slots QQ and engage with 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in a sprinkler-head having certain de 
the lower end of the spindle, and with tying 
extensions SS, located in line with the said 
tails of construction and combinations of parts, 
as will be hereinafter described, and pointed shoulders. These extensions set inwardly 65 
out in the claims. 
from the arms, whereby when the same are 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is free they will of their own gravity swing out 
a view in elevation of a sprinkler-head em- ward, carrying their shoulders out of range 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a view thereof with the spindle; also, by bringing the exten 
in vertical central section. Fig. 3 is a simi-sions together, as described, an economy of 7o 
lar detached view of the nut. Fig. 4 is a re- stock is effected both in the arms and in the 
25 verse plan view of the said nut. Fig. 5 is a tie by which they are held together. It is to 
detached view of the tie in elevation and in be noted of the arms that their pivotal points, 
plan. Fig. 6 is a view in side elevation of the spindle-engagement points, and tying-points 
two parts forming it. 
such parts. Fig. 8 is a view in elevation and 
The U-shaped tie-pieces are made of sheet 
3o in plan of one of the modified forms which the metal, held together by a film, U, of solder, and 
tie may assume. Fig. 9 is a view in side ele- provided each with an inclined corrugation, V, 
vation of the two parts forming the same, and such corrugations interlocking when the two 
pieces are assenbled and stiffening the tie and 
Fig. 10 is a plan view of such parts. 
relieving the solder from a part of the strain 
The water-connection A, having the valve 
imposed upon the tie. 
seat B, the cup-shaped valve C, having the up 
right perforated water-distributing flange D, 
In the modification shown by Figs. 8, 9, and 
10 of the drawings the corrugations WW of 
the adjustable pillars EE, the plate F, the 
spring-diaphragm G, located thereupon, the the tie-pieces XX are formed at a right angle 85 
sleeve H, passing through the said plate and with the line of strain. 
diaphragm and provided at its upper end with 
a flange, I, and at its lower end with screw 
threads J, the spindle K, provided at its upper 
end with a head, L, and passing through the 
said sleeve, and the spiral spring M, encir 
cling the spindle and interposed between the 
flange I and the head L, are of known con 
struction. 
Under my invention, as herein shown, the 
diaphragm is put under the tension requisite 
to hold the valve to its seat as against the 
pressure of the water by screwing the nut up 
ward on the sleeve, with the shoulders of the 
arms engaged with the lower end of the spin 
dle, whereby the sleeve is pulled down against 
the diaphragm. The sprinkler-head is then 
Fig. 7 is a plan view of are in substantially parallel lines. 
35 
45 
75 
80. 
90 
 
379,240 
25 
35 
O 
w 
left with the extensions of its arms held to 
gether by the tie, which is slipped over them. 
When the temperature to which the head is 
exposed passes the fusing-point of the solder 
in the tie, the solder melts and the tie falls 
apart and releases the arms, which separate. 
The spindle, being released, retires under the 
control of the spring encircling it, the valve 
opens, and water is admitted to the distribu 
ter, which sprays it over a wide area around 
the head. 
By the extension of the shoulders R. R. of 
the arms into the slots QQ of the nut, the 
arms are prevented from being laterally dis 
placed and the shoulders disengaged from the 
spindle by any accidental blow which the 
sprinkler-head may receive. 
Although the tension upon the diaphragm 
may represent many pounds of pressure, the 
leverage is such that the load falls very lightly 
upon the tie, which may therefore be made of 
light stock and bound together in such man 
ner as to very readily separate under an ab 
normal temperature. At the same time the 
leverage insures a positive separation of the 
arms. When they are untied, all of these fac 
tors contribute to the reliability of the action 
of the device. 
My improved tie is well adapted for use 
with the head described, but may be used in 
any other connection where available. On 
the other hand, any other suitable tie may be 
used upon the said head. I would therefore 
have it understood that I do not limit myself 
to the exact construction and arrangement of 
parts herein shown and described, but hold 
myself at liberty to make such changes and 
alterations as fairly fall within the spirit and 
Scope of my invention. 
I am aware that it is old to provide an au 
tomatic sprinkler-head with a nut carrying a 
plug held in place by soft solder and screwed 
upon the lower end of a sleeve, so as to en 
gage the plug with the end of a valve-spindle 
projecting into the sleeve. I am also aware 
that it is old to make a sprinkler-head with 
an open frame carrying a pivotal two-armed 
lever and a tie for the same and threaded upon 
a nipple normally closed by a valve located 
within the frame and having a spindle adapted 
to engage with one arm of such lever, whereby 
by turning the frame the tension upon the 
spindle, and hence valve, is varied. I do not, 
therefore, broadly claim a screw construction, 
whether it is a nut or a frame, for varying the 
external pressure upon the valve of a spindle 
head, but only the construction shown herein 
and its legitimate equivalents. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
5o I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an automatic sprinkler-head, the com 
bination, with a valve having a spindle, of a 
frame for such valve, a threaded sleeve con 
55 nected with the frame and having the valve 
stem extend through it, a nut screwing upon 
the sleeve, two arms connected with such nut, 
and one arm being movable and adapted to 
engage with the projecting end of the spin 
dle, and a fusible tie for tying the two arms 7O 
together, the said arms being independent of 
the frame and adapting the nut to be turned 
by hand to vary the external pressure upon 
the valve, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an automatic sprinkler-head, the com: 
bination, with a frame, of a valve located 
therein and having a spindle projecting out 
ward beyond the same, a slotted guard con 
nected with the frame at a point Within the 
projecting end of the spindle, a movable arm 
adapted to engage with the end of the spin 
dle and to enter the slotted guard which is 
located between the end of the spindle and 
the pivot of the arm, an arm to which the 
movable arm is tied, and a fusible tie for 
tying the two arms together, substantially as 
Set forth. 
3. In an automatic sprinkler-head, the com 
bination, with a valve having a spindle, of a 
frame for such valve, a sleeve through which 
the valve-spindle passes connected with such 
frame, a slotted nut screwed upon the sleeve, 
a movable arm connected with the nut and 
adapted to enter the slot therein and to be en 
gaged with the end of the spindle, an arm con 
stituting a tying-point for such movable arm, 
and a fusible tie connecting such arms, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In an automatic sprinkler-head, the Com 
bination, with a valve having a spindle, of a IOO 
threaded sleeve through which the spindle 
projects, a rigid support for such sleeve, a nut 
screwing over the lower end of the sleeve and 
provided with two lugs located opposite each 
other, two arms respectively pivoted to the IO5 
lugs of the nut and adapted to engage With 
the projecting end of the spindle, and a fusible 
tie for the lower ends of the arms, the Said 
lugs and arms adapting the nut to be turned 
by hand to adjust the tension upon the spin 
dle, substantially as set forth. 
5. In an automatic sprinkler-head, the Com 
bination, with a valve having a spindle, of a 
threaded sleeve through which the spindle 
projects, a nut screwing upon the sleeve, two I I5 
arms pivotally connected with the sleeve and 
adapted to fit around the lower end thereof 
and to engage with the projecting end of the 
spindle, and respectively provided With a 
straight tying-extension, such extensions com- I2O 
ing close together when the arms are en 
gaged with the spindle, and a fusible tie for 
such extensions, substantially as set forth. 
6. In an automatic sprinkler-head, the Com 
bination, with a valve having a spindle, of 
an arm adapted to engage with such spindle, 
an arm to which the movable arm is tied, 
and a tie composed of two pieces of sheet 
metal provided with interlocking corruga 
tions, forming a spring-lock parting under 13o 
25 
45 
SO 
90 
95 
75 
IIC 
 
379,240 
- 
3. 
7. In an automatic sprinkler-head, a tie ing witnesses. 
the pressure of the water, and normally united 
by solder, substantially as set forth. 
composed of two pieces of sheet metal pro- 
5 vided with interlocking corrugations, forming 
a spring-lock parting under the pressure of 
the water, and normally united by solder, sub- 
stantially as set forth. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. B. SHUMWAY, 
WILLIAM J. LUM. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib. Io 
RICEARD W. MILLER 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379340.txt	(No Model.) 
H ST. LAWRENCE, 
POWER HAMMER. 
No. 379,340. 
Patented Mar. 131888. 
 
 
. 
7t. -2- 
y 2 7 3. 
4 
12/SS 
 
N 
e 
- are 
ii 
2 
7. 
s 
 
WITNESSES 
azia, 
sary, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY ST. LAWRENCE, OF NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
POWER HAMMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 379,340, dated March 13, 1888. 
Application filed May 28, 1887. Serial No. 239,636. (No model.) 
55 
and are held to a pin or bolt, 27, that is car 
ried by the hammer-stock, by clips 28, that are 
formed with serrated faces 29 and outturned 
ends 30, the two clips being united by bolts 31. 
The pin or bolt 27 is preferably surrounded 
by a flexible cushion, 6, or, if desired, a single 
flexible strip could be employed, and this 
strip could be passed about the pins or bolts 
26 and 27 and its ends united by the clips 28. 
In the lower face of the hammer stock I 
form a dovetail groove, 32, in which the cor 
respondingly-shaped projection 33 of the ham 
mer 34 fits, the hammer being held in rigid 
connection with its stock by means of a wedge, 
35, which is driven in between one of the faces 
of the projection 33 and one of the defining 
walls of the groove 32. 
Beneath the hammer I mount the anvil 40, 
which is held to its stock 41 by means of a 
wedge, 42, the anvil being formed with a pro 
jection, 43, which fits within a dovetail groove, 
44, that is made in the upper face of the stock 
41, and the stock in turn is supported by a 
base, 45, said base being formed with a dove 
tail groove, 46, in which a projection, 47, 
formed on the under face of the stock 41 fits, 
a retaining-wedge, 48, being employed to bind 
the parts, together. To prevent the lateral 
displacement of the base 45, I connect said 
base with the base 10 by means of a bolt, 50, 
which passes through an aperture formed in 
the base 45, and through a vertical slot, 51, 
that is formed in the base 10, a washer, 53, 
which overlaps the slot 51, being arranged be 
tween the base 10 and the nut 54 of the bolt 50. 
The machine is to be run by a belt which 
engages the pulley 16, and the action of this 
belt is controlled by any of the ordinary forms 
of belt controlling attachments-such, for in 
stance, as the one illustrated in the drawings. 
In practice I prefer that the strips 25 should 
be made of leather; but any other proper 
flexible material would do as well. 
From the construction described it will be 
seen that the lateral adjustment of the anvil 
may be obtained by shifting the stock 41, and 
The hammer-stock 23 is mounted in vertical that a forward or backward adjustment of 
either the anvil or the hammer may be ob 
and moving them within their stocks. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY ST. LAWRENCE, 
of Northampton, in the county of Hampshire 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and Improved Power-Hammer, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription. 
This invention relates to a novel form of 
power-hammer, the principal objects of the 
invention being to relieve the main support 
ing-frame from the shock incident to the fall 
of the hammer stock and to provide for a 
yielding connection between the hammer-stock 
and its crank yoke. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a face view of my improved form 
of power-hammer. Fig. 2 is a central sectional 
elevation taken on liney y of Fig. 1; and Fig. 
3 is a cross-sectional view taken on line acac of 
Fig. 2. 
In the drawings, 10 represents the base of 
the main supporting-frame, which frame con 
sists of two forwardly-extending standards, 
11, that are bolted to the base 10 by bolts 12, 
the standards being formed with shoulders 13, 
which rest upon the upper edge of the base 
and being connected by a cross-bolt, 2, which 
passes through the two standards to the rear 
of the hammer-stock. The standards 11 are 
formed with upper forwardly-extending arms, 
14, upon which there is mounted a crank-shaft, 
15, that is provided with a driving-pulley, 16, 
and a balance-wheel, 17. 
To the crank i8 of the shaft 15 I connect a 
rod, 19, to which in turn there are connected 
two downwardly and outwardly extending bi 
furcated arms, 20, these arms being connected 
to the rod 19 by bolts 21, that are engaged by 
winged or handled nuts 22, the bolts 21 pass 
ing through elongated slots 3, that are formed 
in the rod 19, the arrangement being such that 
the arms 20 may be adjusted toward or from 
the crank-shaft. 
ways 24 and is connected to the bifurcated 
arms 20 by means of flexible strips 25. These tained by loosening their retaining - Wedges IOC 
strips 25 pass about pins or bolts 26, that are 
carried by the bifurcated ends of the arms 20, 
In operation the connection of the hammer 
75 
95 
IO 
25 
45 
2 
379,340 
Io Patent 
stock is such that the hammer will deliver a 
SWinging yielding blow, the shock of which is 
taken up by the independent base 45, the base 
of the main frame being relieved of all undue 
5 shock and jar owing to the formation of the 
vertical slot 51, through which the bolt 50 
passes. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
1. In a power-hammer, the combination, 
With a hammer-stock, of a crank-shaft, a con 
necting-rod carried by the crank-shaft, arms 
connected to the connecting-rod, flexible strips 
I5 connected to the arms and to the hammer 
stock, and clips by which the last-named con 
nection is established, substantially as de. 
scribed. 
2. In a power-hammer, the combination, 
2 with a hammer-stock, of a crank-shaft, a con 
necting-rod carried by the crank-shaft, arms 
connected to the connecting-rod, flexible strips 
25, clips 2S, formed with serrated faces 29, and 
bolts 31, the strips 25 being connected to the 
arms and to the hammer-stock by means of the 25 
clips and bolts, substantially as described. 
3. In a power-hammer, the combination, 
with a hammer-stock provided with a pin or 
bolt, 27, of a crank shaft, a rod connected to 
said shaft, bifurcated arms adjustably con-3o 
nected to the rod, pins or bolts 26, carried by 
the arms, flexible strips 25, clips 28, formed 
with serrated faces 29 and outturned ends 30, 
and bolts 31, the clips and bolts being employed 
to connect the pins 26 of the bifurcated arms 35 
and the pin 27 of the hammer-stock, substan 
- 
tially as described. 
4. In a power-hammer, the combination, 
with a hammer-stock base and frame, said base 
being formed with a vertical slot, 51, of an 4o 
anvil - stock base, and a bolt which passes 
through an aperture in the anvil-stock base 
and through the vertical slot of the hammer 
stock base, substantially as described. 
- 
HENRY ST. LAWRENCE. 
Witnesses: 
JosEPH. P. HEBERT, 
GEORGE W. CLARK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379440.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. BENNETT, 
SAW MILL DOG, 
No. 379,440, 
N) 
Patented Mali. 
N 
 
 
S 
S 
D 
O 
 
 
 
H 
I 
NYS 
I 
 
4:13 
K 
w 
 
J72ZZ-27zez-Z27zy 
22%a, 
o Mt . 
S$ 2. $ & 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. BENNETT, OF PERU, INDIANA. 
SAW M L DO G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 379,440, dated March 13, 1888. 
Application filed November 12, 1887. Serial No. 254,973. (No model.) 
IO 
To ali, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. BENNETT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Peru, 
in the county of Miami and State of Indiana, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve. 
ments in Saw-Mill Dogs; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being 
had to the annexed drawings, making a part of 
this specification, and to the letters and figures 
of reference marked thereon. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in saw-mill dogs, and is 
designed more especially as an improvement 
llpon the device shown in my Patent No. 
335,419, dated February 2, 1886. 
In the present construction I dispense with 
the holes in the rack-bar and dogs and the 
pins for engaging said holes to retain the 
brackets and dogs in their adjusted positions, 
providing a simpler and more efficient means 
of accomplishing this result. I also provide 
an improved dust cap for the cogs and rack 
and pinion, and also a new form of dog, all as 
more fully hereinafter described, and shown in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
Saw-mill dog, showing it in use. Fig. 2 is an 
edge view thereof. Fig. 3 is a cross-section on 
the linea ac of Fig. 2, and Fig. 4 is a perspective 
view of the dust-cap removed. 
In said drawings, A represents the head 
block of a saw-mill, to which the plate B is 
attached in any suitable manner, said plate 
Supporting in position my improved device. 
C is a standard secured to said plate in any 
Suitable manner, preferably in the way shown 
in my patent above referred to. 
The Standard C at its upper end is formed 
With an inwardly-extending slotted guide, a, 
through which extends the upper end of a rack 
bar, D, the teeth thereof, near its lower end, 
extending only a short distance of its length. 
The lower end of the standard C terminates in 
a frame, E, which has a slot to correspond 
with the slot in the guide a, through which 
extends the lower end of the rack-bar D, as in 
the previous construction. To the frame E is 
held a second rack-bar, F, formed with a slot 
ted bracket, b, through which extends hori 
Zontally the shank of the lower dog, G. The 
65 
rack-bars D F are both operated simultane 
ously, but in opposite directions, by the pinion 
H, which is keyed to a short shaft, c, having 
its bearing in the frame E. To this shaft is 55 
connected one end of the lever I, provided 
with an adjustable weight, K. 
L is a dust-cap formed with lugs d, through 
which pass screws or other suitable securing 
means to hold it to the upper cross-bar of the 6o 
frame E, and also with slotse for the passage 
of the rack-bars. 
M is a bracket on the rack-bar D, above the 
teeth thereof, and formed with a transverse 
slot to receive the shank of the upper dog, N. 
In place of providing the rack-bar and shanks 
of the dogs with perforations, (which I have 
found from experience to weaken them,) and 
in order to provide a quicker and better mode 
of adjusting the dogs, I pass the bars through 
the brackets vertically and the shanks of the 
dogs horizontally, as before, but make the slot 
in the bracket slightly larger than the bar and 
shank, so as to leave a space, f, to allow of free 
movement of either or both, and tap through 75 
the bracket a quick screw, O, bearing against 
the shank. With the screw turned outward, 
so as to allow free movement of the bar and 
shank, and the dogs GN adjusted to the de 
sired positions, a slight movement of the lever 8O 
P, connected to said screw, and weighted, as 
shown, presses the end of the Screw or holder 
against the shank of the dog and forces it. 
against the bar D, clamping them both tightly 
in position, the weight on the lever Pholding 85 
the same in the adjusted position. In Order 
to give strength to the screw, I preferably cast 
on one side of the bracket a boss, g. 
The dog G, Iform with two points, m, n, the 
upper one of which has its face at right angles 90 
to the lower side of the dog. The lower point 
is not engaged in ordinary dogging of the log. 
It projects at its point at a less distance than 
the upper point, preferably about one-half of 
an inch, and is designed to hold the last board 95 
cut from the log, or small pieces being sawed, 
the outer face of the upper dog forming a side 
Support. 
I am aware that a saw-mill dog has hereto 
fore been formed with two holding-points, and Ioo 
therefore do not seek to cover such, broadly. 
I deem it important that the points of the dog 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
379,440 
project upon two different planes and that 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
they be of different lengths, and that the longer saw-mill dog provided with two points upon I5 
of the two points be formed with two bevels, different horizontal planes and of different 
as shown, the outer one being substantially lengths, with the outer face of the longer and 
vertical and terminating above the point of upper point substantially vertical, substan 
the short prong, so that in ordinary dogging tially as and for the purpose described. 
the short prong will be out of the way; but 
when the log becomes small the short prong hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
will hold the last board and the larger prong of two witnesses. 
will engage with its outer vertical face the side 
of the board and form a side support therefor. 
This is important. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 2d 
WILLIAM H. BENNETT. 
O 
What I claim as new is- 
Witnesses: 
NOTT N. ANTRIM, 
JAMES M. BROWN. 
w 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379541.txt	(Model.) 
F. A. RICKARD & F. T. WRIGHT. 
FENCE MACHINE. 
No. 379,54l, 
Patented Mar, l3, 1888. 
 
 
 
a. 
N SS S 
e 
f$. 
- LW ==LAW == 
E. 
 
f\ 
1 if 
s 
E. C.E., 2 
 
N. perERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRANKLIN A. RICKARD AND FREDERICK T. WRIGHT, OF BATAVIA, MICHI 
GAN, ASSIGNORS, BY DIRECT AND MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO FRED 
WRIGHT AND BENJAMIN F. ROLFE, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
FENCE MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 379,541, dated March 13, 1888. 
Application filed July 6, 1887. Serial No. 243,504. (Model.) 
55 
To aid, whon, it ju?ty concern: 
Be it known that we, FRANKLIN A. RICK 
ARD and FREDERICK. T. WRIGHT, citizens of 
the United States, residing at Batavia, in the 
county of Branch and State of Michigan, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Fence-Weaving Machines; and we do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which for In a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to fence-making ma 
chines of that class which bind pickets in be 
tWeen the Strands, which at the same time are 
formed into cables, and has for its object the 
Construction of a machine at once simple, com 
pact, and durable, and which can be used 
equally well in the field or shop. 
The improvement consists in the novel and 
peculiar construction and combination of parts 
which will be presently more fully described 
and claimed, and shown in the annexed draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, parts being 
broken away, of a fence-making machine em 
bodying Our invention; Fig. 2, a detail per 
Spective view of a wire-twister; Fig. 3, a cross 
Section of the roller upon which the completed 
fence is wound on the line XX of Fig. 1, and 
Fig. 4 a similar sectional view on the line YY 
of Fig. 1. 
The machine is composed of a support for 
the fence, which in the field may be a post, or 
in the shop is a frame provided with a roller 
to take up the fence and wind it into bundles 
as it is made, a wire-twisting mechanism, a 
stretching device, an eyener for equalizing the 
strain on the several strands, and a support 
for the wires or strands which are destined to 
form the cables and be twisted about the 
pickets. 
The twisting mechanism is composed of the 
Standard made up of the two bars A and A', 
bolted together, the twisters formed of the 
tubular spindles (, held and journaled between 
the bal's A and A', and having the flange c at 
one end and the gear-wheel C at the opposite 
end of each of the spindles. The standard is 
embraced between the flange and the gear 
wheel of the spindles, which are thereby held 
from longitudinal displacement. The gear 
wheel and flanges may be one with the spin 
dles or separate and secured thereto; or the 
flanges may be formed by reducing the main 
portion of the spindles, and the gear-wheels 
may be secured thereto in any desired man 
The filling-block B, fitted in the bore of 
e. 
the spindle, has openings or notches b in its 
edges, which admit of the passage of the 
strands of a cable. This filling-block is a short 
bar having notches in its edges and secured in 
said spindle in any well-known manner. The 
twisters are so disposed that the gear-wheels 
intermesh, and motion imparted to One by 
means of the crank b' will be transmitted to 
all the twisters. 
The twisting device is provided with rollin 
supports D and D' directly in the line with 
the cables and arranged in advance of each 
other. The support D is journaled between 
the bars A and A', and the support D is jour 
naled in the lower front ends of the bracket 
E, which is composed of two corresponding 
parts, each part having horizontal and ver 
tical branches e and e', respectively, the parts 
being brought together at the point of inter 
section of the branches and having the roller 
D'journaled between them. 
To facilitate the moving of the standard, it 
is provided with the handle F, held between 
the brackets f. secured to the sides of the 
standard. The picket spacer and guide G is 
pivoted at one end to the standard on the side 
opposite the gears and facing the fence, and is 
free at its other end to swing up and down, 
and is held in an approximately horizontal 
position by the stopg, which limits its upward 
motion, and the spring g', which yieldingly 
holds said spacer and guide close against the 
stop. Normally G extends transversely across 
the face of the standard, and its outer end rests 
against the edge of the picket to be bound in, 
and forces the picket in proper position and 
determines the space or distance between the 
pickets. It often happens in finishing a line 
- 
g 7O 
75 
5 
IO 
35 
45 
90 
2 
379,54. 
of fence that all the wire to the equalizers must 
be used up, and that portion of the wire be 
tween the standard and equalizer is twisted. 
Under these conditions G is turned down out 
of the way and the last picket is inserted be: 
tween it and the stop (f. Now by operating 
the twisters the wire is twisted between the 
standard and picket and untwisted between 
the standard and equalizer, thereby permitting 
the said standard to advance while twisting the 
Wires about this last picket. 
The stretcher comprises. a lower and upper 
sill, H and H', respectively, the upright H', 
the brace H, and the shaft I, journaled ver 
tically between the sills Hand H', and project 
above the sill H', and adapted to receive the 
hand-lever I, which is fitted in a mortise or 
opening in said projected end of the shaft for 
rotating the shaft to obtain the desired tension 
on the strands of wire. 
The shaft is prevented 
from retrograde movement by a friction-brake, 
which is adjustable to regulate the tensile 
strain on the strands, and beyond which the 
strain cannot be exceeded. This friction-brake 
is preferably formed by providing the upper 
sill, H, with a kerf or narrow slot, h, which 
extends in opposite directions from the bearing 
of the shaft, forming two parts, which are drawn 
together by the set screw h", to bind the shaft 
more or less, as desired. This shaft is con 
nected with the strands by the equalizers J J' 
and the rope or chain h", which is secured at 
one end to the last equalizer of the series and 
at its other end to the shaft, upon which it is 
Wound for tightening the strands. The reels 
for supporting the coils of wire are composed 
of the shaft K, journaled between the sills H 
and H and provided with a series of openings, 
the horizontal arms K", having a series of trans 
verse openings, and the vertical arms it, fitted 
in one of the series of openings in the arms K", 
which can be adjusted to any desired level and 
have their arms k set to accommodate any size 
of coil. The sill His provided with the wire 
loop h", which affords a ready means for ap 
plying the draft and receives the stake which 
anchors the stretcher in position. 
... When the fence is constructed in the fields, 
the ends of the strands are secured to the fence 
post; but when constructed in the shop for the 
market the ends of the wires are secured to 
the roller I, journaled in the frame M, so that 
the frame may be rolled up on said roller as 
found expedient. The roller is grooved longi 
tudinally, and the rod, l, fitted in said groove is 
held therein by the keeper's l', and is adapted 
to slide longitudinally for securing and releas 
ing the ends of the wires from said roller, 
which has its upper end fitted in a recess in 
the upper bar of the frame and projected be 
yond said bar for receiving the ratchet-wheel 
m and the hand-lever or crank N for winding 
up the fence. The roller is prevented from 
turning back hy the pawl in', which engages 
with the ratief - wheel n. 
The wire O, couposing a cable, is folded on 
itself to form the bight p, through which the 
rod l is passed for securing it to the roller L, 
as shown most clearly in Fig. 4. The Wires 
O are passed through openings in the equaliz 
ers, and are prevented from slipping freely 
through said openings, when the required 
length of wire is unwound, by the short pieces 
q having the wires twisted about them a few 
times. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
i. The combination, with the standard sup 
porting the twisting mechanism, of the com 
bined spacer and guide extended transversely 
across the standard and pivoted at one end and 
free to move at its outer end, the stop for lim 
iting the upward movement of said outer end, 
and the spring for holding the free end of said 
combined spacer and guide yieldingly in Con 
tact with the stop, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. The combination, with the standard Sup 
porting the twisting mechanism, of the roller 
supports D and D', located in advance of one 
another, and in the plane of the twisters, the 
bracket E, supporting the roller D', the bracket 
f, and the handle F, uniting the ends of the 
brackets, substantially as and for the purpose 
i described. 
3. The combination, with the twisting mech 
anism, of the reel composed of a shaft having 
a series of openings along its length, arms hav 
ing a series of transverse openings fitted in 
said openings in the shaft, and a second set of 
arms fitted in the openings in the aforesaid 
arms, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination, with the twisting mech 
anism, of the herein shown and described de 
vice for supporting the end of the fence and 
rolling the same up, composed of the frame, 
the shaft longitudinally grooved and having 
the rod fitted in said groove and held therein 
by keepers journaled in the frame, and having 
one end extended beyond the frame and fitted 
in a notch in the edge thereof, the ratchet 
wheel, the pawl, and the crank or hand-lever, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
FRANKLIN A. RICKARD. 
FRED T. WRIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. STARR, 
E. L. DUNHAM. 
75 
90 
95 
ICC 
IO 
Io 
35 
4o 
45 
5o 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379641.txt	(No Model.) 
M. G. AGE. 
AUTOMATIC, WHISTLE ATTACHMENT, 
No. 379,641, 
Patented Mar, 20, 1888. 
Z 
6- 
? 
Z 
I 
72.7 
lay 
I 
--- 
s 
- 
SZiili 
SS 
1. 
2 
sists's sewa 
O O-O 
12.3 
Z 
: 
i 
 
 
 
----1-033 ca. 
-- 
Sri trial Sps 
GR) 
844Uovitov, 
2- 
7%a- (2. 
2. 2, 6 (2, 2, -66, 
/2 
w 
elefovice 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARINE GAGE, OF GALT, CALL FORNIA. 
AUTOMATC WHISTLE ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 379,641, dated March 20, 1888. 
Application filed August 31, 1887. Serial No. 248,391. (No model.) 
O 
IS 
25 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, MARINE GAGE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Galt, in 
the county of Sacramento and State of Cali 
fornia, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Automatic Whistle Attach 
ments, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention is an attachment for locomo 
tives, and its object is to provide a device 
which will automatically sound the whistle of 
the locomotive when a train is approaching a 
crossing or station. This object I accomplish 
by the mechanism illustrated in the accompa 
nying drawings and hereinafter fully de 
scribed; and the invention consists in certain 
features of the same particularly pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the drawings referred to, Figure 1 is a 
side elevation of a portion of a locomotive 
having my whistle-sounding attachment ap 
plied thereto. Fig. 2 is a similar view show 
ing the attachment as it appears while the 
whistle is being sounded, and Fig. 3 is a detail 
view of the upper end of the lifting-rod. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A des. 
ignates the fire-box, and B the cab, of a loco 
motive. A lever, C, is pivoted at one end to 
the side of the fire-box, near the bottom of 
the same, and a lifting wheel or roller, D, is 
mounted on the said lever, on its inner side. 
Between the lifting-wheel and the free end 
of the lever C, I pivotally secure to the said 
lever the lower end of the lifting-rod E, which 
extends up through the floor and roof of the 
cab, as shown. This lifting-rod is provided 
with an adjustable nut or stop, F, which im 
pinges against the floor of the cab, and thereby 
prevents the rod dropping too far for the suc 
cessful operation of the device. 
Near the upper end of the lifting-rod I pro 
vide the nut G, to which an arm, H, is secured, 
the free end of the said arm projecting under 
the lever H of the whistle. Above the nut G, I 
secure upon the lifting-rod a similar nut, I, to 
which I attach the upper end of a brace, J, 
the lower end of said brace being secured to 
the arm H near the free end of the Same. 
Below the free end of the lever C, I pivot 
ally secure to the side of the fire-box an arm, 
5o K, in the longer end of which I journal a small 
wheel or roller, L, the other end of the said 
65 
arm K bearing against the under side of the 
lever C near the free end of the same. The 
wheel L is arranged farther from the side of 
the cab than the lifting-wheel D, and both of 55 
Said wheels are arranged to hang inside of 
the track, above the ties. At proper points 
along the track-that is, at the approaches to 
crossings and stations-I provide in the road 
bed a Wedge-shaped rail, M, upon which the 
lifting-wheel rides in the operation of the de 
vice, and nearer to the station or crossing than 
said rail I provide a similar shorter rail, N, 
upon which the wheel L rides. The rail N is 
arranged between the track and the rail M, so 
that neither of said rails interferes with the 
action of the other. 
The operation of my device will, it is thought, 
be readily understood. When the train nears 
a crossing or a station, the lifting-wheel rides 
upon the rail M, and the lever C is thereby 
raised, and the lifting-rod, being consequently 
elevated, causes the arm H to strike against 
the whistle-lever H', having its end overlap 
ping and engaging the end of the said arm H. 
and raise the same, thereby sounding the 
whistle. The lever C bears on the arm K and 
normally holds it in the position shown in Fig. 
1. When the said lever is raised, as just de 
scribed, the weight of the wheel or roller L 
will cause the said arm K to swing around into 
the vertical position shown in Fig. 2, main 
taining the operating-lever and lifting-rod in 
their raised positions and preventing the stop 
page of the whistling. When the wheel L 85 
strikes the rail N as the train advances, it will 
be swung around or forced backward, allow 
ing the operating-lever and lifting-rod to drop 
and thus stopping the whistling. The down 
ward motion of the lever C will force the sev- go 
eral parts into the position shown in Fig. 1, 
When the said downward motion will be ar 
rested by the nut F contacting with the floor 
of the cab. 
simple and effective device for automatically 
Sounding the whistle of a locomotive when 
nearing stations and crossings while the engi 
neer's attention may be drawn in some other 
direction. 
My device does not interfere with the sound 
ing of the whistle by hand, and may be readily 
It will be seen that I have provided a very 95 
75 
IOC 
379,641. 
fitted to locomotives of different heights by 
means of the adjustable stops and nuts on the 
lifting-rod. 
It may sometimes be necessary to vary the 
shape or construction of some of the parts of 
my device in order to apply it to locomotives 
of different makes; but such changes, it is ob 
vious, involve no departure from my inven 
tion. The wheel L and arm K may be dis 
pensed with by making the rail M of sufficient 
length to maintain the lifting-wheel in a raised 
position as long as it is desired to sound the 
whistle, and it may sometimes be found desir 
able to employ such arrangement. 
The utility and advantages of my device be 
ing obviously appreciable, I need not further 
enlarge thereon herein. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A whistling attachment for locomotives, 
comprising a lifting-rod, an arm, as H, adjust 
ably secured to said rod near its upper end, 
and means for automatically raising Said rod, 
as set forth. 
O 
25 
2. The combination, with the locomotive, of 
a lever pivoted to the fire-box thereof, the lift 
ing-rod pivotally attached to said lever and 
extending vertically upward, and the arm H, 
adjustably secured to the lifting rod near the 
upper end of the same, as set forth. 
3. The combination of the operating-lever, 
the lifting-wheel journaled therein, the lifting 
rod pivotally attached thereto, and the arm H, 
adjustably secured to the upper end of the 
lifting-rod, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination of the operating-lever, 
the lifting-rod pivotally attached thereto, the 
arm H, secured to the lifting - rod, and the 
swinging arm K, arranged below the oper 
ating-lever and bearing against the under side 
of the same, substantially as described and 
shown. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
own I have hereto affixed my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
MARINE GAGE, 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
O. HARVEY, 
J. W. ILER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379741.txt	(No Model.) 
C, C, TAYLOR 
WATER, WHEEL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 379,741. 
Patented Mar. 20, 1888. 
 
 
INVENTOR 
(No Model.) 
C. C. TAYLOR, 
WATER, WHEEL, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 379,741, 
Patented Mar. 20, 1888. 
 
INVENTOR, 
tury. 
C 
C 
38.4 iss--te. 
Aftorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
CHRISTOPHER C. TAYLOR, OF APPLETON, WISCONSIN. 
WATER WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Paterat No. 379,741, dated March 20, 1888. 
Application filed June 19, 1886. 
Serial No. 205,639. (No model.) 
water-wheels. 
To al/tu/O1, it half concern. 
Be it known that I, CHRISTOPEJ ER. C. TAY 
LOR, of Appleton, in the county of Outagamie 
and State of Wisconsin, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Water 
Wheels; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the Same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
The object is to provide an improved gate 
for admitting water to the blades of a turbine 
wheel, whereby an even solid sheet or jet of 
water will be thrown upon the wheel at all the 
various widths of gate-opening and the gate 
supported upon bearings which are not liable 
to rust. 
A further object is to provide an improved 
blade which shall be of Such form as to utilize 
the highest percentage of power, and con 
structed in accordance with such a rule of 
measurements that blades of any required sizes 
may be constructed possessing the same form, 
and to further construct the blades in such a 
manner that they may be readily secured to 
the wheel-franne. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combinations of parts, as Will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of the Wheel, partly in section. 
Fig. 2 is a detached bottom view of the gate 
and top of the casing. Fig. 3 is a view of the 
lower section of the casing With the chutes. 
Fig. 4 is a view in elevation, partly in section, 
showing the gate-operating mechanism; and 
Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are detached perspective views. 
of one of the blades in different positions. 
A represents the upper section or cover of 
the wheel - casing, and B the lower section 
thereof. Between the upper and lower sec 
tions of the casing a series of wedge shaped 
partitions, a, are secured by bolts b, which pass 
through the laterally-extending flanges 
the upper and iower sections and through ver 
tical perforations a? in the Said Wedge-Sections. 
To prevent the said wedge-sections from lateral 
displacement, they are provided with grooves 
in their lower edges, which receive lugs formed 
on the flange of the lower section. The parti 
tions at form the chutes for directing the water 
onto the blades of the wheel when the gate is 
opened. 
The gate consists, essentially, of a circular 
band, C, adapted to fit as snugly as is con 
sistent with a free sliding motion on the out 
side of the flanges of the upper and lower sec 
tions of the casing and the outer ends of the 
chute-partitions (t, a four - branch yoke, F, 
loosely mounted on an upwardly extending 
stem, D, forming a part of or rigidly secured 
to the upper section of the casing, and a Series 
of openings, d, formed in the band C and pro 
vided with inwardly-projecting lips or guides 
E. The yoke F is provided with a bushing, 
f, on its lower face, where it rests in contact 
with the casing, said bushing being composed 
of Babbitt metal or other material which is not 
liable to waste by rust when exposed to water. 
The branches f' of the yoke F are secured at 
their lower ends to the upper edge of the band 
C and hold the same suspended, thus bringing 75 
the entire weight of the gate onto the non 
rusting bearing of the yoke. 
The lips E, secured to the edges of the open 
ings d, project in Wardly, conforming nearly or 
quite to the direction of the wall of the chute, 
and serve to form one wall of each chute as far 
as they extend. They may extend into close 
proximity with the blades of the wheel, or they 
may stop a short distance back therefrom. 
They are intended, however, to extend far 
enough to give the sheet orjet of water passing 
through the chute a smooth solid form, which 
will not be broken until it strikes the blade. 
The lips E may be cast integral with the gate, 
or they may be provided with smooth flanges at 
their outer ends and secured to the band C by 
means thereof. The gate is operated by means 
of a pinion, (, Secured to the lower end of an 
operating-rod, G, the upper end of which is 
within convenient reach of the operator and 
provided with a hand-wheel or hand-lever for 
The pinion () is inclosed within a 
box, H, secured to the upper side of the upper 
section of the casing, near its edge, and is 
adapted to engage a curved rack-bar, h, se 
85 
on rotating it. 
IO 
45 
55 
65 
IOO 
2 
379,741 
85 
cured to the rim of the band C. The operat. first strikes the blade its force acts at right an 
gles thereto, and therefore exerts its full force 65 
ing-rod G has a bearing in the casing and at 
thereon. After this force is spent, it reacts on 
the point where it passes through the box H. 
an incline plane all the way down the U 
As the rod G is rotated to the right or left, 
shaped portion of the blade, and in so doing 
the gate is rotated on its bearings, and the 
its momentum and weight are again introduced 
chutes gradually closed or opened by the lips 
as important factors in pushing the wheel for- 7o 
or guides E advancing toward or receding 
from the opposite walls of the chutes. The 
ward. 
It will be observed that the above construc. 
tendency of the water to scatter as it enters 
tion produces a compact, durable, and very effi 
through a partially-closed gate into a chute 
cient combination adapted to use in connection 
larger than the gate-opening is thus obviated, 
the jet being held compactly together until it 
with all classes of mills or manufactories where 75 
a water-power of sufficient head is found. 
impinges upon the wheel, and its momentum 
It is evident that many changes in the form 
is thereby increased and communicated to the 
and construction of the parts described might 
wheel. 
be resorted to without departing from the spirit 
The lower section of the casing is provided 
and scope of my invention. Hence I do not So 
with an opening in its lower face large enough 
wish to limit myself strictly to the construc-. 
to admit the wheel. 
The wheel consists of an upper disk, I, pro 
tion herein set forth; but, 
Having fally described my invention, what I 
vided with a series of depending blades, K, 
cast integral therewith or rigidly secured 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
thereto and bound together at their lower ends 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the casing pro 
by an outer band, L. The shape of the blade 
vided with the removable wedge shaped par 
K is the result of many experiments and care 
titions arranged in a circular series and a ro 
ful study, and may be generally described as 
tary gate provided with a series of openings 
a curved plate extending from a straight outer 
corresponding to the said partitions and hav- go 
edge, n. m., toward a line midway between the 
ing the inwardly-extending guide-plates rig 
shaft M and the circumference of the wheel. 
idly secured thereto, one at one edge of each 
The inner edge, in na", extends on a curve from 
opening, of a water wheel consisting of an up 
the upper end, n, of the outer edge to a point, 
per disk and a series of depending blades se 
m", about one-half the length of the edge m m'in 
cured thereto, said blades each having on its 95 
side of the circumference, and from this point 
the edge m n curves outwardly U-shaped to 
outer face an elongated seat curved in the arc 
the point mat the circumference of the wheel. 
of a circle concentric with the center of the disk 
and parallel with the side walls of the casing, 
From the point m' to the point m the blade is 
and a band shrunk around the blades and rest 
curved to form the arc of a circle and forms a 
ing on said curved seats and below the outer Ico 
seat for the band L, which is shrunk on to se 
edge of the blades, substantially as set forth. 
cure the blades firmly in position. 
2. The combination, with the upper disk of 
The exact proportions of the blade which 
form the basis for increasing or diminishing 
the wheel, of a series of depending blades, each 
having on its outer face an elongated seat. 
the size without changing the shape are as fol 
curved in the arc of a circle concentric with Io5 
lows: The distance from m, to n' is one-half 
the center of the disk and parallel with the 
the diameter of the wheel; from on to an is 
side wall of the casing, and a band shrunk 
two-thirds the distance from n to m; from m' 
around the blades and resting on said curved 
to m is one-fourth the diameter of the wheel, 
seats and below the outer edge of the blades, 
or one-half the distance from m to m'; from a 
straight line joining the points m and n to 
substantially as set forth. 
3. A water-wheelblade having substantially 
the point m' at the bottom of the U-shaped 
the following proportions, viz: from n to m' 
portion is one-half the distance from m' to n; 
equals one-half the diameter of the wheel; from 
from m to a point, m, which is the lowest 
m' to m and from m' to nequals one-third the 
point of attachment of the blade to the disk I, 
diameter of the wheel; from m' to m, from m II 5 
is one-half the distance from m to m'; from m' 
to m, and from m' to m equals one-fourth the 
to m', the nearest point on the edge m m, is one 
diameter of the wheel; from a line joining m' 
half the distance from n to m'. The lines in 
and m to an equals one-sixth the diameter of 
m and in an are straight. The disk I is pro 
vided with a depending boss, i, centrally lo 
the wheel. 
cated, to form an extended contact-surface with 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
the shaft M. The wheel is secured to the shaft 
ing witnesses. 
Mi by feather and groove or other suitable 
means, and the shaft is provided with a coni 
Witnesses: 
cal recess, n, in its lower end to form a seat for 
a cone-bearing, N, on a spider, O, located in 
the lower portion of the casing. As the water 
In testimony whereof I have signed this I2O 
F. E. HARRIMAN, 
JOS. KOPPURD. 
CHRISTOPHER C. TAYLOR. 
I IO 
IO 
IS 
35 
45 
SO 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379841.txt	(No Model.) 
G. E. WHITMORE, 
WHEEL, 
No. 379841, 
Patented Mar, 20, 1888. 
  
 
2Z 
Na 
 
8vue-vibot. 
N. PeFERS. photo-lithographer. "Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE E. WHITMORE, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
SiSCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 379,84l, dated March 20, 1888. 
Application filed June 6, 1887. 
Serial No. 240,375. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
To all u? O77, it may concein: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE E. WHITMORE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Vehicle 
Wheels, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in vehicle-wheels of the 
class usually used in constructing bicycles, tri 
cycles, and velocipedes. Its object is to serve 
the double purpose of providing a simple and 
efficacious mode of fastening the spokes or 
radial arms to the hub-section and in the op 
eration of fastening to strain the spokes from 
the periphery centerward to an even tension 
of any required degree. To accomplish this 
I provide a hub suited to the kind of vehicle 
or machine above mentioned, having cast or 
fixed upon either end a plate provided with 
any required number of arms extending out 
ward from a point equidistant from the hub 
proper or from the center of the sleeve-cavity 
into which the axle is inserted. Upon the 
extremes of these arms is formed an ear or 
shoulder extending outward any required 
length suited to the diameter or thickness of 
the spoke. This ear is formed at nearly a 
right angle to the arm, so that the spokes 
are formed in pairs-that is to say, each single 
piece of wire being so formed as to make ; 
two radial arms or spokes connected at the 
point of their interior fastenings to the hub 
section proper, and being SO bent as to form a 
loop having a straight bar-piece of sufficient 
length to be carried over the projecting shoul 
der or ear, as more fully explained in the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part of this 
specification, and on which similar letters of 
reference indicate the same Ol' corresponding 
features. 
Figure 1 represents the exterior face of a 
plate with projecting arms, C. C. C. represent 
the arms as they appear after the ears or shoul 
ders formed upon their extremes have been 
forced over and around the Straight bar-pieces 
of the loops in the wires forming the spokes B 
B B in pairs to a point of contact with the 
metallic face of the arms. Fig. 2 represents a 
diametrical sectional view of the same; and 
Fig. 3, a sectional view of the extreme of a 
projecting arm with the ear or shoulder formed 
upon the same, ready to receive the loop in the 
wire forming the spokes in pair's as aforesaid. 
The extremes of the spokes, which are cut 
to an even length, are first secured to the pe 
riphery of the wheel by riveting or otherwise, 
and after being drawn over the shoulder or 
ear of the projections a a a the ear is folded 
over upon them, and in this process the spokes 
are brought to the required tension-an im 
portant feature in all wire-spoke wheels. 
It is obvious that the plate A and arms at a (t 
should be shouldered upon the hub proper or 
otherwise firmly secured thereto, and should 
be of sufficient strength and thickness to hold 
the spokes firmly in place, thus forming un 
yielding retaining sockets or receptacles for 
the spokes at their converging fastenings to 
the said arms of the plate A, which is either 
formed upon the hub or is formed separately 
and firmly secured thereto. 
I am aware that similar retaining-lips have 
been heretofore formed upon plates in their 
relation to vehicle-wheels and folded over 
upon the spokes proper; but the object here 
tofore served has been merely to hold the 
spokes in place upon separate shoulderpieces 
or rests, thus operating as a guard or key to 
prevent the spokes from becoming detached 
therefrom. They differ essentially from mine, 
in that my invention makes the radial arm 
itself serve all these purposes. Again, the 
process as heretofore in use of straining the 
spoke to the required tension from the center 
outward and fastening it to the periphery of 
the class of vehicle-wheels to which my in 
vention relates has not only been troublesome, 
but attended with the expenditure of consid 
erable time and labor, which are obviated and 
saved by my method of straining the spokes 
to a tension from the periphery inward, as 
hereinbefore described. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
In a vehicle-wheel, in combination with the 
hub and spokes, a metallic plate, part, or sec 
tion forming a part of the hub proper, and 
having a number of arms of equal length 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
2 
379,84. 
terminating in a shoulder or projection nearly straining the spokes to any required tension 
at right angles, suited to and formed to receive from the rim or periphery of the wheel in- Io 
the spokes proper in pairs, which are secured ward toward the center, in the manner and for 
to the hub by being encompassed by and held the purposes hereinbefore set forth. 
5 within the said projections by having the same 
GEO, E. WHTMORE, 
turned over upon them in such manner as to 
form a permanent rest or socket without other 
fastening, and in the operation of fastening 
HORATIO PAGE, 
LEONARD S. WHEELER. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US379941.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 379,941. 
F. DUHRKOP. 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
BAKER's OVEN. 
Patented Mar. 27, 1888, 
 
 
s 
N 
 
 
 
 
YNY BY AN 
ANSA) SS N 
YN ... 
NYSSAYSE 
NYYYYYYY 
NA as NY. 
NAAAAAAAIN 
77 SN N N 
N r L 
N 5% 
E. 
N 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
MTAFE 
NAZ 
5, 
AA 
Si 
El 
ESAC 
3. 
WW 
O S 
v. As 
f E. 
8, 77777AAZZZZ L N 
s 
N 
N 
T 
: 
 
Zzzazz. 
%2 22% a24 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 379,941, 
 
  
 
% 
% 
%) 
l % 
% aaaa 
WITNESSES 
/2 
 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
F. DUHRKOP. 
BAKER's OVEN. 
Patented Mar, 27, 1888, 
-A s 
ea 
Ry, 
 
S. 
I 2. (N, N 
22./ 
; 
: 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRITZ DUHRKOP, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BAKER'S OVEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 379,941, dated March 27 1888. 
Application filed August 6, 1887. Serial No. 246,252. (No model.) 
OWe. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRITZ DHRKOP, of the 
city of New York, county and State of New 
York, have invented a new and improved 
Baker's Oven, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
This invention relates to various improve. 
ments in a baker's oven, and more particularly 
to an arrangement of flues, whereby a uniform 
C heat is imparted to the top and bottom of the 
The invention also relates to several details 
Of construction. 
It consists in the various features of improve 
ment, more fully pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical transverse section on line u, u, Fig. 
2. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal section on 
line 0 , Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section 
on line w w, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a horizontal 
section on linea ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a hori 
ZOntal section on line yy, Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a 
detail front view of the oven-door; Fig. 7, a 
vertical section on line ea, Fig. 6; and Fig. 8, 
a detail back view of part of the roof of the 
baking-chamber. 
The letter a represents the fire-place of a 
baker's oven, opening toward the rear of the 
same. From the grate the heat and products 
of combustion pass first forward and around a 
fire-wall, b, thence backward through the 
upper part, a, of the fire-place, and thence 
around a fire-wall, c, into a number of parallel 
flues, dd, Fig. 3, extending directly beneath 
the bottom e of the baking-chamber. This 
bottom is composed of two walls of fire-brick 
inclosing a bed of sand. From the flues d the 
products of combustion enter a transverse 
passage, d, that leads them to two upright 
flues, f, located at the right and left of the 
baking-chamberg, Figs. 1 and 4. From the 
upright flues f the products of combustion 
pass above the baking-chamberg and between 
two arched roofs, gh, divided by a heating 
space. This heating-space has a central par 
tition, i, two lateral inclined partitions, j, and 
two short deflecting-walls, k, Fig. 5. 
The products of combustion emerging from 
flues fare deflected by Wallsk against inclined 
partitions j, around which they flow, to finally 
pass forward between such partitions and the 
central partition, i, and out into the smoke-stack 
25 
35 
45 
50 
65 
In Figs. 6 and 7, o is the door of the baking- 75 
l. By this construction both the bottom and the 
top of the baking-chamber are thoroughly and 
properly heated. The fire-chamber a is also 55 
directly connected to the heating-space be 
tween the arched roofsgh by means of direct 
upright flues m, Figs. 1 and 2, by means of 
which the heat may, if desired, be directly 
conducted to the top of the baking-chamber. 6o 
These flues mare provided with suitable damp 
S. 
n is a vent connecting the baking-chamber 
with the smoke-stack and permitting the dis 
charge of the gases. 
I attach importance to the mode of con 
structing the heating-space above the oven 
that is to say, to the use of the two inclined 
partitions j in connection with the deflectors 
k. I have found that by this construction the 7o 
heatis thrown against the partitions, and, run 
ning along their inclined faces, a uniform 
heating of the oven is produced without any 
cool or comparatively cool spaces. . 
chamberg, that turns inward on pivot-pin p, 
which is extended at one end beyondits bear 
ing. This extension carries a balance-weight, 
q, and has a notched end, by which it grasps a 
gas-cock, r, in a pipe, s, the burner of which 8o 
is placed opposite a mica window in the bak 
ing-chamber. This burner is never entirely 
extinguished. When the door is opened, the 
balance-weight will maintain it at any desired 
inclination, and at the same time the flame 85. 
from the burner will be turned up as long as 
the door is maintained by the weight in its . 
open position. When the door is closed, the 
flame will be automatically turned down. 
is anchored. The series of fire-bricks g com. 
posing this roof are flanked at each edge by 
an angle-iron, g, having a hook-shaped pro 
jection, g, that holds a plate, g, bearing 
against the faces of the fire-bricks and pre- 95 
venting their longitudinal displacement. g. 
is one of a set of upright metal plates placed 
against the edge of angle-irong. The plates 
gat opposite sides of the roof are connected 
by means of bolts and nuts, and thus the en- Ioo - 
tire roof is properly strengthened. 
Fig. 8 shows the mode in which the roof g go 
. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, in a baker's oven, of 
fire-place a and chamberg, With upright flues 
s 
379,941 
f, and double-roof gh, having inclined parti- pivot-pin p, which is extended at one end be. 
tions j and deflectors k, substantially as speci. yond its bearing and has a notched end, with 
fied. 
2. The combination, in a baker's oven, of pivot, and with gas-pipes and cock r, that is 
5 fire place a. with the parallel flues d and trans. engaged by such notched end, substantially as 
verse flue d beneath the baking-chamber 9, specified. 
5. The combination, in a baker's oven, of 
and with the uprightflues fat the sides thereof, 
and with a double roof having central parti. fire-bricks g, with the angle-irons g, having 25 
tion, i, inclined partitions j, and deflectors k, i hook-shaped projectionsg', and with the plates 
gig, the whole constituting the arched roof 
3. The combination, in a baker's oven, of of the baking-chamber, substantially as speci 
balance-weight q, carried by such extended 2d 
Io substantially as specified. 
fire-place a, having fire-walls b c, with fied. 
flues d, transverse flue d', upright flues f m, 
double roof g h, partitions i j, deflectors k, 
I5 vent in, and smoke-stack l, substantially as 
specified. 
4. The combination of oven-door o, having 
Witnesses: 
- 
F. V. BRIESEN, 
WM. A. LOWE. 
F. DUHRKOP. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380041.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 380,041. 
G. KINEUPER. 
ATOMIZER 
Patented Mar. 27, 1888, 
222 
?ZZZZZZZZ?ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
? 
 
 
 
 
 
AWzesses : 
???? 
???? 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE KNEUPER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ATOM IZER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 380,041, dated March 27, 1888. 
Application filed December 31, 1887. Serial No. 259,474. (No model.) 
20 
25 
The air-tube C comprises a lower portion, 55 
. To all whom, it may concern: 
vulcanite-and which comprises a liquid-tube, 
Beit known that I, GEORGE KNEUPER, of 
a, and an air-tube, C, and at the top of this 
the city and county of New York, in the State 
structure is the spraying-nozzle c. 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
5 Improvement in Atomizers, of which the fol 
C, which extends downward through the liq 
lowing is a specification. 
uid-receiver A and forms a continuation of 
In my Letters Patent No. 363,247, dated May 
the portion C. These two parts of the air 
17, 1887, I have shown and described an atom. 
tube are fitted together, as here shown, by an 
izer in which the liquid-receiver is formed 
ordinary slipjoint, c', which enables the noz- 6o 
Io Wholly of elastic and expansible material, so 
zle and upper portion of this structure to be 
removed for the purpose of filling the liquid 
that When the nozzle of the atomizer is closed 
air may be pumped into the liquid-receiver, 
receiver A. The portion C of the air-tube 
thereby expanding the receiver and forming 
has a cylindric recess or socket, c, which re 
therein a volume of compressed air, which will 
ceives a neck, a?, upon the upper-portion of 65 
I5 give a continuous spray when the finger is re 
the liquid-receiver A, and at the bottom the 
liquid-receiver has a corresponding meck, a, 
moved from the nozzle. 
One object of my present invention is to so 
which enters a circular recess in a Washer, d, 
arrange and construct the air-tube leading from 
placed outside and below the liquid-receiver. 
the liquid-receiver that it forms a sustaining 
The lower portion of the air-tube C extends 7o 
through the neck a and through the Washerd, 
post to the receiver and renders an atomizer 
having such expansible liquid-receiver a more 
and has screwed upon it a base, D, on which 
stable article when placed upon a table or 
the atomizer is supported. 
other support. 
The liquid-tube a extends downward within 
A further object of my invention is to re 
the air-tube portion C nearly to the bottom 
duce the cost of atomizers having a compres 
thereof, and such portion C of the air-tube has 
sion-bulb for forcing air into the liquid-re 
lateral openings c, through which liquid may 
ceiver, and to enable all those parts which are 
enter its interior, and near the top of the liq 
uid-receiver also has openings c, through which 
formed of flexible and soft india-rubber to be 
made without any valves, the necessary valves 
air may escape from the air-tube into the re 
being in a structure surmounting the liquid 
ceiver above the liquid therein. 
receptacle, and in which are comprised the air 
In connection with the expansible liquid-re 
and liquid tubes of the atomizer, such struct 
ceiver Alat least one valve is necessary to per 
ure being of hard rubber or other hard and 
mit the entrance of air to the air-tube C and 
rigid material. 
to prevent its escape therefrom to the atmos 
The invention will be hereinafter more par 
phere. I have here shown such a valve at e, 
ticularly described, and pointed out in the 
and if no compression-bulb B be used this 
valve e is all that is necessary for operating 
claims. 
The accompanying drawing is an elevation, 
the atomizer. By grasping the expansible 
partly insection, of an atomizer embodying my 
liquid-receiver A in the hand and compress- 9o 
4o invention and comprising a liquid-receiver 
ing it, the air whichit contains will be ejected 
formed in one integral structure of soft india 
from the nozzle c, and, drawing up liquid 
rubber, and also comprising a compression 
through the tube a, will eject spray from the 
bulb to be operated by hand for compressing 
nozzle. When the grasp of the hand on the 
air within the liquid-receiver. 
bulb A is released, the valve e will open to 
A designates the liquid-receiver, which con 
allow the bulb in recovering itself to fill with 
air. As soon as pressure is again brought to 
sists of a bulb of soft and flexible india-rubber 
readily expansible under air, which may be 
bear upon the bulb, the air will be discharged 
compressed therein by a compression-bulb, B. 
therefrom, the valve e closing to prevent its 
The liquid receiver A is surmounted by a escape to the atmosphere. I prefer, however, 
So structure of hard or rigid material-such, for usually to employ a compression-bulb, B, and 
example, as hard vulcanized india-rubber or a tube, B, by which the air may be compressed 
45 
75 
ICO 
 
380,04l 
to any desired pressure within the liquid-re 
ceiver A when the finger is applied over the 
nozzle c. 
I have here shown the structure of hard or 
rigid material which surmounts the liquid-re 
ceiver A as having a lateral branch, C, with 
which the tube B' of the bulb B is connected, 
and which contains both the valvee and a sec. 
ond valve, e'. It will be understood that both 
these valve e e' are comprised in the structure 
of hard or rigid material which surmounts the 
liquid-receiver, and the bulb B and its dis 
charge-tube Bare destitute of valves, and there 
fore are very simple and correspondingly in 
expensive in their construction. The bulb B, 
save for its opening to the tube B', is entirely 
imperforate and closed to the atmosphere. A 
very common construction for bulbs which are 
used to compress air is to provide the compres 
sion-bulb B at its one end-that is, the lower 
end in the drawing-with a suction-valve, and 
to provide it at its opposite end, where the 
tube B is joined onto it, with a discharge 
valve; but when the bulb and its tube BB are 
valveless, as in my invention, their construc 
tion is greatly simplified, and the cost of the 
entire article is much reduced below what it 
would be if the two valves e e' were arranged 
at opposite ends of the compression-bulb B 
instead of in the structure of hard or rigid 
material surmounting the liquid-receiver A. 
Indeed, the compression-bulb Band its air-tube 
B may, if desired, be formed in a single piece 
of soft and flexible india-rubber without any 
openings whatever, save that at the end of 
the tube B, where it is joined onto the lateral 
branch C. When the bulb B is compressed, 
the air therein will be forced through the tube 
B, and, closing the valve e', will open the valve 
e and pass into the air-tube C C, and, if the 
finger be over the nozzle c, will pass downward 
into the liquid-receiver A. When the press 
ure on the bulb B is relaxed, the valve e is in 
stantly closed and the valve e' opens, admit 
ting atmospheric air to fill the bulb Band per- 45 
mitting it to recover itself or expand. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the liquid-receiver 
of an atomizer formed wholly of elastic and 5o 
expansible material, of an air-tube extending 
downward through the receiver and forming 
a sustaining-post thereto and having near the 
bottom of the receiver a lateral inlet-opening 
and a liquid-tube extending downward in the 55 
air-tube and terminating near said lateral open 
ing, substantially as herein described. 
2. The combination, with the liquid-receiver 
of an atomizer formed wholly of an elastic and 
expansible bulb, of a structure of hard or rigid 6o 
material surmounting the receiver and com 
prising the air and liquid tubes of the atoms 
izer, and an inlet or suction valve for air also 
comprised in the said structure above the re 
ceiver, substantially as herein described. 
3. The combination, with the liquid-receiver 
of an atomizer and a surmounting structure of 
hard or rigid material comprising within it 
the air and liquid tubes of the atomizer, and 
having a branch, C, wherein are the air-valve 7c 
e, opening from said branch into said air-tube, 
and the air-valve e', opening into the branch, 
of a compression-bulb, B, and a tube, B, where 
by it is connected with said branch C, both 
said bulb and tube being destitute of any valves 75 
and the bulb being imperforate and closed to 
the atmosphere, save for the passage through 
the tube B, substantially as herein described. 
GEO, KNEUPER. 
Witnesses: 
C. HAILL, 
FREDK. HAYNES. 
HO 
IS 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380141.txt	(No Model.) . 
J. SINGER. 
FRINGE, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH SINGER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
FRINGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 380,141, dated March 27, 1888. 
Application filed March 29, 1887. Serial No. 232,838. (No model.) 
IO 
. 
By this arrangement 4O 
b', composed of bunches of worsted doubled 
over the small loops b in the festooned cord 
and woven into the underskirt by the warp 
threads a, thus saving the time and labor re 
quired in attaching them by hand, and also 
preventing these parts from working laterally 
out of place relative to the lower fabric. The 
tassels b are shorter than the companion tas 
sels of the underskirt, and are arranged alter 
nately relative thereto. 
the parts forming the overskirt cannot change 
position nor become disarranged, as they are 
apt to do when simply looped around the fes 
tooned cord, without being woven into the 
fabric or groundwork. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A fringe consisting of an underskirt or web 
festooned cord b, woven into the web by the 
warp-threads a, and the over tassels or pend 
the strands of ants b, looped over the cord b and woven to 
the underskirt by the warp-threads a, where 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoSEPH SINGER, of Chi 
cago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Fringes, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description, that will en 
able others to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of this specification. 
This invention relates, especially, to that 
class of fringe or trimming used by upholster 
ers as an ornamental border or finish, as will 
be hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 is a front view of a piece of fringe 
embodying my improved features; Fig. 2, a 
transverse section in the plane 2, Fig. 1. 
The underskirt or web of the fringe A con 
sists of a series of loose strands of worsted ar 
ranged side by side and woven together along 
the upper edge by the warp-threads a a, thus terminating in the tassels or pendants b, the 5o 
forming the Selvage or head proper. The 
warp-threads a form a second or double head. 
Below the double heading 
worsted are divided into bunches, which are 
compressed near their longitudinal center by by the parts are retained in their proper rela- 55 
the tie-bands a, leaving the space or opening tive position, substantially as set forth. 
a' between each two and forming the tassels 
or pendants b. 
The overskirt consists of the cord b, ar. 
ranged in festoons, and the tassels or pendants 
Witnesses: 
L. M. FREEMAN, 
IL. B. COUPLANID. 
35 
45 
- 
JOSEPH SINGER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380241.txt	(No Model.) 
W. A. BARNES. 
FIRE AND BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM. 
No. 380,241, 
Patented Mar, 27, 1888. 
ITIVESSES: , 
ca.g.s.- 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Waahington, D.C. 
 
INVENTOR, 
?t deace-t (7, V8ources. 
BY 
N6-g 
W 
AFTORNEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. A. BARNES, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
FIRE AND BURG LARALARM SYSTEM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 380,241, dated March 27, 1888, 
Application filed September 26, 1887. Serial No. 250,645. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM A. BARNEs, 
of Bridgeport, Fairfield county, Connecticut, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Fire and Burglar Alarm Systems, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a system for the pro 
tection of buildings, &c., from fire or burglars, 
whereby a signal is given when a conductor 
led through suitable localities in said building 
is divided, or when the strength of the current 
traversing the same is varied. 
My invention consists more particularly in 
the arrangement of apparatus, substantially 
as hereinafter described and claimed. 
The accompanying drawings are electrical 
diagrams illustrating my hereinafter - de 
scribed system. Figure 1 shows the system as 
disposed before an alarm is transmitted. Fig. 
2 represents the position of armature with ref. 
erence to adjacent contact-points during the 
time that an alarm is being sent or afterward. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts. 
The principle upon which this system de 
pends is that of the electrical equilibrium of 
two currents in different circuits, or, in other 
Words, an electrical current traversing one 
conductor is made to exert its energy in op 
position to that of another current traversing 
another conductor. When the opposing ener 
gies are made equal, equilibrium results. If, 
however, from any outside cause the current 
upon one conductor is made of greater or less 
strength than the opposing current, then equi 
librium no longer exists, and the overplus en 
ergy of the greater current is thus rendered 
free to manifest itself by signals due to its ac 
tion upon suitable mechanism. 
To cause a current traversing one conductor 
to balance a current traversing another con 
ductor is an elementary electrical problem 
easily solved by anyone skilled in the artinnu 
merous known ways. A simple method is to 
wind the two conductorsin opposite directions 
upon the sameironcore. Either conductor as a 
single coil would on the passage of a current 
through it render the core magnetic and of a 
certain polarity; but the opposite winding of 
the coils results in magnetic neutrality, inas 
much as the two coils tend toinduce poles of op 
posite name at the same extremity of said core. 
Consequently, if the strength of the currentin 
the two coils be equal and the thickness of the 
conductor, number of its turns, &c., the same, 
the core will not attract an armature so long 
as this equilibrium continues; but as soon as 
said equilibrium is disturbed-as, for example, 
by severing one conductor-the core will at 
tractitsarmature, which in turn may set in mo- 6o 
tion alarm mechanism or other signal device. 
In the accompanying diagrams, A is an 
electro-magnet. One coil, B, of this magnetis 
included in the branch line C. The other coil, 
D, of said magnet is wound in the opposite di- 65 
rection to that of coil B, and is included in the 
branch line E. The two branch lines C and 
E are disposed in multiple arc. The main 
line forms a third branch, FFF", or the branch 
lines CD may be regarded as in shunt from 
the main line FFF'. 
G is the armature of the electro-magnet A. 
An electrical current proceeding from the 
battery H will divide through the branch 
lines C and E. In passing through the coils 
B and D of the electro-magnet A the energy 
of the current in one branch line will be op 
posed by the energy of the current in the other 
branch line, and hence no apparent magnet 
ism will be induced in the core of electro-mag 
net A, and the armature G will remain quies 
cent; but if, for example, the branch con 
ductor C be cut or its continuity be inter 
rupted in any way at any point, then no cur 
rent will traverse that conductor nor its coil 
B, and hence the magnetizing energy of the 
current in coil D will be unopposed, the core 
of electro-magnet A will become magnetic, 
and the armature G will be attracted. The 
same result will follow no matter how the 
equilibrium between the currents in the branch 
lines be disturbed. Thus, assuming the en 
ergy of the currents in the two lines to be 
equal, any change in the resistance of either 
line will result in a disturbance of magnetic 
equilibrium. If, to illustrate, a loop con 
ductor, as indicated by dotted lines, as I, Fig. 
1, were connected to the line C, then the re 
sistance of said line would be diminished, an 
hence the strength of the current in coil B 
would to a corresponding extent become 
greater than the strength of the currentin coil - 
75 
85 
90 
o 
O 
( 
25 
35 
45 
OO 
 
IO 
magnet-coils D B, and thence to a contact 
D; or suppose that the resistance at any point 
point, N. Armature G is pivoted at O. Be 
of either branch line became augmented from 
tween the main body of the armature and the 
any cause, then the current in the coil in 
pivot-point is inserted a body of insulating 
cluded in that line would become weakened, 
material, P, so that electrical communication 
5 and again the balance would be destroyed 
along the armature from one end to the other 
and the magnet A would be energized. 
is thus prevented. With an arm, Q, on the 
In the present diagram I have shown but 
other side of the armature-pivot O the point 
two branch lines, CE, the currents of which 
N makes contact. Near the extremity of the 
are balanced. I may, however, multiply the 
arm Q, and to any convenient support, is piv 
number of branch lines at will, balancing, for 
oted a latch, R, which may be provided with 
example, two coils wound in one direction 
a coiled spring at S. At T is an ordinary 
against two coils wound in the opposite direc 
clock-train driven by a coiled spring and ro 
tion, or two coils against one coil, and so on 
tating the metal signaling-disk U. A spring 
through a great variety of changes, all of which 
finger, K, bears against the periphery of said 
will readily suggest themselves to the skilled 
disk and is electrically connected to line F. 
electrical workman. In practice the size of 
In the periphery of said disk are inserted 
the conductors, number of turns, &c., would 
pieces, V, of insulating material, so that, in a 
be proportioned once for all, and equilibrium 
manner now well known, when said disk is ro 
effected by a simple adjustment of relative 
tated by the spring-motor mechanism, electrical 
resistances interposed in the branch circuits. 
communication with it is ruptured whenever 
One of the main advantages of this system is 
the pieces V come under the finger. The clock 
the great difficulty which it offers to any one 
train also actuates an escapement-wheel, a. 
attempting to tamper with it. The branch 
On the under side of the armature G is shown 
line C may go to one house, for example, and 
a stop or projection, b, adapted to engage with 
25 the branch line E to another, the magnet Albe 
the escapement-wheel a and prevent the same, 
ing located at any convenient point, any rup 
and hence the clock-train and disk U, from 
ture of either branch line C or E or any 
turning. 
change in the resistance being certain to affect 
The normal condition of the parts above 
the magnet A to cause it to move its arma. 
described is as represented in Fig. 1, the cir 
ture G. Hence, even if a burglar should know 
cuit then being as follows: from the line F to 
the exact lead of all the circuit-wires, that fact 
contact M, arm J, branch lines CE, and mag: 
would be of no value to him, for there is ap 
net-coils D B to point N, armature-arm Q, and 
parently nothing which he could do upon one 
continuation of line F, which is here shown 
line which would render both branch lines in 
connecting with the armature G at its pivot 
operative at the same moment. So, also, 
point. The magnet A will then be neutral, 
where numerous branch lines are provided 
the armature G will be depressed, and the stop 
several pairs of lines balanced against one an 
b thereon, engaging with the escapement-wheel 
other may exist. A branch line may run 
a, will prevent any movement of the train and 
through a certain apartment in a tenement 
and its opposing line may be conducted through 
disk U. 
Suppose, now, for example, that the branch 
a far distant apartment, the occupant of neither 
line C be cut. The equilibrium of the opposing 
premises having knowledge as to the locality 
currents being destroyed, magnet A will at 
of the line which balances his own. 
tract armature G, the arm J on said armature 
Another important advantage of my system, 
will break contact with the point M, and the 
which will appear from the following descrip 
arm Q with the point N. The points N and 
tion of the illustrative mechanism indicated 
M, however, are preferably made as spring 
in the diagram, lies in the fact that a constant 
fingers, so as to keep contact with the arma: 
current is always traversing the system. When 
ture until just before the arm Q engages and 
a signal is to be sent, this current may be di 
is caught by the spring-catch R, by which 
verted through an automatic signaling mech 
means the armature becomes held in its at 
anism, as hereinafter described. 
tracted position even after circuit through the 
The system does not depend for its main 
magnet A is broken. At the same time the 
operation upon the establishment of a current 
stop b is lifted from the escapement-wheel a 
over a protecting-line on which there is no 
and the disk U is rotated. The main-line cur 
current, and upon which in case of injury or 
rent, now no longerpassing to the branch lines 
accident the normal condition of no current 
C and E, passes by the finger K to disk U, and 
will continue, but upon a continuous existing 
thence by the wire F, which may be electric 
current which cannot be altered or in any wise 
ally connected to the arbor of said disk, to the 
modified without an alarm resulting. 
catch R, thence to the armature-arm Q, and 
Referring, now, more particularly to the dia 
so to the line F. Meanwhile the revolution 
grams, on the armature G is a contact-arm, J, 
of disk U makes and breaks the circuit be 
which, when said armature is in the position 
tween F and F in accordance with the ar 
shown in Fig. 1 (that is, not attracted by the 
rangement of contact-pieces Won the periphery 
electro-magnet A,) touches a contact-point, M, 
of said disk, and in this way, as is well known, 
communicating with line F. The current on 
an electric bell or any other alarm apparatus 
the line may therefore pass from point M to 
arm J, and so to the branch lines C E and at a central station may be actuated to produce 
55 
45 
35 
90 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
380,241. 
IO 
a desired corresponding signal. The-position 
of the parts during the foregoing operation is 
shown in Fig. 2. 
The above-described mechanism is one op 
erative means of carrying my invention into 
practical effect to give a beneficial result. 
Other means may be adapted to the same end, 
operating in substantially like manner. I 
therefore do not limit myself to the precise 
means and instrumentalities here described. 
I claim 
1. The combination of a source of electric 
ity, a main line having two branch circuits, a 
differential electro-magnet having its coils in 
terposed in said branch circuits, an armature 
in the field of said magnet, an alarm-signal 
ing mechanism included in main line and con 
trolled by said armature, and a circuit-closer 
interposed between said two magnet-circuits 
and said main line, the aforesaid parts being so 
constructed and arranged that when the arma 
ture is attracted by said magnet it shall open 
said circuit-closer, and so break connection be 
tween said magnet-circuits and main line. 
2. The combination, in a fire or burglar 
alarm system, of a source of electricity, a main 
line having two branch circuits, a differential 
electro-magnet having its coils included in 
said branch circuits, an armature for said elec 
tro-magnet, and, controlled by said armature 
3O 
35 
4o 
and included in said main line, an automati 
cally-operated circuit-breaking wheel, and a 
circuit-closer interposed between said magnet 
circuits and said mainline, the aforesaid parts 
being so constructed and arranged that when 
the armature is attracted by said magnet it 
shall release the said circuit-wheel and open 
the said circuit-closer to break connection be 
tween said magnet-circuits and main line. 
3. The combination, in a fire or burglar. 
alarm system, of a source of electricity, a main 
line, a shunt-circuit including two branch 
conductors in multiple arc connected at both 
terminals to said mainline, an electro-magnet. 
having two oppositely-wound coils in the re 
spective circuits of said branch conductors, 
an armature in the field of said magnet, and 
three circuit-closers controlled by said arma 
ture when actuated by said magnet, one of said 
circuit-closers making and breaking circuit 
through main line between the shunt-termi 
nals, and the other two circuit-closers respect- . 
ively making and breaking circuit at each 
point of connection of said shunt-terminals 
with mainline, substantially as described. 
WILLIAM. A. BARNES. 
45 
Witnesses: 
DAVID B. LOCKWOOD, 
ALFRED B. BEERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380341.txt	(No Model.) 
T. W. MUNROE. 
STATION INDICATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 380,341, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
% E 
E. 
: 
e 
D 
res 
 
ERY 
, 
 
 
  
 
  
E AsiaSamaSN 
  
 
S 
 
 
SS 
 
 
 
y s 
 
 
B 
S i. 
y Q 
S. 
R 
NS 
left tre55e 3: 
39 
 
A. 
SSS Us Y 
 i. 
i 
R S-as ... 
2 
Sissi 
...ArmTriNETHON.I... 
AN 
 
eters. 
rapher, Washington, 3. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 380,341, 
R 
 
  
 
 
PErers, phots hagrapher, Washigion. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS WILLIAM MUNROE, OF SAN FRANCISCO, ASSIGNOR OF TWO.THIRDS 
TO HENRY BURPEE BERRYMAN, OF BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA. 
STATION INDICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 380,341, dated April 3, 1888. 
Application filed October 26, 1887. Serial No. 253,479. 
No model, 
Figure is a front view of my improved indi- 5O 
By providing two sight-openings, A* 65 
M 
To all, whom it may conce77. 
cator, with a portion of the case broken away 
Beit known that I, THOMAS WILLIAMMUN 
to expose the interior. Fig. 2 is a Section 
ROE, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
taken through Fig. 1 on the vertical line a ge. 
residing in the city and county of San Fran 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section taken horizontally 
cisco, and State of California, have invented 
through the case at the line y), Fig. 1. Fig. 5 
certain new and useful Improvements in Sta 
5 
tion-Indicators for Railway - Cars; and I do 
4 is a view in side elevation of the automatic 
mechanism, showing its arrangement Oil the 
hereby declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of my said invention, 
car and its connection with the indicator. Fig. 
reference being had to the drawings that accom 
5 is a front view of the box with two sight 
openings. 
pany and form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Similarletters of reference indicate like parts 
in all the figures of the drawings. 
street or station indicators for railway-cars; 
The box or case A has a hinged front in 
and it consists of an improved indicator-box 
which the sight-opening A* for the cards C is 
of the kind in which the names of the streets 
are arranged on separate cards or plates that 
made. 
are displayed one at a time in required order 
A, Fig. 5, one below the other, of Suitable 
at a sight-opening in the box, and also of cer- height, proportioned to the size of the cards, 
tain improved automatic mechanism for oper 
other matter in addition to the name of the 
street can be arranged on each card and ex 
ating the indicator at proper intervals in the 
posed to view at the lower opening while the 
travel of the car through the agency of stops 
card is resting in the bottom of the case before 
or projections set along the track. 
it is elevated to the upper opening. This is 
My said improvements in indicator-boxes 
illustrated by Fig. 5, where the card at the top 
differ in several points and features from the 
sight-opening displays the name of the next 
indicator-box heretofore produced by me, and 
which I have already made the subject of an 
street or station, while the front card of the 7 
application for Letters Patent by my applica 
set in the bottom of the case shows at the lower 
opening such matter as may be arranged on 
tion filed in the Patent Office on or about the 
the card for such purpose below the manne of 
28th day of July, 1887, Serial No. 245,573, as 
in the present invention I have a single sta. 
the street. 
tionary card rack or holder and a double set 
bottom of the case, and D is the elevator that 
of cards, with the names of the streets arranged 
raises and holds up the cards to view behind 
On one half of the number in the order in which 
the sight-opening. The bottom of the holder 
the streets follow one another when traveling 
slopes or pitches toward the front for the pur 
in one direction along the route, and on the 
pose of throwing the top edges of the cards out 8 
other half of the number the Sane Streets in 
of line, or one above the other. This position 
reverse order, or for the return-trip of the car, 
of the cards prevents the fingers D* of the ele 
so that the cards always circulate or move in 
vator from taking into the slits c* of more than 
the same direction within the box, and the 
mechanism that brings the cards in succession 
one card at a time. 
into view at the sight-opening is greatly sim 
The cross-bar E, with its ends fixed in the 
plified and there is no reversing mechanism 
sides of the case, sets across the front of the 
card-holding space, and the cards rest against 
required. 
it in close order one behind the other. Springs 
The nature of these said improvements and 
the manner in which I construct, produce, and 
Faire fixed to the back of the case to throw the 
apply them are fully explained and set out in 
cards forward as they drop one after another 9 
5 
the following description, the accompanying 
into the bottom of the case. 
drawings being referred to by figures and let 
The elevator D has arms that play up and 
down in slots. A from the back of the case, and 
terS. 
B is the rest or holder for the cards in the 8o 
25 
35 
AO 
45 
2 
380,341. 
25 
35 
O 
the ends of the arms, being bent inward to set 
in front of the cards, are provided with fingers 
D*, that take into the slits of the foremost card 
in the upward movement of the elevator from 
5 the lower part of the case. These fingers catch 
into or seize a card and raise it up into the up 
per part of the case at each upward movement, 
and during the time the elevator is at rest they 
hold the top edge of the card so that it hangs 
perpendicularly, while its bottom edge just 
rests upon the inclined shelf H, which is set 
just below the line of the bottom edge of the 
sight-opening. The fingers turn on the ends 
of the arms and stand inward toward the face 
of the card. They are also pressed against the 
card by the springs g, so that they slip into 
the slits as the elevator reaches the end of its 
downward movement and are in position to 
raise the card when the elevator rises. Each 
card raised and exposed to view in this man 
ner is discharged and thrown to the back of 
the case at the downward movement of the 
elevator, where it drops into place at the back 
of the cards standing in the card-holder and 
is pressed forward by the springs F. The 
spring-clips I, fixed to the top of the case, are 
placed to confine the top edge of the card and 
prevent it from dropping either forward or 
backward when the elevator begins to move 
downward, as at such times the fingers are 
withdrawn from the slits, and the bottom edge 
of the card requires to be thrown inward, in 
order that it may slip from the inclined shelf. 
The front edge of this shelf is formed of a sheet 
of thin spring metal, as the card being raised 
by the elevator must pass between it and the 
front of the case, and then come into position 
to set on the shelf. 
The automatic mechanism consists of the 
upright lever M, supported from the running 
gear of the car in position to engage at its 
lower end with a stop, W, on the roadway and 
connected at the opposite end by connecting 
rods and levers with the lower end of an up 
right rod, N, to the upper end of which the 
card-elevator D is fixed. The rod moves in 
the guides n* n*, and a slot, y, is cut through 
the casing of the car-body for the elevator to 
Work in. 
Connection of the rod N with the lever Mis 
made by the lever P on the rock-shaft R, the 
connecting-rods S and T, and the bell-crank 
lever U, by which the movement of the lower 
end of the lever is multiplied at the rod and 
changed into the required upright or vertical 
movement. The end u^ of the lever U is con 
nected by the link to the end of the rod N, 
and the end of the other arm is connected to 
the lever P by the rod T, in which there is a 
telescopic joint, T. T. In the operation of 
this mechanism the fixed stops W, set at in 
tervals along the track, throw back the end of 
the lever M and draw back the rod T, so that 
the rod N, carrying the elevator, will drop 
65 down to its lowest position. The telescopic. 
joint in this connecting-rod allows the rod to 
drop quickly, and also takes up whatever ex 
55 
45 
95 
75 
The lever Mis supported under the car from 85 
cess of movement there may be in the rod T 
over that required in the elevator. A spring 
or cushion, w, is interposed between the slid- 7O 
ing parts of this joint to overcome the jar and 
noise when the two parts come together. The 
elevator is thus brought down and remains in 
the lower part of the indicator-case as long as 
the lower end of the lever M is riding on the 
raised projection W; but as it passes the pro 
jection the spring Land draw-rod L bring the 
lever back, and through the movements of the 
levers MP U and connecting-rods S T throw 
up the elevator-rod N. In the interval of 8o 
time between the action of one stop W and 
the next the elevator remains in the upper . 
part of the case and the card is exposed to 
view at the sight-opening. 
some part of the truck where it will not be af. 
fected by the play of the car-body on the 
springs and that its lower end may always 
stand at the same distance from the surface of 
the roadway. Ball-and-socket connections S 90 
s^ between the ends of the connecting-rod S 
and the levers MP are also used to accom 
modate the swiveling movement of the car 
body on the truck. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a street or station indicator for rail 
way-cars, the combination of a suitable case 
having a sight opening, a set of indicator cards 
or plates, one half of which are provided with 
the names of the streets or other matter to be 
displayed in regular order and the other half 
thereof with the same matter repeated in re 
verse order, a vertically - movable elevator 
which is adapted to take hold of the foremost 
card of the set, elevate it and hold it for dis 
play at the sight-opening, and to discharge 
or release said card in the manner set forth, 
and an inclined ledge or shelf in the case be 
neath the sight-opening to support the bot 
tom edge of the card when elevated and to 
direct the fall of said card when released, as 
set forth. 
2. In a street or station indicator for rail 
way-cars, the elevator D, having fingers D*, 
adapted to engage the top part of a card or 
plate to be elevated, the rod N, connected to 
the elevator, lever M, having its lower end set 
to engage with a line of stops or projections 
on the track, the spring applied to draw the 
lever back after passing the projection, and 
the connecting-rod S, lever P, rod T, lever U, 
and link V, connecting the lever M with rod 
N, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of a suitable case with 
a sight-opening, the separate name - bearing 
cards C, the elevator D D*, operating-rod N, 
connected to the elevator, shelf H in the case 
under the sight-opening, rest-bar E in the 
case in front of the upper ends of the cards, 
and mechanism, substantially as described, 
adapted to be actuated by engaging with a 
line of stops or projections in the roadway 
IOO . 
I IO 
If 5 
I25 
380,34. 
3. 
and connected with the operating-rod to move cally-movable elevating-bar having fingers D* 
the same down and up at intervals, as set forth. D* to engage the slits c in one card at each 
4. In a street or station indicator, a set of downward movement and to raise the same 
independent cards or plates having openings by an upward movement to the upper part of I5 
or slits c, bearing the names of the streets or the case, in combination, as set forth. 
other matter to be displayed in the required 
order, a card rest or holder at the bottom of have hereunto set my hand and seal. 
a case or box below a sight-opening, a ledge 
THOMAS WILLIAM NIUNR0E. 
or shelf in the case below the said sight-open- 
ing, with an inclined top to take the bottom 
edge of the card when elevated, and a verti. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
L. S. 
O 
Witnesses: 
C. W. M. SMITH, 
JAMES L. KING. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380441.txt	(Model.) 
F. A. HYATT & E. D. TANKERSLEY, 
MAN ACLE. 
No. 380,44l, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
/ 
A. 
f 
e 
!,..., it, 
f 
. 
' 
' ' - 
f / 
f 
i 
-.' 
t 
N 
y 
f 
y 
f 
f 
f 
f 
f 
't 
t 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-thographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK A. HYATT AND EWING D. TANKERSLEY, OF ALAMOSA, COLORADO. 
MANA 
C. E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters 
Application filed May 3, 1886. 
Patent No. 380,441, dated April 3, 1888. 
Serial No. 200,998. (Mode.) 
To all wizon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, FRANK A. HYATT and 
EWING. D. TANKERSLEY, citizens of the United 
States, residing in the town of Alamosa, in 
in the county of Conejos and State of Colorado, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Manacles, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to devices for secur 
ing prisoners; and it consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the parts here 
inafter fully described and claimed, whereby 
a prisoner may be very effectually and hu 
manely deprived of the free use of his arms. 
The drawing shows a perspective view of 
the device, the dotted lines indicating the 
body of the prisoner, to which the device is 
applied. 
A leather belt, 1, encircles the waist of the 
prisoner, and is provided with loops 3 of the 
same material, through which a chain, 2, is 
passed, and has its ends secured together be 
hind the back of the prisoner. The leather 
belt or band 1 is not fastened to the prisoner 
except by the waist-chain, which is the actual 
securing device. The leather belt is inter 
posed between the waist-chain and the body 
of the prisoner, to distribute the pressure of 
the chain and prevent it from galling him. A 
neck-chain, 4, has its front end permanently 
secured to the said waist-chain in front of the 
prisoner, and the rear end of the said neck 
chain is connected to the back of the waist 
chain by any suitable locking device, such as 
the padlock 9, which engages with the link 5 
at the end of the neck-chain. The middle 
portion of the neck-chain is double and forms 
the loop 6, which encircles the neck of the 
prisoner, being large enough to be slipped 
over his head. A snap-link, 7, or other simi 
lar catch, is used for taking up the slack of 
the loop 6 behind the prisoner after the loop 
has been slipped over his head. This snap 
link may be slipped through any of the links 
of the loop and binds them together. A sin 
55 
gle handcuff, 10, of any approved construction, 
is attached to each side of the waist-chain by 
means of the link 8. 
The device is attached to the prisoner as in 
dicated in the drawing, his wrists being se 
cured by the handcuffs. The hands and arms 
are thus left in a natural position). They can 
not be brought nearer together, nor can the 
waist-belt be slipped up or down to any ma 
terial extent without the locking device and the 
snap-link being first undone. 
What we claim is 
1. In a manacle, the combination of the 
waist-chain, the single handcuffs secured to 
the sides of the waist-chain, the neck-chain 
provided with a neck-loop and having one end 
permanently secured to the front of the waist 
chain, and a removable locking device con 
necting the other end of the neck chain with 
the back of the waist-chain. 
2. In a manacle, the combination of the 
waist-chain, the single handcuffs secured to 
the sides of the waist-chain, the neck-chain 
provided with a neck-loop and having one end 
permanently secured to the front of the waist 
chain, an adjustable link for taking up the 
slack of the said neck-loop, and a removable 
locking device connecting the other end of the 
neck-chain to the back of the waist-chain. 
3. In a manacle, the combination of the 
leather waist-belt provided with loops 3, the 
chain 2, passing through the said loops and 
having its ends secured together, the single 
handcuffs 10, attached to the sides of the said 
waist-chain, the neck-chain 4, provided with 
the neck-loop 6, the snap-link 7, for taking up 
the slack of the neck-loop, and the padlock 9, 
connecting the end of the neck-chain to the 
back of the waist-chain. 
FRANK. A. HYATT. 
EWING D. TANKERSLEY, 
Witnesses: 
J. A. MCDONALD, 
C. C. HOLBROOK. 
-IO 
3O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380542.txt	(No Model.) 
W, ALDRICH, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 380,542, 
 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
77a vezzloz. 
722s 77orzveys. 
(No Model.) 
W. ALDRICH, 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 380,542, 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
A27. 2. 
O' 
v0 
Wr 
'. A. 
w: W. W. W. 
 
7 
* 
t 
E-2 
? 
t 
R 
Z 7" 
Wr 
?' a. 
s 
It," 
s? i. 
S --- 
A3 
S. 
S? 
-a - 7 
-- 
A. 
6? 
- 
- 
A? 
- 
7t. 
7 
" 
V. 
7-3 
r 
7ty 
4. 
Tr. 
s 
e 
". 
!' 
ill 
A.' 
S.I.-----a- 
- - - - - - - d.1 
A 7. 
e W. 
ay 
O 
Wz (7 ess es. 
h 
772-ze 22- (toz. 
24% - 
7ts i? 2-C. 
N. PreRs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
W. ALDRICH, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 380,542, 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
O 
w 
still 
222 
 
 
 
SEEEE V 
N 
- 
Waltzvesses. 
24- 6 42. 
24%-2- 
Z72 vez-z-zozr. 
132321 
3- 
72s 2.-- 
ETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 380,542, 
W. ALDRICH, 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR, 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
- 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
 
 
    
 
 
w 
 
 
 
 
Sri airs. 
. E. 
 
 
 
at 90A, 1.9-lis 
Syer/g 
WZ7e esses. 
Zp-vezvtoz. 
7zs -7orneys. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
h 
(No Model.) 
W. ALDRICH. 
5 sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 380,542, 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
ASN 
 
 
 
| 
 
-- 
7g 
s E&E 
s 
zza2 
KNWV 
Zef." 3 
N 3 
NE = -- L. 
Pe. 
 
N 
2. 
WZeze esses. 
24- 6 42-12, 
77vezzoz. 
4%-4-4-444-4 
242 M 
Zazis 1oziz4s. 
perERs. photo-Lithographer, Washington. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WALES ALD RICH, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 380,542, dated April 3, 1888. 
Application filed February 14, 1887. Seria No. 227,466. (No model.) 
55 
To all, ufon, it Thalf concern: 
Be it known that I, WALES ALDRICH, of 
Dayton, in the county of Montgomery and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Cash Registers and 
Indicators; and I do hereby declare the foll 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of this 
specification, and to the figures and letters of 
reference marked thereon. 
My present invention relates to that class of 
machines which perform the functions of serv 
ing as a check upon dishonest employs who 
handle the cash in a business establishment 
and as a means for keeping an accurate ac 
count of the cash receipts during any given 
period. 
The machine which I have designed for 
carrying out my invention embodies a series 
of keys each representing a particular amount, 
a series of targetS or Visual signals correspond 
ing to the series of keys and adapted to be ex 
posed when Said keys are operated, an alarm 
mechanism, a registering mechanism, and a 
mechanism by means of Which the cash-drawer 
is released, the Whole being so arranged as 
that when a cash purchase is made and the 
key or keys corresponding to the amount of 
the purchase is or are operated a target or tar 
gets indicating the amount will be exposed to 
the view of both employ and purchaser, the 
alarm will be sounded, a record made of the 
transaction upon the registering mechanism, 
and the money-drawer released or unlocked, 
so that the amount received from the purchaser 
may be deposited therein and change made, if 
necessary. 
I will first describe my machine at length, 
and will then point out what I deem its par 
ticular features of novelty in the clauses of 
claim at the end of this specification. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
machine constructed in accordance with my 
invention; Fig. 2, a side view of the same with 
the casing removed; Fig. 3, a perspective view 
of a portion of the mechanism, showing one 
key-bar, its corresponding target, and the in 
termediate mechanism for operating it, the 
alarm mechanism, and portion of the register 
ing mechanism. Fig. 4 is a horizontai section 
taken on the line a a of Fig. 2, showing in 
dotted lines the position the parts occupy when 
the key-bar is pulled out, the tablet.exposed, 
and the registering device operated. Fig. 5 is 
a top plan view of the mechanism shown in Fig. 
2. Fig. 6 is a detail view showing in elevation 
the registering mechanism. Fig. 7 is a view 
of the gear and the actuating spring for return 
ing or resetting the registering mechanism; 
Fig. 8, a detail view of the bell and the trip 
mechanism applied to the hammer thereof. 
Fig. 9 is a longitudinal vertical section taken 
through the casing of the machine, and show 
ing particularly the means for locking and re 
leasing the money-drawer. 
Similar letters of reference in 
the Several 
figures indicate the same parts. 
. The letter Aindicates a suitable casing con. 
structed of wood or other material, and of a 
form which, aside from its adaptability to the 
inclosed mechanism, may be varied to suit the 
taste of the designer. 
Glazed openings B are provided at the up 
per portion of the casing for the exhibition of 
the targets or visual signals employed in the 
machine, other glazed openings, C C, being 
provided at the sides to enable the body of the 
mechanism to be inspected, as well as an open 
ing, D, closed by a hinged cover, E, for en 
abling the register to be exposed to view and 
be reset when necessary. This cover E is 
preferably kept locked, SO as to be accessible 
to no one but the person holding the key. At 
the bottom of the casing is arranged a drawer, 
F, which, when in place, is adapted to be held 
closed by a top, G, that is itself locked and un 
locked by means of devices to be hereinafter 
described. 
Within the casing is arranged a metal frame, 
H, that is adapted to receive and maintain in 
their proper relations all of the operative parts 
of the machine, except some of the devices 
shown in Fig. 9, employed for locking and un 
locking the money-drawer. For convenience 
of description this frame H and the mechan 
ism borne by it are shown removed from the 
casing in most of the figures. 
Referring particularly to Figs. 2, 3, and 4, 
K will be found to represent, a series of hori 
ZOntal bars arranged one above the other and 
supported at front and rear upon stationary 
arms or fingers II, formed upon the metal. 
75 
9O 
95 
OO 
IC 
IS 
O 
25 
35 
O 
so 
2 
380,542 
75 
OC 
90 
is cally using the machine. 
frame. These bars I term, for convenience, causing an arm, Q, secured to the upper end 
Each of them near its outer end 
key-bars. 
of the bar P and bearing a spring-pressed 
is pivoted to a hinged link, L, which serves to 
pawl, Q, which is in engagement with a ratchet- 7c. 
guide and steady it in its reciprocating move. 
wheel, R, to rotate said ratchet - wheel and 
5 ments and allow the lateral movement neces 
through it set in motion the driving-gear S of 
sary to cause the key-bar to properly operate 
a registering mechanism, the construction of 
upon the vibratory bar and the shaft to which 
which will be farther on explained. To an 
the registering mechanism is geared, and at its 
arm, P', on the lower end of the bar P is con 
extreme outer end, outside of the casing, it is 
nected (by a link, P) a spring, P, Figs. 3 and 
To provided with a loop or eye, IX, to enable the 
4, which is put under compression each time 
operator to conveniently operate it with his 
the bar P is turned and tends to bring said bar 
finger. On this eye or loop K is formed or 
back to normal position. 
affixed the figure or number which the par 
T represents a bar mounted on a vertical 
ticular bar is intended to designate in practi. 
axis, T, at the rear of the frame H and hav 
ing a series of arms, t, with which the T-shaped 
M. M., &c., Figs. 2 and 3, represent a series 
ends of the key-bars are adapted to engage. 
of bell-crank levers, as many in number as 
This bar T has an arm, t, Fig. 4, to which a 
there are key-bars. Each of these bell-crank 
spring, t, is connected by means of a link, t. 
levers is mounted so as to turn freely upon a 
Upon the pulling of any one of the key-bars 
2O vertical rod or pivot, N, and one of the arms, 
this bar T is vibrated on its pivot against the 
m, projects in the path of a Jug or projection, 
tension of said spring t. The position the 
K', on its corresponding key-bar K, while its 
parts occupy when the key-bar is pulled is 
other arm, n., bears a vertical rod or staff, O, 
shown in dotted lines, Fig. 4. 
which carries at its upper end a target or 
The uppermost arm of the bar T is pro 
25 tablet, O', upon which is marked on both sides 
vided with a cam projection, l, which, when 
a figure or number corresponding to that on 
the bar is vibrated, is adapted to engage with 
the end of the key-bar. All the targets nor 
a depending arm, U, secured to a rock shaft, 
mally stand swung around to one side out of 
U, as shown clearly in Fig. 3. This rock-shaft 95 
line with the opening B in the casing; but 
U bears at its opposite end a tripping arm or 
3o when any one of the key-bars is pulled the 
lever, U", that is adapted to engage with a piv. 
projection K upon it strikes the arm in of the 
oted latch, U, which operates upon the arm 
co-operating bell-crank lever and turns said 
U on the hammer U" of a bell, U. Every 
lever on its pivot, thereby bringing the target 
time the bar T is turned in response to a pull 
carried by said lever to the opening B, where 
upon one of the key-bars the shaft U' is rocked 
35 it will be visible to both the operator and the 
and the bell is rung. Also mounted on the 
purchaser whether they both be at the front 
rock - shaft U' is an arm, V, Figs. 3, 2, 5, 
or one at the front and the other behind the 
which bears at its extremity a friction-roller, 
machine. 
o, and normally stands just above the upper los 
P represents a bar mounted so as to turn 
end of a lever, V", pivoted to the side of the 
so freely upon a vertical rod or pivot, P, and 
casing, as shown in Fig. 9. The lower end of 
having a series of rigid lateral arms or fingers, 
this lever extends beneath an adjustable stop, 
p, that project beneath the series of key-bars 
V', located on a vertically-sliding bar or bolt, 
and are adapted to be operated upon by lugs 
V", whose lower end is adapted to engage with IIo 
or projections K", formed on said key-bars, as 
a notch, V, formed in the top G of the money. 
shown in Figs. 2 and 3. These arms pare ar. 
drawer, as shown. Through a cross-piece, G', 
ranged spirally upon the bar P, the effect of 
Secured to this top G, passes a rod, G", which 
which is to cause the topmost arm of the series to 
is secured to the back of the casing, and ar 
stand normally at the greatest distance from its 
ranged upon this rod between the casing and 115 
co-operating lug K'on the corresponding key 
the said cross-piece G' is a spiral spring, G". 
bar and the lowest of said series of arms to stand 
When the rock-shaft U is turned in conse. 
nearest to its co-operating lug, so that while a 
quence of a pull being made upon one of the 
considerable extent of movement of the upper 
key-bars, the bar V* will, through the de 
most key-bar will be required in order to bring 
scribed connections, be raised out of engage 
its lug K into engagement with the arm p, 
ment with the notch W, and the spring G", 
only a comparatively short movement of the 
asserting itself, will force the top G of the 
lowest key-bar will be necessary to render it 
money-drawer forward, and by thus releasing 
operative upon the armp. The links L and bar 
the drawer from the restraining effect of the 
T causing the projections on the key-bars to 
shoulder V of said top enable the drawer to 
move in the arc of a circle of which the cen 
be pulled out. 
ter of bar P is the center render it necessary 
From what has been stated it will be appar. 
to arrange the arms p in a spiral line. 
ent that starting with the machine in normal 
Whenever either of the key-bars is pulled 
position and with none of the targets or tab 
or withdrawn to its full extent, its lug K 
lets eXposed at the openings in the upper part 
strikes the arm p in its path and turns the bar 
of the Casing, a pull upon any one of the key 
65 P on its axis a greater or less distance, ac 
bars will cause, first, a corresponding target or 
cordingly as said engagement between the lug 
tablet to be exposed; secondly, a turning of 
and arm occurred sooner or later, thereby 
the bar P and a registration upon the register. 
45 
55 
330,542 
3 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
ing mechanism; thirdly, the ringing of the 
bell, and, fourthly, the unlocking of the money 
drawer. Upon the release of the key-bar so 
pulled and the pushing in of the money-drawer 
and its top all the parts will resume their first 
position, excepting the registering mechanism, 
which retains a record of the transaction, and 
the target or tablet, which remains exposed at 
the openings. When another key-bar is pulled, 
the operations are all repeated, save that the 
target or tablet is withdrawn from view and 
another one corresponding to the key - bar 
pulled is exhibited in its stead, and that the 
registering mechanism is given a greater or 
less extent of movement, according to the 
amount designated. 
The withdrawal of the target or tablet from 
the opening is effected by the mechanism and 
in the manner which I will now describe: Piv 
oted at W to the top of the metal frame, Figs. 
2, 5, is a lever, W, to the rear end of which 
is hinged a gravitating piece or latch, W', 
the forward end of which lies in the path of a 
stop or projection, W, on a plate, W, that is 
adapted to be reciprocated transversely of the 
frame and to carry with it a vertical rod, Z, 
which extends down between the arms of the 
bell-crank levers M, as shown in Fig. 4, and 
is stepped in a swinging arm, Z, hinged to the 
rod or pivotN, as shown in Figs. 2, 3, 4. The 
piece or latch W' stands in the path of the 
cam projection it on the arm of the vibratory 
bar T, and when said bar T is vibrated in re 
sponse to a pull upon a key-bar the said cann 
projection, striking the said piece or latch W, 
causes the lever W to be turned on the pivot 
W and its inner end to strike the projection 
W" on the plate W, and through said plate 
cause the rod Z to swing around, and, engag 
ing with the inner arm of the bell-crank lever 
carrying the target or tablet exposed at the 
opening, move said bell-crank lever back to 
normal position and in line with its fellows, 
and thus carry the said target or tablet away 
from the opening out of view. This operation 
of withdrawing the exposed target or tablet 
from view is the first to be performed when a 
key-bar is pulled and does not interfere at all 
with the orderly and timely exposure of the 
next target or tablet which is to indicate the 
manipulation of said key-bar. 
The lever W is reset automatically upon 
the return of the cam projection l to normal 
position, and the sliding plate W and tablet 
retracting rod Z are brought back to normal 
position by the swinging around of the bell 
crank lever, which brings the next target or 
tablet to view. 
I will here state that to prevent any possi 
ble interference of the targets or tablets with 
each other I have constructed the arms of the 
successive bell-crank levers which bear the 
target-shafts of different lengths, as shown in 
Fig. 2, and have arranged guides 0 for direct 
ing the staffs in their movements for separat. 
ing them, and, by affording them lateral Sup 
port, preventing them from becoming bent and 
90 
interlocked. These guides O are preferably 
composed of strips secured at one end to the 
frame, and are bent in the arc in which the staffs 7o 
of the tablets move, one strip being situated 
between each pair of staffs. 
The registering mechanism is constructed 
as follows: With the gear-wheel S, hereinbe 
fore referred to, there is meshed a small gear, 75 
S, mounted on a long pinion-shaft, S. This 
pinion-shaft is adapted to be meshed with a 
gear, S', on a shaft, S', which shaft has also a 
pinion, S, which engages a gear, S', on a shaft, 
S', that is in turn provided with a pinion, S', 
that meshes with a gear, S', mounted on a shaft, 
S", and connected through a volute spring, S', 
to a stationary drum, S', as shown in Figs. 6 
and 7. The pinion-shaft S has its bearing in 
the metal frame H, as shown in Fig. 6; but the 85 
shafts S and S' have their bearings in and 
are supported by a supplemental frame, S', 
which is supported in a plate, S', mounted on 
the frame H above the gears SS, as shown in 
Figs. 5 and 6. The pinion-shaft Sprojects up 
through suitable openings in the plate S" and 
the frame S', and is kept normally in engage 
ment with the gear-wheel S by the action of 
a spring, S', interposed between the flange of 
the plate S and the end of the frame S. On 95 
the upper end of the pinion-shaft S is secured 
an indicator, S', which co-operates with a dial 
laid offin divisions numbered from 0 to 9, in 
clusive, and is adapted to keep a register of 
transactions varying in amounts from one to IOO 
nine cents, while upon the upper ends of the 
shafts SSS", respectively, there are secured 
other indicators, (lettered S'S', S',) respect 
ively, that are adapted to co-operate with other 
dials designed to register transactions varying 
in amount fron) ten to ninety cents, from one 
to nine dollars, and from ten to ninety dollars, 
respectively. 
Now, the key-bars are ten in number and are 
designated on their ends with figures from one 
to ten, inclusive, the uppermost bar being num 
bered 1, and so on in order to the lowest one, 
which is numbered 10. Whenever one of the 
key-bars is pulled out-the fifth bar, for in 
stance, for a five-cent transaction-the fifth bar 
p of the series of arms projecting from the bar 
P will be engaged by the lug Konsaid fifth key 
bar and will cause the vibration of said bar P 
a distance sufficient to cause the pawl P' to ad 
vance the ratchet-wheel R, and through the in 
termediate gearing turn the pinion-shaft S' 
until the indicator on its upper end uncovers 
the figure 5 of the dial beneath it. 
If the next 
transaction be a ten-cent transaction, key-bar 
No. 10 will be pulled and the registering- 1 
train will be operated so as to cause the index 
S" to move around and stand between the fig 
ures 10 and 20 on the second dial and the fig 
ure 5 on the first dial, the indicator on this 
last-named dial, which before stood at 5, hav 
ing been by the recordation of the ten-cent 
transaction caused to make a complete revo 
lution and brought back to starting-point. If 
the next transaction should be a dollar trans 
ICS 
I IS 
I IO 
2 5 
- 
380,542 
2 5 
75 
90 
O 
5 
action, the key-bar 10 will have to be pulled other with amounts of from ten cents to 
ten times, and if a ten-dollar transaction a hun 
ninety-nine cents, inclusive, and still another 
dred times, the registry of these items being 
with amounts including a dollar and multiples 
effected on the third and fourth dials, as will 
thereof, after the manner of the invention de 
be readily understood. 
scribed in my patent, No. 342,059, dated May 
Normally the spring S', Fig. 7, is kept par 
1S, 1886. These several mechanisms I pref. 
tially wound up, and the gear S', to which said 
erably arrange alongside each other within a 
Spring is connected, is kept from backward 
common casing, so that a single rock-shaft, U", 
movement by the engagement of a stop, S', 
may be employed for linging the bell and re 
located on the under side of the said gear, 
leasing the money-drawer top. Where such 
with a spring-detent, S', secured to the frame 
duplication of the mechanism is made, I pref. 
S', as shown in Fig. 6. The principal func 
erably employ a separate register for each 
tion of this spring S' is to operate upon the 
mechanism. 
train of gearing and run the register back to 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
Zero when it is so desired. To make this 
claim as new is 
plainer, it should be borne in mind that each 
1. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
time the gear S" is turned as a consequence of 
bination, with a swinging arm bearing a tar 
the manipulation of the key-bars the spring 
get or tablet at a point removed from its pivot, 
S' is wound up more and more, and when, at 
of a reciprocating key-bar having a stop nor 
the end of the day's business, for instance, it 
mally out of engagement with Said arm, but 
is desired to reset the register to zero the 
adapted, when the key-bar is pulled, to posi 
frame S" is given a slight longitudinal move. 
tively engage it and move the target or tablet 
ment in the direction indicated by the arrow, 
into view, substantially as described. 
Figs. 5 and 6, Sufficient to compress the spring 
2. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
S' and disengage the pinion S" from the pin. 
bination, with a bell-crank lever having a tar 
ion-shaft S', whereupon the spring S', assert 
get or tablet on one arm, of a recipi'ocating 
ing itself, will cause the gear S' to rotate back 
key-bar having a stop normally out of engage 
ward till its stop S" comes again into contact 
ment with said lever, but adapted, when the 
with the spring-detent S', or, in other words, 
key-bar is pulled, to positively engage the 
till all the indicators operated by the connected 
other arm of said level and move the tablet 
train are brought back to zero. The shifting 
into view, substantially as described. 
of the frame S" to effect this resetting opera 
3. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
tion can be accomplished either by moving 
bination, with a series of swinging arms each 
said frame positively by hand or by turning 
bearing a target or tablet at a point removed 
a cam-lever, S', Fig. 5, till the pressure of its 
from its pivot, of a series of reciprocating key 
cam-surface against the adjacent wall of th 
bars each bearing a stop normally out of en 
casing effects the desired movement. 
gagement with its arm, whereby when any 
It should be stated that the openings in the 
key-bar is pulled its stop will engage its cor 
frame S', through which the pinion-shaft S 
responding arm, the latter Will be turned, and 
passes, are made large enough to permit of 
the target or tablet borne by said lever brought 
the shifting of the said frame as above de 
to view, substantially as described. 
scribed. 
4. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
Should the machine be so frequently used 
bination, with a series of bell-crank levers 
before resetting as to cause the gear S' to make 
each of which bears upon one of its arms a tar 
a full revolution or more than a full revolu 
get or tablet, of a series of corresponding key 
tion, the stop S" will depress the spring-de 
bars each of which has a stop for co-operating 
tent S' and pass by the same, thus allowing 
with the other arm of its corresponding bell 
the gear to move on uninterruptedly, and 
crank lever, said stops being normally out of 115 
wlen subsequently it is desired to reset the 
engagement with their levers, but arranged to 
register back to its normal state, it is only 
positively engage and operate them when the 
necessary, in addition to moving the frame S' 
key-bars are pulled, substantially as described. 
so as to throw the gear S out of mesh with the 
5. In a cash register and indicator, the series 
pinion shaft S, that the spring detent S' be 
of bell-crank levers mounted upon a common 
depressed, so as to let the stop S" pass by on 
axis and having arms of different lengths, in 
s its first backward revolution and then arrest 
combination with the targets or tablets sup 
it on its next revolution. A pin, S', project 
ported by said arms and with the series of re 
ing above the frame S and connected to the 
ciprocating key-bars having stops arranged to 
spring-detent, may be employed as a means of 
operate upon the bell-crank levers, said stops 
operating said detent. 
being normally out of contact with the levers, 
Owing to the necessity of pulling more than 
but operating when the key-bars are pulled 
one bar or of pulling the same bar a number 
to positively engage and move them, substan 
of times to register a transaction involving an 
tially as described. 
amount greater than ten cents, I preferably 
6. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
employin practice three mechanisms substan 
bination, with a series of targets or tablets, 
tially like the oneherein shown and described 
each mounted on independent Swinging arms 
that is to say, one for use in dealing with 
at a point removed from its pivot, of a series 
of independent key-bars having stops normally 
amounts from one to nine cents, inclusive, an 
I 30 
I 25 
4C) 
50 
6 
65 
OC 
O 
380,542 
5 
75 
out of engagement with the swinging arms, tripping mechanism, substantially as de 
adapted, when pulled, to positively actuate said 
Scribed. 
14. The combination, with the money 
arms, and means, substantially as described, 
for automatically returning an exposed target 
drawer, of a movable top, or cover therefor 
preventing the opening of the drawer when 
or tablet to normal position upon the exposure 
pushed in, and devices, such as described, for 
of the next succeeding target or tablet, sub 
locking the movable top, substantially as set 
stantially as described. 
forth. 
7. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
15. The combination, with the money 
bination, with the series of bell-crank levers 
drawer, of a movable top for the same, devices, 
bearing the targets or tablets, of the series of 
such as described, forlocking the movable top, 
operating key-bars normally out of engage 
and means for shifting the top when released 
ment with the levers, arranged, when pulled, 
from the locking devices, so as to permit the 
to positively move the latter, the swinging re 
drawer to be opened, substantially as de 
tracting-rod arranged between the arms of the 
Scribed. 
bell-crank levers, and connections, substan 
16. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
tially as described, between the key-bars and 
bination, with a money-drawer, of a movable 
the retracting-rod for causing said rod to re 
top for securing the drawer when pushed in, 
turn to normal position any disturbed bell 
devices for locking the movable top, key-bars, 
crank lever upon the pulling of any key-bar, 
and intervening mechanism between the key 
substantially as described. 
bars and said locking devices, whereby upon 
8. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
the operation of a key-bar the movable top of 
bination, with the series of bell-crank levers 
the drawer will be released and the drawer 
bearing the targets or tablets, of the series of 
enabled to be opened, substantially as de 
key-bars normally out of engagement with but 
adapted, when pulled, to positively operate said 
Scribed. 
17. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
levers, the retracting-rod arranged between 
bination, with the money-drawer, of a mova 
the arms of the bell-crank levers, a vibratory 
ble top for the same, devices, such as described, 
rod adapted to be turned upon pulling any one 
for locking the movable top, means for shift 
of the key-bars, and connections, substantially 
ing the top when released from the locking 
as described, for causing the motion of the 
devices, and key-bars and intermediate mech 
vibratory bar to be communicated to the re 
anism for operating the locking devices, so as 
tracting-rod, substantially as described. 
to release the top of the money-drawer each 
9. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
time a key is pulled, substantially as described. 
bination, with targets or tablets mounted on 
18. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
Swinging arms of different lengths, of guides, 
bination, with the vibratory bar having the 
substantially as described, for giving lateral 
series of arms spirally arranged thereon, of a 
support to the tablets and preventing inter 
series of reciprocating key-bars provided with 
ference with each other when said tablets are 
lugs or projections for engaging the arms of 
swung into and out of view, substantially as 
said vibratory bar, whereby the vibratory bar 
described. 
is moved to a greater or less extent by the op 
10. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
eration of a key-bar, accordingly as the lug on 
bination of the independent bell-crank levers 
said key-bar is nearer to or farther from the 
bearing the targets or tablets, the reciprocat 
corresponding arm of the vibratory bar, sub 
ing key-bars, the vibratory bar connected so 
stantially as described. 
as to be operated upon by each of the key-bars 
19. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
independently, the retracting-rod common to 
bination, with a vibratory bar having a series 
all the bell-cranklevers, the sliding plate, piv 
of arms spirally arranged thereon, of the Series 
oted lever, rocking cam, and hinged latch 
of reciprocating key-bars provided with lugs 
forming the connection between the vibratory 
for engaging the arms of said vibratory bar, 
bar and the retracting-rod, substantially as 
and a registering mechanism actuated by said 
vibratory bar, substantially as described. 
11. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
20. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
bination, with the series of bell-crank levers 
bination, with a vibratory bar having the spi 
bearing the targets or tablets and all mounted 
rally-arranged arms, of the series of recipro 
upon a common axis, of the retracting-rod 
cating key-bars having lugs or projections, 
carried by arms which are also mounted upon 
as described, and the spring for returning the 
Said common axis, and means for operating 
bar to normal position after being operated 
said retracting-rod, substantially as described. 
upon by either of the key-bars, substantially 
12. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
bination, with the reciprocating key-bars, of 
as described. 
21. The combination, with the ratchet-wheel 
the bearings for the same near its opposite 
of the registering mechanism, of the vibratory 
ends and the swinging links to which it is 
bar having the spirally-arranged arms and 
pivoted, substantially as described. 
carrying a pawl for engaging with said ratchet, 
13. The combination, with the reciprocating 
and the series of key-bars having lugs or pro 
key-bars, of the vibratory bar T, the rock 
jections, substantially as described. 
shaft U", having an arm, U, operated from the 
22. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
said bar T, the bell, the bell-hammer, and 
described. 
- 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
2C, 
f 25 
O 
25 
35 
4) 
45 
SO 
65 
380,542 
bination, with a series of levers bearing the tar 
gets or tablets, the vibratory bar having the 
spirally-arranged arms, the registering mech 
anism, and connections between the bar and 
mechanism to actuate the latter, of the series 
of reciprocating key-bars having projections 
for engaging the target-levers and the vibra 
tory bar, substantially as described. 
23. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
bination of a series of levers bearing the tar 
gets or tablets, the vibratory bar having the 
spirally-arranged arms, the registering mech 
anism, the series of reciprocating key-bars, 
and means, substantially such as described, 
operated by the key - bars for returning to 
normal position the displaced tablet-bearing 
levers, substantially as described. 
24. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
bination of a series of bell-crank levers bear. 
ing the targets or tablets, the vibratory bar hav 
ing the spirally-arranged arms, the registering 
mechanism, the series of reciprocating key 
bars, the rod for bringing the bell-crank levers 
back to normal position, and connecting mech 
anism, Substantially such as described, between 
such rod and the key-bars, as set forth. 
25. In a cash register and indicator, the com 
bination of the series of reciprocating key. 
bars, the registering mechanism, and the se 
lies of targets or tablets actuated by the key 
bars, the money-drawer, a locking top for the 
Same, devices for locking said top, and connec 
tions, substantially as described, between said 
locking devices and the key-bars, whereby 
upon the pulling of a key-bar a target or tab 
let will be exposed to view, the registering 
mechanism will be operated, and the top of 
the money-drawer released, so as to enable the 
drawer to be opened, as set forth. 
26. The combination, with the movable frame 
carrying the gear-train and indicators and the 
spring for automatically resetting the regis 
tering mechanism, of the pinion-shaft with 
which the registering mechanism is thrown 
into and out of connection, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
27. A registering mechanism consisting of 
a train of gears mounted upon a movable frame, 
in combination with a pinion-shaft with which 
the first gear of the train engages, and a spring 
45 
50 
55 
operating to keep the gear in mesh with the 
pinion-shaft, substantially as described. 
28. A registering mechanism consisting of 
a gear-train mounted upon a movable frame, 
in combination with a pinion-shaft with which 
the first gear of the train engages, the spring 
operating to keep the gear-train in mesh With 
said pinion-shaft, and the cam-lever for moving 
the frame against the tension of the Spring to 
throw the gear out of connection with the 
pinion-shaft, as described. 
29. The combination, with the gear-train of 
the registering mechanism, of the Spring for 
resetting said mechanism, the lug or stop on 
the last gear of said train, and the spring-de 
tent with which said stop or lug engages, Sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
specified. 
30. In a cash-register, the combination, with 
the series of bell-crank levers pivoted upon a 
vertical shaft and having horizontal arms of 
different lengths to which tablets are attached, 
of a series of keys adapted to co-operate with 
one of the arms of the levers for causing their 
rotation on the shaft, Substantially as de 
scribed. 
31. In a cash-register, the combination, with 
a series of bell-cranklevers mounted on a ver 
tical shaft and having horizonal arms of dif 
ferent lengths to which tablets are attached, 
of a series of key-bars adapted to engage each 
of the levers for actuating them, a vibratory 
bar common to all the levers, and connections 
between the key and retracting bars for caus 
ing the operation of the latter by the opera 
tion of any of the former, substantially as de. 
Scribed. 
32. In a cash-register, the combination, with 
the series of bell-crank levers pivoted upon 
vertical axes, having arms of different lengths 
on which are mounted vertical arms of different 
lengths carrying tablets, of a series of keys 
adapted to co-operate with one of the arms of 
the levers for causing their rotation on the axes, 
substantially as described. 
90 
WALES ALDRICH, 
Witnesses: 
O. M. GOTTSCHALL, 
WILLIAM. H. RUSSELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380642.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 380,642, 
 
W. BANCROFT, 
WARPNG MACHINE, 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
O , 
44. 26, 4-42 
PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washinster, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
W. BANCROFT, 
WARPING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 380,642, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
 
z/26-22-1 
74 ?ea.4% 
22276 Z-622/2. 
* 64-272.2% 
/fsio (9Ebro. 
N. 'eters. Photo-Lithographer, washington, b.c. 
(No Model.) 
W. BANCROFT, 
WARPING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 380,642, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1888. 
<!----------------------- 
?&& 
 
N, affs. Phate-flagragher, Washisaster. B. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM BANCROFT, OF HOPEDALE, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO THE HOPEDALE MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PIACE. 
WARPNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 380,642, dated April 3, 1888. 
Application filed February 27, 1886. 
Serial No. 93,411. (No model.) 
To all avifhoir, it invay coice.772. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMBANCROFT, of 
Hopedale, county of Worcester, and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improvement. 
in Warping-Machines, of which the following 
description, in connection with the accompa 
nying drawings, is a specification, like letters 
on the drawings represe iting like parts. 
This invention has for its object to improve 
the construction of warping-machines in such 
manner that the heads of the beam may bein 
creased in diameter, so as to enable more yarn 
to be wound upon the beam than heretofore. 
In accordance with my invention the cylin 
der for rotating the beam is supported by jour 
mals formed between its ends, and power to ro 
tate the said cylinder is applied to it between 
its ends. To do this the cylinder is cut away 
or divided at one or more points between its 
ends, and in the said spaces are located not 
only the bearings for the cylinder, but the 
gearing to rotate it. At the portion of the 
cylinder so cut away I have provided small 
friction-rollers, the periphery of each coincid 
ing with that of the cylinder at the point where 
the mass of yarn on the beam touches the said 
cylinder, the said rollers serving to uniformly 
compact the yarn on the beam. 
The particular features in which my inven 
tion consists will be described in the following 
specification, and will be pointed out in the 
claims. 
Figure 1 is a rear end view of a warping 
machine embodying my invention, portions of 
the beam and cylinder being broken out to bet 
ter show other parts; Fig. 2, a view of the ma 
chine looking at it from the right of Fig. 3, a 
portion of the pulley and driving mechanism 
being broken out at the left; Fig. 3, a left-hand 
end view of Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a partial section 
of Fig. 2 in the line aca, looking to the left; 
and Fig. 5, a sectional detail taken at the left 
of the clutch in Fig. 2. 
The frame-work A is supplied with a series 
of rolls, i. 234, and weight or tension rolls 56, 
over and under which are passed the Warp 
threads a, taken from spools of a creel in usual 
manner. Back of the rolls 4, toward that end 
of the machine where the beam is situated, the 
yarns a are passed through slotted fingers a', 
the said fingers being arranged side by side on 
- 
The rod b at its lower end is provided with 65 
a rod, a, each finger being free to drop into 
the dotted-line position, Fig. 3, in case the 
yarn supporting it is broken or becomes very 
slack, and as soon as any finger drops, as in 55 
dotted lines, it is struck by the knocking-off 
plate b, attached to arms b' of a rock-shaft, b, 
the said arms having a third arm, b, to which 
is pivoted a rod, b', provided with a collar, b, 
below which is a spiral spring, l', the said rod 6o 
below the said spring passing through a guide, 
b', the lower end of which (see Fig. 2) is piv. 
oted at 13 to an elbow-lever, c', pivoted at 12 
on the cross-beam A'. 
a projection, 8, which is extended through the 
slot 9 in the cross-beam A* and supports the 
hook c, pivoted at 10 on the said elbow-lever 
c', the latter having pivoted to it the link d, 
one end of which is entered by the crank-pin 7o 
14 of a bevel-gear, 15, mounted on a stud, 16, 
Secured to the beam A. 
The gear 15 is rotated by the bevel-geare 
On the shaft e, having a bearing at 17 and ex 
tended through the sleevee, the said shaft 75 
having secured to it the pulleye'. The rod b* 
has a rising-and-falling motion as the gear 15 
is rotated, so that the knocking-off bar b is 
moved in the arc of a circle. 
yarns a, the movement of the said bar is uni. 
form; but if a finger drops into the dotted-line 
position, Fig. 3, it is struck by the said bar, 
and the upward movement of the latter is 
stopped; but the guide b continues to rise, 85 
compressing the spring l'. When the bar is 
is arrested by a finger, the projection 8 is not 
elevated sufficiently for the hook c to escape 
the projection 19 (see dotted lines, Fig. 2) at 
the rear side of the releasing-slide f, slotted at go 
20 and supported by a pin, 21, entering the 
said slot, and also by a guide, 22, bolted to the 
beam A', and the slide f so engaged by the 
said hook is drawn to the left from its position, 
Fig. 2, far enough to remove its outer end from 95 
the end of the curved arm f', attached to the 
end of an arm, f, of the rock-shaft 23, having 
end bearings in the frame-work A, the said 
shaft having attached to it other arms, 25, one 
only of which is shown in Fig. 3, which carry roo 
a treadle or foot-board, 26. 
When all the fingers at are held up by the 8o 
The rock-shaft 23 has attached arms 24 and 
O 
2 5 
3O 
35 
SO 
380,642 
. 
5 
27. The arm 27 is joined by link 28 with a 
loosely-pivoted lug, 29, of a lever, g, pivoted 
at g', and joined at its upper end to the rod g, 
having attached to it the belt-shipper g. The 
arm 24 has pivoted to it a link, 32, the lower 
end of which is forked, as shown by dotted 
lines, Fig. 3. This link near its forked end 
has pivoted upon it a brake-shoe, 33, which, 
when the slide f is moved to release the arm 
Iof', drops upon the pulley 18, fast on, and stops 
the shaft e. 
The link 28 and armf' are sufficiently heavy 
when the slide f is moved as described to turn 
the lever g and cause the belt-shipper g to 
place the usual driving-belt (not shown) on the 
loose pulley g'. The weighted lever facts to 
normally keep the slide fin the position shown 
by Fig. 2. 
The drop-fingers a have their fulcra between 
the roll 4 and the dents a of the usual reed or 
comb, the box of which is shown by the let 
tera. 
The warp-beam, composed of a body, B, and 
two large heads, B'B', rests with its body or 
the yarn thereon upon the cylinder, composed, 
as herein shown, of three sections-viz., a cen 
tral section, h, and two end sections, h., the 
hubs of the latter, by suitable set-screws, 80, 
(see Fig.1) being secured to the journals of the 
central section, h, after the said journals have 
been extended through the bearingsh, herein 
shown as sustained by brackets h", bolted to 
the frame-work. Each bearingh' has attached 
to it a bracket, 30, (see Fig. 4) that supports 
boxes for the journals of the small supporting 
cylinders 31, placed in the spaces between the 
portions h and h of the cylinder, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 4, to thus preserve the uniformity 
and density of the mass of yarn being wound 
on the said beam. 
It will be noticed that the entire cylinder is 
located between the heads BB, and in no way 
interferes with the heads as they rise and fall 
with the beam. 
Each section hat its inner side is provided 
with an internal gear, m, that is engaged by a 
pinion, m, on the shaft n, the said shaft hav 
ing attached to it the gear m, which is en 
gaged and rotated by the gear n, fast to the 
shafte', the rotation of the gearm through the 
connected gears described rotating the cylin 
der h h' l'. This cylinder, as will be seen, has 
not end journals, but is supported in bearings 
h between its ends, and hence the heads B may 
be made as large as desired, for they extend 
across the center of rotation of the cylinder. 
At times it is desired to rotate the cylinder at 
a fast and then at a slow speed. 
When the gear m on the shaft e' is driven 
by the belt on the pulley e", the cylinder is 
moved at its normal and fastest speed; but, if 
desired, the cylinder may be driven at a slower 
speed, as when started, by moving the belt 
upon the pulley n, keyed to the sleeve e, the 
65 latter at its inner end having attached to it 
45 
So 
the pinion in, that engages the gear in on the 
shaft in. The shaft in has fast on it a hub, 
36, on which is loosely mounted a clutch de 
vice, D, (shown separately in Fig. 5.) the said 
clutch device consisting of a disk, 38, having 
mounted upon it two pawls, 34 35, the points 
of which, when the shaft in is rotated in one 
direction, are acted upon by the notched hub 
36 to carry with the said shaft the said clutch 
device. The said clutch device has attached 
to it a pinion, n', which is in engagement with 
the gear m'. When the belt is on the pulley 
in, the pinion in drives the gear m' and the 
cylinder at its slowest speed. When the belt 
is on the pulley e, the pinion n is acted upon 
by the gear m, and the clutch to which the 
pinion is attached runs loosely on the shaft m'. 
The journals B of the yarn-beam B are 
placed loosely in and rise in the guide-grooves 
B of the frame as the yarn is wound upon the 
beam, the latter, when full, occupying the 
dotted-line position, Fig. 3. 
I claim 
1. Thesectional cylinder and bearings there 
for, located between its fixed central and end 
portions to support it, and independent sup 
porting-rolls located at each bearing, the pe 
riphery of the said rolls coinciding with that 
of the cylinder at such points, combined with 
a yarn-beam resting thereon and rotated 
thereby, the heads of the warp-beam overlap 
ping and crossing the center of rotation of 
the said cylinder, substantially as described. 
2. The cylinder supported in bearings lo 
cated between its ends and the supporting 
rolls 31, combined with the warp-beam, the 
said rolls supporting the Warp-beam or the 
yarn thereon opposite the bearings for the cyl 
inder, substantially as described. 
3. The cylinder composed of the fixed cen 
tral part, h, and the fixed end portions, of like 
diameter, separated from the said central por. 
tion and provided with internal teeth, m, com 
bined with the pinion m', gears m and m, con 
stituting fast-speed mechanism, and the sleeve 
e', attached pinion n, gears in and n, and clutch 
D, constituting slow-speed mechanism, to drive 
the cylinder at different speeds, substantially 
as described. 
4. The pivoted fingers a, adapted to be con 
nected to the warp-threads, the knock-off bar 
b, and arms b', rock-shaft b, arm b, the rod b', 
spring, and guide, combined with the hook c, 
means to raise and lower the said guide and 
reciprocate the hook, the slidef, armsff", 
stopping devices, as described, and rock-shaft 
23, to operate the said stopping devices, sub 
stantially as described. 
Intestimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM BANCROFT, 
Witnesses: 
G. W. GREGORY, 
C. M. CONE. 
9O 
CO 
IOS 
I Cu 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380742.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BERKEY. 
METHOD OF MAKING WOODEN BOWLs, 
 
N. PeFERS, Photo-Lithogra 
pher, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JULIUS BERKEY, OF GRAND RAPIDs, MICHIG AN. 
M ETH O D O F M A K N G W O OD EN B O WLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 380,742, dated April 10, 1888. 
Application filed July 27, 1887. Serial No. 245,470, 
(No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JULIUS BERKEY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of the 
city of Grand Rapids, county of Kent, and 
State of Michigan, have invented a new and 
useful Method of Making a Wooden Bowl or 
Bowl-Shaped Shelf, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to wooden bowls for 
all ordinary purposes, and particularly to a 
bowl-shaped shelf or stretcher to be used in 
connection with and as a part of the furniture 
tripod described in my application for a pat 
ent thereon, filed January 21, 1887. 
The object of my invention is to construct a 
bowl of any desired depth from thin stock, 
simplifying the manufacture, and saving the 
lumber that is wasted when the bowlis turned 
from Stock of the same thickness as the fin 
ished bowl. I attain this object by the con 
struction shown in the accompanying draw. 
ings, which shows the bowl-shaped shelf used 
in said tripod, and in which 
Figure 1 shows the stock cut into suitable 
shape. Fig. 2 shows the central portion cut 
out, removed, inverted, and placed below. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view of the stock after the 
central portion is cut out, but before it is re 
moved. Fig. 4 is a sectional view of the same, 
showing this central part removed and at 
tached to the lower surface of the other part. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional view of the same after the 
inner concave surface has been turned; and 
Fig. 6 is a top view of the completed shelf. 
Ain Fig. 1 is the stock from which the bowl 
is made. It is a circular piece of ordinary 
lumber of any desired thickness. I custom 
arily use inch-boards; but thicker or thinner 
lumber may be used, depending upon the size 
and depth of the bowl and the number of 
pieces to be cut out and put together. The 
stock having been selected, the central por 
tion (shown by C in Fig. 2) is then cut out, 
leaving the external annular part, B. This 
cutting is done with a saw so made and set 
at such an angle to the wood that it will cut a 
bevel of the same angle all the way around. 
Eshows one of the surfaces left by this cut 
ting, and F the other. A cylindrical socket, 
D, is cut into the bottom of the part C for the 5o 
reception of a screw-threaded shaft, as here 
inafter described. The part C is then re 
moved and attached, in any suitable manner, 
firmly to the bottom surface of B, in such a 
way as to cover the opening left by its re- 55 
moval, and in the form shown in Fig. 4. Prob 
ably gluing is the best method of attachment 
in most cases, but other means may be used. 
The necessary degree of strength in this at 
tachment depends upon the use to be made of 6o 
the finished bowl. This leaves an annular 
portion of the upper surface of C in contact 
with a similar part of the lower surface of B, 
the width of the part so in contact depending 
upon the angle of the bevel and determining 65 
the possible thickness of the walls of the bowl. 
Having assumed this shape, the bowl can noW 
be turned in any desired form, upon both its 
outer and inner surfaces, in the same way as 
if the stock were of twice its actual thickness, 70 
as shown in Fig. 5, and can be carved and or 
namented, as shown in Fig. 6, or other Wise, as 
thought best. 
The socket D is made of proper size to re- 
ceive the screw-threaded end of a revolving 75 
shaft, and thus cause the bowl in process of 
manufacture to revolve with it. By provid 
ing such shafts upon different machines the 
bowl may be turned upon one, smoothed on 
another, stained on another, and polished on 
another, if all these different processes are 
used, without any further means of attach 
ment to the different machines, except such 
socket. 
I have shown and described a bowl con 
structed by once cutting the stock, so that 
there are two strata of wood. It is obvious, 
however, that by cutting out of the center a 
larger part than is shown in the dra Wings, 
and then in the same manner cutting out the 
center of the part so removed, and attaching 
the three parts together, as is described, a 
bowl can be made one-half deeper than that 
described; or, if desired, the same process of 
cutting can be repeated three or more times, 95 
increasing each time the depth of the bowl 
and the number of strata of wood it contains, 
but not increasing the amount of lumber used. 
- 
2 
380,742 
Having thus described my invention, what I surface of the part from which it was cut in 
turning the bowl from the block so formed, 
claim to have invented, and desire to secure by such a manner as to cover opening left, and then Io 
Letters Patent, is- 
The herein - described method of making substantially as described. 
JULIUS BERKEY, 
5 wooden bowls and similar articles, which con- 
sists in sawing out from a board a circular 
portion with beveled edges, attaching the up- 
per surface of the part so cut out to the lower 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR. C. DENISON, 
GEORGE CLAPPERTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380842.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
J. R. WILLIAMSON & W. W., HICKIES. 
APPARATUS FOR EXAMINING ORES 
No. 380,842, 
Patented Apr. 10, 1888. 
WITNESSES: 
fi A. 
a 
- 
 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
BY (a 
s- E. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN R. WILLIAMSON, OF SEATTLE, WASHINGTON TERRITORY, AND WIL 
w 
LIAM W. HICKIES, OF OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA. 
APPARATUS FOR EXAMINING O RES 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 380,842, dated April 10, 1888. 
Application filed March 1, 1887. Serial No. 229,346, 
(No model.) 
I5 
Io ing a part thereof, in which 
To all, u?ion, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN R. WILLIAM 
SON, of Seattle, in the county of King, Wash 
ington Territory, and WILLIAM W. HICKIES, 
5 of Oakland, in the county of Alameda, and the 
State of California, have invented a new and 
Improved Apparatus for Examining Ores, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the annexed drawings, form 
Figure 1 represents an apparatus slightly 
modified for examining rocks in situ, and Fig. 
2 shows an apparatus slightly modified for ex 
amining detached portions of rock. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in both views. 
The object of our invention is to provide an 
apparatus for examining rocks to determine 
whether they contain metallic ores. 
Our invention consists in the combination 
of a battery, a magneto-electric telephone-re 
ceiver connected with the battery, and wire 
conductors attached to the telephone and bat 
tery. 
In carrying out our invention we connect 
with one pole of the battery A one terminal 
of a magneto electric telephone-receiver, B, of 
the usual description, by means of a wire, a. 
The remaining pole of the battery is connected 
by a conductor, C, with a brush, D, provided 
with a suitable handle, as shown in Fig. 1, or 
with a metallic plate, E, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The remaining terminal of the telephone-re 
ceiver B is connected by a flexible conductor, 
35 C, with a brush, D', provided with a suitable 
handle. 
When our improved apparatus is used in 
examining rocks in situ, the two brushes DD", 
forming the terminals of the conductors con 
4o nected with the telephone and battery, are 
drawn along upon the face of the rock, while 
the telephone B is held to the ear of the oper 
If the rocks contain metals, they con 
ator. 
duct the current, and the movements of the 
25 
55 
brushes along the rough face of the rock pro- 45 
duce variations in the current flowing through 
the circuit, which cause the diaphragm of the 
telephone to vibrate and produce audible 
sounds; but when the rock contains no miner 
als it is practically an insulator, and no sounds 
are heard in the telephone. 
In examining detached portions of rock the 
operation is similar to that just described. 
By touching the rock placed upon a conduct 
ing-plate, E, with the brush D', it may be de 
termined whether the rock contains metals or 
metallic ores by listening to the telephone, as 
before. If the rock contains metal or metal 
lic ores, sounds will be heard in the telephone; 
but if it contains no metal no sound will be 
produced. 
It is obvious that instead of employing the 
conducting-plate E, in connection with one of 
the brushes, we may place the fragments of 
rock to be examined upon a bed of insulating 65 
material and touch each specimen with the 
two brushes D D. 
We do not limit or confine ourselves to the 
employment of the ordinary telephone- re 
ceiver, as we may employ any electric trans- 7o 
lating device which will indicate the passage 
of the current. For example, the operator 
may place the conductors on his tongue, and 
the passage of the current due to the comple 
tion of the circuit by a metallic ore will be no 
ticed by the Sensations produced by the cur 
rent upon his tongue; or, we may employ the 
electro-chemical method, placing between the 
terminals of the conductor a paper saturated 
with moist salt, which will be decomposed by 
the passage of the current, producing visible 
marks on the paper, or We may employ an or 
dinary galvanometer. 
'. Although We have described these various 
Ways of determining whether the circuit is 
complete and the current is flowing, we prefer 
to use a telephone-receiver, as it is portable, 
easily managed, and effective. 
75 
 
380,842 
adapted to contact with the ore, and a tele 
phone-receiver interposed between the ends of 15 
one conductor, substantially asset forth. 
JOHN R. WILLIAMSON. 
WILLIAM W. HICKIES. 
Witnesses to the signature of John R. Wil 
GEO. M. HoPKINS, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
Witnesses to the signature of William W. 
liamson: 
Hickies: 
DAVID STODDART, 
WELLES WHITMORE. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
we claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent 
1. An apparatus for examining ores, con 
S sisting in the battery, the wire C, connected to 
one terminal thereof and having a metallic 
brush, D, the Wire a, connected to the other 
terminal, the telephone-receiver B, cnnected 
to the wire a, and having a wire, C, provided 
Io with a metallic brush, D, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. In an apparatus for examining ores, elec 
tric conductors, the terminals of which are 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US380943.txt	(No Model.) 
O, B, SHALLENBERGER 
WOLT AMMETER. 
No. 380,943, 
Patented Apr. 10, l888. 
 
S28)-ti-vesses. 
6 3. as,A. 2 
ae-y 
w 
53 ?ki-8- slitez 11 co, 
> 
5 
O 
To all tufton, it togy conce.77: 
Be it known that I, OLIVER, B. SHALLEN 
BERGER, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Rochester, in the county of Beaver and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Volt-Ammeters, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to the class of devices 
employed for indicating the current upon any 
given circuit; and the object is to provide con 
venient means for measuring the current or 
the difference of potential at will upon a volt 
meter of some well-known construction. 
The invention will be described in connec 
tion with the accompanying drawing, which 
illustrates an organization of apparatus adapt 
ed to carry out the invention. 
Referring to the figure, A represents a gen 
erator or other suitable source of alternating, 
pulsatory, or intermittent currents; and LL, 
conductors leading from the respective poles 
thereof to a work-circuit, W, which may be 
connected there with either directly or through 
the coils of a converter, C, in a manner well 
understood. The current which traverses the 
conductor L, for instance, is of necessity in 
such a system of considerable amount, and to 
measure this current conveniently it is pro 
posed by this invention to employ a converter, 
C, having its primary coil p' included in the 
direct circuit of the conductor L. The sec 
ondary coil s' has its respective terminals con 
nected by the conductors 1 and 2 with con 
tact-points a? a. A switch, S, is applied to 
these contact-points, the two arms s' and s of 
which are respectively connected by the con 
ductors 3 and 4 with the binding-posts e'e' of 
a suitable voltmeter-as, for instance, a Car 
dew voltmeter, F, of well-known construction. 
By placing the switch S in contact with the 
points a? a the terminals of the coils will be 
connected through the voltmeter, and thus the 
difference of potential will be measured. 
The coil p' is of few convolutions relative to 
the convolutions of the coils, the proportions 
being determined by the maximum current in 
Li Land the range of the instrument used for 
indicating the electro-motive force. The dif. 
ference of potential at the ends of the coils is 
dependent on and nearly proportional to the 
25 
4.O 
45 
59 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIVER B. SHALLENBERGER, OF ROCHESTER, ASSIGNOR Te). THE WESTING 
HOUSE, ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WO la A.V. V. E.E.R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 380,943, dated April 20, 1888. 
Application filed September 1, 1887. Serial No. 248,467. (No model.) 
current passing through p if the coils are 
properly proportioned with respect to each 
other and the iron core. 
It will be understood that the indicator E 
need not be, properly speaking, a voltmeter, 
but may be any alternate-current indicator 
suitable for measuring small currents-as, for 
example, a Siemens electro - dynamometer. 
The coils' must be wound to confine the indi 
cations within the limits of the instrument em 
ployed. 
In some instances it may be desirable to em 
ploy the same instrument for measuring the 
difference of potential between the conductors 
L and L, and for this purpose a second con 
verter, C, has its primary coil p" connected 
with the respective conductors L and L, and 
its secondary coils", which is of few convolu 
tions relative to the coil p", connected by con 
ductors 5 and 6 with two contact-points, cand 
a', respectively. The switch S may be moved 
so that its arms s and s will rest upon the 
points a and a', as shown in the drawing, 
under which circumstances the difference of 
potential between the terminals of the coils 
will be measured by the voltmeter F, and this 
will be directly proportional to the difference 
of potential between the conductors L and L. 
The converter C is employed for the purpose 
of reducing the difference of potential to a 
degree convenient for measurement by the 
voltmeter F. 
claim as my invention 
75 
1. An ammeter for alternating or pulsatory 
currents, consisting of the combination, with a 
voltmeter, of an electric converter having its 
primary coil connected in series with the 
work-circuit and its secondary coil connected 
through said voltmeter, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with a source of alter 
nating or pulsatory electric currents and a 
work-circuit therefor, of an electric converter 
having its primary coil connected in series 
with the work-circuit, a Cardew voltmeter, 
and means for placing the same in the circuit 
of the secondary coil of said converter. 
3. The combination, with a source of alter 
nating or pulsatory current and its circuit, of 
an electric converter having its primary coil IOO 
95 
90 
2 
380,943 
connected in series with the Work-circuit of scribed my name this 1st day of July, A. D. 
the Source, a second converter having its pri- 1887. 
OLIVER B. SHALLENBERGER. 
mary coil connected in multiple arc with said 
Work-circuit, a voltmeter, and means for plac 
5 ing said voltmeter in circuit with the second- 
alry coil of either of said converters. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub- 
W. D. UPTEGRAFF, 
CHARLES A. TERRY. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381043.txt	(No Model) 
No. 381,043, 
A/G.2 
S. M. WAUCLAIN. 
HOISTING TACKLE, 
Patented Apr. 10, 1888. 
Witresses. 
Zvozvezczor, 
2.3%. 32 
5amzeez. W. J/azcate 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
 
TED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL M. VAUCLAIN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
Hot STING-TACKLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 381,043, dated April 10, 1888. 
Application filed December 12, 1887. Serial No. 257,653. (No model.) 
, 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
15. 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Beit known that I, SAMUELM. WAUCLAIN, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
5 certain Improvements in Hoisting-Tackle, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to so form the 
connection between the hook and bearing 
plate of a hoisting-block as to always insure 
?o freedom and ease both in the universal swing 
and in the swiveling movement of the hook, 
my especial improvement being the provision 
of a ball or roller bearing between the head 
of the hook and its socket. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of my improved hoisting-block. 
with the load suspended therefrom. Fig. 2 is 
sectional view, on a larger scale and partly in 
elevation, of sufficient of the hook and block to . 
2O illustrate my invention; and Fig. 3 is a-plan. 
view of the bearing for the head of the hook, 
with the cover-plate removed. 
. 
Hoisting-tackle has heretofore been made 
with universal swing and swiveling connec 
25 tions between the suspension-hook and the 
block carrying the same, the hook having a 
rounded head adapted to a rounded socket in 
the bearing-plate of the block. I have found 
by experience, however, that in a very short 
3o time the wear of the parts causes such a snug 
fit between the head of the block and its socket 
that it is impossible to turn the hook inde 
pendently of the block either with a heavy 
or light load, the turning of the hook having 
35 theeffect of twisting the hoisting-chains around 
each other, thus readering it impossible to 
raise or lower the hook until the chain is un 
twisted. . This is especially annoying where 
it is desired to lift and adjust large and heavy 
4o articles-such, for instance, as the flasks used 
in casting the larger parts of locomotives, sta 
tionary and marine engines-or where heavy 
parts of machinery have to be set in place on 
the frame and accurate adjustmentis required. 
I overcome the difficulty by constructing 
the bearing of the hook in the following man 
ne Referring to Figs. 2 and 3, AA are the side 
frames of the block, supporting a cross-bar, B, 
5o which has a central orifice, b, for the reception 
of the shank of the hook, the upper portion, 
d, of this orifice being enlarged in cup shape, 
so as to present in section a segment of a cir 
cle. I form in this cup-shaped portion dan 
45 
 
Witnesses: 
. 
. 
. 
DAVIS H. BANSELL, 
CHAs. E. WALL. 
. 
. 
 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
. . 
annular groove, e, in which I place a number 55 
of small spheres, f, which are free to revolve 
in any direction. 
The hook D has a head, g, the under side. 
of which is in the form of a segment of a 
sphere and of about the same radius as the 6o 
sides of the cup d, the top of the head g being 
preferably rounded in order to increase the 
strength of the head. 
. 
. 
I have found that by the above-described 
construction I can not only dispense with the 65 
use of oil on the bearing, but can at all times, 
whether with a heavy or light load, rotate or 
swing the hook with the greatest ease, so that 
- 
where it formerly took six men to turn and 
adjust in position a large casting-flask one 7o. 
man can now do the work quite as effectively. 
. 
. 
I cover the head of the hook with a cap, E, 
which is secured in any suitable manner to the 
cross-bar B, and prevents dust and dirt from . . 
. 
gaining access to the joint between the head 75 
of the hook and the cross-bar, the cap also 
serving to prevent the hook from jumping from . 
. 
its bearings. 
In some cases I provide the cap with a set 
screw, i, at the top, as shown by dotted lines 8o 
in Fig. 2, so as to regulate the amount of ver. 
tical play of the hook. 
. . . 
The upper ends of the side frames, A, of . 
the block carry a shaft for the chain-pulleys 
in m, as usual. 
- I claim as my invention- 
a bearing having a cup-shaped socket with a 
groove therein, a series of spheres having a 
bearing in said groove, and a hook having a 9C 
rounded head which rests upon the spheres and 
is free to turn and to rock thereon, all substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination of the supporting-bar 
and the swinging head swiveled thereon with 95. 
the cap E, secured to the bar B, and occupy 
ing such a position in respect to the head of 
the hook as to prevent said head from jump. 
ing from its bearings, all substantially as de. 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
S. M. VAUCLAIN. 
1. The combination, in a hoisting-block, of . 
. 
. . . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
w 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
I do 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381143.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 381,143. 
J. A. KIMBALL. 
DENTAL TOOL HOLDER, 
Patented Apr. 17, 1888. 
  
 
 
Az- IIEEEI-IEEEEEEE WHEIHEITHE 
IIIHEIR FHLT IIIHi? films IIIT II?iNEIILLIrLITHIS 
gigs 
I 
Kr 
z' 7 A 
 
N, PETERS rheto-Lithographer, Yashington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPH ALBERT KIMBALL, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
DENTAL-Tool HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 381,143, dated April 17, 1888, 
. . 
Application filed August 19, 1887. Serial No. 247,347. (No model.) 
. 
. 
w 
. 
' 
8 
- 
' . 
. 
. . 
O 
2O 
IS 
25 
specification. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JosEPH ALBERT KIM 
BALL of the city and county of New York, in 
the State of New York, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Improvement in Dental 
Tool Holders, adapted to serve also as parti 
tions in drawers, of which the following is a 
I make the tool-holders in convenient 
lengths-say eight (8) inches--with a narrow, 
upper edge smoothly waved, scalloped, or 
notched, so as to serve conveniently in keep 
ing in place instruments laid transversely 
thereto by receiving them in the several 
notches or scallops. 
The device may be used for holding pens, 
artists' brushes, and various other articles... if 
esteem it especially useful for dentists' use in 
retaining the several small tools used in filling 
teeth and analogous operations on the teeth. 
I Will describe it as being so applied. It may 
stand alone on a work-table or other support. 
ing-surface, and may hold securely in place 
the several instruments as they shall be suc 
cessively laid down, one end of each resting on 
the table or other support and the other end, 
or another portion of the tool, lying in one of 
the notches. 
The holders are more especially intended to 
serve as partitions extending across the inte 
riors of drawers or other shallow boxes. I 
provide means for conveniently adjusting the 
length and for matching the ends firmly against 
the perpendicular faces of the interior of the 
drawer. 
I provide for varying the length by making 
the device in two or more sections slotted lon. 
gitudinally and connected so that they may 
be adjusted to various positions longitudi. 
In what i esteem the most complete devel 
opment of the invention the under side is 
coated with soft vulcanized rubber or analo 
gous soft material having high frictional quali 
ties, which enable it to retain its place with 
out slipping under any slight strains. The 
outer end of each section is equipped with a 
point, which on its being thrust outward, so as 
to press it firmly against the interior of the 
So drawer, engages therewith and aids to hold the 
device in place. The interior of the drawer 
4o nally, 
45 
3C 
35 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Y 
. 
. 
. 
, 
may be grooved vertically to adapt it there 
for; but my device will hold with considerable 
force on having its ends pressed forcibly out 
ward without such previous preparation of the 55 
engaging-surface. The points at the ends of 
the sections correspondin height with the 
slots which extend longitudinally along the 
main bodies of the several sections. When I 
choose to introduce the holder as a transverse 6o 
holder, by which I mean one holder arranged 
transversely or T wise to another holder, one . . . 
end of the transverse holder abuts against the 
interior of the drawer and the point at the 
other end engages in a slot in the previously: 65 . . 
placed holder. The transverse holder is set 
firmly in place by the same means as the prin 
cipal holder-to wit, by placing it in position 
and extending it lengthwise. I provide for 
holding each pair of sections firmly in their 70 
proper positions relatively to each other when 
adjusted. 
. 
. 
The accompanying drawings form a part of 
this specification, and represent what I con 
sider the best means of carrying out the inven- 75. 
tion. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing the 
device in use as a partition in a drawer. The 
remaining figures are on a larger scale. Fig. . 
2 is a cross-section showing a dental tool laid 8o 
across and held against rolling by my tool . 
. . 
holder. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of one with 
a cross-section of another standing at right 7 
angles thereto. Fig. 4 is a corresponding plan 
view. Figs. 5 and 6 show a modification. Fig. 85 
5 is a side view, with a cross-section through. 
the adjacent portion, of a transversely - ar 
ranged holder. Fig. 6 is a vertical section on 
the linea a in Fig. 5. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre-go 
sponding parts in all the figures where they 
A is a drawer adapted to accommodate den. 
tists tools. 
. 
B'B' are two sections of my tool-holder, each 95. 
widened at one end, as indicated by Bi, and . . . 
equipped at that end with a point, b. The 
wide portions at the ends are adapted to af. 
ford lateral support and hold up the sections 
B'B' in their proper vertical positions, how too. 
ever they may be loaded with tools. A slot, 
c, extends lengthwise of each section. The 
OCCUI. 
. . . 
. . 
. . 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
- . 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
38l43 
. 
two sections are held together by screws C, 
extending through the slots and receiving 
milled thumb-nuts D. 
E is a sheet of soft vulcanized rubber, ap 
plied by a solution of rubber in naphtha, or 
other suitable cement, e, covering the whole 
or principal portion of the lower face of each 
section B*. The sheet E may be pure or va 
riously mixed. It may be preferable for sonne 
reasons to have a fabric embodied in it. This 
layer forms a soft face to match closely and to 
avoid scratching or anywise marring the sur 
face on which it may be used. Another and 
especially important function performed by 
this bottom layer is to prevent slipping. In 
dia-rubber and its compounds possess great 
frictional qualities. A moderate weight in the 
metal part resting on this rubber facing main 
E. its place with great tenacity by its fric 
O 
For use on a bracket, table or other open 
support, the device may be set in any desired 
condition, either its most extended or most 
contracted or intermediate condition, prefer 
ably with the notches in the two sections coin 
ciding with each other. For use as a partition 
in a drawer the nuts D are slackened, and after 
being introduced into the drawer in the re 
quired position the sections are moved longi 
tudinally on each other until the points b at 
the ends of each are forced into strong con 
tact with the inner faces of the drawer. Then 
holding it in position with one hand the thumb 
nuts D are tightened with the other and the 
device is firmly set. If a transverse partition 
is to be introduced, the same means for intro 
ducing it are employed, the difference being 
simply that only one end of the transverse 
holder will engage with the inner face of the 
drawer, and the other end, belonging to the 
other section thereof, will engage in the slot 
c of the holder or partition previously set. 
In any of the conditions in which my holder 
is adjusted for use it is capable, first, of stand 
ing firmly on its feet supported on the bottom. 
of the drawer or on the work-table or other 
plane support; second, its rubber or analogous 
base gives it strong frictional qualities for 
keeping itself in place; third, if it is intro 
duced in a drawer its pointsb engage with the 
inner face of the drawer and hold the device 
very firmly, so that it may serve both as a 
tool-holder by allowing the tools to rest in its 
notches in the same manner as when it is used 
on an open table, and also to serve as a parti 
tion in the drawer for holding loose tools or any 
materials in separate compartments; fourth, 
when it is used as a transverse partition one 
of these points engages conveniently in the 
slot in the previously-set holder or partition. 
I have represented in Figs. 5 and 6 a modi 
fication in which the broad ends Bk are omit 
ted, and in lieu thereof a continuous web or 
foot is extended along the bottom of each sec 
tion. When the two sections are applied to 
gether, the foot of one section extends in one 
direction and the foot of the other section ex 
The two feet 
tends in the opposite direction. 
form together a reliable support, holding the 
device with the same general effect as the 
broad ends B*. The slots and the pinching 
screws and nuts may be the same in this form 
of the invention as in that first described. The 
ends cut under, as shown, facilitate the match 
ing of one pair of sections transversely against 
another pair of sections, so as to form a parti 
tion and a transverse partition in a drawer. 
Other modifications may be made in the de 
tails without departing from the principle or 
sacrificing the advantages of the invention. I 
propose in ordinary cases to make the main 
body of each part of sheet steel, brass, or other 
rolled metal of proper thickness. They may 
be conveniently made by dies. The broad por 
tions Bk at the ends may be made ornamental, 
of soft metal or other suitable material, cast in 
place or otherwise affixed on the sheet-metal 
bodies. The points b may be formed sepa 
rately and inserted in holes produced in the 
separately-cast ends B*; but this is not essen 
tial. In the form shown in Figs. 5 and 6 the 
dies may be so shaped as to form the points b 
in one with the bodies. 
I can cast the whole of each part B. B. b 
complete in one piece. In such case I would 
make the body B' thicker than would be nec 
essary if it were of rolled metal, and having 
obtained sufficient weight by the metal in the 
body I could very much reduce the quantity 
of metal in the end B*. 
However the parts are made and however 
they may be varied in proportion, the whole 
should be finished smoothly except on the bot 
tom. I prefer that the bottoms be left rough 
in order to facilitate the adhesion of the rub 
ber or other bottom facing, E. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The extensible tool-holder described, hav 
ing a notched upper edge and a broad base and 
slotted body, with holding means D, adapted 
to serve the double functions of a tool-holder, 
and an adjustable partition for a drawer, as 
herein specified. 
2. The two-part tool-holder B'B' and hold. 
ing means D, each part equipped with ends B 
b, adapted to engage with the interior of a 
drawer, as herein specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand, at New York city, this 16th day of Au 
gust, 1887, in the presence of two subscribing 
. . 
. 
witnesses. 
- 
JOSEPH ALBERT KIMBALL. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. JoHNSTONE, 
M. F. BOYLE. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
65 
7.) 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
Io5 
O 
I I5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381243.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 381,243, 
  
 
 
W. C. HOLMES. 
LEVELING INSTRUMENT, 
Patented Apr. 17, 1888. 
SC 
YG 
N See? 
 
 
e 
M 
fire 
?pigle 
gar 
Up 
--/- miss 
3rventor: 
Willian C -Holmes. 
S$ Mid- &lftovic 
N. PettRS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. HOLMES, OF ATLANTA, GEORGIA. 
LEVELING-INSTRUMENT. 
SPECIFICATION iorming part of Letters Patent No. 381,243, dated April 17, 1888. 
Application filed November 19, 1887. Serial No. 255,664. (No model.) 
25. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. HoLMES, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Atlanta, 
in the county of Fulton and State of Georgia, 
5 have invented a new and useful Leveling-In 
strument; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
Io use the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to letters or figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
The general class of leveling-instruments to 
the handle, as shown in Fig.1, in order to avoid 
the necessity of making the hole through the 
ball of so large a size as to allow the handle to 
pass through. The spindle and ball might be 55 
made integrally; but I prefer the construction 
shown, for reasons that will be apparent, it be-, 
ing only necessary that the ball, the spindle, 
the pivot, and the ring be rigidly connected. 
The ball D is in the spherical recess partly 6d 
formed in the plate E, which forms the apex 
of the tripod, and partly in the cap F. The 
plate E is preferably formed of metal and the 
cap F of wood or other material, the two being 
bolted or screwed together. Somewhat more 65 
I5 which this invention relates is that used for than one-half of the spherical opening should 
running ditches and terracing and leveling be in the part E, in order that the leather or 
land; but it may be applied to instruments for other elastic ring, d, which is inserted in an 
other purposes, the object being to cheapen equatorial groove around the ball and slightly. 
the construction and to make it more substan- projecting beyond its periphery, may have a 7o 
2o tial and more simple and correct in its opera 
bearing in that part E. The ball is cushioned 
tion. 
at its bottom on the washer d, which is inter 
The invention therefore consists of certain 
posed between it and the bottom of the hemi 
details, which will be hereinafter fully de 
spherical opening in the plate E. In order to: 
scribed. 
make this washer more readily conform to the 75 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
spherical shape that it assumes, V-shaped 
view of the instrument, showing most of the 
openings g are formed in its outer edge, as 
Fig. 2 is a vertical section through 
details. 
shown in Fig. 3. Openings Hare made at the 
the center, showing those details of construc 
top and bottom of the spherical casing EF of 
tion that are not shown in Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 is 
the ball of sufficient size to permit the adjust 8o 
3o a view of the washer, of leather or other elas 
ment of the surface on which the level rests, 
an approximate adjustment being previously 
tic material, that forms a cushion for the spher 
ical joint by which the instrument is adjusted 
made by the legs of the tripod. The washer 
and held in position. 
d, the ring G, and the cap F produce a light 
In the figures, like reference-marks indicat 
but certain friction between the ball D and its 85 
35 ing corresponding parts in the several views, 
casing EF, that permits it to be easily moved 
A is a level, preferably a spirit-level, through 
and causes it to remain stationary when ad 
which is a hole, a. In one end of this opening is 
justed. 
the small aperture or sight-hole B, and in the 
The operation of this device is as follows: 
other end the thin horizontal bar B. The bar 
By the legs of the tripod the instrumentis first 9o 
o B is sufficient for leveling purposes; but un 
adjusted to an approximately-level position, 
der some circumstances a similar bar may be 
after which, by moving the handle on the spin 
inserted in a vertical position also, as will be 
dle Cand by turning the level to different an 
hereinafter described. The level A turns on 
gles across it, the surface on which the level 
the pivot c and rests on the top of the ring or 
rests may be brought to a perfectly-level posi-95 
The pivote and the ring care carried 
tion and the level may be turned in any direc 
tion, and by sighting through the aperture a 
by and are preferably made integrally with the 
spindle C. The spindle C has a slight taper 
horizontal plane will be indicated. . . 
. 
and fits a corresponding hole through the ball 
. 
This instrument might be adapted to a more. 
D, as shown in Fig. 2. The spindle C may be 
extended use by adding a compass, attaching IOO . . 
5o continued downwardly a sufficient distance to 
it to the level, and by inserting a thin vertical - 
form a handle; but it is preferable to attach 
strip, crossing the strip B, thus adapting the 
45 disk c. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
f 
 
2 
381,243 
2. In a leveling-instrument, the ball D, Sup 
ported and secured by the plate E and the cap 
F, said plate and cap being attached to each 
other by thumb-screws, the leather washer d, 2O 
to give a holding-surface to said ball, the spin 
dle C, secured to the ball D, for the purpose of 
adjusting the said ball, and the handle attached 
to said spindle, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
- 
WM. C. HOLMES. 
Witnesses: ". 
ALBERT A. WOOD, 
A. P., WOOD. 
instrument to use inrunning lines or determin 
ing horizontal angles; but it is intended to be 
used, generally, as a leveling-instrument, and 
the preferred construction is that above de 
5 scribed. It may, however, have a universal 
joint of any known construction without a de 
viation from the spirit of this invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
1. In a leveling-instrument, the ball D, pro 
vided with a passage through it for the recep 
tion of the spindle C, the spindle Chaving a sup 
port for the level at its upper end, and the 
I5 handle attached to the lower end of said spin 
dle, for the purpose set forth. 
Io Patent of the United States, is 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381343.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 381,343, 
J. R. DE MIER, 
ELECTRIC TRAIN SIGNALING APPARATUS, 
. 
Patented Apr. 17, 1888. 
A 77. 
A2 verazor. 
Azz72esses' 
A 4%. 
 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
.4 f;4.2% 
6 
2.e4 4 
y. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN R. DE MIER, OF LAs CRUCES, TERRITORY OF NEW MEXICO. 
ELECTRIC TRAIN-SIGNALING APPARATUS. . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No,381,343, dated April 17, 1888. 
- 
Application filed March 10, 1888. Serial No. 266,785. (No model.) 
1 
- 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN R. DE MIER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Las 
Cruces, in the county of Doia Afia, Territory 
5 of New Mexico, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Electric Train-Signal 
ing Apparatus; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
Io skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention consists in a stationary elec 
tric coupling-section fastened to the hood-end 
extension of a railroad-car roof, a detachable 
15 electric coupling-section held in said stationary 
section, and a conductor's circuit-closer or 
switch attached to the same and adapted for 
connection with the pull-rope. 
The object of the invention is to facilitate 
1 20 the equipment of railroad-cars with signaling 
apparatus and render the electric coupling of 
- such cars less difficult than heretofore without 
enhancing the cost, as will be hereinafter 
shown. . 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional view of several car-roofs, showing 
the hood-end portions of the roofs of the adjoin 
ing cars provided with my invention. Fig. 2 
is an elevation, on a larger scale, of my inven 
3o tion, showing in section a block by which it 
may be fastened in position under the hood 
end of the roof. Fig. 3 is a top view of the 
same. Fig. 4 is a transversesection in the line 
acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a bottom view of Fig. 2. 
35 The letter A in the drawings represents the 
roof portion of a railroad-car; B, the pull-rope; 
C, the stationary coupling-section; D, the de 
tachable coupling-section, and X X the cir 
cuit-wires. 
to The hood-end portions a of the cars are pro 
vided with the stationary coupling-sections C, 
which are, by means of a wedge or other suit 
ably-shaped block, a?, or other ordinary means, 
fastened to the inner surface of the hood, and 
45 held thereby in an inclined position and in 
line with the portion of the pull-rope B be 
tween the end wall, a, of the car and end of 
the hood a. 
The stationary coupling-section CConsists of 
5o two semi-cylindrical electric conductors, c c', 
having flared end portions, c, and flanges c, 
 
. . 
by means of which latter they are fastened to 
the block a?, so as to afford easy access to the 
detachable coupling. To the flanges c the 
circuit-wires XX of the car are attached in 55 
the usual manner, and to one of the conduct 
ors c a switch or circuit closer, E, is attached. 
This circuit-closer E consists of a pull-rod, e, 
hung in the flange c of the semi-cylindrical . 
conductor c, and a flange, c', at the other end 6o 
of the same. Between these flanges and near 
the flanges c' a collar, e, is provided on the 
circuit-closing or pull rode, and between the 
collare' and flange c' a spring, e, is placed upon 
the rode, whereby the normal position of the 65 
rod is sustained. Outside the flange cahook, 
e', is attached to the rode, for the purpose of 
attaching the pull-rope B of the carto it; and 
beyond the flange c the rode is provided with 
an angular contact-plate, e, extending over a 7o 
contact-spring, c, (which is preferably of spi 
ral form, on the flange c of the electric con 
ductor c'. The contact-spring is touched by . 
the plate e' when the pull-rod e is pulled by 
the rope B, thereby closing the circuit. The 75 . 
end-portion of the pull-rode, which slides in 
the flange c, is provided with a tongue, e, 
whereby it is prevented from turning. The 
lower portion of the electric conductor c is 
provided with a spring, F, which, by means of 8o 
an angular head, f, bridges the non-conduct 
ing spaces between the conductors c c, and by 
. . 
touching both conductors closes the circuit as 
long as the coupling-section D is not inserted. 
dinary construction, preferably that shown in 
Letters Patent granted to J. C. Tiffany and my 
self November 15, 1887, it consisting of a non 
conducting plug or handle, d, at either end of 
a couplingconducting-rope, d, containing cir-go 
cuit-wires XX, and semicircular conducting 
platesd.connected to saidcircuit-wiresandpro. 
vided with longitudinal corrugations d', fitting 
corresponding ribs, c, in the electric conductors 
ce, and an ordinary circuit-closer, d. When 95 
the conducting-plates d are inserted into the 
electric conductors cc, a lug, f', of the spring 
F will be li?ted, so as to move the portion f of 
said spring away from the electric conductors 
c c, and thus open the circuit, which remains roo 
open as long as the cars are thus coupled. 
Sufficient space, c', is provided around the lug 
The detachable coupling-section D is of or- 85 
. 
, 
g 
381,343 
two and one-half feet long, instead of about 
seven (7) feet, as formerly-thereby insuring 
less wear of the conducting-rope and requir 
ing less store-room for the detached coupling 
Sections. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In an electric car-coupling, the combina 
tion of a detachable coupling-section, D, hav 
ing an automatic circuit - closer, d, and the 
semi-cylindrical electric conductors, cc, of the 
stationary coupling-section C, and a circuit 
closing spring, F, having a bridging-flange, f, 
and lug f', substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
2. The combination of the electric conductor 
c of the stationary coupling section C, pull 
rod e, having contact - plate e', and the con 
ductor c of said section, having contact-spring 
c, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN R. DE MIER. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD T. FEN WICK, 
W. E. BELI. 
35 
45 
f' in the electric conductor c to insure insula 
tion of the open circuit. By this construction 
of the automatic circuit - closer I insure a 
shorter movement of the switch-spring F and 
a greater reliability of action, and when it is 
desirable to keep the circuit open, even when 
the coupling-section D is not used, a pin of 
wood or other non-conducting material pushed 
between the spring and conductor c will serve 
this purpose, for which in other constructions 
a non-conducting plug would have to be in 
serted into the stationary section. 
The pull-rode serves as a convenience for 
the conductor, as the pull - rope can be con 
nected to it, and by pulling said rope in or 
outside the car signals will be given. 
The circuit - wires X X are permanently 
-fixed in the cars and reach from end to end of 
the hoods over the platforms, where the sta 
tionary conductors c c' are fastened, as de 
scribed. This arrangement has proved to be 
the best for the purpose of coupling, as the 
said place is more easily reached by the em 
ploys than any other above the car-door here 
tofore used. The coupling-sections D will in 
this case be considerably shorter-say about 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381443.txt	(No Model.) 
E, THOMSON. 
ELECTRIC METER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 381,443, 
Patented Apr. 17, 1888. 
- 
af 
4. 
Z 
- 
S. S. 
S A. 
s 
S2 
- 
i 
-le- 
-- 
A 4. 
} 3F 
F 
2-Y-2 
/ 
- 
- M. 
: 
N. . 
. ST 
g 
G 
S. 
2S 
- 
Z Q GP (P (9 () () (22 
Zaz 
67/6-, z 1 
 
1% 
2 
  
/ZE 
 
Zf 
pull 
I 
 
l H 
W7 
WITNESSES, 
zzAA 64 
SY 
INVENTOR 
6%/6%/6% 
TDRNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 381,443. 
 
E, THOMSON, 
ELECTRIC METER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 17, 1888. 
722 
WNESSES. 
22 72 
2. % 21. 
A 
-- 
 
G 
INVENTOR. 
sy 
7714-26-6 7%.4%; 
TDNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIHU THOMSON, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS. - (,'7. 
ELECTRIC METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 381,443, dated April 17, 1888, 
Application filed December 31, 1887. Serial No. 259,448. (No model.) 
To a 2Z whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELIHU THOMSON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Lynn, in the county of Essex and State of 
MIaSSachusetts, have invented a certain new 
and useful Electric Meter, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to apparatus which 
may be employed either for the purpose of 
measuring electric currents or as a source of 
light motive power. 
In carrying out my invention I utilize the 
heating effects of an electric current upon a 
confined body of Some expansible fluid, and 
for the ordinary purposes of my invention I 
prefer to employ air or other gas, which, being 
heated directly or indirectly by such current, 
shall exert an expansive force, utilized as will 
be hereinafter described. I do not, however, 
confine myself to the use of air or gas in the 
manner hereinafter set forth, but may even 
employ an expansible liquid. The force of 
expansion of such fluid is utilized to produce 
movement of another body-such, for instance, 
as a body of liquid contained in a suitable re 
ceptacle and having the confined body of air, 
gas, or expansible liquid resting on its sur 
face; or such body may consist of a suitable 
shiftable weight or other movable device acted 
upon directly or indirectly through suitable. 
connections between the same and an expan 
sible or yielding wall of a chamber contain 
ing the expansible fluid, liquid, or gas. 
My invention consists, first, in the combi 
nation, with two or mole chambers containing 
an expansible gas or liquid, of proper electric 
heaters for expanding the contents of the same 
and electric switches controlling the flow of 
current to said heater's, Said switches being 
governed by the movement produced by the 
expansion of the gas or other fluid in such way 
as to cut off the flow of current to the heater 
by which the expansion and consequent move 
ment of some part connected there with are 
produced, and at the same time to admit the 
current to a heater whereby expansion may 
be produced in another chamber or receptacle. 
My invention consists, further, in the combi 
nation, with an apparatus having its parts 
combined as just stated, of a suitable register 
whereby the number of movements of expan 
sion may be indicated. 
pear. 
My invention consists, also, in the improved 
combinations of apparatus in which I employ 
a tilting or movable receptacle containing a 
liquid and having two chambers at opposite 
sides of its pivot containing each an expansi 
ble fluid-such as air or other gas-and elec 
tric heaters and switches whereby the fluid in 
the two bulbs may be alternately heated and 
a continued oscillating movement of the re 
ceptacle produced. 
My invention consists, also, in the improved 
combinations of apparatus, which will be more 
specifically stated in the claims. 
The electric heater may be of any desired 
description, and may consist of a coil or sec 
tion of conductor which opposes a resistance 
to the flow of electric current, so as to be heated 
thereby, or the heating effects may be pro 
duced by changes of magnetic conditions or 
by the actions of induced currents induced 
by a primary current, as will hereinafter ap 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of an electric meter based on 
the principles of and embodying the elements 
of my present invention. Fig. 2 illustrates a 
modification in the manner of applying a heat 
ing-coil. Fig. 3 shows another way of heating 
the thermo-expansive element of the combina. 
tion by means of an electric coil or conductor. 
Fig. 4 illustrates another modified form of my 
invention, and Fig. 5 illustrates a form in 
which electro-magnets are utilized to perform 
the switching operations. Fig. 6 shows an 
other way of mounting the movable recepta 
cle or movable frame which carries the shifta 
ble weight. Fig. 7 illustrates another manner 
of mounting the fluid or liquid containing re 
ceptacles. 
Fig. 8 illustrates another form of 
the invention, in which an electro-magnetic 
switch is employed. Fig. 9 shows another 
form of my invention, in which the expansive 
force of the fluid is utilized to throw or move 
the weight, so as to change the center of grav 
ity of the same and cause a movement of os 
cillation, which, by the employment of switches, 
as hereina?ter described, may be utilized for 
the purposes of an electric meter, or might, as 
could the other forms of my invention, be used 
as an electric motor, in which constant move 
ment of the parts would be maintained so long 
as current is supplied to the apparatus. Fig. 
- 
v 
90 
95 
IOC 
I 
25 
- 3D 
40 
45 
SO 
 
- 
2 
10 shows a mode of application of my inven 
tion. 
In Fig. 1, BB' represent two bulbs or other 
forms of receptacle for the gas or other fluid, 
and H H two heating coils or conductors, 
which are sealed in the bulb and carry the elec 
tric current that serves to heat the fluid con 
tained in the receptacle. 
In the present in 
stance the fluid operated upon so as to become 
the expansive operating element of the inven 
tion is supposed to be a gas-such as air-and 
in the form of the invention illustrated in Fig. 
1 the current is supposed to be the whole or 
a definite portion of the current which is to be 
measured. The bulbs or chambers B B are 
connected to one another by a tube or other 
passage, A, and a pair of minor bulbs or en 
largements, WW', are applied at or near the 
ends of the tube A. The bulbs and tube hold 
a small body of liquid-such as water-though 
where the apparatus is liable to be exposed to 
a freezing temperature it is preferable to use 
a non-freezing liquid, such as sulphuric acid, 
or even alcohol. Other liquids might be used 
in place of the water. Upon the liquid, which 
is the shifting weight of the organization, rests 
the confined body of expansible gas contained 
in the bulb B or B. 
The whole structure formed of the tube A 
and the attached bulbs W. W. B B is sus 
pended or mounted on a knife-edge or pivot 
at E, so that it may oscillate or move between 
stops WV' on the shifting of the body of liquid 
forming the shiftable weight. 
The center of 
gravity of the structure is preferably arranged 
so as to be either coincident with or directly 
over the suspension or pivotal point, thereby 
not interfering with, but rather facilitating, the 
tilting of the structure from side to side as the 
balance is disturbed. 
The frame S supports the bulbs and tube, 
and is provided with any suitable mechanical 
device for imparting movement to a register 
or other indicator of the number of oscillations 
In the present instance this 
device is shown as consisting of a pawl, P, car 
ried by the frame and engaging with the first 
wheel, T, of a register, D, like a gas-meter 
register. 
The connections to the coils H H are made 
by sealing the conductors into the glass after 
the manner of an incandescent electric light, 
or through a suitable stopper or plug inserted 
air-tight into the openings in the wall of the 
receptacle. One terminal from each heating. 
coil is connected with a wire which is carried 
down through the standard J, preferably as 
indicated, to the circuit from which current 
is taken, and the remaining terminals of the 
coils are carried, respectively, to contacts 
which dip alternately into mercury-cups fg, or 
otherwise form an electric contact, so as to 
complete connection with the outgoing wire a, 
forming the continuation of the electric cir 
cuit. When the structure tilts so as to make 
connection with f, connection at g is broken, 
O 
35 
40 
55 
(O 
65. 
45 of the structure. 
381,443 
75 
me 8o 
and vice versa. By this means the coils may 
be brought alternately into the circuit. 
L Lindicate electric lamps or other devices 
the consumption of current in which is to be 
measured, and R indicates an artificial elec 
tric resistance, placed as shown, to divert a 
definite amount of current to the meter in ob. 
vious manner. When alternating currents 
are used, the meter coils or heaters might ob. 
viously be in the circuits of a secondary coil 
of an induction-coil whose primary would be 
in the lamp circuit. This modification is in 
dicated in Fig. 10. It is, however, described 
in prior applications for patent filed by me 
October 19, 1887, Serial Nos. 252,792 and 
252,793. 
The operation of the apparatus as thus con 
stituted is as follows: The current, which trav 
erses the heating-coil, Hor H, which is in cir 
cuit at any time will be in proportion to the 
number of lamps or the current taken by them. 
The current is made strong enough and the 
resistance of the heating-coils is such that with 
the smallest current or load to be measured 
say one lamp-sufficient heat will be gener 
ated to cause an expansion of the fluid-such 
as gas or air-included in the bulb B or B, and 
thereby force some of the liquid from the bulb 
W or W over to the other side of the struct 
ure, eventually causing the bulb system, which 
is delicately balanced, to tip from one side to 
the other. 
Thus, for instance, in the position 
shown the coil His in circuit and the struct 
ure by the passage of current in said coil will 
be caused to tip to the other side, thereby 
breaking the circuit to coil H and bringing 
coil H' into circuit. 
At the same time the 
pawl P will be brought into engagement with 
a fresh tooth of the wheel T. - Current will 
now flow in coil H and cause an expansion of 
the fluid in the bulb B", thereby gradually 
forcing the liquid back to the other side of the 
structure, until finally 
the balance is again 
disturbed, thus causing the system to oscillate 
back to its original position and produce one 
movement of the register-wheel T. This move. 
ment continues indefinitely, and each complete 
Oscillation to and fro is accompanied by a 
movement of the wheel T a definite distance. 
I find that as more lamps are added at L. 
and more current passes in the register the 
frequency of tipping increases in like propor 
tion, or nearly enough for practical purposes, 
and the apparatus can be used as an effective 
electric meter. 
In order to prevent errors of registration 
and irregularities of action from changes in 
the condition of the surrounding temperature 
of air, it is preferable to inclose the apparatus 
in a box or case to cut off air-currents. The 
case may be of glass, pottery, metal, or other 
material, and is indicated by the dotted lines . 
15, Fig. 1. 
- 
I do not limit myself to the employment of 
mercury-cups, as described, for switching the 
current into and out of the electric heater, as 
. 
... 
- 
Ioo 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
---. 
--- 
381,443 
. 
. 
3 
O 
15 
any other form of switching device and any of the apparatus in obvious manner. The con 
other arrangement of circuits may be em- nection to the heater is in this figure shown as 
ployed by which the current may be alter 
effected through stoppers inserted in the bulbs 
at their tops. 
mately caused to flow and to cease to flow in 
In Fig. 5 the bulbs or receptacles are shown 
the heater. 
as consisting of inverted bottles containing at 
I do not limit myself to the form of register 
their lower ends the shiftable liquid. The stop 
indicated, as any other means for keeping a 
registry of the oscillations of the structure. 
pers hold the ends of the tube A and the wires 
leading to the conductors H. H. One termi 
might be used. 
The tube. A might be a barometer-tube with 
nal of each coil or conductor is connected to 
a common wire, n, while the other terminals 
bulbs BB' about two inches in diameter, and 
are arranged to dip into the mercury-cups fg, 
the coils or conductors H H may be of plati 
from which they never rise sufficiently to 
num wire of rather small gage. 
The resist.-- 
ance R may be made adjustable to determine 
break contact. At if are two spring keys or 
circuit-closers, with which a part of the oscil 
the best conditions of working. 
lating structure engages alternately to close 
The mode of pivoting or suspending the 
the connection as the bulbs tilt or oscillate on 
structure may also be modified, and the same 
their support. The keys or circuit closers if 
purpose would be served if the bulbs or recep 
serve to close circuit, respectively, from a bat 
tacles were arranged to move up and down in 
tery,t, or other generator of electricity through 
a vertical line alternately in response to the 
electro-magnets M. M', and these magnets in 
heating effects of the current. 
turn operate upon their armatures so as to close 
In Fig. 2 the coils or conductos are applied 
connections from the mercury-cups at fg to 
externally, and the receptacles B B are sup 
posed to consist of thin copper closely wound 
the continuation in of the circuit. When mag 
net M is put into circuit, it attracts its arma 
on the exterior with the coils H H', which are 
of rather fine wire and applied in a single 
ture and closes a contact from wire on to the 
layer. The shiftable body of liquid occupies 
cup f, which circuit was open, owing to the fact 
that the armature of the electro-magnet M is 
the conical bottom of the boxes, and the con 
normally retracted. Electro-magnet M simi 
necting-tube and the space above said shift. 
able liquid contains the expansible fluid, 
larly establishes connection from m to the cup 
at g. The armatures of the electro-magnets 
whether the same be another lighter fluid or, 
obviously operate as electric switches. By 
preferably, air or gas, whose rate of expansion 
this means a firm closure of the circuit through 
is large as compared with the fluid. 
the electric heater is obtained at every change 
In Fig. 3 another form of electric heater is 
of connection and uncertainty of contact at 
used. In this case the coils or conductors car 
the mercury-cups is avoided. 
rying the current by which the heating effects 
are produced consist of electro-magnetic coils 
In Fig. 6 the structure is suspended by deli 
cate coil-springs EE, attached to opposite 
H'H', surrounding cores of iron which pro 
ends of the same, as indicated. When the 
duce a magnetic field, which in turn induces 
liquid is shifted, the end of the structure to 
in thesides of the boxes BB, of copper or other 
which the liquid is forced becomes the heavier 
metal, electric currents which heat the boxes 
and falls when overcoming the tension of its 
and the contained fluid, so as to expand the 
spring slightly, the effect being substantially 
latter and produce the transfer operation be 
as if the structure were pivoted and an oscil 
fore described. It will of course be under 
lation taking place, as before. The connec. 
stood that in this case the current which flows 
tion may be rendered more positive by means 
in the coil is an alternating or varying cur 
rent that will produce the changes of magnetic 
of a weight, X, pivoted to the structure, as 
shown, and limited in its swing on its pivot 
condition necessary to the production of in 
by stops, as indicated. As the structure tilts 
duced currents. 
one way or the other, the weight X tilts with 
In the modification shown in Fig. 4 the cur 
it and falls to that side which is depressed, 
rent is switched from the heater by forming 
thereby increasing the movement and insur. 
shunts around the heating conductor or coils 
ing the retention of the structure in the posi 
H. H', and the switch is formed by metallic 
tion last assumed until the transfer of the liq. 
contacts f' g, insulated from one another. 
uid weight in the opposite direction is pro 
These contacts are connected, respectively, to 
the circuit at one side of the heating-conductor, 
duced by the action of the electric heater. 
The shifting lever carrying the weight X 
while contact-springs moving with the struct. 
might also carry a pawl for operating on the 
ure connect, respectively, with the circuit at the 
other side. When contact is made, a shunt 
wheel of a register. 
In the modification indicated in Fig. 7 the 
circuit of low resistance is formed around the 
pivotal point E of the structure is at one side 
heater-coil. The arrangement is here shown 
or near one of the bulbs or receptacles BB, 
as such that if both contacts are open the cur 
and a balancing-weight, Y, is used in order to 
rent will pass in both heaters. The tilting or 
produce substantial equilibrium until a trans 
oscillation of the structure, as before produced 
fer of the liquid is brought about. The opera. 
by the alternate expansion of the gas in the re 
ceptacles H. H. produces an alternate closure 
tion is the same as in the other cases. 
In Fig. 8 the structure is suspended by three 
of contact at fg' and the continued operation 
- 
45 
Go 
75 
OO 
I o5 
O 
I 5 
I 30 
4 
381,443 
metal wires or strips, F. The middle wire or 
strip connects to one of the terminals of the 
two coils, the other terminals of said coils be 
ing connected, respectively, to the fixed con 
tacts f and g through the other two wires or 
supports F. The armature of an electro-mag 
net, M, plays between the two contacts fig and 
operates as an electric switch to transfer the 
current from the wire in to one or the other of 
the heaters, as the action of the apparatus may 
require. For varying the magnet M a spring 
contact or key, k, is arranged in the path of 
the oscillating structure and serves to close 
the circuit of a battery, t, through the electro 
magnet M when the structure oscillates in one 
direction and to open said circuit when oscil 
lation or novement of the liquid and struct 
ure takes place in the opposite direction. 
When the circuit is open, the armature of the 
magnet M rests on the contact?, thereby clos 
ing the circuit from m to the heater H. When 
through the expansion of the gas or airinbulb 
B the structure is made to operate in the op 
posite direction, the switch k closes, thereby 
energizing the magnet M and closing the cir 
cuit at the contact.g., so as to bring into circuit 
the heater for bulb B, and causing a shift of 
the liquid in the opposite direction, so as to 
permit the switch k to open. 
. In the form of my invention shown in Fig. 
9 the force of the expanding fluid is utilized 
directly upon the flexible top of the receptacle 
B or B, which top is of thin metal, like the 
side of an aneroid-barometer. In this case, 
as before, I preferably use gas or air as the 
fluid, though it is obvious that a liquid having 
a considerable co-efficient of expansion might 
be employed. The expansive force is applied 
to bell-crank levers BB to shi?t a weight at 
tached to the end of a tilting rod or lever, C, 
and thereby to produce oscillation of the struct 
ure carrying said lever and boxes or recepta 
cles B-B, the whole structure being pivoted, 
as before, and working between suitable stops. 
Suitable limiting-stops are also used for the 
lever C, as indicated. 
The operation of the apparatus will be ob 
vious from the foregoing description. 
The heating-coils HHare best made of some 
metal whose resistance does not greatly change 
by change of temperature, and in such cases 
the resistance R should likewise be of such 
material. When the coils are of platinum or 
subject to change of resistance by temperature, 
the coil R or resistance should be of similar 
In fact, since with many lamps 
Construction. 
at LL in use the coils HIH may even become 
alternately red-hot, the resistance R must be 
made so small in gage of wire as to be simi 
larly rendered hot by its own current. Va 
riations in these respects may be used to vary 
the effects of registry or the proportional reg 
istry under different loads, so 
as to obtain any 
desired results. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, with two confined 
. 
2. In an electric meter, the combination, 75 
bodies of fluid contained in separate chambers, 
pivoted or tilting weight con 
of a shiftable 
trolled in its position by the expansions of 
said fluid, electric heaters for expanding the 7o 
same, and switches - controlled by the move 
ments of the shiftable weight for shifting the 
electric current to the heaters alternately, as 
and for the purpose described. 
with separate confined bodies of expansible 
fluid, of electric heaters for heating the same, 
a register of the expansions of said fluid, and 
electric switches governing the flow of current 
to the heaters and controlled by such expan- 3o 
sions, as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, substantially as de 
scribed, of a body of liquid contained in a 
pivoted or movable receptacle and interposed 
between two gas-chambers, electric heaters 85 
for causing expansion of the gas in said cham 
bers alternately and consequent movement of 
the body of interposed liquid, and electric 
switch devices controlled by the movement 
thus produced for bringing the heaters alter- 9o 
nately into action, 
as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
4: An electric meter consisting of a pivoted 
tilting receptacle comprising air orgas boxes 
or bulbs connected by spaces containing a 
body of liquid, heating-coils for causing ex 
pansion of the gas and consequent movement 
of the liquid, electric switch devices con. 
trolled by the movements of the receptacle 
for throwing the heating-coils into and out of 
action alternately, and an automatic register 
of the number of oscillations or movements. 
5. In an electro-thermo-expansion device, a 
closed receptacle of metal containing a fluid 
of any character susceptible to heat and an 
electro-magnetic coil adapted to act induct 
ively on the metal of the receptacle to develop 
heating electric currents in said metal. 
6. The combination, with a pivoted or tilt 
ing receptacle containing a shiftable body of 
liquid, of electric switch devices mechanically 
operated by said receptacle, and an electro 
magnetically-controlled switch governed by 
the latter, and in turn controlling the electric 
heater by whose heating effects a movement II 5 
of the liquid bodily is induced. 
7. The combination, with two confined 
bodies of fluid contained in chambers forming 
a pivoted or tilting structure, of a shiftable - 
weight moved by the expansive force of said Iro 
fluid, electric heaters for causing expansion of 
the fluid, and switches controlled by the move 
ments of the tilting structure for shifting the 
electric current, as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
Signed at Lynn, in the county of Essex and 
State of Massachusetts, this 22d day of De 
cember, A. D. 1887. 
I25 
95 
Iod 
IC5 
ITO 
s 
ELIEIU THOMSON. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER-C.FISH, 
OTIS K. STUART, 
... O 
15 
2) 
25 
O 
45 
SO 
55. 
65 
- 
) 
y 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381543.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. ELLIOTT. 
No. 381543, 
SHADE PULI, 
Patented Apr. 24, 1888, 
 
fS 
 
3.22. M24 
C2. 
//- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES WINTERBON ELLIOTT, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SHADE - PUL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 38,543, dated April 24, 1888. 
Application file March 3, 1887. Serial No. 229,504. (No model.) 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva- being slid along the stick. 
The clasp shown is made from the blank shown 35 
To all tufton, it notif CO7 ce.77. 
in Fig. 3, which is struck up into the form 
Be it known that I, CHARLES WINTERBON 
shown in the other figures. The arms b b 
ELLIOTT, a subject of the Queen of Great 
serve to hold the clasps more Securely in place, 
Britain, residing at Boston, in the county of 
and, by reason of this upward pressure of the 
Suffolk and State of Massachusetts, have in 
vented a new and useful Shade-Pull, of which stick against the inwardly-bent projections b 4o 
b' of the clasp, tend to prevent the clasp from 
the following is a specification. 
The side springs 
tion of one style of my device applied to a bid in holding the clasp in place. The 
projections lib' take hold of the stick, as shown 
shade. Fig. 2 is a section on line 22, Fig. 1. 
fully in Fig. 1, and are essential elements of 45 
Fig. 3 illustrates the sheet metal clamp. 
my device. 
My invention is a device for use with cur 
I have shown my device wholly made of 
tains or slades; and it consists of a pull con 
sheet metal; but, as will be obvious, it will be 
nected with a clasp which receives the shade 
stick, and has at its upper ends two projections, 
made in numerous styles. For example, in 
near its lower end one or more inwardly-bent 
Some styles the pull A is a cord and tassel, in- 5o 
springs and two sidewise-projecting springs, 
'stead of the ring and loop, as shown, and the 
clasp B is a light casting, and therefore is ap 
the shade lying between these projections and 
the inwardly - projecting springs, and being 
plied by sliding end wise in the stick. While the 
style shown may be applied end wise, yet it may 
held from sliding in the stick by the sidewise 
projecting springs, which engage one edge of 
also be sprung directly to place, the spring of 55 
the clasp being annply sufficient when made of 
the stick, the clasp serving to securely connect 
the proper quality of sheet metal. 
the pull with the shade and its stick. 
My device is leadily applied and removed 
when the shades are to be cleaned, and can be 
made very ornamental. Its main advantage 
is that it is far more secure than any other de 
vice for a like purpose known to me, inasmuch 
as it is clamped to the sides of the stick as well 
as to the lower edge of the stick. 
In that form of my device shown in the 
drawings, A is the pull, and B the clasp by 
which the pull is connected to the shade D. 
The loop a connects the pull A to clasp B. 
What I claim as my invention is 
The device above described, made up of the 
pull A and clasp B, having the inwardly-bent 6o 
projections b b', inwardly-bent springs bb, 
and sidewise-extending springs bb, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
CHARLES WINTERBON ELIOTT, 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD S. BEACH, 
JOHN R. SNOW. 
O 
5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381643.txt	(No Model.) 
L. REINHARDT. 
WASHING MACHINE. 
No. 38,643, 
Patented Apr. 24, 1888. 
 
 
  
 
27 
a' 
(- 
 
 
3SA 2 Sl iSt 3. 
WS S. (, TEWA A 
ea 
b 
W sing N. 
5f. i S. 
s NY Ea 
y 
4, 
A. 
y 
f 
g 
Prie?, 
self- 
AY 
A 1A 
WN 
W B.S. 
S/SaS S. SS2S 2. 
(2%2ZZZZZN4 
Ell 
Aitofreys. 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IOUISA REINHARDT, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
WASHN Ga MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 381,643, dated April 24, 1888. 
Application filed April 28, 1SS. Renewed March 15, 1888, Serial No. 267,247. (No model.) 
55 
- 
To aii whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LOUISA REINHARDT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Louis 
ville, in the county of Jefferson and State of 
Kentucky, have invented certair uew and use 
ful Improvements in Washing-Machines; and 
I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to washing-machines; 
and it consists in the novel construction and 
arrangement of devices herein specified, and 
particularly pointed out in the claim annexed. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a top 
view of my improved machine complete. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section through the machine 
in the plane indicated by dotted line acac on 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a vertical section in the plane 
indicated by dotted line gy on Fig. 1. 
The letter A of the drawings represents a 
circular tub provided with holding-ears at a, 
and it is recessed on its top at b b to receive 
and hold the cross a bar D, hereinafter de 
scribed. This tub is also provided with ribs 
c, which are secured vertically, horizontally, 
and diagonally to its inner wall and bottom, as 
represented on the drawings. The diagonally 
arranged ribs c' are intended to serve not only 
as rubbing-bars, but also to partially close the 
spaces formed by the ribs arranged at right 
angles, and prevent the goods being washed 
from becoming packed in such spaces. 
The letter D indicates a cross-bar, whose 
width is only sufficient to fit snugly in the re 
cesses b b on the top of the tub, and is pro 
vided with hinged and slotted hasps F adapted 
for locking over the ears (, a, to keep the cross 
bar firmly in position. 
It will be observed that the bar D is formed 
of two pieces of board or plank, which are 
bolted together and made separable by means 
of screw-threaded bolts and nuts. This con 
struction enables me to arrange the large 
standard G, hereinafter described, in such 
manner that the cross-bar shall be clasped 
both at top and bottom by the enlarged por 
tions thereof, as shown. 
G represents a standard, to the upper end of 
handles, (marked J.) A portion of this stand 
ard is cut away, as shown ath, to correspond 
with a small opening in the cross-bai', through 
which it is passed, thereby forming a collar 
both above and below said bar. A. washer, 
n, is interposed between the upper side of the 
cross-bar and the upper collar of the standard. 
This also must be formed in two sections, and 
nailed or otherwise secured to the croSS-bar. 
The letter H represents a hemisphere, pref 
erably of wood. In this hemisphere arrange 
a series of radial arms (marked o) in the man 
ner shown, to the end that when the hemi 
sphere is rotated said arms shall serve to reach 
and rub the goods being washed against the 
ribs of the tub. 
The standard G is securely attached at its 
lower end to the top of the hemisphere, pref 
erably by passing said lower end into a suit 
able recess found in the hemisphere and glu 
ing or cementing it therein. 
It is obvious 
that such connections may be formed by a 
plate attached to the collar on the standard, 
and screws passing through such plate into the 
top of the hemisphere. 
I attach especial importance to hemisphere 
H and the manner in which the radial arms 
are arranged thereon, for while I alm aware 
that disks with similar washing-arms have 
heretofore been used, such disks fail to furnish 
the permanency and ready means provided by 
the hemisphere for arranging the arms in the 
direction desired, making them secure against 
ordinary strain. 
I furthermore attach in 
portance to the construction of the large stand 
ard D- and the means I have provided for con 
necting it with the cross-bar, as I find such 
construction affords great strength and solidity 
to the operating parts, 
It is obvious that my machine is operated 
by the double crank J either by one hand or 
two, as the nature of the case may require. 
An essential feature of my invention con 
sists in the novel manner of mounting the shaft 
of the rotative hemisphere H, whereby this 
shaft is prevented from vertical motion, and 
may be detached from the two-part cross-bar 
D, the latter being readily removable from the 
tub, the parts of said bar being firmly held to 
90 
So which is firmly attached the double crank and gether by bolts and nuts and a two-part washer, too 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
3 5 
45 
2 
38 le43 
n, the joint of which crosses the joint of the and provided with loops, and the two-part 
said bar, as clearly shown in Fig. 1. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
washer n, all substantially as specified. 
O 
LOUISA REINHARDT. 
Having described my invention, I claim- 
The combination, with a wash-tub recessed presence of two witnesses. 
5 at bb, and provided with ears a. a, of the ro- 
tative standard G, bearing an armed rubber 
and a crank, and provided with an annular 
groove, the two-part crossbar bolted together 
J. SPEED PEAY, 
JOHN FOWLER. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381743.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 381,743, 
 
J. F. WOLLENSAK, 
TRANSOM LIFTER, 
Patented Apr. 24, 1888. 
 
 
 
f Y r 
Za 2-ye7 7 %22; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. WOLLENSAK, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
TRANSO Ma L. FER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters 
Application fied Janu:ry 14, 1888. 
Patent No. 381,743, dated Airil 24, 1888, 
Serial No. 260,763. (No model.) 
6 
To a 2 whon, it nay, concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chicago, Ijection, "b", at or near its lower end, provided 55 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Transom-Li?ters, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of my invention is to construct a 
simple and compact transom-lifter having long 
grooved stationary guiding pieces or plates; 
and my invention consists in the features and 
details of construction, hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the transom-lifter attached to a door 
jamb; Fig. 2, afront elevation of the lifter de 
tached from the jamb; Fig. 3, a side elevation 
of the same; Fig. 4, a transverse section in the 
line a a of Fig. 2, looking in the direction of 
the arrows; and Fig. 5, a transverse section in 
the line yy of Fig. 2, looking in the direction 
of the arrows. 
A is the lower guiding-plate; a, a vertical 
groove or depression therein; a, flanges at the 
ends of the plate having screw-holes therein; 
a', raised flanges at the edges thereof; B, the 
upper guiding - plate; b, a vertical groove 
therein; b', flanges at the ends of the plate; b, 
raised flanges at the edges thereof; b, a pro 
jection at the lower end of the plate B, through 
which the lifting-rod passes; C, a fastening de 
vice; c, a thumb-screw used there with; c, a 
raised cylindrical portion thereof; D, a head. 
block or sliding piece; d, a ring or hook thereon; 
E, a spiral Spring passing over the upper por 
tion of the lifting-rod; G, the lifting-arm, and 
H the bracket attached to the transom. 
In constructing my improved transom-lifter 
I make a guiding-plate, A. This plate is pro 
vided with a groove or channel extending ver 
tically through its length, in which groove the 
lifting-rod slides and by which it is partially 
surrounded. At each end of this plate are 
flanges having screw.holes to attach the plate 
to the jamb, though the flanges may be dis 
pensed with and screw-holes provided in the 
bottom of the groove or channel. At the sides 
of this plate are flanges raised outward from 
the doorjamb, affording space for the free 
sliding of the fastening device C and head 
block D as these parts move up and down in 
operating the lifter. The upper guide-plate 
may be the same in for in as the one above de 
Be it known that I, JoHN F. WoLLENSAK, a scribed, but preferably has in addition a pro 
with a hole through which the lifting-rod 
passes. This projection acts both as a guide 
for the rod and as a support for a spiral Spring 
which incloses the upper portion of the li?ting 
rod and rests upon the projection. I next 
make a fastening device. (Shown more par 
ticularly in the sectional view given in Fig. 5.) 
This fastening device passes over and behind 
the raised flanges a, so as to slide freely. It 
is also shaped to fit into the groove in the face 
of the plate and has an elongated neck, into 
and through which the shank of a thumb-screw 
passes to bind upon the plate and hold the 
fastener in any desired position. Extending 
up from the side of this neck is a raised cylin 
drical portion, c', into which the lower end of 
the lifting-rod is screwed or otherwise securely 
fastened. I then construct what I term a 
head-block. (Shown particularly in Fig. 4.) 
This is similar in cross-section to the fastening 
device, having the shape necessary to fit the 
groove in the guide-plate and passing over 
and behind the flanged edges thereof. It has 
no thumb-screw, however, but is provided with 
a ring or eye to enable the li?ting-arm to be 
attached thereto, and has a screw-threaded hole 
in its under side into which the upper end of 
the lifting-rod is secured. The lifting-arm and 
bracket used in connection with this lifter be 
ing well known, no description of these parts 
is requisite. The lifting-rod is merely a rod 
of metal of the desired length, having screw. 
threads at each end to fasten the same to the 
fastening device and sliding head - block, 
though, of course, other means than screw 
threads may be employed to fasten the rod to 
the fastening device and head-block. 
The mode of operating my improved tran. 
Som-lifter after the same has been constructed 
as above described is as follows: The thumb 
screw, being released and shoved upward, car 
ries with it the fastening device, and conse 
quently the lifting-rod and head-block. The 
latter, by means of its connection with the lift 
ing-arm, pushes upon it and opens the tran 
som. The thumb-screw may then be screwed 
in, and, bearing upon the surface of the plate, 
pulls the fastening device away from the jamb 
and against the under sides of the guide-plate, 
75 
90 
95 
8. 
OO 
5 
O 
(S 
25 
45 
SO 
381,743 
and the whole is thus held firmly in position. 
When it is desired to close the transom, the 
thumb-screw may be again released and pulled 
downward, carrying with it the fastening de 
Vice, lifting-rod, head-block, and lifting-arm, 
thus closing the transom. 
Although I have described and shown but 
One form of guiding-plate, it is not my inten 
tion to limit myself strictly thereto; but as I 
consider the essence of my invention to consist 
in the construction of an externally grooved 
or channeled and outwardly-flanged stationary 
guide-plate, it is obvious that any such plate 
Will fall within my invention whether the 
grooves be round, square, or otherwise shaped. 
In the downward movement of the head 
block it strikes upon the spiral spring E, placed 
upon the projection bof the upper guide-plate, 
and its fall being softened thereby, any break. 
ing of glass by a too sudden lowering or acci. 
dental fall is prevented. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a transon-lifter, an externally-grooved 
and outwardly-flanged stationary guide-plate 
for guiding the lifting-rod, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a transon-li?ter, the combination of 
externally-grooved and outwardly-flanged sta 
tionary guide-plates for the upper and lower 3o 
ends of the lifting-rod, a fastening device slid 
ing upon the lower plate and adapted to re 
ceive the lower end of the lifting-rod, a head 
block sliding upon the upperplate and adapted 
to be secured to the upper end of the rod, and 35 
the lifting-rod connecting the fastening device 
and head-block, substantially as described. 
3. In a transom-lifter, the combination of 
externally-grooved and outwardly-flanged sta 
tionary guide-plates for the upper and lower 
ends of the lifting-rod, the upper plate having 
a projection at or near its lower end through 
which the rod may pass, a fastening device 
sliding upon the lower plate and adapted to 
receive the lower end of the lifting-rod, a head- 45 
blocksliding upon the upper plate and adapted 
to be secured to the upper end of the rod, a 
lifting-rod connecting the fastening device and 
head-block, a bracket attached to the transom, 
and a lifting-arm connecting the head-block, to 
and bracket, substantially as described. 
JOHN F. WOLTLENSAK. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM E. GILL, 
GEORGES, PAYSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381844.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PRESTON C. MORSE, OF NATICK, MASSACHUSETTS. 
DENTAL PLUG GER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 38,844, dated April 24, 1888. 
Application filed June 18, 1887. 
Serial No. 241,691. No model.) 
55 
IO 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PRESTON C. MoRSE, of 
Natick, in the county of Middlesex and State 
of Massachusetts, a citizen of the United States, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Dental Pluggers or Mallets, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, forming a part of this specification, in ex 
plaining its nature. 
It is desirable in dental pluggers and instru 
ments of a like nature to vibrate the plugging 
tool or instrument very rapidly, and with a 
graded or variable power or touch, and to con 
fine the operating devices in very small com 
pass, and my device embodies the employment, 
as an actuating power, of compressed air and 
of spring-pressure acting in opposition to each 
other upon the tool or instrument. I prefer to 
use the compressed air to store power in the 
spring and to use the spring for delivering 
the striking-blow of the hammer. Aside from 
the broad features of the invention as above 
indicated, the invention further comprises 
5 various details of organization and construc 
tion, all of which will hereinafter be described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in per 
spective of an instrument containing the fea 
tures of my invention. Fig. 2 is a view, part 
in longitudinal section and part in elevation, 
enlarged, to represent the construction thereof. 
Fig. 3 is a view in vertical central section, en 
larged, to further illustrate its construction. 
Fig. 4 is a view in cross section upon the dot 
ted line ac a' of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a view in 
perspective of certain of the operating de 
vices. Fig. 6 is a view in perspective, en 
larged, of a part of the valve-operating mech 
anism. Fig. 7 is a view, enlarged, of the 
piston-rod. Fig. 8 is a view in perspective, 
enlarged, of the cylindrical valve and its op 
erating-spring. Fig. 9 is a viewin perspective, 
enlarged, of the device for adjusting the ten 
sion of the actuating-spring. Fig. 10 is a view 
in perspective of a ratchet-plate attached to 
the case of the tool, to which reference is here. 
inafter made. 
A is the cylindrical case, which has a long 
cylindrical chamber, a, containing the prin 
cipal operative parts of the device. 
B is the tool or instrument. It is detach 
ably secured by the spring-latch b to the holder 
b' at the forward end of the instrument, the 
tool or instrument having a shank, b, which 
fits the vertical hole b" in the holder b, and ex 
tends inward sufficiently to receive upon its 
inner end, b, the impact of the hammer C. 
The shank of the tool or instrument B is free 
to move a limited distance longitudinally in 
the hole b", in order that it may receive and 
transmit to the end of the tool a short quick 
reciprocating movement or blow. 
The holder b is fastened to the case A by a 
screw-thread, and it also has the enlarged hole 
latitsinner end, in which is movable asleeve, 
b', having a hole, b, into which the inner end, 
b', of the spindle or shank extends. (See Fig. 
3.) This sleeve holds the hammer C to the 
end of the piston-rod, and the hammer pref. 
erably is not secured to the end of the piston 
rod b, but is free in its holder b to transmit 
the impact or blow from the piston-rod and to 
deliver it to the end b of the spindle or shank 
b' of the tool. In some instances I prefer that 
the striking part of the hammer C-that is, 
the portion of it which comes in contact with 
the end of the shank or spindle-should be 
lead, and I have represented in Fig. 3 the lead 
block c set into a hole formed therein. 
D is the piston, and I have represented it 
as formed by the cup-packing d, preferably of 
leather, and of a size to fit the bore of the case 
A. This packing is fastened to the piston-rod 
by the nuts did. The piston-rod dis hollow, 
its bore forming a passage, d, for the flow of 
compressed air from the inlet or supply ports 
to the chamber or cylinder di. This piston 
rod extends upward through the holding-block 
d', and has the supply or inlet holes d at its 
upper end, (see Figs. 5 and 7,) which estab 
lish connection between the chamber di, into 
which compressed air is admitted, as will 
hereinafter appear, the holes d forming a por 
tion of the inlet-ports of the valve. To con 
trol these ports so that the compressed air 
shall be admitted to the chamber d at the end 
of the forward or striking movement of the 
actuating-spring E, I have arranged in the 
passaged of the piston-rod a cylindrical valve, 
F, (see Fig. 8,) which serves to alternately 
open and close the inlet-ports d and also the 
exhaust-ports d. (See Figs. 3 and 7.) This 
cylindrical valve is closed at its outer end and 
is hollow, opening into the passage d" in the 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
IOO 
381,844 
O 
15 
25 
piston d, and forming a passage, f', from the 
inlet-ports d', and it has a turning or torsional 
movement given it by means of the long coiled 
spring f", which is fastened at its end f' to the 
piston d, and at its opposite end, f, to the 
valve F, and which is under sufficient tension 
to turn the cylindrical valve F in one direc 
tion, and also to cause it to have a longitudi 
nal movement in the piston passage a'. 
In order that the inlet and exhaust passages 
may be opened and closed at the proper in 
terval, it is necessary that the valve F travel 
with the piston-rod a limited distance, and that 
it then have a movement independent of the 
piston-rod-in other words, it is provided with 
a four-motion movement; and this is obtained 
by the movement of the piston - rod itself, 
which moves it outward to close the exhaust 
and open the supply passages and into a posi 
tion to enable the springf, acting torsionally, 
to turn the valve F into a position which 
brings its pin upon a lug or holding device, 
and the valve-rod then remains in that posi 
tion-that is, with the exhaust-passages closed 
and the inlet-passages open-until the valve 
is again turned and the spring f" caused to 
draw or return it to a position to close the 
inlets and open the exhaust - passages. To 
provide the valve F with these movements, I 
have formed thereon, to project laterally, a 
pin or projection, f', and I have formed in 
the end of the piston-rod d a longitudinal 
recess, f, extending from its end f', and 
having the comparatively wide portion, f, 
and narrower portion, f', extending there 
from, there being a shoulder, f', at the end of 
the narrower portion of the recess. (See Fig. 
7.) This recess receives the pin or projection 
(See Figs. 
f, extending from the valve F. 
2, 3, and 5.) There is also attached to the 
block d a stationary curved plate, G, which 
has a tripping shoulder or stop, g, arranged 
to extend across the line of movement of the 
pinf. 
The operation of the valve is as follows: The 
compressed air is admitted to the chamber d, 
the piston d then being at the end of its for 
ward stroke, having been forced there and be 
ing held there by the actuating-spring E, which 
is contained in the chamber e in the case, and 
which bears against a movable collar, e, at one 
end and against the piston D at the other. The 
inlet or supply ports are then open, and the 
projection or pinf of the valve rests upon the 
shoulder f" of the piston-rod. The piston is 
immediately moved backward, compresses the 
actuating-spring E, moves the piston-rod and 
the valve F, the inlet-ports remaining open, 
and the pin or projection f upon the shoulder 
6of', until the pin f is brought into contact with 
the tripping-incline g on the stationary plate 
G, when it is caused to be moved laterally off 
the shoulder, thus causing the valve F to be 
turned and moved off the shoulder f', which 
is then, by the action of the spring f, drawn 
into the narrow section f of the recess to the 
45 
35 
65 
SO 
 
inner end thereof. This causes the inlet-ports 
to be closed and the exhaust- ports to be 
opened. The compressed air in the cylinder 
then escapes through the passages d' into the 
chamber e, which opens to the outer air, and 
the actuating-spring E then serves to return 
the piston and piston-rod to their respective 
positions. Upon the reverse movement of the 
piston-rod the valve F moves with it a limited 
distance until the pin or projection f, which 
is now at the inner end of the recessf, comes 
in contact with the shoulder g, and is arrested 
thereby, while the piston-rod continues to 
move forward, and the projection of continues 
to hold the pinf, and consequently the valve 
F, stationary until the shoulder f" comes in 
line with the upper surface of the projection 
G, when the spring f", acting torsionally, throws 
or turns the valve F. The projection f then 
rests upon the shoulder f". This causes the 
exhaust-ports to be closed and the inlet-ports 
to be opened, and the piston and piston-rod to 
be moved backward by compressed air, as be 
fore. 
To regulate the admission of compressed air 
to the chamber d, I use the hollow valve H, 
which has the closed inner end, h, arranged to 
shut upon the valve-seat it, surrounding the 
hole it. The valve H has a passage, l, which 
opens through the side openings, h., at its end 
into the valve-chamber l', about the valve H, 
(see Figs. 2 and 3,) and the compressed air is 
supplied by means of the flexible tube h" and 
pipe h', which screws into the end h of the in 
strument. This end h contains the valve H, 
and screws into the case A. The valve H has 
a lengthwise movement in its chamber, and is 
adapted to be held closed by the actuating 
spring h", and to be opened by the push-rod 
h', which extends into the opening it from 
the valve - chamber d, (see Fig. 2,) and is 
adapted to be moved against the seat or solid 
end h of the yal ve. It is caused to be moved 
from a point near the forward end of the in 
strument, in order that it may be operated 
from the most advantageous position for move. 
ment by the operator, which is at the point K, 
(see Figs. 1, 2, and 3,) and the push-rod li" is 
extended in the chamber a of the case A, 
through the block d' into the section e of the 
chamber, where it is connected by a stud, k, 
which passes through a slot, c', with the end 
of the push-bar k". This push-bar has a thumb 
rest, k", and its end k" extends into a guide. hole 
in the block k, fastened to the end b. 
As it is desirable to vary the tension of the 
actuating-spring E, to change the force of the 
blow delivered by the tool or instrument, I have 
made the collare', against which it bears, adjust 
able longitudinally in the case, and it is adapted 
to be locked in any desired position by means 
of the pawl or hook M, which extends into the 
slot in in the case, and is pressed by thespring 
in against the ratchet-plate m'. A stud, m, 
extends from the arm carrying the pawl or 
hook M through the slot m, and has a knob, 
75 
90 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
381,844 
3. 
w 
m", by which the collar is moved and the pawl 
ton-chamber in which said piston is moved, 
or hook, engaged or disengaged from the teeth 
an air - supply chamber connected with the 
piston-chamber by inlet-ports, a valve con 
of the ratchet. 
The joint use of compressed air and an actu 
trolling said inlet-ports, and a valve control 
atting spring for delivering blows in rapid suc 
ling the air-supply passage to the said cham 
cession. I have found to be very advantageous. 
ber, as and for the purposes specified. 
I would say that I do not limit the use of the 
7. In an instrument for dentistry and other 
invention to dental instruments, but may em 
purposes, a piston adapted to be moved in a 
ploy it wherever it is desired to obtain orgive 
piston-chamberin one direction by compressed 
rapid strokes to any tool or instrument. 
air, and a valve for regulating the supply of 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
compressed air furnished the piston-chamber 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
through a supply tube or passage, and a valve 
of the United States 
actuating device having an arm or push-rod 
1. The combination, in an instrument for 
extended to a location near the operating end 
dentistry and other purposes, of a hammer 
of said instrument, as and for the purposes 
adapted to have a reciprocating movementim 
described. 
parted to it by a piston-rod, a piston carried 
8. The combination, in an instrument for 
by said rod and movable in a cylinder, said 
dentistry and other purposes, of a case, A, 
cylinder, and valves for controlling the admis 
supporting a tool, B, said tool B, and a recip 
sion and escape of compressed air thereto, and 
rocating piston-rod contained in said case and 
an actuating-spring for bearing against the 
arranged to strike the end of said tool B in 
piston-rod, whereby the piston-rod is moved in 
each reciprocation, adapted to be moved in 
one direction by the compressed air and in a 
one direction by compressed air and in the 
reverse direction by the actuating-spring, as 
opposite direction by an actuating-spring, a 
and for the purposes specified, 
piston carried by said rod, a tube for supply 
2. The combination, in an instrument for 
ing compressed air to the piston-chamber, and 
dentistry, of a loose or freehammer, C, adapted 
a valve for controlling the air-supply passage, 
to receive and deliver blows by impact, with 
as and for the purposes described. 
a piston rod moved in one direction by a pis 
9. The combination, in an instrument for 
ton actuated by compressed air, and in a re 
dentistry and other purposes, of a tool, B, 
verse direction by an actuating-spring, as and 
loosely attached to its holder, a loose or free 
for the purposes specified. 
hammer interposed between the end of the tool 
3. The combination, in an instrument for 
and the reciprocating piston-rod, a reciprocat 
dentistry and other purposes, of a piston-rod 
ing piston-rod having a piston contained in a 
for communicating a blow to a hammer or 
piston-chamber in a case, said piston-cham 
other instrument, a piston carried thereby, a 
ber, an automatic valve for opening and clos 
cylinder or piston-chamber, a valve for auto 
ing the inlet and exhaust passages to permit 
matically controlling the inflow and escape of 
the compressed air to act to move the rod in 
compressed air thereto, and an actuating 
One direction, and a spring to move the rod in 
spring, E, as and for the purposes specified. 
a reverse direction, as and for the purposes 
specified. 
4. The combination, in an instrument for 
dentistry and other purposes, of a hollow pis 
10. The combination, in an instrument for 
ton contained in a case, a cylinder or piston 
dentistry and other purposes, of a tool, B, 
chamber, a hollow piston-rod opening into 
loosely attached to its holder, a loose or free 
said piston-chamber and provided with sup 
hammer interposed between the end of the tool 
ply-ports d and escape-ports d", and the valve 
and the reciprocating piston-rod, a recipro 
F, to open and close said ports contained in 
Cating piston-rod having a piston contained 
said hollow piston-rod, and provided with 
in the piston-chamber, said piston-chamber, 
endwise and turning movements therein, as 
an automatic valve for opening and closing 
and for the purposes specified. 
the inlet and exhaust passages to permit the 
5. The combination, in an instrument for 
compressed air to act to move the rod in one 
dentistry and other purposes, of a case having 
direction, and a spring to move the rod in a 
a piston-chamber, a piston movable therein, a 
reverse direction, a chamber connected with 
hollow piston-rod having inlet-ports d and 
the compressed-air supply pipe, and a valve 
escape-ports d, a compressed-air-supply cham 
for opening and closing the supply-passage, 
ber, d, a hollow valve, F, contained in said 
whereby upon the admission of compressed air 
chamber, and having holes which register with 
to Said chamber the said piston-rod is immedi 
the inlet and exhaust ports, the pin or studf, 
ately caused to be automatically reciprocated 
extending from the valve, the valve-actuating 
to deliver blows in rapid succession to the 
spring f", the shoulder f" upon the hollow 
hammer, as and for the purposes described. 
piston-rod, and the stop g and incline g", as 
ll. The combination, in an instrument for 
and for the purposes specified. 
dentistry and other purposes, of the case A, 
6. The combination, in an instrument for 
having a compressed-air passage or chamber, 
dentistry, of a piston adapted to be moved in 
d, the air-supply tube h", pipe h', valve-cham. 
one direction by compressed air and in a re 
berth, valve-seat h", valve H, spring h, and 
verse direction by an actuating-spring, a pis. push-rod h", as and for the purposes described, 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IIO 
II 5 
I 25 
4 
381,844 
12. The combination, in an instrument for ratchet-plate n, and a stud, m, as and for the 
dentistry and other purposes, of the recipro- purposes described. 
cating rod d, adapted to be moved in one di- 
rection by compressed air, an actuating-spring, 
5 E, and a tension-regulating device for vary- 
ing the tension upon the Spring E, comprising 
the collare', the spring pawl or hook M, the 
In presence of - 
F. F. RAYMOND, 2d, 
J. M. DOLAN. 
N. : 
PRESTON C. MORSE 
? 
- ??? 
??? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US381944.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MORTZ. 
FOLDING CARRIAGE TOP, 
- 
No. 381,944. 
Patented May 1, 1888. 
 
 
 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington.o. c. 
 
Jas ea 2. 172e2Za. 
Inventor 
2. c26%ze 
4.44% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH MORTZ, OF CORRY, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
FRANK. S. BARNEY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FOLDING CARRIAGE-top. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 381,944, dated May 1, 1888. 
Application filed IDecember 14, 1887. Serial No. 257,919. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JosepH MORTZ, a citi. 
zen of the United States, residing at Corry, in 
the county of Erie and State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve. 
ments in Folding Carriage-Tops; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable. others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
forning part of this specification. 
My invention consists in the improvements 
in folding carriage-tops hereinafter set forth 
and explained, and illustrated in the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure is a perspective view of my im 
proved folding carriage-top. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged view of a section of the same. 
Like letters refer to like parts in all the fig 
leS 
In the construction of my improved car 
riage-top shown I make the central bow, A 
in a continuous piece and secure the lower 
ends thereof to the vehicle-seat in the usual 
manner. On the upright portions A of the 
bOWA, a short distance below the curves B B 
thereof, I secure thereto clips C, having ears a 
c on each side thereof, into which braces D D 
are secured by means of pintles. Below the 
clips C, I place sleeves E, adapted to slide up 
and down on the upright portions A of the 
bOW A. On the upper ends of these sleevesE, 
Imake ears e, into which the ends of the front. 
and back bows, FF, are secured by means of 
pintles, the bows FF extending horizontally 
therefrom to the points G. The lower ends of 
the braces D are secured thereto by means of 
pintles g. At the points G the bows F F 
curve upward to the points H, where they are 
bent in Ward, so as to form the horizontal por 
tion H thereof, to which the ends of the cover 
are Secured. On the outer sides of the sleeves 
E, I hinge the upper ends of the angle-braces 
I. These braces I are hinged at their lower 
ends, I, to a stud-pin at the back of the ve 
hicle-seat K. Near the center of this brace I, 
I make a hinge, J, adapted to break back, as 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1. From the 
hinges J the braces I extend to points L on the 
outside of the upright parts A of the bow A, 
at which point angles II are formed in the 
braces L., so that the parts N thereof are par 
allel with the parts A of the bow A when the 
top is up. At the angles L in the braces I, I 
Secure angle-braces O by means of pintles l, 
these braces O having at their lower ends lon. 
gitudinal slots P and at the upper ends of the 
slots P, on the front sides thereof, transverse 
slots Q, these slots P and Q connecting with 
each other, so that the stud-pins Rin the out 
side of the upright portions A of the bows A. 
will pass freely from one end of the slot to the 
other. On the inside of the upright portions 
A? of the bow A, I secure hooks S, adapted to 
engage with stud-pins T on the inner side of 
the sleeves E, as and for the purpose herein 
after set forth. 
In operation, for lowering the top and fold. 
ing the braces together, as illustrated in Fig. 
1, the braces I are pushed back, as shown in 
dotted lines in Fig. 1, which operation acts 
upon the brace O to move the central bow, A, 
backward, the upper end of the brace I at the 
same time moving the sleeves E. downward 
upon the portions A of the bow A until the 
front and back bows, F and F, are drawn to 
gether, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 1, the 
bow A meanwhile being drawn entirely down 
on the back of the vehicle-seat K. When it 
is desired to lower the top without folding it 
together, the hooks S are secured upon the 
stud-pins T. The lower ends of the braces O 
are then moved forward until the stud-pins R. 
are out of the transverse slots Q. The braces 
I are then broken back, and the stud-pin R, 
sliding in the slot P in the brace O, allows the 
top to be lowered back without folding the 
bows F and F together against the bow A. 
Having thus fully described my invention 
so as to enable others to construct and operate 
the same, what I claim as new, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
1. The combination, in a carriage-top, of a 
central bow hinged to a vehicle, having side 
bows secured thereto by means of sliding 
sleeves and braces, and braces hinged to the 
back of the vehicle-seat and to said sliding 
sleeves, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
1S- 
o 
IS 
25 
35 
4) 
45 
55 
65 
75 
w 
95 
OO 
 
38,944 
O 
2. The combination, in a carriage-top, of a 
central bow hinged to the front of the seat, 
with front and back horizontal bowshinged to 
sleeves adapted to slide up and down on said 
central bow, and braces hinged to the central 
and front and back bows above said sliding 
sleeves, with hinged angle-braces extending 
from said sliding sleeves to stud-pins at the 
back of the vehicle-seat, and braceshinged to 
Said angle-braces and to stud-pins in the cen 
tral bow, A, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. The combination, in a carriage-top, of the 
upright central bow, A, hinged to the seat K, 
with the horizontal bows F and E' hinged to 
the sliding sleeves E, and the braces D D, and 
braces I and O, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
4. In a carriage-top, the combination of the 
upright bow. A with bows FF, having curves 
- 
25 
G and H therein, so as to conform to the con 
tour of the top, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth, 
5. The combination, in a carriage-top, of the 
upright bow A, the bows FF, hinged to the 
sleeves E, and the braces D, the braces I, and 
the slotted brace O with the hooks: S and 
stud-pins T on the sleeves E, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination, in a carriage-top, of the 
braces I with the braces O for folding together 
and lowering a carriage-top, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH MORTZ. 
Witnesses: 
A. F. Boi, E, 
C. P. ROGERs, Jr. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382045.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 382,045, 
H. G. LEHNER, 
DRUM, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 1, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
| 
 
 
| 
?|||||||||||||||||||||| 
Fiiiiiiiiiii 
???? 
???????????? 
N. PeTefs. Photo-Lithograph.cr. Wasitington, D.C. 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
H. G. LEHINIERT. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 382045. 
DRUM, 
Patented May 1, 1888, 
YZSYLLLLLLYiDYDLDDDDL LiLu Dq qiLiiLLLiLLLLLLLLY Z? 
S0SYY0LL0L0LLLL LLLLLLLLLLLLLSLLLLLSLLLLLSLLLLLLSAAALSSSSSSSLSLSSSSLLLSSLSLLLLLLLLLLLS 
r 37 
z R 
f 
 
2EEEEEEEEEEEEEEvwwe 
22), Elli---- 
 
  
its. 
as: 
&Vzesses. 
 
 
PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C., 
(No Model.) 
H. G. LEHINIERT. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 382,045, 
Patented May 1, 1888. 
DRUM, 
N 
N n 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY G. LEEINERT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DRUM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 382,045, dated May i, 1888. 
Application filed July 30, 1886. Serial No. 209,585. (No model.) 
5 
O 
? 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY G. LEEINERT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Drums, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
drums; and it consists, first, informing the up 
per edge of the shell thereof of a curved form, 
as hereinafter set forth, whereby the batter 
head when stretched thereon will assume a 
convex form. 
- It further consists of the construction and 
combination of parts, as hereinafter set forth 
and claimed. 
My invention is particularly designed to 
cause a greater rebounding of the drum-heads 
and snares when beaten, and a greater reso 
nance to be imparted than can be accomplished 
by drums constructed in accordance with the 
method previously used, as will be more fully 
understood from the following description. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, Figure is a plan 
view of the drum, looking upon the batter 
head. Fig.2 is a vertical section taken through 
the broken line a ac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a top 
view of the drum with the batter-head re 
moved. Fig. 4 is a side elevation. Fig. 5, 
Sheet 2, is a plan view of the shell, flesh-hoop 
B, and stiffening inner hoop, B. Figs. 6 and 
7 are vertical sectional views of the same, 
taken, respectively, through the broken lines 
yy and 2 & of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 8 is a face view, on 
an enlarged scale, of the upper end of the shell, 
showing the snare beds or recesses b. Fig. 9 
is a top or plan view of same. Fig. 10 is a 
vertical section of same. Fig. 11 is a vertical 
section, upon an enlarged Scale, of the upper 
end of the shell, taken through a line central 
with the series of snare-bed. Fig. 12 is a like 
view taken through a line at right angles to 
that of Fig. 11. 
Like letters of reference in all the figures 
indicate the same parts. 
A represents the shell or cylinder of the 
drum. 
B B' are flesh-hoops, over which the circum 
- 
ference of the drum - heads are stretched or 50 
lapped. 
CC are top and bottom confining-hoops rest 
ing upon the flesh-hoops B. 
D is the batter-head, immediately beneath 
which and within the drum are arranged the 55 
series of snares a, which may be made of gut, 
rawhide, cord, metal, or material most appli 
cable for the purpose that will rapidly rebound 
when the head is beaten. These snares rest 
in beds or recesses b at opposite points of the 6o 
circumference of the shell, so as to permit of 
the head being equally stretched upon its sur 
face, and their ends extend out through and 
beneath the hoops B and C to the exterior of 
the shell. At one point upon the periphery 65 
the ends are confined in the strip c and re 
main stationary, while the opposite ends are 
rigidly secured between the opposing faces of 
the clamp E, that is actuated by means of the 
vertical screw - rod G, passing through the 
clamp, and whose upper end turns freely in a 
socket and bears against the brace H, whereby 
a requisite degree of tension may be given to 
the series of snares throughout their length to 
produce a proper rebounding effect by turn 
ing the screw-rod by its thumb-piece d to the 
right, which draws the clamp and connected 
ends of the snares downward; or they may be 
relaxed from contact with the under side of 
the batter-head by imparting a reverse motion 8o 
to the rod. I do not confine myself to this de 
vice for imparting tension or relaxation to 
the series of Snares. 
The inner surface of the batter-head is made 
slightly convex, its circumference following 
the curves of a pair of concave arcs or seg. 
ments of circles, as seen in Figs. 2, 6, 7, 11, and 
12, upon the upper end and outer edge of the 
shell, said arcs commencing at the outer edges 
of the snare-beds and curving slightly down 
Ward, forming excavations in which the pe. 
riphery of the batter-head rests. 
In Fig. 11 the broken line a c a represents 
an imaginary line drawn on a horizontal plane 
across the diameter of the upper end of the 
shell parallel with the upper edges of the se 
ries of snare beds or recesses b, while the 
line between the points a da represents the 
85 
9O 
95 
25 
35 
45 
2 
382,045 
IO 
15 
line of curvature throughout its length of one 
made with a greater variety and distinctness 
of the concave arcs or segments that are 
of tone than by or with drums constructed in 
formed upon one half of the upper end of the 
accordance with old methods. 
shell, there being a corresponding concave arc 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
upon the opposite half of the shell. 
by Letters Patent- 
The space shown in Figs. 11 and 12 between 
1. A drum having a shell with two opposite 
the letters a d represents the extremity of the 
concave recesses in the top thereof, substan 
depth of curvature between the horizontal 
ally as for the purpose set forth. 
2. The shell A, having the pair of concave 
line and the curve or arc of the circle. The 
object of such formation is to obtain a rigid 
arcs formed upon the outer edge of its up 
and tightly stretched head and snares, pro 
per end, whereby convexity is given to the 
ducing greater rebounding qualities than when 
under surface of the batter-head contiguous to 
they are arranged upon a level plane. 
the series of snares resting longitudinally 
One advantage in forming the drum with 
thereon, substantially in the manner herein 
two series of snares, the upper set of which 
shown and described. 
rest beneath the batter-head, and giving a 
3. The combination, with the shell or cylin 
slight convexity to the under surface of the 
der of a drum, having the pair of concave 
arcs upon the upper end, whereby convexity 
head which comes into contact with the snares, 
is to gain greater volume of tone, which is 
is given to the under surface of the batter-head, 
sharper and more distinct than is produced 
of a series of snares whose end portions rest 5 
by the use of but the ordinary outer or lower within recesses formed for their reception in 
set common to drums heretofore used, as both 
said shell, and means for imparting tension or 
sets of snares act simultaneously. Another 
relaxation to said series of smares, substan 
advantage gained is that the drum will have 
tially in the manner herein shown and de 
an equal volume of tone and resonance to those 
Scribed. 
made with but one set of Snares should the 
lower or snare-head, or the snares resting there 
on, become broken or in any manner unfit for 
use. Another advantage gained is that the 
3o crescendo or decrescendo effect can be easier 
THOMAS J. BEWLEY, 
WILLIAMI KAEMPFFE. 
HENRY G. LEHINEIRT. 
- 
45 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382145.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK. W. DICK, OF GLASGOW, COUNTY OF LAN ARK, SCOTLAND. 
PSTON WATER-METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 382,145, dated May 1, 1888. 
Application filed October 19, 1887. Serial No. 252,805. (No model.) Patented in England October 9, 1886, No, 12,859. 
- 
25 
40 
5 
5C) 
 
65 
To all iuhon, it 7) aly concern. 
Be it known that I, FRANK WESLEY DICK, 
a subject of the Queen of Great Britain and 
Ireland, and a resident of Glasgow, in the 
county of Lanark, Scotland, have invented 
certain Improvements in Apparatus Usable 
as a Meter or Motor, (for which a British patent 
has been applied for, to be dated October 9, 
1886, No. 12,859,) of which the following is a 
specification. . 
My said invention has for its object to im 
prove the construction of apparatus usable as 
a meter or motor, to simplify the valve details 
of such apparatus, and to render the appara 
tus certain and accurate in action. 
An example of my improved apparatus ar 
ranged as a water-meteris shown on an accom 
panying sheet of explanatory drawings. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation; Fig. 2, a verti. 
cal section; Fig. 3, a horizontal section; Fig. 
4, a plan of the valve; Fig. 5, a plan of a frame 
for guiding the valve; Fig. 6, a plan of the 
piece in which the port-face. and ports are 
formed; Fig. 7, a horizontal section of the 
middle of the meter as with the part shown in 
Fig. 6 removed, and Fig. 8 a plan showing 
the device for acting on the counting mech. 
In the drawings the same reference-numerals 
are used to mark the same or like parts where 
ever they are repeated. 
In carrying out my invention I employ four 
single-acting cylinders, 11 12 13 14, placed 
with their axes radiating from a center. These 
cylinders--which, for convenience, are fitted 
with inner or lining shells having pistons 15 
working in them-have their outer ends closed 
by covers 16, while their inner ends are open 
to the central part of a casting in which they 
are formed. The pistons 15 are connected in 
pairs by diametrically-placed plates 17, serv 
ing as piston-rods, which are flat at the parts 
that pass each other and serve mutually alon 
with other guiding parts to support each other 
and prevent the pistons 15 from turning. The 
water has access by the inlet-pipe 18 and port 
19 to the central part of the casing and pro 
ceeds to the cylinder ends bypassages 20, hav 
ing ports 21 in a port-face formed on a piece, 
22, (shown separately in Fig. 6,) the port-face 
being parallel to the plane containing the axes 
of the cylinders, while the water leaves the 
meter by an exhaust-port, 23, in the center of 
the port-face. There is a single valve, 24, for 
all the cylinders, and this valve is of a square 
form in the modification shown in the draw 55 
ings. An important peculiarity of the valve. 
is that it always exposes two of the four ports 
and always covers the other two. The valve 
24, is moved by the piston-rod plates 17, which 
are formed with rectangular openings, within 
which the valve is placed, the openings being 
longer and broader than the valve. The 
breadth of each opening in plate 17 exceeds 
that of the valve by the extent of stroke in 
tended to be given to the valve, while the 
length exceeds the breadth of the valve by 
the length of stroke of the pistons less the 
stroke of the valve. The valve 24 is conse 
quently moved when the outward stroke of 
each piston is being completed, its center be 
ing moved in succession along the sides of a 
Square; or, in other words, it travels in a rect 
angular path, and it may consequently be 
termed a 'four-motion valve. The valve 24 
is prevented from turning by a frame or bridle, 
25, Fig. 5, which fits two of its sides, this 
bridle 25 being itself guided between guide. 
flanges 26, formed on the port-face piece 22. 
The bridle 25 can move in one direction be 
tween the guides 26, but cannot turn, while 
the valve 24 can move in a direction at right 
angles to that of the bridle's motion, but can 
not turn; and, further, to prevent displace 
ment of the valve 24, it is provided with a cen. 
tral pin on its upper side, and a pin or spin 
"dle, 27, projects downward, So as to prevent 
the valve from getting into a central position. 
With this arrangement of the valve 24 and of 
the parts acting on it it can never be left in 
a position in which it will prevent the restart 
ing of the meter, as the movements which each 
pair of pistons imparts to the valve do not 
close or open the passages of the cylinders of 
that pair of pistons. Should the water be 95 
shut off when a valve movement is only partly 
effected, then on the water being let on again 
the pistons that were moving the valve must 
go to the end of their stroke and complete the 
valve's movement, 
The valve may be of a circular form, but 
will in that case require to be larger for the 
same area of port. The valve, if circular, may 
be left free to turn on its center, so that it will 
85 
anism, 
. 
l 
90 
75 
OO 
2 
m 
382,145 
stantially as and for the purposes herein set 35 
Io 
25 
 
The movements of the pistons are made to forth. 
be continually changing its contacts with the wheel acted on by the said two pins and fixed 
port-face and will consequently tend to wear on a spindle of the counting mechanism, sub 
truer rather than the reverse. 
2. A meter or motor having, in combina 
act on the counting mechanism 28, which may 
be of any convenient kind, through the spin- tion, cylinders radiating from a center, pistons 
dle 27, which has fixed on it a star-wheel, 29, working in the cylinders and attached to pis 
in a position just above the upper piston-rod ton-rod plates formed with rectangular open- 4o 
plate, 17. This plate has fixed in it two pins, ings, and a four-motion valve in the openings 
30, which as the pistons reciprocate act alter. of the piston-rod plates and working on a 
nately on opposite sides of the star-wheel 29, port-face in a rectangular path, substantially 
and thereby make the spindle rotate step by as and for the purposes herein set forth. . . 
3. A four-motion valve for a meter or motor 
Step. 
Two or more double acting cylinders or two in combination with plates or rods moved by 
pistons and arranged to separately and Suc. 
or more pairs of single acting cylinders may 
be arranged with a single valve operated sub- cessively move the valve in directions corre 
stantially as hereinbefore described; and such sponding to the four sides of a square, sub 
sets of cylinders with single valves may be 
arranged to be worked with steam or other forth. 
4. A four-motion valve for a meter or motor, 
fluid under pressure, as motors for working 
pumps or other reciprocating apparatus, the a center pin on the upper side of said valve, 
power being transmitted by piston-rods ex- and a downwardly-projecting stationary spin 
tended through stuffing-boxes in the cylinder dle or pin placed centrally to keep away the 55 
center pin of the valve, substantially as herein 
ends or covers. 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
radiating from a center, pistons working in to this specification in the presence of two sub 
the cylinders and attached to piston-rod plates scribing witnesses. 
formed with rectangular openings, a four-mo. 
tion valve in the openings of the piston-rod 
plates and working on a port-face, two pins 
fixed on the upper piston-rod plate, and a star 
What I claim as my invention is- 
1. A meter or motor consisting of cylinders 
stantially as and for the purposes herein set 50 
FRANK W. DICK. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID FERGUSON, 
R. B. KINNIBURGH. 
5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382245.txt	(No Model.) 
N. STADLER. 
SCAFFOLD AND STAGING, 
No. 382,245, 
Patented May 1, 1888. 
IwVEWTOR. 
42 coazz. saazer. 
43 
Attorneys. 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NICHOLAS STADLER, OF MANITOWOC, WISCONSIN. 
SCAF FOLD AND STAG ING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 382,245, dated May 1, 1888. 
Application filed January 10, 1888. Serial No. 260,369. 
(No model.) 
O 
IS 
To all, whom it mazy concern: 
Be it known that I, NICHOLAs STADLER, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Manitowoc, in the county of Mani 
5 towoc and State of Wisconsin, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Scaf. 
folds and Staging, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
This invention pertains to certain new and 
useful improvements in scaffolds, having for 
its object the provision of a new and improved 
device for raising the scaffold-sections the de 
sired extent so as to place thereon the ends 
of the foot-boards and firmly hold the ele 
Wated parts at the desired point. 
The invention comprises the detail construc 
tion, combination, and arrangement of parts, 
substantially as hereinafter fully set forth, and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view inside elevation of my invention with 
a portion of the inclosing-casing removed. 
Fig. 2 is a front view thereof, showing parts 
25 broken away. Fig. 3 is a detail view of the 
inclosing casing or post. Fig. 4 is a detail view 
of the operating-lever. Fig. 5 is a detail view 
of the upperend of the post, showing the means 
employed for securing the end of the cross 
plank; and Fig.6 represents front and side 
views of the post or bar and extensible section. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
inclosing casing or post, provided with a front 
removable section, a, which is held in its nor 
35 mal position by a top cap, a?, having a de 
pending flange, al", and lower side hooks, a, 
engaging eyes, as shown. In the upper por. 
tion of the rear of the post is formed an open 
ing, a, opposite to which, in the front remov. 
able section, is a second opening, a', as shown. 
B is a spur wheel or pinion secured upon a 
shaft, b, passed through suitable bearings on 
the front section, a, and upon the outer pro 
jecting end of this shaft is keyed a ratchet 
45 wheel, b, as shown. The wheel or pinion Bis 
preferably provided with a hexagonal-shaped 
Opening to fit a correspondingly-shaped por 
tion of the shaft b, and it is thus held rigid 
with said shaft. 
C is a lever provided with a finger, b, de 
signed to engage the teeth of the ratchet 
wheelb, said lever being secured in position by 
SO 
3O 
55 
eye-plates b, passed onto the shaft b on either 
side of the wheel b. 
D is a vertically-sliding post or bar designed 
to pass through the casing or post A and cap 
a', and is provided on its front side with a 
toothed segment or rack-bar, d, with which en 
gages the wheel or pinion B. To the cap dis 
secured a pawl, d, designed to engage with the 
rack-bard, and thereby hold the sliding post 
or bar in its elevated position. To the top of 
the cap a' are also secured pawls d' d', the 
ends of which bear against the sides of the . 
post or bar D. The upper end of the sliding 6 
5 
post or bar ID is provided with an offset or 
shoulder, d, whereon rests the cross-plank E. 
of the scaffold, said plank being secured in po 
sition by means of two corresponding plates 
or straps, ee, secured to the sides of the up 
per end of the post or bar D, said plates or 
straps being connected by bolts e', whereon 
work handled nuts e, whereby the operator 
can readily fasten or loosen the hold on said 
cross-plank. 
To the front, rear, and sides of the casing or 
post A are pivotally secured or hinged the 
upper inner ends of inclined braces or sup: 
porting-bars F. F, the outer lower ends of 
which bear upon the ground or floor to hold 8o 
the post A steady in position. 
In practice the ends of the cross-planks are 
secured to the upper ends of the sliding posts 
or bars of two similar raising or elevating de 
vices, and when it is desired to raise or ele 
vate said cross-plank the same is effected by 
the operator grasping the lever C, and bearing 
down thereon will effect the turning of the 
wheel b and shaft b, together with the spur 
wheel or pinion B, which, engaging with the 
rack-bar d of the sliding post or bar, will ef. 
fect the raising thereof, said rack-bar being 
also engaged with the pawls d and d", which 
holds said post or bar in position, when the op 
erator can, if desired, repeat this operation and 95 
raise the post or bar to a still greater extent. 
As it is often desirable to elevate the post or 
bar D beyond the limit of which it is itself 
capable, I have formed in the lower end of 
said post or bar a groove or recess, f, wherein roo 
is designed to be secured the upper end of an 
extensible section, G, (shown in Fig. 6,) said 
section being a counterpart of the post or bar 
D. When the post or bar D has been elevated 
go 
7 
 
382.245 
- 
2. The casing or post having the cap on its 3o 
ing post or bar operated by a pinion and lever, 
and the extensible sections capable of being 
secured to said post or bar, substantially as 
shown and described. 
upper end, the sliding post or bar having a 
rack-bar on its front face, the single pawl d', 
engaging said rack-bar, and the pawls secured 
to said cap and bearing against the sides of 
said post or bar, substantially as shown and 35 
described. 
3. As an improvement in scaffolds, the cas 
ing or post having a removable front section, 
the sliding post or bar having a recessed lower 
end, and the extensible section designed to be 4o 
secured to said grooved end of the post or bar, 
substantially as shown, and for the purpose 
stated. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
NICHOLAS STADLER. 
- 
Witnesses: 
C. A. YIELOW, 
JoHN CHLOUPLK. 
to near its full extent and it is desired to still 
further raise the same, the extensible section 
G is secured thereto by removing the front 
Section, a, of the casing or post A and bolting 
5 the ends of said post or bar and section to 
gether by bolts g, the opening a' in the rear 
of said casing or post enabling this to be done. 
After this is accomplished, the front section, 
a, is replaced, and by manipulating the lever 
Io the posts or bars can be still further elevated 
and the scaffolding formed upon the cross 
planks. By means of the pawls d' d'all down 
ward movement of the post or baris prevented. 
From the foregoing description of my inven 
15 tion it will be seen that I have provided sim 
ple and highly efficient means for securing the 
ends of a cross-plank of a scaffold, and also for 
raising or elevating the same to any desired ex 
tent and firmly holding the same when ele 
25 wated. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the casing or post 
having a removable front section and an open 
ing in its rear wall, and the cap having the 
25 pawls connected thereto, of the vertically-slid 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382345.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 382,345. 
T. D. WORR ALL. 
PRINTING PRESS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 8, 1888. 
Zig. VI. 
(No Model.) 
No. 382,345, 
T. D., WORR ALL, 
PRINTING PRESS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 8, 1888. 
ZE.2, 
- 
Zr ve n do v. 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
- 
T. D. WORR ALL, 
PRINTING PRESS, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 382,345, 
- 
Patented May 8, 1888. 
S.E.2%t. 
1632, 
. 
. 
Z 2 2/ e - d or, 
6-, 2, 4-1-1. 
2-S- 
No. 382,345. 
Patented May 8, 1888. 
 
/ 7 o'e 7 to 7, 
2. W-4. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS D. WORRALL OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, 
PRINTING-PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 382,345, dated May 8, 1888. 
Application filed January 20, 1887. Serial No. 224,968. (No model.) 
s 
65 
- 
to all whon, it may concern: 
platen at the dotted lines d, Fig. VII, and 
more clearly seen at din Fig. VI. 
Be it known that I, THOMAs D. WoRRALL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Lynn, 
At d, in lever D, is a hook or crow-bill with 
in the county of Essex and State of Massachu 
an inner wedge-shaped surface, made to im 
setts, have invented new and useful Improve 
pinge against the under side of the rod B when 
ments in Printing-Presses for Printing in One 
operated by the lever D and made to engage 
the rod B. The wedge shape is shown by the 
or More Colors, for which I desire to obtain 
Letters Patent, of which the following is a 
dotted line extending from the cross-rod B to 
specification. 
the hook or crow-bill, at d. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
For convenience in description, I will call the 
presses for printing in one or more colors, and two cross-rods B the **front and rear cross 
rods B. The movable platens C C are jour 
for printing several sheets of paper from one 
and the same form, and for devices for hold 
naled to the rear cross rod B at c', and are 
ing type in the bed of the said press, as here 
made to move laterally over the whole surface 
of the bed of the press, so as to enable them to 
inafter described and claimed. 
make a printed impression in any desired part 
To enable others skilled in the art to con 
of the bed without printing any other part of 
struct and use my invention it is herein de 
a sheet that may lay for the time being on the 
scribed as follows. 
Fig. I is a front view of my printing-press. 
preSS. There are two or more of these mov 
Fig. II is an end view of the same. Fig. III 
able platens, one of which may be used to 
is a section showing the device by which 
print a letter or bill head, and the other to 
the saturated printing-paper or other fabric 
print the name, date, &c., after a letter has 
and the paper to be printed are fed through 
been printed, without again printing the head; 
the press over the printing-type. Fig. IV are 
or, after the letter has been written by pen or 7 
detached rollers or cylinders, showing how a 
type-writer, the name may be printed at the 
number of sheets can be printed at one and 
end thereof in any part of the sheet. These 
platens, being pivoted on the rear rod B, may 
the same operation. Fig. V is one of the roll 
ers for carrying a number of narrow strips of 
be swung upward, so as to admit of laying the 
saturated colored paper or other fabric across 
sheet to be printed on the face of the type, and 
the face of the type. Fig. VI is a cross sec 
then brought down, and when down the lever 
tion of the movable platen, with its impres 
D is raised, and the hook or crow-bill made 
sion-lever, showing the manner in which the 
to engage with the front CrOSS-bar B, and as 
printed impression is made. Fig. VII is a top 
the lever is pulled over, the wedge-shaped sur 
view of one of the movable platens. Fig. VIII 
face, acting on the under side of the cross-rod, 85 
depresses the platen, thus making the printed 
is the upper side of the bed with its flanges, 
impression. 
movable cross-bars for holding the type in po 
sition, and an improved type-holder. Fig. 
It will be seen that in this device I have the 
advantage of the lever and wedge, the wedge 
IX is a vertical view of one of the flanges, 
acting on the lower edge of the bar B, forcing 
showing the manner of its attachment to the 
bed of the press. Fig. Xis the under side of the 
down the platen, and thus insuring a good im 
bed of the press. Fig. XI is a skeleton paper 
ression. 
holder or fly for holding saturated printing 
Fig. X is the under side of the bed of the 
paper. Fig. XII is a view of the multiform 
press, so constructed that it may be raised or 
paper-holder for use when required to print 
lowered, so as to regulate the impression on 
detached leaves of paper, cards, envelopes, &c. 
the type. E are diagonal braces in the cast 
A is the frame of the press, held together by 
ing for strengthening the bed. Four holes 
the cross-bars a and the cross-rods B, and the 
-one at each corner, at e-are countersunk 
latter being held securely in place by the 
to receive the ends of set-screws, as seen at F 
in Fig. II, by means of which the bed is raised 
screw-nuts b. 
or lowered to regulate the impression. 
c is the front end of the movable platen C. 
D is animpression-lever journaled into the 
Fig. VIII is the upper side of the bed H, in 
95 
IOC 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
SC 
 
382,345 
- 
which, at G, are provided flanges for holding 
the form of type in the bed. G, Fig. IX, is a 
front view of one of these flanges, in which, at 
o, is a recess running nearly across the bed. 
His the edge of the bed, to which these flanges 
are securely fastened by screws, as seen ath. 
These flanges are secured to the bed so as to 
be flush with both edges thereof, and thus a 
slot is formed by the recess g. 
I are one or more cross-bars, made to slide 
back and forth in this slot g over the whole 
length of the bed, for the purpose of holding 
the type in any desired part thereof. These 
sliding cross-bars are held securely in place by 
thumb or other nuts, i, thus firmly holding the 
type in position. These cross-bars may be 
slotted, so as to hold type for the name of a 
writer, with date or other useful matter, and 
thus may be made to move to the end of a long 
or short letter, as may be required, after the 
letter has been written by pen or otherwise. 
This device is clearly seen in the drawings, 
Fig. VIII, at R. 
Ink may be applied to the face of the type 
in this press as in any other; but it is my pur 
pose generally to dispense with its use and to 
substitute therefor paper, or other fabric sat 
urated in pigment, for dry printing, and which, 
when dry or partially dry, is placed between 
the type and the paper to be printed. I do 
this as follows, viz: At J, Figs. II and III, are 
seen rollers extending across the press and at 
both ends thereof. Upon these rollers wind 
my prepared paper and let it extend acroSS 
the whole length of the press, over the face 
of the type and between the face of the type 
and the platen. By laying the print-paper on 
the top of this prepared paper or other pre 
pared fabric over the type and drawing down 
the platen, as above described, I make my 
printed impression in one color. At J, I in 
sert a second pair of rollers, turned into a set 
of continuous reels, as seen at J in Fig. V. 
These I fill with narrow ribbons, of paper, 
silk, or other suitable fabric, saturated in dif 
ferent colors from that of the base paper be 
fore alluded to, and stretch them over the face 
of the first continuous sheet, and by printing, 
as before, I have printed the base in one and 
the stripes in many colors. The print paper 
can be fed in single sheets by hand, as seen in 
Fig. XII, or from a continuous roll, as seen in 
the drawings at J in Fig. III. 
I find from experiments made that by du 
plicating the above arrangement I can print 
several copies at one and the same time. I 
do this in the manner illustrated in Fig. IV, 
in which rollers 1, 3, 5, and 7 carry my satu 
rated paper, and rollers 2, 4, and 6 the paper 
to be printed. By interposing the narrow 
strips of paper over the rollers 3, 5, and 7, as 
in the process above described, I can print 
several copies in colui's at one and the same 
impression. 
Rollers for carrying colored strips can be 
arranged to carry the strips across the press 
, 
diagonally as well as longitudinally, and thus 
give checkered printing in many colors. 
Where it is desirable to print a number of 
copies at one and the same time from single 
leaves, instead of continuous rolls of paper, I 
attach to the rollers J or to the frame of the 
press a number of thin fly or paper frames or 
holders. Said flies may be made of card-board 
or thin metal frames, as shown at Q, Fig. XI. 
Over these flies are stretched the saturated 
printing-sheets. At the lower end of each of 
these flies I make two or more perforations, 
by means of which they are kept in place on 
an open ring, which acts as a common hinge, 
holding them in place and admitting of their 
being lowered or raised, or opened and shut, 
like the leaves of a book. This device is seen 
at Fig. XII, in which K is the open ring, two 
of which are made to slip over the rod or 
roller J, ati, as seen in Fig. II, one at each end 
of said roller. The aperture j in Fig. XII is 
that through which the roller passes when 
placing the open rings or fly-holders in posi 
tion. The flies being threaded or hinged on 
the open rings are in position to be folded 
down upon the face of the type T, lying on 
the bed of the press. In Fig. XII all but one 
are seen in fan shape standing at L. The one 
at L is turned down on the face of the type. 
One being thus brought down on the type, I 
now lay on it a loose sheet of paper to be 
printed. I then bring down a second fly, with 
its saturated paper, and place it on a second 
loose sheet of paper to be printed, and so con 
tinue until I have brought down as many as 
can be clearly printed at one operation, and 
when all are thus ready I bring down the 
platen and make the impression in the man 
ner previously described. 
By stretching the narrow ribbons across al 
ternate flies printing in colors can be done as 
in the above-described method; but in order 
to do printing either on rolls of paper or loose 
sheets both devices are necessary in every 
press-one for rolls and one for loose sheets. 
One object of my invention is to supply a 
press for office or popular use; and to this end 
I have endeavored to simplify the method of 
holding type in the bed of the press, by in 
venting a new and useful type-holder, which 
consists of any desired number of strips or 
plates of metal, in each end of which I drill 
holes, through which connecting screw-rods 
are passed. The outside plate is tapped at 
each end to receive the screw-rods. I divide 
these strips by means of slotted plates of the 
exact thickness of the type to be used, leaving 
the openings to receive the type, and I make 
thern changeable, so as to receive different 
kinds of type. The short dividing-plates are 
slotted, so as to admit of their being pushed 
against the rows of type to hold themsecurely 
in place, and the slots are open at one end, so 
that the plates can be readily withdrawn and 
others of greater or less thickness inserted, as 
the different thickness of type may demand, 
IC) 
25 
5 
55 
65 
75 
8 5 
90 
ICO 
ICS 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
382,345 
3 
- 
5. In combination with the bed and platen 35 
When the desired form is set up, it is se- 
3. The combination, with the type-bed, of a 
curely locked by means of the rod running series of independently-pivoted and laterally 
through the whole. This device is shown in movable platens. 
its true place-on the bed of my press, O, Fig. 
4. The combination, with the pivoted platen 
VIII, in which M is one of the plates, lying on and adjustable bed, of the operating-lever piv- 3o 
its side, with the holes drilled through the two oted directly to the platen, and the cross-rod 
ends in m. 
extending the whole length of the press-frame, 
N is the slotted dividing-plate, also lying on the lever engaging the rod after the manner of 
its side. At n, in M, the slotted plate is seen a wedge. 
in position. 
PP are the connecting and locking rods, a series of holders furnished with saturated 
passing through the series of plates to p p, paper or strips, the strips being of different 
where they are tapped into the plates. The colors, whereby several impressions in one or 
writing on the form is designed to show how more colors may be made at once. 
6. In combination, the slotted bed-frame and 4o 
the dividing slotted plates are used for differ. 
ent thicknesses of type. 
7. The type-holder composed of perforated 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters bars, interposed slotted adjustable and inter 
Patent, is- 
changeable strips corresponding to the thick 
platen, pivoted, substantially as described, so up screws. 
as to be capable of lateral as well as vertical 
movement. 
2. The combination, with the type-bed, of a 
series of independently-pivoted platens. 
1. The combination, with the type-bed, of a ness of the type, and the clamping or locking- 45 
MELVILLE P. NICKERSON, 
JAMES.B. SILSBEE. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. D. WORRALL, 
the laterally-adjustable type-holders. 
5 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382445.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 382,445, 
C. H. TULLY. 
REVOLVING SEIOW CASE, 
Patented May 8, 1888. 
SS 
 
 
ls S N N22 
 
S 
2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2. 2 2 2. 2. A. 2 2 
2 2 
3. SN 
2 2 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
* 
. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
k N 
| 
 
2p --- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES H. TULLY, OF MIDDLETOWN, CALIFORNIA. 
REVOLVING SHOW. CAS E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters EPatent No. 382,445, dated May 8, 1888. 
Application filed August 25, 1887. Serial No. 24,883. 
(Notode.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
hanging articles upon, as shown. When the 
Beit known that I, CHARLES H. TULLY, of disk Orotates, carrying the hooks T around 
Middletown, Lake county, State of California, 
with it, these hooks are caused to rotate inde 
have invented an Improvement in Revolving 
pendent of the movement of the disk by means 
Show-Cases; and I hereby declare the follow 
of pulleys R and S and the connecting-belt. 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
The Shaft extends down into the base B below 
the same. 
the case A, and around this shaft is a belt 
My invention relates to a device for exhibit. 
pulley or drum, U, which is fixed stationary 
ing goods; and it consists of a series of duplex 
in the base B. A shaft, W, extends up through 
revolving shelves, tables, or hangers arranged 
the lower shelf, N, having a table, W, upon its 
Within an outer case with suitable driving 
upper end for the reception of any articles to 
mechanism, all of which will be more fully ex 
be exhibited. This shaft carries a pulley, X, 
plained by reference to the accompanying 
and a belt, Y, from this pulley to the station 
drawing, in which the figure is a vertical sec. 
ary pulley Userves to give motion to the shaft 
tion of my invention. 
W and table W as the main table is revolved. 
A is the exterior of my case, which is shown 
From the table W a rod or wire, Z, extends 
in the present case as conical and octagonal, 
upward into the table N, and has attached 
or any other shape, with glazed sides sup 
upon its upper end a pinion, a, which engages 
ported upon a suitable box or base, B, and 
a pinion, b, beneath the surface of the table c, 
having above the upper part an ornamental 
and by this mechanism the revolution of the 
tower, C, which serves to conceal the driving 
lower table, W, imparts motion to the table c 
mechanism of the upper portion. Through 
by means of the rod Z and pinions a. and b. 
One side of the roof or cap of this tower is a 
Upon the table c may be supported a rack, 
vertical shaft, D, having upon its upper end 
d, or other suitable device for exhibiting goods, 
a pulley, E, around which a belt, F, passes 
and it will be seen by this construction that 
from the driving-motor, which may be an en 
the various tables, being caused to rotate in 
gine, clock-work, or an electrical motor, as de 
opposite directions, will produce a very effect 
sired. The lower end of this pulley-shaft is 
ive exhibition of articles that may be placed 
stepped in a bearing at the bottom of the cap 
upon them. Through the upper part or roof 
of tower, and a short vertical shaft, G, is jour. 
of the top of the structure extends a shaft, e, 
naled SO that it stands parallel with the first 
and the upper end of the shaft L is connected 
named shaft. A gear-wheel, H, upon its up 
with it, so as to drive the shaft e. 
per end is engaged by a corresponding pinion, 
Various suspending hooks or arms.fmay be 
I, upon the driving-shaft, and by means of a 
supported from the spindlee, and upon the 
pulley, J, and a belt extending from this pull 
vertex, which forms a hardened point, is sus 
ley to the pulley K on the shaft L power is 
pended a magnetic needle. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
transmitted to the vertical shaft or standard 
M, which carries the shelves N. Above the 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
standard, and turning independently of it, is 
Patent, is 
a disk or plate, O, having a shaft passing 
1. The vertical central shaft and tables with 
through the top of the case, and upon its up. 
in the stationary outer case, the counter-shaft 
per end a pulley, P, which is operated from 
in the upper part of the structure and to one 
the counter-shaft by a pulley, Q, and a cross 
side of the central shaft, gears and pulleys 
belt, so that the shaft and disk O are driven in 
carried by said shafts, whereby said central 
an Opposite direction from the standard M 
shaft is caused to rotate, an underlying 
disk 
supported and loosely journaled about the 
and tables or shelves N. 
A pulley, R, is fixed stationary in the upper 
central axis, and pulleys by which it may be 
part of the case, and has a belt passing around 
rotated in the opposite direction from this axis, 
it and around another pulley, S, the shaft of 
in combination with a stationary pulley, R, in 
which is journaled near the rim of the disk O, 
the upper part of the case and a belt extend 
and, extending below, may have hooks T for ing from said pulley to a pulley, S, upon the 
65 
75 
9O 
95 
OO 
IO 
25 
45 
SO 
 
end which engage with corresponding gears in 
the supplemental upper tables, c, whereby 
they are caused to rotate in opposite direc 
tions while being carried around by the main 
tables N, substantially as herein described. 
4. In combination with the stationary outer 
case, the interior revolving shafts and tables, 
and the pulleys, shafts, and gears by which 
they are driven, the vertical shaft extending 
upwardly from the roof of the structure, hav 
ing the projecting arms f, with suspending 
hooks, and magnetic needle upon the vertex 
of the shaft e, said shaft being rotated in con 
junction with the interior tables and mechan 
ism, substantially as herein described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
C. H., TULLY. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. STRONG, 
S. H. NOURSE. 
382,445 
O 
shank of the hook T, whereby the latter will 
be rotated, substantially as herein described. 
2. The stationary case, with the vertical cen 
tral shaft and tables, mechanism whereby they 
S are rotated, in combination with supplemental 
tables W and shafts V in the base of the case 
journaled around the periphery of the main 
tables and having pulleys upon the shafts, a 
stationary central drum, U, at the base of the 
central shaft, around which belts pass to the 
pulleys X, so that the latter and the tables W. 
are caused to rotate, substantially as herein 
3. The exterior case, with the vertical cen 
shaft and tables and gearing 
whereby it is driven, the supplemental tables 
upon the lower of the main tables, with their 
shafts, pulleys, and belts, whereby they are 
rotated, in combination with the shaft extend 
ing from the lower tables, W, through the up 
per tables, N, having gears a upon their upper 
5 tral rotating 
described. 
W 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382545.txt	(No Model.) 
8 
H. C. & L. C. MINARD, 
TUG BUCKLE, 
No. 382,545, 
Patented May 8, 1888, 
  
 
SNSS& NS& 
SNKS S&N 
S&SN E 
- e - G 
 
 
7 NEN 
N. 
 
 
31-vovitov. 
Zorzee (2. 76erazzazz. 
Zizzrezee 6, 7ez-a- 
: 
Sy Z7eezltto lege 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE CLIFFORD MINARD AND LAURENCE CLARK MINARD, OF ST. 
CHARLES, IOWA. 
TUG BUCKLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 382,545, dated May 8, 1888. 
Application filed February 3, 1888. Serial No. 262,876. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, HoRACE CLIFFORD 
MINARD and LAURENCE CLARK MINARD, citi 
zens of the United States, residing at St. 
5 Charles, in the county of Madison and State. 
of Iowa, have invented new and useful, Im 
provements in Hame-Tug Sections, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
to hame-tug sections, and it has for its object to 
provide a section which will be more easily 
applied to the hame-tug than previous de 
vices, whereby when a section is broken after 
being attached to the tug a new section may 
I5 be substituted without ripping out the loops 
which have been formed in the tugs. 
The invention consists, mainly, in a section 
having removable rounds to which the ends 
of the portions of the tug are attached. 
The invention consists, further, in certain 
novel details of construction and arrangement 
of parts, which are hereinafter more fully de 
scribed in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the sec 
tion, showing the portions of the tug attached 
thereto. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of 
the same, taken centrally. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse section thereof on the line acac of Fig. 2. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, A. A 
designate the sides of the tug-section, and B 
designates the loop which is formed integral 
with the sides. The sides and loop are prefer 
ably formed of malleable iron. 
CC designate smooth apertures in one of the 
sides A, and C C designate tapped apertures 
in the other side, which are respectively 
aligned with the apertures C. C. 
Rounds DD are engaged in the aligned 
4O apertures, and are threaded at their ends to 
screw into the tapped apertures, and provided 
With screw or bolt heads at the other ends. 
It will be seen that by screwing the rounds 
into the tapped apertures the sides A A are 
EE represent sleeves or barrels which are 
mounted on the rounds DD and bear at their 
ends against the sides A A. When the sides 
45 drawn toward each other. 
35 
25 
 
are drawn in by the rounds, they bear tightly 
against the ends of the sleeves and hold the so 
latter rigid. 
- 
G G designate the portions of the hame-tug 
which are attached to the sleeves in the ordi 
nary manner-namely, by forming loops in 
their ends which embrace the said sleeves. 
The advantages of this invention will now 
be seen. When a section breaks, instead of 
being obliged to rip out the loops which are 
formed in the ends of the portions of the tug, 
in order to secure the said portions to the 66 
rounds of the new section, the sleeves are 
placed within the loops, and then the latter 
are placed in alignment with the apertures in 
the sides of the section and the rounds passed 
through, as described. It will be seen that 65 
this adjustment is accomplished in a very 
short time and all ripping and resewing of 
the tug are avoided. If preferred, the sleeves 
may remain loose on the rounds and they will 
then turn with the movements of the tug. 
Further, the sleeves may be omitted, if pre 
ferred, for the sake of simplicity; but we pre 
fer to use them as described. 
The body of the section may be made, as 
shown in the drawings, from sheet metal, which 75, 
is struck out and then bent to form the loop 
B, after which the rounds and their sleeves 
are attached. This manner of constructing 
the section enables it to be very cheaply and 
easily manufactured, as will be seen. 
- If preferred, smooth openings may beformed 
in both sides of the section, and the rounds 
may be passed entirely through and have nuts 
screwed on their projecting ends; but the form 
herein described is simpler and therefore 
preferable. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as follows: 
As an improved article of manufacture, the 
herein-described tug-section, comprising the 
parallel curved sides A. A., having the plain 
apertures C, and the tapped apertures C 
therein, respectively, the loop B, connecting 
the ends of the sides and forming a cross-bar 
perpendicular to the said sides, the removable 
rounds D, passing through the plain apertures 
95 
go 
- 
- 
. 
2 
382,545 
and having threaded ends engaging the tapped our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
apertures, and the loose sleeves E, mounted on in presence of two witnesses. 
the rounds between the sides A and bearing 
at their ends against the sides to maintain 
5 them in the proper relative positions, substan 
tially as specified. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
HORACE CLIFFORD MINARD. 
LAURENCE CLARK MINARD, 
C. F. WooD, 
JOHN HARTMAN. 
Witnesses: 
it, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382645.txt	 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 382,645, 
 
S. M. HAMBLIN, 
PICKER STICK FOR LOOMs. 
. 
Patented May 8, 1888, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN M. HAMBLIN, OF PLYMOUTH, MASS ACHUSETTS, 
PCKERST CK FOR LOOM S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 382,645, dated May 8, 1888. 
Application filed March 6, 1886. Serial No. 194,342. (No model.). 
In the drawing, which illustrates the inven 
tion, the figure shows a perspective view of the 25 
picker-stick constructed in accordance with my 
invention. 
Referring to the drawing, D is the body of 
the picker-stick, B is the opening in the mid 
dle of the same, and A is the interposed bridge. 3o 
The picker-stick in common use is made of 
a straight solid piece of material which is lia 
ble to rupture in the middle. My picker-stick 
has the advantages of strength without any in 
crease of weight. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
A picker-stick split or formed of two parts 
or members and having a bridge interposed 
between the said parts, as and for the purpose 4o 
set forth. 
35 
STEPHEN M. HAMBLIN. 
m 
Witnesses: 
SILVANUS HAMBLIN, 
WILLIAM. S. DUNHAM, 
5 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN M. HAMBLIN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Plymouth,in the county of Plymouth and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented a new and Im 
proved Picker-Stick for Looms, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in the con 
struction of picker-sticks used for the purpose 
of throwing shuttles back and forth through 
the loom. 
It consists of a picker-stick formed and con 
structed, as hereinafter described and shown, 
with an interposed bridge, somewhat after the 
manner of a truss construction. 
The picker-stick is formed of a solid piece 
of material cut in the middle longitudinally, 
for the reception of the bridge, or it may be 
formed of two longitudinal pieces placed to 
2O gether and secured at their ends by suitable 
means, and then sprung apart to form an open 
ing for the reception of the bridge which is 
properly fastened to position. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382745.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 382,745, 
G, WILKIN. 
- BERRY HARWESTER, 
Patented May 15, 1888, 
R 
c 
7%tresses, 
37%. 
a 
. 
. 
m 
of vendor. 
62622 24, 
/* 64%-ea, 6ttorney. 
s 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, E.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE WILKIN, OF DUNDEE, NEW YORK. 
BERRY. HARVESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 382,745, dated May 15, 1888. 
Application filed June 16, 1887. Serial No. 241,539. (No model.) 
15 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE WILKIN, a citi. 
zen of the United States, residing at Dundee, 
in the county of Yates and State of New York, 
5 have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Berry-Harvesters, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention is especially designed as an 
improvement upon my pending application, 
1o Serial No. 223,002, filed December 30, 1886; 
and it consists in the peculiar features and com 
bination of parts more fully described herein 
after, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep. 
resents a side elevation of my device; Fig. 2, a 
central vertical section of the same, the dotted 
lines indicating the position of the hoppers in 
raised adjustment; Fig. 3, a top view; Fig. 4, a 
bottom view, and Fig. 5a detail of the paddle, 
The reference-letters at a represent thesides 
of the main frame A, having their rearward 
endsformed into suitable handles and strength 
ened by connection with the axleb, the forward 
board; c, the rearward boards, de, and the part 
ing-strip t, the whole frame thus united and 
its contents being supported by the wheels y 2, 
Fitting closely 
journaled upon the axle b. 
within the forward portion of the frame A, 
and pivoted to the side pieces, a a, thereof by 
3o means of pins gh, one above the other, are the 
hoppers if, which are of like curved form, and 
provided with a sieve or screen for the pur 
pose of relieving the berries falling into the 
hoppers of twigs and leaves. In this process 
35 of separating foreign matter from the berries 
it is intended that the sieve or screen forming 
the bottom of the upper hopper shall be of 
sufficient opening or mesh to permit the ber 
ries to pass through it, but to separate and . 
4o arrest the larger leaves and matter therefrom, 
and that the sieve t in the bottom of the lower 
hopper shall be of finer mesh to retain the 
berries, but to admit smaller dirt and matter 
to pass through it, such as will separate from 
45 the berries, aided by the constant jar of the 
machine as it is wheeled about. To the upper 
forward portion of the hopper is located a 
hook, k, over which a loop, L, arranged in the 
end of the paddle, may engage for the purpose 
so of raising the hopper on its pivot-pins when 
desired to empty it of its contents. A further 
and more constant use of said paddle, that may 
be made in any suitable way, having the loop 
L, is in knocking the berries off the bushes 
into the hoppers of the harvester located be. 55 
low. 
It will be seen that the raised adjustment of 
the hopper i, as indicated by dotted lines in 
Fig. 2, brings its bottom in line with the part 
ing-stript of the frame and allows its contents 
to fall through the opening then made between 
the board d and the stript to the-ground be 
neath. In a similar manner the berries may 
be emptied from the lower hopper, j, into a 
box or receptacle. The pieces in n, (shown by 
dotted lines Fig. 3,) secured at an angle across 
the corners of the open or pivoted end of said 
hopper j, serve the purpose of better confining 
and guiding the berries into such box or re 
ceptacle. 
Legs 0 are pivoted to the sides a a of the 
frame upon pivot-pins h of the hopper i, suit 
ably projecting through the frame for the pur 
pose. Side flanges, op, are secured to the 
upper edges of the side pieces, a d, and the. 75 . 
front cross-board, c, in such inclining manner 
as to guide the falling berries into the hopper. 
Asin my other gatherer, before referred to, it 
is evident that numerous slight changes might 
be resorted to in the construction of the parts 86 
shown; hence I do not wish to limit myself 
strictly to the parts herein described, but con 
sider myself entitled to all 'such variations as 
come within the spirit and scope of my inven 
tion. 
Having thus described my invention, what I. 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In a berry-harvester, a suitable frame 
mounted upon wheels in front and provided go 
with handles, in combination with a pair of 
hoppers located in said frame one above the 
other, and provided with screenbottoms, said 
hoppers having their free ends resting in the 
forward part of said frame and their rear ends 95 
independently hinged or pivoted to the rear 
part of said frame, whereby the front ends of 
the hoppers may beindependently raised and 
the hoppers emptied of their contents, substan 
tially as described. 
85 
. 
. . 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
 
- 
Ioo 
s 
 
2 
382,745 
2. In a berry-harvester, the combination of hoppers, and a parting-strip located at the 
a suitable frame provided with handles and hinged ends of said hoppers, for the purpose 
mounted upon wheels in front, a pair of hop - as described. 
pers provided with screen-bottoms and hinged 
Witnesses: 
5 at their rear ends one above the other in said 
frame, so that their free ends can open up- 
ward, guiding-strips m in, located in one of said 
EMMET HORTON, 
L. J. WILKIN. 
GEORGE WILKIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382847.txt	(No Model.) 
P. F. WELLS. 
SPRING TOOTH, 
No. 382,847, 
Patented May 15, 1888. 
55. 2. 
b 
B' 
wrTNEssle. 
& 3. 2 
VENTOR, , 
helveCD (S lure.-- 
AITORNily 
f 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. C. 
 
l, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP F. WELLS, OF MILFORD, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
R. S. WELLS, OF SAME PLACE. 
SPR NGO. O. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 382,847, dated May 15, 1888. 
Application filed September 22, 1887. Serial No. 250,431. (No model.) 
45 
- 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILIP F. WELLs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mil 
ford, county of Oakland, State of Michigan, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Spring-Teeth; and I declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvementsina spring-tooth for harrows, 
&c.; and it consists, essentially, of the con 
struction and combination of devices, herein 
after specified, and more particularly set forth 
in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in per 
spective embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
separate view of the tooth. Fig. 3 is a cross 
section of the spring with point attached 
thereto. Fig. 4 is a rear view. 
I carry out my invention as follows, it hav 
ing reference particularly to that class of teeth 
where a spring-arm is provided with an aux 
iliary point: Accordingly, A represents a 
spring-arm or body of a spring-tooth. This 
may be of ordinary construction and perforated, 
preferably, by a longitudinal vertical slot to 
receive the bolt by which the point is engaged 
therewith, the arm itself being made of a band 
of Spring metal of suitable thickness. 
B is a metallic point, preferably pointed at 
each end, so as to be reversible upon the lower 
end of the spring bar or arm. Midway of its 
extremities it is also perforated to receive the 
attaching-bolt C, whereby it is firmly held 
upon the spring-arm, the bolt being provided 
with a nut, c. The slot in the spring-arm be 
ing a longitudinal one, as described, the point 
may be readily adjusted as desired, while it is 
also readily detachable from the arm when 
ever required. 
My presentinvention, however, contemplates 
more particularly the construction of the point 
with flanges b b on its edges, the said edges 
being turned rearward from the face of the 
point, as shown, so as to engage over the edges 
of the spring-arm and have extended bearings 
along said edges. These flanges are constructed 
thus to fit over the edges of the spring-arm in 
such a manner as to effectually prevent the 
point from turning on said spring when only a 
single engaging-bolt C is employed. One bolt 
is thus amply sufficient, and the point is firmly 
held tight and immovable in place by means 
of the single bolt and the flanges of the point 
lapping or extending over the edges of the 
Spring-arm. It is obviously impossible thus 
for the point to turn upon the bolt when the 
nut has been tightened thereon. It is evident, 
also, that the flanging of the point thus serves 
to give added stiffness thereto, while it may 
also be readily reversed. 
What I claim is 
The herein-described spring-tooth, consist 
ing, essentially, of the curved-spring standard 
provided with a slot near its lower end, the 
reversible point having its edges turned ab 
ruptly rearwardly to Snugly engage the oppo 
site edges of the spring-standard and having 
an extended bearing therewith in the direction 
of the length of the point, and the single draw 
bolt extending through the elongated slot to 
lock the point to the spring-standard, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
Intestimony whereof Isign this specification 
in the presence of two Witnesses. 
PHILIP F. WELLS. 
Witnesses: 
C. E. RUTHERFORD, 
WALTER, CRAWFORD. 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
IO 
2. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US382947.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 382,947. 
C. M. BROWN 
COMPOUND IEWER PUNCH. 
2. Sheet S-Sheet, i. 
Patented May 5, 1888. 
N 5 O 
 
  
 
 
 
 
- 
". 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
N 
c) 
use it at 
671 (8- 
- 
(No Model. ) 
No. 382,947, 
C. M. BROWN. 
COMPOUND LEVER PUNCH. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 15, 1888. 
 
 
 
) 
S O 
  
 
 
s(\ 
age 2N312 
 
   
ass 
 
2 
 
2 
3 
 
 
 
k 
1. 
uc-viot 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES M. BROWN, OF ROCKFORD, ILLINOIS. 
COMPOUND LEVER PUNCH. 
SFRCIEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 382,947, dated May 15, 1888. 
Application filed December 9, 1887. 
Serial No. 257,447. (No model.) 
5 
IC 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
O 
75 
So 
To all wizon, it may concern : 
Be it known that I, CHARLES M. BROWN, of 
Rockford, in the county of Winnebago and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Compound-Lever 
Punches; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
compound-lever punches, and more especially 
to punches employed in cutting holes in steel 
or iron bars or rails or other similar refractory 
material requiring enormous power and great 
strength of working parts. 
The object is to provide a powerful and com 
pact machine applicable as well to stationary 
bars of iron or rails as to movable bars or rails; 
and it practically consists in a screw-punch, 
connected parts to hold it in a proper rela 
tive position to the bar or rail to be punched 
or operated upon, and both a simple and a 
Compound operating-lever whereby to econo 
mize and concentrate power accordingly, as 
required, the punch being operated by either 
one or the other of these levers, according to 
the character of the material to be operated 
upon. 
It further consists in certain features of novel 
construction and combinations of parts, as will 
be hereinafter fully described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of the punching-machine with 
the rail being operated upon in position there 
in. Fig. 2 is an end elevation, partly in section. 
Fig. 3 is a top plan view. Fig. 4 is a section 
on line a a of Fig. 1 and line y y of Fig. 2, 
and Fig. 5 is a section on line & 2 of Fig. 1. 
A represents ajaw formed approximately in 
the shape of a horseshoe, with a mouth or open 
ing, B, therein. This jaw is made of some hard 
metal-Such as malleable iron or cast steel 
and to give it additional strength proportionate 
to the work which it is to perform the web a of 
this jaw is provided on its edges with strength 
ening ribs or flanges bb'b', the latter of which, 
surrounding the mouth or opening B, is pref. 
erably considerably broadened, as shown in 
Fig. 5. Above the mouth of the jaw an in 
ternally-screw-threaded boss or socket, C, is 
formed integral with the jaw, and this boss, 
besides being large and elongated, is further 
re-enforced by the flange b, which merges into 
it, and also by the flangel', extending along 
the top of the jaw. 
The screw D, which carries the punch, being 
fitted to the boss or socket C, is adapted to 
turn therein and be guided and supported by 
the internal threads of this boss or socket, 
thus giving the screw a direct and unyielding 
up and-down movement. In its lower end 
this screw is provided with an opening, d, the 
diameter of which is a little greater than the 
punch which it is designed to receive. A por 
tion of this opening is screw - threaded, as 
shown at d, and the object of this is quite 
evident. A punch, E, having a small point 
or projection, e, on one end and an enlarged 
head, e, on the opposite end, enters this open 
ing, in which it is held by a hollow screw 
threaded nut or follower, e, the outer end of 
this follower being flanged and given an angu 
lar form, which is readily gripped and oper 
ated upon by a wrench. 
Immediately below the punch a block or die, 
F, is seated. This die preferably has arounded 
or convex upper end and an annular flange, f, 
at its base, while extending through it from 
top to bottom there is a slightly-tapering hole, 
F, which aligns with a similar hole, F, through 
the lower end of the jaw, which holes receive 
the waste blank and permit it to drop unob 
structed out of the machine. 
Immediately inside of the mouth B and di 
rectly below the boss C the jaw and flange b, 
forming a continuation or extension thereof, 
are transversely grooved to furnish a seat for 
a die-clamping block or plate, G, which plate 
may be made in one or two parts, and is pro 
vided with an opening, F, of a shape and size 
to correspond with the outer shape of the die 
F, so as to receive the latter and hold it in 
position over the waste blank. This clamp 
ing-plate is held rigidly in place by bolts (7. 
Fig. 1 illustrates the form of clamping-plate 
employed when rails are punched, its edges o' 
sloping so as to about occupy the space be 
tween the tread and base-flange of the rail, 
in order to always give the rail a proper 
relative position to the punch, or vice versa, 
 
IOC 
382,947 
and always bring the portion of the web of which forms a seat or abutment, against which 
the rail or bar of metal to be punched in po 
the spring l, secured to segment L, bears in 
holding the pawl Min normal yielding contact 
sition over the die and beneath the punch. 
It is obvious that the plate may be changed to 
With the teeth of wheel D'. A small projec 
tion, m, is formed on the pawl, whereby the 
suit the work, and its form may always be 
latter may be grasped by the operator if occa 
Such as to give a predetermined assurance of 
the hole being punched in the desired spot as 
sion requires it. 
A step or elongated bearing-socket, N, is 
regards the edges of the bar of metal without 
supported by the flanges b l', and stepped 
further care on the part of the operator. Still 
a further point to be noticed is the fact that 
therein is a shaft, O. Affixed to the upper 
the upper face of the clamping-plate is slightly 
end of the latter is a lever-socket, P, adapted, 
below the upper edge of the die, so that the 
like the socket D', to receive an operating 
bar being operated upon rests snugly upon the 
levertherein, whereby it may be turned. Teeth 
die, giving it a solid and unyielding seat. 
in on one end of this socket-piece mesh with 
the teeth of the segment L. Flanges in on each 
Further means is furnished for holding the 
punch at right angles to the metal being op 
side of the teeth prevent the teeth of the Socket 
erated upon by way of arms H, pivoted at the 
from being disengaged from the teeth of the 
sides of the boss C and held normally in a de 
segment. On top of the socket P a link, Q, is 
pressed position by the abutment of springsh 
pivoted, and the other end of this link is pro 
against their flattened faces or edges h". These 
vided with an elongated slot, q, which latter 
receives a pin, q', set in the top of bracket K, 
arms are so arranged that they may be turned 
the function of these parts being to allow the 
up or out of the way when the bar is removed 
teeth of socket-piece N and segment L to turn 
from or placed beneath the punch, or when, on 
freely upon each other, but not too far or away 
the other hand, the punch is removed from or 
applied to the bar, or, more properly, the rail; 
from each other. 
In operating upon light work a lever is in 
but a still more important function of these 
arms is for them to act as a take-off to keep 
serted into one of the sockets D and the screw 
D turned thereby, and always in removing a 
the machine in its place when the punch is be. 
ing withdrawn from its work. 
punch from the work these sockets are em 
ployed, thus having the effect of a simple lever; 
Formed integral with or otherwise rigidly se 
but in operating upon work of a heavier char 
cured to the screw D there is a ratchet-toothed 
acter the operating-lever is inserted into the 
wheel, D', the teeth of which project in a di 
rection directly opposite to the direction in 
socket P, forcing it in the direction indicated 
by the arrow, the pawl M engaging the teeth 
which the screw D is turned when the punch 
is at Work. Also affixed to the screw D at its 
of wheel D until the lever has had One SWeep 
the length of the segment L, or about ninety 
very top there are the sockets ID, preferably 
degrees, when it is returned, the pawl sliding 
four in number, adapted to receive a remov 
able operating - lever, and the lever thereby 
over the teeth to take a new grip. 
formed I designate simple, in contradis 
It is evident that slight changes might be re 
tinction to the compound lever, yet to be 
sorted to in the form and arrangement of the 
several parts described without departing from 
described. While the screw D, the ratchet 
the spirit and scope of my invention; hence I 
toothed wheel D', and the sockets D", as stated, 
are desirably constructed in a single piece of 
do not wish to limit myself to the particular 
metal, yet it should be stated that these parts 
construction herein set forth; but, 
are slightly separated, as shown at i and i', to 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
Constitute bearings on the shank of the screw. 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
A. box composed of two differently-formed 
Patent, is 
half-sections, J J', each of which half-sections 
1. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
is composed of parallel ringsfi, held apart a 
with jaws and a screw-punch, of a die seated 
in the lower jaw and having a flanged lower 
distance to receive the ratchet-toothed wheel 
D between them by spacing-blocks or ears.f. 
end, and a clamping-plate having an opening, 
These half-sections are fitted about or made to 
and a recess for the reception of the die and 
its flange, whereby the die is supported on all 
straddle the ratchet-toothed wheel and held 
together thereon by means of bolts passing 
sides, substantially as set forth. 
through the ears or spacing-blocks f". Therings 
2. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
of the box-sections when thus fitted together 
with jaws and a punch, of a hollow die having 
have bearings on the portions i i of the shank 
a flanged lower end and a clamping-platehav 
of Screw D. The difference between the half. 
ing a central opening, and a recess to receive 
Sections of the box consists in an elongation 
the lower end of the die and its flange, whereby 
or projection, which together constitutes a 
the die is firmly clamped at all sides, substan 
bracket, K, carrying in its extreme end a 
tially as set forth. 
toothed segment, L. Pivoted in this bracket 
3. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
is a pawl, M, provided on its end with a hook, 
with jaws the lower one of which has an open 
m, which engages the teeth of the ratchet 
ing through same, and a punch mounted in 
toothed wheel D, thereby locking the bracket 
the upper jaw, of a hollow die having an en 
larged lower end and a clamping-plate hav 
thereto when moved in one direction. The 
pawl is provided near its pivot with a toe, m, 
ing an opening conforming in shape to the 
90 
OO 
O 
I. I5 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
SO 
55 
60 
382,947 
8. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
with a jaw, a screw adapted to turn therein, 
and a punchin the screw, of a bracket mounted 
on the screw and adapted to engage with the 
latter, a toothed segment on the bracket, and 
a pivoted lever having a toothed segment 
adapted to mesh with the teeth of the segment 
on the bracket in operating the ScreW, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
9. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
with a jaw, a screw therein, and a bracket 
mounted on the screw, said bracket having a 
toothed segment, of a toothed lever pivoted 
on the jaw and a link loosely connecting the 
lever and bracket, substantially as set forth. 
10. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
with a jaw and a screw therein, of a lever piv 
oted to the jaw-frame and devices connecting 
the lever with the screw for operating the lat 
ter, substantially as set forth. 
11. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
with a jaw and a screw, of a bracket mounted 
on the screw and devices, substantially as de 
scribed, connecting the bracket with the screw, 
whereby it can turn on the screw when moved 
in one direction and turn the screw when moved 
in the opposite direction, and a lever pivoted 
on the jaw-frame and adapted to operate the 
bracket, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
CHARLES M. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
MARCUS S. PARMELE, 
DUNCAN H. FERGUSON. 
45 
55 
7 c 
5 
O 
enlarged end of the die, whereby when the 
clamping-plate is locked in position the die is 
firmly supported on all sides. 
4. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
with jaws the lower one of which has an open 
ing through the same, of a hollow die having 
a flanged lower end and a slightly-conical up 
per end, and a clamping-plate having a recess 
to receive the flanged end of the die and 
adapted to be secured to the jaw and lock the 
die over the opening in the jaw, said plate 
having a form to correspond with the shape of 
the rail-bar being operated upon, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
With jaws, of a punch in the upper jaw, a die 
on the lower jaw, a pair of pivoted arms lo 
cated alongside of the upper jaw, each arm 
having a flattened portion, and springs adapted 
to bear against said flattened portions for yield 
ingly holding the arms in position. 
6. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
With a jaw, a screw therein, and a punch, said 
Screw having a ratchet-toothed wheel thereon, 
of a bracket mounted on the screw, spring 
actuated pawl for engaging the teeth of the 
wheel, and a pivoted lever for imparting mo 
tion to this bracket, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a punching-machine, the combination, 
With a jaw, a shaft, and a screw adapted to 
turn in the jaw, said screw having ratchet 
teeth thereon, of a bracket mounted on the 
Screw and having a spring-actuated pawl held 
normally in contact with the teeth, a toothed 
Segment attached to said bracket, and a lever 
affixed to the shaft and provided with teeth 
which mesh with the teeth on the segment at 
tached to the bracket, substantially as set 
forth. 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383047.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 383,047, 
D. H. DOWNES 
FORGING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
it. l Imho 
H 
H  H IAI w s ER 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
/ 
f 
| 
- z. (C. a Sigma-list 
-- $2S2 a2a222  ZZY 
<< 
N 
--------------- 
 
yr 
\ 
 
 
 
 
628)-veosco. 
67%-44- 6 c42. 
(3.4% 
A7/G 2. 
334 tug/ ell-to-citya 
3-1-uc-41-tow 
Zavva/7ZZozwages. 
24 
-6-4-27.9%.2%z-, 
(No Model.) 
D. H. DOWNES. 
FORGING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 383,047, 
Patented May 15, 1888. 
 
 
  
A 
- - - -as----------------- 
--- 
fada 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
642-244-6 2zz. 
(3.4%4, 
83 hid eletotlegg 
" &z. z. z. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
d 
DAVID H. DOWNES, OF PULLMAN, ILLINOIS. 
FORGING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed March 24, 1888. 
Patent No. 383,047, dated May 15, 1888. 
Serial No. 268,403. (No model.) 
25 
Io 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID H. DOWNES, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pull. 
man, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Forging-Machines, which is 
fully set forth in the following specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of a die for 
a forging-machine embodying my invention; 
Fig. 2, a section of the same, taken on the line 
2 & of Fig. 1, and with the upper die also shown 
on a similar section and the movable parts be 
ing illustrated in different positions by dotted 
lines; Fig. 3, a detail side elevation of the gage 
bar detached; Fig. 4, an end elevation of the 
same; Fig. 5, a transverse section of the dies, 
taken on the line) y of Fig. 2; Fig. 6, a plan 
view of the lower die modified in form and the 
two parts of the die separated somewhat; Fig. 
7, a section of the same, taken on the line at a 
of Fig. 6; Fig. 8, an elevation showing one 
half of the said die and a section of the corre 
sponding upper die; Fig. 9, an end elevation 
of the upper die; Fig. 10, side and edge eleva 
tions of the mandrel for this modification; Fig. 
11, a perspective view of a blank bent in the 
rough ready for the dies; Fig. 12, a similar view 
of a hanger finished in my dies; Fig. 13, a plan 
view of a lower die, showing another modifi. 
cation; Fig. 14, an end elevation of the same, 
together with the corresponding upper die; 
Fig. 15, a vertical section of the same, taken 
on the line at w of Fig. 4, but with the upper 
die shown in elevation; and Fig. 16, a per 
spective view of a blank doubled and ready 
for the last-named dies. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in die-forging, whereby articles which 
are partly divided at one or more points are 
readily formed in the dies, and at the same 
time the general direction of the metal fiberis 
maintained. 
The object of my improvements is to obtain 
a simple, speedy, and cheap way of making 
the kind of articles mentioned, and at the same 
time provide for superior strength and finish 
in the articles themselves. I accomplish these 
5o results by bending a metal bar of suitable size 
to form the desired article over upon itself, 
35 
4.O 
and afterward forming the article from this 
doubled piece in forging dies of suitable shape 
and provided with a mandrel at the point of 
division, whereby the two parts of the doubled 55 
bar are securely welded together, and at the 
same time the proper shape given to the ar 
ticle. 
My improvements therefore relate to the 
dies themselves, which may be used in any or. 6o 
dinary machine for die-forging; hence I have 
shown in the drawings only the dies and die. 
blocks, it being unnecessary to illustrate and 
describe the entire forging-machine, none of 
the other parts of which have any special re. 65 
lation to my invention. 
I will proceed to describe the means by 
which I have carried out my invention in a 
practical way, and will then point out definitely . 
in claims the special improvements which 7o 
I believe to be new and wish to secure by Let 
ters Patent. 
In the drawings, A represents the die-block 
for the lower or female die, which is provided 
with a suitable seat, a, for the die, which in 75 
this instance is shown as a dovetailed recess. 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 5 of the drawings dies are 
shown for the manufacture of hangers with a 
closed loop at one end, the rest of the hanger 
being straight. The lower or female die, B, is 
divided longitudinally, being composed of two 
parts, b b', the lower portions of which are 
constructed to correspond with the seatin the 
die-block, but of not sufficient width to en 
tirely fill the opening. These two parts may 
be joined by dowel-pins, or any other suitable 
means which will permit ready separation. 
The inside faces are cut down so as to provide 
a ledge, b, on each half of the die, which to. 
gether, when the two parts are united, make 
the bed of the die, as seen in Figs. 1 and 5 of 
the drawings. The cheeks of the die are con 
siderably enlarged or extended upward to 
make projections b at the rear end, and these 
projections are provided with openings b' a 
little above the bed of the die, and shaped 
substantially like the loop which is to be 
formed in the hanger. A mandrel, C, is pro 
vided, which is of the same shape and dimen. 
sions in cross-section as is desired for the loop 
in the hanger, and is fitted to be passed through 
the openings in the cheeks of the die from one 
90 
IGO 
2 
383,047 
O 
75. 
25 
side to the other. The mandrel may be pro. thus making a second bend in the end of the 
bar and bringing it down upon the second or 
vided with a handle, c, for convenience of ma 
nipulation. A key, D, is formed of suitable 
upper face of the mandrel, as illustrated by 
shape and size to exactly fill the remaining 
Fig. 2 of the drawings. A loop is thus formed 
space in the die-seat when the die is placed in 
at one end of the bar, and the free end, which 
position, so that when the two parts of the die 
has been bent over around the mandrel, pro 
are placed in the recess this key may be thrust 
jects forward from the latter, lying upon the 
in to fill the remaining space at one side, as 
upper side of the bar in the die. The bend 
shown in Fig. 5 of the drawings, and thus prop 
ing-cams are then thrown back out of the way 
and the upper or male die, I, which is prop 
erly seat the die and secure it to the die-block. 
erly mounted in the drop of the machine, is 
At the rear end of the die-block is a rock-shaft, 
E, upon which is rigidly fastened a cam, e, di 
brought down upon the female die, as shown 
rectly opposite the opening between the cheeks 
in dotted lines in Fig. 2. 
It will be under 
of the die. This shaft also has arms e' securely 
stood, of course, that the bar is at a proper 
fastened to it near its respective ends, and at 
heat for forging-it must be at a welding heat. 
one end is provided with a crank or lever, e, 
The action of the dies when thus brought to. 
gether forges the loop around the mandrel, 
by means of which it may be oscillated. A 
perfectly and completely filling up the space 85 
second rock-shaft, F, is mounted in the outer 
immediately in front of the die represented 
ends of the came and the arms e, and is pro 
by the little triangular opening in Fig. 2 of 
vided with a second cam, f, secured to it at the 
point of bearing in the end of the came. This 
the drawings, as the metal is crowded in to 
shaft is also provided at one end with a crank 
ward the mandrel and forced around the front 
edge, so as to make a perfectly formed loop. 9o 
or lever, f', by means of which it may be inde 
pendently oscillated. A gage, G, is mounted 
At the same time the two thicknesses of the 
bar are completely and perfectly welded to 
upon an arm, g, Secured to the die-block in any 
gether, thus making a complete hanger at one 
suitable way. In the drawings, Figs. 3 and 4 
represent this gage and arm upon an enlarged 
heat. It will be seen, also, that the natural 
scale, and the arm is provided with a shank, 
direction of the fibers of the metal has not 95 
g', depending from one end, which is adapted 
been materially disturbed, so that substan 
tially its full strength will be found in all parts 
to fit in a suitable Socket on the end of the die 
of the hanger. When the drop is raised, the 
block, as shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings. 
mandrel can be readily pulled out from the 
The gage is fastened to the arm at any desired 
point by means of a loop or staple, g, passing 
die, and if there is any sticking the die key is 
over the shank of the gage and secured by a 
removed, which permits the two parts of the 
35 wedge-pin, g, passing through its ends under 
die to be separated to obviate this difficulty. 
Fig. 12 shows a similar hanger, the shape of 
neath the gage-bar. 
Now, in operation the die - block will of 
the loop being different. It may be made in 
like dies by suitably changing the shape of 
course be properly mounted in any suitable 
machine for die-forging, and the female die, 
the mandrel. 
The remaining figures of the drawings are 
described above, is properly seated in the 
simply for the purpose of illustrating the ap 
block, as already described. The gage is fixed 
plication of these improvements to dies of 
at the proper point to give the desired length 
to the finished hanger, and the jointed cams 
different forms for the purpose of making dif. 
are thrown back in the position shown in dot 
ferent articles. 
Figs. 6 to 10 show a die for making a hanger 
ted lines indicated by 1 in Fig. 2 of the draw. 
ings. A straight bar of iron, H., of the proper 
with a forked end, instead of a loop, like that 
length is then laid in the die, one end resting 
just described. The shape of the hanger J 
against the gage and the other projecting out 
Will be seen in Fig. 8 of the drawings, where 
- through the rear of the die and over the joint 
it is shown in the dies after the drop. In this 
5o ed cams. The mandrel C is then inserted 
instance a blank, J", is first formed by bend 
ing or doubling a suitable bar upon itself, as 
through the cheeks of the die, as shown in 
Fig. 1 of the drawings, and will rest immedi. 
shown in Fig. 11. The ends of this bank are 
ately upon the bar, as shown in Fig. 2. The 
shown bent in this figure; but they may just 
lever e" is then thrown up into the position 
as well be straight. The mandrel in this in 
stance is of a form corresponding to the open 
indicated by the dotted lines marked 2 in Fig. 
ing desired at the forked end of the hanger, 
2 of the drawings, which movement will of 
course turn the came up into the position 
and the point at which it is inserted in the die 
is near the front end, being passed through the 
shown in full lines in the same figure, and this 
bends the projecting end of the bar upward 
cheeks, as before, and lying between the two 
free ends of the blank, as seen in Fig. 8 of the 
upon the first face of the mandrel, as seen in 
drawings. The operation of welding the two 
Fig. 1 of the drawings. The lever f' is at this 
parts of the blank together and forming the 
time in the position also indicated by dotted 
forked hanger is practically the same as in the 
lines marked 2 in the said figure. It is then 
thrown forward and downward into the posi 
former case, and will be understood without 
any further description. 
tion indicated by the dotted lines marked 3, 
thereby turning the cam fforward and down 
The dies shown in Figs. 13 to 15 are adapted 
ward into the position shown in full lines, and 
to make a hanger, K, which also has a fork at 
55 
45 
 
CC 
I C5 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
383,047 
3 
45 
55 
one end, but with one of its jaws straight and 
the other bent, as seen in Fig. 15 of the draw 
ings. In this instance the mandrel L is intro 
duced at the front of the die, the apertures or 
openings in the cheeks of the die for the re 
ception of the mandrel being suitable recesses 
or notches cut in at their front ends. In this 
instance a bent blank, K', is prepared substan 
tially as shown in Fig. 16 of the drawings. 
This is laid in the lower die, and the mandrel 
is introduced between the opened ends, as seen 
in Fig. 15 of the drawings, and is held in place 
by a key, M, passing down through a socket 
formed in the projecting ends of the lower por 
tion of the die, as seen in Figs. 14 and 15 of 
The mandrel L is provided 
the drawings. 
with a handle, l, and the key M with a handle, 
m, for convenience of manipulation. The op 
eration of these dies will be readily understood 
without further explanation. 
The bending devices are not attached to the 
two sets of dies last described; but they may 
be provided, if desired. In all cases the bend 
ing devices may be attached to the dies, so as 
to do the bending on the same device; or they 
may be entirely dispensed with, in which case 
the bending is done upon a separate machine. 
In all instances it will be seen that the prin 
ciple of operation is the same. The material 
of which the article is composed is bent or 
folded upon itself, and the two parts are then 
firmly welded together, while at the same time 
the divided or separate portions of the folds 
are properly formed around a removable man 
drel. This principle of operation is applica 
ble to a large variety of articles; hence I do 
not limit myself to the production of any par 
ticular article, such as any one of those shown 
and described. 
I have herein illustrated my invention as 
applied to the production of certain articles; 
but I wish to be understood as claiming the 
invention in the manufacture of all articles to 
which it is applicable in its broad features. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A forging-die provided with transverse 
openings, in combination with a removable 
mandrel adapted to be inserted in the die and 
across the seat thereof by inserting it in said 
openings, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
2. The two-part die B, provided with trans 
verse openings b, in combination with the 
mandrel C, adapted to be inserted at will in 
said openings, and the male or drop die I, 
substantially as and for the purposes specified. 
3. A die, B, in combination with a remov 
able transverse mandrel, C, and a bending cam 
or cams attached to the die and arranged to 
bend the metal over the mandrel, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
4. The die B, in combination with the re 
movable transverse mandrel C, and the jointed 
swinging bending-cams e and f, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
5. The die B, in combination with the rock 
shafts EF, provided with suitable hand-levers, 
and the bending-cams ef, secured to the re 
spective shafts, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
DAVID H. DOWNES. 
Witnesses: 
CARRIE FEIGEL, 
J. M. THACHER. 
O 
25 
- 30 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383147.txt	(No Model.) 
NO, 
383,147, 
J. RAU, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
OWEN FOR COOKING STOWES, 
Patented May 22, 1888. 
F. G.). 
2(Z4. 42d N 
 
Se"S 
 
 
 
Za 
SNSSNSSNNSNN 
  
 
2 s 
SS 
2 
2 & 
 
 
 N N N N 
N 
N 
SNSNS RSNN 
N 
2.I. 2N 
SN NS 
N 
S.O- C 
Nessessessesses esses 
2 
s 
 
 
 
ATTEST 
2. 
Ao (7. 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. RAU, 
OWEN FOR, COOKING STOWES, . 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 383,147, 
Patented May 22, 1888. 
 
F. G.2. 
(No Model.) 
J. R. A.U., 
OWEN FOR COOKING STOWES, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 383,147, 
a 
Patented May 22, 1888, 
 
F. G. 3. 
OHT 
- 
- 
l 
F - 
O 
-- 
F - 
- 
- 
- T 
- 
ATTEST- 
alty k al- 
INVENTOR 
to 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN RAU, OF BELLE VILLE, IL LIN OIS. 
OVEN FOR COOKING-STOVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 383,147, dated May 22, 1888. 
Application filed March 31, 1887. 
Serial No. 233,118. (No model.) 
To att, whon it Tay concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN RAU, a citizen of 
the United States, residing at Belleville, in the 
county of St. Clair and State of Illinois, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Cooking-Stoves, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Cooking-stoves in which air is admitted into 
the oven to ventilate it; and the objects of my 
improvements are to heat the ventilating-air 
before admitting it into the oven and direct it 
therefrom into the smoke-passages, and also to 
admit a current of air between the fire-potlin 
ing and the adjacent wall of the oven, to pre 
vent overheating of the latter at that point. 
I attain these objects by the construction illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section of 
a baking-stove constructed in accordance with 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a top view of the bot 
ton plate of the oven thereof, showing the cen 
tral tube and the grooves or air-passages there 
in. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the stove with the 
top plate removed. Fig. 4 is a top view of 
the bottom plate of the stove, showing the 
smoke-flues thereon. Fig. 5 is a rear view of 
the fire-pot lining. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
Out the several views. 
In Said drawings, A represents the top plate 
of the stove; B, the bottom plate supported on 
legs b. To the under side of said bottom plate 
is attached or formed integral therewith a 
flanged plate, D, forming there with a shallow 
air-chamber, D', into which air is admitted 
through a pipe, C, entering the side thereof 
near its front end. The ceiling of the cham- | 
ber D" is formed by the plate B, and through 
the center thereof passes a vertical pipe, G, 
that extends through the bottom passage or 
flue, E, of the stove and through the plate F, 
constituting the bottom plate of the oven. The 
chamber D* being of nearly the same length 
and width of the oven, the air that enters 
therein has a large heating-surface against the 
plate B, and passing through the heated pipe 
G enters the oven H at a high temperature. 
To cause said heated air to circulate evenly 
upon the floor of the oven and under a pan 
To properly ventilate the oven with warm 7o 
that may be placed therein, the upper surface 
of the bottom plate, F, of said oven is provided 
with wide grooves f', that radiate from the 
central vertical tube, G, and a series of nar. 
rower parallel grooves, i, intersecting the radial 
grooves f'. After the heated air has ascended to 
the top of the oven, it escapes through a rear 
wardly-bent pipe, J, into the upper smoke-fue, 
K, leading the products of combustion directly 
from the fire-pot L, carrying at the same time 
the escaping air from the oven toward the 
damper and the uptake ac, if said damper is 
down; but if the damper is up the hot air and 
gases descend through the flues in a to the 65 
under side passages, e, e, and E, of the oven, 
and ascend again through the middle flue, M, 
to the uptake v and T, the latter being an an 
nular projection to receive a stove-pipe. 
air, the inlet d should be the same diameter as 
the outlet-pipe J; but the pipe G should be of 
smaller diameter, to give the air time to be 
come heated in the botton chamber, D', be 
fore being admitted into the oven. To keep 75 
the upper portion of the oven at nearly the 
same temperature as the bottom, and to pre 
vent the destruction or burning of the lining 
Q of the fire-pot L, or of the front plate, P, of 
the oven, the lining-plate Q is provided with 
lugs g, to keep it away from the plate Pa suf 
ficient distance to form an air-passage, S, be 
tween them. Air enters said passage through 
small slots or openings's in the sides of the 
stove opposite the passage S, and it escapes 
from said passage through a short bent pipe, 
R, leading into the upper flue, K, of the stove. 
I am aware that the Owens of stoves have 
been ventilated by means of air admitted 
through Small perforations in the doors thereof go 
and allowed to escape through perforations in 
the top of the oven. I am also aware that the 
bottom plate of Said oven has been made of 
sheet metal, having corrugations to facilitate 
the expansion and contraction of said sheet 95 
metal. 
Having now fully described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination of the bottom plate, B, 
of a stove and the pipe G, ascending there. IOC 
from, with the bottom oven-plate, F, receiving 
said pipe substantially in the center thereof, 
O 
25 
SO 
2 
383,147 
and having grooves in its upper surface radi- passage, K, of the stove, substantially as and Io 
ating from said pipe G, substantially as and for the purpose described. 
for the purpose described. 
2. The combination of the side plates of a presence of two witnesses. 
stove having openings s, the front plate, P, of 
an Oven, and the firepotlining Q, havingigs 
q on the rear thereof, and forming with said 
plate Pan air-passage, S, with a pipe, R, lead- 
ing from said passage into the upper Smoke- 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
HARRY L. AMER, 
E. C., WURDEMAN. 
Witnesses: 
w 
JOHN RAU. 
- 
5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383247.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. PLUMB, 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING RAIL WAY CARS. 
2 Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented May 22, l'888, 
VVVSSOSVSSVS 
S 2222222222222222222222222222ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
V 
VSSVS INSVSNSVSN 
No. 383247, 
2 
| ceae 
 
 
 
 
 
//ITESSES 
gzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz, 
pzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz! 
? 
TILL 
I/VVEATOR 
IIIIIIII 
No.? 
S SNR 
SSSSTINVSSANS 
ATTOR/VES, 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. H. PLUMIB. 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING RAIL WAY CARS. 
No. 383,247, 
Patente d May 22, 1888. 
2 SS 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS, 
SSSN)(SSR.s<SSSSSSSSSS 
SMS 
SY_RSA_R 
?SSSSSSSSS$$sssssssssss 
32222222222222222222222222222 
2222 
222 
L-~~~~TZZZZZZ 
% 
 
22222222222222222 
 
 
 
//ITIVESSES 
IN/VEN/TOR 
ATTORNES 
N, FETERS, Picto-Lithographor. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
WILLIAM H. PLUMB, OF LAKE CITY COLORADO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO P. P. DICKINSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
A PPARATUS FOR - EAT ING RAIVVAY CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of ?etters Patent No. 383,247, dated May 22, 1888, 
Application filed fay 4, 1887. Serial No. 237,027. (No model. 
5 
(C) 
25 
pa 
To al vuhom, it ma concern: 
Lake City, Hinsdale county, State of Colorado, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Apparatus for Heating Railway-Cars, 
of Which the following is a specification, 
This invention relatesto a newandimproved 
System for heating railway-cars, Which works 
effectivelywhether the train is in motion orat 
a standstill at a depot or station, and in which 
the quantity of air supplied is automatically 
regulated, while it can be used in summer or in 
countries havinga warm climate for supplying 
fresh air oflower temperature to the cars of a 
train. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a verticallongitudinal section of a baggage and 
paSSenger car equipped with my improved 
heating System, parts beingbroken out. Fig. 
2O 2 is a sectional plan view of the sanne, parts 
beingbroken out. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sec 
tional elevation of the baggage-car, showing 
the heater and air-cooler in section and the 
pipes for conducting the heating or cooling 
medium. Fig. 4 is a cross sectional view of 
the Same. Fig. 5 is a longitudinal sectional 
view of the device for regulating the speed of 
the air-pump, part being broken away; and 
Figs. 6 and 7 are respectively a side view and 
3o longitudinal section of the flexible coupling 
for uniting the air-conducting pipes between 
the cars. 
Similarletters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
At the front end of the baggage car A. a com 
partment, B, is provided, which is lined with 
asbestus, sheet metal, ormade fire-proofinany 
other Suitable manner. In this compartment 
B is arranged a steam-boiler, C, which is sur 
4O rounded by a jacket, that forms with the surface 
of the boiler an air-heating furnace, D. The 
compartiment B is provided at its upper part 
with a screened air-box, IF, through which 
fresh airis admitted to the compartment B. 
In the compartment Ban air-punp, K, is 
located, which is operated by a steam-engine, 
K, that receives its steam from the boiler C. 
Said air-pump compresses the air, which is 
drawn into the compartmenti B through the 
5o air-boxF, and forces the saidair through a flue, 
L, connecting the pump with the air-heater D 
into the latter, so as to be heated by contact 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMI H. PLUMB, of with the hot surfaces of the boiler and jacket, 
From the heater Dthehotair is passed through 
pipes E, suspended from the bottom of the cars, 55 
and connected by vertical pipes E' with the 
heater to openings e e in the bottoms of the 
cars. The pump thus draws in the cold air, 
transmits the same to the heater, and forces it 
into the cars, thus keeping up a continuous 6o 
circulation of hot air in the cars. 
Thelongitudinal supply-pipesEE below the 
carsare connected by flexible couplings Jbe 
tween the cars. Each pipe E is provided at 
each end with a damper orgate, e, for closing 65 
the pipe and preventing the escape ofair from 
the same, When.it forms the end of the System 
of supply-pipes. The bottom openings, e e, 
may be provided with registers in the bottom 
of the car-floors, as shown in Fig. 2. The flexi- 7o 
ble couplings J, previously mentiomed, consist 
of Sleeves made of asbestus or suitable fire 
proof material, the middle part of said sleeves 
being corrugated, so as to expand with the 
motions of the cars around curves, &c. The 
couplings or sleevesare permanently attached 
at one end to the heating-pipe E of one carand 
slipped over the end of the pipe E of the next 
car, to which pipe it is attached by eyes a, pro 
jecting from the sides of the pipes, and hooks 8C 
b, pivoted to the sides of the pipes, whereby 
the couplings are securely retained on the 
pipes E, as shown in Fig. 6. 
In the pipeM, which conducts the steam from 
the boiler to the steam-engine X, is interposed 85 
a cylindrical valvebox, N, in which a valve, 
O, with a series of annular channels, is arranged 
to slide on a valve face, O', having ports. In 
certain positions the ribs in the valve O, close 
the ports more than at others, and thus per- 9o 
mit less steam to pass, and at other times the 
apertures are more open, thus permitting of 
more steam passing to the engine. The stem 
of the valve O is connected by a threaded sleeve, 
Q, with a copper rod, P, the opposite end P' of 9 
5 
which is permanently attached to the Wall of 
the compartment B, as shown in Figs. 2 and 5. 
By the expansion and contraction of Said rod 
the valve O is regulated to admita larger or 
smaller quantity of steam to the engine, so that 1oo 
the Same isWorked more orless rapidly, Where 
by the speed of the engine and pump is in 
35 
45 
383,27 
creased or decreased and a greater or smaller I 
Having thus described my invention, i claimi 
quantity of air forced through the air-heater as new and desire tosecure by Letters Patent- 3o 
and pipes to the cars, Thie screw-sleeve Q The combination of a carhaving a compart 
serves to adjust the valve to any desired posi- ment provided with an opening to the outside 
tion. The copper rod P is so adjusted that air, a device for changing the temperature of 
the valve is shifted automatically, according to the air admitted to said compartmenti, an air 
the temperature of the outside air, so that a forcing apparatus for forcing said air through 35 
larger quantity of air is pumped through the said device, anair-pipe connecting said device 
heater in cold Weather and a smaller quantity with the air-forcing apparatus, a distributing 
in warm Weather. All these devicesare used 1 pipe leading from said temperature-changing 
when the carsare to be heated; but in summer device, a steam-engine for driving said appara 
my improved system is adapted to supply the tus, a steam-boiler, asteam-pipe connecting the 4o 
cars with fresh and cold air. For this purpose steam-boiler with the cylinder of the engine, 
the air-pipes Rare arranged along the ceiling a valve-box in said pipe provided with a valve 
or roof of the cars and provided with the per- face havinga series of ports, a channeled valve 
forated distributers R. The ends of the pipes in said box, an expansible rod exposed to the 
Rare connected by flexible couplings in the air admitted to said compartment and con 45 
same manner as the pipes E. The pipesRare nected at one end to the wall thereof, and an 
connected with a coil, S, located in a tank, T, adjustable coupling connecting the other end 
for receiving ice, ice-water, or other cooling of said rod to the stem of said valve, substan 
medium, the other end of said coil being con- | tially as described. 
nected with the flue L and air-pump K, as 
shown in Fig. 2. The flue Lhas a valve, n, invention Ihave signed my name in presence 
and the pipe leading to the coil S' a valve, m, oftwo subscribing witnesses. 
so as to connect the air-pump Keither with a 
cooling-pipe, S, or with the air-heater D. 
| 
W represents a coalbin, and Vawater-tank 
for supplying the boiler, with water. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 5o 
VVILLIAM IT. PLUMB. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES GALLOWAY, 
J. M. MURPHY. 
IO 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383347.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING BLANKS FORCHAIN CUTTER TEETH. 
C. H. DOUGLAS, 
No. 383,347, 
1. 
Patented May 22, 1888, 
e' 
g 
d? 
Af 
7. 
d/ 
- - - - - - 
a? A-f 
6. 
l 
3H2 
Cy 
Z7 
C. 
7/ 
i? 
Y 
Z/ 
t-Z, 
/ 
Z. 
, 
. 
77 
74. 
C. 
c. 
Zsy % 
A/ 
A. 
7 7 
Riff 
2IS 
AP/ 
--/ 
7Wazzesses 
M-40, 73ozi, 
46. ofeye?. 
 
Z3/ 
G 
f 
(27&6/26's MZozoga as, 
1766 or zee/3 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING BLANKS FOR CHAIN CUTTER TEETH, 
C. H. DOUGLAS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 383,347, 
. 
Patented May 22, 1888. 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
Af 
23A 
WWEA 
 
  
 
'N' 
 
;7s N. 
% NaNS 
Wr 
% % 
7 
 
 
 
 
 
ee 
E. 
2e. 
 
 
% Wey 
N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. DOUGLAS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CHARLES S. BAKER, OF SAME PLACE. 
VACH NE FOR MAK NG BAN KS FOR CHAN, CUTER TEETH 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patsat No. 383,347, dated May 22, i888. 
Application filed October 15, 1887. 
Serial No. 252,501. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES H. DOUGLAS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
5 nois, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Machines for Cutting Blanks 
for Chain-Cutter Teeth, which is fully set forth 
in the following specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a machine em 
bodying my invention; Fig. 2, a sectional view 
of the same, taken on the line 11 of Fig. 1; 
Fig. 3, a detail plan section taken on the line 
22 of Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a detail sectional view 
I5 taken on the line 33 of Fig. 1; Fig. 5, a detail 
view of one of the gear-wheels; Fig. 6, a detail 
plan view of the clutch-pinion; Fig. 7, a detail 
view of the clutch-operating rock-shaft de 
tached; Fig. S, a detail plan section taken on 
2O the line 4 4 of Fig. 2; Fig. 9, a detail sectional 
view taken on the line 55 of Fig. 8, and Fig. 
10 a detail view of one of the blanks produced 
by the machine. Fig. 1 is on a scale about 
one-quarter of the full size. Figs. 2 to 7, in 
25 clusive, are on a scale twice as great as that 
of Fig. 1; and Figs. 8, 9, and 10 are on a scale 
four times as large as Fig. 1, the parts being 
shown full size. 
Like letters refer to like parts in all the fig 
My invention relates to machines for cutting 
blanks for the teeth of chain-cutters. 
In an application filed by me March 17, 
1884, Serial No. 125,645, I have set forth an 
35 endless chain-cutter for mortising-machines of 
my invention; and the object of my present 
invention is to provide a machine whereby 
blanks may be produced, from which blanks 
the teeth composing the endless chain-cutter 
4o set forth in the said prior application may be 
readily constructed. 
To this end my invention consists in certain 
novel features, which I will now proceed to 
describe, and will then more particularly point 
In the drawings, A represents a suitable 
base, upon which is mounted a work-holding 
This work-holding table is remov 
table, B. 
able from the base A, for the purposes here. 
So inafter described, being secured to the table 
3o ures of the drawings. 
45 out in the claims. 
by means of screw-bolts b, or in any other suit 
able manner. 
C represents a standard mounted on the ta 
ble B and extending upward therefrom, said 
standard being provided with suitable bear- 55 
ings to receive a shaft, C, provided with fast 
and loose pulleys c and c', by means of which 
it may be driven from any suitable source of 
power. At its front end the shaft C is pro 
vided with a bevel-pinion, C. 
D represents a mandrel mounted in suitable 
bearings, c, on the standard C and vertically 
movable therein. Within the upper bearing, 
c, is mounted a bevel-pinion, D', which meshes 
with the bevel-pinion C on the shaft C. The 
bevel-pinion D" is held in its bearing in any 
suitable manner, so as to prevent longitudinal 
movement thereof, and is splined upon the 
mandrel D, so as to cause the said mandrel to 
rotate along with the said bevel-pinion, while 
at the same time the mandrel is free to move 
vertically within the same. 
In order to feed the mandrel D, I employ a 
Screw, E, extending through a suitably 
threaded aperture in the arm C of the stand 
ard C, and provided with means by which the 
said screw may be fed up or down, as desired, 
and the lower end of this feed-screw is swiv 
eled to the upper end of the mandrel to cause 
it to move vertically along with the said screw, 
while at the same time it is permitted to ro 
tate independently thereof. This swiveled 
connection is shown in the present instance as 
effected in the following manner: An elon 
gated pinion, F, is secured on the upper end 
of the mandrel D and receives the lower un 
threaded end of the feed-screw E, which ex 
tends into the bore of the said pinion and is 
grooved circumferentially, as shown at e, to 
receive a pin, f, passing through the pinion 
into the said groove. Any other approved form 
of swivel-connection may be substituted for 
that Shown. 
D represents a spring coiled around the 
mandrel D and bearing with its lower end 95 
against the pinion D", or any other suitable 
fixed abutment, while its upper end bears 
against the under side of the pinion F, or 
against any other suitable abutment on the 
mandrel D. This spring Serves to thrust the roo 
90 
75 
383,347 
7o 
75 
95 
CO 
IC5 
O 
II5 
mandrel D upward, so as to prevent any lost 
motion between the Said inandrel and the 
feed-screw E which might existin the swivel 
joint connecting the two. 
In order to provide an automatic power 
feed for the mandrel D, I have devised the 
following mechanism: The elongated pinion 
F, carried by the mandrel D, meshes with a 
pinion, G, mounted on a suitable support, c', 
on the standard C. This pinion has adjust 
ably connected to it a pitman, H, the con 
nection being preferably effected in the man 
ner shown, in which a transverse dovetailed 
groove, g, is formed in the top of the pinion G 
to receive the correspondingly-shaped head of 
the pivot-bolt H of the pitman H. A nut, h, on 
the projecting upper end of the pivot-bolt H' 
serves to clamp the parts in position after ad 
justment, and a washer or block, h', is inter 
posed, if necessary, between the pitman Hand 
the top pinion, G. It will readily be seen that 
by this means the pivot of the pitman H may 
be located at any desired distance from the 
center of the pinion G, So as to vary the throw 
of the said pitman H, and thereby regulate 
the feed. 
I represents a vertical shaft mounted in suit 
able bearings in the support c' and in the arm 
C of the standard C. The shaft has rigidly 
attached to it, near its lower end, a ratchet 
wheel, I', and above this wheel is a vibrating 
arm or lever, i, mounted loosely on the 
shaft I, and having connected to it, near its 
outer end, the end of the pitman H. Upon 
this vibrating arm is mounted a spring-pawl,i, 
adapted to engage with the teeth on the 
ratchet-wheel I, to actuate the same and there 
by impart an intermittent or step-by-step ro 
tary motion to the shaft I. 
J represents a clutch-pinion mounted loosely 
on the shaft I above the arm C, and meshing 
with a corresponding pinion, E, which is 
splined on the feed-screw E, and is thus 
adapted to impart a rotary motion to the said 
feed-screw. The pinion E is preferably pro 
vided with a hand-grasp, e', by means of which 
it may be operated by hand when desired. 
The pinion Jis, as hereinbeforestated, mounted 
loosely upon the shaft I, but is adapted to be 
connected thereto by means of a suitable clutch, 
J', splined on the shaft, the said pinion being 
provided on its upper surface with a suitably 
notched or recessed flange, i, with which cor 
responding pins, f', on the clutch J may be 
caused to engage, and thereby connect the said 
pinion to the shaft J. The clutch Jis carried 
by a lever, K, provided with pinsk to engage 
with a groove, f', in the hub of the clutch, so 
that the lever R may move the Said clutch 
vertically upon the shaft I, while at the same 
time the clutch is left free to rotate. 
K represents a vertically - sliding piece 
mounted in Suitable bearings in the arm C 
and connected at its upper end to the lever K. 
L represents a lever pivoted on the arm C: 
and connected to the sliding piece K near its 
pivot, the main portion of said lever extend 
ing forward within reach of the operator and 
serving as a means for connecting and discon 
necting the clutch J and pinion J. The por 
tion of the lever L in front of its pivot is of 
sufficient length to normally thrust the slid 
ing piece K" upward and thereby hold the 
clutch and pinion normally in their disengaged 
position. 
In order to provide an automatic stop for 
the feed, I employ a vertical rock-shaft, M, 
mounted in a suitable support, M, attached 
to the arm C. This rock-shaft is provided at 
its upper end with a pin, m, which, when the 
rock-shaft is in the position shown in the 
drawings, extends under the lever L and sup 
ports the same in a raised position. At its 
lower end the rock-shaft M is provided with a 
pin, n., preferably adjustable and so arranged 
that as the pinion F on the mandrel D is car 
ried downward by the feed screw it will, when 
it comes in contact with the said pin, engage 
with the same and turn the rock-shaft suffi. 
ciently to disengage the pin in from underneath 
the lever L, thereby allowing said lever to 
(drop and disconnecting the clutch mechanism 
to stop the feed. It will thus be seen that when 
this device is used the power-feed may be auto 
matically stopped at the desired point. 
At its lower end the mandrel D is provided 
with a reduced threaded portion, d, and below 
this it is further provided with an extension, 
d, of a further reduced diameter and also 
threaded at its extremity. Upon this lower 
end of the mandrel is mounted a Suitable 
chuck, N, preferably constructed as follows: 
A body portion, N, is screwed upon the 
threaded portion d of the mandrel D, and is 
provided on its under face with a circular re 
cess, n, to receive the cutting tool. This latter 
consists of a tubular cutter or saw, O, fitting 
within the recess in and provided with suitable 
cutting-teeth upon its lower edge. A split 
ring, n, is arranged within the recess in to bear 
against the cutter O, and has its inner surface 
beveled, as shown in Fig. 9 of the drawings. 
A correspondingly-beveled disk,N', is mounted 
upon the portion d of the mandrel D, and 
serves when forced upward to spread the split 
ring in and force the same against the cutter 
O, thus holding this latter firmly against the 
wall of the recess it in the body N' of the chuck. 
This beveled disk N' is operated by means of 
a nut, ', on the lower threaded end of the part 
d' of the mandrel D, said nut serving through 
its pressure on the intermediate gage-piece,P, 
mounted loosely on the part d between the 
said nut and disk, to force the disk N' upward 
to clamp the cutter. 
The gage-piece P consists of a cylindrical 
body provided at its lower end with an en 
larged disk-shaped portion, p, which serves, in 
the manner hereinafter described, as a stop 
for the bars from which the blanks are cut and 
determines, in conjunction with the cutter O, 
the width of the blanks. The upper portion of 
this gage-piece is of less diameter than the 
lower portion, p, being connected thereto by 
S 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
383,347 
3. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
an inclined portion, p', the object of this con 
struction being to prevent the blanks when 
cut from clogging between the cutter and 
gage. 
The work-holding table B is constructed in 
the following manner: A series of grooves, b', 
is formed therein, the said grooves being ar 
ranged radially to a central aperture, B, in 
the table and being also radial to the axis of 
the mandrel D and cutter O. Any desired 
number of these grooves may be employed, 
and in the present instance I have shown four; 
but it is obvious, of course, that more or less 
than this number may be used. These grooves 
are of a width slightly greater than that of the 
bars Q from which the blank is to be cut and 
of a depth about equal to one half the thick 
ness of the said bars. Surrounding the cen 
tral aperture, B, in the table B is a cap piece, 
R, provided with grooves r corresponding to 
the grooves b' in the table B, and forming, in 
conjunction with the said grooves, apertures 
through which the bars Q. pass. 
The cap-piece R is connected to the table B 
by means of screws R, which serve to clamp 
the cap upon the bars after these latter have 
been adjusted into proper position. In order 
to secure the bars Q accurately in the grooves 
b' in a position radial to the cutter, I employ 
clamping devices consisting of cams R, piv. 
oted upon the table B adjacent to one side of 
the grooves b' therein, and serving to clamp 
each bar against the opposite Wall of the groove 
within which it rests. These cams are so ar 
ranged as to clamp the bars against that side 
of the grooves toward which the cutter moves 
while operating upon the bars, so that when 
clamped in position the cutter will not tend 
to disarrange the bars. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The bars Q are first placed upon the table and 
a preliminary cut made upon their inner ends 
to form the same to the arc of a circle corre 
sponding to the curvature of the saw or cut 
ter. The operation of cutting the blanks then 
proceeds regularly, as follows: The bars Q, 
resting in the grooves l', are moved inward 
until their ends come in contact with the gage. 
piece P, the cap R having been previously 
loosened and the cams R thrown open in order 
to permit this movement of the bars. The bars 
being thus in position, they are clamped 
against the sides of the grooves b' by means of 
the cams R, and are further held firmly in 
position to prevent any vertical movement by 
tightening the cap R. The machine is then 
caused to feed downward by raising the lever 
L and resting the same upon the pin m of the 
rock-shaft M, thereby causing the clutch J' to 
engage with the pinion J, and imparting a 
rotary movement to the feed-screw Ethrough 
the mechanism herein before described. As 
the mandrel D is fed downward, it is revolved 
by means of the bevelpinions C and D', and 
the tubular cutter or saw Ocuts from each bar 
Q, a blank, q, having the configuration shown 
in full lines in Fig. 10 of the drawings. The shown in the drawings. 
gage-piece P, being reduced at its upper por 
tion, prevents the blanks from clogging be 
tween the cutter and gage-piece after being 
severed from the bars, and the space between 
the lower portion of the Sald gage-piece and 
the path of the cutter O determines accurately 
the precise width of the blanks q. When the 
cutter has passed entirely through the bars 
and severed the blanks, the pinion F will, 
through the medium of the pin m', actuate the 
rock-shaft M and disengage the pin in thereof 
from the lever L, so that this latter will drop 
and disconnect the clutch mechanism of the 
power-feed, this action taking place automati 
cally at the desired point. The pin n is ad 
justable vertically upon the rock-shaft Min 
order to stop the feed at any desired point. 
The precise rate of the feed may be readily 
regulated by adjusting the connection between 
the pitman EI and gear. Wheel G in the manner 
hereinbefore described. The power-feed may 
bestopped and started, if desired, at any point 
by hand through the medium of the lever L, 
or it may be entirely disconnected and a hand 
feed substituted by rotating the gear-wheel E. 
through the medium of the hand-grasp e' 
thereon. 
One set of blanks having been cut from the 
ends of the bars Q, the clamping devices and 
the cap are loosened and the bars again moved 
inward against the gage-piece P, the mandrel. 
D having been previously raised to its original 
position. The bars are then again clamped in 
position in the manner previously described, 
and the series of operations repeated indefi 
nitely until the bars have been entirely cut up 
into blanks. The entire chuck N may be re 
moved at any time and another one of a differ. 
ent size, carrying a different-sized cutter, may 
be substituted therefor. The gage-piece P is 
also independently removable, so that blanks. 
of any desired size may be accurately produced 
in large quantities and with great rapidity at 
a minimum CoSt. 
The blanks qserve to form the intermediate 
or central links in the chain-cutter of my in 
vention hereinbefore referred to, the finished 
form of the link being shown in dotted lines 
in Fig. 10. The principal object of the pres 
ent invention is to accurately form the curva 
ture of what will be the inner side of the fin 
ished link, so as to cause it to conform exactly 
to the supporting-roller and sprocket-wheel in 
the machine to which it is to be applied. 
It is obvious that various modifications in 
the details of construction may be made with 
out departing from the principle of my inven 
tion. Moreover, it will readily be seen that 
the machine hereinbefore described, although 
devised more particularly for the cutting of 
the particular form of blanks set forth, is ap 
plicable to numerous other uses, and I there 
fore do not wish to be understood as limiting 
myself either to the precise application of said 
machine hereinbefore set forth, or to the pre 
cise details of construction described and 
75 
95 
CO 
I C5 
I IO 
II5 
H2O 
I 25 
 
383,347 
3. 
25 
35 
Having thus described my invention, what I the combination, with the mandrel D and the 
tubular cutter O, secured in a suitable chuck 
thereon, of a gage piece mounted on said man 
1. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., the drel below the cutter, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
11. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., 
the combination, with the mandrel D and the 
tubular cutter O, mounted in a suitable chuck, 
N, thereon, of the gage-piece P, mounted on 
said mandrel below the cutter and contracted 
at its upper portion within the cutter to pre 
vent clogging, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
12. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., 
the combination, with the cutter-mandrel D 
and the feed-screw E, swiveled to its upper end, 
of a spring arranged to thrust the mandrel up 
ward against the feed-screw to prevent lost 
motion, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
13. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., 
the combination, with the mandrel D, its actu 
ating-pinion D", splined thereon, the pinion F; 
secured on the upper end to drive the feed 
train, and the feed-screw E, swiveled in the 
pinion F, of the spring D", coiled around the 
mandrel D and bearing against the pinions D' 
and F, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
14. The combination, with the longitudi. 
nally-movable rotating mandrel D and elon 
gated pinion F, secured thereon, of the pinion 
G, pitman H, adjustably connected thereto, 
shaft I, having ratchet-wheel I', and vibrating 
arm i, with spring-pawl i', pinion J, loosely 
mounted on shaft I, clutch J", splined on said 
shaft and adapted to engage the pinion J, pin 
ion E, arranged to mesh with the pinion J, 
and feed-screw E, swiveled to the upper end 
of the mandrel, splined in the pinion E, and 
passing through a suitable fixed nut or thread 
ed aperture in the frame, substantially as and 
for the purposes specified. 
15. The combination, with the cutter-man 
drel and its feed-screw, of the feed-train con 
necting the two, clutch mechanism arranged 
in said feed-train to connect or disconnect the 
mandrel and feed-screw, and a lever connected 
to the said clutch to hold it normally in its 
disconnected position, Substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
16. The combination, with the clutch-pinion 
J and clutch J in the feed-train, of the lever 
K, connnected to the said clutch, the sliding 
piece K, connected to said lever, and the le 
ver L, having its fulcrum near the sliding 
piece engaging the same and extending forward 
therefrom, said lever serving by its weight to 
hold the clutch normally in its disengaged po 
sition, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
17. The combination, with the cutter-man 
drel, its feed-train, the clutch mechanism ar. 
ranged therein, and the lever L for operating 
the same, of the rock-shaft M, provided with 
pin in to support said lever, and having pin 
in arranged in the path of the pinion on the 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
combination, with a suitable work-holding ta 
ble for holding the bars from which the blanks 
are to be cut, of a tubular cutter or saw for 
severing the ends of the bars, substantially as 
and for the purposes specified. 
2. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., the 
combination, with a suitable table for holding 
the bars from which the blanks are to be cut 
in a position radial to the cutter, of a gage 
piece to determine the position of the bars, and 
a tubular cutter or saw to sever the ends of the 
bars when in position, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
3. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., the 
combination, with the tubular cutter and its 
rotary mandrel, of automatic feed devices for 
feeding the cutter to the work, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
4. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., the 
combination, with the tubular cutter and its 
rotating mandrel, of automatic feed devices 
for feeding the cutter to the work, and an au 
tomatic stop for disconnecting the feed devices 
at a predetermined point, substantially as and 
for the purposes specified. 
5. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., the 
combination, With the tubular cutter and its 
actuating mechanism, of the work-holding ta 
ble provided with seats or grooves to receive 
the bars from which the blanks are to be cut, 
said seats or grooves being arranged radially 
to the cutter and having suitable clamping de 
vices to retain the bars in position, substan 
tially as and for the purposes specified. 
6. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., the 
combination, with the tubular cutter and its 
operating mechanism, of the table B, having 
central recessor aperture, B, and radial grooves 
b', and the cap-piece R, provided with corre 
sponding grooves r, and having clamping 
screws R', substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
7. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., the 
combination, with the tubular cutter and its 
operating mechanism, of the table B, provided 
with radial grooves b, and the clamping-cams 
R, arranged at one side of said grooves, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
8. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., the 
conubination, with the rotating and vertically 
movable mandrel, of a chuck removably Se 
cured on the end thereof, and a tubular cutter or 
saw mounted in said chuck, Substantially as 
and for the purposes specified. 
9. In a machine for cutting blanks, &c., the 
combination, with the mandrel D, having 
threaded portion d, of the chuck-body N', hav 
ing recess n, the tubular cutter O, arranged 
in said recess, the split ring 12', having bev 
eled inner wall, the beveled disk N', and the 
nut n, for operating said disk, Substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
10. In a machine for Cutting blanks, &c., 
75 
OO 
I IO 
IIS 
( 25 
383,347 
- 
- 
5 
18. The combination, with the cutter-man- purposes specified. 
cutter-mandrel, substantially as and for the cutter-mandrel, said pin n' being adjustable 
purposes specified. 
drel, its feed-train, the clutch mechanism ar. 
S ranged therein, and the lever L for operating 
the same, of the rock-shaft M, provided with 
pin in to support said lever, and having pin 
22' arranged in the path of the pinion on the 
upon the rock-shaft, substantially as and for IC 
CHARLES H. DOUGLAS. 
Witnesses: 
IRWINE MILLER, 
W. C. CORLIES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383447.txt	(No Model.) 
... 
" : 
No. 383,447, 
J. A., DICKSON, 
HORSE DETACHER 
Patented May 29, 1888. 
 
424.72%.e.-- 
fuel/ra 19-4ev, 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN AMOS DICKSON, OF PULASKI, TENNESSEE. 
HORSE DETA C E R. 
SPECIFICATION forgning part of Tetters Patent No. 383,447, dated May 29, 1888. 
Application filed September 13, 1887. Serial No. 249,596. (No model.) 
35 
45 
To al., whon, it nag concert: 
Be it known that I, JOHN AMOS DICKSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pu 
laski, in the county of Giles and State of Ten 
nessee, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Horse-Detachers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement 
which is a novel means for detaching the traces 
from the ends of the singletree. 
The primary object of my invention is to 
provide a buggy or other vehicle with an im 
proved detacher, of simple, strong, and cheap 
construction, for the purpose of releasing a 
horse from a vehicle instantly when desired. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of one end of a singletree provided with 
my improved horse detacher. Fig. 2 is a simi 
lar view showing the device in position de 
taching. Fig. 3 is a similar view of the sev 
eral parts separated. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
My invention has relation to that class of 
horse detachers in which the traces are hooked 
upon pivoted hooks at the end of the single 
tree; and it consists in the detailed construc 
tion and combination of parts of the same, as 
hereinafter more fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
indicates the detaching-lever, which is placed it 
on top of the traceholding pin B and pivoted 
to Said pin just outside of where the trace 
Works on the pin in pulling. At this point it is 
bent back to prevent the trace from coming off, 
and on the inside of the trace it is bent forward 
along beside the trace, as shown in Fig. 1, and 
through the end of said lever a hole is drilled 
for the purpose of attaching the cord C, which 
passes back to a point in easy reach of the 
driver's hand, which, when drawn, brings, the 
lever in the position shown in Fig. 2, which 
turns the trace off of the trace-holding pin, 
thus releasing the horse from the vehicle. 
I am aware that it is not broadly new to 
have the traces hooked upon pivoted hooks at 
the end of the singletree, having means for re 
leasing the pivoted hooks, and I do not claim 
such construction, broadly; but 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The herein-described horse-detacher, con 
sisting of the whiffletree provided at its ends 
with the holding-pin, the curved lever pivoted 
to the end of said pin in the plane of the up. 
per horizontal surface of the whiffletree, and 
the cord for operating the lever, as set forth. 
2. The combination, in a horse-detacher, of 
the whiffletree, the bent pin B, lever A, and 
cord C, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN AMOS DICKSON. 
Witnesses: 
W. C. DICKSON, 
MARK ARROWSMITH, 
O 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383547.txt	(No Model.) 
W, WATMORE. 
No. 383,547, 
MANUFACTURE OF FILES, 
Patented May 29, 1888. 
Az-Z- 
s 
: 
iii.2 
A. 
A75. 
v2. 
siz 
74. 
- Aiz. 
?iz7. 
- Aiza, 
7. 
His st: 
34 Kakh- 
- TilleniuT. 
of 264--, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM WATMORE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MANU FACTURE OF FES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 383,547, dated May 29, 1888. 
Application filed December 9, 1887. Serial No. 257,452. (No model.) 
2C 
I5 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM WATMORE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Philadelphia, Philadelphia county, Pennsyl 
5 vania, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in the Manufacture of Files, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the manufacture of 
files of different forms, and has for its object 
IO to dispense with the usual expensive and ob 
jectionable forging operations employed in 
such manufacture; and my invention consists 
in making file-blanks by first rolling plates to 
a form corresponding in cross section to the 
longitudinal form of the desired blanks, and 
in then cutting sections from said plates to 
produce such blanks, as fully set forth herein 
after, and as illustrated in the figures in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan showing the form of the 
plate from which it is common to forge file 
blanks in the ordinary method of manufacture. 
Figs. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing 
the forms of plates used in my improved pro 
cessin manufacturing blanks of different forms. 
Fig. 4 is a perspective view of a blank made 
from the plate, Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a perspective 
view of the form of blank made from the plate, 
Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a perspective view of a blank 
as furnished with a tang. 
In the manufacture of file-blanks by hand 
it is common to cut from a plate of metal a 
rectangular piece of the general form illus 
trated in Fig. 1, and to then forge this piece 
by hand to the desired shape, in some in 
stances in parting a bevel from both sides and 
from both edges to make a tapering blank, or 
in others to taper Only the opposite faces to 
form a blank of uniform width tapering to. 
Ward both ends, as is required for rasp-blanks. 
In order to avoid these expensive forging oper 
ations, I first roll down a strip of metal to form 
a plate corresponding in its transverse section 
to the longitudinal section of the desired file 
blank. For instance, when the file blank is 
to be of one form, the plate A is rolled to the 
shape illustrated in Fig. 2-that is, with con 
verging faces bc, which constitute the corres 
45 
25 
35 
40 
55 
ponding faces of the file-blanks, and with a 
Contracted edge portion, e. This plate is then 5o 
cut into sections of the proper width of the 
file-blank transversely, as shown in dotted 
lines, thereby forming blanks of the required 
shape, which then can be cut as usual, the 
tang being formed from the part e, as shown 
in Fig. 6, by stamping or shearing. When the 
blank is intended to be used in the manufac 
ture of a rasp with the usual double ends, the 
plate is rolled thickest in the center and taper 
ing toward each edge, as shown in Fig. 3, and 
Sections thereof are then sheared off trans 
versely, as shown in dotted lines in said fig 
ure, forming the completed rasp-blanks illus 
trated in Fig. 5 When it is not desired to 
manufacture a file having a tang, the plate is 65 
rolled without the rib portion e. 
By the method of manufacture above set 
forth I am enabled to produce file-blanks of 
the desired shape complete and ready for cut 
ting without any forging operations whatever, 7o 
and I not only thereby greatly reduce the cost 
of manufacture, but I also avoid the deteriora 
tion of the metal frequently resulting from 
overheating or frequent reheatings in the oper 
ations of forging. 
It will be evident that the form of the plate 
Will depend upon the longitudinal form and 
dimensions of the file it is desired to manu 
facture. 
I claim- 
The within-described improvement in the 
manufacture of file-blanks, the same consist 
ing in first making a plate having the trans 
verse section corresponding to the longitudi 
nal section of the desired blanks, and in then 85 
severing said section transversely to detach 
sections equal in width to the desired blanks, 
Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of two go 
Subscribing witnesses. 
75 
8o 
WILLIAM WATMORE, 
Witnesses: 
WM. S. DARLINGTON. 
N. C. LANE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383647.txt	(No Model.) 
P. LANGE, 
SWITCH FOR, ADJUSTABLE RESISTANCES, 
No. 383,647. 
 
Patented May 29, 1888. 
Q8) by coacs, 
-6-6-64%. 
33 Aolicy &libovic.go. 
O2 
3v-uo 14-bot. 
O2 A v 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP LANGE, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE WEST 
INGHOUSE ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SWITCH FOR ADJUSTABLE RESISTANCES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 383,647, dated May 29, 1888, 
Application filed September 1, 1887. Serial No. 238,4S1, (No model.) 
handle, d, which is preferably of non-con 
ducting material. The plates at are arranged 
in the arc of a circle, having its center at the 
point d". The spring d is preferably formed 
by bending a piece of resilient metal into the 55 
loop form shown, the ends being clamped in a 
pin, e, of insulating material carried by the 
lever D. A similar contact, e, is curved about 
the opposite side of the pine, and this bears 
against a plate, E. This plate E is provided 6o 
with an upwardly-extending lug, e, similar 
to the lugs c. The lugs c and e extend up 
Ward a Sufficient distance to insure that the 
spring d shall not be thrown out of contact 
with any of the plates (t, even though the 65 
base - board A should become considerably 
warped. 
One terminal of an electric circuit may be 
connected to the plate E, and the other ter 
minal to one of the end plates, ct a, of the se- 7o 
ries. The amount of resistance which will 
then be included in circuit may be varied by 
moving the contacts d and e toward and from 
that end plate. 
lever D a catch, f, upon the under side of the 
lever, near its handle d', extends beneath a 
flange, f', upon a plate, F, which is curved to 
the center (l'. 
For the purpose of holding and guiding the 75 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a switch for resistances, the combina 
tion of the base-board, the plates at a, having 
the lugs c C projecting perpendicularly from 
the base-board, the lever D, and a contact 
surface, d, carried thereby and pressing against 85 
the faces of said lugs in a direction parallel 
with the plane of the base-board. 
2. In a Switch for resistances, the combina 
tion, with a Series of plates, C. C., having the 
outwardly-projecting lugs c, of the lever D, oc 
having its axis parallel with said lugs, the 
plate e, having the luge', and contact-springs 
d and e, compressed between the lugs c and e. 
3. In a Switch for resistances, the combina 
tion of the plates act, having the outwardly. 95 
projecting lugs c, the lever D, a contact-sur 
face, d, pressing against Said lugs, and a guide 
plate, F, having the flange f', and the catchf, 
carried upon said lever and projecting beneath 
To a 22 whon, it nat/ concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILIP LANGE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny, in the State 
5 of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Switches for Ad 
justable Resistances, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The invention relates to the construction of 
Io circuit-controlling devices for adjusting the 
amount of resistance included in an electric 
circuit, and the object is to provide a con 
venient and reliable form of circuit-closing 
device. 
I5 The invention consists, generally, in mount 
ing upon a suitable base or box carrying the 
adjustable resistance a series of contact-plates 
connected with different points in the length 
of the resistance, and applying thereto a le 
ver carrying laterally-yielding contacts, which 
are pressed between the plates, and a guide 
plate, which is also mounted upon the base. 
The contact-lever carries an arm which pro 
jects underneath the flange of a suitable plate 
25 for steadying its movement. The electrical 
connections are made with the separate plates 
through vertical lugs projecting upward some 
distance from the base. This construction is 
desirable, so that in case the base-board should 
warp the lever will still carry the contact 
springs in contact with the plates, thus avoid. 
ing a difficulty which has been experienced in 
constructions employed heretofore wherein the 
contact-surfaces are parallel with or flat upon 
the base-board. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front and Fig. 2 a side elevation of a switch 
embodying the features of the invention. 
Referring to the figures, A represents a suit 
able base-board carrying the resistance. Upon 
this board there is mounted a series of con 
tact-plates, a ct, to which are connected con 
ductors b b, leading from different points in 
the length of a suitable resistance. (Not 
shown.) These plates C. are each provided 
with an upwardly-extending lug or arm, c, 
the face of which constitutes a contact-Sur 
face for a spring, d, carried upon a lever, D. 
The lever D is pivoted at d to the base-board, 
3O 
3 5 
45 
5O and is turned upon its piyot by means of a said flange, 
OO 
383,647 
4. In a circuit-controlling switch, the com- 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
bination, with the contact-plates and lever, of scribed my name this 4th day of August, A.D. 
a contact-spring carried by the lever and press- 1887. 
ing against said plates, consisting of a looped 
band of resilient metal having its ends pro- 
jecting toward each other and fastened to the 
lever, substantially as described. 
PHILIP LANGE. 
Witnesses: 
W. D. UPTEGRAFF, 
L. B. STILL WELL. 
5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383747.txt	(No Model.) 
F. MELKERSMAN, 
CENTRIFUGAL GRAIN DRYING MACHINE, 
No. 383,747, 
Fld C7. Z. 
Patented May 29, 1888. 
2 
y kS & 
S 
S 
X S 
S. S 
a. 
S 
S 
W 
X 
S 
S 
S. 
SI 
e 
y 
2 
w 
Y. 
Zaa 
TSSS 
WITNESSES 
Clt. Clu-11-0-vu, 
C (VM, JY-1-----Cu1.1/, 
S 
g 
s 
8." 
212 
Y 
Y. 
y 
R 
W 
V y 
S 
w 
W 
S 
s 
Y 
R 
221248 
2% 
NVENTOR, 
Biy 7us Attorneys. 
Alzedarich 71e/2ce Spruce, 
(6%at-4%-46%t. 
 
a Peters: Photo-Lithograph.cr. Washingto. E. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDRICH MELKERSMAN, OF ST. CHARLES, MISSOURI. 
CENTRIFUGAL GRAN-DRYING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 383,747, dated May 29, 1888. 
Original application filed July 16, 1887, Serial No. 241,528. Divided and this application filed December 19, 1887. Serial No. 
258,338. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDRICH MELKERS 
MAN, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at St. Charles, county of St. Charles, and State 
of Missouri, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Centrifugal Grain 
Drying Machines, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention is especially designed to dry 
grain, particularly oats. 
I have found it desirable in hulling, clean 
ing, and purifying grain to pass it from a hull 
ing - machine to a washer. After passing 
through the washer it is desirable to dry the 
grain, and my improved apparatus is espe 
cially designed for this purpose. 
Briefly stated, it consists of a rotary strainer 
of an improved construction, adapted to sepa 
rate the water and moisture from the grain by 
centrifugal action, to deliver to suitable recep 
tacles, and to subject the grain during the op 
eration to currents of air to aid in the drying 
operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of my improved apparatus, the 
hopper being removed; and Fig. 2 a vertical 
section thereof on the line 22 of Fig. 1. 
The top plate, A, of the main frame is ar 
ranged on Suitable standards, B, and is pro 
vided with a central opening, C, through which 
extends a funnel-shaped hopper, D. A fun 
nel-shaped strainer, E, is arranged around the 
inner end of the hopper and is secured to a 
carriage, E'. The carriage E. consists of a cy. 
lyindrical casing, to which the upper end of 
the strainer is secured. The lower end of the 
strainer is secured to the bottom of the carriage 
by the convex plate E, located under the hop 
per D a short distance below its inner end. 
The carriage is provided on its lower side with 
a boss, F, which is secured to the driving 
shaft G. The driving-shaft is mounted in bear 
ings in the main frame, as indicated. The 
strainer is perforated throughout, and is sup 
ported by triangular braces E, located be. 
tween the carriage and the plates E, of which 
the strainer is formed. The plates E are of 
segmental shape, and are secured to the braces 
at their point of junction, at which point are 
secured ribs or wings H, which extend from 
the lower to the upper end of the strainer, 
O 
25 
45 
S5 
Around the carriage is arranged a jacket, 
I, at the top of which is an inclined annular 
deflector, J. The jacket extends part way un 
der the carriage, and has a discharge-opening 
around the driving-shaft. An annular parti. 
tion, K, is arranged around the jacket and be 
tween it and an inclined outer casing, L, which 
is secured to the top plate, A, and opens at its 
lower end over an annular trough, M. The 
partition Kis supported on braces K, secured 
to the standards. The lower end of the outer 
casing may also be attached to these braces. 
The trough M is provided with a discharge 
opening, M', and one or more discharge-open 
ings, L, are formed in the carriage E' at its 
side near the bottom. 
The grain is delivered into the hopper D, 
passes down onto the convex plate E, and then 
by centrifugal force is carried up the inclined 
standards, over the deflector J, and against the 
outer casing, L, which delivers it to the trough 
M, from which it is discharged through the 
spout M. The trough may be inclined to 
ward the spout M' to facilitate the delivery of 75 
the grain. The Water and moisture that come 
in with the grain pass through the per?o 
rated plates or strainers into the space between 
the strainer-plates and through the openings 
L in the carriage, thence into the space be 
tween the carriage and the jacket I, and so out 
through the discharge-opening. Some water 
may by centrifugal action be carried up along 
the surface of the inclined strainers and strike 
against the inclined deflector J. This deflector 
will stop the progress of the water and deliver 
it into the space between the carriage and the 
jacket I. 
It will then find its way to the dis 
charge-opening of the jacket. The carriage 
carrying the strainers is rapidly revolved, and 
currents of air are induced by the ribsor wings 
H. These currents of air will aid materially 
in drying the grain. 
This application is a division of an applica 
tion filed by me July 16, 1887, serially num 
bered 244,528. Any patentable matter shown 
in said application and not herein claimed is 
disclaimed in favor of said application and 
other divisions thereof. 
95 
90 
I claim as of my own invention 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of the main frame, the ro 
OO 
383,747. 
the partition between the outer casing and the 
jacket, and the annular trough arranged under 
the outer casing. 
4. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of the main frame, the ro 
tary carriage having a water-discharge open 
ing near the bottom, the funnel-shaped strainer 
contained in the carriage, and the jacket sur 
rounding the carriage to receive the Water 
therefrom, with the inclined annular deflector 
arranged around the top of the carriage and 
over the jacket and provided with an annular 
water. opening into the jacket around the car 
riage, the inclined outer casing, the partition 
between the outer casing and the jacket, and 
the top plate over the partition and the outer 
Casing. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name. 
FREDRICH MELKERSMIAN. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. MERTEN, 
GUST AWE HACKMANN. 
- 
25 
35 
o 
IO 
tary carriage, and the strainer mounted in the 
carriage, with the hopper extending into the 
strainer, the convex plate below the mouth of 
the hopper, and the radial ribs or wings ar 
ranged on the inside of the strainer and ex 
tending from the convex plate to the other end 
of the strainer. 
2. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the main frame, the ro 
tary carriage mounted therein, and the funnel. 
shaped strainer mounted in the carriage, with 
the hopper extending into the mouth of the 
strainer, the convex plate on the bottom of the 
strainer under the mouth of the hopper, and 
the radial ribs or wings extending from the 
convex plate to the top of the strainer. 
3. The combination, substantially as here. 
in before set forth, of the main frame, the car 
riage, the strainer mounted in the carriage, and 
the jacket surrounding the carriage and having 
a discharge-opening at the bottom, with the an 
nular deflector arranged around the top of the 
carriage and over the jacket, the outer casing, 
} 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383847.txt	(No Model.) , 
No. 383,847, 
A. P. BAKER 
NAPKIN HOLDER. 
Patented June 5, 1888. 
site.N- 
tes 
M--2 M 
&v-to-14 to .. 
/ O2C2-a/62 
...Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, 9. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT PERRY BAKER, OF THAW VILLE, ILLINOIs. . 
v 
NAPKNHOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 383,847, dated June 5, 1888, 
Application filed December 27, 1887, Serial No. 259,135. (No model. 
To add whon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT PERRY BAKER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Thawville, in the county of Iroquois and State 
of Illinois, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Napkin or Bib Holders, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a napkin or bib 
holder; and it consists in a certain novel con 
struction and arrangement of parts, fully set 
forth hereina?ter, and specifically pointed out 
in the claim. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
means whereby a napkin or bib may be held 
properly spread over the bosom without tying 
or pinning the same, and which may be very 
easily put in place and removed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a detail view 
of the holder. Fig. 2 is a similar view show 
ing a napkin applied thereto. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, the de 
vice comprises, mainly, the outer and inner 
wire rings, A and B, respectively, the free 
ends of which rings are placed together and 
wound with fine wire or other similar mate 
rial to hold them firmly together. The inner 
spring or ring, B, is sufficiently smaller than 
the outer ring to make an opening between 
the same at the centers or at the front of the 
device. 
CC are small balls or knobs secured on the 
ends of the springs to prevent the ends of the 
latter from bearing against the neck of the 
The manner of using the device is as fol 
lows: The corner of the napkin is passed up 
between the springs at the front, and the cor 
Weae. 
- 
- 
ner folded inwardly, so as to cover the inner 
spring and prevent the neck of the wearer 
from coming in contact therewith. It will be 4o 
seen that as the corner of the napkin is drawn 
up between the springs the edges thereof will 
pass along to the part of the holder where the 
said springs are very close together, and it will 
thus be clamped between them and held Se- 45 
curely. To place the holder on the neck, 
separate the rear ends thereof, and when re 
leased it will be seen that the holder encircles 
the neck and holds the napkin close up under 
the chin in the proper position to protect the 50 
bosom. 
The device, as will be seen, is very simple 
and very readily applied. It may be nickel 
or silver plated, and thus made very orna 
mental, the material of the springs being pref- 55 
erably spring-wire. 
Having thus described 
my invention, I 
claim 
The improved napkin - holder herein de 
scribed and shown, consisting of the curved 6o 
round wire springs A B, having their ends 
joined together and wrapped with fine wire, 
and the knobs C C, secured on the ends of the 
springs A B, the said springs being slightly 
separated at their center to receive and hold 65 
the corner of a napkin, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
own I have hereto affixed my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
ALBERT PERRY BAKER. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN P. JoHNSON, 
MICHAEL RINGEISEN. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US383948.txt	(No Model.) 
F, GROFF, 
CHILD'S WEHICLE, 
No. 383,948, 
Patented June 5, 1888. 
 
 
N 
N 
N N N 
N 
 
  
 
V 
VSNS 
N \s 
N : 
N.Y. 
|' 
SA 
NY 
NS 
S 
2 
S.S. 
SS SN s 
V S. 
VSA 
a 
w 
y 
\ 
Fay 
s a. 
-- 
--- 
- 
\ 
A 
we 
As) E. v 
. 
N s'') 
St. 5. S 
4. g35 SN it 
i 
w S 
S-SA 
vess S. 
ASSES 
g \S AW 
sk 
A. 
- 
- 
- 
a 
W. 
N 
S. 
V 
\ Sa isk w 
Yn 
- 
n 
2-NN. 
\ 
N 
N 
N 
- 
1 
ly 
is 
". 
i. 
ity 
Ys 
C 
'Ely 
s 
a 
e 
s 
a 
& : 
SN M 
\ 
\,-- 
- . 
. 
W 
V 
w 
\ 
. 
\ | 
W 
f 
i. 
f 
iISS 
's 
w NSN N 
a 
s 
s 
S 
at 
Q) 
an 
S 
Q 
S 
NYSA 
asSMN 
SeS 
- N f 
ES 
ES 
S\ 
. 3-vuovilov 
N. NWAuette Gro S. 
N35 
S. 
SS 
res 
N 
28). Avlosscs. 
a 13 i?daeae, Pa. 
perers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FAYETTE GROFF, OF SARATOGA SPRINGS, NEW YORK. 
CHILD'S VEHICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 383,948, dated June 5, 1888, 
Application filed February 21, 1888. Serial No. 264,781. No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FAYETTE GROFF, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Saratoga 
Springs, in the county of Saratoga and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Children's Vehicles; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, and to the letters and figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
I sleighs designed to be propelled by hand, and 
more particularly to children's vehicles; and 
it has for its object to provide a device of this 
character designed for use upon snow or ice, 
but which may be converted into a wheeled 
vehicle at will by the simple elevation of the 
rear end of the same. 
It is generally the fact that however good 
the sleighing may be the street-crossings and 
many places upon the sidewalk are entirely 
cleared of snow, thus rendering it difficult to 
propel the sleigh over such places. By my 
construction, when such places are arrived at, 
it is only necessary to slightly elevate the rear 
end of the vehicle, which may be easily done 
by means of the handles, and as soon as the 
bare spot has been passed the rear end is low 
ered and we have a sleigh. Thus it will be 
seen that the vehicle is adapted for use either 
as a sleigh or a wheeled vehicle at will without 
adjustment of the wheels. 
To these ends, and to such others as the in 
vention may relate, the same consists in the 
peculiar combinations and in the novel con 
struction, arrangement, and adaptation of 
parts, all as more fully hereinafter described, 
shown in the accompanying drawings, and 
then specifically defined in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure is 
a perspective view of a vehicle constructed 
in accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a central sectional detail showing the pre 
ferred form of attaching the wheels to the 
le. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings, A designates the sleigh proper, which 
may be of any preferred or well-known con 
struction, provided with suitable handles, B, 
and runners C. 
On the front end of the runners I journal 
25 
35 
4) 
45 
55 
the wheels D at such a point that they will 
normally be clear of the ground, (say from 
one-half an inch to one inch above the acting 
portion of the runner.) 
I do not wish to confine myself to any par 
ticular means for attaching the wheels, as it 
is evident that this may be done in various 
ways; but I wish it to be understood that the 
wheels are not to be adjusted up and down in 
relation to the runners when it is desired to 
convert the sleigh into a wheeled vehicle, or 
vice versa, but that the wheels at all times 
retain a fixed relation to the runners. 
In Fig. 2 I have illustrated one of the many 
ways of attaching the wheels. In this fig 
ure E designates a clamp formed with a pin 
or stub axle, a, upon which is journaled the 
wheel. One end of this stub-axle is screw 
threaded, as shown, to engage the adjusting 
nut b. The clamp is formed with jaws c, 
adapted to embrace the runner, and one of 
said jaws has tapped therethrough a thumb 
screw, d, by means of which it is secured to 
the runner. 
It is evident that while I have shown two 
wheels I do not wish to be confined to such 
number, as the number may be varied--as, 
for instance, I may sometimes prefer a single 
central wheel in place of the two shown, or 
sometimes the central wheel in connection 
with the two shown, making three in all. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim to be new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A sleigh provided at its forward end 
with a wheel journaled in fixed axles and nor 
mally free from contact with the ground, as 
set forth. 
2. A sleigh combined with a wheel jour 
naled in axles fixedly secured to the forward 
ends of the runners with its periphery nor 
mally above the acting face of the runner, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination, with the runner, of the 
clamp E, having jaws c, to embrace the runner, 
and a stub-axle, a, to receive the wheel, and 
the thumb screwd, tapped through one of said 
jaws and engaging the runner, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FAYETTE GROFF. 
Witnesses: 
CoRNELIUS HOWLAND, 
RICHARD HOWLAND, 
75 
90 
ICO 
IOS 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384048.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 384,048, 
 
E. P. LYNCH, 
WALKING CULTIVATOR, 
Patented June 5, 1888. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD P. LYNCH, OF DAVENPORT, IOWA. 
WALKING - CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 384,048, dated June 5, 1888. 
Application filed June 12, 1886. Serial No. 204,983. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD P. LYNCH, of 
Davenport, in the county of Scott and State of 
Iowa, have invented certain Improvements in 
Walking-Cultivators, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to what are commonly 
known as double-shovel plows,' in which two 
diverging shovel-carrying beams are connected 
at their forward ends to a central beam by de 
vices which admit of their being adjusted lat 
erally, in order to spread them more or less, 
and thus vary the distance between the paths 
of their shovels. 
. The invention has reference to means for 
conveniently effecting the lateral adjustment 
of the beams and for securing them in their de 
sired position. 
To this end it consists in longitudinally-ad 
justable wedges of peculiar construction, and 
in the combination therewith of peculiar bear 
ing-plates, in the manner hereinafter specified. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
plow provided with my improvement. Fig. 
2 represents one of the double wedges in its 
preferred form. Fig. 3 represents the block 
or plate used in connection with the wedge. 
Fig. 4 is a plan view illustrating the peculiar 
form of the wedge. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
central beam to which the draft is applied; B 
and B, the two curved metallic beams pro 
vided with shovels CC, and connected at their 
forward ends to oppositesides of the main beam 
by transverse bolts D and E, or equivalent 
fastenings. 
F represents the two handles by 
which the implement is guided, their lower 
ends being secured to the outer sides of the 
beams B and B by means of a single bolt, F, 
which passes through the handles and the 
beams, as shown. 
The foregoing parts are or may be of ordi 
nary construction and arrangement. 
In applying my improvement I provide for 
each side of the plow a plate, G, of the form 
shown in Fig. 2, adapted for insertion between 
the main beam and one of the shovel-beams 
for the purpose of spreading or holding them 
apart. This wedge is preferably made, as 
shown, with two inclined or tapered portions, 
a and b, at opposite ends, the forward and thin 
portion, a, adapted to fit into the narrow space 
between the forward portions of the beams, 
while the broader portion, b, lies between the 
rear portions of the beams, which are separated 
to a greater extent. I prefer to provide the 
plate with lips c, to engage over the edges of 
the main beam, and thus assist in holding it in 
place. I also provide the plate at its ends 
with longitudinal slots b, through which the 
bolts E and F are passed, so that the accidental 
detachment of the plate is prevented. Be 
tween the rear end of each plate G and the ad 
jacent shovel-beam I insert a plate or block, 
H, such as shown in Fig. 3. This block is pro 
vided, as shown, with the longitudinal open 
ing e, through which the bolt Fis passed to re 
tain it in position. At its inner end the block 
is provided with teeth or projectionsg, adapted 
to interlock with corresponding notches, h, 
formed in the outer edge of the plate G, as 
shown in the drawings. Owing to this inter 
locking action of the parts they are prevented 
from slipping accidentally out of position. By 
loosening the bolts and driving the plate for 
ward the beams D and E may be separated to 
the desired extent, and by then tightening the 
bolts the beams are locked firmly in position. 
The forward or thin end, a, of the plate G may 
be omitted and the portion lb used alone in con 
nection with the plate H; but it is preferred to 
employ the plate G with the two ends, for the 
reason that it affords better support for the 
beam. In place of a single bolt, F, passing 
through both the central and the side beams, 
I may employ on each side of the plow a short 
bolt passing only through the plates G and H, 
the central beam, and the shovel-standard on 
either side. 
The rear end, b, of the wedge is commonly 
constructed with a pitch or inclination greater 
than that of the forward portion, a, and with 
a longitudinal curvature at its outer edge, as 
shown in Fig. 4, to compensate for the greater 
spread of the beams at the rear as compared 
with the front. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
1. In combination with the main beam and 
the shovel-beam applied to its side, the inter 
mediate plate, G, provided at opposite ends 
with the two distinct wedges, 
2. In combination with the main beam and 
claim is 
95 
IOC 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
384,048 
the shovel-beam applied to its side, the inter- and provided with notches h, in combination 
mediate adjustable plate, G, having two wedge 
with the block H, constructed and arranged 
like portions at opposite ends, and the plate 
to interlock there with, as described. 
H, seated between the rear end of the plate G 
In testimony whereof Ihereunto set my hand 
this 14th day of May, 1886, in the presence of 15 
5 and the shovel-beam, whereby the shovel-beam 
is supported at two points and its adjustment 
two attesting witnesses. 
at both points simultaneously permitted. 
3. The main beam and the shovel-beam at 
its side, and the intermediate wedge-like block, 
Io b, having its outer face curved longitudinally 
GEO. H. FRENCH, 
G. WATSON FRENCH. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD P. LYNCH, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384148.txt	L. B. GIBSON. 
MOTOR FOR STREET CARs, 
Patented June 5, 1888. 
ASA DiG 
Fly 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EEE NEG O ) 
 
%2-2S 
CASAP 
(No Model.) 
No. 384,48, 
  
 
 
SAS 
sissa 
station asy 
as Trist, 
Merc Q 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LUCIUS. B. GIBSON, OF PUEBLO, COLORADO. 
MOTOR FOR STREET CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 384,148, dated June 5, 1888. 
Application filed April 2, 1888. Serial No. 269,394. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
the shaft, but having lateral movement there 
Be it known that I, LUCIUS B. GIBSON, of on. These wheels are provided with V-shaped 
Pueblo, in the county of Pueblo and State of peripheries adapted to fit within the grooved 
Colorado, have invented a new and useful Imperipheries of the wheels B C D on the main 55 
5 provement in Motors for Street. Cars; and I do shaft, and thus receive motion from the said 
hereby declare that the following is a full, main shaft and communicate it to the axle of 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
the car. To allow for this, I provide the shaft 
The present invention relates to that class of Q with a sprocket-wheel, N, which has a chain, 
motors described in a series of applications of O, connecting it with a suitable wheel on the 6o 
IO even date herewith, these motors being in-axle. The wheels B CD' on the shaft Q are 
tended for the propulsion of street-cars and held between a yoke, I, the rear end of which 
like vehicles. In the applications referred to is in connection with a screw-threaded rod, H, 
the motor is connected to the wheels of the car provided with a suitable handle, and by oper 
through a supplemental shaft, upon which areating this rod the wheels on this shaft Q may 65 
I5 secured friction or sprocket wheels adapted to be adjusted laterally to bring either one or the 
receive motion from the main shaft of the other of the wheels B CD' in connection with 
Source of power and to transmit it to the axle the wheels B CD on the main shaft, and as the 
of the car. The applications also include means wheels B C D vary in diameter it will be ob 
for varying the speed of the car and for re-served that nine variations in the speed of the 7o 
car may be effected. 
2O Versing its movement. 
The present invention is a modification of 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is provided an intermediate connection between 8c 
I do not desire to limit myself to the number 
the devices shown in the applications referred of wheels shown, as a greater or less number 
to, and includes other forms of devices for com- may be used; but I have found that in practice 
municating the power from the main shaft to the number I have shown will be sufficient un- 75 
25 the axle of the car, for changing the speed of der ordinary circumstances. The frame J is 
Said car, and for reversing its movement; and adjusted nearer to or away from the main shaft 
the invention consists in the devices and con- to engage the different sets of wheels. In or 
bination of devices hereinafter to be described. der to reverse the movement of the car, I have 
3O a side elevation of my motor, and Fig.2 a plan the two sets of wheels, as shown at E in the 
view of the same. 
figures. This consists of an arm, F, pivoted 
As in the other forms of apparatus, the mo- at one end above the line of the wheels just de 
tor may be of any suitable character, and may scribed, with its opposite end in connection 
be run by gas or oil. A suitable frame sup- with a screw-threaded rod, G, operating in a 85 
35 ports the motor, which is provided with a bal- vertical line. This rod is formed as a yoke 
ange-wheel, and is preferably mounted at one near its center, and within the opening is 
end of Said frame. The main shaft of the mo- mounted a double wheel, e, one of its parts be 
tor projects to one side and has its bearings in ing formed with a V-shaped periphery and the 
a supplemental frame, M, which is supported other with a peripheral groove. The V-shaped 9o 
4O from the main frame of the car by suitable part is directly above the wheel C of the main 
Standards. On the projecting end of the main shaft, and when it is desired to change the di 
shaft are three friction-wheels, B CD, varying rection of movement this wheel is brought into 
in diameter and all provided with deep pe. contact with the wheel C by the adjustment of 
ripheral grooves. In the front part of the sup- the arm F. The wheel or wheels upon the sup-95 
45 plemental frame, in suitable guides in the in- plemental shaft may then be shifted laterally, 
terior Walls thereof, Isupport a sliding frame, so that either one or the other will engage with 
J, which is adjustable back and forth through the grooved wheel of the pair, and the move 
a screw-threaded rod, K, provided with a suit- ment of the main shaft will thus be communi 
able handle. In the front part of the sliding cated to the supplemental shaft through the IOO 
5O frame I form bearings for a shaft, Q, which double wheel, and thus reverse the movement 
Supports a series of wheels, BCD, splined to of the car. 
2 
384,148 
mit the motion of the main shaft to the sup 
I claim 
1. A motor for street-cars, consisting of a plemental shaft and reverse the movement of 
3. A motor for street-cars, consisting of a 
source of power, a main driving-shaft carrying 
pulleys varying in diameter, a supplemental 
shaft mounted in a sliding frame, pulleys vary 
ing in diameter splined to said shaft, a yoke 
for said pulleys, means for adjusting said yoke 
and pulleys laterally, and a driving-connection 
from the supplemental shaft to the main driv 
ing-shaft, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
Source of power, a main shaft, a supplemental the car, substantially as described. 
frame, friction-wheels on the main shaft vary 
5 ing in diameter, a supplemental shaft adjust 
able toward or from the main shaft, friction 
Wheels on the supplemental shaft, adapted to 
engage with the wheels on the main shaft, con 
nection between said shaft and the car-axle, 
and means for adjusting the pulleys on the sup 
plemental shaft laterally, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. A motor for street-cars, consisting of a 
Source of power, a main driving-shaft carrying 
pulleys varying in diameter, a supplemental 
shaft carrying splined pulleys varying in di 
ameter, means for adjusting the pulleys later 
ally, and an intermediate friction-disk between 
the main and supplemental shafts, adapted to 
2O engage the pulleys of both shafts and to trans 
LUCIUS B. GIBSON. 
Witnesses: 
E. H. MARTIN, 
D. J. SIPES. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384248.txt	(No Model.) 
 
W. R. F0X. 
DADO CUTTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N. Pereas, photo-thographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. FOX, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICEIIGAN. 
DADO-CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 384,248, dated June 12, 1888. 
Applicatio) filed March 10, 1888, Serial No. 266,911. No model.) 
SELWS. 
- 
65 
To all, whom it may concern. 
providing a sleeve screw-threaded, with right 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. Fox, of and left hand threads at opposite ends for ad- 55 
GrandRapids, in the county of Kent and State justing each pair simultaneously toward or 
of Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Dado-Cutters; and Idohereby from each other. 
The invention also consists of details of con 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and struction, hereinafter fully described. 
exact description of the same. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
Heretofore application has been made by J. 
represents a perspective view of my improved 
R. Mentzer namely, on the 27th day of May, 
cutter. Fig. 2 is a vertical central section of 
1886, Serial No. 203,486 for a grooving saw the saw shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a modi 
having two outer or guiding saws adapted to fication showing the saws mounted directly 
cut a certain width of groovo, with an interme 
through their supporting - collars upon the 
diate Saw arranged across the space between 
Fig. 4 is a second modifi 
threaded sleeves. 
the tWO SaWS at an angle, and adapted to com 
cation showing a central saw interposed be 
plete the groove by removing the material be. tween the pairs of saws, and Fig. 5 is a third 
tWeen the cuts made by the two outer saws. 
modification showing a double set of inclined 
In this construction, however, no adjustment 
is permitted, and but one width of groove can 
In Figs. 1 and 2 I have shown the cutter as 
be cut. 
composed entirely of saws, four in number. 
In my invention I have aimed to provide a 
I arrange these saws in pairs, with the Outer 
Construction adapted to be adjusted to cut saw of each pair in vertical plane and the in 
grooves of different widths, and at the same 
ner saw inclined thereto. These saws are con 
time to retain all the simple and effective ?ea 
nected together in this relative position by 
tures of the Mentzer invention. Saws belong 
means of a collar, ac, having a central bearing 
ing to this class are usually called  dado. cut 
ring, a, straight on its outer face and inclined 
ters, and may be applied not only to the cut 
on its inner face, with a lower flange, b, of 
ting of grooves, but to all other purposes for 
greater width than the ring a, so as to provide 
which they may be found adapted. 
a projecting edge for the support of the inner 
The invention consists, broadly, of outer 
peripheries of the saws, it being understood 
parallel saws adapted to cut the width of groove, 
that annular openings are formed in the Cen 
and intermediate saws arranged at an angle 
ters of said saws. The other pair of Saws is 
to the Outer saws and occupying the space 
arranged in the same manner, the inclined 
between them, whereby the material between 
saws of each set being parallel to each other 
the Outer lines of the groove will be removed, 
and the straight saws of one pair parallel to 
the Said Saws being adjustable in relation to 
the corresponding saw of the other pair. The 
each other, so as to cut a narrower or a wider 
collars to which the saws of each pair are Se 
cured, as described, are in turn supported on 
groove. 
rings A A. The outer diameter of these rings 
Further, the invention includes outer mark 
ing-Saws and intermediate saws for removing 
is about equal to the diameter of the rings a, 
and upon their inner faces they are provided 
the material between the lines formed thereby, 
with projecting flanges forming seats for the 
Said Saws being arranged in series, the outer 
saw of each series being vertical and the in 
flanges b of the collars to which the saws are 
secured. Each of the rings A A and the SaWS 
ner saw or saws inclined, the saws of each se. 
ries being adjustable in relation to the saws of 
are held firmly together by means of inter 
nally-screw - threaded thimbles which pass 
the other Series, whereby different widths of 
through openings formed in the rings and saws 
grooves may be cut. 
Further, the invention consists of Saws ar 
of each set. These thimbles are shown at c 
ranged in pairs, one saw of each pair being 
and have rivet-heads. From the oppositeside 
a screw is inserted having external threads 
vertical and the other inclined, the saws of 
each pair being adjustable. 
adapted to screw within the thimbles, and 
thus securely clamp the saws of each set to 
Further, it consists of saws connected to. 
gether in pairs by a suitable collar, one of said 
one of the rings. 
saws being straight and the other inclined, and 
The rings A A are mounted on a sleeve, B, 
85 
75 
95 
IOO) 
I O5 
O 
25 
4) 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384349.txt	(No Model.) 
APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING LEAD AND BASE BULLION FROM SLAG. 
Patented June 12, 1888. 
No. 384,349, 
W. B. DEWEREUX. 
e -2 . al 
z2 
 
2 * 
YNNssvs. 
6. 
r 
, 
A &S z s &SN 
{ %;a 
2%-47% 
2 
N. PETERS, :ate-lithographer, washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED SiATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER B. DEVEREUX, 
OFASPEN, COILORADO. 
APPARAUS FOR SEPARATING LEAD AND BASE BUION FROM S.AG, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 384,349, dated June 12, 1888. 
Original application filed February 25, SS6, Serial No. 193, 199. 
Divided all this application filed November 2, 1857. Serial 
No. 254,073. 
(No model.) 
5 
55 
which settle to the botton of crucible, grad 
ually rise, owing to the pressure of the column 
of liquid materials in the crucible of the fur 
nace, and from which the lead or base bullion 
is renoved by means of a ladle as it accumu 
lates. The so-called siphon' or 'aufo 
matic tap,' which is largely in use for this 
purpose throughout the wester 1 portions of 
the United States, is merely a modification of . 
the old-fashioned exterior basin, and is too 
widely known and used to need description in 
this connection. 
All of the various methods and deviceshith 
erto made use of for tapping off bullion, slags, 
and mattes from furnaces are open in practice 
to very many and some very serious objec 
tions, and the separation wiich is effected by 
them is neither a tutomatic nor perfect. The 
principal objection to then is that in cases 
where the ores to be smelted contain copper, 7o 
Zinc, baryta, or other inpurities, accretions 
are liable to be formed in the crlicible, the for 
mation of which is extremely difficult to pre 
vent, and the growth of which almost invaria 
bly causes an eventual stoppage of the furnace 75 
before it would otherwise be necessary, owing 
to the stoppage and chilling of the lead-well, 
and the difficulty experienced in keeping the 
passage open through the walls of the crucible. 
The accretions, which are hard and tough 
masses, have to be removed by chiseling, ne 
cessitating the furnace being put out of blast 
and cooled off. 
Now, I have discovered that by construct 
ing a smelting-furnace in such a form as to en 
tirely do away with the ordinary form of cru 
cible, and by placing the bottom of the fur 
nace close up to the fusion-Zone, and by tap 
ping the entire fluid contents of the furnace 
directly into an exterior and portable recep 
tacle provided with interior means for auto 
matically separating the various ingredients 
which flow into it, it is possible to separate 
almost completely from each other, first, the 
mattes and speiss; second, the lead or base 
bullion, and third the slag, to render the for 
mation of accretions much less likely to occur 
by reason of there being no crucible in the fur 
nace, and no possibility of chilling, to attain 
85 
90 
Sch 
O 
3 
35 
To add uphoi, it in auf concern: 
Be it known that I, WATTER B. DEVEREUX, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Aspen, in the county of Pitkin and State of 
Colorado, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Apparatus for Separating 
Lead and Base Bullion from Slag, Mattes, and 
Speiss, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to the separation of 
lead and the alloys of silver, gold, and other 
metals with lead, commonly known as base 
bullion, fron the mattes, slags, and speiss 
which are formed therewith, in the smelting 
of the ores of such metals, and also to the 
separation of the poor slags from the mattes, 
speiss, and slags rich in silver, which flow out 
with the same when the entire liquid contents 
of the furnace are tapped, the object of the in 
vention being to effect this threefold separa 
tion outside of the furnace while the smelted 
mass is still liquid, and while the furnace is 
still running, in one and the Salme. Operation 
and in a more economical manner than has 
heretofore been possible. 
It has heretofore been the practice in smelt 
ing silver ore and bullion to make use of the 
ordinary form of shaft-?urnace having an in 
terior hearth or crucible, into which the bull 
ion, mattes, speiss, and slags fall and settle 
after reduction, and to use in connection there 
with some of the many forms of devices which 
are in common use for separating out and re 
moving the base bullion or lead while the 
same is still liquid and for tapping off the 
mattes and slags from the bullion while the same 
are still running. Various methods are resort 
ed to for the purpose of Separating the valuable 
slags, mattes, and Speiss from the poor slags, 
which run out with the same, and all of the 
methods and devices by means of which the 
same has hitherto been accomplished are more 
or less difficult of manipulation and imperfect 
in operation. The most usual device em 
ployed for separating lead or bullion from the 
mass of slags and mattes Smelted there with is 
the exterior lead-basin, which is connected 
with the lowest part of the furnace-hearth, and 
in which the moitel base bullion and lead, be 
so ing heavier than the other molten substances great economy of ?urnace construction, and to Icc 
384,349 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
Secure much more regular working, and con 
sequently campaigns of much greater length. 
My invention, which consists in an appara 
tus in which the aforesaid separation is con 
ducted, will be best understood by reference 
to the accompanying sheet of drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section, and Fig. 2 a. 
plan view of the same, and Fig. 3 is a sketch 
of one of the details. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the Several views. 
In the views, E represents an ordinary shaft 
furnace, in which the crucible is dispensed 
with and the bottom G made to slope slightly 
from all parts of the furnace toward the tap 
hole. 
H represents the ordinary form of furnace 
tap-hole or spout, through which the entire 
smelted portion of the charge is drawn off. 
The vessel which in my invention is substi 
tuted for the furnace-crucible consists, as is 
shown in the views, of a receiver or well, A, 
which is made of metal, preferably of cast 
iron, of any convenient size or shape. In prac 
tice it will be found most convenient to make 
the receiving-well of the oblong form shown 
in the views, with side walls flaring slightly 
outward from the bottom toward the top, in 
order to facilitate dumping, and provided with 
a flange, b, at the top, whereby the same may 
belifted, removed, or dumped by any conven 
ient form of mechanism. The separation is 
effected in this vessel by a means of a combi 
nation of the devices (for some of which I have 
already made application for Letters Patent 
by separate petition, the present case being a 
division of the application, Serial No. 193,199, 
heretofore filed) so arranged that the receiver 
A is subdivided interiorly into connected 
compartments in which the static pressure of 
the liquid of varying specific gravities therein 
contained effects automatic separation of the 
different materials composing the smelted 
SS 
Figs. I and 2 show the receiver or well 
A combined with a movable diaphragm, D, 
of the character shown in the views, and more 
particularly described and claimed in the 
above-mentioned separate applications. By 
means of the diaphragm D the receiver or 
well A is divided into two compartments, a 
and a, of any desirable size, which are con 
nected at or near the bottom by means of an 
opening, o, of convenient dimensions, placed 
at or near the bottom of the diaphragm. 
The diaphragm may be held in place by any 
convenient form of fastening which will en 
able it to be removed at pleasure; but in prac 
tice it will be found convenient to provide it 
at the top with the horizontal lugs ll, which 
are arranged to fit closely into the depres 
sions or grooves ill, &c., in the flangel, for 
the purpose of holding the diaphragm at any 
convenient point. These depressions may be 
arranged at convenient distances apart, and by 
shifting the diaphragm from one to the other 
the relative size of the compartments a, a may 
be changed at pleasure. Fig. 3 shows the ar 
rangement of the lugs, which are provided on 
top with a groove or are made sufficiently low 
to admit of the flangee of the cover C pass 
ing over them when the latter is placed in po 
sition on the receiver A, as shown in Fig. 3. 
In the form of apparatus described in the 
present application the lead- well W is not 
placed within one of the compartments at a, 
but is attached to the exterior of the receiv 
ing-well A, as shown in the views. This lead 
well may be of any convenient shape; but is 
preferably of that shape shown in the draw 
ings, and must be of equal depth with the re 
ceiver. An opening, o', in the wall of the re 
ceiver at the extreme bottom, connects the 
lead-well with the compartmenta'. This open 
ing is of smaller vertical dimensions than the 
opening O in the diaphragm. It is quite im 
material how the lead-well is attached to the 
receiver; but in practice it will be attached 
by bolts h, h, as shown in the views, passing 
through the end wall of the receiver and the 
side wall of the well. The effect of this ar 
rangement is to provide two interior compart 
ments, a and a, within the receiver and an ex 
terior or lead compartment, a'. The upper 
edge of the receiver is provided with two dis 
charge-spouts, FE, which are arranged to dis 
charge the contents of the compartments a, and 
ct, respectively, in the manner hereinafter de 
scribed. These spouts may be attached to the 
side walls of the receiver A in any convenient 
manner. In the drawings they are shown pro 
vided with flanges ff, fitting into correspond 
ing grooves in the flange b on the upper edge 
of the receiver, which is cut out to fit the spouts 
and provided with overflow-openings, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
The receiver A is covered with a flanged 
cover, C, of iron or other metal, fitting tightly 
over the same, and held in its position by means 
of the interior flange, e, fitted to the inner edge 
of the receiver, as shown. The lead-well W. 
is provided with a separate removable cover, 
C, provided with an interior flange, e, as be 
fore, for the purpose of holding the same in 
place. The lead-well W is provided with an 
opening, J, in its exterior wall at its extreme 
base, whereby the lead and basebullion, and, in 
fact, the entire contents of the receiver, may, 
if necessary, be drawn off when the receiver 
becomes choked up with shells. During the 
running of the receiver this hole may be 
stopped up with fire-clay, or by means of an 
iron plug, or in any other convenient manner. 
The method of separation effected by the 
above apparatus and the mode of operation of 
the same are substantially as follows: In smelt 
ing ores, as is well known, the various pro 
ducts and by products when molten differ in 
specific gravity. The lead and bullion in this 
condition are heavier than the mattes and 
speiss, and these in turn are heavier than the 
90 
CO 
IC5 
I 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
384,349 
3 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
8th 
February, 1886, filed three separate applica 
tions for Letters Patent-among other things 
for the combination, with a movable receiver, 
of a movable diaphragm, such as that herein 
above described-(of one of which applications, 
Serial No. 193, 199, the present is a division,) 
Imake no claim to the same in this application, 
except as an element in the combinations here 
inafter claimed, and Idisclaim said combination 
So far as any Letters Patent that may be issued 
on this application are concerned; but 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with a smelting-fur 
nace, of a portable receiver or collecting-well 
into which the salme discharges, a diaphragm 
placed in the interior of said receiver, whereby 
it is subdivided into two separate compart 
ments, an opening in the base of said diaphragan 
connecting Said compartments, a lead-well at 
tached to the exterior of said receiver, and an 
opening in the wall of said receiver connect 
ing one of said compartments with the extreme 
base of the lead- well, for the purposes set forth. 
2. The combination, with a smelting - fur 
nace, of a portable receiver or collecting-well 
into which the same discharges, a diaphragm 
placed in the interior of said receiver, whereby 
it is subdivided into two separate compart 
ments, an opening in the base of said diaphragm 
connecting said compartments, a lead-well at 
tached to the exterior of said receiver of equal 
depth, and an opening in the wall of said re 
ceiver connecting one of said compartments 
with the extreme base of the lead-well, said 
diaphragm and lead-well being so constructed 
and arranged that either or both may be re 
moved, raised, lowered, or shifted at pleasure. 
Signed at Glenwood Springs, in the county 
of Garfield and State of Colorado, this 26th 
day of October, A. D. 1SS7. 
WALTER, B. DEVEREUX. 
Witnesses: 
ALEX. ANDERSON, 
JoHN R. PLUNRETT. 
slags winich issue from the furnace with them. 
The result is that the lead or base bullion will 
settle to the bottom of any vessel in which all 
of the furnace products are collected at the 
same inoment, while the mattes and speiss will 
assume a position directly above, leaving the 
slag, which is lighter, to float on the top. When 
the entire contents of the furnace are allowed 
to flow through the tap-hole into a vessel such 
as is above described, which is subdivided by 
a diaphragma into compartments connected at 
the bottom by incans of an opening of suffi 
cient vertical dimensions to admit of the pas 
Sage of the bullion and the superincumbent 
layer of mattes and speiss, the poor slags which 
float upon the top of the compartment into 
which the fuid mass flows will flow off, through 
any opening which may be provided for that 
purpose, at the upper edge of the vessel, while 
in the compartment into which the lead or 
bullion and mattes and speiss flow over the 
last - mentioned ingredients will rise in the 
compartment in proportion to the static press. 
ure of the column of liquid in the first com 
partment. If, now, the compartment into 
which the mattes, speiss, and base bullion flow 
Over be connected at its extreme base with an 
exterior lead - well, such as that above de 
scribed, by means of an opening, the vertical 
height of which is slightly less than that of the 
opening in the diaphragm, a further separa 
tion will be effected between the lead and base 
bullion on the one hand and the mattes and 
speiss on the other, as the former will be forced 
over into the lead-well and accumulate there 
in, and the latter will remain in the second 
compartment of the receiving-well, and if dis 
charging spouts be placed at the upper rim of 
both compartments the mattes and speiss in 
the one compartment and the slag in the other, 
as they accumulate therein, will ?low off auto 
matically and so be separated one from the 
other. 
As I have heretofore, on the 24th day of 
5 
C. 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384450.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 384,450, 
 
J. F. KINGSLEY, 
DIE FOR MAKING EYE BARS 
Patented June 12, 1888. 
2 
6 
SESs SS5traysksses 
YS 
 
NSN 
Staff Y. 
  
   
27 
   
  
 
As 
(5. 
dier8. 
- 
. 
. 
: 
Sega' 
84-uo vitov, 
1622-e Z, Zez,22s2%- 
2-7% 24 
&y 2. elitovic, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. KINGSLEY, OF ATHENS, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DE FOR MAKING EYE - BARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 384,450, dated June 12, 1888. 
Application filed March 13, 1888. Serial No. 267,088. (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN F. KINGSLEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Athens, 
in the county of Bradford and State of Penn. 
Sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Dies for Making Eye 
Bars; and I do hereby declare that the follow. 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the Same, reference being had to the annexed 
drawings, making a part of this specification, 
and to the letters and figures of reference 
marked thereon. 
This invention relates to dies for the manu 
facture of eye-bars, and is designed as an im 
provement on my former patent, No. 369,014, 
dated August 30, 1887; and it consists in form 
ing the upper die-section flat, with a small 
groove in the center running longitudinally, 
and in other peculiarities of construction, as 
Well as the combinations, the arrangement, and 
adaptation of parts, all as more fully herein 
after described, shown in the drawings, and 
then particularly pointed out in the claims. 
The present invention is clearly illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the upper 
die-section and its attachments; Fig. 2, a simi 
lar view of the lower die-section. Fig. 3 is a 
longitudinal central section on the line acac of 
Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a transverse section taken on 
the line y y of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a perspective 
view of so much of an eye-bar as is operated 
upon by my improved die; and Fig. 6 is a 
similar view of a like portion of an eye-bar, 
the same being represented as finished and 
ready to be perforated. Fig. 7 is a transverse 
section, taken on the line & 2 of Fig. 1, with the 
piece I in position. 
Referring to the details of the drawings by 
letter, A. designates the base or bed of the ma 
chine, upon which is supported the lower die 
section, B, which is provided with a central 
longitudinal rib or elevation, a, or, in other 
words, the upper face is inclined from the cen 
ter in opposite directions. At one end this 
lower section is provided with a recess, b, and 
is provided at said recessed end with the de 
tachable plates C, the edges of said plates 
abutting against the flanges c on said section, 
as shown in Fig. 2. 
The upper and movable 
- 
die. section, D, is substantially flat on its lower 
face, and is provided with a central longitudi 
nal groove or channel, d. The end of the up 
per die, D, is cut away to form recesses e, to 
receive the bifurcated end f of the rammer E. 
Above the upper die-section, D, is a frame, 
F, provided with flanges gh, which fit corre 
spondingly-formed channels or grooves, ii, in 
the edges of the upper die-section, D, and the 
platen G, respectively, as shown in Fig. 1, this 
construction being similar to that shown in 
my patent above referred to. 
To the sides of the frame E are journaled 
the anti-friction rollers H, upon which bear 
the platen and upper die-section, said rollers 
having an enlarged bearing, k, midway of the 
ends, which fit in the grooves l in in the platen 
and upper die-section respectively, this being 
substantially the same in construction and 
operation as in my previous patent. 
The rammer is formed with a longitudinal 
depression, or is triangular in cross-section 
upon its under face, to fit the shape of the 
lower die-section, and the bifurcated end of 
the rammer is of such shape as to form the end 
of the upset portion of the bar whenacted upon, 
and in operation this rammer is connected to 
the piston-rod of the machine. 
The pieces C are designed to be made to cor 
respond to the thickness and shape of the head 
or neck, and are adapted to be interchangeable, 
according to the kind of bar desired. The end 
of the upper die-section is formed with the de 
pression n, as will be seen in Fig. 1, to form 
the ridge 0, as seen in Fig. 5. 
Iis a removable piece made to conform to 
the upper and lower die-sections and the ram 
mer and the shape of that portion of the head, 
and is designed to be used when the head de 
sired is smaller than the concave end of the 
rammer. Pieces I may be made of varying 
sizes and shapes to correspond to the shapes 
of the heads desired. The projection p on the 
piece I shown is to fit the depression n in the 
upper die-section. 
The operation is as follows: The end of the 
bar (as it comes from the rollers with parallel 
sides and edges) is heated and laid upon the 
lower die-section between the plates C. The 
upper die-section is then lowered and forced 
upon the heated bar, which is placed centrally 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
- 40 
45 
SO 
384,450 
on the bottom die-section and against the ram 
mer and piece I, so as to produce a thinning 
of the bar in the center of its width and to a 
point at about the center of the upset head, 
except at the depression , where the bar 
would be simply bent to a point corresponding 
With the center of the head. Power is then 
applied to the rammer, and the top die-section 
is forced out by the ran in the process of up 
Setting. At the same time the thinning of the 
bar in the center is done a portion of the metal 
is forced into the grooved in the top die sec 
tion, and as the metal slides along with it it 
has the tendency of holding the heated portion 
Straight during the process of upsetting. After 
the upsetting is done the head is flattened out 
to the thickness required in any well-known 
Way. 
What I claim as new is 
1. The combination, with a lower die sec 
tion having a recess at one end and central 
longitudinal rib, of the flat upper die-section 
having central longitudinal groove, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, with the upper die-sec 
tion, flat upon its under face and provided 
With a central longitudinal groove, of the lower 
die-scction having a central longitudinal rib 
IO 
25 
and recessed at one end and the interchange 
able plates at said recessed end, substantially 
as Set forth. 
3. The combination, with the lower die-sec 
tion having central longitudinal rib and a re 
cess at one end, of the upper die-Section, flat 
upon its under face and formed with central 
longitudinal groove and depression n, and the 
rammer, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with the lower die. Sec 
tion having at one end a recess and the plates 
at said recessed end, of the upper die-section, 
! the rammer, and the removable piece, all Sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination, with the lower die sec 
tion having recess at one end and the plates 
at said recessed end, of the upper die-section 
formed with depression n, the ranmer, and 
the removable piece I, having the projection 
p, adapted to fit said depression, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
JOHN F. KINGSLEY. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
S. A. HINES, 
N. A. GRAHAM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384551.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 384.55l. 
 
H, ALF MAN & L. SCHARFF, 
UMBRELLA. 
Patented June 12, 1888. 
-Z i7.2 
S28 if cases, 
-6 
64.4/ 47c64. 
81-uc11.fots, 
"22 grge 
oz Se/ia7, 
/ 
silveittorney 
e-om-2 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY ALFMAN AND LEOPOLD SCHARFF, OF MOBILE, ALABAMA. 
UMBRELA 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 384,551, dated June 12, 1888. 
Application filed July 16, 1887. Serial No. 244,433. (No model.) 
O 
To alA whon, it Tay concern: 
Be it known that we, HARRY ALFMAN and 
LEOPOLD SCHARFF, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Mobile, in the county of 
Mobile and State of Alabama, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Um 
brellas, of which the following is such a full, 
clear, and exact description as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the appended draw 
ings, forming a parthereof. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in umbrellas, both as re 
gards the construction of the ribs and of the 
covering; and the object of the invention is to 
construct an umbrella with a detachable cov 
ering which can in a few moments be removed 
from or attached to the frame, as may be de 
sired. 
Another object of the invention is to so con 
struct the frame that the owner may be able to 
use the same frame for a variety of coverings 
for instance, a covering to match or harmon 
ize with each dress, supposing the owner to be 
a lady. 
Another object of this invention is to so con 
struct the frame that it will vary as little as 
pOSsible from those ordinarily made, so that 
the manufacturer will be put to little or no ad 
ditional cost in the manufacture of them. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, and on which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate the same or 
corresponding features, Figure 1 represents a 
perspective view of an umbrella made in ac 
cordance with our invention. Fig. 2 is a de 
tached view of one of the ribs and its attached 
arm. Fig. 3 is a detached sectional view of 
a portion of a rib, more clearly showing the 
interior construction thereof. Fig. 4 is a view 
showing the construction of the center of the 
covering. Fig. 5 is a detached view of the han 
dle or stick; and Fig. 6 is a detached view of 
the strap used for fastening the cover to the 
The letter A designates the stick of the um 
brella, the same having a handle, B, of the 
usual or any approved construction and ter 
minating at the other end in a screw-threaded 
5o extension, C, at the base of which is the usual 
frame. 
- 
45 
ring, C, for receiving the upper ends of the 
ribs, as more clearly seen in Fig. 5. On this 
screw-threaded extension Cfits the cap D, the 
same being of wood or metal, as desired, and 
having its larger end provided with an interior 
screw-thread, so as to screw upon the exten 
sion C, and having its other end provided 
with a ferrule, E, as usual. The different por 
tions or pieces of material constituting the 
covering of the umbrella, instead of coming to 
gether at the center, as is usual, leaving only 
a very small aperture through which the stick 
is pushed, terminate in, in this instance, or, 
rather, are fastened to, a ring, F, as seen in Fig. 
4, and the extension C is pushed through this 
ring, the latter resting upon the ring C, and 
the cap D is then screwed on and securely 
holds the covering in place. 
The cover on its lower edge (as at G) hasse 
cured to it, by sewing or otherwise, the metal 
lic fasteners H, the same being of spherical 
form, hollow throughout their length, and pro 
vided on one side or edge with an eye, I, by 
means of which it is secured to the cover. 
These are sewed at the edge of the seams, and 
through them the rod N, as hereinafter de 
Scribed, is passed. 
Just above the point where the fasteners H 
are Secured, and also sewed to the cover at or 
Very near the Seam, are the straps J, the same 
consisting of a band preferably of the same ma 
terial as the cover, (though not necessarily so,) 
provided with an aperture, K, at one end and 
a hook, L, at the other. The purpose of this 
strap J is to embrace the rib, the aperture K 
being fastened upon the hook L, thus firmly 
holding the cover to the frame. 
The rib We use with our umbrella, instead of 
terminating in the usual knob, M, is somewhat 
cut off and drilled or bored out for a small por 
tion of its length, as seen in Fig. 3, and a sepa. 
rate holding-rod, N, having a knob, M, at one 
end and provided with a screw-thread at the 
Other, is inserted through the fastener H and 
ScreWed up into the rib, so that when it is de 
sired to uncover the umbrella-frame these rods 
N are first removed by unscrewing them from 
the ribs, and the cover, with the fasteners H, 
can then be readily and easily slipped off, the 
cap D having also been removed. 
25 
35 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
Ct) 
w 
384,551. 
5 
IS 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Letters. Patent, is- 
Having thus fully describedour invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to secure by 
1. In an umbrella, the combination, with the 
stick having a handle at one end and a detach 
able cap at the othcr and surrounded by a se 
ries of ribs, of a covering having straps sewed 
thereto provided with hooks and eyes, said 
straps being constructed and adapted to encir 
cle and hold the covering to the ribs. . 
2. In an umbrella, the combination, with the 
Stick having a handle at one end and a detach 
able cap at the other and surrounded by a se. 
ries of ribs, of a covering having metallic fast 
eners secured to it near the outer ends of the 
seams, and being provided at a point above 
the fasteners with straps sewed thereto, said: 
straps having hooks and eyes and being con 
structed and adapted to encircle and hold the 
covering to the ribs. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
3. In an umbrella, the combination, with the 
stick having a handle at one end and a detach 
able cap at the other and surrounded by a se 
ries of ribs, of a covering consisting of pieces 
of material sewed together and terminating at 
one end in a ling, and having metallic fasten 
ers secured thereto near the outer ends of the 
seams, and being provided at a point above the 
fasteners with straps having hooks and eyes, 
said straps being constructed and adapted to 
encircle and hold the covering to the ribs, 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
25 
HARRY ALFM.A.N. . 
. 
. 
. 
EEORLD'Soi Air F. 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
C. W. GAZZAM, 
A. HUBIBARD. 
: 
; 
; 
; 
; 
y 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384651.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. SWEM. 
AUTOMATIC SWITCH FOR RAILROADS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 384,651, 
Patented June 19, 1888. 
WITNESSES 
 6262-66, 
3, 2.24- 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
Ivetoe. 
7(gfleet-- 
2 r ri 
By OW6/0. A 
7 
ATTORNEY 
(No Model.) 
... 
' 
J. M. SWEM. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
AUTOMATIC SWITCH FOR RAILROADS, 
No. 384,651, 
Patented June 19, 1888. 
In it. Hitti LF 
35 
5 
2. 
-sumiIII.I.I.I.IFIL 
3. 
4. 
   
  
 
WITNESSES: 
---and 
INVENTOR, 
2. 
ATTORNEY. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D., C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. SWIE M, OF DENVER, COLORADO, ASSIGNOR TO THE SWEM AUTO. 
MATIC SWITCH COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC SWITCH FOR RAILROADS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 384,651, dated June 19, 1888. 
Application filed November 4, 1887. Serial No. 254,257. (No model.) 
Io 
25 
To all, whon, it may concerit: 
Be it known that I, JAMES M. SWEM, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Denver, 
in the county of Arapahoe and State of Colo 
rado, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Automatic Switches for Rail 
roads; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters and figures of refer 
rence marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to automatic switches 
for street railroads or tramways; and its ob 
ject is to furnish such a switch simple and eco 
nomical in construction, embodying in its con 
struction few moving, wearing, and frictional 
parts, durable, and easy of and reliablein opera 
tion, to which ends it consists in the features 
and combinations more particularly herein 
after described and claimed. 
My improved switch is adapted for use with 
the simple turn-outs or passing-places of 
Single-track railroads, where at all such points 
all cars going in one direction are switched in 
a certain direction, aud also with main tracks 
from which proceed branch roads or tracks, 
3o and where it is desired that certain cars shall 
keep to the main stem and others proceed 
upon the branch. In both cases the operative 
mechanism and principle of operation are the 
same, the difference being that in the latter 
case a peculiar readjustment of the rails is 
used, in order that the person in charge of a 
car may cause the switch to be automatically 
operated to cause the car at will, or as de 
sired, either to keep upon the main stem or 
be deflected upon the branch. 
Means embodying my invention for accom 
plishing the results aimed at are fully shown 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a single-track 
railway, showing the arrangement of switches 
at a simple turn-out; Fig. 2, a plan view of 
part of a track near a switch leading to a 
branch road or track. Figs. 3, 4, and 7 are 
side views of parts of the switch-actuating 
5o mechanism; Fig. 5, a top or plan view of the 
switch-actuating mechanism used in Fig. 1; 
35 
45 
55 
65 
Fig. 6, a top or plai view of the switch-actu 
ating mechanism as used in Fig. 2; Figs. 8, 9, 
10, and 11, details of construction of some of 
the parts. 
In the drawings, the reference-numerals 12 
indicate the main rails of a railroad-track, 
which in Fig. 1 are divided or forked, form 
ing the two side tracks, 22 23, constituting a 
simple turn-out or passing-place for the cars 
of a single-track road. At each entrance to 
these side tracks is placed a single switch 
point, 15, whose position determines upon 
which of the two side tracks an approaching 
car shall be shunted. 
These switches are actuated by the mechan 
ism clearly shown in Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 7, in 
which 6 is a button, head, or lug upon the top 
or free end of one member of the bent lever. 
Shown in Fig. 4.) This lever in substance 7o 
is a three-sided lever, two sides being in par-, i. 
allel planes and at substantially right angles 
to the other side, the side parallel to the side. 
carrying the head 6 being somewhat shorter 
than the latter and projecting upwardly from 
a pivoted bar, 8, whose ends are supported in 
suitable bearings, the side at right angles to 
the two sides being also rigidly attached to 
the pivoted bar 8. This lever and bar are 
placed beneath the track at a suitable distance 
from a switch-point, 15, and so that the head. 
6 projects up through an aperture cut in the 
web of the rail, or in a special plate laid down 
thereat, alongside the head of the rail and in 
position to be acted on by the flange of a pass 
ing wheel, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Pivot 
ally connected to the shorter member, 9, of the 
three-sided lever 7 is a rod, 10, whose other 
end connects with a bell-crank lever, 11, piv 
oted at its angle upon a stud, 12, on a fixed 9C 
plate, 13. To avoid undue friction and give 
free play to the arms of this lever, it has a base, 
14, on its under side, lifting its arms above the 
plate 13; or a washer may be used on the stud. 
12 for the same purpose. The other end of 95 
this lever 11 is pivoted to the switch-point 15 
at 16, the switch-point being pivoted in turn 
at 18 to a suitable base-plate. With this con 
struction it will readily be seen (Fig. 5) that 
as the head 6 is depressed by a passing wheel loo 
the bar 8 is moved upon its pivots, which con. 
. 
stitute the fulcrum of the three-sided lever 7, 
 
2 
384,65i 
IO 
2O 
25 
45 
-- 
rails 2. 
and the rod 10 is pulled, turning 11 on its pivot hug and keep open one or the other of the 
and causing it to move the switch-point 15 
upon its pivot 18. If now such switches be 
The construction thus shown and described 
furnishes a reliably and readily operated all 
applied to a single - track road with turn 
outs, as in Fig. 1, and that at such turn-out, 
tomatic switch, which, it will be seen, is com 
each car, no matter from which way approach 
posed of very few parts-two levers and a con 
ing, turns to the right, the switch points 15 
necting-rod-so that it is economical in first 
are arranged upon the right hand as regards 
cost, simple in construction, and with few 
the direction of the approaching car, the heads 
bearings to wear and cause frictional resist 
or lugs 6 projecting upon the inner side of the 
aCe 
rail, so as to be depressed by the flange of a 
It might sometimes happen that the switch 
passing wheel. As a car approaches the turn 
point 15 would be restrained from movement 
out, its wheels depress the head 6, causing 
by the lodgment of dirt or stones, &c., be: 
the switch-point to be thrown inwardly, leav 
tween it and the sides of the bed, and that 
ing the track to the right open. If the next 
therefore a disastrous or breaking strain be 
put upon the connected parts. To avoid dan 
car is going in a direction opposite to that of 
the car, thus throwing the switch-point in 
ger of breakage under such conditions, the rod 
10 may be prolonged beyond its junction. With 
Wardly, its wheels strike against such switch 
point and move it outwardly, closing the right 
11, a spring, 19, being coiled on such exten 
hand track, which is again opened and made 
sion, a nut, 20, being placed on the extension, 
free for passage by the next car coming in the 
by which the tension of the spring is so regul 
proper direction. 
lated that normally it shall be sufficient to 
cause the movement of the switch-point under 
When it is desired to send a car either to 
the right or left upon the main stem or upon 
ordinary circumstances, but if unusual resist 
ance is met, the spring 19 will yield, prevent 
branches, the same mechanism and principle 
of operation are used in connection with some 
ting damage to the levers or rod. 
additional features, as shown in Figs. 2 and 6. 
I am aware that is not new to operate a 
In Fig. 2, 1 and 2, as before, are the main 
switch by a system of levers connected there 
rails of a railroad-track. Near the switching 
to and to springs or levers projecting betWeen 
point and at or near the point where the heads 
the rails to be acted on by an extra wheel upon 
6 are to project, these rails are bent slightly 
the locomotive or car, and having lateral mo 
outward-that is, deflected so that the gage at 
tion on its shaft, and also that it is not new 
such point, as at 25, is greater than the nor 
to combine with an ordinary manually-oper 
mal or standard gage of the road. Within 
ated switch a system of levers and a project 
such deflected portions are placed interior 
ing head, the latter to be thrown into position 
guard-rails, 33, space being left at their ends, 
to be struck by a passing wheel when the 
switch is manually operated, so that the switch 
between them and the main rails, for the pas 
sage of a wheel. At such points it is prefera 
may be restored to the safety position by the 
ble that the main rails and the guard-rails be 
passing train if the operator has forgotten or 
secured upon an iron or metallic bed-plate, 4, 
neglected to so restore it; hence I do not claim 
on whose inner edge is an auxiliary guard, 5, 
such organizations; but 
either a rail fastened thereto or a flange made 
What I do claim is 
thereon. Between the main and guard rails, 
1. The combination of a switch-point, the 
at or near the point 25 of greatest deflection, 
bell-crank lever, pivoted as described, the 
project the heads 6. Upon one side-say, the 
three-sided lever and pivoted bar, the con 
necting-rod and spring, and adjusting-nut 
lower, 21, in Fig. 2-this head is connected to 
the switch-point in the same manner as already 
upon the extension of the connecting-rod, Sub 
described, (see Fig. 5,) while, as the head 6, 
stantially as set forth. 
connected lever 7, and rod 10 on the the up 
2. The combination of the main rail of a 
per side are at a greater distance from the bell 
track deflected outwardly at or near the 
crank lever 10, pivoted to the switch-point, 
switching-point, an interior guard-rail at such 
the rod 10 from the upper head is connected 
point of enlarged gage, a head or lug of a le 
to the lever 11 and thence to the switch-point, 
ver projecting between the main and guard 
through an intermediate bell-crank lever, 26, 
rails at such point, and adapted to be acted 
and rod 17, as shown in Fig. 6. If now it is 
on by a passing wheel, and switching mech 
desired that an approaching car shall either 
anism, substantially such as described, con 
keep on the main stem or turn to the right, 
trolled thereby, substantially as set forth. 
the driver causes his car to hug the right-hand 
3. The combination of the main rail of a 
main rail, causing the wheels on the right-hand 
track, a guard-rail at or near a switching 
side to depress the head on that side, while 
point, a bed-plate common to both rails, a 
the wheels on the other side ride up or within 
three-sided lever having its outer end project 
the guard-rail on that side, avoiding the head 
ing as a head or lug through such bed-plate 
or button on such side. Thus it is seen that 
and between the main and guard rails, a 
the switch-point is turned to open one track 
switch-point, a bell-crank lever pivoted there 
or the other and close one or the other at will, 
to, and a rod connecting the two leyers, sub 
accordingly as the car-wheels are caused to 
stantially as set forth. 
95 
IOC) 
IOS 
EO 
I 1.5 
25 
 
384,65. 
3 
4. The combination of a main rail deflected the latter being connected by its central arm 
outwardly at or near a switching-point, an in- to the switch-point, and the single switch 
terior guard-rail thereat, a bed-plate common point, substantially as set forth. 
to both rails, a three-sided lever, as described, 
6. The combination of the main rail of a 
having its head projecting upwardly through track, an interior guard-rail, the right-angled 
such bed-plate and between the main and lever 7, having head 6 projecting upwardly 
guard rails, and adapted to be acted on by a between such rails, pivoted bar 8, to which 
passing wheel, a switch-tongue, a bell-crank lever 7 is attached, having upright arm 9, the 
lever pivoted thereto, and a rod connecting bell-crank lever 11, pivoted at its angle to a 
the two levers, substantially as set forth. 
fixed base, and at one end to the switch-point 
5. The combination of the main rail of a and at the other to the connecting-rod 10, the 
track deflected outwardly near a switching- connecting-rod pivoted to the arm 9 and le 
point, interior guard-rails thereat, and dupli-ver 11, and the switch-point, all arranged and 
cate switching mechanisms, one on either operating substantially as set forth. 
side, each consisting of a three-sided lever, as 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
described, having a head projecting upwardly presence of two witnesses. 
between the main and guard rails, and 
adapted to be acted on by a passing wheel, 
rods connected thereto at one end and at the 
2O other to one arm of a double bell-crank lever, 
R. M. McDERMOTT, 
B. L. POLLOCK. 
JAMES M. SWEM. 
v 
Witnesses: 
(5 
25 
35 
' 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384751.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY H. FORSYTH, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLWANIA. 
D E FOR  FORGNG. 
SPECTE'TCATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 384,751, dated June 19, 1888. 
Application filed March 1, 1888. Serial No. 265,810. (No model.) ? 
ifC) 
2O 
25 
Z0 ?zZZ |ݢ07??, Z 7??(?g/ co72ce#72* 
Be it kn0Wn that I, HENRY H. FoRSYTH, of 
the city Of PittSburg, in the county of Alle 
gheny and StateofPennsylvania, have inwented 
a neW and useful Improvement in Dies; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact deScription thereof. 
My in wention relates to an improvement in 
dieS for forging or SWaging pieces of iron or 
Steel Which are of circular croSS-Section and 
either of cylindrical, conical, or irregular lon 
gitudinal Section. HeretOfore it has been the 
practice in forming Such articles to use two 
| dieS of Similar contour, the edges of the Work 
ing-ca.witieS Of which come into contact in the 
operation of the dies. The article to be forged 
for example, a pistom-rod, an axle, or the like 
iS placed on the loWer die, and the upper die 
or hammer is caused to beat upon it, the irom 
meanWhile being turned on the bed-die... . . The 
difficulty in the use of these dies is that. When 
the conjoined CawitieS are circular in croSS-Sec 
tion they are apt to frm fins on the Surface 
of the article. This haS caused manufacturers 
generally to employ dies With elliptical Work 
ing-caWitieS, SO made in order to avoid the for 
mation of finS; but the use of the elliptical dies 
' is diSadwantageOuS in that it is hard to pro 
duce by them articleS of uniform circular croSS 
Section, and in any case the contact of the dies 
|batterS the 'edgeS of the cawities and soon im 
pairS their efficiency where great accuracy of 
Outline and Smooth meSS of Surface are required. 
The Object of my imwention is , to cure this 
defect and to prOwide dies by Whose use a per 
fectly round and uniform article can be pro 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a wertical crOSS-Section of my improwed dies 
ShOWn in conjunction. F'ig. 2 is a plan wiew 
of the loWer die. Fig. 8 is a plan wiew of the 
loWer die modified in order to adapt it to the 
manufacture of tapered articles. Fig. 4 is a 
wertical Sectional wiew Similar to Fig. 1, illus 
trating a modified form of the dies. 
Like Symbols of reference indicate like parts 
in each. ... 
Referring, noW, to the draWings, 2 repreSentS 
the upper die,and 8 the lower die.. ... The work* 
ing-face 4 of the lower die is made With a cur'wed 
contOur on the arc of a circle, the curwe being 
duced. 
~ 
preferably nearly Semicircular in croSS- Sec-    
tion, and from the top of the Semicircle the 
bottom die extends upwardly and OutWardly 
in fiaring lines 5. Phe working-face of the 55 
upper die, 2, is alSO made With a cur wed com 
tour whose croSS Section is that of the arc of 
a circle Somewhat, leSStham a Semicircle. The 
edges of the cawities of the dies are Separated 
by receSSeS 1l, which communicate with the 6o 
Cawities, and while not, Substantially impair- .. " " 
ing the general circular Shape in crOSS-Section .. '' 
of the conjoinaed cawities, yet part the edgeS 
and prevent; the formation of finS on the arti- : 
cle. From the " extremities of the cawity 6 of 65 ?? 
the lower die the body of , the die extends up ? 
Wardly and outWardly On diverging inaeS 7.. 
'These cawities need not be continuously arcs 
0f a circle, for they may be made ridged 0r p0 
|lygonal; but it will be found that the mearer 7o 
the approximation t0 the circle the better Will  
In order that the faceS of the dies shall not 
be their Operation. 
      
" ~ *** 
  
* 
; 
? ? ':', 
meet in their Work of hammering, T prowide .. 
them with ShoulderS 8 9 at their outer Sides, 75 ?? 
which shoulder8 meet when the mowing die is " " 
in action, and by receiwing the impact of the " .. " 
blows, prewent the working-faces of the dies ? 
from coming into contact and from being in 
jured. In order to Sa.we these Shoulders from 8? 
injury as much as poSSible, I prefer to face the 
Shoulders 9. With plates 10 of copper, or Some 
other Soft metal, which age Set in receSSes 
on top of the shoulders, and by OppoSing a, 
Soft body to the action of the imowing upper 
die Ser we as buffers. Instead of hawing these 
shoulderS8 and 9 in conuection with the bodies 
of the dies, I may. Substitute therefor Suitable 
stops on the plunger or on the Slide or pistom 
rod, which Will act in Substantially the Same 
Way to produce the Same result. 
The operation of the dieS iS aS followS: In 
order to forge a bar of iron into the proper '.' 
cylindrical shape, SuppoSing the die-caWities " " . 
to be constant in croSS-Section, the bar is laid ? 95 ... . . ."; 
on the inclined faces 5 of the loWer die, 8, and 
the upper die, being actuated by a Suitable ? 
Steam hammer or plunger Worked by a cam or 
crank, is caused to reciprocate and to impart " 
its blows to. the bar. The bar is turned by a ro? 
workman or by Suitable machinery contim 
ually during this operation, and the effect of 
85 
~ 
35 
45 
 
2 
384,751.. '' 
the upper die, acting in comjunction. With the 
inclined faceS 5, is gradually to diminish the 
diameter of the bar' and to bring it more nearly 
to a circular form, and finally to force it into 
the cawity of the lower die, which, in conjunc 
tion with the correspondingly-Cur wed ca.wity 
of the upper die, gives the bar itS finished cir 
cular form. I am enabled thus to SucceSSfully 
employ dies the general contOur of the croSS 
Section of Wh0Se conjoined Working-ca.witieS 
When the dies are most mearly in contact iS 
substantially circular, to conform to the Sec 
tion of the finished article, the conjoined ca.wi 
ties having parted or receSSed SideS, and thuS 
I get all the adwantages of the circular dieS 
without the disadwantages which have heret0 
fore atteraded their use. This I am enabled 
to do by reason of the use of the inclined Side 
faces, 5, and by reason of the fact that the 
Working-faces of the dies do not come in com 
tact at the edgeS. If they should come in com 
tact the effect W'Ould be to flatten Out the metal 
bal', to produce finS On it, and tO Spoil the dieS 
without attaining the desired result. I be 
liewe that I am the first to disSociate the edgeS 
of the Operati we faceS of the dies from the Stop 
which limits their approach. This is a, very 
important feature of my in wention, Since it 
enableS me to make the articles of true circular 
form in CrOSS-Section, and also to prevent the 
dieS from becoming battered or misshapen. 
In case the article to be produced is not of cy 
lindrical but is of tapering forma-Such aS a 
WagOn-axle~~-the Operation iS the Same, except 
that the dies, instead of hawing Working-faces 
with cawitieS of constant width, have cawities 
conforming to the shape of the article, as shown 
in F'ig. 8. For producing articles of other 
form$ in longitudinal Section the dies are cor 
reSpondingly modified, as Will be readily un 
My imwention is SuSceptible of many modi 
cations, mot only in change of Shape of the dies 
tO correspond to the change in Shape of the ar 
ticle produced, but alSO in other changes of 
form of the partS. R'Or instance, the recesses 
11 at the Sides of the Working-ca.wities of the 
dies are Solely for the purpose of prewenting 
contact of the working - faces and may be 
greatly modified in form, and instead of hav 
ing the dieS arranged aS Shown in the draW 
ingS they may be rewerSed, the present, lower 
die being uSed aS the upper die, and wice werSa. 
I illustrate a modification in form of the re 
ceSSes in IR'ig. 4, in which the inclined faces 5 
and 7 of the dieS are not usedand the receSSeS 
11are enlarged. Other modificationS Will Sug 
gest themsel weS to thOSe Skilled in the art. 
derstood. 
? 
My invention is of great practical utility 
and will be appreciated by th0SeSkilled in the 
art. It may be used not only. for the purpOSe 
of forging hot metalS into the proper ShapeS, 
but for finishing articles by cold-hammering. 
This last named feature makes it especially de 
sirable in the manufacture of taperedirOn axleS 
and other articleS of irregular longitudinal Sec 
tion. Hammering by meanSof theSe dieS pre 
Ser wes the desirable hard meSS of the article. 
I do not claim herein, broadly, dieS hawing 
their working-faceS prowided With Semicircular 
ca.wities, nor do I limit the SCOpe of my claimS 
' to dies hawing Working-cavities made on the 
arcs of a circle, unleSS expreSSly SO Stated there 
im, since, if the stopSbe used, the Working-cawi 
! ties of the dies may be other Wise Shaped, my 
invention in this regard relating to the com 
Struction of the dies by which the edgeS of the 
cawities are preverated from coming intO COn 
tact, and_by Which I am enabled, if desired, to 
uSe_dies the general contOur of wh0Se con 
joined working-cawitieS iS Substantially circu 
la]' in CrOSS Sectiota. 
~ 
I Claim--- 
1. An imprOwetment in dieS for forging or 
SWaging, which consists in the combination of 
dies whose oppoSing faceS are prOwided with 
Suitable working-ca.wities made Substantially 
in arcS of a circle, the general contour of the 
conjoined die-cavities when the dieS are mOSt 
nearly together being Substantially circular, 
the edgeS of the cawities of the dies being Sep 
arated by lateral receSS6S, Substantially aS and 
for the purpoSeS described. 
2. Am improvement in dieS for forging or " 
SWaging Straight metal articleS, Which consistS 
in the combination of dieS WhOSe OppoSimg 
faces are Suitably formed and StopS Whereby 
the motion of the mowable die is limited and 
the edges of the Working-faces are prevented 
from coming into contact, Substantially aS and 
for the purpOSeS described. 
" 8. An imprOwement in dieS for forging or 
SWaging Straight; metal articleS circular in 
croSS-Section and either of COnStant; or wary 
ing longitudinal Section; Which consistS in the 
combination of dieS Wh0Se oppoSing faceS are 
prow ided with Cawities, the cawity of one of 
the dies hawing flaring extensions, Substan 
tially aS and for the purpoSeS described. 
In testi mony whereof I have hereunto Set my 
h:?md this 25th day of February, A. D. 1888. 
HENY PI.' ]H'ORSY'TH. 
WitneSSeS: 
'THOMAS W. BAIKEWELL, 
f. K. SMTTH. 
1 O 
25 
45 
55 
75 
85 
HOO 
I O5 
I [ C) 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384853.txt	'(No Model.) 
No. 384,853 
s 
G. H. KELLER. 
SPRING FISH TRAP 
Patented June 19, 1888. 
Zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz 
2 
&ZZZZZZZZ?????? 
WITNESSES 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
: 
GEORG HEINRICH KELLER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SPRING FISH-TRAP. . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 384,853, dated June 19, 1888. 
. 
. . 
. 
Application fied December 2, 1887. Serial No.256,747, (No model. 
as 
To all whom it may concern: 
LER, of the city, ceunty, and State of Nw 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
5 Improvementsin Fish-Traps or Spring-Hooks, 
of which the following is a specification. 
... This invention has reference to that class of 
fish-traps or spring-hooks in which the hook 
and line, when pulled by the fish taking the 
io bait, operate a trigger and release the spring 
is by, which the hook is suddenly jerked into the 
mouth of the fish biting, so as to prevent the 
release of the same from the hook when haul. 
ing in the same; and the invention consists of 
a fish-trap composed of an exterior casing pro-, 
vided at the upper end with an eye for the line 
and at the lower end with a sliding and spring 
actuated trigger that is provided with an eye 
for the lower section' of the line to which the 
2') sinker and hook is applied. . The trigger en 
Igages a recess in the circumference of a spring 
barrel to which the upper and lower sections 
of the line are applied, the lower section of 
the line being further provided with a knot by 
25, which the trigger is thrown out of engagement 
with the spring-barrel whenever a pull is ex 
erted on the lower part of the line by the fish 
taking a bite, 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
3o represents a side elevation of my improved 
fish-trap or spring-hook. Figs. 2 and 3 are 
- respectively a vertical longitudinal and a ver 
tical transverse section of the same, drawn on 
a larger scale; and Fig. 4 is a vertical longi. 
35 tudinal section of a modified form of trap 
showing the interior spring-barrel in side ele 
vation. . . 
. . . . . . . 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre. 
sponding parts. . . 
- - - 
In the drawings, A represents a casing, which 
is provided at diametrically-opposite points 
with elongated portions or necks a a, the up 
per neck being provided with a stationary 
E. guide or eye, b, for the upper section of 
is the line, while in the lower elongated portion 
is arranged a trigger, B, that is provided with 
a line guide or eye, d, for the lower section of 
the line, The trigger B is provided with a 
fixed pia.or stud, a, which passes through the 
3ccasing A,andisguided in a slot, e, of the same. 
The trigger B is acted upon by a spring, e, 
.. which is arranged at the outside of the case 
Beit known that I, GEORGHEINRICHKEL-jing, as shown in Fig. 1. The springe' may 
also be arranged at the inside, of the casing, as 
shown in Fig. 4, it being inferposed between 55 
a shoulder of the trigger and a shoulder at the 
end of the lower neck a of the casing. In this 
case the trigger is connected by a pivot-link, 
e, with the casing A, as shown in Fig. 4. When 
thus arranged, the spring is protected against 6o 
contact with exterior objects. On a fixed 
spindle of the casing. A is arranged a spring 
barrel, C, which is provided with circumfer 
ential flanges, one of the flanges having a 
notch, f, that is engaged by the trigger B. To 65. 
the spring-barrel C is applied the upper sec 
tion, D, and the Iower section, D., of the line, 
the upper section extending through the eye 
b to the fishing rod and reel, while the lower 
section is provided with a sinker and hook, in to 
the usual manner. The lowerline-section, D, 
is provided with a knotor stop, g, which en : 
gages the eye d of the trigger B whenever the 
fish takes the bait. The strain of the knot or 
stop f on the eyed of the trigger B produces 75 
a downwardly-sliding motion of the latter, so 
that it clears the notched flange of the spring 
barrel C, which is thereby instantly turned on . 
its axis by the action of its spring, so as to..." 
wind up both the lower and upper line-sec- 8o i. 
tions, DD, and produce by the sudden jerk 
imparted thereby to the hook the piercing of 
the mouth of the fish, so that the same cannot 
escape from the hook when hauling in the line.' 
For the purpose of permitting the Spring 85 
barrel to make several rotations, the same is J. 
provided with a fillingspiece, h, that is pivoted. 
to the side of the barrel Cand adapted to be: 
moved on the turning of the same by gravity 
into the recessor notch f of the trigger, as 9o 
shown in dottedlines in Fig. 4, until thesinkers, 
arrives at the lower necka and stops the mo. 
tion of the spring-barrel. In unwinding the 
line sections for the purpose of setting the trap, 
the filling-pieceh drops against a stop, h, at 95 
the side of the spring-barrel C and permits: 
: the pawl to re-engage the recess.fof the spring: 
barrel, so as to set the trap for the next fish. ... 
When the fish is hooked by the release of the 
spring-barrel and the quick winding up of the roo 
line, the latter can be pulled in at leisure with- . 
out giving the fish a chance to escape, as the . . 
4o. 
. . . 
- 
-- - - 
. . 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
 
al 
hook has sufficiently taken hold of the mouth barrel, the lower line section being provided 2O 
of the fish to prevent it from playing loose with a knot for engaging the trigger and re 
therefrom. 
leasing the spring-barrel, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination of an exterior casing, a 
spring-actuated trigger, a spring-barrel hav- 25 
ing a notched flange, a filling-piece...and stop. 
at the side of the spring-barrel, an upper line 
section attached to the spring-barrel, and lower 
line - section also attached to the barrel and 
provided with a knot for engaging the trigger, 3o 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
invention I have signed my name in presence 
of two subscribing witnesses. 
The advantages of my improved fish - trap 
5 are that all the parts are compactly inclosed 
and protected by the casing, and not liable to 
be released except by the strain exerted on 
the trigger when the fish takes the bait, and 
that the device also acts as a sinker, owing to 
Having thus describedny invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination of an exterior casing 
having a line guide or eye at the upper end, a 
15 spring-actuated trigger at the lower end, said 
trigger being provided with a line guide or 
eye, a spring-barrel at the interior of the cas 
ing provided with a notched flange, and upper 
and lower line sections attached to the spring 
to the weight of the casing and spring-barrel. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. STRALEY, 
PAUL GoEPEL, 
384,853 
GEORG HENRICH KELLER. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US384954.txt	(No Model.) 
. . 
. 
H. A., BENEDICT, 
No. 384,954, 
2 
INSIDE BLIND, 
Patented June 26, 1888. 
 
it it 
 
  
z 
EEE 
& 22 
E.E. 
S22 Sat 
 
62 
Zo 
Z2/ C. 
Af 
Zo 
(snS 2S S. 
EIG. 
 
 
 
C2 
2 
FIG.4. 
 
S. 
SNS S, SS 
2 % 2 % 2 
S N R N S 
 
13. 
HABENED ICT. 
Y/T217.6- 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEMAN A. BENEDICT, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
- 
TO GEORGE I. BEACH, OF SAME PLACE. 
INSIDE BLIN D. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent N o. 384,954, dated June 26, 1888. 
Application filed September 10, 1887. Serial No. 249,355. (No model.) 
- 
2o all, whon, it naily concert: 
Beit known that I, HEMAN A. BENEDICT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, State of 
5 New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvementsin Inside Blinds, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
?o in inside blinds, and among the objects in view 
are to provide a light, durable inside blind at 
a reduced cost, and adapt the same for con 
nection with different window-casings. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
I5 tion will hereinafter appear, and the novel 
features thereof will be particularly pointed 
out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is an in 
side view of a portion of a window-casing pro 
2O vided with my improved blind. Fig. 2 is a 
transverse section on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a similar view showing the construc 
tion of the blind. Fig. 4 is a transverse sec 
tion showing the manner of connecting the 
25 blinds directly to the window-casing. Fig. 5 
is a detail in perspective, showing the pre 
ferred form of hinge. 
Like letters indicate like parts in all the 
3O A represents a window-casing, and B the 
blind. 
In carrying out my invention I have taken 
tWO or more layers of paper-pulp or similar 
material, B, in sheet form, and secure the same 
35 together by means of glue or cement, subse 
quently passing the layers thus connected be 
tween hot rolls. The sheets as thus prepared 
are cut to the desired size for blinds, doors, 
and, it may be, for wainscoting. A rod, C, 
4o is laid along the edge of the sheet thus formed 
and entirely around the same, and held in 
place by flexible bindings C, of canvas or 
other material, cemented or glued to the face 
of the sheet. Mounted upon the rod thus se 
45 cured is a strip of binding, D, of wood, hav 
ing a groove, D', upon one of its faces adapted 
to receive the rod C. 
The strip may be provided with a groove, 
the nature of which will permit of the inser 
5o tion of the rod C bodily therein; or, as shown 
figures. 
- 
 
65 
6o 
In Fig.1. I have shown my blind as connect- 75 
in Fig. 3, the strip may be provided with a 
partially-closed groove, so that it is required 
to be inserted from the end of the rod C. This 
strip is held in place by means of cement or 
glue. The strip, being somewhat larger or 55 
thicker than the sheet B, may now be planed . 
down flush with the surface of said sheet. The 
sheet thus constructed is next provided with 
a layer, F, of veneer, so that the blind as a 
whole will appear as made of wood. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 I have illustrated one layer 
of the pulp board as cut out in imitation of a 
panel. If desired, the sheet as constructed 
may be covered with paper in imitation of 
wood, or painted. 
For the purpose of providing means whereby 
the sheet B is adapted to receive screws a, for 
the purpose of securing the hinge-connection 
Ethereto, a portion, B, (see dotted lines, Fig. 
1,) of wood is inserted into a recess formed in to 
the blind. By reason of the provision of this 
wooden portion or block the necessity of using 
rivets, the application of which is more trouble 
some and costly, is obviated. 
ed to a window-casing by a rod, G, secured to 
the casing. The hinge preferred in this in 
stance I have illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, and 5, 
and it consists of the two leaves or members 
EE, pivotally connected, as usual. The mem. 8o 
ber E is provided with a longitudinally-bored. 
sleeve or lug, E, adapted to receive the rod 
G, and is perforated for the reception of a set 
screw, whereby said hinge is rendered adjusta 
ble upon the rod. The opposite member of 85 
the hinge is bent to form a knee, E, and is 
. 
perforated for the reception of the screws a, 
by which means it is secured to the blind. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown a modified form of 
hinge, or one adapted to connect the blind di- go 
rectly to the inside of the window-casing. In 
this instance, the rod being omitted, the mem 
ber E' of the hingeis simply perforated for the 
securing devices, whereby the same is con 
nected to the casing direct. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. A sheet for the purposes specified, con 
sisting of a series of pulp boards or layers 
glued or cemented together, and provided with Iro. 
95 
2 
384,954. 
said rod, in conbination with a hinge formed 
with a sleeve and a set-screw, and a window 
casing having a rod adapted to be received by 
said sleeve, substantially as specified. 
6. The combination of the layers B, ce 
mented together, cut out, and provided with 
the block B, with the hinge E, comprising the 
members E. E", the member E being perfo 
rated and connected to the block and formed 
with a knee, E, and the member E being pro 
vided with the sleeve E, having the set-screw 
E, the casing A, and the rod G, substantially 
as specified. 
7. The combination of the layers B", ce 
mented together, the veneer F, the binding 
rod C, its strip C, the binding-strip D, the 
hinge E, casing A, and rod G, substantially 
as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
35 
HEMAN A. BENEDICT. 
Witnesses: 
CLARENCE W. KELLOGG, 
EDWIN M. WELLS. 
a metal binding-rod secured thereto, and a 
wooden strip or binding mounted on the rod, 
Substantially as specified. 
2. An inside blind composed of pulp board, 
5 a metal binding - rod secured to the edge 
thereof by a flexible strip, and a wooden bind 
ing-strip grooved and adapted to receive said 
rod, substantially as specified. 
3. An inside blind composed of layers of 
O pulp board cemented together, a metal bind 
ing-rod secured thereto by a flexible strip, a 
wooden binding-strip grooved to receive said 
rod, and a layer of veneer, paper, or other imi 
tation, secured to surface of the blind, sub 
4. An inside blind formed of layers of pulp 
board glued together, cut out, and provided 
with a wooden block, in combination with a 
hinge Secured to said block and to the inside 
c) casing of the window, substantially as speci 
fied. 
5. An inside blind formed of layers of pulp 
board cemented together, a binding - rod of 
metal secured in place by a flexible strip, and a 
5 wooden binding-strip grooved and embracing 
5 stantially as specified. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385054.txt	(No Model.) 
R. M. HUNTER, 
ELECTRICRAILWAY, 
No. 385,054, 
Patented June 26, 1888. 
- um m - - - - - -- 
- - - - - - -- - - - - 
-- - - - 
- - - - 
r 
u 
.-- 
AP 
  
 
 
 
-- - - - - -- ---- m norm - - -- -- -- - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - 
4. 
SSSD3SS3 
2. 
Z ---- 
F. G. 4-. 
N. 
N. perERS, Photo-Lithographar, Washington, O.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUDOLPH M. HUNTER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ELECTRC RALWAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 385,054, dated June 26, 1888. 
Application filed January 20, 1888. Serial No. 261,02. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
O 
To all whom it may concer'72: 
Be it known that I, RUDOLPH. M. HUNTER, 
of the city and county of Philadelphia, and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented an Im 
provement in Electric Railways, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention has reference to electric rail 
ways; and it consists of certain improvements 
which are fully set forth in the following 
specification, and shown in the accompanying 
drawings, which form part thereof. 
My invention has particular reference to 
electrically-propelled cars or other vehicles in 
which the source of energy is carried upon the 
car in the form of batteries of any suitable 
description. Those which I prefer to use are 
known as secondary batteries or accumulators; 
but this invention, broadly considered, is not 
so limited. In practice I couple the motors 
and batteries in either of two systems, one of 
which contemplates the coupling of the bat 
teries in different orders or connection, so as 
to modify their relative connection, as more 
fully hereinafter set out, and the other of which 
contemplates the use of the batteries in series 
and to simply modify the connections with 
the coils on the motors, leaving the connec 
tion of the batteries, per se, always the same. 
There may be a combination of these two 
methods of regulation, if desired; but it is not 
found necessary in practice. The former of 
these methods is carried out in the construction 
forming the subject-matter of this applica 
tion. This arrangement of batteries and 
method of regulation of the current by a sin 
gle operative handle is set out in my appli. 
cation, Serial No. 208,418, and filed July 19, 
1886, and this application may be considered 
as a division of that application so far as this 
method broadly is concerned. 
In carrying out my invention there are sev. 
eral ways in which the batteries may be 
coupled, viz: The cells may all be connected 
in Series, and one cell at a time cut out or into 
circuit, or the cells may all be coupled from 
series connection to multiple connection, or a 
combination of these two. It is also evident 
that many other combinations are possible; but 
these will suffice to make my invention clear. 
The battery-cells are preferably placed under 
the seats in compartments and supported by 
the car-body on springs. The regulator is ar 
ranged within operative position of the oper 
ator on the front platform or other equivalent 
operative position. The motor is preferably 
supported by the axle and independent of the 
car-body, though this not absolutely necessary. 
However, in practice I have found it prefer 
able. Circuits connect with the battery-cells 
and lead the current to the regulator, and 
thence to the motor; and it is desirable to make 
such circuits practically fixed upon the car 
and preferably under the floor-level, yet high 
up from the ground or road-bed. The batter 
ies or cells are arranged above the floor-level 
and may connect with these circuits automati 
cally while being placed within the compart 
ment. 
I do not limit myself to mere details of con 
struction, as it is evident that they may be 
modified in various ways without in the least 
departing from the spirit of the invention. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view 
showing one method of coupling up batteries 
on a car, embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a longitudinal section of a street-car online 8 a. 
of Fig. 4, showing the arrangement of motor, 
batteries, regulator, and circuits on the car. 
Fig. 3 is a general view showing construction 
of one form of regulator and connections with 
batteries and motor. Fig. 4 is a cross-section 
of an electric car on line y y of Fig. 2, and 
Fig. 5 is a cross-section of my regulator shown 
in Fig. 3 on line & 2. 
A represents the batteries or cells, which 
may be of any construction, size, or shape; 
but the type of battery preferred is what is 
known as the secondary battery or electrical 
accumulator. These batteries are preferably 
arranged in line, in any numbers found desir 
able for the purpose, and may be placed in 
the compartments C under the seats S of the 
car B, and which compartments may be pro 
vided with doors c, as shown in Fig. 4. The 
car-body is provided with the usual front or 
operator's platform, b, and is also supported 
upon the truck M by springs N in any of the 
well-known manners. 
D is the electric motor, and is preferably 
supported by the axles and independently of 
O 
9o 
95 
ICC 
45 
385,054 
the car-body. 
with its load of batteries may rise and fall and 
without jarring the batteries while the car 
runs over irregular places in the road-bed, and, 
furthermore, the same bearing which supports 
car-body is made to support the batteries 
aSO. 
E is the motor-circuit, and connects the 
motor D with the regulator F upon the front 
platform by circuits E, and a circuit-reverser, 
P, may be used to reverse the current in the 
armature to reverse the motor. 
G. are the battery-circuits which connect the 
different cells with the regulator F. This reg 
ulator may be constructed in various ways, 
the form shown in Fig. 3 being perhaps the 
most desirable. In this case the terminals 
from the various batteries end in contact 
brushes (1, which work in contact with a cylin 
der, F, having its surface covered by conduct 
ing sections K and L, or combinations of these. 
The sections IK couple the batteries in multi 
ple for a current of large volume and small 
electro-motive force, while sections L couple 
the batteries in series for smaller volume of 
current but high electro-motive force. There 
are six sets of sections shown, viz: First, 
coupling batteries in multiple for large vol 
ume and small electro-motive force; second, 
in coupling batteries part in multiple and 
part in series for smaller current and higher 
electro-motive force; third, same as second, 
only for still smaller current and higher elec 
tro-motive force; fourth, coupling batteries all 
in series for still smaller current but higher 
electro-motive force; fifth, coupling batteries 
in series with three cells cut out, reducing 
power of battery; and, sixth, same as fifth, 
with five cells cut out. Continuous strips I 
and J are arranged on the respective ends for 
contact with the extreme positive and nega 
tive brushes (f, and also for contact with the 
motor-circuit E by brushese. This regulator 
is securely located within an insulated cham 
ber or box, F, to be out of danger and to pro 
tect persons from contact with it, and an in 
sulated handle, H, and pointer h are used to 
rotate it and indicate upon a scale, f, what 
connection is made. At one position this reg 
ulator cuts the motor entirely out of circuit 
and at the same time cuts the batteries out of 
circuit also. 
The circuits G and E are preferably ar 
ranged close up to the bottom of the car to be 
out of the way, (see Figs. 2 and 4,) and the 
batteries should be made with contacts T to 
automatically couple with the circuits G by 
the mere act of inserting them on the car. 
The motor is preferably on the rear axle, 
and hence the circuits G E are looped, or a 
forward and return circuit, and the circuit E 
must have flexibility or equivalent connection 
to allow the car-body to rise and fall without 
breaking its continuity. 
Any matters hereinset out but not claimed are 
not dedicated to the public, but form subject 
By this means the car-body matter of other applications. For instance, the 
car with compartments under the seats com 
bined with removable batteries and arranged 
over the wheels and supported on springs form 
subject-matter of my division applications Se 
rial Nos. 271,923 and 272,123, of 1888; neither 
do I claim, broadly, the coupling up of the bat 
teries automatically by the act of inserting 
them in position on the car, as that forms sub 
ject-matter of my applications above referred 
to also; neither do Iclaim the arrangement of the 
motor and battery circuits close up to the under 
part of the car-body, as that forms subject-mat 
ter of my application Serial No. 273,207,of 1888; 
and likewise the car having longitudinal seats 
with compartments, under them, and batteries 
in said compartments is not claimed here, as it 
forms subject-matter of my application Serial 
No. 272,123, of 1888. 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of a car, an electric mo 
tor carried thereby to propel it, a number of 
removable battery-cells having exposed termi 
nals on the car and adapted to be coupled in 
series connection, a motor-circuit including 
the motor and batteries and fixed to the car 
having exposed terminals adapted to contact 
with the battery-terminals when the cells are 
placed in position, and thus automatically 
couple up the battery with the motor-circuit, 
and a regulator to vary the number of bat 
tery-cells in series connection with the motor. 
2. The combination of a car or vehicle, an 
electric motor carried thereby to propel it, a 
mechanical power-transmitting connection be 
tween the motor and axle, a number of re 
movable battery-cells having exposed termi 
nals on the car, a flexible motor-circuit in 
cluding the motor and battery-cells looped so 
as to extend to the forward part of the car, 
and having exposed terminals adapted to con 
tact with the battery-terminals when the cells 
are placed in position, and thus automatically 
couple up the battery with the motor circuit, 
and a regulator arranged at the front of the 
car in the motor-circuit and in reach of the op 
erator to vary the current flowing from the 
battery-cells through the motor. 
3. The combination of a car, an electric mo 
tor to propel it, a series of removable battery 
cells having exposed terminals on the car, cir 
cuits including the motor and battery fixed to 
the car having exposed terminals adapted to 
contact with the battery-terminals. When the 
cells are placed in position, and thus automati 
cally couple up the battery with the motor, 
and a regulating device having a single oper 
ating-handle within reach of the operator to 
modify the electrical connection between the 
battery-cells and motor by coupling them up 
in series or multiple connection or combina 
tions of these. 
4. The combination of a car or vehicle, an 
electric motor carried thereby to propel it, a 
25 
30 
35 
O 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
85 
90 
95 . 
IOO 
fo5 
IO 
II5 
I25 
13O 
 
385,054 
motor-circuit to vary the current flowing from 
the battery-cells through the motor. 
In testimony of which invention I hereunto 
set my hand. 
Witnesses: 
. 
RUDOLPH. M. HUNTER. 
E. M. BRECKINREED, 
HENRY ORURY. 
O 
number of removable battery-cells having ex 
posed terminals on the car, a motor-circuitin 
cluding the battery-cells and motor fixed to 
the car or vehicle, and having exposed termi 
mals adapted to contact with the battery-ter 
minals when the cells are placed in position, 
and thus automatically couple up the battery 
with the motor-circuit, and a regulator in the 
 
ISI. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385154.txt	(No Model.) 
W, WAUGH AN, 
GLOWE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 385,154, 
Patented June 26, 1888. 
WITILESSES: 
23. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
4%%r 
" is is 
INVENTOR, 
ATTORnEy, 
(No Model.) 
W, WAUGH AN, 
GLOWE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 385,154, 
Patented June 26, 1888. 
 
 
WIT 
BY 
INVENTOR, 
ATTORNEY. 
N. PETERs, photo-Litnographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM WAUGHAN, OF TORRINGTON, COUNTY OF DEVON, ENGLAND. 
GLOVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 385,154, dated June 26, 1888. 
Application filed February 16, 1888. Serial No. 264,180. 
(No model.) 
55 
shown at a a in Fig. 2. The thread or silk 
crossing the spaces intervening the opposing 45 
edges of the finger portions and of the thumb 
is then cut apart, the usual fourchettes, cut from 
the fabric of proper length and width, are 
sewed to the edges of the finger portions and 
the body of the glove, thus forming the fingers 
b, and the edges of the thumb b' having been 
sewed together, said thumb is sewed into its 
proper place, and the glove B is then com 
pleted in the usual manner, presenting the ap 
pearance shown in Fig. 3. As will appearby 
reference to said figure, both the upper and 
lower surfaces of the tips of the fingers are 
re enforced and strengthened by the stitching, 
while the thumb is protected all around its tip. 
In each instance the stitching, being produced 6o 
upon both sides of the fabric before the glove 
is made up, serves to protect the inner faces of 
the tips from being cut by the finger and thumb 
nails when the glove is in use. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
1. A fabric glove having rows of stitching 
transversely of the upper and lower surfaces 
of the tips of its fingers, between the seams 
which unite said fingers and their fourchettes, 
and also having rows of stitching completely 
encircling the tip of its thumb, substantially 
as shown and described. 
2. A fabric glove of single thickness having 
in the front and baek of its finger-tips and 
around the tip of its thumb transverse rows 
of stitching of coarser thread than that form 
ing the fabric of the glove, substantially as 
shown and described. 
65 
75 
WILLIAM WAUGHAN. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM PINKHAM, 
JOHN PASSMORE TAYLOR. 
. 
. 
) 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM WAUGHAN, a 
Subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at Torrington, in the county of Devon, 
England, glove-manufacturer, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Gloves, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to gloves which are 
made of fabric, particularly those formed of a 
Woven material. It has been found that such 
gloves, and especially silk gloves, quickly wear 
out at the tips of the fingers, and in order to 
strengthen them it has been the practice of 
Some manufacturers to double the fabric at these 
points or to sew on pieces of kid. These ex 
pedients have not been very successful and 
have given an unsightly appearance to the 
glove. 
According to the present invention I 
strengthen and protect the tips of the fingers 
and thumbs by rows of stitching, either in 
straight or curved lines, which may or may 
not cross one another. The stitch which I pre 
fer to employ is a chain-stitch, as this, by leav 
ing small ridges inside, tends to raise the fab 
ric away from the nails, and thus prevents their 
cutting the same. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 shows a portion of a piece of fabric 
cut to form the body and the major part of 
the fingers of the glove. Fig.2 shows a piece 
of fabric cut to form the thumb of the glove, 
and Fig. 3 shows the completed glove. 
After the fabric has been cut to form the 
blanks from which the body, fingers, and 
thumb of the glove are to be made up, the 
outer ends of the finger portions a? of the blank 
A are brought in line with each other and 
stitched across, preferably in chain-stitch with 
thread or silk, as shown at a a in Fig. 1, and 
the outer ends of the thumb-blank are Stitched 
across with like material in like manner, as 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385254.txt	(No Model.) 
J. D 0YLE, 
BATTERY ZINC, 
Patented June 26, l888. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN DOYLE, OF HOBOKEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF, AND C. 
COLES DUSENBURY, OF LAKE MAHOPAC, NEW YORK. 
BATERY-Z IN C. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Luetters Patent No. 385,254, dated June 26, 1888 
Application filed March 19, 1888. Serial No. 267,661. (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concer7u: 
Be it known that I, JOHN DOYLE, of Hobo 
ken, in the county of Hudson and State of New 
Jersey, have invented an Improvement in Elec 
tric Batteries, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
In electric or galvanic batteries the zinc or 
positive element has usually been amalgam 
ated with mercury upon its surface, to render i 
the operation more uniform and the electrode 
more efficient; but the action of the acid is 
such that the mercury frequently has to be re 
plenished, which i consumes considerable time 
and renders the battery unequal in its action, 
the same being much stronger at one time than 
another. 
The object of my present invention is to ef 
fect a progressive and continuous amalgama 
tion of the surface of the zinc or other metal, 
So as to render the action of the electrode 
nearly uniform until the same is consumed or 
becomes too small for efficient service. 
In carrying out my said invention I make 
use of plates, bars, or strips of zinc or other 
metal and a malgamate the surface of the same 
with mercury, and I secure these plates, bars, 
or strips together to form the electrode, and in 
so doing the amalgamated surfaces are brought 
into contact so closely as to prevent the excit 
ing-liquid passing in between one plate and 
the next; hence the action of the exciting-liq 
uid is upon the exterior surfaces only of the . 
electrode, and as these become consumed the 
mercury from the adjacent surfaces spreads 
upon the exterior of the electrode, amalgamat 
ing the same progressively and maintaining 
the proper condition and action of the same. 
The shape and size of this electrode will vary 
according to the battery in which it is made 
use of. 
I have represented in the drawings 
a variety of forms in which said electrode may 
be made. 
Figure 1 is an elevation of an electrode made 
up of a series of flat plates. 
Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of my electrode as composed of semicir 
cular plates set together. Fig. 3 is an eleva 
tion, and Fig. 4 a plan view, of an electrode 
made of a range of circular plates or disks. 
55 
Fig. 5 is an elevation, and Fig. 6 a plan, of 
the electrode composed of a range of flat rings. 5o 
Fig, 7 is a perspective view of an electrode 
composed of a series of L-shaped bars, and 
Fig. 8 represents the end of an amalgamated 
strip rolled up into the form of a coil or volute. 
In all cases the plates A are to be amalgam 
ated with mercury upon the respective sur 
faces, applied in any convenient manner, and 
the plates are to fit together sufficiently tight 
for the mercury to fill tlhe space between one 
plate and the next and prevent the exciting 
liquid passing in between such plates, and 
suitable tie - rods and clamps are to be ap 
plied to bind these plates tightly together. In 
some forms I have found it advantageous to 
make use of brass rods passing through holes 
in the respective plates, and either riveted up 
or provided with muts upon the respective 
ends, so as to clamp the set of plates firmly to 
gether, and one of these tie-rods may be ex 
tended to receive the binding-post or other 
attachment for the electric-circuit wire, and 
it may be coated with india-rubber or similar 
material, to prevent the action of the exciting 
liquid upon the same. When the sheet is 
amalgamated and rolled up tightly, as in Fig. 
8, the outer end of the metal may be secured 
in any suitable manner. 
When in use, the consumption of zinc or 
other metal of the electrode releases the mer 
cury from time to time at the edge of the mer 
cury-space between one plate and the next, 
so that such mercury spreads over the edges 
of the plates and amalgamates the same pro 
gressively, and the electrode is kept in con 
stant condition for operation, and seldom or 
never requires further analgamation, and it 
continues in operation until it is reduced in 
size, so as no longer to be properly service 
If desire 3, the bars, strips, or plates might 
be solder'* ei on the edges at places to hold 
them i 
position, tie solder being covered 
with asplhalt or other material to protect it 
froin the action of the exciting-liquid. 
| claim as my invention 
1. An electrode for a battery, composed of 
95 
75 
able. 
V 
M 
(O 
( 5 
25 
35 
-45 
 
2 
385,254 
sheets, plates, bars, or strips having the sur - || the same firmly together, substantially as set 
face amalgamated with mercury and fastened || forth. 
Signed by me this 13th day of March, 1888. 
together, substantially as set forth. 
JOHN DOYLE. 
IO 
2. An electrode for a battery, composed of 
5 plates, bars, or strips of metal, the Surfaces of 
which are amalgamated with mercury and 
placed closely together, in combination with 
rods passing through holes in the plates to tie 
WitnesseS: 
GIEo. T. PINCKNEY, 
WIILLIAM G. MTOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385354.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 385,354, 
I. T. JAQUES. 
MOWING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 3, 1888. 
 
(No Model.) 
I. T. JAQUES. 
MOWING MACHINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 385,354, 
" . 
Patented July 3, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
 
8-yeosey, 
its 
C/2/4 3a/a, 
3. fo 
 
2K2 
2 
Sn 
 
 
al s 
s 
8vvue/viboz, 
is far 
S3% zazz. v22. 
(No Model.) 
I. T. JAQUES. 
MOWING MACHINE 
w 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3 
No. 385,354, 
. 
Patented July 3, 1888. 
37. 3. -6 
2-6, a 2- 364 -vis-eliteracy 
f724.7/ 2-2-22 
Z1. 
Zarez Z.Z. 
3v.ucvtov, 
p 
/N ... 
% 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IRA. T. JAQUES, OF LINCOLN, NEBRASKA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CHARLES H. HUNT, OF SAME PLACE. 
MOWING MACH NE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 385,354, dated July 3, 1888. 
Application filed May 9, 1887. Serial No. 237,595. (No model.) 
the axle 4 is rigidly fixed, the axle serving to 5o 
' 
Be it known that I, IRA.T. JAQUES, a citizen hold the frame together. 
To all, whon, it nually concer'72: 
The grass-shoe 5 is 
of the United States of America, residing at formed with vertical lugs 6, and to these lugs 
Lincoln, in the county of Lancaster, State of the front ends of the side pieces are pivotally 
connected by the bolts 7. The grass-shoe has 
Nebraska, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Mowing-Machines, of which 
its front turned upward to ride the stubble and 
the following is a specification. 
carry the machine over small obstacles in its 
My invention has relation to improvements 
progress at work. On the bolts which pivot 
in mowing-machines of that class styled front 
the front ends of the side pieces to the lugs on 
the grass-shoe are secured the rear ends of two 
cut mowers, (one wheel,) and the object is to 
simplify and improve the mechanical construc 
arms, S 9, their connection on the bolts being 
pivotal to give the frame a joint at that point. 
tion of existing machines of that class and for 
the purpose named; and my invention consists 
The forward ends of these arms S 9 are pivot 
ally bolted to the vertical lugs 10, formed on 
in the novel construction of parts and their 
a metal disk, 11, which rides the fifth-wheel, 
combination, as will be hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and especially as the same is pointed 
12, on the axle of the front carriage, 13. A 
lifting-bar, 14, is passed through holes in the 
out in the claims made hereto. 
verticallugs of the grass-shoe, across theframe, 
I have fully illustrated my improvements in 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part of 
over the side pieces of the frame, and above 
the vibrating arms, and bolted in position, and 
this specification, wherein 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the ma 
in the middle of this lifting-bar is secured 
the lifting-rack 15. In front of the driving 
chine. Fig. 2 is a perspective of the frame of 
the machine with the driving-wheel and stand 
wheel across the machine is Secured a bench 
ing-platform removed. Fig. 3 is a view of one 
rod, 16, the ends thereof being bolted to 
the side pieces of the frame. On this bench 
of the cam-racks. Fig. 4 is a rear view of the 
rod is secured one end of the riding-plat 
same. Fig. 5 is a view of one of the vibrating 
arms with its actuating cross-head and rollers 
form 17, which is carried forward on an in 
cline or curve to a point adjacent to the front 
therein, Fig. 6 is a cross-section of the finger 
carriage, from whence it is extended horizon 
bar and cutter-bar. Fig. 7 is a detail view of a 
tally, as at 18, the extended piece being formed 
section of the cutter-bars and arms, showing 
with a longitudinally-arranged slot, 19. A 
their connection. Fig. 8 is a plan view of a 
stop-plate or keeper, b, is set over the exten 
section of the front end of the platform, show 
sion 18, and the king-bolt 20 is passed through 
ing the slot in the end thereof. Fig. 9 is a de 
this keeper, the extension of the platform, and 
tail view of the lever with Segmental rack and 
the vertically-arranged rack-bar in engage 
axle of the carriage, and the parts thus se 
ment therewith, the retaining-sleeve being 
cured together, with the extension of the plat 
form adapted to slide in its Seat to the limits 
broken away and the associated parts being 
of the slot. On the riding-platform is secured 
curtailed. 
In the drawings, the same parts in different 
a vertical sleeve, 2i, which is set over a hole 
in the platform, and in the extension of this 
figures are designated by the same notations, 
sleeve is pivoted the lever 22, having a seg 
and reference being had thereto, the letter A 
designates the frame of the machine, the two 
mental rack,23, and the pawl 24, both of which 
engage with the rack-bar 15, passed up through 
main side pieces of which are curved down 
the platform and sleeve. Foot-rests 25 are 
ward toward the front and then extended hori 
fixed on the platform, substantially as shown, 
zontally, substantially as seen in the drawings. 
and a seat, 26, is provided. This mechanism 
The side pieces may be extended rearward be 
yond the driving-wheel and be connected by a 
enables the driver to lift the grass-shoe and 
cutter-bars with the cutters over all ordinary 
cross-rod, al. On these side pieces are formed 
obstructions during the progress of the ma 
or secured vertical standards a, between which 
55 
65 
75 
95 
5 
O 
5 
35 
45 
 
2 
385,354 
chine, and when the knives are disconnected 
and turned up the grass-shoe may be lifted 
from its lowest position and set by the pawl 
and rack and the machine hauled about in 
that position. This functional result is at 
tained by reason of the limited joint move 
ment given the machine at the connection of 
the main frame-pieces and the carriage-arms 
at their meeting on the bolts of the lugs on the 
grass-shoe. The machine being sustained at 
the rear on the axle of the driving-wheel and 
at the front on the ends of the arms, it will be 
readily seen that by lifting the rack-bar the 
machine below is drawn up, the extension of 
the frame being permitted through the action 
of the slot in the extension of the platform. 
When the machine is let down to cut at the 
lowest limit, the end of the plate on the exten 
sion of the platform sets against the foot of the 
incline of the platform and prevents the shoe 
and cutters from riding too hard on the stub 
ble. In this position, however, the jointed 
frame will permit the shoe to ride over ordi 
nary obstructions freely. To li?t the shoe and 
cutters over obstructions in the swath, the 
driver disengages the pawl from the rack by 
pressing on its lever end with his foot, and 
then turns down rearwardly the lever, which 
draws up the rack and li?ts the machine at the 
joint at the grass-shoe. 
The letter F designates the driving-wheel, 
which has the usual broad face rim, and ar 
ranged to turn on the axle which is projected 
through the hub. 
The letter G designates metal cylinders se 
cured to the opposite sides of the driving 
wheel. These cylinders are formed with ra 
dial lugs 25, projected inward from the interior 
face of the cylinder and provided with bolt 
holes 25, through which bolts are projected 
into threaded holes in the spokes of the driv. 
ing-wheel. These cylinders are formed on 
outer edge face with cam-racks 26, which en 
gage with the rollers 33 on the cross-heads 32, 
hereinafter described, and by this connection 
the arms are vibrated and the cutter-bars re 
ciprocated. On the outside of the frame and 
standards a are two outward-projecting hori 
Zontal bearing-arms, 27 28, which have bear 
ing-pin holes 29 30, which take the bearing 
pins 34 of the arms H. 
The letter H designates vibrating arms, 
which are duplicates in reverse construction. 
These arms H have rigidly attached to them 
each a vertical sleeve, 31, having a cross-head, 
32, with rollers 33 journaled in the ends. 
The sleeve of each arm is fitted snugly on the 
bearing-pin 34. The cross-head reaches across 
the cam-cylinder on that side, with its rollers 
arranged to set in engagement with the cam 
rack, so that one roller shall set on the point 
of a cam and the other between two cam 
points. The arms extend forward with an in 
Ward and downward curve, substantially as 
shown, and are formed with their free ends to 
set within the respective eyes on the cutter. 
bars, as at 35. The cross-heads are arranged, in 
connection with the cam - racks, on opposite 
sides to move in alternate motion, in order 
that the cutter-bars may also be reciprocated 
in relative alternation. 
The letter I designates the finger-bar, formed 
with a sleeve, 36, journaled in lugs 37 on the 
grass-shoe, and having guides 38, under which 
the cutter-bars slide. On the other end of the 
finger-bar is the usual shoe, 39, slotted, as at 
40, to allow the ends of the cutter-bars to pass 
a short distance through in the movements. 
The cutters 41. 42 have their cutter-bars to fit 
the guides on the finger-bar, and their inner 
ends are formed with eyes 43 to take the ends 
of the arms H. 
The operation of the several elements in the 
machine have been stated in connection with 
the description, and I here give the descrip 
tion of how the machine is detached and made 
inoperative, except for transportation as a 
wheeled vehicle. The bearing - pins of the 
arms H are withdrawn from their seats and 
the sleeves drawn outward, which disengages 
the roilers and the cam-racks. At the Same 
time the vibrating arms are drawn back un 
til the ends are out of the eyes of the cutter 
bars, when the sleeves are secured in the outer 
bearings, 29 and 30. The knives cannot be 
reciprocated when this condition is reached; 
but the cutting apparatus should be turned up 
about the journaled sleeve 36 against the plat 
form, and this is accomplished by drawing the 
cutter-bars outward until the eyes are at a line 
with the bearing of the finger-bar, when the 
cutting apparatus may be turned up about the 
journaled sleeve 36 from a horizontal to a 
vertical position. The grass-shoe may then 
be lifted by the lever and rack-bar, and the 
machine may then be drawn wherever desired. 
The front carriage or truck turns on the 
king-bolt, and the machine is thus adapted to 
make short turns at the ends of the Swaths. 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
S-ar 
1. The combination of the driving-wheel F, 
! having cylinders Gonits oppositesides formed 
with cams on their outer face edges, the frame 
A, having bearing-arms.27 28 projected from 
the side pieces of the frame, the vibrating arms 
H, formed with vertical sleeves 31, having 
cross-heads 32, with rollers 33, the bearing. 
pins 34, arranged in said bearing-arms and 
sleeves, and the cutter-bars, all substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination of the frame A, sup 
ported on the drive-wheel at the rear and piv 
otally connected to standards on the grass 
shoe at its front end, the forward - projecting 
arms 89, pivotally connected at their rear ends 
to the standards of the grass-shoe, the front 
carriage carrying the front ends of the arms 
89, the seat-platform arranged on the machine, 
with its front end to slide on the front car 
riage, the rack-bar 15, connected to the grass 
shoe and projected through the seat-platform, 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 5 
8) 
90 
95 
CO 
O 
I 5 
e 
385,354 
3 
and a lever mounted on the platform, having a at its rear on the main frame and at its front 
segmental rack to engage the rack-bar and lift on the front carriage, and formed at its front I5 
the grass-shoe and frame-bars, substantially as end with a slot, 19, to engage the king-bolt in 
described. 
the front carriage, and a lever mounted on the 
3. The combination, with the driving-wheel, seat-platform connected with the grass-shoe to 
the grass-shoe, and the front carriage, of the lift it, substantially as described. 
main frame Supported at the rear on the drive- 
wheel and having the front ends pivotally con- hand in the presence of two attesting witnesses. 
nected to standards on the grass shoe, the for- 
ward-projecting arms 89, having their rear 
IRA. T. JAQUES. 
ends pivotally connected to the standards of 
the grass-shoe and their front ends secured to 
the front carriage, the seat-platform supported 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 20 
s 
O 
Attest: 
SOLOMON F. MoUCK, 
C. L. TREWITT, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385454.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 385,454, 
27. Z. 
 
E. B. GOELET 
CARRIAGE TOP, 
Patented July 3, 1888. 
 
SNSSNNNNSNg. 
277 esses. 
orvus koko-g 
O(2.22%26 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD BUNCOMBE GOELET, OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS. 
CARRA GET OP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 385,454, dated July 3, 1888. 
Application filed April 12, 1887. Serial No. 234,522. (No model.) 
ing secured in any desired position, I have 
pivoted to the lower member, D, of the brace 
a secondary brace or operating-lever, E, pref. 
erably having a hand-hold, e, and provided at 55 
its lower end with means for engaging various 
points of a suitable co-acting device attached 
to the end of the carriage-seat. 
In the device shown in side elevation in 
Fig. 1 and in bottom plan in Fig. 3 the lower 6o 
end of the lever E is provided with a trans 
verse pin, e', projecting from both of its side 
faces and adapted to engage with the teeth f. 
of two parallel ratchet-plates, between which 
the end of the lever Elies. The points of the 65 
teeth fare downward, and the pin e' may be 
detached from its engagement with any given 
notch of the ratchet-bar by a downward press 
ture, which forces it below the end of the con 
tiguous tooth, and when once out of engage- 7o 
ment may be moved to any desired point of 
the ratchets. In order to prevent accidental 
disengagement of the pine' from the ratchet, 
and at the same time to permit intentional dis 
engagement thereof, I have placed a spring, G, 75 
immediately below the space between the two 
bars of the double ratchet and in contact with 
the end of the operating-lever E. The ends of 
this spring may be secured in any desired man 
ner and may have any such form and construc- 8o 
tion as will permit sufficient depression of the 
body of the spring for the disengagement of 
the pin e' from the ratchet. 
Fig. 4 represents a slightly-modified form of 
the ratchet-bar, in which f' are teeth set in a 85 
spring-bar, G, and adapted to be operated 
either by the depression of the entire bar or 
by the depression of the separate teeth, as may 
be desired. 
25 in any desired position. 
To a 27, whom it nay conce7'n: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD BUNCOMBE 
GOELET, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Fort Worth, in the county of Tarrant 
5 and State of Texas, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Carriage-Tops; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
Io art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sle. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
carriage-tops, and more particularly to the 
construction and arrangement of the braces for 
15 supporting the bows thereof, and is fully de 
scribed and explained in this specification and 
shown in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a carriage. 
2O top embodying one form of my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of a carriage-top 
embodying a slightly-modified form thereof; 
and Figs. 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are detail views illus 
trating various means for securing the braces 
In Fig. 1, A is the carriage-top, and B the 
bows of an ordinary carriage top, the bows 
being spaced above by the ordinary horizontal 
braces, CCC, having the usual breaking joints. 
3o D is an oblique brace whose lower end is 
pivoted. at the rear edge of the seat, while 
its upper end is pivoted near the top of one 
of the bows B. This brace has the ordi 
nary form and construction, being made in 
35 two pieces, connected by a joint, d, adapted 
to permit the brace to break backward near its 
center, and the position of the brace and the 
form of the joint are preferably such that when 
the top is fully raised the brace is rigid and 
4o holds the top erect unless intentionally broken 
backward. Instead of lying outside of the 
bows, however, as is usual in structures of this 
class, the brace illustrated in the drawings lies 
inside the bows and is readily accessible from 
45 the interior of the carriage, so that it may be 
broken or straightened and the top lowered or 
raised by the occupant of the carriage without 
reaching outside the bows, as is necessary when 
the brace lies outside. In order more effectu 
5o ally to secure the brace against accidental dis 
placement, and also in order to permit its bes 
Figs. 5 and 6 illustrate a slightly-different 9o 
construction, in which the ratchet-bars are re 
placed by a bar, F, formed with holes f', and 
the lower end of the lever E is provided with 
a loop, e, adapted to encircle the bar F, and 
with a pin, e", adapted to enter the holes f' 95 
and to be withdrawn therefrom by the opera 
tion of a hand-lever, e', attached to or con 
nected with the pin. 
Fig. 7 illustrates another construction, in 
which the lower end of the lever E is pivoted Ioo 
to an oscillating disk, H, provided with a 
hand-lever, H', and the disk itself is provided 
2. ' 
385,454. 
with an internal or external toothed surface, 
h, each notch of which may be brought into 
engagement with a suitably-actuated pawl, h". 
The object of all of the devices illustrated in 
5 Figs. 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 is the same, and the forms 
so illustrated are only shown as suggestions of 
a few of the various constructions which may 
be used to the same end. The purpose of all 
of them is to provide some means by which the 
Io lower end of the operating-lever E may be se 
cured at any desired distance from the lower 
pivot of the brace D, in order to fasten the top 
in any desired position, whether fully raised or 
fully lowered, or in a position intermediate be 
I5 tween these two extremes. Any of these de 
vices may easily be operated from the interior 
of the carriage, so that by means of them the 
top can be raised or lowered without reaching 
outside the bows. Their use in connection 
with the brace D, lying inside the bows of the 
top, is an improvement and an added conven 
ience; but they are not essential to the opera - 
tion of the brace when so placed, and I do not 
limit my invention, so far as it relates to the 
25 position of the brace, to its use in combination 
with any of these means for securing it in va 
rious positions. 
Fig. 2 illustrates a form of top in which the 
main brace D occupies a vertical position at 
the rear edge of the carriage-seat and is con 
nected with the top of one of the bows by an 
inclined brace, D', lying inside the bows and 
accessible from the interior of the carriage. 
The lower member of the vertical brace D is 
35 provided with an operating-lever, E, having 
the same form, construction, and operation as 
the similar brace already described. The lower 
end of the lever, as shown, is provided with 
the same means for regulating its position as 
are illustrated in Fig. 1; but these may be re 
placed by any of those illustrated in the de 
tail views which have already been described. 
The construction shown in Fig. 2 is in all 
respects the same as that shown in Fig. 1, ex 
45 cept that the single oblique brace D of Fig. 1 
is replaced by the vertical brace D and the 
oblique brace D' of Fig. 2. 
Having now described and explained my in 
vention, what I claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a vehicle-seat, a 
series of top-supporting bows pivoted thereto, 
and a jointed brace having its lower end piv 
oted to the seat and its upper end to one of 
the bows, of a rigid operating-lever having its 55 
upper end pivoted to said jointed brace and its 
lower end adjustably connected with the seat, 
whereby the position of the lower end of said 
lever may be varied and the brace and top se 
cured in any desired position, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, with a carriage-seat, 
bows pivoted to the carriage, and a brace 
having its lower end pivoted to the seat or an 
attachment thereof and its upper end to one of 65 
the bows, of a ratchet-bar secured to the end 
of the seat, and an operating-lever having its 
rear end pivoted to said brace and its front 
end provided with means, substantially as 
shown and described, for connecting it at any 7 O 
desired point with said ratchet-bar, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination of the bows B and hori 
Zontal braces C, the oblique brace D, the 
double ratchet-bar having teeth f, and the 75 
hand-lever E, having its rear end pivoted to 
the oblique brace and its front end provided 
with a transverse pin adapted to engage the 
teeth of the ratchet-bars. 
Zontal braces (, and oblique brace ID, the 
double ratchet-bar having teeth f, the operat 
ing-lever E, having its rear end pivoted to the 
brace D and its front end provided with the 
pine, adapted to engage the ratchet-bars, and 85 
the spring G, lying beneath the end of the op 
erating-lever and adapted to prevent, the ac 
cidental displacement thereof from the ratchet, 
substantially as shown and described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
ln testimony whereof Ia??ix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
4. The combination of the bows IB, the hori- 8o 
EDWARD BUNCOMIBE GOELET. 
90 
Witnesses: 
H. TULLY, 
J. E. MITCHELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385554.txt	(Model.) 
No. 385,554, 
 
T. D. HAMMOND, 
CARPET FASTENER, 
Patented July 3, 1888, 
C. 
/2 - 
3v.uciviliot, 
/ze 4%-2 
33 hea &ltto vict? 
928) itv.cscs : 
": 
Y V2-4eze- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS D. HAMMOND, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO ELLEN J. KELLER, OF SAME PLACE. 
CA R PET. FASTE NER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 385,554, dated July 3, 1888. 
Application filed April 4, 1888. Serial No. 269,553. 
odel.) 
15 
25 
35 
To all whom, it nay concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS D. HAMMOND, 
of Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the the drawings. 
State of New York, have invented new and 
5 useful Improvements in Stair-Carpet Fasten 
ers, of which the following, taken in connec 
tion with the accompanying drawings, is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention consists, chiefly, of a pivoted 
Io plate Secured to the riser of the stair and pro 
vided with a clamp adapted to engage the edge 
of the stair-carpet, and by turning said plate 
on its pivot while the clamp grips the edge of 
the carpet the latter is stretched, as may be 
desired, said device thus constituting a stair 
carpet fastener which is simple in construc 
tion and convenient and efficient in its opera 
tion. 
The invention also consists in the combina 
2O tion, with the aforesaid device, of an arm pro 
jecting from the pivoted plate and serving as 
a lever for turning the same. 
The invention also consists in providing said 
arm With a Spur adapted to engage and hold 
in position the crash covering the central por 
tion of the carpet; and the invention also con 
sists in a peculiar construction of the afore 
said plate with the jaws pivoted thereon, 
whereby the latter are caused to automatically 
tighten their hold on the carpet during the 
operation of stretching the carpet; and thein 
vention furthermore consists in providing the 
pivoted plate with a tongue which engages the 
riser and serves to retain the plate in its posi 
tion for holding the carpet in its stretched con 
dition, all as hereinafter more fully described, 
and specifically set forth in the claims. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure is a front 
elevation of a section of stairs provided with 
my improved carpet-fasteners. Fig. 2 is an 
enlarged detached view of the rear of the piv 
oted plate; and Fig. 3 is an edge view of the 
said plate, showing the wedging-slot which 
causes the clamp to automatically tighten its 
hold on the carpet, 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
a designates one of a pair of annular plates 
which are pivoted eccentrically to the lower 
5o portion of the riser R of the stairs, and in such 
positions as to bring said plates near the edges 
of the stair-carpet, as illustrated in Fig. 1 of 
Each of said plates is formed 
with a recess or slot, c, extending from the 
edge at one side of the plate a considerable 
depth toward the center of the plate, as shown 
in Fig. 3 of the drawings. Said slot is formed 
wedging, or with one side oblique to the plane 
of the plate, as illustrated in Fig. 2 of the 
drawings, and in the wide portion of said slot 6O 
and eccentrically in relation to the pivot of 
the plate are pivoted two clamping jaws, bb, 
which have sufficient lateral play to allow the 
edge of the stair-carpet to be inserted between 
them. The plate a may be either formed with 
suitable projections or lugs, ll, to afford a hold 
for the hand by which to turn said plate on its 
pivot, or said plate may be provided With a 
rigid arm, d, extended radially from the plate. 
Said arm serves as a lever for turning the 
plate, as aforesaid, and when in its operative 
position it presses the carpet closely against 
the riser R. 
In operating the described device the plate 
at is turned so as to bring the arm d in an erect 
position, and when in this position the pivot 
of the clamp bib' is below the pivot of the plate, 
and the jaws of the clamp have sufficient lat 
eral play to allow the edge of the carpet to be 
introduced between them. Then by turning the 
plate a so as to cause the arm d to lie hori 
zontally across the front of the carpet the jaws 
lb b are caused to slide into the narrow portion 
of the slot c, and thereby become compressed, 
and thus their grip on the carpet is re-enforced, 
while the said jaws draw the carpet down 
tightly and stretch it snugly across the front 
of the riser R. In order to retain the plate a 
in its said operative position, I provide the 
same with a tongue, i, which projects from the 
edge of the plate, preferably at right angles to 
the arm d, and bears against the riser. 
The free end of the arm d, I provide with a 
downward-projectingspur, e, preferably formed 
integral with the arm. Said spur engages and 
holds the edge of the crash, C, covering the 
central portion of the carpet. 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
45 
75 
5 
OO 
385,554 
1. The stair-carpet fastener composed of the 
pivoted plate a on the riser and formed with 
the Wedging-slot c, and the jaws b l', pivoted 
in the wide portion of said slot, substantially 
as described and shown. 
2. The stair-carpet fastener composed of the 
plate (, pivoted to the riser, a clamp on said 
plate adapted to engage the edge of the carpet, 
and the tonguet, projecting from the plate and 
adapted to bear on the riser, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The stair-carpet fastener composed of the 
plate ct, pivoted to the riser, a clamp on said 
plate adapted to engage the edge of the carpet, 
and the arm d, and tonguet, projecting radially 
from the arm in different directions, substan 
tially as described and shown. 
IO 
15 
4. The improved stair-carpet fastener com 
posed of the plate a, pivoted to the riser and 
formed with the wedging-slot c, the jaws b b, 
pivoted in the wide portion of said slot, the 
arm d, extended radially from the plate and 
provided with the spur e, and the tongue t, 
projecting from the plate at right angles to the 
arm, substantially as described and shown. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
lmy name, in the presence of two witnesses, at 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, this 27th day of March, 
SSS. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS D. HAMMOND. L. s. 
C. H. DUELL, 
J. J. LAASS. 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385654.txt	(No Model.) 
F. W. WRIGHT 
HANGING AND OPERATING VENETIAN BLINDS, 
No. 385,654, 
Patented July 3, 1888. 
 
N& 
G 
W i/-7-s=za. 
- 7 - S -- Aya - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK W. W. RIGHT, OF BURLINGTON, VERMONT. 
HANG NG AND OPERATING WENETAN BNDS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 385,654, dated July 3, 1888. 
Application filed October 24, 1887. Serial No. 253,239. (No model.) 
" 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK W. WRIGHT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bur 
lington, in the county of Chittenden and State 
5 of Vermont, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Hanging and Operat 
ing Venetian Blinds, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
O My invention relates to improvements in 
the mode of hanging and operating what are 
known as Venetian window-blinds; and it 
consists in the combination of a frictional 
bracket provided with supports for the guid 
15 ing-rollers, and which has its lower vertical face 
roughened, with the double-grooved pulley 
journaled between the lateral supports, the 
upper slat, which has its end to bear against 
the roughened surface, and the gudgeon, which 
2O is secured to the end of the slat, as will be 
more fully described hereina?ter. 
In the drawings, in which similar letters in. 
dicate like parts, Figure l is a side elevation 
of a blind embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
25 a vertical section of the same. Fig. 3 is a de 
tail. Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail view of the 
bracket, the end of the upper slat, and the 
gudgeon. 
A represents the side jamb of the window 
so frame; B, the top of the frame; C, the Vene 
tian blind; d d, the slats composing the same, 
of which e is the upper slat. 
D E are hangers or brackets secured to the 
interior faces of the side jambs, A, near the 
35 top of the window-frame, and to which the up. 
per slat, e, is pivoted. One of the brackets, D, 
is provided with a bottom projection, f, to re 
ceive the gudgeon on the corresponding end 
of the slate. An opening at the top of this 
do projection allows the gudgeon to be inserted 
or removed, as desired, without moving the 
bracket. From the face of the other bracket, 
E, project lateral supportsh, for the journaling 
of the small double-grooved pulley i. Directly 
45 below the interior face of this pulley is that 
portion of the bracket which is designed to re 
ceive the gudgeon i on the other end of the 
slate. The shape of the aperture in which 
the gudgeon i is inserted is triangular, the 
5o gudgeon resting in the angle. The exterior 
edge of this angle is rimmed to receive a cor 
2. 
responding enlargement of the outer end of 
the gudgeon j. The surface of that portion of 
the bracket which comes in contact with that 
end of the slate as it is turned is corrugated, 55 
the whole construction being designed to se 
cure a greater frictional bearing to the slate, 
which, being further increased by the Weight 
of the blind, is sufficient to retain the slate at 
any angle to which it may be turned-a, result 6o 
which could not be reliably accomplished if 
the gudgeon i were a simple pivot-pin, with 
out the intervention of springs or other simi 
lar device. 
The ends of the two cords F, employed to 65 
raise and lower the blind, are secured, one 
near each extremity, to the bottom slat, and 
thence are passed upward through transverse 
slots in each slatd in the usual manner; but 
instead of being passed through similar aper- to 
tures in the top slat, e, and thence over suit 
able pulleys or other more complicated de 
vices attached to the top of the Window-frame, 
they are carried through holes in the slate, di 
rectly over the slots in the slats below, which 75 
holes are lined with a porcelain, glass, or other 
anti-frictional material; thence they are car 
ried to the double-grooved pulley i, over 
which they are passed, and thence down to 
where they can be operated conveniently by 8o 
the hand. 
The angular adjustment of the blind is ac 
complished by means of the cord H, which is 
secured to the upper slat, e, in the ordinary 
Way. 
The additional frictional bearing of the 
gudgeon j, combined with the roughened face 
of the bracket adjacent to the end of the slat 
e, as above described, is sufficient to hold the 
slats or blind at any angle. 
It is obvious that this simple arrangement 
for hanging Venetian blinds wholly dispenses 
with the necessity for a top rail, cornice, or 
hangers, all of a more or less complicated and 
expensive construction. No pulleys are re. 95 
quired save the one over which the cords F. 
pass, thus greatly saving both in expense of 
construction and subsequent care, contribut 
ing to the simplicity and beauty of the blind 
and the convenience and ease with which it Ioo 
can be at any in Oment removed from or re 
placed in the window. 
85 
90 
2 
385,654 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let. bear against the roughened surface, and the 
ters Patent, is- 
The combination of the frictional bracket E, 
In testimony whereof I do affix my signature 
provided with the supports h, and a suitable in presence of two witnesses. 
5 bearing for the gudgeon, and having its lower 
vertical surface roughened, with the double- 
grooved pulley journaled between the lateral 
Supports, the upper slat, which has its end to 
CHARLES E. ALLEN, 
GEORGE D. WRIGHT. 
FRANK W. WRIGHT. 
gudgeon, substantially as described. 
O 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385754.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 385,754, 
F. B. GRAWES, 
SLACK CABLE, STOP, 
Patented July l(), l888. 
P-P-P-HO 
 
 
 
H 
  
 
 
III 
 
 
 
 
D 
NS 
A. 
7. A 
VV2 Z 22 esses 
ES 
 
 
, 
1. 
reas 
| 
status 
I W 
III: 
 
ce. A 
II at H. E. 
III 
SR A. 
 
NFr. 
a 3 
ET 
2n 
37 72-2 lea-C. 13. 2-2a-----, 
772-ye 2.or 
as 14&o77-ey. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED B. GRAVES, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO L. S. GRAVES & 
SON, OF SAME PLACE. 
SACK.- CAB E STOP, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 385,754, dated July 10, 1888. 
Application filed March 26, 1888. Serial No. 26S,587, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
one end said frame and supported in bearings 
is a shaft, B, on which run the fast and loose 
pulleys B'B', adapted to be driven by suitable 
belts from the prime mover in the ordinary 55 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRED B. GRAVEs, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
88. 
C represents an intermediate counter-shaft, 
useful Improvements in Slack-Cable Stops for 
having pinions C. C. gearing with pinion B 
Elevators; and I do hereby declare the follow 
on shaft B and gear D', formed on the winding 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the Sane, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this speci- drum D, as shown. The shaft D, on which 6o 
fication, and to the figures and letters of refer- the drum D is mounted, is provided on one end 
ence marked thereon. 
with an extended portion, D", threaded at d, 
My present invention relates to improve- and upon this threaded portion are secured 
ments in slack-cable stops for elevators, par. two two-part nuts or stops, E. E., capable of 
ticularly to that class adapted to be applied to being adjusted, but normally held clamped a 65 
the ceilings of rooms, and to hang suspended certain distance apart, regulated by the height 
therefrom, and it has for its object to improve of the building and length of cable employed. 
and cheapen their construction and simplify 
On the outer end of the drum-shaft is secured 
their Operation; and it consists in certain novel a collar, d", and between this and the outer 
combinations of parts hereinafter described, of the stationary nuts is hung one end of a vi- 7 
and pointed out particularly in the claims at bratory frame, F, the other end being hung 
the end of this specification. 
upon the shaft between the inner stationary 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective nut and the bearing of the main frame, and on 
View of a hoisting-machine with my invention the threaded portion between the stops E. E. 
applied thereto; Fig. 2, a bottom plan view is arranged a movable threaded nut, G, having 7 
of the machine, showing more clearly the de- an extension, G', entering a slot, F, in the vi 
tails of my improvement. Fig. 3 is an en- bratory frame, the latter being of such length 
larged sectional view of the clutch of the au- as to permit the free movement of the nut 
tomatic stop mechanism. 
while traveling until it strikes one or the other 
Similar letters of reference in the several of the stops E. 
figures indicate the same parts. 
At the end of the frame opposite the drum 
It is well known that frequently serious ac- is provided a short shaft, H., on which is 
cidents result from the arrest of elevators while mounted the hand-rope wheel H', to which is 
descending while the suspending-cable is con- connected the hand-rope, which runs in prox 
tinually unwinding, leaving the car suspended imity to the car, and is manipulated by the op 
at the mercy of the obstruction, and devices erator to control the operation of the machine. 
known as slack-cable stops have been pro- On one side this wheel is located the cam I, 
vided for the purpose of preventing these by operating through projection I upon rod I, to 
arresting the motion of the cable-containing which the belt-shifters are connected. To the 
drum, and my present invention is designed shaft H is connected a cam, H, adapted to 
to provide an improved device for this pur- move the end of a lever, H, carrying a brake 
pose. 
arranged to be applied to the fast pulley or its 
The construction of the hoisting-machine shaft when operated in one direction. The 
to which the invention is shown herein ap- extreme of the shaft is provided with a sector 
plied forms no part of the invention, except J, engaging a rack, J', arranged to slide i 
in So far as specified in the claims, and I do suitable guides, and connected by a rod, J 
not deem it necessary to enter into a minute with the extension of the vibrating frame F, a 
description of all the operative parts thereof. shown. 
A in the drawings represents the main frame 
From the above it will be seen that the o 
or base, adapted to be secured to the ceiling of erator normally controls the movements of th 
a room, and provided with suitable bearings elevator by the hand-rope, operating the bel 
and journals for the operating-shafts. Near shifter and pulley-brake; but as the nut G 
45 
 
O 
25 
35 
caused to travel in one or other direction, ac 
cording to the direction of movement of shaft, 
when the extreme of the movement of the car 
is reached, said nut will strike one of the stops 
and be prevented from further rotation. This 
will cause the rotation of the nut, and through 
its extension the vibration of frame F, causing 
the latter to operate the connecting-rod, lack, 
sector, and shaft H, turning the latter so as to 
cause its cam to shift the belt to or from the 
loose pulley and stop the unwinding or wind 
ing of the cable, as the case may be. 
On the side of the inner extension of frame 
F are provided teeth or projections.f, forming 
one section of a clutch adapted to engage cor. 
responding teeth on a clutch-section, J", con 
nected to the shaft D', so as to rotate there with, 
by a spline-and-groove connection, and capa 
ble of a reciprocating motion thereon, so as to 
be engaged and disengaged when desired. A 
groove is formed in section J", in which is lo 
cated a collar, j, connected to one arm of a 
bell-crank lever, K, pivoted on the frame, the 
other arm being connected with shaft M by 
means of a link, M', secured to an adjustable 
projecting arm, M, attached to the shaft. The 
link is provided with a thread for a portion of 
its length, on which is an adjustable nut, In, 
and between this nut and a perforated projec 
tion, m, in the main frame, through which the 
link passes, is a spring, na', operating to move 
the link in a direction to throw the clutch out 
of engagement. 
Projecting slightly downward from the shaft, 
and extending under the winding drum and 
in close proximity to its surface, is a U-shaped 
frame, N, rigidly attached to said shaft by 
means of the collars n n shown, or other suit 
able fastening device. The relation which this 
frame bears to the bell - crank and shaft is 
such that a movement of the former away from 
the drum will cause the engagement of the 
clutch - section, while a reverse movement 
caused by the spring m will unclutch them. 
From the above the operation of this de 
vice will be apparent. 
Under normal conditions the frame N is 
close to the drum supported upon spring m' 
and the clutch uncoupled; but if it should 
happen that while the drum is unwinding and 
the car descending the latter should becaught, 
allowing the cable to hang in a loop from the 
drum, or if the coils of cable should from an 
cause be wound upon each other, and thus 
project from the drun's surface, they would, 
upon striking the frame N, depress it against 
spring m, and through the link and bell-crank 
move the rotating clutch section J into en 
gagement with the side of the vibrating frame 
F, causing the vibration of the latter, and 
hrough the connecting-rod, rack, sector, and 
ha?t H causing the shifting of the belt, ap 
blication of the brake, and a stoppage of the 
thachine. 
Upon the removal of the coil of the cable 
'On the frame the spring in returns it to 
ormal position, unclutching the sectors J 
and F, and permitting the normal control of 
the machine by the manipulation of wheel H. 
The device above described is simple, easily 
applied, and I have found it admirably adapted 
for the purpose. 
Of course numerous modifications will occur 
to those skilled in the art, and I do not desire 
to be limited more than is specified in the 
claims. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. In a hoisting-machine, the combination 
of the starting and stopping mechanism, the 
winding-drum, the shaft for the same, haying 
the portion extending beyond the bearing, 
the vibrating frame hung loosely thereon, hav 
ing the clutch-teeth on one side and connected 
to the starting and stopping mechanism, the 
movable clutch - section mounted upon the 
drum-shaft, the bell-crank lever connected 
with said clutch - section, the shaft arranged 
parallel with the drum, the frame mounted on 
said shaft and held close to the drum, and 
the connecting-link between the frame-shaft 
and bell-crank, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the starting and stop 
ping mechanism, the winding-drum, the shaft 
for the same, having the threaded portion and 
extending beyond the bearing, the vibrating 
frame having a longitudinal slot and clutch 
teeth hung loosely on said shaft, the stops se 
cured on the shaft, the movable nut mounted 
on the threaded portion, arranged to travel 
between the stops and having a projection 
entering the slot in the vibrating frame, con 
nections between the frame and the starting 
and stopping mechanism, a movable clutch 
section on the drum-shaft, the bell crank con 
nected thereto, the shaft extending parallel 
with the drum, the frame mounted thereon, 
extending close to the periphery of the drum, 
and a connecting-rod between the bell-crank 
and the shaft, whereby a movement imparted 
to the end of the frame will throw the clutch 
into engagement, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the starting and stop 
ping mechanism, the winding-drum, the shaft 
for the same, having the portion extending be 
yond the bearing, the vibrating frame hung 
loosely thereon, having the clutch-teeth on one. 
side and connected to the starting and stop 
ping mechanism, the movable clutch-section 
mounted on the drum-shaft, the bell-crank 
lever connecting with said clutch-section, the 
shaft arranged parallel with the drum, hav 
ing the short arm, the rod connected to said 
arm and to the bell-crank, having the nut 
thereon, the projection from the frame and 
the spring interposed between the projection 
and nut, and the frame attached to said last 
mentioned shaft and projecting in close prox 
imity to the drum-surface, substantially as de 
scribed. 
Witnesses: 
FRED B. GRAVES. 
II5 
9O 
95 
I IO 
385,754 
 
78 
75 
Z. L. DAVIS, 
LORENZO S. GRAVES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385854.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 385,854. 
D. D. FLEMMING, 
RETORT GAS FURNACE. 
4 Sheets-Sheet l. 
Patented July 10, 1888. 
 
 
 
HELELE! 
HEILUHHAILL!) 
 
T 
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 
TFFFFFFTTH?THNo. 
|-TSJIZITS-ZITTEN-ZEL-I 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
D. D. FLEMMING, 
RETORT GAS FURNACE 
4 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No, 385,854, 
Patented July 10, 1888. 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
ZZZZ 
 
 
Z 
Z 
// 
Y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
ZZZZ 
ANSZFEHE4NJEZIEHEZEIZEZE 
ZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZ 
ZZZ 
V 
Z 
ZZZ 
ZZZZZZZ 
\\ 2ZZZIZZ 
ZZZZZZZZ 
| 
|| 
Z 
 
Z 
ZZZZ 
KZZ 
ZZ 
ZZZZ 
ZZZZZ 
ZZZ 
ZZZZ 
ZZZZ 
ZZZZZ 
ZZZZ 
ZZZZZ 
ZZZZZ 
) )))) 
?) ZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZ 
D ALZZZZZZZZZZZ 
22222222 
22 
111 
EZLAZE 
  
  
2? 
ZZZZ 
4Y 
SG-122AN AZ2 NAZ - 22222224 
ZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZYZ 
 
 
Z 
42S22LGANG XAN) Z 
ZZZY ** // 
4 
2zzz 
2ZZZYZZZZY 
ZYZ 
22 XZ2ZZYZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
42ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
22ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
2ZZAZAZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
222222 2222222 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
/Z 
42ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZAZZ4 
ZYZZ 
JYZ 
ATORNEYS. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographar. washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
N0. 385,854, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
RETORT GAS FURNAGE, 
Patented July 10, 1888. 
- A7%CY. - 3. 
 
 
L I EVANNA 
NAMA 
 
Z4 
Z 
 
 
 
 
} 
2 
| 
HII I z 
r"| 1*2 
| || MYYTI IZ 
| || 
24 
| *Z 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IKU K 
|  
A | A 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 
INWE 
ZKO 2) * 
r 
BY vuvwv 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
B----- 
e T*" 
WITNESSES 
 
e?Te2Z6 
-66 oce 
N. PETERS, Photo-thographer waethington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
D, D, FLEMMING, 
RETORT GAS FURINACE. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
N0, 385, 854, 
Patented July 10, 1888. 
| 
w 
??????????????????????? 
14%, 4 
 
???????????? 
*** 
|| E. 
T 
ZNI 
734ZZZZZZ 
262H22 
??????????????? 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZAZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
F22222222222FEHE5E5622 
ZZZZZ 
ZZZZ 
22422KXXXXXX22232424444421222 3KZ 
42 
24ZZZK 
KO2 
5% 
%  2% 
KX 
XKXQX 
 
222 
XX 
22 I A 
2 
Y4ZZ 
ZZZ 
? N NYTI 
224 ZYZ ---u= 
ZAZZ TZ 
NI?42 H 
 
IM 
I 
ZZZ 
ZZZ 
22 
224 
22 
ZZZ 
N 
NK4 
w 
ZZ 
?HL * 
22EIKSNK1- 
22 
ZZZ 
K?=- 
22 
222? 
A 
222 
NMZ 
22 
E?I?IXZAHF 
ZZZ 
2 e 22-zE x 22 
YZY 
22ZZZZ 
Z 
74 
2222222AIT FAI 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZitz vz?ZZZZZZ 
Z2Z2Z2 22222222222222224 
ZZZZZZZZZZZ22|| ZZZZZZZZ 
?Z2ZZZ?͎ 2BE 
ZZZZ 
ZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZY 
22 ????? 
ZZZZZ Z ZZZZZZZZZZZAZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
IZZ 
NAYZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
YZZZZZZZ 
2222222222 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
YY 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
N 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
22N 
44444 KY 222 z 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZMINWENTOR: 
WITNESSESKKZKZZZZZZ2 22 
7 
ZZZZZZ 
ZZ 2 
2? 
SZZ 
MY Z ZY ZZ 
ZYZ 
WZZ 
IZZ 
/Y 
Zij 
Z 
* 
?Zee-/eae). 
- 643 ve 
BY 
 
KO) 
lluurv 
ATTORNEYS. 
4 
N. PETERs Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DUDLEY D. FLEMMING, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
R E O RT GAS - FU RNA CE, 
SPECFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 385,854, dated July 20, l888. 
Application filed M?arcl? 22, 1887, 
Seriatl No. 231,954. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all Twi?ho7m2, it 1m,ay concern. 
Be it known that I, DUDLEY D. FLEMIMLING, 
of Jersey City, in the county of Hudson and 
State of New Jersey, have inventedl a new and 
Improved Gas-Retort Furnace, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
gas- retort furnaces, and has for its object, by 
a simple and inexpensive alteration of furnaces || 
now used for direct firing, to attain all the ad 
vantages of the costly and elaborate regenera 
tor-furnaces. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of the several parts, as will 
be hereinafter fully set forth, and pointed out | 
in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
COrresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a furnace 
having my improvements attached. Fig. 2 is 
a Central vertical section of the same on line 
aC ac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a horizontal section 
on line / / of Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 is a vertical 
transverse section on line 3 3 of Fig. 3. 
In carrying out the object of this invention 
the following advantages are sought to be at 
tained: first, the use of gaseous fuel for heat 
ing retort-benches, or rather the first conver- || 
sion of the solid fuel or carbon to the gaseous 
state (carbonic oxide) by the proper regula 
tion of the primary air-supply, and, second, 
the conversion of this carbonic oxide to car 
bonic acid by a secondary air-supply. 
The system of regenerator-furnaces in which 
the foregoing principle is carried out necessi 
tates a radical change in the construction of 
the bench, and also requires much additional 
Space or cellar undler the retort-house, which 
is unattainable in many gas-works. 
In all the systems of regenerator-furnaces 
yet introduced the end sought is to superheat 
the secondary air-supply, which secondary air 
is claimed to be superheated by the escaping 
Waste products of combustion. This is fol 
lowed out by Didier, Schilling and Bronte, 
Oeckelhauser, Livesey, Hasse and Vocherot, 
and others, of Europe, and in Stanley and 
Steadman, McIlhenney, and Dieterich, of this 
country. 
In my improvementIdliscard all methods of 
superheating the secondary air, from the fact 
that dry air has little capacity for absorbing 
heat, and though expanded by contact with 
red-hot surfaces does not deliver any useful 
effect when brought in contact with hot com 
bustible gas that is not attained by air of the 
normal temperature. 
In constructing the improved gas-retort fur 
naces, each bench A is formed into two com 
bustion-chambers, Al A, by means of a Ver 
tical partition-wall, B, which is carried up to 
about the level of top of the upper retorts, B, 
the said retorts being of the ordinary construc 
tiona and held in the benches in any well-known 
or approved manner. 
A generator, C, for producing the gaseous 
fuel (or carbonic oxide and hydrogen) is pro 
vided by constructing a deep furnace, C', be 
neath the retorts B, so that a depth of fuel of 
about four feet is attained. Over the top of this 
furnace, and extending from the base of the 
vertical partition-wall B to the front wall of 
each bench, an arch or horizontal partition, D, 
is built, separating the furnace C' from the sec 
ond or front combustion-chamber, A*. 
The furnace C', at the rear of the bench, is 
provided, preferably, with an upwardly and 
rearwardly sloping floor, D', and at the front 
with a hopper, a, whereby solid fuel is sup 
plied the furnace, a grate, a', and a fire and 
draft door, b b'. A dirip-pipe, d, is also pro 
vided, as shown in Fig. 2, entered at the front 
of the ?urmace, whereby water is ailowed to 
trickle upon the fuel mass down in the ash 
pan d'. 
The primary air enters through the draft 
door b' below the grate, and is made to pass 
laterally through the fuel mass, insuring a 
more complete conversion than is attained in 
the ordinary upright generators. The duct 
F, for conveying the gaseous fuel from the gen 
erator to the first or rear combustion-chalun 
ber, A, is formed by dividing the space from 
the partition-wall B to the rear of the bench 
into a series of spaces or channels, G, pro 
duced by tille or bars G", extended trans 
versely the bench at equidistance apart, their 
ends being rigidly secured in the side wall or 
by equivalent means. Into each of these clhan 
nels, about two and one-lualfinches below the 
95 
I O 
3 5 
 
 
864 
unconsumed escaping gases are ignited and 
burned. The gases, after imparting their use 
| full effects to the retorts, pass through the 
opening m into the offtake-flues M, whereby 
the products of combustion are carried off in 
the usual manner. 
It will be observed that the arch or horizon 
tal partition D, whereby the generating-cham 
ber is cheaply formed, admits not only of a 
more advantageous and economic use of fuel, 
but compels the first products of combustion 
to be brought in contact with the rear of the 
retort, where their action is most beneficial. 
It will also be observed that not only a great 
advantage is attained by the arch or horizon 
tal partition D, whereby a very effective gen 
erator or gas-producer is provided and the 
gases forced for combustion at the rear of 
the retorts, but that by means of the supple 
mental air-supply to the second or front com- 85 
bustion - chamber, A, I ann enabled to effect a 
substantially complete combustion, and also 
to more completely control the working of the 
75 . 
benches. 
N 
M 
Patent- 
Having thus fully described my invention, 9C 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
1. In a gas-retort furnace, the combination, 
with the bench A, divided into a front and 
rear compartment by a vertical partition, of 95 
an arch dividing the front compartment from 
the fuel mass, substantially as shown and de 
scribed, whereby a generating - chamber is 
formed and the first products of combustion 
compelled to pass around the rear of the re- IOO 
torts, as set forth. 
2. In a gas-retort furnace, the combination, 
with the bench A, divided into a front and 
rear compartment, AY A*, by a vertical parti 
tion, B, and an arch or horizontal partition, Io5 
D, integral with said vertical partition and 
the front wall of the furnace, whereby a gen 
erating-chamber, C, is formed, of a series of 
channels or openings, G, in the upper rear end 
of said chamber and fidues H H', adapted to ? Io 
supply air above said channels, substantially 
as shown and described, and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
3. In a gas- retort furnace, the combination, 
with the bench A, divided into a front and II I 5 
rear compartment, A A*, by a partition, B, an 
arch, D, uniting said partition and the for 
ward wall of the furnace, whereby a generat 
ing-chamber, C, is formed, and supplemental 
air-ducts N above the retorts, of a series of I 2o 
channels or openings, G, intervening the re 
torts at the rear, and the generating chamber 
and flues H H', adapted to supply air above 
said channels, substantially as shown and de 
scribed, and for the purpose herein set forth. I 2 5 
W 
DUDLEY D. EFILEMMING. 
Witnesses: 
DAWID R. DALY, 
W. H. LEWIS. 
O 
5 
25 
point of escape, e, the secndry airis made to 
combine with the gases from the generator, 
which air enters through the fidues H H'. By 
this form of construction a positive and inti 
mate union of the secondary air with the gase 
ous fuel is effected for the combustion. 
Two secondary air-flues are provided each 
bench H and H', one to the inner side and be 
low each tier of retorts B, as shown in Figs. 
1, 3, and 4. The said flues are adapted to ex 
tend from the face of the furnace, where they 
are provided with suitable valves, h, horizon 
tally rearward beneath the bars or tille G". 
In substantial horizontal alignment with the 
5 secondary air-flues HI HI, , and below the outer 
side of the under retort, B, of each tier, rear 
ward. extending take-off flues M are provided, 
having connection at mi, with the second or 
front combustion-chamber, A, through which || 
2Co fidues the waste products of combustion are 
adapted to pass up and out of the furnace. 
Each bench is provided with two take - off 
fues, one for each tier of retorts, as shown in 
Fig. 3, in which figure positions of duplicate 
benches are represented at the side and to the 
rear of the one above described, M' being the 
respective take-off flues for the several adjoin 
ing benches. 
Between the upper retorts of each bench an 
opening, N, is made in the face of the furnace, 
controlled by a suitable slide or valve, N', the 
said opening being adapted to communicate 
with second or front combustion-chamber, A, 
by means of a series of ducts, N, radiating 
from said opening N, and leading into said 
second combustion-chamber, A, above the up 
per retorts, B, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. 
Through the opening N and ducts N a sup 
plementary or third air-supply is admitted in 
the second or front combustion-chamber, for 
the purpose of consuming any of the gaseous 
fuel which mnight escape before entering the 
In operation, the solid fuel is fed into the 
generator C through the hopper a. The pri 
mary air for converting this fuel to the gaseous 
state (carbonic oxide) is admitted through the 
draft-door b' under the grate a". 
Passing 
through the mass and uniting with the carbon, 
it is converted to oxide. Water is allowed to 
trickle on the fuel mass through the pipe d 
and into the ash-pit, d', where, being vaporized, 
it passes up through the fuel, and there being 
decomposed by contact with the carbon results 
in the formation of gas, (hydrogen carbonic 
oxide oxygen.) The combined gaseous fuel 
now passes through the channels G, where 
it unites, with the secondary air admitted 
through the flues H H'. At this point, e, the 
combustion takes place, and expanding inuto 
the rear or first combustion - chamber, A', the 
heated gases pass up around the rear of the 
retorts B' over the partition - wall B into the 
front or second combustion-chamber, A. Here 
65 the supplemental air-supply is met and any 
offtake-fues. 
6 
N 
. | 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US385954.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL O'HARA, DANIEL W. ELDREDGE, AND JOHN LOGAN, OF WALTIAM, 
MASSACHUSETTS, 
ALLOY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 385,954, dated July 10, 1888. 
: Application filed March 2, 1888, serial No. 265,934. (No specimens.) 
portions of platinum, copper, and nickel above 
specified, but may vary the same within real 
sonable limits without departing from thespirit 
of our invention. 
. 
25 
. . 
. 
. W 
. 
. . 
. To ali, uihon it may concern. . . 
Beit known that we, DANIEL O'HARA, DAN 
IEI, W. ELDREDGE, and JoHN LOGAN, of Wal 
tham, in the county of Middlesex and State of 
5 Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Alloys, of which the 
following is a specification. . 
Our invention has for its object to provide an 
alloy or compound metal which shall be practi 
Io cally non-magnetic, inoxidizable, and will have 
a suitable coefficient of expansion to adaptit for. 
use as the material for one of the parts of the 
rim of a compensation-balance for watches or 
chronometers, 
Our improved alloy consists of a compound 
of platinum, copper, nickel, and gold in about 
the following proportions: platinum, seventy 
five (75) parts; copper, ten (10) parts; nickel, 
ten (10) parts; gold, from ten (10) to forty (40) 
We do not limit ourselves to the exact pro- 
20 parts. 
-. 
. . 
5 
- 
..We claim- 
An alloy or compound metal composed of 
platinum, copper, nickel, and gold; in substan- . 
tially the following parts, viz: seventy-five 
parts of platinum, ten parts of copper, ten go 
parts of nickel, and from ten to forty parts of 
gold, as set forth. 
. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 28th day of Feb-35 
ruary, A. D. 1888. 
. . 
. 
. 
DANIEL OHARA. 
DANIEL W. ELDREDGE. 
JOHN LOGAN. . 
. 
. 
Witnesses: . 
. 
HENRY N. FISHER, . 
EDWARD A. MARSH. 
. . 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386054.txt	(No Model.) 
G, A, BEACH, 
CARRIAGE SPEAKING, TUBE. 
No. 386,054, 
Patented July 10, 1888. 
  
  
2222222222222222223 
baniasessee 
A) 
s 
W 
  
- 
SSNS 
22222e 
SS 4. 
Zazzzesses: - 2 
-Geva e-le. 
c2a- 
Z72 e7-zzfar, 
6aze/Zeac. 
- 47%. 476, 2/e/e?ca ce/< 
2-z's 27zzo-e-s: 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. BEACH, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND 
JAMES F. SOMES, OF SAME PLACE. 
CARRAGE SPEAKN GUBE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 386,054, dated July 10, 1888. 
Original application filed March 15, 1887, Serial No. 230,935. Divided and this application filed November 26, 1887. 
256,208. 
(No model.) 
Serial No. 
ICY 
35 
To c.77, it? O7), ii, inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE A. BEACH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Improve. 
ment in Carriage Speaking-Tubes, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to carriage speaking 
tubes, and more particularly to improvements 
upon the carriage speaking - tube heretofore 
patented to me in Letters Patent of the United 
States, No. 363,979. 
The object of my present invention is to pro 
Wide a carriage speaking-tube extending from 
the Seat of the carriage to the driver's seat 
thereof, which may be contracted or telescoped 
Out of the Way, leaving no projecting part lia 
ble to injury or to affect the neat appearance of 
the carriage, and wherein the mouth-pieces 
are provided with whistles and hinged caps. 
To this end my invention consists, in con 
nection with the carriage, the telescoping or 
contractible speaking - tube and its mouth 
pieces, of a hinged cap or covering-disk fur 
nished with a double-disk whistle, being in 
tegral with the hinged cap, so that no part of 
the whistle will project beyond the mouth 
piece or its hinged cover. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, and in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate like parts, Fig 
ure 1 is a sectional view of a carriage, show. 
ing my invention in elevation. Fig. 2 is an 
enlarged longitudinal vertical section of the 
Speaking-tube. Fig. 3 is an enlarged sectional 
view of the mouth-piece and whistle. Fig. 4 
is a detail perspective view of the mouthpiece 
holding clamp. 
In Said drawings, A represents a carriage 
body; A', the carriage-seat; A", the driver's 
seat, and A represents the door of the car 
riage. 
B is the stationary or non-sliding tube or 
part of the speaking-tube, extending from the 
front of the carriage-body, or the vicinity of 
the driver's seat, under the top or roof of the 
carriage. This tube B should be made of two 
or three ply rubber hose, and is, or may be, 
supported by the upholstering a, which thus 
serves to conceal the tube from view as well 
as to Support it. The driver's end of the 
tube is secured and firmly supported by a me 
tallic socket or thimble, b, secured in a suit 
able hole, b, in the frame-work A" of the car 
riage-body. The socket has a flange, b, which 55 
is countersunk in the frame. The thimble l' 
is shaped to receive the mouth-piece C and 
constitutes the socket in Which the mouth 
piece fits, and by which it is concealed from 
view and protected from injury. The socket 
piece b' is provided with screw-threads b on 
its sleeve portion l', by which it may be se 
cured in the frame A'. These screw-threads 
also serve to firmly unite the stationary tube 
A Suitable 
B to the sleeve of the thimble. 
cement, however, should be applied before the 
sleeve b is inserted in the rubber-hose tube B. 
The mouth-piece C is secured to a sliding or 
telescoping section or part, D, of the speaking 
tube, which is preferably made of flexible hose, 
stiff enough, however, to be readily pushed 
back into the tube B after it has been drawn 
out. This tube D is of somewhat smaller di 
ameter than the tube B, and is provided with 
a shoulder or button enlargement, d, at its in 
ner end, so that the friction thereof on the 
tube B will serve to retain the sliding tube D 
in its retracted position. 
The mouth-piece C is of a faring conical or 
bell shape, and is furnished with a short 
nearly-cylindrical rim or shoulder, c, having 
an inturned flange or fold, c', thus forming a 
smooth rounded edge for the mouth-piece, and 
also a seat or head for the flange f of the 
hinged cover F to fit or clasp over, and thus 
hold the hinged cover securely closed. The 
rim or shoulder c is in fact made somewhat 
flaring, as indicated clearly in Fig. 3, the 
outer edge of the shoulder being rounded by 
the fold c, so that this rounded flaring shoul 
der has a kind of wedging action on the flange 
Ef of the hinged cover, and springs the same 
outward as the cover is being closed. The 
cover F is furnished with a hinge, f', con 
nected by a bracket or strap, f", to the mouth- 95 
piece C. The hinged cover F is furnished 
with a double-disk perforated whistle. One 
disk of the whistle consists of the cover-disk 
F itself, which is furnished with a raised cen 
ter, f', having a whistle hole or perforation, 
f', therein. The inner disk, f, of the whistle 
is soldered upon the inside of the cover-disk 
85 
8 
90 
OO 
 
386,054 
O 
F, and is furnished with a whistle hole or per 
foration, f, opposite the hole f" in the disk 
F, but of smaller diameter. 
The inner or small end of the mouth-piece 
C is furnished with a short metallic tube or 
sleeve, C, soldered thereto, which is adapted 
to fit within the rubber hose or tube D, and 
also with an outer thimble or sleeve, C, of a 
larger diameter, which is adapted to fit over 
the hose-tube D. The two sleeves C and C 
thus form between them an annular chamber 
the thickness of the hose D, for the purpose of 
receiving and securing the mouth-piece to the 
hose D. By simply pushing or inserting the 
end of the hose into this annular chamber, a 
little cement of any suitable kind being first 
applied, the mouth-piece may be very se 
curely, as well as easily, attached to the hose. 
The stationary tube B is provided with a 
metallic elbow, E, at its inner end, to which a 
stationary tube, G, is attached, which extends 
down from the top of the carriage at the side 
thereof to the carriage-seat A. The section 
G is preferably made of rubber hose, and may 
be attached to the elbow E in any suitable 
manner. It is provided at its lower end with 
a mouth-piece, C, which is or may be in all re 
spects similar to the mouth-piece C before de 
scribed, and is provided with a similar hinged 
cover and whistle. The tube G is further fur 
nished near its lower end with a collapsible 
rubber bulb, 9, by which the whistle of the 
driver's mouth-piece may be operated when 
desired. The tube G extends down the side 
of the carriage, preferably in about the posi 
tion indicated in the drawings, and is held in 
place by a wire spring-clamp, H, secured to 
the frame of the carriage by a hinge, h. The 
middle portion, h", of the clamp is the pivot of 
the hinge. The clamp has two vertical arms, 
l'h', extending down from the pivot h", and 
two horizontal arms, hit", inclined toward each 
other. The arms h listand in a horizontal 
plane, or about at right angles to the vertical 
arms h h". The horizontal arms l'h' are con 
nected to the vertical arms h" h by spring 
coils h" h", which are adapted to permit the 
clamp-arms h h' to spring or open outward 
from each other in a horizontal plane, and also 
to spring up or down in a vertical plane. By 
reason of this double-spring movement of the 
clamp-arms hill the mouth-piece C" may be 
removed or disengaged from its holding-clamp 
readily, whether it be pulled directly outward 
or up or down. The ends of the clamp-arms 
h h' are furnished with curved ends or coils 
hi F. 
This application is filed as a division of my 
application Serial No. 230,935, filed March 
15, 1887, and I do not herein claim the subject 
matter claimed in said application Serial No. 
230,935. 
I claim 
1. The combination of a carriage-body, A, 
stationary tube B, having a thimble, b, at its 
outer end, said tube B being secured at the 
top of the carriage under the upholstery and 
provided with an elbow, E, at its inner end, 
sliding tube D, provided with a mouth-piece, 
C, at its outer end, said carriage-body being 
provided with a socket to receive said mouth 
piece, dependent tube C, secured to said el 
bow and provided with a mouth-piece, C, 
said mouth - piece being furnished with a 
hinged cap, F, provided with a double - disk 
whistle, one disk of said whistle being integral 
with said hinged cap, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination of carriage - body A, 
stationary tube B, having thimble b at its 
outer end, said tube B being secured at the 
top of the carriage under the upholstery and 
provided with an elbow, E, at its inner end, 
sliding tube D, provided with a mouth-piece, 
C, at its outer end, said, carriage-body being 
provided with a socket to receive said mouth 
piece, dependent tube G, secured to said el 
bow and provided with a mouth - piece, C, 
said mouth - piece being furnished with a 
hinged cap, F, provided with a double-disk 
whistle, and one disk of said whistle bein 
integral with said hinged cap-disk, said tube 
G being furnished with flexible rubber bulb 
g, substantially as specified. 
3. In a carriage speaking tube, the combi 
nation, with a speaking-tube, of its mouth 
piece or bell, a hinged perforated cap-disk 
having a flange fitting over the rim of said 
mouth-piece, and a second perforated disk in 
side Said cap disk and forming with said cap 
disk a whistle, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination, with a carriage and car 
riage speaking-tube, of a wire spring mouth 
piece-holder clamp, H, having a pivot portion, 
h', hinged to the carriage-frame, and arms h" 
land l'h' standing in planes about at right 
angles to each other and connected by spring 
coils h" h", substantially as specified. 
5. The combination, with a speaking tube, 
of a wire spring-clamp, H, having hinge h h", 
arms h h", clamp-arms l'h', connected at an 
angle to said arms h" h" by spring coils h" h", 
said clamp-arms l'h' having coiled or curved 
ends h h", substantially as specified. 
6. In a carriage speaking-tube, the combi. 
nation, with a speaking - tube, of its mouth 
piece or bell C, furnished with an inner sleeve, 
C, and an outer sleeve, C, said sleeves C. C. 
forming an annular chamber between them to 
fit, and receive the end of the speaking-tube, 
substantially as specified. 
7. In a carriage speaking-tube, the combi 
nation, With a speaking-tube, its mouth-piece 
or bell C, having a shoulder or rim, c, fur 
nished with an inturned flange or rim, c, and 
a hinged cover, F, having a flange, f, adapted 
to fit over said rim c, and provided with a 
central whistle-perforation, and a second per 
forated disk inside said cap disk and forming 
with said cap-disk a whistle, substantially as 
specified. 
- 
GEO. A. BEACH. 
Witnesses: 
H. M. MUNDAY, 
JOHN W. MUNDAY. 
3o 
45 
55 
65 
75 
g 90 
95 
CO 
IO5 
O 
II.5 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386154.txt	(No Model.) 
M. MYR & C. CHRIST OFFERSON. 
BRIDGE GATE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet i, 
No. 386,154, 
Patented July 17, l888. 
 
TWWEWTOR, 
(No Model.) 
M. MYRE & C. CHRIST OFFERSON. 
BRIDGE GATE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 386,154, 
Patented July 17, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
E. AA NS 
 
 
IWWEWTOR, 
M.M/re-CC2restofferson 
- 
Attorneis. 
aiz, Swittersk 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTHINEUS MYRE AND CHRISTIAN CHRISTOFFERSON, OF WINONA, 
MINNESOTA. 
BRIDGE GATE. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 386,154, dated July 17, 1888. 
Application filed April 13, 1888. Serial No. 270,594. (No model.) 
To att, Luhon it may concern: 
Beit known that we, MARTHINEUs MYR3 
and CHRISTIAN CHRISTOFFERSON, citizens of 
the United States, residing at Winona, in the 
5 County of Winona and State of Minnesota, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
linents in Bridge-Gates; and we do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
Io skilled in the art to which it appertains to make 
and use the same. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in devices for closing the draw at bridges; and 
it has for its object to provide attachments for 
I5 a pivoted bridge which, in connection with 
Suitable ways, will automatically engage and 
disengage Streetgates at the entrance to a 
bridge when the latter has been swung upon a 
pivot fulcrum, so as to close the said entrance 
2O from the roadway when the bridge has been 
turned for the passage of a boat, and which, 
When SW ung into proper position for travel, 
Will move the gates safely out of the way. 
These objects we accomplish by the means 
25 shown and illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a bridge in 
an Operative position, showing the gates in en 
gagement there with and ready to close the 
3o draw or roadway when the bridge has been 
SWung Open to navigation. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view showing the bridge open to navigation 
and the gates closing the street entering the 
bridge. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of one of the 
35 flexible gates, and Fig. 4 is a plan view of the 
Referring by letter to the said drawings, A 
indicates a bridge, which may be that of any 
ordinary or approved construction, such as 
4o the pivotal bridges at present in use, having 
a suitable guard-rail along its longitudinal 
edges; and B indicates the street. entrances to 
Opposite ends of the bridge, which may be also 
guarded by a suitable guard, as more fully 
At a Suitable point in the masonry at the en 
trance to the bridge we provide a track or way 
for the travel of the gate. In the present illus 
tration we have shown this way as being com 
SO posed of double tracks (t, and between the 
tracks are set curved guides b, the tracks being 
45 shown in Fig. 1. 
gate. 
m 
 
also formed with a similar curvature and ar 
ranged in a plane relatively at right angles to 
the street leading to the bridge, there being 
one at each end of the bridge and beneath the 
same. It should be here observed, however, 
that we do not wish to confine ourselves to any 
particular manner of forming the tracks or 
guides, as it is only necessary that a suitable 
means should be provided for the proper 
movement of the gates. 
C indicates one of the gates, there being two 
employed. These gates are designed to be of 
a flexible character, so that they may yield to 
the curvatures in the guide and the swing of 
the bridge. These gates we have shown as be 
ing composed of hinged sections mounted upon 
rollers D, and having small horizontal fric 
tion-rollers E journaled in their lower ends, 
which are designed to engage the curve-guides 
b and ease the movement of the gates. At one 
end and at a suitable point of each gate We ar 
range a hook, F, for a purpose which will be 
presently explained, and these hooks are ar. 
ranged on opposite ends with relation to each 
Other. 
The bridge is provided at opposite sides and 
near opposite ends with engaging-lugs G, which 
are arranged at a sufficient point laterally to 
enter the hooks F of the gates to move the 
Se. 
In operatin it will be seen that when the 
bridge is in a position for traffic the lugs G are 
in engagement with the hooks F of the gates, 
and one gate is held on each side of the bridge 
in the guideways. Therefore when the bridge 
is swung on its pivot, so as to open the draw, 
the gates are moved in opposite directions un 
til they are brought so as to close the entrance 
from the street to the bridge, as more fully 
shown in Fig. 2, when a disengagement of the 
gates and bridge is effected by the latter mov - 
ing in the curvilinear course indicated. The 
bridge being now swung back to close it to 
navigation, its lugs G will engage the hooks of 95 
the gates and move them away from the road 
way in their guide-tracks. 
It is obvious that the gate may be operated 
by any Suitable means, So as to serve in con 
nection with the gates which we have illus 
trated. 
It will be observed by reference to Fig. 2 of 
8 5 
90 
65 
O 
2 
386,154 
the drawings that we employ a double track lhaving hooks F and mounted on rollers, and 
at each entrance of the bridge, and arrange be 
having rollers at their lower sides, the tracks 
tween said tracks vertical guide-flanges which 
in the masonry, and the guide-flanges between 
have a longitudinal curvature corresponding 
the same, substantially as specified. 
to those of the tracks. It will furthermore be 
2. The flexible gates mounted on rollers and 
observed that one end of each track, as well as 
having friction-rollers at their lower sides, in 
the guide-flanges, terminates in a straight por 
combination with the tracks and the guide 
flanges between the same, substantially as 
tion to receive the gates when the bridge has 
specified. 
been closed and ready for travel. 
The guide-flanges embrace the lower sides of 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
the flexible gates, which latter have friction. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
rollers, as shown, to ease their movements. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim is 
1. The combination, with a pivoted bridge 
having lugs, as described, of the flexible gates 
MARTHENEUS MY RE. 
CHRISTIAN CHRISTOFFERSON. 
W. A. FINKELNBURG, 
JOHN WON ROHR. 
25 
Witnesses: 
5 
C) 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386254.txt	(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1 
W. MASON. 
MACHINE FOR HEADING CARTRIDGE SHELLS, 
No. 386,254, 
Patented July 17, 1888. 
 
w 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
No. 386,254, 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
W. MASON, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, it 
MACHINE FOR HEADING CARTRIDGE SHELLS. 
Patented July 17, 1888. 
%_____% 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
W. MASON, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
MACHINE FOR HEADING CARTRIDGE SHELLS, 
No. 386,254, 
Patented July 17, 1888. 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM MASON, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE WIN 
CHESTER REPEATING ARMS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACH NE FOR HEADING CARTRIDGES HES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 386,254, dated July 17, 1888. 
Application filed May 28, 1888, Serial No. 275,275. 
(No model.) 
To (c// tufton, it inctly conce77: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM MASON, of New 
Haven, in the county of New Haven and State 
of Connecticut, have invented new Improve 
5 ments in Machines for Heading Cartridge 
Shells; and I do hereby declare the following, 
When taken in connection with accompanying 
drawings, and the letters of reference marked 
thereon, to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
Io tion of the sanie, and which said drawings 
Constitute part of this specification, and rep 
resent, in 
Figure 1, a side view, and Fig. 2 a top view, 
of the machine complete, illustrating the parts 
I5 as in the position when the slides have both 
advanced as in just completing the heading 
operation; Fig. 3, a longitudinal section show 
ing the parts in the same position as Figs. 1 
and 2; Fig. 4, the same section showing the 
2O parts in the position when the punch-carrying 
slides have retreated to their extreme posi 
tion; Fig. 5, a rear end view; Fig. 6, a side 
view; and Fig. 7, an end view illustrating a 
modification in the guide between the con 
25 necting-rod from the crank on the main shaft 
and the link through which the follower-punch 
slide is operated, on a reduced scale. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
machines for performing the work upon car 
3O tridge-shells commonly called heading'- 
that is to say, a machine which, receiving the 
drawn blank for the cartridge-shell, upsets 
the closed end, So as to form an annular pro 
jecting flange around the closed end or head 
35 of the shell, and, if required, also forms the 
cap-seat for the primer. The upsetting of the 
closed end of the shell to for in the head re 
quires a great amount of power and brings 
upon the machine at the instant of heading 
a very great strain. The die in which the 
heading operation is performed is usually sta 
tionary and has an opening through it corre 
sponding to the external diameter of the fin 
ished shell. The plinch or follower enters the 
open end of the shell and serves as a support 
upon the inside of the shell against upsetting, 
and at the same time holds the shell with its 
closed end projecting from the die to give the 
requisite quantity of metal for the upsetting 
5O operation. The upsetting - punch moves in 
the opposite direction and in axial line with 
45 
the follower or holding - punch, and comes 
against the closed end of the shell while it is 
held in the die, as before described. Under 
this operation it is necessary that the follower 55 
or holding-punch shall remain stationary dur 
ing the instant the heading punch is in opera 
tion. 
My invention relates particularly to the 
mechanism for operating and holding the fol- 6a 
lower or punch which works within the die; 
and it consists in the mechanism between the 
slide carrying the said follower-punch and the 
driving-shaft at the other end of the machine, 
as more fully hereinafter described, and where- 65 
by the rotative movement of the driving-shaft 
for the heading-punch is converted into an 
intermittent reciprocating movement for the 
follower-slide at the opposite end of the ma 
chine, as more fully hereinafter described. 
A represents the bed upon which the oper 
ative mechanism is arranged. 
B represents the principal or driving shaft, 
which is supported in suitable bearings or pil 
low-blocks, C C, so as to receive a constant 75 
revolution through a pulley, D, on said shaft, 
or otherwise. 
E represents the die-holder, which is sup 
ported on the bed and carries the die F, as 
seen in Fig. 3. 
G is a slide arranged in suitable guides on 
the bed, and which carries the heading-punch 
H in the usual manner for this class of ina 
chines. To the slide G a reciprocating move 
ment is imparted by means of a crank, I, on 85 
the shaft B through a pitman, J, in the usual 
manner for this class of cartridge-headling ma 
chines. 
At the opposite end of the machine a shaft, 
K, is arranged in bearings I L, the axis of 
said shaft being parallel with the axis of the 
driving-shaft B. Between the shaft K and the 
stationary die-holder Easlide, M, is arranged, 
to which longitudinal back and forward move 
ment is imparted by means of a crank, N, on 
the shaft K through a connecting-rod, O, as 
from the position in Fig. 4 to that in Fig. 3 
To the shaft IX an oscillating movement is 
imparted, as from the position in Fig. 3 to that IOO 
in Fig. 4, to produce the longitudinal back and 
forward movement of the slide M which I have 
and return. 
90 
SO 
95 
- 
- - 
2 
386,254 
O 
described. The slide M carries a follower 
punch, P, which is adapted to work through 
the die in the die-holder E. The follower 
punch terminates at its end in a shape corre 
Sponding to the interior of the completed 
cartridge-shell, also usual in this class of ma 
chines, and the face of the punch H corre. 
sponds to the shape of the exterior or face of 
the head. 
Into the die F is an opening, R, through 
which the drawn blanks may beintroduced into 
the die with their closed end toward the head 
ing-die H. One such blank being dropped into 
the die through the opening R, the follower. 
punch enters that blank and forces it through 
the die, so that its end projects beyond the 
face of the die to an extent sufficient for the 
heading operation. 
In that position the fol 
lower or holding-punch P then remains sta 
tionary until the heading-punch advances and 
upsets the closed end of the shell upon the fol 
lower and upon the face of the die as an anvil, 
and so as to produce the flange and give to 
the head the required shape. This done, the 
heading-punch retreats and the follower or 
holding-punch also retreats, a second blank is 
introduced to the die, and the follower-punch, 
advancing, forces the second blank against the 
open end of the first headed shell and drives 
that headed shell from the die, bringing the 
second blank into place of the first to be headed 
in its turn, and so continues its work. 
To impart to the follower-punch the recip 
rocating movement which I have described 
and permit it to rest while the heading oper. 
ation is performed, I arrange a slide, S, in suit 
able longitudinal guides on the bed of the ma 
chine and so that the path of movement of the 
Said slide S is at right angles to the axis of the 
shaft K. 
On the driving-shaft B a crank, T, is ar 
ranged, which revolves with the shaft, and 
from the crank-pin U of this crank T a con 
necting-rod, V, extends to a stud, W, on the 
said slide S, the pitman working on the said. 
stud W as a pivot. The crank T, therefore, in 
its revolution will impart a full reciprocating 
movement to the slide Sat each revolution of 
the said crank T. 
On the shaft K a crank-arm, a, is made fast, 
provided with a crank-pin, b, and on the slide 
S is a stud, d, corresponding to the crank-pin 
b. The said crank-pin b and stud d are con 
nected by a link, e. The position of the crank 
pin b and the stud d are such that at the ex 
treme advance movement of the slide M the 
said crank-pin b stands substantially over the 
stud d and so that at that time the link estands 
in a vertical position at right angles to the 
path of movement of the said slide S, as indi. 
cated in Fig. 1, the line of the cranka, at that 
time being in a longitudinal plane. The crank 
N of the shaft K, through which movement is 
imparted to the slide M, is in line with the said 
crank at, as seen in Fig. 3, so that any move 
ment imparted to the crank a will be commu 
nicated to the crank N through the shaft K. 
In Fig. 4 the position of the parts is repre 
sented as preparatory to receiving a blank 
that is, in the extreme inactive or normal po 
sition. The crankT has then drawn the slide 
Stoward the driving shaft B to its extreme 
position. At this time the link estands hori 
zontal and has brought the crank a to a ver 
tical position, as represented in said Fig. 4. 
As the revolution of the driving-shaft com 
mences or continues from this point, as indi 
cated by the arrow, the operation of the crank 
T is to force the slide S toward its other ex 
treme, as seen in Fig. 3. This movement of 
the slide S is communicated to the crank a 
through the linke; but as the crank a must 
revolve about its axis, it follows that the stud 
b, carrying the one end of the linke, rises from 
the longitudinal path of the slide, and will so 
continue to rise until the link is brought into 
the vertical position indicated in Fig. 3 and 
the crank a has come to a horizontal position. 
During this, operation the crank N has also 
been turned accordingly and has forced the 
slide M into its advanced position. When 
this advance movement of the slide is reached, 
the crank T is passing its dead-center, and the 
slide S is therefore substantially stationary. 
The extreme dead-point of the crank T is 
reached slightly before the extreme dead-point 
of the crank I is reached, so that as the 
crank T. passes its dead-center it brings the 
crank I to its dead-center and the heading 
punch H to its most advanced position. The 
movement of the slide as its crank passes the 
dead-center is very slight. At the same time 
the slide is passing this dead-center the link 
e and the crank a are both upon their dead 
centers. Consequently there must be a very 
considerable movement of the slide S before 
any substantial movement will be produced 
upon the crank a. The slide M, with its hold 
ing-punch P, is brought to its dead-center, as 
I have described, before the heading-punch 
comes to its dead-center, and because of the 
link-connection e, which I have described, the 
holding-punch slide remains substantially sta. 
tionary while the heading-punch is coming to 
its dead center. Therefore the holding-punch 
remains firm and substantially stationary dur 
ing the actual heading operation; but the re 
treating movement of the slide M, as well as 
its advance, is more rapid than that of the 
slide G, which carries the heading-punch, as 
when the slide M reaches its extreme retreat 
ing movement its crank N., as well as the crank 
a, are on the quarter position or most rapidly 
moving part of their stroke, so that the slight 
movement of the slide S, as its crank passes 
the dead - center, makes the corresponding 
movement of the slide M proportionately more 
rapid. 
As the slide M rests at the dead-centers, it 
is in the strongest possible position of the ma 
chine and able to resist the heading operation. 
From the fact that the movement of the slide 
M is produced by means of cranks it follows 
that the advance of the slide M, carrying the 
- 
- 
v. 
25 
35 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OC 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
 
386,254 
3. 
O 
3O 
holding-punch, is extremely easy. As its stop 
ping and starting are produced on the dead 
centers, no concussion or jar is produced in 
the heading operation, such as necessarily fol 
lows the operation of cams to produce the 
in Ovement of the parts in the usual construc 
tion. Consequently the strain upon the ma 
Chine, due to the shock in the usual construc 
tion, is avoided. 
I have represented the device for connect. 
ing the link of the crank a with the connecting 
rod from the crank of the main shaft as a lon. 
gitudinal slide; but substantially the same re 
Sult nay be produced by making this inter 
mediate device in the form of a swinging link, 
as represented in Figs. 6 and 7, in which S 
represents the intermediate part which corre 
Sponds to the slide S of the first illustration. 
This link is hung upon a pivot above the shaft 
K, and its lower end is jointed to the connect 
ing-rod V and to the link e, as seen in Figs. 6 
and 7. The reciprocating movement of the 
pivot which makes the connection between the 
link e and the connecting-rod V in this case 
is in a slightly-curved path, but is still sub 
stantially the reciprocating movement, so far 
as the pivot upon which the link e works is 
concerned. While therefore preferring the 
longitudinally-guided slide S as the pivot-con 
hection between the linke and the connecting. 
rod V, I do not wish to be understood as lim. 
iting my invention to such a slide, it only be 
ing essential that there shall be a guide between 
the pivot of the linke and its connection with 
the connecting-rod V, so as to impart to the 
Said connecting - point a substantially longi 
tudinal reciprocating novement. 
I illustrate the usual knock-off' to facili 
tate the discharge of the headed shells and 
omit the cartridge feed; but these parts con 
stitute no material part of my invention, it 
being Substantially the same as in the usual 
construction of cartridge-heading machines. 
1. In a machine for heading cartridge-shells, 
which consists of a stationary die, a slide on 
claim 
55 
75 
one side of the heading-die carrying a follower 
punch, a slide on the opposite side carrying a 
heading-punch, and a driving-shaft, with a con 
nection therefrom to said heading punch slide 
to impart a reciprocating movement to Said 
heading-punch slide, the combination there 
with of a shaft, K, parallel with said driving 
shaft, having a crank, N, with a connecting 
rod therefrom to the said holding-punch slide, 
a second crank, ct, on said shaft IS, but in the 
opposite direction to the crank N., a crank, T, 
on the driving - shaft, a connecting - rod, V, 
hung by one end to said crank T on the driv - 
ing-shaft, a link, e, hung by one end to Said 
crank at, and a movable guide between the 
other end of said linke and the other end of 
said connecting rod V, and to which the cor 
responding ends of the said linke and the con 
necting-rod V are hung, Substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. In a cartridge-shell-heading machine, con 
sisting of a stationary die, a reciprocating slide 
carrying a heading-punch upon one side of 
said die, a reciprocating slide carrying the 
follower or holding punch upon the Opposite 
side of the said die, and a driving-shaft with 
connection therefrom to the said heading 
punch slide to impart reciprocating movement 
to said heading punch slide, combined with a 
crank-shaft parallel with the driving-shaft, 
provided with a crank, N, and a connection 
therefrom to the follower-punch slide, the Said 
shaft K also provided with a second crank, (t, 
but in the opposite direction to the crank N., 
a slide, S, arranged in longitudinal bearings 
parallel with the path of movement of the Sail 
punch carrying slides, the crank T on the 
driving-shaft, a connecting-rod, V, from Said 
crank T to said slide S, and a link, e, hung by 
one end to said crank at and by the other end to 
said slide S, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
WILL AMI MASON. 
Witnesses: 
DANIEI, H. WEADER, 
S. B. WARREN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386354.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 386,354, 
D. H. SHATTUCK, 
ADJUSTABLE SIZER FOR SHAFTING, 
H 
 
 
 
 
2 
2 
6 
Z2 
 
 
 
Af 
 
 
W it. EC 
22, 
E. 
52. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID H. SHATTUCK, OF WESTFORD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
A DJ USA BLE. S. Z E R F OR SHAFTN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Paient No. 386,354, dated July 17, 1888. 
Application filed February 29, 1888. Serial No. 265,776. (No modet.) 
5 
- O 
To all tufton, it inctly CO7 cer"Fl: 
Be if, known that I, DAVID H. SHATTUCIX, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Gran 
iteville, in the town of Westford, in the county 
of Middlesex and Commonwealth of Massa 
chusetts, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Adjustable Sizers for 
Shafting, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to adjustable sizers for 
shafting, and has for its principal object to 
furnish means of making the finishing or siz 
ing cut at the same time that the roughing cut 
is made in turning sha?ting or similar work. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure l is 
a vertical transverse Section of a lathe-bed or 
shears, a carriage-rack secured to said bed un 
der the front side thereof, and a shaft being 
turned and finished therein, and an elevation 
of the carriage and tool-post, the lathe tool, 
the follower - rest, and my adjustable sizer, 
showing the left sides of these parts or sides 
toward the head-stock of the lathe; Fig. 2, a 
left side elevation of my improved sizer and a 
cylinder-gage; Fig. 3, a section on the line aca; 
in Fig. 2 of Said sizer and gage, Fig. 4 an en 
larged front elevation of one of the cutters of 
the sizer. 
The bed or shears A, carriage B, carriage 
rack a, secured to the bed or the under side of 
the front part of the same and engaged by the 
pinion b; the tool-post b', secured on said car 
riage; the lathe-tool b, secured in said tool 
post, and the follower-rest b, Secured on said 
carriage and traveling there with, are or may be 
of any usual construction and Operation Suit 
able for turning shafting or similar cylindri 
cal work. Usually shafting is twice turned, 
a heavy or thick chip being first turned off, 
and subsequently a thinner finishing-chip, two 
operations being thus required, a steady-rest 
or follower-rest being frequently used to sur 
round the shaft and to Support the Same and 
to prevent the same from being deflected by 
the pressure of the cut. 
The sizer herein described consists of a frame 
or head, C, of the shape shown, the saline be 
ing substantially a ring provided with radial 
bosses c, about five in number, more or less. 
These bosses are each drilled through radially 
at c' into the central opening, c'. Within the 
radial holes c' are placed the radial cutters D, 
each cutter being formed from a round bar of 
steel of a diameter to fill Said holes and milled 
to a half-round bar for nearly its entire length 55 
at d, the upper end of the cutter for about a 
sixteenth of an inch being left round, as shown 
at d, to leave a better bearing-surface for the 
adjusting - screw E, which thrusts radially 
against the outer end of said cutter and turns 6c 
in the hole c, the Outer portion, c', of which 
hole is tapped or correspondingly threaded, 
as shown in Fig. 3. The head C is provided 
between the threaded and unthreaded portions 
of each hole c with a concentric arc-shaped 65 
slot, c', which improves the appearance of the 
head, and also serves to relieve the taps which 
thread said holes c'. The cutters are adjusted 
inwardly by turning the Screws E so as to 
bring all the cutting-edges d'of said cutters to 7o 
the circle which equals the required finished 
circumference of the shafting to be turned, and 
when so adjusted are rigidly secured in place 
by set-screws F, one of which turns in a thread 
ed hole in each boss and thrusts against the 75 
flat side of One of the Cutters. The cutters are 
ground so that the ends of their cutting-edges 
are at right angles to the flat rear face of the 
head C, except that the sides of said cutting 
edges nearest the head-stock are beveled off, 8o 
as shown at cl in Fig. 4, to allow the end of 
the shaft to enter the sizer. 
In use the sizer is placed in front of the fol 
lower-rest, and is fed along by the movement 
of said rest, and is prevented from revolving 85 
by one of said bosses, c, or one of said adjust 
ing-screws, E, striking against the carriage, no 
means being necessary to center the sizer with 
the axis of the shafting, because it centers itself. 
It is not therefore necessary that the cutters go 
should all project equally inward toward the 
center of the head, but only necessary that the 
cutting-edges of the cutters should be in the 
circumference of a circle equal to the circum 
ference of the finished shafting. 
The cutters may be quickly and accurately 
adjusted to position by setting them againstan 
accurately-made cylindrical gage, G, of hard 
ened steel-such as is shown in Figs. 2 and 3 
of the desired diameter of the finished shafting. roo 
I claim as my invention 
1. The sizer herein described, consisting of 
a head having all opening to admit a piece of 
shafting, and Cutter's Secured in said head at 
95 
25 
35 
SO 
equal angular distances from each other and substantially as described, of holding said cut 
projecting into said opening and adapted to ters, and adjusting-screws turning in the 
be held from turning, and to be carried by the threaded portions of said holes and thrusting 15 
follower-rest, or by an arm projecting verti- against the outer ends of said cutters, as and 
cally from the lathe-carriage and to centeritself for the purpose specified. 
automatically with said shafting, as and for 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
name, this 16th day of February, A. D. 1888, 
the purpose specified. 
with radial holes having screw-threaded outer 
DAVID H. SHATTUCK. 
portions, and with a central opening connect- 
ing with said holes, cutters arranged in said 
holes and extending into said opening, means, 
2. The combination of the head provided in the presence of two attesting witnesses. 
ALBERT M. MooRE, 
KIRKLEY HYDE. 
5 
IO 
386,354 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386454.txt	(No Model. ) 
A. S. CLARK, 
WIND ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet l. 
- 
No. 386,454, 
Patented July 24, 1888. 
 
(No Model.) 
A. S. CLARK, 
WIND ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 386,454, 
Patented July 24, l888. 
Zzz 2. 
C 
c/ 
C 
V'. 
Z 
7. 
C 
e- 
f 
f 
ey 
A. 
41 
z \r 
(Z) 
- G 
 
6 
A\| -2. 
A 
/ N 
| 
As 
r 
Al 
l, 
4/ 
O 
NVENTOR, 
44.425 
4-4. "% 
BY 
peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
H 
(No Model.) 
- 
A. S. CLARK, 
WIND ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 386,454, 
Patented July 24, 1888. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
Y 
&E ca 
UAH7 
t HIETFILTTEIUEFUJIJHUTU 
WyY, NV 
 
2/42V. 
W 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
4.42% 
NVENTOR 
PW24.47. 
AITORNEY, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR S. CLARR, OF SALINE, MICFIIGAN. 
WIND ENGINE, 
3?ECIZICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 386,454, dated July 24, 1888. 
Application filed Ju;e 7, 1887. Serial No. 240,545. (No model.) 
3o all tufton, it i?ly conce77 : 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR S. CLARK, of 
Saline, in the county of Washtenaw and State 
of Michigan, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Wind - Engines; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which for in a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to new and useful im 
provements in wind engines; and the inven 
tion consists in the improved construction, ar 
rangement, and combination of different parts, 
all as hereinafter more fully described, and 
shown in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is an elevation showing the parts 
in the position when the wheel is turned out 
of the wind. Fig. 2 is a similar elevation with 
the wheel full in the wind. Fig. 3 is a plan 
showing the wheel only partly in the wind. 
Fig. 4 is a plan of the lower turn-table. IFig. 
5 is a vertical central section. 
A is the usual derrick, on which the mill is 
supported upon a bed-plate, B, at the desired 
altitude. Upon this bed-plate are supported 
two revolving turn-tables, CD, one on top of 
the other, the lower turn-table, C, supporting 
the main vane E and the upper one the wind 
wheel F. The upper turn-table rests upon the 
lower one by means of an anti-friction joint, 
while the lower turn table rests upon the bed 
plate by means of an ordinary joint, all for the 
purpose of making the upper turn-table rotate 
relatively with less frictional resistance than 
the lower turn-table. A suitable frame, pref. 
erably formed of two rods or tubes, I, which 
are secured upon the lower turn-table, support 
upon one side of the said turn-table the main 
vane E and upon the opposite side a governor 
weight, G, which is adjustably secured to the 
lower arm of the lever H. The upper turn 
table supports the wind-wheel F directly in 
the center of the mill on a horizontal shaft, a, 
which is clamped fast in the boxes C. The 
latter are supported by uprights c, which are 
secured in the radial arms d of the bed-plate e 
of the upper turn-table. 
The wind-wheel F is what is called a solid 
wheel, and to one side of it is secured the ec 
centric J, which operates the eccentric-rod J', 
to the lower end of which the pump-rod K is 
attached, which passes through a suitable 
guide, 0, in the center of the inil and connects 
with the eccentric-rod by means of an offset, f. 
To the upper turn table is longitudinally 
adjustably secured, by means of suitable clips, 
h, or otherwise, a side vane, L, which lies in 
front of the wind-Wheel to one side of its cen 
ter and parallel thereto, or nearly SO. 
The lever H of the governor-weight is con 
nected with the upper turn-table by means of 
the connecting rod M in such manner that the 
rotary motion of the upper turn-table will actu 
ate the governor - weight, as hereinafter more 
fully described. 
In the center of the bed plate of the upper 
turn-table is secured the downwardly project 
ing tube N, which engages at its lower end 
into a cross-girt or Spider, O, which forms a 
side bearing to steady the mill. The lower 
turn-table also has Secured in its center a tube, 
P, which concentrically surrounds the tube N, 
but does not extend down as far below as the 
iner tube. To the lower end of this tube is 
secured a stud or anti-friction roller, i, and a 
corresponding stud or anti-friction roller, j, is 
secured upon the inner tube, N, preferably by 
means of a collar, le. 
R is a cam-sleeve slidingly secured upon the 
inner tube, N, below the tube P, and this cam 
sleeve is engaged by a li?ter, S, secured upon 
the li?ting-rod T, which extends vertically 
down to near the foot of the derrick, and is 
operated by a suitable hand-lever, T. By 
means of the lifter and its connection the slid 
ing cam-sleeve R may be pushed up, and if 
the lifter is lowered the cam-sleeve drops down 
by its own gravity until it rests on the collar 
n, which is removably secured upon the tube 
N. The operating-arm of the cam-sleeve is 
Wedge-shaped, as is shown, one face being spi 
rally inclined, forming about one-quarter of a 
turn and the other forming a vertical plane. 
In the normal position shown in Figs. 2 and 4 
the cam-sleeve is at its lower position and with 
the upper end of the cam engaged between the 
studs ii. The can n, and the rollers if are 
perfectly duplicated to form two sets of de 
vices for the purpose described, and these parts 
are placed relatively opposite each other. 
The parts being thus constructed and ar 
ranged as described, their operation is as fol 
lows: The lower turn-table, which carries the 
2 5 
SO 
55 
fo 
65 
75 
9O 
95 
IOO 
2 
386,454 
IO 
main vane, is free to rotate in any direction 
under the action of the wind on the main vane. 
The upper turn-table, which carries the wind 
wheel, is free to rotate with the lower turn-ta 
5 ble, and is also free to rotate relatively to said 
lower turn-table through the angle of about 
ninety degrees. This relative adjustment of 
the upper turn-table is brought about by the 
opposing actions of the side vane and the gov 
ernor-weight. The side vane being placed to 
one side of the center of the wheel will, under 
the action of the wind, turn the wheel more or 
less out of the wind, while the governor-weight 
opposes this action, and constantly tends to 
turn the wheel again into the wind. If the 
force of the wind increases beyond the safe 
point, the side vane turns the wheel com 
pletely out of the wind and holds it in a po 
sition parallel to, or nearly so, to the plane 
of the main vane, as shown in Fig.1. In this 
position the lever H has swung the governor 
weight from its normal position into a posi 
tion horizontal, or nearly so, to its pivotal 
point. This is as far as it will go, and the 
25 wind-wheel is held in this position until the 
action of gravity of the weight G comes again 
into play. 
In Fig. 2 the wind- wheel is shown as being 
turned fully into the wind, and in this position 
the governor-weight, is suspended below its 
pivot, or nearly so, while the relative position 
of the wheel and main vane is maintained 
against any accidental displacement in the 
wrong direction by the engagement of the cam 
in between the lugs or rollers ifi. 
If it is desired to throw the mill out of the 
wind, the lever T is raised as far as it will go, 
and locked in position by a suitable catch or 
engagement into a notch. This movement 
raises the cam-sleeve the full height of the cam 
n, which in forcing itself between the rollers i 
i rotates the upper turn-table with the wheel 
until it is fully out of the wind, the lower turn 
table remaining perfectly stationary on ac 
45 count of the less frictional resistance of the 
upper turn-table. 
35 
3O 
55 
2. In a wind-engine, the combination of a 6. 
It will be seen that in this construction the 
wind-engine is nicely balanced in position and 
is very perfectly controlled by the governor. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a wind-engine, the combination of a 
main wheel mounted on a revolving Support 
forming an upper turn table, a main vanese 
cured to a revolving support forming a lower 
turn-table, an inner tube attached to the upper 
turn-table and forming its pivot of rotation, 
an outer tube of shorter length than the inner 
tube attached to the lower turn - table and 
forming its pivot of rotation, a sliding cam 
sleeve on the inner tube, and two lugs or roll 
ers secured to the outer and inner tubes, re 
spectively, whereby the relative position of 
the tubes is changed by lifting the cam-sleeve, 
all substantially as described. 
lower and upper turn table forming independ 
ent supports for the main vane and wind 
wheel and having different frictional resistance 
when rotated, an outer and inner tube respect 
ively attached to said lower and upper turn 
tables and forming the pivots of rotation 
thereof, two lugs or rollers secured to the outer 
and inner tubes, respectively, a cam-sleeve 
slidingly secured upon the inner tube and pro 
vided with a wedge-shaped cann having one 
face straight and the other spirally inclined, 
and a lifting device for the cam-sleeve, all ar 
ranged to operate substantially as described. 
3. In a wind-engine, the combination, with 
the lower turn-table, C, carrying the main 
vane, of the upper turn-tabie, D, carrying the 
side vane and consisting of the bed-plate e, 
resting on anti-friction rollers or balls, arms 
d, formed integral with the upper turn-table, 
uprights c, boxes b, and shafta, clamped therein 
and supporting the wind- wheel, said uprights 
connecting said boxes and arms and support 
ing the shaft a, all substantially as described. 
ARTHUR S. CLARK. 
Witnesses: 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
ADOLPHBARTHEL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386554.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. & T. D. MORRIS. 
LATCH. 
No. 386,554, 
 
Patented July 24, l888. 
127. 4. to e 
o 
It D.III 
 
 
4. 
"I TWESS EN 
// % -75.</6--> 
7A$fz(tals 
r 
w 
1. . 
1,\"T() 15 
29% 7-1.-7(orres. 
-1.7%recess Z-767-es. 
% -7, 66 6.22, -6, 
Attorney S. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. MORRIS AND THOMAS D. 
MORRIS, OF SEWARD, NEBRASKA. 
LATCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 386,554, dated July 24, l888. 
Application filed January 26, 1888. Serial No. 261,955. 
(No model.) 
IO 
- 
25 
IS 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JoHN H. MoRRIS and 
THOMAS D. MORRIS, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Seward, in the county of 
Seward and State of Nebraska, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Latches, of which the following is a full and 
clear description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming part of this 
specification, in which- 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view look 
ing toward the back of the lock of the devices 
embodying our invention. Fig. 2 is a detail 
of the spring-actuated latching-lever and its 
housing. 
Our invention relates especially to that class 
of latches which are adapted for engagement 
with the doors of post-office boxes; and it con 
sists, essentially, in a spring-actuated lever 
having a hooked front-end adapted to engage 
a sliding bolt, said lever being provided with 
a rear extension or handle, whereby it may be 
operated from the inside to effect the releas 
ing of the door of the box when necessary. 
To enable other's skilled in the art to which 
our invention appertains to make and use the 
same we will now describe its construction and 
indicate the manner in which the same is car 
ried out. 
In the said drawings, A represents a sheet 
metal door, such as is suitable for post-office 
boxes. 
B indicates a spring actuated sliding bolt, 
and C C represent notched and slotted disks, 
with which suitable lugs on the sliding bolt 
are designed to engage, whereby said bolt may 
be retracted when the slots are brought into 
alignment therewith, as more fully described 
in a former patent granted to us August 16, 
1887, No. 36S, 543. 
The present improvement has reference 
merely to the application to a lock-such as is 
shown and described in our said former pat 
ent-of a spring-actuated lever having one end 
adapted to latch with a centrally-disposedlug, 
(t, on the sliding bolt B, while the rear end 
of said lever is projected or extended rear 
Wardly so that it may be operated by the 
postmaster, or occupant of the mail-room, to 
5o release the door in the event of the owner of 
the box or his recognized agent not recollect 
40 
55 
ing the combination of the lock existing at 
that time. In order that this most important 
feature may be successfully accomplished, We 
secure upon the door-casing or in the box ad 
jacent to the lock a plate or housing, D, from 
the inner surface of which projects a pin or 
bolt, b, around which a spring is passed, so 
that one of its free ends may bear against a 
shoulder or projection, e, on the housing While 
its opposite end bears against the top or up 
per portion of a lever, E, pivoted upon a pin, 
f, within the housing. 
The front end of the housing or plate D is 
cut away at 9 to receive the center lug, ct, on 
the sliding bolt, and the lever E has a hook 
shaped front end contiguous to said opening, 
whereby said lug may be engaged to Secure 
the door in a locked condition. 
The lever E is projected rearwardly to form 
a handle or extension, l, So that in the event 
of the owner of the box calling for his mail, 
and finding that he has temporarily forgotten 
the formula which then exists, he will request 
the postmaster or mail-clerk to open the door 
of the box, which may readily be done by the 
official depressing the rear extension or han 
dle. The depression of the rear end raises 
the hook-shaped front end from its engage 
ment with sliding bolt and permits the owner 
of the box to open the door and extract his 
mail. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The combination, with a door and a lock 
mechanism comprising a sliding bolt having 
a centrally - disposed lug, ct, of a housing or 
plate contiguous to said bolt, a pivoted latch 
ing-lever within said housing, and a spring 
acting upon the lever, said lever being pro 
vided with a hook-shaped front end adapted 
to engage the centrally disposed lug, and a 
rear extension or handle adapted to be oper 
ated from the rear to effect the releasing of 95 
the door, substantially as described. 
90 
75 
JOHN H. MORRIS. 
THOMAS D. MORERIS. 
Witnesses: 
R. P. ANDERSON, 
GEO. H. TERWILLIGER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386654.txt	(No Model.) 
W. A. PHILLIPS, 
APPARATUS FOR MOWING CARS AROUND CURWES OF CABLE RAILWAYS 
Patented July 24, 1888. 
No. 386,654, 
 
N. PEERS. Pioto-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. A. PHILLIPS, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
APPARATUS FOR MOWING CARS AROUND CURWES OF CABLE RALWAYS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 386,654, dated July 24, 1888. 
Application filed December 23, 1882. 
Serial No. 80,019. (No model.) 
O 
To all livion, it 7) (I) concern. : 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM A. PHILLIPs, 
of the city and county of San Francisco and 
State of California, have invented an Improved 
Method and Apparatus for Moving Cars 
Around Curves in the Endless-Cable System of 
Propelling Cars; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription thereof, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to the curved portion 
of the track in a cable railroad, and to the 
mechanism for supporting and carrying the 
main rope and for propelling the cars around 
the curve. 
It consists in the employment of a supple 
mental endless chain, rope, or cable, which sim 
ply extends the length of the curve and is sup 
ported and carried by an independent system 
or series of small pulleys, and which is connected 
with one of the pulleys of the main cable by a 
connecting and disconnecting clutch, so that 
it can be set in motion when desired by power 
derived from the main cable. One side of this 
5 supplemental cable is carried upon a system 
of small pulleys, close to and parallel with the 
slot in the tube, and the cable is provided with 
legs or projecting arms at intervals apart, 
which serve to engage with the shank of the 
gripper and push it around the curve after the 
gripper has been detached from the main cable. 
Automatic devices are provided, by which 
the gripper-shank is made to connect and dis 
connect the clutch, so as to set the supple 
mental cable in motion or throw it out of ac 
tion at the proper instant, all as hereinafter 
more fully described. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, in 
which Figure 1 is a plan view of the curve of 
the railroad, Fig. 2 is an elevation of the 
clutching device. 
Figs. 3 and 4 are detail 
views of the supplemental cable. Fig. 5 is a 
section through a ac, Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a detail 
view of the small pulleys carrying the Supple 
mental cable. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of 
the wedge and connections thereto. 
Let A A represent the two rails of a street 
or other railway. 
B is the main cable by which the cars are 
propelled along the straight track. 
At the curve I make a wide excavation ex 
tending the full length of the curve, and in 
this excavation I mount a number of large hori 
Zontal pulleys C C C at intervals apart, which 
may be placed entirely independent of their 
relation to the slot d in the tube; but usually 
I will mount them on the concave side of the 
slot with their peripheries close to the slot, as 
shown. The particular arrangement of these 
pulleys for supporting the main cable will de 
pend on circumstances, as their only purpose 
is to support the main rope and carry it 
around the curve with as little friction as 
possible. The main cable will then stretch 
in a direct line from one pulley to the other, 
and pass from the last horizontal pulley at 
each end of the curve directly through the 
straight tubes upon the usual vertical Sup 
porting-pulleys. On the concave side of the 
slot I Secure to the under side of the tube in 
side of the excavations a continuous metallic 
box, E, (shown more clearly at Fig. 6,) with 
its open side next to the slot. This box ex 
tends the full length of the curve. At short 
intervals apart I make grooves f in the upper 
and lower sides of the box, so that each groove 
in the upper side will be directly above a simi 
lar groove in the lower side. These grooves 
serve to receive the bearings of small horizon 
tal pulleys G. 
Both the upper and lower bearings of each 
small pulley G is a block, a, which is provided 
with a socket to receive the end of the pulley 
shaft, and these blocks slide into the grooves 
f in the box after they have been adjusted to 
the ends of the shaft. To provide for lubri 
cating these bearings or journals, I make 
each upper block with a projection or hub on 
its under side, in the center of which the socket 
for receiving the journal is made. Under 
neath and around this hub or projection I 
secure a cup, b, which is somewhat longer in 
diameter than the hub. The space between 
the rim of the cup and the side of the hub I 
fill with oil before adjusting the pulley in the 
grooves, thus providing a quantity of lubri 
cant that will feed itself to the journal with 
out requiring attention for a long time. The 
lower end of the shaft steps in the socket in 
the lower block, and a cup-shaped concavity, 
c, is made in the block around the shaft, which 
contains oil for lubricating the lower bearing. 
3O 
S 5 
75 
95 
OO 
386,654 
IO 
25 
35 
4.O. 
45 
55 
These pulleys, as above stated, are placed in the 
box at shortintervals apart, entirely around the 
concave side of the slot, thus forming a con 
tinuous line of small palleys, the outer pe 
ripheries of which are close to the slot. 
At each end of the excavation I mount a i 
medium-sized horizontal pulley, H, in the 
same plane with the line of small pulleys G, 
and these pulleys form the end pulleys around 
which my supplemental endless chain or cable 
I passes. 
The main cable B travels continuously, and 
Consequently its supporting - pulleys C are 
continuously rotating. I can therefore pro 
vide for driving this supplemental chain or 
cable I from either of the pulleys C. I pre 
fer to employ the pulley nearest to the middle 
of the curve as the driving-pulley. To do 
this I place a loose pulley, J, on its shaft 
above the pulley C and provide a clutch-coup 
ling, p, (shown at Fig. 2.) for connecting the 
rotating shaft with the hub of the loose pull 
ley J, so that the pulley J will only be ro 
tated when the coupling is connected with it. 
On each side of the pulley J, I mount other 
horizontal pulleys KK in such relation to the 
pulley J that a chain or cable passing be 
tween the two pulleys K will be strained 
against one side of the pulley J. 
The supplemental cable I, I prefer to con 
struct of a series of connected links, so as to 
form a chain-cable, (shown at Fig. 4) and on 
each alternate link or farther apart, if de 
sired, I Secure or form a projecting leg or 
arm, l, which will project across the slot when 
it is moving opposite to and against the line of 
small pulleys. This endless supplemental 
chain or cable will then pass around the end 
pulley, H, at each end of the excavation, along, 
in front, and against the line of pulleys G, be 
low the slot and over and under the pulleys 
K. KJ, as represented at Fig. 1. 
One of the end pulleys, EI, I mount on a 
movable bearing, and I provide a set-screw, 
M, for shifting its position in order to take up 
the slack of the chain and tighten it upon the 
driving-pulley J. 
The clutch-coupling p, which connects and 
disconnects the rotating shaft of the pulley C 
with the Supplemental driving - pulley J, I 
operate automatically by means of suitable 
connections with levers g g at each end of the 
curve, and the ends of these levers project 
across the slot, so that they are operated by the 
passage of the gripper-shank of the car. 
R is the forked lever, which shifts the mov 
able part of the clutch on the shaft into and 
out of gear with the corresponding part on the 
hub of the pulley J. This lever is pivoted at 
its middle to the under side of the street or 
cover of the excavation, and a wedge or in 
clined plane, S, is arranged to move under its 
outer end, so as to throw the clutch in or out 
according to the direction in which the wedge 
or inclined plane is moved. A rope or cord, 
Z, connects this wedge with each of the levers 
g at each end of the curve. 
The cars move in one direction only on each 
track, so that when a car approaches the curve 
it trips the lever q at the approach end and 
connects the coupling p with the pulley J, so 
that the supplemental cable is set in motion. 
At the same instant, or possibly before the 
shank of the gripper strikes the lever q, the 
gripper is detached from the main cable by 
the engineer or driver leaving it free. The 
shank of the gripper is then caught by one of 
the legs or projecting arms on the supple 
mental cable and pushed along by it around 
the curve, carrying the car with it until the car 
passes the curve at the opposite end. Just 
as the car passes from the curve the shank of 
the gripper comes in contact with and moves 
the opposite lever q, thus shifting the coup 
ling out of gear with the pulley J and stopping 
the movement of the supplemental cable until 
another car reaches the curve. . 
The speed at which the supplemental cable 
moves is governed by the size of the pulley J. 
I prefer to make the pulley J much smaller 
than the pulley C, so that the supplemental 
chain will move slower than the main cable. 
This arrangement is adapted for any and all 
curves, switches, and turnouts, where a de 
flection or bend in the road renders it imprac 
ticable to move the cars by the main cable. In 
adapting it to cross-roads and switches where 
one or more main cables cross each other, I 
make the excavation deeper, and instead of 
placing the supplemental cable above the 
main cable I place it underneath and sub 
stitute short upward-projecting arms for the 
arms or legs l, so that the same operation oc 
curs, only the arms that push the gripper pro 
ject upward instead of outward. 
There is very little wear on the supplemental 
cable, as it only moves when a car is passing 
around the curve, and even then its motion is 
so slow that there is no great strain upon it. 
The arrangement of the pulleys also leaves 
sufficient spaces between them for the street 
supports to pass through, and although the 
excavation is larger than that required for the 
simple tube yet no difficulty need be encoun 
tered in making a permanent and substantial 
street above it. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1. In the system of propelling cars by means 
of an endless rope or cable moving in an un 
derground slotted tube or tunnel, the improve 
ment in passing the cars around curves, con 
sisting in the combination of the main cable 
B, carried around the curve on large horizon 
tal pulleys C C regardless of its relation to 
the slot in the tube, with a supplemental end 
less chain or cable, I, having legs or arms l, the 
line of small pulleys G supporting one part 
of said chain or cable parallel with the slot 
through which the gripper-shank passes, and 
the driving mechanism connected to the oppo 
site part of Said chain or cable and automati 
cally set in motion and thrown out of motion 
7) 
75 
95 
OO 
IC5 
IIo 
II5 
I25 
 
386,654 
3 
by the pressure of the gripper-shank against 
a lever, q, substantially as described. 
2. In an apparatus of the character de 
scribed, the combination, with the main cable 
B, carried around the curve on large horizon 
tal pulleys C C, of the Supplemental endless 
chain or cable I, having legs or arms l, the 
line of small pulleys G, Supporting one part of 
said chain or cable, the loose pulley J, Sup 
porting another part of said chain or cable, 
and the clutch-coupling p, mounted upon the 
same shaft with said pulley J and operated by 
the pressure of the gripper-shank against le. 
vers which are located at each end of the curve 
and have intermediate connections with said 
clutch-coupling, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
3. In an apparatus of the character de 
scribed, the combination, with the main cable 
B, carried around the curve on large horizon. 
tal pulleys C C, of the supplemental endless 
chain or cable I, having legs or arms l, the scribed, the line of pulleys G, for supporting 55 
line of small pulleys G, Supporting one part 
of said cable parallel with the slot through 
which the gripper-shank passes, the two pull 
leys H. H., for supporting said chain or cable 
at the ends of the curve, the loose pulley J, 
combined with the clutch-coupling p, mount 
ed on the shaft of one of the pulleys C for 
supporting the opposite side of the said chain 
or cable at a point about central between the 
two pulleys H. H., the two pulleys KK, for 
pressing the said chain or cable against one 
side of the loose pulley J, and mechanism for 
throwing said loose pulley into and out of ac- 35 
tion by the pressure of the gripper - shank 
against levers connected with such mechanism, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In an apparatus of the character de 
scribed, the combination, with the main cable 
B, carried around the curve on large horizon 
tal pulleys C C, and the supplemental endless 
chain or cable I, supported by the line of 
small pulleys G, and the pulleys H H and K 
K, of the loose pulley J and the clutch-coup- 45 
ling p, mounted on the shaft of one of said 
large pulleys C, the engaging forked lever R, 
pivoted at the center, the wedge or inclined 
plane S, arranged to move under the outer end 
of said lever, and a rope or cord, Z, connect- 5o 
ed to this wedge and to levers () at each end of 
the curve, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
5. In an apparatus of the character de 
the supplemental chain or cable I, all arranged 
in a continuous metallic box, E, provided with 
grooves f, combined with upper bearing-blocks, 
a, and cups b, and lower bearing - blocks, a, 
provided with cavities e, substantially as and 6o 
for the purpose set forth. 
JoHN D. G. AGNON, 
JNO. L. BOONE. 
W. A. PHILLIPS. 
5 
O 
3O 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386754.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 386,754. 
S. MUIR. 
ELECTRO MEDICAL APPARATUS 
Patented July 24, 1888. 
O 
a. 
aw 23, 
-S i-s-SS at 
Eaas 
SOD SS 
 
  
 
 
 
A asexasS 
 
 
 
e s a sessee s as 
estaeata SS seases sees : a 
- Sessara Sesee S e. 
cavea wises assess as cra 
sessessee co 
- 
4. 
 
 
 
 
 
St. 
enven for 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFF 
JOHN S. MUIR, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
E. E. CRC in / E CA A PARA. S. 
Si-ECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 386,754, dated July 24, 1888. 
Application filed January 23, 1888. Sorial No. 261, GS2. 
(No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To a 27 livion, it i? J/ concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN S. AIUIR, a citizen 
of the United States, residing in the city and 
County of San Francisco, and State of Califor 
nia, have invented certain new and useful In 
provements in Electro-Medical Apparatus; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of my said in 
vention, reference being had to the drawings 
that accompany aind form part of this specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
electro-medical apparatus of the kind that is 
embraced in the Letters Paterit of the United 
States which were granted and issued to me 
on the 13th day of December, 1887, No.374,747. 
These in provements consist in making the 
handle and the frame of the rolling electrode 
Separable for convenience of packing in Small 
compass; also, in placing the battery and in 
duction-coil entirely within the handle and 
having the rolling electrode and the circuit 
breaker mounted on a separate frame or part 
that can be detached from the handle; also, in 
an improved construction of shunt' for va 
rying the intensity of the current. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a yiew of the instrument in longi 
tudinal section. Fig. 2 is a view of the parts 
of the instrument, separated from one another, 
the battery being drawn out of the handle. 
Fig. 3 is a view of the circuit interrupter and 
rolling electrode in section, and of the inter 
rupter-wheel. Fig. 4 is a view of the elec 
trode removed from its frame. Fig. 5 shows 
the terminals of the primary coil and of the 
shunt at the handle end that sets into the 
socket of the frame. Fig. 6 illustrates another 
construction of interrupter. 
Similar letters of reference indicate iike 
parts in all the figures. 
In the present construction of my instru 
ment I place the battery inside the handle and 
at the rear end and bring the terminals of the 
induction-coil out to the opposite side, where 
the rolling electrode is attached. The frame 
is detachable from the handle, and is locked 
in position by means of a pin on the inside of 
its collar and a locking-slot on the end of the 
A is the handle, B the frame, and B the 
collar fitting over the end of the handle. G 
is the pin inside the collar, and G' G' are the 
locking-slots for the pin. 
When the parts are put together, the pin en 
teling the slot G' comes in line with the cross 
slot G as the collar is pressed down against 
the shoulder G" on the handle, and by tarning 
the handle in the collar the pin sets into the 
cross-slot and locks the parts together. The 
terminals of the coil are brought into elec 
trieal connection with the frame Bas the parts 
are thus joined together. 
C is the primary coil, and C is the point of 
connection to one pole of the battery vi. 
X is one terminal of the primary coil, and 
Y is the other terminal, which is carried from 
the pole of the battery A through the handle. 
The conductor C may be the core of the 
primary coil. 
Its end forms the terminal X 
a ind is carried through the insulating-block D 
to take against the contact spring K, that is 
attached to the frame at S. The other ter. 
minal, Y, is in electrical contact with the 
frame B at the collar. The interrupter j, com 
pletes the circuit from the primary coil through 
the frame B to the rolling electrode H, as the 
contact-spring K is the conductor from X to 
the wheel L. The spindle of the wheel has 
bearings at M* in the frame. In the construc 
tion of interrupter shown in Fig. 6 the wheel 
spindle requires to be insulated in the frame, 
for the contact-spring is attached directly to 
the frame, while the spindle connects with the 
terminal X. As arranged in Fig. 1, the con 
tact-spring is insulated at Is" from the frame. 
I prefer the construction of interrupter rep. 
resented in Figs. 1 and 3 on account of its 
greater simplicity. The part of the wheel 
is composed of alternate contact points and 
breaks, as seen in the detail view, Fig. 3, and 
on either side of this surface a driving-sur 
face, L, of greater diameter to run against 
the periphery of the rolling electrode. These 
drivers may be made of rubber. In the modi 
fication, Fig. 6, beveled drivers are employed, 
because the electrode from which the motion 
is taken revolves at a right angle to the axis 
of the interrupter to be driven. In either case 
the interrupter is operated from the rotation 
of the electrode H as the instrument is used. 
The terminal points or shunts of the second 
65 
75 
95 
ICO 
45 
5o handle. 
 
386,754 
3. In an instrument of the character de-55 
of the handle and suitably exposed to make 
ary coil C are carried out through the insu 
lating-block D in the end of the handle, as electrical connection with the circuit-inter 
seen at W. W. W., &c., where they make con rupter and the electrode H, as hereinbefore 45 
tact with the spring R on the frame. The op- described. 
posite terminal of the secondary coil is in elec 
2. In an instrument of the character de 
tric connection with the cylindrical electrode 
scribed, the combination, with the frame B, hav 
ing a rolling electrode mounted in it for rota 
T on the handle. 
Different degrees of intensity in the current 
tion, as described, of the detachable handle 55 
containing an induction-coil and a battery 
are obtained by carrying out terminals in this 
and having the terminals of the same brought 
manner from successive layers of the second 
ary coil, the same as in my former instrument 
out to the end where the handle sets into the 
already patented; but instead of bringing out 
frame, substantially as described. 
the ends of the wires at the side of the handle 
scribed, the circuit-interrupter consisting of 
I now place these terminal points in the end 
of the handle that sets through the socket of the wheel L and the contact-spring K, in elec 
the frame. The contact spring R is fixed in trical connection with the frame B and the 
position to bear against one point at a time, 
primary coil, and driving mechanism, substan 
and the contact-points W. W., &c., are so ar. 
tially as described, which connects the inter- 6o 
rupter-wheel with the rolling electrode to op 
ranged that by turning the handle in the socket 
a greater or less distance any one of the points 
erate the same froin the motion of the elec 
can be set to the contact-spring. By setting 
trode, as set forth. 
the Spring R in this manner from one point to 
4. In an instrument of the character de 
another a greater length of secondary coil can 
scribed, the combination of the handle or part 65 
be brought into circuit to produce a stronger 
carrying an induction coil and a battery, and 
current. The intensity of the instrument is 
having a surface-electrode, and the frame or 
thus varied by simply turning the handle in 
other part having a rolling electrode and a 
the Socket of the frame. By this construction circuit-interrupter mounted on it, the said 
parts being separable, substantially as de- to 
I bring all the parts of the switch inside the 
frame and leave the handle smooth and with 
scribed. 
out projecting parts. There is no liability to 
5. The combination of the rolling electrode 
shift the switch accidentally when using the in circuit, as described, and the circuit-inter 
i rupter having driving wheels or surfaces which 
instrument. 
are adapted to run against the rolling electrode 75 
to be driven by the rotation thereof, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an instrument of the character de 
Scribed, the combination of the case or handle have hereunto set my hand and seal. 
in which is mounted an induction-coil and a 
battery, and the frame B, adapted to carry a 
rolling electrode, and having a circuit-inter 
rupter also mounted on it, the terminals of 
the induction-coil being brought out at the end 
Witnesses: 
CEIAS. E. KELLY, 
C. W. M. SMITH, 
JOHN S. MUIR. L. s. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386854.txt	(No Model.) 
J. SKINNER, 
CAR COUPLING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 386,854. 
Patented July 31, 1888. 
SQSSNSN 
S S7, 
2 SNS W. A. 
it. se/ 
Ll 2 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
N N 45s3 
 
22 
 
A 27.4 
O O 
O C. 
C 
O ba 
- 
 
 
A f lars 
AWitnesses: E. Znventor: 
Vohn Skinner. 
 
d 
 
44 y. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
J. SKINNER, 
CAR COUPLING, 
No. 386,854, 
Patented July 31, l888. 
 
 
 
 
 
Witnesses: 
4% 
 
 
 
N 
 
 
2 2 
 
2 
 
At vendor: 
Vo/n 54 inner 
Ally. 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington.D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN SKINNER, OF FLINT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. HALF TO OREN 
STONE, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR COUPNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 386,854, dated July 31, 1888. 
Application filed March 6, 1888. Serial No. 266,305. 
No model.) 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN SKINNER, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Flint, in 
the county of Genesee and State of Michigan, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Car-Couplers, of which the follow 
ing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
Io improvements in car. couplings; and my in 
vention relates to that class of car-couplings 
known as vertical plane-couplers. 
My invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction and arrangementoftheparts, whereby 
I5 the device is made in every respect an auto 
matic coupler, and, further, in the peculiar 
construction of the coupling-hook and draw. 
head, whereby the draft is taken off of the 
pivot-pin of the hook; and to this end my in 
2O vention consists in the peculiar construction 
and arrangement of the parts, all as more 
fully hereinafter described, and shown in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a horizontal section showing two 
25 of my couplers in the act of engagement with 
each other, with both of the hooks locked in 
position. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of one 
of the couplers in an uncoupled position. 
Fig. 3 is an end elevation of a car to which 
3o my coupler is attached. Fig. 4 is a detached 
elevation of the stirrup in which the uncoup 
ling-lever engages. Fig. 5 is a plan of two 
couplers in a coupled position. Fig. 6 is a 
vertical central section longitudinally through 
35 one of the couplers, and Fig. 7 is a plan view 
of two couplers in the act of engaging with 
each of their hooks in an unlocked position. 
A is the draw-head, secured in the usual 
manner to the frame of the car and to the draft 
4o apparatus. This draw-head is provided with 
a limited lateral play to one side of the line 
of draft, with the end of the draw.head as the 
the pivot, and it is backed on this side by the 
springs B, which tend to normally keep it in 
45 line with the draft. The forward end of the 
draw-head is cut away upon one side, and the 
remaining side is extended forwardly to form 
a side support, C, in the forward end of which 
the coupling - hook is pivotally secured by 
so means of a suitable knuckle-joint, which per 
mits the coupling-hook to swing in a hori 
 
55 
75 
zontal plane. A limited longitudinal play is 
provided in such knuckle by means of the 
pivot-pin D being made of slightly smaller 
size than the hole in the knuckle-joint. 
The coupling-hook consists of the coupling 
arm E and the locking-arm F, which latter is 
at about right angles or nearly so to the coup 
ling-arm, and in a locked position of the coup 
ling-hook extends rearwardly in line with the 
draft. The rear end of this locking-arm is 
formed upon the curved lines a b, and is also 
provided with the lateral offset G at right an 
gles or nearly so with the locking-arm of the 
coupling-hook. The side support of the draw 
head is provided upon its inner face with the 
longitudinal recess H, adapted to receive the 
locking-arm of the coupling-hook, and with 
the transverse recess I, adapted to receive the 
offset G of the locking-arm. This transverse 
recess I forms in the forward part of the draw 
head a stationary abutment, J, upon which 
the shoulder K of the locking-arm engages. 
L is a sliding latch centrally seated in the 
draw-head in the rear of the locking-arm of 
the coupling-hook, and adapted to project for 
ward sufficiently to lock the rear end of the 
locking-arm into the recess in the draw-head. 
M is a gravity-dog pivotally secured to the 
under side of the draw-head, to swing in a 
vertical plane and engaging with the locking 
latch, all so arranged that the gravity-dog nor 
mally keeps the latch L projected forward in 
its locking position. 
N is an uncoupling-lever, with one end ex 
tending toward the side of the car and en 
gaging into a slotted stirrup, O, which is pro 
vided with the vertical slot c, which terminates 
in the lateral offset d, to hold the lever in its 
uncoupling position and to prevent coupling. 
A spring, P, is secured to this lever to hold 
it normally in its coupling or coupled posi 
tion. The inner end of this uncoupling-lever 
is provided with the cross-head e, which im 
pinges against the free end of the gravity-dog. 
This uncoupling device may be applied to 
both sides of the car. 
R is a sliding guard secured independently 
of the draw-head in suitable bearings and 
backed by a buffer-spring, so that it has a lim 
ited longitudinal movement. This guard is 
placed upon the coupling side of each draw 
95 
OO 
 
386,854 
SO 
55 
transverse aperture through the side support, 
into which the said offset is adapted to engage, 
a longitudinally-sliding locking-latch seated 
in the draw-head and provided with a gravity 
dog to keep it normally projected, and un 
coupling-levers projecting with their inner 
ends beneath the gravity, dog, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a car coupling, the combination of a 
coupling-hook pivotally secured to swing in a 
vertical plane and provided with a locking 
arm extending rearwardly in the closed posi 
tion of said hook, and a draw-head cut away 
at one side and extended forward to form a 
side support in which the coupling-hook is 
mounted, a recess in the inner face of the side 
support of the draw.head to receive the lock 
ing-arm of the coupling-hook, a horizontally 
sliding latch seated in the center of the rear 
portion of the draw-head and adapted to pro 
ject beyond the curved rear extension of the 
locking-arm of the coupling-hook to lock the 
same in position, a gravity-dog engaging into 
said latch to keep it normally projected, and 
an uncoupling-lever adapted to lift said grav 
ity-dog, and thereby withdraw the latch, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a car-coupling, the combination of the 
draw-head mounted to have a lateral play to 
one side of the line of draft, and provided at its 
forward end with a solid abutment on one side 
and a side support for the coupling-hook on the 
other side, the coupling-hook pivotally mount. 
ed in said side support, and provided with a 
laterally-extending coupling-arm and a rear 
wardly extending locking-arm, the locking 
latch of the coupling-hook, and a sliding guard 
backed by a buffer-spring and secured inde 
pendently of the draw-head upon the coupling 
side thereof, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, in 
presence of two witnesses, this 8th day of Jan 
uary, 1888. 
JOHN SKINNER. 
WitnessSS: 
JAS. WEIITTEMORE, 
P. M. HULBERT. 
head and in such relation to the coupling-hook 
that the companion coupling can force its way 
into a coupled position by compressing the 
buffer-spring of the guard; but, when such 
coupling is effected, acts as a guard to prevent 
the disengagement of the coupling-hooks un 
less one or both is unlocked. 
It will be seen that in the action of coupling, 
as shown in Fig. 1, the end of the guard im 
pinges against the forward end of the coup 
ling-hook, and thereby permits engagement of 
the coupling-hooks by being pushed out of the 
way; but in the coupled position it impinges 
against the outside of the coupling-hook, as 
shown in Fig. 5, and thereby prevents the un 
coupling of the hooks unless the hooks, or one 
of them, is unlocked. 
In passing around curves or in slackening 
up cars the guards are free to slide end wise. 
The necessary lateral play of the draw-heads 
to permit the engagement of the coupling 
hooks in their locked position is easily deter 
mined. 
The coupling-hook is provided with any of 
the usual means for coupling by means of link 
and pin. 
The advantage of my coupler consists in its 
adaptation to couple with the coupling-hook 
in any position and in the peculiar coaction of 
the coupling-hook with the draw head, where. 
by the whole draft is transmitted from the 
coupling-hook directly to the draw.head with 
out the intervention of the pivot pin, which 
stands loosely in its socket, and may be with 
drawn without disturbing the coupling. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a car-coupling, the combination of a 
draw-head mounted to have a lateral play to 
one side of the line of draft and cut away at 
its forward end upon one side to form a solid 
abutment and extended upon the other side to 
form a side support for the coupling-hook, a 
coupling-hook pivotally mounted in said side 
support and provided with a coupling-arm 
and a locking-arm, a recess in the side support 
to receive the locking-arm of the coupling 
hook, a lateral offset on said locking-arm, a 
IO 
25 
30 
35 
4. 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US386954.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BALDWIN. 
LIFTING JACK, 
No. 386,954, 
Patented July 3l l888. 
 
 
 
 
 
Zzzz/27247. 
/6%-2. 2. 
N. Peters. Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES BALDWIN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
LiFTING - JACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 386,954, dated July 31, 1888. 
Application filed October 25, 1887. Serial No. 253,317. (No model.) 
To aid tufton, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JAAIES BALDWIN, of the 
city and county of New York, in the State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Lifting-Jacks, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates particularly to the class 
of lifting jacks which are commonly termed 
'Wagon-jacks, and are employed for raising 
Wagon-axles, so as to provide for readily greas. 
ing or oiling the axle-arms on which the wheels 
rotate. Like other jacks of this character, my 
jack comprises a stand and a lifting-bar slid 
ing therein, and provided or formed with a 
rack of ratchet-teeth. An operating-lever is 
pivoted in the stand, and a pivoted pawl is 
connected with this lever for operation there 
by. A stop-pawl is also employed for hold 
ing the lifting -bar in its elevated position 
while the lever and lifting-pawl are returning 
to take a new hold upon the rack. 
In my improved jack the lifting-pawl is piv. 
oted to the lever in rear of the main pivot on 
which the lever swings, and the pawl has a 
bearing upon this lever-pivot when operated 
by the downward movement of the lever. The 
pawl may have in it a slot, which receives 
through it the lever-pivot, and which permits 
the pawl to move upward and downward rela 
tively to the lever-pivot as the pawl is oper 
ated through its pivotal attachment with the 
lever at a point in rear of the lever-pivot. 
The invention consists in novel combina 
tions of parts, hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims, and which embrace 
the novel features of construction above re 
ferred to. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a partly-sectional elevation of a jack embody 
ing my invention, showing the parts in the 
position which they occupy at the completion 
of the operative movement of the pawl and 
lever. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of a part of 
the stand and lifting-bar, together with the 
pawls and a portion of the operating-iever, 
showing Such lever as swung upward and the 
point of the pawl as just escaping from the 
teeth of the rack; and Fig. 3 is a section simi 
lar to Fig. 2, but showing the pawl as having 
escaped from the rack-tooth and as ready to 
perform a second operative movement. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
A designates the stand, which has a sufi 
ciently broad base to support the jack, and a 55 
central cavity or bore, ct, extending through 
the whole or the principal part of its height. 
Within the stand A slides a lifting-bal', B, 
which may have a forked top piece, b, to ell 
brace a wagon-axle and prevent the upper end 
of the lifting-bar from slipping off the axle in 
a lateral direction. This lifting-barls is formed 
or provided with a rack, B, of ratchet-teeth, 
and with this rack engage a lifting-pawl, C, 
and a stop-pawl, D. I have also shown an Op 
erating lever or handle, E, which is pivoted 
by a pin or pivot, e, between lugs or ears a. 
projecting from the stand, and this lever E 
may be swung upward and downward upon 
the pivote as on a fulcrum. 
The pawl C is connected with the lever Eat 
a point behind the pivot e by a pivot, c, and it 
will be understood that as the lever E is SWilng 
upward and downward the point c will be 
raised and lowered relatively to the lever-pivot 
e. 
I bave here represented the pawl C as hav 
ing an elongated opening or slot, c, which re 
ceives through it the lever-pivote, and which 
permits the pawl to swing upward and down 
ward upon its own pivot, c, and relatively to 
the pivot e. 
As represented in Fig. 1, the pawl C is 
shown in operative position as raising the rack 
B and the lifting-bar B, and in this position 
it bears upon the lever-pivot e. In the down 
ward movement of the lever E the pivot c is 
moved downward, and as the pivot-pin e Con 
stitutes a fulcrum for the pawl C, owing to its 
bearing thereon, the toothed end of the pawl 
is raised and imparts a lifting motion to the 
bar B until the toothed end of the pawl comes 
against the stop-pin f. When this occurs, the 
lever E is swung upward, and as the pawl C 
bears upon the inclined face of one of the 
teeth it is lifted while the lifting-bar B settles 
back upon the stop-pawl D, which has no 
connection with the lever E. As this lifting 
movement of the lever is continued, the pawl 
C is raised until the slot c is mostly above 
the pivot e, as shown in Fig. 2, whereupon 
the pawl slips off the tooth of the rack B and 
| into the position shown in Fig. 3. The lever 
95 
7 O 
75 
90 
CO 
O 
20 
5 
35 
45 
w 
386,954 
 
3O. 
35 
45 
of the lever-pivot and between it and the lift 
ing-bar. The second of these patents shows 
a sliding pawl, and neither of the pawls shown 
in the two patents has a bearing upon the 
pivot of the lever. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a stand and a 
ratchet-toothed lifting-bar sliding therein, of 
a lever pivoted in the stand and a pawl piv 
oted to the lever in rear of the pivot on which 
the lever swings, and having a bearing on the 
lever-pivot when operated by the downward 
movement of said lever, and a stop-pawl piv 
oted in the stand independent of said lever 
and engaging said bar, substantially as herein 
described. 
2. The combination, with the stand A and 
the toothed lifting-bar B, of the lever E, piv 
oted at e, the lifting-pawl C, slotted at c', to 
receive the lever-pivot through it and piv 
oted to the lever behind the lever-pivot, and 
the stop pawl D, substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
JAMES BALDWIN. 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
HENRY J. MCBRIDE. 
E is now swung downward again, and the 
pawl engages with a new tooth of the rack, 
and at the same time, owing to its bearing upon 
the pin or pivot e, which forms a fulcrum for 
5 the pawl, the pawl is lifted by the downward 
movement of the pivotal point c behind the 
pivote, and thus imparts further lifting move 
ment to the bar. 
I am aware of Patent No. 201,467, granted 
Io March 19, 1878, to Tichenor & Dexter, and 
do not claim as of my invention anything 
shown therein... In that patent there are two 
pawls connected with the head of the operat 
ing-lever on opposite sides of its pivot; but 
5 neither of these pawls has a bearing forward 
of its pivot on the lever-pivot when it is op 
erated by a downward movement of the lever. 
I am also aware of patent to Joyce, No. 
172,924, dated February 1, 1876, and patent 
2O to Thurston, No. 176,900, granted May 2, 
1876, and do not desire to include in my in 
vention either of the constructions shown in 
these patents. Neither of these patents shows 
a pawl which is pivoted to the lever in rear 
25 of the pivot on which the lever swings, and 
which has a bearing on the lever-pivot when 
operated by the downward movement of said 
lever. The first of these patents shows a pawl 
which is supported by a knuckle-joint in front 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387054.txt	(No Model.) 
P. C. DODGE 
SUSPENDERs, 
No. 387,054, 
 
Patented July 31, 1888. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
PRENTISS C. DODGE, OF BURLINGTON, ASSIGNOR TO THE WILLARD 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY., OF ST. ALBANS, VERMONT. 
SUSPENDERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 387,054, dated July 31, 1888. 
Application filed June 20, 1887, Renewed May 15, 1888. Serial No. 273,995. (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Two of them, marked 2 and 3, are made par 
Be it known that I, PRENTISs C. DoDGE, a 
allel to each other and preferably near the 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bur 
edge of the plate and in manner to leave a nar 
lington, in the county of Chittenden and State 
row bar or strip of metal between them. The 55 
of Vermont, have invented certain new and 
third, marked 1, is arranged angularly with 
useful Improvements in Suspenders; and i do 
respect to the direction of the other two and 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
preferably at an angle of forty-five degrees. 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
These exterior slots are made sufficiently wide 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
to allow two thicknesses of the webbing to pass 6o 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
through each, as shown. The slot 2 need not 
The object of the invention is to make a pair 
be so wide, as it receives but one thickness of 
of suspenders with a back-band or strap out 
the Suspender-strap. 
of a single length of the material employed. 
In forming suspenders a single piece of the 
For this purpose a single piece of ordinary 
suspender materialis used and connected with 65 
webbing, such as is customarily used in the 
the slotted plates in the following manner: 
manufacture of Suspenders, is suitable. Such 
An end of the webbing is inserted in slot 1 and 
a piece is combined with two slotted metallic 
drawn through it and then passed back through 
plates, in the manner hereinafter described, to 
the farther slot, 3, and drawn out to a distance 
produce a pair of suspenders with a back-band 
of several inches. It may now receive a but 7o 
or strap. This strap is also made adjustable 
ton-loop of any approved variety. The strap 
in length, and the rear or back portions of the 
or webbing is drawn through the loop if it has 
suspender, which are most liable to be strained, 
been applied and passed again through slot 3 
broken, or ripped in the use of suspenders of 
in a direction opposite to its first passage and 
the more usual construction, are made double, 
then down through slot 2 and under the cen - 75 
and therefore exceptionally strong and du 
tral part of the plate and up through slot 1. 
rable. 
By the angular arrangement of this slot the 
The invention consists in the means used to 
direction of the strap is changed by bending 
effect these objects, which will be hereinafter 
it back on itself over the edge of the slot, and 
specified, and particularly pointed out. 
this change of direction is given to that por 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
tion which constitutes the back-band 4, which 
represents the improved suspenders. Fig. 2; 
continues a short distance to the other plate, 
represents a side view of one of the slotted 
to which it is applied in manner similar to that 
plates, with the webbing in place, but loos 
described, but in reverse order. Thus a con 
ened to better exhibit its relations to the plate, 
tinuation of the back-band is first passed 
the back-strap 4 being shown in section. Fig. 
through slot 1 of the second plate and then 
3 represents a vertical section through the 
bent back upon itself over the edge of the slot 
parts indicated in Fig. 2 when drawn tightly, 
and passed under the central part of the plate 
as in use. Fig. 4 represents a slotted plate, 
up through slot 2 and down through slot 3 to 
and Fig. 5 represents a modification in vertical 
a second button-loop, whence it returns through 
section. 
slots 3, 2, and 1, and is continued to form the 
The plates used with my improved suspenders 
front strap of the suspenders. 
are made of brass or other metal, or of any 
It will be obvious that the plates may be ap 
other suitable material, and are preferably of a 
plied to the suspender-strap from each end. 
triangular, or approximately triangular, shape Thus each end may be drawn through a slot, 
and of a size to allow to be formed therein 1, in a separate plate, being introduced from 
slots whose length shall equal the width of the that side which will be next the person of the 
webbing or other material used for the body wearer when in use. The plates are then 
of the suspenders. The triangular shape of the moved on the strap until near its middle, but 
plate is not essential, however. The slots, sufficiently far apart to provide for a back 
three in number for each plate, are arranged band of the required length. Each end is next 
substantially as indicated in the drawings. passed under the central portion of its plate 
IOO 
95 
25 
35 
45 
5O 
- 
387,054 
piece of webbing, suspender-straps made dou- 45 
up through slot 2, down through slot 3 to the necessity of skilled labor in making, and re- 4o 
button-loop, then back to slot 3 and through quires but little extra material, and no more 
the same, and then down through slot 1. The than is necessary to make a strong and durable 
parts being drawn snugly together and a front article. 
Shoulder - straps made of one continuous 
button-hole strap of any desired pattern ap 
plied, the pair of suspenders is completed. 
A plate with two slots might be used as fol- ble throughout a portion of their length, ad 
lows, (see Fig. 5:) Referring to the last above- justable back-bands, and slotted plates for use 
with suspenders were known prior to my in 
described manner of inserting the strap ends, 
vention. Claims herein are limited to the mat 
they could each be inserted in slot 1 from the 
ters hereinafter particularly pointed out, 
under side and passed over the central portion 
whereby a pair of suspenders with an adjust 
of the plate, down through slot 3 to the but 
able back-strap, the rear ends of the suspend 
ton-hole loop, back up through 3, and down 
ers being doubled and adjustable, are formed 
through 1, and such construction and arrange 
of a piece of webbing combined in a particular 
ment would be within my invention. By this 
manner with plates, so as to dispense with 
construction a pair of suspenders can be pro 
seams and other connections liable to break, 
vided with a back-strap or cross-piece and 
rust, or be otherwise impaired in ordinary use. 
made of one piece without a seam. As the strap 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
can be moved through the slots in the plate as 
desire to claim, and secure by Letters Patent, 
desired, it is obvious that the length of the 
back-band can be readily adjusted, as also the 
S-a- 1. In a pair of Suspenders, a body and a 
length of the suspenders below the back-band. 
back-band made of one seamless piece of web 
The length of front part of suspenders in use 
bing or like material combined with slotted 
is made adjustable in any approved manner 
plates, substantially as specified, whereby the 
by means of the front button-hole straps. It 
length of the back-band may be adjusted, and 
will be noticed that below the back-band each 
buckles and seams are dispensed with. 
suspender is doubled and that the loops are 
2. A pair of suspenders having its body por 
securely attached and that there are no seams. 
tion and an adjustable back-band all made in 
The whole constitutes a very economical, dura 
one seamless piece, the suspenders being also 
ble, and convenient article, which avoids the 
made double below the back-band and conn. 
evils of ripping and breaking incident to sus 
bined with plates and with button-loops, sub 
penders as heretofore made, and which admits 
stantially as specified. 
of any desired adjustment of the back-strap 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
and of the back ends of the suspenders, which 
presence of two witnesses. 
latter, being the part ordinarily the first to fail 
in practical use, are made doubly strong. Sus 
penders made according to the present method 
will last twice as long as the usual construction, 
and even ionger. The invention avoids the 
PRENTISS C, DODGE. 
Witnesses: 
W. P. DILLINGHAM, 
C. D. ROBINSON. 
IO 
20 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387155.txt	(No Model.) 
E, F, EW ANS, 
CORN SHOCKER 
No. 387,155, 
Patented July 31, 1888. 
 
S'yogi 3. 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS. 
. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, 0. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD F. EVANS, OF WAMEGO, KANSAS. 
CORN-SHOCKER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 387,155, dated July 31, 1888, 
Application filed October 22, 1887. Serial No. 253,09. 
(No model.) 
r 
55 
65 
75 
O 
To att, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD F. EVANs, of 
Wamego, in the county of Pottawatomie and 
State of Kansas, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Shock - Compressors, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention is an improved shock-com 
pressor; and it consists in certain features of 
construction and novel combinations of parts, 
as will be hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front elevation 
of my invention as in use, a portion of the shock 
being shown in broken lines. Fig. 2 is a top 
plan view thereof, showing a modification in 
the manner of connecting one end of the com 
pressing-rope to the bar A. Fig. 3 is a front 
elevation of the compressor, showing a some 
what different arrangement whereby to strain 
the compressing - rope; and Fig. 4 shows a 
somewhat different construction embodying 
some of the principles of my invention. 
In carrying out my invention I have had in 
view to simplify the construction so that the 
device may be readily carried from shock to 
5 shock and may be conveniently placed for use 
by one person, as well as to provide conven 
ient means for compressing and tying or bind 
ing the shock. 
The main support is a bar or beam, A, pro 
vided at or near its upper end with a project 
ing prong, ct, which in practice enters the 
shock when the bar is placed thereagainst and 
serves to anchor and steady the bar in posi 
tion. One end of the compressing-rope B may 
be attached directly to the bar A, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3, or indirectly attached thereto 
by means of intervening mechanism-such, for 
instance, as the windlass D, as will be under 
stood from Fig. 2. The rope is then carried 
around the shock, brought back to the bar or 
support A, and carried over a guide, C, pref. 
erably a pulley, as shown. By drawing on 
this rope the shock may be tightly compressed. 
In Figs. I and 2, I show a windlass, D, hav 
ing handles d, by which the necessary force 
may be exerted on the compressing-rope by 
an old, young, or other feeble person, a hook, 
E, being provided to engage the crank-han 
dles and hold the windlass from turning back 
when the compressing-rope has been strained 
up. 
3O 
35 
O 
45 
In the use of the constructions shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, the free end of the rope is car 
ried around the shock over the pulleys, and is 
provided with a hook to engage a hook, staple, 
or other suitable construction on the windlass. 
The rope may be drawn taut by hand or 
may be long enough to have a loop, b, as shown 
in Fig. 3, so that the operator can put his foot 
in said loop and exert great force on the com. 
pressing-rope, a cleat, B, or other suitable 
construction being provided for securing the 
rope when it has been drawn taut. 
It is preferred to provide guides or pulleys 
C, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, over the right 
one of which the compressing-rope passes from 
the bar or support A or the windlass D, as the 
case may be, is then carried around the shock 
and brought back over the left guide-pulley 
C, and may be strained to compress the shock, 
as before described. It is manifest, however, 
that the construction shown in Fig. 4 may be 
employed without departing from some of the 
broad principles of my invention. In this 
construction a single guide or pulley, C, is 
used, and the compressing-rope is (through 
the aid of the eye X) connected at one end 
With the bar A, near the upper end of the lat 
ter, passed thence around the shock and over 
guide or pulley C, and may be strained in any 
desired manner. 
A blade, F, is supported on the bar A, be 
ing preferably a portion or extension of the 
supporting-bar c of one of the guides or pull 
leys C, usually the right. In the modification 
shown in Fig. 4 the blade is adjacent to the 
pulley corresponding to the one on the left in 
the other figures. The edge or side f of this 
blade away from the shock is sharpened, pro 
ducing a cutting-edge, while its opposite edge, 
f", is blunted or rounded, forming a guide for 
the binding or tying twine or cord G. 
On the bar A, I provide a receptacle, H, for 
the twine or cord, usually a box, as shown, 
having an opening through which the twine 
or cord may be drawn. The twine or cord is 
passed upward in rear of the blade, thence 
around the shock, tied, and cut off by means 
of the blade. 
By the described construction the shock may 
be compressed tightly and without any dan 
ger of tilting or overturning the same, 
90 
95 
OO 
387,155 
45 
55 
O 
Having thus described my invention, what 
4. The combination, in a shock-compressor, 
of the main bar, the guide:pulleys supported 
I claim as new is 
1. The improvement in shock compressors at the opposite sides of the upper end of said 
herein described, consisting of the main bar, bar, and having a space between them where 
the pointed prong projected laterally from the by the rope may be carried up between them 
upper end of said bar, the guide-pulleys sup 
over one pulley and brought back between them 
ported at the opposite sides of the upper end 
over the other pulley, the compressing-rope 
of said bar, and having a space between them, 
secured at one end to the main bar below the 
and the compressing-rope secured at one end 
guide-pulleys, the blade secured to the bar ad 
to the main bar below the said separated guide-jacent to one of the guide-pulleys for the con 
pulleys, substantially as set forth. 
pressing-rope, and having its edge away from 
2. In a shock-compressor, the combination 
the shock sharpened and its edge next to the 
of a main bar, a prong projected laterally from 
shock blunted or rounded, the prong projected 
the upper end thereof on the side next the 
laterally from the upper end of the main bar 
shock, the compressing-rope secured at one 
and pointed, whereby it may enter the shock, 
end to the main bar, a guide-pulley for the 
and the twine-receptacle secured to the main 
compressing rope arranged at the upper end 
barbelow the blade, substantially as described, 
and for the purposes specified. 
of said bar on the side thereof away from the 
shock, and the blade F, secured adjacent to 
5. The improved shock-compressor herein 
said guide-pulley, and having its edge next 
described, consisting of the main bar, the 
prong a, projecting laterally from the upper 
the shock blunted and its edge away from said 
shock sharpened, substantially as set forth. 
end thereof, the guide-pulleys arranged at the 
3. In a shock-compressor, the combination 
opposite sides of the upper end of said bar, 
of the main bar provided at its upper end 
the blade secured at the upper end of said bar 
with a guide for the compressing-rope, the 
adjacent to one of the guide-pulleys for the 
compressing-rope, and having its edge away 
compressing-rope secured to said bar and 
movable over the guide, the blade secured 
from the shock sharpened and its edge next to 
to the bar near the upper end of the latter, 
the shock blunted or rounded, the Windlass 
and having its edge away from the shock 
supported on the main bar below the guide 
sharpened and its edge next to the shock 
pulleys, the compressing-rope secured at one 
blunted and arranged adjacent to the guide 
end to the windlass and suitably connected at 
for the compressing-rope, whereby to form a 
its opposite end with the main bar, and the 
guide for the twine, and the twine-receptacle 
twine-receptacle, all substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
secured to the main bar below the blade, 
whereby the twine may be carried up behind 
the blade and be guided by the blunt edge of 
said blade next to the shock, substantially as 
set forth. 
EDWARD F. EVANS. 
Witnesses: 
J. L. BROWNE, 
W. D. EMBLEY. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387255.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 387,255, 
 
H. M. POWERS. 
SHAFT SUPPORT, 
Patented Aug. 7, 1888. 
 
928)ilvecco, 
cf. 
2-6- d. 
J11 uo 11 Bez. 
SSu-220 &lttot 
94% sty2, a 6-22 
(11 --S 
N. PEreas, photo-lithographer, Washington, B, C, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENDERSON M. POWERS, OF LANCASTER, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SHAFT-SUPPORTER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 387,255, dated August 7, 1888, 
Application filed February 15, 1888; Serial No. 264,135. 
(No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENDERSON M. PoW ERs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Lan 
caster, in the county of Lancaster and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain Improve 
mentsin Shaft Supporters, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of im 
provements whereby connections between the 
shaft-iron and shaft can be used for the pur 
pose of sustaining the shafts at various heights. 
The invention consists in details of construc 
tion, hereinafter described and claimed, the 
purpose of which is to provide a simple con 
struction of easy manufacture, which construc 
tion will also furnish a complete means for 
connecting the rod holding the shafts with the 
same, whereby the elevation or depression of 
the said shafts may be regulated. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
side view, partially in section, of shafts pro 
vided with my attachment. Fig. 2 is a face 
view of the screw-eye connecting the holding 
rod with the cross-piece of the shafts. Fig. 3 
is a vertical cross-section through the line at a 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a top or plan view of one 
shaft with my holding-rod attached. Fig. 5 is 
an interior face view of one of the clamps for 
engaging the shaft with its sustaining-rod. 
Similarletters indicate like parts throughout 
the several views. 
A clip, A, of ordinary construction sur 
rounds the axle B. Integral with or connected 
to this is an arm, C, projecting rearwardly 
from the under side. To the back end of this 
arm there is hinged a Supporting-rod, D, which 
extends forward over the axle and along the 
shaft E. This rod, hinged as before stated, 
passes through a screw-eye, G, secured to or 
near the cross-bar F, thus affording a connec 
tion by which the shafts can be immediately 
acted upon. The rod D thence passes forward 
along the shaft for any desirable distance and 
is carried through a clamp, H, Operated by a 
thumb-screw, I. The clamp is composed of 
two pieces or plates, h, in each of which is 
formed a semicircular serrated cavity, i. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
S5 
75 
Operation: When the shafts are raised, the 
thumb-screw I is tightened, clamping them in 
place. The groove in the inner faces of the 
clamps H is serrated to the more firmly hold 
the rod. As will be seen, the backwardly-pro 
jecting arm C gives a leverage in connection 
with the screw-eye G by which the power ex 
erted to uphold the shafts can be used. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a shaft-holder, the combination, with 
the axle of a vehicle, of arodhinged to an arm 
extending rearwardly from said axle, the said 
rod projecting forward along the shaft through 
a staple at or near the cross-piece of the shafts, 
and a device for adjustably connecting the rod 
and shaft, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. In a shaft-holder, the combination, with 
the axle of a vehicle, the rearwardly-project 
ing arm C, and a staple secured to the shaft at 
or near the cross-bar of the shafts, of a rod 
hinged to said arm C and extending forward 
along the shaft through the staple, and a clamp 
fastened to said shaft, the clamp being pro 
vided with means whereby it can be loosened 
about or closed upon the rod, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a shaft-holder, the combination, with 
the axle of a vehicle, a rearwardly extending 
arm, C, and a staple secured to the shaft at or 
near the cross-bar F, of a rod hinged to said 
arm C and extending forward along the shaft 
through a staple, and a clamp, H, fastened to 
said shaft, and the clamp H, composed of two 
plates, h, provided with the semicircular ser 
rated cavities i upon their inner faces and 
operated by the set-screw I, all constructed 
and operating substantially as specified. 
H. M. POWERS. 
Witnesses: 
W. J. FoRDNEY, 
WM. R. GERHART. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387355.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. H.A.M.M. 
DEVICE FOR RINGING FARE REGISTERS, 
No. 387,355, 
  
Patented Aug. 7, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
at Ellist 
 
--4ES-2N-1- 
zS-N s R-A- WiS-Sz 
=22 S - S-2 -S-A- 
its at 
  
 
2 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
s 
  
 
N N N 
% 
% 
  
 
 
 
3 
tro 9- C) 
Your 
 
 
5, . 22 
N. P.ERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
---. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB M. HAMM, OF PITTSBURG, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
O EV CE FOR RNG NG FARE, REG SERS. 
SPECIFICATION orming part of Letters Patent No. 387,355, dated August 7, 1888, 
Application filed March 1, 1888, Serial No. 265, S47, (No model.) 
To all whon, it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB M. HAMAI, of 
Pittsburg, county of Allegheny, State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented or discevered a new 
and useful Improvement in Devices for Regis 
tering Car-Fares; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, concise, and ex 
act description thereof, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, making a part 
of this specification, in which-like letters in 
dicating like parts 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view of a 
Street-car, showing the position and manner 
of attachment of my device for ringing the 
fare-register. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal view, 
partly in section, of the front end and a por 
tion of the side of the car, showing in detail 
the manner of attachment to the register. Fig. 
3 is a face view, drawn to an enlarged scale, of 
the operative part of my device. Fig. 4 is a de 
tailed view of the portion of the operative rod 
in my device which is provided with a sleeve 
on which are mounted pins to engage corre 
sponding slots in the arm of a bell-crank. Fig. 
5 is a face view of the plate at the end of the 
car through which the rod passes and by which 
it registers and is retained in position when 
locked. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means for ringing the register of a street-car, 
which will act with certainty and convenience 
when called into use, and which may at the 
same time be readily thrown into such a posi 
tion and locked there as to preclude the pos 
sibility of its being used to ring the register 
by design or mistake until it is released. 
The ordinary method now in use for ring 
ing the fare-register consists of attaching a 
cord or strap to the register, which the con 
ductor pulls as he takes each fare. The re 
semblance to the ordinary bell-rope or strap 
is so great and the proximity of the two is such 
that the passengers very often, and sometimes 
even the conductors, pull the wrong rope, to 
the vexation and permanent loss of the con 
ductor; or, if the fare-register be locked, a sud 
den pull on it by means of the strap tends to 
strain it and throw it out of order. To over 
come these difficulties and annoyances has been 
my effort, and to this end I have provided 
means which, by reference to the drawings, 
will proceed to describe more in detail. 
A shows a rod, which may be made of brass 
tubing or any suitable material, running length 
wise of the car and projecting at both ends far 55 
enough to provide a convenient hand-hold 
on both platforms. This rod is also provided 
with balls or brass knobs at at both ends to aid 
the hand-hold. Inside the car the rod is Sup 
ported at suitable intervals by rollers a', hung 60 
from the roof. Near the forward end of the 
rod is placed a collar, c, confined in place by 
pins preventing longitudinal notion of the 
sleeve on the rod. On the sleeve care mounted 
pins i, which engage in the slots b of one arm 65 
of a bell-crank, B, which by means of its other 
arm connects with the ordinary fare register 
of a street-car, and which, when actuated by 
the longitudinal motion of the rod A, it rings. 
The construction of the outer arm of the bell- 70 
crank B is shown at Fig. 3, it being subdi 
vided into arms b' and l, inclosing the rod A 
around the collar c, and engaging with it by 
means of the pins i of the sleeve c through the 
slots b of the arms b' and l. 
On the rod A, where it passes through the 
forward end of the car, is mounted the find, 
which registers with the slot c of the plate C, 
and which, when out of register with the slot 
c, confines the rod A by passing back of the 
plate C, as shown in dotted outline in Fig. 5, 
thus preventing longitudinal motion of the 
rod. 
The operation of my device will be readily 
apparent. Movement of the rod A backward 85 
will, of course, put in motion the bell-crank 
B, which, being connected with the register, 
rings in the fare, so that if the conductor pulls 
the rod toward him when standing on the end 
of the car opposite the register the ordinary go 
spring of the register will draw the rod back 
to its place as soon as he lets it go. When he 
reverses ends on the car, he would, of course, 
push on the rod instead of pull, so that from 
either end or inside the car my device will be 
equally effective. When in use, the rod. A 
must be turned so as to register with the slot 
c" of the face-plate C, being held in position 
thereby. When not in use, the rod is to be 
pushed in until the find just clears the plate 
95 
75 
ICO 
O 
25 
45 
SO 
387,355 
connected with the register, which it rings, and 
the other arm divided into two parts, band b, 
each slotted to engage with pins above and be - 20 
low the rod A by which it is actuated, substan 
tially as set forth and described. 
3. In a device for ringing the register of a 
street-car, the rod A, having mounted thereon 
the sleeve c, provided with pins i, engaging 25 
corresponding slots in the arms of a bell-crank 
connected with the register, which it rings, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto set my 
hand. 
JACOB M. HAMMI. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. SCHMIDT, 
JAMES M. NEWIN. 
C, it being made of proper length for that pur 
pose, then given a slight turn, when it is at 
Once locked, and the register cannot be rung 
until the rod is so turned as to again cause the 
find to register with the slot c. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim herein, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a device for ringing the register of a 
street-car, the combination, with a rod run. 
ning lengthwise through the car, of a bell 
crank having a slotted divided arm engaging 
the rod and connecting with the register, 
which it rings, by means of the other arm, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a device for ringing the register of a 
street-car, the bell-crank B, having one arm 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387456.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. SILVIS. 
WRENCE, 
No. 387,456, 
Patented Aug. 7, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
assa.133 
 
57. SASSESS 
 
p 
 
 
 
WITNESSES. 
 
26 24-4 
-64 % voxo 
 
al 
S. f 
R 
 
as 
INVENTOR, 
97% eeds, 
By tle is 
ATTORNEY, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JONATEAN MOORE SILVIS, OF KITTANNING, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WRENCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 387,456, dated August 7, 1888. 
Application filed May 17, 1888, Serial No. 274,184. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern 
Be it known that I, JoNATHAN MooRE SIL 
VIS, of Kittanning, in the county of Armstrong 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
new and Improved Wrench, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to wrenches, and has 
for its object to provide a wrench so con 
structed and arranged as to be easily adjusted 
and operated. 
The invention consists in a wrench con 
structed as hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figurel illustrates a Wrench constructed in 
accordance with this invention, with a portion 
partly removed, disclosing a portion of the 
internal mechanism. Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
tion thereof on the linea ac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is 
a detail, with parts insection and broken away, 
of the head of the wrench, showing the ratchet 
and pawl locked in position. Fig. 4 is a simi 
lar view showing the ratchet mechanism un 
locked. Fig. 5 is a plan view of the head of 
the wrench, and Fig. 6 is a horizontal section 
thereof. 
In the construction of this invention sliding 
3O jaws 1 are mounted in a support, 2, having a 
tubular shank, 3, located in correspondingly 
shaped openings 4 in the end of the shank 5. 
The shank 3 extends across the upper end of 
a chamber, 6, in the end of the shank 5, and 
is formed with a ratchet, 7, with which a pawl, 
8, is held in engagement by means of a spring, 
9, secured to the bottom of chamber 6. The 
pawl S is nuounted on a rod, 10, extending 
through openings ill in the sides of the cham 
ber 6, and provided with an operating handle 
or button, 12. By means of this construction 
the pawl 8 is permitted to have a vertical 
yielding movement, to allow the ratchet-teeth 
7 to slip overit in rotating the jaws 1 with their 
support 2. The pawl 8 is formed with two op 
positely-beveled sides, 13, and two oppositely 
V-shaped notched sides, 14, and the ratchet 7, 
with projections 15, corresponding to the 
notches of sides 14, and alternating with the 
teeth of ratchet 7. 
SO 
35 
45 
By rotating the rod 10 a quarter of a turn 
a notched side, 14, is brought into engage 
ment with a projection, 15, as in Fig. 3; or a 
beveled side, 13, is projected into the path of 
the line of movement of ratchet 7, as shown in 
Fig. 4. In the former case the pawl 8 locks 
the ratchet, thereby preventing the Wrench 
from acting as a ratchet-wrench, and in the 
latter case the pawl and ratchet are permitted 
to act when it is desired to use the Wrench as 
a ratchet-wrench. Access is had to the cham 
ber 6 by means of a detachable slide, i6, cov 
ering an opening, 17, in the side of the cham 
ber 6. 
The handle 18 of the wrench is preferably 
formed with a square hole, 19, in which is lo 
cated the square end 20 of shank 5, having at 
its lower end a recess, 2, in which is a Spring 
catch, 22, having a bent end, 23, which en 
gages the end of handle 18 and secures it in 
shortened position, with its upper end resting 
against the shoulder 24 of shank 5. By means 
of this construction the handle of the Wrench 
may be lengthened by disengaging the bent 
end 23 from the end of handle IS and extend 
ing the latter on the square end 20 of Shank 5 
to any distance desired. 
The sliding jaws 1 are adjustable on the Sup 
port 2 for different-sized nuts by the follow 
ing-described means: The jaws 1 are formed 
with shanks 25, which are located in Sockets 
26 in the support 2, and limited in their out 
ward movement by means of pins 27 in the 
sockets 26, engaging slots 28. The jaws are 
automatically moved into extended position 
by means of coiled springs 29, located in the 
recesses 30, formed in the shanks 25 and the 
adjacent side of the sockets 26, and are held in 
adjusted position by means of a pin, 31. On the 
end of a spring, 32, secured to the support 2, 
the pin 31 passing through a hole, 33, in the 
latter and engaging a series of teeth, 34, on 
the shank 25. The pin 31 is released from 
engagement with the teeth 34 by means of a 
projection, 35, located in a recess, 36, in sup 
port 2, and bearing against the Spring 32. 
The jaws 1 may be set to the desired adjusted 
position by first releasing their shanks, the 
springs 29 thereupon moving them into ex 
tended position, and then pushing the jaws 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
OO 
387,456 
5 
O 
IS 
35 
5 
2. In a ratchet-wrench, the shank 5, having 
toward each other until the nut is clamped, 
its head formed with a chamber, 6, provided 
when, the pins 31 engaging the teeth 34, the 
jaws will be held in position for turning the 
with slots 11 in its sides, the pawl 8, formed 
with alternating beveled sides 13 and notched 
nut. The latter may be done either by the 
sides 14 in said chamber, the rod 10, extending 
pawl-and-ratchet movementor with the ratchet 
through slots 11 and having a handle, 12, and 
and pawl locked, as hereinbefore set forth. 
carrying said pawl, and the spring 9, mounted 
The jaws 1 are readily disengaged from the 
nut by pulling out the springs 32 by means of 
in chamber 6 and bearing on said pawl, in 
the projections 35. 
combination with the supports 2, having tubu 
lar shank 4, extending through chamber 6, the 
By means of this invention a wrench is pro 
vided which can be readily changed to oper 
ratchet 7, with projections 15, alternating with 
ratchet-teeth and located in chamber 6 adja 
ate as a ratchet-wrench or plain wrench, and 
cent to pawl S, and the spring-actuated sliding 
the jaws thereof easily adjusted to and released 
jaw 1, havingshanks 25, with teeth 34, located 
from a nut. The wrench will work between 
in sockets 26 in support 2, and springs 32, pro 
bars or in close quarters where other forms of 
Wrench cannot be used. By means of the vided with pins 31 and having projections 35, 
tubular shank of the jaw-support, the head of the pins 31 engaging the teeth 34, substan 
tially as described. 
the wrench may go over the end of the bolt. 
While I have described a specific construc 
3. In a wrench, the combination, with the 
shank 5, provided with tubular openings 4 in 
tion of parts, I do not intend to limit myself 
its upper end, the supports 2, having tubular 
thereto, as they may be varied without depart 
shanks 3, fitting in the openings 4, said sup 
ing from the essential features of the invention. 
ports having sockets 26, provided with stop 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
pins 27 and spring-actuated pins 31, of the ad 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
justable sliding jaws 1, having shanks 25 
Patent, is 
1. In a ratchet-wrench, the shank 5, having adapted to slide in the sockets 26, said shanks 
provided with slots 28, engaging with the pins 
its head formed with a chamber, 6, provided 
27, whereby the outward movement of the jaws 
With slots 11 in its sides, the pawl 8, formed 
With alternating beveled sides 13 and notched 
is limited, said shanks provided with teeth 
Sides 14 in said chamber, the rod 10, extend- 34, engaged by the pins 31 and the spring 29, to 
ing through slots 11 and having a handle, 12, and entered in the socket 26, and a socket, 30, formed 
carrying Said pawl, and the spring 9, mounted in the end of the shank 25, all arranged sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
in chamber 6 and bearing on said pawl, in 
combination with the supports 2, having tubu. 
lar shank 4 extending through chamber 6, 
JONATHAN MOORE SILVIS. 
the ratchet 7, with projections 15, alternating 
with ratchet-teeth and located in chamber 6 
adjacent to pawl 8, and the spring-actuated 
sliding jaws 1 in said support 2, substantially 
as shown and described. 
S. H. McIKEE, 
SIMON TRUBY, Jr. 
Witnesses: 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387557.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 387,557. 
W. H. ELMER. 
HUB, 
Patented Aug. 7, 1888. 
 
Z2. z. 
sinsSK-77 
6 
17 
2 
   
 
% 
N 
 
  
reece E. Kownarrara 
 
 
  
WITVESSES : 
49%T 
Attorney, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. ELMER, OF BERLIN, WISCONSIN. 
HUB. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 387,557, dated August 7, 1888. 
Application filed April 5, 1888. Serial No. 269,70. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. ELMER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ber 
lin, in the county of Green Lake and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented certain ney and use 
ful Improvements in Hubs, of which the fol. 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention has relation to certain new 
and useful improvements upon that class of 
cast-metal hubs wherein the tenons of the 
spokes are firmly clamped between a station 
ary flange formed integral with the hollow 
shank of the hub and an adjustable flange 
Working upon a screw-threaded portion of the 
said hollow shank, as will more fully herein 
after appear. 
The invention has for its objects, essen 
tially, to improve and simplify the construc 
tion of this class of metallic hubs, whereby 
the spokes will be more firmly and securely 
held against radial and lateral displacement 
Or movement should the tire of the wheelbe 
come worn and loose; also, to provide im 
proved and novel means for removably attach 
ing the axle to the inner end of the hollow 
shank of the hub, as will be fully hereinafter 
Set forth. 
To these ends the invention consists in cer 
tain novel features of construction that will 
be fully hereinafter set forth, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims appended. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, Fig 
ure 1 represents a longitudinal sectional ele 
vation of my improved hub; Fig. 2, a trans 
verse sectional view of the same, the adjust 
able clamping-fange being removed to show 
the disposition of the spokes; Fig. 3, a detail 
side elevation of the two-part clip employed 
for attaching the axle to the hub; Fig. 4, a 
detail perspective view of the upper half or 
part of this clip, and Fig. 5 a detail view of a 
spoke-tenon as used in my improved hub. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, Ades 
ignates the hollow.metallic shank or cylinder, 
closed at its outer end by means of a suitable 
cap, a, and provided on its inner end with an 
annular collar or flange, b, which stands at 
right angles to the said shank. Formed inte 
gral with this hollow shank, a little to one 
- 
side of the middle of its length, is a perma 
nent annular abutting flange or disk, B, which 
is formed at right angles to the longitudinal 
plane of the hollow shank, the bearing-face of 
this flange being directed outwardly. 
Formed integral with the shank A and the 
flange B on the bearing or outer side of this 
flange is a collar or ring, C, this ring being 
located in the angle formed by the said flange 
and shank. The ring Cextends along the hub 
shank a short distance, its width being nearly 
equal to that of the spoke itemons D, as shown 
in Fig. 1. This ring, as will be observed from 
Figs. 1 and 2, is provided entirely around its 
circumference with radial dovetail slots or 
spaces c, which extend from the bearing-face 
of the flange B to the outer edge of the ring. 
In a direct radial line with each one of these 
slots c on the bearing-face of the flange B is 
formed a lug or projection, d, which enters the 
tenons of the spokes when the same are pressed 
or forced into place, and serves to prevent the 
hub twisting or turning independently of the 
spokes. The spoke-tenons are all formed ta 
pering, so as to fit compactly between the per 
manent abutting disk B and the adjustable 
clamping-disk E, and at their extreme inner 
ends are provided with small dovetail tenons 
c', which are pressed firmly and snugly into 
the radial dovetail slots c of the ring C. By 
thus dovetailing the inner ends of the spokes 
into the hub it will be impossible for them to 
be withdrawn radially or become displaced 
when the tire of the wheel becomes loose. 
When the adjustable flange E (which works 
upon a screw-threaded portion of the shank 
and is provided with holese for the insertion 
of a tool or wrench to turnit) is screwed firmly 
up against the spoke-tenons, they will be all 
firmly secured in place and will be enabled to 
withstand strain in all directions. 
By making the ring C of less width than the 
spoke-tenons it is evident that it will be pre 
vented from interfering with the adjustable 
disk E when the same is screwed up close 
against the spoke-tenons. It also allows the 
diskE to be tightened should any of the spokes 
become a little loose from wear. The advan 
tage arising from this will be evident, as the 
spokes may be always kept perfectly tight 
and firm. 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
387,557 
- 
The spindle F of the axle is held in the hol- I tail slots c, and the spokes provided with ta: 
these tenons being provided on its extreme 
inner end with a smaller dovetail tenon, c', 
which enter the dovetail slots c in the ring C, 
and the adjustable clamping-disk E, adapted 
to firmly clamp and hold the spokes in their 
proper place, as and for the purpose herein 
set forth. 
2. The combination, with the hollow shank 
having formed integral with it the abutting 
disk B, the ring C, formed integral with the 
said shank and disk in the angle formed by 
them, the disk being of less width than the 
spoke-tenons and provided with radial dove 
tail slots c, and the spokes provided with 
dovetail tenons c, which are adapted to enter 
the said slots c and serve to retain the spokes 
in the hub, of the clamping-disk, Substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination of the hub provided 
on its inner end with a collar, b, and the axle 
provided with a spindle adapted to enter the 
said hub, of the clip G, consisting of the two 
parts gg, clamped to the axle by means of the 
bolt H, these two parts forming when thus at 
tached to the axle a complete cylinder, which 
embraces the said collar b upon the hub and 
permits the same to rotate freely, the inter 
posed washers, and the sand-band extension I, 
formed upon the upper part of the clip and 
embracing the upper portion of the shank of 75 
the hub, the said bolt extending through the 
parts of the clip and axle, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
low shank of the hub by means of the two- pering or wedge-shaped tenons, each one of 45 
part coupling or clip G, which will now be de 
scribed. The clip consists, essentially, of an 
upper and lower part or half, g g', each of 
which consists of a semi-cylindrical casing, h, 
these two casings having formed on their in 
ner ends flanges or sockets i i, which closely 
embrace the axle when the clip is attached 
thereto. The clip is attached to the axle by 
means of the vertical bolt H, which passes 
through the sockets i i and the axle, a nut, k, 
being tapped upon this bolt to bind the parts 
together. When the clip is thus attached to 
the axle, the two semi-cylindrical casings h h. 
form a complete cylinder, in which the collar 
b on the inner end of the shank A fits snugly, 
and is adapted to revolve, washers or pack 
ing-rings ill being interposed between this col 
lar b and the end walls of the cylinder thus 
formed. 
Formed integral with the upper portion of 
the clip and extending outwardly therefrom 
is a semi-cylindrical extension, I, which forms 
a sand-band to keep out sand and grit from 
the axle and contacting parts of the clip. This 
sand-band extension I is rounded off on top, 
so as to readily shed any dirt or other foreign 
substance that may be deposited thereon. 
Eaving thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a vehicle-hub, the combination, with 
the hollow shank A, having formed on a por 
tion of its outer surface screw threads, the sta 
tionary abutting disk B, formed integral with 
the Said shank A and standing at right angles 
to the same, this disk B being provided upon 
its outer or bearing face with projections which 
enter the tenons of the spokes, the ring C, 
formed integral with the said shank and disk 
in the angle formed by the same, this ring be 
ing provided with longitudinal radial dove 
WILLIAM. H. ELMER. 
Witnesses: 
A. L. TUCKER, 
P. F. WHITING. 
IO 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387657.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
C. B. ROCKWOOD, 
PYROTECHNIC HELMET, 
No. 387,657, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
| | 
/ Z24 
28i-tv cocs 
(2.7/.4%. 4. 
i.e.--2-34-ze 
2 
53 
N. PeterS. Photo-lithographer. Washington, D. C. 
3v-uovtov 
6%.4% 
elttorney 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
A. 
CHARLES B. ROCKWOOD, OF KEYSTONE, MINNESOTA. 
PYROTECHN C H E LM ET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 387,657, dated August 14, 1888. 
Application filed April 4, 1888, Serial No. 269,629. 
(No model.) 
Beit known that I, CHARLESB. ROCKWOOD, helmet, serving as a chin-strap. 
35 
45 
The vertical partition dividing the chamber 7o 
end of the tube Hand to oppositesides of the 
It is pro 
vided at the part adjacent to the mouth of the 55 
wearer with an opening, h. 
To al., whom it may concern. 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Keystone, county of Polk, State of Minne 
The operation is as follows: Through the 
5 sota, have invented a certain new and useful 
Pyrotechnic Helmet, of which the following is gauze tube F the absorbent material is allowed 
to take up hydrocarbon oil to its fullest ca 
a specification, reference being had to the ac 
Companying drawings. 
pacity. The helmet is then turned upside 6o 
My invention relates more particularly to down and the tube F is drained of its contents. 
The lamp D is then filled and lighted. When 
ever the wearer desires to produce a flash, he 
places his mouth to the opening h and blows 
therein. This oil produces a pressure on the 65 
top of the absorbent material and the gas from 
the hydrocarbon oil, together with air, will be 
forced out of the nozzleFland ignited by flames 
from the lamp. 
C into compartments serves to force the air to 
enter the gauze tube F, near its bottom, after 
passing through the absorbent material. As 
the air when saturated with hydrocarbon oil 
or gas is heavier than air alone, there will be a 75 
stratum of commingled gas and air always on the 
bottom of the receptacle. This commingled air 
and gas is very inflammable; hence whenever 
a part of it is forced out of the exit-tube it will 
make a brilliant flash of light. My helmet, 8o 
therefore, combines the advantages of a com 
mon torch and a flash-torch. 
It should be noted that the chamber or re 
ceptacle C may be used as a common oil-res 
ervoir and the exit-tube F F as a burner, and 85 
the helmet be used simply as a torch. The 
separate lamp, absorbent material, and flash 
tube, however, greatly add to the effect and 
is my preferred construction. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 9o 
Patent of the United States, is as follows: 
1. The combination, with a helmet having a 
lamp and a closed chamber separate from said 
lamp, of a filling of absorbent material in said 
chamber adapted to hold light hydrocarbon 95 
oils in suspension, an exit-tube from said cham 
ber having its discharge end adjacent to the 
lamp burner, and a blast - tube terminating 
within said chamber and extending to within 
reach of the helmet-wearer's mouth, substan- Ioo 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, with a helmet having a 
lamp attached thereto and an inclosed recep 
tacle in its dome divided into compartments 
Jo means of obtaining novel pyrotechnic effects in 
street or public political parades or other or 
ganizations. 
It consists in the construction hereinafter 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, like letters referring to like 
parts throughout, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
Central vertical section, from front to rear, of 
a helmet embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a vertical cross-section on the line XX of 
Fig. 1. 
A is a helmet, which may be made of any 
Suitable material. 
B is the Sweat-band of the same. 
C is a horizontal diaphragm dividing off a 
chamber, C, in the dome of the helmet. 
D is a lamp within this chamber, provided 
with a burner, D', projecting through the top 
of the helmet. This lamp is adapted to con 
tain oil of any kind and serves as a torch. 
EE are vertical partitions attached to the 
sides of the lamp and top of the helmet and 
projecting downward near to the diaphragm 
C. The purpose of this vertical partition is 
to divide the receptacle into front and rear 
compartments having communication along 
their common floor. 
F is a vertical exit flash-tube composed of 
wire-gauze located within the rear compart 
ment and provided with a nozzle, F, projecting 
through the top of the helmet adjacent to the 
lamp-burner. 
G is a filling of absorbent material-as saw 
dust, for example-adapted to hold hydrocar 
bon oils in suspension. The whole of the re 
ceptacle C is filled with this absorbent mate 
rial. 
H is a metallic blast-tube projecting into 
the front compartment of the receptacle and 
So is provided with an open end terminating near 
the top of the helmet. 
EI is a flexible tube attached to the lower 
2 
387,657 
by a vertical partition stopping short of its 
bottom, of an exit-tube from one of said com 
partments having its discharge end adjacent 
to the lamp-burner, a blast-tube terminating 
near the top of the other compartment and 
provided with an extension to within reach of 
the helmet-wearers mouth, and a filling of 
absorbent material within said receptacle 
adapted to hold hydrocarbon oils or their 
gases in suspension, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a helmet having a 
lamp and a closed chamber separate from said 
lamp, of a tubular chin-strap having an open 
ing within reach of the helmet-wearer's mouth 
and provided with an extension terminating 
within said closed chamber, an exit-tube from 
said chamber having its outlet adjacent to the 
lamp-burner, and a filling of absorbent mate 
rial within said chamber holding hydrocarbon 
oils in suspension, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with the helmet A, bav 
ing a receptacle in its dome with two compart 
ments formed by the horizontal diaphragm C 
and the vertical portion EE, stopping short 
of the bottom, of the lamp D, having its body 
TC) 
15 
25 
within said receptacle and its burner f)' pro 
jecting through the top of the helmet, the per 
forated exit tube F, starting from the bottom 
of one compartment and terminating outside 
the helmet adjacent to the lamp-burner, the 
rigid blast-tube H within the other compart 
ment terminating near the top of the helmet, 
the flexible tubular chin strap H, attached to 
the lower end of the tube Hand provided with 
the opening h, and the absorbent material G 
within said chamber adapted to hold hydro 
carbon oils in suspension, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. A helmet having an inclosed chamber in 
its dome adapted to contain oil, and an exit 
tube projecting through the top of the helmet 
adapted to serve as a burner, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
invention I have hereunto set my hand this 
10th day of March, 1888. 
CHARLES B. ROCKWOOD. 
in presence of - 
EMMA. F. ELMORE, 
JAS. F. WILLIAMS. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387757.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BAILLIE. 
WOOD PLANING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 387,757, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1888. 
I Az7% 
: 
  
 
al 
E 
  
 
N. PETERs, Photo-uthographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. BAILLIE. 
WOOD PLANING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 387,757, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1888. 
22 
2ZZ2 
NN 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
Z72 e7zza 
% 
N, PETERS hoto-thographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BAILLIE, OF SALEMI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO EDWIN BAILLIE, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
WOOD a PANING MACH NE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 387,757, dated August 4, 1888. 
Application filed March 9, 1886. 
Serial No. 94,515. No node.) 
O 
25 
- 
To all willon it inlay concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN BAILLIE, of Salem, 
in the county of Columbiana, and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
5 ments in Wood-Planing Machines, of which 
improvements the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of wood 
planing machines known as Daniels or 
traverse planers, in which the material to 
be worked traverses with and upon a recipro 
cating carriage below a series of rotating cut 
ters which operate transversely to the grain of 
the wood. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
5 planing-machine of such character, which shall 
be of simple and inexpensive construction, 
and which may be operated either by hand or 
by power, as desired. 
To this end my invention, generally stated, 
consists in a traverse planing-machinein which 
are combined a bed-piece acting as a trans 
verse brace and connection for the frame mem 
bers, and having bearings for a driving-shaft 
and a feed-shaft, a driving-shaft journaled in 
the bed-piece and having a driving-pulley on 
One end and a seat or bearing for a hand-crank 
on the other, a cutter-head fixed upon a shaft 
suspended upon a bearing located within an 
oil-chamber fixed to a vertically sliding head 
or carrier, a driving-pulley, and a pair of idler 
or guide pulleys carrying a belt for rotating 
the cutter-shaft, a sliding table for carrying 
the work or stock to be planed, and a feed 
mechanism adapted to be actuated either from 
the driving-shaft or independently thereof. 
The improvements claimed are hereinafter 
fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
front view, in elevation, of a traverse planing 
machine embodying my invention; Fig. 2, a 
transverse section at the center of the verti 
cal shaft of the feed mechanism; Fig. 3, aver 
tical Section, on an enlarged scale, through the 
upper portion of the feed-shaft carrier and its 
Supporting post or standard; Fig. 4, a plan or 
top view, on an enlarged scale, of the cutter 
head; Fig. 5, a vertical section through the 
same at the linea, a of Fig. 4; Fig. 6, a view 
in perspective of one of the cutters detached; 
5o Fig. 7, a horizontal section through the cut 
45 
ter-shaft carrier and its standard at the line 
at at of Fig. 3; Fig. 8, a vertical central sec 
tion, on an enlarged scale, through the step 
and oil-reservoir of the cutter-shaft; Figs. 9 
and 10, side and front views, respectively, of 55 
the swinging crank by which the cone-pulley 
of the horizontal feed-shaft is made fast or 
loose thereon, as desired; and Fig. 11, a plan 
or top view of the step or bearing of the cut 
ter-shaft. 
In the practice of my invention I provide 
a frame composed of upper and lower longi 
tudinal beams or stringers, i. 2, vertical posts 
3, diagonal braces 4, and transverse end pieces, 
5. The frame is firmly braced and tied to- 65 
gether at or near its center by a cast-metal 
bed-piece, which also serves to support the 
bearings of the driving and vertical feed-shafts 
and the post of the cutter-shaft carrier, as 
presently to be described. The bed-piece is 7c. 
composed of a horizontal transverse plate, 6, 
having vertical end flanges, 7, on its ends and 
on its upper side, which fit against the sides 
of the frame-stringers 1, lower vertical end 
flanges, S, fitting against the inner longitudinal 75 
sides of the center vertical frame-posts, 3, ver 
tical transverse ribs 9, fitting against the trans 
verse sides of said posts, and a projecting 
horizontal plate, 10, covering one of the string 
ers 1, and supporting on its upper side the 8o 
vertical post or standard 11 of the cutter 
shaft, and on its lower side one of the bear 
ings 12 of a horizontal main or driving shaft, ... 
13. A vertical rib or plate, 14, extends across 
the bed-piece between the end flanges, 7, Said 85 
plate having a central bearing, 15, for a feed 
shaft, 16. The frame-posts and stringers are 
firmly secured by bolts to the adjacent flanges 
of the bed-piece. 
transversely to the frame in the bearing 12 of 
the bed-piece, and in a suitable bearing upon 
the opposite end of the bed-piece, and carries 
upon one of its ends fast and loose pulleys 17 
18, for the reception of a belt for transmitting 95 
power from a suitable prime mover when it is 
desired to so operate the machine, and has 
formed upon its opposite end a squared shank 
or seat, 19, adapted to receive the hub of a 
hand-crank, 20, by means of which the ma- Ioo 
The main or driving shaft 13 is mounted 9a 
2 
387,757 
O 
IS 
3O 
chine may be operated by hand. A bed or 
table, 21, for the reception of the stock to be 
planed, and provided with suitable clamps of 
any well-known and approved construction 
for holding the same, is adapted to traverse lon 
gitudinally on guides or ways 22 on the up 
per sides of the frame-stringers 1, suitable 
shoes or bearing-pieces 23 being fixed to the 
lower side of the table. 
Rectilineal movement upon the guides 22 is 
imparted to the table by means of feed gear 
ing of the following construction. A horizon 
tal feed-shaft, 24, is journaled in bearings on 
the lower frame-stringers, and carries a cone 
pulley, 25, which may be made either fast or 
loose thereon, according as the shaft 24 is to be 
rotated from the driving shaft 13, or independ 
ently thereof by hand, said pulley receiving a 
belt, 26, which passes around another cone 
pulley, 27, on the driving-shaft, the relative 
Speeds of the driving and feed shafts depend 
ing upon the diameters of the two cone-pull 
leys on which the belt 26 may be placed. The 
feed-shaft cone-pulley 25 is mounted loosely 
25 upon its shaft, and has a stop or projection, 
28, on its outer side. A crank, 29, is pivoted 
to the feed-shaft 24, exterior to the cone-pull 
ley 25, and when swung outwardly, so as to 
clear the stop 28, permits the shaft to be ro 
tated independently of the pulley; but when 
moved inwardly upon its pivots makes the 
pulley fast upon the shaft, admitting, in the 
former position, of the rotation of the shaft by 
hand-power applied to the crank, and in the 
latter of its rotation through the belt 26 from 
the driving-shaft. The crank 29 is pivoted by 
a pair of eyes or bosses, 72, upon set-screws 
74, forming trunnions and engaging a collar, 
71, fixed upon the outer end of the shaft 24, ad 
4o joining the hub or boss of its cone-pulley 25. 
A tappet, 77, fitting in a recess in the crank 
29, engages notches or recesses on the collar 
71, being pressed thereinto by a spring, 78, 
and holds the crank either in position for a 
dog or projection, 73, on its inner face to en 
gage the stop 28 of the cone-pulley, or for said 
Stop to be clear thereof when the shaft 24 is to 
be rotated by hand. The handle of the crank 
is set at an angle therewith, so as to be parallel 
ith the shaft 24 when the crank is swung into 
position for hand rotation. A sleeve, 30, hav 
ing a bevel-pinion, 31, upon each of its ends, 
is adapted to slide longitudinally on a key or 
feather on the feed-shaft, so that either of said 
pinions may, as desired, be engaged with a 
corresponding gear, 32, fixed upon the lower 
end of a vertical feed-shaft, 16, journaled in a 
lower bearing, 33, fixed to a cross-bar, 34, of 
the frame, and in the bearing 15 of the bed 
piece. A spur-pinion, 35, fixed upon the up 
per end of the shaft 16, engages a rack, 36, on 
the lower side of the table 21, and thereby im 
parts rectilineal movement thereto in one or 
the other direction, respectively, according to 
the direction of rotation of the shaft 16, as de 
termined by the pinion 31 of the shaft 24, 
which may be engaged with its lower gear, 32. 
55 
35 
45 
Er 
75 
85 
The sleeve 30 is shifted in position, so that 
either of its pinions 31 may be engaged with 
the gear 32 by a bell-crank-shifting lever, 37, 7O 
pivoted to the cross-bar 34, and having its 
lower arm coupled by links 38 to pins on a 
ring, 39, fitting freely around the sleeve 30. 
A vertically-traversing head or carrier, 40, 
is fitted to slide on guides or ways in a verti 
cal post or standard, 11, which is secured at 
its base to the projecting horizontal plate 10 
of the bed-piece. The carrier is moved upon 
the guides toward and from the upper surface 
of the stock upon the table 21 by an adjusting 
screw, 43, journaled in bearings in the postill 
and engaging a nut, 44, in the carrier. The 
screw 43 is rotated by a horizontal shaft, 45, 
mounted in bearings on the top of the post 
and provided with crank-arns 46, said shaft 
carrying a bevel-pinion, 47, engaging a similar 
pinion, 48, on the adjusting-screw. 
A cutter-shaft, 49, upon the lower end of 
which is screwed a cutter-head, 50, is suspended 
upon a step or bearing, 51, at the top of the 
carrier 40, and is maintained in normal axial 
position by guide-bearings 52 53 at the upper 
and lower ends of the carrier, between which 
guide-bearings a long cylindrical pulley, 54, 
is secured upon the cutter-shaft. A driving 
pulley, 55, fixed upon the driving-shaft 13, ad 
jacent to its fast and loose pulleys 17 18, car 
ries a belt, 56, which passes vertically to and 
around a guide-pulley or idler, 57, journaled 
on one side of the post 11, and thence hori 
zontally and forwardly to and around the cut 
ter-shaft pulley 54, from which it is led up 
wardly and rearwardly to and around another 
guide-pulley or idler, 58, which is journaled 
with its axis at an angle to that of the idler 
57 on the post 11, (both the idlers 57 58 be 
ing located on the same side of the axis of the 
cutter-shaft 49, so that the belt 56 shall be 
crossed between said idlers and the cutter 
shaft pulley 54) and thence to the driving 
pulley 55. The cutter-shaft pulley 54 is made 
of sufficient length to admit of the determined 
vertical traverse provided for the head 40 and 
the cutter-shaft carried therein to accommo 
date stock of different thicknesses, so that the 
belt 56 may have its full bearing upon the pull 
ley 54 at all points in such traverse; and it will 
be seen further that the belt, which in all ver 
tical adjustments of the position of the head 
and shaft embraces the largest practicable seg 
ment of the surface of the cutter-shaft pulley, 
passes to said pulley perpendicularly to its 
axis and leaves it at an angle to its axis, so as 
to exert its traction most effectively upon it. 
The upper step or bearing, 51, upon which 
the cutter-shaft 49 is hung and upon which it 
rotates, is of annular form and grooved upon 
its upper face for the reception of oil, and is 
fitted in an oil-chamber, 59, formed within a 
casting, 60, bolted to the top of the carrier 40. 
The cutter-shaft 49 bears upon the step 51. 
through a hardened steel collar, 61, screwed 
upon the end of the cutter-shaft. The oil 
chamber is closed by a cap, 62, having a hole, 
I 25 
(C5 
O 
CO 
387,757 
55 
85 
O 
horizontal feed-shaft adapted to be rotated 
64, for the Stupply of oil. End-play of the cut 
either by a belt from the driving-shaft or inde 
ter-shaft is prevented by a set-screw, 65, which 
pendently thereof, and a vertical feed-shaft 
may have a central oil-hole, 66, and is screwed 
gearing with said horizontal feed-shaft, said 
centrally into the cap 62, so as to bear upon 
vertical shaft being journaled in a bearing in 
the end of the cutter-shaft, being locked in ad 
5 
the bed-piece, and carrying a gear meshing 
justed position in the cap by a jam-nut, 67. 
with a rack on a table adapted to traverse on 
The planing of the stock on the table 21 is 
ways upon the frame-stringers, substantially as 
effected by two or more gouge-shaped cutters, 
set forth. 
6S, each of which is secured in a socket, 69, at 
4. The combination of a frame, a driving 
the outer end of one of the arms of the rotat 
shaft carrying a pulley and mounted in bear 
ing cutter-head 50. The cutters 6S are formed 
ings transversely to the frame, a vertical post 
of square steel, properly ground off at their 
or standard located upon one side of the frame, 
ends, and are fitted in sockets of similar sec 
a carrier adapted to travel vertically on said 
tion, in which they are clamped by set-screws 
post, a cutter-shaft carrying a head and cut 
70, bearing upon one of their angles and hold 
ters and a long pulley and journaled in said 
ing then firmly against the two opposite faces 
carrier, and a pair of idler's or guide-pulleys 
of their Sockets. Such construction is not 
journaled on the cutter-head standard, said 
herein claimed, as it will constitute the sub 
idlers being arranged in approximately the 
ject-matter of a separate application by me. 
same vertical plane and having their axes in 
My improvements provide a planing-ma 
clined one to the other and located on the 
chine of comparatively low cost of construc 
same side of the cutter-shaft, substantially as 
tion, which will effectively perform its func. 
tion of planing lumber so as to be perfectly 
set forth. 
5. The combination of a frame formed of 
square and out of wind, and which, being sus 
longitudinal stringers and vertical posts, a 
ceptible of operation by hand or by power, as 
bed-piece connecting said stringer's and posts 
may be found most suitable, is desirably ap 
and provided with a lateral extension, a ver 
plicable as a labor-saver in the shops of wagon 
tical post or standard fixed upon said lateral 
and carriage makers and general workers in 
extension, a carrier adapted to traverse verti 
hard wood, particularly where the use of 
cally on said post, a cutter-shaft carrying a 
power is not convenient or practicable. 
head and cutters and journaled in said car 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
rier, a driving-shaft journaled in the bed 
by Letters Patent 
piece, and a pair of idlers or guide-pulleys 
1. The combination of a frame formed of 
separable longitudinal stringers and vertical journaled on the cutter-head standard and 
adapted to carry a belt from a pulley on the 
posts, a bed-piece connecting said stringers 
driving-shaft to a pulley on the cutter-shaft, 
and posts and forming the base of a cutter 
substantially as set forth. 
head post or standard, and a cutter-shaft and 
6. The combination of a cutter-shaft carrier 
cutters mounted in bearings on a standard 
having an upper and a lower guide-bearing, 
fixed upon said bed-piece, substantially as set 
an oil-chamber secured to the top of said car 
forth. 
rier, a step or bearing fitted in said chamber, 
2. The combination of a frame, a bed-piece 
a cutter-shaft passing through the guide-bear 
connecting the stringer's thereof, a driving 
ings and having a cutter-head and cutters on 
shaft mounted in a bearing in the bed-piece 
its lower end, a collar fixed upon the cutter 
and carrying upon one eud a driving pulley 
shaft and resting upon the step, and a Set 
and upon the other a seat or bearing for a 
screw engaging the cap of the oil-chamber and 
hand-crank, a vertical standard fixed upon the 
bearing against the upper end of the cutter 
bed-piece, and a cutter - shaft and cutters 
shaft, substantially as set forth. 
mounted in bearings in said standard, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. The combination of a frame, a bed-piece 
connecting the stringers thereof, a driving 
shaft mounted in a bearing in the bed-piece, a 
J. C. BOONE, 
FRANK GEORGE. 
JOHN BALLIE. 
Witnesses: 
2 5 
3) 
3. 5 
4) 
5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387857.txt	(No Model.) 
T. W. CARRICO. 
RECEPTACLE FOR USE IN OUTHOUSES AND LIKE PLACES, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1888. 
No. 387,857, 
 
 
ls 
 
6 k KV2 
A. 
 
y 
2 
Aid. A 
F. 
   
SS) 
2Wit-vacaocs 
HIT 
/6-de-1- a 7-a-24 
64? 4-4. 
W 
34-ye-14to, 
Wue 
974 
f 
38 A. &lt to t11c 
on f 
-6.4%-4- 
 
f 
 
  
as % 
N. 
A75 
filliam 
e S. 
Y-7 
7 
 
 
 
 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
/ 
w 
ir JNETED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOAIAS. W. CARRICO, OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS. 
RECEPTACLE FOR USE IN OUTHOUSES AND KE PACES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 387,857, dated Allgust 4, 1888. 
Application filed July 25, 1887. Serial No. 245,247. No model.) 
5 
To aiZ it hot, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS W. CARRICO, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at San 
Antonio, in the county of Bexar, State of Texas, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
linents in Receptacles for Use in Outhouses 
and other Like Places, of which the following 
is so full, clear, and exact a description as will 
enable others skilled in the art, to which my 
invention appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
receptacles for use in outhouses and other like 
places, the object being to construct a simple 
and inexpensive receptacle which will not give 
out any offensive or unhealthy odors while be 
ing removed from the outhouse for the pur 
pose of cleaning or for any other purpose. 
The invention consists in certain peculiari. 
ties in the colastruction, arrangement, and com 
bination of the various parts, substantially as 
will be hereinafter described, and then par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims at the end 
of the specification. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a plan of a barrel 
head, showing my means for making it air 
tight. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional side elevation of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a detail view showing a 
thumb-screw for bearing upon the plate or 
ring. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of a portion 
of the barrel, showing a different form of joint. 
Fig. 5 is a view of a beveled portion of the 
plate which covers the perforation in the bar. 
rel-head. Fig. 6 is a detail view of a modified 
form of fastening for the cover-ring. Fig. 7 
is another modification of an equivalent de 
vice for the same purpose. Fig. 8 is a detail 
view, with parts broken away, of one end of one 
of the tapered flanges D'and the key E, shown 
in Fig. 4. 
Similar letters of reference denote corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
A represents the barrel, which may be made 
of any suitable metal, and B its removable 
cover. The under Side of the head B has se 
cured to it, by cementing or otherwise, a rub 
ber ling, B, which is adapted to rest upon the 
top of the barrel and form a tight joint be 
tween the barrel and the head. Obviously, 
different forms of joint might be adopted, if 
desired. This barrel-head B is provided with 
a central perforation, C, covered by a plate, 
C, which plate is formed with lugs or projec 
ions C, by means of which and the lugs b'b' 
it is secured to said barrel-head. The inte 
rior of the barrel is preferably provided with 
a coating, A, of creosote, coal-tar, or other 
impervious material, in order to prevent the 
absorption by the receptacle itself of the liquids 
contained therein, and which at the Sanae time 
adds greatly to its durability. 
D represents a ring encircling the cover C, 
formed with lugs l' extending inward, and 
which is likewise formed with lugs or projec 
tions D', extending out a slight distance be 
yond the edge of the barrel-head, adapted to 
be forced under the keys E, which keys pro 
ject a sufficient distance down the sides of the 
barrel, where they are secured by bolts ee or 
otherwise. The key E may be screw-threaded 
above the lug D for the reception of the hand 
nut H, or other suitable devices, by means of 
which the plate, and Consequently the head, 
can be screwed firmly down upon the top of 
the barrel, the rubber ring B' serving to form 
a water and air tight joint between the head 
and the barrel. 
When a very secure fastening is required, a 
bolt, E, may be secured to the barrel and 
screw-threaded to receive a hand-nut, H, as 
shown in Fig. 6; or it may be perforated to re 
ceive keys at at, as shown in Fig. 7. 
This receptacle is adapted to be placed un 
derneath a pipe passing from the Seat of a wa 
ter-closet, (not shown,) the pipe having its end 
situated within the perforation C. When it is 
desired to empty the receptacle, it is discon 
nected from said pipe, and the cover C is 
placed over said perforation and screwed down 
tightly, so that no offensive or unhealty odors 
can escape while the receptacle is being moved. 
The ring D is formed with inwardly-pro 
jecting flanges b, and the cover C is formed 
with beveled lugs C, adapted to fit beneath 
the lugs b' and lock the cover C in position 
and keep it from accidental displacement. The 
cover C is also formed with upwardly-pro 
jecting flanges C'C', having grooves for the re 
ception of a lever or handle, G, passing from 
one of said lugs C" and projecting out a suffi. 
cient distance beyond the sides of the barrel 
to form a handle, by means of which the cover 
35 
55 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
 
387,857 
is turned into locking engagement with the 
flanges b'. In these figures the key E is 
formed with a flange, e, which is adapted to 
rest upon the top of the tapered flange D' of 
the ring D, and said key is secured to the bar 
rel in any convenient manner. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown a key as having a 
thumb-screw passing through the flangee" and 
serving to better secure the key to the ring; 
but this thumb-screw can be dispensed with, 
if desired. 
When it is desired to remove the barrel 
cover, the lever or handle G is removed from 
the flange C, and is placed within the hinged 
rings C C, thus forming a handle, by means 
of which the lifting of the barrel-head will be 
facilitated. 
It will be evident that with a receptacle con 
structed after the plan herein set forth the es 
cape of offensive and unhealthy odors into 
the surrounding atmosphere is prevented, and 
a receptacle is provided which is extremely 
simple in its construction, and which is en 
tirely air and water tight. 
It will be evident, further, that by coating 
the interior of the receptacle with impervious 
material-Such as creosote or coal-tar-it can 
not absorb any of the liquid contained therein. 
Having now described the purposes, con 
struction, and advantages of my invention, 
what I believe to be new and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, and what I therefore claim, 
1S 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
1. The receptacle proper and its removable 
perforated head, and the cover for said perfo 
ration, having beveled flanges for engagement 
with flanges formed on a ring secured to the 
barrel-head, which ring is also formed with 
flanges extending out beyond the sides of the 
receptacle, and keys secured to the sides of the 
receptacle and engaging with the flanges of 
the ring, substantially as herein shown and de 
Scribed. 
2. The receptacle and its removable perfo 
rated head, and a cover for said perforation 
having beveled flanges and formed with lugs 
having grooves, in combination with a ring Se 
cured to the barrel-head and having inwardly 
extending flanges for engagement with the 
beveled flanges of the cover, and having also 
flanges extending out beyond the sides of the 
receptacle, and a handle situated within the 
grooves of the lugs on the cover, and means 
for securing the head to the receptacle, consist 
ing of keys secured to the receptacle on the 
barrel-head, and a packing between the head 
and the receptacle, all arranged and combined 
to operate substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
TEHOMAS W. CARRCO, 
Witnesses: 
JOHN J. STEVENS, 
MIADSON FOSTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US387957.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
P. R. MOREON & C. DURAND. 
APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING THE READING OF GEOGRAPHICAL, GLOBES. 
No. 387,957, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1888. 
 
Rs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, b. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PIERRE REGIS MOREON AND CLAUDE DURAND, OF LYONS, FRANCE, 
APPARATUS FOR FACLITATING THE READING OF GEOGRAPHICAL GOBES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 387,957, dated August 14, 1888. 
Application filed October 21, 1887. Serial No. 253,272. (No model.) Patented in France April 7, 1887, No. 182,672, and in 
Belgium April 7, 1887, No. 77,008. 
IO 
To all Zulon, it naily concern 
Be it known that we, PIERRE REGIs Mo 
REON and CLAUDE DURAND, both citizens of 
the Republic of France and residents of Lyons, 
(Rhne,) France, have invented certain Im 
provements in Apparatuses for Facilitating the 
Reading of Geographical Globes, (for which we 
have obtained patents in France, No. 182,672, 
dated April 7, 1887, and in Belgium, No. 
77,008, dated April 7, 1887,) of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of our invention is to enable one 
to read with facility the map on a geographical 
or school globe. 
Our device operates on the following prin 
ciples: Two series of numbers or conventional 
signs are employed, and each geographical 
point on the map on the globe, or each of cer 
tain selected points thereon, has belonging to 
it two of these numbers or signs, one from each 
series. 
Our device or apparatus serves to point 
out or indicate any one of these locations on 
the globe by setting the indicators of the ap 
paratus to the respective numbers or signs 
(belonging to that location) on graduated arcs 
bearing said numbers or signs. 
In the drawing, which is a perspective view 
of a map-globe provided with our apparatus, 
G is a semicircular graduated arc or limb, 
which is pivoted at points in the prolonged 
axis of the globe A at its poles, and is capable 
of being swung around the globe on said 
pivots. This arc G bears one series of the 
numbers or signs above mentioned, and has 
on it an index-slide, MI. The arc G carries 
an index E, which plays over a graduated 
circle or limb, H, bearing the other series of 
numbers or signs above mentioned. This cir 
cle Hisarranged with its plane at right angles 
with the axis of the globe, and is fixed with 
respect to and is concentric with the axis of 
the globe. 
The operation of the device is simple. It 
is first desirable to prepare a table or key 
for the various geographical points or places 
on the globe-map, and this may be done as 
45 
55 
75 
follows: Take the city of Lyons, for example, 
swing the arc G on its pivots and slide the in 
dex M thereon until the point on the latter 
rests on Lyons on the globe. Then note down 
along with the name. Lyons, on a suitable 
ruled sheet, the number or arc G at which 
slide M stands, and the number on circle H. 
at which pointer Estands. This may be done 
with respect to as many geographical localities 
as it is desired to put in the table or key. Sup 
pose, for example, that in the table we find 
after the name Lyons the numbers 56.90. 
To find Lyons on the globe-map, move the slide 
M. to the number 56 on arc G, and then swing 
the arc about the globe until the pointer E 
stands at the number 90 on circle H. The 
pointer on slide M will then stand at Lyons on 
the globe. 
Of course the table or key may be primarily 
prepared and sold with the globe and appa 
ratus. 
The diameter of the globe need bear no spe 
cial relation to the sizes of the arc G and cir 
cle H, except that the globe must be small 
enough to turn within arc G. 
Having thus described our invention, we do 
not broadly claim to have discovered the gen 
eral principles upon which our apparatus op 
erates; but what we do claim is 
The combination, with a geographical or 
school globe, of the graduated arc G, pivoted 
at points in the prolonged axis of the globe, 
and provided with an index-slide, M, and a 
pointer, E, and the graduated circle H, fixed 
with respect to and concentric with the axis 
of the globe, said pointer E being adapted to 
move over said ring H, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto 
signed our names in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
MOREON, PIERRE REGIS, 
CLAUDE DURAN). 
Witnesses: 
XAVIER JANICOT, 
JEAN GERMAIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388057.txt	(No Model.) , 
W. H. LEWIS 
PLATE HOLDER, 
No. 388,057, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1888. 
(2:2: 
A 42.7 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. LEWIS, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO THE E. & II. T. ANTEIONY 
& COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PLATE HOLDER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 388,057, dated August 21, 1888, 
Application filed January 28, 1SS3. 
Seri No. 263,224. 
as 
aw 
(No mode.) 
25 
I5 
To a 27, it'? On, if 72.67? conce772. 
Be it known that I, WILLIANT H. LEWIs, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
5 New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Plate - Holders for 
Photographic Cameras, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
IO plate-holders for photographic cameras, where. 
by the holder can be instantly adapted to any 
desired size of plate, and any desired portion 
of the plate can be presented within the field 
Of the lens. 
In the drawings like reference-letters indi 
cate like parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 illustrates a side plan view of the 
invention. Fig. 2 illustrates an edgewise view 
of the invention in vertical section. Fig. 3 
2O illustrates an edgewise view of the invention 
in horizontal section. 
The construction of the apparatus is as foll 
lows: C, is an outer frame of wood or metal 
Or other suitable material. 
b are two rods or strips of materiai extend 
ing across the frame (, at or near the vertical 
edges thereof, 
c care two plate-clamping bars, preferably 
provided with tubular sockets d on their ends, 
3O which slide on the bars b and act as guides 
for the clamping-bars c c, and secure smooth 
sliding movement of the bars, preventing jam 
ming by reason of one end going up or down 
faster than the other end. 
e e, &c., are latches pivoted at f to the bars 
b, and so formed at their free ends, and so lo 
cated as to enter crosswise notches g g made in 
the bars b. They all swing laterally on their 
several pivots. 
The latches e e, which are attached to one 
of the bars, and may be the same on both, but 
preferably the upper one only, are spring 
latches, as shown on the upper bar in Fig. 1, 
the normal position of the free end of these 
45 Spring-latches being somewhat separated from 
the bar. The plate - clamping bar's c 0 have 
ledges h is along each edge, those on one edge 
being preferably somewhat higher than those 
on the other, so that the plates will be pre 
So vented from slipping off from the clamping 
bars. 
35 
 
The operation is as follows: The size of 
the plate and the particular portion thereof 
which it is desired to expose in the field of 
the lenses being determinel, the clanping- 55 
bars e are moved up or down along the side 
bars, b, to the needful position to properly 
hold the plate, and are there held by the en 
gagement of the latches with the appropriate 
notches g in the side bars, the position of the 60 
upper bar being such that the spring-latches 
e e will be under tension when the plate is in 
place between the clamping-bars. Thus the 
plate will be held by the pressure of the springs 
against its opposite edges. The position of 65 
the plate may be adjusted laterally by sliding 
it to the right or left along the claimping-bars 
between the ledges h. h. thereon, 
It is obvious that instead of the bars l to 
there may be notches made in the inner edges 
of the side pieces of the framea, and the sliding 
plate-holding bars may be guided in any Suit 
able manner by a groove in the side frame, or 
otherwise. The latches will then engage in 
suitable detents made ou the frame (, or in 75 
cogs or teeth formed in a strip of metal or 
other material attached to the side pieces of 
the frame (t. 
It will be obvious to those skilled in this art 
that changes may be made in the details of So 
construction shown by me without departing 
from my invention. 
7 O 
claim 
1. An improved plate - holder having an 
outer frame, within which are placed recessed 85 
bars on opposite sides of the frame, with which 
engage plate-holding bars movable toward 
and from each other, the Said bars being pro 
vided with pivoted and laterally - swinging 
latches, which engage with the recesses in the 
said bars within the frame, the bars having 
plate. confining ledges on their edges, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination, in a plate-holder, of a 
frame, ct, notched bars l, movable plate-hold 
ing bars c, and pivoted laterally - Swinging 
latches e, adapted to engage with the notches 
in the bars b, substantially as set forth. 
3. An in proved plate - holder having an 
outer frame, within which are supported plate 
holding bars movable toward and from each 
other, one of said bars being provided with 
95 
OO 
388,057 
spring-latches attached to it, and which en 
gage with notches on the frame, whereby the 
bars are pressed toward each other by spring 
action, substantially as set forth. 
4. An improved plate - holder having an 
outer frame, within which are supported plate 
holding bars movable toward and from each 
other, and provided with plate-retaining ledges 
on their edges, one of said bars being provided 
with spring-latches attached to it, and which 
engage with notches on the frame, whereby 
the bars are pressed toward each other and 
the plate held by spring action, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. In a plate-holder, the combination of 
movable plate-hoiding bars constructed and 
O 
arranged to be clamped at predetermined 
places to the sides of the frame of the plate 
holder, and springs movable with the bars, 
and which engage at differing places, depend- 20 
ing on the position of the bars with the sides 
of the frame, and whereby the bars are pressed 
toward each other by spring action and the 
plate so held, substantially as set forth. 
Youk and State of New York, this 27th day of 
January, A. D. 1SSS. 
WILLIAM. H. LEWIS. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 25 
Witnesses: 
PHILLIPs ABBOTT, 
S. B. ROGERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388157.txt	(No Model.) 
C. TESKE. 
WATCH CASE SPRING, 
4. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 388,157, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1888. 
   
azz. 3, 
a2, 6, 
A1/A2a47 ataza, 
/7/27/2/. 
 
N. PETERs, Phobo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
C. TESKE, 
WATCH CASE SPRING, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 388,157, 
Patented Aug. 2l l888. 
Azz. /, 
 
W7%aaaaa, 
%. 644 & 
& Xs \\\\3). 
/zzzzzz 
664. 27%. 
7/arce 2%%a-e-G 
%. 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 388,157, 
C. TESKE. 
WATCH CASE SPRING, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 21, 1888. 
a 72.3/, 
a2.33, 
2 SS 3s 2RSS 
26244 
6.3.3 
aware 44%. 
 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer.' Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
C. TESKE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 388,157, 
WATCH CASE SPRING, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1888. 
W7%aaaaa, 
M-22/2/-, 
7% 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Ethiographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES TESKE, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
WATCH CASE SPRNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 388,157, dated August 21, 1888, 
Application filed October 6, 1SS7. 
Serial No. 25,62, (No model.) 
O 
To att, whon it invay conceriv: 
Be it known that I, CHARLESTESKE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Hartford, 
in the county of Hartford and State of Con 
necticut, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Spring Catches for Watch 
Cases, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to spring-catches for 
watch cases; and the main objects of my in 
vention are durability and general efficiency 
in Operation and simplicity of construction. 
In the accompaning drawings, Figure 1 is a 
plan view of my catch and attached dust-rim 
as applied to a watch-case, the latter being 
mainly in section. Fig. 2 (which, as well as 
all the following figures, except Figs. 45 and 
46, is on an enlarged scale) is a front elevation 
of my catch, the push-pin being shown in trans 
verse section. Fig. 3 is a transverse section 
of the supporting-rim for my catch, the plane 
of section being near one end of said rim. Fig. 
4 represents in detached plan views the catch, 
the springs, and the supporting-rim, together 
with the ends of the dust-band secured thereto. 
Figs. 5 to 47 represent various modifications 
of my improvements, which figures will be 
more particularly referred to in describing 
each modification. 
A designates the watch-case provided with 
the ordinary winding stem, which also serves 
as the push-pin (t. My improvement, however, 
is not to be confined to stem-winding watches, 
as any push-pin that will move the catch in 
Wardly to disengage it is for the purposes of 
my invention the full equivalent of the push 
pin (t. 
In this connection it should be noticed 
that the push-pin need not be located within 
the stem of the ring or bow, but may be at 
tached directly to the catch and project through 
the case at one side of the stem, as shown in 
Fig. 43. 
The engaging end of the catch B is substan 
tially of ordinary form, while its body portion 
is provided with laterally-extending arms b b. 
The body of the catch and its arms b b are fit 
ted to notches and recesses in the supporting 
rim C, to which rim I prefer to secure the 
dust-band C by attaching its ends to the re 
spective ends of the rim C. While the dust 
band makes the device more complete, it is 
evident that my supporting-rim and catch may 
be used without the dust-band. The Support 
ing-rim is intended to be received in the usual 
space within the edge of the case and firmly 
secured to the case in the position shown in 
Fig. 1, the dust-band covering and closing that 
portion of the space that is not closed by the 
supporting-rim. The shape in cross-section 
or end view of the supporting-rim is shown in 
Fig. 3, from which it will be seen that the up 
per and lower flanges of the rim form a longi 
tudinal recess that is open at the outer edge 
of said rim. 
I use the terms apper and lower' with 
reference to the positiou illustrated in Figs. 2 
and 3. The middle portion of the upper flange 
is cut away or notched, as at e, Fig. 4, to per 
mit the body of the catch to be received 
therein, while the arms b b on each side of the 
catch lie within the recess in the supporting 
rim. Within this recess 
also secure a suit. 
able spring or springs-as, for instal)ce, the 
springs d d-secured by screws to the rim C, 
with their ends pressing outwardly against the 
arms l l of the catch. The push-pin (t, is ar 
ranged to press against the catch, so that push 
ing inwardly on said pin will move the catch 
inwardly against its springs and release said 
catch from the lid of the case, (the catch may 
be applied to either the front or back lid,) 
and when the push-pin is released the catch 
will be returned to its normal position by 
means of the springs. In closing the case the 
lid strikes the bevel of the catch, and causes it 
to slide inwardly. Meanwhile the arms and 
base of the catch, resting upon the lower lange of 
the supporting-rim, furnish a firm support for 
the catch and prevent it from moving in the 
same direction as the contacting edge of the lid 
which is pressed upon it, and therefore it can 
not move away from said lid except by sliding 
inwardly. As soon as the projection on the 
lid has passed by the lip on the catch, the lat 
ter snaps into place under the influence of its 
springs. By this construction, which thus 
holds the catch closely against the lid, the lid 
can be fitted to shut very tight and close and 
yet have the catch properly engage there with. 
While prefer the construction illustrated 
in Figs. 1 to 4, inclusive, and will base my most 
limited or specific claims thereon, it is evident 
that some features of inny invention have a 
3O 
45 
65 
90 
lOO 
 
2 
388,157 
broader application and that some of the ad 
vantages of my improvement may be reaped 
from modified constructions, some of which 
are as follows: 
Figs. 5, 6, and 7 show one modification, in 
which I preferably attach the same dust-bande 
in the same way, the supporting-rim C and 
catch B being shown separately in Fig. 5. The 
rim is of H form in cross-section, as shown in 
Fig. 6, thereby forming recesses in the top and 
bottom. It is notched in the middle to receive 
the body of the catch, and the arms b b rest 
and play in the upper recess and are pressed 
upon by springs which are the same as those 
first described and act in the same way. In 
order to hold the catch from working up 
wardly I secure to its under side the plate f, 
Fig. 7, which rests in the under recess or 
groove of the supporting-rim. In this Fig. 7 
the supporting-rim Cisillustrated in a central 
longitudinal section and the push-pin (, in 
transverse Section. 
Figs. 8 and 9 illustrate the supporting-rim 
C as made with only one flange forming the re 
cesss in the form of a rabbet, as shown by the 
transverse section, Fig. 9. The catch B and 
rim C are shown detached in Fig. S, the mid 
dle portion of the rim being notched to receive 
the body of the catch B, as before described, 
the same springs did being attached to press 
upon the arms b b of the catch, as before de 
scribed. The arms b b rest upon the bottom 
flange of the supporting-rim and support the 
catch against moving with the lid; but the up 
per side of the arms will rest directly against 
the case on that side of the rim. 
Another modification is shown in Figs. 10 
and 11, which is the same as the construction 
first described, except that instead of the arms 
bb to hold the catch within the supporting 
rin it is held by guide-pins gg, which enter 
corresponding holes in the catch B. Fig. 10 
shows the rim and catch detached, the posi 
tion of the holes in the catch for the pins be 
ing indicated by broken lines; and Fig. 11 is a 
transverse section of the supporting-rim C. 
Another modification is shown in Figs. 12, 
13, and 14, in which the supporting-rim is re 
cessed at the bottom, as shown by the trans 
verse section, Fig. 13, and the catch B is sup 
ported therein so as to slide out and in on the 
pins h h, which extend through corresponding 
holes in the body of the catch, as shown most 
clearly in the transverse section, Fig. 14, one 
of said pins being shown in elevation in said 
figure. Fig. 12 shows the catch and support 
ing-rim detached. Springs like springs did 
are designed to be secured within the recess of 
the rim with their free ends pressing against 
the back of the catch at each end. 
Fig. 15 illustrates another modification, the 
rim C, Spring j, and catch B being shown sepa 
rately. The supporting-rim is provided with 
projections c l, which enter corresponding 
holes in the arms b b of the catch B, said holes 
being indicated by broken lines. Aspring, j, 
lies between these projections and presses 
against the back of the catch B. It is pre 
vented from working out of place by two pins, 
ll, which extend through holes in the spring, 
the body of the catch being also provided with 
holes to register with the pins ll. 
The modification, Figs. 16 and 17, is prac 
tically nothing but an inversion of the parts 
shown in Figs. 1 to 4, the recess being on the 
inside instead of the outside of the support 
ing-rim, a section of the rim being shown in 
Fig. 17 and the parts being separately shown 
in Fig. 16. 
Figs. 1S and 19 show a modification in which 
the supporting-rim C has a single flange, n, 
notched at the middle to receive the body of 
the catch B, while the arms b l of the catch are 
recessed to fit said groove, as shown by the re 
spective sectional views through said rim and 
one arm of the catch in Fig. 19. The springs 
did, as before described, bear against said arms. 
Pins or projections of g, with corresponding 
holes in the catch, may be employed, if desired; 
but the arms b b, recessed as described, and 
resting on the flange in, will furnish a proper 
support for the catch without these pins. 
In the modification, Figs. 20 and 21, the sup 
porting-rim is grooved or recessed at the top, 
as shown by the section, Fig. 21. The rim and 
catch are shown separately in Fig. 20. The 
arms b b rest in the groove and are acted on 
by the springs did, as before described, and 
the upper sides of the arms rest against the 
case to hold the catch in, as in the construc 
tion shown in Figs. S and 9. 
In the modification, Eigs. 22 and 23, the sup. 
porting-rim is recessed on the inner edge, as 
shown by the section, Fig. 23, similar to the 
modification, Figs. 16 and 17. Instead, how 
ever, of the arms bb, I provide the catch with 
pins gg, which are guided by holes in the rim, 
or vice versa, and the springs d press upon 
the back of the catch at each end. The catch 
and supporting-rim are shown detached in 
Fig. 22. 
The modification shown in Figs. 24 and 25, 
plan and front views, respectively, consists 
merely in widening or elongating the catch B, 
so that it has two holding-lips instead of one 
to catch upon the inside of the lid. Such a 
catch may be mounted in accordance with any 
of the modifications herein described, in which 
the arms b b rest. Within a recess in the rim. 
The catches in the other modifications may 
also be provided with two holding-lips inlike 
ale. 
The modification shown in Figs. 26 and 27 is 
similar to that shown in Figs. 18 and 19; but 
instead of the arms sliding on the flange in the 
body of the catch is recessed on its back to fit 
said flange, as most clearly shown by the sec 
tional view, Fig. 26, which shows the support 
ing rim and catch detached, the plane of sec 
tion being transversely through the middle of 
said parts. The springs can be attached as in 
Fig. 18, but made long enough to bear upon 
the body of the catch. 
Figs. 28 and 29 are corresponding views 
75 
85 
90 
ICO 
IO5 
O 
I 25 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
60 
65 
 
388, l57 
3 
showing, practically, the same thing, but re 
versed, so that the flange m is on the inside of 
the rim C instead of the outside. 
In the modification, Figs. 30 and 31, the rim 
is made of two parts secured together by screws 
or rivets, the inner part having a groove for 
the springs, as shown by the transverse sec 
tion, Fig. 30. The detached plan views of the 
rim C and catch B in Fig. 31 show the slot or 
hole in the middle of the rim for the body of 
the catch to workin, and the guide: pins gg, Se 
cured rigidly to the catch and moving in holes 
through the rim, or vice versa. 
In the modification, Figs. 32 and 33, I also 
form the supporting-rim C of two parts, but 
with both of them grooved, as shown by the 
transverse section, Fig. 33, in which the di 
vision is vertical. Fig. 34 shows a like view 
of the same kind of a rim, but divided hori 
Zontally instead of vertically. In such a rim 
the internal space is larger than in Fig. 30, so 
that there is room for the arms lib of the catch 
and also for the springi. The parts detached 
are shown in plan view in Fig. 32. 
Another modification is shown in Figs. 35 
and 36, the former showing the supporting 
rim and two parts of the catch in reverse plan, 
and the latter showing a transverse section on 
line aca: of Fig. 35 of said rim when in a corre 
sponding position. The rim is recessed or 
grooved on its under side, the solid top being 
cut out, as indicated by broken lines at the 
middle of the rim C, Fig. 35, to admit the 
body of the catch. Instead of making the 
arms b b integral with the body of the catch I 
form them of separate pieces and fasten them 
together by screws through the holes n. The 
under side of the latch and inner ends of the 
springs did are covered and supported by the 
plate O. 
In Figs. 37 to 42, inclusive, I support the 
catch B on a stud, q, either on the rim, as in 
Figs. 37, 38, 39, and 40, or on the catch itself, 
as in Figs. 41 and 42, and corresponding holes 
in the catch or rin. I have shown these studs 
and their holes as square; but they may be of 
any other form, preferably angular or oblong. 
Such modifications may be made with rims re 
cessed in different styles; but I have illustrated 
it as applied to rins in cross-section substan 
tially like Fig. 3. 
Fig. 37 shows a detached 
front elevation of the catch B; Figs. 38 and 
40, plan views of the rim with springs attached; 
Fig. 39, a rear elevation of the catch, middle 
portion of the rim, and attached springs; and 
Figs. 41 and 42 show plan views of the rim and 
catch detached from each other. 
Fig. 43 shows the same construction as in 
Fig. 1, excepting that the supporting-rim and 
catch occupy a different position in the case, 
and that the push-pin a is rigidly connected 
with or formed on the catch B. This arrange 
ment is more especially adapted for the lid at 
the back of the watch case. 
The modifications in Figs. 44, 45, and 46 
show catches which swing inwardly on a pivot 
instead of sliding bodily. In all of them the 
supporting-rim C is of the form in cross-sec 
tion shown in Fig. 3, and is represented as 
partly or wholly in horizontal section, with 
the catches in plan view. In all of them the 
catch rests upon and is supported by the lower 
flange of the rim C, as is the construction first 
described. 
In Fig. 44 the push-pin at acts upon one end 
of an intermediate lever S, the other end of 
which acts on the short end of the catch, there 
by forcing its longer end having the holding 
lip inwardly against the spring d. 
In Fig. 45 the catch is in the form of a sim 
ple lever with the push-pin pressed directly 
against the body of the catch. 
In Fig. 46 the push-pin acts against the in 
termediate levers, s, the same as in Fig. 44, ex 
cepting that there are two levers and two 
catches. 
Fig. 47 shows a plan and front view, respect 
ively, of a catch adapted for use with a rinl 
like that shown in transverse section in Fig. 
19, the flange m being notched in the middle 
to receive the body of the catch, while the 
notched arms bib rest in the rabbets or recesses 
above and below said flange. Springs will be 
applied as before described. Such a catch is 
applicable to a rim having the flange in either 
on the outside or inside edge. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the supporting-rim 
C, recessed substantially as described, the 
catch having arms b b resting in the recess of 
said rim, and the Spring or springs for press 
ing against the catch, substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination of a watch-case, the Sup 
porting-rim, the spring-pressed catch mounted 
therein, and the dust-band secured to the re 
spective ends of said rim, substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination of the supporting rim 
stationarily affixed in a watch-case, the catch 
moving inwardly and outwardly and supported 
in said movement by said rim, and the spring 
or springs for pressing against Said catch, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
Specified. 
4. The combination of the supporting-rim 
having iaiteral flanges forming a groove or re 
cess at the outer edge of said rim, the catch 
having its body working in a notch in the 
upper flange of said riim, and the arms b b, 
working within the groove on each side of 
said notch, substantially as described, and for 
the purpose specified. 
CHARLES TESKE. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES SHEPARD, 
JoHN EDWARDs, Jr. 
SO 
ICO 
O 
II 5 
O 
25 
O 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388257.txt	- . 
-) 
2S 
3 
V. 
is 
N S. 
R). 
/ 
4. 
S 
3 w 
to 
| 
t 
8. 
.. 
f 
(No Model.) 
J. H. BROWN 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FOR RECOWERING WALU ABLE CONTENTS FROM SUNKEN SHIPS, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1888. 
No. 388,257, 
...'" 
is 
: 
NYi 
| 
| Hi 
- | 
t 
t 
| 
, 
NS 
-. 
. 
S. 
S. 
S. 
& 
R 
& 
. 
e - 
W S 
R N 
t 
|| || || 
E. 
. 
|| || 
S. 
Si 
 
 
 
WITWESSESE|| 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, 
C. 
(No Model.) 
J. H. BROWN. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
APPARATUS FOR RECOWERING WALUABLE CONTENTS FROM SUNKEN SHIPS, 
No. 388,257, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1888. 
- 
EAEP 
E 
/ 
- 
Eid 2. 
w 
-- 
- 
- T -- 
. . . 
I ----- - - - - - -- 
 
s 
S. V 
 
-y 
. 
 
SNM 
N V ... 
Wri TWESSES, 
3. 
; 
: 
. 
a 
ECOOO 
 
to 
. 
IW VEVTQR 
4. 4, 2-zz. 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 388,257, 
J. H. BROWN. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
APPARATUS FOR RECOWERING WALU ABLE CONTENTS FROM SUNKEN SHIPS, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1888. 
 
w 
ZF ... --" 
- 
st ZNS 
WITNESSEs w 
3. Vocker. 
IWWEWTOR 
N. PETERS"Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. BROWN, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR TO MORGAN R. 
WISE, OF SALERO, ARIZONA TERRITORY. 
APPARATUS FOR RECOWERING WALUABLE CONTENTS FROM SUNKEN SHIPS, 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 388,257, dated August 21, 1888, 
Application filed March 16, 1888. 
Serial No. 267,440. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
To a 27, u?ion, it inctly CO72Cer'72: 
Be it known that I, JoHN H. BROWN, a citia 
zen of the United States, residing at Balti 
more, Maryland, have invented new and use 
ful Apparatus for Recovering Valuable Con 
tents from Sunken Ships, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
In another application, filed January 12, 
1SSS, Serial No. 260,546, I have shown appa 
ratus and described methods of operating 
upon sunken ships lying upon rocky or hard 
impermeable river or sea, bottoms subjected to 
swift-running tides. Some of the apparatus 
shown in that application is similar to part of 
that shown in this application; but in that ap 
plication I have claimed only the methods in 
volved, reserving the right to claim the appa 
ratus in the present application. 
The object of the present invention or appa 
ratus as a whole is intended more especially 
for operating upon Sunken ships lying upon 
sandy or muddy bottoms and partly covered 
with sand or mud, and in locations where 
strong tides or other currents or constantly 
passing shipping prevent the successful use 
of excavating and diving armor or caissons, 
heretofore known and used. 
The invention consists in the apparatus 
hereinafter illustrated and described, and 
ointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents my excavating apparatus and cais 
son operating upon the sand and mud covered 
hulk of an old ship containing a large amount 
of treasure in the lower hold, all the upper 
part of the ship having been removed by blast 
ing, dredging, and the action of the elements, 
and with a deposit of mud over and around 
the remainder. Fig. 2 represents a cross-sec 
tion of the same with the caisson in vertical 
section. Fig. 3 shows a horizontal section of 
the horizontal or central elbow in the jointed 
shaft of the caisson, showing the hinged door 
forming the upper end of the air-lock proper 
in the lower portion of the shaft. Fig. 4 shows 
a side elevation of the top end of the shaft 
with its hinged air-tight door, with mechan 
ism for automatically closing it when water 
rises to it or when it is lowered in the water. 
Fig. 5 is a horizontal section through the three 
elbows on line 55 of Fig. S. 
Fig. 6 is an en 
larged horizontal section of the shaft, showing 
inside ladder, whose sides are used for com 
pressed-air tubes, and also conduits for tele 
phone and electric-light wires and cables for 
manipulating the lower doors, latches, &c. 
Fig. 7 shows the several parts of the shaft 
slightly separated and giving a front view of 
the door M of the air-lock. Fig. S is a ver 
tical cross-section of the caisson with the in 
ternal stays and braces somewhat different 
from those shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 9 shows a 
plan view of the rotating mud cutting and mix 
ing or puddling excavator. Fig. 10 is an en 
larged cross-section on line 10 10 of Fig. 9. 
The location of the above-referred-to sunk 
en ship is in the swift tidal currents near Hell 
Gate, New York, and in the main channel in 
seventy feet of water, where all kinds of ves 
sels and craft are almost constantly passing. 
It is impossible in that location to use a div 
ing-bell or caisson with a shaft rigidly fixed 
to it, (unless li?ted and removed before every 
tide, or four times in twenty-three hours,) be 
cause of the great force of the currents against 
such obstructions, and because the course of 
ships, &c., cannot be completely controlled in 
these currents and whirlpools, and they have 
heretofore been driven against Wrecking and 
dredging vessels in that locality with such 
force as to break anchor-chains made of inch 
and-a-half rods. 
The object of the present invention is to 
overcome these difficulties and to render harm 
less these collisions, and to operate there and 
in such situations in spite of the difficulties. 
First, it is necessary to remove the thick 
coat of mud accumulated within the broken 
hull, which has to be done in seventy feet of 
water, with its tides, passing vessels, &c. The 
common kinds of dredging devices cannot be 
operated here, because they hook under and 
into the timbers and dbris of the wreck and 
fail. To prevent this, I have invented a pe 
culiar boring or plowing cutter-head, D'. 
(Shown in Figs. 1, 9, and 10.) The two wings 
or arms D are hollow, triangular in cross-sec 
tion, the front edge sharp to cut under the 
mud, Sand, &c., the material sliding up over 
the sloping top and diagonally over the open 
slots D', through which the material passes 
as it becomes reduced to thin mud or pud 
55 
75 
90 
IOO 
g 
388,257 
65 
 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
dle,' from which it is pumped up through 
the rotating tube D by the pump D" and dis 
charged through pipe D into a scow, or 
through the floating nozzle D'' into the pass 
ing current to be washed away. The front or 
cutting edges of D may be straight, as in Fig. 
9, with a curved bow or rod, D', to prevent 
their hooking under or behind timbers, &c., 
or the front edge may be curved outward and 
backward, as shown in Fig. 1, with a straight 
brace, D', the convex backward curve causing 
the arms D' to slide or glance off any fixed 
object against which they impinge, thus pre 
venting fouling with it. 
The upright shaft or tube D is preferably 
made of heavy lap-welded iron pipe of suit 
able size. The upper end is supported in an 
eye or collar, D', through which it slides ver 
tically and in which it rotates, the collar D 
being pivoted SO that it can move as a uni 
versal joint and permit the lower end of D to 
swing in all directions, the part D being flexi 
ble hose. Just above the collar D is the bevel 
wheel D, splined to the tube D, so as to rotate 
with it, and which is driven by the bevel 
wheel D', which is driven by any suitable 
power, so as to give rotary motion to D and 
the cutting-arms D', the upper end of D hav 
ing a flange or collar which rotates in the 
coupling D" without rotating the part D. 
The rotary-pump D" is driven by any suita 
ble power, and draws the mixed mud and 
water through slots D' in D'up through D D, 
and discharges it into scows; or, where there 
is no objection to discharging it into the pass 
ing tide or other current, it is discharged 
through the nozzle D'' and carried away with 
the currents. The nozzle D'' is held suspended 
in the current by the floating buoy B with one 
or more intermediate buoys, B. The object 
and operation of these buoys is, first, to keep 
the hose off the bottom or from becoming cov 
ered with the mud it discharges; second, to 
discharge the mud, &c., far enough away and 
high enough, so that the tide or current will 
carry it clear away; third, the flexible hose 
and floating buoys always cause the discharge 
to be in the direction toward which the water 
is flowing and in the proper direction for it 
to carry it away, and, fourth, whenever the 
tide or current changes direction the floating 
buoys and hose change automatically with it 
and take another position, as shown in dotted 
lines, D'' and D'". 
It is obvious that this mode of discharging 
puddled mud, &c., is equally applicable in the 
use of stationary caissons, coffer-dams, the 
construction of subaqueous foundations, river 
bed tunnels, &c. 
I will now briefly describe the mechanism 
for guiding the position and movement of the 
bottom end of the pendent shaft or tube D, 
which mechanism I do not claim in this appli 
cation, but reserve the right to make it the 
subject-matter of a separate application. 
The weight of the shaft or tube D is sus 
tained by the chains or cables c' c', which pass 
over sheaves A' A' and wind upon drums or 
spools c c. Fixed upon the same shafts with 
the spools c c are the spur-wheels C and C, 
each of which is in gear with the intermediate 
pinion, C, upon whose shaft is the hand-wheel 
or pilot-wheel C. Now, to rotate, wheel C will 
wind up one of the cables c' or c' and unwind 
the other one alike amount, which will simply 
draw the bottom of tube D to the right or to 
the left, according to which way the wheel 
C is turned, so that by movement of C D may 
be swung through the whole semi circle. An 
other set of similar gearing, set at right angles 
to the above, (not shown,) with other similar 
cables crosswise of the scow, will give a simi 
lar transverse movement to the lower end of 
D; or, by a combined action of the two sets, 
the lower end of D can be brought to any and 
all points, and moved at will in any and all 
directions. 
To give perfect control of the movements of 
D, there must also be means for its longitudi 
nal or vertical movement. To do this, I make 
one (or both) of the spools c rotatable on its 
shaft, and I fasten a spur-wheel, C, to the 
spool c to rotate with it. Into this wheel C, 
I make the pinion C" mesh, which has upon its 
shaft a hand or pilot wheel, C'. Now, to turn 
this wheel C' over to the right winds up the 
cable c, (without affecting the cable c",) and 
consequently elevates the tube ID, or to turn 
C' the other way unwinds cable c, lengthens 
it, and lowers D. A suitable dog or locking 
device is used to hold the wheels C and C to. 
gether to prevent the self movement of Cand 
the unwinding of c' when not desired. Thus 
it will be seen that by the proper handling of 
these hand-wheels the bottom of tube D, with 
the excavator D, can be raised or lowered or 
moved in any direction desired by a person in 
the scow, the direction of the tube D and its 
length above water serving to indicate the 
depth and position of the end that is under 
water. The rotation of the excavator and the 
driving of the pump being separate and inde 
pendent of guiding movements of excavator, 
their movements are under separate control, 
but they operate conjointly. 
The diving - bell or caisson itself I have 
changed in formand inside construction, to give 
it great and variable weight, to offer but little 
resistance to passing Water-currents, and to give 
the greatest amount and best-located working 
room inside attainable with these other con 
ditions. I make the caisson as flat and as low 
inside as consistent with convenience of work 
ing-room, and instead of distributing thesink 
ing weight in the usual way around the out 
side or in double walls I locate the main 
weight in the center in a chamber or tank, F, 
made in the form of an inverted cone or wedge, 
terminating at the bottom either in a point or 
an edge, F, which is least in the way of work 
ing or excavating all over the inclosing open 
bottom. This tank F may be circular or 
square or rectangular in horizontal section, 
and may, when rectangular or wedge shaped, 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
IO 5 
O 
I 15 
I 25 
13C 
388,257 
O 
5 
extend partly or all the way across the caisson, ling uncontrollable ships, &c., and, third, to 
the greater proportionate length or width of 
permit the shaft to rise again by its own 
Wedge being required in the larger caissons 
buoyancy as soon as the current bas ceased or 
and proportionately smaller in small caissons 
the colliding object has passed. The lower 
where the other metal is nearly sufficient to 
section, FI, of this shaft is rigidly secured to 
Sink it. The shell of the tank and of the caisson 
the caisson, and preferably projects down in 
itself is preferably made of boiler-iron or boil 
side thereof to a position conveniently acces 
er-steel suitably riveted and calked. The in 
sible from the bottom of the caisson. The up 
Side frame-work or skeleton is made either of 
per portion, EI, of the shaft is preferably 
cast metal-as Bessemer steel, as shown in Fig. 
made of boiler-iron or boiler-steel-of say two 
2-or of Wrought beams, girders, and stay-rods, 
to three feet in diameter-of a length sufficient 
as in Fig. S. The tank F is preferably riv 
to reach somewhat above high water where it 
eted to the roof-plates water-tight, with a man 
is proposed to operate, and of a thickness of 
hole, F, through which it may be filled with 
metal sufficient to resist the pressure of water 
pig-iron or pig-lead, &c. 
of a depth where used, the lower portions be 
At F' is a three-way cock, one branch open 
ing proportionately thicker and stronger than 
ing from tank F to the inside of the caisson, 
the upper portion. 
and the other branch opening into the water 
On the top of the lower section, H, is secured 
outside, which may thus be let in to fill the 
by rivets, screw-threads, or otherwise an el 
spaces not filled by pig metal within tank F 
bow, I', making ninety degrees of a bend from 
to give it that additional weight when desired 
a vertical to a horizontal direction. To this 
to prevent water currents or tides from mov. 
elbow I' is attached or connected a horizontal 
ing the caisson from its position; but when de 
ninety-degree elbow, I, having its two ends in 
sired to move it the water can be drawn off 
vertical planes at right angles to each other, 
by setting the cock F' so as to admit air into 
and to the other end of I is connected a third 
F and opening the botton cock or screw-plug 
ninety-degree elbow, I', which latter is secured 
F', when the water in the tank by its greater 
to the bottom of shaft II". The horizontal 
Specific gravity flows out and air flows in at 
joints between H and I' and between H' and 
'. If the tank E extends clear across the 
I are rigid or renovable; but the two vertical 
caissou, a Suitable passage-way for work men is 
joints at the two ends of I are movable, or 
made at one end or through the center, incased 
made to turn in the elbows to which they are 
with a section of boiler-iron. The outside bot 
connected-that is, to rotate or turn in the 
to in edge of the caisson, consisting only of the 
joints. This moving or circumferential slid 
encircling metal sheets, suitably stiffened and 
ing in the joints may be secured by well-known 
braced, gives free access for workmen clear 
means for pipe and hose coupling, as shown 
out to it, and from that clear in to the center 
in Figs. 5 and S, where the horizontal elbow 
point or edge, F. 
I has a lange, I, upon each end, which is held 
When it is desired to excavate dirt or sand, 
loosely fitting within the flanges I' by the caps 
&c., which can be puddled and pumped out, a 
or disks I, which are held against I' by screw 
Sump-hole for that purpose may be made im 
bolts, or otherwise, so as to permit the flanged 
mediately under F, into which material can 
ends I to turn within the ends I" of elbows I 
be shoveled from all sides, and when properly 
and I'... It will be seen that this free move. 
mixed pumped out in the usual manner 
ment in these two vertical joints at right an 
through a hose or pipe leading up through the 
gles to each other permits the movement or 
caissOil. 
turning of the upper section of the shaft Hin 
An important and distinctive feature of my 
any and all directions, so that it can turn down 
invention also consists in the details and lead 
to the inclined and horizontal positions shown 
ing features of the construction of the tube or 
by dotted lines H" in Figs. 1 and 2, the elbows 
hollow shaft H H for the passage of workmen 
being put as low down as Will permit such 
to and froy the caisson from above water. 
movement without II coming in contact with 
Heretofore all such shafts (not including small 
the caisson. Instead of the flanges and l 
hose for supplying air to diving-armor) have 
on these elbows, I generally prefer the screw 
been inflexible and rigidly connected to the 
threads i shown in Figs. 2, 3, 5, and 7. 
I 
diving-bell or caisson, so that they were im 
prefer screw-threads square in cross-section, 
movable and unyielding without taking the 
and, to prevent the difficulty of getting such 
:aisson with then; but in my construction I 
large diameter screw - threads to take or 
provide the shaft with a flexible or jointed sec 
properly enter the corresponding female 
tion near the lower end, so that it may be bent 
thread, I turn off a portion of the thread, leav 
or turned over in any direction from a per 
ing a blank portion, i', of the same outside 
pendicular to an inclined or horizontal posi 
diameter as the smallest or inside diameter of 
tion without in Oving the attached caisson. 
the female screw it is to enter, so that the por. 
The object of this is to let the shaft turn down, 
tion i will slide into the opposite screw that 
first, during periods when tides or other cur 
far before the threads conne in contact, and 
rents are so strong as to render operations 
thus form a guide for them when they do come 
temporarily in practicable; second, when the 
in contact; then with square threads and square 
shaft may be accidentally struck by drift. 
contact the threats cannot cross each other or 
45 
s 5 
75 
95 
OO 
EO 
IIS 
i 
388,257. 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
40 
lock and refuse to take. This is especially 
important where they have to be screwed on 
under water. 
To assist in sustaining the weight of the 
shaft H' and to partly relieve the elbow-joints 
of strain and friction, I provide the elbow I 
with a trunnion, I', in axial line with the op 
posite end, which serves a useful purpose in 
handling this elbow in putting the parts to. 
gether and also to rest in a bearing when in 
position in the top of the bracket I'', secured 
to the top of the caisson. I also sometimes 
make a curved projecting lug or bracket, I', 
made integral with the elbow I, for the sup 
port of a trunnion, I', cast upon the elbow I', 
in axial line with its opposite end, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 8. 
The lower end of the shaft is provided with 
: an air-lock differing somewhat from those 
usually provided in vertical rigid shafts. The 
lower door, H', is preferably hinged to swing 
open outwardly and horizontally, as shown, 
and to close air tight. In the upper end of 
the horizontal elbow I is another hinged air. 
tight door, M, which swings back into the 
outside curve of the elbow, as shown in Figs. 
3 and 5. These doors are provided with air 
admitting valves m', with stems or handles 
passing through the doors, so that the valves 
can be opened or closed from either side of 
Each door is also provided with a 
the doors. 
latch or lock with a handle or lever upon each 
side of the door and operative from both sides. 
To the swinging end of the inside latch le 
ver, m, is attached a rope extending through 
the shaft up to its top, where a pull upon the 
rope pulls the end of the lever m up and un 
latches the door H", or, similarly, the door M, 
to permit them to swing open, so that water 
may be driven down out through the doors 
by compressed air from the top when the top 
door h is loked shut to retain the air; also, 
the position of the latch-lever and connected 
rope is such that a pull on the ropes when the 
doors are open will swing them shut. By this 
arrangement, when the shaft and caisson have 
by any means become filled with water I can 
expel it and put the apparatus in working 
condition by, first, closing air-tight the top 
door, h; Second, pulling on the ropes to un 
latch the doors M and H"; third, attaching a 
hose to H' and forcing compressed air into it 
to drive the water down out of H H and out 
of the caisson; fourth, pulling the lower door, 
H', shut by the rope; fifth, letting the air es 
cape from the shaft till reduced to atmospheric 
pressure, when, sixth, the top door, h, may be 
opened and entrance made in the usual way 
that is, by going into the lower air-lock, clos 
ing the door M, then admitting compressed 
air from the caisson into the air-lock through 
lower valve, m', until the pressure in the air 
lock between doors H' and M is the same as 
in the caisson, when the lower door, H', can 
be opened and passage be made through it 
into the caisson. To return from the caisson, 
the party enters Ethrough door H', then closes 
this door, then opens valve m' in door M, and 
allows air to escape thereby from H. till the 
air-pressure in it is reduced to that of the out- 7o 
side air, when the door M can be opened, and 
the party pass up out through the shaft H. 
The shaft H being a tube of comparatively 
thin metal, its specific gravity as a whole, 
when air-filled, is less than that of the water 75 
displaced by it, so that it tends to float or au 
tomatically rise to its vertical position when 
not held down by currents or passing obstruc. 
tions. The extreme range that shaft H may 
swing to and fro is but a semi-circle, and the 8o 
distance that one elbow is screwed into or out 
of the other by this movement is but half of 
one thread, or half the pitch of one thread. 
These threads are turned to an accurate loose 
fit, and they should be filled with pine tar or 85 
unctuous compound to serve as a lubricant 
and to repel the admission of water. As a 
precautionary measure, needed in case the 
shaft H'should become accidentally filled with 
water, so that it will not float or rise to a ver 
tical position when submerged, I attach a 
chain or cable, B, to its upper end, and to the 
other end of the cable B I attach a buoy, B'. 
which will float, as at B', when H is sub 
merged at H" upon the left of Fig. 1. This 
cable B, thus attached in the position B, af. 
fords a ready means of hauling up the shaft 
H' when inclosed water prevents its floating or 
raising itself. 
To prevent the accidental filling or inflow. 
ing of water into the shaft H', I provide means 
for the automatic closing of the top door, h. 
From the hinge or pintle a short crank, h", 
Fig. 4, projects, which is acted upon by a 
spring, h, tending to force the door shut. A 
latch-bar, h', is connected to the crank h", the 
other end passing through the staple h' and 
having a notch in its under side, which hooks 
upon the stud h", which thus holds the door h. 
open. On the side of the shaft H below the 
top are pivoted the arms h", carrying on their 
outer ends float-balls hi. To intermediate 
points of these arms h are connected vertical 
rods h", their upper ends passing through sta 
ples and resting against the latch-bar h". 
Now, whenever the shaft H is turned down 
or the water comes up against the floatsh, they 
are lifted (floated) by the water, and they li?t 
the arms hand rods h", which lift the bar h" 
off the stud h" and allow the spring h to slam 
the door h shut, where it is held by a suitable 
latch to prevent the entrance of water into the 
shaft H. These doors are all provided with 
suitable elastic packing, and, the pressure be 
ing from outside inward, the harder the 
pressure the tighter the doors are held shut. 
While the shaft has the apparent disadvan. 
tage of a compound curve, this carve presents 
a location for the central door to swing hori 
Zontally, instead of having to be lifted or swung 13o 
vertically, as they do instraight vertical shafts, 
and also furnishes a small horizontal chamber 
upon each side of it in I and I, very conven 
ient in opening and closing the door M, 
IC5 
I I5 
2 5 
95 
O 
55 
 
388,257 
Another important feature of my invention 
is the construction of the ladders in shafts H 
and H'. These ladders are composed of the 
two sides L. L., (best shown in Fig. 6,) made 
of gas-pipe and connected by rungs or step 
rods L', bent with semicircular bows to loop 
around the pipes L. L and having eyes turned 
On their ends, through which the hook-headed 
screw-bolts L' pass to clamp the rungs L" 
upon the pipes L and L by the nuts L'. The 
rigid gas-pipe extends the lengths of sections 
H and H', being suitably attached to the in 
side of these sections, and preferably passing 
through the side of H close to the top end by 
elbows and terminating outside with valves 
and nipples suitable for attaching hose coup 
ling from air-compressors. These pipes L. L. 
are connected from the bottom of H' to the 
others in the top of H through the elbows by 
flexible hose (indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 
5) passing air-tight through the flange over 
the doorway M, as shown in Fig. 7, the flexi 
ble hose in the elbows being made long enough 
to permit the partial rotation or turning of the 
elbows when shaft H' turns down sidewise. 
One of the pipe-lines, L, passes without open 
ing from the top of H to or near the bottom 
of the shaft H, or, preferably, just below the 
top of the caisson, where it opens into the 
caisson, and through which compressed air 
may be pumped directly into the caisson. I 
utilize the other line, L, as a conduit for insu 
lated wires for electric lights and telephone 
used in the caisson, as at Kand E, the wire K 
leading to the telephone and K to electric 
lights. In addition to these wires, I pass ropes 
K" down through pipe L, one of which con 
nects to the latch in of door M, and the other 
to latch-lever H of door H', for the purpose 
of unlatching and for closing the doors, as 
hereinbefore described. This construction of 
a ladder gives a most compact economical 
form of combined ladder and air-tubes, and at 
the same time ful 'nishes a safe and convenient 
conduit for electric wires and all other signal 
and operating cables, &c. 
When it is desired to move the caisson from 
place to place, the water may be removed from 
tank F, as heretofore described, when it may 
be lifted by the chains G. G', connected to 
suitable rig on scow's or wrecking-vessel and 
carried to a new position and lowered. 
When the shaft. H has become filled with 
water, the lower door, H", being closed, of 
course a hose can be introduced and the wa 
ter pumped out; but if more than about thirty 
feet deep the pump itself must be lowered into 
it to within that distance from the bottom; or, 
if air-pressure be used to drive the water down 
out of the shaft and caisson the upper door, 
h, must be well secured to stand the pressure 
equal to the weight of a column of water the 
depth to which it is forced. Then a valve, 
as m' in M and H', opens downward like 
safety-valves whenever the pressure above 
them becomes greater than that below them, 
so that they will open downward and permit 
water and air to pass down through them, but 
will close whenever the pressure below is 
equal to or greater than that above them; or 
the doors M and H' themselves may be made 
self-closing by springs or weights to hold them 
shut in their normal condition; but whenever 
the pressure from above becomes greater than 
below they will open enough to permit water 
and air to pass down through them until com 
pressed air takes the place of water in the shaft 
and caisson. 
Where the force of the tides is such at their 
highest as to require the temporary abandon 
ment of the caisson, as a precautionary meas 
ure during such intervals it is sometimes nec 
essary to fill the caisson with water to prevent 
liability of the tides shoving it away or over 
turning it. To thus fill it, it is only neces 
sary to allow the compressed air to escape up 
out through pipe L, when water will fill the 
caisson and pipe II, but not the shaft H. H. If 
it be desired also to fill the shaft H up to door 
M, it may be done by having a valve or cock 
opening into pipe L or L. from the air-lock at 
M. With this large addition of water to the 
caisson's weight of metal, it holds it in place 
with great firmness, so that there is no danger 
of its being disturbed by tidal currents. On re 
turning to work, a compressed-air hose is at 
tached to the top of pipe L, and compressed 
air sent down the pipe L to again drive the 
Water out of the caisson, when entrance may 
be made into the caisson and work proceed 
therein. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
IS 
1. A diving-bell or caisson provided with 
a fixed portion of shaft H, in combination with 
a swinging floating portion, H', these parts 
being united by flexible connections to consti 
tute a universal joint and to permit the pas 
sage of men therethrough to and from the 
caisson, substantially as described. 
2. A portable caisson, in combination with 
an air-filled shaft closed at top and bottom and 
having a flexible portion whereby water-cur 
rents may carry it into an inclined position be. 
low water-surface, and whereby the inclosed air 
will cause it to float or its upper end to rise 
above water-surface whenever Such currents 
cease, substantially as set forth. 
3. A submerged caisson, in combination 
with a jointed shaft attached thereto and 
adapted to yield or leave its vertical position 
when struck by moving ships to permit pas 
sage over or past it, and to automatically re 
turn to its vertical position again when such 
colliding ship has passed it, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. A portable caisson provided with a shaft 
having air-tight doors at its top and bottom 
and a rope or connection from the top of the 
shaft to the latch of the lower door, whereby 
the lower door may be unlatched while the 
shaft and caisson are full of water to permit 
the water to be driven down out of the shaft 
O 
2C) 
25 
40 
55 
fo 
75 
90 
iOO 
IOS 
II) 
II5 
I 25 
388,257 
O 
15 
by compressed air, and by which rope said 
lower door may be pulled shut and water pre 
vented from returning to the air-lock when 
air-pressure is lowered therein, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. A portable caisson provided with a shaft 
having an air-tight door at its top, a door or 
doors near its bottom, means for admitting 
compressed air into the shaft and thereby 
driving the water down out of the shaft, and 
the means for preventing the return of the wa 
ter into the shaft when out by the closing of 
a lower door or valve, so that when the air 
pressure therein is lowered the upper door 
can be opened and entrance be made from the 
top through the shaft into the air-lock, as set 
forth. 
6. A portable caisson provided with an air 
lock at its lower end, having its two air-tight 
doors and an additional air-tight door at the 
top of the shaft, whereby the water may be 
driven down out of the shaft and caisson by 
compressed air, substantially as set forth. 
7. A passage-way or shaft of a diving-bell 
5 or portable caisson composed of upper and 
lower vertical portions, an intermediate hori 
Zontal portion, and air-lock doors at the top 
and bottom ends, and also an air-lock door in 
the intermediate horizontal portion, substan 
tially as set forth. 
8. A vertical shaft of a diving-bell or porta 
ble caisson having a horizontal section which 
includes the upper end of the air-lock, a door 
hinged to swing horizontally therein, and 
with a horizontal landing or terminus of the 
vertical portions of the shaft upon each side 
of Said upper air-lock door M, as set forth. 
9. A passage-way or shaft of a diving-bell 
or portable caisson having between and con 
necting its cylindrical end portions three con 
nected elbows, the middle one of which lies in 
a horizontal plane, its two ends in vertical 
planes at right angles to each other and 
adapted to rotate or oscillate in their bearing 
connections with the adjacent elbows, where 
by the upper portion of the shaft is free to 
move in any direction from a perpendicular, 
while the lower portion remains in vertical 
position, as set forth. 
10. A passage-way or shaft of a diving-bell 
or caisson provided with a door at its top end 
adapted to be automatically released and 
closed by the rising thereto of water to pre 
vent the water from entering the shaft, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
11. An entrance-shaft of a diving-bell or 
caisson provided with a hinged spring-actu 
ated door at its upper end, in combination 
with floats adapted to be lifted by approach 
ing water, whereby the door is released and 
closed to prevent the admission of water into 
the shaft, substantially as set forth. 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
- 
75 
8o 
12. An entrance-shaft, H', of a caisson pro 
vided with a hinged door, h, having a lug or 
crank, h", spring h", latch-bar h", and catch h, 65 
in combination with floats h, levers h", and 
rods h", substantially as shown. 
13. A diving-bell or caisson, E, having a 
rigid shaft, H, and a swinging portion, H, in 
combination with a floating buoy, B', attached 
thereto by a chain or cable, B", substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
14. A diving-bell or portable caisson having 
a centrally - fixed compartment adapted to 
hold weights or material for sinking the cais 
son, said compartment being tapered to a 
narrow edge or point at its lower end, substan 
tially as set forth. 
15. A diving-bell or portable caisson com 
prising an external shell, in combination with 
an internal central weight-receiving compart 
ment, F, wide at its top and narrow at its 
bottom, substantially as set forth. 
16. A diving bell or portable caisson com 
prising an external metallic shell and an in 
ternal central weight-receiving compartment, 
F, terminating in a narrow or pointed lower 
end, in combination with a system of inter 
mediate braces, E'. 
17. A diving-bell or portable caisson com 
prising an outside shell, E, a central weight 
receiving compartment, F, surrounded by an 
annular working-chamber, E, substantially as 
set forth. 
son, an inside ladder composed of tubular 
sides spaced apart and connected by rungs or 
rounds secured thereto to constitute the lad 
der, said tubular sides being adapted to con 
vey compressed air into the caisson, and also roo 
to serve as conduits for electric-light and tele 
phone wires, substantially as set forth. 
19. A ladder within the shaft of a caisson, 
composed of tubular sides adapted to convey 
compressed air from an outside air-compressor Io5 
into the interior of the caisson, in combina 
tion with electric conducting-wires inclosed 
within and protected by the tubular sides of 
said ladder and their connections, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
20. The combination, with a caisson, of a 
ladder whose tubular sides are adapted to con 
vey compressed air down the shaft of the cais 
son and to also serve as conduits for electric 
wires, and ropes for manipulating mechanism 
within the air-lock or caisson, substantially as 
set forth. 
JOHN H. BROWN. 
18. In combination with the shaft of a cais. 95 
90 
IIS 
IO . 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. HARRIs, 
JNO. WALKER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388358.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 388,358. 
J. H. GUEST 
AUTOMATIC FIRE TELEGRAPH, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 21, 1888, 
27 
Z7 
ZZ 3 
e ZZ 
42 
A 
A3 
A 
/2 
V2 
Ma 
al 
(2 
6 
v3 
A. 
8 
222 M8 
A. 
a A. 
3. 
W 
A * 
re. 
-A 
N 
M 
M 
2.2% 
 
a 
72A1. 
it is 
2 
 
WITNESSES: E 
i? 2 2. 244. 
V V 
M 
A 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D, C, 
(No Model.) 
J. H. GUEST 
AUTOMATIC FIRE TELEGRAPH, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 388,358, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1888. 
WITNESSES 
 
INVENTOR, 
ATTORNEY'S, 
N. perers, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. GUEST, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
AUTOMATC FIRE-TELEGRAPH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 388,358, dated August 21, 1888, 
Application filed October 27, 1887. Serial No. 253,505. 
(No model.) 
O 
To a 27, Zvi?ion, it naily concern. 
Beit known that I, JOHN H. GUEST, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Automatic Fire-Telegraphs, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to telegraph circuits 
or systems in which signals of different char 
acter or having a different signification are 
transmitted over the same general circuit and 
received on the same or different apparatus 
located at one or more different points and 
connected also with said circuit. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and effective arrangement or combina 
tion of circuits and apparatus wherein the re 
ceiving apparatus for responding to signals of 
a given character or significance may be ren 
dered automatically irresponsive to signals of 
another character or significance. 
My invention is designed more particularly 
for application to systems wherein one class 
of signals is received upon a relay employed 
for relaying said signals to a second circuit; 
and it is designed that such signals only may 
be relayed, the signals of other character or 
significance, although passing over a circuit 
including said relay, being ineffective to effect 
the second circuit through the action of de 
vices which shall control the operative condi 
tion of the relay, as will be hereinafter more 
particularly described. 
My invention is especially applicable to a 
system in which signals indicating the exist 
ence and location of fire are transmitted from 
automatically released or controlled signal 
mechanisms or otherwise Over the Same cir 
cuit, with ordinary calls or messages-such, 
for instance, as those from an ordinary dis 
trict- telegraph box-or with other signals 
such as burglar. alarm signals-sent by auto 
matically released or controlled mechanism in 
the ordinary way, or with special signals in 
dicating the derangement of the local circuits 
containing the thermostats. 
My invention provides a means whereby the 
automatically-produced fire-alarm signal may 
be automatically relayed to the circuit of a 
city fire-department or insurance fire-patrol, 
the remaining signals being, however, received 
in the ordinary way without being so relayed. 
My invention consists, essentially, in the 
combination, with the main circuit having the 
transmitting and receiving apparatus for the 
two classes of signals included in branches 
from said circuit, of a magnet in the main cir 
cuit controlling the operative condition of the 
receiving apparatus, and a circuit-controller, 
also in the main circuit, for governing the ac 
tion of Said magnet. 
The apparatus on which the signals are re 
ceived may be normally out of condition for 
properly responding to the signals, in which 
case the circuit-controller on the main circuit 
will be operated automatically or otherwise at 
or just before the operation of the signal mech 
anism whose signal is to be read or relayed at 
the office; or the receiving apparatus may 
stand normally in condition to respond to the 
signal, in which case the circuit-controller 
will remain quiescent at the time that the sig 
nal is sent and will be operated at or just be 
fore the transmission of any signal which it is 
desired should not affect said receiving appa 
ratus or should not be relayed. 
In the present case I have shown a circuit 
controller as coming automatically into action 
at the time of the transmission of the signal 
which is to be relayed, said controller serving 
by its momentary action on the main-line cir 
cuit to change the condition of the controlling 
magnet in said circuit, and thereby to throw 
the relay apparatus into operative condition 
for relaying such signal. 
The main-line magnet may control the oper 
ative condition of the relay either mechani 
cally or electrically-that is to say, when op 
erating mechanically it may hold or lock some 
portion of the relay apparatus, or when op 
erating electrically it may break or close the 
circuit onto which the signals are to be relayed, 
or may shunt or interrupt the ?low of current 
flowing to the relay-magnet. 
Various devices for governing the operative 
condition of an apparatus on an electrical cir 
cuit have been hitherto employed by electri. 
cal engineers, and I do not deem it necessary 
to describe in detail all the various devices 
that might be employed, inasmuch as my in 
vention does not consist in these details of con 
struction, but in the general combinations of 
apparatus, as hereinafter claimed. 
The circuit - controller on the main line 
3O 
35 
55 
65 
9 o 
IOO 
2 
388,358 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
which governs the operation of the controlling 
Imagnet may act momentarily to change the 
condition of said line in any desired manner 
known in the art. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
is a diagram of circuits and apparatus em 
bodying my invention. Figs. 2 and 3 illus 
trate modifications in the manner of con 
trolling the operative condition of the receiv 
ing apparatus. Fig. 4 illustrates a modifica 
tion of the invention in which the receiving 
apparatus is normally in condition to respond, 
thus requiring the operation of the controller. 
magnet on the transmission of a signal which 
is not to be relayed, this being the converse 
arrangement of that shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 
5 illustrates a modification in the manner of 
connecting ordinary district-telegraph appa 
ratus with the main telegraph circuit when 
the latter is employed also for sending sig 
mals from automatic mechanism indicating fire 
or burglary, and also the arrangement of ther 
mostat or burglar-alarm circuit-controller cir 
cuits. Fig. 6 is a plan of a portion of the 
mechanism shown in Fig. 1. 
In Fig. ... I have shown the application of 
my invention to an arrangement of local cir 
cuits and apparatus such as is described in a 
prior application for patent filed by me March 
21, 1887, Serial No. 231,678, wherein a num 
ber of thermostats are employed in a building 
to be protected from fire, and are connected 
with devices for transmitting a signal to a dis 
tant point to indicate the existence of fire and 
location of the building threatened. 
In the prior application referred to I have 
also provided a special-signal device which 
shall come into action automatically on a de 
rangement of the circuits in the building 
such, for instance, as the accidental breaking 
or closing of a circuit-wire, the failure of a bat 
tery, or a crossing of the thermostat-circuits 
such special signal being transmitted auto 
matically by a wheel properly cut to send a 
signal indicating derangement and the loca 
tion of the derangement to the central office. 
G indicates the wheel which sends a signal 
indicating fire, and G' the special signal wheel, 
which wheels are in a branch or ground con 
nection from the main or all-round metallic cir 
cuit 1, leading to the central office and there 
lected with a receiving-instrument of any 
kind. 
The receiving-instrument is here typified by 
an electro-magnet, Y, acting as a relay for the 
transmission of signals to a second circuit, 2. 
If desired, the relay Y may operate upon a 
local circuit of a recorder in a manner well 
known in the art; or other instruments might 
be employed for receiving the signals locally 
at the station at which the relay Y is placed, 
whether such signals come from one or the 
other of the wheels, G or G'. It is with ref. 
erence, however, to the action of the receiv 
ing apparatus in relaying the signal to the 
circuit 2 that my invention is organized, and 
its operative condition in such action is deter lever 12 of magnet V". 
mined by the action of the magnet in the maini 
circuit 1, as will be described. 
The main circuit 1 includes at any point a 
battery or other generator of electricity, MB, 
and the ground or branch at the central office 
containing the receiving - instrument Y in 
cludes another battery, G. B. The branch con. 
taining the wheels G. G is normally open, as 
indicated, the circuit being carried at such 
point through a spring, 7, which normally 
rests over an insulating-space on the wheel G", 
connected to or moving with the wheels G. G'. 
All three wheels are, for the sake of conven 
ience, placed upon the same shaft, driven by 
a spring or other motive power, and normally 
locked from movement by a lever or detent 
governed by an electro-magnet, V. A plan of 
the wheels as mounted on the same shaft is 
shown in Fig. 6. Ordinary contact-springs for 
the transmitting-wheels G. G' are indicated at 
56, respectively. 
The electro-magnet V comes into action to re 
lease the wheels on the occurrence either of fire 
or of any derangement, and the character of the 
signal sent over the circuit 1 is determined by 
a second magnet, V", whose armature-lever 8 
moves between the two contact-stops 910, as 
indicated-one connected to the contact-spring 
of wheel G and the other to that of wheel G. 
The ground-connection is through the arma 
ture-lever and stops, as indicated, so that when 
the magnet V is unexcited the wheel G will 
be in the ground-circuit, while, when the mag 
met draws up its armature, wheel G will be 
thrown out and wheel G will be thrown into 
circuit. When, therefore, the magnet V is 
excited at the same time that the wheels are 
released by the operation of the retractor act 
ing on the armature for magnet V, the signal 
will be sent in by the wheel G. If, however, 
the magnet V should remain unexcited, the 
special signal will be sent in by wheel G". 
Connected with the magnet V so as to act 
at the same time that the fire-alarm signal 
comes in from wheel G is a circuit closing and 
breaking arm, m, which moves between two 
contacts or stops, f f, which with the arm are 
in the metallic circuit 1. When the armature 
lever of V is against its back stop, the circuit 
1 is closed through the lower stop f; but when 
the magnet is excited the metallic circuit 1 is 
first broken and then closed and remains closed 
while the armature-lever of V is drawn up. 
By means of the arm in a momentary change 
is produced in the circuit 1 suitable for af. 
fecting a magnet, V, which is placed in the 
main circuit at any desired point, and the 
position of whose armature - lever 12 con 
trols the operative condition of the apparatus 
for relaying a signal to the circuit 2. For 
this purpose, the circuit 2 is governed by 
a circuit-controller placed in the relay-circuit 
and consisting of a circuit closing and break 
ing wheel, I, of any suitable character and 
driven by any suitable power, which wheel is 
normally held from rotation by the armature 
For this purpose, the 
75 
8O 
85 
9o V 
95 
OO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I2O 
I 25 
I 30 
 
388,358 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
5 5. 
armature-lever is provided with a hook, 22, 
engaging with a projection, 24, from the wheel. 
The circuit 2 is carried through the hub of 
the wheel and through a spring, 11, adapted 
to make contact there with in obvious fashion. 
In the present instance the parts are ar 
ranged so that the spring 11 will normally 
rest over an insulating-space in the wheel, 
thereby holding the circuit 2 broken, so that 
the magnet Y, though its armature - lever 
may move, will be ineffective in relaying its 
signal. 
The hook 22 is so arranged that the magnet 
V requires to be excited in order to hold the 
wheel from rotation; but if the magnet loses 
its normal power through a momentary change 
of tension on the line 1, produced by the op 
eration of the circuit-controller n, the arma 
ture-lever 12 will be drawn back by its re 
tractor, thus releasing the wheei I, which is to 
be driven at a speed suitable for keeping the 
circuit closed during the reception of the sig 
nal on the instrument Y. 
The circuit 2 is the circuit of a city fire de 
partment or of an insurance fire-patrol, and 
includes at one or more points instruments K, 
on which fire-alarm signals may be received. 
M B' indicate the battery for said circuit 
2. The magnet Y is obviously responsive to 
any makes and breaks of a branch circuit con 
nected to the line 1-as, for instance, by the 
operation of either wheel G. G*-when the 
ground branch is properly closed by the wheel 
G. When the wheel is released and allowed to 
turn under the action of any suitable driving 
power, the metallic circuit 2 is closed at wheel 
I, and during such closure any signals received 
on relay Y will be relayed onto circuit 2. The 
movement of wheel I should be so adjusted 
that it will close the circuit 2 during the time 
occupied in sending the two or more times 
repeated fire-alarm signal from wheel G. 
At MI is indicated, in a ground connection 
from metallic circuit 1, an ordinary district 
telegraph box, which in this case should be 
properly constructed to normally keep its 
ground-connection open. 
The signal wheels G. G. are constructed to 
send in their signal a large number of times, 
so that there shall be no practical interference 
from the operation of the district-telegraph 
box MI. 
One or more devices M. G. G* may be con 
nected to the circuit. 
The operation of the apparatus, so far as 
described, would be as follows: Normally the 
main circuit l is closed and the wheel I is 
held from movement by the electro-magnet 
V'. The ground circuits at MG G' are open, 
as indicated, and the wheel G is in the con 
nection from the line through the back stop 
9 of the arunature-level S of V. The circuit 2 
is broken at I. 
If now a signal be sent in from 
wheel G' or from box M, such signal will be 
received on the instrument Y, indicated in the 
ground-connection with battery GB, but will 
not be relayed, because the circuit-controller 
at ffm has not been operated, and therefore 
the magnet V* is not affected, and wheel I 
therefore remains in position to keep the cir 
cuit 22 open. If, however, the wheels G. G.' 
should be released and the magnet V should 
at the same time operate its armature-lever 
so as by front stop, 10, to throw in the wheel 
G, whose signal is to be relayed to the circuit 
2, the circuit controller governing the metallic 
circuit will first break and then make such 
circuit, with the effect of allowing the arma 
ture-lever of V to drop back for an instant 
and release the wheel I. The effect of these 
actions is to close the circuit 2 at wheel I, so 
that the signal coming in from wheel G over 
the now completed metallic circuit and ground, 
including relay Y, will be retransmitted by 
means of said relay onto the circuit 2 2. 
When the wheel I completes the movement, it 
will be stopped by the armature-lever of relay 
V, and the circuit 2 will be broken, so that 
a following signal from box M or from 
wheel G", which signals are unattended by 
any action of the magnet V, will be received 
in the proper manner on any instrument or 
instruments-such as magnet Y-indicated in 
the ground branch, but will not be relayed to 
circuit 2, because such circuit remains broken 
at the wheel I. 
Any arrangement of circuits or apparatus 
may be employed for bringing into operation 
the wheels G. G', and for effecting all action of 
the circuit-controller which governs magnet V" 
when the signal is transmitted from wheel G. 
I do not limit myself to operating the cir 
cuit-controller n in the main circuit by electro 
magnetism, inasmuch as it is obvious that the 
action of the same upon the circuits would be 
identical whatever the operating power. The 
said circuit-controller might even be operated 
manually. 
The operation of magnet V and of magnet 
V in the manner already described is brought 
about by the following arrangement of devices, 
which form the subject of a prior invention 
set out in any a foresaid application. 
D D are thermostats of any suitable kind, 
adapted to normally close one branch or circuit, 
a, leading from a battery, Li B, and when oper 
ated break said branch and close another 
branch or circuit, b, leading from the same or 
another battery and including the electro 
magnet V. The thermostats are preferably 
constructed to work in the Inanner described 
in my prior patent, No. 193,650. The two 
branches a b include oppositely-wound coils 
of an electro magnet, V, which is normally 
excited by the current on the branch (, and 
holds up its armature so as to keep a circuit 
closed which is formed by a wire, c, connected 
to the branch b, as indicated, and including the 
front contact-stop, 13, of the armature-lever 
17 for V* and the coils of the electro-magnet 
V. When, through the movement of a ther 
most at fron one to another of its contacts, the 
magnet V momentarily loses its power, the 
circuit c is broken by the falling away of the 
75 
95 
IO) 
I IC 
II 5 
25 
4 
388,358 
5 
O 
armature-lever, and the electro-magnet V operate to relay the signals received on the 
branch connection, including said magnet. 
loses its power and thus releases the wheels G. 
An electrical control of the relaying devices 
G* G'. The same effect would be produced, ob 
or circuits might be effected by the arrange 
viously, by a break in the wire b at any point 
ment shown in Fig. 3, where the wheel I is em 
between the points of connection of the cir 
ployed to normally shunt the relaying magnet 
cuit c. The magnet V would also lose its 
Y, to prevent the signal from being relayed. 
power and cause an operation of the signal 
When the wheel is released, the shunt is broken 
wheels G. G' in case wires a b should become 
and remains broken, and any signal received 
crossed, because in such instance the two coils 
on the ground-connection is retransmitted in 
on the magnet would neutralize one another's 
an obvious manner. 
effects. 
With the arrangement shown in Figs. 2 and 
The relay-armature of V, also through its 
3, where the armature-lever of the relay Y is 
back contact, 14, establishes a short circuit, 16, 
rendered inactive, it would of course be nec 
for battery L. B around both coils of the relay 
essary to employ a separate magnet for receiv 
and around the magnet V, as indicated. This 
ing the signals which are sent to be received 
short circuit is formed by an insulated contact 
plate, 15, insulated from the armature-lever 
at the station where the instrument Y is lo- . 
17, and adapted to rest upon the back con 
eated, but which it is desired should not affect 8 
tact, 14, when the magnet loses its power. 
the instrument in the circuit 2. Such an ad 
ditional relay-magnet is indicated at Y', and 
The circuit c is formed through the armature 
is arranged to operate upon the local circuit of 
lever proper, as clearly shown. When the 
a Morse register or other instrument in the 
wires become crossed, the magnet V will lose 
ordinary way. 
its power, as before, and cause the release of 
I do not limit myself to the employment of 
the wheels G. G; but the armature-lever of 
a device such as the lever n, for effecting an 
V will not be drawn up, and the signal will 
action of the magnet V", as any instrument 
therefore conne in from wheel G'. If, how 
which will operate on the circuit in such man 
ever, a thermost at should act in the normal 
ner as to cause a change in the magnet V on 
way, the branch a will be broken and the short 
the same circuit will answer the purpose of my 
circuit just mentioned will therefore fail to be 
formed; but the establishment of the connec 
invention. 
tion through branch bat a thermostat will bring 
It will of course be understood that where 
the line 2 is employed as a district-telegraph 
into operation the magnet V, which will oper 
line the district-telegraph instruments M of 
ate to throw into the ground connection the 
Fig. I can be placed directly in the main cir. 
wheel G, so that the latter, when released 
through the momentary loss of power in mag 
cuit 1, as indicated in Fig. 5. In this case the 
instruments M would be arranged to normally 
net V and magnet V, will send in its signal of 
close the circuit when at rest, as is usual with 
fire. The breakage of a brancha, or the failure 
district-telegraph boxes, and the signals sent 
of a battery, LB or L. B", will cause the signal to 
by such instruments would be received on a 
be sent from wheel G", magnet V under such 
relay, Y, included in the main circuit, instead 
cases being unaffected, and the special or emer. 
of upon an instrument in the ground connec. 
gency signal will be transmitted over the cir 
cuit 1 to the instrument included in the ground 
tion or branch. Inasmuch as instrument Y in 
of battery G. B; but such emergency or special 
the ground connection or branch will not re 
spond to makes and breaks of the circuit pro 
signal will not be relayed, for the reason be. 
duced by the instrument M, no effect will be 
fore cited. 
produced on the relay circuit 2, even though 
In Fig. 1 the control of the receiving ap 
paratus so as to prevent any but the proper 
the wheel I should be released through the ac 
signal from being relayed onto the circuit 2 is 
tion of the instrument M upon the closed cir 
effected through the action of a circuit breaker 
cuit. 
In the arrangements before described the ap 
and closer, whose operation in such control 
paratus by which the signals are relayed is 
ling action is purely electrical. 
normally in inoperative condition, thus re 
The control might be a mechanical one, as 
quiring the operation of magnet V when a 
indicated in Fig. 2, where the wheel I, instead 
signal of given character is to be relayed. A 
of making and breaking the relay-circuit, is 
converse arrangement might be employed, as 
shown as operating mechanically on the arma 
indicated in Fig. 4. In this instance the cir. 
ture-lever of the receiving-instrument Y. For 
this purpose the wheel is provided with a pro 
cuit 2 is normally closed over the wheel I. 
jection, 26, which, in the position of rest of the 
When the wheel is released, the circuit is 
wheel I, bears against the armature-lever of Y 
broken at the wheel and remains broken dur 
ing revolution of the same to the starting 
and holds the same againstits back or open-cir 
point. 
cuit stop, so that, although the magnet Y be ex 
cited, no effect will be produced on the relay 
If the instrument in the box. A sends the 
signal which is to be relayed, the circuit. con 
circuit 2, in luding magnet K. When, how 
troller in should remain quiescent, so that the 
ever, the wheel is released by the action of the 
wheel I shall not act; but in case the instru 
magnet V on the main-line circuit, the lock 
ment in box B operates, which may be assumed 
ing projection moves away from the armature. 
to be the one which sends the signal that is not 
lever of magnet Y, and the latter may then 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
9O 
95. 
O) 
In 
1 I5 
I 25 
I 30 
 
 
388,358 
5 
5 
O 
to be relayed or received on some other in 
strument, then the circuit-controller n should 
be operated, in order that the wheel I may be 
released. The movements of the armature 
lever of the instrument Y, produced by the op 
eration of the instrument in box B, will in that 
case produce no effect upon the circuit 2. 
The obvious advantage of employing the ar. 
rangement shown in Fig. 1, in which the 
magnet V controls the continuity of the cir 
cuit 2 by means of the circuit closing and 
breaking wheel I, is that the same magnet Y 
may be used both for relaying the signals and 
for receiving the signals locally at the station. 
This advantage arises from the fact that the 
armature-lever of the instrument Y can move 
in response to any signals sent by any instru. 
ment in any ground-connection from the cir 
cuit 1. When the magnet Y is so employed it 
is only necessary to attach to its lever circuit 
closing contacts properly insulated from the 
same, as is well understood in the art, this be 
ing an expedient frequently adopted where it 
is desired that the same relay-magnet should 
act simultaneously to relay two or more dif. 
ferent circuits. 
In Fig. 1 B' indicates an automatic alarm 
bell, which is placed on the outside of the 
building to be protected, and is connected into 
a circuit with springs h. h or other circuit-clos 
ing device that is normally open, but that is 
closed so long as the electro-magnet W is ex 
cited. This closure is effected by an arm, 18, 
extending from the armature-lever of V, or 
by other suitable means governed by said 
magnet. 
As V' only comes into action on the occur 
rence of fire and the operation of a thermostat 
in the normal manner, it is obvious that an 
alarm may be given on the outside of the build 
ing, which alarm will not be sounded, how 
ever, when the special signals are sent from a 
wheel, G', indicating derangement of the ap 
paratus or circuits. 
The arrangements herein described where 
by a signal-indicating derangement may be 
transmitted are not claimed herein, as they 
form the subject of claims in my application 
Serial No. 231,67S, filed March 21, 1887. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, with an all-round me. 
tallic main-line circuit, of a branch contain 
ing a transmitting apparatus, a branch con 
taining a receiver of the signals sent by said 
transmitting apparatus, a magnet in the main 
line governing the operative condition of said 
receiver, and a circuit-controller in said line, 
whereby the action of the magnet and the 
condition of the receiver may be governed, as 
and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination, with an all-round me 
tallic circuit, of a branch from the same con 
taining a transmitter, a second branch con 
taining a receiver of the signal sent by said 
transmitter, a second circuit governed by said 
receiver, a magnet in the main line governing 
the continuity of said second circuit, and a 
circuit-controller, also in said main line, for 
effecting a momentary change in the condi 
tion of the main-line magnet, so as to change 
the condition of the second circuit, as and for 
the purpose described. 
3. The combination, substantially as de 
Scribed, with an all-round metallic circuit, 1 1, 
and a circuit, 2, of fire-alarm signal-wheel G, 
of any suitable character, connected to a branch 
from circuit 1, a special signal-wheel, G', also 
connected to a branch of the same, a relay ap 
paratus whose relay-magnet is also in a branch, 
a controller-magnet for governing the opera 
tive condition of the relay apparatus, and a 
circuit-controlling device connected to circuit 
1 for changing the electrical condition of the 
line, and consequently the condition of said 
controller-magnet, as and for the purpose de 
Scribed. 
4. The combination, with an all-round me 
tallic circuit, 1, having signal-transmitting ap 
paratus in a ground connection from the Same, 
of a relay apparatus having its magnet also 
in a ground-connection, a mechanism for gov 
erning the operative condition of said relay 
apparatus, an electro-magnet in the main cir 
cuit controlling said mechanism, and a circuit 
controller in the main circuit governing the 
operation of said magnet, as and for the pur 
pose described. 
5. The combination, with an all-round me 
tallic circuit, 1, and a circuit, 2, of a relay-mag 
net in a ground-connection from circuit 1, and 
having contacts connected with circuit 2, and a 
magnet, V", in the metallic circuit for govern 
ing the operation of the relay devices, as and 
for the purpose described. 
6. The combination, with the all-round me. 
tallic circuit 1, of a receiving-instrument, Y, in 
a branch from the same, a transmitting appa 
ratus in another branch for sending signals of 
different character or significance, as described, 
and controlling-magnet V in the main-line cir 
cuit for governing the operative condition of 
the instrument Y, as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
7. The combination, with an all-round me 
tallic circuit, 1, having district-telegraph appa 
ratus M connected there with, of fire or burg 
lar alarm transmitters in branches from Said 
line, a special or derangement signal wheel 
also connected with the branch, a relay circuit, 
2, a receiving apparatus, Y, for the fire or burg 
lar alarm, and the derangement-signal appa 
ratus, a controller-magnet, V", in the main tel 
egraph-circuit 1, for governing the operative 
condition of the apparatus Y in relaying-sig 
nals, and a circuit-controller in the main tele 
graphic circuit 1, controlling the action of the 
magnet V". 
S. The combination, with an alarm-bell, B', 
on the outside of an electrically-protected 
building, of a fire alarm signal-transmitting 
wheel having local controlling-circuits, a spe 
cial or derangement signal-transmitting wheel 
having local controlling circuits formed in part 
over the controlling circuits for the former, 
25 
35 
45 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
IIS 
I 25 
6 
- 
388,358 
apparatus for relaying the fire-signals from the 
main circuit to the fire-department circuit, and 
a controlling-magnet for determining the opera 
tive condition of the relay apparatus, said mag 
net being connected to the main telegraph-line 
and being governed by the circuit-controller 
connected with the line at the building to be 
protected, as and for the purpose described. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 8th day of 
October, A. D. 1887. 
25 
JOHN H. GUEST. 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. CAPEL, 
HUGO KOELKER. 
and a controlling-magnet for said alarm-bell, 
connected with a portion of the controlling-cir 
cuits for the fire-alarm independent of the con 
trolling-circuits of the special-signal wheel, as 
and for the purpose described. 
9. The combination, substantially as de 
scribed, of a fire-alarm-signal transmitter, local 
controlling-circuits therefor, a special or de 
rangement signal transmitter, controlling cir 
cuits for the latter formed, in part, over the con 
trolling-circuits for the former, a circuit-con 
troller at the building to be protected and con 
nected with the line, a local controlling-circuit 
for the latter controller, a main telegraph-line 
connecting said transmitting-wheels with a cen 
tral office, a fire-department circuit, a relay 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388458.txt	(No Model.) 
S. W. SHOREY. 
RIWET, 
No. 388,458, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1888. 
Fi: 4. 
f 
 
Fig 5. 
: 
F. 
7 
Witness Es: 
InVE Intor. 
... 
N, PEEERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
SAMUEL W. SHOREY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
RVET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 388,458, dated August 28, 1888. 
Application filed February 21, 1888, Serial No. 264,759. 
(No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL W. SHOREY, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
ment in Rivets, of which the following de 
scription, in connection with the accompany. 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters on 
the drawings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object to construct 
a tubular rivet to be used as a fastening for 
buttons and the like. 
In accordance with this invention a blank of 
sheet metal shaped to present several arms is 
subjected to the action of suitable dies and 
plungers, whereby the several artins are up 
turned to form the sides of the tubular rivet, 
the outer ends of the said arms being turned 
outwardly to form a flange for the head of the 
rivet. A cap will preferably be employed for 
the flanged head or end of the rivet, and to in 
crease the strength a headed tack may be 
placed within the tubular rivet. 
Figures 1, 2, and 3 show in plan view metal 
blanks of different form which may be used to 
form a tubular rivet embodying this invention. 
Fig. 4 shows in side elevation a completed 
tubular rivet; Fig. 5, a vertical section of the 
tubular rivet shown in Fig. 4, having a cap at 
the head; Fig. 6, a similar view to Fig. 5, a 
headed tack being placed in the rivet; and 
Fig. 7 shows a rivet with a closed end. 
Referring to Fig. 1, the sheet-metal blank is 
cut to present four arms, as 2, of substantially 
equal length and radiating from a center, 
which, as shown in Fig. 1, is provided with 
an opening, 3. The outer ends of the arms 2 
are broadened or expanded, as at 4. This fiat 
blank is subjected to the action of suitable 
dies and plungers, by which it is formed into a 
tubular rivet, (see Figs. 4, 5, and 6,) the arms 
2 of the blank forming the shank of the rivet 
and the broadened or expanded ends 4, the 
O 
15 
25 
35 
 
latter being turned outwardly and forming the 
head, while the central opening, 3, forms the 
open end of the shank of the rivet. A cap, 
5, of suitable shape, is applied to the flanged 
head of the rivet, the edge of the cap being 
turned over said flanges, to thereby close the 
open head and to give a better finish when ap 
plied. To strengthen the rivet, a headed tack, 
6, may be placed within it, as shown in Fig. 6. 
Fig. 2 shows a blank like that in Fig. 1, but 
without the central opening, 3, and by it a 
rivet like that shown in Fig. 7 is obtained, the 
lower end of its shank being closed. 
In Fig. 3 the blank is provided at the junc 
tion of its arms with angular corners in contra 
distinction to round corners, as in Fig. 2, while 
the rivet produced from it is substantially the 
same as that produced by the blank of Fig. 2. 
The rivet herein described may be very 
cheaply manufactured, and may be used with 
or without the headed tack or other core. 
It is obvious that the number of arms 2 
may vary, and also another form of core may 
be substituted for the headed tack. 
I claim 
1. A tubular rivet composed of a single 
blank having several independent adjacent up 
turned portions, 2, broadened upper ends, 4, 
the independent cap 5, and headed tack 6, 
substantially as described. 
2. A tubular rivet strengthened by a de 
tached independent tack or core placed loosely 
within it, the end of the said tack or core pro 
truding from the bottom of the rivet, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name. 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
SAMUEL W. SHOREY. 
-5 
SO 
65 
o 
75 
Witnesses: 
BERNICE. J. No YES, 
J. C. SEARS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388558.txt	(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
WARIABLE EXPANSIVE AND REVERSING MOTION FOR OSCILLATING 
J. W. HART LEY. 
CYLINDER, ENGINES 
No. 388,558, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1888. 
 
 
  
a 
 
 
 
 
7 
S 
W 
% 
% 
2 
 
ES 
%2. 
A.S. ebulwar 
22 NSf2 
NSNS 
ra s 
NRZ: 
NSS y 
Sy-57 
Al 
 
2 
 
y 
 
 
6. 
N. PERS, Photo-ithographer, washington, d. c. 
 
(No Model ) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
WARIABLE EXPANSIVE AND REVERSING MOTION FOR OSCILLATING 
J. W. HART LEY. 
CYLINDER, ENGINES, 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3 
J. W. H.A.R.T LEY. 
WARIABLE EXPANSIVE AND REWER SING MOTION FOR OsCILLATING 
No. 388,558, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1888. 
CYLINDER, ENGINES 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
N 
TI 
SO 
at 
2 
- 
- - - - - - - - - - 
P -- - - - - - - 
-- 
l? 
7 - P - 2.-- 
At s---------- 
SS (SS 
SSA 
> w 
w 
--- 
S (c) 
S-> 
O 
cy. 
s 
Ya 
x 
TL 
- 
F}}{ 
- 
s 
ul 
-- 
 
O 
 
 
LI IWI 
W tgeSSE5, 
G.S. 6%a co-act 
 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington.D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN WILLIAM HARTLEY, OF STOKE-ON-TRENT, COUNTY OF STAFFORD, 
ENGLAND. 
VARIABLE EXPANSIVE AND REVERSING MOTION FOR OSCILLATING-CYLINDER ENGINES, 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 388,558, dated August 28, 1888. 
Application filed October 14, 1887. Serial No. 252,325. (No model.) Patented in England March 20, 1886, No. 3,927; in France 
December 15, 1886, No. 180,295, and in Germany December 31, 1886, No. 40,138. 
65 
the piston-rod reciprocates, a corresponding 
vibratory motion is communicated to the said 
lever, and by means of the rod or link to the 
before-named rocking lever, which in its turn 
transmits the motion to the valve. By prop-55 
erly proportioning the levers I obtain the ad 
ditional movement required to enable lap and 
lead to be added to the valve. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
invention and methods of applying same. 
Figure l is a sectional view. Figs. 2 and 3 
are also sectional views showing different meth 
ods of arranging the levers. Fig. 4 is an ele 
My invention consists of an improved varia. vation at right angles to Fig. 3; Fig. 5, an ele 
vation at right angles to Fig. 1. 
The same letters refer to the corresponding 
Referring to Fig. 1, A represents the cylin 
der of an ordinary oscillating engine; B, (shown 
in other figures,) the trunnion or center of os 
cillation. Upon cylinder-cover D, I attach 
bracket E, acting as a fulcrum for lever F, and 
upon lever F, I fix a pin, G, forming a fulcrum 
to lever H. 
. 
rod I, which gives motion to the slide-valve 
J. To the other end of said lever H, I attach 
a shoe, K, which is slotted out to fit upon a 
curved rocking bar or link, L, or, if preferred, 
a block and slotted link of the ordinary con- 8o 
struction. The said shoe K is flanged up to 
fit the curved rocking bar or link Landslides 
upon it as the cylinder oscillates. The said 
curved bar or link works upon a pin, M, fixed 
in a suitable position upon stationary portion 85 
of frame, and is in this instance in a direct line 
between the centers of oscillation B and crank 
shaft N. When curved rocking bar or link 
L is in mid-position, its center line is at all 
points equidistant from center of oscillation B, go 
and when the cylinder oscillates with link in 
this position no motion is communicated to 
shoe K and slide-valve J. Upon moving 
curved rocking bar or link L. upon its center 
either way according to the direction the en- 95. 
gine is desired to rotate, motion is transmitted 
to the slide-valve through lever H as the cyl 
inder oscillates, thereby causing the engine to 
rotate in one direction, and when the curved 
bar or link L is moved in the opposite direc- Ico 
To all, whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, JOHN WILLIAM HART 
LEY, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
residing at Stoke-on-Trent, in the county of 
Stafford, in the Kingdom of England, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Variable Expansive and Reversing Motion 
for Oscillating-Cylinder Engines, (for which 
Letters Patent have been issued in England, 
dated March 20, 1886, No. 3,927; in France, 
dated December 15, 1886, No. 180,295, and in 
Germany, dated December 31, 1886, No. 40,138.) 
of which the following is a specification. 
ble expansive and reversing motion for oscil. 
lating-cylinder engines, which I obtain with. 
out the use of eccentrics as usually applied. parts in each figure. 
For the purpose of my invention I use the foll 
lowing apparatus: Through a suitable arm or 
bracket attached to the cylinder of an oscil 
lating engine I pass a pin, which serves as a 
fulcrum for a rocking lever. Upon said rock 
ing lever and at a suitable distance from the 
fulcrum I fix a pin, which acts as a fulcrum 
for another lever, one end of which is attached 
to the slide-valve rod. The other end I attach 
to a block, which slides in a curved slotted 
link as the cylinder oscillates. Said link is 
supported upon a fulcrum fixed to engine. 
frame, its center being in a direct line between 
the center of oscillation and the center of 
crank-shaft. The center line of curved link 
is at all points equidistant from center of os 
cillation when in mid-position. I make said 
curved link to vibrate upon its center when 
moved from mid-position, and as the cylinder 
oscillates motion is given to the sliding block, 
and from thence to the slide-valve, by means of 
the before-named levers. By moving the curved 
link upon its fulcrum in either direction from 
its mid-position the engine is reversed. To en 
able me to employ lap and leadin order to use 
the steam expansively, I fit a suitable bracket 
or arm upon the valve box or cylinder, and to 
the end of this bracket or arm I fix a pin, 
which acts as a fulcrum to a lever. One end 
of said lever I connect to before-named rock 
ing lever by means of a rod or link, and the 
other end I connect to the piston-rod by a 
short link or by other suitable means. When 
One end of said lever H, I attach to valve-75 
" 
IO 
25 
45 
SO 
2 
338,558 
O 
tion the engine will be reversed by admitting 
steam to the opposite end of the cylinder. 
From the foregoing it is obvious that this mo 
tion could be obtained with the curved link 
5 only, and the fulcrum G fixed to the cylinder, 
as is frequently the case in cheap types of Os 
cillating engines; but it will also be seen that no 
motion can be communicated to the shoe K 
and from thence to the valve J as the crank is 
passing the dead-centers. Thus neither lap 
nor lead can be used, so that with engines con 
Structed as described steam cannot be used ex 
pansively. 
In order to use lap and lead and give the nec 
essary additional travel to the valve at each 
end of the piston's stroke, Iattach to outer end 
of lever F a connecting rod, O, the other end 
of which I attach by a pin, Q, to vibrating le. 
ver P, which vibrates upon fulcrum R. I 
carry fulcrum R. upon a suitable bracket ex 
tending from any convenient part of cylinder 
or valve-chest, and which oscillates there with. 
The other end of said lever P, I connect to 
piston cross-head T by means of a short link, 
U, or to piston-rod, in other convenient man 
ner. Lever P vibrates to and fro with recip 
locating motion of piston cross-head, giving 
motion through connecting-rod Otolever Fand 
fulcrum G, and thence to lever H. Accord 
ingly it will be seen that the center of shoe K, 
which at this point may be near its dead-cen 
ter and almost stationary, becomes the full 
Crum for this motion, and thus the end EI' of 
lever H is given an increased throw, which it 
communicates to the slide-valve J. I propor 
tion these levers so as to give to the slide-valve 
an an Ount of travel at each stroke of the en 
gine equal to the sum of the lap and the lead, 
and this, be it observed, is a constant quantity 
independent of the position of the curved bar 
or link L. 
To obtain a variable expansive motion, I 
employ a lever and quadrant of ordinary con 
Struction, attached by a suitable rod to end of 
curved bar or link L, so that I can move said 
curved bar therewith and fix it in any desired 
position. I then move said curved bar out of 
its central position in either direction to a 
greater or less degree, which correspondingly 
increases or decreases the travel of the valve, 
consequently cutting the steam off earlier or 
later, varying the expansion accordingly. 
In the end of lever P, I form a slot, wherein 
the pin Q is fitted, and by moving this pin 
farther from fulcrum R, I increase the throw 
of lever F, thus compensating for any wear or 
Slackness in the joints of the levers. 
Fig. 2 shows an arrangement with lever P 
carried upon opposite side of cylinder to that 
25 
35 
45 
6c shown at Fig. 1. 
Figs, 3 and 4 show arrangement of levers 
where I obtain the desired movement of lever 
F from a return-crank, V, instead of piston 
rod, as in Figs. 1 and 2. 
I would also have it understood that I do 
not confine myself to the exact details herein 
before described, as the same admit of modifi 
cation without departing from the essential 
features of my invention. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with an oscillating cylin 
der, A, the reversing-lever X, curved link L, 
slide-block K, and lever H, linked or jointed 
to the block K and to the valve-rod I, and piv 
oted on a fulcrum oscillating with cylinder A, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination of reversing - link L, 
slide-block IK, and lever H, connecting same 
to the valve-rod with fulcrum G, having mo 
tion taken from the piston rod, but reduced in 
amount. 
3. The combination, in an oscillating engine, 
of the fulcrun G of the lever H., (whereby the 
slide-block is connected to the valve-rod,) with 
lever F, fulcrumed on a point rigidly fixed to 
the cylinder, and devices O PU, for transmit. 
ting a reduced motion from the piston-rod, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
4. The combination, in an Oscillating engine, 
of the lever H, that gives motion to the valve 
rod, with a fulcrum, G, having a motion cor 
responding to that of the piston-rod, but re 
duced, whereby the necessary additional travel 
of the valve is obtained to allow for lap and 
lead and to work expansively. 
5. The combination, in a valve-gear for ec 
centric engines, of the lever F, carrying the full 
crum of the valve-rod-actuating lever H, link 
O, slotted lever Q, and link U, connecting Q 
to the piston-connections, whereby the motion 
of the piston in a reduced form is transmitted 
to the valve-rod actuating lever H. 
6. The mechanism for regulating the lead in 
oscillating engines, consisting of a lever, F, 
carrying the fulcrum of the valve-rod-actuat 
ing lover H, a lever, P, oscillating on a point, 
R, oscillating with the cylinder and linked to 
the piston-rod connections, with a rod, O, ca 
pable of being attached to lever P at any re 
guired point between limits by means of a link 
ing device, Q. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
75 
so 
90 
95 
IOO 
IC5 
O 
JOHN WILLIAM HARTILEY. 
Witnesses: 
A. E. HARRISON, 
EDWARD SCRAGG. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388658.txt	(No Model.) 
O, S, FOSTER, 
MACHINE FOR MAKING WIRE SPRINGS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 388,658, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1888. 
 
 
ta f 
HIut Hi 
h 
 
S8itv.cssos y 
23r, 
$4. Wale?ia. 
 
(No Model.) 
O, S, FOSTER, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING WIRE SPRINGS, 
No. 388,658, 
 
Patented Aug. 28, 1888. 
628)it-cases, 
so it. A 
34-uc41 tot 
sity 42 atter icy 
street-Cyr-e- 
N, PETERs, Photo-lithographer, washington. B. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 388,658, 
 
Patented Aug. 28, 1888. 
O, S, FOSTER, 
MACHINE FOR MAKING WIRE SPRINGS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OSCAR S. FOSTER, OF U TICA, NEW YORK. 
MACHINE FOR MA KING WIRE SPRINGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 388,658, dated August 28, l888. 
Application filed March 31, 1888. Serial No. 269,044. 
(No model.) 
55 
60 
7 ) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OsCAR S. FosTER, of 
Utica, in the county of Oneida and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Machines for Making 
Wire Springs; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
machines for coiling wire, and more particu 
larly to Such as are employed in the manufac 
ture of cone or double-cone wire springs used 
in the construction of bed-bottoms or for up 
holstering purposes. 
One object of this invention is to improve 
the construction of the type of machines that 
have conical formers on which to wind spring 
Wire to produce cone or double-cone springs, 
so that the rotative motion of such a former 
will be automatically arrested at a predeter 
mined point in the length of the coil, and 
thus with accuracy determine the length of 
all springs Wound on the machine. 
A further objet is to furnish an adjustable 
means for locking the end of the wire at the 
outer end of a double-cone-spring former, or 
where the winding operation is begun, so as 
to permit the length of the coil to be changed 
on the same former to render a spring end 
longer or shorter, as may be desired. 
A further object is to provide an improved 
wire cutting and bending implement that is 
so located with regard to one section of a sep 
arable double-cone-spring former that when a 
spring is Wound complete and is to be released 
from the main coil or bundle of wire the pre 
liminary Operation of an arrest of motion of 
the two cone-Sections of the former will 
throw the Wire up into the throat of the cut 
ting-jaws to permit the wire to be severed by 
a depression of the cutting-jaw. 
A further object is to so construct the jaws 
and cutters of a wire-cutting device used in 
connection with a spring- winding machine that 
these parts will be adapted to simultaneously 
sever the Wound spring and bend the cut end 
of this spring at an angle to the top coil of said 
spring. 
A further object is to provide a clutching 
device whereby a driving-pulley which is 
mounted upon the spindle that supports and 
drives the cone-wire-spring formers may be 
thrown into or out of operative connection 
with this spindle, and thus afford means for 
the employment, under proper control, of ade 
quate power transmitted through the driving 
pulley. 
With these several objects in view my in 
vention consists in the construction of parts 
and their combinations, as will be hereinafter 
specifically described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a rear 
side elevation of the complete spring. Winding 
machine. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the 
head-frame, wire-cutter, and clutch mechan 
ism, a portion of the latter being broken away 
to expose parts of the latching device em. 
ployed to hold the clutch-heads in 'locked' 
adjustment. Fig. 3 is a plan view, in hori 
zontal section, of the cutter-jaws of the wire 
cutter. Fig 4 is an enlarged view of the end 
of one cone-section of the wire-spring former. 
Fig. 5 is an enlarged detached section of the 
upper end of the truck, the stud mounted 
thereon, and the bent locking-finger, the lat 
ter being in side elevation. Fig. 6 is an en 
larged view of the adjustable locking-dog 
used to clamp the starting end of the spring 
previous to coiling the same. Fig. 7 is an 
enlarged sectional view of the one end of a 
cone-section, taken on a line through the 
tripping-dog, which by its action arrests the 
motion of the cone-section, showing the trip 
ping-dog projected to effect such a stoppage. 
Fig. S is an enlarged sectional view of the 
cone-section shown in Fig. 7, with the trip 
ping-dog in retracted position. Fig. 9 is a 
view in section on the line ' ' of Fig. 2, and 
Fig. 10 is a plan view of the lever S and its 
connections. 
It should be premised that certain features 
of the wire-spring-winding machine herein 
illustrated have been shown, described, and 
claimed in Patent No. 303,717, granted to O. 
S. Foster and W. S. Foster August 19, 18S4, 
consisting of a mechanism for the separation of 
one half of the double-cone wire-spring former 
from the other half of the same, and its re 
traction a proper distance therefrom to re 
lease a wound double-cone wire spring. This 
device is utilized in my present spring-wind 
o 
15 
25 
45 
95 
OO 
2 
388,658 
O 
35 
45 
55 
ing device with other features which are novel. 
I do not therefore introduce it as a leading 
feature or a new element, but as a convenient 
adjunctive appliance to render the spring 
winding machine as an entirety more com 
plete, and afford means for its rapid manipu 
lation in the manufacture of double - cone 
Springs. 
Referring to the drawings specifically, A, 
Fig. 1, represents a locnch or stable frame sufi 
ciently elevated to afford a proper support 
for the mechanism and permit certain parts to 
be moved by treadles. 
Upon the upper surface of the bench A the 
housing-frame B is placed. This consists of a 
base-plate on which are erected two parallel 
vertical standards, i3 B", which are connected 
integrally by the cross-piece B. An arm, B', 
is rearwardly extended from the standard B', 
said arm being upwardly curved to cause the 
axial center of a capped box, l', which is 
formed on the upper or free end of this arm, to 
lie in the same plane with hub-boxes G. G.' 
on the vertical standards B B, respectively. 
The boxes I (G G' just mentioned afford revo 
luble support to the spindle F, which is 
thus horizontally located to properly support 
the two cone-sections E. E., which are con 
nected by a square socket and tenon of similar 
form, (shown at E in Fig. 1.) Upon the por 
tion of the spindle F which extends beyond 
the box G a hand-wheel, G', is securely fixed, 
and adjacent to it the driving pulley H is also 
placed and secured loosely. The rear edge of 
the pulley H is cut with ratchet teeth H, 
which are designed to interlock with similar 
teeth formed on a clutch-hub, H', that is 
mounted so as to slide on the shaft F. 
a loose sectional 
ring or yoke, I, is loosely mounted. This is 
pivoted by its ear I that projects from one 
side to the flangel" of the box I, and is held 
engaged to the hub barrel by the pins () (, (see 
Fig. 2,) which penetrate through the body of 
the ring and enter an annular groove cut in 
the hub-barrel H", so as to allow this barrel to 
rotate and afford a means for moving it longi 
tudinally. 
A spiral spring, J, is attached by one end 
to the projecting cnd J of the frame-piece B", 
and the opposite end of this spring is hooked 
fast to the handle I, which projects horizon 
ally from the yoke I, thus adapting the spring 
J' by its retractile force to hold the teeth of 
the clutch-hub H' out of engagement with the 
mating teeth on the pulley II. 
Upon the bench A, a proper distance from 
the housing-frame B, an inclined plane, N, is 
formed, which is furnished with tracks 5 for 
the accommodation of the flanged wheels a of 
the truck I, which is intended to move on this 
incline. It will be seen that the pitch of the 
inclined or sloping track 5 is from a level por 
tion, 15, upwardly to the outer end, 20, as 
shown in Fig. 1, this pitch being sufficient to 
aid the movement of the car I, by gravity to 
ward the level part 15 of the track when it is 
On the clutch-hub barrel 
free to do so. There is a vertical bracket 
stand, N', placed on the outer end, 20, of the 
inclined plane N, which stand sustains a 
grooved pulley, d, that is loosely mounted with 
its pintled in the perforated bosses of the 
bracket-stand. 
The upright standard L of the truck L is 
provided with a bearing, IX", which has its 
longitudinal axis in the same horizontal plane 
with that of the spindle F, so that the double 
cone spring-wire former E E may be rotatively 
supported at its outer end by a device which 
will be further described. 
At b a wire cord, d, or other flexible strand 
is attached to the upright standard L of the 
truck L, which cord is placed over the grooved 
pulley d", thence carried down to engage the 
bracket-supported groove-pulley c', and thence 
toward the upper end, s, of the bell-crank P, to 
which this cord is attached. This connection 
of parts is shown in dotted line in Fig. 1. The 
short horizontal arm p of the bell-crank P has 
its outer end loosely engaged by a connecting 
rod, r, the lower end of this vertical rod hook 
ing into an eye on the treadle 6, which is piv 
oted to vibrate vertically, and this, when de 
pressed, causes the truck L to move up the in 
clined plane N. 
On the end of the truck I nearest the hous 
ing-frame B a cord, O, is attached, which is 
conducted over the grooved pulley n' and wer. 
tically downward, a weight, o, being affixed to 
the lower end of said cord, which is of sufficient 
weight to assure the return of the truck Lto the 
level plane 15 when the pressure of the oper 
ator's foot is renoved from the treadle (5. 
To afford a revoluble support to the end E 
of the joined cone-section E. E., a stud, K", is 
inserted in the end E of cone-section E, the 
body of the stud which enters the cone-section 
being threaded, and the axial perforation pro 
vided for its reception being tapped to suit it. 
The body of the stud K is cut to a shoulder, 
k", (see Fig. 5,) which abuts against the end of 
the come-section or against a washer when the 
stud is fully inserted, and upon the stud a col 
lar, K, is mounted, which latter is furnished 
with a set-screw, K, for locking it in position 
on the stud K. 
A locking-finger, K", is provided, which is 
L-shaped, and is screw-threaded on one limb 
to engage a tapped hole in the cylindrical col 
lar K, said finger K being bent to extend 
above the peripheral surface of the end E of 
the cone-section E and such a proper distance: 
removed ther(from that a free end of the 
spring-wire which is to be Wound into a spring 
may be inserted between it and the bottorn of 
the semicircular groove v, which is cut or 
otherwise produced in this end of the cone 
section of the wire-former, the threaded por 
tion of the finger K permitting a proper ad 
justment to suit different gages of wire. 
The outer end of the stud K is provided 
with a threaded end, c, which projects outside 
of the hub IX', a round washer and nut, c', be 
ing placed on this threaded end of the stud to 
So 
9O 
95 
OO 
IO 5 
O 
I 5 
I 25 
 
IC 
5 
90 
Oc 
IO 
388,658 
hold it so as to permit a rotary movement 
without end play of the stud in the hub-box K. 
The collar K is mounted on the stud K", and 
is held in position against the adjacent section 
of the former or against the washer l', as 
shown, by the nut k" and set-screw k". 
The inner or larger end of the cone-section 
E, which is nearest the standard B" of frame B, 
is secured by any proper means to the end of 
the spindle F, preferably threaded and screwed 
to a shoulder, so that they are axially coinci 
dent, and this spindle is adapted to rotate both 
sections E E together when it is revolved by 
power applied to the pulley II. 
It is important in the manufacture of coiled 
wire springs in quantity for spring-beds or 
similar uses, where they are all to be of one 
height, that an accurate means be provided to 
automatically arrest the winding of the spring 
at a proper predetermined point. To effect 
this I have provided a very simple and effi 
cient device, which I will now describe. 
The large end of the cone-section E, which 
is attached to the spindle IF, is excavated to 
receive a flat spring, 12, that is embedded in 
this recess. Said spring is furnished with a 
laterally-projecting lug, 9, the outer edge Of 
which corresponds with the periphery of the 
cone-section E. The lower end of the plate 
spring 12 is fastened at 13 to the body of the 
cone-section on which it is seated, and the 
spring is thus adapted to have its lug or ear 9 
forced outwardly when this lug is pushed 
against on its inner end. 
At at a latch, 10, is pivoted in an open slot 
made in the body of the cone-section E. (See 
Figs. 7 and S.) This latch has a projecting 
guard-toe, it', formed on its opposite or free 
end. The curved lower edge, at', of the latch 
10 is made to lightly bear upon the rear end 
of the lug 9, formed on the spring 12, and this 
spring, when in its normal position, is as shown 
in Fig. S. The latch, when thus retracted by 
spring 12, is held from too great a movement 
by the stop-pin 11, which is inserted above 
the edge of the latch, as shown in Fig. S. 
Near the projecting guard-toe ac", formed on 
the latch 10, a curved depression, ap', is made 
in the top edge of the latch to receive the wire 
strand at of a spring which has been com 
pletely won, this grooye or depression ac' 
being located so that it will line with the guide 
groove in the cone section, and thus be in po 
sition to receive the forcible pressure of the 
wire strand it when a spring is coiled. 
It is evident that when the wire spring has 
been coiled or wound on the cone-sections E 
E and the same is completed the latch 10 by 
its depression will project the lug 9 outwardly 
beyond the end of the cone-section E, so as to 
engage the lever C. The lever () is mounted 
on the shaft C, that is supported in a box, i. 
formed on the standard is near one of its ends, 
and at the other end in the box i, which is af. 
fixed to the horizontal portion of the arm B of 
the frame B. (See Fig. 1.) 
Upon the shaft C the cam-toe h is secured, 
its perforated hub being mounted on the end 
of said shaft, so as to have a limited rocking 
movement when this shaft is rocked in its Sup 
porting-boxes i i" by the engagement of the lug 
9 with the vertical lever C, as will be more 
fully explained in describing the operation of 
the machine. The toe of the cam his inwardly 
projected, so as to lie under an overhanging 
jaw, S', which latter is formed on the hub S, 
that is integral with an arm or lever, S, which 
projects outwardly from the side of the frame 
piece B to be convenient for the use of an op 
erator, a handle, S', being formed on its free 
outer end to facilitate is vertical depression 
manually When occasion requires. 
It will be noticed in Fig. 9 that the lever S 
just mentioned is supported by the engage 
ment of its short journal S" with the perforated 
upwardly-projecting ear S of the bracket-plate 
S', that is seated upon and bolted to the hori 
Zontal portion of the frame piece or arm B'. 
An adjusting-screw, S', is inserted downwardly 
through a threaded hole made for its recep 
tion in the smaller arm, S', of the lever S, 
which screw is intended to have forcible con 
tact with the adjacent surface of the cam-toe 
l, and thus permit an adjustment vertically of 
the air in S. 
In Fig. 2 a bent lever, J, is shown that has 
its one end, t, secured rigidly to the edge of 
the flange on box I. The body of this lever, 
or portion of it that is near to this secured end, 
is flattened at J to afford a spring action and 
permit said lever to be vibrated by reason of 
its elasticity, the direction of its vibration be 
ing vertical deviations from a horizontal plane. 
At a proper point close to the side of the 
handle I, that projects from the yoke I upon 
this side of the coiling-machine, an offset or 
shoulder is formed by the thickening up of 
the naterial and sloping of the thickened por 
tion, so as to produce a spring-latch, J, on the 
ever .J. The body of the handle-bar or actu 
ating-lever I" is cut away, so as to produce a 
latching-edge, ', on this lever to allow it to 
readily hook on to the spring latch J", when it 
and the clutch - hub I" are simultaneously 
moved toward the pulley 
a staficient dis 
tance to cause the teeth 
of the clutch-hub 
to engage corresponding teeth on the pulley 
edge. From a point, I, the lever J" is bent 
at a right angle to produce a depending limb, 
which is again bent to project horizontally and 
enter a slot in the adjacent body of the lever 
or handle bar S, through which it extends and 
is pinned fast, as shown in IFig. 2. 
On the upper portion of the housing-frame 
a pair of shear jaws, I) )', is supported. 
The jaw I) is secured to the cross-piece B 
of the frame IB, and is rendered capable of 
vertical adjustinent by means of the elon 
gated slots f", made through the piece 3, 
for the reception of an adjusting bolt and 
nut, f'. The other jaw, ), is pivoted at I to 
the jaw ), and its limb I ) extends beyond 
the rear edge of the france-tiece 3", so as to 
permit the depending treadle-bar f to be 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
388,658 
O 
25 
35 
O 
hooked onto it at f', and extend down to have 
its lower end loosely engage the free end of 
the treadle ty, which is hinged to proper ears, 
being Secured to the floor of the room in which 
the machite is placed. The treadleg is pressed 
upwardly by a spring, f', and through the con 
necting-barf the vibrating jaw I) of the shears 
is held away from the cutting. notch 4, made in 
the lower edge of the fixed jaw D', so that a 
strand of wire may be inserted readily into 
this notch. Then the depression of the limb D' 
of the jaw D, by a foot-pressure on the treadle 
(1, will sever the wire instantly. 
In Fig. 3 is shown the form of the jaw DI), 
and it will be seen from inspection of this fig 
ure that the jaw ID is really composed of two 
parts, ID' I)", which are bolted together by the 
bolts 8. The supplementary piece D" has its 
end at beveled to produce a cutting-edge, the 
sloping side being toward the outer surface of 
this plate. The other or main portion of the 
jaw l) has its end at located slightly to the 
rear of the cutting-edge of the plate I), and 
the end u' is beveled to produce a V form, 
as shown in Fig. 3. The adjacent end of the 
jaw D is cut away to exactly conform to the 
V shape of the other piece, ID', and by such a 
form it is adapted to have its edge at slide 
closely against the cutting-edge at of the 
plate D'. 
In Operation the coin pound shears just de 
scribed will engage with the edges at at a 
strand of wire placed in the notch 4 and held 
at right angles to the jaws. The downward 
movement of the int) )* will throw these 
edges together, cutting the wire and causing 
the edge at to slide last edget, so as to bend 
the severed end of a piece of spring-wire into 
a V form, or nearly in the shape of the female 
die at', that is formed on the end of the jaw D. 
The general Operation of the machine may 
be stated to be substantially as follows: A 
bundle or coil of spring. wire is located con 
veniently and in position to pay Out without 
being tangled. The free end of the spring 
wire is introduced below the locking-dog K 
(see Fig. 1) and embedded in the terminal 
groove E, which is cut spirally throughout 
the length of the two joined cone-sections E 
E, the position of this locking-dog having 
been previously arranged to determine the 
length of coil end. Motion is now commu 
nicated to the conc-sections, which are inade 
to revolve in a direction away from the op 
erator, who is stationed on the side of the ma 
chine. (Shown in Fig. 2.) The wire is held 
in the hands of the work man, who grasps it 
tightly and holds it with sufficient force to 
cause the wire to be (embedded in the bot 
tom of the groove E throughout the length 
of the cone - sections. When a spring has 
been completed as to its winding, the wire 
will enter the curved notch w', that is formed 
on the latch 10, and by its pressure thereon 
depresses the latch, which will project the 
lug 9, so that it will engage the vertical lever 
C, which will be pushed toward the rear 
side of the machine by the rotative move 
ment of this lug. The lever C will by its mo 
tion rock the shaft, C, on the end of which it 
is fastened, and this rocking motion will be 
transmitted by the cam too on hub h to the 
handle-bar S, depressing the handle S of this 
bar. The downward in ovement of the handle 
bar S will draw down the bent lever J and 
release the spring latch hook J" from the yoke 
lever , so that the latter, with its attached 
yoke I, will be moved toward the box I' by 
the retractiie force of the spiral spring J', thus 
! releasing the teeth of the clutch-hub H" from 
the pulley II, that the latter may run free, it 
being understood that the pulley II runs loosely 
on the shaft F, and is held from end wise dis 
placement by collars or other well-known ap 
pliances, while the clutch-hub H" is adapted 
to slide longitutially on a spline in the well 
known manner for constitcting such devices. 
If the parts of the device are properly con 
Structed so as to avoid lost notion in their 
several connections, the arrest of the winding 
novement of the cont-sections E E will be 
immediate and always at the same point. 
It is apparent that from the construction of 
the machine any length of cone-sections may 
be employed without change being necessary 
to adapt them to operate in conjunction with 
the automatic clutch shipping device, which 
will arrest their rotative motion by a depres 
Sion of their latches 10 from contact with the 
coil of a single-cone or double-cone spring, as 
the tripping mechanism is adapted to limit the 
length of a single-cone Spring as Well as the 
kind previously mentioned. When a spring 
has been wound and winding motion stopped, 
as has been explained, the tension of the 
wound spring will reverse the movement of 
the spindle F, and in consequence the spring 
will be loosened from the cone-sections, in 
creasing the diameter of its spiral coils. This 
Will carry the attached wire of the main bun 
dle up into the notch 4 in the shear jaw D', 
that is located immediately above the notch 
w" in the latch 10 on the cone section E, as 
shown in Fig. 1. A depression of the limb 
D" of the jaw l) by the foot of the operator 
applied to the treadle of will sever the spring. 
wire and bend the free end of the cone-spring, 
which bend is a preparatory operation to 
forming an eye on this end of the spring. 
When a spring is cut off from the main wire 
coil, it may be quickly removed from the cone 
Sections by a depression of the treadle 6, which 
will move the truck I, with its attached cone 
section E, away from the other cone-section, 
E, and thus free the spring in an obvious 
manner. The automatic return of the cone 
section E to its engagement with the other sec 
tion, E, will be accomplished by relaxing the 
pressure that has been applied to the treadle 
6, when the operation of Winding another 
spring may be effected by a repetition of the 
manipulation which has been given in detail. 
The hand-wheel G is utilized to check the 
| reverse movement caused by the tension of the 
9O 
OC 
C. 
I I5 
I3) 
 
388,658 
wound spring and to move the spindle F, and 
by Such a manual movement to place the lock 
ing-dog K in convenient position, preferably 
on the top side of the cone-section, so that the 
end of the spring-wire may be readily inserted 
into place under its finger when the operation 
of winding a spring is to be commenced. 
It should also be stated that the handle S" 
on the outer end of the handle-bar S is pro 
vided to afford a means of arresting motion of 
the Winding operation by hand if at any time 
it should be necessary, a depression of this 
handle instantly effecting a disconnection of 
the clutch-teeth and stopping the machine at 
O)Ce. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
IPatent, is 
l. In a Spring-Winding machine, the combi 
nation, with a shaft and a former secured 
thereto, of a movable lug mounted on the 
former, a latch arranged on the former in the 
path of the wire and caused by the wire to 
force the lug outward, and a tripping mech 
anism actuated by said lug for arresting the 
motion of the shaft, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a spring-winding machine, the combi 
nation, with a shaft and a former secured 
thereto and provided with a device arranged 
to be actuated by the pressure of the spring 
wire to be wound on the former, of a clutch 
On the shaft and intermediate mechanisin actu 
ated by the device on the former for operating 
the clutch, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a Spring-Winding machine, the combi 
nation, with a former mounted on a shaft and 
carrying a spring-actuated lug, of a latch ar 
ranged on the former in the path of the wire 
to be wound and caused by the wire to force 
the lug outward, and a clutch on the shaft and 
intermediate mechanism actuated by the lug 
for moving the clutch, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. In a double-cone-spring-winding machine, 
the combination, with a shaft, a truck, and a 
Sectional former, one section of which is secured 
to the shaft and the other section mounted on 
the truck, of a loose pulley mounted on the 
shaft, a clutching device arranged to interlock 
With the pulley, a clutch-operating device, and 
a lug and a latch arranged on one section of 
the former, the latch being in the path of the 
Wire to be wound and caused by the wire to 
force the lug outward to engage the clutch-op 
erating device, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a wire-spring-winding machine, the 
combination, with a housing-frame, a shaft 
carrying a section of the spring-former, and a 
movable truck carrying another section of the 
former, of mechanism for rotating the former, 
and tripping devices actuated by contact With 
a projection carried by the former for arrest 
ing the motion of the shaft, substantially as 
Set forth. 
6. In a cone spring-winding machine, the 
combination, with a shaft carrying one section 
of a spring-former, of a truck, a studjournaled 
in a bearing on said truck, a section of the 
spring former secured to said stud, a Collar 
secured on the stud, and a locking-finger Se 
cured to the collar and overhanging the end 
of the adjacent spring-former section, substan 
tially as set forth. 
7. In a cone spring-winding machine, the 
combination, with a former composed of two 
separable sections, a shaft to which one of Said 
sections is attached, a stud to which the other 
section is attached, and a truck having a bear 
ing in which said stud is journaled, of a bent 
locking-finger attached to the stud and Over 
lapping the end of the adjacent former-section. 
8. The combination, with a frame, a shaft 
journaled therein, a former-section secured to 
one end of said shaft, a loose pulley mounted 
on the shaft, a clutch arranged to engage the 
pulley, a truck having a bearing, a stud jour 
nated in said bearing, and a former-section se 
cured to the stud, of a lug and a latch arranged 
on one section of the former, the latch being 
in the path of the wire to be wound and caused 
by the wire to force the lug outward, and 
clutch-operating devices actuated by the lug, 
substantially as set forth. 
9. The combination, with the shaft mounted 
in a stationary frame, a stud journaled in a 
movable support, and former-sections secured 
to said shaft and stud, of a pulley loosely 
mounted on the shaft, a sliding clutch secured 
on said shaft, a lug and a latch arranged On 
the former section secured to the shaft, tie 
latch being in the path of the wire and caused 
by the wire to force the lug outward, and 
clutch-operating devices moved by the lug for 
operating the clutch, substantially as Sct forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
OSCAR S. FOSTER. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. W. FRANK, 
N. F. FOSTER. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
9O 
BC 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388758.txt	(No Model.) 
R. K. BURT, 
NECK YOKE RING, 
No. 388,758, 
Patented Aug. 28,888. 
c Ea 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR: 
?e/low 6 %evca. BY Ca-3 ?q. occa 
ATORNEY. 
N, PETERs. Photo-taliographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RANSOM. K. BURT, OF HADDAM, KANSAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE HALF TO 
ALBERT J. GUSTIN, OF LINCOLN, NEBRASKA. 
NEC K - YOKE R N G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 388,758, dated August 28, l888. 
Application filed March 15, 1888. Serial No. 267,203. (No model.) 
tween the bars b and k. By this construction 
of yoke-ring a space, K, is formed between the 
bar l; and the upper surface of the roller. 
It 
also forms an offsetting space, f, between the 
lower surface of said roller and the ends of the 
bars b. A strap, ty, occupies the space f and 
incloses the roller, and has its bearings on each 
side of the bark and forms a support for the 
strap, whereby the roller is allowed ample 
space to revolve between said strap. The 
neck-yoke bar H has one of these rings encir 
cling each end, and at the center is attached 
to a poie or tongue, I, of a vehicle. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
A neck-yoke ring having upright bars b, 
with cross-bar k, the bolt c, provided with 
roller d, inclosed between the bars bk, and said 
roller having on each side thereof spaces Kf, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
RANSOM. K. BURT. 
Witnesses: 
J. M. SHAFF, 
P. S. LESHER. 
35 
O 
45 
- 
tion. 
To all whon, it may eoncern: 
Beit known that I, RANSOM. K. BURT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Haddam, 
in the county of Washington and State of Kan 
sas, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Neck-Yoke Rings for Poles of 
Vehicles, of which the following is a specifica 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in pole-rings for neck-yokes; and it consists in 
the construction and arrangement of parts, as 
will be hereinafter described, and particularly 
pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an edge view of the ring. Fig. 2 is a front 
side view. Fig. 3 shows a neck-yoke with 
rings applied to the pole or tongue of a ve 
hicle. Fig. 4 shows the ring with neck-strap 
attached. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter Ades 
ignates an open ring, each end of which ter 
minates in flat upright bars b, having on their 
upper ends a cross-bar, le. The two bars b are 
connected by a bolt, c, about midway of their 
lengths, and on which is mounted, between 
said bars b, a roller, d, which is inclosed be 
O 
I 5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388858.txt	JACOB C. GOSE, OF IREELSVILLE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO RICII ARD H. 
BOWEN, OF PUTNAMVILLE, INDIANA. 
MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 388,858, dated September 4, l'888. 
Application filed October 31, 1887. Serial No. 253,876. (No model.) 
15 
To all, uvlon, it may concern: 
IBe it known that I, JACOB C. GosE, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Reelsville, 
in the State of Indiana, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Motors; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which itappertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to motors actuated by 
hand and foot power; and it consists in the 
improved contrivance hereina?ter described, 
Whereby a simple and efficient construction is 
presented that will besuitable for drivingroad 
vehicles, light machinery, &c. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming part 
of the specification, Figure 1isa side elevation 
of a motor ennbodying my improvements, and 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. 
The supporting-frame of the machine con 
sists of a base-piece and end sections, A B. 
The end sections, A and B, are connected and 
braced together at their upper ends, respect 
tively, by cross-barsa and a'. The section A 
consists of two standards, each of which com 
prises two parallel beams, band c, while the 
section IB comprises but two standards, dand e. 
C represents longitudinally-inclined bars, 
Secured at one end to the standards and hav. 
ing their front portions extending beyond the 
sections A. The front portions of said bars C 
are slotted, asshown at c', for the purpose here 
inafter explained. 
ID represents a cross-bar connecting the for 
ward ends of the bars C. 
A top bar, E, connects the front and rear 
Sections, and, as represented, is curved to 
carry a seat,f, for the operator. 
Bearing in the standards d e is a shaft, F, 
the projecting ends of which are bent to form 
oppositely-extending cranks gg, each carry 
inga horizontal wrist-pin, h, at its outer end. 
A gear-wheel, G, between the standards de, is 
mounted to rotate with the Shaft Fand mesh 
With a pinion, i, above on a shaft, H, jour 
naled in a bearing, j, located upon the upper 
side and near the rear end of one of the side 
bars C. A wheel, I, is located on the end of 
said shaft H, which may be a sprocket or belt 
wheel to transmit power. 
Although actuating-levers are located on 
both sides of the machine, they differ only in 
relative positions to accord with the oppo 
sitely-extending cranksg, so that it will only 
therefore be necessary to describe the construc 
tion and arrangement of one side in order to 
understand both. 
An extended pitman, J, is connected to the 
crankg, and extends forwardly between the 
beams b c, where it is connected pivotally to 
the lowerbi furcated end of a vertical arm, I, 
the upper end of which is pivotally connected 
by a horizontal link, , with the lower end of 
a hand-lever, L, hung on the cross bar a be 
tween the beams b c. 
An extended bracket-strip, M, issecured on 
the outer side of each beam c, and is curved 
outward, as shown in Fig. 2, to forma verti 
cal guide space between it and the side of the 
beam c. A pin, m, receives the bracket and 
enters the beam to forma pivot, upon which 
is mounted a lever, N, havinga bent inner end, 
o, to forma pedal for the operator's foot, while 
its outer end ispivotally connected by a link, 
P, with the forward end of a beam, O, cen 
trally pivoted in the side bar C, and pivotally 
connected by a link, q, with the wrist-pin h of 
the crank g. 
As will be seen, the forward portion of the 
beam Oplays in the space between the bracket 
strips M and adjacent beam. 
The operation of the machine will be readily 
understood. The operator occupies the seat 
f, so as to alternately depress the pedals and 
vibrate the levers ILL, which results in the 
pitmen Jand beams O, actuating the cranksg, 
to rapidly and easily rotate the gear-wheel G, 
so as to rapidly drive the pinion I and itsbelt 
wheel. The construction of the actuating de 
vices is such that a comparatively slight exer 
tion will, by reason of the larger leverage, 
rapidly rotate the gear-wheel and its pinion. 
I clainn 
1. The combination, with the supporting 
franne, of the drive-shaft provided with oppo 
sitely-extending cranks and with links q, piv 
oted to the outer ends of said cranks, the op 
positely-extending hand-levers, the pitman 
bars connected to the cranks and to the levers, 
and foot-levers having foot-connections with 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOQ) 
388,858 
centrally-pivoted beams, said beamsbeing piv 
oted to links (, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the supporting 
frame having the front and rear sections, the 
former consisting of standards formed of pairs 
of beams, of the drive-shaft having the oppo 
sitely-extending cranks, the oppositely-extend 
ing hand and foot levers, pitman bars guided 
between said standard-beams, and a centrally 
5 
pivoted beam having its front portion guided 1 o 
by a bracket-strip and link-connections, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimonywhereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JACOB C. (OSE. 
VVitnesses: 
MARY G. WEBB, 
ELIZA BETH STOOPS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US388958.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. DLL, ON, 
No. 388,958, 
 
T00, HOLDER FOR GRIND STONES, 
is: 13 inted Sept., 4, 1888, 
24.62% 
64-6) 
w 
, is 
BY Muw 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. DILLON, OF POUGHKEEPSIE, NEW YORK. 
TO Ole H ODER FOR GR NDSO NES 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 388,958, dated September 4, 1888. 
Application filed February 17, 
1888. Serial No. 264,349. (No model. 
O 
To all whom it naty conce772. 
Be it known that I, JAMES M. DILLON, of 
Poughkeepsie, in the county of Dutchess and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
Improved Tool-Holder for Grindstones, of 
5 which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
My inventicn relates to an improved tool. 
holder for grindstones, and has for its object 
to provide a means whereby a number of tools 
lmay be held at an angle and in rigid contact 
with the periphery of the stone and be raised 
therefrom at pleasure, and wherein the attach 
ment will be simple, efficient, and durable, 
and capable of manufacture at a moderate cost. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of the several parts, as will 
be hereinafter fully set forth, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a grindstone 
having the device applied. Fig. 2 is a front 
elevation of the tool-holder, and Fig. 3 is an 
end view of the same. Fig. 4 is a front ele 
vation of the base, and Fig. 5 is an end view 
thereof. 
In carrying out the invention, A represents 
a grindstone, and A' the frame thereof. A 
plate, B, preferably segmental, is secured over 
each bearing upon the frame, from which 
plates a series of radial arms, b, are projected, 
the arms upon both sides of the stone being 
in parallel planes and sufficiently long to pro 
ject beyond the periphery of the stone, as best 
shown in Fig. 1. 
The holder proper consists, essentially, of 
three parts-namely, the base D, the pivoted 
body or holder D', and thesliding tool-clamp D'. 
The base D consists of a bar, d, of a length 
slightly greater than the width of stone at the 
periphery, the ends d" of which bar, projecting 
at right angles from the side, are provided 
with spaced lugs d" in like plane with the bar 
and a thumb-screw, d, passing through one 
lug at each end of the bar. The upper side 
edges of the end pieces d' are made to over 
5o hang the base, which overhanging parts are 
45 
35 
d. 
respectively apertured, as best illustrated in 
Fig. 5. 
The body or holder D' consists of four bars 
of equal length-two upper bars, e, and two 
lower bars, e-united by end pieces e". The 55 
end pieces are provided with a central recess, 
e', in their upper edges of a width preferably 
equal to the space intervening the upper 
bars, but widened below the bars, as shown, 
whereby the approaching smooth surfaces of 6O 
the said upper bars form ways, as best illus 
trated in Fig. 3. The lower bars, e, are wider 
than the upper bars, having flat upper faces, 
as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 3, adapted to 
support the tool to be sharpened. The end 65 
pieces e are pivoted centrally at their base 
to the upper forward end projections of the 
base proper of the device, and the contiguous 
edges of the said base D and the body or 
holder D are recessed in such manner as that 7o 
the latter may have an easy rocking move 
ment upon the former. 
The end pieces of the body or holder are 
provided at the bottom rear corner with an out 
wardly and upwardly inclined projection, k, 
provided at or near the extremity with an ap 
erture and a pin, k", and the said projection k 
and the similar projection upon the base D 
have secured thereto the respective members 
of an essentially U-shaped spring, K, which 
spring normally gives the body a forward in 
clination, as shown in Fig. 1. 
In order that the body may be held horizon 
tally, a catch, M, is pivoted to the rearward 
extension of the base, adapted to engage the 85 
aforesaid body-pin l'. 
To complete the device, the tool-clamp D, 
consisting of a rectangular block grooved to 
receive the inner faces of the upper bars, e, is 
placed in contact with said bars to slide thereon, 
and a thumb-screw, h, is entered a threaded 
aperture extending vertically and preferably 
centrally through the block, as illustrated in 
Figs. 2 and 3. 
In operation the base D is placed trans 
versely above the periphery of the stone and 
secured to one set of the radial arms b by means 
of the set-screws. The tool to be ground (in 
this instance a granite-cutter's tool) is placed 
transversely upon the lower bars, e, the clamp- IOO 
95 
90 
75 
2 
388,958 
provided with radial arms, a base-plate hav 
ing lugs embracing the arms, and a set-screw 
passing through said lugs, and a body piv 
oted to rock upon the base provided with tool 
supporting bars, and parallel ways above said 
bars, of a clamping-blocksliding in said ways, 
springs connecting the base and body at the 
ends upon one side, and catches pivoted upon 
the base engaging a projection upon the body, 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. As a new article of manufacture, the tool 
holder consisting of plates B B, having radi 
atting arms b b, adapted to receive a holder 
consisting of a base, D, provided with spaced 
lugs d' d', for receiving a radiating arm, b, and 
a screw, d, for fastening the same, and a 
holder, D', consisting of upper bars, ee, and 
lower bars, e'e', united by end pieces, e, piv 
of ally attached to base D, a spring, K, a catch, 
M, and a sliding tool-clamp, all substantially as 
and for the purpose herein specified. 
35 
45 
JAMIES MI, DILLON. 
Witnesses: 
MARTIN L, BEUTELL, 
GEORGE W. MYERS. . 
IO 
ing-block brought over it, and the set-screw it 
made to engage the tool and bind it in place. 
The catch M is withdrawn from the pink, and 
the body thereupon is inclined forwardly by 
the spring K, causing the cutting-edge of the 
tool to rest and bear firmly upon the grind 
stone. A rotary motion being given the stone, 
the tool is ground as required. The tool be 
ing ground sufficiently, the body is thrown 
back, the catch in engaged with the pink', the 
tool being thereby held above the stone for ex 
amination, manipulation, or removal. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with segmental plates 
adapted for attachment to a grindstone-frame 
provided with radial arms, a base-plate hav 
ing lugs embracing the arms, and a set-screw 
passing through said lugs, and a body piv 
oted to rock upon the base provided with tool 
Supporting bars, and parallel ways above said 
bars, of a clamping-block sliding in said ways, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with segmental plates 
adapted for attachment to a grindstone-frame 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389058.txt	(No Model.) 
E. L., COLE. 
MACENE SHOPS, 
PROCESS OF RECLAIMING OIL FROM THE PRODUCTS AND WASTE OF 
No. 389,058, 
a tented Sept. 4, 1888. 
KS6 
(v47s esses. 
//7/2% 
3rd Paw, 
s 
O 
1-0 
O 
Are -ezz-Zor. 
(3-449 (36. 
73-6.2% 222/64, 
PEERs, photo-thographer, washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EVERETT L. COLE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PROCESS OF RECAMING O FROM THE PRODUCTS AND WASTE OF MACH NE-SHOPS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 389,058, dated Septemasr 4, 1388. 
Application filed November 4, 1857. Serial No. 25-1,249. (No molel.) 
55 
75 
So 
pipe for heating the water. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
7o aid it hon, it may conce7n: 
the tank, for the purpose hereinafter stated, 
Be it known that I, EVERETT L. CoLE, of which divides said tank into compartments. A 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of A. Said tank is filled with water to a point 
Illinois, have invented a certain new, useful, at or about the height of the partition B. 
and Improved Process for Reclaiming Oil from 
C represents a service-pipe for supplying 
the Products and Waste of Machine-Shops, of water, C a waste pipe, and C a coil of steam 
which the following is a description. 
D is a steam-jet for injecting steam into said 
a part of this specification, and in which like tank, the same being extended into the Con 
letters of reference in the different figures des. partment A', to a point at or near the parti 
ignate corresponding parts, I have shown an tion B, which is perforated to receive a larger 
apparatus which I regard as the most satis- pipe, E, which is open at both ends and Sur 
factory for carrying my improved process into rounds the pipe D. Upon injecting steam 
effect, though I do not confine myself thereto, therein a circulation of the liquid in the tank 
as it may be varied materially without depart. is maintained from the compartment A to A', 
ing from the essential features of my inven- as indicated by the arrows shown in Fig. 1. 
F is a cylinder made from perforated sheet 
tion. 
Referring to said drawings, Figure 1 is a metal, slats, bars, or wires, (or in any way, So 
longitudinal sectional view of a tank, showing that the liquid of the tank may freely circu 
a revoluble perforated cylinder therein for late through it,) and is provided with journals 
agitating the materials to be cleansed, and ff, adapted to rest loosely in half-bearings a 
means for removing the cylinder from the a, attached rigidly to the walls of the tank. 
tank. Fig. 2 is a like view of the tank as it A bail, F, is attached to the cylinder shaft 
appears when the cylinder has been removed for hoisting the cylinder into or out of the 
therefrom, and Fig. 3 is a face view in detail tank by means of a block and tackle, G, at 
of one of the lugs or bearings for supporting tached to a crane. 
the axis of the cylinder. 
i. A hub, H, having radiating spokes it, is rig 
In the manufacture of machinery the fitting, idly attached to the cylinder-shaft for rotating 
turning, and boring of castings, drilling and the cylinder when in the tank. Said cylinder 
cutting of screw-threads, and other analogous is partially or wholly filled with castings, fit 
work large quantities of oil are used to pre- tings, screws, nuts, chips, shavings, cotton 
vent the heating and spoiling of the tools. As waste, &c., which are to be cleaned and which 
a good quality of lard or other expensive oil contain the waste oil to be reclaimed, and is 
is employed, this constitutes a considerable hoisted into the tank upon the bearings (t (t, 
item in the running expenses of all machine- as shown in Fig. 1, the water in said tank be 
shops. In the processes heretofore employed ing heated to the boiling-point and charged 
for cleaning the various parts upon which oil with alkali in solution and hydrocarbon oil as 
has been used the oil has been wholly wasted, follows, viz.: crystal carbonate of soda and com 
and the borings, filings, dust, and general ref. mon kerosene-oil, in the proportions of about 
use, with which large quantities of oil neces- seven pounds of the former and one quart of 
Sarily become incorporated, have heretofore the latter to one hundred gallons of water. 
been thrown away as of no value. 
After agitating the articles in the cylinder, ly 
It is my object to provide a simple and revolving the latter until they are well cleaned 
economical method whereby the oil thus and the waste oil therein thoroughly cut and 
wasted may be reclaimed and used over and incorporated with the solution in the tank, 
over again indefinitely, the steps of which i (which is greatly assisted by the circulation of 
process are hereinafter more particularly de- the water from one compartment to the other, 
Scribed and claimed. 
caused by the steamjet D,) the cylinder is 
A in the drawings represents a tank, con- hoisted from the tank, after which the oil may 
structed of boiler-iron or other suitable ma- be separated from the water. 
terial, which is preferably provided with a 
One object of employing two compartments 
partition, B, somewhat lower than the top of in the tank and maintaining a circulation by 
92 
95 
CO 
O 
3O 
45 
 
389,058 
25 
30 
35 
means of the steamjet is to induce a current 
from the larger to the smaller tank, as indi 
cated, so that such oil as may tend to float 
upon the surface may be collected in the 
5 smaller tank, as indicated at a, Fig. 1, so that 
when the cylinder F is removed the floating 
oil will not collect therein or adhere thereto, 
though this may be prevented by skimming 
the surface before removing the cylinder 
IO should a single tank be employed, which may 
be done with good results. After removing 
the receptacle containing the cleaned articles 
or material, I introduce an acid reagent into 
the tank to precipitate the alkali. The re 
I5 agent which I prefer to employ for this pur 
pose is commercial sulphuric acid, in the pro 
portion of about one pound to one hundred 
gallons of the cleaning solution above netmed. 
As soon as the reaction is complete, the oily 
Substance or emulsion is skimmed from the 
top, to which it rises, and is placed in a sepa 
rate vessel, when it is ready to be clarified. 
The clarification may be accomplished in any 
one of various well-known ways, but prefer 
ably as follows: Place the emulsion in a closed 
tank and subject it to steam-pressure for ten 
or twelve hours; then allow it to settle about 
the same time, when the clear oil may be drawn 
off. It should then be washed with steam and 
a weak solution of alkali, to neutralize all traces 
of acid, if any, remaining therein, when it is 
ready for use. 
In lieu of the steam bath for clarifying the 
oily emulsion, it may be treated as follows 
with very satisfactory results: Stir into the 
emulsion about one-fourth of one per cent. 
of dilute sulphuric acid until it is well incor 
porated there with, and allow it to stand for 
ten or twelve hours, after which draw off the 
clear oil and treat the residue as follows: Add 
from five to ten per cent. of hydrocarbon oil, 
naphtha, or equivalent solvent; one and one 
half per cent. of dilute sulphuric acid, and 
agitate with steam for about one hour; then 
add about five per cent. of common salt with 
about one-fourth of one per cent. of powdered 
alum, and allow the solution to stand for two 
days, or thereabout, when the clear oil may be 
withdrawn. Upon neutralizing the acid 
5o therein, as above stated, the oil will be ready 
for use. 
While I prefer to employ carbonate of soda 
in the cleaning solution as being less liable to 
saponify the oil, it is obvious that any other 
55. alkali may be used, due regard being had to 
its proportionate strength. I would suggest 
the following alkalies, in about the proportions 
named, respectively, to one hundred gallons 
of Water as the chemical equivalents of the 
carbonate of soda: caustic potash, two and 
three-fourth pounds; quicklime, one and one 
half pound; pure caustic soda, two pounds; 
dry carbonate of potassa, six pounds. 
By mixing the hydrocarbon oil with the 
45 
49 
65 
75 
SC 
95 
Og 
IO5 
O 
IIS 
alkali, as stated, the oil to be reclaimed may 
be loosened and wholly separated from the 
material containing it without requiring the 
alkali to be of such a strength as to saponify 
said oil. This feature is all important, as the 
oil cannot be reclaimed in its original state 
when once saponified, but will continue to re 
main a sticky viscid mass, only fit for inferior 
uses. It is essential, therefore, that the hydro 
carbon oil or its equivalent and the alkali 
should be combined in the first step of releas 
ing the oleaginous matter from the waste or 
other material with which it is mixed, as the 
one coacts with the other in releasing the oil, 
while the hydrocarbon oil employed for the 
purpose is not sufficient in quantity, if allowed 
to remain, to injure the quality of the re 
claimed oil, and the alkali may be readily 
separated therefrom by neutralization. 
It is obvious that any acid may be used as a 
reagent to precipitate the alkali, and any form 
of hydrocarbon oil-as naphtha, petroleum, or 
kerosene-may be employed as a solvent; but 
I prefer to use sulphuric acid and kerosene, as 
stated. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The process of reclaiming oil from the 
products and waste of machine-shops, consist 
ing in agitating the parts or waste containing 
the oil in a heated bath of water, alkali, and 
hydrocarbon oil, neutralizing the alkali from 
the solution, and, finally, removing the sepa 
rated oil and clarifying it in any well-known 
way, substantially as described. 
2. In the process of reclaiming oil from the 
products and waste of machine-shops, first, 
agitating the parts or waste containing the oil 
in a heated bath containing water, carbonate 
of Soda, and hydrocarbom oil, in the propor 
tions of seven pounds of soda and one quart of 
oil or thereabout to one hundred gallons of 
water; secondly, neutralizing the alkali in so 
lution by means of an acid reagent and sepa 
rating the oil, and, finally, clarifying said oil 
in any well-known way. 
3. In the process of reclaiming oil from the 
products and waste of machine-shops, first, 
agitating the parts or waste containing the oil 
in a heated bath of water, carbonate of soda, and 
hydrocarbon oil, in the proportions of seven 
pounds of soda and one quart of oil or there 
about to one hundred gallons of water; sec 
ondly, neutralizing the alkali in solution by, 
meaus of an acid reagent and separating the oil; 
thirdly, subjecting said oil to steam-pressure 
in a closed tank and allowing it to settle, and, 
finally, withdrawing the clear oil and neutral 
izing the acid therein, substantially as de 
scribed. 
EVERETT L. COLE. 
Witnesses: 
D. H. FLETCHER, 
J. B. HALPENNY. 
-- 
...a 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389158.txt	(No Model.) 
E. P. LYNCH, 
WHEEL CULTIVATOR, 
No. 389,158, 
Patented Sept. 4, 1888. 
WITWESSES, 
7&zecz Z.3% core(.. 
1.25 
IWWEWTOR, 
6? (? secA) 
y degee 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD P. LYNCH, OF DAVENPORT, IOW. A. 
W H E E L - CUT WATO R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 389,158, dated September 4, 1888. 
Application filed Decemlje 22, 1887. Serial No. 25,746. 
(No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
5 
O 
IS 
2 5 
35 
45 
To add u?ion, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD P. LYNCH, of 
Davenport, in the county of Scott and State of 
Iowa, have invented certain Improvements in 
Wheeled Cultivators for Listed Corn, &c., of 
which the following is a specification. 
The aim of my present invention is to pro 
vide an implement particularly adapted for the 
cultivation of what is commonly known as 
'listed corn-that is to say, corn growing in 
the bottom of a trench or furrow. 
In carrying my invention into effect I take 
an ordinary wheeled cultivator having two lat 
erally and vertically swinging beams, such as 
are usually provided with two shovels on each 
beam. I remove from each beam the inner 
shovel and unite the two beams by a down 
Wardly-extending metallic connection having 
approximately a ?m form, carrying at its lower 
end two upright guards or fenders adapted to 
pass on opposite sides of the corn and protect 
the same from the moving clods and earth, and 
also provided with two shares extending out 
Ward beyond the respective shares in a sub 
stantially horizontal direction, as hereinafter 
more fully explained. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 rep 
resents in perspective, viewed from the rear, 
a cultivator provided with my improvement. 
Fig.2 is an outline elevation of my cultivating 
devices, showing the position which they oc. 
cupy When in action with respect to the fur 
roWS and the corn therein. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
centrally-arched axle supported at its ends by 
two ground-wheels, B, and provided with a 
pole or draft-tongue, C. DD represent two 
beams or drag-bar's jointed at the front to the 
axle in such manner that their rear ends may 
Swing both vertically and horizontally. The 
foregoing parts may all be constructed and 
arranged to operate in the same manner as 
in other existing machines, although I recom 
mend the construction represented in Letters 
Patent of the United States granted to me on 
the 10th day of November, 1885, No. 329,921, 
in which the shovel-standards are carried by 
yokes pivoted vertically to the rear ends of 
the beams, as shown in the accompanying 
drawings. 
The two beams are provided, as usual, with 
rearwardly - extending handles, by which to 
guide and control them, and the machine pro 
vided with draft devices and other customary 
parts necessary to its operation but foreign to 
my invention, and which need not, therefore, be 
detailed herein. Each beam is provided, as 
usual, at the rear end with an outer standard, 
E, carrying a shovel at its lower end. 
In applying my improvement to the existing 
machine Iremove the innerstandard from each 
beam, and in place of these standards bolt to 
the beams or the standard - carrying yokes 
thereon two downwardly-extending bars, F, 
the lower ends of which are curved in Ward and 
rigidly united by a cross-connection, G, con 
sisting of two bars, the upper ends of which 
are lapped horizontally upon each other and 
united by a bolt, a. The bars F and G consti 
tute jointly a frame of n form adapted to strad 
dle the row of young corn. To the lower ex 
tremities of this ?n-frame I secure adjustably 
by fastening-bolts b, or otherwise, two upright 
guard plates or fenders, H. Outside of each 
fender secure to the frame a share or Cutter, 
I, consisting of an upright inner portion and 
of a portion extending outward and somewhat 
rearward in a substantially horizontal posi 
tion. The forward edge of this share is sharp 
ened throughout its horizontal, and preferably 
throughout its vertical, portion, whereby it is 
adapted to pass readily through the soil adja 
cent to the furrow, in order to sever and de 
stroy the weeds. Each share is preferably, but 
not necessarily, provided at the rear edge with 
one or more inpturned fingers, c, designed to 
disintegrate and loosen the soil. When the 
machine is in action, the fenders passing on 
opposite sides of the corn, as represented in 
Fig. 2, protect the same, while the blades ex 
tending outward on opposite sides of the fur 
row pass through the soil slightly below the 
surface, effectually destroying all vegetable 
growth. The outer shovels, E, act to loosen 
the soil between the trenches and beyond the 
extremities of the shares. The shares and 
fenders are both provided, as shown, With a 
series of bolt-holes, in order that they may be 
raised or lowered and otherwise adjusted in 
position, as the character of the soil or other 
controlling circumstances may demand. 
The arms F are also provided with a series 
of bolt-holes, in order that the lister attachment 
may be raised or lowered in relation to the 
90 
95 
IOO 
389,158 
O 
outer shovels. The two parts of the connec 
tion G are also provided with a series of bolt 
holes, in order that the distance between the 
fenders and shares may be changed to suit the 
width of the trench or furrow containing the 
CO. 
The improved attachment, being carried by 
the beams, may be moved bodily to the right 
and left and controlled as to its depth of ac 
tion by means of the handles in the same man 
ner that the ordinary shovels are controlled. 
The essence of my invention resides in com 
bining with the swiveling beams a frame or at 
tachment provided with shares or cutters 
adapted to enter the soil on opposite sides of 
the trench. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a cultivator, the wheeled frame and its 
two laterally and vertically swinging drag bars, 
each bar provided with an outside shovel, in 
combination with the intermediate ?n-shaped 
frame secured to the two drag-bars to straddle 
the standing corn, and the two shares I, ex 
tending outwardly from the respective arms of 25 
said connecting-frame. 
2. The wheeled frame and its two laterally 
swinging drag-bars, in combination with an in 
termediate frame or connection secured to the 
drag-bars, said intermediate frame provided 3o 
with two downwardly-extending arms adapted 
to travel on oppositesides of the corn, each bar 
bearing an outwardly-extending share, I, and 
a guard or fender, H, substantially as described. 
this 7th day of September, 1887, in the pres 
ence of two attesting witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Ihereunto set my hand, 35 
EDWARD P. LYNCH. 
Witnesses: 
INGLE BARKER, 
GEO. J. BARRER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389258.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 389,258, 
A. B. SNYDER, 
AUTOMATIC RAILWAY SIGNAL, 
Patented Sept. 11 1888. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM B. SNYDER, OF LOUISVILLE, OHIO. 
AUTOMATIC RAILWAYS GNAL. 
SSPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 389,258, dated September ii., 1888. 
Application filed April 4, 1888. Serial No. 269,622. (No model.) 
5 
O 
2o 
trated in Fig. 1, and may extend to any de- 7o 
In the accompanying drawings, A. represents stantially of the form shown in Fig. 1. 
1o all tufi Oil it, TCL/ CO7 Ce772. 
Be it known that I, ABRAHANI. B. SNY DER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Louis 
ville, in the county of Stark and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Automatic Railway. Signals; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, refer 
ence being had to the annexed drawings, mak 
ing a part of this specification, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon, 
in which 
Figure is a side elevation, showing parts 
The opening K is provided for the passage 
of air into the cylinder F, and may be located 
as illustrated in Fig. 2; or said opening may, 
if desired, be located at one side of the valve. 
For the purpose of preventing dirt from being 
drawn into the cylinder, the opening K should 
be protected by a suitable screen. 
To one end of the cylinder F is attached the 
conduit L, which extends along the side of the 
railway-track to the place where it is desired 
to locate a signal, and, if desired, said pipe 
may be under ground. 
The cut-off valved may be located substan 
tially as shown in the drawings, and is for the 65 
in section. Fig. 2 is a top view. 
15 The present invention has relation to auto- purpose of holding air in the conduit L after 
matic railway-signals; and it consists in the it has been forced from the cylinder F by 
different parts and combination of parts here- means of the plunger E. The signal end of 
inafter described, and particularly pointed out the conduit Lisbent or curved upward, as illus 
in the claiina. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre- sired height. To the top or upper end of this 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw- bent or curved portion of the conduit L is 
attached the cylinder M, which may be sul)- 
ingS. 
a pivoted or hinged bar located at the side of 
25 one of the railway-rails, substantially as shown e, which has securely attached thereto the rod 
in the drawings. To the free end of this piv. or bar f, which extends up through the top of 
oted or hinged bar A is attached the rock-bar the cylinder M. To the top or upper end of 
B. Said rock-bar is securely held in proper this rod or bar f is attached the nut (/, which 
position by means of the bearings a C. Said is for the purpose of holding the valve e in the 8o 
3o bearings are securely held to the block C or position shown in Fig. 1 when the air-press 
its equivalent in any convenient and well-ure is normal. Around the rod or bar f is 
known manner. The rock-bar B is provided located the helical springh, the ends of which 
with the arm or crank b, the free end of which press against the valve e and the cylinder M. 
has pivotally attached the bar D. The oppo. To one side of the cylinder M is attached the 85 
35 site end of the bar D is pivotally attached to pipe i, and to the outer end of this pipe i is at 
the plunger E. The air-cylinder F may be tached the whistle N. This whistle is prefer 
substantially of the form shown in the draw. ably located from one hundred to three htin 
ings, and is located at the side of the track dred feet away from the highway. In use, as 
proper. Within the air-cylinder F is located a train of cars passes over the bar A the wheels 90 
4o the plunger E, which is substantially of the Will press said bar downward, thereby forcing 
form shown in Fig. 1. This plunger is so ad- the plunger E forward by means of the rock 
justed that it will draw air into the cylinder bar B, thus contracting the helical spring G 
F and force air as hereinafter described. Be- and at the same time forcing air into the con 
tween the plunger E and the shoulders c is lo. duit L through the check-valve d, and as soon 95 
45 cated the helical spring G, which is for the as a wheel has left the bar A the spring G will 
react, thereby pushing the plunger E back 
purpose of forcing the plunger E backward or 
ward and elevating the bar A.; and as the 
away from the shoulders G after said plunger 
plunger moves backward air will be drawn 
has been released. 
into the cylinder F, and as the next wheel 
To the cylinder F is attached the inlet-valve 
I, which may be constructed in the Ordinary 
passes over the bar A the air will be forced 
through the valve d, the operations being 
Within this cylinder M is located the valve 75 
55 
CG 
SO 
a. 
 
2 
389,258 
substantially the same as in an ordinary air- from snow, ice, or dirt, said housing or cover- 3o 
pump. As the air is compressed or forced ing being so constructed as not to interfere 
into the conduit L it will press against the with the longitudinal or lateral movements of 
valve e, elevating or forcing said valve past the bar A. The length of the crank is so ad 
5 the opening in the pipe i, when the air is free justed that it will give the plunger E the de 
to enter and sound the whistle N, thereby in- sired length of stroke. 
To the open end of the cylinder F is attached 
dicating the approach of a train. It will be 
understood that the strength of the helical the elastic packing l, which surrounds the 
spring h may be increased or decreased, so as plunger E, and is held in proper position by 
to to regulate the pressure of air in the conduit means of the cap in. The cap n is held in proper 
I, thereby holding or confining compressed position by means of the set-screws O. Said go 
air in said pipe at all times, so that the whis- cap is adjusted from time to time as the pack 
tle will sound as the wheels strike the pivoted ing becomes worn. 
or hinged bar A. As the rain leaves the sig- 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
15 nal the bar A will be forced away from the claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
railway-rail by means of the wheels pressing Patent, is- 
The combination, with the hinged bar A, 
against the angular portion of said bar A. 
This bar A is automatically replaced by means | connections Bb D, air compressing cylinder 
of the spring ji. It will be understood that a F, signal N, and a conduit, L, between said 
2c signal is to be placed upon each side of a street. cylinder and signal, of the check-valved and 
The pivoted end of the bar A is provided valve e, for maintaining a constant pressure in 5o 
45 
25 rock-bar B. The free end of the pivoted or of two witnesses. 
with the elongated slot k, which is for the pur- the conduit, substantially as described. 
pose of allowing said bar to move back and 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
forth the distance traveled in operating the hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
hinged bar should extend about two inches 
above tie top of the railway-rail. It will be 
understood that the springs if should be prop 
erly housed or covered, so as to protect them 
ABRAHAM B. SNYDER. 
L. C. WISE, 
FRED W. BOND. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389358.txt	(No Model.) 
T. A. BISSELL. 
RAI, WAY CAR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 389,358. 
Patented Sept, ll, l888. 
  
 
S S251 
O 
S S. s 
& 
 
 
  
 
se a 
f E 
o 
amm-- 
< 77% Yarosses 
Zz/ 46644- 67%------- 
- 47&zorreet/s. 
h 
(No Model.) 
No. 389,358, 
Q SS N 
% 
3fe 
SS 
T. A. BISSELL. 
RAILWAY CAR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Septill, 1888. 
N 
SSS 
%3% 
A. 
A 4 
I 
As 
2. A 
st 
 
N NYSSANYMNNNNNNYNYS 
Y 
SS 
S 
C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N. i. 
gift 
is 
 
 
 
 
S. 
 
 
 
 
l a 
N 
eles. S 
ill 
e 
  
 
S. 
S 
any 
  
 
 
 
for 
a 
 
3E32 'SN 2ZZzzzz3 SSSSSSSS - C 
%2/ 
22 Zs/C2 
26- 1422-26 Zzz vee zor. 
'e 
p/gresses. 2% (726-le-S 
$722 o'72 es/s. 
(No Model.) 
T. A. BISSELL. 
RAILWAY CAR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 389,358. 
Patented Sept, ll, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
a %21H,..." 
a 
7a - 
A. 
| 
Azarazzaaaaaaaaaa. 
rezzazzazza22 
arrayvazya 
52 
zza 
N 
72222 esses. 
(No Model.) . 
T, A, BISSELL, 
RAILWAY CAR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 389,358. 
Patented Sept, ll, 1888. 
 
 
h 
2. //76-26 Zzz vee Zor 
- Ze/424-6%-- 
-zzarzees. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS A. BISSELL, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK. 
RAWAY CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 389,358, dated September ill, 888. 
Application filed December 22, 1887. Serial No. 258,645. 
(No model.) 
Zontal section in line & 2, Fig. S, showing the 
To all whom it nazy concern: 
manner of adjusting the tension of the spring. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS A. BISSELL, of 
Fig. 12 is a perspective view of the adjustable 
the city of Buffalo, in the county of Erie and 
plate to which the clip is attached. Fig. 13 
State of New York, have invented new and 
is a perspective view of the curved plate se 
useful Improvements in Railway-Cars, of which 
cured to the elliptical spring. Fig. 14 is a 
the following is a specification. 
longitudinal section, on an enlarged scale, of 
This invention relates to that class of rail 
the upper portion of the hood. Fig. 15 is a 
way-cars commonly known as vestibule-cars, 
perspective view of a portion of the main hood 
which are provided with flexible or extensible 
and one of the frames supporting the auxiliary 
hoods, forming with hoods of adjoining cars 
hood. 
a closed and continuous passage, through which 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts in 
the passengers can paSS from One car to an 
the several figures. 
other without danger of accidents and without 
A represents the open end frame or wall of 
being exposed to the inconvenience of flying 
the vestibule, and B is the flexible or extensi 
cinders, dust, snow, rain, &c. These flexible 
ble hood Secured with its inner end to the end 
hoods, as heretofore constructed, offered con 
frame, A. The outer end of the hood B is se 
siderable resistance to the progress of the train 
cured to a vertical rectangular frame, c, which 
in passing over curves, owing to the fact that 
latter is Secured with its lower end to a hori 
the expanding springs of the hoods were ex 
Zontally-movable plate, D, forming the lower 
cessively compressed on the inner side of the 
cross-piece of the hood-frame. The plate ID 
curve. The outer springs were correspond 
is pivoted centrally to the outer end of a hori 
ingly released, resulting in a very unequal 
Zontal rod or bar, d, which slides in an open 
pressure on the hood-frame. 
ing formed in the Outer horizontal end timber 
The object of my invention is to provide the 
or cross-piece, d, of the platform of the car. 
hoods with springs which will readily adapt 
e is a toggle-joint connecting the inner end 
themselves to the position of the cars in pass 
of the sliding bar d with the inner cross-tim 
ing curves, so as to distribute the strain equally 
ber d of the platform. 
upon the springs at all times, and thereby re 
E is the draw-bar arranged below the plat 
duce the resistance to a minimum. 
form of the car, and which may be of any ordi 
My invention has the further object to pro 
nary construction. The draw-bar E is pro 
vide the main hood with a protecting auxiliary 
vided on its upper side with a block or projec 
hood and to improve the construction of these 
tion, f, which bears against a nose or projection, 
hoods in other particulars. 
f" is a spiral spring surrounding the sliding 
which will be hereinafter fully described, and 
rod d and interposed between a collar, f, on 
pointed out in the claims. 
the rod and a block, f, attached to the adja 
In the accompanying drawings, consisting 
cent bar of the toggle-joint. This spring 
of four sheets, Figure I is an end elevation of 
serves to keep the nose f' of the toggle joint 
a car provided with my improvements. Fig. 
in contact with the block f of the draw-bar. 
2 is a longitudinal sectional elevation of one 
When the draw-bar F is drawn outwardly by 
end of the car. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section, 
the resistance of the cars in starting or in going 
on an enlarged scale, in line a ac, Fig. 2. Fig. 
up grades, the projection f, bearing against 
4 is a similar view in line y), Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is 
the nose f of the toggle-joint, tends to 
a horizontal section in line & 2, Fig. 2, on an en 
straighten the latter, thereby moving the slid 
larged scale. Fig. 6 is a horizontal Section, on 
ing rod d and plate D outwardly and keeping 
an enlarged scale, of a portion of the flexible 
the latter in constant contact with the plate 
hood. Fig. 7 is a transverse Section, on an en 
D of the adjacent car. By this means the lower 
larged scale, of the upper portion of the hood. 
ends of the adjoining hoods are caused to bear 
Fig. 8 is a longitudinal section, on an enlarged 
against each other at all times, even when the 
scale, in line a ac, Fig. 3. Figs. 9 and 10 are 
platforms of the cars are separated to an unu 
horizontal sections in lines ac a' and y), Fig. 
8, respectively. Fig.11 is a fragmentary hori- sual extent, the toggle-joint being straightened 
My invention consists of the improvements f', formed at the center of the toggle-jointe. 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
2 
389,358 
w 
15 
35 
45 
55 
60 
 
... 
x. 
to a greater or less extent and the plate D 
moved outwardly in the same measure as the 
draw-bar is pulled outwardly. As the plate 
D is pivoted at its center, the lower end of the 
hood can accommodate itself to the position 
of the car in turning curves. 
g g represent horizontal supporting - bars 
pivoted with their outer ends to the outer por 
tions of the plate D, and sliding in openings or 
sockets g g', formed in the cross-piece d. 
h h represent lips or flanges formed on the 
upper and lower sides of the plate D and bear 
ing against the upper and lower sides of the 
cross-piece d'. These lips aid in guiding the 
plate D upon the cross-piece d. 
i i are light springs, arranged on opposite 
sides of the center of the plate D, and secured 
with one end to the lower lip, h, and with their 
opposite ends to a cross-piece, d. These 
springs retain the plate D in a position paral 
lel with the end of the car when the latter is 
disconnected from other cars, and thereby hold 
the hood in its proper position. 
JJ represent horizontal rods or bars which 
guide and support the upper end of the frame 
c, and which pass through elongated openings 
j, formed in the upper cross-piece, f', of the end 
frame, A, of the vestibule. These rods are 
guided at their inner ends in socketsk, secured 
to the end wall of the car, the sockets k and 
supporting-bars J being concealed by a suit 
able casing, as shown in Fig. 3. The bars J J are 
pivoted at their frontends to the frame c, so that 
the frame can change its position with refer 
ence to the end of the vestibule when the car 
runs around curves, the sockets k being made 
large enough to permit of the proper play of 
the bars J. J. 
L represents an elliptical spring arranged 
transversely above the hood B and interposed 
between the upper end of the frame c and the 
adjacent end frame, A, whereby the upper end 
of the frame c is extended or forced outwardly. 
The inner member of the extending spring L 
is attached to the end wall, A, by a connection 
which permits the spring a limited lateral 
movement, and the outer member of the spring 
is loosely fitted in a clip, N, secured to the 
upper portion of the frame c, so that the spring 
can rock or OScillate and accommodate itself 
to the position or angle of the hood-frame. 
M. represents a clip which straddles the inner 
member of the Spring. 
m represents a curved plate secured to the 
rear side of the inner member of the spring 
L by a bolt, n., and bearing against a plate, 
m", made lengthwise adjustable in the end 
wall, A. The inner end of the bolt miscounter 
sunk in the plate n, and its nut is arranged in 
an elongated opening, m, formed in the up 
right bar of the clip, so as to afford the bolt 
the required play in the rocking movements 
of the spring. 
oo represent vertical studs or pivots formed 
on the upper and lower sides of the curved 
plate m. and engaging in slots o', arranged in 
horizontal flanges or lips o', formed on the . 
plate m. By this construction the spring is 
held against lateral movement in the clip while 
being permitted to swing on the pivots o. The 
clip Mstraddles the spring, and is secured with 
its ends to the adjustable plate in by bolts p, 
passing through ears formed on the ends of the 
clip. 
q represents horizontal bolts, which are at 
tached to a plate, , secured to the inner side 
of the end wall, A, and in which the bolts are 
held against longitudinal movement by col 
lars q, formed on the bolts and bearing against 
the inner side of the plater, as shown in Figs. 
8 and 11. The inner ends of the bolts q work 
in screw-threaded openings s, formed in the 
rear side of the plate in', so that upon turning 
the bolts q in the proper direction the plate 
m and the clip M will be moved outwardly, 
thereby moving the inner member of the spring 
outwardly toward the frame c and increasing 
its tension. The screw-threaded openings s 
are arranged in horizontal ribs s', formed on 
the plate m, and these ribs are arranged in 
suitable recesses formed in the end wall, A. 
The clip N is secured to the frame c by a 
horizontal bolt, n, and is provided with a 
curved seat, n, for the spring, as shown in 
Fig. 3. The opening in the spring through 
which the bolt in passes is made flaring out 
wardly from the center toward both ends to 
permit of the proper play of the spring on the 
bolt. 
By attaching the transverse spring to the 
end of the wall of the vestibule by a laterally 
rocking connection the spring is enabled to 
retain its normal position with the hood-frame 
when the latter assumes a position transversely 
at an angle to the car-body in passing through 
curves, thereby enabling the cars to pass 
through curves without materially compress 
ing the Spring and preventing excessive com 
pression of the spring and the undue resist 
ance resulting therefrom. 
The hood B is constructed like the flexible 
portion of an accordion or bellows, and is com 
posed of sections, t, of cotton belting or other 
similar material. These sections are connected 
together at their ends by narrow strips t, of 
leather, which are preferably sewed to the ad. 
jacent sections, as clearly shown in Fig. 6. 
U represents an auxiliary extensible hood 
or shield arranged above the hood B, and serv. 
ing to protect the latter and the spring IL from 
water, snow, ice, &c. The auxiliary hood U 
is preferably composed of ducking, and its 
ends are secured, respectively, to the end wall, 
A, and frame c. 
W represents frames or bows, which sup 
port the auxiliary hood U, and are secured 
with their lower ends to the outer portions of 
the folds of the main hood B by means of 
straps or plates v, as clearly shown in Fig. 15. 
The bows V are composed of steel rods, and 
their lower ends are bent to form loops vy. 
The inner bars, , of these loops are seated in 
depressions formed in the straps v, and the 
upper and lower cross-bars, v', of these loops 
75 
3C " : 
90 
95 
OO 
IO 
I 1.5 
i25 
I 3G 
IOS 
s 
389,358 
3. 
and the spring L, of a clip, M, in which the 
spring is loosely fitted, an adjustable plate, n, 
seated in the end wall, A., and to which the 
clip M is secured, and horizontal adjusting 
screws held against longitudinal movement in 
the end wall and engaging in screw-threaded 
openings in the plate n, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. The combination, with the end wall, A, 
the extensible main hood B, and the hood 
frame c, of an auxiliary hood Secured to said 
end wall and said hood-frame above the main 
hood, and a spring interposed between said 
wall and said hood-frame between the main 
hood and the auxiliary hood, substantially as 
Set forth. 
5. The combination, with the main hood B 
and the auxiliary hood U, arranged above the 
Same, of elastic bows or frames V, supporting 
the hood U, and provided at their lower ends 
with loops v' and a strap or plate, 0, whereby 
said loops are secured to the folds of the main 
hood B, substantially as set forth. 
THOS. A. BISSELL. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. J. BONNER, 
FRED. C. GEYER. 
35 
40 
45 
I 
bear against the adjacent ends of the straps 
and hold the bows V in place. A supporting 
bow, V, is preferably arranged in each fold of 
the auxiliary hood, as shown. These bows, 
being constructed of steel rods, possess suffi 
cient elasticity to permit the auxiliary hood 
to be extended from the main hood B. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the end wall of 
the vestibule or car, an extensible hood se 
cured to said end wall, and a vertical framese. 
cured to Said hood, of a transverse spring at 
tached with its outer portion to the hood-frame, 
and a rocking connection, whereby the inner 
portion of the Spring is centrally attached to 
said wall, and whereby the spring is enabled 
to rock laterally and adapt itself to the angle 
of the hood-frame, Substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the end wall, A, 
hood B, and hood-frame c, of a transverse 
spring arranged between the wall A and the 
upper portion of the frame c, a plate, ), se 
cured to the spring and provided with verti 
cal pivots 0, and a clip, MI, attached to the 
wall A, and provided with longitudinalslots o', 
in which said pivots engage, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. The combination, with the end wall, A, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389458.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 389,458, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
E, GURNEY. 
WATER HEATER, 
Patented Sept. ll, l888. 
to 
73 
a 
z 
Day/ % 
22 
--- ge 
 
(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
E, GURNEY. 
WATER HEATER, 
No. 389,458, 
Patented Sept. ll, 1888. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD GURNEY, OF TORONTO, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
WATER HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 389,458, dated Septemberll, 1888. 
Application filed October 28, 1887. Serial No. 253,652. No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: , 
Be it known that I, EDWARD GURNEY, of 
the city of Toronto, in the county of York, in 
the Province of Ontario, Canada, manufac 
turer, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Water-Heaters, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in sectional hot-water 
heaters; and the invention consists in the pe. 
Culiar combination and the construction, ar 
rangement, and adaptation of parts, all as more 
fully hereinafter described and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a perspective outside view of my 
improved heater. Fig. 2 is a sectional plan 
through a y in Fig.1. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are en 
larged sectional perspective views showing the 
formation and construction of the several lower 
Sections of the heater. 
A represents the water. spaces, which are all 
connected together in each section, and all the 
water-spaces in the various sections are con 
nected together by the vertical legs B, which 
are themselves connected to and form part of 
the Water-spaces A. It will be noticed that the 
Water-spaces extend around the side and bot 
tom of the ash-pit C and around all the open 
ings formed for the doors D, thus materially 
increasing the heating-surface of the heater. 
The return-water pipes Fenter the water-space 
A surrounding and forming the bottom of the 
ash-pit C. By thus introducing the return 
water into the Water space at the coolest point 
in the heater a better circulation is maintained, 
as the back-pressure which is sometimes pro- 35 
duced by the water being overheated at the 
point where the return-water formerly entered 
the heater is entirely avoided, as the water 
surrounding the ash-pit can never become too 
hot, although the heat from the ash-pit fully 4o 
contributes its share toward the warning of 
the water within the heater. 
It wiil be noticed that the ears or lugs a on 
the sections are arranged in the bends by the 
vertical legs B, out of the way, where they are 45 
not liable to be broken. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A hot-waterheater composed of hollow sec 
tions formed with heating-spaces between the 
water-spaces of the sections, and communicat- 5o 
ing with water-spaces formed around the doors 
of the heater and with water-spaces formed in 
the sections surrounding the ash-pit, and the 
several sections connected together by the ver 
tical legs B, connected to and forming part of 55 
the water-spaces, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
12. A hot-water heater composed of detach. 
able sections formed with vertical legs B, and 
with lugs at arranged in the bends formed by 6o 
the legs B, substantially as shown and de 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
Toronto, September 28, 1887. 
EDWARD GURNEY. 
In presence of - 
CHARLES C. BALDWIN, 
CHARLES H. RICHES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389560.txt	(No Model.) 
S. W. FULLER 
COMBINED SPOOL NEEDLE, AND THIMBLE HOLDER. 
No. 389,560, 
Patented Sept. 18, 1888. 
92.824 vesses 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL W. FULLER, OF WATERVILLE, MAINE. 
COMBINED SPOOL NEEDLE, AND THIMBLE HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 389,560, dated September 18, 1888, 
Application filed June 7, 1888, Serial No. 276,357. (No model.) 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
- 
The method of using the device is obvious 7o 
To all, whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Water 
ville, in the county of Kennebec and State of 
Maine, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Spool-Holders, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
The invention is a combined spool rack or 
holder, thimble - support, needle-book, and 
thread-cutter; and it consists in the construc 
tion and novel combination of parts, hereinaf. 
ter described, illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, and pointed out in the claims hereto 
appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a per 
spective view of the device suspended from a 
suitable support. Fig. 2 represent a perspec 
tive View of the device seen from the rear. 
Fig. 3 is a Sectional view of the needle-book. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, Ades 
ignates a plate, preferably of metal, provided 
adjacent to its lower edge with the openings 
(ta, and having the pin a secured to the rear 
surface. By means of said pin the device may 
be suspended to an eye or loop or any suitable 
support, or attached to a convenient part of 
the dress. The latter is preferable. B is a 
needle-book, depending from the lower edge 
of the plate A, to which it is secured by threads 
stitched through the openings a. The middle 
two leaves of the needle-book are stitched to 
gether transversely, forming a pouch or pock 
et, b, adapted to contain a paper of needles. 
C is a ring, having its shank c secured at a 
proper point to the plate A. The said ring 
serves to receive and hold a thimble. 
D D are similar catch-rods, pivoted upon 
the cylindrical bosses did at the upper end of 
the face of the plate A. The said rods have 
the upwardly - diverging finger-holds d' d' 
above their pivotal points, and extend below 
the latter to opposite points below the thimble 
ring, where they are bent into hook shape, as 
at E, with the points e of said hooks extending 
inward. The rods are flattened and widened, 
as at f, around their pivotal points, the flat 
tened portion of the rod D having in its inner 
edge a notch, f, into which enters a tooth, f", 
on the inner edge of the flattened portion of 
the rod D', so that when either rod turns on its 
pivot it will turn the other rod equally in the 
opposite direction, 
G G are coiled springs surrounding the bosses 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL W. FULLER, a d, between which their inner ends rest to pre 
vent said ends from turning or to give them 55 
fulcrum-points, the outer ends of the springs 
being wrapped around the neck of the finger 
hold d. By means of the said springs the 
points e of the hooks E are forced inward, so 
that by inserting said points into the orifices 6c 
of the axial opening of a spool the latter will 
be supported thereby. 
His a diamond-shaped blade, secured to the 
outer portion of the hook of the rod D, with 
its edge hextending upward and outward from 65 
said rod and making an acute angle, l', there 
with, into which angle a strand of thread or 
spool-cotton may be drawn and cut against 
the edgeh. 
from the above description without further 
explanation. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The herein-described needle and thimble 
holder, comprising the plate having the attach- 75 
ing-pin, a needle-book provided with a pouch 
and depending from the lower edge of the 
plate, and a thimble-ring having its shankse 
cured to the face of said plate, substantially 
as described. 
2. The herein-described needle, thimble, and 
spool holder, comprising the plate having the 
attaching-pin, a needle-book provided with a 
pouch depending from the lower edge of the 
plate, a thimble-ring secured to the face of the 85 
plate, and a spool-holder Secured to said plate 
and having its supported hook below the 
thimble-ring, substantially as described. 
3. The herein-described combination device 
comprising the plate A, having the pin a se- 9o 
cured to its back, the needle-book B, depend 
ing from the lower edge of said plate and hav 
ing its middle two leaves stitched transversely 
together to form the pouch or pocket b, the 
thimble-ring C, having its shank c secured 95 
about centrally to the face of the plate A, the 
catch-rods D D, pivoted on the plate A, and 
having the finger-holds d above their pivotal 
points, the hook-shaped portions E, and the rod 
D, having the notch f' in its flattened portion, loo 
and the rod D', having the notch f', to engage 
said notch, the coiled springs G, actuating said 
rods, and the diamond-shaped blade H, secured 
to the hook of the rod D, with its edge inclin 
8O 
45 
SO 
389,560 
plate and the needle-book depending from the 
plate and provided with the pouch or pocket 
l, said book being stitched to the plate, as set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
own have hereto affixed my signature in pres 
ence of two Witnesses. 
SAMUEL W. FULLER. 
Witnesses: 
S. S. BROWN, 
H. M. SOULE. 
r 
forth. 
ing upward and outward therefrom, as set 
4. In a spool-holder, the plate A, in combi 
nation with the catch-rods pivoted to said 
plate and having their lower ends bent inward 
aud adapted to enter the hole in a spool, the 
tooth on one rod engaging a notch of the other, 
and a spring to actuate the rods, substantially 
as specified. 
5. In a spool-holder, the plate A, in combi 
nation with the spool-holder attached to said 
Jo 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389660.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MANDEL & J. P. HENDERSON. 
METALLIC FASTENER, 
No. 389,660, 
Patented Sept. 18, 1888. 
  
  
22 
NS 
2 
Z2ZZZZ, a ZZZZZZZZZZZ 
a sers 2A 
/722/e 7zza7-5,- 
c/6sez/6 7%zzazez, 
/e772 e s 7, 167zeze 7"sozz, 
-72227s. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographor, washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPH MANDEL AND JAMES P. HENDERSON, OF LOGANSPORT, INDIANA. 
METALLIC FASTENER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 389,660, dated September 18, 1888, 
Application filed June 25, 1888. 
Serial No. 278,081. (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it naily concern. 
Be it known that we, JoSEPH MANDEL and 
JAMES P. HENDERSON, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Logansport, in the county 
of Cass and State of Indiana, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Me 
tallic Fasteners; and we do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to fasteners for secur 
ing and re-enforcing the corners of pockets 
and other parts of garments subject to strain, 
for uniting pieces of textile fabric and sheets 
of paper, and for similar purposes; and it con 
sists in the improved construction and arrange 
ment or combination of parts hereinafter fully 
disclosed in the description, drawings, and 
claim. 
The objects of our invention are to provide 
a novel and useful yoke or plate which is 
formed with holes for the passage of the arms 
or legs of a common staple and with a longi. 
tudinal central slot for receiving the bent or 
clinched ends of said arms or legs, said yoke 
or plate being secured upon the inner side of 
the material or parts to be united, or opposite 
the side upon which the crown of the staple 
rests when its arms or legs are inserted, and 
to provide said yoke or plate, constructed as 
stated, with grooves upon its inner or under 
side, which are arranged between the holes 
for the arms or legs of the staple and the cen 
tral slot, and provided for the reception of said 
arms or legs when bent or clinched into their 
fastened position; and, third, to provide said 
yoke or plate with points, which project from 
its upper or outer surface at its ends and are 
adapted to enter, the material or parts to be 
fastened, hold the yoke or plate in exact posi 
tion thereon while the staple is being inserted 
and clinched, and also to assist in holding 
said yoke or plate from endwise movement. 
We accomplish these objects by the devices 
shown in the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, in which the same 
reference-numerals indicate the same parts, 
and in which- 
Figure 1 represents perspective detail views 
of the staple and yoke or plate; Fig. 2, a sec 
tional view showing thestapleinserted through 
two pieces of material and through the end 
holes in the yoke or plate, with its legs ready 
for clinching; Fig. 3, a similar view showing 
the legs of the staple clinched, and Fig. 4 a. 
view of the under or inner side of the yoke or 
plate. 
In the drawings, the numeral 1 indicates an 
ordinary staple, which is provided with sharp 
pointed arms or legs 2. The plate or yoke 3 
is formed with two holes, 4, near its ends, 
which are arranged to register with the arms 
or legs 2 of the staple and receive them, and 
with a longitudinal slot, 5, along its middle 
portion, into which the bent ends of said arms 
or legs of the staple are turned and snugly 
fitted when clinched. Small longitudinal re 
cesses or grooves 6 are formed in the inner or 
under side of the yoke or plate, between the 
holes 4 and the longitudinal slot 5, and serve 
to receive and firmly hold the bent arms or 
legs of the staple when they are fully clinched 
into place. An outwardly and forwardly pro 
jecting point or prong, 7, is formed upon each 
end of the yoke or plate in the exact position 
desired while the legs of the staple are being 
inserted and clinched, and also assist in hold 
ing said yoke or plate from end wise movement 
after the staple is inserted and fastened. 
The manner of operating with and the op 
eration of our improved fastener is as follows: 
The corners of pockets or the like to be fast 
ened or pieces of material to be secured to. 
gether are first placed in the desired relative 
positions. The plates or yokes are then placed 
upon the inner surfaces thereof and their 
points or prongs forced to enter the same. 
Then the staples are placed in position to be 
inserted from the opposite or outer side of the 
garment or material when the pointed arms 
or legs are forced through the same and the 
holes 4 in the ends of the plate or yoke. Then 
said arms are bent into the grooves 6 between 
said holes and the central slot, 5, and clinched 
snugly into said slot, and then the points or 
prongs 7 of the yoke or plate, if they be made 
sufficiently long to project through the parts 
being united, may also be turned over and 
clinched upon the outside thereof. 
It will be obvious from the foregoing that 
tags may also be firmly secured to textile and 
other fabrics in this manner; also, that fine or 
delicate textile fabrics may be safely united 
- 
25, 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
389,660 
Io serted alld clinched with any suitable tool or its ends for the insertion of the arms or legs 35 
5 supporting-surfaces both inside and outside and features of our improved fastener, its op- 3o 
as, for example, draperies; also, it is evident legs of a staple has been made with a central 
that the staples will not injure such fabrics slot for the reception of the ends of Said legs. 
more than ordinary pins, and that, as said 
Having thus fully described the construction 
plates or yokes and staples present extended and arrangement or combination of the parts 
of such fabrics, they will greatly lessen the eration and advantages, what we claim as new 
liability of tearing or otherwise damaging the is 
Sae. 
In a fastener, the combination, with a staple, 
While our improved fastener may be in- of a yoke or plate formed with two holes near 
implement operated by hand, we prefer to em- of said staple, with a longitudinal slot in its 
ploy for this purpose the machine for which middle for the reception of the bent and 
we have made application for Letters Patent clinched ends of said arms or legs, with grooves 
contemporaneously herewith. 
in its under or inner side between said holes 
been made in which the legs of the staple wardly-projecting points or prongs at its ends, 
which secures the button are inserted through substantially as and for the purpose described. 
holes in a plate which is formed with two flaps 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in its middle, around which flaps the legs of in presence of two witnesses. 
2O the staple are first bent, and then said flaps and 
legs are bent into a plane with the plate; also, 
we are aware that it is not broadly new to 
groove a fastening-plate for the reception of 
staple-legs which are clinched therein; but 
25 we are not aware that a fastening-plate for the 
I5 We are aware that a button-fastener has and the ends of said slot, and with two out- do 
JOSEPH MANDEL. 
JAMES P. HENDERSON. 
Witnesses: . 
SOLOMON WISE, 
DAVID ID. FICKLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389760.txt	(No Model.) 
J. NORTON, Jr. 
BEATING ENGINE. 
No. 389,760, 
 
- 
Patented Sept. 18, 1888, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSHUA NORTON, JR, OF PORTNEUF, QUEBEC, CANADA. 
BEATING - ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 389,760, diated September 18, 1888. 
Application filed May 4, 1888. Serial No. 272,849. (No model.) Patented in Canada March 27, 1888, No. 28,773. 
55 
65 
75 
be drawn off continuously or at intervals. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
different planes with the shaft to which they are 
Be it known that I, JosHUA NoRTON, Jr., a 
fixed. This shaft is rotated by belt or gear 
resident of Portneuf, in the Province of Que 
connection with the roller-shaft above, or by 
bec and Dominion of Canada, have invented 
independent means. 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
By a slight offset in one of the walls of the 
Beating-Engines; and I do hereby declare the tub the portion E is thrown outside of the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
plane of the body of that wall, and in this plane 
scription of the invention, such as will enable is inserted a wire screen, N, and by means of 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains 
a vertically-adjustable board, F, the exposed 
to make and use the same, it having been pat. 
part of the inner face of the screen may be va 
ented in Canada March 27, 1888, No. 28,773. 
ried in area as desired. Discharge-tubes IK 
My invention relates to beating-engines for 
connect, respectively, with the lower portion 
reducing paper-stock to pulp, and its object is of the tub and of the space between the screen 
to economize floor-space, increase productive N and wall E, and through these liquids may 
capacity, and to secure more even reduction 
of fiber. 
In operation the tub is filled with water and 
The invention is shown in the accompany. the cylinder B and shaft G are set in motion 
ing drawings, wherein 
in the direction indicated by the arrows of the 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the engine, 
drawings. This motion induces a constant 
one end of the tub being removed without sec. 
current of water around the mid-feather, and 
Fig. 2 is a detailplan of certain knives 
tion. 
if paper-stock be introduced it is carried be: 
employed. Fig. 3 is a plan view of a portion 
tween the cylinder fly-bars and knives C and 
of the shaft provided with oblique stirring. 
more orless disintegrated. The current throws 
blades. 
it against the screen N, through which the 
In the drawings, Aisa vertical tub provided 
dirty water is forced as the material is carried 
with ears J, by which it may be secured to any 
in its downward course, and is discharged 
suitable support. 
through the tube K. From this point the 
Within the vertical tub is 
a central vertical partition, D., (called a mid 
fiber is carried down toward the blades g, 
feather,') fixed in the walls of the tub and 
which, being set obliquely and moving faster 
extending from a point near the top into the 
than the current, move the fibers both longi 
lower half of the tub. The lower part of this 
tudinally and laterally, and prevent too great 
partition or mid-feather, as shown, is solid, 
uniformity in their position with reference to 
while the upper partis hollow, its walls being 
each other. The current again carries the ma 
upwardly divergent and depressed at the top 
terial to the cylinder B, and the operation is 
to form a partial cylindrical trough having a 
repeated as long as desired. If too much wa 
longitudinal recess, M, to receive a series of 
ter is passing through the screen N, or if the 
adjustable stationary knives, C, held in posi 
material is sufficiently cleansed, the board F. 
ition by set-screws a, and raised or lowered by may belowered so as to reduce the exposed area 
set-screws c. In this trough revolves a verti 
of the screen, and thereby save it from wear. 
cally-adjustable cylinder, B, mounted in bear 
Water is introduced into the tub by a pipe, 
ings upon the walls of the tub and provided O, or in any other convenient manner. 
with fly-bars b, parallel to its axis, passing in 
I have herein shown and described the tub 
any desired degree of proximity to the knives 
as vertical as contradistinguished from the tub 
C. A portion, L, of the wall of the mid 
ordinarily used, which is termed 'horizontal. 
feather is hinged to permit access to the set 
It is found from practical experience that 
screws a c. The upper surface of the cylinder 
there are very great advantages in so construct 
B is covered by a curb, H, secured to the wall 
ing the tub, the one now in use by me being 
of the tub. 
nearly four times as deep as it is wide, and for 
Below the lower edge of the mid-feather D, 
that reason I designate it a vertical tub.' 
and parallel thereto, is a shaft, G, revolubly 
mounted in the walls of the tub and provided 
with a series of oblique blades, g, revolving in 
What I claim is 
1. In a beating-engine, the combination of 
a tub, a vertical partition extending from a 
95 
Ico 
Io 
25 
35 
50 
() 
aw 
389,760 
Io 
point somewhat below the top of the tub to a 
point a little above the bottom of the tub, a 
series of knives held in the top of said parti. 
tion, and a beating-roller revolubly mounted 
above the upper edge of said partition and 
adapted to beat the material and induce cir 
culation of the liquid around said partition, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the vertical partition 
D, fixed in the tub A, above the bottom there. 
of, the cylinder B, revolubly mounted immedi. 
ately over said partition, and provided with 
fly-bars b, the knives C, fixed in the upper edge 
of said partition, and means for adjusting the 
distance between the upper edges of the knives 
Cand said fly-bars, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a beating engine, a tub provided with 
a partial Yertical partition whose upper edge 
is expanded to form a trough, a cluster of 
knives adjustably fixed on the bottom of said 
trough, a ribbed cylinder revolubly mounted 
upon the tub and lying in said trough, and a 
revolving shaft mounted in thesides of the tub 
beneath the lower edge of said partition, and 
provided with a series of oblique stirring and 
current-producing blades, all combined and 
co-operating substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the tub A, having - 
an offset on one of its sides, of the screen N, 
separating the space in said offset from the 
body of the tub, the slide F for varying the 
size of the exposed portion of said screen, the 
discharge-pipe K, the partition D, bearing the 
knives C, and the revoluble beating-cylinder 
B, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
JOSHUA NORTON, Jr. 
FLAVIEN MonDER, 
WILLIAM MASON. 
25 
30 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389861.txt	(No Model.) 
A. L. STANFORD, 
LIFTING JACK, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 389,861, 
Patented Sept. 18, 1888, 
SA 2. 
- 
or a 
C. s d- 
(7 ft. 
 
af 
A 4 
- E 
- - A 
M 
 
7% z 
N 
| 
7ree-area 
/2. 
-- --- = - 
//r? 2.Aarea 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 389,861, 
A. L., STANFORD, 
LIFTING JACK, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 18, 1888, 
 
 
(No Model.) 
A. L., STANFORD, 
LIFTING JACK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 389,861, 
Patented Sept. 18, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
S 
N N 
is 
SeeSaS 
SS2N2SS 
3 as 
sE23s as 
N W 
S 
- 
 
777 
 
 
 
  
  
 
N V 
eatea N 
 
d 
%'/e6?... (y 
66.4 
f 
f 32 ca 
f 
- Zve-Yezz Zor 
/2 / zuv (. Sza e Ao 2ra 
12 
a. 
-77z/ 
 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR L. STANFORD, OF WAUREGAN, ILLINOIS. 
LiFTING-JACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 389,861, dated September 18, 1888. 
Application filed March 15, 1888, Serial No. 267,271. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR L. STANFORD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Wau. 
kegan, in the county of Lake and State of Illi. 
nois, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Lifting-Jacks, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention is embodied in and effectuated 
by the mechanism hereinafter described, refer. 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings 
and the letters of reference marked thereon. 
Of the lifting jacks now in existence, those 
of simple construction have been found im 
perfect in operation, and the more effective 
Ones are so complicated in construction that 
their manufacture is too expensive, and their 
tendency to get out of order is greatly in 
creased by the large number of their constit 
tuent parts. 
Myinyention is designed to overcome these 
difficulties by furnishing a lifting-jack both 
simple in construction and perfectly effective 
in operation. I will now describe the mech 
anism whereby I accomplish such design. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of a lifting-jack embodying 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
Same. Fig. 3 is a rear, elevation of the same. 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged vertical longitudinal sec 
tion of the upper part of the jack, taken on the 
line 11 in Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a detail plan sec 
tion of the same, taken on the line 22 in Fig. 
2. 
Fig. 6 is a plan section taken on the line 3 
3 in Fig. 2. Fig. 7 is a detail section of a por 
tion of the lever, taken on the line 4 4 in Fig. 
5. Fig. S is a plan view of the retaining fric 
tion-pawl detached. Fig. 9 is a plan view of 
the pivot-pin of the lever detached. Fig. 10 
is a Cross-section of the same, taken on the line 
55 in Fig. 9. Fig. 11 is a front elevation of 
the lifting-link and its pin detached, and Fig. 
12 is a side elevation of one of the bushings. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
A is the standard of my lifting jack, prefer 
ably made of malleable iron, having a base 
broad enough to stand upon securely. 
A is a recess in the standard, extending 
through its entire length, being continued in 
50 slots made through the base, the lower part 
45 
of the projection A, and the head a' of the 
standard. B is the lifting-bar, which moves 
in said recess and slots. The projection A' is 
an enlargement of the standard, hollow and 
open at the rear and at the upper part of the 
front side, and it has a stop, g, on its upper 
front surface and a slot through its base, as 
indicated above. In the front side there is an 
aperture, c, designed to receive the end of the 
lever of the retaining friction-pawl C, and to 
furnish a bearing for it at a. C' is the lifting 
friction-pawl. These pawls are constructed as 
follows: Each one has an opening through it 
transverse to its longer axis, the minimum 
diameter of which is slightly greater than that 
of the lifting-bar. The opening in the lifting 
pawl is slightly beveled, so as to produce plane 
faces somewhat less than one-half the length 
of said opening on its front and rear sides, 
such plane face on the former side being next 
to the lower side of the pawl, and that on the 
latter being next to the upper side, when said 
pawl is in its place in the standard ready to 
grip and lift the bar B. The retaining-pawl 
has like bevels, made, respectively, so as to al 
ternate with those above described when it is 
in position in the projection of the standard 
ready to grip the bar B in its downward mo 
tion. The above change in the surface of the 
openings of the pawls is the one made when 
the openings extend through the pawls in an 
oblique direction. They may extend through 
the pawls in a line at right angles to their 
longer axes. In such case sides opposite to 
those indicated above will be beveled, or they 
may be recessed instead of beveled, or wedges 
may be inserted in said openings, so as to pro 
duce the same effect as the above construction 
produces. 
The walls of the projection A' are in part 
produced in the branches a, which unite and 
form the head at of said standard. Through 
this head a slot is made for the passage of the 
bar B, as shown above. The parts A", a', and 
at are all cast integrally with the standard A. 
l) is the foot of the lifting-bar, designed to 
be passed under the load to be lifted. 
l' is a head on the lifting-bar, designed to 
keep the bar from dropping out of the stand 
ard when both pawls are disengaged at once. 
55 
JS 6 
95 
CO 
3 
389,861. 
O 
5 
3O 
35 
45 
It is also a bearing on the bar for use when the 
top of the bar instead of the foot is placed un 
der the load. The head is made so as to be 
removed to allow the bar to be slipped through 
the slot in the base, the recess of the standard, 
&c., when the mechanism is being put together 
for use. 
D is the lever, designed to actuate the li?t 
ing-pawl C and with it the bar B. This lever 
is bifurcated near its rear end to permit the 
bar B to pass through it, and so that its 
branches will snugly embrace the head a. Its 
branches are preferably connected at their rear 
end by a cross-piece cast integrally with them, 
and near their front end the branches have 
each a boss, d. In these bosses slots are made 
horizontally. Fitting in these slots are hard 
metal bushings E, which are secured by the 
pins d' passing through said bosses. These 
bushings are pierced with holes furnishing 
bearings for the journals of a hard-metal pin, 
e, which passes through the head a, being 
made rigid with it by a pin, e, and thus serves 
as a fulcrum for the lever D. The bushings 
also provide bearings for a hard-metal pin, e", 
next to the end of the lever which sustains the 
link F, being made rigid with it by suitabie 
means, as pin e". 
The pawl C' is placed between the branches 
(t", so that its rear face, designed for contact 
with the bar, will be above and its correspond 
ing front plane face below. The pawl C is 
placed in the hollow of the projection A", with 
its faces designed for contact with the bar op 
posite to those of the pawl C and with its le. 
ver on the bearing (". The open part of the 
link F is passed over the hooked end of the 
pawl C. The bar B is passed up through the 
slots and recess prepared for it. 
Thus the 
mechanism is ready for use. 
Its operation is obvious. Lifting the lon 
arm of the lever D, the pawl C" is lowered. 
Reversing this movement, the link F cants the 
pawl and the surfaces of its opening above de 
scribed are brought in contact with the bar B. 
Friction holds the bar fast, and it is lifted as 
the long arm of the lever is depressed. Now 
lifting the long arm of the lever D, the bar 
during its upward movement being brought 
lightly in contact with the above-described 
faces in the opening of the pawl C, the first 
downward motion of the bar will increase the 
friction between it and said faces, so that the 
pawl C will be canted and will consequently 
at once bind the bar and prevent it from de 
scending. To permit the bar to descend, bear 
down on the lever D enough to support the 
load and then depress the long arm of the le 
yer of the pawl C. 
The greatest efficiency in operating my li?t 
ing-jack, together with the least tendency 
toward breaking, has been found by experi 
ment to be attained by making the distance 
about one inch and three-quarters between 
the lifting-bar and the points of support of the 
respective pawls on the link and on the face 
of the aperture a. 
I likewise so construct my 
jack that a line drawn through the centers of 
the journals of the pins e and e will not be 
parallel with the longitudinal axis of the lever 
D. Thus ease in operating is secured, since 
it is not necessary for the lever D to descend 
as far as would otherwise be necessary in ac 
complishing a given quantity of Work. 
The lifting-bar is preferably rectangular and 
thicker in one direction than another. Its 
greatest thickness must be a little less than the 
minimum diameter of the openings of the 
pawls. It is passed through the pawls With 
its narrower sides next to thesides of the open 
ings designed for contact with it. Thus its 
tendency to bend is diminished. The stand 
ard is provided with handles H. H., by which 
it may be carried. 
I am aware that previous to my invention 
herein described lifting-jacks have been de 
vised embodying the combination of a friction 
pawl operated by a lever and sliding upon a 
lifting-bar, and also a stationary pawl arranged 
to hold such bar up by friction. I therefore 
do not claim such combination broadly. 
I am also aware that lifting devices have 
been heretofore made with circular openings 
which permit the turning of the bar and with 
curved acting-faces; also with angular open 
ings with comparatively sharp biting-edges. 
With my improvement the bar cannot turn, 
and by making the clamping or contact part 
nearly or quite one-third of the thickness of 
the pawl I obtain a frictional contact which 
gives a stronger hold with less wear on the 
arts in use. 
What I do claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a lifting jack, the combination, with 
the lifting-bar B and its pawls C C, of the 
standard A, provided with a vertical longi 
tudinal recess, A, hollowed and slotted pro 
jection A", and vertically-slotted head a, said 
hollowed projection being provided with an 
aperture for the lever of the retaining-pawl 
C, and a stop for releasing the lifting-pawl C, 
a guide for the lifting-bar being afforded in 
the recess A and head a, which head also fur 
nishes a support for the fulcrum-pine of the 
lever for actuating the lifting-pawl, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a lifting-jack, the combination, with 
the standard A, having heada, of the lever D, 
bifurcated near its lifting end and provided 
with slotted bosses did on the sides of said end, 
bushings E, placed in said slots, and the full 
crum-pin e and lifting-pin e, engaged in said 
bushings, substantially as described. 
3. In a... lifting-jack, the combination, with 
the standard A, lifting-bar B, pawl C, and le 
ver D, of the link F, having a lifting-pin, e, 
rigidly secured therein and connected with 
the lifting end of the lever, substantially as 
described, 
75 
9O 
95 
CO 
IO5 
IC) 
I 25 
I 30 
r 
65 
 
389,861 
3 
4. In a liftingjack, the combination of the in such proximity as to afford along leverage, 
standard A, having head a, the fulcrum-pin the lifting-pawl C, and lifting-bar B, substan 
e, rigidly secured in said head, the lever D, tially as described. 
having a bifurcated and slotted lifting end, 
5 the link F, having a lifting-pin, e, rigidly se. 
cured therein, the bushings E, located in the 
slotted lever and receiving said pins e and e, 
W. C. CoRLIES, 
E. C. CRAWFORD. 
ARTHUR L STANFORD, 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US389961.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F. FRENCH, 
SEESAW. 
No. 389,961, 
Patented Sept. 25, 1888. 
 
 
I 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390061.txt	(No Model.) 
A. H. BOWER 
SNOW GUARD OR FENDER, 
y 
No. 390,061, 
W 
Patented Sept. 25, 1888. 
 
N. PEERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTUS H. BOWER, OF LEBANON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SNOW GUARD OR FENDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 390,061, dated September 25, 1888. 
Application filed May 31, 1888, Serial No. 275,541. (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUSTU's H. Bow ER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Leb. 
anon, in the county of Lebanon and State of 
5 Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Snow Guards or Fend 
ers; and I do hereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
S. 
My invention relates to snow guards or fend. 
ers for the roofs of buildings, and has for its 
object the construction of a cheap, artistic, 
and durable device, which can be readily at. 
tached and detached, if necessary, without in 
terfering with any portion of the roof. 
The invention will be hereinafter described, 
and particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view of a roof with my improved 
guards attached. Fig. 2 is a vertical section 
of the same. Figs, 3, 4, and 5 are detail per 
spective views of the guard and means for se 
curing it to a roof. 
Reference being had to the drawings and 
the letters marked thereon, A indicates a 
Snow - guard of my improved construction. 
which consists of an elongated body made of 
cast-iron and provided with a rectangular pro 
jection, ct, on one side and in the center of the 
body, in which is a corresponding cavity or 
Socket, b. On each side of the projection a 
35 are downwardly-projecting extensions c, and 
between said extensions is an elongated slot 
or passage, d, while above the extensions are 
holesee through the body of the guard. The 
guards are secured in position by strap or 
40 foot pieces B, which are bent at right angles 
and in opposite directions at their ends, form 
ing a hook, f, at One end and a projection, g, 
at the opposite end, which corresponds with 
and fits into the socket b of the guard. 
In the use of my guard on roofs covered 
with slate secured to laths h the hookfen 
gages there with, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2; but 
on roofs covered with shingles attached to 
sheathing the hook.f may be dispensed with 
and the foot-piece provided with holes i to se. 
cure them with Screws, 
45 
55 
85. 
In practice the guards A are about nine 
inches long and four inches high, the slot or 
passage four inches long and one inch wide, 
while the foot-pieces are about one inch wide 
and one-fourth of an inch thick, and are made 
of a length to correspond with the size of the 
slate or shingles with which the roof may be 
Covered. 
In applying my improved snow-guard to 
roofs the foot-pieces B are placed between two 
pieces of slate or shingles, so that they are 
covered by the overlapping slate or shingles, 
as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, and the guard A 
rests upon the slate or shingles at the extremi 
ties of its extensions c, thus forming a brace 
to the projection g on the foot-piece and as 
sisting it to sustain the weight of a body of 
Snow or ice against the guard. When the 
snow commences to melt, the water flows 7o 
through the passage d, instead of backing up 
under the slate and leaking through the roof, 
as results from solid guards now in common 
use. The holese serve to ornament the guard 
and also provide a means of escape for Water 75 
in heavy rain-storms and during thaWS of 
heavy bodies of snow lying upon a roof. 
The guards are placed about eighteen inches 
to two feet apart on a roof and form a neat and 
ornamental attachment, while they may be 8o 
easily and readily attached and detached for 
any purpose required, and afford ample pro 
tection against snow-slides from the roof. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. A snow guard or fender having an elon 
gated body provided with extensions to bear 
upon a roof and a passage between said ex 
tensions, substantially as described. 
gated body provided with a socket and exten 
sions on its lower side, in combination with a 
foot-piece having a projection adapted to the 
socket in the guard, substantially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
2. A snow guard or fender having an elon. 9o 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 95 
AUGUSTUS H. BOWER. 
Witnesses: 
P. H. REINHARD, 
TOBIAS REINOEHL, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390161.txt	(No Model.) 
W. A. GILL & C. A. MORNING STAR 
WATCH MOVEMENT BOX, 
No. 390,161, 
Patented Sept. 25, 1888, 
WITWESSES 
 
TWWEWTOR 
9A6, /.47% 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. GILL AND CHARLES A. MORNINGSTAR, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO; 
SAID MORNINGSTAR ASSIGNOR TO SAID G LL. 
WATCH - MOVEMENT BOX 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 390,161, dated September 25, 1888. 
Application filed May 2, 1888. 
Serial No. 272,577. (No model.) 
IO 
35 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, WILLIAM. A. GILL and 
CHARLES A. MORNINGSTAR, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Columbus, in the 
County of Franklin and State of Ohio, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Watch-Movement Boxes; and we do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to that class of boxes 
in which watch-movements are packed for 
shipment, and especially when carried by trav 
eling salesmen. Heretofore it has been the 
practice generally to pack such movements in 
a box inside another, the inside box having 
one or more notches cut in its upturned edge, 
through which the stem or other small pro. 
jections are passed, then to wrap the inside 
box in tissue-paper, and then to place the 
Same in the outside box. The trouble with 
such an arrangement is that the movement 
resting on the sharp edge of the upturned edge 
of the inside box is scratched, and the tissue 
paper does not prevent the inside box from 
shaking and moving about in the outside 
box. 
The objects of our improvements are to re 
move these objections, and they are illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view in section of outside and 
inside boxes, cover, &c.; Fig. 2, a sectional 
view of the inside box; Fig. 3, a plan view of 
the latter, and Fig. 4 a modification. 
A is an outside box, and B an inside box. 
Our improvement is confined to the form of 
the inside box. We propose to do away with 
the sharp edge of the inside box, and in place 
thereof we form a rounding bead, d, on the 
inside box, on which the movement rests, the 
object of which is to form a smooth surface for 
the movement to rest on, and thereby prevent 
scratching. Extending beyond the bead is an 
annular flange, d". The objects of this flange 
are to afford a better hold by which the inside 
box can be easily handled and to provide 
against moving around in the outside box. A 
little space can be left between the outer edge 
of the fiange and the side of the outside box 
to admit of a little tissue-paper being used to 
wrap the movement. 
D is a notch cut in the inside box to receive 
the watch-stem. Other similar notches may 
be formed, if desired, for other projections. 
d' is a set-lever that may rest on the bead. 
Fig. 4 represents a modification in which 
the flange d' is cut into wings w. These wings 
are alternately turned slightly up and down 
at their outer ends, and their purpose is to 
form more of a spring-support than the flange 
would if undivided, so that in the event of the 
outside box being dropped the wings would 
strike on the side of the outside box, and thus 
break the jar to the inside box containing the 
movement. The beaded edge is to be retained 
with the wings. 
What we claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A box for holding watch-movements, con 
sisting of an outer and inner case, the inner 
case provided with a rounded or beaded edge 
to support the movement, and having an an 
nular flange to keep the inside box in posi 
tion and from moving around in the outside 
box, and thereby protecting any projecting 
parts. 
2. The inner box provided with the rounded 
or beaded edge and the annular flange cut into 
wings, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM. A. GILL. 
CHARLIES A. MORNING STAR. 
Witnesses: 
K. E. WILLIAMS, 
W. T. MCCLURE. 
45 
5) 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390261.txt	- (No Model.) 
J. SHANK, 
SWITCH FOR STREET RAILWAYS, 
No. 390,261, 
Patented 00t. 2, 1888, 
 
 
 
PE 
test 
ESR 
928)4-v.csso- 
1. 
841-uo 11 oz. 
JOHN SHANK. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN SHANK, OF LAS VEGAS, TERRITORY OF NEW MEXICO. 
SWITCH FOR STREET. RAILWAYS. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 390,261 dated October 2, 1888. 
Application filed November 28, 1887. Serial No. 256,318, (No model.) 
To add whom it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, JoHN SHANK, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Las Vegas, in 
the county, of San Miguel, Territory of New 
Mexico, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Switches for Street-Railways, 
of which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention has relation to street-railway 
Switches, and has for its object the provision 
of a suitable metallic base, and of switch-rails 
that are adapted to be shifted by the wheels 
of the car, and which will automatically resume 
their normal position after the car has passed 
thereover. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear, and the novel 
features will be particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan 
of a switch constructed in accordance with my 
invention, the different positions of the switch 
rails being shown in dotted lines. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation, and Fig. 3 is an end elevation, 
of the switch-base. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in all the figures of the drawings. 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
base, A, preferably formed of cast metal, and 
form the same with end walls, A, of greater 
thickness than the intermediate or web por 
tion, A. This base is mounted upon suitable 
ties, B, and has formed in the end walls, A', 
thereof rail-end-receiving openings A, which 
conform to the shape in cross-section of the 
rail employed. By these means the rails, 
when in position upon the bases, are held rig 
idly thereon without the employment of ex 
traneous devices. 
Referring more particularly to Fig. 1, CC 
represent the rails of the main track, the ends 
of which terminate in the recesses A* of the 
end wall, A", of the casting. That rail C' of 
the main track which is mounted upon the 
switch-base and is opposite to the side at which 
the side track is located is rigid or fixed-that 
is, each of its ends terminates in the recesses. A 
of the end walls of the base. The companion 
rail C forms a continuation of the right-hand 
rail to the main track, and is secured to the 
base at one end by bolts or spikes C. This 
rail is formed of steel and is resilient, it being 
prevented from being pressed inwardly by 
means of a stop, A', chamfered at its front 
end, as at A, said stop being preferably cast 55 
as a part of the base and the free end of the 
rail being normally held thereagainst. 
D ID represent the side track or rails, and 
they, like the main-track rails, terminate in 
the end walls of the base. The rail D'is rigid 
with the base and in the same relation thereto 
and the rail D as is the rail C' and its rail C. 
The side track is also provided with a resilient 
movable rail, D', pivoted at one end, as at D', 
its free end normally remaining against the rail 
C of the main track. A stop, A', chamfered, 
as at A', at its rear end, is also formed upon the 
base A, so that the inward movement of the 
rail Dis limited. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
A car coming in upon the rails C C will enter 
upon the rails C C, and the free end of the 
latter being so mounted upon the base as to 
lessen the space between the two rails at that 
point opposite the said free end, the flanges of 
the wheels of the car will wedge between the 
rails and force the rail C outwardly until it 
comes against the rail D', when the car will 
pass along on the main track. Upon the re 
turn-trip the car passes from the rails C* and 
D' to the rails D and D", and so out upon the 
side track. It is of course understood that 
after the wheels of the car have passed from 
the rail C' it springs back to its normal posi-85 
tion against the stop A". It will also be un 
derstood that the rail D* will yield or permit 
of being pressed outwardly against its stop A", 
to allow the passage of the flanges of the wheels 
to pass along the rail C. 
75 
90 
I claim 
1. In a railway-switch, the combination, 
with a cast-metal base having end walls re 
cessed to receive the ends of the rails of the 
side and main tracks and an intermediate web 
portion, of side and main track rails mounted 
on the base, one rail of each being fixed and 
its companion rail being formed of resilient 
steel and being movable, Substantially as speci 
fied. 
2. The integral cast-metal base having the 
thickened end walls, A', recessed as at A, 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
2 
390,26 
5 D', Substantially as specified. 
and the reduced intermediate web portion, A, thrown into and out of contact with said fixed Io 
and stops A' A' thereon, in combination with rails, substantially as specified. 
the main-track rails C C, the latter being 
EYES, and the fixed and movable rails D' presence of two witnesses. 
3. The combination. With the base A, of the 
rails C D and C* and D, terminating in the 
end walls thereof, of the fixed rails CD', 
and movable spring-rails CD, adapted to be 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
JOHN SHANK. 
Witnesses: 
WALLACE HESSELDEN, 
J. W. BARNEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390361.txt	J. G.00D. 
MACHINE FOR BALLING TWINE, &e. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 2, 1888, 
(No Model.) 
No. 390,361, 
 
?? 
@aZ 
N. Fetes, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.). 
No. 390,36), 
J. G.00). 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR BALLING TWINE, &e. 
Patented Oct. 2, 1888. 
Dz | 
- 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 390,361, 
J. GOOD. 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
MACHINE FOR BALLING TWINE, &e, 
Patented Oct. 2, 1888. 
S. S 
ES 
 
 
 
 
M. PETERS, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 390,36), 
J. GOOD 
MACHINE FOR BALLING TWINE, &e. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Oct. 2, 1888, 
S 
 
 
// 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J O HIN GO OD, OF IBIR. O O, ?KTLY N, NEW YORK. 
MA CH1N E FOR BALL-! NG Tw! NE, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 390,361, dated October 2, 1888. 
Application filed January 5, 1886. Serial No. 187,691. No model.) 
O 
IS 
2 ? 
25 
To a LL, ?phon, it may conce7?: 
Beit known that I, JOHN GOOD, a citizen of 
the United States, residing in the city of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Machines for Balling Twine 
and Cordage, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention consists in certail means, 
hereinafter described and claimed, whereby I 
produce the variations in the inclination of 
the ball-spindle relatively to the planes of ro 
tation of the winding-fdier which become mec 
essary in the successive stages in the winding 
of the ball. 
It also consists in certain means, hereinafter 
described and claimed, whereby I effect the 
requisite changes of speed of rotation of the 
ball spindle at different stages of the winding 
operation. 
Figure 1 in the drawings is a vertical sec 
tional elevation of a balling-machine with my 
improvements, taken nearly in a plane coin 
cident with the axis of the windling-flier, but 
deviating slightly from Such plane to show as 
many Working parts as possible. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section at right angles to Fig. 1, 
nearly in the line acac of the latter figure, and 
showing the parts to the right of that line. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse vertical section taken 
nearly in the same line a ac, but showing the 
parts on the left of that line. Fig. 4 is a 
plan of the machine. Fig. 5 is a sectional 
view corresponding with Fig. 1, but, having 
the winding flier and the Supply-bobbin omit 
ted, and showing the balling-spindle and its 
driving and controlling mechanism in posi 
tions different from those shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 6 a view of part of the above-mentioned 
driving and controlling mechanism, taken from 
the opposite side of the machine to Figs. 1 
and 5. 
Fig. 7 is a view of that face of the 
flier which is toward the balling-spindle; and 
Fig. 8 is a view of the opposite face thereof, 
the projecting part being in Section in both of 
these views. Fig. 9 is a longitudinal view, 
partly in section, of parts of the shafts for 
driving the spindle. Fig. 10 is a transverse 
sectional view in the line of 21, Fig. 9. Fig.11 
so is a sectional view of the driving-pulley and 
friction-clutch for driving the main shaft, 
40 
35 
45 
?? 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
A A A' designate the framing of the ma 
chine, represented as consisting, mainly, of 55 
standards A A and a horizontal entablature, 
A. Upon one end of the said entablature is 
erected the bobbin-stand BK for the supply 
bobbin B, and upon the other end are secured 
the two standards C* C8, which contain the 
bearings for the swinging head C, which car 
ries the balling-spindle D, and between said 
Standards and bobbin-stand there is erected 
on said entablature the stand E, which con 
tains or supports the bearings for the ring E 65 
of the winding-flyer. On the lower part of 
the said framing are the bearings for the main 
shaft F of the machine, which is furnished 
with a driving-pulley, G, a pulley, E, for 
driving the winding-flier, a friction-disk, D, 
for driving the balling-spindle, and an endless 
screw, J, for driving the cam J., by which the 
movements of the swinging head to change 
the inclination of the balling-spindle are pro 
duced. 
The cam J, which has its working periphery 
constructed with three projecting wings, a? a 
a, and three intervening depressions, e'ee, 
is fitted to one end of a short shaft, i, (see 
Figs. 1 and 3,) which works in a bearing in a 8o 
standard, j, erected on the lower part of the 
main framing, and the other end of which has 
secured on it a worm-gear, f", which gears with 
an endless screw, j, on the upper end of a 
short upright shaft, which works in a bearing 
in a bracket, f, Secured to the standard j', the 
lower end of the said upright shaft having se 
cured to it a worm-gear, f", (see Fig. 3,) which 
gears with the endless screw J on the main 
shaft. Thus it may be readily understood the 
cam-shaft i is driven by the endless screw J'. 
The can J, for reasons hereinafter to be ex 
plained, is not fast to its shaft i, but fitted 
loosely thereon, and has fast to one side of it 
a spring-actuated pawl, j', (see Figs. 1 and 6,) 
which works in the teeth of a ratchet-wheel, 
f, fast on the said shaft j. The latter shaft, 
rotating in the direction of the arrow shown 
near the can in Fig. 1, carries the cam round 
With it, but leaves the calm free to be moved 
forward when necessary, as will be hereinafter 
explained, independently of its shaft. The 
95 
OO 
 
390,361. 
cam transmits the necessary swinging move 
ments of the box C through an elbow-lever, 
J', which is firmly secured on a short shaft, f, 
which constitutes a fulcrum-pivot, and which 
works in a bearing in a fixed hanger,j, se 
cured to the main framing, one end of the said 
elbow-lever being furnished with a bowl run 
ning on the periphery of the cam and the other 
end being connected by a rod, J", with the 
shaft c of the balling-spindle gearing within 
the swinging head. 
The cam J is furnished on its outer face, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 5, with a hub on which 
is a single tooth, j', which may be engaged by 
a hook-paw), f', suspended from the elbow 
lever J, for the purpose of enabling the cam 
to be turned forward on its shaft.j by pulling 
out the swinging head by hand, for the pur 
pose of setting the cam to the proper starting 
point for balling, for which purpose the cam 
is made loose upon its shaft, as hereinbefore 
mentioned. 
The shaft c of the balling-spindle gearing, 
hereinbefore mentioned, is geared with the 
balling-spindle D by means of an endless screw 
and worm-gear, c', and the said shaft is fur 
nished with a bevel gear, c, which gears with 
a bevel-gear, c, on one end of an extensible 
shaft, c*c', which is connected by a gimbal 
joint, c, with a horizontal shaft, c', arranged 
above and parallel with the main shaft and 
Working in fixed bearings c' c, secured on the 
main framing, and which is furnished with a 
friction-disk, D, through which there is given 
to it by the disk D' on the main shaft and 
other friction disks, D'D', in a manner to be 
presently fully described, a variable rotary 
motion, which motion is transmitted to the 
balling spindle at a greatly-reduced speed by 
the shafts c' cic", gears c' c, shaft c, and the 
endless screw and worm-gear c'. 
The extensible shaft is made of two men 
bers, which are fitted together, as shown in 
Figs. 9 and 10, with a longitudinally-sliding 
sleeve joint and a feather, 17, one of said mem 
bers, c', turning, but being confined length. 
wise in a bearing in the Swinging head, and the 
other, c', being connected with the shaft c'. 
The two disks D D, through which the 
rotary motion is transmitted from the disk D' 
to the disk D", have slightly conical inner 
faces, and are both fitted very loosely to a cen 
tral horizontal spindle, d, which is firmly se 
cured in a block, d, which is free to slide 
vertically in a fixed hanger, d, secured to the 
main framing. A spring, d, coiled on the 
spindled and adjusted by a nut, d, on the end 
thereof, makes the disks D'D' clamp the two 
disks D'D', which are received between them, 
in such manner that the disk D will drive D' 
D' by face friction, and D'D' will by similar 
friction drive D', the velocity of D* varying 
according as the disks D' D are higher or 
lower, and the edges of D and D" are respect 
ively near to or farther from the center of 
D3 D'. 
The block d', which carries the spindle d of 
the disks D'D', is connected by links d with 
one end of an elbow-lever, D', which works on 
a fixed fulcrum, d, in the fixed hangeijk, here 
inlbefore mentioned, and the other end of which 
is connected by a slot-and-pin connection, d, 
with an arm, d, which is fast on the same 
shaft, f", with the cam-lever J. The effect of 
this connection d' d' is that as the lower arm 
of the lever J rises on the calm J to depress 
the tip of the balling-spindle and incline the 
said spindle farther from the vertical position, 
as shown in Fig. 1, the lever D is moved in 
a direction to lower the block d, and so depress 
the spindle d and disks D'D' to make the 
disk D operate nearer the centers of those D 
D* and bring the portions of the latter which 
are farther from their centers into operation 
on the disk l)', and so increase the speed of 
the latter and of the rotation of the balling 
spindle. When the lever J" descends or ap 
proaches the center of the cam, and the ball 
ing-spindle moves toward an upright position, 
the effect on the lever D', block d", and disks 
D' D' is the reverse, and the speeds of rota 
tion of the disk D and baling-spindle are di 
minished. 
The winding-flier consists, principally, of a 
ring, E, having internal radial arms like the 
spokes of a wheel, and having near the pe 
riphery thereof a fixed arm, E, to rotate 
around the balling-spindle for the purpose of 
winding the twine or cord on the latter, the 
said arm E having a guide pin or sheave, n, 
at the end to guide the twine or cord. 
The flier-ring E has firmly secured in its 
radial arms pins n' in n, which serve as the 
axles of a number of grooved anti- friction 
rollers, n n in", which are fitted to run around 
a circular track, n", provided al round the 
circular interior of the flier-stand, the said 
stand consisting simply of a ring with feet, 
through which it is bolted onto the main fram 
ing. The flier is thus supported in its stand by 
the anti-friction rollers without a spindle or 
journals. On the side of the flier next the 
supply-bobbin B there is firmly attached a 
carrier, n, carrying a grooved guide-sheave, 
9, through which the twine or the cord enters 
the flier. The carrier is secured in one of the 
wheel-like arms of the flier-ring, the position 
of the said carrier being such that the part of 
the entering twine or cord which is in contact 
with the Said sheave is opposite the center of 
the flier. 
In the spoke-like arms of the flier 
ring are openings n, through one of which the 
twine or cord to be balled passes from the 
guide it to the guide in at the end of the flier. 
arm. By thus making the flier in the form 
of a ring or wheel without any spindle or 
journals, and with openings through it at a 
proper distance from the center for the pas 
Sage of the cord or twine, the latter passes 
through it, as shown in Fig. 1, with only one 
abrupt bend-viz., at the guide or sheave n-in 
stead of having three nearly rectangular bends 
as in passing through the winding-fliers com 
monly used. The flier thus constructed might 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
2 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
?? 
65 
390,36i 
8 
75 
be driven by a band running on the pulley E, arm, m*, and it and its two arms constitute a 
properly placed on the main shaft, and in a 
lever. The last-mentioned arm carries a pin, 
m", to be operated upon at the proper time 7o 
groove, n, in the outer periphery of the ring 
Eitself, but is represented as having connected 
for stopping the machine by a pin, m', (see 
with the said ring by spoke-like arms. " a 
Fig. 5,) secured in the cam J. This pin, when 
pulley, n', upon which, in Fig. 1, the band 'n' 
the winding and final topping of a ball has 
from the pulley E is represented as running 
been completed, strikes the pin m in the arm 
to drive the flier. 
m* of the rock-shaft, and so turns the rock 
The twine or cord to be balled may be 
shaft far enough for the arm n' to withdraw 
brought to the sheave n from a bobbin ar 
its hook m from the locking piece ion the bar 
ranged in any convenient relation, but is rep 
L', and so leave the said bar free to be acted 
resented as coming from an upright bobbin, 
upon by a spiral spring, L*, which connects 
B, arranged in a stand, Bi, which is furnished 
it with the machine-framing. This Spring 
with guide-sheaves b l', the twine or cord pass 
moves the Said rod in a direction (viz., to the 
ing partly around said sheaves, and thence 
right as viewed in Fig. 1) to move the lever 
under a sheave, b, arranged in proper rela 
L and its cam l in a direction to withdraw the 
pulley G from contact with the disk G', and 
tion to the flier-sheaven, in a fixed stand, b. 
- The guide-sheave b has a traverse motion rela 
thus stop the machine. 
To provide for the unlocking of the bar L. 
tively to the bobbin B under the control of the 
combined action of a weight, b, pendent from 
to permit the stopping of the machine at any 
time desired by the operator standing near the 
the said sheave and of the tension of the yarn; 
balling-head, there is arranged on the same 
but this device needs no full description here, 
fulcrum, 
With the starting and stopping le. 
as it is no part of the present invention, but 
is the subject of my Letters Patent No. 352,312, 
ver L another hand-lever, L, and the datter 
lever has connected with its lower end a slid 
dated November 9, 1886. 
ing rol, L, by which it operates to push the 
To provide for allowing the machine to stop 
when the winding of a ball is completed, the 
arm in of the rock-shaft in clear of the locking 
piece lon the coupling-bar L. The two le 
driving-pulley G is not fast on the shaft, but 
Vers I L have their handles close together, so 
is made to form part of a friction-clutch, the 
that they can be grasped and worked together, 
other part of which consists of a disk, G', fast 
on the driving shaft F. A spiral spring, 16, 
and they are connected in their handles by a 
(see Fig. 11,) applied within a box, G*, in the 
slot and pin, as shown at 2 in Fig. 1, so that 
hub of the pulley and bearing against collars 
I may be first moved to disengage the coup. 
Fou the shaft, tends always to press the pull 
ling-bar Li before L is moved to operate the 
ley against the disk G and keep the machine 
said rod for stopping the machine. 
in gear, except when the driving-pulley is held 
I will now describe the operation of wind 
away from the said disk by other means. 
ing a ball, first supposing the ball-spindle and 
This device for keeping the machine in gear, 
the Cam J to be in the respective positions rep 
being well known and understood by machin 
resented in Fig. 5, which is the position in 
ists, needs no particular description here; but 
which they have been left after the winding of 
I will describe with reference to Figs. 1 and 
a ball, and in which they remain when the 
4 the means of throwing the pulley out of gear. 
machine is at rest. The attendant, having 
Iis a small horizontal forked lever working 
taken the end of the twine or cord from the 
on a fixed fulcrum, i, secured in a bracket, I, 
bobbin B and placed it through the flier and 
secured to the main framing, and the forked 
fastened its end to the balling-spindle, takes 
inner end of which enters a groove in the hub 
hold of the swinging head and draws it up to the 
of the driving-pulley, the outer end of the said 
position shown in Fig. 1, by which movement 
lever being furnished with a bowl, i, which 
the lever J is made to bring its pawl it into op 
is opposite a cam, l, on an upright lever, L, 
eration on the single toothi' on the hub of the 
which works on a fixed fulcrum, l, carried by 
cam J, and so turn the said cam to the posi 
the bracket I. The said lever L is connected 
tion shown in Fig. 1, in which the lever J is 
by a coupling-bar, L, with the lower end of 
on the highest part of the cam. The cam is 
the starting and stopping lever L, which works 
held in this position until the machine is 
on a fixed fulcrum, l, provided on the main 
started by the pawl i? and ratchet-wheel i. 
framing, and by which the said rod may be 
The machine is now started by moving the le 
made to move the lever to a position in which 
ver IL in a direction to draw the bar L to the 
it will operate on the lever I to throw the pull 
left, (see Fig. 1) and so liberate the lever I 
ley G out of gear and hold it there; but while 
from the cam l sufficiently to allow the driv 
the machine is required to operate, the said 
ing-pulley G to come into gear, and the bar L' 
coupling-bar Lis locked in a position to keep 
and cam l are then locked by the falling of the 
the cam l in a position to leave the pulley in 
point of the locking-lever under the catch i on 
gear, as shown in Fig.1, by means of a hook, In, 
the said bar. The winding of the twine on the 
at the extremity of the arm n' of a rock-shaft, 
spindle by the rapid rotation of the winding 
flier while the ball-spindle rotates slowly pro 
m, which works in a fixed stand, M, erected 
upon the framing of the machine, the said 
ceeds in the usual manner, and as the winding 
hook engaging with a locking-piece, l, on the 
proceeds the necessary changes of the line of 
the spindle are produced by the action of the 
bar L. The said rock-shaft in has another 
I IO 
I I5 
2O 
I 25 
OO 
1 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
390,361 
45 
55 
cam J through the lever J and rod J on the 
swinging head, these changes being at inter 
vals, only the very gradual bringing of the 
spindle slowly to a slightly more nearly verti 
cal position to compensate for the increasing 
size of the ball-arm, at other intervals being 
abruptly made first to bring the spindle to a 
position substantially such as is shown in Fig. 
5-that is to say, much more nearly vertical 
to produce the operations known as '' top 
ping, and afterward to return the spindle to 
the position substantially such as is shown in 
Fig. 1, in which the greater part of the wind 
ing is performed. 
In the example shown the can produces by 
the tops of its wings ct a' a' three stages of 
winding with the spindle at an inclination not 
varying greatly from that shown in Fig. 1, the 
falls from these projections to their succeed 
ing depressions, e'e'e', producing the changes 
to an inclimation not varying greatly from that 
shown in Fig. 5 for topping, and the rising 
succeeding surfaces producing the return to 
the less inclined position, the topping being 
performed while the bottoms of the depres. 
sions e e'e' are in operation, the depression e" 
producing the final topping or finishing of the 
ball heretofore commonly performed by the 
attendant taking hold of the swinging head 
and moving it by hand to change the inclina 
tion of the balling spindle. When this final 
topping or finishing has been performed, the 
pin m' in the cam J strikes the pin m in the 
arm n of the rock-shaft mand so throws off according to the position of the swinging head, 75 
the arm in of said rock-shaft from the catch l' 
on the bar L and allows the machine to go 
out of gear and stop. The ball being removed, 
the machine is ready for a repetition of the 
operation described. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the swinging head 
and the main shaft of the machine, of a caneshaft 
arranged in fixed bearings, gearing, substan 
tially as herein described, between said cam 
shaft and main shaft, a cam loose on the said 
cam-shaft, a lever and connec ing-rod through 
which the cam operates on the Swinging head, 
a ratchet and pawl connection between the 
cam and its shaft through which the shaft 
drives the cann, a pawl attached to said lever, 
and a tooth provided on the cam through 
which the pawl last mentioned acts to produce 
the turning forward of the cam on its shaft by 
a Innovement of the swinging head, substam 
tially as herein set forth. 
2. The combination, with the ball-spindle, 
the swinging head, the main shaft, a cam and 
its shaft, and gearing, substantially as herein 
described, between the camshaft and the main 
shaft, of a cam-lever and connecting-rod for 
transmitting motion from the cam to the swing 
ing head, a longitudinally-extensible spindle 
driving shaft geared with the balling-spindle, 
friction disks, one on the main shaft and one 
on the extensible spindle-driving shaft, a pair 
of movable rotary clamping-disks engaging 
the disks on the main and spindle-driving 
shafts, a carriage for said clamping-disks, and 
a lever connected with said carriage and with 
the cam-lever producing the movement of the 
clamping-disks relatively to the friction-disks 
on the main and spindle-driving shafts for va 
rying the speed of the spindle-driving shaft 
all substantlally as herein described. 
JOHN GOOD. 
Witnesses: 
F'REDIK. HAYINIES, 
HENRY MOBRIDE. 
TO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390461.txt	(No Model.) 
D. A. DICKINSON, 
STEAM BOILER, 
No. 390,461, 
Patented Oct. 2, 1888, 
 
N. 
N \\\ests, 
2%/6, 4-la 24- 
v.4%4zz/. 
As his evyws 
two WAGArand (Wii, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL A. DICKINSON, OF ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA. 
STEAV 3 O LER. 
3PECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 390,46, date; Octob3r 2, 1888. 
Application filed January 17, 1888. Serial No. 261,040. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DANIEL A. DICKINSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at St. 
Paul, in the county of Ramsey and State of 
Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Steam. Boilers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to sectional steam 
boilers, and more particularly to that class 
employed in connection with steam-heating 
apparatus; and it consists in the construction 
of the independent generating - chambers, 
Whereby the circulation of the water is main. 
tained and the generation of the steam accel 
erated, as hereinafter shown and described, 
and Specifically pointed out in the claims, 
This invention is an improvement on Patent 
No. 356,103, granted to me January 18, 18S7. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional ele 
Vation. Fig. 2 is a plan view in cross-section 
on the line XX of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an en 
larged plan view of one of the sectional gener 
ating chambers detached. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tional view on the line Y Y of Fig. 3. 
A represents the walls or casing, which may 
be of any material or form of construction, but 
which will generally be of brick, and in which 
the furnace and boiler are embedded, as shown. 
B represents the fire-pot, which will be 
formed in independent hollow sections, as 
shown, forming, when placed in position, the 
fire-pot of the furnace. 
From each of the fire-pot sections a branch 
pipe, C, leads upward and is connected to a 
branch, b, projecting downward from hollow 
segmental Sections C, as shown, the series of 
Sections equaling in number the sections of 
the fire-pot, and when placed in position, as 
shown in FigS. 1 and 2, the sections form a 
Series of flat hollow disks. The lowermost set, 
of these sections C, when in position, are sub 
stantially in contact with each other, but do 
not quite reach the inner surface of the inclos 
ing-Wall A, while the next set of sections 
above are in contact at their outer rims with 
the interior surface of the surrounding walls, 
but are not in contact at their centers, leav 
ing openings d through the center of each 
alternate disk formed by the sections, so that 
the products of the combustion arising from 
the fire-pot are caused to take a zigzag 
course through and around the sections and 
If preferred, each of the disks composed of 6o 
Within each of the branches b', and also 7c 
come in contact with every part, and also with 
the main generating-chamber D above them. 
The separate sections composing the disks are 55 
not united to each other, but the sections are 
united perpendicularly by branches b, having 
flanges b, by which they are bolted or other. 
wise fastened together. 
the sections may be cast in one piece. The 
upper set of the sections C are similarly united 
to the generating chamber D, as shown. By 
this means the different sections of the fire 
pot B, the sections C, and the generating- 65 
chamber D are all united, while at the same 
time the fire-pot sections and the generator are 
Still further united by connecting-tubes E, 
embedded in the brick-work A, as shown. 
passing through each of the sections C, be 
tween the branches b', is a tube, b, somewhat 
Smaller than the branches b, and having an 
auxiliary branch or conduit, b, connected to 
it and leading outward into and with its end 75 
opening into the interior of the sections near 
their outer rims. The generating-chamber D 
also has a series of internal tubes, b, one for 
each of the tubes b, and adapted to rest oppo. 
site the latter when in position, as shown in 8o 
Fig. 1. 
The ends of all the tubes l are adapted to . 
be in contact when the branches b are united 
by the flanges b, so that together they form a 
continuous tube within the branches b', as 85 
shown, these auxiliary tubes b, with their 
branches b, insuring a perfect, rapid, and free 
circulation throughout all the interiors of all 
of sections C, thereby preventing the forma 
tion and accumulation of steam at any one go 
point more than another, and also preventing 
the burning of any of the parts by reason of 
the failure of the water to freely circulate 
thereon. 
will pass up to the chamber D through the 
large branches or pipes b', while the Water is 
returned from the chamber D to the generat 
ing-sections C through the auxiliary tubes 
b' b b. The lower surfaces of the sections C IOO 
will be formed inclining downward and inward 
toward the branches b from all directions, so 
that the proper drainage will be insured, and 
the outer rims of each of the Sections will be 
The steam generating in the several sections 95 
25 
3. 5 
40 
45 
g 
390,46i. 
IC 
enlarged, as shown at e, so as to provide for 
an increased space for the circulation. Each 
of the sections C forming the smaller disks 
will be made precisely alike, and each of the 
sections C forming the larger disks will be 
formed precisely alike, so that the sections 
are interchangeable, thus greatly simplifying 
the construction and the repairing and replac 
ing of parts. Each section with its branches 
and auxiliary circulating-pipes will generally 
be formed in one piece, as shown in Figs. 3 
and 4, thereby greatly simplifying the con 
struction and requiring fewer joints to con 
nect the parts, although if found desirable for 
purpose of construction the auxiliary pipes 
may be made separately and set in sockets 
prepared for them. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new is 
1. In a steam-generator, alternating hori 
zontal circular disks and annular disks formed 
of a series of hollow segmental sections, C, 
united by branches b and having circulating 
25 
internal tubes, b", with conduits b, leading 
therefrom to the interior of the sections, where 
by the circulation of the water is accelerated 
within and throughout said sections, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a steam generator, alternating hori 
Zontal circular disks and annular disks formed 
of a series of hollow segmental sections, C, 
united by branches b', each section and its 
branches having internal circulating-tubes, b, 
and conduits b, segmental fire-pot B, and gen 
erator D, united to said disks, substantially as 
shown and described, whereby a free and rapid 
circulation of the water is maintained and the 
generation of the steam accelerated. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit- 4o 
35 
SSS. 
DANIEL A. DICKINSON. 
Witnesses: 
C. N. WOODWARD, 
H. S. WEBSTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390561.txt	(No Model.) 
F. H. BROWN. 
DENTAL MOUTH OPENING FORCEPS, 
No. 390,561, 
Patented Oct. 2, 1888. 
 
Op?/ZWZSSAS 
AW/AWZOZ2 
774-lic 26 7S re-evol. 
2-8- 
z?,266th- tizo veev 
r. PereRs. Photo-ithographer. Washingtof P. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDRICK H. BROWN, OF LEBANON, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
D ENTA MOUH- O PEN ING FORCEPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 390,561, dated October 2, 1888. 
Application filed June 27, 1888. 
Serial No. 27S,328. (No model.) 
I 5. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDRICK H. BROWN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Leb 
anon, in the county of Grafton and State of 
New Hampshire, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Mouth-Opening 
Forceps for Dental Use; and I do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
simple and durable device for opening the 
mouths of dental patients, its use being espe 
cially convenient and important after the ad 
ministration of an anaesthetic, when the op 
erator should work quickly. 
The nature of my invention will be described 
below, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an end view. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective, the jaws being partly 
open. 
Like letters refer to like parts. 
A. A. are the handles, jointed or hinged to 
gether at a. This joint is well forward, thus 
giving a strong leverage to the handles. The 
Said handles terminate at their forward ends 
in right-angular jaws B; but I do not limit 
myself to any particular shape or angle for 
the construction of the jaws. They should, 
however, be cushioned at b with a combination 
of soft metal and rubber, or either one alone, 
for the obvious purpose of preventing the 
35 
45 
55 
jaws from doing any injury to the teeth, &c. 
It is desirable to adjust the spread of the jaws. 
To this end a stop or set screw, C, is passed 
through one of the handles, and by screwing 
it toward or away from the opposite handle 
the spread of the jaws B may be increased or 
diminished at will. 
The operation is performed by simply plac 
ing the closed jaws between the teeth or jaws 
of the patient and bringing the handles A to 
gether, when the mouth will be forced open 
and kept so as long as desired, and without 
special effort, and where there is an assistant 
the operator is free to 
give his whole attention 
to his task. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A mouth-opening forceps consisting of the 
jointed handles provided with terminal jaws 
approximately at right angles to the blades, 
said jaws having outer cushions of some suit 
able soft substance, as set forth. 
2. In a mouth-forceps, the combination, with 
the jointed handles having terminal jaws ap 
proximately at right angles to the blades and 
outer cushions of some suitable soft substance, 
of the stop or set screw for adjusting the 
spread of said jaws, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FREDRICK. H. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. RICHARDSON, 
C. J. DOW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390661.txt	(No Model,) 
No. 390,661, 
W. S. FOR SYTH. 
WEHICLE 
Patented Oot, 9, 1888. 
12) 
 
 
. 
% 
2 2 
 
 
 
2 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM S. FORSYTH, OF OWEGO, NEW YORK. 
VEHICLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 390,661, dated October 9, 1888, 
Application filed Janitary 10, 1888. Serial No. 260,3-0. 
(No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
To al., whon, it naily concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMS. FoRSYTH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Owego, 
in the county of Tioga, State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve. 
ements in Vehicles, of which the following is 
a specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
combination cart and sleigh that can be easily 
and quickly changed from one form to the other, 
and in which the spring of the cart is adapted 
to serve as a runner for the sleigh. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven. 
tion Will hereinafter appear, and the novel fea 
tures thereof will be particularly pointed out 
in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation of a vehicle constructed in accord 
ance With my invention, the same being adapted 
for use as a cart. Fig. 2 is a similar view, the 
Wheels removed, the vehicle being adapted for 
use as a sleigh. Fig. 3 is a front elevation of 
the vehicle. Fig. 4 is a detail in longitudinal 
section of the hub of the wheel employed. 
FigS. 5, 6, and 7 are details hereinafter re 
ferred to. 
parts in all the fig 
Like letters indicate like 
lures of the drawings. 
Ihaye herein described and illustrated my 
invention as applied to push or hand carts; 
but, as Will be hereinafter apparent, the in. 
vention is applicable to any style of vehicle, 
and this with little or no change of the prin 
cipal parts. 
A represents the cart-body, the bottom and 
sides of which are provided with longitudinal 
Springs B, secured to the bottom of the body 
by bolts B. The springs B are turned or 
Curved at their ends, which ends, as before 
stated, are connected at their extremities to 
the body of the cart. Intermediate the ends 
of the Springs and at about their centers 
are formed upwardly disposed embracing 
loops B. 
C represents the wheels, and C one of the 
hubs, which is internally bored, as at C", to 
about midway its length and terminates in a 
pocket, C, designed to receive a suitable quan 
So tity of Waste or other lubricant material. The 
35 
3O 
45 
hub is formed upon the outer surface with out 
wardly - extending annular flanges C, from 
which the spokes radiate and terminate in the 
rim. At the rear end of the hub C is formed 
an annular groove or bearing, C, which is 55 
embraced by two halves of a wooden or other 
bearing-block, C, which the loop B of the 
spring B is designed to straddle and grip. 
Oil-ducts C" are provided in the bearing C 
of the hub to feed oil to the axle D, the ends 6o 
of said axle being loosely mounted in the inter 
nal bore, C, of the hubs and provided with a 
series of oil-conducting grooves, D, register 
ing with the oil-ducts C, which conduct oil 
admitted to the chamber C, where it is grad- 65 
ually fed to the axle. The axle D in this in 
stance merely serves to brace the wheels apart, 
the true bearing of said wheels being in the 
bearing-blocks C. (See Fig. 5.) The cart is 
in this instance provided with handles E, piv- 7o 
otally connected to its rear end, as at E, which 
handles are provided with segmental arms E, 
which pass through loops affixed to the side of 
the cart, in which are seated adjusting-screws 
E, designed to bear upon the arms E, and 75 
thus maintain the handles in an adjusted po 
sition. In this instance, where but two wheels 
are employed, I provide a supporting-leg, F, 
the lower end of which, when in operative po 
sition, rests upon the ground, and the upper 
end of which is preferably notched and adapt 
ed to receive a pin, F, projecting from near 
the upper edge of the cart; or an ordinary 
catch may be employed, if desired. 
collar, F, which, as shown in Fig. 3, is formed 
with opposite side eyes, F, which ride upon 
opposite parallel rods or ways F, the rear 
ends of which are secured to the cart bottom 
and the forward ends curved upwardly and go 
projected to the front. The rear portions of 
the ways E extend under and are parallel 
with the bottom of the cart, so that when the 
collar and supporting-leg are slid to the front, 
by reason of the front curved ends of the ways 95 
F, the leg assumes a vertical position and 
serves as a support to the cart. To throw the 
leg out of operation, simply disengage its up 
per end from the pin F, or the catch employed, 
and turn and slide said leg to the rear, when, IOO 
The leg or support Fis provided with a fixed 85 
2 
390,661. 
by reason of the rear portions of the ways IF, 
said leg is maintained in a horizontal position 
against the bottom of the cart. 
As thus far described, the vehicle is adapted 
for use as a cart or other wheeled vehicle. 
Now by removing the wheels C, withdrawing 
the hubs and bearing-blocks from the embrac 
ing-loops B", and with them the axle D, the 
vehicle may be used as a sleigh, the springs B 
Serving as runners. When used as a sleigh, 
the loops B are filled by blocks C, (see Fig. 
6,) which are of the shape of the loop and are 
provided with a turn-button or set-screw, C', 
adapted to secure in position a bail, C", (see 
Fig. 7,) which embraces the filling-block C. 
and loop B, thus providing an unbroken sur 
face for the runner. 
The bearing-block C is bored and centrally 
split, the two halves being held in position 
upon the hub by means of a bolt, C'. 
Having described my invention and its op 
eration, what I claim is 
1. A vehicle having opposite spring run 
mer's provided with hub-embracing loops in 
termediate its ends, substantially as specified. 
2. A vehicle having opposite spring-run 
ners provided with intermediate hub-embrac 
ing loops, in combination with wheels the 
hubs of which are provided with bearings 
adapted to enter said loops, substantially as 
specified. 
3. A vehicle having opposite spring-run 
ners formed with intermediate loops, in com 
bination with wheels having hubs formed 
with annular bearings provided with a bear. 
ing-block designed to be embraced by said 
loop, and an axle loosely connecting said 
wheels, substantially as specified. 
4. In a vehicle of the class described, the 
combination of the body and its supporting 
wheels with a supporting-leg having a col 
lar, F, provided with eyes F, and brackets, 
as F, to support the leg, substantially as speci. 
fied. 
5. The combination of the body A, having 
the spring-runners B, formed with the inter 
mediate loops, B, bent at their ends and se 
cured as at B, with axle D, and the wheels 
3, having the hubs C, bored as at C, cham 
fered as at C, flanged as at C, and having 
the bearings C and blocks C, adapted to be 
embraced by said loops, substantially as speci 
fied. 
6. The combination of the body A, having 
the parallel brackets F", curved and projecting 
beyond the front of the cart, and the pin F, 
with the leg F, notched at its upper end and 
having collar F, adapted to ride on the ways, 
so as to be swung into and out of position, sub 
stantially as specified. 
7. The combination of the body A, having 
the spring runner's B, formed with interme 
diate loops, B", with filling-blocks C, having 
set-screw C', and with the embracing-bail C", 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
WILLIAMI S. FORSYTH. 
Witnesses: 
W. G. SMYTH, 
L. E. FIUTSLAMI B. 
O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390761.txt	H. B. EARECKSON. 
GAS CHECK FOR WASTE PIPES, 
Patented Oct. 9, 1888. 
(No Model.) 
No. 390,761. 
 
72%. Z. 
INVENTOR 
434. T 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HENRY B. E ARECKSON OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
GAS - CHECK FOR WASTE. P. PES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 390,761, dated October 9, 1888. 
Application filed April 24, 1888. Serial No. 271,720. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
A, threaded externally to correspond there 
To all who7, it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, HENRY B. EARECKSON, with, and projecting downward therefrom out 
of the city, county, and State of New York, side the valve-seat C. 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
The recess J is extended upward in the box 
in Gas-Checks for Waste. Pipes, of which the above the valve-pivot, and the hinge-lug His 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. formed with a flat top adapted to set up evenly 
This invention relates to an improvement against the bottom shoulder, A', of the box at 
in that class of appliances used on the waste- the inner side of the recess J when the valve 
pipes of wash-basins and other water-fixtures is closed, a segmental corner, H, adapted to 
to permit the discharge of the waste-water, work closely against the shoulder A when the 
While automatically preventing the backflow valve swings on its pivot, and with an out 
of Sewer-gas, in which a self-closing flap-valve ward-projecting arm, H, which is permitted 
is arranged to be opened by the pressure of to swing upward into the recess J, against the 
the Waste water to allow the same to pass, and inner wall of the same, when the valve is 
to be closed tightly upon its seat by the press- opened. 
ure of gas from the drain. 
From the outer end of the lug-arm H is sus 
The object of my improvement is to secure pended, by a chain, L, a weight, M, of suffi. 
greater simplicity and efficiency than has icient gravity to overbalance the valve and 
been heretofore generally attained in appli. hold the same normally closed against back 
ances of the kind; and the invention consists pressure, while permitting it to open and re 
of a novel construction of gas-check, substan. lieve an accumulation of water therefrom, and 
tially as hereinafter fully described, and as the bottom of the arm H', which is curved so 
distinctly claimed. 
as to work in close proximity to the outside 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying of the recess K, is formed with a central lon 
drawings, forming a part of this specification,ingitudinal groove, O, to receive the chain L 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor. when the arm swings upward. 
responding parts in all the figures. 
On opposite ends of the threaded box A are 
Figure;1 is a sectional elevation of a gas- screwed short pipe-sections MM", which may 
check constructed in accordance with my in be contracted at their outer ends and threaded 
vention, and Fig. 2 is an inverted sectional for connection with the respective adjoining 
plan view of the said gas-check on the line a parts of a waste-pipe. 
ac of Fig. 1. 
With this construction the valve will nor 
In constructing the gas-check thus illus- mally be tightly closed against back-press 
trated, a cylindrical box, A, is formed with ure of gas, while yielding readily to water. 
an external thread, B, extending its entire pressure from above, as described. 
length, with an eccentric circular concave 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
Valve-seat, C, in its bottom, opening downward claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
and surrounded by an annular step, D, and Patent, is 
with a funnel-shaped basin, E, in its top, open- 
1. In a gas-check for waste-pipes, the com 
ing downward through the center of the valve- bination, with the body A, provided on the 
seat C. 
under side of its bottom with a valve-seat, C, 
A circular flap-valve, F, having a hollow having the annular step D, and the downward 
spherical body fitted accurately to the seat C, projecting and recessed extension K, of the 
and a continuous annular flange, G, likewise valve F, having a spherical body fitting the 
adapted to the annular step D, is formed on valve-seat, and the flange G., fitting the annular 
one side with a hinge ling, H, projecting down- step, and provided with the lug H, pivoted in 
ward and outward from the flange G, and said the recess of the said lug, and having the pro 
hinge-lug is pivoted to swing vertically in a jecting arm H', the weight M, and the chain 
downward and outward opening recess, J, L, connected to the said arm and weight, sub 
which is formed in an extension, K, of the box stantially as described. 
5 
3O 
AO 
45 
95 
ICO 
390,76i. 
the weight M, and the chain L, connected to 
the weight and arm, the said box being adapted o 
to be screwed into the ends of pipe-sections, 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
HENRY B. EARECKSON. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN OVERBECK, 
JAAIES HAYDEN. 
2. A gas-check for waste-pipes, consisting 
of the externally-threaded box A, having a 
funnel-shaped opening, E, through the same, 
the valve-seat C, the annular step D, surround 
5 ing the valve-seat, the downward-projecting 
extension K, and the recess J, the valve F, 
provided with the flange G, and the lug H, 
having the projecting and grooved arm H', 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390861.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 390,861, 
J. ILLINGWORTH, 
CASTING METAL ING OTS, 
3. Sheets-Sheet . 
Patented Oct. 9, 1888, 
E. 
'' -77'y, Z, 
s 
p/ : y 
S. H. He 
of HH 
St E 
-- 
S S 
St se 
SA -- 
the . 
" 
 
6. c. 54-04-4--, 
1story 
//o/72 I/Arzogce Ot/-, 
** if: S a 
N. Peters, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
3-11-ev-Boz. s 
(No Model.) 
No. 390,861, 
 
J. ILLINGWORTH, 
CASTING METAL INGOTs, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented 00t, 9 
1888. 
 
 
 
 
NSN NS 
N 
Vo/w Zetz anywo, 
Az 
-&lectives. 
MSY A/eu-Y 62. 
36 flo 
N. PeFERs, Photo 
lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
 
J. ILLINGWORTH, 
CASTING METAL ING-0TS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented 00t, 9, 1888. 
7, 
 
 
Mility 
-- 
w 
2 th 
% % % % 
-H% % %N a 
2 % % % R% s DZN 
928), Lucoco, =- 
6e? &eve-a-c. 
34-le-V-bovs 
Vo/7 IAlery worth, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN ILLINGWORTH, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
CASTING METAL INGoTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 390,861, dated October 9, 1888. 
Application filed July 9, 1888, Serial No. 279,373. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN ILLINGWORTH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
ark, in the county of Essex and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Apparatus for Casting Com 
pound Ingots; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
The object of this invention is to facilitate 
the Operation of casting compound ingots for 
manufacturing skates or dies, &c., in which 
one portion of the ingot is of a grade of steel 
or metal differing from the other portion in 
hardness or other qualities. 
The invention consists in theimproved mech 
anism for casting compound ingots, having 
the arrangements and combinations of parts 
substantially as will be hereinafter set forth, 
and finally embodied in the clauses of the 
claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
embraced in three sheets, in which like letters 
of reference indicate corresponding parts in 
each of the several figures, Figure 1 is an ele 
vation of the improved mechanism, shown in 
connection with an ordinary pit, parts of the 
mechanism being in section or broken away to 
show the construction more clearly. Fig. 2 
is a plan of the said pit and the ingot-forming 
mechanism in connection there with. Fig. 2: 
is an elevation of a brick used in connection 
with the ducts for supplying the mold with 
metal. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of a certain 
mold in which the first casting is held, and 
Fig. 3* a keybolt employed therewith. Fig. 
4 is a view of the mold enlarged and ready for 
a second casting. Figs. 5 and 6 are vertical 
sectional views of the said mold, the section 
being taken on linea; of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 7 is a 
side elevation of the device, illustrating the 
process of casting. 
In said drawings, c indicates the ground, in 
which the ordinary pit, a, is formed or dug, 
the said pit being walled with masonry in any 
suitable manner. Upon the bottom of the pit 
is arranged or formed a suitable foundation or 
bed, b, of iron, having on the upper face thereof 
suitable channels or runners which lead to 
certain molds c. Said molds are separable 
from said bed, and the said channels or run 
ners are preferably lined with fire-brick, b, or 
equivalent plates, or are perforated bricks, the 
perforations l', Fig. 2, forming suitable ducts 
adapted to lead off the molten metal from the 
standing runner d, having a funnel, d, at the 
top thereof to the mold. 
I prefer to arrange the molds in pairs, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2, and in that case I ex 
tend the runners or ducts in the bed and pro 
vide the same with two outlets, c'c', extending 
upward into the mold-chamber of both of said 
molds. 
The construction of the mold is substantially 
as shown in Figs. 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6, in whiche 
indicates a mold-body having the three side 
plates, e, and top all cast in one integral piece, 
the fourth side of the mold-body being open, 
as at e, Fig. 1, and adapted to receive side 
plates or covers, f(1, separable from the bed b. 
The mold-body is preferably held in a fixed 
position on the bottom by suitable keys, h, and 
lugs or bearings h", cast upon the bed. The 
said keys are preferably in the form of wedges, 
whereby the said molds are held rigidly and 
firmly upon the bed, so that the said mold 
bodies will not be displaced in the operation 
of casting, and yet said bodies may be readily 
disconnected from the bed after the operation 
of casting, when it is desired to remove the 
mold-body from the ingot cast therein. 
In lieu of the keys and lugs formed on the 
bed, other suitable means may be provided 
to hold the said molds in position, or said molds 
may be held, when of a large size, in position 
by their own weight. 
At the top of the mold-bodies the same are 
provided with eyes p or other equivalent 
means, whereby the said bodies may be secured 
to a chain connected with a hydraulic crane, 
and thus hooked from the bed-plate in the op 
eration of removing the said bodies from the 
ingot. The said mold - bodies at the sides 
thereof adjacent to the separable side plates 
are provided with lugs i, adapted to provide 
bearings for certain hooks connected with the 
separable side plates. 
- 
O 
2 O 
25 
40 
SO 
90 
95 
Ico 
390,861 
SO 
85 
75 
In the operation of casting the separable may be driven from the plates very quickly. 
The separable covers are forced into their 
closed engagement with the bottom of the mold 
by said keys, as will be understood. 
By forcing the keys downward by striking 
the upper ends thereof with a hammer the 
bolts are loosened from their engagement with 
the lugs i, and thus upward draft on the sep 
arable plates removes them from the bodies of 
the molds. 
By the arrangement thus described the pro 
cess of removing the separable covers can be 
done with greater facility than heretofore, the 
time required being ordinarily not more than 
one minute and a quarter. 
To remove the covers from both molds at the 
same time, employing but a single crane, S, I 
yoke the separable covers or side plates to 
gether, as indicated in Fig. 1, in which p is the 
yoke, having a suitable eye, p, to receive the 
crane-chain p', and eyes p", to receive eyes p" 
on the plates or covers fg. The said covers 
are thus connected together and are balanced 
on the yoke, so that when the latter is raised 
by the crane the two mold covers or plates are 
raised uniformly together away from the mold 
bodies. Said covers or plates may be con 
nected by a bar, n, to prevent the said plates 
from swinging into contact; but said bar may 95 
be dispensed with, and I do not show it in all of 
the figures. The outer faces of the covers or 
plates are provided with strengthening-ribs 
m", which may be formed on or secured to said 
plates in any suitable manner. 
The chain p", which connects the crane-arm 
with the mold-covers or separable plates f, 
first employed in casting, is shorter than the 
chain q, which connects the second plate, g, of 
the said separable piates. Thus, when the 
crane is at the lowest end of its stroke and the 
first of the said plates is in position in connec 
tion with the mold-body, by raising the crane 
the said plates fare raised from engagement 
with the mold-body and the second of said 
plates is raised to a vertical position and 
brought into line with the open sides of the 
said mold-body, as will be understood upon 
reference to Fig. 7. The said mold-cover or 
separable plated and long chain q are connected 
with a carriage, ', which runs on the jib or 
arm ' of the crane, so that when the said plate 
or cover 9 is brought to a vertical position, as 
described, in line with the open nold-body, 
the plate can be readily pushed toward said 
open mold-body and the hook m brought into 
connection with the lugs i. The inclines on 
said lugs are sufficient of themselves to draw 
the cover into intimate contact or relation 
with the mold-body, when the said cover or 
plate is allowed to lower by lowering the crane, 
even without tightening the keys 0, although 
I prefer, after the second cover is in place, 
to tighten up the said keys 0 to bring the cover 
into more intimate contact with the body. 
In casting the compound ingots by the im 
proved device thus described the separable 
plates fare first applied to the open side of 
the mold-bodies, as indicated in Figs. 3 and 5. 
This plate presents a flat face to the mold 
body, closing the mold and forming a chamber 
of a size equal to the size of the first layer of 
the ingot. The chamber being thus closed, 
the molten metal is poured through the funnel 
d and passes down through the runners and 
into the mold, filling the same, the top plate of 
the mold-body being provided with a vent, j, 
whereby the air in said mold is allowed to es 
cape. By thus flowing the metal from the 
bottom the metal is prevented from boiling or 
being mixed with air to an injurious extent, 
and thus the bulk of the ingot is made more 
solid and otherwise more perfect. After thus 
casting the bulk or larger body of the ingot, 
the separable plate f is removed, and in lieu 
thereof the separable plate g is arranged in 
front of the mold-body. The said plate g is 
provided with side pieces or flanges, g, which 
coincide with the lateral sides of the mold 
body in such a manner as to form between the 
ingot-layer first cast and the front plate, f', of 
the Said separable plate g a chamber, g', to re 
ceive the metal of the first casting. The up 
per end of said plate ( is open, as indicated 
at 9, Fig. 4, through which the metal to form 
the second casting may be poured. 
Where the second casting is made of a very 
large size, or where it is to be of considerable 
thickness, I may employ a runner for the 
metal, connecting with the chamberg'; but in 
ordinary practice, where the second casting is 
to be comparatively thin, I prefer the use of 
the top opening, g, and the method employed 
of casting therethrough. 
The Second casting follows the first as soon 
thereafter as the first casting has become suffi 
ciently hardened to sustain its own weight, the 
metal of the first casting being at the time of 
casting the second casting at a degree of heat 
commonly known as red-short, the two 
layers of differing metal becoming firmly and 
perfectly welded together, so that subsequently 
the ingots can be hammered or otherwise 
Worked without any danger of separation. 
To enable me to remove the separable cov 
ers from the body portion of the mold by 
means of a crane, hereinafter referred to, I 
have provided the separable covers or plates fg 
with perforated lugs lic k, and into the same are 
arranged hooked bolts ll, the said bolts being 
provided at one end with a hook or stay, m, 
adapted to engage the lugs i on the side of the 
mold opposite said separable plates, and at 
the other end said bolts are provided with key 
holes in, Fig. 3", the ends of the bolts having 
said key-holes being formed to pass through 
the perforations in the lugsic, and, extendin 
therethrough, to bring the eyes or key-holes in 
on the side of the lugs opposite that toward 
the lugs i. Into said key-holes 2 are passed 
Wedged-shaped keys o, the larger ends of which 
are placed downward, so that the said keys 
OC 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
IO 
2C) 
25 
35 
So 
55 
65 
- 
390,86. 
- 
3 
O 
COWeS connected with the jib of the crane and ble plates or covers f and g, adapted to close 
the covers fare arranged against the mold 
the said fourth side, one of the said plates or 
body, as described. Molten metal is then 
covers forming a chamber, g, for a second cast 
poured into the runners, and the same rises in 
ing, and means, substantially as described, for 
the mold, filling the same, and the metal thus 
drawing said covers and said mold-body from 
the ingot, substantially as set forth. 
cast is allowed to harden. As soon as it will 
bear its own weight, the covers fare removed 
2. The combination, with the foundation or 
bed b, of a mold-body having lugs i, separable 
and the covers g are arranged in connection 
there with, forming the chamber of'. This is 
plates fg, and bolts l, having stays or hooks 
done by elevating the crane, and thus by the 
m, which engage the said lugs i, and keys o, 
one operation the first covers are withdrawn 
which pass through said bolts and engage said 
from the mold and the second are brought ap 
covers to draw the latter into intimate engage 
proximately in line with the open sides of the 
ment with the said body, substantially as and 
mold-bodies. The said second cover being 
for the purposes set forth. 
raised a little higher, the bodies are then pushed 
3. The improved apparatus for forming com 
pound ingots, combining therein a mold-body 
toward the molds, the hooks in passing over 
the lugs i. Then the crane is lowered and the 
having three side plates and open at the fourth 
said Second covers are brought into intimate 
side or without a fourth inseparable side plate 
connection with said mold-bodies. The metal 
and without a bottom, a foundation or bed to 
for the second casting is immediately poured 
receive said body and close the bottom open 
through the opening g against the first cast 
ing, and covers or plates fig to close said 
ing, the said metal becoming welded to or so 
fourth side, one of said covers or plates form 
intimately united to the first casting as to be 
ing a chamber, g, and a crane connected with 
integral therewith, though still possessing a 
said covers by chains of unequal length, all said 
varying quality therefrom. By pouring the 
parts being arranged and combined substan 
thin layer of metal from the top the said layer 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
is not allowed to chill and thus form an im 
4. The combination, with a suitable bed or 
perfect union. By thus casting the larger 
foundation having ducts or runners therein, of 
layer from below and the thin layer from above 
a mold-body having three side plates and with 
I secure an inaproved article, as will be evi 
out a fourth side and without a bottom, and 
dent. The compound ingot having been thus 
covers or plates f and g, the latter forming the 
chamberg' and being provided with the open 
cast, the second cover is removed and drawn 
back to a position for Subsequent use. A chain 
ing g at the top to allow an entrance of a 
of the crane is then adjusted to the body of 
downpouring of metal to the said chamberg, 
the luold, the keys holding said bodies to the 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
bed-plate are loosened up, and the said mold 
5. The combination, with a suitable founda 
bodies are drawn away from the ingot, leav. 
tion or bed and a mold-body having one side 
ing the latter standing, the bottom of the said 
and the bottom open or without inseparable 
mold-body being open to allow such with 
plates, of separable covers or plates fg, one 
drawal, as will be understood upon reference 
of which forms a chamber, g, chains of differ 
to Fig. 4. 
ing lengths connecting said covers or plates f 
The crane is or may be operated by a hy. 
g to a crane, and said crane for raising said 
draulic piston, at, and cylinder v in any usual 
covers and said mold-body away from the in 
got, substantially as and for the purposes set 
8. 
Having thus described the invention, what I 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
claim as new is 
1. The improved mold for casting compound 
have hereunto set my hand this 29th day of 
ingots herein described, combining with a 
June, 1888. 
mold-body having three integral or insepara 
ble side plates and a top plate with a vent 
therein, said mold-body being without an in 
tegral or inseparable bottom and fourth side, 
a suitable foundation or bottom and separa 
CHARLES H. PELL, 
CONSTANCE. H. BALDWIN. 
JOHN INGWORTH. 
Witnesses: 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US390962.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 390,962, 
S. M. HAMBLIN, 
LET-OFF MECHANISM FOR LOOMS, 
Patented 00 t. 9, 1888, 
Z5 
Az77. 
ty 
f 
Z 
I 
 
: 
C/ 
Z7 
C 
Z) 
z' 
6. 
e 
g 
Zzzezzazz 
%z/2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN M. HAMBLIN, OF PLYMOUTH, MASSACHUSETTS, 
LET-OFF MECHANISM FOR LOOMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 390,962, dated October 9, 1888. 
Application filed March 3, 1888. Seria No. 266,110. (No model.) 
To add twhom it may concern.' 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN MI. HAMIBLIN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Plym 
outh, in the county of Plymouth and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful improvements in Let Off Mechanism 
for Looms; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention is an improvement in let-off 
mechanism for looms. 
It has for its object to promote an even and 
steady motion of the warp as it is given off, 
and consequently a similar effect in the move. 
ment of the cloth as the same is taken up. 
A general description I give as follows: At 
opposite ends of the warp-beam, properly jour 
maled in the frame of the loom, are fixed heads 
provided on their edges with gear-teeth. Be 
low the Said beam and on either side of a cen 
ter line running vertically through the same 
are rods journaled in the frame of the loom, 
each of which is provided with two pinions, 
the teeth of which engage the teeth of the heads 
of the warp-beam at the opposite ends thereof. 
These rods have each fast thereon two flanged 
drums or pulleys, over which pass belts fast 
ened by one end to the frame of the loom, and 
at their other ends said belts are secured to e 
vers pivoted in the said loom's frame. The 
levers aforesaid, four in number, are provided 
with Weights, which slide upon them, which, 
when moved inwardly or outwardly, serve to 
tighten or loosen the said belts on their re 
Spective pulleys and control the movement of 
the warp-beam about its axis, and thus de 
crease or increase the tension of the warp. 
In my drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion showing the let-off mechanism as applied 
to a loom. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
Sae. 
Similar reference-letters indicate like parts 
in both of the figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A is the warp 
beam provided with heads BB, on the edges 
of which are the gear-teeth D' D'. 
DD are shafts journaled in the frame of the 
loom provided with pinions C C C C, which 
mesh with the teeth on the warp-beam heads. 
Upon the shafts D are fixed also pulleys or 
4. 
75 
drums E E E E, provided with guide flanges, 
and over these drums pass the beltseeee, fast 
ened each by one end to the frame of the loom 55 
directly, and at their opposite ends said belts 
are secured to the levers FF FF, pivoted in 
the said frame of the loom. 
Weights bbb b are adjustably fixed to the 
levers F, and may be moved and clamped at 
proper points of adjustment between the full 
crums of the said levers and their ends. 
It will be understood that I use in my device 
four pulleys and four belts, and with them four 
levers, so that each head of the warp-beam is 
under the influence of two belts. In this ar 
rangement a very little weight is required to 
each of the levers, and said levers require but 
little adjustment. 
The movement of the warp-beam is commu 
nicated to the pulleys E through the gear-teeth 
of the beam and the pinions on the shafts D, 
said movement being modified by the amount 
of friction produced by the weights upon their 
respective bands or belts. 
In the United States Patent No. 3,954 it may 
be noticed that the friction-wheel, over which 
the friction-strap passes, and the pinion which 
acts upon the gears of the warp-beam are one, 
or so closely connected that their position is 
fixed, and they can only be used upon the loom 
for which they are expressly built. It may be 
mentioned, also, that the warp-beam must be 
just such a length, in order that the gears may 
fit into the pinion of the let-off. In my inven 
tion the pinions are movable, and can be ad 
justed to any length of warp-beam and can be 
used on any loom of any make. This is con 
sidered to be a matter of considerable advan 
tage, as sometimes it is desirable to change the 
width of the weave on the same loom, and 
this could not be done with a let-off such as is 
shown in the Patent No. 3,954. 
Another advantage of my invention is in the 
two pinions-one for each end of the warp 
beam-mounted on one shaft and working in 
unison. By this arrangement I get an equal 
tension at both ends of the warp-beam, which 
is not the case when the tension is only at one 
end of the beam. 
In my invention I get the same absolutely 
even lay of the filling in open as in close weav 
ing, and I can readily change from one to the 
other in the same weave without touching the 
95 
OO 
IO 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
390,962 
Having thus described my invention, what 20 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination, with the warp-beam and 
the toothed leads fixed thereon, of the shafts 
ID, the pinions fixed on said shafts meshing 25 
with Said toothed heads, drums E, fixed on said 
shafts D, the levers F, provided with adjust 
able weights pivoted to the frame of the loom, 
and bolts e, Secured directly to the said frame 
and to the said levers F, as and for the pur-3o 
pose set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Ia ?ix my signature in 
STEPHEN MI. HAMIBILIN. 
WitnessCS: 
A. C. BARNES, 
EERBERT MORISSEY. 
O 
tension-weights. This effect cannot, I believe, 
be had with any other let-off now in use. It 
is often the case, too, that some of the teeth 
in the gears of the beam-heads are broken, and 
in the Patent No. 3,954, should such an acci 
dent happen, every time the broken part was 
reached the beam would slip and make a bad 
place in the fabric. With my arrangement 
such slipping Would be impossible, unless the 
teeth Should be broken from both heads of the 
beam at exactly opposite points. 
Another advantage of my invention is found 
in the increased tension that may be put upon 
the warps, and the fact that the cradling ar 
rangement of the two shafts and the support 
it gives to the warp-beam prevents in some de 
gree the jumping of the latter, so common in 
light looms, especially when running at a high 
rate of speed. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391062.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. MILLER, 
ARTIFICIAL DENTURE. 
No. 391,062, 
Patented Oct. 16, 1888. 
 
27&4 A /h-ce. I/WWEMTOR 
BY 
v- 
ATTORNEY. 
perers. Pluto-Lithographer. Washingto: 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. MILLER, OF CANTON, OHIO. 
ARTIFICIAL DE NURE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 391,062, dated October 16, 1888. 
Application filed February 8, 1888. Serial No. 263,377. (No model.) 
To al., whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. MILLER, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Canton, county of Stark, State of Ohio, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Artificial Dentures, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
making part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in ar 
tificial dentures. 
Hitherto in order to preserve natural facial 
features plain teeth have been set one at a time 
to a platina dental plate, and when in position 
artificial gum has been built around them and 
fused or baked to the plate. The objections 
have been to the weight of the plate, and that 
it required the highest degree of skill to make 
a perfect success, and the cost so great as to 
place the completed denture outside of the 
possession of the masses. 
The object of my present iuvention is to se. 
cure all the advantages of the more expensive 
denture in a manner which will enable it to 
be successfully manufactured by those of ordi 
nary skill and to greatly reduce the initial 
COSt. 
Figure 1 represents the completed denture. 
Fig. 2 represents the denture as it appears 
during the process of locating the teeth and 
applying the gum. Fig. 3 represents the den 
tal plate and the gum-plate. Fig. 4 represents 
a gun-plate and gum detached. 
To Secure an artistic adaptation of artificial 
teeth, it is desirable that the arrangement of 
the teeth be made to suit the case in hand both 
as to usefulness and naturalness. This can 
best be accomplished in entire dentures. My 
O 
35 
method of producing the desirable result is to 
form a gum-base of platina or other suitable 
material, as B, on which to build the teeth and 
gum, as shown in Fig. 2, and to fuse the gun. 
The teeth C being selected with reference to 
the case and so placed on the base, a porcelain 
paste to form a continuous gum, as D, around 
the arch of the mouth in whole or in part is 
applied to the teeth and fused. The next step 
is to prepare the mold as for a rubber denture, 
placing the teeth, continuous gum, and the 
dental rubber to form the denture-plate A on 
the mold, after which the case is placed in the 
vulcanizer and the dental rubber vulcanized 
about the fastenings of the teeth, thus secur 
ing a rubber denture plate and teeth having a 
continuous porcelain gum, after which the 
denture is finished in the usual way. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The herein-described artificial denture, con 
sisting, essentially, of the non-metallic denture 
plate having side gums and teeth attached 
thereto, a metallic strip having teeth attached 
thereto, and a porcelain gum fused thereon 
forming the front of the denture, the metallic 
plate or gum being secured to the non-metal 
lic denture-plate and the latter vulcanized, 
forming a denture having a continuous gum, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 6th day of February, A. D. 1888. 
WILLIAM H. MILLER. 
55 
o 
Witnesses: 
W. K. MILLER, 
CHAS. N. MILLER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391162.txt	(Model.) 
No. 39,162, 
B. F. KEND ALL, 
BEE HIWE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
ce 
67 
Patented 00t, l6, 1888. 
SNS 
2 
2 SN 2IN 
S N 
% 
al 
C 
Azaz, Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7 
 
N 
 
 
NZ%,  
7 
Y 
2 
2%f 
sS 
 
  
S 
 
 
 
 
 
(Model.) 
B. F. KEND ALL, 
BEE HIWE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 391,162, 
Patented Oct. 16, 1888. 
 
BSN H N2. 2 
2 
- 
 
 
N...........S7NZ 
N N SSN 
N ... --... 
A. 
SSN NN 
NS 
N 
...I. 
A. 
7/ 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
S 
NNNSN 
NSN NSSSNNS 
As 
Y 
 
N.I. ity 2 
V 
2 > ( 
 
 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICF. 
BENJAMIN FRANKLIN KEND ALL OF ANDERSON VILLE, KENTUCKY. 
BEE- HV E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 39,162, dated October 16, 1888, 
Application filed March 27, 1888. Seria No. 268,642. (Model.) 
O 
5 
To all whon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN FRANKLIN 
KEND ALL, a citizen of the United States, resid. 
ing at Andersonville, in the county of Meade 
and State of Kentucky, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Bee-Hives; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the lettel's and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
I5 My invention relates to bee-hives; and its 
Objects are, first, to arrange the hive and its 
Compartments so as to permit the bees to work 
unobstructedly in filling the surplus comb 
frames; second, to insure perfect ventilation; 
third, to prevent the attack of foreign insects; 
fourth, to provide ease in handling and secur 
ity to the Operator, and, fifth, to procure the 
ready removal and replacement of the comb 
racks. I attain these ends by the construction 
25 hereinafter described, and illustrated in the 
drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view of the 
hive, taken through it from side to side, looking 
from the front toward the rear of the hive. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical Section on the line a a of 
Fig. 1, looking from the left-hand side of said 
figure toward the right thereof. Fig. 3 is a 
perspective view of the waste-drawer, and Fig. 
4 is a similar view of the sliding frame carry 
ing the brood-frames. 
The same letters indicate corresponding 
parts in the several views. 
A represents the brood-chamber of the hive, 
having an entrance, a, under which is an open 
1O ing, b, for the passage of moths, and between 
the two is the alighting-board B for the bee en 
trance to brood-chamber. 
C is a vertical sliding door working between 
two cleats, C, (one of which is not shown on 
the drawings,) which can serve to close the 
bee-entrance (t. 
D is a hinged door having two guide end 
pieces, d, and formed to open outwardly. Sup 
porting-blocks d' d' are respectively secured 
5O to the adjacent edges of the door D and its 
frame, the hinges d' being between the same, 
35 
m 
45 
 
E is a door. formed in the wall of the brood. 55 
so that in opening said door it will be horizon. 
tally supported by reason of the block drest 
ing upon the rigid block d". 
chamber, and the Wall also has a glass, e, be 
tween the door and said chamber, through 
which the interior can be inspected when de 
Sired. 
F is the moth chamber, provided with a 
swinging door, F, to permit the egress of the 
waste-drawer F, which serves to catch the dirt 
from the hive and attract the moths by the 
luminous condition of its interior, owing to the 
passage of light through the Screen f. 
To close the joints and prevent the hive from 
warping, cleats or strips at are secured around 
the top of the brood-chamber, and similar 
strips, a, are secured around the bottom of the 
upper or surplus chamber for the same purpose. 
An opening, g, normally closed by the pivoted 
door g, is cut in the wall of the upper or sur 
plus chamber, G, and is used to facilitate the 
injection of smoke when honey is to be removed. 
The upper or surplus chamber, G, is provided 
with a cap, G', which is removable, and the 
front of the chanber has a sliding shutter, g, 
that closes an opening, g, which is covered 
with glass, g, to permit inspection of the inte 
rior. The inside of the chamber G has cleats 
g" formed to support the ends of honey section 
frames H, underneath which is a wire screen, 
I, formed in the diaphragm separating the 
compartments G. A., the latter being also per 
forated to form an opening, I, (which affords 
the only communication to the bees between 
the chambers AG, thus rendering access con 
trollable by the operator,) covered by a sliding 
plate, I, working in a slot formed by the ad 
joining termini of the chambers GA, provided 
with a handle, I, projecting outwardly, and 
under said screen I are suspended a number of 
honey brood-frames, K, on a removable frame, 
K", that is formed to slide onto the transferring 
or hiving board after opening door D. A wire 
cloth frame, L, is secured between the adjoin 
ing termini, constituting a diaphragm or floor, 
W, of the chambers A F under the sliding 
frame K, and directly under said frame is ar 
ranged the waste-drawer F, provided with 
opening f, covered by a wire screen, f', to pre 
vent egress of moths and admit light. The 
75 
9O 
95 
IOO 
39.62 
 
5 waste. 
sides fare formed with perforations f, through around the rear of the sliding frame K' and 
Which moths pass from the opening b' into said enter the surplus honey-chamber G. 
Z is a knob for the brood-frame K'. 
drawer F, as shown in Fig. 2, being attracted 
by light and by the scent of the honey and bee- 
The honey section-frames Hare parts of the 
permanent hive and are intended to hold ordi 
The honey brood-frames K, suspended in nary honey-sections, (the contents whereof 
the removable frame K", are pivoted at one may be consumed or sold, or the sections 
end, l', to permit of their free ends opening out- themselves sold.) 
Wardly, in the manner of a book-leaf. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
IO The upper bars of the honey section-frames what I claim is 
H, suspended in the surplus chamber of the 
The bee-hive herein described, consisting, 
hive, are placed close to each other to prevent essentially, of three sections or compartments 
bees from passing over the frames. This cham- separated by wire screens IL, the lower com- 4c. 
ber holds about twenty-four pounds of honey. partment being provided with a door, F, a 
f5 The back of each frame is provided with tin moth - entrance, b, and a removable moth 
keepers or stays h, to prevent the frame from drawer having its end next to the door covered 
bulging by the honey when placed in the frames, by a screening, f', and its sides provided with 
I openings f", the central compartment having 45 
as shown in Figs. I and 2. 
a supporting-door, D, bee-passages F, and a 
2O Wrepresents the floor of the compartment A. sliding frame, K', carrying pivoted brood 
In testimony whereof. I affix my signature in 
V is a knob on the drawer E. 
X X" represent a hook and eye attached, re. frames, as set forth. 
3O 
35 
BENJAMIN FRANKLIN KENDALI, 
spectively, to the frame D and door F, where. 
by the latter may be kept closed. 
Y represents the ledges of the framewhereon 
25 the brood-frames K slide. There are provided 
notches in the lower rear bar of the sliding 
frame that serve to permit the bees to pass 
presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
S. E. RICHARDSON, 
E. GORINDEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391262.txt	(No Model.) 
W. N. MoMANUS. 
TOY RACE TRACK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 39.1262, 
Patented Oct. 16, 1888. 
757 
E. 
f 
A3 1. 
E. 
...I HIY/3 
it. 
namwww.rosa as 
a 
a 
v 
a 
is is a 
s 
f / I 
A 
s 
S 
. 
. 
. 
I 
IHUIAA 
s 
e 
I 
s 
m 
| 
| 
re- - 
l 
- 
N 
"-a- N. 
(6.4%le/ 
2-76 Sligsgress;NS: a 
22eate? - 
BY luor te 
aa 
s 
s 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. N. MoMANUS. 
TOY RACE TRACK 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 39.1262, 
Patented Oct. 16, 1888. 
 
 
 
  
as Z7 
  
 
22 a? 
92. E) 
e 
A 32 
| 
WITNESSES; 
Yt 
g 
6/664,. 
N PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
. 
2 
Z 
INVENTOR; 
By -luviv 
ATTORNEYS. 
/ - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM NICOLLS MCMANUS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TOY RACE TRACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 391,262, dated October 16, 1888. 
Application filed June 26, 1888. Serial No. 278,246. 
(No model.) 
55 
75 
25 with parts broken away. 
2O Corresponding parts in all the views. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM NICOLLS MC 
MANUS, of the city, county and State of New 
York, have invented a new and Improved 
5 Toy Race-Track, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to toy race-tracks, 
and has for its object the simulation of a real 
race, and by means of a toy so constructed that 
Io a number of miniature figures will be carried 
about a circular race-course and after a num 
ber of times round will be projected forward 
by an impulse to the finish-line. 
The invention consists in a toy for this pur 
I5 pose, constructed and arranged as hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the invention. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical section thereof. Fig. 3 is 
a horizontal Section on the linea ac, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical section on line y), Fig. 3, 
1 indicates a casing, of metal or other suit 
able material, having its top formed of a num 
ber of strips, 2, with intervening circular slots 
3, the strips 2 being supported by vertical 
3o rods 4, connected to the rods 5, extending 
across the top of the casing 1 and mounted on 
vertical rods 6 at the periphery thereof. The 
Space on the top of casing 1, through which 
the slots 3 extend, constitutes the race-track. 
35 Beneath the top of casing 1 is located a rotary 
circular frame or disk, 7, having a series of 
circular strips, S, and slots 9, corresponding 
to strips 2 and slots 3 above them. The disk 
7 is supported on a rotary shaft, 10, extending 
to through a cross-brace, 10, and the strips Sare 
mounted on Supporting-rods 11, Secured to 
shaft 10. Above the slots 3 are located mini 
ature figures 12, preferably in the form of 
horses in motion and jockeys mounted thereon, 
45 the horses being supported on vertical rods 13, 
extending through the slots 39, and mounted 
on rollers 14, resting on the disk 7. The 
lower ends of rods 13 are provided with 
weighted balls 15. It will thus be seen that 
So the figures 12 rest loosely on the rotary disk 
7, and are free to roll thereon independently 
of its movement. The upper ends of rods 11 
are formed with the branch portions 16, to 
give room for the passage of the balls 15 when 
the rods 13 are moved through slots 9. 
The shaft 10 is rotated by means of an or 
dinary clock-work mechanism, as shown at 
17, mounted in casing 1 and having a toothed 
wheel, 18, gearing with a crown-wheel, 19, on 
the shaft 10. The clock-work mechanism 17 
is wound up by means of a handle, 20, on the 
outside of casing 1, it only being intended to 
impart a few revolutions to the shaft 10 and 
disk 7. The starting and stopping of the clock 
work mechanism are governed by an oscillating 
rod, 21, mounted in supports 22 on base 23, 
and having a bent arm, 24, with branched end 
25 engaging the teeth of wheel 18. The rod 
21 has a horizontal arm, 26, with a depending 
arm, 27, pivoted at its lower end to rod 27, 
projecting from the rear of the tilting chute 
2S, having its mouth located over an opening, 
29, in a drawer, 30, in the bottom of casing 1. 
The chute 28 is counterweighted by means of 
a weight, 2S, on rod 27, so as to normally 
hold and return the chute from a tilted to a 
horizontal position. 
The side of casing 1 is provided with a ver 
tical slot, 31, opening into a chite, 32, mounted 
on the base 23 and opening into the upper end 
of tilting chute 28. The latter is of a suffi 
cient length and inclination to be held down 
long enough by a coin rolling over the same to 
hold the branched end 25 Of rod 21 out of en 
gagement with wheel LS until the shaft 10 and 
disk 7 have made a few revolutions. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
The mechanism 17 being wound up and held 
by bent arm 24 engaging wheel 18, and the 
figures 12 being arranged in position for start 
ing, a coin is inserted in slot 31 and rolls down 
chute 32, falling onto chute 2S. As the coin 
strikes chute 2S, it tilts it, holding it down as 
the coin rolls over it, and releases and holds 
out of engagement the arm 24 from wheel 1S. 
The mechanism 17 being released, the shaft 10 
and disk 7 are rotated a number of times, car 
rying the figures 12 about with disk 7 and giv 
ing the figures the appearance of racing on the 
top of the casing 1. Upon the coin reaching 
the end of chute 28 and dropping into drawer 
30, the chute 2S swings back by means of its 
counter-weight and throws the arm 24 into 
engagement with wheel 1S, thereby stopping 
90 
95 
IOO 
39,262 
O 
the mechanism 17, shaft 10, and disk 7. The 
tric slots, a rotary disk mounted on a vertical 
shock occasioned by this stop imparts the mo 
shaft beneath the top of the casing and having 
slots coinciding with the slots in the top of the 
mentum of disk 7 to the figures 12 and causes 
them to move forward on the disk 7, the fig 
casing, a number of miniature figures located 
ures 12 separating and the foremost figure ar 
above the top of the casing mounted on verti 
riving at the finish-line and winning the race. 
cal rods projecting through the slots in the top 
The finish-line may be indicated by a rod, 
of the casing and rotary disk, and having roll 
33, extending across the track and supported 
ers loosely resting on the disk and weights at 
by vertical rods 34. 
their ends beneath the disk, a clock - work 
The strips 2 and 8 and intervening slots 3 
mechanism for operating the rotary shaft and 
and 9, it will be seen, form guides for guiding 
disk, and a tilting chute connecting with a 
the fingers in their movements. 
slot in the side of the casing to receive a coin, 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
and having a tripping-lever mechanism con 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
necting with the clock-work mechanism, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
Patent 
1. A toy race-track provided with a rotary 
5. A toy race-track consisting of casing 1, 
frame, miniature figures mounted on rollers 
having its top provided with a series of concen 
loosely resting on the rotary frame and adapted 
tric slots, 3, a rotary disk, 7, mounted on a ver 
to move there with and thereon, a series of 
tical shaft, 10, having crown-wheel 19 beneath 
guides for guiding the figures over the track, 
the top of the casing, said disk having slots 9, 
and a mechanism for operating the rotary 
coinciding with slots 3, a number of miniature 
frame, substantially as shown and described. 
figures, 12, located above the top of the cas 
2. A toy race-track provided with a rotary 
ing, mounted on vertical rods 13, projecting 
frame, miniature figures mounted on rollers 
through the slots 3 and 9, and having rollers 
loosely resting on the rotary frame and adapted 
14, resting on disk 7, and weights 15 at their 
to move therewith and thereon, a series of 
ends beneath disk 7, a clock-work mechanism, 
guides for guiding the figures over the track, 
17, having toothed wheel 18, gearing with 
crown - wheel 19, a counterweighted tilting 
a clock-work mechanism for operating the ro 
tary frame, and a catch and tripping device 
chute, 28, connected by pivoted rod 27, arm 
for holding, starting, and stopping the mech 
26, and rotary rod 21, having bent arm 24, with 
anism, which device is operated by the weight 
wheel 18, and with inclined chute 32, commu 
nicating with chute 28, the casing being pro 
of a coin, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
vided with slot 31, substantially as shown and 
3. A toy race-track consisting of a casing 
described. 
having its top formed with a series of concen 
6. The herein-described device, in which is 
comprised a stationary frame formed of annu 
tric slots, a rotary. disk mounted on a vertical 
shaft located beneath the top of the casing and 
lar strips intervened by slots, a rotary frame 
having slots coinciding with the slots in the 
below the same, and miniature figures provided 
top of the casing, a number of miniature fig 
with rollers, the rollers riding on the lower 
ures located above the top of the casing and 
frame and the figures projecting above the up 
mounted on vertical rods projecting through 
per frame, substantially as described. 
the slots in the top of the casing and rotary 
7. The connbination of a rotary frame and 
disk, and having rollers loosely resting on the 
separated and independent miniature figures 
rotary disk, and weights at their ends beneath thereon spaced at varying distances from the 
the disk, and a mechanism for operating the 
center of the frame, substantially as described. 
shaft and rotary disk, substantially as shown 
and described. 
4. A toy race-track consisting of a casing 
having its top formed with a series of concen 
EDWARD W. CADY, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
WILLIAM NICOLLS MMANUS, 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 
40 
45 
56 
. 55 
9O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391362.txt	(No Model.). 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
T. FAWARGER 
GUARD CORDON FOR THE PROTECTION OF SHIPS, 
No. 39 362 
Patented Oct. 16, 1888. 
 
 
 
  
E. E. 
 
azez- r 
Zeave 7-22 r. 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
T. FAWARGER. 
GUARD CORD ON FOR THE PROTECTION OF SHIPS, 
No. 391,362. 
 
Patented Oct. 6, 1888, 
Zeae. ca. 
2-2.7 
/ease Yezz7. 
% 2-3% ea 
22% 
(No Model.) 
m 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
W 
T. FAWAR, GER 
GUARD CORDON FOR THE PROTECTION OF SEIIPS, 
No. 391,362, 
54-ydf 
Patented 00t, l6, l888, 
-- 
-n 
B 
- 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODOIR FAWARGER, OF PARIS, FIR 
ANCE, ASSIGNOR TO THE HOTCHKISS 
ORDNANCE COMPANY, ( , IITED,) OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
GUARD CORD ON FOR THE PROTECTION OF SHiPS. 
Aplication filed May 27, 1887, Scrial No. 239,522. (No model. 
SPECIFIATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 391,362, dated October 16, 1888. 
March 1, INS, No. 1 S1,881; in Germany March 13, 1887, No. ) Patented in England February 25, 18s, No, 3,058; in France 
41,410; in Sweden March 26, 1887, No. 105?i; in Portugal April 
27, 1 SS7, No. 1,13s; in Italy May 7, 1887, XLII, 325; in Spain May 7, 1887, No. 6,819; in fudia June 14, 1887, No, 774; in Austria 
lungary October 26, 1887, No. 2, 19s all No. 3, and in Now 
ay October 26, 1887, No. 550. 
2C ment, thereof-that is to say: 
To all aution, it way concer: 
Be it known that I, TFIEODOR if AVARGER, 
engineer, of 21 Rue Royale, Paris, France, have 
invented certain new and useful Improvements 
5 in Guard-Cordons for the Protection of Ships 
and Harbors, which have been patented in the 
following countries, namely: France, March,i, 
1SS7, No. 1S1,881; England, February 28, 1887, 
No. 3,05S; Germany, Alarch 13, 18S7, No. 
Io 41,410; Austria-Hungary, October 26, 1887, No. 
2, 198/37; Italy, May 7, 1887, No. 325, Vol. 42; 
Spain, May 7, SS7, No. 6,819; Sweden, March 
25, 1887, No. 1,056; Norway, October 26, 1SS7, 
No. 556; Portugal, April 27, 1887, No. 1,138; 
15 India, June 14, 1SS7, No. 774; and I, the said 
iHEODOJ FAWARGER, do harely declare the 
lature of the said invention and in what man 
her the Salae is to be performed to be particu 
larly described in and by the following state 
The object of this invention is the protec 
tion of vessels of war, of anchorages, and open 
roadsteads from the attacks of torpedo-boats, 
war-ships, and other floating means of offense 
25 by giving notice of their approach and of their 
position at night, as well as in foggy weather. 
For this purpose establish a cordon made up 
of convenient lengths of a light strong rope 
oi' wire, to which are attached floats for the 
3o purpose of buoying the entire length of the 
same either at or below the surface of the wa 
te]', and in such a mauner that the said lengths 
may be properly laid out in position for use, as 
well as also wound promptly upon a reel for 
3.5 storage when hot in use. The ends of these 
lengths of role or wire arc, fitted witi clamps 
or shackles, whereby they may be ?uickly and 
Securely fastened, eithel' to other lengths or 
to buoys or anchorages. At the junction of 
4o these lengths of ropes small buoys are attached 
by shackling or otherwise, and these buoys are 
anchored in position by suitable cables and 
anchors, by means of which the desired or 
requisite circuit of the cordon is saintained. 
45 These buoys are unade of a suitable metal, and 
tincy aire divided internally into comparitinents 
or chambers arranged to serve the following 
5 5 
purposes: first, to regulate and maintain their 
buoyancy; second, to contain inflammable ma 
terials intended to light the buoy itself when 
any part of the cordon is contracted by float 
ing engines of attack; and, third, to contain 
detachable flasks or floats, which are with - 
drawn therefronn under circumstances similar 
to those above mentioned without disturbing 
the anchored position of the buoy itself, and 
which flasks contain inflammable material, 
which ignites on their disconnection from the 
buoy, and for this purpose the ends of the 
lengths forming the cordon are attached by 
means of links or bridles to the said flasks in 
such a manner that, when by the effect of the 
pressure exerted on the ce'dot) by the attack 
ing body the elds become released from the 
buoys, they still maintain their connection 
with the flasks, which are thereby withdrawn 
entirely from the buoys and towed by the at 
tacking body. Each flask contains a firing ap 
paratus, which, on its withdrawal, ignites the 
inflammable material contained in the buoys, 
and thus marks the position of the attacking 
body as the flaming flasks are being towed 
along by the ttacking vessel, and in order to 
insure the buoyancy of these flasks when de 
tached from their respective buoys they are 
provided with a bag of suitable material, which 
is extended and inflated by the gases gener 
ated by the inflammable material during its 
combustion,aud they are thus prevented from 
! being drawn under water. 
ln order that my said invention be clearly 
understood, I will describe the same in detail 
conjointly with the sixteen figures of the ac 
companying drawings, of which-- 
Figure l is an illustrative view of a guard 
cordon surrounding a vessel which it is in 
tended to protect; Fig. 2, an elevation of a 
part of the cordon with its floats attached; 
Fig. 3, a front and a side elevation of a float 
detached; Fig. 4, an elevation of one end of 9o 
cordon-wire with its shackle; Fig. 5, a plan 
of the saune; Fig. 6, a buoy in elevation; Fig. 
7. an anchor with its calle attachinent; Fig. 
S, a sectional elevation of the buoy on a larger 
. 
. 
. 
" 
39,362 
. . 
2 
scale; Fig. 9, a section of same through WW, 
Fig. 8; Fig. 10, a front view of a hammer. 
spring; Fig. 11, a section of the said spring 
with the hammer attached thereto; Fig.12, a 
5 plan, partially in section, of the connection 
between the cordons and the buoy; Fig. 13, a 
plan of one of the detachable flasks; Fig. 14, 
a section of the same through XX, Fig. 8; 
Fig.15, a section, d9 d, through YY de; and 
Io, Fig. 16, a partial front elevation of one of the 
said, flasks with its link. 
In the drawings, a is the cordon-guard, 
which is made up of light galvanized steel 
Wire rope in lengths, say, of one hundred and 
I5 fifty yards each. At distances of about two 
inches this wire" rope is provided with short 
single wires b, worked in the strands or other. 
wise attached thereto, and by means of which 
small cuniform fligats of cork, c, are secured 
2O to the cordon. These floats are coated with a 
preservative paint. A single galvanized-iron 
wire, d, is carried along one side or on the top 
of these floats c and caught up or attached to 
each securing-wire b. By this 'arrangement 
25 the cordon is floated just below the surface of 
the Water, and the floats are kept in line and 
: position, and when not in use the cordon may 
be readily wound upon a reel or coiled. Each 
end of each length of wire forming the cordon 
3o has a thimble, e, spliced in it, to which is con 
nected a small galvanized-steel clip or shackle, 
' , 
f, and which serve for their attachment either 
to a buoy or to other lengths of cordon-wire. 
. 
. . g are the stiall buoys which are secured be 
35 tween the consecutive ends of the cordon-wire 
a, and maintained in place by the shackled 
ends of the said wires, as well as by cast-iron 
anchorish of the clump or mushroom pattern, 
to which they are attached by a light rope or 
wire, i, one end of which being spliced to the 
anchor-ring and the other knotted at the length 
dersired to a strap, k, fastened to a staple at 
the bottom of the buoy, as shown in Figs. 6 
and 7. 
The entire circuit of the cordon a is made 
up of the above-mentioned lengths of wire, 
with buoys g inserted at the junctions of the 
said lengths and duly anchored, as shown in 
illustration Fig.1, with a vessel to be protected 
So occupying the center of a circle thus composed, 
... measuring about one thousandyards in diam 
eter and containing a series of buoys placed at 
about one hundred and fifty yards apart. 
These figures are merely given by way of illus 
55 tration, for in reality the only practical limit 
for the diameter of such a circle will be such 
a radius at which the light emitted by such a 
buoy would be readily visible at night from 
aboard such protected ship. 
plates 
and conical in shape. It is divided internally 
into two superposed chambers-viz., a lower 
one, A, containing flasks E, charged with an 
inflammable material for lighting the buoy, 
55 and an upper one, B, filled with cork for the 
purpose of maintaining its buoyancy, and in 
which are likewise formed metallie cavities or 
6o The buoyg is made of Muntz metal 
45. 
. . 
. . 
; 
75 
chambers C, for receiving detachable flasks is, 
filled with inflammable materials. This lower 
chamber, A, contains two earthenware flasks, 
EE, shaped to its internal conical contour and 
provided above with projecting necks that are 
hermetically sealed. Grooves are cut or formed 
round the bases of these necks to form planes 
of weakness, and these flasks are charged with 
calcium phosphate. A stout stirrup, d, is 
riveted to the point or lower end of the buoy 
for the purpose of attaching thereto the moor 
ing-lines ki. From the ends of this stirrup 
there project upward two nickel-plated flat 
steel springs, ll, provided with hanumer-heads 
on their outer ends, and opposite to these han 
nuer-heads hples are made in the wall of the 
buoy, which holes are covered with disks of 
thin lead, e, soldered water-tight. A swell of 85 
projection, e", is formed at about the middle of 
the neck of each earthenware flask E, and it 
rests against the inner face of the said leaden 
disk. If necessary to insure the presence of 
water in the lower chamber, A, small holes 90. 
may be made through the walls of said cham 
ber, and covers with flexible hinges may be at 
tached internally opposite to said holes. 
The extremity of eachhammer-headed spring 
is held or guided laterally in jaws it, which 95 
are bolted outside the buoy and serve as a guide 
for the blow of the hammer when propelled by 
the spring. A small ring, e, is held between 
the link i' and the spring lin such a manner 
that as long as it is in place the head of the 
hammer cannot touch the lead diske, and the 
strength of the spring lis such that a pull of . 
say, one hundred pounds, is necessary to draw. 
the ring away from the jaws and off the end of 
the spring l, whereby the hammer, impelled Io5 
by the spring, strikes the plate e and breaks 
the neck of the flask E. To guard against the 
accidental release of the spring land its han 
mer during the laying and handling of the cor 
don-guard, a stick of sal-ammoniac or other 
material readily soluble in water, 2, is inserted 
in and across the jaws it opposite to a small 
head raised on the ringe, (see Figs. 12 and 8,) 
which will prevent such accidental release of 
the spring until such time as the entire cordon 
is connected and laid, while very shortly after 
ward the sal-ammoniac is melted out by the 
water and the apparatus is in a position to full 
fill the intended requirements. 
on any part of the floating cordon-guard, the 
hammer-head, in connection with such length 
of the cordon, is drawn back until the ring e 
slips away from the jaws land off the spring 
t, the hammer of which is thus liberated and 125 
projected forward by the spring l, and, strik 
ing the lead diske, breaks the neck of the 
flask Einside the buoy, whereby the sea-water. 
coming in contact with the calciumiphosphate pro-3C 
ignites the same, and the flaming gases 
duce ind an exit through the vertical tube v, 
fixed in the center of the buoy. . 
. . .'s 
per end of theirie or link it is 
jointed to the metal flask D, which is housed 
When the proper strain has been brought 120 
The up 
I I5 
to 
Ico 
. 
. . 4O 
. 
. 
 
39 362 
5 withdrawal of tile lask from its chanaber. 
in the chamber C of the buoy, which latter is 
roughly cylindrical and traverses the buoy 
horizontally, This flask is filled with calcium 
phosphate, and its face is closed and heracti 
5 cally sealed by a glass plate, 7, just inside of 
which is hung a firing-hammer, m, on an axis, 
l, which is set at tension by a spiral spring, 
(), passed over one end of the said axis. This 
end likewise carries a small lever, p, which 
to projects upward outside the flask and serves 
for cocking the hammer, and which, when set, 
is inserted with the flaskin a groove, f/*, made 
in the wall if the chaniser C, and maintains 
the hammer cocked ready for action on the 
A rubber bag, s, is secured her metically 
over the iLiner end of the flask D, and is closed 
at its outer end by a metal plate, t, pierced 
With a snail cent'a hole, t, and a small hol 
2O iOW keel, t, is fixed to the lander side of the 
flask. 
When the strain or the cordon a, produced 
ily the attacking vessel, has disconnected the 
iiig 8" from the spring l, is before explained, 
25 the link i' will regain connected to the de 
tached end of the cordon and will extract the 
flask ) from its chamber C, the lever p is 
thereby illerated, and consequently the ham 
nier in is propelled by the spring 0 and strikes 
vo and breaks the glass-plate l", alld the calcium 
phosphate contained in the flask is ignited by 
the irruption of the sea-water, whereby gases 
are produced which inflate the bags and issue 
in the shape of a flatae through the boie 
35 pierce in the back plate, t. The detached 
portion of the cordon will naturally be bent 
around and cling to the attacking vessel, so as 
to be towed along by it, and as this is done 
the inflated bag keeps the flask D from being 
4O (raw in laucier water and the flame escapilg 
freely there from narks constantly the posi 
tion of the attacking vessel. 
living low particularly described and as 
45 
So 
75 
w 
certained the nature of this said invention and 
in what manner the same is performed, I de 
clare that what I claim is- 
i. The combination, with the floating cordon, 
of buoys detachably connected thereto and 
carrying contained in frangible flasks inflam 
mable material which ignites by contact with 
sea water, and connections, substantially such 
as described, for rupturing said flasks, so as to 
admit water thereto by pressure against the 
cordon, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the cordon, of the 
moored buoys connected thereto and provided 
at their upper ends with buoyant material, at 
their lower ends with material which ignities 
by contact with sea - water, and with the 
vertical passage v, by which the flame pro 
duced by the burning of said material issues 
from the top of the huoy, substantially as de 
3. The combination, with the cordon, of the 
buoys detachably connected thereto, the re 
movable expansible flasks P, carried by said 
buoys and independently connected to said 
cordon and containing material which ignites 
by contact with sea-water, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination, with the cordon and 
the buoys containing material which ignites 
by contact with sea-water, of the springs l, 
forming a yielding detachable connection be 
tween said buoys and the cordon, and the in 
terposed sticks 2, of soluble material, for mak 
ing said connection temporarily rigid, sub 
stantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
THEODOR FAWARGER. 
scribed. 
- 
Witnesses: 
EDMOND KIELLY, 
36 fee. de l'Opera, IParis. 
RO. T. M. FOOPER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391462.txt	(No Model.) 
W. F. DRAPER 
SUPPORT FOR SPINNING SPINDLES. 
No. 391462, 
Patented Oct. 23, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
With E = E E S : 
2. 
 
| In V B in t Or 
Zealaea/e/2?Z- 
27.6-, -2%. 
27, 
a 25. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. F. DRAPER, OF HOPEDALE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SUPPOR FOR SPN N N G, S N DES. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 391,462, dated October 23, 1888. 
Application filed March 9, 1888, Serial No. 266,730. (No model, 
To all LUfton, it lay concern: 
a tube-like portion, ct, in which the spindle 
below the wheel has a running fit, and a por 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. F. DRAPER, 
of Hopedale, county of Worcester, State of 
tion, as b, having a series of rolling-surfaces, 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improvement 
the said rolling-Surfaces being herein shown 
in Supports for Spinning-Spindles, of which the 
as short cylinders held by a spider, asc, (shown 
following description, in connection with the 
separately in Fig. 6,) the said rolls and spider 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, like 
being common to my application, Serial No. 
letters on the drawings representing like parts. 
26,035. 
This invention has for its object to improve 
In Fig. 1, the sleeve-like bolster portion has 
the bearings of that class of spindle having a 
a collar or flange, C., at top to rest upon the 
sleeve-whirl and wherein all the bearings are 
bolster case or support near its upper end, the 
located below the junction of the whirl and 
Said portion being therein shown as surrounded 
Spindle. 
by an elastic or yielding packing or jacket, d. 
in another application made by me, Serial 
The head or flange of the portion a has a notch, 
(see Fig. 7,) which is entered by a lug or pro 
No. 261,035, I have shown a bolster-case pro 
vided with a bolster having rolling-surfaces, 
jection at the upper end of the bolster case or 
and in an application, Serial No. 266,729, I support to thus prevent the rotation of the 
portion (t. The outside of the spindle bears 
have shown Such a bolster mounted in a bol 
against the rolling-surfaces, and the latter fit 
Ster-tube loose in the bolster-case. Herein I 
have shown a bolster-case provided with one 
the Space between the Spindle and the inner 
loose bearing and with one bearing having 
Wall of the bolster case or support, 
rolling-Surfaces, both inclosed in a bolster case 
in Fig. 4, I have shown the portion of the 
Or Support. 
bearing having rolling - Surfaces as located 
My invention consists, essentially, in a bol 
near the upper end of the bolster-case rather 
ster case or holder and a sleeve-whirl spindle, 
than near its lower end, as in Fig. 1, the bear 
ing portion (, bored to receive and fit the spin 
combined with a divided or compound bolster, 
One part of which is mounted loosely in the 
dile, being restrained from rotation by a pin 
or projection, e, the said portion (, in Fig. 4 
bolster case or holder, while the other part 
contains a series of rolling-surfaces, such con 
being shown as bored for but part of its length, 
struction enabling the spindle to be supported 
So as to form a step-bearing. 
in Such manner as to vibrate below its connec 
In this invention the rolls located between 
the spindle and the rigid case or support out 
tion with the whirl, to thus accommodate for 
uneven loading and avoid jarring or chatter 
side of it, and also within the sleeve-whirl, and 
Substantially in the line of the band-pull, lessen 
ing, the rolling-Surfaces reducing the friction 
between the parts, thus enabling the spindle 
friction between the spindle and its surround 
ing bearing, while the loose or yielding por 
to attain high speed with the expenditure of 
but little power. 
tion, as (, moves to accommodate for the wi 
Figure 1 in vertical section shows a spindle 
bration of the spindle under an unbalanced 
embodying myinvention, the spindle being in 
load. 
Instead of the fibrous packing, cork or me 
elevation with the whirl in section. Fig. 2 is 
tallic springs, or any usual means for enabling 
a section below the linea, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
the bearing to move against an elastic pressure, 
section in the line 1, Fig. 1, looking down. 
may be used without departing from my in 
Fig. 4 shows a modified form of my invention 
vention, and would be within the scope of the 
with the spindle broken off above the whirl; 
term elastic packing. 
Fig. 5, a section below the line ac'; and Fig. 6 
shows the spider by itself. 
The rail A, the bolster case or support B, 
the nut C, and the spindle D, having the sleeve 
whirl D', are and may be all as usual. 
The bolster case or support receives within 
it a divided or compound bolster composed of 
I claim 
l. The bolster case or support and the 
sleeve-whirl spindle, combined with a double 
or compound bearing, consisting of a sleeve 
like portion, Cl, fitting the spindle, and a por 
tion, b, having rolling-surfaces, both the said 
55 
65 
75 
So 
90 
IOC 
IO 
2 5 
35 
45 
 
391,462 
bearing portions being located within the said 
bolster case or support, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. The bolster case or support and the 
sleeve-whirl spindle, combined with a double 
or compound bearing, consisting of a sleeve 
like portion, a, fitting the spindle and loose in 
the Said case or support, means to prevent it 
from rotation with the spindle, and a portion, 
b, having rolling-Surfaces, both the said bear 
ing portions being located within the said bol 
ster case or support, substantially as described. 
3. The bolster case or support and the 
sleeve-whirl spindle, combined with a double 
O 
or compound bearing, consisting of a sleeve- i. 5 
like portion, a, fitting the spindle and loose 
in the said case or Support, and the surround 
ing elastic or yielding packing, and a portion, 
b, having rolling-surfaces, both the said bear 
ing portions being located within the said bol- 20 
ster case or Support, Substantially as described. 
Intestimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
WM. F. DRAPER. 
Witnesses: 
E. D. BANCROFT, 
H. F. SEARLES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391562.txt	(No Model.) 
A. L. SEIBERT, 
COMBINED SCARF TIP AND FASTENER, 
No. 391,562, 
Patented Oct. 23, 1888. 
Witnesses: 
6%.64-e/1 
- 
INVENTOR: 
By 
2S 
ATTORIEYS. 
N. Pereas. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT 
ANNAL SEIBERT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
coMBINED scARF Tip AND FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 391,562, dated October 23, 1888. 
Application filed July 16, 18ss. Serial No. 280,069. (No model.) 
length of said band may be varied by adjust 
ing the position of the fastener on said band. 
To engage the fastener to a scarf-shield or to 
the plait of a shirt, the part to be engaged is 
placed between the tongue E and body of the 
fastener. The slide F is then moved upward 
from the position shown in Fig. 3 to that shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2. This action causes the teeth 
ee on the tongue to close into the fabric and 
firmly engage the neckband of the Scarf with 
the shield or with the plait of a shirt, as the 
case may be. A loop may be taken in the neck 
band, and said loop and the shield clamped 
and secured by the fastener, as shown in Fig. 
1. By this means the slack of the neckband . 
may be taken up without shifting the position 
of the fastener on said band. 
By substituting my fastener for the ordinary 
cloth tip I am enabled to save a quantity of 
cloth. It will also be observed that by the use 
of my device the ordinary pin for engaging the 
neckband to the shield may be dispensed with. 
In fastening the tip to the bosom of a shirt 
it will prevent the scarf from sliding above the 
collar, and at the same time obviate the ne 
cessity of a scarf-retainer. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A combined scarf pin and fastener, consist 
ing of a body provided with a toothed tongue 
and a slide, and also provided with an open 
ing for the reception of a scarf-band, and a 
spur for engaging said band, substantially as 
described. 
2. A combined scarf tip and fastener, consist 
ing of a body provided with a toothed tongue 
and means for retaining the tongue in a closed 
position, said body being also provided with 
openings for the reception of a scarf-band, and 
a spur for engaging said band, substantially as 
shown and described. 
- 
ANNA. L. SEIBERT, 
55. 
65 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
FRANK A. FOUTS, 
EDGAR TATE, 
O 
25 
35 
To att, whom it mal/ concern: 
Be it known that I, ANNAL. SEIBERT, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and Improved Scarf Tip and 
Fastener, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide the 
neckband of a scarf with a combined tip and 
fastener; and it consists in the parts which 
will be hereinafter described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a rear view of a scarf 
provided with my improvement, the fastener 
being engaged to the rear under side of the 
shield. Fig. 2 is a view of the device engaged 
to a shirt-front, and Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of the fastener detached from the scarf. 
A represents the shield of a scarf, B the 
apron, and C the neckband thereof. 
The tip and fastener consists of a body, D, 
provided with a spring-tongue, E, formed in 
tegral therewith. Said body is also provided 
with an opening, a, in one end, and a cross 
piece, b, formed integral with the body, hav 
ing a spur, b. The outer end of the tongue 
aforesaid is provided with teeth e e. 
F represents a locking slide or band engaged 
around the body of the fastener. The lower 
side of the body, at D', is provided with a 
ridge to prevent the slide from slipping off. 
This ridge is formed by a depression in the 
opposite side of the material. 
The fastener is preferably formed of thin re 
silient metal and struck up from a single piece. 
The operation is as follows: The end of the 
neckband is drawn into the opening ct, and 
thence drawn under, so as to engage the spur 
b', thereby firmly uniting the fastener and 
neckband. The position of the fastener on the 
band may be varied at pleasure to suit the 
convenience of the wearer. Assuming that 
the fastener is the tip of the neckband, the 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391663.txt	(No Model.) 
J. P. THOMPSON, 
RAILWAY HEAD FOR COTTON CARDS, &c., 
No. 391,663. 
Patented 00t. 23, 1888, 
WITNESSES, 
2 (TOE 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN P. THOMPSON, OF OLNEYVILLE, RHODE ISLAND. 
RAILWAY-HEAD FOR COTTON-CARDS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 391,663, dated October 23, 1888, 
Application filed April 16, 1888. Serial No. 270.801. (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
o 
45 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN P. THOMPsoN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Olneyville, in the county of Providence and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Railway 
Heads for Cotton-Cards, &c.; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, and in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved railway-headin its operative position, 
and Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view of the 
S80, 
My invention relates to railway-heads for 
cotton-cards in which a rest or guide is placed 
in front of the trumpet, and has for its object to 
prevent the sliver from passing into the trum 
pet unevenly or in a zigzag manner; and it con 
sists in placing a rest, guide, or form upon a 
vibrating trumpetin front of the mouth of the 
same, so as to move therewith, as will be here 
inafter more particularly described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, in 
which the same letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in each of the figures, A 
indicates an ordinary railway-head, having 
the drawing-rolls B and compacting-rolls C. C. 
Directly in front of the compacting-rolls CC 
is secured, in the usual manner, the friction 
trumpet D, through which the sliver passes on 
its way from the drawing-rolls to the compact 
ing-rolls. 
In practice it has been found that as the 
sliverpasses from the drawing-rolls to the com 
pacting-rolls-or to the trumpet, rather-ow 
ing to the motion of the machine, it has a tend 
ency to flop up and down, and as it enters the 
trumpet the outer edge of the sliver is more or 
less crossed or placed in a zigzag or uneven po 
sition in relation to the middle portion of the 
sliver. In this manner the fibers of the sliver 
are passed between the compacting-rollers in a 
crossed and uneven condition, which of course 
renders the following operation more difficult, 
as the main object is to place the fibers par 
allel to each other, and if they are crossed 
over or under one another in one step of the pro 
cess they must be straightened out in the suc 
ceeding steps. When it is considered that the 
sliver must be changed from a flat Web about 
six or seven inches wide as it leaves the de 
livery or front rolls to a roll about half an 
inchin diameter as it passes through the trum 
pet, it will be seen that the flopping up and 
down of the sliver will cause the selvages or 
outer edges of the sliver to waver considerably 
and pucker or cross the other portions. To 
overcome this objection, I have found that by 
placing a form, E, in front of the mouth of the 
trumpet the sliver can be caused to pass 
around or upon it in such a manner that it is 
impossible for the outer edges to become 
crossed over or under the middle portion, but 
that they will pass into the trumpet as par 
allel to each other as when they leave the 
drawing-rolls. I prefer to make this form in 
the shape of a flatball or guide; but it may be 
of any other desired shape or form. This form 
or guide is supported upon an arm, F, upon the 
trumpet-support by means of a neck or Sup 
port, G. The neck is pivoted to the arm F, 
so that the form can be turned down out of 
the path of the sliver for the purpose of put 
ting the end of the sliver into the trumpet in 
first starting the head, or for piecing the sliver 
in case it should break. The arm F of the 
trumpet is provided with a stop or projection, 
H, against which the neck of the form bears 
when in its raised or operative position, which 
will prevent the form from being drawn into 
or too near the mouth of the trumpet, but will 
permit it to be turned down out of the way, 
the passage of the sliver around the form caus 
ing it to be drawn as near the trumpet all the 
time as the shoulder or stop upon the arm F 
will permit. In this manner the form will be 
at the same distance from the trumpet, al 
though the trumpet be pivotally secured to 
the frame to permit of its being slightly swung 
back and forth to compensate for any uneven 
ness in the sliver as it passes from the draw 
ing-rolls, and, if desired, ie form may be ad 
justed in relation to the trumpet by means of 
an ordinary set-screw, as shown in dotted lines 
in Fig. 2, to bear against the stop upon the 
arm F, or in any other suitable manner. In 
95 - 
IOO 
391663 
this manner the sliver is spread around and lens the distance from the rolls to the support 
and from the support to the trumpet, and 
Over this form in as thin and even a sheet as 
prevents such a great movement of the sliver. 
it is when it leaves the drawing-rolls, and 
This prevents the wear upon the leather cover 
any motion that is imparted to it by the mo 
ing of the rolls of the drawing-frame in the 
tion or running of the different rolls is stopped 
next process, as lighter weights can be placed 
by contact with the form before the sliver 
upon the top rolls and still have the required 
passes into the trumpet, and the sliver is thus 
tension between them to produce good results. 
caused to pass into the trumpet in the form of 
By my arrangement the rolls will last at least 
a hollow tube, which, on coming in contact 
twenty-five per cent. longer, and produce a 
with the small hole in the end of the trumpet, 
is compressed or compacted evenly from its 
smoother and more even sliver. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
entire circumference, instead of having the 
outer edges crowded in upon the middle por 
claim 
l. The combination, with a vibrating trum 
tion, as is done without the form. With the 
pet of a railway-head, of an arm secured to 
ordinary vibrating trumpet the evener-belt is 
the trumpet-support, a form the neck of which 
liable to be shifted upon the cone-pulleys by 
is pivotally secured to the arm, and a set 
the crossing of the edges of the sliver with 
screw for regulating the distance between the 
each other and with the central portion as it 
passes through the trumpet, thereby changing 
form and the trumpet, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
the draft between the rolls and making the 
2. The combination, with a vibrating trum 
sliver finer or coarser, when in fact there is 
no change in the weight of the cotton passing 
pet of a railway-head, of an arm Secured to 
the trumpet-support, the outer end of which 
through the head, and the belt should not have 
is provided with a shoulder, and a form the 
been shifted; but with the form in position 
neck of which is pivotally secured to the outer 
the only thing that will cause the evener-belt 
end of the arm and bears against the shoulder, 
to be shifted is when the sliver is delivered 
substantially as set forth. 
from the drawing-rolls unevenly, and it is 
necessary to change the draft to compensate 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
own I have hereunto affixed my signature in 
for this unevenness or inequality of weight in 
presence of two witnesses. 
the cotton of the sliver. Another advantage 
possessed by my improvement is that it pre 
vents, to a certain extent, the flopping up and 
down of the sliver as it passes from the draw 
ing-rolls to the trumpet by interposing a sup 
port between the two, which of course short 
SAMUEL E. GARDINER, 
WILLIAM. A. PHILLIPS. 
JOHN P. THOMPSON. 
Witnesses: 
45 
55 
S 
IO 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391763.txt	(No Model.) 
H. SHERMAN. 
KEEPER FOR THE LOOSE ENDS OF STRAPs, 
No. 391,763, 
Patented 00t. 23, 1888. 
YZZZ-Z. 
SSS SS 
S 
S. s 
S S 
 
 
WITWESSES, 
(72-24.6/s/\ 
TWVEWTOR 
, Zzzy Serzazz 
2/ 
N. Perers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY SHERMAN, OF LUCTOR, KANSAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE HALF TOJACOB 
POPPEN AND ALBERT WAN DIEST, OF SAME PLACE. 
KEEPER FOR THE Loos E ENDS OF STRAPs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 391,763, dated October 23, 1888. 
Application filed June 15, 1888. Serial No. 277,173. (No model.) 
Beit known that I, HENRY SHERMAN, a citi- keeper to the strap. 
passed rivets or their equivalents to affix the 
To all whom it may concern: 
Fig. 3 shows a modified form in which the 
Zen of the United States, residing at Luctor, 
in the county of Phillips and State of Kansas, inward-extending fingers do not meet and are 
have invented a new and useful Improvement allowed to remain free this being in some 
in Keepers for the Loose. Ends of Straps, of cases preferable. The apertured ears may be 
which the following is a specification. 
omitted and an aperture in lieu thereof may 
My invention relates to keepers for the loose be formed in the base-plate to receive the se 
ends of straps, as the tug strap, the stirrup. curing-rivet or equivalent device. 
Straps, and other similar parts of harness, 
This invention is simple and will hold the 
having for its object to provide a simple, cheap, end of the strap securely in place without 
and easily-applied device which will securely cha?ing or cutting it, and it is easily applied to 
hold the strap in place; and it consists in a the strap. 
certain novel construction and arrangements, 
Having thus described my invention, I 
fully set forth hereinafter in connection with claim 
the accompanying drawings, wherein- 
The herein described keeper for the loose 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a keeper ends of straps, consisting of a metal base-plate, 
embodying my invention applied in the oper- B, having the integral perforated ears E. E. 
ative position to a strap. Fig. 2 is a similar above and below, and the integral rectangular 
view thereof detached from the strap. Fig. loop at right angles to said ears, which loop 
3 is a view of a slightly-modified form. 
is composed of a portion of the hase-plate, the 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the sides C, and the inwardly-standing triangular 
improved keeper, which is struck from a sin- fingers D, secured together at their ends by 
gle sheet of metal, and consists of the base- rivets or otherwise, substantially as specified. 
plate B and the rectangular loop C, arranged 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my 
| 
thereon. This loop comprises the sides oc, own I have hereto affixed my signature in pres 
perpendicular ("E. base-plate, and the in- ence of two witnesses. 
ward-extending fingers D D, which meet at 
their inner ends and are secured together by 
solder, rivets, or other suitable means. The 
base-plate is provided with ears EE, having 
apertures ee therein, through which may be 
A. W. TRACY, 
JOHN E. CUMINGS. 
Witnesses: 
r 
HENRY SHERMAN. 
45 
S5 
5 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391863.txt	(No Model.) 
B. F. RIX. 
ROAD CART, 
No. 391,863, 
Patented 00t, 30, 1888, 
witnesses. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN F. RIX, OF KALAMAZOO, MICHIGAN. 
ROAD, CART. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 391,863, dated October 30, 1888. 
Application filed June 3, 1887. Serial No. 240,182. No model.) 
It will readily be seen that in this construc- 5o 
cured to each shaft, as shown. To the inner 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN F. RIX, of coil of these springs is rigidly secured a lat 
erally-projecting arm, I. To the inner ends of 
these arms are likewise rigidly secured the 45 
rearwardly-projecting lever-arms J, the free 
ends of which are connected by means of the 
irons K to or near the outer ends of the spring 
bar G. 
tion and arrangement of parts the weight of 
the driver seated upon the seat is supported 
by the spring-bar and its connections with the 
shafts directly in front of the axle, and that the 
seat is free to move in a vertical play inde 
pendent from the motion of the shafts caused 
by the movement of the animal when in mo 
tion; that the parts are not in the way in mount 
ing or dismounting, and that the vehicle is 
devoid of the so-called horse motion. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a two-wheeled vehicle, the combina 
tion, with the shafts and the spring-bar G, of 
the seat-supports E, pivotally connected at one 
end to said shafts and between their ends to 65 
the spring-bar, the helical springs H, Secured 
to the shafts, the lever-arms I, and irons IK, 
connecting said helical springs with the outer 
ends of said spring-bar, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a two-wheeled vehicle, the combina 
tion of the shafts C, seat-supports E, irons F 
F, spring-bar G, helical springs H, and con 
nections I, J, and K, between said springs H 
and the spring-bar G, the parts being con- 75 
structed, arranged, and operating substantially 
in the manner and for the purposes specified. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Kalamazoo, in the county of Kalamazoo and 
State of Michigan, have invented new and use 
5 ful Improvements in Road Carts; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in road-carts; and the 
invention consists in the peculiar construction 
and arrangement of parts constituting the seat 
support and in the general combination of 
parts, all as more fully hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
cart with one of the wheels removed. Fig. 2 is 
a sectional rear view with parts broken away 
to show the arrangement of the seat-support. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, A represents the 
axle, B the wheels, C the thills or shafts, and 
D the cross-bar, of a road-cart, all of the ordi 
nary construction and arrangement now in 
general use, and which in themselves form no 
part of my present invention. 
Erepresents angle-iron Seat-supports, which 
are bent in substantially the form shown, their 
forward ends being pivotally secured to the 
under side of the shafts C, as at a, while their 
rear ends are bent nearly horizontally to the 
rear and have secured to them the seat. 
The seat-supporting irons E are provided 
with suitable bracket-irons, F, which are rig 
idly secured to the spring-bar G; and F are 
other irons, which connect the top of the spring 
bar with the irons E, the two holding the said 
spring-bar in its proper relative position and 
prevent it from tipping, and thus bring a tor 
H are helical springs, one being rigidly se 
Witnesses: 
H. S. SPRAGUE, 
A. BARTHEL. 
O 
3O 
35 
4osional strain upon the securing-bolts. 
B. F. RIX. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US391963.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 391,963, 
. 
C. GUYER. 
WEATHER STRIP. 
w 
24 
Patented Oct. 30, 1888. 
Pine 
16- 
re- 
"essel 
a 
e 
"eel 
- 
a 
7 
re 
--- 
e 
4. A 
IWVEWTOR 
C424- Attorney, 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLINTON GUYER, OF MUNCY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WEATHER STR P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 391,963, dated October 30, 1888. 
Application filed February 23, 1888. 
Serial No. 265,006. (No model.) 
5 
25 ing drawings, in which 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CLINTON GUYER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Muncy, in 
the county of Lycoming and State of Pennsyl 
Vania, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Weather-Strips; and Idohereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
IO pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
f5 Weather-strips; and the objects of my improve 
ments are, first, to provide an automatic 
Weather-strip that is simple and inexpensive 
in construction and effectual in operation, 
and, Second, one in which the adaptation and 
2O arrangement of parts are so complete as to 
prevent entirely the admission of snow or 
rain, and excludes air as far as it is possible in 
any weather-strip. I attain these objects by 
the mechanism illustrated in the accompany 
Figure 1 is an external view of weather-strip 
attached to door when closed. Fig. 2 is an 
internal view of same detached from door, and 
illustrating the interior mechanism when door 
3O is closed. Fig. 3 is a similar view of weather 
strip, illustrating the interior mechanism when 
door is open. Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7 are detail 
views of parts to be referred to hereinafter. 
Fig. 8 is a vertical section through the plate I. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the Several views. 
A is a piece of suitable molding, having an 
inclined surface on the outside, which serves as . 
a water-shed. Said molding is secured to the 
4o door by screws or in any suitable way. At the 
lower edge of molding A. are three staples, (t, 
for the purpose of securing the molding to the 
piece B. At the end of molding A, next to the 
hinges of the door, is an opening, through which 
45 passes the push-bar C, which leads to a cavity in 
molding A, adapted to the working of the parts 
which compose the interior mechanism. The 
inner lower edge of molding A is beveled, and 
so constructed as to adapt itself perfectly to the 
5o upper outside edge of the piece B, making it 
as near air-tight and water-proof as possible. 
3 5 
The piece B is constructed with a view of 
forming a continuous water-shed for the mold 
ing A, and it is beveled at the inner lower 
edge, so as to adapt itself completely to the 55 
door-sill. Said piece B is secured to molding 
A by means of three staples, b, in the upper 
portion of piece B, which interlock with simi 
lar staples, a, of molding A, thereby forming 
a complete hinge. One end of push-bar C is 6o 
bent at a right angle, so as to work effectually 
upon the screw-head or wedge D, which is se 
cured to the door-frame. In the other end of 
push-bar C is a slot for the purpose of pivot 
ing the same to the cam E. The lever E is 65 
pivoted at upper end to molding A and in the 
center to the push-bar C. At the lower end of 
lever Ethere is a slot for the purpose of piv 
oting the same to one end of the toggle-joint 
F. Upon this end of the toggle joint F there is 7o 
a round shoulder, f, which serves to hold the 
spiral spring G (that is coiled around said 
end) firmly in place by the aid of a washer, f', 
which works on said end of toggle-joint F next 
to the lever E. 
The upper end of vertical bar H is pivoted 
to the toggle-joint F, and the lower end is se 
cured to the piece B by means of a staple. 
This bar H works in a slot between the shoul 
ders i of plate I, which is secured to molding So 
A. The plate I is bent outward at a right 
angle, on the lower edge forming the shoulders 
i, which serve as a check to the downward 
movement of the toggle-joint F. The other 
end of the toggle joint F is formed with an el- 85 
bow, f, in which there is a hole, for the pur 
pose of securing (by means of a screw, f, or 
otherwise) the same to the molding A. Said 
elbowf' serves as a bell-crank lever to impart 
motion to the sliding bar J. The sliding bar 90 
J is made with a round shoulder, j, and a slot, 
j', in which works the upper end of the elbow 
f' of the end of the toggle-joint F. The other 
end of sliding bar J is round and works in a 
staple, K, that is fastened to molding A. The 95 
spiral spring L is coiled around the sliding 
bar J, and is held in place by means of the 
shoulder i and a washer, l, which is placed 
next to the staple K. 
When the door is closed, the part c of the 
push-bar C comes in contact with the screw 
The operation of my invention is as follows: I Co 
75 
s w 
39,963 
Io anism to do the same. 
I5 ther enlarge upon its merits. 
head or wedge D, which forces, it inwardly. 
This pushes forward the lever E, which forces 
the toggle joint F upward (compressing the 
spiral springs G and L) in connection with the 
5 vertical bar H and the sliding bar J, which 
causes the piece B to adjust itself closely to 
the molding A. When the door is opened, the 
Spiral springs G and L assume their normal 
position, causing the remainder of the mech 
My Weather-strip can be used upon any kind 
of doors, double or single, right hand or left. 
The practicability and general utility of my 
invention being so apparent,it is useless to fur 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a Weather-strip, the combination of 
the molding A, with the staples ct, the piece B, 
having the staples b, interlocking with the sta 
ples a of the molding A, forming a hinge, the 
bar C, pivoted to the lever E, the lever E, piv 
oted to the molding A and to one end of the 
toggle-joint F, the toggle-joint F, with the 
spiral spring G coiled upon it, having its 
elbow f' pivoted to the sliding bar J, the slid 
ing bar J, having the spiral spring L coiled 
upon it, the plate I, pivoted to the molding 
3o A, and the vertical bar H, pivoted to the fog 
25 
35 
gle-joint F, substantially as described and 
shown. 
2. The screw-head or wedge D, secured to 
door-frame opposite the parte of push-bar C, 
in combination with molding A, with sta 
ples a, the piece B, with the staples b, inter 
locking with similar staples, a, of molding A, 
thereby forming a hinge, the push-bar C, lo 
cated in the end of molding A and pivoted to 
lever E, the lever E, pivoted to the molding 4o 
A, push-bar C, and the end of toggle-joint F, 
the toggle-joint F, having one end pivoted to 
molding A, the elbow f" of toggle-joint F, piv 
oted to the sliding bar J, the sliding bar J, 
having one end pivoted to the end of elbow f' 
of the toggle-joint F, the other end sliding in 
the staple K, the plate I, secured to molding 
A, the spiral spring G, coiled upon one end of 
toggle-joint F, the spiral spring L, coiled upon 
sliding bar J, and the vertical bar H, with up- So 
per end pivoted to the toggle joint F and the 
lower end secured to piece B, substantially as 
described, and for the purpose shown. 
In testimony whereof I hereby affix my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
45 
CLINTON GUYER. 
Witnesses: 
B. L. BOWMAN, 
T)E LA GREEN. 
..T----- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392064.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 392,064, 
J. PILKINGTON. 
NAI, PLATE FEEDING DEWICE, 
Patented 00t, 30, 1888. 
 
P E 
 
 
 
al 
 
 
  
  
 
al 
A. G. 
N 
282 Wi-eoyey, 
Geon, 96-cut w 
2. "Se 
N. PETERs, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT 
 
JONATHAN PILKINGTON, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO DENNIS D. McCOY, OF SAME PLACE, 
- 
NAL-PLATE-FEED ING DEviCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 392,064, dated October 30, 1888. 
Application filed IFebruary 3, 1888. Serial No. 262,887. (No model.) 
S 
O 
To all whom it may conce Pro 
Be it known that I, JoNATHAN PILKING 
TON, of Milwaukee, in the county of Milwau 
kee, and in the State of Wisconsin, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvementsin 
Machines for Making Nails; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof. 
My invention relates to self-feed nail-mak 
ing machines; and it consists in certain pecu 
liarities of construction and combination of 
parts, to be hereinafter described with refer 
ence to the accompanying drawings and sub. 
Sequently claimed. 
In the drawings, Figurel represents in side 
elevation the feed - barrel of a nail-machine 
and the application of my invention; Fig. 2, 
a longitudinal vertical section of the same 
on the line 22 of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 an end 
WeW. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, A rep 
resents the barrel of a nail-cutting machine, 
and B the guide-fingers for the nail-plates, 
these parts being of the ordinary construc 
tion, except that the nose C of said barrel has 
an opening, D, cut in each side thereof. 
Bolted or otherwise suitably secured to the 
barrel-nose C are spring-fingers E, and each 
one of these fingers has a thick forward end, 
F, that enters an adjacent one of the openings 
D in Said nose. 
In order that the spring-fingers E may be 
longitudinally adjusted, I provide the rear end 
of each one with a longitudinal slot, G, for en 
gagement with a set-screw, H, that engages the 
nose C of the barrel A, this being the pre 
ferred method of securing said ?ingers in op 
erative position. 
The spring-fingers E are adjusted to have 
their forward ends impinge against the edges 
of a mail-plate being fed to the machine, and 
owing to their elasticity said fingers will yield 
to any irregularities in the width of said nail 
plate, thereby preventing any sticking of this 
plate or wear on the nose of the feed-barrel 
and insuring a perfect cutting of the nail 
blanks, 
3O 
35 
5 
55 
By placing washers under the rear ends of 
the spring-fingers the forward ends of the lat 
ter can be brought farther into the nose C of 5o 
the barrel A, and thus an adjustment is 
effected to accommodate nail-plates of a less 
width than that for which said barrel may 
have been originally intended. The spring 
fingers also permit the feeding of a wider nail 
plate than that for which the barrel may have 
been intended. 
My invention can be readily applied to any 
feed-barrel, and by its employment said bar 
rel will last an indefinite length of time, where 
as an ordinary barrel soon becomes worn out 
at the nose, and is then worthless and has to be 
replaced by a new one. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The feed-barrel of a nail-cutting machine, 
in combination with longitudinally-adjustable 
fingers arranged to enter the barrel and im 
pinge against the edges of a nail-plate as the 
latter is fed through said barrel, substantially 
as Set forth. 
2. The feed-barrel of a nail-cutting machine 
having the nose thereof provided with an 
opening in each of its sides, in combination 75 
with spring-fingers secured to thesides of the 
nose and having thickened portions that enter 
said openings, Substantially as set forth. 
3. The feed-barrel of a nail-cutting machine 
having the nose thereof provided with an 8o 
opening in each of its sides, in combination 
with slotted spring-fingers having their for 
ward ends arranged to enter the openings in 
the barrel-nose, and set-screws that engage the 
slots in the fingers and sides of said nose, sub- 85 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I have 
hereunto set my hand, at Milwaukee, in the 
county of Milwaukee and State of Wisconsin, 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
JONATHAN PILKINGTON, 
Witnesses: 
- 
N. E. OLIPHANT, 
H. G. UNDERWOOD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392164.txt	(No Model.) 
A. J. NOYES, 
MACHINE FOR MILLING CONNECTING ROD BOXES, 
No. 39264 
/s 
Patented got 30, 1888. 
. 
J77f72 esses: 
g (73-73,evez - 
666.44 
1727'ezzfor: 
Augustus u?/Voyes, 
hy )was 3. 
&zzorney, 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTUS J. NOYES, OF ONEONTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE - HALF TO ROBERT 
C. BLACKALL OF ALBANY, NEW YORK. 
MACHINE FOR ME LING CoNNECTING-ROD B OXES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 392, le4, dated October 30, 1888. 
Application filed June 5, 1888. Serial No. 276,079. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUSTUs J. No YEs, of 
Oneonta, in the county of Otsego, in the State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Portable Milling-Machine for Dressing Off 
Connecting-Rod Brasses and other Similar Pur 
poses, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a simple, light, and 
effective machine that can be readily moved by 
hand from place to place where it is needed 
for the purpose of removing an excess of metal 
from the joining faces of the brasses for con 
necting-rods, journal-boxes, and other similar 
parts of machines, but especially where such 
repairs are to be made at places which are re 
motely or inconveniently located in respect to 
a shop containing suitable machines for that 
purpose; and the object of my invention is to 
provide a simple and effective portable tool or 
machine for the above-named purpose, and 
thereby supply a long-felt want in connection 
with railway machinery. This object I attain 
by the mechanism illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, which are herein referred to 
and form part of this specification, and in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my portable 
milling-machine. Fig. 2 is a front elevation 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section 
at the line XX on Fig. 2, and Fig. 4 is a plan 
WeW. 
As represented in the drawings, A is the bed 
piece of the machine, made substantially in the 
form shown and having parallel sides 1. Near 
the rearmost end of said sides vertical guides 
2 are erected, and at or near the top of said 
sides horizontal guideways 3 are formed. 
B is a sliding bed, which is fitted to move end 
wise in the guideways 3 of the bed-piece A, 
and is provided with a pendent lug,4, in which 
- the end of a feed-screw, 5, engages to effect the 
endwise movements of said sliding bed. The 
feed-screw 5 is fitted into Screw-threads made 
- in the end piece of the bed-piece A, and the 
outer end of Said Screw is provided with a hand 
crank, 6, or other Suitable appliance for ro 
tating it. 
Cis a sliding head, which is fitted to move in 
the vertical guides 2, and is provided with a 
driving-shaft,7, and with a cutter-shaft, 8, both 
of said shafts being parallel to each other and 
arranged transversely to the center line of the 
bed-piece A. One end of the driving-shaft 7 
is provided with a crank-wheel, 9, or other ap 
pliance for giving a rotatory motion to said 55 
shaft, and the opposite end of the latterispro 
vided with a gear-wheel, 10, which engages 
With a pinion, 11, on the corresponding end of 
the cutter-shaft 8, for the purpose of imparting 
to said cutter-shaft a higher rate of speed than 6o 
is given to the driving-shaft. A bevel gear 
wheel, 12, is fitted to slide on a spline, 13, that 
is inserted longitudinally in said driving-shaft, 
and a forked lever, 14, engages in a circum 
ferential groove in the hub of said bevel gear. 65 
wheel for the purpose of sliding the latter on 
the driving-shaft when occasion requires. The 
gear-wheel 12 engages with a corresponding 
wheel, 15, that is secured upon the lower end 
of a vertical feed-screw, 16, and whose hub is 
fitted to rotate in the upper cross-bar of the 
sliding head C. The feed-screw 16 fits into a 
Screw-nut, 17, formed in the cross-bar at the 
top of the vertical guides 2, so that when said 
feed-screw is rotated it will acquire a vertical 
feeding movement in a direction that will cor 
respond to the direction in which said screw 
is rotated. A hand-wheel, 18, is attached to 
the upper part of said feed screw for the pur 
pose of rotating the latter when the wheels 12 
and 15 are thrown out of gear to move the 
sliding head C upward or downward, as occa 
Sion may require. 
D is the cylindrical cutter, which is secured 
to the cutter-shaft S, and is provided with a 85 
series of obliquely-arranged cutter-teeth, like 
those commonly made on milling-machine 
E is an angle-plate, that is adjustably at 
tached to the sliding bedB, for the purpose of 9o 
aiding in Setting the work in position on said 
sliding plate. Said angle-plate is preferably 
provided with a stud-bolt, 19, which, bypass. 
ing through a clamp-strap, 20, Whose outer end 
is supported by a chock-piece, 21, secures a 95 
brass, F, or other piece of work to be operated 
on, firmly in place on the sliding bed B. 
The operation of my portable milling-ma 
chine is as follows: While the sliding head C 
is standing in a raised position where the axis Ioo 
of the cutter-shaft 8 will be above the plane of 
the upper surface of the piece to be operated 
CutterS. 
75 
s 
25 
35 
AO 
45 
392,164 
on, the brass For other piece of work is secured 
to the sliding bed B, so that the inner end of 
said brass will slightly overhang the inner end 
of the sliding bed, as shown in Fig. 3. The 
sliding bed Bis then moved by the feed-screw 
5 toward the cutter D to bring the work into 
position, where the required amount of metal 
will be removed by the operation of said cut 
ter. Then, with the wheels 12 and 15 engaged 
in gear, the driving-shaft 7 is set in motion to 
rotate the cuttc. ) and feed-screw 16. The 
latter causes the sliding head C to move down 
wardly at a very moderate rate of speed, and 
thereby the cutter ID is carried into position 
while rotating, where its cutting-edges will 
effect the removal of the excess of metal that 
it is desirable to dispense with. While the 
wheels 12 and 15 are meshed in gear the cut 
ter I) will be fed downward, as required, for 
removing an excess of metal from the join 
ing faces of brasses for connecting-rods; but 
when the machine is required to be used for 
removing the metal from the opposite sides of 
the bore of said brasses contiguous to said 
joining faces, so that the crown of the brasses 
will have a fair bearing upon the wrist-pin on 
which it works, the wheels. 12 and 15 must be 
thrown out of gear to permit the sliding head 
C to be moved into position to bring the up 
3o per side-or the lower side, if required-of the 
cutter ID opposite the point where the metal 
is to be cut away. The cutter, which to do this 
Work must le of Smallel' diameter than the 
2 5 
bore of the brass, is set in motion by the driv 
ing-shaft 7, and the sliding bed B is fed to-35 
ward the cutter ID by means of the feed-screw 
5 until the required amount of the excess is 
cut away from the side that is first operated 
on. Then the sliding bed is drawn back by the 
feed-screw 5 and the sliding head B moved 
into position opposite to the point of the bore 
where the metal is to be removed from the op 
posite side of the bore. Then the sliding bed 
is fed forward and the cutter) again rotated, 
as above described, until the work is completed. 
i claim as my invention 
A portable milling-machine consisting of the 
following parts: a bed-piece provided with 
horizontal and vertical guidways, a sliding bed 
fitted to move by means of a feed-screw in said 
horizontal guideways, and a sliding head fitted 
to move by means of a feed-screw in said ver 
tical guideways, said sliding head carrying a 
driving-shaft that is disconnectibly geared to 
the feed-screw for saidsliding head, and a cut 
ter-shaft which is geared to said driving-shaft, 
and to which a milling-cutter is secured, said 
| driving shaft and cutter-shaft being fitted to 
i rotate in and to be carried upwardly and 
downwardly by said sliding head, as and for 6o 
the purpose specified. 
AUC STUS ... NOYES. 
Witnesses: 
LARENCE F. MAYHA A1, 
ATECAI, KEEC, AN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392264.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. FRENCH, 
BOOT OR SHOE, 
W 
No. 392,264, 
Patented Nov. 6, 1888. 
Z2 
6 ge 
SS 
2.SSSSSSyssassy 
a 
2 e. 
2222222222%. 
YS ea Rs 
N S N 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JUSTUS W. FRENCH, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS. 
BOOT OR SHOE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 392,264, dated November 6, 1888. 
Application filed May 22, 1888, Serial No. 274,634. (No model.) 
O 
. To all whom it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, JUSTUs W. FRENCH, of 
Lynn, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
ment in Boots or Shoes, of which the following 
description, in connection with the accompa 
nying drawings, is a specification, like letters 
on the drawings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object animproved 
construction of shoe, whereby the same may 
be cheaply lasted without the employment of 
tacks in the ball of the inner sole. 
. In accordance with my invention a lasting 
sole narrower than the bottom of the last at 
; the ball thereof is employed instead and to 
take the place of the usual inner sole, the said 
lasting-sole having itsedgesimmediately along 
the ball of the foot and between the toe por 
tion, and the shank reduced in width and pro 
vided with a lip which points toward the cen 
ter line of the sole, the said sole thus present 
ing along the ball abutting edges which fall. 
within the side lines of the bottom of the last, 
and against which the upper is drawn by 
stitches, the narrow portion of the lasting-sole 
having a groove, lip, or channel inside its 
abutting edges. When connecting the upper 
to the lasting-sole, the needle of any usual 
turn-shoe or Welt-shoe sewing-machine will be 
made to enter the channel or under the lip of 
the lasting-sole, the point of the needle emerg 
ing from the abutting edges and entering the 
upper, so that when the needle is drawn back 
to finish the stitch the thread will draw the 
upper over the bottom of the last directly 
against the said abutting edge, thus connect 
ing the upper with the lasting-sole at the 
abutting edge rather than with the outer side 
of the said sole. In this way the upper is 
drawn and strained over the bottom of the 
last, and thereafter (the last having been with 
drawn and the outer sole applied to the lasted 
shoe in usual manner) that portion of the up 
per lying between the abutting edge of the 
lasting-sole and the edge of the last serves to 
receive the fastenings employed to unite the 
upper and outer sole, the said fastenings not 
entering the lasting-sole where it is reduced 
in width or between the portion thereof where 
the upper was stitched to it, as described. 
My invention therefore consists, essentially, 
25 
3) 
35 
45 
in a boot or shoe consisting of an upper and 
lasting-sole cut and reduced in width along 
the ball portion thereof between the toe and 
shank portions, and having a lip and an abut 
ting edge located within the line of the bottom 
of the last in the direction of its width, the 
said upper being drawn against and stitched 
to the said abutting edges along only the ball 
of the shoe, and an outer Sole united to the 
upper by a line of fastenings which 
pass 
through and through the outer sole, the up 
per, and the inner sole about the toe of the 
shoe and along the shank thereof, the said 
fastenings employed to secure the outer sole 
in place passing through the upper and not 
through the lasting-sole along the ball of the 
shoe, substantially as described. 
Figure 1 in side elevation represents a shoe 
embodying my invention; Fig. 2, a section in 
the dotted line ac; Fig. 3, an under side view 
of the shoe, the upper along one side of the 
shoe being shown as lasted and trimmed, while 
at the opposite side of the shoe the upper is in 
position to be stitched to the lasting-Sole, a part 
of the upper being broken out to show the edge 
of the lasting-sole lying inside the edge of the 
last; Fig. 3, a section in the line ac'. 
Fig. 4 
shows the lasting-sole by itself; Fig. 5, a sec 
tion in the linea', with a piece of the upper in 
place, the figure showing the needle in place 
and part of the last. 
The upper a is and may be of usual shape 
and material. 
The lasting-sole b will preferably be a piece 
of leather reduced in width at and along the 
ball of the sole between the toe portion and 
shank portion, the lasting-sole herein shown 
having an inturned lip, l', under which is a 
The lip b'is herein repre 
channel or groove. 
sented as formed upon the lasting-sole by slit 
ting the latter from its opposite edge crosswise 
and transversely at four points, two at each 
side of the lasting-Sole, between the toe portion 
b' and shank portion b', the portion of the 
sole between the parts where it is cut being 
bent over upon the face of the said sole, thus 
leaving an inturned lip. 
The point of the needle employed to unite 
the upper to the lasting sole emerges from the 
upper and enters the lasting-sole at the abut 
ting edgel thereof-the edge left by reducing 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
392,264 
SO 
55 
75 
sole, as shown in Fig. 2; but the said stitches 
4 pass through and through the lasting-Sole 
in the direction of its thickness both around 
the toe and through the Shank, as in usual 
so-called McKay work. In this way nails 
or tacks are not left in the ball of the shoe, 
nor is the chain of stitches uniting the upper 
and lasting sole exposed at the inner side of 
the shoe. The cap will be nailed to the toe 
portion of the lasting-sole in usual manner. 
A sock-sole will be applied in usual manner 
to the completed shoe, and the heel part of the 
shoe and upper may be put together in any 
usual manner. 
I do not broadly claim an inner sole having 
its edge cut away about the ball of the shoe, so 
that the stitching uniting the inner sole and 
upper will run off the inner sole to thus make 
a flexible sole; but I am not aware that a sole 
of the shape referred to has ever been pro 
vided with a lip, as l', to which the upper has 
been united for the purpose of lasting the shoe, 
as herein described. 
I claim 
The herein. described shoe, it consisting of 
an upper and lasting Sole cut and reduced in 
width along the ball portion thereof between 
the toe and shank portion, and having a lip, l', 
and an abutting edge, l, located within the 
edge of the line of the last in the direction of 
its width, the said upper being drawn against 
and stitched to the said abutting edges l'along 
only the ball of the shoe, and an outer sole 
united to the upper by a line of fastenings 
which pass through and through the outer Sole, 
the upper and inner sole about the toe of the 
shoe and along the shank thereof, the said fast 
enings employed to secure the outer sole in 
place passing through the upper and not 
through the lasting sole along the ball of the 
shoe, all substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two Sub 
scribing witnesses. 
J. STUS W. FRIENC. 
With SSes: 
(. W. GREGORY, 
... ( . SEARS. 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
the width of the sole along the ball portion 
the point of the needle coming out through the 
said sole under the lip or flap l', So that when 
the needle is drawn back to its starting-point 
to finish the stitcl the thread entering the 
upper and sole will act to draw the upper close 
to the said edge l', or about the upper against 
the said edge at a point within the edge of the 
last, the upper being drawn and strained over 
the last. As the upper is drawn up and Se 
cured to the edges l, rather than drawn over 
and secured to the top of the sole, as has here 
tofore been done in welted work, I shall de 
nominate the edge l' as the abutting edge. 
In practice, the lasting-sole having been ap 
plied to the bottom of the last, the upper is 
drawn, by pinchers or otherwise, up to and over 
the edge of the last at the toe and through the 
shank and heel, when it may be temporarily 
secured or caught in usual manner by tacks or 
nails 2, and then the upper is stitched to the 
abutting edge of the lasting-sole by a line of 
stitches. (Shown at 3, Figs. 2 and 3.) 
For the work I may employ any Sewing-ma 
chine commonly used to stitch the upper to the 
inner sole in welted work, or to stitch the up 
per to the outer sole for turned work, the stitch 
being either a chain or two-threaded Stitch, as 
may be desired. 
In 1Fig. 3 the upper side or half of the shoe 
is shown as stitched and the lip and edge of 
the upper trimmed off from the center of the 
toe to the shank; but along the other side 
of the shoe the upper is shown as yet held 
by the tacks 2 in the last in position to be 
Stitchcd. 
The upper having been stitched to the abnt 
ting edge of the lasting sole, the nails 2 are 
withdrawn, the edge of the upper and the 
edge of the lip l' projecting beyond the line 
of stitching are cut off nearly down to the 
sail Stitching, an outer Sole, e, is applied to 
the shoe, the last is withdrawn, and the slhoe 
is applied to the horn of a machine of usual 
Construction for uniting the Sole and upper, 
and a line of fastenings, 4, preferably Stitches, 
is put into the outer sole and upper outside 
the junction of the upper with the lasting 
4.O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392364.txt	H. ROBERTS 
WIRE ROD MILL, 
Patented Nov. 6, 1888. 
N 
 
al 
N 
 
 
N 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 392,364. 
s 
 
 
s 
Ny 
 
l 
N 
R 
R 
R N N 
l 
WITNESSES 
1772-6 7-l-el 
-------- 
42'22 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY ROBERTS, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WIRE-ROD Mill. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 392,364, dated November 6, 1888. 
Application filed April 23, 1888. 
Serial No. 2,593. No model.) 
to c.4% w/von it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY RoBERTs, of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Wire. Rod Mills; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof. 
In rolling metal rods in a mill as now com 
monly practiced it is customary to employ a 
Series of trains of rolls set in line with each 
other and to pass the metal back and forth 
between these rolls. As the metal is reduced 
in diameter and increased in length, there 
is always difficulty in controlling it and pre 
Venting it from kinking, especially so when 
it is attempted to roll more than one rod at a 
time in a single mill. For this purpose it has 
been usual to employ boys, who stand with 
hooks opposite to the rolls and guide the elon 
gating metal loop with a view of preventing it 
from kinking or injuring the Workmen. The 
work of these boys is very dangerous, and re 
quires the closest attention, and therefore the 
wages paid them are quite high. Besides this, 
the least neglect on their part is apt to cause 
the kinking of the rod, and when this hap. 
pens the delay in its passage through the mill 
chills the metal and unfits it for use, necessi. 
tating the cutting of it into pieces for scrap. 
My present invention is an improvement on 
inclined floors adapted to diminish the evils 
before recited; and it consists in placing over 
the inclined guide-floor an elevated horizon 
tal platform or floor. The wire loop travels 
on the inclined floor below, and this leaves 
the horizontal floor unobstructed for the or. 
dinary operations of the mill, the workmen 
being enabled to walk thereon in comparative 
Security. 
It also consists in providing the floor of the 
mill with a projection or stop having a curved 
end, over which the metal loop passes and 
around which it is drawn by the action of the 
rolls. The effect of this projection is to 
straighten the metal rod and to remove from 
it kinks or bends, and to compel the rod to 
travel in a regular course from one pair of 
rolls to the next. 
The purpose of these features of my inven 
tion is to save time in the work of rolling the 
rods, to enable a great deal of the labor to be 
dispensed with, and to save room in the mill 
building. All these elements are important 
factors in the cost of manufacture of the rods, 
and my invention is therefore one of real im- 55 
portance and value. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a rod-rolling mill 
constructed according to the principles of my 6o 
invention, one of the plates of the horizontal 
floor of the mill being removed to permit the 
inclined floor to be seen. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
longitudinal section on the line a 4 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical cross-section on the line y 65 
y of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a vertical cross-section 
on the line 2 & of Fig. 1. 
n 
Like symbols of reference indicate like 
parts in each. 
In the drawings, 2 and 3 represent two ad- 70 
jacent pairs of rolls of a wire-rod mill, and 4 
represents the floor of the mill on the deliv 
ery side of the rolls 2. This floor is inclined, 
the inclination having preferably a fall of 
about eleven feet in sixty, as shown in Fig. 2, 75 
though the inclination may be greater or less 
than this. 
5 is the ordinary curved guide or trough, 
which extends from the rolls 2 to the rolls 3 
and which directs the end of the loop from one 
pair of rolls to the other, and 8 is an Open 
trough on the inclined floor extending trans 
versely from the delivery side of the rolls. As 
the rod passes between the rolls, the enlarging 
loop escapes from over the guide and passes 
down the inclined floor of the mill, one branch 
of the loop traveling within the guide-trough 
8. The guide-trough 8 is smooth, so that it 
shall offer as little resistance as possible to the 
passage of the loop. Heretofore it has been 
proposed to use a guide of this general char 
acter, but with a corrugated or cross-ribbed 
bottom; but I have found that this feature is 
a disadvantage. 
Over a part or the whole of the inclined 
floor is a horizontal floor,6, which is supported 
by suitable beams, 7. This affords a covering 
for the inclined floor, and as the metal travels 
beneath the horizontal floor the workmen may 
pass back and forth on it with comparative 
freedom from danger and without interfering 
with the operations of the mill. A space, b, is 
OO 
5 
O 
2) 
45 
SO 
 
392,364 
Further, I am aware that inclined troughs 
or overfeed-regulators have been provided 
to conduct the loop from the bite of the 
rolls to the usual horizontal mill-floor, SO as to 
counteract the tendency of the sides of the 
loop to bend inward toward each other and be. 
come entangled, and I do not herein broadly 
claim such over feed-troughs, which are ?ea 
tures independent of and leading to the floor 
proper; but 
What I claim is 
1. In a wire-rod mill, the combination, with 
two sets of rolls arranged to have different 
lines of feed, of an inclined sub-floor leading 
to and from said pairs of rolls, and a covering 
floor arranged over said inclined sub-floor, 
substantially as and for the purposes specified. 
2. In a wire-rod mill, the combination, with 
two sets of rolls arranged to have different 
lines of feed, of an over feed-regulator leading 
from the rolls to the floor, an inclined receiv 
ing-floor, and a curved projection or stop al 
ranged on said floor at or near the end of the 
loop-path, substantially as and for the pur. 
poses described. 
3. In a wire-rod mill, the combination, with 
two sets of rolls arranged to have different 
lines of feed, of an inclined sub-floor, an up. 
per or covering floor, and a loop-stop arranged 
on the sub-floor under the covering-floor, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
4. In a wire-rod mill, the combination, with 
two sets of rolls arranged to have different 
lines of feed, of an inclined loop-trough hav 
ing at one side an open passage and at the 
other a partially - covered passage, substan 
tially as and for the purposes specified. 
5. In a wire-rod mill, the combination, with 
two sets of rolls arranged to have different 
lines of feed, of a loop-trough provided with 
lateral steps or risers, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
6. In a wire-rod mill, the combination, with 
the rolls, of a longitudinally - inclined guide 
trough having a laterally-inclined side, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
7. In a wire-rod mill, the combination, with 
two sets of rolls, of a loop-trough having the 
gutter 11 and a plate, 12, which partially cov 
ers said gutter, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 5th day of April, A. D. 188S. 
IENRY ROBERTS, 
f5 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO5 
I IO 
Witnesses: 
W. B. CORWIN, 
J. K. SMIT II. 
IO 
5 
2 
left at the end of the horizontal floor for free 
passage of the wire loop beneath it. Between 
the opening b and the rolls the inclined floor 
is uncovered, and between the guide - trough 
S on one side and the other side of the in 
clined floor is a raised shelf, 10, at the side of 
which is a trough or gutter, 11, extending 
from the pair of rolls 3. The last-named gut 
ter 11 is covered by a plate, 12, (preferably 
integral with the shelf 10,) but is provided 
With an opening at the top, which allows the 
entrance of one branch of the wire loop into 
the gutter. 
I believe I am the first to use a covered 
guide - trough having an opening at the top, 
and desire to claim it broadly, since it may be 
used to advantage without the other elements 
of the combination, which I show. 
The use of the gutter 11, in connection with 
the trough on the other side of the shelf 10, is 
of great utility, because it keeps the branches 
of the wire loop separate and prevents its en 
tanglement. The cover-plate 12 is useful, be 
cause it keeps the end of the wire loop from 
flying up, and thus prevents entanglement 
when more than one loop is passed through at 
a single time. The side of the trough S, be 
tween the rolls 2 and the opening b, is stepped, 
as shown in Fig. 4, the purpose of the steps 
being to prevent the wire from rising out of 
the trough and to prevent the loops from 
tangling when two or more are passing at the 
Same time. 
For the purpose of affording access to re 
move Scrap, which may accumulate in the space 
beneath the horizontal floor, I may provide 
the horizontal floor with a trap or man-hole, 
or an opening may be left at the bottom of the 
inclincd floor, as may be the more convenient. 
On the inclined floor 4-preferably about 
midway-I place a projection or stop, ), which 
is preferably inclined upwardly from the floor 
in a direction away from the rolls, and is curved 
at the end, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The 
elongating metal loop passes over this projec 
tion and encircles it, and when the rear end 
of the loop emerges from the rolls 2 it is con 
pelled by this projection to pass entirely 
around it. The loop is thus prevented from 
kinking, any unevenness in the loop is straight 
ened, and the curvature of the end prevents 
cutting of the loop in its passage. 
I am aware that heat-retaining boxes have 
been Sunlk in mill - floors to receive coiled 
billets, and that rod tubes or pockets have 
been sunk in mill-floors to receive and retain 
the heat in rods as they passed from the rolls, 
and I do not herein claim any of said devices 
or the principles involved therein. 
45 
SO 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392467.txt	No Model.) 
G, F, SMITH & W. H. WARREN. 
WEHICLE COUPLING, 
No. 392,467. 
Patented Nov. 6, 1888. 
7 
2. 
g 
-zo 
97 
Alsaea 
7 
7 
O 
t 
As 
7 
: 
. -oca 
6eoye Strzite, 
724&arzA. A.Verezz. 
JWVE.WTOR 
8 A 
&/ 
ttorney . 
i. Peters, Photo-tithegrapher, washinton, D. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE. F. SMITH AND WILLIAM HENRY WARREN, OF COWINGTON, 
KENTUCKY. 
WE. H. CLE - COUPNG. 
SECIFICATION orming part of Letters Patent No. 392,467, dated November 6, 1888, 
Application filed July 17, 1888, Serial No. 280,156. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGE F. SMITH and 
WILLIAM HENRY WARREN, citizens of the 
United States of America, residing at Coving 
ton, in the county of Kenton and State of Ken 
tucky, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Couplings for Vehicles; and 
we do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form apart of this speci 
fication. 
Our invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in couplings for vehi 
cles; and it consists in the construction and 
combination of the parts, as will be herein 
after fully set forth, aud specifically pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a coupling constructed 
in accordance with our improvement. Fig. 2 
is a sectional view. 
A refers to any suitable head-block, above 
which is located a spring, B. The spring B 
is secured to the head-block A on each side 
of its center by clips D, which pass through 
four projecting lugs, d, formed integral with 
head-block plate E, this plate being secured 
to the under side of the head-block in the 
usual manner. 
The upper circle, F, of the fifth- wheel is 
provided with upwardly - projecting lugs f, 
which lie on each side of the head-block A, 
and between them is placed the ends of the 
head-block plate E, so as to secure, by means 
of bolts a' a', the head-block A to the upper 
circle, F, of the fifth- wheel. The lower sec 
tions, F, of the fifth- wheel are clipped to the 
axle in the usual manner. 
The laterally-extending head-block plate E 
is formed integral with the drop reach-iron G, 
which is provided with a central recess, g, 
through which passes the king-bolt, the lower 
portion of the king-bolt being bifurcated to 
embrace the axle. 
The drop reach-iron G, besides having head 
block plate E and projecting lugs did, through 
which pass clips D, formed integral therewith, 
has also a forwardly-projecting portion, H, 
the outer end of which is perforated for the 
reception of one end of the drop-iron K. The 
rear portion of the drop reach-iron Gis curved 
downward and has formed integral therewith 
rearwardly-extending plates J J, adapted to 
be bolted to the reach. When a double reach, 
as shown, is used, the plates J J will diverge; 
but with a single reach they will be com- 6o 
pressed or bent to lie almost parallel with 
each dither and embrace the sides of the reach. 
It will be noted that the drop reach-iron, 
consisting of the parts E. H. G. JJ and the pro 
jecting lugs did, through which pass clips D, 65 
are all rigidly connected and formed integral 
with each other, so that there are no parts to 
rattle or become detached. 
lK refers to the drop-iron, which has rear 
wardly-projecting diverging plates L., adapted 
to be secured to the under side of the reach 
when double reaches are used. From these 
diverging plates L the drop-iron extends 
downwardly and forwardly and is provided 
with an opening, k, through which passes a 
bolt formed with the clip-yoke which connects 
the king-bolt to the axle, said bolt being 
threaded and provided with a nut, O, which 
operates between the clip-yoke and drop-iron 
described above. The drop-iron K also ex 
tends upwardly in front of the axle, and is 
passed through the perforation in the exten 
sion H of the drop reach-iron G, to which it 
is secured by a nut, h. The drop reach-iron 
G and the drop-iron K are secured to the 
reach or reaches by bolts, as shown in accom 
panying drawings, and the reach or reaches 
are provided with plates in m, which are con 
nected at one end. Through these plates in 
pass bolts for connecting the fifth - wheel F 
thereto, the same bolts also passing through 
perforations in the drop-iron K. 
Beneath the axle, and securing the bifur 
cated ends of the king-bolt, is a king-bolt clip 
yoke, N, the ends of which are provided with 
perforations through which the bifurcated 
ends of the king-bolt pass and are secured by 
nuts. This clip-yoke N is provided with a de 
pending screw - threaded portion, n, which 
passes through the opening lic of the drop-iron 
K, and on the threaded portion adjacent to 
the clip-yoke N is placed a tightening-nut, O, 
95 
90 
IOO 
g 
392,467 
5 
O 
which when turned downward will bear upon 
the upper side of the drop-iron K, thus tak 
ing up all wear of the fifth-wheel plates F F, 
so that the parts, may be tightened when de 
sired. 
The drop-iron K is secured beneath by a 
nut, O. 
It will be observed that there are but few 
parts to our improved coupling, and that they 
have been designed so that as many parts as 
possible have been formed integral with each 
other to avoid loosening of the parts and rat 
tling. 
The device hereinbefore described may be 
I5 used as a coupling for carriage and buggy 
gears, and as the parts are not directly con 
nected with the wearing-plates of the fifth 
wheel any style of fifth-wheel may be used 
with the hereinbefore-described coupling. 
The king-bolt clip-yoke, when constructed 
as shown and used in connection with the drop 
reach-iron G and the drop-iron K, makes an 
adjustable coupling which can be fitted to di?. 
ferent sizes of fifth-wheels, and by turning the 
nut. O the wear may be taken up. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let. 
ter's Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the king-bolt and 
3C Cotipling, of the yolke N, having a depending 
Screw-threaded portion which passes through 
the drop-iron, nuts O and 0, engaging with 
the Screw-threaded portions above and bolow 
the drop iron, substantially as shown, and for 
2. The combination, in a coupling for ve 
hicles, of a king-bolt bifurcated at its lower 
35 the purpose set forth. 
25 
40 
45 
end to embrace the axle, a yoke through which 
the bifurcated portions of the king-bolt pass, 
said yoke having a depending portion screw 
threaded adjacent to the yoke, and a nut 
adapted to be turned upon the screw-threads 
between the drop-iron and cross-bar, and a 
head-block iron and drc p-iron constructed 
Substantially as shown, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. The combination, in a coupling for ve 
lhicles, a king-bolt provided at the under side 
of the head-block plate with a shoulder, said 
king-bolt being bifurcated and attached to a 
cross plate or yoke having a depending screw 
threaded portion, , a nut adapted to turn 
upon said depending portion, and a securing 
nut, O, beneath the drop-iron, the parts being 
combined with a head-block iron and drop 
iron, constructed Substantially as shown, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
4. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a head-block iron having a front projection, 
H, with a perforation, a recess, g, rearward 
and downward projecting member G, with di 
verging plates JJ, and laterally-extending 
plates E. E., adapted to lie under the head 
block, the parts being formed integral with 
each other and adapted for use, substantially 
as shown, and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE E. SMIT. 
WILLIAMI HENRY WARREN. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. MINDERMANN, 
BALTZER YAGO. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392567.txt	(No Model.) 
H. O'HARE, 
ROAD SCRAPER, 
No. 392,567, 
Patented NOV, 6, 1888. 
 
WITWESSES w 
4-f624 
a 
Acy/ OHare. 
ENVEWTOR 
Zy 
Attorney, 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
HUGH. O'HARE, OF MOUNT PLEASANT, IOWA, ASSIGNOR TO JOHN F. LEECH, 
OF SAME PLACE, 
ROADe SCRAPE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 392,567, dated November 6, 1888. 
Application filed July 12, 1888. Serial No. 279,775. (No model.) 
5 
O 
15 
To all, whom it; nay concern. 
Be it known that I, HUGH. O'HARE, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Mount Pleasant, in the county of Henry and 
State of Iowa, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Road-Scrapers; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in road-scrapers, the object 
thereof being to provide means whereby the 
angle of the scraper with respect to the draft 
can be readily changed; and it consists in pro 
2O viding the scraper-board, which is pivoted to 
the draft-beam, with rearwardly and inwardly 
projecting arms adapted to be adjustably Se 
cured to said draft-beam to change the angle 
thereof, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and specifically pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my improved scraper, 
and Fig. 2 is a side view. 
A refers to the axle, of ordinary construc 
3o tion, which may be provided with a draft 
tongue or shafts and with means for pivotally 
securing thereto a beam, B, to which a scraper, 
C, is pivoted centrally by means of a bolt or 
pivot, a, which is rigidly secured to the scraper 
C and passes through a perforation in the beam 
B to hold the scraper at an angle. The beam 
B has attached to its upper side a seat, D, upon 
which the driver sits. 
To the ends of the scraper C are attached 
4o rearwardly-curved arms E and F, the front 
ends of which are bent downwardly and Se 
cured to the rear side of the scraper by suit 
able bolts. The ends of the arms E and Fare 
provided with one or more perforations, 
45 through which bolts pass to engage with per 
forations b in the rear end of the beam B. 
35 
25 
55 
(5 
75 
The horizontal angle of the scraper C can be 
readily changed by removing the bolts which 
secure the arms E and F to the beam and turn 
ing said Scraper upon its pivot-bolt a and re 
inserting the pivot-bolt in different perfora 
tions. By providing the Scraper with these 
rearwardly-curved arms the same is thor 
oughly braced, and they are not liable to be. 
bent or unduly strained by the earth removed 
by the scraper and obstructions striking the 
same, as is liable to occur when the arms ex 
tend forwardly above the scraper. In prac 
tice I have found that this form of brace-arms 
gives better results and is more convenient than 
the forward brace-arms heretofore employed. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a road-scraper, the combination of the 
truck, the reach pivoted thereto and provided 
at its rear end with alongitudinal series of per 
forations, a scraper provided centrally with a 
bolt to afford a pivotal connection with the 
reach, and rearwardly-extending adjusting 
braces secured to the outer ends of the scraper 
and provided with bolt-holes arranged to reg 
ister with the holes of the longitudinal series 
at the rear end of the reach, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination, in a scraper, of a 
straight beam, B, provided with a seat, D, a 
scraper, C, centrally pivoted to the beam, rear 
wardly-extending arms E and F, secured to 
the ends of the scraper and to the rear portion 
of the beam B, said arms being of different 
lengths, so as to be secured to the beam at dif 
ferent points, substantially as shown, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HUGH. O'HARE. 
Witnesses: 
M. Y. BURRET, 
SMITH LYON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392667.txt	(No Model.) 
L. M. DEW0RE, 
SPRING EHINGE, 
N0. 392,66: 
6 
C Az - (LY 
TULGHEFF?Et 
 
Patented Nov. 13, l888. 
z KV 
| 0 e 
AZZ 
DHK 
| 
E Y RMS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- LEVI M. DEVORE, OF FREEPORT, ILLINOIS. 
S PR N G a H I NG E. 
PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 392,667, dated November 13, 1888. 
Application filed March 26, 1887. Serial No. 232,507. 
(No model.) 
I 5 
To all whom, it 7may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEVI M. DEVORE, re 
siding at Freeport, in the county of Stephen 
son and State of Illinois, and a citizen of the 
United States, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Spring-Hinges, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a frontelevation; Fig. 2, a cross 
section showing the parts in position when the 
door is closed; Fig. 3, a cross-section showing 
the parts in position when the door is open; 
Fig. 4, a longitudinal section through the ar 
bor and spring; Fig. 5, a detail showing a 
form of the connecting-link between the arbor 
and hinge-leaf; Fig. 6, a perspective view of 
the detached or independent arbor; Fig. 7, a 
modification in the form of the arbor; Fig. 8, 
another modification in the form of the arbor. 
This invention relates to that class of hinges 
in which a spring is combined with the leaves 
of the hinge to act and hold a door or otlher 
object either closed or open, and in which the 
spring has a movement wholly independent of 
the movement of the hinge-pivots. This class 
of spring - hinges has heretofore been con 
structed to employ a spring made of coiled 
wire, and in use it has been found necessary, 
in order to maintain the spring in alignment 
with the hinge-pivots, to provide a frame or 
other connection by which the torsional action 
of the spring is prevented from throwing the 
body of the spring to one side of the line of 
the pivots or hinge-pintles. 
This invention has for its objects to con 
struct a hinge employing a spring for holding 
the hinge in its open or closed positions, and 
at the same time have the spring in proper 
alignment with the hinge pivots or pintiles 
whether the hinge is opened or closed, with a 
connection to one leaf only of the hinge, dis 
pensing with the use of a frame or other con 
nection, as has heretofore been required to 
prevent the throwing of the spring out of 
alignment, and a further object is to overcome 
the objection of the torsional strain and to im 
prove the construction and operation of the 
hinge as a whole; and its nature consists in 
the several parts and combinations of parts 
hereinafter described, and pointed out in the 
claim as meW. 
B represents a detached or independent ar- 55 
In the drawings, A. A represent the two 
leaves of a hinge, having earS a a', respectively, 
and united at their ends by pivots a'", as usual. 
bor, which can be formed of a single piece, as 
shown in Fig. 6, having a longitudinal slot, b, . 
with a square tenon, b', at each end, or which 
can be formed of two halves, as shown in Fig. 
7, the square tenons b' being formed partly on 6o 
each half of the arbor, or it can be formed, as 
shown in Fig. 8, of two pieces, so that when 
together they will be disconnected at the cen 
ter, or such arbor can be otherwise formed to 
be independent and adapted for attachment to 
one end of the operating-Spring. 
C represents the links, one for each end of 
the arbor B, for connecting the arbor with one 
leaf of the hinge. Each link for use with the 
arbor having a square tenon, b'', is provided 7o 
with a square hole, c', to receive the tenon b', 
and each link has an extension terminating in 
a hook, c", for connecting the links C with the 
rodi c on one of the hinge-leaves, and, as 
shown, each link C is provided with a semi 
circular flange, c, to encircle the end of the 
spring; but such flange can be omitted, if so 
desired, without affecting the operation of the 
Spring. 
D represents the operating-spring, formed 
of a strip of steel wound in a helix or a clock 
spring form, and of a length to fit between the 
links C around the arbor B. As shown, the 
spring Dis connected with the arbor B by turn 
ing the end d and entering it in the slot b or 85 
by inserting such end between the halves of 
the arbor shown in Fig. 7. The outer end of 
the spring D is bent to form a half-loop, d', 
which partly encircles the rodd" on the hinge 
leaf not having the rod c, as shown in Figs. 9ce 
2 and 3. 
- Each leaf is provided with screw-holes or 
other means for attachment of the hinge to a 
door or other object, and the parts are assem 
bled by placing the two leaves together, con 
necting the end d of the spring with the ar 
bor B, and attaching the leaves by the links 
C, or otherwise, to the arbor, and then con 
necting either the link or the spring with the 
hinge-leaf and drawing the parts for connec 
tion with the other hinge-leaf, and when to 
gether the form of the spring is one which will 
75 
1 OC) 
25 
35 
45 
392,667 
draw uniformly and Without torsional action 
that will tend to throw the spring out of align 
ment, the result being that in use the spring is 
maintained in proper alignment with the hinge 
pivots or pintles under all circumstances and 
is effectual and reliable for the purpose for 
Which it is intended. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
In a spring-hinge, the combination of the 
leaves A. A', having ears a a", united by the 
pivots a", the clips C C, provided with hooks 
S 
I O 
c" c'", the rod c", connected with one of the 
leaves, A, with which rod the said hooks en 
gage, the rod d", connected to the other leaf, I 5 
A, the independent arbor B, connecting the 
clips C C together, and the helical spring D, 
one end of which is connected directly with 
the arbor B, while the other end is connected 
with the bar d'", substantially as described. 
LEVI M. DEVORE. 
Witnesses: 
AILBERT H. ADAMIS, 
HARRY T. JONES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392768.txt	(No Model.) 
G. H. W. ARTMAN. 
SMOKING PIPE, 
No. 392,768. 
Patented Nov. 3, 1888. 
 
". 
-64-3-vee-gs 
4.42. " 
BY 4s. 
ATTORNEYS, 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. W.ARTMAN, OF MONTES ANO, WASHINGTON TERRITORY. 
SVO KNG PE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters EPatent No. 392,768, diated November 3, 1888. 
Application filia December 16, 1887. Serial No. 258,061. (No model.) 
To att, willon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. WARTMAN, 
of Montesano, in the county of Chehalis and 
Territory of Washington, have invented a new 
and Improved Smoking-Pipe, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Slnoking-pipes, and has for its object to pro 
vide a pipe wherein the nicotine will be ex 
tracted from the smoke before entering the 
stem and be prevented from penetrating the 
bowl, and wherein the smoke, upon reaching 
the mouth-piece, will be cool and pleasant, and 
dirt or sediment be prevented from settling in 
the stem, and, further, wherein the bowl will 
never burn and may be colored quickly and 
uniformly. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of the several parts, as will 
be hereinafter fully set forth, and pointed out 
in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in Which similar letters of reference indicate 
Corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal section 
through the bowl of the pipe. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the same with the cap removed, and Fig. 
3 is a bottom plan view of the cap. 
In carrying out the invention the bowl A. of 
the pipe, which may be made of any desired 
shape or material, is provided with a central 
receptacle, B, for tobacco or other article to 
be smoked, having no direct communication 
with the aperture in the stem E. 
The receptacle B, which is located centrally 
Within the bowl, while illustrated as an inte 
gral portion thereof, may, if desired, be made 
removable, in which case it is secured to the 
bottom by a screw-thread, or in any other con 
venient or approved manner. 
An annular chamber, D, is made to inter. 
Vene the inner Walls of the bowl and the outer 
walls of the tobacco-receptacle, adapted to be 
ordinarily filled with cotton, d, or other equiva 
lent loose fabric admitting the passage of 
Smoke, a connection being formed between the 
receptacle B and the chamber D by producing 
one or more, preferably four, apertures, d, in 
the side of the said receptacle leading into the 
said chamber, as illustrated in Fig. 1. 
The integral neck E of the bowl, to which 
the stem E is attached, is provided with the 
usual channel, e, which, however, extends but 
a short distance inward, being connected With 
an annular groove, (, produced in the upper 
edge of the bowl proper by a tube, F, which 
tube is integral with said neck and the bowl, 
having an inlet from the groove of the latter 
at b, as illustrated in Figs. I and 2. 
The tobacco-receptacle B extends above the 
bowl, and is surrounded at that point by a rim 
or cap, H, which cap is provided with an an 
nular channel, h, in the under face to receive 
the inner flange, b, formed in the bowl by the 
groove ct, and an exterior thread adapted to 
engage a similar thread cut in the Outer Wall 
of the groove a. The cap thus screwed upon 
the bowl or secured thereto in any other ap 
proved manner renders the chamber D virtu 
ally air-tight. A connection is, however, ob 
tained between the said chamber and the stem 
of the pipe by cutting transversely in the un 
der side of the cap a recess, k, which recess is 
adapted to intersect the chamber D and regis 
ter with the inlet; b to the tube F. Thus in 
operation the smoke is drawn through the 
apertures d' into the chamber D, through the 
packing therein, up by means of the recess is 
into the inlet b, through the tube F into the 
channel of the neck E, and from thence through 
the stem. 
The above-described construction is particia 
larly adapted to meerschaum bowls or bowls of 
other material adapted to be colored, as the 
heated tobacco, not coming in contact with the 
bowl, will not and cannot burn the same. The 
smoke also comes cool to the mouth and free 
from nicotine, while the smoke passing to the 
stem in the manner shown prevents the latter 
from being choked by dust or other sediments. 
The bowl is also rendered much stronger by 
the absence of the usual hole in the bottom 
connecting with the neck. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Tetters 
Patent, is 
The herein described pipe, consisting of the 
bowl A, provided with the tobacco-receptacle 
B, having apertures d' in its sides near the 
bottom, the annular chamber D, surrounding 
the sides of the receptacle B, the annular and 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
CO 
2 
392,768 
screw-threaded groove a in the upper edge of a, and the transverse recess k, connecting the 
the bowl, the tube F on the front of the bowl chamber D with the passage b of the tube F, to 
and leading to the top thereof, the neck E, pro- as specified. 
vided with the channel e, extending inward a 
short distance beyond the tube F, and the 
screw-threaded cap H, provided with the an- 
nular groove h, forming two depending flanges 
fitting in the annular chamber D and groove 
MASON IRWIN, 
W. A. COOHRAN. 
GEORGE H. WARTMAN, 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392868.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CORN ELIUS KIMPLEN OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PROCESS OF Utilizing COA a UST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 392,868, dated November 13, 1888. 
Application filed October 22, 1887. Serial No. 253,122. 
(No specimens.) 
IO 
To aid uhon, it naily concern. 
Beit known that I, CoRNELIUS KIMPLEN, 
residing at Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, and a citizen of the United 
5 States, have invented a new and useful Im 
proved. Process or Method of Utilizing Coal 
Dust or Screenings, of which the following is 
a specification. . 
The object of this invention is to utilize coal 
dust or screenings which have heretofore been 
practically waste material by treating such 
material in the manner and for the purposes 
hereinafter described; and its nature consists 
in the process or method hereinafter described 
and claimed as new. 
In the treatment of what is usually called 
coal-screenings' or coal-dust'? I first take 
clay (potter's clay being preferred) and mix 
with water until the mixture is about the 
consistency of cream. 
I then thoroughly mix 
the screenings or dust with this cream of clay 
until the particles coat, and then by the use 
of a moderate heat dry the screenings So coated 
with clay. When dry, I mix with the clay 
25 coated coal dust or screenings finely-pulver 
ized rosin, sometimes known as flour of 
rosin, in the proportion of about one per 
cent.; but more or somewhat less may be used. 
I then apply or add a small amount of water 
and heat the mixture up in suitable vessels to 
about 212 Fahrenheit, and when the mass is 
uniformly heated, or in a proper condition 
and while hot, the mixture is placed in suit 
able molds and subjected to hydraulic or heavy 
pressure. The molds may vary in size and 
shape to suit the size and form of blocks or 
cakes desired, and any suitable press may be 
used. It will, however, be advantageous to 
prepare a press especially adapted to this 
I have found by practical experience and 
use that blocks or cakes formed in this man 
ner adhere together under the effects of either 
heat or moisture and burn with the regularity 
4) Work. 
45 of blocks of natural coal of equal size. 
3O 
35 
The foregoing process is mainly designed 
for utilizing the dust and screenings of anthra 
cite coal; but it will be found advantageous 
for other coals. 
I am aware that it has been proposed to 5d 
make an artificial fuel from a mixture of coal 
dust and clay formed into lumps which are to 
be dipped into pitch, tar, asphaltum, rosin, 
or other waterproofing material. A mixture 
of coal-dust and clay formed into lumps that 55 
are to be immersed in a liquid composed of 
rosin dissolved in benzine and afterward ex 
posed to heat to evaporate the volatile portion 
of the coating-liquid has been proposed for 
fuel. Coal-dust mixed with clay and turpen- 6o 
tine without heat and molding has also been 
suggested as fuel. These, however, I do not 
claim; and my invention is distinguished 
therefrom in requiring the employment of 
comparatively a small quantity of clay, which, 65 
when mixed with water, is applied as a coating 
to the coal-dust; and the clay-coated coal-dust, 
after drying, is thoroughly mixed with finely 
pulverized rosin and molded while hot, thus 
securing a more intimate mixture of the coal- 7c 
dust and rosin with greater cohesion of the 
particles, so that the molded block or lump of 
artificial fuel will maintain its integrity until 
consumed. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The herein-described process of forming 
coal dust or screenings into blocks or cakes 
for fuel, which consists in first coating the par 
ticles of coal dust or screenings with a mix 
ture of clay and water, then drying the clay 
coated coal dust or screenings, then mixing 
them with finely-pulverized rosin, and then 
heating the mass and molding it under press 
ure while hot, substantially as described. 
75 
CORNELIUS KIMPLEN, 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT H. ADAMS, 
L. L. BOND, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US392968.txt	(No Model.) 
A. J. PICKARD & G. MELSON. 
- 
No. 392,968, 
CAR COUPLING, 
Patented Nov. 13, 1888. 
 
  
 
7- - 
- 
a. 
sity 
O a 
M 
A% /2 2. 
$7 
 
f WNY 
a sWNN 
7A/A 
EYSEW3 a 
INNA?? 
fie 
2.sayr 
a HZ 
 
e 
ry 
A. 
R 
 
e- Q2 
A 
Zay, 4. 
928)itv.cssoa, 
%-46%-- 
77-44. % 
3,4-to-vibors, 
(22 
sy 4-,-elgesic 
?eez.-- 6, 
M 
- 
v 
ETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW JACKSON PICKARD AND GEORGE MELSON, OF EUGENE CITY, 
OREGON, ASSIGNORS OF ONE-HALF TO JOHN STRAUB AND WILLIAM. I. 
VAWTER, BOTH OF SAME PLACE, 
CARs COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 392,968, dated November 13, 1888. 
Application filed April 19, 1888. Serial No. 271,136. (No model.) 
To aid, whom, it may concert: 
Be it known that we, ANDREW JACKSON 
PICKARD and GEORGEMELSON, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Eugene City, in the 
5 county of Lane and State of Oregon, have in 
vented new and useful Improvements in Car 
Couplings, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
lo car-couplings; and it consists in certain novel 
features, hereinafter described and claimed. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a side elevation 
of our improved coupling. Fig. 2 is a verti 
cal longitudinal section of the same. Fig. 3 is 
I5 a perspective view of the link detached. Fig. 
4 is a perspective view of the link-follower de 
tached. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A desig 
nates the draw-bar of a car, and B the recessed 
2O draw-head attached thereto, which draw-head 
is provided with the upper and lower coupling 
pin holes, b l', respectively, and the mouth l', 
having the inwardly-converging top, bottom, 
and sides to direct the entering link. The re 
25 cess b on the inner side of the mouth is rectan 
gular. The link C has its ends c flattened on 
their outer edges, for a purpose hereinafter ex 
plained. D is the coupling-pin, having the 
rounded point d, as shown. E is the link-fol 
3o lower, rectangular in shape, and situated 
within the rectangular recess b. The said fol 
lower has the flat-bottomed transverse groove 
e in its front end, the vertical opening e' at a 
proper point of its length, and the stem e pro 
35 jecting from its inner end. Fis a pin resting 
in the opening e' and falling by gravity when 
the follower is pushed in into the recess f in 
the floor of the recess b, which recess f has 
the inner inclined side, f', and the outer ver 
4o tical side or shoulder, f', against which the 
outer side of the pin Fabuts and retains the 
55 
The squared outer edge of the end of the 5O 
follower within the draw-head against the ac 
tion of the spiral spring G, which surrounds the 
stem e of the follower, and the inner end of 
which bears against the end of the recess b or 45 
against the block g, inserted therein. 
It is evident that the spiral springs in the 
opposite draw-heads will prevent the link hav 
ing any loose motion. 
link rests in the flat-bottomed groove in the 
outer end of the corresponding follower, the 
pressure of which, caused by the spring in 
rear thereof, holds the link against the pin in 
side its bend and keeps it horizontal. 
Before coupling, the point of the coupling 
pin rests on the top of the follower, and when 
the latter is driven inward by the entering 
link the pin falls through the link and couples 
the draw-heads. 
Having described our invention, we claim 
The herein-described car-coupling, compris 
ing the draw-head having a recess, f, in its 
floor, provided with a vertical shoulder, f', at 
its front end and with an inclined rear end, f', 65 
the follower having a vertical opening, e, near 
its rear end and provided in its front end with 
the transverse flat-bottomed groove e, the pin 
F, playing freely in the vertical opening e and 
having its lower end resting in the recessf, 7o 
and the coupling-link having flat ends adapted 
to engage in the flat-bottomed groove e, sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 75 
in presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
ANDREW JACKSON PICKARD, 
GEORGE MELSON. 
W. R. McCORMACK, 
JOEL WARE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393068.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 393,068, 
E, HACKLANDER. 
CALF WEANER, 
Patented Nov. 20, 1888. 
 
28itv.coco 
34ucvtov, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN HACKLANDER, OF WELCOME, MINNESOTA. 
CAL F-WEAN ER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 393,068, dated November 20, 1888. 
Application filed July 25, 1888. Scrial No. 280,996, No model.) 
w 
To act willon, it invally concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN HACKILANDER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wel 
come, in the county of Martin and State of Min 
nesota, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Calf-Weaners, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
calf-Weaners; and it consists in the construc 
tion and novel combination of parts herein 
after described, illustrated in the drawings, and 
pointed out in the appended claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the device attached to the head of a 
calf. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the sam 
detached. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A des 
ignates a band of some stiff material, prefer 
ably metal, the ends of which are connected 
by the series of adjusting-openings a near one 
end, the single adjusting - opening a' in the 
other end, and the loop of wire a, which may 
be passed through the single opening and any 
one opening of the series, so as to convert the 
band into a ring of greater or less diameter 
for attachment around the lower part of the 
head or nose of a larger or smaller calf. 
B B are ears standing upward from nearly 
opposite points of the band so formed, and 
CC are straps having their lower ends con 
nected by rivets or otherwise to the ends of 
said ears, whence the strap C is passed up and 
over the top of the head of the calf, behind 
the horns and ears, and then brought down 
and connected to the upper end of the shorter 
strap, C, by a buckle, as shown. 
D ID are long spikes standing about radi 
ally outward from the front portion of the ring 
A, and d d are smaller and shorter spikes 
standing radially inward from said front por 
tion. 
E is a wire yoke having its ends hooked in 
openings in the ears B and provided centrally 
with the integral coiled spring e, which lies 
on the front of the face of the call?, above the 
nose, and by drawing the ring A outward pre 
vents the spikes d from sticking into the nose 
of the calf, the ring A being always arranged 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
to be sufficiently larger in diameter than the 
nose to which it is attached to prevent Said 50 
action of the spikes. 
When the calf attempts to suck, not only the 
spikes D prick the cow, but the front of the 
ring Ais moved inward and the spikes d prick 
the calf's nose, the spring e and yoke Egiving 
sufficiently to permit this and returning the 
front of the ring A to its normal position when 
the calf desists. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. A calf-weaner comprising an adjustable 
band-ring provided with ears to receive the 
securing-straps, radial inwardly and outwardly 
projecting spikes secured to said ring, and a 
spring-yoke secured to the ears thereof, as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a calf-weaner, the combination, with 
a band-ring to surround the nose of the calf 
and provided with opposite upstanding ears, 
the straps C C, buckled together and hlding 
the band-ring in place, and the spikes d, stand 
ing inward from the front part of the band 
ring, of the yoke having its ends hooked in 
openings in the ears of the band-ring, and the 
central integral coiled spring on said yoke, by 
means of which yoke and spring the front of 75 
the band-ring, which is of greater diameter 
than the surrounded nose, is forced outward, 
and the spikes d are prevented from pricking 
the calf, substantially as specified. 
prising the band-ring A, rendered adjustable 
in diameter by the openings a a? and wire loop 
a', and having the opposite ears B, the spikes 
D, outstanding from the front of the band-ring, 
the spikes b, standing inward from the front of 85 
the band-ring, the straps C C, for holding the 
band-ring in position, and the yoke E, having 
the integral coiled spring at its center, sub 
stantially as specified. 
own I have hereto affixed my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
3. The herein-described calf-weaner, com- 8c 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my go 
- 
EDWIN FIACKLANDER. 
Witnesses: 
A. W. DEANE, 
CIIAS. E. CAN RIGIIT, 
w 
- 
--- 
--- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393168.txt	(No Model.) 
M. MAXAM, 
FENCE. 
No. 393,168, 
Patented Nov. 20, 1888. 
WS 
W 
N SN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
53. 422 ettetvic 
21464-644%, 
- 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MELVIN MAXAM, OF BELOIT, OHIO. 
FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 393,168, dated November 20, 1888. 
Application filed August 13, 1888. Serial No. 282,674. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MELVIN MAXAM, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at Beloit, 
in the county of Mahoning and State of Ohio, 
haveinvented certain new and useful Improve. 
ments in Fences; and I do declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in fences of that class in 
which the rails are supported and secured in 
position by wires; and it has for its object to 
improve upon previous constructions of this 
character, and to construct a fence with less 
parts and with much less trouble in securing 
the said parts together. 
The novelty resides in the peculiar combi 
nations and the construction, arrangement, 
and adaptation of parts, all as more fully here 
inafter described, shown in the drawings, and 
then particularly pointed out in the appended 
claim. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure l is a perspective view of a portion 
of a fence constructed in accordance with m 
invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical section through 
the line ac a' of Fig. 1, looking in the direction 
of the arrow in said figure. 
Referring now to the details of the drawings 
by letter, A designates the stakes which cross 
each other near the top, as shown, and at their 
junction they are secured together by means 
of the wire loop a. The lower ends of these 
stakes are connected together and braced by 
means of the wire b, the ends of which are se. 
cured, one to each stake, and between the ends 
of the wire is formed a loop, c, which closely 
embraces the lapped ends of the lower rails of 
two adjacent sections. 
The top rails are secured as follows: d is a 
wire, one end of which is passed through the specified. 
loop a, then back of the crossed ends of the 
adjacent stakes and around the overlapped presence of two witnesses. 
ends of the two top rails supported by the 
crotch of said stakes and by said loop (t. The 
other end of this wire d is secured to the lower 
one of the overlapped bottom rails at the next 
stakes after first passing through the loop c 
of the wire b, which embraces the said lower 
rails. By this arrangement the strain on the 
wired tends to more firmly bind the parts in 
their positions, and the liability of the same 
to become displaced or moved end Wise is 
avoided. This diagonal wired may be used 
on every section or on every alternate one, as 
preferred; but on hilly and uneven ground it 
will be found best to employ it at every sec 
tion. 
The rails intervening between the top and 
bottom rails are secured together and to the 
top and bottom rails by the wire e, which 
passes around each rail, and between each rail 
is twisted, as shown. 
A fence constructed as above described will 
be found to be very strong and durable, and 
can be easily and quickly put up or taken 
down. The connection of the diagonal wire 
d and movement of the parts, either lateral or 
in the line of the fence, only tends to make the 
parts more secure. 
I am aware that diagonal braces, both of 
wood and wire, have long been used in fences, 
and do not seek to claim such construction 
broadly. I attach special importance to my 
peculiar manner of connecting the diagonal 
wire to the top rails and to the stakes, whereby 
the stakes and the top rails are firmly held to 
gether and displacement of the same avoided. 
Any lateral movement or movement in the 
line of the fence only tends to more firmly 
draw the parts together, and the binding-wire 
( also serves to hold the parts close together. 
What I claim as new is 
The fence described, consisting of the crossed 
stakes and the loop embracing the same at 
their junction, the cross-wire securing the 
lower ends of said stakes, the said wire being 
formed with a loop embracing the overlapped 
ends of the botton rails, and the diagonal 
brace-wire, secured at one end to the loop of 
said bottom cross-wire, and its other end passed 
through the upper loop and to the rear of the 
crossed ends of the stakes and secured to the 
overlapped ends of the top rails, substantially 
as shown and described, and for the purpose 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
MARY O. READ, 
JANET. A. READ. 
MEL WIN MAXAMI. 
Witnesses: 
60 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393268.txt	(No Model.) 
W. ROBINSON, 
CAR COUPLING. 
No. 393,268, 
Patented Nov. 20, 1888. 
 
A. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM ROBINSON, OF BELLEFONTAINE, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO WM. LANE, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR COUPNG 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 393,268, dated November 20, 1888. 
Application filed February 27, 1888. Serial No. 265,416. (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM ROBINSON, of 
Bellefontaine, in the county of Logan and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Automatic Car-Couplings; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, Such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use it, 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
automatic car-couplings; and it consists in 
the combination of a buffer-head, which is re 
cessed on itsinner side, with a spring-actuated 
hook, which is pivoted in the recessed buffer 
head, and which has a cam or projection 
formed upon its inner side for the projection 
on the operating-lever to strike against and 
thus force the hooks apart to uncouple them, 
as will be more fully described hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
car-coupling which can be used in connection 
with the usual link and pin, if so desired, but 
which is automatic in its action, simple in con 
struction, and always reliable. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a car-coupling 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a de 
tached view of the operating cross-rod. Fig. 
3 is a perspective of a coupling embodying my 
invention. 
A represents the buffer-head, which is re 
cessed on its inner side to receive the pivoted 
hook B. Through the front end of the buffer 
35 head and in the front end of the hook B is 
formed a suitable opening or recess, C, so that 
the ordinary link can be used in connection 
with a coupling of this kind. The coupling 
pins, when links are used, are passed down 
through the opening D, which extends through 
the front end of the buffer-head only. Each 
head is recessed, as here shown, so as to have 
the coupling-hook placed entirely within it, 
and thus protect the front ends of the hooks 
when the cars run together, so as to prevent 
them from being crushed or broken. Bear 
ing against one of the timbers of the cars at 
one end and against the rear end of the hook 
25 
O 
45 
55 
at the other is a suitable spring, F, which 
keeps the front end of the hook always pressed 
forward, ready to engage with a hook of an 
other car, but which spring allows the front 
end of each hook to readily give backward 
when the cars run together, in order to allow 
the points of the hooks to pass each other. 
Upon the outer edge of the hook is formed a 
cam or beveled projection, G, against which 
the beveled projection H upon the operating 
cross-rod I strikes, for the purpose of forc 
ing the hook back into the recess in the head 
and thus uncoupling it. The rod I is jour 
naled upon the under side of the car and is 
provided with a handle, J, at each end. The 
projection H hangs downward below the buf 
fer-heads until one of the handles is operated, 
when this beveled projection His forced down 
ward, so as to strike against the cam or pro 
jection G upon the hook and force the front 
end of the hook backward into the recess in the 
head. 
In order to prevent the buffer-heads from 
being moved laterally far enough to allow the 
hooks to become uncoupled, a guard, O, is se 
cured to each car, as shown, and which is just 
sufficiently far removed from the buffer-head 
to allow the end of the opposing buffer-head 
to freely enter. The hooks being held in po 
sition by means of the springs IF, and the 
heads A being prevented from moving later 
ally by the guards, it is impossible for the 
cars to become disconnected after they have 
once been coupled, unless the rod I is oper 
ated. 
In case it is desired to operate the rod I 
from the top of a freight-car, a rod will be 
made to extend up the side of the car in the 
usual manner, and which will be connected to 
one of the handles J. In case this coupling 
is to be applied to a passenger-car, a short 
lever will be pivoted upon the end of the car go 
and connected to the front end of the hook by 
a short connecting-rod, which passes through 
the outer side of the buffer-head. 
This coupling being automatic, there is no 
necessity of the brakeman venturing between 95 
cars, is cheap and simple in construction, is 
75 
s 
393,268 
positive in its operation, and dispenses with the beveled projection H, and the guard which Io 
all necessity for brakemen to couple the cars is secured to the end of the cal, substantially 
together. 
Intestimony whereof I affix my signature in 
5 claim- 
as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM ROBINSON. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
The combination of a buffer-head recessed 
upon its inner side, with the spring-actuated 
pivoted hook placed in the recess and pro- 
vided with a cam, G, the rod I, provided with 
Witnesses: 
M. R. BROWN, 
H. C. MITCHELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393369.txt	(No Model.) 
A, HAWKINS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
COMBINEDIRONING TABLE, WASH BENCH AND STEP AND 
EXTENSON LADDER, 
No. 393,369, 
 
Patented Nov. 27, 1888. 
 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington. C. 
. 
(No Model.) 
A. HAWKINS, 
- 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
COMBINED IRONING TABLE, WASH BENCH, AND STEP AND 
EXTENSION ADDER 
No. 393,369. 
Patented Nova 1888. 
t - 
} 
es 
-2  / y 
N -es (y 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPHUS HAWKINS, OF SALEM, WEST VIRGINIA. 
COMBINED IRONING-TABLE, WASH-BENCH, AND STEP AND EXTENSION LADDER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 393,369, dated November 27, 1888. 
Application filed March 24, 1888. Serial No. 26S,358. (No model.) 
55 
7.) 
To all, whon, it naif concern: 
Beit known that I, ADOLPHUS HAWKINs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Sa 
lem, in the county of Harrison and State of 
West Virginia, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in a Combined Ironing-Table, 
Wash - Bench, and Step and Extension Lad 
der, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
a combined ironing-table, wash - bench, and 
step and extension ladder; and it consists in 
the peculiar construction and combination of 
devices, that will be more fully set forth here 
inafter, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of my invention when arranged to form a 
wash-bench. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal Sectional 
view when arranged to form an ironing-table. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of my invention 
when arranged to form a step-ladder. Fig. 4 
is a similar view of the same when arranged 
to form an extension-ladder. Fig. 5 is a per 
spective view showing the device folded. 
A represents a pair of longitudinal bars, 
which are connected by a series of transverse 
boards, B, which boards are equidistant apart 
and are arranged at a suitable angle with re 
lation to the bars A. A cross-bar or rod, C, 
connects the bars A at one end thereof, and at 
a suitable distance from said CrOSS-bar the bars 
A are provided with openings D. At the op 
posite extremities of the bars A are openings 
E, and on one side or edge of said bars, near 
the center of the same, are notches or recesses 
F. The said bars A and cross-boards B con 
stitute a frame, G. 
H represents a pair of bars, which are con 
nected at one end by a rung, I, which rung 
extends through the opening D, and thereby 
pivots the bars H to the frame G, near one 
end of the latter. The opposite ends of the 
bars H are connected by a rung, L, and the 
said bars are provided at their centers with 
series of openings M, and are further pro 
vided at a suitable distance from said open 
ings M with openings N, as shown. The rungs 
I and L are longer than the width of frame G., 
and thereby the bars H are arranged on the 
outer sides of said frame G. Said bars H and 
rungs IL constitute a frame, O. 
V represents an ironing-board, of suitable 6 
P represents a pair of side bars, which are 
pivoted to the outer sides of frame G, near one 
end thereof and at a suitable distance from the 
openings E. The said bars P are connected 
by a series of rungs, R, which are arranged at 
suitable regular distances apart, and said bars 
P are provided at a suitable distance from 
their pivoted ends with openings S, and are 
further provided at their centers with series 
of openings T. Said bars P and rungs R con 
stitute the frame C. On the outer sides of the 
frame G, near the center thereof, are pivoted 
hooks U. 
length and width, which is adapted to be 
placed on the upper side of the frame G and 
to entirely cover the same. Said ironing 
board is provided on opposite sides, near its 
center, with vertical longitudinal slotsW, and 
has pins X, which extend transversely across 
the centers of the said slots. To one end of 
the board Wishinged an extended board, Y, 
which forms a shirt-board, adapted especially 
for ironing shirt-bosoms, and said hinged 
board Y is also adapted to be used as a writ 
ing stand or desk. 
Z represents a brace-arm, which is provided 
at its inner end with a curved recess, A', and 
B' represents a rod which is adapted to be in 
serted through either of the openings M, N, S 
T, and E of the various frames. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
In order to form a wash-bench, the frames O 
and Care crossed under one side of the frame 
G, so that the central openings, T and M, reg 
ister with each other, and the rod B is then 
inserted through the said central registering 
openings, thereby rigidly securing the frames 
O and C together and supporting the frame 
Ghorizontally at a suitable elevation from the 
ground or floor. Said frame G serves to sup 
port the wash-tubs. By adjusting the pivoted 
frames O and C, so as to cause the inner and 
outer openings of the series MT to register 
with each other, the angles at which said 
frames are inclined may be changed, so as to 
cause the frame G to be supported in a higher 
or lower plane. 
In order to form an ironing-board, the board 
Wis placed on the frame G, while the same re 
mains in the position indicated in Fig. 1, and 
y 
90 
95 
TO 
5 
O 
25 
35 
5 
SO 
 
393,369 
45 
step and extension ladder thus constructed is 
extremely cheap and simple, is very readily 
arranged to form either of the said devices, 
and will be found of great practical utility. 
IIaving thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination of the frame G, having 
the cross-boards B and the openings E at one 
end, the frame O, pivoted to one end of frame to 
G. and having the openings M, the frame C. 
pivoted near the opposite end of frame G and 
having the openings S and T, and the rungs 
R, said frames O C being thereby adapted to 
be extended outward in opposite directions 55 
from the ends of frame G and to be crossed 
under the same, and the removable bar B', 
adapted to be inserted through the register 
ing openings of the frames, for the purpose 
set forth, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the frame G, having 
the cross-boards B, and provided at one end 
with a cross bar, C, the frame O, having the 
rung I, which passes through openings in the 
sides of frame G near the bar C, and thereby 
pivots the frame O to the frame G, the frame 
C, pivoted to the frame G, near the opposite 
end thereof, and having the rungs R, the board 
V, adapted to be secured on the upper side of 
frame G, and having a hinged board, Y, at one 7o 
end, and the brace or arm Z, adapted to bear 
on the bar or rod C, and having its inner end 
engaging the rung I, for the purpose set forth, 
substantially as described. 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
in testimony that I claim the foregoing as 75 
Co 
ADOLPHUS HAWKINS. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. HAYMOND, 
HUGEI JARVIS. 
O 
15 
the said board V is locked to the fraune Galad 
Secured thereto by means of the hooks U, which 
enter the slotsW and engage the cross-pins X. 
When the shirt board Y is extended from 
5 the board V, the same is supported by the 
arm or brace Z, the latter resting on the cross 
bar C, and having its inner recessed end en 
gaging the rung I, as shown in Fig. 2. 
In order to form a step-ladder, the ironing 
board is removed from the frame G, the rod 
B is removed from the central openings in the 
frame O and C, the frame C is turned down 
ward at a suitable angle with relation to frame 
G, and the frame O is drawn upward, so as to 
cause its openings N to register with the open 
ings T of frame C, and the rod D is then in 
Serted in the said registering openings, so as 
to lock the frames O and C together and there. 
by arrange the device in the position shown 
in Fig. 3. When thus arranged, the cross 
boards B constitute the steps of the ladder, as 
will be readily understood. 
In order to form an extension-ladder, the rod 
Bis withdrawn from the openings N and T, and 
the frame C' is extended from the upper end 
of frame G and in line there with, so that the 
openings S are caused to register with the 
openings E of frame G, and the bar D is then 
inserted through the registering openings S 
and E, thereby locking the frames together, 
as shown in Fig. 5. 
In order to reduce the device, so that it will 
occupy but a small space when not in use or 
when packed for transportation, the frame C 
is swung against the frame G at a slight angle 
in relation thereto, so as to cause the upper 
rung, R, to enter and engage the notches or 
recesses F, and the frame O is also folded 
against the frame G, so as to cause the bars H. 
4O to bear upon the bars P, as shown in Fig. 5. 
A combined ironing-table, wash-bench, and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393469.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 393469, 
W. W. GRISCOM, 
DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINE. 
Patented Nov. 27, 1888. 
 
% RS 
s 
S 
MIS-i, 
|| 
E 
I 
El 
HE 
t 
S 
i 
- 
N 
 
RSR 
s 
. 
SN 
SNit-1 co-co, 
-6 
%-6-% - 
46 
Sy -bis attorney2%-76 
; va, 
a 
32, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. GRISCOM, OF HAVERFORD COLLEGE, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR 
TO THE ELECTRO DYNAMIC COMPANY OF PHILADELPHIA 
DYNAMO - ELECTRC WAC NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 393,469, dated Noveliber 27, 1888. 
Application filed June 30, 1888. 
Serial No. 2S, GS4. (No model.) 
O 
- 
- 
OtOS. 
Construction of the armature. 
To at Z u?ion it 7) al/ conceit. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM W. GRISCOM, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Haverford College, in the county of Mont 
5 gomery and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Dynamo-Electric Machines, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in details 
IO of construction of dynamo-electric machines 
The improvements specially concern the 
I form my armature-core from a series of 
I5 convolutions of soft-iron wire wound upon a 
framework. This frame-work itself also con 
Struct of Softiron. The use of snch wire avoids 
the circulation of magnetic variations or mag 
netic eddies. By using a frame-work of mag 
2O netic material-as iron-I add to the magnetic 
volume and provide a frame. work of consider 
able strength without the addition of much 
weight. If clean iron strips were used, thesev 
eral successive convolutions of the wire would 
25 be magnetically united-that is, the benefits 
due to the use of the wire would be neutralized 
by connecting one convolution with another in 
such a manner that magnetic currents, eddies, 
or variations could circulate in the entire mass 
3o of iron as a whole; but by covering the surface 
of this frame-work with a non-magnetic metal 
such connection is avoided and each convolu 
tion, as well as the frame-work, is magnetically 
independent. I have found tinned iron to 
35 answer this purpose exceedingly well, and I 
therefore construct the frame - work of my 
armature of tinned iron. By placing in posi 
tion a frame-work of tinned iron and winding 
one or more layers of the iron wire thereon, 
4o then placing in position a second series of 
tinned-iron strips and winding more iron wire 
thereon, I am enabled to produce a firmer and 
a more mechanically perfect armature-core. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
Figure 1 is an end view. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal section. Fig. 3 is a detail. 
R indicates a ring of cast-iron, having a 
cross-section, as shown in Fig. 2. 
S is a spider, preferably of brass, having 
four or more arms Or projections entering 
45 invention. 
notches fin the iron rings R, and Scriving to 
support the rings, and to thus equalize and 
distribute the points of support of the Weight 
of the armature. These spiders are keyed to 55 
a shaft, s, in the usual manner. At intervals 
fix a series of strips of tinned iron, 1, to cor 
responding peripheral points of the two rings, 
each and every strip of this series being at the 
same radial distance from the center, and I 6o 
rivet these strips in to the shoulder of the ring 
R, as at '. Each strip of this series is sepa 
'ated from the one next succeeding by an equal 
circumferential distance. A second Series of 
tinned-iron strips, in, are placed at equal cir- 65 
cumferential distances, each and every strip 
being located at an equal radial distance at 
points between the first named series of Strips 
and the center, but in every case in the Sanhe 
radial line. On both sides of both series of 7o 
strips, and also between these tinned-iron 
strips, I place soft-iron wire of comparatively 
large gage, which I prefer to wind on in the 
direction of rotation. By this means magnetic 
eddy - currents are almost entirely avoided. 
The armature is aired and retained at a low 
temperature under the effects of continued use, 
and the weight of the structure is equally dis 
tributed, while for its generative power the 
armature is extremely light. 
The copper conducting-wire is wound and 
connected to commutator-segments after what 
is generally called the Gramme plan, and 
the field-magnets are of any well-known con 
Struction. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by I.et. 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a dynamo-electric 
machine, of an armature composed of two par 
allel cast-iron rings, strips of tinned iron unit 
ing said rings at equidistant circumferential 
points, and one or more layers of soft-iron 
wire enveloping said strips in non-magnetic 
contact there with. 
2. The combination, in a dynamo-electric 
machine, of an armature composed of two par 
allel cast-iron rings, two concentric series of 
tinned-iron strips, having their opposite ends 
connected to said rings, respectively, and one 
or more layers of soft-iron wire enveloping 
said strips in non-magnetic contact there with. 
3. In a dynamo-armature, the combination 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
393,469 
of two parallel cast-iron rings respectively 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
connected to a rotating shaft by spiders of non- York and State of New York, this 28th day of 
magnetic material, a series of tinned-iron June, A. D. 1888. 
Strips connecting the two rings, and one or 
5 more layers of soft-iron wire uniformly dis- 
posed upon or around the said strips, substan- 
tially as described. 
DANIEL E. DELAVAN, 
WM. I. WANSIZE. 
W. W. GRISCOM. 
m 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393570.txt	(No Model.) 
W. R. MYERS. 
FIRE KINDIER, 
No. 393,570. 
Patented Nov. 27, 1888. 
9. 
2 2.4% 
Are 6 (6% 
NVENTOR: 
f 
" . 
ORNEYS. 
BY 
M. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, i.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. MYERS, OIF IIAIDDONIFIELD, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO FIRED 
ERICK E. SWOPE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, AND JAMES V. 
LAFFERTY, OF APE MAY, NEW TERSEY. 
FRE. K. NDLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Fetters Patent No. 393,570, dated November 27, 1888. 
Application filed April 1, 18SR. 
Sci. No. 269,53S. (No mol. 
45 
55 
SO 
vapor igniting and producing a flame which 4o 
may be utilized for kindling the fire or con 
tinuing combustion. The ends of the body 
are cut, forming lips E, which are bent down 
on the heads, thus securing the latter and 
avoiding rivets or other fastenings for connect 
ing the heads with the body. 
As the ends of the casing are held by the 
rivets (, , when the wall is heated by the pri 
mary flame of the coating material the ends 
and center expand unequally, so that the center 
portions of the joint open to a considerable 
extent, thus permitting the vafor generated 
within the casing to escape and ignite at the 
said joint. When the casing cools after ser 
vice, the joint closes and prevents the escape 
of the fluid contents. 
I am aware that it is not new, broadly con 
sidered, to construct the casing of a fire-kin 
dler of separate imperforate parts; neither is 
it new to secure the heads of a perforated cas- 6o 
ing by means of lugs integral with the casing, 
and I therefore disclaim the Same. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A fire-kindler and fuel-block consisting of 
a cylindrical casing of imperforate sheet metal 
with overlapping contact edges riveted at or 
near the ends and having the lips E integral 
therewith, and imperforate heads secured in to 
place by Said lips, and a packing of incom 
bustible material, said parts being combined 
substantially as described. 
65 
WILLIAM R. MYERS. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN A. WIEDERSHEINI, 
JOHN K. PLITT. 
C 
To all won it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. MYERs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Had. 
donfield, in the county of Camden, State of 
5 New Jersey, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Fire - Kindlers and Fuel 
Blocks, which improvement is fully set forth 
in the following specification and accompany 
ing drawing. 
My invention consists of a fire-kindler and 
fuel-block formed of a metallic casing contain 
ing filling or packing which is saturated with 
hydrocarbon or other suitable inflammable 
oil, the vapor generated therein escaping at 
I5 the joints of the casing, whereby it may be 
Consumed. 
The figure represents a persective view of 
a fire-kindler and fuel-block embodying my 
invention. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
casing formed of the heads B and a peripheral 
wall, C. Within the casing is a filling or pack 
ing, D, of mineral wool, asbestus, or other 
suitable indestructible material, the same being 
25 saturated with hydrocarbon fluid or other 
suitable oil, which may be readily vaporized 
when the casing is subjected to heat. The ends 
of the wall C are lapped and connected by 
rivets at a, near the top and bottom thereof, 
3o whereby they are held closely in contact in 
order to prevent escape of the fluid contents 
of the casing. 
The operation is as follows: The casing is 
coated with hydrocarbon fluid or oil and the 
35 casing placed in the combustion chamber or 
fire pot of a stove, &c., and the coating ignited. 
As the casing becomesheated, the fluid therein 
is vaporized and escapes at the joints between 
the heads and body and side of the body, the 
2C 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393670.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
- 
J. M. SEGUR. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
V 
HAND CORN PLANTER 
No. 393,670, 
Patented Nov. 27, 1888. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ilm?. It (E 
it is 
 
 
  
 
 
gill, 
 
|| 
 
t 
1. 2 
wer 
S. 
S. 
o 
e. 
2SSleaf 
(No Model.) 
J. M. SEGUR. 
HAND CORN PLANTER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 393,670, 
Patented NOW. 27, 1888. 
 
 
 
   
 
rt, refeRS. Photo-lithographer.washington... c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH M. SEGUR, OF ADRIAN, MICHIGAN. 
HAND CORN-PLANTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 393,670, dated November 27, 1888. 
Application filed July 30, 1888. Serial No. 281,360. (No model.) 
IO pertains to make and use the same. 
To all lifu.077 it may concern: 
in a straight line and rest against the inner 
Be it known that I, JosEPH. M. SEGUR, a citi 
face of said standard and extend down on each 
Zen of the United States, residing at Adrian, in 
side of the plate D to its lower end, the outer 
the county of Lenawee and State of Michigan, faces of said plates being flush with the edges 55 
5 have invented certain new and useful Improve. of the standard. The lower ends of the plates 
ments in Hand Corn-Planters; and I do hereby E are extended and form wings e, projecting 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex- below the hopper on each side of the plate D, 
act description of the invention, such as will said wings substantially forming a continua 
enable other's skilled in the art to which it ap- tion of the sides of the hopper, the lower end 6o 
of said hopper engaging with shoulders e', 
My invention relates to improvements in formed in said side plates. The upper ends, 
hand corn-planters; and it consists in a certaine, of the side plates are extended, so as to en 
novel construction, arrangement, and combi. gage with the outer side of the hopper, and are 
nation of the various parts, all of which I will connected by a plate, which extends from the 65 
I5 now proceed to point out and describe, refer. upper end of the plate E to the outer side of 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, the hopper, forming an inclined bottom, F, for 
in which- 
said hopper, which communicates with the ap 
Figure 1 is a perspective of my improved erture C. Said aperture Ciscovered by a plate 
planter, part of the hopper being broken away. of glass or isinglass. The casting Eis thus held 7o 
2O Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the same; Fig. 3, secured to the lower end of the standard by 
a vertical central section; and Figs. 4, 5, and the hopper, said casting being located par 
6 are details of various parts of my said in- tially within said hopper. 
vention. 
G is a plunger, preferably formed of metal 
Referring to said drawings, A represents the and mounted between the side plates, E, plate 75 
25 standard; B, a hopper, of ordinary construc- E, and standard A. 
1. 
- 
- 
of the standard within the hopper. Said rods 85 
B is a top or lid for said hopper, hinged to plate D, and is cut away so as to accommodate 8o 
G' is a slot in the upper portion of the plun 
tion, Secured to the sides of the standard and 
having its lower end open. Said hopper is ger, of the same width as the aperture or slot 
preferably made of sheet metal. 
C. The lower end of the plunger rests on the 
3O its outer upper edge and held closed by means it to said plate. In the upper corners of the 
of a spring, a, attached to the standard. The plunger are formed two curved grooves, g, in 
lower end of the standard is slotted, so as to which are secured the bent ends of the plun 
form the upper and lower apertures, C and C, ger-rods H, which extend up along the side 
and intermediate contracted aperture, C. 
35 D is a flat metal plate secured to and pro- pass out through apertures b in the inner edge 
jecting below the lower end of the standard. of the top or lid B. 
The upper portion of said plate is slotted. 
A? are two parallel longitudinal slots in the 
D' is an inclined seed-passage formed inte- upper end of the standard. Through these 
gral with the plate and communicating with slots the plunger-rods pass, and are then bent 9o 
4o the slot in the same. Said seed-passage pro- up parallel with and resting close against the 
jects through the lower aperture, C, and ex- opposite side of the standard. This bent por 
tends up to the contracted portion of the tion of the rods forms shoulders or stops h, 
slot. The upper end or mouth of the seed- which limit the upward and downward move 
passage is open, and is adapted to receive the ment of the plunger-rods and plunger as said 95 
45 seed when discharged from the measuring-cup, stops come in contact with the top or bottom 
as hereinafter described. 
of said slots. The upper ends of the rods are 
E is a casting, which consists of the side 
connected by a handle, H. It will thus be 
plates, E, connected by the flat plate E, which, 
seen that when the plunger-rods are passed 
when the casting is in position, is parallel with through the slots in the standard and their Ioo 
So the inner face of the standard. The edges of lower ends secured to the plunger they require 
the plates E' next to the standard are formed no further fastening to secure them to the 
r 
 
393,670 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
5 each side of the contracted aperture C. 
to engages with a slot, E, in the plate E. 
In the lopper B, arrange a partition, 13", 
standard and hold them in an operative posi 
extending from the standard at a point near 
tion. 
the top of said hopper to the inclined bottom 
I is a slide mounted in the slot G' between 
F near its center, thus dividing the hopper 
the plate E and the portion of the standard on 
into two compartments, IB" and B'. In the 
lower end of the partition is an aperture, l', 
K K are grooves on each side of the slide, 
through which the corn passes from the com 
with which lugs L I, on the sides of the slot (' 
partment 3' to the compartment B", and from 
(ngage. 
thence to the measuring-cup. This prevents 
k is a projection or lug on the slide, which 
the corn from becoming wedged in the botto in 
On 
of the hopper around the measuring-cup so as 
the face of the slide approximate to the stand 
to prevent the plunger from being operated. 
ard is formed a seed-measuring cup, M, hav. 
R is an adjustable stop having arms , ex 
ing an adjustable block, MI, in one end pro 
tending up on each side of the seed-passage 
vided with a slot, m. and secured to the slide 
and secured to the standard by bolts '', pro 
I5 by a set screw, in', by means of which the 
block can be adjusted so as to regulate the ca. vided with clamping nuts and passing througll 
slots '' in said arms. This stop can be moved 
pacity of the measuring cup. 
up or down so as to regulate the depth of plant 
The upper end, I, of the slide, above and on 
ing. 
the same side as the measuring-cup, is cut away, 
S is a reversible scraper-plate located be 
2O forming a beveled shoulder, i, immediately 
tween the wings e and having one end resting 
above said cup. The lower end, 1", of the 
on the lower end of the hopper and its other 
slide, below and on the opposite side from the 
end resting on the plate I). 
measuring-cup, is also cut away, forming a 
T is a spring having its ends secured to studs 
shoulder, i'. In mediately below this shoul 
on the outside of the wings e and its central 
25 der is a slightly-raised portion, i', which enters 
portion engaging with a notched lug, 8, Se 
a recess, f', in the plunger immediately below 
cured about the center of the outside of the 
the slot G", when said plunger is on its upward 
scraper-plate, and holds the same ill position. 
stroke, the lower end of the slot engaging with 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
the shoulder i, and the lugs L I, engaging 
The corn is placed in the compartment B of 
3o with the upper ends of the grooves KK, carry 
the hopper and passes through the aperture 
said slide up with said plunger, so that the 
l" to the compartment B'. On the upward 
seed-cup in the same communicates with the 
stroke of the plunger the slide I is li?ted and 
upper aperture, C. On the downward move 
its upper end, I', passes through the corn in 
ment of the plunger the slide does not start, 
the bottom of the compartment, thus stirring 
35 to move down until the lugs L L engage with 
it up and preventing it from choking at the 
the lower ends of the grooves K. K. The slide 
bottom of the hopper. When the plunger has 
is then carried down with said plunger. When 
reached the upward limit of its stroke, the 
said slide has reached the slot in the plate D, 
measuring-cup is in communication with the 
it enters the slot in the same, and the surface 
compartment B", or more directly with the 
4o of its lower end, I', next to the plunger is 
upper aperture, C, in the standard. Such 
about flush or a little below the surface of the 
corn then as has fallen over the top of the slide 
plate. 
rests between said slide and the standard, and 
O is a rigid metal cut-off located in the con 
also in the aperture C, from which the meas 
tracted portion of the slot C. Said cut-off is 
uring-cup is filled. On the downward stroke 
5 composed of the bent portion 0, presenting a 
of the plunger said plunger moves in advance 
flat surface, o', to the seed-measuring cup, and 
of the slide until its lugs L L engage with the 
a straight end, o, to which is secured a spring, 
lower ends of the grooves in said slide, when 
l, the ends of which are secured to the stand 
it is carried down and the measuring-cup 
ard on each side of the slot. From the de 
moved past the cut-off O. When the cup 
5o scription of the plunger and slide and their 
passes said cut-off, it cmpties the corn into the 
operation it will be seen that there is consid 
seed-passage I)", the discharge end of the seed 
erable lost motion between said plunger and 
passage being closed by the lower end of 
slide, and that the play of the slide is much 
the slide I. On the next upward stroke of 
less than that of the plunger. It will there 
plunger the discharge end of the seed-passage 
55 fore readily be seen that it requires but a small 
is opened and the seed falls between the 
cut-off Surface, o, to separate the corn in the 
scraper and plate I) which is between the 
cup from that in the hopper, and that there is 
wings e. On the next downward stroke of 
much less liability of the kernels becoming 
the plunger the lower end of said plunger 
wedged between said cup and cut-off than when 
forces the lower end of the scraper open and 
6o the measuring-cup has a play equal to the 
discharges the corn into the ground. 
plunger, and the cut-off surface has to be 
It will be seen that the plunger has sufficient 
lengthened to correspond with this play. This 
play to get above the corn which is between 
is an important feature of my invention, and 
the scraper and plate D, at the same time the 
in the construction I have described I produce 
slide in which the measuring-cup is located 
65 a planter in which it is almost impossible for 
has very much less play, and it is therefore 
the seed-corn to become wedged between the 
necessary to have but a short cut-off to close 
cut-off and measuring-cup. 
IOS 
I IO 
I I5 
25 
s: 
393,670 
3 
C) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Said cup, thus rendering it almost impossible 
for the corn to become wedged in between the 
cut-off and measuring-cup. By dividing the 
hopper into two compartments I also prevent 
the corn from choking in the bottom of the 
By means of the transparent covering 
Same. 
of the aperture C the operator can at all 
times tell if the compartment B is being sup 
plied with the proper amount of seed, and 
also ascertain if the measuring-cup is being 
properly filled at each stroke of the planter. 
This transparent covering forms substantially 
a sight-feed device for the planter. 
The peculiar construction of the plunger 
rods enables me to dispense with any guides 
or fastenings to secure them to the standard, 
and the shoulders formed by bending the same 
and passing them through the slots in the 
standard form an effective and strong stop 
which limits the movement of the plunger. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a hand corn-planter, the combination, 
with a standard, a hopper secured thereto, and 
a plunger mounted in suitable guides in said 
hopper and having a longitudinal slot therein, 
of a slide loosely mounted in the slot in the 
plunger and having a seed-measuring cup in 
said slide, all constructed, arranged, and op 
erating substantially as described, whereby the 
play of the plunger is greater than that of the 
slide, for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a hand corn-planter, the combination, 
with a standard having a slot in its lower end, 
a cut-off located in said slot, a hopper secured 
to the standard, and a plunger mounted in suit 
able guides within the hopper and having a 
longitudinal slot in its upper portion, of a 
slide mounted in the slot in the plunger and 
having a seed measuring cup formed in its 
face next to the cut-off, and provided with lon 
gitudinal grooves in each side, and lugs on the 
sides of the slot in the plunger mounted in the 
grooves in the slide and adapted to reciprocate 
the slide as said lugs engage alternately with 
opposite ends of the grooves as the plunger is 
operated, all constructed, arranged, and op 
erating substantially as shown and described, 
whereby the plunger will have a greater play 
than the slide, for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a hand corn-planter, the combination, 
with a standard having a slot in its lower end, 
a hopper Secured to said standard, a cut-off 
located in the slot in the standard, an inclined 
seed-passage projecting through the slot in the 
standard below the cut-off and on the side of 
the standard opposite the hopper, a plunger 
mounted in suitable guides within the hopper 
and having a longitudinal slot in its upper 
portion, and lugs on each side of said slot, of 
a slide mounted in the slot in the plunger and 
having a seed-measuring cup in its face next 
to the cut-off, and provided with longitudinal 
grooves on each side of the slide, with which 
the lugs on the plunger engage, all constructed, 
arranged, and operating substantially as shown 
 
75 
9O 
95 
OO 
IO5 
O 
I I5 
and described, whereby the plunger Will have 
more play than theslide carrying the Seed Cup, 
for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a hand corn-planter, the combination, 
with a standard having a slot in its lower end 
and the cut-off located in Said slot, a hopper 
secured to the standard, and a plunger, G, 
mounted in suitable guides within the hopper 
and having a longitudinal slot, G', in its upper 
portion, provided with lugs LL on ech side, of 
a slide, I, mounted in said slot and having the 
grooves KIK on each side, in which the lugs L 
L are mounted, and provided with a seed-meas 
uring cup, Mi, on its face next to the cut-off, 
all constructed, arranged, and operating sub 
stantially as shown and described, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
5. In a hand corn-planter, the combination, 
with the standard A, having a longitudimal 
slot in its lower end, the cut-off O, located in 
said slot, the hopper B, secured to the stand 
ard, the seed - feed passage D', projecting 
through the lower end of the standard below 
the cut-off and on the opposite side from the 
hopper, the casting E, secured to the standard 
and having the cross plate E within the lower 
end of the hopper, the plunger G, mounted 
between the plate E and standard and having 
the longitudinal slot G', and lugs L L on each 
side of said slot, of the slide I, mounted in said 
slot G', and having grooves KK on each side, 
by which the lugs L L are mounted, and pro 
vided with a seed-measuring cup, M, in its face 
next to the cut-off, and having its upper end, 
I, cut away on the same side as the measur 
ing-cup, and its lower end, I, cut away on the 
side opposite to the measuring-cup, all Con 
structed, arranged, and operating Substan 
tially as shown and described. 
6. In a hand corn-p'anter, the combination, 
with the standard A, having a longitudinal 
slot in its lower end, the cut-off O, located in 
said slot, the hopper B, secured to the stand 
ard, the plate D, Secured to and projecting be 
low the lower end of the standard and having 
its upper end slotted, the seed-feed passage D', 
formed integral with said plate and projecting 
through the lower end of the standard and be 
low the cut-off, the casting E, having the side 
plates, E, extended to form wings e, project 
ing below the standard on each side of the 
plate D, and the cross-plate E and inclined 
bottom F of the hopper B, of the plunger G, 
mounted between the plate E" and standard 
and having the slot G', and lugs L L on each 
side of the slot, the slide I, mounted in Said 
slot, and grooves KK on each side, with which 
the lugs engage, and provided with a seed 
measuring cup, M, on its face next to the cut 
off, plunger-rods H, connected with the plunger, 
and a scraper-plate, S, held between the wings 
e by a spring, T, all constructed, arranged, and 
operating Substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
7. In a hand corn-planter, the combination, 
with the standard A, having a longitudinal 
slot in its lower end, consisting of the upper 
393,670 
aperture, C, closed by a transparent, material, 
the lower aperture, C, and intermediate aper. 
ture, C, the rigid metal cut-off, O, located in 
the contracted portion C of the slot, the spring 
P, holding the same in position, the hopper B, 
Secured to the standard, and the seed-passage 
ID, passing through the aperture C to theside of 
the standard opposite the hopper, of the plun 
ger G, mounted in bearings within the hopper 
and having the longitudinal slot G', and lugs 
I. I. On each side of the slot, and the slide. I, 
mounted in said slot G', and having grooves 
ls K in each side, with which the lugs L. Len 
gage, and provided with a seed-measuring cup 
on its face next to the cut-off, all constructed, 
arranged, and operating substantially as shown 
and described. 
S. In a hand corn planter, the combination, 
With a standard, A., having parallel grooves A" 
in its upper end, and a hopper, B, secured to 
said standard, of a plunger mounted in suitable 
guiles within said hopper, plunger-rods H,se 
cured to the upper end of the plunger and bent 
to form shoulde's or stops h, and extending 
through the slots A' in the standard, all con 
structed, arranged, and operating substantially 
aS shown and described, whereby the shoul 
derS h will engage with the ends of the slots 
A' and limit the movement of the plunger. 
O 
25 
9. In a hand corn-planter, the combination 
of a standard, a hopper divided by a partition 
into two compartments and having an aper 
ture in the lower end of the partition connect 
ing the compartments, and a plunger provided 
with a seed-measuring cup adapted to com 
municate with the compartment of the hopper 
adjacent to the standard, all constructed, ar 
ranged, and operating substantially as shown 
and described. 
10. In a hand corn-planter, the combination 
of a standard, A, a hopper, B, secured thereto 
and having an inclined bottom, F, and a par 
tition, B, dividing the hopper into two com 
partments, B and B, and having an aperture, 
l", in its lower end, connecting the compart 
ments BB, and a plunger having a seed 
measuring cup adapted to communicate with 
the compartment B' as said plunger is recip 
rocated, all constructed, arranged, and oper. 
ating substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
35 
45 
SO 
JOSEPH M. SEGUR, 
Witnesses: 
J. P. GREENE, 
R. B. ROBIBINS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393770.txt	(No Model.). 
J. H. LORIMER, 
APPARATUS FOR DRYING PAPER PULP, 
s 
- mm rem - m mm a-arr -- mm - m r 
Patented Dec. 4, 1888. 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
 
N. Pereis, Photo-ithogrpher, Washington,D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. LORIMER, OF PHILADELPIIIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
APPARATUS FOR DRYING PAPER-PULP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 393,770, dated December 4, 1888. 
Application filed January 5, 1887, Renewed May 8, 1888, Serial No. 273,254, (No model.) 
y 
To all whom it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, JoHN H. LORIMER, of 
the city and county of Philadelphia, and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented an Im 
provement in Apparatus for Drying Paper 
Pulp, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention has reference to apparatus 
for treating Wet paper-p?ilp for the purpose 
of drying the same; and it consists in certain 
improvements, all of which are fully set forth 
in the following specification, and shown in 
the accompanying drawings, which form part 
thereof. 
In carrying out my invention I feed the pa 
per-pulp mash in a thin flat stream upon an 
endless apron of open-work, which runs in 
conjunction with a second endless apron of 
open-Work, so that the pulp is held between 
the two and carried back and forth through 
a drying - chamber, through which strong 
drafts of dry air, either hot or cold, are con 
stantly passing. From this it will be observed 
that thematerialis exposed to the direct action 
of the air-currents alternately upon opposite 
sides. To improve the efficiency by utilizing 
the effect of capillary attraction, I prefer to 
subdivide the layer of pulp into a series of 
long parallel strips forming slotted passage 
ways for the air, offering but little resistance. 
The edges of the pulp bounding these pas 
sage-Ways soon become dry, and the capillary 
action causes the moisture from the interior 
to find its way to the surface, when it is evap 
orated, and so on. The result is the most 
speedy drying of the pulp, and that too in 
the most economical manner. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional ele 
Vation of a drying-machine embodying my 
invention, and Fig. 2 is a plan view of same. 
A is the drying-chamber, and has air-inlets 
B at the top and outlet c at the bottom, lead 
ing to suction-fans C, which keep up a con 
stant draft of air, which may be heated by a 
furnace or heater, D, indicated in dottedlines. 
In place of creating the draft by suction it 
may be performed by force or pressure. 
E and F are two endless aprons of open 
Work, which lie close to each other and pass 
back and forth through the drying-chamber, 
being guided therein by rollers G. At two 
places these aprons pass outside of the drying 
chamber-viz., at H, where the pulp is fed 
between them, and at I when the dried pulp 
is removed. The aprons pass back and forth 
IO 
35 
45 
55 
 
7 O 
in the chamber at right angles to the air 
currents, whether they be vertical or hori 
zontal, and expose alternately, aprons to the 
direct action of the air. When the aprons 
pass outside of the chamber they separate. 
J is the pulp-mash box into which the pa 
per-pulp is placed and from which it is run 
by a sluice, K, onto the apron E. The excess 
of Water may be explessed by a roller, IL, and 
the layer of pulp divided into a series of nar 
row layers by plows M, against which the pulp 
is pressed. 
After the layer of pulp is subdivided it is 
held in place by the other apron, F, and he 
tWeen these two aprons it passes back andl 
forth through the drying-chamber, being sub 
jected on both sides to the action of the air 
currents. After being dried it is brought to 
the outside of the chamber A, at the place of 
discharge I, where the dried pulp is removed. 
The operation takes place in a continuous 
manner and with great rapidity. 
The capillary action plays an important 
part in the speediness in which the drying 
operation may take effect, as it is by this 
physical phenomenon that the moisture from 
the interior of the dense pulp is brought 
within active reach of the air-drying cur 
rents. 
I do not limit myself to any particular de 
tails of the apparatus, as that may be modi 
fied in various Ways without departing from 
my invention. 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In apparatus for drying paper - pulp, the 
combination of two endless traveling aprons 
of open-work, a closed chamber through which 
said aprons pass back and forth, suitable air 
forcing apparatus to force or draw air through 
said chamber and the traveling aprons there 
in, a pulp box or hopper, a feed from said 
hopper to said aprons, and guides arranged 
close to the upper surface of the traveling 
apron to divide the pulp as it passes to the 
aprons into a series of parallel strips, sulb 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony of which invention I he reunto 
set my hand. 
JOHN H. LORIMER. 
Witnesses: 
R. M. HUNTER, 
WILLIAMC, MAYNE, 
90 
95 
OC) 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393870.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 393,870. 
W. WEBER, 
POST OFFICE MAIL INDICATOR, 
Patented Dec. 4, 1888. 
-zeez, 
2-2 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
s N 
GN e 
size 
 
A. 
E Le SZ) 
 
| 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM WEBER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
POST - OFFICE MAIL-INDICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 893,870, dated D2cember 4, 1888. 
Application filed March 27, 1888, Serial No. 268,639, (No model.) 
- 
65 
To all whon it may concern: 
shown in Figs. 1 and 3. The inner or post 
:- 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM WEBER, of 
master's side of the plate or plates A is pro 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
vided with adjustable caps, consisting of the 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
two or more independent parts D D'. 
These 
parts are respectively provided with the ears - 4 
Improvements in a Post-Office Mail-Indicator, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
b b', inserted between the lugs bit and 
act description, that will enable others to 
mounted on the pivot-pin b". By this arrange 
make and use the same, reference being had 
ment either part may be adjusted independ 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
ently of the other, or both may be moved to 
of this specification. 
gether, as circumstances may require. The 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
inner side of the cap parts D D, is provided 
simple and convenient indicating arrange 
with push-fingers d d', which project through 
ment for use in post offices, whereby much an 
the opening or openings B in the plates A 
noyance and time may be saved to both the 
when the parts DDare closed down, as shown 
pOstmaster and the applicant for mail, as the 
in Fig. 3. 
applicant can ascertain at a glance whether 
The part D has the letter L placed on both 
there is any mail matter or not, and also make 
sides or faces, while the companion part D' 
knoWh to the postmaster the fact that mail is 
shows the letter P.' The first indicates let 
being called for without an oral indication. 
ters, the second papers or parcels. 
- - 
The upper ends of the springs did are rig 
This device is more especially intended for 
the use of applicants who receive mail only at 
idly secured to the respective sides of the 
long intervals, and also for those who do not 
plates A, the loose lower ends having a bear 
care to be to the expense of renting an indi 
ing against the several ears formed on the re 
spective caps. These springs exert a force to 
Vidual box. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a device em 
raise and hold the cap parts above the hori 
bodying my improved features, looking at the 
Zontal line, as shown in Fig. 3. 
same from the applicant's side of the room; 
. The caps C will be normally closed, so that 
Fig. 2, the reverse, looking from the postmas 
the applicant, seeing the cap bearing his num 
ter's side; and Fig. 3, a vertical section. 
ber in that position, will know that there is no 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
mail matter for him. If the cap is thrown up 
plate, which may be composed of wood, metal, 
and the L appears, then there is a letter or 
or any other suitable material, and of any de 
letters; if the P, there is a paper or parcel. 
sired dimensions. The required number of 
If both, then the two indicating characters 
plates will be inserted ordinarily in a framing 
appear, all as illustrated in Fig. 1. 
The parts D D' forming the caps on the 
sash similar to that of the usual glass fronts 
The indicating front 
postmaster's side will be normally in the high 
of individual boxes. 
may consist of a continuous surface and dis 
est position, h, as shown in Fig. 2, and indi 
pense with the use of sash; but the smaller 
cated by dotted lines, Fig. 3. The names of 
plates shown will be preferred. Each of the 
the applicants will appear on the postmaster's 
plates is provided with a number of openings, 
side of the plates A, as shown in Fig. 2. 
B, covered on the outer or applicant's side by 
The mail matter will be distributed in the 
the cap or caps C. These caps are provided 
usual manner by placing the same in the dif 
ferent alphabetically-arranged pigeon-holes; 
with the ears a, which are inserted between the 
lugs a' a, formed on the plate A, and adjust 
but as it is being distributed it may be checked 
ably secured thereto by means of the pivot 
off by pressing down the cap part D on the 
pin a. These caps are numbered in regular 
postmaster's side if it is a letter, and the com 
panion part D for a paper, or both, as may be 
consecutive order, as shown, so that every 
person or applicant will have a number of his 
necessary. The down movement of the parts 
D D' imparts a corresponding upward move 
own. The number is placed on both sides of 
ment of the cap or caps C by the contacting 
the caps C as a matter of convenience, so that 
push-fingers and the springs. This uncovers 
the same is visible either when the cap is 
closed or thrown up to its opposite position, as the opening B and applicantis informed that 
90 
75 
IOO 
IO 
3O 
45 
So 
 
393,870 
- 
there is mail and also the nature of the same. 
Applicant now presses down and closes the 
cap C, which, coming in contact with the push 
finger on the inner cap parts, moves the same 
5 back to the inclined position l'. (Indicated 
-by dotted lines, Fig. 3.) This lower inclined 
position of the parts D I)' indicates to the 
postmaster that some one is calling for his 
mail. After delivering the same these parts 
Io are thrown up to their highest or normal posi 
tion, which shows that the mail has been (le 
livered. By this arrangement applicant is in 
formed at a glance as to whether there is any 
mail or not, and the postmaster is saved the 
15 trouble of running through the lette's for the 
persons for whom there is no mail. 
The device may be provided with a suitable 
electric bell, so that the postmaster may be 
M SE also, that mail is being called for. 
2d The inside caps may be made in three sepa 
rate parts instead of two, as shown, thus mak 
ing provision for letters, paper's, and parcels. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
l. In a mail-indicating device of the char'- 
acter described, the combination, with the 
plate A, provided with openings, of an adjust 
able cap or caps having numbers on their sur 
3o face and pivoted to said plates and adapted to 
25 tel's Patent, is 
35 
cover said openings on the outer side, the cap 
parts D ), pivoted to the opposite and inner 
side of said plate and bearing characters in 
dicating the kind of mail, and provided with 
push-fingers, whereby Said caps may be moved 
from either side of said plate, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, with the plate A, pro 
vided with lugs and having Openings, as cle 
scribed, of the cap or caps (, provided with 
the ea' (t and attached to said lugs by means 
of the pivot-pin (and the spring (l, whereby 
said cap or caps are a'ranged to close sail 
openings, or be thrown upward to uncover the 
same, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. The combination, with the plate A, pro 
vided with lugs and having openings, as de 
scribed, of the two-part caps I) D', provided 
with push-fingers (l (l', and having cars l' 
inserted between said lugs and attached there 
to by the pivot-pin l', whereby the caps C on 
the opposite side of the plate A may be thrown 
upward, so as 'over said openings, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
WILLIAM WEBER. 
Witnesses: 
L. M. FREEMAN, 
L. B. COUPLAND. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US393970.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
W. R. FOX. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 393,970. 
MITER, CUTTING MACHINE, 
Patented De 0, 4, 1888. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SS 
S 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Q32 I 2 
2III 
 
IHUN 
 
 
NA Sasa 
Sc. 
W REA 
 
N N 
 
S. 
S Q 
M S 
a 
(No Model. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. R. FOX. 
- MITER, CUTTING MACHINE, 
No. 393,970. 
Patented De 0, 4, 1888. 
----Z 
7- - 
Heisz.23223 RA % 
m 
was NSSIlluguay 
Oussessessesseszt':Eiji Eliteza- EEEEEE 
- - - 
2 
 
Ely HE 
  
 
  
 
N. Peters proto-Lithographer, Washington .C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. FOX, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
METER. CUTTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 393,970, dated December 4, 1888. 
Application filed Decemberll, 1886, Serial No,221,339, (No model.) 
The edges of the 55 
O 
25 
35 
40 
To all Luhon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. FOX, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at the city 
of Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent, State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Miter-Cutting Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare that the foll 
lowing, when taken in connection with the ac 
Companying drawings and the letters of ref 
erence marked thereon, is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, which said draw 
ings constitute a part of this specification. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
simple, cheap, and accurately-working ma 
chine, and adapted to be adjusted readily and 
With certainty; and it consists in the devices 
and combination of devices, as hereinafter 
more fully set forth. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved miter-cutting machine, showing the po 
sition of the lever, lower rack-bar, pinion, and 
cutting-knives. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional 
view of the same, the pinion and lever being 
in elevation. Fig. 3 is a plan view showing 
the adjustable gages with a part of the knife 
and its carriage in section, the rack-bar being 
shown in dotted lines. 
A represents the bed of the machine, which 
is constructed, preferably, of metal. 
B represents the carriage, which is con 
structed so as to move in longitudinal Ways 
a b, and to which are attached the knives cc. 
C is the upright frame supported upon the 
bed A, and may be, if desired, made integral 
with the same. This frame consists of two 
corner-posts, d d, at each end of the frame, 
with a connecting-bar between the two, indi 
cated at C, the upper way in which the car 
riage runs being formed in the overhanging 
part of this bar, as shown. This bar is formed 
integral with the corner-posts or may be made 
independent thereof and secured thereto. 
DD are the gages arranged one at either 
end of the machine, as shown in Fig. 3. These 
gages are adjustable in a curved slot formed 
in the bed-plate, the gages being guided in 
their movement by a pin projecting from the 
gages into the slot, with a bearing-plate con 
nected upon the other side, as shown in Fig. 2 
at 2. The gages are formed with plane faces, 
and the edges nearest the center are arranged 
in proximity to the plane of movement of the 
cutting-knives, so that these edges, which I 
have marked e, act in conjunction with the 
knives to form a shear cult. 
gages nearest the ends of the frame bear 
against the end posts and serve as a support 
to sustain the gage against the cutting action 
of the knife. The gages have a cut-away 
portion at their upper ends, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2, terminating in a curved arm having 
- a semicircular bearing-face, which is in bear 
ing contact with a projection, f, on the cross 
bar of the frame. 
c care knives attached to the carriage by 
means of bolts and nuts passing through the 
slots shown in the drawings by N. N. These 
slots N N are preferably made in the form 
shown, in order to allow of lateral adjustment 
for the knives. 
F is a gear or cog wheel arranged between 
the carriage and bed, with its cogs engaging 
with the rack G. upon the carriage and also 
with the rack H. upon the bed. The rack H 
is provided with the openings I, in order to 
allow any shavings or dust which may drop 
thereonto fall through out of the Way, thereby 
preventing clogging. The lever L is attached 
to the gear F in any suitable manner; but I 
prefer to have it constructed to fit into a dove 
tailed slot or groove in a projection upon said 
gear, which projection is shown at F. This 
projection F is circular in form and rests upon 
the Way or guide h", h' being a horizontal way 
formed upon the rack H, and holds the gear F 
at a proper distance from the rack. 
I is a thumb-screw passing through the end 
of the gage D and also through the slot M 
into a block or nut, i, by means of which the 
said gage is adjusted to any required angle, 
the slots M being circular in form, as shown 
in Fig. 3. 
J is a set-screw on the Outer rear end of the 
gage, which Strikes against a movable button, 
K, on the bed to limit the movement of the 
gage. 
The gages D D may be set from a right an 
gle to the knives inwardly, so as to cut the 
stock at any required angle, and, if desired, 
may be set outwardly beyond a right angle 
by withdrawing the button K from the path 
of the stud J. This stud J tends to limit the 
rearward movement of the gage when the 
button K is in its path, the spring O tending 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
45 
 
2 
398,970 
say 
- 
W 
an adjustable gage provided with an edge, e, 
to keep the gage in its position at right all 
acting in connection with the knife to form a 
glos to the line of cut, is semicircular, as be 
shear cut and having a semicircular bearing 
fore described, and is shown by D', these ci 
struck from the edge e of the gage as a cell 
cles being struck from a center directly over 
ter, whereby the said gage is alway's in the 
and in line with the inner edge, e, of the gage. 
same relative position to the cut of the knife, 
The gage is set so that this edge e, which, as 
substantially as described. 
described, acts with the knife to form a shear 
2. In a miter-cutting machine, the combi 
cut, is in the proper position to so act with 
nation, with the upright frame and the cutting 
out coming in contact. With the knife, and as 
knife, of an adjustable gage having an upper 
the inner end turns on its circula'l)ealing, of 
circular learing and two parallel edges, one 
: 
which the edge e is the center, it will be seen 
edge adapted to rest against the upright frame 
that the relative position of the edge e and 
and the other (dge, e, forming the center of the 
knife renains the sane () matt (1' What al 
curve upon which the upper bearing-edge is 
gle the gage may assume. 
()' represents the point of attachment of struck, whereby the edge e is adapted to re 
main parallel with the cutting-knife, and ar 
the spring () to the frame, and () the point of 
ranged in such proximity there to as to form 
attachment of the spring () to the gage. The 
spring () can be dispensed with and my gage 
with such knife a shea' ('ut, substaitially as 
will still operate; lut I find that it works 
d(scil) (d. 
3. In : nachine fo' ('utting mite's, the ("on 
much more conveniently with the spring, as 
it keeps the inner ends of the gages pressel 
bination, with the cutting-knife, of a gage 
laving an (clgo, e, and a circulai' bearing, and a 
closely against their bearings. 
plate or bearing face there for on the machine 
The operation of my invention is as fol 
lows: The stock to be operated upon is placed frame, the circle of the bearing being struck 
from the edge e as a ('enter, whereby said 
upon the bed and against the gage I), the end 
edge is alway's maintained in the same rela 
of it passing through between the upright 
tive position to the knife, substantially as de 
line e of the gage and the knife ('. The knife 
scribed. 
c is then carried forward by means of the 
it (1'-cutting machine, the Gonbi 
4. In : 
level L., cutting the stock at the angle indi 
nation of the adjust alble gage, the upright 
catel upon the bed, which may be indicated 
frame, the connecting-Silig between 1 (gage 
by lines, as shown in Fig. 3. These lines may 
be marked either upon the edge of the bed, as 
and 'an (, all ( a luig ()' projection () 
said 
frame, sail gage having a circular learing 
shown, or upon the slotted arcs M. M. For 
adapt (cl to l'est against the said lug, substan 
convenience, I construct my device double, so 
| tially as described. 
that it may be operated in either direction, 
and the two gages may be set so that one is 
5. The combination, in a mite-cutting ma 
the complement of the other, if desired. By 
Chile, ()f the base having a ('t live (l slot a l all 
upright frame, a knife a'ranged to move in a 
means of this device Wood ol' other sinnial' 
: longitudinal Way on said frame, a gage ad 
material can be readily and cuickly cut upon 
any desired angle. 
By adjusting the gages 
justable in the curved slot, having a front 
by means of the thumb-screw's the angle upon 
edge arranged to form with the knife a shear 
ing-edge and to bear laterally against a post 
the Wood will correspond With the angle to 
on the base, and a projection on the frame a 
which the gages are adjusted. The cutters 
ranged in front of the line of said shearing 
are attached to the Carriage, so as to be read 
edge of the gage to hold the said edge in the 
ily removed or set, as occasion may require. 
same relation to the knife at what ever angle 
It will le understoodl that one of the cutters 
the gage may be placed, all substantially as 
may be dispensed with; but I consider two as 
fles("ril)(ed. 
desirable. 
(5. In a mite' - ("utting machine, the combi 
I do not wish to be understood as broadly 
nation of the bed-plate, the upright frame 
claiming a bed with guides thereon to locate 
mounted thereon, the gage I), the spring () 
the work and a sliding cutter to cut the work 
upon the angle indicated by said gages, as I 
between the frame and the gage, a circular 
bearing, ID', on the gage, and the lugf on the 
alm aware that miter-cuttel's of various kinds 
frame for the circular bearing, substantially 
have heretofore been used embodying such 
device; but 
as describe. 
What I do claim to have invented, and cle 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a miter-cutting machine, the combi 
nation, with a carriage arranged on a bed in 
6o longitudinal ways carrying a cutting-knife, of 
WILLIAM R. FOX. 
Witnesses: 
5 5 
EDWARD TAGGART, 
ARTHUR C. DENISON. 
v 
7 O 
O 
90 
IOO 
Id 
3 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394070.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTOINE GATEAU, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
GAS ONE STOVE. 
SPECIFICATICN forming part of Letters Patent No. 394,070, dated December 4, 1888. 
m 
Application filed May 26, 1888, Serial No. 275,165, (No model.) 
. ? 
To all it'hon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ANTOINE GATEAU, of 
Chicago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Gasoline-Stoves; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
gasoline-stoves; and the object of the inven 
tion is to produce a gasoline-stove having de 
vices by which the gasoline is forced uniformly 
and regularly to the burner by means of a 
pressure of hydrogen generated in such quan 
tity Only as is necessary to maintain a con 
stant pressure of sufficient force to compen 
Sate for the amount of gasoline that is con 
Sulmed by the burner; also, to accomplish this 
Without the employment of a pump or its 
equivalent, as is the case with the ordinary 
gasoline-stoves now in use, in which the air 
under pressure is used, and the oxygen of said 
air combines with the gasoline-vapor; and fur 
thermore, to prevent the decrease of pressure 
formed by the pump as now used, and which 
decreases as fast as the gasoline is used and 
thereby lessens the pressure and, correspond 
ingly, the flame of the bulner. 
Another object of my invention is to dis 
pense with the employment of manual labor 
in producing the required pressure and 
finally to obviate the employment of pump 
pistons or valves, that cannot be kept in proper 
Working order on account of the difficulty ex 
perienced in keeping them tight or properly 
packed, and, lastly, to employ a gas (hydro 
gen) which will not combine with the vapors 
produced from gasoline. 
The invention consists in the Construction 
of certain devices and details and arrange 
ment of parts, as will be more fully described 
hereinafter, and specifically pointed out in 
the claims, reference being had to the accom 
pany drawings and the letter's marked there 
O. 
Like letters indicate similar parts in the 
different figures of the drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an end elevation containing my 
improved apparatus in position. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section of the apparatus. Fig. 3 is a 
plan or top view of the same. 
In the drawings, A represents the top of a 
gasoline-stove supported on the legs B. A 
reservoir, C, contains the gasoline placed be 
low the burners, and to said reservoir an ap 
paratus, D, is connected, in which gas is gen 
erated by means of sulphuric acid mixed with 
water and iron for the purpose of forcing the 
gasoline through pipe E to the burners. The 
apparatus ID is composed of the receptacle D', 
to which the screw-coupling I, is soldered to 
the top and the coupling MI to the bottom, 
and contains the screw-plugs MI and R, respect 
ively, and the apparatus is tightly closed by 
the cover i. An inner pipe, II, is secured to 
the cover i, forming the space II", and is pro 
vided at its lower end with a perforated dia 
phragm, J, upon which the iron blocks P are 
supported. A small pipe, K, is bent in such 
manner as to communicate with the Space in 
the pipe H at one end, while its other end con 
nects with the reservoir C, to which the appa 
ratus is screwed. The upper end of the pipe 
K projects above the cover i to prevent any 
water entering the reservoir while cleaning 
it, and G is the plugin said reservoir, through 
which it is filled with gasoline. The screw 
coupling with its plug, when opened, serves 
to introduce the required amount of acid, Q, 
mixed with Water, as well as the iron blocks P. 
The screw-coupling MI and plug R serve to 
draw off the acid when it has lost its strength. 
The valve F serves to open and close the pipe 
E, as required. 
The operation is as follows: The reservoir 
C is first filled with gasoline through the tube, 
closed by the plug G, which is removed for 
the filling operation and then tightly closed, 
and the acidulated water is introduced in the 
receptacle D' to the proper height, and also 
the blocks of iron placed on the diaphragm. 
The acidulated water coming in contact with 
the blocks P generates hydrogen gas, which 
passes through the pipe IX into the reservoir 
C above the gasoline, and forces it through 
the pipe E to the burner, where it escapes as 
vapor, and is ignited when the valve F is 
opened. When the valve F is closed, the 
pressure in the inner pipe, H, will depress the 
acid Q and force it up into the annular space 
H' and below the blocks of iron P, thus caus 
ing the formation of gas to cease until the 
valve is again opened, which again causes the 
m 
So 
95 
IOO 
45 
 
2 
394,070 
acidulated water to rise in the inner pipe, H, 
coming in contact with the iron blocks and 
forming more gas. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a gasoline-stove, the combination of an 
oil-reservoir, a pipe leading from near the bot 
tom thereof, a burner surmounting said pipe, 
and a gas-producing apparatus in communi 
cation with the reservoir, consisting of an outer 
tube closed at both ends, and an inner tube 
Smaller and shorter than the outer tube, ex 
tending from the top thereof and open at the 
bottom, having within its lower end suitable 
blocks of metal for producing gas when acidu 
lated water or other chemical placed within 
the producer is brought in contact with the 
blocks. 
2. In a gasoline-stove, an oil-reservoir, a 
pipe leading therefrom to a burner, a gas-gen 
erating apparatus in communication with said 
reservoir, and consisting of an outer tube 
O 
2 ? 
| closed at both ends, and an inner, smaller, and 
shorter tube attached to the top and open be 
low, and provided with a diaphragm, Support 
ing suitable metal for producing hydrogen 
gas, when acidulated water introduced within 
the producer is brought in contact with said 
metal, as specified. 
3. The combination of an oil-reservoir pro 
vided with a pipe leading to the burner, with 
a gas-producing apparatus consisting of an 
outer closed tube, and an inner, smaller, and 
shorter tube open at its lower end and form 
ing with the outer tube a space, H, and pro 
vided with a support for suitable metal blocks 
for producing hydrogen gas when brought in 
contact with acidulated water or other suit 
able chemicals introduced in the gas-produc 
ing apparatus, as specified. 
ANTOINE GATEAU. 
- 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 
HENRY MEISELBAR, 
ULLMAN STRONG. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394170.txt	C. H. GRAHAM, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
BLANK FEEDER AND GRIPPING DIE FOR BOLT TURNING MACHINES. 
Patented Dec. 1, 1888. 
No. 394,170, 
v) 
V/7aaaaa. 
2/,76 %. 
/7t/2772-. 
244-see 
Z7. 2a1 ru- efA-4- e 1. 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
C. H. GRAHAM 
BLANK FEEDER AND GRIPPING DIE FOR BOLT TURNING MACHINES. 
No. 394,170, 
Patented Dec. 11, 1888. 
V. 27 Ul) a 
 
  
 
 
 
  
Ss 
iwi, 
  
 
  
 
is 
NSS 2 & 22 
NSN 
2ZZ asses 
%z (222-224A, El EE 
2 
 
(No Model.) 
C. H. GRAHAM. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
BLANK FEEDER AND GRIPPING DIE FOR BOLT TURNING MACHINES 
Patented Dec. 11, 1888. 
No. 394,170, 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, wasnington, dic 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. GRAHAM, OF UNION VILLE, ASSIGNOR TO THE UPSON NUT 
COMPANY, OF FARMINGTON, CONNECTICUT, 
BLANKFEEDER AND GRIPPING-DIE FOR BOLT-TURNING MACHINES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 394,170, dated December 11, 1888. 
Application filed December 28, 1887, Serial No, 259,246, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES H. GRAHAM, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Unionville, in the county of Hartford and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Machines 
for Turning Carriage Bolt-Heads, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to machines for turn 
ing the heads of carriage-bolts; and the ob 
jects of my improvement are to prevent more 
than one bolt being fed at one time to the de 
livery end of the chute, to provide new and 
efficient means for feeding the bolt into the 
holding-jaws, and to so construct the holding 
jaws or dies as to insure the proper grasping 
of the bolt. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a machine for turning bolts, 
Fig. 2 is 
which embodies my improvements. 
a front elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is an 
enlarged plan view of detached portions of 
said machine, together with a partial sectional 
view of the feeding-chute, the plane of section 
being indicated by the line acac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 
4 is a side elevation and partial vertical sec 
tion of said feeding-chute on the same scale 
as Fig. 3. 
Figs. 5, 6,7, and Sareside views on 
the same scale as Figs. 3 and 4, of several of the 
cams employed in said machine. Fig. 9 is a 
view on a still larger scale, showing the in 
ner face of one of the holding-dies. Fig. 10 is 
a transverse section of said holding-dies. On 
line y y, Fig. 9; and Fig. 11 is a front eleva 
tion of the same. 
A designates the bed of the machine, un 
derneath which are two cam-shafts, B C, and 
above which is the lathe-spindle D, Fig. 1, 
which carries the holding-jaws C. At the top of 
the machine is a revolving pan, E, into which 
bolts are to be placed promiscuously, and 
from which they are picked up automatically 
and delivered into the feeding-chute F. The 
turning-tools are held in Swinging heads or 
tool-holders G G, which are operated by means 
of levers and cams 2 and 3 on the shaft C, said 
cams being shown separately in Figs. 6 and 7. 
The holding-jaws are operated by means of 
the cone H and cam M on the shaft C. 
At the lower end of the feed-chute F there 
is a swinging carrier, b, the same being in the 
form of a rocking arm mounted on the shaft c. 
Said shaft is rocked to move the carrier from 
the position shown in Fig. 2 into a position 
directly over the axis of the spindle D by 
means of the connecting-rod d, lever e, and 
calm 4 on shaft C, said calm being shown sepa 
rately in Fig. S. 
The parts thus far specifically described are 
all old and are hereby disclaimed. Any other 
mechanism which is adapted for use in com 
bination with my improvements may be sub 
stituted for either or all of the old mechan 
isms herein disclaimed. 
When two or more bolts are allowed to de 
scend at one time to the delivery end of the 
feeding-chute, it interferes with the proper 
operation of the carrier band is liable to pre 
vent it from properly carrying forward a sin 
gle bolt. I provide a device in the body of 
the chute for preventing more than one bolt 
at a time being fed to the carrier at the end of 
the feed-chute. This device consists of a slid 
ing frame, f, which extends to opposite sides 
of the chute and carries two separating-fin 
gers, g, the same being rigidly affixed to the 
framef, but adjustable therein by means of 
set-screws h, most clearly shown in Fig. 3. 
These fingers have their inner ends resting 
in holes in the side walls of the chute, the 
frame being offset or otherwise formed, so that 
One finger Occupies a position in the chute in 
advance of the other finger a distance about 
equal to the Space occupied by one bolt in the 
chute. This sliding frame f is made to recip 
rocate by means of the leveri, pivoted to a 
fixed part of the frame, and having one end 
connected loosely with the operating-rod din 
any proper manner-as, for instance, by the 
two pins 55 in Fig. 3- so that said sliding 
frame f and its separating-fingers will have 
One reciprocating movement for every recip 
rocating movement of the carrier b. 
When the carrier has its recess or pocket 
immediately under the lower end of the feed 
ing-chute, as shown in Fig. 2, the sliding frame 
and its separating-fingers are in the position 
represented in Fig. 3. When the carrier moves 
forward under the influence of the operating 
rod d, the sliding frame f is moved in the 
75 
85 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
r 
894,170 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 p 
7 o 
75 
same direction, thereby withdrawing the low 
ermost of its fingers g from the passage-way 
in the chute and forcing the upper finger be 
tween the two bolts adjoining said lower fin 
ger, and so soon as said frame and fingers 
have made their full stroke in this direction 
the bolt which lies between the upper and 
lower fingers will be released and permitted 
to fall, while all of the other bolts are detained 
therein by the upper finger. The bolts thus 
released will lie upon the body of the carrier 
at the lower end of the chute. Upon the re 
turn movement of the callrier the fingers g g 
are carried back into the position shown in 
Fig. 3, and as the upper finger withdraws all 
of the bolts within the chute slide forward a 
distance equal to the space occupied by one 
bolt and are caught upon the lower finger, as 
shown. 
My next improvement relates to the mech 
anism for conveying the bolt from the con 
veyer b into the holding-jaws. The bolt is 
taken from the conveyel by means of the 
spring-pressed fingers 6, which of themselves 
are well known in analogous structures, and 
in shop parlance are called the turkey-bill. 
These are mounted upon the arm 7, which is 
secured to the vertical slide 8, said slide hav 
ing its ways formed on or secured to the hori 
Zontal slide 9, said horizontal slide being 
mounted upon ways affixed to the bed or frame 
A of the machine. 
When the carrier U is forward with a bolt 
in its pocket or recess, the vertical slide 8 is 
held in its most elevated position by means 
of the cam J on the shaft B. At the same 
time the horizontal slide 9 is forced toward 
the front of the machine by means of the 
cam K. A friction-roller, 10, bears against 
the cam J. When the depression 11, Fig. 2, 
passes this roller, the vertical slide S and the 
spring-pressed fingers 6 descend upon the 
bolt within the carrier and grasp the body of 
said bolt, immediately after which the fin 
gers 6 rise as the depression 11 leaves the 
roller 10, which roller then rests against the 
concentric periphery of the cam J, thereby 
holding the slide S and fingers 6 in an ele 
wated position for a time. Before the finger's 
6 thus grasp the bolt the sliding push-rod 12 
is forced out of the Way by means of the cam 
1 on shaft C, (shown separately in Fig. 5,) 
which cam acts against a projection, 13, on 
the under side of the slide 14, to which the 
ush-rod 12 is attached. A spring, 15, on the 
under side of the bed. A has a tendency to 
draw the slide 14 and push-rod 12 toward the 
holding-jaws. 
After the bolt has been grasped by the 
jaws 6, as before described, the most de 
pressed portion of the cam comes under the 
vertical slide 8 and roller 10 and permits 
said slide to fall, thereby bringing the bolt 
that is held by the finger's 6 into substantial 
alignment with the axis of the holding-jaws. 
The cam I, on the shaft B then acts to carry 
the slides 8 and 9 horizontally to the rear, 
and simultaneously therewith the cann re 
leases the slide 14 and push-rod 12, so that 
the latter acts upon the head of the bolt to 
push it into the holding-jaws. When the bolt 
has well entered the jaws, the cam J again 
acts to raise the slide S and pulls the spring 
fingers from the bolt, the bolt being forced 
When the 
fully home by the push-rod 12. 
vertical slide S is thus held in its highest po 
sition, the cam K again acts to carry the 
slides S and 9 with the spring-fingers forward 
into position ready to grasp another bolt in 
the manner before described, the calm 1 also 
acting to take the push-rod out of the Way. 
The carrier U is timed in concert With the 
motion of the spring-fingers 6, so as to pre 
sent a bolt to said fingers at the proper time 
and to withdraw therefrom immediately after 
the bolt is securely grasped by said fingers. 
The turning-tools act to turn the bolt-head 
immediately after the bolt is properly seated 
in the holding-jaws, and when turned it is . 
ejected from said jaws, as in analogous ma 
chines, before another bolt is presented 
thereto. 
It will be seen that the spring-finger's de 
scribe what may be termed a foul-motion' 
feed-that is to say, they move vertically 
downward, then horizontally rearward, then 
vertically upward, then horizontally to the 
front, where they make a slight and quick up 
and-down movement to grasp the bolt, pre 
paratory to making the succeeding four mo 
tions specified, and so on repeatedly. 
It 
should also be noticed that the slide which 
carries the push-rod 12 is not only carried 
rearward by a spring, but is held in position 
at the upper end of the slide 14 by means of 
a supplementary and weaker spring, so that 
said push-rod may yield a little under any 
undue strain. 
Another of my improvements relates to the 
shape of the operating faces or dies of the 
holding-jaws C. Carriage-bolts, as is Well 
known, are formed with a neck underneath 
the head, which is square in cross-section. 
With dies as ordinarily constructed of a shape 
corresponding to the square of the bolt the 
corners of the bolt are liable to strike against 
the flat side faces of the holding-dies, so that 
the bolt changes its position when the turn 
ing-tool comes in contact with it, thereby caus 
ing the turning-tool to make a deep cut, with 
a liability of breaking the tools or the bolt or 
stopping the machine. 
Instead of forming the face of the holding 
dies square in cross-section, I form them in a 
combination of two squares, or, in other words, 
with eight longitudinal angular recesses in 
stead of four, as shown most clearly in the 
sectional view, Fig. 10, the square of the bolt 
entering four of the angular recesses at one 
time, while the four intervening recesses re 
main unfilled. By this arrangement the bolt 
Will match the recesses in the die when pre 
sented in eight different positions, instead of 
four; or, in other words, the corners of the 
9 O. 
95 
ICO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
894,170 
ing said sliding frame with the connecting 
rod d and its operating mechanism, substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
2. In a machine for turning bolts, the com 
bination of the spring-pressed fingers, the ver 
tical slide for carrying said fingers, a horizon 
tal slide carrying said vertical slide, and the 
cams for controlling the vertical and horizon 
tal movements of said slide and imparting the 
four motions to the fingers, substantially as 
described, and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a machine for turning bolts, the hold 
ing jaws or dies having their holding-faces 
provided with eight longitudinal angular re 
cesses beveled at the mouth, substantially as 
described, and for the purpose specified. 
4. The combination of the feeding-chute, 
the sliding frame f, which extends to opposite 
sides of said chute, the fingers g g, affixed in 
sockets at opposite ends of said frame, the 
set-screws it, for adjustably holding said fin 
gel's, and mechanism for reciprocating said 
slide, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose specified. 
CHARLES H. GRAHAM. 
45 
Witnesses: 
S. FRISBIE, 
W. A. HITCHCOCK. 
bolt will always register with the corners of 
the die at every one-eighth of a revolution of 
the bolt, and therefore the variation from said 
registering position can never exceed one-six 
teenth of a revolution. The front end or 
mouth of the die I also bevel off gradually, as 
shown. By this construction of the dies when 
the bolt is forced therein, if it is not in proper 
position to register with the recesses in the 
die, Will, as it strikes the beveled mouth of 
the die, turn axially sufficiently to properly 
enter those corners with which it most nearly 
registers. By this construction I insure the 
proper feeding of the bolt within the dies and 
the proper holding of the same therein. 
While I have described my improvement in 
the feeding-chute as for use upon a machine 
for turning bolts, it is evident that this im 
provement may be applied to a chute for feed 
ing bolts to any other mechanism for a sub 
sequent operation whenever it may be desira 
ble to have but one bolt at a time fed to the 
lower end of the chute. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the feeding-chute, 
the Swinging carrier b, its operating rock-shaft 
c, connecting-rod d, levere, cam 4, for driving 
said lever, the sliding frame f, having fingers 
gg, and the lever j, for operatively connect 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394270.txt	(No Model.) 
T. J. HOLMES. 
SHIRT, 
No. 394270, 
- ZZ 7. Patented Deo. 11, 1888. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS J. HOLMES, OF SIOUX CITY, IOWA. 
SHRT 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 394,270, dated becember 11, 1888. 
Application filed January 20, 1888, Serial No. 261416, (No model.) 
To all uhon, it nually concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS J. HOLMES, of 
Sioux City, in the county of Woodbury and 
State of Iowa, have invented a new and Im 
5 proved Shirt, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvement 
in shirts wherein the body is of one material 
say of woolen-while the collar-band, bosom, 
Io and cuffs, are of another, as of linen or cotton; 
and the invention consists of the construction, 
arrangement, and combination of parts, all as 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
I5 drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my new 
and improved shirt, showing the bosom open 
2O and one side thrown back. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged detailed perspective view of one of the 
sleeves and cuffs; and Fig. 3 is a detailed 
plan view of one of the shoulders of the shirt. 
The body A of the shirt is, by preference, 
25 made of Woolen cloth, and is of the usual con 
struction, except that the yokes B thereof are 
cut to project above or beyond the bosom-fly 
C, forming the offsets (t, where they join the 
yoke, as shown, so as to set the collar-band ID 
3o at the back above the upper edges of the 
flies C, so that the front of the collar-band will 
fit closely to the neck of the wearer. The edge 
(t', therefore, of the yoke at the back of the 
neck stands higher than the upper edges, t b, 
35 of the bosom - flies C. To this edge (t' is 
stitched the collar-band D, to which the col 
lar E may be permanently secured, if desired, 
or a separate detachable collar may be used 
with the band. The band D is stitched to 
4o the edge a' of the yoke only in the center of 
the said band, the ends thereof being stitched 
to the upper edges, e, of the bosom-pieces E, 
which edges are slightly curved to fit the 
front of the neck of the wearer. A square 
45 portion, e', is formed at the upper corner of 
each bosom-piece E, which is stitched to the 
offset C of the yoke B, so that the yoke and 
upper edges of the bosom-pieces are made to 
act as one piece to fit the neck. 
The bosom-pieces E are each attached to 
the body A only at the side edges, (not at the 
top or bottom,) so that in starching and iron 
ing the said bosom-pieces may be swung to 
one side of the flies C and body A, thus 
greatly facilitating the laundering and obvi 
ating all danger of starching the Woolen por 
tion of the shirt. The outer edges of the 
bosom E are provided with the narrow strips 
f, of strong material, which strips are stitched 
to the body A, so that the bosom-pieces proper 
may be completely ironed without folds or 
wrinkles. The lower end of one of the bosom 
pieces is formed with a laterally-projecting 
tab, F, provided with a button, g, to enter a 
button-hole, g, in the opposite bosom-piece 
to hold the bosom closed, as will be under 
stood from Fig. 1. 
The sleeves Hare of Woolen goods, the same 
as the body A, and are provided with cuffs.J., 
of linen or cotton, which are attached to the 
sleeves above the Wristbands h by a narrow 
strip, m, of strong material, which permits 
the cuffs to be turned back and starched and 
ironed without starching the Wristband and 
without wrinkling the cuffs. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
shirt having a body, A, of Woolen, formed 
with the front flies CC, and the yoke B, formed 
with offsets (t, at the sides of the neck, the 
back edge, a?, of the neck portion of the yoke 
projecting above the upper edge, bb, of the 
flies C, in combination with the bosom-piece 
E and collar D, of linen, the latter stitched to 
the said upwardly-projecting edge (t' of the 
yoke at the back of the neck and stitched at 
its ends to the upper edges, bl, of the bosom 
pieces E, the said bosom-pieces being stitched 
to the body of the shirt, substantially as de 
scribed. 
THOMAS J. HOLMES. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. WEST, 
EDGARTATE. 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394370.txt	(No Model.) 
C. KAESTNER, 
APPARATUS FOR MASHING GRAIN, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 394,370, 
Patented DeC. ll, 1888. 
X6.4%.Y. 
YEHEIHL. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
as 
R N 
 
( 2 
G (G) W 
. St. 
C 
SR 
ED 
N. Pt.TERS, Photo-ithographer, Washington, t), C, 
 
(No Model.) 
C. KAESTNER, 
APPARATUS FOR MASHING GRAIN, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 394,370. 
Patented Dec, ll, 1888, 
 
 
RAIL S, SS 
R SS 
 
 
EEEEEE 
C 
 
 
7fitnesses, 
al 
(7edevice6%zews 
7ay (24 6-4. 
5, 
N. PETERs, Photo-thographer, Washington. O. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
C. KAESTNER, 
APPARATUS FOR MASHING GRAIN. 
No. 394,370, 
Patented DeC. ll, 1888, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARIES KAESTN ER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
APPARATUS FOR MASHING GRAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 394,370, dated December 11, 1888. 
Application filed July 24, 1888, Serial No. 280,944 (No model.) 
To a/Z whon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs KAESTNER, of 
Chicago, Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Mashing Grain, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
mashing-machines of the type described in 
the Letten's Patent issued to me August 20, 
1878, No. 207,283. At one of the stages of the 
mashing process the beer or Wort is drawn off 
from the meal, and, the latter settling in the 
bottom of the mashing-tub, a hard crust forms 
on the surface thereof, which it is necessary 
to break up in Order to sprinkle the mash, 
which sprinkling with water washes out a con 
siderable remnant of beer or Wort. In said 
patent, and also in the application for Letters 
Patent filed by me April 7, 1888, Serial No. 
269,960, I have described a mashing-machine 
which employs revolving shovels for lifting 
the meal from the bottom of the mash-tub, 
and also for discharging it therefrom, revolv 
ing mixers which mix the mash, and rakes 
combined with said shovels, whereby said 
crust is broken up preparatory to the sprink 
ling process. In said application I have de 
scribed means whereby the mixer-shaft may 
be raised from contact with the mash at one 
stage of the operation, and also means where 
by the rakes and shovels may be brought al 
ternately into position to operate upon the 
mash - the former to scratch or break up 
the crust, and the latte' to lift the mash from 
the bottom of the mash-tub and also to dis 
charge it. 
In my present improvements I employ re 
volving mixers, having suitable means where 
by they may be thrown into or out of opera 
tive contact With the mash, and also the com 
bined shovels and rakes and simple means 
for reversing said shovels and rakes. 
The principal difference between my pres 
ent improvements and that described in said 
application, so far as relates to the revolving 
mixers, is that, as described in said applica 
tion, the mixer-shaft is vertically movable to 
bring it into or out of operative contact with 
the mash, while in my present improvement 
said mixer-shaft is not adjustable vertically, 
but it is so controlled that its mixers may be 
held out of contact with the mash, and I have 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
75 
also provided improved means whereby to 
reverse the shovels and rakes to bring them 
alternately into position to operate on the 
mash. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure l is 
a side elevation of the operative parts of a 
mashing-machine, the tub itself being shown 
in vertical section. Fig. 2 is a plan view of 
said operative parts below the line 22 in Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 is an end elevation of said operative 
parts, looking in the longitudinal direction of 
the shovel and rake shaft, and showing the 
rakes in operative position. Fig. 4 is a simi 
lar view, but showing the shovels in operative 
position. Fig. 5 is a detail view showing in 
side elevation a portion of the mechanism for 
operating the mixer-shaft, and Fig. (3 is a sec 
tion on line 6 6 of Fig. 5. 
In the drawings, 1 represents the side Wall, 
and 2 the bottom, of the mash-tub, which mash 
tub has the vent or discharge-opening 3 and 
the pipe 4, through which the wort or beer is 
drawn off. A vertical rotatable shaft, 5, is 
stepped into a fixed stud, 6, bolted to the bot 
tom of the mash-tub at its axial centel'. Hori 
Zontal arms 7 8 project outwardly from the 
shaft 5 in opposite directions and to equal 
distances. The arm 7 carries at its outer end 
a hanger, ), in the lower end of which hanger 
is journaled the mixer-shaft 10, and said shaft 
carries a loose pinion, 11, which meshes with 
a beveledgear, 12, secured upon the fixed stud 
6. On the said mixer-shaft the arms 13 of the 
mixers 14 are disposed radially. A sliding 
clutch, 15, works on a feather on shaft 10, 
which clutch is moved by means of a lever, 
16, arm 17, pivoted link 18, and handle 19; but 
any other suitable devices may be substituted 
for this set of clutch-levers. 
As shown in Fig. 1, the clutch is thrown out 
of engagement with the beveled gear; but a 
movement of the handle 19 to the right will 
operate through the level's 18, 17, and 16 and 
throw it into engagement with the pinion 11, 
whereby motion may be imparted to the mixer 
shaft. The means for throwing the mixers 
out of contact with the mash and into the po 
sition shown in Figs. 3 and 4 comprise a sleeve, 
20, which may be carried by the arm 7 and 
chain 21, passing over sprocket-wheels 22 22, 
set, respectively, on the sleeve 20 and the mix 
er-shaft 10. Handles 23 afford means for ro 
9o 
95 
do 
894,370 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
tating the sleeve 20, and said sleeve is pro 
Vided on its periphery with lugs 24, between 
which a locking-notch is provided for a de 
tent, 25, on the end of a pivoted lever, 26, to 
which one end of arm 19 is pivoted. Now, 
after the Wort or beer is drawn off and it is 
desired to break up the crust which forms 
after it is settled, the clutch 15 is thrown out 
of engagement with the pinion 11, and the 
mixer-shaft is rotated by means of the chain 
21 until the mixer's 14 lie in a horizontal plane, 
and then locked in said position by the detent 
25 entering the locking-notches between the 
segments 24. The arm 8 has a hanger, 27, in 
which is journaled the shovel and rake shaft 
28, the inner end of said shaft having a bear 
ing in a hub, 29, set upon the shaft. 5, in which 
hub the shaft 10 also has a bearing. 
30 represents arms set in the same plane on 
the shaft 28, one end of said arms bearing 
shovels 31, which latter are set obliquely to 
the shaft 28, as shown in Fig. 2. At the op 
posite end of Said arms 30 are secured the 
rakes 32, which may set inline with each other. 
The shaft 28 is not revoluble, but moves around 
with the shaft 5. 
It is adapted to be rocked 
in its bearings to bring either the shovels or 
rakes in position, as desired, and this may be 
effected by means which I will now describe. 
A segment, 33, having cogs on its periph 
ery, is Secured upon the outer end of the 
shaft 28, to which motion is imparted by the 
spur-gears 34, carried by studs projecting 
from the hanger 27. The spur-gears are ro 
tated by a pawl, 35, which is carried by a 
pivoted lever, 36. This lever is engaged by 
a stud, 37, secured to a pivoted lever, 38, and 
protruded through the top of the mash-tub. 
Stud 37 has transverse pin-holes, through one 
or the other of which a pin, 39, is thrust, ac 
cording as it is desired to have the stud in or 
out of engagement with the lever 38. The 
hoes are gradually inserted into the mash au 
tomatically, easily and without, danger of 
breaking the machinery, simply by project 
ing the stud 37 into the path of the lever 38. 
At each revolution of the central driving 
shaft the stud 37 will engage lever 38, which, 
being rocked, will thrust the pawl into en 
gagement With the gear 34 and move it for 
Ward the Space of one tooth. This movement 
Will be imparted to the segment, 33, and the 
latter Will rock the shaft 28 correspondingly. 
This train of gearing will be so proportioned 
as to turn the shaft, 28 one-quarter of a revo 
lution, which will bring the shovels and rakes 
into the position shown in Fig. 3. When it is 
desired to lift the hoes out of the mash, the 
shaft 28 is rocked back, reversing the move 
ment of the gears by the use of the handles 
on the upper gear-wheel, 34, and when brought 
into horizontal position the train of gears may 
be locked by any convenient means-as, for 
example, by providing a broad tooth, 33, at 
One end of the segment 33, which will pre 
vent the further movement of the gear in one 
direction, while the engagement of the gear 34 
by the pawl will prevent, the rotation in the 
opposite direction. 
In order to enable the outer shovel to oper 
ate close to the walls of the mash-tub, Ise 
cure the arm of said shovel, which is marked 
40, in a sleeve, 41, and the upper end of the 
arm 40 may be engaged by a locking-hook, 42, 
whereby to hold said arm in operative posi 
tion. When the shovels are elevated out of 
the mash, the arm 40 is turned in the sleeve 
41, so that the shovel which it carries on its 
lower end is turned inwardly to clear the wall 
of the tub. 
In Fig. 4 the shovels are shown in operative 
position, while in Fig. 3 said shovels are 
turned up out of engagement with the mash, 
and the rakes are shown in position to oper 
ate upon the top of the mass. The mixers are 
also shown in Fig. 3 in the position they oc 
cupy during the raking or scratching process. 
Shaft 5, revolving, Will cause the rakes to 
break up the crust, and after this water is 
sprinkled upon the mass to wash out the rem 
nant of beer or wort, and when this is drawn 
off the shovels are thrown down and operated 
to discharge the meal from the tub through 
the Orifice 3 in the tub-bottom. 
It is obvious that other means for rocking 
the mixer-shaft than above described may be 
employed, and hence I do not confine my in 
vention to the sprocket-and-chain mechanism, 
but intend to employ any equivalent means 
as, for example, a hand-wheel may be affixed 
directly to the end of the mixer-shaft or a 
rigid arm extended therefrom, and said hand 
wheel or arm might be operated from the top 
of the machine, as in the construction above 
described. It is also obvious that otherlock 
ing means may be substituted for the segment 
and-detent arrangement. I prefer the gear 
system shown for rocking the shovel-shaft; 
but of course, instead of the specific gearing 
described, equivalent gearing may be em 
ployed. 
I claim 
1. In a mashing-machine, the combination, 
with the power-shaft, of a rotatable mixer 
shaft driven therefrom and having mixers ex 
tended on opposite sides thereof in substan 
tially the same plane, and means for rocking 
said shaftin its bearings, whereby to cause the 
mixers to clear the mash, and means for lock 
ing the shaft in position, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a mashing-machine, the combination, 
with a vertical power-shaft located axially of 
the mash-tub, of a longitudinal arm rigidly 
fixed upon said shaft toward the top of the 
mash-tub, a mixer-shaft extended parallel to 
and below said arm, pulley's secured upon said 
arm and upon said shaft, respectively, and a 
belt passed over said pulleys, and means for 
rotating the pulley of the arm, whereby to 
rock the mixer-shaft in its bearings, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a mashing-machine, the combination, 
with the power-shaft, of a longitudinal arm, a 
7 O 
75 
95 
od 
IO5 
d 
II5 
I 25 
 
894,370 
8 
at the other, and means for rocking said shaft, 
comprising a gear-segment Secured thereon, a 
gear-wheel enmeshed with said segment, and 
a pawl engaging Said gear-wheel and adapted 
to be operated by contact with a stationary 
part of the machine, substantially as (le 
scribed. 
7. In a mashing-machine, the combination, 
with the shovel-shaft, of a gear-segment se 
cure () 
the outer end of said shaft, one or 
nore gear-wheels in train with said segment, a 
pawl adapted to engage the teeth of one of 
sail ga'-Wheels, a level connected to sail 
pawl, and a fixed stud secured to the walls of 
the mash-tuh) in the path of the lever, whereby 
to rock the shaft through the intervention of 
the described mechanism, substantially as de 
scribed, 
S. In a mashing-machine, the combination, 
with the lake and shovel shaft, of a supple 
mental rake and shovel arm bearing a shovel 
and rake on its respective ends, located at the 
outer (n(l of said shaft and adaptel to oper 
ate (lost to the walls of the mash-tull), said 
arm being sleeved in its bearing, and means 
fol lockilng it in an operative position, sub 
stantially as described. 
(IIARIES KAESTN ER. 
Wit lesses: 
FREDERIC'K C. GOODWIN, 
('. C. I.INTHICUM. 
35 
45 
55 
O 
rotatable mixer-shaft extended parallel to 
and below said arm, pulleys mounted upon 
said shaft and said arm, respectively, a belt 
passed over said pulleys, a hand-wheel for ro 
tating the pulley of the arm to rock the shaft 
in its bearings, and suitable locking mechan 
ism, substantially as described. 
4. In a mashing-machine, the combination, 
with the power-shaft, rotatable mixer-shaft, 
and suitable gearing whereby motion may be 
imparted from the power-shaft to the mixer 
shaft at will, of gearing for rocking the mix 
er-shaft in its bearings independently of the 
power-shaft to elevate the mixer's out of con 
tact with the mash, and locking mechanism for 
locking the mixer-shaft in such position, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a mashing-machine, the combination, 
With the power-shaft, an arm extended hori 
Zontally therefrom, a mixer-shaft parallel to 
and below the said arm, a clutch whereby mo 
tion may be communicated from the power 
shaft to the mixer-shaft, gearing whereby the 
mixer-shaft may be rocked independently of 
the power-shaft to elevate the mixers out of 
contact with the mash, and means for simul 
taneously operating the clutch and for lock 
ing the mixer-shaft, substantially as described. 
6. In a mashing-machine, the combination, 
With the power-shaft, a rigid shaft extended 
therefrom having arms secured thereon, said 
arms bearing shovels at one end and rakes 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394470.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 394,470, 
J, DUFRAINE, 
TREADI.E. 
Patented De O. ll, 1888, 
21. 
 
 
  
  
a 
SSSSS SS 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographar. Washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH DUFRAINE, OF BUCY RUS, OIIIO. 
TREAD LE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 894,470, dated Dacember 11, 1888. 
Application filed July 14, 1888, Serial No,279,934. (No model.) 
To all whon, it Tuct? conce71. 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH DUFRAINE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bu 
Cyrus, in the county of Crawford and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Treadles, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
treadles. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide a treadle for sewing-machines and 
the like of great simplicity and cheapness, 
and that will permit ready adjustment of the 
parts to take up lost motion and prevent rat 
tling. 
The invention consists in the novel combi 
nation and arrangement of the parts herein 
after fully described, illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, and pointed out in the 
claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of a treadle constructed in accordance 
With this invention. Fig. 2 is a transverse 
sectional view. Fig. 3 is a reverse plan view. 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of one of the conical 
journals. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
treadle constructed of suitable metal and pro 
vided upon each side with a depending lug, a, 
through which passes a treadle-rod, B. The 
openings in the lugs at of the treattle A are 
conical and are adapted for the reception of 
conical sleeves C, that may readily be ad 
vanced into the conical openings in the lugs 
Cl as the parts become worn, thereby enabling 
any lost motion to be taken up and prevent 
ing unnecessary lateral movement of the 
threadle A upon the treadle-rod B, and also 
avoiding any rattling or other noise occa 
sioned by loose or badly-fitting parts, and also 
rocking of machines to which such treadles 
may be attached. 
The treadle-rod is provided with threaded 
portions b, that are at each side of the treadle 
and have screwed upon them the sleeves C, 
which are bored out and internally threaded 
to fit them for the threaded portions of the 
treadle-rod B. By this construction the coni 
cal sleeves C may, after they have become worn 
Cd 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
and unfit for use, be removed and replaced 
by new ones at a very small cost and With 
out necessitating the employment of a new 
treadle-rol 3 o' treadle A. This is a great 
desideratum and a great advantage over those 
constructions that have to be entirely re 
moved when the parts become worn. 
After the sleeves C have been screwed on 
the treadle-rod and into the bearings Cl, they 
are securely held in place by nuts D, which 
are screwed on the threaded portions b of the 
treadle-rod l3 against the conical sleeves C. 
From the foregoing description and the ac 
companying drawings the construction, Oper 
ation, and advantages of the invention will 
readily be seen; and it will of course be un 
derstood that I do not limit myself to the 
precise details of construction herein shown 
and described, as I may, without departing 
from the spirit of the invention, make any 
minor changes therein. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The combination of the treadle provided 
With lugs having conical openings therein, 
the treadle-rod having the threaded portions 
at each side of the treadle, and the internally 
threaded conical sleeves adapted to be screwed 
upon the threaded portions of the treadle-rod 
and capable of being advanced into the bear 
ings as the parts become worn, substantially 
as (lescribed. 
2. The combination of the treadle provided 
with lugs having conical openings therein, 
the treadle-rod having the threaded portions 
at each side of the treadle, the internally 
threaded conical sleeves adapted to be screwed 
upon the threaded portions of the treadle-rod 
and capable of being advanced into the bear 
ings, and the nuts designed to be screwed up 
against the conical sleeves, whereby said 
sleeves are securely retained in place, sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH DUFRAINE. 
Witnesses: 
L. C. FEIGHNER, 
A. M. DUNCAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394570.txt	(No Model.) 
L. 0. HARRIS, 
SAW SWACING DEWICE, 
No. 394,570, 
Patented Dec. 18, 1888. 
\ wea\o c. 
, \ \ \). \\ c w evs, 
\ , 
Y OAS.-, SNy. 
\\es 
A . 
47, & 
274.A). 
- 
f 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEVI O. HARRIS, OF CADILLAC, MICHIGAN. 
SAM-SWAG ING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 394,570, dated December 18, 1888. 
Application filed eptember 6, 1888, Serial No. 284,720. (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
85 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEVIO. HARRIS, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at the city 
of Cadillac, county of Wexford, and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Saw-Swages; and that all 
who are skilled in the business to which it ap 
pertains may be able to manufacture and use 
the same I declare the following specification 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of my 
improved swage, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, and to the letters and 
figures marked thereon, as said drawings form 
a part of said specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
devices for swaging the teeth of saws, whereby 
the saw remains stationary and the swage 
travels along the saw automatically from 
tooth to tooth as the SWaging proceeds, and 
to improvements in the construction of die 
blocks and the arrangement therein of a re 
ciprocating die and anvil and clamping mech 
anism for holding the die-block firmly to the 
saw while a tooth is being swaged and mov 
ing the SWage forward when the clamp is re 
leased 
My invention consists in the construction, 
relation, and operation of the various parts 
hereinafter described; and its object is to pro 
vide an easier, more rapid, and effectual 
method of SWaging Saws than has been here 
tofore in use, without the trouble necessarily 
consequent upon either moving the saw or the 
SWaging-machine by an independent action 
not connected with the operation of swaging 
each time a tooth is swaged. 
In the accompanying drawings similar let 
ters of reference refer to similar parts in all 
figures. 
Figure 1 is a general side view of my swage 
in position upon a saw for use, the dotted 
lines showing the interior and parts upon the 
opposite side. Fig. 2 is a view of the com 
plete swage, looked at from the bottom, the 
dotted lines indicating the position of the 
parts passing through it. Fig. 3 is a side view 
of the die-block on a vertical cutting, show 
ing the arrangement of the anvil- die and 
clamp with their respective positions when 
operating on a saw-tooth. Fig. 4 is a per 
spective view of the die. 
In the various figures, A is a die or SWage 
block of any convenient form, but preferably 
circular, as shown. Vertically through the 
lower portion of this block is a slot, O, adapted 
to receive the saw-tooth, as shown in Fig. 3. 
B is a guide which is adjustably bolted to 
A by the bolts K. K. B, as shown, has on 
either side the arms or projections LL, which, 
with the slot O, keep the swage in the plane 
of the saw. B has also that portion T between 
the guide-arms LL and the block A sufficiently 
raised above the plane of its other portions to 
allow the free passage of the drag-bar Ebe 
tween it and the points of the saw-teeth. 
C is a lever-arm to a grip-bolt, J', which is 
provided with a right or left screw-thread on 
its body. J' passes through the portion of A 
on one side of the slot O. 
J is a grip-bolt, exactly corresponding to J' 
and exactly opposite it in the opposite portion 
of O, but is stationary, except when turned 
for adjustment. The lever C also extends in 
a slotted portion, MI, below J. To N is at 
tached, by any convenient or flexible joint, N, 
a drag-bar, E, which is so bent at its other end 
as to cross the plane of the slot O and catch 
the tooth of the saw, as shown in Fig. 1. 
G is a cylindrical die having an eccentric 
face and one end of smaller diameter than 
the other. It is journaled in the block A, with 
the eccentric face in the slot O and adapted 
to be revolved by the lever-arm D. II, a cy 
lindrical anvil, corresponds in all respects in 
form to G, but is fixed stationary in A, and is 
Only revolved for the purpose of adjustment. 
The die G and anvil H are so placed in the 
block A that the enlarged portion of each is 
opposite the shaller portion of the other and 
the eccentric faces opposite each other. G is 
held in position laterally by any suitable 
means, as by the plate F, fastened by the 
Screw's to the block A and passing over and 
holding in adjustment J and engaging the 
groove P of the die G. 
I use my swage in the following manner, 
viz: It is placed on the saw, as shown in Fig. 
1, the saw passing through the slot O and the 
arms L. L., the tooth to be swaged fitting in 
between the die G and the anvil H, as shown in 
Fig. 3. The lever C is first moved toward the 
right until the grip-bolts J and J hold the 
saw firmly. In doing this the drag-arm E, be 
ing rightly adjusted for the size of the tooth, 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
95 
TOC) 
 
2 
. 
394,570 
will be pushed forward by M, the extended 
portion of C, so that it will drop over the next 
tooth ahead. The tooth, then between G and 
H, is swaged by moving the lever D toward 
the left, thereby partially revolving the die 
G, so that the eccentric face acts upon the 
tooth, pressing it against the eccentric por 
tion of the anvil H, thereby swaging the tooth 
above and below. The tooth being sufficiently 
swaged, the lever D is carried back to its for 
mer position, and the lever C, being rotated 
back, loosens the grip-bolts J and J and draws, 
by means of the drag-bar E, the swage one 
tooth farther forward, when the operation de 
scribed is repeated. 
Having thus described the construction and 
use of my swage so that any one skilled in the 
manufacture and use of such devices may be 
able to make and use it, what I claim as novel, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A saw-swage consisting of the swage 
block A, a guide-bar, B, fastened thereto by 
bolts KK and provided with guide-arms L. L., 
said Bhaving a portion of its length, T, raised 
above the plane of the other portions to allow 
the passage of the drag-bar E between it and 
- 
IO 
25 
- 
the point of the saw-tooth, the grip-lever C, 
extending in the portion M, the drag-bar E, 
the eccentric-faced die G, and anvil H, and the 
lever D, substantially as and for the purpose 
above specified. 
2. In a saw-swage, the combination of the 
guide-bar B, having the arms L L and the 
raised portion T, adjustably attached to a 
swage-block, A, provided with an eccentric 
faced die, G, and anvil H, and grip-bolts J and 
J', with a lever, C, having an extension, M, 
and a drag-bar, E, attached by a suitable joint 
to said M, substantially as and for the pur 
poses above set forth. 
3. In a saw - swage, the combination of a 
drag-bar, E, with a grip-bolt, J', by means of 
a lever, C, having an extended portion, into 
which said E is attached, whereby the action 
of said J and E are made coincident and mu 
tually dependent, substantially as and for the 
purposes above specified. 
35 
45 
LEVI. O. HARRIS. 
In presence of 
J. W. GIDDINGs, 
A. G. FULLER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394670.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 394,670. 
R. D. WRIGHT, 
GALW ANTIC BATTERY, 
Patented Dec. 18, 1888. 
 
 
WITNESSES : 
ZZZZZZZ 
Zober, Z ???, 
1/WWE/WTOR, 
ATTORNEY. 
N; PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT D. WRIGHT, OF KIRKWOOD, MISSOURI. 
GALVANI C BATTERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 394,670, dated December 18, 1888. 
Application filed May 14, 1888, Serial No. 273,768, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT D. WRIGHT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Kirk 
wood, in the county of St. Louis and State of 
Missouri, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Galvanie Batteries; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of my invention, 
such as will enable other's skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to galvanic batteries, 
the object being to provide a battery which, 
by the simple addition of acids, will last a 
very long time, the battery-cells being pro 
vided with a plurality of plates or sheets 
which are of the same material, but which are 
successively utilized and a new plate or sheet 
placed into use whenever the old one is worn 
Ollt. 
Another object is to construct a battery so 
that the spent liquids or acids will pass out or 
filter as soon as they have lost their strength, 
thus preventing needless pollution of the act 
ive material. 
My construction is adapted to be used either 
as an open or closed circuit-battery. 
My improved battery may be used either 
with or without an outer ja'. 
This zinc o' 
positive element of the battery is in the form 
of sheets or layer's which surround the porous 
cup and are pressed continually against the 
same by elastic bands, or in any other manner. 
In a carbon battery I form the porous cup 
of carbon, making it one of the elements of 
the battery. I then place next to this on the 
outside a layer of asbestus or other absorbing 
non-conductor. Next to this non-conductor 
I place several layers of sheet-zinc, which are 
in the form of segments, and bind and hold 
them with bands of rubber. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a central section of my improved 
battery, the construction being adapted for 
the use of carbon. Fig. 2 is an elevation of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a section of a sulphate of 
copper and zinc battery constructed accord 
ing to my invention. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A rep 
resents a porous cup constructed (when used 
as a carbon battery) of carbon. The bottom 
is lined with a layer of pitch to prevent the 
I. ? 
35 
45 
downward passage of the liquid. This cup may 
ordinarily be filled with pulverized carbon or 
with Sandl or other absorbent material. The 
cup is surrounded on the outside by a layer 
of asbestus or other insulating material, B, 
which will absorb moisture. This is a continu 
ous layer and insulates the carbon cup from 
the sheets of Zinc C. The sheets of Zinc are 
preferably segmental, and may be of any num 
ber desired-say three or more. They are 
held in contact with the asbestus B by rub 
ber bands I). No outer jaris required. The 
connections are made with the carbon cup 
and with the zinc in any manner desired. 
It will be seen, now, that the battery is com 
plete except for the addition of the acids. 
These are poured into the carbon cup, saturat 
ing the pulverized material which it contains, 
penetrating its side walls and saturating the 
layer of asbestus; thence it attacks the zinc, 
after which it percolates toward the bottom, 
and finally passes out after it has spent its 
force. 
In the other form of battery, where sulphate 
of-copper solution is used, the porous cup is 
filled with water and sulphatc-of-copper crys 
tals. The solution percolates through the 
Walls of the cup and attacks the zinc, which 
may or may not be separated from the cup 
by non-conducting material. The solution, 
after acting upon the Zincs, passes out in the 
form of sulphate of zinc through the bottom 
of the cell, and may be collected or not, as de 
sired. This is an advantageous point, as the 
sulphate of zinc has some commercial value 
and may thus be saved. 
Any number of Zinc layer's may be placed 
in position and held by the rubber bands, and 
it will thus be seen that the process of amal 
gamation need be performed only at long in 
tervals. When the inner layer of zinc has 
become exhausted, the rubber forces in the 
next one and brings it in contact with the so 
lution coming through the porous cup. I 
have thus described a compound battery 
which contains all the elements to produce an 
electric current by the application of certain 
fluids. As before stated, it can be used with 
an exterior jar or not. It is, however, prefer 
able to use it. Without the said jar and thus 
allow the drainage to pass away, so as not to 
6? 
7 ? 
75 
95 
I OO 
894,670 
25 
35 
ing said zinc inward toward the cup, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a galvanic battery, the combination, 
with a porous cup, of several plates or sheets 
of zinc held in contact with said cup by elas 
tic bands, the construction being such that 
liquids may flow downward between the zinc 
and cup, and finally out through the bottom 
Of the Structure. 
4. In a galvanic battery, the combination, 
with a porous cup having its bottom covered 
with a layer of pitch or other water-proof ma 
terial, of a series of zinc plates surrounding 
said cup and pressed constantly against the 
same by surrounding rubber bands, substan 
tially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
ROBT. D. WRIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
EO. KEEGE, 
MARIE C. JACOBI. 
-e 
4. 
. 
act on the zinc after the fluid loses its power, 
and also not to impair the remaining fluid in 
the cell. 
It will be observed that after the electrical 
qualities of the exciting-fluid have been ob 
tained the said fluid is automatically dis 
charged, and by the addition of fresh fluid at . 
regular intervals the battery may be used 
continuously to its full capacity. 
I do not confine myself to any particular 
shape or dimensions of porous cup, or other 
parts of the herein-described battery, as many 
modifications may be made which will not af 
fect the principle of the invention. 
What I claim as my invention is 
'1. In a galvanic battery, the combination, 
with a porous cup, of one or more layer's of 
Zinc surrounding the same and having a layer 
of absorbent material between the cup and 
2. In a galvanic battery, the combination, 
with a porous cup, of a plurality of layers of 
Zinc and One or more rubber or other elastic 
bands embracing the zinc and cup and forc 
zincs. 
- 
I. ? 
2 ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394770.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 394,770, 
 
S. M. HOYT, 
PAWING BLOCK. 
Patented Dec. 18, 1888. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SARAH M. HOYT, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PAVING BLOC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 394,770, dated December 18, 1888. 
Application filed August 16, 1887, 
Serial No. 247,077, (No model.) 
To all whon, it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, SARAH M. HOYT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Paving-Blocks; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the Same. 
My invention relates to paving-blocks, and 
its object is to form a solid curved base for an 
upper surface composed of cement or other 
suitable material, which upper part may be a 
separate molded block with a crowned upper 
surface tapering slightly toward the ends of 
the block, as described in my patent, No. 
364,928, of June 14, 1887, or may be composed 
of cement, &c., poured upon or otherwise 
placed upon the base and having a level up 
per surface. 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the base, 
and Fig. 2 a similar view with the base and 
top formation united. 
As shown in Fig. I, A is the base, in the form 
of an arch, made of baked clay, cement, iron, 
wood, or any other suitable material and in 
any suitable manner, and provided with per 
forations b. In Fig.2 the block is shown com 
plete, C being the top surface, Solidly con 
nected with the base A. 
One method of making my improvement is 
as follows: Suppose a walk six feet wide is 
desired. I first form in a mold a base of clay 
constituting a half, quarter, or other part of a 
circle of the length mentioned, and, say, 
twelve inches wide, provide the base with per 
forations, and thenbake the same. I then fill 
up the mold with any suitable cement to form 
the top surface, which may be simply cement 
or other composition in imitation of stone. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
The material poured in runs through or into 
the perforations in the base, and when the 
material is set the two parts are united sol 
idly together, one forming a solid base, the 
other a top finish and attractive appearance 
for a walk; but I do not confine myself to this 
method, as the arch may be laid with cement 
in or On a mold resting upon the ground, and 
when set the mold may be withdrawn and the 
upper surface filled in, or other similar meth 
ods may be employed, without departing from 
my invention, which consists in the product 
and not in the mode of its production nor in 
the manner of its application. 
This product may be made, as above de 
scribed, the whole desired width of a sidewalk, 
or it may be made in sections and of any size. 
It may be made on the sidewalk, or the blocks 
may be made at distant points, in which lat 
ter case the base described will answer the 
excellent purpose of strengthening the upper 
surface and obviate danger of breaking in 
transportation of the same, and, as already in 
timated, the top surface may be arched to 
correspond to the base, may taper from end 
to end, as in my previous patent, or may be 
Such upper surface, also, may be 
made level. 
provided while in a plastic state with any or 
namental design or configuration. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
A paving-block composed of two sections 
in combination, a lower arched section con 
stituting the base and provided with perfora 
tions, and an upper solid section united to 
said base, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
SARAH M. HOYT, 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. HoyT, 
EDITH F. HOYT, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394870.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 394,870, 
 
 
F. L. Mo GAHAN. 
WATER GACE, 
Patented Deo. 18, 1888. 
  
 
  
 
 
Xs 
 
 
 
WA y Nyws 
s N 
Z, 
NIHai 
3H3N 
3||N H. 
3|8 
J-2H2 
G-2", 
A. 
- 
46 HE-Fi 
Higgle 
It I N (IHS) I 
rii, 
 
 
  
   
 
 
Ea 
 
  
Z24. K. 
6 
 
19 
N N 
N N N N N 
N N 
N 
N N N 
N N N N N N N N N N N N 
HH St. 
IIH 
coma I 
-ares 
ame 
ILIII III 
s Ea 
N 
N 
--all N: 
7 C 
an Wzafi 
242K 
N a 2.N. 
 
- 
72 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED L. McGAHAN, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, 
WATERa GAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 394,870, dated December 18, 1888. 
Application filed August 15, 1888, Serial No. 282,784 (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it in City concern: 
Be it known that I, FRED L. MCGAHAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at In 
dianapolis, in the county of Marion and State 
of Indiana, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Water-Gages, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
that class of Water-gages for steam-boilers in 
Which a glass tube is mounted outside the 
boiler and connected at both ends with the 
interior of the boiler. 
The objects of my improvement are to per 
mit the removal of the glass tube without dis 
turbing the boiler-connections, to permit the 
tlse of glass tubes of different lengths, and to 
provide improved means for holding the ad 
justable parts in position. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
invention. 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation. Fig. 
2 represents a central longitudinal section. 
Fig. 3 represents a transverse section at (, 
Fig. 1. 
A and B are hollow castings constituting 
tubular quarter-turn fittings adapted to be 
screwed into the shell of the boiler, one above 
and the other below the water-line, arranged 
With their opposed open ends turned toward 
each other. Each of said fittings is provided 
with a suitable stop-cock, as at l and c, 
whereby communication with the interior of 
the boiler may be cut off. The open outer 
end of fitting B is adapted to receive and sup 
port. One end of the glass tube C, and is screw 
threaded on the outside and provided with 
the usual stuffing-box, I), through which the 
glass tube passes. 
The outer open end of fitting A is screw 
threaded, and is provided with a sliding coup 
ling consisting of the stuffing-box E and a 
short metallic tube, F, adapted to slide longi 
tudinally in stuffing-box E. Tube F is 
adapted at its outer end to receive and sup 
port one end of the glass tube C, and is pro 
vided with a stuffing-box, G, through which 
the glass tube passes. 
For the purpose of cleaning out fittings. A 
and B they are each provided at the bend 
With a removable plug, p. 
H is a blacket, which is adjustably secured 
on the fitting A, preferably by threading it, so 
as to fit the threaded portion of the fitting. 
The lower part of bracket FI terminates in a 
split bearing, J, through which tube Eslides, 
said bearing being adapted to clamp the tube 
by means of a screw, k, and to thus hold the 
tube in a fixed relation to the fitting A. 
The upper part of bracket H is perforated 
to receive the upper ends of the guard-rods 
gg, the lower ends of which rest in a suitable 
support on the lower fitting, B. 
In operation, the glass tube Chaving been 
cut to a suitable length, tube F is pushed as 
far as possible into its supporting-fitting A. 
Fittings A and B are now screwed into the 
boiler-front, one above and the other below 
the water-line, at such a distance apart that 
the ends of tube C will pass easily between 
them. Tube C, carrying the stuffing-boxes 
G and D, is now inserted in the open end of 
fitting B, and the open end of tube F is then 
drawn down over the other end of tube C, 
and is then clamped rigidly in position, SO as 
to prevent any strong pressure on the ends 
of the glass tube by tightening screw k, and 
thus closing bearing J. The stuffing-boxes 
are now packed and screwed in place and a 
tight tubular connection is formed between 
the fittings A and B. Heretofore, when it 
has been necessary to remove the glass tube 
for cleaning or other purposes, it has been 
necessary to carefully turn the connections. A 
and B from each other, which operation is quite 
liable to break the glass and to cause a leak 
at the point, where the connections enter the 
boiler. These difficulties are overcome by 
the use of my device, it only being necessary 
to release clamp J and slide tube F in Ward to 
release the glass, and if a short piece should 
be broken off from the glass tube it may still 
be used by drawing tube F farther out Ward. 
I claim as my invention 
In a water-gage, the combination of fittings 
A and 13, glass tube C, sliding tube F, having 
one end adapted to receive the end of the 
glass tube, stuffing-box E, bracket H, and the 
clamp J, all arranged to co-operate substan 
tially as specified. 
FRED L. MCGAHAN. 
Witnesses: 
A. M. HOOD, 
H. P. HOOD, 
75 
So 
85 
95 
IO 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US394970.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. CRIEST 
GUIDE FOR SEWING MACHINES 
No. 394,970. 
Patented Dec. 25, 1888, 
 
 
N 5% 2 W 
 
Ult 57 == S 
6%. 4.24 
7/. Cay 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
K. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN M. GRIEST, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE SINGER MANU 
FACTURING COMPANY OF NEW JERSEY. 
GU DE FOR SEWING - MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 894,970, dated D3cember 25, 1888. 
Application filed December 27, 1887, Serial No, 259,095, No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN M. GRIEST, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Quilting - Guides for Sewing 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
convenient quilter or quilter-guide for sew 
ing-machines, adapted to be readily secured 
in operative position or removed from the 
machine, and also adapted to be used as a 
(uilting-guide or as an ordinary edge-guide. 
To this end I provide a bracket or support 
(which is adapted to be secured to an attach 
ment-holding bar) with a notched or forked 
portion to embrace a tenon on said bar. The 
said bracket is also provided with ears, through 
which is passed the guide-carrying bar, and 
between the said ears is arranged a clamping 
device to secure the said guide-carrying bar 
in any position to which it may be adjusted. 
The guide has square corners on one side and 
rounded corners on the other, and is pivoted 
on its holding or carrying bar, so that it may 
be turned eithel side downward. When it is 
to be used as a quilting-guide, the side with 
the rounded corners is turned downward, so 
that the Work passing beneath same will not 
catch thereon; but when it is to be used as an 
edge-guide the side with square corners is 
turned downward, so that the edges of the 
fabric to be guided cannot get under it. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of one form of my improved device 
with the guide arranged for qtlilting, and 
Fig. 2 is a sectional view of the same through 
the clamping-screw and showing the guide 
arranged for use as an edge-guide. Figs. 3 
and 4 are views similar to Figs. 1 and 2, illus 
trating another form of my invention; and 
Figs. 5 and 6 are like views illustrating still 
another modification. 
A denotes the bracket or support, having a 
forked portion, ct, by which it may be attached 
to an attachment-holding bar, and having also 
perforated ears (t', through which passes the 
bar B, the latter being bent around to form a 
return-arm, b, to the end of which the guide 
IO 
45 
C is somewhat loosely riveted, so that it may 
be turned either side up, the said arm thus 
serving as a pivotal support for the said 
guide, and the corners of the latter being 55 
square on one side or edge and rounded on 
the other. 
In the forms of my invention shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4 the guide-carrying rod or 
bar B is held in place in the bracket A by a 6o 
clamping device consisting of a screw, d, 
placed between the ears a' and having a per 
forated head or loop, d", through which the 
said rod or bar passes, the said screw being 
furnished with a set-nut, e, which may be 65 
tightened to draw the said head or loop firmly 
against the said rod and hold the latter in 
place. In the form of my invention shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2 the set-nut impinges against 
a cap or housing plate, f, which, in connection 7 O 
With the ears a', completely incloses the loop 
or head of the screw and forms a neat finish 
to the bracket, the end of the head or loop 
entering a slot in the front of the bracket to 
hold the screw from turning or from lateral 75 
displacement, when the rod is adjusted. In the 
form of my invention shown in Figs. 3 and 
4 the set-nut bears against the back of the 
bracket. 
In the form of my invention shown in Figs. 8o 
| 5 and 6 the screw cl is riveted into the front 
of the bracket, and the latter has between 
the ears a' an upturned portion, Cl, against 
which the set-nut fimpinges, and which, when 
the said nut is tightened, is forced against the 85 
rod B, to secure the latter in place. In all of 
these forms of my invention the rods or bars 
B will be free to be adjusted through the ears 
of the brackets, to bring the guide C nearer 
to or farther from the needle when the set- 9o 
nuts are loosened, but will be held securely 
in place when the said set-nuts are tightened, 
as will be obvious. 
When the device is to be used as a quilter 
or quilting-guide, the guide proper, C, is 95 
turned so that its rounded corners will be 
downward, as shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 5, so 
that the Work passing beneath said guide will 
not catch thereon; but when it is desired to 
employ the said guide C as an edge-guide it IOO 
will be turned so that its square corners are 
down, as in Figs, 2, 4, and 6, and when in this 
394,970 
TO 
position it will be adjusted close to the Work 
plate of the machine, and the square cornel's 
will prevent the edges of the fabrics to be 
guided from getting under the said guide. 
I claim 
1. A quilting-guide for sewing-machines, 
consisting of the combination of the support 
ing-bracket A, having the notched or forked 
portion a and the perforated ears (t, the rod 
B, passing freely through said ear's and pro 
vided with the return-arm b, a clamping part 
which is supported by said bracket, and 
which impinges against said rod between said 
ears, a Screw and set-lnut for tightening said 
clamping part against said rod to secure the 
latter in any position to which it may be ad 
justed, and a guide at the end of Said arm. 
2. A quilting guide or gage for sewing-ma 
chines, consisting of the bracket A, having the 
notched or forked portion (t, and the perfo 
rated ears (t', the rod B, passing freely through 
said ears and provided with the arm ty, a 
2 
clamping part impinging against said iod be 
tween said ears, a screw and set-lnut for tight 
ening said clamping part against Sail rod to 
secure the latter in any position to which it 
may be adjusted, and a guide pivotally at 
tached to said arm l and provided With 
square corne's on one side and rounded col 
nel's or the other side. 
3. The combination, with the Supporting 
bracket having the perforated ears, of the 
rod passing through said eal's, a guide (a '- 
lied by said rod, a screw having a perforated 
head or loop arranged between said ears and 
surrounding said iod, a set-nutt on the said 
screw, and a cap or housing plate against 
which said nut impinges. 
In testimony whereofI a??ix my signature in 
presence of two Witnesses. 
J()IN VI. (RIEST. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY CALVER, 
EWELLA. I.) ICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395070.txt	(No Model.) 
G. H. MOORE, 
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING FILTER BEDS, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 395,070, 
Patented Deo, 25, 1888, 
 
 
IVEItDT 
N, PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
G. H. MOORE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
APPARATUS FOR OLEANING FILTER BEDs, 
No. 395,070. 
Patented Deo, 25, 1888. 
  
 
SRs: s & ; 38 
itnesses 
out- 
Inventor 
eit 
N. PERS, 'Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GE OR GE H. MOORE, OF NORWICH, CONNECTICU T. 
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING FILTER-BE DS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 895,070, dated becamber 25, 1888. 
Application filed August 5, 1887, Serial No. 246,169, (No model.) 
o 
To all tufton, it nudity CO7 ce.77. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. MOORE, of 
Norwich, in the county of New London and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new 
and useful Apparatus for Cleaning Filter 
Beds, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part thereof. 
This invention relates to the art of clean 
ing filter-beds by a bodily shifting of the ma 
terial composing the same and subjecting it 
to the action of cleansing-water during such 
shifting movement, as distinguished from a 
method of effecting such cleansing Operation 
by simply passing a reverse current of cleans 
ing-water through the bed. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means for quickly and thoroughly effecting 
the cleansing of filter-beds by shifting the 
material composing the same from the bottom 
to the top of the filtering-chamber and caus 
ing it to descend through cleansing - Water 
contained within said chamber. 
Heretofore the pipe by which such shifting 
movement of the filtering material has been ac 
complished has been centrally located within 
the chamber with its lower end extending to 
a point slightly above the bottom of said 
chamber; or when an exterior pipe has been 
employed it has led from the side of the cham 
I have found 
* ber above the bottom thereof. 
that such arrangement of the transfer-pipe 
results in a material prolongation of the time 
required to effect the shifting movement of 
the material composing the filter-bed, because 
of the difficulty encountered in properly di 
recting said material to the mouth of the 
pipe. In the case of the exterior pipe, which, 
so far as I am aware, has been used only to 
shift the filtering material from the filtering 
chamber into a separate compartment Of the 
same or another filter, the particles CompOS 
ing the filtering medium must be induced to 
move from every point of the entire area of 
the bottom of the filtering-chamber to a single 
point in the side wall of said chamber where 
the mouth of the pipe is located, and Such 
i movement is materially retarded by the force 
of gravity, as well as by the obstruction caused 
by counter-currents of the particles them 
selves. In the case of the centrally-located 
interior pipe alluded to this difficulty has 
been partially overcome by making the bot 
tom of the filtering-chamber in the form of 
an inverted cone and locating the mouth of 
the pipe above the lowest point of said bot 
tom; but inasmuch as the particles of filter 
ing medium are compelled to descend to and 
beneath the bottom of the pipe in order to 
enter it, such construction causes said par 
ticles to become closely massed about the 
outer surface of the pipe and between it and 
the inclined bottom of the chamber in a man 
ner to greatly prolong the operation of forc 
ing the filtering medium through said pipe. 
I have found that these difficulties can be 
entirely obviated and the shifting movement 
of the filtering medium accelerated in such 
manner as to materially reduce the time re 
quired to clean the filter-bed, by utilizing 
an exterior transfer-pipe, the mouth of which 
is located in the center of the bottom of the 
filtering-chamber, and by causing said bottom 
to slope upwardly from the mouth of said 
pipe to the sides of said chamber. By such 
arrangement of the pipe the particles.com 
posing the filtering medium are drawn di 
rectly into said pipe by gravity, in addition 
to the force exerted by the suction existing at 
the mouth of the pipe during the shifting 
movement. Again, the transfer-pipe has here 
tofore discharged the filtering material into 
a practically stationary body of water within 
the filtering-chamber; and it is a further ob 
ject of my invention to increase the effective 
ness of the actual Washing process by creating 
an ascending current of water within the 
chamber simultaneously with the shifting 
movement, and thus augment the force with 
which the cleansing-water is brought into con 
tact with the descending particles composing 
the filtering medium. 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
apparatus constructed and operating as here 
inafter fully described, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like 
letters designate like parts in the several fig 
ures, Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view of a 
high-pressure filter having connected thereto 
my novel apparatus. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
of a slight modification thereof. Fig. 3, in a 
. . 
. 
. 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
Ioo 
2 
895,070 
7 o 
90 
95 
- 
: 
- 
terial. 
like view, show's still another modification of 
the apparatus for shifting the filtering ma 
The letter. A designates the shell; B, the 
head: C, the false bottom, and D the true 
bottom, of the filter. The head B is prefer 
ably located a short distance below the top of 
the shell, as shown, and the false bottom C. 
preferably slopes toward its center at sub 
stantially the angle shown for a purpose pres 
ently to be described. That portion of the 
filter between head B and the false bottom 
forms the filtering-chamber, which contains 
the filtering material, (not shown.) and from 
which the filtered water is removed by means 
of collecting-tubes in the usual manner. As 
shown, the collecting-tubes are of a common 
form, consisting of perforated tubes E, covered 
with wire-gauze F. 
Communicating with the filter are a main 
supply-pipe, G H, leading into the filtering 
chamber near the top thereof; a cleansing 
water-inlet pipe, I, preferably leading from 
pipe G. H., as shown, and communicating with 
the collecting-tubes within the chamber by 
means of a branch pipe, S; a filtered-water 
outlet pipe, K L, leading from the collecting 
tubes to the point where said filtered water is 
utilized; a cleansing-water - escape pipe, N., 
leading from the top of the filter above head 
B, and a waste-pipe, MI, preferably leading 
from the filtered-water-outlet pipe K L, as 
shown. Walves are located in said pipes, as 
follows: Valve h in pipe G. H., between the 
filter and the point of intersection of said pipe 
with pipe I; valve in pipe I, below branch 
pipe S; valves in pipe S; valvel in pipe IX 
L, beyond pipe M, and valve n in pipe YI. 
Additional valves b are located in head I3 to 
govern passages through said head. 
These 
valves may all be of any suitable form to be 
operated manually; but I have shown and 
prefer to use the form of valve shown, de 
scribed, and claimed in an application for 
Lettel's Patent filed by me on the 20th lay 
of May, A. D. 1887, and serially numbered 
238,855, which valve comprises two cylinders 
located upon opposite sides of the Water way 
ol' passage through the valve-shell, said cyl 
inders containing pistons with which a gate 
or closing device consisting of an expansible 
cylinder is connected in such manner that by 
the admission of fluid or liquid under press 
lure to the cylindel's alternately said gate or 
closing device is operated in opposite direc 
tions to open and close the valve. The valves 
constructed in this mainer will be connected 
by pipes h'. ht, i. 
i*, &c., with an apparatus 
devised by me for automatically regulating 
the admission of the fluid or liquid under 
pressure to and its exhaustion from said 
yalves, which apparatus, being shown, de 
scribed, and claimed in another application 
for Letters Patent filed by me on the 17th day 
of June, A. D. 1887, and serially numbered 
241,577, need not be described herein. 
as the present invention is concerned the 
valves to hi, &c., may be manually-operated 
valves; but that they will preferably be con 
structed as shown and operated automati 
cally as set forth in my last-mentioned appli 
cation for Letter's Patent. 
As hereinbefore stated, one of the leading 
features of the present invention consists in 
removing the filtering material from the fil 
tering-chamber at the lowest point of the bot 
tom thereof by suction, and immediately re 
turning the same to said chamber at the top 
thereof, and the preferred form of apparatus 
devised by me for securing this result is shown 
in Fig. 1 of the drawings, in which the pipe 
I is continued beneath the filter, where it is 
designated by the letters T N, thence up 
wardly to and over the top of the filter and 
downwardly through head B, preferably at 
the center of the latter, the vertical portion 
of said pipe being designated by the letter P. 
Instead of making this pipe, which I will 
term the transfer - pipe, continuous, as 
shown, the parts thereof lettered T., N, and P 
could obviously be separate sections united 
by suitable couplings. 
A pipe, V, leads from the filtering-chamber 
at the lowest point of false bottom C to and 
into the transfer-pipe and terminates within 
the latter in the nozzle '', which nozzle pro 
jects into the end of the double-trumpet. 
or hour-glass conformation of the trans 
fel-pipe at the point , thus forming a com 
mon form of ejector capable of producing a 
very powerful suction through pipe V when 
ever a stream of Water is permitted to pass 
through said transfer-pipe. A valve, ', is lo 
cated in pipe V, which preferably consists of 
an ordinary gate-valve having its stem (ex 
tended into a cylinder, W, and connected to 
a piston within said cylinder, so that said 
valve call also be automatically operated by 
the admission of fluic or liquid under press 
ure to opposite ends of said cylinder. 
The discharging end of the transfer-pipe 
within the filtering-chamber will preferably 
be provided with a distributer consisting of a 
receptacle, Q, having raclial pipes of leading 
there from, as slowl, whereby the filtering 
material as it is discharged from said trans 
fer-pipe will be evenly distributed over the 
entire area of the false bottom. 
Assuming that with valves h and l open and 
the other valves closed the normal operation 
of the filter has proceeded until the filtering 
material has become clogged by the sediment 
and foreign matter eliminated from the water. 
in its passage therethrough, and it becomes 
necessary to clean the same, the operation of 
this form of apparatus is as follows: Either 
manually or automatically the valves handl 
are closed, and valves 
and the valves to 
in headl B are opened. Such movement of 
said valves closes the main-supply and fil 
tered-water-outlet pipes and diverts the sup 
ply-stream of water from pipe G II into pipe 
It will be understood, therefore, that so far, I, whence it passes through the transfer-pipe 
: 
OC) 
I O5 
IO 
I 25 
5 
TO 
 
895,070 
into the filtering-chamber through head B. 
As said stream passes beneath the filter, the 
powerful suction through pipe V, induced by 
the ejector a ', rapidly draws the filtering 
material through said pipe W into the trans 
fer-pipe, through which it is carried by the 
stream of water passing through the latter, and 
is returned again into the filtering-chamber, 
being discharged through distributer Q. The 
filtering-chamber being full of water the fil 
tering material as it descends through the wa 
ter to the bottom of the chamber is cleaned, 
and the sediment and foreign matter removed 
therefrom being of less specific gravity than 
the filtering material rise to the top of the 
chamber and pass off through the openings 
in head B and through pipe X with the ex 
cess of water discharged into the chamber by 
the transfer-pipe. This continuous shifting 
movement will in a very short time have 
caused the Whole mass of filtering material 
to be transferred from the bottom of the cham 
ber to the top thereof and back again to the 
bottom, and by closing valves 
and i the 
shifting movement is stopped and the filter 
is ready to at once begin its filtering opera 
tion again. Before resuming such operation, 
however, it may in some cases be desirable to 
cause a reverse current of cleansing-water to 
pass through the collecting-tubes E to remove 
any sediment, or foreign matter which may 
have become lodged in the perforations in 
said tubes, which can be done by opening valve 
s, which permits the supply-stream of water 
to flow through pipe S, to and through the 
tubes E, in a reverse direction, thence upwardly 
through the filtering material and through 
the openings in head B. 
Two or three min 
utes will be ample time within which to ac 
complish this result, when valves and valves 
b in head B will be closed and valves h and 
in opened. Filtration is now resumed; but 
the filtered Water, instead of passing off 
through its pipe K L, is diverted into the 
waste-pipe M for the purpose of removing 
any surplus cleansing-water which may have 
remained within the collecting-tubes. Ordi 
marily two minutes Will suffice for this pur 
pose, and then valve ) is closed and valve l 
-opened, when the filtered water again passes 
through its outlet-pipe, and the normal oper 
ation of the filter goes on as before until an 
other cleansing of its bed becomes necessary. 
The interior construction of valve h is 
shown in Fig. 1; and it will be understood that 
valves b, i, S, l, and in are or may be of simi 
lar construction to said valve h. 
It will be observed that, owing to the pow 
erful suction created through pipe V and the 
conformation of false bottom C, which cause 
the filtering material to constantly seek the 
mouth of said pipe, the operation of shifting 
the material from the bottom to the top of 
the filtering-chamber can be performed with 
great rapidity. It will be observed, further 
more, that since the discharge of said mate 
3 
rial into the chamber is exactly commensurate 
with the exhaust thereof from the chamber 
the bulk of material within the chamber re 
mains practically the same throughout the 
operation, whereby the filter is ready to re 
sume its operation as soon as such shifting 
movement ceases. I am thus enabled to very 
materially shorten the time required to per 
form the cleansing operation, as compared 
with the time consumed by the methods here 
- 
in before referred to. 
By the method just described it will be re 
membered that the filtering material is dis 
charged into a practically stationary body of 
water within the filtering-chamber, which in 
ordinary cases will sufficiently clean said ma 
terial; but by the same apparatus I am able 
to create an ascending current of water within 
the chamber whenever the conditions are such 
as to render a more positive Washing of the 
material desirable. This result is accom 
plished by opening valve S simultaneously 
with the opening of valves ; and i in the op 
eration above described, whereby the supply 
stream of water passes through pipe S and 
the collecting-tubes, simultaneously with its 
passage through the transfer-pipe, to shift the 
filtering material, and the outlet-pipe K L 
being closed the water which passes through 
said pipe S and the collecting-tubes is com 
pelled to ascend within the chamber to and 
through the openings in head B. The de 
scending particles of filtering material as 
they pass through this ascending current of 
water upon being discharged from the trans 
fer-pipe are thoroughly Washed and cleaned. 
In the last-described method the interme 
diate step of opening valves to clean the col 
lecting-tubes after valves ' and i are closed 
is of course omitted, and valves h and an are 
opened at once after the closing of valves i, 
s, z, and b. I regard the last-described method 
as being of great importance, for the reason 
that when using a filter with certain grades 
of Water it is impossible to effectually clean 
the filtering material by merely passing it 
through a stationary body of water. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown a slight modification 
of the apparatis shown in Fig. 1, in which 
the transfer-pipe is concentric at the point, 
where it receives pipe V, and the latter pipe 
is of slightly greater diameter. As an in 
jector, this formation of the pipes will secure 
equally good results wherever the supply 
stream of water has sufficient head to give it 
a high degree of velocity; but when said stream 
has but a moderate velocity I prefer to use 
the first-described construction. I have also 
shown in said Fig. 2 a regulator, d, consisting 
of a hood or cap secured to the end of pipe W . 
and having slits in its periphery of sufficient 
width to permit the passage of the particles 
composing the filtering material therethrough, 
or perforations may be made therein in lieu 
of said slits. This regulator causes the fil 
tering material to enter pipe V more slowly 
45 
55 
75 
95 
Ioo 
To5 
IIO 
l 15 
I 25 
4. 
395,070 
than it otherwise would, and can be ell 
ployed whenever it may be desirable for any 
reason to thus retard the shifting movement. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown still another nodli 
fication in which the suction which draws the 
filtering material from the filtering-chamber 
is produced by a l)u in) instead of by the slip 
ply-strealm of water, which pump also returns 
said material to the chamber. In this form 
of the apparatus the pipe S is omitted, and 
the pipe I leads directly to the collecting 
tubes, as shown. The transfer-pipe is a sep 
arate pipe designated by the letters NP, and 
leads tirectly from the bottom of the filtering 
chanibert () and through the headl B. A pump, 
O, is located at any convenient point in the 
prefer to use the ordinary 
tralnsfer-pipe. 
centrifugal pump, the shaft of which can be 
operated from any convenient source of 
power. Ordinarily the consistency of the 
filtering material will be such that said ma 
terial will readily pass through the pump 
whenever the latter is set in motion without 
additional mixture of water there with; but in 
order to render its movement perfectly free 
whatever the consistency thereof may be I 
have added a small pipe, R, leading from 
pipe I into the transfer-pipe, as shown, by 
means of which a sufficient quantity of Water 
is commingled with the filtering material to 
cause it to pass through the pump as readily 
as liquid. The operation of this form of ap 
paratus is the same as that l'eviously de 
scribed, except that the shifting movement 
of the filtering material is caused by the pump 
instead of by the supply-strean of Water. 
The lum) upon being set in operation will 
very rapidly transfer the material from the 
botton to the top of the filtering-chamber, 
and the cleansing operation can be performed 
either with or without an ascending current 
of water within the chamber, as in the case 
of the previously-described operation. 
I have omitted to show the distributer Q 
in Fig. 3 for the reason that said distributer 
is not essential to the successful operation 
of either form of apparatus shown; but I 
prefer to use it because, as previously stated, 
it causes the filtering material to be evenly 
distributed ovel' the area of the bottom of the 
filtering-chamber. 
It is obvious that modifications of the ap 
paratus he'eil described other than those 
herein mentioned can be made without cle 
parting from the spirit of that part of my 
invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secule by Tette's 
Patent, is 
1. The contination, with a filter having the 
usual inlet and outlet openings, of an exte 
riorly-located primary pipe communicating 
with the filtering-chamber at or near the top 
the:eof, and a secondary pipe extending down 
wardly from said chamber at the bottom 
thereof and having its delivery end located 
within said primary pipe, whereby a stream 
of Water passing through said primary pipe 
into the filtering-chamber will create suction 
through said secondary pipe and draw the fil 
tering material therethrough into said pri 
mary pipe, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
2. In combination with a filter having the 
usual inlet and outlet openings, a primary 
pipe leading into the filtering-chamber at or 
near the top thereof, said pipe having at a 
point between its ends a double-trumpet or 
hour-glass conformation, and a secondary 
pipe leading from the filtering-chamber at or 
near the bottom thereof to and into said pri 
mary pipe, said secondary pipe terminating 
in a nozzle whicl projects into said irregular 
conformation of the plimary pipe, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In combination with a filter having the 
usual inlet and outlet pipes and valves for 
closing the same, a transfer-pipe located out 
side of the filte) and communicating with the 
filtering-chamber at the bottom and also at 
the top thereof, and a water-inlet pipe leading 
into said chamber at or near the bottom there 
of, whereby an ascending current of cleans 
ing-water is induced within said chamber si 
multaneously with the shifting movement of 
the filtering material, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
4. The combination, with a filter having its 
filtering-chamber provided with the false bot 
tom C, sloping from its center to the sides of 
said chamber, of the transfer-pipe leading into 
the chamber at the top thereof, and pipe V, 
| leading fron the chamber at the center of 
the false bottom into said transfer-pipe, said 
pipes at or near their intersecting point form 
ing the ejector 
2', substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
5. The combination, with a filter having a 
transfer-pipe for shifting the filtering mate 
rial from the bottom to the top of the filter 
ing-chamber during the process of cleaning 
the same, of a distributer connected to the 
transfer-pipe within the filtering- chamber, 
consisting of the receptacle Q, having the ra 
dial pipes g leading therefrom, substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination, with a filter having the 
false bottom C, head B, provided with valves 
b and collecting-tubes E, and having pipes G. 
H and K L communicating with its filtering 
chamber, of the transfer-pipe leading from 
pipe G H into said chamber at the top there 
of, pipe S, connecting said transfer-pipe with 
the collecting-tubes, pipe V, leading from the 
bottom of the filtering-chamber into the trans 
fel-pipe, and valves h, i, l, S, and , located in 
Said pipes, as shown, arranged and operating 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
GEORGE H. MOORE, 
- 
Witnesses: 
W. H. CHAPMAN, 
T. M. BROWN, 
7 o 
75 
OO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
5 
Io 
2 5 
3 5 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395171.txt	(No Model.) 
E. F., PFLUE GER 
SWEAT PAD FASTENING, 
No. 395,171, 
Patented Dec. 25, 1888, 
Z79. 7. 
 
6, 27 (7%.e4er 
7 242. 41 A lazov'vee' 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNEST F. PFLUEGER, OF AKRON, OHIO. 
SWEAT PAD FASTENING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 395,171, dated December 25, 1888. 
Application filed October 31, 1888, Serial No. 289,599, (No model.) 
broad form, so that it will not injure the mal 
terial of the collar, and is provided with two 
series of apertures, ee, arranged side by side 
at its inner end. This C-spring is connected 
to the pad by the pad catch or fastening F, 
which consists of an elongated flat body por 
tion, g, having rivet-seats h. h. at its ends, and 
between said rivet-seats two catch hooks Ol' 
prongs, k k, which project from the pad and 
are designed to engage the apertures e e of 
the C-spring. These catch hooks or prongs 
k k terminate in free or headed ends, and are 
designed to allow the C-spring to be readily 
removed for readjustment when the collar to 
which the pad is to be applied requires such 
action. 
I am well aware that it is not new to pro 
vide a sweat-pad with a fastening whereby it 
can be attached to a collar, and therefore I do 
not claim such device broadly. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The pad catch or fastening having a body 
portion, g, provided with rivet-seats, and catch 
hooks or prongs having free or headed ends, in 
combination with a removable and adjusta 
ble C-spring having a series of apertures 
adapted to engage said catch hooks or prongs, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ERNEST F. PFLUEGER. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
T. W. WAKEMAN, 
R. W. SADLER. 
TO 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ERNEST F. PFLUEGER, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Akron, in the county of Summit and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Sweat-Pad Fastenings; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representa 
tion of this invention, and is a top view show 
ing a portion of a horse-collar with the pad 
attached by its fastening. Fig. 2 shows an 
edge view of the pad and its fastening and a 
cross-section of the portion of collar. Figs. 
3 and 4 are perspective views of the two por 
tions of the fastening. Figs. 5 and 6 are modi 
fications of the two portions of the fastening. 
This invention has relation to devices for 
fastening sweat-pads to the collars of harness; 
and it consists in the construction and novel 
combination of devices, as hereinafter set 
forth, and pointed out in the appended claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter 
A designates a form of pad, and B is the fast 
ener, which is adapted to be adjusted so that 
it can be readily applied to a collar of any size. 
The fastener consists of a C-spring, D, 
which is designed to clasp the small roll of 
the collar in attaching the pad in position un 
der the body side. The spring is made in 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395272.txt	(No Model.) 
L. D, HEATON, 
INSECT POISON DISTRIBUTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 395,272, 
Patented Dec. 25, 1888. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 395,272, 
N) 
&N 
L. D, HEATON, 
INSECT POISON DISTRIBUTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 25, 1888. 
  
47-a-?c 2.2 
sy % &ltbove 
 
N. PETES. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LORENZO D. HEATON, OF VICTORIA, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-FIALE TO 
ARTHUR W. BURROUGHS, OF SAME PLACE. 
NSECT PO IS ON DISTRIBUTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 395,272, dated December 25, 1888. 
Application filed September 15, 1888, Serial No. 285,462, (No model.) 
IO 
To all, Luhon, it inctly conce77: 
Be it known that I, LORENZOD. HEATON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Vic 
toria, in the county of Victoria and State of 
Texas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Insect-Poison Distributers; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in devices for sprinkling 
potato-vines and the like With powder-such 
as paris-green-and has relation more particu 
larly to that class of such devices wherein are 
employed revolving sifters, one at each end 
of a rotary shaft; and it has for its object to 
improve upon previous constructions of this 
character and to render the same more effi 
cient in Operation. 
I provide for the ready adaptation of the 
device to rows of varying distances apart. I 
provide a shield applied, as hereinafter de 
scribed, to protect the animal as well as the 
operator from the flying powder and to pre 
vent waste of the same. I also provide ready 
access to the cylinders or sieves, as hereinaf 
ter described. 
I improve in other details of construction, 
which will be more apparent from the follow 
ing description when taken in connection with 
the drawings. The novelty therefore resides 
in the combinations and the construction, ar 
rangement, and adaptation of parts, all as 
more fully hereinafter described, shown in the 
drawings, and then particularly pointed out 
in the appended claims. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in th 
accompanying drawings, which, With the let 
lers of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective of a saddle with 
my invention attached thereto. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view of my device with a portion of the 
frame and one of the sieves and shields in 
longitudinal section and one sieve in full 
: 
lines with the shield removed. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tional view on the line at of Fig. 2, looking in 
the direction of the arrow, of the frame with 
sieves and other parts broken away, and show 
ing the position of the two braces and sup 
porting-rods. Fig. 4 is a section on the line 
if y of Fig. 2, with parts broken away and a 
portion of the saddle in dotted lines, showing 
how the frame fits thereto. Fig. 5 is a cross 
section through one of the sieves on the line 
22 of Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is a perspective of a por 
tion of one of the shields. 
In the drawings, A designates a suitable 
frame of any preferred material, from which 
frame rises the standards, ct, in the upper ends 
of which is journaled the horizontal shaft B, 
provided with a suitable handle, b. 
C is the main shaft, carrying the scatterers 
or sieves D D, and on this shaft, within the 
sides of the frame, is the pulley C. Both the 
pulley c and the pulley c' on the shaft B are 
preferably provided With a peripheral groove, 
in which runs the endless cord or belt d, 
ClOSsed as shown, SO that, motion being im 
parted to the shaft B, the shaft C, and conse 
quently the scatterers or sieves, is given a 
rotary motion. The equivalent of the band 
and pulleys may be used instead of them. 
The frame A is provided with a suitable 
strap, E, for securing the device to the horn 
of a saddle, said strap being provided with a 
buckle, as shown. 
F is a stop-block secured to the frame A, 
and having its face made concave or curved, 
as shown, to fit the horn of the saddle, the 
strap passing around said block, and the 
pommel of the saddle being designed to slide 
into the space just over the said stop-block 
and below the blocks or pieces F and F, the 
latter being concaved or cut away for the pur 
pose, all as shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 4. 
. 
G designates a collar, preferably of iron, to 
adjust over the crown of the saddle, as shown 
in Fig. 4, to make it rigid and give it support. 
D Dare the scatterers or sieves, each formed 
of suitable heads, q, connected by longitudi 
nal strips , which serve to hold the said heads 
at a fixed distance apart, and also as a means 
for supporting the Wire-gauze, S, or other per 
forated material, which forms the covering of 
. 
55 
7 O 
75 
So 
95 
IOd 
25 
35 
45 
 
895,272 
3. 
and provided on their interior with longitudi 
nal strips divided in their length, so as to 
lap from one section onto the other when the 
sections are telescoped, Substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
7. The combination, with the rotary sieves, 
of the shields extending around said sieves 
and extended below the bottom thereof and 
formed with open bottoms, substantially as 
S. The combination, with the frame and 
shaft extending from it, of the sieves Sup 
ported by said shaft, the shields extending 
around said sieves, and the rods secured at 
one end to said frame and at the other end 
to said shields to brace and assist in support 
ing the latter, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
described. 
- 
O 
9. The combination, with the frame, its at 
tached parts, and the main shaft, of the sieves 
on said shaft provided with dashers, the 
shields surrounding said sieves, the plate se 
cured to the frame, and the brace-rods at one 
end fitting in sockets on the shields and at 
the other end formed with a notch engaging 
the plate on the frame, Substantially as de 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
scribed. 
- 
25 
presence of two witnesses. 
LORENZO D. HEATON. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. C. HARDING, 
C. W. NAU. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395372.txt	(No Model.) 
L. C. WING, 
BUTTON SEWING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 395,372, 
Patented Jan, l, 1889, 
, 
it. 
- - - - - 
siasm - - - - - 
t 
risks: 
r- - 
r 
C 
Wit, 
-- - - - 
3. 
 
 
 
: 
t 
ce. 
. . . .le 
e 
S. 
: 
Earl'E 
'le 
F: 
-- 
y 
s Firs' 
6%-4 
6/2% 272 22.6 
aez-z-e 2r. 
(No Model.) 
No. 395,372, 
 
L. C. WING, 
BUTTON SEWING MACHINE, 
3. Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan, l, 1889. 
 
 
 
 ? [0, 20 
Witt 
Petes, Photo-li 
thographer. Washington, O.C. 
(No Model.) 
L. C. WING, 
BUTTON SEWING MACHINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 395,372, 
Patented Jan. 1, 1889. 
W/7 WEEEF 
e-69 a-ee 
A 12-4 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LING AN. C. WING, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND 
MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE UNION BUTTON SEWING MACHINE COM 
PANY, OF MASSACII USETTS, 
BUTTON-SEWING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 395,372, dated January 1, 1889, 
Application filed September 4, 1886, Serial No. 212,673, (No model,) 
I 5 
(ity conce/'7. 
To all ttf-07), it 
Be it known that I, LINGAN C. WING, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Button-Sewing Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
\ly in Vention relates to an organized ma 
chine by which to sew buttons upon fabrics 
Io or gaments, and particularly to a machine or 
class shown and described in Letters Patent 
of the United States, granted to L. J. Dris 
coll December 16, 1884, Nos. 309,209 and 
309,210, and December 25, 1883, No. 290,981. 
It is the special purpose of my invention to 
improve the machines disclosed in said Let 
ters Patent to the end of securing simplicity 
and strength of construction in all of the ele 
ments, exactness and readiness of adjustment 
2O of such parts as it is desirable or necessary to 
have adjustable, and certainty and smooth 
ness or steadiness in the operation of the en 
tire machine. 
Having thus indicated the nature and ob 
25 jects of my invention, I will proceed to de 
Scribe the same, so that other's skilled in the 
art to which it appertains may be able to 
make and use it, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, and to the letters of 
3o reference marked thereon, the invention be 
ing particularly pointed out, and distinctly 
claimed at the end of the explanation of its 
construction and operation. 
Of the drawings, Figure I represents a rear 
35 elevation of the invention. Fig. 2 is a bot 
tom plan view of the same, the treadle-rod for 
operating the presser-foot, &c., being shown 
in section. Fig. 3 represents a sectional plan 
view on the line 11, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 indicates 
4o a sectional detail view of the clutch mechan 
ism on the line 22, Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a similar 
view, the parts being represented in a differ 
ent position. Figs. 6,7, and 8 are detail views 
hereinafter referred to. 
Similar lette's of reference indicate similal' 
parts in all of the figures. 
Such devices and groups of devices as per 
form common and well-known functions and 
are fully understood by those skilled in the 
so art and constitute no part of my present in 
45 
w 
Go 
The main shaft is provided with a worm, C, 65 
vention will not be particularly described 
hereinafter. 
In the drawings, A. represents the bed, and 
B the overhanging arm, in which is journaled 
the needle-shaft C for operating the needle- 55 
bar D. 
E indicates the main shaft, provided with 
an eccentric, F, by which the connecting-link 
G is actuated to impart motion to the needle 
Shaft in the usual manner. 
H represents the pressel-bar for holding 
down the button-carrier I, and such device or 
devices as may be considered as constituting 
the presser-foot, 
engaging the teeth of a pattern-wheel, b, pro 
Vided with lugs or cam-pieces C cl, the former 
adapted On one side to engage the adjacent 
end or finger h of a slide, e, and the latter on 
the opposite side to come in contact with the 7o 
laterally-projecting finger O of the latch-lever 
l. As shown in Figs. 6 and 7, a cam-piece, c, 
: Which is quite thin, is arranged close to pat 
tern-wheelb and in the same horizontal plane 
as the end or finger h of slide e, so that in the 75 
rotation of said wheel said cam-piece may be 
bronght in contact with the end of the finger 
of Said slide. 
Laterally-projecting finger O of latch-lever 
l is arranged at a lower horizontal plane than 8o 
calm-piece c and slide e, so that in the rota 
tion of wheel l) said cam-piece G will pass 
above said finger without touching it, while 
calm-piece d is offset from the lower face of 
wheel b, so as to pass below slidee, but in the 85 
same horizontal plane With finger o, and 
therefore adapted to be brought into contact 
therewith. The lower end, k, of shipper-han 
de K, rigidly secured to rock-shaft J, is 
adapted to rest on the rear edge, e', of the go 
slide e, as shown in Fig. 2 and in detail in 
Figs. 6 and 8, when said slide is held by its 
actuating-spring (not shown) toward the pat 
tern-wheelb, but when said slide is moved by 
the pattern-cams c in the direction of the ar- 95 
row marked thereon in Fig. 2, said lower end 
Of the shipper-handle will, by operation of 
Springi, which tends to revolve the shaftJ in 
the direction of the arrow marked on said 
shaft, drop from the rear edge, e', of said slide too 
 
2 
395,372 
O 
15 
e onto the rear edge, e', of ?inger or offset h, 
which a trundle-stud, n, extending down from 
rocking shaft J in its bearings and permitting 
the forward end of lever N, pivoted on the 
upper face of the bed at n', projects. 
the arm j', rigidly secured to the outer end of 
O represents a rod connecting lever N with 
shaft J, to be moved into the line or path of 
5 travel of the dog or clutch device?, pivoted 
the button-carrier and presser-foot I. Said 
by the pin f' on and so as to turn with the 
rod O is formed in two parts-that is, it is di 
main shaft, (the direction of movement of 
vided near its center and has a right-hand 
armi' being indicated by arrow 3 in Figs. 4 
screw-thread formed on the end of one part 
and 5,) causing said dog to ride up the in 
and a left-hand thread on the adjacent end of 
clined facej (see Figs. 1 and 2) of said armi, 
the other part and an elongated right and 
turning the dog on its pivot against a spring, 
left screw-threaded nut, O, Screwed thereon 
(not shown,) and disengaging it from a block or 
by which improved means the rod O can be 
regulated or adjusted to regulate the position 
lug, f', on the driving-pulley and balance 
wheel L. loose on main shaft E, and permit 
of the button-carrier and button laterally 
ting the said pulley and wheel to turn freely 
that is, in the direction indicated by the 
on the shaft without operating the same. 
double-headed arrow, Fig. 3-as desired with 
respect to the needle. Jam or lock nuts o' o' 
After dog or clutch device f has been rocked 
to a sufficient extent by its engagement with 
are screwed onto the ends of the rods, and af 
the inclined facej of armi' to disengage said 
ter nut. O has been properly set or adjusted 
dog from the block or lugi' on the driving 
are turned up against said nut to lock or hold 
pulley and to bring the needle into its high 
it in position. 
est position, the dog Will be caused to abut 
The revolution of wheel, imparts, through 
against a pump-center or spring-pressed 
the medium of its cam-groove n, acting on 
pin, g, (see Figs. 4 and 5,) set in a Well or hole 
the trundle-stud n., a vibratory motion to le 
25 formed in an offset (see Fig. 1) formed on arm 
ver N, which in turn imparts a like motion to 
f', and thus entirely stop the rotation of said 
the button-carrier and presser-foot I, pivoted 
at '', as hereinafter explained, through the 
shaft with the needle up, as stated. The ob 
ject of the pump-center or ping is to cushion 
medium of rod O. 
To provide for the variation in the throw 
what would otherwise be a concussive blow 
given to the armi' by the dog fin being sud 
or extent of vibration of the button-carrier, I 
denly stopped. Said pin, instead of being 
form a slot, ', in lever N, and provide a set 
nut, n, for clamping or setting the stud upon 
cushioned by a spring, might be made of Solid 
rubber or similar material arranged in Sub 
which the end of bar (), connected with lever 
stantially the same way, with a similar result. 
N, is pivoted at any point within the limits of 
In Fig. 4 I have shown the dogf on the 
said slot. As it is desirable oftentimes to 
main shaft as engaged with the blocki' of 
vary the extent of vibration of the button-car 
the driving-pulley. This will be the position 
Pier in a very slight degree for various kinds 
of the parts when the machine is being oper 
of Work, adjustment in this manner is of the 
greatest importance and provides for results 
ated, and the armi' is held out of the path of 
travel of dog f by lever K when the lower 
that could not be attained if lever N. Were 
end, k, thereof is made to rest on the 'ear 
provided at short intervals with holes in which 
edge, e', of slide e. 
the pivot-pin of rod O might be set. 
To provide for the adjustment of the but 
In Fig. 4 arm f' is shown as having been 
moved in Ward in the path of travel of log f, 
ton-carrier and button with respect to the 
and the latter as having ridden up the inclined 
needle at right angles to the line indicated 
face f* of said arm, and said dog drawn away 
by the double-headed alow before mentioned 
from block.j' of the driving-pulley, and said 
I form a screw-thread on the rock P, to which 
rod O is pivoted, projecting rearwardly from 
pulley released from the main shaft, the dog 
if having been brought against the spring 
the button-carrier I, through a block or stud, 
pressed ping, which will be the position of the 
p, projecting up from the presser-foot mech 
parts mentioned when the slide e has been 
anism, and turn a thumb or set nut, p', on 
moved in the direction of the arrow marked 
said screw-threaded end of rod P, providing 
a jam-nut, p, for locking or fixing said rod in 
thereon in Fig. 2, and the lower end, l, of le 
ver IX has dropped from the edge e' of the 
position after it has been once properly set or 
slide e to the offset edge e', permitting the 
adjusted by the thumb-nut. This improved 
spring j to rock shaft J, so as to move arif' 
mechanism, like the means by which rod O is 
from the position in which it is represented 
connected with level N, provides for adjust 
in Fig. 5 to that in which it is portrayed in 
ment of the button-carrier with respect to the 
Fig. 4. 
needle to a degree of the utmost nicetya 
M represents a small bevel-gear secured to 
matter of importance in button-sewing ima 
the main shaft E, and intermeshing with the 
chines. 
teeth of a larger horizontally-arranged bevel 
Lever l, Figs. 2 and 6, is provided at its 
gear, m, turning on a stud, ?n', secured to the 
outer or rearward end with an offset or hook, 
l', adapted to snap over the adjacent end q' 
bed of the machine. Said wheel n is provided 
on its upper face with an irregular cam-groove, 
of lever Q by the action of spring l' when the 
m, (shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3.) into end q' of said lever is pressed inward by the 
55 
45 
35 
75 
So 
90 
95 
OC) 
IIO 
II 5 
I 25 
395,872 
3 
9 O 
95 
CO 
EO 
I 15 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5 O 
operation of finger S, Secured to rock-shaft S, 
as hereinafter explained, as represented in 
said Figs. 2 and 6. 
Lever Q is pivoted near its middle, as at q, 
to the bed of the machine, and at its forward 
end is pivoted to the rearward or outer end 
of a bar, R., arranged substantially at right 
angles to lever Q, and to which bar R, the but 
ton-carrier is pivoted, as at r', Figs. 2 and 3, 
and shifts the latter by the operation of spring 
r' when locking-lever l is disengaged from the 
end of lever (Q by the action of one of the 
cam-lugs d on the finger O of said lever l. 
Pivot ' extends through a slot (not shown) 
in needle or work plate R', said slot being 
elongated in a direction at right angles to 
main shaft E. 
By dispensing with all of the devices inter 
mediate of the lever Q and button-carrier l, 
save the bar R, I am enabled to greatly sim 
plify the construction of the machine at this 
point, securing entire certainty of operation 
and reducing liability of breakage and of the 
parts being disarranged or disordered. 
S indicates a rock-shaft having suitable 
bearings in the bed of the machine, which 
rock-shaft is provided at its forward end with 
an upwardly-extending finger, S, the upper 
end of which rests against the rear edge of 
lever Q back or to the rear of its fulcrum 
point. At its rear end rock-shaft S is pro 
vided with a laterally-extending arm, s', (see 
Figs. 2 and 3.) the inner end of which is con 
nected by a link, s, with the rear end of a le 
ver, s, pivoted at S' to the overhanging alm 
l3, and at its forward end extending under a 
lug, s, projecting laterally from the presser 
bar, as represented in Fig. 1, so that when the 
presser-bar is raised to insert the work and a 
new button in the button-carrier, by depress 
ing the rear end of levers the shaft, S Will be 
rocked, so as to cause its attached finger to 
move the rear end of bar Q inward in the di 
rection of arrow 2, Fig. 2, so that the adjacent 
end of lever l will, by the action of spring l', 
snap thereo ver, all as will be readily under 
stood by an inspection of Fig. 2 of the draw 
ings. 
In order to enable the operator to readily 
depress the rear or inner end of lever s, for 
the purposes' explained, or to simply raise the 
presser-foot, I extend connecting-link is by 
attaching thereto a rod, T, connected with a 
treadle, t, adapted to operate on the floor, 
whereby, when said treadle is depressed, the 
rear end of lever s will be drawn down, with 
the result specified. 
As shown, gear-wheel n has twice the num 
ber of teeth that are formed in wheel M, so 
that the latter wheel will make but one revo 
lution to two of the former. Consequently rod 
O will be reciprocated once to each two revo 
lutions of the main shaft, E, and two recipro 
catory movements of the needle-bar, this tim 
ing of the parts being necessary in order to 
secure the descent of the needle first through 
one hole of the pair of holes in the button 
being operated upon, and then through the 
other. 
If desired, wheel m, as is obvious, may be 
constructed with a cam-groove in its periph 
elry, similar to cam U, for operating the take 
up devices, and be vertically arranged on an 
independent stud, instead of horizontally, as 
shown, and be operated by a gear similar to 
gear M on the main shaft. I prefer, however, 
the arrangement shown. 
In operation, the parts being set and ar 
ranged as represented in Fig. 2, except that a 
cam-piece, c, will have just passed finger h of 
slide e, a four-hole button being in the but 
ton-carrier, and the goods to which the button 
is to be attached being placed under the 
presser-foot and the machine set in motion, 
the needle will descend and stitch first through 
one of the holes 2 and then the other until 
cam-piece (l comes in contact with finger O of 
lever l, when the latter will be unlocked from 
lever Q, and the latter and bar R, with which 
it is connected, will be moved by the opera 
tion of spring r, which will shift the button 
carrier, (it being recollected that the button 
carrier. is pivoted to bar R at '...) so that the 
needle will operate through holes 2'2' of the 
button, as through the holes 2 2, as before ex 
plained, until one of the cam-pieces c comes 
in contact with finger h on slide e, and moves 
said slide in the direction of the arrow marked 
thereon, when the lower end, k, of lever IK 
will slip off the rear face, e', of slide e onto 
the rear face, e', of finger Ji, permitting 
spring j to rock shaft, J in the direction of the 
arrow thereon, so as to carry the inner end of 
armi' into the path of travel of clutch-dog f, 
and operate the same, with the result herein 
before explained. 
To operate the machine to repeat the Work 
of sewing on a button, after the latter is 
placed in position in the carier and the goods 
put under the presser-foot, the lever K is op 
erated so as to rock shaft J in a direction 
opposite to the arrow, which will move armi' 
out of engagement with clutch or dog f, and 
allow the latter to become engaged by the 
driving-pulley L, and the main shaft E to be 
operated. At the same time the lower end, k, 
of lever K will be moved rearward, so as to 
cause it to engage the rear face, e', of slidee, 
moved by a spring (not shown) in a direction 
opposite to the arrow marked thereon, when 
the operation of sewing on a button Will pro 
ceed as before, the raising of the presser-foot 
and button-carrier having operated rock-shaft 
S, so as, through the medium of finger S, to 
move lever Q in position to have the hooked 
end l' of lever l snap over the end q' of le 
ver Q, and hold the latter locked in the posi 
tion in which it is represented in Fig. 2. 
To operate the machine to sew on two-hole 
buttons cam-pieces d will be replaced by cam 
pieces similar to those marked c, and the use 
of levers l and Q and bar R and their ad 
juncts, constituting the button-shifting de 
vices, dispensed with, the button-carrier hav 
55 
ar 
395,372 
ing been adjusted so as to bring the eyes of 
the buttons in proper position with relation 
to the needle, when the machine will be oper 
ated and stopped at each quarter-revolution 
of wheel b by the cam-pieces ( coming in con 
tact with finger h of slide e and there being 
no shifting of the button-carrier. 
By the improvements described it will be 
seen that the machine shown and described 
in the Driscoll patents, before mentioned, has 
been greatly simplified, rendered more com 
pact in form, cheapened in construction, made 
more certain in its movements, less liable to 
get out of order, more readily adjusted to 
different characters and sizes of buttons, and 
made easier of and smoother and steadier in 
operation, 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said in vention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
1. In a button-sewing machine, as a means for 
readily and with the utmost nicety adjusting 
the button-carrier with respect to the needle 
on a line substantially transverse to the re 
ciprocating movements of the carrier, the com 
bination, with a sewing mechanism, of a but 
ton-carrier provided with a rod, P, screw 
threaded on its rear end, a presser-foot mech 
anism provided with a lug or block, p, having 
a hole through which the 'odTP passes,a thumb 
screw, p', on the outer end of the rod to ad 
just the button-carrier, and a locking-nut, p", 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
to lock the button-carrier in adjusted posi 
tion, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a button-sewing machine, a sewing 
mechanism, a button-carrier and means for 
operating it, the main shaft, a dog, f, pivoted 
thereon, a driving-pulley running loose on 
the main shaft and adapted to engage the dog 4O 
and drive the main shaft, a rock-shaft, J, and 
means for controlling the movement of the 
Same, and an arm, f', on the rock-shaft, pro 
vided with a spring-pressed pin, g, and hav 
ing the inclined surface j', substantially as set 
forth. 
3. A sewing mechanism and a button-car 
rier, in combination with a lever, R, directly 
connected with the button-carrier, levers Q 
and l, for locking or holding the button-car 
Pier in one position, lever Q being directly 
connected with lever R, and lever l being di 
rectly connected with lever Q, a spring for 
moving the button-carrier to another position 
when released by the levers, the main shaft, 
and calms or wiper's operated by the main 
shaft and arranged to operate on leverl, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses, this 31st day of August, A. 
D. ISS (3. 
ING AN. C. WING. 
-- 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR W. CROSSLEY, 
C. F. BROWN, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395472.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. BAIRSTOW 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
w 
DOUBLE PILE FABRIC IOOM. 
No. 395,472, 
Patented Jan, l, 1889. 
V 
 
WITNESSES 
76.8aff- 
9r. & G2/2 
NVENTOR, 
W77-7/Ziccarszow 
Zy 7 as v2zorreys 
perEas. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 395,472, 
 
W. H. BAIRSTOW 
DO UBLE PLE FABRIC LOOM, 
s Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 1, 1889, 
FIG2. 
WTNESSES 
au 
- - - 
NNENTOR. 
% (3alaatu 
N. PeFS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington. E. C. 
(No Model.) 
W. H. BAIRSTOW 
8. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 395,472, 
DOUBLE PILE FABRIC LOOM, 
Patented Jan, l, 1889. 
Fi-- 
 
 
WITNESSES 
N. reters, Pholc 
lithographer, Washington, C. c. 
INVENTOR, 
r f Aarstory 
to var. 
ATTORNEYS. 
4. 
(No Model.) 
W. H. BAIRSTOW 
DOUBLE PILE FABRIC ,00M. 
N 
8. Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 395,472, 
Patented Jan, l, 1889. 
 
Wizz esses, 
of... (S (2-43, 
usua- so-out 4. 
Az were (or 
McCarv J(Aaerstow 
Aty / 2s c/672orres/s, 
22eze-Y27 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington. p. c. 
(No Model.) 
W. H. BAIRSTOW 
DOUBLE PITE FABRIC IOOM, 
8 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
No. 395,472, 
Patented Jan, l, 1889, 
 
We Zzz esses 
Azzeczor, 
us allo- ), loo-M-). 
62/2. 2.72. 
PefeRS. Photo-thographor, Washington, C. C. 
(No Model.) 
W. H. BAIRSTOW 
DOUBLE PILE FABRIC LOOM, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 395,472, 
Patented Jan. 1, 1889. 
YNTNESSES 
cy%. 8a ?taff 
3ro. & Cee-te?t, 
 
NVENTOR. 
Wr 70.75ozerszow, 
Zy 7tes vezorreys 
Olivan ava. 
(No Model.) 
W. H. BAIRSTOW. 
DOUBLE PILE FABRIC LOOM, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
No. 395,472, 
Patented Jan, l, 1889. 
s 
 
 
  
  
A. 
O 
a 8. S. 
525 
mm-------- d cC52525 
GaGa GO-GO 
acaceae 
cGCScSCSCGCS 
Co. OOOO CSCCSCSO-sG 
OsCSCCSCC 
S. Cs. EOEOEOO 
CS C5252525 || CCCGSGSC 
C OOOO CCCCCC) 
Cs (C- GOOOO CCCSCCO 
SC 2525252 CGGGGS 
S. C -OOOO CSCSCCsCSCs 
GGGGGG 
ca 
C-C-C-O-ac-Ca 
C 5252525 
C- CEO-OeC) 
  
  
 
INVENTOR 
\ 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
/N 
 
(No Model.) 
W. H. BAIRSTOW 
DOUBLE PILEFABRIC LOOM. 
8 sheets-Sheet 8. 
No. 395,472. 
Patented Jan. 1, 1889. 
Asy ZZ 
\ 
WTNESSES 
s.v. Sareff 
pe 60-ser 
- 
by its ver 
J.A. 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lahographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAMI HENRY BAIRSTOW, OF KIDDERMINSTER, coUNTY OF WORCESTER, 
ENGLAND. 
O OUBE a PE FABRC O OV. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 395,472, dated January 1, 1889. 
Application filed December 2, 1886, Serial No. 220,615, (No model.) Patented in England January 14, 1886, No. 619, 
To all who77 it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM HENRY BAIR 
STOW, a Subject of the Queen of Great Brit 
ain and Ireland, and a resident of Kidder 
5 minster, County of Worcester, England, but 
at present residing at Barmen, Rhenish Prus 
sia, Germany, have invented an Improvement 
in Double-Pile-Fabric Looms, (for which I 
have obtained British Patent No. 619, dated 
Io January 14, 1886.) of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention consists of an improvement 
in the construction of looms for weaving 
double pile fabrics, wherein a double fabric 
I5 is produced with the ornamental or body 
threads between and joining the two fabrics 
or backings, the two fabrics thus produced 
being afterward cut or divided by severing 
the portions of the ornamental or body 
2O threads which extend between the two fabrics 
or backings. By this means two fabrics are 
produced upon the loom at the same time, 
each with a cut or velvet pile-face. In the 
Weaving the body-threads are shed both from 
25 below and from above-that is, from one of 
the fabrics or backings to the other-one-half 
of the ornamental or body threads being nor 
mally in one fabric and one-half in the other 
My invention consists in so constructing 
3o the loom that the Warp-threads will be retained 
at each operation of the jacquard until they 
are bound by the shuttle-threads above and 
below, and so prevent the weights on the bob 
bins of the warp-threads from drawing the 
35 two fabrics together, and thus permitting pile 
Wires or other equivalents to be dispensed 
with, as hereinafter more fully described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a diagrammatic section of part of a loom, 
40 showing my improvements. Fig. 2 is a front 
view of part of a loom with the warps, taking-up 
rollers, and part of the jacquard omitted. lig. 
3 is a section of the main part of the loom. 
Fig. 4 is a Sectional diagram corresponding in 
45 part with Fig.1, but showing the warp-clamps 
and their controlling devices. Fig. 5 is a ver 
tical section, drawn to an enlarged scale, of 
part of the Jacquard mechanism. Fig. 6 is a 
front view illustrating in part the clamping 
5o devices. Fig. 7 is an enlarged sectional view, 
 
o 
and Fig. S a corresponding plan, of part of the 
divided middle boards of the jacquard. Fig. 
9 is a front elevation of a portion of the loom, 
illustrating the action of the stop-motion. 
Figs 10, 11, and 12 are views of cams which 55 
may be substituted for those shown in Fig. 1 
when a different form of fabric is to be Woven. 
Figs. 13 and 14 are diagrammatic sectional 
views of two forms of double pile fabric 
which may be produced by my invention. 
AA', Figs. I and 3, are the taking-up roll 
ers, upon which the two fabrics are Wound as 
they are formed and after being severed by 
any suitable cutting mechanism at K. The 
taking-up rollers and the cutting devices 65 
may be operated by any suitable or Well 
known means, which I have not thought nec 
essary to illustrate, as they form no part of 
my present invention. 
M is the lay mounted on the lay-shaft c, and 
having the necessary motion imparted to it 
by any usual means. The lay is provided 
with two sets of shuttle-boxes, N N', the two 
shuttles being picked at the same time by One 
stick in the usual Way. 
In Figs. 3 and 4, g represents the shuttle 
race for the top shuttle. It is composed of a 
number of thin strips, g', of steel, bent to the 
required form shown, and arranged side by 
side at intervals of three or four inches, and 
supported at their inner ends on a transverse 
bar or angle-iron, h, secured to the frame of 
the loom, and at their opposing ends entering 
between the cloth-plates m, where they re 
main loose, but are held in position by the 85 
yarn or threads, which pass from one fabric 
to the other. These strips g' pass through or 
between the several gears or healds i, harness 
k, and the dents of the reedl, Fig. 4. The gears 
or healds i are each provided with two eyes, 
one for the top chain, n, and one for the bot 
tom chain, O. 
The comber-board 5, through which the 
harness cords or wires k pass, is connected by 
bars or rods e e', Figs. 1 and 2, to the levels 95 
d d", centered at f to the frame of the loom, 
and raised by means of the cams X X" acting 
on the said levers d d'. The cams are fixed 
to the toothed wheels f, Fig. 2, mounted 
loosely upon the shaft y, on which shaft. is Ioo 
75 
395,472 
5 
15 
25 
keyed a pinion, p?, in gear with a correspond 
ing wheel, 2, fast upon a counter-shaft, f. 
On the latte' are keyed two wheels, and f', 
in gear with the wheels f, which carry the 
C.S. 
The boards 1 2 3 4, for operating and con 
trolling the harness, are divided into corre 
Sponding pairs, one pair above the other. Of 
the upper pair the board 2 is fixed to the 
To Jacquard frame, Figs. 1, 2, and 5, while the 
board 1 is carried by arms 13 on a cross-shaft, 
14, which has an arm, 15, connected by a rod, 
16, to the lever Z at the lower part of the 
loom. This lever Z is acted on by a cam, Y, 
Fig. 1, on the shaft ty'. Of the lower pair of 
boards, which are termed the middle boards, 
the one, 4, which is below the upper movable 
board, I, is fixed, while the board 3, which is 
below the upper fixed board, 2, is movable. 
This board 3 is carried by rods 7 S on levers 
or arms 6, FigS. 1, 2, and 5, mounted on the 
cross-shaft, 17, which has an arm, 18, Fig. 1, 
connected by a rod, 19, to a lever, Z. This 
lever is acted upon by the cam Y' on the 
shaft y. The middle boards 3 and 4 are pro 
vided with holes and slots, through which the 
harneSS-cords paSS, the slots in one board be 
ing arranged in the reverse direction from 
those in the other board, as shown in Figs. 7 
and S. 
One-half of the harness-cords are secured to 
one of the upper boards, 1, and one-half to 
the other board, 2. The cords of the board 1 
have only one set of knots over the board 4, 
and pass through the comber-board 5 without 
knots, so that when the needles 20, Fig. 1, of 
the jacquail'd push the cords required to form 
the pattern the knots of the cords acted on 
pass through the holes in the board 4, while 
4O those unacted on by the needles are caught 
in the slots. The Jacquard cylinder 21 and 
the needles may be operated by any well 
known mechanism, which I have not illus 
trated, as it forms no part of my invention. 
The harness-cords, which are suspended 
from the fixed board 2, have knots over the 
comber-board 5, as well as over the movable 
middle board, 3, Fig.1. Thus the cords which 
are pushed by the Jacquard needles 20, Fig. 
5O I, into the slots of the board 3, Fig. S, so that 
the knots are caught as the board rises, are 
raised in the usual Way to lift the warps from 
the bottom fabric to be bound in the top fab 
ric. The said cords, having also knots imme 
diately over the comber-board 5, are raised 
and lowered in the usual way for back and 
face shots. 
The warp-yarns for forming the pattern or 
design are Wound upon bobbins mounted in 
6o frames, as is usual in looms for Weaving Brus 
sels carpets or velvet pile, a separate frame 
being provided for each color. Each bobbin 
is governed, as usual, by a weight of its own, 
which always maintains the yarn taut, so that 
when the Warps are raised or lowered by the 
jacquail'd to form the pattern they are after 
Ward brought back or the slack taken up by 
65 
45 
55 
35 
the Weight, when the jacquard makes its re 
turn motion. I provide a clamp, R, to hold 
the said warp-threads (while raised from the 
bottom fabric and lowered from the top fab 
ric to form the pattern) until such threads 
are bound above and below by the weft 
threads. By this means I prevent the Weight 
on the bobbins from drawing the two fabrics 
together, and also insure a full open shed 
When the Warps are at their highest and low 
est positions, so that the upper and lower shut 
tles can be thrown simultaneously. This 
clamp, as shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 6, consists 
of sets of transverse bars and t, there being 
by preference three bars to a set-an upper 
bar, l, and two lower bars, '. The lower 
Warps pass between the upper and lower bal's 
of one set and the upper Warps between the 
bars of the other Set. In the Construction 
shown the four lower bars, , of the two sets are 
carried by a pair of upright levels, q, mounted 
on studs S on the frame. The upper bars, t, 
pass through the vertical slots in the levers 
(1, and are carried by upright rods ac, which 
are controlled by arm ('' at: on a cross-shaft, 
(', these arms u' being acted on by the calm 
to raise or lower the upper clamping-bars. 
The cam : is driven by the pinion v', fixed on 
the shaft i? and gearing with the wheel 2. 
The bars t and one of the bars of each pair 
* are covered with cloth to prevent slipping 
of the threads, which are to be clamped be 
tween them. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 the clamp is shown in its 
closed position and the harness is shown in 
the position to have back shots thrown in both 
cloths. 
The following description will explain more 
fully the operation of the loom and the pro 
duction thereon of the fabrics, of which sec 
tional diagrams are shown in Figs. 13 and 14. 
The parts being in the positions shown in 
Fig. 1-that is, the top board in its highest 
position and the boards 3 and 5 in their low 
est positions-the we?t-shots 99, Fig. 13, are 
thrown in by the shuttles in the ordinary 
manner, and then the said boards 1, 3, and 5, 
being acted upon by cams. YY X, respect 
ively, are caused to change their positions, 
the board 1 descending to its lowest position 
and the boards 3 and 5 being elevated. By 
these motions the harness-cordsk, attached to 
the board 1 and carrying the Warp-threads re 
quired to form the pattern, bring the said 
threads from their elevated position (shown in 
Fig. 1) to their lowest position, (shown in Figs. 
3 and 4) the knots on the said harness-cords 
passing through the holes in board 4, while 
the knots in the harness-cords carrying the 
Warp-threads not required to form the pattern 
in the fabric engage the slots in the board 4, 
so that the said threads descend only to the 
center or in a line with the cloth-plates n, n, 
as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. In like manner, as 
the boards 3 and 5 rise, the knots in the har'- 
ness-cords carrying the warp-threads not re 
quired to form the pattern in the fabric en 
75 
So 
90 
95 
CO 
TO 
I I5 
1 25 
395,472 
. 
3 
TO 
25 
35 
gage the slots in the comber-board 5, and are 
thereby raised to the center position only, 
while the yarn-threads required to form the 
pattern are raised by the board 3 to the re 
quired position, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. 
The weft-shots 10 10 are now thrown in by the 
shuttles, after which the boards 1, 3, and 5 are 
returned to their former positions, (shown in 
Fig. 1) and then the weft-shots 11 11 are 
thrown in by the shuttles. During the mo 
tions thus far described the positions of the 
heddles have remained unaltered; but after 
the Weft-shots 11 11 have all been thrown in 
the said heddles change their positions to 
those shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 3, 
thereby binding the chains or ground-warps 
round the shots of weft 9 :) 10 1 0 1111, 
as shown in Fig. 13, which have in the mean 
time been beaten up by the lay in the usual 
manner. The boards 1, 3, and 5 remain in 
the position shown in Fig. 1 until the shots of 
the weft, 1212 (which are repeats of the shots :) 
9) are thrown in, after which the various mo 
tions hereinbefore described are repeated un 
til the desired length of fabric is completed. 
To produce the double fabric illustrated by 
Fig. 14, the cams if y' ar, Figs. 10, 11, and 12, 
are substituted for those shown in Figs. 1 and 
2, and filling or stuffing threads n, Fig 14, 
worked by a separate set of heddles, are em 
ployed, but which are omitted from the draw 
ings to prevent unnecessary complication. 
The boards 1, 3, and 5 being in the positions 
shown in Fig. 1, the shots 9 9, Fig. 14, are 
thrown in by the shuttles, after which the po 
sitions of the boards are changed by the 
:ams y if' a', the board 1 being lowered and 
the boards 3 and 5 raised and the filling 
threads n n' being in their highest and low 
est, positions. With the parts in the posi 
tions described the we?t-shots 10 l () are 
thrown in by the shuttles, after which the 
board 1 is raised by the cam i? about half 
way and the board 3 is lowered by the calm y', 
causing the knots in the harness-cords which 
carry the warp-threads not required in the 
pattern to engage the slots in the comber 
board 5, while at the same time the filling o' 
stuffer threads ' ' are also brought to the 
center by the heddles which operate them. 
The weft-shots () 
() are then thrown in by 
the shuttles, after which the board 1 is raised 
to its highest position and the comber-lboard 
is lowered, and then the We?t-shots 11 11 are 
thrown in. The heddles i then change their 
positions, causing the chains 
to bind the 
we?t - threads 9 .) 1() () 
()* 10^ 11 11, after 
which the We?t-shots 12 12 (which are repeats 
of the shots 99) are thrown in, and the Vari 
()us motions he'eillefore (escribed a '(', 
'e- 
peated until the required length of fairie is 
completed. 
It will its uncle's tool that the clump in st 
not close before the Wai's for forming the 
figure hay ( )een raised and lowered from the 
bottom and top cloths, respectively, to their 
required points; but then the clamp is closed, 
and during the return movement of the har 
ness the figure-threads have no power to draw 
the cloths together, since they are so held fast 
by the clamp that the Weights on the said 
threads are preventel from dr. wing them 
back. 
When the shots have been beaten up by 
the lay, the clamp is released, and if there be 
any surplus slackness in the pattern-threads 
it is immediately taken up by the weights on 
their bobbins. The threads by this time be 
ing returned to their original positions, the in 
side shots are thrown after two beats of the 
lay, the heddles i having changed after the 
first inside shot was thrown. 
When weaving the fabric Fig. 13, the 
comber-board is raised only once for every 
three shots. When weaving the fabric Fig. 
14, the comber-board is raised once for every 
four shots, and in place of the cams X cams 
ic, Fig. 10, are employed, which will cause the 
comber-board to remain elevated while two 
shots are thrown. 
Figs. 3 and 9 illustrate the mechanism for 
stopping the loom when the shuttles fail to 
enter their boxes. O O" are daggers or fingers, 
(one for each shuttle) and P' is a notched 
piece fitted to slide on the block P, holted to 
the frame of the loom. 
If either of the shuttles fails in its throw, 
the upper end of the fingers O or O' (as the 
case may be) is left free to enter the box, so 
that its lower end will, as the lay moves for 
ward, engage with a notch on the piece P", 
causing it to slide into contact with the lever 
O, secured to the shaft O, Figs. 3 and 9, 
which shaft is thereby turned in its bearings, 
so as to cause a level, O, on the end thereof 
to move the starting and stopping lever O', to 
effect the stoppage of the loom. 
The constructions of fabrichelein set forth 
form the subject of an application for patent 
filed by me. November 23, SS7, Serial No. 
255,895. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the lay and harness 
of a double-pile-fabric loom, operating mech 
anism for the harness, and devices for open'- 
ating the ground-warps, with clamps to retain 
the pile Warps at each operation of the hal 
ness to prevent their weights from drawing 
the cloths together, all substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination of the harness, operat 
ing mechanism for the harness, and devices 
for operating the ground-warps, with the up 
per shuttle-race, a lay having two shuttles, 
and clans to retain the pile-war) threatls at 
each operation of the harness to prevent their 
weights from drawing the cloths together, all 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of the lay and harness 
of a double-pile-fabric loom, operating mech 
anism for the harness, and devices for oper 
ating the ground-warps, with upper and lower 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
To5 
O 
I 15 
I 25 
I 3o 
55 
Y 
65 
 
4. 
895,472 
sets of clamping-bars to retain the pile-warp to this specification in the presence of tWOSub 
threads of the upper and lower fabrics at each scribing witnesses. 
movement of the harness to prevent the 
weights of the said Warp-threads from draw- 
5 ing the cloths together, and devices, substan- 
tially as described, for operating the clamp- 
ing-bars, all substantially as set forth. 
AT 
WILLIAMI HENRY BAIRSTOW. 
EDWD. GEO. DAVIES, 
CHAS, JAS. JONES, 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name. Both of 47 Lincoln's Inn Fields, London, W. C. 
NV R 
r 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395572.txt	(No Model.) 
F. A., LOMONT, 
PULLEY, 
No. 395,572, 
Patented Jan, l, 1889. 
WITNESSES: 
4 Alt V Azza. 
Y 6-4.< 
> 
Aa 27.24 ca 4. <o-act 
INVENTOR 
By 
fc. 4 oz.a. 
ATTORNEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS A. LOMONT, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO JOHN DREIBELBISS, OF SAME PLACE. 
PULEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 895,572, dated January 1, 1889. 
Application filed July 30, 1888, Serial No. 281,427, (No model.) 
To all whon it nually conceriu: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS. A. LOMONT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Fort 
Wayne, in the county of Allen, in the State 
5 of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pulleys; and I here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, which 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
Io it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
pulley's removable and adjustable to shafts 
15 in position; and the objects of my improve 
ment are to provide a new device in the con 
struction of pulleys whereby they can most 
easily and economically be put on shafts 
and removed without disconnecting the shaft 
2O ing or taking it down for that purpose, and, 
secondly, to conserve the greatest strength 
in the pulley possible and consistent with a 
removable pulley. I attain these objects by 
the limechanism and construction illustrated 
25 in the accompanying drawings, in which 
ligure 1 is a plan view of a pulley embody 
ing the device. Fig. 2 is a view of a cross 
section of Fig. 1 on the line a c. 
Similar letter's refer to similar parts through 
The drawings show a pulley constructed 
of Wood; but I do not confine myself to that 
material, as it is obvious that the devices 
are applicable to pulley's made of any other 
The construction is as follows: Two arms, 
B 13, are suitably fastened to the continuous 
portion of the rim of the pulley. To these 
arms one part, D, of the hub A is securely 
4o fastened by the bolt II and by being joined 
into the arms. The other part, E, of the hub 
fits in between the arms, and is secured and 
fastened to the other part, TD, of the hul) by 
four bolts, KINK K. 
This part E of the hub 
45 is then made separately removable. A sec 
tion, C, of the rim of the pulley is cut out, 
with the ends in 
the purposes of removal and assisting to hold 
3o out the several views. 
35 matelial. 
- 
55 
7 O 
it in place. It may be cut out in various other 
forms, which readily suggest themselves, so 
as to answer the same purposes. The bolt F 
passes through the arms B B for the purpose 
of fastening the section C in place by com 
pression. It is placed between the hub and 
the lilm. 
I have shown and described a referable 
method of constructing my devices. 
The essential parts of my invention coln 
sist, first, in a split hub, one part of which 
is firmly secured in place and the other part 
is made so as to be easily removable, and 
means provided to securely fasten it to the 
fixed part D of the hub; second, in a single 
removable section, C, of the rim of the pull 
ley and the means provided to fasten itse 
curely in place. 
The operation is as follows: The section 
C, the bolt F, and the cap E of the hub are 
removed and the pulley is passed over the 
shaft, the shaft passing through the open 
ings thus made until it is in place in the 
hub. The cap E is then securely fastened in 
place by the bolts IK IX KIK. Then the sec 
tion C is replaced in the rim L and the bolt 
F is replaced and the arms B B drawn to 
ward each other as tightly as may be by screw 
ing up its nut. This action also draws the 
rim tightly against the section C, which, with 
the construction or V shape of its ends, is 
thus held firmly in place. The pulley is now 
ready for use. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
clain, and desire to secure by Lettel's latent, 
S 
1. The combination of a pulley-rim pro 
vided with a single removable section, the 
arms 3 lb., securely attached to the larger 
portion of the rim, the hub-section D, per 
manently secured to the arms B B, the cap . 
or hub-section E, removably secured to the 
fixed hub-section, the bolts K, to clamp the 
hub-sections to the shaft, and the bolt, F, to 
clamp the ends of the rim against the ends 
of its removable section, all substantially as 
2. The combination of the arms BB, Se 
in V shape, as shown, for described. 
 
2 
895,572 
curely attached to the rim of a pulley, the my name, in the presence of two witnesses, 
hub-section D, permanently secured to the this 26th day of July, A. D. 1888. 
arms B B, the cap or hub-section E, remov- 
ably secured to the fixed hub-section, and the 
5 bolts K, to clamp the hub-sections on the shaft, 
all substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereto subscribe 
H. C. HARTMAN, 
J. F. CURTICE. 
Witnesses; 
FRANCIS. A. LOMONT. 
W. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395673.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. VERNON. 
AUXILIARY HOSE COUPLING FOR STEAM AND AIR HOSE 
No. 395,673, 
Patented Jan. 1, 1889. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. VERNON, OF GREENSBOROUGII, NORTH CAROLINA, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO ROBERT L VERNON, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUX ARY HOSE COUPNG FOR STEAM AND A R HO SE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 395,673, dated January 1, 1889. 
Application filed June 7, 1888, Serial No, 276,316, (No model.) 
To all whon, it naily concern: 
Be it, known that I, GEORGE W. VERNON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at 
Greensborough, in the county of Guilford and 
State of North Carolina, have invented cer 
it in new and useful Improvements in Auxil 
iary Hose-Coupling for Steam and Air Brakes; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to auxiliary hose 
coupling for steam and air brakes and other 
purposes for railway cars and engines, and 
has for its object to supply an extra hose 
coupling between cars and between cars and 
engines for immediate use in case of a hose 
coupling already in use becoming unservice 
able from any cause, without causing ally de 
lay to the train, and obviating the necessity 
of putting on a new hose whenever one be 
comes disabled, as is the case now. To ac 
complish this I attach two instead of one 
hose to each end of the main air-pipe of each 
car, and two to the main air-pipe on rear of 
engine-tender, one to be in regular service, and 
the other hung up under car-platform out of 
Way to be used to take the place of the one in 
service in case of its becoming disabled from 
any cause, the air or steam being changed 
from one to the other by means of hand or 
Other suitable cut-offs in the air or steam 
pipes. 
Reference is made to the accompanying 
drawings, which show the plan of attaching 
the two hose to the main pipes, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of part of a car 
and engine, showing the application of the 
hose-couplings, the supplemental coupling 
hung up. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
coupling, showing the parts detached. Fig. 3 
is a side elevation of a T form of the branch 
pipe, which can be used instead of the Y. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the Y form of 
pipe with a three-way valve applied. Fig. 5 
is a side elevation of a modification, showing 
Separate pipes. 
In Figs. I and 2 there is illustrated a double 
end to the main pipe P, which is made by the 
use of a Y-pipe, F, which is screwed onto the 
main pipe P, and into its double ends are 
screwed the two pipes E, carrying the hand 
cut-offs C C and the two hose-couplings. A 
and 13. The hose A is coupled to the hose 
coupling D on the opposite car, and B is hung 
up by hook and rod G, connected to any suit 
able part of the car for immediate use in case 
A gives out, there being two hose-couplings 
on the end of every car and on rear end of 
every engine-tender. 
In the event of the primary hose-coupling 
A D becoming disabled from any cause the 
air or steam is cut off from it, and it is then 
uncoupled, and the supplemental hose 3 
coupled to the other car in place of it, when 
the disabled hose can be supported by the 
hook G until the next station is reached, when 
it can be removed and a sound hose put in 
place in readiness to replace the other hose 
in case it should become disabled. The un 
coupling and coupling of the sections, so as 
to change from one to the other, is readily 
done without any material loss of time, and 
the delays and annoyances experienced un 
der present conditions and arrangement are 
OWel'COI) e. 
The construction is simple, and can be ap 
plied at very small cost to pipes already in 
use on the can's. 
Many modifications in the details of con 
struction and arrangement of parts can be 
made without, departing from the spirit of my 
invention, although the construction which 
shows the separate cut-offs in the forks or 
branches of the pipe is considered the best. 
For instance, instead of the form of the Y 
shown in Fig. 1, the T form of branch pipes 
shown in Fig. 3 may be employed, and ill 
stead of using separate cut - offs in the 
branches, as shown, I may use a three-way 
valve in the fork of the Y-pipe, as shown in 
Fig. 4. The same objects sought by the 
branch pipes shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4 
can be accomplished by using two instead of 
one main supply air or steam pipe under each 
cal' or engine-tender and having a hose-collp 
ling to each end of both pipes, the pressure 
being equal in both pipes. Under such a 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
45 
2 
895,678 
TO 
I5. 
construction as shown in Fig. 5, by means 
of the cut-offs C C at each end the air or 
steam can be thrown through either hose 
coupling, A or B, as in the case of the double 
or branch ends, to one pipe. The double ends 
to one main pipe, however, are preferable, 
Owing to its being much the cheapest mode of 
attaching the two hose-couplings, the only 
thing necessary for the purpose being the 
Y-pipe, besides being easier to reach, as they 
are close together and more compact than the 
other form. The double ends can be one 
above the other, as shown, or side by side. 
The cut-offs C C should be on opposite sides, 
so that they can be easily handled. 
Whenever a hose-coupling is disabled a 
new one should be supplied at a terminal 
point or at a point, where the train stops long 
enough for it to be done without delay to the 
train. It can then be put in service, and the 
auxiliary hose hung up for the next emer 
gency, or the auxiliary hose can be continued 
in service and the new hung up as an auxili 
ary hose. 
Having described my invention and set 
forth its merits, what I claim is 
1. The combination, with a steam or air 
brake supply-pipe of a railway - car, of a 
branch pipe connected with said pipe at each 
end of the car, a hose connected with said 
supply-pipe for coupling it with the pipe of 
an adjoining car, a supplemental hose nor 
mally uncoupled and attached to the branch 
pipe with the free end suspended beneath the 
car, and adapted to be coupled with the pipe 35 
of the adjoining car in event of the primary 
coupling-hose becoming disabled, a hook for 
suspending the free end of the supplemental 
hose, and valves in the pipes to cut off the 
air or steam from one hose-coupling and di- 4o 
rect it into the other, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with a steam or air 
brake Supply-pipe of a railway-car, of a forked 
pipe connected to said supply-pipe at each 45 
end of the car, a primary coupling-hose for 
connecting one branch of said forked pipe 
with the pipe of an adjoining car, and a valve 
to said hose, a supplemental hose normally 
uncoupled and having its free end supported 5o 
beneath the car and its other end connected 
with the second branch of said pipe, while 
the free end is in readiness to be coupled with 
the pipe of the adjoining car in the event of 
the primary coupling-hose becoming disabled, 55 
and a valve for controlling the passage of air 
or steam through such supplemental hose, 
substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
presence of two Witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 6o 
GEORGE W. VERNON. 
Witnesses: 
EWELL A. T)ICK, 
WM. G. HENDERSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395773.txt	(No Model.) 
E. EMERSON. 
CATHODE FOR AN ELECTRO DEPOSITING APPARATUS, 
Patented Jan. 8, 1889. 
No. 395,773, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELISHA EMERSON, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
CATH ODE FOR AN ELECTRO. DE POSITING A PPARATUS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 395,773, dated January 8, 1889. 
Application filed March 19, 1888, Serial No. 267,668, (No model.) 
- 
To ?till It'? On it 7-City conderi. 
Be it known that I, ELISHA EMERSON, of 
l?rovidence, Providence county, Rhode Island, 
have invented a Cathode for an Electro-I)e- 
positing Apparatus, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The olbject of this invention is to produce 
ba's of copper by electro-deposition of a length 
and quality that will render them marketable 
Without further treatment. 
The invention consists of a rotary cylin 
drical cathode, coated so as to prevent cohe 
sion of the deposit, and divided by a spiral 
line or band of insulation, so as to foi'in one 
long narrow depositing-surface. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a longitudinal section through the 
depositing - Vat, and Fig. 2 a cross-section 
through the cathode and cathode-support. 
The cathode-support consists of a wooden 
cylinder, 1, removably mounted on bearings 
2, supported in the removable partitions 3. 
The heads 4 and 5 have studs (3 and 7 pro 
jecting into cylindrical openings in the ends 
of the cylinder, and they are in turn supported 
on the bearing-studs 2. The head 4 is in con 
tinuous electric connection both with Cathode 
S and the sliding brush 9, the latter being one 
pole of the machine. 
The head 5 carries a 
gear-wheel, 10, driven by gear 11 and pulley 12. 
The cathode consists of a thin Smooth metal 
cylinder, 8, covering the convex surface of the 
wooden support 1; or it may be made of a 
O 
25 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
spirally-wound strip of sheet metal, leaving 
insulating-spaces between the turns. In the 
former case I form the insulating - strip by 
covering the cathode with a spiral strip of 
flexible insulating material, leaving just 
enough of the cathode exposed to make the 
deposited strip of the required width. Before 
immersing the cathode it should be prepared 
With graphite or other suitable material, to 
prevent cohesion of the deposit. The anodes 
may be hung on either side of the cylinder, 
and may be of curved form, so as to more 
readily approximate the shape of the cylin 
der and thereby reduce the resistance. The 
cathode should be slowly rotated during the 
process of deposition, and after the deposit 
has been built up to the desired thickness it 
should be stripped from the cathode by tak 
ing hold of one end and peeling it off. The 
cylinder may then be prepared for another 
deposit. 
By this means I am enabled to pro 
duce bai's of pure dense copper of almost any 
desired length. 
Having thus described my invention, 
what I 
claim as new is 
In an electro-depositing apparatus, a cylin 
drical rotary cathode divided by a spiral line 
or band of insulation, so as to form one long 
strip of depositing-surface. 
ELISHA EMERSON. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. H. EMERSON, 
FOSTER N. GUNNISON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395873.txt	(No Model.) 
A. E. BROWN. 
HOISTING AND CONVEYING MACHINE, 
No. 395,873, 
Patented Jan. 8, 1889, 
20/z 22e arrer 
1zz-e 2zzoz. 
7. 7-7. 
lay 
.7z. 724-eratif 
c222, . 
N, PETERs, Photo-uthographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. E. BROWN, O F C L E V E LAND, OHIO. 
HostNG AND CONVEYING MACHINE. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 395,873, dated January 8, 1889. 
a 
Application filed March 15, 1887, Serial No. 231,023, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all It'? O7), it 77-?ty (072 ce17. 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER. E. BROWN, 
of Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented an Improved 
Hoisting and ('onveying Machine or Appa 
ratus; and I (lo hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompa 
inying drawings, making part of this applica 
tion. 
My invention relates to (tertain new and 
useful improvements in that kind of apparatus 
or contrivance for both lifting and transport 
ing loads in which both the raising and low 
ering movements of the weight to be manipu 
lated, and also the travel'sing movement, of 
the Weight are effected through the medium 
of a single rope or cable. 
Previous to my invention machines or con 
trivances of this known character have been 
comparatively complicated in their construc 
tion and not alway's convenient, and efficient, 
in operation; and my improvements have for 
their object to simplify the construction and 
render more convenient of operation and less 
liable to derangement machines of this species. 
To enable those skilled in the art to which 
my invention relates to understand and prac 
tice the same, I will now proceed to more fully 
describe it, referring by letters to the accom 
panying drawings, in which I illustrate a ma 
chine made according to my improvement. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view or 
elevation of one of the known forms of crane 
or hoisting and conveying machine frames, 
(such as used generally in shops and other 
Works for the handling of heavy stock or other 
articles,) but embracing my improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a top or plan view of the same. Fig. 
3 is an end or rear view of the apparatus. 
In the several figures the same part will be 
found designated by the same letter of refe 
(Ge. 
A represents the horizontal beam or tram 
way of the crane, B the vertical post or frame 
work about the axis of which the cane re 
volves, and C a suitable brace for giving the 
necessary rigidity to the structure. 
On the 
rail or rails of the tramway o' beam. A may 
5o be mounted to run in the usual manner any 
known form of carriage or trolley-such, for 
instance, as represented at D-provided, by 
preference, with an attachable and detachable 
sheave-block, (l, from which may be suspended 
or supported, as illustrated at E, the work, ar 
ticle, or material to be handled. 
f is a sheave or pulley mounted at or near 
the outer end of the tramway A in fixed lear 
ings, and over and partially a round this sheave 
is passed the single rope or cable gy, by which 
all the movements of the load-carrying con 
trivance are effected. This rope or cable, as 
Will le seen by reference to Fig. 1, passes 
from the said pulleyf (in the directions indi 
cated by the arrows) partially over one of the 
sheavese of the traveling carriage, thence 
downwardly and partially around the sheave 
or wheel of the block (l, thence upwardly over 
the other pulley, e, of the carriage, thence 
rearwardly to and partially around the grooved 
wheel?', thence down to and partially around 
the inner one of the set of wheels at G', thence 
lip to and over the Wheel (), thence down 
again to and partially around the outer one 
of the two wheels at G', and thence up to and 
over the wheelf, from whence it runs to the 
point of beginning at the wheel f, first men 
tione(l. 
In the operation of the contrivance shown 
and so fal' described the power for moving the 
cable g (for the purpose of actuating the trav 
ersing carriage I), which supports at E the 
Weight) is applied to the shaft n, upon which 
is mounted the sheave or chain-wheel seen at 
I, while the power used for the purpose of ele 
Vating and permitting the descent of the load 
at E is applied to a shaft, J, which carries the 
pulleys or wheels G, and which is operated as 
I will now explain. 
In order to raise and lower the load in 
whatever position the traversing carriage D. 
may be, it is necessary, as just stated, to move 
the shaft, and the wheels (G' bodily from and 
toward the pulley or sheave (+, and for this 
purpose said shaft J is mounted in a suitable 
carriage or sliding frame, O, from which de 
pends higidly a screw-shaft, IP, and which is 
moved up and down by the application of 
power to a take-up and let-out hand-wheel 
nut, Q, the hub of which is threaded to 
shaft P and bears upwardly against a fixed 
stand, R, through which screw-shaft P slides, 
35 
45 
 
55 
- 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
3 
395,873 
4O. 
45 
SO 
55 
Having now so fully shown and described 
my novel construction of machine that those 
skilled in the art can make and use the same, 
what I claim therein as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
i. In combination with the suitably-sup 
ported elevated tramway of a hoisting and 
conveying machine of the type shown, a car 
riage adapted to travel on said tramway, the 
single endless rope or cable g, the load-Sup 
porting sheave-block d, the wheels f, f', f, 
and G, having fixed axes of motion, and the 
set of rope-wheels G', having their shaft or 
axis of motion J mounted in a vertically-mov 
able carriage, O, the whole constructed and 
operating in the manner and for the purposes 
set forth. 
2. In a hoisting and conveying machine of 
the type helreinbefore mentioned, the combi 
nation, with the elevated tramway, the car 
riage I), the endless cable gy, the series of 
rope-wheels f, f', f, and G, of a drive-wheel, 
l, mounted fast, on the shaft of wheel G, the 
vertically-adjustable carriage O, in which are 
mounted the Wheels G, and provided with 
the screw-shaft, P, and an actuating nut-wheel, 
(), in engagement with said screw-shaft and 
bearing against a fixed stand, R, the Whole 
arranged and operating substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 31st day of August, 1886, 
ALEXANDER. E. BROWN. 
In presence of 
E. T. SCOVILL, 
CHAS. W. KELLY. 
7 O 
Io fixed axis 
I5 the contrivance. 
In other words, whenever it may be required 
to raise or lower the load, the necessary op 
erations are effected by simply turning in one 
direction or the other the nut-wheel Q on 
5 shaft P, which causes the screw-shaft P and 
the sliding frame or carriage O to move (in 
one direction or the other) on its ways, thus 
either shortening or lengthening the distance 
between the shaft. J of the wheels G' and the 
of the grooved wheel or drum, 
(seen at G.) which of course, either takes up 
or lets out the endless rope (1, which, as before 
explained, passes in the directions shown and 
described around all the wheels or pulleys of 
By a simple rotation in one 
direction or the other of the shaft 1 of the 
grooved wheel shown at G the entire run of 
the rope ol' cable () is siniply set in motion in 
one direction or the other, (without any change 
2O in its length being effected.) and in this man 
ner the travel'sing carriage ) is made to 
travel back and forth, as may be desired, upon 
Thus by the sepa 
its track on the beam A. 
rate applications of power in the manner just 
or to slide the carriage, O, in which is mounted 
the shaft.J., carrying the sheaves G, the load 
to be manipulated may be either raiset o' 
lowered or may be transported from one lo 
3o cality to another, as the requirements of the 
work being done may necessitate. 
It will be understood, of course, that when 
necessary for the purpose of an expeditious 
or economic manipulation of the load both 
35 sets of actuating devices may be put in op 
eration simultaneously, so that the load may 
be either raised on lowered at the same time 
that it is being moved laterally by a travel's- 
ing movement of the carriage D. 
25 described to either simply rotate the shaft 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US395973.txt	(No Model.) 
H. F. HAMBRUCH. 
BUTTON OR STUD, 
No. 395,973, 
Patented Jan. 8, 1889. 
 
 
YSSvs. YY Kws ears 
YYitnesses, 
(2%a? 74 
Inventor, 
J-Hiwick friedric? fune 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEINRICH FRIEDRICH HAMBRUCH, OF HAMBURG, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO 
AUG. F. RICHTER, OF SAME PLACE. 
BUTTON OR STUD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 395,978, dated January 8, 1889. 
Application filed October 3, 1888, Serial No. 287,071. (No model) : 
- 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HEINRICH FRIEDRICH 
HAMBRUCH, a subject of the German Em 
peror, and a resident of Hamburg, in the Ger 
5 man Empire, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Detachable Buttons 
or Studs, of which the following is a specifi 
Cation. 
My invention relates to that class of de 
Io tachable buttons or studs in which the fast 
ening is effected by means of folding wings 
or flaps; and the object of my improvement 
is to afford means for automatically operating 
the folding wings after having passed the 
I5 button-hole. I attain this object by the 
mechanism illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which- 
Figures 1 and 2 represent the button with 
the folding Wings in the position when enter 
2O ing the button-hole. Fig. 3 is a side view, 
with unfolded wings. Fig. 4 is a view of Fig. 
2 from below. Fig. 5 shows a vertical section 
of my improved fastening device in enlarged 
Scale; and Fig. 6, a vertical section of a button 
25 provided with a fastening device of a some 
what modified construction, also in enlarged 
scale. 
Similar letter's refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
3O The button (, is connected to a plate, g, 
which is provided with the arms e e, serving 
to arrest the folding wings ff, pivoted at n n 
to the shank c in both their extreme posi 
tions. The shank C is movable between and 
35 in the direction of said arms e e, the ends of 
which bear through suitable holes, ii, of the 
Wings ff against the heads in of the latter, 
which are formed on this side eccentrically 
to the pivots m, so that the arms, which have 
4o the tendency of a spring under certain con 
ditions, are actuating the wings ff. The lat 
te) are arrested in their extreme positions un 
der the action of the elastic arms e e as soon 
as the square parts of the heads of the Wings 
45 meet with their faces, Figs. 1 and 2. For this 
reason the holes of the shank c, in which the 
wings rest, are slightly elongated in order to 
allow a certain play to the pivots n of the 
wings. It will therefore be understood from 
depart from the button-plate g when the 
wings are in the position Figs. 1, 2, and 5 
the wings must unfold automatically. To ef 
fect this, either a pair of crank-level's, h. h, 
bearing against the button-plate g and the 55 
blunt end of the shank c, or a rod, k, Fig, 6, 
passing through the plate g and the button, 
is employed. 
The operation of this locking device will be 
as follows: In the position shown in Figs, 1, 6o 
2, 4, and 5 the button is to be introduced 
into the button-holes until the ends of the le 
vers h. h. touch the adjacent solid material of 
the objects to be joined together by the but 
ton, when the levers h l will rock on the 65 
plate g, whereby the wings fare forced into 
the position shown in Fig. 3, in which the de 
vice is locked, and the long arm of the level's 
touches the button-plate g. When detaching 
the button from the objects held together as 7o 
described, only one of the Wings f needs to 
be turned in line with the shank c, whereupon 
the other wing will follow correspondingly, 
thereby the shank c being pushed toward the 
button-plate g and the levers h. h caused to 75 
occupy their original position, Figs, 1 and 5. 
When employing the rod k, Fig. 6, to act upon 
the shank c, a slight pressure on the knob k' 
is required to lock the fastening device auto 
matically. 
I am aware that prior to my invention de 
tachable buttons and studs have been made 
with vibrating wings pivoted to the shank of 
a button. I therefore do not claim Such Colm 
bination, broadly; but 
What I do claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Lette's Patent, is 
1. As an improvement in detachable but 
tons or studs, the button herein described hav 
ing the spring-arms e e secured thereto, the 90 
movable shank disposed between said spring 
arms, and the wings ff, pivoted to said shank 
and acted upon by said spring-arms, substan 
tially as set forth. 
tons or studs, the button herein described hav 
ing the plate 9, the spring-arms secured 
thereto at their upper ends, movable shank 
disposed between said spring-arms, the wings 
5o the drawings that by causing the shank c to ff, pivoted at their inner ends to said shank 
2. As an improvement in detachable but 95 
8o 
85 
IOO 
2 
-- 
395,973 
5 substantially as set forth. 
... Wit losses: 
SSS. 
and having holes or openings through which ence of two witnesses, this 11th day of August, 
the lower ends of said spring-arms project, 
and the lever's 
h, secured to said plate (1, 
bearing at their inner ends upon said shank, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
iny invention I have signed my name, in 'es- 
ALEXANDER SPECHT, 
DIEDRICH PETERSEN. 
HE INRICII FRIETRICH HAMBRUCI. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396073.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. CORY. 
EMBROIDERY FRAME, 
No. 396,073, 
- 
Patented Jan, 15, 1889. 
   
 
H 
4 II HI. 
NIN-4 IIH 
Fic. 3. 
 
 
28i-blosses 
3v-uc11 for 
K46%ty. 
sq ki attorney 5.8. Dww.arh, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. CORY, OF KANE, ILLINOIS. 
EMBROIDERY-FRAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 396,073, dated January 15, 1889. 
Application filed May 19, 1888, Serial No. 274,445, (No model.) 
A. 
To all ush. On it inva? CO7 ce17. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. CORY, of 
Kane, in the county of Greene and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and Improved 
5 Embroidery-Frame; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full and exact descrip 
tion of the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon. 
Io My invention relates to an improvement in 
embroidery-frames, and is designed to com 
bine with an ordinary small frame, upon 
which the part of the material to be embroid 
ered is stretched, a support adapted to rest 
I5 upon the lap of the operator and admit of be 
ing turned about horizontally, while the dis 
tender or stretcher may be tilted into any re 
quired inclination that the convenience of the 
operator may demand. 
2O With this end in view my invention con 
sists in certain details of construction and 
combinations of parts, fully explained in the 
following specification and illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure l is...an elevation of the frame, show 
ing a portion of the upper part in section, 
taken in the line as ac, Fig. 3; and Fig. 2 is 
also an elevation, taken at right angles to the 
view shown in Fig. 1, exhibiting the stretcher 
3o or distender tilted into a plane inclined to 
the base-board, and a portion of each of the 
hoops of which the said stretching-frame con 
sists broken away to exhibit more fully the 
pivotal arrangement of the inner hoop; and 
Referring to Fig. 1, A represents a flat 
base-board, preferably circular in form, in 
which are inserted at diametrically-opposite 
points, as shown in the plan view, Fig. 3, two 
4o posts or standards, C, to the upper ends of 
which are pivotally secured by Wood-screws 
e, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, or other suitable 
means, an ordinary stretcher or distending 
frame, B, consisting of two hoops, bb', one 
45 within the other, so arranged that when the 
portion of the fabric to be worked upon is 
35 Fig. 3 is a plan view of the device. 
25 
drawn over the inner hoop the outer one will, 
by being brought down forcibly over it into 
the position shown in Fig. 1, retain said fab 
ric properly distended. It will be observed 5o 
by reference to Figs. 2 and 3 that the inner 
hoop, b, only is pivoted to the standards C, the 
outer one, l', being retained in position by 
friction, as it is made to fit tightly over the 
inner one when the material to be embroid-55 
ered is drawn over it. Matter's being thus, it 
will be readily seen that the part to be worked 
upon can be easily brought into any required 
position by simply turning the whole frame 
round horizontally upon the lap of the oper- 6o 
ator and tilting the stretcher Babout its piv 
ots e to any required inclination; and, fur 
ther, the stretcher requiring no other support 
than the standards or posts C, secured at 
diametrically - opposite points in the base- 65 
board, there is nothing beneath the stretcher 
that can possibly be in the way of the hands 
of the operator. 
I am Well aware that the stretcher B, sep 
arately considered, is not new, and therefore to 
I do not broadly claim such; but 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
sire to secure by Iletters Patent, is 
In an embroidery-frame having a stretcher 
consisting of two circular hoops adapted to 75 
each other, as herein described, the combina 
tion there with of a support consisting of two 
vertical standards secured immovably in a 
circular lap-board adapted to rest and permit 
of being rotated horizontally upon the lap of 8o 
the operator, the inner hoop of the stretcher 
being pivotally secured at diametrically-op 
posite points to the upper ends of the stand 
ards, as and for the purpose set forth. 
have hereunto set my hand this 3d day of 
May, 18SS. 
GEORGE W. CORY. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 85 
. 
Witnesses: 
RoBERT NEWTON, 
A. W. NEWTON. 
& 
r 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396173.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 396, 173, 
 
s: - - - 
IWWENTOR: 
SAS' 
ATTOREYS. 
52 S - is 
sy - 
S. e- s A. 
=s. 
N. Peters, Photolithographer. Washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 2, 
H. C. RILEY, 
GATE, 
No. 396, 173, 
 
 
Patented Jan 
15 
1889. 
WITNESSES: 
 
By 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERS. Photo: thographer...waslington. D, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARVEY C. RILEY, OF PERRY WILLE, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND 
ROBERT M. WILSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 896,178, dated January 15, 1889. 
Application filed October 29, 1888, Serial No. 289,377, (No model.) 
5 
I5 
25 
2O Scribed and claimed. 
To all it'll OT, it inctly conce7'n: 
Be it known that I, IIARVEY C. RILEY, of 
Terryville, in the county of Perry and State 
Of Missouri, have invented a new and in 
proved Gate, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to swinging gates and 
mechanism for operating the same without 
alighting from a vehicle, and has for its object 
IO to plOWide a gate and mechanism of this char 
acter SO constructed and arranged that the 
gate may be easily and effectively opened by 
a person in a vehicle approaching the gate in 
either direction and closed after the vehicle 
has passed through the gate-opening without 
alighting from the vehicle. 
The invention consists in a swinging gate 
and in mechanism for operating the same, 
Constructed and arranged as hereinafter de 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
(lrawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both figures. 
lFigure l is a perspective view of a swing 
ing gate and its operating mechanism con 
structed in accordance with this invention, 
and Fig. 2 is a plan view thereof. 
1 indicates a gate constructed in the usual 
3O form, with uprights 23 and horizontal bars 4, 
and hinged at One end to a gate-post, 5. The 
gate 1 is provided with a latch, 6, pivoted to 
one of the horizontal bars 4 and vertically 
movable in a keeper or guide-bracket, 7. 
When the gate is in closed position, the latch 
6 automatically moves into engagement with 
a catch, 9, on the post S. 
In order to operate the gate, a horizontal bar, 
10, essentially Z-shaped, is secured to the top 
4O of upright 2, to extend crosswise to the gate, 
the arms II 12 thereof projecting from its ends 
in Opposite directions and at right angles 
thereto. To the end of arm 12 is secured a 
COrd, 13, which extends to and passes over a 
pulley, 14, On a bracket-arm, 15, on a post, 16, 
located at the side of a road approaching the 
gate. The cord 13 hangs down from the pull 
ley 14 a Sufficient distance to allow it to run out 
When drawn forward by the swinging of arm 
12 and the opening of the gate. 
By means of cord 13 and bar 10, with arm 
35 
A cord, 26, is secured to the end of arm 11 65 
12, the gate may be closed, as hereinafter set 
forth. A cord, 17, is secured at one end to 
latch 6, passes upward through a guide, 18, On 
the gate, and is secured to a cord, 19, Sus- 55 
pended below bracket-arm 15 on post 16 and 
extending over a pulley, 20, on arm 15, to a 
pulley, 21, on the outer portion of arm 11, from 
thence to and over a pulley, 22, on the outer 
portion of arm 12, and from the pulley 22 to 6o 
and over a pulley, 23, on a bracket-arm, 24, at 
the top of a post, 25, at the side of the road 
and located on the opposite side of the gate 
opening from post 16. 
and extends through a guide, 27, on a post, 
2S, at the side of the road to and over a pull 
ley, 29, on bracket-arm 24, and is suspended 
therefrom. The post, 28 is located at such a 
distance from post 5 that when the end of 70 
gate 1 is swung to the post 28 the latch 6 may . 
be engaged with a catch, 30, on post 28, thereby 
fastening the gate in opened position. The 
distance of post 16 from post 5 and post 25 
from post 5 is such that a person in a vehicle 75 
may reach the suspendled ends of cords 13 
and 19 at the post (, or the suspended ends 
of cords 26 and 19 at the post 25, and operate 
the gate, with room enough between the gate 
opening and the team to permit the gate to So 
Swing. The suspended ends of the cords 13, 
19, and 26 are of sufficient length to run out 
over pulleys 14, 20 and 23 29 when the gate 
is swung open, and are provided with pins 31, 
or other suitable stops, to prevent their being 85 
accidentally drawn off the pulleys. It will be 
seen that the cord 17 being fastened at One 
end to cord 19 between pulley's 21 and 22, by 
drawing on either end of cord 19 the latch 6 
may be lifted and gate 1 unfastened. To open 9o 
the gate when a person has arrived opposite 
post 25, the end of cord 19 at post 25 is pulled 
until latch 6 is raised to clear catch 9, when a 
continued pull on the cord 19 acts on arm 12 
to draw it back and Swing gate 1 open to post 95 
28. Upon passing through the gate-opening 
and arriving opposite post 16 the gate may be 
closed by pulling on the end of cord 13, thereby 
drawing the arm 12 back to its original posi 
tion, the latch Gliding into engagement with Ioo 
catch 9. 
To open the gate when a person has arrived 
45 
2 
396,173 
cated at the sidle of a road on opposite sides 
of and at a suitable distance from the gate 1, 
a gate-operating cord, 26, with an end Sus 
pended beneath alm 24 of post 25, passing 
over a pulley, 29, thereon and extending and 
secured to alm 11 of Z-shaped bar 10, a gate 
operating cord, 13, with an end suspended 
beneath arm 15 of post 16, passing over pulley 
14 thereon and extending and secured to arm 
12 of Z-shaped bar 1 (), a main latch-operating 
cord, 19, suspendled beneath arm 2-4 of post 25, 
passing over a pulley, 23, thereon, extending 
to and passing over a pulley, 22, on arm l) of 
Z-shaped bar 10, from thence to and over a 
pulley, 21, on alm 11 of bar 10, to and over a 
pulley, 20, on alm 15 of post 16, from which it 
is suspended, and a branch operating-cord, 17. 
extending from latch (3 to main latch-cord 1) 
and secured there to between pulley's 21 and 
22, substantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with gate 1, hinged to 
fence-post 5, and having a pivoted latch, 6, 
and a Z-shaped double-ended lever bar, 10, 
With angular arms 11 and 12 at its ends, of a 
post, 28, located at the side of a road a distance 
from fence-post 5 equal to the length of the 
gate, and having a latch-catch, 30, a post, 25, 
with an arm, 24, and a post, 16, with an alm, 15, 
located at the side of a road on opposite sides 
of the gate and at a suitable distance from 
post 5, a gate-operating cord, 26, connected to 
alm 11 of bar () and extending to and over 
a pulley, 29, on alm 24 and suspended there 
from, a gate-operating cord, 13, connected to 
arm 12 of bar 1() and extending to and over 
a pulley, 14, on arm 15, and suspended there 
from, a main operating latch-cord, 19, Sus 
pended from and extendling over a pulley, 23, 
on arm 24, to and over a pulley, 22, on arm 12, 
to and over a pulley, 21, on arm ll, and from 
thence to and over a tilley, 20, on alm 15, and 
suspendlel therefron, and a branch latch-cold, 
17, extending to main latch-operating cord 19 
and secured thereto between pulley's 21 and 
22, substantially as shown and (lescribed. 
ARVEY' ('. RILEY. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN B. DAV is, 
W. J. J.) OERS. 
55 
75 
So 
90 
in a vehicle opposite post 16, the gate is first 
unfastened by pulling on cord 19 at post 16, 
and then, by continuing the pull, drawing on 
arm 11, and the relby swinging gate 1 open to 
post 2S. Upon passing through the gate-open 
ing and arriving opposite post 25 the gate is 
closed by pulling on the suspended end of 
cord 26, the latch (3 automatically engaging 
catch 9, as before. ly means of the arrange 
ment of cords and pulley's in conjunction with 
the latch and the bar 10 with arms 11 and 12, 
as herein before set forth, an efficient means 
is provided for opening and closing a swing 
ing gate without alighting from a vehicle. The 
horizontal arm 10 with the arms 11 and 12 al 
ranged at light angles thereto in opposite di 
rections and mounted on the hinged portion 
of the gate, presents, with the arrangement of 
cords at (l pulley's above described, the most 
serviceable form of everage for opening andl 
(losing the gate. 
Ilaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combinatio, with a swinging gilte 
laving a horizontal double-ended lever-bal 
With angular alms at its ends, mounted on 
the hinged end of the gate, of posts located 
at the side of a road on opposite sides of the 
gate, a gate-operating cord leading from one 
of the posts to one end of the double-ended 
lever, a gate-operating cord leading from the 
other post to the other end of the double-ended 
lever, a cord for operating the gate-latch, 
leading from one of the posts to one angular 
arm of double - ended lever, over a guide 
thereon, to and over a guide on the other 
angular arm of double-ended level, and from 
thence to the other post, and a latch-operat 
ing branch cord leading from the latch to the 
lain ())erating latch - (ol' and (onected 
the' With between the cord-giles on the 
aligular arms of double-ended lever-bar, sub 
stilitially as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with swinging gate 1, 
having the horizontal Z-shaped bar 10, with 
arms 11 and 12, secured to the top of hinged 
11) right 2, and the pivoted latch 6, of the lost 
li. With u'm 15, and post 25, with arm 2-4, lo 
25 
C 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396273.txt	(Model.) 
B. J. DOUDS. 
2 sheets-sheet 1. 
No. 396,273, 
 
PERMUTATION LOOK. 
w 
Patented Jan. 15, 1889. 
WITWESSES 
4 o' os-47 
(2.a.a. 
IWWEWTOR 
Attorney 
N. PETERS, Photo-ithographer. Washington, b.c. 
(Model.) 
1. 
No. 396,273, 
- 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
B. J. DOUDS. 
PERMUTATION LOCK, 
Patented Jan. 15, 1889. 
e2-3 
22 
N N t 
N 2 
SS 2 
2 
2 N: 
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
e2, exc, O2e2-ee-e6 F. SE 
s 
/ 3 
IWWEWTOR 
9-9. ucCo. 
Attorney 
N, pigers, photo-lithographer. Washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BYRON J. DOUDS, OF CANTON, OHIO. 
PERMUTATION-Lock. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 896,273, dated January 15, 1889. 
Application filed January 28, 1888, Serial No. 262,205. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To alluviuon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BYRON J. DouDs, of 
Canton, in the county of Stark and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Locks; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
locks, and particularly to that class known as 
 permutation-locks. 
The object of my present invention is to 
produce a lock for doors which shall be com 
posed of a small number of separate parts, 
and hence not liable to get out of order. 
A further object is to so construct the lock 
that its bolt may be withdrawn by a prede 
termined combination of turns of a cam-disk. 
A further object is to provide a lock with a 
disk having cam projections thereon to pro 
duce a series of paths or passages for a pin 
which actuates the bolt. 
A further object is to produce a lock which 
shall be simple in construction and operation 
and cheap to manufacture. 
A further object is to so construct the de 
vice that the operator may be guided in op 
erating the lock by a series of predetermined 
signals or stoppings of the key or manual 
perceptions. 
With these objects in view my invention 
consists in the novel construction and pe 
culiar combination and arrangement of parts, 
as will be hereinafter set forth, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a face view of my improved lock with one 
plate of the containing-face removed. Fig. 2 
is a face View of the same, showing the posi 
tion of the bolt. Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional 
view on the line acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a 
view of a modification of the bolt mechan 
ism. FigS. 5, 6, and 7 are views of modifica 
tions. 
A indicates a casing having front and real 
plates, C. Ct', and connecting portions a, this 
casing being adapted to be secured to a door, B, 
by means of bolts or screws a, or otherwise, as 
desired. The rear plate, c', of case A is pro 
jected rearwardly to produce a recess, b, for 
the accommodation of some of the working 
| parts of the device. Projecting inwardly from 
the inner face of the plate a', and within the 
recess b, is a circular flange, c, which acts as a 
bearing for one end of a hub, C, of a cam-disk, 
D, the opposite extremity of said hub being 
supported by means of a projection, c', made 
integral with the outer face of the disk, and 
seated in a perforation, c, in the center of the 
front plate, Cl, of the casing, as shown in Fig. 
3. The hub C is furnished at its center with 
a perforation, c, preferably having a square 
interior for the reception of a similarly 
shaped key, D, adapted to be extended 
through the door to which the lock is applied 
and through an escutcheon, E, fixed to the 
door, a knob, D, being provided upon the free 
end of the key D', by which to operate it. The 
key is retained to its seat within the hub C 
by means of a pin, e, passing through a trans 
verse perforation in the key D', preferably 
within the escutcheon E. A bolt, F, is placed 
in the recess b of the casing and furnished 
with a central opening, F, for the accommo 
dation of the flange c, this bolt being adapted 
to be operated through the medium of mech 
anism, hereinafter described, and to enter a 
suitable keeper, G. 
The hub C is furnished on a portion of its 
periphery with notches d for the reception of 
the V-shaped tooth of a Spring-arm, H, Se 
cured to the casing, for a purpose presently 
explained. If preferred, in lieu of the last 
described arrangement the hub may be pro 
vided on its periphery with a series of pointed 
projections to engage a V-shaped notch in 
the spring-arm H, as shown in Fig. 5. 
The disk D is provided on one face, near 
its periphery, with a flange or Wall, I, which, 
when the parts are in the positions shown in 
Fig. 1, is furnished near the top of the disk 
with an inwardly-projecting N1-shaped 
cam, J, and immediately adjacent to this cam 
projection a recess, f, is made in the flange I. 
Located at a point on the face of the disk in 
wardly from the side Wall of the recess f is a 
cam, IK, so shaped as to produce a passage, g, 
between it and one end Wall of the recess, at 
one end, and a passage, g, between the oppo 
site end wall of the recess and projection J 
and the upper end of said cam K. This cam 
is also provided at its upper end with an in 
Wardly-projecting portion, K'. Secured to or 
O 
25 
35 
45 
95 
ICO 
g 
896,273 
75 
5 
O 
made integral with the face of the disk a short 
distance from the hub C is a series of three 
downwardly-projecting V-shaped cams, h. h.' 
h', preferably connected together at their up 
per ends, the top edges of said projections 
thus producing an arc of a circle concentric 
with the hub C. A cam, h, projecting from 
the face of the disk, extends from the top of 
cam l first in an upwardly direction, then 
outwardly and upwardly and for a short dis 
tance parallel with the inner face of the block 
K, leaving a passage, f', between it and said 
block. 
A cam, i, projecting from the disk D mid 
Way between the wall I and cam h, stalts at 
a point somewhat beyond said projection and 
extends in a curved direction parallel with 
the wall I to a point below the end of the can 
h, where it is extended upwardly parallel with 
a portion of the wall of said cam h, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2. A short distance below this 
cam i is another cam, i, located midway be 
tween the wall I and cam h, and has one end 
extended upwardly parallel with one face of 
the cam h". Located between the cam h and 
wall I is another cam, k, having one end ex 
tended upwardly between this cam land the 
lower end of the block K. Projecting from 
the wall I, between the camsik, is a tooth or 
o cam, l, which preferably points in a direction 
toward the upwardly-extending portion of the 
Calm 7. 
Projecting from the upper portion or half 
of the face of the disk D is a series of seg 
mental flanges, in na n', commencing at a 
point on the disk diametrically opposite to 
the recess f. The flanges m 'm' extend in a 
curved direction to a point on a line parallel 
with one face of the cam J, while the flange 
O m extends to a point slightly below the cam 
K' of the block K. The flanges m, n' are con 
nected at one end, n, the corresponding end 
of the flange m being made to connect with 
a portion of the periphery of the hub C, thus 
producing a passage between the flange in 
and the hub, and it will be seen that the hub 
C also forms one wall of a passage, having the 
tops of the cams h h' ... for its opposite wall. 
By arranging the flanges, blocks, and calms 
o on the face of the disk D, as above described, 
it will be seen that a series of circuitous or 
tortuous passages are produced which are 
utilized in the operation of the lock in the 
manner which will presently appear. 
Pivoted to the casing A above, and prefer 
ably to one side of the center, is a pendulum 
lever, N, which projects over a portion of the 
face of the disk, and is provided with an in 
Wardly-projecting pin, o, rigidly fixed to it at 
jo a point advisably below its center, said pin 
being adapted to enter and pass through the 
passages on the face of the disk when the 
latter is rotated. A spring, O, is fixed to a 
lug or projection, n, secured to the casing A, 
and, being extended across said casing, is 
adapted to bear at or near its free end upon 
the lever N near its lower extremity and pre 
vent said lever from accidentally moving froil 
the position to which it is moved by the disk 
D through the medium of the pin O. Another 
spring, O', is secured at one end to the casing 
and bears at its free extremity upon a pro 
jection, o, on the bolt F, as shown in Fig. 2, 
and thus maintains the bolt within the keeper. 
The opposite end of the bolt is furnished with 
a projection, O, against which the lower end 
of the lever is adapted to abut and slide the 
bolt back out of the keeper G. 
In lieu of the pendulum-lever N the ar 
rangement of bolt shown in Fig. 4 may be 
adopted. With this arrangement the pin O 
will be rigidly secured to the bolt F near its 
rear end, or to the rear end of a U-shaped 
plate, F, adjacent to the bolt. When the 
pino is attached to the plate F, said plate 
will be made wider than the bolt F and fur 
nished at the free extremities of its arms F 
F8 with inwardly-projecting shoulders p p', 
adapted to engage laterally-protruding lugs 
* pi on the bolt, F, and thus cause said bolt 
to be moved rearwardly against the action of 
the spring O when the disk D is operated. If 
the pin o be attached directly to the bolt, the 
plate F and spring O' will be dispensed with. 
The preferred form of my device, being con 
structed and arranged as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
and 3, is operated as follows: Assuming the 
position of the pin O shown in Fig.1 to be the 
starting-point and the end of the bolt within 
the keeper, as shown in Fig. 2, the key D' will 
be turned in the direction indicated by the 
arrow until the V-shaped projection of the 
spring H has passed foul notches, d, of the 
hub C, and thus produce four engagements 
perceptible to the hand of the operator. As 
there are eight notches on the periphery of 
the hub, it will be seen that the movement 
just described will cause the disk D to make 
a half-revolution and the pin O to travel in 
the tortuous path to a point diametrically op 
posite the starting-point and in the passage f". 
The key will then be turned one notch in the 
reverse direction, and the pin caused to strike 
the end of the cam lic, and thus be deflected into 
the passage f", between the camsk and flange I. 
By now turning the key one notch in the first 
direction the pin will be caused to strike the 
beveled end of the block K, and thus be 
guided into the recess f of the flange I. Dur 
ing the above-described operation the lower 
end of the lever N will make contact with the 
projection O' on the bolt F, and when the 
pin enters the recessf the withdrawing of the 
bolt will be completed, and the lever N and 
bolt will assume the positions shown by dot 
ted lines in Fig. 2. It will be seen that dur 
ing the operation of the device, as above ex 
plained, the disk D makes a half-revolution 
and the portion of the disk having the recess 
f is carried to the opposite side of the casing 
to that shown in Fig. 1. 
The combination of each lock is determined 
by the arrangement of cams and passages on 
the disk, and each lock is arranged to be op 
55 
5 
5 
5 
90 
95 
TOO 
IO 
II5 
s 
I 25 
gy 
396,273 
- 
- 
3 
IO 
eiated by a single combination of turns and 
stops, the combination for operating the par 
ticular lock shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 being 
as above described. 
When it is desired to cause the bolt to be 
thrown, it is simply necessary to turn the disk 
sufficiently to cause the pinto ride off the block 
K. When it is desired to again withdraw the 
bolt, the disk is turned (to the left with the 
disk shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3) until the pin 
finds its Way to the starting-point, when the 
disk cannot be turned farther. The combi 
nation of turns above described is then made 
to withdraw the bot. 
In the modified form of my invention 
shown in Fig. 5 a cam, Q, is made to project 
from the face of the disk D and serve as one 
Wall of a circuitous passage. Within the space 
marked by the cam Q are cams Q Q, which, 
when the disk is in the position shown in Fig. 
5, alreat, one side of the hub C and removed 
a short distance from each other, and a third 
cam, Q, is located above the hub C, near the 
upper portion of the flange Q. A fange or 
Wall, Q, projecting from the plate D, extends 
upwardly from the cam Q in a line parallel 
with the cam Q and produces a passage, Q". 
Another flange or wall, Q, projecting from the 
face of the disk, extends downwardly from the 
cam Q to a point between the cams Q and 
Q, thus producing a passage between it and 
the flange Q. A flange, Q', extends from the 
cam. Q parallel with the hub to the other side 
thereof and produces one wall of the starting 
passage Q'. The pendulum-arm N, carrying 
the pin Oto enter the passages justmentioned, 
will also be provided for this form of device. 
The end of the passage Q' is preferably closed, 
so that the disk cannot be turned in the wrong 
direction when the operation of withdrawing 
the bolt is cominenced. When the bolt is in 
the keeper, the cams and passages on the face 
of the disk will be in the reverse positions to 
that shown in Fig. 5, and the pin o will be at 
the starting-point Q'. By turning the disk 
in the direction of the arrow until the spring 
arm has passed four points or notches of the 
hub C the pin O will move in the passage Q', 
and, striking the cam-surface of the cam Q, 
will be deflected into the path Q. The key 
is then turned in the reverse direction two 
notches, when the pin strikes the cam Q and 
is deflected into the path Q'. The key is now 
turned in the first direction two notches, car 
rying the pin O into the portion Q' of the path 
Q'. During this operation the bolt will be 
withdrawn by the lever N in the same manner 
as previously described. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 6 the 
parts are arranged substantially the same as 
in Fig. 5, with the exception of the arrange 
ment of the passage at the starting-point. 
As seen in Fig. 6, the passage Q is made 
continuous, and a calm, T, placed at the start 
ing-point q. With this arrangement a dial 
plate having figures thereon Will be secured 
to the key D', and in such case the spring H. 
and notches on the periphery of the hub may 
be dispensed with. 
In Fig. 7 is shown another arrangement of 
cams, passages, &c. With this arrangement 
a portion of the periphery of the hub C may 
be made octagonal, and the spring Hin such 
case will be a simple flat spring-bar adapted 
to bear upon the flat faces of the octagon: 
Projecting from the face of the disk D is a 
series of concentric segmental flanges, R. R.' 
R, producing passages or ways RR'R''. The 
outer extremity of the flange. R* is male to 
project outwardly to produce a cam, R". At 
the opposite end of the flange R* a detent, S, 
is pivoted and adapted to rest upon the flange 
Rand normally close the passage R", being 
held to its place by means of a spring, S', se 
cured at one end to the flange Rand bearing 
at its free end upon the top of Said detent. 
A detent, S, is pivoted at the end of the flange 
R opposite to the detent S, and adapted to 
rest upon the flange R. and close the passage 
R, this detent, also being normally held to its 
place by means of a spring, S', secured to the 
flange R. Projecting from the face of the 
disk, and extending outwardly from the hub 
C, is a hook-shaped flange, S', and a detent, 
S5, pivoted to one end of the flange R, bean's 
upon the flange S', as shown in Fig. 7, a Spring, 
S, being secured to the flange R and adapted 
to bear upon the detent S and retain it to its 
position. The pin O and lever N, above all 
luded to, will also be used with this form of 
the device, and a spring, U, is secured at One 
end to the easing and bears at its opposite end 
upon the lever N, to maintain the pin in its 
passage or way when the device is operated. 
When it is desired to withdraw the bolt, the 
parts are made to assume the reverse position 
to that shown in Fig. 7, the pin Obeing at the 
starting-point in the hook-shaped flange S. 
The key is now turned until the spring-arm 
H has passed four faces of the octagon. On the 
hub C, this movement causing the pin 0 to 
move along the flange R. until it has passed 
the detent S, which will be raised by the pill. 
The disk is then turned in the reverse direc 
tion two stops, which will cause the pin to 
strike the detent S at the opposite side, and 
be caused thereby to be deflected and made to 
ride upon the flange R' until it passes the de 
tent S, which it raises in its passage. Hav 
ing passed this detent, the disk is turned tWO 
stops in the first direction, and the pin, strik 
ing the opposite face of the detent, is caused 
to be deflected and travel upon the flange R' 
and ride upon the cam R. When the pin O 
reaches this point, the lever N has withdrawn 
the bolt in the manner before described. 
In lieu of the notched periphery of the hub 
C and the spring-arm H within the casing A, 
a toothed wheel may be secured to the key D' 
on the outside of the door, and a Spring-arm 
also fixed to the door to engage it, a small 
box or cover being provided to protect said 
parts. 
It will be seen that the teeth, notches, or 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
896,278 
flat faces on the hub C are simply different 
forms of the same thing, and may be modified 
jn any desired manner, a spring-arm of suit 
able construction being used with the form 
adopted, so that when the disk D is turned in 
either direction said spring-arm II will en 
gage the notches, teeth, or flat faces and pro 
duce a stop of the disk. The spring-arm 
should engage the hub with sufficient firmness 
to make these stops of the disk perceptible to 
the hand of the operator through the medium 
of a key, and yet allow the disk to be turned 
in either direction when more force is applied 
by the operator. These stoppings of the disk 
are intended to notify the operator when the 
disk has been turned a sufficient distance in 
either direction to operate the lock in the 
mannel above described. 
It is obvious that projections may be placed 
directly upon one face of the disk D to pro 
duce notches, teeth, flat faces, or stops, and 
the Spring-arm H secured to the lock-casing 
in any preferred manner; or notches may be 
made upon the key, if desired. 
By providing a lock with such a signaling 
device it may be operated by a predetermined 
combination of stops of the disk manually 
perceptible to the operator, the disk being 
first turned a certain number of stops in one 
direction, then a certain number in the re 
Verse direction, and so on until the bolt is 
Withdrawn. Such an arrangement is highly 
advantageous, as the lock can be operated in 
the dark, no dial-plate being necessary, and 
in the presence of other persons, as the en 
gagement of the spring-arm with the notches 
of the hub C or disk D are practically inaudi 
ble and simply felt by the hand of the oper 
ator, thus preventing other persons from learn 
ing the combination by hearing the engage 
ment of the spring-arm. 
It is evident that slight changes might be 
made in the constructive details of my inven 
tion without departing from the spirit thereof; 
hence I do not wish to limit myself to the ex 
act form of construction of parts as herein de 
- 
scribed; but, 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a lock, the combination, With a disk 
having cams and stops, of a movable device 
provided with a pin adapted to be engaged 
by the cams, and a spring adapted by its en 
gagement, with the stops to yieldingly hold 
the disk for the purpose of indicating the po 
sition of the pin on the face of the disk. 
2. In a lock, the combination, With a disk 
having a series of cams thereon, of a pendu 
lum-lever engaged by the cams on the disk, 
and a bolt engaged and operated by said lever. 
3. In a lock, the combination, with a disk 
having a series of cams and passages on one 
face, of a pendulum-lever engaged by the said 
cams, a sliding bolt operated by said lever, 
and a spring exerting pressure on the bolt in 
one direction, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a lock, the combination, With a disk 
having a series of cams and passages on One 
face and a series of stops, of a pendulum-lever 
having a laterally-projecting pin adapted to 
traverse said passages and engage said cams, 
and a spring-arm located in position to engage 
the stops on the disk, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a lock, the combination, with a casing 
and a disk having a series of cams and pas 
sages on one face thereof, of a movable device 
having a pin adapted to traverse the passages 
and engage the cams, a Spring bearing upon 
the device, and mechanism for Operating the 
disk, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
IBYRON J. DOUDS. 
FRANK DOUDS, 
PETER L. PIERSON. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
st 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396373.txt	(No Model.) 
G. H. SELLERS. 
STEAM BOILER SETTING, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 396,373, 
Patented Jan, 15, 1889 
b 
S. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
WITNESSES. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. D. c. 
G. H. SELLERS. 
SEAIM. BOER, SETING, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan, 15, 1889 
NNNN 
NN 
S 
2 2 
?????? 
???????????????? 
& 
(No Model.) 
No. 396,373, 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
WITNESSES. 
??2222222222222222222 
??? 
NSNS 
?? 
???????????????????????????????--???? 
????? 
?--??????????????? 
??? 
??? 
?????????????????????? 
??? 
-?? 
?? 
???????????? 
?????????? 
????????? 
?????????????????????? 
????? 
??? 
??? 
???? 
???????????--?? 
?????????????? 
NVENTOR. 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d, C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 396,373, 
FIG, 4, 
 
 
 
G. H. SELLERS. 
STEAM BOILER SETTING, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Jan. 15, 1889. 
  
? 
NVENTOR. 
s: Peters. Phatolithographer, Washington. O.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 396,373, 
G. H. SELLERS, 
STEAM BOILER SETTING, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
S 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
222222222222 
ZZZZZZZZZZZ 
 
s 
N. perERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
G, H, SELLERS. 
STEAM BOILER SETTING, 
5 sheets-Sheet 5. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. SELLERS, OF RIDILEY PARK, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
EDGE MOOR IRON COMPANY, OF EDGE MOOR, DELAWARE, 
STEAM - B O IL ER SETTING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 396,873, dated January 15, 1889. 
Application filed September 9, 1887, Serial No. 249,277, (No model.) 
To all tvi?uo7m, it 7 mua/ co7uce77: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. SELLERS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ridley 
Park, in the county of Delaware, in the State 
5 of Pennsylvania, have invented certain Im 
provements in Setting Steam-Boilers, of which 
improvements the following is a specification. 
These improvements relate to horizontal 
steam-boilers, and as I have applied them to 
Io the Galloway boiler, the drawings represent 
this form; but they are equally applicable to 
any other horizontal boiler that is set in 
brick-work. The Galloway boiler has hereto 
fore been supported in the setting upon spe 
15 cial-shaped fire-brick, which formed the apex 
of the Side Walls of a horizontal fue beneath 
the boiler, through which flue the products of 
combustion passed directly to the chimney. 
These products, upon leaving the internal 
2d flue at the rear end of the boiler, entered two 
side filles-One on each side of the boiler 
through which they passed to the front end, 
where they entered the lower flue, before men 
tioned; and the space required for these side 
25 flues to enter the lower flue was the only part 
of the boiler l insulpported in the manner de 
scribed. The boiler is not secured in position 
otherwise than by the side walls and the sup 
ports, before mentioned, so that its expansion 
3o and contraction are liable to produce an end 
movement; and as the covering of the flues at 
the lear end prevents any movement in that 
direction, the movement, when it occurs, must 
always be toward the front end; and this 
35 opens a communication into the lower flue, 
through which products of combustion can 
pass directly to the chimney without passing 
along the outside of the boiler-shell, as it is 
desired that they shall do. To avoid this dis 
position to crawl, many, and perhaps most, 
horizontal boilers are supported upon the side 
walls of the boile-setting by brackets riveted 
upon the shell of the boiler; and many are 
suspended from cross-beams above the boiler, 
45 which beams rest upon the side walls of the 
setting; but in all cases the brick masonry of 
the side walls is built against the boiler, and 
in very many cases these walls are pressed 
against the boiler by strong clamping-plates 
So united by cross-bolts above and below the 
boiler. The various arrangements above men 
tioned are intended to maintain the boiler and 
It is one object of my improvement to rem- 6o 
the brick masonry of the setting in contact, and 
in the position originally designed for them. 
and in which they are first built; but, as the 55 
boiler must expand and contract from the con 
ditions of its use, it has been found practi 
cally impossible to maintain the boiler and its 
setting in the same relative position. 
edy this defect; another object is to improve 
the draft and facilitate the removal of ashes 
which must accumulate in the flues; a further 
object is to increase the heating-surface; and 
to these ends my invention consists in a 65 
steam-boiler provided with two supports, one 
of which shall be fixed and the other movable, 
So that the expansion and contraction of the 
boiler must take place from and to its fixed 
support; and provided, further, with a fixed to 
safety-support which will receive and sustain 
the weight of the boiler in case the movable 
support shall fail to do so; and provided, fur 
ther, with a chamber which surrounds the 
boiler except at the firing end, so that products 75 
of combustion shall have access to the entire 
exterior of the boiler within this chamber. 
In order that my invention may be more 
clearly understood, reference is now made to 
the drawings forming part of this specifica- 8o 
tion, in which 
Figure 1 represents the setting in vertical 
section and a side view of the boiler in posi 
tion therein. Fig. 2 is a horizontal cross-sec 
tion of the brick-work with a plan view of 85 
the boiler in place. Fig. 3 is a vertical cross 
section of the boiler and setting upon the line 
Cl b, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a front elevation of the 
rocker-support with the saddle in which the 
boiler rests. Fig. 5 is a vertical cross-section 9o 
of the rocker-support and its saddle. Fig. 6 
is a plan of this saddle, and Fig. 7 is a side 
View of the same. Fig. 8 represents the set 
ting as arranged. When the rocker-support is 
placed at the front end, outside of the closed 95 
chamber, and Fig. 9 is a plan of the same. 
Fig. 10 is a front elevation of the rocker-sup 
port for this arrangement. Fig. 11 is a plan 
of the saddle, and Fig. 12 is a plan of the 
rocker-frame. 
In all of the drawings similar letters refer 
to similar parts. 
The vertical section shown in Fig. 1 repre 
sents the boiler A in position, supported at 
 
396,873 
75 
So 
the front end by the cross-wall B of the brick 
setting. This support is also shown in Fig. 2. 
This cross-wall is built against the boiler and 
embraces its whole circumference. The side 
walls are shown in Figs. 2 and 3. They are 
composed of hard red brick lined inside with 
fire-brick, a small air-space being left between 
the red brick and the fire-brick. These side 
walls are surmounted by a brick arch of the 
same materials as the side walls, and are built 
with an air-space, as in the side walls. In the 
top of this arch openings are made, as shown 
in Fig. 1, through which the nozzles which 
connect with the safety - valves, the main 
steam-pipe, and the man-hole can pass freely. 
The space between these nozzles and the brick 
work may be filled with any kind of packing 
that wil, withstand, the heat and obstruct the 
passage of air, such as mineral wool, asbes 
tus fiber, or curled hair. If left open, the air 
will rush in to some extent, and cool the Sull 
faces exposed to it. The rear end of the brick 
setting is contracted, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2, and the arch covering of this contracted 
part is shown by dotted lines in Fig. 3. The 
object to be attained by this contraction is 
to prevent the products of combustion, after 
they pass out from the rear end of the boiler, 
from flowing directly over the top of the boil 
er. This flow is further prevented by the an 
gle-iron C, which is curved to fit under the 
arch covering of this contracted part of the 
brick-Work without touching it, and is sus 
pended from the top of the boiler-shell by the 
straps c c, which are bent to hook over the top 
of the boiler-shell, but which are not fastened 
to it. 
In the center of the rear Wall (see Figs, 1, 2, 
and 3) I place a cleaning-door, D, through 
which the ashes that will accumulate in the 
boiler-flue and under the boiler can be readily 
removed. The lightest of these ashes will 
settle upon the top of the angle-iron C, be 
tween it and the brick arch above it, and thus 
present an almost perfect, barrier to the direct 
flow of the products of combustion over the top 
of the boiler without interfering with its free 
dom. to expand and contract With the changes 
of temperature to which it must be subjected. 
As thus arranged, it will be observed that the 
boiler is placed within a closed chamber the 
walls of which do not touch the boiler except 
at one end, where they completely inclose and 
support that end in a fixed position, providing 
that the other end shall be so supported as to 
yield readily in a longitudinal direction. To 
this end I provide the rocker-support E, (see 
Figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, and 12.) which consists of 
the hollow rocker-frame E, its base-plate F, 
and the saddle G. This saddle is composed 
of two pieces which do not touch each other, 
but which are held in their proper relative po 
sition by the loop-strap d d. (See Figs. 4, 5, 
6, 10, and 11.) The upper side of this saddle 
is curved to fit the boiler, while the under side 
is straight, with a recess in the bottom to re 
ceive the upper end of the rocker-frame E. 
The curved and straight portions of the sad 
dle are united by strong ribs or webs, as 
shown, and the upper end of the rocker-frame 
is SO constructed as to embrace one rib on 
each half of the saddle to supplement the 
loop-strap d cl and prevent the two halves of 
the saddle from separating in case the loop 
strap cl cl should break. The upper and lower 
ends of the rockel-frame E are made alike; 
consequently the base-plate F must be made 
So that the rocker-frame will embrace it as it 
does the two halves of the saddle, so that when 
this base-plate, which rests upon a suitable 
foundation, is secured in place the boiler will 
be firmly secured transversely, while it will 
be perfectly free to move longitudinally, so 
far as this support is concerned. The rocker 
frame may be made hollow, and provided with 
the circular openings e. e., for the purpose of 
introducing a current of cool air through this 
support if the exigencies of its use should ever 
require it. 
It is perhaps possible that some failure in 
the brick masonry or some obstruction be 
tween the boiler and the real end of its closed 
chambel might prevent the rocker-frame from 
moving back and forth, and that then a crawl 
ing of the boiler might take place which might 
be unobserved until the rocker-frame was so 
far out of position as to permit the boiler to 
fall; or the rocker-frame itself, being exposed 
to long-continued heat, might break, and thus 
permit the boiler to fall. To guard against 
any such contingency, I provide a fixed safety 
support, H, (see Figs. 1, 2, and 3,) which con 
sists of a solid brick pier in the rear of the 
rocker-support E, the top of this pier con 
forming to the shape of the boiler, but not 
touching it, so that in case the rocker-frame 
should fail the boiler could only settle down 
upon this safety-support, which it could do 
without damage to itself or to the brick-work of 
its setting. The position of this safety-support 
is such as to guard the rocker-frame from the 
direct flow of the products of combustion as 
they pass out from the rear end of the boiler. 
These products, after passing through the 
chamber on the outside of the boiler-shell, 
pass out through the flue I into the main flue 
J, and from thence to the chimney. (See Figs. 
1 and 2.) As thus arranged the boiler is per 
fectly free to expand and contract, without pro 
ducing any strains between it, and the setting 
tending to the injury of either. The products 
of combustion as they leave the boiler are dis 
charged into a chamber, which must neces 
sarily be very large, and as the passage through 
it is direct there will be the least possible ob 
struction to the draft, so that the height of 
the chimney may be reduced. The area be 
ing great the current will be slow, so that the 
greatest deposit of ashes will occur here, which 
is the most convenient point for their removal, 
and the whole exterior of the boiler-shell, ex 
cept the front head, being exposed to the heat 
of the outgoing products of combustion, the 
heating-surface is increased beyond that of 
95 
OO 
IO 
TT5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
896,373 
3 
5 
O 
25 
any other boiler of the character hereinbefore 
mentioned. 
I have described the boiler as fixed at the 
front or firing end and supported upon a rock 
er-frame within the closed chamber, where the 
rocker-frame is exposed to the heat of the 
products of combustion, which in the Gallo 
way boiler is mot important; but the boiler 
may be fixed at the back end upon a brick 
pier within the closed chamber, and the rock 
er-frame may be placed at the front end out 
side of the closed chamber, the front wall of 
this chamber having a circular opening formed 
in the masonry to permit the boiler to move 
freely therein without touching it. The space 
between the boiler and the masonry may be 
filled with any kind of soft packing that will 
withstand the heat-such as mineral wool, as 
bestus fiber, or curled hair-to prevent the in 
draft of air without interfering with the free 
movement of the boiler. (See Figs. 8 and 9.) 
The circular opening through the front end of 
the closed chamber will then become the fixed 
'safety-support and the saddle G will have less 
weight to carry than when it is placed inside 
of the closed chamber, and it may therefore 
be shortened so as to go into the recess in the 
masonry provided for the blow-off pipe and 
valve, as shown in Figs. 9 and 10, while the 
upper end of the rocker-frame E may be en 
larged and provided with a circular opening 
to admit this blow-offpipe, as shown in Fig. 12. 
I am aware that boilers have been set in 
brick masonry and provided with yielding 
Supports; but in all such cases the masonry 
has supported the boiler at more than one 
place, so that the effect of expansion and con 
traction cannot be eliminated, and the sup 
port has been that of rollers, which willbe 
come clogged with ashes, so that they cannot 
turn, and, moreover, they afford support only 
upon a line which cannot be maintained, and 
no provision has been made in such cases to 
guard against the effects of failure in the 
yielding support. 
Having now described the objects and na 
ture of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A horizontal steam-boiler, except at the 
firing end, inclosed within a chamber, so that 
products of combustion shall have access to 
the entire exterior of the boiler within the 
chamber, in combination with a rocker-sup 
port and a fixed safety-support, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In combination. With a steam-boiler and 
a Suitable Support, the saddle G, composed of 
two pieces united by the loop-strap dd, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. A steam-boiler and the saddle G, in com 
bination with the rocker-frame E, which sup 
plements the loop-strap did, substantially as 
described. 
4. In combination with a steam-boiler, the 
rocker-support E, composed of the rocker 
frame E, its base-plate F, and the saddle G, 
arranged and combined substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
GEO. H. SELLERS. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. E. PANCOAST, 
JOHN L, PHILLIPS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396473.txt	(No Model.) 
C. P. ESPIN ASSE. 
COMBINED RAIL CHAIR AND SLEEPER. 
No. 396,473, 
Patented Jan. 22, 1889. 
NSYNS 
 
WITN 
ES: 
23. P 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CENEMON PAUT, ESPINASSE, OF MONTAUBAN, FRANCE. 
COMBINED RAL CHAIR AND SLEEPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 396,473, dated January 22, 1889. 
Application filed November 6, 1888, Serial No, 290,086, (No model), 
O 
To all it'hon, it 7) lay concern. 
Be it known that I, CNEMON PAUL ESPI 
NASSE, of the city of Montauban, France, at 
present residing at the city of Paris, France, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Combined Rail - Chair and Sleeper, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
My invention relates to railways; and its 
object is to provide a strong and durable com 
bined metallic rail-chair and sleepertherefor, 
- which sleeper, while having none of the ob 
jectionable features common to its class, pos 
sesses all the advantages of a wooden sleeper, 
and to which and its chair the rails may be 
readily secured without employing bolts, 
Spikes, &c. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and arrangement of the sleeper and rail-chair 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference designate 
corresponding parts in the several views. 
Figure J is a partial side elevation of a 
sleeper constructed in accordance with my in 
Vention, With the rail and rail-chair in posi 
tion thereon, the rail and its locking-key be 
ing shown in transverse section. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is a longitudi 
nal Section of the same, showing another form 
of rail, the latter and the rail-chair and key 
being shown in transverse section. Fig. 4 is 
a transverse section of the sleeper, taken on 
the linea ic in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is a plan view 
of the sleeper on a reduced scale, the rail and 
its chair being removed; and Fig. 6 is a trans 
Verse section of the same, taken on a line cor 
responding with the line y if in Fig. 5. 
The sleeper A, which is rolled, cast, or oth 
erWise produced from iron o) steel, has at its 
extremities side flanges, ct, which are bent 
down Ward at their edges to form feet, or claws 
b and a reduced portion transversely inter 
Vening its flanged extremities. On the up 
per Surface of said sleeper are formed a cen 
tral longitudinal rib, d, longitudinal ribs f, 
parallel with the rib d, and centrally of its 
flanged extremities pairs of transverse ribsh, 
uniting the ribs fand crossing the rib d. The 
rib d, about centrally between each pair of 
ribs hand the ribs f, is cut away to the plane 
of the sleeper to receive the body of the rail 
chair e, as hereinafter explained, the faces of 
the opposing ends of said rib d corresporiding 
the One with the side of the rail-chair and the 
other with the side of the rail and chair, Said 
chair curving downwardly and outwardly at 
each side toward the base, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 3. 
In the space inclosed by the ribs f and h at 
the center of the flanged extremities of the 
sleeper is tightly inserted a packing-block, g, 
preferably of lead, but which may be of rub 
ber, if desired, the upper surface of which 
block is ribbed or serrated, as shown in Fig. 3. 
The sleeper may be given additional strength 
in the vertical direction at its central reduced 
portion by bending down its sides, as shown 
in Fig. G, or may be thus strengthened through 
out its length, if found desirable, and may be 
transversely strengthened by vertical braces 
i, as shown in Fig. 4. 
The rail-chaire has at each side a central Ver 
tical slot, e', to receive and embrace the op 
posing ends of the rib d, which fit snugly the 
one against one side of the chair and the other 
against the rail and the other side of the chair 
at its lower part. The under surface of the 
chair is ribbed or serrated to adapt it to fit 
upon the serrated face of the packing g to pre 
vent the chair from slipping under the pound 
ing of trains upon the rail, and the upper face 
of said chair is shaped to receive the base of 
the rail c, which may be of any approved 
form, and a wooden key, k, intervening the 
chair and the rail, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3. 
When the rail-chair is in position the por 
tions of the same at either side of the rib d 
bear at their ends against the ribsh, which pre 
vents its longitudinal displacement. It may 
be prevented from loosening vertically by a 
pin, i', passed transversely through the rib d 
at one side of the chair and over its divided 
portions thereat, as shown at the right hand 
in Fig. 2. 
In operation, the sleeper being in place on 
the road-bed, the packing-block g is inserted 
between the ribs f h, the chair e is placed 
thereon and tightly pressed between and upon 
said libs and the rib, d, the railis slipped into 
the chair, the key k is forced in between the 
55 
75 
So 
95 
IOC 
25 
45 
 
396,473 
tersecting said central and side ribs, said cen 
tral rib being recessed and notched near its 
extremities, of a compressible packing-block 
having a serrated upper surface inclosed by 
said side and transverse ribs, a rail-chair hav 
ing a serrated bottom surface bearing on said 
packing-block and said central rib and be 
tween said side and transverse ribs, and 
means for locking the rail in said chair, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
The foregoing specification of my improve 
ments in the permanent way of railways signed 3o 
by me this 28th day of September, 1888. 
CENEMON PAUL ESPINASSE. 
Witnesses: 
J. L. RATHBONE, 
ALBERT MOREAU. 
chair and the rail, and the pin i' is then 
passed through the rib d. The chair and rail 
are thus firmly held in place on the sleeper 
until the necessity arises for their removal. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A metallic sleeper for railways having on 
its upper surface a central longitudinal rib, 
longitudinal side ribs parallel there with, and 
pairs of transverse ribs intersecting said cen 
tral and side ribs, said central ril) being re 
cessed and notched near its extremities, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with a metallic railway 
sleeper having on its upper surface a central 
longitudinal rib, longitudinal side ribs paral 
lel there with, and pairs of transverse ribs in 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396573.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. JOHNSON, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
CAMERA CARRYING CASE AND PLATE CHANGING BOX, 
No. 396,573, 
Patented Jan. 22, 1889. 
. 
3 % M % M 
Z 
Z. % 
M % % 2. 
% 
7 % 
e 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. H., JOHNSON, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. - 
CAMERA CARRYING CASE AND PLATE CHANGING BOX, 
No. 396,573, 
Patented Jan. 22, 1889. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. H. JOHNSON. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
CAMERA. OARRYING CASE AND PLATE CHANGING BOX . 
No. 396,573, 
Patented Jan. 22, 1889, 
,zzzzZzZzzzZzZzZzzzZzZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZzZzZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 2 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
#No..- 
222 
Z22 
S27 S. 
26 
2 
?U 
 
 
sae 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ22ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ2 
22 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer.' Washington. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES II. JOHNSON, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
CAMERA. CARRYING CASE AND PLATE: CHANG NG BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 396,573, dated January 22, 1889. 
Application filed June 23, 1888, Serial No, 278,044. No model, 
TC) 
25 
To all it'hon it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, JAMES II. JoHNSON, of 
the city and county of San Francisco, and 
State of California, have invented an Improve 
ment in Camera-Carrying Cases and Plate 
Changing Boxes; and I hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
My invention relates to the class of photo 
graphic apparatus, and especially to the cases 
or boxes for carrying the camera and acces 
Sories and providing for their proper manip 
ulation. 
My invention consists in an exterior frame 
having a hinged lid, and in an interior frame 
telescoping in the exterior frame, and pro 
vided with hand-holes with wristbands, the 
two frames forming when closed a complete 
case for carrying the camera, and when ex 
tended a box in which the plates may be 
readily changed. 
The arrangement of these 
frames, together with details of construction, 
I shall hereinafter more fully describe. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and convenient structure which may 
serve the combined purpose of a case for car 
lying the camera and a box in which the 
plates may be readily and safely changed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a horizontal section of my camera 
carrying case and plate-changing box, showing 
its frames extended to serve as the plate-chang 
ing box. Fig.2 is a perspective view showing 
the frames closed together to serve as a car 
rying-case. Fig. 3 is a perspective view show 
ing the frames extended. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical 
Section of the case or box, shown in a closed 
condition, and serving as a means for carry 
ing the camera and plate-holden's, which are 
shown as contained in said box. 
The exterior frame, A, is composed of pieces 
secured together into a rectangular form, prop 
erly strengthened, and provided with a hinged 
lid or cover, (t, by which access to the interior 
may be had. It has no bottom piece. 
The interior frame, B, consists of four side 
pieces and a bottom piece, b, but no top piece, 
and its dimensions are such that it fits neatly 
within the exterior frame and slips in and out 
of it through the open bottom of said frame. 
Its movement in is limited by the rabbet-piece 
a' on the top of the sides of the exterior, and 
its movement out is limited by the strip l'Oil 
the top of its sides coming in contact with the 
strip a on the bottom of the sides of the ex 
teliol flame. 
In opposite sides of the interior frame are 
made hand-holes C, which are protected by 
wristbands c, made in suitable manner, pref 
erably of short flexible casings secured on the 
inside of the frame, and having elastic 'ilms 
to fit closely about the Wrists. 
In One of the sides of the interior fl'alme 
either, as here shown, that which becomes the 
top when the case is laid on its side, or that 
which becomes the bottom, or in both-may 
be let a proper non-actinic glass Ol' glasses, E, 
whereby the interior may be observed. Around 
the exterior frame are placed straps F, fol' Cai'- 
rying the whole device and for holding the 
interior frame in place. 
Now, it will le seen that when the two 
frames are closed together a perfect case is 
formed, in which the bottom of the interio)' 
frame is the bottom of the case and the lid 
of the exterior frame is the top of the case. 
Within the case the camera and the usual 
accessories may be carried, the straps F hold 
ing the frames together. When the camera 
is removed from the case and the straps F 
released, the exterior frame may be lifted up 
from the interior frame to the extent of the 
separation of the two frames, and then the 
device is laid on its side, so that the hand 
holes are on each side of the interio' case 
and the glasses are in the top). By then in 
serting the hands through the Wristbands the 
plates may be changed within the extended 
interior frame. 
The exterior frame, it will be seen, fully 
protects the glasses when the two frames ar'e 
closed together. The strips ly' and (inot only 
serve as limiting-stops, but also as strength 
ener's for the frates, making a light, tight 
joint. 
Iaving thus described my in vention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to sell rely Let 
te's Patent, is 
1. A camera-carrying case aid plate-chang 
ing box composed of an exterio' frame with 
a lid or cover for affording access to its inte 
rior and an interior frame with a bottom and 
5 5 
GO 
So 
90 
IOO 
35 
45 
 
396,573 
provided with hand-holes having Wristbands, 
Said frames telescoping to form when closed 
a COmplete case, and when extended a box 
Within which the plates may be changed by 
inserting the hands through the wristbands, 
Substantially as described. 
2. A camera-carrying case and plate-chang 
ing box composed of an exterior frame with 
a lid or cover affording access to its interior 
and an interior frame with a bottom, and pro 
vided with hand-holes having Wristbands and 
With a suitable non-actinic glass or glasses, 
Said frames telescoping to form when closed 
a complete case, and when extended a box 
Within which the plates may be changed, sub 
Stantially as described. 
S. 
O 
3. The exterior frame with a lid or cover 
for affording access to its interior, the interior 
frame with a bottom and provided With hand 
holes having wristbands, said frames telescop 
ing, and the stop-strips by which their closing 
and extension are limited, the whole forming 
When closed a case for carrying the camera, 
and when extended a box in which the plates 
may be changed, substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
25 
JAMES H. JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. NOURSE, 
H. C. LEE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396673.txt	(No Model.) 
E. E., TUFTS. 
PEDAL FOR WELOCIPEDES, 
No. 396,673, 
Patented Jan. 22, 1889. 
W-7------. 
(426 (8&Al- 
- 7, 2 ---4--- 
7 af2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELMER. E. TUFTS, OF SPRINGFIELD, VERMONT. 
PEDAL FOR V E LOC PE DES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 396,678, dated January 22, 1889. 
Application filed February 24, 1888, Serial No. 265,100, (No model.) 
To all tuh-On, it invctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, ELMER. E. TUFTS, of 
Springfield, in the county of Windsor and 
State of Vermont, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Treadles for Ve 
locipedes; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as Will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it pertains to make 
and use it, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
treadles for vehicles propelled by the feet; 
and it consists in, first, a treadle which is 
shaped upon both of its sides so as to con 
form to the shape of the foot, and thereby 
give a bearing for both the hollow and the 
toe of the foot; Second, a treadle which is 
made of Wood, and which is provided with 
metallic strips upon each of its sides, which 
strips form flanges to prevent the foot from 
slipping off, as will be more fully described 
hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
treadle which is so shaped upon both of its 
sides as to conform to the shape of the foot, 
and thereby make it less tiresome for the op 
erator, and at the Salme time always be in po 
sition to receive the foot, and which has its 
body made of Wood, which is strengthened by 
the metal binding-plates, which serve to pre 
vent the foot from slipping off from the 
treadle. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a treadle embody 
ing my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical longi 
tudinal section of the treadle. 
A represents the body of the treadle, which 
is made from a piece of wood, and which is 
curved alike upon both of its sides, as shown, so 
as to give a bearing both for the hollow and 
the toe of the foot, and thus make the effort 
of operating the treadle less tiresome to the 
operator than is the case where the ordinary 
round treadle is used. The convex portion of 
this body A fits in the hollow of the foot, 
while the raised front end forms a bearing 
for the front part of the foot, and thus a Sup 
O 
25 
35 
45 
port is formed for all of that portion of the 
foot which is brought into play in Working 
the treadle. This body A of the treadle, be 
ing made of a length proportioned to the foot, 
has a rocking motion instead of a revolving 
one. Both sides of the body A being shaped 
alike, the treadle is always in position to re 
ceive the foot, no matter which side may be 
up. Through this body A is made an open 
ing at its center for the crank B to pass 
through, and upon each side of the central 
opening are made smaller openings, through 
which the rivets B are passed, for the pur 
pose of binding the metal plates G against 
opposite sides of the body. These plates and 
rivets prevent the body A from Splitting or 
Warping, and at the same time serve to pre 
vent the body from being worn or injured 
along its edges by the foot. Each of the side 
plates is provided with a flange, I, at its cen 
ter, which extends a suitable distance above 
the top of the body to prevent the foot from 
readily slipping off while the machine is in 
motion, as would otherwise be the case. 
The body of the treadle, being formed of 
Wood and properly braced at its sides or sides 
and ends, is much more durable than the or 
dinary round treadle and cheaper, besides 
having a rocking instead of a revolving mo 
tion. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
1. A treadle which is curved upon both of 
its sides alike, so as to form a bearing both 
for the hollow and the toe of the foot, sub 
stantially as shown. 
2. A treadle having its body formed of wood, 
and which is curved upon both of its sides 
alike, in combination with the metallic plates 
applied thereto, and the rivets which pass 
through the body and the plates, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
claim 
ELMER. E. TUFTS. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES H. SHAW, 
ELMER. C. HARLOW, 
55 
7 O 
75 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396773.txt	(No Model.) 
L. SMITH, 
ADJUSTABLE CURWED PIPE SECTION, 
No. 396,773, 
Patented Jan. 29, 1889, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LYMAN SMITH, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOUR I. 
ADJUSTABLE CURVED PPE SECTION. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 396,778, dated January 29, 1889. 
Application filed February 17, 1888, Serial No. 264,394 (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To att, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LYMAN SMITH, of Kan 
SaS City, in the county of Jackson and State 
of Missouri, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Adjustable Curved 
Pipe Sections or Elbows; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
Which form part of this specification. 
This invention has relation to improvements 
in my general apparatus for transferring grain 
and Other material of broken-lump formation, 
and is an important attachment for the suc 
Cessful manipulation of the apparatus shown 
in an application filed by me February 17, 
1888, Serial No. 264,395. 
The object of my invention is to avoid cer 
tain difficulties heretofore encountered in the 
manipulation of the pipes or conduits used in 
this class of apparatus, and to insure a better 
and more reliable operation than heretofore; 
and With these ends in view the invention con 
sists in certain novel features of construction 
and combinations of parts, more fully de 
scribed hereinafter, and particularly pointed 
Out in the claims. 
Figure I represents an elevation of my in 
proved movable sectional elbow or curved sec 
tional conduit; Fig. 2, a partial sectional view 
of the same; Fig. 3, an end view of the pipe 
and its radial supports or braces; and Fig. 4, 
a ClOSS-Section of the pipe-joint, taken on the 
line acac of Fig. 1, clearly showing the brace in 
a closed position around the pipe-section. 
Before referring by letter to the details of 
construction it will be observed that the full 
Curved section or elbow is held in its various 
positions by radial arms or supports extend 
ing from a common center, so that no matter 
how the minor sections of the curved pipe or 
elbow are adjusted they will be held in the 
desired position against displacement. These 
radial supporting-arms, while rigidly attached 
to the minor sections of the pipe or elbow, are 
nevertheless capable of movement to and from 
each other as the positions of said minor sec 
tions are changed. One of these radial sup 
ports forms a yoke and is provided with bosses 
on its ends, between which the other radial 
arms are secured; but it is preferred that each 
arm-support be double from its encircling 
ring to the common center. The rings of 
each arm are rigidly fixed, preferably riveted, 
to the minor sections of the elbow, and as the 
Said sections slide into each other telescopic 
ally the radial arms approach each other, by 
which the said sections are permitted to 
change the length of the adjustable elbow to 
Suit the manipulations of the Workmen. 
In the drawings, A is the curved adjustable 
pipe section or elbow as a whole, and B the 
minor sections of the same; C, the conduit, to 
which the curved portion is connected. 
D are the radial arms or supports, provided 
With rings E. These arms and rings are pref 
erably made of angle-iron, the angle serving to 
strengthen the arm and the ring. The project 
ing portion of the angle-iron G is also made to 
Serve the purpose of holding the stay-chains I. 
The function of the stay-chains is to prevent 
the minor sections forming the elbow from 
pulling apart, while they yield when said sec 
tions are sliding into each other. While these 
minor sections making up the main section 
are snugly fitted, they are not air-tight, and 
in order to make them air-tight I form around 
them a flexible elastic packing-ring secured 
in such manner that when they recede from 
or advance to each other the packing Will 
yield and slide on the ring. Should there be 
by any possibility a leak in the joint, the vac 
uum within the pipe draws the elastic mate 
rial or packing closer to the joint, and thus 
the leak is stopped. 
The main radial supporting-arm d of the 
series of radial arms D is made larger and 
stronger than the others and is provided with 
the bosses b, forming a yoke in which the ends 
C. of the remaining radial arms D are pivoted 
by means of a bolt, e, forming a pivot upon 
which said arms turn. 
It will be observed that the radial support 
ing-arm hold the adjustable elbow in shape 
and position by reason of the fact that they 
are pivoted together at their corresponding 
ends and thus extend radially and from a com 
mon center to the elbow, thereby equalizing 
and distributing the weight, and it should also 
be observed that each minor section is pro 
vided with a radial supporting-arm. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
95 
OC 
2 
396,773 
O 
In constructing the minor sections B each 
one of said minor sections is made longitudi 
nally curved, or with their outer sides longer 
than their inner sides, so that each minor sec 
tion will form a segment of the circle, having 
the pivotal point of the ends of the radial sup 
porting-arms as its center. Thus it will be 
seen that however the minor sections are ad 
justed the curved elbow will form a segment 
of Said circle. 
It is evident that various slight changes 
might be resorted to in the form and arrange 
ment of the various parts described without 
departing from the spirit and scope of my in 
vention; hence I do not wish to limit my 
self strictly to the precise construction herein 
set forth, but consider myself entitled to all 
such changes as fall within the spirit and 
scope of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Iletter's 
Patent, is 
1. The herein-described curved pipe-section 
or elbow, consisting, essentially, of a series of 
movable minor sections and radial support 
ing-arms, as Set forth. 
2. In an adjustable curved pipe section or 
elbow, the combination, with the minor sec 
tions telescopically connected, of the radial 
Supporting-arms pivoted at a common center, 
substantially as described. 
3. An adjustable curved pipe section or elbow 
composed of a Series of minor sections, each 
provided with a radial supporting-arm, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination, with a movable curved 
pipe Section or elbow, of a series of radial 
arms secured together at a common center 
and supporting the elbow or pipe section, sub 
stantially as described. 
45 
SO 
55 
5. The combination of the minor pipe-sec 
tions telescopically connected, the radial Sup 
porting-rods, and the stay-chains connecting 
said sections, substantially as described. 
6. A curved pipe-section capable of adjust 
ment, and provided with radial arms having 
rings and packing-rings, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. The combination, in a curved pipe-Sec 
tion, of the minor sections movably connected, 
and the radial supporting-arms having rings 
embracing said minor sections, said arms be 
ing pivoted and extending from a common 
center, substantially as described. 
S. An adjustable curved pipe-section com 
prising minor sections, radial supporting-arms 
having rings formed of angle-iron and embrac 
ing the minor sections, and stay-chains con 
necting the sections and secured to said rings. 
9. In an adjustable pipe-section, the Com 
bination, with the minor sections and Support 
ing-arms provided with rings formed of angle 
iron, of the packing-rings carried by the an 
gle-iron rings. 
10. In an adjustable curved pipe-Section, 
the combination of the minor sections and the 
radial supporting-arms having rings, one of 
said arms being provided with lugs, between 
which the remaining arms are pivotally se 
cured by a bolt or pivot. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
LYMAN SMITH. 
Wit lesses: 
HUBERT E. PECK, 
J. C. STODDARD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396873.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 396,873, 
 
  
J. HUNTER, 
RAILROAD SWITCH, 
3 Sheets-Sheet l. 
Patented Jan. 29, 1889. 
 
 
sL Es t 
s s R R 
 
 
 
WITNESSEs: 
... O 
INVENTOR: 
by 25s r 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-tithographe 
r, Wa. 
(No Model.) 
J. HUNTER, 
RAILROAD SWITCH, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 396,873, 
Patented Jan. 29, 1889. 
WITNESSES: 
 
INWENTOR: . 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN II UNTER, OF MAPLE BAY, MINNESOTA. 
RAROAD - SWITCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 396,873, dated January 29, 1889. 
Application filed March 7, 1888, Serial No. 266,412, (No model.) 
To all u'l-On, it Tru?ty concern; 
Be it known that I, JOHN HUNTER, of Ma 
ple Bay, in the county of Polk and State of 
Minnesota, have invented a new and Improved 
Railroad-Switch, of which the following is a 
ful, clear, and exact description. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved railroad-switch, which is 
Very simple and durable in construction, and 
is automatically operated by the engineer 
from the ca) of the locomotive. 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
details and combinations of the same, as will 
be fully described hereinafter, and then point 
ed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar lette's of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure l is a plan view of the improvement. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged plan view of part of the 
same with parts broken out. Fig. 3 is a lon 
gitudinal Sectional elevation of the same on 
the line at at of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a transverse 
sectional elevation of the same on the line / 
ty of Fig. 3, and Fig. 5 is an enlarged plan 
view of the free end of the Switch-lai and 
connection. Fig. 6 is a Sectional side eleva 
tion of the same on the lines it at of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 is a detail view of the saddle for the 
Switch-rails. 
Between the rails A A of the main track 
are placed the switch-rails BB, each of which 
is pivoted at one end at B' to the railroad-tie 
C, and the free ends of said rails B B are : 
adapted to engage the rails D D of the side 
track. The Switch-tails B B are connected 
with each other by suitable stays, B, so as to 
insure a uniform movement of the said Switch 
rails when moving from the main-track rails 
A to the side rails, D. The free ends of the 
switch-lais B B are held to slide. On Suitable 
saddles, B, (shown in FigS. 5 and 7.) and serv 
ing to limit the movement of the switch-rails. 
On the switch-rails B, near their free ends, 
is secured a transverse rod, E, adapted to be 
connected at One end with a Switch-block of 
any approved construction, In the middle of 
the rod E, between the switch-rails B B, is 
pivotally connected a link, F, held to slide 
with its other end in a longitudinal slot, G', 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
formed on a keeper, G, Secured on the rail 
road-tie G'. Said link F swings with the side 
Wise movement of the 'od E when the switch 
rails B B are changed from the main rails. A 
to the side rails, D. A spring, F, presses 
against the inner end of the link F. So as to 
hold the said link F in a locked position, and 
when the switch-rails B B are shifted from 
one side to the other then the link F, divid 
ing one-half of the stroke, compresses the 
spring F, which then assists the movement 
of the switch-rails during the last half-Stroke 
in the same mannel as it resisted the move 
ment of the Switch-rails in the first half 
stroke. The link F thus changes the direc 
tion of the pressure of the spling F and trans 
mits the pressure through the rod E to the 
movable switch-rails, thereby holding the lat 
ter in place. 
On the under side of the Tool E and in the 
middle between the rails B B is formed a rack, 
E", in which meshes a gear-wheel, H. secured 
to a shaft, I, mounted to rotate in suitable 
bearings secured to the under sides of the 
railroad-ties. 
The shaft extends a Suitable clistance be 
yond the pivotal ends B of the rails B, and 
is provided with the gear-wheels JJ, in the 
top of which mesh the racks X K, extending 
transversely of the railroad-track in line with 
the railroad-ties. Each of the lackSIS meshes 
near its outer ends into the gear-wheels L'IL", 
secured to the shafts N N', respectively, 
mounted in suitable bearings, O, located below 
the ties of the railroad - track. The gear 
wheels L. L and L'I' are sufficiently wide to 
permit the vertical racks P P and P' P' to 
engage parts of them, as shown in Fig. 2. The 
said racks PP and P' P' extend vertically, 
and are secured to the plates Q and Q', re 
spectively, mounted to slide in suitable bear 
ings, R, secured to the railroad-ties C", C, and 
C. Additional bearings and guides R may 
be placed between the bearings R and driven 
into the ground or otherwise Supported. The 
plates Q and Q' extend on the outside of the 
main-track rails AA, and are slightly inclined 
at their upper edges, extending With the raised 
parts toward the switch-rails B. The plates 
Q and Q' are provided with slots Q, through 
which pass the outer ends of the racks K. K. 
75 
90 
95 
2 
396,873 
O 
3O 
45 
So 
The plates Q and Q are so arranged in rela 
tion to each other that when one is in its up 
permost position the other is down, and Vice 
WGS8. 
Near the front end of the cal' or locomotive 
S, adapted to travel over the railroad-switch, 
is secured a transverse shaft, T, provided with 
an arm, U, connected by a link, U', with the 
cab of the locomotive, so that the engineer call 
turn the said shaft T. On the ends of the lat 
ter are secured the arms V and W, carrying, 
respectively, the roller's V and W, adapted to 
operate on the inclined top edges of the plates 
Q and Q'. The arms V and W are so al 
ranged in relation to each other that when one 
wheel is in its uppermost position the other 
wheel is down in its lowest position, and vice 
versa; but both wheels may be raised to be 
out of contact with either plate. The shaft I 
is also extended in an opposite direction and 
connected with a device, as above (lesclibed, 
so that the switch-rails are operated on by a 
train coming in either direction. 
The operation is as follows: In the position 
shown in Fig. 1 the switch-rails B make the 
main track A continuous; but when the 
switch-rails are in the position shown in dot 
ted lines in the said figure they connect with 
the side rails, D. The plate Q is then in its 
uppermost position and the other plate, Q", is 
in its lowermost position. Now, when a train 
arrives in the direction of the arrow (t' and 
the engineer desires to go on the main track 
AA, he throws the shaft T into the position 
shown in Fig. 3, so that the roller V is in its 
lowermost position and engages the top in 
clined edge of the raised plate Q, the other 
plate, Q', being in its lowermost position, as 
above described. When the front end of the 
locomotive passes over the rails A, near the 
plates Q and Q', the roller V, now on the top 
edge of the plate Q, depresses the latter, 
whereby the racks P engage the gear-wheels 
L and impart a rotary motion to the latter and 
to the shaft N, so that the lacks IX IK are 
moved sidewise, thereby rotating the gear 
wheels J J, secured to the shaft I. As the 
latter is them also rotated, it imparts by 
means of its gear-wheel H at the opposite 
end a sidewise sliding motion to the rod 
E, whereby the rails B B are swung on their 
pivots B, so as to disconnect them at their 
free ends from the side rails, D D, and con 
nect them with the ends of the main-track 
rails AA. The sidewise motion of the rails 
B is limited by the saddles B, above de 
scribed. It will be seen that by the sidewise 
sliding motion of the racks K K the gear 
wheels L' L'are rotated and impart an up 
ward sliding motion to the racks P B', there 
by raising the plate Q'. When the next fol 
lowing train arrives in the direction of the 
arrow a', and the engineer desires to go on 
the side-track rails DD, he operates the link 
U and arm Uin such a manner that the shaft. T 
throws the roller W down, and the other roller 
consequently rises. When the forward part 
of the locomotive travels over the rails A, 
near the plates Q and Q, the roller W en 
gages the raised plate Q' and depresses the 
latter, whereby rotary motion is imparted to 
the shaft I in an opposite direction from that 
which it had before, so that the rod E is moved 
to the right and the switch-rails B are discon 
nected from the main rails A and again con 
nected with the ends of the side rails, D D'. 
The second train thus passes from the main 
line to the side track. 
It will be seen that the engineer in the cab 
of the locomotive is enabled to operate the 
switch without stopping his locomotive and 
without outside help. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a railroad-switch, the combination, 
With the switch-rails pivoted at one end and 
having a rack connecting their free ends, of 
a longitudinally-extending rock-shaft having 
a gear engaging said rack, inclined vertically 
movable plates mounted outside of the main 
rails and connected with said operating-shaft 
for rocking it in opposite directions, a link 
pivotally connected with the said rack, a fixed 
blacket having a slot receiving said link and 
a spring bearing against the front end of said 
link. 
2. In a railroad-switch, the combination, 
with two plates having inclined top edges and 
arranged to slide vertically in opposite di 
rections, of vertical racks formed on the said 
plates, gear-wheels meshing into the said ver 
tical racks, and horizontal transverse racks 
meshing into the said gear-wheels, so that 
When one plate is depressed the other rises, 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a railroad-switch, the combination, 
with two plates having inclined top edges and 
adapted to slide vertically in opposite direc 
tions, of vertical racks formed on the said 
plates, gear-wheels meshing into the said ver 
tical racks, horizontal transverse racks mesh 
ing into the said gear-wheels, a second set of 
gear-wheels meshing into the said horizontal 
racks, and a shaft carrying the said second set 
of gear-wheels and connected with the free 
ends of the pivoted switch-rails, substantially 
as shown and described. 
4. In a railroad-switch, the combination, 
with two plates having inclined top edges and 
adapted to slide vertically in opposite direc 
tions, being operated from the cab of the lo 
comotive, of vertical racks formed on the said 
plates, gear-wheels meshing into the said ver 
tical racks, horizontal transverse racks mesh 
ing into the said gear-wheels, and a second 
set of gear-wheels meshing into the said hori 
Zontal racks, a shaft carrying the second set 
of gear-wheels and also provided at its oppo-, 
site end with a gear-wheel, a rod having a rack 
meshing into the gear-wheel at the end of the 
said shaft, and pivoted switch-rails carrying 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
396,873 
3. 
at their free ends said rod having a rack, sub- for holding the said link in position, substan 
stantially as shown and described. 
5. In a railroad-switch, the combination 
with pivoted switch-rails, of a rod secured to 
5 the free end of the said pivoted switch-rails, 
a link connected with the said rod, a keeper 
in which the said link is pivoted, and a spring 
tially as shown and described. 
O) 
JOHN CROMB, 
H. M. PIERCE. 
Witnesses: 
ITN 
JNO. HUNTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US396974.txt	(No Model.) 
E. BARRATH 
COALHOD, 
No. 396,974, 
Patented Jan. 29, 1889, 
Z23. 
2ZAze:S 
SS 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, t. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD BARRATH, OF CINCINNATI, OITIO, ASSIGNORTO WICTOR. E. KNECHT, 
OF SAME PIACE. 
COAL a HOD, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 396,974, dated January 29, 1889, 
- 
Application filed May 29, 1888, Serial No. 275,420, (No model.) 
To a 77 Ltion, it nail? concern. 
IBe it known that I, EDWARD BARRATH, of 
Cincinnati, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Coal-Hods, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
novel coal-hod or similar vessel wherein the 
body, base-rim, and bottom are each made of 
Io a separate piece of metal and the parts united 
by a double - hooked seam consisting of a 
double hook formed in one of the parts, into 
One of which hooks the bottom is inserted, as 
hereinafter described and claimed, to make a 
15 strong and elastic joint, reference being made 
to the accompanying drawings, making a part 
of this specification, in which 
Figure is a central vertical section of a 
coal-lhod embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
20 similar view of a modification thereof. Fig. 3 
is a diagram representing the first step of bend 
ing the metal; Fig. 4, a similar view showing 
the second step; Fig. 5, a similar view show 
ing the third step, and Fig. G a similar view 
25 showing another step in the process of con 
structing the coal-hod. 
In the drawings, the letter A indicates the 
conical-shaped body of the bucket, B the base 
rim, and C the bottom. The preferred form 
3o of construction is to make the double hooks 
(t ) of the seam in the base-rim B, and the op 
eration of constructing a seam is as follows: 
The metal from which the rim is formed is 
first bent in Ward and upward, into the shape 
25 shown in Fig. 3, by means of a Spinning-tool 
3. 
or by dies. It is then bent into the shape 
shown in Fig. 4. The lower edge of the body 
A is then placed on the ledge cl in the manner 
s 
s 
4O 
shown in Fig. 5. Pressure is then applied to 
the parts it and d by means of dies or other 
suitable tools, and the parts bent into the shape 
shown in Fig. 6. The bottom C is then in 
serted by means of a die. The projecting 
part it, Fig. 6, is bent down to form the flange 
b. resting on the bottom C, as shown in Fig.1. 45 
Thus the bucket is formed with a double 
hooked seam, Cl, b, in the upper hook, b, of 
which the bottom C rests, and in the lower 
one, Ct, of which the flange C of the body A 
rests. The parts are secured together by the 
compression of the double hooks (, b. This 
is the preferred method of uniting the parts 
together. It is evident that the form shown 
in Fig. 2 could be made by forming the metal 
of the body A with the double hooks (t, b, as 
(lescribed with reference to the base-lim B. 
The bottom C is shown slightly depressed or 
concave, so as to Stiffen the bottom and pre 
vent, the vibration of the metal, and thus in 
crease the wear of the hod. 
55 
SO 
What I claim is 
A coal-hod or similar metallic vessel, con 
sisting of the body A, the rim B, and the 
bottom C, each made out of a single piece of 
metal and united by a double-hooked seam 
formed of a double hook integral with one of 
the parts, into the two hooks of which double 
hook the other parts are respectively inserted 
and clamped, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
65 
my hand. 
Witnesses: 
E. E. WOOD, 
ROBERT ZAHNER. 
EDWARD BARRATH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397074.txt	(No Model.). 
No. 397,074, 
J. R. FITTON, 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
L00M. 
Patented Jan. 29, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
El-E 
 
 
  
IE 
E. 
e 
I 
47/A 
as 
88: 277-sfe 
Ef O:0 
T.I.' 
EEE 
s 
 
 
928)itv.coco, 
(%. 5. Schwetz, 
-6%w/6446 
N. PEERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington. D. c. 
(No Model.) 
v- 
J. R. FITTON. 
L00M. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 397,074, 
Patented Jan. 29, 1889. 
  
 
A. 
 
a i. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ax 
JOHN R. FITTON, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO TONI HOWARD, OF SAME PLACE. 
OOM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 397,074, dated January 29, 1889. 
Application filed February 20, 1888, Serial No. 264,653, (No model.) 
To all whon, it navy concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN R. FITTON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Worces 
ter, in the county of Worcester and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Looms; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, which, in con 
nection with the drawings making a part of 
this Specification, will enable others skilled in 
the art to which my invention belongs to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to looms for weaving, 
and more particularly to an improved mech 
anism to be applied to looms having two or 
more drop shuttle boxes, to prevent the fill 
ing from the shuttles which are not in use 
being drawn into the cloth or becoming en 
tangled with each other. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and effective mechanism to be applied 
to looms of ordinary construction for the pur 
pose above stated, and I carry out my inven 
tion by arranging at the end of the lay a sys 
tem of filling-feelers adapted to raise and 
hold the different fillings above the raceway 
While the Shuttles from the lower boxes are 
thrown back and forth, Said feelers being oper 
ated automatically to rise and fall, as the dif 
ferent shuttle-boxes are called, by cams and 
connecting mechanism operated by the ordi 
nary shuttle-box motion of a loom, in the man 
ner to be hereinafter fully described. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
side elevation of one end of the lay of a loom 
to Which my invention is applied, some of the 
parts being shown broken away for a more 
clear illustration. Fig. 2 is a section taken at 
linea: a, Fig. 1, looking in the direction of ar 
row (, same figure, the shuttle-boxes and other 
parts being left off in this figure. Fig. 3 is an 
end view looking in the direction of arrow to, 
Fig. 1, the shuttle-box lifter-rod, the lifter-rod 
arm, and other parts being not shown for the 
sake of clearness. 
In the accompanying drawings, 1 is a pol 
tion of the loom side; 2, the arch; 3, the lay; 
4, the lay end casting; 5, a tier of four drop 
Shuttle boxes; 6, the lay-SWOrd connected at its 
lower end with the rocker-shaft 7; S, the 
rocker-iron secured to the end of the rocker 
shaft 7; 9, the shuttle-box lifter-rod sup 
ported at its lower end in the rocker-iron S, 
and provided with a coiled spring, 10, and 
carrying at its upper end the lifter-fork 11 
extending down from the tier of shuttle 
boxes 5, all in the usual Way. 
The box-chain 12, secured at its lower end 
to the box-lifter rod 9, passes over a sheave, 
13, Supported on the lay end casting 4 and 
Over another sheave, (not shown,) and forms 
a connection to the ordinary mechanism fol' 
automatically operating the shuttle-boxes, as 
fully illustrated and described in United 
States Patent No. 134,992, of January 21, 1873. 
I will now describe my improved mechan 
ism to prevent the fillings from being drawn 
into the cloth applied to the loom of ordinary 
construction shown in the drawings. 
Bolted to the front side of the lay 3, at the 
end thereof and just at the open end of the 
tier of shuttle-boxes 5, is a casting or stand, 
14, extending above the lay, with its upper 
end, 14", turned inward at right angles and 
extending over the raceway a sufficient height 
above the same to allow of the shuttles, as 
they are thrown from the boxes, passing 
freely under the turned end 14'. The end 
14" may be made separate from and adjust 
ably secured to the casting 14, if desired. 
From the lower part of the casting or stand 
14 an arm, 14, extends down and under the 
lay 3 and furnishes a bearing for a stud, 15, 
upon which are pivoted the inner ends of 
three levers, 16. The lower end of the arm 
14 of the casting or stand 14 furnishes a 
bearing for one end of the cam-shaft 17, upon 
which is secured a cam, 18, having three cam 
surfaces adapted to operate the three levers 16 
by means of projections 16', which extend 
down from the lower edge of said levers and 
rest upon the cam-surfaces. 
To the front end of the three level's 16 are 
pivoted the three vertical sliding parallel rods 
19, which fit into grooves made in the inner 
face of the stand 14. The upper ends, 19, of 
the rods 19 are in this instance bent in at 
right angles and extend inwardly over the 
raceway and under the turned-down end 14 
of the stand 14, forming the feelers to engage 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
397,074 
O 
O 
the filling-threads. When the three turned 
in ends 19'--that is, the feelers for the filling 
threads-are raised to their highest positions, 
as shown in the drawings, by means of the 
cam-surfaces on the can IS, through the in 
tervention of the levers 16, they will press up 
against the under surface of the end 14' of 
the stand 14, Ol' against a yielding surface, 
20, preferably secured thereon, and extend a 
sufficient height above the raceway, holding 
the filling-threads up with them, to allow of 
a shuttle from the lowest box passing freely 
When the upper shuttle-box is 
under them. 
at the raceway, the feelers 19' are in their 
lowest position and extend into grooves in 
the 'aceway to allow of the shuttle from the 
top box passing freely over them. 
The can-shaft, 17 is supported at its oute) 
(nd ill a l) racket or arm, 21, and has a pin 
ion, 22, fast thereon. In the lower end of the 
blacket 21 is supported a stud, 23, on which 
is a sector-gear, 24, which meshes with the 
pinion 22 to operate the cam-shaft 17 and 
parts connected there with. To the outer end 
of the arm. 25, secured to the hub of the sec 
for-gear 24, is pivoted the upper end of the rod 
23. The lower end of said rod 26 is pivoted 
upon a stud, 27, extending out from the collar 
28 on the lower end of the box-liftel rod 9. 
 It will be seen that whatever motion is 
communicated to the shuttle-box lifter-rod 9 
and the shuttle-boxes 5 by the shuttle-box 
motion (not shown) will also be communi 
cated to the rod 26, and through arm 25, sec 
tol-gear 24, pinion 22, shaft, 17, cam S, levers 
16, and rocls 19 to the feele's 19', thus causing 
said feeler's 19 to operate to raise and hold 
the filling-threads above the raceway, accord 
ing as the clifferent shuttle-boxes are called. 
The operation of the mechanism above (le 
scribed, and illustrated in the drawings, will 
be readily understood by those skilled in the 
alt. 
There will be one less filling-feeler 19' than 
then'e are shuttle-boxes, and when the lowest. 
box is at the raceway the three feele's 19 will 
be in thei)' highest position, when the second 
5 
55 
75 
lowest box is at the raceway two feelers will 
be in their highest position and one in its 
| lowest, when the third box is at the raceway 
: one of the feelers will be in its highest posi 
tion and two in their lowest, position, and 
when the top box is at the raceway the three 
feelers will be in their lowest position. The 
cam-surfaces on the calm IS for operating, 
through the level's 16 and rods 19, the feele's 
19' are so made that according as each box 
is called by the box-motion the feeler's 19' 
are operated to act upon the filling-threads 
from the other boxes. 
It will be understood lll:lt, the details of 
construction of the several parts of my mech 
anism may be varied somewhat from what I 
have albove described, if (lesired. 
Instead of having a single calm, 1S, With 
three cam-surfaces for operating the three 
lever's 16, three separate cams may be secured 
upon the shaft, 17. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the lay, the filling 
feele's at the end of the raceway, rods 19, 
and level's 16, for operating the feelers, of a 
shaft carrying cam-surfaces for operating said 
level's 16, and mechanism connecting said 
shaft, with the box-lifter rod to cause the same 
to be operated there with, and the box-lifter 
rod, Substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with the lay, the filling 
feele's 19', supported on the lay at the end of 
the laceWay", l'ods 19, connected with said feel 
ers, and level's 16, for operating said 'ods, of 
a shaft, 17, having cam-surfaces 18 thereon, a 
pinion, 22, sector-gear 2-1, aim 25, and rod 26, 
forming a connection between said shaft, 17 
and the shuttle-box motion, and said shuttle 
box motion, substantially as shown and cle 
scribed. 
()IIN R. FITTON. 
J' 
Witnesses: 
JoHN ('. DEWEY, 
LARENCE SCHOFIET D. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397174.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F. DURHAM. 
FURNA CE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 397,174, 
 
Patented Feb. 5, 1889. 
Izy-era Zor, 
John F. Durham. 
J. F. DURHAMI. 
FURNACE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 5, 1889. 
Fig.5 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 397,174, 
 
 
  
  
  
yN l W 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
164ezvoz-1. 
A 2.4.4% 
Inverglor' 
Joha FIDurham, 
A 4.4%rti 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIN F. DURIIAM, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JOHN 
SCHUHOLZ, OF SAME PLACE. 
FURNACE. 
as 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 397,174, dated February 5, 1889. 
Application filed August 2, 1888, Serial No. 281,807, (No model) 
O 
To all whon, it may conce77. 
Beit known that I, JOHN F. DURHAM, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Detroit, 
in the county of Wayne and State of Michi 
gan, have invented certain new and usful 
Improvements in Furnaces, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to a new and useful 
improvement in hot-air furnaces for heating 
buildings; and the invention consists in the 
peculiar construction, arrangement, and com 
bination of the different parts, all as more 
fully hereinafter described, and shown in the 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical central 
Section. Fig. 2 is a cross-section on line as a 
in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section on line 
y y in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a similar horizontal 
section on line 2 2. 
Fig. 5 is a longitudinal 
section on line v at in Fig. 2. 
A is a steam-generator of known construc 
tion and set in brick-work in the usual man 
le'. 
B is the furnace of the steam-generator. 
C are smoke-?lues, 
D is an air-chamber inclosed in brick-work 
and extending along one side of the steam 
generator and in the rear thereof. 
E are a Series of hot-air flues communicat 
ing with the air-chamber D for conveying the 
hot air into the building. 
TF is the chimney-fue, into which the pro 
ducts of combustion from the steam-generator 
are discharged. 
G is a smoke-?lue conveying the products 
of combustion into the chimney. 
H are a series of smoke-?lues, which convey 
the products of combustion into the flue G. 
I is a horizontal smoke-fue at the rear end 
of the steam-generator and communicating 
with the flues C of the steam-generator and 
with the flues II. 
The flues I and II are made of metal and 
pass through the air-chamber D, whereby the 
gases of combustion passing through these 
filles into the chimney are made to heat the 
air in the air-chamber. 
J are one or more steam-coils, preferably ar 
So ranged in Vertical series above the smoke 
45 
35 
The cold air is admitted, preferably, into 65 
flues H in the hot-air chaniber D, and these 
steam-coils receive the steam by means of 
supply-pipe IX, which takes it from the top of 
the steam-generator, and is provided with a 
suitable valve or valves, IL, near the front of 55 
the steam-generator to control the admission 
of steam into these coils. A return-pipe, M, 
carries the Water of condensation from the 
steam-coils back into the steam-generator, as 
shown in Fig. 1. 
The steam-pipe K may have a suitable 
branch pipe, K, for supplying a number of 
radiators (not shown) with steam at the more 
distant portions of the building. 
the rear portion of the air-chamber D through 
a suitable opening or duct, O, and from there 
it enters that portion of the air-chamber ly 
ing alongside the steam-generator. These 
two parts of the hot-air chamber are prefer- 7o 
ably separated by an iron partition, P, with 
an iron door or damper, Q, in the lower por 
tion thereof, through which the air is con 
ducted into the front portion of the hot-air 
flue, near the bottom thereof, so that in its up- 75 
Ward direction toward the inlet-openings R. 
into the hot-air flues it has to pass through 
the interstices of the Smoke-filles H and the 
steam-coils J, becoming thereby thoroughly 
heated to readily ascend into the hot-air flue. 8o 
These hot-air filles are provided, in addition 
to the openings R, with the cold-air inlets S 
at the botton and vertical dampers TT, con 
nected in pairs by chains U. One pair for 
each hot-air flue is made to close or open all 85 
or a portion of the cold and warm air inlets 
into the air-flutes to form a mixture of cold 
and hot air of the desired temperature. The 
chains U for each pair of dampers lead to the 
different apartments to which the flues, re- 9o 
spectively, carry the air to permit the occu 
pant to control the temperature of the room 
at his desire, the lowering of the chains pro 
(lucing an increase of heat by the closing of 
the cold-air flue, while the raising of the chains 95 
U produces a decrease in temperature by cut 
ting off the access of the warm air and in 
creasing the admission of the cold air. Thus 
the temperature may be controlled to a nicety 
from every room. 
w 
Od 
897,174. 
5 
IC) 
The cold air is first brought in contact with 
the heated flues I and II, which convey the 
gases of combustion into the chimney and 
then with the steam-coils J. By this arrange 
ment no danger of burning the air, which 
is so objectionable in air-heating, is produced, 
While at the same time a very large quantity 
of air may be heated to a desirable tempera 
ture. The brick wall of the air-chamber be 
ing also partly exposed to the heat, from the 
steam-generator, helps to temper the ai) and 
prevent fluctuations. 
What I claim as my invention is 
I. In a hot-air heating system, the combi 
nation, with a steam-generator, of an air-heat 
ing chamber located in proximity thereto, a 
system of horizontal ?lues carrying the pro 
ducts of combustion from the generator 
through the lower portion of said air-cham 
bel', a system of steam-heating coils located 
ill the upper polition of said air-chamber, one 
ol' more hot-air flues communicating with said 
air-chamber through inlets located near the 
top and bottom of said air-chamber, respect 
ively, and a damperfor each of said openings, 
said dampers being connected in pairs to open 
or close said inlets into the hot-air flues, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a hot-air heating system, the combi 
nation of the steam - generator A, provided 
with the smoke-?lue C, the smoke-?lue I, com 
municating there with, the ai)'-chamber D, lo 
cated in rear and on one side of the steam 
generator, the smoke-?lues II, passing through 
the lower portion of said air-chamber and 
communicating with the chimney, the steam 
coils J, located in the upper portion of the 
air-chamber, the pipe IS, communicating with 
the steam-generator and the steam-coils J, the 
return - pipe M to the generator, the hot-air 
flues E, having inlets R and S, located, re 
spectively, near the top and bottom of the 
air-chamber, the dampers T and T', connected 
in pairs to close and open the inlets into the 
air-flues, and the partition P, dividing the air 
chamber and provided with the damper Q antl 
cold-air inlet O, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof IaffiX my signature, in 
presence of two witnesses, this 31st day of 
May, 1888. 
35 
45 
JOHN F. DURHAM. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. WHITTEMORE, 
JOHN SCHUMAN. 
 
Y 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397274.txt	(No Model.) 
W. I. BUNKER, 
SPRING ATTACHMENT FOR ROCKING CHAIRS, 
No. 397.274, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1889. 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. I. BUN RER, OF CHICAGO, IINOIS. 
SPRING ATTACHMENT FOR RocKING-CHAIRs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 397,274, dated February 5, 1889, 
Application filed September 1, 1888, Serial No, 284,379. (No model.) 
w 
s 
O 
25 
to here state that they may be made with 
To a 24 whon, it noty concern. 
either number, as may be deemed preferable. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. I. BUNKER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
The fop of the rocker and the bottom of the 
base-rail are preferably provided with a 
cago, Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Spring Attachments 
groove, slot, or recess adapted to receiving the 
for Rocking-Chairs, of which the following is 
ends of the extending arms of the brackets, 
a specification. 
which, as above said, are intended to extend 
The object of my present improvement is 
over and clasp or embrace them. In Figs. 1 
to make a Spring attachment for platform 
and 3 I have shown the top of the rocker and 
rocking-chair's which can be attached to and 
the bottom of the base-rail as being rounded, 
with a groove extending some distance along 
removed from the rockel's and base-rails with 
the surface forming what might be termed a 
out the use of Scrow's or nails in making the 
attachment, or the necessity of their removal 
bead, and the extending arm of the bracket 
in taking the parts off the rocker and base 
is curved over into the form of a hook to fit 
in and clasp the same. As shown in Figs. 1 
rail; and my invention consists in the fea 
and 3, the hooks formed on the ends of the 
tures and details of constitction hereinafter 
bracket-arms may be moved forward or back 
described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure l is a side elevation 
Ward along the groove until the spring at 
of a rocker and base-rail with the spring at 
tachment has been located in the right posi 
tachment in place. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
tion, after which the tension of the springs 
view of a portion of the rocker. Fig. 3 is a 
will hold the brackets in place. If desired, 
transverse vertical section taken through the 
however, the brackets may be formed with a 
center of the Spring attachment shown in Fig. 
rib, E, as shown in FigS. 4 and 6, and the 
1, except that the spring and brackets are not 
rocker and base-rail provided with a corre 
shown in section. Fig. 4 is a perspective view 
sponding vertical groove or recess to receive 
of a slightly-modified form of bracket. Fig. 
them. If this ribbe made small enough, how 
5 is a perspective view of a bracket adapted 
ever, it will embed itself in the wood as the 
bracket is adjusted in place. In this way 
for use where the rocker has square edges, as 
Springs of the same tension may be adjusted 
shown in Fig 2: Fig. 6, a vertical transverse 
section of a rocker, illustrating a particular 
to both light and heavy chairs. If the chair 
be heavy, the spring attachment can be moved 
feature, which will be described; and Fig. 7, 
along farther forward until the proper degree 
the same as Fig. 3, except that it shows one of 
of leverage has been secured, and if the chair 
the brackets fastened by Screws. 
be light it can be moved along the groove 
In the drawings, A is the rocker; B, the 
base-rail; C, the bracket; D, the coiled spring, 
backward until a position Suitable to the size 
and weight of the chair has been reached. 
and E a rib or flange on the bracket. 
In making my improved Spring attachment 
Where it is deemed preferable not to form a 
for rocking-chairs I provide the brackets, on bead along the edge of the rocker and base 
rail, SocketS or recesses may be made in them 
which coiled springs are mounted, with ex 
tending arms L., intended to extend up in the like those, for instance, shown in Fig. 2, and 
the projecting arms of the brackets may in 
case of the rocker far enough to pass over the 
that case be turned into Square hooks, as 
top of the same, and down in the case of the 
shown in Fig. 5, of a size and distance apart 
base-rail far enough to pass under the edge 
of the same. These extending arms should 
to adapt them to enter such sockets or re 
be made of that length which will cause the 
CSSGS, 
brackets when in place to be such a distance 
In all the cases which have been described 
apart as to insure the proper tension of the 
above it will be noticed that the parts are 
springs when in place. In the drawings I 
fastened together without the use of Screws 
or nails. They may therefore be taken apart 
have shown some of the brackets With one 
so extending arm and some with two, and wish 
for shipment or other purposes without the 
45 
55 
75 
85 
9 O 
95. 
CO 
3. 
397,274 
nation of a base-rail, a rocker resting and 
locking thereon, a spring-bracket having an 35 
arm or arms extending to the bottom of the 
base-rail and clasping or hooking onto the 
same, a spring-bracket attached to the rocker, 
and a coiled spring connecting the spring 
brackets together, substantially as described. 
3. In a platform rocking-chair, the combi 
lation of a base-rail, a rocker resting and 
rocking thereon, spring-brackets having an 
arm or arms extendling to the top of the 
rocker and to the bottom of the base-l'ail, re 
spectively, and clasping O' hooking onto the 
same, and a coiled spring connecting the 
spring-brackets together, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a platform rocking-clhair, the combi 
nation of a base-l'ail, a rocker resting and 
rocking thereon, a spring-bracket, having an 
arm or alms extending to the edge of the 
rocke' or base-rail and clasping Ol' hooking 
onto the same, a sping-bracket attached to 
the member of the chair which is unclasped 
by the arm or arms, and a coiled spring con 
necting the spring-brackets together, wherely 
the rocker and base-rail are adjustable longi 
tudinally to secure the proper location and 
leverage for the spring, substantially as de 
scribed. 
45 
55 
WILLIAM. I. 3UNIXER. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. D Y RENFORTH, 
THOMAS A. BANNING. 
IO 
trouble and injury to the chair incident to 
the removal of brackets which are mailed or 
screwed in position. All that is necessary is 
to draw the brackets enough apart against 
5 the tension of the spring to enable the hook 
On either the 'Ocker o' the lase-rail to be 
lifted out of engagement, when the whole 
Spring attachment may be immediately taken 
Off. 
In some cases it may be found advanta 
geous to attach one of the blackets to the 
rocker ol' to the base-rail with screw's in the 
usual way, and to provide only the remaining 
bracket with the extending arms. This ar 
15 rangelment will permit the easy separation of 
the parts for shipment and other purposes, 
and will still dispense with the use of screws 
or nails as to the particular bracket having 
the extending arms. Obviously this backet 
2O may be the one engaging with the rocke) or 
the one engaging with the base-rail, while the 
other is attached in the usual way. 
What I regard as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a platform rocking-chair, the connli 
nation of a base-rail, a rocker resting and 
rocking thereon, a spring-bracket having an 
alm or alms extending to the top of the rocker 
and clasping or hooking onto the same, a 
3o spring-bracket attached to the base-rail, and 
a coiled spring connecting the spring-back 
ets together, substantially as described. 
2. In a platform rocking-chair, the combi 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397376.txt	DEVICE FOR PROTECTING FURNACES AND LIKE STRUCTURES, 
Sheet l. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N. PEERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
S. MO CLURE & C. F. PHILLIPS, 
DEVICE FOR PROTECTING FURNACES AND LIKE STRUCTUREs. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
SAMUEL McCIURE AND CHARIES F. PHILLIPS, OF SHARON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
LO EVI C E F O R PROTECT N G FU RNA CES O R ... 
- KE STT RUJ CTTU RES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 397,876, dated February 5, 1889. 
Application filed March 1, 1888, Serial No, 265,878, (No model.) 
10 (v// (Uh O?n, it, 7 vaJ/ conce7'n: 
Be it known that we, SAMUEL MCCLURE 
and CHARLES F. PHILLIPs, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Sharon, in the 
county of Mercer and State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Devices for Protecting Fur 
naces or Like Structures; and we do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable other's skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to means for protect 
ing the linings and jackets of furnaces aindl 
furnace-stacks. It is applicable to all classes 
of furnaces-such, for instance, as blast, pud 
dling, heating, and cupola furnaces-and to 
all classes of stacks, whether constructed of 
brick and iron or of brick alone. 
The invention consists, first, in providing a 
brick structure-such as a furnace or stack 
With a non-conducting Water-space filled with 
gravel or other coarse substance; further, 
in the peculiar arrangement of devices for 
Supplying Water to the whole or to any part 
of such water-space; further, to a system of 
observation-boxes' located in the Wall of 
the structure, by means of which the condi 
tion of the Water-space and furnace-lining 
may be observed, and, finally, in details of 
construction required in embodying the above 
general features, all of which will be fully 
hereinafter described. 
Figure I represents a vertical section 
through the wall or lining of a blast-furnace. 
Fig. 2 is a similar section, illustrating a modi 
fication. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section on the 
line ac a? of Fig. 1. Fig. -4 is a plam WieW of a, 
section of the water-pipe within the Water 
space. Fig. 5 is an elevation of one of the 
observation-boxes. 
As stated above, our invention is applica 
ble to all kinds of lyrick furnaces and furlace 
stacks; but we have shown it in the drawings 
in connection with a blast-furnace of the ol 
dinary type, the drawings showing only so 
much of such a furnace as is necessary to : 
fully illustrate our improvements. 
A is the inner brick structure or lining of 
the furnace, and B the external iron jacket 
surrounding said furnace. 
C represents a space in the lining, which 
extends from the cap or mantel D to the top 
of the furnace and throughout the entire ex 
tent of the latter, as shown in Fig. 3. This 
space may be formed as in Fig. 1, where an 
external course of brick is interposed between 
it andl the jacket B, or as in Fig. 2, where the 
space is formed between the jacket and brick 
Work directly. The entire space is filled with 
coarse gravel or some similar material, which 
of itself forms a non-conducting agent. This 
non-conducting space is supplied with water 
in whole or in any portion by a system of wa 
tar-distribution, which will now be described. 
E represents a Water-pipe constructed in 
sections b, as shown in Fig. 3. This pipe is 
embedded in the gravel filling of the water 
space at a suitable height and extends holi 
Zontally throughout the entire circumference 
of said space. The ends of the sections are 
closed and each one is provided with a num 
ber of perforations, b, Fig. 4, through which 
the Water is admitted to the gravel filling, 
down which it percolates, thoroughly moisten 
ing it below each section of pipe. 
The sec 
tions 
Imay be supplied with Water from a 
circular pipe, F, surroundling the furnace and 
having a branch pipe, f, with a suitable valve, 
f', communicating with each of said sections. 
A vertical pipe, G, communicates with said 
pipe F and with a tube, H., connected to any 
supply of Water under pressure. We prefer, 
however, to dispense with the pipe F, and 
supply each section b by means of a separate 
vertical pipe, like the pipe G, connected di 
rectly to such section and to the tube H and 
having a stuitable cut-off Valve. The tube H 
also surrounds the furnace and is supported 
by the bracket I. The tube is preferably made, 
as shown in Figs. I and 2, with an open trough, 
J, into which the discharge-pipe IX carries any 
excess of water from the space C, and which 
should collmunicate With a suitable drain. 
The tube and trough are built of iron sections 
bolted together, as shown at i, Fig.1, but may 
be formed in any other way that may be 
found desirable. 
It will be evident from the description that 
Water can be supplied to any or all of the sec 
tions b of the inner water-pipe, and thus that 
any portion of the entire circumference of the 
graveled space may be thoroughly moistened 
at Will; also that the Water may be shut off 
5 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
90 
1 ? ? 
g 
- 
397,876 
entirely and such space used as a dry non 
conductor. 
In order that the condition of the furnace 
lining and water-space may be accurately ob 
served, we have provided a series of observa 
tion-boxes, I, one of which is shown in Fig. 5. 
These boxes are cast of any desired size-say 
from four to six inches in diameter-and are 
preferably square in cross-section. They are 
cast with a flange, l, at their outer end, by 
means of which they are bolted to and within 
the iron furnace-jacket, as shown at l'. Fig. 1. 
Their inner end extends a sufficient distance 
into the brick lining, and, like the outer end, 
is open, so that the condition of the lining can 
be seen. Each box is provided with a slot, l, 
which registers with the water-space, and 
which, while allowing the amount of moisture 
in the gravel to be ascertained, also permits 
of evaporation when from any cause it occurs. 
These boxes are placed around the entire fur 
nace in tiers, the tiel's being, say, three feet 
apart, and the boxes in each tier about a simi 
lar distance from one another. The tiers may 
be carried up to the top of the furnace, if 
thought desirable, or to any height below that, 
and the boxes in each tier are arranged so as 
to alternate in position with the two adjacent 
boxes in the next tiers above and below. These 
boxes may be made accessible by platforms 
at the different tiers or in various other ways. 
What We claim is 
1. In a furnace having a space in its wall 
O 
2 ? 
25 
filled with gravel or like material, a horizon 
tal water-pipe embedded in said filling and 
perforated on its lower side, an external sup 
ply-pipe, as II, to contain Water under pressure, 
and vertical pipes, as G, to supply Water to 
the said horizontal water-pipe to fill said space 
by percolation, substantially as described. 
2. In a furnace having a space in its Wall 
filled with gravel or similar material, a hori 
Zontal water-pipe composed of disconnected 
sections having closed ends, said pipe being 
embedded in said filling and perforated, a sup 
ply-pipe, as HI, and a series of external ver 
tical pipes connecting said pipe II to each 
section of the horizontal water-pipe, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a furnace having a space in the wall 
filled with gravel or like material, and also 
having a water-pipe embedded in said filling 
for supplying water thereto by percolation, a 
series of observation-boxes in the furnace 
wall open at their outer ends and having a 
slot registering with the filled space in the 
wall, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof we have affixed our 
signatures in presence of two witnesses. 
SAMUEL MCCILURE. 
CHARIES F. PHILLIPS. 
35 
45 
55 
VWitnesses: 
THOS, J. GILLESPIE, 
FRANK L. WILLIAMS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397477.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT.J. TILFORD AND HENRY M. REDEMANN, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY, 
ASSIGNORS TO THE REDEMANN-TILFORD STEEL COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
VANU FACTURE OF STE. E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 397,477, dated February 5, 1889. 
Original application filed July 25, 1888, Serial No. 281,018, Divided and this application filed November 13, 1888, Serial No, 
290,737, (No specimens.) 
. 
gases generated by contact with the bath. So 
To all, Luhon, it invay concert: 
Be it known that we, ROBERT J. TILFORD 
We have found in some instances that better 
and HENRY M. REDEMANN, citizens of the 
results and effects are obtained by the addi 
United States, residing at Louisville, Jeffer 
tion to the bath of glycerine and water of 
5 Son collnty, Kentucky, have invented new and 
spirits of niter, aqua-ammonia, chloride of 
useful Improvements in the Manufacture of 
ammonium, Sulphate of zinc, Sulphate of 55 
Steel, of which the following is a specifica 
alumina, and ammonia; but to this last-named 
tion. 
addition we lay no claim herein, as the same 
Oul invention relates to certain new and 
forms the subject-matter of a second divi 
IO useful improvements in the treatment of crude 
Sional application of Our application, Serial 
or low-grade steel to produce a refined or high 
No. 281,01S, filed July 25, 18SS, of which this 6o 
grade steel. 
application is the first division. Neither do we 
The most successful method of producing 
lay herein any claim to the broad idea of first 
low-grade steel is that known as the Besse 
heating low-grade steel to a degree of heat 
I5 mer process, described in his patent of 1855; 
represented by white heat, and then subject 
but this product, as is well known, is suitable 
ing the metal so heated to a liquid bath (in 65 
chiefly for railways, axles, and like uses, and 
contradistinction to the dry or cementation 
is totally unsuited for structures, machinery, 
process) in which hydrocarbon or similar gases 
and tool purposes, unless puddled, hammered, 
are generated by contact with the heated 
2u and rolled, for the reason that in its normal 
metal and bath, as this last-named matter 
State it is too soft, and when hardened it be 
forms the subject of our original application 7o 
comes too hard and brittle for the purposes 
referred to. 
stated. It was the recognition of these in 
We of course do not Wish to confine our 
herent defects in the Bessemer and low and 
selves to the exact proportions named, as they 
25 medium grade steel which led us to the in 
may be varied Within reasonable limits, and 
vestigation of the subject which has devel 
yet produce the Salme general results; but we 75 
oped our present invention, the object of 
have found from long experience and re 
which is the procluction at slight cost and a 
peated tests and experiments that the propor 
minimum degree of labor of a higher grade 
tions given produce the best results. 
3O and more refined steel by treating the Besse 
It will also be understood that we do not 
ner and other low and medium grade steel 
wish to confine ourselves to the exact degree 8o 
in such manner as to produce a molecular 
of heat imparted to the metal, as that may be 
change from a coal"Se grain to a fine grain and 
varied slightly, so long as the results desired 
silky fracture, to increase the tensile strength 
are obtained. 
35 and elasticity, toughness, and ductility, and 
We have of course been unable to analyze 
to greatly increase the carbon. We have 
the gases resulting from the contact of the hot- 85 
found from experience that, uniform results 
metal body with the bath, but are led to be 
lieve that they constitute a hydrocarbon gas 
in all instances flow from the treatment of 
metals having like properties. 
which has a strong affinity for the metal, and 
4o With these ends in view our invention con 
that the latter, being in a heated state, is in 
sistS in heating the metal to be treated to a 
such a physical condition as to readily take go 
white heat, and then submerging the same in 
up or absorb such gas; but as to the fact that 
a bath of glycerine and water in the propor 
the metal is highly improved we have no 
tion of three (3) ounces of glycerine to one 
doubt whatever, as has been demonstrated by 
45 half () gallon water and allowing it to remain 
all the well-known scientific and mechanical 
submerged until the change is effected, which 
testS. 
should be until the metalis substantially cool, 
It will be understood, of course, that when 
or until such reduction of heat, in the metal 
the treatment is applied adjacent to the fur 
is made that it will no longer take up the naces where the low-grade steel is manufac- - 
2 
897,47? 
tured the ingots may be treated without re 
heating, and thus the expense of Such reheat 
ing is avoided. After the metal has been sub 
jected to the treatment in the bath of glycer 
ine and water it is allowed to cool in the or 
dinary manner, and it may afterward be sub 
jected to any Ordinary hardening or temper 
ing process, and the temper may, if necessary, 
be drawn and again restored without at all 
affecting the other properties acquired from 
the bath. 
We are of course aware that the quality 
of Bessemer and otherlow and medium grade 
steel may be improved by What is known as 
the dry or cementation process, which 
requires a large expenditure of skilled labor 
and great length of time, and that, too, with 
out always securing uniform and satisfactory 
results. 
We desire it to be distinctly understood 
that we lay no claim to the broad idea of in 
creasing the quality of steel by Subsequent 
treatment, as that has been heretofore done, 
especially by what is known as the cementa 
tion process,' which may be termed a dry 
process, our invention differing from such 
process in the particular that it requires a 
period of time amounting to a Small percent 
age of the time required in the cementation 
or dry process, and is in contradistinction to 
Such process essentially a liquid or wet pro 
cess, the former requiring many days, while 
the latter involves only a few minutes. 
As before stated, We Wish it to be under 
stood that the chief feature of our process in 
volves the employment of a bath of glycerine 
and water, for in the use of these two bodies 
we accomplish desirable and improved re 
Sults; but the addition to the glycerine and 
Water of Spirits of niter, aqua-ammonia, chlo 
ride of ammonium, Sulphate of zinc, and Sul 
phate of alumina and ammonia produce bet 
ter and enhanced results; hence We do not 
Wish to confine Ourselves to the use of a bath 
embodying all the bodies named. 
Our invention or process is distinguished 
O 
25 
35 
45 
from processes for tempering steel in oil in 
that by our process the nature and the physical 
construction of the metal are completely 
changed, whereas the tempering of steel in 
oil, as practiced by Some processes, simply 
tempers the metal more slowly than is done 
by tempering in Water and other properties, 
leaving the metal less hard, but somewhat 
tougher than Water-tempered material. The 
changes caused by the oil-tempering process 
are merely temporary, and do not change the 
physical or granular construction of the metal, 
and such changes as are caused thereby can 
be readily neutralized by reheating and allow 
ing the metal to cool. The changes caused 
by treatment by Our process are permanent, 
and cannot be removed by any known treat 
ment or process without entirely destroying 
the steel properties of the metal by burning. 
By our invention we greatly increase the 
tensile strength and elasticity, and yet do not 
destroy the percent. of reduction or ductility, 
while with ordinary tempering the tensile 
strength and elasticity are greatly increased, 
but the per cent. Of reduction and ductility 
is very much impaired. 
What we claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The process herein described for convert 
ing lower-grade steel into refined or higher 
grade steel, which consists in heating the 
metal to be treated to a White heat, and then 
submerging the heated metal in a liquid bath 
of glycerine and water in the proportion of 
three (3) ounces of the former to one-half (...) 
gallon of the latter, substantially as herein 
before set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
ROBERT. J. TILFORD. 
HENRY M. REDEMANN. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY J. TILFORD, 
DAVID BARKLEY. 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397577.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 397,577, 
G. ANDERSON. 
PLANT FOR LAYING TRACKS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet i. 
i.e. 56.264. 
4-2 site 
Inven/or. 
George Anderson, 
peries, 4%-34 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 397,577, 
G ANDERSON, 
PLANT FOR, LAYING TRACKS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 12, 1889, 
& fi 
S 
s 
Jftresses. 
per Y 
N. Perers, Photo-lthographor, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
G ANDERSON, 
PLANT FOR LAYING TRACKS, 
6. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
No. 397,577, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1889, 
(No Model.) 
G ANDERSON, 
PLANT FOR LAYING TRACKS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 397,577, 
i c 
s 
9 
s 
V 
. 
 
 
R 
s 
& 
s 
Ns 
SS 
V 
S. 
i 
EC 
's 
W 
1 
N 
R 
NC; 
3 
ill 
G 
-- 
st 
t 
l 
AA 
8 
f 
t 
; 
} 
r 
y 
8 
t 
8): 
f 
' 
3. 
is 
g 
les. 
S. 
S. 
3. j 
t 
I 
N. 
a) 
S. 
3. 
As N l 
y 
ft 
} 
8 . 
s 
S. 
S. 
hinesses. 
Jae-4. 
E.g. 7 
Patented Feb 121889. 
S. 
S. 
A. 
i 
: 
: 
: 
NS 
Y 
Ny 
S. 
 
sy 
vs 
wa 
HS 
? 
3. 
s 
ETE 
w 
Qs 
Y. 
SY 
Y. 
Fruerto". 
eorge Anderson 
rs4572,34. 
Azzorney. 
NPETERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
G ANDERSON. 
PIANT FOR LAYING TRACKS, 
6 Sheets 
Sheet 5, 
 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, 
wa-iingto... D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 397,577. 
G. ANDERSON, 
PLANT FOR LAYING TRACKS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Feb. 12, 1889. 
es 
s2 
 
 
 
 
 
Sasas 
Seas eas 
aer 
George Ardersov. 
praisy %4. 
p 
 
 
 
 
 
  
LE : 
(22. 
24eed Jaw 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE ANDERSON, 
OF MADRAS, INDIA. 
PANT FOR LAYING TRACKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 897,577, dated February 12, 1889. 
Application filed October 18, 1887, Serial No, 252,712, (No model.) Patented in England August 3l 1887, No. 11,830, 
EO 
2 5 
35 
. 
To all tufton, it Tucu? conce17. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE ANDERSON, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at Madras, in the Empire of India, dis 
trict engineer to the District Board of Mala 
bar, M. Inst. C. E., London, have invented 
new and useful Improvements in Plants for 
Laying Railway-Tracks, (for which I have ob 
tained a patent in Great Britain, No. 1,830, 
bearing date August 31, 1887.) of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
plants for laying railway-tracks, and is in 
tended to expedite the laying of the track by 
preventing the delays incidental to and in 
separable from the methods at present in use 
or proposed to be used. 
In the best apparatus hitherto constructed 
or proposed to be used for the purpose of laying 
railway-tracks there has been provided only 
one line along which the track-sections could 
be taken out to the front to be there laid upon 
the road-bed. When the trucks loaded with 
the track-sections have been emptied, they 
have been sent back along the said one 
line to the depot to be there reloaded, and of 
course while they were being taken back to 
the depot no more track material could be 
sent forward to the front, for it is self-evident 
that loaded trucks of track-sections cannot 
be sent forward over a track at the time it is 
being used for the transit of empty trucks in 
the opposite direction. 
Now, according to my invention the supply 
of track - sections, ready tied, spiked, and 
fished, to the front is not interfered with by 
the presence or return of empty trucks, inas 
much as the empties are sent back to the de 
pot along a siding, and are therefore inca 
pable of interfering with the transit of loaded 
trucks to the front for a longer time than is 
occupied by the act of traversing said emp 
ties from the main track onto said siding. 
It has hitherto been the practice to send 
the materials of the track to the front in un 
connected parts-i. e., so many rails and the 
corresponding quantity of ties, fish-plates, and 
spikes-and either drop them onto the road 
bed seriatin or to fit up a single section of 
track upon the loading-truck, run it out along 
a cantalever, and lower it from there onto the 
road-bed. 
- 
- 
power. 
Now, according to my invention I fit up 
the track-sections ready for the road-bed loe 
fore loading them onto the trucks, and upon 
these trucks I construct a continuous Over 
head track or line, to which any number of 
track-sections bolted togetiner by men on the 
trucks can be hung and then run out at one 
time to the front past the track already laid, 
and laid in front thereof upon the road-bed, 
a second number of sections being run out 
along the same carrier while the fish-bolts 
of the number last laid are being bolted up by 
the front gang, and the Whole apparatus 
moved forward thereover by suitable engine 
I wish to point out the utility of this appa 
ratus in constructing military railways expe 
ditiously and safely. 
My invention consists in, first, a train of 
trucks, constituting a part of the construction 
train, adapted to travel forward along the 
laid track, and having a main track laid upon 
it, over which bogies loaded with rail-sections 
are sent to the front, with which train is com 
bined a set of traversers leading to a continu 
ous siding constructed along the side of said 
trucks, and over which the empty bogies can 
be run back to the depot for the purpose of 
being reloaded; second, an overhead track 
constructed upon said trucks, located above 
the track upon the latter, the bogies of the 
overhead track being each fitted with a suit 
able gripper or means for carrying forward the 
track-sections; third, a balanced cantalever 
Swiveling upon a truck at the head of the 
aforesaid train and attached thereto, and 
along which the overhead carrier is continued; 
fourth, a balanced can talever swiveling upon 
a truck, and along which the overhead carrier 
is continued, and which is adapted to be hauled 
along the road-bed in front of the first-men 
tioned cantalever, a distance therefrom, and 
to be attached thereto by hauling-chains; fifth, 
a propelling-engine of Suitable construction 
to allow the main track of the construction 
train being carried over the same at the level 
of said main track, with which is combined 
suitable winding machinery for working the 
overhead carrier and traversers; sixth, in 
combination with the preceding, a transport 
train for the purpose of bringing up supplies 
of track material from the depot or other 
S s 
9o 
95 
OC) 
w 
g 
397,577 
25 
o 
points along the line to the construction-train. 
and of carrying the empty bogies back to the 
deport to be reloaded. I attain the several 
objects of my invention by means of the mech 
anism illustrated in the following drawings, 
in which 
Figure l is a general view in side elevation 
of the principal parts of my invention. Fig. 
2 is a plan showing the apparatus illustrated 
in Fig. 1 working round a bend in the road 
bed. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of part of the 
cantalever on its bogie, two loaded track-sec 
tion bogies on the front truck of the construc 
tion-train, and as much of the overhead cal 
rier as the figure includes. Fig. 4 is a plan 
of the cantalever illustrated in Fig. 3, but 
omitting the braces. Fig. 5 is a side elevation 
showing a length of road-bed and track laid 
thereon, two trucks of the construction-train, 
traversers and main track thereon, four loaded 
track-section bogies, and a corresponding 
length of the overhead carrier. The extreme 
ends of the figures are broken off to bring the 
latter within the specified sight-space of the 
sheet. Fig. 6 is a plan corresponding with 
Fig. 5, but omitting the bogies from the right 
hand truck, as well as the overhead carrier, 
and including the second Wings Q. Fig. 7 is 
an end elevation of the truck of the construc 
tion-train of Fig. 3. Fig. 8 is a detail front 
elevation of the overhead carrier. Fig. 9 is 
a detail elevation, and Fig. 9 a detail plan 
illustrating the connection of the carrier-track 
to the hangers of the carrier. Fig. 10 is a side 
elevation of a carrier-bogie; and Fig. 11 is a 
plan of the same. 
Referring to Figs. I and 2, A is the road 
bed, and B the laid track. C is a traction-en 
gine; D, the front cantalever; E, its truck; F, 
a hauling-chain from the front cantalever to 
the truck G of the cantalever H, at the head 
of the construction-train. II are two trucks 
of the construction-train; J, the main track 
laid thereupon; K, the siding; L, the trav 
ersers; M, the bogies loaded with track-sec 
tions N, tied, spiked, and fished ready for 
laying, and O the superstructure carrying 
the overhead carrier P. Q Q are lateral ex 
tensions of the platforms of the trucks I on 
the sides opposite to the siding K. 
The traction-engine C is of any suitable 
construction, and may conveniently be fur 
nished with a winding-gear for operating the 
The canta lever-truck E is of any suitable 
55 construction, its wheels, however, being 
adapted to travel upon the road-bed A. Both 
cantalevers D and H are made to swivel upon 
their respective centers, (see Figs. 3 and 4.) 
for the purpose of allowing them to adapt 
themselves to the radius of a curve. 
I do not confine myself to the use of two 
cantale vers, as illustrated in Figs. I and 2, 
but may use only one-viz., that at the head 
The advantage of 
of the construction-train. 
using two cantaleyers, as shown, is that a 
much longer length of track can be hauled 
overhead carrier P. 
65. 
-- 
- , 
- 
- 
 
35 
45 
out of the construction-train and laid at, one 
operation than if only one cantalever-viz., 
that at the head of said train--were in use. 
When only short lengths of track-say not 
more three or four twenty-one or twenty-four 
foot lengths of rail-sections-are to be laid at 
one operation, the cantalever D and its truck 
E are dispensed with, and the traction-engine 
C connected to the canta lever-truck G. 
Any suitable flexible connection may be 
introduced at the point 2 to connect the two 
cantale vers. 
Referring to Figs. 3 and 4, a cantal ever 
consists, preferably, of a pair of parallel 
beams or girders, h. h. adapted in any con 
venient way to swivel in a horizontal plane 
above the top of the truck G upon a pivot 
fixed, preferably, at the center thereof. The 
rear end is weighted with a counterpoise for 
the purpose of balancing the cantalever upon 
the said pivot. In Fig. 3 the pivot is shown 
in dotted lines as a downward continuation, 
h", of the center post, h, and resting in a step 
bearing, h, upon the truck. The center post, 
h, terminates in a head, h", in which meet the 
fore and aft braces hill", together forming an 
upward extension of the truck, and are pro 
vided for the purpose of maintaining the 
perpendicularity of the center post, l'. 
At equal intervals along the fore part of 
the canta lever are fixed cross-beams or girdle's 
l, from which depend pairs of hangers l, 
supporting the fore part of the track of the 
overhead carrier. The construction of this 
overhead track and its hangers is described 
in detail farther on with reference to Figs. 7, 
S, and 9. The hanger's leare, however, neces 
sarily longer than those illustrated in the 
figures last mentioned and marked l therein, 
to compensate for the height of the canta 
level'. 
The construction-train may consist of any 
number of trucks; but this number, assuming 
that each truck is as long as a track-section, 
is equal to the number of sections that can 
be laid from one or from both cantale vers at 
one operation. 
Although Figs. I and 2 show the construe 
tion-train as consisting of only two trucks and 
the cantalever-trucks within a corresponding 
distance of each other, I wish it to be distinctly 
understood that my invention is not limited 
likewise, inasmuch as the construction-train 
may consist of as many trucks as the canta 
lever or cantale vers have stability to bear 
lengths of rail-sections suspended from them. 
Referring to Figs. 3, 5, 6, and 7, a truck, I, 
of the construction-train consists of a plat 
form, i, upon bogies or ordinary car-wheels; 
two Wings, Q, which are lateral continua 
tions of the platform and are fixed thereto 
in any convenient way: a superstructure 
(marked O in Figs. 1 and 2.) consisting of 
pairs of posts (t, and braces b; longitudinal 
ties c, cross-pieces d, and diagonal ties d' to 
support the overhead carrier; two traverse 
tracks, e, which are continued onto the wings 
-- 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
To5 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
- 
397,577 
k; traversers L, adapted to run thereon, and 
part of the main track J, consisting of two 
rails, g. The traverse-tracks e are laid imme 
diately upon the platform i, the traversers 
I, occupy the next level, and the main track 
g is laid on the riext level above and par 
tially upon the traversers. 
Rails g are laid upon the wing k to the 
same gage as the rails g of the main track J, 
O and these when the traversers L are moved 
outward onto said wings, as indicated by the 
dotted lines on the right-hand corner of Fig. 
6, constitute, with the rails g of the main 
track upon said traversers, a siding-track, the 
function of which will be described at length 
farther on. The opposite wing, Q, may be 
furnished with a second siding, or there may 
be constructed upon it Workshops, stores, 
cabins, or whatever may be convenient to the 
management or staff. It is evident that to 
utilize the wing Q for some purpose which 
will load it will increase the stability of the 
truck. I provide bridge-pieces g g for the 
main track and siding-track, respectively, to 
make them continuous With those on the ad 
joining truck. 
These pieces are not rigidly 
attached to the platform of the trucks, but 
loosely, as by means of studs gand slots g, to 
admit of the necessary degree of play between 
the trucks, especially when the construction 
train is moving round a curve. 
The overhead track P extends from the 
rear of the construction-train to the nose of 
the canta lever. The front cantalever is like 
wise fitted with a like section of track, upon 
which carriers are adapted to run. 
Referring to Figs. 3, 4, 5, 7, 8,9, and 9", ji 
are rails constituting the carrier-track. They 
are bolted to brackets l', which are extensions 
of hangers l, being thereby supported by the 
superstructure O over the trucks of the con 
struction-train and to similar hangers, h, de 
pending from the arms of the cantalever or 
cantale Vers. 
Bridge-pieces O are provided to make one 
length of rail.j continuous with the adjacent 
one on the next truck. In each end of the 
said pieces I form a cavity, In, which receives 
the nut and nose of the bolt o', by which the 
said end is held down upon the bracket l'. 
Figs. 12 and 13 are respectively side and 
front elevations of my improved special lo 
comotive adapted for the purpose of working 
the construction-train. 
i is the platform, with Wings, main track, 
and superstructure to correspond with the 
trucks I of the construction-train, as indicated 
in the figures. 
W is the tank; t, the boiler; ac, the cab, and 
y y the cylinders, all under the platform and 
wings. 
The rails j of the carrier-track over one 
truck are made continuous with those of the 
adjoining trucks by means of short lengths 
of rail or bridge-pieces pivotally connected 
to the said rails. This connection is illus 
trated in Figs. 3 and 5 as consisting of bars 
8 
o, upon which the respective short lengths of 
rail i' are bolted or otherwise rigidly con 
nected, and bolts o', by which said bars O are 
pivotally connected to the respective rails i. 
The function of these pivotal connections is 
to make the carrier-track sufficiently flexible 
to enable it to adapt itself to the curves of 
the track Bas the entire plant is moved along 
them. Further pivotal connections of the 
same or similar construction are introduced 
into the part of the carrier-track on the can 
talever-truck G, as indicated at O, Fig. 3. 
M M are the bogies upon which the track 
sections N, previously fished, spiked, and tied, 
are carried. The figures show two bogies as 
carrying a load of track-sections; but this 
number may be increased, if necessary. 
The construction of the bogies adapted to 
run upon the. Overhead carrier-track and to 
carry the track-sections suspended there 
from is illustrated in detail in Figs. 8, 10, 
and 11. 
R is the frame of the bogie, and r its trav 
eling wheels. Smaller wheels, r', one pair in 
front of and a second pair behind the bogie, 
are provided, and each pair is pivotally con 
nected to the frame R of the bogie at r*. The 
function of these pairs of small wheels at each 
end of the bogie is to guide the latter safely 
over the bridge-piecesi'i' when the construc 
tion-train is standing on a bend. This they 
are enabled to do by virtue of their being 
smaller in diameter than the traveling wheels 
r' ', and therefore less liable to be jerked off 
the rails, and also because of their connec 
tions r with the bogie-frame R being pivotal. 
Each carrier-bogie has a grooved pulley, s, 
pivoted to it by means of a bolt, s', passing 
-up vertically through the head of the pulley 
loops and through the central part of the 
bogie-frame R. The hole s in the head of 
the pulley-loop is preferably widened later 
ally at the bottom, as shown by dotted lines 
in Fig. 8, for the purpose of allowing the pull 
leys to swing laterally when the grippers it' 
are loaded with a rail-section and being hauled 
along the carrier-track J. 
A chain, l, terminating in an automatic 
gripper, t, passes over each pulley s, from 
which it is led away to suitable winding ap 
paratus adapted to raise or lower the gripper 
and haul the carrier-bogie in either direction 
along the carrier-track J. 
There are several ways in which the chains 
t can be operated by the winding appara 
I do not lay claim nor confine myself 
tus. 
to any one in particular. They may be led 
| away to rearward, as indicated in Figs. 1, 
3, and 5, to a Winding-drum on the locomo 
tive behind the construction-train, and chains 
fixed to the bogie-frames R may be led away 
to a Winding apparatus upon the traction-en 
gine C. 
Two removable posts, u, fitting into sock 
ets in the bogie - tops u', are furnished to 
each bogie. 
They are separated by a distance 
equal to the outside width of two rails, and 
.." 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
I o5 
TIO 
I I5 
I 25 
I 30 
4. 
397,577 
O 
30 
45 
So 
55 
75 
- 
therefore always keep the sections centrally 
upon said bogie-tops. I provide a locomotive 
at the rear of the construction-train to run 
upon the laid track B and to push said train 
and cantalever at the head of it along the said 
track as the latter is laid. When two canta 
levers are used with the traction-engine C, 
then the latter will assist the locomotive in 
moving the construction-train forward. 
Upon either or both traction-engine and loco 
motive I provide a suitable winding-gear for 
working the chainst of the overhead carrier, 
in the manner hereinafter described. 
I may, if desirable equip the locomotive 
with the necessary winding-gear for working 
the bogie carriers and chainst in both direc 
tions, and also for effecting the transit of the 
loaded bogies M from the transport-train onto 
the construction-train and shunting the empty 
bogies from the construction-train onto the 
transport-train again. 
The aforesaid locomotive may be driven 
either by steam, by electricity, or by any 
other agency. Whatever type of engine be 
made use of the space occupied by the boiler 
in the present steam-locomotive must be left 
clear for a length of track of the same gage 
and fixed in the same plane as the main track 
g on the trucks I of the construction-train. 
Consequently the boilers (if the engine be 
driven by steam) must be beneath or at the 
I prefer that they should 
side of the frame. 
be placed as low down as possible, for the pur 
pose of increasing their stability. The usual 
gear will be distributed accordingly. If an 
electric motor be used, it would be constructed 
on the same principle-namely, so as to carry 
a track of the same gage as the track g at the 
same level as and continuous with it. . Be 
hind the said engine and upon the laid track 
may be operated a transport-train for the con 
veyance of loads of track material from the 
depot or other points along the line to the con 
struction-train. 
A truck or platform car of the transport: 
train, referring to Figs. 5 and 6, consists of 
platform i upon bogies or ordinary car-wheels, 
a main track, g, laid thereupon, bogies M, and 
posts t. 
lever may be supported upon an engine form 
ing a part of the construction-train in in 
stances where economy in space and cost may 
seem particularly desirable. It will also ap 
pear obvious that the method of uniting the 
rail-tracks with which the trucks are pro 
vided, and by which the spaces between cars 
are bridged, may be varied without departing 
from the spirit of my invention. Convenient 
forms and means are shown in Figs. 6, 9, and 
98 of the drawings. 
The operation of my invention is as fol 
lows: The transport-train carrying pairs of 
bogies M, each having the same number of 
track-sections, (seven is a convenient num 
ber) ready tied; spiked, fished, and bolted, 
loaded onto them, the bottom track-sections 
- resting, preferably, on the bogie-tops u?, as 
illustrated, is brought up from the depot to 
the locomotive of the construction-train, and 
the loaded bogies M run along the track g 
onto the construction-train. For the purpose 
of effecting this transit of the loaded bogies 
M from the transport-train onto the construc 
tion-train, I use either a small locomotive 
adapted to run upon the track on the trans 
port-train, and to push the loaded bogies for 
ward onto the construction-train into the po 
sition illustrated in Figs. 3, 5, 6, and 7, or I 
furnish the locomotive of the construction 
train with a suitable hauling-gear for effect 
ing said transit. The loads of track-sections 
N being now upon the construction-train and 
under the overhead carrier P, the next step 
is to lift and haul forward the top section, N, 
of each load. For this purpose a gang of op 
eratives upon the construction-train engages 
the grippers t, with the ties respectively un 
der them, and the chainst are hauled in for 
the purpose of lifting the top layer of sec 
tions from the loads on the construction-train. 
While they are swinging in the air the adja 
cent ends of the several sections are loosely 
connected by the fish-plates and bolts, and 
the carrier-bogies hauled out along the canta 
lever immediately, over the road-bed in front 
of the cantalever-truck G. The suspended 
sections (shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1) are 
then lowered onto the road-bed A and the sev 
eral fish-plates bolted up. If the track is be: 
ing laid upon a bend in the road-bed, the 
cantalevers are swung on their pivots h", and 
the suspended track-sections accordingly 
made to follow the bend as they are lowered. 
Immediately, the ties of the several sections 
are on the road-bed the grippers t are re 
leased, the chainst hauled in, and the carrier 
bogies run back along the carrier-track jun 
til they are in their former position--ie, over 
the second tier of rail-sections. Meanwhile 
the construction-train has been moved for 
Ward over the new track laid at the last op 
eration. . The gripperstare again engaged 
this time with the ties of the second tier of 
sections, N, respectively underneath them. 
By my system it will appear that a canta These are raised, loosely connected together, 
hauled out to the front, lowered onto the road 
bed, and bolted up as before. 
The above-described series of operations is 
repeated until the seventh or bottom tier of 
sections has been hauled from off the bogies 
M. The bogies are then traversed by means 
of the traversers L onto the wingsk and moved 
back along the siding to the rear of the con 
struction-train, whereupon the traversers are 
moved back, so as to again make the main 
track g continuous for the transit to the front 
of the next train of loaded bogies from the 
transport-train along said track. The empty 
bogies can then be shunted onto the trans 
port-train and taken away to the depot to be 
reloaded while the train of loaded bogies last 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
39,57? 
5. 
O 
- 
brought up on the transport-train from the 
depot are being sent forward onto the con 
struction-train. 
To facilitate the work of traversing the 
empty bogies from off the siding of'.olnto the 
track of the transport-train, I may interpose 
a truck with main track of and traverser's g 
between the construction-train and its loco 
motive. 
A second siding may be laid upon the 
Wings Q, the traversers being made duplex, as 
indicated by the dotted lines L in Fig. 6. By 
this means the passage of the traversel's from 
the main track g to the siding g' would make 
both track and siding continuous at once, so 
that fresh loads of track-sections could be 
brought onto the construction-train without 
Waiting for the transit of the empty bogies off 
the traversers in the siding g and the return 
of said traversers to the main track. 
The transport-train and the locomotive 
above described may, if desired, be fitted with 
sidings as the construction-train. 
I claim 
1. In a track-laying plant, the combination 
of a construction-train adapted for the transit 
therealong of loads of track-sections, an over 
head carrier, a siding and traverser for the 
return of the empty track-section bogies, en 
gines adapted to move the construction-train 
forward and to operate the overhead carrier 
on their respective tracks, and suitable wind 
ing or other gear for operating the various 
members of the construction-train and over 
head carrier. 
2. The combination, With the truck of a 
construction-train, of a wing or lateral contin 
luation of the truck-platform on each side 
thereof, one or both of said wings or lateral 
extensions adapted to receive a siding with 
traversers operating between the main track 
and siding, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the truck of a con 
struction-train, of a wing or lateral continua 
tion of the truck-platform on each side there 
of, one of said wings or lateral extensions 
adapted to receive a siding and the other to 
be fitted as a workshop, store, or cabin, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination, with the truck of a con 
struction-train, of traversers adapted to run 
upon rails laid transversely upon the plat 
form of said truck and upon a wing or lateral 
extension of said platform, upon which trav 
ersers are laid sections of the main track of 
the construction-train, and which sections are 
adapted to make continuations with either a 
siding of the same gage as the main track laid 
upon the wing or lateral extension or with the 
main track upon the platform, according to 
the position of the traversers. 
5. The combination, with the trucks of a 
construction-train having a track secured to 
the platform thereof, of track-sections form 
ing continuations of the main lines, pivotally 
connected to the said trucks in manner to 
permit the traverse thereon of the wheels 
treading the main line, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination, with the trucks of a 
construction-train having a siding laid upon 
wings or lateral extensions of the platform of 
said trucks, of bridge-pieces uniting the tracks 
forming the sidings of two or more connect 
ing-trucks, and traversers operating between 
the main track and sidings, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
7. The combination, with the trucks of a 
construction-train having a siding laid upon 
wings or lateral extensions of the platforms 
of said trucks, of bridge-pieces pivotally con 
nected to the trucks and sidings, respectively, 
adapted to make continuous the main line 
from one truck of the construction-train to 
the adjoining one, and the siding from one 
wing to the adjoining one, with traversers for 
connecting, substantially as and for the pull 
pose set forth. 
8. The combination, with the platform or 
floor of a truck forming a member of a con 
struction-train provided with tracks thereon, 
of two bogies having suitable uprights form 
ing side supports for sections of completed 
track carried thereby, substantially as set 
forth. 
9. The combination, with the platform of 
the truck of a construction-train, of vertical 
posts at the corners of said platform, longi 
tudinal and transverse beams connecting the 
tops of said vertical posts, and braces con 
nected to said longitudinal or transverse 
beams and to a wing or lateral extension of 
said platform. 
10. The combination, in a construction 
train of one or more trucks, of a superstruct 
lure supported over the platform of the said 
truck or trucks, and an overhead carrier sus 
pended frou said superstructure and adapted 
to transport a load from one part of said con 
struction-train over the track below to the 
front thereof, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
11. The combination, with a construction 
train, of a superstructure supported over the 
platform of all the trucks of said construction 
train, and an overhead carrier suspended from 
said superstructure extending the whole length 
of the train and adapted to transport the load 
of said construction-train to the front thereof. 
12. The combination of a construction-train 
having a main track on the platform thereof, 
wings or lateral extensions of said platforms 
on one or both sides thereof, a siding upon 
said wings, and traversers adapted to move 
between the main line and siding and make 
connection between the two, said combination 
adapted for the transport of loaded trucks 
along the main track to the front of the con 
struction-train and for the return of the empty 
trucks along the siding. 
13. The combination of a construction-train 
having a main track laid on the platforms 
thereof, wings or lateral extensions of said 
35 
45 
55 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IC) 
II5 
I 25 
897,577 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
platforms on one or both sides thereof, sid 
ings upon said Wings, and duplex traversel's 
adapted to move between the main line and 
the said sidings and make connection between 
them, respectively, said combination adapted 
for the transport of loaded trucks along the 
main track to the front of the construction 
train and for the return of the empty trucks 
along the siding. 
14. The combination, with longitudinal and 
transverse beams supported by vertical posts 
Over the platforms of the trucks of a construc 
tion-train, of an overhead carrier connected 
thereto and adapted to allow loaded bogies to 
be moved under said carrier along the con 
struction-train and to be used for the purposes 
of raising the loads from off said bogies and 
to transport them toward the front of the con 
struction-train. 
15. In a construction-train, the combination, 
with a suitable overhead frame, of a track 
Supported longitudinally over a main linese 
cured to the platform below and one or more 
carriers adapted to traverse said overhead 
track, Substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
16. In a construction-train, the combination, 
With a suitable overhead frame, of a track 
Supported longitudinally over a main track 
upon the platform of the car below, uniting 
With a like track, a connecting-truck, and a 
carrier adapted to traverse said track from 
one truck to another, substantially as de 
scribed. 
17. In an overhead carrier supported over 
the truck or trucks of a construction-train, 
holes formed in the foot and web of the rails, 
adapted to receive one end of the bolt by 
which the rail is connected to its support and 
to allow the rail to slide upon the said sup 
port as the construction-train is moving on a 
curve. 
18. In a construction-train, the combination, 
With a bogie adapted to travel upon an over 
head track supported longitudinally over the 
main track secured to the trucks thereof, of 
a pair of wheels pivotally connected to each 
end of the frame of said bogie, constructed, 
arranged, and operating substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
19. The combination, with a bogie adapted 
to travel upon the rails of an overhead track 
supported longitudinally over the main track 
laid along the truck of a construction-train, 
of a pair of wheels pivotally connected to the 
frame of said bogie at each end of it and 
adapted to lead the wheels of said bogie over 
the joints and round the bends in the rails of 
said overhead track. 
20. The combination, with the trucks of a 
construction-train, of an overhead carrier sup 
ported longitudinally over the main track laid 
along said trucks, and bridge-pieces pivotally 
connected to the opposite ends of the rails of 
the overhead carrier and adapted to make the 
several sections of the overhead carrier over 
the several trucks of the construction-train 
- 
- 
continuous for the length of the construction 
train, 
21. In a construction-train, the combina 
tion, with a bogie adapted to traverse an over 
head track supported longitudinally over the 
main line of said construction-train, of a loop 
pendent therefrom, a grooved pulley pivoted 
in said loop, and a suitable connection guided 
by the latter terminating in a gripper oper 
ated by a winding-drum, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
22. The combination, with a bogie adapted 
to travel upon an overhead carrier supported 
longitudinally over the main line of a con 
struction-train, of a loop pendent therefrom, 
a chain-pulley pivoted in said loop, and a 
chain terminating in a gripper and led away 
over said pulley to a winding-drum. 
23. The combination, with a construction 
train of a track-laying plant, of a calatalevel' 
supported upon a truck and pivoted thereon 
and an overhead track extending along the 
arm thereof, substantially as Set forth. 
24. The combination, with the construction 
train of a track-laying plant, of a cantalever 
adapted to turn upon a pivot, and an over 
head track fixed to the projecting or front 
part of said cantalever, substantially as above 
described. 
25. The combination, with the construction 
train of a track-laying plant, of two cantale 
vers adapted to turn upon their respective 
trucks, and overhead tracks fixed to the pro 
jecting parts of said cantale vers, substantially 
as above described. 
26. The combination, with the construction 
train of a track-laying plant, of a traction 
engine adapted to travel on the road-bed, and a 
cantalever having fixed upon it an overhead 
arm provided with a track adapted to oper 
ate between the engine and the connecting 
train, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
27. The combination, with a construction 
train of a track-laying plant, of a traction 
engine provided with and carrying thereon a 
cantalever, said engine being adapted to oper 
ate the train and the track-laying apparatus, 
substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
28. In a track-laying plant, the combina 
tion, with one or more trucks provided with 
means for lifting, carrying, and laying sec 
tions of track, of an engine or motor adapted 
to advance the train as required, said engine 
or motor being provided with a track there 
upon, by means of which sections of track 
may be advanced along and above the said 
engine or motor from a supply to the construc 
tion-train, Substantially as set forth. 
29. A locomotive adapted for the propul 
sion of the construction-train of a track-lay 
ing plant, and having a continuation of the 
main track of said train of the same gage as 
said main track laid upon it at the same level, 
whereby it is adapted to admit of the bogies 
being moved from the transport-train along 
consisting of one or more trucks provided with 
railway -tracks thereon, cantalever, and en 
gines, whereby sections of track are lifted and 
advanced along a suspended track from the 
carrying-truck to the cantalever and lowered 
to position on the road-bed, substantially as 
set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 26th day of August, 1887. 
GEO. ANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER J. SKERTEN, 
D. J. NoRWOOD, 
Both of 17 Gracechurch Street, London, E. C. 
it on the main track of the construction-train, 
Substantially as described. 
30. The combination, in a constrtictions 
train consisting of ohe oil moie tucks pro 
vided with tracks upon their platforms and 
travel'sers above, of all engine-power adapted 
to operate them, substantially as set forth. 
31. The combination of an overhead carrier 
extending the whole length of the construc 
tion and transport train, having a main track 
thereupon, traversers, sidings, and engine 
power adapted to operate them, substantially 
as described. 
32. The apparatus, substantially as herein 
described, for laying railway-track by a plant, 
TO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397679.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FOR, HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTING GRANULAR, OR 
E. J. WOOD, 
LUMPY SUBSTANCES 
No. 397,679, 
s 
N 
s 
s 
S. 
is 
Patented Feb. 13. 1889. 
} 
S 
2 ---- 
N 
sy 
's 
S. 
RS 
, 
, 
: 
Sk 
..S. 
A. 
| SSSIA 
EAs. 
s 
R 
--- 
Sas 
s 
Yi, 
5, 
is 
RS 
d 
d 
N 
w 
s 
y 
w 
- 
s ... 
' 
S s 
a. 
--S. 
 
 
N. PETES proto-Lithographet, Washington, E. C. 
Zzzzeezer 
% 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
1889. 
APPARATUS FOR, HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTING GRANULAR, OR 
E. J. WOOD, 
LUMPY SUBSTANCES 
No. 397,679, 
k 
Patented Feb. 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
WA -SS easis CR 4. 
s 
S 
S 
A2 esses." 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
APPARATUS FOR HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTING GRANULAR OR 
No. 397,679. 
Patented Feb. 12, 1889. 
- 
E. J. WOOD, 
LUMPY SUBSTANCES 
 
S 
S 
 
77222esses: 
as 
Zzzzezz7. 
2. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
E. J. WOOD, 
UMPY SUBSTANCES, 
APPARATUS FOR, HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTING GRANUTAR, OR, 
No. 397,679, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1889. 
 
s 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDGAR. J. WOOD, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
APPARATUS FOR HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTING GRANULAR OR LUMPY SUBSTANCES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 397,679, dated February 12, 1889, 
Application filed April 7, 1888, Serial No. 269,913, (No model.) 
55 
To all, 7thon, it wa? concer'7. 
Be it known that I, EDGAR. J. WOOD, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Apparatus for Handling and 
TOistributing Granular or Lumpy Substances, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention may be embodied in appa 
ratus for elevating or handling and distribu 
ting various Substances or materials of a 
granular Or lumpy character, but is at pres 
ent more particularly intended for use.in 
handling and distributing coal. 
In coal-yards from which carts are filled it 
is common to provide a series of bins arranged 
side by side for receiving coal of different 
sizes or kinds, and I also provide a series of 
elevated pockets which have each a delivery 
spout at its bottom, and which is at the de 
sired height to load a cart therefrom; and a 
further object of my invention is to provide 
for delivering coal or other material which is 
raised to the top of the bins either into any 
one of the pockets or into any one of the bins, 
and also to provide for taking coal from any 
one of the bins and transferring it to any 
other one of the bins or to any One of the 
pockets. 
The invention is hereinafter particularly 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
plan of a coal-yard embodying my invention, 
including a canal-boat and an elevator boat 
or float lying at the wharf adjacent thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section upon the ir 
regular plane indicated by the dotted linea ac, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a transverse section upon 
about the plane indicated by the dotted line 
y 1, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical section of an 
elevator, a portion of the height being broken 
away and embodying my invention. Fig. 5 is 
a horizontal section upon about the plane in 
dicated by the dotted line 22, Fig. 4. Fig. 6 
is a horizontal section upon about the plane 
indicated by the dotted line **, Fig. 4; and 
Fig. 7 is a nearly vertical section upon about 
the plane indicated by the dotted line SS, 
Fig. 4. Figs. 4 to 7 are upon a larger scale 
than Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and similar letters of 
reference designate corresponding parts in all 
the figures. 
Referring first to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, A desig 
nates a Wharf at which boats may land, and 
upon which the coal-yard is situated. 
B designate coal-bins, which are arranged 
to form a series of as many as may be desired, 
and the length of the series is, as here shown, 
broken away to reduce the size of the figure. 
C designates an elevator boat or float sup 
porting an elevator structure and means for 
driving the same, and including an elevator 
leg, D, which, as here shown, depends into a 
canal-boat, E, from Which coal is to be taken. 
The elevator-leg D, which is supported by the 
elevator structure upon the scow or float C, is 
driven from the machinery which is upon the 
scow or float C, and a preferable construction 
of the elevator-leg and the elevating mechan 
ism within it is represented in Figs, 4 to 7, 
inclusive, to which I shall now rafer The 
elevator-leg D includes a frame-work, D', in 
which operates an endless chain of scoops or 
buckets, D. At the lower portion of the 
frame-work D' the same may be inclosed by 
a casing, D, and at the upper portion is a 
hood or casing, D', provided with a delivery 
spout, D. As here represented, the chain of 
buckets or scoops D* is composed of two par 
allel endless chains, d, between which the 
buckets or scoops d' are hung. 
At the top of the frame-work D' is a shaft, 
d, upon which are chain-wheels d, which sup 
port and drive the chains d. The shaft d? is 
supported in Suitable bearings, d, upon the 
frame-work D', and is driven through bevel 
wheels d from a shaft, d, which receive mo 
tion from the machinery upon the elevator 
scow or float C. By motion thus imparted to 
the shaft d and the supporting and driving 
wheels d the endless chain of buckets or 
scoops D is caused to move in the direction 
indicated by the arrows in Fig. 4, and thus 
the buckets or Scoops d' are passed into and 
through the coal or like material in the boat, 
E, and thence ascend loaded, and as they pass 
the wheels d at the top of the elevator-leg 
the buckets or Scoops d' deliver their contents 
through the delivery-spout D, and thence the 
coal passes down the inclined chute D, and, 
as here represented, to a coal-screen, D, where 
by the coal is cleaned or screened. 
At the lower part of the frame-work D', in 
stead of a single wheel or pair of wheels for 
the chain of buckets or scoops Dtopassaround, 
75 
85 
9 O 
d 
O 
15 
35 
SO 
3 
897,679 
TO 
3o 
35 
O 
45 
55 
there are two wheels which rotate in the same 
plane, or two pairs of wheels which rotate in the 
same planes. Inasmuch as there are employed 
two simple chains, d, for supporting or form 
ing the endless chain of Scoops or buckets, I 
employ two pairs of wheels, d, those of each 
pair being mounted upon shafts (l, and those 
of each pair rotating in the same plane with 
the wheels of the other pair. Each shaft (l 
is mounted in boxes d', which may slide in 
channel-ways or slideways d", secured in the 
frame-work D', and, as here shown, these 
slideways do have a slightly-inclined direc 
tion, as best seen from Fig. 4. The shafts d 
are free to turn in or have applied to them 
levers or arms e, which are connected by a 
middle or center joint, e', and which form a 
pair of toggle-levers, the outer joints of which 
are upon the shafts d, and which have ap 
plied to their intermediate joint, e, an adjust 
ing-screw, e. 
The screw e' is fitted to a nut, e, which 
may be turned by a hand-wheel, e", and which 
is free to turn within a bearing formed in the 
cross-bar e, journaled at its ends e' in bear 
ings attached to the frame-work D'. By turn 
ing the nut, and hand-wheel e'e' the toggle 
levers e may be deflected more or less or 
brought more or less nearly into line, and by 
thus bringing them toward a position in line 
with each other the pairs of wheels (li are 
spread and the chains clare tightened, so that 
by this adjustment any slack which may oc 
cur in the endless chain of buckets or Scoops 
D through wear may be taken up and the 
chain maintained taut, 
The employment of two wheels, (l, rotating 
in the same plane, or two pairs of such wheels 
rotating in the same planes, is important, be 
cause then the endless chain of buckets or 
scoops D in passing between the wheels di 
will be caused to travel in a substantially 
straightline, as shown in Fig. 4, and will there 
fore fill with a shovel or scoop-like action, 
which is distinguished from the ordinary ele 
vators having severally an endless chain of 
buckets or scoops in which the buckets or 
scoops describe simply an are of a circle in 
passing through the material to fill them 
selves. 
From the screen Df the coal is delivered to 
a horizontal conveyer, F, (best shown in Fig. 
1) and which consists of a trough, f, wherein 
operates a reversible endless chain or series 
of scrapers, f'. These scrapers f', moved in 
the trough f by the chain which operates 
them, carries along the coal in the desired di 
rection. This endless chain of scrapers f' 
passes around guiding and Supporting wheels 
f', and also around a supporting and operat 
ing wheel, f', and the supporting or operating 
wheel finay be turned in either direction by 
means of bevel-pinions f" upon a shaft, f, 
and which may either of them be shifted into 
gear with a bevel-wheel, f', upon the shaft of 
the supporting and operating wheel f. I 
also provide a lower and approximately hori 
Zontal conveyer, F, and a corresponding up 
per and approximately horizontal conveyer, 
F', and I have likewise shown an inclined 
conveyer or elevator, F, whereby coal or like 
material may be raised from the level of the 
lower conveyer, F, to the upper conveyer, F. 
The horizontal and inclined conveyers F 
F'F may each consist of a trough, f, rectan 
gular in transverse section, and in which is 
arranged a reversible endless series or chain 
of Scrapers, f', and the conveyers FF' each 
have tWO substantially-parallel runs or arms, 
as best shown in Figs. 1 and 3, said runs in 
tercommunicating by means of transverse 
runs, as shown in Fig. 1. 
Along one side of the series of bins 3 are a 
corresponding series of elevated pockets, G, 
as best shown in Fig. 3, and along the side of 
the Series of bins and series of pockets is a 
driveway, G', along which carts H may be 
driven to be filled. The pockets G have de 
livery-outlets g, which are on a level suffi 
ciently high so that coal may pass from them 
directly into the cart II, as shown in Fig. 3. 
If desired, the coal may be loaded from the 
pockets into cars. 
The lower horizontal con 
Veyer, F, has both its runs or arms extending 
beneath the bins B, as best shown in Fig. 3, 
and in each bin are gates or valves h, which 
control openings into the conveyer-troughf 
extending beneath. These gates or valves h. 
may be controlled by screwsh', leading to the 
outside of the bins, as is best shown in Fig. 
3, or by any other suitable means, and by 
Opening any one of these gates or valves h. 
the Withdrawal of coal or other material from 
the bin B controlled by it by the operation of 
the conveyer F may be produced. 
The upper conveyer, F, has one run or arm 
extending over the series of bins adjacent to 
one side of the series, and has the other run 
Ol' arm extending over the pockets, and from 
this other run or arm delivery chutes or out 
lets g deliver coal into any one of the pock 
etSG. I have shown in the bottom of the 
trough f of the upper conveyer, F, openings 
or traps g, which may be controlled by valves 
or shutters, and any one of these openings g 
may be opened, according as it is desired to 
deliver coalinto any particular one of the bins 
B or the pockets G. 
The reversible chain of scrapers f' of the 
lower and upper conveyers, FF', are mounted 
upon supporting and guiding wheels f, and 
each of said two endless chains of scrapers 
passes around a supporting and operating 
wheel, f. Upon the shaft f', before described, 
are reversed bevel-pinions f", which may be 
shifted, so as to either one of them engage 
with the larger bevel-wheel, f', upon the shaft 
of the supporting and operating wheel f of 
the lower conveyer, F, and by shifting these 
bevel-pinions f the shaft f by rotating al 
Ways in one direction may impart motion in 
either direction, as desired, to the endless 
chain of scrapers f' of the lower conveyer, F. 
The endless chain of scraper's f' of the up 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
I I5 
125 
I 30 
897,679 
8 
O 
per conveyer, F, is mounted upon supporting 
and guiding wheels f', and also upon a support 
ing and driving wheel, f, and upon the same 
shaft with said supporting and driving wheel 
5 f is a large bevel-wheel, f", with which may 
be engaged one or the other of two bevel-pin 
ions, f', upon a shaft, f. f is a main driv 
ing-shaft to which motion may be imparted 
by a belt passing over a pulley, f', and which 
by bevel-gearing f' imparts motion to the 
shaft f, and thus operates the upper horizon 
tal conveyer, F. f designates a counter 
shaft connected by bevel-gearing f with the 
shaft f, and which may be driven by a belt 
passing around pulley's fillpon the shafts 
f's f11. 
The inclined conveyer or elevator F in 
cludes a trough, f, of rectangular section and 
an endless chain of scrapers, f', which are 
supported by wheels f* at the top and bottom 
of the run, as best shown in Fig. 2, and mo 
tion is imparted to this endless chain of scrap 
ers f' of the inclined conveyer F by bevel 
gearing fl' from the shaft. f. 
From the above description it will be un 
derstood that the direction of movement of 
the endless chain of scrapers f' of either the 
lower horizontal conveyer, F, or the upper 
horizontal conveyer, F, may be reversed, as 
may be desired. In the operation of my ap 
paratus the coal which is delivered by the 
screen Di to the first horizontal conveyer, F, 
is by said conveyer delivered to the inclined 
conveyer or elevator F, and by the latter is 
raised and delivered to the upper horizontal 
conveyer, F. Meanwhile the endless chain 
of scrapers f' of the horizontal conveyer F' 
are being moved to carry the coal through 
either of the two runs or arms of that con 
veyer, according as it may be desired to de 
liver the coal to one of the bins B or "to one 
of the pockets G. 
If it is desired to deliver to any one of the 
bins, the endless chain of scrapers f' of the up 
per conveyer, F, is moved in the direction to 
carry the coal down that run or arm of the 
conveyer, and the delivery-opening g in the 
bottom of the trough f, which corresponds to 
the desired bin is opened, so that the coal 
may be delivered thereinto. If, on the con 
trary, it is desired to deliver coal by the up 
per conveyer, F, into any one of the pockets 
G, the endless chain of scrapers f' is moved 
in a reverse direction and the outlet-chute 
g' of the desired pocket G is opened, and then 
that pocket will receive the coal. 
By means of the lower horizontal conveyer, 
F, coal may be taken at any time from any 
one of the bins and delivered at the foot of 
the inclined conveyer or elevator F, and then 
raised by that inclined conveyer or elevator 
and delivered to the upper horizontal con 
wever, F, which will, as before described, de 
liver the coal into any one of the bins other 
than that from which it was taken or into any 
one of the pockets G. 
y 
9 
45 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the frame-work, 
as D', having slideways, as d", of an endless 
chain of buckets, wheels journaled in boxes 
fitting said slideways and arranged to rotate 
in the same plane, whereby the chain of buck 
ets is caused to travel in a straight line in 
passing between the said wheels, and a pair 
of toggle-levers having their end joints con 
nected with the wheel-journals, and an ad 
justing-screw connected with the middle joint 
of the toggle-levers for adjusting them to vary 
the distance of the wheels apart, substantially 
as herein described. 
2. An apparatus for handling and distrib 
uting granular or lumpy substances, compris 
ing a series of bins and a series of pockets 
each having a delivery-outlet, and a substan 
tially-horizontal endless chain conveyer hav 
ing two parallel intercommunicating runs ex 
tending one over the series of bins and the 
other over the series of pockets, the said con 
veyer being reversible and its runs having 
delivery-outlets, those of One run being over 
the Several bins and those of the other run 
being over the several pockets, substantially 
as herein described. 
3. An apparatus for handling and distrib 
ulting granular or lumpy Substances, compris 
ing a series of bins and a series of pockets, 
each having a delivery-outlet, and a substan 
tially-horizontal endless chain conveyer hav 
ing tWO intercommunicating runs extending 
One Over the Series of bins and the other ovel 
the series of pockets, the said conveyer be 
ing reversible and its runs having delivery 
outlets, those of one run being over the several 
bins and those of the other run being over the 
several pockets, and an inclined conveyer for 
receiving the material and delivering it to 
the said horizontal conveyer, to be thereby 
delivered to any one of the bins or to any one 
of the pockets, substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
4. An apparatus comprising a series of bins 
arranged side by side and a series of ele 
Vated pockets similarly arranged, and each 
having a delivery-outlet, a lower substantially 
horizontal conveyer having two runs for tak 
ing material from any bin and reversible in 
its direction of movement, an upper substan 
tially-horizontal conveyer having two runs or 
arms, respectively, over the bins and pockets, 
also reversible in its direction of movement, 
and having outlet-openings, those of one run 
being into the bins and those of the other run 
into the pockets, and an inclined conveyer 
into which material is delivered by the lower 
conveyer, and by the inclined conveyer de 
livered to the upper conveyer, substantially 
as herein described. 
EDGAR. J. WOOD. 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
HENRY J. NICBRIDE, 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
I o5 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397779.txt	(No Model,) 
T. J. CHRISTY. 
FOLDING BED. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 397,779, 
 
Patented Feb. 12, 1889, 
Azzezzzzzzz/ 
227 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
T, J, CHRISTY. 
FOLDING BED 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 397,779, 
 
Patented Feb. 12, 1889. 
s NR s 
3 
s 
Z7zVezzzzzz 5.2% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS J. CIIRISTY, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO THE ECONOMY 
FOLDING BED COMPANY, OF EAST ST. LOUIS, ILLINOIS. 
FOLDING B ED 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 397,779, dated February 12, 1889. 
A 
Application filed April 23, 1888, Serial No, 27,560, (No model.) 
To all willon, it may conce7n 
Beit known that I, THOMAS J. CHRISTY, of 
St. Louis, Missouri, have made a new and use 
ful Improvement in Folding Beds, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
The novelty in the present, instance consists 
in the construction of the several parts and in 
the combination of the same, all substantially 
as presently set forth and claimed, aided by 
a reference to the annexed drawings, making 
part of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective showing 
the improved bed folded into an upright po 
sition: Fig. 2, a view in perspective showing 
the bed in an upright position, but present 
ing the opposite side to that of Fig. 1: Fig. 3, 
a View in perspective showing the bed un 
folded into a horizontal position, as when used 
as a bed; Fig. 4, a view in perspective show 
ing one of the four irons used, respectively, 
at the corners of the bed-frame for uniting 
the side and end rails and for supporting the 
bed; Fig. 5, a view in perspective showing 
the parts of the bed-iron detached from each 
other; Fig. 6, a plan of a corner of the bed 
frame, including the end rail of the bed; Fig. 
7, a vertical section on the line 77 of Fig. 8, 
showing the lower (when folded) portion of 
the bed-frame and its support; and Fig. 8, a 
vertical section on the line 88 of Fig. 7. 
The views are upon various scales. 
The same letters of reference denote the 
same parts. 
AB, Figs. I and 2, represent the legs, which 
furnish the pivotal support for the upper por 
tion of the structure. The bed-frame C, sav 
ing as it may be modified or supplemented by 
the improvement under consideration, is of a 
familiar form, consisting, mainly, of the end 
rails, c c', the side rails, cc, and the botton 
c. When the bed-frame is in an upright po 
sition, the bottom c becomes the front of the 
Structure, and it may be variously shaped and 
As represented in Fig. 1, it is 
Ornamented. 
paneled at c, and, if desired, the panels may 
be occupied by mirrors. 
To steady the bed-frame in either of its po 
sitions, the following means are adopted: 
to confine the 6o 
passed through a perforation in the leg Band 
| into a perforation, c', in the end rail of the 
bed-frame. To insure the bed-frame in up 
turning it from Swinging too far, the legs AB 
are each provided with a stop, E, Figs. 1, 3, and 5 5 
| 7, against which the bed-frame strikes when 
brought into its proper upright position. The 
pivots upon which the bed-frame Swings are 
shown at F. They are suitably constructed 
with head flanges or washers f 
bed-frame longitudinally to the legs AB; but 
to efficiently steady the structure when the 
bed-frame is upturned, and at the same time 
obviate the need of a frame to inclose the bed 
frame, the bed-frame is extended to form or 65 
is provided with a projection, c, Figs. 3 and 8, 
which, when the bed-frame is upturned, comes 
snugly between the legs A, B and a lip, e. 
The bed-frame and leg are thus, for the time 
being, locked endlwise together at two points- 7o 
at the point of the pivot and at the lower cor 
ner of the bed-frame. The lip e is conven 
iently made in one piece with the stop E. 
When it is desired to use the Structure as a 
bed, the pin D is withdrawn from its position 75 
in the bed-frame, and then the bed-frame is 
turned upon its pivots F in the reverse direc 
tion to that in which it was turned in folding 
it and brought into the position of Fig. 3. 
The legs A B cannot now be relied upon as 8o 
the sole support of the bed-frame, especially 
in View of the fact that the bed-frame is usu 
ally not pivoted at its center to the legs but 
nearer to its side. 
of the horizontal part g and the leg-shaped 
ends g'g'. It is hinged at g to the side rail. 
cat the upper edge, c, thereof, substantially 
as shown, and it is thereby adapted to be 
turned upward and downward, as indicated by 9o 
its two positions shown, respectively, in Figs, 
1 and 3. The head-piece in its position of Fig. 
I serves to ornament the structure, and to 
that end it may have any desirable configura 
tion consistent with the other office which it 95 
performs; but for useful purposes the head. 
piece forms, in conjunction with the side rail 
c, a mantel suitable for supporting such 
things as are commonly placed upon mantels. 
G represents the head-piece. It is composed 85 
O When the bed-frame is upturned, a pin, D, is It may also have a mirror, g, inserted in it, Ioo 
s f 
s 
TO 
25 
45 
397,779 
55 
jointed. The parts :' are slotted at k to re 
ceive the projections l of the bed, by which 
means the bed is upheld. The slots k per 
mit of the loed projections l being moved in 
them, by which means the bed-bottom, when 
it is desired to stretch it, can be drawn in the 
direction of the end jails. This in turn is ac 
complished by the bolts L' and nuts l', such 
as shown in Figs. 5, 1, and 2, the bolts passing 
through the end rail, f', of the bed and the 
end rail of the bed-frame. 
I am aware that a swinging and folding bed 
is not broadly new, and that, such beds hav 
ing hinged sides or paneled bottom are not 
(W. 
I claim 
1. The combination of the legs A B and the 
bed-frame C, made as described, and having 
bottom c', said legs having stops E, provided 
with the lips e, and said bed-frame being piv 
oted at F to said legs and having the projec 
tions c, which engage the stops E between the 
lips e and the sides of the leg, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. In a swinging and ?olding bed, the bed 
frame C, having the end rails perforated at c', 
combined with the perforated legs A and B, 
having stops E, and pin D, adapted to engage 
the perforation in the leg and bed to hold the 
bed in an unfolded position, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination of the bed-frame, the 
irons K, each of said irons made in two parts, 
k k', the part k fastened to end rail and 
the part ki' to the side rail, the tenon of one 
part secured in the mortise of the other by 
bolt c, and the bed-bottom, said bottom hav 
ing projections, which engage in slots in said 
irons, whereby said bottom is adjustably con 
nected with the end rails of said frame, sub- 85 
- - - 
75 
- 
- 
stantially as described. 
. - 
THOMAS J. CHRISTY. 
. . . 
Witnesses: 
C. D. MOODY, 
F. G. STEWAR.T. 
When the head-piece is turned down, as in 
Fig. 3, it becomes a leg to uphold the bed 
frame, the hinges (f' becoming the means for 
connecting the two parts. The pin I) is again 
5 brought into use by passing it through the leg 
B and into another perforation, c', in the end 
rail, c'. An analogous means may also be elm 
ployed for fixing the head-piece in its two 
positions respectively. H represents a pin 
I O which may be passed through the end gy' and 
into the bed-frame, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 
3, and for that purpose the end f' is perfo 
rated at two points, gg, to suit the different 
positions of the end g' with relation to the 
15 bed-frame. The pin I? in its position of Fig. 
3 also materially supplements the hinges g 
in connecting the head-piece G with the bed 
frame as a support thereof. 
The bed-frame is provided with a head 
2O board, I, and a foot-board, J, which are hinged 
thereto to enable them to be opened out into 
an upright position, Fig. 3, or to be folded 
parallel with the bed-frame, as in Fig. 2. 
When unfolded, the button may serve to 
25 support them. When folded, they may be 
used to keep the bedclothes from falling out 
of the bed-frame, and, to secure the head and 
foot boards so that they may not unfold when 
the bed-frame is folded, one of them-say the 
3O head-board-is provided with an arm or bar,j, 
which may be turned around on its pivot j', 
Fig. 2, and made to engage with the catchi 
lupon the foot-board, as shown. 
The bed C is supported in the bed-frame by 
35 means of the irons IX, Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 5. These 
irons are in two parts, k and k". The part I: 
is fastened to the end rail of the bed-frame, 
and the part ki' to the side rail. The tenon k? 
of the part k is received in the mortise k of 
go the part k, and then by inserting a bolt, k, 
the parts kie' are united, and the end rail and 
siderail at that corner of the bed-frame there 
by secured together. 
A similar iron is used 
at each corner of the bed-frame. By remov 
45 ing the bolts l: the bed-frame may be dis 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397879.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. TERMAN, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
, 
PORTABLE CORN THRASHER AND SEPARATOR, 
No. 397,879, 
 
Patented Feb. 12, 1889. 
ET 
(No Model.) 
- 
J. W., TERMAN. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
PORTABLE CORN THRASHER AND SEPARATOR, 
No. 397,879, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1889, 
 
scat 
. 
y 
a 
S 
aS 
ae 
EAE E 
is is E 
TN 
aS 
- 
Sea 
a 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. TERMAN, OF NEW SHARON, ASSIGNOR TO DEERE, WELLS & CO., 
OF COUNCIL BLUFFS, IOWA. 
PORTABLE CORN THRASHER AND SEPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 397,879, dated February 12, 1889. 
Application filed March 1, 1888, 
Serial No. 265,884, (No model.) 
- 
I5 the accompanying drawings, in which 
F is a metal concave connected with the 55 
and discharged at the side of the machine 
To aid, uh O7), it 7ay concern. 
through an opening toward which the said 
Be it known that I, JAMES W. TERMAN, a 
citizen of the United States of America, and a 
Concave slopes. 
resident of New Sharon, in the county of Ma 
frame A in such a manner that its lower edge 
5 haska and State of Iowa, have invented an 
will extend parallel with the toothed periphery 
Improved Portable Corn Thrasher and Sepa 
of the tapering cylinder B. The concave has 
rator, of which the following is a specification. 
integral projections at its rear side and op 
My invention consists in the construction 
posite ends, to which segments Fare fixed in 6o 
and combination of a tapering cylinder, an 
such a manner that they can be adjustably con 
Io adjustable concave, a vibrating screen, a fan 
nected with the frame A, and the ends of the 
case and rotary fan, and a conveyer with a 
concave thereby independently adjusted rela 
tractable carriage having openings in the side 
tive to the cylindler, as required, to facilitate 
walls of its body, as hereinafter set forth, 
the Work contemplated and to adapt the ma- 65 
pointed out in my claim, and illustrated in 
chine for the different conditions of corn that 
is to be shelled thereby. By thus arranging 
Figure 1 is a side view; Fig. 2, a top view 
and combining a concave With a tapering cyl 
from which parts are broken a way: Fig. 3, a 
indier it will incline toward one side of the 
vertical and longitudinal sectional view; and 
machine, serve as a guard to prevent coarse 7o 
Fig. 4 is a transverse vertical sectional view 
matter from getting under the cylinder, and 
2O taken through a line in rear of the cylinder 
also serve as a chute or inclined plane for 
and conveye'. 
carrying off the coarse matter. 
A represents a carriage-frame, made of Wood 
G is a screen so constructed and suspended 
and iron and adapted in form and construc 
relative to the cylinder B and a fan that the 75 
tion for supporting the operative mechanism. 
corn and small particles of cobs and fodder 
25 Wood or sheet metal is fixed to the sides of 
will fall thereon, to be separated thereby. 
the frame to produce tight Walls, and at the 
4 is a rock-shaft in bearings fixed to the 
ends of the cylinder openings are formed in 
frame A and extending parallel with the cyl 
these walls, as required, So that in operating 
inder B. It is connected with the suspended 8o 
the cylinder the corn and fodder will be de 
screen G, by means of short arms h, in such a 
3o livered at the side of the machine, while the 
manner that a vibratory motion, will be im 
dirt and dust will be blown out at the end by 
parted to the screen by means of the rock 
the fan. 
shaft. 2 is a rotating shaft in parallel position 85 
B is a cylinder mounted in bearings fixed 
to the opposite sides of the central portion of 
with the shaft 1 and connected therewith 
35 the frame A in such a manner that it will ex 
by means of a rod, h, that has a bridle at 
tend horizontally. It is preferably about four 
its end to engage an eccentric on the shaft in 
(4) feet long, sixteen (16) inches in diameter 
such a manner that a rock motion Will be im 
at one end and nine (9) inches at the other 
pated to the shaft 1 by the continuous ro- 9o 
end. Rows of teeth project from its surface, 
tary motion of the shaft 2, as required, to 
to and the rows are preferably spiral and more 
shake the screen. The shaft 2 is connected 
numerous at the larger portion than at the 
with the driving mechanism by means of a 
smaller. It is operated by means of a drive 
chain and chain-wheels, or in any suitable 
wheel, C, fixed on its end and connected with 
a horse-power or other suitable motor in a 
Way. J is a rotary fan in parallel position with 
the cylinder and connected there with by 
D is a cover fixed to the frame A, to extend 
means of drive-wheels and a chain. 
over the cylinder and concave in such a man 
J is a fan-case fixed to the frame A in such 
ner that it will, in combination. With the cyl 
a manner that its top Will extend under the too 
inder and concave, produce a chute through 
cylinder and serve as an inclined plane to 
So which the corn stalks and husks will be forced 
laterally relative to the complete machine direct the falling corn upon the vibrating 
45 common Way. 
- 
95 
 
897,879 
veye's have been combined in corn-shellers 
to convey the corn and cobs longitudinally 
relative to the machine; but my manner of 
arranging and combining a tapering cylin 
del', a concave, a screen, a fan, and a con 
Veyer so that by their joint action the husks 
and stalks and cobs Will be kept from the 
screen and the cobs and stalks conveyed 
laterally with the husks to be utilized as pre 
pared feed, and the corn shelled from the cobs 
also conveyed laterally relative to the machine, 
while the dirt is discharged at the end of the 
machine, is new and greatly advantageous in 
preparing a corn crop for market and in hand 
ling and utilizing the cobs and husks and 
stallks for feed. 
I claim as my invention 
A carriage-frame having fixed sides and 
openings in the sides, a tapering toothed cyl 
inder connected with said frame and the 
openings in said sides, all adjustable concave, 
and a fixed cover, arranged and combined to 
operate in the manner set forth, for the pur 
poses stated. 
Witnesses: 
AMES W. TERMAN. 
E. H. SHEAFE, 
S, D. WADSWORTH. 
45 
SO 
5 
TO 
screen, and its lower edge connects with a con 
yeyer, so as to allow wind from the fan to pass 
ovel and also under the suspended vibrating 
screen. The wall of the fan-case is prefera 
bly made of sheet metal. 
IS is a conveye-case, made of sheet metal 
and fixed to the frame A immediately under 
the screen and cylinder. 
L is a conveyer-shaft, provided with a spiral 
flange in a common way and connected with 
the cylindel'-shaft in such a manner that it 
will be operated thereby, as required, to con 
vey the corn from one end of the case to the 
other, so that it can drop into a bag or other 
receptacle, or be elevated by automatic mech 
anism into a Wagon, car, or wherever desired. 
3 is a shaft designed to be connected with 
the driving-shaft in such a manner that it 
can be utilized to operate feeding mechan 
ism combined with the large end of the cyl 
inder'. 
From the foregoing description of the con 
struction and function of each element the 
unitary actions of all the parts and the prac 
tical operation of the complete machine will 
be readily understood by persons familiar 
With corn-shellers. 
I am aware that cylinders, concaves, and coln 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US397979.txt	(No Model.) 
J. GRAY. 
HOT AIR FURNACE, 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-tillographer. Washingior, O.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH GRAY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
HOT AR FU IR NAC E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 397,979, dated February 19, 1889. 
Application filed March 7, 1888, Serial No. 266,458, (No model.) 
5 
O 
?? 
To a// ?/i?? it ??? ?????7?: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH GRAY, a citizen 
of the United States of America, and a resi 
dent of the city of Chicago, in the county of 
Cook and State of Illinios, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Hot-Air 
Furnaces, of which the following is a specifi 
tion. 
My invention relates to that class of fur 
naces which are designed to heat a current of 
air as it passes through them, and my object 
is to increase the heating-surface in contact 
With the air as much as possible without ma 
tentially obstructing either the air-passages or 
the Smoke-flues. Many furnaces have been 
constructed with this end in view, the greater 
number of Wyhich leave the Smoke-flue as di 
rect as practicable and lead the air through 
passages projecting into the combustion 
chambel'. These passages have been com 
monly made in the form of annular rings, 
usually concentric with the fire-pot and com 
bustion-chamber. The great disadvantage 
attendant upon this construction is the lack 
of free communication between the portion 
of the combustion-chamber within and that 
Without this ring. 
Mly invention consists in dividling up these 
annular rings into a series of pockets or sepa 
rate passages, leaving room enough between 
them to allow the hot gases to circulate freely 
between and around the same, and combining 
with said pockets a deflector, preferably lo 
cated directly over the fire-pot and obstruct 
ing the passage leading directly upward from 
the fire, thereby compelling the hot gases to 
pass out between and around the pockets be 
fore escaping up the chimney. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section of a furnace, showing my 
improvements, taken in a plane passing 
through its center; and Fig. 2 is a horizontal 
section taken in the line acor of Fig. 1. 
I have chosen as a means of illustrating my 
invention a portable furnace of the style and 
shape in common use. It is hardly necessary 
to state that, they can be as well applied to 
any other form of furnace. In this furnace 
A is the fire-pot; B, the ash-pit; b, the open 
ing into the ash-pit; c, the feed-door, and F 
the Smoke-pipe. 
The combustion-chamber C is centrally lo 
cated in the furnace, and is inclosed by a 
wall, c', which, with the exterior casing of the 
furnace D, forms an annular air-passage, g, 55 
opening into the cold-air chamber G, con 
nected in the usual manner with the cold-air 
supply. Over the combustion - chamber is 
placed the cap or cover E, fitted tightly upon 
the wall c' by means of the flangee. This cap 
is provided with a series of perforations or 
holes, e'e', and into these holes are fitted a 
number of tube-like pockets, I I, extending 
downward almost to the bottom of the COm 
bustion-chamber and containing partitions 
i, projecting downward into the same, divid 
ing the interior into two passages or flues, g 
and g, connecting at the bottom. 
Between the upper ends of the partitions il 
and the outer casing, D, of the furnace is fit 
ted an annular plate or partition, J, having 
at its inner edge a downwardly-projecting 
flange, j, which rests upon the cover E of the 
combustion-chamber, and is fitted closely to 
the upper edge of the partitions it, and at its 
outer edge a projecting fange, j, forming a 
tight joint with the outer casing, D, of the 
furnace. It will be noticed that this parti 
tion. J cuts off all communication between the 
outer air-space, g, and the hot-air chamber A, 
except by means of the pockets I I through 
the flues g' and g. 
In the central portion of the combustion 
chamber is placed the deflector L, preferably 
closing the central fille surrounded by the 
pockets II, and extending out a short dis 
tance between these pockets. The exact lo 
cation of this deflector will be governed by 
the style of furnace used, and any form of de 
flector may be employed which is adapted to 
the furnace; but I prefer the cone-shaped de 
flector shown in the drawings placed with the 
apex pointing upward, inasmuch as this forml 
is easily cleaned by tapping it with a hammer. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a hot-air furnace, the cominimation of 
the combustion-chambel' with a Series of pock 
ets projecting into the same through which 
the air circulates, and with a deflector located 
above the fire-pot and between these pockets to 
85 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
2 5 
35 
45 
2 
897,979 
5 
2. In a hot-air furnace, a series of pockets ing off up the chimney, as and for the pur- 15 
throw the heated products of combustion out above said deflector, whereby the greater pol'- 
between and around the same before passing tion of the heated gases from the fire Will be 
off up the chimney, as and for the purpose made to pass outward between said pockets 
stated. 
and back again between the same before pass 
through which the air circulates projecting pose stated. 
downward into the combustion-chamber, in 
combination with a deflector located above 
Witnesses: 
the fire-pot and between these pockets, and an 
Io escape-fue for the smoke centrally located 
JOSEPH GRAY. 
HARRY BITNER, 
MALCOLM HILL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398079.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 398,079, 
N. PETRY. 
SAW. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1889. 
 
Cf. 
le 
AORNEYS, 
NPETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NICHOLAS PETRY, OF ROCKPORT, MISSOURI. 
SAW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 898,079, dated February 19, 1889. 
Application filed July 29, 1887, Serial No. 245,650, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern, 
Be it known that I, NICHOLAS PETRY, of 
Rockport, in the county of Atchison and 
State of Missouri, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Tenon, Gaining, and 
Crosscut Saws, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
saw for Sawing tenons and gains whereby the 
time and labor of measuring the same is 
avoided. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction and arrangement of parts, as here 
inafter fully described, and pointed out in 
the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which similar letters of reference 
indicate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view partly in section. 
Figs. 3 and 4 
are detail views. 
A is the frame, consisting of the parts A' 
A'. The part A'is composed of theside piece, 
(t, and the end pieces, b b', which are pro 
vided with the slots c c' adjacent to the side : 
piece, Cl, and with the grooves did on their 
inner faces. The part A* is composed of a 
flanged bar, C', and is provided with the up 
wardly-projecting lugs a near its ends, hav 
ing laterally-projecting flanges a, which fit 
in the grooves d d" of the end pieces of the 
part A', and are held adjustable therein by 
means hereinafter described. 
BB' are the saw heads or holders, which are 
provided with a series of grooves or slits, b, 
for the reception of the saw-blades C C, 
which are secured therein by bolts or rods 
which pass through the side piece, a, of the 
part A and through the said heads and saws, 
as clearly shown in the drawings. 
The heads B B' are provided with shanks 
b', which fit in the slots c c' of the end pieces, 
b b'. The shank of the head B is rigidly se 
cured in the slot c and projects through the 
end piece b, and is provided with the handle 
D. 
The shank b of the head B' fits loosely 
in the slot c' of the end piece l', and consists 
of two projecting bars or rods having their 
outer ends screw-threaded at b, upon which 
are thumb-nuts b, by means of which the 
tension of the saws are regulated. This ten 
sion device for the saws also serves to hold 
the part. A firmly to the part A', for when the 
saws are under tension the end pieces, bib', 
of the part A will be drawn together, So as to 
bind the part A* firmly in place. 
E is a gage-guide bar for regulating the 
depth of cut, and thereby the length of tenon. 
The guide-bar E is provided with two down 
wardly-projecting shanks or saws, d, which 
pass through apertures in the flange of the 
bara of the part A, and are adjustably held 
therein by set-screws di. The rods or shanks 
of the guide-bar may be graduated to facili 
tate the adjustment of the said guide-bar. 
The crosscut - saw blades will be provided 
with elongated apertures or slots in the ends, 
as shown in Fig. 4, and one-half of the rip 
saws will have slots. By means of these slots 
one saw can be dropped down below the 
other, to permit tenons having one side longer 
than the other to be cut, or both saws can be 
dropped, so as to cut dados or tenon cut-offs. 
When both saws are lowered, the frame forms 
a gage, limiting the depth of cut. The saws 
can be secured in any of the grooves or slits 
of the heads B B, so that tenons of various 
widths can be cut. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
1. A saw-frame consisting of the parts A 
A, the 
part A' being provided with grooved 
end pieces, b b', and the part A* provided 
with flanges a, fitting in the grooves of the 
said end pieces, and saw-heads carried by the 
end pieces of the part A', one of the said 
heads being movable and the other station 
ary, substantially as herein shown and de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with a saw-frame con 
sisting of the part A', provided with the 
grooved and slotted end pieces, b b', and the 
part A*, provided with the flanges a, of the 
saw-heads B B', the head B being rigidly Se 
cured to the end piece b of the part A', and 
the head B' having the shank fitting loosely 
in the slot of the end piece b', and provided 
with means for movably supporting it in the 
said slot, whereby provision is made for ad- loo 
90. 
95 
75 
TO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
398,079 
3. The combination, with the frame A, com- ing apertures in one of its side bars, of the 15 
justing the tension of the saws and locking ly on the said ends, substantially as herein 
the parts of the frame togethel, substantially shown and described. 
as herein shown and described. 
4. The combination, with a saw-frame hay 
posed of the parts A' A' and having slotted gage E. provided with shanks adjustably sel 
J cnid pieces, l l ', of the saw-heads 3 B', pro- cured in the apertures of the said side bar, 
vided with a series of slits, ly, the head B be- substantially as herein shown and described. 
ing rigidly secured to the end piece l, and 
the head Bhaving its shank fitting loosely in 
to the slot of the end piece ly' and provided 
with the screw-threaded ends land the nuts 
NIC) (), AS PETRY. 
- 
Witnesses: 
PHIL I. THOMIPSON. 
JAS. A. NEWELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398179.txt	(No Model.) 
D, M. & T. H. PARRY, r 
WEHICLE SEAT, 
No. 398,179, 
Patented Feb. 19, 1889. 
 
 
  
22 A 
32 
2 
 
4. 
As NN 
2S3 
 
A 24; 7. 
 
 
 
 
Af 
am/ 
 
W. 
2. 
16 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID M. PARRY AND THOMAS H. PARRY, OF INDIAN APOLIS, INDIANA. 
WEHC E a SEA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 398,179, dated February 19, 1889. 
Application filed November 17, 1888, Serial No. 291,163, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To ?till it'll OT, it 7) (ty conce77. 
Be it known that we, DAVID M. PARRY and 
THOMAS H. PARRY, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Indianapolis, in the county 
of Marion and State of Indiana, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Ve 
hicle-Seats; and we do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
seats for two-wheeled vehicles-such as sul 
kies, road-carts, &c.-the object of the inven 
tion being to produce a cheap, durable, and 
light seat for two-wheeled vehicles that will 
have resilient qualities, whereby it will read 
ily yield to weight caused by sudden jars in 
riding, to thereby obviate the disagreeable re 
bounds experienced with seats of ordinary 
construction. 
Another object of the invention is to so con 
struct and arrange the parts of the seat that 
should any part become broken it may be 
quickly removed and replaced without, lis 
turbing the other parts. 
The invention consists in certain details of 
construction and in the special combination 
and arrangement of the several parts of the 
seat, substantially as hereinafter described, 
and set forth in the claims. 
Figure 1 represents a front, view of a seat 
slightly inclined, constructed in accordance 
with our invention; Fig. 2, enlarged sectional 
detail showing the manner in which the slats 
are secured in the frame; Fig. 3, an enlarged 
perspective detail showing a modified con 
struction of frame and arrangement of slats. 
Fig. 4 is a modification. 
The Seat, which is secured to the vehicle in 
any usual Ol' Suitable manner, consists, essen 
tially, of the front and back rails, A B, and 
end rails, C. D., (which constitute the open 
frame,) the guard-rail E, its supports e', and 
the slats F. The rails which constitute the 
frame will be secured together in the usual 
manner by dovetailing or otherwise. 
The front, and back rails, A B, will have 
their inner faces grooved longitudinally their 
entire length, as shown at a, to receive the 
ends of the slats F, which slats will be slipped 
in preferably from the ends of said rails be 
fore the frame is put together. They may be 
inserted after the frame is put together, if de 
sired, which will be hereinafter described. 
The guard-rail E will be of usual construc 
tion and arrangement. 
The slats F will be made, preferably, of thin 
strips of elastic Wood-such as hickory-but 
may, if desired, be made from resilient metal, 
such as spring-steel. These slats, as shown 
in the drawings, Figs. I and 2, will preferably 
be secured in the groove (t", by nails or other 
wise, with their adjacent edges remote from 
each other, spacing-blocks G being preferably 
secured in the groove a', by gluing or other 
wise, between the slats to prevent lateral or 
side movement of the same, as shown in Fig. 
3. The slats F might, however, be loosely 
seated at their ends in the grooves (t', it being 
preferable, however, to secure them at their 
ends by pins or nails, as shown in Figs. I and 
2, to prevent, accidental displacement, an elon 
gated hole being preferably formed in the end 
of the slat, through which the pin or nail ex 
tends to allow a slight longitudinal movement 
of the slat. 
By withdrawing the pin or nail, if either is 
used, and bending a slat at its center it may 
be quickly taken out, which is advantageous, 
as new slats may be quickly secured in place 
When the old ones become damaged. 
The construction forms a light and very 
easy-riding seat, especially for two-wheeled 
vehicles, which are subjected to greater jars 
than heavy vehicles, and is less liable to be 
come broken than a seat having a solid wooden 
bottom, as solid-bottom seats are apt to crack 
and break from warping caused by expansion 
and swelling. 
The seats herein described will not Warp, 
as sufficient play is allowed in the groove a? 
for expansion and SWelling, 
In Fig. 3 the slats are shown as resting upon 
a flange formed on the front and back rails 
of the seat, and as secured from the top, the 
inner edges of the said rails being rabbeted 
to receive each a retaining-strip, b', which is 
set into said rabbet and secured to the rails 
near their ends, the said strip having alter 
nate notched and projected portions to fit 
around the slats F. If desired, this retain 
O 
25 
45 
So 
9 O 
95 
TOO 
898,179 
ing-strip l' may be of elastic material, mov 
ably secured at One end, whereby the slats as 
they are depressed at their centers will strike 
at their ends against the retaining-strips, 
which will yield somewhat, thus relieving the 
slats of Some strain and forming a seat-bot 
tom that will yield longitudinally as well as 
transversely. 
We claim 
1. In a vehicle-seat, the combination of the 
front and back rails, A B, grooved longitudi 
nally on their inner faces their entire length, 
the end rails, C D, secured thereto, the resil 
ient slats F, secured at their ends in said 
grooves, and the spacing-blocks G, interposed 
between said slats at their ends, substantially 
as shown as ad described. 
5 
O 
15 
2. The combination, in a vehicle-seat, of the 
longitudinally-grooved front and back rails, 
A B, the end rails, CD, the guard-rail E, se 
cured thereto, the resilient slats F, having 
their ends secured in the groove in the front 
and back rails by nails or otherwise, and the 
spacing-blocks G, interposed between the slats 
at their ends and secured in the grooves 
aforesaid in the manner and for the purpose 
substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
DAVID M. PARRY. 
THOMAS H. PARERY. 
Witnesses: 
W. O. SHIREY, 
N. E. C. WHITNEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398279.txt	(No Model.) 
E POWELL, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, l, 
APPARATUS FOR, DELIVERING GOODS IN EXCHANGE FOR, COIN. 
No. 398,279. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1889. 
32.2, 
&a. s. 35' 
N. Perers, photo-Lithographer, Washingto., C. 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
E. POWELL. 
APPARATUS FOR DELIVERING GOODS IN EXCHANGE FOR, COIN, 
No. 398,279. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1889. 
ss 
 
/221-22227 
62.-- 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
APPARATUS FOR DELIVERING GOODS IN EXCHANGE FOR COIN. 
E. POWELL. 
No. 398,279 R 
XXXXXXYYXXXXX 
a 
SS 
rYXxx TINYy N 
A. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1889. 
yOSA can Nyir 
-- 
- 
  
 
N 
ws 
WZZZZZZZ 
2 % 
N. 
WN N N 
 
N N 
N 
W22zeurer, 
Azavezzazz. 
N Sys 
N 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, washington, l.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD POWELL, OF NEWTOWN, COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY, ENGLAND. 
APPARATUS FOR DELIVE RING GOODS IN EXCHANGE FOR CON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 398,279, dated February 19, 1889. 
Application filed September 8, 1888, Serial No. 284,92l, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, EDWARD PoWELL, 
Solicitor, a subject of the Queen of Great Brit 
ain, residing at 44 Broad Street, Newtown, in 
the county of Montgomery, England, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Apparatus for Delivering Goods in Ex 
change for Coin, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
I place the articles to be delivered in radial 
Compartments or cells arranged around the 
circumference of a horizontal disk or ring, 
constituting a good carrier, to which a step 
by-step motion of rotation is given, so as to 
bring each compartment in turn opposite to 
a hole in a casing of the apparatus. The ar 
ticles to be delivered always rest on the hori 
ZOntal disk, and are not liable to be damaged 
by its rotation, whether they fit the compart 
ments Or Ilot. The step-by-step movement is 
given to the horizontal disk by an operating 
arm capable of turning about the same verti 
cal axis as the disk. This operating-arm is 
not rigidly fixed to the disk; but a coin 
dropped into the appalatus forms a key con 
necting the two together. The disk can then 
be moved one step, when the coin falls away, 
severing the connection, so that the disk can 
not be moved the next step until another coin 
has been inserted. The mechanism for effect 
ing this is as follows: The division-plates be 
tween the compartments form stops, a radial 
spring-bolt entering between one pair of them, 
So that normally the disk cannot be turned. 
The coin enters the apparatus by a vertical slot 
and remains in a vertical position when inside, 
being carried by a hook or coin-holder on the 
handle, and being prevented from moving 
forward or backward by the hook and by a 
circular guide concentric with the casing. 
When the operating-arm is now turned, the 
coin comes against and forces back a curved 
lever, which operates the bolt, withdrawing it, 
leaving the horizontal disk free to be turned, 
and at the same time protruding anotherbolt. 
As the operating-arm continues to be turned, 
the last-named bolt comes against the next 
stop, and the movement of the operating-arm 
now causes the horizontal disk to revolve. The 
coin shortly after this clears the lever, actuat 
ing the first-named bolt, and the latter, being 
forced outward by its spring, enters the next 
space between the stops, and thereby prevents 
the disk from being turned more than one 
step. When the operating - arm has been 
turned so that the mouth of the compartment 
is opposite to the opening, the coin comes to 
the end of the circular guide, and, being no 
longer supported by it, drops out of the hook 
or holder on the handle and falls into a recep 
tacle. The handle may then be turned back 
to its original position. If a coin of too small 
size is put into the apparatus, it drops, not be 
ing retained as above described. 
The apparatus can also be arranged so that 
the horizontal disk can only be turned by the 
operating-arm when two or other fixed num 
ber of coins are inserted. In this case the 
hook on the handle is extended downward, so 
as to allow all the coins inserted except the 
last to fall below the lever operating the bolts 
The concentric guide is also extended down 
ward, so that the coins are all held by same 
and the hook, the first coin being held in the 
hook and it and the subsequently-inserted 
coins supporting those coming after, and the 
last coin being opposite the level operating 
the bolts, as in the case of a single coin. The 
apparatus works and the coins fall as before. 
It is evident that the apparatus may be 
made in the form of a column having a num 
ber of horizontal plates with receptacles. 
In order that my said invention may be 
more fully understood and readily carried into 
effect, I will proceed to describe the drawings 
hereunto annexed. 
The drawings show an apparatus having 
several horizontal plates with receptacles. 
Figure 1 is a a horizontal section. Fig. 2 is 
a front elevation with part of the casing re 
moved. Fig. 3 is a section of the same on the 
line ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 shows a modification in 
which the apparatus is actuated by means of 
two or more coins. 
The casing A is preferably cylindrical, as 
shown, the outer and inner sides being Sepa 
rated to constitute the annular passage-way 
for the goods-carrier. The goods-carrier is 
formed of an annular plate or bottom piece, 
a, carrying division plates or partitions b'b', 
&c., which divide the goods-carrier into a se 
ries of compartments. The goods-carrier is 
- 
7 O 
75 
So 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
398,279 
O 
25 
35 
5 carrier is located. 
mounted on a frame, A', which is pivoted at 
a? and adapted to revolve thereon. The cas 
ing A is provided with an offset, A, within 
which the mechanism for revolving the goods 
An operating-arm, C, pivoted at ?t' and ex 
tending through the goods-carrier, is provided 
With a handle, c, which projects through a 
slot, C, in the offset A. The handle c is piv 
oted at c to the outer end of the operating 
arm C for a purpose hereinafter described. 
To the outer end of the operating-arm C is 
secured a hooked plate or coin-holder, e, al 
ranged within the offset A and normally op 
posite slots d in the casing, through which 
coins are delivered. A plate, f, rigidly se 
cured to the casing between the coin-holder 
and the goods-carrier, is adapted, in conjunc 
tion with the coin-holder e, to support the coin 
and forms a gage determining the size of the 
opening between the hooked holder and the 
plate, so that coin smaller than the predeter 
mined size will not lodge in the coin-holder 
and the apparatus will not be operated. A 
locking-lever, g, pivoted at g' to the operat 
ing-arm C, engages at one end with a sliding 
bolt, h, normally held in engagement with 
one of the partitions l'b', or whichever one 
happens to be near it, and prevents the ro 
tation or movement of the goods - carrier. 
The opposite end of the leverg is provided 
with an inclined projection, g, with which 
the coin e' in the coin-holder engages when 
it is positively moved to operate the appa 
ratus. A sliding bolt, j, carried by the op 
erating-arm C, is normally held away from 
the goods-carrier by a coiled spring, j. This 
bolt is provided on its under sides with a stud 
or pin, j', which engages with the flange or 
short rail f' on the plate f, when the operat 
ing-arm is moved to bring the studi into con 
tact with the rail. A spring-acting pawl or 
dog, O, engages with the partition b', &c., on 
the goods - carrier, and prevents backward 
movement thereof, but readily yields to the 
forward movement of the apparatus. When 
the operating-arm C is moved in the direction 
indicated by the arrow, if a coin, e', has been 
inserted in the coin-holder, as indicated in 
Fig. 1, the coin will come in contact with the 
end g of the locking-lever g and will turn it 
on its pivot g', thereby withdrawing the bolt 
h from engagement with the goods-carrier. 
At the same time the bolt) will be pushed 
for Ward, the leverg being arranged to engage 
with the bolt, as indicated. IBy the continued 
movement of the operating-arm the bolt.j 
will engage with the partition or division 
plate of the goods-carrier and will move it 
forward. As soon as the bolti has reached 
the flange or rail f' on the plate f and the 
coin has passed the end of the leverg the pin 
f' engages with the flange f', so that the re 
turn of the bolt is prevented until the oper 
ating-arm has been brought back. After the 
coin has been deposited from its holder the 
locking-arm g is freed and the bolt shoots 
 
- 
Casling. 
forward and engages with a partition of the 
goods-carrier to prevent further movement. 
Preferably, however, the boltj and flangef 
are so arranged that at the extreme end of 
the forward movement of the operating-arm 
the pini' passes over the end of the flange f, 
and the bolti is returned to its original posi 
tion by the spring j. 
At the end of the for 
ward movement of the operating-arm and 
coin-carrier the coin is delivered to an in 
clined plate, k, which permits it to pass to a 
suitable receptacle. 
The above-described apparatus may be clu 
plicated, as indicated. 
In order to expel the article from the recep 
tacle in the goods-carrier, I employ a pusher, 
l, arranged within the casing A and opposite 
the delivering-opening A of the case. The 
pusher l is normally held withdrawn from the 
goods-carrier by a spring, n, secured to the 
A level, n, pivoted to the casing at 
n", engages at its inner end, n, with the 
pusher. Its short bent outer end, m, carries 
a pin, n, which engages with the forked arm 
c', rigidly connected with the handle c of the 
operating-lever C. 
The handle c and its forked arm c' are piv 
oted to the operating-arm at c, and are free 
to turn thereon when not locked by the stud 
'', located on the casing opposite the opening 
C', and by a stud secured to the lever m at its 
pivot m'. When the handle is freed, it is 
turned relative to the operating-arm C after 
engagement with the stud n on the end of 
the lever n, thereby turning the lever in on 
its pivot na', and causing the pusher l to en 
ter the compartment of the goods-carrier in 
line with the opening A, thus expelling the 
article contained within said compartment. 
When the handle c' is released, the spring in 
withdraws the pusher from the compartment, 
returns the lever in to its original position, 
and the operating-arm C is returned by the 
spring q, secured to the casing and operating 
arm, as indicated in Fig, 1. 
It will be understood that a single operat 
ing-arm may be used, as shown in the draw 
ings, for all the disks, in which case a single 
casing running from top to bottom of the ap 
paratus contains all the hooks and bolts i. 
which revolve with it and the operating-arm; 
but the mechanism corresponding to those 
disks only which have received coins will be 
actuated, and those disks alone will be turned, 
for where no coin has been introduced there 
is nothing to actuate the level's 1, and there 
fore the bolts will not be withdrawn nor the 
bolti protruded. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that I wish it to be understood 
that I do not claim generally automatic de 
livery-boxes, in which the articles to be deliv 
ered are placed in compartments or cells ar 
langed around the circumference of a hori 
Zontal disk or ring; but 
75 
95 
IOO 
II O 
TIS 
I 25 
398,279 
. 
3 
in before set forth, of the casing, the goods 
carrier contained therein and having parti 
tions or plates dividing it into a series of com 
partments, the operating-arm, the locking-le 
yer carried by said arm, a coin-holder secured 
to the operating-arm, the guide-plate secured 
to the casing opposite the coin-holder, the pawl 
or dog engaging with the goods-carrier to pre 
vent its backward movement, and the spring 
for drawing back the operating-arm to its 
original position. 
5. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the casing, the goods 
carrier having partitions dividing it into a se 
lies of compartments, the pusher, the operat 
ing-arm, and connections between the pusher 
and the operating-arm, whereby the pusher is 
forced into a compartment for the delivery of 
goods from the carrier. 
6. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the casing, the goods 
carrier, the operating-arm, the lever in, en 
gaging with the pusher, and the forked arm 
on the handle c, pivoted to the operating-arm 
and engaging with the lever n. 
EDWARD POWELL. 
Both of 17 Gracechurch Street, London, E. C. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER J. SKERTEN, 
PERCY K. WOODWARD, 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the casing, the goods 
carrier having partitions or dividing plates, 
the operating-arm, the coin-holder carried 
thereby, and the locking mechanism operated 
by a coin in the coin-holder to engage with 
the goods-carrier and move it forward with 
the operating-arm. 
2. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the casing, the goods 
carrier having partitions dividing it into com 
partments, the operating-arm, the locking-le 
Ver carried thereby, the bolts operated by said 
lever and engaging at times to prevent the 
forward movement of the goods-carrier and at 
times to move it forward, and the coin-holder 
carried by the operating-arm and bringing the 
coin into engagement with the locking-lever 
to operate it, 
8. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the casing, the goods 
carrier contained therein and having the parti 
tions or plates dividing it into a series of com 
partments, the operating-arm, the locking-le 
wer carried by said arm, the coin-holder se 
cured to the Operating-arm, and the guide 
plate secured to the casing opposite the coin 
4. The combination, substantially as here 
holder. 
- 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398379.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
H. COLE, 
MANURE AND URINE CONDUIT. 
No. 398,379, 
Patented Feb. 26, 1889. 
eV 
- 
(S 
 
 
(S 
NS N. 
W 
7) 
II 
C. : 
WITNESSES 
in a 27.32-24c - 
2.6% - 
 
INVENTOR, 
--e-y Ogles - 
* CO 8... y (e. 
-4 to ATTORNEys, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY COLE, OF DEN VER, COLOR ADO. 
MANURE AND UR NE CONDU T. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 398,879, dated February 26, 1889. 
Application filed February 11, 1888, Serial No. 263,744 (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To att, whon, it innay concern. 
Be it known that I, HENRY COLE, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Denver, in 
the county of Arapahoe and State of Colorado, 
have invented a new and useful Manure and 
Urine Conduit, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 show's my improved device at 
tached to a horse ready for use. Fig. 2 is a 
top View of the device. Fig. 3 is a back view 
of the tipper portion of the device as it would 
appear at a point directly behind a horse. 
FigS. 4, 5, and 6 are views of a spring attached 
to the lower end of the device. 
The object of my device is to afford a means 
of conducting the residuum or droppings fall 
ing from a horse or other animal into a suit 
able receptacle placed in position behind the 
horse, as shown in the drawings, and herein 
after more fully explained. 
In the drawings, C is the main portion of 
the device, which I will term the chute. 
Chute C is open at the top its entire length 
and is constructed of any flexible material, so 
that when attached to the horse it will hang 
about as shown in Fig. 1. 
T is a steel spring attached to the lower 
end of chute C in any suitable manner. 
Spring T is provided with rings or eyes R. R. 
When in use, Spring T assumes the shape 
shown in Fig. 4, this shape being retained by 
the Snap IX, which is attached to rings or eyes 
R. R. When the Snap is removed, the spring 
Opens, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6, when the 
chute may be easily cleaned. 
P is a metal strap shaped to fit the horse, 
as shown, and attached to chute Cat its larger 
and upper extremity. 
L. L are two straps, one on each side, com 
posed of leather or any suitable flexible ma 
terial, attached to metal strap P, as shown. 
EE are two elastic straps, one on each side, 
attached to parts L, as shown. Straps E are 
attached by any suitable means to a proper 
appendage for holding the device in position 
upon the horse. The lower end of the chute 
is Supported and held at any suitable dis 
tance above the barn-floor by means of a strap, 
S, attached by means of a suitable snap, K, 
to spring R at one extremity, the other ex 
tremity being attached to the ceiling of the 
barn or any other suitable support. 
D is a receptacle for the material discharged 
from chute C. 
In the use of Iny improved device the same 
is attached to the horse, substantially as shown 
in the drawings. It may be constructed of 
any suitable material which will allow it to 
perform the function herein described-for 
instance, Strap E must be elastic, so as to al 
low proper expansion of the device, for obvious 
reasons. Strap P must be rigid, so that the 
device may fit properly and retain its shape. 
Chute C must be flexible, so as to allow the 
horse to lie down and move about in the stall 
with ease. 
I have shown a suitable means of attaching 
the device to the horse; but I do not confine 
myself to the means shown, as other Suitable 
means may be used. 
I will now mention some of the advantages 
of my improved device, which demonstrate 
its usefulness and importance. By virtue of 
the mechanism heretofore described the ma 
nure and, in case of females, the urine are 
conducted into and retained by a suitable re 
ceptacle, and thus kept separate from the 
bedding in the animals stall. Thus there is 
no Waste of bedding, and the horse is kept 
dry and free from contact with the filth which 
necessarily accumulates and becomes mingled 
with the bedding upon which he lies where 
my device is not used. I will also mention 
the great saving of labor resulting from the 
advantage just named, by reason of the 
small quantity of manure to be removed from 
the barn, the freedom of the animal from filth 
and stains, and the Small amount of labor re 
quired in cleaning him, and also the small 
quantity of bedding required to be placed in 
the stal. 
I am aware of the German patent to Buzer 
for manure-catching apparatus, dated Octo 
ber 31, 1883, No. 24,628, provided with a chute 
consisting of a pipe or hose closed except at 
its extremities; hence I do not claim my chute 
broadly; but 
What I do claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a manure and urine conduit, a chute, 
C, open at the top its entire length and pro 
95 
O 
25 
3 5 
45 
So 
 
398,879 
vided with a spring, T, containing eyes R at vided with a suitable hook, IX, said strap being 
its discharge-opening, in combination with a connected with a spring, T, at one extremity 
strap, S, attached at one extremity to said and with a suitable support above at the other 
spring by means of a hook, IX, and at the other extremity, and two straps, E, one on each side, 15 
5 extremity to the ceiling of the barn, substan- forming part of a suitable means of attach 
tially as shown and (lescribed, and for the ment, substantially as shown and described, 
purpose set forth. 
2. A manure and urine conduit consisting 
of a chute, C, open at the top its entire length 
Io and provided with a spring, T, containing 
eyes R, in combination with a strap, S, pro- 
M. A. MCLAUGHLIN, 
GEO. L. HODGES. 
HENRY COLE. 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In presence of - 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398479.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 398,479. 
 
J. W. WEAWER 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 26, 1839, 
33 1. 
 
 
  
 
 
ge, 
t? i 
o 
: a2 
25. 
2SS 
?o 
SS 
A S N 
xx; 
(N2S5: 
A. 
2. 
 
 
 
Y N 
 
S 
al 
N 
  
J. W. WEAWER, 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 26, 1889. 
e 
Z27, 6 
 
| 
E. 
22a-2/ZZ27 
(No Model.) 
No. 398,479, 
24, 
2 
Szzzzzz 22 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN WARREN WEAVER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 398,479, dated February 26, 1889. 
Application filed June 8, 1888, Serial No. 276,531 (No model.) 
O 
To all willon, it inctly coice; i. 
Beit known that I, JOHN WARREN WEAVER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Fire-Escapes, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention consists in providing a fire. 
escape comprising a folding ladder and fold 
ing balconies so constructed and arranged 
that when folded they will occupy but little 
space and not detract from or injure the gen 
eral appearance of a building to which my 
improvement may be applied. 
The invention further consists in novel 
means for operating the same, whereby on re 
leasing a certain retaining device the ladder 
will automatically open, and in so doing ex 
ert the force requisite for opening the folded 
balconies and quickly and positively put the 
escape in a position ready for use. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of a house having my im 
provement applied thereto and shown ready 
fol' use. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the 
Same on the line aca, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a side 
view of the ladder shown partly in section. 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section of the ladder. 
Fig. 5 is a detail showing a certain releasing 
device. Fig. 6 is a plan of the balcony and 
ladder in an open position. Fig. 7 is a side 
view of the balcony shown in a closed posi 
tion. Fig. S is a detail of a certain stop-mo 
tion. Figs, 3 to 8, inclusive, are drawn on an 
enlarged Scale, and similar letters refer to 
similar parts throughout the several figures. 
A designates a folding ladder consisting of 
two side portions, A' A', each made semicir 
cular in cross-section of plate metal. They 
are connected by I-shape bars A, serving as 
rungs, the cross-pieces C. of which are pivoted 
in blocks C1, secured to the interior of said 
sides. The side A' is secured to the wall of a 
building by bolts a or other suitable means, 
and preferably has Washers ca' interposed be 
tween it and the wall. This side A' has at 
its lower end a cylindrical part, A, and at its 
upper end a cover-plate, A, secured thereto, 
The side A* has its lower end beveled to fit a 
corresponding beveled part of the side A' 
when closed, and has secured to its upper end 
an eye-piece, A', to which is secured a cable, 
A, which passes over a pulley, A, mounted 
to turn in the side A', from whence it passes 
Over a pulley, A', mounted on a stud Secured 
to the wall inside the building. From this 
pulley the cable extends downward within a 
recess-such as used for inside shuttel's-and 
terminates at the first floor, or it may be ex 
tended to the ground-floor, if desired. This 
cable is provided with an eye-piece, A", for 
engagement with a retaining device, B, con 
sisting of a hook, b, fulcrumed on a stud, b, 
secured to the wall and having an arm, b, of 
sufficient weight to hold the hook uppermost. 
A link, l, connects the arm b to a lever, l, 
fulcrumed at b to a pin secured to the wall, 
and a wire, b", is attached to the lever at to 
and extends upwardly through the various 
floors. To this wire is attached at each floor 
cords or chains b passing over pulleys band 
provided with pull-pieces t". By pulling any 
of these cords b, the hook b is disengaged 
from the eye A10 of the cable, the latter being 
held by a pin, t', and the side A* of the lad 
der is then free to fall by gravity until the 
end thereof rests on the ground, when the 
rungs. A will be horizontal. At a suitable 
distance from the ground the sides A' A' of 
the ladder are provided with projecting spikes 
a, to prevent persons climbing the said ladder 
when closed. 
C designates folding balconies arranged on 
the exterior of the windows, and shown more 
fully in Figs. 6, 7, and 8, in which d d' are 
window-sashes, d sash-Weight boxes, d re 
cesses inside the Windows-such as are used 
for inside shutters-d' the wall, and d the 
window-sill. 
E is the platform of the balcony, here 
shown as consisting of two sections, E' EP, 
made of ordinary lattice-bars. The inner side 
of the section E is hinged to a rod, e, extend 
ing across the window near the Sill and mount 
ed to turn in bearing-pieces e', secured to the 
wall. The opposite side of the section E is 
hinged to a rod, e, to which also is hinged 
the section E, and the opposite side of which 
section is hinged to a rod, e. A front bal 
cony-railing, E, is hinged to the rod e. 
f is a lever rigidly secured to the rode and 
pivotally connected to the rod e. 
f' is another lever rigidly secured to the 
rode and having its free end attached to the 
3o 
35 
7 O 
75 
OC) 
45 
 
g 
898,479 
IC) 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
spikes on a part of their exterior surfaces, Sub 
When the latter is raised by the 
cable A'. 
stantially as specified. 
f' are 
opening of the ladder, the levers f 
3. In a fire - escape, a ladder constructed 
turned sufficiently to lower the rod e and 
substantially as described, having rungs con 
with it the two sections of the platform. 
sisting of I-shape bal's pivotally connected at 
When the two sections E E have become 
their extremities to independent blocks se 
level, further motion is prevented by a stop, 
e', abutting against another stop, e, as shown 
cured to the side portions of said ladder, sub 
stantially as described. 
in Fig. 8. 
4. In a fire-escape, a folding balcony adapted 
(1 g are chains secured to the Wall and con 
9 nected to the rod e, for supporting the plat 
to fold into a position above a window-sill, a 
support for said platform when open, and an 
form when open. 
inwardly-extending lever for opening the bal 
His an extension device to form a side railing 
cony, rigidly secured to the hinge-rod e, and 
to the platform,and also to maintain the front 
having its free end attached to the cable A", 
railing in a perpendicular position. It consists 
whereby the weight of the movable side A 
of a slotted post, h, mounted loosely on the rod 
of the ladder serves on opening to operate and 
e and having its upper end secured to the Wall. open the balcony, substantially as described. 
h' is a slotted post mounted loosely on the 
5. In a fire-escape, a folding balcony com 
rode and connected to the upper end of the 
prising a platform in two or more sections 
railing E. 
adapted to fold within a window-opening and 
his a bar having one end mounted loosely 
remain closed, the said platform having hinge 
on the rode and its other end pivoted to a bar, 
joints provided with the stop portions et and 
h, which is loosely mounted on the rod e. 
e to retain the same flatwise when open, 
his a bar having a stud to slide in the slot 
chains for supporting the balcony when open, 
ted bar h. and its other end pivoted to a bar, 
a lever rigidly connected to the rode and piv 
h', having a stud to slide in the slotted posth'. 
otally connected to the hinge-rod e, an in 
The bars hh and h h are respectively 
Wardly-extending lever for opening the bal 
pivoted together midway of their length. 
cony, rigidly secured to the rode and having 
By my improvement I provide a ladder ex 
its free end secured to a suitable retaining 
tending to the ground and which cannot be 
device, substantially as described. 
used by burglars by reason of its cylindrical 
6. In a fire-escape, a folding balcony com 
form and projecting spike portion, and the 
prising a platform in two or more sections 
ladder affords facilities for the use of firemen 
hinged together and adapted to fold into a 
in case of fire. In order to fold the escape 
after being opened, I may arrange a Windlass 
vertical position above a window-sill, chains 
for supporting said platform, a front railing 
near the lower end of the cable, to which a 
hinged to said platform, the extension device 
cord may be secured and passed round the 
H, comprising the upright slotted posts h h' 
said windlass. I may also, in lieu of the 
and intermediate bars, h' . 
It h, a leverse 
lever f', extend the lever f rearwardly 
cured to the rod cl and pivotally connected to 
through a notch in the window-frame to which 
the rod (l, another lever secured to the rod (l, 
the cable may be attached. I may also dis 
and having its free end attached to the cable 
pense with the lever f and secure the plat 
A", whereby the Weight of the movable side 
form rigid to the rod e. 
of the ladder serves on opening to operate 
Having now described my invention, what I 
and open the balconies, substantially as speci 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
fied. 
Patent, is 
7. In a fire-escape, the combination of the 
1. In a fire-escape, a folding ladder coln 
folding ladder A, having a chain secured to 
prising two side portions, one side being Se 
the movable side and passing over a pulley 
cured to a dwelling and having a cylindrical 
mounted in the stationary side, and from 
bottom portion and a cover Secured to its up 
thence extending downwardly through a se 
per end, the other side having its bottom end 
lies of floors, the retaining device B, oper 
beveled to fit a corresponding part in the 
ated by a wire extending vertically through 
fixed side when closed, connecting-bal's piv 
a series of floor's and provided with suitable 
otally connected to blocks secured to the in 
actuating means, the folding balconies C, hav 
terior of said sides, a pulley mounted on the 
ing their operating-levers attached to the ca 
upper end of the fixed side, and an eye-piece 
ble A, whereby the release of the said cable 
secured to the movable side, through which a 
will cause the ladder to automatically open, 
cable is secured and passed over the said pull 
and in so doing exert the requisite force for 
ley and secured to a suitable retaining de 
opening the balconies simultaneously there 
vice, whereby the release of the cable will 
with, substantially as described. 
cause the ladder to automatically open by 
gravity, substantially as specified. 
2. In a fire-escape, a folding ladder con 
structed substantially as described, having 
its side portions provided with projecting 
JOIN WARREN WEAVER. 
W. CROWE, 
GEO. WADMAN. 
Witnesses: 
75 
90 
95 
TOC 
Ti o 
IIS 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398580.txt	(No Model,) 
G. W. BUMG ARNER, 
MACHINE FOR THREADING PIPES, 
No. 398,580, AF 
Figyed Feb. 26, 1889. 
 
ZZ 
M 
2z 
J 
A 
, 
b% 
Kal is size 
, 
E. 
v: ' || - 
kye, 
-VVTNESGS - 
(a /.4% 
 
- INNVENTR 
62. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. BUMGARNER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
MACHINE FOR THREADING PPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Lettrs Patent No. 398,580, dated February 26, 1889. 
Application filed November 19, 1888, Serial No. 291,254, (No Inodel.) 
To all ttf-Oin it inctly concern. 
Beit known that I, GEORGEW, BUMGARNER, 
of the city of Baltimore and State of Maryland. 
have invented certain Improvementsin Screw 
Thread-Cutting Machines, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved de 
vice specially adapted for cutting threads on 
pipes situated near walls, in ditches, or in 
other nearly inaccessible positions that will 
not admit of the employment of the ordinary 
contrivances for that purpose, as will herein 
after fully appear. 
In the further description of the said inven 
tion which follows reference is made to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part here 
of, and in which 
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal section of 
the improved thread-cutter; and Fig. 2, a face 
view of the lower portion of the same, looking 
in the direction indicated by the arrow, Fig.1. 
Fig. 3 is a section of Fig. 1, taken on the dot 
ted linea ar. 
Fig. 4 is a sectional view of Fig. 
1, taken on the dotted line / 1. 
Fig. 5 is a 
similar view to Fig. 2, except that a plate, 
Fig. 6 is 
hereinafter described, is removed. 
a detail of the invention, the part represented 
being shown in section, the line of which is 
taken through Z2, Fig. 5. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similal' 
parts in all the figures. 
In the said drawings. A is a sleeve, formed 
of the two parts a and b-the former interiorly 
threaded and the atter threaded on the out 
side and adapted to fit within the former. The 
outer end of the section C is enlarged, so as to 
form a polygonal chamber, (, in which is se 
cured the died for cutting the thread. This 
die, if of the largest size intended to be used 
in the tool, is placed directly in the chamber 
c; but if it is of a size smaller a bushing-box, 
e, is used, and the die placed in the box, as 
shown in the drawings. Il case a still smaller 
die is to be used, a box having thicker side 
walls is substituted for the one shown, so as 
to further reduce the size of the chamber. It 
is obvious that if all the dies for cutting screws 
were of the same exterior size a bushing-box 
Would not be necessary, or one bushing would 
suffice. The die is held in its chamber by 
means of a plate, B, secured to the face of the 
sleeve by the screws f. A portion of the sleeve 
is provided with ratchet-teeth 9, which are of 
the same angle with reference to radial lines 
on both sides, as shown in Fig. 3. Around 
the sleeve C1, and directly over the ratchet 
teeth 9 thereon, is loosely placed a handle, C, 
the lower end of which is formed of two plates, 
h and i. The plate h rests on a collari, while 
the one fits around the sleeve proper, and 
the handle is retained in position by means 
of a collar, l, which is fastened to the sleeve 
through the medium of the screws l. 
ID is a pawl having two prongs, in and 27, 
either one of which is adapted to engage with 
the ratchet-teeth g. This pawl is pivoted 
within the handle C on a pin, O. 
E is a spring formed of a piece of Wire, which 
is inserted through the lug p on the upper end 
of the pawl, and twisted so as to form a fork, 
as shown in Fig. 3. 
F is a shaft, which passes through the plate 
h, and is held to the inner surface of the plate 
i by means of a screw, q, as shown in Fig. 1. 
This shaft, at a point between the tines of the 
fork E, is turned to a small size, and the pin. 
thus produced is eccentric with reference to 
the remaining portion, so as to form a crank 
pin, '. (See Figs. 1 and 3.) 
The shaft F is fitted with a handle, G, on the 
outside of the plate h, whereby the crank-pin 
may be thrown to one side or to the other, and 
thereby make either of the prongs of the pawl 
D the active one. This change in the position 
of the pawl is to admit of the reversal of the 
movement of the sleeve with a common move 
ment of the handle C. The pins S and t limit 
the movement of the handle G in either direc 
tion. 
At the rear end of the sleeve A, and in the 
section thereof denoted by l, is inserted a cen 
tering-ring, H, provided at its bottom with the 
inner teeth, all, and at its upper side with a 
toothed jaw, I, which enters the said center 
ing-ring through a slot, v'. The movement of 
this jaw to clamp the pipe or rod to be threaded 
is effected by means of the threaded bar J, 
which passes through a threaded boss, K, and 
rests in a recess in the jaw. The portion of 
the bar J in the jaw is reduced in size and 
grooved, and a pin, 7t', forms the fastening 
device which holds the jaw to the said bar, 
75 
So 
po 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
45 
So 
 
c 
398,580 
and at the same time permits the rotation of 
the same independently of the jaw. 
At the top of the handle C is a socket, in 
which a rod, L, is screwed to give the desired 
leverage. 
When it is desired to thread the end of a 
pipe or bolt, the two sections of the sleeve A 
are unscrewed or extended, when the device 
is placed on the pipe and clamped thereon by 
means of the jaw, as before described, with its 
ends in contact with the inner face of the die. 
The pawl is then placed in the position shown 
in Fig. 3 and the handle vibrated. In this 
movement the die is forced on the pipe or 
bolt and the thread cut. The object of the 
screw-connection between the two sections of 
the sleeve is to enforce the passage of the die 
over the pipe, and after that is accomplished 
to relieve the die of a portion of its work. 
When a thread is cut a sufficient distance on 
a pipe, the handle G is reversed in position, 
which has the effect of changing the position of 
the pawl and bringing the prong in in contact 
With the ratchet-teeth instead of the one 9. 
The vibration of the handle L is then resumed 
and the die unscrewed from the pipe. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a Screw-thread-cutting tool, the sleeve 
A, formed of the outer and inner threaded 
sections, a, and b, the former having a polygo 
nal chamber, c, at its end adapted to hold a 
die and ratchet-teeth on its circumference, 
and the latter provided with the centering 
ring II, having inner teeth, and the movable 
toothed jaw I, with a threaded bar to adjust it 
within the said ring, combined with a handle, 
C, formed of the plates handi, double pawl D, 
forked spring E, and shaft F, having the crank 
pin situated between the tines of the Said 
forked spring, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. In combination with the sleeve-section C, 
having the circumferential teethg, the handle 
C, having the double pawl D, forked Spring 
E, shaft F, with the crank-pin situated be 
tween the tines of the said forked spring, and 
handle G, whereby the said crank-pin is moved 
and the position of the pawl changed, Substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. As means for holding a pipe within the 
section b of the sleeve A, the interiorly-toothed 
ring H, movable toothed jaw I, and the 
threaded bar J, all combined substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
GEORGE W. BUMIGARNER. 
45 
So 
Witnesses: 
WM. T. How ARD, 
DANL. FISHER. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398680.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER WHITE, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOUTRI. 
WATER-CLOSET VALVE. 
S2ECIFICA.iiiON forming part of Letters Patent No. 398,680, dated February 26, 1889. 
Application filed March 7, 1887, Serial No. 229,933, (No model.) 
downward against the stem. H at h, and the 
valve C is thereby depressed and unseated, 
as shown in Fig. 2. The stem Jati' is made 
large enough to cover the aperture ('' in the 
"alve-seat, and it thus serves to prevent, the 
flow of the water to the outlet x until the 
pressure upon the stem .J is removed, where 
upon the Water-pressure acts to lift the stem 
J, and the Water then ?low's to the outlet K, 
as shown in Fig. 3; for, as stated, the valve C 
seats gradually, and until it is seated the Wa 
ter flows to the outlet. 
IBy making the stem. J separable from the 
stem II the cap ct, and stem J may be removed 
from the valve-chest without having to turn 
off the main, as the valve C remains seated 
against the seat c, the water-flow being thereby 
arrested. 
The present valve is of the class which is 
attached to the outside of the bowl, as shown 
in Fig. 1. With such valves trouble is expe 
Irienced from leakage at the upper end of the 
valve-chest. To obviate this a cup-leather, 
T, is attached to the stem J, between its two 
parts, which serves to fairly pack the valve 
chest at its upper end, and thus provide for 
dispensing with a diaphragm construction at 
that point and permit of the upper end of the 
stem J. Working through the chest-cap (t, as 
shown; but in case any water do as leak past 
the cup-leather L it is conducted into the 
bowl M by means of the passage N, whose in 
let is at , beneath the chest-cap (t, and ex 
tending thence into and along the tubular 
shank (t' to the point, ', where it opens into 
the rim 
The main pressure must not be allowed in 
any way to eliter the passage N or that pol 
tion of the interio of the valve-chest with 
which the passage N connects, for in such 
case leakage around the chest-cap and else 
where occurs. Even with a cup-leather turned 
as is the cup-leather I, the pressure, in case 
the passage N opens into the outlet K, causes 
the water to flow backward through the pas 
sage N and causes leakage. To this end the 
cup-leather L is turned toward the valve-seat 
c, as shown, to prevent, the Water from being 
forced past the cup-leather, and the outlet. ' 
is independent of the outlet IX. 
of the bowl. 
95 
ICC 
65 
7 5 
So 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
fo (till ti'itoiz it in City coice, it: 
Be it kilow in that I, PETER WHITE, of St. 
Louis, ; issOuri, have inade a new and useful 
I}}} provement in Water - Closet Valves, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The ill provement i'elates to the means for 
disposing of the leakage at the valve-stein end 
of the valve-chainber. 
in the annexed drawings, making part of 
this siegiication, Figure 1 is a vertical longi 
till dilial section of the improved valve, taken 
On the link: l l of Fig. 4. 
Fig. 2 is a similar 
Section, but showing the valve-stem depressed 
aid the valve open. Fig. 3 is a similar sec 
tion showing the valve-stem raised and the 
valve unseated, and Fig. 4 is a horizontal 
cross-section on the line 4 4 of Fig. 2. 
The Saihe letters of reference denote the 
S: the Dai'ts. 
The inlet through which the water enters 
the valve-chest A is at B. The valve C seats 
with the pressure against the seat c. The 
Valve at its lower end is provided with or has 
attached to it, as by means of the nut D, a 
cup-leather, E, which as the valve is opened 
and closed works in the chamber F, below the 
Valve-seat. c. 
Its function is to prevent the 
valve from closing too suddenly, the move 
linent being 'egulated by the passage of the 
Water through the groove f, downward past 
the cup-leather as the valve rises to its bear 
ing against its seat. The valve is thus bal 
anced, and the spring G acts to effect or to aid 
in effecting the seating of the valve when the 
pressure upon the valve-stem II is released, 
as shown in Fig. 1. The stem does not extend 
upward to without the valve-chest, but only 
through the valve-seat c and into the cham 
ber 1, above the valve-seat, where it is adapted 
to be operated by means of the stem J. This 
last-name? ); it is recessed ati to admit the 
upper eid of the stel II to enable the part J 
to serve as a guide for the part II as it rises 
and falls. The stem J., which is preferably 
made in two parts-an upper and a lower 
one-is extended upward to work through the 
cap C of the valve-chest and in connection 
with the seat (not shown) of the closet. When 
the seat is depressed, the stem J is pushed 
 
2 
398,680 
I claim 
1. The combination of the valve-chest hav 
ing the tubular shank a?, the passage N, and 
the cap C, with the cup-leather L and stem J, 
5 said cup-leather being turned toward the 
main valve and said passage N being wholly 
disconnected from all that portion of the con 
struction through which the main pressure 
circulates and having an outlet independent 
Io of the main outlet K, substantially, as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination of the valve-chest hav 
ing the inlet, outlet, and valve-seat, as de 
scribed, the grooved chamber, the stems HJ, 
I5 
the spring, the cup-leathers E L, and the 
valve C, said cup-leather L being turned to 
ward the valve-seat c, and said valve-chest 
having a passage, N, leading from the Space 
beneath the chest-capa, and being wholly dis 
connected from all that portion of the con 
struction through which the main pressure 
circulates, and having an outlet independent 
of the outlet IK, substantially as described. 
PETER WHITE. 
Witnesses: 
C. D. MOODY, 
FRANCIS WALLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398781.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 398,781, 
F. T. HOWEY. 
ADJUSTABLE ANGLE TROWEL, 
Patented Feb. 26, 1889, 
 
SSAS 
/24" 242 Z. 
24-624. 
AW/AW.702 
4Y 4--. 
42, 4%a - 
- 
- 
21zao?'veys 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS T. HOVEY, OF HOMER, NEW YORK. 
ADJUSTABLE ANGLE-TROWEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 398,781, dated February 26, 1889. 
Application filed December 5, 1888, Serial No. 292,730, (No model.) 
O 
To all 7th O7) it ju?tly conce71. 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS. T. IIov EY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Homer, 
in the county of Cortland and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Adjustable Angle-Trowels; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
corner-trowels, the object being to provide 
means for holding the leaves or sections of 
the trowel firmly in their adjusted positions, 
thus insuring neat corner-work. 
The invention consists in the features of 
construction hereinafter fully described, and 
pointed out in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in por 
spective of my improved trowel. Fig. 2 is a 
detail view of a portion of the device. 
A and B indicate the leaves or sections of 
the trowel jointed together, as shown. 
CC represent curved arms secured to the 
leaf A, and formed with elongated slots c. 
DD represent similar arms secured upon 
the leaf 3, and adapted to overlap the arms 
( (. 
E is the trowel-handle, formed with an open 
ing throughout its length to receive a rod or 
bolt, F. This rod is provided at one end with 
a head, f, and is screw-threaded at its other 
- 
end to receive a nut, f'. The rod F passes 
through the slots of the arms C C and D D 
through the handle E, and is secured by the 
nut, f' after the leaves of the trowel have been 
properly adjusted. 
G G represent short curved arms secured 
upon the leaf A, and slotted to receive secur 
ing-bolts. 
H II indicate similar slotted arms secured 
upon the leaf li. These short alms G. G. and 
i H II are located close to the hinge-joint of the 
trowel, and are held together by short bolts 
or screw's le. h. and nuts i. 
By the construction thus described the 
outer portion of the leaves are firmly braced 
in their adjusted position, and the rod extend 
ing through the handle relieves the curved 
arms of a considerable part of the strain. 
The short curved arms serve to brace the 
inner parts of the leaves, and thus the whole 
device is thoroughly braced and secured in 
whatever position the leaves are adjusted to. 
I claim 
A corner-trowel consisting of the hinged 
leaves, the overlapping short arms and their 
Securing-bolts and nuts, the overlapping long 
arms, the handle E, and the securing and 
strengthening headed rod, and nut f', sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRANCIS. T. l IOWEY. 
Witnesses: 
BEN S. CURRAN, Jr., 
T). S. RICHARDS, 
O 
45 
55 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398881.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 398,881 
E. J. COLBY. 
GAS REGULATOR. 
Patented Mar. 5, 1889. 
Azev. 7. 
7- 
A. 
t A 
Z, NZ 
t Z, 
H% - 
| 
M 
in 12 
NRN 
A1 
Nei Z. 
A. 
! 
Cl 
(34 
 
 
Azze5623. 
Sys vs. Q. &\s 
Gza K-6-4-c. (6-4--, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD J. COLBY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
GAS REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 398,881, dated March 5, 1889. 
Application filed May 26, 1888, Serial No, 275,198, (No model.) 
r 5 
65 
Weight, U, and above with a curved edge, V, 
To all it'? O77 it 7) (t/ conce77: 
against which the lower end of the plate \f 
Be it known that I, EDWARD J. COLBY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
l'ests. 
The use and operation of my invention are 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
as follows: When the gas enters through the 
nois, have invented a certain new and useful 
pipe A into the case C, its only means of exit 
Gas-Regulator, of which the following is a 
into the discharge-pipe B is through the aper 
specification. 
ture E. The action of the gas passing through 
My invention relates to devices for regulat 
the aperture E tends to cause the valve N to 
ing the outflow of fluids, and particularly illu 
close into such aperture, and thus limit the 
minating-gases; and its object is to provide a 
discharge. As the pressure increases in the 
convenient, cheap, and simple device where 
Supply-pipe, and thus in the case C, its tend 
by the increasing pressure of the gas in the 
ency is to cause the valve N to more nearly 
supply-pipe will act to limit the discharge 
fill the aperture E. Thus the discharge-aper 
aperture. 
ture is in inverse ratio to the pressure. The 
My invention is illustrated in the accolapa 
accuracy and sufficiency of this movement 
nying drawings, wherein Figure 1 is a vertical 
depend upon the delicate and careful adjust 
cross-section. Fig. 2 is a front view of the 
ment. In the first place the plate VI is very 
valve. Fig. 3 is a detail enlarged cross-sec 
delicately suspended by the lock-shaft. L, so 
tion of the valve. 
as to give a very free movement to such plate. 
Like parts are indicated by the same letter 
Again, the arrangement of the screw-rod H 
in all the figures. 
permits the position of the rock-shaft L to be 
A is a supply-pipe. 
very delicately adjusted. Again, the stop P 
B is a discharge-pipe: C, the valve recepta 
and screw-bolt. O permit a positive limit to 
cle or case. 
the motion to be given. 
At its lower end the 
D is a pipe within the case C, and having 
plate M is supported by the swinging stop T. 
the side aperture, E. 
This stop is very delicately suspended on the 
F is a plate adapted to slide back and forth 
shaft S, so as to move freely. Its weight or 
on top of the pipe D, resting at its sides 
resistance may be varied by moving the nut, 
against the ledge G. 
O on its lower end. Moreover, as will be seen 
H is a screw provided at one end with a 
by comparison of Figs. 1 and 3, the curved 
head, which is held in the side of the pipe D, 
knife-edge V at each inward movement of 
and at the other end with a thumb-piece, J, 
the plate MI bears against such plate at a dif 
whereby it may be turned. The screw H 
ferent position. Thus in Fig. 1 it is bearing 
passes through a screw-threaded aperture in 
against said plate at a considerable distance 
the rear end of the plate F, so that hy turn 
above the lower end of such plate, while in 
ing the screw H by means of the thumb-piece Fig. 3 the pressure of such swinging stop is 
the plate F may be reciprocated along the top 
applied to the lower end of such plate, and 
of the pipe D. 
therefore much nearer to the fulcrum of the 
At the outer extremity of the plate F are 
stop, so that the inward motion of the plate 
arms KK, in which is pivoted the rock-shaft 
MI and valve N is increasingly checked as it 
L, from which depends the plate M. This 
progresses in its motion to close the aperture E. 
plate is provided with the conically-shaped 
The shape of the valve N and its weight are 
valve N, to pass into the aperture E, and also 
such as to cause the plate MI, with the valve 
with the screw-threaded bolt O, which may 
N, to immediately retreat from the aperture 
engage the stop P to limit the inward motion 
E when the pressure is decreased, and the 
of the plate M. and valve N. 
stop P and bolt O properly adjusted will pre 
R. R. are arms upon the lower part of the 
vent the plate M from coming too near the 
pipe D, to which is pivoted the rock-shaft S. 
mouth of the aperture. 
On this latter is fixed the swinging stop T, 
Having thus described my invention, what 
provided below with an adjustable counter 
i 
95 
Ioo 
O 
15 
25 
45 
 
398,881 
a discharge-pipe having an aperture with a 
flap-valve and a swinging stop provided with 
a bearing-edge of such shape that as the flap 
valve nears the aperture the bearing-place ap 
proaches the fulcrum of the stop, and also with 
an adjustable counter-weight, so that the 
power of the stop may be varied. 
6. In a fluid-regulator, the combination of 
a discharge-pipe having an aperture with a 
flap-valve, a fixed stop, and a screw-bolt to en 
gage such stop, so that the limit of approach 
of the flap-valve to the aperture may be fixed 
at Will. 
7. In a fluid-regulator, the combination of 
a discharge-pipe having an aperture with a 
flap-valve pivoted above to an adjustable 
slide and supported below by a swinging stop. 
provided with an adjustable counter-weight 
to fix the power of the stop at will. 
". 
25 
35 
EDWARD J. COLBY. 
Witnesses: 
CORAIL. CADWALLADER, 
CELESTE P. CHAPMAN. 
5 
O 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
is as follows: 
1. In a fluid-regulator, the combination of 
a discharge-pipe having an aperture with a 
flap - valve and adjustable plate to which 
such flap-valve is pivoted, so as to vary the 
normal distance of the valve from the aper 
ture. 
2. In a fluid-regulator, the combination of 
a discharge-pipe having an aperture with a 
flap-valve pivoted above and supported be 
low by a swinging stop. 
3. In a fluid-regulator, the combination of 
a discharge-pipe having an aperture with a 
discharge-valve pivoted above and supported 
below by a swinging stop provided with a 
curved bearing-edge, so that as the flap-valve 
moves toward the aperture its bearing-point 
approaches the fulcrum of such stop. 
4. In a fluid-regulator, the combination of 
a discharge-pipe having an aperture with a 
flap-valve pivoted above and a swinging stop 
provided with an adjustable counter-weight. 
5. In a fluid-regulator, the combination of 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US398981.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. S.H.A.W. 
BOX FASTENER 
No. 398,981, 
Patented Mar, 5, 1889, 
C 
y 
Af 
f 
fig-l. 
-e- 
7 
6 
Fig.2- 
 
% 2 % 2 
VVTNF ans. 
. 
fi 
NVENT OF 
Age/44. W. 
(76.2%%- 
%.4% 2,734. 
2%-4 - 
4, 24% 
Af 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH WALTER SHAW, OF SIEELBURNE FAI, LS, MASS.ACEIUSETTS. 
BOX - FAST ENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 398,981, dated March 5, 1889. 
Application filed April 14, 1888, Serial No. 270,665. (No model.) 
- 
To all it'? on it may concern: 
Beit known that, JOSEPH WALTER SHAW, 
of Shelburne Falls, in the county of Franklin 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Box-Fasten 
er's, of which the following, taken in connec 
tion with the accompanying drawings, is a 
Specification. 
In the drawings like letters represent cor 
responding parts. 
Figure 1 represents the catch part of the 
device. Fig. 2 represents the hasp part of the 
device. Fig. 3 is a sectional view of a box, 
illustrating the manner of the application of 
the catch to the same. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple, strong, and efficient fastening to be 
applied to boxes and other articles, the at 
tachment to be made without the aid of 
Screws or any auxiliary devices. 
Referring to the drawings, the catch part A. 
of the device consists of a plain piece of 
metal preferably pointed at the lower end, as 
represented by fi At the upper end of the 
Said piece of metal Iform the catch proper, c, 
and upon the same end of the metal Iform 
one or more guards, Ct. The other part, B, of 
the catch (represented in Fig. 2) also consists 
of a piece of metal made, preferably, pointed 
at the upper end, e, and having a slot, b, in 
the lower part of the metal, which slot serves 
the purposes of a hasnin connection with the 
part c in Fig. 1. 
Fastenings or catches of various kinds have 
been employed before; but they have been 
attached to the box or other article by screws 
or nails, and most of them have also had some 
device to press the catch part back from the 
outside in order to release the hasp part. 
My present invention can be made more 
cheaply than any I have ever seen. It is de 
signed especially for light boxes in which 
there is some spring or give in the side of the 
box itself, as is the case with cigar-boxes, 
which are made of very light thin wood. 
By referring to Fig. 3 the manner of secur 
ing the said hasp and catch part and the oper 
TO 
ation of the device will be understood. 
insert the part A in the front side of the box 
, a slight mortise in the Wood is made, (repre 
sented by g.) and the part marked fin Fig.1 
is bent at right angles to the body of the 
metal, and the pointed end is then inserted 
through the side of the box from the inside, 
and the partfis afterward bent up against the 55 
outside of the box. This holds the catch part 
A firmly in place, and the stiffness of the body 
of the metal is sufficient to keep it erect, as 
represented. The part B is secured to the lid 
or cover D by inserting the end e through the 6o 
cover from the inside up to the shoulder, and 
then simply bending or pressing down so 
much of the end e as protrudes through the 
top of the cover. This secures the hasp part 
firmly to the cover. The catch part of the 65 
device A has the catch proper, c, and also the 
guard C. Now, when the cover is closed, the 
hasp part slides over the catch c and Secures 
the cover tightly upon the box. The object 
of the guarda is to prevent the hasp part from 7 O 
sliding in behind the part A, as it is manifest 
that if the bottom of the hasp part is pressed 
upon the top of the catch part A the guard C. 
will slide it forward over the catch or hook. c. 
There is sufficient spring in the metal itself 75 
to allow a slight movement of the body A in 
ward and the hooking on of the said hasp 
over the part c, the stiffness of the metal 
springing back and remaining substantially 
upright in its original position after the hasp 8o 
is hooked in. 
In order to unfastell the catch, all that is 
necessary to do is to press upon the outside of 
the box near the device and the catch part 
will be withdrawn from the hasp part, and 85 
the cover can be immediately opened. Of 
course in this device it is necessary that there 
should be more or less give or spring in the 
side of the box or other article to which the 
same is applied, as otherwise the device could go 
not be unfastened. 
In the case of boxes and other articles made 
of light wood or other material it has been 
found necessary heretofore to fasten the top 
on by brads or similar means, as there is of- 95 
ten insufficient material to properly hold any 
device which requires nails or screws to keep 
it in place. The guard c is also an important 
improvement in this class of fastenings, and 
prevents the parts from getting out of order Ioo 
or being bent or sprung in such a way as to 
be inoperative. The said guard may beformed 
45 
2 
398,981 
singly or double-that is, one prong upon each formed with a projecting hook, c, and the 
side of the catch part c--if desired. The point guarda, all combined substantially as and for 
fof the part A, also the pointe of the part B, the purposes set forth. 
may be formed of two or more points or 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
5 prongs, instead of one, if desired, these small name to this specification, in the presence of 
Variations not being departures from the two subscribing witnesses, on this 10th day 
Spirit of my invention. 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim, aid desire to secure by Letters Patent 
A fastening device consisting of a hasp, B, 
provided with the slot b, and the catch A, 
H. S. SHEPARDSON, 
J. W. TURTON. 
JOSEPH WALTER SHAW. 
I5. 
Io of the United States, is- 
Witnesses: 
of April, A.D. 1888. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399081.txt	(No Model.) 
J. V. RICE, Jr. 
ECCENTRIC WALWEGEAR 
No. 399,081, 
Patented Mar. 5, 1889. 
P. %22 
 
2%-44%, 
% (24. 
. 
AW/A/702, 
. 
/o/in Z/2ce/ 
7. 646 at 
 
f. Peters, photo-ithographer. Wassiris. . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN V. RICE, JR., OF CHESTER, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ECCENTRC VALVE-GEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 399,081, dated Riarch 5, 1889. 
Application filed October 4, 1888, Serial No. 287,191 (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all, tition, it may concer'ri. 
Be it known that, I, JOHN V. RICE Jr., a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Chester, in the county of Delaware and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Eccentric Valve 
ears; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art, to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to letters or figures of ref 
erence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
Figure J of the drawings is a representation 
of this invention and is a vertical Section. 
Fig. 2 is partly a front view and partly a cross 
Section. Figs. 3 and 4 are details. Fig. 5 is 
a modification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
single eccentric valve-gear for Steam-engines; 
and it consists in the construction and novel 
combination of parts, as hereinafter set forth. 
The invention is intended more particularly 
for use in connection with engines having 
three cylindel's. 
It is evident, however, that 
the device is adapted for use in connection 
with any engine, and the object is to provide 
a valve of simple construction that is easily 
repaired should it become broken. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
steam-chambers, and 3 the exhaust-chamber. 
C is the main driving-shaft, having the crank 
D thereon within the chalmber 13, and having 
bearings (t (t'. 
E represents the valve eccentric, having the 
integral sleeve F., fitting loosely on the main 
shaft, as shown. The outer sleeve, b, oscil 
lates on sleeve F, and is provided with the an 
nular groove (d for engaging the colla' G, 
which as the arms e extendling outwardiy 
through bearings fin the chamber-head. The 
oute ends of Said arms e are threaded and 
provided with a nut to secure the transverse 
: 
is a hand-lever fulcrulined at one end to 
the outstanding arm J. and provided at a con 
venient point with the set-bolt (1, which moves 
in the arc slot in the arm . The lever may 
So thus be secured to hold the eccentic in the 
I thereo. 
45 
2 5 
3 5 
desired position on the main shaft, the said 
lever being connected to the transverse bar 
H by the pivoted link i. 
The sleeve Fis provided with diametrically 
opposite longitudinal slots l, and a pin, n, 
preferably threaded at its upper end, passes 
through a threaded opening in the sleeve 
and through the slots l, projecting into the 
recesses 
on the main shaft. The recesses 
in on each side of the shaft cross each other 
centrally and obliquely to the direction of the 
shaft. 
In operation when the leve' is pulled out 
wardly the end of the pins in traverse the ob 
iique recesses in the shaft, which changes the 
position of the eccentric. 
It is obvious that screw-bolts operated by 
gearing, as shown in Fig. 5, may be substituted 
for the ever and its connections with the col 
lar G without materially changing my in veh 
tion. 
In order to facilitate the working of the 
parts, each pin a carries on its inner end the 
spiral form-block ', which engages the ol)- 
lique slot of the shaft, and next to this block 
is provided the straight block 2, which en 
gages the slot of the sleeve of the eccentric. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to sectile by Letters Patent, 
1S 
The eccentric valve-geal' fol' steam-engines, 
consisting of the eccentric having the sleeve 
fitting loosely on the mail shaft and having 
diametrically-opposite longitudinal slots, the 
outer sleeve having applied thereto means 
for the movement of the valve, said main 
shaft having oblique crossing recesses therein, 
and the pins or pivots connected to the outer 
sleeve and passed through the slots in the ill 
ner sleeve, and having spiral form of blocks 
engaging with the oblique crossing slots of 
the main shaft, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
3. 
JNO. V. RICE, JR. 
Witnesses: 
C. R. FERGUSON, 
M. P. CALLAN. 
55 
65 
75 
9 O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399181.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 1 
F. W. BROWN, 
DRESS FORM, 
No. 399, l8l, 
Patented Mar. 5, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
frozverzfo2 
?dg 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
F. W. BROWN, 
DRESS FORM, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 399,181, 
Patented Mar. 5, 1889. 
 
 
??, 
 
 
 
Roose 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK W. BROWN, OF CAMBRIDGEPORT, ASSIGNOR TO OLIVER 
WHYTE & Co., OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
DRESS - FORV. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 899,181, dated March 5, 1889. 
Application filed August 10, 1888, Serial No. 282,445. No model.) 
5 
1 ? 
To a// at:/u??, it ??? ?once7"?.: 
Beit known that I, FREDERICK. W. BROWN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Cambridgeport, in the county of Middlesex 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Dress-Forms; and I do declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters and 
figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of dress-form 
provided with my improvement. Fig. 2 is a 
Fig. 
horizontal section on line I l of Fig. 1. 
3 is an under side view of one of the adjust 
ers provided with notehes, as described; Fig. 
4, a similar view of the same without said 
notches. Fig. 5 is a top view of the flanged 
slide provided with projections, as set forth; 
and Fig. G, a similar view of same without 
said projections. 
The nature of my invention is defined in 
the claims hereinafter presented. 
In the drawings, Adenotes the standard for 
sustaining the dress-form, it being supported 
at its lower portion in a suitable stand, in 
which it can be raised or lowered and clamped 
in position at the desired height in the usual 
way. The standard is formed in two parts, 
r y, Coupled together at 2, each portion hav 
ing a serew-thread, or tt', formed on its upper 
part. A knob is secured to the top of the 
standard, as represented. 
B is the dress-form, made in sections, each 
section being sustained by rods C, connected 
to the form and to a head, D, applied to the 
standard, so that it can turn thereon, said 
head resting at its bottom on the coupling 2. 
E is a flange or collar fixed to the standard, 
Jelow which and so arranged as to turn on 
said standard is a head, F, which rests on a 
bearing, II, on the standard, and to said head 
is pivoted a series of adjusters, G, there being 
as many of said adjuster's as there are sec 
tions to the form. Each adjuster is repre 
sented as made of a single piece of flat strip 
metal, it having a straight portion, ct, a 
curved portion, b, fastened at its end to the 
part (, and an eye, C, the latter being pivoted, 
as shown, to the head F. The outer surface 
of the curved part l of each adjuster bean's 
against the sectional portion of the Waist 
band of the form, and is arranged between 
eam's fif projecting there from, \ pin, g, slls 
tained in the said ears.ff, serves to connect 
the said curved portion of each adjuster to 
the waistband-section. The pin (1 may, how 
ever, be dispensed with. The parts (t of each 
adjuster is provided with notches ll, as shown, 
to receive the projections i, formed on the 
flange-slide IX, in order to admit the said part 
C. to an opening, k, formed in said slide to re 
ceive it, and thus connect said adjuster to the 
slide, the projections extending over or upon 
the upper surface of the part (t, as repre 
sented. It some cases the adjuster's ( a'e ull - 
li providled with the notches h in the part (l allinql 
the slide K formed without the projections l, 
(see Figs. 5 and 6.) the pressure of the form 
section toward the standard being usually 
sufficient to keep the part C of the adjuster 
against the bottom of the opening ki in the 
side. The slide K is arranged on the standard 
so as to be moval ble vertically thereon, and is 
connected by rods in with a flanged nut, L, 
| applied to the screw-thread it of the standard. 
Rods also connect the slide K to anothel' 
slide, MI, arranged below it on the standard, 
and to the slide M, and to each section of the 
skirt-frame braces o are pivoted. The edge 
bands of each section of the skirt-form are 
connected by links pivoted thereto and to 
each other in the usual Way. 
To the screw-thread of the standard a nut, 
N, is applied, as shown, and extending down 
ward from said nut is a sleeve, p, provided at 
its lower end with a bearing, g, on which is 
arranged so as to turn thereon a fianged 
sleeve, (), which is connected with a series of 
neck-adjusters, P, of the samle or similar Con 
struction as the adjuster's G, they being also 
connected to the neck portion of the waist 
i form sections andi pivoted to a head, Q, sus 
tained on the standard, and arranged to turn 
thereon in essentially the same manner as the 
: adjusters G are connected to the waistband 
sections and to the head F. 
By revolving the nut N the flanged sleeve 
45 
So 
?? 
So 
90 
95 
ICO 
 
899,181 
the arms hand the slotted arms i, being dis 
pensed with, the operative devices in this 
case being arranged wholly outside of the 
standard, as described and represented. 
Having described my improvement, what I 
claim in a dress-form made in sections and 
supported on a standard essentially as rep 
resented is 
1. The flanged slide Ix, provided with open 
ings k, combined with the nut L, connected 
to the standard, as shown, the rods m, con 
necting said nut and slide, the head F, sup 
ported on the standard, the adjusters G, piv 
oted to the head and connected to the flanged 
slide and to the form-sections, arranged, con 
nected to each other, and supported essen 
tially as shown and set forth. 
2. The combination of the dress-form made 
in sections, the standard A, the nut L, and 
Slides Kand M on the standard, the head F, 
also on the standard and between the nut I 
and slide IX, the rods in, connecting the nut 
L and the slide K, the rods n, connecting the 
slides M and K, the rods 0, connecting the 
slide M with the dress-form sections, the ad 
justers G, pivoted to the head F and loosely 
connected to the slide K, and the dress-form 
sections, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
FREDK. W. BROWN. 
VWitnesses: 
S. N. PIPER, 
C. F. DANIELs. 
O will be raised or lowered and the adjusters 
connected thereto caused to enlarge or dimin 
ish the size of the neck portion of the form, 
thus admitting, as will be seen, of an inde 
5 pendent adjustment of said portion, as may 
be desired. 
In revolving the dress-form around the 
standard to enlarge or diminish it in size the 
heads Q, D, and F will turn on the standard 
Io with the form, as will also the slides K and 
MI and the nut IL, which, being connected to 
, will turn to 
each other by the rods 
gether, and as the nut L. rises or lowe's on the 
screw at', so likewise the slides lx and M will 
I5 rise or fall on the standard and move the ad 
justers G and braces O, so as to expand or 
contract the form in its waist and skirt por 
tions. In the movement of the form about 
the standard the flanged sleeve () will also 
2O turn with it about the bearing qi of the sleeve 
p, and consequently the adjusters l will not 
be moved on their pivots to change the size 
of the neck portions of the form, the adjust 
ment of which is effected by means of the nut. 
N, as herein before set forth. 
The invention herein described is an illn 
provement on that represented in the United 
States Patent, No. 385,725, granted July 10, 
1888, to Patrick Quinn, and to myself as as 
signee, it being simpler in construction and 
less expensive to manufacture, the slotting 
of the standard and arrangement therein of 
the rod B, provided with a head at the top to 
bear in the knob and at bottom with prongs 
35 to extend through slots in the standard, also 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399281.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Siheet 1. 
H. PENOYER 
BEE HIWE. 
No. 399,281, 
fift it 
Patented Mar. 12, 1889. 
 
WITWESSES, 
7% (244-reel, 
IWWEWTOR, 
va/7 
Attorney. 
 
N. EreRs, photo-thographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
H. PENOYER 
BEE HIWE, 
No. 399,281, 
Patented Mar. 12, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
S2S2S2S2 2Size % 
 
2 2 
2 
e t 
 
22 2 ZZZ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SN 
a lawa aayaa a 
& 
N S 
 
WITWESSES 
%% (4-4- 
IWWEWTOR 
C 73. Attorney. 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIIRAM PENOY ER, OF WESTERN SARATOGA, ILLINOIS. 
BEE-HIWE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 399,281, dated March 12, 1889. 
Application filed May 29, 1888, Serial No, 275,486, (No model.) 
55 
O 
25 
35 
To (t/7, it'? On, if T (tity conce 77: 
Be it known that I, IIRAM PENOYER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Western 
Saratoga, in the county of Union and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Bee-Hives; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable othel's skilled in the art, to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to certain details in 
the construction of lee-hives, the nature of 
which is hereinafter described and specifically 
Clained. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of the back of the hive with the 
upper door open and With the three lower 
doors broken away to show the arrangement 
of the various drawers and comb-frames. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section in line if 
f of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 3 is a similar section in line rac of Fig. 
2. Fig. 4 is a perspective of one of the comb 
frame drawer's belonging to the upper com 
partment of the hive, with one of the comb 
frames raised or partly removed from the 
drawer; and Fig. 5 is a perspective of one of 
the comb-frame sections removed from the 
central lower compartment of the hive. 
A is a rectangular inclosing box or casing 
having three lower compartments, A' A' A', 
separated by partitions C. (t", and two upper 
compartments, A' A', separated from the lower 
compartments by a horizontal paltition, Ct. 
A hinged door, B, covers the two upper com 
partments, and similar but vertical doors, B' 
B B, cover separately the three lower com 
partments. The central or main lower con 
partment, A, has cleats () upon its sides 
near the top, upon which slide two independ 
ent frame-sections, C C, which carry comb 
frames D, supported and held thereon in a 
novel manner, as hereinafter described, the 
said frame-sections being easily removed Sep 
arately when the door of the compartment is 
Open. 
The frame-sections C C have end pieces 
(::, upon which the projecting ends d of the 
comb-frames rest and from which they are 
suspended, and have side pieces, c', which pro 
ject above the top bars, d", of the comb-frames, 
and are grooved at 6 to receive a top slide, 
c", which fits closely down upon the top bars, 
d', of the comb-frames, and thus serves to 
: hold and prevent the said frames from being 
moved about and pressed one against the 
Other. 
The ends c of the frame side pieces, c', pro 
ject beyond the end pieces, c, a sufficient dis 
tance to leave the required space between the 
two frame-sections and between the ends of 
the frame-sections and the casing to permit 
the bees to pass freely around the frames. 
Each of the lower side compartinients, A' 
A, contains feed-drawers E and box honey 
drawer's E' E, located one above the other to 
Slide freely upon cleats e on the inner side 
Walls of the compartments, and the said honey 
drawers have corresponding openings, e', lo 
cated opposite to Openings IF in the partitions 
C. C.", which are covered by slides F, passing 
across the box and projecting at the back 
thereof exteriorly therefrom, by which means 
Communication may be established between 
any one or more of said honey-drawers and 
the main lower compartment, A, and said 
Slicles may be closed between the main com 
partment and the remaining honey-drawers 
contained in either or both of the said Gom 
partlments. Communication with the feed 
drawers is had through openings F* and e^. 
The upper compartments, A, A, contain 
Surplus honey-comb frame-drawers G, each 
holding a double row of comb-frames, H, rest 
ing by their inner projecting upper ends, re 
Spectively, upon a central longitudinal strip, 
g, and at their Outer ends upon longitudinal 
side strips, g, secured to the inner side of 
the said comb-frame drawers. The surplus 
comb-frames are thus packed side by side in 
two parallellows, in which position they are se 
curely held by means of a sliding cover, G', 
preferably of sheet metal, which fits longi 
tudinally and horizontally in grooves in the 
upper and inner edges of the sides of the 
drawers and presses closely upon the flat up 
per surfaces of the comb-frames, thus firmly 
holding them down upon their supporting 
strips. This cover also serves to exclude light, 
dust, and insects, and When the drawer is re 
moved from its compartment it may be han 
dled or upset Without letting the comb-frames 
drop out of place. 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
OC 
55 
75 
The end surplus-comb frames, II", in the 
drawers G have pins or knobs h, projecting 
from them to permit the said end frames to 
be easily removed from the drawers, after 
which the remaining frames may be easily re 
moved, and notches g in the ends of the draw 
covers G' will permit the ends of the covers 
to slide past the said pins and enter grooves 
in the ends of the drawers to completely cover 
the latter. 
Each of the drawers G is provided in its 
lower side or bottom with a bee-opening, g, 
which registers with a bee-opening, g, in the 
horizontal partition a'. Slides H are fitted 
in the partitions Ct', above the openings there 
in, and project exteriorly from the back of the 
box, to admit of their being shifted to open 
and close communication between the main 
compartment A* and either of the said comb 
frame drawers. 
The front of the box is provided at or about 
the middle of its main compartment A* with 
an entrance-tube, I, having a slide, I', fitted 
therein for closing the same when threatened 
with robber bees or while the hive is being 
Smoked. 
The letter i designates a trap-door, the up 
per edge of which is hinged to the outside of 
the mouth of the tube I at a sufficient height 
to permit of the inward and outward passage 
of the working-bees between its lower edge 
and the bottom of the tube-opening. The 
drones, being larger than the Working-bees, in 
their efforts to escape press against the trap I, 
and thus cause the same to swing outward to 
a sufficient extent to admit of their passing 
beneath the same. The return of the drones 
through the same passage is prevented by 
reason of their inability to press the trap in 
wa, d. 
The hive is ventilated by holes K, bored 
through the ends of the boxes and covered by 
punctured pieces of tin, K", which prevent the 
admission of insects, but admit of ventila 
tion. A litter-drawer, L, is located beneath 
the main or brood compartment A, and is 
supported at the sides thereof by cleats or 
floor projections, as shown in Fig. 1, on which 
it is adapted to freely slide, and a perforated 
bottom, L', is arranged to slide in the grooves 
in the Walls of said compartment above and 
independently of the drawer L to close the 
bottom of the same, and thus admit of the re 
moval of the litter-drawer without allowing 
the bees to escape. 
Holes l at the front of the hive allow the 
moths to pass into the litter-drawer; but they 
are prevented from getting up into the hive 
by the intervention of the perforated bottom. 
The outer surface of the hive is provided 
With niches or dark closets N at both ends 
of the box, and, if desired, at both sides of 
Each niche or closet is provided 
the holes l. 
with a sliding face, N', for regulating the 
size of the entrance thereto, as well as for 
darkening the interior thereof. The walls of 
the closet are intended to be rubbed with 
comb or beeswax, and serve to ensnare the 
moths and receive their egg deposits. . 
The closets are entirely independent of all 
other parts of the hive, and by simply rais 
ing their slides N' access can be had to their 
interiors for cleaning or other purposes. The 
perforated slide is not only located above the 
litter-drawer to slide independently thereof, 
but projects at its rear end from the back of 
the hive a sufficient, distance to admit of its 
being grasped and withdrawn from the box 
when it is desired to deposit the litter in the 
drawer beneath, and then pushed back to its 
place to completely close the hive before the 
litter-drawer is removed without exposure. 
All of the drawei's and slide-boxes have 
glass-covered openings through which the in 
terior workings of the bees may be safely ex 
amined when the top and side doors are 
opened, and the main lower compartment is 
similarly provided with a window and a 
hinged dark cover of well-known construction. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letter's Patent, is 
In a bee-hive, the combination of a series 
of surplus comb-frames, D, each having end 
projections, d, with a surplus comb-frame 
section composed of two end pieces, c, and 
two side pieces, c', the latter provided with 
projecting ends c', inner grooves, c, and a 
cover, C", adapted to operate in said grooves 
and hold the frames in position, as specified. 
In testimony whereof I hereby affix my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
HIRAM PENOYER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. ROWE, 
ALLEN E. HILL. 
95 
IOC 
2 
899,281 
IO 
3O 
35 
-5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399381.txt	(No Model.) 
J. COFFIN 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
APPARATUS FOR TOUGHENING STEEE, BARS 
No. 399,381, 
Patented Mar. 12, 1889. 
 
pertas, photo-Lithographer, washington, 
C. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. COFFIN 
APPARATUS FOR TOUGHENING STEEL BARS, 
No. 399,381, 
Patented Mar. 12, 1889. 
Wa 
s 
-- - 
SN ---m 
t 
 
T 
9 
s 
 
f 
s 
t 
a 
N. ONI 2 
N 
N 
 
s 
 
w 
NMAk. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C OF FIN, OF JOHNSTOWN, P E N N SYLVANIA. 
APPARATUS FOR TO U G H E N N G STEE BARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 399,881, dated March 12, 1889. 
Application filed November 13, 1888, Serial No. 290,680, (No model.) 
O 
25 
: 
55 
To all it'? O7, it Trudy conce77. 
Be it known that I, JOHN COFFIN, of Johns 
town, in the county of Cambria and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Toughening Steel Bars; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improved appa 
ratus for toughening steel bars, and more par 
ticularly to toughen steel axles which have 
been manufactured by rolling or forging the 
same in any proper manner. 
The apparatus constituting the subject of 
my invention consists, essentially, in mechan 
ism for cooling off an axle or other bar after it 
has been, by heat or otherwise, brought to a 
proper amorphous condition, to toughen it; 
for placing the hot axle or bar upon a proper 
mechanism to revolve it rapidly on its longi 
tudinal axis; while in motion for elevating a 
body of water or other preferred liquid mat 
ter to submerge the axle or bar and give it 
the proper amount of cooling, and, finally, for 
removing the axle or bar from the cooling in 
fluence of the bath. 
My invention further consists in utilizing 
a spray of water or submerged jets of cooling 
liquid to agitate the Water in a bosh, which 
latter is adapted to receive water or other 
cooling-liquid. This liquid is raised verti 
cally a sufficient distance to completely cover 
an axle which has first been cooled after its 
manufacture, then reheated evenly, and after 
ward placed on fixed rotating devices from 
which motion is imparted. The operation of 
the jets of cooling-liquid, in connection with 
the body of cooling-liquid, has an agitating 
action on the latter near the revolving axle, 
to prevent spheroidal formation in the bath, 
which would retard the cooling action of said 
bath upon the submerged axle or round steel 
bar undergoing treatment. 
There are two obvious methods of carrying 
into effect the above-indicated invention for 
toughening steel axles or similar round bars 
of steel. 
The first of these consists in providing a 
fixed bosh or water-trough of a capacity suit 
able for the purpose, with proper axle-rotat 
ing devices placed in the bosh at such a dis 
tance from its bottom that water may be in 
troduced to raise and completely cover an 
axle placed in contact with the revolving ma 
chinery. The axle, after sufficient heating, 
is placed on a rotary cradle set in motion, and 
then covered with water or other liquid or 
mixture of water and suitable ingredients, 
provision being made to cause the water or 
cooling-liquid to rise in the stationary bosh 
or trough, and after contact with the rotating 
axle for a sufficient length of time to give it 
a chill of proper depth. 
The second and preferred form of appara 
tus for effecting a surface-chill of the axle or 
bar consists of a fixed rotating mechanism, 
and a bosh or trough adapted to be raised or 
lowered, and be secured in either an elevated or 
depressed position in the same vertical plane 
with the rotating machinery mentioned, proper 
provision being made to fill the bosh with 
water or other cooling-liquid and to discharge 
it. In this case the axle is heated evenly to a 
proper degree, then placed on the revolving 
cradle, the water-bosh filled and elevated to 
submerge the axle, and a spraying device 
started to give it a surface-chill, when it may 
be removed and the bosh depressed for a repe 
tition of the process. 
A detailed description will now be given of 
the apparatus as shown in the annexed draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a play view of the apparatus, a 
portion being broken away through the cen 
ter. Fig. 2 is a side elevation partly in sec 
tion. Fig. 3 is an end elevation of the mech 
anism, taken through the end A. (see Figs. 1 
and 2.) and Fig. 4 is a detached plan view of 
the end of the bosh or water-trough, showing 
the wate-spray pipe and its feeding-branch. 
A A' are two vertical bracket - stands, of . 
metal, made sufficiently strong for their de 
sired office, the upper portions being bent to 
return the ends down Wardly and then pro 
duce free hangers Ci (l, of sufficient length to 
nearly reach the bottom of the bosh or water 
tank 3. The latter is of such relative length 
to the secured position of the bracket-stands 
A A' that its end walls, 
, may reciprocate 
vertically in the spacek, intervening between 
the bent limbs C. C. of the bracket-stands AA' 
and the main bodies of the latter. The de 
45 
7 o 
75 
So 
95 
 
O 
15 
399,88i 
g 
pending limbs at (, of the bracket-stands AA' 
are furnished at their extremities with a pair 
of bosses, a', formed so that their axial perfo 
rations will be adapted to receive the ends of 
the parallel shafts C C and support them. 
The shaft C is intended to have a revolu 
ble movement in the bosses (l', that serve as 
boxes, and in order to give such a motion a 
sprocket-wheel, b, is located on the shaft near 
One end or adjacent to the boss (t', this sprock 
et-wheel being pinned or keyed to the shaft, 
as shown at l', Fig. 1. 
On the body of the shaft Ca suitable num 
ber of round hubs or short cylinders, ?, are 
affixed at spaced intervals, the central por 
tion, c, of these hubs having increased diam 
eter, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The shaft, C' is located parallel and near to 
the shaft Cand rigidly secured in its support 
ing-bosses. Upon its body, directly opposite 
the hubs c, a series of loose hubs, c', of simi 
lar diameter to the hubs c, are secured from 
endwise displacement by the collars c, which 
latter are attached rigidly to the shaft C', so 
as to permit the hubs (:' to revolve freely. 
Upon the bottom of the bosh B, near the sides 
and a suitable distance from each end, as 
shown in Fig. 2, two pairs of depending brack 
et-lugs, f, are affixed, each of these lugs being 
islated to form parallel jaws, as shown in 
Fig. 3. 
On each side of the bosh B the boxes d are 
secured upon a proper foundation. These are 
designed to give support to two transverse 
rock-shafts, F, which have the crank-arms E 
mounted on and secured to them near each 
end, so as to permit a pivotal engagement of 
the outer ends, 9, of these cranks with the 
forked bracket-lugs f, between the parallel 
jaws of which they are located. About mid 
way between the crank-arms E the cranks G. 
are affixed to the rock-shafts F. These latter 
named cranks are located at right angles to 
the other crank-arms, E, and project vertically 
downwald. When the latter-named cranks lie 
in a horizontal plane. The two pairs of crank 
alms E are located in parallel planes, so that 
when the lower cranks, GG, are connected by 
a link-bar, II, pivoted to the lower extremities 
of these cranks, a vertical reciprocating move 
ment, may be given to the bosh B by a hori 
Zontal reciprocation of the link-bar. 
When 
the bosh is lowered, it will occupy a relative 
position with legard to the parallel shafts C 
C, as shown in the dotted lines / / /. (See 
Fig. 2.) 
At one end of the bosh B, and preferably 
the end where the sprocket-wheelb is attached 
to the shaft C, an actuating bar or rod, I, is 
attached to one of the cranks G, which bar 
may be connected to any proper mechanism 
to give it a limited endwise movement, and 
thus raise or lower the bosh a proper distance, 
as may be required. Upon the sprocket-wheel 
b an endless chain, J, is placed, and it has en 
gagement with a mating sprocket-wheel, (not 
shown,) the latter being located on a shaft con 
nected to a source of power and motion, so 
that a movement of the chain may be effected 
to rotate the wheel. 
At each end of the bosh B two projecting 
blocks, ele, are fastened. These are spaced 
a sufficient distance apart to have a sliding 
| engagement with the parallel side edges, e', 
of the bracket-stands A A', and thus be 
adapted to prevent side oscillation of the bosh 
when it is moved by the rock-shafts F and at 
tached mechanism. 
Beneath the parallel shafts CC' a spray 
pipe, D, is placed which extends nearly the 
length of the bosh B, and is supported near 
the bottom of the latter. 
This pipe is perfo 
rated on its upper surface to permit the escape 
of water or other cooling-liquid in numerous 
forcible jets upwardly against the axle-sur 
face when the latter is placed on the revolv 
ing cradle above, said pipe. One of the ends 
of the spray-pipe D is secured to the branch 
pipe D', which extends through the side of the 
bosh, and to the outer end of the branch pipe 
a flexible pipe, D, is attached, which is of a 
proper length to allow it to have a connection 
of its outer end with an adequate source of 
water-supply, whereby water may be intro 
duced in proper volume into the bosh. An out 
flow-orifice, n, (see Fig. 2.) allows the heated 
water which rises to escape from the bosh near 
its upper edge. 
In order to facilitato the working of the ap 
paratus hereinbefore described, the upper end 
of the bosh B may be located near the surface 
of the floor or ground or level of the building 
in which the device is placed. 
To effect this 
a walled excavation is made, of sufficient ca 
pacity to allow the bosh to be lowered in it. 
The boxes d of the rock-shafts F are located 
on this wall, which will afford them a stable 
foundation. The margin of Walled excava 
tion is shown at 2 g in Fig. 2. 
In operation the bosh is filled with water or 
other suitable liquid and the rotating mech 
anism set in motion, the shaft Crevolving to 
ward the fixed shaft C, the axle, which has 
been rendered sufficiently hot throughout its 
entire length, being placed upon the cradle 
formed by the hubs c c', which will instantly 
communicate a rapid rotary motion to the axle 
in a direction at right angles to its axis. The 
water trough or bosh B is now raised until 
the axle is entirely submerged, the water thus 
displaced escaping at the overflow n, and the 
water may be turned into the spray-pipe D to 
cause jets to impinge upon the rotating axle. 
When a surface-chill has been communicated 
to the axle-body to render its outer surface 
black, and which in the judgment of an ex 
pert operator will have penetrated the body 
of the axle to a sufficient depth, the axle is re 
moved and posh lowered and another axle 
placed in position, when the operation may be 
repeated, it being understood that the axles 
as they are removed from the bosh are placed 
where they will be supported level, and notin 
contact with wet ground or other damp sur 
I 25 
25 
30 
35 
4O 
45 
75 
95 
OC 
fo5 
O 
1 IS 
 
399,881 
3. The combination, with a frame and a sta 
tionary cradle carrying a rotating mechanism, 
of a vertically-movable bosh of water beneath 
the rotating mechanism, and means for rais 
ing this bosh until the rotating mechanism is 
submerged by the water therein, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. The combination, with a supporting 
frame and a stationary cradle carrying an 
axle-rotating mechanism, of a vertically-mov 
able bosh, means for raising the latter until 
its contained water submerges the axle on the 
revolving mechanism, and a spray-pipe to 
cause jets to impinge upon the axle, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
JOHN COFFIN. 
35 
Witnesses: 
A. MONTGOMERY, 
S. G. NOTTINGHAM, 
faces that would have a tendency to cool the 
axle unevenly and possibly warp it. 
It is evident that slight changes might be 
resorted to in the form and arrangement of 
the several parts described without departing 
from the spirit and scope of my invention, and 
hence I do not desire to limit myself to the 
precise construction herein set forth; but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
I. The combination, with a frame and a 
cradle carried thereby for supporting the ar 
ticle to be toughened, and mechanism for ro 
tating the article, of a water-container located 
below the cradle, and devices for elevating 
the container. 
2. The combination, with a frame, a station 
ary cradle supported thereby, and devices for 
rotating the article carried by the cradle, of a 
water-container located under the cradle, and 
mechanism for raising the container up to the 
cradle, substantially as set forth. 
IC) 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399481.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RENE BOIN, OF LU DWIGSILAFEN-ON-TIIE-RHINE, BAV ARIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
BADISCIIE ANILIN AND SODA FABRIK, OF MANNIIEIM, GERMANY. 
ALZARINE - BLUE SULP URIC ACD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 399,481, dated March 12, 1889. 
Application filed October 18, 1888, Serial No. 288,432, (Specimens, 
TO 
25 
To (till it'll OT, it 1 (ty coice, i. 
Be it known that I, RENE BOHN, a citizen of 
Switzerland, residing at Ludwigshafen-on-the 
Rhine, in the Kingdom of Bavaria and Em 
5 pire of Germany, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in the Manufacture of Aliz 
arine-Blue Sulphuric Acid, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to the manufacture of 
an improved dye-stuff or coloring-matter pro 
duced by the limited or moderate action of 
sulphuric anhydride upon alizarine-blue. 
My improved dye-stuff o' coloring-matter is 
telmed alizarine-blue sulphuric acid, in or 
der to indicate by this name both its origin 
and its chiefly available property of splitting 
up into alizarine-blue and sulphuric acid when 
submitted to the influence of acids or acid 
mordants in the processes of dyeing or print 
ing, 
In carrying out my invention I proceed as 
follows: About ten parts, by weight, of dry 
and finely - powdered alizarine-blue are, in 
Small portions at a time and under constant 
stirring, added to about twenty parts, by 
Weight, of fuming sulphuric acid containing 
about twenty-threeper cent. of free anhydride. 
This operation, which requires about from four 
to six houl's, being finished, the mixture or 
Solution thus obtained is to be kept agitated 
at a temperature of about 50 centigrade dur 
ing the space of about from four to five hours, 
in order to insure a perfect dissolution of the 
alizarine-blue, and then the conversion of the 
latter into its sulphuric-acid derivative is to 
be completed by continuously agitating the 
solution at an ordinary temperature during 
about another twelve hours. Throughout this 
operation the access of moist air otlight to be 
carefully excluded. The result of the pro 
cess is then gradually poured into a mixture 
of ice and water, and the precipitate of alliz 
arine-blue sulphuric acid thus produced is to 
be filtered as duickly as possible, washed with 
ice-cold water, and pressed. 
In order to convert the free and unstable 
alizarine-blue sulphuric acid into a commer 
cial product soluble in water and possessing 
a sufficient degree of stability, it is advisable 
5o to prepare the alkaline salts of the same by 
35 
o 
the application of the known methods-for ill 
stance, by mixing the free allizarine-blue sul 
phuric acid obtained as above described in 
the state of a pressed pulp with as much of a 
diluted caustic-soda liquor as will be required 
for converting the same into a purple crys 
talline salt, presenting the appearance of pure 
indigotine. The sodium salt of the coloring 
matter thus prepared may then be obtained 
in a dry state by evaporation. 
Alizarine-blue sulphuric acid produced as 
above described presents the following char'- 
acteristic properties: It is capable of forming 
two series of alkaline salts soluble in Water. 
Those containing the minimum of alkali ex 
hibit a yellow or brown appearance both in 
the dry state and in the state of their concen 
trated aqueous solutions, while a larger pro 
portion of alkali effects a change of the said 
colors into purple or blue. The purple solu 
tion of the potassium or sodium salts assumes 
gradually the before-named yellow or brown 
tint upon the addition of water. A similar 
change (owing to an abstraction of alkali) 
takes place by carefully adding a small 75 
amount of a mineral or organic acid or by 
passing a current of carbonic acid into the said 
purple solutions. This point being reached, 
a further addition of a mineral or organic acid 
causes the alizarine-blue sulphuric acid thus 
set free to become precipitated in alizarine 
like yellow flocks, which quickly assume a 
crystalline appearance. ly the simultaneous 
application of heat, the above-named decom 
position ensues, allizarine-blue and sulphuric 
acid being the result. This decomposition 
forms an especially striking experiment if 
acetic acid be employed for such purpose, the 
solution becoming decolorized, while alizarine 
blue separates out in small glittering crystals 
closely resembling artificial indigo. By em 
ploying sulphuric or hydrochloric acids in 
sufficient excess the Well-known red solutions 
of the corresponding salts of allizarine-blue 
will be observed to form. The alkaline solu 
tions of allizarine-blue sulphuric acid are pre 
cipitated by caustic and carbonated alkalies 
as well as by common salt. Alkaline-reducing 
agents-such, for instance, as zinc-dust and 
caustic-potash liquor-cause the purple color IOO 
So 
90 
2 
- 
- 
399,48). 
20 
25 
series of alkaline salts, those containing the 
minimum of :tlkali exhibiting a yellow or 
brown appearance, while a larger proportion 
of alkali effects a change of the said color into 
purple or blue; by adding to the purple solu 
tion a small amount of mineral or organic acid 
it assumes gradually the before-named yellow 
or brown tint; by the further addition of a 
mineral or organic acid the alizarine-blue sul 
phuric acid becomes precipitated in alizarine 
like yellow flocks, and it dyes wool or other 
animal fiber with the aid of mordants blue. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
ar 
Witnesses: 
. 
AUGUST HANSE, 
JOHANNESBUTTNER. 
RENE BOHN. 
of the alkaline solutions of allizarine-blue sul 
phullric acid to change into a yellow tint, which, 
upon the access of air, changes back into the 
Original purple hue. Alizarine-blue sulphuric 
acid is chiefly useful for dyeing wool or other 
animal fiber with the aid of mordants used 
for the production of the variously-colored 
lakes of allizarine-blue. On account of Sull 
phuric acid becoming liberated during its de 
Composition, as above described, it is less suit 
able for the printing of cotton than the be 
fore-mentioned bisulphite compounds of alliz 
arine-blue. 
What I claim as new, and desire 
to Seclire 
by Letters Patent, is 
As a new product, the coloring-matter or 
dye-stuff (alizarine-blue sulphuric acid) here 
in before described, and having the following 
characteristics: It is capable of forming two 
fo 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399581.txt	UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEF STRASBURGER, OF MOS ('OW, 
Riss A, ASSIGNOR TO THE ACTIEN 
(;ESELLSCIIAFT FIR ANILIN FABRIix ATION OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
ROC ESS OF WA & M G A 3 ROffiv. YE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 399,581, dated March 12, 1889. 
Application filed November 7, 1888, Serial No, 290,244 (No specimens.) Patented in Germany June 22, 1888, No, l889, and 
July 14, 1888, No. 1,950 in England July 23, 1888, No. 10,653; in Russia, July 30, 1888, No. 7,802; in France August 10, 
1888, No. 179,276; in Austria-Hungary August 10, 1888, No. 7,340, and in Italy September 30, l888, XXII, 23,899, 
XLVII, 206, 
55 
65 
\, 
( (); 
is oltai ((i 
u?if (OfceI. 
To ct/t. Luton, it 
Be it known that I, JOSEF STRASBURGER, of 
Moscow, ill the russian Empire, have inventetl 
new and useful Improvements in the Produc 
tion of Brown Colojing-atter which Dyes 
Cotton without the Use of a \lordant, (for 
which I have obtained jotte's Patent in Italy, 
September 30, 1SSS, Vol. XXII, No. 23,899, and 
Vol. XLVII, No. 206, and for which I have 
made applications in {{cinally, . 
( 22, lists, 
No. A 1,239, ald July 14, SSS, N (). A 1,95(); 
England, July 23, SSS, No. 1 (), (553; it'. ("(, 
August 1 (), lSSS, N (), 79,327 (3: 3 tissi:, .July 3), 
1888, No. 7,8();2; Austria-ilungary, August, (), 
1SSS, No. 3, 7,3-4);) at (lo cichly declai'i' 
that the following is a full, Clea', a 
exact 
description of the invention, which will eia!! (! 
other's skilled in the art, to which it app(Italis 
t() make and use the stille. 
) () i'ang (()() lig 
It is Well know in 1:ut ; 
it is ti':/)- 
latt () 
() (- 
diphenyl (froin lenzidi., iii., , , , i.h 
cule of salicylic acid anti acting with the thus 
formed intermediate 'clict, u){}} (i.e. nole 
cule of resorcin. Now i 
: V (fou ( that this 
coloring-matte) is still able to combine with 
a ful their molecule of a diazo (())))) () und. By 
{ w coli'i Ig-litters are ol)- 
this reaction 
cott) bio \in shicles 
tained which lye () 
Without the use () f : 
() (lit. 
Eican ple. I.-Forty-seven kilos of the coi):- 
ing-matter f1() 
t(t1:Z)-(liheiyil, salicy it: 
acid, a cl resorcin a 'e issol V (ci il for El () - 
Sand litel's of boiling water, Witt at at litic) 
of twenty-five kilos () caustic soci: , (of () 
Bau in 6.) After cooling, twenty kilos of para 
diazolbenzole-Sulphonic acid, sins)() (ied in 
about six hunt l'el it (i's of Wite', are slowly 
{ i (). ius : 
entered into the alk:lie s() 
is : (i) is 
(()()ing-matel' is (; ) 
With difficulty in \site'. Its 
recipitatio is 
Complete loy aciding : 
() 
salt. It (yes ('ott () 
it {{{ 
} { w sh;t (s 
\, identic: 
)}'': it. 
Without the use of a ; 
colorig-matter is (it: 
; : it (; (- 
; : 
) () lettle of 
diate product, formed by () (: 
tetraZO-diphlyi and (ii ( molecule : licylie 
al(titl acts it () i 
1 frt sy 
:oilt i{}i () f {{}i 
t ( ('ol eig- 
is ( t \sic 
( 
: 
' 
i 
 
; 
) 
( ' ' 
it atti Z(c. 1) y 
olecule i?solci). 
3; ii) (, ; 
(; lix 'e () ( 
one molecule paradiazobenzole-sulphonic acid 
an( () (, 
To produce the new coloring-lilatter by this 
method, thirty-six kilos of the coloring-mat 
ter from Ja'udiazobenzole-sulpholic acid alld 
resorcin are dissolved in one thousand lite's 
of water, and to this solution an equivalent 
(tuantity of the intern ediate product from 
ict'zo-lii)} (yi ad salicy it 
litici is added. 
| To prepare the intern ediate proclucts, S.5 
kilos of ): Ziciin ( : 'e (tissolved by means ()f 
forty-tight, kios () ( 
ridic' acid in (eight, 
B.S 
its 1's () w; t ( 
kills of nitrite of sta. The solution (if the 
( is the) (it ('el into a soluti}! 
(ii: z) coin () 
i ()f fifteen kios ( 
' salicylie (irl, fourt een kilos 
() fills! is , , 
, ( (); 4) 
} { i tility kilos 
i () (; "lollite of soci: in twelve hund'ed litti's 
i? w; it ". 
; 
. 
t ( into ille 
(ii: to 
redict, inct this al}) \, ( -): 'tion ('d ('ol 
(iiig-n: er its stood for :) () it tW (ty-foll!" 
()'s, it is cated, at th: s()-formed colling 
after precilitated by goinion sult, fitti'ett, 
ressed, and died. It dyes (Il cotton deep 
i yellow-)rown sh:lties without the use of a 
('lant. If in exaille the ai'a(diazoben 
zoic -sulphonic acid is 'eat'ed by metadiaZO 
iez (-; 
) ilic acid, the is stilting coloring 
natter dyes more yellowish-brown shades. 
frt 11ple II.--if in the first method of ex 
a sile the bara (liazole; Zo (-sil) honic acid 
is reliac (cly twelly-five kii is : ?ipha-naph 
tiyani ( - )() () silij} is 
lic: a (iii!, a "loliing 
littei' is ():ained wit: (lyes ('otton red 
}}}own. ...in identical exts) if g-in tel' is ?olin (d 
if the intern ediate r()} (it from tet'. Z()-di 
ill (nyl and sali(ylic acid (; is 
in the color 
ig - atter f'() 
: ): - (iaZonal tilali) ()- 
int) int):sil phonic acid and 1' sol'tin. The pro 
it is ti) () the latt ('i' (ii) 
i' s 22.3 
kilos of alika-hall)hthyla-line-}}} () no sulphoilic 
: it, five : ; ) ((ci lite's () 'water, fourteen kilos 
{{ } lii: tic' 
litics (? 
solil. ii e iiazo coin)oil 
us formed is 
eit(''et it) () is (; litic) () 
1.5 kilos of rest); (ii, 
twenty-six kios of calistic sodi, (of -t ()" 
is till (,) and 7.5 kills { } f (; ;ionate of sodium 
i; iii' 
('it, ai ( (.) kil () is (; 
( ; it 'c' 
{{(; ) 
\; ('. 
(i 
: 
25 
35 
75 
So 
95 
f 
. 
399,58i 
The different isomeric alpha-diazonaphtha 
line-monosulphonic acids show in regard to 
the described reaction an analogous behavio', 
and the corresponding coloring-matters do not 
differ very much in regard to their shades in 
dyeing cotton with them. 
If the diazonaphthaline - monosulphonic 
acids are replaced by the disulphonic acidis of 
the naphthaline, to remarkable variation re 
garding their shades is observed. The isomeric 
stilphonic acids of the beta-diazonaphthaline, 
if employed instead of the alpha-diazonaph 
thaline-sulphonic acids in the described 'eat':- 
tions, yield coloring-mattel's which dye cotton 
more of a yellow-brown. ('oloring-mattei's of 
similar shades are also obtained if the mono O' 
distulphonic acids of diazoazobenzole or diazo 
aZo-toluiol are employed instead of the diazo 
naphthaline-Sulphonic acids. Finally, it may 
be stated that in each of the described combi 
nations the tetrazo-diphenyl may be replaced 
by tetrazo-ditolyl without any important 
change of the effect. 
I claim 
1. The process herein described of produc 
-- - - - 
- 
specified. 
ing coloring-matter for dyeing, the same con 
sisting, first, in combining tetrazo-diphenyl 
with one molecule of salicylic acid, then com 
bining with the product one molecule of re 
sorcin, and finally combining with the pro 
(luct a diazobenzole-sulphonic acid and pre 
cipitating the dye or color, substantially as 
2. The process herein described of : 3'oduc 
ing coloring-matter for dyeing, th: , ; 
sisting in treating resorcin with paradiaZO 
benzole-sulphonic acid, then dissolving the 
product in water, then adding to the solution 
the product obtained by the &: is u of tet 
razo-diphonyl with salicylic aci 
ti, in allow 
ing the mixture to stand a suitable perid of 
time, and then heating it and adding colm 
mon salt, by which the coloring-matter is pre 
cipitated, which is finally filtered, pressed, 
and dried, situstaitic... y as specified. 
- 
JOSEF STRASBURGER. 
Witnesses: 
C. M. WERLE, 
E. C. DUFFY. 
: C() - 3 R 5 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399681.txt	(No Model.) 
J. McDERMAID, 
CLOSURE FOR, CHURNS, 
No. 399,681, 
Patented Mar. 19, 1889. 
ZA 
" -- a--- 
re-r- - - - - 
- 
- 
- 
ramaua u, ui-o-nnnn maraswamun a win avyw 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN MCDERMAID, OF ROCKFORD, ILLINOIS. 
CLOSURE FOR CHURNs. 
SP2CIFICATION forming part of Letters patent No. 899,681, dated Viarch 19, 1889. 
Application filed January 23, 1889, Serial No. 297,822, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all left OIn it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN MCDERMAID, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Rock 
ford, in the county of Winnebago and State 
of Illinois, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Closures for Churns, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to animproved means 
of Securing closures to churns; and it consists 
of certain new and useful constructions and 
combinations of parts hereinafter described, 
and pointed out in the claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Which form a part of this specification, Fig 
ure l is a plan view of a churn provided with 
my improvement. Fig. 2 is a view of a ver 
tical Section of the same through the dotted 
linea at of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an isometric view 
of a portion of the churn-cover fastening 
shown in the foregoing views. Fig. 4 is an 
isometric view in detail of a fragment of the 
ring-head having a cover-guidelug projecting 
from its upper side. Fig. 5 is an isometric 
view of a cover-retaining lug. 
Like letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts throughout the several views. 
A is a churn. A' is a ring-head seated in 
the croze A* therein. 
A are cover-guidelugs projecting from the 
upper side of the ring-head A'along the chine 
of the churn A. 
A' is an annular bead projecting from the 
upper side of the ring-head A'. 
B represents cover-retaining lugs project 
ing above the top of the churn A, whereto 
they are secured by means of spurs B', which 
enter the outside of the churn-staves, and 
bolts (not shown) passed through the bolt 
holes B*therein and the staves of the churn. 
C is a disk-head forming the basis of the 
churn-cover and having a vertical bolt-hole, 
C, through the center thereof. 
C is a metallic casing inclosing the periph 
ery and upper peripheral angle of the disk 
head C. 
C is a transverse strengthening-brace inte 
gral with the casing C and extending across 
the center of the disk-head C. 
C is a vertical stud, also integral with the 
brace C, and having a cylindrical passage, C, 
extending longitudinally therethrough. 
- 
C is a ring of cork set into the disk-head 
C to engage with the annular bead A', and 
forms a tight joint there with. 
D represents bails for securing the cover to 
the ring-head A', mounted in the cover-retain 
ing lugs B by inserting the ends of the former 
through the holes B in the latter. These 
bails may be swung outward and inward, as 
indicated by the dotted lines ac' of Fig. 1, ac 
cording as it is desired to open or close the 
churn. 
E is a bolt passed through the openings C 
C in the disk-head and Vertical stud, and is 
secured in position by means of the set-nut E'. 
F is a fulcrum having a threaded passage, 
F', extending vertically therethrough to adapt 
it to engage with the threaded portion of the 
bolt, E to form a vertical and adjustable swivel 
joint there with for the former to revolve upon. 
G is a lever-cam consisting of the cam G', 
pivoted to the swiveled fulcrum F by means 
of the horizontal pivot G and openings Gin 
the cam G', and the lever G', integral there 
with, for operating the same. The cam G' is 
divided by a horizontal cleft, G, therein, which 
admits the fulcrum F, whereto it is pivoted, 
and embraces the set-nut E, thereby prevent 
ing said nut from working loose and serving 
as a Wrench to remove and replace the same 
when desired. 
G is a cork stop inserted into a suitable 
socket on the under side of the lever G' to 
prevent the latter from marring the disk-head 
C. To take up the slack between the bails 
and cam or the wear of any of the parts com 
posing the fastening mechanism, elevate the 
lever to a vertical position and revolve it and 
the fulcrum whereto it is swiveled upon the 
bolt E, as indicated by the dotted circle acin 
Fig. 1, until the slack or wear is taken up. 
The cover-guide lugs Awill be found to be 
highly useful for guiding the cover onto the 
churn in such a manner that only the middle 
portion of the lower surface of the ring of the 
cork Cican come in contact with the annular 
bead A' of the ring-head A', as a liquid-tight 
joint between the cover and churn is thereby 
positively assured-a condition attained with 
difficulty when the ring of cork is placed upon 
the bead of the ring-head in Such a manner 
as not to be concentric there with. 
IO 
2 C. 
25 
35 
45 
9o 
95 
IOO 
2 
899,681 
I claim 
In combination, a churn having cover-re 
taining lugs secured to the outside of and pro 
jecting above the chine of the same, a ring 
5 head set into the chine thereof and having 
cover-guide lugs extending from the top of 
the latter along said chine, a cover fitted to 
the chine-ring, and suitable fastenings for re 
taining said cover thereon, substantially as 
described, and for the purpose specified. 
JOHN MICDERMAID. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEST. LAWRENCE, 
L. L. MORRISON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399781.txt	(No Model.) 
T. J. REYNOLDS. 
STEAM GENERATOR, 
No. 399,781, 
Patented Mar. 19, 1889. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
I 
 
 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
? ===::Z?ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
Zzzzazza?: 
N. PETERs, photo-lithographer. Washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 399,781. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
T. J. REYNOLIDS. 
STEAM GENERATOR, 
Patented Mar, 19, 1889. 
222222222222222222222 
ZZZZZZZZZYZZYZZZZ 
2a2a2222a2aaZea 
Xaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa. 
aayaaaaaaaaZZZZ 
22 
70272esses. 
- 
Z722/e72427 
 
M. PETERS. Photo-tithographer, Washington...t.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS J. REYNOLDS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO FRANCIS NOLAN, OF SAME PLACE. 
SEAV, G ENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 399,781, dated March 19, 1889, 
Application filed October 17, 1887, Renewed February 14, 1889, Serial No. 299,925. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all tuhon, it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS J. REYNOLDS, 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
5 ful Improvement in Steam-Generators, of 
which the following is a specification. 
In my Letters Patent No. 324,596, dated 
August 18, 1885, have shown and described a 
heater within a steam-generator, which con 
Io sists of a shell, Casing, or large tube arranged 
within the generator below the liquid-level, 
with which the feed-pipe is connected-say 
at one end-and a pipe extending from the 
heater, shell, or casing-say at the other end 
I5 into the generator, for delivering liquid into 
the generator from the heater, shell, or casing. 
The purpose of this construction is to subject 
the feed-water to a preliminary heating in the 
heater, shell, or casing, or large tube, before it 
2O is delivered to the interior of the generator 
proper, whereby the water will in the heater 
be raised to such a temperature as will cause 
it to deposit all or nearly all of its impurities 
before it passes to the steam-generator proper, 
25 and by these means the interior of the gen 
erator proper may be kept comparatively 
clean and the Water free from all its impuri 
ties while it is in the heater. Obviously, how 
ever, the placing of such a heater as above 
3o described within an ordinary steam-generator 
already in use would be expensive and in 
convenient; and the object of my preseit in 
vention is to secure Substantially the Saime 
advantages by tubes Or pipes, which may be 
35 placed in position in the Setting of an ordi 
nary generator at any time after it is in use or 
when the generator is first set in position. 
In carrying out my present invention. I 
place beneath the steam-generator proper and 
4o exposed to the heat of the furnace a heater 
consisting of one or more tubes or pipes ex 
posed at the ends, so that the pipe or pipes 
may be readily cleaned out by an ordinary 
flue-scraper whenever it is desired to remove 
A feed-pipe en 
ters the heater at One end, and a pipe also 
leads from the heater for communication with 
the generator, whereby the Water after being 
heated and caused to deposit Sediment and 
45 the incrustation from them. 
impurities in the heater passes to the gener 
ator. I prefer to form the heater of two lon 
gitudinal tubes and a cross-tube connecting 
them near one end, the ends of all said tubes 
being exposed to enable them to be readily 
cleaned, and the feed-pipe then communicates 
with One end of One of said longitudinal tubes, 
and from the corresponding end of the other 
longitudinal tube a pipe leads for communi 
cation. With the Steam-generator. This pipe 
which leads to the steam-generator usually 
passes first to the receiving-chamber of a fil 
ter, and from the delivery-chamber of the fil 
ter leads to the generator; and I also provide 
Outlet-cocks in the receiving and delivery 
chambers of the filter, whereby provision for 
cleaning the filter or for a surface blow-off 
for the generator is afforded, as Will be here 
inafter described. 
The invention consists in novel combina 
tions of parts hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal section of a generator embody 
ing my invention. Fig. 2 is a horizontal sec 
tion through the setting ol' below the genera 
tOP proper, but illustrating clearly the pipes 
Which form the heater. Fig. 3 is a transverse 
Section upon the plane of the dotted line aca, 
Fig. 1; and Fig. 4 is a section similar to Fig. 
1, showing the water-pipe leading from the 
heater directly to the generator, the filter be 
ing dispensed with. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
A designates an ordinary multitubular 
Steam-generator, which is supported in the 
usual way in a setting comprisingsidewalls, B, 
a rear Wall, B, and a front wall, B. 
B designates the bridge-wall, and C the 
furnace wherein is arranged the grate c. The 
heater which I employ consists of one or more 
tubes of comparatively large size arranged 
beneath the generator and in such a position 
as to be exposed to the heat of the furnace; 
and, as here represented, the heater consists 
of tWO longitudinal tubes, D, arranged near 
opposite sides of the furnace, and a cross 
tube, D', which is arranged, as here shown, 
95 
399,781 
O 
immediately behind the front wall, B, and 
extends across between and also from the 
outer sides of the longitudinal tubes D. As 
clearly seen in Fig. 2, these tubes D DD are 
all of them straight and have their ends ex 
posed beyond the brick setting of the gener 
ator, so that ready access may be had to them 
for removing the heads or plates d, whereby 
they are closed, and when the opposite ends 
of any one of the tubes are thus opened an 
ordinary flue scraper or cleaner can be passed 
through the tube and all sediment and in 
crustation removed from it. 
e designates the feed - pipe, which leads 
from a pump or any other suitable source to 
one end of one of the longitudinal tubes D, 
and from the corresponding end of the oppo 
site longitudinal tube leads a delivery-pipe, 
e', which is in communication with the inte 
rior of the generator A. 
As here shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the pipe 
e' delivers directly into the receiving-cham 
berf of a filter, F, and after passing through 
the filtering medium f the water reaches 
a delivery - chamber, f', and thence passes 
through the pipe e to the generator. As here 
represented, the inner end of the pipe e with 
in the generator is provided with a flaring 
mouth, e, and is arranged at just about the 
water-level, so that it will serve as a surface 
blow-off, if desired, as hereinafter described. 
The water which enters the heater through 
the pipe e becomes heated therein to a high 
degree, whereby it is caused to deposit all 
impurities which will produce incrustation, 
and thence passes to the filter F and to the 
steam-generator. In some cases it will not 
be necessary to employ the filter F, and the 
feed-pipe e', passing from the heater, will then 
lead directly to the boiler, as is shown in Fig. 
4. I have here shown the receiving and de 
livery chambersff" of the filter as provided 
with outlet-cocks g g but I may provide the 
pipe e' with a cock, g, which may be shut off 
when it is desired. Now we will suppose that 
it is desired to clean the filter F. I first shut 
off the cockg, thereby retaining in the heater 
the water which is required to fill the tubes 
D D', and I then open the outlet-cock g. 
From the pipe e, under pressure, water will 
pass downward and backward through the 
filtering medium f' and out at the cock g, 
thereby cleansing the filter. Suppose it be 
desired to clean the heater without letting all 
the water out of the generator proper and 
while steam is still up. I first close the cock 
g', stop the feed-Water through the pipee, and 
I then remove the heads from the tubes D D 
and thoroughly clean them out, after which 
the heads are replaced and the cocks opened, 
so as to provide for feed in the normal way. 
By opening the outlet-cock g from the deliv 
ery-chamber f' of the filter I provide for the 
discharge from the water-level in the steam 
generator A to the delivery-chamber f', and 
thence through the cock g', and thus afford a 
surface blow-off. 
My present invention, although probably 
not more effective than that set forth in my 
former patent, where it is desired to embody 
my invention in new generators, is very much 
more desirable where it is desired to apply 
the invention to steam-generators already in 
lSe. 
As shown in Fig. 4, the pipe e', through 
which water is delivered from the heater, 
communicates directly with the interior of 
the generator. In the construction shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3 the pipe e' is no less in Com 
munication with the interior of the generator 
A because it is connected indirectly there 
with or through the filter F. It is also a fact 
that the tube D, with one end of which the 
feed-pipe e is connected, has its opposite end 
connected with the receiving-chamber fof the 
filter, although such a connection is here 
made indirectly through the cross-tube D', 
the other tube, D, and the pipe e', leading 
therefrom. 
I am aware that prior to my invention the 
feed-water has been heated before entering a 
steam-generator by passing it through pipes 
arranged about the boiler, so as to be sub 
jected to heat therefrom, and notably by pass 
ing it through a series of return pipes and 
bends, as shown in the patent to Earle et al., 
No. 369,697, dated September 13, 1887. When 
feed-water is thus heated before being passed 
to a steam-generator, it deposits directly in 
the heater a greater part of those impurities 
which would produce incrustation if allowed 
to pass to the generator, and hence it is of the 
utmost importance that any heater for such 
use should have ample provision for readily 
cleaning from it the sediment deposited in it. 
Such provision is furnished in the greatest 
degree by my construction. The tubes D are 
straight, as is also the cross-tube D', and the 
ends of all these tubes are exposed beyond 
the setting of the generator, so that by re 
moving the heads with which they are pro 
vided a tube brush or scraper may be passed 
through them and all the foreign matter re 
moved from them. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letter's Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a steam-gener 
ator, of a heater consisting of longitudinal 
tubes and a cross-tube connecting them near 
their end, said tubes being exposed to the 
heat of the furnace and having their ends ex 
posed for cleaning, a feed-pipe connected with 
One end of the one longitudinal tube and a 
pipe leading from the corresponding end of 
the other longitudinal tube for delivering 
Water from the heater, substantially as herein 
described. 
2. The combination, with a steam-gener 
ator, of a filter, F, a feed-Water heater outside 
the generator, exposed to the heat of the gen 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
ITC) 
II5 
I25 
399,781 
3 
ing and delivery chambers of the filter, 
whereby provision for cleaning the filter or Io 
blowing off the generator from the surface is 
afforded, substantially as herein described. 
THOS. J. REYNOLDS. 
Witnesses: 
C. HALL, 
FREDK, HAYNES. 
erator - furnace and comprising a straight 
tube, as D, having its ends exposed beyond 
the brick setting of the generator to afford 
facility for cleaning, pipes leading from one 
end of said tube to the receiving-chamber of 
the filter and from the delivery-chamber of 
the filter to the generator at about the water 
line therein, and outlet-cocks in the receiv 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399881.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 399,881, 
 
J. W. GRAY DON 
SHEIT, 
Patented Mar. 19, 
1889. 
 
R 
29 
 
928)ib-cocy 
??????) 
?b 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES WEIR GRAY DON, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, ASSIGNOR 
TO ROBERT SOUTHWORTH LAWRENCE, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
SHELL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 399,881, dated March 19, 1889. 
Application filed November 8, 1888, Serial No. 290,288, (No model.) 
d 
2 o all it'hon, it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES WEIR GRAY DON, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Washington, in the District of Co 
5 lumbia, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Ordnance-Shells, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
ings. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
certain improvements in high-explosive shells 
for use with powder-guns; and it consists in 
certain novel features, which will first be de 
scribed in connection with the accompanying 
I5 drawings, and then clearly pointed out in the 
claims. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a longitudinal 
Section of a shell embodying my improve 
ments. Fig. 2 is an end view of my improved 
2O bursting-charge, consisting of a roll of what 
I term dynamite-cloth, partly broken away 
to show the non-porous covering of the cloth. 
Fig. 3 is a modification of the form of the 
bursting-charge shown in Fig. 2, showing the 
25 dynamite-cloth cut in the form of a disk, with 
a central perforation for the passage there 
through of the fuse-tube. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the casing of the shell, closed at the 
3o rear end by a screw-plug, B, and having the 
usual charge-chamber, C. 
Heretofore some high-explosive shells have 
had a lining of some material which is a non 
conductor of heat-such as asbestlis-the 
35 function of the lining being solely to prevent 
heat engendered by the explosion of the pro 
pelling-charge in the gun from reaching the 
bursting-charge. I am not aware, however, 
of the previous use of a lining made of a ma 
4o terial which, while capable of resisting the 
maximum degree of heat thus engendered, 
will, when subjected to the very much higher 
degree of heat produced by the explosion of 
the bursting-charge, be converted into a gas, 
45 thus adding to the force of said charge. The 
lining which I employ serves both these pur 
poses. 
75 
?? 
D represents the lining for the shell, which 
consists of finely-pulverized niter, n, placed 
between two layers of cloth or other suitable 5o 
fabric, c, the whole surrounded by paraffined 
paper, d, to exclude moisture of the atmos 
phere, for which the niter has an affinity, and 
which, if absorbed by the niter, would render 
the latter less efficient as a heat-resisting 55 
agent. Instead, however, of using paper for 
this purpose, I may coat each layer of cloth 
on one side with shellac with an equally-good 
result. 
E are battery-cups, which are held in place 
by a boxing, F, resting against the inner end 
of plug B, which boxing in turn is held in 
place by the bursting-charge and the lining. 
G represents the fuse-tube, of any suitable 
rigid material, extending from near the front 65 
end to near the rear end of the charge-cham 
ber and perforated throughout its length. 
The rear end of this tube passes through a 
perforation in the boxing F, and is held a short 
distance from the plug B by a flange, (), which 
rests against the front end of the boxing. 
The fuse-tube is filled to within a short dis 
tance of its forward end with any suitable 
fuse material, as fulminate of mercury, n, in 
closed in paraffined paper, h, and to its lower 
end is secured a platinum disk, II, with which 
are connected wires in p from opposite poles 
of the battery. 
N and P are wires connected to the nega 
tive and positive poles of the battery and 
leading to the front end of the charge-cham 
lber, where they are secured to binding-posts 
I 1, inserted in a screw-plug, 2, screwed into 
the shell, the said posts being provided with 
the usual contact-plates, 33. 
I do not confine myself to the use of the 
fuse above described, as other forms of fuse 
such as a time or percussion fuse-will read 
ily suggest themselves to a person skilled in 
the art as effective substitutes. 
I represents a metal plunger located in the 
forward end of the fuse-tube. It is held nor 
mally out of contact with the contact-plates 
33 by means of a coil-spring, J, which encir 
9o 
399,881 
75 
95 
I OG O 
IO5 
2 ? 
25 
I. ? 
cles it, and is secured at its front end to the 
tube and at its rear end to the plunger. 
K represents the bursting-charge, which is 
composed of a roll of what I term dynamite 
cloth, of a width to reach nearly the length 
of the charge-chamber and wrapped around 
the fuse-tube, as seen in Figs. 1 and 2. In 
stead, however, of putting up the charge in a 
roll, it may be cut up into disks, each having 
a central perforation, as seen in Fig. 3, and 
these disks then slipped down over the fuse 
tube. This dynamite-cloth I make by satur 
ating a thick woolen or cotton fabric with 
nitro-glycerine and then covering the cloth 
with thin paraffined paper, i, or other equiva 
lent substance, the purpose of which is to 
prevent the nitro-glycerine from exuding 
from the fabric. 
Neither the electrical fuse nor the dynamite 
cloth is claimed herein specifically, but only 
in combination with each other and with the 
other elements of my improved shell, as they 
are the Subjects of other applications for Let 
ters Patent of the United States filed by me, 
the application for patent on the electrical 
fuse bearing date October 9, 1888, and num 
bered 287,631, and the application for patent 
on the dynamite-cloth, (under title of ex 
plosive-charge') bearing date November 8, 
1888, and numbered 290,293. 
For the purpose of lubricating the bore of 
the gun as the projectile is being ejected I 
provide the point of the shell with a flexible 
porous sack, L, filled with oil, the oil-sack be 
ing cemented to the shell, as seen in Fig. 1. 
The oil will be expressed by air-pressure as 
the projectile is leaving the gun. As friction 
is one of the main sources of heat to which 
the shell is subjected while passing through 
the gun, and as it is of great importance that 
a shell filled with a high explosive-like dy 
namite-should be subjected to as little heat 
as possible, the utility of this lubrication wil 
be manifest. 
My improved lining will resist a consider 
bly higher degree of heat than the shell will 
be subjected to on the discharge of the gun, 
for niter resists Something over 600 Fahren 
heit, and consequently the bursting-charge 
will be amply protected against premature 
explosion. When, however, the niter in the 
lining is subjected to a temperature above 
644. Fahrenheit, as it will be by the heat pro 
duced by the explosion of the bursting-charge, 
it will evolve oxygen gas very freely, and this 
gas, mingling with the gases produced by the 
high explosive, will render the latter very 
much more effective. It Will thus be seen 
that this lining is radically different from all 
other shell-linings having but the single qual 
ity of resisting heat. 
When the shell is thrown from the gun and 
strikes, the momentum of the plunger I will 
carry it, against the stress of spring J, for 
65 ward between the contact-plates 33, and thus 
55 
35 
-- 
close the electric circuit, when the platinum 
disk H will at once become heated and ignite 
the fulminate of mercury in the fuse-tube, the 
explosion of which will detonate the bursting 
charge, and that in turn will act upon the 
lining, with the result above indicated. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
2 
Patent, is- 
1. In a shell having a high-explosive burst 
ing-charge, the combination, with the shell 
casing, of a niter lining for the charge-cham 
ber, for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a shell having a high-explosive burst 
ing-charge, the combination, with the shell 
casing, of a pulverized-niter lining for the 
charge-chamber, for the purposes set forth. 
3. In a shell having a high-explosive burst 
ing-charge, the combination, with the shell 
casing, of a lining for the charge-chamber 
composed of pulverized initer enveloped in a 
material which will not absorb moisture, for 
the purposes set forth. 
4. In a shell having a high-explosive burst 
ing-charge, the combination, with the shell 
casing, of a lining for the charge-chamber 
composed of pulverized niter enveloped in a 
suitable fabric covered with paraffined paper, 
for the purposes set forth, 
5. The combination, With a shell-casing, of 
a flexible porous sack containing oil secured 
to the point of the shell, for the purpose set 
forth. 
6. In a shell, the combination, with the 
shell-casing, a fuse, and a device for igniting 
the fuse, of a high-explosive bursting-charge 
consisting of a cloth fabric Saturated with 
nitro-glycerine, substantially as described. 
7. In a shell, the combination, with a shell 
casing, a fuse, and a device for igniting the 
fuse, of a high-explosive bursting-charge con 
sisting of a cloth fabric saturated with nitro 
glycerine and covered by a non-porous. Sub 
stance, substantially as described. 
S. In a shell, the combination, with the 
shell-casing, a fuse extending longitudinally 
of the charge-chamber, and a device for firing 
the fuse, of a high-explosive cloth fabric Sur 
rounding the fuse, substantially as described. 
9. In a shell, the combination, with a shell 
casing, a fuse extending longitudinally of the 
charge-chamber, and an electrical device for 
firing the fuse, of a high-explosive cloth fabric 
wrapped around the fuse, substantially as de 
scribed. 
10. A shell comprising a shell-casing having 
a charge-chamber, a heat-resisting and gas 
producing lining for said chamber, a perfo 
rated fuse-tube filled with fuse material ex 
tending longitudinally of the chamber, an 
electrical device for firing the fuse material, 
and a high-explosive cloth fabric surrounding 
the fuse-tube, all as described, and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
11. A shell comprising a shell-casing having 
O 
II5 
H 2 ? 
I 25 
 
399,881 
a charge - chamber, a perforated fuse-tube 
filled with fuse material extending longitudi 
nally of the chamber, an electrical device for 
firing the fuse material, a high-explosive cloth 
fabric surrounding the fuse-tube, and a flex 
ible porous sack containing oil secured to the 
point of the shell, all as described, and for the 
purposes set forth. . . 
5 
3 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES WEIR GRAY DON. 
Witnesses: 
- 
G. W. BALLOCH, 
C. F. ROBERTS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0300001-0400000/US399981.txt	(No Model.) 
M, W, FOSTER 
GATE, 
No. 399,981, 
Patented Mar. 19, 1889. 
 
 
 
e- /XA 
WS 
Y 77. 
27. 727, 7A 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
MARK W. FOSTER, OF 
PECATONICA, ILLINOIS. 
GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 399,981, dated March 19, 1889. 
Application filed March 19, 1888, Renewed 'ebruary 19, 1889, Serial No. 300,494, (No model.) 
55 
To all athlon, it inctly conce77: 
Be it known that I, MARK W. FOSTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Peca 
tonica, in the county of Winnebago and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Gates, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to a class of gates 
known as the sliding or endwise-moving 
gates, consisting, essentially, of a gate of ordi 
nary construction mounted on a trackway 
Within a supporting-frame to move endwise 
therein, means for imparting an end wise 
movement to the gate thus mounted to open 
and close the same, and means for adjusting 
it vertically to override obstructions; also 
means for preventing animals from opening 
the gate. These, with other improvements 
represented in the drawing, and to be more 
particularly described, constitute the subject 
matter of this application. 
In the accompanying drawing I have repre 
sented my improvements isometrically. The 
main supporting-frame of my improved gate 
consists of lengthwise sills 1 and end sills, 2, 
connecting the lengthwise sills. 
Vertical 
posts 3 rise from the ends of the lengthwise 
sills, and a trackway, 4, is suspended between 
the upper portions of the vertical posts, and 
is made vertically adjustable in its connec 
tion with the posts by means of a series of 
holes. Side rails, 5, connect the vertical posts 
on opposite sides between the lengthwise sills 
and the trackway, and form a guide to the 
end Wise movement of the gate suspended 
from the trackway. 
The gate is of ordinary construction in the 
lmain, consisting, essentially, of lengthwise 
bars 6, connected at suitable, intervals by ver 
tical bars 7, S, and 9, of which the bar's S and 
9 rise above the trackway on opposite sides 
thereof. A lengthwise bar, 10, is pivoted at 
One end between the vertical bars 9, and is 
made vertically adjustable at its other end by 
means of a series of holes formed in the ver 
tical bars S, by means of which the forward 
Or free end of the gate may be elevated or 
depressed to correspond to the inclination of 
the ground. Traveling sheaves li, to engage 
the trackway, are fixed to the end portions of 
the lengthwise bar 10, forming a truck or car 
riage, on which the gate is supported to move 
endwise in its supporting-frame. A sheave, 
12, placed between the vertical bars 9, to en 
gage the under edge of the trackway, serves 
to hold the gate in place thereon. One of the 
lengthwise bars 6 is provided with a rear ex 
tension, 13, on which a counterbalance-Weight, 
14, is made lengthwise adjustable to prop 
erly balance the gate on its trackway. Ped 
estals 15, of any suitable construction, to 
support the operating mechanism of the gate, 
are placed at a proper distance from the gate 
on opposite sides of the gate-supporting 
frame, and are held in their relative position 
by means of bars 16, which connect them 
with the lengthwise sills of the supporting 
frame. An operating-lever consisting of the 
arm 17 and open frame of trapezoidal form 
consisting of a bar, 18, parallel with the op 
erating-arm, and end bars, 19 and 20, connect 
ing the bar 18 with the operating-arm 17, is 
pivoted at 21 to the upper face of the pedes 
tal. An eccentric, 22, with hand-lever 23 at 
tached, is pivotally connected at 24 to the 
pedestal within the open trapezoidal frame 
in such a manner that an alternate horizon 
tal movement of the hand-lever will impart a 
like movement to the operating-alm 17. 
For the purpose of preventing undue Wear 
of the operating-lever in its movements upon 
the pedestal, a plate, 25, preferably of metal, 
is placed on the pedestal, over which the op 
erating-lever is made to move in operating 
the gate. 
To protect the operating-lever in its con 
nection with the pedestal, a cover, 26, is placed 
over the operating parts. 
A pitman, 27, connects the free end of the 
operating-lever 17 with a transverse bar, 28, 
fixed to the rear end of the gate, on which it 
is made vertically adjustable, for a purpose 
to appear hereinafter. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that al 
ternating movements of the hand-lever 23 
will impart endwise movement to the gate in 
one or the other direction, corresponding 
to the alternate movements of the hand-lever. 
Thus in approaching the gate the movement 
of the hand-lever toward the gate will cause 
it to open, and the opposite movement of the 
hand-lever will close it. 
By means of the vertical adjustability of 
the track the gate may be adjusted to any 
O 
25 
35 
45 
95 
IOO 
2 
- 
399,981 
height Within the limits of the devices, to 
cause it to override snows or other obstruc 
tions, or to permit smaller animals to pass 
under the gate. 
When adjusting the gate, it 
will be necessary to adjust the transverse 
bar 28 on the rear end of the gate to corre 
spond with the vertical adjustment of the 
gate. Vertical posts 29, with inward edges 
30 flaring outward, are joined at their upper 
ends by a transverse bar, 31, forming a latch 
post, which is fixed in the ground in position 
to receive the free end of the gate when closed. 
A rod or bolt, 32, is passed through the verti 
cal posts at or near the upper edge of the 
gate, and by means of a series of holes formed 
in the posts in vertical line is made vertically 
adjustable to the height of the gate. The 
forward upper end of the gate is provided 
with a V-formed guide, 33, projecting beyond 
the gate, to insure the entrance of the gate 
b:tween the vertical posts. A catch-hook, 34, 
is fixed on the forward upper corner of the 
gate to pass under the transverse rod 32 in 
Such position as to engage the rod to prevent 
the opening of the gate if from any cause its 
free end should be raised. The employment 
of the eccentric in connection with the operat 
ing-lever serves to increase the movement 
or throw of the hand-lever for the purpose of 
giving greater purchase or leverage to move 
and to operate the gate. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with a supporting 
frame, of a horizontal track Way, a gate hav 
ing a rail extending rearward of a vertical line 
drawn at the rear of the points of contact of 
the gate with the said trackway, and a counter 
balance adjustably secured to the rear ex 
tension of said rail, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of a Supporting-frame, 
a horizontal trackway Secured in stable ad 
justment to and made vertically adjustable 
in its connection with the supporting-frame, 
a gate supported on said track Way, and a 
counter-balance secured to the gate at a point 
to the rear of the points where the gate en 
gages said trackway, substantially assetforth. 
3. The combination of a Supporting-frame, 
a horizontal trackway, a carriage secured to 
the vertical supports of the gate in stable 
adjustment and engaging said track Way, the 
gate suspended from the said carriage, a 
roller between the vertical supports of the gate 
to engage the under edge of the trackway, 
and a weight adjustably secured at one end 
to counterbalance its opposite end, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. The combination of an operating-lever 
having a pivotal connection with the pedestal 
support, an eccentric and hand lever having 
a pivotal support. Within an open framese 
cured to the operating-lever, and a link-con 
nection of the operating-lever with the gate, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with the latch-post, of a 
gate having a V-formed guide to enter within 
the latch-post, a vertically-adjustable rod, and 
a safety-catch to engage the rod, Substantially 
as set forth. 
55 
MARK W. FOSTER. 
Witnesses: 
A. O. BEHEL, 
E. BEHEL. 
O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400090.txt	(No Model.) 
J. KNAPP. 
WELOCIPEDE, 
No. 400,090, 
Patented Mar. 26, 1889. 
W 12 2 
Witnesses: 
 
InVentOr: 
Attorney. 
N. PEERs. Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH KNAPP, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK. 
VELOCIPEDE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,090, dated March 26, 1889. 
Application filed January 15, 1889, Serial No. 296,418, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all tuhon, it inctly conce/7 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH IXNAPP, of Buf 
falo, in the county of Erie and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Wheeled Vehicles; and I 
do hereby declare that the following descrip 
tion of my said invention, taken in connec 
tion with the accompanying sheet of draw 
ings, forms a full, clear, and exact specifica 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
This invention has general reference to 
Wheeled Vehicles, especially that class desig 
nated bicycles' and tricycles; and it con 
Sists, essentially, in the novel and peculiar 
combination of parts and details of construc 
tion, as hereinafter to be first fully set forth 
and described, and then pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings already mentioned, which 
serve to illustrate my said invention more 
fully, Figure 1 is a side elevation of my im 
proved bicycle. Fig. 2 is a front elevation, 
and Fig. 3 a plan, of the same. Fig. 4 is an 
elevation of a portion of the double-rimmed 
wheel, and Fig. 5 is a plan of the bridge 
piece connecting the two rims. 
Like parts are designated by corresponding 
letters of reference in all the figures. 
The object of my present invention is the 
production of a bicycle which shall be capa 
ble of standing unsupported in an upright 
position. It shall, furthermore, be more easily 
Operated by being in more perfect balance 
and having a broad wheel-base. To reach this 
end I provide this bicycle with a main or driv 
ing wheel, A, of any suitable diameter, said 
wheel having two rims, 22, secured together 
by means of a series of bridge-pieces, E, con 
necting said rims with each other, and by the 
spokes D with the hub 10, as clearly illus 
trated in the figures. This wheel is fixed 
upon an axle having its bearings in the lower 
end of a fork, B, the upper end of which ter 
minates in a cross-piece, 11, while near this 
upper end there is a connecting-piece, 12, be 
tween which two pieces the end U of the 
backbone G is pivoted by a bolt, 13, as shown 
in Fig. 2. 
To the cross-bar II is Secured the handle 
le. 
H, having the handles proper, h, in the usual 
To the axle of the wheel A are secured 
cranks 14, to which in turn are pivoted the 
treadles F in the usual manner, Said treadles 
consisting, preferably, of angular rubber 
blocks revolving upon a central rod, 16, as 
illustrated in Fig. 2. 
To the backbone G is affixed near its for 
ward end a hinge-piece, IS, engaging a simi 
lar piece, 20, secured to the seat K, there be 
ing, furthermore, secured to said backbone a 
stud-plate, 19, engaging the lower end of a 
spiral spring, I, while the upper end engages 
a stud-plate, T, fastened to the under side of 
the said seat near its rear end. The Seat is 
carried by the said spiral Spring L in a very 
simple but effective manner. 
A suitable distance below the stud-plate 19 
there is affixed to the backbone G a double 
eye, Q, between which is pivoted a suspend 
ing-rod, MI, having a stop, R, bearing against 
the upper side of one of the eyes, and thereby 
keeping it in a horizontal position, Said stop, 
however, not interfering with said rod M, be 
ing elevated when desired. The object of 
this rod is to support a platform, N, hinged 
to the backbone G at P, said platform COn 
sisting of a light lattice-Work or frame car 
ried by the chain O and being intended to be 
used as a parcel-carrier and a step for mollht 
ing the bicycle in a manner readily compre 
hended. The lower end of the backbone is 
bifurcated at G' and the fork extended back 
Ward a Suitable distance to receive between 
them the trailing wheel V, said wheel being 
constructed with a double rim, &c., precisely 
the same as the front wheel, A, the details of 
the construction of which will hereinafter be 
fully set forth and described. 
In the handle H there is centrally an ap 
erture, i, Fig. 2, through which is passed the 
lever I of the brake, the forward end, J, of 
which is bifurcated and each fork provided 
with a shoe, 21 and 22, as clearly shown in 
Figs. I and 3, whereby the brake is caused to 
act upon both rims of the wheel A by lifting 
the handle I of said brake-lever. 
The wheels A and V consist each of two 
rims, 22, as mentioned, connected together at 
suitable intervals by the bridge-pieces E, con 
O 
25 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
400,090 
 
said bridge-pieces having the passage for the 
spokes D, and the hub 10, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. In bicycles and tricycles, a main wheel 
consisting of two rims connected together by 
a series of bridge-pieces, a single lub, and 
spokes, as described, in combination with the 
fork T3, backbone G, seat IV, and trailing 
wheel V, the whole being constructed and 
comined as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The contination, with the fork B, hav 
ing cross-pieces 11 12, of the backbone G., piv 
oted between said ('1'oss-pieces, the handle II, 
having the notchi, and the brake-lever I, with 
fork J and Iake-shoes 21 22, as and for the 
object stated. 
4. The combination, with the backbone G., 
of the parcel-carrier N, hinged to the backbone 
at I and supported by the supporting-rod M, 
as and for the purpose mentioned. 
5. The combination, with the backbone G, 
of the hinged parcel-carrier N, supported by 
the supporting-rod M, having suitable stol), R, 
engaging the double eye Q, and the chain O, 
as and for the purpose specified. 
6. The bridge-pieces E, as described, con 
sisting of the plates 33, cross-piece 5, andl 
central eye, f, said bridge-piece having the 
spoke D secured by the locking-nuts 7 S, as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
iny invention I have heireto set my hand in 
the presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
OSEIPI IXN APP. 
\ttest: 
ICHAEL.j. STARK, 
WA, C). SARK. 
sisting each, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5, of two 
plates, 33, connected together by, preferably, 
curved ci'oss-ial' 5, having centrally an eye, 
4, through which the spoke ID is passed, lock 
lnuts (3 and 7 being enployed on the Outer 
ends of said spokes to tension them and so 
curely fasten the parts in position. The plates 
3 have holes S. by means of which and rivets 
9, Fig. 1, they are secured to the lims, but 
they may be brazed ol' otherwise secured to 
the rims well desired. When the rins are 
not to be tired with a juiber land, they are 
constructed of flat metal, as show in in Figs. 2 
and 3, and the plates 33 are arranged accord 
I5 ingly; but, when they are to be this tired with 
the 'tile tires ' ', I 
refer to construct the 
rims 2 2 of semicirculili' chai nel-iron, as 
show in Fig. 4, so that the rubier tires hav 
a circulai' (''Oss-section can be spring 
2O int() the gutter-like circumference of the rim, 
all thereby secul'ely retained in position. 
The advaitages delived for the construg 
tion of the bicycle as described are that, the 
Wheels being double-limined, the vehicle will 
stallid in : 1 ("ect ()sition without support, 
the 'ely inakijig it much easier to ride, be 
sides presenting other obvious advantages. 
In in Clinting the licyclist steps with one 
foot, upon the barcel - carrier N, and then 
a seat K, resiling his foot, when ever 
(lesired upon the laterally-projecting support, 
C on the folk 3. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to sect 'e by Letters 
1. The clouille - tired wheel A, having the 
bridge-pieces E, (onecting said is o' tires, 
35 latent of the trited States 
3o incults in 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400190.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 400,190, 
D. S. CHAPIN, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1 
ROLLER GIN. 
Patented Mar. 26, 1889. 
 
gesagassis 
S2 assasazzagavarawasarasikassasset. 
rescorecomeworve 
assissifzaaassassia sease 
 
A. 
p 932 
2- 
27 
-2. 
726.a 
PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
864. 
5, 
62,4221.2% 
(No Model.) 
- 
D. S. CHAPIN. 
 
No. 400,190, 
ROLLER, CIN. 
e 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
889. 
an arra- Af. 
- 
i. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, E.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL S. CHAPIN, OF MILFORD, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ROLLER. G. N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,190, dated March 26, 1889. 
Application filed August 16, l888, Serial No. 282,842, (No model.) 
55 
- 
?o Col/, whon it inctly concer'7. 
Be it known that I, DANIEL SIMEON CHA 
PIN, of Milford, in the county of Worcester 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Roller-Gins, 
of which the following is a specification, ref. 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a broken front elevation, Fig. 2 a. 
broken plan, and Fig. 3 a broken rear eleva 
tion, of a gin embodying my invention. Fig. 
4 is a section on line 4 4 of Fig. 2, and Fig. 5 
is a section on line 55 of Fig.1. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
gin in which the seeds are effectually sepa 
rated from the cotton without injury to the 
staple or fiber; and my invention consists, 
mainly, in the combination of the main cyl 
inder, seed-arrester, and beater shown in 
Patent No. 284,223, dated September 4, 1883, 
With a fan arranged to prevent the cotton 
from passing over the beater, as more fully 
explained hereinafter. 
Another feature of my invention relates to 
quickening the feed, and consists in the com 
bination, with the cylinder, seed-arrester, and 
beater, of a hood, through which a draft of 
air is maintained. 
In the drawings, A is the main frame; B, 
the main cylinder; D, the beater, and G the 
Seed-arrester, these parts being substantially 
as shown in Patent No. 284,223. 
F is the fan. Cylinder B, beater D, and fan 
F are mounted on the main frame, and are 
respectively rotated, as indicated by arrows 
in Fig. 4. Cotton to beginned is fed to the 
main cylinder from chute H, of ordinary con 
struction, and portions of it are carried by 
the rotation of cylinder Bunder seed-arrester 
G, held up to its work by springs g, substan 
tially as in the Osgood patent, No. 284,223. 
The beater D strips the seeds from the cot 
ton, and the fan F prevents the unginned cot 
ton from passing over the beater D. This 
combination of the fan with the beater, the 
main cylinder, and seed-arrester is the main 
novelty of my invention, and is a highly-im 
portant improvement on machines of this 
class. 
Hitherto in Osgood's gin, described in Pat 
ent No. 284,223, on which gin mine is an im 
provement, some of the unginned cotton has 
O 
25 
35 
45 
. 
frequently been carried over the beater and 
some of the seeds crushed between the beater 
and seed-arrester. 
Another feature of my invention is the com 
bination of the beater, seed-arrester, and main 
cylinder with a hood, J, and draft-pipe i, in 
which a current of air is maintained in the 
direction shown by the arrow in the pipei in 
Fig. 4 by means of any suitable contrivance 
say, for example, by means of a fan in the 
pipe, the fan being constructed and arranged 
in the pipe in a way too well known to re 
quire description-and this draft aids in draw 
ing the cotton toward the seed-arrester and 
main cylinder, and thereby greatly increases 
the capacity of the gin. 
The hood is mounted on the frame of the 
machine and covers the rotary parts above 
referred to in a well-known way; and as the 
pipe in which the draft referred to opens out 
of the chamber formed by the hood and other 
parts of the machine the operation of the 
draft-creating apparatus in the pipe sucks in 
air through chute H, in which the cotton to 
beginned is placed, and so aids in drawing 
the light fibers toward the seed-arrester and 
cylinder, as above stated. The cylinder B is 
best provided with longitudinal grooves b, 
forming a roughened surface, on which the 
fibers are caught as the cylinder rotates. 
The hood J is conveniently formed of side 
pieces, 1, attached to the sides of the machine 
and projecting above the fan, and the curved 
piece 3, the lower edge of which is supported 
by a cross-piece, 4, (see Fig. 4) the upper por 
tion resting upon the side pieces, 1. The side 
pieces, 1, are provided with springs 2, pro 
jecting above them and adapted to pass 
through the holes in the part 3 to keep the 
part 3 in place on its supports 11 and 4. As 
shown in the drawings, the part 3 extends 
from the cross-piece 4 upward and forward 
over the hood and reaches from one side of 
the machine to the other side thereof. 
In practice I drive the fan, beater, main 
cylinder, and doffer by a series of belts, a, and 
pulleys a', the stud 5, which is secured to 
the frame of the machine, carrying tWO pull 
leys, a', one of which is belted to a pulley, a?, 
on the journal 6 of the cylinder B, while the 
other pulley, a ', on the stud 5 is belted to a 
pulley, a', on the shaft 7 of beater D, this 
65 
75 
95 
CO 
2 
400,190 
beater, and the quantity of cotton ginned in 
a given time is greatly increased. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of the main cylinder 
B, beater D, seed-arrester G, and fan F, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the main cylindel' 
B, beater D, seed-arrester G, and hood J, pro 
vided with draft-pipei, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
D. S. CAPIN. 
Witnesses: 
J. E. MAYNADIER, 
JOHN R. SNOW. 
5 
shaft 7 being provided with another pulley, (t'. 
at its opposite end, which is belted to a pull 
ley on the journal S of the doffer I, with which 
my machine is provided, the doffer having the 
usual projections, i. The shaft 7 carries an 
Other pulley, 7, from which a belt runs to a 
pulley on the journal 9 of the fan F. The 
shaft. Ol' journal 7 is belted to a driving-shaft, 
and thus motion is transmitted to all the 
'o parts of my machine, as will be readily un 
(del'stood without further description. 
The main advantage of machines embody 
ing my invention is that the unginned cotton 
is effectually prevented from going over the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400290.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 400,290, 
 
W. E. BERRY. 
SUPPORT FOR, IRONING BOARDS, 
Patented Mar, 26, 1889. 
times: 
n 
Sew. 
In Ento E: 
"..., 
a -see-J 
7 as Attor?vey, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. BERRY, OF WILLIAMSPORT, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SUPPORT FOR RONN G. BOARDS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,290, dated March 26, 1889. 
Application filed April 16, 1888, Serial No, 270,807, (No model.) 
. 
To all, u?ion, it may concer'7: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. BERRY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wil 
liamsport, in the county of Lycoming and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Supports for 
Ironing-Boards; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
Figure I is a perspective view showing the 
present invention. Fig. 2 is a like view show 
ing how the invention is adapted for use. 
This invention is an improvement adapted 
for use in connection with ironing-boards of 
any ordinary description; and the novelty 
consists in the construction of the Several 
parts and in their combination together as a 
whole, all as will now be more fully set forth 
and described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, A denotes 
a chair of any ordinary kind, and on this is 
placed, as in position for use, the ironing 
board support. This support consists of top 
piece, B, straight-edged on the upper side, and 
which has pivotally attached to each of its 
ends the swing catch-arm C. These are hook 
shaped at their ends c, and respectively fitted 
in the construction now shown in the slots b 
in the ends of said top piece, B, and held 
therein by the pivot-pin c' but in the mere 
detail of this connection there may be many 
merely mechanical changes. In a hole, b', in 
the center of the top piece is placed the ver 
tical shaft D, screw-threaded at its upper end, 
and so adapted to be easily raised or lowered 
by merely turning it round. At its lower end 
is pivotally attached the foot piece or brace E 
by passing the end of the shaft through said 
piece in the hole e. It is confined to the foot 
piece by the pin cl, which passes through it be 
low the piece E. Thus said piece has any de 
sired revolving motion on the end of the shaft, 
As thus made, this support for an ironing 
board is applied to use by catching the hooked 
ends c of the arms C under the edge of the 
chair on opposite sides, and then while the 
device is held upright the shaft D is turned 
round, so as to press the foot piece or brace 
down upon the chair-seat. When this has 
been fully accomplished, the support Will be 
firmly and rigidly secured in a vertical posi 
tion. The top of the piece B, being horizon 
tal, will afford a convenient place to rest one 
end of the ironing-board upon, while the other 
rests upon a table, F, or upon a similar Sup 
port attached to another chair or any other 
convenient support. The foot-piece should 
preferably be placed at right angles with the 
chair-back. 
The device as thus placed on the chair Will 
be a very stable support for one end of the 
ironing-board, because as applied to the chair 
it will come so nearly centrally between the 
front and rear legs as to be squarely support 
ed by them. 
What I claim as new is 
1. An ironing-board support consisting of a 
top piece having a hooked arm pivotally se 
cured at each end and a central brace adapted 
to be raised or lowered, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The ironing - table support herein de 
scribed, consisting of the top piece, B, straight 
edged on its upper side, the hooked arms C, 
pivotally attached at its ends, the shaft D, 
movable up and down in said top piece, and 
the brace E, pivotally attached to its end, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAMI E. BERRY. 
Witnesses: 
CLINTONILOYD, 
THOMAS W. LLOYD. 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400391.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 400,391, 
   
E. BRETNEY, 
DUST COLLECTOR, 
Patented Mar. 26, 1889. 
aaaaaaaaaaaaan, NanaYaNaans 
riticizYS 
e Asty I 
S. 
N 
N 
N-averiSU 11. 
"Fly 
Sir NEI) 
pur 
 
IWVEWTOre 
- 
&ee ?au, 
Ay 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EUGENEBRETNEY, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO THE BRETNEY 
DUST COLLECTOR COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
DUST-COLLECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,391, dated March 26, 1889. 
Application filed September 22, 1887. Serial No. 250,428, (No model.) 
25 described and claimed. 
Io appertains to make and use the same. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EUGENE BRETNEY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Indian 
apolis, in the county of Marion and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Dust-Collectors; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
- 
This invention relates to that class of dust 
collectors for flour and other mills in which 
the separation of the dust particles from or 
the purification of the air is accomplished in 
I5 a dust-chamber without the use of any filter 
ing material whatever; and it has for its ob 
ject to produce a machine of this class of sim 
ple, durable, and inexpensive construction 
Which Will effectually purify the air and col 
2O lect the dust and prevent the latter clogging 
the machine and steadily and automatically 
feed the dust deposit out of the same; and it 
consists in various improvements in the de 
tails of construction, as will be hereinafter 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation, partly broken away, of my improved 
dust-collector; Fig. 2, a plan view of the ma 
3o chine, partly broken away; and Fig. 3, a detail 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
A represents the cylindrical shell, and B the 
35 inverted cone or funnel, rigidly secured to the 
lower end of the shell and forming the bottom 
thereof. These two parts-the shell and its 
bottom-may be formed of one piece of sheet 
metal, if desired, or they may be each pro 
4o vided with a laterally-projecting flange, and 
the same riveted or bolted together to form a 
Smooth surface on the interior and an air 
tight joint. An air-tight partition, C, is se 
cured to the walls of the shell, and through 
45 which extends a tube, D, concentric with the 
shell. The partition C is spirally curved or 
trends downwardly in the shell and winds 
around the tube D for a part of the length of 
the latter, making but one turn, however, 
5o around said tube, and forming an outward 
WeW. 
out the several views. 
and downward deflector, and as the spiral 
curve which is given the head necessarily 
brings one of its ends below the other, and as 
the ends are in line vertically, of course a 
space is left between the two at their terminal 55 
points which I utilize as the inlet-opening, Cl, 
the air-spout being fitted to this opening in a 
line tangential to the shell in any desired 
manner, the end of the spout entering an 
opening formed in the shell above the lower 6o 
end of the partition and terminating at the 
inlet-opening a. The spiral partition Cis in 
clined from its outer edge toward its inner 
edge at an angle of about forty-five degrees, 
so that the dust-laden air-current will be de- 65 
flected outward toward the wall of the shell 
as well as downward, the object of this incli 
nation of the partition being to throw the dust 
which rides on the current against the Wall of 
the shell, so that when the lower end of the to 
tube or cylinder ID is reached it will not be 
drawn into the same by the current and es 
cape with the air passing through said tube 
or cylinder. The tube D is flush with the up 
per edge of the shell, and extends into the 75 
same a suitable distance-about two-thirds 
the length of the cylindrical shell-said shell 
being closed by an air-tight cover which sur 
rounds the tube. 
its bottom by means of a cap, b, having a 
screw-threaded perforation therein, through 
which the screw-rod c passes. This rod car 
ries at its upper end or head within the cone 
a suitable step, d, so that the upright shaftE, 85 
which rests in the same and passes up through 
the cone and shell and through the tube D, 
may be adjusted as desired by merely apply 
ing a tool to the rod and turning the same. 
The lower end of the cone or funnel B is pro- 9o 
vided with slots e, in the sides of the wall of 
the same, through which the dust may escape. 
At or near the lower end of the shaft E a 
deflector, F, is secured, so as to surround the 
same and leave a narrow circular passage be- 95 
tween it and the wall of the cone. This de 
flector is shown as cone-shaped; but it is ob 
vious that other shapes or forms may be 
given it to secure the result sought -i.e., the 
deflection of the air upwardly and the pas- Ioo 
The inverted cone or funnel B is closed at 8o 
 
 
 
8 
- 
400,391 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
sage of the material between its periphery 
and the wall of the cone or funnel. This par 
ticular form of deflector (the cone) is, how 
ever, possessed of certain peculiar advantages 
which constitute it an independent invention, 
and I have therefore made it the broad sub 
ject-matter of another application, No. 238,851, 
filed May 20, 1887. The adjustability of the 
deflector (herein shown as effected through 
the above-described adjustment of the rod E) 
I also regard as my invention, broadly, and 
have made it the subject-matter of my appli 
cation, No. 274493, filed May 21, 1888. To 
this deflector I may attach in any suitable 
manner conveyer flights or scrapers 9, where 
by the rotation of the shaft E will cause the 
flights or scrapers to sweep any material 
which may be deposited under the deflector 
out of the machine through the slots e. As 
will be explained hereinafter, these flights 
are not always or absolutely necessary to the 
Successful operation of the machine; but as 
they perform a useful function I may use 
them when found desirable. 
At its upper end the shaft E carries a wind 
wheel, H., of any desired or known construc 
tion, the only requisite being that the blades 
or wings thereof be so set that a current of 
air from below upwardly through the concen 
tric tube within which the wheel is located 
may turn the same, and thus rotate the shaft 
E. The wheel is adjustably attached to the 
shaft, so that it may be moved up and down 
thereon, as desired, and its blades are made 
adjustable in the hub, so that they may be 
adjusted to any desired angle of inclination 
to vary the distance between them. The up 
per end of the shaft is supported in a bear 
ing formed in a cross-bar, f, which extends 
across the machine and is secured to the shell. 
The slots e may be provided with sliding 
doors, so that they may be covered or uncov 
ered or the size of the openings regulated at 
pleasure. 
It has been found in the practical operation 
of this class of dust-collectors that the air 
current when leaving the machine invariably 
carries with it the very finest particles of dust, 
and no machine with which I am familiar is 
free from this objectionable feature. It has 
also been discovered that this fine dust es 
capes with the air which passes up into the 
tube D immediately upon reaching the end of 
the same. This is owing to the fact that the 
dust is so light that the centrifugal force im 
parted to it is not sufficient to overcome the 
strength of the blast or air-current, and it is 
therefore carried into the tube and up the 
Wall of the same and out of the machine. It 
is also a fact that the main outward current 
of air spreads or expands when it reaches the 
tube and Whirls up the wall of the same, and 
that a central downward current enters the 
open mouth of the tube and meets the upward 
or outward current, and, commingling with 
the same, passes out with it along the wall of 
the tube, and probably causes the expansion of 
the upward current. The dust thus escaping 
is the very finest and lightest, and therefore 
the most dangerous to the health of the Opera 
tives, as well as the most liable to become ig 
nited and cause the destruction of the mill. 
For the purpose of curing these defects, to 
which the above-described machine is also 
subject, I have made a slot, h, in the Wall of 
the tube D, which follows the spiral direction 
of partition C around one-half of the tube, 
being on the side opposite that which is ad 
jacent the inlet-opening (, and at the opening 
a, I have left a space or opening, h', between 
the outer wall of the tube D and the end of 
the spout. Thus it will be seen that I form 
a chamber in the upper part of the shell A, 
the top of which is the covering for said shell, 
the bottom being the partition C, and the end 
wall being formed by the side of the spout 
within the shell, said chamber communicating 
with the interior of tube D by the sloth, and 
also having a vent at h' at the mouth of the 
spout. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The current of dust-laden air is forced into 
the machine through a pipe or spout, One end 
of which is fitted to the inlet-openilug (it be 
tween the ends of the partition by any desired 
form of fan, so that the current will enter the 
machine at a tangent to the wall of the shell, 
and, circulating around the tube D, will be 
directed outwardly and downwardly or Spi 
rally by the partition C, the dust being thrown 
into the angle formed by the shell and the 
inclined partition, where it assumes the form 
of a rope, and upon leaving the end of the 
same will maintain the whirling motion which 
it has thus acquired downwardly along and 
against the inner surface of the wall of the 
shell and its conical bottom, the dust being 
thrown outwardly against said wall, and down 
which it gravitates or is carried by the whirl 
ing current in a spiral or winding direction 
until it reaches the deflector, where the Sep 
aration of the dust from the air occurs, the dust 
passing between the lower edge or periphery 
of the deflector and the wall of the conical 
bottom, and, maintaining the whirling move 
ment given it by the current of air, escapes 
from the machine through the slots in the 
wall, or through the open bottom of the same, 
while the current of air is turned by the de 
flector inwardly, and, descending the same, 
passes up through the center of the chamber, 
still maintaining its rotary or whirling move 
ment, enters the tube D, and while escaping 
from the same rotates the wheel H and shaft 
E, and thus gives a rotary movement to the 
deflector with its flights or scrapers, to sweep 
out of the machine any material which may 
be deposited under the deflector, to prevent 
the clogging of the machine by any accumu 
lation of dust at this point. The fine dust 
which is carried out of the shell and into the 
tube by the air which firsts escapes is car 
ried whirling up the inner surface of the tube 
until it reaches the sloth, where it passes 
75 
95 
IOC) 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
O 
25 
400,391 
3 
into the chamber over the partition, its pas- and an inletin said chamber opening between 
Sage being materially assisted by a suction 
the ends of said partition, of a deflector Sup 
current, which is created by the blast enter 
ported in the tapering bottom, so that the dust 
ing the machine, sucking the air through the 
may escape between it and the Wall of the 
opening h' at its mouth, thus drawing the 
bottom, as set forth. 
fine dust through the openingh' into the main 
3. The combination, with a cylindrical dust 
draft or blast, with which it is again forced 
collecting chamber having a conical bottom, 
into the shell and again subjected to treat 
inlet and outlet openings, and a concentric 
ment, the result being that only the slightest, 
tube within said chamber, of a spirally-curved 
if any, quantity of dust is ejected or escapes 
and inclined partition connecting the inner 
from the machine with the air-current. 
surface of the chamber with the outer Sur 
Having thus described my invention, what 
face of the tube, whereby a current of air 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
may be forced into said chamber, Substan 
Patent, is 
tially as described. 
1. The combination, with a cylindrical dust 
4. The combination, with a cylindrical dust 
collecting chamber having a conical bottom 
collecting chamber having a conical bottom, in 
provided with a suitable outlet-opening and 
let and outlet openings, and a spirally-curved 
a concentric tube within said chamber, of a 
and inclined partition, of a concentric tube 
spirally-curved or winding partition arranged 
having a slot in its wall, an air-spout entering 
between the inner surface of the wall of the 
said chamber, and a vent or opening adjacent 
chamber and the outer surface of the wall of 
to the mouth of said spout, whereby a draft 
the tube, said chamber having an inlet-open 
is created through the slot in the tube above 
ing adapted to receive the current of dust 
the partition, substantially as described. 
laden air at a tangent to the Wall of the cham 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
ber, and a suitable deflector, as set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
2. The combination, with a cylindrical dust 
collecting chamber having a tapering bottom 
provided with a discharge-outlet, a tube se 
cured within said chamber, a spirally-curved 
and inclined partition surrounding said tube, 
EUGENE BRETNEY. 
ROBINSON WHITE, 
C. E. BRAINARD. 
Witnesses: 
35 
4o 
45 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400491.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
COMBINED SYRINGE AND MEDICINE CASE. 
No. 400,491. 
G. B. ROSS. 
Patented Apr. 2, 1889, 
 
 
 
 
 
Z 
--- 
Z0 
- - 4 
SNSNNanyxnay 
SN s&S 
2GGSS-39699C9 
i 
SGSSN 
X 
, 
8 
SNS Navalaswastersranssessessess 
2RSRSSRSCRRSSN 
PRRRPPPPPP 
Fifting 
-6 
1. 
W 
1 
8 
f 
76 
Sas 
9 
Z6 
 
Witnesses, 
M6-4-(4. 
ay 
s 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D., c. 
16-- /6, 4-y. Inventor, 
Attorney. 
ele1722- - 
blue/4 
By 4. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE B. ROSS, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK. 
COMBINED SYRINGE AND MEDICINE-CASE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,491, dated April 2, 1889. 
Application filed December 29, 1888, Serial No. 294,914 (No model) 
IC 
25 
To all, whon, it innay concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE B. ROSS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Buffalo, 
in the county of Erie and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Pocket Medicine-Cases, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
convenient combined pocket-case and syringe 
for carrying medicine, and having also within 
it the means for mixing the medicine with 
liquid and administering it when required, all 
of which will be filly and clearly hereinafter 
described and claimed, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the device. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal central sec 
tion through the same. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
longitudinal central section through the 
syringe separate from the case, showing it 
partly opened or the piston partly withdrawn, 
and a small pellet or tablet of medicine in po 
sition to be shaken up with water or other 
liquid and dissolved. Fig. 4 is a cross-section 
through line a, b, Fig. 1. 
In said drawings, 1 represents the outer 
case. 2 is a reduced portion adapted to re 
ceive the cover 3, which is fitted nicely, so as 
to leave all of the same diameter. This outer 
case is preferably made of hard rubber or 
celluloid; but it may be made of glass, metal, 
or other suitable material. In the lower por 
tion, near the end, is a ring or Washer, 4, of 
some elastic or Soft Substance, Such as cork, 
35 felt, or other similar material. Its object is 
to prevent the nozzle of the Syringe from be 
ing pushed down too far into the case. It 
also tends to keep the end of the syringe in a 
central position within the case, and also pro 
tects the end of the nozzle, and prevents it 
from being broken. 
If desired, the case 3 may be adapted to 
screw on the reduced portion 2 instead of be 
ing slipped On, as shown. 
The body or outer syringe-case, 5, is pref 
erably made of glass; but it may be composed 
of any well-known material suitable for the 
purpose. It is provided with the usual re 
duced portion or nozzle, 6, and at the top is 
an outwardly-projecting flange, 7, adapted to 
rest against the top edge of the reduced por 
So 
45 
 
55 
75 
tion 2 of the outer case, to prevent it from bea 
ing pushed in too far, and thereby injure the 
nozzle 6. The plunger or piston is a hollow 
receptacle, 8, having near the lower end a re 
duced portion, 9, to receive a suitable pack 
ing, 10, of cotton- or other soft packing mate 
rial, to insure a Water-tight fit within the case 
5. At the opposite end of the plunger is a 
ring or projecting rib, 11. Against this rib is 
a thin soft piece of felt, 12, or other similar 
soft material, surrounding the plunger and 
extending a short distance down from the rib. 
Its object is to keep the plunger central 
within the case 5, and prevent it from going 
too far into the case. At the top of the plun 
ger is another rib or flange, 13, and an open 
ing adapted to receive a stopper or cork, 14. 
This plunger, being a hollow receptacle, holds 
the medicine, preferably in the form of small 
soluble pellets or tablets 15, as being the 
most convenient to insure a proper dose of 
the medicine being used; but the medicine 
may be put up in any form desired. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
When one or more pellets or tablets are suf 
ficient for a dose, the case 1 is opened, the 
syringe taken out, and the plunger removed. 
A single one or more tablets are then taken out 
from the receptacle, by removing the stopper 
14, and put into the case 5, as shown at 16, 
Fig. 3. The plunger S (to which the stopper 
14 has been returned) is now inserted, and a 
sufficient amount of water (or other liquid) 
drawn in, and by placing the finger over the 
end of the nozzle it may be shaken until the 
pellet or pellets are dissolved, after which the 
medicated liquid may be administered in any 
way desired. 
If required, the plunger may be provided 
with a cover adapted to screw on; or it may be 
made similar to the cover shown on the outer 
CS0, 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a pocket medicine-case, the combina 
tion of an outer case, a syringe-body having a 
reduced end or nozzle adapted to fit the hold 
ing-case, a hollow cylindrical plungerfor hold 
ing the medicine and operating the syringe, 
and having an opening at the outer end pro 
vided with a stopper for closing it, and a 
packing of soft material for insuring a tight 
9o 
95 
Od 
e 
400,491 
joint for the piston within the body of the and a stopper for closing the open end of the 
syringe, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the holding-case 1, 
provided with a cover and an elastic washer, 
5 4, a syringe-case, 5, a hollow plunger or pis- 
ton, 8, provided with a packing, 10, for hold- 
ing the medicine and operating the syringe, 
plunger, substantially as described. 
GEORGE B. ROSS, 
Witnesses: 
JAMESSANGSTER, 
HENRY ASHBERY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400591.txt	(No Model.) 
4k 
No. 400,591, 
W. J. MORTON. 
TELEPHONE TRANSMITTER, 
Patented Apr. 2, 1889, 
Fif.I. 
afS. 
 
2 
  
E.4. 
NHEI 
a II 
NAssee 
N s Nine siN 
* 
7 
EmAN 
N 
NNES SS 
Niu 
N 
2 
  
"ga 
(6. ATIORNEY 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM J. MORTON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TELEPHONE-TRANSMITTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,591, dated April 2, 1889. 
Application filed February 17, 1888, Renewed February 7, 1889, Serial No. 299,088, (No model.) 
LO 
25 
35 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM J. MORTON, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Telephone-Transmitter's, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of tele 
phone-transmitters in which the resistance 
varying material is a mass of comminuted 
conducting material; and it consists in the 
construction and arrangement of the instru 
ment, substantially as hereinafter set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a vertical section of my transmitter as ar 
ranged in an inclosing-case. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the instrument separately. Fig. 3 is 
a rear view of the diaphragm or Sound-receiv 
ing plate. Fig. 4 is a section on the linea a 
of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a similar section showing 
the use of a wider separating-ring. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
artS. 
p A is a ring-shaped case, preferably of hard 
rubber or other insulating material, and hav 
ing a sloping inner periphery, as shown. The 
lower part of case A is shouldered to receive 
a plate, B, of carbon. Plate B is retained in 
place by means of the circular wire spring C, 
Fig. 1, which fits tightly within the opening 
just outside said plate, 
D is a diaphragm or sound-receiving body, 
which I make preferably of Cork. This dia 
phragm may or may not be secured to the 
lower face of case A, as desired. In Figs. 4 
and 5 it is shown as fastened to the case A 
by screws. In Fig. lit is shown not fastened, 
In the center of diaphragm Dis a cylindrical 
body of carbon, E, shouldered at its upper ex 
tremity to receive a thin ring or flat annular 
piece F, of rubber, paper, or other insulating 
material. In the center of plate B is an ap 
erture in which said carbon cylinder Efreely 
enters. At the upper part of Said aperture 
said plate B is shouldered to receive the Outer 
edge of ring F. A quantity of comminuted 
carbon, G, is placed in the box A and rests 
upon said plate B and the upper face of cyl 
inder E. The upper part of box A is shoul 
dered to receive a cover, H, and said cover is 
held in place by the circular spring I. 
O 
plate B, the other end to the cylinder E. The 
circuit then proceeds from the line-terminal 
to plate B, to the comminuted carbon, G, to 
cylinder E, and so to the other line-terminal, 
or Vice Versa. The mass of comminuted car 
bon, G, therefore, serves as a bridge between 
plate B and cylinder E. The current is pre 
vented from passing directly from plate B to 
cylinder E, or vice versa, by the air space or 
interval between said cylinder and said plate. 
When vocal or other sounds are produced 
in front of the diaphragm D, said diaphragm 
and the cylinder E are set in vibration. The 
motion so caused is communicated to the 
mass of comminuted carbon, G, and in accord 
ance with laws now well known the current 
traversing said mass of carbon between the 
electrodes B and E is modified so as to be ca 
pable of affecting a telephone-receiver con 
nected in circuit, so as to cause said receiver 
to reproduce said original sounds. 
While the presence of the tight cover H 
enables me to use the instrument in any po 
sition so long as the loose carbon is in con 
tact with the electrodes B and E, I prefer to 
arrange it as shown in the drawings-that is, 
with the diaphragm horizontal. The effect of 
the vertically-vibrating cylinder B is then to 
throw the carbon resting upon it constantly 
upward. The loose particles, meeting the 
sloping sides of the containing-box A, are di 
rected downward again toward the cylinder 
E, so that the circulation of said particles is 
maintained substantially as indicated by the 
small arrows in Fig. 4. In this way any pack 
ing of the carbon upon the electrodes is pre 
vented. 
The ring F should be of flexible insulating 
material, such as thin rubber. Its object is 
to support the loose carbon and to prevent 
the same entering and filling the space be 
tween the cylinder B and the plate E. The 
width of the ring obviously governs the hori 
Zontal distance through the comminuted car 
bon which the current must travel in pass 
ing between the electrodes, and I may use 
narrower or widerrings, as shown by compari 
son of Figs. 4 and 5, at will. 
I illustrate in Fig. 1 a disposition of my 
transmiter which I find convenient in prac 
One end of the line-wire is connected to the tice. 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
400,591 
75 
85 
and contained within said case or ring a loose 
mass of comminuted conducting material in 
contact with said electrodes, substantially as 
described. 
4. A telephone containing an inclosing case 
or ring of insulating material horizontally 
disposed and having a downwardly-inclined 
inner periphery, a horizontal plate or parti 
tion of conducting material having a central 
opening and secured at the lower portion of 
said case, a diaphragm supported below and 
parallel to said plate, a block of conducting 
material on the upper side of said diaphragm 
loosely entering said opening in said plate, 
and a mass of comminuted conducting mate 
rial resting upon said block and said plate, 
substantially as described. 
5. A telephone containing an inclosing case 
or ring of insulating material horizontally 
disposed and having a downwardly-inclined 
inner periphery, a horizontal plate or parti 
tion of conducting material having a circu 
lar central opening and secured at the lower 
portion of said case, a diaphragm supported 
below and parallel to said plate, a cylindrical 
block of conducting material on the upper 
side of said diaphragm and loosely entering 
said opening in said plate, a ring of insulat 
ing material resting upon said cylinder and 
said plate, and a mass of comminuted con 
ducting material resting upon said cylinder 
and said plate, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of the ring or case A, 
carbon plate B, containing a central open 
ing, diaphragm. D, carbon cylinder Ethere 
in, loose ring F of non-conducting material, 
and a loose mass, G, of comminuted carbon 
in contact with said cylinder and said plate, 
substantially as described. 
7. The combination of the ring or case A, 
carbon plate B, having a central opening, dia 
phragm D, carbon cylinder E therein, loose 
ring of non-conducting material, F, a mass, G, 
of comminuted conducting material in con- Io5 
tact with said plate and said cylinder, and 
cover H, substantially as described. 
8. The combination of the box M, hinged 
door L, having opening IK, tube J, secured to 
said door, cup-shaped receptacle N, supported 
by said tube and having a central opening 
communicating with said tube, and the ring 
or case A, containing carbon plate B, having 
a central opening, diaphragm D, carbon cylin 
der Ethereon, loose ring F of non-conducting 
material, and a mass, G, of comminuted con 
ducting material in contact with said plate 
and cylinder, substantially as described. 
I I5 
95 
O 
OO 
WILLIAM J. MORTON. 
Witnesses: 
D. H. DRISCOLL, 
PARK BENJAMIN. 
J is a tube or sound-receiving chamber of 
metal, which is here shown secured upon the 
door L of the inclosing-case M and directly in 
rear of an opening, K, in Said door. Said tube 
5 J Supports a cup-shaped receptacle, N, which 
has a sound-receiving opening in its bottom, 
with which the small end of tube J communi 
cates, as shown. The ring-shaped case A and 
operating parts of the telephone therewith 
to combined are placed in said receptacle, and the 
diaphragm D rests upon shoulder O, and is so 
supported with its central portion not in con 
tact with the bottom of said receptacle. In 
this way a thin air-space or sound-receiving 
15 chamber is formed between the opening of 
tube J and the diaphragm D. The tube J is 
substantially conical in form, so that the air 
waves are converged upon the center of dia 
phragm D. 
For convenience a connecting-wire, P, is 
secured to the cylinder E and extends along 
the under side of diaphragm D. To this wire 
the wire Q is secured, which leads from line 
binding post 1. The other line-binding post, 
252, connects by wire R with carbon plate B, as 
already suggested. 
The use of the ring F of insulating material 
will depend in some measure upon the size of 
the particles of loose carbon. If these parti 
3o cles be too large to enter the space between 
cylinder E and plate B, the ring F may be 
omitted; but otherwise it is desirable that the 
ring should be present, for the reasons already 
stated. 
1. 
45 
35 
I claim 
1. A telephone containing a fixed electrode 
having an opening, a movable electrode enter 
ing and loosely moving in said opening, an 
independently - vibrating support carrying 
4o said movable electrode, the said electrodes 
each having a surface disposed substantially 
in the same plane, and a mass of comminuted 
conducting material in contact with said sur 
faces, substantially as described. 
2. A telephone containing a fixed electrode 
having an opening, a movable electrode enter 
ing and loosely moving in said opening, an 
independently - vibrating support carrying 
said movable electrode, the said electrodes 
5o each having a surface disposed substantially 
in the same plane, a mass of comminuted con 
ducting material in contact with said elec 
trodes, and a body of insulating material ex 
- tending across the interval between said elec 
55 trodes, but not attached to both electrodes, 
substantially as described. 
3. A telephone containing an inclosing case 
or ring of insulating material, a plate-elec 
trode supported therein, a diaphragm, an 
6o electrode projecting from said diaphragm and 
entering an opening in said plate-electrode, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400693.txt	- (No Model.) 
C, LAWRENCE, 
ORIB. 
No. 400,693, 
Patented Apr. 2, 1889. 
A. A 2-st s sis 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
(Ottresses: 
N. EffRs. Plioto-Lithographer. washingto. b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CYRENIUS LAWRENCE, OF CLYDE, MICHIGAN. 
CRB. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,693, dated April 2, 1889. 
Application filed February 25, 1888, Serial No. 265,332, (No model.) 
15 
25 
- 
Sale. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CYRENIUS LAWRENCE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
township of Clyde, county of St. Clair, State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Cribs; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
My said invention relates to improvements 
in cribs adapted to be used in the construc 
tion of docks, breakwaters, and like purposes. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
docks, breakwaters, and similar structures in 
such a manner that the timbers used as the 
walls of the crib Will be held to the bottom of 
the water by the entire weight of the stones 
or other material used in filling, and, further, 
to so construct the crib that the piles used 
may be driven through the same, thus mak 
ing the crib, piles, and filling an entirety, no 
part being movable without the entire crib 
also moving. 
The particular construction, arrangement, 
and combination of the various parts of my 
said invention I will noW proceed to point 
out and describe, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective of a crib constructed 
in accordance with my invention, ready to be 
filled, the piles being shown in position. Fig. 
2 is a top plan view of the same. 
Referring to said drawings, A represents 
the crib, the sides and ends of which are 
constructed with double walls B C, having a 
space between said walls open at the top and 
bottom. The timbers a of the inner Walls 
project across the space between the two 
walls and are interlocked with timbers of the 
outer wall. The entire structure is braced 
by cross-beams b, which are secured to the 
upper tier of the timbers of both the inner 
and outer walls and extend across the top of 
the inner and outer compartments of the 
crib. This bracing also serves to receive the 
flooring or superstructure desired 
The compartment or space within the inner 
so walls is provided with a solid bottom or floor 
ing D, the timbers of which are of sufficient 
strength to bear the weight of the filling. 
The crib is sunk by filling the inner com 
partment with stones or other suitable mate 
rial, and when it is in the proper position piles 
-E are driven between the inner and outer 
Walls. The piles at the corners of the inner 
walls are connected by chains F, which ex 
tend over the top of the projecting timbers 
a, thus securing the crib to the piles. When 
the piles are driven, the space between said 
inner and outer walls is then filled with stone 
or other suitable material. 
My invention possesses many advantages 
over the old forms of single-wall cribs. It 
can be readily sunk at the desired point by 
simply filling the inner compartment with 
stone. The solidity given the crib and firm 
ness with which it is held to the ground by 
the weight of the filling, which is borne by 
the solid bottom of the inner compartment, 
prevents the force of the Water from raising 
any part of the crib without moving the entire 
crib. The piles also, being driven in the 
space between the inner and outer walls and 
being secured as described, are greatly 
strengthened, and their usefulness increased 
by the weight of the crib, which tends to hold 
said piles firmly in place, thus preventing all 
vibration and consequent Weakening. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent 
1. The herein-described crib, having dou 
ble walls, a space between said walls open at 
the top and bottom, and a compartment with 
in the inner walls, having a solid bottom, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
2. A crib having outer and inner walls, B 
and C, secured to each other by the project 
ing timbers a, a space between said walls 
open at the top and bottom, and a compart 
ment within the inner walls, B, having a solid 
bottom, D, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with the cribs having 
double walls, a space between said walls open 
at the top and bottom, and a compartment 
within the inner Walls, having a solid bottom, 
of suitable piles driven between the inner and 
- 
- 
35 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
 
 
2 
400,693 
the corners of the compartment being con 
nected by chains F, extending over the tim- Io 
bers a, substantially as shown and described. 
CYRENIUS LAWRENCE. 
r 
Witnesses: 
ALEX. R. AVERY, 
JNO. L. ELLIOT. 
outer walls of the crib, substantially as shown 
and described. 
4. The combination, with the crib having 
inner and outer walls, B C, a space between 
said walls open at the top and bottom, and a 
compartment within the inner walls, having a 
solid bottom, of suitable piles, E, driven be- 
tween said inner and outer walls, the piles at 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400794.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 400,794, 
C. D. ROGERS. 
BLANK HEADING DIE, 
Patented Apr. 2, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 
 
W. 
 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
A22.7 
 
  
Y. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES D. ROGERS, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
AMERICAN SCREW COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BLANK-HEADING D. E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,794, dated April 2, 1889. 
Application filed July 5, 1888, Serial No. 279,052, (No model.) 
IO 
55 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES D. ROGERs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Providence, in the county of Providence and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Blank-Head 
ing Dies, &c.; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
other's skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to let 
ters or figures of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
- 
The device forming the subject of my pres 
ent invention consists of dies for shaping 
blanks or nails requiring an excessive amount 
of metal in their head portions-as, for ex 
ample, sleigh-runner bolts, horseshoe-nails, 
&c. 
Usually heretofore in the production of 
this class of nails, &c., particularly when the 
heads thereof are considerably tapered, the 
action of the plunger or upsetting-hammer in 
striking the end of the wire or metal protrud 
ing from the face of the die caused it to bend 
toward one side of the die, thereby producing 
imperfect heads, the metal not being uni 
formly disposed. This result is due mainly 
to the fact that the metal to be upset is un 
supported laterally. 
The object of my improvement herewith is 
to overcome the disadvantages or objections 
just referred to. To that end I provide the 
die-cavity or shaping portion with narrow 
ribs arranged longitudinally therein, and ex 
tending to, or nearly to, the mouth of the die. 
The inner faces of these ribs are employed as 
a guide or support to retain the Wire in posi 
tion laterally while it is being subjected to 
the action of the heading-hammer. 
In the accompanying sheet of drawings, 
illustrating my invention, Figure 1 represents 
an end view of the die, (in halves) adapted to 
produce blanks having cone-shaped heads. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view taken 
through the center of the heading-die and the 
shearing-die, the dies being in line axially, 
and having a piece of wirelying therein, the 
end protruding from the heading-die to be 
upset to form the head of a blank. Fig. 3 is 
a similar view, the heading-die having been 
forced across the stationary die, thereby 
shearing or severing the blank from the wire 
or rod. The drawing also shows the blank 
completely formed and filling the die-cavity, 
ready to be removed therefrom. Fig. 4 is a 
perspective view of the blank thus made. 
Fig. 5 is an end view. Fig. 6 is an end view 
of my improved heading-die adapted to the 
manufacture of horseshoe-nails; and Figs. 7 
and 8 represent perspective views of the nail 
detached. 
The invention more in detail may be de 
Scribed as follows: 
A indicates the die as a whole, the same be-, 
ing made usually in two parts or halves, as 
shown. These dies are provided with a cav 
ity having the counterpart of the nail or bolt 
to be produced. In the drawings the cavity 
itself is indicated by e, its outer portion be 
ing enlarged, as at b, and having a cone 
shaped form. The construction of the die 
thus far is substantially the same as hereto 
fore made, and to which I make no specific 
claim. 
As the operating mechanism forms no part 
of this invention, and as it is readily appar 
ent to mechanics skilled in this class of Ima 
chinery that ordinary forms of machines may 
be employed in which the dies A may be 
mounted and actuated, I have deemed it un 
necessary to illustrate and describe such ma 
chinery more at length. In such former dies 
the wire U, to be cut off and formed into a 
blank, would be held or guided at the lower 
portion only, as indicated by Fig. 2, the sides 
of the enlargement b of the die-cavity failing 
to support the Wire, presuming the ribs r to 
be omitted; but by reason of the introduc- go 
tion of the series of hardened steel narrow 
ribs r the wire is guided laterally throughout 
the length of the die, thereby serving to steady 
and maintain it in a central position during 
the heading operation. 
It will be seen that the nails or blanks c 
produced in the ribbed die show a number of 
narrow grooves, n, formed in the surface of 
the head portion h, corresponding to the num 
ber and shape of the guide-ribs r. In order Od 
85 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
400,794 
to present an unbroken surface on the outer 
eld of the blank, the ends of the libs at the 
Inolti of the die are Well rounded, as shown 
by t, Fig. 2, 
&C., the counterpal't being in cli 
cated by dotted linest' in the blanks repre 
sented by Figs. 4 and S. 
In Fig. 1 two of the guide-libs are repre 
sented as being divided, one-half being in 
each part of the die. When thus alranged, 
the headed blanks are preferably forced from 
the clies end wise. The die itself in this case 
may be solid. In any event, however, where 
the wire t' or stock employed is substantially 
uniform in cross-section throughout, I make 
tle inner faces of the ribs r to bear longi 
tudinally of the wire, the ribs being separated 
a distance equal to the diamete" or thickness 
of the Stock used. 
A nanner of producing blanks by means of 
my in proved dies is as follows: I will first 
assume, however, that the dies are suitably 
moulted in a blank-machine and having, say, 
a stationary shearing-clie, (t', Fig. 2, through 
which the wire is intermittingly fed the de 
sired distance to produce a blank, the wire at 
at the same time being passed through the 
headling-die A and protruding from its face a 
distalice, ), equivalent to the amount of metal 
to be uset to form the head. 
The die is then 
eleby 
forced across the face of the die c', t 
lding 
shearing the wire, after which the he 
 
5 
maintained the wire in position-centrally, the 
metal flowing round the ribs and embedding 
them therein. After removing the blank from 
the die the latter is again placed in position 
in line with the stationary die C1' and the wire 
fed through both dies, as before described. 
... ." 
In the case of horseshoe-nails the construc 
tion of the die A, IFig. 6, is substantially the 
same, except that the head is less tapeling, the 
wire or stock being lectangular in cross-section 
and having a single lib, r", in each half of the 
die. 
The blanks or nails produced in lny int 
proved die possess advantages over those 
formed in the common die. The metal con 
posing the heads his more homogeneous, the 
holding capacity of the nail is inci 
d, due 
to the filling of the grooves in by th 
elial 
in which it is driven, and the heads are 
stronger torsionally, although employing a less 
amount of metal. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The improved clie hereill before described, 
having guide-libs in its head-forming cavity, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A die in which the heads of blanks Ol' 
nails are formed, having guide-ribs arranged 
to laterally support the wire or stock ' and 
centralize it, while being subjected to the ac 
tion of the heading-hammer, substantially as 
heleinbefore described. 
3. A die of the class described having the 
head-forming cavity provided with a series of 
ribs for guiding the wire or stock laterally, 
and adapted to be impressed into the head of 
the blank during the heading operation. 
4. The combination, in a machine for mak 
ing headed blanks or nails, of actuated dies, 
substantially as herein before described, hav 
ing a head - forming cavity provided with 
guide-ribs, for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
 
CHARLES D. ROGERS. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES HANNIGAN, 
GEO. II. REMINGTON. 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400894.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 400,894, 
J. H. BRIERLEY. 
HAIR PLUCKING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889. 
 
 
  
 
  
Suga 
iI 
NIWZ. 
Eliza. E - -2 
  
 
 
 
3 
SeaS 2 
o 
 
 
 
0/676-see 
cavene? (7% 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 400,894, 
J. H. BRIERLEY. 
HAIR PLUCKING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889. 
 
 
 
Wa 
729. 6 
II. 
W % % W % 
V ---- 
W ls. 
 
W 
 
(6/zz7vesses: 
(02/ (376---eee 
e- 7% 
Z72.2/e722,07 
f4.- yk ---- 
for 24 
Js, it 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HUGH BRIERLEY, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
HAR PLUCKING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,894, dated April 9, 1889. 
Application filed June 21, 1888, Serial No, 277,750, (No model.) 
O 
I 5 
25 
To all whom it inlay concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN HUGH BRIERLEY, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Hair-Plucking Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
Previous to my invention numerous at 
tempts have been made to devise a machine 
for plucking or pulling out the hair from fur 
bearing skins; but, so far as my knowledge 
extends, no one has hitherto produced a ma 
chine that is adapted to successfully perform 
this kind of work. 
As is well known to those skilled in the art, 
the fur or fur fiber on skins of animals-such 
as the nutria, otter, &c.--is intimately inter 
mixed with hair of greater length which runs 
or is disposed in almost every direction, and 
which is required to be removed before the 
skin can be utilized for manufacturing pur 
poses. 
Myinvention has for its object the removal 
of the hair in a simple, expeditious, and effect 
ive manner; and it consists, primarily, in rais 
ing the hair by suction or exhaust, and while 
raised plucking or pulling it out of the skin, 
and, secondarily, in the means for operating 
upon the skins to effect the removal of the 
hair, all as hereinafter more fully described, 
and particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
In the drawings which accompany this speci 
fication and form a part thereof, Figure 1 is a 
rear elevation of a machine embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a side section taken at 
the line w at of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an elevation 
taken at the left-hand side of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 
is a bottom plan, the bed-plate being broken 
away and the gears shown at Fig. 2 being 
omitted. Fig. 5 is a top view of the bed-plate 
or frame-work. Fig. 6 is a vertical section 
therethrough, taken at the line a ac, with the 
plucking-rollers and the ridge-piece or skin 
support added. Fig. 7 is an enlarged vertical 
section through the front or flattened pluck 
ing-roller, taken at the line y. Fig. S is a 
similar section taken at the line 2. 
In the several views the same parts will be 
found designated by the same letter or nu 
meral of reference. 
The bed or base plate, preferably cast of a 
single piece of metal, is provided with a 
shank, A, perforated, as at a, for the passage 
of bolts, by which the machine is attached to 
a suitable work bench, stand, or table. The 
front portion of the bed-plate is formed with 
a cylindrical extension or rim, B, a flaring 
chamber, C, and a rectangular bottom open 
ing, D. Within the rim B is fitted the lower 
end of a pipe or tube, E, which is provided 
With a suction-fan or air-exhausting device, 
F. At the bottom opening, D, are arranged 
two rollers, G and H, which pluck or pull the 
hair from the skin being operated upon. These 
rollers may be mounted in any suitable man 
ner. In the drawings I have shown the under 
surface of the bed-plate formed with semicir 
cular grooves b and c for the shafts or jour 
nals of said rollers, and half-boxes or cap 
pieces d and e, screwed onto the bed-plate, 
for maintaining the shafts or journals in po 
sition. 
The roller G is formed or provided with 
alternate flat and round surfaces and the 
roller H is made cylindrical. The ends of 
the roller G are preferably made cylindrical, 
as at 2, and between the ends the roller is 
composed of flat surfaces 3 and curved sur 
faces 4, and these surfaces are so disposed 
that there is at all times during the revolu 
tions of the rollers G and H a space between 
Said rollers for the admission of air. At the 
right-hand side of Fig. 4 a space or air-inlet 
is designated by the numeral 5. When there 
is an opening, as 5, between the rollers at one 
end or portion, the other ends or portions of 
said rollers run in contact and perform the 
plucking operation. By constructing the roller 
G in the manner shown and described the 
air-inlet 5 keeps constantly changing from 
point to point, and this construction and mode 
of operation I deem preferable; but, so far as 
the main feature of my invention is con 
cerned, the roller G may be otherwise con 
structed and the air-inlet provided in a dif 
ferent manner. 
The rollers G and II may be alternately pro 
vided with flat and curved surfaces, and many 
other variations will suggest themselves to 
the skilled mechanic desiring to provide the 
air-inlet. 
I designates a ridge-piece or support for the 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
35 
45 
 
2 
400,894 
O 
2 5 
skin, preferably made thin or sharp at its 
upper edge and arranged in line with the 
bite of the rollers G and H. It is preferably 
mounted in a frame or stand, J, which rests 
5 upon the floor of the room in which the ma 
chine is located. This frame may be made 
adjustable vertically for skins of varying 
thicknesses or lengths of hair. 
The moving parts may be operated in any 
desirable manner. 
IX designates a vertical shaft rotating in 
suitable bearings, and provided at its upper 
end with a band - pulley, L, around which 
passes a driving-belt, MI, from the power-shaft. 
I5 (Not shown.) At the lower end of the shaft 
or spindle K is secured a miter-wheel, N, that 
gears with a similar wheel, O, on one end of 
a driving-shaft, P, which near the same end 
is provided with a spur-gear, Q, and at its 
opposite end with a spur-gear, R. The shaft 
P is arranged in rear of the rim B, and l'O- 
tates in suitable bearings, ff, secured to the 
shank A of the casting or bed-plate. 
The roller G is provided with a pinion, S, 
that meshes with a pinion, T, which runs in 
engagement with the teeth of the spur-gear 
R. The roller II is provided with a pinion, 
U, which meshes with the spur-gear Q. One 
end of the role G and one end of the roller II 
is unprovided with any gear. The roller-shaft 
or axis of G is designated by the letter g in 
Fig. 2, and that of II by the letter h in Fig. 3. 
The operation of the machine will be un 
derstood to be as follows: The skin to be op 
35 erated upon is placed upon the ridge-piece 
and the unachine set in notion. The fan or 
blower is rotated rapidly and the air sucked 
or drawn up through the inlet 5 and the pipe 
Ol' tube E. The l'Ollers G and II are also ho 
4o tated rapidly and in the directions indicated 
by the arrows at Fig. 6. The skin being op 
erated upon is held by the hands of the work 
man and pulled back and forth over the 
ridge-piece, the dotted line at Fig. Gindicat 
45 ing the preferable directions of pull of the 
skin. As the skin is moved over the upper 
edge of the ridge-piece, that portion in line 
with the air-inlet, is immediately acted upon 
by the upwardly-rushing air and the hair 
5o thereupon is raised or straightened up above 
the full, and the next instant is seized by the 
curved surfaces of the rollers and plucked or 
pulled out of the skin. While the curved 
Surfaces are plucking the hair at one point 
55 or locality the flat surfaces are letting in air 
at another, and the exhausting medium F is 
raising the hair and bringing it into a condi 
tion to be seized by the rollers and pulled 
out. The machine being organized so that 
6o the air-inlet is nevel closed, the suction or 
upward draft may be kept in continual op 
eration and at full capacity. If the rollers 
were constructed so that they would cut off 
the air entirely at any time during their revo 
65 lutions, the exhaust would be interrupted 
with the result that when the air-passage 
should be again formed the force of the ex 
haust would be materially less, as it takes 
an appreciable amount of time to develop or 
obtain the full power of the suction after an 
interruption. As the rollers pluck out the 
hair they deliver it into the chamber C, from 
which it is drawn through the pipe E by the 
air and carried to any desired locality. By 
pulling the skin at an angle Over the ridge 
piece or support, as indicated, there is a tend 
ency of the hair to lift or rise and present 
itself to the plucking-rollers. 
Numerous changes in detail construction of 
the machine may be made without departing 
from the spirit of my invention, the gist of 
which has already been set forth and will now 
be embodied in the annexed clauses of claim). 
I am aware that heretofore it has been sug 
gested to raise the ful of skins and the nap of 
hat-bodies by means of an exhaust apparatus, 
in order that the ful ol' nap may be trimmed 
off evenly by a cutting or clipping contrivance; 
but I am not aware that previous to my in 
vention there had ever been devised a ma 
chine for plucking or pulling out the hair 
from fur-bearing skins which embodied the 
combination, with an air-exhausting contriv 
ance for raising the hair, of a pair of roller's 
for seizing and plucking or pulling the hair 
Out of the skin. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for plucking hair from skins, 
the combination, with a pair of plucking-roll 
ers, of a suction-creating ol' air-exhausting de 
vice for raising the hair. 
2. In a machine for plucking hair from skins, 
the combination of a pair of plucking-rollers, 
an air-inlet, and a Suction-creating or air-ex 
hausting device. 
3. In a machine for plucking hair from skins, 
the combination of a pair of plucking-rollers 
constructed to form an air-inlet and a suc 
tion-creating or air-exhausting device. 
4. In a machine for plucking hair from skins, 
the combination of a pair of plucking-rollers, 
One of Said rollers being flattened or cut away, 
and a suction-creating or air-exhausting de 
Vice. 
5. In a machine for plucking hair from skins, 
the combination of a pair of plucking-rollers 
constructed to have at all times an air open 
ing or inlet between their peripheries and a 
Suction-creating or air-exhausting device. 
6. In a machine for plucking hair from skins, 
the combination of a ridge-piece and a pair of 
plucking-l'ollers. 
7. In a machine for plucking hair from skins, 
the combination of a ridge-piece, a pair of 
plucking-rollel's, an air-inlet, and a suction 
creating or air-exhausting device. 
S. In a machine for plucking hair from skins, 
the combination of the plucking-rollers G. H., 
the air-chamber C, the pipe E, and the fan F. 
JOHN HUGII BRIERLEY. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES BRIERLEY, 
JACOB EELBEL. 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
Io5 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US400995.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 400,995, 
E. C. BEEBE & R. STONER, 
WINDMI, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889, 
67 
4 
WZ 
i? - W 
2. WIW 
A 
44, 2 
N.W.N. 
27 
 
NZ72 
N 
N77 
N 
N 
 
WITNESSES: 
- 
-- 
 
dyk 
Mung tg t 
ATTORNEYS 
(No Model.) 
No. 400,995, 
E. C. BEEBE & R. STONER, 
WIND MIT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889. 
 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
WITNESSES 
a/272-2-24 
-684 vo& 
INVENTOR, 
i.e4 
" 4 it is 
- 
ATTORIEKS, 
E. C. BEEBE & R. STONER, 
WINDMI, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889. 
(No Model) 
No. 400,995, 
 
WITNESSES: 
a4,72/2-az . 
ors 
i:. PETERS, Photo-Litigrapher. Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR, 
2.3 (- 
Br Jirg 
ATTORRIEKS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDGAR C. BEEBE AND RILEY STONER, OF GLEN ELDER, KANSAS. 
WNDML. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 400,995, dated April 9, 1889. 
Application filed April 10, 1888, Serial No. 270,180, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To al., Luhon, it nay concern. 
Be it known that we, EDGAR C. BEEBE and 
RILEY STONER, of Glen Elder, in the county 
of Mitchell and State of Kansas, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Windmills, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention is in the nature of an im 
provement in windmills, having for its object 
to provide by simple and efficient means for 
the automatic adjustment of the wind-wheel 
properly in accordance with the force and di 
rection of the wind without the use of a Vane, 
and for the automatic government of the work 
performed by the mill according to the Wind's 
power, so that the speed of the wind-wheel 
will remain approximately constant. 
The invention consists of certain novel fea 
tures of construction and combination of 
parts, substantially as hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure I is a side sectional elevation of a 
windmill embodying our improvement, show 
ing the most effective position of the wind 
wheel. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a side partly sectional elevation of 
the mill with the Wind-wheel in its inactive 
position. Fig. 4 is a detail sectional view of 
an arrangement hereinafter referred to. Fig. 
5 is a front elevation of the mill. 
In carrying our invention into effect in the 
manner illustrated in the drawings, a hollow 
standard, A, is erected on a convenient base to 
form a support for the Wind-wheel B and the 
appurtenances thereof, the Spider-like body 
C of the said wheel only being here shown, to 
which body any appropriate description of 
inclined wings may be applied to make a 
wheel which will be most effective When 
squarely facing the wind and inert when lying 
edgewise thereto. 
On the upper end of the standard A is ar 
ranged a bearing, D, to receive and support 
with the standard A a vertical tubular jour 
nal, E, said journal being fixed to or formed 
on a cross-beam, F, which supports the wind 
wheel B on one end and a counterbalancing 
Weight, G, on the other, so that the said beam 
F can revolve easily in the horizontal plane, 
and will always bein the direction of the wind, 
the wheel B acting similarly to a vane to keep 
the Weighted end of the beam F pointed into 
the wind. 
To the rear arm, F, of the beam F is con 
nected by a swing-joint a bracket, F, through 
a vertical tubular pivot, G, the jointing end 
of the arm F being bifurcated and holding 
rigidly in its branches the respective ends of 
the pivot G, and that of the bracket F being 
likewise bifurcated, but embraced between 
the branches of the arm F, and its branches 
receiving the respective parts of the pivot G 
loosely, so that the bracket F can swing 
freely in the horizontal plane independently 
of the beam F, but will be firmly supported 
therefrom. 
A stop, H, is attached to the beam-arm F. 
in a position to strike and limit the jointed 
bracket F when the latter is swung to a po 
sition approximately at right angles to the 
body of the beam, and with the bracket F is 
also connected the end of a Weighted line, 
I, which in this instance is arranged to run 
over a pulley, I', mounted on the middle of 
the beam F and downward through the tubu 
lar journal Eand hollow standard A, a weight, 
I, being attached to its end within the stand 
ard in such a manner that the weight will 
tend to hold the bracket F normally in its 
right-angular position with respect to the 
body of the beam F, and thus to the direction 
of the wind. 
To the outer part of the bracket Fis fixed 
a laterally - projecting headed stud, J, on 
which as a bearing is mounted to turn the 
hub J' of the wheel-body C, so that the wind 
wheel will be forced by the weighted line I 
constantly toward its most effective position, 
(facing the wind,) but as the power of the wind 
increases will be swung thereby against the 
tension of the Weighted line I more and more 
toward its inert position, (edgewise to the 
wind.) and the speed of rotation of the wheel 
thus remain comparatively unaffected by vari 
ations in the Wind's force. 
The wheel-body C is provided on its inner 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
50 
95 
Od 
400,995 
9o 
95 
CO 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
75 
face with an eccentric groove, C', in which is 
arranged to travel a bearing, preferably a 
friction-roller, K, as shown, mounted on the 
end of an arm, K, which works between 
guides F and is rigidly attached to or formed 
on a vertically-reciprocating yoke, K, said 
yoke having fixed thereto a shank, K, which 
is mounted to slide vertically in the tubular 
bore of the pivot G, so as to guide the yoke 
in its movement. The yoke K is provided 
also with a ball, L, which is fitted to Wolk 
within the socket of an inverted cup, L, as 
best shown in Fig. 4, and said cup L'is pivoted 
to and within the bifurcated end of a lever, 
M, the other end of which projects directly 
over the top of the Standard A and is connected 
pivotally thereat to a vertically-reciprocat 
ing pitman, N, said pitman N being arranged 
to work within the tubular journal E of the 
wheel-beam F and the hollow standard A, and 
adapted for connection. With the plunger of a 
pump or other apparatus or device to be op 
erated by the mill. 
The lever M is fulcrumed medially to and 
is adapted to slide lengthwise in a bearing, 
O, which is pivoted, so as to rock with the 
lever, to and between a pair of uprights, P, 
supported on a carriage, P, said carriage be 
ing arranged to slide in the direction of the 
length of the lever M on a guide, P, which 
is fixed to the beam-arm F. The arrangement 
is such that the pitman N will be operated from 
the wind-wheel B through the action of the 
eccentric groove C' on the yoke-arm IK and 
that of the vertically-reciprocating yoke K 
on the lever M from its universal connection 
thereto whatever be the angular position of 
the wind-wheel With respect to the beam F, 
and that when the carriage P is moved along 
its guide P the bearing O will be slid along 
the lever M, and the relative proportion of 
the arms of the lever M and the length of 
stroke of the pitman N thus changed. 
The carriage-guide P' is provided with a 
stop, P, to limit the travel of the carriage P', 
and the latter with flanges P projecting on 
opposite sides of the guide P', so as to pre 
vent lateral movement of the carriage with 
respect thereto. The carriage P is also pro 
vided in this instance with a longitudinal 
rack, P, which is adapted to be engaged and 
moved lengthwise by a segmental gear, Q, 
the said gear being pivoted to and between 
bearings depending from the guide P, and 
provided with a crank-arm, Q', for rocking it. 
The crank-arm Q is pivotally connected to a 
rod, R, which is put also in pivotal connec 
tion with a level, S, Sustaining a governor 
vane, T, which is arranged transversely to the 
length of the Swing-beam F, so as to always 
face the wind, and the ever S is pivoted to 
the beam F-in this instance just back of the 
weight G-SO that the governor-vane T can 
Swing to and from the Wind as the force of 
the same Valries, a Weight or Spring being em 
ployed to hold it in its vertical position, and 
thus through the rod R. and segmental gear 
Q automatically adjust the position of the 
bearing-carriage P. The arrangementis such 
that an increase in the force of the wind will 
shift the loose bearing O toward the outer 
end of the lever M, and thus lengthen the 
stroke of the pitman N and increase the work 
to be performed by the wind-wheel, and, on 
the other hand, a decrease in the Wind's force 
will shift the bearing O inward, shorten the 
stroke of the pitman N, and lessen the work, 
so that the speed of the wind-wheel is governed 
automatically. 
The tension of the weighted line I is so ad 
justed that it will hold the wind-wheel face to 
the wind until the force of the same becomes 
so great as to give the main pitman N the 
longest possible stroke, and will then yield, 
as the wind further increases, to permit the 
wheel to swing more and toward its inert po 
sition. 
With an opposite variation in the wind the 
operation of the two governing devices will 
be exactly reversed. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
te's Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a windmill, of a 
beam mounted to Swing in the horizontal 
plane, a bracket, a tubular pivot connecting 
the beam and bracket, a wind-wheel mounted 
on the blacket, a reciprocating yoke having a 
shank guided in the bore of the said pivot, 
operating mechanism, substantially as de 
scribed, connecting the yoke and wind-wheel, 
a pitman, and connections between the same 
and the yoke, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, in a windmill, of a hol 
low standard, a beam journaled on the Stand 
ard, a bracket connected by a swing-joint to 
the beam, a wind-wheel mounted to turn on 
the bracket, an eccentric groove on the body 
of the Wind-wheel, a reciplocating yoke ca'- 
rying an arm provided with an anti-friction 
bearing adapted to travel in the eccentric 
groove, a lever fulcrumed on the beam, a uni 
versal joint connecting the yoke and lever, 
and a main pitman Working in the hollow 
standard and beam-journal and in operative 
connection with the said lever, substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination, in a windmill, of a 
standard, a horizontally-turning beam, a wind 
wheel mounted to turn thereon, a pitman, a 
rocking lever in operative connection with 
the same, operating - connections, substan 
tially as described, between the wind-wheel 
and rocking lever, a sliding carriage having a 
rocking bearing mounted upon it and through 
which bearing said rocking lever freely passes, 
a governor - Vane, and connections, Substan 
tially as described, between said vane and the 
carriage, Substantially as set forth. 
4. In a Windmill, the combination, with a 
beam adapted to swing in the horizontal 
plane, a wind-Wheel mounted on the beam, a 
O 
O 
35 
45 
55 
 
400,995 
3. 
pitman, and a rocking lever in operative con 
nection both with the wind-wheel and pitman, 
of a fulcrum for the rocking lever supported 
on an adjustable carriage provided with gear 
teeth, a carriage-guide on the wind-beam, a 
rocking gear in engagement with the teeth of 
the carriage, a movable wind-pressed wing on 
the beam, and connections, substantially as 
set forth, between the said wing and the rock 
ing gear, substantially as described. 
EDGAR. C. BEEBE. 
RILEY STONER. 
Witnesses: 
W. D. HoBSON, 
P. H. SLACK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401095.txt	(No Model.) 
F. E. WOOD, 
LIGHTNING CONDUCTORFOR WIRE FENCES, 
2. Sheets-Sheet it. 
No. 401,095, 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889. 
 
 
'Til 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
le, 
INVENTOR; 
BY leg, 
ATTORNEYS. 
WITNESSES; 
21 
6 searcio 
% 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lahographer, wastington, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. E. WOOD, 
LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR FOR WIRE FENCES 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 401,095, 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889. 
 
 
 
  
 
if SH 
E9 s 
 
I 
Lll 
Neale assassississa 
V 
 
 
 
 
 
7, 3N3 
NVENTOR: 
f 
74 76 
244. 
By 4w Sg 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREMO N T E. WOOD OF YU C, CA, ARIZON A TERRITORY. 
LG HTN N G CONDUCTOR FOR WIRE FENCES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,095, dated April 9, 1889. 
Application filed November 28, 1888, Serial No. 292,058, (No model.) 
5 
O 
2 5 
3 5 
To att, whon it inval? concern: 
Be it known that I, FREMONT E. WOOD, of 
Yucca, in the county of Mojave and Territory 
of Arizona, have invented a new and Improved 
Lightning - Conductor for Wire Fences, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
One of the greatest objections to the present 
form of wire or barbed-wire fences is that in 
electric storms the wires of the fence attract 
the electric fluid, and as the wires are usually 
practically insulated from the ground it fre 
(uently happens that the current passing over 
the Wires discharges through the body of an 
animal Standing close to the Wires, severe 
losses of stock having occurred in this way. 
It is to overcome the danger to stock that 
I have devised the invention forming the sub 
ject-matter of this application; and to this 
end the invention consists in the particular 
construction and arrangement of parts, all as 
hereinafter fully described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
euce indicate corresponding parts in all the 
WeWS. 
Figure is a side view of a section of a fence, 
representing the same as it appears when pro 
vided with my improved lightning-arrester. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged detail view of a portion 
of the arrester, the two clamping-sections be 
ing represented as they appear when sepa 
lated. Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view on line 
a'a of Fig. 6. Fig. 4 is an inverted plan view 
of the upper clamp-section. Fig. 5 is a plan 
View of the lower clamp-section, representing 
the Same as it appears when being applied to 
the fence-wire. Fig. 6 is a side view of the 
clamp. Fig. 7 is an end view of the same, 
and Fig. 7 is a central sectional view of the 
lower portion of one clamp and the upperpol 
tion of another clamp. 
In the drawings I have illustrated a specific 
construction for establishing the necessary 
(Olnnection between the main conductor of 
my arrester and the line-wires of the fence: 
but I desire it to be understood that any 
equivalent or proper connection could be em 
ployed without departing from the spirit of 
my invention. 
In the construction shown, 10 represents the 
lower portion of a clamping-socket, which Said 
socket is formed with a central longitudinal 
groove, 11, upon either side of which there 
are ribs 12 and 12, the rib 1:2 running froll 
one end of the clamping-socket to about the 
middle thereof upon one side of the groove, 
while the 'il) 12: runs from the other end to 
about the centel' of the socket, but upon the 
opposite side of the groove. 
In connection with the Socket-section 10, I 
employ an upper socket-section, 13, that is 
formed with a central groove, 14, upon eithel' 
side of which there are ribs 15 and 15, SO clis 
posed that when the two socket-sections are 
placed together the said ribs 15 and 15" Will 
supplement and complete the ribs 12 and 12, 
respectively. Outside of the ribs 15 and 15 
the section 13 is formed with flanges 16, which 
said flanges rest upon shoulder's 17 of the 
socket-section 10 when the two socket-sections 
are adjusted to the position in which they are 
shown in Figs. 6 and 7, the two sections being 
united by screws 2, as shown. The socket 
sections 10 and 13 are formed with centrally 
apertured and internally-threaded bOSSes 1S 
and 19, the thread of one boss being a right 
hand thread and the thread of the other a 
left-hand thread. 
The sockets employed in connection with 
the several wires of the fence al'e connected 
by rods 20, said rods being threaded at each 
end, but in inverse directions, to engage the 
threaded alpertures of the bosses lS and 19, a 
binding - Wire, 21, being bound within the 
threads of the connecting-rods 20 and about 
the fence-Wire, which wire is shown at A, and 
at the same time the Wire 21 is So bound about 
the wire A that the sockets may be moved to 
the position shown in Fig. 5-that is, so as to 
cross the wire diagonally-the arrangement of 
the ribs 12 and 12 permitting this movement. 
After the wire 21 has been applied, the two 
socket-sections are brought together and 
united by the screw's 2, the Wire 21 being 
forced hard against the wire Aby a set-screw, 
22, and against the rods 20 by set-screws 23. 
a The lower section of the rod 20 is grounded, 
5 7 
So 
95 
OO 
 
401,095 
ductor are secured, and a connecting or bind 
ing wire for connecting the ends of the sec 
tional conductor with the strands of a wire 
fence, substantially as described. 
3. A sectional socket consisting of a socket 
section, 10, formed with a central groove and 
ribs 12 and 12, and a socket-section, 13, formed 
With ribs 15 and 15, and a means, substan 
tially as described, for connecting the sock 
ets, as and for the purpose stated. 
4. In a lightning-conductor, the combina 
tion, with rods 20, of socket-sections 10 and 
13, screws2, a binding-wire, 21, and set-screws, 
as 22 and 23, substantially as described. 
FREMONT. E. WOOD. 
25 
Witnesses: 
B. M. WOOD, 
J. J. JEROME. 
as shown in Fig. 1, while to the upper section 
of Said rod there is connected a point, 25. In 
Fig. 7 I illustrate a construction wherein the 
l'Od 20 is formed with shoulders 26. 
In applying the arrester great care should 
be taken to insure proper connection between 
all parts. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a lightning-conductor for wire fences, 
the combination of a sectional conductor and 
clamping-sockets formed of two sections, each 
Section being provided with a longitudinal 
groove and an aperture at right angles to the 
grOOve, Substantially as described. 
2. In a lightning-conductor, the combina 
tion of the sectional conductor, sectional sock 
ets in which the ends of the sectional con 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401195.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 401,195, 
J. W. MEESE. 
PRINTERS PRESS POINT, 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889. 
Af -5--> - 
22 2 Earl 
es 
- 
| Hill 
iHits"ill 
z 
% 
25% 
aw s 
WITWESSES 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
-------------- 
JACOB W. MEESE, OF HARRISBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, 
PRINTERS PRESS. POINT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,195, dated April 9, 1889, 
Application filed July 17, 1888, Serial No. 280,157, (No model.) 
To all whon, it invay concern 
Be it known that I, JACOB W. MEESE, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resid 
ing at Harrisburg, in the county of Dauphin 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Printers' Press-Points; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in printers furniture, 
the object of the same being to provide a piece 
of furniture with a removable pin or press 
point for indenting or perforating the paper 
to serve as a guide for printing or folding. 
Heretofore it has been common practice 
When it was desired to provide what is tech 
nically termed a press-point, to insert in a 
piece of furniture an awl, and then file the 
awl down to the proper height. This in prac 
tice is inconvenient, and the point thus pro 
duced when worn renders the furniture use 
less. It is also difficult to properly place the 
awl or have the point thereof at the proper 
height. 
My improvement is designed to overcome 
these objections, and to provide a point which 
can be readily attached, and when worn can 
be removed and a new one inserted. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view showing my improved 
press-point applied to a piece of metallic fur 
niture. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a sectional view showing 
the application of my improvement to a piece 
of wooden furniture. 
A refers to a piece of furniture of ordinary 
construction, provided on its upper surface 
When metallic furniture is employed, as is 
- 
50 
55 
75 
usually the case, below the recess C, in the 
center of the furniture is formed a screw 
threaded perforation, b. Into the recessa, and 
screw-threaded perforation b is secured my 
improved press-point B, which is provided 
with a rectangular collar, C, above which the 
point extends, said point being type-high. 
Beneath the collar the press-point has a screw 
threaded stem, which is adapted to engage the 
screw-threads of the perforation b. The press 
point is inserted in the furniture by the em 
ployment of an ordinary key. 
When wooden furniture is employed, the 
upper face thereof is provided with a circular 
recess, beneath which is a similar recess, 
through which passes a metallic socket hav 
ing a squared head, which lies within a rect 
angular recess formed in the under side of 
the furniture. A washer is usually placed 
above the block, so that the press-point will 
hold the block securely in the furniture by 
reason of the collar C bearing upon the washer. 
When the device is used in connection with 
a printing-press or folding-machine, but two 
pieces of furniture having my improved press 
point are employed for registering, and also 
the same number on a folding-machine. 
I claim 
In combination with a piece of press-fur 
niture having a recess in its upper face and 
a vertical opening leading from the bottom of 
said recess, a metal socket seated in said open 
ing and provided with a head and internal 
threads, a press-point having a pointed upper 
end, a threaded lower end to engage the 
threads of the socket, and an intermediate 
angular nut or collar adapted to rest upon the 
bottom of the recess when the point is level 
with the face of the type, in the form substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JACOB W. MEESE. 
Witnesses: 
D. C. MAURER, 
JNO. M. CLECKNER. 
IO 
35 
45 with a recess, Ct. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401295.txt	M. A., NORTON. 
WELOCIPEDE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
No. 401,295. 
 
Witnesses : 
(25azvad6. 62%aedate.7z 
2--12 
Y 
- 
4-c. 
172 feator: 
(No Model.) 
No. 401295, 
M. A., NORTON. 
WELOCIPEDE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 9, 1889. 
S 
 
  
 
 
 
N&S 2 % 2 
32.W. 
Z27 
& 
--- 
NN 
" 3. 
es 
  
 
 
 
 
 
SS S Na 
 
zaea 6-6&ceaez, 
M 
Z72zoza (O7 
WA...Q... 
\SS...S.A.S. 
tic-lithographer. Washington, d. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
MALCOLM. A. NORTON, OF 
HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
VELOCIPEDE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,295, dated April 9, 1889. 
Application filed December 20, 1888, Seriai No, 294,169. (No model.) 
To ?till avhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MALCOLM. A. NORTON, 
of Hartford, Connecticut, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Velocipedes, of 
which the following description and claims 
constitute the specification, and which is illus 
trated by the accompanying two sheets of 
drawings. 
This invention relates to a velocipede hav 
ing the features specified by the claims at the 
end of this specification. 
Figure of the drawings is a side view, and 
Fig. 2 is a front view, of my new velocipede 
shown as a bicycle. Fig. 3 is a central hori 
ZOntal section of the axle of the rear wheel 
and of the ball-bearing boxes thereof. Fig. 4 
is a plan view, partly in section, of the axle 
of the crank-shaft and of the ball-bearing 
boxes thereof. Fig. 5 is a side view of one of 
the ends of the bracket which supports those 
boxes. Fig. 6 is a view of the right-hand end 
of the axle of Eig. 3. 
Figs. 7 and 8 are views 
of a modified form of the spring and other de 
vices by which the velocipede-frame is sup 
ported from the forward wheel. 
The numeral 1 indicates the central section 
of the frame of the velocipede, consisting of 
a plain straight rod, preferably made tubular 
throughout its length to secure lightness. 
The numerals 2 and 3 indicate two V-shaped 
frame-sections, the apexes of which are per 
forated to receive the axle of the rear wheel 
of the bicycle, and the upper ends of which 
are united in the clamp 4, while the lower 
ends of which are united in the clamp 5, both 
of which clamps firmly clasp the central sec 
tion, 1, of the frame. 
The numeral 6 denotes the reach of the ve 
locipede-frame, the rear end of which is pro 
vided with the clamp 7, fixed to the section 1 
between the clamps 4 and 5, and the front 
end of which is pivoted to the body of the 
fork 8. Each of the bifurcations of that fork 
may be itself bifurcated, as shown in Fig. 1, 
or it may be single, as shown in Figs. 10 and 
11, and two of those sub-bifurcations are in 
dicated in Fig. 1 by the numerals 9 and 10. 
The upper part of the fork is preferably made 
as a separate piece, 11, inserted in the body 
of the fork 8, and the handle (numbered 12) 
is fixed thereto, as indicated in Figs. 1 and 2. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
The bifurcations 9 and 10 are supported by 
the spring 13, the center of which rests upon 
the flange 14 of the hanger 15, which hanger 
depends from one end of the axle of the for 
ward wheel, and the corresponding bifurca 
tions of the fork 8 on the other side of the for 
ward wheel are correspondingly supported. 
The axle of the rear wheel consists of the 
parts 23 and 24, united midway of their length 
by a screw-threaded joint. The outer end of 
the part 23 is tapped into the apex of the V 
shaped frame-section 2, while the Outer end 
of the part 24 consists of the split head 25. 
The screw 26 is tapped into the axis of the 
axle-section 24, and the solid tapering head of 
that screw occupies a tapering recess in the 
center of the split head 25. The axle of the 
rear wheel may be shortened and the V-shaped 
frame-sections 2 and 3 be drawn toward each 
other, and any undue play in the ball-bear 
ings be thus taken up by simply turning the 
head of the axle-section 24, and that head, 
when thus turned to the proper eXtent, may 
be fixed in that position and the axle thus 
fixed in length by simply turning the screw 
26, and thus forcing the sections of the split 
head away from each other and into rigid con 
tact with the frame-section 3. The hub of 
the rear wheel is indicated by the numeral 27 
and is hollow throughout its length, and each 
end of its interior is provided with a ball 
bearing box, 28, which incloses a series of 
balls, 29, between its interior inclined circu 
lar wall and the concave groove on the inside 
of the adjacent V-shaped frame-section. The 
sprocket-wheel 30 is fixed to the hub of the 
rear bicycle - wheel and receives motion 
through the chain 31. 
The bracket 32 is clamped to the central 
section, l, of the bicycle-frame, and is adjust 
able thereon by means of the screw-rod 33, 
the upper end of which is tapped into the 
hole 34 in the bracket 32, and the lower end 
of which is held against longitudinal move 
ment in a corresponding hole in the clamp 35, 
which clamp is fixed to the lower end of the 
central section, 1, of the bicycle-frame. The 
shaft 36 turns in the ends of the bracket 32, 
and carries the cranks 37 and 38 and the 
sprocket-wheel 39 outside of that bracket, and 
that part of that shaft which is between the 
55 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
2 
401,295 
two ends of that bracket is provided with the 
hubs 40 and 41, which hubs inclose the ball 
bearing boxes 42 and 43, respectively. The 
ball-bearing box 43 is rigidly fixed within the 
hub 41 and incloses a series of balls, 44, be 
tween its inner inclined circular wall and a 
Concave groove on the inner end of the bush 
ing 45, which is clamped in one end of the 
bracket 32. The ball-bearing box 42 is longi 
tudinally adjustable on the shaft 36 within 
the hub 40 by means of the screw 46 operat 
ing to press the foot 47 upon the periphery of 
that box when the box has been properly ad 
justed by being screwed outward or inward 
within the hub 40. That ball-bearing box 
also incloses a series of balls, 44, between its 
inner inclined circular wall and a concave 
groove on the inner end of the bushing 48, 
which bushing is clamped in the other end 
of the bracket 32. 
The modifications shown in Figs. 10 and 11 
consist in reversing the position of the hanger 
15, so as to make it sustain the spring 13 on 
its upper side, and consist in making the 
Spring 13 continuous, and consist also in sup 
porting a single bifurcation of the fork 8 upon 
the upper side of that spring. 
The tension of the chain 31 may be adjusted 
by turning the screw 33, so as to raise or de 
press the bracket 32 upon the section 1, and 
thus lengthen or shorten the distance between 
the shaft 36 and the axle of the rear wheel of 
the velocipede. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A velocipede-frame consisting of the cen 
tral section, 1, provided with the adjustable 
Saddle-support 21 and the adjustable bracket 
32 at or near its upper and lower ends, re 
45 
50 
55 
spectively, the V-shaped sections 2 and 3, 
fixed to the central section by the clamps 4 
and 5 between those ends, and the reach 6, 
fixed to the central section, 1, between the 
clamps 4 and 5 by the clamp 7, all substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination of the velocipede-fork 
8, each side of which consists of the sub-bifur 
cations 9 and 10, with the spring 13, support 
ing one pair of those sub-bifurcations, and a 
corresponding spring supporting the other 
pair thereof, and with the axle of a veloci 
pede-wheel supporting those springs, all sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of the axle-sections 23 
and 24, longitudinally adjustable together and 
fixed at their outer ends to opposite sections 
of a velocipede-frame, the hub 27, provided 
with the ball-bearing boxes 28, revolving on 
those axle-sections and between those frame 
sections, and two series of balls turning in 
bearings between those ball-bearing boxes 
and those frame-sections, respectively, all sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination of the shaft 36, provided 
with the hubs 40 and 41, the ball-bearing boxes 
42 and 43, inclosed within those hubs and one 
or both of them adjustable therein, the bush 
ings 45 and 48, fixed in opposite ends of the 
bracket 32, and two series of balls turning in 
bearings between those ball-bearing boxes and 
those bushings, respectively, all substantially 
as described. 
MALCOLM. A. NORTON. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT H. WALKER, 
ESTHER. S. WALKER. 
O 
I 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401395.txt	(No Model.) 
E. W. ALSH, Jr. 
BLAST FURNACE. 
No. 401,395, 
 
 
Patented Apr. 16, l889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
*Y. 
 
N 3. 3 
| | | 
TT 
| 
 
Sr. 
\\ 
\\\ 
\\ 
2 
a 2.72. 
- Sell 
7a A-4 ia. 
itrographer, Washington, O.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD WALSII, JR., OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
BAST - FURNAC E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,395, dated April 16, 1889. 
Application filed May 26, 1888, Serial No. 275,207. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWARD WAfSH, Jr., a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Blast-Furnaces, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
furnaces having a bosh well down within the 
Zone of fusion, such as shown and described in 
my patent, No. 366,282, dated July 12, 1887, or 
in any in which the bosh is similarly located. 
My present invention has for its object to 
maintain the initial pressure of the blast as it 
enters the Zone in the immediate vicinity of 
the tuyeres throughout the entire furnace, 
and at the same time, and to further this end, 
to prevent the adhesion of slag or semi-molten 
metal on the boshes and furnace-wall, whereby 
the velocity, pressure, and density of the 
gases on the materials to be treated will be 
rendered uniformat every part of the furnace, 
and therefore under the control of the oper 
ator-advantages hitherto unattainable. 
In a blast-furnace, although the highest tem 
perature produced by the intense incandes 
cence of the fuel in active combustion is in 
the immediate neighborhood of the tuyeres, 
yet owing to the refrigerating influence of the 
entering air, which is in a comparatively-cool 
state, this high temperature is not immedi 
ately imparted to the gases generated from 
the air thus entering, and they are not, there 
fore, expanded to their fullest extent in this 
region. Repeated observations on the prac 
tical working of a furnace have demonstrated 
that the gases are not fully expanded until 
they reach the upper limit of the fusion-zone, 
as is plainly evident in the examination of 
sections of furnaces that have been in use for 
some time. In such furnaces it will be found 
that a relation exists between the hearth-area, 
and the area of the top of the fusion limit, 
An invariable ratio is maintained between 
these two areas. Thus the temperature for 
fusing cast-iron is about 2,400 Fahrenheit, 
whereas at the upper limit of the fusion-zone 
the temperature required for producing a 
chemical combination and fusing the silicates 
which compose the slag is in excess of 3,000 
Fahrenheit. Now, by applying the well 
known formula for the expansion of gases at 
these two temperatures it will be seen that 
there is a fixed cause or law for the ratio be 
tween these two areas, the gases being ex 
panded threefold by this increase of tempera 
ture. This accounts scientifically for the con 
stant relation that is always found to exist 
between the area at the upper limit of the 
fusion-zone and that of the hearth in worn 
sections of furnaces, for if a furnace was origi 
nally made larger than that determined by 
the above formula at the upper limit of the 
fusion-zone it is found that scars of slag or 
fine carbonaceous matter are deposited on the 
sides of the furnace until the above relation 
between the areas is reached, and if, on the 
other hand, the furnace was made smaller at 
the limit named it is found that the brick 
work, notwithstanding any artificial means 
adopted for cooling it, will be worn away until 
the said relation is established. 
As a rule, the temperature of the gases 
issuing from the furnace at the throat or tun 
nel-head is between 400 and 1,000 Fahren 
heit, and by applying the above formula to 
this decreased temperature (relatively to that 
required to make the slag) it will be seen that 
the area of the throat or tunnel-head should 
be between one-fifth and one-seventh the area 
at the upper limit of the bosh or fusion-zone. 
By preserving the above constant ratios of 
areas according to the temperature required 
and obtained at any zone on horizontal plane 
of the furnace the proper sectional form and 
combined disposition of the internal parts of 
the furnace are accurately determined, with 
the result that when the furnace is in opera 
tion the initial pressure imparted by the 
blowing-engine to the Zone in the immediate 
vicinity of the tuyeres is maintained through 
out the entire furnace, and that, consequently, 
the Velocity, density, and impingement of the 
gases on the materials to be treated are ren 
dered uniform at every part of the furnace 
and are entirely under the control of the op 
erator, which is not the case with the furnace 
in present use, wherein the Zones have been 
so indifferently proportioned to the require 
ments of the process that, owing to the vary 
ing pressure of the blast and gases within 
the furnace, only irregular and more or less 
wasteful and imperfect results are obtained. 
Now, my invention consists in forming the 
25 
35 
45 
50 
85 
95 
OO 
401,395 
thereat. From the upper limit, 1 1, of the 
bosh Cthe walls D of the furnace slope gradu 
ally downward and inward to the top of the 
hearth-cylinder G and upward and inward to 
the throat or tunnel-head 22. This propor 
tion of parts, as far as diameters are con 
cerned, is necessarily fixed; but in order to 
insure the fullest economy in the use of vari 
ous kinds of ores it will be found that the 
height of the furnace should be made to vary 
with the character of the ore-that is to say, 
a non-refractory and easily-smelted ore will 
not require for its treatment as great a height 
of furnace as a dense refractory ore difficult 
of treatment, 
By my invention a stronger impingement 
of gases at greater density and velocity is ob 
tained and the materials in preparation in 
the upper portions of the furnace are more 
thoroughly prepared, and therefore a mini 
mum amount of fuel is required for the reduc 
tion and smelting of theiron ores, all the space 
within the furnace is utilized, the process is 
under control of the operator, and a uniform 
ity of results is secured unobtainable by the 
most approved constructions of the day. 
I claim as my invention- 
A blast-furnace in which the boshis located 
well down within the zone of fusion, and in 
which the sectional area of the upper limit of 
its boshis substantially three times its hearth 
area and substantially five to seven times the 
area ofits tunnel-head, substantially as shown, 
and for the purposes specified. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature, in presence of two witnesses, this 21st 
day of May, 1888. 
- 
45 
55 
75 
EDWARD WALSH, JR. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL BAKEWELL, 
S. L. SCHRADER. 
interior of a blast-furnace according to the 
above-defined principle as discovered by me 
in connection with the subject, or so that the 
sectional areas of the hearth, upper limit of 
bosh or fusion-zone, throat or tunnel-head, or 
any intermediate zone of the furnace will 
have constant relations to each other, accord 
ing to the volume of the gases as found by 
applying the well-known formula for the ex 
pansion of gases to the temperature required 
and obtained at each of the said parts, or at 
any Zone of the furnace, as the case may be, 
and in placing the bosh C well down within 
the Zone of fusion, in accordance with the 
invention described in my said patent, No. 
366,282, and particularly claimed by the first 
claim thereof, whereby any adhesion of slag 
or semi-molten metal around the bosh is pre 
Vented. 
It is important in the practice of my pres 
ent invention that the initial pressure of the 
blast shall not be affected by shelves or scaf 
folds formed by adhesion of slag or semi 
molten material to the sides of the boshes or 
furnace-walls, and therefore I introduce as a 
co-operative element the bosh well down with 
in the Zone of fusion, as aforesaid. 
On the accompanying drawing is repre 
sented a vertical section of my improved blast 
furnace having the furnace proper, A, fur 
nace-shaft B, bosh C, (which is brought down 
well within the Zone of fusion, as described 
in my said previous Letters Patent,) and the 
hearth-cylinder G. 
I make the sectional area of the furnace at 
the upper limit, 11, of the bosh or fusion-zone 
C three times (or thereabout) the area at the 
hearth G, and about five to seven times the 
area of the throat or tunnel at 22, these be 
ing the fixed proportions given for these 
parts, respectively, by the application of the 
above formula to the various temperatures 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401495.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 40495, 
G. E. HARRIS, 
WEHICLE SPRING. 
Patented Apr. 16, 1889. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
* GEORGE ERWIN HARRIS, OF LAWRENCEVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
VEHICLE-SPRING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,495, dated April 16, 1889. 
Application filed January 12, 1889. Serial No. 296,120, (No model) 
its center and having the skeinst projecting 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE ERWIN EIAR 
from the ends. 
Upwardly-extending shaft-irons C are se 
RIS, of Lawrenceville, in the county of Tioga, 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
cured to the shafts A at the inner or rear ends 
tain new and useful Improvements in Ve 
of the latter, and curved outwardly therefrom 
hicle-Springs; and I do hereby declare the 
at their upper ends to produce hooks or loops 
c, for the reception of downwardly-extending 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
Oscillating plates D, having a series of perfo 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
rations, d, in line with the vertical axis of 
said plates. Stirrups E, provided with hooked 
tains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to vehicles, and more 
upper ends e, are adapted to connect with and 
particularly to a novelarrangement of springs, 
be suspended from the plates D, the hooks e. 
and has for its object to provide a vehicle 
entering one of the series of perforations in 
spring having adjusting devices at its ends 
said plates. The ends of a semi-elliptical 
for the purpose of stiffening and strengthen 
Spring, F, pass through the loops of the stir 
ing the spring according to the weight put 
rups and are adapted to be supported there 
upon it. 
by. Secured to or made integral with the 
Spring F at its ends, and extending inwardly 
A further object is to provide a vehicle 
spring having a vertical as well as a lateral 
from said ends, are notched plates or similar 
adjustment at its ends. 
devices, G, in a notch of each of which the 
stirrups E are adapted to fit, thus providing 
A further object is to SO connect the spring 
means whereby the spring may be supported 
to the body of the vehicle that its vertical ad 
justment will effect the adjustment of the 
from the stirrups at different distances from 
the center of the spring. It will be seen that 
vehicle-seat. 
by this means of adjustment the spring may 
A further object is to connect the forward 
be stiffened by inserting the stirrup in the 
end of the body of a two-wheeled vehicle to 
the shafts, cross-bars, or other suitable device 
notches or other suitable device nearest the 
in such a manner, by means of Springs, that 
Center of the Spring, and thus adapt the ve 
said body will readily adjust itself to irregu 
hicle for heavy loads; or said spring may be 
made more flexible by suspending the spring 
A further object is to so close a portion, 
from the stirrups nearer the extremities of 
the former, and thereby adapt the vehicle for 
which has heretofore been left open, of a two 
lighter loads. 
wheeled vehicle-body as to prevent the ex 
posure of limbs and feet of the occupants. 
If desired, the shaft-irous C, which support 
the stirrups E, may be made to project rear 
A further object is to produce a vehicle 
which shall be simple in construction, pleas 
Wardly of the axle, as shown in dotted lines, 
ing in appearance, and effective in operation. 
Fig.1, and thus suspend the spring F in rear 
With these objects in view my invention 
of the axle B, instead of in advance thereof, 
as shown in said figure. 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion and peculiar combinations and arrange 
Secured to the spring E, at or near its cen 
ter, and projecting upwardly and slightly 
ments of parts, as will be hereinafter set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
outwardly therefrom, are two spring-jacks or 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure l is 
body-supports, H, which connect at their up 
a perspective view of a two-wheeled vehicle 
per ends with the side bars of the body or 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a sepa 
seat I, either with or without a hinge or flexi 
rate view of the Spring. FigS. 3, 4, and 5 are 
ble connection, immediately under the seat I', 
which is arranged at the upper termination 
views of modifications. 
of the body. The side bars curve downwardly 
A indicates the shafts of a vehicle, curved 
downwardly at their rear ends and clipped or 
from the seat I, and then upwardly and out 
Wardly, terminating at their forward ends 
otherwise secured to an axle, B, which latter 
is preferably curved inwardly or upwardly at with an eye or perforation and near the un 
. 
- 
3O larities of the 1'oad. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
9o 
95 
IOC 
2 
r 
401,495 
25 p 
Io 
35 
45 
55 
der surface of the shafts. A somewhat in ad 
vance of the curved portion of the same. 
Secured to the shafts A, or to the croSS 
bars a?, or any other suitable device above 
the forward termination of the side bars, are 
C-shaped springs J with projecting ears at 
their free ends with perforations therein to 
receive a bolt, a, the ends of the side bars 
being placed between the ears and the bolt 
inserted therein couples together the springs 
J and the side bars of the body. By thus at 
taching the forward end of the body to the 
shafts, or to the cross-bars a', or other suit 
able device, a side-swinging motion is per 
mitted to the seat and body, the motion of 
the horse will be compensated for, shocks 
caused by conflict with obstructions in the 
roadway will be taken up, and the pounding 
or whipping of the horse by the forward ends 
of the shafts will be obviated and the wheels 
greatly relieved from sudden shocks and 
strain. The forward portion of the side bars 
will preferably be connected by slats K, of 
wood or other suitable material, While the 
ortion of said bars in rear of the slatS is 
united by means of sheet metal or Wood, 
which portion has heretofore been left open. 
By thus providing a decking of wood or sheet 
metal the limbs and feet of the occupants will 
be protected from exposure. 
It is evident that the Spring F may be at 
tached to the vehicle in other ways than by 
suspending it from the shaft-irons, as pre 
viously explained, without departing from the 
spirit of my invention, the essential feature 
being to provide support for the spring ca 
pable of being adjusted toward and away from 
its connection with the vehicle. 
In the form of my invention shown in Fig. 
3 the axle has secured to its upper side near 
each end a bracket, K, having a notched 
transverse bar, K, at its top, the arms of said 
bracket curving slightly forward or rear 
ward in order that the Spring connected 
thereto may clear the axle. The ends of the 
spring F are suspended beneath the notched 
transverse bar of the brackets K', and Said 
notched bar and the notched plates or other 
suitable devices of the spring connected by a 
loop or link, K; or, if preferred, notched 
plates L. may be secured directly to the top 
face of the axle near its ends, as shown in 
Fig. 4, the spring Fin such case extending be 
neath the axle and connected with the notched 
plate L by a loop or link, L'. In this case the 
central portion of the axle B may be curved 
either forwardly or rearwardly, so as to allow 
the spring-jacks or body-supports, which con 
nect the spring and body, free movement 
without coming in contact with said axle. 
If desired, the upwardly-extending arms C, 
which lie close to and parallel with the shafts 
throughout the greaterportion of their length, 
may be provided at their base with an inte 
gral shoe, M, adapted to be clipped or other 
wise secured to the axle B, as shown in Fig. 
5. The outer portion of each shoe M is pro 
vided with two upwardly-projecting flanges, 
M', between which the ends of the shafts are 
seated. 
Many slight changes might be made in the 
constructive details of my invention Without 
departing from the spirit thereof; hence I do 
not wish to limit myself to the precise details 
of construction herein described; but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a two-wheel vehicle, the combination, 
with a body and an axle, of a Spring attached 
to the body and supports for the ends of the 
springs, the said Supports being adjustable 
toward and away from the center of the Spring, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a two-wheel vehicle, the combination, 
with a body and a carrying-frame composed 
of an axle and shafts secured thereto, Of loops 
suspended from said frame and forming Sup 
ports for the free ends of the spring, the said 
loops being adjustable toward and away from 
the center of the spring, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In a vehicle, the combination, with a 
body and a carrying-frame composed of an 
axle, and shafts secured thereto, of a spring 
secured at its center to the body and provided 
at each end with a series of notches and 
swinging loops suspended from the carrying 
frame and supporting the ends of the Spring, 
the said loops being adjustable toward and 
away from the ends of the spring, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. In a vehicle, the combination, with the 
shafts and shaft-irons secured thereto, of a 
stirrup adjustably secured to the latter and a 
spring adjustably connected with the stirrup, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with a body and a car 
rying-frame composed of an axle and shafts 
secured thereto, of vertically-adjustable loops 
suspended from said carrying-frame and sup 
porting the spring, the said loops being ad 
justable toward and away from the center of 
said spring, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a vehicle, the combination, with the 
shafts, of curved shaft-irons secured thereto, 
perforated plates attached to the shaft-irons 
so as to oscillate, stirrups adjustably con 
nected to said plates, and a spring adjusta 
bly attached to the stirrups, substantially as 
set forth. 
7. The combination, with a body and a 
semi-elliptic spring secured thereto and pro 
vided at each end with a series of bearings, 
of suspended loops supporting the ends of the 
spring and adjustable toward and away from 
the center thereof, substantially as set forth, 
8. In a vehicle, the combination, with a 
body and a carrying-frame composed of an 
axle and shafts, of springs connecting the 
front end of the body to the shafts, a semi 
elliptic spring secured to the under side of 
the body, and loops suspended from the car 
rying-frame and supporting the ends of the 
75 
90 
95 
Od 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
401,495 
3 
semi-elliptic spring, the said loops adapted to end by the shafts or cross-bars, substantially 
be adjusted toward and away from the cen- as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
ter of the spring, substantially as set forth. 
9. In a vehicle, the combination, with the specification in the presence of two subscrib 
5 shafts, of stirrups supported thereby, a spring ing witnesses. 
supported by said stirrups, notched plates on 
said spring to receive the stirrups, spring- 
jacks or body-supports secured to said spring, 
and a body supported at one end on said 
Io spring-jacks or body-supports and at the other 
GEORGE ERWIN HARRIS. 
Witnesses: 
A. M. LOOP, 
A. M. HARRIS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401595.txt	(No Model.) 
J. SHOOLBRED, 
CULTIVATOR, 
No. 401595, 
Patented Apr. 16, 1889. 
  
 
S 
I 
SS S DeS S. 
a1 
97 
/ 6 
Z in Az 
fiftihis 
\ 
Zz67 & 
2 
7/ 
I  s 
2 
Q 62 
2ss 
(Q), 
AV HK2HNHG 
S. 
it. t l 
l 
Z7. 
Z 
Z7 
Fe. 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES SHOOLBRED, OF EASTOVER, SOUTH CAROLINA. 
CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,595, dated April 16, 1889. 
Application filed December 6, 1888, Serial No. 292,808, (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JAMES SHOOLBRED, of 
Eastover, in the county of Richland and State 
of South Carolina, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Cultivators; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
My invention is a combined cultivator and 
harrow, and is designed to be used for the 
general preparation of the land before plant 
ing, and afterward in the general cultivation 
all kinds of crops which require cultiva 
iOl. 
My object is to provide in one implement 
means for thoroughly harrowing and pulver 
izing the ground for cultivating or stirring up 
the soil between the rows of plants, and to 
tender it adjustable as a cultivator, so that it 
may be worked between rows placed at dif 
ferent distances abroad, and also to provide 
adjustable teeth of a peculiar form adapted 
not only to pulverize and cultivate, but to 
Sever roots and grasses and such obstructions 
in their passage over the same; and, further, 
to provide an adjustable draft-beam, by means 
of Which different faces of the frame support 
ing the teeth may be presented to the land to 
be Worked, and thus a different action of the 
teeth be secured. 
My invention consists, principally, of the 
teeth-supporting frame and an adjustable 
draft-beam, whereby the frame may be drawn 
along longitudinally to the line of the draft 
beam, or at right angles thereto, or at any in 
termediate angle, for the purpose of securing 
a different action of the teeth, 
The invention further consists of a frame 
for Supporting the teeth, composed of the cen 
tral beam and pivoted Wings with an adjust 
able draft-beam, whereby the implement is 
adapted to act upon a larger or smaller sec 
tion of land at one time. 
The invention further consists of teeth hav 
ing cutting lower portions and angularshanks, 
whereby said teeth may be adjusted to change 
the action of the teeth upon the land. 
The invention further consists in various 
details of construction, all of which are fully 
hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a perspective view of the imple: 
ment with the beam arranged longitudinally 
of the frame and the wings or outer beams 
extended in the form of a cultivator. Fig. 2 
represents the wings as closed with the draft 
beam at right angles thereto in the form of 
a harrow. 
In the drawings the teeth-supporting frame 
is shown as composed of three beams; but it 
will be understood that more or less may be 
used, as found desirable. The central beam 
of the three shown is represented at A and 
the two outer beams at B. B. The central 
beam carries a yoke composed of two plates, 
a, at its forward end, and pivoted to the outer 
end of these plates between them, one upon 
each side of the central beam, are the Outer 
beams or wings, BB. The beams B B may 
be swung out from the central beam at the 
rear, so as to make the implement in the form 
of the cultivator, or approximately V-shaped, 
and a support and guide is provided at the 
rear, consisting of two rods, bb, which pass 
through a guiding-loop, c, on the central beam, 
where they are held in any desired position 
by means of a set-screw, d. Each of the beams 
is shown as being split from one end to the 
other, and provided with Square sockets, 
into which I have inserted corresponding 
shanks of the teeth d'. After these are in 
serted, the parts of the beams are fastened 
together by means of bolts, one passing on 
either side of each tooth. I do not limit my 
self, however, to this way of holding the teeth, 
as it is obvious that sockets may be formed 
without splitting the beam, and that the teeth 
may be held by set-screws. The beams may 
also be made of iron. The teeth ShoWn are 
of peculiar form, and their construction makes 
them capable of being used for many purposes 
of cultivation. As shown, they are provided 
with lower cutting-edges in the shape of a 
blade having upper and lower cutting-edges, 
the sides being flattened. The shankis square 
in cross-section and the upper part is bent at 
an angle to the main or body part, and when 
the tooth is held by the bent portion the body 
of the tooth is held at an angle to the beam. 
and the blade is approximately parallel with 
the ground. In this position, if the frame is 
drawn directly in line with the cutting-edge, 
the teeth will sever all roots or grasses which 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC) 
401,595 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
may be in the way. If, however, it is desired 
to have the cutting-edge in a more vertical po 
sition, then the shank of the tooth is clamped 
below the bent-up end, which thus brings the 
teeth in the position shown at e, the first po 
sition described being shown at f. Whether 
the implement be drawn backward or forward 
in these described positions of the teeth, the 
effect is about the same as in the case of the 
tooth shown at e-the cutting action will be 
effected to a certain extent, and in the case 
of the tooth fit will bear down upon any ob 
struction and sever it without uprooting plants 
which may be in proximity thereto. In addi 
tion to severing the obstructions and grasses, 
it is of course desirable to thoroughly stir and 
pulverize the ground, and this is done by ar 
ranging some of the teeth, as shown at g, at 
an angle to the other teeth, or, in other words, 
with their flat surfaces presented to the line 
of travel. 
It will thus be seen that some of the teeth 
are arranged in the line with the draft and 
others arranged at an angle thereto, and that 
the ground will be thoroughly pulverized and 
all obstructions removed, no matter in what 
direction the draft may be, for the teeth which 
are across the line of draft when the frame is 
moving in one direction will be in line with 
the draft when moved in the other direction, 
and the teeth which are in line in one direc 
tion will present their flat surfaces when the 
frame is moved in the other direction, so that 
at all times there will be one set of teeth to 
cut the obstructions and to mark out the line 
to be cultivated or harrowed, and the other 
set of teeth will thoroughly pulverize or culti 
vate the land. In cultivating, as the central 
part of the space is usually the hardest, I ar 
range at the rear part of the central beam a 
tooth in plow form, (shown at G.) which thus 
thoroughly breaks up the earth. 
The draft-beam is swiveled to the central 
beam by a pin or bolt, h, secured to the draft 
beam and passing through the central beam. 
Two circular plates, one secured to the draft 
beam and one to the central beam, serve as 
a bearing, preventing excessive friction be 
tween the beams. This swiveling of the draft 
beam on the central beam permitsit to be ad 
justed at any angle, so that the toothed frame 
may be drawn over the land at different an 
gles relatively to the draft-beam, and thus a 
different effect be produced by presenting the 
teeth in a different position to act upon the 
land, and thus in many instances the desired 
effect may be produced without requiring any 
adjustment of the teeth themselves. 
When the draft-beam is arranged at right 
angles, as shown in Fig. 2, the implement 
may be used as a harrow, with the wings 
closed, or the central teeth may be removed 
and the teeth at each end retained, so as to 
straddle the row and work upon each side 
thereof, though this would require two horses. 
If, when it is used as a harrow, the relative 
75 
position of the teeth would not pulverize suf 
ficiently, then the wings could be spread, one 
or both, so as to change the relative position 
of the teeth, and thus secure the desired ef 
fect. 
In order to hold the beam in any desired 
position, I provide a clamp, i, which is held 
upon the T-shaped end of the screw ic, which 
passes through a slot in the forward part of 
the draft-beam, and is held by a thumb-nut, l. 
The ends of the T are slightly hook-shaped, 
and engage with the hooked end of a yoke, n, 
which is removably held to the central beam 
in the normal position of the parts. By tight 
ening the nut the clamp draws upon the yoke 
?n', and the beam is thus prevented from turn 
ing. When the beam is turned, the yoke n' 
may be slipped on one of the Wings, and thus 
hold the beam in the same manner. The 
draft-beam is slotted, as shown at m, so that 
the clamp may be moved out or in toward or 
from the end of the draft-beam, so as to bear 
upon some portion of the frame, Whatever be 
its position. Ordinary handles are provided 
for the draft-beam, as shown at n, suitably 
braced. 
It will be understood that the teeth may be 
arranged and combined in many different 
ways for many different purposes in the use 
of the implement upon farm work, and I will 
not therefore describe particularly all the uses 
to which the implement may be applied. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination, the frame having teeth 
and a draft-beam swiveled to said frame and 
carrying the handle-bars, the said beam be 
ing adjustable to horizontally change the line 
of draft, and holding devices for said beam, 
substantially as described. 
2. In combination, the frame composed of a 
series of bars having teeth, said bars being 
pivoted at their forward ends, the adjustable 
bars at their rear ends, whereby the said bars 
may be spread apart or set close together, and 
a draft-beam pivoted to one of said bars and 
having movement in a horizontal plane, and 
holding means therefor, substantially as de 
scribed, whereby the toothed bars may be 
drawn longitudinally or laterally, as desired. 
3. In combination with the beam, a tooth 
having a flattened lower portion or blade 
with a cutting-edge in a vertical plane, the 
angular and bent shankfor said blade adapted 
to a socket in the beam, whereby the blade 
may be adjusted into the line of draft or 
across the same and the inclination of said 
vertical cutting-edge may be varied, substan 
tially as described. 
Intestimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
JAMES SHOOLBRED. 
9o 
95 
IOC 
IIO 
II5 
Witnesses: 
THos. P. WESTON, 
W. W. RAY, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401695.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. DOUGLAS. 
JETTY. 
 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. DOUGLAS, OF GALVESTON, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-THIRD TO 
- 
CHARLES L, BENEKE, OF SAME PLACE. 
JETTY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,695, dated April 16, 1889. 
Application filed May 3, 1888, Serial No, 272,647. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM M. DOUGLAS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Gal 
veston, in the county of Galveston and State 
of Texas, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Jetties; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters and figures of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
Myinvention relates to breakwaters, jetties, 
and the like. 
The object of my improvements is to pro 
vide structures which may serve as jetties, 
dams, bulk-heaks, break Waters, canals, banks, 
levees, cribbing, devices for protecting shores, 
and other similar work. 
In the construction of such work my in 
vention consists, mainly, in the utilization of 
a central or interior core of clay, or clayey 
substance, about which is formed a retaining 
envelope in connection with suitable sub 
structures, coping, walls, and tracks. 
I will proceed to describe my invention as 
applied to the construction of jetty-work. 
The drawings illustrate in cross or trans 
verse section a jetty, showing its interior con 
struction. 
Figure 1 is a cross-section of a jetty or other 
similar structure, and Fig. 2 is a modification 
thereof. 
a represents the substructure. I prefer to 
construct it of one or more courses of brush 
mattresses having an overlying coating of 
clay and rock-ballast. 
b represents the superstructure. 
c is the core of clay. 
did represent piles, and e e are pile sheet 
frepresents a protective Wall or outer en 
ing or planking secured to the piles. 
velope. 
2 ? 
25 
35 
The clay or clayey core c may be filled in 
in bulk, or it may be confined in sacks or 
bags, as an additional protection against Wash 
or undermining. The outer covering, f, may 
be of stone or of concrete, or a combination 
of those materials, or any substance suitable 
for the purpose may be employed. I may use 
clay also in connection with riprap or block 
stone or concrete. The substructure (, also, 
may be simply of riprap stone or of other 
suitable material. 
The planking upon the piles may be dis 
pensed with. Where the piles are employed 
generally prefer to lay a tramway, g, sup 
ported thereby, The tramway may, however, 
be laid along the jetty if piles are not used. 
In jetty constructions I prefer to use clay 
not only for the core or incasement, but as a 
protective coating for the brush-work when 
such is used, and also as a plastic material to 
fill the interstices in the riprap or other stone 
work. 
Any given or desired practicable shape may 
be employed in carrying out my improved 
jetty or like constructions. 
I have found that clay used in jetty or sim 
ilar work in the manner above described is 
attended by very efficient results as regards 
stability, impermeability, and cheapness, all 
of which are items of the utmost importance 
in works of this character. 
I claim 
The combination, in a jetty or similar struct 
ure, of a core or hearting of clay, piling along 
the sides of the core, and a stone envelope 
upon the sides of the core, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
L 
WILLIAM M. DOUGLAS. 
55 
75 
45 
 
Witnesses; 
G. W. HOASE, Jr., 
CHAS. L. BENEKE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401795.txt	(No Model.) 
C. S CHUMACHER, R D AELEN & M, ROTHE, 
PUNCHING, SHE ARING, AND SUCH LIKE MACHINE, 
No. 40,795, 
Patented Apr. 23, 1889, 
f -h 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
A 
x 
7W / is 
 
t 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N--- 
GR, 
  
   
 
 
 
 
Se=N-E E. at 
4N itzS 
  
 
GN Q. NW 
sty 
 
e 
Ysais 
22:ertexes, , 
22 el-ESE. 
pNT W 
sy 
afez26ee--, 
NW 
N 
NN 
N N 
N: N. 
ty 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CASPAR SCHUMACHER, REINER DAELEN, AND MORITZ ROTHE, OF KALK, 
- 
PRUSSIA, GERMANY. 
PUNCHN G, S HEARING AND SUCH L KE MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,795, dated April 23, 1889. 
Application filed May 19, 1888, Serial No. 274,412, (No model.) Patented in Germany May 21, 1886, No. 37,917, and May 25, 
l886, No. 38,347 in Austria-Hungary June 23, 1887, No. 24,929 and No. 2,540, and in Italy June 30, 1887, No. 21,850, 
fo (tla tuft. On it may concern: 
Beit known that we, CASPARSCHUMACHER, 
REINER DAELEN, and MORITZ ROTHE, sub 
jects of the King of Prussia, German Emperor, 
residing at Kalk, in the German Empire, en 
gineers, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Punching. Shearing, and 
Such Like Machines Worked by Steam and 
Water Power, (for which we have obtained 
Letters Patent in Germany, No. 37,917, May 
21, 1886, and No. 38,347, May 25, 1886; Italy, 
No. 21,850, June 30, 1887; Austria, No. 24,929, 
June 23, 1887, and in Hungary, No. 2,540, June 
23, 1887.) of which the following is a full and 
clear specification, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form part of 
the specification. 
Figure I shows a shearing-machine in sec 
tion, part of the driving apparatus also in sec 
tion, Working by means of steam and water 
power, after our arrangement. Fig. II shows a 
cross-section through its center of the valve g. 
Fig. III shows a detail cross-section of the 
valve b through its longitudinal axis, which is 
used for directing the steam under the piston 
g', Fig. I, for lifting the shear or punch head 
E and into the cylinder A. Fig. IV shows a 
detail cross-section through the longitudinal 
axis of the arrangement for regulating the 
movement of the shear-head E when it has 
cut through the iron. Fig. V shows an end 
view of a shearing-machine, showing the Wa 
ter-buffer TT. Fig. VI shows, on a larger 
Scale, a cross-section through the celter and 
the construction of a cylinder, T, which acts 
as buffer for the cutter-head E. 
The construction and working of the ma 
chines illustrated are as follows: 
In Fig. I, A is a steam-cylinder, having a 
piston and fitted with the rod B, which works 
as a plunger in the hydraulic cylinder C, and 
forces, when steam is introduced under the 
piston in the cylinder A, the water through 
the pipe p into the cylinder D, which lies on 
the cutter-head E. Both are forced down, and 
by this means the pressure is brought to bear 
direct over the shear F. The shear is drawn 
up again after the downstroke by means of 
the rodse'e', which are connected to the cross 
heade of the steam-cylinder G, and steam be 
ing admitted under the pistong'. The power 
of this arrangement stands in inverse propor 
tion to the area of the steam-cylinder A and 
the area of the plunger B, or in inverse pro 
portion of the stroke of the piston in the 
steam-cylinder A and the stroke of the cutter 
F. 
If, for example, a stroke of the shears is 
required to cut a piece of iron with a section 
1 2 3 4, (see Fig. I.) so then the full stroke of 
the steam-cylinder A is required, as such a 
section requires the maximum stroke of the 
cutter F, and the same would be the case if 
the shears had only to cut through a section 
equal to 5 (37 S, although only a fraction of 
the larger section, 1 2 3 4. In order to pre 
vent this waste of steam and Water in such a 
case, we make use of the arrangement as 
shown in Figs. II and III. 
In the pipe leading from the hydraulic cyl 
inder C to the pressure-cylinder D is a Valve, 
g, provided with a filler, h, which is held in 
position by the pressure of the Water and 
also by the spring s, as shown in a larger 
scale in Fig. II. This valve is provided with 
a lever, i, which is connected to the lever C. 
of the distributing-valve b by the rods ' ', 
so that by working the lever a the valve g is 
opened and allows water to enter the hydrau 
lic cylinder C when the plunger descends. 
To the steam-cylinder A is fastened the 
distributing-valve b, which is operated by 
means of the lever a, by which the steam en 
tering through the pipe c can either be di 
rected into the cylinder G through the pipe 
d or into the cylinder A through the steam 
port e and out again through the pipe f 
The working of this distributing-valve mo 
tion is as follows: When the lever Ct, is in its 
highest position, as shown in Fig. I, steam 
can enter the cylinder G and lift the cutter 
Finto its highest position. At the same time 
the valve g is opened and the water in the 
cylinders C and D regulates itself automati 
cally by the inflow of water from the reser 
voir h. When the lever a, is brought into the 
middle position, the entry of the steam into 
the cylinder G is shut off and the exhaust of 
the same opened, and the cutter-head E, with 
the cutter F, falls by its own weight onto the 
piece of iron required to be cut; but as the 
valve gis opened on the descent of the cylin 
der D, so is the pipe 1) filled with water, and 
then the lever ( is brought into its lowest po 
sition and the steam led under the piston of 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOC 
3 
401,795 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the cylinder A, and with it the plunger B is 
raised. By this means the valve g is shut 
and the full pressure brought to bear on the 
Cutter-head E, and the downward stroke of 
the cutter F is completed. If the lever a is 
brought into the first or highest position, the 
reverse takes place. 
Generally in cutting or punching hot as 
Well as cold material the metal breaks asun 
der before it is completely cut through, and, 
in order to prevent the cutter from moving 
at a great velocity the moment that the iron 
Separates, the cylinder D is provided with 
a rod, l, fastened on the bottom of the cylin 
der, which, as the cylinder D descends, grad 
ually closes the entrance for the water from 
the hydraulic cylinder C, and as soon as the 
iron is cut through shuts the connection com 
pletely. This arrangement is shown in de 
tail in Fig. IV. The rod l is made to fit into 
the opening of the fixed plunger D' of the 
cylinder D, having the center part slightly 
Cut a Way, SO as to allow of the water passing 
through during a certain part of its stroke; 
but when the cylinder D is depressed a cer 
tain distance, so that the full part of the rod 
lcomes into the opening in piston D", it then 
shuts off the entrance of water from the hy 
draulic cylinder C, and so releases the cutter 
from further pressure, or only allows of the 
pressure due to the area of the rod l. 
In cutting or punching cold iron or other 
metals the tearing or forcing of the pieces 
asunder comes about suddenly and before the 
end of the stroke of the cutter or punch is 
completed, and the cutter or punch-head re 
(eives a sudden shock on account of the rod 
l not having closed the opening in D'. In or 
der to diminish this shock as much as possi 
ble, the cutter-head E is connected with two 
rams, m. m., Working in the cylinders T, which 
are filled with water, Fig. V, which act as cata 
racts. The water in the cylinders T passes 
out through the small openings n into a res 
ervoir, and when the cutter - head is again 
raised water is drawn into the cylinders T 
again through the pipe O, which is connected 
to the bottom of the reservoir, and provided 
with a non-return valve, p', as seen in Fig. VI. 
These two cylinders TT can be connected to 
gether by a branch pipe, so as to work in con 
junction, and the opening of the small out 
let in can be regulated by means of a valve or 
In the above-described machine compressed 
air or Water pressure in place of steam can 
be used. This arrangement is not only ap 
plicable to shearing-machines, as described, 
but also to punching, pressing, or riveting or 
Other similar machines, 
Having fully described our invention, what 
We desire to claim and secure by Letters Pat 
entis 
1. In punching, shearing, and such like 
machines worked by steam and water power, 
the combination of a punching, shearing, or 
such like machine with a steam-cylinder, A, 
cock. 
- 
with a distributing-valve, b, hydraulic cylin 
der C, and piston-rod B, the piston-rod B be 
ing fastened to a piston in the steam-cylin 
der A, hand-lever a, hydraulic cylinder D, 
attached to the head of the punching-ma 
chine, the said hydraulic cylinder having 
an automatic throttle piston-valve, l, and pipe 
p, substantially and for the purpose as de 
Scribed. 
2. In punching, shearing, and such like 
machines worked by steam and Water power, 
the combination of a punching, shearing, or 
such like machine with a steam-cylinder, A, 
with a distributing-valve, b, hydraulic cylin 
der C, and piston-rod B, the piston-rod B be 
ing fastened to a piston in the steam-cylin 
der A, hand-lever a, hydraulic cylinder D, 
attached to the head of the punching-ma 
chine, the said hydraulic cylinder having an 
automatic throttle piston-valve, l, steam-cyl 
inder G, rods e' e', and cross-head e, fast 
ened to the piston g', filling-valve g, having 
its lever attached to the hand-lever C. by a 
rod, i, and pipes p d, substantially and for the 
purpose as described. 
3. In punching, shearing, and such like 
machines worked by steam and Water power, 
the combination of a punching, shearing, or 
such like machine with a steam-cylinder, A, 
with a distributing-valve, b, hydraulic cylin 
der C, and piston-rod B, the piston-rod B be 
ing fastened to a piston in the steam-cylin 
der A, hand-levera, hydraulic cylinder D, at 
tached to the head of the punching-machine, 
the said hydraulic cylinder having an auto 
matic throttle piston-valve, l, and pipe p, with 
hydraulic buffer or buffers T, piston or pis 
tons m, non-return valve p', and pipes in and 
o, substantially and for the purpose as de 
4. In punching, shearing, and Such like 
machines worked by steam and water power, 
the combination of a punching, shearing, Or 
such like machine with a steam-cylinder, A, 
with a distributing-valve, b, hydraulic cylin 
der C, and piston-rod IB, the piston-rod B be 
ing fastened to a piston in the steam-cylin 
der A, hand-lever (l, hydraulic cylinder D, at 
tached to the head of the punching-machine, 
the said hydraulic cylinder having an auto 
matic throttle piston-valve, l, steam-cylinder 
G, rods e' e', and cross-head e, fastened to 
the pistong', filling-valve g, having its lever 
attached to the hand-lever a by a rod, , 
and pipes p d, with hydraulic buffer or buffers 
T, piston or pistons in, non-return valve p', 
and pipes in and O, substantially and for the 
purpose as described. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto Set Our 
hands in presence of two witnesses. 
scribed. 
- 
C. SCHUMACHER. 
REINER, DAELEN. 
M. ROTHE. 
Witnesses; 
GUSTAVE ALBERTOELRICHS, 
WM. D. WARNER. 
75 
95 
IOC 
IO 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401896.txt	J. McFARLANE. 
HYDRAULIC DREDGING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 23, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
No. 401,896, 
 
284tv.cscs 
36?? 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washing 
(C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 401,896, 
J. McFARLANE. 
HYDRAULIC DREDGING MACHINE. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 23, 1889. 
 
S 
NZAN 
 
. N. PEr?Rs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, O. C. 
(No Model.). 
No. 401,896, 
 
J. McFARLANE. 
HYDRAULIC DREDGING MACHINE. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 23, 1889. 
 
 
 
reters, photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN McFARLANE, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, ASSIGNOR, 
BY DIRECT AND MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, OF PART TO GEORGE J. BESSLER 
AND HENRY WEX, OF SAME PLACE. 
HYDRAU L. C D RED G|NG- MACH|N E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,896, dated April 28, 1889. 
Application filed April 6, 1888, Serial No. 269,891 (No model.) 
25 
To all whom it may concern; 
Be it known that I, JOHN MCFARLANE, a 
Subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at Washington, in the District of Colum 
5 bia, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provementsin Hydraulic Dredging-Machines; 
and Ido declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
Io it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters and figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to hydraulic dredges, 
and has for its object to improve the effect 
iveness, simplify the construction, cheapen the 
cost, and economize the power and fuel used 
in running such machines. 
With these objects in view my invention 
consists in the improved construction, arrange 
ment, and combination of parts hereinafter 
fully described, and afterward specifically 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in end elevation of a dredge having 
my improvements applied thereto. Fig. 2 is 
a side view of the parts shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is alongitudinal vertical sectional view show 
3o ing the manner of connecting and controlling 
the movement of the telescope-tubes. Fig. 4 
is a vertical section through one of the cut 
ters. Fig. 5 is an enlarged view of part of 
the cutter-shaft, showing the manner of at 
35 taching the cutters thereto. Fig. 6 is a view 
similar to that shown in Fig. 4, showing a 
modification thereof; and Fig. 7 is a view of 
another modification. 
Like letters mark the same parts whenever 
4o they occur in the several figures of the draw 
lingS. 
Referring to the drawings by letters of ref 
erence, Ais an Ordinary hull of a dredge, a be 
ing the end, and a' the side thereof, the former 
45 shown in Fig.1 and the latter in Fig. 2. The 
deck a is projected forward, (see Fig. 2) and 
is supported by suitable braces, a. (See Figs. 
1 and 2.) 
B is a sheet or metal box extending along 
5o the front of the hull of the dredge, and is of 
the length of the width of the hull. This box 
 
To the flanges ef' on sections E F are 75 
is lowered into the Water and rests on the bot 
tom or earth, the bottom of the box being open. 
In this box is journaled a shaft, b, extending 
athwart the hull and longitudinally of the 55 
bOX, having Secured to it a series of knives 
or stirrers, b'b', said shaft being driven by 
means of suitable gear-wheels, c c' d d', an 
upright sliding shaft, C, and a suitable hori 
Zontal shaft, D, said shaft D being driven by 6o 
any Suitable power om board the dredge. This 
box B has extending from it two pipes, E F, 
connecting with the usual centrifugal pump 
On the dredge. These pipes, in order to ac 
commodate the different depths of water and 65 
still preserve a proper connection with the 
box B, are each formed with two or more (in 
this instance of three) telescoping sections, E' 
EE and F. FF, the outer sections, E8 and 
F, being connected to the box B, and inner to 
Sections forming part of the main pipes E. F. 
Each of these sections is provided at its top 
With a flange marked, respectively, e'ee and 
f" f2 fa. 
secured rods E. F., which extend upward 
through the holes in the flanges e'f'' on sec 
tions E F, and to flanges ef are secured 
upwardly- extending rods EP F, passing 
through holes in flanges efin a similar man- 8o 
ner. These rods are threaded a part of their 
lengths, and are provided with nuts EF to 
limit the outward adjustment of the several 
telescopic sections; or, instead of threading the 
rods they may be made smooth, and un- 85 
threaded nuts having set - screws to bear 
against the rod may be used. To the flanges 
ef of the outer telescopic sections are at 
tached chains G. H., which mounted over pull 
leys G'H', mounted at the top of a suitable go 
frame-work, I, raised on the deck of the 
dredge, pass down and are connected to drums 
g h, whose shafts are provided on the end 
with a belt-pulley, KL, whereby they may be 
driven from the power of the dredge, and on 95 
the other end with cranks K. L', whereby 
they may be turned by hand. They are fur 
ther provided with ratchet-wheels k l and 
pawls k'l', as shown, 
scribed as follows: The dredge-being in posi 
tion, the box B is lowered by means of the 
The operation of my invention may be de- Ioo 
401,896 
6? 
75 
1. In a hydraulic dredge, a box or case, tele 
scopic suction-pipes leading therefrom, and a 
shaft journaled horizontally within said box 
or case, in combination with alternating cut 
ters bolted to said shaft and adapted to ro 
tate in a vertical plane, each of said cutters 
having its center beyond the axis of rotation 
of the shaft, as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a dredging-machine, the combination, 
with a vertically-movable box, a shaft jour 
naled horizontally therein, and cutters on 
said shaft, of telescopic suction-pipes, each of 
the sections of which is provided with a pro 
jection, guiding and controlling rods on either 
side of each of said pipes, one of which rods 
is bolted to the projection of the intermediate 
section of the pipe and passes through the 
projection on the upper section thereof, and 
the other of which rods is secured to the pro 
jection on the bottom section of the pipe and 
passes through the projection on the interme 
diate section thereof, all substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
3. In a dredging-machine, a vertically-mov 
able box or case, a shaft journaled horizontally 
therein, and alternating cutters secured on 
either side of said shaft, the blades of which 
are curved in the arcs of circles whose cen 
ters fall without the axis of rotation of said 
shaft, in combination with telescopic suction 
pipes each of the sections of which is formed 
with a projection at its upper end, guiding 
and controlling rods on opposite sides of said 
suction-pipes, and respectively secured to dif 
ferent sections thereof, means for raising and 
lowering the box or case, and means for op 
erating the shaft carrying the cutters, all sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. In a dredging-machine, a cutter the ex 
tremity of the shank of which is formed with 
projections extending obliquely in opposite 
directions, and one of which has a perforated 
lip, and a correspondingly-shaped piece 
hinged to one of said projections, whereby a 
rectangular opening will be formed, as shown, 
and also having a perforated lip, and a bolt 
passing through said lips, for the purpose set 
forth, in combination with a horizontal shaft 
passing through the rectangular opening of 
the cutter. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN McFARLANE. 
Witnesses: 
SHIPLEY BRASHEARs, 
FRED R. CORNWALL. 
95 
I OC 
IO 
chains and pulleys, the cutter-shaft is re 
volved, causing the cutters to plow, cut, or 
stir up the bottom, and the pumps being 
started the mixture of sand or mud and Wa 
ter is carried up through the pipes and deliv 
ered therefrom at any desired point. The 
box gradually lowers until the proper depth 
is dredged, when it may be raised and moved 
into another position to repeat the operation. 
This may be done also without raising by 
leaving the front of the box open and push 
ing it forward into the bank. A large sur 
face can thus be dredged over before it is 
necessary to move, the box being, as before 
stated, of a length equal or perhaps greater 
than the width of the dredge. 
There may, if desired, be two parallel shafts 
in the box, each carrying the cutters, thus 
about doubling the capacity in each position 
of the dredge, and allowing of the movement 
of twice as much earth before moving the 
dredge to another position. 
I have not shown the various ways that the 
parts herein described may be connected with 
the power (usually steam-engines) on the 
dredge, as many variations might be made in 
such connections without in any way affect 
ing my invention, such changes suggesting 
themselves to the machinist or engineer ac 
cording to the necessities of each particular 
CaSe. 
In the views of modifications of means of 
attachment of the cutters to the shaft, FigS, 
4, 6, and 7, it will be seen that the cutters are 
rigidly held thereon by simple means, and 
may be removed or adjusted in position with 
great facility. In Fig. 4 a lower piece is se 
cured to the main body by two bolts passing 
through a flange on each side. In Fig. 7 two 
bolts are also used, but differently arranged; 
but in Fig. 6 only one bolt is used, a hinge 
being used instead of the other bolt shown in 
Fig. 4. 
It will be observed that the cutter-blades 
are not arranged in the arc of a circle which 
has the axis of rotation of the shaft as a cen 
ter; but the center of their arcs is without the 
shaft to the left thereof, as shown in Figs. 4, 
6, and 7, so that the cutters while cutting 
the earth at the same time act as plows and 
throw the dirt inward and upward, causing 
its thorough intermixture with the water. 
Openings are made in the box or case, which 
may be regulated by valves, so that water 
will be admitted, and all tendency to form a 
vacuum be relieved. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US401996.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 401,996, 
G. W. H. BROG-DEN. 
COUPLING FOR PIPES OR TUBES. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 23, 1889. 
HF" 
sus. E. 
 
N, PETERS. Photolithographer, Washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 401,996, 
Fig 3 
G. W. H. BROG DEN. 
COUPLING FOR PIPES OR TUBEs, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2 
Patented Apr. 23, 1889. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE WILLIAM HARGREAVES BROGDEN, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
coUPLING FOR PIPES OR TUBEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 401,996, dated April 23, 1889. 
Application filed October 20, 1888, Serial No. 288,615, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE WILLIAM HAR 
GREAVES BROGDEN, a subject of the Queen of 
Great Britain, residing at London, England, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in the Method of Connecting Pipes or Tubes, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to pipes or tubes; and 
it consists, chiefly, in the employment of loose 
collars or rings which are formed in sections, 
so that they can be readily placed upon the 
ends of the pipes or tubes to be connected, 
the said collars or rings being adapted to bear 
against flanges or projections on the said 
pipes or tubes and to be held together by 
bolts or their equivalents. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an end elevation illustrating the arrange 
ment of the collars or rings for Connecting 
two adjacent pipes or tubes, and Fig. 2 is a . 
side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a view 
showing the sections of the flange detached; 
and Fig. 4 is a view similar to Fig. 2, but 
showing the collars or rings disconnected from 
each other. 
a bindicate the adjacent end portions of 
two pipes or tubes to be connected; c. d, the 
sectional collars or rings, and e effthe bolts 
or studs. . 
gh are flanges which are formed upon the 
ends of the pipes a, b, respectively, and which 
serve to maintain the collars or rings upon 
the pipes; and his a packing-ring, which is 
placed between the adjacent tubes. Each of 
the collars or rings c d is formed in two sec 
tions, as shown in Fig. 3, and one end of each 
section has advantageously formed integral 
with it a tongue, i, against which the plain 
end of the other section of the collar can lie, 
as shown most clearly in Figs. 2 and 4, SO that 
the face of the collar in contact with the 
flange will be close to the latter. 
The sections of each collar are preferably 
connected together by the bolts, which also 
serve to unite adjacent collars. As shown in 
the drawings, each of the said bolts is pro 
vided with a collar, i, between which and a 
nut the tongue of one section and the adja 
cent end of the other section of each collar 
are clamped, so that the said Sections are 
rigid relatively to each other. 
In jointing two adjacent pipes the collars 
are first of all applied to the respective tubes, 
and then moved toward each other so that the 
studs e of the collar center holes between the 
studs f of the collar d, and vice versa, the 
whole being finally secured by nuts, as indi 
cated in Fig. 2. 
I wish it understood that I do not confine 
myself to the construction shown in the draw 
ings, as it is obvious that each collar may be 
formed in more than two sections, if desired, 
and that other means than those described 
may be employed for uniting the several sec 
tions of each collar together. 
The chief advantage of my invention is that 
by the employment of loose collars much less 
room is required for the stowage of a given . 
number of pipes or tubes for transport than 
for the same number provided with flanges of 
the ordinary construction. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention 
and in what manner the same is to be per 
formed, I declare that what I claim is 
The combination, with the pipes each pro 
vided with a flange adjacent to its ends, of 
rings or flanges encircling said pipe and en 
gaging said flanges, consisting of two parts, 
each provided at one end with an offset to re 
ceive the plain end of the other part, and 
bolts having one end extending through the 
ends of the portions of said ring, each bolt 
having a shoulder engaging the inner face of 
said ring and a nut on said bolt engaging its 
outer face, the free end of said bolts being 
adapted to engage apertures in the Opposing 
flange and provided with nuts, substantially 
as described. 
GEORGE WILLIAM HARGREAWES BROGDEN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN E. BONSFIELD, 
F. W. PRICE. ' 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402096.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 402,096, 
S 
 
W. G. MORG AN. 
RATCHET DRILL, 
Patented Apr. 23, 1889. 
 
2. 
Aziz 
F3 
s a 
(2% 72d2%r 
2/7Zancarza7 o/, 
6. 
- 
a 
AZZZee 22-g G-72-67azz 
-27 W27 271. 6eece. - 
44? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM G. MORGAN, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
RATCHET DRILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,096, dated April 23, 1889. 
Application filed Junell, 1888, Serial No. 276,753, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM G. MORGAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have 
invented a new and useful Ratchet-Drill, of 
Which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
ratchet-drills; and it consists in the construc 
tion and combination of parts hereinafter de 
Scribed and claimed. 
My object is to construct a ratchet-drill 
that Will automatically feed itself and at the 
same time have a continuous revolution at 
both strokes of the handle, as well as to con 
Struct a cheap and durable drill. I attain 
these objects by the mechanism illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I is an elevation view showing the 
front plate removed and showing the han 
dles partly in section. Fig. II is a top view 
of the drill. Fig. III is a transverse section 
drawn on the line III III in Fig. I. Fig. IV 
is a view of the ratchet-wheels detached. 
Letter A is an outside casing, in which the 
parts of the drill mechanism are inclosed. It 
is provided in its interior with a shoulder, ac, 
against which the arm B is fulcrumed, or 
against which the arm presses or bears when 
being pulled backward or pressed forward, so 
as to take the strain off the teat T, and also 
With a teat, T, which passes through a hole in 
the handle B. It is provided on its outside 
With a sheath, H, made to inclose and retain 
a handle, H, which handle serves to steady 
the drill. 
Letter B is an arm fulcrumed in the casing 
A, and is provided on each side of the full 
crum with a recess, which passes around more 
than a half-circle and holds circular ends of 
pawls did and allows them to work in said 
recesses, and contains a handle, H'. 
C C are tWO ratchet-wheels fixed on the 
shaft of the drill, and which engage the pawls 
d and d, respectively. These may be made 
in one; but by making them separately the 
one can be made smaller than the other, and 
thus enable the whole mechanism to be put 
in a Smaller and more compact form and en 
able the drill-handle to have more thrust and 
greater action than if both pawls operated on 
the same ratchet-wheel. 
N is the drill-shank, which is made to con 
tain the drill at one end and is provided with 
a screw at the other. This screw is desig 
- 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
75 
55 
nated by the letter S, and is adapted to fit in 
and engage a female thread in a shank, M. 
This shank is provided with a friction-wheel, 
W, about its center, and at the end opposite 
where the screw end of the drill-shank en 
ters it is tapered off to a point and adapted 
to turn in the frame-work of the drill. This 
friction-wheel W is surrounded by a band, . 
b, which is united at its ends by a set-Screw, 
V, and has an extension of one or both ends 
to meet and engage the frame-Work of the 
drill, which will prevent the friction-wheel W. 
from turning when the set-screw is screwed 
tightly or allow it to turn when it is screwed 
lightly. 
D is the drill. 
Now, when the handle H is grasped, and 
the ratchet-casing is firmly held, and the 
shank Misplaced against the frame-Work, and 
the end of the drill proper is placed against 
the object to be drilled, and the handle H is 
moved backward and forward, the drill-shaft 
and drill are continuously moved in the same 
direction at the backward as well as the for 
ward thrust of the handle H'. 
Now, what I claim, and for which I ask Let 
ters Patent to be granted me, is 
1. A ratchet-drill composed of an outside 
casing, A, provided with a fulcrum-rest in its 
interior portion to engage the arm B, the arm 
B, having pawls did engaging ratchet-wheels 
c c, two ratchet-wheels, c c, handles H' H, 
shaft N, adapted to hold the drill at one end 
and containing a thread at the other, shank 
M, and band b. 
2. In a ratchet-drill, an arm, B, fulcrumed 
in a casing, A, and having a circular recess 
on each side of said fulcrum for the reception 
and retention of pawls did, in combination 
with a ratchet-wheel and casing, Substantially 
as described. 
- 
3. In a ratchet-drill, the combination of two 
ratchet-wheels, one larger than the other, 
fixed to a drill-shank, an arm fulcrumed be 
tween two pawls held and operated by said 
arm and engaging the ratchet-wheels, and a 
casing inclosing said ratchet-wheels, pawls, 
and arm, substantially as described. 
Witness my hand this 5th day of June, 1888. 
W. G. MORGAN. 
. 
Witnesses: 
WM. M. ECCLES, 
HARRY S. GRIFFITH. 
95 
IOO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402196.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 402,196, 
 
T. R. RINGWOOD. 
CULTIVATOR, 
Patented Apr. 30, 1889. 
 
 
 
Nemi r 
II 
 
 
Em 
II 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
-wn-ross-erers -----------.. 
THOMAS R. RINGWOOD, OF SCIPIO, NEW YORK. 
CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,196, dated April 30, 1889. 
Application filed February 2, 1889, Serial No. 298,514, (No model.) 
35 
45 
55 
The operation of this machine is as follows: 
When the lever D, which is fixed upon the 
axle A, is drawn rearward, it revolves the 
axle and the pinions C C, and racks E'E' de 
press the frame FF, while the bars G G, be 
ing fixed to the axle, are also depressed, and, 
through the springs KK, act upon the rear 
of the frame FF and depress it at that point, 
The chains n n may be let out to accommo 
date the different positions at which the frame 
F F is carried. When the lever D is moved 
in the forward direction, these movements are 
reversed and the frame FF is raised. The 
segment d serves to secure the lever D at the 
desired point. By this construction the teeth 
LL may be raised or lowered or the frame F 
F rocked at will, while the springs KK trans 
mita yielding pressure to the rear of the frame. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination of the frame F F, the 
standards EE, provided with racks E'E', the 
axle A, provided with the actuating-lever D, 
pinions C C, and bars G. G, and the springs 
K K, connecting said bars with the rear of 
the frame FF. 
THOMAS R, RINGWOOD, 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK. ALLEN, 
GEORGE UNDERWOOD. 
d 
To all whon, it may conce/'7. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS R. RINGWOOD, 
of the town of Scipio, county of Cayuga, and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Cultivators and 
Analogous Implements, of which the follow 
ing is a description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming part of 
this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view; Fig. 2, a plan view, 
and Fig. 3 shows front and side views of the 
shovels. 
In the drawings, A is the axle; B, the tongue. 
CC are pinions keyed to the axle. 
D is a lever provided with a locking-seg 
ment, d. 
E is a plate provided with an elongated 
opening, e, to encircle the axle, and with a rack, 
E', which engages the pinion C. 
FF is the frame, to which the shovels or 
teeth are secured, and this frame is secured 
to the plate E. Bars G are secured to the axle 
A, so as to turn with it, and are connected by a 
cross-bar, H, from which semicircular springs 
Kextend downward and are connected to the 
rear of the frame F. An upper frame, in m, is 
Secured to the axle and to the tongue, and 
chains in 7 are Secured thereto and are con 
nected to the front part of the frame F F, and 
assist in Supporting it. 
LIL are shovels or teeth Secured to the frame 
bars F. F. A variety of points adapted to 
different uses may be used upon the teeth L 
L., of which one form is shown. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402296.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JEREMIAH. W. BRADLEY, OF MARSHALL, NORTE CAROLINA. 
EXPECTORANT. 
a 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,296, dated April 30, 1889. 
Application filed February 13, 1889, Serial No. 299,751. (No specimens.) 
brown,) and then it is ready for the eight 
ounces of paregoric, eight ounces sirup of 
Squills, and three ounces of cinnamon, which, 
being added, Will make One gallon of the com 
position ready for use. 
In using the said composition for diseases 
of the lungs it should be taken three times a 
day-morning, noon, and night-after meals, 
except in the morning, and then the first 
thing on rising. Dose, one tea-spoonful. 
By the use of the above composition the 
lungs are relieved of all heaviness and their 
natural functions fully restored. 
I am not aware that all of the ingredients 
Of my composition, in the proportions stated, 
have been used together. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
The herein-described composition of matter 
to be used in lung diseases, consisting of wa 
ter, life-everlasting, (Gnaphalium, margarita 
ceum,) ground ivy, (Glechoma, hederacea,) sal 
Soda, paregoric, sirup of squills, cinnamon, and 
Sugar, in the proportions specified. 
JEREMIAH. W. BRADLEY. 
Witnesses: 
F.T. WALSER, 
W. J. MCINTOSHI. 
35 
45 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JEREMIAH. W. BRADLEY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Mar 
shall, in the county of Madison and State of 
North Carolina, have invented a new and use 
ful composition of matter to be used for the 
relief of the lungs and their restoration to 
their natural functions, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My composition consists of the following 
ingredients, combined in the proportions 
Stated, viz: pure water, five gallons; life-ever 
lasting, (Gnaphalium margaritaceum.) two 
and three-fourths pounds; ground-ivy, (Gle 
choma hederacea) one and one-fourthpound; 
Sal-Soda, two Ounces; paregoric, eight ounces; 
sirup of Squills, eight ounces; cinnamon, three 
ounces; sugar, (white brown,) two and one 
half pounds. These ingredients are to be 
compounded and thoroughly mixed in the fol 
lowingmanner: Boil the two and three-fourths 
pounds of Gnaphalium margariaceum (life 
everlasting) and one and one-fourth pound of 
Glechoma, hederacea, (ground-ivy) in the five 
gallons of pure water for four or five hours; 
then strain the same; then add two ounces of 
Sal-Soda and boil for five minutes; then add 
two and one-half pounds of sugar, (white 
d 
20 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402396.txt	(No Model.) 
P. F. & A. F. BRYCE. 
BREAD MAKING MACHINE. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 402,396, 
M 
Patented Apr. 30, 1889, 
SSF 
Eer 
-- 
- -- 
--- 
2 
st- 
--- 
-- 
a 
- 
EEAS, 
HHRWEs E. 
E Sis 
s 
E 
EiE 
Yn 
S. 
t 
s 
s 
Ele 
S. 
- 
e 
A 
TIMESSES. 
44.eff73otorv, 
- 
s 
14- 
C2/2 2. 
S. a 2-2-2A, 29. 
 
- - 
N. PeTERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. ' 
(No Model.) 
P. F. & A. F. BRYCE. 
BREAD MAKING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 402,896. 
m 
Patented Apr. 30, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
S. 
Ee E 
EE 
 
it 
s 
l 
 
M 
Y 
t 
', 
Y' 'I, 
d 
A 
is 
 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
E 
 
 
 
  
 
P. F. & A. F. BRYCE, 
BREADMAKING MACHINE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 8. 
Patented Apr. 30, 1889. 
S 
| 
 
N N NS N N N N S. 
al 
Eid ya 
I 
B 
(e.g. 
I 
 
 
HN () 
 
 
57 ge ES (2 s 
"...is 
ZN stage 
'', "" 
 
 
"ity 
2% 242%. 
NPETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washinston, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 402,396, 
 
P. F. & A. F. BRYOE. 
BREAD MAKING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
Patented Apr. 30, 1889. 
(6. 
(s D |. 
aY 
e W. S. SS W 
- I 
- N. 
Ea 
N 
is 
SAs it 
SY 
a 
little e 
Iss 
22 
I 
I & 
2.SSSIs 
4. 
RS 
No. 402,396, 
Patented Apr. 30, 1889. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
 
WWESSES. 
J2%-e- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER F. BRYCE AND ALEXANDER F. BRYCE, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
BREAD-MAKING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,896, dated April 30, 1889. 
Application filed November 24, 1888, Serial No. 291,784, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, PETER F. BRYCE and 
ALEXANDER F. BRYCE, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Indianapolis, in the county 
5 of Marion and State of Indiana, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Bread-Making.Machines, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of our said invention is to pro 
Io vide a machine for rolling out dough from 
the bulky mass in which it is first formed to 
a sheet of exactly the desired thickness and 
width from which the loaves can be cut pre 
paratory to baking, by the use of which much 
I5 labor is saved, loaves of a uniform size are 
formed, and a better character of bread manu 
factured, as will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
2O which are made a part hereof, and on which 
similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts, Figure 1 is a top or plan view of a ma 
chine embodying our said invention; Fig. 2, 
a side elevation of the same, looking to the 
25 left in Fig.1; Fig. 3, a similar view looking to 
the right in Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a central vertical 
section on the dotted line 4 4 in Fig. 1: Fig. 
5, a horizontal section on the dotted line 55 
in Fig. 2; Fig. 6, a detail sectional view on the 
3o dotted line 6 6 in Fig. 1; Fig. 7, a detail sec 
tion on the dotted line 77 in Fig. 2; Fig. 8, a 
detail vertical section through the lower end 
of One of the adjustable posts of the frame, 
and Fig. 9 a longitudinal section illustrating 
In Said drawings the portions marked A 
represent the frame of the machine, BB' the 
reducing-rolls, and C the blow-fan and dust 
ing mechanism for blowing the flour-dust into 
The frame A consists of two main posts set 
rigidly in sills C, the proper distance apart, 
and preferably extending partly above and 
partly below the floor on which the machine 
45 is mounted. The space between them is . 
cased up at the rear side, and forwardly-pro 
jecting Wings at are secured to their front 
adjacent corners. Similar posts, A', are ad 
justably secured in said sills a, a short dis 
5o tance in front of the posts A, the space be 
tWeen the front corners of which is inclosed, 
and which have wings at secured to their 
35 a modified construction. 
rear adjacent corners, which overlap or break 
joints with the forwardly-extended wings a', 
thus forming with the posts a vertical box or 55 
casing having an open top and bottom. Said 
posts A" are pivoted to shoes S, which are 
mounted in elongated slots in the sills C, and 
screw-threaded rods a' are mounted in suit 
able bearings in said sills and engage with 6o 
said shoes, (see Fig. 8) by which said posts are 
adjusted to and secured in the desired position. 
Rods a, with screw-threaded inner ends, are 
also secured in the top of said posts A'in suit 
able bearings and extend in through enlarged 65 
holes to the ear side of the posts A to engage 
with nuts n, secured thereto, being provided 
on their outer ends with bevel gear-wheels g, 
which mesh with similar gear-wheels, g', on 
the crank-shaft A, which is mounted in suit- 7o 
able bearings on the front side of said posts 
A' and extends transversely thereof. The 
sills a may be secured in position in any Suit 
able manner, but are shown as a part of a rect 
angular structure supported from the floor- 75 
beams above. 
Above the floor and extending back from 
the posts A is arranged a table, A', of a height 
convenient for the workmen and a length 
suitable for the purpose of receiving and 
feeding the dough to the rolls. An endless 
apron, A', forms the top of said table, being 
mounted on the roller a at the front end of 
said table and the roller a' at its rear end, 
and passing down around the roller Ct, which 85 
is mounted on the shaft A, journaled in Suit 
able bearings beneath the front end of said 
table and driven by a gear-wheel, a, On one 
end thereof, arranged to mesh with the roll 
driving gearing, as will be presently described. 
Said apron also passes over an idler-roll, ai, 
which is preferably mounted on the under 
side of the table nearly above the roller a 
and operates to hold said apron up against 
said roller a? and secure the requisite amount 95 
of friction to drive it. The bearings A, in 
which the roller at is journaled, are prefera 
bly mounted on screw-threaded rods A", which 
are journaled in suitable bearings, a, on the 
sides of the table-frame, as shown, and the 
adjustment of this roll for the purpose of 
tightening the apron thus provided for. Side 
boards, A, are provided on the top of said 
table, arranged substantially that distance 
OO 
4o the apparatus. 
. 
 
 
402,396 
O 
apart which it is desired shall be the width 
of the sheet of dough when rolled. The top 
of the table is thus formed into a long nar 
row spout arranged to discharge into the 
rollers, the bottom of which is the endless 
apron. 
The rolls B and B' are arranged in pairs, 
the shafts b of the rolls B being journaled in 
bearings secured on the front side of the 
posts A, substantially equidistant one from 
the other, and the shafts l' of the rolls B' in 
bearings on the rear side of the posts A' di 
rectly opposite said rolls B. Said rolls differ 
in construction only in that the rolls B are 
of slightly greater length than those B and 
have wide annular flanges b extending out 
from their ends, between which said rolls B' 
extend and operate, thus affording straight 
side Walls to the opening between each pair 
of rolls, which prevent the dough from spread 
ing out and insure that the edges of the sheet 
shall be square and straight. The lower shaft 
b extends out through its bearings and the 
frame and has a sprocket-wheel, 1, (or any 
other suitable gear-wheel) mounted on one 
end, which is geared to any convenient power. 
(Not shown.) A smaller gear-wheel, 2, is 
mounted alongside said sprocket-wheel, and 
a similar gear-wheel, 3, on the other end of 
said shaft. The shafts of the rolls B above 
said lower one extend out through the frame 
at one end only, and are each provided with 
a gear-wheel, 4, all of which are geared to 
and driven from the gear-wheel 2 on the 
lower shaft by means of the intermediate 
gear-wheels 5, which are journaled on stud 
shafts on the side of the frame in position to 
make a continuous train of gearing from the 
lower roll to the top, said intermediate wheels 
also serving to maintain the same direction 
to all the rolls. The top gear-wheel 5 also 
meshes With the gear-wheel a, and thus trans 
mits motion to the feeding-apron. 
The shafts b' of the rolls B extend out, 
preferably, on the opposite side of the 1ma 
chine, and are each provided with a gear 
wheel, 6, corresponding in size to the wheels 
2 and 4, the size of each set of wheels being 
increased from the bottom to the top for the 
purpose of decreasing the speed, as will be 
presently described. Said gear-wheels 6 are 
connected by intermediate gear-wheels 7, as 
are the gear-wheels of the rolls B by the in 
termediate gear-wheels 5 on the opposite side 
of the machine. The lower wheel 6 is driven 
from the wheel 3 on the lower shaft b, to 
which it is geared by the gear-wheels S and 9, 
as shown. A carrier-apron, B', is arranged 
beneath the machine in position to receive 
the sheet of dough as it comes from the lower 
rolls, it being mounted on a roll, b, having a 
gear-wheel, 10, on the end of its shaft, which 
meshes with the gear-wheel 9, from which it 
receives its motion. Said apron runs to the 
place where it is desired to carry the sheet of 
dough, being supported at that end by a suit 
able roll, as will be readily understood. 
The blow-fan C is in itself of an ordinary 
construction. It is connected with a casing, 
C', which in turn is connected to a hopper, 
C, which is filled with flour. Said hopper is 
connected to the casing C' by a conveyer-belt, 
c, which is mounted on a roller under said 
hopper, and a roller, c', journaled in said cas 
ing and provided with a gear-wheel on the 
outer end of its shaft, by which it may be 
driven. A sieve, c, is also arranged horizon 
tally in said casing, and brushes are secured 
in each end of the roller c' on each side of the 
conveyer-belt, which operate to beat the flour 
through said sieve, and from thence it is 
drawn into the fan-casing and blown into a 
system of pipes, C, which, by means of numer 
ous branches, lead into each side of the ma 
chine above each set of rolls and into the rear 
end of the spout A, and thus all the parts of 
the machine which are brought into contact 
with the dough are kept thoroughly dusted 
and said dough prevented from adhering to 
said parts. A cross-partition, a, is prefer 
erably provided in the spout A just in front 
of where the branch pipe Centers, and the 
flour is thus stopped and precipitated upon 
the feeding-apron, this end of said spout be 
ing covered, as shown. The air for the fan 
C is taken from just above the discharge end 
of said spout through the pipe C", and thus 
any surplus flour coming up from the machine 
or off the apron A' is drawn in with the air 
and used over again and kept from mingling 
with the air outside. 
The operation of our said invention is as 
follows: The rolls B and B are first ad 
justed to the desired relative position, the 
space between the rolls constituting the lower 
pair being usually about one-half as wide as 
the space between the rolls next above, one 
third as wide as the next space, and one-fourth 
as wide as the top space; but of course this 
adjustment may be varied to suit the particu 
lar work to be done. The gearing of the rolls 
is also graded to correspond, the speed of the 
toppair being (approximately) only one-fourth 
that of the bottom pair. The blow-fan and 
roll-driving mechanism are then set in motion, 
and a supply of dough is deposited upon the 
feeding-apron A", which has first been dusted 
with flour, as described, and fed forward be 
tween the top pair of rolls, its thickness be 
ing regulated by a Workman standing at the 
table. The first pair of rolls operate to re 
duce the thickness of the sheet and form its 
edges square by means of the flanges b'. As 
the sheet becomes reduced in thickness it in 
creases in length, as will be readily under 
stood, and the necessity for the increasing 
rate of speed of the rolls from top to bottom 
is therefore seen, said increase being in a ra 
tio corresponding to the decrease in the width 
of the space between the rolls of the succes 
sive pairs, and thus the dough is rolled and 
pressed together without being stretched or 
drawn apart, and the same surface of the 
sheet is presented to the operation of the rolls 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
13o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
402,896 
3 
55 
75 
at all times and the best possible results thus 
attained. As the sheet passes from the lower. 
rolls out of the machine it is caught by the 
carrier-apron B' and is carried to a conven 
ient table, where it is cut up into loaves and 
taken a Way. 
While We have shown this machine with the 
rolls arranged one above the other and its op 
eration from top to bottom, it will be readily 
seen that they may be arranged in a hori 
Zontal plane or at any angle, with short car 
rier-belts to convey the sheet from one set of 
rolls to the next, if necessary. Such a con 
struction is shown in Fig. 9 and would be de 
sirable for use in a building of only one floor, 
Or where, for any reason, it is desired that the 
machine shall all be upon one floor. The dif 
ferential speed and arrangement of rolls in 
relation to each other would of course be the 
Same as in the preferable construction de 
scribed. 
Having thus fully described our said inven 
tion, What we claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a bread-making ma 
chine, of the two-part frame, one part of which 
is adjustable toward and from the other, a 
series of rolls arranged in pairs, one roll of 
each pair being mounted on said adjustable 
portion of the frame, and the gearing for op 
erating said rolls, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a bread-making machine, the combi 
nation of the frame consisting of the rigid 
portion A, the adjustable portion A', and the 
table portion A, a series of rolls arranged in 
pairs, one roll of each pair being mounted on 
the rigid portion A and the other on the ad 
justable portion A' of the frame, an endless 
feeding-apron mounted on said table portion, 
and the gearing for operating said several 
parts, Substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, in a bread-making ma 
chine, of the frame, the rolls for reducing 
the dough, and an apparatus for dusting 
said rolls, consisting of a blow-fan connected 
with a flour-supply, and pipes connecting said 
blow fan with the casing in which said rolls 
are mounted, and the operating mechanism, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, in a machine for roll 
ing out dough, of the frame, the reducing 
rolls, the feeding-apron, the hopper C, cas 
ing C', a conveyer connecting said hopper 
- 
and said casing, a blow-fan, and a pipe run 
ning from said casing to the casing contain 
ing said reducing-rolls, and the gearing for 
driving said several operating parts, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. In a machine for rolling out dough, the 
combination of the reducing-rolls, the feed 
ing-apron, the blow-fan, the flour supply con 
nected with said blow-fan, the system of pipes 
connected with said blow-fan and arranged to 
discharge onto said rolls and feeding-apron, 
and the air-supply pipe for said blow-fan, ar 
ranged with its mouth just above said rolls 
and the discharge end of said feeding-apron, 
substantially as described, and for the pur 
pose specified. 
6. The combination, in a bread-making mal 
chine, of a frame consisting of a rigid portion 
carrying one of each of the pair of rolls, an 
adjustable portion carrying the other rolls, 
and the screw-threaded rods a,by which the 
movement of said adjustable portion is ef 
fected, substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination of the rigid frame por 
tion A, the adjustable portion A', sills C, car 
rying sliding parts or shoes to which said ad 
justable portion is hinged, screws for adjust 
ing said sliding shoes, the screw-threaded rods 
at the top extending from said portion. A 
to said portion. A for securing and adjusting 
the top of said portion A', the pairs of rolls, 
one of each pair being journaled on the por 
tion A and the other on the portion A', and 
the gearing for driving said rolls, substan 
tially as set forth. 
8. In a machine for rolling dough, the com 
bination of the frame, the series of rolls ar 
ranged with the space between the rolls of 
each pair narrowing from the top to the bot 
tom of the machine, gear-wheels on the ends 
of the journals of each roll of an increasing 
size from the bottom to the top, and interme 
diate gear-wheels connecting the gear-wheels 
of the rolls on each side, all arranged and op 
erating substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto Set 
our hands and seals, at Indianapolis, Indiana, 
this 19th day of November, A.D. 1888. 
Witnesses: 
PETER. E. BRYCE. 
L. S. 
ALEXANDER F. BRYCE. L. S. 
E. W. BRADFORD, 
C. W. H. BROWN, 
95 
OO 
Io 
2 o' 
35 
45 
so 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402496.txt	(No Model.) 
C. S, WEBER, 
TENSIONAL SOUND BOARD, 
No. 402,496, 
Patented Apr. 30, 1889. 
A 27 A 
Zza-Z 
Z 
  
  
$). 2% 
Z7 
Z 
A. 
A. 
A. 
A' 
Zg. 2. 
Z 77 
A-, 
W 222222222 
% e 
e 
s 
A 
5-(1-c-e- 
dazz * * ,-% 
4./ to 
N. PETERS, Pholo-Lithographer, Washington. E. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES S. WEBER, OF SAN JOSE, CALIFORNIA. 
TENSIONAL SOUND - BOARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,496, dated April 30, 1889. 
Application filed March 3, 1887, Serial No. 229,555, (No model.) 
5 
IO 
45 
To a (, Zuho7), it nagy concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLESS. WEBER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at San 
Jos, in the county of Santa Clara and State 
of California, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Tensional Sound 
Boards; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, such as Will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters and 
figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to Sound-boards for 
musical instruments, principally for pian OS 
and other analogous stringed instruments. 
The improvements consist in having the Or 
dinary sound-board put under tension in the 
direction of the length of its fibers, which is 
found to increase the Sonority of the same to 
an eminent degree. As it is a desideratum to 
have the Sound-board made of as thin material 
as possible, a number of such sound-boards 
may be arranged in a pile one above each 
other, in case one is not sufficient to with 
Stand the pressure of the Strings. By having 
the Sound-board under tension the pressure 
of the statings is sustained without the help of 
the bridge-pins or any other contrivance. 
The improvements consist in the novel fea 
tures presently to be described and claimed, 
and shown in the annexed drawings, in 
which 
Figure I is a detail side view of a musical 
instrument embodying my invention. Fig. 2 
is a modified form. 
Referring to Fig. 1, D is the frame, between 
which the sound-board A is supported and 
the strings C strung. The strings extend over 
the bridge G and are secured at one end to the 
frame by the hitch-pin I and at the opposite 
end by the turning-pin E. The agraffe F and 
hammer II are of ordinary construction and 
operation. 
The gist of the invention is in having the 
sound-board under tension in the direction of 
the length of its fibers, and for accomplishing 
this result the sound-board is adjustably Sup 
 
55 
65 
ported between the frame, so that any slack 
may be taken up. 
The clamps B, which connect the sound 
board and frame, are bifurcated at their outer 
ends and embrace the edges of the Sound 
board, to which they are secured by the bolts 
b. One of the clamps has the threaded shank 
b' extended through the frame and provided 
on its outer end with the nute, by which the 
tension on the sound-board can be regulated. 
There may be as many of the clamps as oc 
casion may require, or each clamp may extend 
the whole length of the sound-board from 
side to side along each end, and may have as 
many threaded shanks as desired. 
The ends of the sound-board are thick 
ened and the arms of the clamp correspond 
ingly converge, as shown, which renders more 
certain the binding between the clamp and 
board. 
75 
Fig. 2 shows the ordinary sound-board, J, to 
re-enforced by the Sound-board K, mounted 
by my improved method. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination, with the frame and the 
Sound-board, of the clamps adjustably con 
necting the sound-board with the frame, 
whereby the linear tension upon the fibers 
composing the sound-board can be varied, 8o 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the frame and the 
sound-board having its ends thickened, as 
shown, of the clamps having bifurcated ends 
conforming to and embracing the thickened 85 
ends of the boards, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the frame and the 
Sound-board having thickened ends, of the 
clamp fitted to the thickened ends, and the 
threaded shank passed through the frame, 9o 
and the nut mounted upon the threaded end, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES S, WEBER, 
Witnesses: 
H. J. ALEXANDER, 
J. E. FISHER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402597.txt	u 
(No Model.) 
No. 402,597, 
G. L. HUBBELL. 
HAND SEWING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 7, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
N m 
M 
 
G. L. HUBBELL, 
HAND SEWING MACHINE. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 7, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
No. 402,597, 
 
pters, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE L. HUBBELL OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, 
HAND SEWING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,597, dated May 7, 1889, 
- 
Application filed May 10, 1888, Serial No. 273,513, (No model.) 
 
 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
75 
To all, whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE L. HUBBELL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bridge 
port, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Hand Sewing-Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in hand sewing-ma 
chines, and has for its objects, first, to provide 
means which shall be simple and positive in 
operation for the removing of the shuttle with 
out the use of covers or plates in or upon the 
bed; Second, to furnish a simple and effective 
feed for use in such machines, and, third, to 
adjust the recovery-spring of the handles so 
that it may be effective and not connected di 
rectly to both of said handles; and with these 
ends in view my invention consists in the de 
tails of construction and combination of ele 
ments hereinafter to be fully set forth and 
described, and then recited in the claims. 
In order that those skilled in the art to which 
my invention appertains may fully under 
stand how to make and use my improvement, 
I will describe the same in detail, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a machine 
constructed in accordance with my improve 
ment; Figs. 2 and 3, plan views of the shuttle 
and feed mechanisms, the bed-plate being re 
moved, but its shape being shown in dotted 
lines; Fig. 4, an edge view of the pivoted driv 
ing-plate, and Fig. 5 a detail side elevation of 
the feed-bar. 
Like reference-numbers denote the same 
parts in all the figures. 
This application is in subject-matterlike in 
many respects to that shown and described in 
a certain application filed by Ingraham and 
Hubbell, July 27, 1886, Serial No. 209,266, and 
to said application I desire, in connection with 
this, to refer for purposes of illustration. 
Rigid handle A, needle-arm B, and plate 
supporting arm C constitute the frame of the 
machine. 
- 
in the aforesaid application. 
at F. 
D is the work-plate secured to the arm C, as 
E is the needle-bar-actuating lever, pivoted 
G is the needle-bar. 
His the operating-lever, pivoted to the base 
of the needle-arm and connected to the lever 
E by link J. 
Extension O, cross-pin R, and slide-bar S 
are similar in operation to the same parts in 
the application above referred to. Upon the 
top of the slide-bar S is a flat-faced projec 
tion, 1, in the outer edge of which is formed a 
recess or pocket, 2.3 is the driving-plate. It 
has a curved or deflected driving-slot, 4, which 
embraces the pin W on the carrier-bar U. 
The plate 3 is pivoted upon the projection 1, 
and is adapted to be turned thereon, as seen 
at Figs. 2 and 3. If, has a projecting tooth or 
finger, 4", which, when in normal position, en 
gages the pocket 2, and a grasping-handle, 17, 
whereby it may be turned. 
5. is the feeding-lever, which is pivoted be 
neath the bed, as seen at 6, and which near 
its rear end is provided with a curved slot, 7. 
This curved slot is engaged by a pin, 8, on a 
projection which is secured on the slide-bar 
S. The forward end of this lever is hooked, 
as seen at 9, and encircles a bracket, 10, on 
the under side of the feed-bar 11. This 
bracket has an inclined surface, 12, and a pro 
jection, 13, on its under side, for the purpose 
presently explained. 
The feed-bar is forked at one end, and Said 
fork embraces a stud, 14, secured to a projec 
tion from the bed-plate. A spring, 15, is Se 
cured to the top of the bar and bears against 
the plate. The spring 16, which is secured 
as to one end by engagement with the rigid 
handle, has its other end coiled about a pin 
upon the link J. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
When the handles are closed together by the 
grasp of the operator and the driving-plate is 
at position as at Fig. 3, the shuttle, by means 
of the engagement of the pin on the carrier 
bar with the curved slot in the driving-plate, 
is caused to make its segmental traverse be 
neath the plate, during which it takes the 
loop precisely as is shown and described in the 
application heretofore referred to. 
When it is desired to remove the shuttle 
- 
95 
ICO 
2 
402,597 
for the changing of the bobbin or other pur 
pose, the driving-plate is forcibly turned on. 
its pivoted point, by means of the handle 17, 
to the position shown at Fig. 2. This move 
ment of the plate forces the carrier-bar and 
shuttle beyond their regular limit of move 
ment and beyond the edge of the work-plate, 
So as to expose the shuttle to view and admit 
of its ready removal. This dispenses with 
any need for an opening in the face of the 
Work-plate. 
By means of spring 15 the feed-bar is nor 
mally held downward away from the work 
plate, so that the serrated dog does not pro 
ject above its surface. The spring aforesaid 
may be attached either to the plate or to the 
bar. In Figs. 2 and 3 it is shown in dotted 
lines as secured to the plate. In detail, Fig. 
5, it is shown on the feed-bar. It is equally 
operative in either connection. The forked 
engagement of the end of the bar with the 
stud permits to the former a longitudinal 
play upon the latter. The curved end of the 
feed-lever is for the purpose of actuating said 
bar longitudinally in both directions, and by 
lmeans of the incline on the feed-bar it also 
actuates it upward, so that the serrated dogen 
gages the goods and moves them forward un 
der the needle. In detail these movements 
are as follows: As the needle ascends, the 
feed-lever is moved upon its pivotal point, 
and as its hooked end traverses it first by 
contact with the incline raises the bar against 
the Spring, and then, by engagement with the 
projection 13, carries the bar along longi 
tudinally to the limit of its throw. As it re 
cedes, the spring throws the bar downward, 
and the body of the lever, by engagement 
with the other side of the projection, carries 
the bar back into position for the next feed 
ing operation. 
I find it more advantageous to attach the 
recovery-spring for the actuation of the han 
dles to the stationary handle and the link, re 
spectively, since its connection with the pin 
on the link forms a point of positive attach 
ment for one end thereof. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with the stitch-forming 
and cloth-feeding devices of a hand sewing 
machine, of a slide-bar arranged to reciprocate 
longitudinally beneath the bed-plate, a driv 
ing-plate pivoted upon the top of the slide 
bar and provided with a curved slot, whereby 
movement is imparted to the carrier-bar, a de 
fent for normally retaining said plate in its 
driving position, and means, as a handle, for 
turning said plate upon its pivotal point, 
whereby the carrier-bar and shuttle are pro 
jected beyond their normal limit of traverse 
and the latter carried to a point outside the 
edge of the bed-plate, substantially as speci 
fied. 2. The combination, with the stitch-forming 
and cloth-feeding device of a hand Sewing 
machine, of the driving-plate having a de 
flected slot therein for the actuation of the 
shuttle and a tooth and handle thereon, as 
shown, a projection or bracket upon which 
said plate is pivoted, said bracket having a 
detent for the tooth, and means, as described, 
whereby movement is imparted to the Said 
plate, substantially as described. 
3. In combination with the needle and shut 
tle and means for driving the same, the feed 
bar-operating lever having the curved slot 
near its heel end and the hook 9 at its other 
extremity, the reciprocating pin engaging Said 
slot and actuating said lever, the forked feed 
bar pivoted as to one end and spring-actuated 
away from the plate, and the incline and pro 
jection upon the feed-bar arranged within the 
field of the hooked end of the lever, and where 
by said feed-bar is actuated in both direc 
tions, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination, with the stitch-forming 
and cloth-feeding devices of a hand sewing 
machine, of the stationary handle, the movable 
handle, the needle-bar-actuating lever and the 
link between the latter and the movable han 
dile, and the spring whose coils are arranged 
in a vertical plane and the ends whereof are 
connected, respectively, to the stationary han 
dle and a stud on the link, Substantially as 
shown and described. 
5. The combination, with the needle-bar and 
means for driving the same, of the swinging 
shuttle-carrier and its shuttle, the pivoted 
driving-plate having a deflected slot and a de 
tent engaging the base on which it is pivoted, 
the curved and slotted feed-lever hooked as 
to its outer end, and the forked, pivoted, and 
spring-actuated feed-bar having the incline 
and projection thereon, whereby, through the 
hooked end of the feed-lever, the goods are 
fed beneath the needle, as set forth. 
Intestimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE L. II UBBELL. 
Witnesses: 
S. II. HUBBARD, 
A. J. TANNER. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402697.txt	(No Model.) 
R. G., STR OTHER, 
GRAIN DRILL, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 402,697, 
Patented May 7, 1889. 
 
O 
Go 
- - - - 7- - - - - - - - 
t 
M 
928)iticsses 
C67,4- 
42 
N 
M 
w 4. 
------- -----, --------------------------- 
-1 
a 
\ ^ 
w 
V 3v-uc41 foz 
Zazooz-G 250-odzer 
S3 
hia/ &lt to thics 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 402,697, 
R. G. STROTHER, 
GRAIN DRILL, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 7, 1889. 
 
28).tv.csses, 
-(2,4- 33 
341.uc-1 for 
ZoZozzez/ Casareer 
- 
- - &letotics 
i. PEERS, Phato-lithographer, Washington, B.G. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROLLAND G. STROTHER, OF FINDIAY, OHIO. 
G RAIN D R L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,697, dated May 7, 1889. 
Application filed August 21, 1888, Serial No. 283,826, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ROLLAND G. STROTHER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Findlay, in the county of Hancock and State 
of Ohio, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Grain-Drills, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to grain-drills; and 
it has for its object to provide a machine that 
will throw the ground up in ridges, leaving 
trough-shaped depressions between the ridges 
for draining the land, and which will plant 
the seed in the crest of the ridges, where it 
will be free from excessive moisture and not 
liable to be hurt by cold. 
The seed, being 
sown in the crest of the ridges, admits of 
better cultivation than if sown on a level sur 
face. The depressions between the ridges 
form a complete drainage and prevent an ac 
cumulation of water, which so often is the 
source of a poor crop or no crop at all. The 
advantage of sowing the seed in the ridges 
and having depressions or drains on each side 
of the ridges is manifest, as the ground, being 
thoroughly drained, will not bake or clog, 
consequently will remain mellow and permit 
the roots to spread. 
The planting may also 
be done later in the season, and the crop will 
be protected from the ravages of the fly and 
from freezing, the latter being evident, as 
there will be no water to become frozen about 
the seed and destroy the germs, 
The improvement consists in the details of 
construction and the combination of the parts, 
which hereinafter will more fully be described 
and claimed, and shown in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan view of an agri 
cultural machine embodying my invention, 
the hopper and the feed mechanism being re 
moved. Fig. 2 is a side view of the machine 
equipped and adapted for Sowing Seed. Fig. 
3 is a detail sectional view of one of the seed 
spouts. Fig. 4 is a sectional view taken on 
the line acac of Fig. 3. 
The frame J, supported on the wheels i, 
provided at the ends of the axle J', is drawn 
over the field by suitable means, as the tongue 
K and the double and single trees k and k', 
respectively. The axle is located at the rear 
end of the frame, and from the front end of 
the frame depend the slotted brackets G. G., 
which are strengthened by the stays g. The 
cross-bar H, having its ends fitted in the slots 
of the brackets, is free to move vertically in 
the said slots of the brackets to regulate the 
depth of the drains and cultivation. The 
gang-bar's C, secured by hinge-connections to 
the cross-bar H, are braced laterally by the 
braces i, which have flexible connections 
with the cross-bar and with the said gang 
bars, extend rearwardly in substantially a 
horizontal plane, and have their rear ends 
formed or provided with seats for the drill 
openers B, which are held thereto by the clip 
Q. This clip embraces the opener B, which 
is held adjustably in the clip by the pin b, . 
passing through one of a series of openings, 
b', in the drill-opener. Thus provisionishad 
for adjusting the opener vertically independ 
ent of the gang-bars. The gang-bars have 
short cross-bars P, secured thereto midway of 
their ends, which bars have their ends bent 
down at right angles, and are adapted to have 
the standards R secured thereto by the bolt 
r' and the break-pin r". The standards may 
be removable and replaced by others having 
different shovels, or the shovels may be re 
movable from the standards. 
Figs. 1 and 2 show the standards R, having 
plows A, which form the drains, the plows at 
the ends of a cross-bar being set with their 
shares opposing, whereby in operation they 
turn the furrows toward one another to form 
a ridge, as shown by dotted lines at L, Fig.1. 
The adjacent plows of two contiguous cross 
bars have their landsides opposite one an 
other to form the depressions or drains l be 
tween the ridges L, 
The roller D, journaled at its ends in the 
side bars of the frame, is connected with each 
of the gang-bars C by independent chains or 
connections d, and is rotated by suitable 
means, as the segment or cam E, the hand 
lever F, and the chain e, to effect a winding 
and unwinding of the chains (l, for raising 
and lowering the gang-bal's simultaneously. 
Fig. 2 shows the implement fitted up for 
drilling, the grain being carried in the hopper 
S, and fed to the drill tubes or openers 
through the grain-spouts, 
The drill-shoes are arranged midway of the 
95 
IOC 
IO 
3O 
35 
4o 
45 
403,69? 
- 
struction. 
spaces between the plows of a cross-bar, to 
sow the seed in the crest of the ridges, where 
they will be protected from excessive wet or 
cold. 
It will be observed that the cross-bar H is 
prevented having any rotary movement by 
having its ends tenoned, and having the ten 
oned ends fitted in the slots of the brackets 
G. The gang-bars are held down to their 
work by the springs I, which are fastened at 
one end to the cross-bar and at their other 
end to the gang-bars by eyebolts W. These 
bars have an independent movement, and are 
held down by independent yielding forces; 
hence if one meets with an unyielding sub 
stance in its path it can ride over the same, 
the spring returning the bar to its working 
position when it has passed over the said ob 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. In a grain-drill, the combination, with 
the gang-bars and the short cross-bars secured 
to the gang-bars and having their ends bent 
down, of the interchangeable shovels secured 
thereto, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
2. The combination, with the frame having 
slotted brackets, and the cross-bar fitted in 
the slots of the said brackets, of the gang 
bars connected with the cross-bar, the roller 
having independent connections with the 
gang-bars, and means for rotating the roller, 
substantially as described, for the purpose 
specified. 
3. The combination, with the frame, the 
slotted brackets, and the cross-bar adjustable 
in the brackets, of the gang-bars connected 
with the cross-bar by hingerconnections, and 
the springs secured at one end to the cross 
bar and having their opposite ends adapted 
to exert a pressure on the said gang-ba's, sub 
tially as described, for the purpose set 
orth. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
4. The combination, with the frame, the 
slotted brackets, the cross-bar, and the gang 
bars hinged to the cross-bar, of the Springs, 
the roller having independent connections 
with the gang-bars, and means for rotating 
the roller, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
5. The combination, with the frame, of the 
vertically-movable cross-bar, and the gang 
bars connected to the latter, each of said gang 
bars having a cross-bar carrying a pair of 
plows adapted to form a ridge, and each gang 
bar being further provided with a drillar 
ranged for sowing in the crest of the ridge, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the adjustable 
gang-bar provided with a pair of plows to 
form a ridge, of the drill-shoe connected with 
the gang-bar in rear of and intermediately 
between said plows and having an independ 
ent vertical adjustment, substantially as de 
7. The combination, with the gang-bar hav 
ing a curved recess or semicircular groove 
formed vertically in its rear end, of the drill 
shoe fitted in said recess so as to be vertically 
movable therein, a clip embracing said shoe 
and secured to the gang-bar by transverse 
bolts, and a pin passinglongitudinally through 
the rear side of the clip and through one of a 
series of perforations in the shoe, which is 
thereby secured vertically adjustable to the 
bar, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
scribed. 
- 
ROLLAND G, STROTHER. 
Witnesses: 
A. ZUGSCHWERT, 
PRESLEY E. HAY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402797.txt	(No Model.) 
W., I, BLOOD, 
RECORDER FOR, CASH DRAWERS. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 402, 797, 
Patented May 7, 1889. 
Ht 
 
a 
W 
% 
i 
minist 
AS=- 
in 
H 
Zo 
liminimit 
al? 
a. 
 
  
 
 
 
a 
a 
a. 
w 
Z 
IHI-IIgiri 
7 ILA's AMI IIHO 
III f 
fir?t 
I 
f 
k 
it. 
A 
d'I 
-- 
| || 
| H---- it'll 
|| 
His 
|| 
- ... . 
|| 
'... 
. 
. 
. 
: 
JW 
1. 
|| 
in 
Y 
i- - - - - - 
341 Ue-1-1 toz. 
12-2022. 
Y. 
R 
sa 
ISEE 
AR 
At 22A, 
6 
H. A. 
It 
Z 
e 
. 
II. 
E. 
l 
y 
Z zi. A 
t 
A. 
77 
282it+1-eso-oo- 
73-4---- 
Z2 7(22-24. 
S3 2. &ltic v-viety 
d 
 
(No Model.) 
W. I BLOOD, 
RECORDER FOR CASH DRAWERS, 
3 Sheet S-Sheet 2. 
No. 402, 797, 
Patented May 7, 1889. 
 
% 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
S. 
 
 
 
 
 
S 
 
% 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Sis 
A. 
M 
 
7 (2. 77(1-1-1- 
& 4 2. attorney-26-22, 
N. PETERS. Photo-lathographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 402, 797, 
W. I. BLOOD 
RECORDER FOR CASH DRAWERS. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented May 7, 1889, 
OOOP CTO 
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa. 
 
224 vices co 
(7773%2--- 
24, Z2-2-264. 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM I. BLOOD, OF FRANKLIN FALLS, NEW ILAMPSHIRE. 
RECORDER FOR CASH-DRAWERs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,797, dated May 7, 1889. 
Application filed January 8, 1889. Serial No, 295,309, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may conce712: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. I. BLOOD, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Frank 
lin Falls, in the county of Merrimac and 
State of New IIampshire, have invented cer 
tain new and Improved Recorders for Cash 
Drawel's, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to devices calculated 
to prevent errol's in the cash in change or 
Cash drawers, the objects of the invention be 
ing to provide in an attachment to cash 
dra Wel's a convenient tablet or paper roll upon 
which to record all amounts taken from or 
placed within Said drawer, and means whereby 
Said papel' is made to move with each closing 
movement of the cash-drawer sufficiently to 
Substitute a blank space upon which to re 
cold a transaction for that containing the rec 
ord of the previous transaction, all of which 
Will be clearly noted in the following specifi 
cation and claims, and fully illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, forming an insepa 
able part thereof, of which- 
Figure I is a sectional elevation of the 
Standard for carrying the paper roll, a drum 
upon which that part of the paper containing 
the record is wound, a latchet-wheel for ro 
tating said drum, and said paper roll being 
shown in their propel' position thereon. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of those parts of my improved 
mechanism shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a ver 
tical Section. Fig. 4 is a broken elevation 
showing a portion of a counter, a portion of 
a cash-drawer, and the door of a case, in which 
the standard shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 and 
part of the operating mechanism for moving 
the paper may be inclosed. Fig. 5 is a de 
tached cross-sectional view of said case. Fig. 
6 is a section taken through the said case and 
the coulter, showing the attached mechan 
ism in elevation and the ratchet-wheel of the 
standard in dotted lines. Fig. 7 is a like view 
of the same parts as when the cash-drawer is 
opened. Fig. S is a detached elevation of a 
bell-crank, O, by which motion is communi 
cated to the mechanism within the case. Fig. 
9 is an edge view of the same part. Fig. 10 
is an elevation of the same part, showing the 
reverse side to that shown in Fig. S. Fig. 11 
shows a portion of that side of the cash-drawe!' 
adjacent to the case containing my improved 
mechanism, having attached a cam for mov 
ing the bell-crank O. (shown in Fig. S.) and 
showing in dotted lines the said bell-crank in 
relative position thereto, as shown, when the 
cash-drawer is closed. Fig. 12 is a like view 
of the same parts, as shown, when the cash 
drawer is opened. Fig. 13 is a plan view of 
that portion of a counter in which is formed 
the opening for exposing the paper upon which 
to make a record, showing the spring-cover 
Fig. 14 is a simi 
for same as When opened. 
lar view in which the spring-cover for said 
opening is down or closed. Fig. 15 is a side 
elevation, in detail, of the pawl for moving the 
ratchet-wheel. Fig. 16 is a front end view of 
Sale. 
The same reference-letters indicate the same 
or corresponding parts throughout the vari 
Ous views. 
A case, A, is preferably formed of metal 
and provided at its front with a door, (, of the 
same material. This may be hinged to the 
case, as shown at Cl', and securely locked. 
Probably the most convenient location for the 
case will be at the right of a cash-drawer, al 
though said case and its inclosed mechanism 
may be readily adapted to a position at the 
left of said drawer, if desired. In the counter 
B, directly over the said case A, is formed an 
opening, b, for a purpose to be hereinafter ex 
plained, and a slotted metallic plate, C, some 
what larger than said opening, is depressed 
in said counter, and to this is attached a 
hinged cover, C'. 
The standard composed of side frames, D D, 
and transverse stay-bars dol may be inserted 
within the case A, as shown in Fig. 1, and in 
tegral longitudinal cleats or tongues (tformed 
upon the bottom of said case, between which 
rest the said frames D D, prevent any lateral 
movement of said standard. Upon said frames 
are mounted the shaft, E, carrying a roll of 
paper, W, and a latch, F, whose free end f 
fits an annular groove, e, formed in one end of 
the said shaft, and thus holds it from Working 
out of its bearings, a shaft, E, carrying a 
roller or drum, G, and ratchet-wheel H, a Ver 
tically-movable frame comprising a plate, I, 
- 
65 
7 O 
75 
So 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
45 
 
To 
15 
25 
3. 5 
- 
- 
402,797 
2 
having slots i supported upon bars I', which 
have their bearings in the stay-bars d, be 
tween which and upon two or more of said 
bars I may be mounted helical springs J, 
whose function is to force said vertical frame 
upward, and a horizontal lever, K, pivoted at . 
its rear end to the rear stay-bar, d, and the 
vertical lever L, confined within a slot, d, 
formed for this purpose in each of the bars 
d d, its lower end being conveniently con 
nected to said lever K, by which the said lever 
L is operated, and its upper end terminating in 
a hook or projection, l, which may enter a 
groove or slot, ', formed in one of the bars I', 
and thus hold the vertical movable frame 
down in position shown by full lines in Fig. 1. 
Within the case A and upon that side near 
est to the cash-drawer a sliding frame, M, is 
mounted, which forms an essential part of the 
mechanism connecting that mounted on the 
frame D with the drawer, slots m, m, being 
adapted to receive the studs n n projecting 
from the side of said case. In order to facili 
tate the movement of said frame, the said slots 
in m. may be made wide enough to receive 
suitable friction -rollers, N, when mounted 
upon said studs in n. Collars or caps n' n' of a 
larger diameter than is the width of said slots 
m in or of Said rollers, may be also secured to 
said studs for retaining the frame M in posi 
tion. Upon this frame M is pivoted one end 
of the pawl FI, at the free end of which is 
formed the hook h for engaging the teeth of 
the ratchet-wheel H, and between the two 
horizontal slots n n is formed a vertical slot, 
?m', for the reception of a pin or stud, o, 
(which may be provided with a friction 
roller.) projecting from a bell-crank or seg 
ment of a disk, O, pivoted at o' to the case 
A, the latter having a curvilinear slot, a, 
through which said stud O may pass. 
The 
reverse side of said bell-crank O has project 
ing studs o', which may or may not be pro 
vided with friction-rollers. A cam, P', upon 
that side of the cash-drawer P. adjacent to 
said case and the said bell-crank O is adapted 
to engage these studs o' of said crank or disk 
segment, which rotates the same, as seen best 
in Figs. Il and 12, communicating motion, 
by means of the slotted frame M, its pawl H', 
and the ratchet-wheel H, to the roll of pa 
per W. 
Within the opening b in the counter B, and 
pivoted to the plate C, is a latch, c, adapted 
to engage a lug, c', formed upon the hinged 
cover C of said plate, and a helical spring, c', 
is mounted upon its hinge-pin in a manner 
to open the said cover when the lug c' shall 
be released from the latch c, this being ef 
fected by the movement of the frame M, 
caused by opening the cash-drawer, the lower 
end of said latch hanging normally in front 
of a suitable stud or projection formed for 
this purpose upon said frame. The said latch 
is inoperative while the cash-drawer is open, 
but rests in a position after the drawer shall 
have been closed to immediately engage the 
lug c' of the spring-cover C", from which it 
cannot be again released until the cash-drawer 
is again opened. 
The drum G must be provided with a hold of 
some sort for fastening the paper W until it 
shall have made one or two turns over said 
drum in drawing it from the shaft E. In the 
drawings I show for this purpose a simple 
wire bail, W, having its ends mounted in the 
ends of the roll or drum G. Over this bail 
the end of the roll of paper, W, is passed in 
the manner shown in Figs. 1 and 2, which suf 
ficiently holds the paper until said roll G shall 
have made a revolution or two. The said roll 
or drum G may have a groove, g, across its 
face, in which said bail may rest, if desired, 
and a spring, R, may be interposed between 
a collar, e, mounted on the shaft E' and the 
drum G, by means of which said drum is 
forced over against a collar, e', also mounted 
upon said shaft at the opposite end of Said 
drum, the friction of said spring R, upon said 
drum G preventing any tendency in the lat 
ter to move in a rotative course except when 
so moved by the ratchet-wheel H. 
A frame, T, may be pivoted at t t to the 
parts D, and by gravity action, bearing upon 
the roll of paper W, said frame prevents said 
roll from rotation except in the direction in 
dicated by the arrows in Fig. 1. 
Having described my improvements, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Lettel's 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the case, detach 
able mechanism carrying a roll of paper, and 
a ratchet-wheel for moving the same, of a 
sliding frame having a vertical and horizon 
tal slots and a pawl for engaging the teeth of 
said ratchet-wheel, a bell-crank located be 
tween said case and cash-drawer and provided 
with a single projection at one side and two 
projections on its opposite side, the former 
engaging with the vertical slot of said slid 
ing frame and the latter with a suitable cam 
upon the cash-drawer, the said cash-drawer, 
and its cam, all substantially for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. In an attachment to money-drawers, the 
combination, with the counter having a slot 
provided with a spring-cover, of a vertically 
movable frame for elevating the paper upon 
which to record cash transactions, and mech 
anism whereby said spring-cover willfly open 
and expose to view the said paper each time 
the money-drawer is opened. 
3. The combination, with the counter pro 
vided with an opening, as shown, of a frame 
in which is mounted a roll of paper, its wind 
ing-drum, means for moving said winding 
drum in connection with a cash-drawer, and 
a vertically-adjustable frame adapted to carry 
the paper (upon which to make a record) up 
ward within said opening in said counter. 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
105 
TC) 
II5 
I25 
65 
 
402,797 
3. 
4. The combination of the case and a hori 
Zontally-movable frame thereon, the counter 
having an opening and a latch pivoted therein 
and operated by said movable frame or a pro 
jection thereof, and a suitable spring-cover 
for said opening in said counter, having on 
the under part of its free end a slotted lug 
for engaging said latch when said cover is 
closed. 
5 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in Io 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM. I. BIOOD. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK PROCTOR, 
CHARLES C. PAIGE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402897.txt	(No Model.) 
J. L. BREED. 
PAWING BTOCK, 
No. 402,897, 
Patented May 7, 1889. 
||||| 
----N\ 
 
 
  
??? 7%?4 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES I. BREED, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK. 
PAV N G -- B LO C K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,897, dated May 7, 1889. 
Application filed December 3, 1888, Serial No. 292,445. (No model.) 
55 
?? 
65 
75 
To all tuhon, it Taif concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES L. BREED, of 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Paving-Blocks, of 
Which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
This invention relates more particularly to 
paving-blocks designed to be molded of clay 
and burned or vitrified to impart to them the 
required solidity and rigidity; and the inven 
tion consists in forming said blocks with 
grooves in the top surfaces, and preferably 
also in their bottom surfaces, all of which 
grooves runin one direction, said blocks be 
ing designed to be laid with their grooves 
transversely to the line of the street in the 
Central Or main portion of said street, and 
with the grooves lengthwise the street in the 
portions constituting the gutters, and when 
thus laid the main portion of the street is de 
Void of longitudinal ruts, and the transverse 
grooves serve to conduct the water to the gut 
ters, in Which the longitudinal grooves facili 
tate the carrying off of the water and keep 
the gutters comparatively clean. 
The invention is fully illustrated in thean 
nexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a section of 
Street-pavement embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged vertical section on line 
ac ac, Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 is a still further en 
larged perspective view of one of the paving 
blocks. 
A A designate the paving-blocks, which II 
preferably mold of clay or other suitable 
earthy material and burn the same in a suit 
able kiln, SO as to vitrify said blocks, and 
thus render them hard, compact, and capable 
of resisting Wear, and abrasion as well as 
breakage when used as a paving of streets. 
I preferably form the block C. elongated or 
of rectangular form in its horizontal plane for 
the purpose of providing it with sufficient 
bearing-surface by which to lay it upon the 
foundation usually prepared for block pave 
ments. The top surface of said block form 
With a groove or grooves, c, running in one 
direction only and with smooth or unbroken 
surfaces lb between the grooves, and when 
the block is elongated as aforesaid form the 
grooves lengthwise of said block, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3 of the drawings. 
lBy providing the bottom surface of the 
block c, with similar longitudinal grooves it is 
obvious that the block may belaid with either 
of the grooved surfaces upward, and conse 
quently the operation of laying the pavement 
is greatly facilitated. One of the important 
advantages of the grooves on the under side, 
however, consists in their affording to the 
block a better hold on its foundation, so as to 
prevent the block from slipping in a direction 
at right angles to the grooves. The sides of 
the block form smooth for the purpose of al 
lowing it to be removed individually from the 
pavement when required. The top and bot 
tom edges of the sides I bevel, as shown at c' 
c', so as to form with the adjacent block a 
groove similar to the central groove, c. In 
order to obviate forming grooves at right an 
gles to the grooves c, I form the ends of the 
block with plain vertical faces in uniform 
planes throughout at right angles to the top 
and bottom faces of the block, as shown in 
Fig. 3 of the drawings. 
Although I prefer to form the block with the 
central groove, c, yet I do not wish to be lim 
ited specifically to such form, inasmuch as 
the block may be divided along the line of 
said groove, as indicated by the dotted line 
d in Fig. 3 of the drawings. 
In paving a street with my improved paV 
ing-blocks, Ilay said blocks with their grooves 
c c transversely to the line of the Street, at 
the main or central portion thereof, as shown 
at A in Fig. 1 of the drawings. 
In the gutter B, I lay the blocks with the 
grooves c. c lengthwise of the street. In this 
manner I obviate forming longitudinal chan 
nels or ruts in the main portion of the street 
and provide the same with transverse chan 
nels, which serve as footholds for the horses 
traveling upon said pavement, and also COn 
duct the water to the gutters and serve to 
maintain clean the intermediate Smooth Stur 
faces, bb, while the gutters are provided with 
longitudinal channels which assist in carry 
ing off the Water. 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
95 
OO 
2 
402,897 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
IS 1. The improved paving-block composed of 
vitrified clay and formed rectangular, and 
with grooves and beveled edges all formed in 
the top and bottom faces of the block and ex 
tending lengthwise thereof, and the end faces 
of said block being each in a uniform plane 
throughout at right angles to the top and 
bottom faces of the block, substantially as 
described and shown. 
2. A Street-pavement composed of rectangul 
lar blocks of vitrified clay, each of said blocks 
being formed with grooves and beveled edges 
all in the top and bottom faces of the block 
and lengthwise thereof, and having plain end 
- 
IO 
faces in uniform planes throughout at right 
angles to the top and bottom faces, the blocks 
in the main or central portion of the street 
being laid with the grooves of the blocks trans 
versely of the line of the street, and the 
blocks in the gutters laid with the grooves of 
the blocks lengthwise of the street, substan 
tially as described and shown. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name, in the presence of two Wit 
nesses, at Syracuse, in the county of Onon 
daga, in the State of New York, this 1st day 
of December, 1SS8. 
JAMES L. BREED. L. s. 
2 ? 
25 
WIWitnesses: 
JOHN J. LAASS, 
(. II. IDUELL. 
? 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US402998.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 402,998, 
 
J. N. STONG. 
MECHANISM FOR OPENING GATES 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 7, 1889. 
/ (rez coor 
o64. A 47 
%.4. 6%-(-)-6 
(No Model.) 
No. 402,998, 
 
J. N. STONG. 
MECHANISM FOR OPENING GATES, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 7, 1889. 
c/54.4%. 
Az-Z1e7 (Cop 
o4. A 47 
o42.66. 
azz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN N. STONG, OF WOODBRIDGE, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
MECHANISM FOR OPENING GATES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 402,998, dated May 7, 1889, 
Application filed February 13, 1889, Serial No, 299,764, (No model) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN NOAH STONG, 
farmer, of the village of Woodbridge, in the 
county of York, in the Province of Ontario, 
Canada, have invented certain new and useful 
Mechanism for Opening Gates, of which the 
following is a specification, 
The object of the invention is to design 
simple mechanism for unlatching and open 
ing a SWinging gate; and it consists, essen 
tially, of simply-operating mechanism by 
which the longitudinal movementofa barshall 
first raise the latch and then cause the gate 
to SWing Open on its pivot, substantially as 
hereinafter more particularly explained. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing a 
gate provided with my improved opening 
mechanism. Figs. 2 and 3 are enlarged de 
tails of the toothed quadrant, rack, and trip 
ping mechanism involved in my invention. 
The drawings illustrate the mechanism by 
which this desired end is accomplished. 
A represents a toothed quadrant bolted or 
otherwise fixed to the stile B of the gate. 
C is a rack carried in suitable horizontal 
guides, D, fixed to the post E. 
F is a bar resting on top of the rack Cand 
connected to or forming part of the rods G, 
which extend on either side of the gate and 
connect with suitably-pivoted levers H, lo 
cated a sufficient distance from the gate to 
enable the driver of a vehicle to open the said 
gate without its interfering with his horse. 
At each end of the rack C, I form alongitudi 
nal slot, I, into which a pin, J, projecting from 
the rod G or bar F, fits. Two other pins 
(marked KandL) project from the bar F, and 
are intended for the purpose, as hereinafter 
described, of raising the latch M. 
N is a lever pivoted on the toothed quad 
rant A in Such a position that one of its ends 
shall rest against the pin K When the gate is 
closed, its other end being connected by the 
cord or chain. O to the latch M, as indicated 
in Fig. 1. P is another lever, also pivoted in 
any Suitable manner on the quadrant A in 
such a position that when the gate is opened 
and its latch engages with the catch Q on the 
post R one end of the lever P shall be behind 
the projecting pin L, the other end of the 
lever being connected by suitable means to 
the cord or chain. O, as indicated, 
Having now described the mechanical parts 
involved in my invention, I shall proceed to 
explain briefly their operation, by which the 
gate is first unlatched and then swung open, 
Figs, 1 and 2 show the position in which 
the operating mechanism appears when the 
gate is closed. By pushing the rod G in the 
direction indicated by the arrow the pin K 
pushes against the end of the lever N, thereby 
causing the said lever to pull upon the cord 
or chain O, and thus raise the latch M. As 
the rod G is only connected to the rack C by 
means of the pin or pins J, Working in the 
slot or slots I, the said rack will remain sta 
tionary until the pin or pins J reach the op 
posite end of the said slot, by which time the 
latch M is raised clear of its catch. The rack. 
will then move, and as it engages with the 
teeth on the quadrant A it will cause the 
gate to swing on its hinge or pivot, When 
the rack begins to move, the pin K slips off 
the end of the lever N, and the latch resumes 
its normal position ready to engage With the 
catch Q when the gate is fully opened. The 
lever P, the end of which is at that time be 
hind the pin L, is ready to be rocked on its 
pivot when the rod Gis moved in the reverse 
direction to that in which it was moved. When 
the gate was opened. As the pins J must 
travel to the opposite end of the slots Ibefore 
the rack C is moved, the latch M is raised 
clear of the catch Q before the gate is once 
more turned on its pivot. 
From this description it will be seen that 
the mechanism I employ is of the simplest 
kind, and may be readily placed in position 
by any ordinarily handy man. 
J should mention that when the gate is not 
pivoted on the center of its stile, as indicated 
in the drawings, the pattern of the quadrant 
A must be somewhat altered, so that its center 
shall correspond with the center of the pivot 
or hinge of the gate, 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A rod, G, fixed to or forming part of the 
bar F, adjustably connected to the rack C, 
and a pin, K, projecting from the bar F, in 
combination with the lever N, pivoted on the 
quadrant A, and connected to the latch M by 
the cord or chain O, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
2. A rod, G, fixed to or forming part of the 
25 
35 
55 
75 
90 
95 
O 
45 
 
2 
402,998 
bar F, and a pin, L, projecting from the bar pivoted on the quadrant A, and connected to 
F, in combination with the lever P, pivoted on the latch M by the cord or chain O, substan- to 
the quadrant A, and connected to the latch M tially as and for the purpose specified. 
by the cord or chain O, substantially as and 
3. A rod, G, fixed to or forming part of the 
bar F, and pins K and L, projecting from the 
bar F, in combination with levers N and P, 
Toronto, February 2, 1889. 
In presence of - 
W. B. LAWSON, 
H. H. DEWART, 
5 for the purpose specified. 
JOHN N. STONG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US403100.txt	(No Model.) 
T. H. GRADY. 
No. 403, l00. 
ELECTRICALARM CLOCK. 
Patented May 14, 1889. 
 
  
  
swy ...: Ysastesssassaeata 
is:- 
 
 
(6.7%za. 
INVENTOR 
%, (4 
t-ATT): E 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS H. GRADY, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
ELECTRIC ALARM CLOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 403,100, dated May 14, 1889. 
Application filed February 9, 1889, Serial No. 299,291. (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
To all, whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, THOMAS H. GRADY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Electric Alarm 
Clocks, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
electric alarln-clocks; and it consists in a 
clock in which the electro-magnets are within 
the clock, and the armature thereof connected 
With or forming a part of the usual hammer 
for the gong, which remains in its customary 
position. 
In accordance with the invention the dial 
of the clock is of non-conducting material 
and provided with a series of apertures at 
the outer edges of the line of numerals, in 
line with an aperture in the revoluble glass 
face, in order that a post connected with one 
terminal of the circuit may be inserted 
through said aperture in the glass front into 
the proper aperture in the dial in position for 
a hand traveling with the usual hour-hand of 
the clock to come into contact with it, and 
thus complete the electric circuit and cause 
the sounding of the alarm, the ringing con 
tinuing as long as said hand is in contact 
with said post, which is only removable by 
the act of the person. The alarm will thus 
sound until the person arises and withdraws 
the plug from the face of the clock, this act 
breaking the circuit and stilling the alarm. 
The invention will be more fully under 
stood from the detailed description hereinaf 
ter presented, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view, partly in section, 
of a clock constructed in accordance With the 
invention, the glass face of the clock being re 
moved, and a portion of the dial being broken 
away for the purpose of disclosing the inte 
rior mechanism. Fig. 2 is a vertical Section 
of same on the dotted line XX of Fig. 1; 
and Fig. 3 is a detached view of the extra 
hand, which travels with the hour-hand of 
the clock and forms the circuit at the time it 
is desired that the alarm should Sound. 
In the drawings, A designates the easing of 
the clock; B C, the base or legs thereof; D, 
the usual bell; E, the dial, and F the glass 
face. The casing A is formed of sheet metal, 
and is insulated from Olle leg, B, as shown in 
Fig. I, the other leg, C, being in electric con 
nection with the casing. The conductors GH 
from the battery (not shown) connect with 
the legs B C, as indicated in Fig. 1. The 
clock is provided with the customary works 
and hands, and in addition the supplemental 
hand I, which has upon its inner portion the 
sleeve J, encircling the usual post, L, and said 
hand, when in use, will be directly below and 
travel with the hour-hand C of the clock. To 
the frame Supporting the clock mechanism 
are secured the electro-magnets N and post 
O, the latter being connected by wire P with 
the leg B of the clock, the said wire P being 
suitably provided with insulating material, in 
order that its contact with the frame M may 
not disturb the electric current. On a bracket, 
(Q, and insulated therefrom, is secured the 
Spring R, (shown more clearly in Fig. 1) and 
to this spring is attached the armature S, 
which forms a part of the support for the 
hammer T. 
The normal position of the spring R is 
against the inner end of the adjustable screw 
V, which passes through the post O, above re 
ferred to, the armature S being thus held from 
contact with the cores of the electro-magnets 
N by the tension of the said spring. The 
electro-magnets N are connected by a con 
ducting-wire, W, with the spring R, and by 
the conductor Y with the metallic plug or 
post Z, said conductor Y being suitably 
Wrapped for the purpose of insulating it and 
enhancing its appearance, and the plug Z 
having an appropriate handle, b. 
The dial E is made of non-conducting ma 
terial-such as hard rubber or celluloid-and 
upon its face is applied a paper disk, c, upon 
which the customary numerals are printed. 
The dial E contains a line of apertures, d, en 
circling the series of numerals and in position 
to be traversed by the supplemental hand I, 
as indicated in Fig. 1. The glass face F is 
held in the recesses eat the outer edges of the 
clock-casing, and said face is revoluble at 
will. In the face F is provided an aperture, 
f, which is in a position to be moved over any 
one of the apertures din the dial E. 
In the use of the illWelntion the person set 
ting the alarm will insert the end of the plug 
Z in the aperture f and revolve the face F to 
such position as Will enable him to move the 
85 
95 
OC) 
to 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
403,100 
75 
85 
O 
15 
25 
plug Zinto the apertured adjacent to the 
hour at which he desires the alarm to sound 
as, for instance, WI o'clock, which is the 
position of the plug Zillustrated in Fig. 1. 
The plug being in use, the supplemental hand 
I will at the hour come into contact with the 
same and complete the electric circuit, the 
current from the wire H passing through the 
leg C, casing A, clock mechanism, hand I, 
plug Z, and conductor Y to the magnets N, 
and from the magnets through the conductor 
W to the spring R, which is in electric con 
nection through the post O, wire P, and leg 
B with the other wire, G, from the battery. 
Upon the hand I coming into contact with 
the plug Z the current entering the electro 
magnets N will cause the cores thereof to at 
tract the armature S toward them, causing 
the hammer T to strike the bell D and break 
ing the contact of the spring R with the screw 
V, this latter action breaking the circuit at 
the point of the screwV, which has the effect 
of causing the cores of the electro-magnets to 
instantly release the armature S and permit 
the hammer T to recede from the bell D, and 
the spring R to regain its contact with the 
screw V, thereby again completing the cir 
cuit, whereupon the armature S will be again 
attracted by the electro-magnets and the bell 
againstruck by the hammer T. The armature 
is thus caused to rapidly vibrate between the 
screw V and the electro-magnets N until the 
plug Z shall have been withdrawn from the 
apertures fol, the hammer T striking the bell 
D with each vibration of the armature. It is 
obvious that the ringing of the bell will con 
tinue until the person arises and withdraws 
the plug Z from the clock-face, at which time 
the alarm will cease. 
The purpose of the hand I is simply to have 
a conductor between the post L. and the plug 
Z, and it is obvious that if the hour-hand a 
were sufficiently long the hand I might be 
omitted. When, however, the hand Iis made 
use of, the usual clock-hands may be em 
ployed without altering their form or length, 
and hence, for the sake of convenience, I em 
ploy the supplemental hand I. 
The setting of the alarm consists in simply 
inserting the plug Z through the aperture f 
and into the apertured at the hour at which 
it is desired the alarm shall sound, and the 
convenience of this portion of the invention 
is apparent. 
The form of the clock constructed with my 
invention remains unchanged, and an ordi 
nary bell in its customary position is made 
use of without alteration. The electro-mag 
nets, being within the clock-casing, are con 
cealed from view, and are unobjectionable. 
The conductor Y being flexible, the plug Z 
may be dropped beneath or behind the clock 
casing, thus forming no obstruction or disfig 
urement. 
By making the glass face F revoluble but 
one aperture fis necessary therein; but should 
... it be desired to have a stationary glass face 
- 
35 
45 
on the clock, a row of apertures therein cor 
responding with the series of apertures d 
would be required in order that the plug Z 
might be inserted at the various positions de 
sired. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an electric alarm - clock, the dial of 
non-conducting material provided with the 
line of apertures, and the revoluble trans 
parent face provided with an aperture in po 
sition to be brought over any one of the ap 
ertures in the dial, combined with the mov 
able plug connected with a conductor from 
the electro-magnets and adapted to be in 
serted through said apertures, the vibrating 
armature connected with the bell-halmmer 
and arranged between the electro-magnets 
and the back contact, the latter being in con 
nection with one wire of the battery, and a 
hand upon the clock forming a conductor 
through the clock mechanism to the other 
wire of the battery and adapted during its 
travel to come into contact with the plug in 
said apertures, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an electric alarm - clock, the dial of 
non-conducting material provided with the 
line of apertures, and the transparent revo 
luble face provided with an aperture in posi 
tion to be brought over any one of the aper 
tures in the dial, combined with a movable 
plug adapted to be inserted through said ap 
ertures in the desired position, and a hand 
traversing the dial and of a length to be ar 
rested by contact with said plug, the hand 
and plug forming the terminals of the elec 
tric circuit in which the alarm-hammer is con 
nected with the vibrating armature, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. In an electric alarm-clock, the hammer 
and bell, the dial having the series of aper 
tures, and the transparent face having an 
aperture in line with the apertures in the 
dial, combined with the movable plug adapt 
ed for insertion into said apertures, the hand 
traversing said dial and of a length to be ar 
rested by said plug, and an electric circuit of 
which said hand and plug are the terminals, 
and in which the armature is connected with 
the said hammer, Substantially as set forth. 
4. An alarm-clock having its bell-hammer 
connected with the armature in an electric 
circuit, and a dial having a series of aper 
tures, combined with a hand traversing the 
dial and extending to said apertures, and a 
removable plug adapted to be inserted into 
said apertures and to arrest said hand, the 
hand and plug forming the terminals of the 
circuit, substantially as set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 7th day of 
February, A. D. 1889. 
THOMAS H. GRADY. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. C. GILL, 
R. A. PORTEOUS. 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US403200.txt	(No Model.) 
F. M. LEAWITT, 
COIN OPERATED LOCK. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 403,200, 
Patented May 14, 1889. 
w 
is is 
is 
s 
SASN arrerara StarSSSSSSSSS 
--- real-earanara-e-Sein 
24 
2 
2 
2Z. 
al-es--- 
 
2 
(No Model.) 
No. 403,200, 
F. M. LEAWITT, 
COIN OPERATED TOCK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
Patented May 14, 1889. 
Zzz ZZ 
  
A. 
c 2 
/ 
 
N SN 22NS 
 
N s 
NSN 
 
  
 
 
 
O 
2 
7 W 
AAAAAA 
N M 
A. 
W 
- -, 
f it WSA 
3 
W 
 
4%- 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK M. LEAVITT, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE AS 
SIGNMENTS, TO THE OPERA GLASS SUPPLY COMPANY, OF NEW JERSEY. 
coin-ope RATED lock. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 403,200, dated May 14, 1889. 
Application filed April 21, 1888. Serial No,271,453, (No model.) 
To all whom, it inlay concern. 
Be it known that I, FRANK M. LEAVITT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvementsin Coin-Operated Locks 
and Cases, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
Io reliable, cheap, and durable coin-operated 
lock or fastening. The invention is herein 
described and illustrated in connection with 
an opera-glass case for theater-chairs, so that 
an auditor can, by inserting a proper coin, 
15 open the case and use the opera-glass; but I 
desire it to be distinctly understood that the 
lock might be employed with many other 
forms of case or box, or for other purposes, 
wherever a coin-released fastening is desired. 
2O My improved coin-operated lock is charac 
terized by the combination, with the conduit 
or chamber into which the coin is inserted, of 
a Spring-pressed plunger tending to move, but 
restrained by one or more stops or detents 
25 standing in its path, which stops or detents 
are arranged to be displaced out of its path 
by the insertion of a coin; also, in the ar 
rangement of the coin-cavity relatively to said 
plunger, so that when the coin reaches the 
3o position where it fully displaces the stops and 
releases the plunger it is in coincidence with 
the latter, so that the latter by its movement 
pushes the coin ahead of it and removes it 
out of the way; also in other novel features 
35 and details pertaining to the lock and the box 
or case to which it is applied, all of which will 
be hereinafter set forth. 
The invention is illustrated in the accolm 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure I is a longitudinal sectional eleva 
tion of the case and lock, the view being taken 
on the line 11 of Fig. II. Fig. II is a cross 
Sectional elevation of the same, taken on the 
line 22 of Fig. I. 
Fig. III is a sectional plan 
Fig. IV 
is a perspective view of the plunger. Fig. W 
is a horizontal section of the lower part of the 
casing extending through the coin-delivery 
lock. 
In the construction shown in the drawings 
45 view taken on the line 33 of Fig. I. 
my invention is applied in the form of a case 
or box, L, adapted to inclose an opera-glass, 
M, and which when closed is fastened by a 
coin-operatedlock. In the construction shown 
the case L is formed of two parts-a casting, 55 
A, which constitutes the body of the case, and 
a cover or lid, B, which is hinged to the cast 
ing at its bottom and closes against the front 
thereof. The back plate of the casting con 
stitutes the base, which is adapted to be fast- 6o 
ened against the back of an opera-chair or 
other support. The opera-glass, when in place, 
is hung on brackets ee, and to prevent it be 
ing carried away it is fastened by a chain 
which is attached to the interior of the case, 65 
preferably to the casting A. 
In the construction shown the casting A 
forms not only the rear portion of the case, 
but also the casing for the lock, being ex 
tended above the case proper and formed with 7o 
a hollow boss or enlargement, a, the hollow of 
which communicates with the interior of the 
case through an opening, d. The hollow or 
cavity in the boss (t is cylindrical and of a di 
ameter approximately the same as or slightly 75 
less than that of the coin which is designed 
to operate the lock. This cavity opens at the 
rear of the casting, but the boss a is closed in 
front. In this cavity is placed a plunger, E. 
(Shown removed in Fig. IV.) This plunger is 8o 
pressed toward the rear by a spring or springs, 
n, which are preferably housed within recesses 
O.0 in the plunger. A vertical slot, p, is formed 
in the plunger between these recesses, and 
into this slot extends the upwardly-project- 85 
ing arm q of a locking-catch, C, which is in 
the form of an elbow-lever, and the lower arm 
of which projects toward the front and termi 
nates in a hook which engages a keeper, ', 
formed on the inner side of the lid B. 
The plunger is held from being pressed for 
ward by its springs by means of one or more 
detents or stops which are arranged to be 
pressed out of the Way by thrusting in the 
coin. In the construction shown there are 95 
three of these detents, (lettered, respectively, 
hh, and l.) The stops h h are pivoted pawls 
pressed by springs ii, so that their free ends 
are thrown into the path of the plunger. The 
stop l is a slidiug bolt pressed forward by a roo 
9o 
2 
408,200 
spring, 777. The parts are SO arranged and 
proportioned that so long as the plunger is 
held retracted by these stops the catch C re 
mains in engagement with the keepel' ', thus 
preventing the opening of the lid. 
The space in line with and immediately 
in rear of the plunger constitutes a coin-re 
ceiving chamber, f. The coin slot or conduit 
leads from the exterior of the casing and 
terminates in this chamber f, so that if a coin 
be inserted, as shown by the dotted circle in 
Fig. I, it will pass through this conduit and 
enter the chamber f. 
Its complete entrance 
into this chamber will be prevented by the 
stops h h, l, which stand in the way of the 
coin. If, however, the coin be pressed in with 
a sufficient pressure to overcome the resist 
ance of all these stops, it will displace them 
and force then out of the coin-receiving cham 
ber, and it will itself occupy their place, reach 
ing finally a position in coincidence with the 
rear end of the plunger. Immediately upon 
the full retraction of these stops the plunger, 
being no longer restrained thereby, will move 
backward and carry the coin backward with 
it, thereby thrusting the coin learwardly out 
of the coin-receiving chamber fand through 
a passage, f', until it arrives in a vertical con 
duit, c, down which the coin falls. This real 
ward movement of the plunger tilts the catch 
lever C, throwing its forward alm upward and 
releasing the keeper ', whereupon the lid B 
falls open. 
To enable the coin to be pressed fully into 
the receiving-clhamber f, and in order to dis 
place the stops or detents, I provide a lever, 
F, which consist of a flat plate thin enough 
to enter the coin-conduit pivoted to the cast 
ing A, and having a projecting handle or 
thumb-piece, S, by which to move it. After 
the coin has been dropped in this lever is to 
be moved in the direction of the arrow in 
Fig. I, whereupon the curved edget of the le 
yet is brought against the coin and serves to 
push the coin fully into the chamber f. The 
operating-lever F is not necessarily essential, 
as it might be omitted if the coin-receiving 
chamber were made short enough to enable 
the coin to be pushed fully ill by the hand, so 
as to operate the stops. 
The Veltical coin-conduit c, into which the 
coin is transferred by the backward move 
ment of the plunger, is preferably formed by 
making a parallel vertical recess in the back 
of the casting A and covering this recess with 
a plate, N. The conduit C extends through 
the bottom of the casting; but its lower end 
is closed by the bolt at of a key-actuated lock, 
H, of any ordinary kind-such, for example, 
as a common drawer-lock. The coin which is 
dropped into the conduit c falls to the bottom 
thereof and rests upon the projecting end of 
this bolt , where it remains until the attend 
ant withdraws this bolt by inserting a key into 
the lock H, whereupon the coin drops out, 
When it is desired to close and lock the 
case, the coin-actuated lock is first set by 
pressing downward with the finger the front 
arm of the catch-lever C until the plunger is 
moved forward free of the stops h. h. and l, 
which spring out and hold the plunger re 
tracted. If the lid be then closed, the catch 
will enage its keeper 2, after which the case 
can only be opened by depositing a coin and 
forcing it against the pawls, as above set forth. 
From the construction herein described it 
will be seen that a coin of the prescribed di 
ameter must be used to operate properly On 
all the stops, as a coin of less diameter Would 
not bear against both of the pawls h h, and 
would not sufficiently press back the bolt l. 
A coin of too large diameter cannot enter the 
coin slot or conduit. 
In the specific construction shown the ulu 
per portion of the casting A above the case 
L is formed with a slot, b, which is sawed or 
milled through parallel with the rear Surface 
of the back plate. In this slot, the thickness 
of which is slightly greater than that of the 
coin which is to operate the lock, is inserted 
a plate, D, which has a curved edge, forming 
the wall of the coin-receiving chamber f, and 
which is punched out to form recesses 9 g, for 
receiving the stop-pawlsh h, and a recess, ', 
for the sliding bolt l. The flat plate forming 
the lever F is inserted within the same slot 
b, and the coin-conduit r is formed by the 
open portion of the slot, between the curved 
face it of the lever and the opposite curved 
face of the plate D. A cheap and durable 
construction is thus provided. 
The specific case hereinshown and described 
is designed to hold an opera-glass; but by 
suitable modification it might be designed to 
hold any other article, or anything which it is 
desired to inclose in a locked case to be un 
locked by the insertion of a coin, 
The casting A is formed with apertures, 
through which retaining screws or bolts may 
be passed, thus providing for the attachment 
of the case to the back of an auditorium. Seat, 
The locking-catch. C may be substituted by 
any equivalent locking member or element 
known in the art-as, for instance, by a lock 
ing-bolt. The particular connection of the 
locking-catch or its equivalent with the plun 
ger is immaterial, it being only essential that 
the movement of the plunger, when it is re 
leased, shall withdraw the catch, thereby un 
locking the lock. 
I claim as my invention the following de 
fined novel features, substantially as helrein 
before specified, viz: 
1. A coin-operated lock consisting of the 
combination, with the locking-catch, of a cas 
ing having a coin-receiving chamber into 
which the coin is inserted, a stop or detental' 
ranged to project into said chamber and 
adapted to be displaced by direct contact with 
the coin when the lattel is forced in, and a 
spring-pressed plunger connected to said catch 
and normally restrained from moving by said 
stop, whereby it holds the lock fastened, and 
constructed to be released by the displace 
O 
25 
45 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
95 
Od 
o 
115 
I 25 
 
403,200 
3 
6. A case and a lid hinged thereto, in com- 45 
O 
25 
ment of said stop, whereby it effects the with- ver pivotally connected at one side of the 
coin-receiving chamber, substantially as de 
drawal of the catch. 
2. A coin-operated lock consisting of the 
Scribed. 
combination, with a locking-catch, of a casing 
5. A coin-operated lock consisting of the 
having a coin-receiving chamber, a spring 
combination, with a casing having a coin-re 
pressed plunger to which said catch is con 
ceiving chamber, of a spring-pressed and slot 
nected, and stops or detents consisting of 
ted plunger, spring-pressed pawls mounted to 
spring-pressed pawls mounted to enter the 
enter the coin-receiving chamber in advance 
coin-receiving chamber in advance of the 
of the plunger, and a catch provided with an 
plunger and arranged to prevent the move 
arm that rides in the plunger-slot, substan 
ment of the plunger until they are displaced 
tially as described. 
by the insertion of a coin. 
3. In a coin-operatedlock, the combination 
bination with a catch adapted to hold said 
of a casing having a coin-receiving chamber 
lid, a spring-pressed plunger co-operating 
and formed with a recess communicating with 
with said catch and tending to release the 
said chamber for receiving the spent operat 
same, and a stop serving to arrest said plun 
ing-coin, a plunger adapted to enter said cham 
ger and arranged to be displaced from the 
ber and arranged on opposite sides thereof 
path thereof by the insertion of a coin. 
from said recess, a spring pressing said plun 
7. A case and a lid hinged thereto, in com 
ger toward said chamber, and a stop or detent 
bination with a spring-pressed plunger, a piv 
arranged to normally project into the chamber 
oted catch adapted to hold said lid closed and 
and adapted to restrain the plunger, whereby 
engaging said plunger, whereby the plunger 
the insertion of a coin displaces the stop and 
may be retracted by moving said catch, and 
releases the plunger, and the latter then 
a stop serving to arrest said plunger and ar 
moves into the chamber and expels the coin 
ranged to be displaced from the path thereof 
therefrom into said recess. 
by the insertion of a coin, 
4. A coin-operated lock consisting of the 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
combination, with the locking-catch and a 
presence of two witnesses. 
casing having a coin-receiving chamber, of a 
spring - pressed plunger, restraining - stops 
therefor, consisting of spring-pressed pawls 
mounted to project into the coin-receiving 
chamber in advance of the plunger, and a le 
CHARLES WAGNER, 
HOWARD C. SEAMAN. 
FRANK M. LEAVITT, 
Witnesses: 
35 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US403300.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 403,300, 
J. STEPHENSON, 
CAR TRACK BRAKE HOUSING, 
Patented May 14, 1889. 
AI 
HM 
 
s 
9:bnesses 
 
 
L S. 
growiec, 
44. M67%- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN STEPHENSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CAR-TRACK-BRAKE HOUSING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,800, dated May 14, 1889. 
Application filed July 20, 1888. Serial No, 280,512, (No model.) 
O 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN STEPHENSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful im 
provements in Car-Track-Brake Housings, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
specification. 
My invention is a housing for car track 
brakes constructed as fully set forth herein 
after, and as illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan of part of a car-truck 
frame showing my invention. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional elevation. Fig. 3 is a transverse sec 
tion. 
Necessity for car track-brakes on tramways 
having inclined planes is now established. 
Efforts in such constructions have been un 
Satisfactory, and in many cases of but little 
use. The service of the track-brake is se 
vere, because the shoes should carry nearly 
the entire weight of the car and its load 
moved at a rapid rate and with almost irre 
sistible force by the cable. The shoe is ex 
posed to obstructions from bad joints of the 
rails, especially at turn-outs, curves, and cross 
ings, and also from uprising pavements in 
times of frost. These cause derangement of 
the parts of the brake mechanism the more 
easily because of the varied location of those 
parts as attached to different pieces and 
places of the carriage part or truck, and also 
the car-body. 
My purpose is to group the mechanism of 
the track-brake at each side of the car-body 
in a housing or receptacle, affording solidity 
and strength, as also permanence of location 
to the parts, while affording better protection 
for the mechanism, with readiness of access 
and facility for repairs. For this accomplish 
ment I make a housing, 101, of metal, consist 
ing of a rigid frame having a vertical wall 
plate, 102, and a horizontal head or ceiling 
plate, 103, of proper form and dimensions, 
adapted to the car truck or carriage part at 
one side of the car to which it is to be fast 
ened. The lower edge of the vertical hous 
ing-plate has a ledge, 104, shooting under the 
truck-sil 5, to prevent the plate from being 
- 
forced upward when the weight of the car is 
on the shoe 100. This vertical plate has also 
two channel-ways constituting guides 105 for 
receiving the two vertical or uprising mem 
bers 90 of the track-shoe to guide the shoe in 55 
its vertical motion, and also preserve the shoe 
from being forced from its position. Near 
the upper part of the vertical plates are sock 
eted steps 106, fitting to the end journals of 
the twin rock-shafts 57, which have their other 6o 
ends journaled in bearings 107 at the verge 
of the housing head-plate 103. The twin rock 
shafts have their arms connected with the 
track-shoe by articulated bars, which lift and 
depress the track-shoe at will of the operator 65 
and intensify the force of pressure upon the 
shoe as arms and bars approximate a straight 
line. An articulated bar unites the arms of 
the twin rock-shafts, and other two arms of 
the rock-shafts connected with the shoe by 7o 
articulated bars. On the verge of the head 
plate is a projection, 68, of size and form 
adapted to limit the motion of the rock-shaft 
and prevent its arm with the articulated bar 
from making a straight line, and thus hinder 75 
the recoil of the brake. An extended arm, 
61, of the rock-shaft has an articulated rod, 
62, through which the energy of the operator 
is conducted to the brake. The vertical plate 
and the ceiling-plate have holes to receive 8o 
the bolts 109, by which or other known method 
the housing may be fastened to the car-truck. 
Thus the complete mechanism of the brake 
is housed and in condition to be attached to 
to or removed from a car as need requires. 
I do not here claim the construction of the 
brake-shoe and its connections, as the same 
constitutes the subject of separate applica 
tions for Letters Patent, Serial Nos. 280,510 
and 280,511. 
I claim 
1. A track-brake housing consisting of a 
rigid frame secured to the car truck or car 
riage at One side of the car and constructed 
with bearings for horizontal rock-shafts, and 95 
with vertical guides to support the working 
parts of the car track-brake, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
2. A track-brake housing having vertical 
guides adapted to vertical members of the Ioo 
85 
9o 
25 
35 
45 
2 
403,300 
track-shoe to control the motion thereof, and 
with a vertical wall with sockets or bearings 
for the ends of horizontal rock-shafts, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. A track-brake housing having at the un 
der side of its head-plate one or more rock 
shaft journal-bearings for horizontal rock 
shafts, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
4. A track-brake housing with bearings for 
twin rock-shafts having arms with articulated 
bars coupled to the shoe, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
5. A track-brake housing having bearings 
for a rock-shaft, and having a stop adapted 
to limit the revolution of the rock-shaft, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
6. A track-brakehousing supporting a rock 
shaft united to the brake-shoe by an articu 
lated bar, and an arm of the rock-shaft with 
an articulated bar connected with the hand 
lever and adapted to convey the energy of 
the operator to the brake mechanism, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
7. A track-brakehousing supporting a track 
O 
25 
shoe with two articulated bars connecting the 
shoe with twin rock-shafts united by an ar 
ticulated bar, and each rock-shaft having its 
two journals in bearings in the housing-walls, 
one of the rock-shaft arms connected with a 
rod capable of conducting the energy of the 
brake-operator to the track-shoe, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
8. A track-brake housing with shaft-bear 
ings and guides holding in assemblage the 
mechanism of a brake and constructed for 
attachment to the car, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
9. A track-brake housing having on its lear 
wall guides for vertical members of the track 
shoe, substantially as and for the purpose de 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN STEPHENSON. 
scribed. 
- - 
- - - - - - 
- 
35 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEs E. FoSTER, 
STUARTA, STEPHENSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US403400.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 403,400, 
L. H. THOMAS, 
LAMP, 
Patented May 14, 1889. 
  
 
 
2 
||| 
3 
| 
4 3 
| 
2 
| | 
| % 
A 3. 
Z 
N SN3SNKN 
77//es (, 
-/721/2/2/o/, 
% 
2 
3 
% E. 
% 
s 
2 
$6.2% 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEVI H. THOMAS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
AMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 403,400, dated May 14, 1889. 
Application filed January 19, 1889, Serial No. 296,823. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all lefon, it nually concern: 
Be it known that I, LEVI. H. THOMAS, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Ilm 
provements in Lamps; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
lamps, the object being to provide an article 
of this character which shall be simple and 
economical in construction, and at the same 
time adapted to all the purposes for which 
such articles are employed; and the invention 
consists in a lamp bowl, body, or fount made 
Of paper, paper-board, or analogous material, 
and composed of a hollow paper cylinder, the 
ends of which are closed by solid and stiff 
paper or paper-board disks, the top disk be 
ing provided with a metallic collar for the at 
tachment of the burner, and the bottom disk 
being grooved for the reception of the end of 
the paper cylinder and extended to serve as 
a base to support the lamp-body, all substan 
tially as will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and then claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a side elevation of 
my improved paper lamp complete. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section of the lamp body or fount. 
Fig. 3 is a similar section of a slightly-modified 
form of the lamp-body. Fig. 4 is a top plan 
view of the disk which forms the base of the 
lamp, and shows the groove in the same. Fig. 
5 is an inverted plan view of the paper disk 
forming the head of the lamp-body. Fig. 6 
is a detail view of the crimped edge of the 
collar. 
Like letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the different views. 
The body or bowl of the lamp is preferably 
cylindrical in form, and consists of a paper 
cylinderformed by winding or rolling a sheet 
or strip of paper upon itself until of Sufficient 
thickness to adaptit for the purpose for which 
it is intended. The cylinder will therefore be 
of any desired length and diameter and con 
sequent capacity. The hollow paper cylin 
der thus formed has its ends closed by solid 
paper disks, 
B denotes the bottom disk. It is of Suffi 
cient thickness to form a good solid and firm 
base. It is provided with a circular groove 
at b, formed therein by means of a hollow cut 
ter, to receive the lower end of the paper wall 
of the cylindrical body A. Said disk B is ex 
tended beyond the cylinder A and made 
enough larger in diameter than the diameter 
of said cylinder to enable it to serve as a base 
to support the lamp-body. 
C denotes the top disk, which closes the top 
of cylinder A. It likewise is of sufficient 
thickness to make a firm solid head, and is 
provided with a groove, c, cut circularly 
therein, to receive the upper end of the cylin 
drical body A. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown a slight modification 
in the construction of my lamp-body, the 
change from what is shown in Fig. 2 being in 
the head C, which, instead of being grooved 
like head C to contain the upper end of the 
paper cylinder A, is made equal in diameter 
to cylinder A, so as to fit nicely within the 
upper end of the cylinder. This form of the 
invention, in preference to that of Fig. 2, may 
often be used. 
The edges of the upper disk, C, and lower 
disk, B, are nicely rounded, as shown in the 
drawings, by smoothing them on an emery 
wheel. Thus the edges, besides being im 
proved in appearance, are burnished and hard 
ened at the points where they are most ex 
posed. 
D denotes the metallic collar for the at 
tachment of the lamp-burner. It is secured 
to head C, which has a circular central open 
ing to contain it. The collar has an inturned 
screw-threaded flange, d, and is formed with 
a shoulder, e, adapted to rest upon the upper 
surface of the head, and with a shoulder, f, 
On its lower edge, that presses into the head 
near its under side, said shoulder being 
crimped to enable it to grasp the paper ma 
terial of the head more firmly. 
By the construction just detailed I produce 
a distinctly new article of manufacture and 
One of great utility--to wit, a paper lamp. 
Paper as a material out of which to construct 
the lamp-body I have found to be much 
Superior to any other, especially to wood, 
which has heretofore sometimes been em 
ployed. Wood is more expensive than paper, 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
t 
408,400 
55 
herein-described body, bowl, or fount, con 
sisting in the combination, with a paper cyl 
inder, of a paper head and a paper bottom 45 
grooved to receive the end of the cylinder . 
and extended to serve as a support or base 
for the bowl or body, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a lamp, the combination, with a cylin 
drical paper bowl or body formed of paper 
rolled upon itself, of a solid paper disk form 
ing the head and a solid paper disk forming 
the bottom, said disks being grooved to re 
ceive the ends of the cylinder, and the bottom 
disk being extended to serve as a supporting 
base for the lamp-body, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a lamp, the combination of the cylin 
drical body formed of paper rolled upon 
itself, a solid paper head, a solid paper bot 
tom, said head and bottom being grooved to 
receive the ends of the paper cylinder, and 
said bottom being extended to serve as a sup 
porting-base for the lamp-body, and a metal 
lic collar secured to the paper head for the 
attachment of the burner, substantially as 
described. 
4. In a paper lamp, the combination, with 
the solid paper head of the lamp-body, of the 
metallic collar D, for the attachment of the 
burner, having an inturned screw-threaded 
flange, d, a shoulder, e, adapted to rest on the 
upper surface of the head, and with a crimped 
shoulder, f, on its lower edge, that presses into 
and grasps the paper material of the head, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
75 
LEVI. H. THOMAS. 
Witnesses: 
S. HERBERT GIESY, 
FRED E. TASKER. 
and for this reason paper is better. Wood is 
liable to warp and shrink and swell during 
changes of temperature, while paper retains 
a positive permanent shape and is not affected 
in these respects. Paperislighter than wood 
and much stronger, for thin wooden partslike 
the disks, body, &c., which I use would be 
liable to be easily broken or chipped off. 
This cannot occur with paper; so I esteem it 
a great improvement in the art to use paper 
as the material for making the thin parts. 
In order to prevent the oil from permeat 
ing the paper of which the lamp is constructed, 
I apply to the interior surface of the bowl a 
coating of suitable composition, preferably 
composed of nine parts of glue and one of 
glycerine, or nine parts of glue and one of 
sugar. This coating is preferably applied 
after the bowl has been completed, in order 
that it may extend over the inner surface of 
the bottom and head of the same, as well as 
its sides, and also that it may enter and com 
pletely and effectually fill up and seal the 
different joints to prevent leakage. Other 
compositions may be employed; but I have 
found by actual and practical tests, consist 
ing in the constant use of such lamps for a 
number of months, that a coating formed of 
the above ingredients is in every way effectual 
and satisfactory. 
In order to prevent any oil which may hap 
pen to find its way to the outside of the bowl 
from penetrating the paper walls of the body, 
I cover such surface with japan or suitable 
varnish, or first attach an ornamental en 
velope of paper to the body and afterward 
apply a coating of transparent varnish or 
japan, upon which oil will have no effect. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- . 
1. As a new article of manufacture, the 
O. 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US403501.txt	So iodel.) 
 
No. 403, 50l., 
J. H. VITCHEL, 
COLLAPSIBLE SHIPPING CASK, 
r 
is -- 
STA 
ES PATENT Oi 
FICE. 
.i{}}N ii. MITC Ei, I, OF BIOOM FIEi. 
 
;CC). APS3. E S - PPNG. E. 
SPECIFICATION forning part of Letters Patent No. 4 
Application filed August 25, 1888, Serial No, 283, 
cy 
5 
2 5 
3 5 
 
in -i il 
iFigure l is a 
This invetii) relates i: ) (; so 
To ?till it'i on if it by coice in: 
lse it known that i, joHN II. IITCHELI. of 
Bloomfielt, in the county of lay is and State of 
Iowa, have invented : it wanti in royed 'ol 
lapsible Shilling-task, of which the follow 
ing is a full, cir:r, it extet (lescrition, 
for shipping. 
gods, and as esse it reference it 
oxes, 
kit (kciowia '' 
t' rates, aid har!' is; it trictl 
tsses, with tail its 'eadily taken apart alik 
}: it togeiher is int);ic 
gail it backing gods, 
n:ly it 
is say it in 
iiii ai st', a titl a 
}}{ ret 
('t li: i foli ("d sitat f : a 
-v sini in eit *f goals. 
'' ( it veiti () cois 
sts iii i 'olia)siiie ship 
pilg-cask coasti'ucted at arraged as here 
it after les' rise all claime. 
Reference is to be hati ty) the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
ili which siliar figures of 'ife' ('e indicate 
corresponding parts in alli tile views. 
lar v c \, if t e i vent it), 
Fig. 2 is a 
shown as partly broke away". 
side view. Fig. 3 is a det:iii if 
(i) if the 
hao-fastellers, 
iig. 4 is : lot to view of 
(i.e. of tile heads of 
relke) 
away, fig. 5 is a view showing the nea is for 
connecting the staves. Fig. 5 is a persective 
view of a polition of in ()f the hotos with 
adjustable lengthening anci shortening de 
vice, and Fig. 
is a view (); a head sliving 
modified form of fastelling. 
in carrying out this investion I connect to 
gether a number of stayes, 1, of suitable size, 
extending through per 
by means of wires 2, 
forations in the stayes, as shown in Fig. 5, and 
having eii largements 3 on their ends, which 
are located in recesses -i in the end staves, so 
as to be out of the way in putting the cask 
togetiar and to retain the stayes on the wires 
when the cask is knocked town.' The ver 
tical edges of the staves are formed with a 
bevel, so that when the cask is put together 
the edges of the staves will lie close together, 
as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The heads of the 
cask are formed of strips 5, connected to 
gether in any suitable mannel, and, as shown 
in Fig. 4, preferably by means of a U-shaped 
wire, 6, extending through perforations in the 
strips 5 along a groove, as at 7, in the edge of 
the head 8, and having its ends pent and lying 
in grooves in the opposite edge of the head S, 
; : cask partly 
:) - i. 
as at , ! 
is 
in Fig. 7, with its ends 
lying in a 
S. 
and twisted together, as at 
()'. The sis 
} are formed with grooves 10, 
adjacent is : 
to and bottom, to receive 
the edge of 
leads S. 
etallic hoops or 
bands 
reti to the set of wired stayes 
adjace i t . . 
it; and bottom by means of 
: clamps 
('is', is 
it together by fold 
ing the w 
ses 
out the heads S, the 
edge of tie : ; criying in grooves forted by 
the gra?s'': i. it the staves. 
In order to ::: (i.e. the ends of tie inds 11. 
together, a serrat -d metallie block, i3, is riv 
eted tas one ent of tile ads 11, having a Ver 
tical slot, 4, and a lateral slot, i5, opening 
into the slot it, 
to the other end of the bands 
it is riveted a l:etallic block, 16, to which is 
pivoted a seriated plate, i, having a lateral 
staple, S. in use the plate 17 laps over the 
block 13, their serrations engaging each other, 
and the staple is 5rojects througi the slot 15 
into the slot 1-1. 
By this means the ends of 
the bands 
are firmly engaged and are se 
eured by means of : wire, 14, passing through 
staple said slot, 14 and having its endis bent 
over the late i7. The fastenings may be 
locked by applying a seal thereto. 
In order to provide for lengthening or short 
ening the bands 11 and permit the serrated 
block 13 to engage the serrated plate 17, the 
als l l are formed between their ends with 
lugs 20, having screw-threaded projections 21, 
connected by a turn-buckle, 22. 
3y means of a cask constructed in accord 
ance with this invention a strong, durable, 
and effective shipping-case is provided, which 
may be readily put together, as herein de 
scribed, and can be knocked down by taking 
off the wires 19 and releasing the fastenings. 
When transporte empty, the heads and wired 
staves, laid flat, may be compactly laid to 
gether for transportation. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what I 
clain as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. A collapsible shipping-cask constructed 
with staves i, having grooves 10, adjacent to 
their ends, and wires 2, extending through the 
stayes and secured in recesses 4 in the end 
staves, heads 8, consisting of strips 5, con 
nected together by a U-shaped wire, G, ex 
tending through the strips 5, and having its 
- 
65 
70 
95 
Od 
. 
. 403,501 
2 . . 
4. The band 11, having at one end metallie 
ends secured in the edge of the head, the 
heads 8, resting in the grooves 10 of the staves, serrated block 13, with vertical slot 14 and 
inetallic bands, 11, inclosing staves 1 and see lateral slot 15, opening into the same, and at 
cured thereto. by clamps 12, with a serrated the other end metallic block 16, with serrated 3o 
metallic block, 13, having vertical slot 14 and plate 17, having staple 18, and pivoted to 
lateral slot 15, opening thereinto, secured to block 16, and joined between its ends by the 
one end of bands 11, and a metallic block, 16, lugs 20, having screw-threaded projections 21, 
secured to the other end of the bands 11, with with turn-buckle 22, substantially as de 
serrated plate 17, pivoted thereto, engaging, scribed. 
block 13, and having lateral staple 18, project-5. The staves 1, with grooves 10, adjacent to 
ing through slot 15 into slot 14, and wire 19, their ends, and wires 2, extending through 
passing through slot. 14 and staple 18, with its staves 1 and secured in recesses 4 in the end 
ends bent over plate 17, substantially as del stayes, and metallic bands 11, secured to staves 
scribed. . 
2. The head 8, consisting of strips 5, con- having vertical slot 14 and lateral slot 15, 
nected together by U-shaped wire 6, extend-opening thereinto, and the block 16 at the 
ing through strips 5, and having its folded other end, with serrated plate 17, having sta-, 
end resting against one edge of head 8, and ple, 18 and pivoted to block 16, substantially 
its endsbent against the opposite edge, sub- as described. . . 
stantially as described. 
JOHN H. MITCHELL. 
3. The band 11, having at one end metallie 
serrated block 13, with vertical slot 14 and 
lateral slot 15, opening into the same, and at 
the otherendinalliboki With serrated 
plate 17, having staple 18, and pivoted block 
16, substantially as described. 
WiiAMs. MitcHELL, 
ANDREw W. SHELTON. 
1, with serrated metallic block 13 at one end 4o 
Witnesses: . 
35 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
' 
Io 
15 
25 
-------------- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US403601.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 403,601, 
J. MCALLISTER, 
STEAM. ENGINE 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 21, 1889. 
| | 2 
////////////////////////////////////////////// | N | N 
ZZZZ, 
2 
SS 
2 
ZWZ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Mode1.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. McALLISTER, 
STEAM. ENGINE. 
No. 403,60l., 
Patented May 21, 1889. 
 
W 
M 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES MICALLISTER, OF CHIPPEWA IAIKE, MICHIGAN. 
STEAM - ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 403,601, dated May 21, 1889. 
Application filed January 25, 1889, Serial No. 297,508, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon it may concerns 
Be it known that I, JAMES MCALLISTER, a 
citizen of Chippewa Lake, in the county of 
Mecosta and State of Michigan, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Steam-Engines; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
steam-engines, and more particularly to such 
as are known in the art as direct-acting 
engines, the object being to so construct the 
piston and Working parts connected there 
with that a reciprocating movement of said 
piston will transmit an oscillatory motion to 
a shaft connected with the piston, which shaft 
Will in turn, through Suitable gearing, trans 
mit rotary motion to another shaft. 
A further object is to provide a simple and 
efficient means for connecting the piston of a 
steam-engine with a shaft, whereby the recip 
rocation of the piston will transmit an oscil 
lating motion to a shaft. 
A further object is to produce a direct-act 
ing steam-engine, which shall be simple in 
construction, effective in operation, and com 
paratively cheap to manufacture. 
With these objects in view my invention 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion and peculiar combinations and arrange 
ments of parts, as hereinafter described, and 
set forth in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this application, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation in section of a steam-engine cylin 
der and piston embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of the piston; Figs. 3, 4, and 
5, detail views. Fig. 6 is a plan view illus 
trating the manner of connecting gearing 
with my improved engine; and Fig. 7 is an 
end view of the piston, the packing-rings and 
cap-plates being removed. 
A represents the cylinder of a steam-en 
gine, within which the piston B is arranged 
to reciprocate. Projecting internally from 
the protruding ends of the piston is a series 
of lugs, b, having perforations b'. Placed 
against the protruding ends of the piston are 
packing-rings c, of any suitable material, Se 
cured by suitable fastening devices. Cap 
plates d, completing the piston-heads, are 
next secured to the packing-rings c by means 
of any suitable fastening devices. 
It is not essential to a proper understand 
ing of my present invention that a valve 
chest and steam inlet and outlet ports be 
shown and described in this case, as any pre 
ferred construction of parts for the admission 
and exhaust of steam to the cylinder for mov 
ing the piston may be employed. 
The center of the piston is cut away on op 
posite sides to produce recesses e e, the front 
and rear walls of which are inclined and di 
verge from a common center. That portion 
of the piston between the recesses e e is next 
removed, and thus an opening or passage 
through the piston C is completed, the walls 
of which are curved to produce bearing-faces 
for a drum, D. 
This drum D, which is pref 
erably made of steel and has a central perfo 
ration, f, passing through it at right angles 
to its longitudinal axis, is so mounted in the 
curved bearings in the center of the piston 
C that it will have a free rocking or oscilla 
tory movement, as hereinafter set forth. 
The top Wall of the cylinder A is provided 
with an A-shaped perforation, g, the walls of 
which are inclined in a reverse direction to 
the corresponding walls of the upper recess, e, 
of the piston C. 
Mounted in suitable bearings, F, cast in 
tegral with the cylinder A and projecting over 
the opening g in the cylinder, is a shaft, G, 
upon which is keyed, directly over the open 
ing g, a ring, II, made, preferably, of steel. 
Projecting downwardly from, and preferably 
integral with, the ring H is a steel pin, I, 
which enters the opening g in the cylinder 
and passes loosely through the opening f in 
the drum D. Secured to One end of the shaft 
G is a disk, J, having a crank-pin, K, fixed to 
One face thereof at a point some distance re 
moved from the center of the disk. A crank 
shaft, L, is journaled in suitable bearings a 
proper distance from the shaft G and fur 
nished at one end with a crank-disk, L', which 
disk is also provided on one face with a crank 
pin, L', located at a point on said disk nearer 
the center than the location of the pin K on 
disk J. In other words, pin K should be 
IO 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
 
2 
403,601. 
the shaft and passing through said opening 
and through an opening in the drum, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. In a steam-engine, the combination, With 
a cylinder having an opening, and a piston in 
said cylinder having a recess with curved 
walls to produce bearing-fades, of a drum hav 
ing a central perforation mounted in the pis 
ton and adapted to oscillate on said bearing 
faces, a shaft mounted in proximity to the 
opening in the cylinder, and a pin secured to 
said shaft and passing through the openings 
in the cylinder and drum, substantially as set 
forth, 
6. The combination, with a cylinder having 
an opening therein and a shaft mounted in 
proximity to said opening, of a piston in said 
cylinder, packing-rings secured to said piston 
and heads secured to said rings, and a drum 
mounted in said piston and having a perfora 
tion, and a pin secured to the shaft and pass 
ing through the drum, substantially as set 
forth. . . 
7. In a steam-engine, the combination, with 
a cylinder and piston therein, of a drum 
mounted in said piston, a shaft carrying a 
crank-arm mounted in proximity to an open 
ing in said cylinder, and a pin secured to said 
shaft and passing through an opening in the 
drum, substantially as set forth. 
8. In a steam-engine, the combination, with 
a cylinder and a piston therein, of a drum 
mounted in said piston, a shaft mounted in 
proximity to an opening in said cylinder, a 
pin secured to said shaft and passing through 
an opening in the drum, a crank-armi at one . 
end of said shaft, a second shaft carrying a 
crank arm, and a pitman connecting Said 
crank-arms, substantially as set forth. 
. 
9. In a steam-engine, the combination, with 
a cylinder, a shaft mounted in bearings cast 
integral with said cylinder, and a piston, of a 
drum mounted in said piston, and a pin Se 
cured to the shaft and passing through an 
opening in the cylinder and through said 
drum, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
. 
JAMES MCALLISTER. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN F. HUGHES, 
GEO, L. MEDES. 
. 
. 
. . 
. . 
55 
65 
7o 
75 
95. 
Oo 
. 
. 
. 
. 
25 
: 
- 
O 
shaft G. 
about twice as far from the center of its disk 
as the pin L is from the center of its disk L', 
so that a quarter-revolution of disk J will 
cause a half-revolution of diskL', and the re 
turn revolution of the disk K will complete 
the revolution of disk L', the two crank-pins 
being connected by a pitman, M. Thus it will 
be seen that a rotary motion is imparted to 
the shaft L by the oscillating motion of the 
From the above-described construction and 
arrangement of parts it will be seen that as 
soon as steam is admitted to the cylinder at 
one end of the piston the latter will move to 
the opposite end of the cylinder and carry 
with it the free end of the pin I, thus causing 
the drum D to rock in its bearings and the 
shaft to make about a quarter of a revolu 
tion, these movements being permitted by 
the free movement of the pin I through the 
drun. D. 
Many slight changes might be made in the 
constructive details of my invention without 
departing from the spirit thereof or limiting 
its scope; hence I do not wish to limit myself 
to the precise details of construction herein 
set forth; but, 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. The combination, with a piston and a 
shaft mounted in proximity to the same, of a 
drum mounted in said piston, and a pin se 
cured to said shaft and passing loosely through 
: 
2. The combination, with a piston having a 
recess with diverging walls and a shaft 
mounted in proximity to said piston, of a drum 
mounted in said piston, and a pin secured to 
the shaft and passing loosely through said 
drum, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a piston, and a 
shaft mounted in proximity thereto, of a drum 
mounted in said piston, a ring keyed to the 
45 shaft, and a pin projecting fromi said ring and 
passing loosely through the drum, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. In a steam-engine, the combination, with 
a cylinder having an opening with diverging 
walls and a piston having a recess with di 
verging and curved walls, of a drum mounted 
in said piston, a shaft in proximity to the 
opening in the cylinder, and a pin secured to 
35 the drum, substantially as set forth. 
. 
- 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US403701.txt	(No Model.) 
H. SECK, 
DUST COLLECTOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 403,701, 
Patented May 2l l889, 
 
2. 2. 
-26-6-2s. 
 
(No Model.) 
H. SECK 
DUST COLLECTOR, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 403,701, 
Patented May 2l l889. 
77222as?as, 
Zzzezzoz. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEINRICII SECK, OF DRESDEN, SAXONY, GERMANY. 
DUST COLLECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 403,701, dated May 21, 1889. 
Application filed January 3, 1888, Serial No. 259,594, (No model.) Patented in Germany September 1, 1887, No. 44,377; in 
France September 12, 1887, No, l85,792; in Belgium September 12, 1887, No. 78,842; in England September 13, 1887, No. 
l2,425 in Italy September 30, 1887, No. 22,340/202, and in Austria-Hungary March 6, 1888, No, 35,436 and No. 67,092, 
55 
7 O 
75 
So 
5 
To all tufi OT, it 1 (if concer'7. 
Beit known that I, HEINRICHSECK, a subject 
of the Emperor of Germany, residing at Dres 
den, SaNOny, Germany, have invented certain 
new and liseful Improvements in Dust-Col 
lectors, (for which Ilhave obtained ILetters Pat 
ent in Germany, September 1, 1887, No. 44,377; 
France, September 12, 1887, No. 185,792; Bel 
gium, September 12, 1SS7, No. 7S,842; Eng 
land, September 13, 1887, No. 12,425; Italy, 
September 30, 1SS7, No. 22,340/202, and Aus 
tria-Hungary, March 6, 18SS, Nos. 35,436 and 
67,092.) of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact Specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a novel and efficient apparatus for freeing 
air from dust, such as Sawdust, particles of 
flour, and other impurities; and it consists 
in the features of construction and combina 
tion of devices hereinafter described and 
claimed, reference being made to the accom 
panying drawings, illustrating my invention, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical central section of the 
apparatus; Fig. 2, a top view of the rotating 
Fig. 3 is a vertical 
bodies shown in Fig. 3. 
central section showing a modification of the 
apparatus, the same being here provided with 
curved blades of metal, Wood, or the like, for 
the purpose of producing the draft of air re 
quired. 
In order to enable those skilled in the art 
to make and use my invention, I will now de 
scribe the same in detail, referring to the 
drawings, wherein 
The letter clindicates a suitable casing, in 
which is located a vertical shaft, c, having a 
number of fixed hubs, b, arranged at short 
distances one above another, and carrying 
a number of Spokes Or arms, Cl, from the lower 
surfaces of which are suspended a number of 
rings, i. 
The rings are in the form of annular bands 
which successively increase in diameter from 
the inner to the outer one, and, as shown, the 
bands are located in Stepped form, so that the 
lower edge of one extends below the lower edge 
of the adjacent one, Commencing from the bot 
tom ring or band to the top ring or band. The 
bands are all separated from each other at the 
top and bottom and at all other points, except 
 
as to the Spokes (t, by Wide intervening annul 
lar air-spaces for the free upward passage be 
tween them of the air to be deprived of dust 
and purified. This separation of the bands at 
the top and bottom is important, in that it 
provides for the free upward passage of the 
air between rings and the deposition of the 
dust on the inner surfaces of the rings or 
bands by centrifugal force. The stepped ar 
rangement of the rings or bands also provides 
for efficiently depriving the air of dust, in that 
such dust which is not held by one ring or 
band will be held by the next ring or band. 
To produce an effective apparatus for the 
purposes of this invention, it is desirable, 
also, to use Scrapersf, preferably stationary, 
and to permit such scrapers to properly per 
form their function the rings or bands must 
be annular and perfectly and continuously 
smooth throughout their extent on their in 
nervertical faces, so that the stationary scrap 
ersf, hereinafter described, can rest directly 
against such continuously-Smooth inner faces 
of the revolving bands to effectually and 
evenly scrape off the adhering dust. 
The casing of the apparatus is provided 
with an inlet, e, for the dust-laden air at its 
lower end, through which the said air is in 
troduced into the apparatus. 
Suitable means (not shown) are provided 
for rotating the Vertical shaft c, and with it 
the different series of concentric rings i, there 
by callsing the dust, &c., to be forced and held 
against the inner surfaces of the said rings i. 
Each Series of rings has below it an inclined 
gutter, k, extending directly beneath the 
scraper'sf, hereinafter set forth, and attached 
to or forming part of the box or casing (l of 
the apparatus, by means of which the dust 
after being scraped off from the rings is con 
Veyed Out of the apparatus, there to be re 
moved by means of a conveyer, h, Fig. 1, which 
may he arranged in any suitable place near 
the lower part of the apparatus; or, instead of 
One Slich conveyer h being arranged in the 
lower part of the apparatus, there may be a 
number of conveyers, (not shown,) one for 
each gutter, so that the dust from each series 
of lings may be collected and removed inde 
pendently, as will be readily understood. The 
object of this last-named arrangement would 
95 
IOO 
2 
408,701 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
be to remove the finer-grained dust of the up 
per series apart from the coarser dust of the 
lower Ones. 
For scraping off automatically the dust col 
lected on the inner Surfaces of the several 
rings during the rotation of the latter, a num 
ber of upright pieces of metal, wood, or other 
suitable material-that is to say, scrapersf 
may be attached to the upper surfaces of the 
said gutters in such a way as, to gently bear 
against or merely to touch the inner surfaces 
of the rings i and to remain stationary while 
the rings are rotated, thereby performing a 
scraping action against the said rings and 
causing the dust to drop into the gutters 
below. 
The apparatuses may be arranged either 
horizontally or, as it is shown in the drawings, 
vertically, and the air to be thus purified may 
either be forced into the apparatus by means 
of a blower or passed through it by means of 
suction. In the latter case the Sucking action 
may as well be produced by means of a fan 
composed of suitable curved plates, l, as shown 
in Figs. 2 and 3, fastened upon the rings i and 
rotating with the same within the outer cas 
ing, d. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In a dust-collector, the combination of a 
closed casing having an inlet for the dust 
laden air, an outlet for the purified air, and 
an exit for the collected dust, a revolving 
shaft, a series of vertically-arranged concen 
tric rings connected to the shaft with their 
sides substantially parallel thereto and to each 
other and provided with free and unob 
structed openings between both their upper 
and lower edges, and means, Substantially as 
described, for moving the dust-laden air in 
through the openings between the rings at one 
edge and the purified air out through the open 
ings between the opposite edges of the rings, 
whereby the latter force the impurities by cen 
trifugal force against their interior surfaces 
and the air entering the openings between the 
lower edges of the rings passes off through the 
openings between the upper edges of said 
rings, as set forth. 
2. In a dust-collector, the combination of a 
casing having closed side walls, an inlet for 
the dust-laden air, an outlet for the purified 
air, and an exit for the collected dust, a ro 
tary shaft, a series of parallel vertically-ar 
ranged concentric rings, all connected with 
the shaft, provided with free and unobstructed 
openings between their upper and lower 
edges and having the lower edge of one ex 
tended below the lower edge of the adjacent 
ring in stepped form, and air-forcing mech 
anism for moving the dust-laden air through 
the openings between the rings at one edge 
and the purified air out through the openings 
between the opposite edges of the rings, Sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a dust-collector, the combination of a 
- 
65 
 
closed casing having an inlet for the dust 
laden air, an outlet for the purified air, and 
a discharge-opening for the collected dust, a 
revolving shaft, a series of vertically-arranged 
concentric rings connected to the shaft with 
their sides substantially parallel thereto and 
to each other and provided with free and un 
obstructed openings between both their up 
per and lower edges, means, substantially as 
described, for moving the dust-laden air in 
through the openings between the rings at 
one edge and the purified air out through the 
openings between the rings at their opposite 
edges, and dust-receivers below the rings and 
in communication with the dust-discharge 
opening. 
4. In a dust-collector, the combination of a 
casing, a rotating shaft therein, a series of 
concentric annular rings having Smooth inner 
vertically-arranged faces and separated from 
each other at their top and bottom edges to 
provide for the free upward passage of air 
between the rings, scrapers acting to scrape 
the dust from the Smooth inner vertical faces 
of the rings, and a fan for passing the air to be 
purified between the rings, substantially as 
described. 
5. In a dust-collector, the combination of a 
casing, a rotating shaft therein, concentric 
rings separated at their upper and lower edges 
by intervening air-spaces and arranged in 
stepped form, with the lower edge of one pro 
jecting below the bottom edge of the adja 
cent one from the ring at the bottom to the 
ring at the top, and a fan for passing the air 
to be purified between the rings, substantially 
as described. 
6. In a dust-collector, the combination of a 
casing, a rotating shaft therein, a series of 
concentric annular rings separated from each 
other at their top and bottom edges by inter 
vening air-spaces to provide for the free pas 
sage of air between the rings and having ver 
tically-arranged inner faces, scrapers for de 
taching the accumulating dust on said verti 
cally-arranged inner faces, and a gutter ex 
tending under the lower edges of the rings 
directly beneath the scrapers to receive the 
dust detached by the latter, substantially as 
7. In a dust-collector, the combination of a 
series of rotating rings arranged concentric 
ally, whereby the impurities are driven out 
of the air forced into and through the appa 
ratus, in combination with scrapers for re 
moving the dust adhering to the said rings, 
and with curved plates fastened upon the lat 
ter, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
described. 
. 
HEINRICH SECK. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL DRUCKMLLER, 
MAX KLIPPHELM. 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
IO5 . 
I IO 
I 1.5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US403801.txt	(No Model.) 
C. J. WAN DEPOELE, 
ELECTRIC RAILWAY. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 403,801, 
Patented May 2l l889. 
 
  
/- H/- HL/ LN 
7' 
77 3 
 
 
Zif 
F FEEE EHC 
/ 
V 
 
 
 
 
S 
EAA sap- 22 
SS 
 
 
 
 
 
  
grea 
----a 
Ed Os32G). 
Lala 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
928)itv.cscs, 
76 eA. way 6 
(2-46sfactozel. 
8-1-Uevitov, 
73ty Charles J. Vau//epoeze, 
42-44.2%area. 
6ttotic r 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C.' 
(No Model.) 
C. J. WAN DEPOELE. 
ELECTRIC RAILWAY. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 403,801, 
Patented May 2l 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
71. 
III as 
i 
s 
 
928itvice-ce. 
76e?. ?tates 
3v-uc41-tov, 
s 
By 
CZarzes J. Van Depeate 
to 11 ct P 
 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, B.C. 
(No Model.) 
C. J. WAN DEPOELE. 
ELECTRIC RAILWAY. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 403,801, 
Patented May 2l 1889. 
 
 
N. reters, Phato-lithographer, Washington, D.C 
 
3v.uovtov, 
Charles J.J%za/Jeaoeze. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES J. WAN DEPOELE, OF I.YNN, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ELECTRIC RAI LVMAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 403,801, dated May 21, 1889. 
Original application filed June 22, 1885, Serial No. 169,410, Divided and this application filed February 15, 1889, Serial No, 
300,049, (No model.) 
& 
55 
75 
To all whom, it TCuly CO7 ce?'7. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES J. WAN DE 
POELE, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Lynn, in the county of Essex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Electric Rail 
ways, of which the following is a description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon. 
This application is a division of an appli 
cation filed by me June 22, 1885, Serial No. 
169,410. 
Myinvention relates to new and improved 
means for constructing and Operating electric 
railways; and it consists in the mode of ap 
plying the power of the electric motor to the 
driving-wheels of the cars, as also the mode 
of conveying the electric current from the 
generator to the motor. 
The following is a description of the sys 
tem, reference being had to the annexed 
drawings, forming part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a side view of an ordinary tram 
car arranged to be propelled by electricity, 
showing the mode of applying the power 
from motor to driving-wheels and the means 
of taking the current from the Suspended con 
ductor; and also the currentindicator and regu 
lator. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the car, show 
ing the disposition of the motor, the driving 
and driven pulleys, and means for tightening 
the driving-belts. Fig. 3 is an end view of a 
portion of an electric railway arranged ac 
cording to my invention, the end of one of 
the cars being partly broken away, showing 
the motor and the driver's seat. Fig. 4 is a 
detail view, partly in cross-section, showing 
the conductor-suspending insulator. Fig. 5 
is a side view of the conductor Suspending 
and insulating device, 
Fig. 6 is a side view 
showing a different arrangement of the con 
ductor-suspending devices. 
Fig. 7 is a dia 
grammatic view showing part of a railway, to 
gether with a number of motors and their 
current dividing and regulating devices. 
As indicated in the drawings, A represents 
an ordinary tram-car. 
B B are the rails, and are used as one of the 
electric conductors, both being connected, say, 
to the negative pole of the generator, 
C is the suspended electric conductor, pref 
erably of hard drawn copper and connected 
to the positive pole of the generator. 
D is a grooved contact-wheel carrying the 
Suspended conductor C. 
D' is a disk or Web of soft rubber inter 
posed between the hub and tire of the wheel 
D to give lateral flexibility to the grooved 
metallic periphery thereof. The tire and hub 
are, however, electrically connected by means 
of a proper flexible conductor. 
E is an electric motor by which the car. A 
is propelled. 
F and F are driving-pulleys upon the ar 
mature-shaft of the motor. 
G and G' are endless belts for transmitting 
power from the driving-pulleys FF to driven 
pulleys H H, Secured upon the axles of the 
carrying-wheels H H of the car. 
I and I are tightening-pulleys for the belts 
G. and G'. 
J and J' are forks in which the pulleys I 
and I are hung. 
KK are Supports or brackets attached to 
the car, through which the shanks he k' of the 
forks J J pass. The shanks lic k' are screw 
threaded and provided with adjusting-nuts 
at their outer extremities, and are free to be 
moved longitudinally through their supports 
by the Said adjusting-nuts. The tension of 
the belts GiG' is regulated as desired by set 
ting the adjusting-nuts upon the shanks of 
the belt-tighteners. 
M is a frame Within which is mounted the 
contact-wheel D. 
M' is a hanger or cross-head supporting the 
wheel D and moving in vertical ways in the 
frame M, and sustained by a spring, L. 
N N are posts planted at suitable intervals 
along each side of the line of railway, and be 
tween the upper ends of opposite posts are 
stretched cross-wires O, for supporting the 
main Supply conductor or conductors. 
Q Q are insulators for connecting the con 
ductor with the cross-wire and at the same 
time effectually insulating it therefrom. 
The insulators Q are desirably constructed 
of porcelain, glass, or other hard insulating 
material. The insulator is in the form of an 
inverted Cup, to the under side of which is 
suitably attached a metallic hook, g. The 
95 
OO 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
 
 
2 
408,801. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
hook 9 is desirably formed with a head which 
maybe T-shaped, and said head is adapted 
to be inserted within a cavity in the under 
side of the insulator, where it is firmly se 
cured by filling the cavity with melted sul 
phur or other similar material. A tubular 
extension is formed upon the upper part of 
the insulator for attaching the same to the 
cross-wire, and in order to prevent breakage 
when the insulator is of frangible material I 
provide a lining of elastic substance-such as 
rubber-which not only increases the insulat 
ing properties of the device, but serves as a 
cushion between the croSS-Wire and the insul 
lator, which will absorb most of the vibrations 
and prevent breakage of the insulator. To 
q is attached a spiral spring, R, or 
the hook 
other flexible or elastic connection, which is 
then secured to a belt, r, which is brazed or sol 
dered to the conductor for sustaining the same. 
The flexible connection or spring R may, how 
ever, be attached directly to the cross-wire 
and to the upper portion of the insulator, and 
the hook q be attached directly to the con 
ductor-sustaining belt r, instead of as just 
described. (This arrangement is seen in Fig. 
6.) With either arrangement the conductor 
will beflexibly supported and conform readily 
to the movements of the contact-wheel due to 
oscillation of the vehicle. It will also readily 
accommodate itself to slight variations in the 
height or diameter of the contact-wheel. 
Windicates the driver's seat, and Z the op 
erating-lever of a rotatable commutator-brush 
carrier, which is located in convenient prox 
imity to the seat W. 
The rails of the track are electrically con 
nected by suitable conductors at intervals 
and constitute one side of the main circuit, 
the other being the suspended conductor, the 
conductors arranged to be engaged by the 
traveling contact-wheel carried by the vehicle. 
The circuit of the motor is from the suspended 
conductor through the contact-wheel and a 
suitable conductor extending therefrom to 
the motor, thence from the motor by a suit 
able conductor to the supporting-wheels in 
constant metallic contact with the track, 
which represents the other side of the circuit. 
The motor-cars are therefore connected in 
multiple arc with the supply-circuit regard 
less of their number or relative positions upon 
the line of railway. It will be evident, there 
fore, that the motors upon the cars will con 
sume current in proportion to their respective 
resistances. 
Where, as in the present instance, a num 
ber of cars are to be operated in multiple arc 
some provision must be made to practically 
utilize their consumption of current, so that 
they maybe operated or started and stopped 
without interference each with the other, as 
suming that the intensity of the current in 
the supply-conductors is adequate to the nor 
mal demands of all the motors in operation 
at the same time. An electro-dynamic motor 
running at normal speed will develop a cer 
tain counter electro-motive force which acts 
as a resistance to prevent the flow of current 
through the armature of the machine, and 
therefore may be depended upon as a means 
of self-regulation after the motor has attained 
a certain speed. So long as all the cars are 
running at the same speed, the counter elec 
tro-motive force in each motor will be about 
equal. Consequently their resistance will be 
the same, and the current will divide itself 
evenly through the different motors. When 
a motor is to be stopped, the current is grad 
ually cut off by the introduction of resist 
ance into the motor-circuit. Therefore, when 
it is desired to start a car an artificial resist 
ance must be added to the resistance of the 
motor-circuit in order to prevent an abnormal 
rush of current therethrough, which might 
result in destructive heating. 
Let us now suppose that we have to start a 
The armature will be standing still, and 
Ca, 
consequently no counter electro-motive force 
will be present to prevent more current pass 
ing through the machine than is required 
when the motor is running, thus temporarily 
diverting the necessary current from the mo 
tors already run. Therefore, whenever a 
motor is started a resistance about equal to 
the counter electro-motive force developed in 
the armature when the motor is running . 
should be placed in circuit thereof, which re 
sistance is to be gradually withdrawn as the 
counter electro-motive force rises with the 
speed of the motor. The resistance may be 
introduced and withdrawn as called for, either 
by manual or by automatic means. 
As indicated in Fig. 1 and also in Fig. 7, 
W is a current-indicator in circuit with the 
artificial resistance v, both being in series 
With the motor E. S. represents a manually 
movable contact-lever, also in the motor-cir 
cuit, and arranged to connect more or fewer 
of the coils of the resistance in the motor 
circuit, as desired. My invention is not, how 
ever, confined to the use of a manually-op 
erated adjustable resistance in circuit with a 
motorin multiple between supply-conductors, 
since the automatic means referred to in the 
application of which this is a division may 
be substituted therefor. As there pointed 
out, a simple solenoid may draw in its core 
when the current is too powerful and intro 
duce the resistance in circuit, and on the 
Weakening of the current by increase of speed 
in the armature of the motor the said core 
will gradually be retracted from the solenoid 
and operate the resistance-contacts, so as to 
gradually cut the same out of circuit. The 
moment the motor is running at normal speed 
no resistance whatsoever is needed, since by 
displacing the commutator-brushes of the 
motor more or less counter electro-motive 
force can be produced by each motor inde 
pendently, which will be sufficient to regulate 
the speed and power of the motor. 
In Fig. 7, E' EE indicate motors provided 
With the automatic adjustable resistances 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
403,801 
IO 
I5. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
just referred to. W.' W V8 represent current 
indicators. ' ' ' are adjustable resist 
ances; S' S S, movable contact devices 
adapted to engage more or fewer of the con 
tacts of the resistances ' ' '. 
S. S5 S6 are 
solenoids connected in series with the resist. 
ances and provided with iron plungers S, con 
nected to the resistance-switches S S S for 
raising the same in accordance with the flow 
of current therethrough. Adjustable tension 
springs s' are also connected to the resist 
ance-switches for lowering the same when re 
leased by the weakening of the current in the 
regulating - Solenoid. The motor E is as 
sumed to have just been started, and there 
fore in the absence of any counter electro 
motive force to afford a passage for the maxi 
mum current, the indicator V' showing the 
flow of a current of, say, forty ampres. The 
armature resistance being low, a compara 
tively large amount of current will flow 
through the resistance-coils v', thereby ener 
gizing the solenoid S to a comparatively high 
degree, causing it to draw in the plunger S 
and raise the resistance-switch S', which, by 
separating the terminals of the resistance, 
will compel the current to flow through the 
separate coils or divisions of the resistance 
v' in series, and so oppose such an obstacle 
to the flow of current as to diminish the 
volume thereof to the desired point. The 
motors E E are assumed to have reached 
their normal speed when the counter-electro 
motive force in the armature has risen to a 
point that prevents the passage of more than 
a normal amount of current, which may be 
assumed to be one-half that would pass 
through the armature if stationary and un 
obstructed by artificial resistance. 
The circuits of the system are as follows: 
From any suitable source of electricity the 
current is led by a proper conductor to both 
rails of the track, the rails being properly 
connected at their junctions, so as to have 
electrical continuity throughout their whole 
length. From the track the current passes 
by means of the car wheels and axles, and by 
a suitable conductor to one of the terminals 
of the motor and through the coils thereof, 
thence by the second terminal of the motor 
to switch-lever S of current-regulator, from 
switch S' through any desired portion of the 
resistance and through the current-indicator, 
and thence by suitable conductor to the con 
tact-wheel and suspended conductor, or vice 
versa. To operate the car, the driver as 
sumes a position where he can handle the 
brush-shifter Z, and also the switch-lever of 
the current-regulator. As above stated, the 
motor transmits the power to the drive 
wheels or pulleys by means of two belts. In 
practice I find that good belts are perfectly 
satisfactory, being noiseless, and will have 
very little wearing effect upon the different 
transmitting parts, besides giving a flexible 
connection between the motor and the driv 
ing-wheels. The belts are made endless and 
are tightened by means of the arrangement 
shown in J and K. Further, in order to pro 
tect the belts from Wet or snow they may be 
incased by a suitable cover. 
In order to minimize the wear and strain 
upon the conductors, and also as to always 
insure good contact, the contact-wheel D, in 
stead of being mounted rigidly upon its frame, 
is suspended therein and held up by means 
of a suitable spring. The upward pressure 
of the spring is so regulated as to insure a 
good contact in the highest plane of the con 
ductor, and likewise to be pressed down when 
the conductor hangs low. This will prevent 
the conductor being bent under the passage 
of the wheel, thereby avoiding as much as 
possible the crystallization of the copper by 
bending. 
In order to prevent further vibration of the 
conductor, the wheel, as stated, is provided 
with a flexible web holding the rim and the 
hub together. To further deadlen the noise 
of the contact D, running upon the conductor 
C, the frame M is mounted upon rubber sup 
ports in m, &c. It will thus be seen that the 
connections between the car and the upper 
conductor are rendered as perfect as possible, 
and that all the different movable parts are 
flexibly mounted, insuring the practicability 
of the system and a long life to the different 
parts. Even the insulating-cups are flexibly 
mounted, all tending to avoid vibration of 
conductor. 
To insure a good electrical contact between 
the track and the wheels of the car, all the 
axles are electrically connected together, and 
in case of a train of cars all are so connected 
between their axles and the coupling-pins 
that by simply coupling the cars they are all 
in electrical contact with one pole of the elec 
tric motor on the motor-car. 
It often happens that in streets the tracks 
are covered with mud or other substances 
which, when dry, interfere with the passage 
of the current. By connecting all the wheels 
and axles together I give more opportuni 
ties for the current to pass, in one place if 
not in the other. 
Various modifications in the structure and 
arrangement of the parts and apparatus here 
in before referred to may be made by one 
skilled in the art to which my invention re 
fers without departing from the nature or 
Scope thereof. 
The mattel's herein shown and described 
but not claimed are included in the applica 
tion filed June 22, 1885, Serial No. 169,410. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a system of electric railways, means 
for dividing the supply-current at starting 
between a plurality of motors connected in 
multiple arc between the main conductors, 
comprising an additional resistance in circuit 
With each motor and means for gradually 
withdrawing the resistance as the speed of 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
4. 
403,801 
 
motive force of the current employed, and 
means for gradually withdrawing said resist 
ance as the motor attains a certain speed, sub 
stantially as described. 
7. In an electric-railway system, the combi 
nation of poles or supports placed on each 
side of the line of way, supporting-wires ex 
tending across the line of way and secured to 
opposite pairs of poles or Supports, a main 
supply conductor or conductors suspended 
from the cross-wire, so as to have its under side 
free, and a grooved upward-pressing contact 
device engaging the free side of the conductor, 
substantially as described. 
8. In an electric-railway system, the combi 
nation of poles or supports placed on each 
side of the line of way, supporting-wires ex 
tending across the line of way and secured to 
opposite pairs of poles or supports, a main 
supply conductor or conductors, insulating 
devices connected to the conductor and to the 
cross-wire for suspending said conductor, and 
a grooved upward-pressing contact device en 
gaging the under side of the suspended con 
ductor, substantially as described. 
9. In an electric-railway system, the combi 
nation of poles or supports placed on each 
side of the line of way, supporting-wires ex 
tending across the line of way and secured 
to opposite pairs of poles or supports, a con 
ductor or conductors arranged below the cross 
wires and above the line of way, ears or bails 
permanently secured to the upper side of the 
conductor or conductors, and insulating de 
vices connected with the ears or bails, and the 
cross-wires for sustaining the conductor or 
conductors, and an upward-pressing contact 
wheel engaging the under side of the con 
ductor, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereto affix my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES J. WAN DEPOELE. 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
FRANKLAND JANNUS, 
JOHN W. SIMS. 
the motor incleases, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a system of electric railways, a plu 
rality of motors in multiple arc between the 
supply-conductors, a resistance in circuit with 
each motor acting to prevent a sudden fall of 
potential in the Supply-circuit at starting, and 
means for gradually withdrawing the resist 
ance as the counter electro-motive force rises 
in the motors being operated, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a system of electric railways, a plu 
rality of motors in multiple arc between the 
supply-conductors, a resistance substantially 
equal to the counter electro-motive force of the 
motor-armature at normal speed in circuit 
with each motor at starting, and means for 
gradually withdrawing the resistance as the 
counter electro-motive force rises, and vice 
versa, substantially as described. 
4. In electric railways, the combination, with 
the supply-circuit, of a multiple-arc branch 
including a current-indicator, an automatic 
adjustable resistance, and an electro-dynamic 
motor, all arranged in series, substantially a 
described. 
5. In electric railways, the combination, with 
parallel supply-conductors, of a plurality of 
motors in multiple arc between said conduct 
ors, each motor-circuit comprising a current 
indicator, an adjustable resistance about 
equal to the counter electro-motive force of 
the armature of the motor at full speed, and 
means for automatically introducing and 
withdrawing the resistance in proportion to 
the rise and fall of counter electro-motive 
force in the motor, substantially as described. 
6. In a system of electric railroading where 
a large number of vehicles are electrically pro 
pelled at one time and from the same source, 
a means for regulating the current by an ad 
ditional resistance in circuit with each motor 
at the time of starting, preventing the short 
circuiting of the current by placing such re 
sistance in each motor-circuit independent of 
the other and corresponding to the electro 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US403901.txt	(No Model.) 
H. C. BAILEY 
ADJUSTABLE SPLIT PULLEY. 
No. 403,901, 
Aloy, 7. 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
  
 
sa irra ?t 
% zz 
Z 
ZZHZ 2H2 
% AATA57. A% 
2H2 Z2BIZ2 
ye) % 
% 
?t A/2 
zie, 
Zo 
--- 
272 3' 
7 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
- 
o 
%22a-2p 
(d. 3 6.4% 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithgrapher, Washington, d. c. 
 
Aezzy O. Aataey. 
4 
yet cy 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. BAILEY, OF EDINBURG, INDIANA. 
ADJUSTABLE SPLT PULLEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 403,901, dated May 28, 1889. 
Application filed January 17, 1889, Serial No, 296,677, (No model.) 
55 
O 
To all whom it may conce7n: 
Be it known that I, HENRY C. BAILEY, of 
Edinburg, county of Johnson, and State of In 
diana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Adjustable Split Pulleys; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which like letters refer to like 
parts. 
My invention relates to that class of pull 
leys which are divisible, commonly known as 
split pulleys, and will be understood from 
the following description. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
my device, a part of the web being broken 
away to show the adjusting mechanism. Fig. 
2 is a top view of the adjusting mechanism, 
one-half the pulley being removed. 
The pulley is made of wood having a rim, 
r", and a web, v. This web is formed of two 
thicknesses of Wood with a space, sp, be 
tween, as shown in Fig. 2, and in this space is 
located the adjusting mechanism connected 
with the hub h, which is inserted in a round 
opening in the halves of the web in the usual 
manner. The hub is formed of two halves, 
each of which is provided with semicircular 
flanges f. Lugs or projections are formed 
upon the ends of these flanges, one to admit 
the passage of the bolt b, upon which the nut 
n is screwed, and the other projection being 
wider and having greater strength and solid 
ity, has an opening to receive the upper end 
of the bolt b, and a recess or opening, O, at 
right angles to the line of the bolt, in which 
is inserted the nut intended to form the head 
of this bolt. 
About midway of this bolta secondary head, 
h', is formed, being six-sided, and by apply 
ing a wrench to this bolt through the mor 
tises m, in the sides of the web, the center of 
these mortises being along the line of the two 
parts of the web, this bolt may be turned so 
as to draw the two flanges upon the Sections 
of the hub together. 
It Will be observed that while the hub and 
flange sections are formed alike, yet in oper 
ation the similar ends are located opposite 
each other, as shown in Fig.1. These flanges 
fit down into the space or recess between the 
parts of the web, as shown in Fig. 2, and are 
held in place by bolts passing through slots 
1 and 1 and 2 and 2, and through the holes 
3 and 4. The slots 1 and 1 and 2 and 2 per 
mit the travel of the bolt, so that in adjusting 
the hub to different-sized shafts the bolts can 
be tightened and the flanges drawn together 
without any resistance from the securing-bolts 
that pass through the slots of the flanges, 
these slots being made of sufficient length to 
permit the required adjustment. 
The opening in the hub-section is Square 
and preferably corrugated, as shown, as these 
corrugations give a better grip upon the pe 
riphery of the shafts, and the shaft-openings 
in the hub may thus be made to accommodate 
shafts of varying diameters. 
In addition the set-screw Sc may be tapped 
through the hub, as shown in Fig. 1, when it 
is desired to hold it more firmly to the shaft. 
It will be seen, therefore, that by means of 
the flanges on the hub-sections and the bolts 
which connect the same the parts may be 
drawn together, so as to lock closely to shafts 
of different sizes without causing any strain 
upon the web and rim portions of the pulley, 
inasmuch as these are always fitted closely 
upon the line a: a, and there is no Strain 
brought upon the surface of the Web or rim. 
during the process of adjusting the hub-sec 
tions to the shaft. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent is the following, viz: 
1. A pulley comprising two sections, the Web 
provided with a central open space, the hub 
formed of two parts, each part provided with 
a semicircular flange fitting into correspond 
ing central spaces formed in the Web, and 
means connecting such flanges for uniting the 
hub-sections and clamping them upon the 
shaft, substantially as shown and described. 
2. A split pulley comprising two sections, 
the Web formed so as to leave an open space 
between its parts, the hub formed in two sec 
tions, each section having integral there with 
a semicircular flange adapted to enter, the 
space formed in the web and secured to the 
web by bolts passing through slots to admit of 
the parts of the hub being drawn together 
without any strain upon the pulley-sections, 
such hub being provided with a shaft-open 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
- 
403,901 
ing having a corrugated surface for gripping having threaded openings to receive bolts for 
the shaft, and means-such as boltsfor draw- clamping the hub-sections together, and hav 
ing the flanges of the hub together and clamp-ling squared openings formed in the hub-sec 
ing the hub-sections to the shaft, substantially tions for admitting the shaft, all combined 15 
5 as shown and described. 
3. A split pulley comprising two sections, 
its web having a central recessformed therein hand this 4th day of January, 1888. 
to admit the hub-flanges, a hub formed in two 
sections, each one provided with a flange for 
Io entering the recess in the Web, and with pro- 
jections formed on the ends of the flanges, 
C. P. JACOBS, 
E. B. GRIFFITH. 
Witnesses: 
substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
HENRY C. BAILEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404001.txt	(No Model.) 
E. E. HEACOCK, 
COMBINATION TOOL 
No. 404,001, 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
Jes. 2 
wn Nig 
A. C. 
C 
  
  
 
- Witnesses. 
Irauerator 
7%r 24, s/Az 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELMER. E. HEACOCK, OF STRAUN, KANSAS, 
COMBINATION TO O. L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,001, dated May 28, 1889. 
Application filed January 4, 1889, Serial No. 295,449, (No model) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELMER. E. HEACOCK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Straun, 
in the county of Coffey and State of Kansas, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Combination-Tools; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters and figures of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in combination-tools; 
and it has for its object to generally improve 
upon the construction and to render more 
serviceable in operation this class of devices. 
The further and immediate object of the 
invention is to provide a tool of this class 
which shall embrace within a single element 
a Wrench, a hammer, a tack or nail claw, and 
a tube-Wrench. 
The tool is simple and inexpensive in con 
struction and both durable and efficient in 
operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, I have illustrated 
a tool constructed in accordance with my in 
vention. 
In said drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a t)ol constructed in accordance with 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a central longitudi 
nal section of the same. 
Reference being had to the details of the 
drawings by letter, A represents the station 
ary head or jaw of the wrench, and B the 
movable jaw sliding upon the bar C. 
D is a lug or shoulder upon the bar C, which 
serves to limit the movement of the movable 
jaw B. 
E is a spring having one of its ends secured 
to the lower face of the downwardly-project 
ing portion F of the movable jaw B, the free 
end of said spring being adapted to move . 
vertically in the recessa, formed in the lower 
face of the extension F. The free end of the 
spring E is provided with a pin or projection, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
b, adapted to engage the holesc, formed within 
the lower face of the bar C. A suitable pro 
jection or handle, d, is provided upon the 
outer face of the spring, whereby the spring 
may be raised, so as to disengage the pin upon 
its under face from its engagement with the 
holes in the bar C when it is desired to read 
just the position of the movable jaw. 
The fixed jaw A of the Wrench is provided 
with an extension, G, the lower end of which 
extension is fashioned into a hammer-head, 
G, and tack or nail claw G. 
The outer end of the bar C, which serves as 
a handle for the Wrench, hammer, and nail 
claw described, is recessed, as shown at J, 
thus forming a convenient and serviceable 
tube-wrench. 
The tube - Wrench is intended for use in 
tightening or unscrewing screw - threaded 
cones or tubes-such, for instance, as the 
cone used upon fire-arms and the like. In 
use the hollowed or chambered portion of the 
Wrench is fitted over the cone, as will be read 
ily understood. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim to be new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The combination-tool herein described, the 
same consisting of a bar, C, a stationary head, 
A, attached at one end of the bar, the ex 
tended end of said head being fashioned into 
a Wrench-jaw and its opposite end provided 
with a hammer-face and a tack or nail claw, 
a movable jaw, B, provided upon its lower 
face with extensions F and F, as described, 
the spring E, having one of its ends attached 
to the extension F and its free end provided 
with a pin to engage holes formed in the lower 
face of the bar C, the stop D upon the bar C, 
to limit the movement of the movable jaw, 
and the tube-wrench J, formed in the end of 
the bar C, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EILMER. E. HEACOCK. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN HANNMAN, 
W. N. HOLT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404101.txt	(No Model.) 
A. J. MoMASTER, 
CAMPING WEHICLE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 404,101, 
Patented May 28, 1889, 
s 
A277 esses. 
 
Aveue/270/ 
22%22 
a 
4.14%ael e1 as: 
-- (- 
a 
(No Model.) 
A. J. MoMASTER, 
CAMPINC WEHICE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 404,10l. 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
Azavetazon 
 
N. Peters, Photolithographor, washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
A. J. MoMASTER, 
CAMPINC WEHICLE 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 404,101, 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
s 
 
  
 
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
XXXXX 
(XXXXX W W W 8 W (XXXXX 
W W XXXX W KXXXX) W 
 
o 
o 
a. 
O 
Dy 
Ns 
e 
A1 Gr 
W 
Y 
w 
V 
\ 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
N. PETERS, Photo-utnographer, Washington, D.C., 
w 
 
(No Model.) 
A. J. McMASTER, 
CAMPING WEHICLE 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 404,10l., 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
s 
s 
WZanesses: 
2.7%aiano, 
Iraverazor. 
2. 2-24 x7%- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALONZO J. MCMASTER, OF LOCKPORT, NEW YORK. 
CAMP NG-VEHICLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,101, dated May 28, 1889. 
Application filed March 14, 1889, Serial No. 303,248, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALONZO J. McMASTER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Lock 
port, in the county of Niagara and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Camping Cars or 
Carriages; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to make 
and use the same, reference being had to the 
annexed drawings, forming a part of this my 
specification of said invention. 
Myinvention consists of a camping-carriage 
the constituent parts of which are so con 
structed, combined, and arranged that all the 
furniture, bedding, and kitchen requirements 
for camping purposes are Supplied in the most 
compact form, and the carriage capable of use 
at pleasure either as a sitting-room, bed-room, 
or kitchen. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my camping-carriage 
equipped and ready for use. Fig. 2 is a de 
tail front view, in perspective, of the carriage 
body, showing the driver's seat turned down 
upon its hinges, exposing an oil-stove to view. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a slop-bucket 
and its suspending mechanism. Fig. 4 is a 
perspective view of one of the inner front cor 
ners of the carriage, showing doors opening 
into the oil-stove chamber and into a ward 
robe, and an ice-chambel with waste-pipe, and 
a tank for drinking-water. Fig. 5 is a rear 
view of the wardrobe-door provided with fold 
ing table-legs. Fig. 6 is a perspective view of 
a top or followerplate provided in the ice-box 
proper. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the in 
ner front corner of the carriage opposite the 
ice-chamber, showing a Water-tank basin with 
spigot, drawer, and a portion of the uphol 
stered seat. Fig. 8 is a perspective view of 
the seat and its back, the latter in position 
for use as a berth and provided with a safe 
guard. Fig. 9 is a transverse vertical section 
of the basin shown in Fig. 7 and of a privy 
seat and trap-door below. Fig. 10 is a hori 
Zontal section below the said basin and 
through the walls and door of the privy-cham 
ber. Fig.11 is a linear sketch of the carriage 
seat and upper berth with guard and fasten 
ing. Fig. 12 is a modified construction of the 
safeguard of the upper berth. Fig. 13 is a 
perspective view of the carriage-body pro 
vided with a fly or canvas protection, and Fig. 
14 is a linear plan view of the inner carriage 
room and fixtures. 
The letter A in the drawings represents the 
carriage-body, and B the wheels. A driver's 
seat, C, is provided at the front of the car 
riage, having a dash and foot board, c, a Seat 
box, c', and a seat proper, c, attached to the 
box by means of hinges, c, so that the seat 
proper can be turned over forward in order 
to expose a coal-oil stove, c', located in and 
securely fastened to the seat-box c'. This oil 
stove can be reached through two doors, c, in 
the front Wall, a, of the carriage, so that a per 
son in the carriage can easily attend to it. 
The top c of the box c' is provided with open 
ings c, through which the heat of the oil-stove 
passes in order to heat whatever pots or pans 
are placed above for cooking purposes. Such 
operations are generally performed within the 
carriage through two hinged windows, c, in 
the front wall of the carriage; but the stove 
can also be easily removed from the box c' 
through the doors c and used outside the 
camp-wagon; or it may be moved on rollers 
or slides upon the floor, or upon rails or in 
grooves into the interior of the carriage, and 
there provided with the necessary guards, in 
order to use it for a warming-stove in cold 
weather. 
The two inner corners at the front wall are 
occupied by an ice-chamber, D, and wash 
basin E. The ice-chamber is provided with 
a metallic ice-box, d, and a top and follower, 
d', having upright corner-bearings dwith ball 
roller's d, which latter roll along the inner cor 
ners of the ice-box d, and, being arranged in 
pairs, as shown in Fig. 6, keep the follower 
plate in a level position while descending upon 
and with the melting ice. 
On top of the ice-chamber a tank, d, for 
drinking-Water, with a spigot, d, is provided, 
and a water-pipe, d", arranged below said 
spigot, conveys the waste water down through 
the floor of the carriage to the ground below. 
An opening, d, in the front Wall of the car 
riage serves to facilitate the filling of the 
tank from the outside. Next to the ice-cham 
ber D a Wardrobe, F, with a door, f, is pro 
vided, the door f being removable from its 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
404,101 
7o 
75 
hinges f', and having two pairs of ordinary 
i, against the carriage-floor, and held thereby 
folding legs, ff', attached to its inner side, 
fastening said cord to a button, i, on the door 
as shown in Fig. 5, by means of which said 
i. Below the trap-door a bucket, K, is hung 
door, when removed from its hinges, may be 
to the carriage-floor, wherein the slop passing 
put upon its unfolded legs and used for a 
through a hole, a, in the carriage-floor is re 
table. Between the Wardrobe F and the rear 
ceived. The bailk of the bucket Kisprovided 
wall of the carriage a seat, G, is provided, 
with two open loops, k', which stand at right 
which is long enough for a full-grown person 
angles to the bail, and thus, when said loops are 
to lie upon conveniently for rest. Along the 
inserted into two eyebolts, k, fastened to the 
side wall, ct, of the carriage an upholstered 
carriage-floor, the weight of the bucket will 
framed back, H, is provided for the conven 
cause the bail to be turned down against the 
ience of persons using the seat G. The up 
side of the bucket, while by raising the bail the 
per end portions of the back Hare hung by 
loopsk' will slip out of the eyeboltsk and in 
means of diagonally-arranged links h to the 
stantly disengage the bucket from the same. 
carriage, and are thus held in upright posi 
These loops k' are attached to eyebolts k of 
tion with a thrusting action against the backs. 
the bucket K, and by this construction the 
When it is desired to move the back out of 
bucket can be suspended very closely to the 
the way, it is turned up against the side wall 
carriage-floor, and not only will the bail be 
of the carriage, and the links h will form its 
kept out of the way of the inflowing slop, but 
lower support, while an ordinary bolt, h, at 
the bucket is also prevented from swinging 
each of the now elevated end portions will 
about and splashing its contents while the 
steady it in its position. When a sleeping 
wagon is moving; and, if desired, the bail K 
berth is desired above the seat G, the back 
can be held in its position shown in Fig. 3 
H is turned into a horizontal position and 
by a proper catch applied to the bucket. 
fastened by means of the said bolts to the 
The drawer-chest J contains a number of 
carriage, the diagonally - arranged hinged 
drawers, f, for the safe keeping of shoes and 
links serving, in conjunction with said bolts, 
other articles of Wear and of general use. 
to hold it up firmly in said position; and it 
Apartition-Wall, , separates the basin and 
may be further secured against breaking 
privy from a seat, G, and back Halong the 
down by suspending the inner side from the top 
carriage side wall a, which seat and back are 
of the carriage by means of cords or links exact counterparts to those above described 
h, the latter Serving as bearers of a side 
along the opposite side wall a. 
The side 
slat, h, or netting h", whereby to prevent the 
walls, a? a are, provided with windows a 
inmate of the berth from falling out, 
above the seat-backs H, and with windows a 
Opposite the ice-chamber D a wash-basin, in the rear wall, a, and the door a, through 
E, is provided in a trap-door, e, which is 
which door steps a facilitate an entrance into 
hinged to a platform, i, of a drawer-chest, J, 
the vehicle. 
by means of hinges e, arranged in a slightly 
Below the front portion of the carriage a 
diagonal axis, so that when turned up it will 
tool-box, L, and an oil-reservoir, M, are fast 
move away from the side wall of the carriage, 
ened, and below the remaining portion of the 
which is thus secured against scraping. 
carriage, on the side opposite the bucket K, 
tank, e, is placed upon the platform is and 
a ladder, N, is suspended by means of hangers 
against the front wall, a, of the carriage, which 
n, and pins n'. This ladder, so suspended, 
is there provided with an opening, e, in or 
Will serve for stowing upon it harness, ropes, 
der to facilitate the filling of the tank from 
tents, and a fly or canopy. The tool-box Lis 
the outside. This tank is, by means of a 
so fastened to the carriage that there is easy 
flexible pipe, e, connected with a spigot, e, 
access to its contents-such as saws, axes, 
at the side of the basin E, which by this 
Wrenches, hammers and nails, &c.-useful in 
means is provided with the necessary water. 
case of breakage of the vehicle and other 
Below the basin E, at a Suitable elevation 
purposes. The oil-tank M will be so fastened 
above the carriage-floor, is a privy-seat, I, 
to the floor of the carriage by means of ad 
which is closed by a vertically-hinged door, 
justing screw-bolts and iron bands that it can 
i. The door iis hung between the trap-door. 
be easily removed for the purpose of refilling. 
E and privy-seat I, and it opens and swings . 
While camping the ladder N will serve as 
inwardly only when the trap-door is turned 
a cot for the driver who has charge of the 
up, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 7, and 
camping-carriage at night. 
then it is swung against the side wall, f', of 
The fly or canopy O will be used over the 
the drawer-chest J in the corner of the front 
camping-carriage in hot or rainy weather as 
wall, a. Below the privy-seat an inclined 
a protection for the more exposed parts of the 
trap-door, , is hung to the side wall, a, of 
carriage-body, and as a comfort to the in 
the carriage, and when the privy is to be used 
mates. The canopy O is stretched over diag 
said trap-dooris allowed to hang perpendicu 
onal stays O, hooked into eyes o', provided on 
larly on its hinges, as the dotted lines in Fig. 
the carriage-body and held in position by guy. 
9 indicate; and when the privy is not used 
ropes o', which are fastened to hooks o' on 
said trap-door is pulled by means of a cord, 
the carriage-body. Suitable drawers, g, may 
- 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
95 
Od 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I30 
404,101 
3 
s 
also be provided under the seats G, to contain 
either fishing-tackle or additional household 
articles not mentioned above. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a camping-carriage, the combination 
of the swinging basin E, privy-seat I, and 
privy-door i, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
2. In a camping-carriage, the combination 
of the driver's seat c, hinged at c, seat-box 
c', oil-stovec, windows c, and doors c, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. In a camping-carriage, the combined ar 
rangement of an ice-box, Wardrobe, drawer 
chest, Wash-basin, privy, Water-tanks, seats, 
and convertible sleeping-berths, substantially 
as described. 
4. A camping-carriage having kitchen and 
toilet accommodations, provided with a port 
able sleeping-cot ladder, and supports in n' for 
said ladder, said Supports being constructed 
and arranged to permit the ladder to be ad 
justed beneath the carriage at a proper alti 
tude for forming a sleeping-cot between the 
ladder and the carriage-bottom, substantially 
as described. 
5. A camping - carriage provided with a 
wardrobe having a portable door with folding 
table-legs attached to it, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
ALONZO J. MCMASTER, 
Witnesses: 
WALDO M. WATTLEs, 
ALBERTUS HASKINS, 
d 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404201.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 404,20l., 
W. W. KELSEY. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
BOILER 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
SE 
I 
IS 
k 
3 
a 
w 
- ECAB 
 
 
WITNESSES 
83 sea, 
6/ 
H" INVENTOR 
t", a "E. 
(4% 
BY 
ATTORNEYS 
(No Model.) 
No. 404,20l., 
 
 
  
 
 
  
5. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. W. KELSEY. 
BOILER. 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
 
 
 
A. 
2:SS 
SAf S. Ayi 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
 
ra Sr. 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
77 14 
N. Peters, Photo-lithograp 
INVENTOR 
2 aa v/44 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM W. KELSEY, OF CORTLAND, NEW YORK. 
BOLE.R. 
s 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,201, dated May 28, 1889. 
Application filed January 21, 1889, Serial No. 296,951 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM W. KELSEY, 
of Cortland, in the county of Cortland, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Steam and Hot-Wa 
ter Boilers, of which the following, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention consists in a novel construc 
tion of a steam and hot-water boiler which 
presents a superior amount of heating-sur 
faces and effects a great economy in the con 
Sumption of fuel. 
The invention is fully illustrated in the an 
nexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my im 
proved boiler with one-half of the inclosing 
casings removed. Fig. 2 is a horizontal trans 
verse section on line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
top plan view of the boiler with the top of 
the inclosing-casing broken away. Fig. 4 is 
a vertical transverse section taken in a plane 
parallel with the front presented in Fig. 1, 
and Fig. 5 is an enlarged vertical transverse 
section of one of the corrugated walls of the 
boiler. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A represents the ash-pit of the boiler, which 
is preferably composed of cast-iron and formed 
With a horizontal plate, A', at its top, which 
constitutes the base proper of the boiler, said 
plate being formed with a central opening, in 
Which the grate B, of any suitable pattern, is 
The boiler proper consists, essentially, of 
a plurality of hollow walls, a. a. a, which I 
preferably corrugate vertically internally as 
Well as externally, as shown, or deflect them 
in a similar manner laterally from a vertical 
line at intervals of their heights, the inter 
nal corrugations being parallel with those of 
the external corrugations and disposed with 
the outward convexed portions of the former 
directly opposite the concave portions of the 
latter, so as to impart a uniform or approxi 
mately-uniform thickness of metal to the side 
plates of the hollow walls, as shown in Fig. 5 
of the drawings, Said uniform distribution 
of metal allows the walls to expand and con 
tract without unduly straining the metal and 
located. 
- 
causing the same to crack, and also allows 
the heat to penetrate the side plates of the 
corrugated walls more uniformly at all points. 
The described hollow walls at a ct are disposed 55 
parallel side by side and with the convexed 
portions of each directly opposite the concave 
portions of the adjacent wall and with verti 
cal serpentine passages c. c. c between them 
for the products of combustion. The outer 
walls, a. a, extend beneath the intermediate 
or central walls, and by said extensions form 
two hollow side walls or water-legs of the fire 
pot P. The intermediate or central Walls, a 
a C, being over the fire-pot, form by their 
bases the crown of said fire-pot. The Walls 
a, a adjacent to the outer hollow walls are 
formed with tubular extensions act at Oppo 
site ends, and between said extensions at the 
front of the fire-potis a horizontal hollow Wall, 
b, extending from the base of the fire-potpart 
way the height thereof and leaving a feed 
door above said wall. The remainder of the 
central walls, a ca, are provided with the tubu 
lar extension a' a' only at their rear ends, 
and form by said extensions the rear wall of 
the water-jacket of the fire-pot. All of said 
hollow walls are connected together by rods 
t it passing transversely through them and 
communicate with each other by Water-ducts 
e e, to allow a proper circulation of water in 
the boiler. 
frepresents the feed-water or water-supply 
pipe connected to the base of one of the outer 
hollow walls, a, and communicating with the 
interior thereof, and h. h. h denote steam or 
hot-water pipes connected to the top of One 
or more of the walls a C, to conduct either 
steam or hot water to the apartments of the 
building to be heated. 
The described boiler is inclosed in a case, 
D, which is seated on a horizontal projection 
of the base-plate A" and forms over the top 
of the boiler and around the sides thereof pas 
sages i i for the products of combustion. A 
direct exit-pipe, F, is attached to the top of 
the aforesaid case and provided With a damper, 
l, and an indirect exit-pipe, F, is attached to 
the bottom of the case. In starting the fire 
the aforesaid damper is to be opened to allow 
the products of combustion to escape direct 
through the pipe F, and thus produce the nec 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
404,201 
45 
55 
adjacent wall, and with passages for the pro 
ducts of combustion between them, substan 
tially as described and shown. 
3. In a steam or hot-water boiler, the Com 
bination of a water-jacketed fire-pot, hollow 
walls rising from said water-jacket at oppo 
site sides of the fire-pot and corrugated ver 
tically, correspondingly - corrugated hollow 
walls between the aforesaid walls, and each 
having its convex portions directly opposite 
the concave portions of the adjacent Wall, 
and forming between them serpentine fire 
passages, and having their bases forming the 
crown of the fire-pot, and water-ducts connect 
ing said hollow walls, as set forth. 
4. A steam or hot-water boiler composed of 
a series of vertical hollow walls corrugated 
vertically and arranged parallel side by side, 
with passages for the products of combustion 
between them, the outer walls extending be 
neath the intermediate walls, and the grate 
surrounded by the bases of the outer walls, 
water-ducts connecting said walls, a case in 
closing the aforesaid walls, with passages for 
the products of combustion between said case 
and outer walls, and a smoke-exit pipe Con 
nected to the said case, substantially as de 
scribed and shown. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name, in the presence of two wit 
nesses, at Syracuse, in the county of Onon 
daga, in the State of New York, this 17th day 
of January, 1889. 
WILLIAM W. KELSEY. 
L. S.) 
Witnesses: 
C. II. DUELL, 
MARK W. DEWEY. 
O 
15 
essary draft through the fire-pot. After the 
fire is fairly under way the aforesaid damper 
is to be closed, and then the products of com 
bustion pass over the top of the walls a. a. a, 
then down on the exterior of the outer walls 
and ends of the walls to the bottom of the 
case D, from whence they escape through the 
pipe F. Said circulation of the products of 
combustion retards the escape thereof and 
retains the heat around the walls a. a. a, and 
the corrugated or distorted shape of the lat 
ter increases the heating-surfaces thereof and 
causes the same to be more effectively im 
pinged by the products of combustion. 
In order to utilize the heat radiating from 
the exterior of the case D, I surround the 
same by a jacket or case, I, which is provided 
With a cold-air inlet, n, at the base and with 
one or more hot-air pipes, O, at the top, which 
latter pipes are extended to the apartments 
to be heated. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. A steam or hot-water boiler comprising 
a plurality of hollow walls corrugated ex 
ternally and internally and disposed side by 
side, with passages for the products of com 
bustion between them and with the corruga 
tions of each parallel with those of the adja 
cent Wall, and the water-supply pipe com 
municating with the interiors of said walls, 
as set forth. 
2. A steam or hot-water boiler comprising 
a plurality of hollow walls corrugated verti 
cally, externally, and internally, and disposed 
side by side, with the convex portions of each 
directly opposite the concave portions of the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404301.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
No. 40430, 
 
D. J. POWERS, 
DITCHING MACHINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
5. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
D. J. POWERS. 
DITCHING MACHINE, 
No. 404,30l., 
 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
  
 
 
7. Ya. 
r 2 s 
- A -- 72 
e 2 
st & 
 
O 
Y 5. 
R 
d 
w :. 
 
7/zzesses, 
47Wave-r 
(3. K 26-4- 
is 
said to 
Jnre, Pul?a 
27, 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
s 
No. 40430l. 
D. J. POWERS. 
DITCHING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
 
  
  
 
% s 
S 
s 
A1 
 
H 
V 2 
(No Model.) 
No. 404,301. 
 
SS2 se 
40 
D. J. POWERS. 
DITCHING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
. 
22 
Z72%z7. 
N perers. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
D. J. POWERS. 
DITCHING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
NO, 40430l., 
Patented May 28, 1889. 
 
 
... 6 
Hillth. 
de Ih 
III 
ASIC 
e 
family 
still 
-a-d'-te-spee- Ize 
Azizzi 
II. 
oz 62 
7 
AIN" 
IIII 
Ill 
Annual 
 
  
 
 
: 
 
zzes isis 
* 
  
 
a 
Emil 
- i? 3-2 2.8. 
- see 
763 
- - 
23 
1 
--- 
 
  
12, Z6 
 
* 
f 
2.a. 
 
A 
insul 
 
a 
 
12 
lot 
2: 
\, 
\\ 
M \ 
W \ 
V. 
S. 
1/zzesses. 
Z72227 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID J. POWERS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
DTCH ING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,301, dated May 28, 1889. 
Application filed October 29, 1886, Serial No. 217,522, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To. (til tufton, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID J. POWERS, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Ditching-Machines, which I desire to 
protect by Letters Patent of the United States, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of ditch 
ing-machines in which the ditch is excavated 
by buckets attached to a rotating wheel, and 
is an improvement upon the machines pat 
ented to me in Letters Patent of the United 
States Nos. 319,421, dated June 2, 1885, and 
340,614, dated April 27, 1886. 
The several features of Construction in 
which my improvements consist are herein 
after fully described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings annexed and forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a plan 
view of my improved ditcher. Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation of the same, as seen from the direc 
tion indicated by the arrow in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
side view of the excavating-Wheel and a part of 
the frame-work in which it is suspended, the 
other parts of the machine being removed and 
the point of view being the same as in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 shows the side of the excavating-wheel 
opposite to that shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a 
vertical section of the excavating-wheel. Fig. 
G is a sectional view of a portion of the exca 
vating-wheel, on an enlarged Scale, showing 
the groove in which the protecting-shield 
hangs. Fig. 7 shows an end view of one of the 
excavating-buckets, with the removable en 
larged cutting-edge attached. Fig. 8 is a plan 
view, and Fig. 9 a side elevation, of the fol 
lower. Fig. 10 is a cross-section of the same 
on line 1010; and Fig. 11, a cross-section. On 
the line 11 11, Fig. 9. Fig. 12 is a top view of 
the winding-drum and frame in which it is 
mounted, and Fig. 13 is a vertical sectional 
view of the same. Fig. 14 is a View, on an 
enlarged scale, of a guide for the cable for 
holding it to the surface of the ground in 
front of the machine. FigS. 15 and 16 are top 
and side views, respectively, of an improved 
anchor, to which the forward end of the cable 
is attached; and Fig. 17 is a side view of the 
arm attached to the tongue, carrying the pull 
ley against which the cable bears. 
The general features of the machine are the 
Salme as those of the machine described in the 
two patents above referred to, and it is there 
fore unnecessary to describe it herein in de 
tail, except as to the points of difference. 
The excavating-wheel is journaled in the 
vertically-adjustable frame described in the 
before-mentioned patents, is driven by the 
usual Sweep and gearing, and consists of a 
Wooden frame-work with an outwardly-in 
clined rim or felly. Instead, however, of at 
taching the buckets directly to this rim, as 
has been heretofore done, I strengthen the 
wheel by attaching to its inner side a metal 
facing consisting, preferably, of a series of 
segmental plates of boiler-iron, 2, to which I 
rivet the buckets 3. I make the buckets 
equal in number to or a multiple of the seg 
mental plates, placing a bucket at each point 
of junction between the plates, and causing 
it to lap from One plate to the next. In this 
Way I make use of the buckets themselves to 
strengthen the wheel and obtain a structure 
all the parts of which contribute to its 
strength, and which has therefore great rig 
idity in proportion to weight. With wheels 
as before constructed the buckets have been 
a dead load upon the wheel, and have con 
tributed nothing to its strength. Here, how 
ever, they form constituent parts of the wheel 
structure, and the other parts can therefore 
be made of less Weight. Further advantages 
of this construction are that it is a convenient 
attachment for the buckets, as they may be 
fastened by bolts and readily unbolted for 
repair, and should an accident happen to any 
of the plates they may be replaced without 
disturbing the rest of the wheel. It is not 
essential to this construction that the seg 
mental plates should a but against each other. 
If desired, Spaces may be left between them 
spanned, and the plates connected by the 
buckets. I may also make the segments 
larger than those shown, mounting one or 
more bucketS midway of each plate. 
As heretofore constructed, buckets of this 
kind have been made Semicircular in cross 
section. Such a bucket, of course, gives a 
circular contour to the bottom of the ditch. 
I have found that this shape for the ditch 
bottom is objectionable, in that where the tile 
is small the pitch of the ditch toward the cen 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
45 
s 
 
404,301 
- 
ter is not sufficient to insure the proper align 
ment of the tile. This I propose to remedy 
by so shaping the bucket that the general 
plane of inclination of the two sides thereof 
shall be toward the center of the bucket, thus 
giving a sort of apex instead of the usual cir 
cular contour. One way of doing this is to 
give the bucket an elliptical form, as shown 
in cross-section in Fig. 5. Obviously an angle 
or the apex is not essential to this construc 
tion, since if the apex were rounded off with 
a radius no greater than that of the smallest 
tile ever used the result would be the same. 
In a ditch the bottom of which is shaped by 
such a bucket the tile, no matter what their 
size, will always gravitate to its center, and 
their alignment with each other will there 
fore be perfect. 
The shape of the bucket shown might be 
modified by giving its side a polygonal in 
stead of a curved contour, or by making the 
bucket in V shape instead of elliptical; but 
these modifications would be within my in 
vention, the gist of which is the giving of the 
sides of the bucket an inclination toward a 
single central point. 
I have further modified my former coln 
struction of bucket by giving its cutting-(edge 
an inclined or spiral form, as shown in Figs. 
3 and 4, whereby I obtain a drawing cut upon 
the earth instead of the usual square cut, the 
wheel on this account l'equiling less power to 
work it. Moreover the grass and roots slip off 
from the edges of the buckets more readily 
when they are thus shaped, and the turf and 
scatterings of earth are all delivered upon 
the dump side of the machine instead of par-- 
tially scattered upon both sides. The advan 
tage of this form of cutting-face would of 
course be the same so far as the mere cutting 
is concerned, whether the inner or outer side 
of the bucket is advanced beyond the other; 
but in order to insure the proper throwing of 
the scatterings of dirt it is preferable to have 
the inner side of the bucket advanced and 
the Outer cut back, as shown. 
I do not limit myself to the particular form 
of incline or spiral shown, as any shape given 
to the bucket whereby the cutting-edge is in 
clined to the earth as it strikes it, a part of 
the cutting-edge taking effect before the re 
mainder, is within my invention. 
In Figs. 3 and 7 I have illustrated a de 
1achable device by means of which I propose 
to vary the width of the ditch without chang 
ing the buckets. This device consists of a 
cutting Scoop-shaped rim, 4, provided with a 
shank, 5, by means of which it is attached to 
the wheel and a flat brace, 6, passing back to 
the bucket. Two of these braces 6 may be used, 
if desired-one on each side of the bucket; 
or the braces may be omitted and the rim sup 
ported by its shank alone. The great ma 
jority of ditches (lug are of course lateral 
ditches, for which the tile are not often over 
five and six inches in diameter, and conse 
quently require a ditch not over eight inches 
in width, while the larger or main ditches 
must be from ten to twelve inches in width. 
IIeretofore it has been necessary either to use 
two machines-one for the main and the other 
for the lateral ditches-ol' to use One machine 
of a size large enough to cut the main ditch 
for the lateral ditches also, which is obviously 
a great waste of force. By the use of my de 
tachable enlarged cutting-front I enable a 
single machine to do both classes of work, 
passing from one to the other without mak 
ing any changes in the machine requiring 
much time or labor. The fixed buckets are 
made about eight inches in width, which is 
sufficient for nine-tenths of the work to be 
done, and when I desire to cut wider ditches 
I apply the enlarged cutting-fronts to each 
bucket or to each alternate bucket, by which 
means the ditch may be widened successfully 
to ten or twelve inches. It may be desirable 
to have several sets of detachable cutting 
fronts of various sizes for each machine. 
The braces (3 may be of flat or circular form, 
and they perform the double function of sup 
porting the detachable cutting-edge and also 
of guiding the earth into the buckets. 
I do not confine myself to any particular 
shape or form of the detachable cutting 
front, any suitable shape which will perform 
the desired function being within my inven 
tion. If preferred, it may be made like a 
hood, and attached directly without interven 
ing braces to the buckets. 
The scraper 7, Fig. 4, is mounted upon the 
inclined pitch-board 10, as in my former ma 
chines, and is provided with claws or inclined 
fingers S and 9 upon its front face to assist 
in guiding the scoop over it and to prevent, 
the Scoop from striking it squarely. It is ap 
parent that as the Scoop passes over the 
scraper, if the hinged side door, 11, falls open 
too wide, the rear door hinged to it, 12, may 
drop so low as to be caught under one of the 
inclined fingers and be torn off. To prevent, 
such an a?cident, which I find occurs occa 
Sionally in actual work, I provide a depend 
ing stop, 13, attached to the frame-work and 
extending down toward the scraper, which 
acts to arrest the side door, 11, of the scoop 
after it has opened far enough to pass over 
the scraper. This stop may be of any con 
Venient form, of Woodl or a curved or other 
metal rod, as shown. 
A further improvement of the excavating 
wheel (shown herein for the first time) is the 
manner of hanging and supporting the shield 
14, which protects the gearing and machinery. 
IIeretofore this shield has been suspended 
from the frame-work in which the excavating 
wheel is journaled. I now propose to sus 
pend it by a loop, 15, Fig. 3, from the main 
axle 16, which is a simpler and more compact 
construction; also, in order to make it, a more 
perfect protection to the machinery, I propose 
to cause it to hang in a groove, 17, Fig. 6, 
7 O 
75 
85 
95. 
CO 
I o5 
IO 
I5 
2 cd 
I 25 
TO 
15 
25 
45 
55 
 
404,301 
3. 
O 
formed on the inside of the circumferential 
part of the wheel, instead of hanging, as here 
tofore, against the inner side of the wheel. 
This groove may beformed in any convenient 
manner. I have found it convenient to sus 
pend the shield just within the segmental 
plates 2, grooving the wooden frame-work to 
receive it, as shown. This fitting makes a 
close joint between the shield and the wheel 
and effectually prevents the passage of earth. 
Where the earth being excavated is moist 
and sticky, this groove sometimes clogs and 
there is a tendency to carry the shield around 
with the wheel. To prevent this, it may be 
necessary to use a tie-rod, 18, connecting the 
shield with the frame-work. 
I of course do not limit myself in the use of 
the groove to a shield suspended to the main 
axle, as the groove would be equally service 
able where the shield was suspended by straps 
or braces from the frame-work, as in my former 
machines; neither do I confine myself in the 
use of the suspending loop to a shield hang 
ing in a groove. 
Other important improvements are illus 
tated in Figs. 1, 12, and 13, and relate to the 
mounting of the drum about which the cable 
passes. Where steel cables are used in ma 
chines of this character it is not practicable 
to mount the drum upon the main shaft of 
the machine, for the reason that if a drum of 
sufficient size is used to prevent injury by 
close wrapping to the cable the forward mo 
tion of the machine will be too rapid. It is 
therefore best to use an auxiliary shaft with 
intermittent gearing, and this construction 
also has the advantage of permitting the gear 
ing to be so arranged that different degrees 
of speed may be given to the machine, de 
pending upon the character of the soil in 
which it is working. I propose to mount the 
drum upon a swinging frame attached to the 
main axle, this mounting permitting it to be 
adjusted up and down-that is, to and from 
the surface of the ground. This is an advan 
tage, for the reason that it is desirable to have 
the cable as near the ground at all times as 
may be, and if the drum has not an independ 
ent adjustment its distance of the cable from 
the surface will always depend upon the po 
sition of the adjustable frame carrying the 
main shaft. This construction also enables 
me to relieve the main shaft of a considerable 
part of the strain on the cable, as hereinafter 
explained. The frame-piece 19 is pivotally 
attached near one end by means of boxes 20 
to the main shaft 10, and it carries near its 
outer end the auxiliary shaft 21, on which is 
mounted the drum 22, having heads 23, be 
tween which the steel-wire cable 24 is wound. 
The auxiliary shaft is provided with two fixed 
pinions, 25 and 26, and the main shaft 16 is 
provided with two pinions, 27 and 28, loose 
on the main shaft, a clutch, 29, being pro 
vided for pinion 27, this clutch being feath 
ered on the main shaft, and a sliding key, 30, 
fitted in a groove, 31, provided in the shaft 
being adapted to lock pinion 28 to the shaft 
When pushed out, so as to take into a groove 
provided for it in said pinion, (indicated in 
Fig. 12 by broken lines;) but any other of 
the Well-known forms of clutch mechanisms 
may be substituted for those shown. Accord 
ing as the motion is communicated through 
one or the other of these two sets of pinions, 
the machine will advance at a greater or less 
degree of speed. 
In using single-strand steel cables in ma 
chines of this character heretofore much 
trouble has been experienced because of the 
fact that a steel cable under heavy tension 
has great resiliency, and when relieved of its 
tension will spring out like a watch-spring, 
become disarranged on its drum, and even 
force itself out over the heads of the spool. 
It is frequently necessary to relax the strain 
upon the cable, as in moving the machine, 
and sometimes to do so quite suddenly, as 
when it becomes necessary to throw off the 
clutch because of the striking of the wheel 
against Some obstruction. Some device, there 
fore, for retaining the cable in place under, 
Such circumstances is a necessity, and I have 
devised a retaining or friction case resting 
upon the spool-heads and inclosing the cable, 
and which I find it convenient to make in two 
parts, 32 and 33, attached to each other by 
bolts 34 and controlled by rearward exten 
sions 35, embracing a conical plug,36, mounted 
upon the main shaft. As these rearward 
extensions 35 are forced apart by the pressure 
of the plug between them, the two parts of 
the casing 32 and 33 are forced more tightly 
down upon the spool-heads, and as the plug 
is withdrawn their pressure is relieved. The 
position of this plug 36 is controlled by an 
arm, 37, pivoted to lever 38, which governs 
the position of the clutch 29, so that when 
this clutch, which controls the gearing likely 
to be most generally used, is thrown off 
and the tension of the cable suddenly sus 
pended, the plug is forced between the rear 
extensions, 35, and the casing made to clasp 
the unwinding cable closely and prevent its 
displacement. When the strain is again 
thrown on the cable by the replacement of 
the clutch, the casing is allowed to resume its 
normal position by the withdrawal of the plug. 
The position of the frame 19 is regulated by 
the length of two chains, 39 and 40, which 
connect it to the forward and rear bolsters of 
the frame, respectively. 
The rear chain is 
not attached directly to the frame, but to a 
bracket, 41, pivoted to the frame 19, near the 
secondary shaft 21. By adjusting the length 
of this chain the distance of the drum from 
the ground is regulated, and to enable nice 
adjustment to be readily made I provide chain 
39 with a turn-buckle, 42. It will be readily 
seen that a large part of the strain of the 
cable will be borne by this connection with 
the bolster, and the main shaft to that extent 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
EO 
II5 
I25 
4. 
404,301 
5 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
relieved. The other chain, 40, connecting the 
rear end of the frame with the rear bolster, 
prevents the spool from falling to the ground 
when the tension of the cable is suspended. 
It is convenient to provide this chain also 
with a turn-buckle, as shown at 43. If de 
sired, the retaining-casing about the cable 
may be permanently fixed to the spool, or the 
two parts thereof may be pressed against it 
without any adjusting device, the gist of this 
part of my invention lying in the employment 
of any sort of retaining-cover for the spool. 
So, too, a spool provided with Such a retain 
ing-cover may be used upon a fixed shaft, or 
even upon the main shaft itself of the ma 
chine. Neither do I confine myself to the 
particular means shown for governing the 
adjusting position of the swinging frame. 
The adjusting-chains might, for instance, be 
applied, but at a disadvantage, to the end of 
the swinging frame opposite to that which 
carries the drum. Nor is it essential that 
there be a provision for varying the relative 
speed of the shaft and the drum. So, too, the 
drum journaled in a pivoted frame may be 
used without the retaining-case. 
I do not limit myself to the mounting of 
the swinging frame on the main shaft. The 
chains connecting the frame with the bolsters 
may or lmay not be made adjustable, as de 
sired. 
As is usual in ditching-machines of this 
general character, the rear wheel on the side 
of the machine upon which the excavating 
wheel is mounted is set out so as to straddle 
the earth-dump. This gives the entire ma 
chine a tendency to follow a circular course, 
curving to the left, and this tendency is very 
difficult to overcome so as to give a rectilinear 
motion to the machine witholiticontinual at 
tention. I have discovered that it may be 
overcome by giving a slight permanent incli 
nation to the front axle with reference to the 
frame of the machine, as shown in Fig. 1. 
I 
do not confine myself to any particular means 
for securing and maintaining this inclination. 
I have found a convenient means to be a 
chain, 44, passing from the end of the tongue 
45 to the front end of the frame on the side 
opposite to that occupied by the outstanding 
rear wheel. This chain is preferably made 
adjustable by means of a turn-buckle, 46, or 
other appropriate device, and effects a certain 
amount of inclination in the front axle. To 
prevent the inclination from becoming too 
great and the machine from circling to the 
right, some means must be provided for hold 
ing the tongue from the other direction. I 
do not confine myself to any particular means 
for this purpose; but I find it convenient to 
connect it by an arm, 47, With the cable, this 
giving a more steady and satisfactory control 
of the tongue than another chain running 
back to the frame-work, and, moreover, con 
tinually guiding the machine in the direction 
of the cable. It is desirable to reduce the 
friction between the arm 47 and the cable by 
a pulley, 49, and to make the position of the 
end of the tongue with reference to the cable 
adjustable by providing a number of holes in 
the arm 47, in any of which the shaft carry 
ing the pulley may be set. The arm 47 is 
preferably made double, the pulley 49 being 
placed between the two parts thereof, as shown 
in Fig. 17; but I do not confine myself to this 
particular means for connecting the tongue 
with the cable, nor to the particular means 
shown for adjusting that connection, as many 
others may be readily devised. 
As it is desirable that the cable should at 
all times be as near the ground as possible, 
immediately in front of the machine, in order 
that the horse may step over it readily, I have 
devised means for holding it to the ground, 
this consisting of a frame, 50, pivoted in brack 
ets 51, placed under the hounds in the posi 
tion shown in perspective in Fig. 14 and by 
broken limes in Fig. 1. This frame prefer 
ably has at its lower end a roller, 52, against 
which the cable presses. The frame 50 is piv 
oted, as before stated, but is prevented from 
Swinging forward by a fixed rod, 53, passing 
between the brackets 51 or other suitable stop. 
This stop is not essential, but is a convenience. 
When the machine is in operation, the frame 
is prevented from swinging backward by a 
movable rod, 73, inserted through holes in 
brackets 51. When the machine is being 
dragged from place to place, stop 73 is moved, 
permitting the frame to swing backward to 
clear obstructions, by which it would other 
wise probably be torn off. 
I do not, of course, limit myself to the par 
ticular position I have selected for attaching 
the frame 50, as it may be attached to other 
parts of the frame-work of the machine; nor to 
the particular style of frame shown. Neither 
is it absolutely essential that the frame should 
be pivoted, or that it should have a free mo 
tion in one direction, the gist of my invention 
residing in the provision of a rest for holding 
the rope close to the surface of the ground, 
however it may be located or arranged. . 
A further improvement disclosed herein, 
and which I consider to be of importance in 
a machine of this character, is the shape and 
construction of the follower 54. The follower 
shown in my prior patents has the function 
of throwing the loose earth not taken up by 
the buckets forward into the path of the buck 
ets, and also the function of prevolnting the 
caving in of the sides of the ditch before the 
tile is laid. The follower shown herein has 
both of these functions, and also the addi 
tional function of smoothing or leveling the 
bottom of the ditch, and, moreover, is im 
proved in several details over the follower 
heretofore patented. To enable the follower 
to smooth or press into shape the bottom of 
the ditch, it is provided throughoutits forward 
part With a shoe, 55, corresponding in contour 
with the outside of the bucket, and conse 
75 
95 
Od 
I o5 
I IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
404,301 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
quently with the bottom of the ditch as left 
by the bucket. This shoe serves to press 
down any roughness or inequality left in the 
ditch by the bucket, and insures the center 
ing or alignment of the tiles. Were this shoe 
not used there would both be a certain amount 
of roughness in the bottom of the ditch and 
particles of earth would be left scattered upon 
it, which would catch the tiles and prevent 
them more or less from accurately centering 
by gravity. The shoe, however, leaves a 
Smooth and symmetrically-formed bottom, in 
which the alignment of the tiles is automatic 
and perfect. In my former patents I have 
shown a follower with a face inclined toward 
the excavating-wheel. I find that a mere in 
clination is not so satisfactory in operation 
as a curved front conforming closely to the 
outside circumferential line of the buckets, 
as shown in Fig. 9, this form of carrier throw 
ing forward at Once all the loose earth which 
falls upon it into the path of the buckets. It 
would be an equivalent construction to make 
the front of two or more straight sections 
placed at such an angle to each other as to 
conform more or less approximately to the 
line followed by the buckets. 
I have found that the follower has, espe 
cially in Wet and caving soil, a tendency to 
bind in the ditch, and that this tendency is 
reduced by tapering the follower back from 
the front, as shown in Fig. S. I find, also, that 
it is necessary to provide some means for 
holding the rear end of the follower down in 
the ditch, as the Weight of the earth on the 
front end has a tendency to tip it up at the 
rear. In my previous patent, No. 340,614, I 
have shown the bridge as directly connected 
with the rear end of the follower and holding 
it down by its Weight. This arrangement has 
the inconvenience that it is adapted to only 
one depth of ditch, and it is necessary, if the 
depth of ditch is changed, to change the con 
nection between the bridge and the follower, 
in order that the bridge may continue to rest 
upon the surface of the ground. 
I have therefore conceived the idea of mak 
ing the connection between the rear of the 
follower and the bridge adjustable, and I 
claim such adjustable connection, broadly, 
without regard to the particular means used 
for effecting it. 
I find that a very conven 
ient arrangement is to make the rear of the 
follower inclined, as shown in Fig. 9, and 
cause the frontend of the bridge to rest against 
it. Then, by making the chain which con 
nects the bridge with the machine adjustable, 
the adaptation to any depth of ditch may be 
readily made. 
The pressure of the bridge. 
upon the inclined end of the follower is quite 
sufficient to prevent the tendency of the lat 
ter to tip, and this action will not be inter 
fered with by the projection of the top of the 
follower above the surface of the ground when 
the ditch is shallower than that shown. The 
shape of the shoe should conform to the shape 
of the bucket, and in this case is, as shown in 
Fig. 11, semi-elliptical. I contemplate using 
the several parts of this follower having sepa 
rate functions apart from each other as well 
as in conjunction. Thus it would be within 
my invention to use the leveling-shoe inde 
pendently of the side boards, to prevent the 
caving in of the ditch, and with or without 
the curved face conformed to the contour of 
the excavating-wheel; and the follower might 
be adapted to perform the function of keep 
ing the loose dirt in the path of the buckets 
without either the shoe or the side boards. So, 
too, these features of a curved front and the 
shoe may be used with a follower, the rear 
end of which is held down, as shown in my 
Patent No. 340,614, or in any other way. I 
propose to use this follower with ditching 
machines of other constructions, as Well as 
the machine herein shown and others of my 
invention. 
In Figs. 15 and 16 I have shown an im 
proved automatic anchor. Heretofore it has 
been necessary to fasten the anchors to the 
earth by pins driven especially for that pur 
pose. This takes time and labor, and as an 
improvement on anchors of that sort I have 
devised my present invention, in which the 
pins are pivoted so as to be automatically 
thrown into the earth by the pull of the cable 
upon the anchor. 
It consists of a frame-Work. 
made up of two beams, 56 and 57, connected 
to each other by bolts 58 and 59, shafts 60 and 
61, and plate 72. The shafts are journaled 
in the frame-work and carry on their ends 
pins 62, rigidly attached thereto. These pins 
are free to swing upward, but their downward 
motion is limited by stops or ears 63, attached 
to the frame-work. To the center of each 
shaft is rigidly fixed an upwardly-extending 
arm or lug, 64, forked at its upper end and car 
rying therein a bolt, 65, which passes through 
a link of a chain, 66. One end of this chain 
carries a hook, 67, and the other end is at 
tached to a trough-shaped iron, 68, in which 
the end of the cable is placed. The latter has 
a mass of lead or other metal, 69, cast upon 
it, which is dropped into the groove of the 
iron 68 and held there by bolt 70. This or 
any other convenient device may be used for 
attaching the end of the cable to the chain 
66. The chain passes under the forward bolt, 
58, that the pull on the anchor may be thrown 
down to the surface of the ground and a tilt 
ing tendency upon the anchor prevented. A 
friction-wheel, 71, is interposed between the 
bolt and the chain. From this description of 
the several parts of the anchor it will be seen 
that a pull on the cable throws the points of 
the pins downward and into the earth auto 
matically, while the stops 63 prevent them 
from turning too far and pulling out. When 
it is desired to move the anchor, therefore, it 
is only necessary to drag it forward by hitch 
ing a horse or applying other motive power 
to the hook 67. When properly placed and 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
IEC 
II5 
I25 
404,301 
the machine started, the pull of the machine 
On the cable will automatically cause the pins 
to enter the earth and the ancho to become 
Set. 
I do not, of course, limit myself to any par 
ticular construction of the frame-piece to 
Which the pins are attached, nor to any par 
ticular form of mounting for the pins in the 
frame-piece, nor to the number of pins used, 
the gist of my invention consisting in the 
mounting of any number of pins (one or more) 
lipOn any sort of a frame-piece in such a man 
nel that when the frame-piece is pulled in a 
certain direction the pins will automatically 
CInter the earth. It is obvious that this would 
be the case to a certain extent even if the 
pins Were rigidly fixed at the angle indicated 
to the frame-piece, or if they were pivoted 
independently to the frame-piece and the ca 
ble were attached directly to the frame-piece, 
instead of to the shafts on which the pins are 
mounted. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to protect by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An excavating-wheel for a ditching-ma 
chinehaving a circle of segmental metal plates 
attached to its frame-work and buckets at 
tached to said plates. 
2. An excavating-wheel for a ditching-ma 
chine having a circle of segmental metal plates 
attached to its frame-work and buckets at 
tached to said plates and overlapping and 
connecting adjoining plates. 
3. An excavating-wheel for a ditching-ma 
Chine having a circle of segmental abutting 
plates about its circumference and buckets 
attached to said plates and overlapping and 
connecting adjoining plates. 
4. An excavating-wheel for a ditching-ma 
chine having a circle of segmental abutting 
plates attached to its frame-work and lying 
in the plane of the wheel and buckets at 
tached to said plates and overlapping and 
connecting adjoining piates. 
5. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of a bucket provided with a hinged side and 
a rear door attached to said hinged side, with 
a fixed stop for preventing the hinged side 
from opening too far, and thus causing the 
rear (loor to come in contact with a fixed part 
of the machine, substantially asset forth. 
6. The combination of the excavating 
bucket having a hinged side and a rear door 
attached thereto, with fixed scraper 7, pro 
vided with one or more inclined fingers, S 9, 
and stop 13, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
7. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of the excavating-wheel with a protecting 
shield, the edge of the shield fitting into a 
groove provided for its reception in the cir 
culnfel'ential part of the wheel. 
8. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of the excavating-wheel with a protecting 
shield hung from the axle thereof. 
- 
9. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of the excavating-wheel with a protecting 
shield hung from the axle thereof and pro 
vided with a stay connecting the shield with 
the stationary part of the frame-Work of the 
machine. 
10. In a ditching-machine, the combination, 
with the excavating-wheel having on one side 
of its felly a metal facing, of a protecting-shield 
suspended from the machine, the edge thereof 
being received in a recess provided between 
the felly of the wheel and the said metal 
facing. 
11. In a ditching-machine, the combination, 
with an excavating-wheel provided with fixed 
buckets, of cletachable cutting-fronts for some 
or all of the buckets and braces connecting 
the same with the bucket. 
12. In a ditching-machine, the combination, 
with an excavating-wheel provided with fixed 
buckets, of a detachable cutting-front pro 
vided with a shank for attachment to the 
wheel and one or more braces for connecting 
the cutting-front with the bucket. 
13. In a ditching-machine, the combination, 
with the excavating-wheel provided with fixed 
buckets, of the detachable cutting-front 4, 
provided with shank 5 and braces 6, substan 
tially as set forth. 
14. The combination of a ditching-machine, 
means for propelling the same, and a chain 
connecting the forward part of the tongue 
with the frame-work on one side, whereby a 
permanent inclination lmay be given to the 
front axle With reference to the frame-Work. 
15. The combination, in a ditching-machine, 
of means for driving the Same, a chain con 
necting the frame-work on one side with the 
forward part of the tongue, and means for ad 
justing said chain, substantially as set forth. 
16. The combination of a ditching-machine, 
a cable and drum for propelling the same, 
and an adjustable connection between the 
forward part of the tongue and the cable, 
whereby a fixed inclination may be given to 
the forwald axle. 
17. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of a drum and cable for propelling the same, 
means for connecting the forward part of the 
tongue with the cable, whereby movement of 
the tongue in One direction is prevented, and 
a chain connecting the tongue with the frame 
of the machine, whereby movement in the 
other direction is prevented and a perma 
nent inclination of the front axle to the flame 
of the machine is secured. 
1S. In a ditching-machine, the combination, 
with the tongue 45, of the arm 47 and ad 
justable pulley 49. 
19. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of a swinging frame, a cable, a drum jour 
haled on said Swinging frame, and means for 
adjusting said frame so as to vary the posi 
tion of the drum with reference to the Sur 
face of the ground. 
20. The combination, in a ditching-machine, 
7 o 
9 O 
95 
OO 
I o5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
O 
25 
55 
 
404,301 
IO 
of the swinging frame 19, the drum 22, iour 
naled therein, and the chain 40, connecting 
the rear end of said frame with the frame 
Work for holding up said frame-work when 
the cable is slackened, substantially as set 
forth. 
21. The combination of the swinging frame 
19, the chain 40, connecting the rear end of 
the same with the main frame-work, and 
means for adjusting said chain, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
22. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of a cable and drum for the same, a swinging 
frame in which said drum is journaled, and 
a connection between said Swinging frame 
and the main frame-work of the machine for 
determining the position of the drum when 
the cable is under tension and taking a part 
of the strain of said cable, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth 
23. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of a cable, a drum for the same, a swinging 
frame in which said drum is journaled, and 
a connection between that part of the frame 
Work in which said drum is journaled and the 
main frame-work of the machine, for taking 
the strain of the cable and determining the 
position of the drum, substantially as set 
forth. 
24. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of a cable, a drum for the same, a swinging 
frame in which said drum is journaled, a con 
nection between said frame and the main 
frame-work of the machine for determining 
the position of said frame-Work, and means 
for adjusting said connection. 
25. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of cable 24, drum 22, swinging frame 19, in 
which said drum is journaled, bracket 41, and 
chain 40, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
26. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of a metal cable, a drum, a casing for retaining 
the cable when slackened upon the drum, and 
means for adjusting the pressure of said cas 
ing upon the cable. 
27. In a ditching-machine, the combination 
of a metal cable, a drum for the same, a cas 
ing made in two parts for retaining the cable 
When slackened upon the drum, said parts 
having rearward extensions, and means for 
forcing said rearward extensions apart, so as 
to cause the two parts of the casing to clasp 
the cable more tightly when desired. 
28. The combination of a metal cable, a 
drum, a piece of casing mounted so as to 
Swing and having rearward extensions, and 
means for Operating on Said rearward exten 
sions to cause the casing to bear more or less 
heavily upon the cable. 
29. The combination, with the drum, of cas 
ing 32 and 33, having rearward extensions 35 
With conical plug 36, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
30. In a clitching-machine, the combination 
of a cable, a drum for the same, a secondary 
shaft upon which said drum is mounted, a 
casing for retaining the cable in position 
upon the drum, means for adjusting the 
pressure of said casing upon the cable, gear 
ing between said secondary shaft and the 
main shaft of the machine, means for throw 
ing said gearing in and out of gear with the 
main shaft, and a connection between the 
means for regulating the pressure of the cas 
ing upon the cable and the means for controll 
ing the gearing of the main shaft with the 
secondary shaft, whereby, when the main 
shaft is lungeared, the pressure of the casing 
On the cable will be increased. 
31. The combination of cable 24, drum 22, 
secondary shaft 21, upon which said dirum is 
mounted, casing 32 33, having rearward ex 
tensions 35, plug 36, arm 37, gearing 25 27, 
clutch mechanism 29, and lever 38, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
32. A follower for a ditching-machine nar 
rower at the rear than at the front, whereby 
clogging by a caving of the walls of the ditch 
against it sides is prevented. 
33. The combination of a ditching-machine, 
a follower therefor, a bridge at the rear of 
the follower, and an adjustable connection 
between the follower and the bridge. 
34. The combination of a ditching-machine, 
a follower having an inclined rear end, and a 
bridge bearing against said incline, whereby 
the follower is prevented from tipping. 
35. The combination of a ditching-machine, 
a follower having an inclined rear end, a 
bridge bearing against the same, and an ad 
justable connection between the bridge and 
the ditching-machine, whereby the bridge 
may be adjusted to the follower for the vary 
ing depths of ditch. 
36. The combination of a ditching-machine, 
a cable for propelling the same, a pivoted 
frame for holding the cable against the sur 
face of the ground, and a removable stop for 
preventing the Swinging of the frame back 
ward when the machine is in operation. 
37. The combination of cable 24, pivoted 
frame 50, roller 52, and stop 73, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
38. In an anchor for a ditching-machine, 
the combination of a frame-work, pins piv 
oted to said frame-work, stops for preventing 
said pins from turning completely around, 
and connections between said pins and the 
cable, whereby the strain on the cable causes 
the points of the pins to be thrown down 
ward into the earth. 
39. In a ditching-machine anchor, the com 
bination of the frame-work, a pin attached to 
a shaft journaled in said frame-work, and a 
projection from said shaft, to which the cable 
is attached, whereby the tension of the cable 
causes the points of the pins to be automati 
cally thrown downward into the earth. 
40. In a ditching-machine anchor, the com 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
95 
OC 
ITO 
IIS 
I 25 
8 
bination of pins 62, shaft 60, and projection bination, with a suitable frame-work, of piy 
64, with which the cable is connected, sub- oted pins, chain (36, and roller 71, substantially 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
404,301 
41. In a ditching-machine anchor, the com- 
5 bination of frame work 56 57, pins 62, shaft 
6), upwardly-projecting arm C4, and stop 63. 
42. In a ditching-machine anchor, the com- 
DAVII) J. POWER 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK C. GOOD WIN, 
E. I. IIU BEER. 
: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404401.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 404,401. 
J. HAISH, 
RAILWAY TRACK. 
Patented June 4, 1889. 
- I 
-4- 
422, 2 . 
ZY 
 
 
B. 
LTTTU 
5g 7 Z 
A. 
Af 
9. 
 
   
  
 
s 
  
Azz  
zS Z227a. 
 
 
%2222 
C. 
Zazeezz/ Z. &zee/Z. 
464/64-78 
/aco? Aedu// 
Z3/ Joie 6.7%rze?aze 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB HAISH, OF DE KALB, ILLINOIS. 
RAILWAY-TRACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,401, dated June 4, 1889. 
Application filed July 27, 1888, Serial No. 28ll 70, (No model.) 
65 
To aid, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JACOB FIAISH, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at De Kalb, in 
the county of DeKalb and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
provements in Railway-Tracks; and Idohere 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters or figures of reference 
lmarked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
My invention has reference to certain im 
provements in railroad-tracks, both in the 
rails and in the ties for seating the same. 
One object of my invention is to dispense 
With the Ordinary lateral fish-plates, and there 
by render it practicable to use a lower rail. 
It is Well known that there is great lateral 
preSSlre OutWard upon the rails when in use 
from the lateral Surging of the train thereon. 
Particularly is this the case at the curves in 
the track where the outer rail is relied upon 
to give the train its changed direction. It is 
obvious that the higher the rail is the greater 
leverage this side motion of the train has upon 
the rail-fastening, as the pressure or concus 
sion from the flange of the car-wheel is against 
the inner side of the crest of the rail. Here 
tofore the vertical portion of the side of the 
rail-that is, the interval between the lateral 
flanges and the Crest thereof-has been re 
quired to be of sufficient width to permit the 
placing of the external fish-plate at the joint 
of the rail, and yet have the wheels carried 
at such a height above the same that the 
radial flange on the car-wheels would be car 
ried a sufficient height above said plates and 
the heads of the bolts which hold the same as 
not to come in contact therewith. In my in 
vention by dispensing with these outside fish 
plates there is no reason why the crest of the 
rail may not be lowered to an altitude just 
sufficient to permit said flange on the car 
wheels to be carried such distance above the 
lateral flange of the rail as to clear said rail 
flange or any obstruction resting thereon. 
Another advantage in my form of rail coln 
sists in the fact that I give the rail a central 
support and also two lateral supports, the lat 
ter being directly under the sides of the crest 
of the rail, whereby the usual battering down 
of the edge of the crest of the rail is avoided. 55 
In combination with my improved rail I 
use an iron tie provided with lugs adapted to 
project over the base-flanges of the rails and 
hold said rails in position without the use of 
spikes. Old and disused rails of the ordinary 
formation may be utilized for such ties by 
being inverted and having the engaging-lugs 
formed from the lateral flanges of such old 
rails, and in the drawings I have shown such 
old form of rails adapted to be used as a tie; 
but iron ties can be made expressly for this 
| purpose. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a partial per 
spective of the end of the railin position upon 
the tie. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the track, 
including the rail and tie. Fig. 3 is a plan of 
the same, exhibiting the adjacent ends of the 
rails in position on the tie. Fig. 4 is a lon 
gitudinal section of the rail and cross-section 
of the ties. Fig. 5 is a view of the bottom of 
the rails at their point of junction, exhibiting 
the corrugated bars or fish-plates resting in 
the vertical recesses formed in the base of the 
rail and extending a short distance within the 
end of each rail. 
A is the rail, formed with vertical sides and 
the usual lateral flanges A at the base thereof 
and provided with vertical longitudinal re 
cesses lis B, formed in the under side of said 
rail. The rails A are further provided with 85 
the diagonally-formed ends C. The ends C 
of each rail are parallel with each other, so 
that in forming the junction of the rails the 
extreme ends of each will project past that 
of the other and form the diagonal junction 9o 
exhibited in Fig. 3. This junction may be 
formed as loosely as the Ordinary transverse 
joint for the purpose of affording room for 
expansion, or the junction in my rail may be 
made closer than is usual with the transverse 95 
joint, and expansion in my rails may be pro 
vided for by permitting the ends of the rails 
to slip slightly past each other. The advan 
tage of this diagonal junction, as before stated, 
consists in making the rail substantially con- Ioo 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
404,401. 
(d 
25 
35 
55 
tinuous, so that the tread of the passing wheel 
shall be supported upon the second rail be 
fore leaving the previous rail. 
ID D are corrugated short ba's placed, re 
spectively, edgewise in the recesses IB 3 in the 
rails A and projected a short distance within 
the ends of said rails. A for the purpose of as 
sisting the tie to hold the ends of said rails 
against lateral displacement. The upper 
edges of the bai's D are provided with trans 
verse notches E, which enter and are held 
in corresponding transverse corrugations F, 
formed in the upper end of the recesses 3 in 
l'ails A. This prevents the bars I) from cas 
llally slipping endwise entirely within one 
rail alnd compels said bal's to remain projected 
Within the ends of both adjacent rails, thereby 
breaking the joint between the lattel'. The 
bal's Dare corrugated laterally in order to per 
Init, a slight lateral displacement of the rails 
A at their junction should the excessive ex 
pansion require a slight slipping, as afore 
Said, of the end of one rail past that of an 
other. 
G is a metallic tie depressed or bent down 
ward more or less at its longitudinal center 
and provided upon its upper surface with en 
gaging-lugs II, three of which are adapted to 
slightly extend over and engage, respectively, 
the contiguous external lateral flanges A' of 
the rail A. One of the outer lugs II upon 
each of the ties G, other than the end ties, has 
merely a vertical face as distinguished from 
the projecting lip of the other, in order to per 
mit the placing of the intermediate ties after 
the rails are in position upon the end ties and 
to permit the removal and substitution of ties 
after the track is in position. 
It will be observed that but one of the in 
her lugs I and but one of the outer lugs H 
are formed on the same side of the tie G, and 
each pair of opposing lugs II stand diagonally 
in parallel lines in reference to rail A. At 
the junction of the rails A lugs II engage the 
rails. A near the extremity of the latter, there 
by holding the lap of the rails A in position; 
also, the effect of placing the two opposing 
lugs diagonally at the opposite sides or edges 
of the ties G is to render the interval between 
said Opposing lugs greater when the tie is 
placed in position diagonal with said rails, 
With the opposing lugs H in line perpendicu 
lar to said rails, and less when said tie is 
placed perpendicular to said rails. 
It results, 
therefore, from this construction that when 
the tie is placed under the rails, so diagonal 
there with that each pair of opposing lugs are 
directly opposite each other transversely of 
said rails, the interval between the open ends 
of said lugs II is sufficiently great to permit 
the passage of the flanges A' of the rail A. 
When the lugs II, with the tie in its diagonal 
position, have beel) passed above the flange 
A', so that the rails. A rest upon the tie G. 
l'oper, the latter can be turned in position at 
right angles to the rails A, the flanges. A pass 
ing within the lugs II. To assist in this pro 
cess of placing the intermediate ties, the outer 
lug upon one of the ties G is formed with the 
vertical inner face, as aforesaid, so that the 
operator can more readily guide the three re 
maining overhanging lugs into position on the 
flanges A' as the tie is being brought round 
perpendicular to the rails. As the pressure 
upon the rails A is about universally out 
ward, the fact that the vertical lug H has no 
downward grip upon the flange A' is of little 
importance. The intermediate ties G can be 
placed alternately with their vertical lug on 
the outside of the different rails A, SO that 
the grip of the engaging end Jug H will be a? 
forded upon the outside of each of said rails 
at each alternate tie. 
The central portion of the tie G is given a 
downward depression J, so as to afford meal is 
of embedding said central portion. With the 
ordinary filling material, and also to afford 
downwardly-extending angles KIX at the ends 
of depression J, which, being embedded in 
the earth, serve to prevent any end movement 
of the ties G or lateral displacement of the 
rails A. 
If desired, the ties G at the ends of the 
rails A may be provided with downwardly-ex 
tending ends I, as shown in Fig. 2, to further 
assist in holding said ties from lateral and 
other movement, said ends being also inserted 
in the ground. This mode of forming the tie 
G and holding the rail, together with the in 
sertion of the bal's D, make it feasible to dis 
pense with the usual external lateral fish 
plates, and therefore makes it practicable to 
use a much lower rail A. 
The advantages of the double parallel re 
cesses B in the rail A are that there is thereby 
afforded a central vertical Support, MI, Consti 
tuting the wall between said recesses and (li 
rectly under the center of the rail A. The 
| Substitution of metallic ties for those of Wood 
adds incalculably to the longevity of the ties, 
and inasmuch as in the form of ties shown it 
is feasible to use the worn-out rails such ties 
could be afforded largely in the first instance 
at a proportionately Small expense. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
States, is 
1. The combination of the rail A, provided 
with recesses 3 B, and corrugations F, and 
bar's D, provided with notches E, substantially 
as shown, and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination of the tie G., provided 
with lugs II, formed in diagonal parallel lines 
thereon, and the rail A, provided with diag 
Onally-formed ends C, Substantially as shown, 
and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination of the tie G., provided 
With lugs II, and rails A, provided with flanges 
A', and diagonally-formed ends C, substan 
tially as shown, and for the purpose described. 
4. The combination of the tie G., provided 
with lugs II, and central depression J, rails 
7 O 
75 
So 
85 
95 
OO 
IO5 
I IO 
I 25 
404,401. 
- 
3 
A, provided with recesses B, and central Sup-notches Etherein, substantially as shown, and Io 
porting-Wall M, and flanges A', and the bars for the purpose described. 
D, substantially as shown, and for the pur- 
pose described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
5. The combination of the tie G., provided 
With central depression J, and lugs H, the 
rails A, provided with diagonal ends C, wall 
M, and recesses B, provided with corrugations 
F therein, and the bars D, provided with 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
CHARLES H. SALISBURY 
SAML. P. BRADSHAW. 
Witnesses: 
-- 
JACOB. HAISH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404501.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 404, 50l. 
 
C. A. G., PFANNE. 
HAIR, CURLING DEWIOE, 
Patented June 4, 1889. 
pErgas. Photo-Lithographer, Washingto: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL A. G. PFANNE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO PARKER, 
STEARNS & SUTTON, OF SAME PLACE. 
- 
HAIR-CURLING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,501, dated June 4, 1889. 
Application filed January 21, 1889, Serial No, 296,971. (No model.) 
To all who11, it may conce7n 
Be it known that I, CARL A. G. PFANNE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Hair-Curling Devices, of which 
the following is a specification. 
I have produced a device for curling or pip 
ing hair for ladies use, consisting of a stem 
around which the hair is wound, provided with 
an elastic reversible cup-shaped retainer at 
each end adapted to be turned inside out to 
permit the hair to be wound upon the stem, 
and to be turned in over the stem and over 
the hair thereon like a sleeve to maintain the 
hair in a coiled condition thereon, so as to set 
it in curls when unwound from the device. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
novel hair-curling device, and the novelty 
thereof will be embodied in specific claims 
concluding this specification. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents the device as it is used for curling Wo 
man's hair. Fig. 2 is a partial section show 
ing one of the elastic cup-shaped retainers 
turned in to envelope the end of the stem and 
the other turned out at the end of the stem. 
Fig. 3 is an axial section of the device, with 
both elastic retainers turned in over the hair 
wound upon the stem. Fig. 4 is an elevation 
of the device as shown in Fig. 3, and Fig. 5 
shows a longitudinal section of the device as 
it is produced from the mold as a complete 
article of rubber. 
The hair-curling device is preferably pro 
duced of rubber in a mold, with a suitable 
stem a, having on each end a cup or bell 
shaped or tubular retainer or part b, of a di 
ameter to form an inclosing space over the 
end of the stem and over the hair wound 
thereon, each retainer having a length suffi 
cient to cover the stem and the hair wound 
thereon. These elastic cup-shaped retainers 
for this purpose are secured on each end of 
the stem, and are sufficiently thin to be turned 
inside out to uncover the stem to allow the 
hair to be wound thereon, and to be reversed 
or turned over the stem to inclose it like a 
sleeve and inclose and retain the hair in its 
Wound condition upon the stem, so as to set 
it as stated, and to be again easily uncovered 
to unwind the hair from the stem. 
It is obvious the stem may be made of wood 
or paper, and the elastic cup or bell shaped 
retainers pinned or otherwise suitably fast 
ened to the ends of the stem; but I prefer to 
produce it of rubber as a complete article, 
and when so produced the retainers stand out 
from the ends of the stem in flaring form, so 
that when turned in over the ends of the stem 
they will act like retaining-bands all round 
Over the hair wound upon the stem. When 
so molded, it is vulcanized to render the re 
tainers elastic and easily turned inside out 
on the ends of the stem, 
I claim 
1. A hair-curler composed of a stem upon 
which the hair is wound and an elastic re 
taining-cup on the end of the stem adapted 
to be turned inside out to uncover or to cover 
it, for the purpose stated. 
2. A hair-curling device consisting of a 
stem upon which the hair is wound, having 
at each end an elastic retaining cup part, the 
length of both retaining parts being equal to 
the length of the stem, and adapted to be 
turned inside out upon the stem, for the pur 
pose Stated. 
3. As a new article of manufacture, the 
herein-described rubber hair-curling device, 
consisting of a stem having on each end a 
cup-shaped retaining part adapted to be 
turned inside out, substantially as described, 
for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
0SS eS. 
CARL A. G. PFANNE. 
Witnesses: 
A. E. H. JoHNSON, 
WM. H, DE LACY, 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404601.txt	(No Model.) 
C. S. CHAPMAN, 
CABLE GRIP. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 404601. 
Patented June 4, 1889. 
 
 
O 
2 
olo 
  
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
o ?olo Na 
WITNESSES: 
(2% ((-(4-vee- 
&erdog 
BY 
232 
cluw 
lugs. 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
C. S. CHAPMAN, 
CABLE GRIP, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 404,601. 
Patented June 4, 1889. 
-Z726. 6. 
6. 4s. al 
NSS 
-o- a . 
 
 
 
 
s 
6t 
H 
----- rs2 w 
 
INVENTOR: 
'66 
By slas 
AITORNEYS, 
N. P.S. hoo-itorialser. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLESS. CHAPMAN, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI. 
CABLE GRP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,601, dated June 4, 1889. 
Application filed December 19, 1888, Serial No. 294,066, (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
to all luft un, it inva? concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES S. CHAPMAN, 
of Kansas City, in the county of Jackson and 
State of Missouri, have invented a new and 
Improved Cable-Grip, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to cable-grip mech 
anisms; and it consists, essentially, of the 
novel constructions and combinations of ele 
ments to be hereinafter described, and spe 
cifically pointed out in the claims, 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. ' 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved ca 
ble-grip, parts being broken away. Fig. 2 is 
an end view of the same. Fig. 3 is a side view 
of a portion of the grip, parts being broken 
away. Fig 4 is an end view on partial section. 
Fig. 5 is a central sectional elevation of the 
main fixed frame and of the body-sheet cast 
ing. Fig. 6 is a plan view of the fixed frame 
and body-sheet casting or head, the rack, link, 
and lever being removed. Fig. 7 is a side 
view of the link. 
Fig. 8 is a side view of the 
cross-head. Fig. 9 is a plan view of the cross 
head. Fig. 10 is an edge view of the crank. 
Fig. 11 is a side view thereof. Fig. 12 is a 
plan view of the two halves of the crank. 
In the drawings, 1010 represent the cast 
ings which constitute the main fixed frame of 
the grip-operating mechanism, these castings 
being bolted or riveted to shanks 11, to which 
the grip-heads 12 are secured, spacesa, adapted 
to receive standards carried by the car body 
or platform, being left beyond the shanks 11, 
the standards being riveted or bolted to place, 
as will be readily understood. By this ar 
rangement, should the standards become bent 
or broken, owing to any undue shock, new 
standards may be substituted without chang 
ing the entire grip-operating mechanism. 
The castings 10 are formed with plane bear 
ing-surfaces b, which serve as Ways for a cast 
ing 13, which constitutes the head of the 
body-sheet 14, said body-sheet being con 
nected in any desired manner with toggles, by 
means of w.ich the jaws 15 are moved to grip 
upon the cable 16. (See Fig. 2.) The casting 
13 is centrally cored to receive a link 17, said 
link being apertured to admit a cross-head 
18, that is provided with trunnions 19, that 
rest in bearings formed upon the casting 13, 
the trunnions being held to their bearingsby 
a cap 20. 
Upon the upper face of the cross-head 18 
there is a boss 21, having an undercut recess 
22, adapted to receive the head 2 of an adjust 
ing-screw 24, that engages a threaded aperture 
formed in the upper end of the link 17. 
In connection with the link 17, I arrange a 
crank 30, formed of sections c and d, each Sec 
tion being provided with a trunnion 31, said 
trunnions riding in bearings formed in the 
castings 10. 
Upon the approaching faces of the crank 
sections there are formed bosses 32,32", 33, 
and 33, the boss 32 being recessed to receive 
a projection 34, formed on the boss 32", and 
both bosses and the crank-sections being ap 
ertured to receive a uniting bolt or rivet 35. 
The bosses 33 and 33 of the two crank-sec 
tions abut, as is clearly shown in Figs. 4 and 
10. In the lower end of the link 17 there is 
an aperture e, within which the bosses 32 and 
328 are passed prior to the introduction of the 
rivet 35. 
In order that the crank 30 may be moved 
to rock the link 17, I mount a bifurcated lever 
50 upon the extending ends of the trunnions 
31, the lower ends of the short arms of the 
lever 50 being apertured to receive a bolt 51, 
that is passed through the lower portion of 
the crank 30, the lever-arms being provided 
with bosses 36, which abut against bosses 37, 
formed upon the outer faces of the crank 
Sections. 
Between the sections of the bifurcated end 
of the lever 50 there is arranged a toothed 
rack 39, which said rack is engaged by a pawl 
40, said pawl being normally held in engage 
ment with the teeth of the rack 39 by a spring 
41, surrounding the handle-bar 42, which is 
mounted to slide in guides carried by the lever 
50, the said spring being arranged between a 
collar on the handle-bar and a washer loosely 
mounted on the said bar and resting against 
one of the guides carried by the lever 50. 
The handle-bar 42 is connected to a hand 
piece 43, that is pivotally connected to the le 
ver 50, the hand-piece being recessed to re 
ceive the edge of the lever-handle, whereby 
IO 
35 
45 
95 
CO 
2 
404,601 
lower end of its short arm connected to the 
lower portion of the said crank, substantially 
as herein shown and described. 
2. The combination, with a fixed frame ar 
ranged for connection with the heads of a grip 
and with a car body or platform, of a movable 
frame arranged for connection with the grip 
jaws, a crank carried by the fixed frame, a 
link connected to the crank and to the mov 
able frame, a lever fulcrumed on the crank 
trunnions and connected to the lower crank 
arms, a pawl carried by the lever, and a toothed 
rack with which the pawl engages, Substan 
tially as described. 
... 3. The combination, with a frame made up 
of castings that are bolted or riveted together, 
of shanks 11, held by the casting-uniting riv 
ets, said shanks being arranged for connec 
tion with a grip-head, a body-sheet 14, ar 
ranged for connection with the grip-jaws, a 
casting 13, carried by said body-sheet, a crank 
30, formed with trunnions 31, journaled in 
bearings formed in the castings first referred 
to, a link 17, pivotally connected to the crank, 
a cross-head carried by the link and journaled 
upon the casting 13, a lever fulcrumed upon 
the trunnions 31 and connected to the crank 
30, a retaining-pawl carried by the lever, a 
rack with which said pawl engages, and a 
pawl-operating attachment, substantially as 
described. 
CHARLES S. CHAPMAN. 
45 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
JNO. M. TAYLOR, 
GEORGE. F. MILLER. 
all danger of catching the hand between the 
hand-piece and the lever-handle is avoided. 
In connection with the pawl and its operat 
ing mechanism I arrange proper regulating 
nuts, such as those shown in the drawings. 
In the drawings the parts are represented 
as they appear when the jaws of the grip are 
binding upon the cable. To unloosen said 
jaWS, the lever 50 is thrown in the direction 
of the arrow shown in connection therewithin 
Fig. 1, and as the lever is so thrown the crank 
30 will be moved in the direction of its arrow, 
and in so moving will carry, the link 17 up 
Ward, and as the link moves upward the body 
sheet 14 will also move upward, and the tog 
gles will be moved to carry the jaws away 
from the cable. 
To cause the jaws to grip upon the cable 
the lever 50 is moved in a direction opposite 
that indicated by the arrow, the parts con 
trolled thereby moving in a direction oppo 
site to that above described. 
As the parts become worn, a proper adjust 
ment may be secured through the medium of 
the adjusting-screw 24. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a cable-grip, the combination, with a 
fixed frame to which the grip-heads are con 
nected, of a movable frame arranged for con 
nection with the toggles of the grip, a link 
pivoted in the movable frame, a crank pivoted 
in the fixed frame and pivotally connected to 
the lower end of the link, and a lever mounted 
upon the pivots of the crank and having the 
5 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404701.txt	(No Model.) 
L. G.0ULLIOUD. 
DUST GUARD FOR, CAR, AXLE BOXES. 
No. 404,701. 
Patented June 4, 1889. 
2 2 
 
 
Za. 
68)itvicesco 
(0.24%z- 
24- S3 A& elevity %2. 
K6-ca 63--4-----O 
N. PEERs. Photo-thographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS GOULLIOUD, OF MONTREAL, QUEBEC, CANADA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
UNION BEARING AND LUBRICATOR COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
DUST GUARD FOR CAR-AXLE BOXES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,701, dated June 4, 1889. 
Application filed January 4, 1889, Serial No. 295,478, (No model.) Patented in Canada January 31, 1889, No. 30,680, 
I5 to prevent the escape of liquid lubricant. 
To all whom it invazy conce77. 
Be it known that I, LOUIS GOULLIOUD, of 
the city of Montreal, in the District of Mon 
treal and Province of Quebec, Canada, have 
5 invented a certain new and useful Improved 
Dust-Guard for Car-Axle Boxes, (for which I 
have already obtained Letters Patent of Can 
ada, No. 30,680, bearing date January 31, 
1889;) and I do hereby declare that the fol 
to lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same. 
My invention, although denominated a 
dust-guard,' and serving to keep dust and 
grit out of the axle-box, is primarily intended 
It may be thus briefly described: I propose 
to face up perfectly true the outside face of 
the back plate of the axle-box, and to secure 
to its projecting sides by bolts or other suit 
2O able means a second plate having its corre 
sponding or inner face trued up in the same 
way as the back plate of the box. On the 
under side of this second plate is formed a 
projecting rib fitting in between the project 
25 ing sides of the axle-box and butting up 
against the face of the back plate. In both 
these plates are formed the usual oval open 
ings for the axle to pass through. Between 
these two planed surfaces is mounted upon 
go the axle the dust-guard proper. This Iform 
of a substance which must combine the qual 
ities of non-permeability, so that no liquid 
lubricant can pass through it, and non-sus 
ceptibility to wear, so as to do away with the 
35 recessity of devices for keeping the guard in 
contact with the axle, and at the same time 
have the power of expansion, so that any 
compressive force exerted on the edges or 
periphery will force out the surfaces. I have 
4o by experience found that cork will fill all 
these conditions, and I therefore propose to 
form my dust-guard proper of that substance. 
The disk or plate is perforated SO as to fit on 
the axle. This cork disk or plate will have 
45 both surfaces trued up and Smoothened so 
that they shall be perfectly in contact with 
the trued-up faces of the plates when the disk 
is expanded laterally by the compression of 
the periphery. This disk or plate is usually 
5o formed with its lower part semicircular, or 
nearly so, the sides converging from about 
65 
9o 
IOO 
the center or axis and ending in a flat top. 
Upon this is set a plate, through the ends of 
which and of another plate some little dis 
tance above it pass the ends of a thin metal 55 
compression band closely Surrounding the 
disk. Compression is exerted by the band 
upon the disk through the action of a set 
Screw passing through the top plate and 
Working on the lower one, so as to draw the 6o 
ends of the strap together. 
For full comprehension of the invention, 
reference must be had to the annexed draw 
ings, forming part of this specification, in 
which- 
Figure 1 is a top view of the rear part of 
an axle-box embodying my invention; Fig. 2, 
a Sectional elevation taken on line acac, Fig. 
l; and Fig. 3, a similar view online 22, Fig.2. 
parts. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 7o 
As no particular construction of the axle 
box is claimed, no allusion Will be made to it 
further than to say that A is the back plate, 
pierced in the usual Way for the axle, and 75 
with projections A'. Its rear face is planed 
to a perfectly true surface. 
B is the additional or supplementary plate 
with projection B' on its lower edge, fitting 
in between the side projections A', and hav- 8o 
ing itsfront face trued up to correspond with 
the rear face of A. It has of course an open 
ing identical with that in A for the passage 
of the axle. 
worked perfectly smooth to correspond with 
the meeting faces of A and B, and mounted 
on the axle. It is preferably of the shape 
shown in Fig. 2, and partially encircled by a 
metal band or compression-strap E. 
F is a plate resting on the top of D, and G 
a plate set at some little distance above F, 
through both of which the ends of the strap 
E pass. 
plate G and pressing upon the plate F, so that 
by its action the disk D will be compressed, 
thus giving a perfectly tight joint round the 
axle and against the meeting faces of A 
and l3. 
D is a disk or plate of cork, having its faces 85 
His a set-screw working through the top 95 
What I claim is as follows: 
1. The combination, with the back plate of 
404,701 
an axle-box, of a supplementary plate secured 
thereto, leaving space between them, the in 
ner faces of both plates being trued up, a 
cork disk mounted on the axle, and a band 
partially surrounding the periphery of the 
disk and provided with a device for tighten 
ing it up on same, all substantially as herein 
set fortl. 
2. The combination, with the back plate A 
5 
of an axle-box, of the plate B, secured to same, Io 
single cork disk D, mounted on axle between 
plates, strap E, encircling such disk, plates F 
and G, and set-screw II, all substantially as 
herein described. 
LOUIS GOULTIOUD. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN ROSS, 
GEO. D. FUCH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404801.txt	(No Model.) 
M. M. M. SLATTERY, 
ELECTRIC METER FOR ALTERNATE CURRENTS 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 404,801, 
Patented June 4, 1889, 
WAZWASSAS 
(26-6- 4 /-o-c- 
AWWAW2O7 
l/2-a-4-16- 14. 447-y 
/664's 
21itorne' 
N. Peters, rheto-Lithgrapher. Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
M. M. M. SLATTERY, 
ELECTRIC METER FOR ALTERNATE CURRENTS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 40480l. 
Patented June 4, 1889. 
 
assaya 
2C2S 
z O 
 
 
 
 
24/7. WASSAS 
s 
AWWAWZO 
4- 26----- 
/a, 12 a? 2-9-41 
21itorney 
/A-Y 
N. PTERS, Photo-tithographer, Washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARMADUIKE M. M. SLATTERY, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE FORT WAYNE, ELECTRIC LIGHT COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECT R C METER FOR ALTERNATE CURRENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,801, dated June 4, 1889. 
Application filed March 14, 1889, Serial No. 303,217, (No model.) 
IO 
IS 
25 
To all whom, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, MARMADUKEM.M. SLAT 
TERY, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Fort Wayne, in the county of Allen, in the 
State of Indiana, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Electric Meters; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form part of this 
specification. 
My invention is of an improved form of 
electric meter adapted for use in the measure 
ment of alternating currents. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows an eleva 
tion of the working parts of the meter, partly 
in Section. Fig. 2 is a plan view of cylinder 
and disks, also partly in section. Fig. 3 is a 
plan view of the top of the coils, showing sec 
ondary coil and cylinder in outline. Fig. 4 is 
a perspective view of the secondary coil S, 
and Fig. 5 is a similar view, but showing the 
interior with upper portion of the coil re 
The same letters denote identical parts in 
all the figures. 
P is a coil of conducting-wire conveying the 
alternating current to be measured. It per 
forms the function in the operation of the 
meter of a primary coil, and is so referred to 
hereinafter. 
S is a device in the nature of a coil, which 
performs the function of a secondary coil in 
the operation of the meter, and is so herein 
after referred to. 
C is a cylindler of copper or other diamag 
netic conducting material, having attached to 
its surface disks cl did, of soft iron or like 
magnetic substance. 
The cylinder C is mounted on the shaft S, 
which has bearings at b b, and which carries 
a fan F, and actuates by the Worm at a train 
of gear-wheels, which operate hands upon the 
dials D D D, by which the revolutions of the 
cylinder are counted and indicated. The sec 
ondary coil S is fixed in position relatively to 
the primary coil P, so that its central plane 
shall cut the central plane of the primary coil 
moved. 
at an angle of about forty-five degrees, as in 
dicatedl in the top view of the coils shown in 
Fig. 3. 
The manner of operation of the apparatus 
is as follows: The passage of the alternating 
current through the primary coil P creates, by 
induction, a secondary current of like nature, 
but contrary movement in the secondary coil 
S. The cylinder C occupies the relation of a 
secondary coil to each of the coils P and S 
and receives currents by induction from each 
of them. Among all these currents there are 
attractions and repulsions depending on their 
parallelism, their distance from each other, 
and the similarity or dissimilarity of move 
ment in their impulses in time and direction. 
The cylinder, being free to turn, obeys that 
force which is the resultant of all the attrac 
tions and repulsions operating between the 
electrical currents induced in it and those 
flowing in the two coils P and S. 
The effect 
of this force is to produce revolution of the 
-cylinder C in the direction of movement from 
the secondary coil Stoward the primary coil 
Pacross the least angle between their planes. 
In an analogous manner the soft-iron disks (l 
did are subjected at once to the magnetic at 
tractions and repulsions of the two fields of 
force surrounding the coils P and S, the re 
sultant force of which tends to produce revo 
lution of the disks in the same direction in 
which the cylinderis impelled by the electrical 
attractions and repulsions to which its cur 
rents are subjected. The Vanes of the fan F 
are made of such superficial area and form 
that with the least current that is sufficient to 
actuate the mechanism of the meter they 
shall retard its speed to the slowest rate con 
sistent with certainty and uniformity of mo 
tion. The resistance of the atmosphere to 
the revolution of the fan increases with the 
square of its velocity, and the velocity of the 
cylinder, unchecked by friction or any other 
retarding influence, increases with the square 
of the actuating-current; hence the retard 
ing influence of the fan, properly adjusted, 
just compensates for the accelerating in 
fluence of an increasing current, and the 
speed of the cylinder is made proportional to 
the current flowing in the principal coil P, so 
- 
e. 
45 
55 
65 
75 
So 
85 
9 O 
95 
Od 
 
2 
404,801 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
55 
65 
that the number of revolutions of the cylin 
der, as indicated by the dial-hands, is a true 
measure of the current which has passed 
through the coil P within a given time. 
In the construction of this apparatus it is 
desirable that the secondary coil shall be of 
extremely low resistance and shall envelop 
the cylinder as completely as is consistent 
with its own most effective induction from the 
primary coil. For that purpose have devised 
the form shown in the drawings and exhibited 
in detailin Figs, 4 and 5. It is of cast copper, 
made firstin the form of a continuous shell, and 
then sawed in the manner indicated in the 
drawings, so as to present a combination of : 
parallel rectangles held in form by an uncut, 
mid-rib of the shell and narrowing or becom 
ing gradually smaller in area from the in 
terior outward, so as in a general manner to 
follow the conformation of the cylinder. It 
may be made, however, of copper bars or 
rods joined together in any convenient man 
ner, so as to present a number of circuits of 
very low resistance. 
It is important that the moving part of the 
mechanism shall combine the least inertia 
with the largest receptivity of electrical and 
magnetic energy. For this purpose the cyl 
inder C is made of extremely thin sheet-cop 
per and capped at its ends with a thin plate. 
of aluminum for lightness and strength. 
This form of conductor has the advantages 
of a low resistance, of affording any desired 
length of conductor parallel with the sides of 
the inducing-coils, and of bringing a fresh 
mass of metalinto the inducing-field at every 
instant of time. For similar reasons the 
disks did d are made of verythin sheets of 
soft iron, and are placed normal to the axis of 
the cylinder, so that they shall revolvein their 
own planes. This construction concentrates 
in the disks the largest number of lines of 
force from the field of the inducing-coils in 
such manner as to secure the greatest energy 
and continuity of pull in the direction of: 
revolution. It is obvious that the apparatus 
is capable of being used in an interrupted or 28th day of February, 1889. 
pulsatory current also. 
closed coil of low resistance fixed relatively 
to the primary coil, so that its central plane 
shall cut the central plane of the primary 
coil, a cylinder of electrical conducting ma 
terial organized to revolve in inductive rela 
tion with said primary and secondary coils, 
and carrying-disks of magnetic material cut 
ting the magnetic field of force of each of 6o 
said coils, with a retarding device and devices 
for counting and indicating the revolutions 
of the cylinder. 
2. In an alternating-current meter having 
a fixed primary coil conveying the current to 
be measured and a secondary closed coil in 
inductive relation therewith, a moving part 
consisting of a copper cylinder carrying soft 
iron disks and revolving in inductive relation 
to both said coils. 
3. The combination, for use in an alternat 
ing-current meter, of a copper cylinder and 
soft-iron disks placed normal to its axis ro 
tating in the inductive field. 
4. In an alternating-current meter, a sec 
ondary coil or conductor consisting of succes 
sively-narrowing rectangles of copper later 
ally joined together and enveloping that mem 
ber of the mechanism to which motion is com 
hunicated by induction, substantially as 
5. In an alternating-current meter, a sec 
ondary coil or closed conductor consisting of 
copper circuits of low resistance, all in elec 
trical multiple connection with each other, 
substantially as shown. 
6. In an alternating-current meter, a sec 
ondary coil consisting of copper circuits of 
low resistance integrally joined together by a 
mid-rib, substantially as described. 
7. In an alternating-current meter, a sec 
ondary coil made from a continuous shell of 
conducting material sawed into ribs and en 
veloping that member of the mechanism to 
which motion is communicated by induction, 
substantially as shown. 
In testimony whereof I do hereto subscribe 
my name, in the presence of two witnesses, this 
MARMADUKE. M. M. SLATTERY. 
J. E. TALBOT, 
CHAs. C. MILLER. 
I claim 
1. An alternating-current meter containing, 
in combination, a fixed primary coil convey 
ing the current to be measured, a secondary 
Witnesses: 
shown. 
, - . 
. 
. 
95 
75 
- 
- 
- 
: 
. . 
. 
. 
- 
. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US404902.txt	T. A., EDISON, 
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 404,902, 
Patented June 11, 1889. 
-Zzz we za 42 2 
7, 2-eal 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS A. EDISON, OF MENLO PARK, NEW JERSEY. 
ELECTRICAL-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 404,902, dated June 11, 1889. 
Application filed October 4, 1881, Serial No, 43,163. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS A. EDISON, of 
Menlo Park, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Electrical-Distribu 
tion Systems; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon. 
In my system of electrical distribution, in 
which the main conductors are placed in pipes 
or tubes and laid underground, I prefer to 
lay Such main conductors in pairs around 
each block of a district and at each corner to 
run the tubes across the streets and connect 
all the positive conductors together and all 
the negative likewise together. From such 
conductors service-pipes lead into the houses 
which are to be supplied with current. These 
main conductors are connected to the central 
station where the electric generators are lo 
cated by means of positive and negative feed 
ing-conductors, which unite at certain points 
With the positive and negative main conduct 
ors. At points where intersecting main con 
ductors are to be connected, where sections of 
the same mains are coupled together, where 
service-conductors are to run from the mains, 
or where feeding - conductors are to be con 
nected to such mains, the pipes are run into 
junction - boxes, which are so arranged that 
the proper connections can be made within 
The object of this invention is to produce 
a box for connecting the feeding-conductors 
With the mains. Each pair of main conduct 
ors, house-conductors, or feeding-conductors 
may be placed in a single pipe, as shown in 
Imy patent, No. 251,552, or each conductor of 
a pair may be placed in a separate pipe, per 
forated and notched washers being used to 
separate the conductors from the side of the 
pipe, and the whole being filled with a suit 
able insulating material, as fully set forth 
in the patent above referred to. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a cor 
ner junction-box, each pair of conductors be 
ing placed in single tubes; Fig. 2, a similar 
box, but with the conductors laid in separate 
plpes. 
them. 
- 
O 
25 
45 
AA are positive, and B B negative, main 
conductors, the conductors of like polarity 
being connected together within the box I. 
In Fig. 1 each pair of conductors A B is 
laid in a single pipe E, while in Fig. 2 the 
conductors are separated, conductors. A being 
laid in pipes C and conductors B in pipes D. 
3 and 4 are respectively the positive and 
negative feeding - conductors inclosed in a 
tube F, though, if desired, these conductors 
also could be laid in Separate tubes. 
The box I might be a house-service box, in 
which case one pair of conductors A B would 
run entirely through the box, while the other 
pair would pass only half-way through and 
be properly connected to the first pair; or 
this box might be a coupling-box for the Sec 
tions of a pair of main conductors, in which 
case four conductors would meet in the box 
and be connected in pairs, while the feeding 
conductors would be connected to the junc 
tions of the positive and negative mains. 
What I claim is 
1. In an underground system of electrical 
distribution, the combination, With a street 
intersection box having pipe-openings in its 
sides, of two or more pairs of conductors, 
each pair forming the two sides of a circuit, 
pipes for the separate conductors entering 
the box, and connections within the box of 
conductors of the same polarity, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. In an underground system of electrical 
distribution, the combination, with a street 
intersection box having pipe-openings in its 
sides, of two or more pairs of conductors, each 
pair forming the two sides of a circuit, pipes 
for the separate conductors entering the box, 
connections within the box of conductors of 
the same polarity, and a line of conductors 
forming a feeding-circuit entering the box 
and connected to the intersecting conductors, 
substantially as set forth. 
This specification signed and witnessed 
this 24th day of August, 1881. 
THOMAS A. EDISON. 
Witnesses: 
RICHD. N. DYER, 
H. W. SEELY. 
55 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405002.txt	(No Model.) 
W. S. BISHOP. 
BRUSH HOLDER FOR DYNAMOS, 
No. 405,002. 
Patented June ll, l889. 
 
an 2 
E. 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
es of 
A? 
s Ea. 
INVENTOR: 
Zazas 6. 
sugg. 
ATTORNEYS. 
eETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washingtol, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER. S. BISHOP, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, 
BRUSH H ODER FOR DYNAMOS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,002, dated June 11, 1889. 
Application filed December 6, 1888. 
Serial No. 292,77l (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER. S. BISHOP, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new and 
Improved Brush-IIolder for Dynamos and Mo 
tors, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
forming a part thereof, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved brush-holder for dynamos and motors. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same, and Figs. 
3, 4, and 5 are detail views of the swivel of 
the brush-adjusting screw. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the views. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and efficient holder for the brushes of 
dynamos and electric motors, which will hold 
the brush in the position of use with a light 
uniform pressure, and in which the brush is 
rendered adjustable in the holder by a posi 
tive Screw movement. 
Myinvention consists in a rocking arm pro 
vided with a socket for receiving the commu 
tator-brush, a spring-supporting arm adjust 
able on the pivot of the brush-holding arm, 
said spring-supporting arm and brush-hold 
ing arm being provided with sockets for re 
ceiving the ends of a spiral spring for push 
ing the brush forward into contact with the 
commutator-cylinder, and an adjusting-ScreW 
for moving the commutator-brush backward 
and forward through the brush-socket, all as 
hereinafter more fully described. 
The rod A is attached to the cross-arm of 
the dynamo in the usual way. To the said 
rod is fitted the brush-holding arm B, which 
carries at its outer extremity a brush-holding 
socket C, provided with a clamping-screw D, 
and furnished with an apertured lug Ct. The 
end of the socket C adjoining the commuta 
tor-cylinder E is preferably tapered and ar 
ranged to fit the commutator-brush. F. To 
the outer end of the said commutator-brush 
is fitted a clamp G, provided with screwsb for 
binding the brush tightly within the clamp. 
The said clamp is also provided with a lug c, 
which is bored and tapped to receive the ad 
justing-screw H, the said screw being swiveled 
in the luga, and provided at its outer end with 
a milled head I, by which it may be turned, 
The swiveled end of the screw II, which is 
provided with a circumferential groovej, is 
engaged by the pin k passing transversely 
through the lug Ct. The pin k is bent at a 
right angle and provided with a curved notch 
lat a point opposite the screw H. By turn 
ing the pin k so that the notch l coincides 
with the hole in which the screw is swiveled, 
as shown in Fig. 4, the said screw may be 
withdrawn from the lug C. When the pink 
is turned into a reversed position, as shown 
in Fig. 3, the screw will be retained by the 
engagement of the pin with the grooved end 
of the screw. By turning the screw H one 
way or the other, the brush F is pushed for 
ward through the socket C or withdrawn, and 
when in the correct position is clamped by 
the screw D. 
The brush-holding arm B is provided with 
a cylindrical socket d and with two sleeves e, 
fitting loosely upon the rod A. Between the 
sleeves e, upon the rod A, is placed the spring 
holding arm J, provided with a socket d', and 
split and furnished with ears f, which are 
drilled and tapped to receive the tangent 
Screw K, by means of which the arm. J is 
clamped in any desired position on the rod A. 
The arm. J is also provided with a lugg, for 
limiting the motion of the brush-holding 
arm B. 
In the sockets did are placed the ends of a 
spiral spring L. When the spiral spring is 
designed to push the brush E forward into 
contact with the commutator-cylinder E, as 
in the case of Small dynamos or motors, the 
Spring is placed loosely in the sockets and 
held there by its own pressure, the said spring 
then acting under compression; but when my 
improvement is applied to a large dynamo or 
motor the ends of the spring L are fixed in 
the sockets d d", and the spring is extended 
so as to relieve the pressure of the commuta 
tor-brush and brush-holding arm upon the 
commutator-cylinder E. 
I have shown the arm B curved slightly to 
Ward the commutator-cylinder to afford an in 
creased space for the spiral spring L; but I 
do not confine myself to this construction. 
When it is desired to remove the brush from 
the holder, the Swiveled end of the screw is 
released in the manner already described, 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
9 O 
95 
OC) 
2 
405,002 
sleeve e, placed on the said rod A, and pro 
vided with the socket C for receiving the 
brush, the brush F, the adjusting-screw II, 
pivotally connected with the socket C, and 
the clamp G, adapted to engage the brush F, 
Substantially as Specified. 
4. The combination, with the brush-hold 
ing arm B and the rod A, arranged to support 
the Said brush-holding alm, of the arm J, 
placed on the rod A, and provided with the 
clamping-screw K for clamping the said arm 
upon the rod A, and furnished with the stop 
lugg, Substantially as Specified. 
WALTER. S. BISHOP. 
Witnesses: 
ELBRIDGE. F. BARNES, 
M. S. WADHAM. 
when the brush and the clamp G may be re 
moved together. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with the brush F and 
the Socket C, provided with the apertured lug 
Ct, Of the clamp G, the screw H, having a cir 
cumferential groovei, and the notched pink, 
Substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, With the loosely-piv 
oted brush-holding arm of a dynamo or elec 
tric motor, of a curved spiral spring and an 
adjustable arm forming the abutment for the 
Spiral Spring, Substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, in a brush-holder for 
dynamos and electric motors, of the brush 
holding rod A, the arm B, provided with the 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405102.txt	(No Model.) 
No, 405,102. 
3. S. KRAUS, 
PENCIL TIP, 
Patented June ll, l889. 
 
s A 
928), evosses 
&4/2C- 
is belitoya, 
o 
3-vauovov 
4-6- /64-Y 
-402 
es 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL KRAUS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE EAGLE PENCIL 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PEN CLTP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,102, dated June 11, 1889. 
Application filed April 2, 1889, 
Serial No, 305,705. (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL KRAUS, of the 
city, County, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Pen 
cil-Tips, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
What I have devised is a cheap and taste 
ful tip or head designed to finish the end of 
the Ordinary lead-pencil, and to serve at the 
same time, if need be, as a means to prevent 
the pencil from rolling when laid upon an in 
clined surface. 
My tip is made of sheet metal; and it con 
sists of a head struck up in sections, which are 
placed together and secured in a ring or sleeve, 
which fits upon the end of the pencil. The 
head may be that of a human being or an ani 
mal or the like. In practice I produce for the 
purpose the heads of eminent men and Women, 
of horses, dogs, deer, &c. The head is usu 
ally struck up in two halves of sheet metal, 
which halves are placed in the ring and fitted, 
and are fastened together at one or more 
points, if desired, by a drop of solder. The 
ring, however, is the principal means of hold 
ing them together. A tip thus made is cheap, 
easily made, and gives an attractive appear 
ance and finish to the pencil. The irregulari 
ties of the outline of the head, moreover, will 
serve to prevent the pencil from rolling when 
laid down. 
O 
25 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a pencil provided with 
my improved tip. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
Section of the same in a plane at right angles 35 
to that in which the two sections of the head 
meet. 
The head A in this instance is supposed to 
be that of Washington. It is made up of two 
Sections or halves a Cl, which are sheet metal 4o 
struck up in proper form. These sections are 
first fitted together and are inserted at their 
base into a sheet-metalring or ferrule b, which 
fits upon the end of the pencil P. The sec 
tions which compose the head are formed 45 
with a neck c, which is the part that is in 
serted in the ring. They may be held to 
gether at one or more points by a drop of sol 
der; but, as above said, the ring is the prin 
cipal means of holding them. 
I claim 
A sheet-metal tip for lead-pencils, consist 
ing of a ring or ferrule b, which fits upon the 
end of the pencil, and an ornamented headA, 
the struck-up halves or sections a of which 55 
are inserted and secured in the ring. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
hand this 30th day of March, 1889. 
5O 
SAMUEL KRAUS. 
Witnesses: 
C. S. BRAISTED, 
W. H. BENSON, Jr. . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405202.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
No. 405,202. 
N. CLARK, 
ROLLER FOR SLIDING DOORS. 
Patented June 11, 1889, 
 
928)itvacoscy 
6% (2-4 
w 
33 hta (tota o; 
341 Uevitov 
u/e722a22 (22.7% 
76/27. 67-7627262/2a2zz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NORMAN CLARK, OF STERLING, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO JOHN H. LAW 
RENCE AND EDWIN F. LAWRENCE, OF SAME PLACE. 
ROLLER FOR SLIDING DOORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,202, dated June 11, 1889. 
Serial No. 303,850, (No model.) 
Application filed March 19, 1889, 
To all whom it may concern: 
| 
Be it known that, NORMAN CLARK, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Sterling. 
in the county of Whiteside and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Rollers for Sliding Doors; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to letters or figures of ref 
erence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
Myinvention has reference to improvements 
in sliding-door rollers; and it consists, essen 
tially, in the conformation and interconnec 
tion of the two plates constituting the rollers, 
the object being to simplify the construction 
and attain the maximum strength and resist 
ing-power of the material used. 
As my invention pertains alone to the roller, 
and the mode of connecting and using the 
Same is Well known, I do not deem it neces 
sary to show or describe in this application 
any of the residue of the hanger. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
of a roller embodying my invention. Fig. 2 
is a central cross-section thereof, exhibiting 
also the cross-section of a supporting-track. 
The aforesaid roller belongs to that class in 
which there is a double tread, the roller being 
adapted to bestride an upwardly-projecting 
tongue or flange H, which serves as a guide 
therefor, each of the two disks constituting 
the roller having its tread on one side of said 
guiding - flange upon a suitable supporting 
track. 
In the use of barn-door hangers the size and 
Weight of the door and the consequent lever 
age exerted at times by the door upon the 
hangers, and the strain, torsional or other 
wise, to which the hangers are subjected from 
the action of the wind and other causes, ren 
der it essential that the parts shall be of suf 
ficient strength not only to perform their func 
tions under normal conditions, but also to re 
sist the excessive strain and wrenching to 
which they are frequently subjected. 
AA are circular steel plates of any desired 
diameter, and are each provided with the cen 
tral transverse opening B. When the plates 
A are first cut from the bar, their sides are in 
straight parallel lines. They are then sub 
jected to the operation of a die, by which a 
portion of their surface between the opening 
B and their periphery is formed into the an 
nular concavity C, resulting in the formation 
of a like annular convexity D on the opposite 
face thereof, and their centers are thrown out 
slightly beyond the plane of their outer edges. 
Each of the wheels A is pressed into the same 
conformation, which consists in said annular 
depression or concavity surrounding the Walls 
of the opening B and intermediate the latter 
and periphery of the plate A upon one side of 
the latter, and the said annular bulge or Con 
vexity on the oppositeside thereof correspond 
ing in reverse as to shape and extension with 
the concavity aforesaid. The plates A are 
then passed, respectively, over the ends of a 
transverse pin or axle E, which latter is formed 
with its greatest transverse diameter at its 
longitudinal center and tapered from the said 
center toward each end. The ends of the axle 
E are inserted in the respective openings B 
of the plates A, the latter being placed upon 
said axle with their convexities D inward. 
The opening B and the outward taper and 
cross-diameter of the axle E are SO propor 
tioned that when said plates are pushed, re 
spectively, toward the longitudinal center of 
said axle and the convexities D reach mutual 
contact the axle E will snugly fit the opening 
B, and the enlarged diameter of said axle in 
termediate said plates will hold the centers of 
the latter from any nearer mutual approach. 
After the convexities D of the respective 
plates C are brought into mutual contact, as 
aforesaid, cross rivets or bolts F are fastened 
through both of said plates in the circle of 
These transverse fastenings 
said contact. 
can be as frequent as may be desired; but 
four of such equally distributed around and 
in the circle of said convexities will be found 
sufficient. The axle E is of course of Such 
length as to project sufficiently beyond the 
outer wails of the plates A to furnish jour 
inals for said roller when placed in any of the 
usual langers. . 
It will be noticed in Fig. 2 that the effect 
of dishing the area of the plate A inter 
55 
75 
95 
TOC 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
405,202 
mediate the opening B and the periphery is 
to diverge the respective plates A, when placed 
in contact, radially from the crest of the con 
vexities D toward both the periphery of the 
5 roller and the openings B, so that the latter 
openings in each of the said plates A, when 
the latter are mutually fastened, are slightly 
outside the plane of the periphery of the same 
plate, and that the plates A, when in such con 
?o tact, mutually diverge from the point of said 
contact both toward the opening B and the 
periphery of said plates. This construction 
affords the advantage of forming the plates 
A substantially integral, and at the same time 
15 gives them a breadth of bearing on the axle E 
and a sufficient width of tread upon the track. 
Another advantage of my invention, as will 
be seen by referring to the cross-section there 
of in Fig. 2, is that each of the plates A serves 
2O as a brace for the other from the point of their 
mutual contact both toward the axle E and 
toward the periphery of said plates. As the 
strain, whether torsional or otherwise, is 
always between the axle E and the periphery 
25 of the roller, the importance of this last ad 
vantage can hardly be overestimated. 
A further advantage of my construction is 
that the periphery of the plates A stand in a 
mutually diverging relation, which renders 
3o them less liable to engage with the edge of or 
ride over the intervening flange or guide II. 
The axle E, instead of having a tapering pe 
riphery each way from its longitudinal cen 
35 
45 
55 
ter, might be formed with annular shoulders 
to abut against the inside of the opening B in 
each plate A; or peripheral threads might be 
formed centrally upon said axle and the plates 
A respectively screwed thereon from each end 
toward the center until they reach the point 
of mutual contact, as aforesaid. The mode 
of attaching the centers of the plates A to the 
axle E is not in itself so important as that of 
interconnecting said plates between their 
bearing centers and peripheries. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
lS 
1. The combination of the plates AA, pro 
vided, respectively, with concavities C and 
convexities D and the fastenings IF, whereby 
said plates form mutual braces from their 
point of contact outward and inward, substan 
tially as shown, and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination of the plates A, mutu 
ally attached at two or more points interme 
diate their bearing-centers and their periph 
eries, and the axle E, provided with periph 
eral enlargements between the bearing-sur 
faces of said plates on said axle, Substantially 
as shown, and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
NORMAN CIARIX. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN G. MIANAHAN, 
EDGAR G. BAUM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405302.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 405,302. 
 
W. C. CARTER, 
HAND OPERATED SWINGING GATE, 
Patented June 18, 1889. 
ozzee/s. 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WESLEY C. CARTER, OF GALVA, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-IIALF TO 
THOMAS W. PATTERSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
HAND - OPERATED SWING ING GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,802, dated June 18, 1889. 
Application filed February 19, 1889, Serial No, 800,473, (No model.) 
. 
To all Luhon, it nudy concern: 
Be it known that I, WESLEY C. CARTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Galva, 
in the county of Henry and State of Illinois, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Hand - Operated Swinging 
Gates; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
, O in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to hand - operated 
Swinging gates; and it has for its object to 
provide a gate which is capable of being un 
i5 latched and opened without any loss of power 
and motion between the operating crank-shaft 
and the gate pivot-shaft, which can be readily 
adjusted at a Suitable elevation above the Sun'- 
face of the ground to permit animals to pass 
2O beneath the same and to separate animals of 
- clifferent sizes, and at the same time is capa 
ble of being opened or closed from either side; 
to provide means for expeditiously taking up 
the slack in the operating chain-connections, 
25 and, finally, to improve the parts in minor de 
tails with a view of simplifying and cheapen 
ing the construction thereof and making the 
same more durable and efficient. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
3o sists of the peculiar construction and arrange 
ment of parts, as will be hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
35 a plan View of my improved gate. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation thereof, and Figs, 3 and 4 are 
detail views of parts of my improvements. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like 
numerals of reference denote corresponding 
4o parts in all the figures, 1 designates the hinge 
post or upright, to which are secured horizon 
talarms or bearings 2, in which is journaled a 
vertical pivot-shaft 3, on which a gate 4is hung. 
This gate is of any preferred or of the ordinary 
45 construction, and it is carried by hinge-loops 
5 6, which are rigidly secured thereto, and 
which are capable of a slight vertical rocking 
play or movement on the vertical pivot-shaft 
3, for the purpose of allowing the gate to be 
5o tilted bodily in a vertical plane, thus with 
claims. 
o 
drawing the latch 7 thereof from the keeper 
8 on the latch-post 9, which post is erected 
immediately opposite to and at a suitable dis 
tance from the hinge-post1. The hinge-loops 
56 are slightly elongated for the purpose of 55 
permitting the gate to tilt slightly, and the 
lower loop 6 is provided with a transverse 
aperture or slot 10, through which is passed 
a key or pin 11 for the purpose of holding the 
gate at any suitable elevation above the Sur- 6o 
face of the ground, said key or pin being fit 
ted in one of the series of transverse aper 
tures 12 formed in the pivot-shaft 3, by which 
the gate is carried. By making the pivot 
shaft 3 straight with apertures therein, and 65 
using the hinge-loops 56, the gate can be ad 
justed vertically on the pivot-shaft 3, and at 
the same time can swing or turn with the 
shaft, whetheritis raised or lowered, and when 
it is raised small animals-such as hogs-are 7o 
permitted to pass beneath the gate Without 
opening the latter, and animals of different 
sizes can be separated, while at the same time 
the gate can be opened from either side With 
out the necessity of lowering it to its normal 75. 
position, and is thus enabled to Swing over 
snow, and can be hung on a hillside without 
inconvenience. 
At suitable distances on opposite sides of 
the hinged posts I erect uprights or posts So 
13, each of which has two vertically-aligned 
bearings 14, in which are journaled vertical 
crank-shafts 15. The upper end of each crank 
Shaft 15 has a suitable handle 16 within con 
venient reach of a person on horseback or in 85 
a vehicle, while at the lower end of each 
crank-shaft is a horizontal grooved pulley 
17, around which passes a chain, rope, or 
other suitable flexible connection 18, to the 
ends of which are connected, by devices which 9o 
I will presently describe, horizontal connect 
ing-rods 1920. 
To the lower end of the vertical pivot 
shaft 3, which carries the swinging gate, are 
secured two pulleys (or one double pulley) 95 
21, to each of which is connected one of the 
vertical crank-shafts 15. Around each pull 
ley 21 passes a short section of chain or rope 
22, to the ends of which are connected the 
connecting-rods 19 20, and in order to pre- Ioo 
2 
405,302 
5 
o 
vent, the short sections of chain or hope IS 
and 22 from slipping around the pulley's 17 
and 21 when either one or other of the ver 
tical crank-shafts 15 is operated, and thus 
prevent any loss of power or motion, I con 
nect said chains or ropes to their respective 
pulleys by means of pins or bolts which pass 
through the chains and are secured in the 
pulleys. 
In order to keep the connecting-rods 1920 
and chains 18 and 22 under the proper ten 
sion, and to take up any slack therein, I have 
provided a swivel-connection 23 between each 
rod 19 or 20, and the chain 1S, said swivel 
connection consisting of an elongated eye 24, 
which is pivotally connected to one end of 
the rod and has a threaded cross-head 24, in 
which works a bolt 25, connected at one end 
to the chain 18. It is obvious that the eye 
24 can be turned or rotated to take up the 
slack in the chains 18 22 and maintain said 
chains and the connecting-rod between the 
Same under the propel' tension. 
It will be understood that, as I have pro 
Wided a vertical crank-shaft, on each side of 
the gate and connected each shaft with the 
Vertical pivot-shaft by the intermediate con 
nections herein before described, the gate can 
be opened from either side, and it can be 
hung at either side of the road, as is most 
convenient. 
To the upper end of the vertical pivot-shaft 
3 is fixed a horizontal arm 26, to the ends of 
which are connected chains or ropes 27, 
Which extend and are connected at a common 
point to an adjustable clamp 2S, which is 
secured to the upper bar or panel of the 
gate 4, which ropes or chains materially re 
lieve the hinge-loops of the weight of the 
gate and thereby aid in strengthening the 
gate. This clamp is made of a strap or 
plate which is bent around the upper bar or 
panel of the gate, and through the meet 
ing ends of the clamp passes a bolt which 
fits in one of a Series of notches or recesses 
28 formed in the bar or panel of the gate, or 
in a plate which is to be fixed to the gate. 
IBy lmoving or adjusting the clamp on the 
gate, bal', or panel either toward or from the 
Vertical pivot-shaft the tension of the chains 
or connections 27 can be increased, and thus 
maintain the connections under the proper 
tellsion, and as the securing-bolt ?its in the 
notches Ol' recesses 2S it is evident that the 
clamp is very securely held in place. When 
the vertical pivot-shaft is first turned by the 
Crank-shaft, one of the chains or connections 
27 l)etween the cross-head on said shaft, and 
the gate is drawn upon and tilts the gate 
slightly in a vertical plane before it begins 
to move laterally. This frees the latch car 
ried by the gate from engagement with the 
keeper, and the continued rotation of the 
crank and pivot shafts causes the gate to swing 
35 
45 
7o 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
I o5 
IO 
II 5 
in either direction with the pivot-shaft by 
which it is carried. 
The latch 7 preferably consists of a me 
tallic spring-plate, which is arranged in an 
inclined position on and secured at its lower 
end to the vertical stile 7' of the gate, and 
the upper end of this latch has an elongated 
eye which fits around said stile of the gate 
to prevent lateral displacement of the latch. 
The latch-post 9 and each upright 13 has a 
keeper S, which is adjustable vertically on 
the post in order that the latch may properly 
engage there with when the gate is in an ele 
wated position. This keeper is made of a 
plate of spring metal, which is bent at its 
middle to form a loop 29, and to provide the 
two wings 30, which are inclined, as shown, 
to adapt the keeper to yield or give to the 
latch when the gate is opened or closed, the 
latch being confined between said wings. In 
the loop 29 is fitted a vertical guide 31, which 
confines the keeper at any desired elevation 
between itself and the post by frictional con 
tact between the engaging faces, as is ob 
vious. 
The operation of my invention will be read 
ily understood from the foregoing descrip 
tion, taken in connection with the drawings. 
I am aware that slight changes in the form 
and proportion of parts can be made without 
departing from the spirit or sacrificing the 
advantages of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letter's Patent, is 
1. In a gate, the combination of a vertical 
pivot-shaft having the pulleys at its lower 
end and a rigid cross-head at its upper end, 
a gate provided with the elongated hinge 
loops, which fit loosely on said vertical pivot 
shaft to adapt the gate to have a limited tilt 
ing movement and to swing or turn with said 
shaft, connections 27, intermediate of said 
gate and opposite ends of said cross-head, 
the vertical crank-shafts, each having a pull 
ley, a chain passing around and connected 
to each pulley of the crank and pivot shafts, 
the connecting-rods, and a swivel connected 
to the rods and chains, all arranged and com: 
bined for service, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
2. The combination of a vertical pivot 
shaft carrying a gate which is capable of a 
limited tilting movement, a cross-head fixed 
to Said shaft, an adjustable sleeve fixed on 
One of the bars of said gate, and connections 
between said adjustable sleeve and the cross 
head, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WESLEY C. CARTER. 
Witnesses: 
v 
T. W. PATTERSON, 
WM. WILLIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405402.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 405,402, 
. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
L, EHRLICH, 
PAPER, CUTTER, 
Patented June 18, 1889. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
4zagza 
6 (2 titzar 
2%4. 2,242-21-6 
 
 
t 
 
 
 
Zee A722222/2 
f Z% 764.9/.264/2-Y 
/ 
26 
(No Model.) 
-- 
No. 405,402. 
L, EHRLICH, 
PAPER, CUTTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 18, 1889, 
 
777, ZY 
 
B -- EE EE 
Salk 
E. 
N2 
  
  
 
| 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z72-ezzzzzzzzri 
EA- 62426 
Zee Z277/26/2 
2-7%-712/2.-- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
44 %2c-14- 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEO EHRLICH, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO THE AMERICAN 
ROLL PAPER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PAPER-CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,402, dated June 18, 1889. 
Application filed June 30, 1888, Serial No. 278,608, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, LEO EHRLICH, of the 
city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Paper-Cutters, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
and in which 
Figure I is a front elevation of my im 
proved machine. Fig. II is a side view. Fig. 
III is a detail top view. Fig. IV is a front 
elevation showing a modified form. Fig. V. 
is an end view of the same, and Fig. VI is a 
detail top view. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
machines for holding and cutting wrapping 
paper; and my invention consists in features 
of novelty, hereinafter fully described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents a 
suitable base; 2, end pieces or standards; 3, a 
roller upon which the paper 4 is wound, and 
5 a cross-piece secured to the upper ends of 
the standards 2. 
6 represents spring-arms secured to the 
cross-piece 5, and to the lower ends of which 
the knife 7 is secured, as shown clearly in 
Fig. I, the knife being preferably secured to 
the spring-arms by means of a rod Or bar S, 
which is directly connected to the spring 
arms by riveting or otherwise, and to this rod 
or bar the knife 7 is secured by inturned ends 
9, the ends preferably passing through perfo 
rations in the bar or rod and riveted at 10, 
Fig. III. 
It will be seen that the knife 7 is situated 
a distance from the roll of paper and does 
not bear upon the roll, but the bar or rod 8 
does bear upon the roll, and gives the proper 
tension to prevent the too free movement of 
the roll. 
11 represents a rod or small wire bail, se 
cured, preferably, to the arms 6, as shown in 
Figs. I and II, and which extends from the 
arms in an outward direction to the ends of 
the roll, and then passes across in front of the 
roll, as shown in Fig. I. The end of the pa 
per is passed over this Wire, as shown clearly 
in Fig. II, and the wire holds the end of the 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
paper a Way from the roll, So as to form an 
easy finger-hold, as shown at 12, Fig. II. When 
a piece of paper is Wanted, the end 12 is taken 
hold of, and when the desired amount of pa 
per is pulled out it is severed by moving it 
upward against the knife, as shown in Fig. I 
and by dotted lines in Fig. II. 
While the bar or rod 8 gives a tension to 
the roll of paper, it does not afford a positive 
means of preventing the backward movement 
of the roll. To accomplish this I pivot an ec 
centric 13 (made, preferably, in the form of a 
disk) to one end of the knife 7, or to any other 
suitable support in proximity to the end of 
the roll of paper. I prefer securing it to one 
end of the knife, (this is shown clearly in 
Fig. II.) as it will in this way always bear 
against the outer portion of the roll and be 
automatically moved inward toward the cen 
ter of the roll as the paper is removed-that 
is, it moves in Ward in this direction as the 
paper is taken off. The large part of this 
eccentric is on the retreating side of the roll 
of paper, as ShoWn in Fig. I, so that as the 
roll of paper is moved in the direction indi 
cated by the arrows the cam will not inter 
fere with the turning of the roll, but will pre 
vent its turning in the other direction, or a 
backward direction. 
The cam may be provided with a rubber 
band 14, if desired, and may also be provided 
with a handle 15, by which it may be turned 
in the direction indicated by the small feath 
erless arrow in Fig. I, to allow the backward 
turning of the rollin case it should be desired 
to turn it backward. The cam will have a 
tendency, of course, to move the roll of paper 
endwise in a direction away from it. To pre 
vent this movement of the roll, I secure a 
bracket 16 to the rod 8 at the side of the ma 
chine away from the eccentric, (see Fig. III.) 
which will act to prevent the movement of 
the roll away from the eccentric 13. 
In Figs. IV to VI, inclusive, I have shown 
the cam 13 and bracket 16 applied to what is 
95 
known in the market as the Hopkins' pa- . 
per-cutter, the eccentric being journaled to 
one end of the knife 20 by a pin 21, and the 
bracket 16 being secured to the other end of 
the knife by a rivet 22. 
75 
Od 
405,402 
O 
forth. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a paper-cutter, the combination of a 
Suitable Support, a roll of paper, a knife lo 
cated a distance from the roll of paper, and a 
Wire bail located just beneath and adjacent 
to the knife for Supporting the end of the pa 
per, substantially as and for the purpose set 
2. In a paper-cutter, the combination of a 
Suitable Support, a roll of paper, a suitable 
knife, and an eccentric cam bearing against 
the end of the roll of paper to prevent its 
retrograde movement, Substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a paper-cutter, the combination of a 
suitable support, a roll of paper, a suitable 
knife, and a cam pivoted to a suitable sup 
port at One end of the roll of paper and bear 
ing against the roll of paper to prevent its 
i 
M 
retrograde movement, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a paper-cutter, the combination of a 
Suitable support, a roll of paper, a suitable 
knife, and a cam pivoted to a suitable sup 
port and provided with an elastic band and 
a handle and bearing against the roll of paper, 
Substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. In a paper-cutter, the combination of a 
Suitable Support, a roll of paper, a suitable 
knife, an eccentric located at and bearing 
against One end of the roll of paper, and a 
bracket located at the other end of the roll 
of paper, Substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
LEO EHRLICH. 
In presence of - 
GEO. H. KNIGHT, 
JOS. WAHLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405502.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. POINDEXTER, 
HAIR SINGER. 
No. 405,502, 
Patented June 18, 1889. 
64. A 
207 
t 
2 
202 
 
- 
1es (a 
(Zoe/7%%azo/2 
(%acy (e.g. Z26ey, 
i. PETERs. Photo-Lithographor, Washington, (), c. 
Zzzezza 
ofoan ZZ277 (exzey 
7 Noyessa 
46% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN E. POINDEXTER, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-THIRD 
TO JOSEPH E. SMITH AND GEORGE. M. RANDOLPH, OF SAME PLACE. 
HAR-SINGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,502, dated June 18, 1889. 
Application filed January 31, 1889, serial No. 298,24l, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whon it nucly conce77. 
Be it known that I, JOHN E. POINDEXTER, 
of the city of St. Louis, in the State of Mis 
souri, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Hair-Singers, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to an instrument for 
producing a sudden flash to singe and thus 
stop the tubular pores of fresh-cut hair to pre 
vent Wastage and Weakening of its roots; and 
the invention consists in features of novelty 
hereinafter fully described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
Figure I is an elevation of my singeing-in 
Strument. Fig. II is a vertical section taken 
on line II II, Fig. I, and shows the instrument 
in the position for using, and also shows the 
air-chamber, the pneumatic valve, air-tube 
that supplies the draft for the flash, and the 
elastic rubber bulb that controls the air-vent 
to the burner; and Fig. III is a vertical sec 
tion taken on line III III, Fig. II, and shows 
the air-port to the valve, the air-tube that 
supplies the burner, and the aperture through 
which the wick is passed. 
Referring to the drawings, represents the 
edestal base, in which and in the tubular ex 
tension 2 the tank is located that holds the 
alcohol 3. A transverse partition-wall 4 and 
longitudinal one 5 separate the alcohol-tank 
from the air-chamber 6, and the tank and air 
chamber together are inclosed in a tubular 
column 7, which has an air and Spirit tight 
connection with the pedestal. At the forward 
end of the longitudinal partition 5 a trans 
verse disk 8 closes in both the alcohol-tank 
and the air-chamber. 
9 represents a dome-cap, whose inner edge 
fits within the upper or forward end of the 
tubular column that projects beyond the 
transverse disk 8. Two pins 10, that project 
inwardly from opposite edges of the said ex 
tension of the tubular column, enter the an 
gle-slot 11 in the dome - cap when said cap 
is seated, and when the cap is slightly turned 
said pins enter the angle - extension of the 
slot, so that the pins and angle-slots form to 
gether tight bayonet-joints that safely hold 
the dome-cap to its seat. The dome-cap is 
surmounted by the elongated burner-tube 24, 
the flaring base of which is securely attached 
to or may be made integral with the dome 
cap from which it rises. 
12 represents a draft-tube, whose flaring 
curved mouth 13 is secured within the perfo 
ration 14 in the side of the tubular column, 
and whose outlet discharges on line with the 
outlet of the burner-tube. 
All parts of the structure above described 
are composed of brass or any other suitable 
material. 
15 represents the flat wick that passes 
through the slot 16 in the disk 8 into the alco 
hol-tank, and in front or above is curved 
around the draft-tube 12, as it (the wick) is 
elevated and comes in contact between the 
same and the burner-tube that surrounds it, 
the curved flaring base of which guides the 
wick in its ascent and conducts it around said 
tube, so that as it rises or projects from the 
burner-tube the part that carries the flame is 
in a circular or tubular form 17, within which 
the draft-tube discharges the air for the ef 
fecting of the flash. 
18 represents an open port in the dome-cap 
for the entrance of air into the initial air 
chamber 19 within the dome-cap. 
20 represents two corrugations that project 
outward from respectively near the base, or 
somewhat removed therefrom, and from near 
the top of the tubular column, and between 
said corrugations around said columnis seated 
the expanded hollow rubber bulb 21, the said 
corrugations holding the said bulb to its work 
ing position on the tubular column, between 
which and the expanded rubber bulb is an 
operative air-chamber 22, from which by press 
ure upon said bulb a draft of air is forced 
through the tube 12 to revivify the flame on 
the burner to effect a sudden flash. The said 
air-supply for this purpose enters in through 
the open port 18 into the initial air-chamber 
Within the dome-cap, and from that passes 
through the flutter-valve port 23 into the sec 
ondary air-chamber 6, from which it passes 
through the open port 25 into the third or op 
erative air-chamber 22. 
26 is the flutter-valve, that closes the port 
23 when by the pressure of the operator's 
95 
ICO 
O 
25 
35 
So 
405,502 
3O 
35. 
IO 
X- 
a 
- a 
M. 
hand on the rubber bulb there is effected a presses the rubber bulb and forces the air 
reactionary movement of the draft at said 
through the tube 12, which discharges at the 
port, and 27 is the Screw that attaches said 
burner, revivifies the blaze, and produges the 
flutter-valve to the transverse disk S. The 
required sudden flash. After the hair is cut 
flutter-valve is shown in full lines closed on 
and placed in a suitable condition to operate 
said port in Fig. II at the time of the press 
on, the operator holds the instrument in 
ure of said bulb and in broken lines in said 
about the position shown in Fig. II, with the 
figure in its inoperative position. When the 
lighted burner at the nozzle in a suitable po 
pressure having been removed from said bulb, 
sition to the hair on which it is to operate; 
the bulb expands to its normal position, the 
then by the pressure of the operator's hand, 
valve opens, and the current of air freely 
as described, on the rubber bulb, and the 
pours or is drawn by suction through the open 
consequent instantaneous flash that it pro 
ports into the succeeding air-chambers. 
duces, the tubulous terminals of the hair are 
28 are the screw-stoppers, that close the sup 
slightly singed, and thus contracted, SO as to 
ply-ports 29, through which the alcohol-tank 
hermetically seal the tubes and immediately 
is replenished. 
stay the Waste that would otherwise ensue. 
Now, if there is a supply of alcohol in the 
tank and the wick at the nozzle of the burner is 
lighted, (the blaze of which in its normal condi 
tionis but a faint glimmer,) then by pressure of 
the hand of the operator on the rubber bulb the 
current of air is forced backward and imme 
diately closes the flutter-valve of the port 23, 
so as to utilize a requisite portion of the vol 
ume of air that is stored in the operative air 
chamber within the bulb to project a current 
through the mouth 13 of the tube 12 and said 
tube 12to and through the nozzle of the burner, 
thereby effecting a quick revivification of the 
previously glimmering blaze, thus producing 
a sudden flash, which is as quickly withdrawn 
when the pressure of the operator's hand on 
the bulb is removed. 
Now I will describe the useful functions of 
the instrument. Hair is no exception to the 
rule that everything that lives and grows 
(whether animal or vegetable) is supplied 
with tubular and porous channels, through 
which the nutritious elements that support 
life and minister to its growth are supplied 
to the farthermost extremities of its being. 
Now, as each hair is a tube having the above 
named recuperating functions, which nature 
carefully guards (as she does all things well) 
by hermetically sealing the ends of said tubes, 
and whereas each time the hair of the head 
is cut its hermetically-sealed terminals are 
decapitated and each hair terminates in an 
open tube, which, by the exuding of its nu 
tritious Supplies, is too great a draw on the 
physical energies of the root, until in course 
of time nature again Steps in and again 
seals the tubulous pores through which the 
waste is incurred. In the meantine the loss 
of energy to the roots is very large, and men, 
the hair of whose heads is more frequently 
cut than is that of Women, are much more 
subject to baldness in consequence. This 
prelude appeal's necessary to a right under 
standing of the functions of my hair-singer. 
During the active part of the day in the bar 
ber-shop the lamp of the instrument may be 
continuously lighted, as there is but a glim 
mer of light at the burner, and therefore but 
a minimum of Waste, until the light is revivi 
fied by the forced draft as the operator 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a hair-singer, the combination of the 
tubular burner, the draft-tube that discharges 
at the nozzle of said burner, the wick that 
projects from between said tube and tubul 
lous burner, and the operative rubber bulb 
that enforces the discharge of air through 
the draft-tube to revivify the blaze at the 
burner and produce an instantaneous flash, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a hair-singer, the combination of the 
tubular column having corrugations, the 
transverse and longitudinal partitions, the 
transverse disk having a Wick-slot, the dome 
cap having tubulous burner, the draft-tube, 
and the rubber operative bulb, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a hair-singer, the combination of the 
tubular column, the transverse and longi 
tudinal partitions, and transverse disk 8 
within said column that, with the surround 
ing column, inclose and separate the alcohol 
tank and secondary air-chamber, the dome 
cap 9, that incloses the initial air-chamber, 
the bayonet-fastening that secures said dome 
cap to the tubular column, the corrugations 
20, that project from said column, the rubber 
operative bulb that is seated between said 
corrugations around the tubular column and 
incloses the operative air-chamber, between 
which and the secondary air-chamber is pro 
vided an open port 25, the burner-tube 24, 
the draft-tube with its flaring mouth, through 
which the air is discharged from the operative 
air-chamber to the nozzle of the burner to 
revivify the blaze, the dome-cap being pro 
vided with an open supply air-port, the 
transverse disk S being provided with a flut-. 
ter-valve port that communicates between 
the initial and the secondary air-chambers, 
the flutter-valve that operates to open and 
close said port, the feed-ports through which 
the tank is replenished, and the screw-stop 
pers that close said ports, Substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
BENJIN. A. KNIGHT, 
SAML. KNIGHT. 
JOHN E. POINDEXTER, 
In presence of - 
7 O 
75 
8. 
90 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405603.txt	(No Model.) 
L. F. R OSS, 
BED STEAD BRACE, 
No. 405,603. 
Patented June 18, 1889. 
a QSS 
S 
Y 
sN w2a s 2.N es are: 
98). Evesses 
///u. 
as st 
al 
31-Uovitov 
3. lui 3 
&lktov ve-48. 
7, ea. 7a al-er 7Atoss 
(26-6-6 
 
NPETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEANDER FOUNTAIN ROSS, OF SEARCY, ARKANSAS. 
BED STEAD - BRACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,603, dated June 18, 1889. 
Application filed March 9, 1889, 
Serial No, 302,681 (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, LEANDER FOUNTAIN 
ROSS, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Searcy, in the county of White and State 
of Arkansas, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Bedstead-Braces, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
bedstead-braces; and it consists in a certain 
novel construction and combination of parts, 
whereby the corner-posts are drawn inward 
toward the center of the frame to prevent the 
separation of the side and end rails there 
from. 
The invention is more fully described here 
inafter in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, and specifically pointed out in the 
appended claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
a bedstead provided with a brace embodying 
the invention, Fig. 2 is a detail view of the 
tension device. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, A des 
ignates the frame of the bedstead, which con 
sists of the posts B, the side rails C C, and the 
ends or heads D D, the extremities of which 
are attached to the posts. The posts are pro 
vided on their inner sides with the inward ex 
tending eyes E, and a continuous tightening 
wire F extends through the said eyes and is 
connected at its free ends to opposite ends of 
a plate G, having a central perforation g. 
This tightening-wire consists of the side por 
tions g'g', which are drawn inward at their 
centers and connected by the cross-wire H 
and the end portions gig, the centers of 
which are drawn inward and connected by 
the longitudinal tension-wire K. This ten 
sion-wire is connected directly to the center 
of the end portion g, at the head of the bed 
stead; but is attached at the other end to the 
threaded eyebolt L, which extends loosely 
through the perforation g in the center of the 
plate G and is engaged on the opposite side 
thereof by the thumb-nut M. This tension 
device is preferred because of its simplicity, 
and being arranged close to the foot-rail of 
the bedstead it may be tightened by reach 
ing under the latter or by raising the end of 
the mattress, thus obviating the necessity of 
removing the latter or otherwise disturbing 
the bed. 
When the thumb-screw is tightened, the 
end portions of the continuous tightening 
wire are drawn inward toward the center of 
the bedstead-frame, thereby drawing the wire 
slightly through the eyes E E and tightening 
the side portions g g thereof. Thus the 
strain on each post is in two directions, 
caused by the adjacent portions of the side 
and end portions extending at an angle to 
each other, and the resultant of these two 
forces acting in different directions lies mid 
way between them, as indicated by the dotted 
lines in Fig. 1, and therefore the actual strain 
on the post is toward the center of the frame. 
I am aware that tightening devices and 
braces have heretofore been used in connec 
tion with bedsteads; but they have either ne 
cessitated the employment of a number of 
tightening-wires or a plurality of fastening 
devices attached to the rails as well as to the 
legs of the bed or of rings or other connec 
tions to render them complete, or else their 
tensions have been located beneath the cen 
ter of the bed, where easy access could not 
be had thereto, or at both ends thereof, where 
the bed must be moved and two tensions op 
erated instead of one to tighten the frame. 
The improved brace comprises but a single 
side wire, centrally crossed wires, and a ten 
sion, and is therefore not only extremely sim 
ple and light, but may be 1readily attached to 
any bed now on the market by merely insert 
ing the eyes E in the corner-posts. The side 
wire leading through these eyes connects all 
four posts and draws them inward toward the 
center of the frame, thereby preventing dis 
placement in either direction, and all the 
wires are tightened by adjusting the single 
tension device, which is located near the foot 
of the bed, within easy reach of the operator. 
I also provide intermediate guide-eyes NN 
on the side rails, through which the inclined 
side portions of the tightening-wire pass, 
thereby preventing sagging and enabling 
them to bear the Superincumbent weight; but 
these eyes N may be entirely dispensed with, 
if desired, without detracting from the utility 
or affecting the operation of my device. 
Having thus described the invention, I 
claim 
As a new article of manufacture, the bed 
stead-tightener herein described, the same 
O 
25 
O 
.5 
95 
IOC) 
405,603 
comprising four eyes E, adapted to be screwed 
into the inner corners of the corner-posts of 
the bedstead, a single tightening-wire F, rove 
through said eyes, an apertured plate G, con 
nected at its ends to the ends of said wire and 
standing adjacent to and parallel with the 
foot-board D, a cross-wire H, connecting the 
centers of the side portions g' of said wire, a 
longitudinal wire K, connected at one end to 
the center of the head portion g of said wire, 
a threaded eyebolt L, connected to the other 
end of said longitudinal wire, its body pass 
ing through the aperture in said plate, and a 
thumb-nut M, screwed on the outer end of 
said eyebolt, the whole adapted for use and 15 
operation substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
LEANDER FOUNTAIN ROSS, 
Witnesses: 
N. H. WEST, 
W. G. CALDWELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405703.txt	J. H.G.GINSON, 
CAR TRUCK. BOLSTER, 
Patented June 25, 1889, 
(No Model.) 
No. 405,703, 
E 
e EE 
 
 
 
 
 
2 2 5 s 
3.a 
t 
W. Af. 
(az7/6s Z24%g. 
77vezalezzo rail 
2%z 7%71-122 
2- 4.4%~% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HIGGINSON, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
CART RUCK B O STER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,703, dated June 25, 1889. 
Application filed February 6, 1888, Renewed May 10, 1889, Serial No. 310,358, (No model) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it inlay concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN HIGGINSON, of 
St. Louis, Missouri, have made a new and use 
ful Improvement in Car-Truck Bolsters, of 
Which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The improvement relates to bolsters for 
rigid trucks for freight-cars, and, more par 
ticularly stated, to what are termed the top 
bolsters. In the construction of such bol 
sters the practice has generally been to com 
pose the bolster mainly of a wooden beam, 
and to Strengthen it by means of truss-rods 
Whose ends respectively bear against shoul 
ders upon the beam at points within those at 
which the bolster bears upon its supports. 
Another method, but not so common as that 
alluded to, is to make the bolster a com 
posite structure-namely, a combination of 
straight Wooden bars and straight metallic 
plates alternately arranged and bolted to 
gether. As thus made, the bolster is liable 
to Sag, and if a truss-rod is used, as described, 
it is liable to be loosened by reason of the 
shrinkage of the wooden portion of the bol 
Ster. This difficulty is obviated, or at least 
diminished, by means of the improvement un 
der consideration, which consists substantially 
as follows: of a combination of arched metal 
lic bars and metallic tension-rods, forming, in 
effect, a metallic truss-beam, whose members, 
...Wherever they bear upon each other, are metal 
against metal. Wood is used, but substan 
tially as a filling between and at the side of 
the arched bars, thereby serving to stiffen the 
arched bars laterally and to give body to the 
Structure. An additional feature of the im 
provement is, making the truss-rods to bear 
against the arched bars at points outside the 
Vertical bearings of the bolster. 
The most desirable form of the improved 
bolster is shown in the annexed drawings, 
making part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the bolster in 
position; Fig. 2, a plan of the bolster; Fig. 3, 
a view in perspective, showing detached in 
part from each other the arched bars and the 
Wooden bars; Fig. 4, a bottom view of the 
bolster, and Fig. 5 a vertical cross-section on 
the line 55 of Fig. 2. 
- The same letters of reference denote the 
Same parts. 
A. A represent the arched bars. They ex 
tend throughout the length of the construc 
tion to come at least to the ends of the Wooden 
bars B B' B, and the truss-rod C is connected 
with them by means of the truss-rod plate D, 
which extends laterally to bear upon the ends 
of both of the arched bars, and also to lap 
upon the outer wooden bars B. B, substan 
tially as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 4. The 
arched bars at the central portion of the bol 
ster rise to the top of the wooden bars, so that 
the center plate E can bear directly upon the 
arched bars. The center plate laps laterally 
upon the wooden bars B B, and is held in 
place by means of the bolts e. The bolster 
truss-seat F serves also as a post at the cen 
ter of the truss to transmit the strain imposed 
upon the arched bars downward to the truss 
rod. While the wooden portion of the struct 
ure is of use in strengthening the bolster 
against vertical strains, the weight imposed 
upon the center plate E is mainly sustained 
by the metallic truss described. The arched 
bars and the wooden bars are united laterally 
by means of the bolts G. H. The bolts H also 
serve to attach the column-guides I to the bol 
ster. As the truss extends to the ends of the 
bolster, the vertical bearings of the bolster, 
which are in line with the column-guides, 
come within the ends of the truss. 
claim 
1. A car-truck top bolster consisting of the 
arched metallic bars, the metallic tension-rod, 
the wooden bars, the center plate, and the bol 
ster truss-seat, combined substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. A car-truck top bolster having embodied 
within it an arched metallic truss, the center 
plate of the bolster resting directly upon the 
truss, substantially as described. 
3. A car-truck top bolster having embodied 
within it an arched metallic truss, the center 
plate of the bolster resting directly upon the 
truss, and the truss extending beyond the ver 
tical bearings of the bolster, substantially as 
described. 
Witness my hand. 
JNO. HIGGINSON. 
Witnesses: 
C. D. MOODY, 
CHAS. H. GLEASON. 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405804.txt	(No Model.) 
C, RICHARD, 
STEAM TRAP, 
No. 405,804, 
Patented June 25, 1889. 
  
 
5 
SNSSsal r-3 
 
s: 
 
  
- - - 
 
 
  
M 
V 
(s 
  
  
  
 
 
N 
N E. A 
 
 
 
 
A. 
WITNESSES: 
/2 " 
INVENTOR: 
(2462es 
. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES RICHARD, 
OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
STEAM-TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,804, dated June 25, 1889. 
Application filed November 26, 1888, Serial No. 291,846, (No model.) Patented in France February 13, 1885, No. 167,014; in 
England September 8, 1885, No. 10,630, and February 17, 1887, No. 2,500, and in Belgium Januaryll, 1886, No. 71,571. 
To all u?ion, it navy concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES RICHARD, a 
citizen of the French Republic, and a resident 
of Paris, in the Republic of France, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Steam-Traps, (for which I have obtained 
Letters Patent as follows: in France, No. 
167,014, dated February 13, 1885; in England, 
No. 10,630, dated September 8, 1885, and No. 
2,500, dated February 17, 1887, and in Bel 
gium, No. 71,571, dated January 11, 1886;) and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same. 
The invention has for its object a steam 
trap for drawing off the water carried along 
by the steam, or which might have been 
formed by condensation in the pipe. This 
trap is self-acting and characterized by the 
formation of successive discharges, allowing 
the gradual reduction of the pressure of the 
Steam and the Water, so as to make it finally 
equal to the atmospheric pressure. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 shows a 
Vertical section of a self-acting steam-trap of 
this description, and Fig. 2 is a similar view 
of a modified construction of trap also em 
bodying my invention. 
Misacasing of a conical shape, communicat 
ing at its upper end, by means of the admis 
Sion-pipe A, with the steam-pipe from which 
the water is to be drawn off. In this conical 
casing Ma disk C is located, made of a mate 
rial more extensible by heat than that of the 
casing M and of the same degree of conicity, 
and provided with grooves b and projections 
c, constituting in effect a series of connected 
plates or disks producing discharges of the 
Water and the steam entered in the trap above 
the disk Ct. 
It will be understood that the 
disk CL being not entirely joined with the in 
side of the casing M, the pressure of the steam 
and the water while passing from the space 
above the disk to the first groove, from the 
first groove to the Second, from the second to 
the third, or to the chamber under the disk, 
Will decrease in such a way as to become zero, 
Or equal to the atmospheric pressure. Conse 
quently the Water will gradually and regularly 
flow from the upper chamber above the disk 
to the lower chamber below the disk and then 
be discharged by the pipe B'. 
If the water is entirely drawn off, the disk 
a is of course brought into contact with the 
steam, and being made of a more extensible 
material than the casing M will close tightly 
against this casing and prevent the escape of 
the steam. 
The apparatus should be regulated once and 
for all, so that no steam may be allowed to es 
cape through the space between the disk and 
the casing. This regulation is made by means 
of the screw-rode, made preferably of iron or 
This rod is provided at its upper end 
bronze. 
with a head inclosed against the under side 
of the disk Ci in such a manner that it can be 
freely turned. A double screw dallows a very 
accurate adjustment of the diska. For cleans 
ing the apparatus it is sufficient to raise the 
disk, and after the cleansing is done to lower 
it back into its original Working position. 
Fig.2 shows a vertical section of an auto 
matic steam-trap of the same system, wherein 
the grooves b and the projection c are devel 
oped to such an extent as to form a series of 
plates or disks a mutually separated and re 
enforced so as to prevent Warping. In this 
arrangement the taper of the disks and of the 
casing is made in the opposite direction, So 
that for cleaning the apparatus the disks are 
lowered, instead of being raised. The steam 
enters through the opening A, passing first 
into a chamber B, in which it expands, and 
from there it acts upon the disks or plates C.", 
which, as heretofore, produce a series of dis 
charges, allowing the water to flow off, while 
at the same time the escape of the steam is 
prevented. These disks or plates a' are con 
nected by a rod T, and in the same manner 
moved by a screw e. 
The apparatus having been regulated once 
is rapidly brought back into Working position 
by means of a combination of double screws 
de, which enables me, when the screw-bush 
ing d has been put in proper place, to obtain 
at once the exact position of the disks a' by 
screwing up the spindle e until its collar h. 
bears against the bush d. 
The rod T, connecting the disk or disks, may 
have any suitable shape, and may be con 
nected or not with the lower stem and may 
be moved in any suitable manner. 
The chamber B, which I have mentioned in 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
y 
405,804 
O 
. 
connection with the arrangement of the appa 
ratus shown in Fig. 2, can, of course, also be 
applied with the arrangement as shown in 
Fig. 1. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is- 
1. In a self-acting steam-trap, the combina 
tion, With a conical or tapered casing, of a 
Series of connected plates or disks situated at 
different points in said casing, of correspond 
ingly - different diameters, and adapted to 
form, in conjunction with the casing, succes 
sive discharge-openings for the steam, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a self-acting steam-trap, the combina 
tion, with a conical or tapered casing, of a 
Series of connected plates or disks of a mate 
rial more extensible by heat than is the mate 
rial of the casing, situated at different points 
in said casing, of correspondingly-different 
diameters, and adapted to form, in conjunction 
with the casing, successive discharge-open 
ings for the steam, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a Self-acting steam-trap, the combina 
25 
35 
tion, with a conical or tapered casing, of a 
series of connected plates or disks situated at 
different points in said casing, of correspond 
ingly - different diameters, and adapted to 
form, in conjunction with the casing, succes 
sive discharge-openings for the steam, and a 
chamber in which the steam expands before 
acting upon said disks, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. The combination, with the tapered cas 
ing, of the series of connected disks or plates 
having the edges c adapted to fit the casing 
and form successive discharge-openings for 
the steam, as described, bushing d, threaded 
externally and internally, and the threaded 
stem e, connected with the disks and engag 
ing the bushing, substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES RICHARD. 
Witnesses: 
JULES FAYOLLEY, 
AUG. WINCK. 
 
 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US405906.txt	i (No Model.) 
No, 405,906, 
 
H. PIEPER Fils. 
ELECTRICARC LAMP. 
Patented June 25, l'889. 
No.zzzzzzzzz 
No.zzzzZzZzZzzzzzzzzzzzzz 
S? 
gn erre 
Z:2: 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washingtori.D.C. 
2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
S 
HENRI PIEPER, FILS, OF LIEGE, BELGIUM. 
ELECTRCARC LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 405,906, dated June 25, 1889. 
Application filed February 4, 1889, Serial No. 298,627, (No model.) Patented in Belgium February 5, 1888, No, 80,503. 
55 
75 
o all, lvhom it may concerti: 
Beit known that I, HENRI PIEPER, Fils, a 
subject of the King of Belgium, residing at 
Liege, Kingdom of Belgium, have invented 
neW and useful Improvements in Electric 
Arc Lamps, (for which I have obtained Let 
ter's Patenti in Belgium, No. 80,503, dated 
February 5, 1888,) whereof the following is a 
Specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
the regulation of the length of the arc in 
electric-arc lamps by means of the difference 
of Speed of two motors, obtained through the 
Variations of the current. For this purpose 
the two motors are so connected to the car 
bons that the one is adapted to increase, the 
Other to decrease, the distance between the 
latter, and one of them or both are arranged 
tO be in their operation dependent on the 
electric current. 
Figures 1 and 2 of the annexed drawings 
are diagralms showing the principle on which 
the mechanism of the lamp is based. Fig. 3 
is a sectional fronti elevation of a lamp car 
ried out according to my invention. Fig. 4 
is a side view of the upper portion of the 
lamp, and Fig. 5 a top view of the same. 
In Fig. 1 C. and b are two pulleys or 
Spl'Ocket-Wheels, forming each a part of one 
of the aforesaid motors and rotatingboth in 
the Same direction, as shown by the arrows 1 
and 2. g is the upper carbon attached to a 
pulley c, and g' the lower carbon carried by 
a bar to the ends whereof are pivoted the 
pulleys dand f. Around the said pulleys a. 
b, c, d, and f is passed a chain or cord e, 
NoW, if the said pulleys C, b are rotated at 
equal peripherical speed, they will cause the 
chain or cord e to travel around the pulleys c 
dfWithout altering the position of the car 
bons. This is the state of the mechanism 
When the arcis of normallength. If the pul 
leyb is moved faster than the pulley d, it 
Will take up and pay out a greaterlength of 
chain or cord than the latter, in consequence 
Whereof the carbon g is lowered and the car 
bong raised, so that the arc becomesshorter. 
On the other hand, if pulley a is moved faster 
than b, the arc will become longer. 
Fig. 2 shows a modification of the arrange 
ment, Which consists in supporting the car 
bon gby a single pulley d, and in placing 
2 5 
45 
the pulleys a b c d one above the other, the 
chain or cord being passed around the same, 
as shown by the figure. 
In the lamp shown by Figs. 3, 4, and 5, the 
aforesaid motors are controlled in their Oper 
ation byan armature acted upon bytWo elec 
tro-magnets, which are connected, respect 
ively, to the main circuit and to a shunt-cir 
cuit branched off therefrom. The motorS 
consist in the two wheel-works C and C'. 
The work Cis driven through the medium of 
the chain e by the holder Pof the upper car 
bon g, the said holderbeing made sufficiently 
heavy, and the work C' by means of a Spring 
R. HI' is an electro-magnet having a coil of 
thick wire connected to the main circuit of 
the lamp, and Han electro-magnetWith a coil 
of thin wire placed in the shunt-circuit, 
Above the cores of the two electro-magnets 
is arranged an armature. E, carried by tWo 
springs Sand S, which allow the armature to 
move a small distance to the right or the left, 
according as it is attracted more by the One 
or by the other electro-magnet. To the said 
armature are attached two catches Nand N', 
adapted to engage with the respective fly-pin 
ions IF and F' of the two wheel-works C and 
C', and so adjusted that when there is no 
current passing through the lamp the catch 
Nis free from the fly-pinion F, while the 
catch N'is in engagement with the fly-pinion 
E'. Under these conditions the wheel-work 
C', being prevented from rotating, is at rest, 
whereas, if there is any space between the 
carbons, the holder P, while actuating the 
wheel-work C, descends, together with the up 
per carbon, and raises the holder Q, carrying 
the lower carbon, until both carbons touch 
each other. Thus, when the lamp is out of 
operation, there is always contact between 
the carbons, and the circuit is closed at this 
point. If the lamp, being in this state, is 
Switched into connection with the conduct 
ing-wire, the current Will pass entirelythrough 
the coil of the electro-magnet H''. The arma 
ture E will consequently be drawn toward 
the said electro-magneto-that is, relatively to 
Fig. 4-to the right, so that the catch N en 
gages with the fly-pinion F, While the catch 
N' is withdrawn from the fly-pinion F'. This 
causes the wheel-work C to be locked, while 
the wheel-work C', set free to operate, isput 
95 
CO 
405,906 
VWhenever the carbons are removed, the 
vvheel-vvork C' las to be wound up. 
I claim as my invention-- 
In an electric lamp, the combination of the 
carbon-holders Pand (Q, pulleys pivoted to 
the said holders, the motor (, having the pul 
ley a and fly-pinion F, the motor C', having 
the pulleyb and fly-pinion F', spring R, chain 
e, a shunt-circuit branched off from the main 
circuit, the electro-magnets II and II, the 
armature E, having the catches Nand N', and 
springs SS, carrying the armature, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimonywhereofI have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
(SSCS. 
HENRI PIE PER, FILs. 
VViti esses: 
WM. S. PRESTON, 
J. GROSS. 
I C) 
in motion by the spring R, so that it separates 
the carbons from each other, and thus brings 
about the formation of the arc. VVhen tle 
arc has attainedits normallength, the inten 
sity of the current diminishes in the electro 
magnet l' and augments in the electro-mag 
net H, in consequence Whereof the armature 
E is drawn to the left untilit has assumeda 
mean position, in which the catches Nand 
N' lock both wheel-works. As soon as the 
arc exceeds its normal length the electro 
magnet II, receiving a larger portion of the 
current, draws the armature farther toward 
it, and thereby causes the catch N to release 
the wheel-work C, while the catch N' remains 
in engagement with the work C'. The holder 
P then operates to reduce the distance of the 
carbons from each other vintil the arc has 
been restored to its normal length. At this 
moment both Wheel-works are stopped again. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406006.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 406,006, 
R. SOLAN 0. 
AUTOMATIC AIR BRAKE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 25, 1889. 
WITNESSES: 
/s/AY24 
- 
N 
e2 -a- 
ATTORNEY 
 
(No Model.) 
R. SOLAN 0. 
AUTOMATIC AIR BRAKE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 406,006, 
Patented June 25, 1889. 
A. 
s 
T-3- E. EN 
--SS 
esta- 
Yet22-2, G:S sssS 
-- SS 
9 
2. ?o 
Ov 
707 ARAny pat 
Cresserey 
N 
w 
A. 
f : 
l 
s 
- 
- - 
- 
His 
O) 
Sy 
t 
sh ... & 
? 
70 CYAva 
(release Side) 
o 
S. 
*S, 
----- 
-----e. 
y - "...at 
2. - 
SN 
S 
N 
72 
:3 
J 
7 
---m---- 
s:- 
- 
{R}, 
r 
- 
- 
- 
axle 
a. 
O Aase a wo A 
OD 
a 
J 
of aviaap 
(Arocacy tsiae) 
5-6 
 
-- 
WITNESSES: 
1A924 
AT TORNEY 
N. PeFERS. Pata-Lithographer wash-ris. 
. 
h 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RENALDO SOLANO, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS 
TO JOHN W. HOWARD AND TDAVID R. MORSE, OF SAME PLACE. 
-- 
AUTOMATIC A. R. BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,006, dated June 25, 1889. 
Application filed December 6, 1887, Serial No, 257,ll 2, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, it'? On it 1 (it? conce/7. 
Be it known that I, RENALDO SOLANO, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Brooklyn, county of Kings, and State 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Automatic Air 
Brakes, of which the following is a specifica 
tion that will enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to under 
Io stand and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan showing diagrammati 
cally the general Organization of an appara 
tus embodying my invention applicable to 
15 the cars and locomotive of a train; Fig. 2, an 
enlarged sectional view of the automatic 
brake-valves; and Figs. 3 and 4 detail views, 
showing said valves at mid-stroke. 
This invention relates to the class of fluid 
2o brake apparatus in which stored pressure is 
rendered active upon the braking appliances 
automatically by the reduction of pressure in 
the train-pipe; and the said invention com 
prises a system of automatic mechanism for 
25 controlling the brake-cylinder valves subor 
dinate to said reduction of train-pipe press 
ure, and also subordinate to an independent 
system of vacuum or direct exhaust below the 
atmospheric pressure in separate train-pipes, 
3o the method of practicing the invention being 
claimed in a patent granted to me January 
24, 18SS, No. 37 (3,970. 
By the present invention the control of the 
engineer is extended to a variable degree of 
35 brake application predetermined by noting 
the reduction of pressure indicated by the 
train-pipe gage, the produced effect corre 
sponding to that described in my application 
for a patent filed July 5, 1SS7, Serial No. 
4o 243,317. The actuating mechanism for the 
brake-cylinder valves in the present instance 
is balanced between the opposing pressures 
namely, the stored pressure and the train 
pipe pressure-so that the reduction of either 
45 shall actuate the said valves and that a given 
reduction of train-pipe pressure may be eln 
ployed to predetermine the extent of brake 
strokeby limiting both the period of cylinder 
exhaust and the period of braking-pressure 
5o application simultaneously on opposite sides 
of the brake-piston. In the employment of 
the vacuum or direct-exhaust system in con 
junction here with, the feature of controlling 
the extent of brake-stroke by the unbalanc 
ing of opposing pressure to a (legree given at 
will is dispensed with, this vacuum system 
being combined with the pressure-reduction 
system for the purpose of affording an addi 
tional and independent means of controlling 
the brakes. 
In Fig. 1, A is the pressure train-pipe re 
ceiving its charge from the main reservoir B 
and air-compressor C, under control of the 
engineer's operating-valve D, located usually 
upon the locomotive, the escape-pipe E afford 
ing alternate means of discharging pressure 
from said train-pipe A when the operating 
valve D is moved for that purpose. 
F is the vacuum train-pipe, from which the 
atmospheric pressure normally contained 
therein is withdrawn by means of the ejector 
G, the latter being of any well-known con 
struction. The said train-pipes are provided 
at their junctions between the cars with the 
usual flexible pipe-couplings II, and are also 
provided at these points with cocks I, those 
rearmost of the train being kept closed. 
J J are the auxiliary or storage reservoirs 
provided to each brake apparatus, located 
beneath the several cars, and K the brake 
cylinders, the latter being of ordinary double 
acting construction, as shown by the sec 
tioned cylinder and connected to the brake 
levers, so as to apply the brake when the pis 
tons move in the direction indicated by arrows. 
Referring to Fig. 2, the several pipes (t (t' 
ji' and the pipe f correspond to those sim 
larly designated in Fig. 1, and the connections 
of the same will therefore be understood. 
By the arrangement of valve-ports shown 
the train-pipe pressure (of chamber (t) and 
the storage-reservoir pressure (of chamber 
j) are alternately connective to the corre 
sponding sides of the brake-cylinder-namely, 
the release side (tand the braking side j', re 
spectively--the common exhaust-port li re 
lieving the disconnected side in each instance 
lby communication to the atmosphere. 
The valves to and c are cylindrical and of 
sufficient length to give the required area of 
ports, and having a small diameter oscillate 
by the shifting movement of the piston (l or 
y 
: 
95 
TOc 
406,006 
diaphragm e and valve-stem g with minimum 
friction. 
The check-valve i is provided to prevent 
back pressure from the cylinder-chamber a 
from filling the train-pipe a when pressure 
is reduced in the latter and during the shift 
ing movement of the valve b. 
The brake-cylinder valves are here shown 
in the position whereby brake-release is ef 
fected and the storage-pressure recharged, 
the opposite or braking position being indi 
cated by the dotted lines, the corresponding 
movements of the fluid-currents being indi 
cated by the full lines and dotted arrows, re 
spectively. The normal position of the brake 
cylinder valves is that of mid-stroke, which 
is assumed after the equalization of pressures 
upon the valve-piston d, which event is inci 
dent to the termination of a predetermined 
braking-stroke, or to the completion of the 
storage-reservoir's charging operation, the 
action of a spring L, hereinafter described, re 
turning the piston d in the latter instance. 
The valve-piston d fits the cylinder air 
tight, separating the train-pipe chamber a 
from the reservoir-chamber i, excepting at 
the position of downstroke, at which time the 
enlarged portion of the cylinder at l and pis 
ton-passages in opposite the packing in permit 
the pressure restoration. The packings in O 
are designed to act as cushions to terminate 
the valve-piston stroke. 
The diaphragm e is separated from the 
chamber a by the packing r, provided to the 
The chamber p beneath said 
diaphragm is open to atmospheric pressure 
through perforations g. The diaphragm is 
given an effective area sufficient, when actu 
ated by the exhauster G, to move and retain 
the valves b c at braking position, overcom 
ing the preponderance of the charging-press 
ure (the same remaining constant) above the 
stored pressure when the latter is reduced un 
der the piston d by active expansion. 
The retarding-spring Linsures against pas 
Sage of the downward valve-stroke beyond 
mid-position during the return movement of 
the piston d incident to the automatic limita 
tion of brake-stroke. The washer s of the 
spring L, slides loosely on the valve-stem g 
and abuts against the block n, except when 
disengaged therewith by the retention of its 
shoulder against the adjustable bushing t, 
through which its sleeve part moves. It is to 
be understood, however, that the spring L is 
not an essential feature of the apparatus, the 
return movement aforesaid of the valve-pis 
ton d being otherwise arrested at mid-stroke 
by the cessation of storage-pressure reduction 
through the valve c at the moment of cut-off. 
The operation of the invention is as follows: 
The train-pipe A, pipe C, valve-chamber a, cyl 
inder-pipe a', and release side a of the brake 
cylinder are charged to the air or other fluid 
Working pressure of the reservoir B, through 
the engineer's valve D, the parts assuming the 
position shown by Fig. 2 until the reservoir J 
is charged, and subsequently the position of 
mid-stroke. To set the brakes with full appli 
cation, the pressure is released from the train 
pipe A by the engineer's valve, the valve-pis 
ton d automatically shifted to the position d' 
and there retained by the reservoir-pressure, 
permitting the latter to enter through the 
valve c to the praking sidej of the brake-cyl 
inder, the opposite chamber a thereof dis 
charging its pressure to the atmosphere 
through valve b. To set the brakes with a 
limited application, the train-pipe (A) press 
ure is reduced to a degree known to corre 
spond with the reduction of the storage-press 
ure by expansion when the brake-piston has 
reached the desired intermediate point of 
stroke. The valve-piston d is thereby auto 
matically shifted to the position d' and there 
retained until the equalization takes place, 
when the continued reduction. On the reser 
voir side i causes the return movement of 
said valve-piston sufficient to close all port 
communication and lock the brake-piston be 
tween the confined pressures within the cyl 
inder - chambers. The brake release is ef 
fected in either of the aforesaid instances by 
the restoration of train-pipe pressure from 
the main reservoir B. The brakes are also 
fully set when the vacuum train-pipe F is 
subjected to the action of the exhauster G, 
operating the diaphragme and valves bc, as 
hereinbefore described, the release of the same 
being effected by subsequently opening the 
air-charging valve v. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In the automatic fluid-brake apparatus 
herein described, the combination of the dou 
ble-acting brake cylinder and piston, a valve 
piston, or its equivalent, permanently ex 
posed to the train-pipe, and auxiliary storage 
reservoir pressures connected with oscillat 
ing valves which turn through different de 
grees of a circle by means of the variations 
of pressure induced on opposite sides of said 
valve-piston, a retarding-spring to limit the 
return movement of said valve-piston, and a 
check-valve interposed between the charging 
passage of the oscillating valve and brake 
cylinder port, whereby a predominating train 
pipe pressure will actuate the valve-piston to 
simultaneously admit the pressure to the re 
lease side and exhaust the pressure from the 
braking side of said brake-cylinder, and a 
predominating auxiliary storage - reservoir 
pressure will actuate said valve-piston to si 
multaneously admit pressure to the braking 
side and exhaust the pressure at the release 
side of said cylinder, and whereby said press 
ure, when balanced on the valve-piston in 
conjunction with said retarding-spring, will 
retain and hold the same and sever all the 
ports, as and for the purpose specified. 
2. In an automatic brake system, the com 
- 
(5 
25 
45 
SO 
55 
35 valve-stem g. 
75 
95 
IOC) 
I o5 
TC) 
I 25 
 
 
 
 
406,006. 
3. 
bination of an Oscillating Valve, substantially 
as described, for controlling the charging and 
exhaust cylinder passages, and with a recip 
rocating piston or its equivalent connected to 
impart a rocking movement to said valve 
through different degrees of a circle by means 
of the variations of pressure induced on oppo 
site sides of said piston or its equivalent, as 
specified. 
RENALDO SOLANO. 
Witnesses: 
C. W. FORBEs, 
S. P. WAN CAMPEN, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406106.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 406,106, 
 
B. LYON. 
BELT. FASTENER 
Patented July 2, 1889. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN LYON, OF BRIDGEPORT, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO 
GEORGE S. SMITH, OF NORWICH, CONNECTICUT. 
BELT-FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,106, dated July 2, 1889. 
Application filed Decemberl 9, 1888, Serial No. 294,055, (No model.) 
O 
To all tuhon, it may concern 
Beit known that I, BENJAMIN LYON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Bridge 
port, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
5 Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Belt-Joints; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in the construction of 
machinery-belting with a view to facilitating 
the joining of the meeting edges of such belt 
ing, SO as to afford an endless circuit, and also 
with the end to provide an absolutely secure 
joint between said edges without the aid of 
any metallic or separate fastening devices 
whatever. 
Prior to my invention button-holes have 
been formed within the meeting edges of the 
belt, the inner ends of said button-holes ter 
minating in enlarged eyelets, while the slits 
constituting the button-holes extend through 
the end edges of the belt, said button-holes 
being so cut that T-headed flaps were formed 
along the meeting edges of the belt, the flaps 
of one edge being opposite to the button 
holes in the other edge. 
My invention consists in forming closed 
button-holes at the sides of one of the ends 
of the belt, whose meeting edges are provided 
with flaps and open button-holes, as above 
set forth, said closd button-holes being oppo 
site to the lateral flaps of the other end of 
said belt. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan View showing my improvement, the 
ends of the belt being detached; Fig. 2, a 
similar view showing the edges of the belt 
united in accordance with my improvement; 
Fig. 3, a bottom view of the united belt-sec 
tions; Fig. 4, a view similar to Fig. 1, but 
illustrating the meeting edges of a belt pro 
vided with open button-holes and flaps, but 
Without my special end-locking construction; 
and Fig. 5, a detail broken plan of the belt 
edges in detached position, showing a slightly 
modified construction of the end-locking but 
Similar letters denote like parts 
in the sev 
eral figures. 
Heretofore it has been essayed to unite the 
the meeting edges of belts by a series of dove 
tail portions cut in said edges and interlocked 55 
and then secured by a binding wire or cord 
surrounding the interlocked portions above . 
and below; but in regard to this construction 
the fact remains that without this Wire the 
edges would pull apart very easily, and that 6o 
the wire or cord offers a most serious objec 
tion, in that it forms and presents a protuber 
ance on the under side of the belt. I would 
state in this immediate connection that the 
securing of the meeting edges of machinery- 65 
belts by lacing or by metal fasteners carries 
with it an objection which is obvious to and 
fully appreciated by every mechanic, and the 
feature which gives rise to this objection is the 
protuberance formed by the lacing or metal 7o 
fastener on the inner face of the belt. The 
reason of this objection is that every time 
such protuberance passes over the machine 
pulley a shock occurs, which, however slight 
it may be, causes what are called chatters' 75 
in the work. Again, the use of metal as an 
element in securing the meeting edges of 
belts is of itself objectionable, since the belt 
is thereby stiffened at the joint, the result 
being that the metal will either break or cut 8o 
through the belt. Therefore it is desirable 
to provide a means for securing the meeting 
edges of machinery-belts without the use of 
any metal or other foreign substance what 
ever as auxiliary to such means, and the ac 
complishment of this desideratum by my in 
vention will be best understood by the fol 
lowing description. 
A B represent short sections of machinery 
belting. 
1 are slits, which extend through the edges 
of said sections and terminate at the rear in 
enlarged eyelets 2. These slits are so located 
that when the edges of the sections A B are 
evenly butted together the slits of one section 
will alternate with those of the other, thus 
forming T-headed flaps 3 in each section, 
which are opposite to the slits. The belt-sec 
tions thus fashioned are interlocked by sim 
ply buttoning the said flaps alternately with- 1 Oc 
9 O 
95 
So ton-hole. 
25 
35 
45 
2 
406,106 
ton-holes are cut. I cut the slots 4 a little 
wider than the slits 1, in order to facilitate 
the introduction of the opposite flaps. It will 
thus be seen that the use of the closed but 
ton-holes enables me to securely lock a belt 
jointed after the manner shown at Fig. 4, SO 
that no end-thrust or rough usage of the belt 
will cause the jointed sections thereof to sepa 
late. 
Of course it is not necessary to cut these 
closed button-holes both at the sides of the 
same belt-section, since one may be cut at the 
side of one section and the other at the oppo 
site side of the other section, this being a mat 
ter dependent entirely upon the width of the 
belt. 
At Fig. 5 I have shown my closed button 
hole provided with a lateral extension 6 at 
the base of the slot to afford a sort of gate, 
through which the opposite T-headed flap 
may be readily introduced; but this illustrates 
one of the many phases of my invention and 
merely enables the flap to be inserted with 
out twisting. I have shown my improvement, 
in connection with a belt jointed by interlock 
ing flaps and open button-holes; but I do not 
wish to be circumscribed in the use of my in 
vention, since the same may be utilized as a 
lateral end joint in connection with various 
devices and means for joining the meeting 
edges of belts. 
I prefer to use my improvement as shown, 
since a very superior means for joining the 
meeting edges of belts is thereby afforded 
without the use of any metal or other foreign 
material whatever; also, I am enabled to dis 
joint a belt without injuring it, and this can 
not be done in the case of metal tack or sta 
ple fasteners, since the latter will tear the belt 
and thereby render it necessary to make a 
new joint farther back from the edges of the 
belt. 
I claim 
A machinery-belt having its meeting edges 
united by a series of interlocked T-headed 
flaps and open button-holes and secured by 
end joints, which consist of T-headed flaps 
interlocked with opposite closed button-holes, 
as and for the purposes hereinbefore set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
BENJAMIN LYON. 
Witnesses: 
S. S. WILLIAMSON, 
F. W. SMITH, Jr. 
65 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
5 
IO 
15 
25 
- 
in their opposing slits, each flap being forced 
within its opposite slit until the neck of said 
flap enters the eyelet at the inner end of said 
slit. When the sections are interlocked, as 
above set forth, it will be evident that any 
lengthwise strain on the belt will cause the 
stock at the outer sides of the two lateral but 
ton-holes to yield, thereby spreading said but 
tOn-holes and disengaging the end joints. It 
will be obvious that when said end joints 
have been thus disengaged the disjointing 
of the remaining T-headed flaps and button 
holes will follow in rapid succession. If the 
end joints are secured by any fastening de 
vice, the belt-sections cannot become sepa 
rated, since there can be no spreading of the 
open button-holes. 
In connection with the construction shown 
at Fig. 4, there have been used various devices 
for Securing the end joints-such as tacks, 
staples, eyelets, &c. - but, as hereinbefore 
Stated, the use of any metal or separate fasten 
ing devices is highly objectionable, and my in 
vention contemplates the securing of these 
end joints without the use of any separate fas 
tening device. I have made provision against 
any such disadvantage resulting from the use 
of such devices by making a closed button 
hole at the sides of one of the belt-sections and 
opposite to the flaps at the sides of the other 
belt-section. This button-hole may be made 
in a variety of ways. In fact, there are so 
many different styles and shapes of slots that 
Would answer this purpose that it would seem 
lseless and superfluous to illustrate or de 
scribe them, since they are all colorable varia 
tions one of the other, the gist of my inven 
tion in this instance resting in the broad idea, 
of closed button holes or slots at the sides of 
the belt-section. I therefore have shown at 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3 the kind of button hole or 
slot which I prefer to use in this connection, 
and which is solocated in the belt as to im 
pair the strength of the latter in the least de 
gree and to facilitate the interlocking of the 
These closed but 
ton-holes are formed by slots 4, which termi 
nate at their forward ends in enlarged eye 
lets 5, which latter are in alignment with the 
eyelets 2 in that section of the belt within 
which said button-holes are cut. It will be 
observed that the slots 4 extend in a direc 
tion opposite to that of the slits 1, and that 
there are no T-headed flaps at the ends of 
the belt-section within which the closed lot 
45 opposite T-headed flaps. 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406206.txt	 
peers. hote-ithographer. Washiniste 
in 
, C. 
ATTORNEYS, 
L, S, FI ATAU. 
* BALING PRESS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 2, 1889, 
(No Model.) 
No. 406,206, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
WITNESSES: 
 
Zz67. 6 ( 
 
INVENTOR: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS S. FLATAU, OF PITTSBURG, TEXAS, 
BALING-PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,206, dated July 2, 1889. 
Application filed December 14, 1888, Serial No, 293,615, (No model.) 
5 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
To all whon it invay conce77: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS S. FLATAU, of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Camp and State 
of Texas, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Baling-Presses, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in baling 
presses; and it consists in the novel construc 
tion and combination of parts, as will be 
hereinafter described, and pointed out in the 
claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my press. Fig. 2 is a vertical longi 
tudinal section of the press-box. Fig. 3 is a 
cross-section of the press-box on line acac of 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a detail section illustrating 
the gearing. Fig. 5 is a detail view of the 
follower, partly broken away; and Fig. 6 is a 
detail view illustrating the connection of the 
screw-shaft with the ends of the follower. 
The press-box. A has baling-chambers B 
in its opposite ends, and in use is arranged 
horizontally, as shown. The walls of cham 
bers B are formed with slots b, for the pas 
sage of the tying-wires, and are bound at 
their outer and inner ends by iron bands C 
and D, such bands encircling the chambers 
and giving great strength to the box. The 
removable doors E are fitted to the ends of 
the chambers and have flanges or edges e, 
which extend in position to be engaged by 
the bail-like clamps F, which have their arms 
hinged or pivoted at their free ends to the 
press-box, and are arranged to turn at their 
free or swinging ends over the edges of the 
doors and secure the same Snugly in position. 
These doors have their inner edges formed 
with grooves for the tying-wire. 
The plunger or follower G is formed with 
two plunger-blocks and a connecting-frame 
rigidly uniting such blocks, such frame con 
sisting, preferably, of four beams H, fitting 
snugly in the corners of the press-box and 
rigidly connected at their ends to the end 
blocks, the follower being thus adapted to 
slide smoothly and evenly within the press 
box and in both directions, as will be readily 
Seell. 
The screw-shaft I extends between the fol 
lower-blocks G and is connected to Such parts. 
By preference Isecure the screw-shaft rigidly 
to such blocks, and by forming its ends an 
gular or otherwise non-circular in cross-sec 
tion and fitting such ends in similar open 
ings in plates J, secured to the inner sides of 
the blocks G. On this screw-shaft I, I fit a 
nut K, having gear-teeth, which are meshed 
by a gear l on the drive-shaft L. The nut K 
bears between one arm m of the bearing 
frame M, which frame has arms m m', con 
nected by cross-bar M', the said frame being 
secured to the press-box, the cross-bar M' pro 
viding a bearing for the drive-shaft L, and a 
distance sleeve or piece M being provided 
between arm 'm' and the nut IX, Such con 
struction enabling the placing of arms in m' 
sufficiently apart to permit the gear l to op 
The distance sleeve or 
erate between them. 
piece M, it will be seen, is made integral 
with the arm m' of the bearing-frame M. On 
this piece M, I provide the stud or pin m, 
which forms a step or bearing for the lower 
or inner end of shaft L, steadies the opera 
tion of such shaft, and relieves the bearings 
of such shaft in frame M and in the box 
frame of much of the wear and strain. 
By the described construction it will be seen 
that by means of a sweep N, which may be 
the tongue of the machine detached from the 
hounds and attached to the drive-shaft, the 
gear l may be turned in one or the other di 
rection to cause the follower to move toward 
one or the other end of the box. The hay or 
other material can consequently be placed in 
one chamber, the door of the same be fast 
ened in position, and the screw operated to 
move the plunger-block with great force into 
such chamber. When the bale has been prop 
erly pressed, the wires may be applied and 
secured in the usual manner. After the bale 
has been Secured the door may be opened 
and one or two turns given the sweep to force 
the bale out of the door. As a bale is being 
pressed in one chamber the hay or other ma 
terial for another bale may be fed into the 
opposite chamber, the pressing of which would 
at once begin on the reverse movement of 
the sweep, thus saving time, as every move 
ment backward or forward of the sweep is 
availed of to press in either one or the other 
chamber of the box. 
In practice the press-box is usually sup 
?? 
65 
75 
90 
95 
I OO 
406,206 
ported on Wheels, as shown, or on runners, to 
facilitate its passage from field to field, and 
when in use the machine may be staked in 
position in any desired manner. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
In a baling-press, the combination of the 
press box or frame, the frame M, secured to 
Said box or frame, and having an arm in, an 
arm n., and a distance-sleeve M, extended 
from arm m' and provided with a pin or stud 
na, the follower. provided with a screw-shaft 
extended through distance-sleeve M* and arm 
m, a bevel-gear K On Said Shaft between 
the sleeve M* and arm m, and the shaft L, 
having a wheel l, meshing with the wheel K, 
such shaft L being journaled at its lower end 
on the pin or stud n., all substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
LOUIS S. EFLATAU. 
Witnesses: 
E. W. HIEARN, 
I. C. DUPREE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406306.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 406,306, 
H. P. PRATT. 
ELECTRODE FOR THERAPEUTIC BODY WEAR.' 
Patented July 2, 1889. 
 
Z22-222222; 
4742-77, 
2- 2-yafs lea?e 
g4222-7s (N-- 
 
 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY P. PRATT, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ELECTRO DE FOR THERAPE UTC BODY WEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,806, dated July 2, 1889. 
Application filed March 12, 1889, Serial No. 302,960, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRYP.PRATT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Electrodes for Electro-Therapeutic 
Body Appliances, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Of the electrodes hitherto employed in con 
nection with electric belts, trusses, and the 
like electro-therapeutic body appliances those 
most commonly used have been formed of 
stiff metal, which is not, obviously, adapted to 
absorb moisture. The inflexible electrode, 
When used in the connection referred to, is 
objectionable, for the reason that it does not 
possess the capability of conforming to the 
Surface of the body to which it is applied in 
all conditions and positions of the body, there 
by to follow the surface in all shapes or con 
ditions it may assume by movement of the 
body. Owing to this lack it happens fre 
Quently that but a portion, sometimes a very 
Small portion, of the surface of an electrode 
Will be in contact with the surface of the 
body to which it is applied, and thus cause 
the entire current to pass through a compara 
tively small portion of the electrode, thereby 
increasing the resistance where it enters the 
body and tending to burn and even blister 
the surface subjected to the current. 
The object of my improvement is to pro 
vide a form of electrode which may involve, 
Without inconvenience to the user, a compara 
tively large extent of surface, and which 
shall be flexible to conform readily to the 
surface of the body to which it may be ap 
plied, and which shall, further, be formed 
With material absorbent of moisture to enable 
it to be moistened when applied to the body, 
thereby to increase the conductivity. 
One of the purposes for which I particu 
larly design my improved electrode is to af. 
ford a cushion to be interposed between the 
pad of an electric truss and the part of the 
body to which the pad is applied, and I illus 
trate my improvement in connection. With an 
electric truss in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a truss having upon it a suita 
ble electric battery with which are connected 
electrodes of my improved construction; and 
Fig. 2 shows the electrode in its preferred 
form in elevation with one of the two outer 
layers of the chamois-skin, with which I pre 
fer to form it, removed to display the con 
struction of the metallic element I prefer to 
employ and which is fastened between the 
layers. 
A is the electrode, which I prefer to form 
as shown most clearly in Fig. 1-namely, of 
two rounded layers r and r", of flexible ab 
sorbent material, (chamois-skin being the most 
desirable material, or one, the layer r, of cha 
mois-skin, and the other r' of Soft leather,) 
sewed or otherwise fastened together and hav 
ing secured between them a continuous strip of 
fine woven wire p, silver wire being preferred. 
A conductor q is fastened to one end of the 
woven wire p, and extends therefrom out of an 
opening o between the layers, being provided 
at its opposite end with means, such as the 
clamp in, (though any suitable means for or 
manner of producing the connection Will an 
swer my purpose) for connecting it to an elec 
tric battery B, which may, and preferably 
does, comprise the construction set forth in 
Letters Patent of the United States No. 
388,581, granted me on the 28th day of Au 
gust, 1888, for improvement in electric belts. 
The battery B is applied to the girdle por 
tion of a truss C, as shown, and in the same 
manner as it is applied to the analogous part 
of an electric belt; but for a truss the elec 
trode A, to be interposed between the truss 
pad m and rupture to which it is applied, 
should involve the form illustrated, while the 
other electrode, which I distinguish as A', 
may be formed to surround the girdleportion 
of the truss, as shown, but should otherwise 
be constructed like the electrode illustrated 
in Fig. 2, and it is similarly provided with 
means for connecting it with the opposite pole 
of the battery B. When used on an electric 
belt, however, the electrode A may comprise 
the form of and be applied like that (the elec 
trode A) shown as embracing the girdlepor 
tion. 
The rounded electrode A should present a 
surface somewhat larger than that of the pad 
75 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
4C) 
45 
2 
406,306 
45 
55 
- 
m, and to use it, the truss, with both electrodes 
connected with the poles of the battery B, is 
adjusted on the body of the wearer in the 
usual manner, and the sides of the electrodes 
to come into contact with the body are moist 
ened, preferably by saturating them with wa 
ter. The adjustment of the truss brings the 
electrode A' on the girdle portion into con 
tact with the body, when it may, if necessary, 
be shifted to any desired position, as will 
readily be understood from inspection of Fig. 
1. The rounded electrode A, however, is most 
conveniently applied after the truss has been 
adjusted, by interposing it between the truss 
pad in and rupture. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
readily apparent that the objects hereinbe 
fore stated to be accomplished by my improve 
ment are attained, since the construction of 
the electrode presents a soft and therefore 
comfortable texture to the skin, is pliable, 
whereby its entire extent of surface applied 
to the body remains in contact therewith, and 
by being saturated with moisture, whereby it 
also moistens the surface of the skin, in 
creases its conductivity, the construction thus 
also preventing injury from the effects of the 
current-such as burning or blistering-to the 
Surface of the body to which it is applied. ' 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. An electrode for use with electro-thera 
peutic body appliances and formed with flex 
ible absorbent material, having a flexible me 
tallic conductor p secured to it, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In all electrode for use with electro-thera 
peutic body appliances, the combination of a 
layer r, of flexible absorbent material, a layer 
r', of flexible material, secured to the layer r, 
an interposed flexible metallic conductor p, 
and a conductor q, attached at one end to the 
conductor p and provided at its opposite end 
with means for connecting it with an electric 
generator, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. In combination, a truss C, an electric bat 
tery B upon the truss, and electrodes con 
nected with the opposite poles of the battery, 
and each formed with flexible absorbent ma 
terial having a flexible metallic conductor p 
secured to it and from which connection of 
the electrode with the battery is made, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In combination, a truss C, an electric bat 
tery B upon the truss, an electrode A' upon 
the girdle portion of the truss and compris 
ing a layer , of flexible absorbent material, 
a layer r', of flexible material, the said layers 
being secured together, and a flexible metal 
lic conductor p, interposed between the layers 
and from which connection of the electrode 
with the battery is made, and an electrode A, 
to be interposed and form a cushion between 
the pad of the truss and surface of the body, 
and comprising a layer ', of flexible absorbent 
material, a layer '', of flexible material, the 
said layers being secured together, and a flex 
ible conductor p, interposed between the lay 
ers and from which connection of the elec 
trode with the battery is made, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
HARRY. P. PRATT. 
In presence of - 
J. W. DYRENFORTH, 
M. J. BOWERS. 
O 
3o 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406407.txt	: No Model.) 
No. 406407, 
E. E. SMITH, 
FODDER BINDER. 
Patented July 2, 1889. 
 
s 
z/Ayessessa Z 7a vezz-Aoz'. 
. 
cs t 
64-a-ce 
frc. 
% ?ay 
% -s 
N. PETERS. Phate-lithographer, Washington, d: C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMOR. E. SMITH, OF DAYTON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JAMES A. 
WEED, OF SAME PLACE. 
FODDER. BNDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,407, dated July 2, 1889. 
Application filed October 22, 1888, 
Serial No. 288,871 (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EMOR E. SMITH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Dayton, 
in the county of Montgomery and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Fodder-Binders; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, which 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
fodder-binders, the features of which will be 
fully hereinafter set forth. 
My invention pertains to the manner of se 
curing the ends of the cord or band by a wire 
fastener, the object being to make the tying 
secure and expeditious in the binding of fod 
der. 
The mechanism is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a top view of the wire fastener. 
Fig. 2 is a view of the same as attached to a 
band. 
Like letters and numerals designate like 
parts in the several views. 
A is the fastener, comprising a steel wire 
bent upon itself at the center, leaving a space 
or opening 1 between. From this part the wire 
is bent outwardly and inwardly, forming the 
lateral angles 23. Then the ends 4 and 5 are 
brought together and crossed and interlocked 
by being bent outwardly, so that said ends 
IO 
25 
35 
are nearly at a right angle to the longitudinal 
axis of the body of the fastener, and a slight 
bend downward is given at the point of inter 
locking, so that said ends will bear snugly 
against the band beneath. 
B is the band, which is made of tarred twine 
or suitable cord. In one end is tied a knot b, 
and is slipped into the opening or slot in the 
center of the wire. The band is then passed 45 
around a bundle of fodder or other material. 
The free end is then brought up within the 
angle at the crossing of the ends of the fast 
ener, and is then brought over and under one 
end of the fastener, then over the interlock 
and under the other end of the fastener, and 
then left free. The end of the band resting 
between the bundle and the ends of the fast 
ener makes the fastening Secure. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
A fodder-band fastener of wire, comprising 
a central bend with nearly-parallel sides, then 
bent outwardly and inwardly with the ends 
interlocking and bent slightly downward at 
the point of junction, said ends standing at 
nearly a right angle to the longitudinal axis 
of said fastener, substantially as shown and 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
55 
65 
EMOR. E. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
B. PICKERING, 
SUMNER. T. SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406507.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. DAY & C. SPOFFORD. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 406,507. 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
se & S LN1 
N 
N 
H C NISI 
I 
N N 
N. S N H S NS 
928itv.coco 
- 
-6-6-64. 
83; 
eit &letowcago 
3-vuovtovo, 
A4, 26.3a7 
%-41%. 
(%-, -74%ry 
 
J. H. DAY & C. SPOFFORD, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
No. 406,507. 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
See 
 
ses 
(SEA 
SS IILFSM 
ES 
23 
Of Iri 
7 s: S 
7 S2. 
HAHA.III 
AS AH"HNin 
Noynoe 
IU 
Ng5S. 
NWWII I 
D 
Q 
7-a- 
C 
EVA 
f 
SS 2 % S C 
is re. 
R- 
 
  
7 
2 22 
S) 2 
sa1 
(No Model.) 
J. H. DAY & C. SPOFFORD, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 406,507. 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
N. PFERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
1. 
- 
 
43 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. DAY, OF NEW YORK, AND CHARLES SPOFFORD, OF BROOKLYN, 
ASSIGNORS TO JOHN H. DAY AND GEORGE LESTER, BOTH OF RICHMOND 
HILL NEW YORK. 
TYPE-WRITING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,507, dated July 9, 1889. 
w 
Application filed April 6, 1887, Serial No. 238,831. (No model.) 
Io tion. 
. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN H. DAY and 
CHARLES SPOFFORD, citizens of the United 
States, residing, respectively, in New York, 
5 in the county and State of New York, and in 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Type-Writing Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specifica 
The invention relates to the class of in 
struments known as type-writers.' 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
simple and efficient form of type-writing ma 
I5 chine which may be manufactured at a small 
cost and will be capable of printing charac 
ters accurately and neatly. 
The invention relates more particularly to 
the class of instruments in which the type 
2O are carried upon a movable plate which is 
turned above the paper upon which the im 
pressions are to be made until the proper 
character is in position, whereupon that char 
acter is thrust downward against the paper 
25 to give the impression; and the invention 
aims to simplify the construction of the ma 
chine and to increase its capacity and the ac 
curacy of its operation. 
The invention will be described in detail 
3o in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view. Fig. 2 is an end 
view. Fig. 3 is a cross-section of the instru 
ment; and Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are details show 
Referring to the figures, A represents the 
base-plate on which the instrument is sup 
ported. This plate carries a cast-iron or other 
suitable frame A', along which the type-sup. 
4o port moves. The frame A' is constructed at 
its back portion with a longitudinal bar a, to 
which the carriage B is sleeved and along 
which it moves. 
Beneath and a little in 
front of the bar a, is placed a printing-bar a'. 
45 A type-hammer, presently to be described, is 
at all times above this bar. In front of the 
bar a? is a paper-feeding roller a, which 
serves to feed forward the paper after each 
line of impressions has been completed. 
35 ing particularly the spacing mechanism. 
Above this roller there extends a comb or Se 
ries of teeth a', serving to hold the paper 
down against the roller. A rod a, carrying 
the comb a', is supported at its respective 
ends in the frame A', and a suitable arm or 
lever at its end serves to lift it from the roller 
when it is desired to adjust the paper With 
out moving the roller. 
In front of the roller and comb described 
there is placed a rack-bar C, for advancing 
the printing-carriage each time an impression 
is effected. This bar is provided with a se 
ries of teeth c, which are engaged by pawlse' 
and e of a feeding device. This consists of 
a lever d, having a narrow extension dat its 
end, which is engaged by a central pin or 
arm d upon the carriage. This arm is thrust 
down and raised again each time an impres 
sion is effected, in a manner which will pres 
ently be described. The movement of the 
arm, and thus of the lever d, up and down 
carries a rigid pawle' and a yielding or spring 
pawl e to and fro across the teeth of the 
ratchet, allowing one pawl to escape as the 
other enters. The spring-pawl tends to push 
forward, and as it escapes from one tooth 
passes into the plane of the next tooth, so that 
upon the next downward movement it will 
engage that tooth, while the pawl e' passes 
out of engagement with its tooth, thus allow 
ing a step-by-step movement of the carriage. 
The pawls and the lever d are carried upon 
the frame D, moving upon the carriage-bar C. 
A bar D' supports the front of the frame D. 
As it is desirable that means be provided for 
permitting the type-carriage to be lifted from 
above the work, the plate d is movable longi 
tudinally upon its support, but is normally 
held forward in position by the spring e. A 
suitable handle e' serves to draw it forward 
and disengage it from the pin d when it is 
desired to lift the carriage. The pin dis 
preferably beveled upon its end, so that it 
will readily return to its normal position when 
the carriage is again turned down. The 
whole frame D is drawn to the right hand by 
reason of a spring. S inclosed in a suitable 
drum S at the right-hand end of the machine. 
A cord f is wound upon the drum in such a 
5o 
55 
95 
2 
406,507 
manner that the forcible moving of the car 
riage D toward the left hand will wind the 
spring sufficiently to cause the carriage to be 
drawn to the extreme right-hand end as the 
5 pawls are operated, giving it a step-by-step 
motion. For the purpose of readily returning 
the carriage to the left-hand end of the ma 
chine, the pawls e' and e are preferably so 
mounted upon the plated that they may be 
?o pushed forward as they are forced against the 
beveled surfaces of the teeth. For this reason 
they are coupled by pins or screws lic' and k, 
extending through suitable slots. A spring 
l', however, normally holds the pawls forward 
I5 against the teeth, one end of the spring being 
attached to the plate or pawl e', while the 
other end is attached to the carriage D. 
The printing mechanism itself will now be 
described. The type are carried upon a suit 
2O able flexible plate G, formed in the arc of a 
circle the center of which is concentric with 
the pin d'. This plate G is carried upon 
a movable frame H, pivoted to the central 
post FI, surrounding the pin d, and through 
25 which the pin dextends. A lever K, pivoted 
to the frame II, serves to turn the frame, and 
thus the type-plate, above the printing-bar 
Ct', bringing any one of the type into position 
to print. For the purpose of determining the 
3o position of the type, an index-plate L is 
mounted upon the frame H carrying the 
printing mechanism. The lever IS, or an in 
dex K moving there with above the index. 
plate, Serves to show the position of the type 
35 plate, so that the different type may be read 
ily selected. When the propertype is brought 
above the paper as it passes over the print 
ing-bar C., that type is forced down against 
the paper by means of a printing point or 
4o pin n. This pin projects through a suitable 
arm N, carried upon the frame B, and pref 
erably projecting from the portion which is 
pivoted to the carriage-bar a, and it termi 
nates immediately above the printing-bar a'. 
45. It is necessary that this pin be forced down 
Ward when the plate is in position to print 
the required character. To accomplish this 
a lever M is employed. This lever is pivoted 
to the post n, carried upon the printing-car 
So riage B, and having a forked extension sur 
rounding the central post of the carriage. 
The lever K is also provided with a forked 
extension passing beneath the collar n, en 
gaging the sleeve im, which receives the 
55 forked extension of the lever M. The spring 
in normally forces this sleeve downward, and 
thus serves both to raise the lever M and also 
the lever IK. When the lever K is pressed 
downward after it has been brought above 
6o the required type on the index-plate, the 
sleeve is pressed upward against the tension 
of this spring, causing the lever M also to be 
operated, thus forcing the printing-pin down 
ward against the surface of the type-carrying 
65 plate and causing the impression to be effected. 
The pin d is coupled with the sleeve by 
means of a pin ni", so that as the latter rises 
 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
- 
WaCe. 
and falls the pin d? will rise and fall, thus 
operating the pawl-carrying lever and es 
capement and allowing the carriage to ad 
For the purpose of insuring that the type 
shall be accurately in position to print When 
the pin n is forced downward, an adjuster P 
is employed. This consists of a lever carry 
ing a wedge-shaped projection p, designed to 
pass into corresponding openings or teeth. 
o' upon the edge of the plate g. This Wedge 
is passed between the teeth and adjusts the 
plate before the pin n is operated. For this 
reason the lever M is allowed to move down 
ward a slight distance before it engages the 
pin n, and during such movement the lever P 
is operated. This is accomplished by coup 
ling the lever P with the lever M by a link p', 
one end of which is connected with the ever 
P, while the other is pivoted to the bell-crank 
lever p, carried upon the lever M. This bell 
crank lever is allowed slight movement rela: 
tive to the lever M, by reason of a slot 7 and 
pin r", extending therethrough from the level 
M. It is desirable that the lever M be al 
lowed a downward movement, even after the 
wedge p has entered to its full extent between 
the teeth. For this purpose a spring t presses 
downward against the end of the pivoted bell 
crank lever p, and while this spring will nor 
mally hold it downward, yet sufficient press 
ure upon the lever K will cause the level. M 
to move forward still farther without moving 
the adjuster P. 
For the purpose of spacing between the 
words, the lever K may be moved downward 
a sufficient distance to operate the escape 
ment mechanism without pressing the pin 
against the type-plate; or some convenient 
point for instance the central point in the 
plate L-may be left blank. 
In order to give an alarm...when the car 
riage is nearing the end of a line, an alarm 
device operated by the carriage may be em 
ployed. That here shown consists of a bell 
al, carried upon the support of the spring S 
and provided with a spring-hammeru'. This 
hammer is pivoted upon a Suitable Support 
u?, and a flexible arm u', moving with the 
carriage II, engages the hammer and trips it 
one or more times, when the carriage is near 
the end of its excursion, toward the right 
hand. The end of the arm or spring it will 
engage the tooth or projection upon the Sup 
port of the hammer, and as the latter turns 
the spring will escape over the projection and 
thus release the hammer. A second stroke 
is obtained in like manner by the tooth or 
ratchet, shown on the arm u. The spring (in 
dicated in dotted lines) surrounding the sup 
port u tends to force the hammer u?. at all 
times toward the bell, and therefore when the 
tooth or projection upon the support of the 
hammer escapes the end of the spring u, or 
the teeth or ratchet shown thereon, then the 
hammer u' will immediately be impelled to 
Ward and strike the bell. 
I to 
II5 
125 
13O 
406,507 
d 
5 the spirit of the invention. 
It will be evident that various modifica-riage, and a tension device for impelling the 
tions may be made in the details of the con- carriage in one direction, placed under stress 
struction, and other forms of feeding devices 
by the forcible movement of the carriage in 
may be substituted without departing from 
the opposite direction, substantially as de 
scribed. 
For the purpose of inking the type, two ink 
4. In a type-writer, the combination, With 
pads are placed at either side of the pin n, 
the movable carriage and the escapement 
so that as the type are moving to and fro they 
bar, of pawls engaging the teeth of said bar, 
pass over and rub against these plates and 
and a yielding spring normally forcing the 
receive the ink therefrom. To afford a stronger 
pawls toward and holding them in engage 
coupling between the carriage B and the car 
ment with the bar, but permitting them to be 
rier D, two arms v' pass upon the respective 
moved at right angles to the length of the 
sides of the arm v, secured to and extending 
bar and then thrust out of engagement there 
from the carrier D. 
with upon the backward movement of the 
carriage, substantially as described. 
5. In a type-writing instrument, the com 
bination, with the movable carriage and the 
levers for effecting the impressions from the 
type, of an escapement device, a pin moving 
with the levers normally engaging the Sup 
port of the escapement device, and means, 
substantially as described, for withdrawing 
the support from engagement with said pin. 
6. In a type-writing instrument, the com 
bination of the adjusting device consisting 
of the lever P, having the wedge-shaped ex 
tension, the toothed plate G, the lever M, for 
effecting impressions from the type, the bell 
crank lever p, with which the adjusting-le 
wer is connected, and a yielding connection 
between said bell-cranklever and the lever M. 
7. In a type-writing instrument, the com 
bination of an index-plate, a type-carrying 
plate, a printing-lever, a lever for determin 
ing the position of the type, said lever mov 
ing in a horizontal direction, and also having 
a vertical movement in any of its horizontal 
positions, a mechanical connection between 
the printing-lever and the last-named lever, 
consisting of a sleeve or collar, and an adjust 
ing-lever engaging the type-carrying plate. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto sub 
scribed our names this 2d day of April, A. D. 
1887. 
We claim as our invention 
1. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, substantially as described, of a longi 
tudinally-movable printing-carriage, a series 
of type carried thereby and movable inde 
pendently thereof, a printing-lever for effect 
ing impressions from the type, a lever for de 
termining the position of the series of type 
with reference to the printing-lever, a sleeve 
or collar coupling the two levers, whereby the 
first-named lever may be operated by the sec 
ond lever, and an escapement or feeding de 
vice and actuating mechanism therefor, sub 
stantially such as described, for advancing 
said carriage longitudinally after each im 
pression. 
2. The combination, in a type-writer, of an 
index-plate, a series of type, an index-fin 
ger for determining the position of the type 
through the instrumentality of the index 
plate, a printing-lever, a pin engaged by the 
printing-lever for effecting impressions from 
the type, an escapement device, the verti 
cally-movable pind, operating the escape 
ment device, and a vertically-movable collar 
coupling said pin with the printing-lever. 
3. The combination, in a type-writer, of a 
longitudinally - movable carriage, the type 
carried thereby and movable independently 
thereof, a printing-lever for effecting impres 
sions from the type, an escapement device 
for the carriage governing its longitudinal 
movement, a detachable mechanical connec 
tion consisting, essentially, of the hook upon 
the central pin d and the movable lever d, 
5o between the escapement device and the car 
JOHN H. DAY. . 
CHARLES SPOFFORD. 
Witnesses: 
DANL. W. EDGECOMB, 
CHARLES A. TERRY. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406607.txt	(No Model.) 
W. A. WREELAND. 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet . 
- 
No. 406,607, 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
- 
k 
W7 
- R - 
CD 
CD 
CD 
d 
CD 
CD 
PS 
CD 
a. 
a', 
Vy 
- 
s 
NS 
N 
S. 
 
- 
- 
5. 
N N s 
s 
- 
set. 
sis 
& 
WZZWASSAS 
64%. 
AWAAWZO2 
(0.O.Oreeland, 
N. peers, Photo-lithographer, Washington D.C. 
w 
 
W. A. WREELAND. 
STEAM. ENGINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
No. 406,607, 
 
% 
 
 
28itvices 
66 25% way 
2%-447. 
So, 
3-cylot 
(0.01.0 resland, 
revvict: eva. 
azz 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 406,607, 
W. A. WREELAND. 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
28itv.cscs 
222. 
2%-5%z A. 
2. 
N N 
3v-bo44-tov 
& Q. Veedarie?, 
d 6& Czeczerwove, 
S3 u. Ars &ltovci 
ge 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. WREELAND, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
STEAM-ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,607, dated July 9, 1889. 
Application filed November 27, 1888, Serial No. 291,993, (No model.) 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
- 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMA.VREELAND, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Steam-Engines; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters or figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
Figure I of the drawings is a representation 
of a top view of the engine. Fig.2 is a lon 
gitudinal vertical section. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse section. Figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 are de 
tail views. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
Steam-engines; and it consists in the con 
struction and novel combination of parts, as 
hereinafter set forth. 
This invention relates more particularly to 
combined low and high pressure engines, in 
which one steam-cylinder is inclosed within 
the other, and the steam-ports so arranged 
that the exhaust-steam from the inner cylin 
der will enter the outer cylinder and operate 
the piston therein before its final exhaust. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
Steam-cylinder, and B is a steam-chest there 
on, with which the steam-pipe from the boiler 
may be connected at any convenient point. 
C is a cylinder-piston within the cylinder 
A, having the two piston-rods at a' extended 
through the stuffing-boxes b b'in the cylinder 
head, as shown, and connected by pivoted 
extension-rods c to the cranks c' of the crank 
shaft D, which is provided with suitable bear 
ings. The piston C is made hollow, and has 
the piston Etherein, which has its rod d ex 
tended through the central stuffing-box d' of 
the cylinder A and connected by a pitman to 
the central crank of the crank-shaft D. 
F is an eccentric on the shaft D, having 
the adjustable eccentric-rod G, connecting 
pivotally with a cranke, which is secured to 
the shaft e, having a bearing through the 
steam-chest, and provided on its inner end 
cessf" of the sliding valve H within the steam N 
chest. 
I is a sliding-valve similar to the valve H, 
and having similar connections to an eccen 
tric-rod J, which is adjustable and has an in 
termittent motion imparted to it by the ec 
centric K on the crank-shaft. 
L L' are the steam-ports opening through 
the cylinder A, and both adapted to register 
simultaneously with the ports M. M' through 
the cylinder C, one of said ports, however, be 
ing closed by the sliding valve while the other 
is open-that is, when steam is entering the 
inner cylinder through the port L, to drive the 
piston, the mouth of the port L' is closed by 
its valve; but the exhaust from the inner cyl 
inder is forced through the port M', a portion 
of the port L', and into the outer cylinder by 
way of the branch porti' and the port k, both 
of which are in connection with the chamber 
l in the valve. At the end of the entrance 
the exhaust is transferred by the sliding 
In this construction it will be seen 
Valve. 
that the exhaust from the inner or higher 
pressure-cylinder is conveyed to the outer or 
low pressure-cylinder to operate the cylinder 
piston therein. 
O shows the final exhaust-ports leading 
from opposite ends of the cylinder A, and 
alternately registering with the valve I and 
escaping through the ports m. 
It is obvious that the cylinder-piston and 
the piston therein move in opposite directions, 
and that the live steam has an operative press 
ure against two surfaces. 
The valve I is made intermittent in its 
- movement, as described, so that it will be at 
rest long enough to allow the steam to ex 
haust. The exhaust is cut off by the valve, 
however, before the piston reaches the end of 
its movement, so that the small amount of 
steam remaining in the cylinder will mix with 
the incoming steam and assist in operating 
the piston. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. A steam-engine having a high-pressure 
cylinder operating as a piston in a low-press 
ure cylinder, the low-pressure cylinder having 
75 
85 
95 
5o with a depending arm f, engaging in the re-steam-passages communicating with ports or Too 
406,607. 
haust-ports also being controlled by separate 
valves, said high-pressure cylinder also hav 
ing a piston and the low-pressure cylinder 
having a plurality of piston-rods, substan 
tially as specified. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WM. A. WREELAND. 
Witnesses: 
A. STARK, 
JAMESTINDILL. 
passages in the inner high-pressure cylinder 
and controlled by separate valves, the final 
exhaust-ports also being controlled by sepa 
rate valves, said high-pressure cylinder also 
having a piston, substantially as set forth. 
2. A steam-engine having a high-pressure 
cylinder Operating as a piston in a low-press 
ure cylinder, the low-pressure cylinder having 
Steam-passages communicating with ports or 
passages in the high-pressure cylinder and 
controlled by separate valves, the final ex 
... O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406707.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
F. C. DAMM. 
MACHINE FOR MOLDING PLASTIC MATERIAI.S. 
No. 406,707, 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
WITWESSAS, 
%3.4-7. 
WWENTOR. 
*o-st A TTORNEYs 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. C. DAMM. 
MACHINE FOR MOLDING PLASTIC MATERIALS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 406,707, 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
 
 
EEEEEFFE 
III, 
WITNASSAS, 
AAVEWTOAR. 
ATTOARMAY. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
F. C. DAMM. 
MACHINE FOR MOLDING PLASTIC MATERIALS. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
(No Model.) 
No. 406,707, 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
 
() 
sty & 
N. Peters, photo-Lithagrapher, washington, , 0. 
IWWEwTOR. 
sfueedoe? e aa------ 
ATTORNEPs 
(No Model.) 
No. 406,707, 
 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
F. C. DAMM. 
MACHINE FOR MOLDING PLASTIC MATERIALs, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
w 
ust 
O6(3)(6) ()() 
WITNESSES: 
a. 2 12.26, 
 
INVENTOR: 
a 
\%telou ( e. (all 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDRICK. C. DAMM, OF CILEVELAND, OHIO. 
MACHINE FOR MOLDING PLASTIC MATERIALs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,707, dated July 9, 1889. 
Application filed August 7, 1888, Serial No. 282,170, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
5 
O 
15 
25 
35 
frame. In the face of this wheel are formed 
To all whon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, FREDRICKC. DAMM, a a series of sockets d", in which are secured 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cleve- the shanks f of the intaglio dies or molds' F, 
as I prefer to call them, which project radially 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
from the face of said wheel. On one side of 
Improvements in Machines for Molding Plas 
this wheel areas many ratchet-teeth das there 
tic Materials, of which the following is a full, 
are molds, and in a plate d', bolted to the 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
outer side of the wheel, there is formed an 
had to the accompanying drawings, in which 
equal number of holes or sockets d'. 
I represents a cross-head, which is adapted 
Figure I is a side elevation of my improved 
to be moved up and down, and is guided in 
machine. Fig. 2 is a rear elevation thereof. 
said movement by tongues and grooves on 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view on the line 33 in 
the supports A A' and said cross-head, re 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a side elevation, and Fig. 5 
spectively. This cross-head is provided with 
a front elevation, of the same machine pro 
vided With an automatic sponging apparatus 
a socket i, into which the shankg of a die is 
for drying the molds. 
inserted, where it is retained by set-screw i. 
The mechanism whereby the reciprocating 
Like letters represent the same parts in the 
up-and-down movement is imparted to the 
Several figures. 
My invention relates to machines which are 
cross-head I and die G secured thereto con 
particularly adapted to pressing into the de 
sists of a toggle E. One arm e of this tog 
sired shape such plastic compositions as are 
gle is pivoted at its lower end to the cross 
head I and at its upper end between two tog 
now most extensively used in the manufac 
ture of flying targets-that is to say, compo 
gle-plates e. The other arine is pivoted to 
the said plates e' at its lower end and to the 
sitions which are plastic when heated and 
plate A at its upper end. Upon the outside 
which harden when cold. 
The drawings illustrating my invention rep 
of each of said plates e' is pivoted an arm O, 
the upper end of which is pivoted to the top 
resent a machine equipped for making such fly 
ing targets; but provision is made for chang 
plate A*. The purpose of these arms O is to 
prevent the toggle-plates e' from turning and 
ing the molds and die, so that other articles 
thereby affecting the even operation of the 
may be made thereon with equal facility. 
toggle. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
J represents a cylinder secured to the frame, 
a machine of increased capacity and durabil 
and Kapiston-head operating in Same. Steam, 
ity, simple in construction, and as nearly au 
air, water, or any other liquid under pressure 
tomatic in its action as practicable. 
is admitted to the cylinder through a pipei, 
To this end it consists in the construction, 
and exerts a continuing pressure against the 
combination, and arrangement of the parts, 
same. The piston-rod k extends through both 
as herein shown and described, and particu 
ends of said cylinder, for the purpose of 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
steadying its movement, and one end is con 
Referring to the drawings, which, as before 
nected by link 'to the plate e'. By this ar 
indicated, represent the best embodiment of 
rangement of parts the pressure from the 
my invention for the purpose named, theframe 
cylinder is always acting to straighten the 
will be seen to consist of two side supports A 
toggle and thereby move the die G down 
A", which are secured to a suitable bed, and 
a top plate A, connecting the upper ends 
The up or return movement of the 
ward. 
die G is produced by means of the cam L, 
thereof. Journaled in said frame is a hori 
which is keyed to the shaft C and which bears 
Zontal shaft B, to which is secured the driv 
against a friction-wheele, journaled to the 
ing-pulley b. A second shaft C is journaled 
plates e'. 
above the first, and motion is transmitted 
M represents a bar pivoted at its upper end 
from one to the other by means of the gears 
to the support A. A pawl n is pivoted be 
c and b. 
D represents a wheel secured to a horizon 
tween its ends to the lower end of the bar M, 
and is arranged to engage with ratchet-teeth 
tal shaft d, which is also journaled in said 
95 
OO 
406,707 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
. 
. 
d on the wheel D. A contractile coiled 
spring m' is stretched between the outer end 
of said pawl and the bar M, whereby the pawl 
is held continually in engagement with said 
ratchet-teeth. Secured to the shaft C is a 
wheel M, having on one side a cam-groove n, 
and a pin m, projecting from the bar M, is 
held in said groove. By this means the revo 
lution of the wheel N causes a backward and 
forward movement of the bar M at regular 
intervals, whereby the wheel D is intermit 
tently revolved the distance between, two 
contiguous molds on its face. 
The wheel D is held firmly, while the die 
G descends into the mold beneath it, by the 
following mechanism. A lever R. is pivoted 
to an arma, which is secured to the support 
A'. To the lower end of this lever is pivot 
ally connected a pin r, which passes through 
the support A and engages at the proper 
time with the sockets d' in the side of the 
wheel D. A constant pressure is exerted 
against the lever R to hold said pin in said 
sockets by a spring r', which is shown in the 
drawings as a flat spring bent between the 
upper end of the lever R and the support A. 
Secured to the shaft C outside of the lever R. 
is a wheel T, having a side cam t, which bears 
against the upper arm of said lever R and in 
its revolution forces in said upper arm, and 
thereby disengages the pin a from the wheel 
D, and then permits the spring r to force said 
pin into engagement therewith. 
When the parts above explained are assem 
bled as shown, the operation of the machine 
is as follows: As the shaft C, carrying the 
cam-wheels T, N, and L, is revolved, the tog 
gle-plate e' is permitted to move backward 
by the recession of the camL, and is so moved 
by the pressure against the piston K through 
the connecting parts. This forces the die G. 
downward into the mold beneath it, into which 
the plastic material has been placed, and the 
same is pressed into the proper shape. 
As the camL continues to revolve, it presses 
against the friction-wheel e and bends the 
toggle backward, thereby lifting the die. 
When the die begins its upward movement, 
the side cam ti draws the pin rout of the re 
taining-socket in the wheel D and permits 
the same to be moved. Immediately the cam 
N moves the bar M, and the pawl n, being in 
engagement with the ratchet d, revolves the 
wheel D until the next mold is beneath the 
die. By this time the cam i has so far re 
volved that the spring r' is permitted to move 
the lever R and force the retaining-pin r into 
engagement with the wheel, when the above 
described operation is repeated. 
In the manufacture of articles from mix 
tures which are made plastic by heat it is 
necessary that the die and molds be kept as 
cool as possible, so that the plastic material 
shall be hardened as soon as possible, and 
for the further reason that the material may 
not stick to the die and molds. I accomplish 
this result by forming a recess in the die G., 
leaving the walls as thin as consistent with 
the necessary strength, and fastening to said 
die over said recess a plate g. Suitable pack 
ing may be interposed between the recessed 
die and the plate g', and said plate may be 
secured in place by bolts or other approved 
means, whereby said recess is completely in 
closed and the escape of liquid therefrom, 
except through the pipe H, is prevented. The 
shankg of the die projects from and is made 
integral with the plate g above mentioned. 
A pipe H' leads into said recess, whereby 
water or other cooling material is forced into 
the same under sufficient pressure to insure 
that the waterpassing through it shall remain 
cold enough to keep the die cold. An outlet 
pipe II leads from said recess, and is so shaped 
that the water is discharged directly into one 
or more of the molds containing the molded 
article, whereby said articles are cooled and 
set, so that they may be removed after two 
or three movements of the wheel D, and the 
molds are also cooled for the next operation. 
If the recess in the die were not confined 
by the top plate, the passage of the Water 
through it would be productive of some good 
results; but no pressure could be used to force 
it through quickly, and the water would, by 
reason of its slow movement, become grad 
ually heated, so that in time it would have 
little or no effect in cooling the die. The re 
sult of this condition of things would be that 
the material would stick to the die and molds, 
and the material would not be cooled enough 
to hold its shape after the die was removed. 
Several distinct advantages over other pos 
sible methods results from the arrangement 
of the molds on the edge of a vertical wheel. 
First, the pressure of the die is axial and is 
borne by the shaft of the wheel, and there is 
no tendency to bend or distort the wheel, as 
there would be if the molds projected verti 
cally from a horizontal wheel. Again, when, 
as in this machine, water is used to cool the 
molded article, the molds will become partly 
filled therewith; but in the revolution of the 
wheel the molds become inverted and the wa 
ter is drained out, while in machines where 
the molds remain vertical this water has to 
be sponged out or removed in some other man 
ner. In this machine it is better to use a 
sponge, not to remove any considerable amount 
of water, but to dry the molds of the drops 
which adhere thereto. In order that this may 
be done automatically, hang a bar S to a pivot 
on the outside of the side support A and con 
nect its lower end to sliding bar U, which 
slides horizontally in the straps it. Upon the 
outer end of the bar U, which is bent around 
in front of the molds on the Wheel D, is a re 
volving spindle at', to which is secured a small 
pulley V, which is driven by a belt. On the 
inner end of this spindle is secured a swab 
W. A contractile spring X is stretched be: 
tween the lower part of the bar S and stud 
on the support A, and acts to draw the bar 
U forward until the revolving swab enters 
75 
95 
OO 
TO 
II5 
I 25 
6o 
65 
8 
a reciprocating die having an inclosed recess, 
and outlet and inletpipes to said recess, where- 55 
by a fluid may be forced through said recess 
under pressure, the outlet-pipe being so 
formed that it will discharge said fluid into 
one or more of the molds containing the molded 
articles, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
4. In a machine for molding plastic material, 
a vertical wheel having a series of molds on 
the edge thereof and having a series of 
ratcht-teeth on said edge, with a grooved cam, 
a pivoted bar, a pin secured to said bar and 
operating in the groove of said cam, and a 
pawl pivoted to said bar, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
5. In a machine for molding plastic material, 
the combination of a reciprocating die, a ver 
tical wheel carrying a series of molds and hav 
ing a plate secured to the side thereof, said 
plate being provided with sockets d', and 
mechanism for revolving said wheel intermit 
tently, with lever, a pin for engaging said Sock 
ets, and a cam for moving said lever in one 
direction and a spring for moving it in the 
opposite direction, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
6. In a machine for molding plastic material, 
the combination of a cross-head and means for 
guiding the same, and a die secured thereto, 
with a toggle, a cylinder, piston and piston 
rod, a link connecting said toggle and piston 
rod, and cam L, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
7. In a machine for molding plastic material, 
a wheel and a series of molds secured thereto, 
combined with a revolving swab and mechan 
ism for drawing said swab into and out of 
said molds, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
S. In a machine for Inolding plastic material, 
a wheel and a series of molds secured thereto, 
combined with a pivoted arm, a horizontalbar 
pivotally connected therewith, a revolving 
SWab carrying spindle journaled in said bar, 
a spring for moving said arm in one direction, 
and a revolving cam for moving it in the op 
posite direction, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
FREDRICK C. DAMM. . 
75 
. 
9o 
95 
Witnesses: 
E. L. THURSTON, 
W. J. BAINBRIDGE, 
o 
ICC 
406,707 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
m 
one of the molds, and in revolving wipes it 
dry. A cam X" on the shaft C, pushing 
against the bar U, moves said swab out of 
the mold just before the movement of the 
wheel D begins, and permits the spring X to 
draw it into the mold just after the wheel has 
finished its movement. 
The movement of the 
swab into the mold by spring force permits 
the use of the same swab until it is entirely 
worn out, because the spring will always draw 
it into the mold as far as it will go. 
In the foregoing description I have confined 
myself, for the most part, to a description of 
the particular machine shown, which is, as I 
believe, the best embodiment of my inven 
tion; but I believe that various modifications 
of the machine as therein shown, some in 
Wolving invention and some the result of 
mere mechanical skill, may be made in said 
machine, while still embodying parts of the 
invention herein shown; but I have not in 
tended, nor do I wish to be understood, from 
the description, as imposing any further limi 
tation upon the invention than as distinctly 
expressed in the claims. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for molding plastic mate 
rial, the combination of a vertical wheel and 
mechanism for imparting to said wheel an in 
termittent movement and for holdingitfirmly 
While the material is being pressed into shape, 
with a reciprocating hollow die, outlet and in 
let pipes to said die, whereby a cooling-fluid 
may be kept constantly circulating through 
said die, said outlet-pipe being arranged to 
discharge said fluid into one or more of the 
molds containing the molded articles, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. In a machine for molding plastic material, 
a die consisting of a recessed bottom part, a 
plate secured to said bottom part and having 
a shank integral there with, and orifices lead 
ing to said recess for the attachment of out 
let and inlet pipes, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
3. In a machine for molding plastic material, . 
the combination of a vertical wheel having 
molds secured radially to the face thereof, and 
mechanism for imparting to said wheel an in 
termittent movement and for holding it firmly 
while the material is being pressed into shape, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406807.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C. WHITE & A. R. MIDDLETON. 
GAS ENGINE 
Patented July 9, 1889. 
sal -4 
% 
% 
No. 406,807 
 
  
 
 
O N 
SN 
t $ N NIH 
BN 
NN 
le 
NN% 
NN NN, 
NNNN 
NNNN, 
NNNN. 
 
s 
 
% 
% 
5 
 
NN is 
NZ 
N N353 N 
a's) N NZ 
ENN 
INN 
zS 
S NN 
zS l 
v3's 
 
sizes 
Ny 
| 
 
 
 
 
 
 
gy (INNS 
 
a/ 
N 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
<2 
% 
(No Model.) 
C, WHITE & A. R. MIDDLETON, 
- 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
a 
No. 406,807, 
GAS ENGINE, 
Patented July 9, 1889, 
eras. 
Sg 
2A77, 
re. 
E. 47 is 
A. 7A 7/A 
 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES WHITE AND ARTHUR. R. MIDDLETON, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
GAS-ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,807, dated July 9, 1889. 
Application filed January 18, 1889, Serial No. 296,728, (No model.) 
IO 
To all vi?ion, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CHARLES WHITE and 
ARTHUR. R. MIDDLETON, of Baltimore, in the 
State of Maryland, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Gas-Engines; and we 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
Our invention is an improved gas-engine, 
and is designed to simplify the construction 
of this class of engines, to economize in the 
amount of gas used, to lessen the number of 
parts and to make the engine in compact 
form, to provide for the automatic governing 
of the engine without exterior connections to 
operating parts, to prevent the discharge of 
any of the consumed products into the shop 
or place where the engine is situated, and to 
provide, generally, an effective construction 
of the operating parts, whereby the Working 
efficiency of the engine is largely increased 
over the known forms of such engines, while 
the cost of construction is very materially di 
minished. 
Our invention includes in its structure a 
cylinder with a piston therein connected by 
25 
means of a pitman or a piston-rod to the driv 
- ing-shaft, with an explosion-chamber in rear 
of the piston having a suitable fuel-supply 
leading thereto; an igniting-orifice leading to 
the chamber; an auxiliary piston within the 
explosion-chamber, acting as an automatic 
governor for the amount of fuel admitted to 
the explosion-chamber and controlling, also, 
the igniting of the fuel, and, finally, of means 
for controlling the movement of the auxili 
ary piston. 
Our invention consists in the Various de 
vices and combination of devices hereinafter 
described, and particularly pointed Out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings accompanying this appli 
cation, Figure 1 represents a longitudinal Ver 
tical section of the cylinder of the engine, 
with some of the parts in side elevation. Fig. 
2 is a perspective view of the same. Fig. 3 is 
a side elevation of a compound engine, tWO 
cylinders being here represented. 
While we have shown the invention as ap 
plied to but a single and double cylinder en 
gine, it will be understood that any number 
of cylinders may be used and the connection 
3O 
35 
45 
s 
55 
65 
- 
ae, 
to the driving-shaft be made in any suitable 
In the drawings we have represented the 
frame of the engine at A, and this may be 
either of the form shown or made in any way 
Suited to the requirements of the engine and 
the place where it is to be located. The cyl 
inder of the engine is represented at B, and 
is preferably jacketed, having an interior 
space between the inner and outer parts a, b 
thereof, and while ordinarily cylinders of this 
kind are kept cool by the circulation of water 
through the Space We prefer to establish the 
circulation of air by providing an opening c 
at one end of the cylinder in the outer jacket 
and an opening d at the opposite end and on 
the upper side, or on the side opposite to that 
in which the opening coccurs. The opening d. 
may be in connection with a suitable flue, in 
which may be placed an ordinary suction 
fan to induce the circulation. We may, how 
ever, use the Water-circulation; but we pre 
fer the use of air either in the manner above 
described Or in any other Suitable manner. 
Within the cylinder B is located the piston 
C, which has sliding movement back and forth 
within the cylinder, being fitted thereto by 
Suitable packing, so as to have a gas-tight 
connection therewith. This piston has a 
flanged forward part, which provides a long 
bearing in connection with the cylinder-walls, 
but at the same time does not add materially 
to the Weight of the piston. At the rear part 
of the piston a similar flange isformed, though 
not quite to the extent of the flange on the 
front part. A piston-rod D, provided with a 
spherical end, has its bearing in the piston at 
about the center thereof, resting against the 
seat e, of Babbitt metal preferably, and with 
a collar?having an interior periphery adapted 
to the spherical end of the piston-rod, fitting 
the opening made in the body of the piston 
to allow for the insertion of the spherical end 
of the said piston-rod. This collar f is held 
in place by Screws and reduces the size of the 
Opening to leSS than the diameter of the 
Spherical end of the piston-rod. The outer 
part of the inner periphery of the collarf is 
made flaring, so as to permit the necessary 
movement of the piston-rod as it assumes 
different angles in its reciprocation in pass 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
2 
406,80? 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ing around the circle described by the crank 
shaft. The forward end of the cylinder is 
open, while the rear end is closed by a head 
g, which is securely bolted in place, and this 
head is provided with a hollow extension h, 
which carries a stem i, interposed between a 
lever k, and an auxiliary piston E within the 
cylinder and in rear of the piston C. This 
piston E is also fitted snugly to the inner pe 
riphery of the cylinder, and is separated from 
the main piston C by means of an interposed 
stem l, which is adjustably supported on the 
rear side directly in the center of the piston 
C, being provided on its rear face with an in 
clined or tapering part, which rests against 
a corresponding seat formed in the hub of 
the auxiliary piston E. It will thus be seen 
that while the piston C does not control the 
movement of the piston E it regulates and 
limits the distance between the two, and this 
distance may be increased or diminished by 
adjusting the stem l. The space between the 
two pistons constitutes the explosion-cham 
ber, as will be hereinafter described. The 
fuel is led to the cylinder through the head g 
in rear of the piston E by means of a pipe in, 
which may connect with any suitable gas 
supply or other explosive mixture suitable 
for the purpose, this pipe being provided with 
a suitable check-valve, as shown at n. The 
piston E is provided with openings passing 
through from its rear to its front side, these 
openings being covered by valves o, which 
normally prevent the passage of the mixture 
therethrough to the explosion-chamber. 
The lever k is pivoted upon the frame of 
the machine at 1, and in connection with the 
said lever is a rod 2, pivoted to the lever cate 
3, and carrying upon its other end a spring 4, 
which is under tension between a stud 5, 
bearing against the frame of the engine, and 
a regulating-screw 6, and this end of the rod 2 
is supported by means of a chain 7. The 
tension of the spring 4 may obviously be 
regulated by the screw 6. 
It will thus be seen 
that the rod k is under tension of the spring 
4 through the connections described, and the 
upper end of the lever k passes through a slot 
in the extension, h of the head, and is pro 
vided With a rounded head which fits a cor 
responding recess in a sliding block p, fitted 
to move within the extension h, and to be in 
connection with the spindle i, so that through 
the movement of the lever k the spindle is 
put under tension, and as the end of this spin 
dle connects with the center of the rear face 
of the piston E the said piston is likewise 
placed under tension, and its tendency is to 
advance toward the front or open end of the 
cylinder, according to the amount of move 
ment allowed in this direction by the move 
ment of the piston C as it advances forward. 
For igniting the charge within the explo 
sion-chamber, we provide a burner r, which is 
located at the mouth of a tubes, which termi 
nates in a chimney, and through the horizon 
tal part of this pipe extends a tube t, which 
passes through the shell of the cylinder to 
the top of a horizontal recess in which is a 
sliding valve or plug. An opening is formed 
in line with the opening of the pipe t through 
to the interior of the cylinder, and the sliding 
valve or plug u, normally closes this opening 
by means of a spring in its head, as shown at 
8. The pipe t extends entirely through the 
pipes, and has an enlarged spherical cham 
bert' on its upper end. When the tubet be 
comes heated by the flame of the burner r, 
and when the valve u is open, some of the 
mixture from the explosion-chamber, being 
under compression, as hereinafter to be de 
scribed, rushes into the tube t and through 
the same to the chamber upon the other side 
of the line of the burner, and the mixture, 
coming in contact with the heated tube, is ig 
nited and an explosion follows, which, being 
directed by reason of the location of the 
opening from the tube t into the center of the 
explosion - chamber, causes a uniform and 
regular explosion, which thus produces, by 
having the ignition take place in the center 
of the mixture, a continuously-acting eXpan 
sive force, which operates until the entire 
charge has been exploded and the chamber 
has increased by the forward movement of 
the piston C under the action of the explo 
sion. We have found that by extending the 
tube i entirely across the pipe S all shock is 
prevented and there is no reactionary effect, 
as the first rush of the mixture through the 
tube it is not immediately checked, but some 
of it allowed to pass through to the chamber 
formed upon the end of the tube. 
Supposing the parts to be in their normal 
condition, with the crank-shaft on the dead 
center, as shown in Fig. 1. In the condition 
of the parts as thus shown a charge of the 
mixture is within the explosion-chamber be 
tween the pistons C and E, this charge hav 
ing been compressed in the movement of the 
iston C rearward, as will be more fully ex 
plained, and the valve it has been retracted 
by reason of the face of the piston E having 
come in contact with the tang 9 of the said 
valve as the said piston E was moved to the 
rear limit of its movement. The charge is 
thus ignited and the explosion creates an ex 
pansive force, which advances the piston C 
with a rapidity which is controlled entirely 
by the amount of work which the engine has 
to do. This expansive force also keeps the aux 
iliary piston pressed closely against the cyl 
inder-head, as it exceeds the power exerted 
by the spring 4 through its connection. The 
piston C continues to advance under the ac 
tion of the expansive force until it reaches 
and uncovers the exhaust-passage 10, which 
leads to a suitable chimney. The instant the 
exhaust is uncovered to the interior of the 
cylinder a vent is formed for the exploded 
mixture, the pressure is removed from the 
auxiliary piston, and the Spring 4, through 
the long arm formed by the lever k, forces 
the piston forward, quickly expelling an 
7 O 
75 
9. 
95 
OC 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
M 
M 
. 
406,807 
75 
(5 
O 
amount of foul mixture in its movement equal 
in amount to the fresh mixture admitted in 
rear of said piston through the check-valven. 
It will be understood that at this time 
namely, during the time when the exhaustis 
open-the crank of the piston is making 
about a quarter-turn in passing the opposite 
center, and the movement of the piston is 
very slight, so that the exhaust remains un 
covered a sufficient length of time for the 
Of course the proportion of move 
purpose. 
ment of the piston may be changed by locat 
ing the exhaust portin a different relation to 
the limit of movement of the piston. While 
the port remains open the auxiliary piston is 
allowed its movement, and the amount of this 
movement, and consequently the amount of 
the charge admitted, is regulated by the 
movement of the main piston. 
In order to prevent the escape of the ex 
ploded gases into the building or shop where 
the engine is located, the exhaust-passage is 
so located relatively to the piston C that it is 
never uncovered toward the open end of the 
cylinder. As the piston Eadvances, its valves 
are kept closed by the movement of the pis 
ton against the contents of the cylinder, 
and into the chamber behind the piston E a 
fresh charge of gas or other mixture en 
ters, lifting the check-valve in. As soon 
as the piston C begins its return and passes 
the exhaust-port, closing the same, the move 
ment of the piston E is gradually checked 
by the compression between the two pis 
tons of the exploded mixture which has not 
been displaced by the forward movement 
of the auxiliary piston, and this serves 
as a cushion between the two and prevents 
any shock, and this compression increases 
until the stem l comes in contact with the 
face of the piston E. As the backward move 
ment of the piston C continues, it forces back 
the piston E, and the new charge which has 
entered behind it passes through the valve in 
said piston to the Space between the piston 
E and the piston C, the escape of the mixture 
through its pipe m being cut off by the drop 
ping of its check-valve n. The new charge 
is therefore compressed before the piston C 
reaches the limit of its rearward movement, 
and when it reaches this limit and is ready 
for another impulse the valve it, which closes 
automatically under the action of its spring. 
as soon as the piston E begins its forward 
movement, is again retracted and another 
explosion follows. 
It will be seen that the auxiliary piston E 
serves as a perfect governor and is automatic. 
in its action, requiring no independent con 
nection with operating parts of the machine, 
as is now the case with all governors for gas 
engines of which we have knowledge. As the 
piston E is only moved by its spring after the 
exhaust-port is opened, it will be seen that all 
its movement must take place during the pas 
sage of the crank-pin over the opposite cen 
...ter, or, in other words, while the exhaust is 
open, for as soon as this is closed the com 
pression between the two pistons effectually 
prevents further advance of the auxiliary pis 
ton. It therefore follows that as the space 
between the head of the cylinder and the face 
of the piston E measures the amount of the 
mixture for the next charge the rapidity of 
movement of the main piston in closing the 
exhaust-opening, which is of course governed 
by the work being done, will regulate the 
force of the next explosion by allowing the 
auxiliary piston to move forward a greater or 
less degree. If, therefore, the first charge was 
too great for the work being done by the en 
gine, the main piston will have a more rapid - 
movement and Will close the exhaust in less 
time, and thereby limit the movement of the 
piston E and thus lessen the amount of the 
next charge. If, upon the other hand, the 
first charge was hardly sufficient for the work 
being done, then the movement of the piston 
C will be so slow as to allow the piston E to 
advance a greater distance, and the next 
charge will be larger and of greater power. 
In order that the governing action of this aux 
iliary piston may be observed, we have pro 
vided an indicator on one or both sides of the 
extension h, as shown in Fig. 2, this consist 
ing of the numerals shown, and we regulate 
the tension of the spring so that the move 
ment of the lever k to the zero-point gives a 
charge sufficient to overcome the friction of 
the machine, and the movement of this lever 
to the points 1, 2, or 3 may indicate the num 
ber of horse-powers or any fraction thereof 
which the machine is working to. 
Gas-engines as ordinarily constructed re 
quire the combined efforts of several persons 
to start them; but the improved engine which 
is the subject of this application can be started 
by a single person grasping the lever k at the 
hand-piece 10 and drawingit backward, which 
gives movement to the piston E and ignites 
the charge. 
In Fig. 3 we have represented the engines 
as duplicated, one facing the other, with their 
piston-rods extending in a straight line, with 
a yoke between having a vertical opening in 
which plays the crank-pin of the disks on the 
main shaft. 
It will of course be understood that for 
other classes of work requiring a plurality of 
engines they may be arranged side by side or 
opposite each other and connected to the driv 
ing-shaft by any suitable means. 
We dispense with the heavy balance-wheel 
ordinarily used and provide two small fly 
wheels 11, between which a pin 12 extends, 
being riveted or otherwise secured on its outer 
ends, and around this pin we place a bushing 
13, of hardened steel, and this bushing receives 
the wear from the piston-rod, the parts of 
which encircle it. 
While the auxiliary piston acts as an auto 
matic governor, in case very accurate regula 
tion is required with the least amount of va 
riation we may apply a governor of any suit 
. 
35 
45 
55 
95 
IOC) 
IO 
I 25 
S. 
4 
406,807 
able or well-known construction, in connec 
tion with the fuel-supply pipe, to limit the 
supply according to the requirements of the 
engine. 
5 
15 
What we claim is 
1. A gas-engine consisting of a cylinder, a 
reciprocating piston within said cylinder, an 
independent auxiliary piston separated from 
the main piston, the space between the two 
Io forming the explosion-chamber, a fuel-supply 
entering the cylinder in rear of the auxiliary 
piston, and a device for moving the auxiliary 
piston in one direction independent of the 
main piston, substantially as described. 
2. Agas-engine consisting of a cylinder hav 
ing main and auxiliary pistons, the said pis 
tons being separated from each other by a 
projection on one extending beyond the line 
of the face of said piston, the space between 
2O the two pistons constituting the explosion 
chamber, means for igniting the charge, means 
for giving movement to the auxiliary piston 
in one direction independent of the main pis 
ton, a fuel-supply opening into the cylinder 
25 in rear of the auxiliary piston, and a passage 
therefrom to the front of said piston to the 
combustion - chamber, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a gas-engine, a cylinder, a piston there." 
3o in, an auxiliary piston separated from the 
main piston by a projection from one of said: 
pistons, the explosion-chamber being formed 
between the two pistons, a fuel-Supply open-: 
ing into the cylinder in rear of the auxiliary 
35 piston, means for igniting the charge, and 
means for operating the auxiliary piston in 
one direction, consisting of a spring and an 
operating connection between said spring 
and said piston, substantially as described. 
4. In a gas-engine, a cylinder, a main pis 
ton within the same, an auxiliary piston, 
means for moving said auxiliary piston in 
one direction, consisting of a Spring and con 
nections therefrom to the said piston, a fuel 
45 supply in rear of said piston, passages for 
said supply to the explosion-chamber, means: 
for igniting the charge, and an adjustable ex 
tension projecting from one of the cylinders 
and separating the same, the space between 
So the two constituting the explosion-chamber, 
substantially as described. 
5. In a gas-engine, a cylinder, a main pis 
ton in the same, an auxiliary piston Sepa 
rated from the main piston, the Space be 
55 tween the two forming the explosion-cham 
ber, means for moving said auxiliary piston 
in one direction, consisting of a spring and 
connection therewith to the piston, a fuel 
supply in rear of said piston, passages for 
6o said supply to the explosion-chamber, and 
means for igniting the charge, substantially 
as described. 
6. In a gas-engine, a cylinder, apiston there 
in, an auxiliary piston, said pistons being 
65 separated to form an explosion - chamber, 
means for automatically operating the auxil 
iary piston, a fuel-supply, and igniting means 
4o 
o 
controlled by the said auxiliary piston, sub 
stantially as described. 
7. In a gas-engine, a cylinder, a main pis 
ton within the same, an auxiliary piston, said 
pistons being separated to form the explo 
sion-chamber by a projection extending from 
one of said pistons, means for igniting the 
charge, a fuel-supply, means for advancing 
the auxiliary piston, and valved openings in 
said piston, substantially as described. 
8. In a gas-engine, a cylinder, a piston with 
in the same, an auxiliary piston operated in 
dependently in one direction, said pistons 
being separated to form the explosion-cham 
ber by a projection extending from one of 
said pistons, valved openings in said auxil 
iary piston, a fuel-supply in rear of said pis 
ton, and a check-valve in the fuel-supply 
pipe, substantially as described. 
9. In a gas-engine, a cylinder, a piston with 
in the same, an auxiliary piston, said pistons 
being separated by a projection from one of 
the pistons, means for advancing the auxil 
iary piston, a fuel-supply, igniting means, and 
an opening leading therefrom to the explo 
sion-chamber, and a valve for said opening 
controlled by the auxiliary piston, substan 
tially as described. 
10. In the described gas-engine, a main pis 
ton, means for igniting the charge, consisting 
of a burner, a chimney therefor, a tube pass 
ing through the chimney and extending into 
the shell of the cylinder, a passage leading. 
therefrom to the interior of the cylinder, a 
valve for controlling said opening, and an aux 
iliary piston for operating said valve, sub 
stantially as described. 
11. In combination, a cylinder, a main pis 
ton, an auxiliary piston, a separating-stem 
between the two, an igniting-tube, a fuel-sup 
ply, a spindle bearing against the rear face 
of the auxiliary piston, a spring, and a piv 
oted lever under the tension of said spring 
and in connection with the spindle for ad 
vancing the said auxiliary piston, substan 
tially as described. 
12. In combination with the cylinder, the 
pistons C and E, igniting means, a valve con 
trolling the ignition of the charge, said valves 
being operated by the rearward movement of 
the piston E, a lever k, and a positive con 
nection between said lever and the piston E, 
whereby the said piston may be retracted by 
hand operation of the lever k and the engine 
thereby started by the ignition of the charge, 
substantially as described. 
13. In a gas-engine, a cylinder, a piston 
within the same, an auxiliary piston, an ex 
plosion-chamber between the two pistons, a 
fuel-supply, igniting means with an opening 
therefrom leading to the cylinder, and a valve 
for said opening normally closed and opened 
positively by the backward movement of the 
auxiliary piston, Substantially as described. 
14. A gas-engine consisting of a cylinder, a 
main piston within the same, an auxiliary pis 
ton in rear of the main piston, an explosion 
75 
95 
OO 
ITO 
1. I5 
I 25 
I 30 
 
406,807. 
5 
16. A gas-engine consisting of a cylinder, a 
main piston within the same, an auxiliary pis 
ton in rear of main piston, a fuel-supply pipe, 
an igniting-tube, means for moving the aux 
iliary piston, consisting of the spring andle 
ver k and connections therefrom to the said 
piston, an extension from the cylinder-head, 
and a scale thereon, the lever k being adapted 
to act as an indicator, substantially as de 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, 
Scribed. 
25 
- 
CHARLES WHITE. 
ARTHUR, R, MIDDLETON. 
Witnesses: 
MURRAY HANSON, 
WILLIAM. H. BERRY. 
O 
chamber between the two, a fuel-opening in 
rear of the auxiliary piston, an igniting-open 
ing, an exhaust-opening arranged relatively 
to the main piston, whereby it is uncovered 
in the outward movement of said piston, and 
means for advancing the auxiliary piston as 
soon as the exhaust is uncovered, substan 
tially as described. 
15. A gas-engine consisting of a cylinder, a 
main piston, an auxiliary piston, a fuel-open 
ing, an igniting-opening, an exhaust-port ar 
ranged relatively to the outward limit of the 
main piston, so as to be uncovered in said 
movement, and means for giving said auxil 
iary piston a quick forward movement as the 
port is uncovered, consisting of the spring, 
the lever k, the rod pivoted to the lever k at 
its lower end to form a long arm, and a con 
nection between the lever k and the piston, 
substantially as described. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US406907.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. HOLMES. 
GRAIN BINDER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 406,907, 
Patented July 16, 1889. 
WITNESSES = 
Mz.4 
INVENT OFr= 
7.6m 7./6%les 
 
(No Model.) 
W. M. HOLMES. 
GRAIN BINDER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No, 406,907, 
Patented July 16, 1889. 
WITNESSEs = 
4%%pae. 
INVENTOR 
7n 7.46%ze, 
 
N. PETERS. photo-ithographer, Washingtan, . C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WATSON M. HOLMES, OF HOOSICK FALLS, NEW YORK. 
GRAN-BINDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 406,907, dated July 16, 1889. 
Application filed January 9, 1888, Serial No. 260,265. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WATSON M. HoLMEs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hoo 
sick Falls, county of Rensselaer, and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Grain - Binders, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this 
specification. 
My invention consists in certain novel mech 
anism for holding the compressor, as well as 
the drop-board at the outer edge of the 
binding-receptacle, in an upright position dur 
ing the formation and binding of the bundle, 
which holding mechanism is overcome by the 
descent of the needle-arm to permit the dis 
charge of the bundle, and is again locked in 
position by the further descent of the needle 
arm for the succeeding bundle. The com 
pressor is mounted opposite the needle-arm, 
and is adapted to sustain the force exerted 
against it by the needle-arm in placing the 
band around the bundle, and the drop-board 
extends along the Outer edge of the binding 
receptacle, and its function is to hold the 
heads and butts of the bundle upon the bind 
ing-receptacle. In many machines now in use 
the compressor, as well as the drop-board, is 
mounted upon a rock-shaft, and the requisite 
imotions are imparted thereto through the me 
dium of a pitman-connection with the binder 
driving mechanism, in which case some power 
is necessary to maintain the compressor in an 
upright position during the formation and 
binding of the bundle. In my device the 
compressor and drop-board are independently 
mounted and are locked ill all upright posi 
tion during the formation and binding of the 
bundle, and in this way power is economized. 
In the accompanying drawings Only so much 
of an automatic binder is shown as necessary 
to illustrate my invention. 
Similar letters of Ireference in the various 
figures indicate like parts. 
Figure 1 is a lear elevation, the compressor 
and drop-board being in the position they oc 
cupy during the formation and binding of the 
bundle, and the needle-arm being in a posi 
tion of rest beneath the binding - platform. 
Fig. 2 is a rear elevation, the needle-arm be 
ing shown as descending and the compressor 
and drop-board being shown as having partly 
fallen. Fig. 3 is a rear elevation of the nee. 
dle-arm, compressor, and drop-board during 
the discharge of the bundle. Figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, 
S, and 9 are detail views. 
E is the vertical post of the usual binder 
frame, in the lower horizontal limb of which 
the needle-arm shaft F has its bearings. Se 
cured to the rear end of the shaft F is the 
needle-arm G. 
C is the binder-platform, and S a hinged 
cleat forming part of such binder-platform, 
the needle-arm ascending through a slot in 
the hinged cleat to place the twine in the 
knotter-jaws. (Not shown in the drawings.) 
A is one of the cross-supports of the binder 
platform C. 
Firmly secured to the outer end of the sill 
A is the casting H, extending upwardly and 
supporting the bindling-platform. The cast 
ing II is formed with the bearing for the 
short shaft h, and, extending inwardly, forms 
a bearing for the needle-arm shaft and the 
rocking arm O. (See Figs. 1, 2, and 3.) 
Mounted on the shaft h; Secured in casting 
II, is the casting I, (see Fig. 2.) which is per 
mitted a rocking motion on shaft h, as will be 
hereinafter more fully explained, the bearing 
passing over the shaft, Casting I is pro 
vided with the holes ' 
', in which the 
drop-board J is secured to I. The compressor 
K (see Fig. 6) is pivoted at le to the arm i* of 
the casting I at '. A pin passes through the 
hole l in the rod L and through the hole lin 
the compressor, which has a longitudinal slot 
k' for the reception of the flat head of the 
rod L, which extends outwardly through the 
hole 
in I. The rod L is formed with the 
lugs or shoulders ll, which, being brought 
in legister with the slots ' ', permit the rod 
L to be inserted through the hole i, and the 
lugs ll, being turned out of register, prevent 
the rod L from escaping from I, permitting 
the rod a movement toward L. by compressing 
the spling M, interposed between the com 
pressor and casting I. 
The pin or rod L is provided with two or more 
holes ll', in order to diminish or increase the 
size of the binding-receptacle. To the cast 
ing II at 0 is pivoted the rocking arm O, and 
' 
O 
25 
35 
o 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
2 
406,907 
O 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
its forward end is connected to the casting I 
by the pitman L", (see Fig. 4.) the pitman be 
ing secured in the hole of the downwardly 
projecting ear i. The arm O on the inner 
end is provided with the spring-cam projec 
tion P. (See Fig. 4.) The spring-cam P is 
pivoted to the arm. O by the longitudinal 
pivot p and is formed with the stop p, fitting 
over the arm O and limiting the movement of 
the spring-cam in one direction. Between a 
downwardly-projecting ear p on cam P and 
the lug o', cast on O, is interposed the spiral 
spring O. The arm O is furthermore pro 
vided with the friction-roller r. (See Fig. 5.) 
Secured to the needle-arm is the casting R, 
by the bolt g and curved slot g in R., by 
which construction the casting R can be ad 
justed in relation to the needle-arm. The 
casting R is on the side of the needle-arm ad 
jacent to the rocking arm O and is formed 
with the downwardly-extending projection ', 
on the convex surface of which the roller in 
rides, its purpose being to secure a gradual 
descent of the compressor and drop-board con 
temporaneous with the descent of the needle 
arm. The casting R is also provided with 
the friction-roller r, which operates the rock 
ing arm O. The casting II is formed with 
the stoph', against which the outer end of the 
rocking arm O abuts when in position shown 
in Fig. 1, and When in this position the at 
tachment of the pitman L' to arm O is below 
a line joining the point O and i, or past the 
center of the toggle-joint formed by O and L', 
and consequently any movement of the com 
pressor K backwardly only tends to force the 
forward end of the arm O against the stop h. 
It will be observed that by forming the cast 
ing H with a bearing for the needle-arm shaft, 
the pivot of the arm O, and for the shaft I, 
the devices are always kept in proper po 
sition as regards One another, and are not 
liable to displacement. 
The Operation of the device is as follows: 
Suppose the parts to be in position represented 
in Fig. 1, the compressor and drop-board be 
ing locked in the position therein shown by the 
toggle-joint at O', which has been moved past 
the center. The grain is forced by a system 
of packers (not shown in drawings) against 
the compressor and beneath an automatic 
tripping-lever until sufficient has accumu 
lated to overcome the trip, and the needle 
arm G is set in motion in any well-known 
Way and compresses the bundle against the 
compressor K, which is permitted a yielding 
movement backwardly to accommodate an 
unusually large bundle against the spring M. 
During the upward movement of the needle 
arm thefriction-roller r, secured to casting R, 
strikes against the inclined face of the cam 
P and forces it away from the needle-arm, 
compressing the Spring o, and the lock at the 
joint O is not disturbed. After the sheaf has 
been bound the friction-roller 
strikes the 
upper edge of the cam P, moved into its path 
by spring O, and, through the cam, forces the 
inner end of arm O downwardly and its outer 
end upwardly, thereby overcoming the lock 
at O' and permitting the compressor K and 
drop-board J to fall; but, the roller 'riding 
on the convex surface of the projection r, 
the downward movement of the compressor 
IK and drop-board J is prevented from taking 
place too quickly, and is made in the same 
time as that of the needle-arm. When the 
compressor and drop-board have fallen, the 
discharger T (see Fig. 3) ejects the bundle 
from the machine. As the needle-arm con 
tinues its descent after the discharge of the 
bundle, the friction-roller r bears upon the 
arm O outside its pivot O and forces it down 
ward and locks it against the stop h", ready 
for the succeeding gavel. 
It will be noticed that the compressor and 
drop-board are not connected with any of the 
moving parts of the binder, but are main 
tained in an upright position by the lock at 
o, and that no power is taken from any of 
the moving parts of the machine to keep them 
in an upright position against the force ex 
erted by the needle-arm in compressing the 
bundle. 
In the accompanying drawings I have shown 
the compressor locked in an upright position 
during the binding of the bundle by a toggle 
joint formed by the rocking arm O and the 
link connecting the rocking arm at its for 
Ward end and the drop-board support to which 
the compressor is pivoted; but I do not wish 
to be understood as limiting myself herein to 
this particular manner of forming the toggle 
joint, as it may be formed in a variety of 
ways without departing from the spirit of my 
invention. 
IHaving now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the pivoted com 
preSSOr, of a toggle-joint to lock the com 
preSSO) in an upright position, and a projec 
tion on the needle-arm adapted during the 
initial descent thereof to engage a rocking 
bar forming part of said toggle-joint on one 
side of its pivot to break the lock and on the 
further descent of the needle-arm to engage 
the rocking bar on the other side of its pivot 
to again lock the compressor in an upright 
position, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. The combination of the compressor rock 
ing On a pivot at the outer edge of the binder 
platform, a rocking arm pivoted to the ma 
chine beneath the binder-platform, interme 
diate mechanism between the rocking arm 
and the compressor and forming therewith a 
toggle-joint, a Spring-cam projection on the 
rocking arm, and a roller on the needle-arm 
adapted to engage the spring-cam during the 
descent of the needle-arm, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination, with the shaft mounted 
at the Outer edge of the binder-platform in 
dependently of the binder-driving mechanism, 
75 
95 
OO 
Io5 
TO 
II5 
f 25 
 
406,907 
3 
gage the inner end of the rocking arm dur 
ing the descent of the needle-arm to over 
come the lock formed by the toggle-joint, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
7. The combination, with the needle-arm 
and the compressor, of a rocking arm pivoted 
to the machine beneath the binder-platform, 
intermediate mechanism interposed between 
the rocking arm and the compressor and 
forming therewith a toggle-joint, and an ad 
justable piece secured to the needle-arm to 
engage the inner end of the rocking arm to 
overcome the lock formed by the toggle-joint, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
8. The combination, with the compressor 
and the rocking arm pivoted beneath the 
binder-platform to the machine and interme 
diate mechanism interposed between the rock 
ing arm and the compressor and forming there 
with a toggle-joint by which the compressor 
is locked in an upright position, of a projec 
tion on the needle-arm to overcome the lock 
formed by the toggle-joint by engaging with 
the rocking arm at its inner end during a por 
tion of the descent of the needle-arm and . 
to again lock the compressor in position by 
engaging on the further descent of the nee 
dle-arm with the rocking arm at its forward 6 
end, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 5th day of January, 1888. 
45 
55 
WATSON M. HOLMES. 
Witnesses: 
C. D. KINSLEY, 
L. C. WIMER. 
of a casting pivoted on the shaft, a crank-arm 
secured to the casting, a rocking arm pivoted 
to the machine beneath the binder-platform, 
a link connecting the crank-arm and the rock 
ing arm and forming therewith a toggle-joint, 
the compressor pivoted to the casting, and a 
spring interposed between the casting and 
the compressor, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
4. The combination, with the compressor 
mounted at the outer edge of the binder-plat 
form independently of the binder - driving 
mechanism and held in an upright position 
by a toggle-joint during the binding of the 
bundle, of a projection on the needle-arm to 
overcome the lock formed by the toggle-joint, 
and a heel- extension on the needle-arm to 
retard the fall of the compressor, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
5. The combination of the compressor, the 
rocking arm connected to the compressor by 
the toggle-joint, and a fixed stop on the ma 
chine, against which the toggle-joint is forced 
by the grain accumulating against the com 
pressor, Substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
6. The combination, with the compressor 
pivoted to the drop-board mounted at the 
outer edge of the binder-receptacle independ 
ently of the binder-driving mechanism, of a 
spring interposed between the compressor and 
the drop-board, a rocking arm pivoted to the 
machine beneath the binder-platform, a crank 
arm attached to the drop-board, a link con 
necting the crank-arm and the rocking arm 
and forming therewith a toggle-joint, and the 
needle-arm formed with a projection to en 
O 
15 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407007.txt	(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FOR. UTILIZING THE FORCE OF WATER FALIS, 
S. H. HAMILTON, 
No. 407,007, 
 
- Patented July l6, l889. 
--- 
Y-axes -- 
m 
-- 
- - - main . 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
APPARATUS FOR. UTILIZING THE FORCE OF WATER FALLS, 
S. H. HAMILTON 
No. 407,007, 
Patented July 16, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
-------- 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
S. H. HAMILTON. 
APPARATUS FOR. UTILIZING THE FORCE OF WATER FAILS, 
No. 407,007, 
Patented July 16, 1889. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SILAS IIANES HAMILTON, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE NIAGARA 
IIYDRAULIC ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF ALEXANDRIA, VIRGINIA. 
APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING THE FORCE OF WATER - FALLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,007, dated July 16, 1889. 
Application filed September l 1888, Serial No.284,337, (No model.) 
25 hereinafter shown. 
I5 with a different style of motor. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SILAs IIANES IIAMILTON, 
of New York city, in the county of New York, 
and in the State of New York, a citizen of the 
5 United States, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Apparatus for Util 
izing the Force of Water-Falls; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being 
Io had to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my appara 
ratus as preferably arranged. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation, partly in section, of the same; 
and Fig. 3 is a similar view of my apparatus 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
The object of my invention is to enable a 
portion of the effective power of a water-fall 
2O to be utilized for the driving of machinery 
Without disfiguring the fall or detracting from 
the beauty of the scenery; to which end my 
Said invention consists in the mechanism 
used, substantially as and for the purpose 
In the carrying of my invention into prac 
tice I excavate within the breast A of a water 
fall a Space having such size as to adapt it to 
the special purpose intended, and within such 
3o Space erect a building IB, that has any desired 
number of stories to and b. Upon the front 
of the building B is placed a vertical pipe C, 
which at its lower end is supported by a suit 
able foundation D, and at points between the 
35 Salme and its upper end is securely fastened 
to the Wall of said building by means of 
straps E and E, that pass around said pipe 
and have their ends anchored within or bolted 
to said wall. At the lower end of the pipe C 
4O are laterally-extending branches c and c, that 
each communicate with a Water-motor F, 
preferably a turbine wheel, which motor is 
Suitably Supported in place, and by meals of 
a vertical shaft fand gearing f" and g is con 
45 nected with a horizontally-arranged line-shaft 
G within either or each of the stories l and b. 
To the upper end of the stationary pipe C is 
pivoted one end of a second pipe C, which 
from thence extends upward and is adapted 
So to have its upper open end moved from or to 
Ward the building B, preferably by means of 
a screw II, that passes through a nut h anch 
ored in the front wall of the latter, and has 
its outer end swiveled within a U-shaped 
strap I, which has its ends pivoted upon the 55 
sides of said pipe, the arrangement being such 
as to enable the upper end of said pipe C" to 
be moved outward until it is partly or en 
tirely within the body of falling water A, 
and the latter is directed into and caused to 6o 
fill said pipe C. 
The pipe C is preferably located so that 
when the pipe C occupies a vertical position 
its upper end will be just out of contact with 
the falling water. Said pipes are preferably 65 
connected by means of a ball-and-socket joint, 
but any other desired form of flexible connec 
tion may be used for such purpose. 
When the pipe C" is thrown outward so 
as to receive water, such water will pass into 7o 
and fill the pipe C, and through the same will 
pass to the motors F and F and cause the same 
to operate. In addition to the pressure pro 
duced by the head of the column of water, 
the momentum with which it enters the pipe 75 
C' will give a large increase, so that by the 
use of a comparatively short Water-trunk a 
large effective power may be obtained and 
such power utilized for the operation of dy 
namos or any desired form of power convert- 8o 
ing or transmitting mechanism. 
In Fig. 3 is shown an ordinary breast-wheel 
arranged so as to have its buckets k k im 
pinged upon by the Water from the deflecting 
chute. Such chute is, as in the mechanism 85 
illustrated in the other figures of the draw 
ings, made adjustable toward and from the 
fall of water. The upper and rear sides of 
the wheel call be protected so as to prevent 
the Water from impinging upon the same. 
Obviously the deflector used for deflecting 
a portion of the fall so that it will impinge 
upon the wheel can be of any desired shape 
or construction without departure from my 
invention, as claimed by me in this present 95 
case. I do not limit myself to the pipe form. 
Any form of device which will divide the 
main stream and deflect a portion thereof so 
that it can be brought into engagement with 
the wheel or motor can be used. Such de- I oo 
9o 
 
2 
40,007 
is located within the breast of a water-fallin 
rear of the sheet of water, in combination with 
a chute that has one end connected with the 
casing of such motor, and its opposite end 
made adjustable by mechanism, substantially 
as shown, toward and from the falling water, 
whereby a portion of such water may be 
caused to pass into or impinge upon such mo 
tor, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 6th day of 
July, A. D. 1888. 
2Cd 
25 
SILAS HANES HAMILTON. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY C. HAZARD, 
JAS. E. HUTCHINSON. 
flector may then be of the tubular kind, which 
I prefer, or a trough or even piece, with an 
inclined plane surface to be brought into the 
path of a portion of the fall. 
As my mechanism is entirely behind the 
sheet of water, it renders practicable the util 
ization of the power of a water-fall without in 
any manner disfiguring or lessening the nat 
ural beauties of the same. Where electric 
mechanism is driven by the motors, the em 
ployment at night of electric lights behind 
the sheet of water would materially enhance 
the beauty of the same and produce startling 
effects. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
As an improvement in mechanism for util 
izing the force of falling water, a motor which 
IO 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407107.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 407,07, 
C. R. NELS ON, 
HEATER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet l, 
Patented July 16, 1889. 
A co-Z. 
23 
3. 
Eas 
E. 
I 
retiricanticip T 
is seen 
N 
: C. An SEster 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
 
 
 
( 
I HH 
I 
 
- 
roven ( or 
Aelle 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
C. R. NELSON. 
HEATER, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 407,07, 
Patented July 16, 1889. 
 
 
 
2 %22z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
S 
J 
 
2 
2  
 
 
O 
O. 
 
 
 
 
 
VVitn SSSs: 
2%-72%-4. 
- Z-rover for: 
N.PETERs, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
( No Model.) 
C. R. NELSON. 
HEATER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 407, l07, 
Patented July 16, 1889. 
 
SS5: 
422,422-l 
222-26-4- 
f 
d 
d 
Trovento r: 
42 (111- /63 a lazs 
o4al-62 - Ma 24 
As a 22 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES R. NELSON, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,107, dated July 16, 1889. 
Application filed November 30, 1888, Serial No. 292,203, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
O 
To all, whom it Tictly concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs R. NELSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Port 
land, in the county of Cumberland and State of 
Maine, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Heaters for IIot Water and 
Steam; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to heaters or boilers 
for hot water or steam; and its object is to 
provide a heater which shall have a large 
amount of heating-surface so disposed as to 
intercept the greatest possible amount of heat, 
which shall be capable of resisting any press 
ure which may come upon it, and which may 
be cheaply made. 
The invention consists of various combi 
nations of the following features, as herein 
after pointed out in the claims, namely: A 
hollow base; a coil above Said base and con 
necting with it, said coil acting as the fire 
box; an upper chamber or dome connecting 
with said coil; a ring or jacket above said 
fire-box and below said dome, and pipes con 
necting it with said base outside of said coil; 
a vertical pipe connected with said base; 
pipes extending from said vertical pipe 
around said coil and substantially concentric 
therewith and connecting With said dome, and 
a case inclosing Said parts. 
In the accompanying drawings I illustrate 
a heater which embodies my invention, al 
though I do not wish to limit myself to the ex 
act construction here shown and particularly 
described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of my heater with the casing, being shown in 
section. 
Fig. 2 is a central vertical section. 
Fig. 3 is a part section on the line acac of Fig. 
2 and part top view or plan. Fig. 4 is a plan 
of the hollow base. 
The casing is omitted from all but the first 
figure. 
In the drawings, A is a hollow base or ring. 
(Shown in Fig. 4, with its various openings 
marked with the same letters as the pipes 
which lead from it.) This base is in the form 
of a ring having a section removed to leave 
a space for the ash-box. From a number of 
openings-in this case three-placed about 
equally distant from each other in the top of 
the base, rise three short vertical pipes d, 
which turn horizontally and form a close coil or 
fire-boxD, the upper ends of the pipes, which I 
have lettered d", rising upward from the top of 
the coil at intervals and entering a hollow 
chamber or dome G, placed at the top of the 
heater and above the fire-box or coil. A hol 
low annular jacket or ring E is superimposed 
On the coil ID to form a continuation of the 
fire-box, the front portion being cut down to 
receive a chute e' (shown only in Fig. 1) to 
facilitate the admission of coal through the 
door i. This ring or jacket is connected with 
the base by pipes a C and with the dome by 
pipes e. e. A vertical pipe or column B is con 
nected with the base A outside of the coil D, 
and extends upward, as here shown, to about 
the height of the dome. Connecting with 
this vertical pipe there are a number of pipes 
in this case ten-extending around the coil 
C and the jacket E, and concentric with them, 
their ends entering a similar vertical pipe B' 
on the other side of the heater, which is in 
turn connected with the dome. 
9 g are the hot-water or steam supply pipes, 
leading from the dome G, and A' is the cold 
Water-supply pipe entering the base. 
A ring or casing J, of any well-known con 
struction, fills the space below the coil D form 
ing the ash-box and supporting a suitable 
grate L, of which l is the shaker. K is the 
flue, and k 
the usual lower and upper open 
ings into it. These latter parts are all well 
known parts of the ordinary hot-air furnace 
and need no special description. 
The operation of my heater is evident from 
its construction. Three distinct systems of cir 
culation are secured, namely: From the base 
the heated water passes up through the coil 
or fire-box and thence enters the dome. This 
coil D, being made of three separate pipes, as 
here shown, is much more effective than those 
made of a single pipe, because the Water does 
not have so far to travel before reaching the 
top, and hence its circulation is much more 
rapid than it otherwise would be. The cir 
culation being rapid, there is no tendency to 
make steam when the boiler is used for hot 
9o 
95 
OC) 
2) 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
407,107 
water. A second system of circulation is 
formed by means of the pipes a, a from the 
base to the lower part of the jacket E, and 
thence out at the top and through the pipes 
e to the dome. In this system the main por 
tion of the heating-surface is in the jacket E, 
which forms the upper part of the fire-box. 
The third system is formed by the water-col 
umn B, the lower end of which connects with 
the base, thence through the pipes C around 
the outside of the fire-box, and to the verti 
cal pipe B and the dome G. This system re 
ceives the most of its heat by means of the 
indirect draft formed when the upper open 
ing k' is closed and the lower one open, as in 
dicated by arrows in Fig. 1. It will be seen 
that by means of these independent systems 
of circulation a large extent of heating-sur 
face is exposed to the action of the heat, mak 
ing the boiler a quick-heating and an eco 
nomical one. The various systems all start 
from the base and enter the dome at the top, 
so that there is no chance of any obstruction 
in the circulation. 
The jacket E and the dome G, I preferably 
make of cast-iron, although they may be made 
of boiler-iron and riveted in the usual way. 
When the heater is to be used for steam, the 
water is simply drawn down so as to partially 
fill the dome, when it is run as an ordinary 
steam-boiler. 
I claim 
1. The herein-described heater, consisting 
of a hollow base, a plurality of pipes con 
nected with said base and coiled or wound to 
form a single-cylinder fire-box above it, and 
a dome or chamber above said coil and con 
nected therewith, in combination with a case 
inclosing said parts, substantially as shown. 
2. The herein-described heater, consisting 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
of a hollow base, pipes connected with Said 
base and formed into a coil or fire-box, a 
chamber or dome above said coil and con 
nected therewith, a hollow ring or jacket above 
said coil and below said dome, and pipes con 
necting said jacket with said dome and said 
base, in combination with a case inclosing 
said parts, substantially as shown. 
3. The herein-described heater, consisting 
of a hollow base, pipes connected with said 
base and formed into a coil or fire-box, a dome 
or chamber above said coil and connected 
therewith, a vertical pipe or column connected 
with said base outside of said coil and extend 
ing above said base, and pipes extending 
from said column around said coil substan 
tially concentric therewith and connecting 
with said dome, in combination with a case 
inclosing said parts, substantially as shown. 
4. The herein-described heater, consisting 
of a hollow base, pipes connected with said 
base and formed into a coil or fire-box, a dome 
or chamber above said coil and connected 
there with, a ring or jacket above said coil 
and below said dome, and pipes connecting it 
with said dome and said base, a vertical pipe 
or column connected with said base outside 
of said coil and extending above said base, 
and pipes extending from said column around 
said coil substantially concentric there with 
and connecting with said dome, in combina 
tion with a case inclosing said parts, substan 
tially as shown. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
- 
presence of two Witnesses. 
V 
CHARLES R. NELSON. 
Witnesses: 
S. W. BATES, 
SAMUEL D. RUMERY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407207.txt	(No Model. ) 
C, E, HINMAN & T. E. McCRACKEN. 
MILK DELIVERY AND SHIPPING CAN. 
No. 407,207, 
Patented July 16, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
Sv. 9. 
C- St. 
NI 
el- 2. 
2. 
1. 4 
 
22 
4. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. HINMAN AND TILOMIAS E. McCRACKEN, OF McCOOK, NEBRASKA, 
ASSIGNORS OF ONE-HALF TO WILLIAM. O. RUSSELL OF SAME PLACE, AND 
ANDREW J. PATE, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
MLK DEVERY AND SHIPPING CAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,207, dated July 16, 1889. 
Application filed May 13, 1889, Serial No. 310,626, (No model.) 
To atta, Uh-O7) it 77 votif conce71. 
Be it known that we, CHARLEs E. HINMAN 
and THOMAS E. MCCRACKEN, citizens of the 
United States, residing at McCook, in the 
5 county of Red Willow and State of Nebraska, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Milk Delively and Shipping 
Cans; and We do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
Io invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to Which it appertains to make and 
tlse the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, which form part of this 
Specification. 
Our invention relates to that class of cans 
constructed especially for delivering milk to 
families, and for shipping in large quantities, 
by railway or otherwise, to distant points, 
and has for its object to provide a conical 
2O plug extending from the top to the bottom of 
the interior of the can in such a manner that 
When inserted in the can, substantially filled, 
the increasing size of the plug as it passes 
downward will compress the milk, so that it 
25 Will completely fill all of the space within the 
call and crowd the globules downward and 
Out Ward, and SO pack them together as to l'en 
der agitation or shaking of the imilk impossi 
ble and keep the cream in the body of the 
3O milk while it is being carried in small or 
large Vessels by any means of conveyance, 
and thereby preserve it in a sweet, and whole 
SOme State. 
A further object of our invention is to pro 
35 vide a plug in two sections, the upper section 
of which may have a sight-opening orgage to 
aid in filling the can, and also to serve as a 
nozzle through which all the surplus or over 
flow milk can be poured off when the lower 
40 plug is inserted, and as a space in which the 
air can circulate, and serve as a receptacle in 
which ice or other cooling material can be 
placed when it is desired to lower the tem 
perature of the milk, while the lower conical 
45 plug reaching to the bottom of the can is 
screwed into the upper and securely locked 
by means of a T-shaped key; and it consists 
in the construction hereinafter described, and 
more particularly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a ver- 5o 
tical sectional view through an ordinary milk 
can and our improvement applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a like section with the lower part of 
the conical plug removed. Fig. 3 is a ver 
tical section of the upper portion of the coni- 55 
cal plug removed from the can. Fig. 4 is a 
like section of the lower conical plug, and 
Fig. 5 is a part sectional view of a key adapted 
to place the plug, and Fig. 6 is a slightly-modi 
fied form of the entire plug. 
Like letters of reference refer to correspond 
ing parts in each figure of the drawings. 
A represents an ordinary milk-can formed 
of sheet metal with a conical top, having an 
internal screw-threaded flange C. extending 65 
upward therefrom. Within the flange of the 
conical top there is inserted an inverted-cone 
shaped hollow plug B, that is opened at each 
end and extends downward to about midway 
the interior of the can, which is made of tin, 7o 
galvanized iron, or other suitable sheet metal. 
The upper end of this cone is extended by an 
externally-screw-threaded sleeve b, of brass, 
zinc, or other suitable metal, surrounded by 
a collar C on its upper end that extends out- 75 
ward over the top of the flange C. of the can, 
which is screwed into the neck or flange Ct. as 
the cone is lowered into the can. Under the 
collar C and upon the sleeve of the cone there 
is a gasket c, of rubber or other soft packing, 8o 
to form a tight joint between the collar and 
upper edge of the neck or flange of the can 
when the cone B is fully screwed therein. 
Within the lower inner part of the cone B 
there is soldered or otherwise secured a sleeve 85 
D, of the same material as the one before de 
scribed, having an internal screw-thread d, 
for the purpose hereinafter stated. 
In the side of the upper edge of the cone 
B, just underneath the edge of the sleeve , 9o 
there is a sight-opening covered by a glass E, 
securely packed and fastened therein, so that 
it is air and water tight. The upper edge of 
this glass is arranged on the same plane with 
the converging upper edges of the conical 95 
top of the can to guide the eye in filling the 
Call, 
A closed extension-cone F is made to fit 
 
407,207 
O 
25 
33 
35 
- 
Within the cone B and to extend to the bot 
tom of the can, where it terminates in a point, 
thereby forming with the open cone B a sub 
stantially-continuous true taper of the cone 
from the top to the bottom of the can. On 
the upper end of the extension-cone F there 
is a cap f of brass, zinc, or other suitable 
metal, having an external or male screw 
thread on its sides to fit within the female 
screw of the sleeve D in the lower end of the 
cone B. A square stude is formed on the up 
per end of the cap to fit a socket g on the end 
of a longshank G. of a T-shaped key, by which 
the cone F is screwed into or out of place in 
the open cone. 
The closed extension-cone F is made of the 
Same material as the cone B, and is of a length 
So that its lower point will just reach the 
bottom of the can as its screw-cap is turned 
down into and seated within the sleeve D of 
the open cone, where, by a slight pressure of 
the key, it is locked as against any removal 
by manipulation during transit except by a 
suitable key, which is supposed to be only in 
the hands of the shipper and receiver or cus 
tomer served with the milk. 
We prefer to make the screw-threaded sleeve 
b in the top of the open cone and the screw 
cap f on the extension-cone to screw in the 
Same direction, so that when the extension 
cone is being screwed down firmly to its seat 
the sleeve on the top of the open cone will be 
tightened down upon its gasket and made 
more firm to prevent its being removed by 
the hand while being carried from one point 
to another. 
When the can has been filled, as the lower 
part of the closed extension-cone F is low 
ered through the bottom of the open cone, 
the milk slightly rises in the cone Buntil the 
Screw-cap takes into the sleeve D, forming a 
tight joint, when, as the extension-cone is 
screwed downward by the key, the milk is 
compressed in the can. 
The sleeve D may be of any desired length 
in the cone B, and the degree of compression 
depends on the distance the extension-cone is 
screwed into the sleeve after forming a tight 
joint. 
The open cone B receives all of the over 
flow milk that is crowded out by the exten 
sion-cone, and serves the useful purpose of a 
nozzle for pouring the overflow milk off into 
a vessel without its running down upon the 
sides of the can and wasting after the cone F 
is inserted and the milk is compressed. 
After the can has reached its destination a 
duplicate key is applied to the extension-cone, 
which is removed, taking the pressure off the 
milk, when, in large shipping-cans, the milk 
may be drawn out through a faucet near the 
bottom of the can, or in small cans for family 
supply a suitable tool may be applied to the 
collar C and the open cone removed from the 
can, when the milk may be poured out. We do 
not, however, confine ourselves to the particu 
lar construction of a two-part cone extending 
to the bottom of the can, for the purpose set 
forth, as we may use a continuous cone formed 
in one piece with a sight-opening in its upper 
portion, the same as in the form before de 
scribed, as illustrated in Fig. 6. In this con 
struction we prefer to form the screw-thread on 
the outer side of the flange a of the conical 
top of the can, and secure a downwardly 
projecting internal screw-threaded sleeve b to 
the upper edge of the compression-cone B, 
though this form of cone may be seated in 
the can, the same as the one before described, 
if desired. 
In the modified form of cone the gasket c 
is made to rest between the outer upper end 
of the cone B and the sleeve b, forming an 
air-tight joint with the top of the flange C. of 
the can when the sleeve is screwed down 
By the use of this form of compres 
thereon. 
ision-cone extending to the bottom of the can, 
the cream is held within the body of the com 
pressed milk, and preserved from all agita 
tion and kept sweet and pure while being 
carried to its destination, and, if desired, the 
can after being filled can be immersed in cool 
water without disturbing its contents until it 
is sent away. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination, with a milk delivery 
and shipping can, of a conical displacement 
and compression plug extending from the top 
to the bottom of the interior of the cata, Said 
plug having a sight-opening in its upper part, 
the upper edge of the opening being on the 
same plane with the upper edge of the cham 
- 
ber of the can, as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a can having a 
conical top, of a hollow conical displacement 
and compression plug open at one end extend 
ing from the top to the bottom of the interior 
of the can, said plug having a sight-opening 
with its upper edge on the same plane with 
the converging inner edges of the top of the 
can, and a screw-threaded sleeve on its upper 
end having a packing thereon, and fitting a 
screw-threaded flange extending from the top 
of the can, as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a conical top, of 
a two-part conical plug extending from the 
top to the bottom of the can, the upper cone 
having a sight-opening at its upper edge, and 
open at each end and extending into the can 
from the top, and the lower or extension cone 
being secured within the lower end of the open 
cone and extending to the bottom of the can, 
as set forth. 
4. The combination, with a can, of a two- . 
part conical plug extending from the top to 
the bottom of the can, the upper cone being 
open and having a sight-opening in its side 
and a screw-threaded sleeve secured on its 
upper end working in a vertical flange of the 
can, and its lower end extending into the 
- 
75 
95 
IOC 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
45 
55 
 
407,207 
3 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
center of the can and provided with an in- 
ternal screw-threaded sleeve, the lower or in presence of two witnesses. 
extension cone being closed and having a 
screw-cap on its upper end working within 
5 the sleeve on the lower end of the upper cone, 
Said screw-cap having a stud thereon for en- 
gaging with a key for operating the cone, as 
set forth. 
CHARLES E. HINMAN 
ry 
rf 
THOMAS E. MCCRACIXEN. 
Witnesses: 
A. C. EBERT, 
THOS. GLASSCOTT. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407307.txt	(No Model.) 
G, S, TOMPKINS & C. WHITTINGHAM, 
COMBINED BRACKET AND CLAMP FOR PILLOW SHAM. HOLDERS. 
No. 407,307, 
Patented July 16, 1889. 
------------------------- 
------------------------ 
van m- - - - 
was 
  
WITWESSES 
. 
24.6%. 
2ar?2-2 
W 
 
- 
24 
1 IWVEMTORS 
%22 
27.1- 
2.3%, 
N. PETERs. Photouhographer, withington, D.C. 
--a 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE S. TOMPKINS AND CHARLES WHITTINGHAM, OF DETROIT, 
MICHIGAN; SAID WHITTINGHAM ASSIGNOR TO SAID TOMPKINS. 
COMBINED BRACKET AND CLAMP FOR PLLOW-SHAM HOLDERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,307, dated July 16, 1889. 
Application filed October 15, 1888, Serial No. 288,166 (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it nay concern 
Be it known that we, GEORGES. TOMPKINS 
and CHARLES WHITTINGHAM, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Detroit, in the 
county of Wayne and State of Michigan, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in a Combined Bracket and Clamp for 
Pillow-Sham Holders; and we do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
el's skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to 
the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
Our invention relates to pillow - sham 
holders, and particularly to a combined 
bracket and clamp, whereby the parts are 
made self-attaching to the bedstead, all of 
which will be hereinafter fully set forth. By 
this arrangment of bracket and clamp the 
pillow-sham holder can be rapidly attached 
to the bedstead, and at any desired position, 
Without the aid of screws or brads of any 
kind, which require driving into the wood 
Work, thereby defacing the furniture. 
With reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of the specification, we 
will proceed to describe the various parts of 
Our device, the essential features being 
pointed out particularly in the claims. 
As illustrated by the drawings, Figure 1 
represents a perspective view of our inven 
tion in position and supporting a pillow-sham 
holder. Fig. 2 is a side plan of the bracket 
and clamp. Fig. 3 is a top plan showing the 
parts clamped to the rail of the head-board of 
a bedstead, the dotted lines showing adjusted 
position of clamp and bracket. Fig. 4 is a 
perspective view of the various parts detached 
constituting the combined bracket and clamp. 
In the drawings, H represents the head 
board of the bedstead, and R the end rails. Z. 
and Z' represent the common sliding rails of a 
pillow-sham-holder frame, which support the 
wire-frame J. 
The heads II are supported in the forked 
ends in of the L-shaped brackets A, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
D represents the base of the clamp. This 
s 
- 
base-plate has the oblong opening Sand right 
angle jaw C, through which the Screw-threaded 
bolt B passes and revolves in the hole a, and 
a like hole (not shown) through the opposite 
end of the base. The reduced end of the bolt 
is upset at i, (see Fig. 4.) whereby the said 
bolt is supported at both ends within the 
base-plate D. This bolt is provided with the 
thumb button or nut?, whereby the bolt B is 
revolved, for the purpose hereinafter set forth. 
In Fig. 4, A illustrates the bracket, which 
is L-shaped and has a forked upper end, as 
shown at n. 
F is a horizontal base, which is formed in 
tegral with the brackets, and t is a lug which 
projects from the front face of the base F and 
fits loosely in the open slot S of the base-plate 
D. The bracket A is reduced at O, where it 
joins the base F. Said reduced portion fits 
loosely into the opening S, as shown in Fig. 1. 
W is a jaw formed integral with the base 
F and at right angles thereto, said jaw pro 
jecting from the rear end of said base. 
In the base Fis formed two screw-threaded 
holes a? a '. Through these holes the bolt B 
By this construction it will be ob 
paSSes. 
served that as the bolt B is turned or rotated 
by means of the thumb-nutf the base F will 
be caused to travel or move horizontally along 
said bolt, the neck O and lug t sliding in the 
opening S, whereby the jaw W is caused to 
move toward or from the jaW C. The shifted 
position of the jaw W and bracket A is shown 
by dotted lines in Fig. 3, 
E is a coiled - wire Spring, which has two 
prongs c and c'. The prong centers the hole 
in the bracket A, its end being bent, as 
shown at 3 in Fig. 2, whereby the spring is 
retained in position. The prong cof the spring 
presses against the head H of the pillow 
sham frame, whereby the frame is held in the 
fork in of the bracket A. The bracket A is 
secured to the bedstead in the following man 
ner: The jaw C is placed against the outer 
face of the rail R of the bedstead. The screw 
bolt Bisthen revolved by means of the thumb 
button f, SO as to cause the jaw W to advance 
and clamp the opposite face of said rail, thus 
firmly attaching the bracket which supports 
the pillow-sham frame. 
As the jaw W is provided with means for 
55 
75 
95 
Od 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
40'7,80? 
5 
CD 
moving it toward and from the fixed jaw C, 
the bracket can be readily attached to the 
variously-shaped rails of bedsteads, and at 
any desired elevation, and the parts can be 
detached from the bedstead at once. 
Having thus set forth our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ter's Patent, is 
1. In combination with the L-shaped 
blacket having the base and jaw formed in 
tegral there with, and screw-threaded holes in 
the base thereof, the base-plate D, having the 
central opening with fixed jaw at one end 
thereof and holes in each end of the base, the 
screw-threaded bolt engaging with the base 
F, having its ends journaled in the holes of 
the base - plate 1), as and for the purposes 
specified. 
2. In combination with the bracket A, hav 
ing the forked upper end with base and jaw 
W formed integral there with, the base-plate 
ID, having the oblong opening and holes in 
each end and jaw C at one end, the screw 
threaded bolt having threaded engagement 
with the base of the bracket, its ends being 
journaled in the base-plate D and carrying 
a button on one end, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
(EORGE S, TOMPKINS. 
(IIARLES WHITTINGHAMI. 
Witlesses: 
R. B. WHEELER, 
ED(; A R. S. WHEELER, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407407.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 407,407, 
 
J. LAUFERTY 
SUSPENDER BUCKLE, 
Patented July 23, 1889. 
WITNESSES 
(NS N 
2%ayed 
INVENTOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH LAUFERTY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SUSPENDER BUCKLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,407, dated July 23, 1889. 
Application filed February 9, l389, Serial No. 299,334 (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all Luhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH LAUFERTY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York city, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Sus 
pender and Similar Buckles, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Suspender and similar buckles of the class in 
which two parts hinged together clamp the 
Suspender-Webbing between them; and it con 
sists in so constructing the free ends of the 
two hinged parts that by spring action they 
will hold the webbing, and also so that the 
ring of the suspender-end clip-piece shall lock 
the two parts to each other, thus firmly hold 
ing the Webbing, and also so that the sus 
pender-end may be readily detached from 
and attached to the buckle without loosening 
the hold thereof on the Webbing, thus avoid 
ing the necessity of unbuttoning the sus 
pender-ends and detaching the drawers sup 
porter, if used, when desiring to loosen or 
remove the Suspenders. 
In the drawings the same reference-letters 
indicate the same parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 illustrates an elevation of the 
buckle, the parts being closed together and 
Without any webbing. Fig. 2 illustrates an 
edgewise view of the buckle, the web being 
in position and the buckle open. Fig. 3 illus 
trates an edgewise view of the buckle, show 
ing the ring in the act of being twisted to de 
tach it from the hook of the buckle. 
A and B are the two main parts of the 
buckle. A includes the main or body part of 
the buckle. It may be made of wire, as shown, 
or stamped out from metal or otherwise con 
structed, and may be all in one piece or of a 
number of pieces suitably fastened together, 
as preferred. B is the other part. It may 
also be made in any preferred manner, as 
above indicated, with reference to part A. 
C is the Webbing of the suspenders. 
D is the clip or end portion of the sus 
pender-ends, So called, to which the diver 
ging supplemental webs of the suspender-end 
are attached, and D' is the usual ring or equiv 
alent device whereby the clip D is attached 
to the hook part of the buckle. The parts A 
and B are hinged together in any suitable 
manner, as seen at E. Ishow this hinge as a 
tubular piece of metal, into which the ends a 
and b, respectively, of the parts A and Ben 
ter, and in which one or both of them turn, 
thus securing hinge movement. The part A 
is provided across substantially its central 
portion with a plate F, preferably toothed, as 
shown, against which the webbing is clamped 
by the pressure of a coincidently-located cross 
piece G on the part B when the part B is 
folded down upon the part A. The lower end 
of the part A is extended into a tongue-like 
part H, which bends upwardly near its ex 
tremity and then hooks over downwardly, as 
at I, at its extremity. The part B has like 
wise a tongue-like lower part J, somewhat 
similar to the part H, excepting that it pref 
erably bends slightly downward, as shown, 
and is provided with an Opening K, up through 
which the parts H I project when the buckle 
is clamped upon the webbing. 
The construction of the projecting ends I 
and J of the two parts AB, respectively, is 
such that there will be a binding of the part 
J against the most downwardly - extending 
part of the hook I. (Seen at i.) Thus when 
they are forced past each other the strain 
will cause a springing action in the buckle, 
which will be relieved or reduced when the 
parts have passed the said point. Thus when 
they once attain the said position the Spring 
action will tend to retain them therein. 
The ring D' or equivalent part of the sus 
pender-end clip engages with the hook I, as 
shown in Fig. 3, thus securely locking the 
parts A B together when they are in place on 
the webbing. The engagement of the ring 
D' with the hook I can be very easily effected 
by simply pressing it in at the angle d' be 
tween the hook I and the part J. These parts 
will then under the pressure readily Spring 
apart and allow the ring to pass into the hook 
portion I. 
In order to disconnect the ring of the sus 
pender-ends from the hook of the buckle, the 
ring is slightly twisted or turned, whereby 
the hook I and the tongue J will be separated 
by the crowding of the ring, and it may be 
readily slipped out from between them. 
It will be noticed that the webbing is held 
by the interlocking of the hook and tongue 
pieces I J, and that the ring D positively 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
SO 
407,407 
25 
35 
hook-I prefer the other form, however-and 
there may also be other modifications, which 
need not be here specified. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
A buckle comprising, essentially, two parts 
hinged together, between which the webbing 
is clamped, one part having a downwardly 
extending portion formed into an eye and the 
other having a like extended portion formed 
into a hook which is bent rearwardly, the said 
extended portions crossing each other when 
the buckle is being closed, with the back of 
the hook projecting beyond the eye-like part 
a sufficient distance to receive the ring of the 
suspender-end within the hook and between 
its back part and the eye-like part, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 2d day of 
February, A. D. 1889. 
JOSEPI AUFERTY. 
Witnesses: 
PHILLIPS ABBOTT, 
WILLIAM ECK. 
5 
O 
maintains this interlocked position of the 
parts should anything occur which would tend 
to separate them, and also that the separa 
tion of the ring D from the buckle does not 
in any wise impair the hold of the buckle on 
the webbing. On the contrary, during the 
removal of the ring from the buckle, at which 
time there is a tendency to displace the buckle 
from its preferred position on the webbing, 
the hold of the buckle is temporarily in 
creased, thus maintaining its position on the 
webbing. 
It will also be noticed that the ring D' is 
positively locked in position when in the hook, 
and cannot escape either upwardly or down 
Wardly irrespective of the pressure employed. 
It will be obvious to those who are familiar 
With this art that many alterations may be 
made in the details of construction of the 
buckle and still my invention be employed. 
For instance, the relative positions of the 
hook I and the tongue J may be reversed; 
also, the hook may be made double and the 
tongue be a single piece passing through the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407509.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 407,509. 
D. M. BLOCH, 
POSTAGE STAMP HOLDIER, 
w Z2 7. 
Es. 
Patented July 23, 1889. 
843 
S 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR: 
ATTOREYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID M. BLOCH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
POSTAGE STAMP HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,509, dated July 23, 1889. 
Application filed August 16, 1888, Serial No. 282,892, (No model.) 
- 
, 
- 
holder. 
To all who in it may concer'72. 
Be it known that I, DAVID M. BLOCH, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and Improved Postage-Stamp 
Holder, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
My invention relates to a device adapted 
more particularly for holding postage-stamps 
and protecting them from dust and moisture 
While in a pocketable and readily-portable 
form, and conveniently at hand, with a pen 
cil or pen and an eraser, which may be used 
in addressing letters or packages, the stamps 
to mail which may be supplied from the 
The invention consists in certain novel 
features of construction of the stamp-holder, 
all as hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a postage 
stamp holder made in accordance with my in 
vention, with the cap-tube removed and the 
stamps unrolled, the holder being applied to 
the pointed end of a lead-pencil. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical sectional view of the postage-stamp 
holder, with the stamps removed and the cap 
in place, the pencil-point being shown in side 
elevation. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a 
modified form of the stamp-holder, with the 
cap removed and as applied to a pencil; and 
Fig. 4 illustrates another slightly modified 
form of the stamp-holder, also with the cap 
removed and shown on a pencil. 
I prefer to make the base portion of the 
postage-stamp holder in the form of an elon 
gated hollow and open-bottomed tube A, pro 
viding an interior cavity or chamber (, in 
which the pointed end b of an ordinary lead 
pencil B may be accommodated, to prevent 
breaking of the pencil-lead; or this portion 
A may receive the back end of a short pencil 
to provide for using the pencil more conven 
iently, or a pen-point or knife-blade may be 
guarded in and by the tube. I show the tube 
A in Figs. I and 2 provided with an internal 
pressed screw-thread to assure a more secure 
connection to the pencil by screwing it there 
on; but this screw-thread may be dispensed 
with and the tubular base or pencil-socket 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
may be split, as shown at a' in Figs. 3 and 
4, to give it a yielding clamping action on the 
pencil. 
The outer portion of the tube A, which forms 
the base or bottom of the postage-stamp 
holder, is preferably reduced in diameter at 
c, to receive the inner end of a tubular cap C, 
which may or may not be provided at its 
outer end with an ordinary eraser D, (shown 
on the caps in Figs. 1 and 3, but omitted from 
the cap shown in Fig. 4) the outer end of which 
is closed by the metal of which the cap is 
formed. This tubular cap may be snugly 
fitted to a plain shoulder at c on the holder 
base, to keep its place by friction alone, as 
shown in Fig. 1; or the cap may be fitted to 
the base-shoulder by a screw-threaded joint, 
as shown in Fig. 3; or the cap may be fitted 
to a plain shoulder of the base and be pro 
vided with a pin and angular slot, forming the 
well-known bayonet-joint connection 
shown 
in Fig. 4 of the drawings. 
The most important feature of my inven 
tion consists of a pin or spindle E, which is 
fixed to the base or one end of the postage 
stamp holder and projects therefrom suffi 
ciently far to allow one or more rows of post 
age or other stamps F to be attached to and 
wound around it until the roll of stamps so 
formed or applied will quite fill the interior 
chamber f of the tubular cap C around the 
pln. 
In the preferred construction the stamp 
holding pin or spindle E is provided with a 
central lengthwise slite, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2 of the drawings, which allows the end 
of the series of stamps to be caught in the 
slit to hold them prior to turning the pin or 
spindle around by turning the base or pencil 
or pen sheath or guard-tube with one hand 
while the stamps are held or pressed toward 
the pin by the other hand, and when the 
stamps are all rolled onto the pin and each 
other the tubular cap C will be slipped over 
them and onto the base of the holder to fully 
protect the stamps from dust or moisture 
when laid aside or carried in the pocket, 
It will be noticed that the pin or spindle e 
is slit through to its outer end or extremity, 
which is entirely free or disconnected from a 
cap or other device, thus allowing the pin to 
be sprung open easily to insert the stamps in 
75 
95 
OO 
4o 
45 
55 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with the base-piece 
and a pin or spindle secured at its lower end 
thereto and having a longitudinal slit ex 
tending from its upper end downwardly, the 
upper end of said slit being open to admit of 
the insertion of a stamp or stamps from Said 
upper end, of a tubular cap closed at its up 
per end, passed downward over the pin or 
spindle, and fitting at its lower open end over 
the base or part thereof and removable bod 
ily from said base and pin, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a connbined pencil-tip, eraser, and stamp 
: holder, consisting in the sleeve A, a pin or 
spindle secured at its lower end to the upper 
end of the sleeve, said upper end forming a 
base therefor, a separate and independent 
tubular cap or cover C, inclosing said pin or 
spindle and fitting at itslower open end upon 
the upper end of the sleeve A, and an eraser 
D, separate and independent from the rod 
and closing the upper end of the cap or cover 
C, the cover C and its eraser D being bodily 
removable together upwardly or outwardly 
from the sleeve A and pin E, substantially as 
set forth. 
DAWID M. BLOCH. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY L. GOODWIN, 
EDGAR TATE. 
407,509 
O 
15 
25 
the slit or for allowing the stamps to be easily 
slipped into the slit from the extremity of the 
pln. 
Instead of using the pin or spindle E, pro 
vided with a slite, in which the stamps will be 
held or clamped, as above described, I may 
use a pin or spindle E, (shown in Fig. 3.) 
provided with one or more teeth or barbs e', 
on which to catch the stamps prior to wind 
ing them onto the pin; or a plain pin or spin 
dle E (shown in Fig. 4) may be used, on which 
to wind the stamps, and should this pin be 
made of wood the marginal adhesive strip or 
ribbon at the end of one or more rows of 
stamps may readily be moistened and gunmed 
to the pin prior to Winding the stamps on it. 
The drawings represent the stamp pin or 
spindle made long enough to accommodate 
two rows of stamps, which will be unwound 
from the pin and separated at their perfo 
rated divisions, as they are required for use; 
but the holder may be made shorter to accom 
modate but one row of stamps when rolled 
up, or it may be made longer to hold three 
or more rows of stamps, as the desired form 
or style of the holder may make necessary. 
I may make the stamp-holder entirely sep 
arate from a pencil or pen or knife-blade 
guard or sheath, like or substantially like the 
tubular shank or base A shown in the draw 
ings; but the combination of a postage-stamp 
holder with such a pencil or pen guard or 
sheath makes a very desirable and conven 
ient article whether the tubular cap which 
confines and protects the stamps is provided 
with an eraser-cap or head-piece or not, as 
will readily be understood. 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407609.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
No. 407,609, 
 
J. F. PRATT. 
SOLE PROTECTOR, 
Patented July 23, 1889. 
i.S. 
sa Sky3 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. PRATT, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
SOLE-PROTECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,609, dated July 23, 1889. 
Application filed January 4, 1889, Serial No. 295,268, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES F. PRATT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Sole-Protectors, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention is an improvement upon the 
Sole-protector patented to me in Letters Pat 
ent of the United States No. 327,194, dated 
September 29, 1885; and the object of my im 
provements is to so construct the protector 
that it shall better protect the center of the 
Sole and the Shank of the shoe. 
Another feature of my present improve 
ments is to provide a superior device for 
tightening and clamping the sole-protector 
on the shoe, and still another feature relates 
to the provision of the sole with a plate to 
prevent wear of the sole-edge. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my improved sole-pro 
tector applied to a shoe. Fig. 1 is a modifi 
cation. Fig. 2 is a side elevation, and Fig. 3 
a vertical section of a fragmentary portion of 
the sole. 
In my present construction I make the pro 
tector of three pieces - a central piece A, 
which conforms closely to the bottom of the 
sole from toe to heel, and provided, preferably, 
with corrugations throughout its length, and 
two side plates BC, each of which is pivotally 
connected to the central portion at the toe. 
These side pieces are adapted to Swing later 
ally to permit the placing of the protector on 
the sole. The clamping device herein shown 
is a bolt D, having one of its ends secured 
with one of the side pieces and its other 
screw-threaded, as at d, whereby to adapt it 
to engage a threaded aperture formed in the 
rear of the other of the side pieces. The bolt 
will be most conveniently secured by means 
of the lugs (, b. c, formed integrally with the 
three sole-plates A B C, and having apertures 
through which the bolt passes, the aperture 
of one of the side pieces being threaded to 
engage the threads of the bolt. A preferable 
arrangement is the one shown in Fig. 1", 
where the boit-head is let into a square re 
cess, passes through a plain aperture in the 
other lug, and has a nutturned on its threaded 
- 
end. The central piece has a toe-clamp a', 
and the side pieces have clamps b' c', which 
extend upwardly and engage the sole-edge. 
The side pieces are drawn toward each other 
by means of the clamping-bolt D, and they 
may be so tightly clamped thereby against 
the edge of the sole as to prevent their work 
ing loose, as experience has shown Will be the 
case with a less secure fastening. 
In order to prevent chafing or cutting of 
the sole-edge by the side clamps, which not 
only injures the leather, but permits the sole 
protector to work loose, I employ a piece of 
metal to receive the wear, which will be se 
cured in any convenient manner to the sole 
edge in position corresponding to the location 
of the clamps, but preferably in the manner 
shown in the drawings, where E represents a 
thin metal strip of the general contour of the 
outer edge of the sole and placed between the 
two layers of the sole, as shown in Fig. 3 of 
the drawings, so that its outer edge will be 
flush with the edge of the sole. This plate 
may be secured on the bottom of the sole in 
stead of between the outsoles. The plate A 
preferably has the corrugations extended 
down well toward the heel, so as to protect 
the shank of the sole. This is particularly 
desirable in a shoe used by puddlers and roll 
ing-mill men, who are compelled to stand upon 
and walk over pieces of hot metal, which rap 
idly destroys the shoe unless the sole is en 
tirely protected. This construction permits 
the sole-plate to be more perfectly fitted to 
the shank of the sole. The tightening-bolt 
furnishes means for securely locking the plate 
in place, and the metal strip prevents wear 
On the sole-edge and prevents the plates from 
Working loose. 
Other equivalent means for tightening and 
securing the pivoted plates may be devised 
than the bolt shown and described, and so I 
do not confine myself to this specific means 
as, for example, the screw-threaded bolt shown 
in Fig. 1; or the said bolt may be threaded at 
each end. 
I claim 
1. A sole-protector having in combination 
a central plate and side plates pivoted thereto 
at the toe and provided with clamps to en 
gage the sole-edge, each of said plates having 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
407,609 
toward the heel lugs having bolt-holes and a 
bolt whereby to draw the side plates together 
to secure the protector. to the shoe, substan 
tially as described. 
2. A sole-protector having in combination 
a central plate and side plates of substantially 
the length of the sole from toe to inner edge 
of heel, said plates having corrugations to 
protect the shank of the sole, the side plates 
connected pivotally to the center plate at the 
toe and provided with clamps, and each of 
said plates being provided toward the heel 
with projecting lugs having bolt-holes and a 
bolt whereby to draw the side plates toward 
each other to clamp the protector to the shoe. 
IO 
3. The combination, with a shoe having me 
tallic plates inserted in its Sole-edge to pro 
vide a wearing-surface, of a protector having 
a central plate and side plates pivoted thereto 
at the toe, and provided with clamps to en 
gage the sole-edge and adapted to bear upon 
the metallic plates in the sole-edge, each of 
said plates having toward the heel lugs hav 
ing bolt-holes and a bolt whereby to draw the 
side plates together to secure the protector to 
the shoe, substantially as described. 
JAMES F. PRATT. 
2C) 
25 
Witnesses: 
C. C. LIN THICUM, 
T. ID. BUTLER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407709.txt	(No Model.) 
C. E. WHITE. 
FISH ANDING NET. 
No. 407,709, 
Patented July 23, 1889. 
?XXXXXXXX}{xxxxxxx 
?XXXXXXXXXXXX 
 
 
WITNESSES 
{ 
???????. 
W. 
???? 
AITORNEYS 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. WHITE, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK. 
FISH-LANDING NET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,709, dated July 23, 1889. 
Application filed November 14, 1888, Serial No. 290,857, (No model.) 
55 
Be it known that I, CHARLES E. WHITE, of 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Fish-Landing Nets, 
of which the following, taken in connection 
with the accompanying drawings, is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention consists in a novel construc 
tion and combination of the components of a 
fish-landing-net holder which is adapted to 
be readily folded into a compact form for con 
veniently carrying it about and stowing it in 
a boat, and also adapted to be readily brought 
into condition for use when required, all as 
hereinafter more fully described, and specifi 
cally set forth in the claims. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a side 
view of my invention in position for use. 
Figs. 2 and 3 are skeleton inverted plan views 
showing the net-holder respectively in folded 
and distended conditions, and Fig. 4 is an 
enlarged skeleton inverted plan view show 
ing the net-holder in both of the aforesaid 
conditions. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
P represents a pole on which are mounted 
movably longitudinally two ferrules c c'. A 
cap or collar C is secured to one end of the 
pole to serve as a stop to prevent the ferrules 
from slipping off from said end of the pole. 
The side of the cap facing the end of the fer 
rule c is serrated or provided with projections 
adapted to enter corresponding notches in 
the end of said ferrule, and thereby prevent 
the latter from turning on the pole. A spring 
catch b is connected to the pole in such a po 
sition as to confine the two ferrules between 
said catch and stop (t, when required to hold 
the net in a distended condition, as herein 
after described. Said catch b can be depressed 
to allow the ferrules to slip over it when de 
sired to fold the net-holder. 
To the ferrule c are pivoted, intermediate 
of their lengths, two braces e e, which are 
each provided at one end with a rib e' for the 
attachment of the hoop h, to which the net 
n is attached. Said hoop is composed of two 
flexible parts hinged together at One end, as 
shown at i, and firmly secured at their oppo- stantially as described and shown, 
site ends to the two ribs e'e', as best seen in 
Fig. 4 of the drawings. 
d d denote stays or toggles, which are piv 
otally connected at one end to the ferrule c' 
and at the opposite ends to the two braces e 
e at the ends opposite to those to which the 
hoop h, is attached. 
The operation of my improved net-holder 
is as follows: To fold the apparatus, the catch 
b is to be depressed and the ferrules c c' to 
be slipped over said catch. The ferrules, be 
ing thus liberated from the catch b, allow 
the bracese e to turn on their pivots, so as to 
fold the two hoop-sections closely side by side 
and lie compactly lengthwise on the pole P, 
as represented by full lines in Fig. 2 of the 
drawings and by dotted lines in Fig. 4 of the 
drawings. To open the net, the operator pushes 
the ferrule c' toward the stop a until the fer 
rule c is brought into contact with said stop, 
and the ferrule c' has slipped over the catch 
b, which then confines the two ferrules in 
their position, and when in said position the 
toggles d d hold the braces e e in laterally 
extending position, and thus hold the net open 
or distended ready for use. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In combination with the poie P, provided 
with the stop C and catch b, and the ferrules 
c c', mounted movably longitudinally on the 
pole, the braces e e, pivoted at the central 
portions of their respective lengths to the 
Outer ferrule c, the hoop-sections h, h, attached 
at their extremities to one end of the said re 
spective braces, and the toggles did, connected 
to the opposite end of said braces and to the 
inner ferrule (', substantially as described 
and shown. 
2. In combination with the pole P, provided 
with stop a and catch b and the ferrules c c', 
mounted movably longitudinally on said pole, 
the braces e e, pivoted in common at the cen 
tral portion of their respective lengths to one 
and the same side of the outer ferrule c, the 
hoop-sections h. h., attached at their extremi 
ties to one end of the respective braces, and 
the toggles d d, connected to the opposite end 
of said braces and to the inner ferrule c', sub 
75 
8. 
9o 
95 
Co 
O 
2 ? 
40 
45 
2 
407,709 
3. In combination with the pole P, provided same side of the inner ferrule c', substantially 
with the stop a and catch b, and the ferrules as described and shown. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto signed 
c c', mounted movably longitudinally on said 
pole, the braces e e, lying one upon the other my name, in the presence of two witnesses, at I5 
5 and pivoted in common at the central portion Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
of their respective lengths to one and the State of New York, this 10th day of Novem 
same side of the outer ferrule c, the hoop- || ber, 1888. 
sections h, h, attached at their extremities to 
one end of the respective braces, and the 
to toggles connected to the opposite end of said 
braces and pivoted in common to one and the 
CHARLES E. WHITE. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. DUELL, 
H. M. SEAMANS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407810.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 407,810. 
M. W. BRUCE, 
HOSE SUPPORTER, 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
 
AE, 
-6 &eave? 
e?; T. 
By 4ugg 
- 
- - 
- - 
ATTORMEYS, 
N. Perers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, P.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MINER. W. BiRUCE, OF KNOX CENTER, NEBRASIKA. 
HOSE SUPPORTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,810, dated July 30, i889. 
Application filed November 8, 1888, Serial No. 290,392, (No model.) 
45 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
3O 
35 
To Cull, whom it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, MINER, W. BRUCE, of 
Knox Center, in the county of Knox and 
State of Nebraska, have invented a new and 
Improved Hose-Supporter, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The main object of the invention is to fur 
nish a hose-supporter in which any slack in 
the elastic band of the supporter caused by 
the stretching of the same will be automati 
cally taken up by the clasp-carrying cord. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of parts hereinaf 
ter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this Specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side illustration of my im 
proved hose-supporter in use. Fig. 2 is a 
perspective view of the supporter, and Fig. 3 
is a perspective view of a modification to be 
hereinafter referred to. 
The divided band A of the supporter, which 
encircles or rather partly encircles the leg of 
the Wearer, is preferably made of elastic ma 
terial, as usual, and is provided at each end 
with a hook B. The hooks B prefer to 
make of the form of the ordinary lacing 
hooks, in which the overhanging head is 
united to the fastening-eyelet by a shank or 
neck b at One side of the head. The ends of 
the band A are turned in Ward and Secured to 
cover the metallic rivet portion of the hooks 
B, thus preventing any discoloration of the 
garments on account of rusting. An endless 
cord C is passed over the hooks B, to lie be 
neath the overhanging heads thereof and 
move freely thereunder, and is also passed 
under another like hook B, secured to the 
clasp D, which clasps the upper end of the 
hose. The clasp D, with the exception of its 
hook B, may be of any approved construc 
tion. The cord C, lying loosely under the lac 
ing-hooks, has a tendency to draw the ends 
of the band. A toward each other, and thus, 
as the band stretches from continued use, the 
slack is taken up by the cord, and the band 
is thus at all times held snugly to the leg of 
the wearer. The cord C is free to slide in 
the hooks B, and if at any time the cord 
should become Worn in certain places it can 
be slid around so as to expose the strong por 
tions to the hooks. 
Instead of fastening the hook B directly to 
the clasp D, it may be fastened to a leather 
loop D", carried by the clasp, as illustrated in 
Fig. 3. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The herein - described hose - supporter, 
consisting of a divided band A, having the 
hooks B B rigidly attached to its ends, a clasp 
D, also provided with a hook B at its upper 
end, and an endleSS Cord C, passing around 
the hooks lis B and adapted to slide freely 
within the same, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
2. The herein - described hose - supporter, 
consisting of an elastic divided band A, hav 
ing the hooks B B rigidly attached to its ends, 
a clasp D., carrying the loop D in its upper 
end, said loop having a hook B' rigidly at 
tached thereto, and the endless cord C, pass 
ing around all the hooks B B and adapted 
to slide freely within the same, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
MINER, W. BRUCE, 
Witnesses: 
M. F. BARON, 
A. R. MILLER, 
m 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US407911.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
M. WARREN. 
SAFETY CHECK WALWE, 
No. 407,911, 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
28-Evooooy 
3MG 
r 
7 242 
-Z 
7 
Z6 
savower 
f 
2-4. 
aay e 4oz 
 
(No Model.) 
M. WARREN. 
SAFETY CHECK WALWE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
No. 407,911. 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
 
 
% 
w-...--v -------1 
2824-v.o.o.occ- 
3vvue-vitov 
N. PETERs. Phato-Lithographer, Washirgon, d.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARION WARREN, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
SAFETY CHECK-VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 407,911, dated July 30, 1889. 
Application filed October 4, 1888, Serial No. 287,15l. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, MARION WARREN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Roch 
ester, in the county of Monroe and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Safety Check-Walves; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
Myinvention relates to a safety check-valve 
designed to be used in the process of carrying 
on the fermentation of beer under a regulated 
pressure in a series of closed connected casks, 
and to certain combinations, including a 
check-valve. 
The object of the invention is to simplify 
the construction of double-acting safety check 
valves, and at the same time secure greater 
certainty and sensitiveness of action. The 
valve covered by my patent, No. 365,656, 
dated June 28, 1887, though embodying an 
improvement in the art, is more complex than 
necessary, and is not sufficiently certain and 
accurate in its operation, owing in part to a 
difficulty in adjusting the relative tension of 
the two springs employed therein. 
In the present construction but one spring 
is employed, which is located within the dia 
phragm case or chamber and on the same 
side of the diaphragm as the valve. It is 
readily adjustable from the exterior of the 
case, which latter is provided with two re 
movable heads or ends, both the inlet and a 
distinct outlet being located on the circum 
ference of the case. The valve is placed in 
a support distinct from the diaphragm, but 
secured to it by a Screw ling or clamp, afford 
ing a wide bearing on the same opposite the 
side which receives the gas-pressure, the con 
struction being such that the valve is opened 
by gas-pressure and closed by the spring upon 
a sufficient reduction of the pressure. 
The invention consists in the matters here 
inafter more fully described and particularly 
pointed out. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I 
represents a longitudinal section on line acac 
of Fig. 2; Fig. 2, a transverse section on line 
ga, Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a longitudinal section on 
-- 
- 
line 2, 2, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a sectional detail 
on line : , Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is a perspective 
view of valve-seat support and yoke; and Fig. 
6, a side elevation, partly in section, showing 55 
the check-valve combined with other devices 
in a pressure-regulating system. 
The reference-figure 1 indicates a case in 
closing a valve and diaphragm provided with 
interior rings 2. One of these affords a seat 6o 
for an elastic diaphragm 3, upon which latter 
is seated the head or removable end 4, Se 
cured in position by a screw-ring 5. A head 
6 at the opposite end of the case rests upon 
a similar ring 2, an annular packing-ring be- 65 
ing interposed and a screw-ring 5 employed 
to secure the parts in position. 
A valve-plate 7, preferably elastic, is se 
cured by a screw-ring or otherwise in a de 
pression in the valve seat or body 8. This 7o 
valve body or support has a screw-threaded 
extension 11, which passes through the dia 
phragm and screws into a plate 9, bearing 
against the rear side of the diaphragm, a 
washer 10 being preferably seated in a re- 75 
cess in the plate 9, as shown. This washer 
is provided to prevent injury to the dia 
phragm when the plate 9 is screwed down 
tightly upon the same, as the washer is held 
from rotation on the diaphragm by friction, 8o 
while plate 9 is revolved in contact with said 
washer. Beyond the circumference of the 
washer the friction between plate 9 and the 
diaphragm will be slight, as at such point the 
latter can readily yield, since it is not solidly 85 
supported there on the opposite side by the 
valve-body S. 
The extension 11 is prolonged beyond the 
plate 9, and enters a pocket or recess 12, 
formed in the head, in such manner as to 9o 
move freely lengthwise in the same. The 
valve-support S has an annular recess at 13, 
the exterior wall of which is screw-threaded 
to engage the segmental screw-threaded parts 
14 of a spring-holding yoke 15. A part of 95 
the screw-threaded exterior wall of recess 13 
is cut away on each side to provide for the 
introduction of the extremities 14 of the yoke, 
as indicated in Fig. 5. 
bearing 16, which receives on its exterior a 
spring, and on its interior furnishes a bear 
The yoke 15 is provided with a tubular roo 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
2 
407,911 
7o 
75 
O 
25 
45 
55 
ing for a stem 17, which passes freely through 
the head, receiving on its outer extremity a 
milled head, index, and other parts. This 
stem is screw-threaded on its inner end to en 
gage a movable bearing 18, provided with 
arms grooved at their ends to engage guides 
19, fixed in the case. At 20 it has integral 
with it a packed bearing-ring limiting its 
lengthwise movement in an inner direction 
through the head. This bearing or joint may 
be made of conical or other suitable form 
with ground surfaces to dispense with pack 
ing. An annular scale and milled wheel are 
keyed or otherwise firmly secured to the stem 
and an index, the parts being Suitably air 
ranged to adjust the tension of the spring 
and to indicate the same. The spring is com 
pressed to increase its tension by revolving 
the milled head and the threaded stem 17 
to screw the same through the bearing 18, 
which is thereby moved toward the end of 
the yoke, against which the other end of the 
spring bears, the part 18 being guided by 
means of the guides 19 entering the grooves 
in the arms formed on the part 18. 
The diaphragm - case has an inlet 22, by 
which it communicates with a cask or other 
vessel, and an outlet 21, by which it commu 
nicates with a pipe or conduit leading to any 
point desired, both being located on or in the 
circumference of the case. The inlet and 
outlet are so styled with reference to their 
usual function, though under circumstances 
to be hereinafter described the ordinary op 
eration of one or both may be reversed. The 
outlet-pipe 21 extends radially to a point be 
tween the arms of the spring-yoke near the 
center of the case, and is there bent at 27 to 
present its end to the valve-plate 7, which 
latter, together with the valve-support 8 and 
the yoke, is connected to the diaphragm and 
moves with the same. 
In Fig.6 two casks are shown, a safety-valve 
being connected with each at inlet 22 and a 
pipe or system of pipes at outlet 21. The 
milled ring and index before mentioned are 
indicated at 23. At 24 is represented a press 
ure-gage and draw-off cock. 25 indicates a 
gas-receiver in communication with the pipe 
system, to which is attached a pressure-gage 
and a safety or escape Valve having a press 
ure-regulating device 23. The gage is of any 
well-known construction, and the safety-valve 
is preferably of the form above described. 
This gas-receiver may be located at a distance 
from the vault or cellar containing the casks, 
preferably in an office on an upper floor. The 
gage indicates the pressure in the main pipe 
and its connections, and the Safety-valve pre 
vents the rise of pressure in said pipes above 
the desired limit, being regulated to open and 
discharge gas through pipe 26 when the limit 
is exceeded. 
The gas - receiver, though represented as 
placed on the floor, can of course be located 
in any convenient position, as on a shelf or 
stand. 
- 
Having thus described my improved appa 
ratus, the operation may be briefly stated as 
follows: In the absence of sufficient pressure 
in a cask and its valve and diaphragm case 
to overcome the spring the valve will be held 
in closed position. The tension-regulating 
devices enable the spring and valve to be ad 
justed or set so that the valve shall open un 
der the desired pressure of gas acting upon 
the diaphragm, which action tends to move 
the valve from its seat on the mouth of 27, 
the spring being thereby compressed. The 
escape of gas having reduced the pressure in 
the case and cask below the predetermined 
limit, the spring closes the valve. Various 
devices for a similar operation are in com 
mon use, and fuller description in this par 
ticular is unnecessary. If the gas from One 
of the casks escapes into the main pipe or 
pipe system, tending to raise the pressure 
therein, this effect is prevented by the safety 
or relief valve of said pipe, which is located . 
in the office or elsewhere. Should any acci 
dent occur by which pressure in a cask is re 
duced below the limit desired and to which 
the tension of the spring is adjusted, as by 
leakage or by the bursting of a cask, the 
valve is instantly closed by the spring and 
the escape of gas from the main pipe and from 
other connected casks below the fixed limit 
of pressure is prevented. On the other hand, 
if a leak or break occurs in the main pipe or 
in a branch thereof, and gas escapes so as to 
unduly reduce the pressure in said pipe, the 
valve in each case connected with the sepa 
rate casks will continue to be held in closed 
position by its spring until the pressure in 
that cask rises above the desired limit and 
becomes sufficient to compress the spring and 
open the valve. 
It follows from the above that leakage in 
one cask cannot affect the pressure in the oth 
ers or in the main pipe, and that leakage in 
the latter cannot affect the pressure in any 
cask. It will also be obvious that valves con 
nected with separate casks can be set by reg 
ulating the tension of their respective springs 
to open at different pressures. A fixed press 
ure cannot be maintained in a cask below 
that in the main pipe, for the reason that if 
the pressure in the main pipe is above that in 
the cask its valve will be opened and will ad 
mit gas from the pipe into the case and cask, 
the spring not being regulated to resist the 
higher pressure. 
I am aware that a case having removable 
heads and diaphragm, said diaphragm being 
connected to a yoke carrying a valve, and the 
arrangement being such that gas-pressure in 
the case closed the valve against the action of 
a spring, is not broadly of my invention, such 
devices having before been described. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
desire to claim and secure by Letters Patent 
S 
1. In a safety check-valve, the closed case 
having an inlet and a separate outlet, a flexi 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
407,911 
8 
ble diaphragm secured in said case and clos 
ing one end of the same, the valve-support 
secured directly to the diaphragm and pro 
vided with the spring-holding yoke, the stem 
17, normally held against an inward length 
wise movement, and the spring between said 
stem and the movable yoke, the latter being 
connected to the valve-support. substantially 
as specified. 
2. In a safety check-valve, the closed case 
having an inlet and a separate outlet, a flexi 
ble diaphragm secured in Said case and clos 
ing one end of the same, the valve-supportse 
cured directly to the diaphragm and provided 
with the spring-holding yoke, an adjustable 
stem normally held against an inward length 
wise movement, guides for the inner end of 
the stem adapted to prevent its rotation, and 
the spring between said stem and the mova 
ble yoke, the latter being connected to the 
valve-support, substantially as specified. 
3. In a safety-valve apparatus, the closed 
case, the flexible diaphragm secured between 
a valve-seat Support and a clamping-plate, the 
extension of the support having a screw-thread 
connection with said plate, and a washer rest 
ing in a recess in said plate and bearing against 
the diaphragm and adapted to protect the dia 
phragm from injury when the plate is screwed 
down upon the diaphragm and washer, sub 
stantially as specified. . 
4. In a safety-check-valve apparatus, the 
closed case, combined by means of an inlet or 
inlet-tube with a beer-cask or like vessel con 
taining gas under pressure, the flexible dia 
phragm having fixed thereto the valve-seat 
and adapted to be exposed to gas-pressure 
within the case and cask in both the open 
and closed positions of the valve, the spring 
holding yoke secured to the support, the out 
let-tube entering the side of the case and bent 
near its inner end in the direction of the valve, 
the spring tending to move the diaphragm. 
and valve toward the outlet, and a distinct gas 
inlet, substantially as specified. 
5. In a safety-valve apparatus, the combina 
tion of the closed case having an inlet and a 
separate outlet, a valve for the outlet, the 
flexible diaphragm having affixed thereto a 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
valve-seat and adapted to be moved by gas 
pressure, and also adapted to be exposed to 
the pressure in the case and in the inlet or in 
let-tube in both the open and closed positions 
of the valve, and the Spring adapted to move 
the diaphragm and valve toward the outlet to 
close the same, with a pipe provided with a 
relief-valve, substantially as specified. 
6. In a safety-valve apparatus, the combina 
tion of the closed case having an inlet, a sepa 
rate outlet, a valve for the outlet, the flexible 
diaphragm having affixed thereto a valve-seat 
and adapted to be moved by gas-pressure, and 
also adapted to be exposed to the pressure in 
the case and in the inlet or inlet-tube in both 
the open and closed positions of the valve, and 
the spring tending to move the diaphragm 
and valve toward the outletto close the same, 
with a pipe provided with a relief-valve and 
a gage, Substantially as Specified. 
7. In a safety-valve apparatus, the combina 
tion of the closed case having an inlet, a sepa 
rate outlet, a valve for the outlet, the flexible 
diaphragm having affixed thereto a valve-seat 
and adapted to be moved by gas-pressure, and 
also adapted to be exposed to the pressure in 
the case and in the inlet or inlet-tube in both 
the open and closed positions of the valve, and 
the spring tending to move the diaphragm and 
valve toward the outlet to close the same, with 
a pipe provided with a relief-valve and a gage, 
said relief-valve and gage connecting with a . 
cylinder or receiver, substantially as specified. 
8. In a safety-valve apparatus, the combina 
tion of a cask, a main pipe having a safety or 
relief valve, a valve-seat secured to the dia 
phragm and inclosed in a case communicating 
with the cask, said diaphragm being exposed 
to gas-pressure from the caskin both the closed 
and open positions of the valve, and a spring 
adapted to close the valve in opposition to the 
gas-pressure, substantially as specified. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
MARION WARREN. 
Witnesses: 
G. E. GREEN, 
BEN.J. R. CATLIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408011.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 408,0ll, 
 
W. D. GRAY. 
SHAFT COUPTING, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
 
R R 
s 
r s 
&S 
R 
No Model.) 
No. 408,0ll. 
W. D. GRAY. 
SHAFT COUPLING. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
8-v-uov to 
0.5 as 
N. pettas, photo-Lithographer, Washingto: 
 
( No Model.) 
No. 408, Oll, 
W. D. GRAY 
SHAFT COUPLING, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
an inte 6- 6 
an Line 7-7 
6, 7-2 
<s  
 
8vvuovo 
% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. GRAY, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR TO THE EDWARD 
P. ALLIS & COMPANY, OF WISCONSIN. 
SHAFT- COUPLN G. 
w 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,011, dated July 30, 1889. 
Application filed March 11, 1889, Serial No. 302,879 (No model.) 
To all whon, it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM ID. GRAY, of 
Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain 
5 Improvements in Shaft - Couplings, &c., of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
strong and simple clutch, by means of which 
tWO shafts or their equivalents may be coupled 
IO end to end and maintained in exact align 
ment. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an axial vertical section through my clutch in 
Operative position, the controlling-lever and 
I5 itS Supporting-bracket being also shown in 
side elevation. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the 
operating-level and its adjuncts, looking end 
Wise of the shaft. Fig. 3 is a cross-section 
on the line 33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a vertical 
2O Section on the line 4 4 of Fig. 1, looking in 
the direction indicated by the arrow. Fig. 5 
is a plan view of the spreading - Wedge and 
adjacent parts. Fig. 6 is a cross-section of 
the same on the lines 6 6 and 77 respectively. 
25 Fig. 7 is a cross-section showing the elastic 
friction-ring in the tapered form preferably 
employed. 
Referring to the drawings, A and B repre 
sent the two shafts which it is required to 
3O couple together arranged end to end. The 
shaft A is keyed or otherwise secured rigidly 
in a shell or cup C, one end of which is en 
larged in the form of a disk with a peripheral 
Overhanging fange or rim C thereon. This 
35 annular flange is ribbed internally, as shown 
at c', to receive and hold Wooden lining-blocks 
c, driven tightly in place to present a con 
tinuous Surface which is turned off Smooth 
and true on the inside. The shaft, B is seated 
4o Snugly, but so as to turn freely within the 
shell C, which is provided with a wearing 
ring c, of phosphor-bronze or like material, 
to receive it. 
D represents a hub keyed rigidly to the 
45 end of the shaft B, and located within the 
flange of the shell. This inner hub is encir 
cled by a ring cl, of steel or like material, 
turned Smooth on its Outer surface and con 
nected on the inside to the hub by a trans 
5O verse key d'. This key, which is seated in 
grooves in the two parts, is connected to the 
It is to be noted that both the key d' and 65 
rim by screws di. At a point diametrically 
opposite this key the ring is divided trans 
versely, as shown in Figs. 3 and 5, and its 
ends beveled in opposite directions to fit the 55 
sides of an intermitting wedge E, having a 
divided lip e seated in a groove in the hub to 
guide it in the direction of the axis of the 
shafts. As the Wedge is forced inward, it 
Separates the ends of the ring and expands 6o 
the latter so that it engages frictionally 
throughout its length with the surrounding 
wooden lining of the shell, thus establishing 
a firm connection between the shafts. 
the wedge E serve as drivers for the ring, and 
that the ring is free to expand or move ra 
dially at all points in its length. These facts, 
coupled with the fact that the hub is kept in 
a true central position by the bearing of its 7o 
shaft in the shell, insure a close contact and 
uniform pressure between the frictional sur 
faces at all points. The driving-strain, being 
applied at two points on opposite sides, bal 
ances in Such manner as to avoid side strains 75 
and the tendency of the clutch devices, shaft, 
and shaft-bearings to Wear eccentrically, as is 
the case with many clutches now in use. 
ilateral motion of the ring upon the carry 
ing-hub is prevented by means of stud-bolts 8o 
d', seated in the hub and bearing at the outer 
ends in slots d in the ends of the ring. 
The friction-ring may be of uniform thick 
ness, as shown in Fig. 3, or it may be of di 
minishing thickness from the middle toward 85 
the ends, as in Fig. 7, in which case the sur 
face of the supporting-hub will be eccentric 
to the shafts. The key d' may be integral 
with the ring, as shown. The advantage of 
tapering the ring lies in the fact that it acts 9o 
quickly and expands uniformly. 
A ring c" is commonly screwed or otherwise 
secured to the face of the outer shell, as shown 
in the drawings, to prevent the escape of the 
Wooden lining and to keep the hub in place 95 
when the clutch is disconnected from the shaft; 
but this ring is not a necessary feature of my 
construction. 
In order that the wedge may be conven 
iently operated and that it maybe held firmly I oo 
in place without Subjecting the running-sur 
faces to increased friction, I provide an an 
45 
55 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The flanged shell and the independent 
internal hub having the grooves in its oppo 
site sides, in combination with the expansi 
ble friction-ring encircling the hub and hav 
ing the rib or key d seated loosely in one of 
the grooves and the wedge seated in the other 
groove and acting between the ends of the 
ring, whereby the ring is enabled to move ra 
dially and expand uniformly throughout its 
length. 
2. The flanged shell, the independent hub, 
and the extensible ring, in combination with 
the wedge having the opening in its end, the 
lever, and the wedge operating and adjust 
ing screw seated in the lever and bearing at 
its ends against the opposite walls of the 
wedge-opening, whereby the lever is enabled 
to positively advance and retract the wedge. 
3. In a friction-clutch, the outside rim, the 
internal hub having the eccentric periphery, 
the tapered expansible ring, and means, Sub 
stantially as shown, for expanding Said ring. 
4. In combination with the shell, hub-ex 
panding ring, Wedge, and wedge-operating le 
ver, the sliding collar and link to operate said 
lever, the non-rotating ring f', the hand-le 
ver to actuate the same, the hanger f, and 
the adjustable pivot connecting the hand-le 
ver and hanger, whereby the parts are adapted 
for use with shafts at different distances from 
the ceiling or wall. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 29th day of January, 1889, in the 
presence of two attesting witnesses. 
WILLIAM ID. GRAY. 
65 
75 
408,011 
gular lever F and pivot the same at f between 
ears On the hub. One end of this ever is 
projected through an opening e', formed for 
the purpose in the end of the wedge. A screw 
e', passed through the lever, bears at its two 
ends against the opposite walls of the open 
inge' and serves as a means of adjusting the 
Wedge in relation to the lever and other op 
erating parts hereinafter described. This 
Screw, which is practically a part of the lever, 
is used to compensate for wear in the various 
joints and to regulate the point to which the 
Wedge will be advanced by the lever, the le 
Ver stopping always at the same position. 
At the opposite end the lever is connnected 
by a link f* to a collar f', mounted loosely on 
the shaft and grooved circumferentially at one 
end to receive an encircling collarif, which 
is in turn connected by links if to a hand-le 
yer f". This lever, which may be supported 
in any ordinary Inanner, is adapted to encir 
cle the shaft, as shown in Fig. 2, and is com 
lmonly mounted at its upper end in a pivot 
pinf", seated in a hangerf, adapted for at 
tachment to the ceiling or other support. 
It will be observed that the hanger is pro 
Vided with a series of holes for the pivot-pin 
at different heights, and this in order that the 
parts lnay be adjusted for shafts located at 
different distances from the ceiling. When 
the lever is moved in the direction indicated 
by the arrow in Fig. 1, the inner end of the 
link f is carried beneath the lever F and the 
latter caused to force the wedge inward and 
eXpand the driving-ring until finally the link 
assumes a perpendicular position beneath the 
lever, as shown in Fig. 1. When in this po 
Sition, it holds the lever securely without sub 
jecting the moving parts to additional fric 
tion. 
25 
35 
 
Witnesses: 
WM. IBANNEN, 
RICHARD HOPPIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408111.txt	(No Model.) 
N0, 408,lll, 
E. E. KILBOURN. 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
 
  
928) itv.cseco 
??? 
??????? 
???? 
???? 
???l\ 
& 
?????R)? 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 408, lll, 
 
E. E. KILBOURN 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 30, 1889, 
989 kwesses 
M. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
N0. 408,lll, 
 
E. E. KIL.B0 URN, 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
. 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
9 5 
Z-- 
N. PETERs. Photo-lithographer, Washington D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
N0. 408,ll 1. 
E, E, KILBOURN 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE, 
6 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented July 30, 1889, 
???? 
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
E. E, KILB0 URN, 
CIRCULAR, KNITTING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
N0, 408,lll, 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
At 7 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
2Z77 
1. 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, p.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
N0, 408,lll. 
 
  
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
E. E. KILB0 URN, 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE, 
Patented July 30, 1889. 
NUMANNSKA 
JUULUVAAJANA 
AZZAZaras 
 
  
 
 
  
?| ??? 
zl ."?? ? A 
all title 
??? 
? ? 
KINETTTTTTTTTITIWITANTINAITWIE 
A 
Z 
ONN AF //O 
? ??? 
N 
N? 
??????? 
 
928-twossos 
 
11uc v-to: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD E. KILBOURN, OF NEW BRUNSWICK, NEW JERSEY. 
CIRCULAR-KNITTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,111, dated July 30, 1889. 
Original application filed June 14, 1887, Serial No. 241,243, Divided and this application filed May 9, 1889, Serial No. 310,078, 
(No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
of the carriers for the pickers. Fig. 9 is a 
Be it known that I, EDWARD E. KILBOURN, 
View in elevation of the outside of the same. 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Fig. 10 is a vertical transverse section of one 
Brunswick, in the county of Middlesex and 
of said picker-carriers. Fig. 11 is a similar 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
partial section showing another form of guid 
ing-grooves. 
new and useful Improvements in Circular 
Fig. 12 is a detail view of part 
Knitting Machines; and I do hereby declare 
of the mechanism. 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
The machine herein shown is generally used 
for knitting Seamless stockings by first knit 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
other's skilled in the art to which it apper 
ting the leg by a continuous circular move 
tains to ihake and use the same. 
lment operating all of the needles of the knit 
This invention has reference to cylinder 
ting-cylinder. The heel is then formed by a 
knitting-machines in which a circular series 
gang of needles used for reciprocating Work, 
which are operated by the reciprocation of 
of needles is employed for circular work, and 
also for reciprocating Work. 
: the proper operating mechanism during re 
Ciprocating Work, a certain portion of the 
The Said invention is illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, and is fully disclosed 
needles at each side of the gang being suc 
in the following specification and claims, the 
cessively thrown out of operation to effect 
present application being a division of my 
the narrowing of the Web, which is then wid 
application No. 241,243, filed June 4, 1887. 
ened by throwing the said needles succes 
The object of this invention is to provide 
Sively into operation in a reverse order. The 
means for Supplying the yarn or thread to 
foot of the Stocking is then formed by a con 
tinuous circular movement of the operating 
the needles of such machines during circular 
work, and also during reciprocating work 
device by operating all of the needles, and 
during the operations of narrowing and wid 
the stocking is finished by forming the toe in 
ening, and said invention contemplates cer 
the same manner as the heel. While this is 
the most general mode of proceeding in using 
tain novel features Of Construction and con 
bination of parts, whereby these results are 
the machine, it may also be used by commenc 
accomplished, in connection with the devices 
ing the stocking at the toe and reversing the 
for operating the needles for circular and re 
order of operation herein described. 
ciprocating work. 
The needles preferably used in the machine 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a front 
are latch-needles having pivoted latches of 
view of a machine embodying my invention. 
the usual construction, and the Shank of each 
is secured to or formed integrally with a 
Fig. 2 is a rear view of the same. Fig. 2 is 
projection or nib upon which the operating 
a detailed view of one of the devices for feed 
can acts for the purpose of moving the 
ing the yar?n to the needles. Fig. 3 is a trans 
The needles are arranged in a cir 
verse vertical section of the machine through 
meedles. 
the axis of the needle-cylinder, some parts 
cular series and are fitted to slide up and 
down in grooves in the knitting-cylinder A 
being represented in elevation. Fig. 4 is a 
longitudinal vertical section of a portion of 
and its nosing A'. The needles are operated 
by means of two cams, which, as shown in 
the machine to the left of the at Xis Of the 
knitting-cylinder. Fig. 5 represents the corre 
section at B B', Fig. 3, and in detail in Fig. 6, 
sponding section of the portion of the machine 
are arranged one above the other and se 
cured to cam-cylinders B* B, which are con 
to the right of said axis. Fig. 5* is a view of the 
needles. Fig. 5 is a partial plan view on a re 
centric With the series of needles and are 
duced scale, showing a part of the actuating 
fitted to turn around the knitting-cylinder A. 
The lower cam-cylinder is supported by a 
mechanism. Fig. 6 is a cellitral vertical Section 
ling bearing or support b, and the upper 
of the cam-cylinders for operating the needles, 
cam-cylinder IB is supported upon the lower. 
showing the cams in elevation. Fig. 7 is a 
The lower cam-cylinder B is held in place by 
horizontal section of one of said cylinders. 
Fig. S represents a view of the inside of one means of studs b, secured to the ring-bear 
? ? 
25 
35 
4.O 
95 
I OO 
2 
408,111 
ing, which studs enter in a dovetailed groove 
b' of the cam-cylinder. The upper cam-cyl 
inder is held in place by means of screws b, 
whose heads enter in a groove b of the up 
per cam-cylinder. The upper cam-cylinder 
B is employed to operate a gang of needles 
which are put bodily out of operation when 
the heel and toe of a stocking are knit, the 
lower cam-cylinder B' being employed, pref 
erably, in operating the gang of needles 
which are employed in combination with a 
reciprocating thread-guide to knit the heel 
and toe of the stocking. 
In order to adapt the needle to the positions 
of the cams, those needles which are to be 
operated by the upper cam B have their nibs 
arranged at the required distance from their 
heads to be operated by that cam for circular 
work, and those needles which are to be oper 
ated by the cam B' during widening and nar 
rowing-namely, the fashioning-needles 
have their nibs arranged at the required dis 
tance from their heads to be operated by that 
cam for both circular work and reciprocating 
work. 
When the entire series of needles is oper 
ated for knitting straight circular worksuch 
as the leg of the stocking-both cam-cylinders 
B B are caused to revolve continuously and 
simultaneously, so that each needle of the en 
tire circular series is caused successively to 
move lengthwise to and fro, as required, to 
take the yarn for the loop formed by it and 
to cast off the preceding loop or stitch. For 
this purpose the two cam-cylinders are con 
nected by gearing with, and given a continu 
ous rotary motion by, the main driving-shaft 
D. The connection between the lower cam 
cylinder D and the main driving-shaft is by 
means of a main wheel e, Secured to the 
lower cam-cylinder, the intermediate wheel 
e', fitted to turn on a stud e, the pinion 
e', secured to the upper end of an upright 
shaft e", the beveled pinion e, secured to 
the lower end of the shaft e", the beveled 
wheel e', gearing into the beveled pinion 
e', the beveled pinion e, connected to the 
beveled pinion e' and fitted to turn upon 
a shaft e, and a beveled wheele', which is 
secured to the main driving-shaft D and re 
volves with it. When, therefore, the driving 
shaft is caused to revolve in the direction in 
dicated by the arrow, Fig. 1, the lower cam 
cylinder is caused to revolve continuously in 
the direction indicated by the arrow in said 
figure. 
The upper cam-cylinder B is preferably 
caused to revolve by being connected with the 
lower cam-cylinder B, and the most conven 
ient method of connecting the two cam-cylin 
ders is by means of a lug c', secured to the 
cam-cylinder B and revolving with it, and a 
pivoted latch or lug c, secured to the cam 
cylinder B and adapted to be engaged by the 
lug c'. When the cylinder Bis revolved in 
the direction indicated by the arrow in Fig. 
1, the lug c' will engage the latch cand the 
two cam-cylinders will revolve together. The 
cam-cylinders can be turned by hand inde 
pendently of each other, and if the cam-cyl 
inder B8 be rotated backward the lug c' will 
pass under and raise the latch c, allowing the 
cam-cylinder B to remain stationary. 
I provide a thread-guide E to feed the 
thread to the entire series of needles when 
knitting circular work. This thread-guide is 
mounted upon and carried by the cylinder B' 
and delivers the yarn to the needles in suc 
cession before the cam-cylindel'S Operate upon 
their nibs to depress them. In order that this 
circular thread-guide E may be readily moved 
out of its operative position when the heel 
and toe of a stocking are to be knit, it is se 
cured to a rocking stock f, (see Figs. 2 and 2".) 
pivotally mounted in standards f', which are 
attached to the cam-cylinder B, and I pro 
vide a locking device for holding said thread 
guide securely in either its operative or the 
non-operative position. This locking device 
consists of a spring-latch f, provided with a 
nib to engage an arm, f*, which projects from 
the stock of the thread-guide, as best seen in 
Fig. 2. When the circular thread-guide is 
out of its operative position, the Spring-latch 
engages with the upper side of said arm f, 
as shown, and when the circular thread-guide 
is in its operative position said latch engages 
the under side of said arm. 
In order that the latches of the needles may 
be kept from accidentally flying up when 
knitting circular work and that they may be 
positively thrown down, I provide the latch 
guard f', which is attached to the stock f of 
the thread-guide E, and therefore may be read 
ily turned into and out of its operative posi 
tion with the said thread-guide. 
In order to hold the upper cam-cylinder B 
out of operation when reciprocating Work is 
being done, I provide a locking device for 
such cylinder, which consists, preferably, of 
a notched latch F, which engages a lug a on 
the cam-cylinder B', as more particularly de 
scribed and shown in my application, No. 
241,243, filed June 14, 1887. 
During the reciprocating work I prefer to 
cause the cam-cylinder B' to reciprocate by a 
portion of the same gearing which is employed 
for revolving it during circular work, and to 
employ supplementary gearing to complete 
the movement. I prefer in this connection to 
use a supplementary driving-shaft D' for re 
ciprocating work, and to connect SO much of 
the gearing as is then used with said supple 
mentary driving-shaft. The portion of the 
main gearing previously described, which is 
used in the said machine for reciprocating 
work, consists of the main wheele, the inter 
mediate wheele', pinion e, the upright shaft 
e', the beveled pinion e, and the beveled wheel 
e'. The other portion of the main gearing, 
which remains connected with the main driv 
ing-shaft, consists of the two wheels e and e'. 
In order that the former portion of the gearing 
may be reciprocated for reciprocating work, 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
5 ? 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
9 O 
95 
TOO 
I o5 
I ? ? 
II5 
T 2 ? 
I 25 
IO 
2 ? 
408,111 
. 
. ; 
3 
the beveled wheele' is not made fast to the bev 
eled wheele', and the connection of the said 
beveled wheele with the beveled wheel e for 
circular work consists of disconnectible driv 
ers comprising, preferably, two lugsh, h., one of 
which is secured to the back of the beveled 
wheele', while the other lug is connected with 
the beveled wheele, which is driven by the 
driving-shaft D. This mode of connection per 
mits the wheele' to be rotated to and fro with 
out affecting the driving-shaft D. A further 
extent of reciprocation may be obtained, if 
desired, by the means shown and described 
for this purpose in my application No. 241,243. 
The supplementary driving-shaft is con 
nected with the beveled wheel e' through the 
intervention of a reciprocating rack II and a 
pinion e', which is driven by said rack and 
is connected with the beveled wheele'. The 
stock of the reciprocating rack His fitted to 
slide in bearings connected with the main 
frame, and it is connected by a connecting 
rod H. With a crank H, which is secured to 
the shaft H, and this crank-shaft is connected 
with the supplementary driving - shaft by 
means of beveled wheels et and e. In order 
that the said reciprocating mechanism may be 
connected with and disconnected from the 
calm - cylinder B, the connection is made 
through the intervention of a clutch member I, 
Fig. 13, whose hub is fitted to slide upon pinion 
shaft b, and is connected with it by a spline 
or feather of the usual construction. The 
clutch member has a tooth i, which is adapted 
to engage a notch formed in the hub i' of the 
wheele' and the portion of the main gearing 
connecting it with the cam-cylinder B, and 
the said cam-cylinders are caused to recipro 
cate by the continuous revolution of the driv 
ing-shaft D'. This clutch member I may be 
moved by means of a shipper, one arm of 
which J is forked and engages a groove of 
the clutch member I, and the other J has the 
form of a handle, the two parts being con 
nected by a vertical shaft suitably mounted 
on the main frame. 
During reciprocating work the yarn is fed 
to the gang of needles then at Work by means 
of a supplementary thread-guide E', which 
is caused to move to and fro in a circular 
curve by a movement derived from that of 
the cam-cylinder B, then operating. In order 
that this supplementary thread-guide E' may 
be moved out of the way while circular work 
is being done and may readily be put in po 
sition for reciprocating Work, it is connected 
pivotally with a movable bracket-arm E", that 
is supported by a standard E at the back of 
the machine. The hubg of the bracket-arm 
is fitted to turn on the head of the standard, 
and is provided with a ping, passed through 
said hub and arranged to engage with a hole 
in the collar g of the bracket-standard ES, 
when the bracket-arm is in the position to 
hold the pivoted shaft g of the supplement 
ary thread-guide centrally over the series of 
needles in the knitting-cylinder. When the 
supplementary thread-guide is to be thrown 
out of operation, this pin is withdrawn and 
the bracket-arm, with the thread-guide, is 
swung backward, so as to remove the thread 
guide from its operating position, and it may 
be held when so removed by engaging the 
pin in a second hole in the collar g'. As the 
supplementary thread - guide is caused to 
move in alternately reverse directions, a du 
plex latch-guard f is combined with it to 
keep the latches of the needles from acci 
dentally flying up when knitting reciprocat 
ing work. The supplementary thread-guide 
is represented in the drawings in its operat 
ing position, and it is then caused to recip 
rocate by means of a cam E, Figs. 2 and 7, 
secured to the collar of the lower cam-cylin 
der B. The ends of this cam operate alter 
nately upon the shank of the supplementary 
thread-guide, and in order that the supple 
mentary thread-guide may stand at rest for 
a short period at each end of its reciprocat 
ing Innovement a spring-driverij, Fig. 4, is in 
troduced between the calm. E and the driv 
ing-arm E of the thread-guide, and stops E 
E are applied to limit the reciprocating move 
ment of the supplementary thread-guide. 
Thus when one end of the cam is driving the 
supplementary thread-guide to the right hand 
the stop E stops its movement at the proper 
time, and the spring-driver, yielding to the 
pressure of the oblique end of the cam, per 
mits the cam to pass it. A. corresponding 
operation takes place when the Supplement 
ary thread-guide is moved to the left hand 
and is stopped by the stop E". In order that 
the yarn may be subjected to the proper ten 
sion, the thread-guide is fitted with a thread 
tension of one of the usual constructions, 
and a spring thread-take-up j', Fig. 4, also is 
provided to take up and give out slack yarn, 
as is customary in the use of knitting-ma 
chines. One of the usual constructions of 
thread-tensions which I have used with suc 
cess is represented at E, Figs. 1 and 4, and 
consists of a pin having a slotted head. The 
yarn is passed through the slot of the head 
of the pin, and the pin is turned more or less 
to make the yarn deviate more or less from a 
straight line, or to encircle the pin more or 
less, as may be found necessary to produce 
the resistance to the free movement of the 
yar?n required to produce the required ten 
sion. 
The fashioning-needles are raised and low 
ered out of and into operative position dur 
ing narrowing and Widening by means of 
pickers IX, Figs. 8, 9, 11, and 12-one for each 
side of the gang of fashioning-needles. Each 
of these pickers is fitted to slide up and down 
in a carrier L, which is moved as described to 
place the picker in position to operate upon 
the required needle. Each carrier is fitted in 
grooves kle' in the frame-work of the machine, 
said grooves being concentric with the series 
of needles, so that the pickel's may operate 
successively upon the needles in exactly the 
7 ? 
75 
90. 
95 
?. ? ? 
I o5 
II. ? 
II 5 
I 25 
45 
55 
 
408,111 
75 
same manner. These grooves being concen 
tric with the knitting-cylinder and the car 
riers being segmental in form, the said car 
riers will Work in the same grooves on oppo 
site sides of the knitting-cylinder. This con 
struction enables me to employ short pickers 
and construct them of the same size for both 
sides of the machine. If preferred, the ends 
of the carriers maybe grooved and the grooves 
he ic' may be replaced by circular ribs, as 
shown at F, Fig. 12. 
In order that the same picker may be used 
to move the needle for narrowing out of its 
Working position and to move it for widening 
into its Working position, each picker is pro 
vided with two lugs kle, Figs. S and 11, one 
of which lc acts beneath the supplementary 
nib of the needle-shank and pushes the needle 
out of its working position for narrowing, 
while the other lic acts upon the upper side 
of said nib and pulls it back into its working 
position for widening. The pickers are caused 
to rise and fall by means of a reciprocating 
cam IX', which is preferably fitted to turn 
upon the stock of the knitting-cylinder below 
the knitting-cam, and each picker K is pro 
vided with a pin ke, which engages the groove 
of said cam for operating said picker. The 
picker-cam is provided on its periphery with 
gear-teeth k, which engage with the teeth of 
a segment, c', which is mounted pivotally upon 
a studic', Secured to the frame of the machine. 
To this Segment is Secured a second segment 
1, the teeth of which are engaged by those of 
a rack N, which is supported in guides and 
has its shank connected by a pin with an up 
right lever N'", the lower end of which is piv 
oted to the frame of the machine. The lever 
N is formed in the shape of a yoke and has 
two projections in in within the range of the 
two members n n of a cam N, Which is se 
cured to the crank-shaft EI of the machine, 
which is driven by the Supplementary driv 
ing-shaft D'. It will be seen that a revolu 
tion of the shaft II will cause a reciproca 
tion of the rack M and segments in and le", 
thereby actuating the cam K' and the pick 
ers K. 
The pickers IK are given an alternating 
movement toward or from the center of the 
gang of fashioning-needles after each carry 
ing or shifting of the picker. Each carrier L 
is provided with a worm-segment l, which is 
engaged by a screw l', secured to a shaft, 
which is fitted both to rotate and to move 
endwise in its bearings. Each screw-shaft is 
fitted with a pinion l, the teeth of which en 
gage with those of a wheel l', which is a driv 
ing-wheel common to both of the screw-pin 
ions l, as shown in Fig. 1. This wheell is 
caused to turn continuously during recipro 
cating knitting. The gearing between the 
screws l l and the supplementary driving 
shaft is so proportioned that each screw is 
caused to revolve one-half of a revolution for 
each revolution of the crank-shaft II, which 
imparts reciprocating movement to the thread 
TI O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
guide E', and the pitch of the screws l l is 
double the pitch orgage of the needles in the 
series, so that a half-turn of the screw is Sufi 
cient to move the carrier which is controlled 
and the picker from one needle to the next in 
the series. 
The screws are given an end Wise movement 
for the purpose of allowing the carrier a pe 
riod of rest before each advance by a cam, 
and I prefer to use two cams for each screw, 
and to arrange these in the form of cam-col 
lars l, Fig. 3. These cam - collars, one of 
which is shown in Fig. 3, are located at the 
opposite sides of the bearing l', in which the 
screw-shaft revolves, and the Screw-shaft is 
provided with pins l', (one being shown in 
Fig. 3,) which bear against the collars, so that 
as these pins move during the turning of the 
screw along the inclined faces of the cam 
collars the screw-shaft l and screw l are 
caused to move end Wise, as more fully shown 
in my application No. 241,243. 
During the narrowing of the work the car 
rier is caused to move toward the middle of 
the gang of the fashioning-needles, and dur 
ing the widening of the Work the carrier is 
caused to move outward. In order that these 
movements in reverse directions may be ob 
tained from the driving-shaft while always 
revolving in the same direction, the screw 
driving-wheel l', which is fitted to revolve 
upon a stud secured to the frame of the ma 
chine, has secured to its hub a beveled pin 
ion l, Fig. 3, which engages with a beveled 
wheel l', whose hub l is fitted to turn upon 
the stock of the knitting-cylinder A. A cor 
responding beveled wheel l', having its teeth 
opposed to the teeth of wheel l', is also Se 
cured to the hub l', so that the two wheels 
revolve together. At the side of the hub of 
these beveled wheels which is opposite to the 
beveled pinion is a second beveled pinion li 
is arranged, and this beveled pinion is con 
nected to the Supplementary driving-shaft D' 
through the intervention of the wheel l, se 
cured to the hub of the beveled pinion l, the 
intermediate wheel l', Secured to an interme 
diate pinion l', (shown in dotted lines in Fig. 
2.) the pinion l', (also shown in dotted lines, 
Fig. 2.) secured to the crank-shaft H, and the 
beveled Wheels e' e, which impart motion 
from the supplementary driving-shaft B to 
the crank-shaft H. The diameter of the pin 
iOn l:"* is less tham the Space between the 
faces of the reversely-beveled wheel lili, so 
that it can operate in connection with one of 
said beveled wheels without touching the 
teeth of the other, and the shifting of the 
driving-pinion from one of said wheels to the 
Other changes the direction of rotation of 
said wheels, thereby reversing the direction 
of rotation of the screws land the carriers L. 
In order that the driving-pinion may be 
shifted autoi:;atically from one wheel to the 
other, the hub of said driving-pinion land 
of the Wheel l, secured to said pinion, is fit 
ted to turn upon a stud l, which is held by 
90 
95 
CO 
IO5 
O 
II 5 
I 25 
I 30 
408,111 
IO 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
an arm l, which is pivoted and swings upon 
the axis of the intermediate wheel l', so that 
the driving-pinion may be shifted from one 
of the change-wheels l l to the other without 
affecting the engagement of the wheels land 
l'. The driving-pinion is also provided with 
a stud or roller l1, Fig. 3, and the hub lit of the 
change-wheels is provided with a rail l', se 
cured thereto between said change-wheels. 
Two segments l are secured, preferably by 
means of Screws, between the change-wheels, 
the teeth of said segments corresponding to 
those of the change-wheels. When the driv 
ing-pinion impelling either of the change 
Wheels causes the appropriate segment to come 
into gear with the pinion-teeth, said pinion 
engages said segment and is shifted from one 
of said change-wheels to the other, and the 
end of the rail lis in the proper position to 
permit the stud or roller l of the driving 
pinion to pass around it during this shifting 
Operation, and the said rail serves to hold the 
Said pinion in engagement with one or the 
other of Said change-wheels by means of the 
The extents of the portions of the 
Stud l. 
change-wheels which are between the seg 
ments and which are engaged by the driving 
pinion before shifting determine the number 
of turns imparted to the carrier-screw, the 
number of times the carriers are moved, and 
the number of needles that are moved into and 
Out of operation in narrowing and widening 
the work. 
When the machine is narrowing or widell 
ing, it is desirable that the thread-guide E", 
which is then reciprocated, should have its 
extent of motion varied to correspond with 
the less or greater extent of the narrowed or 
Widened work. In order that this variation 
may be properly effected, the picker-carriers 
L are provided with the stops E" E, which 
are moved with them, said stops being con 
nected with the carriers preferably by means 
of the brackets E'E'; hence whenever a picker 
carrier is moved the corresponding stop is 
moved, and the extent to which the recipro 
cating thread-guide can be moved by its cam 
varied. The practical effect of limiting the 
movement of the reciprocating thread-guide 
by stops and permitting the needle-cam B', 
which is then reciprocated, to be moved past 
the thread-guide in the continued movement 
of its cam-cylinder B, is to transfer the re 
ciprocating thread-guide from one side to the 
other of the reciprocating calm, so that the 
thread-guide is always in advance of that cam. 
in whichever direction the cam may be moved. 
This transfer is important, and may be ef 
fected by providing stops E E upon some 
rigid portion of the frame if it is not desired 
to have said stops advanced by the picker 
carrier. This transfer obviates the necessity 
of using switch-cams, which tend to break the 
needles, and which also permit a certain 
amount of freedom of movement of the nee 
dles, which is objectionable. 
The needle-cams, actuating mechanism, 
and stop devices form the subject-matter of 
my application, No. 241,243, filed June 14, 
1887; the hook-partitions the subject of my 
application No. 310,077, filed May 9, 1889, 
and the narrowing and widening mechanism 
the subject of my application No. 310,079, 
filed May 9, 1889, and are not claimed herein. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of the knitting-cylinder, two cam 
cylinders for operating the needles thereof 
for circular work, the thread-guide for circu 
lar work, and a locking device for holding 
said thread-guide out of its operative position. 
2. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of the knitting-cylinder, the two cam 
cylindel's for operating the needles thereof 
for circular work, the thread-guide for circu 
lar Worlk, and a, recipl"ocating thread-guide, 
which is reciprocated in combination with 
one of said cam-cylinders for reciprocating 
Work. 
3. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of the reciprocating thread-guide, 
the stop therefor, and the picker-carrier. 
4. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of the needle-cylinder, the needles, 
the calm by which the needles are operated 
for reciprocating work, the picker, the picker 
carrier, the thread-guide which is operated 
for reciprocating Work, and means for trans 
ferring said thread-guide from one side of 
said cam to the other side thereof, including 
a stop for said thread-guide moving in a de 
termined relation with the picker-carrier. 
5. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of a needle-cylinder, the needles, 
the cam by which the needles are operated 
for reciprocating work, the pickers, the pick 
er-carriers, the thread-guide which is oper 
ated for reciprocating Work, and means for 
transferring said thread-guide from one side 
of said can to the other thereof, including 
stops mounted on and moving with said 
picker-carriers. 
6. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of a knitting-cylinder, the needles, 
two cam-cylinders, one of which is in operation 
only during circular work, means for impart 
ing motion to one cam-cylinder for recipro 
cating work, thread-supplying devices, and 
means for operating said thread-supplying 
devices for circular and reciprocating work, 
7. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of the knitting-cylinder, the nee 
dles, a cam-cylinder which only works during 
circular work, a reciprocating cam-cylinder, 
thread-supplying devices for circular work, a 
separate thread-guide for reciprocating Work, 
and means for operating the latter thread 
guide in connection with the reciprocating 
cam-cylinder. 
S. The combination, substantially as before 
set forth, of a knitting-cylinder and its nee 
dles, two cam-cylinders, one of which only 
works during circular work, and thread 
. 
75 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
I 5 
I 2O 
I 25 
6 
408,111 
supplying devices, the thread-supplying de- ciprocating work moving in unison with the ?o 
vices for reciprocating work moving in en- || reciprocating cam through the Whole Ora part 
gagement with the reciprocating cam-cylin- of its movement. 
der. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
Set forth, of a needle-cylinder and its needles, 
two cam-cylinders, one of which only works 
during circular work, and thread-supplying 
devices, the thread-supplying device for re- 
9. The combination, substantially as before presence of two Witnesses. 
EDWARD E. KILBOURN. 
Witnesses: 
A. H. WHITAKER, 
L. P. WHITAKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408212.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 408,212. 
J. H. CARMICHAEL. 
ABET HOLDER FOR BOTTLES 
Patented Aug. 6, 1889. 
* . Li T. 
ID h 
T sasas Aostaceoretireesweexswers as 
 
 
(Wezze ess & s: 
22 74. 
A7zzezzo?, 
As a arrier. 
a 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. CARMICHAEL OF EMMETSBURG, IOW.A. 
ABE - H ODER FOR BOTTL ES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,212, dated August 6, 1889. 
Application filed March 25, 1889, Serial No. 304,764 (No model.) 
the holder to sustain the lower edges of the 
labels. 
DD are projecting hooks attached to one 
side of the holder to keep the labels in posi 
tion. 
E is a projecting rim at the opposite side 
of the holder, and to which is attached the 
spring-clasp F, which clasp at its free end 
bears against the upper, surface of the back 
of said holder. 
The coating upon the back of the holder is 
heated or otherwise manipulated to cause it 
to be adhesive, and is then placed against the 
surface of the bottle, so it will adhere thereto 
and attach the holder to such bottle. Labels 
indicating the contents of the bottle are 
pressed between the spring-clasp F and the 
upper surface of the back A, so the lower 
edges of the labels rest upon the projecting 
rim C and the edges on one side within the 
hooks D. D. When the druggist empties any 
part of the contents of the bottle into another 
bottle, he withdraws one of the labels from 
the holder and immediately attaches it to the 
bottle receiving such contents, and thus in 
sures certainty in denoting by the label the 
contents of the bottle. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
Incombination with a bottle, a label-holder 
having the back. A coated with adhesive cem 
ent B, the lower rim C, projecting hooks DD; 
and the spring - clasp F, substantially as de 
JOHN H. CARMICHAEL. 
- 
scribed. 
Witnesses: 
A. J. WOLFGANG, 
P. HESTER, 
55 
O 
. 
To all athlon, it invay conce77. 
Beit known that I, JOHN H. CARMICHAEL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Em 
metsburg, in the county of Palo Alto and State 
of Iowa, have invented a new and useful 
Bottle-Label Holder, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to holders for labels, 
and which holders may be attached to bottles; 
and the object of my invention is to prevent 
mistakes in labeling bottles with wrong la 
bels; and the use of my invention is intended 
more especially for drug-stores. Labels de 
noting the contents of the bottles are held in 
the holder attached to the bottle, and when 
ever any of the contents are withdrawn from 
the bottle into a smaller bottle the person 
also takes out of the holder one of the labels 
and attaches it to the smaller bottle, thus in 
Suring that the smaller bottle will indicate by 
its label the fluid withdrawn from the larger 
bottle. I accomplish this object by the mech 
anism illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of the bottle-label 
holder, and Fig. 2 is a view of the lower side 
of the same. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
A is the back of the holder, made of suit 
able material and thin, and concaved suffi 
ciently to fit upon the surface of a bottle when 
round or oval. 
3 is a coating of cement or a glue com 
pound upon said back, which by being heated 
and pressed against the bottle adheres to the 
same and attaches the holder to the bottle. 
C is a projecting rim on the lower edge of 
out the several views. 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408312.txt	(No Mode.) 
.No. 408,312, 
W. W. MAYNE, 
TONGUE SUPPORT FOR, WEHICLES, 
Patented Aug. 6, 1889, 
 
 
 
 
 
311 uo vioz 
WilliamWMayne, 
S$4 his & Etovacy YX.0ever, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. MAYNE, OF HURON, DAKOTA TERRITORY. 
TONG UE SUPPOR FOR WEH CES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,312, dated August 6, 1889. - 
Application filed November 24, 1888, Serial No, 29.l798, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
So 
To all, whom it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM W. MAYNE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hu 
ron, in the county of Beadle, Dakota Terri 
tory, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Carriage-Tongue Supports; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Saline. 
This invention relates to carriage-tongue 
Supports; and its object is to provide a light, 
simple, and inexpensive device that may be 
readily hung upon some forward portion of 
the running-gear-such as the spring or the 
spring-bar-of a carriage or wagon to sup 
port the tongue or thills in an elevated posi 
tion for safety when not in service. 
To this end my invention consists in the 
construction and combination of parts form 
ing a carriage-tongue support, as hereinafter 
described and claimed, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I is a side elevation of certain por 
tions of a carriage, showing my invention 
Supporting a carriage-tongue. Fig. II is a 
front elevation of the brace-joint. Fig. III 
shows a modification of my invention. 
5 represents the forward spring of a car 
riage, 6 the axle, and 7 the tongue, provided 
with a cross portion S, which curves back 
ward or downward, as here shown, forming a 
fork whose arms are hinged at their ends to 
the axle in any usual manner. 
9 represents the shank of my tongue-sup 
porter, having a hook 10, adapted to be loosely 
hung upon any cross-piece of the carriage 
above the axle. 
11 is an arm extending forward from the 
shank, and provided at its forward end with 
half of a hinge-joint 12. 
13 is the main brace provided with the 
other half of the hinge-joint 12, and adapted 
to be rigidly bound by the thumb-screw 15, 
which serves also as the hinge-pin. 
16 is the brace-extension fitted to slide 
lengthwise in the bore of the brace 13, and 
17 is a binding-screw in the latter, whereby 
the brace-extension may be fastened at any 
point. The upper end of the extension is 
provided with a fork 18, adapted to receive 
the cross portion 8 of the tongue. 
19 is a stay-bar hung at one end to the 
hook 10, and provided with notches in its 
under side to engage a stud 20, which pro 
jects from the side of the main brace 13. 
In service the hook 10 is first to be hung 
upon some cross-piece above the axle-such 
as the spring 5-and the shank is allowed to 
rest against the front side of the axle 6. Now 
the carriage-tongue 7 is to be raised by hand 
to the height at which it is desired to be sup 
ported. The brace 13 is to be swung into line 
with the cross portion 8, and so fixed by the 
binding-screw 15. Then the extension 16 is to 
be drawn out until its fork 18 engages the 
cross portion S. Then the tongue may be al 
lowed to rest in the support. If it is desired 
to rest the tongue directly in the fork 18, the 
stay-bar 19 is used to keep the brace from 
slipping on the tongue and from being 
crowded out of place thereby. The fork 18, 
the inside of the hook 10, and the back of 
the shank 9 may be faced with leather or any 
suitably soft material to prevent defacing 
the carriage where the support bears thereon. 
The hook 10 may be made for the largest 
piece it is ever likely to hang upon, and yet 
it will hang as well upon the smallest. Any 
cross-bar of the carriage above the axle will 
do as well as the spring 5 as a point of at 
tachment for the hook. The brace 13 may 
be a mere pipe, or it may be cast with a tube 
or bore to receive the extension, as shown. 
Another stay 21 may be permanently fixed 
to connect the arm 11 with the shank 9 to 
strengthen the device when it is desired to be 
very light. For carriages having cross-bars 
to their thills or tongues corresponding to the 
portion 8 there is no need of the stay-bar 19, 
the binding-screw 15 serving to keep the 
brace at the desired angle to re-engage any 
carriage on removal after once being fitted 
thereto. 
If the stay-bar 19 is always used with the 
brace, the binding-screw 15 may be substi 
tuted by a common hinge-pin. The stay-bar 
is curved downward, as shown, in order that 
its end may not come in contact with the 
pole, as it might otherwise do with some 
poles which require the brace 13 to stand far 
IOC 
IO 
25 
39 
35 
45 
 
408,812 
- 
all all, 
forward. A chain would be an equivalent to 
this curved bar, because all that portion be 
yond the point of attachment would bend 
and hang down of itself, as shown in Fig. III. 
I therefore call such a bar or chain a curved 
or flexible support. The arm 11, extending 
for Ward of the shank 9, serves as a base for 
the brace, so that the latter may stand di 
rectly to its work, thus permitting it to be 
made much lighter than if it had to act as 
This device is light, simple in construction, 
inexpensive, easily adapted for attachment 
to carriages of every different construction, 
and perfectly efficient as a support for either 
the tongues or thills of vehicles. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I believe to be new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is the following: 
1. The combination, in carriage-tongue sup 
ports, of the shank 9, provided with the hook 
10 and the forward arm 11, having half a 
hinge-joint 12 formed on it, the brace 13, pro 
vided with half a hinge 12 and with a longi 
tudinal bore and a binding-screw 17, a forked 
extension-brace 16, fitted to the bore of the 
brace 13, and a binding-screw 15, adapted to 
secure the brace 13 rigidly to the arm 11, 
substantially as shown and described. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
2. The combination of the shank 9, pro 
vided with the hook 10 and the arm 11, the 
brace 13, hinged to the arm II and longitudi 
nally bored and provided with a stud 20, the 
forked extension-brace 16, fitted to the said 
bore in the brace 13, the binding-screw 17, 
fitted in the brace 13, and the stay-bar 19, 
hung at one end to the shank 9 and notched 
to engage the said stud, substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. The combination of the shank 9, pro 
vided with the hook 10 and arm 11, the 
brace 13, hinged to said arm and provided 
with a forked adjustable extension 16, and 
the stay 21, permanently connecting the arm 
11 and shank 9, substantially as shown and 
described. 
4. The combination of the shank 9, pro 
vided with the hook 10 and arm 11, the 
brace 13, hinged to the said arm, and a curved 
or flexible support adapted to connect the 
brace 13 with the vertical portion of the 
shank, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM W. MAYNE. 
Witnesses: 
ANSON J. R.UDSDIL, 
FRANK F. RANDOLPH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408412.txt	(No Model.) 
B. HOLT, 
HEADER, AND THRASHER 
4. Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 408,412. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1889. 
 
la 
SS 
Es 
'''Saleese:::::: 
T. 
|Mini 
E. 
EE 
SE 
Ea. 
(No Model.) 
B. HOLT 
HEADER AND THRASHER 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 408,412, 
Patented Aug. 6, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
No. 408,412. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
B. HOLT. 
HEADER AND THRASHER. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Aug. 6, 1889. 
(Ele size, so 
-- H O 
3-a-E 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
B. HOLT. 
HEADER AND THRASHER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
No. 408,412, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN HOLT, OF STOCKTON, CALIFORNIA. 
HEADER AND THRAS HER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,412, dated August 6, 1889. 
Application filed July 29, 1887. Serial No. 245,639, (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN HOLT, of 
Stockton, county of San Joaquin, State of 
California, have invented an Improvementin 
Headers and Thrashers; and I hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the same. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in combined headers and thrashers, 
the improvement being especially applicable 
to the header portion of the apparatus; and 
my invention consists in the constructions 
and combinations of devices, which I shall 
hereinafter fully describe and claim. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the machine. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional view on the line 2 2 of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an enlarged view of the driv 
ing-gear and adjacent parts. Fig. 4 is a view 
of the spocket - wheels behind the driving 
wheels, together with their adjusting mech 
anism and adjacent parts. 
Fig. 5 is a side 
elevation showing particularly the slotted 
post d, the chain e, the sprocket pulleys or 
Wheels, the link which engages the chain and 
diagonal bar m, and the sickle and means for 
driving it. Fig. 6 is a detail of the upper end 
of the post d, showing the band-wheel k and 
chain pulley or wheel e. 
A is a thrashing-machine frame mounted 
upon the driving and bearing wheels BB, the 
axle of which is journaled upon the frame A 
in the usual manner. 
As my present invention more especially 
relates to the header portion of the apparatus, 
I have not shown the details of the thrasher. 
The main frame C of the header has its in 
ner end hinged to the side of the thrashing 
frame A at the points D, and its timbers C' 
converge from these points toward the outer 
end, where they are supported upon a wheel 
E, the axle of which is journaled upon the 
frame-timbers C'' at the outer end and in line 
with the axle or shaft of the wheels BB. This 
allows the outer end of the frame C to rise 
and fallindependently of the thrashing-frame 
A, the hinged joints at the points Dallowing 
the two frames to conform to each other's 
movements and to the irregularities of the 
surface of the ground over which the maehine 
The supplemental frame H is similar to 
that of ordinary headers; and it consists of 
the timbers h, extending fore and aft and 
nearly in the line of travel of the machine 
and the timbers h". In my present invention 
the timbers h, form a small angle with the 
line of travel, as shown in Fig.1. These tim 
bers pass beneath the fore-and-aft timbers of 
the frame C and are hinged thereto by any 
suitable form of hinge p, so that the front 
end of the frame H may be raised and de 
pressed about these hinges and without ref 
erence to the transverse vertical movements 
of the frame C, to which they are hinged. 
The flat straps which form the hinges p in 
the drawings are no part of my invention, 
but are shown as one method of uniting frames 
C and H. 
The sickle or cutter F and the carrying 
belt or draper G are supported upon the front 
end of the supplemental frame Hin the usual 
manner, and a reel-shaft X has its ends jour 
naled in the front ends of timbers X, which 
extend rearwardly and have their rear ends 
adjustably attached to posts X on the tim 
bersh, of the frame H, while near their cen 
ters they are pivoted to posts X upon the 
frame H, so that the reel moves up and down 
in unison with the movements of the frame 
H and the sickle in the usual manner, these 
parts not being novel in this case. 
It will be seen that the timbers of the 
header-frame C do not extend exactly at right 
angles and parallel with those of the frame 
A; but the front of the frame C has its outer 
end considerably in rear of the line drawn 
through its inner end parallel with the front 
timbers of the frame A. This is for the pur 
pose of making the machine draw lighter, and 
also causing it to work better when turning 
COrmerS. 
As the mechanism and gearing for driving 
the sickle and also the reel-shaft are not par 
allel with or at right angles with the driving 
wheels and machinery upon the main frame 
A, I employ a device for transmitting power 
from the driving-wheels B to these angularly 
arranged parts, which I will now proceed to 
describe. 
Lisa sprocket or chain pulley or wheel fixed 
so as to turn with one of the main driving or 
bearing wheels B by being clamped to the 
25 
35 
45 
So is traveling. 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
408,412 
O 
45 
5 5 
75 
95 
side of the main driving-wheel spokes by 
bolts or by other convenient means. In line 
directly behind this wheel and in the rear of 
the transverse timbers of the main thrashing 
frame A is a sprocket pulley or wheel M, fixed 
upon the shaft M', which is journaled in 
boxes W. These boxes are adjustable hori 
zontally by means of screws W, by turning 
which the boxes may be moved so as to regu 
late the tension of the chain L', which passes 
over said sprocket-wheels I, and M, and also 
the chain N. 
A chain pulley or wheel N is fixed upon 
the shaft M', and the chain N, passing around 
this wheel, extends forward parallel with the 
fore-and-aft timbers of the frame A and 
passes around a chain pulley or wheel O upon 
the shaft P, which is journaled in the frame 
Q parallel with the shaft of the wheels Mand 
N, so that the chain. N' will run freely be 
tween the wheels N and O. 
As the parts upon the header which are to 
be driven from the shaft P do not stand either 
parallel with or at right angles with this shaft, 
it is necessary to change the direction of the 
motion slightly. For this reason I have made 
the frame Q, the said frame being supported 
upon a plate Q', bolted to one of the timbers 
of the frame H, as shown in Fig. 3, with its 
front side parallel with the front timbers of 
the header-frame, and the shaft R, having one 
end journaled in the frame Q and the other 
upon the front timbers of the frame IH, car 
lies a crank-wheel S, from which, by means 
of the pitman S, the sickle is driven in the 
usual manner. 
As the shafts R and P do not stand exactly 
at right angles with each other, I make a spe 
cial bevel-gear consisting of the wheels U and 
T, having such a pitch that they will mesh 
properly together, and power is thus trans 
mitted from the shaft P to the shaft R. Upon 
the end of the reel-shaft X is a chain-pulley 
I, and the chain from this pulley passes back 
ward around the pulley Y upon the shaft Z. 
These shafts all correspond in position with 
the position of the header-frame, as shown, 
but the shaft Z is not parallel with the shaft 
P, from which the power is transmitted. Upon 
the end of the shaft P is a chain-pulley b, and 
upon the end of the shaft Z is a chain-pulley 
a. As this pulley d is situated considerably 
above the pulley l, as shown in Fig. 2, it is 
manifest that the chain which passes between 
these two may be slightly twisted, so as to 
transmit the power from pulley l to pulley a 
without difficulty, notwithstanding the fact 
that the shafts P and Z are not parallel. The 
carrying belt or draper G is driven by a chain 
G', which is driven through the medium of 
the chain-pulley, counter-shaft h, and a second 
chain from the-pulley i? upon the shaft R, as 
shown in Fig. 1. 
The system of chains and pulleys shown as 
connecting shaft R with the carrying-belt is 
old and forms no part of my invention. 
The supplemental rising and falling frame 
H of the header is counterbalanced by a 
weight J upon the rear end of the lever-arm 
K, which is fulcrumed to posts X upon the 
header-frame C in the usual manner. A bar 
or timber m has its rear end attached to the 
timbers of the hinged supplemental header 
frame H and extends diagonally forward to 
a point near the front corner of the thrashing 
machine. 
A slotted post d is secured to one of the 
vertical frame-timbers of the thrashing-ma 
chine frame by bolts d'. Upon the upper end 
of the vertical post or timber d is a chain 
wheele, and upon the lower timbers of the 
frame is another chain-pulley e', and around 
these two pulleys passes a chain e. To the 
end of the diagonal bar or timber 27, a link 
is fixed by a staple or otherwise, and this link 
has a hook at its upper end, as shown, which 
engages with any desired link of the chain e. 
By means of the hand-wheelk upon the shaft 
of the wheele the operator causes the chain 
e to move up and down and carry With it, 
through the linki, the diagonal barn, which 
thus serves to raise and lower the front of the 
supplemental frame H, and with it the sickle, 
so as to cut the high and the low grain. 
I do not claim, broadly, the lifting mechan 
ism as applied to headers generally, but claim 
my especial combination as herein shown. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The thrashing-machine frame A, having 
a frame Chinged to one side in a line parallel 
to the line of travel of the machine, but hav 
ing a rearwardly-inclined front timber, in Com 
bination with the pulley L, secured to one of 
the main driving-wheels, the shaft M' behind 
the pulley L, parallel to its axis, the pulley M 
on the shaft M', chain L', connecting pulleys 
L and M, the counter-shaft P on the forward 
part of the machine parallel to shaft M and 
driven thereby, the shaft R at right angles to 
the front timber of the frame C, the bevel 
gear-wheels U and T between said shafts P 
and R, the sickle parallel to the front timber 
of the frame C, and the crank-wheel and pit 
man connecting the shaft R with the sickle, 
substantially as herein described. 
2. In a combined header and thrasher, the 
header-frame C, hinged to the thrasher-frame 
and extending outwardly, with its front tim 
ber having a rearward inclination, the Sup 
plemental frame H, carrying the sickle and 
grain-belt and hinged to the frame Cat right 
angles to its front timber, the reel mounted 
on a shaft parallel to said front timber, and the 
shaft Z, driving said reel-shaft and parallel 
thereto, in combination with the main driv 
ing-wheels, the shaft M behind said wheels, 
driven thereby and parallel to their axle, the 
shaft Pin front of said driving-wheel, parallel 
to shaftM' and driven thereby, and the chain 
and-pulley connection between shafts P and 
Z, substantially as herein described. 
3. The thrashing-machine frame A, the 
OO 
IOS 
IIO 
II 5 
I 25 
 
408,412 
8 
mental frame H, and the linki, connecting said Io 
bar with the chain e, substantially as herein 
described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
BENJAMIN HOLT. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. CoWIE, 
S. W. ELLIOTT. 
header-frame C, hinged to it and extending 
outwardly therefrom, with the wheel E at the 
outer end, and the supplemental frame H, 
hinged to frame C on a line parallel with its 
front timber and carrying the sickle and grain 
belt or draper, in combination with the chain 
pulleyse and e' and the chain e upon the 
thrashing-machine frame, the diagonal barm, 
extending beneath the timbers of the supple 
W 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408512.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 408, 52. 
H. PARTRICK 
METHOD OF MAKING HATS, 
Patented Aug. 6, 1889. 
 
W77esses 
N, Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washingtand, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HAWLEY PARTRICK, OF DAN BURY, CONNECTICUT, 
METHOD OF MAKING HATS. 
SPECIFICATICN forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,512, dated August 6, 1889. 
Application filed November 16, 1888, Serial No. 291,00l., (No model.) 
e 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HAWLEY PARTRICK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Dan 
bury, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in the Method of Making 
Hats; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention has for its object to cheapen 
the manufacture of hats by lessening the 
number of operations through which the 
bodies must pass, and thereby shortening the 
time required to produce a hat-body ready 
for the various operations of curling, setting, 
finishing, &c. 
The ordinary steps in the manufacture of 
fur hat-bodies are as follows: first, forming 
the body upon a rotating cone in an exhaust 
chamber; Second, sizing or felting the bodies; 
third, shaving; fourth, stiffening, for the bet 
ter grades of hats a wine-stiff being used 
that is, a stiff consisting of fine qualities of 
gum dissolved in alcohol or an equivalent 
solvent-and for the cheaper grades of hats 
inferior grades of gums dissolved in an alka 
line solution. After stiffening the hats they 
require to be dried either by heat or steam. 
This is the fifth operation and occupies from 
six to twelve hours. Under special circum 
stances, with very light hat-bodies and a very 
high temperature, it may be completed in two 
hours. After being thoroughly dried the 
bodies are, sixth, steamed for from twenty 
minutes to half an hour to drive the stiff from 
the surface into the body. At least sixty 
pounds pressure is required, the operation 
being of course performed in a close cham 
ber. The seventh operation is the immersion 
of the bodies in an acid bath for about twelve 
hours to set the stiff. The eighth operation 
is immersion in a bath of clean water to Soak 
out the acid. The ninth operation is stretch 
ing, the tenth dyeing or coloring, and the 
eleventh blocking out. The hats are then 
ready for the various steps or operations of 
curling, setting, finishing, &c. - 
After spending a great deal of time experi 
menting in the manufacture of hats, I have 
O 
25 
35 
45 
discovered that by certain novel improve 
ments in the method of treating and manipu 
lating the bodies I am enabled to dispense 
with the operations of drying, setting in acid 
Water, and soaking out. I thus save in every 
lot of hats many hours of time, which is a 
feature of almost incalculable value during 
the busy season. I avoid three double hand 
lings of the hats heretofore found indispensa 
ble. Imean by this the placing of the bodiesin 
piles and conveying them from the place where 
one operation is performed to the place where 
another operation is to be performed and then 
unloading them again; and, furthermore, I 
save the skilled labor which is required in 
performing the three operations referred to, 
as either of these operations, if not performed 
in a skillful manner, may result in injuring a 
large number of the bodies, if not in ruining 
the entire lot. 
The accompanying drawing, forming part 
of this specification, illustrates a hat-body 
ready to be blocked out. 
It will be seen that my present invention 
dispenses with the operations specified as the 
fifth, seventh, and eighth' operations 
in the method of treating and manipulating 
the bodies to prepare them for the operations 
of curling, finishing, &c. 
In carrying out my invention the hats are 
formed, sized, and shaved in the ordinary 
manner. An oil-stiff is then applied in the 
usual manner-that is, With a brush. After 
applying the stiff the bodies may be taken at 
once to a steaming-chamber and steamed to 
drive the stiff from the surface into the bodies. 
After steaming the usual length of time the 
bodies are taken from the steaming-chamber 
and stretched, colored, and blocked. 
The oil-stiffening which I preferably use 
consists of the following ingredients, com 
bined in substantially the proportions stated, 
viz: shellac, sixty-five to seventy-five pounds; 
rosin, twenty-five to fifty pounds; water, 
eighteen gallons; borax, sufficient quantity 
dissolved in Water to cut the gums, ordinarily 
about ten pounds; oil, (cut preferably with 
sulphuric ether,) one gallon; salt, eight to 
fifteen ounces. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
408,512 
The herein-described improvement in the 
art of making hat-bodies, the same consisting 
in the forming, sizing, and shaving the bodies 
in the usual manner, then applying an oil 
stiff, and then steaming the bodies in the 
usual manner, after which they are ready to 
be stretched, colored, and blocked. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HAWLEY PARTRICK. 
Witnesses: 
A. M. WOOSTER, 
BERTHA. E. LEE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408612.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 408,612. 
C. P. GIFFORD & C. A. ALLEN. 
CHILD's ADJUSTABLE CHAIR, 
Patented Aug. 6, 1889. 
Inventor. 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-ithographer, washington.B.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CYRUs P. GIFFORD AND CHARLES A. ALLEN, OF NORTH EAST, PENNSYL 
VANIA, ASSIGNORS TO ROBERT J. MOORHEAD AND MARVIN A. CALD 
WELL, OF SAME PLACE. 
CHILD'S ADJUSTABLE CHAIR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,612, dated August 6, 1889. 
Application filed September 21, 1888, Serial No. 286,032, (No model.) 
I5 cation. 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Beitknown that we, CYRUSP. GIFFORD and 
CHARLES A. ALLEN, citizens of the United 
States, residing at North East, in the county 
5 of Erie and State of Pennsylvania, have jointly 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in a Child's Adjustable Chair; and we 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Io such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, forming part of this specifi 
Our invention consists in the improvements 
in a child's adjustable chair hereinafter set 
forth and explained, and illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which-- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the chair 
adjusted to operate as a rocking-chair. Fig. 
2 is a like view of the chair adjusted to op 
erate as a high chair. Fig. 3 is a detail view 
showing the attachment of the real leg of the 
25 chair to the rocker, the round E being shown 
Like letters refer to like parts in all the 
In constructing our improved chair the body 
3O of the chair A is of usual and ordinary con 
struction. This chair-body A is mounted on 
a double set of rockers B B and C C, the 
set of rockers B B fitting between the rockers 
CC, and being centrally pivoted thereto by a 
35 round b, so that when closed together, as 
shown in Fig. 1, the two sets of rockers are 
parallel. To the ears c c on the front ends of 
the rockers C C the lower ends of the front 
legs of the chair-body A are pivoted, and in 
4o the rear ends of the rockers B B is mounted 
a revoluble round E, through which links or 
rods of wire F operate. One of these links F 
is pivoted to the inside of each of the rear 
legs G. G of the chair-body, and passes through 
45 small holes in the revoluble round E, so that 
they will slide freely therein, and are pro 
vided on their lower ends with small heads f. 
to prevent them from being withdrawn there 
in Section. 
figures. 
m 
- 
. 
- 
. 
from. The rear ends h, h of the rockers B 
are cut off somewhat shorter than the rockers 5o 
C C, so as to admit of the round e being se 
cured between the rear ends of the rockers 
C. C. The rear ends h; h of the rockers B B 
are also hollowed out, so as to fit the under 
side of the chair - rounds d d, which rest 
thereon when the chair is adjusted to operate 
as a high chair, as illustrated in Fig. 2. The 
front ends of the rockers B B are also pro 
vided with a transverse round g, secured 
therein. On the front of the chair-legs D D 
a step or foot-rest H is secured in the usual 
manner. In operation the chair, when ad 
justed as illustrated in Fig. 1, operates as a 
child's rocking-chair. 
In order to adjust it as a high chair, as illus 
trated in Fig. 2, the round a is grasped by 
the hand of the operator, while the foot is 
placed upon the round e at the rear end of 
the rockers C. C. The chair-body A is then 
lifted up, the links F raising the rear ends of 
the rockers B B until the rockers B B and C 
C are opened up, so that the rounds D of the 
chair-body rest upon the rear ends of the 
rockers BB, when it operates as a high chair. 
To adjust it back again, this operation is re 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
so as to enable others to make use of the 
same, what we claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
S 
1. In a convertible chair, the combination, 
with the outer rockers pivoted to the front 
legs of the chair, of the inner rockers pivoted 
centrally to the outer rockers and forming a 
double rocking surface at the base of the 
chair, a round journaled in the rear ends of 
the said inner rockers, and sliding links piv 
oted to the rear legs of the chair and engag 
ing with the said round, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a convertible chair, the combination, 
with the outer rockers provided with ears c c, 
pivoted to the front legs of the chair, of the 
inner rockers pivoted centrally to the outer 95 
rockers and provided with grooves h. in their 
versed. 
85 
7o 
75 
- 
- 
408,612 
ends for engaging with the rounds d of the 
chair, the revoluble round E, journaled in the in presence of two witnesses. 
inner rockers, and the links FF, pivoted to 
the rear legs of the chair and free to slide 
5 back and forth in holes formed through the 
said round E, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
I. H. COON, 
R. B. REID. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
CY RUS P. GIFFORD. 
CHARLES A, AILLEN. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408712.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 408,712. 
H. HENSCHEL. 
PAPER BOX MAKING MACHINE . 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 13, 1889. 
Fig. 2. 
% 
??? 
 
|% 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
-- 
HERMANN HENSCHEL, OF LUCKENWALDE, PRUSSIA, GERMANY. 
PAPER-Box-MAKING MACHIN E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,712, dated August 18, 1889. 
Application filed August 8, 1887, Serial No. 246,471 (Model.) Patented in Germany January 27, 1887, No. 40,405, and in 
England October 4, 1887, No. 13,415. 
1. ? 
20 
25 
To a?? to/L??? ?? ??? ???ucer"?: 
Be it known that I, HERMANN HENSCHEL, 
manufacturer, of Luckenwalde, in the King 
dom of Prussia and German Empire, have in 
vented a new and useful Paper-Box-Making 
Machine, of which the following is a specifi 
cation, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings. 
This invention has been patented to me by 
British Letters Patent No. 13,415 of October 4, 
1887, and German Patent No. 40,405, of Jan 
uary 27, 1887. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
mechanism which will form a box at one op 
eration, said box having when finished a pro 
jecting bead around its lower edge and plain 
cylindrical sides extending therefrom to the 
upper edge. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion through the cutting-plunger, the male 
die carried therein being shown in side ele 
vation, and the female die and support there 
for, together with the blank, being also in sec 
tion, all the parts being in normal position 
ready to begin the operation of forming the 
bOX, Fig. 2 shows the cutting-plunger and 
the male die moved downwardly a part of 
their entire stroke, the blank at this period of 
the operation having been cut and pressed 
into cylindrical form. Fig. 3 shows the plun 
ger and die at the limit of their downward 
movement, the box having now been forced 
through the female die, so that its lower edge 
is below said die. 
Fig. 4 shows the next step 
in the operation, the cutting-plunger and both 
the male and female dies having risen to 
gether, the relation between these parts being 
maintained as in Fig. 3, and this figure also 
shows in section the block which causes the 
formation of the rib or bead on the box when 
the plunger and die descend. Fig. 5 shows 
this action of forming the bead by the de 
scent of the female die and cutting-plunger. 
Figs. 6 and 7 are similar views representing 
the box as completed and being discharged. 
The female die IB B, having an opening b, 
of oval or round shape, is held by long screws 
CC, projecting from the supports A A. The 
nuts DD on the upper end of the screws are 
somewhat above the female die, so as to al 
low the same to be moved to and from the 
bars AA, for a purpose hereinafter stated. 
This die IB supports the blank, as at o, Fig. 1, 
and directly above the opening in the die 
'and over the blank the cutting-plunger E is 
positioned, which carries centrally therewith 
the shank E of the male die E, which die is 
adapted to fit in a socket or seat in the lower 
face of the cutting-plunger. The cutting 
plunger is adapted in size to fit snugly the 
opening in the female die and its lower edge 
about the male-die seat forms a cutterf, which 
severs the blank to the proper size when said 
edge is passing the upper edge of the female 
die opening. The male die projects beloW 
the cutting-edge, and of course is smaller in 
diameter tham the opening in the female die, 
and thus when the said die with the cutting 
plunger descends it forces the blank into the 
female die, and thus forms the cylindrical 
box, the sides of the same being between the 
sides of the said dies, as in Fig. 2, and at the 
same time this action takes place the cut 
ting-plunger moves downwardly, and at the 
time the box has been formed, as in Fig. 2, 
the cutting-edge f has trimmed the surplus 
material from the edge of the blank, as at , 
Fig. 2. The male die E is movable to and 
from its seat in the cutting-plunger, and in 
the operation of the parts thus far described 
it occupies its lowest or outward position in 
relation thereto, bearing firmly against the 
box-bottom; but at the proper time, as Will 
hereinafter be pointed out, the said die moves 
back into its seat, and leaves the bottom of 
the box free from support for the purpose of 
allowing the same to be upset to form the 
bead. After the box has been formed, as in 
Fig. 2, the male die and plunger continule 
their movement until the lower edge of the 
box has passed below the lower edge of the 
female die. This limit of movement is shown 
in Fig. 3, and after this has been reached 
these three parts-viz., the cutting-plunger, 
male die, and female die-rise, but keep in the 
same position relative to each other. A plate 
or anvil K is then moved into the opening in 
the support AA to fill the same, and this 
is shown in Fig. 4. * The male die E now 
moves back in its seat, leaving the bottom of 
55 
?? 
65 . 
75 
8) 
IOO 
35 
45 
 
2 
408,712 
ing at all times beyond the cutting-edgef, 
whereby the body of the material will first be 
pressed to form the box by the male die and 
then cut by the edge f, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. In combination, the female die B, the 
cutting-plunger E, the male die projecting 
normally beyond the cutting-edge of said 
plunger and arranged movably in said plun 
ger, the said female die being movable, means 
for controlling the male die, and an anvill or 
plate K, substantially as described. 
3. In combination, the female die having 
an opening therethrough, means for cutting 
and forming the blank and for forcing the 
same partially through the female die, So that 
its lower edge will project therefrom, and the 
anvil or plate K, adapted in size to afford a 
bearing for the projecting edge of the box, 
the said female die and anvill K being mov 
able, substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have here unto Set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
HERMANN HENSCHEL. 
35 
45 
VWitnesses: 
l3. ROI, 
FRIED. SCHRDER. . 
O 
the box without interior support, and upon 
the downward movement of the cutter and 
female die, which now occurs, the bottom of 
the box is upset and a bead is formed be 
tween the anvil or plate K and the female 
die B, as shown in Fig. 5. After this the an 
vil Kis removed and the continued move 
ment of the plunger and die E effects the 
discharge of the box, as in Figs. 6 and 7, the 
latter of which shows the cutting-plunger and 
male die raised again. The waste material i 
is then removed. 
For the purpose of operating the male die 
to change its position in relation to the cut 
ting-plunger, as above described, I employ a 
Wedge E, which works through an opening 
in the said plunger and the shank E of the 
male die. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination, the female die having a 
plain cylindrical opening extending through 
it to a point at or near its upper surface, the 
cutting-plunger E', having cutting-edges to 
pass into the opening in said die and cut a 
blank from the body of the material when it, 
reaches said upper surface of the die, and a 
male die E', carried by the plunger project 
2 ? 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408812.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 408,812, 
C. A. PRATT. 
SPINNING SPINDLE AND SUPPORT THEREFOR, 
Patented Aug. 13, 1889. 
 
 
arms 
S AER 
a 
SS 
N S S 
 
6 - C 
t 
NYA Z. 
, 
 
N N 
Witnesses. 
GN,N 
U 
Inventor, 
Clesson fl. Pratt. 
1 Y 
A/ ttorney. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLESS ON A. PRATT, OF FITC HBURG, MASS ACHUSETTS. 
SPINNING-SPINDLE AND SUPPORT THE REFOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,812, dated August 18, 1889. 
Application filed July 18, 1888, Serial No, 280,340, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, CLESSON A. PRATT, a citi 
Zell of the United States, residing at Fitchburg, 
in the County of Worcester and State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Spinning-Spindles and 
Supports Therefor; and I do declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
er's skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the letters 
and figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to spindles for spin 
ling Cotton and the like; and the objects are to 
furnish a spindle that may be run with little 
POWel' and at a high rate of speed; to so con 
struct the bearings that all wear, however 
slight, may be readily taken up, and to soar 
range the parts that they are not liable to get 
out of order from carelessness in handling. 
A further object attained is to make the 
Construction as simple and inexpensive as 
possible and such that any part becoming 
Worn can be easily replaced. 
The invention is illustrated in the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation, partly in section, of 
a spindle and bearings constructed in accord 
ance With my invention. Fig. 2 is a perspec 
tive view of a portion of the upper part of 
the Supporting-case carrying the bolster-bear 
ing. Fig. 3 is a similar view of the bolster-bear 
ing. Fig. 4 is a view of the oil-guard sur 
rounding the spindle inside of the bolster 
bearing, and Fig. 5 is a top view of the spring 
bushing for retaining the bobbin upon the 
spindle. 
Like letters designate corresponding parts 
in all of the figures. 
In the drawings, A represents the support 
ing-case, attached to the rail of the spinning 
frame by means of a nut a, working in a 
Screw-thread formed around the shank of the 
case, and B is the removable upper part of 
the case, in which the bolster-bearing of the 
Spindle is mounted. The removable portion 
Or Casing B is in the form of a hollow nut of 
cylindrical form, which is attached to the 
bolster proper by means of a screw-thread 
O 
25 
35 
45 
- 
formed around the lower portion thereof, 
which fits a corresponding interior screw 
thread in the upper end of the case. The top 
part of the casing B is closed by means of a 
nut C, fitting therein, and through this nut C 
and the bottom of the casing B are formed 
apertures bc, respectively, through which the 
Spindle S passes. 
The spindle is supported in the casing by 
a bolster-bearing of the following description. 
Within the casing is the seat D, consisting of 
a cylindrical sleeve d of considerably greater 
diameter than the spindle and supported in 
position by an annular flange e, extending at 
right angles outwardly from the lower edge 
thereof, and preferably closely fitting the in 
terior of the casing, upon the bottom of which 
it rests, and to which it is attached by means 
of screws or in any other suitable manner. 
The interior of the sleeve d is of a little 
larger diameter at the top than at the bottom, 
forming a tapering or slightly-conical inner 
surface. Within this seat D, and resting 
against the inner tapering surface, is a bear 
ing-sleeve E, secured to the spindle and hav 
ing a downwardly-extending portion f, similar 
to the sleeve d, but of a size to fit easily 
therein and tapered to correspond therewith. 
This tapering surface forms the bearing-sur 
face of the spindle. 
The bearing-sleeve E is fitted and attached 
to the spindle by means of an annular flange 
9, formed at the upper edge of the bearing 
portion f, and having a sleeve h extending up 
wardly therefrom and fitting closely around 
the spindle. The nut C, forming the top of 
the casing B, is screwed down. So as to bear 
against the upper surface of the flange g, and 
thus prevent the spindle from risingin its bear 
ing when in operation, the aperture in the cen 
ter of the nut being of sufficient size to allow 
the sleeve h to turn therein with the rotation 
of the spindle without contact. The interior of 
the casing around the outside of the sleeved 
constitutes the oil-chamber, to which oil is 
supplied through the hole i, and from which 
oil is supplied to the bearing-surface by means 
of holes ifi, formed in the sleeve d. These 
holes if are preferably partially plugged with 
leather to prevent a too abundant supply of 
oil to the bearing-surface. 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
408,812 
the spindle, and the nut may then be slightly 
loosened to allow the spindle to rotate with 
out excessive friction, while the parts E and 
ID are fitted loosely enough to admit sufficient 
oil between the bearing-surfaces to constitute 
a somewhat yielding bearing. The ball-bear 
ing I forms a step of sufficient flexibility to 
cause the upper end of the spindle to run true. 
The whirl IX is mounted upon the spindle 
between the two bearings, and is partially ill 
closed by the body of the supporting-case. 
A spring-bushing L is fitted upon the Spin 
die a short distance above the upper bearing, 
and serves to hold the bobbin when the spin 
dle is in operation. 
It will be seen that by the construction 
above described any wear of the parts can be 
taken up. The wear is uniform in all parts, 
and if any part is injured or broken it can be 
replaced at small expense. The construction 
of the bolster and supporting-case also pe1 
mits the spindle to be removed from its bear 
ings without the necessity of removing the 
case from the spinning-frame. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination of the spindle S, bearing 
sleeve E, movable vertically thereon and hav 
ing lorizontal flange i? and downwardly-ta 
pering bearing-surface f, the seat D, consist 
ing of the upwardly-extending sleeve (l, hay 
ing tapering inner bearing-surface adapted 
to correspond with the bearing-sleeve E, oil 
guard F, surrounding said spindle within said 
bearing, the cylindrical case supporting said 
seat and oil-guard and having an oil-cham 
ber surrounding and communicating with 
said bearing-surfaces, adjustable nut C, form 
ing the top of said case, a ball step-bearing I 
at the lower end of said spinlle, step-support, 
G, Vertically adjustable by means of screw 
threads formed thereon and on the interiol' 
of the bolster-shank, and a supporting-case A, 
carrying said bolster and step-bearing, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose herein speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CLESSON A. PIRATT. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. IURTT, 
.J. W. MIERRIOM. 
55 
75 
So 
95 
To prevent the oil from running down the 
spindle below the bearing, a guard consist 
ing of a tube F is placed between the spindle 
and the bearing extending upwardly within 
the same, and having an outside flange k, 
which rests upon the bottom of the casing B 
around the spindle-aperture, by means of 
which it is held in place. The interior of this 
guard-sleeve is of sufficient size to allow the 
spindle to rotate freely within it without 
coming in contact with the sleeve, and the 
space within the sleeve (l allows the tube to 
extend within the same without contact nearly 
to the horizontal flange (f. The bearing-sleeve 
E is thus inclosed in a groove which at all 
times contains sufficient oil for lubricating 
purposes, but prevents overflow upon the 
spindle. 
The slank of the casing A is made hollow, 
and in the lower end is mounted the step-sup 
port, G, adjustable vertically therein by means 
of suitable screw-threads, as at ll. A nut II, 
mounted upon G and adapted to bear against 
the end of the shank, serves to hold the same 
firmly in position when properly adjusted. 
The lower end of the spindle is supported 
upon the upper end of the step-support G by 
means of a ball-bearing I, the ends of the 
support and the spindle being suitably cupped 
to receive the same, as shown in Fig. 1 at in 
7). By means of the ball-bearing and the ad 
justable step-support G the bearing can be 
adjusted to any desired height to suit, the 
length of the spindle, and the spindle will 
alway's find its true center of rotation. The 
space around the spindle in the interior of 
the shank of the lolster forms an oil-chain 
ber, by means of which the ball-bearing is 
lubricated, and the oil is supplied to this cham 
ber by means of a duct n, leading from the 
Outside of the bolster. 
IBy means of the spherical form of the bear 
ing the wear is equal on all sides, and what 
ever wear there may be can be taken up by 
means of the screw - thread upon the bear 
ing-Support G. In the same manner the wear 
upon the upper bearing can be taken up by 
tightening the nut C in the casing B, the 
sleeve h of the bearing E having a snug fit 
upon the spindle, and the action of the nut, 
being to force the sleeve downwardly upon 
TO 
25 
45 
SO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US408912.txt	E. H. CHESTERTON. 
FINGER GUARD. 
Patented Aug. 13, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
No. 408,912, 
 
2. State 
s2-aza . 
&/2E, 
%4. 
ATTORNEYS. 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNEST H. CHESTERTON, OF LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA. 
FINGER-GUARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 408,912, dated August 18, 1889. 
Application filed December 20, 1888, Serial No, 294,229, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ERNEST H. CHESTERTON, 
of Los Angeles, in the county of Los Angeles 
and State of California, have invented a new 
and Improved Finger-Guard, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
guard for use in the slicing of vegetables, 
fruits, &c., upon what are termed in the trade 
vegetable-slicers; and to this end the in 
vention consists of a pouch or guard into 
which two or more of the fingers are slipped 
and a thumb pouch or guard which is con 
nected to the main finger-guard by a flexi 
ble band, all as will be hereinafter described, 
and specifically pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in both the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved finger-guard, representing the same 
as it appears when applied to the hand of an 
operator, a portion of a vegetable-slicer being 
represented in this view; and Fig. 2 is a per 
spective view of the guard. 
In constructing such a guard as the one form 
ing the subject-matter of this application I pro 
vide a pouch 10, which is preferably made of 
metal, but which might be made of any other 
proper material which would not be injured 
by contact with the knife of the slicer. To 
this pouch there is connected a flexible strip 
11, preferably of metal. Upon the extending 
O 
25 
35 
end of the strip 11 there is secured a thumb 
pouch or stall 12. The pouch 10 is made of 
proper size to receive one, two, or more fin 
gers, the size whichI prefer being that adapted 
to receive three fingers, as shown in the draw 
ings, and, if desired, one or both sides of the 
pouch might be bent inward, as shown at Cl, 
thus producing partial separation between 
the fingers of the operator. 
In use the guard is applied as represented 
in Fig. 1, and in practice it will be found that 
should the hand of the operator slip, or should 
he inadvertently hold the piece of vegetable 
or fruit being operated upon too long, his 
hand will be fully protected against the ac 
tion of the knife of the slicer. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The improved finger.guard consisting of 
the main metal pouch 10, adapted to receive 
the tips of two or more fingers, the independent 
metal thumb-pouch 12, and a flexible band 11, 
which is attached to said pouches at its re 
spective ends and serves as the sole connec 
tion between them, as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with a main finger 
pouch, of a thumb pouch or stall and a me 
tallic band, the band being connected to the 
finger-pouch at one end and to the thumb 
pouch at the other, substantially as described. 
ERNEST II. CHESTERTON. 
O 
45 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES B. RICHARDS, 
JAMES MARSHALL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409013.txt	(No Model.) 
APPARATUS FOR TESTING AND DISINFECTING DRAIN OR SOIL PIPES. 
Patented Aug. 13, 1889. 
No. 409,013, 
W. S. CLARK, 
2 Sheets-Sheet. 1, 
 
 
BY 
INVENTOR 
?? 
????? 
ATFORMWEY 
N. Eles. Ph 
(No Model.) 
APPARATUS FOR TESTING AND DISINFECTING DRAIN OR SOIL, PIPES. 
Patented Aug. 13, 1889. 
No. 409,013, 
W. S. CLARK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
  
 
 
 
 
??? 
????? 
. 
.? 
 
2 
N. Peters, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. S. CLARIK, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
APPARATUS FOR TESTING AND DISINFECTING DRAIN OR SOIL PIPES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 409,018, dated August 13, 1889. 
Application filed May 9, 1889, Serial No. 310,182, (No model.) 
55 
7 c 
75 
To all, Luhon, it invay conce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. S. CLARK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Apparatus 
for Testing and Disinfecting Drain or Soil 
Pipes; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a sufficiently full, clear, and exact de 
scription thereof as to enable others skilled 
in the art to make and use the said inven 
tion. 
This invention relates to the disinfecting 
and testing of drain or soil pipes, and has 
for its object the disinfection and deodoriz 
ing of Such pipes and the detection and locat 
ing of leaks. 
To effect these results, this invention con 
sistS in an apparatus for, first, partially clos 
ing the inlets and branches of such pipes, 
and then forcing into and through them of 
disinfecting vapors or fumes and afterward 
closing the outlets and subjecting the pipes 
to pneumatic pressure with air containing 
volatile substances which by their odor in 
dicate the location of any leak. 
I will now proceed to fully and particularly 
describe my invention, referring in so doing 
to the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 shows a building in vertical sec 
tion, having soil and drain pipes to which 
this apparatus is applied. Fig. 2 shows a 
Section of a pipe end with a plug applied. 
Figs. 3 and 4 show the parts of the plug in 
Section separately. Fig. 5 shows a section of 
the air forcing and fumigating apparatus; 
and Figs. 6 and 7 show modifications of the 
- fumigating or disinfecting apparatus in ver 
tical section. 
The same letters of reference and ordinals 
indicate the same parts in the several figures. 
A represents a soil-pipe united by bell and 
spigot joints A", leaded and calked in the 
usual manner, and having branches A* for 
receiving drainage, and the usual trap A and 
outlet A" to the common sewer or culvert. 
B are stopper's inserted in the inlets. A 
and outlets A'. The stopper B consists of a 
circular hollow conical metallic plug B", pro 
vided with a flange B, formed with a step or 
shoulder B upon it, and a conical cap B", fit 
ting over the plug B", also provided with a 
- 
flange or rim B, having a shoulder B' formed 
upon it. 
Centrally into the plug B is se 
curely fixed a screw-threaded tube B', which 
passes through the cap B and is provided 
with a wing-nut B. A band of india-rubber 
B is fitted around the plug B, between the 
flanges B and B. When the cap B" is raised 
from the plug B", the rubber band B rests 
upon the step B in the flange 13 and the 
shoulder J3 in the cap B'. 
As the cap B is 
forced, by screwing the wing-nut B on the 
tube B, tQward the plug B, the band B, un 
der the compression, expands in the center of 
its length, and the ends of the band B, turn 
ing upon the angle of the shoulders B and 
B", rest around the shoulders B and B", and 
with what was before expansion the edges 
of the cylindric face of the band l3, now 
as flat surfaces, rest against the flanges B 
and B, thus producing a greater extent of 
expansion than was practicable with the 
flanges B? and B without the shoulders B 
and B. The exterior form of the plug IB 
and the interior form of the cap B are such 
that they fit within each other and touch at 
the upper ends, thus restricting excessive mo 
tion and injury to the flanges B and B by 
forcing them unduly close to each other. 
This construction of plug adapts it to fit a 
larger range of diameters of pipes than When 
the india - rubber is simply compressed be 
tween flat flanges and thereby diametrically 
expanded, and is more flexible and readily 
adapts itself to any imperfections of the in 
terior surfaces of pipes. A stop-cock B" or 
valve serves to open and close communica 
tion with the pipe through the tube B'. 
C is an air-pump, consisting of a cylindler 
C', detachably connected to a base bed-plate 
E, a piston C, inlet-passage C, and outlet 
valve C, terminating in a two-branched tube 
C,one of which branchesis connected, through 
an inverted-siphon seal C, with a manometer. 
or pressure-gage C and a siphon-gage C", 
which are to be used alternately for low and 
high pressures, and the other branch with a 
tube C, leading to one of the stop-cocks B'on 
one of the plugs B, inserted in a branch A' of 
the soil-pipe A to be fumigated and tested. 
Stop-cocks C11 and Care placed in the mano 
meter and siphon-gage connections. 
Connected with the inlet-passage C' is a 
9 O 
95 
OO 
? ? 
2 ? 
35 
45 
i 
i 
2 
409,013 
vapors the location of the leak, which, being 
repaired, the test is repeated. Until the press 
tre remains constant on the malnometer, by 
drawing the air through the fumigating-Ves 
sel, disinfectantssuch as sulphur--can be 
used, which cannot be done when the fumi 
gating-chamber is under pressure with the 
pipes under test. 
Having described my invention, what I claim 
S 
1. A fumigating-vessel havinga spring-Sulp 
ported air-inlet valve opening downward in 
the top, a removable perforated support for 
combustible fumigating material, and all out 
let-tube at the base connected and combined 
with the inlet-valve of an air-forcing pump, 
constructed and arranged to operate substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the air-pump C with 
the bed-plate E, and the fumigating-Vessel D 
containing the removably-attached pump, in 
let-valve C', and air-inlet valve I), said fumi 
gating-vessel being detachably connected to 
the bed-plate E, substantially as shown and 
dieScribed. 
3. The combination of the air-pump C, sup 
ported by the bed-plate E, which is provided 
with the valve C, with the vessel ID, provided 
with the pump-inlet spring-valve C''', the ma 
nometer C, siphon-seal C''', and siphon-gage 
C1", provided with the cocks C and C''', sub 
stantially as shown and described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
WWIILLIAM S. CILARIK. 
Witnesses: 
J. DANIEL EBY, 
A. V. BUDD. 
45 
55 
7 ? 
fumigating chamber or vessel ID, having an 
air - inlet valve D', opening downward and 
Supported by light springs at the upper por 
tion, a perforated vessel D, filled with an ab 
SOrbent material D-such as a sponge-and 
a perforated tube D', leading to the passage 
C and containing the inlet-valve C1 of the 
pump C, which is constructed like the valve 
D' and is removably inserted in the base of 
the fumigating- chamber D in the bed-plate 
E. The perforated vessel D* is removable 
and can be replaced by a vessel for burning 
sulphur, as shown in Fig. 6, or by a vessel for 
holding volatile fluids, as shown in Fig. 7, in 
stead of the saturated sponge D. 
The operation of disinfecting and testing 
with this apparatus is as follows: The plugs 
B are inserted in the branches A and outlets 
A', and the nuts B tightened, so as to expand 
the packing B. The disinfecting-fluid is in 
troduced in the vessel Dandairdrawn through 
it and forced through the tube C and out of 
the stop-cocks B7 until the escaping air pass 
ing from the other stop-cocks lB" indicates by 
its odor, and the siphon-gage C", indicating 
the resistance to the air made by the trap 
Seals of the pipes, shows that the disinfecting 
agent has reached that part. All of the stop 
cocks B", except that connected with the tube 
C, are then closed and the pump is operated 
until the desired pressure is indicated by the 
manometer C. The stop - cock C is then 
closed, and if the manometer shows a continu 
ance of the full pressure the pipes A are 
known to be tight. If, however, the pressure 
is shown to subside on the manometer, an ex 
amination of the pipe A will show by the odor 
of the escaping disinfectant or fumigating 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409113.txt	(No Model.) 
P. F. 
McCARTY & R. SEYTER 
BOTTLE WASHER 
No. 409,ll3 
Patented Aug 
13 
1889, 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
K ? ?? 
azzazzzzzzzz 
SNN 
2 
N 
WN 
akavaKaskes 
 
7f77/ASSAS 
MPETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington, D.c. 
?? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
PETER F. MCCARTY AND ROBERT SEYTER, OF CORNING, NEW YORK; SAID 
SEYTER ASSIGNOR TO SAID MCCARTY. 
BOTTLE WAS HER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 409,113, dated August 18, 1889. 
Application filed August 24, 1888, Serial No, 283,675, (No model.) 
Io 
To all typh???, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, PETER F. MCCARTY 
and ROBERT SEYTER, citizens of the United 
States of America, residing at Corning, in the 
5 county of Steuben and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Bottle-Washers, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention pertains to certain new and 
useful improvements in bottle-washers, hav 
ing for its object the provision of new and 
improved highly-efficient means for effecting 
the Washing or cleansing of a bottle by sprays 
I5 of water ejected from a rapidly-revolving jet 
tube. 
The invention therefore comprises the de 
tails of construction, combination, and ar 
rangement of parts, Substantially as herein 
2O after fully set forth, and particularly pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical sectional view of our improved bot 
tle-Washer, taken on the line w w, Fig. 2, 
25 which is a horizontal sectional view on the 
line acac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail plan view. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
cylindrical housing or boxing, and a the Wa 
ter-supply pipe, into which the lower neck a? 
3O of said housing is screwed, said neck being 
provided with a hexagonal flange A, to per 
mit of the application thereto of a wrench or 
other instrument. This housing or boxing 
has a separable bottom a*, in a central aper 
35 ture of which is disposed a steel pluga, rest 
ing at its lower end upon a transversely-dis 
posed wedge-shaped pin a, passed through 
the neck a'. By means of this pin the plug 
can be raised or lowered, as desired. To the 
4o top of housing or boxing A is connected an 
upper neck b, wherein is formed a chamber 
b'. Apertures bare formed in bottom Ct, to 
permit the outflow of water. 
B B are two curved or bent pipes, con 
45 nected at their lower ends to opposite points 
of the neck a', and the upper end of pipe B 
opens into the water-chamber b', while the 
pipe B opens obliquely into the housing or 
boxing A, near the upper end thereof. Each 
5O pipe is preferably composed of two parts 
55 
?? 
united by a collar b, to permit of their sepa 
ration when the boxing or housing is to be 
removed from its separable bottom. 
C is the jet-tube passed through close-fit 
ting apertures of neck b and housing or box 
ing A, and in its lower end is secured a 
pointed steel plug d, which rests upon the 
plug Ci. To this jet-tube C is rigidly secured 
a wheel D, with which the water entering 
housing or boxing A is designed to come in 
direct contact and cause the revolution there 
of and of the tube C. The tube C has a se 
ries of perforations d' located within water 
chamber b', and near its upper end is pro 
vided with a series of inclined apertures d', 
extending upwardly from their inner ends. 
Upon the upper end of tube C are secured, by 
a screw d, rubber arms E. E., which, in the 
rapid revolution of tube C, will aid in cleans 
ing the bottle placed over said tube. 
In practice, Water passing from pipe a will 
enter pipes B B and pass into water-cham 
ber b' and housing or boxing A. That enter 
ing chamber b' will pass up through tube C 
and out through the upper inclined apertures 
thereof, while that entering housing or box 
ing A will cause the rapid revolution of wheel 
D, and with it tube C. It will thus be seen 
that a rapid and continuous flow of water will 
be had, and that by reason of the revolution 
of tube C and the rubber arms the bottle on 
said tube will be thoroughly and effectively 
cleansed in a short space of time. 
Our invention is extremely simple, cheap, 
and durable, and as it comprises but few parts 
is not liable to get out of order or become dis 
arranged. 
65 
75 
90 
We claim as our invention 
1. As an improvement in bottle-washers, 
the housing or boxing having an upper Wa 
ter-supply chamber, the Water-pipes opening, 
respectively, into said chamber and said hous 
ing or boxing, the jet-tube having an upper 
apertured end provided with rubber arms, 
and a series of apertures in said chamber, 
and a wheel secured on Said tube within said 
housing or chamber, substantially as set forth. 
2. The herein - described improved bottle 
washer, comprising the housing or boxing 
having the upper and lower necks, the water- too 
2 
4C9,113 
supply pipes connected to said lower neck, 
and opening, respectively, into said housing in presence of two witnesses. 
or boxing and into said neck, the jet-tube 
passing through and extending above said 
5 chamber and provided with apertures d' d', 
the wheel secured to said tube, and the rub- 
ber arms attached to the upper end of said 
jet-tube, substantially as shown and described. 
d 
MORRIS A. OBER, 
J. A. RONEY. 
Witnesses: 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
PETER F. MC CARTY 
ROBERT SEYTER ... 
? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409214.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 409,214, 
0, LUETKE. 
STANDARD FOR LAMPS, 
Patented Aug. 20, 1889. 
 
 
Witnesses: 
97 /eces & 
Inventor: 
46%. 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OSCAR LUETIKE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
STANDARD FOR LAMPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 409,214, dated August 20, 1889. 
Application filed November 1, 1888, Serial No, 289,764, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concer'I: 
Be it known that I, OSCAR LUETKE, of 
Brooklyn, Kings county, State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement, 
in Adjustable Standards, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
adjustable standards, such as are used on 
piano-lamps, music-stands, and similar arti 
cles; and the object of my invention is to pro 
Videa bearing-surface for the protruding parts 
of the adjusting mechanism, which surface 
will yield sufficiently or become indented so 
as to give the slide a hold without showing 
any dents on the outside of the standard and 
Without cutting or abrading the inside of the 
stationary part of the standard and wearing 
it out. I attain these objects by the combi 
nation illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ing, showing a standard in section, in which 
AA represent the lower stationary part of 
the standard; B, a fixed internal tube; C, the 
slide with an expanding mechanism D at 
tached. Eshows an indenture in the tube B. 
The tube B is made of annealed brass or a simi 
lar soft metal thin enough to yield and strong 
enough to carry the slide. Any one of the vari 
Ous expanding mechanisms applicable to ad 
justable standards-as, for instance, the one 
for which Letter's Patent No. 390,3S1 were 
granted to me October 2, 188S-having one or 
more parts or jaws which are caused to expand, 
widen out, project, or protrude from the slid 
25 
ing part C within the part A. A when the slide 
is to stop, may be used in combination with 
my improvement, which consists of the soft 
metal tube B, inserted and fixed into the stand 
ard A A and containing the slide C with ex 
panding mechanism D. When D is expand 
ed, it will cause a sufficient indentation in the 
tube B to give the slide C a hold or resting 
place without showing any dent on the out 
side of AA to spoil its appearance, and with 
out injuring, abrading, or wearing out the in 
side of A. A. When the tube B becomes dent 
ed all over, then the expanding part D will 
naturally slip into one of the dents already 
made, so that the tube B remains equally good 
for its purpose no matter how often the slide 
is set. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
An adjustable standard consisting of an 
upright stationary tube, a movable tube tele 
scoping into the stationary tube, a soft-metal 
tube supported in the stationary tube, and an 
expanding mechanism attached to the tele 
scoping tube and longitudinally adjustable in 
the soft-metal tube and constructed to pro 
duce indentures in the soft-metal tube to hold 
it in its adjusted position. 
OSCAR LUETIKE. 
Witnesses: 
A. LANGERFELD, 
ST. HEUSLER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409314.txt	(N0 M0del.) 
N0, 409,314, 
 
(, 0, IBI?A0KMI0IRI, 
WAIRR HIRAIER, 
3 Sheets-sheet, 1, 
Patented Aug. 20, 1889. 
- 
- 
SSESSESSESSESSSS 
S---------- 
%----3zzzzzzzzzz 
-P------------Z---------------------------------------2-2-2------2-2------------------------22-C-C---------- 
-- -- -----------------------?-----S 
SES? S 
S 
N 
2 
?----- 
N 
IN 
S 
 
* 
3 lly- 
-------------------?*-2---------7-2------------,2-22-2----------------- 
/ 
* 
-- 
-?------?-I-I----------------3-5-------- SS 
NS 
N 
---?----------------e-e E ? 
----<-C-----------------------------------------------3/ 
--T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
--------2 
TT-TT-T-7-7 
-- 3? S 
| ?? 
 
 
N, PETERS, Photo-lithogrophor Washington, D.C, 
(N0 MI0(el.) 
(, 0, IBI?A0KMI0IRIB, 
WAIRR, HIRAIHR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
N0, 409,3l 4, 
Patented Aug. 20, 1889, 
 
/ z} : 
Aal/zzor. 
??l- -al~ 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Wihington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES IPATENT OFFICE. 
GEOIRGE C. IBLACKMIORE, OF INEWAIRIK, NEW JEIRSEY. 
VVATER-H EATER. 
"~-. 
SPECIFICATIONI forming patt of ILetters Patent No. 409,314, dated August 20, 1889. 
Applicationfiled March 21, 1889, Serial No,304,181, (No model) 
- 
- 
SGiribeCl. 
Zo M/ 70/07il, i 71// 207212677; 
IBeitkhoWintillat II, (HBORGB C.IBILACKMORE, 
al Stl)ject of the (Quleen Of Great IBritaini, Te 
si(ling at Newark, ESSex Coulty, New Jersey, 
have ilVented Coltalin 1nev alin(l T1Seftll Im 
provementsin IIot-Water IIeaters for IRadia 
tors, fully describe(l an(l Irepresented in the 
folloWing Specification ald the acc0limpallying 
ClaWings, forming a Ipart Of the Same. 
The Ol)ject of this invention is t0 fultimisll 
an eficient and at the Same time portable 
hot-Wateilheater for Tadiators: and it Consists 
in the Construlction heirein ShoWin and de 
The Class of heater for Which 1my invention 
is ClesigneCl is that Coliptising a selies of Ipal 
allel Sections lbuilt ilip to forin a strticture 0f 
the proper formand Climensions, eacla of the 
Sectiols C011tailing Water and fite Spaces al 
Iranged in a Suitable Imanner. 
In the anilexed draWings, IRigure I is a plan 
of a heater Constructedin accordiance Writh my 
invention With the three upper sections re 
1n0wed,l)lfsillowingtheposition of the damper 
in Clotted liles. IRig. 2 is a Vertical section 
onlime: zin IRig.1 of the entitelheater. IFigs. 
3 and 4 are Similat sections up0m lines // 
and a a in IFig. 1. 
IEach of the sections Cl Cl"("("Ci, &c?, ispro 
Vided Witill Water-spaces aTranged ill stIGh 
Imanner that the fire-space isentirelyinclosed 
tlereby, thus avoiCling any unnecessary l0ss 
of Ilheat by Ill(liation from surfaces in (lirect 
C0mtact with the fire an(l heated gases fromm 
the furnace. Ilhe top section Cl is prowidled 
With a Water-space S, Coveringits whole upper 
IDortion With the exception of an aperture 
Ilear One eld fol the 1main flue: and its lower 
Iportion Consists in a fire-space S", where the 
heated gases and Simoke Collect after Ipassing 
upWard from the fire-100t through the Water 
tubes, to lbe Curried aWay by the flues. 
'Ilhe Sections Cl", (, C, ald Cll aire eacll 010 
widled With Water-tubes f, occulpying their in 
terior 1001tions, andl Witil a, Watei-space at S, 
one end having the Central Imain fule e and 
the Ieturm-fitles e"a1nd epassing through the 
same. The section Ci, Contains Watel-tubes 
only at the sides, leaving an extra, space in 
the Center immediately al)0ve the centet of 
the filte-pot, Willele thelleatis thegreatest, ald 
a tranSVelse 10aissageis formeClin tle Sections 
(1 and (1" to coinect tho return-filles e/am(l e 
With the 111ain fille a. 
The sections Cl", CiTall(l C, inclosing the fite 
pot and ash-pit, Consist Inelely imlhollowirect 
aingulturshells Illaving Water-jackets, as shown 
in IPigs. 2 and 3, the section (17 being limed 
With fire-brick 7, of triangulat Cross-section, 
to prevrent the direct contact of the burning 
fuel With the surface of the 1metal sepaliating 
the Saile from the Water, and C0ntaining tlic 
grate 7. 
AS indicated in the CliaWings, each Section 
is provided With inlet and outlet apertitures C, 
arranged in stich a way that the Water, in its 
passage fitom the lbotton to the top of the 
heater, Citculates in opposite Cirections ill 
each altermate Ipair of sections, as slown by 
the aTOWS 1, entering eaCll Section at ole en(l 
andl issuing therefrom at the Opposite en(l. 
In order to attain this Irestlt eaCll Section, 
except the ones at the top and bott0m of the 
heater, is formed With apertItes at One end 
on one (eithet upper 0t loWer) side and at 
both ends on the other side, and the Sections 
so Constructed aire aTranged as follows: The 
Section Cl" is 10rovided With ilet-upertilles at 
the left-hand end only of the lowel side andl 
With outlet-alpertures at both ends of the 
uppeII Side. The section (" has ilet-aper 
tures at botla elds of its loWel SiCle t0 C011e 
spond With the outlet-alipertures of the section 
Cl" and adapted to receive the Watel thete 
from, buthasits Outlet-apertures at the 1-ight 
hand end of the IIIppel Side Only. Ille ilet 
and outlet apertures in the remaining sec 
tions arearrainged in a, Imanner Simill t0 
those of the sections alteady Clescribedi, eadh 
section being formed with apertures at lboth 
ends on one sidle and &lt Only One eld on the 
other side, the alternate Se(tions Illaving tho 
alpertures at opp0Site enCls On the Sides Con 
taining aDeltures at One end oly ald the 
Sections intermediate thereto haVilg aper 
tures on theit uppet and lower sides Corte 
sp0ming With th0se in the sides adjadent 
thereto of the Sections ditectily albove and 
below the Same. The U110per and IOWel SeC 
tions Claild C, Tespectively, Woult Illecessatily 
be 1010Vidled With alpertulles cortesponding 
With th08eill the Section in iminediate Con 
tact thereWith, the apertITes being omitted 
On the si(le 01000site, Iml Or(let to fortml Water 
25 
35 
55 
75 
9)? 
95 
IC)C) 
4C) 
45 
5? 
 
3 
"- 
409,314 
- 
tight joints betwreen the Sections, Iapplystit 
able Washers, 11, preferably of india-rubber 
or leather, betWeen their Sulfaces airound the 
a(ijacentinletand Outlet apertures, and Clamp 
the Sections Irigidly together by Inleans of tie 
bolts /, inserted through I0erforated lugs Mat 
the COrners of the Upper and loWer sections, 
in the ISUlal Imailler. 
MIy object in Clividilg the Volulime Of Watei, 
SO as t0 COInVey itill the Saine Citection in tW0 
adjacent Sections, is to allow it to flow slowly 
in order to diminish the friction I00duced in 
its CiTCulation, and I find that in this Class of 
heateritis Inot practicable to fo11m the Sections 
of Sulficient CapaCity and at the Salue tilme 
to Iretain a desirable form for the Same, to 
atitail this eild in a, Single Section. IBy Imy 
arrangemilent I alSO Seculle the a(iWantage Of a 
larger heating-SulfaCle, Which is aliforde(i by 
theadjacent sides of the sections, than there 
Wold be Were the Same formed integral ald 
Writhoult the partition formed bythe adjaCent 
SiCleS. 
Clis a Clatimper aClapted t0) Open and Glose al 
opening between the fire-space S" andl the 
Imain fule, and is operated by a, 10Cl (/ 1010 
jecting through tle Side Of the heater, pro 
Vided at its Oiltel enCl With a, handle Ci for 
ttlirming the Saime. The daimperis interposed 
at sulch Ipoint to efect the (irect I0assage of 
the simoke and gases frolm the fire-pot to the 
Chiminey, Whell desited. 
It Will be Inoticed that each Of the fules is 
incl0sed Witillin the Watel-Space, aild that Inome 
Of the lleat COIntaimeCl by the Sil0ke and gases 
aftel IDassing through the body of the Illeater 
and among the Water-ttlbes iSperilitted to be 
absorbed by any stIrface in Contact With the 
external ail, and thereby lost by Iadiation, 
Intil they haVe 10aSSedi thlough the Ireturn 
flues and have realched the level of the top of 
the heatgr in the main flue, when almost the 
Whole alimount of lheat Carried thereby fromm 
1he furnace has lbeen absorlbed bythe heating 
SturfaCle Within the Stil'UICttlle. 
lHeretOfore a, heatel has been deViseCl hal V 
ing eaCll of its fues incl0sed by the Water 
spade; lbut SICh Constructi0m Contained Only 
a Single Irettlirm-fule. My C0mStTICti0m has the 
aldWantage Of an imCitease(Il Illeating-Silliface 
ex100Se(i to the OlyIDartially-C00leCl galSes COl 
lected at the top of the heater bytle a(l(lition 
of a, SeCold Tettlim-fttle, and Of StlGll alin al 
Irangement as toadlapt each fule tol)e entirely 
inclosed by the Watei-space With0IIt aV0iding 
Compactiness in tle Structure. 
It is eVident that l)y extel(ling the Water 
leg to the lbase of the fulirlace I IDICVent any 
IC) 
2C) 
35 
4C) 
45 
5? 
55 
appreciable loss by Iradiation from the ash 
pit, and also efectively distribute the Cold 
Water Which enteis the Water-leg and imix it 
With thataliready partially heated, thuSaVoid 
ing the Subjection of the Same imimediately 
on its entrance to the hottest Iportion of the 
heating-surface, Cirectily OVer the furnace, 
thereby Irendering the heater liable to Clam 
age byt00greata Contrastin thetemperatures 
at any I00int. 
IFron the above desCriptiol it Will be Seen 
thata heater ConstrtICted in aCC0IClance Witill 
my invention meeds Ino Settings in 01Cier t0 
10utitinto Operation, as the Same is C0mplete 
im itSelf, and the Construction for the heater 
shown herein thills Irenders the Same I00rtable 
and adapted to be moved by imerely Cliscon 
ImeCting the Supply and Clistribulting IDipeS ) 
and (1, IeSpectively. 
IHaving thus Set fortill InyirlVeltion, What II 
Glaim herein, and desire to Secute by LetterS 
IPatent, is 
1. A Ilhot-Water Illeater provitled With a file 
space at the top, two Ireturn-flues leadilg 
dioWilwardlytherefrom, a Imain fuleinterposeCl 
betweell and CommeCted at the 0OttiOm With 
SICh Ireturl-fille:Sand leadingto tille Chimilley, 
the Said fluesbeinginclosed Within the Watel 
space of the heater, and al 00eming betWeen 
the said fire-space and the imain fitle, haVilig 
a diamper operated from Without the heater 
to Open and Glose the Saine, as and for the 
pulrpose Set forth. 
2. A hot-Water heater C01mprising a Series 
of parallel Sections laVing imilet and Outlet 
apertUITes and arranged Vettictilly, eaCll SeC 
tion being prowided on one side With aper 
tutes at l00th elds and On the Othel Side With 
apertures at One end Only, the alternate SeC 
tions having the apertutes at Opp0site eldS 
On the Side Containing apertures at One enCl 
only, and the sections intermediate theret0 
having apertures on their upper and loWe1 
sides Cortespolding in, 100sition and Illil)et 
With th0Sein the sides adjadentitheret0 Of tille 
Sectior:s ditectly ab0We and belOW the Same, 
the top and bott0m Sections laVingapertulles 
Only on the Sides in Contact With the a(ija 
Cent Sections, and prowidled, IeSpectively, With 
supply and ClistilillDuting pipes, as and for the 
IDI1100se Set forth. 
In testimony Whelle0f I have heltellinto Set 
Imy han(l in the I0IIeSence of tW0 SUIllDSCribing 
WitimeSSeS. 
(I()R(I C. I3I?ACIKIM(OIRI. 
WitimeSSeS: 
IHI. J. MILILER, 
IP. C. IISCHER. 
7? 
75 
95 
II C) 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409414.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 409,414, 
A. E. MEEK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
COMBINED BEVEL, PROTRACTOR, GAGE, CENTER SQUARE, &C. 
Patented Aug. 20, 1889. 
 
s 
s 
a 
s 
6. 
% 8 
$ 
s 
s X 
s t 
w 
r w 
3. 
iss c 
s E. 
w e 
s 
S 
t 
r 
^ 
NWENTOR: 
BY /Zow-56 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
A. E. MEEK. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
COMBINED BEWEL PROTRACTOR, GAGE, CENTER SQUARE, &c. 
Patented Aug. 20, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
4  q 
By War Y6 
ATTORNEYS. 
COMBINED BEVEL, PROTRACTOR, GAGE, CENTER SQUARE, &c, 
A. E. MEEK, 
(No Model.) 
No. 409,414. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 20, 1889. 
/>typirit Hitti 
62. HE 
OTCC 
A. 
 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALPHONZO EUGENE MEEK, OF DALLAS, TEXAS, 
coMBINED BEVEL, PROTRACTOR, GAGE, CENTER-SQUARE, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 409,414, dated August 20, 1889. 
Application filed March 18, 1888, Serial No. 267,132, (No model.) 
-- 
. . 
. 
". 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
15 scribed. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALPHONZO EUGENE 
MEEK, of Dallas, in the county of Dallas and 
State of Texas, have invented a new and use 
5 ful.Improvement in Combination-Tools, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention is a combination-tool seek 
ing to provide a single implement so con 
Structed and inscribed as to be useful to 
Io, architects, draftsmen, millwrights, machinists, 
and all metal and wood workers, and which 
shall be light and convenient to carry and 
may be quickly adjusted to its different po 
sitions for use, in the manner hereinafter de 
. The invention consists in certain features 
of construction and combinations of parts, as 
will be hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figures 1 and 2 are re 
20 spectively front and rear views of the device. 
Fig. 3 is an edge view thereof. Fig. 4 is a 
section on line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a detail 
view of the thread-gage; Fig. 6, a detail view 
of the level. Fig. 7 is a detail view of the in 
25 clinometer-pointer. Fig. 8 is a detail view 
of my center-gage, and Fig. 9 is a view of the 
device with the center-gage in position for 
Se. 
The device comprises a spirit-level, two 
3o bevels, an inclinometer, wire iron and thread 
gages, protractor, scale of cuts and lengths of 
all the angles around the circle, and tables 
The . 
useful to those in the mechanic arts, 
main bar or body A is slotted from one end 
35 at a, forming a way for the quadrant-blade 
B, and from its opposite end at a forming a 
way for the angle-blade C, which forms apart 
of the inclinometer, and the blades B and C 
are secured by screws D and E, having 
4o winged nuts d and e, by the tightening of 
which their respective blades may be secured 
..in any desired adjustment. The front face 
of the body adjacent the opening-for-scrw 
E is graduated at f, and a weighted pointer F 
45 is pivoted on said screw E and registersalong 
said graduation f, the body A, blade C, pivot, 
and pointer thus forming an inclinometer. 
The opening c of blade C, through which the 
. . . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
65 
screw E passes, is slotted'or elongated in the 
direction of length of said blade C, so such 5o 
blade may be set into the slot a' of the body 
A when the device is folded up. It will be 
noticed that the slots a, a form the body. A 
into a main strip A' and strips AA. 
On or around the edge of the main strip A 55 
I provide protractor-graduations for use by 
platting-engineers. Such graduation-marks . 
are formed on the edge of the section A, as 
will be seen in Fig. 3, and the center is a 
mark across the opposite edge of the section. 6c 
The protractor is used as any other pro 
tractor by simply placing the tool on its flat. .. 
side, with the center on any given point on 
a line, and the degree-points are noted by 
dotting or indicing on the graduated edge. 
. The spirit-level G is fitted to enter a socket 
provided for it in the main strip A', syeh 
socket being undercut at one end g to receive . 
the end g of the level, and the opposite end 
of such level is held by means of a screw G', 
such level when in position forming practi 
cally a part of the main strip A', as shown in 
On its front face the body A has inscribed 
tables HH', giving the length of the sections. 75 
of different polygonal frames which it may 
be desired to fit in or around circles. On its 
opposite or rear face the body A is graduated. 
into a scale of inches and fractions thereof.- 
The quadrant B pivots on screw D and has 8o 
its blade b fitted to be incased in slot a. 
The edges 1 and 2 of the quadrant head and . 
blade form a true fixed try-square. The outer is 
edge 3 of the quadrant-head is curved in the 
arc of a circle, and such head is properly 85. 
graduated on its front face at 4 to form it. 
into a protractor, while the front face of the 
bladeb of such quadrantis inscribed within 
formation to aid in ascertaining the circum 
ference of a circle, the side of a square equal 9o 
a given circle, the side of a square which may 
be inscribed in a given circle, &c. . . 
. . . 
In describing the protractor-graduations 4 
on the quadrant of the bevel-blade they may 
be said to be not used or applied from a given 95 
center, as commonly known in protractors, 
. 
2. 
409,414 
. 
but are arranged to be used to get the de 
grees of inclination readily and quickly by 
architects, millwrights, machinists, and car 
penters by taking the reading of the gradua 
tion-line through a slot or opening O through 
the section A' of the blade A, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 4, when such opening is adjusted 
over the protractor-graduations, thus giving 
the degree-reading without making a draft 
with a right line and center, as would have 
to be done with regular protractor. For in 
stance, in all grain - establishments, flour 
mills, cotton-seed mills, and ore-mills, where 
materials are handled by inclined planes, 
spouting, &c., especially flour and cotton-seed 
mills, the product in its various stages of re 
duction requires various angles of incline, to 
run which is ordinarily ascertained by the 
millwright by a brief draft. This arrange 
ment by degrees on a bevel-blade gives the 
whole matter at a glance. 
It will be understood that a dot or indi 
cator-point may be formed in the wall of 
opening O, by which to insure accuracy in 
reading the protractor graduation-lines. 
The curved edge of the quadrant-head is 
formed with openings 5, forming a metal and 
wire gage. 
I form through the quadrant-head openings 
6 and 7, the former formingwood-screw gages, 
while the latter. serve as wire-gages and as 
gages for nail and screw heads. 
On the screw D, between the quadrant and 
the strip A, Ipivot the thread-gage I, formed 
in sections II, the edges of which are formed 
to gage threads from 8 to 40, as will be under 
stood from Figs. 2 and 5. 
When not in use, the inclinometer-blade C 
may be slipped up in slot a' and the shank 
of the quadrant be turned into the slota, when 
the device is in compact shape for carrying 
or for storing away. 
It will be seen that the slotting of the body 
at a a enables the incasing of the plates Cb 
in said body and so protects such plates when 
not in use. For this reason I prefer to pivot 
the plates to the body in such slots. I also 
prefer to provide a socket F, in which to seat 
the pointer F and to provide the graduations 
f on the base wall of such socket. 
It is my purpose to construct the device of 
steel, and to mark the graduations and tables 
The center gage-plate J is formed with a 
recessi, having its opposite wallsi'i' diverg 
ing outwardly, and is supported on the main 
bar, being provided with openings to receive 
steady pins or studs j on said bar, so the 
placing of the plate Jon the bar with open 
ingsi over pins.j will insure the proper ar 
rangement of the said plate with reference to 
the edge of the main bar, so the latter will be 
at a right angle to a line that will equally di 
vide angle between the walls' of the recess 
; i in plate J. The plate J is secured to the 
main bar by a screw J', as shown. By the 
arrangement of the gage-plate as described, 
it is easy to bring the edge of the quadrant 
blade to intersect the angle of the walls by 
simply bringing the right-angled edge of the 
body of stuch quadrant into line with the edge 
of the main bar. The edge of the blade will 
intersect the angle of the walls, as shown. 
In use, by placing the wallsi'i against a 
shaft and drawing a line along the edge of 
the quadrant-blade and then adjusting the 
center gage-plate to a different position on 
the shaft and drawing anotherline along the 
said straight-edge, the intersecting point of 
such lines will mark the center of the shaft. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. The combination of the main bar, the 
center gage-plate having a recessformed with 
diverging walls, fastenings for securing the 
gage-plate to the main bar, with theside edge 
of such bar at right angles to a line equally 
dividing the angle between the walls of the 
recess in the gage-plate, and a blade B, con 
nected with said main bar, all substantially 
as described, whereby when blade B is turned 
at right angles to the main bar one of 
the edges of said blade will equally divide 
the angle between the walls of the recess in 
the gage-plate, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the main bar having 
studs.j, the plate J, having recessi, and open 
ings, to receive studs i, and the quadrant 
plate having the edge of its blade equally di 
viding the angle between the walls of recess 
i, substantially as set forth. . . 
3. A compound tool, substantially as de 
scribed, comprising the body A, having a 
level, the inclinometer-blade pivoted to such 
body, the pivoted pointer, the graduations 
along which said pointer registers, and the 
quadrant piyoted to said body, all substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. The compound tool comprising the body 
A, the plate C, having 
slot c, the screw con 
necting said plate C to the body, the pointer 
F, and the graduations 
f, along which said 
pointer registers, the quadrant-plate pivoted 
to the body and having its head formed with 
a curved edge, and having graduations form 
ing a protractor, and having openings in said 
curved edge forming a metal gage, openings 
being made through said head, forming screw 
and head gages, substantially as set forth. 
5. The compound tool herein described, 
comprising the body A, the quadrant-plate 
ivoted thereto, and the thread-gage I, piv 
oted to the body, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
6. The improved compound tool herein 
described, consisting of the body A, hav 
ing slots a, a formed from its opposite 
ends, and having a socket F and gradua 
tions f, the level on said body, the plate C, 
the screw for pivoting said plate C to... the 
therein. 
5 
. 
- 
75 
9o 
95 
o 
O 
II5 
25 
3 
body, the pivoted pointer registering along plate and the strip A of the body, all sub 
flags f, the quadrant-plate having a stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
head and a shank, the latter being fitted to 
slot a, and the head having wire and metal 
ALPHONZO EUGENE MEEK, 
5 gage, the screw for pivoting the quadrant. 
plate to the body, and the thread-gage, also 
pivoted on said screw between the quadrant- 
H. M. SWAIN, 
WILL WATTS, 
409,414 . 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409514.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 409, 514, 
J. SMITH 
WATER, MOTOR, 
Patented Aug. 20, 1889. 
 
2WZZWASSAS, 
ter, Washington, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESPER SMITH, OF WASHINGTON, NEW JERSEY. 
WATER. MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 409,514, dated August 20, 1889. 
Application filed February 23, 1889, 
Serial No, 800,860, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JESPER SMITH, a citizen 
of the United States, and a resident of Wash 
ington, in the county of Warren and State of 
New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Water-Motors; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this 
Specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved water-motor. Fig. 2 is a side eleva 
tion, partly in section, showing the side re 
moved. Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional view, 
and Fig. 4 is a detail view of the wheel. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in all the figures. 
My invention relates to that class of water 
motors in which the water-wheel is operated 
by the forcible discharge of a stream of 
Water upon the buckets upon the rim of the 
Wheel in such a manner that the power shall 
be applied on both sides of the wheel equally, 
and also in various details of construction, 
as will be hereinafter more fully described 
and pointed out, 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
Pepresents the casing of my improved water 
motor, provided on each side at diagonally 
opposite portions of the rim of the casing 
with tangential penstocks or flumes B B', 
each having an opposite discharge or outlet 
pipe C C. 
The water-wheel is indicated by the letter 
D and revolves upon a central axis E, said 
axis being provided on one end with a grooved 
pulley F, to which the belting of the machin 
ery to be operated is attached. The periph 
ery of the wheel D is formed or provided 
With a series of radial buckets G, having their 
faces against which the stream of water is 
directed perpendicular or straight, and hav 
ing their opposite faces beveled or inclined 
from their upper ends toward the lower ends 
thereof. These buckets are of a width greater 
than the width of the periphery of the wheel 
and of sufficient area to cover the inner bore 
of the discharge or waste pipe. 
Since I have found by experience that the 
best results are attained by arranging the 
water-wheel to run at the rate of one-third of 
the velocity of the water that turns it, it fol 
lows that the area of escape should be more 
than that of the inlet in like proportion. I 
therefore in practice prefer to construct my 
improved motor with the outlet or discharge 
pipes of an area three times as great as that 6o 
of the penstocks or flumes. 
I do not, how 
ever, wish to be understood as confining my 
self to this particular construction, inasmuch. 
as it is obvious that the diameter of all may 
be the same without rendering the motor in- 65 
operative. I have also found it desirable to 
construct the wheel of sufficient weight to 
offer considerable resistance to the strealm, 
which, being directed against the buckets 
with considerable force, would tend to revolve 7o 
a wheel of light weight even faster than the 
velocity of the water, thereby forming a 
vacuum between the buckets of the Wheel, 
offering no resistance to the pressure of the 
air on the opposite face of the bucket, calls- 75 
ing backlash' and a tendency of the wheel 
to drag. To provide against this contingency, 
I employ a wheel of sufficient weight so as to 
offer considerable resistance to the force of the 
water, thereby causing the stream or jet and 8o 
the wheel to move uniformly and a contin 
uous and steady flow of water from the flume 
or penstock to the outlet or Waste pipe. 
In practice I intend to apply water in the 
same manner to both sides of the wheel-that 85 
is, supposing it to be in a vertical position, 
then apply the tangential jet at the bottom 
and top in harmony of direction in regard to 
the water-wheel-thereby at a very little in 
crease of cost making the capacity double 9o 
that of a single jet and at the same time re 
ducing friction by balance of force. The 
device is therefore constructed so as to be 
operated with freedom in any position, either 
vertical, horizontal, or inclined, in Open air 95 
or under water. It will also be seen that I 
construct the calibers of both the feed-pipes 
and discharge-pipes of a tapering form, grad 
ually diminishing in diameter toward the 
inner openings thereof. 
It will be seen that if the diameter of the 
escape-pipes were uniform throughout the 
f 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
409,514 
friction of the sides of the outlet would be 
considerable, whereas by having these out 
lets tapering, as described, when the volume 
Of Water reaches the point within the escape 
pipes where the diameter becomes larger the 
pressure of the outer atmosphere is no greater, 
and as the volume of water is not increased 
the friction of the sides of the outlet is con 
siderably diminished. 
The device is furthermore simple of con 
struction, inexpensive of production, and 
Strong and durable in use. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States 
In a Water-wheel, the combination, with a 
casing, of a water-wheel provided with buck 
ets having one of their faces perpendicular and 
IO 
the opposite face inclined, an axle or shaft pro 
vided on one end with a pulley-wheel, a hori 
Zontal lower pipe having its bore gradually 
tapering from each end toward the center, 
the diameter of the outlet end being larger 
than the diameter of the inlet, and an upper 
horizontal pipe constructed in a similar man 
ner to the lower pipe, but arranged inversely 
thereto with reference to the inlet and outlet 
openings, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two Witnesses. 
25 
JESPER SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
S. P. BOWERs, 
DANIEL VLIET. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409614.txt	(No Model.) 
W. NOT LEY. 
LAMP BURNER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 409,614, 
Patented Aug. 20, 1889. 
FIG. I. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
..) U 
NT1 . 22 
NS:Xif7 
() () : R. 8 
) 
(No Model.) 
W. NOTLEY. 
LAMP BURNER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 409,614, 
Patented Aug. 20, 1889. 
FIG.2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM NOTLEY, OF PECKHAM, COUNTY OF SURREY, ENGLAND. 
LAMP-BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 409,614, dated August 20, 1889. 
Application filed February 20, 1888, Serial No. 264,692, (No model.) Patented in England June 16, 1887, No, 8,696; in Germany 
January l5, 1888, No, 44,443; in Belgium January 16, 1888, No, 80,293, and in India July 4, 1888, No. 56, 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM NOTLEY, a 
subject of the Queen of England, residing at 
Peckham, in the county of Surrey and King 
dom of England, have invented a Safety Lamp 
Burner, (for which I have applied for Letters 
Patent in Great Britain, No. 8,696, and date 
of June 16, 1887; in Germany, under date of 
January 15, 1888, No. 44,443; in Belgium, un 
der date of January 16, 1888, No. 80,293, and 
in India, register No. 56, 1888, certificate dated 
July 4, 1888.) of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to a burner for lamps 
burning mineral oils, the object of which is to 
obviate all danger of ignition of the oil or the 
Vapors in the reservoir from the burner on 
the upsetting of the lamp, or in the endeavor 
to extinguish the light by blowing down the 
chimney, or from other well-known causes; 
and, further, to prevent the ignition of any 
oil flowing from the wick-case on the upset 
ting of the lamp. The burner protects the 
oil in the reservoir from ignition therefrom 
by inclosing the wick in a porous chamber, 
formed of pumice-stone, porous stone, or simi 
lar Substance, incased at its sides in a metal 
tube, Or at sides and at the base with wire 
gauze-Say twenty-nine meshes to the inch 
through which flame cannot pass to the oil or 
the vapors in the reservoir, but which will 
permit this oil to permeate through it to feed 
the Wick; and the ignition of any oil con 
tained in the wick-case at the moment of the 
Overturning of the lamp is prevented by an 
alltomatic extinguisher, forming part of the 
burner, which extinguishes the flame before 
the lamp can have passed so far from the 
Vertical as to permit this oil to reach the flame. 
A burner embodying my invention is shown 
upon the accompanying sheet of drawings, 
upon which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section through the 
burner and wick-case, Fig.2 being a side view 
of Same, also shown in section. 
A indicates the burner; B, metal tube; b, 
the wick-case; C, porous substance; D, space 
for wick; E, cotton wick; F, bottom of tube 
B; G, the oil vessel or reservoir; H, the oil; 
I, the dome of the burner; K, flaps or disks; 
I, hinges for same; M, sliding metal ring, 
To the screw or bottom end of my petroleum 
burner A, attach, by solder or otherwise, 
the metal tube B, padded inside with a porous 
stone C or any similar substance, but leaving 
sufficient space D for a cotton wick E to pass 
down, the tube B being also plugged at the 
bottom F with similar material. Now when 
the burner A, with this attached tube B, is 
fixed in the usual manner in the oil-vessel G, 
the oil H being contained therein, as usual, 
the oil H will permeate in sufficient quantity 
through the porous substance C to be sucked 
up by the wick E, which has been placed 
through the burner A in the usual way and 
passed into the wick-case b, where it takes up 
oil by the usual capillary attraction, exactly 
as if the oil had not passed through the por 
ous substances. Nevertheless the lamp or 
reservoir G is now secure from explosion, as 
in extinguishing the lamp, either in blowing 
down the chimney or in any other of the usual 
methods of extinguishing, (all of which are 
more or less calculated to drive the flame into 
the reservoir G of the lamp,) it will be impos 
sible for the fame to pass down any other 
way except through the tube B, attached to 
the bottom of the burner A, which tube B is 
impervious to any flame, for although the oil 
can permeate through the porous stone the 
flame cannot. This also applies to any other 
of the numerous causes by which explosions 
occur. No matter how Small or narrow a wick 
may be used, (either by accident or design,) 
no explosion of the oil in the reservoir can 
occur with my burner, as would soon be the 
case in the ordinary burners, because al 
though, by reason of the vacuum not being 
filled up by a too narrow wick in the wick 
case b or tube B of the burner, the flame would 
readily pass down and cause an explosion, my 
porous lining, as described above, will, no 
matter how narrow the wick or how much 
vacuum in the wick-case or how much vapor 
in the reservoir, prevent the explosion of the 
vapors in the reservoir, by reason of the ina 
bility of the flame to pass through this porous 
The tube B may be perforated or not, and 
be closed at bottom with wire-gauze and por 
ous lining, or with porous substance only, as 
may be found most desirable. 
material. 
- 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
409,614 
5 
I5 
To doubly secure the safety of any lamp 
burning hydrocarbon oil from explosion, 
either through careless extinguishing or by 
reason of the lamp being upset or partly up 
Set, I attach an automatic extinguisher to the 
top of the wick-case b, immediately beneath 
the dome I of the burner A, this automatic 
extinguisher consisting of two disks or flaps 
KK, pivoted or hinged over the wick-case b, 
which, upon closing, extinguish the light in 
stantaneously, but which, instead of being 
Worked by a lever and spring, in the usual 
Way, to pass over the wick-case b, are oper 
ated by a smooth heavy metal ring or plate M, 
which, upon the upsetting or deflection of the 
lamp, will slide downwardly under the flaps 
K K and force them upwardly together, 
thereby extinguishing the flame. The extin 
guisher is not, however, claimed in this ap 
plication, it constituting the subject-matter 
of another application filed December 17, 
1888, Serial No. 293,881. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination, with the burner of an 
oil-lamp, of a vertically - extended wick-tube 
of porous refractory material, provided with 
an extended axial passage adapted to receive 
a wick and laterally feed oil thereto through 
Out the length of the passage, and an Outer 
incasing metal tube, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. The combination, with the burner of an 
oil-lamp, of a vertically - extended wick-tube 
of porous refractory material, provided cen 
trally with an extended axial passage adapted 
to receive a wick and laterally feed oil thereto 
throughout the length of the passage, and an 
Outer incasing metal tube having a plug of 
porous material in its lower end, substan 
tially as described. 
25 
35 
WILLIAM NOTLEY. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM EDWARD GEDGE, 
WILLIAM PAVY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409714.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 409,714. 
E, THOMSON. 
INDUCTION COIL. 
Patented Aug. 27, 1889. 
 
v 
 
INVEWTOR 
2% -2-a- 
7...c78. 
ATIORNEYS 
ETERS, Photo-lithographer, washington, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIHU THOMSON, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE THOMSON 
HOUSTON ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF CONNECTICUT. 
NDUCTION CO L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 409,714, dated August 27, 1889. 
Application filed February 12, 1887, Serial No. 227,445, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
IBe it known that I, ELIHU THOMSON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Lynn, in the county of Essex and State of 
5 Massachusetts, have invented a certain new 
and useful Induction-Coil, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to those forms of elec 
tro-magnetS in which a coil or coils are Wound 
To upon a Subdivided iron core made up of sepa 
rate plates or laminae. 
My invention is designed more particularly 
as an improvement in the construction of those 
forms of magnet which are provided with two 
15 coils, one of which bears the relation to the 
other of a primary coil of a converter or in 
duction-coil. 
The object of my invention is to secure 
cheapness and ease of construction, together 
2O. With high efficiency of action, due to the par 
ticular proportion of coils and core herein 
after described, and to the fact that the iron 
mass is as nearly as possible solid. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
25 avertical section of an apparatus embodying 
my invention, and Fig. 2 is a side elevation 
of the same. Figs. 3 and 4 are respectively 
vertical U-sections and a side elevation of a 
modification. Figs. 5 and 6 show my inven 
3o tion in another modified form. Fig. 7 shows 
another form of U-shaped plate adapted to 
my invention. Figs. 1 and 2 show the pre 
ferred construction. 
Sheet-iron punched into U-shaped pieces 
35 of preferably square form (seen at I and I, 
Fig. 1) are used to build up a core. (Seen 
on edge, Fig.2,II.) In the notches are Wound 
the two coils P and S, as indicated, and to 
gether they form approximately a square sec 
4o tion, the four sides of which are of Square 
length. 
The winding may be accomplished readily 
by revolving the parts of the core II, held in 
suitable clamps, and feeding the Wire of the 
45 coils thereon, as usual. The coils pass through 
the grooves or between the legs of the U-pieces 
and over the ends, as seen in Fig. 2, and of 
course are insulated thoroughly from the il'On 
pieces II by interposed layers of insulating 
so material. The sheet-iron pieces themselves 
may be insulated by interposed thin paper 
pieces of the same form. After the coils are in 
place there should be sufficient iron project 
ing beyond them to permit the introduction 
of bundles of sheet-iron pieces I", adapted to 
fit closely in the space between the projec 
tions and to make a butt-joint, with their edges 
against the internal edges of the legs of the 
pieces II at the part thereof lying beyond 
or to the opposite of the coils PS. The mag 
netic sections of the bundles II should be 
approximately equal to the magnetic section 
of the four pieces II. It will be seen that 
by this construction of iron core and mag 
netic circuit-closing bundle I no spaces 
are required to be left between individual 
spaces I to form gaps for the insertion 
of plates or pieces of the bundle I'', and that 
therefore the greatest practicable mass of 
iron consistent with a proper magnetic sub 
division may be obtained in a given space. 
When the coils PS, &c., Occupy a square 
figure in combined section, Fig. 1, the best 
proportioning demands that the outer lines 
of I I and of I* I be also square-i. e., 
the pieces II should be punched out, square 
except where the slots for the coils P S and 
for I exist. It is also preferred to economize 
the material (copper) of the coils P and S by 
using a large proportion of iron. If the coils 
P and S occupy a Square figure of two inches 
on the side, the pieces II, including I, may 
be of a square of six inches on the other side, 
or the total external dimensions of the parts, 
Fig. 1, will be rectangular six inches from a 
to b and c to d and twelve inches from C to c 
and b to d, while the iron all around the coils 
PS will represent a layer two inches thick. 
As will be observed, each leg of the U-shaped 
plate projects beyond the body of the coil to 
a distance substantially equal to the width of 
each leg. A larger proportion of sheet-iron 
would require larger Outside dimensions and 
would involve the use of a layer of iron of 
greater depth around the coil and through its 
center. Thus with the Section of coils PS 
Occupying a Square figure of two inches as 
before, and with a diameter from e to f of six 
inches, the iron layer may be made three 
inches thick, which Would make the dimen 
sions from C to b eight inches and from a to 
c sixteen inches, 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
h 
409,714 
55 
75 
tric coils, of a magnetic envelope formed at the 
sides of the coil, of two masses of iron subdi 
vided in lines transverse to the line of the 
coils, but substantially parallel to the plane 
of winding, and yoke-pieces connecting the 
iron at the sides of the coil on the outer pe 
riphery thereof, as these features form the 
subject of claims in another application for 
patent filed of even date herewith, Serial No. 
227,446. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, with an electric coil, of 
a bundle of U-shaped iron plates or pieces, 
between whose legs the conductors of the coil 
lie, in combination with yoke-pieces consisting 
of bundles of iron plates fitted into the space 
between the projecting ends of the legs of the 
U, and forming a butt-joint with the internal 
edges of said legs, so as to complete a solid 
magnetic circuit around the circumferential 
axis of the coil. 
2. The combination, with an electric coil, of 
an enveloping iron mass consisting of abundle 
of iron plates passing through the axis of the 
coil and around the outside thereof, together 
with a bundle of sheet-iron plates insulated 
from one another and fitting into the space 
between the extensions of the first-named iron 
mass and forming a butt joint with the edges 
of the plates making up such mass, as and for 
the purpose described. 
3. The combination, in an induction-coil or 
converter, of primary and secondary coils 
whose combined cross-section is a square fig 
ure having four sides of equal length, in com 
bination with a series of superposed U-shaped 
plates passing through said coil, and having 
legs which project beyond the coils to a dis 
tance substantially equal to the thickness of 
such coil, and a magnetic circuit-closing bun 
dle of iron plates placed between the legs and 
having a width equal to the width of the legs. 
Signed at Lynn, in the county of Essex and 
State of Massachusetts, this 7th day of Feb 
ruary, A. D. 1887. 
- 
ELIHU THOMSON. 
Witnesses: 
" 
. 
J. W. GIBBONEY, 
E. WILBUR RICE, Jr. 
s 
15 
25 
By the particular proportions of coils and 
magnetic masses hereinbefore described Iob 
tain the maximum efficiency with the mini 
mum amount of material and space required 
for the coil. A thin layer of material-such 
as hard paper or other insulation-may be 
interposed, if desired, between the edges of 
I' and I, but should not be sufficiently thick 
to interfere greatly with the magnetic con 
tinuity. 
Figs. 3 and 4 show a modification in which 
the core I is short and composed of sheet-iron 
or wires dressed off at the ends to fit into a 
frame I after the coils P and S have been 
placed upon the core I. The frame I' is com 
posed of sheet-iron pieces of double-U form, 
the legs of the two U's being joined integral. 
The plates are laid together laterally and 
serve to effect external closure of the mag 
netic circuit of the core I. 
The material which is used to separate the 
various plates I, I, and I from one another 
may consist of paper interposed between the 
flat surfaces of such plates. 
Figs. 5 and 6 show a modification, in which 
the pieces II are set radially and fitted to-- 
gether by tapering their inner edges, or by 
making them of varying dimensions, so as to 
nearly fill the center of the coils. Externally 
they (II) are joined, as before, by bundles of 
sheet-iron strips properlyinsulated. The con 
struction gives a circular form to the whole, 
but has no special advantage over the form 
shown in Figs.1 and 2 for practical purposes. 
It is obvious that plates of the double-U 
form shown in Fig. 7 might take the place 
of the plates II, Figs. 1 and 2. 
The special form shown in Figs. 3 and 4 of 
the accompanying drawings forms the subject 
of specific claims in an application filed by me 
September 29, 1887, Serial No. 251,072, and 
constituting a division of the present applica 
tion. 
I do not claim herein the combination, with 
the coils, of U-shaped iron plates or pieces, be 
tween whose legs the conductor and coil lie, 
and yoke-pieces connecting the two legs, so 
as to complete a magnetic circuit around the 
circumferential axis of the coil; nor do I claim 
herein the combination, with one or more elec 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409814.txt	(No Model.) 
M. S. WRIGHT 
REED ORGAN, 
No. 409,814, 
A. 
f. = C = - 
Patented Aug. 27, 1889, 
i. 
A 
f : 
ID 
s z 
Earl 
E. 
- 
A. " 
- A- 
Z). 
A3 
T 
C = 
A. 
-D 
2------- 
Z) 
 
2 
H% 
Stitts s = s = ; 
Tris-at-lt to - ; 
1. 
sea s3.ac. 
-- A&a, 3-,Fatts 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MORRIS S. WRIGHT, OF WORCESTER, MASSACIIUSETTS. 
REED ORGAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 409,814, dated August 27, 1889. 
Application filed February 8, 1889, Serial No. 299,206, (No model.) 
55 
To all. Lulon, it inctly conce7n 
Beit known that I, MORRISS. WRIGHT, of 
the city and county of Worcester, and Com 
mon Wealth of Massachusetts, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Reed-Organs; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this description, and in which 
Figure I represents a longitudinal vertical 
Section of one set of reed-chambers, as will be 
hereinafter more fully described; and Fig. 2 
represents a similar section of the lower set 
of reed-chambers, which are constructed in a 
modified form, as will be hereinafter more 
fully described. 
To enable those skilled in the art to which 
my invention belongs to make and use the 
Same, I will now describe the invention more 
in detail. 
My present invention constitutes improve 
ments in the reed-organ for which Letters 
Patient were granted to me on the 27th day of 
March, A. D. 1SSS, No. 380,071. 
In the drawings I have shown a section of 
One of the reed-chambers in Fig.1. This sec 
tion is sufficient to illustrate the construction 
Of all the other chambers above this lower set, 
since they are duplicates of the one shown in 
Fig. 1. 
The nature of my present improvements 
Consist, first, in the combination and relative 
arrangement of the parts making up the reed 
chamber for a single reed, as hereinafter de 
Scribed, whereby the joints are all parallel 
With the reed, and separate dividing-boards, 
Separate plug-pieces, and separate qualifying 
tubes With Separate end caps are all avoided, 
as Will be explained hereinafter, and in com 
bination there with a convex wind part; sec 
Ond, in the combination with the bottom of the 
lower reed-chamber and closed ends, of a bot 
tom valve, as Will be hereinafter described. 
In Fig. 1 the parts marked A A' are formed 
from single pieces, being cut out at B to form. 
the air-ingress passage B' and at C to form 
the lower side of the qualifying-tube D. The 
part E is also in One piece, being cored or cut 
out to form a long air-chamber E. E.', the 
latter space forming the upper half of the 
qualifying-chamber D in the qualifying-tube 
O 
25 
35 
45 
D. The upper right-hand ends of the qualify 
ing-tubes D are cut away, as shown at Cl, 
while the lower right-hand ends of the tubes 
D are cut away, as shown at b, to form the 
long reed-space cl, and through which the reeds 
F are pushed into place, the projection e on 
the lower side of the reed-frame F striking 
against the shoulder.fof the part E, and the pro 
jection g on the upper side of reed-frame IF 
striking against the shoulder h on the part A. 
the shoulders f and h serving the functions of 
plug-pieces, whereby a tight and perfect joint 
is produced at the base of the reed between 
the reed-frame and the parts forming the air 
chambers of the reed-pain proper, and which 
construction obviates the necessity of Sepa 
rate plugging-pieces, as found in my said pat 
ent of March 27, 1888, thereby not only sav 
ing much in expense, but rendering the in 
strument far more desirable both in tone and 
durability. The part E is cut out at G, leav 
ing an open space for the air to pass from in 
gress-chamber B' down by the reed-tongue 
F' into and out of the qualifying-tube D at 
the convex port D'' when valve or stop D' 
is open. 
It will be noticed that the inner edge of 
port D'' is made convex, whereby the air as 
it leaves the qualifying-tubes is centered and 
passes out in a freer and more uniform man 
ner than it does when the faces of the inner 
walls of the port are fat, as in my said pat 
ent of March 27, 188S, and as a practical re 
Sult the tone is Smooth and even and not lia 
ble to harshness of expression. To make this 
form of port, a tool is used which cuts the 
ends of the chamber in curved form, as Seen 
at n, so that when the port-hole D'' is formed 
or bored out the inner edge i is convex, as 
fully indicated in the drawings. 
The reed-frame. F' fits in side grooves cut 
in the part A, and the frontend of said frame 
is also supported in a curved groove in, which 
extends from one side groove to the other. 
The lower set of air-chambers is shown in 
Fig. 2, and in which case the parts fol' sup 
porting the reed are made like the corre 
sponding parts in Fig. 1, while the parts be 
low the reed are made somewhat differently 
for producing a deep and heavy tone. The 
chambers corresponding to chambers E' and 
E' in Fig. 1 are divided by the partition H, 
75 
So 
90 
OO 
2 
409,814 
while below that the bottom piece I is cored 
or cut out to form a large qualifying-cham 
ber I, with a concave port J in the bottom, 
but to the right or to one side of the partition 
H, said port being provided with a valve or 
stop H'. 
In operation the air takes the course indi 
cated by the arrows, and by this form of con 
struction these heavy tones are mellowed or 
muffled somewhat, thereby giving to the ear 
a more pleasant and desirable sound. Port J 
is made concave, as seen at 0, whereby the 
same general result is obtained as by the con 
Vexports in the upper air-chambers, the air 
being centered before it reaches the outer 
part p of the port. The glue-joints K and L 
are the only ones used in my present im 
proved reed-organ, both horizontal. It will 
be understood that the ingress-air passages 
are closed by valves, as shown in my said 
former patent or in any other well-known 
manner, and also that such valves are con 
nected with the keys in any well-known man 
ner; also, that the stops or valves D'' and H' 
are properly connected to the well-known 
mechanism employed by the player to oper 
ate such stops in reed and other organs. 
To make up a full reed-pan for an organ 
the parts shown in Fig. 1 are duplicated and 
attached together, as shown, until the de 
sired number of series of reeds and their air 
chambers are combined to form an organ, 
with the exception of the bottom series, which 
are of the construction shown in Fig. 2 of the 
drawings. 
The pieces A, A, E, and I are of any de 
sired length to make the designated number 
of air-chambers, reed-supports, and qualify 
ing-tubes for the size of reed-organ to be 
made. 
It will be seen that I have by the present 
improvements greatly simplified the construc 
tion of reed-organs, while at the same time 
rendering them more substantial, less liable 
to get out of order, and more perfect if tone, 
since the glue-joints are reduced to really 
two to each set or series of air-chambers and 
reeds. 
The piece marked A and A' and the piece 
marked E extend the whole length of the in 
strument from end to end and may belonger 
or shorter, as desired, while the part E sup 
ports the reeds, as shown, and the piece 
marked A A', when attached to the part E, 
serves for an ingress air-passage to the reed 
below, and also makes up the lower half of 
the qualifying-tube for the reed next above. 
75 
By this mode of construction there are no 
cross glue joints, and the entire central part 
of the reed-pan is composed of single pieces 
properly cut or cored out to form the air 
chambers and qualifying-tubes, while air-exit 
ports are formed by boring through the solid 
part of the piece E. The parts being thus 
reduced to only two pieces of different form 
or construction for the entire central part of 
the organ, renders its construction less expen 
sive and far more durable than by any of the 
modes in use prior to my present invention. 
It will be understood that the reed and the 
parts forming the reed-chambers may be ar 
ranged in vertical or inclined positions with 
out change of construction or departing from 
the principle of my invention. 
I prefer to arrange and construct the organ 
so that the reeds and the joints K and L will 
be horizontal, as shown in the drawings; but 
other manufacturers ean use either arrange 
ment, as preferred. 
What I claim as new and of my invention, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a reed-pan for a 
reed-organ, with the reed-supporting piece E, 
cut or cored out, as described, of the single 
piece marked A and A', cut or cored out, as 
shown at B and C, to form an ingress air 
passage B, and the lower half of the qualify 
ing-tube D, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
2. The combination, with the reed F and 
the projections e and g on the base of the 
reed-frame F, of the shoulders fandh, where 
by a separate plugging-piece is avoided, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination, with the air-chamber 
B and reed F, of the reed-frame supporting 
piece E, extended beyond the base of the reed 
frame F and cored out to form the air-cham 
bers E' and E', and provided with shoulder if 
on its upper side, substantially as and for the Ioo 
purposes set forth. 
4. The combination, with the reed-support 
ing piece E and air-chambers E' and E', cut 
or cored therefrom, of the convex port D', as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
5. The combination, with the qualifying 
chamber I' and air-chambers E'E', of the 
bottom concave port J, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
85 
90 
MORERIS S. WRIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. H. DODGE, 
TIMOTHY DUGGAN. 
i 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US409914.txt	(No Model.) 
F. BURNS, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet i. 
 
No. 409,914, 
Patented Aug. 27, 1889. 
Zg 
(No Model.) 
F. BURNS 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 409,914, 
Patented Aug. 27, 1889. 
: 9284 E4.cocs 
3-vuo vitov 
 
r 4-6- 
M 
33 %, &ltovic's 
Zia S2-/e6-1 traf, 
N. Perers, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 409,914, 
F. BURNS, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 27, 1889. 
Fig-5- 
 
928i-Evicesco 
6-4 re-(44. 
fi5-75, 
5, 8 s 
341.u.c. v. to 
a 
2-6-6- 
N. FETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
F. BURNS 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 27, 1889. 
A; at 7 
- 
A. 
(No Model.) 
No. 409,914, 
-uk- 
e 
Aa2a is 
SSNs NaNasa Naya SSSSSSSSSSSSS east-w-e T-P 
 
SN 
V 
W. 
s 2. 
28i-Evesses 
3v-uov to 
N. perERs, Photo-litrographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK BURNS, OF WESTFIELD, NEW YORK. 
TYPEWRITING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 409,914, dated August 27, 1889. 
Application filed April 9, 1889, Serial No, 306,512, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
85 
- 
To all whon, it may conce7n 
Be it known that I, FRANK BURNS, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Westfield, in 
the county of Chautauqua and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Type-Writing Machines; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
type-Writers; and it consists in certain novel 
elements and combinations, hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an end elevation 
of a machine made according to my inven 
tion, showing the impression-cylinder in its 
normal position. Fig. 2 is also an end eleva 
tion of the cylinder-carriage with the impres 
sion-cylinder in a raised and turned position 
to bring the writing into view, Fig. 3 is a 
front elevation showing the upper part of the 
machine with the impression-cylinder in nor 
mal position. Fig. 4 is a plan or top view of 
the cylinder-carriage and cylinder. Fig. 5 is 
a front elevation of the same, the impression 
cylinder being raised and turned to show the 
Writing. Fig. 6 is a rear elevation of the up 
per part of the machine, showing the means 
of Securing and swiveling the carriage to the 
rear track or rail. Fig. 7 is a plan of the ink 
ing-ribbon carrier and the mechanism for op 
erating and reversing the movement of the 
same. Fig. 8 is a section through the type 
bar ring and centering-plate, showing also 
the type-bars in elevation. Figs. 9, 10, and 
10" are views showing modified forms of the 
mechanism for raising and turning the im 
pression-cylinder. Fig. 11 is an elevation of 
a Segment of a key-bar and its spring; and 
Fig. 12 is an elevation, plan, and section of 
the type shank or socket and type, respect 
ively. 
A is the frame-work of the machine, upon 
which the principal operating parts are 
mounted, and A' is the top plate of the ma 
..chine, above which the impression-cylinder or 
platen and its connections are mounted, 
B B are key-bars pivoted in the rear of the 
frame in the usual Way, as shown. These 
key-bars are made of thin plates or bars of 
steel and have formed integral with them the 
key-bar springs b b. The bars are preferably 
punched from plate steel of the width de 
sired for the bars, the rear ends being re 
duced in width and under heat given a 
quarter-turn to produce the spring parts. By 
reason of this construction a uniform char 
acter of spring is economically produced and 
the necessity of separate attachments for said 
spring to the frame is avoided. These springs 
bear against a horizontal bar C, adjustable by 
means of set-screws to regulate the tension 
on said springs. The bar C, is by preference 
notched to receive the springs, and thus 
keep the key-bars properly spaced. The key 
bars are coupled with the type-bars b' by the 
usual pitmen b. 
The type-bars are provided with slots or 
with pivot-holes b, somewhat larger than their 
pivots, to prevent binding and permit of per 
fectly free movement under all circuimstances 
of warping of the type-bar ring C or from the 
slight variations incident to the manufac 
ture of large numbers of parts by machin 
ery. Obviously the same function would be 
secured by having enlarged bearing-sockets 
in the ring or support for trunnions or jour 
nals connected to the type-bars. These type 
bars are made of thin steel plate or bars, 
which are given a quarter-twist near their ex 
tremities to provide a flat or relatively-broad 
surface for the attachment of the type. The 
type or printing surfaces are provided With 
cylindro-conoidal shanks or sockets b', or 
shanks of other equivalent form, which taper 
from parallel sides toward the printing-sur 
face. 
C is the type - bar ring, in this instance 
shown of considerable depth and of conoidal 
form, so that the interior walls may serve as a 
stop and rest or support for the Outer extrem 
ity of the type-bars when they come to a state 
of rest. The inside of the ring is cushioned 
with a band of suitable material to prevent 
the type-bars from hammering and rebound 
ing, as shown at Ct. 
C is the spacing-yoke, having a forwardly 
projecting plate or bar C* for operating it in 
dependently, and having a transverse ball 
across the path of movement of the key-bars. 
This spacing-yoke C' is operated in one direc 
tion by hand through a key-bar or the plate 
C, and in the reverse direction by a spring 
C9. The yoke is connected by pitman c with 
ratchet c', connected with the shaft of the let 
ter-spacing cylinder; also, by pitman c' with 
95 
I (O 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
409,914 
5 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
5.o. 
55 
. 
. 
. 
driving-shaft. . 
ratchet c for intermittently rotating a rear 
D is a spirally-grooved spacing - cylinder, 
mounted in the frame below the top plate 
for driving the impression-cylinder forward 
step by step for spacing letters and words. 
E is a plate provided with a hole or perfo 
ration e for centering and bringing the type 
to exactly the same point opposite the im 
pression-surface. 
Each type-bar has connected to its ex 
tremity a type provided with cylindro-py 
ramidal, cylindro-conoidal, or other formed 
shank or socket tapering on all sides and 
merging into parallel sides, and the base of 
the Shank or a cross-section at the beginning 
of the luntapered portion corresponds in shape 
and dimensions with and closely fits in the 
guide-holee. In operation the taperingshank 
Or Socket passes freely into the perforation e 
in the plate E, and guides the type to the same 
point at all times, notwithstanding the pivot 
joints of the bars may be free and loose, and 
this Operation is performed with greater ease 
and freedom from the fact that such joints 
are provided with some play. 
It is observed that there is no tendency to 
upset or bruise the printing-surface of the 
type When its shank is tapered and used in 
connection with either a tapering or cylin 
drical centering hole, whereas there is some 
tendency to do so when the upper outer edge 
of the type is permitted to hammer against 
the inclined sides of a tapering centering 
hole. It is further observed that the cylin 
drical part of the shank reaches the sides of 
the cylindrical hole just as the surface of the 
type reaches the plane of the upper face of 
the centering-plate, and thus insures perfect 
registry before the type can reach the surface 
of the paper. 
F is a rotary shaft intermittently operated 
by the spacing-yoke through ratchet c. This 
shaft is provided with devices for intergear 
ing with transverse shafts G. G. The trans 
Verse shafts are mounted in the frame so as 
to have a slight reciprocating motion in their 
bearings and they carry spools for reeling on 
and off, step by step, an inking-ribbon. (Not 
shown.) 
G' is a Spring-lever pivoted in the frame and 
provided with a detent and spring-stop to en 
gage in Suitable notches 9 g, and connected 
With the shafts, as shown, to throw one or the 
other of the shafts G into gear with the 
shaft F. By shifting the connection between 
shafts G. G. and F the movement of the ink 
ing-ribbon is reversed. 
H is the signal-bell, and h is the bell-ham 
mer, both mounted in the top plate, as shown. 
The bell-hammer is hung on a flexible arm or 
Spiral Spring, so that when it is tripped it will 
Strike the bell and then come to rest just out 
of contact with the bell. 
Above the top plate are supported on suit 
able studs or pillars the tracks or ways II, 
upon which the cylinder-carriage is mounted 
and traversed. 
IK is the cylinder-carriage, mounted on 
trucks or grooved rollers k k, adapted to the 
rods or round tracks II. The rollers are ar 
ranged to grasp the rear track, as shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, and 6, so as to hold the carriage in 
position on the track and permit it to be 
traversed and swiveled without further con 
nections. The carriage is provided with ris 
ers K' K', provided with ordinary key-hole 
slots KK, one part being circular and the 
lower part having straight sides, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, 
M is the impression-cylinder or platen, hav 
ing its journals or arbor's hung in movable 
boxes m, n, which normally fit and rest in the 
neck of the slots KIX. The ends of these 
boxes are in segments of circles which fit in 
the circular part of the slots. 
A yoke N is pivoted to risers from the car 
riage, and is connected by links in in with the 
lower edge of the boxes m. m. IBy this com 
bination of devices the depression of the yoke 
first raises the cylinder or platen from its nor 
mal plane, as shown in Fig. 1, and then SWings 
or turns it, together with the attached paper 
holder, to the position shown in Figs. 2 and 5, 
so that the operator may inspect the Writing. 
The paper-pressure roller of the paper-holder 
being at the rear lower side of the cylinder 
makes it necessary to elevate the cylinderbe 
fore it can be rotated to expose the Writing. 
Furthermore, the elevation and rotation 
brings the work to a better position for in 
spection than it would be if the cylinder or 
platen were merely rotated enough to bring 
the Writing in front of it. 
To give an impulse or start the return move 
ment of the cylinder after it has been raised 
and rotated, I employ a light spring n' be 
tween a fixed part of the frame or machine 
and the movable cylinder. The paper-holder 
and its pressure-roller may be of any ordinary 
or approved construction. I have, however, 
in the present instance shown the finger 
holder and pressure-roller supported by bent 
or angular arms or bars n, attached to the 
movable boxes m, n, the pressure-roller being 
held under tension against the cylinder by the 
springs in n. 
To make the feeding of the paper positive 
and to avoid possible backward movement of 
the pressure-roller upon the return of the cyl 
inder from its raised to its normal position, I 
prefer to gear the cylinder and roller together, 
as shown in Fig. 4. 
The feeding forward step by step of the cyl 
inder for line-spacing is accomplished by a 
hand-lever O, pivoted to the carriage and to 
the reciprocating bar O'. The bar O' carries 
a detent or pawl O', which intergears with the 
usual ratchet O' upon the shaft of the cylin 
der. The bar is normally held in its rear 
Ward position by means of a spring O". By 
raising the operating hand-lever O the recip 
, 
75 
OO 
I O5 
IIo 
I I5 
I 25 
409,914. 
O 
rocating bar and its pawl are driven forward, 
thereby turning the cylinder and moving the 
paper forward. The hand-lever also carries 
an arm P, having a backwardly-projecting 
stud p, which meshes with the spiral grooves 
of letter-spacing cylinder D, thus causing the 
cylinder-carriage, with its mountings, to move 
step by step from right to left as the keys or 
the spacing-yoke are operated. Normally the 
carriage is locked down to its tracks by means 
of a catch or screw-stop r, the provision for 
raising and swinging the impression-cylinder 
on its carriage serving the usual purpose of 
raising the carriage and all its attachments; 
but for cleaning the type and other purposes 
requiring the exposure of the type-barring the 
stop r is removed, when the carriage is swiv 
eled or swung back out of the way. 
Attached to the front rail of the carriage 
is a stop S, adjustable to the right or left in 
slot S'. This stop moves in the path of an 
upward projection from the top plate, and 
serves to limit the movement of the carriage 
to the right. S is an attachment of the car 
riage, also adjustable in a slot. This attach 
ment carries a pendant free to swing in one 
direction, as shown in Figs. 3, 4, and 5, and 
being in the path of the upper arm of the 
bell-hammer serves to trip the bellin its move 
ment toward the left, while it rides freely over 
said arm when moving to the right. 
In Figs. 9 and 10 I have shown mechani 
cal movements which permit of raising and 
swinging the impression-cylinder, which for 
the purposes of my invention in type-writers 
are the equivalent of that shown in Figs. 1 
and 2, and hereinbefore described. 
In Fig. 9, it is a cylindrical part provided 
With a notch or slot in one side, and u? is a 
vertically-reciprocating box adapted to fit in 
the slot of it. The arbor of the cylinder is 
mounted in the part u', and in operation is 
first raised with the box into the slot and then 
turned around. 
In Fig. 10 the shaft or arbor of the cylin 
der is mounted in the bottom of a circular 
bOX, and in Fig. 10 it is mounted in a box ad 
justed in a curved slot. In these forms the 
link and yoke are so connected that in oper 
ation the axis of the cylinder is moved from 
its lowest plane in the arc of a circle upward 
to the position shown in dotted lines in said 
figure. 
Obviously, other mechanical movements 
may be devised or adopted and used in con 
nection with a platen to raise and swing the 
same without departing from my invention, 
and this may be done simultaneously or suc 
cessively. 
In Fig. 12 I have shown in side elevation, 
in plan, and in Section a type socket or shank 
of the form best adapted to operate in combi 
nation with a centering-plate having a guide 
hole. 
I am aware that type-shanks have been pro 
posed having converging faces on two sides, 
and that a perforated plate for bringing the 
type to a given point opposite an impression 
cylinder has also been proposed. I do not, 
therefore, claim either of these devices, broad 
ly. I am not aware, however, that there has 
been combined with a perforated guide-plate 
of the character shown a type shank or socket 
tapering all the way around the same, such 
as I have described. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The combination, in a type-Writer, of a 
tapering type socket or shank and a member 
provided with a guide-hole corresponding in 
shape and dimensions with the base of the 
type-shank, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a type for type-writ 
ers, having a cylindro-conoidal shank or sock 
et, and a centering-plate having a cylindrical 
guide-hole, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, in a type-writer, of a 
loosely-mounted type-bar, a type having a 
taperingshank, as described, and a perforated 
centering-plate, substantially as described. 
4. A key-lever and key-lever spring formed 
integral with each other of thin spring-metal 
plate, having the flat surface of the spring 
part at right angles with the flat surface of 
the lever part, substantially as described. 
5. In a type-writer, the combination of a 
round rear track, a cylinder-carriage, and 
grooved rollers connected with the carriage 
and embracing the roundtrack, substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination, in a typerWriter, of an 
intermittently-driven shaft carrying inter 
gearing devices, a pair of spool-carrying 
shafts mounted to reciprocate in the direc 
tion of their length, a vibrating lever con 
nected with the spool - carrying shafts, and 
a spring-stop whereby the inking-ribbon is 
mounted and operated step by step and re 
versed, substantially as described. 
7. The combination, in a type-writer, of a 
carriage, a platen mounted in movable boxes, 
and a yoke or lever pivoted to the carriage, 
flexibly connected with the platen, and ex 
tending to the front of the machine to a point 
for conveniently raising and turning said 
platen, and thereby bringing the work to view, 
substantially as described. 
8. The combination, in a type-writer, of a 
carriage having risers provided with key 
hole slots, movable boxes fitted to recipro 
cate and rotate in said slots, an impression 
cylinder mounted in the boxes, and a yoke 
connected with said boxes for raising and 
swinging the cylinder to bring the writing 
into view, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
- 
FRANK BURNS. 
Witnesses: 
WM. M. STOCKBRIDGE, 
ARTHUR CRANSTON. 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II 5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410014.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
O. B. PARKER & G. T. ESTEN, 
STEP FOR SPINNING SPINDES, 
No. 410,014, 
Patented Aug. 27, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
a 
t1. 
y 
Fle, e. 
witnesEss, 
A 
NN/ENTORS 
22 
222-/2422e 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer. Washington. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ONESIPHORUS B. PARKER AND GEORGE THOMAS ESTEN, OF PAWTUCKET, 
RHODE ISLAND. 
STEP FOR SPINNING SPINDLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410,014, dated August 27, 1889. 
Application filed March 27, 1889, Serial No. 305,034 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, ONESIPHORUSB. PAR 
KER and GEORGE THOMAS ESTEN, of Paw 
tucket, in the county of Providence and State 
of Rhode Island, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Steps for Spin 
ning-Spindles; and we do hereby declare that 
the following, taken in connection with the 
drawings which accompany and form part of 
this specification, is a description of our in 
vention sufficient to enable those skilled in 
the art to practice it, 
Our invention relates to steps for spindles, 
which pertain to that class of spinning ma 
chinery known as speeders, slubbers, fly 
frames, &c. It consists of a step constructed 
with two parallel vertical sockets separated by 
a perforated partition, the one socket a step 
chamber, the other an oil-chamber. The oil 
chamber is subdivided by a perforated par 
tition, and in the division adjacent to the oil 
chamber packing or other loose fibrous ma 
terial is placed. 
The invention consists, also, in the details 
of construction hereinafter explained. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a top 
view of the stand, in which is shown the step 
connecting oil-chamber, and cover for the 
same swung part way round. Fig. 2 is an 
elevation of the stand the top of which is in 
section. A portion of the spindle resting in 
the step is shown in dotted lines, also the 
packing and the apertures in the wall be 
tween the step and the oil-chamber. 
Similar letters indicate corresponding parts 
in both figures. 
The upper end or head of the stand which 
we employ is larger than the old style and 
includes the spindle-socket or step v and oil 
chamber b. An aperture a connects the two 
through which the oil passes from the cham 
ber to the spindle. The chamber b prefer 
ably is divided into compartments by a par 
O 
25 
35 
". 
 
45 
so 
55 
... 
." 
6o 
75 
tition-wall p in which are perforations c. 
The purpose of the partition p is to hold the 
packing in place and to retard the flow of the 
That part of the chamber 
oil to the spindle. 
next to the step or spindle-socket contains 
the packing-such as cotton or wicking 
loosely held together, through which the oil 
readily passes to the spindle, but sufficiently 
compact to separate the main body of the oil 
from the spindle. 
The packing serves a twofold purpose 
first, it prevents a too rapid supply of the 
lubricant, which might be induced by cen 
trifugal action in the rotation of the spindle 
if in direct contact with the whole supply, and, 
second, it prevents to a large degree the oil. 
that has been in use from commingling with 
that which remains in the chamber, and the 
latter thereby is kept unimpaired; but while 
the advantages of the packing are manifest 
we do not consider its presence in the oil 
chamber indispensable to the utility of our 
It is auxiliary to the partition 
invention. 
wall p, and the more perfect form of the step 
calls for the application of the packing as 
shown and described. 
The oil-chamber b is provided with a cover 
e, to keep the oil from impurities. It is at 
tached to the stand by a screw m. 
We claim as new and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent 
A step for a spinning-spindle formed with 
a step-chamber, and a separate oil-chamber 
communicating with said step-chamber, in 
combination with a perforated partition in 
the oil-chamber, and packing between said 
partition and the wall of the oil-chamber, sub 
stantially as specified. 
NESIFoRUs B. PARKER. 
GEORGE THOMAS ESTEN." 
Witnesses: 
. 
. 
R. E. How DY, 
HARVEY W. KINGSLEY. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410115.txt	. 
E. REED, 
FASTENER FOR THE MEETING RAILS OF SASHES, 
(No Model.) 
No. 410,115. 
ZZ, 
Patented Aug. 27 1889. 
- Z 7, 
SS 
. . . . 
Nessess 
. 
N 
g; a 'g, 2 
NS 
S 
16esz, 
6 v?. (7,767zzazz eZ, 
Zrezzazz", 
Zerz Zeez. 
 
N. PETERs, photo-Lahographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDEN REED, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HAILE TO ISIDORE 
SIMON, OF SAME PLACE. 
FASTENER FOR THE MEETING-RAILS OF SASHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410,115, dated August 27, 1889. 
Application filed March 7, 1889, Serial No.302,286, (No model.) 
Be it known that I, EDEN REED, of the city meeting joint. 
- 
To all, whon it may concern. 
of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Combined Sash-Fasteners and Anti 
Rattlers, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming part of 
this specification. 
This invention relates to a sash-fastener 
that both locks the sash and tightensit at the 
meeting bar and against the window-frame 
to preventrattling; and the invention consists 
in features of novelty, hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
Figure I is an elevation of a window-frame 
and double sash with my fastener and anti 
rattler device attached. Fig. II is a horizontal 
Section taken on line II III, Fig. I, and shows 
two of my sash-fasteners secured to the meet 
ing cross-bar of the upper sash, one of them 
in its operative position engaging with the 
locking-plate on the lower sash and the other 
one in its inoperative open position. Fig. III 
is a like view taken online II III, Fig. I, and 
shows a single sash-fastener secured to the 
middle of the meeting cross-bar of the upper 
Sash and engaging with its locking-plate on 
the lower sash. Fig. IV is an enlarged per 
spective view of the locking thumb-screw, its 
pivotal link-bar, and bracket attachment. 
Fig. W is an enlarged perspective view of the 
locking-plate with which said screw engages. 
Fig. VI is an enlarged perspective view of a 
modification, and shows the overlap-plate of 
the bracket to the locking attachment, having 
a side instead of rear connection with the base 
of the bracket beneath; and Fig. VII is an 
enlarged vertical section taken on line VII 
VII, and shows the attachment and operation 
of the locking device in connection with the 
meeting bars of the sash on which it operates. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents the 
window-frame, in which the lower sash 2 and 
the upper sash 3 is inclosed. 4 are the bevel 
faced meeting cross-bars of said sash, the 
meeting face 5 of the lower sash being over 
hung and the meeting face 6 of the upper 
sash being underhung, so that the action of 
the lock-screw, when operative, as will be 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
. 
- 
65 
I have shown and described 6o 
moref ully hereinafter described, tightens said 
- 
7 is the glass inclosed in said sash, 8 the 
parting-beads between the two sashes, and 9 
the outer stop-beads, between which and the 55 
parting-beads the upper sash works. . 
. 
Vertical grooves 10 in the upper sash pro 
vide seats for the parting-beads, so that said 
beads do not project in the way of the ad 
jacent sash. 
the vertical grooves 10, in which the parting 
beads 5 are seated in the upper sash; but 
said grooves may, when preferred, be counter 
sunk in the lower sash, and will thus work 
equally well, and in either case the counter 
sink groove is to be sufficiently recessed to 
allow free play on the parting-bead under the 
tightening of the bevel-faces of the meeting 
bar by the operation of the locking-screw. 
11 are the vertical stop-beads within which 
the lower sash slides, and 12 the horizontal 
stops that connect said vertical ones at top 
and bottom, which stops and other beads are 
all secured inside the window-frame by any 
Suitable means. 
75 
13 represents a metal bracket attachment . 
that is secured to the meeting bar of the up 
per sash by the screw 14, which passes through 
the countersink hole 15 in the pendent flange 
27 of the bracket, and engages in said meet 
ing-bar of the upper sash. The metal bracket 
has a surmounting overlap-plate 16, which is 
made integral to the base-plate of said bracket 
by the coupling-connection 17, that is cast or 
otherwise connected integral with the other 85 
parts of the bracket. 
- 
18 represents a pivot-screw that engages in 
its perforate seat 19 in both the overlap and 
base plate of the bracket 13, and which screw 
provides a pivotal hold of the link-bar 20, 
which works in said bracket in the interven 
ing space between the overlap 16 and the 
base of said blacket, the screw passing through 
a perforation 21 in said link-bar. 
2 represents the locking-screw, which en 
gages in and passes through a perforate screw 
23 in the free end of the link-bar. The said 
locking-screw is normally set, so that when 
the sashes are closed and the link-bar 20 is 
thrown round until it assumes a direct for 
95 
CO 
2 
410,115 
so 
55 
7 O 
75 
8o 
underhung bevel-edge of the adjacent meet 
ing bar of the upper sash as it ascends by the 
operation of the locking-screw are tightly 
pressed against each other, so that the two 
sections of the sash are rigidly held together 
and forcibly pressed against the frame, both 
above and below, so that it is impossible for 
the windows to rattle, and air-tight joints are 
provided both above and below between the 
sash and the frame, and also at the meeting 
cross-bar joint. 
. The perforations 29 in the heads of the lock 
ing-screws form convenient holds for any suit 
able instrument, by the insertion of which a 
convenient leverage is obtained to turn the 
locking-screws, when it is desired to exert ex 
tra force for tightening the pressure at the 
junction of the meeting cross-bars and that 
of the top and bottom cross-bars of the sash 
against the window-frame. 
The surmounting projecting flange 28, 
around which the lower end of the locking 
screw traverses, insures a firm coupling of 
the upper to the lower sash, even should the 
stop-beads be removed by intended burglars. 
The said projection also guards the point of . 
the locking-screw against the action of the 
burglars tools. 
a 
I claim as my invention 
In a combined sash-fastener and anti-rat 
tler, the combination of the metal bracket 13, 
having a downturned flange 27, secured to 
the meeting bar of the upper sash, said bracket 
being also provided with an overlapping plate 
16, the pivoted link-bar 20, the pivot-screw 18, 
on which the link 20 turns, the locking-screw 
carried by said link-bar, the locking-plate 24, 
secured to the meeting bar of the lower sash, 
the screw 26, passing through plate 24 and 
having a buffer-head to limit the swing of the 
link-bar and locking-screw it carries, and the 
surmounting flange 28 of the locking-plate, 
around the outside of which the locking-screw 
traverses, substantially as set forth. 
EDEN REED. 
In presence of - 
BENJIN. A. KNIGHT, 
SAML. KNIGHT. 
Io 
Ward position from the bracket that carries 
it the lower ends of said screw slides on the 
top of and engages with the locking-plate 24, 
which is secured to the top of the meeting 
bar of the lower sash by the countersunk 
Screw 25, over which said locking-screw freely 
passes in its travels, and by the round-headed 
or other-shaped projecting screw 26, the head 
of which acts as a buffer to limit the further 
progress of the locking-screw. 28 is a project 
ing flange that surmounts the locking-plate 
inside the track of the locking-screw. 29 is. 
a perforation in the head of the locking-screw. 
The bracket, locking-screw, and locking 
plate, when two fastenings are used, as is 
preferable in wide windows, are secured to 
the meeting cross-bars of the sash near the 
stiles thereof, as shown in Figs. I and II. 
When Only one fastening is used, which alone 
is necessary with narrow windows, the said 
fastening devices are secured to the middle 
of the meeting cross-bars of the sash, as 
shown in Fig. III. 
In Fig. VI is shown a modification of the 
bracket, in which the coupling-connection 17 
of the overlap surmounting-plate 16, with the 
base of the bracket, is located on the side of 
Said bracket instead of at its rear, as in the 
other figures. The part 17 in this modifica 
tion acts as a buffer to limit the turn of the 
locking-screw, and therefore there need be no 
projecting buffer-head on the screw 26 when 
this modification of the bracket is used. 
In operation the locking-screw is set so that 
its lower end registers tight with the upper 
surface of the locking-plate, when the piv 
otal bar 20, with said screw it carries, is turned 
around into its operative locking position. 
The window is thereby securely locked. Now, 
if it is desired to use the invention as an 
anti-rattler, all that is required is to turn the 
locking screw or screws farther around, which 
will force the lower sash down tight against 
the basement of the frame, and simultane 
ously force the upper sash up tight against 
the top of said frame, and at the same time 
the overhung bevel-edge of the meeting cross 
bar of the lower sash as it descends and the 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410215.txt	(No Model.) G. W. STAFFORD & S. D. BARRETT. 
No. 410,215. 
JACQUARD ATTACHMENT FOR LOOMS, 
Patented Sept. 3, 1889. 
8vivo-vitov 
f-e 
$3,242. elekovver 
22-21-4 (246227 
2a1-24.9%-7-6-4- 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-uthographer, Washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. STAFF ORD AND SAMUEL D. BARRETT, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE 
ISLAND, ASSIGNORS TO THE GEORGE W. STAFFORD MANUFACTURING 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
JACQUARD ATTACHMENT FOR LOOMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410,215, dated September 3, 1889. 
Application filed February 14, 1889, Serial No, 299,825, (No model.) 
- 
vation of the Jacquard attachment. Fig. 2 
is a vertical cross-section of the upperpart of 
the attachment, taken about on the mid-line . . 
thereof, with a part of the griff broken away. 
Fig. 3 shows a detached end view of the pat- 55 
tern-cylinder and a part of its end support. 
A is one of two duplicate frames held to 
gether by suitable cross-beams and between 
which the bottom plate or rest d, the upper 
plate or griff c, with its cam-guide fand roll 6o 
b, together with the vertical hooks ac and hori 
Zontal needles, are operated by means of the 
ottside mechanism shown in Fig.1. 
The operating devices being the same for 
both ends of the machine, it is deemed suffi- 65 
cient to explain only one. A vertical guide 
rodi is held on the inside of the frame A in 
boxes t, attached to the frame, in which boxes 
it is free to slide up and down. This rod i 
has a bearing made on its upper end to receive to 
one of the trunnions O of the upper table s, 
that supports the griff c, which is held by 
two ears projecting from the griff that rest 
on flanges made on the table S. This table 
S has two ears projecting down-one on each 75 
side of the rod j-to which the cam-guide fis 
fastened by means of bolts ele, Fig. 2, which 
pass through holes in the ears and slots in the 
cam-guide for the purpose of: allowing of an 
adjustment of the guides to give more or less 8o 
inclination to the griff in rising, as may be 
necessary. A roll b, fitted to work freely in 
the slot in the cam-guidef, is held on a stud 
fast in the boxt, that holds the rod i to the 
frame A. The lower plate or restd is held 85. 
on the tables', which has a box h. attached 
to it fitted to slide on rod j. At the upper 
end of the box h. a stud is placed to receive 
the connecting-bar a, by means of which the 
table receives its motion from the working-9.o 
lever i, to which the other end of the bar is 
pivoted. The upper tables and griff receive 
their motion from the same lever through 
the noddle beam or leverl, which is connected 
to the lever i by a short bar n, which is pivoted 95 
to the end of the noddle-beam land to the 
lever i a proper distance inside of the pivot 
of the bar a. The noddle-beam l is hung on 
a pivot in a step fastened to the frame that 
supports the machine. A bar cr rod p con- Ioo 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGE W. STAFFORD 
and SAMUEL D. BARRETT, of Providence, in 
the county of Providence and State of Rhode 
5 Island, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Jacquard Attachments for 
Looms; and we do hereby declare that the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompa 
Io nying drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
is 
specification. 
This invention relates to Jacquard attach 
ments for close-shed looms. These machines 
t5 as usually constructed, as shown in United 
States Patent No. 236,375, January 4, 1881, 
have moved the top plate or griff which raises 
the vertical harness-hooks that are selected 
by the pattern-cylinder to form the figure on 
2O the fabric and the bottom plate upon which 
the hooks rest when down in a level position 
parallel with each other at all times. This 
arrangement has several objections, one of 
which is the bad effect on the warp-threads 
25 because of the necessity of raising the greater 
part of them much higher than they need to 
be in order to raise those attached to the 
back row of hooks high enough to form a 
proper shed for the passage of the shuttle. 
3o Another objection is the vibration of the har 
ness when the hooks come down in contact 
with the bottom plate, as it is obvious that 
when the griff descends all the hooks held 
upon it must come in contact with the bot 
35 tom plate, which is rising to receive them at 
the same time. If the two plates are parallel 
to each other, the meeting of this body of 
hooks and the lower plate causes a severe 
shock or blow, which has the effect of break 
4o ing the harness-cords, especially upon heavy 
lifts where wide goods are woven having a 
large number of threads in the warp. This 
vibration is the main objection to running 
Jacquard looms at as high a rate of speed as 
45 looms using other known methods of Operat 
sing the warp-threads, and tilting the griff in 
its upward and downward movements is one 
of the modes that has been adopted in some 
cases to obviate these difficulties. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows an end ele 
so 
410,215 
nects the other end of the noddle-beam l to 
The pat 
the trunnion O of the upper tables. 
tern-cylinder r is held in bearings in the 
upper end of the swinging frame v, which is 
attached by a pivot at its lower end to the 
frame A. The frame v receives a swinging 
motion to and from the frame A through a 
jointed knee-levery, which is held on a stud 
fast to a projection on the frame A. This 
lever is composed of two arms if y, hung by 
one end to the same stud j', which arms are 
prevented by a projection i? on one of them 
from approaching each other nearer than rep 
resented, and are held yieldingly in that po 
The upper 
sition by a close spiral spring '. 
end of the knee-levery is connected by a bar. 
y' to the frame v, and the other end of the 
knee-levery is connected to the trunnion of 
the upper tables by a bar o'. 
The stud in 
the lower end of the bar o' is held in a slot in 
the lower end of the knee-lever 1, so as to be 
capable of being adjusted to increase or lessen 
the swing of the frame 7. The object of hav 
ing this joint in the knee-levery is to pre 
vent the pattern-cylinder from doing or re 
ceiving any injury when from any cause it 
fails to make a full quarter-turn in its out 
ward movement, and thus presents a corner 
to the needle-plate in the inward movement, 
the spring r", connecting the two parts of the 
lever 21, allowing the continuation of the 
downward movement of the lower part while 
the top part remains stationary. 
It is not thought necessary to describe the 
mode of turning the pattern-cylinder, as our 
invention does not refer to that point, and it 
may be done in any of the ordinary ways used, 
nor to describe the construction of the griff, 
which is made with the usual horizontal bars. 
When desired, the bottom plated may have a 
similar motion to that of the griff c, as de 
scribed, by applying a similar cam and guide 
to it, (the movement of the plated would be 
in the opposite direction,) as in some cases 
it is desirable to open the shed with a corres 
ponding angle at the bottom. The outer end 
of the working-lever i, which is shown as 
broken off, is connected by a rod to a crank 
fast on the crank-shaft of the loom in the 
usual manner. 
In operation, the working-lever i receives 
a vertical motion by a rod connecting it to a 
crank on the crank-shaft of the loom below, 
and when the crank raises the outer end the 
inner end will be depressed and drawn down 
the lower plates' by means of the bar a, as 
shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 1, and the 
noddle-beam l will be depressed at that end 
connected by bar in to the lever i, causing the 
other end to rise, and by means of the bar p 
raise the upper table S and griff c to the po 
sition shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 2, and 
as the table S rises the guide-cam f attached 
O 
I5. 
2 o' 
25 
35 
45 
55 
to it will be moved by the stationary rollb, so 
as to tilt the griff, as shown in Fig. 2. As this 
guide-cam 
if can be constructed in any de 
sired shape, and by means of the bolts that 
hold it in place can be adjusted in position, 
it will be seen that almost any motion in 
character or degree can be given to the griff. 
As looms are constructed both right and 
left handed-that is, with driving-pulleys at 
the right or left hand end, and the crank that 
operates the lever is made fast on the crank 
shaft at the opposite end of the loom to the 
driving-pulleys, it becomes necessary to use 
the Jacquard attachment with either end to 
ward the front of the loom and still raise the 
back row of harnesses the highest. To accom 
plish this it is only necessary to reverse the 
guide cam-plates, or to change them from end 
to end of the Jacquard machine, and the row 
of hooks that operate the harnesses toward 
the back of the loom will rise the highest and 
operate the harnesses properly in that respect, 
and the necessity for reversing the order of 
punching the pattern-cards, which would oth 
erwise he necessary, will be avoided. 
Having thus described our improvements, 
what we claim as our invention is 
1. The guide-rods i, sliding in bearings on 
the frame A, and having pivotal bearings at 
their upper ends, the griff c, the tables, the 
camf, and means for adjustably securing it 
to the said table, in combination with frame 
| A and guide-rollb, secured thereto, and means 
for moving said rods i up and down in their 
bearings, substantially as specified. 
2. In combination with the swinging frame 
v and end frame A, having a stud Secured 
therein, a knee-lever made in two parts, 
both of which are pivoted on said stud and 
are formed to engage one with the other to 
give a positive movement to the swinging 
frame outwardly, and the spring v', attached 
to the two parts of the said lever, whereby the 
lower part may make its downward move 
ment if the frame a should be impeded in its 
inward movement, a link y', a bar o', and 
means to actuate said bar, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the griff c, plates, 
rod i, rod p, and noddle-beam l, of lever i, a 
connection n, pivoted to one end of the nod 
dle-beam l and to the lever i at a point be 
tween its fulcrum and its inner end for the 
movement of said griff c, and the plate s', 
plate or rest d, box h, and the connection (t, 
pivoted to the inner end i and to the box h. 
for the movement of the plate or rest d, sub 
stantially as herein set forth. 
GEO. W. STAFFORD. 
S. D. BARRETT. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES H. POLAND, 
BENJ. ARNOLD. 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IEO 
IT 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410315.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 410,315, 
F. W. COOK. 
GANG EDGER, 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 3, 1889, 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 3, 1889, 
F. W. COOK. 
GANG EDGER 
s^ 
is 
NA 
n 
(No Model.) 
No. 410,315, 
- 
 
 
 
SSS4 iO 
SSSI EW SNS 
Seas 2 2da 
 
 
f eas 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 410,315, 
F. W. COOK. 
GANG EDGER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Sept. 3, 1889. 
 
F. W. COOK. 
GANG EDGER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Sept. 3, 1889. 
is 
Mill ten s: It is 
7 
a 
elease 
its 
T 
S 
(No Model,) 
No. 410,315. 
 
 
 
N. Peters, Pholcithographer, Washington.D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK. W. COOK, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE. 
HALF TO H. P. GREGORY & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
GANG EDGE. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410,815, dated September 8, 1889. - 
Application filed December 28, 1888, Serial No. 294.866, (No model.) 
15 gang-edger. 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK W. COOK, 
of the city and county of San Francisco, State 
of California, have invented an Improvement 
in Gang-Edgers; and I hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same. 
My invention relates to the class of wood 
Working machinery, and especially to gang 
edgers; and my invention consists in the con 
Structions and combinations of devices which 
I shall hereinafter fully describe and claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
for a more complete explanation of my in 
Verition, Figure 1 is a side elevation of my 
Fig. 2 is an end view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a plan. Fig. 4 is a detail of the lever 
by which initial movement for shifting the 
saWS is made. Fig. 5 is a vertical section of 
the Screw-operating nut. 
Fig. 6 is a view of 
the rack operating and locking mechanism. 
Fig. 7 is a cross-section of the machine. Fig. 
8 is a detail of locking-bar H. Fig. 9 is a de 
tail of shaft F and locking-bar H. 
- 
A is the stand or frame of the machine. 
B is the saw-arbor, mounted in boxes b on 
each end of the frame and adapted to be driven 
by a belt leading to pulley b'. 
C are the saws, each having a grooved col 
lar c, by which it is mounted on the arbor, and 
is adapted to slide thereon in the usual man 
le. 
The means for shifting the saws, so as to 
adjust them to different distances with rela 
tion to each other, are as follows: 
D are the shifters. These consist of brack 
ets or bars having a semicircular or concave 
center at d, fitted to and engaging the grooved 
collars C of the saws. - These shifters are ar 
ranged transversely of the frame A, and their 
arms project to each side and are mounted 
upon and supported by fixed tracks a of the 
frame, on which said tracks they slide back 
and forth in the direction of the length of the 
machine. The arms of the shifters project 
beyond the fixed tracks a, and are connected 
with the racks E. These racks are whollyin 
dependent of each other, and are mounted in 
guides a? on each side of the frame in paral 
lel planes and extending parallel with the 
saw-shaft. There is one rack on each side 
55 
65 
7o 
for each shifter-that is to say, if there are 
four shifters, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3, there 
are four racks on one side of the machine and 
four racks on the other side, and each shifter 
has its extremities connected with one rack 
on each side. Therefore by moving simulta 
neously a corresponding rack on each side 
the shifter to which these racks are connected 
go 
can be moved on its tracks a back and forth, 
and thereby will shift or adjust its saw. 
The racks are operated as follows: Mounted 
across one end of the frame is a shaft F, hav 
ing on one end a crank-wheel f, by which it 
may be rotated. It also carries near each end 
a pinion G-one for each side. These pinions 
are adapted to engage the racks E, and they 
are so located on the shaft that when one en 
gages a rack on one side the other engages the 
corresponding rack on the other side, so that 
by rotating the shaft F that pair of racks 
will be moved and their saw will thus be 
shifted; but to adapt the pinions to engage 
another pair of racks, I mount the shaft F in 
such a manner that it inay be moved longi 
tudinally, thus carrying its pinions into en 
gagement with any of the four pairs of racks, 
so as to shift and adjust each saw. 
Though the shaft F may be moved longi 
tudinally directly, I have here shown for ef 
fecting the result a bar H, which serves a pri 
mary function, to be mentioned presently. 
This bar is mounted in the frame parallel 
with the shaft and is adapted to have a slid 
ing movement longitudinally. It is connected 
at each end with the shaft by an arm h, and 
it has its movement imparted to it by means 
of a lever I, Figs. 1 and 4, which is pivoted at 
i to one end of the frame. Upon the lever is 
a rack-segment i, Fig. 4, which engages a 
rack h on the sliding bar H. A quadrant i* 
fixes the lever in any position and regulates 
the extent of its movement. Now, by moving 
this lever the bar H can be moved longitudi 
nally and impart a similar movement to shaft 
F, thereby causing the latter to throwits pin 
ions G into engagement with any of the pairs 
of racks E; but the bar His made to serve 
the further and primary purpose of locking 
all the pairs of racks E but the one pair with 
which the pinions G then engage. The lower 
edge of each end of the bar H traverses and 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
IO 
25 
30 
35 
45 
410,315 
O 
15 
25 
-35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
engages the teeth of the racks and so pre 
vents their movement; but in this lower edge 
I cut or form the grooves h, which serve as 
rackways. These ways have a width suffi 
cient to allow only one rack to pass, and they 
are located in line with the pinions G, so that 
that pair of racks which the pinions engage 
may pass through said ways, while all the 
others are locked by having their teeth en 
gaged by the bar II. Thus all the racks are 
locked, except when the pinions engage one 
pair, when that pair can be moved. 
It will be seen that each saw has its own 
shifting device and that the power is applied 
equally on both sides, thereby insuring accu 
racy of movement. One shaft effects the 
shifting of all the saws, and I avoid thereby the 
separate cross-shafts for each saw, which are 
usually connected with the saw-collar and 
have a pinion traveling on a fixed rack. By 
my construction I effect the shifting of all the 
saws from one end of the machine and by 
means of one shaft, instead of having to move 
along the whole side of the machine and han 
dle several shafts. 
The shifters D, mounted steadily on the 
tracks C and having the centers d engaging 
the saw-collars, form stable supports for the 
saws independent of the arbor B. Conse 
quently said arbor may be released from its 
boxes and drawn out wholly or partially from 
all the saws, leaving the latter temporarily 
supported in the shifters. Any saw nay then 
be removed and another replaced and the ar 
bor passed through them again. 
In the top of frame A is the shaft J, on 
which the frames IX, which carry the pressure 
or upper feed rollers L, are hinged. M are 
the lower feed-rollers. 
In the ordinary gang-edgers there is one 
frame K and one pressure -roller I on each 
side of the machine. A difficulty is found in 
this construction, which arises from the length 
of the roller overlapping and imposing un 
equal Weight upon one edge of a board fed in 
at one end, causing a binding and a conse 
quent deflection in the line of travel of said 
board. This difficulty has been partially over 
come by dividing the pressure-rollers and their 
frames into two on each side, as I have here 
shown, Fig. 3; but to fully overcome it. I attach 
to the adjacent edges of each pair of frames K 
the arms N. These arms project over the 
adjacent frame, and each has a bearing on 
the other frame at a point beyond its central 
plane. Now, when a board is fed in under 
the pressure-roller near one end the overlap 
ping weight of the frame is not imposed upon 
its edge, as the weight of the adjacent frame 
is transferred through its arm N to the first 
frame beyond its center, so that it equalizes 
pressure and avoids the difficulty mentioned. 
Thus the frames K, though separate, are ad 
justably connected, and neither can impose 
undue pressure on any part of the board fed 
under its roller. 
In order to lift or lower the pressure-rollers 
and adjust them for different thicknesses of 
boards, my invention contemplates the ac 
complishment of the result by power trans 
mitted from the machine itself and by mech 
anism which will effect the object with ac 
curacy and steadiness, being under perfect 
control. 
Mounted above the frame A is a shaft O, 
which is adapted to have a longitudinal move 
ment in its bearings, being thus moved by a 
lever P, which rocks a shaft p, carrying a 
clutch p', engaging said shaft O. 
Rotation is imparted to the shaft O by a 
belt Q, which extends from a pulley q on the 
saw-arbor to a pulley q' on the shaft. 
R is a counter-shaft at right angles to shaft 
O, and n' is a friction-gear on said counter 
shaft. 
Upon shaft O are the friction-pinions O, 
one on each side of the friction-gear and 
adapted to engage therewith alternately. 
When neither pinion is in engagement, the 
shaft O rotates without imparting rotation to 
shaft, R. When shaft O is moved longitudi 
nally in one direction, so as to throw one of 
its pinions o into engagement with gear r, the 
shaft R is rotated in one direction, and when 
the shaft O is moved in the opposite direction 
to throw its other pinion O into engagement 
with gear r the shaft R is rotated in the other 
direction. 
In a fixed boxing S is mounted vertically 
and adapted to be rotated a nut T, having 
upon its top a beveled pinion t, which meshes 
with a beveled pinion '' on the counter-shaft 
R. Thus the nut can be rotated in either di 
rection. 
Seated in the nut is a screw U., forming a 
hanger and having an eye at at its lower end. 
A feather or spline S on the box S enters a 
groove win the screw and prevents it from 
turning with the nut. 
V is a chain secured to the eye at of the 
screw and having forks v extending down to 
and connected with the frames K of the press 
ure-rollers L. As these frames are practi 
cally connected in pairs by the arms N, I need 
but two forks of the chain V, one to connect 
with one frame of each pair. 
The operation of this mechanism is obvious, 
By moving the lever P, so as to move the shaft 
O, one or the other of its pinions O is thrown 
into engagement with one side or the other 
of gear , thereby rotating shaft R and nut T 
in either direction, and raising or lowering 
screw U., which raises or lowers the pressure 
rollers to accommodate them to different 
thicknesses of boards. This operation is per 
formed by power transmitted from the ma 
chine, and the result is effected with accuracy 
and steadiness, especially the lowering opera 
tion, which in ordinary machines is effected 
With a jar. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
| claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a gang-edger, and in combination with 
OO 
O 
II5 
125 
 
 
410,815 
3 
O 
the saw-arbor and the independent saws mova 
ble thereon, the transversely-disposed brack 
ets or shifter-bars, each engaging at its mid 
dle the collar of one of the saws, the series of 
independent movable racks attached to each 
end of the brackets or shifter-bars, and a ro 
tary sliding shaft mounted transversely of 
the machine and carrying a pinion on each 
side, adapted by the sliding movement of the 
shaft to be thrown into gear with different 
racks of the series, whereby the saws may be 
independently shifted on the arbor, substan 
tially as herein described. 
2. In a gang-edger, and in combination with 
the saw-arbor and the independent saws mova 
ble thereon, the transversely-disposed brack 
ets or shifter-bars, each engaging at its mid 
dle the collar of one of the saws, the series of 
independent movable racks attached to each 
end of the brackets or shifter-bars, the rotary 
sliding shaft having a pinion on each side, 
adapted by the sliding movement of the shaft 
to be thrown into gear with different racks of 
the series to shift their saws, the sliding bar 
connected with the shaft, and a lever for 
moving the bar to slide the shaft, substan 
tially as herein described. 
3. In a gang-edger, and in combination with 
the saw-arbor and the independent saws mov 
able thereon, the transversely-disposed brack 
ets or shifter-bars, each engaging at its mid 
dle the collar of one of the saws, the series of 
independent movable racks attached to each 
end of the brackets or shifter-bars, the ro 
tary sliding shaft having a pinion on each 
side adapted by the sliding movement of the 
shaft to be thrown into gear with different 
racks of the series to shift their saws, the 
sliding bar connected with the shaft and 
having a rack, the pivoted lever having a seg 
mental gear engaging the rack for moving the 
bar and shaft, and the quadrant for control 
ling the lever, substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
4. In a gang-edger, and in combination with 
a saw-arbor and a saw movable thereon, a 
transversely-disposed bracket or shifter-bar 
engaging the saw-collar, a movable rack on 
- 
3o 
35 
55 
65 
75 
- 
described. 
each side attached to each-end of the shifter 
bar, a rotary shaft having pinions engaging 
the racks for moving them, and a sliding bar 
adapted by its movement to engage and re 
lieve the teeth of the racks, whereby they are 
locked and released, substantially as herein. 
5. In a gang-edger, and in combination with 
the saw-arbor and the independent saws mov 
able thereon, the transversely-disposed brack 
ets or shifter-bars, each engaging the collar of 
one of the saws, the series of independent 
movable racks attached to each end of the 
brackets or shifter-bars, the rotary sliding 
shaft having a pinion on each side, adapted 
by the sliding movement of the shaft to be 
thrown into gear with different racks of the 
series to shift their saws, and the sliding bar 
engaging the teeth of the racks and locking 
them and grooves or ways in the bar in line 
with the pinions of the shaft to permit the 
movement of those racks engaged by the 
pinion, substantially as herein described. 
6. In a gang-edger, and in combination with 
the saw-arbor and the independent saws mov 
able thereon, the transversely-disposed brack 
ets or shifter-bars, each engaging the collar 
of one of the saws and mounted and adapted 
to slide on fixed tracks in the frame of the 
machine, the series of independent movable 
racks attached to each end of the brackets 
or shifter-bars, the rotary sliding shaft hav 
ing on each side a pinion adapted by the 
sliding movement of the shaft to be thrown 
into gear with different racks of the series to 
shift their saws, the sliding bar connected 
With and adapted to move the shaft, said 
bar engaging the teeth of the racks and hav 
ing grooves or ways in line with the pinions 
of the shaft, and a lever and intermediate 
connections for moving the sliding bar, sub 
stantially as herein described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
- 
FREDERCIK. W. COOK. 
45 
 
Witnesses: 
S. H. NoURSE, 
H. C. LEE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410415.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
E. HANIS CH & M. SCHROEDER, 
APPARATUS FOR EXTRACTING SULPHUROUS ACID, 
No. 410,415, 
Patented Sept. 3, 1889, 
% 
% 
% 
% 
sia. A 
 
% 
% 
2 
%2& 
A. 
2. 
 
 
 
76. 
2. 7. 
2z-z (/6 
6 
w 
A 
Z7 
N. perERS, Photo-Lithographer, Waslington, b. c. 
 
4t. 
-64-e66-eeee 
<%ao. 
ATTORVEYS. 
 
  
  
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
E. HANISCH & M. S CHROEDER, 
APPARATUS FOR EXTRACTING SU PHURO US ACID, 
No. 410,415, 
Patented Sept. 3, 1889. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
A re. 
2AcAS 
8 
t 
W2 
2. 
22 
2 
2. 2IIIII IIII 
2 
EH List 2 
z. III. Inj -----2 
M-2 
 
 
W W W 
% 
 
 
-N 1: 4 
2 
 
- 
    
% 
. s J. 
: 
- 
a 
 
A 
WITNESSES 
%. 273A. 
2. 
 
INVENTORS 
C 
- Z5  2 22 w 24-44-g 
24-7-ea 
u14e- u 
BY 
~4%az. 
AITORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMIL HANISCH, OF BEUTHEN O. S., AND MAX SCHROEDER, OF NEUMUHL, 
(GERMANY. 
APPARATUS FOR EXTRACTING SU PHURO US ACD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410,415, dated September 3, 1889. 
Application filed September 18, 1888, Serial No. 285,712, (No model.) Patented in Germany January 18, 1883, No. 26,181 and 
November 23, 1883, No. 27,531, and in England May 26, 1883, No. 2,62.l. 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that we, EMIL HANISCH and 
MAX SCHROEDER, respectively of Beuthen O. 
S. and of Neumhl, Hamborn, in the German 
Empire, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Apparatus for Extract 
ling Sulphurous Acid from Furnace-Gases, 
(which has been patented to us heretofore by 
the Government of Germany, No. 26,181, dated 
January 18, 1883, and No. 27,531, dated No 
vember 23, 1883, and by the Government of 
England, No. 2,621, of May 26, 1883) of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved ap 
paratus for extracting sulphurous acid by 
means of Water from furnace-gases and other 
gaseous mixtures containing said acid and 
utilizing the absorbed sulphurous acid in the 
manufacture of sulphuric acid, sulphurican 
hydride, and for other uses in the arts. 
The invention consists, essentially, of a cer 
tain novel construction of heaters for the 
acidulated Water employed in the apparatus 
for separating sulphurous-acid gas from fur 
nace and other gases, as will be described in 
detail hereinafter, and finally pointed out in 
the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I 
represents a plan of our improved apparatus 
for extracting sulphurous acid from furnace 
and other gases containing the same. Fig. 2 
is a vertical longitudinal section on line acac, 
Fig. 1, through the collecting-reservoir, pre 
paratory heater, and the separating-tower. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical longitudinal section on the 
line y J, Fig. 1, through the absorbing-tower 
and the main heating apparatus located in the 
Widened gas-flue. Fig. 4 is a vertical longi 
tudinal Section through the preliminary 
heater, drawn on a larger scale; and Figs. 5 
and 6 are respectively a vertical transverse 
Section through the main heating apparatus 
on line 2, 2, Fig. 3, and a horizontal section of 
the same on line k k, Fig. 5. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
The furnace or other gases are conducted 
through the widened flue in which the main 
heating apparatus B is located, and from the 
same through a curved tube a to the lower 
part of an absorption-tower A, to the upper 
part of which cold water is supplied in a fine 
spray from a suitable reservoir by means of 
sprinklers. The gas passes in upward direc 
tion and in a counter-current to the descend 
ing water through the absorption-tower A, 
which is filled with lattice-work, wicker-Work, 
or other equivalent devices for producing a 
large surface and obtaining a fine subdivis 
ion of the water. The sprayed water absorbs 
in the tower the sulphurous-acid gas contained 
in the furnace-gases, and passes off from the 
tower into a closed reservoir C, which is lo 
cated somewhat below the bottom of said 
tower. Both the tower A and the reservoir C 
are supported high enough so that the Water 
is under sufficient pressure to insure its pas 
sage through a preliminary heater D, as Well 
as through the main heating apparatus B. 
The remaining gases are drawn off by means 
of a suction-fan from the upper part of the 
tower through a pipe b and conducted off. 
From the reservoir C the Water containing 
sulphurous acid is conducted through a pipe 
c to the lower part of the preliminary heater 
D, which consists of a number of square lead 
plates e, that are located above each other, SO 
as to form a number of horizontal spaces of 
large surface and comparatively low height. 
The water passes in the lowest space from 
the left to the right, and is conducted at the 
right-hand end by a vertical connection e' to 
the third space, then at the opposite end of 
the third space by a vertical connection e' to 
the fifth space, and so on alternately in ZigZag 
flues from the right to the left and back again 
from the left to the right around the interme 
diate spaces. The intermediate spaces serve 
for the passage of the hot Water from Which 
the sulphurous-acid gases have been Sepa 
rated, which water is conducted through the 
intermediate spaces in a direction at right 
angles to that of the cold water in the uneven 
spaces. The hot water enters the prelimi 
nary heater at one side through a pipeg, and 
passes from the top of the heater D downward 
to the lowerpart, leaving the heater D, through 
a pipe h, at the opposite side of the same, as 
shown clearly in Fig. 4. The lead plates, which 
form the preliminary heater D, are supported 
25 
35 
45 
O 
: 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
410,415 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
by transverse beams of lead, which are ar 
ranged in the even spaces through which the 
hot water is conducted as shown in Fig. 4, 
they being arranged in the direction of the 
current of the water, so that by the cross-cur 
rents the heat of the hot water is communi 
cated through the lead partition-plates to the 
ascending cold water containing the sulphur 
ous acid, which is thereby gradually heated 
in proportion as the hot descending water 
gives forth its heat. The acidulated water 
that is thus heated up in the preliminary 
heater leaves the heater at f, and is conducted 
by a pipe i into the left-hand end of the main 
heating apparatus B, in which the heat of the 
furnace-gases is utilized for heating the water 
still more, while accomplishing at the same 
time a partial cooling of the furnace-gases. 
The main heating apparatus B consists of 
a number of closed leaden vessels or pans m, 
placed one above the other at a suitable dis 
tance from each other, which leaden pans are 
of moderate height but considerable length, 
through which the water is to circulate alter 
nately from the bottom upward. The water 
enters the lowest lead pan at i? at the left end 
of the main heater B, as shown in Fig. 6, and 
passes in a direction opposite to the furnace 
gases through longitudinal channels formed 
by leaden beams to the opposite or right end 
of the lower lead pan in, where it communi 
cates by a transverse open part formed by 
shortening the lead beams, as at the left-hand 
end, with two bent side pipes i, then enters 
the next higher pan in and circulates here 
from the front to the rear of the main heater, 
then by bent side pipes i to the next higher 
pan m, and SO on alternately until it escapes 
through the outlet-pipel. The leaden pans 
m are placed on iron beams which are let at 
the sides into the brick-work, and supported 
at the center by columns or other suitable 
The furnace-gases pass longitudi 
supportS. 
nally through the flat channels in, located in 
termediately between the pans in in the direc 
tion of the arrows, Fig. 3, and heat the water 
in the pans above and below. The lead plates 
are protected from doubling up by leaden 
supports which are placed in the direction of 
the circulating water, but do not reach up to 
the front walls, so as to allow the water to en 
ter freely into the separate compartments, as 
shown in Fig. 6. The water must be kept in 
this apparatus until it has attained a tem 
perature of 100 centigrade. The flow of the 
water in the main heating apparatus is also 
caused by the pressure of the water in the 
higher situated reservoir C. The water after 
being heated to 100 centigrade now passes 
through the pipel into the upper part of the 
separating-tower E, the bottom of which is 
arranged somewhat higher than the upper 
part of the preliminary heater D, so that the 
separated hot water can run off through the 
pipeg into the said apparatus. In the cen 
ter of the tower E is arranged a vertical lead 
covered iron rotary shaft o, which carries a 
number of horizontally-arranged sheet-iron 
disks o', lined with lead. These disks are ar 
ranged alternately between the same number 
of rings o?, of the same material, which are 
attached to the inner wall of the tower So as 
to alternate with the disks. A tube p leads 
into the lower part of the tower, which tube 
serves for the supply of hot air, or preferably 
superheated steam. The hot acidulated Water 
falling on the upper disk of the rotary shaft 
is thrown off by centrifugal force and falls 
upon the first ring and from there on the 
second disk, and so on until it reaches the 
reservoir below. 
For producing pure sulphurous acid, the 
separation of the sulphurous-acid gases from 
the hot acidulated water is accomplished by 
passing superheated steam in a counter-cur 
rent through the finely-subdivided spray pro 
duced by the action of the rotary disks as the 
hot water passes alternately from the same to 
the fixed rings. The supply of hot water and 
steam is regulated by suitable cocks or valves. 
The superheated steam is not absorbed by 
the hot spray water, but assists in generating 
steam from the same while accelerating the 
separation of the sulphurous-acid gases. The 
resulting mixture of sulphurous acid and 
steam is conducted by a pipeg from the sep 
arating-tower E into a condensing-coil, (not 
shown in the drawings,) that is cooled by Wa 
ter, so that the steam is condensed. The Wa 
ter of condensation which contains some Sul 
phurous acid is reconducted to the separating 
tower E, while the sulphurous-acid gases are 
conducted off to be dried and finally col 
lected in lead compartments in order that the 
same may be utilized for the production of 
sulphuric acid or applied to other technical 
purposes. The hot water collected in the 
lower part of the separating-tower E is con 
ducted by a pipeg to the hot-Water channels 
of the preliminary heater D, and are utilized 
for heating up the acidulated solution pass 
ing through in the intermediate channels of 
the same. 
The process herein described of extracting 
sulphurous acid has been claimed in a sepa 
rate application filed January 9, 1888, Serial 
No. 260,169, to which reference is made. 
Having thus described our invention, We 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent- 
1. In an apparatus for separating Sulphur 
ous acid from furnace and other gases, a heater 
for the acidulated water composed of a series 
of horizontal chambers connected alternately 
at opposite ends, and a series of intermediate 
chambers divided by leadenbeams into chan 
nels, through which the hot fluid passes in 
a counter-current to the flow of the acidulated 
water, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an apparatus for separating sulphur 
ous acid from furnace and other gases, the pre 
liminary heater composed of a series of hori 
Zontal compartments or chambers connected 
alternately at opposite ends, and a series of 
4. 
75 
95 
TOC) 
O 
I I5 
25 
13o 
s 
 
410,415 
3 
intermediate spaces or chambers divided by our invention we have signed our names in 
transverse lead beams into channels which presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
are also connected alternately at opposite 
ends, and inlet and outlet pipes at the ends 
5 of both sets of chambers, so that the acidu 
lated Water ascends through one series of 
chambers, while the hot' water descends 
through the intermediate chambers in a direc- 
tion at right angles to the flow of acidulated 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
OSCAR GICHERT, 
FELIX STIRODA. 
J. F. MONAGHAN, 
H. E. HAMMOND. 
IC water, substantially as set forth. 
E. NSBer 
Witnesses for Emil Hnisch: 
Witnesses for Max Schroeder: 
k 
b 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410515.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 410,515, 
W. O. GUNOKEL, 
REVOLVING COAL SCREEN, 
Patented Sept. 3, l889. 
a 41-212 a 444 a 14-444-4-4Tarara-42a 
212 A. 
 
 
a111111%-44. A1A-1 
2 
Selef gay 
28itv1 coacs 
&vlue-vitov 
W (774, 
--- 
S$4 Awa &lti-et-vic 
2724&ar A324 
N. Peters, rhoto-lihographer. Washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WINFIELD O. GUNCKEL, OF TERRE HAUTE, INDIANA. 
REVOLVING COAL SCREEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410,515, dated September 3, 1889. 
Application filed January 23, 1888, Serial No. 261,657, (No model.) 
55 
To all avhon it not conce7n: 
Beit known that I, WINFIELD O. GUNCKEL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Terre Haute, in the county of Vigo and State 
of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Revolving Coal 
Screens; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable other's skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
This invention relates to coal-screens in 
which the screen is made revoluble; and it 
consists in the novel construction and com 
bination of the parts, as hereinafter fully de 
scribed and claimed, whereby the screen is 
driven in an improved manner, and is kept 
free from dirt. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
the Screen, the casing being shown in section. 
Fig. 2 is a front end view, and Fig. 3 is a 
cross-section taken on line acac in Fig. 1. 
A is the casing which incloses the screen 
and which may be framed together in any 
convenient manner. 
B is the wire cylinder or screen, the wires 
of which are spaced farther apart toward the 
real' of the machine, or otherwise arranged 
to screen the coal to the best advantage. The 
screen B is inclined, the rear end being the 
lower. 
C is a band secured to the screen about the 
middle of its length and provided with a 
V-shaped projection c. 
D are flat bands secured to the ends of the 
Screen, and E are longitudinal bars uniting 
the end bands with the middle band, and 
supporting the wire cylinder which is riveted 
to them. The middle band C is made rather 
larger in diameter than the end bands D. 
F are two parallel driving-shafts journaled 
in bearings f, secured to the casing and situ 
ated below the screen, and one at each side 
of it. These shafts F are provided with 
sprocket-wheels G, connected together by the 
chain g and driven from the sprocket-wheel 
g outside the frame. 
H are flat-faced wheels secured on shafts 
F for the end bands D to bear upon. 
I are grooved wheels secured to the shaft, 
F and engaging with the V-shaped projection 
on the middle band. As the middle band is 
larger than the end bands and is situated 
substantially under the center of gravity of 
the screen, the weight of the screen comes 
upon the said grooved wheels, and the driv 
ing is accomplished by them solely. This 
construction insures the screen against slip, 
the grooved wheels receive the end-thrust 
due to the inclination, and the ends of the 
screen being subjected to similar strains the 
screen will last much longer and not get bent 
out of shape by being twisted in various di 
rections. 
J is a brush of steel wire situated inside 
the screen and arranged to press against the 
whole or greater part of its surface at an an 
gle of about forty-five degrees. The arrow 
shows the direction of motion and the screen 
meets the brush as the cylindrical surface de 
scends. The brush clears the wires from dirt, 
which falls vertically clear of the brush, as 
shown in Fig. 3, so that the brush does not 
become clogged up. 
K are levers which support the ends of the 
brush outside the screen and are pivoted to 
the casing by the pins k, 
L are levers pivoted to the said levers K. 
and provided with long slots l in their free 
ends. 
M. are thumb-screws which pass through 
the said slots and connect the levers L with 
the casing, so that the position of the brush 
can be varied to make it bear with greater 
or less pressure against the screen, or to 
swing out of contact with it altogether. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of the cylindrical wire 
Screen, the flat bands secured to the ends of 
the screen, the middle driving-band of larger 
diameter than the end bands, the driving 
shafts situated below the screen, one on each 
side of it, the flat-faced wheels supporting 
the ends of the screen, and the driving-wheels 
engaging with the said middle driving-band, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the inclined cylin 
drical wire screen, the flat bands secured to 
the ends of the screen, the middle driving 
band of larger diameter than the end bands, 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
2 
410,515 
and provided with the circumferential V 
shaped projection, the longitudinal bars 
uniting the middle and end bands, the driv 
ing-shafts situated below the screen, one on 
each side of it, the flat-faced wheels support 
ing the ends of the screen, and the grooved 
driving-wheels engaging with the said pro 
jection on the middle driving-band, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination of two parallel driving 
shafts, three wheels secured upon each shaft, 
O 
and a cylindrical screen provided with middle 
and end bands, supported upon the said 
wheels and bearing hardest upon the middle 
wheels, whereby the screen is driven from the I5 
middle, substantially as set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
WINFIELD O. GUNCKEL. 
Witnesses: 
ERWIN S. EMRY, 
C. T. NOBLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410615.txt	(No Model.) 
J. STOATE, 
CULTIVATOR AND HARROW, 
No. 410,615, 
Patented Sept, l0, 1889. 
f 
es 
a1 
1. f 
c 
1. 
- 
- 2 - 1 
|-N4 - V 
St. 
- - - -W-------- 
 
- - -- 
/- = 
-- - -------- 
------------ 
- 
2 
rvzwassa's r- 
x ck, C9-1-1-c---ee 
O-75 c2a- 
AWVAW202 
, a C2, ... ea 
212torpeep 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer. Washingtor, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPII STOATE, OF OXFORD, MISSISSIPPI. 
CULTIVATOR AND HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410,615, dated September 10, 1889. 
Application filed June 10, 1889, Serial No,313,799, (No model.) 
To all whom it nagy concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH STOATE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Oxford, 
in the county of Lafayette and State of Mis 
sissippi, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in a Combined Cultivator and 
Harrow; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in a 
combined harrow and cultivator, the object 
of which is to finely pulverize the soil and 
leave it in a condition for forming a seed-bed 
for Small grain of various kinds, and it may 
also be used for cultivating growing crops 
and destroying the growth of weeds, &c.; and 
it consists of certain novel features, hereinaf 
ter described and claimed, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which 
are to be considered part of this application, 
in which similar letters of reference denote 
corresponding parts in both the views. 
Figure 1 is a top view, while Fig. 2 is a 
perspective front view. 
Referring to the various parts of my inven 
tion, I provide a frame consisting of the cen 
ter beam A, to the rear end of which I attach 
at right angles the end piece (I. Springing 
from the under sides of these two parts of the 
frame are arranged at suitable distance from 
each other the inwardly-inclined teeth G. 
Projecting from each side of the front end 
of center beam A are eyebolts F, which are 
intended to engage with similar bolts on the 
inner side of the front end of the side beams 
B B, and in Such a manner pivotally connect 
these various parts forming the frame of my 
cultivator and harrow. 
From the upper side of the end piece ct, ex 
tends the adjusting-standard c, provided with 
a hole, the object of which will be hereinaf 
ter referred to. 
On the upper sides of the real ends of out 
Ward pieces B Bare placed eyebolts ff, which 
are intended to engage with loops formed on 
the outer end of adjusting-levers (ld, the in 
ner ends of which are provided with a series 
of holes for the purpose of receiving bolt A, 
arranged in the upright standard c. The 
side beams B B are also provided with a se 
ries of rearwardly-inclined teeth G. G., and 
further provided at their rear and front ends 
with adjustable shovels or blades DID. These 
shovels or blades are attached to the frame 
by means of suitably-provided journals and 
journal-boxes, such journals passing entirely 
through the frame and extending above suf 
ficiently to provide a means for attaching 
the adjustable levers O O, the free ends of 
which levers resting in suitably-provided 
ratchets J J. 
Attached to the inner sides of the side 
beams B B are handles E. E., Suitably con 
nected and additionally secured by uprights 
6, 8, 
It will thus be seen that I have provided a 
pivotally-connected frame which permits the 
independent movement of the inner and Outer 
parts of such frames, the object of which is 
to enable the harrow and cultivator to readily 
conform to the varying conditions of the sur 
face of the ground. 
It will further be observed that I have pro 
vided for the ready and easy adjustment of 
the width of my improved harrow, as such a 
feature is very desirable in cultivating roWs 
of growing crops of varying widths. 
In operation the bolt H can be withdrawn 
and the harrow widened at its rear end to any 
preferred width, when the adjusting-levers 
upon each side of the adjusting-bar care so 
arranged that the holes provided therein will 
coincide with the hole in the standard c, when 
the bolt II may be inserted and secured. 
The shovels or blades D may also be ad 
justed at varying angles by means of levers 
O O and ratchets JJ, as will be readily un 
derstood. 
The transversely-arranged piece Ct. On the 
rear of center beam at is additionally secured 
and braced by means of braces a'. 
IIaving described my invention, what I claim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The pivotally-connected yielding frame for 
harrows and cultivators, consisting of the cen 
ter beam A, to the rear end of which is secured 
the transverse end piece (, by braces C'C', the 
side beams BIB, the front ends of which are 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
2 
410,615 
pivotally connected to the front end of the 
center beam A, while their rear ends are in- in presence of two witnesses. 
clined outwardly and adjustably secured to 
the standard c on the end piece a by means 
of inwardly-reaching levers did, while to each 
end of beams B B are attached the shovels D Witnesses: 
D, and the levers O O and ratchets J J, for 
controlling such shovels, as set forth. 
F. S. LEAVELL, 
S. L. RIVERS. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
JOSEPH STOATE. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410715.txt	No Model.) 
No. 410,715, 
 
s 
A MILLER. 
EWAPORATING APPARATUS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 10, 1889. 
A. 
t 
F-H 
11 
V w 
// 
Y --- - 1 
1 
, 
, 
; 9 
A%dz2esses. 
C 
(No Model.) 
A, MILLER, 
--- 
EWAPORATING APPARATUS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 410,715, 
 
s 
Patented Sept. 10, 1889. 
//7/zzesses. 
(No Model.) 
A, MILLER. 
EWAPORATING APPARATUS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 410,715, 
 
Patented Sept. 10, 1889. 
X 
ei f 
as S 
8. 
S St. E. 
a 
AHSHIRSA 
S-II I R 
E 
SN 
(No Model.) 
A. MILLER. 
EWAPORATING APPARATUS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 410,715, 
Patented Sept. 10, 1889. 
 
77%zzey say: 
Azeeza 
N. PETERs, Piloto-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER MILLER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
ROBERT DEELEY, OF SAME PLACE. 
EVAPORATING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410,715, dated September 10, 1889. 
Application filed February 21, 1887, Renewed July 20, 1888, Serial No. 280,572, (No model.) 
55 
To ald Zuh-On it 7) (ty conce77. 
Beit known that I, ALEXANDER MILLER, of 
the city and county of New York, in the State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Evaporating Apparatus, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to evaporating appa 
ratus which is of the same general class as 
that shown in my Letters Patent No. 357,404, 
dated February 8, 1887-that is to say, the 
apparatus in its most complete form com 
prises a number of upright closed evaporat 
ing pans or vessels connected in series for 
multiple effect, the first pan having its heat 
ing-drum supplied with live steam and the 
last pan having its Vapor-outlet communicat 
ing with the atmosphere; but certain fea 
tures of my invention relate to the construc 
tion of the individual pans, and may be em 
ployed even When a single pan is used for 
evaporation. The vapor - Outlet of the last 
pan of the series usually communicates with 
the atmosphere through the heating-drum of 
a heater, which is preferably constructed in a 
similar manner to one of the pans, and in 
which the liquor is raised nearly to a boiling 
point by the heat of the vapor emanating 
from the contents of the last pan. Such an 
apparatus, although having the advantages 
resulting from multiple effect, differs from 
the ordinary sligar-evaporating apparatus in 
having a pressure maintained in the pans, or 
in all except the last pan of the Series, greater 
than the atmosphere, instead of having a vac 
uum maintained in the several pans; and 
my invention may be employed for producing 
by evaporation a Solid precipitant of any kind 
which will not be injured by heat due to a 
pressure of steam much above the atmosphere. 
The invention, however, is more particularly 
intended for use in the evaporation of Salt, 
In the operation of apparatus connected in 
the manner described, and Where the last pan 
communicates with the atmosphere, there is 
a loss of heat from each pall to the next pan 
of the series, due to the heat which is taken 
off by the precipitant and the loss by radia 
tion; but the heat which is dissipated by both 
these sources is wholly insignificant as com 
pared to the heat which passes off in vapor 
from the contents of each pan. As is well 
known, every pound of vapor carries with it 
about eleven hundred units of heat, and as 
for every pound of salt made there must be 
evaporated about three and one-half pounds 
of water, it follows that for each pound of salt 
about three thousand eight hundred and fifty 
units of heat are carried off in vapor, while 
the salt itself carries off only about fifty units 
of heat; hence it will be seen that with closed 
pans connected in the manner described the 
greater portion of the heat carried off by the 
vapor from one pan is utilized for heating the 
next pan. Inasmuch as there is a slight loss 
of heat in each pan by radiation and by the 
heat carried off with the precipitant, it fol 
lows that to boil the contents of the last pan 
of the series under atmospheric pressure 
steam must be supplied to heat the drum of 
the first pan of a temperature sufficient to 
boil the contents of that pan under a pressure 
considerably above the atmosphere, and the 
temperature and consequent pressure in the 
pans of the series will decrease from the first 
to the second, and SO on proportionately to 
the quantity of heat lost by radiation and 
carried off with the precipitant. 
One object of my invention is to provide a 
pan of such construction that, while the ebulli 
tion throughout the main portion of the body 
of liquor will be active, the liquor in the 
lower part of the pan will be kept without 
violent ebullition and the precipitant be 
given ample opportunity for depositing in 
the bottom of the pan. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide a heater or combination of heaters 
whereby the brine or other liquor after be 
ing preliminarily heated and raised nearly to 
a boiling-point by the vapors emanating from 
the contents of the last pan will be sub 
jected to such further heat from steam as is 
necessary to cause the sulphate of lime and 
other impurities to deposit before the brine 
passes to the evaporating pan or pans. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide for the continuous delivery from, an 
outlet-nozzle at the bottom of each pain of 
the salt or other precipitant, and for convey 
ing away such precipitant, causing it to drain 
75 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
410,715 
of brine and also to be dried before it reaches 
a point of delivery. 
The invention consists in novel combina 
tions of parts and features of construction, 
which are hereinafter described, and pointed 
out in the claims, whereby the desired ob 
jects are attained. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of an apparatus embodying my 
invention, and comprising four evaporating 
pans connected for multiple effect, and two 
heaters in which the liquor is heated before 
passing to the pans. Fig. 2 is a plan of the 
apparatus. Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation 
upon about the plane indicated by the dotted 
line ac ac, Fig. 2, showing in section the last 
evaporating-pan of the Series, the two heat 
ers, and the delivery and conveying apparatus 
of the last pan. Fig. 4 is a sectional eleva 
tion of a heater of modified form which I may 
employ. FigS. 5 and 6 are respectively a plan 
and longitudinal Section of portions of a con 
veying-apron, one of which may be employed 
for conveying away the precipitant delivered 
from each pan. Figs. 7 and 8 are correspond 
ing views of an apron of modified form; and 
Fig. 9 is a vertical section of one of the pans, 
A' for example, in a plane at right angles to 
the plane of section, Fig. 3. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A A' A' A' designate a series of pans or 
closed vessels, here shown as four in number, 
and which are connected for multiple effect, 
as I shall soon describe. These may be of 
cast-iron or other metal, and have conical or 
inverted bottoms A", from each of which leads 
an outlet-nozzle A, provided with a suitable 
valve or gate b. I have also shown connected 
with the series of pans a double heater or two 
heaters B IB, the internal construction of 
which is shown in Fig. 3. Brine or other 
liquor may be supplied to the several pans 
A A' A' A through branch pipes c, leading 
from a main pipe C, and provided each with 
a valve c', and the supply may be either con 
: 
tinuous or interrupted. 
Turning now to Fig. 3, it will be observe 
that in the pan (and all the pans may be con 
structed similarly) is a heating-drum D, which 
is cylindric and has its axis extending trans 
versely across the pan. The drum contains 
and is filled with tubes d, which extend par 
allel with its axis across the pan, and both 
the drum D and its tubes d are inclined to 
the horizontal. In the side and, in this ex 
ample of my invention, in each side of the 
pan is an opening b', which is as large or 
larger than the drum D, and which is closed 
by a removable door or cover b. 
It will 
therefore be seen that when the doors or 
covers b are removed ready access may be 
had to the tubes d of the heating-drum for 
cleaning them by means of a flue-brush, and 
the drum itself may, if desired, be removed 
through such opening. 
d' designates the vapor-pipe through which 
- 
vapor passing from the vapor-outletbof one 
pan is conducted to the interior of the heat 
ing-drum D of the next pan, and such vapor 
circulating through the heating-drum D and 
around the tubes d is condensed and trans 
mits its heat through the tubes. The ar 
rangement of the drums D in a position in 
clined to the horizontal causes a very rapid 
circulation of liquor through the tubes from 
the lower to the upper ends thereof, and in 
as much as the diameter of the pan A is con 
siderably greater than the diameter of the 
drum D arranged therein, ample space is af 
forded at the sides of the drum for circula 
tion past it from the upper to the lower por 
tions of the pan. 
For increasing the effect of the vapors en 
tering through the inlet d', I have repre 
sented in the drum D diaphragms d, the first 
of which extends from the top of the drum 
nearly to the bottom thereof, and the second 
of which extends from the bottom nearly to 
the top thereof. These diaphragms cause the 
entering vapors to take a course indicated by 
the arrows in Fig. 3 and to make contact 
with the entire surface of the heating-tubes d. 
In Figs. 1 and 2, E designates the steam 
inlet pipe, whereby steam from an outside 
Source is delivered to heat the drum D of the 
first pan A; and E' E E designate pipes or 
connections whereby the vapors emanating 
from the contents of each pan of the series 
are conducted from the vapor-outlet b of that 
pan to the vapor-inlet d', communicating with 
the drum of the next pan. 
Turning again to Fig. 3, it will be seen that 
the heating-drum D of each pan has a drip 
pipe di leading from its bottom at the lower 
end, and through which water of condensa 
tion may be delivered, and an air-vent pipe 
d leading from its top at the upper end, and 
through which any air carried into the drum 
with the vapors will escape, these pipes being 
both provided with suitable valves. The 
heat of the vapors in the drum D will produce 
an active circulation through the tubes d of 
the drum and the violent ebullition of the 
brine or other liquor in the pan, and the main 
body of the liquor will be in such violent ebul 
lition as to prevent the proper deposit of the 
salt or other precipitant. To provide for such 
deposit of precipitant, I have shown in the 
lower part of the pan a partition b, whereby 
there is formed in the lower part of the pan a 
substantially separate compartment b, which 
communicates with the portion of the pan 
above the partition b' only by a restricted 
opening b'. In this example of my invention 
the partition b is of conical form, and the re 
stricted opening b is afforded around its en 
tire edge, and the conical partition is Sup 
ported by the frame b within the pan. While 
the body of liquor above the conical partition 
b' will be in active state of ebullition the liq 
uor in the compartment b below such parti 
tion will be in a state of comparative quies 
cence, and therefore ample opportunity will be 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
TIO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
(5 
35 
45 
55 
 
410,715 
3 
O 
25 
. 3O 
35 
45 
55 
afforded for the deposit of salt or other pre 
cipitant in the bottom of the pan below the 
conical partition b. 
From the vapor-outlet U of the last pan of the 
series A* the vapors escape through a pipe E. 
This pipe does not communicate directly with 
the atmosphere, but with a heating-drum D, 
arranged in the first heater B. The casing of 
the first heater B has at opposite sides open 
ings b', closed by doors or covers b, and the 
drum D, which is arranged in an inclined po 
sition opposite these openings b, contains 
inclined heating-tubes d and diaphragms d, 
and the pipe E, from the vapor-outlet b of the 
lastpan of the series, connects directly with the 
vapor-inlet d', leading to the heating-drum D. 
In this example of the invention, therefore, 
the heating-drum D and its appurtenances 
within the heater B are substantially similar 
to those arranged within the several pans A 
A' A' A', and the heating-drum D in the heater 
has a drip d for water of condensation, and 
the air-vent d, similar to the several pans. 
It will therefore be seen that through the 
heating-drum D of the first heater B the va 
por-outlet U of the last pan A of the series 
communicates with the atmosphere, and the 
quantity and temperature of steam admitted 
through the inlet E to the heating-drum D of 
the first pan of the series should be such that 
the Vapor passing from the last pan A* to the 
heating-drum of the heater B will be suffi 
cient to raise the brine or other liquor in the 
heater B hearly or quite to the boiling-point. 
If desired, an air-pump might be connected 
with the air-vent d of the heating-drum D in 
the first heater B, and by such pump the air 
may be exha tasted from the drum and a par 
tial Vacuum maintained therein, thus increas 
ing the range of temperature from the first 
pan to the last pan of the series. In this ex 
ample of my invention the second heater B' 
is formed in the same integral structure as 
the heater B, and they communicate through 
a Self-closing valve d, opening outward or 
downward from the heater B. Brine Orother 
liquor may be pumped into the heater B 
through an inlet-pipe B, and is delivered 
from the heater B' through the pipe C to the 
several pans, as before described. The body 
of the heater B has in opposite sides open 
ings b, closed by doorst, and opposite these 
openings is an inclined heating-drum D, con 
taining heating-tubes d and diaphragms di, 
the drum and its arrangement in the heater 
l3 being in this example of my invention simi 
lar to the drums D of the several pans and 
the heater B. The drum D in the heater B' 
may have drip and vent pipes did, as before 
described, and to it is supplied live steam 
through a pipe d'. The two heaters B B may 
be maintained full of brine or other liquor, 
and after the liquor is preliminarily heated in 
the heater B, or, in other words, after it has 
absorbed in Said heater all the heat of the 
vapors emanating from the last pan A, the 
liquor is raised in the heater B to a very 
much higher temperature, which is sufficient 
to cause it to deposit in said heater B' the 
sulphate of lime and other impurities and 
avoid the presence of such impurities in the 
evaporating-pans either wholly or to a great 
degree. The heater B' has a discharge or 
outlet pipe B, which is provided with a gate 
or valve ty, and which affords provision for 
blowing off the impurities from the heater. 
Although the brine or liquor in the heater B' 
is raised to a temperature much above the 
boiling-point, vapor will not be generated 
therefrom, because the heater is filled with 
liquor. This superheating of the liquor with 
out permitting the generation of steam there 
from does not, however, result in any loss of 
heat, because as soon as the liquor passes 
into the evaporating-pains its pressure is at 
once reduced and an amount of vapor pro 
portionate to the temperature of the liquor 
is instantly generated from the liquor. 
Beneath the outlet-nozzle A of each pan is 
arranged a conveyer whereby the salt or other 
precipitant is conveyed away, and is prefer 
ably in its transit allowed to drain and then 
also to dry. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 I have shown two of the 
pans only as provided with conveye's F in 
order to reduce the amount of drawing; but 
it will be understood that there is a similar 
conveyer for each evaporating-pan. The con 
veyer here represented consists of an endless 
belt or apron, which passes around rollers or 
cylindersff", and which may be noved by a 
belt running over pulleysf' upon a shaft of 
one of the rollers f. This apron or conveyer 
F may be of any suitable character which Will 
cause it to hold and carry the Salt or other 
precipitant to the desired point, and also pro 
vide for the drainage from the precipitant of 
the small quantity of brine or liquor delivered 
with it. 
I have in Figs. 5 to 8 represented two con 
structions of the apron which may be elm 
ployed for the purpose. The apron shown in 
Figs. 5 and 6 is composed of alternate sections 
if f', the sections f being of wood or other 
material and imperforate, and the sections f" 
being of wire-gauze, perforated metal, Ol' other 
reticulated or foraminous material. The liquor 
drains off from such portions of the precipi 
tant as are supported on the imperforate por 
tions of the apron f, and the brine passes 
through the apron and into a receptacle from 
which it can be conveyed in order that it can 
be again introduced into the evaporating 
pans. The imperforate and perforate sections 
ff of the aprons shown in Figs, 5 and (3 
may be hinged together at f, so as to readily 
pass upon the drums or rollersff", and the 
apron may have at the sides flanges f", which 
prevent the flow of brine and the precipitant 
over the edges of the apron and confine the 
precipitant between the sides of the apron. 
In Figs. 7 and S I have represented an 
apron composed of alternate sections f of 
imperforate material and intermediate Sec 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
I O5 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
410,715 
3. 
25 
35 
55 
tions f of wire-gauze, perforated metal, or 
other suitable material. In this example of 
my invention the apron is flexible in the di 
rection of its length, and is provided with 
flanges f', as before described, and this apron 
is secured to endless chains f, whereby it is 
carried and through which motion is trans 
mitted to it. In its upper travel the apron 
or conveyer F supports the precipitant, and 
near the receiving point or nozzle A, I have 
represented a drainage-box G, which may have 
a suitable outlet f for liquor. By the time 
the precipitant supported on the apron F has 
passed the drainage-box G the major propor 
tion of the brine or liquor has been freed 
from the precipitant by drainage, and in its 
later travel the conveyer or apron F passes 
through a drying-chamber or heating-box H, 
which is provided with a suitable outlet pipe 
or flue h for vapors. 
Within the drying-chamber or heating-box 
Hare arranged steam-coils h", which may be 
supplied with steam by pipes h, and which 
are arranged immediately under or both im 
mediately under and over the conveyer or 
apron F in its upper travel. By these means 
the salt or other precipitant is materially 
dried in its travel upon the apron or conveyer 
F and finally deposited in the box I, the pre 
cipitant being removed from the apron or con 
veyer by a brush or otherwise. 
The construction of the endless sifting or 
straining aprons of alternating imperforated 
and perforated or reticulated sections, as 
hereinabove described, is an improved fea 
ture of my invention. The imperforated sec 
tions carry, strengthen, and sustain the perfor 
ated or reticulated sections; but beyond this 
there is another advantage. Some Salt is un 
avoidably lost on a perforated apron by es 
caping through the perforations; but there is 
less loss in an apron having alternating per 
forated and imperforated Sections, though 
such an apron enables the straining or drain 
ing to be performed as effectively as upon an 
apron which is perforated throughout its 
whole length, because while the salt which 
falls upon the imperforated portion is drained 
thereon and the liquor drained from it es 
capes through the perforated portions none 
of the salt which falls upon the imperforated 
portion is lost. 
It will be observed that the outlet-nozzle 
A5 from each pan is very narrow or has small 
dimension in a direction lengthwise of the 
conveyer or apron F, and in its other dimen 
sion is only as wide as the conveyer, apron, or 
belt F, as is shown in Fig. 3. 
Instead of a double heater or tWO heaters 
B B', as shown in Figs. 3 and 1, may employ 
a single heater of the construction shown in 
Fig. 4. This heater B is in its internal con 
struction and as regards the heating-drum D 
in all respects like the heater B shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3, and the same letters of refer 
ence apply thereto. At the bottom of this 
heater is an outlet B, through which the Sul 
 
75 
95 
OO 
phate of lime or other impurities may be re 
moved. The vapor-outlet b from the last 
pan A' of the series communicates by a pipe 
E with the vapor-inlet d' of the heater-drum 
D. (Shown in Fig. 4.) In connection with 
this heater I also employ an injector J, (shown 
in Fig. 4.) having a pipe i, through which 
live steam is admitted, and the flow of live 
steam through the pipei and the space i? 
around the vapor-nozzle i* induces a flow of 
vapor, and the live steam, mingled with the 
Vapor from the last evaporating-pan, passes 
into the drum D of the heater B and raises 
the temperature of the brine or other liquor 
therein very much higher than would be the 
case if there were used in the said heating 
chamber only the vapors from the last pan of 
the series. The live steam which is added by 
this injector serves to heat the brine or liquor 
in the heater B (shown in Fig. 4) to such a 
degree that the Sulphate of lime and other 
impurities will deposit therein. 
I am aware that it is not new to arrange 
Within a closed evaporating-pan a heating 
drum having a transverse axis, and do not 
claim such a feature, broadly, as of my in 
vention. I am also aware that it is not new 
to purify brine before conducting it to an 
evaporating-pan, and I only seek to cover the 
particular combination of parts whereby I 
accomplish that result. I am also aware that 
in connection with a number of evaporating 
pans a trough and screw conveyer have been 
employed for conducting mixed salt and 
brine to a series of centrifugal machines, and 
that a similar trough, and screw conveyer 
have been used for conducting the dried salt 
from the centrifugal drier. I am also aware 
that in combination with the ordinary salt 
evaporating pans an apron not having retic 
ulated or perforated portions has been used for 
conveying salt to the ends of the pan, and that 
a similar but transverse apron has been used 
to convey salt to a place of delivery. I 
do not claim any of these features, broadly, 
as of my invention, but only seek to cover 
the combinations of parts by me shown and 
described. The sieving-aprons form a legiti 
mate combination with the pans having out 
lets at the bottoms, because they provide for 
removing precipitant at any time during the 
operation without stopping the operation, and 
for draining the salt or precipitant during 
transit from the pan. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with an upright closed 
evaporating-pananda heating-drum arranged 
therein and containing tubes for circulation 
of liquor, of a partition arranged in the pan 
and forming below it in the lower part of the 
pan a compartment which communicates with 
the portion of the pan above the partition 
only through a restricted but uninterrupted 
and constantly-open aperture in the parti 
tion, whereby violent ebullition below the 
partition will be prevented and the precipi 
II5 
I 25 
410,715 
5 
tant allowed to deposit, substantially as 
herein described. 
2. The combination, with an upright closed 
evaporating-pan and aheating-drum arranged 
therein and containing tubes for circulation, 
of the conical hood or partition b, extending 
nearly across the pan, and affording between 
its edges and the Wall of the pan a restricted 
opening t), substantially as herein described. 
3. The combination, with an evaporating 
pan, as A, and a heating - drum arranged 
therein and containing tubes for circulation, 
of two heaters B B", connected for the passage 
of liquor from one to the other of them, and 
each provided with a heating-drum contain 
ing tubes for circulation, a pipe E, connecting 
the vapor-outlet of the pan with the heating 
drum of the heater B, and a pipe d', for sup 
plying the heating-drum of the heater B with 
steam, a pipe B", for feeding the first heater 
with liquor, and a pipe C, for conducting hot 
liquor from the second heater to the pan, sub 
stantially as herein described. 
4. The combination, with an upright closed 
evaporating-pan A and a heating-drum al 
ranged therein and containing tubes for cir 
culation, of the heater B' and tubes d therein 
for circulation, the said heater having its liq 
uor-inlet at the top and its liquor-outlet near 
the bottom, and being provided at the bottom 
with an outlet B, furnished with a valve or 
gate, and serving for the removal of impuri 
ties from the heater while the apparatus is in 
operation, substantially as herein described. 
5. The combination, with an evaporating 
pan A, and a heating-drum arranged therein 
and containing tubes for circulation, of the 
25 
35 
45 
55 
two heaters B B', arranged one above the 
other and having a communicating opening 
controlled by a valve d', feed and delivery 
pipes BC for the liquor, heating-drums con 
taining tubes for circulation and arranged in 
the heaters, a pipe connecting the vapor 
outlet of the pan with the drum of the first 
heater B, and the pipe for supplying steam to 
the drum of the second heater B, substan 
tially as herein described. 
6. The combination, with an upright evap 
orating-pan having at the bottom an outlet 
nozzle A, and the heating-drum arranged in 
the pan, of an endless conveying and sieving 
Or straining aplon arranged below the outlet 
nozzle and receiving precipitant therefrom, 
the nozzle being contracted in a direction 
lengthwise of the apron and having a width 
nearly equal the Width of the apron, substan 
tially as herein described. 
7. The endless sieving or straining apron 
herein described, composed of alternate im 
perforate and perforated or reticulated sec 
tions and having flanges at the sides, substan 
tially as herein set forth. 
8. The combination, with an endless con 
veying and sieving or straining apron for re 
ceiving precipitant, of a drainage - box al 
ranged beneath the apron in its upper travel 
and near the receiving end, and a heated dry 
ing-chamber, through which the apron passes 
after passing the drainage-box, substantially 
as herein described. 
ALEX. MILLER. 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
IIENRY J. MCBRIDE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410815.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WENDELL P. TARBELL OF MILFORD, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
CABINET-CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410,815, dated September 10, 1889. 
Application filed September 19, 1888, Serial No, 285,781, (No model.) 
I. ? 
25 
To all typhi, ??, i? ??? ????ce7?: 
Be it known that I, WENDELLP.TARBELL, 
of Milford, in the county of Hillsborough and 
State of New Hampshire, have invented a new 
and Improved Cabinet-Clamp, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had to the annexed drawings, forming a part 
thereof, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
cabinet-clamp, and Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
Section. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in both views. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
clampfor the use of cabinet-makers and others, 
by which pressure may be applied to the edge 
of the Work without the necessity of placing 
the clamping-screw exactly opposite the center 
of resistance. 
The invention consists in details of con 
struction hereinafter described and claimed. 
The head-piece A is attached to the bar B 
by means of a joint-bolt C, which passes 
through the head-piece and into a longi 
tudinal hole bored in the bar B. In a trans 
verse hole a. in the bar Bis placed the nut b, 
which is received on the bolt C. The head 
piece A projects beyond one edge of the bar 
B, and is kept from turning by a dowel c in 
serted in the head-piece and in the end of the 
bar B. To give the head-piece a suitable lev 
erage, the bolt C is placed near the front edge 
d of the bar B. 
In the head-piece A, at a suitable distance 
from the bar B, is formed a threaded hole e, 
which is parallel with the said bar B, and to 
which is fitted an axially-bored hand-screw D. 
A jaw E is held in contact with the front edge 
of the bar B by the metallic strips fattached 
to the jaw and passing around the bar B. 
In the jaw E, opposite the end of the tubul 
lar screW D, is inserted a screW-threadled rod 
g, which enters the bore of the screw D, and 
upon the screw-rod g is placed a milled nut 
h between the end of the screw ID and the 
jaw E. The thread of the rod g is made finer 
than that of the screw D, so that the said 
screw D and rod g, in conjunction with the 
nuts in which they turn, may act as a differ 
5o ential screw, as will presently be described. 
45 
35 
In the side of the bar B, and projecting 
laterally therefrom, is inserted a screw i, 
which acts as a stop, limiting the motion of 
the jaw E, thus preventing the screw-rod g 
from becoming disengaged from the screw D. 
In the back of the bar Bare formed notches 
j, preferably of semicircular shape, and to the 
body of the bar is fitted the jaw F, having an 
oblique mortise k for receiving the said bar 
B. The mortise k is enlarged at diagonally 
opposite ends by removing the material form 
ing acute angles respectively between the up 
per and lower oblique sides of the mortise 
and the upper and lower surfaces of the bar 
B. In the said jaw F is inserted a rivet l, 
which passes through the mortise and is adapt 
ed to engage the semicircular notches i of the 
bar B, 
To the edge of the jaw F, at the front of 
the bar B, is secured a right-angled spring m, 
which extends into the mortise k and bears 
against the face of the bar B. 
By tipping the jaw F toward the head. A 
the rivet lis disengaged from the notch in the 
back of the barB, when the jaw may be moved 
to any desired point on the bar, and upon re 
leasing the jaw the spring in causes it to re 
gain its normal position at right angles with 
the bar B, and with the rivetl in engagement 
with one of the notches i, and with the jaw 
bearing against the rear edge of the bar B. 
The work to be clamped is placed between 
the jaws E. F., and the jaw E is moved for 
ward into contact with the work by turning 
the nuth, the said nut being in contact with 
and bearing against the end of the screw D. 
Pressure is brought to bear upon the work by 
turning the screw D and nut h simultane 
ously, the nut h being carried by frictional 
contact with the end of the screw D. The 
coarse and fine threads of the two screws act 
together as a differential screw after the well 
known manner, and enable the operator to 
bring a heavy pressure to bear upon the work 
in the clamp, 
The metal strap f serves to hold the jaw E 
from being tipped up or forced away from 
the bar B, and the rivete, which holds the 
strap to the said jaw E, also strengthens the 
jaw, preventing it from splitting, and with 
t 
55 
75 
90 
95 
I OG 
2 
410,815 
headl and extending into the end of the clamp 
bar, substantially as specified. 
2. In a cabinet-clamp, the combination of 
the clamp-bar B, provided with the head A, 15 
the axially-bored screw D, inserted in the 
said head, the sliding jaw E, the threaded 
rod g, and the nuth, substantially as specified. 
WWEINIDELIL IP. TAIRIBELIL. 
WWitnesses: 
J. MI. TARBELL, 
J. M. BARTLETT, 
the screw g inserted in the jaw the clamping 
of any object, even if off the center of the 
screw, can be accomplished without cramp 
ing or the bending of the screw (, both ends 
of the screw being well supported. 
IIaving thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In a cabinet-clamp, the combination of 
the head A, the clamping-bar 13, the joint 
bolt C, passing through the head and into the 
clamp-bar, and the dowel c, inserted in the 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US410915.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 410,915, 
F. M. MONTELIUS, 
RAILWAY GATE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Sept. 10, 1889. 
W 
 
 
7 Ay 
Alaza A. 
a 
seasons 
 
s 
 
 
(No Model.) 
F. M. MONTELIUS, 
RAI, WAY GATE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 410,915, 
Patented Sept. 10, 1889. 
628)if vacasca 
 
Z.70.7%azeedezcay. 
311-uc11.fot 
stills (litot 11 c 18 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK M. MONTELIUS, OF WEST PERRY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RALWAY GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 410.91 5, dated September 10, 1889. 
Application filed June 27, 1889, Serial No. 315,834, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK M. MONTE 
LIUS, a citizen of the United States of America, 
residing at WestPerry, in the county of Snyder 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Rail 
road-Gates; and Idohereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to letters or 
figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Myinvention has reference to gates for rail 
ways and other roads; and it consists in the 
improved construction hereinafter described 
and set forth, whereby a simple and effective 
arrangement is provided that will maintain 
the gate or gates closed at all times except 
when a train or conveyance moving along the 
track or road from either direction approaches 
the point of location of said gate, at which 
period the gate or gates will automatically 
open to present an unobstructed way and 
positively close after the passage of the said 
train or conveyance. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view of a section of railway-track, 
showing my improved gate and its operating 
appliances in position. Fig. 2 is a side view 
showing the position of the parts when the 
gates are SWung open; and Fig. 3 is a detail 
View, in perspective, showing the construction 
of the operating-bar when the improvements 
are used in connection with an ordinary road 
Way. 
In Figs. 1 and 2, A designates the longitudi 
nal sleepers supporting the ties B, upon which 
are secured the rails C. C. Upon the inner 
side of each sleeper A are pivotally secured 
the lower ends of a pair of short vertical arms 
C. C., Which are arranged some distance from 
each other. 
Along the outside of each rail C C, but lo 
cated in close proximity thereto, is a longi 
tudinal bar D, which is right-angled in cross 
section to present the vertical web b and 
horizontal flange c. The web binclines at the 
side of the rail at each end of its bar D, while 
the flange c likewise inclines, but merges into 
the web before the latter terminates. The 
extremities of the webs bb depending below 
the rails are connected by transverse brace 
rods d, which not only serve to brace said 
bars D rigidly in position, but insure their 
positive relative movement at all times. 
On one of the ties B, at each side of the 
track, is mounted a vertical standard E, en 
larged at its lower portion to form a shoulder 
e to support the lower hinge-loop f of the ad 
jacent gate-section F. 
The upper hinge-loop g is extended to forml 
a perforated ear h, through which passes the 
upper end of the vertical free portion of a 
torsional spring G, rigidly secured to the tie 
at the base of the standard E. 
Near one of the ends of each Webb, and 
from the outer side of the same, horizontally 
projects an angular arm i, the outer end of 
which is provided with a vertical eye i, cen 
trally cut away to receive the reduced eye k, 
located at one end of a rod I, connected at its 
other end with the bottom bar of the adjacent 
gate-section F. The eyesi and k are pivot 
ally connected by a pin l. 
It will be noticed that each arm and its 
connections are located oppositely With re 
spect to the other arm. 
In operation the torsion-springs hold the 
gate-sections in a closed position. Now, when 
a train approaches from either direction, the 
treads of the wheels pass upon the inclined 
portions of the flanges of the operating-bars 
and depress the latter, so that they descend 
longitudinally, owing to their pivotal Support 
on the arms a. This descent of the operating 
bars not only permits the free movement of 
the wheels over the rails, but the longitudinal 
movement imparted to the arms I occasions 
them through the medium of the rods I to 
open the gates against the torsion action of 
their springs. After the passage of the train 
of course the springs effect the closing of the 
gates. 
In view of the fact that no limiting means 
are provided for the hinges and the operating 
bars are connected to move in unison the 
gates will swing open in a direction corre 
sponding with the movement of the train, thus 
avoiding any liability of the sections F being 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
95 
OC) 
410,915 
struck by the train and damaged, and hence 
allowing comparatively short operating-bars 
to be used. 
IBy alternating the location of the arms 
and their connections the strain exerted in 
opening the gates is divided, irrespective of 
the direction in which the train is moving. 
In the event of the improvement being used 
in connection with an ordinary roadway the 
longitudinal bar has bolted to its flange a 
plank or plate II, Fig. 3, of a width sufficient 
to insure that the wheels of the vehicle shall 
pass upon and depress the same, so as to open 
the gate. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that the 
improvements are of a comparatively simple 
and inexpensive character as well as positive 
and automatic in operation. 
It will be noticed that the fianges ( not only 
insure the depression of their bars, but form 
guards to protect the pivots of the supporting 
bars from dust, ice, Snow, &c. 
On both sides of the roadway and gate-sec 
tions are located vertical posts J, which carry 
upper and lower yielding cushions nt, against 
which the gate-sections strike when thrown 
open, thus relieving said sections of all injury 
that might result from jar or concussion, be 
sides avoiding the strain upon the hinges that 
would be occasioned if no means were pro 
vided to prevent the gates from receiving an 
impetus more than sufficient to effect their 
openling. 
It will be noticed that the arrangement of 
parts is such that each Spring-bar not only 
serves to hold the gate normally in a closed 
position, but also elevates the operating-strip 
adjacent to the roadway. Further, the strips 
are connected to each other so as to move in 
unison, whereby either one of the springs will 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
6 : 
O 
operate both gates, and when said springs are 
inoperative the weight of the side strips will 
hold the gates normally open. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the vertical posts 
arranged on each side of the track or way and 
provided with torsional springs secured at 
their base, of a horizontally-swinging gate 
section hung on each post and provided with 
a projecting arm engaging said torsional 
Spring, horizontal pivoted Strips longitudi 
nally movable, as described, and carrying off 
sets, and a rod connecting the offset of each 
strip with the adjacent gate-section, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the vertical posts 
arranged on each side of the track or way and 
each provided with a torsional spring secured 
at its base, of a horizontally-swinging gate 
section hung on each post and provided with 
a projecting arm engaging said torsional 
spring, horizontal pivoted strips extending on 
either side of the closing-point of the gates, 
longitudinally movable, as described, and 
each provided with an offset located oppo 
sitely relative to the offset of the other strip, 
and oppositely-extending rods, each connect 
ing its offset to the adjacent gate-section, 
whereby said strips move in unison and when 
the springs are inoperative will hold the gate 
sections in an open position, Substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FREDERICK M. MONTELIUS. 
Witnesses: 
JONATHAN WORNER, 
REUBEN DREESE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411015.txt	(No Model.) 
J. DICK. 
CAMP BED. 
No. 41,015, 
Patented Sept. 17, 1889. 
 
 
wAAWSy 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN DICR, OF TORONTO, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
CAMP-BED, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,015, dated September 17, 1889. 
Application filed September 12, 1888, Serial No. 285,166, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, JOHN DICK, manufae 
turer, of the city of Toronto, in the county of 
York, in the Province of Ontario, Canada, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Camp-Beds, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in camp-beds; and it 
consists in the peculiar combinations and con 
struction of parts, all as more fully hereinaf 
ter described and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, partially 
broken away, of my improved camp-bed set 
ready for use. Fig. 2 is a view showing the 
manner of inserting the side rails of the frame 
into the fabric forming the stretcher. 
A represents the stretcher of the bed, which 
is preferably made of heavy linen canvas of 
two thicknesses sewed together to form a bag, 
both ends of which are preferably closed. 
One of the sides forming the said bag has two 
openings B made in it for the purpose of per 
mitting the insertion of the side rails C, and 
also of allowing the legs D to be connected to 
the side rails and project through the lower 
side of the stretcher A. 
It will be noticed that when the stretcher 
is expanded ready for use, as shown in Fig. 1, 
the full strength of the fabric is secured for 
holding the stretcher A to the side rails C. 
It therefore follows that it is practically im 
possible to tear off the stretcher from its 
frame. The construction, moreover, provides 
a space between the two thicknesses, which 
may be packed or stuffed with any suitable 
material to form a mattress, thereby avoiding 
the necessity of an under-blanket. In fact, 
the double thickness with the air-space left 
between the two will make the bed Without 
stuffing quite as comfortable as a common 
camp-bed made of a single thickness of ma 
terial and provided with an under-blanket. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
75 
E is a pillow attached to and supported by 
the uprights at a. This pillow, however, may 
sometimes be dispensed with by making one 
end of the fabric bag A narrower than the 
other end, the said narrow end, when the frame 
is inserted, being drawn tighter than the 
opposite end, as shown at E, the said fabric 
bag being held gradually less tight toward 
the opposite end, which is left partially loose, 
as shown ate, and sags a little, said narrower 
end being taut and higher serves as a con 
venient and comfortable pillow, and in this in 
stance, of course, the pillow E is not required. 
By making the legs D detachable from the 
side rails C, which latter may also be removed, 
the bag-shaped stretcher. A may be utilized 
for packing tents and other camping equi 
pages, which may be inserted through the 
openings B. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a camp-bed composed of a fabric bag A, folded 
and closed at its ends and edges with a space 
between the folds, and one of said folds formed 
with the transverse openings B at a point re 
mote from the ends, and a frame inserted in 
said openings and serving to stretch and Sup 
port said bag, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
2. The camp-bed described, consisting of 
the bag-shaped stretcher A, folded, as de 
scribed, and closed at the ends and edges, and 
one of said folds provided at a point remote 
from each end with the transverse openings 
B, the removable and detachable side rails C, 
inserted in said openings B, and the detach 
able legs D, all arranged and operating Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
JOHN DICK. 
Toronto, August 4, 1888. 
In presence of 
DONALD C. RIDOUT, 
CHARLES C. BALDWIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411115.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 411,115, 
I. P. WENDELL. 
PIPE COWERINC. 
Patented Sept. 17, 1889. 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ??? 
[-),N? ??*ZZZZZZZZZZZ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC P. WENDELL, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PI PE COVERN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,115, dated September 17, 1889. 
Application filed 0ctober 2, 1888, 
To all, whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, ISAACP. WENDELL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phil 
adelphia, in the county of Philadelphia, and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Non - Con 
ductor Coverings for Steam-Pipes, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention has relation to that form of 
non-conducting coverings for steam, hot-air, 
Or analogous pipes wherein the coverings con 
sist of semi-cylindrical shells or sections so 
constructed that when applied to the pipes an 
air-space is provided or formed between the 
pipes and the non-conductor covering; and it 
has for its object simplicity of construction of 
the shells or sections, so that they can read 
ily be affixed to the pipes and correspondingly 
removed, and which are composed of a com 
pound having asbestus and a suitable indu 
rating material as a basis to provide for the 
shells or sections being rigid without being 
frangible. 
My invention accordingly consists of the 
combinations, constructions, and arrange 
ments of parts, as hereinafter described in the 
Specification, and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is had to the accompanying draw 
ings, wherein Figure 1 is an elevation of part 
of a line of pipe and non-conductor covering 
therefor embodying my improvements. Fig. 
2 is a like view showing the covering in lon 
gitudinal section and the air-spaces between 
the pipe and covering. Fig. 3 is a like view 
showing the air-space filled up with loose as 
bestus or other non-conducting material. Fig. 
4 is a similar view showing the air-space be 
tween pipe and covering dispensed with. Fig. 
5 is a section on line 11, Fig. 3; and Fig. 6 is 
a like section on line 22, Fig. 1. 
A represents a line of steam, hot-air, or other 
like pipe, and B the non - conducting cover 
ing therefor, which is composed of lengths of 
semi-cylindrical shells or sections bb, having 
edge flanges b', with, preferably, bolts open 
ings b and bell-mouth ends b, by means of 
which the sections are secured to the pipes 
and flange-bolted together. In the bore of 
the sections are formed projecting transverse 
longitudinal or spirally-arranged ribs, lugs, 
pins, or other like projections C, to form a 
1 C) 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
Serial No. 286,974, (No model.) 
space D between the pipe A and its covering 
B, which serves as an air-space, if desired, to 
enhance the efficiency of the covering. The 
projections C in the bore of sections b b 
may be so arranged in relation to the coup 
ling ends b of the pipes that the air-spaces D 
for the lengths of covering-sections do notin 
tercommunicate, as shown in Fig. 3, in which 
case the projections C are in the form of 
semicircular transverse ribs. By making the 
projections C in the form of pins or lugs 
either transversely, horizontally, or otherwise 
arranged, as indicated in Fig. 6, however, 
said air-spaces will intercommunicate with 
One another. In any case the air spaces or 
chambers D between the pipe and covering 
do not communicate With the external air. 
If desired, the spaces or chambers D may 
be filled with loose or flock asbestus or other 
suitable non-conducting material, as indi 
cated at F, Fig. 3, to still further enhance the 
efficiency of the non-conducting covering. 
The non-conductor sections b b are made of 
asbestus combined with any suitable indu 
rating material as a base to make the non 
conductor coverings or sections comparatively 
stiff, inflexible, or hard, so that when flange 
bolted together they will not crack or other 
wise become impaired; but, if desired, the 
material employed to combine the basic in 
gredients may be such that the covering-sec 
tions, while flexible to a greater or less ex 
tent, yet are sufficiently tough in texture to 
prevent cracking when bolted together. 
If desired, the lugs C may be dispensed 
with, in which case the sections are in con 
tact with the pipe and said air-space is dis 
pensed with, as indicated in Fig. 4. 
If desired, any other suitable fastening may 
be substituted for the flange-and-bolt connec 
tion herein described. 
What I claim is-- 
1. Anon-conductor covering for steam-pipes 
or analogous fixtures, composed of semi-cy 
lindrical sections or shells having a bell-mouth 
at One end and edge flanges, and bolt-and-nut 
connections passing through said edge flanges, 
Substantially as set forth. 
2. Anon-conductor covering for steam-pipes 
Or analogous fixtures, consisting of semi-cy 
lindrical sections or shells having at one end 
95 
I OO 
411,115 
a bell-mouth and composed of asbestus and 
an indurating material as a base, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. Anon-conductor covering for steam-pipes 
and analogous fixtures, consisting of rigid 
semi-cylindrical sections or shells having at 
one end a bell-mouth and lugs or ribS C in 
their bore, and composed of asbestus and an 
indurating material as a base, Substantially 
as set forth. 
4. The rigid semi-cylindrical sections or 
shells b, having at one end a bell-mouth, lugs 
O 
C in their bore, and a filling of loose asbestus 
between said lugs and said sections, consisting 
of asbestus and an indurating material as a II 5 
base, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ISAACP, WENDELL, 
Witnesses: 
S.J. VAN STAVOREN, 
CHAS. F. VAN HORN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411215.txt	t No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. A. CHILDS & W. E. MUIR, 
SEED PLAN TER AND FERTILIZER DISTRIBUTER, 
No. 411,215, 
Patented Sept. 17, 1889, 
 
 
I I 
e 
 
 
 
iwiwers as 
es 
E EE 
E 
 
L II 
IIHF: 
/ 
 
 
--S--steena - Sir 
2. 
7 YSE; 24 
f 24% 
4-6-4-2 INVENTORS 
BY. 7%a. 
ATTORNEYS. 
Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. A. CHILDS & W. E. MUIR, 
SEED PLANTER AND FERTILIZER DISTRIBUTER, 
No. 4ll,215, 
Patented Sept. 17, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
23 
4% 
T in 
af. 3)E 
 
N 
 
 
M7 Y 
 
 
 
s 
a 
27 
ally 
WITNESSES : 
via faze. 
9te/ette.A. 
O , A. 
(7, - 
! E: IORS 
ATTORMEY 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J. A. CHILDS & W. E. MUIR. 
SEED PLANTER AND FERTILIZER DISTRIBUTER. 
No. 4ll 215, 
Patented Sept. 17, 1889. 
Z (Z. Y. 
 
 
 
A 
"ESA, 
cfield, 
(73, v-d 
f 
 
Ei; 
ses 
EEZ= 
26/ 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESSIE ALFRED CHILDS AND WILLIAM EDWARD MUIR, OF COUSHATTA, 
LOUISIANA 
SEED - PLAN TER AND FERTLIZERDISTRIBUTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,215, dated September 17, 1889. 
Application filed January 22, 1889, Serial No. 297,169, 
(No model) 
50 
55 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, JESSIEALFRED CHILDS 
and WILLIAM EDWARD MUTR, of Coushatta, 
in the parish of Red River and State of Louis 
iana, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Seed-Planters and Fertilizer-Distrib 
lutel's, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention is an improvement in seed 
planters and fertilizer - distributers; and it 
consists in certain features of construction 
and novel combinations of parts, as will be 
described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a top view; 
Fig. 2, a partial vertical longitudinal section 
of the machine. Fig. 3 is a vertical section 
of the machine on a somewhat smaller scale 
than Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a vertical cross-section. 
Fig. 5 is a detail view of the drill-boards. 
Fig. 6 is a detail plan view of the cover. 
Fig. 7 is a detail plan view of a part of the 
main frame, showing the slat-rods and the 
regulating-doors, with parts broken away to 
show how the said doors are stopped in their 
closed position. Fig. 8 is a detail part plan 
View of the main frame, showing filling-plates 
adjusted to position, as may be desired, when 
the machine is to be used as a drill; and Fig. 
9 shows a somewhat different form of shaft 
used in drilling in connection with the slat 
rods used therewith. 
The main frame has side bars A A, con 
nected by suitable cross-bars and adapted 
for the connection of a pole or thills for use 
With a double or single team. Cross-beams 
BB' extend between the side bars, the space 
between said beams forming what may be 
termed the discharge-opening, and being 
divided by a number of slat-rods C, extended 
between beams B B and arranged parallel 
to the sides of the machine. In the inner 
face of theside bars are formed guide-grooves 
C for the front and rear regulating-doors D, 
Which doors have near their inner ends shoul 
derS d. (See Fig. 7.) These shoulders en 
gage stops C and limit the inward movement 
of the regulating-doors, which latter, by rea 
Son of forming the shoulders d back from the 
inner edges of the doors, are capable of being 
O 
25 
35 
45 
set against each other at their inner ends to 
completely close the discharge-opening. 
The hopper E has side boards E' and end 
boards E, the latter being provided with ex 
tensions e, which project down close to and in 
front and rear of the cross-beams B B, the 
edges of such extensions being formed at e' 
to rest flat against the said cross-beams and 
So prevent any waste of material between 
Such cross-beams and end boards. These end 
boards are inclined and the inner edges b of 
the cross-beams B B are beveled or inclined 
correspondingly to the end boards, so that the 
material to be sowed or distributed will pass 
freely to the slat-rods. 
The shaft F is suitably journaled, and is 6 
driven by means of pinion f thereon meshing 
with gear g on the axle G. This shaft F ex 
tends transversely through the hopper and 
forms an agitator therein, being provided 
with numerous radial rods or projections H, 
which operate downward between the slat 
rods and serve to disintegrate the material 
when barn-yard fertilizer is used and force 
Such material through the spaces between 
the slat-rods. 
By means of the regulating-doors the dis 
charge-opening may be partially closed to 
regulate the discharge of material, or may be 
entirely closed in loading the machine or in 
the passage thereof from field to field or oth 
erwise, as may be desired. 
The machine as above described is adjusted 
for broadcast use. The 'ear board D is en 
gaged and operated by a screw d, turning in 
a threaded bearing at d. Below the discharge 
opening are arranged the drill-boards, consist 
ing, in the construction shown, of two central 
boards II and the outer boards KK, all of 
said boards being hinged on parallel lines, 
such lines being in the direction of motion of 
the machine. The boards II are hinged at 
their upper edges on the same pintle or oth 
erwise close together, and may be drawn close 
together at their lower edges and so held by 
bolts when desired, as will be hereinafter 
described. The outer boards K are also 
hinged at their upper ends and may be ad 
justed at their lower ends, in connection with 
7 O 
75 
85 
95 
411,215 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
the central boards, to drill one or two rows, 
as may be desired. To this end the boards I 
K may be adjusted, as shown in Fig. 5, to drill 
two rows, the boards Ibeing set at their lower 
ends inward and the boards K being set at 
their lower ends outward, so that the lower 
edges of the boards IK are just sufficiently 
Separated to permit the discharge of the seed, 
fertilizer, &c., as desired. 
To fasten the boards IK in the position 
shown in Fig. 5, there are provided short con 
necting-bars L, having openings l to receive 
pins or studs l' on the drilling-boards. To 
adjust such boards to drill a single row, 
boards I may be drawn close together and se 
cured by their connecting bolt or bolts i, and 
the boards K be then adjusted in close to the 
boards I, as shown in Fig. 4, and secured by 
a longer connecting-bar, as shown in said 
Fig. 4 and at l in Fig. 5. 
The coverer for covering the drilled seed 
comprises the bar M, the drag-rods m, connect 
ing the bar M to the machine, so that such bar 
will be dragged in rear of the machine, and 
the teeth or blades N, supported on bar M to 
Opposite sides of the center and adjustably 
Secured, So that they may be set, as shown in 
Fig. 6, to cover when a single row is being 
drilled, or may be set in a reverse direction 
to cover two rows, as will be readily under 
stood from said Fig. 6. 
It is preferred to hinge the drilling-boards 
I and Kin bars O, which may be conveniently 
applied to and removed from the framing of 
the machine when desired. 
The machine is provided in advance of the 
discharge-opening with one or more teeth or 
openers I. 
In drilling it may at times be desirable to 
regulate the feed of material to the discharge 
opening to prevent any clogging of the drill 
boards. To this end I provide the removable 
boards J, which form a false bottom for the 
hopper and are placed immediately over the 
slat-rods, a space being left between the in 
ner edges of such cover-boards J, through 
which Space the material may discharge. 
The shaft K' (shown in Fig. 9) has long rods 
or teeth c projecting radially from it cen 
trally between the sides of the hopper, and is 
55 
provided with shorter teeth k between said 
long teeth and the sides of the hopper. Where 
desired, this shaft may be used instead of that 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4. 
Bands LL, looped over the hopper and Se 
cured by suitable nuts to the frame, serve to 
clamp the hopper firmly in position. 
The operation is simple and will be under 
stood from the foregoing description. The 
opener or shovel is not used when the ma 
chine is used as a broadcast distributer, but 
only when it is used to drill thematerial, which, 
obviously, may be commercial or other fer 
tilizer, seed, or such fertilizer and seed mixed, 
as may be desired. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim as new is 
1. The combination of the framing, the hop 
per, the central drill-boards, the side drill 
boards, the bolts for holding the central drill 
boards together, and the connecting bar or 
bars, all substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the framing, the hop 
per, the drill-boards adjustable, whereby to 
drill one or two rows, and the coverer running 
in rear of the drill-boards and having its teeth 
or blades adjustable, whereby to cover one or 
two rows, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a machine substantially as described, 
the combination of the drill-boards hinged 
at their upper edges and provided near their 
lower movable edges with pins or projections, 
and connecting-bars extended between Said 
drill-boards and having openings to receive 
the pins or projections on the drill-boards, 
Substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. In a machine substantially as described, 
the combination, with the main frame having 
grooves a, and stops a? and provided with a 
discharge - opening, of the regulating - doors 
sliding in said grooves and having shoulders 
d, arranged to abut said stops, the hopper, 
and the agitator-shaft, substantially as set 
forth. 
JESSIE ALFRED CHILDS. 
WILLIAM EDWARD MUR. 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
J. B. ROSSER, Jr., 
W. G. REBENTISCH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411315.txt	(No Model.) 
R. R. WILLIAMS, 
INDEX CIR, CUTAR, 
No. 41,315, 
Patented Sept. 17, 1889. 
 
727 6. 
t As were e . 
76 /(2 &&.27--- 76e 
-6z-e Yzeece. , 642. 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD R. WILLIAMS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
NOEX CRC UAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,315, dated September 17, 1889. 
Application filed October 4, 1888, Serial No. 287,227, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it nagy conce77. 
Beit known that I, RICHARD R. WILLIAMS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Brooklyn, IKings county, New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Index-Circulars, fully described and rep 
resented in the following specification and 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of the same. 
The object of this invention is to furnish a 
circular or pamphlet, consisting in a single 
group of leaves with a convenient and promi 
nent index to indicate its contents; and the 
invention is particularly adapted for present 
ing advertisements in a novel and attractive 
form, and may be used for printed circulars, 
or, when made in blank form, for pasting in 
papers or scraps and indexing the same. 
The invention consists, primarily, in a pam 
phlet formed of a single series of leaves suc 
cessively shortened at their ends for the ap 
plication of a series of titles. 
It also consists, secondarily, in a pamphlet 
having a series of leaves of uniform length 
and Width laid upon one another with their 
opposite ends overlapped and united trans 
versely to their overlapped ends. 
The invention will be understood by refer 
ence to the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an edge view of a group of sheets 
laid upon one another with the ends over 
lapped. Fig. 2 is a plan of the same, with the 
line of stitching represented by a dotted line 
ac. 
Fig. 3 represents the group of leaves 
folded upon such line of stitching. Fig. 4 is 
a plan of the same after folding. Fig. 5 is a 
plan similar to Fig. 2, with the corners of the 
leaves upon opposite ends cut off at one side 
thereof. Fig. 6 is an edge view of several se 
ries of leaves laid upon one another with the 
ends Overlapped. Fig. 7 is a plan of the same, 
with a line of stitching represented in the 
dottedline ac and the ends of the outer leaves 
in each series notched to expose the under 
leaves of the same series, and Fig. 8 a modi 
fication. 
Fig. 1 shows the means by which a series 
of sheets of uniform length may be made to 
form a folded pamphlet, having a series of 
leaves successively shortened, a b c d e are 
the successive leaves laid upon one another, 
with the ends overlapped uniformly and the 
stitching ac applied to the same transversely 
at a point nearer one end of the top leaf than 
the other, so that when the top leaf Cl is folded 
one of its ends will fall short of the other in 
the same manner that such end falls short of 
This effect is clearly 
the end of the leaf b. 
perceptible in Fig. 2, which shows a plan of 
the top leaf ct, with the ends of the other 
leaves at the bottom of the figure projecting 
from beneath it, with the shortened ends of 
such under leaves indicated by dotted lines 
b', c', d', and e' at the upper end of the figure. 
The upper end of the leaf Ct. above the line of 
stitching ac is shown a little shorter than the 
lower end of the same leaf, so that when 
folded at the line ac, as shown in Fig. 3, the 
ends of the leaf Cl, bear the desired relation to 
one another. 
Fig. 4 shows a plan of the entire palmphlet 
when thus folded and ready for use. In Fig. 
4 titles are shown applied to the exposed 
edges of the under leaves, which afford a con 
venient means of reference to the contents of 
such leaves, and such titles may be printed 
upon the leaves before they are attached to 
gether or may be applied to the leaves by the 
user at pleasure. The interior of the leaves 
may be provided with printed matter, as in 
various forms of circulars and catalogues, the 
exterior titles giving reference to such mat 
ters, or the interior of the leaves may be used 
as files or scrap memorandum-books in which 
matter may be written or pasted. 
Figs. 5, 6, and 7 show modifications of the 
invention, the first being adapted chiefly to 
give an ornamental appearance to the edges 
of the leaves, while it also facilitates the ap 
plication of more titles to the edges thereof, 
while Figs. 6 and 7 show a means of making 
a pamphlet of the same length as in Fig. 2, 
with a larger number of leaves and more titles. 
In Fig. 5 the end corners of the leaves at 
one side thereof are shown cut off at an angle 
of forty-five degrees, by which means the edges 
of all the leaves when folded upon the line a 
exhibit two edges inclined toward one another 
instead of a single straight edge, as shown in 
Fig. 2, Such form of the leaves presents a 
novel and attractive appearance, and it is 
obvious that the other cornel's of the leaves 
might be shaped in a similar manner, or that 
the entire edge of the leaf may be made with 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
CO 
411,315 
25 
O 
curved contour, as indicated in the dotted 
line y, Fig. 5. 
In Fig.6 several series of leaves, marked, 
respectively, f, g, h, , and j, are shown, all the 
leaves being of uniform length, and each se 
ries being Overlapped upon the preceding Se 
ries, like the single leaves shown in Figs. 1 
and 3. When folded upon the line ac, the 
pamphlet would present the same appearance 
as that in Fig. 4, but the outer edge of the 
three leaves in each series would coincide. 
By forming notches of different lengths in 
the two outer leaves of each series the two 
under leaves of such series are exposed to 
apply a title, and three times as many leaves 
are used and three times as many titles are 
displayed in a pamphlet of the same length 
and width. Three leaves being shown in each 
series and five series in the pamphlet, fifteen 
titles represented by letters of the alphabet 
are therefore shown at one end of the leaves 
in the plan in Fig. 7. 
With my construction some of the leaves 
in the pamphlet are much shorter than oth 
ers; but such defect is compensated for in a 
certain degree by the cheapness of the con 
struction and the large area exposed for the 
titles, while the novelty of the construction 
adapts it for circulars and other purposes 
where an attractive display constitutes the 
chief feature of the document. 
From the above description it will be seen 
that my invention consists fundamentally in 
shortening all the leaves of a pamphlet suc 
cessively to expose the edges for the applica 
tion of titles, and that the mode of construc 
tion may be extended and a larger pamphlet 
formed with the same generic feature by form 
ing each series of several leaves with the ends 
coincident. The separate leaves in such se 
ries may be notched, as shown in Fig. 7, or, 
if preferred, they may be used without notches 
and the nature of their contents indicated by 
the title upon the first leaf. 
For certain purposes my construction may 
be used without folding, the leaves being 
stitched transversely with the ends over 
lapped, as shown in Fig. 2, and the indices 
applied to the overlapping ends of the leaves 
at their opposite ends. When the construc 
tion is formed in a series of uniform sheets 
successively overlapped, as shown in the draw 
ings, duplex pamphlets having the same char'- 
acteristics duplicated may be formed by Se 
curing the series of sheets together at a dif 
ferent line midway between their ends and 
folding them, as shown in Fig. 3. Such dul 
plex pamphlet is shown in Fig. 8 with the end 
of the sheet a, even with the end of sheet e 
and containing two similar groups of five 
leaves each. 
I am aware of United States Patents No. 
310,329, issued January 6, 1885, to S. S. Ste 
: vens, and No.324,584, issued August 18, 1885, 
35 
45 
55 
to B. M. Paine, the said patent to Stevens 
showing a single series of leaves notched at 
their edges to expose portions of the leaves 
for the application of titles, and Paine's pat 
ent showing six different series of leaves, 
which series are successively shortened, al 
though the leaves in each series are of the 
same length and width, with notched edges 
to apply reference-letters. I wholly disclaim 
the said patents, as well as the application 
of notches to leaves of uniform size, as I 
a.m. aware that such construction has long 
been used. I am not aware, however, that 
any single series of leaves has been united 
together at one end of such leaves with the 
opposite ends successively shortened to ex 
pose a portion of each leaf in the series for 
the application of a title. 
Having thus set forth my invention, what I 
claim herein is 
1. A pamphlet having a series of leaves of 
uniform length and width laid upon one an 
other, with their opposite ends overlapped 
and united transversely intermediate to such 
overlapped ends, substantially as herein set 
forth. 
2. A pamphlet having a series of leaves of 
uniform length and width laid upon one an 
other, with their opposite ends overlapped 
and united transversely intermediate to such 
overlapped ends and folded upon their line 
of union, substantially as herein set forth. 
3. A pamphlet having a Series of leaves of 
uniform length and width laid upon one an 
other, with their opposite ends overlapped 
and united transversely intermediate to such 
overlapped ends upon a line adapted to form 
the opposite ends of the leaves into a single 
series with uniform interspaces when folded 
upon such line, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
4. A pamphlet having several Series of 
leaves of uniform length and width, the leaves 
of each series having their edges coincident, 
and the Several Series being laid upon one an 
other with their ends overlapped and united 
upon a line intermediate to such overlapped 
ends, and the outer leaves of each series be 
ing separately notched to expose the inner 
leaves of each Series, as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
5. A pamphlet consisting in a single series 
of leaves joined together at one end and suc 
cessively shortened at their opposite ends for 
the application of a series of titles, substan 
tially as herein set forth. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
(SSOS. 
RICHARD R. WILLIAMS. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN S. WING, 
HENRY J. MILLER. 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411415.txt	( No Model.) 
No. 41415, 
E. W. H. BASS, 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING WEBBING. 
Patented Se 
24 
1889. 
 
 + + 
 
---#--#-------- 
---+---+------- 
PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EDWARD W. H. BASS, OF QUINCY, MASSACHUSETTS. 
MAC H I N E FO R C UTT NG WEB B I N G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,415, dated September 24, 1889, 
Application filed May 4, 1889. Serial No. 309,624, (No model.) 
II. O 
2 ? 
25 
To all to/u?? it ??? ????????: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD W. H. BASS, 
of Quincy, county of Norfolk, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Machines for Cutting off Webbing, of which 
the following description, in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specifica 
tion, like letters on the drawings representing 
like parts. 
This invention has for its object to construct 
a machine for cutting webbing or tape into 
regular lengths to be used as straps or stays 
for boots and shoes. 
In accordance with this invention two cut 
ting-blades are arranged to cut the webbing 
Or tape, preferably by a shear cut, the blades, 
therefore, being movable one with relation to 
the other. Means are provided for moving 
the cutting-blade to cut off a piece of web 
bing. Suitable feeding mechanism is pro 
vided for feeding the webbing forward a 
definite or regular distance, the said feeding 
mechanism being so arranged as to remain 
idle while the piece is being severed and to 
move the material forward while the cutting 
blade or blades remain idle. 
Figure I shows a front elevation of a ma 
chine for cutting webbing embodying this 
invention; Fig. 2, a right-hand side elevation 
of the machine shown in Fig. 1; Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5, details to be referred to. 
The main frame-work of the machine is of 
suitable construction to support the operating 
parts. The feeding-rolls Cl, b are journaled in 
the main frame-work one above the other, the 
journals of one of the said rolls, as Ct, run 
ning in slots in the frame-work and being 
acted upon by suitable springs a, by which 
the roll is held in contact with the roll b, or 
nearly so. One of the rolls, as b, is secured 
to a shaft b', provided at one end with a 
milled edge cap b, for rotating it by hand, and 
at the other end with a ratchet-wheelb. (See 
Figs. 1 and 5). A pawl-carrier b is mounted 
loosely on the shaft b', said pawl-carrier car 
rying a spring-controlled pawl b, which en 
gages the teeth of the ratchet-wheel b. A 
toothed wheel b is also loosely mounted on 
the shaft b' and attached to or formed inte 
gral with the pawl-carrier b to move simul 
taneously with it. A rack-bar c is placed in 
suitable guideways formed on the main frame 
work, being arranged in vertical position, and 
having loosely connected to it at its upper 
end a connecting-rod c', the lower end of 55 
which rod is connected adjustably or in any 
suitable manner, as with the bolt c, with a 
crank-arm c' rigidly connected with the 
driving-shaft cl, mounted in the main frame 
Work and carrying the driving-wheel d', hav- 6o 
ing, as herein shown, a grooved hlub d, by 
which it may be driven by power, and a hand 
piece, by which it may be driven by hand. 
The operation of the feeding mechanism is 
as follows: As the driving-wheel is rotated, 65 
its shaft drotates the crank-arm c, and there 
by reciprocates the rack c, vertically rotating 
the toothed wheel b, which in turn, by means 
of the pawl, rotates the shaft b', carrying the 
feed-roll b. As herein shown, the reed-roll b to 
will rotate during one half revolution of the 
driving-wheel and during the otherhalf revo 
lution it will remain idle. The webbing or 
tape to be severed is fed through a suitable 
adjustable or other guide, (see Fig. 3) herein 75 
shown as two like plates e e', secured to the 
frame-work, but arranged in opposite posi 
tion with relation to each other and formed 
to present, when assembled or taken collect 
ively, an opening e for the Webbing. The 8o 
cutting-blades are herein shown as compris 
ing a stationary bladelf, and a blade?' loosely 
connected to it or the main frame-work at f, 
to thereby move with relation to the blade if 
and produce a shear cut. A vertically-recipro- 85 
cating bar or rod i is arranged in guideways 
on the main frame-work, it being connected 
at its upper end loosely by a link i' with the 
movable bladelf. The vertically-reciprocat 
ing rod or bar i has a pin projecting out- 9o 
wardly from it, (see Fig. 4.) which follows in 
a cam groove or guided on the driving-wheel 
d'. By the mechanism thus described and 
shown, as the drive-wheel revolves the bar i 
will be reciprocated and the movable blade f' 95 
operated to sever the material. It will be 
seen that the cutting mechanism operates 
during the time that the feeding mechanism 
remains idle, and vice versa, thereby moving 
intermittingly alternately with relation to IOO 
each other, 
I do not desire to limit my invention to any 
35 
45 
SO 
411,415 
particular construction of cutting-blades or 
knives. 
I claim 
1. In a machine for cutting webbing, the 
reciprocating cutting-blade, and cam-grooved 
wheel and connecting mechanism for recip 
rocating it, combined with the feed-roll b, 
toothed wheel b, pawl- carrier and pawl, 
ratchet-Wheel b, rack c, connecting-rod c", 
crank-arm c, substantially as described. 
2. In a machine for cutting off webbing, the 
movable cutting-blade and means for moving 
it intermittingly, the feeding devices, and 
means for moving them intermittingly and 
alternately with relation to the movements 
of the cutting-blade, combined with the cap 
b', for rotating the driving-roll of the feeding 
devices independently of the cutting-blade, 
substantially as described. 
2 ? ?. 
3. In a machine for cutting off webbing, the 
intermittingly-movable cutting-blade and 
means for moving it, and intermittingly-mov 
able driving-roll for the feeding devices, 
combined with the toothed wheel b, pawl 
carrier and pawl, the ratchet-wheel b, rack c, 
connecting-rod c', and crank c, and drive 
shaft b, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub- 30 
scribing witnesses. 
25 
EDWARD W. H. BASS. 
Witnesses: 
BERNICE J. NOYES, 
FREDERICK L. EMERY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411515.txt	: No Model.) 
No. 4ll, 515, 
W. H., ALBACH. 
CASH CARRIER, 
Patented Sept. 24, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
928)it-1 coacs. 
 
d (- 
r s : 
tss 
- 
- 
s i r - 
- - d 
S s 
S. 
3v-ua vitez 
ZZza772 AAZdae/ 
242 elt to 11 o' 
4.4%le 
cQ. 
N'PETERs. Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. ALBACH, OF MANSFIELD, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE BARR CASH 
AND PACKAGE CARRIER COMPANY. 
CASH CARRE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,515, dated September 24, 1889. 
Application filed May 14, 1889, Serial No. 310,721 (No model.) 
To all, whon, it 7 city concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. ALBACH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mans 
field, in the county of Richland and State of 
5 Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Cash-Carriers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of trans 
mitting apparatus for store-service in which 
Io the carrier runs upon a wire way or track, and 
more particularly, but not specifically, to that 
type wherein the carrier is impelled by the 
Wedging action of two or more track-wires 
either diverging or converging behind it 
Such, for instance, as represented in Letters 
Patent No. 357,449, granted to Samuel W. 
Barr on the 8th day of February, 1887-and 
for the purpose of the ensuing description. I 
shall adopt and make reference to apparatus 
2O constructed upon the principle of that made 
the subject of said patent, 
In the Barr device two wires extend from 
Station to station, one wire being shorter than 
the other and being fixed to the ends of le 
25 vers, one at each station, while the other wire 
is secured to the shanks of said levers under 
Such arrangement that when one lever is ver 
tical the other will be horizontal and the wires 
stretched taut between them and separated at 
3o the lever which is vertical, while converged 
and brought into close proximity at the lever 
which is horizontal. Buffers or bumpers are 
placed on the ends of each lever, so that when 
either is horizontal it may receive the shock 
35 of the carrier, which has been driven toward 
it by the parting of the wires at the other end 
of the track. Such a construction requires 
means for the attachment of the buffer to the 
lever, and necessarily circumscribes the thick 
4o ness of the buffel to that which will be self 
supporting from the base. I propose, instead 
of a buffer attached to the lever, to employ a 
section of rubber tubing having thick walls 
and a bore of about the diameter of the wire 
45 track, that it may be slipped thereover, and of 
any appropriate length, thus causing the 
track-wire itself to provide the means of at 
tachment of said buffer and of its support. 
I further propose, in order to obtain greater 
So elasticity and to diminish the liability of 
breaking the wire at the exposed end of the 
buffer, to form the latter of two sections of 
tubing, both slipped upon the track-wire and 
connected by a coiled spring encircling said 
wire. Finally, I propose, in order to still fur- 55 
ther diminish the liability of breakage where 
two wires are employed, to mount said buffer 
upon that wire which is longest, or which has 
the greatest length from its point of attach 
ment to the point, where the carrier meets the 6o 
buffer, said wire being represented in the Barr 
system by the lower of the two tracks there 
shown. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
at one station of a cash-carrier apparatus em- 65 
bodying my invention, and Fig. 2 is a detail 
in top plan view. 
A represents brackets or any suitable Sup 
ports for the levers which operate and con 
trol the track-wires, and a guys or braces for to 
said brackets. At the station or terminals 
of the line are levers B, pivoted each to one 
of said blackets, and having, respectively, 
catches b to receive and retain the carrier as 
it reaches the station. The catches herein 75 
shown are each formed of a wire loop C Sulf 
ficiently spaced between its arms to receive 
the upper part of the carrier D and drop over 
its sides, but provided at the outer end with 
a rubber tube d, slipped over the bend of the 8o 
loop to drop on the farther side of the car 
rier after it has come in contact with and com 
pressed the buffer. Only one of the levers 
is shown, and that as horizontal; but the po 
sition of the other will be understood from 85 
said Barr patent-to wit, that it will at the 
time be in a vertical position. One wire E 
stretches taut between ears e, pivoted to the 
ends of said levers, and a second Wire E' ex 
tends from an ear e, pivoted to the shank of 9o 
the horizontal lever, to a second ear pivoted 
to the shank of the upright lever, this latter 
wire being the lowest and necessarily the 
longest, 
buffer is shown as attached to the end of the 
lever immediately above the point where the 
upper wire is secured, or at the base of a 
curved catch projecting from said lever. 
This buffer necessarily projected but very lit- IOO 
In the Barr patent, as I have stated, a 95 
 
2 
411,515 
tle beyond the end of the lever for want of a 
Support, besides requiring special fastenings, 
and consequently being expensive. It could 
therefore offer but very little elasticity to 
meet the shock of the carrier sent at great 
Speed against it, and as it met the carrier 
above the upper wire, and necessarily above 
both, the momentum of the lowest end of the 
carrier would carry the latter on, tipping it 
and bringing a violent Wrench on the upper 
wire just in advance of the buffer, ultimately 
resulting in breaking the latter. To avoid 
these defects and to apply the resistance 
more nearly on a line with the wires, I con 
struct the buffer F of a length of rubber tub 
ing having thick walls and a central bore of 
about the diameter of one of the track-wires, 
so that it may be slipped snugly thereover. 
This tubing, in case it is applied to the up 
per wire, will then rest at its base against 
the end of the lever, and will be sustained 
slightly by the wire, which it encircles and 
embraces and along which it may be made 
to extend to any distance necessary to ob 
tain a perfect resisting medium. In prac 
tice, however, I deem it advisable to apply 
this buffer to the lower track-wire, or that one 
which in the Barr system is the longest, he 
cause this, having a greater length between 
its end and the point where the buffer neces 
sarily meets the carrier, can yield or bend 
more gradually beneath the shock or jar, and 
therefore is less liable to break; but, whether 
located on the upper or on the lower wire, this 
buffer will meet the carrier practically on a 
line drawn between the upper and lower 
wheels or trucks, and since it surrounds the 
wire in this position it will to a great extent 
prevent the tipping or wrenching action above 
adverted to. When said buffer is located on 
the lower wire, I have found it desirable, not 
only for the purpose of forming the seat for 
the base of the buffer, but also for conven 
ience and economy in repairing the track when 
broken, to make that part of the lower track 
extending from the buffer to the shank of the 
f, having a 
lever in the form of a wire link 
loop or clevisf' at its advanced end, to which 
the end of the line-wire is attached, when the 
enlargement caused by the coiling of the wire 
loop in forming it and joining it to the track 
will provide the seat for the buffer, the bore 
of which is of too slight diameter to admit the 
By this arrangement it is obvious that 
clevis. 
should the lower track-wire be broken from 
any cause the buffer may be slipped forward 
a short distance away from the clevis, the 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
line-wire disconnected from the latter, and 
the buffer slipped off and applied to a new 
wire, which will then be attached to the clevis 
or to the link upon which it is formed. 
Although I have thus far spoken of the 
buffer as being composed of a length of rub 
ber tubing slipped over the track-wire, and 
although I consider such a feature of my in 
vention when applied to the lower track-wire, 
I deem it preferable to form this buffer in 
sections gg', and interpose between the two 
a coiled spring g, encircling the track-wire. 
By thus doing I obtain all the advantages of 
both the rubber and the metallic spring, the 
noiselessness of the first, with its sluggish elas 
ticity and comparativestiffness, and the great 
compressibility, quick elasticity, and flexibil 
ity of the latter. The coiled spring may have 
coils of a diameter slightly less than the rub 
ber tubing and be secured over the sections 
of the latter; or they may be considerably less 
in diameter than the tubing and the end of 
the latter beformed of less diameter than the 
body part, as in Fig. 1, and shouldered, so as 
to receive the ends of the spring, and with its 
shoulders form a seat for the same. This 
compound buffer, it will be observed, permits 
great flexibility to the line-wire or to the track 
wire, so that it will readily bend or yield when 
wrenched by the tipping of the carrier as it 
strikes the buffer, and thus avoid one of the 
chief causes of breakage. It also yields to a 
much greater extent than a buffer of rubber 
alone and much quicker, therefore distribut 
ing the strain of the shock and preventing it 
from coming always at One place on the wire, 
which also would speedily result in breakage. 
I claim- 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, with the lower or longer 
wire in a cash-carrier apparatus of the nature 
described, and with the operating-lever, of a 
buffer composed of a tube of rubber slipped 
over said wire. 
2. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the operating-lever, the 
wire loop attached to the shank thereof, the 
lower track-wire secured to said loop, and the 
tubular buffer seated against the loop. 
3. The buffer herein described, composed of 
two sections of rubber tubing connected by 
an intermediate coiled spring which clasps the 
ends of said sections. 
w 
WILLIAM. H. ALBACH. 
Witnesses: 
A. S. WELLS, 
LD. WASSALL. 
7 o 
75 
go 
95 
IOO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411616.txt	(No Model.) 
No, All,616, 
W. S. R. 0 GERS, 
DRILLING MACHINE, 
Patented Sept. 24, 1889, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
?? 
 
??r. ? s 
InVentor 
Attorney 
M. PeFERS, Photo-Lithographer, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WINFIELD S. ROGERS, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE UNIVERSAL 
RADIAL DRILL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
O R L L | N G -- WACH I N E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,616, dated September 24, 1889. 
Application filed March 22, 1889, Serial No. 304,329, (No model.) 
5 
To all ?y/ion, it ??? ????. ce77?: 
Be it known that I, WINFIELD. S. ROGERs, 
of Cincinnati, Hamilton county, Ohio, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Drilling-Machines, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention has reference to metal-drill 
ing machines, often spoken of as drill 
presses; and my improvements will be read 
Io ily understood from the following descrip 
tion, taken in connection with the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a drilling 
machine illustrating my improvements; Fig. 
15 2, a vertical section of the saddle to which 
the drill-arm is pivoted; Fig. 3, a vertical 
section of the drill-spindle and its bearing; 
Fig. 4, a horizontal section in plane of line a 
of Fig. 1 of the column of the machine and 
2d the arm-saddle, and Fig. 5 a horizontal sec 
tion of the saddle in plane of line b of Fig. 1. 
In the drawings, A indicates a vertical col 
umn supported by the usual foot-plate; B, a 
table-arm fitted for rotary adjustment near 
25 the base of the column, the column forming 
the pivot on which this arm swings; C, a cir 
cular table supported by its center at the outer 
end of the table-arm and fitted, as usual, for 
rotation with reference thereto; D, an arm 
saddle Secured to the front of the column and 
fitted for vertical adjustment thereon; E, a 
horizontal arm carried by the arm-saddle 
upon a vertical pivot, the arm being capable 
of Swinging upon this pivot; F, a spindle 
35 saddle fitted for adjustment in and out upon 
the arm E, this saddle forming the bearing 
for the drill-spindle; G, the drill-spindle; H, 
clamp-screws by which the arm-saddle is 
fixed to the column A in adjusted position 
thereon; J, a clamp-screw by which the arm 
E is fixed for angular adjustment; K, T 
blocks serving to unite the arm-saddle to the 
column, the heads of these blocks engaging 
in the usual T-slots in the face of the column; 
45 L, wedges engaging these T-blocks and actu 
ated by the clamp-screwsH, the clamp-screws 
thus serving to adjust the Wedges and clamp 
the arm-saddle firmly to the face of the col 
umn; M, the taper drill-socket in the lower 
5o end of the drill-spindle, which drill-spindle 
I has a central bore to receive its vertical driv 
ing-shaft; N, the vertical driving-shaft fit 
ting the central bore of the drill-spindle and 
splined therein, and serving as the means by 
which motion is imparted to the drill-spindle, 55 
while at the same time the drill-spindle is ca 
pable of vertical motion in its bearing as the 
feeding progresses; O, a stud upon the lower 
end of this vertical shaft, adapted when the 
drill-spindle is raised to its extreme height to 6o 
enter downwardly into the taper drill-socket 
of the spindle; P, a friction-pad carried by 
the arm-saddle D and actuated by the clamp 
screw J and bearing against the hub of the 
arm E, whereby the arm E is clamped in ad- 65 
justed angular position with reference to the 
arm-saddle. 
The gearing by which rotary motionistrans 
mitted to the drill-spindle will be understood 
from the drawings without further explana- 7c. 
tion. The feeding apparatus for raising and 
lowering the spindle is of the ordinary con 
struction. When the drill-spindle is raised 
to its highest point, the stud O serves in ex 
pelling the drill from the socket N. The table. 75 
and drill-arm both have swinging motions 
upon vertical pivots, and the drill-arm has a 
Vertical adjustment upon the column, and the 
drill-spindle has a rotary adjustment upon 
the drill-arm. 
It will be seen that the arm-saddle is held 
to the column by T-bolts, so to speak, carried 
by the arm-saddle and sliding in the usual 
T-slot of the column, and that these T-bolts 
are really cotter-bolts, the wedges L forming 85 
the cotters, and the screws H the means for 
adjusting the cotters. The arm is pivoted to 
the arm-saddle and can be turned on its 
pivot as desired and there clamped by pad J. 
When the drill-spindle is completely raised 9o 
in its bearing, the stud O engages such tool 
Shank as may be in the spihdle-socket and 
expels it. 
8o 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a drilling-machine, the combination, 95 
substantially as set forth, of a vertical col 
umn, a table-arm pivoted thereto near the 
base and capable of a swinging motion with 
reference to the column, a table carried by 
the outer end of said table-arm, an arm-sad- loo 
4.1,616 
the radial arm in adjusted angular position 
with reference to the arm-saddle. 
3. In a drilling-machine, the combination, 
substantially as set forth, of a drill-spindle G, 
having a central longitudinal bore and hav 
ing a taper socket M in its lower end com 
municating with said bore, vertical shaft N, 
engagirig the central bore of the spindle, and 
stud O on the lower end of said shaft, adapted 
to engage the shank of the drill which may 
be disposed in said drill-socket. 
WINFIELD. S. ROGERS. 
25 
Witnesses: 
JAMES T. COLLINS, 
JAMES E. BLAKE. 
dle fitted for vertical adjustment upon said 
column, a radial arm carried by said saddle 
upon a vertical pivot, and a spindle-bearing 
fitted for horizontal adjustment upon said ra 
dial arm. 
2. In a drilling-machine, the combination, 
Substantially as set forth, of a column, a tal 
ble-arm carrying a table and fitted for swing 
ing motion near the base of the column, an 
arm-saddle fitted for vertical adjustment 
upon said column, a radial arm pivoted to 
said saddle and carrying a horizontally-ad 
justable spindle-bearing, clamps for fixing 
the saddle in adjusted position with refer 
ence to the column, and a clamp for fixing 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411718.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 41.1718, 
F. J. GIBBS. 
DUMPING CAR, 
Patented Sept. 24, 1889. 
A 
(Q A. 
I 
/ , 
7 
/ * - 
i 
Z - 
2 * , 
7. 
: 
S-> 
- 
aF 
 
areer R2S-Rsrirars 
S 
& c.7 O as 
 
A 
  
A 
E 
341.uc44 to 
777 anar J. G.22s 
28itvacosco 
27. 
2-46-4-e- 
- 
 
(7.2% 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-lithographer. Washirtca. 2. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK J. GIBBS, OF TYRONE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
DUMP N G CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,718, dated September 24, 1889. 
Application filed January 29, 1889, Serial No. 298,003, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
- 
To all whon, it may concern 
Beit known that I, FRANK J. GIBBS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Tyrone, 
in the county of Blair and State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Dumping-Cars, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
dumping-cars; and it consists in certain novel 
features hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure is a 
side view showing the car in a horizontal po 
sition in full lines and showing it tilted in 
dotted lines. Fig. 2 is a front elevation. 
IReferring to the drawings by letter, Ades 
ignates the platform, having the rails Bonits 
upper side and having the tilting section C 
at one end. This tilting section Cis also pro 
vided on its upper side with the rails D, which 
form a continuation of the track B, and have 
their outer ends turned up to form the stops 
E. On the front edge of the tilting section I 
mount the rock-shaft F, which has its inner 
end arranged about the center of the tilting 
Section and provided with a small crank-arm 
G. At the outer end of this rock-shaft it is 
provided with the operating arm or lever H, 
which is adapted to lie in a groove I in the 
upper side of the tilting section, and be held 
therein by a ring J, mounted on a staple K, 
secured in said section and adapted to be 
slipped over the end of the lever. 
L designates the car, which is mounted on 
the track formed by the rails DD, and is pro 
vided at its front end with the swinging end 
gate M, which is hung by loops Nupon a cross 
bar O, secured to the front end of the car. 
On the front side of the end-gate and about 
the center of the same I provide the bolt P, 
which is mounted in keepers Q, secured to the 
end-gate, and has its lower end entering an 
opening R in the bottom of the car. To the 
under side of the bottom of the car secure a 
spring or arm S, the free end of which is pro 
vided with a pin or stud T, which is held nor 
mally in the opening R, so as to bear against 
the end of the bolt by the said spring. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
it is thought the operation and advantages of 
my device will be apparent. 
My car is intended more especially for use 
in mines and coal-yards and freight-depots; 
but it will be found advantageous in all cases 
where a dumping-car is necessary. 
The loaded car is run over onto the tilting 
section of the platform, when the weight of 
the load will cause the said platform to tilt, 
and consequently dump the car. The car will 
be prevented from passing of the tilting sec 
tion of the platform by reason of its front 
wheels contacting with the stops E at the front 
ends of the track-rails. When it is desired to 
discharge only about half the contents of the 
car, the lever is raised, so as to lower the 
crank-arm out of the path of the spring. The 
end-gate will thus be prevented from opening, 
and only so much of the contents will be dis 
charged as can escape over the top of the car. 
When it is desired to discharge the entire 
load, the operating-lever is thrown downward, 
so as to bring the crank-arm upward against 
the free end of the spring, thereby raising the 
same and forcing the pin carried thereby 
against the bolt, so as to raise the same, when 
the pressure applied against the end-gate by 
the load will cause the same to swing outward, 
as will be readily understood. If more than 
one bolt is necessary to hold the gate, the 
rock-shaft will be provided with a corre 
sponding number of crank-arms as will be 
readily understood. 
It will be seen that I have provided a very 
efficient dumping-car, by the use of which 
either the entire load or only a portion of it 
may be discharged at will. My improve 
ments are very simple, are composed of few 
parts, and are compactly arranged. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination, with the car having an 
opening in its bottom, of the Swinging end 
gate, the bolt mounted thereon and adapted 
to engage said opening, and the spring se 
cured to the bottom of the car and carrying 
a pin adapted to enter said opening and bear 
against the end of the bolt, as set forth, 
2. The combination of the platform having 
a tilting section, the car moving over the plat 
form and provided with the swinging end 
gate, the bolt mounted on the end-gate and 
95 
CC 
O 
f5 
2. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
411,718 
of the car and having a stud bearing against 
the lower end of the bolt, and a rock-shaft 
having an arm which, when the car is tilted, 
may be brought into contact with the spring 
or arm, so as to release the bolt of the end 
gate, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRANK. J. GIBBS. 
Witnesses: 
J. S. MCCARGAR, 
D. R. CALDWELL, 
engaging the bottom of the car, the spring Se 
cured to the bottom of the car and bearing 
against the bolt, and the rock-shaft mounted 
on the tilting section of the platform and hav 
ing a crank-arm at one end adapted to bear 
against the spring and provided with an oper 
ating-lever at its other end, as set forth. 
3. The combination of a dumping-car hav 
ing a swinging end-gate hinged to its upper 
front end, a bolt or latch arranged to slide ver 
tically on said end-gate and engaging an 
opening or keeper in the bottom of the car, 
an arm or spring attached to the under side 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411818.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 411,818, 
H. W. LIBBEY. 
- 
ANTIFRICTION BEARING, 
Patented Oct. 1, 1889. 
n 2. 3 
as 
37 
25 
 
 
  
  
- C 
 
 
 
FiG-2. 
2 (6 
s/ 
We 
36S 
S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOSEA W. LIBBEY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ANTI-FRICTION BEARING. 
Y 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,818, dated October 1, 1889. 
Application filed December 17, 1888, Serial No. 293,789, (No model.) 
To all Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EIOSEA. W. LIBBEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Anti-Friction Jour 
nal-Bearings, of which the following, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
is a specification. 
Myinvention has for its object the diminu 
tion of friction in journal-bearings, and par 
ticularly in the bearings of railroad-car axles; 
and its consists in certain details of construc 
tion, hereinafter fully described, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a longitudinal vertical 
section through a car-axle bearing and box 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse section taken online acac of Fig.1. Fig. 
3 is a perspective view of the upper portion 
of the sleeve that embraces the axle-journal. 
Fig. 4 is a similar view of the lower portion of 
the same. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the 
upper portion of the bearing in which the 
sleeve revolves. Fig. 6 is a similar view of 
the lower portion of the same. Fig. 7 is a 
perspective view of the upper portion of a 
modified form of sleeve. Fig. 8 is a similar 
view of the lower portion of the same. Fig. 9 
shows a plain anti-friction roller; Fig. 10, a 
corrugated anti-friction roller, and Fig. 11 a. 
series of balls that may be employed instead 
of rollers. 
A represents the axle of a railroad-car, and 
B the journal of the same. 
C is a sleeve of metal, the internal diameter 
of which is slightly larger than the diameter 
of the journal. This sleeve is made in two 
parts, so that it can be placed around the 
journal B, and its outer perimeterisprovided 
With rings or'circular projections c. I prefer 
to have three of these rings, one at each end 
of the sleeve and one in the center, as shown 
in Figs. 1, 3, and 4; but two only might be 
used, as shown in Figs. 7 and 8. The outer 
edges of these rings careformed rounding, so 
that they are free to travel in correspond 
ingly-formed grooves d, in an outer brass D, 
formed in two parts, as shown, and which is 
securely held in the box E. 
Between the rings c, in the sleeve C, are 
formed slots (t, in which are placed small steel 
rollers For balls F'. These rollers may be 
plain round steel, with their ends rounding, 
as shown in Fig. 9, or they may be corrugated, 
as shown in Fig. 10, or a number of steel balls, 
as shown in Fig. 11, sufficient to fill the slots 
a, may be employed. The roller's F or balls 
F' are of stuch diameter that they just fit the 
space between the journals B and the outer 
brass D, the sleeve Cholding them in position. 
The outer circumference of the sleeve C is . 
of less diameter than the inner diameter of 
the outer brass D, so that no part of it comes 
into contact with the brass D, except the 
rings or projections c, which run loosely in the 
grooves d. 
The box.E, Idivide into two parts and hinge 
them together on one side, as shown at G, 
Fig. 2, and on the opposite side I provide two 
lugs or ears H, which are held together by a 
bolt I. The object of thus forming the box E 
in two parts is that the outer brass D, sleeve 
C, and rollers F may be placed in position 
around the journal B between the headland 
shoulder 2, and when the two portions of the 
box E are brought together they are secured 
by the bolt I, and the sleeve-rollers and brass 
are held in their proper place. The brass D 
is preferably of an octagonal form on its out 
side, as shown, and the interior of the box E 
is formed to correspond, or it may be of any 
other suitable shape. A space.J is left under 
and in front of the lower portion of the brass 
D, so that, if desired, packing and oil or other 
lubricant may be placed in the box E. 
It will be seen that by this construction 
of journal-bearing all friction in the bear 
ing is between the journal B, rollers F, and 
brass D, and as the sleeve C is free to rotate 
and with it the rollers F, which are also free 
to rotate independently, the friction is re 
duced to a minimum. 
If desired, more than three rollers may be 
employed around the circumference, the 
sleeve C being provided with as many slots as 
it is desired to employ rollers. In Figs. 6 and 
7, I have shown a sleeve adapted to receive six 
rollers. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In an anti-friction bearing, a divided 
sleeve provided with slots and rings or round 
projections on its outer circumference, in com 
5 
o 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
o 
So 
85 
95 
CO 
 
411,818 
bination with friction-rollers, and a divided 
Outer brass having recesses to receive the 
rings on the sleeve, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
2. In an anti-friction bearing, the sleeve C, 
formed in two parts and provided with slotsa, 
and rings or circular projections c, in combi 
nation With the brass D, formed in two parts 
and provided with recesses d, the friction 
rollers F, and box E, substantially as shown 
and described. 
3. An anti-friction bearing for car-axles, 
consisting of the divided sleeve C, rollers F, 
5 
o 
and brass D, in combination with an axle-box 
divided into two parts horizontally, whereby 
the anti-friction bearing can be placed around 
the axle, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereofIhave signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses, on this 22d day of Novem 
ber, A. D. 1888. 
HOSEA. W. LIBBEY. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. STEERE, 
EDWIN PLANTA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US411918.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 411,918, 
W. A. GREENE, 
COOKING STOWE, 
Patented Oct. 1, 1889. 
E E E-TAZ 
 
 
Far E-Tit. NS 
S 
SS 
a. 
S. 
SS SS NS NS R R NN SN N 
Sz2z:x 
2 . 
-' 
45z1 
22 M 242 
Z77 eve77 Y2Y 
persRs, Photo-Ittographor, washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. GREENE, OF OCEAN GROVE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
EDWARD R. CAHOONE, OF 
NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
COOKING 
- STOVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 411,918, dated October 1, 1889. 
Application filed June 18, 1888, Serial No. 277,473, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To citle, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. A. GREENE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ocean 
Grove, in the county of Monmouth and State 
of New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Cooking-Stoves; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letter's of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
cook stoves and ranges; and it consists in the 
construction and combination of parts here 
inafter set forth, and pointed out in the claims, 
the prime object of the invention being to 
provide a stove possessing great heating ca 
pacity with the expenditure of a minimum 
amount of fuel. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate what 
I consider the best means for carrying my in 
Vention into practice. 
Figure I is a plan view of the stove. Fig. 
II is a plan view of the same with the top re 
moved. Fig. III is a section of Fig. I online 
aca, taken ZigZag to show the connection of 
the flue. Fig. IV is a side elevation of the 
Stove. Fig. V is an inverted view of the cen 
ter top piece. Fig. VI is an enlarged section 
on line y y of Fig. V. Fig. VII is an interior 
elevation of the rear oven-wall. Fig. VIII is 
a section on line y' y', Fig. VII. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures where they 
OCCU". 
The stove-shell is marked ct, the oven b, the 
fire-box c, and the ash-pit d. 
In the ash-pit d an ash-pan E is provided, 
into which the ashes and cinders from fire 
box c may drop. 
The fire-box c is perforated all around and 
is surrounded by an air-chamber h, the space 
between the fire-box and the rear wall of the 
said air-chamber being closed at the bottom, 
as shown ath', so that all air entering through 
the ash-pit will be compelled to pass into the 
fire-box. The top of the air-space h is closed 
all around also, as shown, by plate c', and the 
only opening to flue e above top of oven is 
through the fire-box or through certain diffu 
sion-chambers, presently to be described. A 
passage m, connects to the rear of the fire-box 
and leads up and discharges into channels Ol' 
diffusion-passages m, which are provided on 
the under side of center plate O of the stove 
lid. These passages n are inclosed by solid 
side walls pp and perforate under wall o', a 
space o' being left in the center of the plate 
o, into which the top of passage in projects 
to deliver the heat, &c., to the diffusion-cham 
bers in. The rear wall of the passage in may 
be provided with openings q, which establish 
communication between the oven and the said 
passage, and the plates in', extending from 
each side of the passage to the side walls of 
the stove, may also be perforated for the same 
purpose, whereby the oven is thoroughly ven 
tilated. The oven is also provided with open 
ings r, which permit fresh outside air to enter 
it, thus supplying to the articles being cooked 
an abundance of pure air. On the front of 
the passage in is provided a hook or projection 
in, and at the front of the stove is a narrow 
longitudinal door in, which can be raised and 
a boiler inserted and rested upon hook n' to 
bring the body of the boiler just over the top 
of the fire-box. Air-openings k may be pro 
vided in the end wall of the stove to supply 
additional air to the air-space h. 
The fiue at the back of the oven is provided 
with a partition (t, which extends down un 
der the oven and divides the ?lue into two 
parts, a damperf' being provided to close the 
entrance to one of the said parts. The rear 
oven-walls is provided at botton with enlarge 
ments it, which afford recesses on the inside 
of the oven to receive the sides of pans, &c., 
whereby the capacity of the oven is increased, 
and the enlargements forming on the outer 
rear wall of the oven projections t' i', which 
extend into the flue at the rear of the Stove 
and slightly retard the flow of heat, and thus 
increase the heat of the oven. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
J. In a cooking-stove, the combination of a 
fire-box having an air-space surrounding it, 
said air-space being closed all round at the 
O 
35 
AO 
95 
IOO 
2 
411,918 
fire-box, the passage m above and back of it, 
a hook or projection n on the front of said 
passage, and a door m at the top of the front 
thereof, as set forth. 
5. In a cooking-stove, the combination, with 
a fire-box, oven, and flues around the oven, of 
the projections t t at the back of the oven 
in the rear flue of the stove, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 5th day of 
May, 1888. 
WILLIAM. A. GREENE. 
25 
Witnesses: 
CHARLESH. PELL, 
C. H. BALDWIN. 
top and also at the bottom on the rear side 
and having a passage leading from it up to 
the top of the stove, and diffusion-chambers 
formed on the under side of the top commu 
nicating with the passage, as set forth. 
2. In a cooking-stove, the combination of a 
fire-box and air-space surrounding the fire 
box and closed at the top thereof, and a passage 
leading from the air-space to diffusion-cham 
bers on the under side of the stove-lid, said 
passage having openings communicating with 
the oven, as set forth. 
3. In a cooking-stove, an extension formed 
on the back of and above the fire-box, having 
the hook or projection m, as set forth. 
4. In a cook-stove, the combination of the 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412018.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 42,018, 
R. B. CARR. 
CLOCK STRIKING MECHANISM. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented 00t. l, 1889, 
Arg1.C. 
 
WTNesses, 
 
INVE NTDR 
/ /3. Clu 
N. PETERS, Phoko-lithographer, was arton D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 412,018, 
R. B. CARR, 
CI,00K STRIKING MECHANISM, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 1, 1889. 
A27. 2 
I-A 12-7. 
s Epi giEE 
| 
t 
62. 
S 
it 
is 
E 
-al 
al 
s 
Af 
s s 
E -s -A s 
-- E. s 
s 
2 s 
e 
G. SE 
4 N. 
 
e 
E 
re 
s 
WITNESSES, 
-1.34%less--- 
4-6,2-7. 
INMENTOH, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 412,018, 
R. B. CARR, 
CLOCK STRIKING MECHANISM. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented 0.0t, l, 1889. 
Witnesses. 
INVENT OF 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographer. Washirton, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
R. B. C.A.R.R. 
CI,00K STRIKING MECHANISM, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
. 
No. 412,018, 
Patented 00t, l, 1889. 
2 
 
 
  
2 
2 
2 
% 2 
2 
s 
e 
es 
ae 
E2 
Witnesses. 
2s fiz 
INVENTOR, 
/6/3. C---- 
7-3.3% 
N. 
Eis, Phcho-Lithographr, waahiner D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUFUS B. CARR, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
THE E. HOWARD WATCH AND CLOCK COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CLOCK STRIKING MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 412,018, dated October 1, 1889. 
Application filed July 18, 1888, Serial No. 280,312, (No model.) 
25 
To all, whon it invay concer'7. 
Be it known that I, RUFUS B. CARR, of Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Clocks, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to mechanism for re 
leasing the striking part of a clock-movement; 
and it consists in a simple and reliable mech 
Io anism, hereinafter described, which can be ad 
justed to release the striking part or train at 
any predetermined time or times, so that a 
clock provided with my improvement can be 
caused to strike at any intervals that the 
5 fancy or requirements of the owner may dic 
tate instead of being confined to an arbi 
trary and unchangeable order in striking. 
For example, the striking-train may be re 
leased at the expiration of the hours, the ex 
2d piration of the quarter-hours, and just pre 
vious to the expiration of the hours-say one. 
or more minutes-or attany other part or parts 
of the twenty-four hours of the day; or, if 
desired, the striking-train may be caused to 
remain silent at any or all of the customary 
times for striking, all of which I will now pro 
ceed to describe. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
3o a front view of my improved mechanism. Figs. 
1", 1", and 19 represent detached views of parts 
Fig. 2 represents an 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
edge view of the mechanism shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 2 represents a section online 22, Fig. 2, 
35 looking toward the right. Figs. 3 and 4 rep 
resent modifications. 
I have shown only those portions of the 
clock which are necessary to indicate the 
manner of mounting the mechanism and the 
4o relative position of the parts of the devices 
constituting my improvement to the parts of 
the clock as generally constructed. 
In each figure the same letters refer to the 
Same parts in all of the views. 
The striking part of a clock is usually re 
leased to permit the striking operation by a 
cam rotated by the time mechanism drop 
ping a lever by passing from under it, or by 
pins or their equivalents upon a rotating 
5o wheel dropping a lever. Preparatory to drop 
ping the lever the camorpin must first gradu 
45 
 
55 
75 
So 
ally lift the lever from its normal or resting 
position. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 C, is a face cam-wheel having 
one or more members or cams (l'. 
d represents a lever which is pivoted upon 
a fixed stud d and provided at one end with 
a pine, which is caused by a spring f to bear 
against the cams a? and follow the recesses 
and projections thereof as the wheel a ro 
tates. 
b is the unlocking-cam, which is fastened 
rigidly with cam a', spur - wheel g, bevel 
wheel h, and setting-disk i to a quill q, which 
is engaged with center wheelj by means of 
the spring-pink, which is adapted to slide in 
a socket in said wheel and enters one of the 
holes, of which there are sixty in the setting 
disk i. A tongue d' on the rear end of lever 
d enters a slot in a lever l, as shown in Fig. l. 
Said lever l is supported by a pin n, affixed to 
and projecting from one side thereof and rest 
ing on the fixed guide n, Fig. 2. 
The forked upper end of the ever lengages 
with a sliding collar 0, which is held against 
the unlocking-lever p by means of the spiral 
Spring q. 
r represents a lever which is engaged at 
its forked end with the sliding collar O, and 
is pivoted in the stud S on the side of un 
locking-lever p. The other end of lever r is 
pivoted to the unlocking-lever pint, said pin 
being fitted to slide in a socket in the end of 
unlocking-lever p. 
it represents the programme-wheel, which 
has a long collet ac', and is mounted loosely 
on stud n. Said wheel has a series of lands 
or projections u' on its periphery arranged, 
as hereinafter described, to co-operate with 
the lever l when the striking-train is to be re 
leased, the number and location of said iands, 
the number and location of the cams on un 
locking-cam b, and the number and arrange 
ment of the members on the cann (t, deter 
mining the times of release of the striking 
train. 
The number of members or calms Oln Cam Ct. 
and the cams on unlocking-cam b may be so 
great that they can be made to operate as 
often as each five minutes, or possibly oftener. 
The cams on cam C. are constantly operating 
the lever d'; but the ultimate result-namely, 
95 
OO 
2 
412,018 
of releasing the striking-train--is Only ac 
complished when a land on programme-wheel 
it is presented in front of the lower end of le 
wer l as an obstruction to the movement of 
the lever. Therefore the location of the lands 
on the programme-wheel w really determines 
the time or times of release of the striking 
train. 
The spur-wheel 5 and disk U are mounted 
rigidly on a collet ac, said collet having a free 
running fit on the stud . The collet a pro 
jects through the disk v, and to the projec 
tion of the collet is fastened the inner end of 
a spiral spring c, the outer end of which is 
fastened to the programme-wheel it. The ob 
ject of the spring C is to press or rotate the 
programme-wheel ahead in the direction in 
dicated by the arrow in Fig. 1; but the move 
ment of the programme-wheel in this direc 
tion is limited by a pin y on the disk at and 
a pin 2 on the programme-wheel, the pin 2 
being held in yielding contact with the pin 
ly by the spring c. 
The disk U is rotated once in twenty-four 
hours by means of the train of wheels 1, 2, 3, 
4, and 5, said train being driven by the spur 
wheel g, forming a part of the time-train,and 
as the pin 2 of the programme-wheel it is held 
by the spring c in contact with the piny of 
the disk U it follows that the programme 
wheel rotates in unison with said disk. 
Operation: When a member of the cam a. 
passes under pin e, it moves the pin end of 
lever d to its farthest left-hand position, as 
viewed in Fig. 2, in doing which it moves the 
tongued end d to its farthest right-hand po 
sition, moving the lower end of lever l to 
Ward and over the programme-wheel u, pro 
vided it meets no obstruction, as a land u', 
the upper end of lever l being held in posi 
tion by the spring g, in which case it has 
influence on unlocking lever-pin t; 
O 
but in case the lower end of lever l meets 
an obstruction, as a land u? on programme 
wheel it, then the upper end of lever l is 
thrown over in the direction indicated by 
the arrow in Fig. 2 by the described move 
ment of the lever d. This movement slides 
the collar O in the same direction against the 
pressure of the spring q, and causes the col 
lar, by its engagement with the lever r, to 
swing said lever on its pivots, and thereby 
push the pint crosswise of the unlocking-le 
ver and place said pin in the path of the ap 
proaching unlocking-camb, said cam striking 
the pin and through it moving the unlock 
ing-lever in the direction required to release 
the striking-movement, the operation of the 
unlocking-lever in releasing the striking 
movement being Well known, and therefore 
requiring no description nor illustration here. 
It will be seen that the times of release of 
the Striking-movement depend on the num 
ber and location of the members on the cam 
C and the number and location of the lands 
on the programme-wheel, since the striking 
movement can only be released when the lift 
95 
ing of the pine by one of the members of Cam 
a, is concurrent with the contact of the lever 
l, with one of the lands of the programme 
wheel. 
The cam (t, as here shown has four men 
bers, so that if the programme-wheel lands 
are suitably arranged the unlocking-lever will 
be operated every fifteen minutes; but it is 5 
obvious that the wheel may have a greater or 
a less number of members. 
The face-cam a, and unlocking-cam b are 
adjusted relatively to each other, so that the 
pine in lever d drops into a member C' in cam 
at after the cam on unlocking-cam l has 
dropped or released the end of the unlocking 
lever p. The members of cam a are shaped 
and timed so that the pine in lever d is lifted 
to its highest position before the faces of the 
cams on unlocking- camb come in contact 
with the line of pin in the unlocking-lever p. 
I have thus far described the mechanism 
as adapted to move the unlocking-lever pin it 
into the path of the cams on unlocking-Cann 
b at the desired time. 
Figs. 3 and 4 show, respectively, front and 
side elevations of the mechanism and clock 
frame necessary to show the arrangement and 
manner of mounting the mechanism to pro 
duce the liberating of the striking-train of a 
striking clock by moving the unlocking-cam 
b so that its cams or projections will come in 
contact with the unlocking-lever pint With 
out the above-described movement of Said 
pin. The required change is made by mak 
ing the lever r of the form shown in Figs. 3 
and 4 and engaging one end of Said lever 
with the sliding collar o, the other end en 
gaging with a sliding collar a?, on which is 
rigidly mounted the unlocking-camb, the slid 
ing collar a being mounted loosely on the 
quill or sleeve b'. The sliding collar a' is 
made to revolve with the quill b' by means 
of a key (not shown) fastened rigidly to the 
hole in the collar a ', and fitted to slide freely 
back and forth in the slot c', formed in the 
quill b'. The unlocking-lever pin d' in this 
case is fastened rigidly to the unlocking-lever 
p. The same object can be accomplished 
namely, the releasing of the striking-train at 
any predetermined time or times-by the 
moving of certain parts of the mechanism of 
the clock, so that the unlocking-cam becomes 
operative or inoperative upon the unlocking 
lever by mounting the unlocking-lever upon 
a sliding or movable collet, and by arranging 
the levers and cams so that said sliding or 
movable collet is moved into or out of a posi 
tion, so that the pin of lever p becomes oper 
ative or not, as may be chosen, with the un 
locking-cam b. The form of construction of 
the parts to operate in this manner is not 
shown in diagram, as it is deemed so self-evi 
dent as not to require it. 
The remaining parts of the mechanism re 
main and operate the same as described in 
the references to Figs. 1 and 2. 
I claim 
roo 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
3O 
35 
... 
45 
55 
 
412,018 
O 
l, The combination, Substantially as set 
forth, with the center wheel i and the spur 
wheel (), of a cam-wheel C, having a series of 
members Ct' and an unlocking-cam b con 
nected there with, said cams receiving motion 
from the center wheel, a programme-wheel it, 
having lands or projections at', gearing 
whereby motion is communicated to said pro 
gramme-wheel from the spur-wheel g, the un 
locking-lever p, having a pint, and interme 
diate mechanism, substantially as described, 
whereby the pin it and unlocking-cam b are 
brought into operative relation to each other 
when a land of the programme-wheel and a 
member of the calm C concur in their action 
on said intermediate mechanism, as set forth. 
2. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, with the center wheelj and spur-wheel 
9, of a cam C., having a series of members 
and an unlocking-cam b rotatively connected 
therewith, said cams receiving motion from 
the center wheel, a programme-wheel it, hav 
ing lands or projections l', gearing whereby 
motion is communicated to said programme 
wheel from the spur-wheel g, the unlocking 
lever p, having a sliding pint, a pivoted lever 
r, engaged at one end with the pin it, a sliding 
spring-pressed collar o, engaged with the 
other end of the lever , a laterally-movable 
lever l, engaged at one end with the collar O 
and arranged to bear at its other end against 
a land of the programme-wheel, and a piv 
oted lever d, engaged at one end with the 
lever l and having at its other end a pin 
which is held in yielding contact with the 
Cam (, all arranged and operating Substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses, this 12th day of July, A.D. 
888. 
35 
RUFUS B. CARR. 
Witnesses: 
C. F. BROWN, 
A. D. HARRISON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412118.txt	(No Model.) 
H. H. PRANGE. 
BOLER 
 
No. 412, 18, 
Patented Oct. 1, 1889. 
d 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMAN HENRY PRANGE, OF AKRON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-FIFTHS TO 
G. C. MCNEIL, OF SAME PLACE. 
BOLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 412,118, dated October 1, 1889. 
Application filed May 8, 1889, Serial No. 310,002, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that, HERMAN HENRY PRANGE, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Akron, in the county of Summit and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Boilers; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to hot-water boilers; 
and it consists in the construction and novel 
combination of parts, as will be hereinafter 
fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming part 
of this specification, and in which like letters 
of reference indicate corresponding parts, 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal sectional 
view of a hot-water boiler embodying the im 
rovements of my invention, and Fig. 2 is a 
horizontal sectional view taken on the line 
acac in Fig. 1. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the body of the boiler. 
B is an inner. circular wall which rests on 
an annular ledge C, projecting inwardly from 
the body of the boiler on about the same hori 
zontal plane with the top of the shaking 
grate D, which is operated by a hand-lever I, 
fulcrumed in a projecting bearing E at the 
front of the boiler, and connected at its lower 
end with the lower end of the bar F, by which 
the depending arms H of the grate-bar I are 
connected, so as to operate simultaneously 
when the grate is shaken by the lever I. 
a designates the smoke tube or flue, which 
connects the fire-pot K with the smoke-bon 
net f at the top of the body A, 
c is the magazine, which is provided with 
a hinged cover ac, through which the coal is 
fed to the magazine. 
g is the outlet-pipe through which the pro 
ducts of combustion pass from the boiler to 
the chimney. 
b are the drop water-tubes having closed 
bottoms, and located within the same are cir 
culating-tubes b', said tubes having both ends 
open, thus increasing the circulation of the 
water, causing the water to rise in the tubes. 
Said tubes are provided with the usual in 
verted-V-shaped cut Y, to produce a circula 
tion through the medium of the inner circu 
lating-tubes. 
d is an air-pipe, which is passed through the 
door to supply air to aid combustion when the 
grate becomes covered with ashes. 
This boiler is designed for burning slack 
or refuse, so that no great expense will attend 
the running of the boiler. 
It will be seen from the drawings that an 
annular water-legis formed between the outer 
casing A of the boiler and the inner circular 
wall B, the lower edge of said wall resting 
upon the annular ledge C. Surrounding the 
magazine, with an intervening space between, 
is an annular wall L, which, together with the 
annular wall B, forms a smoke-flue. This 
flue is covered by a cap or dome M, provided 
at suitable intervals with circular openings 
through which the drop-tubes are inserted, as 
well as the smoke-bonnets. Between the in 
ner wall L of the smoke-flue and the maga 
zine is also formed an annular water-leg, which 
communicates with the outer leg by an upper 
horizontal passage. The communicating Wa 
ter-legs of course are provided with closed 
bottoms to prevent the escape of the water. 
As the products of combustion arise from the 
fire-pot K, the same circulates around the an 
nular smoke-flues, thus thoroughly heating 
the water within the water-legs, and having 
access to all portions thereof owing to the 
peculiar conformation of the boiler, this be 
ing further facilitated by the constant circu 
lation of the water through the means here 
in before described. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
The herein-described boiler, consisting of 
the outer annular casing provided near its 
lower end with an inwardly-extending annu 
lar ledge, an annular wall supported by said 
ledge and extending to within a short dis 
tance of the top of the boiler, an inner annu 
lar wall concentric with said ledge-supported 
wall, the connecting cap or dome provided 
with a series of perforations, the alternating 
drop water-tubes and smoke-bonnets, said 
tubes provided with closed bottoms, the cir 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
412,118 
5 horizontal extension, and the space between in presence of two witnesses. 
culating-tubes provided with open ends, and walls forming the smoke-flue, substantially Ic 
a central magazine, the space between the as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
same and the inner annular wall forming a 
water-leg communicating at its top with a my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
the Outer ledge-supported wall and the outer 
casing also forming a depending water-leg 
communicating with the upper horizontal por- 
tion and the space between the two annular 
HERMAN HENRY PRANGE. 
Witnesses: 
GRANT C. MCNEIL, 
CHARLES FERDINAND PLUM. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412218.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C. H. WILL COX & G, H, NOBLE, 
MACHINE FOR SEWING STRAW BRAID, 
No. 412,218, 
 
Patented Oct. 1, 1889, 
"EH 
S. "37, 
Stalia. 
Aguileuses esses 
R 
2 
s 
N 
S. 
2 
 
 
is N N. 
HIHL & H 
 
 
 
 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
(zz 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
a. 
A.is assist Y. 
%ZIER as "Liz 
S. 
N 
SENSES 
E. sits 
R 
S. 
 
 
A. %iza, 
 
 
Saz2222222222222222222222222222222 
Photo-lthographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
C, H, WILL COX & G, H, NOBLE, 
MACHINE FOR, SEWING STRAW BRAID 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
Patented 00t, l, 1889. 
No. 412,28, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
z2SNS 
N 
ZZ 
K- 
ar 2 f 
% a 
N 
E. 
M. PETERs. Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
C. H. WILL COX & G, H, NOBLE, 
MACEINE FOR, SEWING STRAW BRAID 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 412,218, 
 
Patented 00t, l, 1889. 
 
 
  
 
 
is N s 
 
 
 
N 
 
S 
 
 
 
2 
N 
 
 
 
Sz2z4& 
N 
NN 
2 
  
 
 
S 
 
s 
 
N. pgtas, py lithographer. Washinston, t. C 
(No Model.) 
w 
C, H, WILL COX & G, H, NOBLE. 
MACHINE FOR SEWING STRAW BRAID, 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 412,218, 
Patented Oct, l, l889. 
 
s N N 
N 
48 
6%a24/ %renz's 
 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, d. c. 
W 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. WILLCOX, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., AND GEORGE H. NOBLE, OF 
PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND, ASSIGNORS TO THE WILLCOX & GIBBS 
SEWING MACHINE COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MACH NE FOR SEWING STRAW BRAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 412,218, dated October 1, 1889. 
Application filed November 7, 1887, Serial No, 254,522, (No model.) 
Patented in England October 14, 1887, No. 13,969. 
5 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CHARLES H. WILL 
COX, of New York city, in the county and 
State of New York, and GEORGE H. NOBLE, 
of Providence, in the county of Providence 
and State of Rhode Island, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Machines 
for Sewing Straw Braid, which improvement 
has been patented in Great Britain by Pat 
ent No. 13,969, dated October 14, 1887, and 
is fully set forth in the following specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates more particularly to 
the machine described in the specification of 
our application for Letters Patent of the 
United States, filed June 8, 1886, and offi 
cially numbered 204,546, for sewing straw 
braid by means of stitches resembling those 
made by hand, in that on the right side of the 
work they are in distinct loops separated by 
spaces; and it has for its object to modify and 
improve the construction and operation in 
certain particulars. In the said machine 
needles or sewing implements are attached 
to a reciprocatory carrier below the work 
plate, are thrust up through the work, and 
co-operate with certain looping devices which 
are carried by the presser-foot above the 
work-plate. Since these looping devices are 
raised and lowered with the presser-foot, 
whose position in operation depends upon the 
thickness of the work beneath, it was found 
desirable to make the needles rise higher or 
not so high, according to the higher or lower 
position of the presser-foot, in order uni 
formly to present the looped thread in the 
best position to receive the looper. The nec 
essary variation in the needle-stroke is ef. 
fected by a controller mechanism, which is 
connected with the presser-foot, so as to be 
automatically set or adjusted thereby, and 
which properly governs or controls the mo 
tion imparted to the needles or sewing im 
plements by the needle-operating mechan 
ism. In the said machine this controller 
mechanism is clamped, so as to prevent its 
being shifted, except at one period in the 
formation of each stitch-namely, after the 
feed has gone out of action and before the 
needles are thrust through the work. It is 
desirable, then, to unclamp it only for a short 
time in order to have it properly clamped 
before the needles get well into the work. A 
suitably short release, while sufficient to per 
mit the adjustment of the controller mechan 
ism when the machine is running slow, is in 
adequate, or not always adequate, when the 
machine is running fast, and the controller 
mechanism may not always properly adjust 
itself before it is again clamped. 
The present invention provides means 
which release the controller mechanism after 
the needles have reached the top of their 
stroke. At this time it is not only possible 
to leave the controller mechanism unclamped 
for a longer time, but forces generated by 
the needle-operating mechanism are or may 
be effectively utilized to shift the controller 
mechanism. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification, Figure I is a view, 
in longitudinal section and front elevation, 
of a straw-sewing machine containing the 
improvements which constitute the inven 
tion, certain mechanism which has no imme 
diate connection with the invention being 
omitted. Figs. II and III are cross-sections 
of said machine. Fig. IV is a partial end ele 
vation, and Fig. V is a partial view in hori 
Zontal section. 
The omitted mechanism and a large part 
also of the mechanism shown is or may be 
the same as in our said application. 
It will be convenient first to describe this 
old machinery or such parts thereof as is 
deemed useful, using the marks of reference 
previously employed, and referring to our ap 
plication for a full description of any details 
omitted. The looper V and the threader W. 
are carried by a vertically-movable arm X, to 
a lateral projection 145 of which the presser 
foot (not shown) is attached. The real end 
of the presser-arm X is attached to the rock 
shaft B. When the needles R S have been 
thrust through the work, after reaching the 
top of their stroke they are drawn down so 
as to throw a loop from the eye-pointed nee 
dle R in the path of the looper V, which is 
thereupon caused to advance by mechanism 
not shown, and to enter and then to stretch 
90 
CO 
 
2 
412,218 
w 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOC 
IO5 
O 
II5 
the loop in front of the threader W, which 
catches the upper side of the loop, and by an 
outward movement (to the left in Fig. I) in 
troduces it under the barb of the needle S. 
The looper and the threader then retire, the 
needles descend, the feed takes place, and the 
needles rise, the eye-pointed needle R pass 
ing through the loop held on the barb-needle 
S, and the latter afterward releasing said loop, 
which is driven around the eye-pointed nee 
dle and is eventually locked by the thread 
pushed through it by said needle R. The 
needle-carrier P, Fig. I, is reciprocated through 
the rock-shaft Y and other connections by an 
eccentric F, (see Fig. II.) fixed on and revolv 
ing with the main shaft D, which is journaled 
in bearings of the frame A, and is driven by 
any suitable means. The eccentric F acts 
through the strap 7, pin 8, (in the outer end 
of a guide-arm 13,) link Z, pin 9, and block 11 
to move the arm 12 up and down, and thus to 
vibrate the rock-shaft Y, and the motion is 
conveyed from the rock-shaft Y to the nee 
die-carrier P through the lever-arm 19 and 
link 17. By placing the block 11 in the slot 
ted arm 12 nearer the rock-shaft Y the latter 
is turned through a larger angle and the nee 
dle-carrier P is given a longer stroke. By 
placing it nearer the outer end of the slotted 
arm 12 the length of stroke is diminished. 
The position of the block 11 is controlled by 
a connection with the presser-foot or presser 
arm X through the controller-shaft A'. When 
the block 11 is too near the rock-shaft, the 
presser-arm X, being drawn down by the 
presser-spring, (not shown,) acts through the 
boss 27 and depending projections 26 (both 
fixed on the presser-arm) and the link 25 
upon the Screw-pin 28, in the outer end of 
lever-arm 24, and pushes it down, thereby 
turning the controller-shaft A', moving the 
arm 22 up, and through the link 21, lever 
A', link 23, and pin 9, shifting the block 11 
away from the shaft Y until the further mo 
tion of Said presser-arm is arrested by the 
presser-foot resting upon the work. When 
the block 11 is too far from the rock-shaft Y, 
then the flat controller-spring 226 (whose 
near end is fastened to the arm 225 on rock 
shaft B) draws back the lever A', and with 
it, of course, the block 11, turning the con 
troller-shaft A and lifting the arm 24 and 
pin 28 until the latter comes into contact 
with the upper end of the slot in the link 25, 
and further motion is arrested. The parts 
are so proportioned and adjusted that solong 
as the pin 28 is at the top of said slot the nee 
dle-operating mechanism gives to the needle 
carrier P such a stroke as will present the 
needles in proper position relatively to the 
looper mechanism or looper V and threader 
W at the time the loop is taken. During the 
time the needles are being thrust through 
the work, and also during the operation of 
the feed, the controller mechanism is pre 
vented from moving by clamping the tail 34 
on lever A'. The lever C, mounted loosely 
on the shaft Y, so as to turn freely thereon, 
is provided with a screw 33, bearing against 
the elastic arm of the horizontal lever D', 
and when moved backward presses upon said 
lever D', so as to clamp the tail 34 on lever 
A' between the stationary screw 35 and the 
block 36 on the lever D'. 
So far there is nothing new in the ma 
chinery or its operation. 
In practically applying the improvement 
in the controller-clamp, the controller-clamp 
ing cam I is altered to effect a very short re 
lease of the controller-clamp before the nee 
dles or sewing implements R S are thrust 
through the work, and a considerably longer 
release just after they reach the top of their 
stroke. A suitable form of cam is shown in 
Fig. III. In the position shown (the needles 
being at the bottom of their stroke) the con 
troller mechanism is clamped and shifting of 
the block 11 is prevented. The portion 300 
of the cam-groove acts upon the lever C to 
release the controller mechanism before the 
needles enter the work, and to restore the 
clamp very soon after the release, while the 
portion 301 acts to release the clamp just af 
ter the needles reach the top of their stroke. 
During this second release the arm 12 of the 
rock-shaft Y is inclined upward, as indicated 
in dotted lines in Fig. II, and the downward 
thrust of the needle-operating eccentric F, 
being conveyed through the link Z, tends to 
shift the block 11 (whose position regulates 
the needle movement) toward the rock-shaft 
Y-that is to say, in the direction to adjust 
said block 11 and the controller mechanism 
for a higher position of the presser-foot. The 
controller-spring 226 tends to shift said block 
11 and the controller mechanism in the same 
direction. Consequently, if during the opera 
tion of the machine the presser-foot has been 
lifted by the work becoming thicker and the 
controller mechanism fails properly to ad 
just itself during the release of the controller 
clamp by the portion 300 of the operating 
cam I, then so soon as the said clamp is re 
leased by the portion 301 the thrust of the 
needle-operating eccentric F, (which thrust 
is greater as the speed of the machine is 
greater) or the tension of the spring 226, or 
both said forces, act upon the controller mech 
anism and shift the block 11 inward to the 
required extent (determined by the pin 28 
striking the top of the slot in the link 25) by 
the time the looper V is operated to take the 
loop from the eye-pointed needle, which op 
eration is made to take place a suitable time 
after the needles have reached the top of 
their stroke. 
This shifting of the block 11 
toward the rock-shaft Y causes, or may cause, 
a supplementary rise of the needles, and since 
it takes place after the needles have reached 
the top of their stroke, when if the controller 
mechanism had adjusted itself at the first re 
lease of the controller-clamp the revolution 
of the needle-operating eccentric F would 
produce a downward motion of the needles, 
412,218 
9. 
it diminishes the amount of downward mo 
tion which is given to the needles prior to 
the advance of the looper V; but it never 
theless allows some such motion to occur, in 
order that a loop may be thrown out in the 
path of the looper. Should the work become 
thinner, the presser-spring forces down the 
presser-arm X and presser-foot, which carry 
with them the controller mechanism, while 
the latter is unclamped against the pressure 
of any counteracting forces. By the form 
shown of the portion 301 of the clamping 
can the clamp is released for a considerable 
part of the revolution, so that the box 11 can 
be slipped outwardly-that is, away from the 
rock-shaft, Y-until the feed-surface is about 
to rise and take hold of the work, at which 
time the clamp is restored to prevent any 
change in the position of the controller mech 
anism which might be caused by the rise of 
the feed lifting the presser-foot and presser 
3. 
The needles R S are attached to the nee 
dle-carrier P by means of a bracket 200, to 
which the needles are or may be secured, as 
in the aforesaid application. 
Incidentally, new or improved means are 
shown for preventing entrance of straw into 
the machinery. They form no part of the 
present invention, but constitute the sub 
ject-matter of our application filed May 1, 
1888, and serially numbered 272,451. 
The invention is not restricted to the pre 
cise construction and arrangement shown. 
We claim as our invention or discovery 
1. In combination with the needle-operat 
ing mechanism having a part adjustable to 
regulate the needle-stroke, the controller 
mechanism for adjusting said part, and the 
controller-clamping devices, means whereby 
said clamping devices are released after the 
needles reach the top of their stroke, said 
means comprising a nuoving part of the ma 
chine-such as a rotary cam-surface- which 
releases and restores the clamp periodically 
and comes into position to effect such release 
after the needles reach the top of their stroke, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the needle-oper 
ating mechanism, comprising a rock-shaft 
provided with an operating-arm, a box ad 
justable lengthwise of said arm, an eccentric 
and link for vibrating said arm and rock 
shaft through said box, and the controller 
mechanism for adjusting said box, of an all 
tomatic intermittent clamp whose pressure is 
relieved when said operating-arm, eccentric, 
and link are in position for the force of said 
eccentric to move the said box in the direc 
tion for increasing the needle-stroke, said in 
termittent clamp having a suitable moving 
part-such as a rotary cam-surface-which 
-periodically releases and restores the clamp, 
and which comes into position to effect such 
release at the time just mentioned, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In combination with the looper mechan 
ism, the needle-operating mechanism having 
a part adjustable to regulate the needle 
stroke, the controller mechanism for adjust 
ing said part and the devices for clamping the 
controller mechanism, and the cam which acts 
upon said devices and causes them to release 
the said controller mechanism before the nee 
dles are thrust through the work to claimp 
the same during this operation, to release the 
clamp after the needles have reached the top 
of their stroke and before the looper mech 
anism takes the loop, and to restore the clamp 
during the time of action of the feed, said 
cam having inclines which act in succession 
upon the clamping devices and release and 
restore the clamp at the respective times 
stated, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
CHAS. H. WILLCOX. 
GEORGE H. NOBLE. 
Witnesses: 
GILMAN E. JOPP, 
LEONARD P. HASKINS. 
55 
65 
75 
25 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412318.txt	(No Model.) 
I. E. YOUNGBLOOD 
MOP. 
No. 412 
s 
318, 
A Yoze 72? Aaaaz 
N. PETERS. shot 
c-Lat: 
tographor, washingtan, D. c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISRAEL E. YOUNGBLOOD, OF MITCHELL, DAKOTA TERRITORY. 
MO P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 412,318, dated October 8, 1889. 
Application filed April 3, 1889, Serial No. 305,860, (No model.) 
To all won it inva? conce77. 
Beit known that I,ISRAELE. YoUNGBLOOD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Mitchell, in the county of Davison and Terri 
tory of Dakota, have invented a new and use 
ful Mop, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
mops; and it consists in certain novel fea 
tures hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view showing the mop arranged 
for use. Fig. 2 is a similar view showing the 
Fig. 3 is 
device adapted to wring the mop. 
a detail view of the holder with the mop or 
scrubbing-cloth removed. 
In carrying out. my invention I employ a 
handle A of suitable size and any proper ma 
terial. In the end of this handle I secure the 
rod or stationary member B, which is com 
posed, preferably, of wire twisted, as shown 
in the drawings, and having the hooks C at 
its end adapted to engage and secure the 
Scrubbing-cloth. D. Instead of constructing 
this stationary member of the holder of 
twisted wire, as shown, it may be constructed 
in any other suitable manner; but I prefer to 
construct it of the twisted wire, as I thereby 
secure great strength without increasing the 
weight of the device. 
The sliding member E of the holder con 
sists of a wire rod having a loop Fat its outer 
end, through which the scrubbing-cloth is 
passed, and an eye G, which fits upon the sta 
tionary member B, and is provided at its in 
ner end with the rings or loops H, encircling 
the handle A and sliding thereon. 
If so de 
sired, the eye G of the sliding member may 
be made large enough to slide over the end 
of the handle. 
The handle is provided near its lower or 
Outer end with a spring - catch I, which is 
adapted to engage the ring H when the slid 
ing member has been pushed outward, so as 
to hold it in the said projected position while 
the device is in use. The handle may be also 
provided, if so desired, near its upper end 
With the offsets J, so as to possess greater lev 
erage when wringing the scrubbing-cloth. 
In practice the scrubbing-cloth is passed 
through the loop F at the end of the sliding 
member, and its ends are secured by the 
hooks C at the end of the stationary member, 
as clearly shown. When the cloth is in use 
to mop up the floor, the sliding member is 
projected forward, as shown, and, as before 
stated, so as to cause the scrubbing-cloth to 
hang loosely, as will be readily understood. 
The device is then operated in the usual man 
ner. When it is desired to wring the cloth 
after it has been used, the sliding member is 
drawn inward and the members are then ro 
tated upon each other so as to twist the cloth, 
as shown in Fig. 2, and thereby expel the Wa 
ter therefrom. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that I have provided an extremely sim 
ple device, by the use of which any cloth may 
be used as a mop and which can be easily 
handled. 
When the device is in use, the loop and 
hooks at the outer ends of the two members 
serve as a backing for the scrubbing-cloth, 
so that the operator is enabled to apply more 
pressure thereto. When one cloth has been 
worn out, it can be quickly removed and a 
new one quickly substituted, and, as the de 
vice is composed of wire, as shown and de 
scribed, the operator is not subjected to Se 
were jars by the device striking against the 
wall or other object. 
The device may be held in any position 
while Wringing the scrubbing-cloth, and, as 
the cloth is twisted and one end is secured to 
the stationary member, it will always be held 
in its place. 
In forming the eye G and the inner ring Hi 
wire is employed, which is twisted over the 
member E, the central portion of the wire 
forming the eye G and its ends forming the 
inner ling H. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a mop, the combination of the handle, 
the stationary member secured thereto and 
provided at its end with hooks adapted to 
engage the scrubbing-cloth, and the sliding 
member moving on the handle and provided 
at its end with a loop to receive the scrub 
bing-cloth, and having an eye G near said 
loop encircling the stationary member, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a mop, the combination of the handle, 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
412,818 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as to 
the Stationary member secured thereto and 
composed of twisted wire having its ends bent my own I have hereto affixed my signature 
laterally and doubled on themselves to form 
hooks, and the sliding member moving on the 
handle and composed of twisted wire, the 
Outer end of Said sliding member being bent 
to form a loop adapted to engage the scrub 
bing-cloth, and an eye encircling the station 
ary member, as set forth. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ISRAEL E. YOUNGBLOOD 
Witnesses: 
A. U. MARVIN, 
J. L. HANNETT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412418.txt	(No Model.) 
... 
' 
No. 412,418, 
H. E. RUSSELL, Jr. 
SHEET METAL LATCH CASE, 
Patented Oct. 8, 1889. 
 
 
a 727, 2. 
s sess 
SS 
At/7%zzaza, 
24 at 57 27% 
M/72/7/27/ 
 
N. Peters, photo-lithographer, Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY E. RUSSELL, JR, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE RUSSELL & ERWIN MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
v 
SHEET METAL LATCH - CAS E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 412,418, dated October 8, 1889. 
Application filed May 31, 1889, Serial No. 312,673, (No model) 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, HENRY E. RUSSELL, Jr. 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Britain, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Sheet-Metal Latch 
Cases, of which the following is a specification, 
My invention relates to improvements in 
sheet-metal latch-cases; and the chief object 
of my improvement is to provide a connec 
tion for the cap and lock-post which shall 
present a neat finish upon the outside. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a face view of the cap side of my lock-case; 
and Fig. 2 is a horizontal section of a portion 
of the same on line acac of Fig. 1, one of the 
lock-posts being shown in elevation. 
A designates the cap, and B the body of the 
case. These parts are made of sheet metal, 
which in their general form may be like any 
known sheet-metal case. 
In locks of various kinds posts are secured 
at one or more points for various uses in con 
nection with parts of the latch or lock-as, 
for instance, for pivoting tumblers or angle 
levers, &c. These posts-as, for instance, the 
post 3, Fig. 2-are rigidly secured to the body 
of the lock-case B, as shown, and their oppo 
site end has been received in a perforation in 
the cap. Instead of a perforation, Istrike up 
or swage in the cap at the point or points de 
25 
Witnesses: 
THOS. S. BISHOP, 
M. S. WIARD. 
35 
40 
45 
signed to receive the ends of the post 3 a. 
socket, as at 4, Fig. 2, upon the inside of the 
cap A, and upon the outside thereofI form an 
ornamental boss 5, either with or without the 
surrounding ornaments. The internal socket 
and external boss will be formed simulta 
neously in dies at a single operation. The 
posts 3 are left long enough to enter these 
sockets, and thereby serve to steady them, 
and also to prevent a lateral movement of the 
cap. At the same time the cap is left solid 
with an ornamental surface, which may be 
japanned or finished in any desired manner, 
which finish will not be disturbed in any way 
or marred by the reception of the post with 
in the socket. In addition to the advantage 
of superior finish, the entire cap may beformed 
at a single blow of the press, and therefore 
produced at a small cost. 
I claim as my invention 
The herein-described sheet-metal lock or 
latch case having a post or posts secured to 
the body thereof and a cap provided with a 
socket swaged upon its inside for receiving 55 
the ends of said posts, substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose specified. 
HENRY E. RUSSELL, JR. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412518.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 412,518, 
Fi; 1. 
G. W. MATHEWSON. 
POWER JACK. 
Patented Oct. 8, 1889. 
Fig. 2. 
 
St. 
Il 
------2 
 
3. 
9 
  
gz's 
 
% 
. 
--- % fi 
S2 
. 
. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
WTNESSEs. 
6a, 7% A, 
INVENT LIF. 
744 
e-PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. MATHEWSON, OF COVENTRY, RHODE ISLAND. 
POWERJACK, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent.No. 412,518, dated October 8, 1889. 
Application filed December 26, 1888, Serial No, 294,616, (No model) 
- 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. MATHEW 
SON, of Coventry, in the county of Kent and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Power-Jacks, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of this 
specification. 
- 
This invention has reference to an improve 
ment in power-jacks, by which the same are 
especially adapted for use in drawing or pull 
ing out the spokes from the hubs of wheels 
without injuring the hubs, and is also readily 
adapted for pressing together the boards for 
floors before nailing. 
For these purposes the invention consists 
in the peculiar and novel construction of the 
frame in which the rack slides by providing 
the end with a concaved bearing to fit the hub 
and with a hole through which a pin is driven 
when the device is used for a floor-jack. 
The invention further consists in provid 
ing the head of the rack-slide with an adjust 
able clamping device, by means of which the 
spoke can be firmly held and drawn from the 
mortise of the hub, as will be more fully set 
forth hereinafter. 
In the drawings similar numbers of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts throughout, 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
side view of the improved power-jack, show 
ing the same supported on the hub and se 
cured to a spoke to be drawii from the mor 
tise of the hub. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of 
my improved power-jack, and Fig. 3 is a top 
view of the same. 
In the drawings, 4 designates the hub of a 
wheel; 5, the mortise or socket in which the 
tenon of the spoke 6 is secured. The spokes 
of wheels are firmly secured in the hub, and 
when on account of injury to the spokes, or 
any one of them, a spoke has to be removed 
(which is a matter of very frequent occur 
rence in any blackSmith Or Wagon-maker's 
shop) it is important that the spoke should 
be drawn out without injuring the mortise, 
into which the new spoke must fit accurately. 
For this purpose the spoke must be drawn 
out straight on the line of its axis. In large 
wheels this is a slow and laborious process. 
I have especially designed my improved 
power-jack for the purpose of performing the 
extraction of spokes from hubs, causing great 
saving in time and preserving the mortise in 
the hub, while the improved power-jack is 
also useful formany other purposes for which 
power-jacks are used. 
My improved power-jack consists of the 
metal standard 7, in which the rack-bar 8 
slides. The lower end of the standard 7 is 
provided with a concaved bearing 9, fitting 
the surface of the hub of a wheel, so as to 
form a firm support for the power-jack when 
used for drawing spokes from a hub. It is 
also provided with the hole 10, through which 
the pin 11 is inserted when the power-jack is 
used for a floor-jack to secure the standard 
to the floor-joists, The rack-bar is provided 
with the head 12, one side of which head has 
the serrated face 13. The links 1414 are con 
nected at one end by a bar which carries the 
clamp 15, the face of which is serrated like 
the face 13, so as to secure a firm hold on the 
spoke, as is shown in Fig. 1. 
To firmly hold the links 14 to the head, Ise 
cure the bolt 16 in the head 12 and provide 
both ends with a screw-thread and with clamp 
ing-nuts 17. Into the sides of the head 12 
and surrounding the bolt 16, I insert the cir 
cular disks 1818, as shown in broken lines in 
Fig. 3. The outer faces of these disks 18 are 
provided with projecting ribs which enter the 
grooves 19 on the inner surface of the links 
14. When now the links 14 are secured by 
the clamp-nuts 17, the ribs of the disks 18 
enter the grooves of the links and thus hold 
them firmly against Strain. On the links and 
still allow the links, and with the same the 
clamp 15, to turn on the bolt to adjust the 
clamp to the spoke. 
The rack-bar is shown as provided with 
ratchet or saw teeth, as is also the pinion. 20; 
but both may be provided with the usual 
gear-teeth. The lever 21 is hinged on the 
shaft 22, and on the shaft 22 the ratchet 
wheel 23 (a part of which extends into a 
groove formed in the ratchet-bar) is secured, 
having on each of its sides the pinions 20, op 
erating the rack-bar 8. The pawl 24 connects 
the lever 21 with the ratchet-wheel23 and op 
erates the pinions 20 in one direction to raise 
the rack-bar 8, which is held in the raised po 
'sition by the stop-pawl 25. The lever can 
75 
95 
ICO 
O 
25 
35 
.45 
So 
 
412,518 
IO 
then be moved in the opposite direction, the 
pawl 24 sliding over the ratchet-teeth of the 
wheel 23. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The combination, in a power-jack, of a 
head provided with the bolt 16, clamp-nuts 
17, the disk 18, links 14, and clamp 15, con 
structed to operate as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with the head of a 
power-jack provided with the bolt 16 and 
clamp-nuts 17, of the ribbed disk 18, the 
grooved links 14, and the clamp 15, as de 
scribed. 
3. A power jack consisting of the standard 
7, the rack-bar 8, provided with saw-tooth-sec 
tioned teeth and with the head 12, the pin 
ion 20, the ratchet-wheel 23, the lever 21, the 20 
pawl 24, connected with the lever 21, and the 
spring-pressed stop-pawl 25, pivoted in the 
standard 7, constructed to engage with the 
saw-tooth-sectioned rack of the rack-bar, as . 
described. 
4. In a power-jack, the combination, with 
the standard 7, provided with the concaved 
end 9, the rack-bar 8, provided with the head 
12, the pinion 20, ratchet-wheel 23, the lever 
21, pawl 24, and stop-pawl 25, of the bolt 16, 
clamp-nuts 17, disk 18, links 14, and clamps 
15, constructed to extract the spokes from the 
hub, as described. 
25 
GEORGE W. MATHEWSON. 
Witnesses: 
Jose:PHA. MILLER, 
JOSEPHA. MILLER, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412618.txt	(No Model.) 
F. HOLZ 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR PUNCHING AND FEEDING BLANKS. 
No. 412,618, 
Patented Oct. 8, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
o 
 
 
N 
-: 
e 
Ed 
IIM 
 
 
77 
- 
 
 
2. 
V 
R 
1 NSN1 
2:422. 
 
Zvit/vesses: 
20.6/iraizas/ova. 
-64-6-(6-4- 
/zzaveyaza/r: 
A 14 
7-care (17% 
4/ (224 (12. 22. 
/2.8-22 forz6a7s. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK HOLZ, OF CINCINNATI, Oil (). 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR PUNCHING AND FEEDNG BLANKS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 412,618, dated October 8, 1889. 
Application filed July 22, 1889, Serial No. 318,276, (No model.) 
55 
75 
N 
To all whon, it may concerni 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK IOLZ, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cin 
cinnati, in the county of Iamilton and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in the Process of and Appa 
ratus for Punching and Feeding Blanks for 
Wads, Washers, and the Like, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to a process of and 
apparatus for punching out blanks for wads, 
Washers, and the like from a fed-in strip of 
the material, reinserting such punched-out 
articles into the strip from which they were 
punched, and then feeding them on with the 
Strip to the point of delivery or discharge; 
and its object is to improve the process of and 
apparatus for punching and feeding blanks 
for Wads, washers, and the like. 
The novelty of my invention will be herein 
set forth, and specifically pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of a machine embodying my in 
vention and for carrying out my process. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional side elevation through 
the dotted line at a of Fig. 1, looking in the 
direction of the arrow and with the punch 
and associated parts up. Fig. 3 is a corre 
sponding view to Fig. 2, with the punch and 
associated parts down. 
The same letters of reference are used to 
indicate identical parts in all the figures. 
Any suitable frame-work-consisting in this 
instance of a table A and uprights B-has 
journaled in the top of the uprights a shaft 
C, provided with a driving-pulley D, and two 
eccentrics or cranks, from the former of which 
a pitman E extends down and is connected 
to a vertically-reciprocating head or plunger 
F, suitably guided between the uprights B. 
Secured to the plunger E, preferably by set 
screws Cl, so as to be adjustable, is a punch 
G. and a discharger H, pendent therefrom 
and in line with each other. The punch and 
discharger are of the same size and shape, 
usually circular in cross-section, and are ar 
ranged directly over a horizontal die-plate , 
having two perforations b c through it, the 
former directly beneath the punch G and the 
latter beneath the discharger II. Directly 
; beneath the perforation b, and in this in 
stance supporting the plate , is a tube or 
hollow frame J, secured to the table A and 
containing a coiled or other Spring d, upon 
which is supported a follower e, whose upper 
end snugly fits within the perforation b, or, 
as in this instance, within a tube f, secured 
in the perforation l, and against whose lower 
edge a flange g upon the follower is forced, 
by the action of the spring cl, to bring the 
top of the follower flush with the top surface 
of the plate I. Beneath the spring d is a 
washer h, adjusted by a set-screw i, passed 
through the table for regulating the tension 
of the spring d. 
IXI, are two feed-rollers suitably journaled 
between uprights.j upon the table, for feed 
ing the strip of material Y, whether paper, 
felt, leather, or metal, onto the plate I, by 
successive equal steps of advancement. Any 
suitable mechanism for actuating these feed 
rolls may be employed, and I have illus 
trated the roll K as secured to a shaft k, car 
rying a ratchetl, which is acted on at each 
upstroke of the plunger F by a dog pivoted 
to a carrier n, hung upon the shaft k by the 
side of the ratchet l, and pivoted to the lower 
end of a rod n, whose upper end is connected 
to an eccentric or crank upon the shaft C by 
the side of the wheel D. 
Upon the lower end of the punch G is fit 
ted a sliding clamping - collar 0, between 
which and a collar. p upon the punch is a 
coiled spring q, surrounding the punch. The 
collar p is preferably adjustable by a set 
screw to regulate the tension of the Spring q, 
and the collar o is held upon the punch by a 
pin r in the latter passed through a vertical 
slot in the former, or vice versa, as Will be 
readily understood. From this construction 
it will be seen that the strip having been fed 
in upon the plate I, provided with suitable 
guides-in this instance ribs S, Fig. 1-be 
neath the punch, as the latter descends the 
collar O is first arrested upon the strip which 
it clamps, and then the punch punches out 
the blank, the follower cyielding for that pur 
pose, as seen in Fig, 3. Upon the ascent of 
the punch, as seen in Fig. 2, and before the 
strip is fed farther in, the follower is forced 
do 
IC 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
IO 
2 
up by its spring d, thereby reinserting the 
punched blank into the space it occupied in 
the strip before punching. After this, upon the 
further ascent of the plunger, the strip is fed 
in one step, so as to bring the punched and 
inserted blank half-way between the punch 
and discharger, and then the punch descends 
and punches another blank which is inserted 
in the strip, as before described, and the strip 
again fed in, so that when the punch comes 
down the third time the first punched blank 
is directly over the perforation c, and is forced 
out by the discharger H. upon the table, or 
into any suitable receptacle, and so on con 
tinuously, so that at each downstroke a blank 
is punched and another previously punched 
discharged, as will be readily understood. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim 
1. The process of puhching blanks from a 
fed-in strip, consisting in first punching out 
the blank, then reinserting said blank into 
the strip, and then feeding the strip carry 
ing the punched-out blank to a discharger, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a blank-punching machine, the com 
15 
2 O 
25 
412,618 
bination, with a reciprocating plunger carry 
ing. a punch and a discharger, of a die-plate 
for the fed-in strip provided with perforations 
beneath said punch and discharger, and a 
yielding follower beneath said punch for re 
placing the punched - out blanks into the 
strip, substantially as described, 
3. In a blank-punching machine, the com 
bination, with a reciprocating plunger carry 
ing a punch and a discharger, of a die-plate 
for the fed-in strip provided with perforations 
beneath said punch and discharger, a yield 
ing follower beneath said punch for replac 
ing the punched-out blanks into the strip, 
and mechanism for feeding in the strip, Sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination and arrangement of 
the punch G, discharger H, die-plate I, pro 
vided with perforations bc, and tube J, pro 
vided with spring d and follower e, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
35 
45 
- 
FREDERICK HOILZ. 
Witnesses: 
- 
W. C. JIRDINSTON, 
CHARLES BILLON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412718.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 412,718, 
  
J. BARNHART. 
STEAM BOILER. 
Patented Oct. 15, 1889, 
4. 
r 
 
 
s 
w s 
i. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s s 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
sa. 
". 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BARNHART, OF ALTOONA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
STEAM - 
BOLE. R. . 
w 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 412,718, dated October 15, 1889. 
Application filed June 8, 1889, Serial No. 318,542, (No model.) 
. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN BARNHART, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Altoona, in the county of Blair and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Steam-Boilers, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawing. . 
In vertical steam-boilers which are con 
structed with flues extending above the water 
line and connected at their upper ends with 
an upper flue-sheet an objection exists by 
reason of the liability of the flues to become 
loosened at their connection with the said 
flue-sheet, thus rendering leakage of steam 
possible and impairing greatly the use of the 
boiler. This objection arises by reason of the 
fact that the upper ends of said flues being 
above the Water-line are not subjected to the 
modifying influence of said water, and thus 
when the fire is started the heat causes them 
to expand quickly at their connection with 
the flue-sheet, and as said sheet is not acted 
upon to an equal extent with the flues the ex 
pansion of the latter causes damage to the 
joint, and consequently looseness when the 
parts contract, 
The drawing, which is a vertical central 
section, represents a boiler embodying myim 
provements, the form shown being specially 
adapted for use with an engine, though it 
Will be understood that the same features 
are applicable to all kinds of boilers, such as 
for house use. 
In the drawing, B represents the fire-pot; 
C, the grate, and a? the flues for the products 
of combustion, extending through the water 
space W and connected at top and bottom to 
the flue-sheets g and m, respectively. 
The . 
water-space is continued or added to by the 
water-legs W, extending around the fire-pot 
and being formed by the shell of said pot. 
and the outer shell h. The Water-line is 
shown at l, and the flues a? extend above this 
to their points of attachment with the upper 
flue-sheet, and it will be apparent that these 
upper portions of the flues will receive the 
full action of the fire when it is started, which 
action, being unmodified by the water, will 
cause said tubes to expand quickly and before 
the flue-sheet and its supporting a shell are 
35 
40 
45 
so 
equally heated, with the effect above stated 
of causing looseness of joints. To remedy 
this, I employ a second set of tubes a to heat 55 
the shell which supports the upperflue-sheet 
and through it the sheet itself, so that the ex 
pansion of these parts will be approximately 
equal to the expansion of the flues. The shell 
h', which supports the flue-sheet g, is flaring. 
It extends below the water-line, and then hori 
Zontally to provide a supplemental flue sheet 
or flange K, which is connected to the outer 
shell h. This flange receives the supple 
mental flues a, which are thus shorter than 
the main fues and below the water-line. The 
heating of these tubes, therefore, is modified 
by the water throughout. When the fire is 
started, the heat passes through the tubes a, 
as well as through the main tubes a?, and the 
heating of the shell his simultaneous with 
and about equal to that of the flues a, and 
the expansion is likewise equal. The steam 
space S is heated from the shell as well 
as from the tubes, which heat acts upon 
the flue-sheet to expand the same, and this 
sheet is also acted upon by the heat from the 
flues C. A ring 4 is placed upon the flue 
flange K, which is preferably inclined in 
wardly and upwardly to deflect the heat 
against the shell h", and to provide a heating 
chamber a with a contracted opening at its 
upper end. The ring is formed with a shoul 
der, which receives the dome 3, provided with 
a damper 6, by which the entire draft may be 
shut off. An inner dome or shell 2 is located 
upon the upper flue-sheet, and this includes 
only the main flues a'. A damper 5 in this 
shell serves to shut off the draft from the in 
ner flues a' to any desired extent, leaving the 
draft through the outer tubes entirely free. 
By this the burning of the fuel is under more 
perfect control, as the draft may be regulated 
and rendered even over the grate. The steam 
is taken from the space S through the pipe in, 
For the purpose of rendering the draft equal 
at all points over the grate, and also to allow 
the use of a great number of tubes, the fire 
pot is specially constructed, being flared at 
its upper part i', which brings the outer flues 
a directly over the vertical shell of the fire 
pot, so that the draft is provided from the 
circumference of the grate all the Way across 
the same, the draft from the outer edge being 
75 
95 
Iod 
 
 
412,718 
2. In combination, the fire-pot, the flue 
sheets, the inner series of tubes a, extending 
above the water-line, the shell h' and flange 
K, the supplemental tubes a below the water 
line, and the ring 4 upon the flange K, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN BARNHART. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN CALVIN BARNHART, 
WILLIAM AIKEN. 
vertical through the flues a. This also pro 
vides a large flue-sheet relative to the diam 
eter of the fire-pot, and more flues may thus 
be employed. The fire-pot is made of a sin 
gle piece of metal, the upper part being flared. 
What I claim is 
1. In combination, the fire-pot, the upper 
and lower flue-sheets, the main flues a, ex 
tending from the fire-box above the water-line 
and connected with the upper sheet g, the 
shell hi? for the upper flue-sheet, said shell ex 
tending below the water-line, the flange K, 
and the series of supplemental tubesa outside 
the shell hand below the water-line, substan 
tially as described. 
O 
(5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412818.txt	No Model.Y 
No. 412,818, 
J. J. WOOD, 
ELECTRICAL, SWITCH. BOARD, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 15, 1889. 
-----N-------- 
s 
 
 
 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
s 
-- - -3- - - -> ? 
li 
No. 
- WITNESSES: 
N, PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washingto, p. C. 
c4 ?a 7% r 
- %. 
ATTORNEY 
(No Model.) 
No. 412,818, 
J. J. WOOD, 
ELECTRICAL, SWITCH. BOARD, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 15, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
V2-4. celled 
zz e 
22% 
INVENTOR. 
4. A-774) 
C4-4. 24.7% 
ATO 
EY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES J. WOOD, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
ELECTRICAL SWITCH - BOARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 412,818, dated October 15, 1889. 
Application filed December 14, 1887, Serial No. 257,869, (No model.) 
To all, zuihon, it inctly concer. 
Be it known that I, JAMES J. WOOD, of 
Brooklyn, Kings county, New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Electrical Switch-Boards, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates more especially to 
multiple switch-boards for electric-light lines, 
to be used in Central stations, from which a 
series of lines or circuits emanate and where 
a number of dynamos are operated, so that 
the different lines may be coupled with the 
different dynamos, or with each other, in va 
rious arrangements, according to circum 
Stances. 
My invention relates to that class of switch 
boards heretofore used chiefly for telephone 
stations, which employ a series of sockets on 
opposite sides of the board connected with 
the lines, the sockets being connected across 
the board by loops of cable having fixed on 
each end switch-pins which enter the sockets, 
so that by shifting the cables and switch-pins 
to different sockets various connections of 
the lines will be produced. In connection 
with the main switch-pins and cables minor 
switch-pins and cables are used for transfer 
or testing purposes. My improvements lie 
chiefly in the special form of the binding 
posts or terminals to which the lines connect, 
and which contain the sockets for the switch 
and transfer pins; also, to the special form of 
the switch-pins and the manner of connect 
ing the cables therewith and in the special 
formation of the pin-sockets and in the com 
bination of a lightning-arrester with the sock 
ets or terminals, and in other details, as here 
inafter fully set forth and claimed. 
In the drawings annexed, Figure 1 gives a 
front elevation of my improved switch-board, 
shown partly broken away to expose the sock 
et-heads or terminals and also the lightning 
arresters, and showing diagrammatically the 
connection of the lines and dynamos. Fig.2 
is a cross-section on acac, Fig. 3 is a cross 
section, on a larger scale, showing the con 
struction of the socket-heads, switch-pins, &c., 
more clearly. Fig. 4 is an enlarged plan of 
one of the socket-heads detached, with its ad 
jacent lightning-arrester. Fig. 5 is an en 
larged view of one of the switch-pins. Fig. 
6 is a similar view of one of the transfer-pins. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
Referring first to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the frame 
of the board consists of two strong end cleats 
or brackets a (t", joined by two main longi 
tudinal bars l l and two minor longitudinal 
bars c c', near the middle of the board, as will 
be readily understood from Figs. 1 and 2. To 
the top of the cleats, over the bars b b, are 
fixed the front or marginal boards d d", the 
inner edges of which are grooved to receive 
the tongued edge of the sliding leaf or board 
e, which may be slid off to expose the inner 
mechanism of the board or replaced to cover 
and conceal the same, as will be understood 
from Figs. 1 and 3. 
When in use the switch-board is presumed 
to be secured in a vertical position against 
the wall or other support, the end brackets 
a, a? having screw-holes to admit of the board 
being so secured, as seen in Figs, 1 and 2. 
Now, A are the main terminals or Socket 
heads of the board, which are fixed on the 
bars b b' in the space between the same and 
the marginal boards d d", and the socket end 
of each terminal, which is of rectangular 
form, protrudes through snugly-fitting Square 
apertures in the boards d d", to receive the 
switch-pins, as will be readily understood 
from Figs, 1 and 3. Each socket-head is ter 
minated with a binding post or socket f, 
which projects from the outer edges of the 
bars b b' to receive the wires from the lines 
or dynamos, as seen in diagram in Fig. 1, 
while from each alternate socket-head-that 
is, from all the socket-heads of one polarity 
there projects inwardly a serrated prong or 
tongue g, which closely approaches a simi 
larly-serrated tongue or prongh, which prongs 
h are secured to the central bars c c' and con 
nected to a copper strip i, or other large con 
ductor, which runs along the bars c c', and is 
connected to a binding-post k, projecting ex 
ternally from the middle of the bracket a, and 
connected by a suitable conductor l with the 
ground, as indicated in Fig. 1, thus forming 
a lightning-arrester to protect the dynamos, 
which may be connected with the switch 
posts, as will hereinafter more fully appear. 
Now, as shown best in Figs. 2 and 3, each 
socket-head A is formed with a tubular sock 
et-post m, which, as before stated, protrudes 
on the front of the board, and has a deep, 
slightly-tapering socket-hole to receive the 
95 
OO 
2 
412,818 
O 
25 
35 
main switch-pins n, which, as shown, are bent 
into a cranked or angular form, so that the 
handle O of the pin assumes an inclined po 
sition at about an angle of forty-five degrees, 
while the socketing end of the pin, while ta 
pering at the point, is otherwise straight and 
fits Snugly in a horizontal position in the 
SOcket-tube and makes electrical contact 
therewith, as shown best in Fig. 3. The 
Switch-pins n n are of course used in pairs to 
connect any two sockets across the board, 
and are hence joined by a slack length or loop 
of flexible conductor or cable p, heavily in 
Sulated, the core of which is metallically con 
nected at opposite ends to the respective 
SWitch-pins, as best seen in Fig. 3-that is, 
the covered ends of the cable are passed 
through the tubular wooden or non-conduct 
ing handles O and the metallic core of the 
cable is soldered into a hole in the end of the 
pins in, which are then screwed into the wooden 
handle, as shown at the base of Fig. 3, thus 
making a secure and simple connection. The 
Socketing ends of the switch-pins in are round 
in Cross-section, as best shown in Figs 3 and 
5; but their round or cylindrical surface is 
recessed with two angular notchesn', as shown 
best in Fig. 5, one on each side, so that when 
the pins are forced into their sockets a spring 
latch r, pivoted on the socket-head and actu 
ated by the spring r', will spring through an 
Opening in the socket-tube and engage one 
of the notches on the pin, and thus firmly 
hold the pin in its socketed position and pre 
Vent accidental removal. It will be also seen 
that the latch engaging the pin in the socket 
by a lateral pressure makes a better and 
surer contact, and obviates a very close fit of 
the pin in the socket, as the latch takes up 
any play, and thus renders contact certain, 
as will be readily comprehended from Fig. 3. 
It may also be seen, by referring to Fig 3, 
that as the pin has an engaging notch in 
both at top and bottom, either pin can be put 
into either the upper or lower socket, and 
Will always engage with the latch r of either 
SOcket, thus making the pins interchangeable 
in the sockets. 
It will be further noted, on referring to 
Fig. 3, that the bent form of the switch-pins 
and the inclined position of the handle bring 
the handle in a much more convenient posi 
tion to grasp and manipulate than if the 
handle were straight out in line with the 
Socket end of the pin and at right angles to 
the board, as is usually the case; and, further 
more, this bent form pf the pin and handle 
gives the handle the effect of a rotary crank 
lever, which enables the pins to be inserted in 
and removed from their sockets more easily. 
For example, to insert the pin, it is forced 
straight into its socket with a slight twisting 
motion, to insure better contact, and the 
latch r Will automatically snap into engage 
ment with the notched part and hold the pin 
securely, whereas, to remove the pin, the 
handle is rotated about one-quarter revolu 
tion until the notch n' is revolved away from 
the latch, which is thus pressed back by con 
tact with the round side of the pin, and is 
thus disengaged, so that the pin can now be 
drawn freely out of the socket. By this con 
struction it is, therefore, obvious that no 
accidental removal of the switch-pins, when 
once in place, can occur, and yet the inser 
tion and removal of the pins by intentional 
action is rendered very easy and convenient. 
Now, in addition to the main switch-pins in 
in and their cables p, one or two pairs of 
minor pins SS, termed transfer or test 
ing' pins, are used. These pins S are smaller 
than the main pins in, and are split or cleft 
for elasticity, as seen in Fig. 6, and are cy 
lindrical in form, but slightly swelled at the 
middle, with a tapered or rounded end, and 
the handles' is in a straight line with the 
pin, as illustrated, the pins being connected 
by a cable t, in the same manner as the main 
pins, as seen in Fig. 3. Now, the end of each 
Socket-tube n is fitted with a socket nose or 
blocku, having an inclined face and two sock 
et-holes it in said face, at right angles there 
to, but at an angle of about forty-five degrees 
to the socket m, one of the said holes u? be 
ing on each side of the main socket in, as 
fully shown in Figs. 1, 4, and 3, the transfer 
pins S being adapted to be inserted in either 
of these holes, as seen in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. It 
will therefore be seen that, according to this 
construction, the handles of the transfer-pins, 
when the pins are inserted in their socket 
holes, will stand straight out from the board 
at an upward incline of about forty-five de 
grees, and therefore at about a right angle 
with the handles of the main pins, as seen in 
Figs. 1 and 3, thus keeping each set of pins 
in distinct positions well separated from each 
other, and thus allowing free scope to the 
hand in manipulating either set of pins, and 
rendering it unlikely to confound one pin 
with the other or to accidentally displace one 
set of pins in operating the other set. 
When the switch-board is set up in a cen 
tral lighting-station the lines and dynamos 
will be usually connected therewith, as shown 
in diagram in Fig. 1-that is, each distinct 
line or circuit, as shown at v i in Fig. 1, will 
connect at its opposite end to the binding 
posts f of two adjacent socket-heads A A at 
the top of the board, while the poles of the 
dynamos U will connect to the two corre 
sponding socket-heads at the bottom of the 
board, as illustrated. By now connecting the 
socket-heads across the board by the switch 
pins and cables, as indicated by the wavy 
dotted line, the circuits of the two lines and 
dynamos will be completed, forming two dis 
tinct circuits, each operated by a distinct dyn 
amo. Referring, therefore, to Fig.1, it will now 
be apparent to the electrician that various 
changes in the circuits may be made by shift 
ing the switch-pins on the board according 
to circumstances. It is not necessary to de 
scribe all such changes, as they are so va 
75 
85 
95 
Od 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
412,818 
3 
rious, but a few may be referred to, so as to 
better illustrate the action of the parts. For 
instance, suppose it is desired to put the two 
circuits of the two dynamos in one series or 
circuit. In that case, one set of the transfer 
pins will be used to laterally connect the two 
inner socket-heads at the top and another 
Set to connect the two inner socket-heads 
at the bottom of the board. After this 
the main switch-pins connecting the two in 
ner Socket-heads across the board will be 
pulled out and the same replaced, so as to 
connect the two socket-heads laterally on 
the board, after which the transfer-pins will 
be pulled out and the main pins left in place, 
the transfer-pins being thus only used tem 
porarily to prevent breakage of the circuit 
while the main pins are being shifted. It 
will also be understood that any of the dyna 
mos v may be put in circuit with any of the 
lines ' by appropriate shifting of the pins, 
which will be obvious to the electrician, the 
transfer-pins being always used temporarily 
to maintain the circuit while the main pins 
are being shifted. In a similar way, by 
means of the transfer-pins, instruments may 
be introduced in any of the circuits to test 
the currents without breaking the circuit at 
any time. 
Referring to Fig. 1, the action of the light 
ring-arrester will be readily understood, for 
it will be seen that should lightning strike 
any of the lines : it will, of course, take the 
shortest passage to the earth, and will there 
fore jump from the line at the prongs g to the 
prongs h, and thence flow by the conductors 
ill to the ground, thereby saving the dyna 
mos U from any injury. It will be seen in 
Fig. 1 that the grounded binding-post k is 
formed with socket-holes k' to receive the 
transfer-pins, so that by proper connections 
of the transfer-pins with the lines and test 
ing-instruments tests can be made for leaks 
or grounds, as will be readily understood. 
On referring to. Figs. 3 and 4 it may be seen 
that the socket-nose u, having the two small 
socket-holes u' for the transfer-pins, is formed 
of a metallic block separate from the main 
socket-tube n, and is fitted tightly thereon 
and soldered thereto, as best indicated in Fig. 
3; but, if desired, the socket-block may be 
cast solid on the socket-tube n. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, in a switch-board, of 
two terminals adapted to be introduced in 
the circuit and formed with horizontal socket 
holes, with two switch-pins adapted to fit said 
holes, a handle fastened to each pin and pro 
jecting angularly therefrom in such direction 
that when the pin is in its normal position in 
the Socket the handle inclines downwardly, 
and a flexible conducting loop or cable se 
cured at each end to the pins and passing 
through and issuing from said handles, where 
by the flexure of the cable at its junction with 
the handles is reduced, and by its weight it 
tends to hold the pins in their normal posi 
tion in the sockets, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. In a switch-board, the combination, with 
terminals or socket-heads having a socket in. 
and an engaging-latch r, of the bent Switch 
pin in, having recess n' and crank-handle O 
relatively arranged so that when the recess 
is in position to be engaged by said latch the 
crank-handle is turned downward and tends 
by its weight to keep the pin locked by said 
latch, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth, 
3. In a switch-board, the combination, With 
two sets of socket-terminals having Spring 
latches entering their sockets and said latches 
relatively inverted in the respective sets, of 
two switch-pins and an intervening loop or 
cable, with its opposite ends connected to said 
pins, each of said pins bent downwardly and 
a handle fixed on the bent portion thereof, 
with the cable issuing from the end of the 
handle, and the pins formed each with notches 
or recesses on both top and bottom sides for 
engagement by said latches, whereby the pins 
may be entered in the sockets of either set of 
terminals interchangeably, and when engaged 
there with the handles project downwardly 
and the weight of the handles and cable 
tends to retain the pins in the engaging-po 
sition, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a switch-board, the combination of 
terminals or socket-heads formed with main 
sockets na, extending horizontally, and With 
minor sockets at', extending downwardly at 
an inclination adjacent to the main Sockets, 
with main switch-pins to fit the main sockets, 
formed with handles bent downwardly, and 
minor switch-pins to fit the minor sockets, 
formed with straight handles, all combined 
and arranged substantially as shown and de 
scribed, whereby, when the pins are inserted, 
the handles of the main pins project down 
wardly and those of the minor pins project 
upwardly at widely-diverging angles, so that 
they are readily distinguishable and accessi 
ble without interfering with one another. 
5. In a switch-board, the combination, with 
the end brackets C, a, of the longitudinal 
bars lib', marginal boards d d', pin-sockets 
or terminals fixed to bars b band projecting 
through said boards d d", and central sliding 
leaf e, substantially as shown and described. 
6. In a switch-board, a terminal or socket 
head formed with the binder f, socket-tube 
m, and prong g, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
JAMES J. WOOD, 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. M. HIGGINS, 
JNO. E. GAVIN. 
65 
7 5 
So 
9 O 
95 
CC 
Iso 
I I5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US412918.txt	(No Mode.) 
E. E. ERTSMAN. 
FORCE CAN, 
No. 412,918, 
Patented 00t, 15, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 
1y evy 
III 
Se 7 
7. 
 
 
\\ 
12 
 
 
 
 
 
\ 
W V 
  
 
 
 
 
 
H 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
EMANUEL E. ERTSMAN, OF PULLMAN, ILLINOIS. 
FORCE-CAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 412,918, dated October 15, 1889. 
Application filed April 12, 1889, Seriai No. 307,066, (No model.) 
 
--- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EMANUEL E. ERTSMAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Pullman, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Eorce-Cans, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The principal object of my invention is to 
provide a can for containing water or oil or 
Other liquid with simple and efficient means 
Whereby an operator may readily eject the 
liquid from the can either with a moderate or 
With considerable force, further objects being 
to permit the operator while holding the can 
With One hand to also utilize the same hand 
as a means for operating the liquid-ejecting 
device; also, to permit the device to be read 
ily taken apart and cleaned; to provide the 
can With a highly - efficient construction of 
adjustable spraying-nozzle; to provide a con 
struction which, while rendering the device 
particularly Serviceable as a closed sprinkler, 
shall also permit it to be readily and conven 
iently used as an oiler, and to provide certain 
In Ovel and improved details of construction. 
To the attainment of the foregoing and 
Other useful ends my invention consists in 
matters hereinafter setforth, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
. In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents in elevation a force-can embodying 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical central 
Section of the same. Fig. 3 is a horizontal 
Section on line 33 in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a lon 
gitudinal Section, on a larger scale, of the 
discharge portion of the spout shown in Fig. 
2, it being observed that while I have in Fig. 
1 shown the can provided with an ordinary 
tapered discharge-spout I have in Fig. 2 pro 
vided the can with my improved rose or spray 
noZZle. Fig. 5 represents a section taken 
through the discharge end of the spout shown 
in Fig. 4. Online 55, the valves or spray-regu 
lating devices of the nozzle being, however, 
shown in plan view. 
In said drawings, Aindicates the can, which 
contains a chamber a for oil or water, and as 
a means for providing said chamber I ar 
range Within the can at a suitable distance 
above its lower end a horizontal partition or 
false bottom C', as in Fig. 2. By reason of 
Said arrangement of partition or false bot 
tom the lower interiorportion of the can-body 
forms a chamber a, which said chamber 
serves to receive the elastic diaphragm B. 
when said diaphragm is in its normal raised 
condition, as in said Fig. 2. The diaphragm 
B in its normal condition assumes a semi 
spherical condition, excepting its circular 
edge portion, which said edge portion is suit 
ably clamped and held at the lower end of the 
can-as, for example, the can is herein pro 
vided with a central opening in its bottom . 
end, whereby, while said opening permits the 
semi-spherical portion of the diaphragm to 
rise within the can, the flat circular edge por 
tion of the diaphragm can be clamped be 
tween the annular flange a' at the lower end 
of the can-body and the flanged portion c of 
a cup C, which is so flanged along its upper 
edge that it may be detachably fitted to the 
lower end of the body of the can A. The Cup 
C is provided with a suitable bottom c', and 
is closed at its top by the flexible diaphragm, 
which latter may be forced by a piston D 
down into said cup. By reason of Such air 
rangement the cup C, when applied to the 
can, constitutes a portion of the same, whereby 
the can has three chambers-namely, the up 
per chamber C, which serves as a reservoir 
for the liquid, the chamber a, which may be 
termed the piston or  diaphragm cham 
ber, and the chamber c, which is formed 
within the cup C, and which may be said to 
constitute the ejecting-chamber or the liquid 
receiving portion of the piston-chamber. The 
ejecting-chamber c communicates with the 
reservoir-chamber a through the medium of 
a passage e, which at its lower end opens into 
the spout F and at its upper end opens into 
a chamber e', which communicates with the 
reservoir-chamber C, through the medium of 
the valved port G, that is formed in the par 
tition a'. The passage e is desirably formed 
by a tube E, while the small chamber or pas 
sage e' is desirably formed by a suitably 
shaped small case or partition arranged 
within the chamber a, it being observed that 
this small chamber e' is desirable in order 
that the port G can be closed by a suitable 
flap or check valve, which opens downwardly 
from the reservoir-chamber C, and in Wardly 
into the passage e'. The plunger or piston 
D rests at its lower end upon the diaphragm 
95 
Iod 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
 
 
 
| 
412,918 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
and has its vertical stem portion arranged 
hin and guided by a tubular bearing a', 
hich rises centrally from the partition a '. 
he tubular bearing a' is, however, desirably 
ent or deflected at its upper end portion, so 
that its upper end a may terminate at a point 
where a lubricant can be readily introduced 
therein for the purpose of lubricating the pis 
ton-stem and its cylindric bearing or guide. 
By the foregoing arrangement, when the 
elastic diaphragm is depressed by the piston, 
the valve g will be closed and liquid within 
the chamber c will be ejected therefrom 
through the spout F. When the piston is re 
5 leased and the diaphragm permitted to rise 
to its normal condition, the tendency to cre 
ate a vacuum within the ejecting-chamber c' 
will cause the check-valve g to open, and 
hence permit liquid from the reservoir-cham 
ber a to flow through the port G into the 
valve-chamber e', and thence through the 
passage e into the ejecting-chamber by way 
of the lower or inner portion of the spout F. 
As an exceedingly simple, convenient, and 
25 efficient means for operating the piston I pro 
vide a thumb-piece H, which has its upper 
Vertical portion arranged to slide along the 
Outer side of the can and its lower horizontal 
portion arranged to enter the can, so as to 
connect With the piston, and in this connec 
- tion I prefer providing the piston with a brace 
d, which serves to hold the thumb-piece in 
rigid connection with the piston. In order 
to permit the required up-and-down move 
ment of the thumb-piece, the can is provided 
at its lower portion with a vertical slota, Fig. 
2, through which the lower horizontal por 
tion of the thumb-piece passes. The can is 
also provided with a handle I, which is ar 
ranged adjacent to the thumb-piece, so that 
While the operator may readily grasp the can 
by its handle he may use the thumb or finger 
of his hand which holds the can-handle as a 
means for depressing the thumb-piece. By 
Such arrangement, therefore, the operator may 
hold the can by its handle with one hand and 
use the thumb or a finger of the same hand 
for depressing the thumb-piece, which, when 
depressed, necessarily draws down the piston 
and thereby causes the same to depress the 
diaphragm, which will thereby serve to eject 
liquid from the ejecting-chamber. 
The cup C, which practically constitutes a 
detachable bottom for the can, may be re 
moved for the purpose of cleaning out the 
ejecting-chamber, and to such end the tube E 
is coupled to the spout F by a threaded sleeve 
or collpling e, which at one end connects 
With the tube E by a threaded joint and at 
its other end screws into a threaded seat e, 
with which the spout F is provided. The 
tube E is threaded some way up from its 
lower end, whereby, when it is desired to de 
tach the cup from the body of the can, the 
coupling e can be screwed up on the tube E, 
SO as to disengage the coupling from the 
spout F. 
45 
55 
For some purposes I propose providing the 
spout F with an ordinary nozzle K, having a 
small discharge end, as in Fig. 1, such ar 
rangement being particularly desirable when 
the can is to be used as an oiler. As a fur 
ther feature of improvement, however, I pro 
pose providing the can with a nozzle L, hav 
ing a widened discharge end portion l, pro 
vided with a set of valves or spray-regulat 
ing devices M. As best illustrated in Figs. 
4 and 5, each one of said valves or Spray 
regulating devices consists of a conical or ta 
pered sleeve or tube im, provided with inlets 
m and having at its inner end a threaded 
bearing n for the threaded end of a screw 
m, which said screw has a flared head m' 
and a flat lug or projection m, which ex 
tends outwardly from the face of Said head. 
The screws in constitute adjustable valves, 
while the sleeves n, constitute valve-seats 
having inlet-ports m' and outlet-ports, the 
latter being the outer and larger ends of 
said hollow conical valve-seats. The lugs m 
upon the screws or valves m are simply 
provided as means whereby an operator may 
with his fingers readily take hold of and turn 
the valves, so as to adjust them with refer 
ence to the desired area of opening be 
tween the heads in of the valves and the 
outer ends of the hollow conical valve-seats. 
By such arrangement the valves can be ad 
justed so as to permit the water to be dis 
charged in extremely thin sheets, it being ob 
served that for sprinkling clothes and the 
like I find such arrangement highly effective. 
The can may be made as large as desirable 
and when made for sprinkling clothes it 
should be of such size that when filled the 
operator can easily hold it in one hand. It 
may of course when adapted for use as an 
oiler be made much smaller. 
The can is provided at its top with a suit 
able cover a, which can be removed for the 
purpose of filling the reservoir-chamber a, 
The elastic diaphragm D may be made in 
one piece, and while it can be held in various 
ways along its edge portions, I prefer the ar 
rangement herein shown for the reason that 
the parts can be separated when so desired. 
The lowest portion of the can which is formed 
by the cup C maybe screwed to the lower end 
of the body of the can or otherwise suitably 
fitted thereto, and the nozzles K and L. may 
be detachably fitted to the spout F, so that 
one may be substituted for the other, accord 
ing to requirements. 
When the parts are fitted together, the de 
vice as a whole will have a simple and neat 
appearance, as in Fig. 1. The handle I is 
also desirably attached to the lower portion 
C of the can, which for convenience I have 
hereinbefore termed a cup,' whereby there 
will be no danger of the detachment of the 
lower portion of the can when it is lifted by 
the operator. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A force-can for the purpose set forth 
IIo 
II5 
I 25 
412,918 
8 
O 
5 
comprising the reservoir-chamber a, the eject 
ing-chamber c, the chamber a, intervening 
between said two chambers, the flexible dia 
phragm B, arranged to normally rise within 
said intervening chamber, the vertically-slid 
ing piston arranged to bear upon the flexible 
diaphragm, a thumb-slide for operating the 
piston, a valved passage leading from the 
reservoir-chamber to the ejecting-chamber, 
and a spout connected with the ejecting 
chamber by a lateral passage, said members 
being combined and organized for operation, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the can provided 
with an ejecting- chamber, a flexible dia 
phragm, and a piston, for the purpose set 
forth, of the spout connected with the eject 
ing-chamber and having a widened discharge 
end l, provided with a set of spray-regulating 
2O devices M, each consisting of a conical tube 
m, having an inlet m', and containing a screw 
in, arranged so that its head can be set with 
reference to the larger outer end of the tube, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the body of the can con 
taining a reservoir-chamber, the cup C, pro 
vided with a spout and an ejecting-chamber 
and detachably applied to the body of the 
can, the piston and flexible diaphragm for 
forcing liquid from the ejecting-chamber, and 
a valved passage connecting the reservoir 
chamber with the said cup and consisting of 
the tube E and a coupling for detachably con 
necting said tube with the cup, for the pur 
pose described. 
EMANUEL E. ERTSMAN. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. G. PAGE, 
ANNIE COATES. 
a 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413018.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
A. E. BRAY. 
TUG STRAP HOLDER FOR I,00MS, 
No. 413,018, 
Patented Oct. 15, 1889. 
 
f - azy. -2. 
a 
2-4C4 c.7%a.-- 
60.6% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW E. BRAY, OF NEW BEDFORD, MASSACHUSETTS, 
UG STRAP HODER FOR O OVS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 413,018, dated October 15, 1889, 
Application filed July 9, 1889, Serial No. 816,904. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, ANDREW E. BRAY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Bedford, in the county of Bristol and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented a new and 
useful Improvementin Adjustable Tug-Strap 
Holders for Looms, of which the following is 
a specification. . 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of a picker-staff having my im 
proved tug-strap holder adjusted thereon. 
Fig. 2 is an edge view of the tug-strap holder 
when removed from the picker-staff. Fig. 3 
is a side view of a picker-staff, showing a 
modification of my improved tug-strap holder 
adapted to go on the edge of the picker-staff; 
and Fig. 4 is an edge view of the same. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
In Fig. 1, Cl, represents a picker-staff of a 
loom, and b is the tug-strap holder. 
c is a leather thimble secured to the upper 
is of the holder and inclosing the picker 
Staff. 
f is an offset in the holder, a depression or 
recess in which rests the tug-strap g. 
did are holes in the lower end of the tug 
strap holder, of a size to fit the stude, on which 
the lower end of the picker-staff is pivoted. 
In Fig. 3, b represents the tug-Strap holder, 
which is secured to the picker-staff (t by 
means of the leather thimbles C C, which are 
made fast to the holder. The lower thimble c 
is provided with the projection h, having a 
number of holes in it, as fully shown in Fig. 4. 
In order to adjust the tug-strap holder 
shown in Fig. 1, so as to give a greater or less 
O 
25 
35 
throw to the picker-staff, the retaining-pin 
in the stude is removed, and the lower end 
of the tug-strap holder removed from the 
stude and adjusted to the desired height by 
means of the holes did. 
In order to adjust the tug-strap holder 
shown in Fig. 3, the screw i is removed from 
the picker-staff and the tug- strap holder 
moved up or down, as desired, when the screw 
ti is adjusted in another hole of the projec 
tion h. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A tug-strap holder for looms, consisting 
of the barb, having offset f, formed with a de 
pression or recess adapted to receive and hold 
the tug-strap, and provided with a thimble c, 
adapted for inclosing the picker-staff, and 
having a series of holes for the reception of 
a device for holding it in place upon the 
picker-staff, as and for the purpose shown and 
described. 
2. A tug-strap holder for looms, consisting 
of the bar b, having offset f formed with a 
depression or recess to receive and hold the 
tug-strap, the thimbles C c, and the projection 
h, Secured to the lower thimble c, and provided 
with a series of holes for the reception of a 
fastening-screw for Securing the tug-Strap 
holder in place upon the picker-staff, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
45 
55 
ANDREW .E. BRAY. 
Witnesses: 
J. T. GILLINGHAM, 
HENRY W. MASON. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413119.txt	(No Model.) 
T, R, WEY ANT. 
PILLOW SHAM. HOLDER, 
No. 413,119, 
Patented Oct. 15, 1889. 
 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
e- 
ce-L a 
'"Witnessfs. 
-%22% 
7%ze. 
N. Prers. Photo-Lithographer. Washingsom, d. C. 
 
  
e 
S23257 
Sh ast 
| 2 
0 y 
-2 rea, 6%-4- 
"-6-67. 
INVENTOR 
ATFORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS R. WEYANT, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PLOWSHA M H ODER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 413,119, dated October 15, 1889, 
Application filed June 5, 1889, Serial No. 313,191 (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, Luhon, it Tinay concern. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS R. WEYANT, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, a 
citizen of the United States, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Com 
bined Pillow-Sham Holder and Mosquito 
Frame Support, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to a combined pil 
low-sham holder and mosquito-frame sup 
port which can be applied with great facility 
to the bed-posts of any bedstead, and which 
forms not alone a simple and conveniently 
operated holder for the pillow-sham, but also 
a supporting device for an arm by which the 
mosquito-frame is supported. 
The invention consists of the combination, 
with a pillow-sham holder, of brackets for 
supporting the same, said brackets being 
made integral with a rectangular clamping 
piece which is applied to the bed-post and 
supported thereon by a secondangular clamp 
ing-piece and a fastening-screw that connects 
said clamping-pieces. One clamping-piece is 
rovided with a beveled face and the other 
with a beveled flange which overlaps the bev 
eled face and permits thereby the adjustment 
to different sizes of posts. The bracket 
clamp-piece is provided with a socket-hole for 
supporting the arm of the mosquito-frame. 
It is also provided with a lug that meshes 
with the teeth of a pinion on the pivot-shaft 
of the pillow-sham holder, so as to lock the 
same in proper position. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a perspective view of a bedstead 
with my improved combined pillow - sham 
holder and mosquito-frame support attached 
to the posts of a bedstead. Fig. 2 is a hori 
Zontal section drawn on a larger scale through 
the head-piece and posts of the bedstead, 
showing the pillow-sham holder and its sup 
porting-bracket clamps in top view and partly 
in horizontal Section. Figs. 3 and 4 are a 
side elevation and horizontal section of the 
supporting - clamp, drawn on a still larger 
Scale. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
head-piece of a bedstead, and B B the posts 
of the same. C is the pillow-sham holder, 
which is made of the usual construction, and 
provided at both ends with pivots did, that 
are supported in brackets d' of the clamps DD, 
which are applied to the bed-posts BB. One 
of the brackets d' of one of the clamps D is 
provided with a fixed lug or pine, that is made 
integral with said bracket, and which engages 
a pinion e' on one end pivot of the pillow 
sham holder C. The pivot at the other end 
of the pillow-sham holder is made of suffi 
cient length to permit the lateral shifting of 
the pillow-sham holder and its pivots in the 
Supporting-brackets, so as to permit of the 
pine clearing the teeth of the pinion e', so 
that the pillow-sham holder can be raised or 
lowered, as required. When the pillow-sham 
holder has been properly adjusted, it is shifted 
back into its normal position, so that the lug 
or pine can re-engage the pinion e' and lock 
the holder thereby rigidly in position, as 
shown in Figs. 2 and 4. The bracket-clamps 
which support the pillow - sham holder are 
each composed of two rectangular sections b 
b', the sections b b being each made integral 
with the Supporting-brackets of the pillow 
sham holder, and provided with an opening 
f, which forms a socket for a bent arm F, that 
can be inserted into said socket-hole, and is 
provided with a shoulder, so as to rest on the 
section b. The upper end of the supporting 
arm F is provided with a hook-shaped end for 
receiving the eye of the mosquito-frame, which 
is suspended therefrom... When the mosquito 
frame is not required, the arm F is removed, 
the clamp-piece being then used as a pillow 
sham Supporter in the usual manner. 
The rear sections b' of the clamps B are 
screwed to the rear part of the bed-post B 
and each connected by a screw-bolt M, pass 
ing through the same, with the section b, which 
has a threaded socket for said bolt, as shown 
clearly in Fig. 4. Each rear section b'is pro 
vided with a beveled forwardly-extending 
flange b, which fits on the beveled face of the 
front clamp b, and permits thereby the ad 
justment of the clamp to any size of bed 
post. By applying the screw-bolt the two 
clamp-sections are firmly clamped to the bed 
post, a layer N of felt or other suitable cush 
ioning material being interposed between the 
90 
IOO 
IO 
25 p. 
35 
45 
413,119 
O 
sides of the bed-post and the inner surface 
of the clamp-sections, so as to prevent the 
chafing and scratching of the bed-post. By 
loosening the screw-bolts M the pillow-sham 
holder and its supporting-brackets may be 
readily removed. 
The parts can be readily applied and form 
a strong and reliable support for the pillow 
sham holder, as Well as for the mosquito-frame 
when the same is desired to be used. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. A clamp for pillow-sham holders, Com 
posed of a front section provided with a 
bracket for supporting a pillow-sham holder, 
a rear section adapted to be secured to a bed 
post, and a connecting Screw-bolt engaging a 
threaded socket of the front section, Substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. A clamp for pillow-sham holders, com 
posed of a front section provided with a 
bracket for a pillow-sham holder, a rear clamp 
adapted to be attached to a bed-post and pro 
vided with a beveled flange sliding on a bev 
eled face of the front section, and a connect 
ing screw-bolt engaging an interiorly-thread 
ed socket of the front section, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. A supporting-clamp adapted to be at 
tached to a bed-post and composed of a front 
Section, a rear Section, a connecting ScreW 
bolt engaging a threaded socket of the front 
section, said front section being provided 
with a socket-hole, and a bent arm fitting 
therein and adapted to support a mosquito 
frame, Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
THOMAS R. WEYANT. 
Witnesses: 
MARTIN PETRY, 
JOHN A. STRALEY. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413219.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 413,219, 
G. ANDREE.N. 
SHUTTER WORKER 
Patented Oct. 22, 1889. 
 
  N 
S 
S 
22 
N 
 
?? 
?? 
ig 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithograp 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAVE ANDREEN, OF OMAHA, NEBRASIKA. 
SHUTTER - WORKER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 413,219, dated October 22, 1889. 
Application filed July l, 1889, 
Serial No. 316,27, (No model.) 
45 
55 
overhang the striker-plate A, and thus form 
a pocket or cavity against which the water 
may impinge. As thus constructed, the 
stream of water may be directed by the pipe 
man against either face of the striker-plate A 
to shift the door or shutter section back and 
forth, as may be necessary, to close or open 
the entrance. By this expedient the pipe 
man can command the doors or windows of 
a warehouse within the reach of the hose 
stream and either open or shut the same by 
the impact of the stream of water without 
difficulty, since the door or shutter section 
slides easily upon its supporting-rail. 
Having thus described the invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the supporting 
rail and with the door or shutter mounted to 
slide thereon, of the striker-plate projecting 
from said shutter or door and in position to 
receive the impact of the hose-stream, whereby 
the door or shutter may be shifted, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, with the supporting 
rail and with the door or shutter mounted to 
slide thereon, of the striker-plate projecting 
from said shutter or door and having an 
overhang at its top to form a pocket or cav 
ity against which a hose-stream may be di 
rected to shift the door or shutter, substan 
tially as described. 
- 
GUSTAWE ANDIREEN. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. A. HOFF, 
JOHN HANANSON. 
?. ? 
To all, ??h???, i? ??? ????cer?: 
Be it known that I, GUSTAVE ANDREEN, a 
resident of Omaha, in the county of Douglas 
and State of Nebraska, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Fire-Proof 
Doors or Shutters, of which the following is 
hereby declared to be a full, clear, and exact 
description, sufficient to enable others skilled 
in the art to which said improvements relate 
to make and use the same. 
The invention relates to that class of heavy 
shutters or doors arranged to slide in front 
of windows or other openings, and which are 
made of iron or other fire-proof material for 
protection against fire. 
The invention has for its object to provide 
means whereby the shutter or door may be 
shifted in position along the rail, either back 
or forth, by means of the hose-stream directed 
against the same. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows an outside view of a shutter or door 
made in accordance with the invention. Fig. 
2 is a sectional view thereof. 
Each leaf or section of the door or shutter 
D is furnished with suitable hangers E, carry 
ing rollers e, which travel upon the horizon 
tal rail B, secured above the opening to be 
covered, and the lower portion of the door. 
will be guided by a suitable bottom rail B', 
in manner well understood. Upon the front 
or outer face of each section D of the shutter 
or door is fixed a striker-plate A, that rises 
preferably from a base-plate a, secured to the 
door-section, this base-plate being conven 
iently extended at its top, as at a', so as to 
- 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413319.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
A. GOLDENBERG. 
FILE OUTTING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 43,319, 
Patented Oct. 22, 1889. 
ZSS2 
222222222x2 
727. 6. ceaWS 
essWA 
&gt; 
Y 2-4- 
- 
N. perERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. D.C. 
 
Anvento 
(72.frea &T. 
Ay 4. W7%-4 
Attorney 
No Model.) 
No. 413,319, 
a sheet-sheet 2. 
A. GOLDENBERG. 
FILE OUTTING MACHINE, 
Patented Oct. 22, 1889. 
 
   
 
React 
N22222 
SYYYYAG: 
 
 
  
 
 
r, 
7727Zase 
(2/2/). 
1 
- SeaW f 
fees 
GESAWssTH 
sea 
 
 
 
SeaR 
Za vezzo 
2777-e6-2a. ext 2-eny 
22 (26 to pree 7 
 
N, PETERS. Bioto-litrographer, Washington. ... 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED GOLDENBERG, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
FILE-cutting MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,819, dated October 22, 1889. 
Application filed April 9, 1889, serial No. 306,528, (No model.) 
O 
My 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, ALFRED GOLDENBERG, 
of Paris, France, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in File-Cutting Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The invention consists, niore particularly, 
in providing a rocking bed or holder con 
structed to present two or more file-blanks to 
the cutting-tools, in such manner that half 
round or other formed file-blanks may be 
evenly cut. 
invention provides an improvement 
which may be applied to machines now in 
use to enable them to cut two or more files at 
the same time, although the drawings here 
with provide for only two files; and it is to 
be further understood that I do not confine 
myinvention to the style of cutter here shown 
and described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure.1 is 
afront view of a file-cutting machine embody 
Fig. 2 is a side view of 
ing my invention. 
- 
Figs. 3 and 4 show a holder for 
the same. 
flat files. Fig. 5 is a longitudinal section 
thereof. Fig. 6 is a top view of the same; 
and Figs. 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 show modifications 
for holding round or half-round files. 
I will describe a machine embodying my 
improvement, and then point out the novel 
features in claims. 
The machine consists of a frame or standard 
A, a hammer B, to which the chisel C is se 
cured in any well-known manner, and a bed 
or table F, which is furnished with a longi 
tudinal slideway for the file-holders G. Along 
side the bed or table F the rules or guides D 
are adjusted. The form of these guides vary 
to accommodate the different thicknesses of 
files to be cut, and the said guides work by 
means of rods fixed on an india-rubber spring 
placed inside the frame-work at the point E. 
This rubber spring acts similarly to a brake 
on the hammer B, and diminishes or increases 
the intensity of the stroke of the hammer, ac 
cording as the regulating-screw is raised or 
lowered. The movement and speed of the 
bed or table F is regulated by gearing H, ar 
ranged at the back of the machine, which, 
when engaging with a Worm-shaft, imparts a 
to-and-fro movement to the table F. 
I combine with the cutting table and mech 
anism a file-holder constructed in such a way 
that each file to be cut has a mounting able 
to oscillate separately, while at the same time 
it advances with a perfect regularity. ... The 
file-holder may be described as follows: I use 
a block G, of cast-iron, which is placed in the 
groove of the carrying-table F. This block. 
G has in all its length a half-round groove, in 
which a semi-cylindrical fulcrum-block J is 
placed. In order to cut flat files (see Figs. 3, 
4, 5, and 6) two half-round slides are arranged 
at the flat part of this fulcrum, which slides 
run parallel and hold two file-holder's M, and 
the upper surface of which is provided with 
two small tin plates or blades N, on which the 
file-blanks L are fixed. These two file-hold 
ers, being semi-cylindrical, can oscillate trans 
versely, which causes each file-blank, during 
the cutting, to take a position exactly corre 
sponding with the line of contact with the 
chisel. On one of the holders the file-blank 
is fixed in advance of the other, so as to regu 
late the obliquity of the cutting. 
As the round and half-round files have on 
their backs a series of cuttings almost par 
allel, rising from the base to the point, they 
require a special apparatus which will allow 
the cutting of these several lengths without 
displacing the files. 
(See Figs. 7, 8, 9, 10, 
and 11.) 
In order to cut the half-round files, the full 
crum-block J is provided with a sectional 
trapezoidal slide K, in which the file-holders 
are placed. When fixed in their proper po 
sition, tin or copper is melted and poured in 
the slide K, and the file - holders are thus 
mounted on their pads or Wedges withoutre 
quiring a special fitting. As it is necessary, 
in order to obtain the different longitudinal 
lines of the cutting supplied to these files, 
that each of these file-holders may be able to 
turn simultaneously with the other, a pinion 
or small toothed wheel P is mounted on each 
of them, and these two are connected by a 
third central pinion O, the axis of which car 
ries a crank through which a pin-rod S, fur- . 
nished with a spring, runs. This spring is 
coiled around the rod, and is intended to keep 
it in a hole of the dividing-plate R, in which 
it has been fixed to secure the file-holders at 
the inclination required to make the different 
cuttings on the file-blanks. 
As the position of the file-holders and that 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
CCs 
2 
418,819. 
25 
2. The combination, with a moving bed and 
a cutter, of a blockhaving a half-round groove, 
a fulcrum-block in said groove, and two or 
more file-holders in said fulcrum-block, the 
parts being so arranged that each file-holder 
has an independent oscillation, substantially 
as specified. 
3. In a file-cutter, the combination, with a 
bed and a cutter, of a transversely-oscillating 
fulcrum-block and independently-oscillating 
file-holders on said block, substantially as 
specified. 
have hereunto set my hand this 23d day of 
February, 1889. 
ALFRED GOLDENBERG. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 35 
Witnesses: 
LETOUZEY, 
Y. LECOER. 
O 
of the crank can be regulated in a way quite 
independent of each other, it is therefore very 
easy, before commencing cutting a lot of files, 
to regulate the apparatus in such a way that 
the two files will be brought under the chisel 
in a thoroughly symmetrical position. The 
holes bored in the dividing-plate R, Fig. 9, 
are intended to regulate the separating dis 
tances of the longitudinal line of cuttings and 
the required position by the file-holders. 
I do not describe the shapes of the various 
file-holders for the different styles of files, 
inasmuch as they are all comprised in the 
principles of one or the other of the systems 
I have explained. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The combination, with a moving bed and 
a cutter, of a holder for two or more files, and 
mechanism, substantially such as described, 
transversely oscillating said holder, substan 
tially as specified. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413419.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 413,419, 
C. A. STRASSER. 
BOOT OR SHOE HEEL. 
Patented Oct. 22, 1889. 
 
 
  
 
gH 
Eiitii 
9 Sigiri 
|Aety attract 
Illi 
  
 
S. SS 
%SSSSSSS 
35 W3. 
Ssss 
S 
2 
sa 
S 
 
--SS 
al 
III: 
  
2EIA2 
2 tiltiTOI 2 
 
a 
a 
A'zay. 6. 
- 
N.'Perests, Photo thographer, Washington, D.C. 
INVENTOR 
arzy Szczsse?. 
ATTORNEY 
WITNESSES: & 2. (Sease 4. - 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL A. STRASSER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO JOSEPH SCHROEDER, OF SAME PLACE. 
Boot oR SHOE HEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 413,419, dated October 22, 1889. 
Application filed June 26, 1889, serial No. 315,672, (No model.) 
O 
I5. 
To all whon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CARL A. STRASSER, of 
Baltimore city, in the State of Maryland, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Boot or Shoe Heels, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in heels 
for boots or shoes, and has for an object to 
provide a simple, novel construction of an an 
ti-friction heel supported to rotate as the user 
walks, so that the heel will not be subject to 
the wearincident to a fixed heel, and the wear 
will be even and uniform on all sides or por 
tions of the heel. 
The inveution consists in the novel con 
structions and combinations of parts, as will 
be hereinafter described, and pointed out in 
the claims, 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view, and Fig. 2 a sectional view, of my lim 
proved heel. Fig. 3 is a detail side view of 
the axle-section. Fig. 4 is a detail sectional 
view of the lower section. Fig. 5 is a detail 
section of the upper section, and Fig. 6 is a 
bottom view of the upper section. 
In carrying out my invention I provide what 
may be termed a metallic heel-frame, which 
is provided with a lower section or disk A, 
formed with a flat upper side having a cen 
tral opening a, and provided on its under side 
with a depending hub-like portion or ring B. 
This ring B is concentric with the opening a, 
and is of an internal diameter in excess of 
said opening a, forming a socket-like recess b 
for the base-plated of the axle-section D. The 
section D has a stem-like portion d', which 
extends up through opening C, and above the 
upperface of the lower section ordisk A. The 
upper section Eisformed with a central open 
ing e, fitted to receive the upper end of the 
stem d of axle-section D, and is provided with 
a depending tubular portion e',which fits down 
over the stem d' and bears against the upper 
surface of the lower section A, as shown. The 
lower section therefore turns on the axle-sec 
tion and against the under side of the depend 
ing tubular portion e' of the upper section of 
the frame. 
To unite the upper, lower, and axle sections 
I pass a screw F through the tube e' and into 
the stem of the axle-section, so as to hold the 
In applying the heel one or more lifts G 7o 
several sections together when the axle-sec 
tion forms a portion about which the lowersec 
tion can turn. The base-plated of the axle sec 
tion forms what may be called a turn-table, 55 
on which the said lower section is suspended, 
and the lower end of the tube e' forms a bear 
ing which receives the upper pressure of the 
said lower section, while the upper section E 
might be tacked to the under side of the sole. 6o 
To secure the heel in place it is preferred to 
employ the construction shown. In the said 
construction, to facilitate the securing of the 
frame and the lifts applied thereto to the shoe, 
I provide the axle-section D at its upper end 65 
with a threaded or screw-like portion. D', 
which is turned into the shoe, as shown, and 
operates to securely fasten the heel in place, 
so it can be quickly removed, if desired. 
may be secured to the under side of the sole 
at its rear end, to so re-enforce such sole as to 
provide a proper bearing for the screw D'. A 
suitable number of lifts are then secured to the 
under side of the sections E and A, and such 75 
parts are secured by the application of the 
axle-section and of the screw F. It will be 
understood, however, that the heel would be 
held together without the screw F; but such 
screw locks the upper plate to the axle-sec- 8o 
tion, prevents the axle-section from being 
turned by the rotating of the lower section, 
and is very much preferred. 
In use it will be seen that the heel will turn 
as it strikes the ground, and will therefore 85 
be practically anti-friction, greatly reducing 
the Wear, as well as distributing such wear 
evenly on the heel. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is- 
1. The improvement in revolving heels 
herein described, comprising the metallic 
frame formed of an upper section having a 
central opening, a lower section having a cen 
tral opening in register with that of the up- 95 
per Section, and provided at the lower end of 
Such opening with a circular recess b, and the 
axle-section having a head dfitting in the re 
cess b, having a portion d fitting in the cen 
tral openings of the upper and lower sections, Ioo 
and provided at its upper end with a threaded 
or screw portion projected above the upper 
9o 
- 
 
30 
35 
45 
413,419 
25 
turning through the tubular portion of the 
upper section and extending into the axle 
section, substantially as set forth. 
5. The improvement in heels, substantially 
as herein described and shown, consisting of 
the upper section having a central opening 
and a depending tubular portion, the lower 
Section having a central Opening and provided 
at the lower end thereof with a circular re 
cess, the axle portion having a head d fitted 
in such recess, an axle portion fitting in the 
openings of the upper and lower sections and 
provided at its upper end with a threaded 35 - 
portion projected above the upper section, and 
the lateral connecting-screw turned through 
the tubular portion of the upper section and 
into the axle-section, substantially asset forth. 
CARL A. STRASSER. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT EICH, 
JNO. F. SCHROEDER. 
TC 
section and adapted to enter the sole or heel 
lifts, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a heel, substantially as described, the 
combination of the upper section, the lower 
section, the axle-section extended up through 
the lower section into the upper section, and 
the laterally-operating screw by which to se 
cure Such axle-section to the upper section, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. An improved heel, substantially as de 
scribed, consisting of the fixed upper section 
and an axle-section secured rigidly to such 
- upper section and provided above the same 
with a screw portion to enter the sole or heel 
lifts, and the lower section suspended and 
journaled on the axle-section, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. In a heel, substantially as described, the 
combination of the lower section, the upper 
section having a depending tubular portion. 
resting on the lower section, the axle-section 
fitting in said sections, and the lateral screw 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413519.txt	(N 0 M0del.) 
0. F. J0BDAN. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 6UARD F0R. RAILWAY BRIDES. 
 
N0, 413,519. 
[*----------------------------- 
Patented 00t. 22, 1889. 
 
=============== 
5-------------- 
 
C 5------------------ 
????--- 
  
 
 
 
 
Z------------- 
2???zz??? 
I1-1-11-11-11-11-11-11-1-1-11-11 111? 
| C) 
? 
 
O} 
C) 
} 
C) 
^ 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OSWALD F. J ORDAN, OF ST. THOMAS, ONTARTO, CANADA. 
G UARD FOR RA[ LVVAY = BRID GES 
SPECIFICATTON forming part of tzetters Patent No. 418,519, dated October 22, 1889. 
Application filed July 11, 1889, Serial No, 317.108, (No model.) 
Z0 ?z/Z ??h071b Z 7madg/ 07a77z: 
Be it knOWn that I, OSWALD F. JORDAN, a 
Subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at St. Thomas, County of Elgin, Prowince 
0f Ontario, Canada, have in wented a certain 
heW and uSeful Improwement in Guards for 
htailWay--Bridges, and I declare the follow 
ing to be a full, Clear, and exact description of 
the Same, Such as Will enable others skilled in 
the art to Which it pertains to make and use 
the Same, reference being had to the accompa 
mying draWings, Which form a part of this 
Specification. 
My in Wention haS for its object the produc 
tion of a guard for railway-bridges which 
Shall be at Once Simple in its construction and 
effectiWe in itS Operation; and it consists, es 
Sentially, in placing between the main-track 
rails either tWo or three or four guard-rails 
eWenly Spaced betWeen the main-track rails, 
and preferably hawing their ends bent down 
and fastened in an iron_plate let into the ties; 
alS0, in certain other mowel features of con 
Struction hereinafter more fully described 
and Claimed. 
In the draWings, H'igure 1 is a plan wiew of 
a, Section. Of a railway-bridge with my im 
prowed guard located thereon. H'ig. 2" is a, 
Sectional WieW shoWing the mode of fastening 
the ends of the. rails. F'ig. 8 ShoWS a, waria 
tion in which four guard-rails are used. B'ig. 4 
is a, plan wiew of the fastening-plate. H'ig. 5 
is a wieW showing a, Variation in the mode of 
attaching the guard-rails. Fig. 6 is a detail 
Side elevation, Om an enlarged SCale, of Said 
Wariation. 
In carrying Out my in wention, A representS 
ties Of the bridge, and B the main-track 
18.118 
C are the guard-rails, and in practice I pre 
fer to use the ordinary T-rail, although any 
form of rail might be used with equal facility. 
The number of these rails is optional. Of 
COur$e the best results would be Obtained 
where four or even more are used; but for 
Ordinary use I prefer to use three, thus leaW 
ing a Space of about twelve inches between 
each guard-rail and between the guard-rails 
and the main-track rails. If four guard-rails 
Were used, a space of about nine inches Would 
be left; between the rails, At both ends C 
these rails are preferably bent doWnWard and 
fastened rigidly in place. A Convenient and 
wery effective mode of fastening them is by  
means of a plate ID, which may be let into the 
ties So that it will be flush With them, and 
be spiked or bolted in. This plate is prO 
wided with orifices d, corresponding exactly 
With the shape of the rail as it enterS the 
plate, so that the ball, neck, and flange are 
all embraced by the plate and the rail held 
firmly in position. If desired, the edge d/ of 
the plate can be turned doWnWard, and thuS 
prewent anything which may be dragging 
from catching. Also, the orificeS d* in the 
plate, through which the boltS Or SpikeS paSS, 
may be counterSunk to receive the headS. 
Also, in the construction of my guard I pre 
fer to rivet the guard-rails together, instead 
of bolting them, So that wheelS Or broken 
trucks will not catch. On them. 
In the use of the present ? Style of guard 
rails for bridges, im which two rails are placed 
between the maim-track rails and are brought 
to a point, at each end, an objection haS been 
found in that, if the  derailed truck, aS it 
strikes the bridge, has Worked past the center  
of the track or on the wrong Side of the point 
of the guard, it is thrown. Still farther ower, 
and will usually strike the Side of the bridge 
and carry the latter aWay. By the uSe of my 
improwed guard, hoWewer, this objection_iS " 
entirely remowed, since, no matter Where the 
derailed truck Strikes the bridge, it is Carried 
or slid along in the Same position aS When it 
struck the bridge; and where three or more 
guard-rails are used, should a truck Strike 
the guard sidewise, the latter Would carry the 
wheels acroSS without letting them Strike the 
ties; also, should the Wheels touch the tieS, 
the guard-rails Would prewent further tWist 
ing of the wheels and guide the truck Ower 
Safely. Thus the danger of a broken truck 
or trucks which strike the bridge sideWiSe, 
carrying the ties aWay and letting the Wreck 
through the bridge, is obviated. 
In Figs, 5 and 6 I haWe shown a wariation 
in the mode of fastening the ends of the guard 
rails. In this wariationB} representS the plate 
Which is attached to the ties, and  represent 
inclined blocks rigidly engaged to the plate 
and to which the ends of the guard-rails are 
rigidly attached. Thus the guard-rails termi 
nate in a gradual Slope, aS is desired. 
55 
6? 
65 
7? 
75 
9? 
95 
2C) 
? 25 
30 
35 
45 
5? 
 
2 
418,519 
Other and with the main-track mails, and hav 
ing their ends curved downward and held in 
position by an iron plate fastened to the ties, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a guard for railway-bridges, an iron 
plate for holding the ends of the guard-rails 
in position, Said plate bolted' or otherwise 
fastened to the ties and hawing the ends of 
the rails paSSed through the Same, Substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony Whereof I Sign this Specifica 
tion im the presence of tWO WitmeSSeS. 
~ 
25 
OSWATLD E', JORDAN, 
Witnesses: 
T. A. IDOELTY, 
W. H. CHAMBERLIN.  
What I claim is------ 
l. A guard for railWay-bridges, Consisting 
Of three or more guard-rails placed equidiS 
tant from the main-track rails and from each 
Other, Said guard-rails extending parallel with 
each other and with the main track through 
Out their length, Substantially aS described. 
2. A guard for railway-bridges, consisting 
of a Series of guard-rails extending parallel 
betWeen the track-rails, the ends of Said guard 
railS Sloped dOWnWard SO aS to terminate at 
Or beloW the Surface of the ties, Substantially 
aS described. 
8. A guard for railway-bridges, consisting 
of a Series of guard-rails placed equidistant 
.. from the main-track rails and from each other, 
Said guard-rails extending parallel With each 
I O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413619.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT DOMELER AND OTTO CHRISTIAN HAGEMANN, OF LONDON, ENGLAND, 
- 
ASSIGNORS TO JAMES S. KIRK & CO., OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PROCESS OF RECOVERING GLYCERINE FROM SPENT SOAP-LYES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 413,619, dated October 22, 1889. 
Application filed March 9, 1889, Serial No. 302,644 (No specimens.) 
". . 
: 
To all whom it may concern: 
: 
Be it known that we, ALBERTDOMEIER and 
OTTO CHRISTIANHAGEMANN, both of London, 
- England, have invented an Improved Pro 
. cess for Treating Spent Soap-Lyes for the 
; Purpose of Obtaining Glycerine and other 
Products Therefrom; and we do hereby de. 
clare that the following is a full, complete, 
and exact description of said process. 
The objects of this invention are to obtain 
glycerine and other useful products from 
is Soap-lyes. 
In carrying out our invention we proceed 
as follows: 
: The spent lyes are collected in a suitable 
tank, whereupon there is added to them a 
small proportion of hydrated caustic lime, 
baryta, alumina, or any other earthy or me 
is tallic oxide or hydrate, as the hydrates of 
iron, magnesia, &c., capable of combining 
with Soapy and fatty matters that are con 
tained in the lye. . The lime or its above 
mentioned equivalents produce an insoluble 
precipitate, which quickly settles to the bot 
25 tom of the tank in which the operation is 
performed, or may be removed by filtration, 
and thus the lye is purified from a large pro 
portion of the fatty matters it contains. In 
ordinary cases it will suffice to add about two 
3o pounds of lime to about one hundred gallons 
of the lye; but otherwise we repeat this treat 
ment until the perfect cleansing of the lye is 
obtained. We ascertain this by placing some 
of the filtered liquor in a bottle, so as only 
35 partly to fill same, and then violently shake. 
If the foam thus formed in the bottle does 
not rapidly subside, the liquor will require 
further treatment with the lime or oxides, 
until upon a fresh trial a rapid collapsing 
4o of the foam takes place. We next boil the 
lye down to the salting-point'-that is to 
say, we concentrate it until it is saturated 
with salt. Thelye is then removed to another 
vessel and hydrochloric or other suitable acid 
45 added thereto till the liquor possesses a neu 
tral reaction. In this state albuminous bodies 
separate. We now further add sulphate of 
iron or manganese or Zinc or alumina for 
the purpose and to the extent of decomposing 
5o by double decomposition soapy bodies pres 
 
In most cases we effect all action on the 65 
ent. For control we filter a sample of the 
liquor and add an acid in excess. If upon 
standing no turbidity or haziness is observed 
to set in, then the fatty matters are suffi 
ciently fixed through the action of the metal 55 
salts. Following this treatment we mix with 
the liquor metallic oxides, as the oxide of iron, 
manganese, and chromium, and keep the mix 
ture well stirred for some time. The oxides 
cause the removaloffatty bodies, the acids and 6o 
metallic salts of which are more or less solu 
ble, as capronates, caprylates, laurinates, and 
others. We thus promote the formation of 
basic salts, which are practically insoluble. 
fatty bodies in one operation, using a mix 
ture of metallic salts and of oxides simultane 
ously. 
We do not limit ourselves to the metallic 
salts and oxides mentioned, but may employ 7o 
such other metallic salts and oxides as are 
suitable for the purpose set forth. 
The liquor after separation from the pre 
cipitates is then concentrated to evaporate 
more water, causing the salt which is carried 75 
in the lye to crystallize. This salt may be 
washed and used again in the manufacture of 
soap. Finally, we evaporate the liquor to the 
concentration of crude glycerine. 
namely, that of adding lime or oxides to the 
raw lye-is not essential, as the treatment 
with the metal salts and oxides in the oper 
ations last described will be sufficient to elimi 
nate the soapy matter; but this would cause 85 
more expense. We also may dispense with 
the concentrating to salting-point previous 
to applying the treatment as described here 
inbefore to follow such preliminary concen 
tration of the liquor, or we may go further in 9o 
concentrating previous to such treatments. 
In case an excess of the metallic salts had 
been employed such excess may be precipi 
tated out by a suitable alkali before the final 
concentration. 
In many instances the first operation- 8o 
What we claim as our invention is 
1. In the process of treating spent soap-lye 
for the purpose of obtaining glycerine and 
other products therefrom, the improvement 
which consists in first treating the lye with Ioo 
95 
418,619 
with acid to precipitate albuminous bodies, 
then adding soluble metallic salts to decom 
pose the soapy matters, next adding metallic 
oxides to completely remove fatty bodies, 
then removing the precipitates, and finally 
concentrating the clear liquor, as set forth. 
4. In the process of treating spent soap-lye 
for the purpose of obtaining glycerine and 
other products therefrom, the improvement 
which consists in first neutralizing the lye with 
acid to precipitate albuminous bodies, then 
adding a mixture of metallic oxides and solu 
ble metallic salts to completely precipitate 
the soapy and fatty bodies, next removing 
the precipitate thus formed, and finally con 
centrating the clear liquor, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification, in the presence of 
the subscribing witnesses, at London, this 22d 
day of February, 1889. 
35 
45 
ALBERT DOMEER. 
OTTO CIIRISTIAN IAGEMANN. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS W. FRIEGOET, 
A. G. MOSSARD. 
O 
lime or other oxides to precipitate insoluble 
Soaps, removing the precipitate thus formed, 
next neutralizing the lye with acid to precipi 
tate albuminous bodies, then adding soluble 
metallic salts to decompose any remaining 
soapy matters, next adding metallic oxides to 
completely remove fatty bodies, then remov 
ing the precipitates, and finally concentrating 
the clear liquor, as set forth. 
2. In the process of treating spent soap-lye 
for the purpose of obtaining glycerine and 
other products therefrom, the improvement 
which consists in first treating the lye with 
lime or other oxides to precipitate soaps, re 
moving the precipitate thus formed, next neu 
tralizing the lye with acid to precipitate al 
buminous bodies, then adding a mixture of 
metallic oxides and soluble metallic salts to 
completely remove soapy and fatty bodies, 
next removing the precipitates thus formed, 
and finally concentrating the clear liquor, as 
set forth. 
3. In the process of treating spent soap-lye 
for the purpose of obtaining glycerine and 
other products therefrom, the improvement 
which consists in first neutralizing the lye 
25 
 
It is hereby certified that Letters Patent No. 413,619, granted October 22, 1889, upc 
the application of Albert Domeier and Otto Christian Hagemann, of London, Englan 
for an improvement in the Process of Recovering Glycerine from Spent Soap-Lyes 
were erroneously issued to James S. Kirk & Co. as sole owners of the invention; th: 
said Letters Patent should have been issued to said Albert Domeier and James S. Ki. 
de Co. jointly, each being owner of one-half interest, as shown by the record of assig 
ments in this Office; and that said Letters Patent should be read. With this corre 
tion therein that the same may conform to the record of the case in the Patent Offic 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 5th day of November, A. D. 1889. 
(SEAL.) 
Countersigned: 
C. E. MITCHELL, 
Commissioner of Patents. 
CYRUS BUSSEY, 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413719.txt	(No Model.) 
G, HEINZE. 
No. 413,719, 
WATER VELOCIPEDE. 
- 
Patented Oot, 29, 1889. 
 
Z7zzle.7/6/2 
at 16-y-e. 
. 
9-12 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORG HEINZE, OF KLOTZSCHE, NEAR DRESDEN, SAXONY, GERMANY. 
WAERVELOC PE DE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,719, dated October 29, 1889, 
Application filed April 8, 1889, Serial No. 306,306, (No model) - 
O 
20 
To all whon, it may conce77: . 
Beit known that I, GEORGHEINZE, a subject 
of the King of Saxony, residing at Klotzsche, 
near Dresden, in the Kingdom of Saxony, Em 
pire of Germany, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improved Water-Velocipede; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
This invention relates to water-velocipedes, 
and the object thereof is to construct a suit 
able velocipede of this nature for sporting 
purposes, &c. 
The improved construction is represented 
in the annexed sheet of drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal central 
Section, Fig. 2 a plan, and Fig. 3 a cross-sec 
tion, of the water-velocipede hereinafter de 
scribed, and of which the novel features are 
pointed out in the claim. 
The boat or floating structure of the veloci 
pede consists of the two lateral tapered cylin 
ders AA, placed parallel with each other and 
connected by the shorter portion or dry-well 
B, sufficient to receive the seat and mechan 
ism and sufficiently large to support passen 
gers or luggage in addition to the operator. 
Behind the seat-space B are the screw-propel 
ler S and the rudder R. The latterishinged to 
a block R' on a cross-rod R, fixed to the floats 
AA, and its downwardly-projecting pintle R. 
terminates in a cross-bar W, the ends of which 
35 are connected by rods. W. W' to a similar 
cross-bar W on the spindle V, which passes 
up into the space B through a stuffing-box 
W, and terminates above in a hand-wheel H 
or a tiller or other convenient steering device 
in convenient position in front of the oper 
ator seated on the seat C. The shaft L, carry 
ing the screw-propeller S, of suitable form, is 
journaled in the aforesaid block R', and passes 
through a stuffing-box L' in the rear cross 
wall of the space B, terminating in the part 
45 
25 
J of the frictional coupling, by which it is 
connected with the operating-gear. In the 
front part of the space B is journaled the 
crank-shaft D, having fly-wheels D', and the 
crank-wrists of which are connected by links 
D to the ends of two pedal-levers M. M., piv 
oted at a suitable position at their rear ends, 
and having the foot-rests M'M', respectively, 
so that the operator on seat C may alternately 
depress the said pedal-levers and cause the 
revolution of the shaft D. The latter carries 
also the chain-wheel E, connected by chain 
with the chain-wheel F on the shaft Q. On 
the shaft Q slides a sleeve carrying the fric 
tion-wheels JJ, and adapted to be moved by 
the lever N in the known manner for bring 
ing the one or other wheel J in contact with 
the wheel J'on the propeller-shaft, and con 
sequently causing the revolution of the latter 
in the one or other direction and forward or 
backward propulsion of the velocipede. The 
wheel J" is made to slide upon the shaft IL, 
and the collar K on the former engages the 
lever O, so that by corresponding movement 
of the lever O the radial distance of the wheel 
J from the shaft Q may be enlarged or dimin 
ished, and the power and the speed of the ves 
sel be consequently brought under greater 
command of the operator. 
I claim 
In water-velocipedes, the combination of 
two lateral floats A A, a central connecting 
dry-well B, a rudder behind the rear of said 
dry-well, a cross-bar W below said rudder, a 
spindle V, passing through a stuffing-box in 
the floor of said dry-well, a cross-bar Won the 
lower end thereof, and rods W, connecting 
said cross-bars WW, for the purpose set 
forth. 
In witness whereof I have signed this speci 
fication in presence of two witnesses. 
GEORG HENZE. 
Witnesses: 
OTTO WOLFF, . 
PAUL DRUCKMULLER. 
55 
75 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413819.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WARREN W. ANNABLE, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
PULLY. 
PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,8i9, dated october 29, 1889. 
Application Aled September 5, 1888, Serial No, 284,675, (No model.) 
To all uvholmu, it muay concern, 
Be it known that II, WARREN W. ANNABLE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent 
and State of Michigan, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Pulleys; and 
I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
aS will enable others Skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying diraW 
ings, and to theletters and figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of pulley, with sec 
tions of rim uncovered, segment removed, and 
showing how spokes or "arms are fastened to 
the rim. Fig. 2 is a variation of Fig. 1, show 
ing adaptation of device to large pulleys. Fig. 
3 shows the separate parts of the segment and 
the devices for holding same firmly in place. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts. 
My invention relates to that class of pulleys 
so constructed as to be readily adjustable on 
shafting without disturbing other parts of 
machinery by means of a bisection of the rim 
I describe my invention as follows: The rim 
K of the pulley is constructed with a remov 
able section or segment D, having lugs J J on 
both ends fitting in the slots J4 J. The 
spokes or arms L L and M M of the pulley 
are integral, and are secured to the rim K by 
means of the flanges T T T T and rivets S 
S S S through the flanges into the rim, and 
said spokes or arms IL TL have holes H H 
through same at the ends nearest the divided 
side of the rim, through which passes the bolt 
C, whereby the rim K can be so tightened as 
to hold the segment D securely in place. The 
hub N of the pulley is also divided, having 
the removable segment A, with the tapering 
hole E, (shown in dotted lines,) meeting the 
holes F F (also shown in dotted lines) in the 
spokes or arms TLTL, through which passes the 
tapering bolt B, having a nut on its smaller 
end, whereby it can be so tightened as to hold 
said segment A securely in place. 
The spokes or arms IL L are constructed 
with a sufficient weight of iron G to balance 
the, extra weight of parts B, C, and D on the 
opposite side. 
In the variation shown in Fig. 2 the hub N 
is held securely in place by means of bolts P 
P P P, through the spokes or arms O O and 
* the flanges R R of the hub, and also by the 
temons Q Q in the recesses made therefor. 
I am aware that pulleys with removable 
sections are not novel, and I do not claim the 
same, broadly; but 
M 
I do claim- 
A pulley having a rim made with a Seg 
ment D, provided with lugs J" J, the spokes 
or arms, and a separable hub, one part of 
which is secured to said Spokes or arms by a 
- conical or tapering screw-bolt B, and the rim 
of said, pulley having abalance-weight G op 
posite the removable segment, all substan 
tially as shown and described. 
In testimony, whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two Witnesses. 
WARREN W. ANNABLE, 
Witnesses: 
ADOLPH B. MASON, 
ELLA P. SHUTSTER. 
5 O 
55 
65 
7 o 
O 
25 
30 
35 
* and hub. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US413919.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 413,919, 
- 
W. W. BLANCHARD, 
STEAM BOILER CASING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented 00t, 29, 1889. 
erryess: sh 
a 2. zeta 
... " 
w 
N. perERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
K. 
Zrzwroze 
saysia 
afiorpsey 
W 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
VIRGIL W. BLANCHARD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO JOSEPH A. 
DAVIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
STEAM BOER CASN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 413,919, dated October 29, 1889. 
Application filed April 12, 1889, Serial No, 306,975. (No model.) 
To all whon it may concern 
Beit known that I, VIRGILW. BLANCHARD, 
of New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Boiler-Cas 
ings; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved casing for steam-boilers, partly in sec 
tion. Fig. 2 is a horizontal longitudinal sec 
tion of the casing. Fig. 3 is a vertical section 
On line aca, Eig. 2. 
The object of this invention is to inclose a 
tubular or other steam-boiler or furnace in a 
casing the walls of which are practically non 
conductors of heat, and so construct the cas 
ing of sections and panels that its interior is 
easily accessible, as will be clearly understood 
from the following description and claims. 
In the drawings is shown a rectangular cas 
ing having a top slab A, a base B, end Walls 
C, a back wall D, and a front Wall composed 
of removable panels D'. The top slab A is 
cast with offsets or lugs a, which are perfo 
rated, and the base B is also cast with similar 
lugs b. Between the lugs a, b are fitted hol 
low pillars E, through which are passed from 
below upward bolts c, which are secured by 
nuts c' on their upper ends. These bolts and 
nuts are ties, and pillars E are adapted to 
break joints with the joints of panels D'. 
F designates angle-irons presenting two 
right angles, which I use to bind the several 
sides composing my casing securely together 
by the aid of through-bolts g. 
The walls proper of the casing are con 
structed as follows: G designates a cast-metal 
Wall constructed with numerous studs on its 
inner face, covered with layers of asbestus 
paper, with an intermediate layer of wire 
gauze and a sheet-iron plate it. The upper 
and lower edge of this non-conducting Wall G. 
O 
". . 20 
35 
49 
45 
55 
75 
are tightly and rigidly secured to the lower 
vertical portion of the angle-iron F. Between 
wall G and outer wall E is a spacef, which is 
closely packed with mineral wool or other 
refractory substance. The outer wall D' is 
riveted to the upper vertical portions of the 
angle-irons F. I thus have a casing com 
posed of non-conducting walls, and the side 
Walls thereof are composed of removable pan 
els that are secured in their respective places 
by means of screws e and by means of pillars 
E and bolts c. 
By removing bolts c, the pillars, and the 
Screwse, the panels D' can be removed by hand 
and access had to the interior of the casing. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. A casing consisting of non-conducting 
Walls composed of sections secured together 
by hollow pillars and stay-bolts, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
2. A casing the walls of which are respect 
ively composed of a studded plate covered in 
teriorly With a poor conductor of heat, an ex 
ternal Wall, and an intermediate space filled 
with refractory material, substantially as 
specified. 
3. A casing consisting of a top wall A, a 
base B, and walls C, and side walls formed of 
removable panels which are non-conductors 
of heat, secured together substantially in the 
manner and for the purpose specified. 
4. The herein-described casing, consisting 
of a non-conducting top having lugs a on it, 
a non-conducting base, also having lugs on it, 
non-conducting end Walls, angle-irons F, hol 
low pillars, tie-bolts, and removable panels, 
all constructed and arranged substantially in 
the manner and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my OWn. I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
VIRGIL W. BLANCHARD. 
Witnesses: 
ALEX. S. STEUART, 
P. L. BROOKS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414019.txt	(N0 Model.) 
J. G., CARLINET, 
HOPPER MECHANISM FOR BLAST FURNAGES. 
No. 414,019, 
Patented Oct. 29, 1889. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
); 
's if v1 cascs 
\tswan N 
G2a22 
3v-uo viot 
33 Vo eletov 11c 
Sawler. Sct 
N. Peters. Photo-Lahographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN G. CARLINET, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO GORDON, STROBEL & LAUREAU, (LIMITED.) OF SAME PLACE. 
HOPPER MECHANISM FOR BLAST - FURNACES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,019, dated October 29, 1889. 
Application filed June 6, 1888, Serial No. 276,226, (No model.) 
means of which the motor-beam is oscillated 45 
when the bell is to be raised and lowered, the 
piston-rod of this cylinder being connected 
to the oute end of the motor-beam, this no 
tor-cylinder being intended in the illustra 
tion to simply typify well-known motor ap-5o 
paratus; L, the counterbalance-beam, similar 
to the motor-beam and similarly pivoted to 
the opposite end of the lever H and similarly 
fulcrumed to the top beams D, the fulcrum, 
however, being located below the plane of the 55 
pivot of the motor-beam; and M, the counter 
balance-weight suspended upon the outer end 
of the counterbalance-beam. 
The bell is raised and lowered in the usual 
manner, the inner end pivot of the motor- 6o 
beam describing during the motion the arc of 
a circle, the counterbalance-beam at the same 
time operating similarly, the oscillations of 
the lever H. causing the bell-rod and the bell 
to move in a truly-vertical line, whereby an 65 
even distribution of the stock in the furnace 
is caused. 
I claim as my invention 
In a blast-furnace bell and hopper mech 
anism, the combination, Substantially as set 7 O 
forth, of a bell-rod connected with the apex 
of the bell, a horizontal pivot at the upper 
end of the bell-rod, a link pivoted at its cen 
ter to said pivot and disposed substantially 
vertically when the bell and bell-rod are up, 75 
a centrally-pivoted motor -beam, a motor 
mechanism arranged to apply force to the 
outer end of said beam, a counterbalance 
beam with its pivot out of the plane of the 
pivot of the motor-beam, a counter-balance 8o 
arranged to apply force to the outer end of 
said beam, and pivots uniting the inner ends 
of said two beams with the ends of said link. 
JOIN G. CARLINET. 
Witnesses: 
M. A. NORRIS, 
W. W. DOUGHERTY. 
Io top of a blast-furnace. 
To all who1, it nucly concert: 
Be it known that I, JOHN G. CARLINET, of 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, and a subject of 
the King of Italy, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Bell and Hopper 
Mechanism for Blast-Furnaces, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention pertains to mechanism em 
ployed in raising and lowering the bell at the 
The improvement will be readily under 
stood from the following description, taken 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the bell-sup 
porting structure at the top of a blast-furnace 
embodying my improvements, the hopper and 
furnace-Wallappearing in Vertical diametrical 
section, while a portion of one of the arch 
2 o beams is broken away to exhibit more clearly 
the construction between the beams; Fig. 2, a 
plan of the same, and Fig. 3 a vertical trans 
Verse Section. 
In the drawings, A indicates the wall at 
25 the mouth of the furnace; B, the hopper; C, 
the bell; D, two beams disposed alongside 
each other over the top of the furnace; E, 
columns resting upon the top Walls and sup 
porting these beams; F, the bell-rod, illus 
3o trated as formed of two flat bars disposed 
side by side, their lower ends being pivoted 
to the apex of the bell and their upper ends 
projecting between the top beams D; G, a 
horizontal pivot at the top of the bell-rod; H, 
35 a connecting-link, shown as formed of two 
bars, this link centrally pivoted to the pivot 
Gand disposed between the two bars forming 
the bell-rod and substantially vertical when 
the bell is up; J, the motor-beam, fulcrumed 
4O upon a pivot carried by the top beams and 
disposed between the two top beams, the in 
ner end of this beam passing between the 
two bars forming the connecting-link H. and 
pivoted thereto; IX, a motor-cylinder, by 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414119.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 414,119, 
A, B, PAUL. 
ORE CONCENTRATOR. 
Patented Oct. 29, 1889. 
 
%azes 6e 6. 
u%ave year 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALMARIN BROOKS PAUL, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
ORE CONCENTRATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,119, dated October 29, 1889. 
Application filed February 23, 1888, Serial No. 265,040, (No model.) 
55 
7 to 
75 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ALMARIN BROOKS PAUL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of San Francisco, and State 
of California, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Ore-Concentrators; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of my said 
invention, reference being had to the draw 
ings that accompany and form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Wet-ore concentrators of the kind in which the 
concentrating-surface has vibrating or oscil 
lating motion without progression; and my 
improvements embrace a novel construction 
of table having several independent surfaces 
arranged about a pivot or center of rotation, 
and with relation to pulp and water distribut 
ing apparatus, as hereinafter described, 
whereby one surface can be brought into po 
sition for operation and use to take the place 
of another surface as often as circumstances 
require. 
The invention includes, also, an improved 
construction of wet-ore concentrator in which 
one concentrating-surface can be replaced by 
a fresh or clean surface and the concen 
trates removed from it by washing with a 
hose or spray-nozzle without retarding or in 
terfering with the continuous operation of the 
machine. 
The following description explains the na 
ture of my said improvements and the man 
ner in which I proceed to construct, apply, 
and carry out the same, the accompanying 
drawings being referred to by figures and let 
ters, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a machine 
constructed in accordance with my invention, 
the frame and the receiving-troughs for the 
concentrates and tailings being shown in sec 
tion. Fig. 2 is a cross-section through the 
line XX, Fig. 1; and Figs. 3 and 4 are detail 
views to explain the construction of the table. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
A is a table of triangular form in cross-sec 
tion and of Suitable length to provide plane 
surfaces A' A'. 
B B are journals on the heads A", upon 
which the table is suspended and balanced. 
On these journals as centers the table can be 
turned to bring one or the other of surfaces 
A uppermost, 
D D* are the journal-boxes on the station 
ary frame C. By having one of these boxes 
adjustable, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, a greater 
or less degree of pitch or inclination from the 
horizontal can be given to the concentrating. 
For this purpose the box D* is set in guides 
in the frame, and a screw D, working through 
a fixed bearing D, is provided. 
The sides of the surfaces Ahave ledges to 
confine the pulp, and the lower end is Open 
to discharge the tailings. 
Suitable pulp-supply trough and Water-dis 
tributing pipes, with means for regulating the 
discharge of the material and the Water upon 
the head of the table, are mounted on the sta 
tionary frame at the higher end; but as these 
are common to all machines of this character 
no particular or detailed description is re 
quired to enable my invention to be under 
stood by persons skilled in constructing and 
running this improved machine, 
Vibrating motion is given to the table 
either in a longitudinal direction or trans 
versely. Such motions can be produced in 
any suitable manner from a continuously-ro 
tating shaft and crank or eccentries. The 
mechanism illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2 of the 
drawings is applied to produce Oscillating or 
laterally-shaking motion. It consists of a 
rotating shaft E, with a crank or eccentric F, 
and a connecting-rod G, that is attached at H 
to a stud on One of the heads of the table. 
The rod G engages with the stud from below, 
and a spring I, applied beneath it, keeps the 
hook G* up to the stud. One of these studs 
is fixed at each corner of the head or in Such 
position, that there is always one stud to en 
gage the rod, whichever one of the surfaces of 
the table is brought uppermost for use. 
In the machine illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2 
I have arranged two tables side by side over 
a trough K, and by means of two rods G-G, I 
operate both tables from the one shaft. The 
advantage of two tables is mainly to furnish 
a large area of surface in one machine to use 
with any battery that requires such area and 
still keep the length and breadth of the ta 
ble within reasonable limits. A two-table 
machine suitable for a ten-stamp mill Would 
O 
25 
35 
45 
90 
95 
O 
3. 
414,119 
be about fourteen feet long and eighteen 
inches wide on the blanket surface of each 
table, 
I do not limit myself, however, to any par 
ticular number or arrangement of tables, nor 
do I confine myself to the triangular form, for 
it is obvious that any other number of sur 
faces can be arranged about an axis to be 
used in successive order. I have shown and 
described the triangular form for the reason 
that it is the best for all general purposes, as 
when one surface is in position for operation 
the other surfaces stand at suitable inclina 
tion, so that the concentrates can be readily 
washed off while the uppermost surface is 
working. The surfaces are covered with 
blankets in the usual manner, or they can be 
used without blankets-as, for instance, to 
work over concentrates to any degree of con 
centration desired where a plain table-sur 
face may be preferable. 
The table can beframed of wood or formed 
of metal with board surfaces. 
Fig. 4 shows a metal head with a socket for 
the shaft and radial arms. The studs to take 
the rods G are fixed in the corners at the ends 
of the arms. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In an ore-concentrator, the combination of 
the table A, triangular in cross-section and 
having the plane surfaces A' A', provided 
With ledges, as shown, and having also, the 
journals B, B, the stationary frame C, the 
journal-boxes D and D* in said frame for re 
ceiving said journals, and the mechanism for 
imparting oscillating motion to the table, 
consisting of rotating shaft E, having an ec 
centric E thereon, the connecting-rod G, at 
tached to one of the heads of the table, and 
the trough K, arranged beneath the table, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand and seal. 
ALMARIN BROOKS PAUL. L. s. 
WM. STEPHENs, 
R. E. STEPHENS. 
Witnesses: 
35 
5 
O 
15 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414219.txt	(No Model.) 
H. W. HORNE & H. L.A.K.E. 
HEEL BUR NISHING MACHINE 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 414,219, 
 
Patented NOW, 5, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 414,219, 
 
H. W. HORNE & H LAKE, 
HEEL BUR NISHING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov, 5, 1889, 
WTNEGoE5; 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE W. IIORNE AND HARRISON LAKE, OF HAVERHILI, MASSACHUSETTS. 
H E EL B U RN I S H I NG MACH IN E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,219, dated November 5, 1889. 
Application filed April 22, 1889, Serial No,308,072, (No model.) 
( / cojeej7. 
To ad to7), it 
Be it known that we, IORACE W. HORNE 
and HARRISON LAKE, of Haverhill, in the 
county of Essex and State of Massachusetts, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Heel-Burnishing Machines, of 
Which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to machines for bur 
nishing the heels of boots or shoes, and more 
especially to that class of machines known as 
the Tapley IIeel-Burnisher. 
In the above-mentioned machine the bur 
nishing movement of the boot or shoe hold 
ing "jack is imparted thereto by a rocker 
arm (mounted on a shaft journaled in suit 
able bearings on the supporting-frame) pro 
Vided With a slot, in which slot is a block 
adapted to be moved vertically therein, said 
block having a shank to which is attached 
devices intermediate of said rocker-arm and 
jack, so that by moving said block longitudi 
nally in said slot the travel of the jack may 
be regulated to conform to the different height 
of the heel to be operated upon, as is well 
known to all skilled in the use of said ma-. 
chine. The principal objection to this method 
of regulating the travel of the jack has been 
that the position of the block in the slotted 
'Ocker-arm is dependent entirely upon the 
judgment of the Operator, and when neces 
Sary to change the regulating devices for heels 
of Varying depth it not infrequently happens 
that the adjustment is such that the jack is 
given too much travel, the result being that 
the bulrnishing-tool comes in contact with the 
heel-seat, thereby causing damage to the 
bOot or shoe being operated upon. 
Our invention has for its object to provide 
means Whereby the above-named objections 
may be obviated and the travel of the boot 
or shoe Carrying jack be automatically con 
trolled to conform to heels of varying depth, 
all of which we will now proceed to describe 
and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a side elevation of that part of a Tapley bur 
nishing-machine to which our improvements 
are attached, showing a shoe in position to be 
Operated upon by the burnishing-tool. Fig. 
2 is an enlarged sectional view on the line ac 
25 
35 
45 
at of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a view of the devices 
shown in Fig.1, but in a different position, as 
hereinafter described. Fig. 4 represents a 
section on line if ty, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 represents 
a Seetion On line q/? q/?, Fig. 2. Fig. 6 repre 
Sents a rear view of our improvement. Fig. 
7 represents a section on line 22, Fig. 2. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
Same parts in all the figures. 
In the drawings, A indicates the jack; B, 
the guides and lateral supports for the same; 
C, the slotted rocker-arm; D, the connection 
between said rocker-arm and the jack, and E 
the Supporting frame or base of the machine. 
The above-named parts are shown and used 
in the Tapley heel-burnisher, and constitute 
no part of our invention, and will only be re 
ferred to in connection with our improve 
mentS. 
Fitted to move in guides secured to the 
jack-support B is a plate or lug a, provided 
at its upper end with inclined edges 22", (for 
a purpose to be presently explained,) and at its 
lower end With a segmental slotted portion b, 
which we term the lug of the arm, through 
which slot is adapted to pass the shank of 
the block c. 
d represents a slottedrack-rod suitably se 
cured to the heel-rest of the jack and adapted 
to mesh with a pinion e, also secured to said 
rest. The rack d is provided with a pro 
jection f, adapted to engage the shankg of 
the shoe or boot being operated upon. 
h represents an adjustable rod, provided at 
its upper end with a slotted rack , meshing 
with the pinion e, and at its lower end with 
a slot j and an arm k, to which arm is jour 
naled a roll l, (hereinafter explained,) all as 
clearly shown in Figs. 1 and 3. 
By reference to Fig. 3, it will be se?n tha 
the jack A and lug Ci are in a position differ 
ent from that shown in Fig.1. The position 
here shown, Fig. 3, is that previous to the 
burnishing operation, in which the arm. D 
has been thrown out of engagement with the 
jack, so that the latter may be retracted from 
engagement with the burnisher F and per 
mit of the unjacking of the shoe. Sup 
pose, now, that the shoe shown in the before 
mentioned figure is to be operated upon by 
the burnishing-tool. The jack will be moved 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
414,219 
I. ? 
25 
35 
45 
5 ? 
55 
by the operator in the direction of the arrow 
marked thereon, and when the arm k on rod 
h comes in contact with the incline 2 of lug 
Cl, said rod will be raised and will impart 
motion to pinion e, causing slotted rack d to 
be moved toward and be brought into en 
gagement With the shank of the shoe, as 
shown in Fig. 1, and as said engagement pre 
vents arm k from rising the result will be 
that as the jack continues to move forward 
to the burnishing-tool said movement de 
presses the lug C, and with it the block c in 
the slotted arm C, to the position shown in 
Fig. 1, which position is just the required 
distance from the center of rotation of rock 
Shaft n, the radius of movement of the rocker 
arm at this point being equal to the depth of 
heel of the boot or shoe to be operated upon. 
At this point the connecting-rod D is brought 
into engagement with the jack by the latter 
having been moved forward until the pin n. 
registers with the slot O in the rod, as also 
seen in Fig. 1. 
It will be seen by reference to Fig. 1 that 
the arm has passed over the incline 2 and 
the burnishing action has commenced. The 
direction of rotation of the rock-shaft is in 
the direction of the arrow in said figure, the 
radius of the rocker-arm, as before explained, 
being in proportion to the heel; or, in other 
Words, the jack will be moved in the direc 
tion of Said arrow until just before the bur 
Inishing-tool reaches the heel-seat, when the 
rock-shaft will move in the opposite direc 
tion by means well understood by those 
skilled in the use of the Tapley burnisher, 
and . Which are no part of our invention. 
When the arm k has passed over the incline 
2 of the lug, it becomes inoperative and has 
no further influence upon the operation of 
burnishing until the next shoe is to be oper 
ated upon, and said arm is free to follow the 
incline 2' and does not pass the center point 
of the lug until the completion of the bur 
nishing Operation and the jack is retracted 
or thrown out of gear, as seen in Fig. 3. 
When the lug has been depressed by the 
means described and the arm k has become 
in Operative or has passed over the center of 
the lug, it is necessary to hold said lug in 
the last-named position against the tension 
of Springs q r. To this end we have provided 
a bracket S, attached to the jack and so ar 
ranged as to come in contact with a tongue 
piece t secured to the rear end of a guide 
piece t, in which lug a slides, and having a 
piece of rubber i or other yielding material 
attached thereto, so that when bracket S 
comes into engagement therewith it is pressed 
against the lug with sufficient force to hold 
the same in its depressed position, as shown 
in Figs. 2 and 4. 
q r represent Springs, the upper ends of 
which are attached to ears on guide-piece u, 
7 ? 
75 
CO 
O 
II 5 
and the lower ends to ears on the lug C, SO 
that when the jack is retracted and the 
bracket released from engagement With 
tongue-piece v the lug will be drawn up by 
said springs to the position shown in Fig. 3, 
so that it may be operated upon for the Suc 
ceeding burnishing operation. 
Having thus explained the nature and man 
ner of using our invention, We declare that 
what we claim is 
1. In a shoe-burnishing machine, the COm 
bination, with the oscillating jack designed 
to hold a shoe thereon and the rocker-arm 
for oscillating said jack, of the adjustable 
connection between said rocker-arm and jack, 
and the horizontally-disposed movable bar 
mounted on said jack and designed to come 
in contact with the shoe placed thereon, and 
the connections therewith, substantially as 
set forth, whereby the connections between 
the rocker-arm and the jack may be adjusted, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a shoe-burnishing machine, the jack, 
the rocker-arm, adjustable connections be 
tween the rocker-arm and jack, a lug Orplate 
connected with said adjustable connections, 
and connections, substantially as described, 
on the jack constructed and arranged to be 
operated upon by the shoe on the jack and 
to operate upon said lug or plate, as Set 
3. In a shoe-burnishing machine, the Com 
bination, with the jack and the rocker-arm 
for oscillating the same, of the adjustable 
fulcrum-block for regulating the extent of 
oscillating movement of the jack, a movable 
lug or plate a, connected with said adjust 
able fulcrum-block, a clamp connected with 
the jack for clamping said lug or plate after 
being moved, and the connections for Operat 
ing said lug or plate when contact is had 
with a shoe carried by said jack, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. In a shoe-burnishing machine, the COm 
bination, with the jack and the rocker-arm for 
oscillating the same, of the adjustable full 
crum-block for regulating the extent of Oscil 
lating movement of the jack, a movable lug 
or plate ct, connected with said adjustable 
fulcrum-block, a movable bar mounted on 
said jack and designed to come in contact 
with the shoe carried thereon, and the means 
for operating said bar designed to bear upon 
said lug or plate, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 13th day of 
April, A. D. 1889. 
forth. 
W 
HORACE W. HORNE. 
IARRISON TAKE. 
Witnesses: 
HARRY J. COLE, 
EDMUND B. FULLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414319.txt	(No Model.) 
O. M. HUSTED, 
FENCE MAKING MACHINE, 
No. 414,319, 
Patented Nov. 5, 1889, 
2 
 
 
6. kS. Y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
n 
OSCAR. M. HUSTED, OF IIOLLY, MICHIGAN, 
FENCE, a MAK NG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,319, dated November 5, 1889. 
Application filed February 8, 1889, Serial No. 299,197, (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OSCAR. M. HUSTED, of 
Holly, in the county of Oakland and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
fullmprovements in Fence-Making Machines; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use it, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvementin 
fence-making machines; and the objects of 
my invention are to provide the machine with 
a Supporting-truck and a Supporting-bar upon 
which the truck moves, the supporting-bar 
being suspended from the stretched wires; to 
provide the operating-pinions and the twister 
heads with skew-gears; to provide the twister 
head with a central opening, through which 
a heavy Wire is to be passed, and one or more 
openings to one side of the center, through 
which a lighter wire is passed, so as to ena 
ble the lighter wire to be twisted around the 
heavier one, and thus prevent the sagging of 
the panels, and to make the journals which 
carry the twister-heads vertically adjustable 
upon the frame of the machine, and to pro 
vide them with journals for the vertically-op 
erating shaft. 
Figure 1 is a perspective of a machine 
which embodies my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
detail view of the twister-head and its attach 
ments, shown from its rear side. Fig. 3 is a 
plan view of the pickets, showing the posi 
tion of the wires after being twisted. Fig. 4 
is a detail view of the truck and its attach 
ments. Fig. 5 is a detail view of one of the 
hangers. Fig. 6 is a vertical section of one 
of the twister-heads. 
A represents a suitable frame-work, which 
is made of gas-pipe or any other Suitable 
material, and to which the truck B is secured 
by means of a collar C and set-screw. This 
collar can be vertically adjusted upon one 
side of the frame, so as to adapt it to the po 
sition of the supporting-bar D. 
The truck consists of a single rod or bar, 
which is provided with suitable wheels or 
rollers at its ends, and these wheels or roll 
ers bear directly upon the supporting-bar D, 
This bar D is suspended from the stretched 
wires by means of a hook E at one end and 
by a vertical guide-bar F at the other. The 
bar F is much longer than the hook, and is 55 
provided with rings or guides G, for catching 
over each of the stretched sets of wires and 
preventing any lateral play or movement of 
the different parts, at the same time that it 
helps to support the machine A in position. 
Pivoted to the bar D is a brace-rod H, 
which catches in a suitable guide I, which is 
prepared for it upon the rod F. By means 
of the rod H the bar D can be changed to 
any desired inclination, so as to adapt the 
machine to work upon hillsides or uneven 
ground and yet remain always perpendicular. 
The truck B is provided with a corrugated 
surface at its center, and this surface comes 
in contact with a corrugated friction-disk B' 
on the collar C, whereby the inclination of 
the bar D may be changed and held at any 
desired angle by a set-screw C. 
Heretofore the entire weight of the ma 
chine has been supported upon the ground, 
upon the Wires, or partially upon the ground 
and partially upon the wires; but I prefer to 
Support the machine entirely above the 
ground, thus enabling the machine to be more 
readily and easily moved than can be done 
where the machine rests upon the ground, 
which is always more or less uneven, and 
where there are many obstructions to prevent 
the machine from moving straight along. 
Between the two sides of the frame A are 
a number of hangers J, which are provided 
With sleeves K upon opposite sides, so as to 
fit over the frame, and which hangers are 
vertically adjustable upon the frame and are 
held in any desired position by means of set 
Screws, which pass through them to catch 
against the frame A. Also formed upon each 
of these hangers is a sleeve L, in which the 
vertical operating-shaft C is journaled. 
The hangers J consist of metallic rings or 
frames, in which the twister-heads M are 
journaled in any suitable manner, and which 
twister-heads are provided with skew-gears 
around their outer edges. Through each 
twister-head disk O is made a large central 
Opening N, through which a large heavy wire 
is to be passed, and which is to receive no 
twisting movement. Through opposite sides 
of the disk are formed openings, through 
75 
95 
IOO 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
414,319 
O 
which the smaller wires which are to be twisted 
are passed. If a heavy wire is used and only 
a single lighter wire for twisting around the 
heavy one, then only one of the side open 
ings will be used; but if two light wires, 
which are to be evenly twisted, are used in 
the usual manner, then the two wires will be 
passed through the two side openings, and the 
central opening will not be used at all. The 
object in using a heavy wire is to support the 
panels so that they will not sag, as is always 
the case where lighter wires are used. The 
disks O of the twister-heads are made de 
tachable therefrom, and are held in place by 
any suitable means. The disks O are made 
detachable from the twister-heads for conven 
ience in manufacture, and the heads being 
swiveled in the hangers they are free to be 
rotated therein. These disks are held in po 
sition in the heads by means of suitable pins 
or studs which catch upon opposite sides of 
the disks, as shown in Fig. 6. The holes T 
through the sides of the disk are made wedge 
shaped, so that the wire which is to be twisted 
around the heavier one can have a lateral 
play, so as to allow the machine to easily pass 
a splice in either wire. When the pickets are 
being inserted, the wire will be moved out 
ward; but as soon as the twisting strain is 
brought to bear upon the head the wire will 
move inward toward the center, and, being 
nearer to the center of motion, will be wrapped 
more closely and tightly around the heavy 
wire at the edges of the pickets than could 
35 be done if the wire were held stationary near 
3o 
45 
n 
the outer edge of the disk. After the twist 
ing is finished the small wire can be opened 
out, as already described, so as to allow the 
picket to be pushed tightly against the twist 
which has already been formed. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim- 
1. The combination, with a wire-twisting 
machine, of a supporting-bar which is sus 
pended from the stretched wires, and a truck 
which rests upon the bar and is secured to 
the machine, substantially as shown. 
2. The combination of the supporting-bar D, 
suspended from the stretched wires, and the 
truck B, secured by means of a collar C and 5 
set-screw to the frame of the machine and . 
made vertically adjustable thereon, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The combination of the supporting-frame 
A, the hangers J, provided with the sleeves K, 
placed thereon, the twister-heads M, provided 
with skew-gears, the disks O, provided with 
holes N T and placed inside of the twister 
head, the vertically-operating rod d, and the 
pinions placed thereon and provided with 
skew-gears to mesh with the twister-head, the 
said shaft being journaled in bearings L, 
formed upon the hangers J, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
- 
presence of two witnesses. 
65 
55 
OSCAR. M. HUSTED. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. FLETCHER, 
W. W. HEUSTED. 
--" 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414419.txt	(No Model.) 
W. D. LINDSLEY. 
SEEDING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 41449, 
Patented Nov. 5, 1889. 
im afaya 
re-ex 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3S 
& al 
Z cul 4/ zza 
prers to its shar washington, 
8. 
(No Model.) 
W. D. LINDSLEY. 
SEEDING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 414,419, 
Patented Nov. 5, 1889, 
A2. 3. 
Ne X-X 
a N 
t 
AW 6 
II IIHS g 
E-leas) 
- 
- 
is 
...-y 
Y. 
- 
ag 
of c 
 
 
S2 in 4. 
S. 
 
M. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, washington d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. D. LINDSLEY, OF HUNTSVILLE, KANSAS. 
SEED N G - VACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,419, dated November 5, 1889. 
Application filed March 14, 1889. 
y 
C 
2 
35 
40 
45 
To all, whon, it nagy conceit: . 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM D. LINDSLEY, 
of Huntsville, in the county of Reno and State 
of Kansas, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Seeding-Machines, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The aim of this invention is to provide a 
simple device which may be attached to an 
ordinary mold-board plow for the purpose of 
distributing the seed in the furrow formed 
thereby. 
To this end it consists in various features of 
construction hereinafter described and point 
ed out. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a side elevation of my seeding attachment. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical central section of the same 
from front to rear. Fig. 3 is a horizontal Sec 
tion on the line acac of Figs. 1, 2, and 4, look 
ing in a downward direction. Fig. 4 is a rear 
elevation of the same, with the shield for the 
driving-chain in section. Fig. 5 is a vertical 
section through the feed mechanism on the 
line y if of Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a rear elevation 
of the driving-gear in modified form. 
My attachment embraces as its essential 
features a tubular standard having at its bot 
tom a sustaining-wheel, an arm and clip for 
attachment to the plow, and a scatterer for 
the seed, and having at its top a hopper and 
a seed-dropping mechanism driven from the 
furrow-wheel. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
tubular standard, having at the bottom the 
rigid rearwardly-extending arm a, to which 
the furrow-wheel B is journaled, and also the 
rigid forwardly-extending arm a', the front 
end of which is connected by a horizontal 
pivot-bolt a to a clip a. This clip consists 
of the upper plate having the ears to receive 
the pivot-bolt, and a lower plate a, connected 
to the upper plate by vertical bolts'a. The 
clip thus constructed is intended and adapted 
to be applied rigidly to the cross bar or brace 
C, which is commonly used in mold-board 
plows to connect the landside and mold-board. 
The furrow-wheel B is mounted on the jour 
na, b, which is bolted or otherwise fixed rig 
idly in the end of the carrying-arm a. 
The lower end of the standard is enlarged 
so as to form a flaring mouth, through which 
55 
75 
Serial No. 303,277, (No model.) 
the seed is discharged, and below and at One 
side of this mouth is formed a rigid depend- . 
ing plate d', which supports a scattering-plate 
a, bolted to its face and adapted for vertical 
adjustment. The upper face of the scatter 
ing-plate is rounded downward, both later 
ally and in a forward direction, in order t 
effectually distribute the seed. 
It is to be noted that the scattering-plate is 
of smaller size than the expanded mouth of 
the standard beneath which it stands, so that 
the mouth serves as a guard or fender to pre 
vent the clods of earth from falling inward 
upon the scattering device or upon the seed 
before they are delivered into the bottom of 
the furrow. The scattering-plate is held by 
the horizontal bolt a, so that it may be re 
leased and tipped sidewise in either direction, 
in order to direct the seed mainly to the right 
or left. This is advantageous in that it adapts 
the apparatus for use with different styles of 
plows, some of which are so constructed as to 
forbid the trailing of the device in the mid 
de of the furrow. 
At its upper end the standard is enlarged 
to receive the seed-distributing roll D, and 
above this roll it is further enlarged to form 
the conical bottom Ct' of the hopper E. This 
hopper is commonly formed of sheet metal in 
a conical form, its lower end being inserted 
within and riveted fast to a fange on the edge 
of the part a', while its top is provided with 
a suitable cover. A seed throat or passage 
extends downward through the bottom of the 
hopper and the roll-chamber into the upper 
end of the standard. 
The feed-roll consists of the longitudinal 
fluted portion danda sleeved lying thereover. 
The roll D is provided with and driven by a 
journal d, extending horizontally through 
the side of the casing and provided on the 
outer end with a sprocket-wheeld, connected 
by a chain at d" to a sprocket-wheel di on the 
hub of the furrow-wheel. The sleeve D is 
arranged to slide inward and outward through 
the side of the case, over and around one end 
of the roll, and is grooved internally to sus 
tain the outer edge of a plate d', which is 
adapted to fit snugly around the roll d and to 
revolve therewith. It will be perceived that 
the rollis made in one piece and cast over and 
OC 
2 
414,419 
around the edge of the disk, so that it serves 
alone as a means of Sustaining and adjusting 
the same. As the roll revolves, it urges the 
seed descending from the hopper in a con 
tinuous stream rearward into the upper end 
of the standard, through which it descends to 
the scattering-plate and thence into the fur 
row. As the sleeve d' is moved inward, car 
rying with it the plate d', it covers and ren 
ders inoperative a portion of the feed-roll, at 
the same time diminishing thesize of the seed 
passage, thus lessening the rate of feed. 
In order to prevent the seed from finding 
its way over the back of the roll, the sleeved 
is provided with a long rib or finger d, which 
extends across the top of the roll and through 
the casing of the opposite side. A set-screw 
d, tapped into the casing, serves to hold the 
sleeve in the required position. 
The sprocket-chain is inclosed and pro 
tected on the outer side by a flanged metal 
plate or shield G, the ends of which are se 
cured, respectively, around the journal of the 
feed-roll and around the casing of the fur 
row-wheel, so that it serves as a connection 
between these parts to give increased strength 
to the structure. 
It will be observed that the connecting-arm 
a', the furrow-carrying arm, the chamber for 
the feed-roll, and the bottom of the hopper 
all form integral parts of the standard. 
The standard is commonly cast in two com 
plementary halves provided with suitable 
ears a to receive connecting bolts or rivets 
a'. It is to be noted that the plane of di 
vision is a vertical one extending from front 
to rear and that the arm a' is formed on one 
of the parts, while the wheel-carrying arm a 
is formed on the other, this being the pre 
ferred construction on account of the ease 
with which the parts may be cast. 
It will be perceived that the hopper and 
seed-delivering mechanism are sustained by 
the standard through which the seed is de 
livered, and that the attachment as a whole 
O 
5 
3O 
35 
45 
has but a single connection to the plow, this - 
arrangement permitting the entire attach 
ment to ride smoothly in the furrow notwith 
standing the inequality in the movement of 
the plow. 
In place of the sprocket wheels and chain 
above described for communicating motion 
from the ground-wheel to the seeding mech 
anism, I may employ an upright shaft. Con 
nected at its ends by beveled gearing to the 
feed-roll and furrow-wheel, respectively, as 
shown in Fig. 6. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A seeding attachment for mold-board 
plows, comprising the tubular conductor, the 
seed-distributing mechanism at its top, a sus 
taining furrow-wheel, a rigid front arm, and . 
a hinge-clip on said arm for connection with 
the plow-brace. 
2. The seeding attachment for mold-board 
plows, consisting of a tubular standard hav 
ing the hopper and seed-dropping devices 
fixed rigidly to its top, and having at its base 
the rigid arm provided with the pivoted clip 
and the second arm provided with the fur 
row-wheel geared to the seed-dropping de 
vices, substantially as shown. 
3. The combination of the tubular stand 
ard having the rear arm, the ground-wheel 
mounted on said arm and having the sprocket 
wheel attached, the hopper mounted on the 
top of the standard, the seed cup or chamber, 
the feed-roll and its sprocket-wheel, the con 
necting-chain, and the chain-guard connected 
to the ground-wheel axle and the seed mech 
anism, whereby it is enabled to serve as a 
brace. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 21st day of February, 1889, in the 
presence of two attesting witnesses. 
. WILLIAM D. LINDSLEY. 
. 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
J. J. CAMPBELL, 
J. S. COLE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414519.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 414,519, 
 
R. S. GL ADDING, 
NUT FOR SCREW BOLTS, 
Patented NOW. 5, 1889. 
-Fo 
A 2.5. 
an 
72zefes, 
-(Zazz.22%zs44. 
24 (24%. 
Zzzezz7: 
% 24 
24 2. 
pers, photo-Lithographer, Washirst 
Es: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD S. GLADDING, OF BRISTOL, RHODE ISLAND. 
NUT FOR S CREW - BOLTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,519, dated November 5, 1889. 
Application filed April 13, 1888, Serial No. 270,541 (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, RICHARD S. GLADDING, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Bristol, in the county of Bristol and State of 
Rhode Island, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Nuts for Screw-Bolts, of 
which the following is a specification. 
In making repairs upon stoves and fur 
naces the plates of which are secured to each 
other by means of the ordinary screw-bolts, 
it is extremely difficult to loosen the nuts 
from the screws which extend into the fire 
chamber or ?lues of the stove or furnace, ow 
ing to the expansion of the bolt by rust and 
the usual inaccessibility of the nut to be re 
moved; and when the chisel as ordinarily 
employed is used for the purpose of cutting 
the wrought-iron bolt or nut there is extreme 
danger of breaking the comparatively thin 
cast-iron plates of which the stove or furnace 
is formed; and it is the object of my inven 
tion to provide a fastening device for the 
stove or furnace plates in which the plates 
can be readily disengaged from each other 
under all circumstances; and my invention 
consists in a fastening-bolt provided with a 
nut having an entire Screw-thread, the said 
nut being provided with a slit or groove ex 
tending in the direction of its axis from the 
exterior to near the screw-thread, whereby 
when the bolt and nut become rusted to 
gether and are to be removed a slight blow 
upon a chisel inserted in the slit or groove 
will suffice to effect the ready removal of the 
nut, as hereinafter fully set forth. 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of the top 
of a cooking-stove. Fig. 2 represents an en 
larged detail section of the attached plates 
of the stove-top and of the nut. Fig. 3 is a 
plan view of the nut. 
In the accompanying drawings, A is the top 
plate of a cooking-stove, having the center 
piece B, which forms the bridge between the 
front and rear pot-holes C C, the said center 
piece being secured to the top plate A by 
means of the screw-bolts E, having nuts D, 
which are located either in the flue or in the 
fire-chamber of the stove. The center piece 
B in ordinary cooking-stoves soon becomes 
warped or cracked, and therefore requires 
removal from the stove in order that a new 
center piece can be inserted in its place; and 
in order that the nuts ID can be readily re 
moved from the screw-bolts E, I provide them 
with a slit or groove a, which may be prefer 
ably made about a sixteenth of an inch in 
width and extend to within about a thirty 
second of an inch from the screw-thread of 
the nut, as shown in Fig. 3; and when the 
center piece B is secured to the plate A by 
means of the screw-bolt E, having the slit or 
grooved nut D, a slight tap with a hammer 
upon a chisel inserted into the slit or groove 
a will suffice to fracture the nut, thus loosen 
ing the nut on the screw, so that thereafter 
the screw-bolt can be readily removed from 
the plates and the desired repairs be made, 
such repairs being often required in almost 
every stove or furnace, so that the use of 
such improved fastening for stove-plates will 
operate as a great saving of time to stove 
repairers. The screw-bolts E can in nearly 
every instance be readily turned in the plate, 
so that the slit or groove a in the side of the 
nut can be brought to the most convenient 
side for operation. 
I am aware that screw-nuts have hereto 
fore been cut entirely through to one side 
for the purpose of a lock-nut; but I do not 
claim a nut when cut entirely through so as 
to expose the thread of the screw at the slit 
of the nut, thus adding materially to the 
trouble of removal on account of the swell 
ing of the unprotected screw-thread by the 
rust. 
In my invention the slit is made without 
cutting through the screw-thread of the nut, 
so that when the chisel cracks the thin Web 
left between the bottom of the slit and the 
cavity of the nut the nut can be readily 
turned upon the screw, the threads of which 
will be in proper uniform condition through 
out their whole extent to allow the nut to be 
turned. 
Screw-bolts provided with my improved 
nut can also be advantageously employed on 
any contrivance where the bolt and nut are 
subjected to rust, their advantageous use not 
being limited to the plates of a stove. 
I claim as my invention 
A bolt provided with a nut having an en 
tire screw-thread, the said nut being provided 
with a slit or groove extending in the direc 
tion of its axis from the exterior to near the 
screw-thread, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
RICHARD S. GIADDING. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN S. LYNCH, 
SOCRATES SCHOLFIELD. 
Id 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
O) 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414619.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 414,619, 
J. WEISS. 
sCREW DRIVER, 
Patented Nov. 5, 1889. 
zzfest: 
c2a44%re 
-6a7% (%42- 
Z7 Ue7Cor: 
vs. v. Nevsk 
(a scard O?r wr 
N. 
T.ERS. Photo-lithographer, Washington. . C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS WEISS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SCREW- DRIVE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,619, dated November 5, i889. 
Application filed August 19, 1889, Serial No. 321,210. (No model.) 
C 
35 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JULIUS WEISS, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Screw-Drivers; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, making a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to that class of screw 
driver's having appliances for holding the 
Screw until it is started in the wood. 
It has for its object to provide a screw 
driver by which the screw to be driven may 
be readily inserted into a deep recess or be 
tween the members in the mechanism of a 
clock or other machine to a point out of reach 
of the fingers and as readily removed there 
from, even where the space is but little larger 
than the head of the screw, 
It consists in the combination, with a lon 
gitudinally-grooved stem or shank which 
terminates in a driving-blade, of three or 
more elastic arms fitted to move longitudi 
nally in the longitudinal grooves of the stem 
or Shank, and not project beyond the periph 
ery thereof, and which are secured at their 
inner ends to a collar sliding on the stem, 
and are drawn together and closed in upon 
the blade by means of an encircling band or 
collar sliding upon them, substantially in 
mannel and form as hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of my improved screw-driver 
With its clamping device closed upon a screw 
to hold it against the blade of the instrument; 
Fig. 2, a similar view illustrating the screw 
released by the extension and expansion of 
the outer ends of the clamping-wires. Fig. 3 
is a transverse section in linea: a through the 
handle; Fig. 4, a similar cross-section through 
the shank in line if 
f and Fig. 5, an en 
larged transverse section in line 22, through 
the sliding collar moving over the clamping 
wires, detached. 
A represents the shank or stem of the 
screw-driver, and B the handle into which it 
is inserted. The stem A is longitudinally 
channelled from end to end with three or 
more grooves b blo, extending its entirelength. 
 
55 
65 
These grooves serve the double purpose of 
affording a firm hold for the stem within the 
handle B, into which it is driven to prevent 
the handle from turning independently there 
on, and of furnishing longitudinal recesses in 
which to fit the clamping-wires. These grooves 
may be either angular in cross-section, as 
shown in Fig. 3, or curved. The outer end 
of the stem or shank is made to form, in the 
customary manner, a driving-blade C, adapted 
to engage the nick in the head of the screw 
to be driven. 
D is a collar fitted to slide freely upon the 
stem A. To this collar are secured elastic 
rods E E E E, of a diameter small enough to 
fit easily within the longitudinal grooves bb 
of the stem A, and preferably, as shown in 
Fig. 4, to lie wholly within the same, and 
project but slightly, if at all, beyond the pe 
riphery thereof, so that the diameter of the 
combined stem and rods shall not exceed ma 
terially that of the stem alone. The rodsEE 
are of a length somewhat less than that of 
the portion of the stem projecting beyond its 
handle, so that by sliding the collar D toward 
the handle the outer ends of the rods may be 
brought to the end of the blade C. These 
ends are each bent slightly inward, as at ff, 
to form clamping-jaws to take hold of the 
head of a screw when closed in thereon. The 
rods are so bent as that normally they will 
have a tendency to Spring apart at their Outer 
ends, as shown in Fig. 2; but they are drawn 
inward and confined in their seats in the 
grooves b b by means of a sliding band or 
sleeve G, fitted to embrace them closely and 
slide over them upon the stem. A of the screw 
driver, Where the rods E E are so thick as 
to project beyond the circumference of the 
stem to which they are fitted, the inner pe 
riphery of the band G is notched, as shown 
in Fig. 5, to embrace the projecting portion, 
with a view of reducing the thickness of the 
sliding band to a minimum, so that it may 
pass into or through an opening of a diameter 
but slightly larger than that of the stem. 
In the use of the device for removing a 
screw, the band G is slipped back toward the 
collar D, thereby allowing the outer ends of 
the rods E E to spring apart in readiness to 
clasp the screw; and the rods may also be 
projected beyond the blade, as shown in Fig. 
75 
95 
OC 
3 
414,619 
2, either by drawing the stem Aback through 
the collar D, or by sliding the collar forward 
upon the stem. When the screw is reached 
and the end of the blade pushed forward and 
fitted in the nick thereof, the jaws if f are 
made to close upon and clasp its head by 
simply sliding the band G toward the blade. 
The screw will thus be firmly held, as shown 
in Fig. 1, without interfering with the hold 
of the blade thereon or its rotation, so that 
when turned out of its seat the screw will re 
main on the end of the blade, to be withdrawn 
there with. In like manner, when it is de 
sired to insert a screw at a point not readily 
reached by the fingers, the screw may be 
clamped upon the blade, as shown in Fig. 1, 
and thereby readily carried to the desired po 
sition in readiness to be driven home by the 
screw-driver. 
When it is not required to make use of the 
clamping-jaws, they are simply drawn in upon 
the blade far enough back from its end not 
to interfere therewith, and, being clasped 
down tightly in their seats upon the stem, 
serve to re-enforce it without increasing its 
SZe. 
A neat, strong, slender tool is thus pro 
duced, capable of seizing and holding as well 
as driving a screw when required, and with 
which the screw may be placed in or removed 
from otherwise inaccessible positions. It has 
the advantage over other screw-drivers fur 
nished with spring-jaws, which by means of 
a sliding ring or band can be made to seize 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
and hold the screw-head independently of the 
driving-blade and to operate in combination 
therewith, that the rods terminating in the 
clamping-jaws lie in the longitudinal grooves 
of the shank below the face of the Outer pe 
riphery thereof, and consequently do not ob 
struct the movement of the screw-driver, and 
when closed in do not enlarge its diameter. 
The longitudinal grooves at the inner end of 
the shank, moreover, permit the intervening 
ribs to take such a firm hold of the Wood of 
the handle into which it is inserted as to ren 
der the connection of the two very firm and 
stable. 
I claim as my invention 
A screw-driver having a cylindrical stem 
longitudinally grooved from end to end, in 
combination with elastic rods seated within 
said grooves to slide longitudinally therein, 
and bent at their outer ends to form clamp 
ing-jaws, a collar sliding upon said cylindrical 
stem and to which the inner ends of the rods 
are secured, and a band sliding upon the rods 
and clasping them within the grooves upon 
the stem, all substantially in the manner and 
for the purpose herein set forth. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
JULIUS WEISS. 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD CHRISTY, 
A. N. JESBERA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414720.txt	(No Model.) 
E. J. O'KEEFE. 
LOCK, 
Patented NOW, 12, 1889, 
S 
s 
- 
Rs. 
sy 3. 
Sir 2) 
s 
s 
R 
a. 
ins 
sis iss : 
2H 
SH 
- 
St. Hill 
w 
f 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
(G) 
t 
R 
s 
E3's 
Sy 
nS 
 
WX S 2 
22 1. 
| 
s 
 
 
 
  
  
2 1, 2 
S 
AM s 
N 
N. R 
6.2a-1,3 
WITNESSES: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD J. O'KEEFE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGN 
MENTS, TO P. & F. CORBIN, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT. 
LOC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,720, lated Novemb3r 12, 1889. 
Application filed January 18, 1889, Serial No, 296,692, (No model.) 
5 
. 
line. 
To all whon, it invay concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARD J. OKEEFE, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Locks, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
locks; and it consists in novel devices here 
inafter described, whereby the lock may be 
opened by either of two keys different in out 
The purpose of the invention is to provide 
a lock for buildings-such as hotels-having 
a large number of rooms, having tenants for 
each, and necessitating the providing of keys 
for the tenants, as well as for the janitor or 
persons cleaning the various apartments or 
having general inspection of them. 
By means of my invention the separate 
rooms of a hotel or other building may be 
provided with the locks, and the tenants each 
supplied with a key which will open the doors 
of their respective apartments, but which will 
not serve to unlock the doors of the adjoin 
ing apartments, and the porter orjanitor sup 
plied with a single key by which all of the 
locks of the building may be opened, the jani 
tor thus with one key being enabled to enter 
any of the rooms, while the tenants, holding 
different keys, may also be enabled to enter 
their own respective apartments. 
The invention will be more fully under 
stood from the detailed description hereinaf 
ter presented, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view of a detached portion of 
a door employing the lock, the lock and door 
being partly in section on the dotted line XX 
of Fig. 3. Fig. 2 is a central vertical section 
through the lock on the dotted line Y Y of 
Fig. 1, the parts of the lock being illustrated 
in the position they are caused to assume by 
the insertion of one of the keys, which, for 
convenience, may be styled the minor or 
tenant's, key. Fig. 3 is a like view of the 
lock with its parts illustrated in the position 
they are caused to assume by the introduc 
tion of a different key, styled the major' 
or janitor's key. Fig. 4 is a face view of the 5o 
minor key. Fig. 5 is a like view of the ma 
jor key, and Fig. 6 a face view of the inner 
end of the escutcheon-cylinder. 
In the drawings, A designates the door, 
which will be supplied with the usual knob- 55 
spindle B and spring-latch bolt C, these ele 
ments forming no part of the present inven 
tion. The escutcheon-cylinder is designated by 
the letter D, and has a threaded exterior, by 6o 
which it is secured in position in an aperture 
formed in the door A and corresponding with 
an aperture formed in the lock-casing E, said 
cylinder being retained in said apertures by 
means of its threaded exterior in connection 65 
with the locking-rod F, (illustrated in Fig. 1) 
said rod being adapted to be driven against 
the threaded cylinder by means of the screw 
G, the head of which is exposed at the edge 
of the door, the rod Falso forming no part of 7o 
the present invention. 
The escutcheon - cylinder D contains the 
cylinder H and cylinder I, one closely fitting 
the other and the whole inclosed by the cyl 
inder D. 
In the cylinder D are formed the series of 
chambers J, containing springs Kand drivers 
L. adapted, through the action of the springs 
IX, to depress the pins lettered MN, respect 
ively, which move in chambers or apertures 8o 
formed in the cylinders H I, as illustrated in 
Figs. 2 and 3. The outer edge of the cylin 
der H has a shoulder O seated in an annular 
recess in the adjoining edges of the cylinder 
D, and the cylinder I has at its outer edge 85 
a shoulder P seated in a correspondingly 
formed recess in the inner edges of the cylin 
der H, the purpose of the shoulders O P be 
ing to insure the due rotation of the cylin 
ders H I when actuated by the keys. The 9o 
cylinder I contains a slot Q for the reception 
of either the minor key R or the major key 
S. The inner edge of said cylinder I is pro 
vided with an annular groove T, which ro 
tates against the locking-plate V, the edge of 95 
said plate resting in said groove and serving 
to prevent the cylinder I from being drawn 
outward from the lock. The inner central 
75 
- 
25 
35 
40 
 
2 
414,720 
O 
portion of the cylinder I is provided with a 
recess to receive the inner end of the rod W, 
which carries a ward a of a size adapted to 
enter the slot Q, in which position it is illus 
trated in Figs. 2 and 3. The rod W extends 
through the lock-casing from the inner side 
of the door, where it is provided with a hub 
b and shoulder d. The outer portion of the 
rod W is inclosed by the casing e, in which a 
chamber f is provided to receive the spring 
g between a shoulder formed in it and the 
collar d, as illustrated in Fig. 2. The collar 
d is retained on the rod W by means of the 
sleeve i and set-screwi. The rod W within 
the locking-casing passes through the revo 
luble plate k, which contains a central aper 
ture fitting the surface of the rod W and a 
slot m, corresponding with the slot in the in 
ner end of the cylinder I to receive the ward 
a. The revoluble plate lc carries the arm n, 
and is provided with an annular groove p, 
fitting and having a movement upon the edges 
q of the lock-casing, as illustrated in Figs. 2 
and 3. The rod W may have a horizontal 
movement through the plate k without rotat 
ing it, the plate being prevented from hav 
ing any but a rotary movement by means of 
its annular groove p and the edges q of the 
lock-casing. 
When the rod W is caused to 
rotate either by the operation of turning the 
cylinder I by means of the key or by pressure 
applied to the head b, the ward a on said rod 
will engage the slot m in the plate lc and 
cause said plate to have a rotary movement, 
whereby the arm n is brought into contact 
with the tumbler r, elevating it, and then 
against the walls of the recess S, formed in 
the bolt t, as illustrated by dotted lines in 
Fig. 1, the purpose of the arm in during this 
movement being to first free the bolt i by 
elevating the tumbler r, and then to either 
project the said bolt into the usual nosing or 
retract it into the lock-casing. The bolt t 
will be supported and guided in its move 
ment by the face-plate U and the pin ac, ar 
ranged in the elongated slot f. (Illustrated 
by dotted lines in Fig. 1.) 
When desiring to open the lock from the 
inner side of the door, it will be necessary to 
draw the head b outward from the door, there 
by compressing the spring g in the chamber 
if and withdrawing the inner end of the ward 
a from the slot Q in the cylinder I, thus leav 
ing said Ward fully engaging the slot an in 
the revoluble plate k, whereupon by turning 
the head b the arm n is caused to move up 
ward, elevating the tumbler r and retracting 
the bolt it into its casing. When the rod W 
is withdrawn from the cylinder I, by drawing 
on the head b the plate k, with its arm in, may 
be caused to fully lock or unlock the door by 
the rotation of the head b, which, as afore 
said, is on the inner side of the door. 
The operation of the cylinders HI, in con 
nection with the drivers L and pins MN, will 
be rendered apparent from an inspection of 
Figs. 2 and 3. The pin-chambers in the cylin 
ders lettered H I, respectively, being in line 
with the chambers J in the cylinder D, the 
springs K, operating through the drivers L, 
maintain a downward pressure on the pins M 
N, in order that when the key R is inserted 
through the slot Q the lower ends of the pins N 
willenter the clefts of the key, and the upper 
ends of the pinsMandlower ends of the drivers 
L will have a regular line of union at the meet 
ing edges of the cylinder H with the cylin 
der D, as shown in Fig. 2, thereby permitting . 
of the rotation of the cylinders by the means 
of the key R, the cylinders H I at this time 
being connected by the irregular line of meet 
ing edges between the pins MN. Upon the 
rotation of the cylinders HI, under the con 
dition of the pins illustrated in Fig. 2, the 
walls of the inner end of the slot Q will en 
gage the sides of the Warda and cause the 
rod W to rotate, thereby bringing the arm n. 
of the revoluble plate k upward into contact 
with the tumbler r and bolt tand actuating 
said bolt either to lock or unlock the door. 
The pins MN, upon the withdrawal of the 
key R will assume their normal positions 
with respect to each other. The key R, being 
the minor key, will be supplied to the tenants, 
and while it will unlock the door prepared 
for it, it will be ineffective on any of the other 
doors of the building, said other doors hav 
ing locks in which the pins MN will vary in 
length. 
When it is desired to unlock the door for 
the purpose of inspecting or cleaning the 
room, the janitor will use the major key S, 
which, upon being introduced into the slot Q, 
pins MN to have a regular 
will cause the 
line of union between the cylinders HI, while 
the upper ends of the pins M will connect 
the cylinder H with the cylinder D in an 
immovable manner, as illustrated in Fig. 3, 
in which condition, upon turning the key S, 
the cylinder I will rotate and cause the locking 
or unlocking of the door through the medium 
of the rod. W, ward -a, and arm in on the revo 
luble plate k. 
It will thus be seen that the . 
door may be opened by either the key R or 
the key S from the outer side of the door, or 
by the rod W from the inner side of the door, 
the keys R S being entirely different in out 
The combinations formed by the pins M 
N will vary to suit the different minor or ten 
ants' keys R throughout the various apart 
ments of the building; but all of these com 
binations will be arranged with respect to the 
outline of the major key S, which may be 
utilized for unlocking all of the apartments 
of the building. It will only be necessary, 
therefore, for the proprietor orjanitor to carry 
one key S for access to all of the apartments, 
while the various tenants will each be sup 
plied with a different key. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a lock, the combination of a rotary 
key-hub and a rotary cylinder surrounding 
line. 
- 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
f 25 
 
414,720 
3 
ing provided with the key-slot Q, combined 
with the rod W, having ward a, the revoluble 
plate k, having arm n, and the tumbler and 2c 
bolt, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
5. The bolt W, having the ward a, spring 
g, and head b, combined with the revoluble 
plate k on the said rod, and having the arm 
n, combined with the tumbler r and bolt t, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 12th day of 
January, A. D. 1889. 
25 
EDWARD J. O'KEEFE. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. C. GILL, 
R. A. PORTEOUS. 
it, said cylinder having tumbler-recesses, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a lock, the combination of a key-hub, 
a cylinder surrounding it, and tumblers to 
fasten the two together or to unfasten them, 
so that they may be rotated together, or the 
key-hub rotated alone, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In a lock, the combination, with a key 
hub and a surrounding cylinder, of tumblers 
consisting of three parts arranged to be 
formed in two combinations, so as to permit 
the cylinder and the key-hub or the key-hub 
alone to be rotated, substantially as setforth. 
4. The escutcheon - cylinder containing 
spring-drivers and inclosing cylinder H I, 
carrying pins MN, and the inner cylinderbe 
IC 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414820.txt	(No Model.) , 
No. 414,820, 
F. OSBORN. 
OIL WELL PUMP. 
Patented Nov. 12, 1889. 
 
 
S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED SBORN, OF SIIAM BURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
OIL-WELL PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,820, dated November 12, 1889. 
Application filed June 26, 1889. Serial No. 315,605, (No model.) 
55 
To al., whon, it may concern: 
A represents the walls of the well; B, the 
IBe it known that I, FRED OSBORN, a citizen 
lower oil-producing strata; C, the one next 
of the United States, residing at Shamburg, 
above. These may be, as heretofore men 
in the county of Venango and State of Penn 
tioned, a hundred feet or more apart. The 
Sylvania, have invented a new and useful 
well is drilled down through both these 
Device for Pumping and Operating Oil or 
strata, and sufficiently lower so as to form 
Artesian Wells, of which the following is a what is called a pocket, into which the oil 
specification. 
or water mingled with it may collect. 
In the production of petroleum or rock oils 
D is the tubing; E, the lower working-bar 
it frequently happens that the wells are 
rel; F, the upper; G, the pump-rods, or, as they 
drilled through two or more strata of rock 
are commonly called, the sucker-rods, con 
each of which produces or furnishes a quan 
necting with the pumping machinery at the 
tity of the oil, and these strata are separated 
surface of the ground. The lower working 
by slate or other strata, and may be hun 
barrel E is the ordinary working-barrel, with 
dreds of feet apart. In the operation it is 
the usual plunger a and the seated valve b. 
better that the faces of the oil-producing 
The upper working-barrel F is also the Ordi 
Strata be constantly covered by the oil stand 
nary working-barrel, but the valves are con 
ing in the Well, thus dissolving the paraffine, 
structed somewhat differently. The plunger 
which otherwise would collect on the face of 
c is the same, only an inverted cage is at 
the rock and obstruct the flow of oil into the 
tached to the bottom, so as to connect With 
Well. On the other hand, it is 
Ilow 
the rod d, continuing the connection to the 
lower working-barrel E. The seated valve e 
the oil Ol' fluid to stand in the Well at too 
great a depth, as then it will force the oil 
is also constructed so as to allow the rod d to 
back into the rock. It is apparent that if 
pass through, and consists of the packing 
the oil were allowed to stand in the well so as 
box f around the rod d. In the shell of this 
to cover the upper strata, the lower strata 
packing-box are the concentric slots g, open 
would be obstructed by too great a superin 
ing from the bottom to the top and closed at 
cumbent pressure. It is to this class of Wells 
the top by the ring-valve h, which admits the 
that my invention relates; and my object is 
fluid to pass up but not back. 
to separate each strata from the one above it, 
Around the outside of the tubing D, and 
so as to prevent the oil from descending from 
far enough below the bottom of the upper 
the upper strata to the lower, and arranging 
strata C to form a pocket, is the cup or packer 
a series of working barrels or pumps in the 
H. This prevents the fluid from the upper 
tubing, so that each strata can have its own 
strata from passing down to the lower strata. 
!). 
and be flooded just sufficiently to ac 
To allow of the escape of gas from the 
complish the desired end and no more, and 
lower strata, or to admit the pressure of the 
that this shall be done by one string of tub 
atmosphere upon the oil in the lower strata, 
ing and One string of sucker or pump rods. 
a pipe k leads outside the tubing from below 
the cup H, through the cup, and upward 
To accomplish this I make use of the device 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
through the body of fluid from the upper 
which 
strata, and may be continued to the surface 
Figure 1 represents the lower section of an 
of the ground. 
oil-well covering two strata of oil-producing 
To admit the oil into the tubing, the tubing 
rock, and with the tubing, working-barrels, 
is perforated at M and N in the pocket below 
and pump-rods all shown in section; Fig. 2, 
the lowest strata, and between the cup H and 
a vertical section of the seated valve of the 
the bottom of the upper strata. 
upper Working-barrel, showing the construc 
The bottom of each working-barrel is placed 
tion. So as to allow the pump - rod to pass 
about twenty feet, or at such a distance above 
through it to the next working-barrel; and 
the top of its respective strata as will enable 
the pump at the ordinary rate of motion to re 
Fig. 3, a cross-section of the same. 
The same parts are indicated in the several 
move the oil to the top of the strata. By so 
drawings by the same letter. 
doing any water coming from the rock settles 
...-------- 
---- 
IO 
I 5 
25 
45 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
IOC 
 
414,820 
into the pocket and first runs into the tubing 
and is pumped off, and the oil is constantly 
maintained over the face of the rock. 
In preparing the well for pumping the tub 
ing D, with the working-barrels E and Feach 
in their proper place, is first inserted in the 
well, the seated valve b of the lower barrel 
being also in its proper place. Next the 
pump - rods G, with the plunger A of the 
lower Working-barrel and with both valves 
of the upper barrel in their respective posi 
tions on the rod, are inserted. So it is evident 
that the lower barrel must be of so much 
smaller diameter than the upper that the 
valves of the lower barrel can pass through 
the valve-seat of the upper, and that if three 
or more barrels are used each barrel must by 
So much decrease in size as to be smaller than 
the one above it. 
In a well tubed and operated as above de 
scribed it is evident that both pumps are 
worked together, the lower pump taking the 
oil from the lower rock and raising it through 
the seated valve of the pump next above. 
There the oil, being kept from running back 
by the seated valve and by the cup or packer 
II on the outside of the tubing, may mingle 
with the oil from the upper strata and by the 
second pump be in turn raised to another still 
higher, or to the surface. Each strata being 
thus separated from the one next above, the 
oil can be maintained so as to just cover the 
O 
25 
face of the rock and be relieyed from any 
superincumbent pressure which may prevent 
the free flow of oil or fluid from the rock. It 
is also evident that by duplicating the seated 
valve e in other working-barrels and connect 
ing the pump-rods in the manner indicated 
for the upper barrel F any reasonable num 
ber of barrels may be inserted to take the oil 
from corresponding strata. 
Instead of the seated valve e, constructed 
as herein described, the check-valve, com 
monly called the crocker-check, may be 
used in any but the lower barrel. The 
crocker-check is an old device and need not, 
be described here. 
I claim as my invention 
In an oil-well where the oil is procured from 
two or more separate and independent strata, 
in combination with the ordinary tubing, one 
or more packers H around the tubing and be 
tween the separate oil-bearing strata, divid 
ing the well vertically into sections, and with 
the working-barrel, valves, and pistons of a 
pump inserted in the tubing in each of the 
sections, all being constructed, placed, and 
operated substantially as shown, and for the 
purposes herein set forth. 
FRED OSBORN. 
Witnesses: 
W. G. ABEL, 
J. OSBORN. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US414920.txt	(No Model.) 
F. ROBERT. 
CAR COUPLING, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 414,920, 
Patented NOW, 12, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
2 5, 
WITNESSES: 
44-yok 
- 
INVENTOR: 
BY J.s 
ATTORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 414,920, 
. 
F. ROBERT. 
CAR COUPLING, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 12, 1889. 
L7"is 7 
7 
4 K% 2 
72 
 
 
A. 
-gs 
WI E.SSES . 
66ers of 
  
II 
 
. 
 
 
27. 
A. WE TOR: 
BY ite - 
F. ROBERT. 
CAR COUPTING, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 12, 1889. 
a: No.  ----*  <N 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 414,920, 
 
 
WITNESSES 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK ROBERT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CAR-COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 414,920, dated November 12, 1889. 
Application filed May 8, 1889. Serial No, 310,023, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK ROBERT, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Car-Couplers, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
car-couplers of the Vertical-plane type, and has 
for its object the simplification of construc 
tion over others of this class by doing away 
With all machine-work and at the same time 
to provide large bearing-surfaces on which 
the knuckle revolves; also to provide a means 
for taking up the buffing strain on the side 
of the draw-head in a novel manner. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a locking device having a larger bearing 
surface than usual, and one in which the 
amount of lift of the pin required in unlock 
ing the knuckle is very much reduced. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several parts, 
as will be hereinafter more fully set forth, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters and figures of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the draw-head. 
Fig. 2 is a section on line acac of Fig. 1, illus 
trating the coupling-pin in a position to per 
mit of uncoupling. Fig. 3 is a similar section 
illustrating the coupling-pin as in a coupled 
position. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the knuckle, 
and Fig. 5 is a rear view of the knuckle. Fig. 
6 is a horizontal section through the draw 
head, with the knuckle in its closed position. 
In carrying out the invention the draw-head 
10 is provided with the usual horn 11, a con 
cave front face, and an interior chamber. In 
the upper and lowerface of the draw-head, at 
the side opposite to that carrying the horn, 
arced openings 12 are produced, the lower 
opening being in vertical alignment with the 
upper opening, and between the arced open 
ings and a point at or near the center of the 
draw-head top and bottom vertically-align 
ing openings 13 are made, preferably rectangul 
lar, and adapted to receive the coupling-pin. 
Upon the outer face of that side of the draw 
head containing the arced openings, at the top 
O 
25 
35 
45 
and bottom of said face, recesses 16 are respect 
ively produced, the walls of which recesses 
are adapted to receive the buffing strain of 
the knuckle. The recesses 16 extend from 
the front of the draw-head quite a distance 
to the rear, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The knuckle comprises a body B, from the 
forward end of which two spaced hooks B 
are horizontally projected, and a Wing C, ex 
tending horizontally from its inner end. In 
the body of the knuckle a perpendicular arced 
slot 17 is formed, through which, when the 
knuckle is entered into the draw-head, a pivot 
pin 18 is passed, said pin being also made to 
pass through the arced openings in the draw 
head, as best illustrated in Figs. 2 and 3. 
This pin does not entirely fill the slot in the 
knuckle. In the act of opening and closing 
the knuckle it moves in said slot and forms 
bearing and guide surfaces for the same. 
The pivot-pin 18 necessarily conforms in 
CrOSS-Section to the contour of the knuckle 
slot and the draw-head openings receiving it. 
The wing C of the knuckle is provided with 
a central horizontally-located recess extend 
ing from its inner side to a point near its op 
posite side, as indicated by the dotted lines 
in Fig. 4, and as shown in elevation in Fig. 5. 
Thus the wing C is virtually divided into two 
sections d and d'. 
The coupling-pin 19 is provided with two 
Spaced recesses 20 and 21 in one side, the 
distance between the recesses being about 
equal to the space intervening the opposed 
walls of the wing-sections d and d'. The re 
Cesses in the coupling-pin are so located that 
when the pin is elevated, as shown in Fig. 2, 
which is the uncoupling position, each recess 
will receive one wing-section of the knuckle, 
whereby the said knuckle is free to revolve 
upon its pivot-pin and thereby effect an un 
coupling with an opposed draw-head. When 
the coupling-pin is dropped, as shown in Fig. 
3, the recesses of the pin pass out of registry 
with the wing-sections, and the said sections 
bear against the solid portion of the coupling 
pin, whereby the said coupling-pin sustains 
all the pulling strain. 
At the intersection of the hooks of the 
knuckle with the body of the same at top and 
bottom a lug or boss 22 is formed, as is best 
illustrated in Fig. 4, the said lug or boss being 
m 
75 
95 
OO 
414,923 
s 
of sufficient length to neatly enter the draw 
head recesses 16, heretofore described, and 
the opposed or facing walls of the bosses and 
the draw-head recesses are so formed that the 
two will contact simultaneously at every point 
throughout their length. 
It will be observed from this construction 
that a large extent of buffing-surface is ob 
tained, and that the buffing strain is sustained 
by the outer surface of the head. 
I desire it to be understood that the bear 
ing-surfaces of the coupling-pin 19 and the 
faces of the recesses 16, formed in the draw 
head for taking the buffing blow, are prefer 
ably coincident with a radial line drawn from 
the center of revolution of the knuckle. 
Having thus described my invention, claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with a draw-head, of a 
knuckle provided with an arced slot, and a 
pivot-pin capable of passing through the draw 
head and the knuckle-slot, substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. The combination, with a draw-head hav 
ing arc-shaped openings therein, of a knuckle 
provided with an arced slot registering with 
the opening in the draw-head, and a pivot 
pin passing through the draw-head openings 
and the knuckle-slot, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
3. The combination, with a draw-head pro 
IO 
3o 
. 
vided with vertically-aligning arc-shaped 
openings and a knuckle provided with an 
arc-shaped slot registering with the Openings 
in the draw-head, of a wing projected from the 
inner end of the body of the knuckle and hori 
Zontally slotted, a pivot-pin passing through 
the draw-head opening and the knuckle-slot, 
and a coupling-pin provided with two spaced 
recesses to receive the wing of the knuckle, 
all combined for operation, substantially as 
shown and described. 
4. In a car-coupler, a draw-head of the type 
described provided with a buffing recess 
in one side, and arc-shaped openings, and 
polygonal coupling-pin openings produced 
in its upper and lower faces, the lower open 
ing being in vertical registry with the upper 
opening, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
5. The combination, with a draw-head of 
the type described provided with recesses in 
one side face at the front, of a knuckle held 
to revolve in the draw-head, provided with a 
boss or lug capable of entering each of the 
draw - head recesses, substantially as de 
scribed, whereby the buffing strain is sus 
tained by the draw-head, as set forth. 
FREDERICK ROBERT. 
Witnesses: 
EDWD. EASTWICK, Jr., 
C. SEDGWICK. 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415020.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIVER F. BROWN, OF LEXINGTON, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
A. FARRA, OF SAME PLACE. 
NMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,020, dated November 12, 1889. 
Application filed July 15, 1889. Serial No. 317,586. (No specimens.) 
To all whon it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, OLIVER, F. BROWN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lex 
ington, in the county of Fayette and State of 
Kentucky, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Liniments; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to that class of medi 
cal compounds which are designed for exter 
nal application for the relief of pain, for re 
ducing SWelling and inflammation caused by 
bruises, sprains, fractures, &c.; and its ob 
ject is to provide a compound suitable for all 
emergencies to which liniment is adapted, 
and particularly for the treatment of live 
stock. 
To this end my invention consists in a 
medical compound which is composed of the 
following ingredients: tincture of aconite, 
(radix,) two ounces; tincture of belladonna, 
two ounces; tincture of opium, two ounces; 
chloroform, two ounces; spirits of camphor, 
one ounce; spirits of turpentine, one ounce; 
oil of Sassafras, two ounces-making in all 
twelve ounces of liniment. A statement of 
O 
25 
the various uses to which it is applicable and 
directions for its application would accom 
pany it in whatever form of bottles it may be 
sold. I will, however, state that this liniment 
is for external application, and should never 
be used internally. It may be applied full 
strength upon ringbone, splint, SWellings, or 35 
old wounds; but for fresh wounds-such as 
cuts, bruises, or chafed places-and particu 
larly when applied on a cloth or bandage, it 
should be diluted with five times its volume 
of water. Shake it before using. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I believe to be new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is the following: 
A medical compound consisting of the fol 
lowing ingredients: tincture of aconite, tinct 
ure of belladonna, tincture of opium, chlo 
roform, spirits of camphor, spirits of turpen 
tine, and oil of Sassafras, combined in sub 
stantially the proportions described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
4C 
45 
OLIVER, F, BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
AARON FARRA, 
JESSE WOODRUFF. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415120.txt	(No Model.) 
W. C. McGILL 
CASH INDICATOR AND REGISTER, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 415, 120, 
Patented NOW, 12, 1889. 
  
 
Z 
% 
% 
223 3 SS 
%2. 52 
3 
2S 
s& 
M $4 
s 
s 22 
 
 
(No Model.) 
W. C. MC G.ILL. 
CASH INDICATOR AND REGISTER, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 415,120, 
 
Patented Now, 12, 1889. 
(No Model.) 
No. 415,120, 
W. C. McGILL, 
CASH INDICATOR AND REGISTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 12, 1889. 
SS N S ZZZ 
 
?i 
| 
AZO . 
sssssSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
zzzzzzzzzz! 
S 
N 
 
WITNESSES: 
afzeze 2-9 
sis 
S, SS / 
N, ETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. MCGILL OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
CASH INDICATOR AND REGISTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,120, dated November 12, 1889. 
Application filed August 17, 1889, Serial No. 321,069. (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom it may conce77: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM C. MCGILL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Cash-Registers; and I do declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to make 
and use the Same. 
My invention relates to cash-registers, and 
it refers more particularly to that class of 
machines in which a series of keys or levers 
are pivotally adjusted on a shaft or shafts 
by operating any one of which the drawer is 
unlocked, the plate indicating the previous 
sale is dropped out of sight, and the plate in 
dicating the last sale is placed in sight. In 
machines of this type which are in practical 
use the operating keys or levers are usually 
pivoted on a supporting-shaft, and are each 
arranged to operate one of a series of regis 
tering-wheels which are disconnected from 
each other. 
It is well understood by those skilled in the 
art and by those who use this class of ma 
chines that when it is desired to ascertain the 
amount of the sales that it is necessary to add 
up the amounts indicated on the series of 
registering-wheels. This is very objection 
able, because it necessitates the use of valu 
able time and frequently leads to inaccuracies 
in summing up the amount of the sales. It 
will also be seen that by arranging interme 
diate gearing or tripping devices between 
the key-levers and the indicator-plates the 
action of the machine is not always positive, 
the parts being liable at any time to become 
disconnected or broken, thus putting the ma 
chine temporarily out of use; and, finally, 
the construction of machines of this Chala C 
ter in the manner described, where a series of 
registering-wheels and actuating-pawls are 
required, necessarily produces machines of 
very costly construction. 
To overcome the aforesaid objections and 
to provide a machine which will be positive 
in operation, easy to manipulate, and cheap 
as to cost is the object of my present in Vell 
tion, which consists in the peculiar combina 
tion and novel arrangement of parts, all of 
which will hereinafter be more fully described 
in the annexed specification, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved cash-register. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal 
section taken on the line 22 of Fig. 4, por 
tions being broken away to more clearly illus 
trate the several parts. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse vertical Section taken on the line 33 of 
Fig. 2, looking in the direction indicated by 
the arrow. Fig. 4 is a similar view taken on 
the line 4 4, Fig. 2, looking in the direction 
of the arrow. Fig. 5 is a partial rear view, 
parts being broken a Way to more clearly 
illustrate the interior construction. Fig. 6 is 
a side view of a portion of the machine, 
showing the registering-wheels and their op 
erative connection. Fig. 7 is a vertical detail 
section taken on the line 77, Fig. 6... Fig. 8 
is a detail view hereinafter specifically re 
ferred to. Fig. 9 is a detail view of one of 
the indicator-plates and its tripping-arm; 
Fig. 10, a detail view showing the connection 
of the key with one end of the key-lever, and 
Fig.11 is a detail view of the lower end of one 
of the key-levers. 
To more clearly define my invention, I will 
at first generally outline the construction and 
operation, and then specifically point out the 
arrangement and construction of the several 
parts in detail. 
In the practical construction of my ma 
chine I provide a suitable casing or body 
made of Wood or metal, or a combination of 
wood and metal, said casing being of any suit 
able ornamental shape, preferably as shown 
in drawings, being mounted upon a base por 
tion provided with a cash-drawer of the usual 
construction. 
In the case or body of the machine I jour 
nal two shafts arranged one above the other. 
One (the lower) I will term the cents-shaft, 
while the upper one I will term the dollar 
shaft.' These shafts are sojournaled as to be 
capable of rotating in their bearings, and 
have each loosely journaled thereon a series 
of levers, which I will term the key-levers, 
to each of which is Secured an operating-key, 
which projects to the outside of the casing, 
and which are arranged to indicate the vari 
ous amounts of cents and dollars in a manner 
hereinafter described. The rear ends of the 
7 O 
75 
So 
9o 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
415,120 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
key-levers are extended and provided with 
upwardly-extended portions, which are ar 
ranged, when the keys are depressed, to en 
gage a SWinging plate hung near the upper 
rear part of the machine, which in turn will 
Operate against tripping-arms journaled at 
their lower ends on a longitudinal rod, their 
upper ends engaging a series of indicator 
plates suitably arranged in the indicator 
chamber or extension of the machine. Each 
of said arms is provided with a rearwardly 
extending lip, which, when the said tripping 
arms are thrown forward by the upward 
movement of the key-levers, will project in 
the path of the inner end of said lever when 
said lever is on its downward movement and 
be brought back again to a rearward position, 
bringing by said movement of the tripping 
arm the desired indicator-plate in view. The 
several levers are so adjusted and of such a 
construction that each key-lever will require 
a greater or less throw before it will operate 
the indicator-plates, and it is in this particus 
lar construction that one of the features of 
my invention appears. 
. 
The several key-level's being arranged so 
as to be capable of various degrees of move 
ment, and as they are so secured to their 
shafts as to cause said shafts to rotate, it will 
be seen that the varied movements of said 
levers will cause the shafts to partially rotate 
to various limits. These partial movements 
or rotations of the shafts I utilize to operate 
the registering-wheels, of which there is but 
One to each shaft. These wheels I locate at 
one end of the machine in a supplemental 
compartment, to which access may be readily 
obtained through a hinged door. These disks 
are loosely mounted upon their respective 
shafts, and are rotated thereon by means of 
pawls fixedly secured to the said shafts. 
In my drawings I have shown the cents 
wheel mounted on the lower sliaft and the 
dollar-wheel on the upper shaft. These wheels 
I divide off in a suitable series of numbers in 
a manner presently fully described, each num 
ber registering with a tooth on said wheels. 
It will thus be seen that if, for instance, the 
key-lever which has the least movement is 
depressed the shaft will be rotated to turn its 
registering-wheel to the degree of a single 
tooth, and if the key-lever which has the great 
est throw is depressed the legistering-wheel 
will be rotated to a degree of a predetermined 
number of teeth, and a retaining-pawl engag 
ing the registering-wheel will hold it in its 
turned position, while the shaft and the key 
levers, which are spring-actuated, will return 
to their normal position. 
Suitable connections, hereinafter described, 
between the cents and dollar wheels allow 
the amount of sales of the cents - wheels be 
ing transmitted to the dollar-wheels, so that 
when it is desired to ascertain the amount 
of the sales it will only be necessary to open 
the door of the supplemental compartment 
and note the amount registered on the dollar 
wheel and add the amount registered on the 
cents-wheel, and the sum total Will at Once 
be obtained. Thus by a single shaft and a 
series of key-levers and a single register 
wheel I am enabled to indicate the amount 
of sale, remove the indication of the previous 
sale, register the amount, and also unlock the 
drawer, as the drawer-locking bar is connected 
in such a manner as to be operated by the 
movement of the key-lever, said operations 
being all accomplished by a direct movement 
of the key-lever without intermediate gear 
ing or connections between said levers and 
the indicator devices. 
Having thus generally outlined the con 
struction and operation of my machine, I will 
now specifically point out the construction, 
arrangement, and operation of the same, re 
ferring to the accompanying drawings by let 
ters and numbers, the same lettel's and num 
bers in the varius figures of the drawings in 
dicating like parts. 
In the drawings, A indicates the casing or 
body portion, which is mounted upon a drawer 
case B, provided with the usual cash-drawer 
B'. In the forward part of the case I journal 
two longitudinal shafts C D, arranged one 
above the other, as most clearly shown in 
Figs. 3 and 4 of the drawings. Upon the 
lower or cents shaft C is secured a series of 
levers E, preferably by forming the same with 
hubs c, having a circular aperture fitting 
loosely on the shaft C. Projecting forwardly 
from each end of said shaft is an arm c' c', 
said arms being connected by a longitudinal 
arm c, the upper face of which forms a bear 
ing for extensions e Of the levers, which rest 
on said arm c, as shown, said extensions e 
having each a hinged connection e' at their 
outer ends with the operating-keys F, which 
project upward to the outside of the case, 
said keys being provided with suitable hori 
Zontally and forwardly disposed finger-tabs 
f, as shown. 
By providing each of the shafts with the 
forward bail-like projections c' c' c it will 
be seen that if any one of the keys F is de 
pressed its corresponding lever will depress 
the bar c, and with it partially revolve the 
shaft without disturbing any of the other key 
levers, said shafts turning loosely in the hubs 
C of the same. 
In the arrangement of the key-levers I pro 
vide for each shaft nine levers, which repre 
sent amounts on the cents-shaft, ranging from 
five cents to forty-five cents, and on the dol 
lar-shaft ranging from one-half dollar to four 
and one-half dollars, and for convenience and 
compactness I ai'range the alternate keys F. 
to project slightly forward of the other keys, 
as shown in Figs. I and 2. The rear ends of 
the key-levels E form long arms e, the rear 
ends of which are turned upward, as at F. 
?t will be observed by reference to Fig. 5 of 
the drawings that the extensions F vary in 
their lengths, (the five-cent lever having the 
shortest and the forty-five cent having the 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
ITO 
| 15 
2 O 
I 25 
415,120 
3 
longest extension,) said lengths being gov 
erned by the arrangement of the teeth on the 
registering-wheels-i. e., that the difference 
between the five-cent lever and the ter-cent 
lever is of a degree equal to the space of one 
tooth on the registering-wheel, the purport of 
said variations of the levers. E' being pres 
ently described. 
As the construction and operation of the 
levers on the dollar-shaft is precisely similar 
to those on the cents-shaft, a general refer 
ence thereto herein is only deemed necessary. 
Pivotally supported at its upper rear end 
in the upper rear portion of the case A is a 
gravity-plate G, which normally drops to a 
position shown in full lines, Figs. 3 and 4 of 
the drawings, being held in such position by 
a stop-ping, said plate G extending entirely 
across the interior of the machine, as shown. 
Arranged forward of the plate G, which I will 
term the tripping-plate, and just below the 
lower end thereof, is a longitudinal rod H, on 
which is mounted a series of arms I, which I 
Will term the tripping-arms, one of said 
arms being arranged for and in alignment 
with each of the key-levers. The construc 
tion of Said arms I is most clearly shown in 
Fig. 9 of the drawings, in which it will be 
seen that the upper end of the arm is slotted, 
as at , and engages a cross-pini, held in the 
lower end of the forked arms of an indicator 
plate K. The indicator-plates K, one of which 
is provided for each key-lever, consist each 
of a narrow plate provided with downwardly 
extending ears k, which are pivoted on a lon 
gitudinal rod L, arranged at the base and 
front edge of the indiator-chamber M, which 
is preferably divided into two sections m, n', 
representing the cents and dollar sections, re 
spectively. The front ends of the plates K 
are each provided with forked extensions l', 
projecting forwardly and downwardly, as 
shown, and which engage the upper ends of 
the tripping-arms I, as before described. 
On the upper end of the extensions F of 
the levers E, I form spring-catches F, which 
consist of spring-plates secured at one end to 
the rear upper edge of said extensions, their 
for Ward ends extending over the said front 
edge of said extensions, as most clearly shown 
in Fig. 11 of the drawings. 
N denotes leaf-springs, which are secured 
at One end to the casing, while the opposite 
end is secured to the arm c', said springs 
tending to bring the levers and shaft to their 
normal position. 
In operation it will be seen that if a sale is 
made, say, for forty-five cents, and the pre 
vious sale having been five cents, which would 
still appear on the indicator-plate last ele 
vated, the operator by pressing on the five 
cent key F will force it down to its limit, 
which is indicated by the extension F of the 
lever, raising the gravity-plate G to its full 
extent, as shown in dotted lines, Figs. 3 and 
4, (which in its outward movement will en 
gage the arm I, which was pulled back at the 
movement for the preceding sale, and which, 
as stated, was the five-cent sale) and force 
said arm outward and cause it to pull the in 
dicator-plate 5 down in horizontal position. 
It will be observed that the arrangement of 
the rear ends of the key-levers is such that 
the spring-catches F will on the upward 
movement of the lever strike against the 
rounded edge in of a rearwardly-projecting 
lip h of the arm I, and, owing to its elasticity, 
will pass by said lip h. The construction of 
Said catch, however, is such that as the lever 
descends the catch will engage the lip h and 
pull the aligning-arm I backward, as shown, 
before it will pass said lip, and by moving 
said arm backward it (the arm) will pull the 
desired indicator-plate (forty-five cent) to an 
upright position and in view. 
The drawer-lock consists of a vertical bar 
O, guided in bails O O, arranged at any coln 
venient point on the inner side of the back 
of the machine, the lower end O' of which 
engages the bevel-notch b of the drawer, while 
the upper end projects upward above and to 
the rear of the plate G, and has its upper end 
extended horizontally forward over said plate, 
as at O', and is supported on a vertical pro 
jection g, formed on the upper face of said 
plate G, as shown. It will thus be seen that 
as the plate G is raised by any of the key-le 
vers the projection g will raise the bar O and 
release the drawer, and when said plate is 
dropped the bar will drop back by gravity in 
position to be engaged by the beveled end of 
the drawer when it is pushed in closed posi 
tion, and, rising over said edge, will again 
drop and lock it in place. 
From the foregoing the operation of the in 
dicating portion of my invention will be 
clearly understood. As before stated, the 
movement of each key-lever is of a varied 
degree, and such movement is transmitted to 
the shafts, which movements operate the reg 
ister-wheels. 
By reference to Figs. 6 and 7 the construc 
tion of my registering devices will readily 
In said figures, P indicates the 
appear. 
cents register-wheel, which is loosely mounted 
upon the shaft, C, and which is provided 
with fifty teeth, said teeth being divided 
in five series of ten teeth each, nine teeth 
of each series being numbered 5 to 45 in 
rotation, while the tenth or dividing tooth 
of each series is indicated by a projecting 
finger or pawl Q, secured to the face of the 
wheel, and which project beyond the periph 
ery thereof, as shown. It will be understood 
that the relative arrangement of the teeth in 
relation to the movement of the shaft is such 
that a movement of the five-cent ever will 
tend to cause the shaft and its operating 
pawl R to move the wheel P to the extent of 
one tooth, and a movement of the forty-five 
cent lever causes the Wheel to be moved to 
the distance of nine teeth. It Will thus be 
seen that the farthest movement of rotation 
of the shaft is nine-fiftieths of a complete ro 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
So 
95 
IOO 
ITO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
4 
415,120 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
tation, thereby affording by a simple move 
ment of the keys on the shaft a practical 
manner of transmitting the amount of the 
sale to the registering-wheel. 
While I deem it most practical to divide 
the wheel P into five sections, so as to admit 
of approximately one-fifth revolution of the 
shaft C, it is manifest that the said wheel 
might be divided into a greater or less num 
ber of series and the shaft turned to a 
greater or less degree, if desired, without 
departing from the broad ideas of my inven 
tion. 
The operating-pawl R, before referred to, 
consists of a lateral arm fixedly secured to 
the shaft C, provided with a spring pawl or 
finger r, which projects over and engages the 
teeth of the wheel P. In operation, when 
the shaft is rotated, the pawl will move the 
wheel P to the desired degree, and when the 
shaft turns back to its normal position the 
arm R also turns back the pawl r, slipping 
over the teeth on its return movement. 
S denotes a spring-pawl, which, while per 
mitting the wheel P to pass by it in its for 
ward direction, holds it from reverse move 
lment. 
T indicates a pointer or indicator-hand se 
cured upon the outer end of the shaft C, and 
which normally indicates the cents amount 
of sales on the said registering-wheel P. 
From the foregoing the operation of the 
manner of registering the various amounts 
from five to forty-five cents will readily ap 
pear. 
U denotes a registering-wheel mounted on 
the upper or dollar shaft D, which is also 
provided with fifty teeth, each one of which 
indicates fifty cents, said wheel being grad 
lated in half-dollars from one-half to twenty 
five dollars. This wheel is loosely journaled 
on the upper shaft, is operated by a pawl V, 
secured to said shaft, and has an indicator 
hand Y over its face secured to the shaft, is 
engaged by a retaining Spring-pawl W, and 
is operated in a manner precisely similar to 
the wheel P, its shaft being connected with 
the dollar and half-dollar key-levers, as shown. 
The wheel U is also arranged to take up the 
amounts registered on the cents-wheel when 
ever said amount reaches fifty cents on each 
fifth revolution of the wheel P. This is ac 
complished in the following manner: Sup 
posing the last amount registered on the 
cents-wheel had moved said wheel so the in 
dicator-hand registered forty-five cents, this 
would bring one of the series of projecting 
pawls Q in position against the lower end of 
a lifting-bar X, (shown in detail in Fig. S.) 
held to slide in boxes a ac, secured to the side 
1 of the frame A. This bar has pivoted at 
its upper end a gravity-pawl 2, which engages 
the teeth of the wheel U, as clearly shown in 
the drawings. 
By following the relation of the several 
parts, as described, it will be seen that should 
the next sale be five cents the wheel P will 
be rotated forward the extent of one tooth, 
and during said movement the projecting 
pawl Q would engage and lift the bar X, 
causing its pawl 2 to move the wheel U one 
tooth, thus taking the amount (fifty cents) 
registered by the wheel P and transferring it 
to the wheel U, this operation being repeated 
at each time the indicator-hand T points to 
the tenth tooth. On the Wheel P. 
It will be understood that the relation of 
the sliding bar and the projecting pawl is 
such that said pawl will pass and release the 
bar X at the moment it has raised it enough 
to move the Wheel U One tooth. 
When it is desired to register and indicate 
a combination sale-i.e., when a sale is made 
which is of an almount not specifically indi 
cated on the keyssuch as, for instance, one 
dollar and sixty cents-the operator first 
with one hand pushes down the ten-cent key 
and holds same down, while with the other 
hand he pushes down the one-and-one-half 
dollar key. The movement of the cents-key 
throws down the standing indicator-plate, 
said movements of the two keys registering 
the amounts, as before described. As the 
operator releases the keys they in their down 
Ward movement will bring the ten-cent and 
one and one-half dollar plates to view, thus 
indicating the amount of the sale. It will 
also be understood that, if desired, multiple 
gears may be employed to be operated by the 
wheel U, so the amounts may be registered 
into hundreds or thousands of dollars; or, if 
desired, the cents-wheel may be divided into 
series ranging from one cent to ten cents, and 
the dollar-wheels divided into dimes to rep 
resent amounts from ten cents to five dollars. 
Z indicates the hinged door, which is pro 
vided with a suitable lock. 
My improved register may also be provided 
with a gong of any approved construction, 
which can be operated by the movement of 
the drawer or otherwise. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the drawings, the advantages 
of my improvement will readily appear. 
My cash-register can be constructed at a 
cost of at least one-half the cost of other ma 
chines of this character. Its operation is 
positive, while the manner of operating it 
Will be understood at a glance. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1. The combination, with a series of levers 
pivotally supported within the casing, con 
nected at one end with a series of operating 
keys and provided with rearwardly-extend 
ing angular arms, of a series of indicator 
plates pivoted in the upper part of the cas 
ing, a series of tripping-arms journaled in 
the case and connected with the indicato'- 
plates, and a Swinging tripping-plate arranged 
adjacent to said arms, said levers adapted to 
engage Said tripping-plate on its upper move 
ment, whereby said plate will engage the 
7 O 
75 
So 
95 
OO 
1 I5 
I 25 
E. 
415,120 
5 
tripping-arms and throw the indicator-plates 
clown, said levers engaging Said arms on their 
downward movement and throwing the de 
sired indicator-plate in view, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination, with the shaft, C, the le 
vers E, secured thereon, as shown, and the keys 
F, secured to said levers, said levers having 
upturned inner ends of differential heights 
and provided with spring-catches F at their 
ends, of the tripping-plate G, Supported as 
shown, the pivotal tripping-arms I, the indi 
cator-plates connected to said arms, a regis 
tering-wheel loosely mounted on the shaft C, 
a pawl R, fixedly secured to the shaft and en 
gaging the wheel P, and means for bringing 
the shaft and keys to their normal position 
after they are operated, all arranged substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination, with the shaft C, 
mounted as shown, and the key-levers loosely 
secured thereon, said levers adapted for move 
ments of varied degrees, whereby the shaft 
is capable of partial rotation, of the register 
ing-wheel P., loosely mounted on said shaft, 
said wheel provided with a number of teeth 
arranged in series, a pawl fixedly secured to 
said shaft, engaging said teeth, and adapted 
to move said wheel in a continuous revolu 
tion about said shaft by the partial rotations 
of said shaft, and means for bringing the 
shaft and the pawl back to their normal posi 
tions, substantially as shown and described. 
4. The combination, with a series of key-le 
vers pivotally supported in the casing, a se 
ries of indicator-plates pivoted in said casing, 
and intermediate tripping-arms pivoted in the 
casing, of the tripping-plate G, provided with 
a vertical projection g, and the drawer-lock 
ing vertical bal' O, engaging said projection 
g', said plate adapted to be lifted by the up 
Ward movement of the key-levers and engage 
the tripping-arms I, whereby the indicator 
plates are thrown down and the locking-bar 
O lifted from engagement with the drawer, 
substantially as shown and described. 
5. The combination, with the shafts C D, 
journaled in the casing, a series of key-levers 
loosely secured upon each shaft, having move 
ments of varied degrees, whereby said shafts 
are adapted for partial rotations of various 
degrees, of the register-wheels P U, loosely 
mounted on the lower and upper shafts, re 
spectively, the shaft C, provided with a se 
ries of radially-projecting pawls Q, pawls FR 
V, fixedly secured to said shafts CD and en 
gaging the wheels P and U, respectively, and 
adapted to rotate said wheels about said shafts 
by the partial movements thereof, an inter 
mediate lifting-pawl X, engaging the wheel 
U, adapted to be engaged by the pawls Q and 
raised to turn the wheel U one tooth, and 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
6. A cash-register 
means for bringing said shafts back to their 
normal position after each partial movement, 
substantially as shown and described. 
sists of two shafts 
journaled in the casing, a sefies of key-levers 
loosely secured thereon, having inner up 
tured ends of differential lengths, a series of 
indicator-plates each independently pivoted 
on a single cross-rod, a series of tripping-arms 
journaled independently on a single cross-rod, 
engaging the indicator-plates at their upper 
ends, their lower ends provided with in Ward 
ly-extending lips projecting in the path of the 
movement of the rear ends of the key-lever's On 
their downward movement, a Swinging trip 
ping-plate extended to the rear of the entire 
length of the tripping-arms, said plate adapted 
to engage said arms and throw same outward 
to drop the indicator-plates when engaged by 
the upward movement of the key-levers, regis 
ter wheels PU, loosely mounted on said shafts, 
pawls fixedly secured to said shafts and en 
gaging said wheels, and an intermediate pawl 
adapted to engage the register-wheels and 
transmit at predetermined intervals the 
amounts from the wheel P to wheel U, and 
means for holding said wheels in adjusted 
positions, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
7. The shaft C, the bail-like projection c' 
c' c, secured thereto, and the key-levers E, 
loosely secured on said shafts, said levers 
each consisting of a long arm e', having all 
upwardly-projecting arm F', an extension e, 
resting on the bar c of the bail-like projec 
tion c'c' c, and a key F, hinged at its lower end 
to said extension e, in combination with the 
indicator devices consisting of the tripping 
plate G, tripping-arms I, and the pivoted in 
dicator-plates KIX, all arranged substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
S. The combination, with an operating-shaft 
journaled in the casing, a longitudinal rod 
disposed parallel to said shaft and connected 
thereto, and a series of key-levers loosely joll 
naled on said shaft and having bearings On 
said parallel rod, said levers adapted when 
depressed to move the said rod and thereby 
revolve the shaft, of a registering - Wheel 
loosely mounted on said shaft, a pawl fixedly 
secured to the shaft, engaging said wheel to 
operate it by the movements of the shaft, and 
means for holding the said wheel in adjusted 
positions, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAMI C. MCGILI. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. E. WOODs, 
GEO. F. SCHAYER. 
7 o 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
I O5 
ITO 
IIS 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415220.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 415,220, 
E. RIED. 
FAG STAFF H0D0ER. 
Patented Nov. 19, 1889. 
 
 
%? 
-??????????? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNST RIED, OF MUNICH, BAVARIA, GERMANY. 
FLAG-STAFF HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,220, dated November 19, 1889. 
Application filed July 15, 1889, Serial No. 317,547, (No model.) 
the arms d'. These arms have hook-shaped 25 
ends, so that the flag-staff A may be secured 
within the forks by strings i, slipped over the 
hooks. To the fork c there is hinged a leaf 
e, and to the fork d there is hinged a U 
shaped plate f. 
3O 
In use the holder is set to the required 
length and the leaf e is secured by hood g to 
the wall, while the plate f is caused to engage 
the window-sill. 
What I claim is- 
The combination of a pair of adjustable 
plates with clamping-bolts engaging the 
plates, a pair of forks secured to the plates 
for supporting a flag-staff, and with a pair of 
fastening-leaves for securing the plates to a 4o 
wall, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
ERNST RED. 
35 
ALLCICKRATHIEU, 
BETZ, 
claim. 
5 lowing is a specification. 
To all tehon it nually concern: 
Be it known that I, ERNSTRIED, of Munich, 
Bavaria, Germany, have invented an Im 
proved Flag-Staff Holder, of which the fol 
This invention relates to an adjustable flag 
staff holder that may be secured to windows 
Without injuring them. 
It consists in the various features of in 
Io provement, more fully pointed out in the 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
vertical longitudinal section of my improved 
flag-staff holder. Fig. II is an end view, and 
The letters (t ) represent two superposed 
plates slotted lengthwise and clamped to 
'gether by bolts h, and winged nuts h. The 
bolts pass through the slots, and by loosening 
2O the Winged nuts the plates a b may be drawn 
apart to any desired extent. To one end of 
plate at there is connected a fork c, having 
the arms c'. To the opposite end of plate b 
there is connected a similar fork ?l, having 
I 5 Fig. III a top view, thereof. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415320.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 415,320, 
J. F. BOWER 
BANJ 0. 
Patented Nov. 19, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
Yaaaaa S. S 
 
 SS 
7 
 
Cavalazzesses: 
3% -6-2s. 
P 
t 
 
- Za 2 ceza (a 7. 
767-zzower 
- 
- 2-4.ly. &aliszt-4 
2 er 27(12e Zrreys 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. BOWER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
BANJ O. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,320, dated November 19, 1889. 
Application filed January 30, 1888, Renewed October 7, 1889, Serial No, 826,171 (No model.) 
- 
To all whon, it may concern 
Be it known that I, JoHN F. Bo WER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Banjos, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of the present invention, which 
relates to certain new features of construction 
and the employment of certain devices, will 
be apparent from the following description. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, and in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure 1 is a top or plan view of a banjo con 
taining my improvements. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal central section of the same. Fig. 3 is 
a view of the straining-rim and sounding 
board detached and looked at from beneath. 
Fig. 4 is a partial section similar to Fig. 2, 
but upon a somewhat larger scale. 
In said drawings, A represents the usual 
wooden neck or handle of the banjo. 
B is the shell, secured to the neck by the 
screws b, setting through from the inside into 
the neck A. I prefer to make this shell en 
tirely of sheet metal, as shown in the draw 
ings, strengthened, preferably, by a wire 
folded into it. A top portion or plate C, which 
may preferably be made continuous with the 
shell B, and which is level with the upper 
Surface of the neck, extends inward from the 
upper edge of the shell B for a short distance 
all around the banjo, serving to strengthen 
and stiffen the rim against collapse at all 
sides, and also to conceal the edge of the 
tympan from view. This top plate at that 
part of the shell adjacent to the neck is ex 
tended farther in to extend the finger-board 
and thus afford facility for stopping the 
strings to produce higher notes than can be 
done upon the neck itself, increasing the 
range of the instrument down nearly or quite 
to the center of the tympan or parchment 
head. I have lettered this extension of the 
top plate C. At that portion of the top plate 
where the arm of the player rests, and which 
is marked C, is an inward extension of the 
plate to better accommodate the resting of 
the arm. The cut-away portion permits the 
vibrations of the tympan to freely reach the 
air. By this device of the top plate not only 
is the rim strengthened, but the range of the 
instrument is increased and the dampening 
effect of the contact of the player's arm with 
the tympan effectually prevented. 
The parchment head or tympan is repre 
sented at D, and is strained over a flaring 
rim E, having a curved edge e. The sound 
ing-board F extends from the bottom of this 
rim E and fills the entire space beneath it, 
being perforated by one or more sound-holes 
f. This sounding-board has the double func 
tion of increasing the Sound and strengthen 
ing the straining-rim E. To give additional 
strength to the rim E, I apply a circular bar 
Gall around its edge beneath, which affords 
a bearing-place for the tightening-screws, to 
be now mentioned. These tightening-screws, 
which I letter as H, are tapped through a sec 
ond lower ring G', of the same size as the ring 
G. The parchment, being drawn over the 
rim E, is brought down to the ring G' and se 
cured beneath it by folding around a wire 9, 
as indicated more clearly in Fig. 4. The 
tympan or parchment head is tightened or 
relaxed by manipulating these screws II, a 
number of which are placed at regular in 
tervals around the ring. The tympan, With 
its straining and supporting contrivances, is 
placed within the shell with its upper surface 
a little below the top plate C, so that the 
bridge IX may rest upon the parchment; but 
the tympan nowhere comes in contact with 
the rim or shell proper of the banjo, whereby 
the sound and quality of the tone is very 
greatly improved. In order to support the 
tympan at the proper position, I provide legs 
g', which sit down upon brackets g, fastened 
by screwsg or any convenientlocking device. 
The tympan and its sounding-board, it will 
thus be seen, may be readily removed from the 
banjo without unstraining the tympan, which 
is a great convenience for giving better ac 
cess to alter the tension of the head, and also 
permitting the parchment and its Sounding 
board to be removed and placed in a separate 
small case for protection from the Weather in 
carrying the instrument around. 
In order to remove the strain of the strings 
J from the shell B, I provide the tail-piece L 
with a support from the neck A of the banjo 
by means of the rod M, which at the rear is 
bent up and connected to said tail-piece L. 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
415,320 
The strain of the strings, it will be seen, is 
thus expended entirely upon the neck A and 
rod M, excepting only the downward pressure 
of the bridge upon the tympan. To avoid 
interfering with the removal of the tympan 
and Sounding-board, I have the rod M cross 
the shell B below its lower rim. 
The removal of all the strain by the above 
Construction from the shell or Outer rim of 
the banjo-head enables me to make it, if de 
sired, of sheet metal in many pieces, with or 
naments or embossings, without danger of 
its being too Weak, or, if preferred, to make 
it partly of Wood ornamented by inlaying or 
marquetry, as there is no danger of its being 
distorted or injured by the usual strain put 
upon this part. 
The tail-piece L has its front end turned 
up, as at in, to form a flange perforated to 
receive the strings. By this means the strings 
may be brought close down, and the strain 
upon them will be directly from the knot 
without their being bent over an edge or cor 
ner, as is usual in ordinary tail-pieces. This 
device saves much breaking of the strings. 
IO 
15 
25 
I claim 
1. In a banjo, the combination of a parch 
ment-supporting rim over which the parch 
ment is strained, and a separate straining 
rim to which the edges of the parchment are 
attached, and provision, as screws, for stretch 
ing the parchment by separating one ring 
from the other, substantially as specified. 
2. In a banjo, the top plate extending 
around the shell and projecting inwardly to 
strengthen the shell and also to cover any 
Space that may exist between the shell and 
the parchment-supporting ring, in combina 
tion with said shell and said parchment-sup 
3. The combination, in a banjo, of the ex 
40 porting ring, substantially as specified. 
35 
45 
55 
terior shell proper, and an interior frame 
over which the parchment is strained, and a 
sounding-board connected to said frame and 
located immediately beneath the parchment, 
Substantially as specified. 
4. The combination of the handle or neck, 
the shell, the tail-piece, and a brace or rod 
extending from the neck to the tail-piece en 
tirely beneath the shell, substantially as 
specified. 
5. The combination, with the shell, of a top 
plate extending around the shell and having 
an arm-rest extension to guard the player's 
arm from contact with the parchment, sub 
stantially as specified. 
6. The combination, with the shell, of a top 
plate extending around the shell and having 
an extension in Ward below the strings to plO- 
long the finger-board, substantially as speci 
fied. 
7. The combination, with the shell, of a top 
plate extending around the shell and having 
an extension inward below the strings to pro 
long the finger-board and an arm-rest exten 
Sion to guard the player's arm from contact 
with the parchment, substantially as specified. 
8. The improved tail-piece for banjos, fast 
ened to the bent rod or brace extending back. 
from the neck, whereby the strings are 
brought down close to the head, substantially 
as specified. 
9. In a banjo, the parchment-supporting 
ring or frame consisting of a base-plate, as 
F, and a band or rim extended upward from 
its outer edge, whereby a strong light struct 
ure is attained, substantially as specified. 
JNO. F. BOWER. 
7 O 
75 
Witnesses: 
H. M. MUNDAY, 
EDW. S. EVARTS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415420.txt	(No Model.) 
F. E. PAR SONS & F. F. PRICKETT. 
FENCE, 
No. 415,420, 
Patented Nov. 19, 1889, 
 
 
 
S. xe 
S. 
AT 
ZWVAWZOS 
627 ZZZZZ22rozy, 
or/zwass A's 
  
 
6/442 W. 
W-f 
/ 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANKLIN E. PARSONS AND FERNANDO F. PRICKETT, OF RIVESV III.E, 
WEST WIRGINIA. 
FENCE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,420, dated November 19, 1889. 
Application filed June 24, 1889, Serial No. 315,369, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all uphon it may conce77. 
Be it known that we, FRANKLINE. PARSONS 
and FERNANDO F. PRICKETT, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Rivesville, in the 
county of Marion and State of West Virginia, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Fences; and we do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
fences; and it consists in the peculiar con 
struction and combination of devices, that will 
be more fully set forth hereinafter, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a fence embodying our 
improvements. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of a 
portion of the same. Fig. 3 is a transverse 
Sectional view of the same, taken on the line 
acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a perspective view of 
the Wire loop to secure the crossed stakes and 
rider-rails together. Fig. 5 is a similar view 
of the Wire loop to connect the crossed stakes 
together. Fig. 6 is a similar view of the loop 
to secure the crossed stakes to the anchor 
stakes. 
In the construction of our improved fence 
We employ the pairs of crossed stakes A, the 
lever-stakes B, the rails C, and the rider-rails 
D. The pairs of crossed stakes A are all in 
clined in the same direction, as shown, and 
above the crotches thereof are placed the ends 
of the rider-rails D, the latter being over 
lapped. Wires E are then looped around the 
pairs of stakes A and above and below the 
lapped ends of the rider-stakes, the ends of 
the said looped wires being twisted together, 
SO as to secure them. Between each of said 
Wire loops E and the upper ends of each pair 
of Stakes A is inserted the upper end of a le 
ver-stake B. These lever-stakes are arranged 
in vertical planes in line with the rails, and 
are also inclined in opposite directions from 
the crossed stakes A. On forcing the outer 
ends of the lever-stakes down to the ground 
the loops E are tightened, so as to draw the 
Stakes and rider-rails more tightly together, 
as will be understood. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
The pairs of stakes A and lever-stakes 13 
are arranged at such angles with relation to 
each other that they form perfect tripods, and 
thus serve to secure and brace the fence so 
strongly that it is not liable to be overturned 
by the wind. The crossed stakes brace the 
fence against lateral movement in either di 
rection, and owing to the fact that the crossed 
stakes and lever-stakes are inclined in Oppo 
site directions the same serve to effectually 
brace the fence against longitudinal move 
ment. The lower ends of the stakes Arest on 
blocks of stone F to prevent them from de 
caying, and thereby enhance the durability of 
Anchor-stakes G are driven into 
the fence. 
the ground beyond the outer sides of the said 
stone blocks, and the upper ends of the anch 
or-stakes are secured to the lower ends of the 
crossed stakes by means of Wire loops H. The 
lower ends of the lever-stakes also rest upon 
blocks of stone I to preserve them from de 
cay, and at the outer sides of the said blocks 
are anchor-stakes K, which are driven into the 
ground. The rails Care arranged on one side 
of the lever-stakes B and have their ends 
lapped over each other at points in line with 
said lever-stakes, as shown, the uppermost of 
the said rails C being directly under and in coll 
tact with the crotches of the crossed stakes A. 
Wires L are doubled and have loops a formed 
in them, which pass around the stakes A, the 
intermediate portions of the said wires Serv 
ing to connect the pairs of crossed stakes and 
to pass under the uppermost rails C and lash 
them securely in the crotches of the Said 
crossed stakes. The ends of the Wires L are 
twisted together. Through the lever-stakes 
B are made openings b in line with the spaces 
between each pair of rails C. Wires M have 
one end attached to the anchor-stakes Kare 
then passed through the lowermost openings 
b around the lowermost pairs of rails C, then 
through the next adjacent openings b, then 
partly around the lever-stakes, and then 
around the next pair of rails C, the said wires 
being thus doubled between each pair of rails 
and serving to bind the same very securely to 
the lever-stakes. When all of the rails have 
been thus treated, the upper ends of the Wires 
are passed between the two uppermost rails 
95 
OO 
415,420 
and twisted or coiled around themselves, as 
shown clearly in Figs. 2 and 3. The anchor 
Stakes are set at right angles to their respect 
ive fence-stakes, and, being secured to the 
lower ends thereof in the manner stated, serve 
to effectually prevent the fence-stakes from 
being moved laterally or raised from the 
ground by the wind. 
A fence thus constructed is exceedingly 
simple, is very strong and durable, and is inex 
pensive. We contemplate constructing such 
fences with material that has been used for 
the common worm-fences, as we can employ 
the same very economically. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim 
The fence comprising the crossed stakes A 
and inclined stakes B, forming tripods, said 
stakes B having the, openings b,; the anchor 
stakes K at the lower, ends of the stakes-B, 
O 
2O. 
25 
the rails C, arranged and having their joints 
lapped on the stakes B, the wires M, with their 
lower ends attached to stakes K, then passed 
through the openings b and around and be 
tween the pairs of rails Cin succession, the 
upper ends, of said wires being twisted, the 
rider-rails D, arranged in the crotches of the 
crossed stakes A, the wires E, lashing said 
rider-rails to said crossed stakes, and the wires. 
L, having the loops a, encircling the pairs of 
crossed stakes, said wires passing under the 
uppermost rails C, all arranged substantially 
! as described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two-witnesses. 
FRANKLIN E. PARSONS. 
FERNANDO F. RRICKETT. 
Witnesses: 
ABEL.KUHN, 
E. S. CARPENTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415520.txt	F. LANSBERG, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
STEAM PUMPING ENGINE. 
- 
ZY Z27, Z 
Patented Nov. 19, 1889. 
E.3. 2. 
772, ZZ, 
(O)2 
i 
Pa 
--e. 
into 
727, ZZZ, 
(No Model.) 
No. 415,520, 
 
 
 
 
32 
 
 
 
 
a? 
1zzese, 
(%z'e 726% 
8.0%.74% 
N. peers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington. B. C. 
zvezzor, 
Z2-azz/6 Zazas 42% 
a2 4.4% 
(No Model.) 
No. 415,520, 
Zzza, ZP, 
F, LANSBERG, 
STEAM PUMPING ENGINE. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 19, 1889. 
727 W. 
al 
 
4Zaeszf 
(%2-22s Z26%, 
Z22-azzzzzza 
Z7%zz Zezas 62% 
(No Model.) 
F, LANSBERG, 
STEAM PUMPING ENGINE 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 415,520, 
Patented Nov. 19, 1889. 
2 24 
Z77, WZZ 
Z72, ZA, 
Y 
 
| 
  
 
, An 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4laeszf 
4&% 727% 
 
 
 
- 47%22%222-as 66-2 
- 1724a (2/26 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK LANSBERG, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO THE LANSBERG 
BRAKE COMPANY, OF EAST ST. LOUIS, ILLINOIS. 
STEAM PUMPING - ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,520, dated November 19, 1889. 
Application filed April 29, 1889, Serial No, 308,938, (No model.) 
55 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK LANSBERG, of 
the city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Steam Pumping-Engines, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, and in which 
Figure I is a front elevation, part in sec 
tion, of my improved engine, shown in con 
nection with a pump. Fig. II is a detail ver 
tical section taken on line IIII, Fig. I. 
Fig. 
III is a transverse section taken on line III 
III, Fig. I. Fig. IV is a side elevation, part 
in section. Fig. V is part in end view and 
part in section taken on line V V, Fig. IV. 
Fig. VI is a transverse section, taken on line 
WI, WI, Fig. IV. Fig, VII is a perspective 
view of the rock-shaft and tappet for operat 
ing the valve admitting steam to the chest. 
Fig. VIII is a longitudinal section taken on 
line VIII VIII, Fig. IV. Fig. IX is an en 
larged detail section taken on line IX IX, 
Fig. X, and showing the cylinder of the valve 
for admitting stealm into the chest. 
Figs. X 
and XI are sections taken on line XXI, Fig. 
IX, showing the valve in different positions. 
Fig. XII is a perspective view of the stem of 
the valve for admitting steam into the chest, 
and Fig. XIII is a perspective view of the 
valve. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in steam pumping-engines, intended 
more particularly for use in compressing air 
for use in air-brakes for railway-cars, but 
which may be used for other purposes; and 
my invention consists in features of novelty 
hereinafter fully described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents the 
steam-cylinder, and 2 its piston, connected by 
means of a rod 3 to a pistOn 4, located in the 
air-cylinder 5. 
6 represents the chest of the steam-cylin 
der, and 7 the steam-Supply pipe. 
88 represent the ports forming communi 
cation between the chest 6 and the respective 
ends of the cylinder 1, and 9 represents the 
exhaust-port, 
10 represents the valve of the steam-chest, 
It is secured to the stem 11 of pistons 12 and 
13, located, respectively, in the ends 14 and 15 
of the chest. The diameter of the piston 12 
is considerably in excess of that of the pis 
ton 13. 
16 represents an auxiliary cylinder located 
at one end of the cylinder 1. 
17 represents a housing, through which a 
shaft 18 passes, and in which is located on 
the shaft a crank or arm. 19, (see Figs. VII 
and VIII.) to which is connected one end of 
On the shaft 18 is a tappet-arm 21, 
a rod 20. 
fitting in a recess 22, made in the end of the 
cylinder 1, and which may protrude into the 
cylinder, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 
VIII. 
In the cylinder 16 there is located an aux 
iliary valve 23. This valve is secured to a 
stem 24, extending into the head of the cylin 
der, and to which is secured a tappet-arm 25, 
fitting in a recess 26 in this head of the cyl 
inder 1, and which may protrude into the cyl 
inder. The stem 24 is secured to the valve 
23 by having an enlargement 27 fitting in a 
groove 28 of the valve, as shown in Figs. XII 
and XIII. The stem has a non-circular por 
tion 29 to receive the tappet-arm 25. It will 
thus be seen that when the tappet is moved 
the stem 24, with its valve 23, will be turned. 
To this valve 23 is connected one end of the 
rod 20, as shown in Fig. VIII, the valve, as 
shown in Fig. XIII, being provided with a 
recess 30 in its periphery to receive the head 
of the rod, and being perforated at 31 to re 
ceive a pin that passes through the rod. 
The pin is shown at 32, Fig. VIII. It is also 
shown in section in Figs. X and XI. 
The valve 23 controls a port 33, which forms. 
a communication between the cylinder 16 and 
the chamber 15 of the steam-chest. 
The operation is this: When the piston 2 is 
moving in the direction indicated by the ar 
row in Fig. VIII, the port 33 is closed by the 
valve 23. As the piston reaches the limit of 
this movement it strikes the tappet 25, and, 
rotating the shaft 24, operates the valve 23 
and opens the port 33. This admits steam (I 
should have stated that the cylinder 16 is al 
Way's in communication with the central part 
of the steam-chest 6 through means of a port 
34, so that it is always kept charged with live 
O 
25. 
35 
45 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
... 
 
2 
415,520 
steam) into the chamber 15 and moves the pis- may be so 
tons 12 and 13, together with the valve 10, from 
the position shown in Fig. VIII, and in doing 
so closes the port 8 of the cylinder 1 and opens 
5 the port S. This causes the piston 2 to move 
in the other direction. When the tappet-arm 
25 was moved to turn the pin 24 and the valve 
23, the tappet-arm 21 was moved through 
means of the connecting-rod 20 from the po 
Io sition shown in full lines, Fig. VIII, to the po 
sition shown in dotted lines, or moved to throw 
its free end into the cylinder. When the pis 
ton about reaches the limit of its throw in the 
direction it is now moving, it strikes the tap 
I5 pet-arm 21, and, through means of the con 
necting-rod 20, operates the valve 23 and 
moves the tappet-arm 25 into the cylinder 1 
again, and as it does so closes the port 33. The 
valve 10 will now be moved in the other di 
2O rection from that last stated by the area or di 
a meter of the piston 12 being in excess of that 
of the piston 13, and as it does so the port 8 
will be closed and the port 8 opened, and the 
piston 2 will then move again in the direction 
35 represents the exhaust-port of the cham 
ber 14, and the chamber 15 is provided with 
a similar port, 
As the piston 4 moves in the direction in 
3o dicated by the arrow in Fig. VIII the air en 
ters the cylinder 5 through a valve 36 and es 
capes through a port 37, (see Fig. I.) provided 
with a valve 38. (See Fig. I.) Beyond the 
valve 38 (see Fig. VIII) is a port 38', commu 
35 nicating with a pipe 39, leading to the re 
ceiver. As the piston moves in the other di 
rection the air enters through a valve 40 and 
escapes through a port 41, having a valve 42 
and communicating with the port 38. By ar 
4o ranging the ports as I have them the valves 
25 indicated by the arrow in Fig. VIII. 
placed that they can be readily 
reached and removed for repairs. 
In this specification I have fully shown and 
described my improved engine in connection 
with a pump, but have not claimed the latter 45 
herein, as the same forms the subject-matter 
of my application, Serial No. 319,285, filed July 
31, 1889. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the main steam-cyl- 5o 
inder, an auxiliary cylinder, a valve in said 
auxiliary cylinder, a rock-shaft provided with 
a crank-arm, a longitudinally-movable rod 
connecting the arm to the auxiliary valve, and 
tappet-arms secured to said valve and said 55 
shaft, respectively, a steam-chest, and a valve 
located in the chest, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the steam-cylinder 
provided with a chest having a valve, pistons 6o 
secured to the valve and of different areas, an 
auxiliary cylinder communicating with the 
steam-chest and provided with a valve hav 
ing a tappet-arm, and a rock-shaft provided 
with a tappet-arm, substantially as and for 65 
the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination of the steam-cylinder 
having a chest, a valve located in the chest 
and having pistons of different diameters, an 
auxiliary cylinder provided with a valve, a 7o 
tappet-arm secured to the stem of the valve, 
a rock-shaft located at the other end of the 
steam-cylinder, a tappet-arm on the shaft, and 
a rod connecting said shaft with the valve of 
the auxiliary cylinder, substantially as and 75 
for the purpose set forth. 
FRANK TANSBERG. 
In presence of- 
EDW. S. KNIGHT, 
THOMAS KNIGHT. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415620.txt	(No Model.) 
T. A. COLE, 
DREDGING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 45,620, 
Patented Nov. 19, 1889. 
4 A 32 44 
a H.2%22a 
% 
DDDD. 
2 
M 
y 
& 
2 & 
a 
22 
2 
21 
f. DDDDDDD 
2 
 
  
  
 
 
 
Iting 
E i 
 
  
T 
st 
Ell 
- 
928)itv.cscs 
3v.uov to 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 415,620, 
T. Z. COLE. 
DREDGING MACHINE 
- 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Nov. 19, 1889. 
928)it-cases 
72 girl 
3v.uc-vitov 
f& 66 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS Z. COLE, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO JAMES E. CAMPIBELL AND DANIEL McCON VILLE, 
DREDGING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,620, dated November 19, 1889. 
Application filed February l5, 1889, Serial No, 300,069, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it nay concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS Z. COLE, of 
New Orleans, in the parish of Orleans and 
State of Louisiana, have invented certain In 
provements in Dredging-Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to machines having 
chains of excavator-buckets; and it consists 
in a rotary scraper of peculiar construction 
and arrangement acting in connection with 
the buckets to insure the discharge of their 
contents at the proper point and in improved 
means for rotating said scraper at a variable 
Speed, in order that the blades may properly 
traVerse the curved interior surface of the 
moving buckets. 
As the machine may be in all other respects 
of ordinary construction, I have limited the 
drawings to an illustration of the upper end 
of the conveyer-chain, the scraper, and the 
parts immediately connected there with. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a vertical sectional elevation of the parts 
above mentioned, looking against the side of 
the excavator-chain. Fig. 2 is a top plan view 
of the parts shown in the preceding figure, a 
portion of the frame-work being broken away. 
Fig. 3 is a side elevation of the device for in 
parting the variable speed to the scraper. 
Fig. 4 is an edge view of the same. Fig. 5 is 
a face View of a portion of the same on a 
larger scale, partly in section. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
excavator-chain, provided with the excavator 
buckets A", and arranged to travel at its up 
per extremity around the angular supporting 
and driving wheel B, mounted on a horizon 
tal shaft C, as shown, the parts being moved 
in the direction indicated by dotted lines, so 
that the rotated buckets ascending at the top 
of the chain are inverted to discharge their 
Contents as they pass downward around the 
driving-wheels B. Owing to the speed at 
Which the buckets are driven and to the ad 
hesive and tenacious character of the mate 
rial, it frequently happens that they will not 
discharge their entire contents at the re 
quired point without assistance. I therefore 
provide the scraper, consisting of a rotary 
shaft D, mounted in fixed bearings, parallel 
with the chain-driving shaft C, and provided 
with arms d, extending rigidly therefrom and 
Carrying at their outer ends blades d'. I pre 
fer to employ, as shown, two pairs of arms ex 
tended in opposite directions from the shaft 
and each provided with a scraper, although a 
single pair of arms and scraper may be em 
ployed, provided the intervals between the 
buckets are sufficiently great. 
The scraper-shaft is located considerably 
below and beyond the end of the excavator 
chain, and the arms d are curved, as shown. 
In Fig. I they are carried outward from the 
shaft in a Substantially radial position and 
then curved sharply backward. As the buck 
ets descend to deliver their contents, the ac 
tion of the scraper is secured by causing it to 
revolve at such speed that the blades will en 
ter the inverted buckets at the edged and 
Sweep over the inner surface until the oppo 
site edge is reached. Owing to the fact that 
the buckets advance during this action, and 
that their inner surfaces are of curved form, 
the scrapers should be given a variable speed 
during each rotation, in order that the blades 
may effectually discharge the contents with 
Out impeding the movement of the buckets. 
It will be noticed that the scraper is thrust 
upward into the bucket at one side and car 
ried downward as it approaches the opposite 
side, so that it acts above the load to forcibly 
expel the same in a downward direction. 
In Letters Patent No. 166,852, issued to me 
August 18, 1875, is shown a rotary scraper 
having substantially straight or radial blades 
rotating around an axis on a level with the 
axis of the bucket-driving wheels, the buck 
ets being comparatively shallow, and the 
scraper acting in one side of the bucket only 
while the latter is turned on its side. Owing 
to the curvature of the arms shown in the 
present case and to the location of their axis, 
I am enabled to use deep buckets, which is 
very desirable, and to carry the scraper over 
the entire interior surface of the bucket-bot 
tom from one edge to the other, so as to com 
pletely and positively expel the entire con 
tentS. 
The scraper constructed as above may be 
turned by hand or by any suitable gearing 
which will impart thereto a variable rotation. 
I recommend, however, the connections rep 
resented in the drawings, in which E repre 
sents a cross-arm secured to the end of the 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
415,620 
bucket-driving shaft C, and provided at its 
two extremities with studs or rollers e e', ar 
ranged to traverse grooves h. h", formed in a 
plate FI, fixed on the end of a horizontal shaft 
G, supported in stationary bearings. It will 
be observed that each of the grooves h h' en 
ters the plate at a point distant from the cen 
ter, extends thence inward in a partly-curved 
line to a point near the center, where it turns 
practically at a right angle and extends out 
ward from the center. On each side of the 
plate H the two grooves have their outer ends 
of circular curvature, the curves being de 
Scribed from a common center X, and the ra 
dius being equal to the radius of a circle de 
scribed by the studs e e'. 
The operation is as follows: As the cross 
arm E revolves in the direction indicated by 
the arrow, its stude enters the forward end 
of the groove h, as shown in Fig. 3, and Sweeps 
therethrough toward the center. During its 
movement through the circular portion of the 
groove the plate II remains at rest; but as the 
stud continues inward toward the center it 
imparts to the plate II a rotary motion and 
rapidly-increasing speed. Finally the stud 
reaches the inner angle of the groove, as 
shown in Fig. 1, at which time the plate II is 
revolving at its maximum speed. The stud 
e now continues its course outward through 
the rear end of the groove in the direction in 
dicated by the arrows, and in so doing ro 
tates the plate H with a constantly-diminish 
ing speed until the stud reaches the curved 
termination of the groove, when the plate 
ceases its rotation. In this manner the plate 
is given practically a half-revolution, so that 
as the stude leaves the rear end of the groove 
h the forward end of the groove h' is brought 
in position to receive the stude', which has 
in the meantime been brought to the posi 
tion occupied by the stude in Fig. 3. The 
stude' now sweeps through the groove h", re 
peating the operation just described in rela 
tion to stude, and imparting to the plate II 
another half-revolution. It will be observed 
that each revolution of the cross-arm E pro 
duces a revolution of the plate H with two 
intervals of rest, and that the speed of the 
plate H is increased and then diminished 
twice during each revolution. It will also be 
observed that the parts are so proportioned 
that each of the studs engages the plate H 
just before the other stud disengages, so that 
the plate is at all times under the control of 
the operating-arm. 
Under ordinary circumstances the momen 
tum of the parts will be such as to insure the 
passage of the studs through the angular por 
tion and out of the rear ends of the grooves. 
In order, however, to prevent any failure in 
this regard, I propose to provide each of the 
grooves with a yielding dog or latch of any 
appropriate character-such, for instance, as 
the spring-latches I. (Shown in Figs. 3 and 5.) 
Each of these consists of an angular spring 
secured within the groove, so as to spring 
across the same and form a continuation of 
the same at its rear angle. As the studs ad 
vance toward the center, these latches yield 
and permit them to pass. The latches then 
return to their positions behind the stud, and 
are thus compelled to pass rearward through 
the grooves. 
On the shaft of the plate His mounted a 
wheel J, connected by belt K to a wheel L on 
the scraper-shaft D. Through these connec 
tions the scraper receives the appropriate mo 
tion from the plate H. 
Motion may be imparted to the excavator 
chain in any appropriate manner; but in the 
drawings I have shown its shaft C provided 
with a gear M, driven by intermediate gear 
N, O, P, and Q from an engine R. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In combination with the chain of dredg 
ing-buckets, the rotary scraper comprising a 
rotary shaft, the rigid arms thereon, and the 
scraper-blade fixed to the arms, said shaft be 
ing located and the arms curved, substantially 
as described and shown, so that the blade may: 
traverse the entire bottom of the traveling 
bucket from the front to the rear edge. 
2. In combination with the chain of exca 
vator-buckets and carrying-wheels over which 
the buckets turn to an inverted position to 
discharge their contents, the shaft having the 
arms extended outward and curved sharply 
rearward with the scraper-blade fixed thereto, 
said parts formed and arranged substantially 
as described and shown, so that the blade 
sweeps through the interior of the bucket from 
one edge to the other while the bucket is in 
an inverted position. 
3. The chain of buckets, its sustaining 
wheels, and their shaft, in combination with 
the rotary scraper mounted in fixed bearings, 
and the intermediate connecting-gear includ 
ing the rotary arm, and the eccentrically 
grooved plate, whereby the scraper is given 
a variable speed during its action on each 
bucket. 
4. The chain of buckets, its carrying-wheels, 
and the cross - arm thereon, in combination 
with the grooved rotary plate actuated by 
the cross-arm, the rotary shaft having the 
scraper fixed thereto,and driving-connections, 
as the pulleys and belts, between the grooved 
plate and Scraper. 
5. In combination with the excavator-chain 
and the rotary scraper, the intermediate 
scraper-driving plate having the angular 
grooves and spring-latches, and its driving 
arm mounted on a central shaft and provided 
with studs at the two ends. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 13th day of February, 1889, in the 
presence of two attesting witnesses. 
THOMAS Z. COLE. 
Witnesses: 
WM. R. KENNEDY, 
W. W. MORTIMER. 
... 
- 
. 
. 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
TO 
3O 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415721.txt	(No Model.) 
O. O. LEABHART. 
THEATER, APPLIANCE, 
No. 415,721, 
Patented Now, 26, 1889. 
7-2 
g" 
 
iceZ7 
an 
Cesire KG 
2. 
In lateris 
Af 
F 
s 
s 
s 
h 
 
Jo J. Aye!, 
PETERs, Photo-lthographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLEN O. LEABHART, OF ANTHONY, KANSAS. 
THEATER APPLIANCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,721, dated November 26, 1889, 
Application filed November 27, 1888, Serial No. 292,005, (No model.) 
55 
6.) 
75 
So 
O 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OLEN O. LEABHART, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at An 
thony, in the county of Harper and State of 
Kansas, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Theater Appliances and 
Devices for Operating Stage-Scenery; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
theater appliances, and more particularly to 
devices for operating stage-scenery. 
The employment of the grooved guides for 
moving the Scenery into position has been 
found, particularly in the numerous smaller 
towns and cities, where skilled managers and 
costly apparatus are not common, to be attend 
ed with more or less inconvenience and often 
times with hitches which have detracted to a 
great degree from the success of the play. 
Among the objections may be noted the lia 
bility of throwing one of the half-scenes past 
the center of the stage, leaving an ugly open 
ing at the side and requiring several moments 
to adjust it; also, when the sections of scen 
ery are a little too short, the difficulty of 
keeping the tops in position and the liability 
of the tops of the sections to wedge in the 
grooves when the latter have become slightly 
swollen or warped out of true. 
The object of my present invention is to 
provide operating devices which may be ad 
justed to suit different heights of scenery 
sections, and which will admit of the ready 
shifting and turning of the sections. 
A further object is to provide operating 
devices which may be set up at an initial cost 
and which shall be capable of receiving a 
great variety of scenery-sections with the 
minimum amount of Waste space. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
45 combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front view of a stage with the scenery-op 
erating devices in position for use, the screens 
at the sides and top being removed to show 
the supports for the operating devices. Fig. 
2 is a vertical central section taken across 
the stage from right to left, and Fig. 3 is a 
plan view, the support at the stage-loft being 
removed. 
In the above illustrations a set of four sup 
porting-cables are shown; but the number 
may be greater or less than four, and there 
may be two or more sets, as the demands in 
any particular instance may require. 
A represents the stage-floor, and a uprights 
at the opposite sides of the stage, suitably 
braced in position by braces a', for example. 
The uprights a are secured by girders B at 
the top and by intermediate girders b. 
Vertically-sliding bars or plates Care fitted 
at their ends to engage grooves c in the faces 
of the uprights; or the grooves might be 
formed in the bars or plates C, and the up 
rights be provided with tongues. To the outer 
faces of the bars or plates C the yielding an 
choring-pieces D are secured by means of 
guide pins or studs d, which may be set firmly 
in either the anchoring-pieces or bars C, and 
allowed a free sliding movement in sockets 
formed in the other of the said parts. The 
anchoring-pieces D are held normally away 
from the bars C by springs E inserted be 
tween the said parts, in the present instance 
surrounding the guide pins or studs d. 
F represents a support at the stage-loft, 
and from it, at the center of the stage, depends 
the centering-block G. The latter is ren 
dered capable of a vertical adjustment pref 
erably by means of a rod or bolt H, the head 
of which engages the block, and the threaded 
end of which projects through a suitable 
bearing attached to the support F, and is 
provided with a nuth for adjusting it, and 
hence the block, up and down. Tension-rods 
g lead from the opposite sides of the block G. 
to the supports at the sides of the stage, and 
they are there provided with adjusting de 
vices consisting in the present instance of a 
threaded bolt g and nut g. A set of guide 
cables IKK, &c., lead from the opposite sides 
of the centering-block G, at suitable distances 
apart, through openings k in the vertically 
movable bars or plates C, and are secured in 
the anchoring-pieces D by means of adjusting 
devices consisting in the present instance of 
threaded boltsk' and nutsk. By the above 
35 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
415,721 
arrangement the centering-block G. may be 
raised and lowered at pleasure and secured in 
its adjustment by the tension-rods g. The 
guide-cables, by means of the vertically-slid 
ing bars C, may be kept at a perfect leveland 
their tension adjusted, while at all times they 
are capable of yielding to the strain which 
may be brought to bear upon them by the 
turning of the scenery-sections at different 
angles, or by what is commonly called box 
ing. 
L and L' represent two half-sections of the 
scenery, each resting on a pair of casters lat 
the foot, and each provided with a pair of 
guide-rollers l'at the top, the latter journaled 
in loops M, open on one side to receive the 
cable, so that the scenery-sections may be re 
moved from the cables at pleasure. The 
scenery-sections are further provided with 
stops O, secured to their upper corners, and 
adapted to engage the centering-block at the 
proper moment to cause the two sections to 
exactly meet at the center of the stage. 
It is evident that slight changes might be 
resorted to in the form and arrangement of 
the several parts without departing from the 
spirit and scope of my invention; hence I do 
not wish to limit myself strictly to the con 
struction herein set forth; but 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In devices for operating scenery; the 
combination, with suitable side and top sup 
ports, of a vertically-adjustable centering 
block depending from the top support, and 
one or more vertically-adjustable guide-ca 
bles leading from the centering-block to the 
side supports, substantially as set forth. 
2. In devices for operating scenery, the 
combination, with suitable side and top sup 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
ports, of a centering-block depending from 
the top support, and longitudinally and ver 
tically adjustable guide-cables leading from 
the centering-block to the side supports, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In devices for operating scenery, the 
combination, with suitable side supports, of 
guide-cables connecting the side supports, and 
yielding anchoring-pieces in which the ends 
of the guide-cables are secured, substantially 
as Set forth. 
4. In devices for operating scenery, the 
combination, with suitable side supports, of 
guide-cables connecting the side supports, 
yielding anchoring-pieces, and adjusting de 
vices connecting the ends of the cables with 
the anchoring-pieces, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. In devices for operating scenery, the 
combination, with suitable side supports, of 
guide-cables connecting the side supports, 
vertically-movable bars through which the 
cables extend, and yielding anchoring-pieces 
secured to the said movable bars and having 
the ends of the cables secured therein, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. In devices for operating scenery, the 
combination, with suitable side and top sup 
ports, of a centering-block depending from 
the top support, devices for vertically ad 
justing the centering-block, tension-rods for 
adjusting the block laterally, guide-cables 
leading from the centering-block to the side 
supports, and vertically-movable end sup 
ports for the cables, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
OLEN O. LEABHART. 
Witnesses: 
F. C. RANEY, 
A. H. DAVIS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415822.txt	(No Model.) 
H, C, SERGEANT 
AIR COMPRESSOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 415,822, 
Patented NOW. 26, 1889. 
 
(No Model.) 
H. C. SERGEANT. 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
F ?WNY, 
N 
2Z 
SS s 
2 
SS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
S N al 75 S 
S 
SNSSSSSSSSSSS 
N 
all 
S 
NS 
a 
 
 
iN 
22 56 
N. PETERS. Photo-ithographor, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY CLARK SERGEANT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE INGER 
SOLL-SERGEANT ROCK DRILL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
A R. COMPRESS OR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,822, dated November 26, 1889. 
Application filed January 4, 1889, Serial No. 295,403, 
(No model.) 
- 
O 
claim. 
To all whom it nucly concern: 
the smaller cylinder. The larger cylinder is 
Be it known that I, HENRY CLARK SER 
also represented as surrounded by a water 
GEANT, a citizen of the United States, resid 
jacket A. 
ing in the city and county of New York and 
In the inner cylinder-head Athere are sev 
5 State of New York, have invented a new and 
eral openings a, (see Fig. 5,) through which 
useful Improvement in Air-Compressors, of 
the inner end of the larger cylinder is always 
which the following is a specification, refer 
in free communication with the atmosphere. 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
As the inner ends of the two cylinders are in 
lings. 
free communication with each other, the in 
The object of this invention is to provide 
ner end of the smaller cylinder is only in 
a compressor for the economical compression 
communication with the atmosphere through 
of air to a very high tension, and especially 
the said openings (t. 
to obtain a compressor for such work which 
In or on the outer head A' of the larger 
is of simple construction, which will be as 
cylinder there is a valve-box E, in which are 
5 nearly as practicable free from leakage, and 
valves e, of any suitable kind, which open 
which may be very easily kept in order and 
outward from the said cylinder into said box, 
repaired. 
and from this box a passage or conduit J, 
I will first describe the construction and op 
formed partly on the cylinder-jacket A and 
eration of a compressor embodying my im 
partly on that B, leads to a valve-box F, (see 
2O provement with reference to the drawings 
Figs. 3 and 6.) provided in or on the head B' 
and afterward point out its novelty in the 
of the smaller cylinder. In this box F are 
valves f, of any suitable kind, which open 
Figure 1 is a side view, and Fig. 2 a plan, of 
from the said box to the outer end of the 
an air-compressor embodying my invention 
smaller cylinder. 
25 and a steam-engine for driving the same. 
The cylinder-head B has also provided in 
Fig. 3 represents a central vertical section of 
it another valve-box G, (see Figs. 3 and 6.) 
the compressor; Fig. 4, a transverse vertical 
which contains valves g, of any suitable kind, 
section in the line as ac of Fig. 3; Fig. 5, a 
opening outward into the said box, which is 
transverse vertical section in the line if y of 
always in communication with the discharge 
3o Fig. 3; and Fig. 6, a transverse section in the 
pipe or passage through which the completely 
line 2 2 of Fig. 3. The said transverse sec 
compressed air is delivered. In the example 
tions are all taken viewed from the right. 
represented there is a discharge-passage H, 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
formed partly on each of the water-jackets of 
sponding parts in the Several figures. 
the cylinders and intended to have a dis 
A and B designate two compressor-cylin 
charge-pipe connected with it at II". (See 
ders of unequal size arranged end to end. 
Figs. 3 and 4.) 
C and D designate two connected pistons 
The heads of the pistons C D may be packed 
fitted, respectively, to the two cylinders for 
in any Well-known manner, and may be per 
the purpose of first compressing the air to a 
manently connected together in any suitable 
4O certain degree in the larger cylinder and af 
way. In the example represented they are 
terward further producing and completing 
connected by a hollow trunk b and by a pis 
its compression in the smaller cylinder. The 
ton-rod c, which passes through a stuffing 
cylinders are respectively fitted at their outer 
box d, provided for it in the head A' of the 
ends with air-tight heads A and B'; but they 
outer cylinder. This stuffing-box contains 
45 are represented in free intercommunication 
the only packing used in the compressor, ex 
at their inner or adjacent ends. The larger 
cept that of the piston-heads, and, as this box 
cylinder A is represented as provided at its 
is in the larger cylinder, in which the pri 
inner end with an annular head A, to which 
mary compression takes place, the liability 
the smaller cylinder B, surrounded by a 
to leakage is reduced to a minimum. 
So water-jacket B, is secured, the said head. A 
The piston C of the larger cylinder may be 
having a central opening to the inner end of fitted with any suitable kind of Walve or 
35 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
415,822 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
valves that will open from the inner end to 
ward the outer end of the said cylinder. In 
the example represented there is a single 
valve consisting of a disk I, of metal, having 
a central hub I', which is fitted to slide upon 
the piston-rod a distance limited by a stop 
shoulder c' on said rod, as shown in Fig. 3. 
This valve opens and closes a large number 
of openings i, provided in the piston-head. 
The piston D of the smaller cylinder is valve 
less. 
PassageSi, for the circulation of water to 
and from the Water-jackets for cooling the 
cylinders, are shown intersecting the air-pas 
sages J and H, and oil-passages j', for oiling 
the cylinders and pistons, are shown inter 
secting the air-passage J. These water and 
oil passages are no part of the improvement, 
and are only mentioned here to prevent con 
fusion of the parts of the drawings. 
The air-compressor thus constructed is to 
be operated by power applied directly to the 
piston-rod c, to produce its reciprocating mo 
tion. In Figs. 1 and 2 this rod is represented 
as connected for this purpose with the same 
cross-head k as the piston-rod l of a recipro 
cating steam-engine. The larger cylinder A, 
which is furnished, as shown in Fig. 4, with 
horizontal lateral flanges m, one on each side 
of its water-jacket, is represented in Figs. 1 
and 2 as Supported and secured by these 
flanges on the same bed-plate or frame Kwith 
the steam-engine, and the smaller cylinder is 
represented as supported by being secured to 
the head A of the larger cylinder independ 
ently of the framing or bed-plate and over 
hanging the latter. This method of support 
ing the smaller cylinder allows it to be easily 
removed to afford convenient access to the 
pistons, which can be withdrawn when the 
smaller cylinder has been removed and the 
rod has been disconnected from the cross 
head. The cylinder-head. A can also be re 
moved entirely after the removal of the pis 
tons and their rod. 
To explain the operation of the compressor, 
I will first suppose the pistons to be moving 
to the right of Fig. 3. The piston-valve I will 
Air which is freely supplied to 
now be open. 
the inner end of the larger cylinder through 
the openings a, which are always in free com 
munication with the atmosphere, will now pass 
through the said valve I to the larger cylin 
der and fill it. 
On the return-stroke the air 
which had been thus admitted will be com 
pressed by the piston Cin the larger cylinder, 
the valvese of which will be thereby opened 
by the pressure due to this compression to 
allow the said air to pass to and through the 
passage or conduit J to the valves f, which 
will be opened by the said pressure to admit 
the said air to pass through them into the 
smaller cylinder, the valves g being mean 
while closed by the pressure in the receiver, 
with which there is connection at H'. As this 
stroke continues, the air is further compressed 
by its being forced into the smaller space With 
in the cylinder B as compared with that in A. 
When the pistons again move to the right, 
the air in the smaller cylinder B is com 
pressed and forced out therefrom through 
the valves g by the pressure thus imparted 
to it, while a fresh charge of air is taken into 
the cylinder A between its outer end and its 
piston through the openings C and piston 
valve I, as hereinbefore described. The 
areas of the larger and smaller cylinders and 
pistons may be so proportioned to each other 
and to the degree of compression desired to 
be attained that the work of compression 
will be equally divided between the two pis 
tons, and power required to be exerted will 
be nearly the same in the two strokes of their 
reciprocating movement. 
Throughout this specification I have re 
ferred to my invention as relating to air-coin 
pressors; but a compressor constructed ac 
cording to my invention is obviously also ap 
plicable to the compression of gases, and in 
such case the inlet-openings a, instead of 
communicating with the atmosphere, will 
communicate with the source from which the 
Supply is. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, in a compressor, of two 
single-acting cylinders of unequal caliberar 
ranged in line with each other, being in free 
intercommunication with each other and with 
the atmosphere or source of supply at their 
inner or adjacent ends and having heads at 
their outer ends, a passage or conduit out 
side the cylinder, between the said heads, a 
discharge-valve in the head at the outer end 
of the larger cylinder between the said cylin 
der and said passage or conduit, an inlet 
valve in the head at the outer end of the 
smaller cylinder between the said cylinder 
and said passage or conduit, two connected 
pistons fitted to said cylinders, the piston of 
the smaller cylinder being valveless, an inlet 
valve in the larger piston opening toward the 
outer end of its cylinder and discharge-valves 
in the head at the outer end of the smaller 
cylinder, substantially as herein described. 
HENRY CARIK SERGEANT. 
70 
So 
90 
OO 
IIO 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. IIAYNES, 
ARTHUR II. GAMBLIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US415922.txt	(No Model.) 
J. S. O'HARA, 
OWERSHOE, 
No. 415,922, 
Patented Nov. 26, 1889, 
 
ATTORMEYS. 
N. Perers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH S. O'HARA, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
ove RSHOE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 415,922, dated November 26, 1889. 
Application filed July 3, 1889, Serial No. 316,396, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it inval? concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. S. OHARA, of 
Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent and 
State of Michigan, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Overshoes, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Overshoes, and particularly to those manu 
factured from india-rubber and compounds of 
the same with other substances. 
The objects of my invention are to produce 
an elastic overshoe which will be neat in ap 
pearance, easy to manufacture by usual pro 
cesses, and that from the peculiar conforma 
tion of the same will hold itself securely upon 
the leather shoe of a wearer without, undue 
strain upon the front portion of the foot, so 
as to avoid improper pressure upon the toes 
and consequent pain in or numbness of these 
members. 
With these objects in view my invention 
consists in certain features of construction, 
which will be hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation in section of one 
form of the overshoe displaying my improve 
ment, Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section in ele 
vation of a slightly-changed form of the over 
shoe. Figs. 3 and 4 are sectional side eleva 
tions of other modified forms of my improve 
ment in overshoes. Figs. 5 and 6 are side 
elevations of the preferred form of construc 
tion, Fig. 5 being a side. elevation in section, 
while Fig. 6 represents the overshoe upon a 
wearer's foot and in perspective, Fig. 7 is a 
perspective view of the bottom and side of 
an overshoe, which is similar in construction 
to that shown in Fig. 4, and Fig. 8 is a plan 
view in section of the shoe shown in Fig. 2 
taken online 22 in said figure. 
As before indicated, the preferred material 
used in the manufacture of this improved 
overshoe is the usual composition of Vulcan 
ized india-rubber, which is strengthened by 
the proper combination therewith of woven 
cloth in alternating layers. 
To effect the stated objects of my inven 
- 
tion an essential feature consists of the inte 
gral formation of a swelling projection A", 
which produces a flattened rib vertically upon 
the rear wall of the shoe. There is also a 
corresponding thickening up of the front wall 
Ct' of the recessed heel IB. It will be noticed 
that the front wall just mentioned is varied 
in height in the several views shown, and 
that different degrees of inclination from a 
horizontal plane is given to this front Wall, or 
it may be miade vertical, as shown in Fig. 3. 
Upon the exterior surface of the shoe A an 
integral band or swell a (see Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 
4) is produced, which extends from the front 
wall of the heel B, around the heel portion of 
the overshoe, intersecting the vertical rib A. 
As will be seen in the figures named, the band 
a is inclined upwardly as it extends rear 
Wardly, so that a constricting cincture of 
denser material than the lower portion of the 
side wall of the heel is thus afforded, which 
will bind the recessed heel portion securely 
upon a proper - sized heel belonging to a 
leather shoe that is inserted therein, the line 
of constriction being indicated by the plane 
of inclination of the band Ct. 
It is not material whether the front Wall of 
the heel recess or socket of the overshoe is 
vertical or somewhat inclined, as the con 
junctive action therewith of the integral band 
CL will be equally as effective in retaining the 
overshoe in place upon an inserted leather 
shoe by constriction of the band upon the 
heel portion of the inserted shoe, without re 
quiring a binding fit of the overshoe upon the 
front portion of the shoe. 
In Figs, 5 and 6 there is shown a duplex 
band, the lower portion h of which encircles 
the heel portion B of the overshoe and grips 
the body of an inserted leather heel. 
The upper band portion a, extends from its 
point of junction e diagonally upward and 
rearward, So as to engage the rear wall of the 
overshoe at a point d above the natural rear 
Ward swellor protrusion of the heel, as shown. 
The effect of the coacting construction pro 
duced by the diverging bands a h is to bind 
the heel portion of the overshoe firmly upon 
the wearer's leather shoe and render unneces 
sary a compressing strain on the front por 
tion of the foot, as is usual with ordinary gum 
overshoes. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
415,922 
O 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An elastic overshoe having an integral 
vertical flattened rib formed on the outer 
surface of the rear wall, and an inclined in 
tegral band formed on the outer surface of 
the shoe, which extends from the forward 
part of its heel around and upward, intersect 
ing the vertical flattened rib, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. An elastic overshoe having a vertical 
flattened rib formed on the rear portion of its 
heel, a thickened front wall on the heel por 
tion, and an upwardly and rearwardly ex 
tended encircling band integrally formed and 
joining the thickened front and rear portions 
of the heel, substantially as set forth. 
3. An elastic overshoe having an integral 
duplex band formed upon its external rear 
portion, which band is adapted to bind the 
heel proper of an inserted shoe and also ex 
ert an upwardly and rearwardly inclined con 
striction upon the rear portion of a Wearer's 
foot, substantially as set forth. 
4. An elastic overshoe having a thickened 
wall formed integral with its recessed heel, 
and an external duplex integral band with a 
lower portion encircling the heel and an up 
per diagonally-inclined portion which exerts 
a constricting pressure on an inserted foot 
above the heel proper, substantially as set 
25 
forth. 
y 
JOSEPH. S. O'HARA. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN STEKETEE, 
CORNELIUS D. WIERSMA, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416022.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. WAY. 
DRESS SKIRT ELEWATOR, 
No. 416,022, 
Patented Nov. 26, 1889. 
Q.22.47 : 
76M242 
t r; 
f, a 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. WAY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
DRESS - SKIRT E L EVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,022, dated November 26, 1889. 
Application filed August 6, 1889, Serial No. 319,867, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. WAY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Port 
land, in the county of Cumberland and State 
of Maine, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Adjustable Supports for 
Dress-Skirts; and I do declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to a device for rais 
ing the lower edge of the skirts on ladies 
dresses. 
It is well known that a dress which is made 
of proper length for wear in the house is 
often too long when walking on the street, 
and this is particularly true in wet and rainy 
Weather. Many expensive dresses are spoiled 
by allowing their lower edges to drag ever 
So slightly on the ground or pavement. So 
far as I am aware, no convenient and effective 
device has been used for evenly raising the 
lower edge of the skirt to a greater or less 
height. 
The object of my invention is to raise and 
lower the bottom of the dress-skirt at will 
and at the same time preserve the proper 
hang of the drapery. This I accomplish by 
means of my invention, which consists of the 
device as set forth in the claims. 
I illustrate in the accompanying drawings 
a specific form of my device. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
a dress-skirt, showing my device in position. 
Fig. 2 is a central vertical section through 
the catch, and Fig. 3 is a perspective view of 
the same without the cord. 
A represents the waistband of the skirt, 
and B is the skirt proper. Attached to the 
upper part of the skirt, preferably to the 
Waistband, is the catch or fastening C. This 
catch consists of a tube having bell-shaped 
ends. On the upper end is formed a lug c, 
containing holes by which it is sewed or oth 
erwise attached to the dress. There is also 
A cord 
D passes through the tube, and has secured disturbed. 
to it at numerous places small annular flanges 
d, which are adapted to catch in the notch c', 
and so prevent the cord from being drawn 
downward through the tube. The tube C is 
attached to the lower portion of the waist 
band and the greater part of it is located be 
neath the fabric of the skirt, so that the cord 
passes from the inside to the outside of the 
dress through the tube. The notch c' is 
placed preferably toward the front. The 
lower end of the cord is formed into several 
branches d d d. These branches are here 
shown as pieces of tape, the upper ends of 
which are secured to the lower end of the 
cord D, their lower ends being secured to the 
skirt preferably on the inside, and at a point 
about half-way between the top and bottom . 
of the skirt. 
It is designed to use one of my suspend 
ing-cords on each side of the dress, each cord 
having several tapes or branches on its lower 
end. The lower ends of these tapes are at 
tached to the dress about equally distant 
from each other around the skirt and about 
half-way down. 
The cord has a loose fit 
within the tube and slides freely through it 
when not caught in the notch c'. 
The use of the device is obvious from its 
construction. When it is desired to lift the 
lower edge of the skirt, the cord is drawn 
upward through the tube and one of the 
flanges d allowed to catch in the notch c'. 
These flanges are numerous enough SO that 
the skirt can be raised much or littie, as re 
quired. It can be lowered into place by sim 
ply releasing the cord from the catch, the 
cord having a free longitudinal movement 
when so released and moving freely up and 
down. The end of the cord D which hangs 
down outside of the skirt may be provided 
with a suitable ornament. The tube C, being 
provided, as it is, with walls which are in 
terposed between the rod and the dress fab 
ric, protects the fabric from the wear inci 
dent to drawing the cord up and down. 
It will be seen that the device can be quickly 
and easily operated and will result in great 
saving to the dress. When drawn up, the 
entire lower edge of the dress is raised equally 
and the hang of the skirt is not materially 
In fact, the drapery thus pro 
90 
95 
75 
CO 
25 
35 
45 
5o formed in the upper end a notch c'. 
416,022 
TO 
duced is rather ornamental than otherwise, 
and it is for this reason that the attachment 
of the cord at the center of the skirt becomes 
important. If the cords were attached at or 
near the bottom, the proper drapery could 
not be obtained, and if near the top the skirt 
could not be easily lifted. When not in use, 
the cord is allowed to hang over the back 
edge of the tube, so that it slids freely with 
out catching in the notch c'. 
It is obvious that many modifications can 
be made in the device here illustrated and 
particularly described without departing from 
my invention as embodied in the claims. 
I claim 
1. The herein-described support for dress 
skirts, consisting of a tube secured vertically 
to the upper part of the dress-skirt and having 
in its upper end a notch or recess, and a cord 
attached to said skirt and passing through 
said tube, and having enlargements whereby 
it may be retained in said notch, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The herein-described support for dress 
skirts, consisting of a tube secured vertically 
to the upper part of the dress and having a 
notch or recess in its upper end, and a cord Se 
cured to said skirt and passing through said 
tube, and having annular flanges secured to 
it at intervals, whereby it is retained in said 30 
notch, Substantially as shown. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
25 
GEORGE W. WAY. 
Witnesses: 
S. W. BATES, 
WM.M. HAGGETT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416122.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 416,122, 
W. R. PARK, 
INSULATING HANGER, 
Patented Nov. 26, 1889, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. PARK, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALE TO CHARLES W. LEDIG, OF SAME PLACE. 
NSULATING - HANGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,122, dated November 26, 1889. 
Application filed October 14, 1889, Serial No. 326,918, (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all whom it nway concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. PARK, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain Improvements in Insulating-Hangers 
for Electric Wires, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
electric wires with suitable insulating-hang 
ers that can be readily applied and will be 
rigid when in place as regards any longitudi 
mal motion, but will allow the wire to vibrate 
under certain circumstances. 
My invention is especially applicable to 
electrical railways. The hanger is applied 
to the Supporting or guard wire and to the 
electric wire at intervals, thus supporting the 
said electric Wire, but giving it sufficient free 
movement to allow for the running of the 
contact-trolley. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
is a perspective view showing my improved 
insulating - hanger applied to an overhead 
electric-railway wire. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view of the hanger. Fig. 3 is an end view. 
Fig. 4 is a side view. Fig. 5 is a diagram view; 
and Figs. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 are views of 
different forms of the insulator. 
Referring to Fig. 1, A is the electric wire 
of an electric railway. 
B is the supporting or guard wire hung di 
rectly above the wire A. 
D is the hanger by which the electric wire 
is suspended from the guard-wire. These 
hangers are secured to the wires at intervals 
throughout the entire line. Should the elec 
tric wire become severed at a point between 
the poles or other supports, the hangers will 
prevent the wire from falling to the ground. 
Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 5 show the insulating 
hanger in the form I prefer to construct it. 
E is a block, of rubber or equivalent elas 
tic material, having a central tongue e and 
side tongues d d. The lower edge of the 
tongue e, I prefer to form so as to conform 
with the shape of the electric wire. The 
tonguese and dd are perforated for the pas 
sage of a bolt F, having a nut f. 
G is a strap, preferably made of metal, the 
5o ends of which are perforated for the passage 
45 
35 
 
55 
75 
of the bolt F, so that when the strap is put 
around the wire, as shown in Fig. 3, and the 
bolt passed through the lips and the strap 
the electric wire will be supported by said 
By screwing the nut f tightly upon 
Strap. 
the bolt, so as to compress the rubber, the 
rubber of the central tongue e will force it 
self upon the electric wire A, and, clamping 
said wire tightly between the tongue and the 
strap, preventing any longitudinal movement 
thereon. The tongues d d, being also com 
pressed, bind upon the bolt and nut, prevent 
ing the nut from backing off. 
I form an eyeb in the upper end of the 
hanger for the wire B, and Islit the block at 
b' and place a strap H around the upper por 
tion of the hanger, and secure said strap to 
the block by a bolt h. I split this block, so 
as to form an open eyeb, to permit the hanger 
to be strung upon the supporting or guard 
wire after the guard-wire is in position. In 
Some cases the hanger can be slipped upon 
the guard-wire, and when this is the case I 
form the block with a simple opening or eye 
b, Fig. 6. 
In place of the band and split eye, as shown 
in Fig. 2, I may duplicate the tonguese and 
d d and strap G at the opposite end, as shown 
in Fig. 7. 
In Fig. S I have shown a hanger in which 
the tongues d d are dispensed with, a plain 
elastic block being used. The band G passes 
around the wire and is secured to the elastic 
block by a bolt F. Pressure being applied 
will force the tongue e of the elastic block. 
against the wire in the same manner as that 
shown in Fig. 3. 
In Fig. 9 I have shown the hanger in con 
nection with underground conduits for elec 
tric railways or for other electrical purposes, 
the block being secured to a bracket in the 
conduit by a bolt h", the guard-wire being 
dispensed with in this case. 
In Fig. 10 I have shown a hanger provided 
with a simple attaching-plate I, preferably 
cast or otherwise formed in the elastic block. 
In some instances the hanger may be at 
tached to an extension-rod, as shown in Fig. 
11, and may be pivoted thereto or fastened 
rigidly, as the case may be. 
d 
95 
IOO 
416,122 
5 
IO 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, in a hanger for elec 
tric Wires, of a block having an elastic tongue 
With a strap adapted to be passed around an 
electric wire, and a device for securing the 
strap to the block and compressing the tongue, 
Substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of an elastic block hav 
ing the central tongue e, side tongues d d, 
With a strap G, adapted to pass around the 
Wires, and a bolt adapted to secure the block 
to the strap, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a block having a 
tongue at one end and a split eye at the op 
posite end with a strap adapted to pass over 
and close the split eye and a strap adapted 
to said tongue, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of a hanger for elec 
tric wires, having at one end an eye for the 
passage of the supporting-wire, and a tongue 
at the opposite end, with a band adapted to be 
passed around the electric wire and Secured 
to said tongue, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub- 25 
scribing witnesses. 
- 
WILLIAM R. PARK. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. D. CONNER, 
HENRY IIOWSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416223.txt	(No Model.) 
E. H., HORSEY. 
EMBALMING APPARATUS, 
No. 416,223, 
Patented Deo. 3, 1889. 
... 
- - - - - - 
it------------4-- - - - - - - - - - - - - 
--- ---------- I- -- - 
/ 2 
- 
-- - - 
- - - 
: 
-- - 
- - - 
etc. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
- - - - 
- 
- 
- - 
's 
f 
- - 
. 
- 
22 3. 
(2. 
al 
axa 
 
 
  
 
  
O 
 
 
 
 
2%-esses: a. 
 
&es G. (2 age. 
 
r2/ere or 
zzzzaz 277/2 2sey. 
12 as 1a2->eays: 
 
N. Peter S. Photo-lithographer. Washington, L. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD H. HORSEY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
EMBAM N G A PPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,223, dated December 3, 1889. 
Application filed December 24, 1888, Serial No,294,549, (No model.) 
I5 
2O 
25 
O 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD H. HORSEY, a 
citizen of the Dominion of Canada, residing 
in Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Embalming Apparatus, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the art of embalm 
ill.9. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
conveniently-portable embalming apparatus 
which may be packed in a small space, so that 
it may be used on shipboard as well as on 
land, and which may be used without in any 
way disfiguring or mutilating the body. 
My invention consists, primarily, in a flexi 
ble air and liquid tight embalming-sack, 
preferably made of rubber, rubber cloth, tar 
paulin cloth, or other Suitable impervious 
cloth, and having a mouth or opening through 
which the body to be embalmed may be car 
ried into the sack on a suitable truck for 
supporting it. The mouth or opening of the 
sack through which the body is inserted is 
furnished with set-screws and clamping-jaws 
to close it air-tight after the body is placed 
in the sack. The sack is furnished at its op 
posite end with a nozzle or orifice adapted to 
be connected with an air-pump for exhaust 
ing or partially exhausting the air from the 
embalming-sack, so as to form a partial vacu 
um therein. After the air has been partially 
pumped out of the embalming-sack the noz 
zle of the sack is connected to a vessel con 
taining the embalming vapor or gas in a com 
pressed form. The body-supporting carriage 
not only serves to roll or convey the body 
into the flexible embalming-sack, but to sup 
port the same near the longitudinal center of 
the sack during the embalming operation, 
and thus prevent the body from lying upon 
or coming in contact with the flexible sack, 
so that the embalming Vapor or gas may act 
equally upon the whole surface of the body. 
To prevent the flexible embalming-sack from 
coming in contact with the surface of the 
body when the air is being pumped out of the 
sack, I provide the sack With light hoops, 
springs, or distending devices, preferably on 
the interior thereof; and for the same pur 
pose, also, and to insure against any possible 
mutilation or discoloration of the face by 
contact with the rubber or flexible sack, I pro 
vide a face-mask. This face-mask may be 
attached to the body; but it is preferably at 
tached to the truck and supported thereby 
over the face. The truck or body supporting 
device is made (or preferably made) in hinged 
sections, so that it may be folded into a compact 
space. It is provided (or preferably provided) 
with wheels, and they should be of rubber or 
furnished with rubber tires to prevent any 
danger of cutting or injuring the sack as the 
truck is rolled into the same. The springs 
or sack-distending devices before mentioned 
serve not only to prevent the collapse of the 
sack against the body when the air is ex 
hausted, but also to hold the sack distended 
while the body-truck is being rolled or in 
serted therein. The embalming vapor or gas 
employed may be a simple article of com 
merce and manufactured commercially, or 
it may be made by the undertaker at his 
place of business, and then carried in a 
highly - compressed form in a suitable gas 
holder or vessel to the house or place where 
the embalming is to be done. The gas holder 
or vessel containing the embalming - vapor 
may be readily connected to the embalming 
sack after the body has been inserted therein, 
the sack closed air-tight, and the airexhausted 
there from. A sufficient quantity of vapor or 
gas for embalming one body may be com 
pressed into an ordinary gas holder or vessel 
of one or two cubic feet capacity. After the 
embalming Vapor or gas has been discharged 
into the embalming-sack under pressure, ac 
cording to my invention, the pressure of the 
gas or vapor causes it readily to penetrate 
into and through the tissues of the body. 
The previous exhaustion of the air from the 
embalming-sack and from the body contained 
therein by means of the air-pump greatly 
facilitates the subseqent penetration of the 
embalming vapors or gases into and through 
the tissues of the body. To facilitate the 
partial exhaustion of air from the body, as 
well as the penetration of the embalming 
vapors or gases into the body, I prefer to in 
sert elastic esophageal and rectal tubes. 
In cases where it is desired to hasten the 
embalming process and complete the opera 
3 5 
45 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
 
2 
416,223 
75 
tion in a short time weights may be placed 
upon the flexible embalming-sack, and thus 
increase the pressure of the vapor or gas 
and facilitate its penetration into and through 
the tissues. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, and in which 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of an apparatus 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 shows the 
compressed embalming gas or vapor holder. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view of the flexible embalm 
ing-Sack; Fig. 4, an enlarged longitudinal 
vertical section showing the sack connected 
With the gas or vapor holder. Fig. 5 is an 
enlarged detail view showing the clamp or 
device for closing the mouth of the sack 
through which the body is inserted. Fig. 6 
is a plan view of the same. Fig. 7 is an en 
larged cross-section through one of the clamp 
screws. Fig. S is a plan view of the body 
truck or carriage. Fig. 9 is a detail view of 
One of the sack-distending springs or hoops; 
and Fig. 10 is an elevation of the sack, show 
ing Weights placed thereon to increase the 
pressure of the embalming vapor or gas 
therein. Fig. 11 shows the disk or funnel 
for closing the mouth around the esophageal 
and rectal tubes. 
In the drawings, A represents the flexible 
embalming-sack, preferably of rubber or other 
cloth; B, the truck for supporting the body 
therein during the embalming operation; C, 
the air-pump, and D the compressed embalm 
ing gas or vapor holder. The flexible sack A 
has a large mouth or opening C. at One end, 
through which the body on the body-truck 
may be rolled or inserted. This mouth or 
opening is closed air-tight by the clamps a 
Ct and clamp-screws a. The clamps a? a 
may, if desired, be hinged or jointed together 
at their ends, as shown at a. The lips or 
edges C. Clf of the rubber sack at the mouth 
thereof may be preferably formed with a 
rib as and groove a where they are clamped 
together by the screws C, so as to form a more 
perfect joint. At or near the opposite end 
the Sack A is furnished with a pipe or nozzle 
F, having a coupling f, by which it is adapted 
to be connected with the pipe c. of the air 
pump C and with the pipe or nozzle d of the 
gas-holder D. The nozzle F is further pro 
vided with a cock or valve f' for closing the 
same. The gas or vapor holder D is also fur 
nished with a cock or valve d". The body 
truck B is preferably made in three folding 
sections connected together by hinges b and 
by hooks or devices b for rendering the joints 
rigid, so as to properly support the body. The 
wheels B of the truck B are furnished with 
rubber tires B, so that the wheels will not cut 
or infringe the flexible sack. A when the body 
truck is being rolled into the sack. The truck 
IB is further provided with a face-mask G. to 
protect the face from contact with the flexible 
sack A. This mask should be removably at 
tached to the truck, so that it may be put in 
place after the body is on the truck. The truck 
is further provided at intervals with straps b 
for securing the body thereto and with a neck 
or head rest b. 
H H are the hoops, preferably made of 
spring or flexible material, for holding the 
The ends of the hoop are 
sack distended. 
preferably connected together by a loop h 
and set-screw h", so that the hoop may be 
readily adjusted to different diameters, as 
may be required to properly distend the sack 
for the reception of bodies of different sizes. 
The hoops H are placed loosely in the sack 
and may be removed when desired. 
The truck is an open frame-work having 
just enough cross-pieces b to properly Sup 
port the body, so that the embalming gas or 
vapor may have access to the whole surface 
of the body. The wheels B of the truck serve 
to support the body in the sack at a distance 
above the bottom of the sack as the apparatus 
rests upon the floor or platform, so that the 
embalming gas or vapor may have access be 
neath the body. The diameter of the wheels 
should preferably be in practica about six 
inches, though their dimensions may be Val 
ried. 
When not in use the whole apparatus may 
be folded very compactly. The sections of 
the truck when folded together may be in 
serted in the flexible sack and then the flexi 
ble sack doubled or folded around the same. 
The whole apparatus is thus not only very 
compact, but it is light and may be readily 
carried by a single person. 
K represents the end of the esophageal 
tube projecting from the mouth. This should 
preferably be about one-half inch in diame 
ter. The tube K has a coupling k, by which 
it may be connected with the nozzle of a gas 
holder and the gas thus forcibly injected into 
the interior of the abdominal cavity. This 
may be done, if desired, after the body is re 
moved from the sack. 
For use at sea the embalming-sack should 
be made of stronger and heavier material, So 
that it may serve as a casket for containing 
the body until the ship arrives at port. The 
sack. A may be provided with handles for 
convenience in handling when containing the 
body. 
The weight before referred to for increas 
ing the pressure of the gas or vapor is indi 
cated in Fig. 10 at N. 
In Fig. 11 the esophageal tube K is shown 
as provided With a conical-shaped flange, 
disk, or funnel for closing the mouth and 
nostrils when the gas-holder is connected di 
rectly with the tube K for injecting the gas 
into the abdominal cavity. A strap k' may 
be employed to hold the rubber funnel or dam 
in place. 
I claim 
1. The portable foldable apparatus for sub 
jecting bodies internally and externally to 
the action of embalming-gas under pressure, 
consisting of an air-tightinclosing-sack flexi 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
IO 
25 
35 
- 45 
55 
65 
416,228 
3 
5 
O 
ble upon all sides, having an opening for the 
insertion of the body, and furnished with 
means for closing such opening air-tight after 
the body is inserted, a foldable body-support 
ing frame within said sack and provided with 
wheels for supporting the body above the 
bottom of the sack, so that the embalming 
gas may have access all around the body, 
said wheels also serving to roll the body and 
body-supporting frame out of and into the 
sack, said sack being furnished with a tube 
for the admission of the embalming-gas un 
der pressure, so that the gas can be forced 
into the internal cavities of the body through 
suitable esophageal or rectal tubes, substan 
tially as specified. 
2. The portable foldable apparatus for sub 
jecting bodies internally and externally to 
the action of embalming-gas under pressure, 
consisting of an air-tight inclosing-Sack flexi 
ble upon all sides, having an opening for the 
insertion of the body, and furnished with 
means for closing such opening air-tight after 
the body is inserted, a foldable body-support 
ing frame within said sack and provided with 
wheels for supporting the body above the 
bottom of the sack, so that the embalming 
gas may have access all around the body, 
said wheels also serving to roll the body and - 
body-supporting frame out of and into the 
sack, said sack being furnished with a tube 
for the admission of the embalming-gas un 
der pressure, so that the gas can be forced 
into the internal cavities of the body through 
suitable esophageal or rectal tubes, said fold 
able body-supporting frame having hinges or 
joints furnished with devices for rendering 
them rigid, and said frame and sack being 
adapted to fold up together in a compact 
space, substantially as specified. 
3. In an embalming apparatus, the combi 
nation of an inclosing-sack flexible upon all 
sides, and furnished with an opening at One 
end for the insertion of the body, and pro 
vided with clamps for closing such opening 
air-tight, with a wheeled supporting-frame 
for the body, whereby the body may be sup 
ported above the bottom of the sack, so that 
the embalming-gas may have accessall around 
the body, and whereby the body may be rolled 
in and out of the sack without marring the 
body by contact with the sack, substantially as 
specified. 
4. In an embalming apparatus, the combi 
nation of an inclosing case or sack flexible 
upon all sides, having an opening for the inser 
tion of the body, and provided with clamps 
for effecting an air-tight closure of such open 
ing, and hoops for distending the sack or 
case, with a support for the body, substan 
tially as set forth. 
EDWARD H. HORSEY. 
Witnesses: 
EDMUND ADCOCK, 
H. M. MUNDAY. 
35 
45 
55 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416323.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
P. E. COLLINS & E. H. TAYLOR. 
ADJUSTABLE PROPELLING MECHANISM FOR WESSELS, 
No. 416,323, 
Patented Dec. 3, 1889. 
 
N 
s 
& 
A zaze esses, 
( 4.4.22. 
N. PETERs, Photo-lihographer, Washingia to c. 
 
Zzzzle 72-Aors, 
Zaza A. Gezztets, 
% Kira 
742, (fa, 
a 
(No Model.) 
-r 
P. E. COLLINS & E. H., TAYLOR. 
ADJUSTABLE PROPELLING MECHANISM FOR, WESSELS 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 416,323, 
Patented Dec. 3, 1889. 
AZ 7tes 56s,  
a try 
Zezzvezzzo7s, 
Zee Z 26ozarts, 
a 72 6. Azeye7e-e AZayZo 
%22 (2a: 
zis. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL E. COLLINS, OF BOSTON, AND EUGENEH. TAYLOR, OF LYNN, ASSIGNORS 
TO SAID COLLINS, EDWARD DE LA GRANJA, AND PARKER SPINNEY, ALL 
OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ADJUSTABLE PROPELLING MECHANISM FOR VESSELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,323, dated December 3, 1889. 
Application filed December 12, 1888, Serial No. 293,382, (No model.) 
Io like parts. 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, PAUL E. COLLINS, of 
Boston, county of Suffolk, and EUGENE. H. 
TAYLOR, of Lynn, county of Essex, and State 
5 of Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
ment in Boat-Propelling Apparatus, of which 
the following description, in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specifica 
tion, like letters on the drawings representing 
Our invention relates to an apparatus for 
propelling boats or vessels in which a paddle 
wheel is used. 
The invention consists, mainly, in the com 
I5 bination and arrangement of the-propelling 
Wheel and its actuating-engine and the frame 
Work connecting said wheel and engine; and 
the object of the invention is to enable the 
wheel to rise bodily with relation to the hull 
2O of the vessel, the said wheel being preferably 
placed at the middle of the hull longitudi 
nally, and projecting below the bottom of the 
hull far enough to immerse the blades at the 
lower part of the Wheel in the Water, and the 
25 purpose of making the Wheel. So that it can 
rise is to enable the vessel to pass through 
any Water that is deep enough to float the 
hull. To accomplish this result, the frame 
Work connecting the engine-cylinder and the 
3O wheel-arbor is pivotally supported on the hull 
of the Vessel, so that the said entire frame 
Work and wheel and engine may easily move 
about said pivotal supportin a vertical plane, 
enabling the wheel to rise and fall, and the 
35 weight of the wheel is normally nearly coun 
terbalanced by some suitable device, shown 
in this instance as the pressure of fluid on a 
piston connected with the said frame and 
working in a cylinder supported on the hull 
40 of the vessel. By admitting more steam to 
the said cylinder the wheel may be raised; 
but usually when the vessel is moving through 
shallow Water steam is admitted in such 
amount as to nearly, but not quite, overbal 
45 ance and raise the wheel, so that if the latter 
at any time touches the bottom it will rise 
easily and pass over the bottom of the shal 
low water with a rolling motion, like that of 
a wheel rolling on ground. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in lon- 5o 
gitudinal section, of a vessel provided with 
propelling mechanism embodying this inven 
tion; Fig. 2, a plan view thereof; Fig. 3, a 
side elevation of the engine and a portion of 
the wheel-case on a larger Scale; Fig. 4, a Sec- 55 
tional detail online ac, Fig. 3, to be referred to. 
In Figs, 1 and 2 the invention is shown ap 
plied to a steam-launch, in connection with 
which it is especially useful on account of the 
facility of running in shallow water, and also 6o 
of the non-liability of the wheel to entangle 
ment with eel-grass or other material. 
The wheel A, the construction of which will 
be described more fully later on, works in a 
central opening in the hull, near the stern of 65 
the vessel, which is preferably made open at 
the rear of the wheel to a point above the 
water-line, as shown at B, Fig. 1, and pro 
vided with two rudders C, one at each side of 
said opening, as indicated in dotted lines, 7o 
Fig. 2. 
The wheel is shown as actuated by a recip 
rocating engine D of the usual type, the cyl 
inder of which is connected by frame-work 
E with the bearing for the shaft a of the 75 
wheel. The said frame-work is pivotally Sup 
ported on a frame F, stationary with relation 
to the hull of the vessel, so that the said 
frame may oscillate in a vertical plane, per 
mitting the wheel A to move in an arc around 8o 
the pivotal axis of said frame. 
The construction of the engine, its frame, 
and the inclosing-case for the wheel is best 
shown in Figs. 3 and 5. The said wheel is 
inclosed in a case G., (see Fig. 5,) rising above 85 
the water-line and making a tight Well in 
which it works. The frame-work supporting 
the wheel-shaft Ct. and connecting the same 
with the engine consists of two membersee, 
extending one at each side of the wheel-well 9o 
G, the former having the engine-cylinder d 
rigidly fixed upon it, and also the guides d 
for the cross-head d of the piston-rod, which 
is connected by the usual connecting-rod or 
pitman d with the crank a on the wheel- 95 
shaft Ct. Both the said frame-pieces e e are 
supported on a rock-shaft f, having its bear 
ings in the stationary frame F, and they are 
2 
416,828 
O 
25 
45 
55 
rigidly connected by a cross-bar e, which is 
engaged by one arm h of the wheel-balancing 
lever II, which is fulcrumed on the rock-shaft 
if and has its other arm connected with the 
piston-rod l of a piston working in a cylinder 
h', that is fixed with relation to the hull of 
the vessel. 
As shown, in this instance a single engine 
is employed to actuate the wheel, and the 
valve-actuating eccentrics cl and link clare 
on the opposite side of the wheel-well G from 
the crank ct, said reversing-link operating 
an arm connected with a rock-shaft d, ex 
tending through both parts ee of the frame 
and being connected with the arm d, that op 
erates the valve-rodd, as will be readily under 
stood from Figs. 3 and 5, the said reversing 
link-valve mechanism being of usual con 
struction. 
In order to admit of the oscillating move 
ment of the engine and wheel-frame about 
the rock-shaft?, the steam and exhaust pipes 
in n are provided with swivel-joints man", 
coaxial with the rock-shaft f, as best shown 
in Fig. 4. 
By admitting Steam to the upper part of 
the cylinder h" through the pipe h', (see Fig. 
5,) provided for that purpose, the pressure of 
said steam will tend to rock the lever h and 
to Swing the Wheel and engine-frame about 
the said rock-shaft fin the direction to raise 
the wheel-shaft (t, and when desired by ad 
mitting Sufficient stealin the said wheel-shaft 
and wheel may be raised bodily, and it may 
be subsequently lowered by permitting the 
steam to escape from the cylinder h through 
the pipe h' and a passage if therefrom lead 
ing to the exhaust-pipe n. The admission 
and exhaust of the steam from the cylinder 
may be controlled by valvesh his in the pipes 
h h", respectively, one of said valves being 
always closed when the other is open. 
In order to admit of the wheel rising and 
falling on its shaft, the sides of the wheel-case 
Gare provided with curved slots g above the 
wheel-shaft and concentric with the rock 
shaft f, and the oscillating frame ee' has con 
nected with it plates e'e', that cover the said 
slots as the shaft rises and falls therein, the 
Said plates e' being connected at their upper 
ends with a peripheral band if, that covers 
Substantially the upper half of the wheel-case 
and rises and falls with the wheel. 
The side walls of the case G will usually 
be made of Wood, and in such case they are 
provided along the edges of the slot g with 
iron plates if', against which the movable 
plates e'e rest. The said members ee of 
the Wheel and engine-frame have hubs or 
bosses extending into the slot in the wheel 
case and constituting a bearing for the wheel 
shaft, and the plates e e are fastened to the 
fraume-pieces at the outside of the wheel-case. 
It is obvious that the pivoting of the en 
gine and frame-work connecting it with the 
wheel-shaft is applicable to any kind of pro 
pelling-wheel, or may be used with a pair of 
wheels-one at each side of the hull of the 
vessel-instead of a single centrally-located 
wheel; and it is very useful in freight-barges 
of small draft for river-navigation, as a pow 
erful wheel of large diameter can be used, 
which will be very effective where the water 
is of sufficient draft, in which case the lower 
blades of the wheel will project substantially 
their entire length below the bottom of the 
vessel, but may be raised temporarily up to 
the level of the bottom of the vessel, so that 
the latter can pass without damage to the 
wheel wherever there is sufficient water to 
float the hull of the vessel. 
When the vessel is moving in deep water, 
the steam may be wholly cut off from the cyl 
inder h", and the wheel may remain in its 
lowest position; but when the vessel is pass 
ing through water that is shallow in places 
steam may be admitted to the cylinder I in 
an amount nearly but not quite sufficient to 
raise the wheel, which will then be nearly 
counterbalanced, so that upon arriving at 
shallow places it will rise easily and upon 
striking the bottom will pass over the shallow 
places with a rolling motion. 
While a paddle-wheel of any construction 
may be mounted to rise and fall, with an os 
cillating frame connecting it with the engine, 
as has just been stated, it will be apparent 
that a deeply-immersed paddle-wheel would 
not be efficient if the blades were fixed in 
radial position at right angles to the plane of 
rotation; and in order to obtain good results 
with a deeply-immersed wheel We have de 
vised a wheel with feathering-blades, which 
will now be described in order to furnish suf 
ficient information to enable this invention 
to be effectively practiced, although the con 
struction of the wheel and devices for con 
trolling and operating the blades thereof is 
not claimed in the present application for 
Letter's Patent. 
We claim 
E. A boat-propelling mechanism compris 
ing a propelling-wheel and engine, and frame 
connecting the said engine with the bearings 
for the wheel-shaft, the said frame being piv 
otally supported upon the hull of the vessel 
and normally free to turn on said pivot, and 
the weight of the wheel being substantially 
counterbalanced, thus enabling the wheel to 
rise if its periphery strikes a solid obstacle 
below, substantially as described. 
2. A boat-propelling mechanism compris 
ing a propelling-wheel and engine, and a 
frame connecting the said engine with the 
bearing for the wheel-shaft, said frame being 
pivotally supported upon the hull of the ves 
sel, combined with a lever engaged with said 
pivoted engine and wheel-frame, and a cylin 
der and piston therein connected with said 
lever, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
3. A boat-propelling mechanism compris 
ing a propelling-wheel and engine, and a 
frame connecting the said engine with the 
t 
7 O 
90 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
416,828 
bearing for the wheel-shaft, said frame being 
pivotally supported upon the hull of the ves 
Sel, and a case inclosing said wheel, provided 
With slots concentric with the pivoted sup 
port of the engine and wheel-frame, and plates 
connected with said engine-frame and cov 
ering said slots, substantially as described. 
4. A boat-propelling mechanism compris 
ing a propelling-wheel and engine, and a 
frame connecting the said engine with the 
bearing for the wheel-shaft, said frame being 
pivotally supported upon the hull of the ves 
sel, and a case inclosing said wheel, provided 
with slots concentric with the pivoted support 
O 
of the engine and wheel-frame, and plates 
connected with said engine-frame and cover 
ing said slots, and a peripheral wing or cover 
for the said wheel-case, connected with the 
oscillating engine and wheel-frame, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
PAUL E. COLIINS. 
EUGENE. H. TAYLOR, 
Witnesses: 
JOS. P. LIVERMORE, 
JAS. J. MALONEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416423.txt	(No Model.) 
L. H. PORTER, 
MILK 000LER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 416,423. 
Patented Dec. 3, 1889. 
 
 
 
B 
1/WWEMTOR 
ZZeca's z^2 
27,252 
m 
ATTORNEY 
PETERs. Photo-lithographer...washington, D.c. 
WITNESSES; 
A- 
cated 49eeze-to-4 
a- 
 
(No. Model.) 
No. 416,423, 
L. H. PORTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2 
MILK 0.00ER, 
Patented Deo. 3, 1889. 
Z72, 4 
27. 
s 
C 
Z 
S Seg 
7. E. 
EE 
N 
7. 
is 
sell-iss l re 
WITNESSES : 
cf. f...e424. 
.262 
w 
1/WWENTOR 
Zaeezs 74727.222'. 
" (c.c46 
ATTORNEY 
 
N. PeFERs, photo-thographer, Washington, E. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS H. PORTER, OF ROCKDAILE, TEXAS. 
M L K-C O OLE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,423, dated December 3, 1889, 
Application filed July 12, 1889, Serial No. 317,305. (No model.) 
- ' 
modification. 
To all whon it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, LOUIS H. PORTER, re 
siding at Rockdale, in the county of Milam 
and State of Texas, have invented a new and 
Improved Milk-Cooler, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention consists in a new and im 
proved milk-cooler, which will be hereinafter 
fully described and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a perspective view. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section of the same. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation. Fig. 4 is a perspective showing 
the cooler attached to a post. Fig. 5 is a 
The same letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
Referring to the several parts by letter, A 
indicates a receptacle, which is preferably 
cylindrical in shape, having a closed bottom 
A'. To the lower part of this receptacle A 
is secured a curved tube C, the tube being 
secured at its center to the can A, and an 
opening leading from the interior of the can 
to the interior of the tube. This tube C is 
formed of sufficiently-flexible material to per 
mit of its being bent around the can or other 
vessel in which the milk to be cooledisplaced. 
Because of its pliability and cheapness a 
quarter-inch lead pipe is used for the tube C, 
and the inner side of this curved tube is 
formed with a series of small apertures C. 
Before the tube C is curved a wire m, of some 
non-rusting material, is passed through the 
tube, being of such length that its ends pro 
ject beyond the ends of the tube. The di 
ameter of this wire is smaller than the bore 
of the tube, and the projecting ends of the 
wire are bent out at an angle, and the ends 
of the tube C are closed by soldering. The 
wire in gives strength and rigidity to the tube 
C and prevents its breaking or mashing in, 
which would otherwise beliable to occur dur 
ing the repeated adjustment of the tube C 
around the same or different sized vessels, 
The projecting bent ends of the wire in fur 
nish a convenient hold for the fingers in bend 
ing the tube around the milk can or vessel. 
The bucket R or churn or other vessel in 
which the milk, meat, or fruit to be kept cool 
is contained is Wrapped or inclosed in a sack 
S or wrapping of any other suitable textile 
material, this sack being preferably closed at 
the bottom, as it gives more evaporating-sur 
face, and the vessel R should not be set flat 
on the ground or floor, but be slightly raised 
above the same to permit of free passage of 
the air underneath it. The tube C is then 
bent around the upper part of the bucket R, 
and it will be seen that the water let into the 
water-receptacle A will run into the tube C 
and out through the series of perforations C' 
in its inner side, being thus distributed en 
tirely around the upper part of the bucket R, 
when it will soak down through the cloth or 
sack around the vessel, thus keeping the en 
tire surface of the bucket wet as long as wa 
ter is kept in the receptacle A. The cloth S 
being thus kept continually and evenly wet 
by the equal distribution of the Water which 
the perforated tube C effects, the evaporation 
of the water from the cloth or sack will keep 
the bucket and milk thoroughly cold, it being 
best to place the vessel when in use as much 
in the Wind as possible. 
Bindicates the water-reservoir, adapted to 
fit Within the receptacle A, closed at its up 
per end d and having at the said end a handle 
p for lifting it in and out of the receptacle A. 
The lower end of the water-reservoir IB is 
closed and is formed with an opening f, which 
is controlled by an upwardly-opening valvee, 
having a downwardly-projecting pin g, as 
shown. The water-reservoir is filled by turn 
ing itslower end up, so that the valvee will fall 
in when the water is poured in the reservoir 
through opening f, and the reservoir is then 
reversed with its right end up and placed in 
the receptacle A. The water-reservoir B is 
shorter than the receptacle A, and when the 
reservoir Bisplaced in the receptacle A, with 
the rimb of its upper end resting upon the 
upper edge of the receptacle A, the lower end 
of the valve-ping, coming in contact with the 
bottom of the receptacle A, will raise and 
hold the valve e slightly open, allowing the 
water from the reservoir to gradually flow 
from the reservoir into the receptacle A and 
through the perforated tube C. As soon as 
the water running from the reservoir rises in 
the lower part of the receptacle A above the 
opening f the water will cease to flow from 
the reservoir B until the water, running out 
of A through pipe C, falls below the level of 
EO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
EOCs 
 
2 
416,423 
55 
65 
75 
drawn up by a cloth by capillary attraction, 
if the cloth becomes the least oily or greased, 
which often happens, it will not draw up the 
Water. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination of a receptacle covered 
with a wrapping of textile material, the water 
receptacle A, and the curved perforated tube 
C, communicating with the receptacle A, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of a receptacle covered 
with a wrapping of textile material, the water 
receptacle A, the curved perforated tube C, 
communicating with the receptacle A, and the 
wire m, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the water-recep 
tacle A and the perforated tube C, communi 
cating therewith, of the reservoir B, closed at 
both ends and having at its lower end the. 
opening fand valve e, having the valve-pin g, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of a receptacle R, cov 
ered with a wrapping of textile material, the 
water-receptacle A, having the hook in and 
socket i, the curved perforated tube C, com 
municating with the receptacle A, the foot 
restle, and the reservoir B, closed at both ends 
and having at its lower end the openingfand 
valve e, having the valve-ping, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. The combination of a receptacle R, cov 
ered with a Wrapping of textile material, the 
water-receptacle A, having the loop l, hook n, 
and socket h, the curved perforated tube C, 
communicating with the receptacle A, and the 
bracketi, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination of a receptacle R, cov 
ered with a wrapping of textile material, the 
water-receptacle A, the curved perforated 
tube C, communicating with the receptacle A, 
and a stop-cock controlling the passage of 
water from the receptacle A into the tube C, 
substantially as set forth. 
LOUIS H. PORTER, 
Witnesses: 
L. I. Jo YNES, 
OTTO LENGERT. 
O 
opening f, when air will naturally pass up 
into the reservoir and cause the water to flow 
out as at first, the water being thus automati 
cally fed from the reservoir into the recep 
tacle A. The receptacle A has a loop l at its 
upper end, by means of which it can be sus 
pended to a post, tree, or wall, as shown in 
Fig. 4. The receptacle A has at its lower end 
a socket i, in which the upper end of a foot 
rest k is fitted, and has at the opposite side 
of its lower end a horizontal socket h, in 
which the upper end of a bracket ifits. The 
bucket R may rest upon the floor or ground, 
as shown in Fig. 3, when the receptacle A 
rests on the foot-rest k and has the upper 
end of a hook n, which is secured on its for 
ward side, as shown, caught over the top rim 
of the bucket. The tube C is bent around 
the bucket, and a cord or wires tied around 
the bent ends of the wire in. When the re 
ceptacle A is suspended by its loop l from a 
post, as shown in Fig. 4, the bracket f is 
placed in position and the bucket rests upon 
the horizontal lower part of the same, while 
the hook is caught over the top rim of the 
bucket. 
It will be seen that my invention can be 
used without the reservoir B by filling the 
reservoir full of water, as it will only ooze out 
of the small perforations of the tube C, which 
are pressed against the cloth around the 
bucket; but the reservoir, with its valve, 
causes the same quantity of water to last 
longer. It will be readily seen that more than 
one tube C can be attached to one recepticle 
A to cool two or more buckets by one reservoir 
and receptacle. The receptacle A can have a 
pipe E leading from its lower end, closed at 
its outer end, and having a number of per 
forated tubes C connected to it by T-couplings 
D, the entrance of water into each perforated 
tube C being controlled by a stop-cock a, so 
that any one or more of the tubes C can be 
used. The flexible tube C can be easily fitted 
around different sized vessels. 
My invention possesses this advantage over 
all coolers that work by capillary attraction, 
that the water will always flow freely through 
the perforated tubes C and run down the sack 
S, while in those coolers where the water is 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416523.txt	al 
(No Model.) 
J. H. WALDER. 
MATCH FRICTION SURFACE 
No. 416,523, 
Patented Dec. 3, 1889. 
A is 
A". 
| 
2. 
ea O 
is 
E 
l, 
-d SS (iii.Iti METMN NN 
SN-- eis N 
N 4 N 
R 
S. 
 
It is 
-----et-- ===== 
r 
S 
5 S 
s 
N N 
t 
reser 
-- 
P- 
'a 
- 
i is.' 
WITNESSES 
..y...w.. 
44ZZO M% 
ar-4-2 
eez1 
ATIORNEY. 
N. PETES, Photo-shographer, Washington, t), C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. WALDER, OF JERSEY CITY, NEWJERSEY. 
MATCH FRICTIONSURFACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,523, dated December 3, 1889. 
Application filed September 17, 1889, Serial No, 324,234, (No model) 
fine particles of phosphorus or other friction 
igniting material that are rubbed off the 
matches pass through the interstices between 
the Several strips A and drop down between 
the back of the friction-surface and the frame 
backing and can be removed from time to 
time. The friction-surface cannot become 
clogged by the accumulation of particles of 
the match-heads in the manner that sand 
paper, emery-paper, and the ridges produced 
On porcelain surfaces become clogged by rub 
bing matches over them. As the friction 
surface is composed of a series of parallel 
united strips which have greater or less elas 
ticity, the strips are vibrated by drawing the 
match-heads over them, and this vibration 
causes them to shake off the fine particles of 
phosphorus or igniting substances that have 
been rubbed off the match-heads. 
In case One side of my improved friction 
Surface is worn off, the united strips can 
readily be removed from the holder and re 
Versed and the other side used. 
I am aware that it is not broadly new to 
use friction-surfaces composed of a series of 
united parallel strips of metal, and do not 
claim the same as my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, Iclaim 
as new and desire to Secure by Letters Patent 
The combination, with a suitable holder 
having side grooves, of a removable friction 
surface composed of a series of metal strips 
placed side by side and having their ends 
embedded in solid metal strips, which strips 
are inserted in the grooves of the holder, and 
of end pieces for closing the frame or holder 
after the friction-surface has been inserted, 
Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
w 
JOHN H. WALDER. 
Witnesses: 
W. REIMHERR, 
MARTIN PETRY, 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN H. WALDER, of 
Jersey City, in the county of Hudson and State 
of New Jersey, a citizen of the United States, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Match Friction-Surfaces, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
new and improved friction-surface on which 
matches are to be rubbed for the purpose of 
igniting them. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts and details, as will 
be fully described hereinafter, and finally 
pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a face view of a match-holder provided with 
my improved friction-surface, parts being 
broken out. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal 
sectional view of the same. Fig. 3 is a face 
view of my improved match-striking surface 
in a frame. Fig. 4 is a cross-sectional view 
of the same on the line 4 4, Fig. 3. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The friction-surface is composed of a series 
of flat metal strips A, which are arranged 
side by side and a short distance from each 
other, the ends being secured and embedded 
in solid metal pieces B. This friction-sur 
face is inserted or passed into the grooves C 
in the raised side pieces of a board or frame 
D, and end pieces E, made of the same mate 
rial as the frame, are placed into the grooves 
at the ends of the friction-surface for the pur 
pose of holding the same in place. 
If desired, a match-safe E may be applied 
on the same frame that holds the friction 
surface, as shown, for example, in Figs. 1 
and 2. 
The metal strips or bars are arranged in the 
manner set forth and present a series of 
ridges offering considerable resistance to the 
match rubbed over the same, thereby causing 
sufficient friction to ignite the match. The 
d 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416623.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 416,623. 
J, G, HUDSON, 
SUGAR MILL 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
  
  
| 
  
ois 
III 
 
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 416,623. 
J. G. HUDSON. 
SUGAR MILL, 
-- 3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
co 
 
gases S 
sis Sigis. 
SSS 
SS 
s 
 
w 
a 
 
sia 
AS 7 
(No Model.) 
No. 416,623, 
 
J, G, HUDSON. 
SUGAR MILL, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Deo. 3, 1889. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
: 
JOHN GEORGE HUDSON, OF TRADESTON, COUNTIES OF LANARK AND 
RENFREW, SCOTLAND. 
SUGAR-MILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,623, dated December 3, 1889. 
Application filed June 4, 1889, Serial No. 313,053, (No model.) Patented in England September 28, 1887, No. 13,102, 
2O the claims. 
- 
I5 pressure on the upper roller of such mills. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN GEORGE HUDSON, 
engineer, a subject of the Queen of Great 
Britain, and a resident of Tradeston, in the 
5 counties of Lanark and Renfrew, Scotland, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Sugar-Mills, (for which I have 
obtained Letters Patent in Great Britain, No. 
13,102, bearing date of September 28, 1887.) 
Io of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
My invention, which relates to improve 
mentsin mills for expressingjuice from sugar 
cane, has for its object to obtain a yielding 
My improvement consists in the construc 
tion of yielding devices for the cap-pieces 
forming the upper bearings of the upper roll, 
as hereinafter described, and pointed out in 
In order that my invention may be fully un 
derstood, I will proceed to describe it with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, 
forming part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the first form 
of my invention, and Fig. 2 is an end view 
thereof. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of a modi 
fication, and Fig. 4 is an end view of the same. 
Fig. 5 is a side elevation of another modifica 
tion, and Fig. 6 is an end view of the same. 
Like letters of reference indicate the same 
parts throughout the several views. 
A. A represent strong holding-bolts passing 
through the whole machine and securely fast 
BB are cap-pieces, forming the upper bear 
ing of the upper roll O and capable of work 
ing vertically on the bolts AA, which pass 
through suitable perforations in said cap 
pieces. The cap-pieces BB have each a pair 
of grooves C. C. On their upper edge, forming 
seats for a pair of lower toggles C. (Shown 
clearly in Fig. 1 and by dottedlinesin Fig. 2.) 
Upon the upper part of bolts A a cross-piece 
45 D is carried and held in position thereon by 
screw-nuts E. These cross-pieces DD each 
have a pair of grooves c c, which form seats 
for the upper pairs of toggles F. 
G. G' are central cross-pieces, the position 
5o and operation of which will be described far 
35 ened to the foundation. 
ther on. The upper ends of the lower toggles 
Cand the lower ends of the uppertoggles Frest 
against and have bearing in suitable grooves 
formed on the upper and lower sides of the 
cross-pieces G. G', as clearly shown in Fig. 1. 55 
Through each of these cross-pieces G. G' two 
holes are formed, one on each side of their 
centers, as more particularly shown in Fig. 2, 
and through these holes the bolts Iand J pass, 
each bolt being retained by its head in one of 6o 
the cross-pieces, while its other end slides 
freely in the corresponding hole in the other 
cross-piege. The head of the bolt I is re 
tained by the cross-piece G', while the tailor 
body of the bolt passes freely through the 65 
cross-piece G, and correspondingly the head. 
of the bolt J is retained by the cross-piece G., 
while its tail or body passes freely through the 
cross-piece G'. The outer or free ends of these 
bolts I and J have screwed on them nuts N 7o 
for holding in place washers M, which wash 
ers form the seats of the outer ends of volute 
springs L. 
On the cross-pieces G. G' are cast disks K, 
forming seats for the inner and larger ends 75 
of volute springs L. From the afore-de 
scribed arrangement it will be readily seen 
that the pressure, between roll O and its com 
panion rolls can be regulated by screw-nuts . 
N, the springs Laffording a yielding pressure. 8o 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The substance to be crushed is fed in between 
roll O and its companion roll, which action 
will raise the roll O slightly, and consequently 
its sliding bearing B. As the bearing B 85 
rises it operates the toggles C and F, which 
pushes cross-pieces G. G. to one side against 
the action of springs L, said springs causing 
the several parts to resume their former or 
normal position when the mill has become 9o 
empty. The position of the springs and tog 
gles when the mill is in operation is shown 
in dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
In the second form or modification of my 
invention (illustrated in Figs. 3 and 4) the 95 
cross-pieces G and G' are dispensed with and 
the lower toggles C are formed with long up 
per ends P, which constitute levers against 
which the springs L act. The upper ends of 
levers P have cast thereon disks K, forming Too 
- 
25 
 
g 
46,638 
55 
seats for the larger ends of springs L, as in the 
first form described. The lower ends of tog 
gles C and the upper ends of toggles F have 
bearings in grooves. Ct. and c, respectively, as 
in Fig. 1. The central connection, however, 
between the two is somewhat different. The 
toggles C have shoulders formed on their in 
ner sides, upon which the lower ends of tog 
gles F rest. In this form bolts I and J are 
done away with or substituted by single bolts 
Q on each side passing through suitable per 
forations in the upper ends of parts P and 
guiding their motion. The springs are se 
cured on the bolts by means of washers and 
nuts, as before described, and the operation 
of the machine, which is apparent, is very. 
similar to that of the first form. 
In Figs. 5 and 6 I have illustrated another 
modification of my invention, differing, also, 
as the first two forms do, in the arrangement 
of the toggles. In this form each of the tog 
gles C and F is formed with levers R, each 
of which levers projects out horizontally, as 
shown clearly in Fig. 5. The outer ends of 
levers R are perforated, and through these 
perforations bolts U pass. The lower ends 
of these bolts U have caps or heads S, formed 
with knife-edges on their inner sides, which 
knife-edges rest in suitable grooves on the 
under side of the lower levers R. Disks K, 
having knife-edges on their under sides, are 
provided near the upper end of bolts U, 
forming the seats of springs L., which are 
held in place in the usual manner by nuts 
N. The knife-edges of these disks bear in 
suitable grooves on the upper side of the 
upper levers R. The toggles C and F have 
Suitable central bearings, the toggle C form 
ing a shoulder upon which the pivots of 
toggles F rest. The perforations through 
arms R must be of such size and shape to ad 
mit of their free movement from their normal 
position to that shown in dotted lines in Fig. 
5. This modification operates substantially 
as those already described. 
It is to be observed that in each of the 
modifications embodying my invention the 
action of the parts is such that at the time 
When the Springs are least compressed, and 
therefore exerting their least pressure, they 
are acting at the greatest mechanical advan 
tage or leverage, and vice versa. 
- 
- 
- 
Letters Patent: 
The compensating action described enables 
the graduated pressure of the springs to be 
converted into a uniform pressure on the 
roller, or as nearly so as may be desired, by 
the selection of springs of range and power 
suited to the proportions of the toggle-levers. 
If the springs are so proportioned as to give 
a uniform pressure on the roller, the effect 
will be identical with that of a hydraulic cyl 
inder as commonly applied; but by prefer 
ence I make the proportions such as to give 
a slowly-increasing pressure as the roll lifts. 
Having thus described my invention and 
the operation thereof, the following is what I 
claim as new therein and desire to Secure by 
1. The combination, with the upper roll and 
the holding-bolts, of the upper cap-pieces B 
B, working on the holding-bolts and forming 
the upper bearings of the upper roll, each 
cap-piece having a pair of grooves C. C.Which 
are located on opposite sides of the holding 
bolts, the cross-pieces DD, which are secured 
to the holding-bolts, each cross-piece having 
a pair of grooves cc, which are located on 
opposite sides of the holding-bolts, two pairs. 
of lower toggles C C, the toggles of each pair 
located on opposite sides of the holding-bolts, 
two pairs of upper toggles FF, the toggles of 
each pair located on opposite sides of the 
holding-bolts, and the spring-bolts supported 
on the toggles by which the latter are forced 
to normal position for holding down the cap 
pieces with yielding pressure, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a mill for crushing Sugar-cane and the 
like, the combination of sliding cap-pieces B, 
cross-pieces D, and central pieces G. G', with 
toggles C F, held between said parts, and 
springs L and rods I and J, said rods extend 
ing through both of said parts G. G', each being 
rigidly secured to one and freely adjustable 
in the other, substantially as herein explained. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
w 
JOHN GEORGE HUDSON. 
Witnesses: 
- 
JOHN LIDDEE, 
JOSEPH HENRY PEARSON, 
Both of 115 St. Vincent Street, Glasgow. 
75 
9 O 
95 
o 
15 
3o 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416723.txt	r 
C. L. EBERLE. 
LINK MOTION FOR ENGINEs. 
Patented DeC. 10, 1889. 
 
. 
(No Model.) 
No. 416,723, 
ZZZZZ 
(WFERWEAST 
ONNO 
3 W2 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
O-R- E. 
a 
H. 
. 
. 
A. 
hit "a 
( H. E 
  
  
 
 
SS N\, 
N 
3v-uo vitov 
6%ia -36.4% 
ci 
P 
sy/2 "24 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTIAN L. EBERLE, OF MOUNT JOY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
LINK-MOTON FOR ENGINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,723, dated December 10, 1889. 
Application filed May 31, 1889, Serial No. 312,754 (No model.) 
55 
To aid, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHRISTIAN L. EBERLE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in 
Mount Joy, in the county of Lancaster and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
ImprovementsinLink-Motions for Engines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to a new and useful 
improvement in link-motions for engines; 
and the object of the improvement is to 
change the motion of the valve by the use of 
a single eccentric. 
The improvement consists in the combina 
tion, with a single eccentric and the valve, of 
a reversing-bar and connections between the 
eccentric, the reversing-bar, and valve where 
by the motion of the latter may be reversed. 
In the accompanying drawings neither the 
cylinder nor the connections of the reversing 
lever are shown, as they do not affect the 
Working of my invention. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a link-motion embodying 
my invention, showing a portion of the steam 
chest and the valve and valve-seat in section. 
Fig. 2 is a top or plan view of the same, the 
steam-chest with its contents being removed. 
Fig. 3 is a side elevation, partly in section, 
showing the sliding block in adjustment for 
the backward movement of the engine. Fig. 
4 is a vertical transverse section on the line 
a: ac, Fig. 3; and Fig. 5 is a horizontal section 
On the line y ly, Fig. 3, showing the connec 
tion between the reversing-bar and link. 
Similarletters indicate like parts throughout 
the several views. 
AA represent the frame to which the link 
connection is attached. 
C is the driving-axle; a, the eccentric; b, the 
eccentric-strap, and B the eccentric-rod piv 
oted to the upper end of the reversing-bar D. 
The reversing-bar is pivoted to the frame at 
F, and is provided with vertical tongues don 
its edges. A sliding block E is connected 
with the reversing-bar by means of flanges or 
jaws e, formed on the edges of its inner face, 
provided with grooves which engage the 
tongues d. Projecting from the front of the 
sliding block there is a pinc, which passes 
through the slot g of the link G. This pin. 
supports a block H, pivoted thereon, which 
engages the sides of the slot in the link in 
- 
grooves h, cut in its edges. The reversing 
lever is connected with the end of the pin. 
extended beyond the face of the block H for 
that purpose. 
: The link G is straight and is made integral 
with or rigidly secured at the center of a 
link-bar I, working in a guide-block K, se 
cured to the frame A A. Between the link 
and the eccentric there is a cut-off lever J, 
pivoted to the link-bar, which extends up 
ward therefrom and is connected with the 
valve-rod N, as shown in the first three fig 
ures. There is a guide-rod Lrigidly fastened 
to the cut-off lever J, which extends back 
along the eccentric-rod B, in the end of 
which there is cut a groove k, that engages 
slots in a guide-blockM, pivoted to the eccen 
tric-rod at n. 
By the movement of the sliding block E 
from one side of the pivot F to the other on 
the reversing-bar the engine is reversed. In 
Fig. 1 is shown the position occupied by the 
sliding block when a forward motion is com 
municated to the engine through said block 
and the reversing-link, and in Fig. 3 the po 
sition occupied by it when the engine is to be 
moved backward. The cut-off in both in 
stances is also regulated by the movement of 
the sliding block, increasing or diminishing 
it by shifting the block between either end of 
the reversing-bar and its pivot. When for 
ward motion is transmitted to the engine, the 
eccentric-rod, link and link-bar, cut-off lever, 
and valve all move simultaneously in the 
same direction; but when the engine is re 
versed the link, link-bar, cut-off lever, and 
valve move in a direction opposite to that of 
the eccentric-rod. 
The action of my device is exceedingly 
simple and effective, and avoids the use of a 
number of parts necessary when employing 
double eccentrics. 
It is evident that a number of changes in 
the position and construction of the several 
parts of my machine might be resorted to 
without departing from the spirit and scope 
of my invention, and hence I would have it 
understood that I do not limit myself to the 
exact construction shown and described, but 
consider myself at liberty to make such 
changes and alterations as fairly fall within 
the spirit and scope of my invention. 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
416,723 
link and adapted to be moved from one side 
of the pivot of the reversing-bar to the other, 
and a connection between the link and valve, 
substantially as specified. 
5. The combination, with the reversing-bar, 
of a link rigidly secured to a sliding link-bar, 
a sliding block engaged with the reversing 
bar and link, and a cut-off lever connecting 
the link-bar and valve-rod, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
6. The combination, with the reversing-bar, 
the sliding block, and the linkrigidly secured 
to the sliding link-bar, of the cut-off lever 
connecting the link-bar and valve, and a 
guide-rod rigidly fastened to the cut-off lever 
and having a reciprocating motion on its con 
nection with the eccentric-rod, substantially 
as specified. 
- 
25 
35 
CHERISTIAN X L. EBERLE. 
his 
mark 
Witnesses: 
GEO. A. LANE, 
WM. R. GERHART. 
IO 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a single eccentric, 
of a reversing-bar and valve and connections 
between the eccentric, the reversing-bar, and 
valve whereby the movement of the latter 
may be reversed. 
2. The combination, with a single eccentric, 
of a reversing-bar connected therewith, and 
a connection between the reversing-bar and 
valve adjustably engaged with the reversing 
bar, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with the reversing-bar 
having a single eccentric-rod connected there 
With, of a link, a sliding block connecting the 
reversing-bar and link, whereby the move 
ment of the latter may be reversed, and con 
nections between the link and valve, substan 
tially as specified. 
4. The combination, with a single eccentric 
connected with a reversing-bar, of the revers 
ing-bar pivoted at its center, a link, a sliding 
block engaged with the reversing-bar and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416823.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 416,823, 
222av.zz. 
 
D. BURNS, 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented Deo. 10, 1889 
(No Model.) 
No. 416,823, 
D. BURNS, 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Deo, 10, 1889. 
 
is 
2/2 
2.1% 
- (2). 
 
 
 
 
  
33xe 
O). 
SS SS 
 
 
  
   
  
al H. N. 
S. 
2 ANN 
22222 &e 222 Z 
N 
 
 
FY a 
Zzesz. 
Azvezzor 
N. PETERS Photo-Lithographer. washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID BURNS, OF MUSKEGON, MICHIGAN. 
STEAM ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,823, dated December 10, 1889. 
Application filed March 20, 1889, 
O 
. To att, uhon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID BURNS, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Muskegon, 
in the county of Muskegon and State of Michi 
gan, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Steam-Engines, of which the 
following is such a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which illustrate the construc 
tion and arrangement of the different parts. 
The general features and purposes of this 
invention are to furnish a perfect cushion for 
the piston at both ends of its stroke, which is 
accomplished by closing the exhaust-port be 
fore the piston reachs the end of the cylin 
der, thus inclosing a portion of the exhaust 
Steam, which is compressed by the continued 
movement of the piston. To produce this re 
sult, the cylinder is provided with separate 
and distinct passages for the transmission of 
live and exhaust steam from its interior to 
and from the steam-chest, the passages for 
live steam terminating in the usual manner 
in close contiguity with the cylinder-heads, 
While the exhaust-passages open into the in 
terior of the cylinder at a distance of more 
than the thickness of the piston from said 
heads. Thus when the piston in its recipro 
cations reaches said openings they are closed 
by it and further escape of steam from that 
end of the cylinder prevented. As the valve 
which admits steam must be in position to 
admit live steam instantly upon the piston 
reaching the end of its stroke, it becomes nec 
essary to close the exhaust- opening at the 
end receiving steam. This is accomplished 
by the movement of the valve in the steam 
chest, said valve being provided with four 
separate and distinct ports, the two nearest 
the middle being for the exhaust-one for 
each end of the cylinder-and the end ports 
controlling the admission of live steam. By 
this construction of valve and the two sepa 
rate ports and passages for each end of the 
cylinder the movements of the valve are made 
to fully control the admission and exit of 
steam from said cylinder. 
In the drawings, in which similar letters of 
reference indicate like parts in the different 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
. 
Serial No. 304,005, (No model.) 
figures, Figure 1 is a side elevation of a cylin 
der and steam-chest constructed in accord 
ance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal section through the cylinder, steam 
chest, and valves, showing the relative posi 
tions of the different parts and passages in 
the same. Fig. 3 is a vertical transverse Sec 
tion on line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a similar 
section on line y 21, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a plan 
with the position of the several ports and 
passages indicated by dotted lines; and Fig. 
6 is a section of valve and chest, showing the 
valve in another position. 
In the figures, A represents the steam-cyl 
inder, and B the piston which reciprocates 
within said cylinder, 
a, a represent the passages through the cyl 
inder which conduct live steam from the 
steam-chest C, and a' a? the exhaust-passages, 
through which the steam makes its exit. As 
will be observed, these passages run parallel . 
and are formed in the usual way by cores in 
serted in the mold when the cylinder is cast. 
As heretofore stated, the live-steam passages 75 . 
a, a enter the cylinder in close proximity to 
the heads A" of the same, the exhaust-pas 
sages a? a? opening at a certain distance, 
which distance may be varied as it is desired 
to give more or less cushioning to the piston, 
as the greater the distance from the head to 
the opening the larger will be the amount of 
steam inclosed between the cylinder-head and 
piston and consequent resistance to the move 
ment of the same. The valve D, by which 
the movement of the piston is controlled, is 
preferably of the cylindrical or piston variety, 
and is inclosed within the cylindrical chamber 
of the steam-chest C, which steam-chest is 
provided with an opening b, through which 
live steam enters the chest, and with another 
opening l', through which the exhaust-steam 
escapes. 
provided with four encir 
cling grooves, two of which c c form the open 
ings orports through which live steam enters 
the passages at a, leading to the cylinder, and 
the grooves c' c' those through which the ex 
haust-steam escapes to the exit-opening b'. 
With the exception of these grooves turned 
in its periphery, the valve is a plain cylinder 
of equal diameter from end to end, having a 
The valve D is 
95 
. 
CO 
416,828 
O 
Smooth outer surface that fits snugly the 
bored chamber of the steam-chest from One 
port or groove to another, but not so tightly 
as to prevent its ready reciprocation by neans 
- of an eccentric and the valve-rod D. 
The operation of the mechanism is plainly 
illustrated in Fig. 2 of the drawings, in which 
the piston is shown as having passed the ex 
haust-opening at one end of the cylinder, and 
consequently compressing the steam between 
it and the cylinder-head. The valve is also 
nearly in position to admit steam to this end 
for the purpose of reversing the movement of 
the piston, the exhaust-passage at this end 
being closed and that at the opposite end of 
the cylinder opened to allow the escape of 
steam from before the returning piston. 
It will be apparent that the construction of 
the other portions of the engine may be of 
any of the many kinds in use, and does not, 
therefore, need a description in detail; and, 
further, that the details of construction in the 
parts above fully described may be varied in 
many ways without departing from the spirit 
of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
the following: 
35 
1. As all improvement in steam-cylinders, 
the cylinder provided at each end with a sepa 
rate steam and exhaust port, the steam-port 
being situated at the extreme end of the cyl 
inder and the exhaust-port at a distance of 
about the thickness of the portion from it, in 
combination with a four-ported circular valve 
adapted to close one of the exhaust-passages 
and prevent the escape of live steam until 
the piston shall have reached the end of the 
stroke, substantially as shown and described. 
2. As an improvement in steam-cylinders, 
the combination of a steam-cylinder provided 
with two exhaust and two steam passages, all 
ending at different points in the length of said 
cylinder, with the cylindrical steam-chest and . 
valve having four encircling grooves or ports 
45 
moving in said steam-chest, all arranged and 
operating substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
DAVID BURNS. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS IIUME, 
MIARTIN T)OWD. 
2 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US416923.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 416,923, 
T. M. KENNEY. 
... 
. 
CASH CARRIER, 
Patented Deo, 10, 1889, 
 
 
 
 
 
f 
 
NS 
s 
 
Es E 
eL - 
 
S. 
S 
 
 
i. 
AS 
sy s HIT T. 
Sof 
AM72-e S5 es, 
7/7, 
 
Zzz-zezz-A67; 
722. -1.66%, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS M. KENNEY, OF CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
AMERICAN STORE SERVICE COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CASH-CARRIER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 416,923, dated December 10, 1889. 
Application filed April 30, 1887, Serial No. 236,621 (No model.) 
55 
75 
2b all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS M. KENNEY, 
of Cambridge, county of Middlesex, State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
inent in Cash-Carriers, of which the follow 
ing description, in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification, like let 
ters on the drawings representing like parts. 
Riy invention relates to an apparatus for 
conveying cash or small articles back and 
forth between different stations-as, for ex 
ample, between the counters and the cash 
ier's desk of a store. 
My invention is embodied in an apparatus 
of that kind in which the carrier travels 
along a track which may consist of a stretched 
wire; and the invention relates especially to 
the means for propelling the carrier along 
the said track by giving it an impulse at the 
station at either end of the track sufficient 
to carry it across to the other station. 
The invention consists in novel combina 
tions of devices hereinafter specified. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a portion of 
a cash-carrier apparatus embodying this in 
vention, portions being broken away and 
shown in section; Fig. 2, a plan view of a 
portion of the device, and Figs. 3 and 4 sec 
tional details on a larger scale. 
The track a, and carrier b may be mainly 
of the usual construction, said track being 
shown as a wire stretched tightly between 
the points or stations between which the car 
rier is to travel, and the said carrier consists, 
essentially, of a receptacle c, connected by 
suitable frame-work with wheels d, that run 
on the said track. 
At the terminal stations propelling devices 
are provided, the mechanism of which is 
shown as supported on a brackete, supported 
in proper position with relation to the track 
a, as by a rode', connected with the ceiling 
or other suitable frame-Work overhead, the 
said track C. passing through said bracket, 
which may have a tube e fastened to it to 
give a considerable bearing on the track. At 
a short distance below the track a tube f is 
fastened upon the said bracket e, projecting 
therefrom in a direction parallel with the 
track. The said tube is split along its under 
side, as shown at f', and contains two heads 
or plungers gh, that are fitted to slide easily 
in the said tube. 
The plunger g is provided with a projec 
tion g', that projects out from the slit fin the 
tube, and is preferably provided with a cush 
ion g, of rubber or other yielding material. 
The said plunger g is acted upon by the 
stout spring i, connected with the forward 
end of the tube and tending to draw the said 
plunger toward the forward end of the tube. 
The said spring i may be a spiral wire spring, 
and preferably has a core of rubber drawn 
into it, as shown in Fig. 4, so as to form a 
somewhat yielding cushion for the forward 
movement of the plunger g when suddenly 
drawn forward from the rear end of the tube. 
The said plunger g, with its projection g 
and actuating-spring i, constitutes the car 
rier-propelling device. The plunger his also 
provided with a projection h, extending out 
from the slit f' of the tube and having piv 
oted to it a pair of hooks k, which, when the 
said plunger h is next to the plunger g, as 
shown in Fig. 1, receive the projection g be 
tween them and have their engaging-shoul 
ders a short distance in front of the said pro 
jection g', as shown. A light spring m tends 
to force the plunger h toward the forward end 
of the tube and retain it in contact with the 
plunger g. A cord or actuating device n is 
connected with the hooks k and extends over 
a pulley n, pivoted in the lower end of the 
bracket e, the said cord in being provided 
with a suitable handle nwithin reach of the 
Operator. 
The frame of the carrier comprises a mem 
ber c', supported on an arch or yokec, which 
extends over the tube f and is connected 
with the wheels d above the said tube and 
with the member c' below the tube, said 
member c' being at the level of the ends of 
the hooks lic and provided with lateral pro 
jections c, which, as the carrier comes into 
the station, strike the beveled ends of the 
hooks Fe, and, passing over them, are en 
gaged by the said hooks, as shown in Fig. 1, 
the carrier being arrested by the cushioned 
projection g from the plunger g, the spring 
of which yields as the carrier comes in, so as 
to arrest the carrier without too great shock. 
When the carrier is to be sent along the 
95 
OO 
C 
3. 
3 5 
48 
45 
 
2 
416,923 
45 
55 
device. 
- 
track to the other station, the operator pulls or usual manner, as the special construction of 
on the handle n, which draws the hooks k. 
the carrier forms no part of the present in 
backward, and the said hooks constitute a 
vention except in the particulars required 
carrier-engaging device, which in turn draws 
for its proper co-operation with the propelling 
the carrier, and the latter pushes the plunger 
g with it, straining the spring i. When the 
The tube fis merely a guide and support 
said spring is strained sufficiently to give 
for the plungers g h and their actuating 
the proper force to send the carrier the re 
springs, and it is obvious that any other suit 
quired distance, the hooks or engaging device 
able guide might be used, although the tube 
lc is disengaged from the projections c of the 
is especially desirable, as it affords protection 
carrier, thus releasing the same and permit 
for the parts from accidental derangement 
ting the spring to act upon it through the in 
as well as from access of dust or dirt. 
tervention of the plungerg and projection g. 
The hooks care thus disengaged at the proper 
time by a disengaging device O, shown as con 
sisting of two inclined arms connected with 
a collar O', fastened at the proper point on the 
tube f by a suitable clamping device or set 
screw o. The said inclined arms o engage 
pins lic, projecting from the hooks k, as the 
latter are drawn back by the cord in, thus 
pressing the hook downward out of engage 
ment with the projections c of the carrier and 
releasing the latter, which is immediately 
shot forward by the action of the spring i. As 
soon as the operator relieves the pressure on 
the handle in the spring in carries the plun 
ger h forward to the plunger g, thus placing 
the hooks k in proper position to engage with 
the carrier upon its return from the other 
Station. 
. The receptacle C may be fastened to the 
carrier in any suitable manner, being detach 
able for the purpose of removing or changing 
its contents, or it may remain connected with 
the carrier but be arranged to open or be 
drawn down from the carrier in any suitable 
I claim 
1. The combination, with the track, of the 
guide - tube substantially parallel with the 
said track and provided with a longitudinal 
slit, a plunger and spring connected there with 
inclosed in said tube, said plunger being pro 
vided with a carrier-engaging projection ex 
tending out through the slit in said tube, and 
a second plunger in said tube and connected 
carrier-engaging hooks, and means for mov 
ing the latter along said tube, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the track and slitted 
guide-tube with the plunger g and connected 
actuated spring i, and the plunger h and act 
uating-spring therefor, and the carrier-en 
gaging hooks k, connected with the said plun 
ger hand operated substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
JOS. P. LIVERMORE, 
JAS. J. MALONEY. 
THOMAS M. KENNEY. 
Witnesses: 
: 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417023.txt	(No Model,) 
F. G. GROVE, 
No. 417,023, 
Patented Deo. 10, 1889. 
 
Z2 27 
 
essor 
77 
%go 
ATTORNEYS. 
m 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK G. GROVE, OF LURAY, VIRGINIA. 
LINK - LIFTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 417,023, dated December 10, 1889. 
Application filed October 1, 1889, Serial No. 325,665, (No model.) 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK G. GROVE, of 
Luray, in the county of Page and State of 
Virginia, have invented a new and useful 
Link-Lifter, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to a device for lifting 
and manipulating the coupling-links of rail 
road-cars, and has for its object to provide a 
simple and economic device capable of being 
folded up and carried in the pocket, and by 
means of which a coupling-link may be ele 
Vated or otherwise moved to enter an opposed 
draw-head without necessitating the operator 
Standing or going between the cars. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims, 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters and figures of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the device 
folded out for use. Fig. 2 is a central longi 
tudinal section through the same. Fig. 3 is a 
side elevation of the device when folded up, 
and Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the device 
folded out and in position for use. 
The device is constructed of a series of bar 
like sections, preferably three in number 
namely, an intermediate section 10, a grip 
section II, and a handle-section 12. The in 
termediate section 10 is constructed of two 
parallel side pieces a, and a', held a slight dis 
tance apart by a central projection 13, form 
ing an integral portion of a spring 14, which 
spring constitutes the back of said section. 
The ends of the side pieces or plates C. and a 
of the central section are preferably curved 
upward, and the spring 14 is of such length 
as to extend practically from end to end of 
the section. The spring is attached at one 
point only and by means of a rivet 15, passed 
through the center of the side pieces or plates 
a, and a? and the central spring projection 13, 
as best shown in Fig. 2. 
The grip-section 11 comprises a shank 16, 
having an outer forked or bifurcated extrem: 
ity 17, The inner end of the shank 16 is up 
turned and provided with a shoulder 18 in the 
under side of the upturned end, the said end 
being pivoted between the members of one 
extremity of the central section 10. 
The handle-section 12 comprises a shank 19, 
formed at its outer extremity with a head 20, 
the said head being preferably made to ex 
tend at a right angle beyond each side of the 
shank, whereby said shank presents, essen 
tially, the appearance of the letter T. The 
inner end of the shank is upturned and pro 
vided with a shoulder 21, corresponding with 
the shoulder 18 of the grip-section, and the 
shouldered upturned end of the handle-sec 
tion is pivoted in the extremity of the inter 
mediate section 10 opposite to that connected 
with the grip-section. The shoulders 18 and 
21 of the outer sections of the device bear 
against the respective ends of the spring 14, 
and the said spring 14 acts upon the shoulders 
of the outer sections in similar manner to the 
action of the spring of a knife-handle upon 
its blades. 
By means of the arrangement above de 
scribed it is evident that when the sections 
are opened out in a horizontal plane, which is 
the position for use, they will be held essen 
tially in a rigid position, and that each outer 
section is capable of being folded over upon 
the intermediate section, as illustrated in Fig. 
3, in which the grip-section is first folded over, 
contacting with the intermediate section, and 
the handle-section is folded down upon the 
grip-section. The folding of the sections so 
reduces the length of the device that the op 
erator may conveniently carry the said device 
in his pocket, 
When the device is folded up for use and 
cal's are to be coupled-for instance, cars hav 
ing draw - heads of different heights-the 
forked end 17 of the grip-section is made to 
contact with the link, as shown in Fig. 4, and 
the device is slightly turned or twisted, there 
by obtaining a firm hold upon the link, where 
upon the operator, standing a considerable 
distance from the draw-head, may expedi 
tiously and most conveniently elevate, de 
press, or otherwise manipulate the link, as oc 
casion may demand. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
o 
75 
So 
95 
4.17,023 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a link-lifter consisting of a central section 
having a spring secured thereto, a grip-sec 
tion pivoted in one end of the central section 
and contacting with the spring, and a handle 
section pivoted in the opposite end of the cen 
tral section, also contacting with the spring, 
substantially as shown and described, where 
by the said sections may be arranged in a 
horizontal plane or folded one upon the other, 
as and for the purpose specified. 
2. In a link-lifter, the combination, with a 
central section having a spring secured in one 
longitudinal edge, of a grip-section comprising 
a shank having a bifurcated or forked outer 
TO 
end and a shouldered inner end, said inner end 
being pivoted in one extremity of the central 
section, and a handle-section comprising a 
shank shouldered at one extremity and piv 
oted in the opposite extremity of the central 
section, the said handle-section being pro 
vided with an offset at its outer end, and the 
Said shoulders of both the handle and grip 
sections being made to contact with the ends 
of the said spring, substantially as shown and 25 
described. 
- 
FRANK G. GROVE. 
Witnesses: 
E. T. BOOTON, 
C. T. HOLTZMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417123.txt	(No Model,) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
W., WOGEL. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR. UTILIZING EXPLOSIVE ENERGY, 
No. 417,123, 
Patented DeC, l0, 1889, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
is) 
ls i. 
 
 
N, PETERs. Photo-tilhographor, washington, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. WOGEL. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR. UTILIZING EXPLOSIVE ENERGY. 
Patented Dec. 10, 1889. 
No. 4.17,123, 
protec 
es 4 
N, PEERS, Photo-ithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM VOGEL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING EXPLOSIVE ENERGY, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 417,123, dated December 10, 1889. 
Application filed March 28, 1887, Renewed July 31, 1889, Serial No, 819,259, (No model.) 
To all thon, it inctly concer'7. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM WOGEL, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Methods of and Appa 
ratus for Utilizing Explosive Energy; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to a novel method 
of and means for employing in a useful lina n 
ner the energy exerted by the explosion of ni 
tro-glycerine or other explosive compounds 
as, for instance, for expelling a projectile from 
a gun or for giving motion to machinery. 
The invention consists in the matters here 
inafter described, and pointed out in the ap 
pended claims. 
The method embraced in my invention con 
sists in mixing together the ingredients con 
stituting the explosive at the point at which 
the explosive force of the compound is to be 
applied and causing the explosion of Said 
compound after the ingredients are mixed. 
By this process all danger of premature ex 
plosion is avoided, and the explosive com 
pound can be safely produced and used in 
any desired quantity by the employment of 
suitable mechanical devices for bringing to 
gether and mixing the ingredients and for 
exploding the same after they are mixed. 
I have herein shown an apparatus for car 
rying out the process above described, where 
in the explosive force of the compound is en 
ployed as a means of storing power for use 
in operating machinery. Such machine or ap 
paratus also embodies certain novel devices 
for mixing the ingredients constituting the 
explosive within an explosion-chamber and 
for translating the energy produced by the 
explosion into a form in which it can be con 
veniently and economically applied as a mo 
In carrying out the process constituting my 
invention I preferably employ force-pumps for 
separately conducting into and delivering 
into an explosion-chamber the liquiding re 
dients composing the compound in proper 
proportions, together with suitable means for 
tOr. 
M 
O 
25 
45 
 
mixing the said ingredients and for causing 
explosion at a desired time. In case the ex 
plosion-chamber is the chamber of a gun, the 
explosive will act directly to expel the pro- 55 
jectile therefrom. In case the explosion 
chamber forms part of a motor, the parts will 
preferably be so arranged that the expanding 
gases will act upon a movable plunger or pis 
ton connected with devices for compressing 6o 
air or for otherwise storing the energy ex 
erted by the expansion of the gases occurring 
at the time of the explosion. 
I have herein shown as illustrating my in 
vention a motor of the kind above referred 65 
to, in which the motion of a piston or plunger 
which is subjected to the action of the explo 
sive is transmitted to a piston which moves 
in an air-compressing cylinder connected 
with an air-reservoir, wherein the air com- 7o 
pressed by the apparatus is stored for use in 
an engine adapted to be driven by compressed 
The construction of the apparatus may be 
air. 
. ; 
. 
more readily understood by reference to the 75 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central axial Section taken 
upon a vertical plane of an apparatus em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a cross-sec 
tion of the same, taken upon line acac of Fig. 8o 
1. 
Fig. 3 is another cross-section of the same, 
taken upon line if y of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is still 
another cross-section, taken upon line 2, 2 of 
Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is a detail cross-section some 
what enlarged, taken upon line at ac of Fig. 4. 85 
Fig. 6 is a detail section taken upon line at a 
of Fig. 5. 
As shown in the Said drawings, A A are 
massive metal blocks, each of which is pro 
vided with a central cylindric chambera, and 9o 
within which the explosion of the nitro-glyc 
erine or other compound takes place, the 
said blocks AA being generally similar to the 
breech of a cannon, and being preferably 
made of steel or other metal used in the man- 95 
ufacture of cannon, and of sufficient strength 
to withstand the force of the explosions tak 
ing place within them. The chambered blocks 
A. A. are arranged with the cylindric cham 
bers C C, in alignment with each other, and Ioo 
said blocks are strongly attached together, 
the means of attachment herein shown con 
4.17,123 
75 
- 
sisting of heavy flanges (t' (', placed and se 
cured together by strong bolts or otherwise. 
In the ends of the said blocks A A which are 
adjacent to each other areformed two cylindric 
recesses considerably larger than the cham 
bers at a. and communicating with the latter, 
said recesses together forming a single cylin 
dric chamber B. 
CC are two solid pistons or plunger's fitted 
to slide within the chambers a C and rigidly 
attached at their outer ends to each other 
and to a single piston C, which fits the cyl 
inder B, said piston Cbeing, as herein shown, 
attached to or formed upon the said plungers 
C C. 
The cylinder Band piston C" constitute the 
air-pumping device of an air-compressing. 
machine, said cylinder being provided at its 
opposite ends with valved air-inlet openings 
b land exit-openings b b', the construction 
of which will be hereinafter more fully set 
forth. 
The chambers C. C. are provided at their in 
ner ends with depressions or shallow basins 
a'a, adapted to receive the ingredients com 
posing the explosive. 
D D'are Small apertures or passages lead 
ing from the inner ends of the chambers out 
Wardly through the blocks A A and commu 
nicating at their outer ends with two small 
force-pumps E. E. 
The force-pump E is connected by means 
of a pipe e with a tank or receptacle E, con 
taining. One of the fluid constituents of the 
explosive-as, for instance, in the case of a 
nitro-glycerine compound it will contain an 
admixture of nitric and sulphuric acid. The 
pump E is similarly connected by pipese' 
with a tank E, containing anotheringredient, 
which in the instance mentioned will be glyc 
erine. The pumps E E may be actuated by 
any desired or preferred form of driving 
mechanism in such manner as to deliver to 
the basins Ct. a. at the same moment of time 
definite quantities of the fluids from the 
tanks to which they are connected. The 
fluids may be delivered to the explosion 
chamber in the proper proportions for pro 
ducing the explosive either by making the 
pumps of different sizes or by so construct 
ing the driving devices that the pump-pis 
tons will be given longer or shorter strokes, 
as necessary for the purpose. 
I have herein illustrated one of the many 
devices by which the stroke of the piston of 
each pump may be exactly regulated, so that 
the relative quantity of fluid delivered by 
the two pumps may be changed as may be 
necessary for the purpose of exact adjustment 
or for delivering different quantities of the 
ingredients in case a change in the relative 
proportions of the same is required. Said 
device is in the nature of a link-motion-such 
as is used for actuating steam-engine valves 
and comprises a revolving driving-shaft F, 
provided with two eccentrics.ff". Two eccen 
tric-rods F F are connected at their ends 
with a slotted bar or link F, with which the 
piston-rode of the pump has sliding connec 
tion. For moving the link F the latter may 
be conveniently connected with a hand-lever 
F, herein shown as provided with a spring 
detent engaging a notched segment F, where 
by the link may be placed and held in position 
to cause the delivery of a desired quantity of 
fluid at each stroke of the pump-piston, which 
quantity may be conveniently indicated by a 
scale marked upon the segment F. In the 
particular construction illustrated the lever 
F is shown as connected with the link F by 
means of two connecting-rods f* f and an 
interposed bell-crank lever f. The same 
driving-gear described will be applied to each 
of the four pumps E. E. E. E. belonging to the 
apparatus. 
As a convenient means for forming the 
passages DD", leading from the pumps EE 
to the explosion - chambers C, said passages 
are formed in two separate metal bars D'D', 
Figs. 1, 4, 5, and 6, said bars belonging to 9 
each block F being fitted in a single recess 
a, leading inwardly through the side of the 
block Ato and past the rear Wall of the cham 
ber C. When the parts D* D are in place, 
they completely fill the opening a and form 
the end wall of the said chamber (t, said bars 
being extended past the said end wall in the 
manner shown, so that the pressure caused 
by the explosion will come sidewise upon the 
bars, and thereby tend to press them against 
the opposing solid metal of the block, instead 
of being extended endwise thereonin a man 
ner to tend to force the said bars outwardly 
from their places. 
In the particular construction herein shown 
the bars DD are made of such shape that 
when placed together their inner and outer 
surfaces are semi-cylindric, as clearly shown. 
in Fig. 5, the bars being made of this shape 
in order that they may correspond with the 
circular form preferably given to the recep 
tacle at at the inner end of the explosion 
chamber. To cause the fluid ingredients de 
livered through the passages DD' to ?low down 
wardly into and impinge against the bottom 
of the recess a, the said passages D D are 
preferably downwardly inclined at their part 
adjacent to the point of exit of the fluids, as 
clearly indicated in Fig. 6. To prevent cor 
rosion of the metal of the part within which 
the passage. D or D', carrying the acid, is 
formed, said passage will preferably be lined 
with a non-metallic substance-such, for in 
stance, as a vitrified coating of or containing 
silica or glass. 
The fluid ingredients forced or delivered 
into the bottom of the chamber Ct' by the ac 
tion of the pumps and passages in the man 
ner described will be mixed to a greater or 
less extent, and probably to such an extent 
that the compound will be in condition to 
explode upon the application of fire thereto 
or by a concussive action. I have, however, 
herein shown a device for mixing the in 
p 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
IO 
3O 
35 
SO 
55 
- 
4.17,128 
3. 
gredients and at the same time igniting the 
same, comprising means for causing to im 
pinge obliquely upon them a series of air 
jets, together with means for bringing a flame 
into contact with the explosive for the pur 
pose of igniting the same. 
For these pur 
poses the apparatus shown is 
constructed as 
follows: 
G is a small air-inlet opening or passage 
extending through the metal block A into 
the explosion-chamber a, and provided with 
a series of branch passages g g g, which en 
ter the basin or recess Ct at a downward in 
clination and tangentially with reference to 
the cylindric walls of said recess in such 
manner that the jets of air forced through 
Said branch passages will operate with a ro 
tative action upon the fluid delivered to the 
said recess Ct. A suitable air-current is in 
duced through the passages G. g g at the 
proper time-namely, after the fluid ingre 
dients have been forced into the said recess 
(t by the action of the pump by means of an 
air-passage G', extending outwardly from the 
chamber a, and communicating with an air 
pump or cylinder G', whereby the air may be 
forcibly exhausted through said passage G' 
and an inflow of air through the passages 
Gg thereby produced. Any suitable actuat 
ing devices may be applied to actuate the 
air-pump G* at the proper time to produce 
the result stated, the illustration of any spe 
cial devices for this purpose being thought 
unnecessary. 
For the purpose of igniting the explosive 
at the moment it is mixed preferably place 
a lamp or other means giving a flame oppo 
site the outer end of the passage G, as indi 
cated, for instance, at G', so that as the air 
is drawn forcibly into the chamber a for mix 
ing the ingredients in the manner described 
the flame will be drawn through the said pas 
sage and will impinge upon and ignite the 
explosive. The use of an igniting-flame is 
not, however, essential, inasmuch as the pow 
erful explosives--such as nitro-glycerine 
can be exploded by percussive action-such, 
for instance, as would be afforded by the con 
tact of one of the plungers C C in the machine 
shown with an opposing surface of the recess 
Ct as said plunger is thrown forcibly inward 
by the explosion in the opposite cylinder. 
When the device is provided with separate 
metal bars D D, containing the inlet-pas 
sages for the fluidingredients of the explosive, 
as herein shown and above described, the 
branch passages g g are perfectly formed 
within the said bars D D, as clearly shown 
in Figs. 5 and 6, the said passages g g being 
bored obliquely through the bars and ar 
ranged to enter a recess or grooveg', extending 
around the outer curved surfaces of the bars, 
So as to form when the bars are in place a 
semicircular passage communicating with 
all of said branches g g, and also with the 
main passage G, which in this case is bored 
through the metal block in such position as 
to come opposite the said curve g'at its inner 
ends. 
O Oare passages leading from the recesses or 
explosion-chambers a C outwardly to the open 
air, said passages O Obeing arranged to com 
municate with the said recesses at a near their 
ends remote from the point at which the in 
gredients are delivered, so that they are cov 
ered by the plungers C C, except when the lat 
ter are at the extreme limit of their outward 
movement. The purpose of such passages O 
O is to enable the gases generated by the ex 
plosion to promptly escape from the recesses 
Ct. a. at the moment that the plungers have 
reached the outward limit of their movement. 
In the particular construction illustrated the 
passages O O are connected by means of tubes 
O O with annular tubes or pipes O' O', sur 
rounding the apparatus, the said pipes O'O' 
being connected by flues O' O with a main 
exit-duct O', which conveys the smoke and 
gases resulting from the explosions to the 
open air at a point at which their presence 
will be unobjectionable. 
In the operation of the apparatus described 
the devices actuating the fluid delivering and 
mixing devices are so arranged that the de 
livery of the ingredients to the chambers and 
their explosion therein take place in alterna 
tion in the two chambers, so that the plungers 
CC and the air-piston C" are thrown alter 
nately backward and forward. Each plunger 
C is thus returned into position for another 
explosion by the action of the explosive in 
the opposite explosion - chamber upon the 
opposite plunger, and the action of the 
apparatus will thus be automatic and con 
tinuous as long as the fluid ingredients are 
injected, mixed, and exploded first in one 
and then the other explosion-chamber in the 
manner before stated. Inasmuch as the air 
cylinder B is provided with air inlet and exit 
openings at both ends, the piston C will act 
to draw inwardly, therefore, into the storage 
chamber an equal quantity of air at such 
movement of the plungers C C, so that the air 
is being continually compressed or stored in 
the storage-tank during the operation of the 
apparatus. 
The features of construction above de 
scribed constitute the main or operative parts 
of the apparatus; but I have herein shown an 
apparatus as provided with certain adjunct 
ive parts for keeping cool the metal blocks. A 
A, notwithstanding the heat generated by ex 
plosions therein, and for other purposes, as 
will hereinafter appear. 
H H in the drawings indicate strong iron 
cylinders placed around the metal blocks A 
A and provided with heads H' H', which are 
shown as extending outside of and covering 
said blocks AA, said cylinders being united 
at the middle of the apparatus by flanges h. 
h. The cylinders II H are somewhat longer. 
than the blocks AA, so as to form annular 
95 
ICO 
I o5 
TO 
15 
I 25 
O 
25 
45 
55 
65 
O 
25 
35 
45 
41?,123 
lar castings B, within which castings are 
formed conical seats for valves blo. Said 
valves are provided with stems ly, which are 
acted on by springs ly, located in tubular 
castings B B, which are bolted to the surface 
of the outer shell or cylinder J. Each cham 
ber K is, as shown, connected by a pipe with 
the air-chamber L, in which the air is stored 
under pressure, and which may be con 
ducted by suitable pipe or pipes to an adja 
cent engine or motor or to one located at a 
distance, it being entirely obvious that the 
compressed air may be employed for supply 
ing from a central station or plant a number 
of independent motors located at points at a 
greater or less distance therefrom. I have 
shown a pipe L as leading from the storage 
chamber to the cylinder M, belonging to a 
motor using compressed air. The air deliv 
ered to the chamber L will of course carry 
with it the ammonia taken from the tank I, 
and this ammonia will preferably, for eco 
nomic reasons, be collected by passing the 
compressed air through water, either before 
or after the air is used in the motor. I have 
herein shown a tank N as connected with the 
exhaust-pipe M' and the cylinder M of the 
motor as employed for this purpose. 
I consider the process or method of em 
ploying high explosives which consists in 
bringing the ingredients thereof together at 
the point of explosion and there exploding 
the mixture to be new, and such process or 
method is herein broadly claimed, as is also 
a device or apparatus containing the parts 
necessary to the carrying out of said process 
or method. Claims are also herein made cov 
ering the air-compressing devices as a means 
of storing the energy produced by the explo 
sion and various details of construction in 
the particular apparatus illustrated. 
4. 
spaces or chambers II, surrounding said 
blocks AA, as clearly shown in the drawings, 
Fig. 1. 
J J are other strong metal cylinder's like 
the cylinders H H and surrounding the lat 
ter, with spaces between them, forming cham 
bers R. Said cylinders J J are provided with 
closed heads J J', extending outside of the 
heads H of the cylinders II. Between the 
cylinders H and the blocks AA are preferably 
placed a series of heavy metal rings H* H', 
and between the cylinder Hand the cylinder J 
are placed similar heavy rings JJ, said rings 
H? and J serving to hold the said cylinders 
concentric with the inner metal blocks AA, 
at the same time operating to re-enforce the 
said metal blocks and to form braces or con 
nections between the said cylinders H and J 
and the central block, so that said cylinders 
also serve to re-enforce the blocks. The said 
rings H and J* are perforated or apertured, 
as shown, so as to give free communication be 
tween the parts of the chambers II and KK. 
The air-inlet openingst bare herein shown as 
consisting of spherical balls resting in conical 
seats. Theinlet-openings of the said valves b 
communicate with the spaces or chambers II, 
so that the air drawn into the said air-cylinder 
B is taken from said chambers, which latter 
may communicate with each other, as shown, 
or may be otherwise arranged, as found con 
venient or desirable. Inlet-pipes I.' I lead 
through the chambers KK into the chambers 
II for supplying air to the latter. Said pipes 
I' are connected with a tank I, which con 
tains liquid ammonia, and from which a quan 
tity of ammonia in its gaseous form is taken 
and drawn into the space or chambers II at 
each movement of the piston of the air-pump 
B. The ammonia-tank I is closed and is pro 
vided with an inlet-openingi, having a spring 
valve l', which remains normally closed, and 
I claim as my invention 
which is only opened to admit the influx of 
1. An apparatus for employing fluid explo 
sive compounds, comprising two or more sep 
air when the pressure within the tank is re 
duced sufficiently by the action of the pump 
arate ducts or passages for delivering at the 
point of explosion separately from each other 
to cause the pressure of the outside air to 
open and enter the valve ". By this construc 
two or more of the fluid ingredients of the 
compound, a stirring device acting upon the 
tion a partial vacuum is formed within the 
ammonia-tank at each reciprocation of the 
ingredients within the chamber for mixing 
pump-piston, whereby the ammonia is caused 
or commingling the same, and means for ex 
to rapidly expand and thus produce a low 
ploding the compound, substantially as de 
temperature in the spaces surrounding the 
Scribed. 
2. The combination, with an explosion 
blocks AA in a manner heretofore common 
in machines for producing artificial cold. 
chalmber, as of a gun or motor, of two or more 
ducts or passages delivering to said chamber 
The annular spaces or chambers K K be 
tween the cylinders H and J are desirably 
separately from each other two or more of the 
utilized as a storage-chamber for compressed 
ingredients of a fluid explosive compound, a 
stirring device acting upon the said ingre 
air, and for this purpose the air-exit passages 
b' b' of the air-chamber B are arranged to 
dients within the chamber for mixing or com 
open directly into said spaces K. K. Said 
lmingling the same, and means for exploding 
the mixture, substantially as described. 
spaces KK, as herein shown, communicate 
3. The combination, with an explosion 
with each other at the middle of the machine; 
but they may, if breferred, be made separate 
chamber and two or more separate ducts or 
passages discharging into said chamber, of 
from each other. In the particular construc 
tion illustrated the air-openings b are con 
two or more pumps connected with said pas 
nected with the chamber K by means of tubu- I sages, whereby the fluid ingredients of an ex 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
C) 
II5 
I 25 
41,128 
5 
75 
So 
CO 
Io5 
TIO 
I. I5 
plosive compound may be delivered to the 
explosion-chamber in two or more separate 
parts, a stirring device acting upon said in 
gredients within the chamber for mixing or 
commingling the same, and means for explod 
ing the compound, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with an explosion 
chamber and two or more ducts Ol' passages 
communicating there with, of pumps con 
nected with said ducts or passages, means for 
varying the quantity of fluid delivered by 
each pump, whereby the fluids may be intro 
duced into the explosion-chamber in desired 
proportions, stirring devices acting upon the 
ingredients within the chamber for mixing 
the same, and means for exploding the mix 
ture, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with an explosion 
chamber, of ducts or passages and forcing de 
vices for delivering to said chamber sepa 
rately from each other two or more of the in 
gredients of an explosive compound, and stir 
ring devices for mixing the said ingredients, 
consisting of air-ducts leading into the cham 
ber, and means for producing a forcible in 
flux of air therethrough, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. The combination, with all explosion 
chamber provided with a recess or basin in 
its bottom wall, of ducts or passages deliver 
ing the ingredients of an explosive compound 
to said basin, an air duct or ducts leading to 
said basin and discharging obliquely or tan 
gentially therein, and an air-forcing device 
producing a forcible influx of air through said 
duct or ducts, substantially as described. 
7. The combination, with an explosion 
chamber and receptacle therein for the in 
gredients of an explosive compound and 
means for delivering the ingredients of the 
said explosive compound to said receptacle, 
of an air duct or ducts leading into the said 
chamber and discharging into said receptacle, 
an exit-duct communicating With the cham 
ber, and means for exhausting air from the 
chamber through the said duct, whereby a 
jet or jets of air may be caused to impinge 
upon the ingredients within the receptacle 
for the purpose of mixing the same, substan 
tially as described. 
S. The combination, with an explosion 
chamber formed in or by a recessed metal 
block A, of ducts or passages DD for fluids, 
formed in separate metal bal's DD, inserted 
in a recess (t, formed in said block, substan 
tially as described. 
9. The combination, with a metal block A, 
having a recess Cl, forming an explosion-cham 
ber, and provided with a recess ca, of the 
metal bars D D, fitted in said recess a and 
extending past the inner end of the explo 
sion-chamber, said bars DD being provided 
. 
. 
. 
with passages l) D', opening into said explo 
sion-chamber, substantially as described. 
10. The combination, with a metal block A, 
having a recess Cl, forming an explosion-cham 
ber, and provided with a recess ct, extending 
outwardly from the recessa, and with an air 
passage G, of bars D* D, inserted in the re 
cess C, said bars being provided with pas 
Sages g g, opening into the recess C and com 
municating with the passage G, substan 
tially as described. 
11. The combination, with an explosion 
chamber, of an elongated cylindric piston or 
plunger sliding therein, ducts or passages and 
pumps for delivering into said chamber sep 
arately from each other the ingredients of a 
fluid explosive compound, stirring devices act 
ing upon the ingredients within the chamber 
for mixing the same, and means for exploding 
the compound, said chamber being provided 
With an exit-opening for gases, which opening 
is closed solely by the piston and is opened 
only when the piston is at or near the for 
Ward limit of its movement, substantially as 
described. 
12. The combination, with an explosion 
chamber, a piston or plunger sliding therein, 
and an air-pump actuated by said piston or 
plunger, of a closed chamber surrounding the 
explosion-chamber and communicating with 
the air-inlet opening of the air-pumps, a tank 
for ammonia, provided with an inlet-opening 
provided with a valve which is held closed by 
a Spring, and a pipe connecting said tank 
With the chamber which surrounds the ex 
plosion-chamber, substantially as described. 
13. The combination, with a metal block A, 
provided with a recess C, forming an explo 
Sion-chamber, of a cylinder II, surrounding 
said metal block and forming therewith a 
chamber I for the circulation of a cooling 
mixture, and a second cylinder T, extending 
around the said cylinder IX and forming there 
with a chamber for compressed air, substan 
tially as described. 
14. The combination, with an explosion 
chamber, a plunger therein, an air-compress 
ing device actuated by the plunger, an am 
lmonia-tank, a passage connecting the Said 
ammonia-tank with the air-inlet opening of 
the said air-compressing device, a motor in 
which the compressed air is used, and a water 
tank into which the exhaust-air from the mo 
tor is delivered, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I affix my signature in presence 
of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM VOGEL. 
Witnesses: 
C. CLARENCE POOLE, 
CHARLEST. IORING. 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417223.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. BOYLE. 
LAWATORY BASIN, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 417,223, 
Patented DeC, 17, 1889, 
 
 
 
 
 
or 
 
 
\ 
. 
 
w 
 
  
 
ix. 
 
r 
& 
 
WITNESSES: 
47%. %271 
 
 
s i Hity 
GE 
7. Eli Eig 
Y-/  
t 
I H r 
 
I 3 SSW 
EN A3S 
Sss 
S 
N 
SA &S 
3. YZ 
& 
M 
i 
lying: 
Santa & 3a;-ca, 
Ay his 4ttorneys, 
Ye 11 SS 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, DC. 
(No Model.) 
J. E. BOYLE. 
LAVATORY BASIN, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
AIG, fo, 
 
WITNESSES: 
22 
ae/21 
INVENTOR: 
6. 3a; Ce, 
curred 
Ay his 4ttorneys, 
(6-ite 
SSr. coor (Ss. 
N. PETERS. Photo-littographer, Washirton, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. BOYLE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
LAVATORY-BASIN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 417,223, dated December 17, 1889. 
Application filed March 20, 1889, Serial No. 304,068, (No model.) 
5 
O 
25. 
35 
45 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES E. BOYLE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Brooklyn, 
in the county of Kings and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Lavatory-Basins, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to stationary wash 
basins of that class wherein the outlet or waste 
opening, instead of being closed by a stopper 
connected by a chain, is closed by the lower 
end of an upright tube which constitutes the 
overflow, thereby avoiding the necessity of 
providing a separate overflow - connection. 
The overflow-tube is so mounted that it can 
be given a slight up or down movement. 
When it is lifted, its lower end no longer closes 
the outlet-opening, and the water in the bowl 
escapes. Means are commonly provided for 
holding it after it has been lifted, so that it 
shall not fall back, it being customary to so 
construct such sustaining device that when 
the tube is lifted it is given a partial rotation 
in order to leave it upheld. With structures 
of this character as heretofore made the over 
flow-tube has been guided at its upper end 
by passing through a hole in the marble slab 
back or to one side of the opening formed for 
the bowl, and at its lower end it has been 
guided by engagenient with the outlet-open 
ing. The fastening provisions for holding 
the tube elevated have also been arranged 
exterior to it and usually in the guiding de 
vice fixed in the hole in the slab. Such con 
strugtions are objectionable, because of the 
difficulty experienced through inaccurate fit 
ting of the marble slab, since, if the hole 
therein be not in exactly the right position, 
the overflow-tube will be canted somewhat 
from the vertical, and is liable to bind in its 
movement. Complicated constructions have 
been devised for avoiding this difficulty. 
According to my present invention, I ar 
range the overflow-tube or stand-pipe entirely 
within the bowl and within or inline with the 
opening for the bowl in the marble slab, and I 
so construct the parts that the tube is guided 
independently of the marble slab. The over 
flow-tube is thus in plain sight, is accessible 
where it can be readily cleaned, and it is SO 
constructed that it can be lifted out by a sim 
ple manipulation. I accomplish these results 
by providing a fixed vertical rod or guiding 
stem within the overflow-tube, by which it is 
supported and on which it is guided in its 
upward movement. This rod is fixed in the 
outlet-opening from the bowl, and projects up 
within the tube, being entirely concealed 
thereby. 
It is formed with shoulders or pro 
visions co-operating with other provisions 
formed within the tube, by which the latter, 
when lifted, is upheld, and by which the ac 
cidental lifting out of the tube is prevented. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan of the marble slab and bowl with its 
overflow-tube. Fig. 2 is a vertical mid-sec 
tion of the slab and bowl, showing the over 
flow-tube in elevation. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
Section, on a larger scale, of the overflow-tube 
and its supporting coacting parts. Figs. 4 
and 5 are fragmentary sectional views simi 
lar to Fig. 3, but showing the parts in differ 
ent positions. Fig. 6 is a transverse section 
cut on the line 67 in Fig. 5 and looking up 
Wardly. Fig. 7 is a section cut on the same 
line and looking downwardly. Fig. 8 is a 
horizontal section cut in the plane of the line 
88 in Fig. 4, looking downwardly. The re 
maining views show a modification. Fig. 9 is 
a vertical section answering to Fig. 3. Fig. 
10 is a plan view of the top of the guiding 
rod. Fig. 11 is a plan view of the overflow 
tube removed. 
Referring to Figs. 1 to 8, let Ain Figs. 1 and 
2 designate the marble slab, B designate the 
bowl, and C the overflow-tube. As shown in 
Fig. 2, the overflow-tube C projects up through 
the bowl-opening a in the marble slab, being 
arranged close to the rear side thereof, but out 
of contact therewith. This opening is pref 
erably extended or indented over the outlet 
opening to of the bowl, in order to admit the 
overflow-tube and enable the latter to be 
placed close to the extreme rear side of the 
bowl, where it shall be out of the way during 
the use of the bowl. The outlet-opening b is 
molded in the earthenware bowl, as usual, 
this being the only opening that is formed 
therein, and the inner surfaces of the bowl 
slope toward this opening in all directions. 
An outlet-tube or seat c is passed down 
through this opening from the top and is 
95 
IOO 
2 
41,228 
O 
2d 
25 
45 
55 
fastened therein by a nut (l, screwed onto its 
threaded exterior and against the under side 
of the bowl, as usual. The lead pipe is con 
nected to the lower end of the outlet-tube c 
by means of a spud e, joined to the tube by 
a union e', to which spud the lead waste-pipe 
is connected by a wiped joint, as indicated 
by the dotted lines in Fig. 2. Within the 
outlet-tube c is cast a spider c', into the hub 
of which is screwed the lower end of a guide 
rod D, which projects vertically above the out 
let-opening and into the bowl. The over 
flow-tube C is slipped over this rod D and is 
supported and guided thereby. The rod Dis 
formed with winged guides f near its lower 
portion and with a guiding-disk g near its 
upper end, by means of which the tube C is 
guided. The overflow-tube is formed at its 
lower end with a conical portion or plug h, 
which when the tube is lowered enters the 
outlet-tube c and fits tightly therein, thereby 
forming a tight plug or stopper. Near the 
upper end of the tube it is formed with open 
ings i, through which the overflow - water 
may enter when the bowl is full. The water 
entering through these holes descends through 
the tube C and through the outlet-tube c to 
the waste-pipe. The upper end of the tube is 
closed by a capi, formed with a knob or han 
dle k by preference, by means of which the 
tube may be lifted. The upper end of the 
tube is preferably screw-threaded and screwed 
into the external flange on this cap. 
I will now describe the means for holding 
the overflow-tube elevated. On top of the 
rod D is fixed a disk or head in, which is 
notched, as shown best in Fig. 7. On diamet 
rically-opposite sides it has narrow deep 
notches ll, while a quarter-turn from these it 
is formed with diametrically-opposite wide 
shallow notches in n. The upper end of the 
tube C is provided with two narrow fingers 
or plates l l on opposite sides, projecting a 
considerable distance from the inner surface 
of the tube toward the center and adapted to 
enter the narrow deep notches l l. Lower 
down the tube is provided with two wider 
fingers n' ', projecting a less distance toward 
the center and adapted to enter the notches 
in n. Between the upper end of the fingers 
n' and the lower end of the fingers l' are 
formed notches or recesses p, sufficiently high 
to admit the thickness of the disk n, and ex 
tending sufficiently far from the center to ad 
mit the diameter thereof. The ?ingers n' are 
arranged just beneath the fingers l', as shown 
in Figs, 5 and 6, being preferably cast in one 
piece therewith, as shown. By preference 
the several fingers l n are all cast integrally 
with the headi. The overflow-tube Chaving 
been lifted off the guide-lrod D, it is replaced 
by slipping it down over the rod until its 
fingers in encounter the disk in. The tube 
has then to be turned until these fingers reg 
ister with the notches in n, whereupon they 
drop through these notches until the fingers 
l' rest upon the top of the disk m. As these 
latter fingers are too wide or approach too 
closely toward the center to pass down through 
the shallow notches in n, the tube will drop 
no lower until it is turned a quarter-revo 
lution to bring the fingers l into register 
with the notches ll, whereupon these fingers 
will fall through the said notches, as shown 
in Fig. 8, and the tube will drop until its 
stopper h is seated in the opening c, where 
upon the position of the parts will be that 
shown in Fig. 4. The fingers l are prefer 
ably made of considerable height in order to 
allow for some inaccuracy of fitting in the 
height of the rod D, compared with that of 
the tube Cand its provisions. When the tube 
is lifted to let the water run out of the bowl, 
the upper side of the wide fingers n' strikes 
the under side of the disk m, being too wide 
to pass through the narrow notches ll, where 
by the immediate lifting out of the tube is 
prevented. It is then only necessary to 
slightly twist or turn the tube in order to 
bring the fingers l out of register with their 
notchesl, whereupon on letting go of the tube 
these fingers will rest upon the top of the disk 
and hold up the tube, as shown in Fig. 3. If 
it is desired to lift the tube out to clean or pol 
ish it, it must be turned until the fingers m' 
come into register with the wide notches n, 
whereupon it may be fully lifted. When 
thus taken off, the guide-rod D is readily ac 
cessible for cleaning or for the removal of 
any obstructions in the outlet-passage. 
My improved lavatory-basin is of simple 
construction, there being but one opening to 
the bowl and but one opening in the marble 
slab, and no great accuracy being required 
in the fitting of the bowl and slab, since there 
are no guiding-openings for the overflow-tube 
to be brought to register. The overflow-tube 
is in convenient position for operation, is in 
plain sight, is not in the way, and may be 
readily removed and cleaned. 
In the modification shown in Figs. 9, 10, 
and 11 the overflow-tube is not provided 
with holes i, but is open at the top to per 
mit the ovel'flow-water to enter it. In other 
words, the head j consists of an open ring, 
preferably flared to form a projecting flange 
by which easier to grasp the tube. The tube 
is of such height that when it is seated the 
top of the head i rises to the level at which 
it is desired that the water shall overflow. 
In place of the two fingers l' in the previous 
construction, a single rod or wirel' is ex 
tended diametrically across within the tube. 
The finger's n' n' are the same as in the first 
construction, the only difference being that 
they are arranged in a line at right angles to 
that of the rodl', instead of in a line coincid 
ing there with, as before. This arrangement is 
best shown in Fig. 11. The guide-rod D is 
formed with the same wings fat the bottom, 
and at the top, instead of being provided 
with a guiding-disk g and a notched uphold 
ing-disk m, as before, it is provided with one 
single disk n', which serves both purposes. 
75 
95 
OO 
IIO 
II5 
F 25 
417,223 
This disk is provided with a diametrical slot 
q, cutting it into two parts and extending 
(lowin, as shown in Fig. 9, some distance into 
the guide-rod D. This slot takes the place 
of the notches l n in Fig. 7. Fig. 9 shows the 
tube in the position to be dropped to place to 
close the outlet. In so dropping it the rodl' 
will descend into the slot q until the tube is 
stopped by its plug h entering the seat c. 
The fingers n' project under the disk n', so 
that on lifting the tube they encounter this 
disk and prevent the tube being lifted too 
high. Then by slightly turning the tube the 
rod l' is brought to a diagonal position, 
where it is out of coincidence with the slot q, 
so that when the tube is let go the rod may 
rest on top of the disk n' and uphold the 
tube. To lift out the tube, it must be turned 
until the finger's n' coincide with the ends of 
the slot q, whereupon they may pass up 
through this slot. The disk n' is perforated 
to permit the overflow water readily to pass 
downward. This disk serves to prevent any 
article being dropped down through the tube 
C and into the outlet. 
My invention may be variously otherwise 
modified in matters of detail without depart 
ing from its essential novel features. 
I claim as my invention the following de 
fined novel features and combinations, sub 
stantially as hereinbefore specified, namely: 
1. The combination of a lavatory-bowl 
having an outlet-opening with an overflow 
tube formed at its lower end as a plug to 
close said outlet-opening, and a guiding-rod 
fixed in Said opening, projecting upwardly 
therefrom within the tube and of smaller 
diameter than the latter, to leave an overflow 
space between, and formed with a disk or 
head at its upper part engaging and guiding 
the inner walls of the upper parl of the tube, 
and with guiding projections at its lower 
part engaging and guiding the inner walls of 
the lower part of the tube, whereby the lower 
end of the latter is properly directed to its 
seat in the outlet-opening, and with recipro 
cal stops on said rod and tube, respectively, 
adapted to be engaged upon the lifting of the 
tube and by their engagement to hold it 
elevated. 
2. The combination, with a lavatory-bowl, 
of an upright guiding-rod fixed in its outlet 
O 
35 
45 
opening and provided with a notched stop 
disk, and an overflow-tube formed at itslower 
end as a plug to close said opening and 
mounted over said rod, and provided with 
internal stop-fingers for engagement with 
said disk, arranged when the tube is lifted to 
drain the bowl to be respectively above and 
below said disk, whereby on the lifting of 
the tube the lower fingers encounter said disk 
and limit the lifting, movement, and on turn 
ing the tube the upper finger or fingers rest 
upon said disk and uphold the tube. 
3. The combination, with a lavatory-bowl, 
of an upright guiding-rod fixed in its outlet 
opening, and an overflow-tube mounted over 
said rod, with reciprocal stops consisting of 
a notched disk on Said rod and fingers in 
said tube arranged when the tube is elevated 
to drain the bowl to be respectively above 
and below said disk, and the respective fin 
gers and notches relatively arranged for en 
gagement in different angular or rotative po 
sitions of the tube, whereby when the tube is 
in one rotative position the upper finger may 
pass downward through notches in said disk 
to admit of the lowering of the tube, and 
when the tube is lifted and turned to another 
angular position the lower fingers register 
with notches which admit of their upward 
passage to enable the tube to be lifted out. 
4. The combination, with an upright guid 
ing-rod having a stop-disk formed with two 
diametrically - opposite narrow and deep 
notches, and in another angular position with 
two diametrically-opposite broad and shallow 
notches, of an overflow-tube mounted over 
said rodland having upper fingers thin enough 
to enter said narrow notches and too wide to 
enter said shallow notches, and lower fingers 
short enough to enter said shallow notches 
and too wide to enter said narrow and deep 
notches, whereby the lower fingers limit the 
lifting of the tube, while the upper fingers 
serve as stops for upholding the tube when it 
has been lifted and partially rotated. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
JAMES E. BOYLE, 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR. C. FRASER, 
JNO. E. GAVIN. 
55 
75 
So 
90 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417323.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 417,323, 
W. D. JOHN. 
TUBE EXPANDER. 
Patented DeC. 17, 1889. 
// 
// // 
 
Z 
24 
2 
28).ifvesses 
A. 
elitovic 
(1, yet 
3.11ac v1 to 
t 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. JOHN, OF SCRANTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
TU BE EXPANDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 417,323, dated December 17, 1889. 
Application filed April 24, 1889, Serial No, 308,401. (No model.) 
To all whon, it inctly conce7'n: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM D. JoHN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at 
Scranton, in the county of Lackawanna and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Flang 
ing-Tools; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make 
and use the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
My invention has relation to flanging-tools 
for boiler-?lues; and the object of the inven 
tion is to provide a tool for this purpose 
whereby the tube may be set or tightened in 
the tube-wheel preparatory to using the regu 
lar or usual tube-expander, so that the tube 
will be rigidly held in place while being ex 
panded; and to these ends the novelty con 
sists in the construction, combination, and 
arrangement of parts of the same, as will be 
hereinafter more fully described, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings the same 
letters of reference indicate the same parts 
of the invention. 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective of my im 
proved flanging-tool; and Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal section of the same as it appears in 
use in the tube, with the end of the tube in 
serted in the tube-sheet. 
A is the flanging-tool, and is composed of 
a series of four or more Sections a C. Ct. a, the 
whole being held together by a circumferen 
tial spring B in the recess b. 
C is a longitudinal central orifice in which 
the taper drift-pin D is driven when the tool 
is being used. 
E is an annular recess in which the end e 
of the tube E' enters; and F is an annular 
shoulder which rests against the tube-sheet 
G, so as to prevent the ende of the tube bot 
toming in the recess E. 
H H are shoulders, one on each side of 
the recess I, and when the tool is inserted 
and the pin D driven in a flange is raised on 
the outside of the tube on each side of the 
tube-sheet, which effectually prevents the 
tube from rotating or moving backward or 
forward while being expanded in the tube 
sheet in the regular manner. 
It will be observed in Fig. 2 that while the 
- 
O 
25 
35 
O 
55 
shoulde F is against the tube-sheet the end 
of the tube does not reach to the bottom of 
the recess E. Therefore when the drift is 
driven in, the tube is not forced forward, as 
the force of the blow given the drift is re 
ceived by the tool itself, and its shoulder F, 
resting against the tube sheet, prevents the 
tool going forward and thereby carrying the 
tube with it, which would necessitate the 
Services of a second man at the other end of 
the tube to hold and drive it back; but with 
my improved tool it will be seen that the 
only effect of the blow on the drift-pin is to 
Spread the sections C C C C, radially outward, 
and thus by means of the shoulders H H' 
raise flanges on the outside of the tube on 
each side of the tube-sheet. 
One of the essential features of my inven 
tion is the annular groove E, leaving an an 
nular lip or abutment F, which serves as a 
positive gage when impinging against the 
tube-sheet G. 
Another essential feature is the annular 
groove I in the reduced portion of the tool, 
having a cylindrical shoulder H at one end 
and a rounded tapering shoulder H' at the 
other end. By this construction the proper 
desired form can be given to the tube E.' 
without rotating the tool in the end of this 
tube. 
It will thus be seen that with the aid of my 
improved tool one man is enough to do the 
work of two. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and useful, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
S 
The within-described improved article of 
manufacture, consisting of a perforated flang 
ing-tool A, formed of several longitudinal 
segments C, a binding-spring B, seated in an 
annular recess formed in the enlarged eylin 
drical portion of the tool, an annular abut 
ment F, an annular shoulder II, forming an 
intermediate annular groove E, a rounded 
and tapered annular shoulder II on the end 
of the reduced portion of the tool, and an 
annular groove between the shoulders H H', 
all as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
- 
WILLIAM ). JOHN. 
Witnesses: 
ISAAC P. JONES, 
ELI J. DAVIES. 
75 
95 
CO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417423.txt	(No Model.) 
P, HOBLER. 
PORTABLE GRINDING MILI, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 417,423, 
Patented Dec. 17, 1889. 
S 
2 
2. S23 
Y NS N N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A 
M 4. NES 
%2. 32% 
27 
2 
  
 
 
s W. 2 
2 2a 
 
 
I 
I/ 
2. 
Ya 
is 2 
 
Ne 
Z222222222; 
762 ya-24. 
72%/62646 ared 76e 
4%2/s, 
 
N. PeFERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 417,423, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
P, HOBLER 
PORTABLE GRINDING MILL. 
Patented Dec. 17, 1889, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Y 
S 
M 
SN 
S25 22 
 
   
  
 
  
 
L 
N N 
N. S. 
--- 
 
s 
 
ZAN 
(ha? 2NAS 2 
2 T2 
Z 
  
2T 
r 
 
%2S 
 
2 2 
Z62 zzasses .. 
r caf24e?, 
Z722-ye72 Zo2. 
%22%-24, 
f 
/ 
 
NPETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER HOBLER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PORTABLE GRINDING-M.ILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 417,423, dated December 17, 1889. 
Application filed October 16, 1886, Serial No. 216,391 (No model.) 
TO 
s 
is 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER HOBLER, of Chi 
cago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Portable Grinding-Mills, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, such as will enable others to make 
and use the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of 
this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
that class of portable mills that are more es 
pecially designed for the use of farmers in 
grinding different kinds of grain; and the 
Same consists of certain novel features in the 
construction, arrangement, and combination 
of the Several parts, as will be hereinafter set 
forth and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of a millem 
bodying my improved features; Fig. 2, a view 
partly in section and partly in elevation, the 
parts in section being taken on the line2, Fig. 
1, looking in the direction indicated by the 
arrow; Fig. 3, a broken side elevation and 
partial section of the lower part of the mill, 
the sections being taken online 3, Fig. 1; Fig. 
4, a horizontal section of the mill-spindle B 
and the hub a', showing the manner of con 
necting the two. 
In the drawings, A represents a circular 
supporting-base; BB', the supporting-legs; B', 
, the driving-shaft, and B the grain-receiving 
hopper. 
The circular base A has the auxiliary legs 
CC" formed integral therewith, (see Fig. 1) 
which curve inwardly and unite at the top to 
form the step-box a for the lower bearing end 
of the vertical shaft or mill-spindle B'. 
The lower ends of the main supporting-legs 
BB' are widely extended and secured to the 
base-plate by the boltsa', the upper ends curv 
ing in Wardly in the direction of each other 
and each having one-half of the casing a, in 
closing the grinding-rings, formed on top of 
45 the same. The bed-platea, to which the run 
ner or lower grinding-ring C is secured, is 
rigidly mounted on the upper part of the ver 
tical shaft or spindle B'. 
The upper grinding-ring C9 is rigidly se 
cured to the adjustable cap at of the casing 
35 
- 
a, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The cap a has 
a second or auxiliary hopper a formed on the 
top of the same. 
a is a third and smaller hopper placed in 
side of the hopper a, and which receives the 55 
grain from the main or receiving hopper 
through the spout a. The necessary vibra 
tory or shaking motion is imparted to the 
spout a by reason of the inner end engaging 
loosely with the crank-pin a, formed on the 6o 
upper end of the vertical shaft or mill-spindle. 
The hub a' of the bed-plate a is provided 
with the splinea, which engages with the cor 
responding groove a in the upper part of the 
mill-spindle, whereby the lower grinding-disk 65 
may be slipped off from the upper end of said 
spindle, but rotates therewith. 
The lower ends of the vertical bolts bb' are 
inserted in the lugs b, projecting from the in 
closing-casing a, while the upper ends pass 7o 
through the ends of the arched bridge-bar b. 
The ends of the bolts are threaded and pro 
vided with correspondingly-threaded adjust 
ing-nuts. The hand-screw b passes through 
and has threaded engagement With the center 75 
of the arched bar b8. The lower end of the 
screw is swiveled in the center of the com 
panion arched barb, spanning the hopper a. 
When rough adjustmentis required, the yoke 
is raised or lowered by means of the bolts bb', 8o 
and when slight adjustment is required it is 
done by means of the screws b. 
b' is the spout through which the reduced 
product is discharged, and b a bag-holder of 
any desired kind attached to the same. 
The lower end of the curved bracket-arm C. 
is bolted to one of the main supporting-legs. 
B', while the upper end supports the receiv 
ing-hopper B a little off to one side, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
The horizontal driving-shaft B'is supported 
in the journal-bearings did, bolted to the cir 
cular base A. The bevel gear - wheel D is 
mounted on the driving-shaft and engages 
with the corresponding pinion D', mounted 95 
on the lower part of the mill-spindle or verti 
cal shaft. By this means the required mo 
tionistransmitted to the grinding mechanism. 
The conical bell-shaped hood or cap D, 
mounted on the vertical shaft just above the Ioo 
. 
85 
9o 
4.17,423 
IO 
pinion D', serves not only as a balance-wheel, 
but protects the geared connection also by pre 
venting matter from dropping into the same. 
The upper journal-bearing E for the verti 
cal shaft is inserted between and connects the 
supporting-legs at a point just underneath the 
casing inclosing the grinding-disks. By this 
arrangement a compact and durable structure 
is provided which may be transported with all 
its principal working parts in position and 
ready for instant use. 
The mill occupies but little space, and is so 
simple that it may be readily understood and 
operated by any one. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a grinding-mill, the combination of the 
base A, having auxiliary legs C and C', curv 
ing upwardly and inwardly and uniting to 
form the step-box (t, the main legs B and B', 
bolted to the base, the grinding mechanism 
supported by said legs, the mill - Spindle 
stepped in box at and having a bevel-wheel, 
and a main shaft having a wheel D, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a grinding-mill, the combination of the 
casing a, the rotating grinding-disk within 
said casing, a cap Cl", having an arched hop 
per formed upon the top and the stationary 3o 
grinding-disk secured to the bottom or under 
side, the adjusting-bolts secured to the casing 
a, the arch-bar b, secured to the bolts, and 
an adjusting-screw secured to the arch of the 
hopper and screwed through the arch-bar b, 35 
substantially as described. 
25 
PETER IIOBLER. 
Witnesses: 
L. M. FREEMAN, 
I, 13. COUPLAND. 
- 
 
-- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417523.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 417,523. 
E. F. STEPHENS. 
AUTOMATIC CAR BRAKE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 17, 1889, 
| -- 
ZeevvZ367/6ers. 
3.11uc- to 
 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-utnographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
E. F. STEPHENS. 
AUTOMATIC CAR BRAKE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 417,523, 
 
s 
 
 
 
328i-evossos 
Ze%arz775%/eros 
3v-uov to z 
3. 33. hid-el-stor vict: 
WA 
N, PETERs, Photo-lithographer. Washington. E.C. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD F. STEPHENS, OF AUSTIN, NEWADA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-FOURTH TO 
JOHN SPENCER, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC CAR BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 417,523, dated December 17, 1889. 
Application filed September 26, 1889. Serial No. 325,139, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD F. STEPHENs, 
a clitizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Austin, in the county of Lander and 
State of Nevada, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Automatic Car 
Brakes; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in automatic car-brakes; 
and it consists in the construction and com 
bination of the parts, as will be hereinafter 
fully set forth, and as is shown in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a bottom plan view of a car 
having my improvements applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is an under side perspective view of 
one of the trucks. Fig. 3 is a side view, one 
of the trucks being shown in section. Fig. 4 
is a detail sectional view of a bar for support 
ing the brake-beam. Fig. 5 is a detail view 
of the casting which contacts with the brake 
bar. 
In the accompanying drawings, A refers to 
the bottom of the car, to which the transverse 
timbers B for supporting the trucks are se 
cured in the usual manner, so that they can 
have a pivotal movement thereon. These 
transverse timbers are of ordinary construc 
tion, and are provided with a king-bolt and 
central openings, through which pass the 
draw-bar to which the couplings are attached. 
To one side of each truck passes a bar or rod 
connected to a hand-brake wheel or lever for 
operating the brake-bars independent of the 
automatic appliances, to be hereinafter de 
scribed. 
To the bottom of the car, in front and rear 
of the truck-frames, are secured hangers C C, 
the upper ends of which are spread and re 
cessed to allow the draw-bar to pass beneath 
the upper central portions thereof, while the 
lower ends of said hangers are bent at right 
angles to project toward the axles, which pro 
jecting ends are bifurcated for pivoting the 
central vertical levers thereto. 
The draw-bar D extends the whole length 
of the car, and to the ends thereof are at 
tached the couplings, which may be of ordi 
nary construction, though I prefer to employ 
the automatic coupling as described and 
claimed in an application filed by me of even 
date here with. The draw-bar is supported 
beneath the bottom of the car and above the 
timbers B B by means of the hangers C C, 
and between the trucks by supports C C, pro 
vided with anti-fliction rollers. 
The draw-bar D is held in place so as to 
slide freely longitudinally, and its movement 
is limited by the laterally-projecting ears did, 
which may be formed either on the ends of 
the draw-bars or upon the coupling-heads, 
and these ears abut against notches or stops 
formed in the draw-head. 
The draw-bar D may be made of one piece, 
or of two or more sections rigidly bolted to 
each other, and at suitable points between 
the trucks this draw-bar is provided with 
longitudinal slots D', against One end of 
which a pin, which passes through the bifur 
cated end of the lever E, will impinge so as to 
properly move the draw-bar when the hand 
brake mechanism is operated. This lever E 
is pivoted to the bottom of the car in a suit 
able hanger, and to its long end is connected 
a rod E, which passes through supports, and 
to the outer end of this rod E is connected 
a flexible connection, as a chain, which 
passes around a wheel or drum mounted 
upon the vertical rod of a hand-brake wheel 
provided with the usual ratchet-wheel and 
pawl. 
The draw-bar has bearings f', which may 
be formed integral with the draw-heads or at 
tached to the draw-bar, and through these 
bearings f' pass pins f*f, which secure the 
long ends of the vertical levers FF thereto, 
said levers being pivoted in the lower bifur 
cated ends of the hangers C C, while the 
short ends are bolted to the ends of a sus 
pended longitudinal bar G, which lies cen 
trally under the truck-frame and beneath the 
king-bolt thereof. It will be noted that the 
upper ends of these levers FF, through which 
75 
95 
IOC 
5 
ro 
35 
40 
45 
 
4.17,523 
ar 
O 
truck. 
the connecting-pins or bolts pass, are slotted pins in n, which engage with slots in the cell 
to give the desired movement or play there 
trally-pivoted levers or rock-bars KK. To one 
to. The bars G. G. are of sufficient length to 
side of and within the point where the bars 
extend beyond the transverse timbers of the 
L' are pivoted thereto the long ends of these 
truck-frames, but do not extend beyond the 
levers M M overlap each other and pass 
axles, especially when the brake is applied to 
through the central opening in the suspended 
a four-wheel truck. 
longitudinal bar G, and these long ends are 
Rigidly Secured to the truck-frames, pref 
slotted and secured to the bar G by a bolt, as 
(rably above the axles to which the wheels 
shown. 
are attached, are two parallel metallic beams 
The central opening in the bar G is of Such 
II II, the ends of which are provided with 
a length that the levers M M will not engage 
cylindrical housings containing coiled or spi 
with the ends thereof when the truck turns 
ral springs h. h of suitable strength, and the 
upon its king-bolt, and the hangers C C are 
inner ends of the housings have open-ended 
placed in such a position in line with the 
slots which support and guide the brake-bars 
king-bolt and on each side of the truck-frame 
II, which carry the brake-shoes. The springs 
that it cannot contact there with, and there 
hh normally bear upon a cap located within 
fore the suspended bar G will always be held 
the closed outer ends of the housing, and these 
horizontally and parallel with the draw-bar, 
caps are adjustable by set-screws, as shown, 
no matter what may be the position of the 
and upon the brake-bars, so as to force and hold. 
the shoes attached thereto upon the wheels, 
The brake-bars have rigidly attached there 
and when it is desired to hold one or more 
to, adjacent to the inner sides of the hous 
brakes off or out of contact with the wheels a 
ings, brackets p p, which contact with the 
pin may be inserted in the housing and passed 
exterior of the housings and serve as guides 
through a casting, as shown in Fig. 5, attached 
for the brake-bars and prevent lateral move 
to the brake-bars II, so as to rigidly hold the 
ment thereof. 
brake-bar out of contact with the wheels, 
My improved automatic brake is adapted 
which can be readily accomplished, as the sys 
to be applied to all styles of trucks, whether 
tem of level's employed all exert a pushing 
they are provided with four or more wheels, 
force against the brake-bars and are rendered 
and, if desirable, brake-bars may be applied 
inoperative by holding the same against the 
on both sides of each set of wheels. 
vertical ends of the slots in the housings. 
In operation, when the cars to which my 
The brake-beams are provided with an at 
invention has been applied are being drawn 
tachment (shown in Fig. 5) consisting of a 
or pushed by the locomotive, the brake-shoes 
bifurcated portion which straddles the brake 
will be positively held out of engagement 
beam, and a reduced portion from which ex 
with the wheels, and as soon as the locomo 
tends a projection which enters the housing 
tive stops or the brake-bars are relieved of 
and provides a bearing for one end of the 
pressure the brakes will be automatically 
Spring situated therein. The reduced por 
applied. In practice the levers are so shaped 
tion of this attachment adjacent to the collar 
or constructed that they will not interfere 
t is provided with a perforation, with which 
with any standard construction of truck 
a pin engages to lock the brake-beam. The 
frames; and they can be modified as to length 
pins for holding the brake-beams and shoes 
and position as may be required without de 
out of contact with the wheels can be flexibly 
parting from the spirit of my invention. It 
connected to the beams H H when not used 
will also be observed that I employ two sets 
for the purpose set forth. 
of levers on each truck, each of which are 
As hereinbefore stated, the beams II II are 
connected to the central cross-bar, and each 
rigidly connected to the truck-frames, and 
set act independently, so that when the draw 
centrally they are recessed to allow the beams 
bar is moved in one direction one set of le 
B B to be located beneath them, said beams 
vers will act upon the brake-ba's to throw 
having hangers, through which pass bolts g 
the shoes out of contact with the wheels, and 
9, which form pivots for short levers or rock 
when the draw-bar is moved in an opposite 
bars IX IX, to the ends of which are pivoted 
direction the other set will perform the same 
pairs of bars LL', each pair of which is con 
function. It will also be observed that, when 
nected to the brake-bars and to the ends of 
desirable, the draw-bar can be held rigid and 
the short level's or rock-bars IXR. The outer 
the brake-bars out of engagement with the 
ends of the bars L L are provided with slots, 
wheels, which can be accomplished by prop 
through which pass pins or bolts attached to 
erly setting the hand-brake or rather unbrak 
blocks or castings ll, which are rigidly bolted 
ing mechanism by placing the pins in place, 
to the inner sides of the brake-bars, as shown, 
which engage with the castings shown in 
and said bars may also have shoulders which 
Fig. 5. If found desirable in practice, the 
will abut against the castings. 
draw-bars may be provided with springs 
The truck-frames between the longitudi 
such as are used in connection with coup 
nally-suspended bar G and the inner ends of 
lings and the draw-heads thereof-to take up 
the short central pivoted rock-bars KIK have 
the shock or jar in starting or stopping inci 
supports in m, which sustain in place levers 
dent to the cars coming together, and spring 
MM, the outer or short ends of which have 
bumpers can be applied to the ends of the 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
9o 
Od 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
4.17,523 
3 
s 
O 
parallel metallic beams which contain the 
Springs for throwing the brake-bars against 
the wheels. 
Haying thus described my invention, I do 
not Wish to be limited to the precise construc 
tion shown, but reserve the right to modify 
the same within the spirit and scope of my 
claims. 
Therefore, what I claim as new, and desire 
to Secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an automatic brake, the combination 
of the spring-actuated brake-bars having slot 
ted bars connected thereto, said bars being 
connected at their inner ends to a pivoted 
rock-bar, and levers connected to the inner 
ends of Said rock-bars and engaging with a 
Suspended longitudinal bar having levers the 
long ends of which engage with a draw-bar, 
Substantially as shown, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. The combination, in an automatic car 
brake, of a continuous draw-bar having coup 
lers attached to the ends thereof, hangers 
above which the draw-bar moves, levers piv 
oted to the hangers and connected at their 
upper ends to the draw-bar and at their lower 
Or short ends to longitudinally-suspended 
bars G, with which levers Mengage, said le 
vers being also connected to pivoted rock 
bars, and bars LL', which operate to throw 
the brake-bar out of engagement with the 
wheels when the draw-bar is moved in either 
direction, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the spring-actu 
ated brake-bars, of bars L and L', rock-bars 
KK, pivoted levers MM, and a suspended 
bar G, which is actuated by a continuous 
draw-bar D, having couplings attached di 
rectly thereto, substantially as shown. 
4. In an automatic car-brake, the parallel 
beams having housings containing springs, 
the outer ends of Said housings being slotted 
to receive brake-beams, brackets attached 
to the brake-beams to prevent lateral move 
ment thereof, and a system of levers, as 
25 
35 
45 
 
d. 
shown. 
shown, for throwing the brake-beams out of 
engagement with the wheels, substantially as 
shown. 
5. In combination with the spring-actuated 
brake-beams, a double system of levers con 
structed and organized as shown and cont 
nected to a central suspended bar G, pivoted 
levers connecting said bar to a draw bar hav 
ing couplings and slots with which the short 
end of a pivoted lever E engages, said lever 
being connected by a bar E' and flexible Con 
nections to a drum which is adapted to be 
actuated by a hand-wheel, substantially as 
6. In an automatic car-brake, a longitudi 
nally-movable bar having couplings at each 
end and means for suspending said draw-bar 
beneath the car-floor, levers pivoted to the 
hangers on each side of the truck-frame inline 
with the king-bolt thereof, the long ends there 
of being slotted and connected to a suspended 
bar G, having a central opening through 
which passes a bolt which engages the slotted 
ends of the pivoted levers MM, said levers 
being centrally pivoted and having the short 
ends thereof connected with pivoted rock 
bars KIK, and rods or bars L L', pivotally 
connected to the rock-bars and to the brake 
beams, the outer ends of said bars LL'being 
slotted, whereby when the draw-bar is moved 
in either direction corresponding pairs of the 
bars LL' will operate to move the brake-bar 
out of engagement with the wheels and Com 
press the springs which are employed for 
forcing the brakes in an opposite direction, 
the parts being combined and organized sub 
stantially as shown, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EDWARD F. STEPHENS. 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
E. W. JoHNSON, 
WILLIAM CAXTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417623.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 417,623, 
F. M. BAKER. 
AWNING BLIND HINGE, 
- 
Patented Dec. 17, 1889, 
NWNo 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS M. BAKER, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
JAMES H. PENCE AND LOUIS L. KORTOS, BOTH OF SAME PLACE. 
AWNING-BLIND HINGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 4.17,628, dated December 17, 1889. 
Application filed October 15, 1889, Serial No. 327,06i, (No model.) 
t 
m 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS M. BAKER, of 
St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Awning-Blind Hinges; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
awning-blind hinges. 
The object is to provide a set of hinges 
which will admit of the outward swing of the 
lower end of the shutter, in addition to the 
ordinary opening swing of the shutter, with 
out disturbing the engagement of the pintles 
in their sockets, and to further provide self 
locking hinges of the above, character in 
which the leaves of the hinge may be rig 
idly secured to the building and shutter, re 
spectively. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
Figure 1 is a view of a set of the hinges ad 
justed for use with shutter closed, and look 
ing toward the free vertical edge of the shut 
Fig. 2 is a similar view with shutter 
ter. 
swung outward at the bottom, forming an 
awning. Fig. 3 is a view with shutter swung 
Wide open, the edge of the shutter secured to 
the hinges being now toward the point of ob 
servation; and Fig. 4 is a top plan view of 
one of the hinges. 
A represents the stationary section of the 
leaf of the hinge which is to be fastened to 
the building, and A' represents the movable 
section of said leaf. The section A is pro 
vided with a vertically-extended flattened 
end a, which may be let into a recess formed 
in the casing, and is provided with screw 
holes for fastening it in position. Its outer 
end is projected in the form of a flat tongue 
a', having vertical abutments a at its inner 
end. In the upper hinge the abutments a 
extend from the bottom edge of the tongue 
only a part of its width, to enable the section 
A to tilt, as will hereinafter appear, while in 
so the lower hingeit preferably extends through 
35 
45 
25 
3O 
- 
 
55 
75 
out the entire width of the tongue, to form an 
extended bearing for the movable section A, 
and so serve to steady the shutter when the 
parts A A' of 
the hinge are in locked adjust 
ment. 
The section A' of the hinge is provided at 
its inner end with a recess B, the walls of 
which embrace the opposite sides of the 
tongue a'. (See Fig. 4.) The two sections 
are united by pins or bolts b, which extend 
laterally through the walls of the recess l8 
and through the tongue a'. The pin or bolt 
b in the upper hinge acts as a pivot upon 
which the section A' may be rocked verti 
cally, while the pin or bolt b in the lower 
hinge is made removable for effecting the 
separation of the two sections A and A' when 
it is desired to throw the lower end of the. 
shutter outward. The section A' is further 
provided with a pintle b", uprising there 
from, and also with oppositely-inclined sur 
faces bb, located the one inwardly and the 
other outwardly from the base of the pintle, 
and with a depression b between the base 
of the pintle and the outer inclined surface 
b, as portions of a self-locking device the 
principle of which is well known. 
The leaf of the hinge which is fastened to 
the shutter is denoted by C. Its end. c to 
ward the shutter is extended vertically and 
provided with screw-holes for securing it 
firmly to the shutter, while its opposite end 
is provided with a socket D, to receive the 
pintle b", and with oppositely-inclined sur 
faces d and d", corresponding to the oppo 
sitely-inclined surfaces b b on the section 
A', and adapted to engage therewith when 
the shutter is swung wide open. The de 
pression 5', above referred to, allows the 
downwardly - projected portion d of the 
socket D to drop as the inclined surfaces on 
the parts A' and C register with each other. 
When the parts are adjusted as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3, the shutter may be swung 
around to open and shut as in ordinary 
hinges, and will, when swung wide open, lock 
itself in open adjustment by the engagement 
of the inclined surfaces above referred to. 
When it is desired to swing the bottom of 
the shutter outward to form an awning, as 
95 
TCO 
4.17,623 
45 
50 
55 
65 
O 
shown in Fig. 2, the pin or bolt l is first re 
moved, and the bottom is then free to swing 
outward, the upper section A' turning on its 
pivot l, the pintle and socket in both upper 
and lower hinges remaining in their relative 
adjustments. 
The inner end of the upper section A' has 
its upper cornel's rounded, as shown at U, to 
free it from cramping against the upper end 
of the abutments ct, and the pintle on the 
lower section A' is provided with a remova 
ble cap E or other abutment of any well 
known or approved form to prevent the sec 
tion A' from dropping out of position when 
the same is released from the section A and 
the bottom of the shutter swung outward. 
Both upper and lower hinges effectually 
prevent the sagging of the shutter by the en 
gagement of the ends of the sections A and 
A" with the lower portions of the abut 
ments (t. 
It is evident that any well-known and ap 
proved locking device might be substituted 
for the removable pin or bolt b, and that vari 
ous other slight changes in the form and con 
struction of the several parts might be re 
sorted to without materially departing from 
the spirit and scope of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a hinge-section 
adapted to be fixed to the building and a 
hinge-leaf adapted to be fixed to a shutter, of 
an intermediate movable section having a 
pintle-and-socket connection with the shut 
ter-leaf and a fastening for securing the in 
termediate section to the hinge-section at the 
building, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with an upper hinge 
consisting of a leaf for attachment to a shut 
ter, a section for attachment to a building, 
and an intermediate section having a pintle 
and-socket connection with the section at 
the building, of a lower hinge consisting of a 
leaf for attachment to a shutter, a section for 
attachment to a building, and an intermedi 
ate section having a pintle-and-socket con 
nection with the shutter-leaf and a separable 
connection with the section at the building, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The herein-described hinge, consisting 
of a leaf adapted to be fixed to a shutter and 
a sectional leaf, one section of the sectional 
leaf being provided with a vertical abutment, 
and the other section having an engagement 
at one end with the said abutment and at its 
opposite end having a pintle-and-socket en 
gagement with the shutter-leaf, substantially 
as set forth. . 
4. The herein-described hinge, consisting 
of a leaf formed in one piece and provided 
with a socket and a leaf formed in two Sec 
tions, one fixed and the other movable, the 
movable section being provided with a pintle 
and a removable abutment on the pintle, for 
the purpose substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS M. BAKER. 
WILLIAM M. DEAN, 
CHARLES C. LOGAN. 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417724.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
H., HINCKLEY, 
INDICATOR FOR DOORS, 
No. 417,724. 
Patented DeC, 24, 1889. 
 
 
 
st SS Se 
ASN 
S1.7 / ...; 
S-ty - - - - - - 
 
 
e 
A2Z72-e ses 
was am as are a 
as awm 
our 
or with 
Z2zvezzzo 
2224- a -, as as as 
a 22-2s. 
z7ZZo772 627 
N. Peters, Photo-tithographer. Washington, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOWARD HINCKLEY, OF TRENTON, NEW JERSEY. 
INDICATOR FOR Doo Rs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 417,724, dated December 24, 1889. 
Application filed March 30, 1889, Serial No, 305,372, (No model.) 
55 
sired. 
- 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HoWARD HINCKLEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Tren 
ton, in the county of Mercer, in the State of 
New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Indicators for Doors, 
&c., of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact specification and description, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an appliance for 
indicating whether an apartment (such, for 
example, as a water-closet) is occupied or 
not; and the object of my invention is to pro 
vide an indicator which may be readily op 
erated to bring the sign into exposed position, 
and in Which no springs are necessary to re 
tract or conceal the sign when the apartment 
is vacated. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide means for shifting the sign from differ 
ent points relative to the actuating-bolt. 
In order that my invention may be fully 
understood, I will proceed to describe it with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in . 
which similar letters of reference indicate 
similar parts, and in which 
Figure 1 is a rear view of my improved 
indicator. Fig. 2 is a view, partially in hori 
ZOntal section and partially in plan, of the 
actuating parts of the indicator in position on 
a door. Fig. 3 is a front or outer side view 
of the indicator. 
It is generally desirable that the fact of 
Occupancy or vacancy of such apartments as 
Water-closets should be indicated by some 
Visual sign, so as to avoid awkward intrusion 
upon the privacy of the user. The means 
whereby I accomplish this result are as fol 
OWS: A designates an oblong casing or housing, 
which is designed to be attached, as by screws, 
to the outer side of a door at a point conven 
ient for inspection. The outer side or face 
A? of the casing A is formed with an elon 
gated slot or opening a', through which the 
signal is exposed to view. This opening is 
covered by a transparent panel or plate B, 
which protects the sign, while permitting the 
inscription thereon to be readily seen. The 
ends b b of the plate B are cut on oppositely 
inclined lines, as shown, which come adjacent 
to two screws b'b', let into the front A of the 
housing A at the inner side thereof. By this 
arrangement the plate is securely held in po 
sition and yet may be readily removed, if de 
C is the sign-plate, which lies horizontally 
within the casing A, and said plate is pivot 
ally connected by links or arms D to lugs d, 
formed upon the bottom of the casing A, as 
clearly shown in Fig. 1. Lugs d' d' are also 
preferably formed upon the bottom of the 
casing A, so as to alternate with the lugs d, 
and thus permit the sign-plate to operate in 
the reverse direction from that which it op 
erates when the arms or links D are connected 
to the lugs d. 
I will now describe the means for actuating 
the sign-plate C. 
E designates a case or housing attached to 
the inner side of the door, and E' designates 
a bolt working endwise within the casing E, 
and provided with a protruding knob or han 
dle e. As shown in the right-hand end of 
Fig. 2, a pin F extends outwardly from the 
bolt E' and engages beneath one of the arms 
D. It will thus be seen that when the bolt is 
thrown in one direction the sign-plate C will 
be raised and exposed through the slot a, 
while when the bolt is thrown in the oppo 
site direction the plate will fall by gravity 
and the signal Will be concealed, thus indi 
cating that the apartment is empty. This 
dropping of the sign-plate by gravity is a 
valuable feature of my invention, as it en 
ables me to dispense with springs in construct 
ing my device, and thus greatly simplifies and 
cheapens the Salme. 
In the construction described the bolt-cas 
ing E and the housing A are supposed to be 
exactly opposite to each other upon ppposite 
sides of the door G, and the bolt E' is shown 
as the one which fastens and unfastens the 
door. In some cases, however, it is desirable 
to set the housing A in the middle of the door. 
When thus arranged, the pin F is dispensed 
with and an L-shaped pin F is used in lieu 
thereof. In such case the pin F extends 
from the inner end of the bolt, but operates 
at its outer part against the arm D, as before. 
It will thus be seen that I have produced a 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
2Cd 
25 
35 
- 4d 
45 
 
4.17,724 
2. In an indicator for apartments, the com 
bination, with the door-bolt, of an arm pro 
jecting therefrom, a casing having a slot or 
opening for the display of a sign, a Swinging 
gravitating sign-plate corresponding to said 
opening, links pivotally connecting said sign 
plate to the casing, one of said links being in 
the path of movement of the bolt projection, 
and a transparent plate for covering the cas 
ing-slot, said plate having inclined ends and 
movable retaining-screws therefor, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
IIO WARD IIINCKLEY. 
20 
Witnesses: 
E. S. PARKINSON, 
W. W. STERLING. 
5 
Io 
simple, and inexpensive form of indicator, 
which is durable in construction and reliable 
in operation. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an indicator for apartments, the com 
bination, with the door-bolt, of an arm pro 
jecting therefrom, a casing having a slot or 
opening for the display of a sign, a swinging 
gravitating sign-plate corresponding to said 
opening, and links pivotally connecting said 
sign-plate to the casing, one of Said links be 
ing in the path of movement of the bolt pro 
jection, substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417824.txt	(No Model.) 
S. M. HAMBLIN & W. H., GOLDSMITH. 
TRAVERSE MOTION FOR SPOOLING MACHINES, 
No. 417,824. 
Patented DeC. 24, 1889. 
 
WITNESSES, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN M. HAMBLIN, OF NEW BEDFORD, AND WILLIAM. H. GOLDSMITH, OF 
FALL RIVER, ASSIGNORS TO SAID . GOLDSMITH, AND JOHN S. WRIGHT, 
OF DUXBURY, MASSACHUSETTS, 
TRAVERSE-MOTION FOR SPOOLING-MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 417,824, dated December 24, 1889. 
Application filed May 24, 1889, Serial No. 311,930, (No model.) 
SO 
55 
To all Uh-O7 it invay concern: 
from the shaft, and are connected or pivoted 
Be it known that we, STEPHEN M. HAM 
to the traverse bar or carriage C in any pre 
BLIN, of New Bedford, in the county of Bris 
ferred manner, as by a pin Opassing through 
tol and State of Massachusetts, and WILLIAM 
a slot o' in the arm and into the traverse-bar, 
5 H. GOLDSMITH, of Fall River, in the county 
as shown in Fig. 1. The traverse-bar C is 
of Bristol and State of Massachusetts, have 
mounted to side backward and forward or 
jointly invented a new and useful Improve 
vibrate transversely of the machine on suit 
ment in Traverse-Motions for Spooling-Ma 
able supports or ways P, secured to the frame 
chines; and We do hereby declare the follow 
A. In order to reduce the friction between 
Io ing specification, taken in connection with 
the traverse-bar and the Ways as much as pos 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
sible, the bar is preferably provided with pull 
of the same, to be a description thereof. 
leys or rollers p, which rest on the ways. 
For the purpose of conveniently regulating 
This invention relates to a traverse-mo 
tion for spooling-machines; and it consists 
the amount of movement of the traverse-bar, 
I5 in certain features of construction and ar 
the rod M is preferably adjustably secured to 
rangement hereinafter described and claimed. 
the rock-shaft N in any suitable manner, as 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
by passing through a collar or hub q, attached 
represents an end view of a machine provided 
to one end of the rock-shaft, and being se 
With the traverse-motion. Fig. 2 shows a 
cured to said collar by a set-screw q', as shown 
2O front view of a portion of the machine. Fig. 
in Fig. 1. The same result may be obtained, 
3 represents a transverse section of the same. 
however, by providing the outer end of the 
A is the frame of the machine. 
rod M with a slot and pivoting the pitman L. 
B is the cam which operates the traverse 
to the rod by a pin passing through the slot, 
bar or carriage C, which is provided with 
as indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
25 guides C to direct the threads to the spools 
In order conveniently to regulate the move 
or bobbins D, to be wound by the machine. 
ment of the traverse-bar, so that said move 
The calm B is mounted on a shaft b, which 
ment shall be equal on both sides of a cen 
shaft may be driven by any suitable means 
tral vertical line, the pitman L is preferably 
(said means forming no part of the invention) 
made adjustable with relation to the sliding 
rod K, as by pivoting the pitman to a collar 
3O to Cause the cam to rotate. The means shown 
in the drawings consist of a pulley E, mounted 
and securing said collar to the rod by a set 
On the shaft b, a belt e, passing over said pull 
screw r or the pitman may be slotted at its 
ley and over a pulley F on a shaft or studif, 
lower end, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 1, 
a pulley G on the shaft.f, and a belt h, pass 
so it may be pivoted to the rod K in the de 
35ing Over the pulley G and over a pulley H on 
sired relation thereto, as will be readily un 
the shaft J, to which last-mentioned shaft 
derstood. The same result may be obtained, 
the driving-pulley of the machine may be at 
also, by making the pitman adjustabie With 
relation to the rod M, as by furnishing the 
tached. 
The cam B operates a rod or bar K, which 
upper end of the pitman with a slot, as shown 
4O is arranged to slide in any suitable guides, 
by dotted lines in Fig. I, so the pitman may 
as k, on the frame of the machine. The lower 
be pivoted to the rod M in the desired rela 
tion thereto; or the pitman may be made in 
end of this rod or bar rests upon the cam, and 
two parts and these parts joined by a right 
to Said rod is pivoted one end of a pitman or 
connecting-rod L. The upper end of the pit 
and left hand screw connections, (shown by 
dotted lines in said figure.) 
45 man L is pivoted to a rod M, which is secured 
to a rock-shaft N, journaled or mounted in 
What we claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
the frame of the machine. This rock-shaft 
has an arm or arms O, (preferably two, one 
1. The combination of the cam, the sliding 
near each end,) which extend downwardly I rod, a pitman pivoted to the rod, a rock-shaft, 
7 O 
75 
95 
47,824 
O 
a rod attached to said shaft and pivoted to 
the pitman, the traverse bar or carriage, an 
arm or arms projecting from the rock-shaft 
and pivotally connected to the traverse-bar, 
and ways for the traverse-bar, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. The combination of ways or supports for 
the traverse-bar, the traverse-bar having pull 
ley's or rollers resting upon said ways, a rock 
shaft provided with an arm or arms pivot 
ally connected to the traverse-bar, a rod pro 
jecting from the rock-shaft, a pitman pivoted 
to said rod, a sliding rod pivoted to the pit 
man, and a cam for operating said sliding 
rod, Substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of the cam, the sliding 
rod, the adjustable pitman connected with 
Said sliding rod, a rock-shaft having a rod 
projecting therefrom and pivoted to the pit 
man, the traverse-bar, an arm or arms pro 
jecting from the rock-shaft and pivotally con 
nected to the traverse-bar, and Ways for Sup 
porting the traverse-bar, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. The combination of the cam, the sliding 
rod, the pitman pivoted to said rod, a rock 
shaft having an adjustable rod pivoted to the 
pitman, the traverse-bar, an arm or arms pro 
jecting from the rock-shaft and pivotally con 
nected to the traverse-bar, and ways for the 
traverse-bar, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of the cam B, the slid 
ing rod K, provided with an adjustable col 
lar r, the pitman L, pivoted to said collar, the 
rock-shaft N, provided with a collar or hub q, 
the rod M, adjustably secured to said collar 
and pivoted to the pitman, a traverse-bar C, 
ways P, for supporting the traverse-bar, and 
an arm or arms O, projecting from the rock 
shaft and pivoted to the traverse-bar, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
25 
35 
STEPHEN M. HAMBLIN. 
WILLIAM H. GOLDSMITH. . 
Witnesses: 
ARBA N. LINCOLN, 
ALFRED H. HOOD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US417926.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 417,926, 
 
F. A. LANE. 
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT CONTROLLER 
Patented Dec. 24, l889. 
 
Z 
In 
 
 
26% 
TT 
in Mui 
 
 
 
III 
i 
t 
 
N. Peters, Photo-lithographor, Washingtor, b, c, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERIC A. LANE, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO FRANK E. MORGAN, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRIC - CRC UT CONTROLLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 417,926, dated December 24, 1889. 
Application filed April 29, 1889, Serial No. 309,033, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FREDERIC A. LANE, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new 
Improvement in Electric-Circuit Controllers; 
and I do hereby declare the following, when 
takenin connection with accompanying draw 
ings and the letters of reference marked 
thereon, to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same, and which said drawings 
constitute part of this specification, and rep 
resent, in 
Figure 1, a face view of the apparatus, illus 
trating the circuits and operation; Fig. 2, a 
top view of the local-station mechanism rep 
resented in Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a detached view of 
the ratchet-lever and its contacts, enlarged, 
for the better illustration of the operation; 
Figs. 4 and 5, modifications. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in devices for limiting or controlling the time 
for which an electric circuit may be held 
broken or closed, and is applicable to signal 
ing devices and other purposes, as will more 
fully hereinafter appear. 
For convenience I shall describe the inven 
tion as applied for calls or signals. In the 
more general construction of such call-signal 
ing apparatus contacts are provided at a 
given point from whence the signal is to be 
sent, and the signal, as a bell at a distant 
point, is brought into circuit by these con 
tacts, and so that the bell will be sounded 
during the time which these contacts are held 
together-as, for illustration, in a call-bell, a 
button is provided at the point from whence 
the call is to be sounded. The bell at a dis 
tant point is in circuit with that contact, and 
so soon as the contacts are brought together, 
the circuit being closed, the operation of the 
bell commences, and will continue So long as 
those contacts are held together. This is 
many times a source of annoyance, as in 
door-bells, hotel-room calls, and other places 
where the signal may be prolonged at Will of 
the person operating the button. Again, as an 
other illustration, in railroad-signals, which 
are made automatic from one station or point 
to another distant station, the circuit being 
closed by an approaching train, so long as 
the train stands at that point the signal will 
sound. 
The object of my invention is to positively 
control an electric circuit, so that its time of 
operation shall be automatically limited to a 
predetermined extent and independent of the 
device by which the circuit was set into op 
eration; and the invention consists, princi 
pally, in a local electric circuit with a magnet 
and a circuit-breaker in said circuit, the said 
breaker being at the point from which the 
control is to be produced; a second circuit 
which is to be controlled, but independent of 
the said local circuit, the magnet of the local 
circuit having an armature-lever with a clock 
Work, and mechanism between said clock 
work and said armature-lever whereby the 
said clock-work maybe set into operation for 
a predetermined length of time; a circuit 
breaker in said Second circuit, and mechan 
ism between the said clock-work and said sec 
ond circuit-breaker whereby the said second 
circuit-breaker may be operated by the said 
clock-work and hold said circuit opened or 
closed, as the case may be, for a predeter 
mined length of time, as more fully hereinaf 
ter described. 
In the illustration, A represents a board 
upon which the mechanism at the station 
from which the signal is to be sent is ar 
ranged. 
B represents the magnet, arranged upon the 
board in the usual manner and provided 
with an armature-lever C, which is brought 
into action by the closing of the circuit. The 
two contacts a, b, forming a circuit-breaker, 
are arranged at some convenient where they 
may be mechanically brought together or 
automatically Separated, these contacts here 
represented as a common button.' The cir 
cuit is made through the battery, the magnet, 
and two said contacts, as represented, and so 
that by bringing the contacts together the ar 
mature-lever will be drawn to its magnet, as 
indicated in broken lines, Fig. 1. 
D represents the clock-work, which is pro 
vided with a common escapement-wheel E, 
from which a pendulum F extends. On one 
of the arbors G of this clock-work a ratchet 
Wheel Flis fixed. On this arbor G a lever I 
O 
25 
3O 
35 
45 
so 
95 
IOO 
2 
4.17,926 
is hung so as to swing in a plane at right all 
gles to the axis of the arbor G. One arm of 
this lever is provided with a suitable weight 
J, or known equivalent therefor, and the other 
5 arm extends toward the magnet and into the 
path of the free end of the armature-lever C. 
The lever I is provided with a spring-pawl IX, 
adapted to work in the teeth of the ratchet G. 
in one direction, but escape therefrom in the 
Io opposite direction. Normally, the magnet or 
local circuit being open, the armature-lever 
C stands away from the poles of the magnet, 
and the corresponding arm of the lever I rests 
against the armature-lver, as represented in 
I5 Fig. 1; but if the magnet-circuit be closed, as. 
by bringing the contacts ct b together, the 
armature lever C is drawn to its poies and 
imparts a corresponding movement to the le 
ver I of the clock-work, as also indicated in 
zo broken lines. In this movement of the lever 
I the pawl escapes the teeth of the ratchet 
wheel H. until the movement of the lever is 
completed. Then it engages the teeth of the 
ratchet, and so that when the magnet-circuit 
25 is broken, as by the separation of the contacts 
ab, the armature-lever C will rise or move 
away from its connection with the lever of 
the clock-work, thereby leaving that clock 
work lever free to be operated upon by the 
3o weight J, and this Weight, through the pawl 
Kimparts rotation to the arbor G, and thence 
to the escapement-wheel, causing the clock 
work to run until the lever I shall have re 
turned into contact with the armature-lever 
35 G, as represented in Fig. 1, at which point the 
clock-work ceases its operation. Consequently 
upon the closing of the magnet-circuit the 
clock-work is prepared for operation, but will 
be held in suspense so long as the magnet 
Upon the breaking 
of this magnet-circuit the clock-work will be 
free to operate for a predetermined length of 
time, that time being from the start of the 
clock-work until the lever of the clock-work 
45 shall have returned into contact with the 
armature-lever C. 
The clock-work is adapted to close the cir 
cuit with the distant-signaling device. As 
here represented, that signaling device is a 
5o bell mechanismL, such as commonly used for 
electric signaling-bells. (Not necessary to be 
illustrated or described.) 
A stationary contact d is arranged upon or 
near the clock-work, from which a wiree runs 
55 to the distant-signaling device, as L. This 
contact d is insulated from the clock-work, 
and from the clock-work a second wire fruns 
through the battery to the signal, thus bringing 
the clock-work and the signaling device into 
6o electric circuit independent of the local circuit. 
The lever I carries a contact.g., which is the 
termination of a spring-arm h, extending from 
the lever I. (Shown enlarged in Fig. 3.) The 
back of the contact d is toward the contact g, 
65 but the back insulated, as represented in Fig. 
3, so that should the contact g strike the said 
back the circuit will not be closed. As the 
4o circuit remains closed. 
 
7 O 
75 
- 
lever Irises under the action of the armature 
lever C, as before, described, and as indicated 
in broken lines, Fig. 3, the contact g rises, 
passes above the contact d into a position as 
seen in broken lines, Fig. 3, and so that as 
the lever I returns the contact g will pass 
down over the contact d. and make actual 
contact therewith, and during the time which 
the contact g occupies in passing over the 
contact d the signal-circuit will be closed and 
the signal operate; but as the lever I com 
pletes its downward movement the contact g 
escapes from the contact d and returns to its 
normal position, breaking that signal-circuit, 
As before described, the lever I will remain 
in the up position so long as the local or mag 
net circuit is closed; but instantly upon the 
breaking of that circuit, so as to release the 
armature-lever C, the clock-work commences 
its operation and brings the contacts g and 
d together, so as to close the signal-circuit 
and sound that signal, which sounding will 
continue so long as the contact g is in en 
gagement with the contact d. The time of 
sounding the signal therefore depends upon 
the length of the contact-surfaces d and g, and 
this may be greater or less, according to the 
length of signal required. 
The breaker for the signal-circuit may be 
otherwise arranged-say as represented in 
Fig. 4, in which a wheel like N is arranged 
upon one of the arbors of the clock-work, a 
portion of the periphery of which is insu 
lated, as at i. The contact d in the form of a 
brush is arranged to bear upon the periphery 
of the wheel N, and so that normally it stands 
against the insulated portion of the periph 
ery; but as the wheel revolves the metallic 
surface of the wheel comes into contact with 
the brush and closes the circuit during the 
time which the wheel should present such 
metallic contact to the contact d. The extent 
of contact may be varied according to cir 
cumstances. This illustration will be suffi 
cient to indicate that the invention is not to 
be limited to any particular construction of 
circuit-breaker, 
The illustration which I have made of 
closing the local circuit will be sufficient to 
the understanding of the invention. The 
device for closing this circuit will vary ac 
cording to circumstances, as in the use of 
railroads, to indicate the position of a train, 
the local circuits maybe automatically closed 
by the train itself in the usual and well 
known manner of closing a circuit by means 
of a moving train. 
In illustrating the signaling-circuit I have 
represented the clock-work as being directly 
in the circuit, and this I prefer; but it is not 
essential to the invention that the signaling 
or clock-work circuit should be made through 
the clock-work itself, as it may be made 
without placing the clock-work directly in 
such circuit, as seen in Fig. 5, in which the 
circuit-breaker is represented as consisting 
of two contacts clandl, arranged distant from 
. 
95 
IOO 
O 
If 5 
I 25 
4.17,926 
8 
ratchet-lever extending into the path of the 
said armature-lever, and whereby under the 
movement of the armature-lever a vibratory 
movement will be imparted to said ratchet 
lever, a power applied to said ratchet-lever in 
opposition to the said armature-lever, a second 
circuit through said clock-work independent 
of the said first circuit, a circuit-breakerin said 
second circuit and adapted to be operated 
by the said clock-work, with one or more 
signaling devices in said second circuit, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination of a magnet, its arma 
ture-lever, an electric circuit through said 
magnet, a local-circuit breaker in said mag 
net - circuit, a clock - work having a ratchet 
upon one of its arbors, a lever carrying a 
pawl adapted to engage the said ratchet 
in one direction, but escape therefrom in 
the opposite direction, the said ratchet 
lever adapted to engage with the armature 
lever, and whereby said clock-work may be 
set into operation for a predetermined length 
of time, a stationary contact, as d, a spring 
arm, as h, extending from said ratchet-lever 
and carrying a second contact g, a second 
electric circuit through said clock-work, the 
said contacts forming a circuit-breaker for 
said second circuit, with one or more signal 
devices in said second circuit, substantially 
as described. 
FREDERIC A. LANE. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN E. EARLE, 
FRED. C. EARLE. 
45 
55 
65 
each other and presenting a length of face to 
ward each other corresponding to the length of 
signal required, and the spring-arm h, carry 
ing the contact g, as before, may pass up 
over the back of the contact l, as before, and 
return between the two contacts l d, as indi 
cated in Fig. 5, the metallic end 
g of the arm 
h. making engagement with both the contacts 
ld during its descent, so as to close the cir 
cuit during the time of such contact. 
I have illustrated and described the appa 
ratus as working upon open circuits. If 
closed circuits are desired, the reverse opera 
tion will be understood without further illus 
tration or description. The invention is 
therefore not to be understood as limited to 
Open circuits. 
I have described the invention as applied 
to signaling or calling purposes. This will be 
sufficient to enable others skilled in the art 
to apply the invention to the controlling of a 
circuit for other purposes where it is desir 
able that an electric circuit should be set into 
Operation, as Occasion may require, and that 
operation continue for a predetermined length 
of time independent of the device or devices 
by which the circuit was so set into operation. 
I claim 
1. The combination of a magnet, its arma 
ture-lever, an electric circuit through said 
magnet, a circuit-breaker arranged in said 
magnet-circuit, a clock-work, one of its ar 
bors provided with a toothed ratchet, a lever 
hung upon the said arbor carrying a pawl 
adapted to engage said ratchet, the said 
o 
I5 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418026.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. J. HO GARTH, 
DEVICE FOR DISTRIBUTING INSECT POWDER 
No. 418,026, 
Patented Dec. 24, 1889. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. J. HO GARTH, OF COLUMBIA, TEXAS. 
DEVICE FOR DISTRIBUTING INSECT-PowDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,026, dated December 24, 1889. 
Application filed July 15, 1889, Serial No, 317,593, (No model.) . 
55 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. J. Ho 
GARTH, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Columbia, in the county of Brazoria 
and State of Texas, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Devices for 
Distributing Insect-Powder, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact specifica 
tion. 
My invention has reference to devices for 
sprinkling poisonous powders for the pur 
pose of exterminating insects, and it relates 
more particularly to a device for distributing 
such powder upon cotton or other plants while 
growing in the field. 
The object of my invention is, first, to pro 
vide a device of this kind which will be sim 
ple of construction, cheap, durable, and ef 
fective, and, second, to provide such a device 
with means whereby it may be conveniently 
carried on horseback or on any vehicle while 
being operated in the field. 
The invention consists, essentially, of a pair 
of bellows secured together and each having 
an internal sifter arranged longitudinally 
therein, so as to deliver the powder to the 
discharge end of the bellows in proper quan 
tities in a comminuted state, and a pair of 
hinged clamps serving for the attachment of 
the device to a saddle and being adapted to 
be folded up out of the Way when the appa 
ratus is to be used in a Wagon or otherwise, 
as hereinafter more fully described, 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this application and which illustrate 
my invention, Figure I is a perspective view 
of the apparatus with portions broken away, 
showing the internal parts. Fig. II is a gen 
eral view showing the device as applied to 
the pommel of a saddle. 
11 represent the two bellows, of ordinary 
construction, secured to a base-board 2, in 
practice about six inches apart, and provided 
with the usual funnel-shaped discharge ends 
or nozzles 3. The upper side of each bellows, 
however, is open and provided with a sieve 
4, composed of fine wire or other suitable 
gauze, and secured to the bellows over this 
sieve is a receptacle 5, for containing the Sup 
ly of poisonous powder, provided with a 
sliding lid 6, whereby such receptacle may 
be charged from time to time. This recepta 
cle 5, having sieve 4 for its bottom, ishinged 
to the inner top edge of nozzle 3 by some 
flexible material to allow its other end up-and 
down movement. Pivoted at 7 to both sides 
of each of these receptacles 5 are cranks 8, 
which are connected together by means of 
rods 9. The rods 9 are joined at their mid 
length by means of a suitable handle 10, by 
which pressure may be applied to both rods, 
and consequently to both bellows, simultane 
ously with one hand of the operator, the 
Small cranks 8 serving to take up the longi 
tudinal movement. The bellows, of course, 
are provided in their lower sides and through 
the base-board 2 with suitable valves 16 for 
the admission of air. 
Secured to the outer end of each of the 
nozzles 3 is a telescopic tube or pipe 11, in 
clining downwardly slightly, so as to convey 
the poison more directly onto the plants. 
These tubes are composed of any desired 
number of sections, whereby their length 
may be adjusted to accommodate the device 
to the width of the rows of plants, and the 
outer end of each tube is preferably provided 
with a rose 12 for the more equal distribution 
of the powder. 
are two clamps or dogs 13, whose inner or 
adjacent ends are notched or concave, as at 
14, for the purpose of surrounding and en 
gaging the pommel 15 of the saddle. As the 
distance between the ends of these two dogs 
is less than the width of the pommel, it will 
be understood that while the board 2 rests 
flat upon the upper end of the pommel the 
dogs will grip the latter and act as toggles, 
increasing their grip with the increase of 
pressure upon the board 2. If desired, these 
dogs or clamps may be folded flat against the 
under side of the board 2 and the apparatus 
carried through the field in a wagon, it being 
placed athwart the body of the wagon on the 
seat Or any suitable board, or it may rest 
upon the knees of the operator while he sits 
upon the seat, and thus, by carrying a sup 
ply of insect-powder in the wagon or vehicle, 
it is possible to poison from twenty-five to 
thirty acres per day in a most effectual and 
convenient manner, 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
The powder having been placed in the recep 
Hinged to the under side of the board 28o 
75 
90 
95 
OC) 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
2 
418,026 
O 
I5 
2O 
25 
. 
. . 
tacle 5, having sieve-bottom, an up-and-down 
motion is imparted to handle 10, which im 
parts the same motion to the inner ends of 
the receptacles 5, (forming the tops of the 
pair of bellows,) causing the powder in said 
receptacles to shift from end to end, which 
agitation sifts the powder through the sieve 
4 into the bellows proper, when the action of 
the air carries it out through the nozzles in 
a fine spray. 
Having thus described my invention, the fol 
lowing is what I claim as new therein and de 
sire to secure by Letters. Patent: . 
. 
1. In an insect-powder duster, the combi 
nation, with the bellows, of a sieve arranged 
therein, said sieve being substantially paral 
lel with the top and bottom and dividing the 
bellows into two compartments, substantially 
as herein set forth. 
2. In an insect-powder duster, the combi 
nation, with the bellows having a sieve air 
ranged longitudinally therein, of a receptacle 
arranged above said sieve and provided with 
a removable cover, substantially as set forth. 
3. In an insect-powder duster, the combi 
nation of the body of the bellows and the 
perforate wall or sieve arranged longitudi 
nally therein, dividing the bellows into two 
compartments, with a nozzle or an air-out 
let communicating With one compartment, 
whereby material placed in the other com 
partment on the opposite side of the sieve is 
agitated by the operation of the bellows and 
delivered to the air-blast in a comminuted 
state, as explained. 
4. In an insect-powder duster, the combi 
35 
40 
45 
55 
nation of a pair of bellows secured together 
with their nozzles pointing in opposite direc 
tions and a handle for operating said bellows 
simultaneously, substantially as set forth. 
5. In an insect-powder duster, the combi 
nation, with a pair of bellows secured to 
gether, of the rods 9, pivoted to said bellows, 
and an operating-handle connecting said 
rods together, substantially as set forth. . 
6. In an insect-powder duster, the combi 
nation, with a pair of bellows, of the base 
i board 2, upon which said bellows are secured, 
and the dogs 13, hinged to said board and 
having notched ends for engaging the sad 
dle-pommel, substantially as set forth. 
7. In an insect-powder duster, the combi 
nation, with a pair of bellows, of the base 
board 2, upon which said bellows are secured, 
and a pair of dogs hinged to the under side 
of said base-board and having notched ends 
for engaging the saddle-pommel, substan 
tially as set forth. 
8. In an insect-powder duster, the combi 
nation, with a pair of bellows, of the base 
board 2, upon which said bellows are secured, 
the cranks 8, pivoted to said bellows, the rods 
9, pivoted to said cranks, the handle 10, con 
necting said rods, and the dogs 13, pivoted to 
the under side of the board 2 and having 
notched ends for engaging the saddle-pom 
mel, Substantially as set forth. 
- 
WILLIAM H. J. HOGARTH. 
Witnesses: 
N. EISEN, 
W. H. SHARP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418126.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 418,126. 
7%.7 / 
 
 
 
 
C. K. HANN. 
WINDOW SOREEN. 
Patented DeC. 24, 1889. 
Jaz? 
SNSSXS N 
NSS 
N 
N 
22 
INVENTOR 
O4.4% (76/ 
By 
ATIORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HESTER. K. HANN, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
WNDOW. SC REEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,126, dated December 24, 1889. 
Application filed July 12, 1889, Serial No,317,358, (No model.) 
To all who7, it nucly concern: 
Be it known that I, CHESTER. K. HANN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Co 
lumbus, in the county of Franklin and State 
of Ohio, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Window-Screens, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the improvement 
of window-screens, and has particular rela 
tion to that class wherein spring actuated 
Screens are so connected with the window 
Sash as to follow the same. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
an upper and lower spring-actuated window 
screen, said screens being detachably secured 
to the window-sash and adapted to move with 
the same; to combine with an ordinary spring 
roller and a screen Wound thereon a superior 
form of roller and screen-cover of such con 
struction as to facilitate the connection of 
the screen and window-frame; to so construct 
said roller-cover as to facilitate the tighten 
ing of the spring; to so connect the screens, 
window-frame, and sashes as to cover at all 
times any opening formed by the raising or 
lowering of either sash, and to construct and 
arrange the same in a simple and inexpensive 
These objects I accomplish in the 
manner. 
manner illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view in elevation of the in 
ner side of a window, showing the sashes 
raised and lowered, respectively, and show 
ing my improved screens connected there 
with. Fig. 2 is an enlarged central vertical 
section of the upper portion of Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a transverse section of the rollers, taken 
on line acac of Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a vertical lon 
gitudinal section of the roller cover or case, 
with the screen and its roller thereto attached, 
showing for convenience its central portion 
broken away. Fig. 5 is a transverse section 
taken on line if y of Fig. 4, and Fig. 6 is a 
view in detail of a portion of the roller-cover. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
A represents a window-frame, Cl, the upper 
sash, and b the lower sash. 
c represents an ordinary spring-roller of 
that class wherein an internally - located 
spring S (shown dotted in Fig. 4) is placed 
under tension by rotating one of the end bear 
ing-pins of the roller. The roller herein shown 
differs from said ordinary roller in having 
omitted there from the usual means for auto 
matically holding the spring under tension. 
d represents a screen, which preferably 
consists of fine wire-netting, but which may 
be formed of any suitable material. This 
screen d is wound upon the roller c and has 
one of its ends secured thereto in the man 
ner prescribed for securing curtains to roll 
ers. Made to surround the roller c is a cy 
lindrical case or covere, formed of tin or other 
suitable material, of greater circumference 
than said roller and of a length correspond 
ing with the length of said roller measured 
from the extremities of the bearing-pins of 
the latter. This case or cover e is provided 
with a longitudinal slot f, extending through 
out its length. The roller c is supported 
within said case at one end by having its 
short cylindrical bearing -pin g journaled 
within a socket h, formed on the central por 
tion of the inner side of a cap i, made to fit 
over one end of said roller-cover. This cap i. 
is, as shown, provided with an opening or slotg' 
in its flange, which is adapted to form a con 
tinuation of the case or cover slotif. The oppo 
site end of the roller c is supported or seated 
within a U-shaped projection k, formed on 
the inner side and central portion of a cap 27, 
made to fit, as shown, over the end of the case 
e, as prescribed for the cap i. This cap n is 
provided with an opening n' in its flange, 
which, when the screen is in position for use, 
forms a continuation of the case or cover slot 
f. Formed with the flange of the cap m is an 
inwardly-projecting tongue n, which, as 
shown, is adapted to enter an opening in in 
that portion of the case-cover which is within 
said flange. This connection of the cap and 
cover serves the double purpose of holding 
the cap, so that the slots n' and f will regis 
ter, and to hold the roller-spring uniler ten 
sion. 
The screen d, as shown in the drawings, is 
adapted to be drawn from the roller c through 
the cover and cap slots f, g, and m'. 
Projecting outwardly from the flat face of 
each of the caps i and n is one or more per 
forated ears or attachment lugs p. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
Od 
418,126 
O 
The description of the roller, its cover, and 
Screen above given is applicable to both the 
upper and lower rollers. 
The upper-roller cover e, including its end 
Caps, is of such length as to fit snugly be 
tween the sides of the window-frame adjoin 
ing the upper end thereof. This case is so 
located as to be in close proximity to the in 
ner side of the upper sash, the upper portion 
of the side window-strips a' being cut away 
to receive the roller-cover caps, which are pro 
vided with projecting ears p, having screw or 
nail holes therein, through which screws or 
nails are driven into the window-frame to se 
cure the cover-caps in their position against 
said window-frame. In order to close the 
Space which may exist between the upper side 
of the roller-cover and the upper cross-piece 
of the window-frame, I preferably secure to 
the under side of said window-frame cross 
piece a cleat q, corresponding in thickness 
with the usual cross cleats or strips r. The 
roller-cover is so placed that its slot f will be in 
close proximity to the upper sash or sash 
Way, and the screen being drawn through said 
cover-slot and the cap-slots, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2 of the drawings, is detachably secured 
to the button-heads s, projecting from the in 
ner face of the upper cross-piece of the up 
per sash. 
As shown in the drawings, the screen is of 
such width as to be made to pass, when the 
sash is being lowered, behind the side strips 
a? of the window-frame, thus insuring the 
complete closing of the frame. 
The reference-letters herein used are, for 
convenience, made to apply to either the up 
per or lower screen. The lower-screen cover 
is connected with the window-frame in the 
manner prescribed for the upper cover, ex 
cept that it is so located as to adjoin the base 
of the window-frame and the lower sash, the 
screen of said lower roller being detachably 
secured, as described, for the upper screen, to 
the inner face of the lower cross-piece of the 
lower sash. 
By the herein construction it will be seen 
that when the upper sash is lowered the up 
per screen will be drawn downward and the 
lower screen will be drawn upward by the 
upward movement of the lower sash, said 
downward and upward movement of the 
screens operating to rotate the rollers, and 
thus increase the tension of the springs 
therein in the usual manner. When the 
sashes are closed, the screens will be taken 
up and again wound upon the rollers by the 
tension of the roller-spring. As usual in this 
class of rollers, it is necessary to give the 
springs a certain amount of tension before 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
the rollers are placed in their position in the 
window. This I accomplish by rotating the 
cover-cap m, which, through the connection 
of its U-shaped bearing k and bearing-pin 
at that end of the roller, will operate to turn 
said bearing-pin, and thus place the roller 
spring under tension, in the usual manner. 
The above-described rotation of the cap.m. 
for the purpose of tightening the spring can 
only be accomplished by having the entire 
screen rolled within the cover e, thus pre 
venting any interference of the screen with 
the turning of the cap, which might be oc 
casioned at the point where the screen passes 
through the slot of the cap-flange. While 
the cap is being thus rotated, it will be seen 
that the tongue in thereof will bear against 
the periphery of the roller-cover and that the 
cap will be prevented from returning by the 
engagement of said tongue with the cap 
tongue opening n. 
In order to prevent the screen from escap 
ing the grasp of the hand while the spring 
is being tightened and yet allow the screen 
to be entirely covered by the case e, I attach 
one or more loops t to the free end of the 
screen, which, during said tightening process, 
may be looped over a button-headt, made to 
project from the periphery of the case. 
By the herein-described construction it will 
be seen that when the screens are not in use. 
they may be detached from the window-sash 
and drawn into their covers. It will also be) 
observed that the construction and operation 
of the herein-described Screens Will be in ex 
pensive and simple. 
I am aware that, spring-actuated screens, 
have been incased and attached to the sash 
of windows, but these inventions differ from 
mine in points of construction. 
I claim 
The combination, with a window-frame and 
its sashes, of a spring-roller c, sereen dwound 
thereon, case or cover e, having slotted open 
ings f and perforation in, surrounding said 
roller, and cover-caps and in, having slots g 
and m', forming a continuation of cover-slot 
f, and having tonguen, adapted to engage with 
perforation n, said case or covering support 
ing, as described, the roller-bearing pins, said 
case, its roller, and screen being secured, as 
described, in the upper and a similar one in 
the lower part of a window-frame, on the in 
ner side thereof, and said screens being de 
tachably secured to said window-sashes, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
CHESTER. K. HANN. 
In presence of- 
CLYDE LEE, 
C. C. SHEPHERD. 
- 
75 
85 
god 
95 
CO 
Id5 
IO 
. I; 15 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418226.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 48226, 
J, T, ROBBINS. 
STOVE-OR FURNACE, 
2 
 
Patented Dec. 31, 1889. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
  
 
ea 
2 
2. 
2 
2222222222222 
RStarter 
A " " ) 
. 
2 
it 
E 
wVA v. 
 
 
f 
AxvAYYxxv.v.v.a.a. YaYsAAAYYYaaaaavu 
2 
 
 
ar aw 
 
X. 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. T. ROBBINS, OF NEWTON, IOW.A. 
STOVE OR FURNAC E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,226, dated December 31, 1889. 
Application filed September 10, 1888, Serial No. 285,074, (No model.) 
55 
- 
20 
25 
5 
IC) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. T. ROBBINS, a 
citizen of the United States of America, and 
a resident of Newton, in the county of Jasper 
and State of Iowa, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Stoves or Furnaces, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the stove or furnace 
for which United States Letters Patent No. 
366,255 were issued to me July 12, 1887; and 
it consists, first, in the construction and com 
bination of an auxiliary cylinder within the 
chamber under the grate; second, in combin 
ing an open-ended tube with the auxiliary 
cylinder and stove to maintain an equalized 
temperature within a room; third, in the con 
struction and arrangement of a Water-reser 
voir, a double wall, and two doors, with the 
top, for the purpose of distributing vapor and 
hot air to the fire to promote combustion and 
to prevent the escape of gas while the doors 
are open. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is a 
vertical sectional view of one of my improved 
stoves. Fig. 2 is a sectional view through the 
line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a view looking 
down upon the base from the point of eleva 
tion indicated by line 22 in Fig. 1. 
A is an open-ended auxiliary cylinder that 
extends horizontally through the lower cyl 
inder B, and is fixed to the edges of corre 
sponding openings in the cylinder in such a 
manner that the products of combustion will 
be on the outside of the wall of the auxiliary 
cylinder and cold air admitted from outside 
of the cylinder to the inside of the radiator, 
C represents an ornamental filigree fixed 
in the open ends of the radiator A. 
D is a tube formed on or fixed to the cen 
tral portion of the auxiliary cylinder to ex 
tend outward through an opening in the cyl 
inder B and into an open-ended tube F, that 
extends vertically through the base G in such 
45 a manner that the products of combustion 
will envelop the lower end of the tube to aid 
in heating cold air that enters its bottom. 
H is a U-shaped open-ended radiator com 
bined with the base G at its lower end and 
with the double-walled top of the stove at its 
upper end by means of tubes J and 2 to carry 
of odors and gases escaping from the fuelin ever the damper in the tube is open. 
the chamber J, and also in Such a manner 
that the products of combustion can be cir 
culated around the annular deflector IK in 
the base G at pleasure by simply adjusting 
the damper L in the top of the tube D. 
: (Shown in Fig. 2.) 
m is a grate-support fixed in the top portion 
i of the cylinder B to retain a grate under the 
fuel-chamber J in such a manner that the 
products of combustion will pass down 
through the cylinder B and around the aux 
iliary cylinder A and then through an open 
ended tube n, that is fixed in the cylinder B 
and the tube H to establish communication 
between them. 
- 
P is a jacket fixed around the top portion 
of the fuel-chamber J, and P is a doorway 
for introducing fuel, 
r is a door hinged to the jacket to swing 
inward and upward, as indicated by dotted 
lines in Fig. 1, so that it will be automatically 
closed by force of gravity. 
r' is a rod hinged to the lower part of the 
door r to serve as a means for opening and 
propping the door open. 
i' is an open-ended tube that extends 
through the double wall of the top. It is 
provided with a damper to close the inner 
end thereof whenever desired, and it has per 
forations that will allow air to pass from the 
outside of the top to the space between the 
wall of the fuel-chamber J and the jacket P, 
and from thence down to the combustion 
chamber under the grate. 
S is a water-reservoir fixed in the top of the 
fuel-chamber, so that the vapor generated 
therein and escaping therefrom through the 
opening in its top will mingle with the air 
between the jacket P and the fuel-chamber J. 
and pass down therewith to aid in promoting 
combustion. 
The tube No. 1 connects the fuel-chamber 
With the tube II in Such a manner that odors 
or gases in the fuel-chamber will be carried 
off direct into the escape flue or pipe that is 
connected with the top of the tube H when 
the damper in the tube is open. 
The No. 2 tube, that connects the jacket P 
with the tube FI, will carry off gas and offen 
sive odor from the inside of the jacket P when 
35 
75 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
418,226 
IO 
When the top portion of the stove is opened 
to place fuel in the magazine and water in 
the reservoir while there is fire in the stove, 
the dampers in the tubes Nos. 1 and 2 must 
be opened before the top of the stove is opened 
and closed when the top of the stove is closed, 
as required, to shut off direct connection and 
cause the gases to descend through the grate 
at the bottom of the fuel to aid in promoting 
combustion. 
An auxiliary grate located over the ash-pan 
in the bottom of the stove will prevent pieces 
of fuel from getting into the ash-pan and 
will retain them in position, where they will 
continue to burn and to be consumed as re 
quired to prevent waste of fuel. 
I claim as my invention 
1. An open-ended auxiliary cylinder having 
an open-ended branch extending laterally, in 
combination with a cylinder in a stove and 
an open-ended tube outside of said cylinder 
for the purposes of heating and circulating 
air in a building. 
2. The auxiliary cylinder A, having a branch 
25 
35 
40 
D, in combination with a cylinder B and a 
tube F, substantially as shown and described, 
for the purposes stated. 
3. The combination of the auxiliary cylin 
der A, having a branchD, and the open-ended 
tube F with the cylinder B and the base G, 
to operate in the manner set forth, for the 
purposes stated. 
4. The combination of the jacketP, having 
a doorway P and a hinged door r, with the 
fuel-chamber J and the reservoirs, to operate 
in the manner set forth. 
5. The grate-support m, having radial pro 
jections extending downward and outward to 
engage the top portion of the cylinder B, in 
combination with a fuel-chamber J, having 
an open bottom to allow fuel therein to rest 
upon a grate placed upon the support m, for 
the purposes stated. 
JOSEPH. T. ROBBINS. 
Witnesses: 
O. WOLKERTS, 
THOMAS G. ORWIG. 
r 
. . 
. 
. .-- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418326.txt	(No Model.) 
N, WASHBURN. 
APPARATUS FOR BURNING CRUDE PETROLEUM, 
No. 418,326, 
Patented Dec. 31, 1889. 
 
ava-erezoz7 
726/272-22s22ze2-7e 
34----- 
N. perers. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NATHAN WASHBURN, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
APPARATUS FOR BURNING CRUDE PETRO LEU M. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,826, dated December 31, 1889. 
Application filed January 2, l889, Serial No, 295,204, (No model.) 
55 
75 
5 
25 
35 
45 
To d/(, Luhon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, NATHAN WASHIBURN, of 
Boston, county of Suffolk, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvementin Appa 
ratus for Burning Crude Petroleum, of which 
the following description, in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters on the drawings representing like 
parts. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a novel apparatus for burning petroleum and 
other oils, it being especially adapted for 
burning crude petroleum containing heavy 
hydrocarbons. 
Prior to my present invention I am aware 
that numerous attempts have been made to 
burn crude petroleum; but so far as I am 
aware such attempts have been unsuccessful, 
Owing to the imperfect combustion of the oil, 
the lighter oils being consumed, while the 
heavier hydrocarbons were deposited in the 
burner in the form of soot or black residuum. 
In my experiments I have discovered and 
practically demonstrated that crude petro 
leum may be successfully burned by regulat 
ing the supply of oxygen or air and control 
ling the direction of the flame, as will be de 
scribed, by a suitable damper. 
My improved apparatus is especially adapt 
ed to be used where a high heat is required 
Such, for instance, as in furnaces. The oil 
to be consumed is fed into a preferably V 
shaped trough or burner suspended in the 
combustion - chamber and provided, prefer 
ably, with an elongated opening or duct liav 
ing its side walls extended up into and down 
below the said burner, the said duct or open 
ing leading the flame from above to the under 
side of the burner to thereby enable the said 
burner to be heated on its under side. 
The particular features of my invention 
will be pointed out in the claims at the end 
of this specification. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of one form of 
furnace provided with a petroleum-burner 
embodying my invention; Fig. 2, a section of 
Fig. 1 on line a ac; Fig. 3, a plan view of one 
form of burner; Fig. 4, a section of Fig. 3 on 
line y J.; Figs. 5 and 6, modified forms of 
burners to be referred to, Fig. 6 being a sec 
tion of Fig. 5 on line y' y'. 
The furnace A, composed of fire-brick or 
other material capable of withstanding a sub 
stantially-high heat and provided with a com 
bustion-chamber A, may be of any desired or 
usual construction. The combustion-cham 
ber contains within it, as herein shown, two 
suspended trough-shaped receptacles C. C.", 
constituting burners, they being supported, 
as shown, at their ends upon ledges or bars (i. 
on the side walls of the furnace. The burner 
C, is preferably provided with an elongated 
opening or duct a, having its walls a' ex 
tended up into and down below the bottom 
thereof, the upper ends of the said walls be 
ing extended, preferably, to nearly the top of 
the receptacle Ct. The burner a may be pro 
vided with an opening or duct C, or it may 
be made without it, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The oil to be consumed, preferably crude 
petroleum, may be fed into the burner C. from 
a pipe b, connected to a suitable oil-supply, 
the said pipe being in practice provided with 
a suitable cock or valve b', (see Fig. 1) by 
which the amount of oil supplied. to the 
burner may be controlled. 
The furnace A is provided, as shown, with 
a vertically-sliding frame or damper b, hav 
ing a door thinged thereto, as at b. The fur 
nace front has a lower casting or frame b, 
having a door b' hinged thereto, as at b, the 
door b constituting a lower damper. The 
upper damper b is made adjustable Verti 
cally with relation to the lower damper, as 
herein shown, by means of rack-bars C, in 
mesh with pinions c' on a shaft c, provided 
with a handle c, the said damper b being 
held in adjusted position, as shown, by a 
ratchet-wheel c on the shaft c, and a pawl 
c", secured to the furnace. The upper damper 
is movable in suitable guides c. 
In practice I have ascertained that a nost 
perfect combustion of the oil may be ob 
tained with a burner having the duct or open 
ing a by adjusting the upper damper b so 
that its lower edge will be near the level of 
the lower end of the walls of the duct a, sub 
stantially as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, whereby 
the air to support combustion is admitted 
below the burner Cl. The draft of air pass 
ing under the burner a draws the flame from 
the surface of the burning oil in the burner 
a down through the duct a, from which the 
said flame issues free from unconsumed car 
95 
CO 
2 
418,826 
bon and substantially white, thus indicating 
perfect combustion. By adjusting the damper 
b the amount of oxygen or air supplied may 
be controlled, so that the desired amount 
thereof necessary to produce perfect combus 
tion of the oil may be admitted, which may 
be ascertained by the condition or appear 
ance of the flame. The door b of the lower 
casting b may be opened at its bottom, more 
or less, to supply air to the lower burner C.' 
below the same, and be kept in position by 
the set-screw d. I prefer to employ the aux 
iliary burner a', in connection with the 
burner a, to catch the oil which may flow 
over, the top of the walls (t", the ignition of 
such oil in the auxiliary burner heating the 
burner a on its under side; but, if desired, 
the burner a may be entirely dispensed with 
and the supply of oil controlled, so that only 
such an amount of oil will be admitted or 
supplied to the burner a, as will be consumed 
in the said burner without overflowing the 
Sale. 
The combustion of the oil is regulated 
chiefly by the damper b. If it is desired to 
retard the combustion or, as it were, to deaden 
the fire, the door b will be opened by means 
of the thumb piece or nut d, so as to admit 
a greater amount of air above the burner Ct. 
than is admitted below it, thus decreasing 
Or substantially stopping the passage of 
flame down through the duct a* to heat the 
burner on its under side, the said door being 
moved into the dotted-line position, Fig. 2. 
When the door b is opened, only a surface 
combustion of the oil takes place, and the said 
surface-combustion is imperfect, owing to the 
excess of oxygen, and the heat of the flame is 
diminished in direct proportion to or accord 
ing to the amount of air admitted through the 
door b. In this manner the heat derived from 
the burning oil may be controlled within lim 
its-as, for instance, if a high heat is required 
the doorb will be closed to cut off the supply 
of air above the burner, and if a low heat is 
desired the door will be wide open, while if a 
heat between the extremes is desired the 
door will be opened, more or less, between its 
extreme open and closed positions. The 
flame passing down through the duct a heats 
the oil in the burner a and converts the lighter 
oils into vapor, while the heavier hydrocar 
bons are heated to such degree as to disinte 
grate them or put them in condition to be 
easily consumed, so that the crude oil sup 
plied to the burner is wholly consumed, 
thereby obviating a deposit or residuum in 
the said burner. 
By means of the damper, herein shown as 
having a door, it is possible to determine the 
quantity of atmospheric air to be admitted 
both below and above the burner to establish 
and maintain more or less perfect combustion. 
Instead of providing the burner C. With a 
continuous flame-duct a, I may employ a 
number of tubes a, extended above and be 
low the bottom of the burner, as shown in 
Figs. 5 and 6. The tubes as in practice will 
be placed substantially near each other to 
form practically a continuous slot or duct, and 
the said tubes in practice will be of substan 
tially-large size or area, so as to avoid chok 
ing up, which practical experience has dem 
onstrated will take place if the tubes are of 
Substantially-small area. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with the fire-box of a 
furnace, of a fluid-burner located therein and 
consisting of a trough or receptacle provided 
with a duct having side walls extended up 
into and below the said receptacle, a fluid 
supply for said burner, and a damper, Sub 
stantially as described, adjustable with rela 
tion to the said burner, whereby the air to 
support combustion may be admitted under 
the burner to draw the flame in the burner 
down through the said duct to effect a per 
fect combustion and obtain a maximum heat 
or may be directed down upon the oil in the 
burner to produce an imperfect combustion 
and thereby a minimum heat, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination, with the fire-box of a 
furnace, of a fluid-burner located therein and 
consisting of a trough or receptacle provided 
with a substantially-continuous duct ex 
tended longitudinally the length of the said 
trough and having side walls extended up 
into and below the said receptacle, a fluid 
supply for said burner, and a damper, sub 
stantially as described, adjustable with rela 
tion to the said burner, whereby the air to 
support combustion may be admitted under 
the burner to draw the flame in the burner 
down through the said duct to effect a per 
fect combustion and obtain a maximum heat 
or may be directed down upon the oil in the 
burner to produce an imperfect combustion 
and thereby a minimum heat, substantially 
as described. 
3. The herein-described fluid-burner, con 
sisting of a trough-shaped receptacle pro 
vided with a substantially-continuous duct 
extended the length of the said receptacle 
and having side walls extended up into and 
down below the said receptacle, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
- 
NATHAN WASHIBURN. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. H. CHURCHILL, 
BLANCHE DEWAR. 
75 
90 
TOO 
IIC) 
IIS 
O 
25 
35 
- 4O 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418426.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No, 418,426, 
Patented Dec. 31, 1889, 
F, THONE, 
INCANDESCENT ELECTRIC LAMP SOCKET. 
 
 
  
E. ACAAR 
A. : 
iRail 22 
 
M, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK THONE, OF 
OSKALOOSA, IOWA. 
INCAN DESCENT-ELECTRIC - LAMP SOCKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,426, dated December 31, 1889. 
Application filed August li l888, Serial No. 28l,637, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANK THONE, of Oska 
loosa, in the county of Mahaska and State of 
Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Electric Lights, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates primarily to sockets 
or holder's for incandescent electric lamps, 
and is as to its principal features in the na 
ture of an improvement upon the device for 
which Letters Patent were granted to me 
bearing date the 13th day of March, 1888, and 
numbered 379,255. 
The present improvements are designed to 
simplify and cheapen the construction of the 
Socket, to prevent the shrinkage and conse 
quent loosening of the filling-piece or block 
which supports the contacts, and to adapt the 
SOcket to Support a shade. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my improved device, the lamp globe 
and shade being shown in dotted lines; Fig. 
2, a vertical sectional view; Fig. 3, a perspec 
tive view of the switch and connections, the 
Supporting-block being shown in dotted lines; 
Fig. 4, a top plan view of the shell with the 
cap removed, and Fig. 5 a sectional view on 
the line acac of Fig. 4. 
In the practical use of devices of this char 
acter considerable difficulty has been experi 
enced through the contraction of the filling 
piece or block which carries the contacts, and 
this notwithstanding the fact that the mate 
rial known as vulcanized fiber' has been 
employed for such block or filling. Under 
my former construction the spring by which 
the slide or switch bar was retained at differ 
ent adjustments projected through the side 
of the shell, producing a somewhat unsightly 
appearance and causing considerable wear of 
the spring and the shell wherever one bore 
upon the other, and no provision was made 
for the application of a shade, which is found 
to be generally desirable. These objections 
to the former construction are remedied in 
the new one, as I will now explain. 
A indicates a tubular shell provided at one 
end with slots a, of the form shown in Figs. 1 
and 2, and usual to lamp-sockets of this class, 
to receive studs or lugs of the lamp-neck, 
which, with the slots, constitute a bayonet 
joint. 
Within the shell A is a block B, of insulat 
ing material, which carries the contact-springs 
CD and the attaching-arms EF and the fast 
ening or securing devices thereof, the latter 
consisting of bolts with rounded heads, upon 
which the spring-fingers b and cof the sliding 
switch-bar G bear, as hereinafter explained. 
The contact-springs C and D are designed to 
bear upon and make electrical contact with 
the terminals of the lamp when the latter is 
applied to the socket or holder, and the arms 
E F, which are furnished with binding-screws 
d, are for the attachment of the wires by 
which the lamp is introduced into the circuit. 
Spring-arm C is secured to block B by means 
of a bolt H, the head e of which is squared 
and seated slightly in a groove fin the upper 
face of the block as it stands in the drawings, 
this arrangement preventing the bolt from 
turning, 
The top face of the bolt-head e is rounded 
in one direction, as indicated in Figs. 2, 3, 4, 
and 5, and a nut applied to its lower end holds 
the upper end of spring-arm C in a groove Or 
recess g in the lower face of block B, thereby 
preventing the spring from shifting its posi 
tion. It will be observed that spring-arm C 
is thus normally insulated from the shell and 
Spring-arm D is 
other parts of the holder. 
similarly seated in a recess h and held by a 
bolt I, which passes through block B and 
through the attaching-arm F, which arm is 
by said bolt drawn down into and held in a 
recess iin the upper face of block B, the bolt 
I serving to electrically connect the spring D 
and attaching-arm F, as plainly shown in Fig. 
3. Attaching-arm E has its lower end seated 
in the groove or recessf, which receives bolt 
head e, and is held in place by a bolt J, the 
nut of which is set into block B beyond its 
lowerface,as shown in Fig. 5, so that no contact 
can be made by it with the spring-arm C or 
other part below the block. The head jof 
bolt J is rounded in one direction similarly to 
heade of bolt H, the two heads standing in 
line a short distance apart, as shown in Figs. 
2, 3, 4, and 5. 
G indicates the sliding switch-bar, the 
ends of which are reduced to pass through 
slots or openings k in the sides of the shell 
A, and furnished with knobs or buttons to 
produce a neat finish and to give a good hold 
o 
25 
35 
45 
9o 
95 
IOC 
2. 
- 
418,426 
75 
- 
85 
25 
35 
5 
O 
in operating the slide. The shoulders formed 
at the union of the reduced end portions and 
the broader middle portion serve as stops to 
limit the longitudinal play of the slide or 
bar. 
K indicates a spring-plate carried by but 
carefully insulated from the bar G, and hav 
ing two branches or fingers b and c, the for 
mer serving both as an electrical contact and 
as a detent, being formed with a rib or ridge 
b', which rides upon and to one or the other 
side of the crown of bolt-head j. The curva 
ture of this bolt-head causes the spring to 
ride forward or backward thereon as the Gen 
ter is passed. 
When the bar or slide G is moved forward or 
to the position indicated in Fig. 3, the shorter 
finger c will rest upon bolt-head e, and the 
longer finger b will, as always, rest upon bolt 
headi, but with its ribb' at the forward side 
of said bolt-head, whereby it will serve to 
maintain the finger c in contact with head e. 
When the bar or slide G is moved backward, 
or to the position indicated in Fig. 4, the fin 
ger c will pass out of contact with bolt-head 
e, and the ribb' of finger b will pass to the 
rear side of bolt-head j, thereby maintaining 
the separation of finger c and heade and pre 
venting the passage of current from head e 
to headi, or vice versa. 
The sliding bar G is held down to its place by 
a ring or band L, inserted into the end of shell 
A and retained in place by screws M, which 
serves the further purpose of holding in place 
a cap or head N, which gives a finish to the 
socket or holder, protects the arms E F, and 
serves to support and carry spring-arms, O, 
by which a shade is held in proper position 
over the lamp. 
The cap or head N is threaded internally 
to permit its ready application to a fixture or 
support of any kind, the opening being suffi 
ciently large to permit the passage also of the 
circuit-wires PQ. 
The form of the shade-supporting arms O. 
is well shown in Figs. 1 and 2, said arms 
branching outward from cap N and being 
each formed with a depression k near the 
outer end to receive the curved inner rim or 
edge of the smaller opening of the shade, as 
indicated in Fig. 1. The arms O being elas 
tic, the shade may be applied from above or 
below at will and without detaching the lamp 
from the socket or holder, 
55 As stated, much difficulty has been en 
countered in obtaining a block or filling B 
combining the qualities of cheapness, dura 
bility, good insulating qualities, and freedom 
from expansion or contraction in use. After 
long and costly experimenting I have found. 
that wood properly treated fulfills all these 
conditions admirably, and that, while various 
kinds of Wood answer well when so treated, ex 
ceptionally good results are attained by the 
use of Osage orange, (Maclura, called also 
bois d'arc.) To prepare this material for 
use the blocks are turned nearly to proper 
size, and are then soaked in a strong alum so 
lution or other solution or compound adapted 
to render the wood fire-proof, or practically so. 
After being soaked for a proper length of 
time, sufficient to permit the solution to 
thoroughly permeate it, the block is thor 
oughly dried and turned somewhat smaller, 
but not small enough to readily enter the 
It is then again treated with the fire 
shell B. 
proofing solution and thoroughly dried. The 
parts which it carries are secured in position 
ipon it and the block is heated and forced 
into the shell while still warm. In some cases 
the shell may also be treated, though this is 
not ordinarily necessary. Steady and long 
continued use of the blocks thus prepared has 
thus demonstrated their efficiency and suit 
ability for the purpose set forth. 
Block B is retained in place by a bolt R. 
passing through the shell and block, as in Fig. 
2. Screws or tap-bolts may be substituted for 
the bolts H, I, and J.; but through-bolts are 
preferred, especially for H and I. 
Having thus described the construction of 
the socket or holder, the circuit may betraced 
and the operation of the device thus made 
entirely clear. 
Entering by wire P, the cur 
rent passes by binding-screw d and arm E to 
bolt-head i, thence by spring-fingers b c to 
bolt-head e, through bolt H and spring-arm C 
to one of the terminals of the lamp, through 
the filament thereof and by the other termi 
nal to spring-arm D, thence by bolt I to arm 
F, and by it and its binding-screw.d to wire 
Q, thus completing the circuit from the ingo 
ing to the outgoing wire. Of course, the di 
rection may be just the reverse of that stated. 
It will be seen that the same arrangement 
of sliding switch-bar, contacts, and connec 
tions may be used for wall-switches, cut-outs, 
and switches generally, and therefore I wish 
it understood that my claims are not re 
stricted to a lamp socket or holder embracing 
these parts, but apply to switches generally. 
A screw may obviously be substituted for 
bolt J. 
I am aware that it is not new to provide 
lamp-sockets with switch-blocks of incom 
bustible material, and that Wood has been 
used for such blocks. I am not, however, aware 
that any one has ever before made use in a 
lamp-socket of a Wooden switch-block ren 
dered by suitable treatment, as above set 
forth, practically incombustible and proof 
against Shrinkage. 
The filling of the pores of the wood by the 
fireproofing preparation effectually protects 
the wood against shrinkage or expansion, as 
practical and continued use has thoroughly 
demonstrated. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
1. In an electric switch, the combination of 
two bearings, as e and i, insulated one from 
the other, a sliding bar, as G, and a conduct 
ing-plate, as K, carried by but insulated from 
said bar and provided with two fingers b 
claim is 
45 
. 
95 
O 
II5 
I 25 
418,426 
and c, the former of a length to rest upon 
bearing i under all adjustments of bar G, 
and the other of such length as to rest upon 
bearing e when the bar G is in one position, 
but to pass out of contact there with when 
the bar is moved away from such position. 
2. The herein - described electric switch, 
consisting of bearings or contacts e and j, 
electrically insulated from each other, bar G, 
and spring-plate K, carried by but insulated 
from said bar and provided with fingers b 
and c, the former having a rib b', substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. In combination with shell A and a fill 
ing-piece or block B, arm E, bolt or fastening 
J, spring contact-arm C and its fastening 
bolt H, spring contact-arm D, fastening-bolt 
I, and arm F, electrically connected with 
each other, but insulated from other parts of 
the device, bar G, and plate IX, carried by 
said bar and provided with arms b and c, all 
substantially as described and shown. 
4. In a switch, the combination of shell A, 
block B, provided with insulated contacts, as 
e and i, bar G, having its ends seated in slots 
in the shell, spring-plate K, carried by said 
bar and provided with fingers bc, and ring or 
band L, applied to the shell and serving to re 
tain the bar G in place. 
... 
O 
25 
5. In a lamp socket or holder, the combi 
nation of shell A, block B, provided with in 
sulated contacts, bar G, provided with spring 
fingers to electrically connect said contacts, 
ring or band L, to retain said barin place, cap 
N, and screws M, serving to retain both the 
ring and the cap in position. 
6. In a socket for incandescent lamps, the 
combination of a containing shell or body 
and a switch-block inserted therein and com 
posed of Wood chemically treated to render 
it substantially fire-proof and to prevent 
shrinkage. 
7. In an electric switch, a block or support 
to receive the contacts and connecting de 
vices, consisting of wood chemically treated 
to render it substantially fire-proof. 
8. In an electric switch, a block or support 
for the contacts and connections, consisting 
of Osage. Orange Wood impregnated with alum, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
35 
45 
FRANK THONE. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. DURFEE, 
WM. IBOWEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418526.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 418,526. 
E. P. LYNCH. 
COMBINED LISTER PLOW AND PLANTER, 
Patented Dec. 31, 1889 
 
 
 
Z27. 2 
 
 
H 
22 Ala 
7RSSA 
N. PETERS, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES 
EDWARD P. LYN CH, OF DAVEN PORT, I O W. A. 
coMBINED LISTER PLow AND PLANTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 418,526, dated December 31, 1889. 
Application filed July 12, 1889, serial No, 817,845, (No model.) 
 
 
 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
So 
55 
o 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
. Beit known that I, EDWARD P. LYNCH, of 
Davenport, in the county of Scott and State 
of Iowa, have invented certain Improvements 
in Combined Lister Plows and Planters, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of im 
plements in which a furrow is formed by a 
double mold - board plow, a second furrow 
formed in its center by a subsoiling device, 
the seed delivered behind the subsoiler, and 
the seed finally covered by the scrapers; and 
the invention consists in various improve 
ments having reference to the manner of con 
structing and uniting the various parts. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my improved imple 
ment. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same 
with various parts in section. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation showing one of the covering devices. 
Fig. 4 is a rear elevation showing the cover 
ing devices. Fig. 5 is a view of the frog. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
beam; B, the casting, commonly denominated 
the frog,' firmly secured to the lower end of 
the beam; C, a right and leftmold-board, com 
monly known as a double mold-board, 
bolted, together with the usual share, firmly 
to the front of the frog B, the subsoiling de 
vice having its standard firmly secured in 
the frog behind-the beam, as hereinafter de 
scribed; E E, the two divergent handles hav 
ing their forward ends rigidly bolted to the 
sides of the frog B; F, the seeder-frame con 
sisting of two bars arranged side by side at 
suitable distances apart and connected at 
their forward ends to the frog by a horizontal 
pivot b, that their rear ends may rise andfall 
with freedom. 
G is an opener rigidly secured to the frame 
F in rear of the subsoiler for the purpose of 
opening a furrow for the seed. The opener 
is commonly constructed with a vertical seed 
spout or passage gin its rear end to conduct 
the seed from the distributing devices above 
to the furrow. 
His a seed box or hopper, provided at its 
base with seed-distributing mechanism of any 
suitable character adapted to operate by a 
horizontal shaft. This box is sustained upon 
a base plate or arm I, which is in turn con 
. . 
. 
. 
nected at its forward end by a horizontal 
pivoti, preferably, to the gravitating frame F. 
Each is permitted a vertical motion independ 
ent of the other. The entire seeding mech 
anism is sustained and the feeding devices op 
erated by a transverse shaftJ, passing through 
the arms I and provided at its ends with one , 
or two ground-wheels K. K. 
LL' represent two shovels or co-operating 
devices attached to the side bars of the frame 
F in the rear of the runner for the purpose of 
turning the soil inward over the seed. 
In order to insure the proper action of the 
runner and the covering devices, I prefer to 
lock them at fixed heights in relation to the 
subsoiler and mold-board. To this end I 
pivot to the rear end of the frame F an up 
right bar M, the upper end of which is notched 
and passed through a plate n, bolted to the 
cross-bar m, which connects the plow-han 
dles E. E. The plate m is adapted at the rear 
edge to enter the notch and hold the bar M, 
and is provided at the front with a spring m 
to maintain the engagement. By shoving the 
bar forward it may be disengaged, so as to 
admit of its moving vertically to change the 
height of the runner and subsoiler. 
It is to be observed that, although the 
opener and subsoiler are locked in position, 
the seed mechanism and its wheel are per 
mitted a free vertical motion, so that the 
wheels are certain to travel at all times upon 
the bottom of the furrow, and thus insure the 
uniform delivery of the seed. 
The frog B is cast complete in one piece, 
and serves as a support for and connection 
between the beam, the mold-board, the share, 
the handles, the subsoiler, and the rear frame. 
It is fashioned, as shown at Fig. 5, with its 
front face adapted to receive the mold-board 
and share, with a vertical socket b to receive 
the end of the beam, With an open slot b' at 
the rear to receive the standard or shank of 
the subsoiler, and with bearings ff for the 
edges of the standard. The transverse bolt 
b passes through the rear open edge of the 
frog, and serves to contract the same later 
ally upon the subsoiler - standard, holding it 
firmly in position to permit it to be adjusted 
vertically when they are released. 
In order that the angle or inclination of the 
95 
O) 
2 
418,526 
Ib sired position. 
; 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
. 
. 
; 
; 
. 
. 
. 
; 
; 
; 
; 
. 
. 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
; 
. 
". 
. 
; 
; 
; 
. . 
. 
. 
3. In combination with the beam, the frog 45 
subsoiler may be changed at will, the slots 
b', through which the upperbolt b?passes, are 
embracing its end and sustaining the mold 
board and share, the subsoiler-standard in 
elongated in a fore-and-aft direction, and a 
. 
serted through the rear side of the frog, and . 
. 
. 
wedge b inserted between the standard and 
the transverse bolt contracting the frog to . 
. 
5 the rear edge of the beam, as shown in Fig. 
2. By raising the lower end of the wedge and 
. 
hold the standard. . 
. 
5o 
by shifting the bolt bin the slots, the upper 
4. In combination with the beam, the frog 
embracing its end and provided with the fore 
end of the standard may be moved forward 
and-aft slots, the subsoiler-standard passing 
and backward and locked firmly in the de 
through the frog in rear of the beam, the 
transverse adjustable bolt, and the wedge, 55 
The covering-blades may be made of the 
whereby the subsoiler is held adjustably in 
form and attached to the frame E in the 
manner shown in Figs. 1, 3 and 5. In these 
; 
; 
; 
position, ; ; 
figures each shovel is connected by a fore 
5. In combination with the beam, the mold 
and-aft pivot-boltii', passing through a hori 
board and share, the subsoiler, and handles, 
Zontal slot in a casting , so that the paint of 
the single casting or frog, to which all of 
said members are united and by which they 
the shoyel may be thrown to the light or left, 
as desired. The shovelis also slotted verti are held in proper relations. 
6. The mold-board plow provided with 
cally to admit of its being raised and lowered 
upon the pivot-bolt. The casting i* is in turn 
handles, in combination with a frame hinged 
thereto and provided with furrow opening 65. 
connected to the beam by a transverse pivot 
and covering devices, a bar extending to the 
at the forward end with two 
i, and provided at 
handles for vertically adjusting and locking 
or more holes, it to receive a break-pin or 
said frame to regulate the depth of planting, 
a fastening-bolt. This arrangement admits 
a hinged gravitating frame or bar with a 
of the casting being changed in position on 
the beam to vary the pitch or forward in-seed-distributer thereon, and a sustaining 
shaft for the gravitating frame, provided at 
clination of the shovel. The povering de 
its ends with one or two wheels traveling at 
vices may be of herwise formed and attached, 
if preferred. 
the sides of the furrow. 
Having thus described my invention, What I 
7. The beam, the frog inclosing its end, the 
. mold-board, and subsoiler secured to the frog, 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
claimis-i 
1. In a combined lister and planter, the 
the frame F, hinged to the frog and provided 
with the opener, the seeder-carrying frame I, 
combination of the frog, with th 
(emold-board, 
share, and subsoiler attached, the hinged 
hinged to frame F, and the shaft and sustain 
frame F, having the opener and covering de 
ing-wheels applied to frame I, said elements 
combined substantially, as described and 3o 
vices attached, the hinged gravitating frame 
I, provided with a seeding mechanism, and 
shown. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
the frame-sustaining and seeder- operating 
my hand, this 6th day of June, 1889, in the 
shaft J, provided with one or more furrow 
presence of two attesting witnesses. 
wheels. 
2. The herein-described frog B, having the 
surface to receive the mold-board and share, 
and the vertical openings to receive the beam 
and the subsoiler-standard. 
J. BARKER, 
F. M. DECKER. 
EDWARD P. LYNCH. 
Witnesses: 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
: 
. 
. 
; 
. 
 
; 
: 
i 
, 
; 
; 
; 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418626.txt	(Model.) 
No. 418,626, 
L. L. SAGEND ORPH. 
METALLIC BARREL, BOX, &c, 
Patented Deo. 31, 1889. 
-4472.54 
64a224 
-tz oAMyce evez 
2- z. z. Yze25s 
Azz-a z Az7z - 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LONGLEY LEWIS SAGENDORPH, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
METALLIC BARREL, BOX, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,626, dated December 31, 1889. 
Application filed August 26, 1889, Serial No, 321,968, (Model.) 
- 
IO 
25 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LONGLEYLEWIS SAGEN 
DORPH, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Cincinnati, in the county of Hamilton, 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Metallic Barrels, 
Boxes, &c., of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings. . 
My invention is designed more especially 
for use where the barrel or box is much ex 
posed to the weather; but the same may be 
advantageously used in any connection for 
storing liquids or vegetables. The construc 
tion is such, as will more fully hereinafter 
appear, that the vessel is entirely free of any 
hoops or bands to become loosened from ex 
posure, as is the case in ordinary wooden bar 
rels or boxes. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a rectangular vessel 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective view of a cylindrical vessel con 
structed according to my invention. Figs. 3 
and 4 are views showing mode of securing the 
heads of barrels or the top and bottom por 
tions of boxes to place. Fig. 5 is a section 
showing preferred form of seam for connect 
ing the meeting ends of the metal which forms 
the box or vessel. 
For vessels designed to retain liquids I pre 
fer to use galvanized iron, owing to its lasting 
qualities. When designed to be used as a 
garbage-receptacle, the same may be formed 
from any good quality of sheet-iron. In either 
case the end portion of the metal forming said 
receptacle is bent back on itself and outward, 
forming a double-hooked flange, after which 
the sheet and flange are corrugated longi 
tudinally and the opposing end of the sheet 
fitted in said flange, as shown. When con 
structed to retain anything excepting liquids, 
the seam need not be soldered; but suitable 
rivets may be passed through the outer edge 
45 a of the hooked flange and the adjacent meet 
ing end of the sheet, as shown in Fig. 5. If 
desired to retain aliquid, the solder can readily 
be applied to the seam thus formed. Having 
properly secured the meeting ends of the cor 
rugated sheet, the heads or top and bottom 
portions B are secured to place in the follow 
ing manner: The sheet of metal is so corru 
35 
gated as that its outer edges will curve in 
ward, as shown, around the top and bottom 
of the vessel or receptacle. The heads or 
top and bottom portions B are made to con 
form to the configuration and size of recep 
tacle for which they are designed, and are 
curved inward around their outer edge, said 
curved portion of the head resting in the top 
concave corrugated portion of the body of the 
vessel, as shown. The head or top and bot 
tom portions are put to place by first straight 
ening out the metal around the outer edge of 
the body portion, as shown in Fig. 3, which 
enables the head to be dropped or inserted to 
place, resting against the first inward corru 
gation of the metal, which prevents the head 
or lid from falling inward. The metal around 
the edge of the vessel is now forced back to 
place, as shown in Fig. 4, around and over 
the outer edge of the head or lid, in which po 
sition it is firmly held. The head or lid, when 
inserted and held to place in the manner just 
described, can be readily soldered to retain 
liquids; but if not designed for liquids no 
solder or rivets are required for retaining the 
heads of barrels or the top and bottom por 
tions of the boxes to place. 
To remove the head of the barrel or lid of 
the box, a suitable tool is run around and be 
neath the overlapping edge of the receptacle, 
lifting the same outward, when the head or 
lid can be readily removed. 
In order to strengthen the heads or lids of 
the receptacle, the former are preferably cor 
rugated both ways, after which the outer 
edges are curved inward to fit in the convex 
corrugation around the top and bottom of the 
receptacle. 
When formed in a rectangular configura 
tion, the corners of the box or vessel are 
slightly rounded, as shown. 
The advantages of my invention are many. 
In the first place, the cost of manufacture is 
lessened over the ordinary hooped barrels and 
will last a greater length of time when ex 
posed to the weather, as there are no hoops 
to become loosened. This feature makes the 
barrel especially valuable for a garbage-re 
ceptacle. 
My invention is also valuable as a water 
tank for railroads and other purposes, and 
may be advantageously used in gas-tanks for 
s l 
55. 
7 O 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
 
418,626 
rugated body portion and a metallic head 
corrugated both ways and rounded inward 
around its outer edge, said head engaging the 
outer concave corrugation in the body por 
tion, the latter being rounded down over the 
S. edge of said head, substantially as set 
orth. 
3. A metallic barrel or vessel having a cor 
rugated body portion joined at its meeting 
ends by a double-hooked joint A, and a me 
tallic head B, corrugated both ways, the lat 
ter engaging the outer concave corrugation 
of the body portion, in a manner substan 
tially as set forth. 
JONGLEY LEWIS SAGENDORPH, 
25 
Witnesses: 
E. P. Hoy T, 
C. S. BENEDICT. 
- 
invention. 
family use, where a great amount of pressure 
is exerted on the tank. Boxes required to be 
made especially strong may be readily-con 
structed, as afore described, according to my 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. A metallic barrel or vessel having its 
body portion corrugated horizontally, the cor 
rugated meeting ends of said body portion 
being united by a double-hooked joint A, hav 
ing the overlapping portion a, and a metallic 
head curved inward around its outer edge 
and engaging the outer concave corrugation 
of the body portion, the latter being rounded 
down over the outer edge of said head, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. A metallic barrel or vessel having a cor 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418726.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 418,726. 
G. K. KIRKHAM. 
COFFER, DANI, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 7, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
  
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR: 
AITORNEYS. 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. ' 
(No Model.) 
No. 418,726, 
G. K. KIRKHAM. 
COFFER, DAM, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Jan. 7, 1890, 
C. C/3 
3762, %. 
2-y-e--64. 
INVENTOR; 
ATTORNEYS. 
WITIESSES 
m 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE K. KIRKHAM, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
CoFFER-DAM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,726, dated January 7, 1890. 
Application filed May 14, 1889, Serial No. 310,736, (No model.) 
55 
75 
20 
25 
3O 
IC 
15 
To all whom it may concern: 
The openings in the dams of the character 
Beit known that I, GEORGEK. KIRKHAM, 
I have described have in some instances been 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State provided with gates which were hinged to the 
of New York, have invented a certain new 
sides of the dams, so that they could be closed 
and useful Improvement in Coffer-Dams, of 
against the hull of the vessel after the vessel 
which I declare the following to be a full, 
had entered the dam. In other instances a se 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
iries of thin and narrow strips of wood or arms 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
have been pivoted to the sides of the dam, so 
part of this specification. 
that when the entire series were brought 
against the vessel the strips constituted gates. . 
This invention relates to improvements in 
coffer-dams; and the invention consists of a 
In my present invention I combine both 
coffer-dam having its gates constructed sub 
the solid gates and the strips before men 
stantially in the manner herein described, 
tioned, as will more clearly appear by refer 
shown, and claimed. 
ence to the drawings, in which B represents 
In the accompanying sheets of drawings, 
solid gates hinged to the sides a of the dam. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of the dam; Fig. In the edges of these gates are cut offsets or 
2, a plan of the same; Fig. 3, an end view; 
steps C, and in these offsets are pivoted arms 
Fig. 4, a fragment of one of the gates; Fig. 5, 
D, one, two, or more being pivoted in each off 
a detail of one of the pivoted arms; Fig. 6, a 
set. These arms at their outer ends (when 
the arms are all in the same plane) present 
section of the arm in the plane acac, Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 shows a modified form of arm. 
an outline which conforms generally to the 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
contour of the vessel's hull, as is shown in 
parts in the several views. 
Fig. 3, and to the outer end of each arm D is 
The purpose of this invention is to improve 
fixed, by lacing or otherwise, suitable pad 
upon the construction of coffer-dams designed 
ding b, and also to each arm is secured an 
for the purpose of repairing vessels, &c.--that 
eye c, with a chain drove through the eyes. 
is, coffer-dams that may be towed to a ship 
Now, when a dam is constructed substan 
needing repairs and placed under that part 
tially in the manner described, its gates B 
of the hull which may need repairing. These 
are swung open and the dam is floated be 
dams, generally speaking, are floated to the 
neath the vessel to be repaired. The gates 
vessel, and their construction, consisting, in 
B are next closed and the arms D are then, 
part, of an opening at one or two of their 
by means of the chains d or similar things, 
sides, permits the dams, after being sub 
swung into position until the ends of the arms 
merged to some extent, to be hauled under 
abut against the vessel's hull, where, by rea 
the vessel, and then upon being freed from 
son of the packing b, they form a tight joint, 
Water they rise to the desired position beneath 
and so, together with the gates B, keep out the 
and about the hull. In order to render a dam 
water and enable the dam to be pumped dry. 
of this construction satisfactory in its opera 
It will be seen that the arms D in fact con 
stitute a prolongation of the width of the 
tion, it is essential, of course, that the Water 
be excluded from the dam, and the difficulty 
gates B, with the important advantage aris 
heretofore has been to keep the water from 
ing from the construction which permits the 
entering between the edges of the opening A 
gates B, which close the larger part of the 
... and the hull of the vessel within that open 
opening in the dam, to retain always a given 
ing. These edges are fashioned to the con 
fixed size and shape without reference to the 
45 
figuration of that part of the hull which is to 
size or shape of any particular vessel, while 
be received in the dam, and the edges are 
the arms I), being small and being easily cut 
then padded, and while this will render the 
to the requisite size and shape, can be piv 
dam tight it requires time and constant at 
oted to the gates, and by this means the gates 
tention to make the joints between the ves 
be provided with edges which will fit with 
sel and the dam satisfactory, and it is to im 
necessary tightness the vessel's hull. 
When the opening in the dam is arranged 
prove this fitting of the dam to the vessel 
to be closed wholly by a series of arms piv 
that my present invention relates. 
35 
so 
40 
95 
OO 
418,726 
seaway. When these arms, however, are but 
short extensions of the edges of the solid 
gates B, there is no need of the platform, 
since the gates afford all the support that is 
needed. The advantages therefore to be de 
rived from the use of the arms in a coffer 
dam are had by my construction without the 
use of the expensive and cumbersome plat 
form to support the arms, as stated. 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A coffer-dam provided with solid gates 
hinged to the sides of the dam, combined with 
series of arms pivoted to the edges of said 
gates, as and for the purpose described. 
2. In a coffer-dam provided with solid gates 
hinged to thesides thereof, with offsets formed 
in the edges of the gates, series of arms piv 
oted to the offsets in said gates, as and for 
the purpose described. 
35 
45 
GEORGE K. KIRIKIAM. 
In presence of - 
D. A. CARPENTER, 
E. C. SMITH, 
oted to the sides of the dam, or wholly by 
gates hinged to the sides, the adjustment of 
Such arrangements to the hull of the vessel 
becomes difficult, expensive, and unsatisfac 
tOry; but when the gates and the arms are 
Combined in the manner described, then the 
closing of the dam and fitting it to the vessel 
is quickly accomplished. 
In Some cases the outer ends of the arms 
D may have pivoted to them supplemental 
arms E, to form a prolongation of the arms D, 
or for other purposes. When this supple 
mental arm is employed, a heel-plate e may be 
used to make tight the joint between the end 
of the supplemental arm and the arm to 
which it is attached, as shown in Fig. 7. 
Another special advantage arising from 
combining the gates B and arms D in the 
construction of my coffer-dam is this: When 
the opening in the dam is provided with a se 
ries of long and slender arms pivoted to the 
sides of the dam, then it is necessary to pro 
long the floor of the dam into a platform of 
dimensions sufficient to support the arms 
when opened outward. Otherwise they will 
break of their own weight, particularly in a 
TC) 
(5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418826.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 418,826, 
L. & C. STEIN MULLER, 
- 
- - 
. 
STEAM GENERATOR, 
At 7 
Patented Jan. 7, 1890, 
A'zay 2 
-- sis 
oOOOOOOOCG36C63 
 
- 
 
 
4o 0. t c 
o YS 
2 
C635635635635635.535936356 
d 
ze 
j- 
N 
2. 
 
 
 
Arzezzors 
Aereca SZezerzziidaer 
Coord Szeertrzitzer 
J.C.Chayentage 
i 
As 
: 
N, PEres, Photo-Eithographer. Washington, D.C. 
LEBRECHT STEIN MULLER AND CARL STEINMULLER, OF GUMMERSBACH, 
GERMANY. 
STEAM - GENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,826, dated January 7, 1890. 
Application filed August 6, 1889. Serial No, 819,864, (No model.) Patented in England August 9, 1884, No, 11,105, and in Ger 
. 
many May 13, 1886, No. 37,442, 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, LEBRECHT STEINMUL 
LER and CARL STEINMLLER, subjects of the 
Emperor of Germany, residing at Gummers 
bach, in the German Empire, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in and 
connected with Steam-Generators, (for which 
We have obtained patents in England, No. 
11,105, dated August 9, 1884, and in Germany, 
No. 37,442, dated May 13, 1886;) and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. . 
! Our invention relates to certain improve 
ments in and connected with steam-genera 
tors of the water-tube' type, wherein a group 
of tubes is fixed at both ends into junction 
boxes forming water-chambers, which are so 
connected together that the contained liquid 
circulates throughout the combined structure 
On the application of external heat. 
- Our invention relates to the construction. 
of. the tube end junction-boxes or water 
chambers, to the arrangement of stays there 
for, and to the method of fixing the covers of 
the tube access-holes. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a half 
front elevation to the left of a tube-plate and 
to the right of a front plate. - Figs. 2 and 3 
are respectively a vertical section and a sec 
tional plan of a junction-box and tubes. Figs. 
4 and 5 are respectively a front elevation 
and Cross-section on a larger scale of part of 
a box. Fig. 6 is a front elevation, and Fig. 7 
a Section, of part of a box connected to two 
upper boilers. 
Figs. 8 and 9 are the same 
Views, but with only one upper boiler. Figs. 
10 and 11 are the same views, but showing a 
different method of connection. 
Similar letters indicate similar parts in all 
the figures. 
In order to insure the freest and best-cir 
culation in any chamber or vessel, it is essen 
tial that as few obstructions as possible be 
presented to the circulating liquid, and to 
this end instead of riveting or bolting to 
gether the wrought-iron plates or cast-iron 
sections, as heretofore, according to our in 
25 
35 
45 
vention we weld together all the wrought 
iron or steel plates, which together form the 
tube-end junction-box, into one homogeneous 
chamber of the desired shape, preferably rect 
angular, and shallow from front to back, as 
illustrated. Thus there is neither joint nor 
seam nor any obstruction to free circulation, 
while great strength and durability are in 
Sured. 
The manufacturing of the welded junction 
box or water-chamber is done in the follow 
ing way: Plate A, forming the top base and 
sides, is beaten exactly into the form of the 
Water-chamber which is to be manufactured, 
and the tube-plate T and the front plate S, 
after having been cut into the same form, 
are connected with plate Aby screws in such 
a way that the three parts TAS cannot al 
ter their position against each other, and T 
and S lie flat upon the edges of A. The 
plates T and S are then joined to A by ordi 
nary welding, the three parts thus forming 
one welded piece. 
The connection between the welded boxes 
or water-chambers and the top boiler C can be 
effected in different ways: first, either by 
riveting the water-chamber direct to the top 
boiler by means of an angle-iron, as in Figs. 
1, 2, 8, and 9, or by flanging the plates TAS, 
as in Figs. 6 and 7; second, by riveting the 
water-chamber to a joint-piece J, which is 
connected with the top boiler C by riveting; 
third, in providing the water-chamber and 
the joint-piece J with angle-irons a C, which 
have then to be screwed together, as in Figs. 
10 and 11. 
Boilers which are provided with two or 
more top boilers C C require Water-cham 
bers, the plate A of which has to be made of 
different parts A A', as illustrated in Figs. (5 
and 7. 
The water-tubes t t are fixed in the usual 
manner in the tube-plate T, and in the front 
plate S, opposite each tube end, access-holes S 
are drilled of rather larger diameter than the 
tubes, and for each holes a cover or lid l is 
provided of circular or other convenient 
shape, either flat or convex, and adapted to 
make steam-tight joints, 
75 
85 
90 
95 
Y 
2 
418,826 
The combination, with the tuba end junc 
tion-box provided with tube-holes and with 
access-holes opposite said tube-holes, of the 
covers for the access-holes, the stays between 
the tube-holes, and the clips removably se. 
cured to the projecting ends of said stays and 
bearing against the adjacent covers, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. . 
LEBRECHT STEINMULLER. 
CARL STEINMULLER. 
Witnesses: 
JUL. OVERTROFF, 
P. VISSEUR. 
The stays u at are arranged in horizontal 
lines and between each tubet, and we utilize 
these stays at at to fix the covers l l as follows: 
The stays are extended through the front 
plate S, and have screwed ends provided with 
nuts at' at'. To each stay a plate or clip V is 
applied, of such shape as to overlie the cov 
ers lat either side, and by the nuts and clips 
the said covers l can be screwed up against 
the plate S, and steam-tight joints can readily 
be made, while at the same time the tubes 
are easily accessible for cleaning and removal, 
when required. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US418927.txt	J. RICHTER, 
AUTOMATIC FEED FOR BLAST FURNACES. 
Patented Jan. 7, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets 
Sheet, 1. 
No. 418,927. 
??? 
. 
???? 
?% 
???? 
NYAYAN 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
J. RICHTER, 
... 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
AUTOMATIC FEED FOR BLAST FURNACES, 
No. 418,927. 
Patented Jan, 7, 1890. 
 
 
A 
NY 
???? 1 
(Nje 
A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
f 
 
D 
) 
S y 
S 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
ZzZ 
SAYAN 
N. PFFERS. Photo-Lithographer, waahington; c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB RICHTER, OF SOUTH CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS. 
A UTO MATIC FEE. D FOR BLAST. FURNACES 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 418,927, dated January 7, 1890. 
Application filed March 8, 1889, Serial No. 302,555, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To a/ t?h.077, it 77uay concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB RICHTER, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at South Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Automatic Feed 
for Blast-Furnaces, of which the following is 
a specification, reference being had therein 
to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to devices for auto 
matically feeding a blast-furnace; and it con 
sists in the combination, with the elevator 
platform for hoisting the ore, coal, and flux, 
of a car loaded with the material to be moved 
upon the platform while below, and again 
over the mouth of the furnace while above, 
and vice versa, all by a single cable device, 
and again in a combination there with of a 
device for automatically dumping the con 
tents of the car into the furnace-mouth, all as 
will be more fully hereinafter described and 
specifically claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a vertical Section of the top of the 
furnace and of the adjoining elevator-tower, 
the same being provided with my improved 
devices for automatically feeding the fur 
nace. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of the car and 
automatic dumping device; Fig. 3, an edge 
view of the segment-gear and cam for the 
dumping device, and Fig. 4 a sectional elle 
vation of the cable-winding spool and reversi 
ble driving-gear for the Same. 
Corresponding letters of reference in the 
several figures of the drawings designate like 
parts. 
A denotes the upper portion of a blast-fur 
nace provided in its top with a feed-funnela, 
closed by a conical bell-valve b, to be opened 
by lowering by means of any well-known or 
usual device, so the material while dumping 
will have to slide over this valve b to be scat 
tered and distributed. Upon the top of fun 
nel a is fixed an inverted funnel c, both fun 
nels a, and c providing a large feed-hopper. 
B is the elevator Shaft or tower, built ad 
joining the furnace and connected with the 
top of furnace Aby a bridge C, the top chords 
of which incline toward the furnace, so as to 
overreach the funnel c, where again these top 
chords are horizontal. 
In this shaft B is ar 
ranged a platform-elevator D, of any usual 
construction, hoisted or lowered by a wire 
rope d, passed over a pulley e and driven by 
steam or Water power. This platform-eleva 
tor is provided with sheaves fandg, for pur 
poses that will be hereinafter explained. 
E is a hopper-car, being funnel-shaped in 
its bottom and supported on four flanged 
Wheelsh. This car has connected to each 
end of its hopper the end of a wire cable if, 
the opposite ends of which cables are secured 
upon a spool F., feathered upon shaft c, and 
having an elongated hub with two bevel 
friction-wheels G and H, engaging either one 
with another bevel friction-wheel I, rigidly 
mounted upon a shaft l, which is driven from 
a steam-engine or other motor to be con 
stantly rotating. Intermediate of wheels G 
and H the hub of spool F has formed an an 
nular groove by flanges in for the forked end 
of a shifting-lever, which by lateral shifting 
may bring either wheel G or H in contact 
with wheel I, to be rotated thereby in either 
one or the other direction, so as to wind one 
cable i and unwind the other cable i, or vice 
versa, or by shifting the spool F half-way, so 
neither wheel C or II will touch wheel I, 
thereby releasing the spool F, to be rotated 
by the pulling of either cable i or i, or to re 
main stationary. The cable i is passed from 
spool F over pulley J, pivotally secured to 
the bridge C and over pulleys n, o, and L off 
a stand M, secured upon the rear edge of the 
furnace to car E, and the cable i is passed 
from car Eover pulley f of elevator-platform 
D, thence around pulley N in the lower door 
of the elevator-tower B, thence over sheave 
O, exterior of and any required distance away 
from said tower B, and thence below the 
track p and through an opening in the base 
of tower B to spool F. 
The lowering of the car E is done by wind 
ing cable i upon spool F, whereby the car E 
will run down upon track-rails on top of 
bridge C, forming a continuation of a track 
on elevator-platform D, and after the car has 
arrived upon the elevator-platform the spool 
F is released from Wheel I and the eleva 
tor-platform is lowered, whereby the cable 
i will find a support upon a pulley R, pivoted 
in the sill of the top door of the tower. B. 
During the time the elevator-platform is be 
ing lowered the cable i will unwind from 
[ O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
418,927 
spool F, and proportionally the cable j will 
be wound thereon, and by the time the ele 
vator-platform D will have reached the bot 
tom of the elevator-shaft, where its track will 
again form a continuation with track p, the 
cable j will have cleared the pulleys f and N, 
and then again applying power to spool E to 
pull the car horizontally to the location where 
it is to be loaded the cable i will pass around 
pulley g, pivoted to the platform-elevator D. 
For moving and lifting the loaded car E to 
the furnace top the movements are the same, 
only in reversed succession. 
The funnel-opening of car E is closed by a 
conical valve S, suspended by a link r to a 
levers, pivoted in a bracket t, which is se 
cured upon one end of hopper E. The rear 
wardly-overhanging end of lever S is pivot 
ally coupled with the upper end of a vertical 
bar it, guided in a bracket :, and this bar at 
has pivoted at its lower end a roller v. A 
segmental gear-wheel T, pivoted to a bracket 
of the rear end of the car, has secured to it 
a cam-plate U, against the under face of 
which the roller U bears, holding the valve S 
to its uppermost position for closing the fun 
nel-mouth while the car E is being loaded and 
is being moved and elevated, until said car 
has reached the end of its trip over the top 
of the furnace within about a foot, when the 
teeth of segment-gear T will engage the teeth 
of a horizontal stationary rack-bar V, so that 
with the rest of the motion of the car said 
segment-gear T will be turned, and with it 
the cam U, thereby releasing the bar u to al 
low the lever S to swing and the valve S to 
drop, when the contents of car E will dis 
charge into hopper ca, of the furnace. The 
return movement of car E with releasing seg 
ment-gear Twill turn again said gear and cam 
U in a reverse direction, whereby the valve S 
is raised and closed again against the bottom 
mouth of the car E. With this arrangement 
? ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
it will be seen the feeding of a furnace can 
be done entirely by machinery in an auto 
matic manner. 
What I claim is 
1. A device for feeding blast-furnaces, in 
which is comprised a tower, a platform-eleva 
tor, a bridge, extending from said tower and 
over the furnace to be charged, a surface 
track, and a car provided with cables for 
pulling the same horizontally from and to the 
place where it is to be loaded, and after ele 
vated pulling the same again horizontally to 
bring it over the mouth of the furnace and 
return again, all substantially as set forth. 
2. A device for feeding blast-furnaces, in 
which is comprised a tower, a platform-eleva 
tor, a bridge extending from said tower and 
over the furnace to be charged, a surface 
track, and a car provided with cables passed 
over pulleys at the farther end of the surface 
track in the elevator-shaft and on top of the 
furnace to pull such car horizontally from 
and to the place where it is to be loaded, and 
after elevated moving the same again hori 
Zontally over the mouth of the furnace and 
return again, and pulleys secured to the plat 
form-elevator for guiding such cables while 
the platform is on its lowest and uppermost 
positions, all substantially as set forth. 
3. A device for feeding blast-furnaces, in 
which is comprised a car provided with a 
dumping-valve and a cam and a segment 
gear connected with said valve, a stationary 
rack arranged in juxtaposition to the fur 
nace to be charged to actuate the segment 
gear, and suitable means for conducting the 
car to and from the furnace. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JACOB RICHTER. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. H. LOTZ, 
OTTO ILUBKIERT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419027.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
J. ARNOLD, 
AGRICULTURAT IMPLEMENT, 
No. 419,027, 
7 
Patented Jan. 7, 1890. 
7ITWESSES 
A. 
IWVEWTOR 
orney 
N. Peters, Phcto-Lithographor, washington. O. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. ARNOLD. 
AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 419,027, 
Patented Jan. 7, 1890. 
7 Ji ITNESSES 
/6/.r. 7 roaded. 
IWVENTOR 
 
47 
Nonely 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN ARNOLD, OF FORTY FORT, PENNSYLVANIA. 
AGRICULTURAL I MPLEMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,027, dated January 7, 1890. 
Application filed February 28, 1889, Serial No, 30l.,483, (No model.) 
To all whoIn it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN ARNOLD, a citizen 
of the United States of America, residing at 
Forty Fort, in the county of Luzerne and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Agricultural 
Implements; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in agricultural imple 
ments, the object of my invention being to 
provide an implement which may be used as 
a plow or cultivator, and which is so construct 
ed that by addition of certain attachments it 
may be employed to hill up ground adjacent 
to Such plants as potatoes or corn, and be also 
used to dig potatoes; and my invention con 
sists more especially in the construction and 
combination of the parts, as will be hereinaf 
ter fully set forth, and specifically pointed 
Out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my improved agricul 
tural implement, showing all the attachments 
applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec 
tion. Fig. 3 is a detail view showing some 
of the parts separated. 
In carrying out my invention I employ an 
essentially-rigid frame composed of the cen 
tral horizontal beam A and rearwardly-di 
verging beams EE, which are bolted at their 
forward ends to the beam A. The forward 
end of the beam A is formed into a clevis for 
the attachment of the draft, and near the rear 
end are attached the handles B. In rear of the 
point of attachment of the handles the beam 
A is bent downwardly and the end thereof 
formed into a threaded bolt, which passes 
through the bottom plate C and is secured by 
a nut. A U-shaped frame A' is pivoted at 
its real end to the beam A, and is adjustably 
connected at its forward end to the beam by 
means of a suitable pin. The lower portion 
of this frame has mounted therein a colter C.'. 
The central beam A is cut away at Cl, for the 
3O 
35 
45 
reception of the reduced upper ends of the 
share D and standard D'. The plowshare 
D is sharpened at its front edge, and its 
lower end is bent forwardly and provided 
with beveled edges, as shown. This plow 
point is bolted to the forward end of the bot 
tom plate C. 
To the central or main beam A are rigidly 
secured the diverging beams EE, to which 
are secured standards e and e', which have 
formed on their lower ends bolts with which 
nuts engage for securing the curved plate or 
share C. Instead of the rear standards being 
bolted to the diverging beams EE, they may be 
formed integral there with by having the ends 
of said beams bent downwardly. The stand 
ards e extend upwardly beyond the diverg 
ing beams EE, and their upper ends are per 
forated for the reception of a cross-bar e, 
which also passes through the handles and 
holds them rigidly at the proper incline. The 
rear ends of the beams E E are cut away to 
provide concave recesses for the reception of 
a shaft, and on each side of these recesses the 
beams E are perforated, so that bolts may 
pass therethrough for securing in place such 
attachments as may be desired. 
To the standards D and e are rigidly at 
tached, by means of bolts or rivets, mold 
boards F, which at their forward ends abut 
against the rear edge of the plowshare D and 
diverge slightly therefrom. The bottom plate 
C extends beyond the mold-boards F, and is 
curved upwardly in cross-section, so that the 
edges thereof will only contact with the 
ground. 
The implement thus far described is made 
entirely of metal, and may be employed either 
as a ditching-plow or cultivator to throw the 
earth on each side, or into hills when used in 
cultivating potatoes or corn. 
The diverging bottom plate C will prevent 
the implement rising out of the ground, and 
by properly adjusting the colter a? the imple 
ment can be made to enter the ground to any 
desired depth. 
When it is desired to further pulverize the 
earth, to the rigid frame I attach a trans 
verse shaft G, the ends of which are provided 
with hubs with radiating spokes or arms g. 
This shaft is elevated, so as to be free to ro 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 
g 
49,037 
end bent forwardly to provide a point, and se 
cured to the frame and to the forward end of 
the plate C, substantially as shown, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, in an agricultural im 
plement, of a frame consisting of a central 
beam A, diverging beams E, vertical stand- 55 
ards formed integral with said beams or at 
tached thereto, the lower ends of said stand 
ards being formed into bolts for connecting 
thereto a bottom plate C, and vertical mold 
boards secured to said standards within the 
side edges of the bottom plates, substantially 
as shown. 
3. The combination, with an agriculturalim 
plement constructed substantially as shown 
and consisting of a rigid frame carrying ver- 63 
tical diverging mold-boards FF, and a bot 
tonn plate C, curved upwardly transversely, so 
that the outer edges will extend beyond the 
mold-boards, of the share D, having its lower 
end bent forwardly, substantially as shown, 
and for the purpose set forth. . 
4. In combination with a rigid frame pro 
vided with handles, mold-boards F and F, a 
bottom plate C, all of said parts being rigidly 
attached to the component parts of the frame, 
as described, a rear standard provided with 
perforations and removable bolts, whereby 
the ends of the mold-boards may be loosened, 
and extensions F, placed between said stand 
ard and the permanent mold-board and se 
cured in place, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
5. The combination, with a frame, vertical 
mold-boards and bottom plate C, angular 
bearing-blocks, and loops or bails, of a shaft G, 
provided with collars g', for preventing lat 
eral movement thereof, the outer ends of said 
shaft being provided with hubs with radial 
arms, substantially as shown, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
- 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN ARNOLD. 
85 
9o 
75 
. 
Witnesses: 
J. G. ECKERT, 
C. T. ARNOLD. 
IO 
tate, and lateral movement is prevented by 
collars g', which will abut against the bent 
straps which hold it in position upon the di 
verging beams E. Angular blocks II may be 
inserted between the diverging beams E, so 
that the bent straps h will be parallel with 
the line of draft and form straight surfaces, 
against which the rollers g will bear. 
As the mold-boards F throw the earth to 
one side, it will be pulverized and thoroughly 
separated by the arms or spokes g. When it 
is desired, the mold-boards may be extended 
by adding extension-plates F, secured in 
place by means of bolts and nuts. 
I refers to a bent arm secured to the inner 
side of the standard e' and provided with an 
extended end for the support of a shovel or 
cultivator-blade I. This attachment is in 
tended to be used in connection with the 
hereinbefore-described device when it is de 
sired to cultivate the ground and separate it 
farther than it is separated by the mold 
boards. 
When it is desired to use the implement to 
hill-up potatoes or corn, the extensions F and 
the mold-boards are fastened in place; and 
by securing or detaching the devices herein 
before described the implement may be used 
for several separate and distinct purposes 
viz., as a plow, and by the attachment of the 
cultivator-shovels I' as a cultivator. By re 
moving the extensions the device may be 
used to hill-up potatoes or corn. When the 
shafts with the arms or diggers is attached 
to the device without the extension mold 
boards or cultivators, the implement may be 
used as a potato-digger. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, in an agricultural im 
plement for the purpose set forth, of a rigid 
frame provided with handles and vertical 
standards, mold-boards rigidly secured to 
said standards, and a bottom plate curved in 
cross-section, said bottom plate extending 
beyond the mold-boards FF and forward of 
the same, a plowshare D, having its lower 
- 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419127.txt	(No Model.) 
P. KALLEN. 
CHURN, 
No. 419,127, 
Patented Jan, 7, 1890. 
 
NSN NS 
222 
s 
A 
22 f 
2 
 
 
2 
77 
  
al 
 
2 
AZZZZZ 
III-ii 
N, PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER KALLEN, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA. 
CHURN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,127, dated January 7, 1890. 
Application filed October 24, 1889, Serial No, 328,017, (No model.) 
To all whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER KALLEN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Fort 
Wayne, in the county of Allen and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Churns, of which the follow 
ing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents a vertical longitudinal 
Section of the churn; Fig. 2, a vertical trans 
verse section showing the cover thrown open, 
and Fig. 3 a detail perspective view of one of 
the dashers. 
In the drawings, a designates a churn-ves 
Sel, of suitable shape and capacity, mounted 
upon Supporting-legs and provided with a 
hinged coverb, this cover being provided upon 
its under side with a board b', adapted to fit 
snugly within the churn-vessel when the cover 
is closed and prevent leakage of the milk or 
cream, the cover proper resting on top of the 
churn. The churn-vessel is preferably ap 
proximately elliptical in cross-section. There 
are two dashers adapted to reciprocate simul 
taneously in opposite directions within the 
churn-body, each dasher consisting of a hori 
Zontal perforated plate c, attached to the 
lower end of a dasher-shaft d, which passes 
up through a perforation in the cover of the 
churn. Secured loosely upon the dasher 
shafts above the plates c are supplemental 
blades or plates e, provided with perforations 
and adapted to reciprocate between the main 
plates c and stops fupon the dasher-shafts, 
the adjacent faces of these two plates being 
comparatively smooth, so as to come close to 
gether. Secured to or formed integral with 
the supplemental plates e are cups g, through 
the center of which the dasher-rods pass. 
As thus constructed, it will be perceived 
that when the dashers are forced down in the 
cream the liquid will pass through the aper 
tures in the blades c and press the supple 
mental plates e up against the stops f on the 
dasher-rods; but when the dashers are raised 
the pressure of the liquid upon the upper 
sides of the supplemental plates and in the 
cups upon the same will force these supple 
mental plates down forcibly against the up 
25 
35 
45 
So 
perface of the main plate, crushing and break 
ing the globules that maybe caught between 
them. The cups assist in pressing the sup 
plemental plates forcibly against the main 
plates. The cream rushing back and forth 
through the perforations in the plates will be 
thoroughly and forcibly agitated and the 
globules of fat quickly broken. 
It is evident that the supplemental plates 
may or may not be provided with perfora 
tions. 
The dasher-rods are pivotally connected to 
an oscillating lever h, pivotally connected or 
supported upon a central post k, located equi 
distant from the two dasher-rods. By this 
arrangement the dashers are reciprocated in 
opposite directions simultaneously. The post 
k is fitted in a central tube land is held ad 
justably therein by means of a set-screw m, 
the said tube being secured rigidly to the 
cover of the churn and the post passing down 
through the same, as shown. This post is 
either round or rectangular in cross-section, 
but is preferably the latter, as it will then 
serve to prevent binding of the dasher-rods 
by keeping them in line with their respective 
holes in the churn-cover. This manner of 
mounting the central post for the operating 
lever not only makes the post much more 
rigid, but also enables the lever and dashers 
to be adjusted to suit the requirements of 
each particular operator as to height, &c. 
The set-screw and sleeves also permit the 
dashers to be drawn and held up against the 
cover out of the way when the cover is to be 
thrown back, as shown in Fig. 2, the cups g 
fitting up in recesses in in the cover. By thus 
providing for the drawing up of the dashers 
out of the Way I am enabled to use churn 
vessels of any desirable depth and hinged 
covers, as is evident, 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of the churn-vessel, the 
dasher-rods provided with perforated plates 
c and stops f, and the vibrating supplemental 
plates provided with cups and adapted to vi 
brate between the said stops f and plates c, 
substantially as described. 
55 
75 
8. 
90 
95 
2 
419,12? 
2. The combination of the churn- vessel 
provided with a cover, the dasher-rods pass-presence of two witnesses. 
ing through the said cover and provided with 
dashers, the Oscillating lever connected to 
5 the dasher-rods, the post for supporting this 
lever, and the tube provided with a set-screw 
for the reception of the said post, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
FRED, KRUSE, 
ALLEN B. SNIDER. 
a' 
Witnesses: 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
PETER KALLEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419228.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 419,228, 
W. C. SPELMAN. 
STEPS OR STAIR, CASE 
Patented Jan. 14, 1890, 
Ey. Z. 
 
 
  
SIII-22 
2RER.3 
 
Af 
7f7 
15 a.2. 
A 
c 
- 
- 
A 
fi 
Af 
Z77 
WITNESSES 
%22za %. 
V2'%5 
lear 
( \1. 
( zo-2-21-6/ 
INVENTOR 
724am-6a7%ere 
17--ee- 44. \22-4 
By 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. C. SPELMAN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE NEW YORK 
STEEL MAT COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
STEPS OR STA RCASE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,228, dated January 14, 1890. 
Application filed October 30, 1889. Serial No. 328,631. (No model.) 
I5 views designate similar parts. 
To all, uhon, it inva? concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. SPELMAN, 
a resident of New York, county and State of 
New York, have invented new and useful 
5 Improvements in Steps or Staircases, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the drawings accompanying and 
forming a part of the same. 
My invention relates to steps or stairways, 
O and has for its object the providing of a stair 
Way with means for keeping it clean, as here 
inafter specified. 
My invention is illustrated by the draw 
ings, in which similar letters in the several 
Figure 1 is a cross-sectional view of my im 
proved staircase, taken through lines cc, Fig. 
2. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the improved 
staircase. 
2 o' A represents a perforated or cellular me 
tallic mat-such, for example, as the mat 
known as the Rochester mat, described in 
Patent No. 377,580. 
B represents a riser of the staircase; F F, 
25 the support or walls of the staircase; G, the 
back board; H, the open-work tread, and D 
any suitable opening in the lowermost riser. 
To accomplish my invention, I form the 
treads or upper portion of a staircase in skele 
3o ton form-that is to say, there is an open 
space or frame-work where the tread gener 
ally is, and into this open space or frame 
work is fitted an open-work metallic mat 
such, for example, as the mat known as the 
This mat is held in the 
frame, as shown in the drawings, and can be 
inserted and removed from the frame-work 
of the tread at pleasure. The mat is formed 
of cross-bars of steel, iron, or other metal, and 
4o affords a firm hold to the feet and allows the 
35 Rochester mat. 
dirt and dbris to pass through it and drop 
to the ground or floor. An inclined back 
board G is placed back of the staircase to 
catch the dirt and debris from a series of the 
mats and chute it to the space beneath the 45 
lowermost step, from which it may be suit 
ably removed through the opening D. The 
staircase my be spiral or in any other form, 
and the frame of the staircase may be held 
together and secured to the supporting-walls 5o 
FF in any suitable way. The treads are 
to be formed with supports or bearings around 
the frame to hold the mat, and these supports 
or bearings may be cast with the frame-work 
of the tread, if of metal, or bolted, nailed, or 55 
'otherwise secured to it. 
Besides preventing the feet from slipping 
in descending or ascending the staircase, my 
improved tread allows the dirt, ice, snow, or 
any dbris to pass through it and drop to the 6o 
ground. The back board can be made of 
metal, Wood, or stone. 
My improved tread is especially adapted 
to stairways used out of doors-such as ele 
vated-railway staircases, &c.- and from its 65 
construction is light and exceedingly durable. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
desire to claim, and secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The combination of the supports or walls 7d 
F F, risers B B, open treads H. H., and open 
Work mats A A in the treads, with the in 
clined back board G, forming a chute behind 
the series of risers and steps, which chute . 
has the lower opening D, substantially as 7 
herein shown and described. 
WILLIAM. C. SPELMAN. 
Witnesses: 
IIARRY M. TURK, 
C. AUG. DIETERICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419328.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 419,328. 
 
W. J. GOHN. 
CULTIVATOR, 
Patented Jan. 14, 1890. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM J. GOHN, OF DAN VILLE, ILLINOIS. 
CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,328, dated January 14, 1890. 
Application filed September 16, 1889, Serial No, 324,057, (No model.) 
The shanks 5o 
55 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM J. GOHN, of 
Danville, in the county of Vermilion and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Corn-Cultivators; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
My invention relates to an improvementin 
corn-cultivators, the object of the same being 
to provide a cultivator of the above charac 
ter having independently-adjustable plows or 
blades. 
A further object is to provide a plow of the 
above character which will be simple and 
economical in construction and durable and 
efficient in use; and with these ends in view 
my invention consists in certain features of 
construction and combination of parts, as will 
be hereinafter fully described, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical central section of my improved cul 
tivator. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a section on XX of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is 
a perspective of the clamp. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tion on y y of Fig. 2. Figs, 5 and 6 are de 
tails of the spring-drag. 
The letters A and A' indicate the beams, 
the forward ends a of which are adapted to 
be secured to the axle of the machine. The 
beams converge and are suitably Secured to 
gether, as shown. To the forward ends a of 
the beams are secured the boxes B, through 
which pass the bolts C, adapted to carry the 
spring drags or hooks D.D, which are placed 
in front of the plows and serve to clear away 
the trash from the path of said plows. 
The beams A and A curve or incline down 
ward from the axle, thereby lessening the lev 
erage on the shanks E E of the plows. To 
the rear end of each pair of beans A A' is 
bolted a double angle-iron A, which forms a 
square loop with the ends of the beams. To 
the shanks E, at their lower ends, are secured 
the plows, blades, or shovels FF. 
There are two pairs of beams A A', and 
each pair carries two shanks. 
extend vertically upward and bear one against 
the side of beam A and the other against 
beam A. 
G represents a claimp, which bears against 
the shank and has four projections or lips b, 
which rest on the top and bottom of the beam. 
His the clamp-bolt, which is bent around 
the outside of clamp, its two ends passing 
through the beam and angle-iron A. By 
Screwing up the nuts c on the threaded ends 
of the bolt the clamp and shank, as well as 
the angle-iron A, will be rigidly clamped to 
the beam. By loosening the nuts the shank 
of each plow or blade can be adjusted inde 
pendently to work at any desired depthin the 
ground. 
The spring-drags D are made each with a 
spring-loop d, as shown in Fig. 5, the object 
of the loop being to add elasticity to the drags 
and render the same less liable to breakage 
when in contact with the weeds, and has its 
end secured between two collars II, which 
are secured by a boltf to the beams, as shown 
in section in Fig. 6. A notch or recess e in 
One of the collars I receives the end of the 
Spring-drag, which is held fast between the 
notched or roughened faces of the collars. 
Each angle-iron A has bolted to it on its in 
ner side a guide loop or ring J. Through these 
two guides pass the downwardly-projecting 
arms of the adjustable arch. K. By means of 
this arch the pairs of plows are laterally ad 
justable. This arch forms the subject-mat 
ter of Patent No. 403,426 and needs no fur 
ther description. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A cultivator having an adjustable arch 
K, guides J, angle-irons A, beams A A', plow 
ShankE, clamp G, having projections b, clamp 
bolt H, and nuts c, for adjustably securing the 
Shank to the beam, and a spring drag or hook 
D, having loop d, and collars II, having re 
cess e, for the reception of the end of the 
drag, Substantially as shown and described. 
85 
9o 
95 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
2 
419,328 
spring drag or li D, having 
II, roughened on their meeting faces and one 
of them provided with a recesse, for the re- 
5 ception of the end of the drag, bolts f, and 
beams A A', substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
p d, 
2. The combination, in a cultivator, of a specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
WM. J. GOIN. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. WHYTE, 
GEO. G. MABIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419428.txt	(No Model.) 
C. B. EMERY & C. BRIGHAM. 
ANTI FRICTION DEVICE FOR, CAR, AXLES. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 419,428. 
Patented Jan, 14, 1890. 
 
 
yxSAN 
Sez2s 
fea 
as at 
 
N. Peters, Photo-ithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
C. B. EMERY & C. BRIGHAM, 
ANTI FRICTION DEVICE FOR, CAR, AXLES, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 419,428, 
Patented Jan, 14 l890, 
  
  
  
W 
a. 
Sh 
R NA 
sizzzzzzzz 
s 
SS S. 
is 
 
NSSEU 22e. 
st SF SN HNN 
as SiN R NSN 
NE Sa 
SaaS 
Ligsaaz 
Nils ES  --> 
a- 
S. Salas?e-N 
s 
S.I.N. N 
>----s t 
 
Nrt 
 
SS 
A. 
? 
WN S 
Si 1. s 3. % 
Zeyzzzesses 
 
-772 ver2/z7 f. 
47-area 4-2a 
N. PETERS. Photo-Lithographer, washington. O. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES B, EMERY, OF BOSTON, AND CHARLES BRIGHAM, OF WATERTOWN, 
MASSACHUSETTS. 
- 
ANTI-FRICTION DEVICE FOR CAR-AXLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,428, dated January 14, 1890. 
Application filed June 10, 1889, Serial No. 313,770, (No model.) g 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, CHARLES B.EMERY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, and CHARLES BRIGHAM, a a beveled annular ring d, adapted to enter 55 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wa 
tertown, in the county of Middlesex and State 
of Massachusetts, have jointly invented new 
and useful Improvements in Anti-Friction 
Devices for Car-Axles, of which the following, 
taken in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements on 
the patent granted February 9, 1875, No. 
159,656, to Charles B. Emery and S. W. Em 
ery, for an anti-friction device for car-axles; 
and it is carried out as follows, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, where 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of the 
device, showing the front oil-box in section. 
Fig.2 represents a vertical section on the line 
XX, shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents a cross 
section on the line YY, shown in Fig. 2; and 
Fig. 4 represents a section on the line ZZ, 
shown in Fig. 3. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts wher 
ever they occur on the different parts of the 
drawings. 
In the drawings, a represents one of thesills 
of a steam-railroad-car truck, to which is 
firmly secured the bearing bracket or jaws b 
b, in one piece with which is cast the hollow 
box B, to the under side of which is secured 
the cover C by means of suitable fastening 
bolts, as shown. Said cover serves to inclose 
the anti-friction device, so as to exclude dirt 
and dust from the working parts. 
c is a rubber or elastic packing interposed 
between the abutting edges of the box B and 
cover C, said packing having, preferably, its 
lower edge resting in a groove in the cover 
C, as shown in Fig. 2. 
D represents the flanged car-wheel, and D' 
its axle, as usual. 
F represents the rail for the wheel D. 
Within the hollow box B is journaled in 
bearings or boxes f and f' the shaft F, to 
which the flanged anti-friction wheel Gisse 
cured. The said anti-friction wheel G is sup 
ported and rolls on the axle D'' in a manner 
similar to that shown and described in the 
above-mentioned patent and for the same 
purpose. 
The axle D'' is provided near its end with 
the groove g on the interior of the flange of 
the anti-friction wheel G, for the purpose of 
preventing a lateral motion of the wheel G. 
relative to the axle D', and thus holding said 
parts in their proper relative positions. 
h and h' are oil and waste boxes, respect 
ively, for the inner and outer ends of the an 
ti-friction wheel-shaft F, which boxes are 
preferably cast in one piece with the dust 
cover C and provided with the respective 
spring-pressed or hinged covers Hand H', as 
shown. 
I is a leather ring or washer surrounding 
the axle D'' at the back of the hollow box B, 
as shown in Fig. 2, which ring is held in place 
within a groove or recess in the rear part of 
said hollow box B, and serves for the purpose 
of excluding dust and dirt from the interior 
of the said box, as well for preventing Waste 
of the lubricant used on the axle, 
K is a shell, preferably made of brass or 
composition, which surrounds the axle D', as 
shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 4, said shell having 
an oil and waste receptacle K' in its upper 
end and having an opening K'preferably in 
its lower end, as shown in Fig. 3. Chips or 
bars L. L are held against opposite ends of 
the shell K by the influence of springs ll, 
having their ends resting in recesses made in 
said chips or bars L L and recesses made on 
the interior of the shell-chamber B', which 
forms a rear extension and part of the main 
box B, as shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 4. 
The chamber B' is closed at the top by 
means of the detachable coyer B', provided 
with a suitable elastic packing B, for the pur 
pose of excluding dust and dirt at the place 
where the Said cover is secured to said cham 
ber. 
Mis a metal spring interposed between the 
under side of the cover B' and top of shell 
K, for the purpose of holding the said shell 
K in its proper position on the axle D'. 
The object of the side springs l l is for the 
purpose of preventing vibrations and shocks 
95 
85 
go 
75 
- 
- 
IOO 
IO 
25 
40 
45 
419,428 
to the car-axleID, especially on the application 
of the brakes, or when the car is suddenly 
started or stopped. 
In addition to the end springs ll, above 
mentioned, we locate, between the chips L. L. 
and the inside of the chamber B, elastic 
rubber springs NN, covered with metal plates 
in n, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4, said plates be 
ing secured in a suitable manner to said rub 
ber springs, the latter being preferably held 
in positions shown in Figs. 3 and 4 by means 
of their lower right-angled ends or feet N'N', 
insertedlin corresponding recesses in the bot 
tom of the chamber B, as shown in Fig. 3. 
In case of a sudden jar or shock to the car 
for instance, when t?ie brakes are applied 
quickly, or from other causes-and if one of 
the springs l should then be compressed suf 
ficiently to allow the chip L to come in con 
tact with its metal plate in any further mo 
tion of the chip in the same direction will 
cause the rubber Spring N to be compressed, 
thus still further preventing vibrations and 
shock to the axle and its connections. 
The invention is shown in the drawings as 
applicable to steam-cars, with the jaws b se 
cured to the sill at of a truck supported on 
yielding springs, as is common in devices of 
this kind; but the invention is equally ap 
plicable to horse-cars, electric cars, or similar 
vehicles, in which the bearings for the axles 
are arranged to yield against springs located 
between such bearings and the sills or frame 
work of the car, or in any other desired man 
ner, without departing from the essence of 
our invention. 
Having thus fully described the nature, 
construction, and operation of our invention, 
we wish to secure by Letters Patent and 
claim 
1. The axle D', having the annular ring d, 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
ALBAN ANDREN, 
J. HERBERT EMERY. 
45 
55 
combined with the flanged anti-friction wheel 
G, journaled in bearings, as described, and 
having on its interior the groove g, adapted 
to receive the said axle-ring, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The axle D'and the flanged anti-friction 
wheel G, journaled in bearings, as described, 
combined with the inclosing-box B and the 
cover C, having front and rear oil and waste 
boxes h h, and covers H H substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The axle D'' and the flanged anti-friction 
wheel G, journaled in bearings, as described, 
and the inclosing-box B, combined with the 
shell K, journaled on the axle and adapted 
to yield vertically and laterally relative to 
said inclosing-box, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. The axle D'and the flanged anti-friction 
wheel G, journaled in bearings, as described, 
and the inclosing-box B, combined with the 
yielding shell K, the metal chips or bars LL, 
and springs ll, substantially as and for tine 
purpose set forth. 
5. The axle D'and the flanged anti-friction 
wheel G, journaled in bearings, as described, 
and the inclosing-box B, combined with the 
yielding shell K, the metal chips or bars LL, 
with their springs ll, and auxiliary rubber 
springs N N, with their plates n, n, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 11th day 
of May, A. D. 1889. 
CHARIES B, EMERY. 
CIHARLES BRIGHAM. 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419528.txt	(No Model.) 
F. KELLY. 
CAST-OFF FOR SUSPENDER BUCKLES, 
No. 419,528, 
Patented Jan. 14, 1890. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FERGUS KELLY, OF BIRMINGHAM, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE OSBORNE 
& CHEESMAN COMPANY, OF CONNECTICUT. 
CAST-OFF FOR SUSPENDER-BUCKLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,528, dated January 14, 1890. 
Application filed April 11, 1889, Serial No. 306,761 (No model.) 
W 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FERGUSKELLY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Birming 
ham, in the county of New Haven and State 
5 of Connecticut, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Cast-Offs for Suspender 
Buckles, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to that class of de 
IO vices by which the ends of suspenders are de 
tachably connected to the buckles; and the 
purpose thereof is to provide a light, strong, 
durable, and convenient cast-off attachment 
having an eye or loop to which the suspender 
I5 ends are connected and a housing entirely 
inclosing an actuating-spring, by which the 
Said housing is thrown outward against the 
point of the hook to close the same. 
It is my purpose, also, to so construct and 
2c combine the parts that the buckle may be 
attached to and detached from the cast-off by 
the movement of the buckle itself without 
fingering the device by which the hook is 
closed. 
The invention consists in the several novel 
features of construction and new combina 
tions of parts hereinafter set forth and 
claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
3o Figure 1 is a side elevation showing my in 
Vention. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a sectional view. Fig. 4 is a 
perspective view of the parts separated. 
In the said drawing, the reference-numeral 
35 1 designates a metallic plate of suitable 
length and Width, having at one end an eye 
or loop 2, which receives the suspender-ends, 
and at the other end curved or bent to form 
a hook 3. 
Upon the sides of the plate 1, near. the eye 
Or loop 2, are formed lateral extensions or 
lugs 4, Which are bent at right angles with 
the plate and into substantial parallelism 
with each other. These lugs form a support 
45 for a pivot-pin 5, upon which is mounted a 
housing 6, composed of a metal plate having 
tWO sides 7,bent longitudinally at right angles 
With the body of the plate and lying outside 
the lugs 4, the pivot-pin passing through 
So these sides. At its upper end, which liesjust 
beneath the point of the hook 3, the body of 
the plate is slightly prolonged beyond the 
55 
ends of the side pieces 7, and is bent inward 
and inclined to lie at an angle with the point 
of the hook and form an opening through 
which the ring or bar of the buckle may be 
forced. At its lower end, also, the body por 
tion of the plate 6 is prolonged and bent in 
Ward at an angle to the plate where it lies 
between or upon the ends of the side pieces 
7, so as to glide or slip over any roughness 
which it would be likely to encounter. 
Upon the pivot-pin is coiled a spring 9, one 
end of which presses against the body of the 
plate 1, while the other bears upon the metal 
of the hook, thereby throwing the housing 
outward to close the latter. 
This cast-off is light and strong and can be 
produced at small expense, since the parts 
are struck from sheet metal by dies. The 
spring is wholly inclosed and concealed and 
there are no points or edges to catch, tear, or 
cut the clothing. The suspender-buckle may 
be attached and detached by simply press 
ing it between the housing and the point of 
the hook, thus avoiding the necessity of a 
finger-piece to finger and move the housing 
for disengaging the buckle from the cast-off. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
A cast-off for suspender-buckles, consist 
ing of a plate having a buckle-retaining hook 
at One end and an eye or loop at the oppo 
site end and provided at its edges with side 
lugs, a housing comprising side flanges piv 85 
oted to the lugs between the hook and eye or 
loop, and having its upper end bent laterally 
inward in a direction away from the in 
side of the free extremity of the buckle-re 
taining hook and adapted to be pressed in 
Ward by the downward sliding movement of 
the buckle on the outer surface of said in 
Wardly-bent end of the housing, and a spring 
covered by the housing between the latter 
and the plate and acting to press the housing 
outward against the hook, substantially as 
shown and described. 
Intestimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
95 
FERGUS KELLY. 
Witnesses: 
E.C. DREW, 
A, T, TERRELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419628.txt	(No Model.) 
W. S. BOGLE, 
COAL HANDLING APPARATUS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet, i, 
No. 419,628, 
Patented Jan, 21, 1890, 
 
(No Model.) 
W. S. BOGLE. 
C0AL HANDLING APPARATUS. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 419,628, 
Patented Jan. 21, 1890, 
 
 
s 
 
gll N 
(No Model.) 
W. S. BOGLE, 
COALHANDLING APPARATUS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 419,628. 
Patented Jan. 21, 1890, 
 
SA N 
IA 
   
 
N 
W 
7fezzesses, 
slezzales, 
Zyze/e/eze; 
764-? 
N. Peters, photo-lithographer, Washingtor., 
(No Model.) 
W. S. BOGLE, 
COAL HANDLING APPARATUS. 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 419,628, 
 
| 
Patented Jan. 21, 1890. 
7 || |\ \ 
 
as 
(No Model.) 
W. S. BOGLE. 
COAL HANDLINGAPPARATUS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 419,628, 
Patented Jan. 21, 1890. 
 
pers, proto-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER. S. BOGLE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
COAL - HANDL N G A PPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,628, dated January 21, 1890. 
Application filed March 25, 1889, Serial No. 304,588, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WALTER. S. BoGLE, of 
Chicago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Coal-Handling Apparatus, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the construction of apparatus for lifting coal 
by means of hoisting-buckets from cars or 
vessels and transporting the same over sta 
tionary suspended tracks to distant points, 
where it is either dumped in pile or loaded 
into Wagons or cars, as occasion requires. 
In using suspended tracks the common 
method, where it is desired to distribute the 
Coal over a considerable area, is to suspend 
Such track in the form of a truss between two 
towers or similar structures, which are some 
times mounted so as to be moved sidewise. 
In a dock of any considerable depth-say two 
or three hundred feet-it is apparent at once 
that the tower would have to be of great 
strength and the suspended track very care 
fully constructed to balance upon the towers, 
and that the latter structure will be of im 
mense Weight and very expensive. In such 
construction it is common to employ at the 
hoisting-point a swinging crane, from which 
the hoisting-bucket is suspended, and the lat 
ter being hoisted it is conveyed with its con 
tents along the suspended track by the same 
power which hoists it, and is returned by 
Weight or the action of gravity when the sus 
pended track is inclined, as is frequently 
done toward the hoisting-point. It is evident 
that this method is very slow, and when the 
track is of considerable length the time con 
Sumed in the operation is so great as to al 
most bar its use. 
I employ in carrying out my invention a 
number of stationary suspended tracks ar. 
ranged parallel to each other and extending 
depthwise of the dock, and use a tower hav 
ing a track-section adapted to be brought in 
position to register with the several station 
ary tracks, and So as to discharge the car car 
rying the transfer-bucket from the tower upon 
the stationary tracks. By this means I am 
enabled to erect at a small cost stationary 
tracks sufficient to distribute the coal over 
the desired area and to employ a single tower, 
which may be cheap in construction and 
easily operated. I also employ on said tower 
a fixed hopper, into which the hoisting-bucket 
delivers, and I employ a separate carrying 
bucket suspended, preferably, from a car 
riage which is adapted to run upon the 
track-section of the tower to bring the trans 
fer-bucket into position to receive its load 
from the stationary hopper of the tower. 
This transfer-carriage I prefer to operate by 
means of a weight, which will, connected by 
a cable to the carriage, draw it along the 
track to the point of dump, and I return the 
carriage by means of a cable connected 
thereto, which is wound upon a secondary 
drum of the hoisting-engine stationed at the 
tower. By these means I am enabled to have 
the operation of hoisting and of transferring 
the material along the suspended tracks go 
ing on simultaneously, whereby great econ 
omy of time is attained. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of the hoisting-tower with 
the adjacent end of the stationary track and 
supporting-frame. Fig. 2 is a side elevation 
of the track at the dumping end, showing 
the weight, &c. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the 
parts shown in Fig. 1; and Fig. 4 is a plan 
view of a series of tracks which converge to 
a central point whereat the tower is located, 
the tower in this modified construction being 
adapted, either by being pivoted on its Sup 
ports, so as to be slightly turned, or by having 
its track-section pivoted, to receive and dis 
charge the transfer-carriage from and to a 
number of tracks without moving the tower 
laterally. Fig. 5 is an elevation in cross-sec 
tion showing the suspended tracks. 
In the drawings, 5 represents the support 
ing structure for the suspended track 6, 
which I prefer to make horizontal. 
6 6 are the track-rails, which are suspended 
on the hangers 6 at suitable distances apart 
to permit the passage of the sheave-block on 
the carriage from which the bucket is sus 
pended. 
7 is the frame of the tower, to which is se 
cured the crane 8, having the traveling car 
riage 9 movable thereon, and from which car 
riage the hoisting-bucket 10 is suspended, its 
cable 11 being wound upon a drum 12 of a 
suitable hoisting-engine located at the tower, 
which I deem the preferable arrangement, as 
90 
95 
OO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
- 
, - 
I claim- 
1. An apparatus for handling coal, compris 
ing a series of elevated suspended stationary 
tracks, a tower-track at a lower elevation and 
extended along the ends of the stationary 
tracks and at right angles thereto, a hoisting 
tower movable along its track and having a 
track-section adapted to be brought to regis 
ter with the stationary tracks by the move 
ment of the tower, and a carriage adapted to 
run upon the stationary tracks and onto the 
track-section of the tower, substantially as 
described. 
2. An apparatus for handling coal, compris 
ing a series of elevated suspended stationary 
tracks, a hoisting-tower having a hoisting 
bucket, a stationary hopper, and an adjustable 
track-section, a tower-track at a lower eleva 
tion than the stationary tracks and extended 
at right angles thereto, a transfer-carriage 
and a transfer-bucket carried thereby, a ca 
ble connected to said carriage and operated 
by a weight to move the same outwardly with 
its load, and a second cable connected with 
said carriage and adapted to be wound upon 
a drum by the hoisting-engine, whereby to 
return the carriage with its buckets, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In an apparatus for handling coal, a se 
| 
:ries of horizontal suspended tracks and a 
movable hoisting-tower having an adjustable 
track-section adapted to be brought to regis 
ter with the various stationary tracks, sub 
stantially as described. . 
. . 
. 
WALTER. S. BOGLE. 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
C. C. LIN THICUM, 
T. D. BUTLER. 
419,628 
adapt it to variations in the main-track Sec 
tion, and this may be conveniently done by 
means of adjusting-bolts 22, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The movable tower may be employed with 
different means for operating the transfer 
bucket than those here shown. 
45 
IO 
it enables the engineer to oversee all of the 
Operations. 
13 is a stationary hopper secured upon the 
tower, and into which the coal is discharged 
from the hoisting-bucket. 
14 is the tower track-section, upon which 
the transfer-carriage 15 is adapted to travel 
to bring the transfer-bucket 16 in position to 
receive the coal from the chute of the hopper. 
17 represents the track-rails on which the 
wheels 18 of the tower move when the latter 
is to be moved sidewise to adapt it for use 
with a series of tracks, such as is shown in 
Fig. 3. 
In the modified construction shown in Fig. 
4. the series of tracks have curved sections a 
bic d to the tower; or, if preferred, this tower 
track-section will be pivoted, so that it may 
be turned to register with the various tracks. 
This construction will be desirable where the 
dock frontage is limited. 
The operation is as follows: The engine 
being in motion, the hoisting-bucket will be 
hoisted up in position to discharge its con 
tents into the stationary hopper. The trans 
fer-bucket attached to its carriage will be 
brought into position to receive the coal from 
said hopper, and the descent of the weight 19, 
acting through the connecting-cables upon 
said car, causes the latter to move out to the 
rear end of the track, where it discharges into 
a hopper, as 20, or at any intermediate point. 
The transfer - carriage, with its suspended 
bucket, is returned by means of a cable at 
tached to said car and Wound upon a drum 
21, revolved by the hoisting-engine. 
I do not intend to limit my invention to 
the details of construction nor to the precise 
combination of parts, as it is evident that 
Some of the novel features described may be 
advantageously used without employing in 
connection there with all of said features. I 
prefer to make the section of said track upon 
the tower vertically adjustable, whereby to 
H - - - - 
-- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419728.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES SORLEY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE ANGLO 
AMERICAN ELECTRIC LIGHT MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF WEST 
VIRGINIA. 
ELECTRODE FOR SECONDARY BATTERIES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,728, dated January 21, 1890. 
Application filed November 12, 1889, Serial No. 330,053, (No specimens.) 
| 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLESSORLEY, of the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Act 
ive Material for Storage-Battery Electrodes, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention consists in a storage-battery 
electrode plate, grid, or support, of any suit 
able material containing massicot as the act 
ive material. 
It is a well-known fact that the active ma 
terial in a storage-cell is subject to expan 
Sion and contraction during certain phases 
of the operation of the cell, and that the ef 
fect of this constant change of form of active 
material is greatly to reduce the effective 
life-time of the elements. When the active 
material is placed in the openings or inter 
stices of an otherwise solid plate, the effect 
of its expansion is either to deform the plate 
or else to tear it. On the other hand, in con 
tracting, the active material is apt to become 
loosened and fall out of the cavities in which 
it is packed, and this is especially the case 
after previous expansion. The result is that 
the plate either disintegrates or at best 
buckles or bends, so that when several plates 
are disposed in close proximity in the cell 
this bending or change of form may easily 
result in contact and short-circuiting be 
tween them. Various attempts have been 
made to overcome these difficulties by spe 
cial construction of the Supporting bodies or 
plates of electrodes, notably by the forma 
tion of apertures essentially of different 
shapes, in arrangement, and by making the 
plates of alloys and materials compoundled 
with lead or other than lead, with the object 
of getting increased strength and augmented 
surface. 
Of the various active materials used in the 
cell the oxides of lead are the most common. 
There are five known lead oxides, as foll 
lows: lead suboxide, (PbO,) lead monoxide, 
(PbO,) lead sesquioxide, (PbO) triplumbic 
tetroxide, (PbO) and lead dioxide, (PbO) 
Of these five oxides, monoxide, tetroxide, 
and dioxide, or, as more commonly called, 
litharge, minium,' or red lead, and 
lead peroxide, or brown oxide of lead, have all 5 
been used as active material in the storage 
battery; but, as is well known, there are two 
forms of lead monoxide, one being known as 
massicot, and produced by the oxidation of 
metallic lead in a current of air, and the 
other a substance yielding on fusion a crys 
talline mass, and produced by the oxidation 
of metallic lead at a higher temperature than 
that which is required for the manufacture 
of massicot. This lastislitharge. Sofar asis 
known massicot has not been employed as an 
active material in the storage-battery, and in 
fact it finds but very few uses in the arts. It 
appears, however, that when massicot is used 
as such active material it possesses proper 
ties different from any other lead oxide or 
form thereof, and in fact from any other 
and different material employed for the 
same purpose. It has been found that if 
two plates of like construction are packed, 
the one with massicot and the other with 
litharge, for example, the plate packed with 
massicot will not undergo deformation in the 
cell, while the plate packed with litharge, 
under similar conditions, will be more or less 
distorted. The bodies of massicot still re 
main firmly coherent in the plate under con 
ditions when like bodies of litharge or lead 
peroxide will loosen and fall out. It ap 
pears, moreover, from experiment that mas 
sicot has in the storage-cell a rate of expan 
sion and construction very closely approxi 
mating to, if not the same as, that of lead it 
self, and hence when massicot is placed in a 
lead plate both the lead and the active ma 
terial apparently expand and contract coin 
cidently, and therefore maintain their rela 
tive relations in point of volume, and hence 
do not tend to separate or disintegrate. The 
massicot may be applied to the plate in any 
desired way--that is, it may be packed there 
in dry under pressure, or it may be made 
75 
90 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
419,728 
into a pasty mass and then inserted. It ma- of lead or lead alloy and an active material 
terially increases the storage capacity of the consisting of massicot applied thereto, sub- Io 
cell. 
stantially as described. 
CHARLES SORLEY 
1-1 r. 
5 
I claim- 
1. In a storage-battery electrode, an active 
material consisting of massicot, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a storage-battery electrode, a support 
Witnesses: 
S. O. EDMONDS, 
PARK BENJAMIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419829.txt	(No Model.) 
S. B. COBB. 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAM. B. COBI. OF CIIICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ELECTRIC LAM P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,829, dated January 21, 1890. 
Application filed March 10, 1888, 
Serial No. 266,800, (No model.) 
55. 
?? 
To all who??, it may conce7-7?: 
To illustrate my invention I have selected 
Be it known that I, SAM. B. CoBB, a citizen 
a common form of incandescent electric lamp, 
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in 
which is shown in the accompanying drawing 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
in sectional elevation. 
5 invented a new and useful Improvement in 
A' is the glass bulb. of an incandescent 
Electric Lamps, of which the following is a 
lamp A, (shown in the drawing as of the kind 
Specification. 
in which the bulb is practically exhausted of 
My invention relates particularly to an ium- : 
fluid contents;) B, the stopper, and C a con 
provement in incandescent electric lamps, 
cavity or glass chamber in the narrow end of 
Io whereby the life of the substance rendered 
the bulb, and through small apertures in 
incandescent by the current to produce the 
which the wires r and r", for connection in the 
light is greatly prolonged, either initially 
circuit and fitting closely in the apertures, 
that is, by the application of my improvement 
extend, and to which, respectively, the ends 
before the lamp has been used-orby the ap 
of the platinum, carbon, or other suitable 
15 plication thereof to lamps which have become 
thread D are fastened. . 
s 
"high tension with use, or which are origi 
I introduce into the chamber C'a liquid E. 
nally high tension, whereby they are restored 
which is non-conductive of electricity to an 
to usefulness or rendered useful, 
extent, that it will not short-circuit the cur 
The life of an incandescent lamp of the gen 
rent and surrounds the terminals f and r" 
20 eral form at present in use, or length of time 
within the chamber. My experiments have 
during which the substance within the lamp 
been principally confined to oleaginous liq 
which, by its reduction to an incandescent 
uids, and more especially to mineral oils, 
state, affords the light, and commonly referred 
though, of course, any liquid which will pro 
to as the "carbon, though not necessarily 
duce the results, or either of them, above de 
25 composed of that material, performs its func 
scribed is included as within the spirit of my 
tion, is supposed to be, as I understand, with 
invention. Of the oils I have used in my 
experiments paraffine-oil has been subjected 
the exercise of great care, and at the most, 
about fifteen hundred hours, though it is com 
to the longest tests, which have been so long 
monly warranted for only six hundred hours. 
as to satisfy me that my improvement renders 
3o When the carbon has become impaired to an 
an incandescent lamp, as to the carbon por 
extent that the light it gives is insufficiently 
tion thereof, practically indestructible by pre 
luminous, or to the extent of becoming sev 
venting its becoming-high tension. 
ered, when of course, by the consequent 
The liquid introduced for my purpose may 
breaking of the circuit it gives no light, the 
be in a quantity to fill the chamber C, though 
35 lamp has to be thrown away, since it is im 
I fill it only about one-third full, and though 
practicable to supply it with a fresh carbon. 
the quantity decreases, thus indicating that 
It has been discovered that by introducing 
it is consumed, its decrease is hardly percepti 
a supply of a suitable liquid into the lamp to 
ble, so that I am led to presume that it would 
require several years to empty the chamber 9o 
surround the terminals within itnearthe con 
40 nection therewith of the loop of platinum, car 
C of an ordinary lamp one-third full of oil. 
bon, or the like forming the carbon, burning 
I do not pretend to account with absolute 
out or impairment of the latter by becoming 
certainty for the effect produced by my im 
provement, though the theory is advanced 
high tension is prevented for an indefinite 
length of time, and that if the liquid be ap 
and believed to be correct that as the liquid 95 
- 45 plied to a lamp the carbon of which is already 
forms a seal it prevents the access of air to 
so impaired by use, though not severed, but the interior of the bulb, which would account. 
for the non-consumption of a fresh carbon, 
still continuous, the properties thereof are 
thereby restored, and, as it were, rejuvenated, 
and that the liquid gains access to the carbon, 
(probably by capillary attraction,) and when 
and it is rendered practically indestructible 
5o in the same degree as that of a new lamp pro 
the latter is impaired softens oranmeals it, 
vided with my improvement. 
E and thereby restores its quality of resistance 
85 
. 
. 
75. 
419,829 
2 
to the normal condition. Not beiag pre 
pared, however, to vouch as a matter of cer 
tainty for any theory, Imerely herein present 
the means and-the result thereby attained as 
constituting my invention. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. An incandescent electric lamp cumpris 
ling the usual bulb, carbon, and conducting 
wires, and provided on the exterior of the 
bulb with a non-conducting liquid contained 
in a single chamber and surrounding both the 
2. In an incandescentelectriclamp, the com 
bination of the glass bulb A', a conductor r ', 
extending into the bulb through apertures 
which fit closely around the eonductor and 
having the carbon D in circuit, and a supply of 
liquid which acts upon the carbon, as de 
scribed, contained in a single chamber and 
applied to the conductor outside the bulb over 
the said apertures, substantially as deseribed. 
3. In an incandescent electric lamp, the 
combination of a glass bulb, a conductor ex 
Wires, 
- 
4. ? 
IS 
tending into the bulb through apertures which 
fit closely around the conductor and having 
a carbon in circuit, and a single chamber con 
taining a supply of oil which acts upon the 
carbon, as described, mounted upon the bulb 
surrounding the conducting-wires, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In an incandescent electric lamp, the 
combination of the bulb A', having a cham 
ber C, provided with apertures leading into 
the bulb, a conductor r r", extending into the 
bulb through the said apertures which fit 
closely around the conductor and having a 
carbon D in circuit, and a supply in the cham 
ber C of a liquid Einherently non-conductive 
of electricity to an extent that will not short 
circuit the current, which forms a sea around 
the conductor at the said apertures and acts 
upon the carbon, substantially as described. 
25 
35. 
40 
SAM. B. COBB. 
In presence of - 
J. W. DYRENFORTH, 
CHAS. E. GAYLORID. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US419929.txt	(No Model.) 
A, C00 K, 
BILGE WATER PUMP, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 419,929. 
Patented Jan. 2l 1890. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BB 
628) itv.coco 
-za 44-66. 
311-uc11 to 
33 T2.g-z- 
. PeTERS. photo-lithographer. Washington, B. c. 
(No Model.) 
A, COOK. 
BI, GE WATER PUMP, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 419,929. 
Patented Jan. 21, 1890. 
? ------------- 
8I  
 
No.ssssssssssssssssssssss 
S 
SELETE a 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
928 itv.cscs 
-& M 6.4- 
-alazzt 7%-64. 
u14-232 at 2." 
tot:1eaf 
sy 41 
N, ETERs. photo-lithographer, Washingto..bc. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALONZO COOK, OF ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA. 
BLG E - WATER PUM. P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 419,929, dated January 21, 1890. 
Application filed September 11, 1889, Serial No. 323,642. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern, 
Beit known that I, ALONZO Cook, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at St. Paul, 
in the county of Ramsey and State of Min 
nesota, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Bilge-Water Pumps; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention is a new improved bilge-water 
pump; and it consists in the novel construc 
tion and arrangement of its parts herein set 
forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of the pump. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
Section of the pump. Fig. 3 is a flange to be 
Secured to the cylinder A. Fig. 4 is an oval 
flange to be secured to the bottom of the vessel. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view of Fig. 1, 
the outside cylinder A standing perpendicu 
larly and fastened down on the inner face 
of the bottom of the vessel by a flange b. 
Two-thirds, circumferential, of said cylinder 
A, near its lower end, is cut a Way on its rear 
side, leaving an opening a, one-third of said 
cylinder being left for its support, and the 
hollow cylinder B passes down on the inside 
of cylinder A down through the bottom of 
the vessel into the water below. The rear 
edge b' of the lower end of said cylinder is 
cut on a bevel, running down to a point b. 
The said inside cylinder has a rear opening 
b', two-thirds of its rear part being cut away 
to correspond with the opening a just de 
Scribed. To strengthen the said cylinder B 
there is attached to its point ba sliding brace 
C, its free end extending up on an angle into 
a recessic, cut in the bottom of the vessel, and 
its hook end hooking over the stirrup c', se 
cured crosswise in said slot, said rod holding 
the lower end of said cylinder firmly and 
keeping it from bending backward, and also 
shearing off drifts when the pump is at work. 
When the cylinder B is hauled up, the said 
brace C'slides forward over the stirrup c' into 
the recess c, flush with the bottom of the ves 
sel. Near the lower end of the said cylinder 
B are hinged two half-valves c, and when 
the vessel is in motion and said cylinder is 
shipped down said half-valves fall down of 
their own weight and by the downward Suc 
tion produced by the forward movement of 
the vessel and rest against the block c, which 
holds said half-valves apart at the bottom, so 
that when the vessel stops the force of the 
water below throws them up against the 
shoulder c, and in this position they prevent 
the water from forcing its way up into the 
hull of the vessel. 
The cylinder B is capped over on its upper 
end tight, and a screw-shaft D passes down 
through a threaded casting e and through 
the upper deck E into a swivel e', set in the 
cap on the upper end of said cylinder B. 
There may be packing around said cylinder B, 
if deemed necessary. By means of Said screw 
shaft D the cylinder Bisshipped up and down. 
There is another screw-shaft F passing down 
through a threaded casting f, and through 
the upper deck into a swivelf', which con 
nects it with the shaft f, which passes down 
on the outside of the cylinder A and through 
a sleeve f in a brace secured to said cylinder, 
and down to and is secured to the safety 
valve G, which covers and closes the opening 
a in the rear part of said cylinder. The lower 
end of said shaft f is divided into two arms 
f, the lower ends of which are secured to 
said valve G. By turning the screw-shaft F 
said valve is shipped up and down, and when 
down itslower end fits into a circular groove 
in the flange b of the outside cylinder A. 
There are also three braces g extending up 
from the flange b against said safety-valve, 
holding it up against the said cylinder air 
tight and keeping all water from coming up 
into the vessel when said valve is down. 
Fig. 1 shows the pump down in position, 
cylinder B hauled up even with the bottom 
of the vessel, and the brace C shipped up over 
the stirrup c' in the recess c in the bottom of 
the vessel. 
Fig. 2 shows the cylinder B thrust down 
into the Water as when the pump is Working 
and the vessel is moving through the Water. 
Fig. 3 shows the flange b with three braces 
g to hold the safety-valve G tight against the 
cylinder A when said safety-valve is down in 
place. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OC 
419,929 
Fig. 4 shows the perforated oblong guard 
having the flange h for the lower end of the 
cylinder B to work through and a slot h for 
the brace c. This guard H extends over the 
brace C and pump-hole, and is bolted up 
against the bottom of the vessel, with the 
flange h turned down in order to keep snags 
or drift from going up into the pump-hole. 
The pump, as a whole, consists of a perpen 
dicular cylinder A, with a circular flange b 
attached to its lower end, which is bolted 
down to the inside of the vessel and holds 
said cylinder securely. in place, the pump 
proper or inside cylinder B, which works up 
and down on the inside of the large cylinder 
A and down through the bottom of the ves 
Sel into the water below to such a distance, 
depending upon the diameter of the pump, 
that the vessel will be thoroughly drained 
when in motion, the after side of said cylin 
der B being cut on an angleb', running down 
to the point b, which angle gives the pump 
its life and working-power, producing a suc 
tion which drains the vessel when in motion. 
When the cylinder B and brace C are 
shipped up and the safety-valve G is down, 
as shown in Fig. 1, all water is kept from 
coming up into the vessel. The perpendicu 
lar edges of said safety-valve G. run up and 
down in guides g, which are bolted to the 
outside of cylinder A. 
This pump may be made small enough and 
adapted to the use of the smallest vessels, or 
large enough to thoroughly drain the largest 
vessel afloat. The valves care so constructed 
that they are entirely automatic, opening of 
themselves when the cylinder Bisin the water 
and the vessel is moving forward, and clos 
ing of themselves when the vessel stops. 
: 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- 
1. An automatic bilge-water pump consist 
ing of an outer perpendicular cylinder A, hav 
ing the rear opening a and flange b, secured 
to the bottom of the vessel by means of said 
flange, flange b, having a circular groove, 
safety-valve G, working against the outer 
face of said outer cylinder and in guides g 
and adapted to close said opening a, shaft f, 
having its lower end divided into two parts 
and secured to said safety-valve, its upper 
end passing through sleeve f* and bearing the 
swivelf', screw-rod F, its lower end working 
in Swivelf' and its upper end passing through 
deck E. Working in a threaded nutf, secured 
to the upper face of said deck, hollow cylin 
der D, working on the inside of cylinder A, 
having on its rear part the angle cut b', the 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
rear opening b, and on its upper end cap and 
swivel e', rod D, its lower end working in 
said swivel e' and its upper part passing 
through said deck E and working in a thread 
ed nute, secured to the upper face of said 
deck, substantially as shown and described. 
2. In an automatic bilge-water pump Con 
sisting of a perpendicular hollow cylinder A, 
having the flange b and rear opening b, said 
flange secured to the inner face of the bot 
tom of the vessel, hollow cylinder B, having 
the rear opening a registering with said 
opening band beveled end b', and Working 
up and down in said cylinder A, and having 
on its inside and near its lower end the auto 
matic valves c, screw-shaft D, its lower end 
swiveled in swivel e', secured on the upper 
end of said cylinder, its upper end and 
threaded part working in a threaded nute, 
secured to the floor of the main deck E, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
3. In combination with a bilge-Water pump, 
substantially as shown and described, and 
having in the after side of its cylinder A and 
B and near their lower ends openings a and 
b', the safety-valve G, adapted to close said 
openings and working up and down in guides 
g', braces g, one end secured to the flangeb 
and the other resting against said valye, rod 
f, secured to said valve and passing up 
through sleeve f and into the swivelf", 
screw-shaft F, its lower end swiyeled in the 
swivelf' and its upper part passing through 
a threaded nut?, secured to the upper deck, 
substantially as shown and described, and for 
the purposes set forth. 
4. In combination with an automatic bilge 
water pump, substantially as shown and de 
scribed, the brace C, having its rear-end piv 
oted to the lower end of the cylinder B, its 
forward end hooked and resting over the 
stirrups c' in the bottom of the vessel and 
adapted to be countersunk into the slot.c in 
said bottom when the said cylinder is hauled 
up, substantially as shown and described. 
5. In combination with a bilge-water pump, 
substantially as shown and described, the 
perforated guard H., having the perpendicu 
lar flange h, opening h", for the lower end of 
cylinder B to work through, and perpendicu 
lar and horizontal slot h", for brace C to Work 
through, substantially as . shown and de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
ALONZO CoOK. 
presence of two, witnesses. 
" . 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
- 
FRANK FARISH PRICE, 
ALFRED E. HESS. 
75 
95 
IOC 
Id 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420029.txt	No Model.) 
No. 420,029, 
F. L. BARTLETT, 
METALLURGICAL FURNACE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan, 28, 1890. 
 
 
Citnesses 
2, after 
(flye, 6744% 
Inventor 
2, a 6.4z 
m 
N. PEERs photo-Lithographer Washington, a ce. 
(No Model.) 
No. 420,029, 
F. L. BARTLETT, 
METALLURGICAL FURNACE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Jam. 28, 1890. 
Zitnesses 
/7 vertor 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK L. BARTLETT, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
METALURGICAL FURNAC E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,029, dated January 28, 1890. 
Application filed March 8, 1889, Serial No. 302,520. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, FRANKL. BARTLETT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Port 
land, in the county of Cumberland and State 
of Maine, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Metallurgical Furnaces; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the Same. 
My invention relates to furnaces for treat 
ing copper, silver, and lead ores containing 
Zinc and Sulphur, and which are now com 
monly treated by the old and well-known 
form of cupola or blast furnace. These fur 
naces in common use consist of a round, 
Square, or oblong stack with blow-holes or 
tuyeres at the base, which enter horizontally 
or incline upward for blowing in air under 
slight pressure. These stacks are from ten 
to forty feet in height, and the ore and fuel 
are fed into the furnace in alternatelayers and 
the melted product is drawn off at the bot 
tom. The difficulties in the use of these fur 
naces are as follows, namely: In the first 
place, ores cannot be successfully treated if 
they contain sulphur above ten per cent. 
without previous roasting to expel the sul 
phur. All of the elements-such as sulphur, 
Selenium, zinc, cadmium, arsenic, antimony, 
and to some extent lead-have a tendency to 
volatilize in the hot lower part of the furnace; 
but as they ascend and meet the cooler lay 
ers of ore and fuel in the high charge they 
are condensed and again settle down to form 
slags, mattes, and speiss, which take up por 
tions of the precious metals-gold and silver 
holding them in suspension, thus resulting in 
a lossin this direction. There are thus formed 
in the bottom of the furnace a lower layer of 
pure metal, a layer of matte, and one of 
speiss, holding in suspension portions of the 
precious metals and above that the slag. 
This matte, speiss, and slag is frequently so 
rich in precious metals that it must be re 
smelted, and its presence always acts to di 
vert and cause loss of large quantities of gold 
and silver. The sulphur and zinc which it 
contains, so far from being utilized, is a con 
stant source of trouble to the Snelter. If a 
25 
35 
45 
So 
large percentage of zinc is present, it is first 
volatilized in the lower hot Zone and then 
condensed by the cool upper layers, forming 
infusible sulphide of zinc, all of which can 
not enter the slag, and which after a time col 
lect in intensely-hard masses about the walls 
of the furnace, and which have to be occa 
sionally cut away at great expense and to the 
detriment of the furnace. A similar diffi 
culty is experienced when the reverberatory 
or hearth furnace is used. Both furnaces 
act by reduction, and the presence of zinc 
and Sulphur causes losses in the same manner. 
So great is the loss caused by the presence of 
Zinc that it has for many years been custom 
ary for smelters to make an extra charge for 
Smelting ore containing above a certain quan 
tity of zinc, and as a result there is in the 
mines of this country vast quantities of ore 
rich in the precious metals, but which will not 
pay for treatment, owing to the zinc sulphide 
contained in them. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a furnace which shall obviate these difficul 
ties of smelting, and which shall quickly elimi 
nate all the volatile compounds contained in 
the ore, thus separating them at once from 
the non-volatile metals and carrying them off 
in the form of fume, which can be collected 
and utilized, and without allowing them any 
opportunity to condense and settle back again 
to contaminate the non-volatile metals which 
it is desirable to save. These can be drawn 
off as fast as collected, while the non-volatile 
metals can be saved in the form of a valua 
ble paint pigment. 
My invention consists of a furnace having 
a tight hearth and bottom and a row of down 
wardly-inclined tapering tuyeres near said 
bottom, and directed to strike the same, and 
. 
having narrow horizontal openings, 
It further consists in the combination of 
the above-described furnace, having dampers 
for regulating the size of the inner openings 
of the tuyeres. 
, 
In the drawings I illustrate a form of fur 
nace which embodies my invention, although 
I do not desire to be restricted to the exact. 
form here shown. 
Figure 1 is a transverse section. Fig. 2 is 
an end view, and Fig. 3 is a side view. 
. 
. 
95 
OO 
. . 
2 
420,029 
O 
25 
A is the base on which the furnace rests, 
(here shown as of brick,) the upper portion 
concave inform and laid with fire-clay to form 
the tight hearth of the furnace. On the base 
5 rest water-jacketed walls B of the furnace, 
(here shown as somewhat inclined outward.) 
The furnace is oblong in shape, having a 
length considerably in excess of its width. 
A horizontal line of tuyeres Eextends through 
the side walls near the base, and these 
have a downward inclination. In practice 
I incline these tuyeres so that the air-jet 
will strike the hearth about one-third of 
the way across. The tuyeres on opposite 
I get. 
sides thus, incline toward each other. 
the best results by making these tuyeres, as I 
have here shown them, in the form of narrow 
longitudinal slits, as in this way I am able to 
cover the surface of the hearth more uni 
formly with air. The tuyeres are made with 
an in Ward taper, and in each I insert a 
damper e, which is a flat piece of metal, 
nearly or quite large enough to fill the outlet 
of the tuyeres when pushed entirely in, but 
which when moved in and out by means of a 
handle e' will regulate the opening of the 
tuyere. An upper set of tuyeres K, of simi 
lar construction to the lower ones, is provided 
near the top of the side Walls, and a tight 
casing E' incloses each lower tuyere and the 
upper one, which is vertically above it. This 
casing E' is connected with the air-supply, 
which in this case comes from the air-space 
surrounding the top of the furnace, as here 
inafter shown. A door or hand-hole e is 
placed in the easing E, opposite each tuyere, 
to provide for its inspection. 
The furnace is provided with a dome or 
covering B", made double to form an air-space 
wherein the air-blast may be heated, thus 
utilizing the surplus heat of the furnace. 
This air-space connects with the several cas 
ings E, thus communicating with the tuyeres, 
and it also connects by means of a piped 
with a suitable pressure-blower. Feed-doors 
F-in this case two in number-are provided 
in the dome, and an aperture His placed cen 
trally in the top of the dome for the exit of 
the fume and gaseous products of combustion. 
The pipes b represent the water-inlets for 
the water-jacketed walls, and the pipes bare 
the outlet-pipes. A tap-hole G is provided at 
one end of the furnace at the lowest point of 
the hearth. There is also provided at each 
end of the furnace a slit or opening J, twelve 
inches or more in length by two or three 
inches in width, for the purpose of introduc 
ing bars to stir up and rabble the charge. 
This opening is closed with clay when not in 
In using my furnace I charge in the ore and 
fuel mixed together, making a layer in prac 
tice from six to eighteen inches in depth. 
As combustion proceeds the non - volatile 
65 metals and rocky matters are reduced and 
melted and fall to the bottom, forming a 
shallow stratum of molten matter. The non 
6o use. 
55 
35 
45 
 
volatile metals, as Sulphur, zinc, &c., par 
tially volatilize before fusion, but they mostly 
fuse and fall with the non-volatile metals. 
The heavy air-blast from the tuyeres E E is 
forced downward at an inclination through 
the ore and fuel, striking the surface of the 
molten matter about one-third the distance 
across the furnace. This blast stirs and agi 
tates the surface of the melted metal, scorify 
ing the melted products-zinc and sulphur 
which volatilize and pass of through the thin 
layer of unmelted ore in the form of fume, 
and thence out through the aperture H. The 
upper tuyeres K deliver an air-blast at the 
top of the ore, which serves to keep up a com 
bustion on top, and thus prevent the body of 
ore from becoming cool enough to condense 
any of the volatile compounds which rise up 
through it. It also adds oxygen to the sul 
phur compounds, forming them into oxysul 
phides and oxysulphurets. As stated, a large 
part of the volatile metals which have hereto 
fore caused so much trouble are volatilized 
after they have been reduced and melted by 
the scorifying effect of the blast on the 
melted stratum, and thus the non-volatile 
metals, which it is desired to save in as nearly 
pure state as possible, are continually freed 
from the presence of the volatile metals, and 
may be drawn off in a nearly pure state as 
they accumulate. The volatile metals pass 
off as fume, which is collected and refined, 
making a marketable pigment. The process 
is a continuous one, and the ore and fuel are 
charged in at intervals in sufficient quanti 
ties to keep the depth of ore about constant, 
The quantity of air to be blown in through 
the tuyeres E is subject to accurate regula 
tion by means of the damperse, which, as ex 
plained, are moved out and in by the handles 
e', according to the supply of air required. 
In the scorifying process above described, 
and as carried out by means of my furnace, 
a great saving of silver is effected over any 
other process of smelting now in use. 
In all previous processes the zinc has either 
been volatilized dry or without fusing, in 
which case it takes away large quantities of 
silver in the fume, or it has been fused with 
out being volatilized. In the latter case it 
enters the slag, carrying with it large quan 
tities of silver, which it holds mechanically 
in suspension. 
By my scorifying method the zinc and sil 
ver are fused together, and then when the 
zinc is volatilized from the scorifying-bath 
by means of the air-jet, as described, it passes 
off in the form of fume without carrying 
with it any of the silver. 
The zinc is con 
stantly eliminated from the silver, which set 
tles to the bottom of the furnace with the 
precious metals and is drawn off. 
The presence of large quantities of sul 
phur aids my process by fusing and making 
the scorifying-bath thinner and more liquid 
than it otherwise would be. 
It is thus more 
thoroughly stirred by the air-blast than it 
75 
95 
Od 
fo5 
Id 
II5 
I 25 
420,029 
O 
- 
would be if the melted matter were more 
dense. In other processes much sulphur is 
objectionable, since it carries large quantities 
of silver into the slag. 
The force of the air-blast as it enters the 
furnace and is directed downward onto the 
melted matter must be great in order to 
properly volatilize the zinc, &c.; hence in my 
apparatus it is important to regulate the sup 
ply of air at the point where it enters the 
furnace. In this way the jet of air will enter 
with undiminished velocity when the damper 
is partially closed. As the quantity of air 
admitted is liable to vary with every new 
charge, it is important to have ready means 
of opening and closing the tuyeres. This I 
attain by the dampers herein shown, al 
though it is evident that various modifica 
tions can be made while keeping within the 
spirit of my invention. 
25 
I claim 
1. The herein-described scorifying-furnace, 
having a tight hearth or bottom and a row 
of downwardly - inclined tapering tuyeres 
near said bottom and directed to strike the 
same, and having narrow horizontal open 
ings, substantially as shown. 
2. The herein-described scorifying-furnace, 
having a tight hearth or bottom, a row of 
downwardly-inclined tapering tuyeres near 
said bottom, and dampers in said tuyeres for 
regulating the size of the inner openings of 
said tuyeres, substantially as shown, 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses, 
FRANK L. BARTLETT, 
Witnesses: 
S. W. BATEs, 
C. SEVERANCE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420129.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
E. J. WRAAL STAD. 
COMBINED BAND CUTTER AND FEEDER, 
No. 420,129, 
Patented Jan. 28, 1890. 
 
N 
S) 
S. 
w 
\ 
: 
(I/S 
SS 
Hi- 
s 
s --ASERV 
H-ty 
no 
els 
s 1. 
i 
NA, 
t 
f 
( / 
s 
y/s/ is 
\ 
d 
 
Q 
S) 
S. 
e 
'n 
9 NHL 
f 
s 
W 
| - 
- - - - 
II 
s 
s 
: sis 
is 
N 
N 
In 
l 
is 
N 
Q 
SS 
W 
s 
2 
Q 
s 
R 
11 INT 
s 
e 
Q 
Zvezzo 
Awar. V. malfi, 
(No Model.) 
E. J. WRA ALSTAD. 
COMBINED BAND CUTTER AND FEEDER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 420,129, 
Patented Jan, 28, 1890, 
 
Aarza V, Yaaasaa?, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD J. VRAALSTAD, OF HILLSBOROUGH, (DAKOTA TERRITORY.) 
NORTH IDAKOTA. 
COMBINED BAND.CUTTER AND FEEDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,129, dated January 28, 1890. 
Application filed May 31, 1889, Serial No. 312,719, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD J. VRAAL 
STAD, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Hillsborough, in the county of Traill and 
State of North Dakota, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Combined 
Band-Cutter and Feeder, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to band-cutters and 
feeders for thrashing-machines, and has ref 
erence more particularly to that class of ma 
chines in which the grain is delivered to the 
cylinder of the thrasher by means of continu 
ously - traveling endless chains, aprons, or 
belts, between which the material passes. 
In the preferred form of my machine there 
will be two or more endless chains, belts, or 
aprons carried in frames pivoted at the re 
ceiving end and Spring-sustained at the de 
livery end, the chains being provided with 
arms or fingers working through slots in the 
floor or platform of the frames, and acting in 
conjunction with these chains or belts is a 
feeding belt or apron moving at a greater 
Speed than the receiving-chains, the said feed 
ing belt or apron being located above the re 
ceiving-chains and having its delivery end 
pressed downward by a spring or springs. 
Rotating knives or cutters serve to cut or sever 
the band before or just at the time that the 
grain enters beneath the apron. 
Referring now to the drawings, Figure 1 is 
alongitudinal sectional view on the line 1 1, 
Fig. 2; Fig. 2, a transverse sectional view on 
the line 22, Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a sectional view on 
the line 33, Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a sectional view on 
the line 4 4, Fig.1; and Fig. 5, a top plan view 
of the platform. 
AA indicate beams projecting horizontally 
from the frame'of the thrasher, to which they 
are bolted or otherwise rigidly secured, said 
beams being in turn secured to inclined 
beams or frame-pieces B B, which extend up 
Ward from the frame of the thrashing-ma 
above the beams A A, as shown in 
Fig. 1. 
Secured to and projecting horizontally from . 
the frame of the thrasher, between the beams. 
BB, is an open rectangular frame C5 com: 
prising sides D, ends E and F, and a central 
partition G, The sides are extended upward 
above the ends, as shown in Figs, 1, 2, and 3, 
to prevent the grain from working off at the 
sides. The central partition (in the present 
instance) divides the supporting-frame C into 
two spaces, in each of which is mounted a 
frame or platform II, having sides II and a 
top or floor J, provided with longitudinal 
slots K, extending nearly the whole length of 
the same. The floor J is provided also with 
short slots I, between the slots IK to receive 
the rotary cutters, hereinafter referred to. 
Pivoted or hinged to the end-board F are 
two levers M, which extend outward parallel 
with the sides II of the platform or frame H 
and serve to support the ends thereof, the 
sides of the frame being provided with cleats 
N on their inner faces to rest upon the free 
ends of the levers. Beneath and supporting 
each lever M is a spring O, which rests upoll 
or is carried by a cross-bar P, secured to the 
frame C. At the receiving end the platform 
His pivotally connected with the frame C by 
means of a shaft Q, which extends, trans 
versely through the frames C and II, as shown 
in Fig. 2, thus permitting the inner end of the 
frame II to rise and fall, the spring serving 
to return the frame to its normal position. 
In the drawings I have shown the mail 
frame C as divided by the central partition 
G into two open frames, in each of which is 
mounted a frame II, and as these frames H 
and attendant parts are duplicates the cler 
scription of one of the frames II will apply 
to all of them. Near the inner end of the 
frame H are two shafts R and S, which are 
journaled in the side pieces II of said frames, 
and which are provided, respectively, with 
sprocket-wheels a, and l, the said shaft S be 
ing located slightly in advance of and below 
the shaft.R., as shown in Fig. l. 
T indicates a shaft journaled in the side 
pieces I I, parallel with but between the 
shafts Q and R, said shaft T being provided 
with kiives or blades c and with one or more 
sprocket or chain wheels d, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 3, the knives or cutters c projecting 
upward through the slots I. of the floor of the 
frame H. 
TJ U indicate endless chains, which pass 
about sprocket-wheels e on shaft Q and the 
wheels b on shaft S, the said chains being 
supported at their forward ends by the wheels 
a of shaft R, as shown in Fig.1. The num 
x, 
- 
3o 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
So 
95 
Od 
2 
420,129 
O 
. 
ber of chains and sprocket-wheels may be va 
ried as desired, and will correspond with the 
number of slots or openings IK in the floor J. 
Each chain is provided with fingers f, pro 
jecting upwardly through the slots above the 
floor J, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, and which 
serve to carry the grain forward toward the 
feeding-apron, hereinafter referred to. One 
or more of the chains U is adapted to run in 
contact with the sprocket-wheel don the cut 
ter-shaft T and impart the necessary motion 
thereto, motion being imparted to the chains 
from shaft Q, which is provided at one end 
with a band-wheel g. 
Secured to the beams B I3 are shafts V and 
W, provided with a sprocket-wheel h at each 
end, said shafts being located, respectively, 
above the shafts T and R, though this is not 
Pivoted to the inner faces of the 
essential. 
beams. B B are arms or levers X, carrying at 
their outer or free ends a shaft Y, provided 
at each end with a sprocket-wheei i, as shown 
in Fig. 1, the shafts W and Y being approxi 
mately in the same horizontal plane. 
Z indicates the feeding apron or belt, which 
passes about the sprockets on the shafts V, 
W, and Y, said feeding-apron comprising 
chains i, slats k, and teeth or fingers l, as 
clearly shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Springs in, 
secured to the beams A, press or bear down 
upon the outer ends of the levers or arms N 
and aid in keeping the inner end of the feed 
ing-apron down to its work. Shaft Wis pro 
vided with a belt-pulley , about which and 
the pulley g of shaft Q a belt o passes, mo 
tion being imparted to the shaft W, through 
its band-wheel 2), from any convenient source. 
A floor-piece g is hinged to the upper edge of 
end-board F of frame C and extends outward 
and rests upon the inner end of the frame II, 
as shown in Figs. I and 5, the space between 
the end of said floor-piece and the floor J be 
iig covered by a plater, secured to the floor. 
A guard-plate or bridges, secured to the up 
per edge of the end-board F, serves to direct 
the grain into the concave of the thrasher. 
The machine is provided with the ordinary 
center-board t, which is located directly in 
line with the partition G, so as not to in 
terfere with the rising and falling of the 
frames H. 
The operation is as follows: Bound bundles 
of grain are placed upon the top or floor of 
the frames II, and are caught by the prongs f 
of the chains U and carried forward toward 
the feeding-apron Z; but before they passbe 
neath the latter the rotating knives or cutters 
sever the band and permit the sheaves to 
spread out or scatter, so as to feed evenly. 
The feeding-apron Z, traveling faster than 
the chains U, feeds the grain from the top, 
and, taking hold of the same just before the 
prongs f of the chains U withdraw, carry it 
into the thrasher, as will be readily under 
stood. While the frames II FI are journaled 
upon the same shaft Q they are permitted to 
rise and fall independently of each other, 
which, coupled with the fact that the deliv 
ery end of the apron Z is yielding, precludes 
the choking or clogging of the machine. 
Should too much grain be fed beneath the 
apron Z, the inner end of the frame H would 
be depressed, the levers M swinging down 
Ward and compressing the springs O; but as 
Soon as the apron Z, which acts upon the top 
of the body of grain, removes some of it the 
frame H will gradually resume its normal po 
sition. The crowding or choking is avoided 
to a limited extent by the rising of the shaft 
Y; but as the choking would be most likely 
to occur beneath the shaft W, whose bearings 
are fixed, it is necessary to provide for the 
depression of the frames H to obviate the 
greater part of the difficulty. 
If desired, the shaft S may be omitted, and 
it is likewise obvious that the framing may 
be varied considerably without departing 
from my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is- 
1. In combination with a supporting-frame, 
the pivoted frame adapted to receive the 
grain-feeding chains mounted in said frame, 
a feeding-apron located above the chains, and 
means for imparting motion to the chains 
and apron. 
2. In combination with a supporting-irame, 
the pivoted frame mounted therein, feeding 
chains mounted in the pivoted frame, a feed 
ing-apron located above the chains and pro 
vided with a yielding support at its inner 
end, and means. for imparting motion to the 
chains and apron. 
3. In combination with the supporting 
frame, the frame H, pivoted at its outer end 
to the supporting-frame, a spring supporting 
the inner end of said frame H, feeding 
chains mounted in said frame, a feeding 
apron located above the chains, and means 
for imparting motion to the chains and apron. 
4. In combination with the open support 
ing-frame, a frame H, pivoted at its outer end 
within the supporting-frame, chains carried 
by said frame H, a lever or bar pivoted or 
hinged to the supporting-frame at its inner 
end and extending inward to support the 
frame H, a spring supporting said bar or 
lever, a feeding-apron located above the in 
ner end of the frame H, and means for im 
parting motion to the apron and chains. 
5. In combination with the open support 
ing-frame C, the frames HH mounted therein, 
a through-shaft Q, pivotally connecting the 
frames II II and C at their outer ends, 
sprocket-wheels secured to said shaft, a shaft 
at the inner end of each frame H, provided 
with sprocket-wheels, chains U, passing about 
the sprockets, a support for the inner ends 
of the frames H, a feeding-apron above the 
said frames, and means for imparting mo 
tion to the shaft Q and to the apron. 
G. In combination with the open support 
ing-frame C, two frames II H, located side by 
side within the frame C, to which they are 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
95 
ICO 
I IO 
IIS 
125 
420,129 
3. 
pivotally connected at their outer ends, Sup 
ports for the in her ends of the frames H. H., 
chains imounted in said frames, a feeding 
apron located above and extending across the 
ends of both frames H H, and means for im 
parting limotion to the chains and apron. 
7. In combination with the open support 
ing-frame, the frame pivotally secured thereto 
at its outer end and provided with feeding 
chains, the floor-piece pivoted to the support 
ing-frame and resting on the inner end of the 
frame II, a support for the said inner-end, and 
a feeding-apron located above the frame II. 
8. In combination with an open supporting 
frame having a center-board, the independ 
ent pivoted frames H on either side of said 
Center-board, provided with feeding-chains 
alnd with a support for their inner ends, and 
a feeding-apron located above the frames H.H. 
on spcting-. 
9. In combination with a 
frame C, a frame H, pivoted thereto at one end 
is provided with a yielding support at its 
in her end, a rotating band-cutter and feeding 
chains carried by said frame II, a feeding 
apron located above the said frame, and means 
for imparting motion to the cutters, chains, 
and apron. 
10. In combination with a frame H, provided 
at opposite ends with shafts Q R, having 
sprocket-wheels, a shaft, T between the shafts 
QR, provided with cutters and with a sprock 
ot-wheel, and a chain (or chains) passing about 
the sprockets on shafts Q R and engaging 
with the sprocket on shaft, T, all substantially 
as slown. 
1. In combination with frame II, provided 
with the top.), having slots IX and , sinafts Q 
C) 
25 
3. 5 
40 
and R, located at opposite ends of the frame 
and provided with sprocket-wheels, an inter 
mediate shaft T, provided with a sprocket 
wheel d and with cutting blades or knives, 
which latter project up through the slots Land 
chains U, having prongs f, to extend upward 
through the slots J, one of said chains im 
parting motion to the shaft T, all substan- 45 
tially as shown. 
12. In combination with the slotted floors 
J, the chains U, provided with prongs to work. 
in the Slots, means for imparting motion to 
the chains, a feeding-apron Z, located above 
the chains, and means for imparting motion 
to'the apron, the said apron traveling faster 
than the chains, all substantially as shown. 
13. In combination with a supporting-frame, 
shafts VW, provided with sprocket-wheels, 55 
arms or levers X, pivoted to the frame, shaft 
Y, carried by said arms and provided with 
sprockets, and an apron-Z, passing about the 
sprocket-wheels on the shafts. 
the arms X, pivoted thereto and carrying at 
their outer ends the shaft Y, a shaft W, mount 
ed in bearings on the frame approximately in 
the same plane with the shaft Y, a shaft V 
above the shafts W and Y, sprocket-wheels 65 
secured to said shafts, a feeding-apron pass 
ing about the sprocket-wheels, and a spring 
m, bearing upon the outer end of the arms X. 
In witness whereof Ihereunto set my hand 
in the presence of two witnesses, 
14. In combination with a supporting-frame, 6o 
EDWARD J. VRAALSTAD. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES E, IIYDE, 
WALTER I. CARTER, 
It is hereby certified that in Letters Patent No. 420,129, granted January 28, 1890, 
upon the application of Edward J. Vraalstad, of Hillsborough, North Dakota, for an 
improvement in a Combined Band-Cutter and Feeder, an error appears in the 
printed specification l'equiring the following correction, iz: in line 93, page 2, the 
word grain-feeding should read grain, feeding; and that the said Letters Patent 
should be read with this correc on therein that the same may conform to the record 
of the case in the Patent Office. 
Siglied, countersigned and sealed this 4th day of February, A.D. 1890. 
CY RUs BUSSEY, 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 
S}, AL. 
(a): its 1'signed: 
G. E. 
ITCHELL, 
Commissioner of Patents. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420229.txt	W. H. JEU DEWINE, 
MUSICALBUM AND LEAF TURNER. 
Patented Jan. 28, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 420,229, 
 
INVENTOR: 
" w 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. Eers. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WARREN II, JEU DEVINE, OF FRIEND, NEBRASKA. 
MUSIC-ALBUM AND LEAF - TURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,229, dated January 28, 1890. 
Application filed August 22, 1889, Serial No. 321,585 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WARREN H. JEU DE 
VINE, of Friend, in the county of Saline and 
State of Nebraska, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Music-Albums and 
Attachments for Turning the Leaves of the 
Same, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
music - albums and devices for turning the 
leaves of the same, and has for its object to 
provide an album in which sheet-music may 
be introduced, and also to provide a means 
whereby the several sheets of music may be 
turned by the performer at will by simply 
pressing against the knee-swell of the piano 
or Organ, thus obviating the necessity of re 
moving the hand or hands from the key 
board. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
Wide a device of the character above described 
of simple, durable, and economic construc 
tion, which may be used in connection with 
any Organ or piano, 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several parts, 
as will be hereinafter fully set forth, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the views. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the de 
Vice represented in position upon a music 
rack, and Fig. 2 is a perspective view of a 
knee-swell adapted for attachment to the in 
strument in connection with which the device 
is employed. 
The album comprises two back boards 10 
and 11, united in the usual manner, and within 
the back boards or covers a series of skeleton 
frames 12 are hinged, constituting the leaves 
of the album, into which frames the several 
sheets of music may be readily inserted. 
The skeleton frames constituting the leaves 
may be constructed in any suitable or ap 
proved manner for the reception of the music 
sheets-as, for instance, the front vertical 
member of the frame may be slotted longi 
tudinally at its outer edge and the horizon 
tal members and the rear vertical member 
d 
J.5 
25 
35 
45 
So 
grooved upon their inner edges, whereby a 
sheet may be introduced through the slot in 
the vertical member and made to enter the 
grooves in the rear vertical member and the 
horizontal members, whereupon the sheet Will 
fit in the frame, as illustrated in Fig. 1. 
The frames or leaves 12 are of less length 
than the back boards or covers 10 and 11, be 
ing placed the usual distance from the upper 
edge of said covers, whereby a space 13 is 
made to intervene their lower edge and the 
contiguous surface of the leaves or frames 
sufficient to accommodate an attachment for 
turning the leaves or frames, which will be 
hereinafter described. From the lower edge 
of each leaf or frame 12, preferably at or near 
the center, a pin 14 is projected, provided With 
a suitable head, and upon one cover, prefer 
ably the left-hand cover at the lower left-hand 
corner, a bracket-plate 15 is rigidly secured, in 
which bracket-plate one end of a lever 16 is 
fulcrumed, the other end of the lever being 
pivotally connected to a curved arm. 17, which 
arm, near its outer end, is provided With an 
attached latch 18, adapted for contact with 
the several pins 14 of the leaves or frames. 
The lever is normally held to incline in the 
direction of the center of the album by means 
of a coil or spiral spring 19, attached thereto 
at or near the center upon the under side, and 
also to the left-hand back board or cover 10 
near the lower edge, and the arm 17 is held 
in position to grasp the pins 14 by means of 
a preferably-flat spring 20, secured at one end 
upon the upper face of the lever 16 near its 
pivotal connection with the arm 17 and hav 
ing a bearing at the other or free end upon 
the said arm, as illustrated in Fig. 1. The 
spring 19 normally retains the lever 16 in Such 
position that the latch 18 will be over the 
pins, and the spring 20 normally causes the 
said latch to contact with said pins. Between 
the center and the lower end of the lever 16 
upon the upper face one end of a cord 21 is 
fastened, which cord is led downward Over 
any suitable guide-pulleys, if so desired, to a 
connection with the knee-lever of the Organ 
or piano. 
It will be observed in operation that when 
the knee-lever 22 is manipulated to draw upon 
the cord 21 the lever 17 is drawn laterally to 
55 
75 
85 
95 
O 
2 
420,229 
2. The combination, with a music-album 45 
secured to the upper end of the lever and 
bearing against the upper surface of the latch 
carrying arm, all combined for operation sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
and pins attached to the lower edges of its 
leaves, of a lever pivoted at one end upon 
one back or cover of the album, an arm piv 
otally attached to the other end of the lever 
and curved downward and upward over the 5o 
pins, a latch secured to the said arm capable 
of contact with the said pins, a spring Se 
cured to the album back or cover and to the 
under side of the lever, a second spring at 
tached to the upper side of the lever at the 55 
upper end and bearing upon the curved latch 
carrying arm, a knee-lever or equivalent de 
vice, and a cord-connection between the said 
swell and the said lever, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination, with an album pro 
vided with a series of skeleton frames consti 
tuting leaves and adapted for the reception 
of music-sheets, and a pin secured to the lower 
edge of each of said leaves or frames, of a 65 
lever pivoted upon the inner face of one back 
or cover of the album below the leaves, a 
spring-actuated curved arm pivoted to the 
upper end of the lever and extending across 
the pins, a lateh attached to said arm capable 7o 
of contact with the pins, a spring secured to the 
album-back and to the said lever, and means, 
substantially as shown and described, for 
drawing the lever outward against the tension 
of the said spring, as and for the purpose speci- 75 
fied. 
6o 
WARREN II, JEU DEWINE. 
Witnesses: 
BAILEY G. McKINZIE, 
S. S. STORY: 
the left, carrying with it the latch 18, which 
is in engagement with the pin 14 of the first 
leaf, for instance, in the album. As the lever 
16 is carried outward the arm 17 folds the 
5 leaf over upon the left-hand cover, and when 
the knee-level is released the spring 19, acting, 
draws the lever back to its normal position, 
and the latch 18 upon the arm pivoted to the 
lever contacts with the upper pin upon the 
IO right-hand leaf. In this manner each leaf of 
the album may be turned from right to left, 
as required, without the necessity of the oper 
ator removing the hands from the key-board. 
I desire it to be distinctly understood that 
I5 while I have described the attachment as es 
pecially applicable to a piano or to an organ 
it may be used with slight modifications in 
the way of a treadle for operating the lever 
16 in connection with music-stands of any de 
2O scription. One cover-board of the album, 
preferably the left-hand cover-board, may be, 
if desired, and preferablyis, firmly attached to 
the music-rest of the instrument or stand by 
any approved form of clamp. 
If in practice it is found desirable, a rod of 
metal may be inserted in the bottom portion 
of each leaf, as shown at 23 in dotted lines, in 
which event the pins 14 are attached to or 
constitute an integral portion of the rods. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with a music-album 
and pins projected outward from the lower 
35 edges of its leaves, of a lever fulcrumed at 
one end upon one cover of the album, a 
curved arm pivoted to the opposite end of the 
lever, provided with a latch capable of con 
tact with the said pins, a spring attached to 
4o the lever and the album-cover, and a spring 
3o 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420329.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 420,329. 
D. W. BOVEE. 
HARWESTER. 
Patented Jan. 28, 1890, 
 
e 
l 
  
I, 
 
E: 
------ 
- 
t 
 
 
 
17, VE 71// 
l Hy 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
9.5 m 
AIRWA M 
7//SAS 
2 
s 
ZInitiW. 
 
 
W! E. S. S. E. S. 
Gez. 
- 
V to r 
-Cava 74-76.4 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID W. BOVEE, OF TAMA, IOWA. 
HARVESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,329, dated January 28, 1890. 
Application filed April 24, 1889, Serial No, 308,375, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID W. BovEE, of 
Tama, in the county of Tama, and State of 
Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Harvesters; and I dohereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use it, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
harvesters; and it consists in, first, a plat 
form which is made in three sections, the 
central one of which is pivoted at one end 
and made vertically adjustable at the other, 
so that the three sections can be made to 
form a continuous platform, or the central 
section can be raised and allow the cut grain 
to be deposited on the ground at the end of 
that section of the platform which is in the 
rear of the cutter; second, the combination, 
with the driving mechanism of the harvester, 
of a pivoted lever, a foot-lever for operating 
it, a sprocket-wheel at each end of the piv 
oted lever, a sprocket-chain, a stationary 
disk, and a revolving toothed wheel for mov 
ing the heads of the cut grain faster than their 
butts as they are being moved along by the 
carrier; third, the combination, with that sec 
tion of the carrier which is upon the stubble 
side of the machine, of a double-cranked shaft 
which is operated by the sprocket-chairi 
which is driven from the roller at the end of 
the platform, the pivoted levers connected to 
the cranks and which move the heads of the 
grain outward, and the supporting-arms and 
shaft, by means of which the arms are sup 
ported, as will be more fully described here 
inafter, 
The objects of my invention are to con 
struct the platform of the harvester in three 
sections and make the middle section verti 
cally adjustable at one end, so that when this 
middle section is raised the cut grain will be 
dropped from the end of the first section di 
rectly upon the ground, and when the pivoted 
section is lowered into position the grain is 
carried the full length of the platform and 
deposited upon the ground upon the stubble 
side of the harvester, and thus deposit two 
swaths together in order to save the trouble 
and time of raking two swaths instead of one, 
and to place at the ends of the outside sec 
tions of the platform a separate mechanism 
for moving the heads of the cut grain faster 
than the butts, so as to turn the grain one 
quarter around and deposititupon the ground 
at a right angle to the direction in which the 
harvester is moving. 
Figure 1 is a rear view of a harvester which 
embodies my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view 
of the same: 
A represents the two driving-wheels, which 
are ratcheted upon the shaft B in the usual 
manner. Secured to one of the driving-wheels 
A is a large beveled gear C, which meshes 
with the beveled idler-pinion D, which in turn 
gives motion to the pinion E, placed upon the 
crank-shaft F. To the crank of this shaft is 
connected the rod G, by which the cutter is 
operated in the usual manner. 
The platform is divided into the sections 
HIJ, of which the two sections H and J are 
stationary, while the third one I is pivoted at 
one end and is vertically adjustable at the . 
When the section I is lowered into a 
other. 
horizontal position, as shown by dotted lines, 
the wheel L, secured to one end of the roller 
which operates the endless belt or carrier 
which extends around both of the sections I 
J, meshes with the idler M, which is operated 
by the wheel N on the end of the roller of 
the inner end of the section H. When the 
central section I is raised into the vertical 
position shown in Fig. 1, the grain is depos 
ited upon the ground at the inner end of the 
section. H; but when the central section I is 
lowered into position the cut grain is carried 
the entire length of the three sections HIJ 
and deposited upon the stubble side of the 
harvester. 
Secured to the frame of the central section 
I is a stationary arm O, which projects up 
ward just in the rear of the driver's seat, by 
means of which the driver can raise and 
lower the section at will. This section will 
be held in a vertical position by any suitable 
catch which will answer for the purpose. 
Journaled upon the top of the frame is a 
foot-shaft P, which has fastened to its rear 
end a lever Q, which has passing through its 
IO 
25 
35 
AO 
45 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
ICC 
 
2 
420,329 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
outer end the endwise-moving shaft R, which 
is journaled both in the lever Q and the brace 
S, the lever being pivoted upon the rear of 
the machine at a. The lever Q has journaled 
in its inner end a sprocket and gear wheel V, 
the gear-wheel of which meshes with the One 
W upon the cranked shaft F, and the sprock 
et-wheel of which operates a sprocket-chain 
X, which in turn gives motion to the sprocket 
wheel Y at the outer end of the lever Q, and 
which sprocket-wheel Y operates the shaft R. 
Through the sprocket-wheel Y and the end 
of the lever Q are made openings, and through 
these openings the shaft R can be adjusted 
laterally, so as to adjust the wheel Z on its 
rear end to the height of the grain being cut. 
The wheel Z is provided with a series of 
ratchet-teeth, which catch the heads of the 
cut grain and move them more rapidly than 
their butts, and thus turn the heads of the 
grain one-quarter around, so as to deposit 
the grain upon the ground at a right angle to 
the line of motion at which the machine is 
moving. The wheel Z is given a rapid mo 
tion, so that as its teeth catch the cut grain 
the heads are whirled around as it is about to 
drop from the end of the section H of the 
platform. In order to prevent the grain from 
becoming entangled with the teeth of the 
wheel Z, and being carried around, a disk 1. 
is supported by a rod 2 from the lever Q in 
close proximity to the inner side of the wheel 
Z, and this disk is placed eccentrically to the 
wheel Z, SO as to serve as a guard to prevent 
the grain being carried around by the wheel 
Z, as it revolves. When the shaft R is ad 
justed laterally, the rod 2 is adjusted at the 
same time. While the section I is in opera 
tion the lever Q is raised at its outer end, so 
as to throw the wheel V out of gear with the 
one W; but when the section I is raised the 
wheel Z is brought into operation, as shown. 
At the outer end of the section J of the 
platform is the wheel 3, on the end of the 
roller which operates the endless carrier, which 
is common to both of the sections IJ, and 
this wheel 3 meshes with a gear on the sprock 
et-wheel 4, around which passes the sprocket 
chain 5, which in turn gives motion to the 
sprocket-wheel 6 on the double-cranked shaft 
7. To each of these cranks S is attached a 
lever 9, which is supported by the arms 10, 
secured to the rod 11, supported in the upper 
end of the Supports 12, which rise from the 
side of the section J. As the crank-shaft 7 
is set in operation as soon as the section I is 
lowered, as shown in dotted lines, the levers 
9 at once begin a reciprocating and rotary 
motion for the purpose of catching the heads 
of the cut grain, and throwing them outward 
faster than the butts are moving for the pur 
pose of turning the grain one-quarter around 
and depositing it at a right angle to the line 
of travel at which the machine is moving. 
The mechanism shown placed at the inner 
end of the section H of the platform is only 
brought into operation when the section I is 
raised; but when the section I is lowered this 
mechanism is thrown out of gear by the action 
of the driver's foot upon the shaft P, but the 
mechanism located at the outer end of the 
section. J is always brought into gear as Soon 
as the section I is lowered, and hence must 
be operated directly from the roller at the 
stubble end of the section J to be automatic 
in its operation. When the machine cuts its 
first swath, the section I is raised into a ver 
tical position shown; but in cutting the sec 
ondi swath this section I is lowered SO as to 
bring the third section into operation and thus 
deliver the second swath upon the ground 
upon the stubble side of the machine and 
upon the top of the first swath, thus enabling 
both swaths to be deposited together and sav 
ing one-half the time necessary to rake the 
grain from the ground. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a harvester, a platform composed of 
three sections, the two outer ones of which are 
stationary, while the central one is pivoted to 
one of the end sections at one end and has its 
other end vertically adjustable so as to leave 
a space between the inner ends of the two 
outer sections, substantially as ShoWI. 
2. The combination, in a platform, of the 
three sections HIJ, the two outer sections HJ 
being stationary, while the central one I is 
vertically adjustable at one end with the 
operating-wheels L. M. N, the carrier of the 
two sections which are pivoted together being 
common to both sections, Substantially as de 
- Scribed. 
3. The combination, with the platform lo 
cated in the rear of the cutter, of the lever 
pivoted between its ends, a shaft journaled 
in the outer end thereof above the platform 
carrying a sprocket-wheel, a toothed wheel 
secured to its outer end, a disk or shield ec 
centrically supported adjacent thereto, the 
sprocket-wheel journaled in the opposite end 
of the lever, a sproclket-chain which passes 
around the wheels, and a gear-wheel at the in 
ner end of the lever for engaging a driving 
shaft, whereby the shaft and wheel are re 
volved, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the Operating 
shaft, a gear-wheel upon its outer end, the 
lever pivoted between its ends, a gear-wheel 
journaled at its inner end engaging said gear 
upon the operating-shaft and carrying a 
sprocket-wheel, and a sprocket-wheel jour 
naled in the outer end of the lever, a chain 
passing around said sprocket-wheels, an end 
wise-moving shaft at the outer end of the 
lever sliding in the outer sprocket-wheel, a 
wheel secured thereto at its outer end over 
hanging the delivery end of the apron, a disk 
or shield adjacent to its inner side eccen 
trically thereto, and a supporting-rod for the 
disk attached to the lever, substantially as 
specified. 
5. The combination of the three platform 
sections, the central section vertically adjust 
a 
75 
88 
go 
95 
O 
I 15 
I 25 
I 3G 
 
420,329 
> 
3 
chine from the cutter-bar in the rear thereof, 
a mechanism located at the inner end of the 
section, which is at the rear of the cutter-bar, 20 
for turning the grain partially around while 
the central section is raised, and a second 
mechanism for turning the grain partially 
around, located at the outer end of the sta 
tionary platform, which is at the opposite 25 
side from the cutter-bar, and in the rear of 
the machine, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
DAVID W. BOVEE, 
Witnesses: 
E. P. ELLIS, 
PHILIP MAURO, 
able at its end adjacent to the cutter-plat 
form, the operating-wheel 3, sprocket-wheel 
4, having a gear Secured thereto, the Sprocket 
wheel 6, the chain operated by said wheels, 
the crank-shaft 7, the levers connected to the 
cranks thereof, the Supporting-arms 10 and 
rod 11, the operating-wheel 3, receiving its 
motion from the cutter-platform through the 
medium of the carrier of the central section, 
whereby it is thrown out of motion when said 
section is raised, substantially as shown. 
6. The combination, in a harvester, of a 
platform composed of three sections, a sta 
tionary one in the rear of the cutter-bar, a 
central one pivoted so as to be raised at the 
end adjacent to said stationary section, and a 
stationary one at the oppositeside of the ma 
O 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420429.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 420,429, 
W. R. BAKER, 
SHEAF CARRIER FOR HARVESTERs, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Feb. 4, 1890. 
milliMHI o o - - - 
 
s 
28i-evoos-os- 
%ry 
OC, 6%ue. 
?eo. 2), Y-12 . 
R v 
d 
341.ue vitov, 
WZZZzan. A. Aa eer 
33 futs 
stov victi 
64-862-e-, 
 
N. PEERs. Photo-tithographer, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
   
  
 
W. R. BAKER, 
SHEAF CARRIER FOR HARWESTERS. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 4, 1890. 
344-uo viboz 
also 
AZZZzazz Al Zazier 
S3 fia &ltiovvie 3 
/6%-8%l- 
N. Peteas, photo-lithographer, Washington, B.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. BAKER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE McCORMICK t 
HARVESTING MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SHEAF - CARRIER FOR HARVESTERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,429, dated February 4, 1890. 
Application filed March 1887. Serial No. 229,287, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. BAKER, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
5 State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Sheaf-Carriers 
for Harvesters, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to that class of sheaf 
IC carriers in which an intermittently-moving 
endless apron is arranged to receive the bound 
sheaves as they are ejected from the binder 
attachment, and is started at will after a suffi 
cient number have accumulated to form a 
I5 shock or when the dumping-line is reached, 
so as to carry its load to the rear and deposit 
it upon the ground, and then again become 
stationary until the accumulation of another 
load. Such a type is exemplified in Letters 
2O Patent No. 325,710, granted to George A. 
Strout on the 8th day of September, 1885, and 
now owned by the McCormick Harvesting 
Machine Company; and the present improve 
ment has for its object, mainly, to simplify 
25 and improve the means for operating such 
apron at the will of the driver and means for 
supporting it from the harvester, to produce 
a stationary rest for the butts of the grain con 
vertible into a deflector for the butts or, into 
3o a wind-board for the carrier when the state 
of the grain permits or requires, or capable 
of being folded over the apron out of the 
Way, and, generally, to make a more perfect 
machine, all as will more definitely appear 
In the drawings, Figurel is a top plan view 
of so much of the main frame of a harvester 
with the binding attachment removed and 
the elevator-frame broken away and having 
40 my invention applied thereto as is necessary 
to an understanding of said invention. Fig. 
2 is a front elevation of the mechanism shown 
in the preceding figure, with the elevator and 
sill-frame partly broken away to more clearly 
45 expose the features of my invention. Fig. 3 
is an elevation from the stubble side of the 
sheaf-carrier detached and enlarged; Figs. 4 
5, and 6, enlarged details, respectively in 
front, cross-sectional, and inner end elevation, 
5o of one of the supporting bars or brackets for 
35 from the ensuing description. 
the carrier-frame, representing also the mode 
of connecting it to the harvester-girts; Figs. 
7 and 8, enlarged details in side and front 
elevation of the friction-gearing for commu 
nicating motion to the carrier - apron; and 55 
Figs. 9, 10, and 11, likewise enlarged details 
showing the means for mounting and adjust 
ing the idle-roller of the carrier-apron and 
of attaching the extension-board. 
A represents the main wheel of a harvester, 
and B the sill-frame at the stubble end, from 
which rise the elevator-struts C C for the 
Support of the binding attachment and ele 
vator apron or aprons. The bars of the sill 
frame are represented as pipe-metal, rectan- 65 
gular in cross-section, such as now used in 
machines manufactured by the McCormick 
Harvesting Machine Company; but it will be 
understood that they are not necessarily so, 
and that this species of frame is chosen merely 7o 
for illustration. 
Bolted or otherwise secured to the outside 
or stubble girt, at a suitable distance apart, 
are chairs D, one adjacent to the front sill 
and the other farther to the rear, and gener- 75 
ally behind the line of the main axle. Op 
posite each of these chairs, upon the proxi 
mate lateral bar of the wheel-frame, is secured 
a keeper D', having its eye in line with the 
seat in the corresponding chair, Brackets E 8o 
rest in these chairs and at their inner ends 
have tonguese, which enter the keepers, and 
are there secured by means of keys e', while 
toward their outer ends, and just beyond the 
outside girt, they are bent upward a slight 85 
distance, and then horizontally again to re 
ceive the inner ends of frame bars or timbers 
E' for the support of the sheaf-carrier. These 
brackets are preferably formed of metal with 
longitudinal strengthening-flanges e, which 9o 
in the outer horizontal portion are widened 
away from each other to afford socketse, 
that receive the inner ends of Said frame bars 
or timbers, and wherein they are secured by 
bolts. 
Mounted upon the timbers E are light 
transverse bars, which may be of metal, One 
of which E constitutes the inner side bar of 
the carrier-frame and the other E the outer 
side bar, and the two, with the Supports or Ioo 
95 
 
420,429 
o 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
timbers upon which they are mounted, con- through the foregoing train from the master 
stitute, practically, the frame of the carrier. 
wheel to the rear drum of the sheaf-carrier, 
and thus to operate the apron thereon. That 
These side bars are preferably formed of an 
the load may be delivered at the propertimes, 
gle-iron, or with lateral flanges falong their 
however, it is necessary that this apron should 
lower edges, which serve as guides or sup 
be operated intermittently aid only when in 
ports for the edges of the apron G, which con 
the judgment of the driver a sufficient load 
stitutes the platform of the carrier. 
has been accumulated or a point has been 
At the rear ends of the lateral frame-bars 
are bearings g for the driving drum or roller 
reached in the field where the load, whatever 
its size, should be discharged. To this end a 
G' of the apron, and at the front ends other 
rock-shaft R is supported in bearings r r", Se 
bearings g for its other drum or roller G', 
cured to the rear elevator-struts, and extends 
which latter may be hereinafter termed the 
from a point at the stubble side substantially 
The bearings g', however, are 
idle-roller. 
intended to be adjustable to preserve the ten 
in rear of the lever-arm, or whatever other 
suitable movable support carries the pulley 
sion of the apron, though other well-known 
connected to the tumbling-shaft, inwardly to 
provisions may be adopted to that end. How 
a point just behind the foot-plank Q, and is 
ever, when adjustable they will be mounted 
provided at each end with a crank r" r, thus 
in Way's h of castings H, which herein serve 
constituting, in effect, a bell-crank lever. A 
as rigid connections between the front sup 
port and the side bars, and will be pressed 
link r connects the crank at the outer end of 
forward against the tension of the apron by 
this rock-shaft with the lever-arm or pulley 
support, and another link 
connects the 
means of set-screws h", so as to take up slack. 
Hinged to these castings H in advance of the 
crank at the inner end with a lateral pin S 
from a foot lever or treadle S, pivoted upon 
apron are arms I, which support a board I, 
the foot-plank in position to be operated by 
extending the whole width of the carrier, and 
Serving, when thrown out in advance, as an 
the driver in his seat. 
Ordinarily the resistance of the carrier 
extension-board to support the butts of the 
long grain, but may be folded in upon the 
apron and its drums and the intermediate 
hinges to give access to the machinery. The 
connections with the movable pulley will be 
sufficient to prevent that pulley from being 
arms to which this board is secured may each 
actuated by the driving-belt, as its bar will 
have on the back side, or that farthest from 
the board, an enlargement or boss i, which 
yield to the stress of the belt sooner than will 
can, by removing the pivots and turning the 
the heavy train of mechanism be started by 
board, be brought either beneath or above. 
it. Whenever, however, the driver depresses 
When above, as shown in the third figure of 
the foot-treadle, and thereby draws the mov 
the drawings, the board can be shut down 
able pulley away from the other, the belt will 
be tightened to a point at which the friction 
Over the front supporting-bar until it assumes 
a horizontal position; but when beneath they 
will be sufficient to operate said movable pull 
will themselves rest upon the front support, 
ley, and through it the carrier-apron, thus dis 
as in the eleventh figure, and hold the board 
charging the load. As soon as this is accom 
in a sloping or rising position. It is obvious, 
plished the driver will release the treadle, 
however, that the same result may be secured 
when the stress of the belt will again draw 
by employing a second pivot-hole i' beneath 
said pulley toward the other to such an ex 
the others. 
tent that the friction of the now slack belt 
The inner gudgeon of the roller at the rear 
will no longer be sufficient to drive the car 
rier-apron, and the latter will consequently 
end of the side bars is prolonged and con 
nected, by means of gimbals lic, with one 
remain at rest while a fresh load accumulates, 
member k of the telescoping tumbling-shaft 
and until again intentiopally started by the 
K, the other member lic' thereof being at 
action of the driver. It is obvious, however, 
tached through gimbalsk* to a pulley L, jour 
that a spring may be applied to the lever, or 
naled upon a stub-axle l, projecting from a 
whatever other instrumentality carries the 
movable support herein, a lever L' pivoted in 
journal of the movable pulley, so as to throw 
a bearing upon the stubble-girt at a point 
it toward the other as soon as released by 
eccentric to the prime-pinion shaft. 
the driver, and relieve the belt of even that 
M is the main gear secured to the master 
labor. 
Wheel or main wheel and driving the prime 
pinion m, which in turn drives the shaft n, 
and through this shaft and bevel-gears m in 
operates another shaft N, extending past the 
rear sill and eventually driving the operative 
parts of the harvester. The prime-pinion 
shaft is prolonged outside of the stubble-sill 
and receives a pulley O, opposed to the one 
just mentioned as supported upon the lever 
arm, and a belt P thrown over these two 
pulleys then serves to communicate motion 
I claim 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the endless-apron car 
1ier, a driven shaft upon the harvester, a 
pulley upon the end of said driven shaft, a 
second pulley mounted upon a Swinging sup 
port having an axis eccentric to the axis of 
the first-named pulley, a belt connecting the 
two pulleys, means under the control of the 
attendant whereby the movable pulley can 
be swung nearer to or farther from the other, 
75 
f 
go 
95 
ios 
O 
If 5 
I 25 
I 30 
420,429 
3. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, with the sheaf-carrier, of 
the hinged extension-board at the head there 
of, and means whereby the inclination of said 
board may be adjusted. 
4. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, with the harvester-frame 
and the sheaf-carrier, of the metal brackets 
E, formed as described, the chairs upon the 
outer girt in which they sit, and the keepers 
upon the inner girt into which their ends are 
thrust, and the pin whereby they are secured 
against removal. 
WILLIAM R. BAKER. 
25 
Witnesses: 
ELMER. E. MERRITT, 
PAUL ARNOLD. 
and a tumbling-shaft connecting said swing 
ing pulley with the adjacent gudgeon of the 
active roll of the apron. 
2. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the endless-apron car 
rier supported at the stubble side of the har 
vester, the prime-pinion shaft, the pulley 
upon said shaft outside the stubble-girt, the 
Second-pulley mounted upon a swinging sup 
port pivoted on said girt, the tumbling-shaft 
connecting the swinging pulley with a gud 
geon of the active roll of the apron, the bell 
crank link connected to the said swinging 
support, and the lever upon the driver's foot 
board link connected with said bell-crank, 
whereby the driver may set the apron in mo 
tion at will. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420529.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 420,529. 
C. P. BOSTIAN, 
- 
CHISE, 
Patented Feb. 4, 1890. 
 
   
4%.S S NSy? 
 
- Ze 
A. 
as 
 
y 
(72/6(4-40 
m 
Ayvazyzoze 
C22e2/72eS AABe2SZZez,224 
21207'den 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographer. Washington oc. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES P. BOSTIAN, OF MILTON, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JOHN F. 
MECKLEY, OF WATSONTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CHISEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,529, dated February 4, 1890. 
Application filed September 19, 1889, serial No. 324,401. (No model.) 
- - 
- - - 
cation. 
To all, whon, it invally concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES P. BOSTIAN, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Milton, in the county of Northum 
berland and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented certain new and usefullmprovements 
in Chisels, of which the following is a specifi 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in chisels; and the object is to provide anim 
plement or tool adapted to mortising and hav 
ing the characteristic or functions of cleaning 
the mortise of the chips made during the op 
eration of cutting the mortise. 
My invention therefore consists in a chisel 
of the particular construction hereinafter 
specified, and especially as the same is par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
I have fully and clearly illustrated my in 
vention in the accompanying drawings, where 
l-s 
Figure 1 is a view of the complete chisel. 
Fig. 2 is a view of the stock with the chisel 
bit removed. Fig. 3 is a view of the chisel 
bit removed from the stock. Fig. 4 is a view 
of the chip-clearer removed from the chisel. 
Fig. 5 is a view of a modified means for secur 
ing the bit to the stock. Fig. 6 is a detail of 
the stock of the chisel shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 
7 is a detail of the bit of the chisel shown in 
Fig. 5. Fig. 8 is a view showing the chip 
clearer attached to an integral stock and 
chisel. 
A designates the stock, having parallel side 
faces, a straight back face, and inclined on 
the front face for a distance extending to the 
bit end, as seen at 1. At the lower end of the 
stock-piece in the rear face the metal is cut 
away, forming a seat 2 to receive the shank 
of the chisel-bit, At the upper end of this 
seat 2 is formed a transversely-arranged dove 
tail groove 3, to take the dovetail projection 
or lug on the end of the shank of the chisel 
bit. The projecting wall, as 4, of this groove 
is chamfered off on its side edges, as at 5, 
making the end, narrower and somewhat ta 
pered to engage the socket formed in the in 
clined end of the shank of the chisel-bit, and 
thus hold that element against displacement 
laterally. The lower wall of the dovetail 
may be arranged at a slight incline across the 
stock, in order to have a wedging function 
when the key is inserted. The metal of the 
stock is extended at the sides below the end, 
as seen at 6, and in these extensions are 
formed small notches 7, constituting the bear 55 
ings for the bearing-lugs on the hinged chip 
cleaner. The extensions have inclined ends, 
as shown, to set against the oppositely-ar 
ranged inclines on the chisel-bit. 
B designates the chisel-bit, having a shank 
formed with a seat 8 to rest on the floor of 
the seat 2 in the stock. The upper end of 
the seat 8 terminates in a dovetail lug 9, the 
end face of the shank being formed at an 
incline, with the sides extended, as seen at 
10, to fit over and against the formed upper 
wall of the dovetail groove in the stock. The 
lug 9 is made shorter than the width of the 
groove across the stock, in order that when 
the parts are laid together there will beformed 
a key-space between them, in which a key 11 
is driven, and the stock and bit thus firmly 
locked together. The bit is formed with side 
bits 12 on its edges to cut in advance of the 
chisel-bit and break the chips, so that the 
progress of the tool will be aided, and in the 
center of the bit may be a line of teeth 12* to 
aid in breaking the chips. The upper end of 
the bit terminates in a projecting incline wall 
13, against which the end of the stock sets 
and is held. 
C designates the chip-cleaner. This cons 
sists of a piece of metal having points 14 on 
its free end, and formed with bearing-lugs 15 
to fit in the bearings on the stock. This chip 
cleaner is arranged in its bearings so that it 
may turn up out of the Way when the chisel 
is driven into the wood and to turn down and 
stand at about right angles to the stock when 
used as a cleaner or clearer of the mortise. 
In Figs. 5, 6, and 7 I have illustrated a modi 
fied means for connecting the stock and bit, 
which consists in making the shank of the bit 
fit a seat in the end of the stock and project 
ing a screw through them. The clearer or 
cleaner is also mounted on a bearing-pin, and 
forms in this respect a permanent connection 
to the bit. 
It will thus be seen that the use 
of the hinged clearer is not confined to the 
chisels having detachable bits, but may be 
hinged to an integral tool and serve the pur 
pose intended. The instrument is adapted 
for use in any nortising-machine, or a han 
95 
75 
Od 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
420,529 
35 
40 
45 
lodge at right angles thereto, substantially as 
described. 
3. The mortising-chisel composed of a stock 
A, formed with a seat at its lower end to re 
ceive the shank of the chisel-bit and provided 
with a chip-piece hinged to its front face, a 
chisel-bit having a shank to engage the seat 
in the stock, and fastening means projected 
through the stock and the shank of the chisel 
bit, all substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
4. The mortising-chisel composed of a stock 
A, formed with a seat 2 at its lower end, hav 
ing a dovetail groove 3 across the upper por 
tion and bearing-notches 7 at its lower end, a 
chisel-bit 10, having a shank to set on the seat 
of the stock and formed with a dovetail lug 
to engage the dovetail groove of the stock, a 
hinged chip-cleaner C, having its journals in 
the bearings of the stock, and a key to lock 
the stock and bit together, substantially as 
described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two attesting wit 
(SSGS, 
CHARIES P. BOSTIAN. 
Attest: 
JoHN F. MECKLY, 
JOS. ANGSTADT. 
O 
dle may be put on the stock and used as a 
hand-chisel in the usual way. 
The operation is apparent. The tool hav 
ing entered the wood below the surface to any 
depth in the progress of cutting mortises, the 
chips made are drawn out by the hinged chip 
piece when the chisel is withdrawn. 
I am aware that mortising-chisels have been 
made with side edges to cut in advance of the 
bit; but I believe I am the first in the art to 
provide a chisel with a cleaning-piece hinged 
to the face of the chisel and arranged to op 
erate as described, and to this end it is appar 
ent that the bit and shank maybe integral and 
the chip-piece hinged to the face, as more fully 
mentioned hereinbefore. 
Having thus described my invention, I pro 
ceed to particularly point out and distinctly 
claim what I claim as my invention, as follows: 
1. A mortising-chisel provided with a chip 
piece hinged to the front face of the bit and 
arranged to normally lie vertically against the 
face of the bit and to turn down and lodge at 
right angles to the bit when the chiselis lifted 
in the mortise, substantially as described. 
2. A mortise-chisel provided with a clean 
ing-piece hinged to the front face of the bit 
and formed with a notched edge and arranged 
to lie against the face and to turn down and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420629.txt	(No Model.) 
Y 
C. T. SCHOEN. 
- 
SIDE BEARING FOR RAILWAY CARS. 
No. 420,629, 
Patented Feb. 4, 1890. 
 
WZZMASSAS 
6%2.--e- 
-Y 2, 3)-6. 
Ayrazzoze 
(%zzz/a26eezz/ 
4. 
2 7%za2 762-altiorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEST. SCHOEN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SIDE BEARING FOR RAILWAY-CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,629, dated February 4, 1890. 
Application filed November 14, 1889, Serial No. 330,317, (No model.) 
Cs 
I5 
25 
35 
to be applied. The body and the flanges are 
Be it known that I, CHARLEST. SCHOEN, a provided with ribs cat intervals, in order to 
stiffen and strengthen the bearing. The 
flanges, moreover, are provided with doWels 
d and holese for the reception of fastening 
bolts, the dowels serving the purpose of pre 
venting the shearing of the bolts. The lower 
or truck bearing, Figs, 2, 3, and 4, is similarly 
formed with respect to bearing-surface f, 
flanges g, ribs h, dowels i, and bolt-holesi, 
and in addition this lower or truck bearing, 
when desired or necessary, may be provided 
with the oil or lubricant cup kin its bearing 
surface. This lubricant-cup may be made as 
a simple depression in the bearing-Surface, 
as indicated in Fig. 3; or the said cup may be 
extended to the base-line of the bearing, as in 
Fig. 4, in order to serve not only as a lubri 
cant-cup, but also to re-enforce or strengthen 
the bearing. As already indicated, however, 
the lubricant-cup may be omitted, as may be 
required. 
Side bearings constructed in accordance 
with this invention possess among others the 
following advantages: 
First, They may be made without waste of 
metal, inasmuch as there is no necessity for 
shearing-flanges to shape the same to form. 
A decided economy in cost of manufacture is 
thereby gained. 
Second. The bearings can be made of any 
height without the thinning of the metal, 
which would occur did the flange extend all 
around; and in further explanation of this 
advantage it will be observed that practically 
there is no drawing of the metal, but a flat 
plate is simply bent or stamped to shape and 
the ends of the plate form the flanges, the 
sides or ends of the bearings being left open. 
Third. The bearings are stronger and more 
economical thus constructed; and, fourth, the 
bearings may beinterchangeable in every par 
ticular-height, curvature, bolt-holes, &c.-- 
with the cast-iron or steel bearings commonly 
used; and this is an excedingly important 
item in the car-builder's view, for by means 
of it no alterations in the cars are necessaly 
to substitute the bearings of my invention 
for those that may be in use. 
To all whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Improvement in Side 
Bearings for Railway-Cars, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of this invention is twofold 
namely, first, to provide upper and lower or 
body and truck side bearings for railway-cars, 
light in Weight, but of great strength and du 
rability; and this object is attained by con 
structing the side bearings of Wrought metal, 
preferably steel plate, stamped or pressed to 
shape by means of suitable dies or other ap 
propriate mechanism. 
The Second object of the invention is to 
construct such side bearings so as to be in 
terchangeable in every respect as to height, 
curvature, bolt-holes, &c., with the common 
cast-iron or steel bearings now in ordinary 
use; and this object is attained by conform 
ing the stamped or pressed steel bearings of 
this invention in size, general outline, and 
height to the cast-metal bearings which it is 
designed to Supersede. 
The invention consists in stamped or pressed 
Wrought-metal side bearings constructed sub 
stantially as hereinafter particularly set forth, 
and finally claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
1my invention, in the several figures of which 
like parts are similarly designated, Figure 1 
is a perspective view of the upper or body 
bearing. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the 
lower or truck bearing with a portion of the 
bolster. Fig. 3 is a cross-section of the lower 
bearing, and Fig. 4 is a similar view of an 
other form of lower bearing. 
In practicing my invention for the produc 
tion of the upper or body bearing I take a 
piece of Wrought metal-say steel plate-and 
by suitable instrumentalities bend it into the 
5 trough-like flanged body shown in Fig. 1, the 
bearing-surface being indicated at a. and the 
flanges at b. This body is curved longitudi 
nally where a curved bearing is desired; or it 
may be straight where that form of bearing 
is to be used. The height of the bearing por 
tion a from the flanges will be governed by 
the uses or the classes of cars to which it is 
What I claim is 
1. Side bearings for 1ailway-cars, provided 
with a bearing-Surface, base a flanges, and 
- 
t 
So 
55 
75 
95, 
IOO 
420,629 
strengthening-ribs intersecting the flanges 
and main portion, and constructed of wrought 
metal, preferably steel plate, stamped or 
pressed to shape, substantially as shown and 
described. 
2. Side bearings for railway-cars, construct 
ed with a bearing - surface, base - flanges, 
strengthening-ribs therefor, and dowels on the 
flanges, and formed of Wrought metal, pref 
erably steel plate, stamped or pressed to shape 
and curved longitudinally, substantially as 
described. 
3. A truck or lower side bearing for rail 
IO 
way-cars, constructed with a bearing-surface, 
base-flanges, intersecting strengthening-ribs, 5 
dowels on the base-flanges, and a lubricant 
cup in the bearing-surface, formed of wrought 
metal, preferably steel plate, stamped or 
pressed, substantially as described. 
my hand this 13th day of November, A. D. 
1889. 
CHARLES T. SCHOEN. 
In testimony whereof I have helreunto set 20 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. LEWIs, 
J. R. McLEAN, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420729.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet, i. 
P. MONCHARMONT, 
MACHINE FOR NOTCHING KEYS OR, WEDGES. 
No. 420,729, 
Patented Feb. 4, 1890, 
Fig. 7. 
FiS. 
4% A% 
 
9% 
a 2 
67 
 
 
  
   
 
 
aa. R2 
27 
 
 
 
 
5% 
 
2 
 
N2 
INVEMTOR 
% 9%a ce-over 
Christore 
ATTORNEYS 
WITNESSES: 
6.A. %eave?a 
24. Keeg. 
N PETERS. Photo-Lithographor. Washington, D.C. 
 
MACHINE FOR NOTCHING KEYS OR, WEDGES, 
Patented Feb. 4, 1890, 
No. 420,729, 
 
f 
ITIR 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
yo4. 
IWWENTOR 
By 
Quvya 4 ATTORNEYs 
(No Model.) 
P. MON CHARMONT. 
MACHINE FOR NOTCHING KEYS OR, WEDGES. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3: 
No. 420,729, 
 
Patented Feb. 4, 1890. 
WITNESSES 
6.% %lawz/24 
INVENTOR 
3. 7244uotz 
Ala ATTORNEK 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL MONCHARMONT, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
MACHINE FOR NOTCHING KEYS OR WEDGES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,729, dated February 4, 1890. 
Application filed November 20, 1888, Serial No. 291,408, (No model.) Patented in France May 16, 1888, No, l90,622 i Belgium 
May 17, 1888, No, 81,874, and in Germany May 27, 1888, 
55 
75 
To all whon, it nay concern. 
Be it known that I, PAUL MONCHARMONT, 
engineer, of Paris, in the Republic of France, 
have invented a Machine for Notching Keys 
or Wedges, (for which I have obtained Let 
ters Patent in France, dated May 16, 1888, 
No. 190,622; in Belgium, dated May 17, 1888, 
No. 81,874, and in Germany, dated May 27, 
1888) of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to a machine more 
particularly intended for notching or chan 
neling the beveled keys employed in railway 
chairs or supports of the class described in 
an application for Letters Patent filed by me 
March 16, 1888, Serial No. 267,441; but it is 
also applicable to the notching or channel 
ing of other keys or wedges for railways and 
tramways or other like purposes. 
The most important characteristics of this 
machine relate to the construction and opera 
tion of the punch or cutting-tool and to the 
means employed for holding the key or wedge 
in position while it is being acted upon by 
the tool and for securing the machine itself 
in position by connecting it to the permanent 
way or other fixed support, and to the gen 
eral combination of the parts, as hereinafter 
described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a vertical section of a machine 
for making the notches according to this in 
vention, taken online 1 2 of Fig. 2. Figs. 2, 
3, and 4 represent horizontal sections taken 
on the lines 3 4, 56, and 78, respectively, on 
Fig. 1. Fig. 5 represents a vertical section 
on line 910, Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a side elevation 
of the machine, viewed from the right in 
Fig. 1. Figs. 7 and 9 are sectional views, and 
Figs. 8 and 10 front views, of the key-holders. 
Fig. 11 represents the tackle, partly in sec 
tion, along the line 11 12, Fig. 12, and the 
punching-machine A being represented in 
elevation. 
Fig. 12 represents the apparatus 
in plan. Fig. 13 represents a transverse sec 
tion on the line 1314, Fig. 12. Figs. 14 and 
15 represent the keys. Fig.16 is a cross-sec 
tional view of a key. 
The machine illustrated in the drawings is 
arranged for cutting notches or channels in 
keys of the prismatic form represented in 
Figs. 14, 15, and 16. The side to be notched 
(a ty, Fig. 16) is beveled relatively to the lower 
surface. It is necessary to form the notch 
perpendicular to this lower surface and at a 
constant depth or distance from the edge. 
The distance of the notch from the end may 
vary, as indicated by the dotted lines in Figs. 
14 and 15. The side to be notched and the 
opposite side may not be parallel; but the 
key may taper to One end, either as shown 
by Fig. 14 or by Fig. 15. 
This machine is constructed with a stand 
ard or frame A, the base of which is formed 
with an angular transverse opening for the 
reception of the key C. to be notched or chan 
neled and of a distance piece or block b. 
Above and at right angles to this opening 
there is a cylindrical hole or socket, in which 
works a tool-holder c, carrying a punch O, 
secured by a set-screw v, the head of which 
works in a suitable slotif, Fig. 5. The lower 
part of the base is provided with a circular 
die-piece d, formed with an ellipticalor elon 
gated central opening and fitted into a re 
cess in the base, being retained in position 
by two parallel pins or keys driven in hori 
Zontally through the base and engaging with 
the sides of the die-piece. A cleaning-hole 
g is provided underneath the die-piece. 
Lugs B B are provided at the sides of the 
bed, being perforated with cylindrical holes, 
which are utilized for fixing the machine, as 
hereinafter described. The under side of the 
base is provided with legs p, to which a sole 
plate C of suitable shape and dimensions is 
attached by screws. The upper part of the 
frame is constructed with mechanism such as 
that illustrated in the drawings or of any 
other suitable construction for obtaining the 
requisite power for working the tool or punch 
O, employed for notching the key a. 
The tool-holder c is made with a cylindrical 
shank, and at its lewer extremity presents an 
inclined plan perpendicular to or bisecting 
the prolongation of the long axis of the ellip 
tical opening in the die-pieced, the said plane 
terminating in horizontal planes correspond 
ing to the thickness of the sides of the socket 
of the tool-holdier. 
The punch or tool O is made of elliptical or 
other suitable form in transverse section, be 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
IOO 
420,729 
O 
ing rounded or semicircular at the ends in the . 
example illustrated, and is retained in posi 
tion in the socket of the tool-holder c, which 
is of a form fitted to receive the shank of the 
tool. This tool is provided with an extension 
O' on the back or side opposite to that on 
which the cutting-edge O' is situated, which 
extends into the hole in the die-piece and 
forms a guide and support for the punch or 
cutting-edge O. A holet, closed by a screwed 
plug, is formed in the sole-plate C under the 
hole in the die-piece to enable the punch or 
tool to be removed. The cutting-edge O is 
semicircular, as indicated in the drawings, or 
of angular or any other suitable form corre 
sponding to that of the notch or channel to 
be cut in the key a. According as the key is 
intended to be driven in from left to right, as 
in Fig. 21, or from right to left, Fig. 22, it is 
supported in the machine by a filling piece 
or block b, Figs. 9 and 10 or 7 and S, in which 
the key is indicated in dotted lines. Each of 
these filling-blocks represents a rectangular 
parallelopipedon bisected longitudinally by 
a vertical plane, forming with the side of the 
parallelopipedon an angle equal to thatformed 
by the intersection of the horizontal lines in 
the surfaces between which the key is to be 
driven. The blocks b are provided with a 
projection b, Fig. 10, bearing against the 
thick ends of the keys and forming a stop, 
which prevents longitudinal displacement of 
the keys during the punching, and with a 
handle b to facilitate the manipulation. By 
means of these blocks, any number of which 
may be provided with the machine corre 
sponding to the different sizes of keys, the 
notching or channeling is enabled to be per 
formed with perfect regularity at the same 
position and depth, the key being retained 
longitudinally in position during the opera 
tion by the heel or projection b and later 
ally by the side face of the block. The punch 
makes a perfectly-clean cut without burrs, as 
the work and the tool are effectually pre 
vented from yielding or moving laterally, the 
former being supported by the block b and 
the latter being supported by the holder c 
and by the extension O'. This arrangement 
of the tool O is of great importance, consti 
tuting a cutting-punch perfectly certain and 
regular in its action. 
This notching or channeling machine may 
be screwed or otherwise secured to a table or 
bench by means of the sole-plate C. This 
plate may be dispensed with by making the 
base with feet adapted to fix it in position; 
but as the machine is especially intended to 
be used for notching the beveled metal keys 
employed in the construction of railways it 
is more convenient to provide means for fix 
ing it to one of the rails of the permanent 
way, as hereinafter described. These means 
of attachment or holding-tackle are illus 
trated in Figs. 11, 12, and 13 of the accompa 
nying drawings. 
The tackle represented in Figs, 11, 12, and 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
TO 
I I5 
13 is composed of two U-shaped bars or forks 
E and F, connected by a straight bar T. The 
fork E is provided with two hooks or claws 
E' E, shaped to embrace and fit the rail R, 
as indicated in Fig. 11, the rail being jammed 
in the hooks by means of wooden wedges G, 
connected to the apparatus by chains. This 
fork E is jointed to the straight bar T by a 
pin h, passed through an eye formed in the 
bar and through lugs on the fork and se 
cured by a nut. The bar T is connected at 
the other extremity to the fork E by a pivot 
i, Fig. 12, formed on the end of the bar and 
fitting in a hole or socket in the fork. The 
legs of the latter terminate in pins fitting into 
the cylindrical holes in the lugs BB, Fig. 1, 
hereinbefore referred to, being secured to 
the punching-machine by pinsi, attached to 
the base of the machine by short chains. The 
double joint formed by the pin h and pivot i 
enable the machine to adjust itself readily to 
any irregularities or inequalities in the level 
or incline of the ballast of the road-bed rela 
tively to the rail R. It is evident that in 
plactice the machine may be steadied and 
retained in position by attaching it to any 
other stationary support, the rail R being 
merely illustrated by way of example as be 
ing the most convenient support in working 
on the permanent way. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A machine for notching railway-chair 
and other like keys or wedges, comprising a 
standard frame having a lateral opening for 
the keys, in combination with a key-holder, a 
notching-tool, and a die-piece, substantially 
as described. 
2. A machine for notching railway-chair 
and other like keys or wedges, comprising a 
frame A, having a transverse opening for the 
key and its holder, a vertical opening for the 
punch and tool-holder, a clearing-hole, and 
perforated lugs B to secure the machine, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In combination with a machine for notch 
ing railway and other like keys or wedges, a 
key-holder consisting of a rectangular block 
against one side of which the key abuts and 
provided with a handle, and projection lb to 
prevent longitudinal displacement of the key, 
substantially as described. 
4. In combination with a punching-ma 
chine, tackle for fixing said machine in posi 
tion, consisting of two forks, a bar connecting 
the forks, adjusting devices, hooks to grasp 
the rail and wedges, and means to fasten the 
tackle to the punching-machine, substantially 
as herein described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
PAUL MONCHARMONT. 
Witnesses: 
LEON FRANCKEN, 
R. J. PRESTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420829.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 420,829, 
 
I. G., PLATT. 
RIWET, 
Patented Feb. 4, 1890. 
77vezz767 
ty 6.7%-Z. 
4, 16. & 64%- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IRVING G. PLATT, OF WATERBURY, CONNECTICUT. 
RIVET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,829, dated February 4, 1890. 
Application filed June 1, 1889, Serial No. 312,874 (No model.) 
45 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, IRVING G. PLATT, re 
siding at Waterbury, in the county of New 
Haven and State of Connecticut, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Weakened Rivets; and I do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improved rivet, 
the object being to weaken rivets to adapt 
them to break down or spread uniformly. 
With this end in view my invention con 
sists of a rivet weakened in one or more lon 
gitudinal lines and in certain details of con 
struction, as will be hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a rivet embodying my 
invention, and Fig. 2 is a plan view thereof. 
As herein shown, my improved rivet con 
sists of a hollow shank A and a flange or lip 
B formed at one end thereof, the said shank 
being weakened at four equidistant points 
upon its surface, as at C C C C, in lines ex 
tending longitudinally with it and to the ex 
treme outer end of the shank. The shank is 
not cut through, but merely thinned on such 
lines by a removal of the metal by a broach 
ing operation, by its displacement by rolling, 
or by any equivalent means. 
It will be readily seen that when the end of 
the rivet is subjected to spreading action it 
will split at its outer edge and break into four 
equal sections, which will readily roll back 
and fold down, whereby, a neater and more 
effective clamp is secured than can be had 
with the ordinary rivet, which tears and 
spreads sometimes one way and sometimes 
the other, but never uniformly. If desired, 
the metal may be thinned from the inside of 
the rivet. 
I would have it understood, also, that my 
invention is not limited in use to the type of 
rivet herein shown. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a rivet 
having a shank open at its smaller end and 
weakened in one or more longitudinal lines 
by reducing the metal in thickness along 
such lines, whereby said shank is adapted to 
be spread into sections and folded back to 
clinch the rivet, 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a rivet 
having its shank weakened by reducing the 
metal in thickness along one or more longi 
tudinal lines extending to the extreme outer 
end of the shank, substantially as set forth. 
3. As a new article of manufacture, a hol 
low rivet consisting of a hollow shank having 
a lip or flange at one end and open at the 
other end, and having one or more grooves 
extending longitudinally part way through 
the metal forming the shank to weaken it, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I hereby sign this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
IRWING G PLATT. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. B. SHUMWAY, 
HARRY A. HALL. 
O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US420929.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 420,929, 
 
M. B. CHURCH 
ORNAMENTATION OF WALLS. 
Patented Feb. ll, 1890. 
7-Z 
8storweg 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MELVIN B. CHURCH, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
ORNAMENTATION OF WALLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 420,929, dated February 11, 1890. 
Application filed June 22, 1889, Serial No. 315,228, (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MELVIN B. CHURCH, of 
Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent and 
State of Michigan, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Ornamentation of 
Walls; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same. 
Myinvention relates to the ornamentation of 
walls or to the manufacture of tiles or panels 
for wall ornamentation. It involves the use 
of a plastic material, such as thick lead 
paints and Water. 
The invention consists, essentially, inform 
ing raised portions or bas-reliefs in connec 
tion with a plate of any suitable material cut 
in the form of a figure" and laid upon the 
wall, panel, or portion of the surface. 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 shows a panel or tile for wall or 
namentation with the pattern-plate laid upon 
the surface approximately at the center. 
Fig. 2 shows the same form. With a part of 
the material combed over the plate. Fig. 3 
is a similar view of the surface after the 
plate has been removed. 
In carrying out my invention I may apply 
it either to a separate and distinct tile, made 
separately and capable of being applied to 
the wall as other ornamental tiles are ap 
plied, as shown in an application of even 
date here with filed by me in the United 
States Patent Office, or the invention may be 
applied to panels formed in place upon the 
walls itself by ornamentation of the material 
after it has been placed upon the Wall. In 
case the panel being used separately as in my 
aforesaid application a block or plate of any 
suitable material is provided, on which the 
plastic material is placed; but preferably 
before placing the plastic material on the 
panel or upon the Wall I lay in proper posi 
tion a pattern-plate of any suitable thin ma 
terial cut into the form of the desired orna 
- 
50 
55 
65 
75 
mentation, such as the leaf shown at Cin the 
drawings. After it has beenplaced in proper 
position, plastic material is laid upon the Sur 
face, and the ornamentation is given to the 
surface of this plastic material by drawing 
the tool or comb over the margin centrally to 
the figure, so that the material combed on or 
removed from the plastic surface in the 
formation of the raised figures is left upon 
the pattern-plate. When the pattern-plate 
is moved, this surplus material is moved also, 
and the form of the pattern-plate is left in 
proper position upon the tile Ol' panel, as 
shown at b in Fig. 3. This constitutes an 
easy and inexpensive method of Ornamenting 
the surfaces and avoids the difficulty hereto 
fore experienced in combing or moving the 
material in the formation of bas-reliefs over 
the margin of the panel or edge of the tile 
from whence it has to be moved with some 
care and difficulty. By it, also, I avoid the 
greater difficulty of removing the materialin 
the operation of combing or the like on sur 
faces where there are no defined panels, but 
where the material combed off in any direc 
tion would disfigure the other parts. 
I claim as my invention 
The hereinbefore-described process of or 
namenting surfaces, consisting in laying a 
plate upon the surface to be ornamented and 
then ornamenting the surrounding plastic 
material which forms the raised surface by 
moving the comb or other tool from the mar 
gin to the plate, whereby the surplus mate 
rial removed in forming the raised surface is 
deposited upon the plate, and finally remov 
ing the plate, substantially as set forth, 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, 
MELVIN B. CHURCH. 
Witnesses: 
G. W. BALLOCH, 
WALTER DONALDSON, 
O 
25 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421029.txt	(No Model.) 
E. KOCH. 
APPARATUS FOR DISTILLING WOOD, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 421,029, 
Patented Feb. 11, 1890. 
Y. 
g 
Evil 
t 
 
 
 
 
928) evacscs 
ce of 6-of-7 
4-7, M. Cte?.-- 
 
8-v-uo vitov 
6%-4-6-8%.ca 
sy 4. 9ttorneys 
(No Model.) 
No. 421,029, 
4. sheets-Sheet 2. 
E. KOCH. 
APPARATUS FOR DISTILLING WOOD, 
Patented Feb. 11, 1890 
38 42 Stov vicef 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
E. KOCH, 
APPARATUS FOR DISTILLING W00D. 
4 sheets-Sheet 8. 
No. 421,029, 
Patented Feb. ll, l890, 
b 
(S 
C 
EE EEEEEE 
SSS 
, 
l 
I 
la-ba- an 
r) () () (e) s 
M 
. 
N- 
ae 
. 
S 
FF's Fre 
=Feates as 
9. 
R H R 
 
 
928) bucoscy 
-%2 of 26 2. 
(No Model.) 
E. KOCH. 
APPARATUS FOR DISTILLING WCOD, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 421,029, 
Patented Feb. 11, 1890, 
W KnSS 
 
928). Evesses 
g2 c5-6eetz, 
44, Wit... if - 
sy 4- Stovicyw 
 
N. PETERs, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EBERHARD KOCH, OF NEW ORLEANs, LOUISIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE 
TO CHARLES J. ALLEN, OF SAME PLACE. 
APPARATUS FOR DISTILLING WOOD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,029, dated February 11, 1890. 
Application filed May 7, 1887, Serial No. 237,462, (No model.) 
55 
7o. 
Referring to the drawings making a part 
of this Specification, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of the connected apparatus for Wooddis 
tillation. Fig. 2 is a front end elevation of 
the WOOd-distilling apparatus, showing the 
relative position of the superheater. Fig. 3 
is a plan view of a battery of the retorts set 
in Series and a corresponding series of cool 
ing-chambers with track-connections between 
these separate chambers on the same hori 
ZOntal plane. Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7 are enlarged 
details of the retort. 
(A 
In Fig. 1 a view of one of the retorts with 
its fullnace and connected parts is shown, and 
as Several are generally employed that are ar- 65 
ranged parallel to each other and walled in 
With masonry to provide suitable furnaces, 
the construction of one of these furnaces will 
answer for the series, as they are duplicates 
in regard to proportion and formation of their 
inclosing-walls. 
A represents the retort, which consists of a 
cylindrical or Square chamber, preferably 
made of sheet-iron, rolled steel, or cast-iron 
of proper thickness to insure stability. The 
diameter of the retort is such as to permit 
the introduction in it of a car in which wood 
to be distilled is placed. The retort A is sup 
ported horizontally by any suitable means to 
permit its free expansion and contraction 
Without disturbing the surrounding walls. 
Retort A is surrounded by a masonry wall B, 
which is of such a proportionate length and 
width as to afford a space for the free circu 
lation of heat around the exterior surface of 
the metallic retort A. The wall B, that forms 
the inclosing-chamber for retort A, is arched 
and returned to closely conform to a flanged 
ring E, which is riveted to the shell of the re 
tort A at its front end. The envelopingma 
sonry chamber B is thus sealed at its front 
end by its joint with the ring E. The ring E 
has its front face of Such a breadth as to af 
ford a good bearing-surface for the hinged 
door F, which is secured to swing upon ears 
integral with or rigidly secured to the ring E. 
The door F maybe made to swing sidewise as 
an ordinary door, or be hinged at the top 
edge to swing upwardly, The door Fis pref 
erably faced true to correspond with the true Od 
85 
90 
95 
75 
o 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EBERHARD IKOCH, of 
New Orleans, in the parish of Orleans and 
State of Louisiana, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Distilling Wood; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvementin 
apparatus for the economical distillation of 
wood to remove the alcoholic and resinous 
elements therefrom and subsequently car 
bonize the fiber of the wood for use as char 
coal. 
Letters Patent of the United States No. 
316,794, dated April 28, 1885, were granted to 
me for an improved apparatus to effect the 
economical distillation of Wood rich in resin, 
resinous oils, and spirits, to remove this or 
ganic matter by the action of Superheated 
steam that is made to permeate the maSS of 
wood fiber in a hermetically-Sealed chamber 
and be led off to a proper condensing-coil. 
Practical operation of this apparatus demon 
strated the necessity of improvement in me 
chanical features of the patented device to 
facilitate the continuous operation of the ap 
aratus and remove gaseous products more 
readily. I therefore made application for 
patentforimprovementin apparatus for Wood 
distillation, filed March 1, 1887. 
The object of my present improvement is 
to perfect the details of the furnace that heats 
the distilling-retorts. 
A further object is to provide a more prac 
tical cooling-chamber for the reception of the 
cars after the carbonizing process is com 
A further object is to furnish a Superheater 
that is adapted to supply the highly-super 
heated steam to One or Several retorts suit 
ably arranged to Work in Series or singly, as 
may be required. 
With these objects in view my invention 
consists in certain features of construction 
and combinations of parts that Will be here 
inafter described, and pointed out in the 
claims, 
leted. 
- - 
- 
S. 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
421,029 
7o 
75 
low it, the coils M' being connected to the 
face of the ring E, and has an asbestus ring 
steam-generator N, and by a main pipe and 
interposed between these surfaces to afford a 
branches therefrom to separate retorts of the 
tight joint. The ring E and door F have 
battery or series, the supply-pipe O and 
their peripheral edges notched to form open 
branches O' having proper valves to admit 
slots ss, &c., into which bolts of proper size 
steam into any or all of the retorts in the 
are introduced to clamp the door F and flange 
series, as may be required. By this arrange 
Etogether. As will be seen, this construction 
ment and combination of the superheater 
of the door F and its connection with the 
with the retorts A the operation of super 
front of the retort A provides a ready means 
heating steam may be economically and effi 
of access to the interior of the latter for the 
ciently conducted for one retort, or any num 
introduction and removal of cars loaded with 
ber that may be in series, so that the opera 
wood to be distilled, or the carbonized wood 
tion of the distilling-plant is under perfect 
that is to be removed into a cooling-chamber, 
control, and any number of retorts can be 
as will be explained. 
operated at once, as may be expedient or de 
Beneath the lower surface of the horizontal 
sirable. 
metallic wall of the cylindrical retort A the 
When the charge of wood in a retort is 
deflector wall or plate G is located. This 
thoroughly carbonized, the car containing it 
wall must be such a relative distance below 
must be removed to permit a fresh car-load 
the bottom of the retort A as to afford a flue 
to take its place and undergo distillation. If 
or heat passage G between them. The Wall 
the car were exposed for any length of time 
or plate G forms the crown or top surface of 
to the atmospheric air, the highly-heated con 
the fire-chamber H, and is constructed either 
tents would ignite and be consumed. To 
of an arch of masonry preferably with a 
avoid the liability of combustion just men 
level top surface, or piers of masonry may be 
tioned a cooling-chamber P, of sheet-iron or 
provided that extend to a suitable height to 
brick, is constructed for each retort, and these 
receive a flat metallic plate, which is thus 
buildings are placed directly opposite their 
made to extend from one side wall of the fur 
respective retorts in line with them, so that 
nace to the other and provide a deflector to 
a railroad-track made to reach from the in 
prevent direct contact of the flame proceed 
terior of a retort A will extend into its cool 
ing from the fire-chamber H, that is placed 
ing-chamber to afford an easy means of 
near the front wall of the furnace B. 
transport of the Wood-car from the retort to 
The deflector G is made, preferably, of the 
the chamber, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3 of 
same length as the retort A, and in conse 
the drawings, and it will be noticed in Fig. 1 
quence the heat arising from the combus 
that the tracks are on the same horizontal 
tion of fuel in the fire-chamber H will pass 
plane between the retorts and cooling-cham 
around the rear edge of this deflector-wall 
and enter the flue G', surround the lower 
bers. 
A turn-table R is placed in each track at a 
half of the cylindrical shell A of the retort, 
point midway between the cooling-chambers 
pass forward to the front portion of the re 
and retorts, to facilitate the introduction of 
tort, thence upwardly and rearwardly through 
cars into the retorts, as a railroad-track S is 
the spaces Gafforded above and around the 
laid in the avenue between the chambers and 
upper portion of the retort, thence down 
retorts, upon which the cars are transported 
wardly at the rear of the retort and out 
to and from the distilling-plant, 
wardly to enter the flue J beneath an evapo 
It should be stated that a tight door is af 
rating-pan, and from this flue enter the base 
fixed to each cooling-chamber, to afford a 
of the chimney K, that forms the draft-flue of 
means of closing them air-tight when the cars 
the fire-chamber H. It will be seen that by 
that contain carbonized wood are placed in 
this construction of the furnace B the heat 
them to cool. 
currents are made to envelop the entire sur 
Many slight changes might be made in the 
face of the retort, while its lower surface is 
constructive features of this improved wood 
afforded adequate protection against the 
distilling plant without exceeding the scope 
direct contact of flame from the fire-cham 
of my invention; hence I do not wish to limit 
ber I. The construction of the stand-pipe L, wal 
myself to exact methods of construction 
ter-jacket L', and condenser L* has been pre 
shown; but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
viously described in my application for pat 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
ent, dated March 1, 1887, and does not formany 
Patent, is 
part of my present invention. 
1. In a furnace-chamber for wood-distilling 
In order to furnish superheated steam in 
apparatus, the combination, with a metallic 
requisite quantity to the several superheat 
retort surrounded by Walls, of a flame-de 
ing-retorts of the battery or series, a vertical 
flector for directing the heat and products 
chamber M is erected near to the steam-gen 
of combustion to the rear of the retort, a re 
erator N, and also convenient to the battery 
turn-flue surrounding the lower portion of 
ofretorts. This chamber orjacketis provided 
the retort for conducting the heat to a point 
with one or more coils of pipe M, that are 
near the front of the aetort, and flues or 
placed within the chamber M in proper posi 
tion to receive heat from a fire-chamber be- spaces for conducting the heat rearwardly 
9o 
95 
100 
IId 
II5 
1 25 
I 3G 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
421,029 
3. 
over the retort and downwardly behind the 
retort to a stack or chimney, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. In an apparatus for distilling Wood, the 
combination, with a furnace, a retort therein, 
flues leading under, over, and behind said re 
tort, and a cooling-chamber in a plane with 
and opposite the retort, of a railroad-track 
extending from the retort into the cooling 
chamber, and a turn-table located between 
the retort and cooling-chamber, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. In an apparatus for distilling wood, the 
combination, with a furnace, a retort therein, 
a flame-deflector for directing the heat and 
products of combustion to the rear of the re 
tort, a return-flue surrounding the lower por 
O 
15. 
 
tion of the retort for conducting the heat to 
a point near the front of the retort, and 
flues for conducting the heat and products of 
combustion rearwardly over the retort and 
downwardly behind the retort to a chimney, 
and a cooling-chamber located opposite the 
retort, of a track extending from the retort 
into the cooling-chamber, and a turn-table 
located between the retort and cooling-cham 
ber, 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses, 
Witnesses: 
EBERHARD KOCH, 
25 
JAMES F, HENRY, 
CHAS. W. LEWIS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421129.txt	R. L. FINLEY & H. H. HARPER. 
CAR COUPLING, 
No. 421129, 
A 2 
Patented Feb. 11 l890. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
729 a 
 
WTWESSES : 
A 7TORAVEYS, 
N. Peters Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
R. L. FINLEY & H. H. HARPER. 
- CAR COUPLING, 
Patented Feb. ll l890. 
No. 42ll 29, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
(S&S Es 
NSSES,..., EE Nr. 
4.SSNS (6%-Cr E2. 
H% 2777 
- SSSSN 
SNS'''S s 
N 
2 TTWT 
-52 as 
area 
V 
---.S 
NSN sisalarze 
Sys NNZ 
11) ARWE 
w 
(SSSS 
e. 
 
 
 
 
 
4. 
I 
AZ. . 
y 
S3% 
23, t 
- 
7%% 
22 
- 
-- 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington D.C. 
ATTORNEYS, 
- 
p 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT LEE FINLEY AND HENRY HUGHES HARPER, OF BONHAM, TEXAS. 
CAR COUPNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,129, dated February 11, 1890. 
Application filed November 5, 1889, Serial No, 329,316, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
TO 
To all whom it may concern: 
formed in the draw-head B. The Spring I is 
Be it known that we, ROBERT LEE FINLEY 
held in an opening C, which opens at one end 
and HENRY HUGHES HARPER, both of Bon 
into the opening C' and at its other end into 
halm, in the county of Fannin and State of 
the opening C, in which operates the rod II. 
Texas, have invented a new and Improved 
A pin J is secured in the rod H, and its pro 
Car-Coupling, of which the following is a 
jecting ends extend into the slots C, formed 
full, clear, and exact description. 
on the top and bottom of the draw-head B, 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
said pin serving to limit the inward and out 
new and improved car-coupling which is sim 
ward movement of the rod H, and the block 
ple and durable in construction and very ef. 
G, secured to the said rod. 
fective and automatic in operation. 
In the draw-head B is held a transversely 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
extending key K, passing through longitudi 
details and combinations of the same, as will 
nal slots L, formed in the beams L, in which 
be fully described hereinafter, and then 
the draw-head is mounted to slide. The key 
pointed out in the claims. 
K limits the forward and inward movement 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
of the draw-head. The rear end of the draw 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
head is guided on a pin N, on which is coiled 
ill which similar letters of reference indicate 
a spring O, one end of which, presses on a 
Corresponding parts in all the figures. 
transverse plate L, secured between the side 
Figure 1 is a front view of the improvement 
beams L, and the said spring presses at its 
as applied. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
other end against the inner or rear end of the 
Same. Fig. 3 is a front view of the improve 
draw-head B. 
ment with a modified form of pin-lifting de 
When the two cars are uncoupled and the 
vice. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the same. 
operator desires to couple them, the pin E in 
Fig. 5 is an enlarged sectional side elevation 
one of the cars is raised, so that the spring I 
of the improvement. Fig. 6 is a sectional plan 
forces the block G. outward, so that the coup 
view of the same. Fig. 7 is a front view of 
ling-pin can rest on top of the block G. The 
the same, and Fig. 8 is a transverse section of 
coupling-pin in the other car engages the 
the same on the line, acac of Fig. 5. 
- 
link D in the usual manner. Now when the 
The improved car-coupling A is provided 
two cars come together the projecting end of 
With a draw-head B, mounted in the usual 
the coupling-link ID passes into the opening 
manner on the end of the car. The draw 
C of the draw-head Band presses against the 
head B is provided at its outer front end with 
block G, so that the latter moves rear Ward, 
the usual opening C, into which is adapted to 
compressing the spring I and permitting the 
pass the coupling-link D, adapted to be en 
suspended pin E to drop downward and en 
gaged by the coupling-pin E, held to slide 
gage the coupling-link D. The cars are thus 
vertically in the draw-head B, and raised by 
coupled. 
a suitable lifting device F, hereinafter more 
The devices for raising the pin E may be of 
fully described. 
any construction, preferably, however, of the 
The opening Cin the draw-headB continues 
construction shown in Figs, 1 to 4, inclusive. 
rearward into an opening C, in which is 
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the upper end of 
mounted to slide longitudinally a block G, 
the coupling-pin E is rigidly connected with 
having its front end concave, so as to be con 
an upwardly-extending bar P, mounted to 
veniently engaged by the end of the coupling 
slide in suitable bearings on the end of the car. 
link D. The block G serves to support the 
On the extreme upper end of the rod P is 
coupling-pin E previous to coupling the cars. 
formed a handle P', to be taken hold of by 
On the rear end of the block G is secured a 
the operator on top of the car, so as to raise 
rearwardly-extending rod II, fitted to slide in 
the coupling-pin E, whenever desired, from 
the draw-head B, and on which is coiled a 
the top of the car. In order to raise the coup 
5o spring I, resting with one end against the ling-pin from either side of the car Without 
block G and its other end on a shoulder the operator stepping between the two cars, a 
30 
45 
35 
85 
95 
OO 
2 
421,129 
transverse bar G is secured to the rod P. and 
its ends are pivotally connected by the links 
R and R' with the inner ends of the levers S 
and S', respectively, fulcrumed on the front 
end of the cal' and extending in opposite di 
rections, as is plainly shown in Fig. 1. The 
Operator, standing on either side of the car, by 
talking hold of the outer end of lever S or S' 
and pressing the said end downward, raises the 
coupling-pin E until the block G is forced out 
Ward by the spring I, to support the pin E, as 
above described. 
In the modification shown in Figs. 3 and 4 
the rod P is pivotally connected by the link 
TWith an arm U", formed on a longitudinally 
extending shaft U, mounted to turn in suit 
able bearings in the end of the car. On each 
end of the shaft U is formed a handle U, 
Which hangs downward when the pin E is in 
its lowermost position. 
When the operator desires to raise the pin 
E from one side of the car, he turns the re 
Spective handle U upward, so that the shaft 
U is turned, and its arm U", pressing the link 
T upward, lifts the rod P, and consequently 
s in E, secured to the lower end of the said 
l'OC. It will be seen that by this simple device 
two cal's are automatically coupled, and as 
Soon as the link held by one car passes into 
the draw-head of the other car it pushes the 
block G rearward to allow the pin E to drop 
into place. 
Iaving thus fully described our invention, 
o 
I 5 
2 5 
W itnesses: 
R. M. FINLEY, 
TURNER. H. PERRY. 
35 
45 
we claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
tel's Patent 
1. In a car-coupling, the combination, With 
the draw-head B, having the opening C C'C' 
C and the slots C, of the block G, having a 
concave front end, the rod II, secured to the 
block and provided with the pin J, projecting 
into the slots of the draw-head, and the spring 
i, Surrounding the said rod, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
2. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a coupling-pin, of a sliding rod having its 
lower end rigidly secured to the coupling-pin 
and extending up to the top of the car, levers 
pivoted on the end of the car, and a link-coln 
nection between said levers and sliding rod, 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
3. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a coupling-pin, of a sliding rod having its 
lower end Secured to the coupling-pin and ex 
tending to the top of the car, the shaft U, 
mounted to turn in bearings on the end of the 
car and provided with the arm U' and han 
dles U, and the link T, pivoted to the said 
arm and rod, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
-- 
his 
ROBERT LEE X FINI, EY. 
IIENRY ITU G1 IES IIARPER. 
halk 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421229.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NICHOLAS ALEXEIEWITCH BIBIKOV, OF ALBUQUERQUE, TERRITORY OF 
NEW MEXICO, ASSIGNOR OF PART TO CHARLES L. HUBBS, BERNARD 
S. RODEY, WILLIAM C. BURKE, CHARLES R. SHUPE, JOSEPH. H. LOVE 
LAND, AND ABRAHAM W. HARRIS, ALL OF TERRITORY OF NEW MEX 
ICO, AND IDA STEIN AND ANNIE C. HALLORAN, OF ALBUQUERQUE, 
TERRITORY OF NEW MEXICO. 
COMPOSITION FOR PANT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,229, dated February 11, 1890. 
Application filed June 29, 1889, Serial No. 316,088, (No specimens.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NICHOLAS ALEXEIE 
WITCH BIBIKOV, a subject of the Emperor of 
Russia, but have declared my intention to be 
come a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Albuquerque, in the county of Bernalillo and 
Territory of New Mexico, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Compo 
sition for Paints, Roofing, Calcimine, &c.; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale, 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in compositions for 
paints, roofings, calcimine, and the like; and 
it has for its object to produce a composition 
of matter which, when used either alone or 
With all pigments or coloring-matter, partic 
ularly With iron ores carrying tungsten, man 
ganese, and tin, also with metals of the alka 
line earths and metals of the alkalies and 
their combinations, will be a substitute for 
vegetable oils, mineral oils, wood-tar, bitu 
men, asphaltum, glue, and rubber, which are 
now used in the manufacture of paints, cal 
cimine, roofing, &c. These ingredients are 
all combustible, and many of them are in 
flammable, while the composition of matter 
which is embodied in my invention, being a 
combination of exclusively mineral sub 
stances, is practically Water-proof, fire-proof, 
and acid-proof, and a non-conductor of heat 
and of electricity, and will preserve from de 
cay wood, stones, or other material to which 
it may be applied. 
In carrying out my invention I combine 
ground or pulverized mica, either muscovite, 
bicite, or any of the other varieties, with a 
solution of various, proportions of potassium, 
silicate, and of sodium silicate in boiling 
water, and using this solution either cold or 
heated. For instance, I mix five parts, by 
weight, of carbonate of soda with seven parts, 
by weight, of carbonate of potash and eight 
een parts, by weight, of silica, or ten parts, 
25 
35 
 
by weight, of silica and one part of charcoal, 
which last-named ingredient is added for the 
purpose of accelerating fusion. All of the in- 5o 
gredients are pulverized before mixing them. 
After mixing the ingredients I thoroughly 
fuse them and dissolve the fused mass in 
from six to eight parts, by weight, of boiling 
Water. After having been filtered or strained 55 
and diluted or thickened to a proper consist 
ency with lime-water I add to the solution 
from five to twenty-five per cent. of ground 
or pulverized mica. The mica forms with 
the said solutions, after the menstruum-that 6o 
is, the surplus water-has evaporated by ex 
posure to the air, a combination similar in 
its chemical composition to the varieties of 
feldspar known as orthoclase, albite' and 
the mineral known as nepheline.' This com- 65 
bination, when used alone-that is, for itself 
or with any or with all pigments or coloring 
matter, and particularly with iron ores carry 
ing tungsten, manganese, and tin, also metals 
of alkaline earths and metals of the alkalies 7o 
and their combinations for the preparation 
of paints, calcimine, roofing, &c., forms a 
practically fire-proof, water-proof, and acid 
proof vehicle and covering which is a non 
conductor of heat and of electricity, also pre- 75 
serves objects coated or saturated with it from 
decay, 
For some particulal' purposes, as for paint, 
calcimine; roofing, cements, &c., of brick, 
stone, or slate, I add to the solution of sili- 8o 
cate of potash or of silicate of soda, contain 
ing pulverized or ground mica, as stated 
above, from three to six per cent. (of the to 
tal weight of the liquid) of lime, either un 
slaked or air-slaked, or lime-water. When 85 
the lime is added, the liquid, after being ex 
posed to the air, evaporates and forms a com 
bination which is similar in its chemical com 
position to the varieties of feldspar known as 
oligoclase' and andesite, and makes practi- go 
cally a fire-proof and acid-proof coating or 
covering which is a non-conductor of heat 
and electricity and a preservative from de 
cay, and an excellent filler in wood-finishing. 
er 
2 
421,229 
5 
The addition of the pulverized mica, which 
is softened and partly dissolved in the fluids, 
furnishes to the compound silicate of potash 
and silicate of alumina. The addition of the 
unslaked lime heats up the liquid and starts 
a chemical reaction, the result of which is 
the foundation of the silicates of lime, alumi 
na, potash, and soda, which are insoluble in 
cold water or Water at an ordinary tempera 
ture. 
I am aware that soluble glass and mica 
with earthy substances have been used for 
insulating purposes; but these have generally 
been baked or otherwise hardened, (as would 
be accomplished by the admixture of plaster 
of-paris,) and in the present invention I do not 
Witnesses: 
WM. C. BURKE, 
C. R. SHUPE. 
contemplate such compounds, my invention 
or compound being adapted to be used in a 
liquid state, and is applied by the use of a 
brush. 
What I claim as new is 
The herein-described paint compound, the 
same comprising a vehicle consisting of a 
solution of silicate of soda, potash, pulver 
ized mica, and lime suspended therein, sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
NICHOLAS ALEXEIEWITCH BIBIKOW, 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421329.txt	(No Model.) 
A. T. SULLIWAN, 
MOUSE TRAP, 
No. 421,329, 
Patented Feb. 11, 1890. 
 
 
  
a O 
 
 
*%, leas 
forgo 7.Sc/livcz 
3v-uc11 tot 
  
  
33 his elitov vic 
- 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALONZO. T. SULLIVAN, OF MALCOLM, NEBRASKA. 
MOUSE TRAP 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,829, dated February 11, 1890. 
Application filed October 31, 1889, Serial No, 328,768, (No model.) 
w 
To aid, whom it naily CO7 cert: 
Be it known that I, ALONZO. T. SULLIVAN, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Malcolm, in the county of Lancas 
5 ter and State of Nebraska, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Mouse 
Traps; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
Io skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to lettel's 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
15 My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in mouse-traps; and it 
consists in the improved construction herein 
after described and set forth, whereby a sim 
ple and efficient trap is provided that will 
20 effectually and automatically subserve its 
purpose, as fully explained. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
a trap embodying my improvements, the tops 
being removed. Fig. 2 is a transverse section 
25 of the dotted line acac of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is 
a section of the line if y of Fig. 1. 
As represented, the trap consists of two 
compartments AB, separated from each other 
by the partition C, in which is formed a com 
3o municating-opening, the inner side of which 
is guarded by a metallic chute or platform b. 
Within this chute is located an inclined gate 
C, formed of wire, having its side portions 
bent horizontally outward to form pivots, 
35 while the central portion d is extended 
through the opening in the form of a loop. A 
transverse rod e is located in the upper por 
tion of the chamber A, and has pivotally hung 
thereon two rods fg, spaced by means of 
4o blocks h on the rode. The rod f has one end 
connected by a link to an ear located on a 
cut-off plate C", which slides vertically be 
tween side guides, so as to descend and close 
an opening located in the end Wall of the 
45 compartment A. The free end of said rod 
engages the loop of the portion d of the in 
clined gate. The other wire g is connected 
at one end to a depending hook i, Swinging 
pivotally from a pini, located on the Wall, and 
5o said hook is so located that when the plate C" 
55 
is raised its flange will pass beneath the hook 
and become engaged thereby, so as to be sup 
ported in its elevated position. The other 
end of the rod g carries a depending hook k, 
to which the bait is attached, 
In use the mouse enters the compartment 
A through the opening therein, and as soon 
as he vibrates the hook k in his efforts to get 
the bait the hook i will be swung, so as to 
permit the plate C" to drop and make a cap 6o 
tive of the mouse. As the only egress from 
said chamber is then through the opening 
leading into the chamber B, when the mouse 
passes through the Same he will lift the gate 
and thereupon operate the rod f to lift the 65 
plate and cause its re-engagement with the 
hook i, and the operation can be repeated in 
definitely. 
I am aware that prior to my invention traps 
have been devised wherein the general ar- 7o 
rangement of parts was such that in tamper 
ing with the bait the cut-off plate was dropped, 
and a gate was provided to cause the plate 
to be elevated, so I therefore make no broad 
claim to such arrangement. My improve. 75 
ment contemplates a more simple arrange 
ment and secures a more direct and positive 
action of parts. One side of the chamber B 
is provided with a perforated plate to enable 
it to be inspected without disturbing the lid. So 
I claim 
The combination, in a mouse-trap, of the 
chambers AB, communicating, as described, 
the latter being provided with chute and piv 
oted gate adapted to be raised by the animal 85 
passing beneath the same and provided with 
a loop extending into chamber A, a shaft e, 
ingress-opening, vertically-sliding plate for 
closing the same, pivoted hooki, rods fg, piv 
Otally hung on shaft e, and connected, respecta 9o 
ively, with vertically-sliding plate and hook i, 
Todf, engaging the loop of gate, and rod g, 
carrying bait-hook, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses, 
ALONZO. T. SULLIVAN. 
Witnesses: 
J. CARPENTER, 
M. H. WESTCOTT, 
s 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421429.txt	(No Model.) 
J. T. PENNYCOOK, 
PNEUMirosionaling APFARATUS, 
No. 421,429, 
Patented Feb. 18, 1890. 
NNNN NS R 
R -: 
I H 
was 
w 
l TITLE 
 
 
2S & 
S. 
? 
s 
s 
r 
| 
N 
i. 
(S) 
:N -2 s -Y 
- 
w 
er 
R 
be 
s' O RNs 
s 
N 
S. 
s 
928)iev coacs 
 
w 
b N C, 
N, PETERS, Photo-Lithographor, Washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. PENNYCOOK, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE ALPHA 
GLASS AND METAL COMPANY, OF NEW JERSEY. 
PNEU MATIC SIGNA LNG APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,429, dated February 18, 1890. 
Application filed April 12, 1889, Serial No. 307,0ll, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN T. PENNYCOOK, 
a citizen of Great Britain, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pneumatic Signaling 
Apparatus; and I do declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
My invention has relation to pneumatic 
bells for use in offices, stores, dwellings, and 
public buildings, and other places where such 
devices can be conveniently used; and it 
Consists in the construction and novel com 
bination of parts, as will be hereinafter fully 
described, and particularly pointed out in 
the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view, partly 
in vertical section and partly in elevation, of 
a pneumatic bell embodying the improve 
ments of my invention; and Fig.2 is a ver 
tical Sectional view, taken on the line cac in 
Fig. 1, of my improvement. 
Referring by letters to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the Supporting-frame 
or incasement, in which the bellows, the 
short tube projecting therefrom, the operat 
ing-gearing connected to said bellows, the 
escape-wheel, and the oscillating bell-hammer 
are Supported. 
B designates the bellows, which is sup 
ported on the bottom of the incasement and 
is provided with a short tube C, which ex 
tends downwardly from the base-plate D 
thereof and projects below the bottom of 
the incasement A, the extension E of the 
tube C being connected with the outer end 
of a tube or pipe F, which is connected at the 
other end to the short tube G, leading from 
the case H, in which is inclosed an air-cham 
ber I, of flexible rubber, nearly globular in 
form, and attached to the inner end of the 
short tube G within the case H and operated 
by a push-button K. I have described and 
- 
. 
55 
illustrated this form of push-button and flexi- So 
ble rubber globe I as one method of operat 
ing the bellows; but it is evident that any 
pneumatic tube may be used, and that the 
bellows may be operated by simply blowing 
through the pneumatic tube. 
Lisa transversely-disposed shaft, supported 
in suitable bearings in the walls of the in 
casement and provided with a downwardly 
inclined lever M, which has hinged at its 
lower end the upper end of a vertically-dis- 6o 
posed rod or stem N, which extends vertically 
upward from a metal disk P, resting upon 
the bellows B. The head or upper end of 
the inclined lever M on the shaft L is con 
nected with a cross-piece or portion G of the 65 
frame by a spiral retracting-spring R, which 
serves to return the lever M to its initial po 
sition and to expel the air from the inflated 
bellows after they have been inflated. The 
shaft L is further provided with a miter gear-7o 
wheel S, the teeth of which engage the miter 
teeth of a pinion-wheel T, which wheel T is 
also provided with peripheral teeth U, which 
permit it to serve also as a pallet-wheel and 
operate the pallet V on the shaft W, from 75 
which shaft W the hammer-rod ac', provided 
with a hammer Z, extends upwardly into the 
hollow of and near the edge of the bell or 
gong a, secured upon a supporting screw 
threaded stem b, projecting from the incase- 8o 
ment or supporting-frame. By this construc 
tion of the gearing the bell-hammer is op 
erated and caused to strike the bell both 
while the bellows are being inflated and also 
during the time the air is being expelled 85 
from the bellows by the action of the retract 
ing-spring R, upon the inclined lever M to 
return it to its initial position. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat- 9o 
ent, is 
The combination, with the supporting 
frame and the bell or gong mounted thereon, 
of the bellows connected with a pneumatic 
tube, a transverse shaft provided with a 95 
miter gear-wheel and a downwardly-inclined 
lever provided with a hinged stem having a 
disk at its lower end engaging the top of the 
(5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
421,429 
2 
bellows, a miter-pinion in engagement with 
the miter gear-wheel, and a bell-hammer pro- presence of two witnesses. 
vided with a pallet at its lower end engaging 
y 
the miter-pinion, whereby the bell or gong 
5 Will be sounded both while the bellows are 
being inflated and also while the air is being 
expelled therefrom, substantially as specified. 
J. MCNAMEE, 
HENRY J. ENNIS. 
Witnesses: 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
JOHN T. PENNYCOOK. 
TNW 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421529.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 42,529. 
 
A, B, STEWENS, 
ROCKING CHAIR ATTACHMENT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 18, 1890. 
A. B. STEVENS. 
ROCKING CHAIR ATTACHMENT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 18, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 421,529. 
 
WITWESSES 
6.6/2-?ee 
I wVEw TOR 
& 7%. 32. Attorney 
PEERS Photo-Lithographer. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ASHER B. STEVENS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK; MOSES N. BAKER (ADMIN 
ISTRATOR OF ASHER B. STEVENS, DECEASED) ASSIGNOR TO THE ROCKER 
SPRING COMPANY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ROCKING CHAIR ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,529, dated February 18, 1890, 
Application filed September 21, 1887, Serial No. 250,277, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, ASHER B. STEVENS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Rocking-Chair Attachments, 
of Which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
The object of my invention is to make a 
compressible spring attachment for platform 
rocking-chairs; and the invention consists in 
the features and combinations hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed, 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
alongitudinal section showing the inside of 
one of the rockers and base-rails of a platform 
rocking-chair equipped with my improved at 
tachment, the spring being below the line of 
contact between the rocker and base-rail; 
Fig. 2, Substantially the same, except that it 
shows the spring above suchline of contact and 
the rod inside thereof extending upwardly; 
Fig. 3, a cross-section taken in the line acac of 
Fig. 1; Fig. 4 substantially the same as Fig. 1, 
except that it shows a metallic rim at the bot 
tom of the spring; Figs. 5to8, inclusive, views 
of parts detached; and Fig. 9, the same asFig. 
1, except that it shows the Spring extending 
both above and below the line of contact be 
tween the rocker and base-rail and two rods 
extending in opposite directions inside its 
coils, the means of attachment being modi 
fied accordingly. 
Ais the rocker; B, the base-rail; C, the con 
necting-spring; D, the wire or rod inside the 
spring; d, the loop therein, and d the turned 
up ends thereof; E, the attaching-bracketse 
cured to one end of the spring and one part 
of the chair, and F the attaching-bracket 
having an arm or projecting portion secured 
to the other part of the chair. 
In constructing my improved attachment 
I use an open coiled spiral spring, which in 
operation will be readily compressed instead 
of extended by the rocking of the chair. This 
compressing of the spring will of course pre 
vent its becoming unduly stretched or other 
wise weakened when in use. 
To one end of the spring Isecure a suitable 
attaching-bracket adapted to receive and hold 
its end coil, and this bracket being secured 
to one of the rockers and base-rails operates 
to firmly fasten such end of the spring thereto. 
The opposite end of the spring is connected 
to the other rocker or base-rail by a rod passed 
lengthwise of the spring inside its coils, this 
rod having its central or looped portion em 
brace a projecting arm or part of the bracket 
attached to such rocker or base-rail and its 
extreme ends bent or turned up and hooked 
under or over the last coil of the spring at its 
said opposite end. In this way the spring is 
firmly secured to both the rocker and base 
rail, to the one directly by a bracket at one 
of its ends and to the other indirectly by a 
rod engaging the terminal coil at its other 
end, and the two attachments thus applied 
one at the inside of each rocker and base 
rail-operate to firmly and securely connect 
the rocking and base parts of the chair to 
gether. 
I prefer to flatten the wire forming the end 
coil of the spring with which the hooks or 
turned-up ends of the rod engage, or to use 
a metallic rim at this end of the spring to 
prevent any slipping or loose motion; but of 
course, as in the case of the other end of the 
spring, the attachment at this point may be 
made in any convenient way. I also prefer 
to use a bent or looped rod, as above described, 
to connect the end of the spring not provided 
with a bracket to its appropriate rocker or 
base-rail; but any other form of device capa 
ble of so indirectly connecting such end of 
the spring may of course be used. 
- The advantages of my invention are that 
it makes a simple, cheap, efficient attachment, 
and that the spring, being compressed instead 
of extended by the rocking of the chair, does 
not lose its elasticity or strength, or in any 
way become weakened by undue stretching . 
or otherwise, 
The essence of my invention, consisting in 
the use of a compressible spiral spring as the 
connecting medium between the rocker and 
base-rail of a base rocking-chair, one end of 
such spring being secured to the chair di 
rectly by a bracket and the other indirectly 
95 
75 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
- - - ------ 
85 
421,529 
by a wire or rod extending lengthwise of the 
Spring, I of course do not wish to be under 
Stood as limiting myself to special forms or 
details of construction. On the contrary, I 
intend to cover all proper modifications of or 
equivalents for any of the parts described. 
When I use the expression chair attach 
ment,' I mean what is commonly understood 
in the art as one of the appliances generally 
used in pairs, forming the connection between 
the seat and base parts for holding the rock 
ers and base-rails in alignment and proper 
relative position, made separate from the 
chair and in form to be applied thereto by 
connecting devices. By connectors Imean 
brackets, studs, plates, screws, rods, or other 
parts or devices, also made separate from the 
chair and used to secure the ends of the 
Spring to the rocker and base-rail. 
I claim 
1 A platform rocking-chair attachment 
comprising two connectors adapted to be se 
cured at the side of the rocker and base-rail 
to afford fixed points of connection thereon, 
l'espectively, and a compressible spiral spring 
adapted to have one end connected to one of 
Such fixed points of connection and the other 
connected to the other fixed point of connec 
tion and at a distance therefrom unchange 
able by the locking movement of the chair, 
substantially as described. 
2. A platform rocking - chair attachment 
comprising a compressible spiral spring, a 
bracket secured to one end of the spring 
adapted to be attached at the side of one part 
of the chair, and a rod secured to the other 
end of the spring and extending lengthwise 
thereof adapted to be attached to a fixed 
point of connection on the side of the other 
part of the chair and at a distance from the 
end of the spring unchangeable by the rock 
ing movement of the chair, substantially as 
described. 
3. In combination with the rocker and base 
rail of a platform rocking-chair, a compressi 
ble spiral spring, a bracket F, secured to one 
of said parts of the chair having an outwardly 
projecting portion, a bracket E, secured to 
the other of said parts of the chair and to one 
end of the spring, and a rod secured to the 
other end of the spring and having a bent 
portion secured to the projection of the brack 
et F, holding the end of the spring at a dis 
tance therefrom unchangeable by the rock 
ing movement of the chair, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 20th day of September, A. D. 
SS7. 
ASIIER 3. SIEVENS, 
Witnesses: 
EDw IN A. FINCKEL, 
IARRY Y. DAVIS, 
35 
45 
55 
O 
3O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421629.txt	(No Model.) . 
No. 421,629. 
J. STEPHENSON, 
GRIP CARRIER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 18, 1890. 
 
 
 
53 42 &lt to 11 c 48 
- 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 421,62 
J. STEPHENSON. 
GRIP CARRIER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 18, 1890. 
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 
-2-55 
 
 
 
928)ibw-cocy 
(2A of 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN STEPHENSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
GRIP-CARRIER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,629, dated February 18, 1890, 
Application filed October 7, 1889, Serial No. 326,259, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN STEPHENSON, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Grip-Carriers, of which the 
following is a specification, 
Tram-cars propelled by cable being of com 
paratively recent Origin, they are developing 
new necessities, among which is the change 
of the cable grip-machine from the car-body 
to the truck, which may free the body from 
incumbrance and hold the grip-machine un 
der conditions better adapted to the require 
ments of the cable. The practice heretofore 
largely prevailing of suspending the grip 
from the car-bottom is attended with evils, 
among which may be stated that if the gripis 
suspended to a car-body mounted on springs 
the grip is exposed to vertical deviation from 
the cable-carrying sheaves and difficulties in 
restoring the cable to the grip, and to avoid 
this difficulty special cars having no springs 
have sometimes been used, but Such are un 
comfortable for passengers and the car struct 
ure suffers from rough motion. I avoid this 
and other difficulties by locating the grip-car 
rier with its grip - machine central to the 
wheeled base and borne by a truck not rest 
ing on springs and independent of the car 
body, which rests on springs. In this way 
my improved grip-carrier is designed to meet, 
among others, the following requirements, 
viz: It is adapted to the size and form of the 
grip-machine; to afford the grip-machine lib 
erty for motion required by the cable; to hold 
the grip-machine in unvariable plane with the 
cable; to allow the grip-machine to be easily 
attached or detached from the car; to readily 
grip or release the cable; to afford the grip 
operator the utmost facility for action, and 
finally to connect the grip-machine and its 
carrier with the truck in such a manner as to 
relieve or mollify the jerk of the cable. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate a 
construction embodying my improved fea 
tures answering the requirements above 
stated, and in the drawings 
Figure 1 is a side view, partly in section, 
of a truck and a portion of the floor of a car. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the truck and show 
ing a portion of the framing of the car-floor, 
and Fig. 3 is a detail view of the link or sup 
port for the grip-carrier extension. 
The car-body, a portion of the frame A of 
which is shown, may be mounted upon the 
truck in any desired way, not necessary to be 
specifically indicated herein. The truck it 
self is shown as consisting, essentially, of the 
side sills B, secured to the axle-boxes B out 
side the wheels B and on the same journals 
which carry the car-body. Between the sills 
B, I arrange two cheek-sills C, practically par 
allel with the sills, but shorter, and these are 
connected to the sills by means of two com 
posite end cross-rails C'C', each composed of 
two pieces c c', of more than half the length 
of the cross-rails, the pieces being framed to 
cross each other at an obtuse angle midway 
between the truck-sills, each of which sills 
receives one end of each composite cross-railc 
c', leaving the other or loose ends of the rails 
beyond the crossingendward of the trucktobe 
utilized for holding recoil-springsand for other 
purposes, and supported upon the cheek-sills. 
The truck-frame thus made has at its middle 
an opening, of which the cheek-sills form two 
sides and the composite cross-rails C" four 
sides, constituting a well U of six sides adapted 
to the grip-carrier, of sufficient length to Sup 
port a grip of unusual length, designed to 
cause less abrasion of the cable. 
At each side 
of the grip-well W are smaller Wells U of 
an irregular figure of practically four sides, 
which are adapted to hold the wheel-brake 
and track-brake mechanisms. 
The motions of the grip and its carrier as 
required by the cable are chiefly lengthwise 
and crosswise of the car. Thus when the 
grip seizes the moving cable the tendency is 
to instantly jerk the car into motion, and to 
prevent the rudeness of this motion is one of 
the objects of my invention. Mounted on 
the cheek-sill C, in elongated bearings or slots, 
are the traverse guide-bars D, of substantially 
uniform cross-section, and on these bas are 
the sleeves E, each provided with a cove or 
standing poste for supporting the grip G. The 
bars D are connected together by articulated 
rods d,and the rear transverse bar is connected 
to recoil-springs H by the rods h, the springs. 
being connected with the cheek-sills. These 
O 
25 
35 
45 
95 
Ioo 
421,629 
O 
35 
45 
55 
recoil-springs yield to the jerk of the cable and 
start the car easily, after which the recoil of 
the springs restores the grip-carrier to the 
place of its original service. The greater mo 
tion required of the grip-carrier is crosswise 
of the car, as when passing curves, and es 
pecially at detours, where the car is turned 
into a side-track, while the slot-rail, with its 
grip-machine, retains its regular alignment. 
This motion of the grip-machine is allowed for 
by the movement of the sleeves upon the tran 
verse bars, as well as by the movement of the 
carrier on the recoil-springs. Thus it will be 
seen that the cable controls the grip-machine 
in any direction, except when limited by the 
recoil-springs, the carrier composed of the two 
transverse bars and their articulated rods mak 
ing a four-sided figure capable of varied form, 
and the ends of the transverse bars being Sup 
ported in keepers I below the cheek-sills, which 
allow freedom of motionin any horizontal direc 
tion. 
It may be observed that the place here as 
signed to the grip and its carrier is the best 
for accomplishing its purpose, and being celn 
tral to the wheeled base is less affected by 
curves of the track and best adapted for the 
moving cable to impart motion to the car-body 
and the truck. The grip may be connected to 
the sleeves by means of a cove or standing 
post, and there retained by suitable locking 
devices, and when desired it can be removed, 
as through the bottom of the car or other 
wise, these latter features forming no part of 
my present invention. 
It has been generally customary to place the 
grip-operator or gripman centrally of the car 
immediately above the grip; but experience 
has determined that the best place for the 
gripman is at the car-front, as his duty is not 
only to start and stop the car, but to be stead 
ily on the lookout, in order to prevent col 
lisions and to protect the public from harm. 
Hitherto no satisfactory method has developed 
of having the gripman so far removed from 
the grip-machine and from the wheel and track 
brakes, all of which are worked by the grip 
man, and one of the objections has been the 
lost motion of the mechanisms connecting the 
levers and the grip or brake mechanisms. I 
overcome these objections by practically ex 
tending the grip-carrier to the front of the car; 
and this I do by means of the grip-carrier ex 
tension side bars IK, which are shown pivoted 
to the ends of the forward transverse bar D, 
and connected to the housing M, mounted upon 
the link L, supported in the forward under 
side of the car-frame A, and allowing move 
ment of the grip-carrier to correspond with 
the motions caused by the cable or slot in the 
track. The link L is preferably formed sub 
stantially as shown in Fig. 3, and is pivotally 
suspended from the frame A of the car-floor, 
and bent to form a straight portion L", to which 
the housing M, carrying the extension of the 
transverse bars, is connected, and this housing 
and its connections can slide or move later 
ally upon the straight portion of the link, 
and the link itself can swing backward and 
forward in accordance with the movements of 
the grip-carrier to one side or the other. In 
this way the grip-operating lever and the grip 
carrier are maintained in their relations to 
each other, and the carrier constitutes a figure 
of changeless form, with its apex suspended 
from the car-floor on the link, while it can 
move in all directions horizontally to accom 
modate itself to the relative motions of the 
car and the cable. The grip-operating lever 
N and the articulated grip-connecting rod O, 
by means of which the grip is operated, are 
also mounted in the housing Mand move there 
with. 
- 
scribed. 
What I claim is 
1. A cable-car grip-carrier having two trans 
verse guide-bars of substantially uniform 
cross-section, the two bars connected at their 
ends by two articulated slide-rods forming a 
four-sided figure, substantially as described. 
2. A cable-car grip-carrier having tWotrans 
verse guide-bars mounted in supports to per 
mit a limited play, and having sleeves mounted 
upon the transverse bars, substantially as de 
3. A cable-car grip-carrier having two trans 
verse bars carrying sliding sleeves, having 
posts or sockets for the grip, the transverse 
bars being connected by articulated slide 
bars, substantially as described. 
4. A cable-car grip-carrier having two trans 
verse bars, the ends of which are connected 
to the car structure, and each transverse bar 
having on it a metal sleeve adapted to slide 
on its bar toward the sides of the car, the 
transverse bars being connected by articu 
lated side rods, substantially as described. 
5. A cable-car grip-carrier extended by side 
bars connected with the transverse bar, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. A tram-car with its grip-carrier extended 
toward the car end, the extended ends being 
connected by a housing, the extension being 
a practical triangle, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
7. A tram-car with its grip-carrier extended 
toward the car end, alhousing for the extended 
ends, and a link supporting the housing and 
allowing freedom for motions required by the 
grip-machine, substantially as described, 
8. A tram-car with its grip-carrier having a 
transverse bar, and extended side bars jour 
maled to the ends of the transverse bar and 
mounted in a housing, substantially as de 
scribed. 
9. A cable-grip carrier located at the car 
center having its extension side bars lodged 
in a housing, the housing and what it carries 
being suspended by a link, allowing freedom 
of motion thereto, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
10. A cable-car grip-carrier located at the 
center of its wheel-base, having its extension 
side bars housed and flexibly supported at the 
car end and having journal-bearings for the 
75 
90 
95 
Ioo 
Io5 
O 
f 15 
I 25 
 
421,629 
3 
O 
operating-lever in the housing, and the artic 
ulated rod-connection with the grip-machine, 
whereby the gripman at the car end can op 
erate the grip mechanism at the car center, 
While the grip-carrier can be moved by the 
cable in every horizontal direction, substan 
tially as described. 
11. A cable-grip carrier located at or near 
the center of the wheel-base and having side 
bars extended to near the end of the car, an 
operating grip-lever mounted in the exten 
Sion, and an articulated rod connecting the 
lever with the grip, whereby the relations of 
the grip and lever are maintained regardless 
of the position of the carrier, substantially 
as described. 
12. A cable-grip truck having a six-sided 
central Well and a grip-carrier mounted in the 
Well, substantially as described. 
13. A cable-car truck having a six-sided 
Well, a grip-carrier consisting of a four-sided 
frame mounted in said Well and supporting 
the grip, substantially as described. 
14. A cable-car truck borne on the axle 
journals outside the car-wheels and having a 
six-sided well, in which the grip-carrier is 
mounted, substantially as described. 
15. A cable-car truck having a six-sided 
well and a grip-carrier mounted in the well 
and consisting, essentially, of two transverse 
bars connected by side bars, the transverse 
bars being supported beneath the cheek-sills 
of the truck and having freedom of motion 
therein, substantially as described. 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
16. A cable-car truck having a six-sided 
well, a grip-carrier consisting of a four-sided 
frame mounted in the well, the forward por 
tion of the frame being extended to the car 
front and the rear portion connected by re 
coil-springs to the sills of the truck, substan 
tially as described. 
17. A cable-car truck having a six-sided 
grip-well, a four-sided grip-carrier mounted 
in the well and having freedom for endward 
motion, the grip carrier frame being con 
nected by a rod and spring with the end of 
the cheek-sills of the Well, substantially as 
described. 
18. A cable-car truck having a well, a four 
sided grip-carrier mounted in the well and 
having freedom of motion, extensions from the 
grip-carrier to the forward end of the car, a 
housing for said extensions, a link supporting 
said housing, and a grip-operating lever full 
crumed in said housing, whereby the grip 
carrier and lever may accommodate them 
selves to the movements of the grip under the 
influence of the cable, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, 
. 
JOHN STEPHENSON. 
Witnesses: 
JosepH, B, STEPHENSON, 
S. A. STEPHENSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421729.txt	(No Model.) 
W. S. KISINGER, 
WATER SPRINKLER, 
No. 42,729, 
Patented Feb. 18, 1890. 
Z 
S. 2% 
-e-Hi 
a 4- 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, washingtonic 
172Ye726 (2Zo 
4 g. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. S. KISINGER, OF BELLEVUE, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR TO HENRY 
G. STIEBEL OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
WATER - SPRINKLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,729, dated February 18, 1890. 
Application filed November 6, 1889, Serial No, 329,449, (No model.) , 
- 
Wagon. 
To all whon it Tuay concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. S. KISINGER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Bellevue, in the county of Campbell and 
State of Kentucky, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Water 
Sprinklers; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, reference being had to 
the annexed drawings, which form a part of 
this specification. 
My improved water-sprinkler consists of a 
plate or disk whose upper surface is armed 
with a series of longitudinally-adjustable 
vanes or buckets that disperse the water by 
the centrifugal velocity of said disk, which, 
latter is usually driven by geared connections 
With One of the ground-wheels of a wagon, 
cart, or other appropriate vehicle. Said vanes 
are disposed either radially or tangentially 
upon the disk, and are hollow or concave in 
front, or, in other words, on the side that first 
comes in contact with the stream of water 
discharged from the tank or other reservoir, 
the invention, being more especially appli 
cable to Wagons used for sprinkling streets, 
roads, &c., as hereinafter more fully described. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a plan 
of a pair of disks provided with my adjust 
able vanes or buckets. Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
plan of one of said disks, a pair of the vanes 
being sectioned horizontally. Fig. 3 is an 
enlarged Vertical section of one of said vanes. 
Fig. 4 is a similar section of a modified form 
of the vane. 
Referring to Fig. 1, A represents a plat 
form or frame, and C a? are hangers where 
with it is supported from the rear end of a 
Sprinkling-Wagon, said platform having suit 
able bearings for a pair of vertical shafts bb', 
which carry plates or disks B B', although 
the disk shape is preferred. The upper sur 
face of disk B is armed with a series of long, 
narrow guides C, which are here shown as 
being disposed radially with reference to the 
axis of said disk, and each guide is furnished 
with one or more bolts or screws c, that trav 
erse longitudinal slots d of the adjustable 
Vanes or buckets D. These vanes are hollow 
or concave, as seen in Fig. 3, and their open 
sides are presented in the direction the disk 
turns. 
E represents the fixed guides, e the clamp 
screws or bolts, and F the longitudinally-ad 
justable vanes or buckets of the other disk B'. 55 
The dotted circles gig' represent discharge 
openings in the bottom of conductors G. G', 
which receive water from the tank of the 
The operation of this sprinkler is as follows: 6o 
The water discharged from the ventages, or 
nozzles g g falls directly upon the rapidly 
revolving disks B B and is instantly scooped 
up by the concave buckets D F, which throw 
the fluid to a considerable distance in finely- 65 
divided jets or spray, the two disks being 
run in opposite directions, as indicated by 
the arrows in Fig. 1. If the water is to be 
thrown but a limited distance, the Vanes need 
not project beyond the end of their respective 7o 
guides, and by simply shifting said vanes 
outwardly the distance to which the Water 
can be thrown will be regulated accordingly. 
In Fig. 1 the vanes Fproject farther than the 
vanes D, in order that the sprinkler B' may 75 
throw water a greater distance than the other 
disk B. In Fig. 2 the guides C, and conser 
quently their inclosed vanes D, are arranged 
tangentially upon the disk B, thereby indi 
cating that these devices D may be disposed 8o 
in any manner that will be the most effective. 
In Fig. 3 the vane D takes the shape of a 
three-sided rectangular trough, while in Fig. 
4 the vane is a semicircular tube. Therefore 
it is apparent that the exact shape of the 85 
vane is immaterial, provided it has the de 
sired scooping action on the water and is 
capable of being adjusted longitudinally for 
the purpose of regulating the distance to 
which the spray can be thrown. 
In another application, filed by myself and 
Henry G. Stiebel, Jr., July 6, 1889, Serial 
No. 316,699, the concave vanes or buckets 
are shown and claimed more broadly than in 
the present case. Therefore Idisclaim from 95 
this application whatever is shown and 
claimed in the joint application above re 
ferred to, 
I claim as my invention 
1. A centrifugal sprinkler consisting of a loo 
9o 
O 
15 
Y - 
W 
 
421,729 
plate or disk whose upper surface is provided 
with a series of fixed guides carrying longi 
tudinally-adjustable concave vanes or buck 
ets, which buckets are open at their outer ends 
and have their concave sides presented in 
the direction said disks turn, substantially as 
herein described, and for the purpose stated. 
2. The combination, in a centrifugal sprink 
ler, of the plate or disk B, provided on its 
upper surface with a series of fixed guides C, 
carrying longitudinally-adjustable concave 
vanes or buckets D, which buckets are open 
IO 
at their outer ends, have their concave sides 
presented in the direction said disk turns, 
and are slotted at (l to admit clamp-screws 15 
c, where with they are secured to said guides 
C, for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAMI S. KISINGER. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES II. LAYMAN, 
A. W. MCCORMICK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421829.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 421829, 
 
J. R. GATHRIGHT, 
LOCOMOTIVE STREET CAR, 
Patented Feb. 18, 1890. 
WZZWASSAS 
0/66 caceae. 
(72.62. 0%zee). 
AWVAWZO7 
Von Zatarz 
//X. of-ri 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN R. GATHRIGHT, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR OF TWO 
THIRDS TO WILLIAM JARVIS AND J. B. GATHRIGHT OF SAME PLACE. 
LOCOMOTIVE STREET CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,829, dated February 18, 1890. 
Application filed December 4, 1889, Serial No. 332,490, (No model.) 
55 
75 
Beit known that I, JOHN R. GATHRIGHT, a of this invention. . 
To all whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Louis 
ville, in the county of Jefferson and State of 
Kentucky, have invented certain new and use 
fullmprovements in Locomotive Street-Cars; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Yention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
This invention relates to self-propelling 
Street-cars and other carriages; and its ob 
ject is to provide means for storing com 
pressed air, or any gas which may be similarly 
used, with the greatest economy as to space 
and facility of application. 
To this end my invention consists in the 
construction and combination of parts form 
ing a locomotive street-car, hereinafter de 
Scribed and claimed, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I is a side view of a street-car with 
the frame-work partly exposed, showing part 
Fig. II is an under side 
of my invention. 
view of the same car, showing the arrange 
ment of the locomotive-engines, Fig. III rep 
resents a cross-section at line ac, looking to 
ward the car-body. Fig. IV is a side view of 
the Working parts of one engine, the other be 
ing similar. 
5 represents the side sills of the car, 6 the 
corner-posts, 7 the upper longitudinal beams, 
8 the upper cross-beams, and 9 the cross-sills, 
all of which are made of light strong tubing 
secured tightly together at every joint and 
communicating together to form a single res 
ervoirin which I propose to store compressed 
air for running the engines of the car. This 
reservoir of connected pipes forms the actual 
frame-work of the car, thus distributing the 
iron of the reservoir, which is usually a dead 
weight, to serve a second purpose of great 
value as an extremely strong car-frame. 
Should greater storage capacity be desired, 
the pipes of the reservoir may be further ex 
tended to form the frame-work 10 of the side 
Casing of the car, and similar pipes may also 
extend to form the top and floor frames. This. 
utilizing the car-frame as a reservoir to con 
tain compressed air or other gas which might 
drive an engine is a principal characteristic 
Ilocate the engine-cylinders 11 underneath 
the car-floor and connect both directly with 
one of the car-axles by means of eccentrics 
12 and rods 16, whereby the engines revolve 
the axle, The same throttle-valve 13 con 
trols the supply of air to both engines 11, and 
that valve is connected with a hand-lever 14 
by means of a rod 15. The slide-valve of one 
engine is connected by its rod 17 with link 
gear 18 and of the other with link-gear 19, and 
both links are so timed to the movements of 
their respective gear and valves that a single 
reversing-lever 20 operates both at one and 
the same movement to produce a given effect, 
each on its own engine alike, 
21 is rod connecting lever 20 with a bell 
crank lever 22, which is provided with lateral 
arms 23, which are connected by 1'ods 24 with 
the links, respectively. 
It is a fact well known to engineers that the 
link - motion, provided with its variously 
notched sector 25 to retain thereversing-lever 
at various degrees of advancement, from the 
turning point to its extreme reach, serves as a 
cut-off action upon the slide-valve. Now by 
taking advantage of this fact I provide the en 
gineer with means, first, for setting the slide 
valves with a quick cut-off, so as to permit 
the air to act expansively when there is strong 
pressure of air in the reservoir, and when the 
air-pressure becomes less he may give a longer 
cut-off, and when the pressure becomes low 
he may allow full slide to the valves, This 
tends to prevent wire-drawing,' as it is 
termed, by permitting the throttle-valve to 
have a fair opening, even though the airisun 
der pressure; second, it affords a very greatef 
fectual aid to the common brake, or it may be 
even substituted therefor. Under the mod 
erate speed permitted by law on streets it is 
safe and easy for the engineer to turn down 
the throttle-valve until the air is almost shut 
off from the engines and then reverse the en 
gines while in motion. A little experience 
with loads and grades would soon enable the 
engineer to bring the car to a quick halt with 
an effect as cushion-like as the best air-brakes 
produce. Without parting the frame these 
tubes may be shut up at any convenient point 
IO 
IS 
25 
30 
35 
45 
50 
9o 
95 
OO . 
2 
421,829 
prising a series of tubes joined and forming 
a compressed-air reservoir, the engine-cylin 
ders 11, communicating there with, the eccen 
trics 12 on one of the car-wheels axles, the 
rods 16, connecting the said eccentrics with 
the pistons of the said engines, the hand-le 
ver 14 upon the engineer's platform, the throt 
tle-valve 13 in the pipe leading to both en 
gines, the rod 15, connecting the said lever 
14 and valve 13, the hand-lever 20, and the 
reversing-gear described connected there with 
by the rod 21, all as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOIN. R. GATIRIGIT. 
25 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM JARVIS, 
ERNEST MACPHERSON. 
IO 
to make two or more reservoirs, so that one 
may be held in reserve under high pressure 
for ascending grades. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I believe to be new, and desire to secure 
by Lette's Patent, is the following: 
1. The combination, in a car-body, of the 
longitudinal sills 5, the cross-sills 9, connect 
ing them, the longitudinal beams 7, the cross 
beams S, connecting the latter, and the verti 
cal corner-posts 6, connecting the said beams 
and sills, all being tubes communicating to 
gether and forming a compressed-air reser 
voir, Substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination of the tubulal' car-frame 
pipes 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, arranged as described, 
and the frame-work pipes 10 in the casing of 
the car. 
3. The combination of a car-frame conn 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US421930.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 421,930. 
S. A. HARRYMAN. 
FOOT WAR MER, 
Patented Feb. 25, 1890. 
 
 
N 
(SS 
SNS SNSNS 
2 
Q 3 R2 S s 
So 
/ C 264/ 
5% 
IN WEA/TOR 
2-az/% 24, 1722.2%ale 
BY 
2 N. 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SARAH A. HARRYMAN, OF SEDALIA, MISSOURI. 
Foot-WARMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 421,930, dated February 25, 1890. 
Application filed November 29, 1889, Serial No, 33,910, (No specimens.) 
45 
55 
75 
the body of the device from direct contact 
with the bedclothes or other articles with 
which it would otherwise come in contact, 
thus preventing burning thereof. 
C are soapstone or other blocks, there be 
ing preferably two, adapted to fit within the 
case side by side, as shown in Fig.1, although 
One might be employed twice the size of those 
shown, so as to fill the case; but two are pre 
ferred, for the reason that they can be easier 
handled, and so that the degree of heat may 
be varied by placing either the two in the 
case at once or by alternating them--that is, 
taking one out when it becomes partly cold 
and replacing it by a hot one, thus keeping 
one hot one and one partly-cooled one in the 
case together. These blocks are designed to 
be heated in any suitable manner before be 
ing placed in the case, and to facilitate their 
being handled I provide each with a depres 
Sion C at One end, as shown, and across this 
depression place a bar or other suitable con 
trivanced, to receive the end of a hooked rod 
or other suitable device adapted for the pur. 
pose. 
Any suitable catch may be employed to 
hold the case in its closed position. 
What I claim as new is 
As an improved article of manufacture, the 
case formed of two sections hinged together 
and the outer face of each section provided 
with exterior protuberances, and the heating 
blocks adapted to be removably inserted in 
said case and provided with depressions, and 
bars extending across said depressions, sub 
Stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
SARAH A. HARRYMAN, 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES NEALE, 
JNO. D. RUSSELL. 
5 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, SARAH A. HARRYMAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Se 
dalia, in the county of Pettis and State of Mis 
souri, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Foot-Warmers; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, lef 
erence being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
usefnlimprovements in foot-warmers; and it 
has for its object to provide an improved de 
vice of this character which shall be simple, 
cheap, and efficient. 
The novelty resides in the peculiarities of 
construction and the combinations, arrange 
ment, and adaptation of parts, all as more 
fully hereinafter described, shown in the 
drawings, and then particularly pointed out 
in the appended claim. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
foot-warmer open and with the heating-blocks 
in place. Fig. 2 is a cross-section thereof on 
the line & 2 of Fig. 1, with the case closed. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of one of the 
blocks removed. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the several views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates the case, which 
is composed of two like partshinged together 
by means of suitable hinges C, and each sec 
tion or half provided with a suitable handle 
B, by which the device may be carried from 
place to place when desired. The outer faces 
of these halves or sections are formed with 
protuberances or teats b, which serve to keep 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422031.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MOONEY. 
CAR COUPLING, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 422,031. 
Patented Feb. 25, 1890, 
 
N 
77e Z72esses; 
-%. 724. 
72ZezZ27 
24-2- M2ZZ2772AZAS 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
J. MOONEY. 
CAR COUPLING 
No. 422,031, 
 
Patented Feb. 25, 1890. 
 
 
S. 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES MOONEY, OF CLARION, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CAR-COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 422,031, dated February 25, 1890. 
Application filed November 14, 1889, Serial No. 330,304 (No model.) 
To att, whon, it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, JAMES MOONEY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Clarion, 
in the county of Clarion and State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Car-Couplings; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
My invention relates to car-couplings, and 
has for its object certain improvements in 
construction, which will be hereinafter de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a plan of my improved coupling; Fig. 2, a 
longitudinal section; Fig. 3, a horizontal Sec 
tion; Fig. 4, a perspective of the tripping 
block, and Fig. 5 a front elevation. 
Reference being had to the drawings and 
the letters thereon, A indicates a frame of 
timber, secured under a car in the usual 
manner; B, a draw-bar suspended in said 
frame upon a yoke or stirrup C at the front 
end of the draw-bar and upon a transverse 
pin or rod D, which passes through the draw 
bar and side supports E. F. The side sup 
ports are provided with grooves C and later 
ally and in Wardly projecting lugs b, upon 
which the draw-bar rests, and the draw-bar 
and said side supports are embraced by the 
oke or stirrup C, To the free ends of the 
yoke is applied a bar G, Secured thereto by 
nuts c, and in said bar is pivotally secured a 
rod H at d to allow the draw-bar to Swing or 
vibrate laterally in rounding curves in a 
road-bed, and the upper end of said rod is 
screw-threaded, as at e, and provided with a 
hand-wheelf, having a screw-threaded aper 
ture in its hub for adjusting the draw-bar 
vertically to accommodate the coupling to 
cars of different heights. The hand-wheelf 
rests upon a support g, Secured to the cross 
timber on the end of a car. 
In the sides of the draw-bar, and near tile 
rear end thereof, are slots h, through which 
the pin D passes, which allows the lateral yi 
bration of the draw-bar refered to, and also 
provides for longitudinal movement or recip 
Pocation of the draw-bar in the frame A when 
the draw-bar is struck by another one in 
coupling, or when a train of cars is started, 
as Will hereinafter more fully appear. 
Within the draw-bar is a chamber i, the 
bottom of which is below the plane of the 
link-opening k in the head l of the draw-bar, 
and within this chamber are contained the 
end of the link I, a tripping-block K, blocks 
Or abutments m, n, and O, and springs p q. 
To the tripping-block Kis attached an arm r, 
which is secured thereto by a screw-threaded 
rod S, which Works in a slot t in the lower side 
of the draw-bar for moving the block into 
position under the coupling-pin L to be 
tripped by an approaching car, with whose 
coupling the link engages. The position of 
the tripping-block when under the coupling 
pin is shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2. 
At the inner end of the frame A is placed 
a buffer consisting of a loose plate it, sup 
ported upon bolts , and a piece or pieces of 
rubber 20, secured to the end cross-piece ac of 
the frame, 
The first impact or jar of approaching cars 
in coupling is taken up by the spring pi but 
should the cars come together with great 
force the draw-bar is driven back and cush 
ioned upon the buffer in the frame A. In start 
ing the train the first movement of the car is 
taken up by the spring q until all of the links 
are in contact with their coupling-pins at both 
ends, when the strain is transferred to the 
pins. 
The link I is provided with a slot a'at one 
end for engagement With one pin, an aper 
ture b' for engagement with another pin, and 
a weighted extension c'beyond said aperture 
for the purpose of overbalancing the slotted 
portion of the link and causing it to elevate 
said slotted portion to cause the link to enter 
the link-opening k in an approaching draw 
bar. The application of the link to the draw 
bar is shown in Fig. 2. The near end of the 
chamber i is closed by a plate d', of which the 
block O forms an integral part and is secured 
in the draw-bar by bolts e', passing through 
the draw-bar and the block, and the block m. 
is secured in the chamber i by bolts f'. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is- 
1. In a car-coupling, a draw-bar, a verti 
x 
75 
83 
96 
95 
Oct 
O 
25 
35 y 
45 
2 
422,031 
cally-adjustable yoke in which the draw-bar 
is supported at its front end, and a pin pass 
ing transversely through and supporting the 
draw-bar at its rear end, in combination with 
a link and a pin, substantially as described. 
2. In a car-coupling, a draw-bar, a verti 
cally-adjustable and laterally-vibrating yoke 
in which the draw-baris supported at its front 
end, slots in the sides of the draw-bar near its 
rear end, and a pin passing through said 
slots, in combination with a link and a pin, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a car-coupling, a draw-bar, vertically 
movable supports on the sides of the draw 
bar, a yoke embracing said supports and the 
draw-bar at the front end, a bar connecting 
the free ends of the yoke, means for adjust 
ing the draw-bar vertically, and a pin at the 
real end passing transversely through the 
draw-bar, in combination with a link and a 
pin, substantially as described. 
4. In a car-coupling, a draw-bar, vertically 
adjustable supports on thesides thereof, a yoke 
embracing said supports and the draw-bar at 
the front end, a bar attached to the upper 
end of the yoke, a rod pivotally connected 
to said bar, an adjusting-wheel at the opposite 
end of said rod, and a support for the wheel, 
in combination with a link and a pin, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a car-coupling, a draw-bar having a 
O 
25 
35 
45 
link-chamber in the head thereof, the bottom 
of which is below the plane of the link-open 
ing in the head, in combination with a trip 
ping-block having an extension projecting 
through the draw-bar, a link having a slot 
for one coupling-pin, an aperture for another 
pin, and a Weighted extension beyond said 
aperture, and Suitable pins for engaging said 
slot and aperture, substantially as described. 
6. In a car-coupling, a reciprocating draw 
bar, a support at the front end thereof, slots 
in the sides and near the rear end of the bar, 
a chamber within the bar, blocks or abut 
ments in said chamber, and springs between 
said blocks, in combination with a frame and 
a pin engaging with the frame and passing 
through the draw-bar and the middle block, 
Substantially as described. 
7. In a car-coupling, a draw-bar, a yoke in 
which the draw-bar is suspended, a transverse 
pin, and slots in the draw-bar, in combina 
tion with a frame fixed to the car and a buffer 
at the inner end of said frame, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES MOONEY. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. H. MARTIN, 
O. M. BALL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422131.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 422,131. 
 
A, C, JAMES, 
SHOE LACER, 
Patented Feb. 25, 1890, 
WITNESSES 
IWWENTOR: 
ATTORNEPs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABNER C. JAMES, OF POMONA, CALIFORNIA. 
w 
SHOE-LACER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 422,131, dated February 25, 1890. 
Application filed July 23, 1889, Serial No. 318,400, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ABNER C. JAMES, of 
Pomona, in the county of Los Angeles and 
State of California, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Shoe-Lacers, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
description. 
The main object of my invention is to pro 
vide an improved means for fastening the 
lacer after it has been been properlylaced and 
drawn up. 
The invention consists in the construction 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming a part of this specifica 
tion, in which similar letters of reference in 
dicate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a shoe 
with my improved lacer applied thereto. Fig. 
2 is an enlarged detached View of the lacer. 
Fig. 3 shows a modified method of applying 
the stiffening material to the end of the lacer. 
A represents a shoe, which is provided with 
eyelets d and hooks c, of the usual, form for 
the engagment of a lacer B. It will be seen 
in Fig. 2 that one end portion of the lacer 
has one or more fine wires C incorporated 
with its material, So as to measurably stiffen 
the lacer and render it capable of retaining 
any form it is bent into. As shown, the wire 
is wound in with the fibrous strands of the 
lacer, and appears in dotted lines in the fig 
lure named. The Wire used should be non 
corrosive and annealed sufficiently to enable 
it to withstand repeated bending and a re 
verse movement to secure the end in the man 
ner indicated in Fig. 1, or release it when the 
shoe is to be removed. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
. The method of applying the stiffening-wire 
may be varied-as, for instance, it may be 
inserted, Woven, or platted into the material 
of the lacer, as shown in Fig. 3, which will 
effect the same result as if the metal wire were 
Wrapped around with the lacer material, as 
shown in Fig. 2, and I therefore do not re 
strict myself to the precise method shown of 
carrying into effect my invention. The stop 
or button C. is placed upon the shoe-lacer at 
One end, as shown in Fig.2, and serves to check 
the string or lacer when the lacing of the shoe 
is begun. Its position is indicated on the shoe . 
in Fig. 1 in dotted lines. The lacer as a single 
Strandisinserted in the eyelet-holes and placed 
upon the hooks in the usual manner, and when 
it has been drawn sufficiently tight to hold a 
shoe firmly and comfortably upon the foot of 
a wearer the end of the lacer is bent over, as 
shown. Owing to the stability of the stiffen 
ing-wire, combined with the fibrous material 
of the lacer, the bent end will remain in that 
condition until a reverse movementireleases it. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
shoe-lacer provided at its ends with a stop and 
tip, respectively, and a flexible metallic strand 
C, incorporated in the lace between its tip 
and middle portion, the metal strand being 
of a length to be bent back and forth in the 
hooks or eyelets of a shoe, substantially as set 
forth. 
ABNER C. JAMES, 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. HILL, 
F. M. SAILOR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422231.txt	(No Model.) 
C. LARDNER, 
ELEWATED CARRIER, 
No. 422,231, 
Patented Feb. 25, 1890, 
 
AWVAW-707 
47%zes Zazzare 
(1220,767s 
N. PETERS: Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES LARDNER, OF TOPEKA, KANSAS. 
EEVATE D CARRE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 422,231, dated February 25, 1890. 
Application filed January 16, 1889, Serial No, 296,472, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
shoreward, which would occur as Soon as the 
Be it known that I, CHARLES LARDNER, a 
power for loading was applied. The other 
citizen of the United States, residing at To 
straight bar or dogg has meantime passed 
peka, in the county of Shawnee and State of 
along on the block A and under the dog C, 
Kansas, have invented certain new and use 
lifting it free from the stop-button b'. The 
ful Improvements in Elevated Carriers; and 
scoops EE, being released, descend by their 
I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
own weight until they reach the deposit. The 
and exact description of the invention, such 
cable B has one end fixed to a corner of the 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
carrier A, and, passing over the pulleys b'b' 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
b', extends between the double upright bear 
reference being had to the accompanying 
ing a ', and thence on to shore. 
drawings, and to the letters of reference 
The results of a continued tension on cable 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
B are as follows: The button or ball b, fixed ( 
Specification. 
solid on the cable B, passes freely over the 
This invention relates to elevated carriers, 
pulleys until it reaches the button C, which 
and has for its object to simplify and cheapen 
has a hole through it large enough for the 
this class of devices and increase their effi 
cable to pass freely back and forth, but will 
ciency. 
not allow the passage of the button to hence 
The improvement consists in the novel and 
when the button breaches the button at it 
peculiar construction and combination of the 
carries button Cl with it in the direction of 
parts, which will be hereinafter more fully 
shore; but this button a has attached to it 
described and claimed, and which are shown 
the chain ct, which also is attached to the up 
in the annexed drawing, in which is a side 
right bar of the dog Ci', and the movement of 
View of a carrier embodying my invention 
the button a opens the locked position of the 
and showing its application. 
two dogs at and g', freeing the carrier from 
The cable H, extending from on shore, where 
the stop-block G, and as the tension or pull 
it is suitably supported to and far enough be 
on the cable B is toward shore, of course the 
yond the deposit to secure anchorage, is sup 
carrier A, with the Scoops, at once start shore 
ported at either or both ends on inverted-V 
ward. The weight of the load would tend to 
trees or trestlesh h', and has sufficient incline 
move the carrier. A faster than the taking in 
from them to propel the carrier from shore, 
of the cable, and hence drop the Scoops; but 
where the dump-pile is, to the bar, where 
this has been provided against by means of 
Sand is to be removed from, it being pulled 
the dog as and the button b. This buttonb', 
back up the incline loaded by means of the 
having before served the purpose of unload 
cable or fall-rope B. 
ing the scoops from the stop-block So the car 
In the drawing the carrier is shown as it 
rier could be pulled ashore, now, by reason 
appears when loaded and carried along the 
of the weight of the loaded dredge, starts to 
cable H, the load being dumped, and the car 
reverse its direction round the pulleys, which 
rier is loosened from its shore-moorings and 
would carry the block. A forward, but allow 
descends by its own weight along the inclined 
the dredge to descend. The dog a' is on 
cable, being supported by the pulleys act', 
guard, however, and the efforts of the button 
fixed in the upright bearings a? a , the fall 
b' to pass over the pulley b is promptly 
rope B and jerk-line F being paid out freely 
stopped, and the carrier with its load remains 
until the carrier A arrives above the deposit 
suspended at the position indicated in the 
where the carrier is to be loaded, or at the 
drawing. The shelves or pulleys a, passing 
point where the end or stop block G is fixed 
freely along the cable H, as the cable B is 
to the cable. As the block. A comes to this 
drawn toward shore, the carrier A, with its 
point the projecting dogg' passes under the 
loaded scoops, is carried along to the dump 
dog Ci', their two notches overlapping, and, be 
ing place, where the operator unloads, as be 
ing held in that position by the spring a, act 
fore described. 
as a firm lock to hold the device securely at 
The carrier can be locked at any point along 
that point against the tendency to be drawn the line of the cable by fixing the end block 
. 
s 
95 
OC 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
s, 
2 
422,231 
- 
- 
-1 
5 ent, is 
G. at the point where it is desired to use the 
dredge. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
1. The hereinbefore-described carrying ap 
paratus, comprising the following elements 
in combination: the cable, the stop-block G, 
having the dogg' and the releasing-arm g, 
Io the carrier A, mounted on the cable, the catch 
a', the chain a, having the stop a', the pawl 
a, the scoops, and the elevating and hauling 
rope B, having a stop b, which is adapted to 
engage with stop a to release catch a?, and 
I5 be engaged by pawl Clito Support the scoops, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the cable, the car 
rier mounted on the cable, and the stop-block 
having the dogg' and the releasing-arm g, of 
the catch a', the chain a, having the stop a, 20 
the pawla, and the rope B, having the stop b, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination, with the cable and the 
carrier mounted on the cable, of the stop 
block having the dog g', the catch a', the 25 
chain a, having the stop C, and the rope B, 
having the stop b, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES LARDNER. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. MILLER, 
JOHN H. DAVIES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422331.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 422,331, 
C. K. BRADFORD, 
FISHING LINE ATTACHMENT, 
Patented Feb. 25, 1890, 
 
a 72 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES K. BRADFORD, OF LYNNFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
FISHING-LINE ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 422,831, dated February 25, 1890. 
Application filed May 20, 1889, Serial No. 311,356, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLESIK. BRADFORD, 
of Lynnfield, in the county of Essex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Fishing-Line 
Attachments, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
an attachment for fishing-lines whereby a 
pull on the bait will cause a quick automatic 
upWard movement of the hook to facilitate 
the capture of the fish. 
The invention consists in the combination 
of a plate or strip of metal adapted to be at 
tached at one end to a section of fishing-line, 
and provided at its other end with an eye or 
guide, a bell-crank lever pivoted to said strip 
and having a longer and a shorter arm, a 
Spring connecting the shorter arm of said le 
ver to the said plate or strip, and a latch piv 
oted at one end to the longer arm of saidle 
Ver and adapted to be engaged with said 
plate or strip, the swinging end of said latch 
being formed for engagement with a section 
of fishing-line to which a hook is attached, 
the arrangement being such that when the 
device is set the hook-section of the line passes 
through the eye or guide of the plate or strip, 
and is thereby held in position to displace 
the latch when the bait or hook is pulled by 
a fish. The displacement of the latch re 
leases the lever, the longer arm of which is 
thereupon thrown upwardly by the spring 
and caused to give the hook a quick upward 
movement, as I will now proceed to describe. 
The accompanying drawing, forming a part 
of this specification, represents a side view 
of my improved device attached to the sec 
tions of fishing-line above referred to. 
In the drawing, a represents a plate or 
strip, which has at one end an orifice to re 
ceive one end of a section c of fishing-line and 
at the other end an ear or guided, containing 
an orifice through which another section g of 
fishing-line passes, the last-named section 
having a hook h, attached to its lower end. 
i represents a bell-cranklever pivoted at ' 
to the plate, and having a shorter arm 2 and 
a longer arm 3. The shorter arm 2 is con 
nected by a spring with the plate a, 
k represents a latch pivoted at ki' to the 
swinging end of the longer arm of the lever , 
and having notches 4 in one edge adapted to 
engage a stud 5 on the plate C. When a 
notch of the latch is engaged with said stud, 
the lever i is held in the position shown in 
full lines, and when the latch is disengaged 
from the stud the spring throws the lever to 
the position shown by dotted lines, thereby 
raising the longer arm of said lever. 
The hook-section g of the line is attached 
to the swinging end of the latch k and passes 
through the guide or ear d of the plate C. 
Said ear holds the line-section gin such po 
sition that when a fish pulls on the hook the 
swinging end of the latch is disengaged from 
the stud 5 and the lever i is thrown upwardly 
by the springi, thus quickly raising the hook 
and making its engagement with the fish's 
mouth very likely. It will be seen, therefore, 
that the fisherman is not obliged to exercise 
the usual careful scrutiny of his line and is 
not obliged to pull until the fish has been 
hooked. 
I claim 
The improved fishing-line attachment hav 
ing the strip or plate a for attachment to a 
line-section and provided at its lower end 
with a guide d for another line-section, and 
having a lateral pin or projection near said 
lower end, in combination with the lever , 
pivoted to said plate and having a longer and 
a shorter arm, a spring connecting the shorter 
arm with the plate C, and a latch or arm piv 
oted at one end to the longer arm of said le 
ver and adapted to engage with the projec 
tion on the plated, and provided at its outer 
end with means for attachment to a line-sec 
tion, the combination being and operating 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 8th day of 
May, A. D. 1889. 
CHARLES K. BRADFORD, 
Witnesses: 
C. F. BROWN, 
ARTHUR. W. CROSSLEY. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422431.txt	(No Model.) 
J. McCRUDDEN, 
WEHICLE SEAT, 
No. 422,431. 
Patented Mar, 4, 1890, 
 
WITWESSES 
42.6%-24, 
c/ 
IWWEWTOR 
4. 
we-6-4 
All-A79%r 
24/ 
21iorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES MCCRUDDEN, OF FLINT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THE FLINT ROAD 
CART COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
VEHICLE - SEAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 422,481, dated March 4, 1890. 
Application filed November 25, 1889, Serial No, 331,570, (No model.) 
To all whom it naily concern; 
Be it known that I, JAMES MCCRUDDEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Flint, 
in the county of Genesee and State of Michi 
gain, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Vehicle-Seats; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to spring-backs for 
Vehicle-seats; and it consists in forming a 
coiled Spring in the vertical brace-irons that 
support the back of the seat. Said spring en 
virons and supports the rear horizontal por 
tion of the seat-rail, and affords a simple, 
cheap, and substantial spring for the back of 
the vehicle-seat, as will be hereinafter more 
fully set forth, and the essential features of 
the device pointed out particularly in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of the specification, Figure 1 is an iso 
metrical view of a vehicle-seat having myim 
proved spring-back attached thereto. Fig. 2 
is a cross-section on dotted line acac of Fig.1. 
Fig. 3 is a view of same, showing a modifica 
tion of the coiled spring. Figs, 4 and 5 are 
details showing the spring brace-irons, 
As indicated in the drawings, A represents 
the seat-bottom; B, the back-rest or lazy-back 
of the seat; C, the seat-rail, and D the spring 
brace-irons. 
The central portion of the brace-irons D is 
formed into a coiled spring a. A foot t is 
formed on the lower end of said brace-irons, 
having a hole e therein, as shown in Figs. 4 
and 5, by means of which said irons are bolted 
to the seat-bottom A, as shown at fin Figs, 1, 
2, and 3. The upper ends of the brace-irons 
D are provided with holes, and by bolts or 
rivets are secured to the lazy-back B of the 
seat, as shown at c in Fig. 1. The rear hori 
Zontal portion of the seat-rail Cpasses through 
the coiled Spring a of the brace-irons D D, 
and the ends of said rails are bent downward 
and secured at t to the seat-bottom A. (See 
Fig. 1.) By this arrangement of parts the 
rear portion of the seat-rail C is supported in 
the coiled springs at of the brace-irons D D, 
and the brace-irons are in turn held in their 
vertical position by said seat-rail, which forms 55 
a lateral brace for said irons, and the upper 
ends of the brace-irons, to which the lazy-back 
B is attached, are allowed to spring back, as 
shown by dotted lines in Figs, 2 and 3, thus 
affording a yielding back to the vehicle-seat. 6o 
When irons of lightweight are used for the 
braces D D, the springs are formed in a small 
coil, so as to fittightly around the metal seat 
rail C, (see Figs. 2 and 4) causing said springs, 
when pressure is placed against the lazy-back 65 
B, as in leaning against said back by the oc 
cupant of the seat, to contract upon the seat 
rail, thus preventing the back of the seat from 
springing back too far, as will be readily un 
derstood; but for heavy work, where larger 7o 
irons are used, the coil of the series next to 
the upwardly-extending portion of the braces 
D is formed on a larger circle, as shown at 
a' in Figs. 3 and 5, affording the resistance 
of the spring only against pressure on the seat- 75 
back, which is necessary, in the use of larger 
irons, to give sufficient spring to the back of 
the seat. 
This improved spring-back may be applied 
to vehicles of all classes, and is especially 8o 
adapted for road-carts, the yielding nature of 
the back overcoming to a great extent the ef 
fect of the horse motion. In both the forms 
of coils herein shown a portion of the series 
of coils encircling the seat-rail C is fitted 85 
Snugly around said rail to prevent any rat 
tling of parts. It will also be observed that 
the foregoing forms a durable, cheap, and 
yielding seat-back. 
my invention, what I claim as new, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the Seat-rail C, a set 
of lazy-back-supporting braces coiled near 
their central portion one or more times around 95 
said seat-rail, the lower ends of said braces 
adapted to be attached to the seat-bottom, 
their upper ends adapted to support a lazy 
back, substantially as specified. 
vehicle, the horizontal seat-rail C, a set of 
spring-metal braces having their lower ends 
Having set forth the essential features of 9o 
- 
2. In combination with the seat-bottom of a Ioo 
o 
(5 
35 
45 
 
 
- via , , , 
2 
422,431 
attached to the seat-bottom, their central por- portions of the braces adapted to support a 
tion formed into a coiled spring which encir- lazy-back, their lower ends adapted to be at 
cles the seat-rail, and having upwardly-ex- tached to the seat-bottom, substantially as 
tended portions coupled to and supporting a specified. 
Intestimony whereofI affix my signature in 
5 lazy-back, for the purposes set forth. 
3. In combination with the metal seat-rail presence of two witnesses. 
C, the set of spring-metal brace-irons coiled 
two or more times near their longitudinal cen- 
ter around the seat-rail, and having the coil 
Io next to the upwardly-extending portions of 
greater diameter, the upwardly - extending 
JAMES MCCRUDDEN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN J. CARTON, 
J. DALLAS DORT. 
I5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422531.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 422,531, 
W. E. KILBORN 
WHEELED EARTH SCRAPER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented 
Mar. 4, 1890, 
I 
VI 
341 Ue-14to, 
is 
s 3. 
N 
s 
R 
N 
s 
s 
& late 
s 
\ 
67 
i 
28i-Evicesco 
4%. 
N. PETERS. photo-ithographer, washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 422,531, 
 
W. E. KILBORN 
WHEELED EARTH SCRAPER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar, 4, 1890. 
Q-33.23. 
44%. 84-4- elitoviet 
2/7 a. 
- 
7C3%z 72 
e. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILBER. E. KILBORN, OF SIDNEY, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF To 
WILLIAM. H. C. GOODE, OF SAME PLACE. 
WHEELED EARTH SCRAPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No, 422,531, dated March 4, 1890. 
Application filed November 29, 1889, Serial No. 331,938, (No model.) 
Io 
55 
- 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WELBER. E. KILBORN, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Sidney, in the county of Shelby and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Wheeled Earth 
Scrapers, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of wheeled earth-scrapers in which 
the scraper box or bowl is lowered and raised 
by rocking the axle, and thereby changing the 
plane of the axle upon which the wheels are 
mounted, such a scraper being shown par 
ticularly in Patents Nos. 318,721 and 367,388 
granted to W. H. C. Goode. 
The novel features of my invention are, 
first, pivoting the lever-bars to the standards 
in rear of a vertical line drawn from the 
points of attachment of the standards to the 
scraper box or bowl, thereby bringing these 
pivotal points nearer to the axle than here 
tofore, and thus securing increased lever 
ower in turning the axle to raise the box. 
or bowl when filled with earth; second, the 
provision of means for preventing the back 
ward tilting of the scraperbox or bowl, and 
also for steadying it while conveying its 
load to the dump, and, third, curving the for 
ward ends of the lever-bars, so that While 
the hook-links may be pivoted to them at Suf 
ficient distance from the pivots of said bars 
to prevent contact with the standards the 
ends of the bars will not strike on the upper 
edges of the scraper box or bowl when the 
lever is thrown upward to lower said box or 
bowl, Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
view of a wheeled scraper embodying myim 
provements, with the box or bowl elevated as 
when filled, one of the wheels being removed 
for clear illustration. Fig. 2 is a side eleva 
tion of the same with the box or bowl down 
in position to fill. Fig. 3 is also a side eleva 
tion of the same with the box or bowl in posi 
tion to dump. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the scraper box or bowl provided with 
side handles a. 
B is the axle, having right-angularly-bent 
ends to form spindlesb for the wheels C. 
D is the lever, to whose forward end are 
rigidly secured the lever-bars D', which are 
also rigidly secured to the sides of the axle, 
as shown. 
E are the standards, to which the scraper 
box or bowl is hung, each consisting, prefer 
ably, of two pieces of bar-iron, one piece be 
ing placed on the inside and the other piece 
on the outside of the box or bowl, and firmly 
bolted thereto at their lower ends, as shown, 
their upper ends extending far enough above 
the box or bowl to receive the lever-bars be 
tween them, which are pivoted to the stand 
ards at e. It is essential that these stand 
ards be secured to the box or bowl forward of . 
its middle portion, (and far enough forward 
to avoid interfering with the free turning of 
the cranked portions of the axle,) so that the 
heavier portion will be in rear of the stand 
ards; otherwise the loaded box or bowl would 
tip forward and dump, especially when only 
partly full and the greater part of the load 
in the forward portion; and heretofore the 
points of the pivotal attachment of the lever 
bars to the standards have been located in a 
direct vertical line with the points of at 
tachment of the standards to the scraper 
box or bowl, and consequently at a consid 
erable distance from the points of attach 
ment of those bars to the axle. Now the 
nearer the points of pivotal attachment of the 
lever-bars to the standards are brought to the 
axle the easier the latter can be turned and 
a given load be raised by the lever. There 
fore, instead of pivoting the lever-bars to the 
standards directly above the points of at 
tachment of the standards to the box or bowl, 
as heretofore, I pivot them to the standards 
in rear of a vertical line drawn from said 
points, which I accomplish by either curving 
the standards E, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3, 
or by securing the standards to the box or 
bowlina rearwardly-inclined position, as seen 
in Fig. 2, 
25 ) 
35 
45 
75 
95 
is x. sp. 
-- . . . 
. ;-y-gwrisri grrr".zr". Twer, 
 
r ... re'. -er, . . 
. 
422,531 
d 
15 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
- 
IF are the draft-bars, whose forward ends 
are rigidly secured to the tongue G, while 
their rear ends are each pivoted on a bolt f, 
passed through the side of the scraper box or 
bowl and through the standard E, and F are 
holdback-straps, each bolted at one end to the 
box or bowl, its other end being passed over 
a bolt f, outside of the draft-bar, and secured 
thereon by a nut, these straps serving to coun 
teract the leverage on the bolts. 
II are the tongue-braces bolted to the tongue 
and riveted to the inner sides of the draft 
bars, as shown. 
In order to prevent the loaded scraper box 
or bowl from tilting backward while being 
raised from the position shown in Fig. 2 to 
that shown in Fig. 1, I cut out a rectangular 
piece from the top of each of its sides at the 
front end, as seen in Figs. 1 and 2, to form 
shoulders I, and provide the tongue-braces H 
with inwardly-projecting lugs J, for engage 
ment with said shoulders, as clearly shown; 
or instead of cutting out these pieces to form 
the shoulders I may form them by attaching 
projecting pieces to the upper front portion of 
the sides of the scraper box or bowl, as seen 
in Fig. 3. 
It will be evident that as the 
tongue-braces are rigidly secured to the draft 
bars the lugs may be formed on or secured 
to the latter without departing from my in 
vention, as it is only essential that they be 
carried by the draft-bars. By placing these 
shoulders and lugs the greatest practicable 
distance from the pivots of the draft-bars any 
little variation in the construction of the 
shoulders or of the draft-bars will not mate 
rially affect the hanging of the scraper box 
or bowl, whereas if the shoulders were placed 
near those pivots any slight variation of the 
above - mentioned parts Would prevent the 
scraper from working satisfactorily, it being 
understood that in making scrapers in du 
plicate parts there is always a slight differ 
ence in the irons or in the distance of the 
holes, &c., and when nice adjustment is re 
quired, as is the case when the shoulders are 
near the pivotal points of the draft-bars, there 
is sure to be trouble from this source when 
the parts to be put together are selected at 
random. Furthermore, these shoulders af 
ford no lodgment for dirt to obstruct the 
free working of the parts, as is the case when 
supports for the draft-bar's are secured to the 
sides of the box or bowl near said pivotal 
oints. 
The scraper box or bowl is prevented from 
dumping while loading by the following 
mechanism: To each side of the box or bowl, 
at the forward end, is secured a hook-catch 
IK, with which hooks L, pivoted at l in loops 
M on the draft-bars, are made to engage when 
the box or bowl is lowered. These hooks are 
operated by means of hook-links N, pivoted 
at their lower ends to the hooks and at their 
upper ends to the lever-bars. Heretofore this 
latter connection has been made in the same 
plane as the points of attachment of the lever 
bars to the axle and to the standards, from 
which it resulted that in order to prevent 
the hook-links from coming into contact with 
the standards the lever-bars had to extend 
so far beyond the latter that they would strike 
against the top of the box or bowl as the le 
ver was thrown upward. I avoid this objec 
tion by changing the plane of this connec 
tion, and I change that plane by giving the 
forward ends of the lever-bars an upward 
curve, as shown. IBy this means, while I still 
preserve the proper throw of the links, ISO 
shorten the radius of the ends of the lever 
bars that they may pass freely over the box 
or bowl. 
O is a standard rising vertically from one 
of the draft-bars and provided near its upper 
end with a spring-hook O' for engagement 
with one of the handles a when the scraper 
box or bowl is dumped, as seen in Fig. 3, 
P is the lever-hook pivoted between the 
rear ends of the lever-bars and designed to 
engage with a cleat Q, secured to the back of 
the box or bowl. 
The drawings reveal the operation of the 
machine, and therefore description is unnec 
essary. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the scraper box 
or bowl and the cranked axle, of the stand 
ards secured to the sides of the box or bowl, 
and the lever-bars secured directly to the axle 
and pivoted to the standards in rear of a ver 
tical line drawn from the point of attach 
ment of Said standards to the box or bowl, 
substantially as described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. The combination, with the scraper box 
or bowl and the cranked axle, of the rear 
wardly-curved standards secured to the sides 
of the box or bowl, and the lever-bars secured 
to the axle and pivoted in the upper curved 
ends of said standards, substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the scraper box 
or bowl having shoulders at its forward end, 
and the tongue, of the draft-bars secured to 
and extending in rear of the tongue and 
pivoted to the sides of the box or bowl on an 
approximate level with the tongue, the said 
draft-bal's carrying lugs arranged to rest on 
said shoulders when the box or bowl is in its 
elevated position, for the purposes set forth. 
4. The combination, with the scraper box 
or bowl having shoulders cut in its sides at 
the forward end, of the draft-bars and the 
tongue-braces, the latter being secured to said 
bars and having inwardly-projecting lugs for 
engagement with said shoulders when the box 
or bowl is in its elevated position, substan 
tially as described. 
5. The combination, with the scraper box 
ol' bowl, the standards secured thereto, the 
55 p 
75 
go 
95 
od 
IO 
I I5 
422,531 
3 
cranked axle, and the pivoted hook, of the 
lever-bars secured to the axle pivoted in the in presence oftWo Witnesses. 
standards and having an upward curve at 
their forward ends, and the hook-links piv- 
oted at their lower ends to the hooks and at 
their upper ends to the forward ends of the 
lever-bars, for the purposes set forth. 
GEO. B. ToLAND, 
N. Y.OAKAM. . 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
WILBER. E. KILIBORN. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422631.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F. RICHARDSON. 
CHURN, 
No. 422,631, 
Patented Mar. 4, 1890, 
 
Wilpesses 
pileptor 
N: Peters, Photo-lanographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH F. RICHARDSON, OF BIRKS CITY, KENTUCKY. 
CHURN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 422,631, dated March 4, 1890. 
Application filed July 5, 1889, Serial No. 316,494, (No model.) 
45 
55. 
In practice the cream is placed in the churn 
body and the operator sits on the rocking 
stool and vibrates the same, as will be readily 
understood. The vibratory motion thus given 
to the rockers is transmitted directly to the 
driving-shaft and there converted into a ro 
tary motion, so that the driving-wheel will be 
easily and rapidly rotated. The rocking 
stool is effectually held to its place on its 
base, and is prevented from slipping there 
from by the guide-rails B and the stops or 
The guide-rails prevent any lat 
shoulders C. 
eral movement of the stool, while the shoul 
ders C not only serve to prevent the stool slip 
ping endwise from the base, but also serve to 
limit the vibratory movement of the stool, so 
as to lessen the labor necessary to operate the 
churn. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The combination of the base, the standards 
erected thereon, the guide-rails B, secured on 
the base and having the stops or shoulders C 
at their ends, the driving-shaft journaled in 
the standards and provided with a crank-arm 
at its rear end, the rocking stool resting on 
the base between the guide-rails, and the con 
necting-rod having its upper end pivoted on 
the crank-arm of the driving-shaft and its 
lower end pivoted to the end of the inner 
rocker, as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH. F. RICHARDSON. 
75 
Witnesses: 
H. A. WILLIAMS, 
GUS. T. BRANNON. 
To all, twf. On it invay conce77: 
Beit known that I, JOSEPHF. RICHARDSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Birks 
City, in the county of Daviess and State of 
Kentucky, have invented a new and useful 
Churn, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
churns; and it consists in certain novel fea 
tures hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of a churn provided with my im 
provements. Fig. 2 is a rear elevation. Fig. 
3 is a detail plan view. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A des 
ignates the base, on the upper side of which, 
at and near the rear edge of the same, I se 
cure the guide-rails B, having the inwardly 
projecting shoulders or stops C at their ends, 
as shown most clearly in Fig. 3. Adjacent to 
the inner rail B, I erect the standards D, in 
and between which I journal the crank-shaft 
E, which is connected to the dasher-rod by a 
pitman F and the driving - shaft G, upon 
which I secure the fly-wheel Hand the band 
wheel I, as shown, the said band-wheel being 
connected with the crank-shaft by the belt J. 
The churn-body is placed on the base in 
front of the standards, and the dasher-rod 
plays therein in the usual manner. On the 
base between the guide-rails B, I rest the rock 
ing stool K, consisting of the seat L and the 
rockers M, secured to the under side of the 
seat, resting on the base and bearing against 
the inner sides of the guide-rails. The inner 
rocker is connected directly with the driv 
ing-shaft G by the connecting-rod N, having 
its lower end pivoted to the rocker at the 
front end of the same, and its upper end piv 
the rear end of 
oted on the crank-arm O at 
the driving-shaft. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422731.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 422,731. 
 
H. COMSTOCK. 
FIRE ARM. 
Patented Mar. 4, 
1890, 
 
2 
422,781 
7o 
75 
so closely as to prevent rattling, while allow 
ing free movement of the striker upon its 
sleeve. The flange or collar 12 of the latter 
is received within a countersunk recess in 
the end of the striker, and the flat face of 
each sliding block rests against the face of 
the central longitudinal plate 4, thereby pre 
serving the same in proper position. At the 
forward end of each striker a portion of the 
metaliscutaway,forminga recess 15, whereby 
the end of the striker is enabled to passover 
the Cross-head 6. Within the forward end of 
the striker and surrounding the sleeve 12 is 
a countersinkWhich receives the end of alight 
coiled springsurrounding the sleeve and bear 
ing against the cross-head 6. These springs 
are of Small tension as compared with those 
impelling the strikers or hammers and serve 
to cause the rebound of the latter after the 
firing-pin has been driven. Upon the lower 
surface of each strikerisformed atransverse 
notch or shoulder 18, with Which the sear 19 
cengages when the gun is cocked. The sear 
consists of a block having a forked end, one 
branch of the fork being shorter than the 
other and engaging the shoulder or notch on 
the striker, while the otheir arm or branch 20 
of the fork extends rearward and engages 
the notched point 21 of the lever 22, mounted 
upon the trigger-plate 23. A U-shaped spring 
24, mounted upon the base-plate in rear of 
and straddling the central plate, rests upom 
the rearward ends of the levers 22 and lifts 
the Sears to their engagement when the gun 
is cocked. 
The foregoing is a description of the parts 
Which are common to the present application 
and to the prior application filed by me upom 
the 12th day of June, 1889, already alludedito. 
Immediately above the cross-head to which 
the spindles are connected are formed open 
ings or recesses in the frame, in which slide 
bars 25, parallel with the spindles on whichthe 
hammers nove. The rear ends of these bars 
abut against the hammers, and their forward 
ends are connected to the arms of bell-crank 
levers 26. The other arms of these bell 
cranks are provided with slots 27, and the 
bell-cranks are pivoted at their angles on ful 
crum-pins 28. 
Upon the frame of the gun on each side 
thereo? is fulcrumed a cocking - lever 29. 
These levers consist of strong bars of steel, 
each provided at its forward end with an in 
wardly-projecting shaft 30, which may be in 
tegral with the levers. Immediately in rear 
of the lug of the barrels is arranged a hook 
31, pivotally mounted on a pin 32, which has 
bearing in a web 33, which lies between the 
lug of the barrels and a pillow-block 34, the 
latter being a little in rear of said lug of the 
barrels, an angular recess being left between 
them for the pivotal vibration of the hook. 
Pivotally connected to the side portions 35 of 
the hook which project below the pin 32 is a 
spindle 36, lying in a recess 37, formedinthe 
base of the web 33 on the barrels, A spring 
38, coiled on this spindle and bearing at One 
end against a collar or cross-pin 39 on the 
spindle, throws the latter toward the muzzle 
of the piece, rocking the hook on its pivot 32 
and throwingitsbackagainst the pillow-block 
34, immediately in rear of the hook. Upon 
the fore - end 40 of the arm is a shoulder 
or lug 41, which, When the parts are assem 
bled, abuts against the end of the spindle 36, 
which projects from the front of the Web 
33 of the barrels. By simply adjusting the 
fore-end in proper position this spindle is re 
tracted, compressing the spring 38 and rock 
ing the hook upon the pivot-pin 32, throwing 
it toward and against the rearward end of 
the lug of the barrels. As the hook is half 
round in form with its opening facing the 
lug, this movement brings the open portion 
close to or against the lug and praetically 
closes the hook. As the baror shaft 30,inte 
gral with the forwardend of each of the cock 
ing-levers, lies normally in position to be in 
closed by the hook as it springs forward, itis 
seized thereby as the fore-end is mounted in 
place and a positive engagement is effected 
between it and said look, the bar or shaft be 
ing locked against escaping from the hook 
by the rear end of the lug 33, against Which 
the open hook is thrown by the retraction of 
the Spindle. 
It will readily be seen that the engagement 
described can be made as readily when the 
hammers are down or snapped as when they 
are cocked. In the former position itis only 
necessary to throw the breech down into the 
frame,whereupon the hook passes behind the 
shafts orbars on the cocking-levers, and by 
simply setting the fore-end in place the hook 
engages the shaftsinstantly. When the ham 
mers are cocked, the same result is effected 
by merely throwing the breech up a?ter the 
barrels have been hooked upon the pivot-pim 
on the frame. Iam thusable to take the bar 
rels of without cocking the hammers and to 
replace the barrels, also, with the hammers 
in either position, which has not heretofore 
been possible in "breakdown" guns. 
The release of the cocking-levers by the 
hook is wholly automatic, the spring-pressed 
spindle 36 throwing the hookback and wholly 
disengaging from the shafts or bars 30 on 
the cocking-levers the instant the fore-end is 
removed and the spindle released. In like 
manner, also, the hook automatically locks 
upon said shafts as the fore-end is svung 
into place, the latter effecting a retraction of 
the spindle by whichthe hookis caught upon 
the bars or shafts and thrown against the lug 
of the barrels, as already explained. 
The rearward ends of the cocking-levers 29 
are provided with pins 42, which enter the 
slots 27 in the bell-cranks. It will be seen, 
therefore, that the opening of the breech Will 
swing these cocking-levers 29, drawing the 
rearward ends downward, rocking the bell 
crank levers and driving the slide-bars 25 
against the hammers, retracting the latter 
I 
95 
IOO 
Ios 
TI IC 
If 5 
120 
I25 
I30 
IO 
25 
30. 
35 
45 
55 
OC 
 
422,731 
.3 
upon their spindles until the sears engage 
and hold them at full-cock. 
 
- 
- 
v 
. 
What I claim is- 
1. In a fire-arm, the combination, with bar 
rels pivoted on the frame, of cocking-levers 
fulcrumed thereom and having their forward 
ends provided with rigid shafts or bars, a 
hook pivoted on the barrels behind the lug 
and between it and a rearward pillow-block, 
and a spring-pressed spindle pivoted to the 
hook and having its forward end projecting 
beyond the lug to engage the fore-end, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a fire-arm, the combination, with the 
frame, of barrels pivoted thereon, an open 
hook pivoted behind the lug on the barrels, a 
spring-presed spindle lyingina recessin the 
base of the lug and having its forward end 
projecting in front of it, while its rearward 
end is pivoted to the hook below its bearing, 
cocking-levers pivoted on the frame and hav 
ing their forward ends provided with integral 
shaftsor bars, and afore-endabuttingagainst 
the projecting end of the spindle and closing 
the hook upon said bar, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In a fire-arm, the combination, with the 
frame having parallel spindles, of hammers 
mounted thereom and having rearward 
springs, cocking - levers fulcrumed on the 
frame, the forward ends of the levers bing 
provided with integral shafts or bars, a hook 
pivoted on the barrels behind the lug, a spin 
dle pivotally connected to that portion of the 
hook projecting below its pivot, a spring 
! O 
25 
35 
coiled on the spindle and pressing againsta 
collar or pin thereon and thereby projecting 
the spindle forward and throwing the hook 
rearward against a pillow-block, a fore-end 
abutting againstthe end of the spindle Which 
projects in front of the lug and closing the 
hook upon the latter, and bell-crank levers 
pivoted on the frame and having slide-bars 
connected to one arm, while the other arm is 
connected to one of the cocking-levers, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a fire-arm, the combination, with the 
hammers, of side cocking-levers fulcrumed 
on the frame and having their forward ends 
provided with inwardly-projecting shafts or 
bars, a hook pivoted upon a weblying behind 
the lug of the barrels and between said lug 
and a pillow-block, a spindle pivotally con 
nected to the sides of the hook which drop 
below its pivotal bearing, a spring coiled on 
thespindle and pressingit forward in a recess 
in the base, of the lugof the barrelsto project 
itsendin frontof said lug, a fore-end holding 
the spindle retracted, slide-bars moving in 
recesses in the frame to abut against the 
hammers, and bell-crank levers pivoted on 
the frame and connected to said slide-bars 
by one arm and to the cocking-levers by the 
other arm, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have afixed my 
signature in presence of two Witnesses, 
HARRY COMISTOCIK. 
v 
Witnesses: 
JAMES L. NORRIS, 
JAMES A. RUTHERFORD. 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422831.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 422,831. 
W. A. PIER, CE, 
GATE, 
Patented Mar, 4, 1890, 
 
 
assists 
RS WTOS at SS 
 
Ef E 
 
NS M.W f'. f \\ 
Q3 C.C. /, f 
; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. PIERCE, OF NAPA, CALIFORNIA. 
GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 422,831, dated March 4, 1890. 
Application filed October 2, 1889, Serial No. 325,759, (No model.) 
s 
w 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM A. PIERCE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Napa 
city, Napa county, State of California, have 
invented an Improvement in Gates; and I 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to that class of gates 
Which are operated by means of suitable con 
necting cords or ropes, whereby the gate is 
moved from side to side to open and close the 
roadway; and my invention consists in the 
construction and combination of devices 
which I shall hereinafter fully describe and 
claim. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and effective gate, adapted to be 
readily and easily operated, moving with but 
little exercise of power and with the mini 
Inlim Of friction. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
for a more complete explanation of my inven 
tion, Figure 1 is a perspective view of my 
gate. Fig. 2 is a detail elevation showing 
anti-friction roller f. 
A is the roadway. 
B is a beam or other hard surface, laid or 
formed in the roadway transversely thereto 
and Serving as a track on which the gate 
moves from side to side. 
C is the gate formed with an extension or 
guide portion c. This gate travels between 
the Spaced or two-part guide-post D at the 
Center and Spaced or two-part end posts E at 
each side, and into these posts are let anti 
friction roller's d and e, for the purpose of per 
mitting the gate to move easily. The gate is 
mounted upon or carried by wheels F, the di 
ameters of which approximate to the height 
of the gate, so that the latter moves with but 
little friction, its wheels overcoming slight 
Obstacles without trouble. 
Gare posts set on each side of the gate and 
at one side of the roadway. 
Mounted upon the center post D is a shaft 
H, carrying on its center a winding-drum K, 
and on each end a pulley I, to which are se 
cured the pull-ropes J. One end of a rope J 
is attached to and passes about a pulley I in 
One direction, and the other end of the same 
rope is attached to and passes about the same 
pulley in the other direction. The rope passes 
O 
25 
45 
up over suitable guide-blocksi on the center 
post, thence through guide-blocks i? on the 
side post or arms thereof, and thence down to 
a gravity tightener-pulley L on the side post, 
passing its bight around said pulley. The 
pulleys I are preferably double-faced ones, as 
shown, to avoid any interference of the ends 
of the ropes J. 
The tightener-pulley Lismounted in a block 
l, to which are secured the bail-straps', which 
embrace the side post freely enough to allow 
the block and pulley to bear down by gravity, 
thus keeping the rope J taut. Any upward 
movement of the block is prevented by a re 
movable pin l, inserted just above it in any of 
a series of holes g in the side post, and said 
pin also regulates and defines the position of 
the block, thus providing for taking up any 
slack in the rope J by setting said block lower 
down on the post. 
Secured to the winding-drum Kis a rope M, 
Which extends and is secured to one end of the 
gate, and a second rope N is secured to the 
drum and extends and is secured to the other 
end of the gate or its extension portion. 
O is a pivoted latch carried by the gate and 
adapted to engage a cross-bolte' in one of the 
end posts. From the inner end of this latch ex 
tends upwardly a cord O, attached at its up 
per end to rope M. 
When the wheels F which carry the gate 
are made of wood, I find it preferable to use 
Small anti-friction rollersf, mounted in bear 
ings f on the lower rail of the gate, said roll 
ers bearing against the wheel side, and thus 
keeping said wheel away from frictional con 
tact with the walls of the slot of the rail. 
When the wheels F are of iron and made nar 
row, so as not to fill the slot, there is not so 
much need, if any, for the employment of the 
rollers.f, though they may be used, if desired. 
If the lower rail of the gate has any tendency 
to rub too hard against the anti-friction roll 
er's d and e of the posts D and E, caused by 
the gate's inclining to one side, I can remedy 
this difficulty by the use of a guard-rail P, 
located on the track B, so that the wheels F 
run by and against its side, thus keeping said 
wheels straight. This guard-rail need not ex 
tend upon the roadway, nor probably upon 
more than One side, and, in fact, Will not be re 
quired at all in case the work is true. 
s 
s 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
| 
2 
422,831 
The operation of the gate is as follows: The 
traveler approaching grasps one side of the 
pull-rope J, and pulling down upon it thereby 
turns pulley I and shaft H, thus operating 
drum K and winding up rope M and paying 
out rope N. The immediate tightening of 
rope M pulls up cord O and releases the latch. 
Then the rope M pulls the gate open. After 
passing through the gateway the traveler 
seizes the other rope J, and by pulling upon 
it returns and closes the gate. The large car 
rying-wheels F, I find to be of decided advan 
tage in reducing friction and making the gate 
move very easily. The pull-ropes J are sim 
ple, and by passing their bights about the 
tightener-pulleys Isecure from each the effect 
of two ropes-one for opening and one for 
closing-and yet avoid the use of separate 
ropes. A block Q on the end of trackB serves 
as a stop against which a block q on the bot 
tom rail of the gate comes in contact to limit 
the opening of the gate. A stake driven in 
the ground at the end of the track may be 
used as a stop. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
25 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. in combination with the rolling gate and 
winding-drum and ropes for operating it, the 
pulleys I, the pull-ropes J, the side posts G, 30 
and the tighteners about which the pull-ropes 
pass, consisting of the pulley's L, mounted in 
the blocks l, the straps secured to the blocks 
and freely embracing the side posts, and the 
removable and adjustable pin l, adapted to 
fit into a series of holes in the side post to 
regulate the position of the blocks, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The rolling gate and its wheels operat 
ing through the slotted bottom rail of the 
gate, in combination with the anti-friction 
rollers mounted in the gate-rail and bearing 
against the side of the wheels, substantially 
as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
35 
AO 
45 
WILLIAM. A. PIERCE. 
hand. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. REAMS, 
E. D. HAM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US422931.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
l. n. 
No. 422,931, 
SEE, Lu ... -- i. 
 
ACY, 
a tented Mar, ll, l890. 
NPEris, co-stographer. Washington, 
c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS A. GALT AND GEORGES, TRACY, OF STERLING, ILLINOIS. 
SEED-PLANTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 422,981, dated March 11, 1890. 
k Application filed November 18, 1889, Serial No, 330,65l. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whol, it 77 (ty Concei'i. 
Be it known that we, THOMAS A. GALT and 
GEORGES. TRACY, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Sterling, in the county of 
Whiteside and State of Illinois, have invented 
new and useful Improvements in Seed-Plant 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
Seed-planters, but has reference especially to 
that class of planters in which a wheel and 
its scraper having a tread of more or less 
Width is utilized to cover the seed after it is 
deposited, and our invention pertains to a 
novel construction of such covering-wheel; 
and the objects of our invention are to pro 
wide a central opening around the entire cir 
cumference of the wheel, which will allow the 
earth to be loosely ridged directly over the 
line of the hills of seed, and thus be precluded 
from baking and be readily pervious to moist 
ure, and to provide a scraper having a con 
tinuously-acting central prolongation adapted 
to project itself within the central opening 
aforesaid of said wheel and prevent the earth 
from accumulating therein. We attain these 
objects by...the mechanism illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of a wheel em 
bodying our invention. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
view thereof, with the scraper in suitable re 
lation thereto. 
As our invention is applicable to any corn 
or other seed planter in which a covering or 
pressure wheel is employed, and its applica 
tion and operation in any of such forms of 
Such Organizations are obvious, we do not deem 
it necessary to show or describe other parts 
or any special form of seeder or planter, but 
Will limit our description to the covering 
Wheel proper and its attendant scraper, 
A is our improved wheel, consisting of the 
hub B, adapted in the usual mode to rotate 
On or with an axle or spindle and to support 
and carry such portion of the machine as may 
be desirable. 
CC are radiating spokes attached in any 
suitable mode in or to the periphery of the 
hub B, and attached, adjustably or otherwise, 
at their outer ends to the center of the yokes D, 
E is the rim of the wheel A provided cen 
trally with the peripheral opening F, intended 
to follow the line of the previously-deposited 
seed and intended to be of the width. Sub 
stantially of such deposits. In the wheel 
which we employ for corn-planting such open 
ing is the width of two inches. The residue 
of the tread G of the wheel W is sloped in 
straight lines from the outer edges thereof, 
respectively, inwardly and toward the hub B 
at an angle of about forty-five degrees. With 
the axis of the wheel, although the precise 
angle of such inclination is not material. The 
yokes D are provided with the central in Ward 
bow 1 and flat, ends 2, parallel With and placed, 
respectively, in contact with the inner Sur 
face of the tread G on each side of the Open 
ing F, and are attached at each side of said 
opening to the tread G by means of l'adial 
rivets or countersunk bolts 3. The outer ends 
of the spokes C are screwed into the bowl of 
the yoke D and additionally secured in place 
by a nut 4; or said spokes may be attached to 
said yokes in any other suitable and obvious 
ae, 
H is a scraper seated in any of the usual 
modes upon a convenient portion of the frame 
of the machine and provided with the usual 
scraping-face 5, adapted to be intermittently 
brought in contact with the tread G in any 
of the usual modes, and further provided with 
the central projection 6, adapted to be pro 
jected continuously a sufficient distance with 
in the opening F to prevent the accumulation 
of earth therein, and to be intermittently 
thrown deeper into such opening sufficiently 
to permit the residue of said scraper to come 
in contact with the tread G aforesaid. 
The advantages of our invention are that 
the centrally-inclined formation of the tread 
G tends to crush the clods upon the sides of 
the seed-row; also to gather the dirt centrally 
upon the seed-row from each side thereof Suf 
ficiently to insure the covering of the Seed; 
also to leave the earth directly over the line 
of the seeds in the natural condition, and 
therefore not liable to the bake which usually 
occurs subsequently in the track of ordinary 
The pressure aforesaid 
covering a wheels. 
upon the sides of the row of seeds is sufficient 
to insure the germination of the latter, while 
the loose quality of the earth directly over the 
line of the seeds readily permits the passage 
95 
O) 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
422,931 
respectively, to scrape the treads G, and with 
a central elongation 6, projected into the Open- I5 
ing F and adapted to keep the latter clear of 
accumulated earth and rubbish, substantially 
as shown, and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in the presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS A. GAILT. 
GEO. S. TRACY. 
Witnesses: 
ADDA. E. WARD, 
JOHN G. MANAHAN. 
of the seed-sprouts in their early and tender 
Stage. The loose condition of the earth in 
the line of the passage of the opening F, and 
therefore directly over the seed-deposits, is 
also favorable to the reception of moisture. 
What We claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
States, is 
In a seed-planter wheel, the combination of 
the hub B, staggered radiating spokes C C, 
yokes D, duplex inwardly-inclined tread G, 
peripheral opening F, and a scraper H, pro 
vided with the retracted surface 5, adapted, 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423033.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 423,033. 
 
F. G. DIETERICH. 
WENDING MACHINE, 
8 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar, ll, 1890, 
(No Model.) 
F. G. DIETERICH, 
WENDING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 423,033, 
Patented Mar, ll, 1890. 
28). Evloosca 
w 
3.10.11bot 
PeRS, Photo-Lithographer. Washington. . 
. 
 
(No Model.) 
3 sheets-sheet 3. 
F. G. DIETERICH, 
VENDING MACHINE, 
No. 423,033, 
727 
4. 
Bill. Taz. 
La 
Patented Mar, ll, 1890. 
  
 
2 
s 
777 Z. 90 
s 
% 
 
2. % 
% 
 
 
. 2 
't 
A 
g|B-3WZz, 
' "22 
2 
W 
a 
F 
E. 
2. 
y 
2s 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
721 
 
h 
f 
la 
 
 
 
ZZE 
928), twossos 
is 
841-uov tot 
e-4322. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED G. DIETERICH, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, ASSIGNOR 
TO JOHN U. OMEARA, OF SAME PLACE, 
VENDING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 423,033, dated March 11, 1890. 
Application filed September 14, 1889, Serial No. 323,898, (No model.) 
Io it appertains to make and use the same. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRED G. DIETERICH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington city, in the District of Columbia, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Vending-Machines; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
My invention relates to a vending appa 
ratus more especially designed for the Sale of 
cigars, it being obvious, however, that it may 
be used for the sale of other articles with but 
15 slight alterations without changing the essen 
tial parts of the apparatus. As is well known, 
machines of this class are operated by means 
of the insertion of a coin, which releases cer 
tain locking mechanism, so as to permit the 
2O delivery-slide, which brings the article within 
reach of the purchaser, to be operated. In the 
general construction of machines of this 
character they are usually provided with a 
receiving-hopper which feeds the cigars or 
25 other articles to the feed-slide in such a man 
ner that a single cigar will be discharged 
when the operating-lever or pull-rod is ma 
nipulated by the purchaser. 
This construc 
tion is very objectionable-first, because, ac 
3o cording to the laws relating to internal reve 
nue, tobacco in any shape can only be sold 
from the originally-stamped box or package; 
second, by feeding them through a hopper 
they become more or less jammed or broken. 
35 - Machines have also been patented where 
the cigars have been placed on a platform 
I within the casing with one end of the box re 
moved, so as to allow the cigars to feed from 
the box to the delivery apparatus. This 
character of machines has been found ob 
jectionable, because no means are employed 
whereby the cigars within the box are loos 
ened from their original compactly-pressed 
state, so they will always feed in place. 
45 The object of my invention is to simplify 
the construction of such devices, and to pro 
duce a machine in which the cigars being 
sold and the brand thereof will always be in 
sight of the purchaser, as Well also as the 
5o revenue-stamp, so the purchaser can readily 
It has also for its object to produce a ma- 55 
To this end my invention consists, first, in 6o 
see the character of the cigar he is buying, 
and the inspector of revenues can see at a 
glance that the law regulating the sale of ci 
gars is being complied with. 
chine which will be cheap as to cost, easy to 
manipulate, one which will not readily get 
out of order, and which will be effective for 
its desired purpose. 
arranging an inclined reciprocating support 
or holder for the cigars to rest on, which is 
provided with a discharge-opening at one 
end, arranging said reciprocating support at 
an angle, and corrugating its upper surface, 65 
whereby the cigars will be effectively stirred 
up without injury thereto at each movement 
of said support, 
sts in suitable connections be 
It also consi 
tween said reciprocating support and a recip- 7o 
rocating delivery-slide, whereby said support 
is moved backward to take up a cigar from 
the merchandise hopper or box as the de 
livery-slide is pulled outward to discharge a, 
cigar, and whereby said support and slide will 75 
have their discharge-openings align when they 
assume their normal or rest positions; and, 
finally, my invention consists in the peculiar 
combination, construction, and arrangement 
of the several parts, all of which will herein- 8o 
after be fully described in the annexed speci 
fication and particularly pointed out in the 
claims, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, in which- 
improved vending-machine. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective rear view thereof. Fig. 3 is a cen 
tral vertical section of the same on the line 
33, Fig. 4. 
Fig. 4 is a horizontal section of 
the machine with the top or cigar-support re- 9o 
moved. Fig. 5 is a detail cross-section of the 
same on the line 55, Fig. 4. Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 
S are detail views of the coin-chute herein 
after specifically referred to. Fig. 9 is a de 
tail view of one of the brackets or supports. 95 
Fig. 10 is a detail perspective view of the re 
ciprocating cigar-support, and Fig. 11 is a 
detail view of the trip-lever or locking-pawl, 
in the accompanying drawings, Aindicates 
the case of the machine, which may be con- Ioo 
Figure 1 is a perspective front view of my 85 
- - - 
423,033 
IO 
25 
55 
structed of wood or metal or a combination 
of Wood and metal, as I shall in practice con 
struct the front Wall A' of a single casting 
suitably nickelled and of appropriate design. 
Secured to the inner side walls of the case 
are inclined ways or brackets a, a, upon which 
is supported and slides the reciprocating mer 
chandise support or holder B, the form of 
which is shown in detail in Fig. 10 of the 
drawings. This support is removable, and 
when used in connection with the selling of 
cigars forms the bottom of the cigar-box 
proper. In the practical adjustment of the 
same, when it is desired to place it in oper 
ative position, it is first removed from the 
casing through a suitably-arranged door b in 
the rear of the case and placed over the in 
verted or bottom side of the cigar-box, (the 
bottom of said box having first been re 
moved.) The said box is then held in posi 
tion upon the support B between its side 
guides or ribs b'b', and the box and support 
then placed in position in the case. 
Stop-blocks C C are arranged in the casing 
to limit the forward movement of the box, 
and a suitable locking-pawl D, provided with 
a cam-face d, engages the rear upper end of 
box and holds same in position on its sup 
port B. 
The casing A is provided with a glass-cov 
ered sight-opening E in its top, whereby the 
brand and revenue-stamp may be readily seen 
by the purchaser or other person. 
By reference to Fig. 3 it will be observed 
that the support B is somewhat longer than 
the box or receptacle F, said extended por 
tion being normally in advance of the front 
wallf of the box. In this portion of the sup 
port is formed a feed-opening B", of a size 
sufficiently large to admit of the easy passage 
of an ordinary-sized cigar, the rear edge bof 
said opening being rounded and projecting 
normally slightly inside the end f of the box 
to facilitate the dropping or rolling of a cigar 
into said opening when said support is moved 
backward, in a manner presently described, 
said movement being only of such a degree 
as to admit of said support being moved back 
ward to the extent of the width of the open 
ing B. 
Cigars, as usually placed in their boxes, are 
pressed tightly in position, and, being usually 
green when put in the box, they, in their ex 
pansion, become so tightly wedged that it is 
even difficult to remove same by hand. To 
overcome this serious objection and to 
pro 
vide means for automatically loosening the 
cigars in the box, I provide the upper face of 
said support B with transverse corrugations 
B, the central portion of said support being 
convexed longitudinally, as shown in Fig. 3. 
By this arrangement it will be seen that as 
the support is reciprocated back and forth 
the corrugations will not only tend to roll the 
cigars and move them, but will also, owing to 
the convexed shape of the center of Said Sup 
port, serve to lift said cigars. The support 
is also provided with a stop or projection B', 
which serves to strike against the front wall 
f of said box on the return movement of said 
support and give the box a sudden jar. 
The aforesaid means for stirring the cigars 
forms one of the important parts of my in 
vention, and, so far as I know, no means for 
this purpose have before been employed in 
machines of this character. 
The forward end of the support B, when in 
normal position, rests upon a horizontally-dis 
posed reciprocating discharge-slide G, which 
rests at one edge upon a Wooden bracket g, 
while its opposite edge is supported upon a 
suitably-arranged metalbracket H. (Shown in 
detail in Fig. 9 of the drawings.) This slide 
is provided with an opening G', arranged 
transversely thereof, which is of a size suffi 
cient to receive an ordinary-sized cigar, and 
which, when the said slide is in normal posi 
tion, registers with discharge-opening B' in 
the support B, said opening G' being nor 
mally over a transversely-arranged and ver 
tically-adjustable bed-plate I, which, in con 
nection with the opening G', forms a pocket 
to receive a cigar at the return of the sup 
port and slide after the sale of a preceding 
Clgal. 
The rear wall of the opening G' is inclined 
rearward, as at g', for the following purpose: 
When the slide Gis being pulled out and the 
support B travels back and upward, and af 
ter the opening thereof has received a cigar 
and the purchaser releases the pull-rod K, the 
rear edge of the incline portion of the open 
ing G will be under said opening B, and as 
the support moves forward and the slide back 
ward it will be seen that the cigar will by 
gravity fall downward, while the support will 
push it forward, thereby forcing said cigar 
away from the inner lower edge f' of the 
Wallf of the box, and thereby preventing any 
possible jam of Said cigar against said corner 
of the box. 
To provide a simple means whereby said 
support and slide are operated to reciprocate 
in alternate directions, I connect same to links 
JJ, which are centrally pivoted to supports 
ii', their lower ends engaging the studs gg 
on the slide G, while their upper ends are 
forked at f f to receive the lugs bb', project 
ing from the edges of the support, as shown, 
said ends being forked to facilitate the re 
moval of said supports when desired. By 
this arrangement it will be readily understood 
that as the slide moves forward the support 
moves backward, and vice versa. The front 
end of the slide is recessed on its under side 
at G', and is provided with an overhanging 
stop-plate G, provided with an aperture g", 
through which the operating-rod K passes, 
said rod being connected at its inner end to 
the cross-bar I of the operating-lever L, as 
shown. By this construction it will be seen 
that as the rod Kis pulled outward the bar L' 
will engage the plate Gand pull the slide out 
Ward to discharge the cigar X into a chute M, 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
423,088 
S. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
 
. 
. 
- 
', 
. 
. 
which extends to without the front wall of 
the case, as M', in convenient reach of the 
purchaser. . 
N denotes a coiled spring which retracts 
the slide and pulls the several parts back 
into normal position, the slide engaging a 
stop H on the bracket H, as clearly seen in 
Fig. 4 of the drawings. 
By reference to Fig. 5 of the drawings, it 
will be seen that the lower edge of one of 
the sides of the slide G is recessed, as shown 
at g, said recess engaging the metal bracket, 
as shown. The rear end of the upper portion 
of the side g", which projects above the bracket, 
is provided with a retaining-plate N, which 
is provided with two projections or teeth in m'. 
(See Fig. 4.) 
Pivotally supported on the bracket His a . 
horizontally-disposed stop-pawl or locking 
lever O, the forward end of which is formed 
with a projecting detent O, which normally 
extends in the path of the tooth n of the re 
taining-plate N. The forward end o' of this 
locking-pawl is projected forward of the coin 
chute P and extends parallel to the rearward 
extension L' of the pull-rod K, the forward 
end of said lever being provided with a lateral 
projection o', which normally bears against 
the said extension L", as shown. 
Q denotes a spring which bears against the 
head o of the lever O and holds the same nor 
mally in a locked position. 
The pull-rod K, which is most clearly illus 
trated in Fig. 4 of the drawings, is provided 
with a rearward extension L", said extension 
being formed of spring metal, the inner end 
being projected laterally, as at k, which bears 
against the side Wall a of the casing, form 
ing a guide and support for said extension, 
as shown. It will be observed by reference 
to Fig. 4 of the drawings that the said exten 
sion L' is disposed to travel in front of and 
across the lower front face of the coin-chute 
P. It will also be seen that I provide the in 
ner face of the extension at the front, where 
it engages the said chute, with a laterally out 
wardly extending cam projection k', and its 
outer face with a projection k', which en 
gages the forward end O' of the locking-lever 
O, for a purpose presently explained. 
It is well known that heretofore in coin 
actuated machines the coin usually in falling 
actuates a gravity-pawl to release the deliv 
ery-slide. In some cases the coin is used to 
form the connection between the slides to 
permit them to operate. For this purpose I 
employ a coin-chute P, (most clearly illus 
trated in Figs. 6, 7, and S.) which is provided 
at its lower end with a contracted mouth P', 
which projects through an opening II in the 
bracket H, and which in the present instance 
is of such a width as to retain a coin of the 
size of a five-cent piece, but presents a clear 
passage for a coin of smaller dimensions. 
The front face p of the chute is cut away, as 
at p', thereby permitting the major portion 
of one face of the coin to appear, said portion 
- 
75 
90 
95 
85 
Ward. 
being so arranged as to be in the path of the 
camportion k when the rod K is pulled out 
To securely hold the said coin in position 
and yet provide simple means whereby said 
coin may be readily discharged into a suitable 
drawer or money-box R, I form the side wall 
p of said contracted mouth into a pivoted leaf 
P, which is pivoted at p to the side walls of 
the chute, and is securely held in a closed 
position by a suitable leaf-spring S. 
By reference to Fig. 7 it will be observed 
that I provide the lower end of the leaf P3 
with a slot p of graduated width, which forms 
an additional means of permitting a coin 
smaller than a five-cent piece to fall through. 
the width of said slot, however not permitting 
the passage of the five-cent piece. This leaf 
P is also provided with a wingP, which pro 
jects beyond the free face of the coin. 
By reference to the drawings it will be ob 
served that the teeth n n are of a length 
equal to the thickness of the coin, and that 
the cam projection is also of a size equal to 
the thickness of said coin. 
It will thus be 
Seen that if there is no coin in the lower end 
of the chute a pull on the rod would cause 
the cam projection to pass across the front 
face of the chute without affecting the lock 
ing-lever at all; but when a coin of the re 
quired thickness-as, for instance, a five-cent 
piece -is in position the cam projection 
Would, When the rod is pulled out, engage the 
coin, and be thereby sprung backward until 
its end travels on the front face of the coin, .. 
as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 4, which in its 
movement would cause its projection is to 
engage the arm O' of the lever O and throw 
it out of locked position, (see dotted lines, 
Fig. 4) and thereby permit the delivery-slide 
to be operated. This construction of the 
locking mechanism forms still another safety 
against operating with a coin of less denomi 
nation-as, for instance, a cent. Should a 
cent by Some accident be caught at the mouth 
of the chute, it could not (owing to its thick 
ness being less than that of the five-cent piece. 
and the length of the tooth n) throw the le 
ver O entirely out of locked position when 
the rod K is pulled slightly forward. 
When it is desired to operate the machine 
by a coin of less width than a five-cent piece 
as, for instance, a dime-without changing 
the construction of the locking-lever and 
plate, I form the lower end of the chute with 
an enlargement, as shown at 1, Fig. 8, and 
recess said enlargement at 2 to permit, the 
cam projection IX to pass thereacross when a 
coin is not in place. In this construction I. 
also omit the slot in the bottom of the piv- - 
oted leaf and contract the mouth of the chute. 
to hold a dime in position. By this construc 
tion it will be seen that the combined thick 
ness of the chute-Wall and the dime will be. ... 13o 
equal to that of the five-cent piece and the , , 
length of the tooth n, and that when the rod 
K is pulled out its cam projection will oper 
o 5 
I I5 
I25 
II O 
IOO 
A. 
428,088 
O 
35 
45 
55 
bracket and having a connection with said in 
ate over the dime in a manner similar to its 
operation over the five-cent piece. 
termediate devices, said devices consisting of 
centrally-pivoted links, whereby the move 
As before stated, the operation of releas 
ing the coin, and feeding out the cigaris done 
ment of the slide in one direction Will move the 
merchandise-holder in an opposite direction, 
at one pull outward upon the rod K. The 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
said parts are, however, so constructed that 
2. The combination, with the discharging 
the beginning of the pull upon the rod re 
slide, of a merchandise-holder longitudinally 
leases the locking devices, and the remainder 
of its pull operates to discharge a cigar, the 
movable over said slide, a receptacle held on 75 
said holder, such holder being provided with 
entire pull upon the rod, however, being the 
a discharge-opening normally disposed to the 
distance of less than the width of two cigars. 
front edge of the receptacle, said holder 
By reference to Fig. 3 it will be seen that 
adapted to be moved longitudinally under 
normally there is a space between the cross 
said receptacle, whereby the feed-opening 
bar of the rod and the overhanging plate G 
will be moved inward and permit the cigar or 
of less than the width of a cigar. This permits 
other article to be discharged through said 
the forward movement of said rod K to re 
holder onto the delivery-slide, and means for 
lease the locking-lever before it engages the 
operating the said holder, substantially as and 
delivery-slide. 
for the purpose specified. 
To prevent any one beating the machine 
3. The combination, with a horizontally 
by allowing the slide and rod to recede slowly 
disposed and longitudinally-movable deliv 
to a point just in advance of its locking-point, 
ery-slide, of a diagonally-disposed merchan 
I provide the second tooth n', which will en 
gage the locking-lever before the parts can 
dise-holder provided with a discharge-open 
ing at its lower ends supported over said hori 
recede far enough to permit the Support to 
Zontal slide, the centrally-pivoted links con 
take up another cigar from the box. When 
nected at their lower ends to the delivery-slide 
the pull-rod K has been drawn out to its full 
extent, the cam projection k'Will have passed 
and at their upper ends to the merchandise 
holder, and means for operating said slide, 
over the coin and engaged the wing P of the 
substantially as described. 
leaf P8 and swung it on its pivot, thereby 
4. The combination, with the horizontally 
opening the mouth of the chute P and allow 
disposed delivery-slide provided with a dis 
ing the coin to fall into the coin-receptacle, 
charge-outlet, of the longitudinally-movable 
the extension then Springing back to its normal 
position and the lever being pressed over 
merchandise-holder located above said slide, 
against the plate N by the spring Q to engage 
the merchandise box or receptacle supported 
thereon, said holder provided with a feed 
the locking-teeth, as described. 
opening normally disposed outside of the 
A suitable door T is provided at the rear of 
front end of said box and registering with the 
the machine for the ready withdrawal of the 
discharge-opening in said slide, said holder 
coin-box. 
By arranging the plate I adjustably the 
provided with a projection on its outer end 
adapted to strike the box on its rearward 
same can be readily lowered when it is de 
movement and thereby agitate its contents, 
sired to change the support B and slide G to 
and the intermediate pivoted links connected 
feed two cigars at one time, such construc 
to said slide and holder for communicating 
tions being readily made without changing 
reverse longitudinal motions thereto, substan 
the material parts of the machine. 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
5. In a vending-machine, the combination, 
connection with the drawings, the advantages 
with the horizontally-reciprocating discharge 
of my invention will be readily understood. 
mechanism, of the longitudinally-movable 
It will be seen that the pull-rod has at its 
merchandise-holder provided with transverse 
utmost but a limited amount of movement, 
corrugations on its upper face, said holder 
and that by the constructions shown the sev 
disposed diagonally above said discharge 
eral parts are so arranged that they can be 
mechanism and provided with a feed-opening 
cheaply made, quickly adjusted, and the dan 
at its lower end communicating with said dis 
ger of their getting out of order is reduced to 
charge mechanism, Substantially as shown, 
a minimum. 
and for the purpose described. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
6. In a vending-machine, a longitudinally 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
movable merchandise-holder having its up 
is 
per face convexed longitudinally and pro 
1. In a vending-machine, the combination, 
vided with transverse corrugations or ribson 
with the casing, guides or brackets Secured 
therein, a longitudinally-movable delivery 
said face, Substantially as and for the pur 
slide,andintermediate connecting devices pro 
pose described. 
jecting upward from said delivery-slide, of a 
7. The combination, with a longitudinally 
detachable longitudinally-movable merchan 
movable merchandise-holder and means for 
dise-holder disposed above Said delivery-slide, 
agitating the same and the merchandise box 
or receptacle supported thereon, of the stops 
one end adapted to be supported on said slide, 
its other end supported on the aforesaid C C, for holding the box in position, and the 
95 
I J5 
I25 
OC 
- - - 
423,033 
spring-metal extension L", provided with a 
cam projection lic, said extension operating 
intermediate the locking mechanism and coin 
chute, said extension adapted when a Coin is 
in the chute to first engage the coin With its 
cam projection and release the locking de 
vices on the first portion of its pull and to op 
erate the discharge and feed devices on the 
remainder of its stroke, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
13. The combination, with the discharge 
slide, the operating-rod provided with a yield 
ing extension, as L', having a cam projection 
k', and the locking devices intermediate said 
extension and the slide, said devices unlocked 
by the outward movement of said extension, 
of the coin-chute P, provided with a con 
tracted mouth, having one face open to leave 
a portion of the coin-face free, said face be 
ing in the path of the movement of the cam 
F, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
14. The combination, with discharge-level's 
and the operating-rod K, provided. With a 
yielding extension, as L', having a cam pro 
jection lic, of the coin-chute provided with a 
recessed portion, as 2, adapted to allow the 
passage of the cam projection when a coin is 
not in position, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
15. In a vending-machine, essentially as 
described, a coin-chute having a contracted 
mouth, the supporting-edge thereof formed 
of a spring-actuated pivoted leaf, said leaf 
provided at its lower edge with a slot of 
graduated width, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
16. In a vending-machine, essentially as 
described, the combination, with the dis 
charge-slide provided with the lock-plate N, 
having teeth in n, and the pull-rod K, having 
a coin-operated extension, as L', of the lock 
ing-lever O, provided with a detent at its for 
ward end adapted to engage either of the 
teeth in n', a forward extension normally en 
gaging the extension L', said lever thrown 
out of locked position by the backward move 
ment of the extension L", and means for 
throwing said lever back into normal posi 
tion, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRED, G, DIETERICH. 
Witnesses; 
CHAS. A. PETTIT, 
SOLON C. KEMON. 
75 
95 
OO 
locking-pawl D, provided with a cam-face i, 
to engage the upper edge of said box, sub 
Stantially as and for the purpose described. 
S. In a vending-machine, a merchandise 
holder or support consisting of a body or 
block having longitudinal flanges or ribs for 
holding the merchandise-box from lateral 
movement, a discharge-opening in one end, 
Said opening normally disposed beyond the 
front Wall of the box and adapted to receive 
a cigar or other article when moved back un 
der Said articles, and means for reciprocat 
ing Said holder, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
9. The combination, with the merchandise 
holder provided with an aperture, as B', nor 
mally disposed beyond the front wall of the 
merchandise-box, a discharge-slide provided 
With an aperture G', normally registering 
With said aperture B' in the holder, a trans 
Verse Support arranged below said aperture 
G for temporarily supporting the cigar, a 
discharge-chute extended to without the cas 
ing, and a connection between said holder 
and Slide, whereby the opening in the holder 
is adjusted back to take up a cigar as the slide 
is pulled forward to discharge a cigar into 
Said chute, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
10. The combination, with a longitudinally 
reciprocating merchandise-holder provided 
With a discharge feed-opening, as B, of the 
longitudinally-reciprocating discharge-slide 
provided with an opening, as G', normally 
registering with the opening B", and a rest, as I, 
disposed beneath said opening G', said open 
ing having a rearwardly-inclined upper edge, . 
Substantially as and for the purpose de 
Scribed. 
I1. The combination, with the feeding and 
discharging devices, an operating-rod, as K 
L, provided with a spring-metal extension L", 
having a cana projection, and locking mech 
anism intermediate said extension and the 
discharge devices, of a coin-chute arranged to 
locate the coin with its thickness in the path 
of the coin projection of the extension L", 
whereby said extension is moved to release 
the said locking mechanism, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
12. The combination, with merchandise 
feeding and discharging mechanism, the 
locking mechanism connected with the dis 
charge-slide, and a coin-chute, of the pull 
rod K, provided with a transverse bar L, 
adapted to engage the discharge - slide, a 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423133.txt	(No Model.) 
r 
H. J. W. S. COOKE, 
COOLING AND REFRIGERATING APPARATUS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 423,133, 
Patented Mar, ll, l890. 
727. Z. 
cf. 
N 
s 
 
A. 
g? 
a- 
Morvm. 
f 
6, Yazezase7 
A. - 
- 
e 
A 
- 
... 
r 
N 
N 
R 
s 
S| is 
RS 
N 
A 
A" 
2 a 
Zof 
/ecaz7227. 
a. 
s 
ZO 
afiz 
& 
a. 
2. 
Z. 
s 
S. 
NS 
As 
s 
As 
 
4, 2, 
 
2 
-- 
? 
 
77 
A 
Set 
 
-1 
, 6enerazor 
id 
Aecease 
2 
A. 
A. 
O e 
A% 
Z. 2 
Z 
-a 
8. 
$3 
2 
 
d 
2 
772zesses: 
622/2 
i. PETERS, Photo-tithographor, washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
H. J. W. S. COOKE, 
000LING AND REFRIGERATING APPARATUS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 423,133, 
Z722. 
SNS 
2 2 sis 
Patented Mar. 11, 1890. 
7%. 
SNSS 
 
2 
N 
N 
7 E. N 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
2OOOO 
eC alogo 
aeseo 
Org 
access e 
Coe 
OOOOOs 2O Resort 
aree 
OOOOG3 
too. Asa aeseo 
e 
Oes 
O 
Ose 
e 
r 
w 
at Oooo 
ea aeoloo 
 
 
S 
S 
2R NIN NZ 
2 
% 
2 
2 
2x 
SSSSSSSNSSNSSS 
6xxset 
ver 
. 
ZZ 
N 
2 
 
 
 
  
 
32 SiS Sri % 
S. 
% 
2 
2 
2 
N 
23, 23 
33, 
N. Peters. Photo-Lithographs, washington, b, c, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 423,133, 
 
H. J. W. S. COOKE, 
000LING AND REFRIGERATING APPARATUS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Mar, ll, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
H. J. W. S. COOKE, 
C00LING AND REFRIGERATING APPARATUS, 
5 SheetS-Sheet 4. 
No. 423,133, 
 
Patented Mar, ll, 1890. 
Z7%. 6. 
/ 
22 
N. PETERS, Fkoto-lthographor, Washington, o, c. 
(No Model.) 
 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
H. J. W. S. COOKE. 
000LING AND REFRIGERATING APPARATUS, 
No. 423,133. 
Patented Mar. 11, 1890. 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
6 
2 2 2 
2Z2 2. 
12 
2 
 
2. 
 
s 
(O) 
7%Z. Ahf 
 
22 ZZzap 222 
avazyaya 
Zzzesses: 
E. 
N. PEERS, Photo-ithographer, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY J. W. S. COOKE, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY. 
COO LING AND REFR GE RATING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 423,133, dated March 11, 1890. 
Application filed May 13, 1889, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY J. W. S. COOKE, 
of East Orange, in the county of Essex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a certain 
new and useful Improvement in Cooling and 
Refrigerating Apparatus, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Myinvention is animprovement upon appa 
ratus for cooling and refrigerating, for which 
United States Letters Patent No. 240,049 were 
issued to Harry F. Stanley, April 12,1881, and 
relates to that class of such apparatus in which 
the cooling results from the expansion of the 
gas of liquefied ammonia, and in which a sup 
ply of liquefying ammonia is consequently 
maintained by the recondensation of the am 
moniacal vapor or gas. 
In carrying out my improvement I employ 
a generator in which ammoniacal liquors are 
received and in which they are subjected to 
the action of heat. The vapors arising from 
the generator pass through an analyzer con 
taining strong ammoniacal liquor, and the 
gas from the analyzer is conveyed away to a 
rectifier. From the rectifier the anhydrous 
gas passes to a condenser, where it is con 
densed. The liquid ammonia, then passes to 
a receiver, where it is stored, and from the 
receiver to a cooler, through which the brine 
or other liquid to be cooled passes. From the 
cooler the gas passes to an absorber, where it 
is united with Weak ammoniacal liquor from 
a heater receiving its supply from the gen 
erator. The strong ammoniacal liquor thus 
formed is returned by means of a pump to 
the heater, where it is reheated and passes to 
the analyzer to be again converted into gas. 
The improvement comprises certain details 
of construction and arrangement, hereinafter 
to be more specifically set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of apparatus embodying my im 
provement, certain parts being broken away 
and certain parts being in section. Fig. 2 is. 
a vertical section of the cooler, Fig. 3 is a 
vertical section of the absorber. Fig. 4 is a 
vertical section of the rectifier. Fig. 5 is a 
plan or top view of the latter. Fig. 6 is a ver 
tical section of the condenser. Fig. 7 is a plan 
or top view of the same. Fig. 8 is a detail 
plan of a certain tray employed in the ana 
O 
25 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
 
Fig. 12 is a detail 55 
Serial No. 310,561 (No model.) 
lyzer. Fig. 9 is a vertical section of the same. 
Fig. 10 is a plan view of a certain other plate 
employed in the analyzer. Fig.11 is a verti 
cal Section of the same. 
view of certain nipples employed in conjunc 
tion with the trays shown in Figs. 8 and 10. 
Figs. 2, 3, 6, and 7 show certain portions 
broken away to save space. Figs. 2, 3, 4, 5, 
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, ll, and 12 are drawn in a larger 
scale than Fig.1, and the nipple shown in Fig. 
12 is drawn in a larger scale than those shown 
in Figs. 8, 9, 10, and 11. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A designates a generator or still, in which 
the aqueous solution of ammonia is first sub 
mitted to the action of heat. The heat is 
furnished by steam passing through coils of 
pipe arranged within the generator A and 
at the lower portion thereof. I have shown 
but one of such coils; but I employ two. A 
coil. A receives the exhaust-steam, which ex 
haust-steam is delivered to it from any con 
venient source. I have shown a pipe a leading 
from a brine-pump. Another pipe a leads 
from an ammonia-pump, and another pipe a 
may lead from a cold-water pump. The 
brine-pump and cold-Water pump are not 
shown. These pipes or any others of similar 
nature may unite at a coupling a, and the 
combined exhaust-steam will be from thence 
delivered from a pipe a into the coil A'. 
Into the other of said coils, which is not 
shown, live steam may be delivered through a 
pipe a directly from a boiler. Each of the 
coils is provided with an outlet, which unite 
at a and discharge through a common pipe 
a, from whence it may be returned to the 
boiler by means of an ordinary trap. By 
this method of heating the generator I utilize 
all the heat in the steam. Wherever the latter 
is employed throughout the operation of the 
apparatus, thereby affecting a material sav 
ing in the consumption of fuel. I prefer 
that the generator shall be made of Wrought 
steel or iron, so that it may be as light as 
possible. It is supported upon saddles a. 
B designates an analyzer, in which the 
liquors to the action of vapors ascending 
operation of subjecting strong ammoniacal 
from the generator is performed, and where 
65 
75 
95 
Od 
d 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
2 
by the gas from the ammoniacal liquor is 
taken up. The analyzer is cylindrical and is 
mounted, as shown, upon supports b, so that 
it will extend upwardly above the generator 
A. At its lower end it is in open communi 
cation with the generator A through a pipe 
or passageb'. Through this pipe or passage 
the vapors from the generator ascend into 
the analyzer. 
Within the analyzer are ar 
ranged a series of trays one above the other, 
which trays have upon them ammoniacal 
liquors, from which it is desired to separate 
the ammonia-gas. The lower of these trays, 
or B', is shown more clearly in Figs, 8 and 9. 
Said tray is provided about centrally with an 
opening, with which is connected a tube or 
pipe b, which extends downwardly into the 
generator A, and is provided at its lower end 
with a cup b, forming a water seal. The 
other trays in the series are illustrated more 
clearly in Figs. 10 and 11. Each of these 
trays comprises an outlet-pipe band a de 
pressed or recessed portion b. 
The ends of 
the pipes b", when the trays are all in place, 
extend downwardly into the depressed or re 
cessed portions b of the trays next below: 
them, thus forming water seals. All of the 
trays are provided with upwardly-extending 
nipples b. These nipples, one of which is 
shown on an enlarged scale in Fig. 12, are 
screwed at their lower ends into suitable 
openings in the bottoms of the trays. Their 
upper ends are closed; but they are circum 
ferentially perforated with a number of small 
perforations. Extending diametrically across. 
the trays are partitions b, which stop short 
of one side of the trays. 
Strong ammoniacal liquor is admitted to 
the analyzer from a heater H, to be pres 
ently described, and passes through a pipe b. 
into the upper portion of the analyzer and 
onto the upper of the series of trays B'. 
It 
passes thence downwardly from one of the 
trays to another through the several pipes 
b', being compelled in its downward course 
to circulate over the entire Surface of each 
of the trays, for the reason that it enters upon 
one side of the partitions b, and must pass 
around them in order to reach the outlet-pipe: 
The vapor rising from the generator A. 
lb?. 
passes upwardly through the nipples b on 
the trays successively until it reaches the 
upper portion of the analyzer. The perfora 
tions in the nipples are considerably above 
the level of the liquor contained in the trays, 
so that the liquid will not absorb the ammo 
niacal gases gathered by the Vapor in its up 
ward course. By perforating the nipples, 
also, a complete separation of the gas in small 
jets as it ascends from tray to trayis effected, 
and there is a rapid and complete separation 
of the gas from the Water-vapor and conden 
sation of the water-vapor on the trays. Dur 
ing its upward passage the moisture contained 
in the ascending vapor is to a very large ex 
tent condensed and returns with the Weaker 
ammoniacal liquors to the generator. When 
423,133 
75 
- 
drous. 
the ammoniacal gas reaches the upper por 
tion of the analyzer, it is very nearly anhy 
In order to render the gas - thoroughly an 
hydrous, I next pass it through a rectifier D, 
the interior of which is shown more clearly 
in Figs. 4 and 5. It enters the rectifier from 
the analyzer through a pipe d, provided with 
a cock d', and passes into a coil of pipe D', 
arranged in a tank D', which tank is kept 
filled with water, and is arranged directly 
above the analyzer. The coil D' is composed 
ofstraight lengths of pipe extending upwardly 
at inclines and united together at their ends 
by return bends. The gas from the analyzer 
enters at the lower end of the coil and passes 
out at the upper end thereof. Certain of the 
return bends, or d, upon one side of the coil 
are so constructed as to have pockets di 
formed in them, into which waters of conden 
sation flowing down the coil will pass. From 
these pipes discharge-pipes d', provided with 
stop-cocks d, extend. The pipes d con 
nect at their outer ends with a receiver d, 
from which a pipe d', in which is formed a 
trap d, extends to the upper portion of the 
analyzer. The waters of condensation from 
the coil D' will thus be conveyed back to 
the analyzer. By providing each of the 
pipes d with a stop-cock the reflow of the wa 
ters of condensation through any one of said 
pipes to the receiver dmay be controlled. 
The anhydrous gas now passes from the recti 
fier to a condenser C, where it is liquefied. 
This condenser is shown more clearly in Figs. 
6 and 7. The condenser comprises in the 
present example a number of coils of pipe C, 
which coils extend downwardly at an incline 
and are wholly exposed. The anhydrous gas 
from the rectifier is first received into a mani 
fold C. The upper ends of the coils C/ com 
municate with the manifold C. They are 
provided near their point of connection with 
the manifold with cocks c. The gas circu 
lates down through the coils of pipe until 
condensed and the liquefied ammonia is ul 
timately received in a manifold C9, located at 
the lower end of the coils. Adjacent to the 
manifold C cocks c' are arranged in the pipes. 
The condensation of the gas is effected by 
means of Water distributed over the con 
denser-coils from a distributer comprising 
troughs C, which are perforated upon their 
under sides, so that the condensing-water will 
pass over and around the pipes in a thin film. 
This is advantageous, because thereby the 
full benefit of all the water used is obtained 
and the liquefaction of the gas under a lower 
pressure than is usual is possible. The water 
from the trough C, after having done its work 
upon the condenser, is received in a tank C, 
into which the lower end of the condenser 
extends. 
Connected to the manifold C9 is a pipe C6. 
The liquefied ammonia passes downwardly 
through the pipe C and into a receiver E, 
which receiver may be merely a metal shell 
95 
O) 
IIO 
II5 
2C) 
1 25 
I 30 
(5 
25 
35 
423,133 
8. 
which a pipeg conveys the water, which has 
of suitable strength and of ordinary construc 
tion. In the receiver the liquefied ammonia, 
now become heated, to the rectifier D. The 
is stored, to be used as desired. 
water having done its Work in the rectifier D 
is conveyed away through a waste-pipeg. 
F designates a cooler, through which brine 
or other liquid to be cooled is passed, being 
In the pipes fig are stop-cocks gg. By al 
received through a pipef from a pump or other 
lowing the condensing-water for the rectifier 
Source, (not shown,) and discharged through 
to flow to the same from the absorber, and 
a pipe f" to any suitable receptacle. The in 
after it has done the cooling Work in the lat 
ternal construction of the cooleris more clearly 
ter, instead of causing it to flow from the rec 
O shown in Fig. 2. It comprises a series of coils of 
tifier to the absorber, as heretofore, I prevent 
pipef', arranged one inward of the other and 
the possibility of any ammonia - gas being 
through which the liquid to be cooled flows. 
liquefied at the rectifier, as the water, after 
The upper ends of the coils communicate 
leaving the absorber, is of a sufficiently high 
with a chamber f, with which the pipe foom 
temperature to prevent this. Of course if the 
municates, and their lower ends communicate 
Water were too cold and liquefaction of the gas 
with a chamber f", with which the pipef com 
should occur at the rectifier, the liquefied am 
municates. The liquefied ammonia is deliv 
monia would be returned to the analyzer with 
ered to the cooler through a pipef, provided 
out having done any work, thus resulting in 
with a stop-cockf, and communicating with 
waste of heat. 
the cooler near the lower end of the latter. It 
Both the cooler E and the absorber G are 
provided with gage-glasses gig, the passages 
then passes upwardly about the coils of pipe 
f', effecting its work of cooling, and the am 
to which may be opened and closed by cocks 
monia-gas is ultimately discharged through 
g to ascertain the height of the liquefiedam 
a pipef into an absorber G. 
monia or the ammoniacal liquors. Similar 
I have shown a plug Farranged in the cav 
gage-glasses may be placed on the receiver and 
ity formed by the inner of the coils of pipe f*. 
generator. 
This plug, which may be of iron, Wood, or other 
The strong ammoniacal liquors are cons 
veyed through a pipe I, provided with a stop 
suitable material, reduces the area of the in 
cock I, to an ammonial-pump I of any suit 
terior of the cooler, so that a less quantity of 
ammonia is required to be in the cooler at a 
able construction, From the pump Itheliq. 
given time than would be the case if such 
uors are conveyed by a pipe to the heater H. 
plug were not used. The shell of the cooler 
In the heater H are arranged one or more 
is cylindrical and made of metal. 
coils of pipe H', through which the ammonia 
In the absorber G the process of causing 
calliquors circulate upwardly and from which 
the ammonia-gas to be reabsorbed by water 
they are discharged through the pipe b onto 
preparatory to its being conveyed to the heater 
the upper of the trays B", as previously de 
His carried on. The gas from the pipe fen 
scribed. The ammoniacal liquors in the coils 
ters and circulates through a coil 9, which ex 
H' are heated by means of hot or weak am 
tends downwardly and centrally through the 
moniacal liquor taken from near the bottom 
of the generator A, and which pass upwardly 
absorber to the lower end thereof. The end 
through a pipe H to the upper portion of the 
of the coil is then extended upwardly in the 
form of a stand-pipeg' through the coil g. 
heater H, and is there distributed over and 
The upper portion of the stand-pipeg' is per 
around the coils H'. After having done its 
forated, so that the gas will be delivered there 
work in the heater the weak, but still warm, 
liquor passes out through the pipeg to the 
from in fine jets. Weak-heated ammoniacal 
liquors are delivered from the heater H 
absorber, as previously described. The shell 
through a pipeg into the absorber G. The 
of the heater is cylindrical and made of 
end of the pipeg within the absorber is fur 
metal, and I have shown it as Supported di 
nished with a rose or button spray-head g, 
rectly over the generator A upon supports h. 
located directly above the coil g and stand 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
pipeg'. 
The liquor is thus delivered in a fine 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
spray downwardly through the central space 
1. In an apparatus for cooling, the combi 
inclosed by the coil g, and, meeting the fine 
nation, With a generator in which ammoniacal 
jets of gas coming from the perforated upper 
liquor is heated, of steam-coils in said gener 
portion of the stand-pipeg', readily absorb all 
ator for heating said liquor, an analyzer ar 
the gas, so that the liquor when it reaches the 
ranged above said generator and in commu 
bottom of the absorber is strong with ammo 
nication therewith, a rectifier arranged above 
said analyzer and in direct communication 
lia. 
I cause the water from the condenser-tank 
therewith, a communication between said rec 
C5 to flow through the absorber. The Water 
tifier and the analyzer by which waters of 
passes from the condenser-tank through a 
condensation from the rectifier are returned 
pipeg into a chamberg at the upper end of 
to the analyzer, a condenser separate from the 
the absorber, and thence downwardly through 
rectifier and to which ammonia-gas from the 
a series of coils of pipes arranged one in Ward 
rectifier passes and in which the gas is lique 
fied, a receiver into which the liquefied am 
of the other and all outside the coil 9, . I have 
shown four such coils of pipe, and they open 
monia, from the condenser is received, a cooler 
at their lower ends into a chamber g', from to which the liquefied ammonia, from the ee 
45 
3o 
9o 
95 
OC) 
IO 
ITS 
25 
A. 
428,133 
o 
 
ceiver passes to cool the brine or other liquid 
passing through the cooler, an absorber into 
which the gas from the cooler is received, a 
heater into which ammoniacal liquor from 
the generator is delivered, a communication 
between the heater and the absorber by which 
the ammoniacal liquor from the heater is de 
livered to the absorber, a pump receiving am 
moniacal liquor from the absorber and deliv 
ering the same to the heater, a communica 
tion between the heater and the analyzer, a 
pipe for conveying water from the condenser 
to the absorber, and a pipe for conveying the 
same water from the absorberto the rectifier, 
Substantially as specified. 
2. In an apparatus for cocling, the combi 
nation of an analyzer, a series of trays ar 
ranged in said analyzer, each of said trays be 
ing provided with a number of upwardly-ex 
tending nipples secured in suitable openings 
therein and provided circumferentially with 
perforations arranged at a distance above 
their lower ends, substantially as specified. 
3. In an apparatus for cooling, the combi 
nation of an absorber comprising a vertically 
extending cylindrical shell, a coil of pipe ar 
ranged centrally in said shell and through 
which liquefied ammonia will circulate, a 
stand-pipe communicating with said coil and 
extending upwardly through the same, said 
pipe being provided with perforations near 
its upper end and with a closed upper end, a 
perforated distributer for ammoniacalliquors 
located above said stand-pipe and said coil, 
and circulating-pipes for water arranged in 
said shell and surrounding the said coil, sub 
stantially as specified. 
HENRY J. W. S. COOKE, 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
GEO. BARRY. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423233.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. FAUST. 
No. 423,233, 
CALENDAR ATTACHMENT FOR PENCILS OR PENS, 
Patented Mar. 11 
1890, 
 
N. PETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN ARMSTRONG FAUST, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CALENDARATTAC HMENT FOR PENC|LS OR PENS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,233, dated March 11, 1890. 
?? 
65 
To all typh???, i? ??? concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN ARMSTRONG 
FAUST, of New York city, in the county of New 
York, and in the State of New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Calendar Attachments for Pencils, Pen 
Holders, &c.; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription thereof, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 shows a perspective view of my at 
tachment in place on a pencil; Fig. 2, a detail 
plan View of a portion of the attachment un 
bent or straightened out to show the arraige 
ment of the calendar thereon; Fig. 3, a view 
of a Section on line acac of Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 a. 
detailplan view of an unbentor straightened 
Outportion of the attachment with a modified 
arrangement of the calendar-markings. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved calendar attachment for pen-hold 
er's and pencils; and to this end my inven 
tion consists in the attachment arranged and 
constructed as hereinafter specified. 
Calendar attachments for pencils and pen 
holders have heretofore been made consisting 
of two or more pieces movable with reference 
to each other, in order to allow the attach 
ment to be adjusted or changed for each suc 
cessive month. Such attachments are, how 
ever, often complicated and liable to get out 
of order. They are also likely to get out of 
proper adjustment at any time by accidental 
or other movement of one part with reference 
to another, so that it is impossible for the user 
to be certain that the reading for any one 
month will be, or continue to be, correct, 
Where, for instance, as in the usual form of 
calendar attachment for pen-holders and pen 
cils, one part carries the numbers of the days 
of the month and another movable part car 
ries the names of the days of the week or the 
initials of such names, it is impossible for the 
user to know at any time that the attachment 
is properly adjusted for the month unless he 
remembers the day of the week that the 
month began on and ascertains that the name 
or initial of such day is opposite the number. 
one on the number-carrying part, With these 
objections to calendar attachments for pen 
cils and pen-holders, as heretofore made, in 
view, it has been the special purpose of my 
invention to provide a calendar attachment 55 
which shall not be liable to disarrangement 
or false adjustment and which will always be 
in condition to be read correctly for any 
month at once and without the necessity of 
change or adjustment of any parts. As made 
and used by me, my attachment is also inde 
pendent of any change in the length of the 
pen-holder or pencil with which it may be em 
ployed. 
The pencil can be used up as much or made 
as short as desired without interfering with 
or changing my attachment, 
In the drawings, A designates a pencil of 
any desired form and length, and B my cal 
endar attachment thereon. While I show the 
latter only as applied to a pencil, it will be 
understood that it is to be used in the same 
way on a pen-holder or combined pen and 
pencil case. It consists of a sleeve, prefer 
ably of sheet metal; but, if desired, of any 
other suitable material-such, for instance, 
as rubber, gutta - percha, papier - mach, or 
celluloid. Where it is made of sheet metal 
or other springy material, it is preferably 
in the form of a split tube adapted to em 
brace the pencil or pen-holder closely in the 
same manner as the eraser-holding tips now 
in use on pencils. In practice I form it of 
a sheet of metal or other Substance bent 
into tubular form with its edges close to 
gether. Before so bending it. I print, stamp, 
or otherwise mark on it the desired calendar. 
The arrangement of such calendar which I 
have found to be best suited for ready, quick, 
and certain correct reading when the attach 
ment is in place on a pencil or pen-holder is 
that shown in the drawings. In accordance 
with such arrangement, each month occupies 
a section or division extending circumferen 
tially around the attachment, 
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the surface of 
the attachmentis divided into seven divisions 
by the longitudinal division-lines. Ct. Ct. At 
the upper end, and, if desired, at the lower 
end also, of the attachment are placed the 
initials or names of the days in a Week ar 
ranged in proper consecutive order, each one 
75 
95 
IOO 
? ? 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
428,233 
? ? 
- 
25 
being at the end of one of the divisions made 
by lines C. Ct. Each circumferential month 
section or division is marked with either the 
name or the abbreviation of the name of the 
respective month. Within the section below 
each month name or abbreviation thereof are 
the numbers of days in the month, properly 
arranged in the columns or divisions headed, 
as described, by the initials or names of the 
days in the Week. Such numbers run suc 
cessively in circumferential lines with refer 
ence to the attachment, so that the successive 
numbers will be below the proper initials or 
names of the days of the week arranged 
around the upper end of the attachment, as 
described hereinbefore. In the longitudinal 
column or division at the head of which stands 
the name or initial of a day there will then 
appear in each month-section the numbers of 
the days of the month upon which such day 
Will come, 
The circumferential month sections or di 
visions are separated and defined from each 
other by the annular or circumferential 
spaces C. C., in which are marked the names 
of the months. 
In Fig. 4 I show a modification of the ar 
rangement of the calendar, by which I am 
enabled to make a shorter attachment than 
that shown in Fig. 1 contain a calendar for a 
whole year. 
Instead of dividing the surface of the at 
tachment into seven divisions by longitudi 
nal lines, as hereinbefore described, I make 
fourteen circumferential divisions of the at 
tachment periphery. The initials of the days 
of the week arranged at the upper ends of 
these divisions, so as to suffice for proper 
reading of all the months, continue in proper 
Successive order throughout two weeks, in 
stead of one. The numbers of the days of 
the month in each month section or division 
are correspondingly arranged in the fourteen 
columns below the proper day-initials. The 
month-divisions are separated from each other 
and designated by the proper month names or 
abbreviations thereof, as in the form of attach 
ment shown in Fig.1. By this modified arrange 
ment of the calendar I am enabled to make a 
considerable saving in the length of the at 
tachment, as less space along the attachment 
will be needed for the number of the days of 
each month, as the rows of such numbers ex 
tending circumferentially around the attach 
ment will obviously be less by two than in 
case of the other arrangement, 
The upper end of my attachment, made as 
described, preferably of metal or spring ima 
iterial, is used to receive and clasp the eraser 
?? B', consisting of a plug or block of rubber or 
other erasive substance. 
Mycalendar attachment, constructed in 
accordance with my invention, can be utilized 
also as a pencil or pen point protector. For 
such purpose it needs merely to be drawn off 
of the upper end of the pencil or holder, and, 
after being inverted, put upon the lower end 
thereof. When in place on the upper end of 
the pencil or holder, it can be slid or drawn 
up thereon and used as an adjustable exten 
sion thereof, as desired. 
As placed on a pencil, my calendar attach 
ment can be slid up as the pencil is worn Ol' 
cut away, so that it will always afford a long 
enough handle for convenience in Writingun 
till but a small portion of the pencil remains. 
My invention, as shown and described 
hereinbefore, is applicable to all kinds of pen 
cils, pen-holders, brush-handles, combined 
pencil and pen cases, and other articles With 
out any necessity of change in the pencil 
holder or article itself. It is cheap and sim 
ple, cannot get out of order, and gives at Once 
upon mere inspection and without any ad 
justment of parts or exercise of memory the 
information to be sought from a calendar. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. A calendar attachment for pen-holders, 
pencils, and other articles, consisting of a 
tubular piece or sleeve having a complete cal 
endar for a series of months immovably fixed 
upon it, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. A calendar attachment consisting of a 
split sleeve or tube of spring material with a 
complete calendar for a series of months im 
movably fixed upon it, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
3. A calendar attachment consisting of a 
sleeve or tubular piece having immovably 
fixed upon it a complete calendar for a series 
of months with each month-section of the 
sleeve-periphery rumining circumferentially 
around the sleeve, substantially as and for the 
purpose shown. 
4. A calendar attachment for pencils, pen 
holders, and other articles, consisting of a 
sleeve provided with the relatively immov 
able circumferentially - extending series of 
markings to indicate the days of the Week, 
and series of month-divisions with each of 
such divisions running around the sleeve and 
having the numbers of its days arranged in 
line with the proper day of the week mark 
ing, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
5. A calendar attachment consisting of a 
sleeve or tubular piece having its periphery 
divided into a series of circumferentially-ex 
tending month - divisions marked with the 
numbers of the days in the respective months 
and into a series of longitudinally-extending 
day - divisions designated, consecutively, by 
the names or initials of the successive days 
of the week immovably arranged with refer 
ence to markings of the month-divisions, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
6. A calendar attachment consisting of a 
sleeve having its periphery divided into a se 
ries of divisions by longitudinal lines and 
into a series of sections by circumferential 
lines and having each longitudinally-extend 
ing division designated by the name or initial 
45 
55 
35 
7? 
75 
95 
I OO 
IC 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
-. 
423,233 
8 
of a day of the week immovably fixed with have hereunto set my hand this 29th day of 
reference to the divisions and in each cir- June, A. D. 1889. 
cumferential section the numbers of the days 
of a month arranged in columns in the 
5 proper day-divisions, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
SAMUEL DONELSON, 
HENRY C. HAZARD. 
JOHN ARMSTRONG FAUST. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423333.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 423,333, 
7777. Z, 
P. MED ART, 
FRICTION CLUTCH 
Patented Mar, 11, 1890. 
 
(%za 24 Z29, 
16.724. 
als 
Egy 
N. PETERs, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
 
Azzazzazaz 
TZ222222 7zeez2//- 
2. 222.W6/ 
42%, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP MEDART, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HATF TO 
WILLIAM MEDART, OF SAME PLACE. 
FRCTION CLUTCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,333, dated March 11, 1890. 
Application filed August 5, 1889, 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILIP MEDART, of the 
city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Friction-Clutches, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments infriction-clutches, the construction 
being Such that the mechanism employed for 
shifting the movable member of the clutch 
(with the exception of the operating-lever) is 
carried by the clutch on the shaft, the result 
being a much more effective and an easier 
Operation of the parts, as well as less wear 
and tear on the parts. 
My invention consists in features of nov 
elty hereinafter fully described, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
Figure I is an elevation, part in section, 
illustrating my improved clutch. Fig. II is a 
Section taken on line II II, Fig. I. Fig. III is 
a detail view. 
1 represents the shaft; 2, the pulley. 
8 represents the fixed member of the clutch, 
keyed or otherwise secured to the shaft 1, 
and consisting, preferably, of the hub 4, the 
alms 5, and a rim 6. The pulley has a hub 
7 loosely mounted on the shaft 1 and con 
lected by arms 8 to the rim. 
9 represents a collar rigidly secured to the 
shaft 1 a short distance from the pulley and 
grOOved to receive a ring 10. 
11 represents bell-crank levers pivoted to 
the ring 10 at 12. The inner arms 13 of the 
levers are connected by links 14 to the hub 
of arms of the pulley, and the outer arms 15 
of the levers are connected at 16 to horns 17, 
projecting from the collar 18, loosely mounted 
On the shaft 1. The collar S is grooved to 
receive a ring 19, to which the operating-le 
Ver 20 is connected. 
The operation is as follows: When the parts 
are in the position shown in full lines in Fig. 
I, the clutch is disengaged, or is in itsinopera 
tive position. By moving the lever and shift 
ing the parts from the position shown in full 
lines in Fig. I to the position shown in dotted 
55 
Serial No. 319,709, (No model.) 
lines a flange 21 on the pulley which forms 5o 
the movable member of the clutch is brought 
into frictional contact with the rim 6 of the 
fixed member 3 of the clutch, and the pulley 
is thus connected to the shaft and the latter 
made to revolve with the pulley. In moving 
the lever as stated, the horns 17 force the 
outer ends of the bell-crank levers 15 toward 
the pulley. This forces the joints between 
the inner ends of the levers and the links 14 
in Ward, producing a toggle movement, which 
with great pressure forces the movable mem 
ber of the clutch or the pulley toward the 
parts are 
fixed member of the clutch. The 
so disposed that when they reach the posi 
tion shown in dotted lines, Fig. I, the joints 
(between the outer ends of the links 14 and 
the inner ends of the bell-crank levers) are 
inside of a line drawn from the pivots 12 of 
the levers to the pivots 14 of the inner ends 
of the links, and thus the clutch is made self 
locking, so that no pressure is brought to bear 
on the operating-lever when the clutch is en 
gaged, and likewise none on the collar 18 or 
its horns 17, the pressure being removed to 
the fixed collar 9, which takes all the strain 
when the clutch is at work, and from the fact 
that the collar 9 and the connecting partsbe 
tween the collar and the clutch revolve With 
the clutch and pulley, and from the further 
fact that there is no strain or pressure be 
tween the collar 18 and the operating-lever 
20, (one of which revolves and the other re 
mains still,) there is practically little or no 
wear to the operating parts of a clutch thus 
constructed. 
To afford an adjustment of the links asth 
bearing-surface between the fixed member and 
the loose member of the clutch Wears (so that 
a uniform pressure may be maintained when 
the parts are moved to working position) I 
connect the inner ends of the links 14 to the 
arms or hub of the pulley, as shown in Fig. 
III-that is, by means of screw-eyes 21", fit 
ting in the pulley or movable member of the 
clutch and connected to the links 14 by means 
of bolts 22. It will be understood that by re 
moving the bolts 22 and turning inward or 
outward on the screw-eyes the length of the 
75 
90 
95 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
428,833 
IO 
25 
links may be increased or diminished at will, connection between the collar and the tog 
and thus a perfect adjustment of the parts 
gles, substantially as and for the purpose set 
may be easily had for the purpose stated. 
forth. 
The links 14, acting in connection with the 
3. In a friction-clutch, the combination of 
inner arms of the bell-crank levers, form tog 
the fixed member, the movable member, a 
gles, and in the claims I have referred to 
ring, bell-crank level's pivoted to the ring, 
these parts as toggles. 
links connecting the inner ends of the bell 
crank levers to the movable member of the 
clutch and forming toggle-joints, and mova 
ble collar to which the operating-lever is con 
nected, and horns on the collar connected to 
the outer arms of the bell-crank levers, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a friction-clutch, the combination of 
a fixed member, a movable member, a ring, 
bell-crank levers pivoted to the ring, links 
pivoted to the inner ends of the bell-crank 
levers, adjustable screw-eyes connecting the 
inner ends of the links to the movable mem 
ber of the clutch, a collar, and horns on the 
collar connected to the outer ends of the bell 
crank levers, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a friction-clutch, the combination of 
a fixed member secured to a shaft, a movable 
member, a ring held from longitudinal move 
ment on the shaft, but allowed to turn there 
with, toggles connecting the ring to the mova 
ble member of the clutch, a sliding collar 
loosely mounted on the shaft, and connection 
between said collar and the toggles, whereby 
the latter are operated and moved beyond 
their centers, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. In a friction-clutch, the combination of 
a fixed member Secured to the shaft, a mova 
ble member, a ring mounted on the shaft, tog 
gles connecting the ring to the movable mem 
ber of the clutch, adjustable connection be 
tween the inner ends of the toggles and the 
movable member of the clutch, a movable 
collar provided with an operating-lever, and 
In presence of - 
E. S. KNIGHT, 
THOS. KNIGHT. 
PHILIP MEDART. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423433.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 423,433, 
G. J. LARSON. 
WAGON SKEIN. 
Patented Mar. 18, 1890. 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Wilgesses 
 
as SS 
S2. 
SN k 
XS 
SNSXS 
2 
5&S 
77-7- 
2Y& 7 
Z / C 
W. 
man m 
 
 
y 
& Y 2x2 
Peters Photo-ithographer, Washinstors D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE.- 
GEORGE JORGEN LARSON, OF CARPENTERVILLE, ILLINOIS. 
WAGON-S KEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,488, dated March 18, 1890. 
Application filed August 16, 1889, Serial No. 320,945, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE JORGEN LAR 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Carpenterville, in the county of Kane and 
State of Illinois, have invented a new and 
useful Wagon-Skein, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
wagon-skeins; and it consists in certain novel 
features, hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
alongitudinal vertical section of my improved 
device. Fig. 2 is a detail perspective view of 
the nut which is mounted on the outer end 
of the axle or skein. Figs. 3 and 4 are simi 
lar views of the inner ring. Fig. 5 is a simi 
lar view of the collar which is mounted on 
the axle at the inner end of the box or hub. 
Fig. 6 is a sectional view of a central parti 
tion-ring, which may be sometimes employed. 
Fig. 7 is a transverse section of Fig. 1 on the 
line acac, 
The axle or skein A is of the usual con 
struction, and is provided at its inner end 
with an annular shoulder B, which serves to 
prevent longitudinal movement of the anti 
friction rollers. The box or hub C is mounted 
over the axle or skein, and it is provided at 
its outer end with an integral inwardly-pro 
jecting ring D, and the said ring is provided 
on its outer side with an annular rib E and 
on its inner side with an annular groove F. 
The nut G is mounted on the end of the axle, 
and is provided with an annular enlargement 
H, having a circular groove I in itsinner face, 
which is adapted to engage the rib E of the 
ring D. This annular enlargement H is of 
the same diameter as the hub or box and fits 
Snugly against the end of the same, so that 
dirt and grit cannot have access to the interior 
of the device. Around the axle, between the 
same and the hub or box, I arrange a series of 
anti-friction rollers J, which are provided at 
their ends with the tapered knobs or points 
K. The knobs or points at the outer ends of 
the rollers engage the annular groove F in 
the ring D and the knobs or points at the 
inner ends of the rollers engage an annular 
groove L. in the inner face of a ring M. This 
ring M is mounted loosely on the axle and is 
externally threaded, so as to engage the in 
ternal threads N at the inner end of the box 
65 
and rotate therewith. The outer face of this 
ring is provided with an annular rib O, which 
loosely engages an annular groove P in the 
side of the collar Q, which fixedly is mounted 55 
on the axle, and is adapted to form a snug fit. 
around the same between the inner end of the 
hub or box and the shoulder B, so as to pre 
vent the access of dirt to the interior of the 
device. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that I have provided a wagon-skein in 
which the friction between the moving parts. 
will be reduced to a minimum, and the wheel 
thereby permitted to turn easily and noise 
lessly. The rollers will be held to their place 
by the rings D and M, and will be prevented 
from any endwise or longitudinal movement 
by the said rings, as the ring B is formed in 
tegral with the box, while the ring M is 
screwed into the same. When the ends of 
the rollers become worn by long usage, the 
wheel is removed from the axle, the collar Q 
being thereby left upon the enlarged shoul 
der B, and the ring M is screwed a little dis 
tance into the box C, whereby the ring M is 
brought nearer the ring D and their interior 
grooves pressed closer upon the points K of 
the rollers, thus effecting a tightening of the 
bearings for said rollers. The wheel is then 
replaced and the nut G screwed home, when 
the ribs E and O will enter the grooves F and 
P, and dirt will be excluded from the axle 
box. The ribs on the outer sides of the rings 
GandMinsure the proper fitting of the nut and 
the collar Q, so that the parts will be secured 
closely together and all dirt kept from the 
interior. I attach considerable importance 
to the specific shape of these ribs and grooves, 
because the dirt in entering the box would 
have to force or workitself around four right 
angular collars, whereasin constructions here 
tofore used these parts were not so closely 
matched, and did not therefore form so per 
fect a dust-guard. I prefer to use rollers ex 
tending the entire length of the axle; but it 
may be sometimes desired to use two sets of 
rollers, and when such arrangement is em 
ployed I provide the partition-ring shown in 
Fig. 6, having annular grooves in both its faces 
to receive the knobs on the adjacent ends 
of the rollers, as will be readily understood. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
90 
95 
ICO 
75 
IC) 
25 
35 
45 
 
2. 
428,488 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
In an axle-box, the combination, with the 
axle A, having a boss B at its inner end and 
a reduced threaded tip, the fixed ring Q, and 
the nut G, engaging the boss and tip, respect 
ively, and having annular grooves of rectan 
gular cross-section in their inwardly-facing 
edges, of the box C, provided with an inter 
nal thread at its inner end and With an in 
tegral inwardly-projecting flange D at its 
outer end, the exteriorly-threaded ring M, fit 
ting said threaded end, said flange and ring 
having ribs on their outwardly-facing edges 
fitting and moving in said rectangular grooves, 
and also having grooves on their inner faces, 
and rollers J, having conical trunnions seated 
in said inner grooves, all substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE JORGEN LARSON. 
Witnesses: 
- ANDREW J ENSEN, 
JOHN ERLANDSEN. 
w 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423533.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. H. SISUM. 
STOOK OAR 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 423,533, 
 
Patented Mar. l8, 1890. 
ON . 
kPETERS, Photo-uthographer. Wahrkton, oc. 
(No Model.) 
W. H. H. SISUM, 
ST00K CAR. 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 423,533, 
Patented Mar, 18, 1890, 
Z (22722 
? S N 
(2) N& N N 
2 % 
N 
 
'N, PETERS, photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. H. SISUM, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. V 
Stock-CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 423,583, dated March 18, 1890. 
Application filed August 6, 1888, Serial No. 282,095. (No model.) 
To all, ?ph???, i? ??? concern: 
Be it known that II, WILLIAM H. H. SISUM, 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Stock-Cars, of 
which the following is a specification. 
I will describe a stock-car embodying my 
improvement in detail, and then point out the 
novel features in claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal section of a stock-car embody 
ing my improvement. Fig. 2 is a plan or top 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a transverse sec 
tion thereof, taken on the plane of the line a 
ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is an end view of the car. 
Fig. 3 is drawn on a larger scale than the other 
figures. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
I have omitted to illustrate the trucks and 
rumming-gear of the car for the purpose of sav 
ing space, as the same do not form part of my 
w 
invention. 
A designates the floor of the car. 
C. designates body-posts extending upwardly 
from the sill of the car. 
B designates a roof for the car, supported 
upon the body-posts a. 
B' designates a second or inner roof for the 
car, Supported upon carlings b, extending 
transversely of the car. 
C designates feed boxes or receptacles, in 
which hay or other suitable feed is to be stored 
during transportation. These feed-boxes are 
provided with doors D upon the roof of the 
car, which may be raised, as desired, to place 
hay or other suitable feed within the recepta 
Cles. 
E designates the mangers. These mangers 
are formed, as shown, of slats or rods havin 
their upper ends inserted in longitudinally 
extending beams e and their lower ends ex 
tending into boards or planks e', which form 
the bottoms of the mangers. When it is de 
sired to feed the stock, the hay or other feed 
is forced down from the feed-boxes C between 
the roofs BB' and into the mangers. It will 
be observed that there is a separate manger 
between each of the body-posts a. It will be 
seen likewise that the passages leading from 
the feed-boxes to the mangers extend later 
ally from the sides of the feed-boxes at their 
? ? 
I5 
2? 
25 
30 
35 
4O 
45 
lower portions, and that the walls of the pas 
sages are formed of the double roof at the 
sides of the car. The passages are separated 
by means of partitions b, which may be of 
wood. These partitions facilitate the pas 
sage of the feed to each of the mangers. 
D' designates watering-troughs. These Wa 
tering - troughs are arranged between the 
body-posts a, and within boxes d'. The wa 
tering-troughs are stationary. They are sup 
plied with water from supply-pipes d, extend 
ing longitudinally of the car, which supply 
pipes are provided with branches d, extend 
ing upwardly and into the watering-troughs. 
The main supply-pipes receive water from a 
tank or tanks D, located at the ends of the 
?8?. 
When it is desired to water the stock, a stop 
cock in the main supply-pipe is turned to ad 
mit of the passage of water from the tanks to . 
the watering-troughs. When the cattle have 
done drinking and the supply from the tanks 
is cut off, the troughs may be drained by 
means of a drip-cock or drip-cocks f, located 
at the ends of the car. It is found that the 
ordinary movement of the car in traveling is 
sufficient to cause the water to entirely drain 
from the supply-pipes through the drip-cock. 
I purpose when the watering-troughs are 
not in use to close the openings to the same, 
so that they cannot be injured by stock in 
transit. For this purpose I provide shutters 
F. In Fig. 3 I have shown one of the shut 
ters drawn in such position as to close the 
opening to the trough and the other shutter 
raised so as to leave the trough open. It is 
to be understood, however, that the shutters . 
are to be raised and lowered in unison. For 
this purpose I provide windlasses G. These 
windlasses, are mounted upon a shaft g, ex 
tending lehgthwise of the car. This shaft 
may be rotated, so as to wind upon the wind 
lasses, cords, or chains g', extending from the 
shutters F and to and about the windlasses. 
The shaft may be so rotated by means of a 
crank applied to a squared end of the shaft 
upon the outside of the car. Preferably I 
would employ a ratchet g and pawl glupon 
the outside of the car to prevent the dropping 
down of the shutters accidentally after they 
have once been raised. It will be observed 
that when the shutters are drawn upward to 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
428,533 
. 
. 
. 
2 
disclose the watering-troughs the feed racks 
or mangers are closed thereby, which is ad 
visable for the reason that the live stock is 
compelled to discontinue eating during wa 
tering-time. The shutters F are provided at 
the bottom with an inwardly-turned flange 
Standing at an angle to the shutters. These 
flanges when the shutters are down project 
over the edge and slightly into the troughs, 
thus serving as a lock or stay to prevent the 
Outward movement of the shutters. 
In order to thoroughly ventilate the car, I 
cause the heated or foul air from the interior 
to pass outwardly from the feed-boxes C. 
It. 
will be seen that these feed-boxes are pro 
vided upon their sides with screens H. Air 
entering the car, as well as the air from in the 
car, can pass upwardly through the feed 
racks E between the roofs BB, and thus into 
the feed-boxes C and out at the screens H. It 
can also ascend vertically through a passage 
way H between the feed-boxes C, thence into 
the feed-boxes, and out through the screens 
H. It will therefore be seen that a very com 
plete ventilation of the car is secured. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a stock-car, the combination, with wa 
tering-troughs, of vertically-movable shutters 
for controlling admission to said troughs and 
having stays at the bottom for engaging the 
troughs, substantially as specified. 
2. In a stock-car, the combination, with 
body-posts for supporting the roof of the car, 
of fixed watering-troughs between said body. 
posts and vertically-movableshutters for con 
trolling admission to said watering-troughs, 
45 
55 
said shutters having stays at the bottom for 
engaging the troughs, substantially as speci 
fied. 
3. In a stock - car, the combination, With 
feed-bins upon the roof of the car, of station 
ary or fixed feed-racks, passages leading from 
the feed-bins to said feed-racks, watering 
troughs below the feed-racks, and shutters 
for alternately closing the racks and troughs, 
substantially as specified. 
4. In a stock-car, the stationary feed racks 
or mangers, the fixed watering-troughs below 
said mangers, and shutters operated to alter 
nately close the feed-racks and the troughs, 
substantially as specified. 
5. A stock-car provided with two roofs, feed 
racks arranged between body-posts in the car, 
partitions between the roofs, affording sep 
arate passages for feed to each of the feed 
racks, watering-troughs adjacent to the feed 
racks, and shutters alternately closing the 
feed-racks and troughs, substantially as speci 
| fied. 
6. In a stock-car, the combination, with the 
mangers, of feed-boxes arranged on the top of 
the car and having a passage-way between 
them opening into the boxes, screens at the 
outer sides of said boxes, and lateral passages 
extending from the feed-boxes, the said pas 
sages being formed by partitions and by 
walls, which also form a double roof for the 
car at the outer sides of the feed-boxes, sub 
stantially as specified. 
. 
* 
- 
. 
. 
- WM. H. H. SIISUM. 
. 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN BRICE, 
JAMES D. GRISWOLD. 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423633.txt	S. J. SAXON & W. H. JAMES. 
FENCE POST, 
Patented Mar. 18, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 423,633 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
52-624 
t. es-o? 
INyENTOR: 
as W4ayer-1 
By 
ATTORNEYS. 
N. Peters, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, 
C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SILAS J. SAXON AND WILLIAM H. JAMES, OF COLFAX, WASHINGTON. - 
FENCE-Post. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,633, dated March 18, 1890. 
Application filed July 15, 1889, Serial No,317,529, (No model.) 
2. 
To all whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that we, SILAS J. SAXON and 
WILLIAM H. JAMES, both of Colfax, in the 
county of Whitman and Territory of Wash 
ington, have invented a new and Improved 
Fence-Post, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the annexed 
drawings, forming a part thereof, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of our improved 
fence-post. Fig. 2 is a vertical transverse 
Section. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section taken 
on line at a in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a horizontal 
section taken on line y y in Fig. 2, and Fig. 5 
is a horizontal section taken on line 2 a in 
Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in all the views. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
fence-post formed partly of iron and partly 
of Wood, and constructed so that no water can 
settle in any portion of the post, so as to freeze 
or cause the decay of the wood or the corro 
sion of the iron. 
Our invention consists in an iron foot-piece 
provided with a tubular extension securely 
fastened in the iron foot-piece, preferably by 
casting the iron around and within the tube, 
and in the combination, with the iron foot 
piece provided with the tubular extension, of 
a Wooden part driven down upon the tubular 
extension, all as hereinafter fully described, 
and pointed out in the claim. 
The foot-piece A of the post is preferably 
made of cast-iron, the lower part being cross 
shaped, as shown in Fig. 5, while the upper 
portion is in the same form with a cylindrical 
hub B. The said hub is cast within and 
O 
25 
35 
around a tube C, which projects above the 
upper end of the foot-piece, so as to receive 
the wooden portion D. Into the lower end of 40 
the Wooden portion D is driven a ferrule or 
ring E, and the wooden part D is driven onto 
the tubular extension C, the ferrule or ring 
and the tubular extension being concentric. 
The ferrule E is designed to prevent the post 45 
from splitting and for compressing the Wood, 
so as to prevent the absorption of moisture. 
The foot-piece A is set in the ground in the 
same manner as an ordinary post, with its 
upper end even with the top of the ground 5o 
or a short distance above the ground-level. 
The wooden part D of the postis driven down 
upon the tube C. 
It is obvious that the tube C may beformed 
integrally with the foot-piece A. Therefore we 55 
do not confine ourselves to the exact con 
struction herein described. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
An improved fence-post, consisting of a 
metallic foot-piece A, provided with the hub 
B, having the tubular extension C firmly se 
cured thereto and projecting from its upper 
end, and the wooden upper portion D, driven 
onto the tubular extension, the post being 
firmly and permanently secured to the foot, 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
Y 
- 
SILAS J. SAXON. 
WILLIAM. H. JAMES, 
Witnesses: 
J. W. HIGGINS, 
W. B. RENSHAW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423734.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 423,734, 
Patented Mar, 18, 1890. 
C. L., COFFIN 
METHOD OF WELDING METALS BY ELECTRICITY, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES L. COFFIN, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
METHOD OF WELDING METALS BY ELECTRICTY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 423,734, dated March 18, 1890. 
Application filed November 19, 1889, Serial No. 330,828, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES L. CoFFIN, of 
Detroit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented a new and usefullm 
provement in the Method of Welding Metals 
Electrically, of which the following is a speci 
cation. 
My invention consists of a process of weld 
ing metals electrically, hereinafter fully de 
Scribed and claimed. 
The drawings illustrate mechanism which 
may be used to practice my invention, Fig 
ures 1 and 2 being perspective views, Fig. 3 
an elevation of a portion of the mechanism, 
and Fig. 4 a small top plan view of a portion 
of the conductor-support. 
The principle of my invention consists in 
heating the edge of an article to be welded 
by passing a heating-current of electricity 
through the articles near the edge to be heated. 
N represents a table, usually of some insu 
lating material, as Wood. 
U and Srepresent clamps supported on said 
table. 
In the mechanism shown in Fig, 1 the ar 
ticle to be welded is connected with one pole 
of a generator, while with the mechanism 
shown in Fig. 2 it is not so connected, 
Referring to Fig. 1, A and B are two metal 
plates to be welded, the plate A being con 
nected with the conductor B' and binding 
post G with one pole of a generator, while the 
plate B is connected by binding-post G' and 
conductor A" with the other pole of a gen 
erator. 
C represents a block provided with a han 
dle D and resting on two rollers I and J, pref 
erably of insulating material, which run on 
the articles on a metal plate A and B. (Shown 
in the drawings.) If the wheels IJ are not 
of insulating material, they should be in some 
Way insulated from block C. 
E and F represent two conductors, (carbon, 
for instance,) which pass through block C, be 
ing insulated therefrom by the insulatingma 
terial O, and rest upon the plates A and B, 
h and i represent electrical conductors, 
which connect the carbons E and F with the 
poles of a generator of electricity, 
The conductors B and i must be of oppo 
site polarity, and the conductors A" and h, 
must be of opposite polarity; but with this 
limitation it is immaterial how said four Con 
ductors are connected with the poles of the 
generator or generators which supply the cur 
rent. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
Assuming conductol's A B to be connected 
with the positive pole of a generator, and the 
conductors h, and to be connected with the 
negative pole, the current flowing in through 
conductor A" will traverse binding-post G', 
plate B, and conductors E and h, thus heating 
the edge of plate Bat its point of contact with 
conductor E. The current entering through 
B' will traverse plate A and conductor F and 
i, thus heating the edge of plate A at its 
point of contact with conductor F. By means 
of the traveling block C the conductors E and 
F may be moved along the plates B and A to 
heat the whole edge of each plate, and When 
said edges are brought to a welding heat the 
weld is formed by forcing the plates A and B 
together, 
As shown in Fig. 2, the articles A and B to 
be welded are not directly connected with the 
generator; but instead of this the conductor 
B' is connected with the conductor q similarly 
to and opposite conductor F, and the con 
ductor A' is connected with a conductor 2) 
similar to and opposite conductor E, the two 
pairs of conductor's Fq and Epbeing brought 
into contact with the point of contact with 
the conductors as above described. 
For the purpose of readily bringing the Con 
ductors in contact with the articles to be Weld 
ed, any suitable mechanism may be followed. 
That which I have illustrated for the pur 
pose of complying with the rules of the Pat 
ent Office is a standardi, supported on and 
rising from the table N and having a dove 
tailed groove in its forward side. 
if and g represent two blocks the ends of 
which are fitted to engage with the dovetailed 
groove in standard j, and which may be 
brought together or moved apart by the right 
and left hand screw-threaded shaft IX, tapped 
through both of said blocks. The conductors 
E and F pass through and are carried by the 
block g, all of said conductors being insulated 
from the block which carries them by a ring 
of insulating material O, as shown in Fig. 4. 
It is evident that by turning the screw-shaft 
K the four conductors E, F, p, and q can be 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
EO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
423,784 
brought into or turned out of contact with 
the articles A and B. 
For pressing A and B together to form the 
Weld, any suitable mechanism may be used; 
but that which I have illustrated is as fol 
lows: The lower part of clamp Shas a grooved 
extension Q, terminating in an upright arm. 
The upper part of said clamp S, (marked T.) 
is adapted to slide in the groove in the exten 
sion Q. P represents a screw-shaft swiveled 
in the upright arm R and tapped into the 
movable part T of clamp S. O represents a 
Crank by which screw-shaft P can be turned. 
Rotating said screw-shaft P moves clamp T 
longitudinally, whereby the article B may be 
pressed against or withdrawn from the ar 
ticle A. To permit either A or B to slide 
freely between the conductors, the arrange 
o 
ment of Fig. 3 may be used, in which the con 
ductors E F p q terminate in rollers, which 
permit either A or B to slide backward or for 
ward while in contact with said conductors. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The herein-described process of Welding 
metals electrically, consisting in separately 
heating the edge of each article to be welded 
by passing a heating-current through said ar 
ticle in proximity to the edge to be welded 
and forming the Weld by pressing the heated 3o 
edges together. 
CHARLES I, COFFIN. 
Witnesses: 
CYRUS E. LOTHROP, 
GERTRUDE ANDERSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423834.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. TAYLOR, 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
No. 423,834, 
Patented Mar. 18, 1890, 
. 
22 
WS S SNS N N 
: 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
4 -6.4% 
6, as 26-cu- 
46.5ayer?, 
ATORNEY, 
 
 
y 
Y 
N.ETERS, Photo-Lithographer, Washington, d, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. TAYLOR, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
STEAM - ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 423,834, dated March 18, 1890. 
Application filed August 21 l889, Serial No, 321447, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES H. TAYLOR, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Steam-Engines, whichim 
provement is fully set forth in the following 
specification and accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to steam-engines; and 
it consists in the employment of two pistons 
simultaneously operating in a single cylin 
der, as will be more fully hereinafter set 
forth and claimed. 
Figure 1 represents a sectional view of a 
cylinder and pistons embodying my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 represents the device as applied 
to drive-wheels of a locomotive - engine or 
analogous machine. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the two figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
cylinder having two independent steam-chests 
arranged upon opposite sides of said cylin 
der and adjacent to the ends thereof, and 
having a slide-valve B in each, and suitable 
mechanism for operating the same. Two 
pairs of ports C and D are formed in the 
Cylinder in connection with one of the steam 
chests, and the other pair with the chest op 
posite, so that the exhaust-ports D are diago 
nally opposed to each other and adjacent to 
the ends of said cylinder, and the ingress-ports 
C centrally located on opposite sides of the 
cylinder. The portion of the cylinder A op 
posite each of the ports D is closed to 
thereby permit an exhaust to take place at 
opposite and diagonal portions of the cylin 
der, as stated. This arrangement provides 
for an entrance and exhaust from the cylin 
der in two directions, and by means of the 
live steam entering the cylinder from oppo 
site sides the impact thereof is more uni 
formly distributed against the pistons and 
with greater pressure than would be attain 
able from ingress of the said live steam from 
one side only, as in the latter instance a por 
tion of the force or power of said steam would 
be spent before covering the surfaces of the 
pistons. 
GG represent inlet - pipes opening into 
steam-chests R. 
The steam-chests B have means of supply 
and exhaust, rendering each complete with 
the two functions which are necessary, in 
view of the construction of the cylinder, and 
which is advantageous in a uniformity of im 
pact of the steam against the pistons, as set 
forth. 
Within the cylinder are mounted two pis 
tons E, having rods F attached to the outer 
sides of said pistons, and move through oppo 
site ends of the cylinder, and are adapted to 
be connected to suitable driving mechanism 
of a stationary locomotive steam-engine. The 
pistons E have an equal stroke and travel, 
preferably in the same parallel path in oppo 
site directions, though, if desired, the path of 
travel of said pistons may be arranged at an 
angle. The stroke of the pistons E is regular, 
and they start from and return to the center 
at the same time. 
The steam entering through ports C im 
pacts against the pistons simultaneously with 
equal pressure and forces the same outward 
or toward the end of the cylinder. The slide 
valves B are so connected with the piston 
operating mechanism as to close ports C and 
open ports D at or near the end of the outer 
stroke, and the steam confined between the 
pistons is exhausted through ports C and 
ports H, the live steam entering ports D and 
impacting against the outer surfaces of the 
pistons E to cause a return-stroke thereof, 
and is exhausted on the outer stroke of Said 
pistons through ports D, as will be readily 
understood. 
The advantage gained in the use of my im 
proved device consists in the utilization of a 
given pressure to operate two pistons with 
equal power without increasing said pressure. 
My improved construction is adapted for 
use with different classes of steam mech 
anisms, but is especially adapted for Service 
with a locomotive-engine. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In a steam-engine, the combination of a 
cylinder A, having central ports C in align 
ment with each other and ports D on oppo 
site sides of the cylinder in a diagonal posi 
tion, the portion of said cylinder directly op 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
- 3r": ' 
... 
', re. . 
. 
 
2 
428,834 
posite said ports D being closed, the pistons A, completing the individuality of supply 
E in said cylinder and having their rods F and exhaust of each chest, and the links con- ?o 
extending through opposite ends of the cylin- nected to the stems of said slide-valves, Sub 
der, chests B', arranged diagonally opposite to stantially as described. 
each other over the ports D and C adjacent 
the ends of the cylinder, slide-valves in said 
chests, the said ports C and D, together with 
an exhaust-port II, all formed in the cylinder 
CHAS. S. HYER, 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIA). 
Witnesses: 
JAMES II. TAYLOR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US423934.txt	(No Model.) 
H. G. LATHROP. 
TICKET HOLDER, 
No. 423,934, 
Patented Mar, 25, 1890. 
 
 
5 
Z 
- Z2 as 
Y 
2-a2tellesle 
SS 
(Y 
G. 
2. 
2. 
Z72/e72Zo?' ' . 
Zet r 6 Zazzozo. 
N, PETERs, Photo-uthor:phir, Washington, d. c. 
H 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY G. LATHROP, OF ST. JOHNSVILLE, NEW YORK. 
TCKET HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,934, dated March 25, 1890. 
Application filed October 22, 1889, Serial No, 327,80l., (No model.) 
55 
75 
a chamber or deeper depression C, in which 
are located the coils D of the springs E, said 
springs being each formed of a single piece 
of wire with the ends coiled around the rod 
B in the chambers C, and the ends extended 
and having a bearing on the base, as shown; 
or each side spring may be formed of tWO 
parts with one end of each coiled around the 
rod within the said depressions or chambers 
C, and the ends bearing on the base and the 
other ends extending at right angles to the 
length of the arms or wires and secured in 
the cross-rod F, as shown at the right of Fig. 
1. In case the spring is formed of a single 
piece of wire the cross-rod is of course an 
integral piece thereof and is passed through 
the bar G before the ends of the wire are 
coiled around the rod B, as will be readily 
understood. The base is formed at one side 
opposite the cross-rods with rounded depres 
sions or finger-places G', to afford provision 
for the ready catching hold of the rod to lift 
the spring when it is desired to release the 
ticket. 
H are spurs in the base, with their sharp 
ened ends protruding above the upper face 
thereof in close proximity to the cross-rods F 
and G, and serve to pierce the ticket and 
afford a better hold or to hold a ticket or 
check that is too short to be firmly held by 
the cross-rods carried by the springs. 
J may sometimes dispense with the spring 
at one side and employ staples or loops I, as 
indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 1; but I pre 
fer the spring shown. 
The method of using my improved device 
will be readily understood, and a description 
thereof is not deemed necessary. 
Instead of having the spurs as shown in Fig. 
1, I may sometimes arrange them as shown by 
dotted lines in Fig. 2, so that as the cross-rods 
descend the spurs will enter holes in the under 
side of said rods, as shown in said Fig. 2. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY G. LATHROP, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at St. 
Johnsville, in the county of Montgomery and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Ticket-Holders; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in ticket-holders de 
signed to be attached to the back of a seat or 
other suitable place in railway-cars--or, for 
instance, in theaters-for holding tickets or 
checks; and it has for its object, among 
others, to provide a simple and cheap device 
of this character, which can be readily ap 
plied, and which, when in use, will hold tick 
ets of Varying sizes and thickness. 
The novelty resides in the peculiarities of 
construction and the combinations, arrange 
ment, and adaptation of parts, all as more 
fully hereinafter described, shown in the 
drawings, and then particularly pointed out 
in the appended claims. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my im 
proved ticket-holder, with a portion broken 
away, showing a ticket held thereby. Fig. 2 
is a vertical longitudinal section through the 
Sale, 
Referring to the details of the drawings by 
letter, A designates a suitable base of any 
Suitable material, preferably, however, of 
Wood of a kind to match the article to which 
it is to be applied. This base may be made 
as ornamental as desired, and is provided 
With a plurality of holes a for the passage of 
the screws or other fastenings, by which it is 
What I claim as new is 
1. An improved ticket-holder consisting of 
Secured in position upon the back of a seat 
a base having near each end a depression 
in a railway-car or other place where it is de 
extending transversely of the base and at 
sired to use it. Transversely across this base 
each end of said depressions terminating in a 
near each end is a rod B, of wood or metal, 
deeper depression or chamber C, a 1'od seated 
seated in a depression therefor in the base 
and held therein by means of staples b. At in each of said depressions, springs having 
each end of this depression there is formed their ends coiled around said rod in the de 
go 
95 
TOC) 
O 
2O. 
25 
35 
45 
 
- were: 
 
2 
423,934 
5 
I5 
2. The combination, with the base having 
pressions C, with one of each of their ends ing on the top of the base, and a transverse 
bearing on the base, and a transverse rod F, rod carried by the opposite extremities of 
carried by the opposite free ends of the spring, said wires, substantially as and for the pur 
Substantially as and for the purpose specified. pose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
depressions G and near each end a trans- hereunto subscribed my name in the pres 
Verse depression with enlarged chambers at ence of two witnesses. 
the ends thereof, of spring-wires coiled around 
a rod seated in the end depressions with the 
Io coils seated in the said chambers and the 
One of each of the free ends of the wire bear- 
HENRY G. LATHROP, 
Witnesses: 
M. WALRACK, Jr., 
D. WOSLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424034.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 424,034, 
G. SUTTON. 
TID FOR JUGS, 
Patented Mar, 25, 1890. 
 
Avawevers 
N. Peters. Photo-lithographer Washington, 
C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE SUTTON, OF LANCASTER, ENGLAND. 
LiD FOR JUGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,084, dated March 25, 1890. 
Application filed July 17, 1889, Serial No. 317,794, (No model.) Patented in England April 14, 1888, No. 5,579. 
the center of which is the axis of the lid. By 
thus shaping the strainer it will be in close 
contact with the jug at any angle of the lat 
ter-for instance, as shown in Fig.2 so that 
no space will be left between the said strainer 
and the jug, whereby any liquid poured out 
of the jug will have to pass through the 
strainer. 
g is a lug, which may be formed upon the 
strainer to prevent the strainer from moving 
so far as to leave an open space between the 
edge of the latter and the jug. 
Although I have described my improve 
ments as applied to balanced lids, I wish it 
understood that they are also applicable to 
lids which are hinged to their respective Ves 
sels. In this case the vertical curve of the 
strainer corresponds to the arc of a circle hav 
ing its center at the hinge-joint. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention 
and in what manner the same is to be pet 
formed, I declare that what I claim is . . 
1. A jug or other vessel having a SWinging 
lid or cover provided with a balanced strainer 
attached thereto projecting downward there 
from, such strainer, when the jug or vessel is 
tipped or the lid or cover opened, serving to 
cover the space between the cover and the 
discharging-mouth of the vessel, substantially 
as described. 
2. A jug or other vessel having a swinging 
lid or cover provided with a strainer, and also 
with a counterweight to render the cover Self 
balancing, the strainer projecting downward 
and having the shape substantially as and 
for the purposes described. 
3. A jug or vessel having a coverb, and pins 
or trunnions serving as supports for said cover, 
combined with a strainer e, secured under its 
front side and shaped and arched as set forth, 
and with a counter-weight fat its rear side, 
the whole being and operating substantially 
. 
as set forth. 
- - 
GEORGE SUTTON. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES WATSON, 
SARAH TAYLOR. 
55 
7 O 
75 
92 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE SUTTON, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing at 
Lancaster, England, have invented new and 
useful Improvements relating to Lids or Cov 
ers for Jugs and other Vessels, (patented in 
Great Britain by Letters Patent dated April 
14, 1888, No. 5,579.) of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to lids or covers for 
jugs and other vessels, and especially to that 
class of Such lids or covers which are carried 
upon trunnions and which are balanced so as 
to remain in a horizontal position, and thus 
automatically open when the jug or the like 
is tipped. 
According to my said invention the front 
part of the lid in proximity to the portion of 
the same nearest to the lip or spout of the 
jug to which it is applied is provided with a 
strainer of fine gauze, the said strainer being 
of sufficient depth to allow the contents of the 
vessel to pass through it at any angle of the 
said vessel. 
My improved strainer is especially applica 
ble to vessels for containing coffee and other 
liquids which it is desirable to pass through a 
Strainer. 
To enable my invention to be clearly un 
derstood, I will describe how it may be carried 
into practice by reference to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of a jug pro 
vided with my improvements and in a verti 
cal position, and Fig. 2 is a similar view of the 
jug in an inclined position. 
a is the body of the jug, and b is the lid or 
cover, which, as shown, is mounted upon pins 
or trunnions c, carried in notches d. 
'e is the strainer, which is attached to the 
under side of the lid, and f is a counter 
weight for maintaining the said lid in a hori 
Zontal position, notwithstanding the inclina 
tion of the jug. The straineris so shaped in 
horizontal section as to correspond with the 
internal configuration of the adjacent part of 
the jug to which it is applied, and in vertical 
section to correspond with the arc of a circle 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424134.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. SANFORD, 
GATE, 
No. 424,134, 
Patented Mar. 25, 1890. 
ease IIHFIFIB 
22 
 
2 SNS Zs 
als 
7. 
 
  
 
28)evossos; 
Az44-Y--> 
73 
 
  
 
l Sir 
HIN s 
I 
 
3v-uovoz 
eye WS,a yova, 
rt. PETERs, Photo-ithographer, Washington, c.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE WASHINGTON SANFORD, OF MOUNTAIN HOME, ARKANSAS. 
GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,184, dated March 25, 1890. 
Application filed October 29, 1889, Serial No, 328,537, (No model.) 
55 
75 
of the latch there depends an operating-cord 
To all whom it may concern. 
17 within easy grasp of a person in a vehicle 
Be it known that I, GEORGE WASHINGTON 
or on horseback, said cords passing over pull 
SANFORD, a citizen of the United States, re 
ley's 20, provided at the ends of supporting 
siding at Mountain Home, in the county of 
arms 21, projecting from posts 22, located 
Baxter and State of Arkansas, have invented 
at each side of the hinge-post. 
a new and useful Gate, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Secured at the center of the bar 2, and ex 
This invention has relation to swinging tending at each side thereof, is a locking-bar 
gates, and among the objects in view, are to 18, which is arranged in the path of the double 
provide mechanism for opening the gate from locking-latch and terminates in inwardly-in 
either side while upon horseback or in a ve- clined shoulders 19, adapted to engage the 
hicle and locking said gate in its open posi-locking-shoulders of the latch. The double 
tion and against closing while passing there- latch 15 is pivoted at its center, so that it is 
through. 
balanced, and therefore after one of its latch 
With these general objects in view the in- ends rides up and over the inclined shoulder 
Vention consists in certain features of con- 19 said double latch resumes a horizontal po 
struction hereinafter specified, and particu- sition, and consequently an engagement is 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
effected, which remains unbroken until the 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a opposite end of the double latch is drawn 
perspective of a gate constructed in accord- downward or tilted in the act of closing the 
ance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan. gate. 
The gate being closed and latched, it will 
Fig. 3 is a transverse section, the gate being 
be apparent that by drawing upon either of 
Open. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like the operating-cords the toggle-lever and lock 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
ing-latch will be drawn in that direction, and 
11 represent, the opposite gate-posts, the in either direction the levers will serve to os 
two being connected at their upper ends by cillate the oscillating lever, and thus operate 
a transverse bar 2, the ends of which project the crank to open the gate. As the gate 
beyond their respective posts. 
opens, the shoulder of the latch rides up and 
3 represents the gate, which is of ordinary engages the locking-shoulder of the locking 
construction, and the hinge-post 4 of the same bar, and the gate is maintained in the open 
is stepped in a bearing 5 at its lower end, and position while a team passes therethrough. 
at its upper end passes through an oblong After having passed through the gate it sim 
opening 6, formed in the transverse bar 2, and ply remains to draw upon the opposite cord, 
from it, above the bar, there extends a crank 7. which disengages the latch and returns the 
bar 2, there is pivoted by means of a bolt 8 an 
When the crank is partially revolved by 
oscillating lever 9, one end of which, by a link the levers described, it not only acts to re 
10, is pivotally connected with the crank-arm 7. volve the gate-post 4, but, by reason of the 
11 represents a pair of toggle-levers pivoted elongated opening 6, (see dotted lines, Fig. 2.) 
at their adjacent ends, as at 12, the outer end said post is also tilted to the rear or toward 
of one lever being pivotally connected at 13 the post 1, thus elevating the front end of the 
to the remaining end of the oscillating lever, gate, and consequently the latch 20 pivotally 
and the outer end of the opposite toggle-lever mounted thereon, and disconnects or raises 
being pivoted at 14 to the opposite end of the the locking end of the latch from the catch 21. 
cross-bar 2. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
provided at its ends with locking-shoulders 
1. The combination, with the opposite posts 
16, said latch being pivotally connected to the and the connecting cross-bar, of a gate piv 
joint between the toggle-levers and project-oted between the posts and having one of its 
ing at each side of the bar 2. From each end end bars passed through a slot in the cross 
At the pivoted side of the gate, upon the parts to their normal positions. 
15 represents a loosely-pivoted double latch I claim is 
95 
IOO 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
424,134 
restriar''{ps. 
&F 
- 
bar and provided with a crank, an oscillating 
lever 9, mounted upon the cross-bar at one 
end the same, a link 10, pivotally connecting 
the crank-arm with one end of the oscillating 
lever, a pair of toggle-levers 11, pivoted to 
gether at their adjacent ends and pivoted at 
one end to the other end of the oscillating le 
wer and at the opposite end to the other end 
of the cross-bar 2, a double locking-latch 15, 
loosely mounted on the joint of the toggle 
levers, operating-cords depending therefrom, 
and a locking-bar 18, mounted on the bar 2 
and provided with locking-shoulders arranged 
in the path of those of the latch, substantially 
as specified. 
2. The combination, with a gate-post piv 
oted in bearings, of toggle-levers 11, pivoted 
at their ends to each other above the gate, 
mechanism connecting one of said levers with 
the gate-post, whereby by throwing the levers 
out of line with each other the gate-post is 
moved so as to unlatch the gate and then ro 
tated to Swing the gate, a double locking-latch 
15, mounted on the levers and terminating in 
locking-shoulders, a locking-bar 18, mounted 
under the latch and terminating in locking 
shoulders adapted to be engaged by those of 
the latch, and means for oscillating the tog 
gle-levers, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with the posts 1 and 
the connecting-bar 2, having the elongated 
opening 6 near one end thereof, of the gate 
post 4, having the gate 3 and latch 20, the 
catch 21, the latter located upon the post 1, 
the crank 7, mounted on the ends of the post 
4, the lever 9 and link 10, the latter pivotally 
mounted on the cross-bar, and the opposite 
toggle-levers 11, having their opposite ends 
pivoted to the cross-bar and lever 9, respect 
ively, and their inner ends pivotally connected 
to each other, and means for operating the 
levers, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
35 
GEORGE WASIIINGTON SANFOR), 
Witnesses: 
J. A. CARTER, 
F. M. SIMS. 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424234.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 424,234, 
J. P. THOMAS, 
GRATE, 
Patented Mar, 25, 1890. 
Fig. 1 
 
Witnes GE CE 
7/644-6 . Ys f- 
 
224. 4: Byflections 
O/1 Attu 
-h i John F. Thomas 
N, Peters, Photo-lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN P. THOMAS, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
GRATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,234, dated March 25, 1890, 
Application filed September 23, 1889, Serial No, 324,767, (No model.) 
- 
O 
To all whom it may concerns 
Be it known that I, JOHN PETER THOMAS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at De 
troit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Grates, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
improvements in grates; and the invention 
consists in the peculiar construction and ar 
rangement of partshereinafter described, and 
definitely pointed out in the claim. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
an easily-operated 
and strong and durable 
grate, 
In the drawings which accompany this 
specification, Figure 1 is a plan view of my 
improved grate. Fig. 2 is an end elevation 
thereof, with the end of the frame removed. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of one of the 
grate-bars detached. Fig. 4 is an enlarged 
section through the line a a of Fig. 2. 
A is the frame, having suitable Supports or 
legs B, which may be secured in the masonry 
setting of the boiler. This frame is provided 
at its end with the bearing-pieces C, in which 
are suitable bearings to receive the ends of 
the grate-bars, which are held in place by 
means of the cap D. 
In the drawings the three central grate 
bars are shown as rocking bars, and consist 
of the body portion a, having a central aper 
tureb, stayed at intervals by the lugs c and the 
35 grate-teeth d. These grate-teeth are triangu 
lar in shape, tapering gradually down to the 
bottom of the grate-bar, and alternating With 
each other when placed in position, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
On the sides of the frame are secured the 
stationary bars E. 
These stationary bars con 
sist of the body portion e, having a longi 
tudinal aperture and teeth the same as the 
45 
55 
75 
rocking bars, except that the teeth are ap 
plied upon but one side. Each of the rock 
ing bars is provided with a downwardly-pro 
jecting lug f, in which is secured the pivot 
ping, passing through the link g', connect 
ing the three rocking bars together. 
his a double-crankshaking-lever journaled 
in the frame, and having suitable pivotal con 
nection through the pin h' with the link g. 
The body portion of each of the grate-bars 
is thicker in the middle than at the ends, 
thereby forming a truss for each bar. 
The parts being thus constructed and ar 
ranged, they are intended to operate as foll 
lows: A fire being built upon the grate in the 
usual manner, the operator, when he desires 
to shake the grate, moves the lever h back 
Ward and forward, which rocks the grates and 
thoroughly breaks up the under part of the 
fire, thereby shaking the loose parts through 
and breaking up all cinders which may be 
formed, it being evident that the spaces be 
tween the teeth and through the hollow bar 
give ample room for the passage of the ashes 
and cinders through the grate and into the 
ash-pit beneath. 
What I claim as my invention is 
In a grate, the combination, with the rock 
ing bars provided with downwardly-extend 
ing arms, of a connecting-rod for said arms, 
a pin provided with an opening in one end 
passing through the connecting - rod and 
adapted to turn freely therein, and a double 
crank lever passing through the grate-frame 
and having its inner end extended into the 
opening in the pin, substantially as described. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature, in 
presence of two witnesses, this 20th day of 
August, 1889. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN P. THOMAS. 
- 
. 
P. M. HULBERT, 
EDMCBREARTY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424334.txt	(No Model.) 
 
J. B. McCUT CHEON. 
BAND CUTTER AND FEEDER, 
WITNESSES 
Attorneys, 
N. PeeRS, Phot 
o-Lithographer, Washington, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. MCCUTCHEON, OF BATTLE CREEK, MICHIGAN. 
BAND = C UTTER AND FEED ER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,334, dated March 25, 1890. 
Application filed December 2, 1889, Serial No. 332,321. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN B. MCCUTCHEON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bat 
tle Creek, in the county of Calhoun and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Band-Cutters and 
Feeders, of which the following is a full and 
clear description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure I represents a perspective view of a 
band-cutter and feeder embodying my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of same. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in band-cutters and feeders for thrash 
ing-machines; and it consists in the construc 
tions and combinations of devices which I 
shall hereinafter fully describe and claim. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will now describe its 
construction and indicate the mannerin which 
the same is carried out. 
In the drawings, A represents any Suitable 
frame, which may form a portion of the frame 
of the thrashing-machine, having at its front 
end a feed-board B, which delivers the straw 
and heads to the cylinder of the thrashing 
machine in any well-known manner. 
The frame A has a table C, to which a drop 
leaf or movable section D is hinged or piv 
oted, and beneath this table, in journals a on 
the bottom thereof, is mounted a transverse 
shaft E, which carries a plural number of cir 
cular saws F, (here shown as two in number.) 
which project through slots b in the table for 
a purpose to be hereinafter explained. On 
one end of the shaft E is secured a pulley, to 
which motion is applied in any well-known 
manner to rotate the shaft and its saws at a 
high rate of speed. 
Brackets G, secured to the side portions of 
the frame A, have upwardly-extending arms 
d, formed with journal-bearings for the shafts 
Hand I of the feeder and band-cutter, the said 
shafts carrying pulleys c, around which pass 
endless belts f, connected together by trans 
verse slats g, provided with teeth or pins hfor 
engaging and feeding the bound bundles of 
Straw forward. In addition to the teeth or 
pins the slats g carry the knives or cutters H', 
which are longitudinally disposed on said 
Slats and adapted to cut the cords or bands 
with which the bundles are bound, whereby 
the loose straw is fed directly to the saws or 
cutters and by them cut into three or more 
pieces before it reaches the thrashing-cylin 
der, thereby separating the straw to insure a 
faster feed to the cylinder and obviating the 
tendency of the long straw to wind around 
and become tangled with the cylinder. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a main frame, of 
an approximately horizontally traveling car 
rier having means for feeding the sheaves 
forward, cutters mounted on the carrier for 
severing the binding-cords, saws operating 
through the floor of the frame for cutting the 
Straw into short lengths, and means for oper 
ating the carrier and saws, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination, with a frame or sup 
port, of the shafts H and I and means for 
communicating motion thereto, the belts f, the 
transverse slats secured to the belts, having 
pins or teeth, and the cutters or knives on the 
slats for severing the cords with which the 
sheaves are bound, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the table with its 
hinged leaf or section, the shafts H and I, 
having pulleys, and the supports for the shafts, 
the belts adapted to pass around said pulleys 
and provided with teeth or pins and knives 
or cutters, a transverse shaft beneath the table, 
Saws on said shaft, projecting through slots in 
the table and adapted to cut the straw into 
lengths, and means for rotating the shaft, sub 
stantially as described. 
JOHN B. MCCUTCHEON. 
Witnesses: 
FRED M. WADLEIGH, 
ABRAHAM LAGARSEE. 
55 
75 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424434.txt	(No Model.) 
E. W. SILVER. 
FEED CUTTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 424,434, 
Patented Mar. 25, 1890. 
WTNESESS %. 
INVENTor, 
 62w 232 
%4.6% Atty. 
 
(No Model.) 
E. W. SILWER 
FEED CUTTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 424,434, 
Patented Mar, 25, 1890. 
 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
wiTNEs Ess: 
ge, 
NVENToR, 
22 
 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMMOR. W. SILVER, OF SALEM, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE SILVER & DEMING 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FEED-cutte R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,434, dated March 25, 1890. 
Application filed May 7, 1889, Serial No, 309,95l., (No model.) 
55 
. 
To all whon, it invay conce77: 
Beit known that I, EMMOR. W. SILVER, of 
Salem, in the county of Columbiana and State 
of Ohio, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Feed-Cutters, of which 
improvement the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to machines for cut 
ting hay, straw, &c., and has for its object cer. 
tain improvements in the gearing employed 
in transmitting power from the cutter-shaft 
to the feed-rolls, in the construction and man 
ner of securing the stationary cutter in posi 
tion, and also in the manner of mounting the 
adjustable feed-roll, whereby the action of 
said rollis rendered more positive and certain. 
The invention claimed is hereinafter fully 
Set forth. . 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in elevation of a portion of one side of 
a feed-cutter embodying my invention; Fig. 
2, a sectional elevation of the same, the plane 
of section being at right angles to the cutter 
and feed-rolls; Fig. 3, a view similar to Fig. 
1, the transmitting-gearing being removed; 
and Fig. 4, a view partly in end elevation and 
partly in section, the plane of section being 
indicated by the line acac, Fig. 1. 
The rotary cutter, consisting of disks 1, hav 
ing spirally-arranged knives 2 bolted thereto, 
is secured to a shaft 3, mounted in suitable 
bearings 4, formed in the side plates 5. On 
one end of this shaft, which can be driven by 
hand or power, a crank-wheel 6 or pulley 6* 
being secured thereon, is keyed a pinion 7, 
intermeshing with a gear-wheel S on one end 
of the shaft 9 of the lower feed-roll 10, having 
a smooth or unroughened surface, as shown 
in Figs, 2 and 4. The upper feed-roll 19, hav 
ing a corrugated or roughened surface, is ar 
ranged above the roll 10, its shaft 18 project 
ing through curved slots 25, formed in the 
side plates 5, as shown in Figs, 1, 2, and 3. 
On the shaft 18 is keyed a pinion 22, inter 
meshing with an idler-pinion 21, which is held 
in proper relation to the pinion 22 by links 
17, the shaft 18 and pin 16, carrying the pin 
ion 21 passing through holes in the ends of 
said links, as shown in Figs. 1 and 4. On the 
pin 16 are mounted the arms 14 of the bifur 
5o cated lever 15, the pin serving as the pivoted 
point of said lever, and between the arms 14 
is arranged the gear-wheel 12, having the pin 
ion 20 formed integral there with, said double 
gear-Wheel being mounted on a pin 13, pass 
ing through the arms 14 of the lever. The 
pinion 20 intermeshes with the idler-pinion 
21 and the gear-wheel 12 intermeshes with a 
gear-wheel 11 on the shaft 9 of the lower feed 
roll. The lower or free end of the lever 15 is 
connected to a shifting lever 23 at or near its 
lower end, said lever being pivoted on a pin 
24, secured to the side plate 5. The lever 23 
is provided with a catch-lever 26 for operat 
ing the spring-actuated pin. 27, adapted to en 
gage perforations in the holding-plate 28, Se 
Culled to the frame of the machine. 
It will be observed that the entire weight of 
the lever 15 and its gearing is carried by its 
operating-lever 23, although, when shifted, 
said lever 15 turns upon the pin 16 as a full 
crum, while at the same time slightly raising 
said pin and the link by which it is carried. 
By reason of the manner in which the lever 
15 is mounted-i.e., upon a movable fulcrum 
and also to distinguish it from its operating 
lever 23, it may properly be termed a float 
ing lever. This construction also permits of 
the substitution of gear-wheels of different 
diameters for the transmission of power. 
The ends of the stationary knife, which con 
sists of the web 29 and heads 30, project 
through slots formed in the side plates 5 and 
are bolted to abutments 31, formed at the sides 
of said slots and shaped to fit the sides of the 
knife, as shown in Fig. 3. As the heads 30 
of the knife are so constructed that each edge 
may be employed as a blade, and said knife 
can be reversed not only end for end, but also 
axially, four cutting-blades are available for 
U.S. When it is desired for any purpose to stop 
the feed during the operation of the machine, 
the operator shifts the lever 23, thereby mov 
ing the gear-wheel 12 out of engagement with 
the continuously-rotating gear-wheel11 on the 
shaft of the lower feed-roll and disconnecting 
the upper or, as it might be termed, active 
feed-roll from the power. 
The upper feed-roll is held down against 
the lower feed-roll by a weight or spring op 
erating through a stirrup 32, depending from 
the shaft 18, as shown in Fig. 4. It has here 
45 
25 
35 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
424,484 
. 
2 
tofore been customary to make the slots 25 
vertical, so that when an unusual amount of 
material or an ear of corn passes between the 
feed-rolls the upper roll will move up verti 
cally; but it frequently happens that when 
moved vertically by an ear of corn or like sub 
stance the teeth or projections on the upper 
roll will slip off and will not operate. In or 
der to avoid this slip, the slots 25 are either 
curved, as shown, or straight, inclining back 
ward from a vertical line, so that in rising the 
upper roll will move back and obtain a bet 
ter hold on the material. In the backward 
movement of the upper roll the upper end of 
the lever 15 will be drawn back, the gear 
wheel 12 rolling around on the gear 11, as will 
be readily understood, 
If it is desired to change the speed of feed, 
the gear 11 of the shaft 9 is reversed, so as to 
engage the pinion 20 of the double gear 12; 
or a smaller or larger gear may be substituted 
for the gear 11, and may be adjusted so as to 
engage either the gear 12 or its pinion. 20. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent 
1. In a machine for cutting hay, straw, &c., 
O 
O 
the combination of a continuously-rotating 
lower feed-roll, an adjustable upper feed-roll, 
gear-wheels secured to the shafts of the feed 
rolls, a floating lever pivoted to a link loosely 
mounted on the shaft of the upper feed-roll, 
a train of gearing mounted on the floatingle 
ver and arranged to transmitmotion from the 
lower to the upper feed-roll, and a lever for 
supporting and operating the floating lever, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a machine for cutting hay, straw, &c., 
the combination of side plates having rear 
wardly-inclined slots, suitably-driven feed 
rolls, the shaft of the upper feed-roll passing 
through said slots, gear-wheels secured to the 
shafts of the feed-rolls, a floating lever piv 
oted to a link mounted on the shaft of the 
upper feed-roll, a train of gearing mounted 
on the floating lever and arranged to trans 
mit motion from the lower to the upper feed 
roll, and a lever for supporting and operating 
the floating lever, substantially as set forth. 
EMMOR. W. SIILVER. 
35 
O 
45 
Witnesses: 
J. A. AMBLER, 
B. S. AMBLER. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424534.txt	(No Model.) 
A. R. BIR CHARD 
STENOGRAPHERS TABLET, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 424,534, 
Patented Apr. 1, 1890. 
sists: Series 
OYO 
it in 
B 
sata sess 
 
2.vosses 
341.uc41 to 
36 Avva. &lt;botvic; 
N. Peters, Photo-tiltingrapher, washington, c. 
(No Model.) 
A. R. BIR CHARD. 
STENOGRAPHER'S TABLET. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 424,534, 
Patented Apr. l. l890. 
  
 
244444 
2A AAAAAA AA AAAAAAMAAAAA ZaS 
WWWWA 
 
 
98)itvesses 
3.11uc41 to 
(47.7% (4. 
" * S.C. - %. 
N. PETERs. Photo-Lithographer, Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR. R. BIRCHARD, OF NORWICII, CONNECTICUT. 
STEN OGRAPHERS TABET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,534, dated April 1, 1890. 
Application filed November 18, 1889, Serial No. 330,650, (No model.) 
To ali, whon it inval/ concert: 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR. R. BIRCHARD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Nor 
wich, in the county of New London and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Stenographers 
Tablets, which improvements are fully set 
forth and described in the following specifi 
cation, reference being had to the accompa 
nying two sheets of drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a tablet of 
my improved construction, and Fig. 2 a top 
or plan view of the same. Fig. 3 illustrates 
a convenient attachment, by means of which 
a suitable support for such tablet is provided 
for use in churches and similar public places. 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged view in central longi 
tudinal section of the spring feed-roll, which 
I preferably use; and Fig. 5 is a view of the 
plate or bed of my tablet, looking at the left 
hand end of Fig. 1 and showing in place the 
said feed-roll. 
My invention relates to tablets for stenog 
raphers' use, and has for its object the pro 
duction of a device which may be used on an 
ordinary table, if desired, and in which the 
paper may be fed along and blotted automati 
cally, thus leaving the operator free to attend 
to his writing. 
Referring to the annexed drawings, the let 
ter C, indicates a plate of sheet metal, having 
one end curved downward, as at b, and hav 
ing immediately beneath said curved end a 
roll c, which is hung in bearings (l, formed also 
of sheet metal and adapted to serve as springs 
to press said roll C upward into engagement 
with the curved plate b. This roll c is pro 
vided to receive and support a roll of paper 
e, which is drawn off as needed, as hereinafter 
explained. 
g denotes a plate which extends from one 
bearing d around the coil of paper to the com 
panion bearing. The opposite end of the plate 
or bed a has upwardly-projecting portions h, 
that are perforated to provide bearings for a 
roll k, that is to receive and take up the 
paper after it has been written on. This roll 
It is shown in section in Fig. 4, and consists 
of a cylinder with a fixed journal lis' in one 
end, the opposite end being closed by a plug 
or cap k, in which is loosely fitted a stud k, 
whose outer end is flattened, as at . Within 
IO 
2O. 
25 
35 
4. 
45 
So 
the cylindrical body of the roll is a spiral 
spring 77, one of whose ends is fixed in stud 
k', the other end being made fast to the cyl 
inder end. The perforation in one of the pro 
jections l is round and of a size to receive the 
round journal k", while the perforation in the 
companion projection is Square and of a size 
to receive the flattened end k" of the stud 9. 
When the described roll is supported in its 
bearings and is rotated, stud k is held 
against rotation by its square bearing, and 
the spring n is consequently rotated at one 
end and fixed at the opposite end, thus giv 
ing to said spring, a torsional twist propor 
tionate to the number of revolutions of 
the roll c, the general construction of the 
spring-roll thus provided being substantially 
the Salme as that of Spring curtain-rolls now 
commonly used. . Adjacent to roll k is a roll 
n, which is jacketed with blotting-paper and 
is supported in bearings that are preferably 
formed of or supported by Spring-arms 0, that 
may be attached to the main plate of bed a, 
or to the bearings h, that form the bearings 
of the roll. The Spring-arms O serve to force 
the blotter-roll down into close engagement 
with a strip of paper fed along on plate (t. 
When about to use my improved tablet, the 
end of the coil of paper on roll e is carried 
upward around the curved end b of plate a, 
thence along Said plate under the blotter-roll 
n, and is then attached to the take-up roll k, 
said roll having previously been rotated sev 
eral times to give its spring in the desired 
torsional strain. Said roll k then seeks to 
draw the paper toward and around itself, but 
is prevented by the frictional contact of the 
paper on roll c with the under side of the 
curved plate l. When, however, the exposed 
surface of the paper has been written over, 
and it is desired to feed the paper along, the 
operator by leaning forward brings his body 
into contact with the plateg, already described, 
and by pressing slightly against said plate 
forces said roll c downward, thus releasing 
the roll of paper from contact with the curved 
plate, when the strip of paper may be drawn 
By thus press 
forward by the spring-roll le. 
ing against plate g the strip of paper may be 
caused to feed forward at the will of the op 
erator, and as it feeds forward is drawn under 
the blotter-roll in and the Surplus ink auto 
55 
65 
75 
So 
95 
loo 
: 424,584 
matically removed before said paper is taken 
up by the spring-Foll. 
S S in the drawings denote strips of metal 
reaching from side to side of plate a, and pro 
vided to serve both as guides to hold the 
paper in position as it is fed along and also 
as straight-edges, against which the paper 
may be torn off whenever it becomes neces 
sary to remove a section. 
It is frequently desired to use tablets of 
this class on a flat desk or table and to place 
said tablet on the table at an angle of sixty 
degrees (or thereabout) to the table-edge. In 
Fig. 2 I have indicated by dotted line a: a 
such position of a table relative to a tablet. 
Inasmuch as my method of controlling the 
feeding of the paper (by pressure of the body 
against plate g) requires that the tablet shall 
be held rigidly in a given position, I have pro 
vided in the edge of plate at a slot nu, in which 
is a headed screw having a thumb-nut, v' on 
its lower end. This thumb-nut and screw may 
be adjusted and clamped anywhere within 
the limits of slot it, and then screwed as a 
stop to abut the edge of the table, the oppo 
site edge of the tablet being prevented from 
slipping forward on the table by the end of 
the bearing d, that supports the roll c. 
When my described tablet is to be used in 
a church furnished with pews or settees, a 
convenient support may be provided by at 
taching a bracket au to the back of such pew 
or settee, as shown in Fig. 3. 
The roll k may quickly be removed from 
the tablet proper by springing outward one 
of the bearings I, as shown in dotted lines in 
Fig. 5. 
Tablets of my improved construction may 
be produced cheaply and have the further 
advantage of portability and lightness. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. A tablet for stenographers use, consist 
ing of a bed-plate having at one end a spring 
actuated take-up roll and at the opposite end 
a delivery-roll supported in yielding bearings, 
as set forth, and having its circumference in 
frictional contact with the said plate, as and 
for the objects specified. 
2. In combination with a plate, a spring 
acuated take-up roll journaled at one end of 
said plate, as set forth, a delivery-roll hung in 
yielding bearings at the opposite end of said 
plate, and a blotter-roll adjacent to said take 
up roll in the path of the paper, as and for 
the purpose specified. 
3. In combination with a plate forming the 
bed of a tablet, a take-up roll journaled at 
one end thereof, a delivery-roll journaled at 
: 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the opposite end, with its circumference in 
frictional contact with said bed-plate, and an 
arm or plate extending from one journal-bear 
ing of the said delivery-roll to the companion. 
bearing, all substantially as and for the ob 
jects specified. 
4. In a stenographer's tablet, in combina- 5 
tion, a bed-plate, a take-up roll journaled at 
one end thereof, a blotter-roll adjacent to said 
take-up roll, as set forth, a delivery-roll at the 
opposite end of the said bed-plate, with its cir 
cumference infrictional contact with said bed 
plate, and an arm or plate extending from one 
journal-bearing of said delivery-roll to the 
companion bearing thereof, as described, and 
for the objects specified. 
5. In a stenographer's tablet, in combina 
tion, a bed-plate having at one side a longi 
tudinal slot, with a stop-screw adjustably 
seated therein, as set forth, a take-up roll 
journaled at one end of said bed-plate, and a 
delivery-roll journaled at the opposite end of 
said plate, with its circumference in frictional 
contact there with, substantially as and for the 
objects specified. 
6. In combination with a bed-plate, a spring 
actuated take-up roll journaled at one end of 
said plate, a delivery-roll at the opposite end 
of said plate, and a straight-edge, as s, extend 
ing from side to side of said plate between the 
take-up and delivery rolls, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
7. In combination with a bed-plate, a spring 
actuated take-up roll journaled at one end of 
said plate, a delivery-roll supported in yield 
ing bearings at the opposite end of said bed 
plate, with its circumference in frictional con 
tact, there with, a blotter-roll adjacent to said 
take-up roll in the path of the written strip 
of paper, as set forth, and a straight-edge ex 
tending from side to side of said bed-plate 
between the take-up and delivery rolls, sub 
stantially as and for the objects specified. 
8. In combination with a bed-plate having 
a longitudinal slot near one side, an adjust 
able stop-screw seated in said slot, as set 
forth, a take-up roll journaled at one end of 
said bed-plate, a delivery-roll journaled at the 
Opposite end of said plate, a blotter-roll ad 
jacent to said take-up roll, and a straight-edge 
extending from side to side of said plate be 
tween the take-up and delivery-rolls, all sub 
stantially as and for the objects specified. 
ARTEIUR. R. BIRCHARI). 
9o 
95 
Witnesses: 
FRANK H. ALLEN, 
ALONZO M. LUTHER, 
75. 
Od 
IO5 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424634.txt	(No Model.) 
C. H. WHITE. 
FIRE POT FOR FURNACES 
No. 424,634. 
Patented Apr. 1, 1890. 
 
 
  
N 
 
 
% 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. WHITE, OF MALDEN, MASSACHUSETTS, 
FIRE POT FOR FURNACES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,684, dated April 1, 1890. 
Application filed March 2, 1889, Serial No. 301720. (No model.) 
To all whon, it invay concern 
Be it known that I, CHARLES H. WHITE, of 
Malden, county of Middlesex, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Inprovement in 
Fire-Pots for Furnaces; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full and exact de 
Scription thereof, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to the fire-pot, and by 
fire-pot, for the purposes of this specification, 
I mean that part of the combustion-chamber 
which contains the fuel when the fuel is being 
consumed, and Which terminates below the 
fire-door for its top and at the grate (fire 
grate) at the bottom. All other fluted fire 
pots have the grooves carried to the top of the 
fire-pot, which is fatal to the purpose sought 
in mine. All other fire-pots divided at the 
central height are so for other purposes than 
for a fluted and a plain section, both station 
alry. Such designs do not aim at or secure 
the result I seek and produce in mine. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
plan of the fire-pot. Fig. 2 is a sectional ele 
vation, plane of section, central and vertical. 
Fig. 3 is an under view of one-half of the fire 
pot. 
The fire-pot has a series of grooves run 
ning up and down its inner surface. These 
grooves, with the ribs which separate them, 
are not continuous from top to bottom, but 
starting from the bottom terminate at or near 
the middle of the fire-pot. Their termination 
or upper end is of a form suited to deflect 
the upward current of air through them in 
wardly toward the middle. The form shown 
in Fig. 1-an in Wardly-slopil)g angle of about 
forty-five degrees-is a very suitable one. 
The result produced by these air-channels 
so terminating midway up in the fire-pot at 
about the middle of the body of fuel is to 
concentrate the supply of air at the center of 
combustion, and so to Secure the best condi 
tions for combustion. This system of chan 
nels extending half-way up the sides of the 
fire-pot from the bottom, also performs an 
important function in delivering downward 
the ashes, which would otherwise obstruct the 
supply of air and keep the heat away from 
the walls, so reducing the amount ladiated 
from their external surface. A still further 
important advantage is that of preventing an 
55 upward current of air, cold or imperfectly 
45 
35 
heated, from passing upward by the inner Wall 
of the fire-pot into the hot chamber above the 
fire, so interfering with effective heating. 
The upper part or half of the fire-pot may 
be plain or of any desired surface conforma 
tion. The outside of the lower part or half 
having the grooves or air-channels may, if 
desired, be of equal thickness for conven 
ience in construction, or for greater strength 
or endurance may be made to conform more 
or less to the variations in thickness of the 
inner wall. 
The fire-pot may be made in one, two, Ol' 
more sections, fitted one above and upon an 
other. A suitable and perhaps preferable di 
vision is the one shown in Fig.2 at about the 
middle of the fire-pot, allowing the channels 
to have their upper termination at or just 
below the joint between the upper and lower 
sections of the fire-pot. It is preferred to 
have both the upper and lower sections con 
verge somewhat toward a reduced diameter 
at or near the middle height of the pot, Some 
what as illustrated in Fig. 2. 
It is thought 
the best result is secured by so doing. This 
is not essential, however, as a good result can 
be obtained with variations in this part of the 
conformation. The upper ungrooved part is 
nuarkedl, the grooves (t, and the lower grooved 
or channeled part C. 
claim 
1. The fire-pot having a series of grooves 
formed upon the inner surface and lower half 
of the fire-pot, said lower half of the fire-pot 
flaring outward together with said grooves, 
said grooves being made thereby larger at the 
bottom than at their upper end. 
2. A fire-pot divided horizontally midway 
in its height, the lower half being grooved 
upon its inner surface, both grooves and lower 
section of pot increasing in size downwardly, 
substantially as shown. 
3. A fire-pot divided at its middle height, 
the lower portion having internal and exter 
nal grooves, both lower section and grooves 
expanding or becoming larger toward the bot 
tom, substantially as shown. 
4. A fire-pot divided at its middle height 
and flaring both upward and downward from 
the division, the lower section being grooved, 
substantially as described. 
CHAS. II, WHITE, 
Witnesses: 
BENJ. F. IBRIGGS, 
DAVID N. B. COFFIN. 
65 
o 
75 
So 
95 
IOO 
43 
It is hereby certified that in Letters Patent No. 424,634, granted April 1, 1890, upon 
the application of Charles H. White, of Malden, Massachusetts, for an improvement in 
(Eire-Pots for Furnaces, errors appear in the printed specification requiring correc 
tion as follows: In line 63 the words be of should read for, and a comma should be 
inserted after the word thickness ; in line 65 the word may should be stricken 
out, and in line 66 the words in thickness should be stricken out; and that the said 
Letters Patent should be read with these corrections therein to conform to the papers 
pertaining to the case in the Patent Office. 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 29th day of April, A. D. 1890. 
CY RUS BUSSEY, 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 
SEAL. 
Countersigned: 
ROBERT J. FISHER, 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424734.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 424,734. 
 
 
 
1(iiNS 
Illi 
's Hill 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
N. : y W. 
t 
- 
W 
L. T. SMITH, 
ELECTRIC MOTOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
Patented Apr. 1, 1890. 
W N N N V 
8. ES 
eV - t 
 
 
2. 
N 
SS 
YSN : N 
(No Model.) 
No. 424,734. 
L T, SMITH, 
ELECTRIC MOTOR. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 1, 1890. 
as 
as 11 
 
F 
2 
 
O 
^ 
II: 
  
 
  
e 
 
NNTNESSES 
. 
 
in NMENTor, 
s 
%2 
s 2. 7 Zz. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LAWRENCE. T. SMITH, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,734, dated April 1, 1890. 
Application filed December 26, 1888, Serial No, 294,686, (No model.) 
The object of my present invention is to 55 
To all whon, it Tvctly conce772. 
Be it known that, LAWRENCE. T. SMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Provi 
dence, in the county of Providence and State 
of Rhode Island, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Electric Motors; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to letters or figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to electric motors, but 
Inore especially to motors in which an alter 
nating current of electricity is employed and 
converted into work. 
Usually heretofore all motors of the class 
referred to have been so constructed and ar 
ranged that the field-magnets thereof or al 
matures, or both, have magnetic matter either 
by itself, or the magnets or armatures may be 
wound with an insulated conductor, through 
which an electric current may be passed. In 
machines of this character, When used on al 
ternating - current circuits, it is practically 
found that an intense heat is developed. 
Such heat is, I believe, caused by induced 
currents in the undivided or laminated mag 
netic portion, or it may be due to the rapid 
change of polarity of the poles, or possibly 
a combination of the two causes mained. The 
result of such heating is a rapid deteriora 
tion of the insulation or covering of the con 
ductors, and as the heating increases rapidly 
as the size of alternating-current machines 
increase it follows that it has not been possi 
ble, or, at least, practicable, to construct a 
large motor of this class-that is to say, One 
of five-horse power-which did not heat to 
such an extent as to seriously affect its effi 
ciency, it being evident that an excess of heat 
must necessarily be accompanied by a de 
crease in the machine's efficiency. 
Another objection to machines of the class 
before referred to, in which magnetic sub 
stances or materials are used and Which elm 
ploy a commutator, is the destructive genera 
tion of electric sparks at the brushes When 
ever a change of load takes place. Such 
change is caused mainly by a shifting of the 
poles in the animature, or the lead, as it is 
called, of the magnetic matter. 
produce an alternating - current motor in 
which the excessive or destructive heating 
before spoken of is overcome, thereby ren 
dering it possible to construct a motor of any 
required size and power, which cannot be 
done when magnetic matter is used in con 
nection with an alternating current. 
Another advantage of my invention is the 
prevention of the generation of sparks at the 
brushes on a change of load. 
My invention consists, essentially, of an 
alternating-current motor having the field 
magnet core, armature, and substantially all 
the Working and electrical parts composed of 
non-magnetic material or non-conductors of 
electricity, as Wood, Vulcanite, &c. I also 
make the magnetic field, so called, to con 
sist of a non-magnetic split core (or turns or 
coils connected so as to act as a single coil) 
formed of an insulated conductor, through 
which an electric current is sent, thereby 
creating an electrical field, the split core on 
which it is wound thus preventing useless in 
ductiola and heating, which latter has hereto 
fore been an inherent and radical defect in 
the construction of electric field-coils. Inside 
of my improved field-coil rotates a drum-ar 
mature. The al'mature center or body is, 
however, composed of some non-magnetic non 
conducting material, the same being so built 
up as to act as a non-conductor, thereby to 
prevent heating of the armature by the Sup 
pression or non-generation of induced cur 
rents. Upon thisarmature are woundparallel 
to its axis of rotation conducting bars or wires, 
the ends of which are so connected to the 
Comluutator-segments as to form a continuous 
circuit round the armature and constituting 
a closed-coil winding. 
The armature just described receives its 
rotation by means of an electric current gen 
erated, as usual, from some external source, 
the current being conducted therefrom to and 
through the split field-coils, and also through 
the conductors of the almatlire, thence to 
and through the brushes which press on two 
such corresponding segments of the commu 
tator as to make the current in the two halves 
of the armature divided, thereby causing the 
75 
So 
85 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
O 
(5 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
 
424,784 
25 
35 
O 
current at any instant in one half of the al 
mature to be attracted by one half of the field 
coils and to be repelled by the other half, the 
result, being a rotation of the armature due 
to the attraction and repulsion of parallel and 
opposite currents, notwithstanding the cur 
rent is alternating, each change in the field 
being accompanied by a corresponding change 
in the two halves of the armature, thereby 
making the direction of rotation independent 
of the direction of the external circuit. It 
will now be seen that as there is no magnetic 
matter or material in the armature, no mat 
ter what change of current or load takes 
place, the points of equal potential in the two 
halves of the armature-winding will remain 
in the same position-viz., in a line drawn 
perpendicularly to a line passing through the 
two points of contact of the brushes with the 
commutator. The armature and field-coil 
are mounted on a base of suitable material, 
as metal, wood, &c., the base having the form 
of a hollow rectangular ring. The base is cut 
through at a certain point to prevent induced 
currents, the field-core and base together 
forming a split ring having a rectangular 
form, all as will be more fully hereinafter set 
forth and claimed. 
In the accompanying two sheets of draw 
ings, illustrating my invention, Figure 1 is a 
side elevation of the motor, adapted more es 
pecially to be used as an alternating-current 
motor, a part of the winding of the field-coil 
being omitted. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudi 
nal sectional view taken through the center. 
Fig. 3 is a side elevation of the stationary or 
field coil detached. Fig. 4 is an end view of 
the coil, the base being represented section 
ally. 
Fig. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the 
Fig. G 
armature, taken on line Q ac of Fig. 2. 
is an end view of the armature. 
Fig. 7 is an 
end yiew thereof, showing the manner of 
connecting the wires of the armature with 
the commutator. Fig. 8 is an enlarged end 
view of an ordinary form of commutator. Fig. 
9, Sheet 2, is a plan view of the motor mounted 
and connected as in use; and Fig. 10 is a re 
duced plan view of the base. 
A more detailed description of my present 
invention, including the manner of its oper 
ation, is as follows: C, indicates the base, the 
same being made, preferably, of Some non 
conducting material, as Wood, although metal 
may be employed. The form of the base 
is substantially rectangular, its center pol 
tion a being cut away. One of the sides 
of the base is severed about midway of its 
length, as at Ct', for the purpose of prevent 
ing induction. (See Figs, 1,9, and 10.) To 
the top of the base are secured the two bind 
ing-posts f, the same being insulated, as usual, 
and adapted to receive the main conducting 
wires v v', which serve to conduct the elec 
tric current to the armature. The electricity 
is generated at Some external Source by a sys 
tem adapted to produce an alternating cur 
rent, although my motor is well adapted to 
utilize any form of electric current as usually 
produced. 
B indicates my improved field-coil, the 
same being a substitute for the usual mag 
netic field. The said field-core consists of a 
skeleton frame or core c, of brass or other suit 
able material, the same being severed through 
one of its sides, as at i, to prevent induction, 
substantially as just stated with reference to 
the base ct, said cut coinciding with the cut 
a? of the base. The coil is secured to the 
motor-base by means of bolts e', passing 
through an extension of the lower portion of 
the core, as shown in Fig. 4. 
The coil B is made in halves, in order to 
facilitate the insertion therein of the arma 
ture and its shaft, the halves being secured to 
gether by bolts e. The Winding of the coil is 
effected by passing the insulated conducting 
wire u' continuously round about the core be 
tween the flanges longitudinally of its axis, 
(see Fig. 3, &c.) the action of the current in 
passing through the coil being the same as 
though the core were made in one piece. The 
wire was it passes from the lower to the up 
per half of the coil may be coupled together 
SO as to be readily disconnected whenever the 
coil is to be taken apart. The wires collect 
ively are indicated by d, the terminals of the 
wire c being one at a binding-post f, con 
nected with the main conducting or line wire 
it', and the other being in contact with one of 
the brushes n of a commutator C of usual 
construction. 
I would state here that the coils of the field 
core may be so wound and connected up in 
relation to the armature as to produce series, 
shunt, or compound winding. 
The end portions of the field-coil's core are 
bent at c, so as to permit the shaft to revolve 
freely without touching, as clearly shown in 
Fig. 4. 
A designates the al'mature as a whole, the 
Same being secured to a shafts, mounted to 
freely revolve in bearings t, secured to the 
upper surface of the base C. A pulley p is 
fixed at one end of the shaft, from which, by 
means of a belt in, (shown by broken lines,) the 
power of the motor is transmitted to any ma 
chine, as usual, and converted into useful 
Work. The center portion l or core of said 
almature is made of hard wood or other suit 
able non-conducting material, and is provided 
On its periphery with a series of longitudi 
nally-arranged 1'aised ribs', thereby forming 
a corresponding number of grooves or re 
cesses. An end piece or notched plate h, of 
brass or other material, is secured by screws 
t to each end of the core b, and is also se 
cured to the main shafts. The said grooves 
lying intermediate of the ribs ly' are filled 
with insulated wire it, the same extending 
longitudinally of the machine or parallel with 
the winding of the field-coil, and also extend 
ing across the ends, substantially as shown in 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
TO 
T 15 
I 25 
 
424,734 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
Fig. 6, and constituting a closed-coil wind- non-generation of induced currents and of 
ing. The ends of the wires pass from the end 
the freedom from sparks at the commutator. 
By a slight change in the arrangement of 
of the armature through the opening c" of the 
the parts the machine is equally Well adapted 
field-coil along the shafts and engage the re 
to be employed as a dynamo-as, for example, 
spective segments of the commutator as com 
by a current of electricity from some exter 
mon, the latter being mounted on the corre 
nal source being caused to flow through the 
sponding end of the shaft, 
By reason of my improved construction in 
field-coil while the armature is rapidly ro 
tated by means of some independent driving 
respect to the closed-coil winding the follow 
ing advantages are obtained: first, that all the 
mechanism, a current will be induced in the 
coils around the armature are constantly and 
armature, which may be taken off at the com 
at the same instant giving to the shaft a ro 
mutator in the usual manner, 
tative effect; second, by reason, also, of the 
I do not broadly claim an electric motor 
having a non-magnetic core Wound with in 
reduction of sparks at the commutator, the 
durability of the armature is correspondingly 
sulated conductors, nor a closed-coil winding 
utilizing an alternating current and having 
increased, whereas in the open-coil method 
of winding the only coils which give rotative 
magnetic matter or otherwise; but 
What I do claim, and desire to secule by 
effect to the armature are those whose re 
Spective commutator-segments are in immer 
Lettel's Patent, is 
1. An electric motor having the cores of 
diate contact with the brushes. 
I Would state that practically in large arma 
the armature and field-coil composed of non 
magnetic material, and having the winding of 
tures the number of grooves for receiving 
the drum-armature arranged to form a closed 
the Wires it, as Well as the number of com 
mutator-segments would be greatly increased, 
Coil, and, further, having the conductors ar 
thereby lessening the liability of emitting 
ranged to receive at the Same instant an alter 
Sparks. 
nating current of electricity produced from 
Some external source, Substantially as here 
In Fig. 7 the arrows indicate the direction 
of the electric current flowing through the 
in before described. 
2. The alternating-current motor hereinbe 
Several coils it. 
fore described, consisting of a mounted drum 
I Would state that the form of the field-coil 
armature having a non-magnetic core whose 
and base is preferably that of a hollow rect 
Windings are connected to the segments of 
angle or annular. The core of said coil and 
also the base are, as before described, formed 
the collector to form a closed coil, a station 
of non-magnetic materials, although at the 
alry field-coil having a non-magnetic split or 
same time they may be conductors of elec 
Severed COI'e Wound with an insulated con 
tricity. In the latter case the sides of the 
ductor, within which coil the said closed-coil 
drum-arnature revolves, a non-magnetic split 
core and base are severed transversely, the 
Cuts coinciding, as shown in Fig. 1, the real 
base on which the armature and field-coil are 
son for making the cuts i and Ct' coincide with 
mounted, and a commutator to give to the 
each other being to avoid the increased cost 
currents in the armature a proper direction 
in relation to the lines of force, substantially 
of insulating materials, which otherwise 
would be necessary to be interposed between 
as Set forth. 
the adjacent surfaces of the coil and base. 
3. The combination, in an electric motor, 
The following describes the general opera 
with the electrically - connected stationary 
field-coil provided with a non-magnetic trans 
tion of my improved electric motor: The 
Versely-cut core, of a mounted armature have 
electric current is received through the two 
ing a non-magnetic core, a commutator elec 
main conductors w'at. (See Fig. 9.) The cur 
rent, say, from the pole U passes through 
trically connected with said armature, and a 
non-magnetic transversely a cut base having 
out the coils of the field B, and finally enters 
the commutator through the medium of a 
Said field- Coil, armature, and commutator 
mounted therein, substantially as hereinbo 
brush im. From the fact that the core is cut, 
as at , as also the base C at Cl', the entire 
fore set forth. 
force or energy of the current passes through 
4. The combination, in all electric motor, 
of a non-lmagnetic closed-coil-wound drum 
the field-coil without serious loss by induced 
armature mounted on a non-magnetic split 
currents. In like manner the armature A is, 
base and revolving in a non-magnetic field 
by reason of the use of a non-metallic or non 
conducting core b, enabled to utilize the elec 
magnet core Wound with a coil supplied with 
an alternating current, Substantially as here 
tric current from the generator in a greater 
degree than heretofore has been considered 
in before set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig. 
possible. The rotation of the armature is 
due to the well-known principle of attraction 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
and repulsion of electric currents parallel to 
each other and passing in opposite directions, 
resulting, as before stated, in producing a 
motor in which a greater efficiency of the cur 
rentis utilized than heretofore, because of the 
CHARLES IIANNIGAN, 
GEO, I, REATINGTON, 
AWRENCE T, SMITH, 
Witnesses: 
o 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
 
OC, 
IOS 
C 
T 15 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424834.txt	(No Model.) 
C. SWAN 
TARGET TRAP, 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
s 
 
QSS 
2 
SS 
s 
 
 
Rowtowroom 
xxxtrao. -- 
a 
(Eezeex 
S5 %.SW 
E2s22 222 & 
Gx-b2. 
N E"; 
 
2NA 
Witnesses 
IN v ENto R 
f/  Azee 
By his Attys. (.26-4 Yve-111?. 
N. PETERs, photo-Lithographer, Washington, DC. * 
(No Model.) 
C. SWAN 
TARGET TRAP, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 424,834, 
Patented Apr. 1, 1890. 
 
  
33 ERI 
II, 
- Yilg 
I 
Fi FF 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A-1 7 
2RLASS 2 
 
 
 
 
s 
SHINUE 
 
 
SSSSSSays 
 
1:It 
Ly? 
WitN ESSES 
wa. A/C 
IN v EN to R. 
E y hIs Atty S. J4. (Co-C4 Y^?a (4 e?c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIHARLES SWAN, OF CORRY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
TARGET-TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,834, dated April 1, 1890. 
Application filed September 2, 1889, Serial No. 322,742, (No model.) 
O 
 
M 
Sale, 
actuated by a trigger-lever D. The plunger 
To all whon, it may concern: 
C is connected by a link C with a catch F, 
Be it known that I, CHARLES SWAN, a citi 
which is pivoted to and lies beside a fixed 
Zen of the United States, residing at Corry, in 
the county of Erie and State of Pennsylva 
block F on the top of the cross-head. The 
catch F is held up by the spring E, acting on 
nia, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Target-Traps; and I do 
the plunger C, and is pulled down by the 
trigger-lever D, acting on the plunger C. The 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
sling-arm H is pivoted at h on the cross-head 
and exact description of the invention, such 
on top of the boss G', and has an arm H', 
as will enable other's skilled in the art to 
which reaches out to a point opposite the 
which it appertains to make and use the 
pivot h, so as to form in effect a bell-crank 
lever. The free end of the sling-arm H has 
This invention relates to target-traps; and 
pivoted to it at L'a target-holder N. The arm 
it consists in certain improvements in the 
H' is pivoted at h' to a link I, which is piv 
construction thereof, as will be hereinafter 
oted at i to the spring-lever J, which is piv 
fully set forth, and pointed out in the claims. 
oted on the spring-mandrel K. The spring 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings as follows: 
mandrel K has formed at its lipper end a 
ratchet K', and on the lever J there is piv 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the trap, full 
oted a pawl J, Which engageS Said latchet, 
lines showing the sling in the position it as 
In the center of the ratchet there is a squared 
Sumes as it discharges the target, and dotted 
lines showing the sling in the position it oc 
cavity to receive a Wrench. When a wrench 
is applied to a ratchet, the Spring can be 
cupies when the trap is set. Fig. 2 is a top 
wound up to any desired tension, and the 
or plan view, the full and dotted lines show 
pawl J be engaged with the ratchet, and thus 
ing the parts in the same relation as in Fig. 1. 
impart to the lever J the tension given to the 
Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional view, the line of 
Spring. 
section being in the plane represented by the 
To set the trap, the arm II is drawn back 
lines acac in Figs. 1 and 2, the point of observa 
So as to lie upon and be parallel with the 
tion being from the left of those dotted lines. 
cross-head, as shown in Fig. 2 by dotted lines. 
Fig. 4 is a horizontal section taken on the 
This action winds the Spring Lup to the ex 
Fig. 5 is a vertical section 
line : v in Fig. 1. 
tent of the movement of the arm or ever J. 
taken on the line if y in FigS. 1 and 4. Fig. 
6 is a vertical section taken on the line & 2 in When the arm II is in the position shown by 
dotted lines in Fig. 2, it is engaged by the 
Fig. 2. 
catch F and retained until the trigger-lever 
Like letters indicate like parts in all the 
D is pulled. The spring Lisattached in any 
figures. 
desired manner to the mandrel Katits inner 
The construction is as follows: 
A is a stand having a central hub A' and end, and the outer end is attached pivotally 
at l to the link L', which is attached pivotally 
a toothed top A*. 
B is a standard, which has a stem B', which at l to the forks G* of the cross-head. 
The 
object of the link-connection for the outer end 
is journaled in the hub A' of the stand, and a 
toothed flange B, which engages the toothed of the spring I is to allow the outer end of the 
coil of the spring to move radially toward the 
top A* of the stand, and an arm B. 
center as the Spring is Wound up. 
On the side 
G is a cross-head, which is pivoted in the 
of the spring L, I place a roller M to prevent 
fork of the arm B of the Standard B. One 
the spring moving into an eccentric position 
arm of the cross-head G has prongS G'G', 
between which is adjusted the Spring L, and 
when under Strain. 
The target-holder N is pivoted to the end 
the other arm has at its end a bOSS G', On 
of the arm II at in, and beneath this pivot 
which the sling is pivoted. The cross-head 
there is a circular boss H, with a cam-notch 
can be tilted to any angle desired on the pivot 
I on one side of the arm, as seen in Figs. 1 
The standard B is bored out its entire 
Attached to the target-holder N on its 
length and receives a plunger C, which is 
and 6. 
under side there is a leaf-spring R, the free 
supported on a contained spring E, and is 
3 5 
45 
So 9 
55 
75 
95 
OC 
424,834 
O 
25 
45 
end of which rides on the edge of the cam 
ring or boss H. On the spring R there is a 
lug or point r, which is cushioned by aleather. 
lining r' on the side toward the pivot n. In 
the holder N there is a mortise for the lug or 
point r to pass through and project up above 
the upper surface of the holder N. When the 
holder N is in line with the sling-arm H, as 
seen in full lines in Figs. 1, 2, and 6, the Spring 
R has its free end extended and the point or 
lug ris drawn down below the upper surface 
of the holder; but when the holder Nisturned 
so as to stand at right angles to the arm H, 
as shown by dotted lines in Figs. 1 and 2, the 
free end of the spring R will be in the cam 
notch h of the boss H and the point r will 
protrude above the upper surface of the 
holder. On the upper face of the holder there 
are three studs P, P', and P, which I prefer 
to have covered with rubber or other cush 
ioning material. The middle, stud P* is back 
of the other two about half of the diameter of 
the target, and the studs P and P' are far 
enough apart to just receive the target between 
them. The movable stud r, above described, 
is placed in front of the stud Pa distance 
equal to the thickness of the rim of the target. 
A target will be put in place, as shown in 
Fig. 6, when the holder is in the position there 
shown, and also shown in full lines in Figs, 1 
and 2. On the top of the stud P there is a 
lipp, which reaches out over the rim, as seen 
clearly in Fig. 6. When the targetisin place, 
as just described, the holder is turned into 
the position shown by dotted lines in Fig. 2, 
and this causes the stud r to take position 
within the rim of the target T. The target. 
cannot now be removed from the holder until 
the holder is turned into line with the arm H. 
When the trap is sprung and the sling-arm 
is thrown with great velocity from the posi 
tion shown by dotted lines in Figs. 1 and 2 
to the position shown by full lines, it is Sud 
denly stopped as soon as it reaches that posi 
tion, and the momentum acquired by the 
holder N causes it to swing around into line 
with the arm H with great force. When this 
occurs, the lug r is drawn down and the tar 
get is free to fly from the holder. 
The angle of the path of the arm H with 
reference to the horizon is determined by 
the adjustment of the cross-head G on its 
pivot g. 
The point of discharge with reference to ra 
diation from the center of the stand of the 
trap is determined by the adjustment of the 
standard B upon the stand. This adjust 
ment is effected by lifting up the standard 
B, so as to disengage the toothed flanges B 
and A', and turning the standard so the cross 
head will lie in any desired vertical plane, 
and then letting it down into engagement 
65 
75 
again. This movement of the standard B 
vertically is effected by lifting up on the le 
verD. Thus the lever D has two functions 
one to draw down the plunger C and the 
other to lift up the standard B. 
What I. claim as new is 
1. In a target-trap, the combination, with 
the stand A, having a standard B swiveled 
therein and engaging serrated flanges A* and 
B, as described, of the lever D at the lower 
end of said standard, for lifting the standard 
out of engagement with the stand. 
2. In a target-trap, the combination of the 
stand A, the standard B, swiveled in said 
stand, the cross-head G, pivoted on the arm 
B at one side of the center of the swivel of 
the standard, a catch F on said cross-head, a 
sling on said cross-head which is engaged 
when set by said catch, a plunger C, passing 
through the spindle of the swiveled standard. 
vertically and connected with said catch, a 
Spring sustaining said plunger, and a trigger 
lever D for drawing down said plunger. 
3. In a target-trap, the combination of a 
stand A with a central hub and a clutch 
formed top and a standard B, swiveled in 
said hub and having a clutch-formed flange 
to engage with the clutch formation on the 
top of the stand. 
4. In a target-trap, the combination of the 
tilting cross-head G, the sling H, pivoted at 
one end of said cross-head and having a short 
arm H', the spring TL, secured at the other 
end of said cross-head and having an arm J 
extending from its mandrel, and a link I, 
connecting the arm.J with the short arm H' . 
of the sling. 
5. In a target-trap, the combination, with 
the sling, of the spring L, having a mandrel 
K, with a ratchet K' thereon, the arm J, piv 
oted on said mandrel and having a pawl J 
engaging said ratchet, and a link I, connect 
ing the arm J with the sling. 
6. In a target-trap, the combination, with 
the sling-arm H and the cam-boss H, of the 
target-holder N, pivoted to the arm. H, the 
spring R, bearing on the cam-boss H, and the 
lug rextending upward from said spring R. 
7. In a target-trap, the combination, with 
the sling-arm H and the cam-boss H, of the 
holder N, having stud-pins P, P, and P, as 
shown, the lip p on the stud P, the verti 
cally-moving lug r in front of the stud P', 
and the spring R, carrying said stud and 
acted upon by the cam-boss H. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES SWAN. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. K. HALLOCK, 
WM. P. HAYES. 
95 
IOO 
O . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US424934.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. PECK 
FRUIT GATHERER, 
No. 424,934, 
Patented Apr. 1, 1890. 
Zvitovesses: 
20.6/irdizzStova. 
% -6-6&eeze 
/averzfor: 
4, 246 72-6, 
a 4-6-297-66 
7is /zzarze/. 
N. PerERs, photo-lithographs. washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN WELD PECK, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO HIRAM D. 
SAME PLACE. 
PECK, OF 
FRUIT-GATHERER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 424,934, dated April 1, 1890. 
Application filed September 9, 1889, Serial No.323,452, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, uhon, it navy concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN WELD PECK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cin 
cinnati, in the county of Hamilton and State 
of Ohio, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Fruit-Gatherers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to devices for gather 
ing fruit from trees; and its object is to pro 
vide an easy means for plucking fruit from 
branches not easily accessible from the 
ground, and which at the same time will not 
subject the fruit to injury or destruction by 
falling upon the ground. I accomplish this by 
means of a box, basket, or other suitable re 
ceptacle for fruit, mounted upon a long pole, 
having at the top of the receptacle two knife 
blades, one permanently attached and the 
other movable, so arranged that by means of 
a cord or wire attached to the movable blade 
and running down to the hand of the opera 
tor the two blades may be brought together 
between the fruit and its branch and cut the 
stem of the fruit, allowing the fruit to drop 
into the box, basket, or other receptacle. 
Mechanism illustrating my device is shown 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 shows the whole device in perspec 
tive. Fig. 2 is a view showing a modified 
construction. 
Referring now more particularly to the 
drawings, A is a standard or pole of any de 
sired length, upon which is mounted the re 
ceptacle B. The standard A is usually a sim 
ple pole or long stick; but, if desired, for con 
Venience, it may be jointed after the manner 
of a fishing-rod. It may be attached to the 
fruit-receptacle B by a socket in the recep 
tacle, or by staples, or in any of the well 
known forms of attachment. It is important, 
however, that there should be two modes of 
attachment, so that the pole A may be either 
parallel with the bottom of the receptacle B 
or perpendicular to it, as the immediate con 
venience of use may require. This may be 
Secured by attaching the standard A to a 
hinge upon a plate fastened to the bottom of 
the receptacle B, or by attaching to the bottom 
of the receptacle B a plate upon which are cast 
tWO Sockets at right angles to each other, one 
perpendicular to the plate and the other par 
allel thereto, the standard. A fitting closely 
into either socket, as may be required. A 
construction of this character is shown in Fig. 
2, in which the reference-lettersff denote a 
duplex socket-piece attached to a base-plate 
g on the receptacle B, and having the sockets 
arranged at right angles one to the other. 
The receptacle B may be a box, bag, or basket, 
as desired, and it may be of any form desired. 
In the drawings the form shown is that of 
a triangular section of a cylinder the base of 
whose cross-section is a quadrant of a circle. 
For convenience in attaching and operating 
the knife-blades and the cord or wire herein 
after described this shape seems most pref 
erable; but, as before stated, this form is not 
essential. 
Cis a knife-blade, either straight or curved, 
permanently attached to one of the upper 
edges of the receptacle B. D is another knife 
blade, straight or curved, (to correspond with 
the blade C.) pivoted at one end of the blade 
C and attached thereto by the pivota. The 
blade C is of nearly the length of one side of 
the receptacle B. The blade D is slightly 
longer than a side of the receptacle B, and at 
the point where it passes the edge of the re 
ceptacle opposite the pivot a. it is bent down 
Ward at right angles and again extended par 
allel to its first direction slightly beyond the 
edge of the receptacle. When not in opera 
tion, the knife-blade D should form a right 
angle with the blade C, and to maintain it in 
this position a small spring b, of any familiar 
variety, is attached to the side of the recep 
tacle B, and also fastened to the knife-blade 
D at the point c in the side of the blade. A 
Small slot is cut in the edge of the receptacle 
B near the point of attachment of the spring 
to the knife, as shown in the drawings, which 
serves as a guide for the spring. Near the 
Outer extremity of the knife-blade D is a 
small eye d, in which is attached a cord or 
wire E. This cord or wire E passes around 
the side or sides of the receptacle B opposite 
the angle formed by the knives and diago 
nally down the side upon which is fastened 
the knife-blade C, and thence along the pole 
A to the hand of the operator. That it may 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
f 
 
OO 
424,934 
In a fruit-gatherer, the combination of a 
box, basket, or other suitable receptacle for 
fruit, carried upon a long handle or pole, two 
knife-blades, one fixed and the other mova 
ble, pivoted together upon the top of the re 
ceptacle and adapted to cut the stems of fruit, 
and a cord or wire attached to the extremity 
of the movable blade opposite the extremity 
at which it is pivoted to the fixed blade, said 
cord or wire passing around the receptacle 
and along the handle or pole to meet the hand 
of the operator at the free end of the pole, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto Set 
my hand and seal in the presence of two Sub- 35 
scribing witnesses. 
25 
JOHN WELD PECIK. 
L. S. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES MOLONY, 
CHESTER W. MERRILL. 
O 
be held in proper position, it passes through 
small staples e e e. For convenience of ma 
nipulation of the cord or wire and to prevent 
its slipping, the rounded side of the recep 
tacle or the sides opposite the angle made by 
the knives are slightly cut away for a little 
distance from the upper edge, as shown, and 
the knife-lblade D is bent as above described. 
The method of operation is as follows: The 
receptacle B is held by the operator directly 
under the fruit to be gathered, with the knife 
blade C just touching the stem, the blade D 
being held at right angles to the blade C by 
the spring lb. As the cord or wire E is pulled, 
the blade D is brought into contact with the 
blade C, the stem of the fruit is cut, and the 
fruit itself drops into the receptacle IB. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States, is 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425034.txt	J. W. HUSSEY & E. WOODWARD. 
MACHINE FOR WARNISHING AND POLISHING MOLDINGS. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 425,034. 
E 
s 
 
 
 
 
  
Patented Apr. 8, 1890. 
* 
Is HH 
fin, mann, H 
TsIMH r 
ill. mNHAIPI 
A. 
"sty's H 
i. 
HILITHITIII III 
with s 
 
 
H H 
-- 
SES 
is 
it 
out 
all 
This 
it - NIH 
similli?till III III III 
IIHEm H. 
IHILITHITITUTIII 
I 
s 
: 
Ntors 
22. 
| NV 
2.7. 22.2% 
W) 
- 
I 
Q 
l 
at 
ma 
Q 
h 
lee. Y 22- 
yet . 
7zazzau-72. &ee 
-- . 
. 
 
(No Model. 
8. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. W. HUSSEY & E. WOODWARD. 
MACHINE FOR WARNISHING AND POLISHING MOLDINGS. 
No. 425,034. 
 
Patented Apr. 8, 1890. 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
  
  
H 
 
s 
s 
 
 
  
 
ex iii. Io IIIM 
S 
E" 
SGI Intil 
III.il 
I 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
R 
 
s X 
 
EAEAAAI Erict FI 
BI 
IEEE 
Timitirii 
Eagela 
Y 
 
III-III IIHIII 
s III.iiiltu fi III 
I 
HE 
p II lop" 
HIS 
 
 
  
   
'4. 5sses, 
7.3% 44.2, 
s 
NVENtors. 
22z4Aziz 
 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet. 3. 
J. W. HUSSEY & E. WOODWARD. 
MACHINE FOR WARNISHING AND POLISHING MOLDINGS, 
 
J. W. HUSSEY & E. WOODWARD. 
MACHINE FOR, WARNISHING AND POLISHING MOLDINGS, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
(No Model.) 
No. 425,034. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1890, 
%5% i. 
. 
42 
Mr N esses. s 
Nvento Rs. 
 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
J. W. HUSSEY & E. WOODWARD. 
MACHINE FORWARNISHING AND POLISHING MOLDINGS, 
No. 425,034. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1890. 
 
J. W. HUSSEY & E. WOODWARD. 
MACHINE FOR WARNISHING AND POLISHING MOLDINGs, 
8 sheets-Sheet 6. 
(No Model.) 
No. 425,034. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1890. 
O s a 9-scru, 
a2ssay 
E - graph 
8 SE SC 
ses less Eee 
s 
Witnesses. 
ea. 932- 
INVENTORS. 
14ty 
4//i.e. 4-2-2. 
 
(No Model.) 
8. Sheets-Sheet 7. 
J. W. HUSSEY & E. WOODWARD. 
MACHINE FOR WARNISHING AND POLISHING. MOLDINGS, 
No. 425,034. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1890. 
Q) 
Q) w 
to 
() 
 
- 
Eli Ei?e 
Afted 
r 
E. 
22 
INVEN-tors, 
 
J. W. HUSSEY & E. WOODWARD. 
MACHINE FOR WARNISHING AND POLISHING MOLDINGS, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
(No Model.) 
No. 425,034, 
Patented Apr. 8, l890. 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
s 
 
 
 
s 
is 
M ses 
is are 
1N A 
t & L. 
N. 
 
- SNil r 
year irr, 
 
WITN esses 
NVEN-tors 
--- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. HUSSEY, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, AND ERASTUS WOODWARD, 
OF SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
. 
MACHINE FOR WARNISHING AND POLISHING MOLDINGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,034, dated April 8, 1890. 
Application filed May 22, 1889, Serial No. 3ll,735, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JoHN W. HUSSEY, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, and ERASTUS WOODWARD, of 
5 Somerville, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Machines 
for Varnishing and Polishing Moldings, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
Io the accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
The object of our invention is to construct 
and arrange in a single organized machine 
devices by which strip-moldings may be var 
nished, oiled, and polished in a rapid, eco 
I5 nomical, and superior manner. This object 
We accomplish by the mechanism shown in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of our machine, it 
being represented as broken in the middle of 
20 its length, so that it may be presented (in a 
shortened view) on a large scale. Fig. 2 is a 
plan of the same. Fig. 3 is an elevation of 
the left end as represented in Figs. 1 and 2. 
Fig. 4 is an elevation of the right end as rep 
25 resented in Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 4 is a detail 
shown in an enlarged view. Fig. 5 is a sec 
tion showing in elevation one of the cams 
and the connected levers and a segment-gear 
operated by the cam, the view being taken 
3o from the opposite end from which Fig. 3 was 
taken. Fig. 6 is a front elevation, on an en 
larged scale, showing that part of my machine 
that supplies the varnish, oil, &c., to the sur 
face to be polished and does the polishing. 
35 Fig. 7 is a plan of the parts shown in front 
elevation in Fig. 6 and on the same scale. 
Fig. S is an end elevation of the parts shown 
in front elevation in Fig. 6 and on the same 
Scale. 
In general terms our machine consists of a 
large cylinder of a length exceeding somewhat 
the length of the strips of molding to be pol 
ished and having as many flat sides or facets 
as may be desired for attaching the strips of 
45 molding to be Worked upon. In the machine 
illustrated We have seventeen facets, and con 
sequently may have attached that number of 
strips of moldings to the cylinder at one time. 
As this cylinder slowly revolves, a carriage 
5o having connected to it tubes for delivering 
4o 
the polishing-fluid and polishing tools or rub 
bers traverses lengthwise of the cylinder, the 
motion of the carriage being such that it will 
traverse the whole length of the molding 
strip, while the cylinder is making that part 55 
of a rotation that corresponds to three-fourths 
of the distance that one of the moldings is 
from another. Then the carriage has a relative 
motion opposite to that of the cylinder that 
takes it to the next molding, and so on until 6o 
all of the moldings on the cylinder have been 
treated. 
In the drawings, Figs. 1, 2, and 4, M repre 
sents a large revolving cylinder which has 
seventeen facets M'M', each of which is in- 65. 
tended to hold a strip of molding M. The A1 
several strips of moiding are held to their 
respective facet by the following-described 
lea, S. 
MM, Fig. 4, represent shafts passing lon- 7o 
gitudinally through the cylinder M, there be 
ing one of these shafts for each facet. Each 
of the shafts M8 (see Fig. 4) has upon it a 
number of beveled gears like M'. Each of 
the gears M' engages with a gear M, which 75 
is connected to a gimlet-pointed screw M' in 
the facet M'. The screws Mare so arranged 
that they have a free longitudinal motion in 
relation to the housing of the gear M, but it 
must revolve with the gear M, so that by 8o 
turning the shaft M the screw may be made 
to enter the back of the molding M on the 
facet M', and thus hold it firmly in place. By 
turning the shaft Mbackward the screw M. 
may be withdrawn from the molding M, and 85 
thus allow it to be removed. 
A rotary motion is given to the cylinder M. 
by the following means: B, Figs. 1, 2, and 3, 
is the main driving-shaft, which has upon it 
a driving-pulley B'. (See Figs. 1 and 2.) Mo- 9o 
tion is communicated from the shaft, B to the 
shaft B of the cylinder M by means of the 
pinion B on the shaft B, (see Figs. 1 and 4.) 
which engages with the gear B. The gear B: 
has connected to it a pinion B', which engages 95 
with the gear B, and this gear B has con 
nected to itapinion B", which engages with the 
gear B on the shaft B of the cylinder M. 
The above-described gears and pinions are 
so proportioned that the cylinder M will re- roo 
2 
425,024 
O 
volve but once while the main shaft B revolves 
fifty-one times. 
The gear B (see Figs. 1 and 4) is loose on 
the shaft B, but is put in working connec 
tion with it by means of the lisk 13. This 
disk B is rigidly attached to the shaft IB or 
to the cylinder M, so that the cylinder MI must 
revolve when the disk B' revolves. The disk 
B' is provided with a series of holes to b, by 
means of which and a pin at l it can be con 
nected to one of the spokes l of the gear 
wheel B. By withdrawing the pin at l the 
cylinder M may he turned (by hand) inde 
pendently of the other parts of the machine. 
This is convenient when the operators are re 
moving the finished moldings or placing new 
moldings on the cylinder, the manner of do 
ing which will be hereinafter explained. 
C, Figs. 1, 2, and 3, represents a device 
which is made to traverse over the length of 
the molding to be polished. This device is des 
ignated in a general way by C in Figs. 1, 2, 
and 3; but in Figs. 6, 7, and S it is shown in 
very much enlarged views and its several 
parts are designated by letters. In fact, all 
of the parts shown in Figs. 6, 7, and S are at 
tached directly to the carriage C1 and move 
with it, except the rail C", upon which the 
carriage moves. The rail C' is also shown in 
IFigs. 1, 2, and 3. 
The carriage C has connected to it the 
warnish-distributing and the rubbing or pol 
ishing devices, the construction and opera 
tion of which will be explained after its actu 
ating mechanism and its movements in rela 
tion to the other parts of the machine have 
been set forth, which we will now proceed to 
do. 
As the rotation of the cylinder MI, which car 
ries the moldings, is continuous, it is evident 
that the carriage C must have a compound 
motion-that is, one in the direction of the 
length of the cylinder M and one of rotation 
with it; but the movements of the carriage C. 
are intermittent and in termittently retro 
grade, so that at each completion of its back 
and-forth movement it rests in the same place. 
The rail C, (see Fig. 3.) upon which the 
carriage C makes its longitudinal motion, is 
moved back and forth in the line of rotation 
of the cylinder MI by the following means: 
The level's C''', to the upper end of which the 
rail C' is bolted, (see Figs. 3 and 5.) swing on 
the shaft B, to which they are loosely at 
tached by housing D and about which the 
cylinder M. rotates. Motion is given to thele 
wer C by the cam C', formed in the face of 
the wheel C, said cam C' acting on a pin C: 
at the end of the arm C, which is attached to 
the rocker-shaft C, the rocker-shaft C acting 
through the arm C, pivot C", link C, and pin 
CS in the said lever C". The wheel C (in 
which the calm C' is formed) is loose on the 
shaft IBS and is driven by the gear 130 on the 
main shaft, 13, it revolving once while the main 
shaft revolves three times, and as the cylin 
der M revolves but once when the main shaft 
3 revolves fifty-one times it will be manifest 
that the wheel C and its calm C revolves in 
relation to the cylinder M in the ratio of three 
to fifty-one-that is, as one to seventeen, Sev 
enteen being, as already stated, the number 
of facets (for receiving the moldings) on the 
- 
main cylindler. 
From the above it may be seen that the rail 
C and the carriage Cupon it must be moved 
ack and forth seventeen times in the time of 
one rotation of the cylinder M, for during the 
time that the cylinder M is making a seven 
teenth of its rotation the cam-wheel C will 
have made a full rotation, which full rota 
tion, working through the eam C', arms C'C', 
and link C7, will give the desired back-and 
forth motion to the rail C. 
The carriage C receives its longitudinal 
motion on the rail C" by the following-do 
scribed mechanism: D, Fig. 2, is a rope 
clamped at each end to the rear part C of the 
carriage C, and, passing around the pulley 
DS at one end of the machine and the actu 
ating-drum D'at the other end, acts as a trans 
mitter for giving motion to the carriage, tak 
ing its own motion from the drum ID". The 
drum D has attached to it a beveled gear 
D', which engages with a beveled gear D', 
mounted on a shaft in the quill P, attached 
to the upper end of the lever C, Fig. 2. (See 
also Figs. 3, 4, and 5.) The shaft upon which 
the beveled gear D'' is fastened at one end 
has at the other end a pinion ID, close to 
the face of the lever C'. (See Figs, 2 and 
3.) The pinion ID' engages with a pinion 
D' on a stud projecting from the face of the 
lever C'; and is attached to a pinion D1 on 
the same stud. The last-mentioned pinion 
D' engages with the reciprocatory segment 
rack I). The movement of the segment 
rack D10 communicates motion through the 
train of gears just described to the drum D', 
and it in turn, acting through the rope D, 
moves the carriage C. longitudinally over 
the moldings M on the facets M' of the cyl 
inder M. Reciprocatory motion is given to 
the segment-rack D'-(see Fig. 5) by means 
of a cam D', formed on the face of the wheel 
D, said wheel I) being loose on the shaft, 3. 
The cam D' gives motion through the pin D 
to the lever D. The upper end of the said 
lever D has a curved slot D, in which one 
end of the link ID is pivoted by a pin and 
nuts, as shown at ID". The link D is con 
nected at D' (through the slot (l) to the arm 
d' of the segment-gear D9. The arm (l' ex 
tends from the segment D" to the pivot-bolt 
C16 on the lower end of the branch C of the 
lever C, and the level D is attached at its 
lower end by a pivot-bolt D to the lower end 
C of the lever C. The cam-wheel D is 
driven by a gear (shown in dotted lines at 
B', Fig. 3) on the main shaft, IB, and it re 
volves but once while the cam-wheel C re 
volves twice. As the cam-groove D', acting 
through the cam-piece D', lever D', and link 
D gives motion to the segment-gear D1, it 
O 
25 
35 
15 
SO 
75 
95 
OO 
I o5 
To 
I 15 
f 25 
I 30 
 
425,034 
O 
will be seen that a full rotation of the said the train of gears D, &c., and drum D, give 
cam-groove D takes place while the cylinder 
longitudinal motion to the carriage C. 
Mis making two-seventeenths (of fifty-one) of 
We will now explain in detail the parts of 
its rotation, and it will be understood that the 
the carriage C and their operation, refer 
carriage C will twice traverse the length of 
ence being made to Figs. 6, 7, and 8. The 
its longitudinal stroke--that is, once forth 
device that we have designated in general 
and once back-and that it in going forth 
by the letter C1 and called the carriage 
takes one molding to work, and having gone 
has attached to it the varnish-distributing 
to the end of it is moved over to the next 
devices and rubbing devices and such mech 
molding (by the action of the cam C and its 
anism as are required for making these parts 
levers and links, as has been heretofore ex 
operative at the desired places. The carriage 
plained) upon which it works in its return. 
Ci is held to the rail C. by the plates c c, 
To clearly understand the motions of the 
Figs. 7 and 8, said plates being a part of the 
carriage C in relation to the motion of the 
frame of the carriage. The varnish-supply 
molding being worked upon, we must bear in 
device consists of the flexible pipe L, Figs. 6 
mind that having fixed upon the number of 
and 8, which leads from a suitable reservoir 
the moldings that are to be placed upon the 
(not shown) and connects directly to the dis 
cylinder Mat one time the lateral movement 
tributing-pipe L'. This pipeL'has a small nip 
of the carriage caused by the cam-wheel C 
ple L, (see Fig. 6,) out of which the varnish is 
and the longitudinal movement caused by 
drawn by means of a blast of air under press 
the cam-wheel D must have a certain fixed 
ure issuing from the air-nipple E9 on the pipe 
number of movements. 
E", Fig. 6. The pipe L, Fig. 8, is held by a 
In the present case we have adopted seven 
rod EP, which is attached to the pipe E by 
teen as the number of moldings to be placed 
the clamps E" E, Figs. 6, 7, and 8, said pipe 
upon the cylinder M at one time. Therefore 
E" being attached to the swinging frame E8 
our carriage C, to operate once on each 
by the clamps E. E. Motion is given to the 
molding, must traverse longitudinally seven 
swinging frame E by means of the gear 
teen times while the cylinder makes one ro 
wheel F, the teeth of which engage with a 
tation; but as the carriage works on one mold 
rack on the under side of the fixed rail C10, 
ing on its outward movement and another 
so that as the carriage C traverses along 
molding on its return movement, its com 
the rail the wheel F. rotates, and acting, 
pleted forth-and-back movement will occupy 
through the shaft F, the crank - disk F, 
the time that the cylinder. M is making two 
pin F, link F, and arm F1, actuates the 
seventeenths of its rotation. 
frame E and causes the ends of the dis 
The reason for choosing an odd number of 
charge-nipples L. E' to vibrate laterally over 
facets for the cylinder M is that it is neces 
the molding being polished, so as to distrib 
sary to go over the moldings a number of 
ute the varnish evenly over the whole surface. 
times to complete the work of polishing them, 
In the drawings, Figs. 6 and 7, it will be seen 
and in polishing it is desirable to change the 
that we have two sets of varnish-distributing 
direction of rubbing at each operation that 
devices, one at each side of the carriage C11. 
is begun in turn at each end of the molding. 
This is necessary, as our device operates over . 
By having an odd number of moldings on the 
the surface of the moldings in both of its pas 
cylinder it is evident that at each complete 
sages from one end of the cylinder to the other; 
rotation the carriage will be found alter 
but the varnish-distributing must always be 
nately at each end of the cylinder. 
done in front of the rubbers-that is, the rub 
The lateral motion of the carriage C'takes 
bing of the varnish follows its distribution in 
place at each end of its longitudinal move 
both the outward and inward passage of the 
ment-that is, when the carriage has, follow 
carriage. To secure this result, we have the 
ing the molding in its rotatory motion, arrived 
following device: The tank or reservoir that 
at the end of the molding that is being pol 
supplies the pipes L with varnish is of about 
ished. Then it will stop its longitudinal mo 
the same height as the nipples L., so that no 
tion, as at this point the cams C and D' and 
varnish will pass out of them unless it is 
the cinematic chains of connection with the 
drawn out by the force of the blast of air from 
carriage are so arranged and constructed that 
the air-nipples E. This air-blast is working 
there will be no motion of the lever C' in re 
only in the nipple that is in front of the rub 
lation to the segment D'. Therefore the pin 
bers for the time being-that is, when the 
ion D" (see Fig. 5) will not rotate, and no 
carriage is moving ill a certain direction-so 
longitudinal motion will be given to the car 
that there is no blast from the nipple that fol 
riage C.; but as, in fact, the upper end of the 
lows the rubbers, and hence there is no var 
lever C1 now has a rearward motion, it will, 
nish distributed except by the nipple L, that 
acting through the rail C''', take the car 
is for the time being in front of the rubbers. 
riage C laterally over to the next molding, 
Thus if the carriage is moving to the right, 
as has been explained. As soon as this lat 
(see Fig. 6,) then the nipple on the right-hand 
eral motion of the carriage has taken place the 
tube I' would be distributing varnish and the 
cams C and D in their continued rotation 
tube L' On the left would cease to deliver, 
give a relative motion to the lever C and 
and vice versa. 
the segment-gear D", which, acting through 
The device that we use for turning the air 
3o 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
125 
 
4 
425,034 
blast from one side of the carriage to the 
other is as follows: The air-pipes E E are 
connected by flexible tubes EE to the valve 
casing E E, (see Figs. 6 and S,) the casings 
E E being attached to the ends of a lever E, 
and also are in connection with an air-tube 
E, Fig. 6, the said air-tube E' being con 
nected to a supply-pipe S, Fig. S, through 
which air under pressure is constantly sup 
plied. The swinging lever E is pivoted at the 
center, so that it may swing in a horizontal 
plane in such a manner that it may place 
either of the valve-casings E E at its ends 
under the arm e'e'. Each of the valve-casings 
E E contains a self-closing valve that is 
adapted to close upward, and, when closed, to 
prevent the flow of air through its valve-cas 
ing. These valves are closed by a spring, 
(not shown,) which forces them upward against 
their respective seats, and are opened altel 
nately by the action of the arms e'e', as will 
be described. A swinging motion is given to 
the swinging lever E by means of fixed cam 
pieces E. E", Figs. 1 and 2, on the frame of 
the machine, which are so made and placed 
that at each passage of the carriage it, at the 
end of its path, will cause the end of the swing 
ing lever E to come in contact with it and be 
pushed over, so that the valve-casing E of 
that end (say at the right of Figs. 6 and 7) 
of the swinging lever will pass out from un 
der the arme', and at the same time cause the 
valve in E at the left to pass under the left 
arme', and to be in position to be acted upon 
that is, opened by it. 
The valves in E E are alternately closed 
and opened by the movements of the piece e' 
e', the motion of which, in connection with the 
rubbing device to which they are attached, 
will now be explained. 
II and K, Figs. 6 and 7, represent, two slid 
ing frames affixed by way-pieces KIXIXIX: 
K, Fig. 6, to the carriage C in such a man 
ner that they are free to slide up and down, 
the downward motion being limited, when not 
in use, by a projection extending rearward, 
one of which is shown ath, Fig. 8. In each 
of the sliding frames II and IX we have a 
sliding rod H, or, as the case may be, IX. 
The sliding rod II has its upper end loosely 
held in the upper projecting arm II and its 
lower end in a plate c, Figs. 6 and 7, which 
can slide in and out on the lower arm II, a 
slot being made in this arm for the rod H5 to 
oscillate in. A spring II", Fig. 6, one end of 
which is attached to the rod II and the other 
to some convenient part of the frame of the 
carriage C, draws diagonally, so that it acts 
to pull the rod II downwardly and in toward 
the carriage C at the same time. The slid 
ing rod IK is made like the rod II, but has 
no oscillating motion, its motion being up and 
down only, as its function is to polish the flat 
horizontal surface of the moldings, a tendency 
to a downwardlnotion being given itby a spring 
IX, surrounding the rod R. To the lower ends 
of the rods II and IX are attached pad-holding 
clamps, each having arms HII II", adapted to 
hold the rubbing-pads II and K. (See Fig. 6.) 
The rubbing-pads Hand K may be of any de 
sired material and their rubbing-surfaces may 
be of any desired shape to fit the molding to 
which they are to be applied. The sliding 
frames HS and K, to which the pad-rods II 
and IX are connected, are made to slide up, 
taking the pads with them, for the purpose 
of preventing the pads injuring the ends of 
the moldings as they pass off from them. 
When the carriage C has arrived at the end 
of its passage in either direction, the slides 
and pads are held- up until the carriage in 
its return has moved so far as to bring the 
pads again over the end of the next molding 
to be worked, when they are allowed to move 
down to the molding and to again work. The 
device for raising and lowering the pads and 
their holders consists of cam-pieces V V', 
Fig. 1, which, as the carriage C approaches 
the end of its stroke, engage with pins or 
rollers TT, Fig. 6, on the sliding pieces II 
IX and lift them up off from the work. The 
rubber II is made to swing outwardly by 
means of cam-pieces TT, (see Fig. 1) which 
come in contact with the plate c on the arm 
II, and in sliding it outward cause the rod 
II and its pad II to swing out and away from 
the edge of the molding. 
The cam-pieces E, V', and T are all at 
tached to blocks T, one at each end of the 
machine. These blocks are adjustable on the 
rail C''', so that they may be set for each 
length of molding that it is desired to work. 
Now, returning to the valve-casings E E, 
Figs. 6, 7, and 8, and the pieces e' e', we can 
understand their action, for said pieces e'e' 
being attached to the sliding pieces II K, 
and, as we have seen, the sliding pieces 
move up and down at the end of each passage 
of the carriage, (by the action of the cam 
pieces W.) it is obvious that the pieces e'e' 
will also move up and down, and in moving 
down will cause the valve-stem e of the valve 
casing Ethat is under them to be pressed down 
and thus open its valve and allow a blast of 
air to enter the tube E, and thence to the 
nipple E", and thus start a flow of varnish on 
to the molding to be polished. Remember 
ing that only one of the valve-casings Ecan 
be in position to be acted upon by either of 
the pieces e', and that one is the one that 
precedes the rubbers, it is obvious that var 
nish can only flow through the nipple E9 that 
in motion precedes the carriage and the rub 
bers. 
The shape, motions, and number of the rub 
bing-pads may be varied to suit the work to 
be done. 
For convenience in placing the moldings 
onto the cylinder M, we have the following 
device: W, Figs. 1 and 3, is a foot-lever af 
fixed to a rocker-shaft. W.", upon which shaft 
an arm Wextends, so as to make a loose 
connection by a pin W with an arm W ex 
tending from a second rocker-shaft W. 
75 
IOC 
IO 
I I5 
wa 
95 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
425,034 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
55 
the time that either of the pads reach the end 
of the moldings they must have begun the 
motion of part rotation about the axis of the 
cylinder M, so as to keep always on the mold 
ing--that is, rotating with the said cylinder 
and while the moldings are rotating three 
fourths of the distance apart or three-fourths 
of one - seventeenth, equal to three - Sixty 
eighths of a whole rotation, the carriage hav 
ing the pads will have traveled the Whole 
length of the molding, and the driving-shaft 
B will have rotated two and one-fourth times. 
The gear-wheel C, with its cam-groove C', 
which operates the levers C'C', links C, and 
through them the carriage-rail C''', thus calls 
ing the pads to keep with the moldings, Will 
have revolved three-fourths of a rotation. 
The gear-wheel D, with its cam-groove D', 
will, acting through its transmitting mechan 
ism, cause the carriage C and the pads to 
move longitudinally along the moldings, its 
motion being three - eighths of a rotation. 
When the moldings have rotated the remain 
ing one-fourth () of their distance apart, or 
one-fourth of one-seventeenth, equal to One 
sixty-eighth of a complete rotation, they Will 
have made one-seventeenth of a whole rota 
tion. The pads will have been returned by 
the rearward action of the upper end of the 
lever C1, as already explained, back to the 
original line, and be in a position correspond 
ing to that in which they started at the other 
end and ready to move from left to right. 
The driving-shaft B having made three rota 
tions, the gear-wheel C has made one, and the 
gear-wheel D one-half of a motion, thus com 
pleting the operation of laying and polishing 
one coat of varnish. That is all the Work 
that is done on the molding until the cylinder 
M makes a full rotation. Then the Work on 
that molding is repeated, and so on until suf 
ficient number of layers are applied and pol 
ished. 
From this second rocker-shaft Wis a number 
of supporting-arms W extend upward, and 
have attached to them adjustable guide 
pieces like WW for supporting the mold 
ing before it is placed onto its facet on the 
cylinder. By this arrangement the molding, 
after having been placed on the arms W. 
may by simply depressing the foot-lever W, 
be accurately moved and adjusted to its ex 
act place on the facet of the cylinder M, 
ready to be secured to its place by the device 
shown in Figs. 4 and 4 already described. 
To hold the cylinder M in position while 
placing the moldings, we have a locating-le 
yer R, the lower end of which is pivoted at 
R, Fig. 4, its upper end being forked, as 
shown at R, Fig. 4, and adapted to embrace 
(See Figs. 1, 2, and 4.) 
One of the shafts M3. 
To use our machine, we proceed as follows: 
The cylinder M is set free from the main shaft 
Bby removing the pin b, Fig. 4, from the 
disk B". Now the cylinder is turned by hand 
until one of the shafts M8 comes opposite the 
fork of the locating-lever R. The lever is 
then pushed forward until it engages with 
the shaft, and thus holds the cylinder M in 
Such a position that one of its facets M' will 
be exactly opposite to the molding that has 
been previously placed between the guide 
pieces W and WS of the lever W6. Now 
the operator by depressing the foot-lever W. 
forces the molding against the facet of the 
cylinder and in contact with the points of the 
Screws M. Then by turning the proper shaft 
M, the molding will be secured onto its 
facet. The cylinder is now turned so as to 
bring the next facet into place, and a repeti 
tion of above-described operations will affix 
another molding. These operations may be 
continued until all of the facets of the cylin 
der have moldings affixed to them. Now by 
reinserting the pin b the cylinder M will be 
reconnected to the main shaft. The next 
Operation is to adjust the cam-blocks TT on 
I claim 
the rail C', so that the pad-holders will be 
1. In a machine for varnishing and polish 
lifted and dropped at the right time and 
ing moldings, a revolving cylinder M, having 
otherwise moved into and out of working po 
longitudinal facets M', each of which is pro 
sition. This having been done, the pad-hold 
vided with sets of clamping-screws adapted 
ers can be adjusted to the proper height by 
to be turned simultaneously by means of a 
longitudinal shaft, so as to engage with and 
means of the thumb-screws H' and K. The 
lateral rubbing-pad H can be adjusted by 
securely hold their respective molding, sub 
moving the plate c and fastening it in the 
stantially as and for the purpose Set forth. 
desired position by the clamping-screw c'. 
2. In a machine for varnishing and polish 
(See Fig. 8.) The pad-holders should be so 
ing moldings, a revolving cylinder M, having 
adjusted and shaped that they will bear with 
longitudinal facets M' for holding moldings, 
an even firm pressure on all parts of the 
a rail C''', having a partial rotating motion 
moldings. It only remains for the operator 
about the axis of the cylinder M, transmitting 
carriage C, moving on said rail, having self 
to see that his varnish-reservoir is full, and 
that the varnish-supply pipes and nipples 
acting varnish distributing and rubbing de 
are in good order, and that pressure requisite 
vices, substantially as and for the purpose set 
for a good blast of air is on the air-pipes, and 
forth. 
the machine may be started, 
3. In a machine for varnishing and polish 
ing moldings, a continuously-rotating cylin 
The relative motions and degree of motion 
of the several parts may be briefly stated as 
der M, adapted to hold moldings for being var 
follows: Suppose the carriage C to begin its 
inished and polished, a carriage-rail C''', par 
passage at the right as we view the machine 
allel to and near the surface of said cylinder, 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and passes to the left. By having a partial rotating motion about the 
75 
99. 
95 
Od 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
' 
425,034 
with fixed cam-pieces W V', adapted to oper 
ate upon the rubbing-pads II IX, attached to 
the carriage C, and the carriage C''', substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
7. In a machin for varnishing and polish 
ing moldings, a continuously-rotating cylin 
der M, a partially-rotating rail C''', parallel to 
and near the surface of the said cylinder M, 
having at its ends adjustable head-blocks T 
T, provided with fixed cam-pieces TT, adapt 
ed to move the rubber II in a lateral direc 
tion, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
8. In a machine for varnishing and polish 
ing moldings, the traversing carriage C, hav 
ing air-pipes E, provided with valve-casings 
and valves E, adapted to be automatically 
oscillated and opened for the admission of air 
as required, fixed cams E at the end of the 
tail C, adapted to open said valves E, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose. 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses on this 20th clay of 
May, A. D. 18S9. 
JOHN W. USSEY. 
ERASTUS WOOI)WAR). 
Witnesses: 
FRANK G. PARKER, 
MATTHE W. M. BLUNT, 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
axis of the cylinder MI, and an automatically 
moving carriage C, located on said rail, pro 
vided With an automatic device for clistribut 
ing varnish onto the moldings as presented by 
the cylinder, substantially as and for the pur 
pose, set forth. 
4. In a machine for varnishing and polish 
ing moldings, a continuously-rotating cylin 
der MI, adapted to hold molding for being pol 
ished, a carriage-rail C', parallel to and near 
the surface of said cylinder, having a partial 
rotating motion about the axis of the cylinder 
M, and a carriage C, moving on said rail, pro 
vided with an automatic device for polishing 
the moldings presented by the cylinder, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. In a machine for varnishing and polish 
ing moldings, the cylinder M, adapted to hold 
and present, moldings to the action of the var 
nishing and polishing devices, as described, 
the locating-lever R. R', attached to the frame 
of the machine and provided with a fork at 
its upper end, said fork adapted to engage 
with one of the shafts M, and the molding 
receiving levers WW, adapted to operate as 
described, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
6. In a machine for val'nishing and polish 
ing moldings, a continuously-rotating cylin 
der M, a partially-rotating rail C", parallel to 
and near the surface of said cylinder, having 
at its ends adjustable lead-blocks T. provided 
o 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425134.txt	T. HOLMES. 
EMBALMING SYRINGE, 
Patented Apr. 8, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 425,134, 
 
71222eep2.e. 
22.2% 
A 622-yeva - 
12zezeaz 
Z222aeep /ZoZea?e 
tons pereas co, Phoro-Litho, WASHING", 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS HOLMES, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
EMBALMING-SYRINGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,134, dated April 8, 1890. 
Application filed September 7, 1889, Serial No. 323,235, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern 
Be it known that I, THOMAS HOLMES, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Embalming-Syringes, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to apparatus for em 
balming the dead, and the purpose thereof is 
to provide an extremely simple and inexpen 
sive apparatus whereby any antiseptic pre 
serving fluid of any suitable character can 
be injected into the arteries and veins by a 
continuous operation and under any required 
degree of elastic pressure. 
To this end the invention consists in the 
combination, with an elastic expansible res 
ervoir, of an eduction-pipe proceeding from 
the lower part thereof and having a suitable 
point and an air-induction pipe communicat 
ing with said reservoir and provided with a 
compressible air-bulb having suitable valves, 
whereby air may be forced into the reservoir 
to a suitable point of expansion and retained 
therein to exert an elastic force upon the 
fluid and force it gently and continuously 
into the tissues or into the arteries and veins, 
the compressing force being aided by gravity. 
The invention consists, also, in the several 
novel features of construction and new com 
binations of parts hereinafter fully set forth, 
and then definitely pointed out in the claims 
which follow this specification. 
To enable those skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe the 
same in detail, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view showing the complete 
apparatus. Fig. 2 is a partial sectional ele 
vation showing the valvular arrangement. 
In the said drawings, the reference-numeral 
1 denotes a flexible reservoir formed of a ma 
terial capable of yielding under pressure 
such as rubber-whereby said reservoir may 
be expanded by internal pressure. Connected 
to the lower portion thereof is an eduction 
tube 2 of flexible material and of suitable 
length to permit the reservoir to be suspend 
ed at any limited height above the point of 
insertion or injection of the embalming-fluid. 
This tube is provided with a suitable point 
3, and a small forcing-bulb 4 may be con 
nected with said tube, if desired. This bulb 
is of substantially the same form and con 
struction as the bulbs used upon enema 
syringes, and is similarly provided with check 
valves 5 and 6. 
Communicating with the interior of the ex 
pansible reservoir is an air-induction tube 7, 
having a forcing-bulb 8, similar to the one 
upon the pipe 2, and provided with check 
valves 9 and 10, a separate valve 12 being 
placed at or near the mouth of the pipe in 
the reservoir to resist the tendency of the 
confined air to escape. A cock 13 is placed 
in the eduction-pipe 2, and a loop or strap 14 
is attached to the mouth or top of the reser 
voir to enable it to be hung up upon a hook 
or nail. A suitable neck 15 is mounted on 
the top and provided with a screw-stopper or 
valve to permit the reservoir to be filled and 
prevent the escape of the air. 
In use the reservoir containing a suitable 
quantity of embalming-fluid is hung upon a 
hook or other support at a height proportioned 
to the degree of pressure under which the 
fluid is to be injected. If the blood-vessels 
are weak and easily ruptured, care must be 
used in graduating the pressure to the ca 
pacity of the arteries and veins to resist it. 
The point 3 on the tube 2 is then inserted in 
the well-known manner, and the cock 13 is 
opened, permitting the fluid to flow through 
the tube. If greater pressure is required, the 
bulb 8 is operated to force air into the res 
ervoir and expand the elastic wall of the same 
until the necessary degree of pressure is 
reached. The operation may be further as 
sisted by the action of the compression-bulb 
4, by which the pressure may be increased 
momentarily if circumstances require it. 
This construction and organization of parts 
Constitutes a complete embalming apparatus, 
capable of continuous operation at any re 
quired uniform pressure, the whole being ex 
tremely simple, easily operated and regulated, 
and manufactured at a comparatively low 
cost. A rubber handle 16 may be added to 
the reservoir to enable it to be carried. 
What I claim is 
1. In an embalming-syringe, the combina 
tion, with a flexible and elastic reservoir, of 
an eduction-pipe having a cock, an air-in 
dinction tube having a check-valve at its 
O 
25 
49 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
425,134 
5 
O 
mouth, an air-forcing bulb having suitable 
check-valves, and means for suspending the 
reservoir at a suitable height, Substantially 
as described. 
2. In an embalming-Syringe, the combina 
tion, with an elastic expansible reservoir hav 
ing a suitable valve or stopper, of an educ 
tion-tube proceeding from its bottom and hav 
ing a point and provided with a forcing-bulb 
having check-valves, an air-induction tube 
having an air-forcing bulb provided with 
check-valves, and means for Suspending Said 
reservoir, substantially as described. 
3. In an embalming-syringe, the combina 
tion, with the expansible elastic reservoir 1, 
of the eduction-tube 2, having the point 3 
and cock 13, the air-induction tube 7, and the 
bulb S, having the valves 9 and 10, the res 
ervoir being provided with the neck 15, hav 
ing a valve or stopper, Substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
THOS, HOLMES. 
Witnesses: 
JOS. A. BURR, Jr. 
G. P. T.INSLOW. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425234.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 425,234, 
J. C. MACEWITT 
FLUID CONTROLLER. 
Patented Apr. 8, 1890. 
2. 
 
6. 
Walz 
-6zzef , 
-6-4s. 
* Atri 
(zzierzz27: 
22-62se 
e1 -cs 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. MACEWITT, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FLUID-CONTROLLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,284, dated April 8, 1890. 
Application filed November 8, 1887, Serial No. 254,628, (No model.) 
-- . 
To all livion it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN C. MACEVITT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, County of Kings, and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Fluid-Controllers, fully de 
scribed and represented in the following 
Specification and the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
clamps for fluid-tubes. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
simple, inexpensive, and reliably-operative 
clamp for controlling the flow of a fluid 
through a tube of flexible material. 
One of the uses to which this invention is 
particularly applicable is in connection with 
nursing-bottles. It may, however, as will be 
readily seen, be used equally well in connec 
tion with syringes, douches, irrigators, &c. 
As a full understanding of the invention 
can be best given by an illustration and a de 
Scription of the same, such description will 
now be given, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved 
clamp, showing the same applied to a small 
Section or piece of tubing of flexible material. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the clamp, and 
Fig. 3 is a similar view of a slight modifica 
tion of the same. 
As shown in the drawings, the several parts 
of the clamp, with the exception of the slide 
G, are made from but a single piece of spring 
Wire. In the formation of these several parts 
a piece of spring-wire of a length suitable for 
the purpose is bent at a short distance from 
its center, so as to form the ring B, which is 
then bent up at about right angles to the two 
straight long and short portions of the wire. 
The short portion of the wire is then bent to 
form the pressing-surface C and the leg F. 
The longer portion is then so bent as to form 
the leg H, pressing-surface D, and square 
portion E, which square portion will be at 
right angles to the legs Faud H, and will in 
close the pressing-surface C, as shown in Fig. 
2, so as to prevent said pressing-surface from 
springing out of place. When the parts have 
been thus formed, a slide, as G, will be fitted 
over the legs F and H at the ring B, where 
they are drawn against each other and in 
close the same, as shown. 
- 
55 
The purpose of the ring B and square por 
tion E is to inclose the tube on which the 
clamp is placed and keep the opposed press 
ing-surfaces C and D in operative position. 
The slide Gis shown in the drawings in its 
normal position, or the position it will occupy 
when the clamp is not in use. 
The modification shown in Fig. 3 differs 
from the construction just described, in that 
it has no square portion E. 
The manner of using the clamp is as fol 
lows: When the clamp is not in use, the 
slide G will, as before stated, occupy the po 
sition in which it is shown in the drawings. 
When it is desired to diminish the flow of 
liquid through the tube to which the clamp 
is attached-say to one-half the capacity of 
the tube-the slide G will be moved along the 
legs F H to about midway of the length of 
said legs. This movement of the slide G will 
cause the pressing-surfaces CD to be drawn 
toward each other, and thereby press the tube 
between them, and thus contract the opening 
through said tube. When it is desired to 
stop entirely the flow through the tube, the 
slide G will be moved up against the square 
portion E, when the opening through the tube 
will be closed and no liquid will be allowed 
to pass through the same. To put the clamp 
out of operation, all that is necessary to be . 
done is to move the slide G. back against the 
ring B. 
What I claim is 
1. A clamp for fluid-tubes, consisting of th 
legs F and H, the ring B at one extremity 
thereof, pressing-surfaces CD at the other ex 
tremity thereof, and the slide G, for pressing 
said surfaces against the tube, Substantially 
as described. 
2. A clamp for fluid-tubes, consisting of the 
legs F and H, the ring B at one extremity 
thereof, pressing-surfaces CID at the other ex 
tremity thereof, square portion E, inclosing 
said surfaces, and the slide for pressing said. 
surfaces against the tube, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
JOHN C. MACEWITT. 
Witnesses: 
DANIEL FERRY, 
WM. J. HOWIE. 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425334.txt	(No Model.) 
G. A. MARKHA.M. 
COMBINED FOUR BIN AND SIFTER, 
No. 425,334. 
- 
Patented Apr. 8, 1890. 
 
I. I. It 
5 
We doesses: 
CW-22. 
/3%. 
% - 
1722 e 7z for: 
%. 6,777. Al-Y 
76-6 a? 
74/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. MARKHAM, OF COLD WATER, MICHIGAN. 
COMBINED FLO UR BN AND SIFTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,334, dated April 8, 1890. 
Application filed January 31, 1890, Serial No, 338,797, (No model.) 
55 
To all whon, it may conce7're 
Be it known that I, GEORGE A. MARK HAM, 
of Coldwater, in the county of Branch and 
State of Michigan, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Combined Flour 
Bins and Sifters; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains 
to make and use it, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawing, which forms part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
combined flour and meal bins and sifters; and 
it consists in the combination and arrange 
ment of parts, which will be more fully de 
scribed hereinafter, and particularly pointed 
out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
combined flour bin and sifter in which the 
operating parts are all supported in or upon 
a metallic frame of the construction herein 
after described, which is secured in the lower 
part of the bin." 
The accompanying drawing represents a 
vertical section of an implement which em 
bodies my invention complete. 
A represents the bin, which may be of any 
desired shape, size, or construction that may 
be preferred, and which is provided with a 
loop, hook, or other device B upon one side, 
so as to suspend it upon the wall or any other 
suitable support. The lower end of this bin 
is contracted in size, as shown, and the sift 
ing mechanism is located in this lower end. 
Rigidly secured inside of the lower end of 
the bin A is a metallic casting or frame C, 
which extends entirely across the bin and is 
provided with the downwardly-extended por 
tions D, which are provided with horizontal 
bearings, and the tubular bearing G, which 
extends vertically, as shown. The portions 
D are secured by rivets or otherwise to the 
bin A. Extending horizontally through these 
bearings is the cranked shaft O, which has 
the beveled wheel H secured to it, and which 
wheel meshes with the beveled wheel I, which 
is secured to the lower end of the vertical 
shaft J, which projects any suitable distance 
up into the bin, and to the upper end of 
which the stirrer L, of any suitable construc 
tion, is fastened. When the shaft O is re 
o 
3o 
45 
volved by its handle or crank, the shaft J is 
also caused to revolve and the stirrer L pre 
vents the flour from clogging in the bin. 
This shaft J projects through the bearing G, 
and has the brush P rigidly secured thereto, 
so that the brush is caused to revolve over 
the top of the screen Q, which is placed 
loosely in the lower portion of the bin and 
above the top of the casting C. The shaft J 
is held in an upright position by means of 
the tubular bearing G, so that it can have 
none other than a rotary movement. The ro 
tary movement imparted to the brush causes 
it to force the flour through the screen Q, 
and it then falls through the lower end of 
the bin A into the receptacle prepared to re 
ceive it. 
All of the parts of this bin are made re 
movable, with the exception of the casting 
C, and this can be made removable if so de 
sired. 
When the bin is not in use, its lower end 
will be covered by means of a cap, so as to 
keep dust and insects from getting into the 
four or meal. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a combined four bin and sifter, the 
combination, with the bin, of the casting C, 
which is placed in its lower end and pro 
vided with the two horizontal bearings at its 
ends, and the tubular bearing Gat its center, 
the horizontal operating shaft, the vertical 
stirrer-shaft, and intermeshing gears secured 
to each, the casting being made to form a Sup 
port for the operating parts of the sifter, sub 
stantially as shown. 
2. In a combined flour bin and sifter, the 
combination of the bin, the casting C, pro 
vided with the bearings at its ends, and the 
tubular bearing or journal G at its center, 
the horizontal shaft, O, the gear-wheels III, 
the vertical shaft J, the stirrer L, secured to 
the upper end of the shaft, the brush secured 
to the shaftJ, and the screen Q, substantially 
as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE. A. MARKHAM. 
- 
Witnesses: 
AMOS MARKHAM, 
AGNES GIBSON. 
75 
So 
85 
95 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425434.txt	F. L. KOLLBER, G, 
MACHINE FOR FLANGING BOILER HEADS, 
5. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 15, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 425,434. 
 
(No Model.) 
) 
F. L. KOLLBER, G, 
MACHINE FOR FLANGING BOILER HEADS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 425,434. 
SS 
sy s 
Sa: 
Patented Apr. 15, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
ACESHU 
Safi 
2ni 
W 
22 
3. 
4. 
s 
A. 
7/2-eyes 
(26. 2d 
HE SHA A 
SF 
AN S. 
i S2 
2. 
, 
NS S 
S 
N.  2. El 2 
2% 3 
st 2 
& 
H 
N22 
H 
NH 
S. s SNSS 
T 
SL A. 
H. H. 
2-2. / 
zzazz 
resorts Peters co., Photo-tut Ho., WASHINGTON, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 425,434, 
5 Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
F. L. KOLLBER, G, 
MACHINE FOR FLANGING BOILER HEADS. 
Patented Apr. 15, 1890. 
 
t 
S) 
s 
  
77%zee/seye's 
26 
? SSSSSSSSS 
the Norris PETERs co, PHOTO-rthex, WestNGros O. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 425,434, 
- 
F. L. KOLLBERG. 
MACHINE FOR FLANGING BOILER HEADS 
5 Sheets-Sheet, 4. 
Patented Apr. 15, 1890. 
( 
- F - 
R 
S. 
9 
& 
- 
H TTTE 
S. 
of 
H 
------ 
's 
suit. 
S. 
s 
S. 
s 
-8-8 
N 
| 
s: 
is 
& 
; 
|. 
s || 
| 
: 
| 
- a - 
772%asses 
(2,242.4% 
1 < 4E, 
Zz-ezzzzz/ 
 
(No Model.) 
F. L. KOLLBERG, 
MACHINE FOR FLANGING BOIER HEADS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 425,434, 
Patented Apr. 15, 1890. 
: 
- - - - - 
a- a - 
3.35. 
Eat/ 72 e-2A2. 
A. 
TE Nostria Pereas corkyro-tutio, washigoro, c.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDRICK L. KOLLBERG, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO JOSEPH BEE, 
OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR FLANG NG B OER HEADS. 
SPECIFICATION. forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,484, dated April 15, 1890. 
\ 
Application filed July 24, 1889, Serial No. 318,523, (No model.) 
- 
To all whon, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, FREDRICKL. KOLLBERG, 
a subject of the King of Sweden, residing at 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Machines for Flanging 
Boiler-Heads, of which the following is a speci 
fication, to wit: 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in machines for flanging 
boiler-heads; and it consists in the peculiar 
construction, arrangement, and operation of 
the same. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention pertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
it, referring to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view with a boiler-head in 
position to be flanged. Fig. 2 is alongitudinal 
sectional elevation with the parts in the same 
position as in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a cross-sec 
tional elevation with the parts in the same 
position. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation with the 
parts in the position which they occupy at 
the moment of completion of the flanging 
process. Fig. 5 is an end elevation with the 
parts in the same position as in Fig. 4. Figs. 
6 and 7 are details. 
In the several figures, 1 is the bed-plate 
supported upon the frame of the machine. 
2 is a cross-bar connected to the bed-plate 
and provided with trunnions 3 at its ends, 
which restin bearings 4. The bearings 4 are 
supported on blocks 5, which travel on ways 
6, and are moved by screws 7 and gears S for 
a purpose to be described. 
9 are screws operated by rod 10 and gears 
11 to adjust the center of the bed-plate nearer 
to or farther from the bar 2 to accommodate 
heads of different sizes. The screws are jour 
naled to the bed-plate, and their nuts are se 
cured to the bar 2 for this purpose. 
12 are centering-jaws moving in guides or 
slots on the bed-plate, by which the boiler 
head is centered upon the bed-plate. 
13 are screws for operating the jaws 12. 
14 represents a boiler-head in position on 
15 is a clamping-frame hinged to the bed 
the bed-plate. 
plate at 16. 
18 is a screw-hook suitably mounted on the 55 
17 is a guide-tongue on the free arm of the 
clamping-frame 15 to insure its being in the 
proper position when in use. 
free end of clamping-frame 15 and adapted to 
engage the edge of the bed-plate, as is shown 
in Fig. 2, and 19 is a hand-wheel through 
which screw 18 is tapped. By turning the 
hand-wheel the clamping-frame and bed- 6o 
plate are drawn together. 
ing-frame. 
bed-plate and arranged to revolve upon its 65 
Stem 22. 
20 are truss-rods for stiffening the clamp 
21 is a clamping-block at the center of the 
23 is a set-screw for adjusting the height . 
24 is a clamping-block on the frame 15. It 
of block 21. 
is also adapted to revolve and is provided with to 
an adjusting-screw 25. 
26 are the flanging-roller's mounted on shafts 
27 and operated by gears 28 and 29 from the 
driving-shaft 30. 
receives power from a suitable source, as in 
dicated in Fig. 4, and 32 is a loose pulley. 
33 is a drum operated from shaft 30 by the 
- 
35 is a chain, which is wound up on the 8o 
31 is the fast pulley on the shaft 30, which 75 
gearing 34. 
37 (see Figs. 6 and 7) is a roller to support 85 
drum 33 as the latter revolves. Chain 35 
passes through an overhead block 36, and is 
connected to the bed-plate 1, so that the lat 
ter is turned up by it, as shown in Fig. 4. 
the boiler-head and prevent sagging and fric 
tion. It is especially useful in flanging large 
heads. 
In Operation, the bed-plate being down, as 
in Fig. 2, a blank boiler-head is placed on the 9o 
clamping-block 21 with its edge between the 
flanging-rollers 26. The centering-jaws 12 
are then operated by screws 13 and brought 
into contact with the boiler-head, and thereby 
center it on the bed-plate and block 21. The 95 
clamping-frame is brought down, the hook 18 
engaged. On the edge of the bed-plate, and the 
hand-wheel 19 set up so that the boiler-head 
14 is tightly clamped between blocks 21, and 
24. 
tracted to free the edge of the boiler-head, and 
the machine is set in operation. As the flang 
The centering-jaws are then slightly re. Ioo. 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
2 
425,434 
ing-rolls 26 revolve, they turn the boiler-head the adjusting-screws 9, and the rod and gears 
so that all parts of its edge are operated on 
for operating said screws. 
3. The combination, substantially as set 
by them. At the same time the chain 35 is 
forth, of a bed-plate having Supporting-trun 
wound up on the drum 33 and gradually 
turns the bed-plate to its upright position. 
nions on opposite sides, bearing-blocks for 
(Shown in Fig. 4.) The combined action forms 
each trunnion, and guideways on which said 
a flange on the head. This. Operation being 
blocks move to withdraw the head from the 
flanging device. 
completed, the machine is stopped and the 
flange on the head drawn out from between 
4. The combination, Substantially as Set W 
forth, of a bed-plate Supporting trunnions 
the flanging-rollers by turning the screws 7. 
upon opposite sides thereof, movable bear 
The bed-plate may then be returned to its 
horizontal position, the clamping-frame 15 re 
ing-blocks for each trunnion, the guideways 
leased, the flanged head removed, a new blank 
on which said blocks move, and the screws 
substituted, and the operation repeated. 
for moving the blocks. 
5. The combination, substantially as set 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
forth, of the bed-plate, the clamping-frame, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
the pivoted clamping - blocks, and the set 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, Substantially as set 
screws for adjusting said blocks. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
forth, of the bed-plate provided with trun 
nions, the traveling bearings for said trun 
presence of two witnesses. 
nions, the screw's 7, for adjusting said bear 
ings, the clamping devices, and the flanging 
rolls. 
2. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of the bed-plate, its supporting-beam, 
H. HARRISON, 
CHAs. C. TILLMAN. 
FREDRICK L. KOLLBERG, 
w 
35 
Witnesses: 
O 
15 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425534.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 425,534, 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT FOR CONVERTING. MOTION, 
L. A. BRENER. 
Patented Apr. 15, 1890, 
 
A a 
 
III.ii. FA TITIT 
F.R 
it. 
NITV. T. 2-7 TT N 
ar. orra 
He- 
  
 
 
 
HE McRas PETERs co, Photo-Litha, washhoron, d.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS A. BRENER, OF SAND WICH, ILLINOIS. 
MECHANCA MOVEMENT FOR CONVERT N G M OTO N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,584, dated April 15, 1890. 
Application filed December 26, 1889, Serial No. 334,973, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LOUISA. BRENER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Sandwich, 
in the county of DeKalb and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Mechanical Movements for 
Converting Motion; and I do declare the foll 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
tel's of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
The special object of the invention is to pro 
duce a mechanical movement by which the 
reciprocating pump-rod of a windmill may 
impart rotary notion for driving other ma 
chines. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the drawings, and then pointed 
out in the claim. 
Figure I of the drawings is an elevation in 
perspective; Fig. 2, a plan view, partly in sec 
tion; and Fig. 3, a detail perspective view of 
the coil-spring with the pivoted spring-pawl 
upon its end. 
In the drawings, A represents a vertical 
plate having cogs on each of its opposite edges 
and provided with the arms a Cla'. The arm 
a passes through the guide a in the upright 
frame J and connects with the pump-rod of a 
windmill, which moves it up and down. On 
the lower end of the rack-plate the arms a' 
a' pass through the frame-guides act. 
C C are two pinions keyed to the ends of 
the shafts D D and rotating them as they 
turn. The shafts D D are journaled in and 
extend across the frame J, so that the pinions 
C. C may be rotated by the rack-plate A. On 
each of the shafts D is made fast one end of 
a heavy coil-spring F, whose free end extends 
ro 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
o 
out a little beyond the outer edge of the ratch 
et-wheel E', which is fast concentrically upon 
the side of the spur-wheel E. This spring F 
has on its end a carrying-pawl f, which is held 
to the ratchet by a small spring f. 
To the rotary shaft G; journaled in and ex 
tending across the frame J, is keyed a pinion 
H, which meshes with both of the oppositely 
placed spur-wheels E. E. On the same shaft 
G is also made fast, a balance-wheel I. 
The operation is as follows: The recipro 
cating rack-plate A. oscillates the wheels C C, 
which actuate the shafts D D, while the pawls 
falternately carry the spur-wheels E a half 
revolution, one as the rack-plate moves up 
and the other as the rack-plate moves down, 
thus causing the pinion H to revolve continu 
ously with the shaft G and balance-wheel I. 
and 
At the start and termination of the up 
down strokes of the lack-plate Athere is a 
Sudden momentary stop and start, which tends 
to give an unsteady motion to the windmill; 
but I prevent this by the use of the springs F 
and the balance-wheel I. 
Having thus described all that is necessary 
to a full understanding of my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to protect by Let 
tel's iPatent, is 
The combination, with the reciprocating 
rack-plate A, the shafts D D, carrying pin 
ions C C, the shaft G, carrying the pinion II, 
and the spur-wheels EE, carrying the ratchet 
wheels E'E', of the springs FF, coiled about 
the shafts D, having one end attached thereto, 
and provided at the other end with the spring 
pawls ff, as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
LOUIS A. BRENER, 
Witnesses: 
O. K. LEMERE, 
AUGUST BRENER 
 
SF 
ero 
LSP 
d 
CN 
s 
CS 
2. 
-- 
so 
d 
und 
cxs 
A 
CAd 
Sea 
old 
al 
was . 
d 
- 
S 
O 
c 
CD 
ad 
- 
me 
-Cd 
CD : 
It is hereby certified that the name of the patentee in Letters Patent No. 425,534, 
granted April 15, 1890, for an improvement in Mechanical Movements for Converting 
Motion, was erroneously written and printed Louis A. Brener, whereas said name 
should have been written and printed Louis A. Breuer; and that the said Letters 
Patent should be read with this correction therein that the same may conform to the 
record of the case in the Patent Office. 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 13th day of May, A. D. 1890. 
. 
CYRUS BUSSEY, 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 
SEAL. 
Countersigned: 
C. E. MITCHELL, 
Commissioner of Pattents. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425634.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK S. RUDGE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
DEVICE FOR SECURING FERRY BOATS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,634, dated April 15, 1890. 
Application filed December 23, 1889, Serial No. 334,721 (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all, whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK S. RUDGE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Devices for Securing 
Ferry-Boats; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention,such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the Same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
devices for automatically securing and releas 
ing ferry-boats; and it has for its object the 
15 provision of a very simple and efficient de 
vice by which the ferry-boat will be automati 
cally secured to the slip or wharf as it ap 
proaches the same, and which can be easily 
operated by the pilot to release the boat. 
The invention consists in certain novel 
features hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the annexed drawings, which fully illus 
trate my invention, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the coupling hook or ring attached to 
the wharf. Fig. 2 is a similar view of the 
pivoted block or coupling-pin on the boat, 
showing it engaged by the coupling-ring. 
Fig. 3 is a view showing the manner of oper 
ating the device to release the boat. Fig. 4 
is a perspective view looking at the rear end 
of the box or support for the coupling-hook. 
In carrying my invention into practice I 
secure to the wharf or ferry-slip a box or 
support A, which may be of any suitable size 
or material, and is provided in its upper side 
with a longitudinal V-shaped groove B, as 
shown, in which the coupling-hook Crests. 
At the rear end of the box or Support I pro 
vide the vertically - adjustable standard or 
supporting-plate D, which is mounted between 
the rearward extensions E of the box or Sup 
port and is secured at any desired height by 
the bolts F, which are mounted on the exten 
sions E and engage perforations or sockets G. 
in the plate or standard. The said plate or 
standard is further provided with One or more 
openings H, through which the shank or body 
of the coupling-hook passes, and chains I are 
secured at their upper ends to the inner or 
rear side of said plate and have pins J at 
tached to their lower ends. Similar chains K. 
35 
45 
 
are provided on the front side of the plate 
and have pins L at their lower ends. 
The coupling hook or ring M consists of a 
bar or shank N, having an eye or loop at its 
outer or front end and provided with the 
longitudinal Series of openings P near its 
rear end. The bar or shank rests in the 
groove B and projects through one of the 
openings H in the vertical plate or standard, 
So as to be Supported in proper position to en 
gage the coupling-pin on the boat. The 
coupling hook or ring is secured in position 
by inserting the pins J and I through the 
openings P, so that they bear against the 
front and rear sides of the plate, thus pre 
venting the hook from having any endwise or 
longitudinal motion. The hook is supported 
and secured in the event of the chains J and 
K being unfastened by the chain Q, which 
has its ends secured to the upper front cor 
ners of the box or support Aby spring-hooks 
and its central portion passed through a ring 
R on the coupling-hook. 
The coupling-pin S is pivoted in a slot Tin 
the floor or deck of the boat, and has its up 
per and lower ends extending, respectively, 
above and below the deck. The upper end of 
the pin is cone-shaped, as shown at V, so as to 
provide a deflecting surface, up which the end 
of the coupling-hook may ride and pass over 
the end of the pin to engage the same. The 
rear side of the pin, at the upper end thereof, is 
provided with a Series of notches or shoul 
ders, which engage the coupling-hook in the 
operation of the device to prevent the acci 
dental and premature release of the boat, 
Below its pivot the coupling-pin is provided 
with a slot or notch W, which is engaged by 
the end of a lever Y, pivoted on the under 
side of the deck. The opposite end of this 
lever is connected by a pitman Z with a ver 
tically-disposed lever a, which extends up 
into the pilot-house. 
In practice the coupling-hook rests loosely 
in the bottom of the groove in the box-sup 
port A and projects from and beyond the 
front end of the same, while the coupling-pin 
is arranged normally in a vertical position 
and held in such a position by the end of the 
lever Y engaging the notch W, as will be 
readily understood upon reference to the 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
2 
425,684, 
5 
drawings. As the boat approaches the wharf 
the coupling-hook will ride upon the deck and 
over and into engagement with the coupling 
pin, thereby securing the boat. If it is de 
sired to release the boat, the pilot throws the 
vertical lever backward, thereby vibrating 
the horizontal lever, so as to release the same 
from the coupling-pin, when the strain ap 
plied to the pin by the boat moving from the 
wharf will cause it to swing on its pivot into 
a horizontal position, so that it may readily 
pass under the coupling-hook. While the 
boat is making its trip the coupling-pin is re 
turned to its normal vertical portion, and the 
lever then again engaged in the notchin the 
pin, so that when the boat approaches the 
other wharf it may be automatically secured 
thereto. 
It will be observed from the foregoing de 
scription that I have provided a very cheap 
and simple device by which the boat will be 
effectually secured to the wharf, and which is 
entirely automatic in its operation. By the 
use of my device the boat can be very quickly 
secured without necessitating the attendance 
of operators, thus effecting an economy of 
time and labor. The series of shoulders or 
notches in the upper end of the coupling-pin 
provides for a positive engagement of the 
coupling-hook, notwithstanding any differ. 
ence that may exist between the heights of 
the wharf and the deck of the boat. The ver: 
tical supporting plate or standard can be 
quickly and easily adjusted to correspond to 
the tide, and the manner of supporting the 
coupling-hook permits it to readily rise and 
fall in the operation of the device. 
It will be understood, of course, that I do not 
- limit myself to the exact details of construc 
tion shown in the drawings, as it is obvious 
that many minor changes may be made there: 
in without departing from the principles of 
my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
is 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
1. A device for securing ferry-boats, con 
sisting, essentially, of a coupling-hook se 
cured to the wharf, a pivoted coupling-pin 
carried by the boat and adapted to be en 
gaged by the coupling-hook, and means for 
operating the coupling-pin, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the vertically-ad 
justable supporting-plate mounted on the 
wharf, the coupling-hook carried thereby, and 
a coupling-pin carried by the boat and 
adapted to be engaged by the coupling-hook, 
as set forth. 
3. The combination of the coupling-pin piv 
oted in the deck of the boat and having a 
notch in its side below its pivot, the lever en 
gaging said notch, means for releasing said 
lever, and the coupling-hook mounted on the 
wharf and adapted to engage the coupling 
pin, as set forth. 
4. The combination of the pivoted coup 
ling-pin in the deck of the boat, having a se 
ries of notches on its rear side in its upper 
end, means for operating said pin, and the 
coupling-hook mounted on the wharf and 
adapted to engage the notches in said pin, as 
set forth. 
5. The combination of the box or support 
secured on the wharf and having a longi 
tudinal groove in its upper side, the coupling 
hook resting in said groove, the chains se 
cured to the box and the hook, and the pin on 
the boat adapted to be engaged by the hook, 
6. The combination of the box on the wharf, 
the vertical plate adjustably secured to the 
rear end of the box, the coupling-hook adjust 
ably secured to said plate and supported by 
the box, and the pin carried by the boat and 
adapted to be engaged by the said hook, as 
set forth. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
as set forth. 
. . 
- 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
FREDERICK S. RU DGE. 
Witnesses: 
ALEXIS GREEN, 
B: LUERSSEN. 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425734.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. BIR CH, 
SHE AWE. 
No. 425,734, 
Patented Apr. 15. 1890, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. BIRCH, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO CHARLES J. KAIGHIN, OF SAME PLACE. 
SHEAVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,784, dated April 15, 1890. 
Application filed December 20, 1889, Serial No. 334,427, (No model.) 
To all whom it nucly concer'7. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. BIRCH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of Cali 
5 fornia, have invented an Improvement in 
Sheaves; and I hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
Sale, 
My invention relates to the class of sheaves 
Io or pulleys; and it consists in the novel im 
proved construction thereof, hereinafter fully 
described, and specifically pointed out in the 
claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
I5 sheave having a separable or detachable eas 
ily-renewable wearing-surface, whereby the 
body of the sheave may be preserved indefi 
nitely. 
Though my improved sheave may be used 
20 in any place or connection, it is especially of 
Value in the construction and maintenance 
of cable roads, being adapted for use in the 
tension-carriage, at all places where a change 
of direction of the rope is had, at the terminus 
25 of the road where the rope returns, and wher 
ever there is particular strain and wear of the 
cable. In these and similar places the sheaves 
always Wear out on their rims, and they then 
have to be entirely renewed-a difficult and 
3o expensive proceeding-and in the operation 
of cable roads a delay is caused, the effect of 
which is to tie up the entire road. My inven 
tion avoids this necessity, and also gives other 
advantages, which will be presently pointed 
35 out. Referring to the accompanying drawings 
for a more complete explanation of my inven 
tion, Figure 1 is a side elevation of one-half 
of my sheave. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the 
4o rim and separabie or detachable segments 
thereof, the latter being shown as slightly re 
moved from the rim for better illustration. . 
The sheave A is formed of the usual hub Cl, 
arms a', and complete grooved rim B. On 
45 each side of the rim is formed a flange b. C 
are separable or detachable independent seg 
ments. These are formed with a base adapted 
to be fitted properly in the groove of rim B, 
a groove c in their face, and side flanges c', 
5o which fit on the flanges b of the rim. These 
 
6o 
With my sheave the necessity of immediate 75 
segments may be of any desired length, and 
they are sufficientin number to extend around 
the entire periphery of the rim B and form 
the wearing-surface of the sheave. They are 
secured to the rim by means of boltsD, pass- 55 
ing through the side flanges b and c', the 
heads of said bolts being countersunk, in or 
der to avoid any projecting points or portions 
which might catch the clothes of a person 
Working at or about the sheave. 
It will be readily seen from the foregoing 
that an improved sheave of this kind will ob 
viate the main disadvantages heretofore men 
tioned. It can be used continuously until the 
segments wear down, and even then, if the 65 
sheave cannot be immediately attended to, 
no injury will result for an appreciable time, 
for the reason that the rim Bitself will selve 
for the rope. This feature of having a com 
plete and operative rim, which can and will 7 O 
come into action when the segments are worn 
down, is of prime importance in cable roads, 
for these sheaves are generally located in ob 
Scure places and situations difficult of access. 
attention is not present, for the rim B will serve 
for the rope after the segments are worn down. 
Again, when using the ordinary sheave, the 
tendency of the rope is to cut off one of the 
walls or sides of the grooved face of the rim, 8o 
and to drop down onto the hub or other parts 
of the structure and be thereby injured. With 
my sheave this does not occur. When the seg 
ments are worn, they can be easily removed and 
others substituted, thus making the body of 85 
the sheave last indefinitely. 
The particular construction of the rim with 
its side flanges and that of the segments with 
their side flanges are to be noticed as furnish 
ing practical means of uniting them, leaving 9o 
the groove of the segments clear of all bolt 
heads, whereby it can wear uniformly and not 
injure the rope. 
In practice the sheave is of cast-iron. The 
segments being small pieces, comparatively, 95 
are made of very close iron, and are conse 
quently hardler than the sheave-rim. A very 
important advantage of this construction lies 
in the provision of such a thick wearing-sur 
face as is shown. Such thickness Would not too 
2 
425,784 
45 
55 
thick wearing-surface at their bases, substan 
tially as herein described. 
3. An improved sheave formed with a com 
plete rim having a grooved face and separable 
or detachable segments fitted in the grooved 
rim, and having deeply-grooved faces and 
thickened bases, whereby they form a renew 
able wearing-surface for the sheave, substan 
tially as herein described, 
4. An improved sheave formed with a com 
plete rim having on each side a laterally-pro 
jecting flange, separable or detachable seg 
ments fitted to the rim and forming a renew 
able wearing-surface for the sheave, said seg 
ments having laterally-projecting side flanges 
fitting on the flanges of the rim, and bolts at 
opposite sides securing said flanges together, 
substantially as herein described. 
5. An improved sheave formed with a com 
plete rim with a grooved face and a flange on 
each side, separable or detachable segments, 
each provided with a deeply-grooved face fit 
ted in the grooved face of the rim and forming 
a renewable wearing-surface for the sheave, 
said segments having side flanges fitting on 
the flanges of the rim, and bolts securing said 
flanges together, and having their heads coun 
tersunk in the flanges of the segments, sub 
stantially as herein described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
WILLIAM H. BIRCH. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. NoURSE, 
H. C. LEE. 
O 
be practicable in the rim itself, for in casting 
it the shrinkage would be so unequal as to 
render Such a construction undesirable. Extra 
Weight in the rim is not wanted; but the extra 
thickness is possible in the segments. 
In making the ordinary sheaves it is the 
practice to turn out the rim-groove smooth. 
This breaks the skin and makes the wear more 
rapid; but in my construction the compara 
tively small segments may be cast smooth in 
their grooves, thereby preserving the skin and 
adding to their wearing qualities. 
I am aware of that improvement in the man 
ufacture of pulleys which contemplates the 
use of a separable spider and rim; but this is 
not like my invention, for I propose to use a 
complete sheave composed of hub, arms, and 
rim, which gives me the advantage of the rim 
strength and endurance, and to this complete 
device I apply my wearing-segments. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An improved sheave formed with a com 
plete rim and laterally-projecting side flanges, 
and separable or detachable grooved and 
flanged segments secured to the face of said 
rim on each side, and forming a renewable 
wearing-surface for the sheave, substantially 
as herein described. 
2. An improved sheave formed with a com 
plete rim having a groove in its face and lat 
erally-projecting side flanges, and separable 
or detachable segments fitted in the groove of 
the rim and forming a renewable wearing-sur 
face for the sheave, said segments having a 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425834.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 425,834, 
J. B. SWORD, 
MOISTENING DEWICE, 
Patented-Apr. 15, 1890. 
sSSSSSss 
S. 
 
  
... 
 
% 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHoro-itHo., washi:GTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES B. SWORD, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MOISTENING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,834, dated April 15, 1890. 
Application filed April 29, 1887, Serial No. 236,547. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES B. SWORD, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing in Phila 
delphia, Pennsylvania, have invented a cer 
tain Improved Moistening Device, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention consists of certain improve 
ments in the moistening device for which 
Letters Patent were granted to me February 
13, 1883, and numbered 272,350. 
The object of my present invention is to 
simplify and improve the construction of the 
device and make it in a convenient and in 
expensive form for not only moistening 
gummed papers, but for use as a pen-wiper, 
and to take the place of the usual sponge-cup 
used by bank tellers, cashiers, and others. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my improved moistener, 
showing the parts separated. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional view, drawn to a larger scale, with the 
lid removed. Fig. 3 is a sectional view show 
ing the device in the form of a pen-Wiper, the 
cap or lid being raised. Fig. 4 is a view, 
partly in section and partly in elevation, of 
the device in the form of a finger-moistener. 
Fig. 5 is a view of a modified form of finger 
dampener; and Fig. 6 is a sectional view of 
another modification. 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, A is the open 
water - reservoir, which reservoir may be of 
any suitable material, but is preferably made 
of ornamented glass and of the cylindrical 
form illustrated. 
The box or cup B, containing the absorbent 
material, is adapted to rest on the top of this 
reservoir and is so constructed as to have a 
pendent leg of the absorbent substance ex 
tending down into the reservoir nearly to the 
bottom. By this means a moistening-Surface 
equal to the diameter of the water-reservoir 
is obtainable, while a comparatively small 
portion of the water-space is taken up by the 
absorbent material, and the reservoir will 
need replenishing only at comparatively long 
intervals. 
In practice I prefer to make the box or Cup 
B for the absorbent material of sheet metal, 
the upper part being in the form of a flanged 
disk resting on the top or mouth of the reser 
voir and having a central pendent tubular 
extension D, which extends nearly to, the bot 
tom of the reservoir and is open at or near 
its lower end. In the present instance the 
tube has an opening e at the bottom formed 
by the inward flanged on the end of the tube. 
Into the cup or box B thus formed by the 
flanged disk and its pendent tube is placed 
the absorbent material F, preferably absorb 
Over the surface of this absorb 
ent cottOn. 
ent substance I place a layer or disk G, of 
fabric or other suitable material, preferably 
a fabric composed of cotton and wool. 
EO. . 
convenience an outer sheet or layer of textile 
material is placed above this to form the 
moistening - surface H, and both layers are 
held in place, and in turn hold the absorbent 
cotton in place, by being inserted at their 
peripheries under the flange b of the contain 
ing cup or box B. By preference the absorb 
ent material is made to protrude from the 
bottom of the tube D, so as to facilitate the 
absorption of the water by the whole mass. 
The textile surface H will always have suffi 
cient moisture to enable such articles as 
stamps, gummed envelopes, and the like to 
be readily moistened, and this will continue 
until the reservoir is almost entirely emptied 
It can then be conveniently re 
of Water. 
filled by simply lifting off the box or cup B. 
A suitable lid I may be employed to cover 
the moistener, so as to prevent evaporation 
when the device is not in use. 
The pendent leg of the absorbent material 
for the cup or box B may be formed without 
the tubular extensioni) of the said box by 
simply dispensing with said tube and allow 
ing the absorbent material alone to hang 
down through an opening in the disk portion 
of the cup or box, as illustrated in Fig. 6. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 3 the 
moistening-surface is composed preferably of 
plush H', which takes up the moisture from 
the cotton and thus forms a very efficient 
pen-wiper. When the plush surface becomes 
clogged with ink and dirt it can be readily 
washed off. 
The construction shown in Fig. 4 is in 
tended for moistening the finger-tips, for the 
use of bank tellers, cashiers, and others. 
Over the absorbent material in this case is 
placed an elastic hemispherical enlargement 
adapted to be grasped by the tips of the fin 
ners to moisten the latter, in the same way as 
95 
ECO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
425,834 
O 
2 
the ordinary sponge-moistener is grasped. 
This enlargement in the present instance 
consists of a hollow rubber hemisphere IK, se 
cured at its margin in any suitable way to a 
plate J, adapted to fit under the flange b of 
the cup or box. Both plate and hemisphere 
are perforated, the former atti and the latter 
at k, for the passage of the absorbent mate 
rial and moisture, the interior of the hemi 
sphere being filled with absorbent material 
and there being also a layer of it outside the 
rubber, as shown. 
The rubber and cotton are inclosed in a 
covering L, preferably of cotton and wool, 
which may be secured to the rubber at its 
edge. Over this again is placed an outside 
textile layer M, which forms the moistening 
surface, and at its margin is passed around 
and secured to the disk or plate J, so as to 
hold the whole together. The margin of the 
disk or plate J fits under the flange b of the 
cup or box B. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 5 the ab 
sorbent material passes through openings at 
the margin of the plate J instead of at the cen 
ter thereof. In this case the exterior moist 
ening-surface M is shown as of plush or simi 
lar material. 
It will be observed that in all cases the cup 
or box of absorbent material is always readily 
removable from the reservoir, and that the 
covers for the absorbent material and the ab 
sorbent material itself are also readily re 
movable from the cup or box. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the water-reservoir 
and the cup to contain absorbent material, 
and having a pendent leg and flanged edge, 
under which said absorbent material and its 
inclosing-cover extend, but from which they 
are removable, as set forth. 
2. The combination of the water-reservoir 
and cup to contain absorbent material, hav 
ing a pendent leg, with a perforated disk. in 
the said cup and through which the absorbent 
material passes, substantially as specified. 
3. A moistening device consisting of a 
water-reservoir and a cup containing absorb 
ent material, having a pendent leg and plush 
moistening - surface, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
JAMES B. SWORD. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
HENRY HOWSON, 
HARRY SMITH. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US425934.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 425,934, 
L. H. DONKEL, 
WEHICLE WHEEL. 
Patented Apr. 15, 1890. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LLOYD H. DONKEL, OF APOPKA, FLORIDA. 
VEHICLE-WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 425,934, dated April 15, 1890. 
Application filed November 20, 1889, Serial No,330,978, (No model.) 
To all whon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LLOYDFI. DONKEL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Apopka, 
in the county of Orange and State of Florida, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Vehicle-Wheels; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
Io pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to vehicle-wheels, es 
15 pecially adapted for buggies, wagons, car 
riages, or any vehicle to which it may be 
adapted. 
It has for its object to construct a wheel in 
which the hub shall be suspended by the 
spokes from the tires, while the spokes will 
be permitted to move toward the center of 
the hub, thus giving the maximum of elas 
ticity to the wheel, and at the same time dis 
tribute the strain through all the spokes, so 
that in addition to the increased elasticity 
there is also obtained greater strength with 
the minimum of weight. 
The invention will be hereinafter particu 
larly described and pointed out, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing a part hereof, and in which 
Figure I is a longitudinal section through 
the hub with the end caps removed. Figs. 
II and II are end views showing some of 
the spokes in place. Fig. III is a cross-sec 
tional view through one end cap; Fig. IV, 
a similar view through the other cap; Fig. V, 
an end view of a section of the tire; Fig. VI, 
a side and Fig.VII a sectional view of the 
lug, to which the spoke is secured in the tire. 
Fig. VIII is a section of the wood filling for 
the tire. Fig. IX is a view showing spokes in 
their working position. 
In the drawings, the letter A designates the 
hub, made of steel or iron or other suitable 
material and formed interiorly, as shown, to 
receive boxings, such as are in common use. 
The face of each end of the hub is beveled, as 
shown, and formed with a recess or series of 
grooves B, designed to receive the inner ends 
5O of the spokes c, and at the ends of the grooves 
next to the bore of the hub with a recess C, 
made deeper than the grooves and intended 
to receive the heads of the spokes c', which 
are preferably made solid with the spokes c 
and have angular faces. These spokes are 
firmly held in their grooves by the caps E, 
which fit against the front end F of the hub, 
and the cap G, which fits against the other 
end H, the said caps bearing against the 
spokes and the flat sides of the solid heads, 
so as to hold them against turning and lateral 
vibration, the caps being held to the hubs by 
bolts passing through the two parts. The 
caps are recessed, as shown at a, so as to re 
ceive so much of the solid heads of the spokes 
as does not lie flush with the groove-faces of 
the ends of the hubs, and the faces of the caps, 
which bear against the spokes in the hub, are 
flat or made without grooves. This construc 
tion is different from forming the groove for 
the spokes in the caps, and allows of an ad 
justment of the spokes not to be obtained 
when the grooves are formed in the caps and 
not in the hub. The cap G has on its outside 
a groove N, so as to prevent sand or other 
substances from accumulating in the inside 
or bore of Same. 
The hollow portion of the tire I is provided 
with a filling J, of Wood or other suitable ma 
terial, that will deaden sound. The filling 
also prevents the hollow portion from filling 
with dirt, and the top face is beveled, so as 
to shed or throw off the dirt. 
The blocks or lugs, into which the lower 
threaded ends of the spokes are screwed, are 
designated by the letter K. These blocks are 
of metal and formed with downwardly - ex 
tending ears or teeth L at such points that 
they can be driven into the Wooden filling of 
the tire, and by so placing them shoulders or 
flanges b are formed to rest upon the top edges 
of the metal sides of the tire. These blocks 
are fitted to their places by cutting away a 
portion of the wooden filling flush with the 
top edge of the sides of the tire, and then 
driving the blocks into the spaces thus formed, 
and so as to force the teeth or ears into the 
filling. A hole is then drilled through the 
blocks, the Wooden filling, and the metal of 
the tire, and rivets l passed through the hole 
thus formed, so as to secure the parts together. 
This block is thus made to secure the wooden 
filling to the tire, and is formed with screw 
45 
3O 
35 
- 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
425,934 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
 
3. In a vehicle-wheel, the combination of 9a 
threaded holes c, to receive the threaded ends 
of the spokes. The top face of the blocks K 
will be shaped to correspond with the shape 
of the top of the wooden filling. 
It will be observed that the solid heads of 
the spokes fit against the faces of the recesses 
next to the grooves, which is the case when 
the spokes are adjusted to their working po 
sitions, and that quite a space is left between 
the heads of the spokes and the inner wall 
This space is left so that the 
of the recess. 
spokes may have a longitudinal play or move 
ment at their end next to the hub when the 
tire strikes any hard obstruction, and thus by 
such play to distribute the strain over all the 
spokes and give the wheel greater elasticity. 
It will be observed, too, that under this con 
struction the hub is entirely suspended from 
the tire by the spokes, and that as the strain 
is pulling from the top it also pulls from the 
sides, and thus makes the strain uniform 
over all the spokes. This pulling strain is 
evident, because as the hub is suspended and 
the spokes have an end movement next to the 
hub any obstruction or pressure that will 
force the tire inwardly at the point of contact 
with the obstruction will tend to change the 
circle of the wheel to an oblong sphere, and 
thus the pull will be uniformly through all 
the spokes. 
In putting the wheel together the spokes 
placed in the grooves in the hub with 
are 
their heads lying in the recesses. The caps 
are then put in position and bolted tight 
enough to allow the spokes to turn, and their 
threaded ends are then screwed into their 
place in the blocks until all the parts are 
brought into proper place, and then the caps 
are securely bolted up, when the wheel is 
ready for use. 
If any one or more spokes should become 
broken or it be necessary to replace it for 
any reason, it is only necessary to remove the 
end cap, unscrew the spoke, and replace it 
with another, as in the first instance. 
The wheel so constructed possesses all the 
advantages hereinbefore assigned to it, and, 
besides combining the qualties of maximum 
elasticity and strength and minimum weight, 
it is also cheap to construct. 
I would remark that in the construction of 
my wheel the caps E and G hold an impor 
tant place. They extend the hub in its bear 
ings upon the axle, giving strength to the 
wheel, and they enable me to place the spokes 
with their heads in the recess, a thing which 
would be impossible in a hub formed as 
shown without the use of the caps. 
Having described my invention and set 
forth its merits, what is claimed is 
1. The vehicle-wheel having a hub formed 
at its ends with ways for the spokes to lie 
and freely move in, and with a recess be 
yond the inner ends of the ways to permit a 
movement of the spokes therein, said recess 
having walls adapted by their position and 
form to prevent the turning of the spokes in 
t 
the ways, said spokes having heads which lie 
within the recess and so formed that projec 
tions may strike the walls of said recess and 
prevent their revolution, said hub being pro 
vided with caps to fit over the ends to form 
one side of the ways and one wall of the re 
cess, substantially as set forth. 
2. The vehicle-wheel having spokes which 
have heads at their inner ends and so formed 
that when they are in their place in the hub 
they cannot be turned in their ways, and a 
hub with ways for the spokes to lie and have 
free longitudinal movement in, and having a 
recess beyond the inner ends of the ways, in 
which said heads upon the inner ends of the 
spokes may lie and have free longitudinal 
movement, said hub being provided with caps 
to fit upon its ends to formione side of the ways 
in which the spokes move, also one wall of 
the recess, and to furnish an extension of the 
bearing of the hub upon its axle, substan 
tially as set forth. 
spokes which have heads at their inner ends 
and so formed that when they are in their 
place in the hub they cannot be turned in 
their ways, and a hub with ways for the 
spokes to lie and have freelongitudinal move 
ment in, and having a recess beyond the 
inner ends of the ways, in which said heads 
upon the inner ends of the spokes may lie 
and have free longitudinal movement, said 
hub being provided with caps to fit upon its 
ends to form one side of the ways in which 
the spokes move, also one wall of the recess, 
and to furnish an extension of the bearing of 
the hub upon its axle, and a block firmly 
riveted to the tire of the wheel, which is 
adapted to form a nut to engage a Screw upon 
the outer ends of said spokes, thereby form 
ing a secure connection between the hub and 
rim of said wheel, substantially as described. 
4. The vehicle-wheel having a hub formed 
at its ends with recesses to permit an end 
movement of headed spokes therein, and pro 
vided with caps fitting against said ends to 
hold the spokes in place, and recessed to re 
ceive the head of the spoke and bearing 
against the same to prevent it from turning, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. The vehicle-wheel provided with a block 
having depending ears fitting below the top 
of the tire and secured thereto and formed 
to receive the lower ends of the spoke, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. The vehicle-wheel provided with a cap 
having on its outside a groove to prevent 
sand or other substance from accumulating 
in the inside or bore of same, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
LLOYD. H. DONKEL. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
- 
THOS. D. BOURLAND, 
T. G. HYER. 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
Io5 
I I5 
I 25 
  

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426034.txt	A, MAYER. 
AUTOMATIC F, USH TANK. 
Patented Apr. 22, 1890. 
 
 
 
w 5. 
1 2. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 426,034, 
 
.2/.44&sses 
7. 534 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST MAYER, OF PASADENA, CALIFORNIA. 
AUTOMATIC FLUSH-TANK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,034, dated April 22, 1890. 
Application filed August 7, 1889, Serial No. 320,003, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUST MAYER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Pasa 
dena, in the county of Los Angeles and State 
of California, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Automatic Flush-Tanks, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of flush 
tanks in which a siphon is caused to operate 
intermittently to empty a reservoir of water 
into the sewer or other channel at certain in 
tervals of time. In this class of flush-tanks 
provision has been made for starting the si 
phonage when the reservoir is sufficiently 
filled, and also for breaking the siphonage 
when the reservoir is sufficiently emptied. 
My invention relates more particularly to 
the means for starting and breaking the si 
phonage. 
The purpose of my invention is to produce 
an effective automatic intermittent flushing 
apparatus of few parts, simple and cheap of 
Construction, and not liable to get out of or 
der. I accomplish these objects by means of 
the device described herein, and illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a a vertical mid-section of my 
improved flush-tank. Fig. 2 is a view of the 
lower end of the outer chamber or bell D, 
which forms the intaking limb of the siphon, 
showing the siphon-breaking limb V in ele 
Vation. Fig. 3 is a plan view and horizontal 
cross-section on line aca, Fig.1, looking down 
Ward. 
Myinvention comprises an improvement in 
the means for starting the siphonage and an 
improvement in the means for breaking the 
siphonage and in the combination formed by 
the siphon-starting and the siphon-breaking 
leaS. 
My improved means for starting the siphon 
age consists of a siphon having its discharg 
ing limb provided with a slightly-sealed dis 
charging-orifice, and provided immediately 
above such discharging-orifice with an ab 
rupt enlargement or chamber. 
My improved means for breaking the si 
phonage consists of a siphon having its intak 
ing limb formed of two members, the mouths 
of which are at different levels, so that after 
the water has been siphoned almost to the 
lower mouth air will be admitted through the 
other mouth to supply the vacuum and break 
the siphonage. 
The drawings represent the form of con 
struction preferred by me, a modification 
thereof being indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 
1. The discharge limb A of the siphon is a 
vertical pipe having receiving and discharg 
ing orifices of equal capacity, and provided 
near its discharging-orifice with an abrupt en 
largement or chamber B, through which the 
water must fall before reaching Weir or trap 
C, the discharge c of which is slightly above 
the level of the discharge-orifice C of limb A, 
so that the discharge-orifice a is slightly 
sealed by the water in C. The bellor intaking 
limb D of the siphon is provided with a short 
auxiliary limb, pipe, or chamber W, cast inte 
gral therewith near the bottom or receiving 
end of the bell, and having its mouth slightly 
above the level of the mouth of the bell D, 
said limb V being connected near its top with 
limb or bell A by a small passage e. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
Water enters reservoir F through pipe G and 
fills the reservoir until the water in intaking 
limb D reaches top of discharge limb A. As 
the water rises in D, the air in D and A passes 
off into the sewer through the water-seal in 
C, so that the tension of the air in A remains 
approximately uniform until the water be 
gins to flow over the open top of A and through 
the enlargement or chamber B. Then the 
falling water carries air from B down through 
the slight seal formed at C and thus rarefies 
the air in A. The atmospheric pressure upon 
the surface of the Water in F causes the wa 
ter to rise more rapidly through.D., and the air 
in A is exhausted with increasing rapidity 
and the flow of water increased to supply the 
vacuum until the air is wholly expelled, and 
the siphon acts with a rush to discharge all 
the water in F down to the open mouth of D, 
which is below the mouth of W. The water 
in F now remains at the level of the mouth of 
D until the water in V has all passed through 
the passage e. Air then entel's D through 
passage e and ascends to the top of the bell, 
thus supplying the vacuum and allowing the 
water in D to dash back into F. 
The rapidity with which Vempties depends 
upon the relative sizes of V and e. I prefer 
to makeV as shown in the drawings, as D and 
75 
9 O 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
426,034 
IC 
V can be cheaply and conveniently cast in 
one piece and are not liable to clog. W may 
be made of greater length, and its place may 
be supplied by a pipe, as I, (shown in dotted 
lines,) the essential feature being that the 
mouth of one member of the intaking limb is 
higher than the mouth of the other member. 
The enlargement or chamber B is prefer 
ably funnel-shaped, the funnelterminating im 
mediately below the surface of the water, so 
that a small amount of falling water will cause 
sufficient agitation in the seal to carry the air 
out beyond the mouth of the funnel. The 
discharge-orifice of the funnel is of the same 
spacity as the receiving-orifice at the top 
Of A . 
The bell rests upon lugs L, as is customary 
in the construction of devices of this class, to 
allow a passage beneath it for the entrance: 
of water. 
Now, having described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a flush-tank, a siphon having its dis 
charge limb formed of a tube provided with 
an abrupt enlargement at its lower end and 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
having its discharge-orifice equalin cross-sec 
tional area to the cross-section of the main 
upper part of said tube. 
2. A siphon having the lower end of its dis 
charge limb provided with the funnel-shaped 
enlargement or chamber B, having its dis 
charge-orifice slightly sealed. 
3. In a flush-tank, the bell D set forth, pro 
vided near its bottom with the short auxiliary 
limb V, cast integral therewith near the bot 
tom of the bell and having its mouth slightly 
above the level of the mouth of the bell, said 
limb being connected near its top with the 
bell by the small passage e. 
4. In a flush-tank, the siphon set forth, hav 
ing its discharging limb provided with a 
slightly-sealed discharging-orifice, and pro 
vided immediately above such discharging 
orifice with an abrupt enlargement, and hav 
ing its intaking limb formed of two members, 
the mouths of which are at different levels. 
AUGUST MAYER. 
-- 
Witnesses: 
JAMEs R. To WNSEND, . 
J. W. ROBARDs. 
3O 
35 
4o 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426134.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J. MILLER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
ELECTRIC SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR HOTELS, 
No. 426,134, 
 
 
py/ITWAESSES, 
(No Model.) 
J. J. MILLER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
ELECTRIC SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR HOTELS, 
No. 426,134, 
 
Patented Apr. 22, 1890. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIIN J. MIILLER, OF CLEVELAND, OIHIO, ASSIGNOR TO JAMES P. LANGLEY, 
OF EAST SAGINAW, MICHIGAN. 
ELECTRIC Si G N ALI NG APPARAT US FO R HOTELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,134, dated April 22, 1890. 
Application filed February 15, 1889, Serial No. 299,944 (No model.) 
2o 
To all wiOn it inval? concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN J. MILLER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, county of Cuyahoga, State of Ohio, have 
5 invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Electric Signaling Apparatus for Ho 
tels; and I declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable other's skilled in the art 
IO to which it pertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this Speci 
fication. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a diagram 
I5 matic view illustrating my invention. Fig. 2 
is a separate view of the switch-board and 
simultaneous signaling apparatus. Fig. 3 is 
a vertical section of the same, and Fig. 4 a. 
detail of the indicator F. 
it is the purpose of my invention to pro 
duce a system of signals or signaling appa 
ratus for hotels, &c., which shall possess cer 
tain novel and valuable features, as follows: 
First, orie wire leading to each room and a 
25 common return-wire for all the rooms; Sec 
ond, connecting into such a One-Wire system a 
bell and push-button in each room, whereby 
the occupant may signal the Office, and a push 
button at the office, whereby the office may 
3o signal the occupant; third, connecting into 
the said circuit of each room the Office an 
nunciator-bell and individual annunciator 
drop; fourth, connecting into the said one 
wire system a office-bell, annunciator indi 
35 cators and bell, loom-bells, office and room 
buttons, and clock mechanism for automati 
cally signaling the rooms; fifth, providing 
simultaneous signaling apparatus adapted to 
signal the rooms by closing the same con 
4o tacts whereby the office signals the rooms in 
the regular course of business, thereby insur 
ing that the contacts for the simultaneous Sig 
naling apparatus shall be in operative order 
at all times; sixth, in the combination, with 
45 the foregoing, of electric mechanism where 
by the clerk at a distance from the annunci 
ator may, by pressing a button or key, close 
an electrical circuit and restore the indicators 
on the annunciator to their initial positions; 
5o seventh, in combining with the foregoing an 
indicato' on the annunciator-bell circuit, 
65 
adapted to be operated electrically by a room. 
Occupant, who, having pressed his button a 
given number of times for any particular ob 
ject, causes the indicator to legister and show 55 
the purpose of the call. 
In carrying out my invention, A represents 
the separate rooms of a hotel or other build 
ing, each provided with a bell Ca, push-button 
a', and contacts act, the connection being 60 
always maintained with C, except when the 
button is pressed by occupant, when it is 
opened at a* and closed with C. 
B represents the office annunciator-bell; 
C, the annunciator dropS or indicators. 
D represents the office push-buttons for 
signaling the rooms. Each is provided with 
two contacts (ld. The button is always in 
contact with d except when the button is 
pressed to signal a room, at which moment 70 
the contact is broken at d and made at d. 
E represents the lever of the simultaneous 
signaling apparatus. It is engaged with all 
the push buttons or keys D, so as to force 
them all simultaneously into contact with 75 
their respective contacts d' in case of fire or 
for other reason. In the instance shown the 
push buttons or keys Dare all fastened to 
the bar or leaf d, hinged at the lower edge. 
A link or pitman cliengages with the lever E, So 
so that by tilting the leaf the contacts are all 
made at Once, 
E' is an indicator of any convenient con 
struction, in which a ribbon, band, or the like 
is provided with characters corresponding 85 
with certain stated calls. Thus in the occu 
pant's room there may be a card indicating 
that the bell-button should be pushed once 
for a bell-boy, twice for the chamber-maid, 
three times for the porter, and so on, and 9o 
this indicator F is so arranged that it will 
advance the ribbon or band one space for 
each push of the button, and so leave exposed 
to view the purpose of the call. A button f 
may likewise be provided, whereby the clerk, 95 
after observing the call, may, by pressing the 
button, restore the ribbon to its initial posi 
tion. Such a construction is shown in a sepa 
rate view, Fig. 4, in which F is a ribbon hav 
ing the proper words Boots,Boy,Water, 
&c., printed upon it, and there is an orifice F 
through which one of said words may be ex 
OO 
426,134 
? ? 
15 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
posed. F is a ratchet on the upper drum; 
F', a spring for returning the drum to its 
original position. F is an actuating-pawl 
which serves to move the ribbon one word 
space whenever the circuit is closed through 
the magnet F on the room-button circuit. F 
is a pawl for holding the ribbon in any posi 
tion to which it may be moved and which 
may be released by closing the circuit through 
the magnet F on the circuit f' of the office 
button f, when the spring will retract the 
ribbon. f is a yielding section at the end of 
the pawl F, adapted to yield and permit the 
pawl to ride back past the ratchets after hav 
ing moved the ribbon a word-space, and the 
whole pawl will yield about its heel and ride 
over the ratchets as the spring retracts the 
ribbon. The annunciator C may also be pro 
vided with means connected with a push-but 
ton b whereby the clerk may from the desk 
at a distance from the annunciator, by push 
ing the button, restore the indicators or drops 
to their initial positions. That shown in the 
drawings consists of a leverb, connected with 
the push-rod band actuated by an armature 
lever b, this being in turn operated by a 
magnet b when the circuit is closed through 
the latter by the button b. 
G represents a clock mechanism. Its hour 
hand or corresponding arm or pointer con 
stitutes a part of its operative circuit. There 
are contact-points at every hour and at Such 
fractions of every hour as may be desired. 
On a suitable switch-board are room-strips 
H and time-strips H, adapted for connection 
at their intersections by pins h. 
The clock through suitable gearing is 
caused to revolve a cylinder G' once every 
hour, half-hour, or quarter-hour, depending 
on the time-spaces between the contact-points 
on the clock and corresponding therewith. 
This cylinder has a row of pins g, insulated 
or made of insulating material. The office of 
these pins is to operate the buttons or keys 
h', moving between two contact-points hh. 
When the pins are off from the keys, the 
keys maintain contact with the terminals h; 
but when the pins are brought into action 
against the keys they break the connections 
at hand make connection at the point h. 
This contact is maintained at, say, a half 
minute, (more or less,) or while the pins are 
revolving past the keys. It is during this in 
terval that the clock may operate automati 
cally to signal the rooms, as will be herein 
after explained. 
It will be observed that only one wire I 
leads from the office to any room, and that 
the return from any of the rooms to the office 
is by two trunk-lines II. There are, there 
fore, needed only as many wires as there are 
rooms plus two. 
I will now proceed to explain the operation 
of my system. Should the occupant of a room 
desire to call the office, he presses his push 
button a'. This breaks from a' and makes con 
nection at Cl, thus closing the circuit through 
Ct. I*, the battery X, annunciator-bell, the call 
indicator F, the annunciator C, line i, button 
or lever D, and line I back to the room, and 
by pressing his button the proper number of 
times he will make known his wants on the 
indicator F. The clerk having observed the 
call may press the button f and restore the 
indicator F to its normal State. 
Should the 
clerk desire to signal the occupant of any 
room, he simply presses the button or key D 
belonging to that room. He thus breaks from 
d and makes connection at d, thus closing the 
circuit through i, battery Y, line I, room-bell 
a, and line I. Whenever the office has been 
signaled the clerk may, by pressing the but 
ton b, restore the drops or indicators of the 
annunciator to their normal positions. Should 
a fire occur and it becomes necessary to alarm 
the occupants of all the rooms, the clerk si 
multaneously presses all the room-keys D 
through the medium of the simultaneous sig 
naling-lever E. Should any guest or guests 
desire to be called at a certain time, the clerk 
puts a pin h, at the intersection of the guest's 
room-strip II and the corresponding time 
stripH'. Now as the clock-pointersweeps over 
the contacts on its face there will be no effect 
until it sweeps onto that terminal correspond 
ing with the appointed hour. Even then no 
effectis produced until the cylinder G' turns 
around and brings the ping against the keys 
h'. This breaks the key from hand makes 
connectionath, and closes the circuit through 
room-strip H, pin h, time-strip H', the clock, 
line I, battery Y, room-bell a, line I, key D, 
and line back to the starting-point. The 
bell continues to ring for the half-minute or 
SO during which the ping is riding past the 
key h'. As soon as it has ridden past, the 
keybreaks from land re-establishes contact 
with hi. 
would have it understood that I do not 
limit myself to the particular mechanism. 
shown for performing the different parts of 
the Work, and the same may be materially 
varied without departing from the principles 
of my invention. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a single line for 
each room, two trunk-lines constituting a 
common return, the annunciator-bell on one 
of Said trunk-lines, room-bells, and annunci 
ator drops or indicators on each room-line, 
and the two-point push buttons or keys for 
each of said room-lines, of a clock having a 
series of terminals and connected with time 
and room Strips, as described, and a two 
point push button or key connected with the 
clock mechanism and normally in the office 
annunciator circuit, said clock nechanism 
adapted at Stated intervals and for a short 
period to break the key from its normal con 
tact and connect it with the room-bell circuit, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a hotel electric signaling apparatus, 
the combination of a single line-wire for each 
room, two trunk-line wires constituting a come 
-- 
7 ? 
75 
90 
95 
 OS 
If 5 
I 25 
mon return for the several rooms, an office tro-magnet and drum holding and releasing 
call-bell on the return trunk-lines, a bell and 
armature-lever for restoring the name-ribbon 
a tWO-point push-button for each room, an 
to its normal position, substantially as de 
annunciator - indicator on each room-line, a 
Scribed. 
call-indicator having a name-ribbon, a ribbon 
4. In a hotel signaling apparatus, the com 
propelling magnet in the call-bell circuit, and 
bination, with the room-bells and an electric 
a ribbon-restoring magnet in an independent 
circuit including the same, of the sets of of 
circuit controlled by a push-button in the of 
fice-contacts, each set comprising two sepa 
fice, and an office push-button in a circuit 
rated pieces d d", the office push-buttons D, 
each projecting between a pair of said con 
with the annunciator-indicators to restore the 
latter to their normal positions, substantially 
tact-pieces and normally held in contact with 
as described. 
one of the same, a hinged swinging leaf or 
3. In a hotel signaling apparatus, the Com 
bard, to which all the push-buttons are se 
bination of a single line-wire to each room, 
cured and with which said buttons swing 
two trunk-line wires constituting a common 
back and forth in the space between said sets 
of contact-pieces, and a lever E, for swing 
return from all the rooms, room-bells, annun 
ciator-indicators, a two-point push-button for 
ing the leaf or bar, substantially as described. 
(each room normally in the room-bell circuit, 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
a push-button at the office, and a call-bell and 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
Call-indicator at the office in circuit with the 
annunciator - indicators and the office and 
room push-buttons, and comprising a name 
ribbon, a spring-drum, an electro-magnet and 
drum-operating armature-lever, and an elec 
W. II. CHAMBERILIN, 
L. A. DOEILITZ. 
JOHN J. MILLER, 
25 
35 
426,134 
Witnesses: 
C) 
2 ? 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426236.txt	(No Model.) 
C. S. BUCKLIN. 
FRUIT AND WECE TABLE PULP MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 426,236. 
Patented Apr. 22, 1890. 
N 
s 
R 
RS 
R 
N 
t 
cy o 
s 
a BE 
fi 
N 
it 
| - 
N 
S. 
'S 
R 
s 
R 
& 
NS 
d d 
| 
o o 
Rs. 
W 
N 
N 
N 
s 
s 
--. 
R 
WITIESSES: I 
2. | 
t 
|| 
By 
INVENTOR: 
6-7 a. 
wn 
ATTORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 426,236. 
Patented Apr. 22, 1890. 
C. S. BUCKLIN. 
FRUIT AND WEGETABLE PULP MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
N 
SN22 2. 
al 2 % 
2 
zzzzzzzzzzzz 
/ 
WTAVESSES 
the Norris heters co-, photo-THo., WASHINGTON, - c. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
OR 
NT 
/S 
ld. 
ATTORMEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES S. BUCKLIN, OF KEYPORT, N E W J E R S EY. 
FRUIT AND VEG EABLE PUP VACH NE. W 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,236, dated April 22, 1890. 
Application filed October 19, 1889, Serial No. 327,565, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it in City conce77: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES S. BUCKLIN, 
of Keyport, in the county of Monmouth and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
Improved Fruit and Vegetable Pulp Machine, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
My invention relates to a machine to facili 
tate the reduction to pulp of tomatoes, pump 
kilns, and other vegetables, and also grapes, 
Currants, berries, and other fruits, and the 
Separation of the pulp from the seeds, skins, 
&c.; and the invention consists of the con 
Struction of the machine and of its various 
combinations and arrangements of parts, all 
as hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in Which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures, 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal Sectional eleva 
tion of my pulp-machine on line 1 1 of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 2 is a transverse vertical Section on line 
22 of Fig.1. Fig. 3 is a detailed perspective 
view of a portion of the inner removable sieve. 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of the 
outer sieve, and Fig. 5 is a detailed section of 
a part of the frame and a part of the bow 
which holds one end of the inner sieve. 
The main frame of the machine comprises 
Suitable standards Or legs AA, croSS-pieces 
B B, outer end walls C C, inner end wall D, 
and side walls E. E. At one end of the ma 
chine is constructed the hopper F, into which 
the fruit or vegetables to be treated are to be 
fed, which find their way from said hopper to 
the inner sieve G through the throat F in 
the end Wall C. The said inner sieve is 
curved or semi-cylindrical in form, and the 
vegetables or fruits are crushed and the pulp 
Worked through the sieve by the beater-arms 
H' H', which revolve with the main shaft H, 
which may be turned by a crank or 'un with 
belt and pulleys, as shown. 
In addition to the inner sieve G, which is 
of fine mesh, and which is removable from 
the machine, I use an outer or lower c0arse 
sieve I, which acts mainly as a Support or re 
enforcement to the inner fine sieve. The two 
sieves are curved or semi-cylindrical, as shown 
clearly in Fig. 2, and are held by the end 
pieces C D and side pieces E E of the main 
frame. The outer coarse sieve I is made fast 
by nails or other suitable fastenings to the 
longitudinal strips J J', which fit in recesses 
f'f'', formed in the curved end ribs IX. The 
intermediate bars J support the bottom of the 
outer sieve. The curved ribs X are framed 
into the side walls E E and fastened to the 
inner surfaces of the end walls C. D. The 
bars or slats J also rest upon the intermediate 
plain curved ribs IX', framed at their ends 
into the Side walls E. E. The curved end ribs 
Kare channeled, as shown at , alnd formed 
at the ends with lugsk'. These channels are 
to receive the end bows G of the fine inner 
sieve G, which fit snugly in the channels and 
prevent seeds, skins, and other foreign mat 
ter from passing the ends of the sieve and 
finding their way to the receptacle A. This 
sieve G, besides being secured to these end 
bows G', is also secured to the cross-pieces 
G', which unite the ends of the said bows G', 
as will be understood from Figs, 3 and 5. 
From this it will be seen that the bows G', 
cross-pieces G, and sieve G are independent 
of the rest of the machine and may be re 
moved and put in place at pleasure. Sieve I 
may also be removed with its slats or bars J'. 
The said bows are by preference of steel or 
other spring metal of a size to fit Snugly in 
the channels . They are simply sprung into 
the said channels under the lugs le", which 
hold the sieve, and when so in place the inner 
sieve is supported and re-enforced by the 
strong outer sieve I, so that pressure upon 
the inner sieve cannot bulge it out of shape 
at any point. 
The machine is provided with a cover A', 
which is to be closed during operation, and 
it is also provided with a receptacle A* to 
receive the pulp. The seeds and skins and 
all foreign matter not forced through the 
sieves are discharged at the Outlet-opening 
D' in the inner end wall D, and this opening 
may be closed more or less to regulate the 
discharge by a door or slide D. (Shown clearly 
in Figs. J. and 2.) 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
2 
426,236 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
In a pulp-machine, the curved ribs K, at 
5 tached to the main frame and channeled or 
grooved, as at lic, in their upper surfaces and 
provided with the outer re-enforcing sieve I, 
in combination with the inner fine sieve G 
and bows G', to which the said fine sieve is 
attached, said bows being adapted to fit in Io 
the channels of the curved ribs IK, substan 
tially as described. 
CHARLES S. BUCKLIN. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. WEST, 
EDGARTATE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426336.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 426,336, 
 
T. S. SHENSTON 
CAR BRAKE. 
Patented Apr. 22, 1890. 
s 
 
 
 
O iSys. 
- 47ezree Zop 
72%. 25%zyzzz, 
a 24 6. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS STRAHAN SHENSTON, OF BRANTFORD, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
CAR BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,886, dated April 22, 1890. 
Application filed February 20, 1890, Serial No. 341,192, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS STRAHAN SHEN 
STON, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
and a resident of Brantford, in the Province 
of Ontario, Dominion of Canada, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Cair-Brakes, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention has reference to improve 
ments in car-brakes in which a brake-shoe is 
forced into contact with the tread of a wheel 
by means of screws acting directly on such 
brake-shoes and operated from some conven 
ient point in the car by means of suitable 
flexible connections, and in which the appli 
cation and maintenance of great force upon 
the brake-shoes are insured without subject 
ing the intermediate connections to continued 
strain in order to effect such result. 
The improvement therefore consists, essen 
tially, in mounting a shaft having its ends 
threaded in opposite directions, so as to extend 
longitudinally between the treads of each 
pair of wheels on each side of the car-truck, 
brake-shoes mounted upon such threaded 
ends of each shaft, and chain-gear extending 
from such shafts to some suitable point on 
the car from which the chain may be operated 
to rotate the shafts simultaneously, and thus 
carry the brake-shoes into or out of contact 
with the treads of the truck-wheels, all as will 
hereinafter more fully appear. 
In the accompanying drawings I have rep 
resented a preferred construction embodying 
my improvements; and it will be understood 
that I am by no means limited by such iden 
tical structures, as they may be variously 
modified without departing from the princi 
ples of the invention. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of the chain gearing and connections, together 
with the two shafts operated thereby, Fig. 2 
is a plan view of the same with the brake 
wheel and guide-pulley shafts in section; and 
Fig. 3 is an elevation, partly in section, of the 
truck with the brake-shoes and operating 
shaft applied. 
Referring now to the drawings, there are 
shown two shafts 
2, each of which is re 
duced in diameter at its ends and there pro 
vided with right and left handed screw 
threads, respectively, as shown at 3. Cens 
trally upon each shaft there is mounted a 
sprocket-wheel4, and these shafts are mounted 
in hangers 5, depending from opposite sides 
of a truck-frame 6. The hangers are so lo 
cated that each shaft will extend longitudi 
nally between each pair of truck-wheels 7 of 
the truck, with the screw-threaded ends 3 pro 
jecting beyond the hangers and the sprocket 
wheel 4 confined between the same. 
Upon the screw-threaded ends 3 of the 
shafts 1 and 2 are mounted brake-shoes 8, 
each shoe being provided with a boss 9, in 
which is formed a nut for the respective 
screw-threaded end of the shaft, and the bear 
ing-faces of these brake-shoes are placed as 
close as practicable to the treads of the wheels, 
so that but a limited rotation of the shaft is 
necessary in order to force the brake-shoe into 
firm contact with the tread of the wheel. 
It will be understood that the brake-shoes 
are held against rotation either by engaging 
the flanges of the wheels or by suitable guides, 
and that the right and left hand screw-threads 
on the shaft will tend to move the brake 
shoes simultaneously in opposite directions, 
the shaft itself being held against longitudi 
nal movement by the brackets 5 engaging the 
sides of the sprocket-wheel 4. It will likewise 
be observed that the screw-threaded shaft 
admits of the application of great power to the 
brake-shoes to force them strongly against the 
treads of the wheels, and that when the brakes 
are so applied they will remain in such posi 
tion until the shaft is positively rotated in the 
opposite direction, thus obviating the use of 
detents and all strain on the connections em 
ployed for rotating the shaft, 
The brakes are operated from a suitable 
shaft 10, extending through the car-platform 
11, and carrying on its upper end a brake 
wheel 12, and below the platform 11 a sprock 
et-wheel 13. Around each sprocket-wheel 4 
there extends a section 14 of sprocket-chain, 
these chains being connected together on one 
side by a length 15 of ordinary link-chain 
and on the other side by similar chains 1617, 
extending to the respective ends of a sprocket 
chain section 18, passing around the Sprocket 
wheel 13 on the brake-wheel shaft 10, the 
said chains 16 and 17 also passing around a 
guide-pulley 19, mounted upon a shaft 20, 
having suitable bearings below the car-plat 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
CO 
426,336 
form 11 at some convenient point between the 
shafts 1 and 2, so that the direction of the 
chains 16 and 17 may be changed, since, as 
will be observed, the sprocket-wheel 13 on 
the shaft 10 is necessarily located at some 
distance from the car-truck, in order to be 
conveniently placed on the car-platform, and 
the sprocket-wheel 13 rotates in a horizontal 
plane, while the sprocket-wheels 4 rotate in 
a vertical plane. If now the brake-wheel 12 
be manipulated to rotate the shaft 10 and 
sprocket-wheel13 in the direction of the arrow, 
Fig. 2, the chain 16 will be drawn toward 
the said sprocket-wheel 13, while the chain 
17 will be free to move away from it. 
This 
movement of the chain 16 will cause it to 
carry the sprocket-chain 14 connected to it 
in a direction to rotate the shaft 2 in such 
manner that the brake-shoes carried there 
by will be forced toward and into contact 
with the wheel-treads; and since the other 
sprocket-chain 14 is connected to the first 
mentioned sprocket-chain 14 by the chain 
15 it will participate in the movement de 
scribed and rotate the sprocket-wheel 4 of 
the shaft 1. At the same time this move 
ment will take up the slack of the chain. 17. 
The threaded ends of the shaft 1 are so ar 
ranged that when moved in the manner de 
scribed they will force the brake-shoes against 
the treads of the respective wheels simultane 
ously with the like movements caused by the 
rotation of the shaft 2. Thus it will be seen 
that when the brake-wheel is manipulated in 
one direction the brake-shoes on each side of 
the truck are simultaneously forced into con 
tact with the wheel-treads, and that a com 
paratively small amount of power applied at 
the brake-wheel will be sufficient to apply the 
brakes with great force, and that, as before 
stated, no detents are necessary in order to 
maintain the braking action, nor is it neces 
sary that a continuous force be applied 
through the intermediate connections. 
In order to loosen the brakes, the brake 
wheel is rotated in the opposite direction, 
when the chain will operate to rotate the 
IO 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
s 
screws to draw the brake-shoes away from 
the wheels. 
Since the sprocket-chain is of much more 
costly construction than an ordinary link 
chain, and since the chain-connections have 
but a limited movement, only so much sprock 
et-chain is used as is necessitated by the size 
and number of the sprocket-wheels. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. In a car-brake, the combination of a pair 
of brake-shoes on each side of the truck, and 
right and left handed screw-shafts, one for 
each pair of brake-shoes, for simultaneously 
operating the same, with a brake - wheel 
mounted on the platform of the car, and 
chain-gearing connecting the brake-wheel 
with the screw-shafts, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a car-brake, the combination of a pair 
of brake-shoes on each side of the truck, right 
and left handed screw-shafts, one for each 
pair of brake-shoes, for simultaneously oper 
ating the same, and a sprocket-wheel on each 
shaft, with a brake-wheel mounted on the 
platform of the car, a sprocket-wheel oper 
ated by the brake-wheel, and chain-connec 
tions therefrom to the sprocket-wheels on the 
screw-shafts, substantially as described. 
3. In a car-brake, the combination of a pair 
of brake-shoes on each side of the truck, and 
a right and left handed screw-shaft and 
sprocket-wheel thereon for each pair of brake 
shoes, with a brake-wheel and sprocket-wheel 
operated thereby, and chain-gearing connect 
ing the brake-wheel and screw-shafts for op 
erating the latter simultaneously, and em 
bracing sections of sprocket-chain at the said 
sprocket-wheels, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
- 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS STRAHAN SHIENSTON. 
MINNIE. A. WINTER, 
JOHN FOULDS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426436.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE. F. CORLISs, OF MANSFIELD, OHIO. 
TROLLEY-EQUALIZER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,486, dated April 29, 1890. 
Application filed Inly 30, 1889, serial No. 319145. (Nonodel, 
55 
. 
. 
. 
w 
the Wires. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE. F. CoRLiss, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mans 
field, in the county of Richland and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Trolley-Equalizers; and Ido. 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
trolley-equalizel's for electric street-cars in 
which the trolley is above the car and the 
wires suspended, and has for its object a 
means of retaining the trolley centrally over 
the car, and also to regulate the length of 
trolley-connections at different elevations of 
The distinctive characteristics will be more 
fully descriled hereinatter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
longitudinal side elevation of a portion of an 
electric street-car, showing the trolley-equal 
izer placed upon the top and at each end of 
the car. Fig. 2 is an enlarged view of the 
trolley - equalizer B, showing a longitudinal 
sectional side elevation of same embodying 
all its general construction. Fig. 3 is a top 
view of same, showing its general construc 
tion. Fig. 4 is an end view showing the con 
struction of slides, taken in line aea, Fig. 2 Kd A 
Fig. 5 is a detail view. . . 
A represents the upper portion of an elec 
Centrally and at each end is 
tric street-car. 
secured the trolley-equalizer B, which is com 
posed of a case B. Journaled in the outer 
end is the sheave-pulley K, running loosely 
upon a pin or bolt, said bolt having bearings 
in each side of the case. 
IF'FF F* representrods-four in number 
running longitudinally on each side of the 
center, two of said rods above the axle of the 
sheave-pulley K and two below. The said 
rods are secured at each end of the case in 
cavities made to receive them. At the outer 
end the method shown to secure them from 
turning is by a pin P, passing through the rod 
F near the end, and said pins fit in a mortise 
in the head W. At the end of case Ia slot Y 
is made to receive the said rods, as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
G indicates coil-springs, which extend the 
full, O nearly the full, length of the case, the 
rods F. FFF passing through the center 
of the springs. One end of the springs Gis 
secured to the end of case W, the opposite 
ends secured to the sliding blocks H and H. 
The said sides are constructed with a slot in 
each end aid slide upon the rods F. FFF 
in the sliding blocks H. Centrally between 6 
the guide-rods F and F, and attached to the 
sliding block H, is the link or bail S, to which . 
is attached by any suitable method the cord. 
M. One end of said cord is secured to said 
link S, then passes forward to the sheave 
pulley K, passing through the hole V, then tip. 
the link S', attached to the sliding block H. . 
The trolley-connecting cord E is connected 
to the sheave-pulley K, as shown in Fig. 2. 
A hole a is made through the side of the pull 
ley large enough to receive a knot on the end 
of cord. A hole is made through the edge of . 
pulley at right angles to intersect with the 
hole a when the cord is placed in position 
75 
and a knot made on the end. The knot, pass 
ing into the hole ac, secures the eord perma 
nently to the sheav-pulley K. The said pull 
ley is of sufficient width between its flanges. 
to receive any amount of coils required. The 
outer end of cord E is provided with the con 
nection N. The link S is secured to the con 
nection N. The open loop O i linked to the 
tr?lley C. 
Fig. 1 shows the equalizers and trolley in 
position, with the cords E attached to the 
trolley C. It will be readily seen that when 85 
the connections are made there is an equal 
tension on the springs at each end of the caf. 
Any obstruction that would retard the for 
ward motion of the trolley would necessarily 
pull on the cord E. 
The tension on the cord 
rotates the sheave-pulley K. The cord M, at 
tached to the sliding blocks H, will be wound 
around the axle of the sheave-pulley-K, Com 
pressing the springs G. At the opposite end 
the springs would expand, -taking up the 
slack by the backward motion of the sheave 
pullry. Should the wires on which the trol. 
ley travels varyin' elevation, the cords Ewill 
Iengthen to suit the different grades. Coil 
springs have been used and are in use at the 
present time. The said springs as used are 
not practical for this reason: Should the 
trolley be obstructed in passing overa bracket 
? ? ? 
:... 
? 
? 
? 
 
. 
Io. 
25 
35 
45 
2 
428,486 
In Fig. 2 there is shown a spring Q. 
or switch, the tension on the coil-spring is too 
great, stretching it beyond its elastic capac 
ity, damaging the spring; or when the elec 
tric conductive-wires are raised, as in passing 
over a railway-track, the difference of tension 
is so great that it destroys the elasticity of 
the spring. By constructing a device as 
shown and described all that difficulty is ob 
viated. 
 I do not wish to be limited to ai i the details 
of construction and arrangements shown, as 
they may be somewhat varied without de 
parting from the spirit of my invention. 
his 
spring is secured at its lower end to the end 
of case W. The upper or spring end passes 
between the flanges of the sheave-pulley to 
prevent the cord E from springing over the 
edge of the flange of pulley. 
J shows a pulley under which passes the 
cord E. This obviates friction and wear on 
the cord when passing from the pulley through 
the case to the trolley. 
I have also shown in Fig. 5 a modification 
in which a cord and weight are used in the 
place of the coilsprings G. The pulley Cis 
inclosed within a case. A cordi A8 and weight 
Bare attached to the journal of the pulley C, 
the weight B'acting in this case as the springs 
G,Fig. 2. In the place of the cord and weight, 
as shown, a coiled spring, the same as a 
II. ? 
25 
0. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 5 
3 
clock-spring, can be used with the same re 
sult as the other methods shown. .i. 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In a trolley-equalizer, the combination of 
the trolley, the cords connected to said trolley, 
the drums on which said cords are wound, 
and the spring-actuated sliding blocks con 
nected to said drums. 
2. In a trolley-equalizer, the combination of 
the case, the drum mounted rotatably in said 
case, the cords connected to said drums, the 
blocks connected to said cords, the guide-rods 45 
for the blocks, and the springs around said 
rods. 
3. In a trolley-equalizer, the combination of 
the trolley, cords, and drums, the spring-act 
uated blocks, and the guide-rods for said 5o 
8 
blocks. 
4. In a trolley-equalizer, the combination of 
the case, the guide-rods therein, the Springs 
on said rods, the blocks against which the 
springs bear, and the drum connected to said 55 
blocks. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
m 
GEORGE. F., CORLISS. 
Witnesses: 
ROCLIFF BRINKERHOFF, Jr., 
JNO, GAY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426536.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 426,536, 
 
H., JOHNSON, 
WASH TUB, 
Patented Apr. 29, 1890. 
2 SNS 
  
aza V/. 54z 
// 
f 
 
INVENTOR: 
722. 
" -classics 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRIET JOHNSON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
WASH-TUB. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,536, dated April 29, 1890. 
Application filed February 23, 1889, Serial No,300,850, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRIET JOHNSON, of 
the city of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Tubs, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of tubs which are provided with re 
movable partitions. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several parts, 
as will be hereinafter more fully described, 
and set forth in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a tub having my 
improvement applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is alon 
gitudinal vertical section. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse section at one side of the partition, said 
partition being also partially in section; and 
Figs. 4 and 5 are vertical sections of the par 
tition, illustrating different modes of secur 
ing the flexible packing thereto. 
It is the prime object of the present inven 
tion to provide a means whereby the station 
ary Wash-tubs ordinarily employed in connec 
tion with tenement or flat houses may be util 
ized as a bath-tub when occasion may demand. 
In carrying out the invention the tub 10 may 
be constructed in any ordinary or approved 
form, preferably, however, with downwardly 
and inwardly inclined sides, as illustrated in 
Fig. 3. If one partition only is to be used in 
connection with a tub, a recess 12 is produced 
in the inner face of the sides 11, preferably at 
the center and near the top, and if it is de 
sired to provide, a means for regulating the 
size of the compartments of the tub similarly 
located recesses 13 may be produced at each 
side of the central recesses 12, as illustrated 
in Fig. 1. The partition 14 is shaped to the 
inner contour of the tub, and in the sides and 
bottom of the said partition a flexible pack 
ing-strip 15 is inserted, which strip preferably 
consists of rubber. 
In introducing the flexible packing-strip 15 
into the partition a single continuous strip 
may be introduced into the central slot formed 
in the side and bottom edges, as illustrated in 
Figs. 2 and 3, the outer projecting surface of 
which strip may be made square or beveled, as 
shown in Fig. 2, or provided with a V-groove, 
as illustrated in Fig. 4. 
Another means of introducing the flexible 
packing-strip consists in introducing two 
strips of material in grooves formed in the side 
and bottom edges of the partition, as shown 
in Fig. 5, in which the grooves are inclined 
inward, whereby the outer projecting ends of 
the strips, which are spaced at their inner 
ends, have an outward inclination. 
In the lower edge of the partition, near each 
side, pins 16 are inserted, which pins are pref 
erably non-aligning and adapted for introduc 
tion into suitable apertures 17 in the bottom 
of the tub, as illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2. 
Upon the upper surface of the partition, at 
each end, a locking device is secured, consist 
ing of a base-plate 18, secured, preferably by 
four screws, to the upper edge of the partition 
longitudinally of the same, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 3, the said plate being provided centrally 
at the real with a vertical arched projection 
19 and at the outer end, at each side, with 
vertically-projecting transversely - aligning 
lugs 20. 
Upon each base-plate 18 a bolt 21 is held to 
slide, the head of which bolt is of sufficient 
width to pass conveniently between the lugs 
20, the rear end being reduced to pass through 
the arched projection 19, and the said reduced 
outer end of the bolt is provided, preferably, 
with a T-shaped head 22, whereby the bolt is 
prevented from being detached from the base 
plate, yet permitted to slide freely thereon. 
The bolt at or near the center is provided with 
a threaded aperture, in which a thumb-screw 
23 is entered, which thumb-screw is swiveled 
upon the bolt to preventits entire withdrawal 
therefrom. 
In operation the pins 16 of the partition 14 
are made to enter the desired apertures 17 of 
the tub, and the bolts 21 are slid outward 
until the heads thereof enter the transversely 
aligning recesses 12 or 13 of the tub, accord 
ing to the desired location of the partition. 
When the bolts have been thus entered into 
the recesses, the thumb-screws 23 are screwed 
downward to a bearing upon the base-plate 
18, which action causes the head of each bolt 
to bear against the upper wall of the tub-re 
90 
95 
IOC) 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
426,536 
O 
cess in which it is entered, and at the same 
time the movement of the thumb-screws forces 
the partition downward, causing the flexible 
packing 15 to bind firmly against the sides 
and bottom of the tub, thereby rendering the 
partition absolutely water-proof. 
It is obvious that if the tub is to be used 
for bathing purposes by loosening or unscrew 
ing the thumb-screws 23 the bolts 21 may be 
slid back upon the partition and the said par 
tition may be quickly removed from the tub, 
reby throwing the same open from end to 
010, 
In making this improvement in Wash-tubs 
I aim to provide a means whereby families 
living intenement-houses that do not contain. 
a regular bath-tub may expeditiously and con 
veniently convert the wash-tubs into a bath 
tub, and wherein, also, where bath-tubs are 
provided, the wash-tubs in the house may be 
utilized as bath-tubs for the use of servants. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
 
25 
35 
1. The combination, with the tub having 
bolt-recesses in its opposite sides, of a parti 
tion provided with locking devices, each com 
prising a base-plate 18, having an arched pro 
jection or eye 19 at its inner end, and side lugs 
20, the bolt between the lugs and passing at 
its rear ends through said projection or eye, 
and the set-screw passing through the bolt and 
bearing at itsinner end against the base-plate, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a tub provided 
with aligning side recesses near the top, of a 
detachable partition, flexible washers intro 
duced into the sides and bottom of the parti 
tion, bolts held to slide upon the upper sur 
face of the partition, capable of entering the 
tub-recesses, and a set-screw located in the 
bolt, capable of depressing the partition when 
the bolts are in the locked position, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
HARRIET JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
J. F. ACKER, Jr., 
C. SEDGWICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426636.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 426,636. 
H, COND RON. 
PLANE, BIT, . 
Patented Apr. 29, 1890. 
e 
C 
C/ 
2. 
 
 
4 
Saaaaya SSaxYaSaaSaxoSSSass. SSaaSNSSAsiaS N NC/ 
o 22.s fa 
Z776.5 
C-42677esses: 
6.4%tate 
Z77/e/7Zor. 
3% 6ervg 
 
"ENORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-Litho, washkoro, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY CONDRON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
WILLIAM. H. BARRY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PLAN E-B.T. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,636, dated April 29, 1890. 
Application filed February 10, 1890, Serial No. 339,795, (No model.) 
45 
50 
55 
75 
The chisel, back plate, and clamp-plate are 
attached to each other by means of the usual 
clamp-screw d. It will be seen that a press 
ure upon the point (t' of the chisel tends to 
bend said chisel back over the edge b' of the 
back plate, which forms a fulcrum therefor. 
To overcome this tendency, I interpose a sup 
plemental clamp-plate e between the chisel Cl 
and clamp-plate c, which supplemental plate 
is bentate', and the edge of which bears upon 
the chisel-plate above the edge b' of the back 
plate b and at the point of greatest vibration 
in said chisel-plate. 
It is obvious that upon 
clamping the respective plates together, as 
shown, by means of the clamp-screw, the 
pressure upon the chisel-plate C is as great 
above as below the lower end of the back 
plate. I have found in actual practice that 
all vibration of the chisel is thereby obviated. 
Having thus described my invention, What I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
1. The combination, in a plane-bit, of a 
chisel consisting of a thin plate of steel, a 
back plate, a clamp-plate having its edge be 
low the edge of the back plate, and an inter 
posed supplemental clamp-plate having its 
bearing edge upon the plane-chisel above the 
lower edge of the back plate, substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. The combination, in a plane-bit, of the 
chisel a, back plate b, clamp-plate c, supple 
mental clamp-plate e, and a clamp-screw for 
holding the same in the respective positions 
with relation to each other, substantially as 
shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification, in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses, this 6th day of February, 1890. 
HENRY CONDRON. 
Witnesses: 
D. H. FLETCHER, 
J. B. IALPENNY. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY CONDRON, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Plane-Bits, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a plane 
bit embodying the features of my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a front view of the same, and Fig. 3 is 
a central longitudinal sectional view thereof. 
Like letters, of reference in the different 
figures indicate like parts. 
My invention relates to that class of plane 
bits in which the chisel or cutting portion is 
made from a thin plate of steel supported 
by a back plate of inferior metal. This 
construction, while possessing many advan 
tages, is subject to the objection that a con 
siderable vibration thereof is produced in 
plaining hard Woods, which makes it impos 
sible to produce satisfactory work with it. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
this objection by providing a Supplemental 
clamp-plate, by which the thin chisel-plate is 
supported at the point of greatest strain, 
while the usual clamp-plate is retained to 
regulate the bite of the chisel; all of which 
is hereinafter more particularly described, 
and definitely pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Cl, represents the 
plane-chisel, which consists of a thin plate of 
steel, having the usual chisel-edge C.", Fig. 3. 
b is the back plate, and c the usual front 
ol' clamping plate bent, as shown at c', and 
having the usual thin tapered edge c, as 
shown, which is intended to be adjusted near 
to the chisel-edge a', according to the work to 
be done, said tapered edge of the clamping 
plate being preferably below the end b' of 
the back plate b. 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426736.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J. PEAR SON. 
METHOD OF OPERATING GAS ENGINES. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 426,736, 
Patented Apr, 29, 1890. 
N 
\ 
N 
v 
N 
Ns 
N 
l 
-1 
Y 
/ 
M 
M 
A. 
A. 
/ 
V 
W 
V 
M 
M 
N 
---------- 
Y 
un- s -- 
A. 
W 
\ 
S. 
N 
- 
WITNESSES: 
 
  
  
NY 
N 
N R 
N 
N N 
N 
N 
2. 
SS 
N &SNSS 
 
/ 
w 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORNEYS. 
HE MORRIS PETERs co, PHoto-THo, washington, p. c. 
himm 
(No Model.) 
J. J. PEAR SON. 
METHOD OF OPERATING CAS ENGINES, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 426,736, 
Patented Apr. 29, 1890. 
N Nr. N s SNNs 
HD 
NS & SN 
2z St2 6VVVVV 
N SNNN 
 
N 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
N N N NN. 
NS Ewill 
SY 
25% 
KNNS 
Q - - 
SN 
 
 
 
 
N 
WITNESSES: 
, 
Aa2% N 
-6 see veer- 
INVENTOR 
yyawn/ 
ar Muw is, 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN J. PEARSON, OF NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF, AND JULIUS 
KUNZE, OF YONKERS, NEW YORK. 
METHOD OF OPERATING GAS - ENGINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,736, dated April 29, 1890. 
Application filed July 17, 1889, Serial No. 317,807, (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN J.PEARSON, of New 
York city, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a new and Improved 
Method of Operating Gas-Engines, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side sectional elevation of a 
gas-engine embodying my improvement. Fig. 
2 is an enlarged vertical transverse section 
taken on line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view of a portion of the valve-hold 
ing mechanism; and Fig. 4 is a side elevation, 
partly in section, of the rear end of the cylin 
der, showing a modification of my improve 
ment. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the views, 
In the engine illustrated in the annexed 
drawings the practice has been to draw a 
charge of explosive mixture into the reservoir 
and into the forward end of the power-cylin 
der by the rearward movement of the power 
piston, and to compress the said charge in 
the reservoir when the piston moves forward, 
the said charge being confined in the reser 
voir by a valve communicating with the back 
end of the power-cylinder and standing nor 
mally closed, the said valve being held to its 
seat by a spring and by the pressure of gas 
generated in the power-cylinder by the explo 
sion of the combustible mixture; and when 
the pressure in the power-cylinder was re 
lieved by the opening of the exhaust-port 
the said valve was raised by the Superior 
pressure of the combustible mixture con 
tained in the reservoir, thereby admitting a 
charge of the mixture to the power-cylinder, 
and the said charge was compressed on the 
return of the power-piston. This engine Was 
provided with a governor, which held the 
valve communicating between the power-cyl 
inder and the reservoir closed When no ex 
plosion was required in the power-cylinder. 
Under these conditions, as the momentum of 
the engine carried the piston back and forth 
in the power-cylinder, the charge of gas and 
air or other products of combustion contained 
in the back end of the power-cylinder Was 
compressed over and over again, and in a 
gases. 
similar manner the combustible charge con 
tained in the forward end of the power-cyl 
inder and in the reservoir was compressed 
during every forward stroke of the power 
piston. This operation consumed a great 
deal of power, the loss of which was estimated 
to be as great as twenty-five per cent. of the 
entire power of the engine, 
The object of my invention is to obviate 
this difficulty by establishing a free passage 
between the reservoir and the cylinder when 
no explosion is required and by rendering 
the igniting apparatus inoperative while the 
engine is running by its own momentum. I 
accomplish these objects by holding the valve 
in the passage between the power-cylinder 
and the reservoir open when no explosions 
are required, and by rendering the igniting 
apparatus inoperative during this time, so 
that the contents of the power-cylinder may 
pass freely into and out of the reservoir dur 
ing the time the engine is running by its own 
momentum, thereby avoiding the undue ab 
Sorption of power in the compression of the 
The engine to which my improvement has 
been applied is known as the Baldwin Gas 
Engine. In this engine the power-cylinder 
A is provided with a water-jacket B, and upon 
its lower side with a gas and air reservoir C, 
which communicates through the open port 
a with the forward end of the power-cylinder. 
It also communicates through the opening b 
with the rear end of the power-cylinder, the 
said opening being closed normally by a valve 
c, arranged to close upon the valve-seat dand 
shut off communication between the power 
cylinder A and the reservoir C. The spindle 
e of the valve c extends downwardly through 
a stuffing-box in the bottom of the reservoir 
C, and is provided with a head f, between 
which and the stuffing-box is placed a spiral 
spring g. A sleeve h surrounds the spindle 
e, and is perforated on diametrically-opposite 
sides to receive the Wedge D. A tube en 
ters the bottom of the reservoir C, and is pro 
vided at its lower end with a gas and air 
check-valve E, which receives air through 
apertures j and gas through the pipe k. 
The power-cylinder A contains a piston F, 
O 
IS 
3o 
35 
45 
- 
75 
IOO 
426,786 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
which is attached to a piston-rod G, passing 
through a stuffing-box l on the front end of 
the cylinder and carrying a cross-head H. 
The cross-head His guided by ways in on the 
bed I of the engine, and is connected by the 
rod J with the crank K on the crank-shaft L. 
The crank-shaft L is provided with the usual 
fly-wheel M. 
On the crank-shaft L is secured an eccen 
tric N, and a forked lever O, which embraces 
the eccentric, extends upward and is pivoted 
to a sleeve in, supported by a stud O, projecting 
from an arm p, secured to the pillow-blocks 
of the engine. The lower end of the lever 
O is provided with a fork q, which is arranged 
at right angles to the plane of the fork at the 
upper end, and embraces a bar P, provided 
upon opposite sides with lugs 
S, the said 
fork q being of sufficient width to pass both 
of said lugs 'S when the fork is in a middle 
position. 
The eccentric N is provided with flanges, 
which embrace the sides of the forked upper 
end of the lever O, and the said eccentric is 
connected with a centrifugal governor Q, 
which is able to move the eccentric longitudi 
nally on the shaft L, thereby bringing the fork 
q into engagement with the lug or S, or into 
a middle position, where it touches neither of 
the said lugs, according as the engine is going 
at a speed which is too high or too low, or is 
working normally. 
The bar P is connected with the rodt, which 
passes through guides upon the base I, and is 
connected by a link u with a lever 2, which 
is pivoted to a Support attached to the reser 
voir C, and is also pivotally connected to the 
wedge D. 
In a chamber in the rear of the power-cyl 
inder A is pivoted a lever it, arranged to touch 
a contact-point a', which is insulated from the 
cylinder, but connected with the binding-post 
b', receiving the electrical conductor for con 
veying to the engine the current for igniting 
the explosive charge. To the power-piston F 
is secured an arm c', arranged to touch the 
shorter arm of the lever v as the piston com 
pletes its rearward stroke, thereby causing a 
spark at the contact-point d', which ignites a 
charge, 
The rod t carries a switch-arm d', which is 
capable of forming an electrical connection 
between the contact-points e'e', supported by 
an insulating-block f', attached to the base of 
the engine. The circuit through which the 
igniting-current passes is over the wire g, the 
contact-point e, switch-arm d', contact-point 
e', wire l', to the lever c, thence through the 
contact-point Ct', binding-post b', and wire it, 
back to the generator. 
During the normal working of the engine, 
when the piston F moves toward the rear end 
of the cylinder A it forms a partial vacuum 
in the reservoir C, which causes the valve E 
to open and admit a charge of gas and air to the 
reservoir, after which the piston F moves for 
ward to compress the mixture in the reser 
voir. At the same time a charge of explosive 
mixture previously introduced behind the pis 
ton F by the pressure due to the explosion 
forces the valve c to its seat, where it remains 
until the pressure in the cylinder A is re 
lieved by the opening of the exhaust-porti', 
when the pressure of the mixture in the res 
ervoir C raises the valve c and allows a charge 
of the explosive mixture to flow into the cyl 
inder Abehind the piston F, and the said pis 
ton on its return compresses the explosive 
charge and causes its ignition by breaking 
the connection between the lever at and the 
contact-point a'. This cycle of operation con 
tinues so long as the speed of the engine does 
not change and the rodt, wedge D, and the 
switch-arm d' remain quiet; but when the 
speed of the engine increases the governor 
moves the eccentric N outwardly, the said ec 
centric carrying with it the lever O, bringing 
the fork q at its lower end into engagement 
with the lugs on the bar P, thereby moving 
the rod it lengthwise, thus carrying the switch 
arm d' out of contact with the point e and 
interrupting the electric circuit, so that no 
ignition can occur, at the same time moving 
forward the wedge D, so as to hold open the 
valve c and thus maintain a free communica 
tion between the interior of the power-cylin 
der and the reservoir C, so that the explosive 
charge is carried into the cylinder and forced 
back into the reservoir alternately without 
offering any resistance to the free move 
ment of the piston F. This state of things 
continues until the speed of the crank 
shaft passes a little below the normal, when 
the governor Q moves the eccentric N in 
the opposite direction, thus causing the le. 
ver O to move toward the bed of the ell 
gine and bring the fork 
into engage 
ment with the lug on the bar P. This re 
sults in the movement of the rod t toward 
the crank-shaft end of the engine, thus with 
drawing the wedge D from beneath the stem 
of the valve c, at the same time completing 
the electric circuit between the points e'e', 
So that the explosive charges will be again. 
retained in the cylinder and exploded, as be 
fore described, and when the normal speed of 
the engine is reached the governor Q will 
have moved the lever O into a middle posi 
tion, so that it cannot strike the lugs S. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 4 I ac 
complish substantially the same result by con 
necting the power-cylinder A and the reser 
Voil' C by a pipe R, in which is placed a stop 
cock S, provided with a lever le", which is con 
nected by a rod l with a bell-crank lever , 
which is operated by the rod t in the same 
manner as the lever a is operated, so that 
When the engine runs at its normal speed the 
stop-cock S remains closed; but when the 
Speed increases unduly the rod t is moved 
longitudinally, as in the other case, and act 
ing through the bell-crank lever v' it opens 
the stop-cock. S, thus establishing communi 
cation between the power-cylinder and the 
75 
95 
I do 
1 to 
II5 
I 25 
 
426,736 
3 
engine is too high, at the same time render 
ing the igniting apparatus inoperative, so 
that no ignition of the charge can take place 
while the communication between the power 
cylinder and the reservoir is open, as herein 
specified. 
2. The method of reducing the resistance to 
the motion of the piston of a gas-engine by es 
tablishing communication between the power 
cylinder and gas and air reservoir while the 
ignitor is inoperative, as herein specified. 
3. The method of governing a gas-engine, 
which consists in opening and closing the 
passage between the power-cylinder and the 
gas and air reservoir, and interrupting the 
ignition of the explosive charge, substantially 
as herein specified. 
JOHN J. PEARSON. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY H. CYPHER, 
CHARLES H. SNIFFIN. 
25 
35 
O 
ent- 
reservoir, so that the contents of the cylinder 
and reservoir may have free circulation 
through the pipe R, and when the speed of 
the engine falls below the normal the rod t is 
moved in the opposite direction and the stop 
cock S is closed. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
1. The method of operating a gas-engine, 
which consists in drawing a charge of com 
bustible or explosive mixture into a reservoir 
by means of the power-piston, compressing 
the said charge in the reservoir by the power 
piston, and allowing the charge to pass from 
the reservoir to the power-cylinder when the 
pressure in the power-cylinder is less than 
that of the reservoir during the normal work 
ing of the engine, and automatically estab 
lishing communication between the reservoir 
and the power-cylinder when the speed of the 
-- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426836.txt	(No Model.) 
H. C. MEEKER, 
WASHING MACHINE, 
No. 426,836, 
Patented Apr. 29, 1890. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
A. 
 
 
 
s / 
 
77a vector 
key zeore. 
 
resonals perers co., PHoro-LTHo, WASHINGTO, P. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. MEEKER, OF DESHLER, OHIO. 
WASHING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,836, dated April 29, 1890. 
Application filed May 27, 1889, Serial No. 312,189, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY C. MEEKER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Desh 
ler, in the county of Henry and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Washing-Machines, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
lingS. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in Washing-machines; 
and it consists in the peculiarities hereinafter 
described, and more fully pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, and on which like 
reference-letters indicate corresponding parts, 
Figure 1 represents a vertical transverse sec 
tional view of my improved machine; Fig. 2, 
a longitudinal vertical section of the same; 
Fig. 3, an inside elevation of the rubber shaft 
support, and Fig. 4 a plan view of this sup 
port and a portion of said shaft. 
The letter A designates the body of the ma 
chine, which is constructed of sheet metal, 
preferably galvanized sheet-iron, and of the 
COIntOur illustrated. The ends B are secured 
to the bottom Cin any desired manner. The 
bottom, in the greater portion of its length 
and in a belt of the desired width, is fashioned 
in corrugated or fluted form, as suggested at 
D. This corrugation may be effected by 
means of suitable dies in the manufacture, 
and one of its peculiarities is that the corru 
gations at either side of a vertical center have 
their longer portions running toward a cen 
ter line and their shorter portions presented 
toward and against the action of the rubber 
as it moves toward either side of Such center. 
This formation renders the rubbing action 
more effective without liability to injure the 
clothes. The body is supported by suitable 
diverging legs E in pairs at each end, and 
within the side pieces of the body are secured 
plates F, slotted vertically and rabbeted, as 
seen at G and H in Figs. 3 and 4. The rub 
ber shaft is fashioned with a neck and head 
J and K and fitted to the slot and rabbet so 
as to rock therein and yet be readily remov 
able. To this shaft are Secured rubber arms 
I, one near each end. They are connected 
near their upper ends by a hand-bar M, and 
are bifurcated at their lower ends, and have 
secured to them a segmental strip O, of Wood 
or metal. To this strip and on the lower side 
is secured a belt of corrugated rubber or Wood 
P, of about the same width as the corruga 
tions D. To the under side of the bottom I 
fasten two ways Q, within which are slidingly 
fitted two hoods or casings R., of sheet metal. 
These hoods incase a belt extending any Suit 
able length across the bottom, and, in connec 
tion with the bottom, constitute a chamber for 
containing the heat arising from the heating 
These hoods may be moved to and 
device. 
from each other to insert and remove the heat 
ing device. The preferred form of this de 
vice is a small oil-stove of any approved type, 
to the wick-tubes S of which is secured a 
flange T, adapted to hang on the brackets U, 
secured to the bottom. Small openings V are 
formed in the hoods to supply sufficient air 
to support combustion, and other openings 
W are provided to admit of a suitable draft. 
By manipulating the rubber in the usual 
way it will be observed that the clothes will 
be abrasively treated with direct effect by the 
opposing corrugations D. By means of the 
stove-lamp or other heating device it will be 
seen that the water in the machine can be 
kept at the proper temperature. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a Washing-machine, the combination, 
with the body thereof, ways secured to the 
bottom, and hood-sections slidingly fitted to 
said ways and adapted to meet at their inner 
ends and having air-vents, of brackets Se 
cured to the body and a stove suspended from 
said brackets, with the burner-tubes adja 
cent to the bottom of the body. 
2. In a washing-machine, the combination, 
with the body and a heating-lamp secured 
beneath the same, of a hood composed of slid 
ing sections enveloping the burners of Said 
lamp, the space between the hood and the 
bottom being adapted to receive heat from . 
the lamp, and Suitable draft-Openings. 
3. In a washing-machine, the combination, 
with the body composed of sheet metal and 
having a corrugated belt Occupying a portion 
95 
IOC 
O 
15 
25 
35 
 
426,836 
late in while portions of them are being ?c 
Tubbed. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
HENRY C. MEEKER. 
Witnesses: 
T. L. HENRY, 
JOHN W. PFAEF. 
of the width of the body, leaving a smooth or 
regular belt or space in the bottom at either 
side of the said corrugations, of a rubber 
mounted within the body and having a belt 
Of corrugations about the same width as the 
corrugated belt in the bottom and over the 
same, the rubber extending to either side and 
over the smooth surface of the bottom, where 
by the clothes are afforded a space to accumu 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US426936.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 426,936. 
 
J. H. HUMMEL. 
WEATHER STRIP, 
Patented Apr. 29, 1890. 
   
 
 
 
 
f 
2 SS 
A&S. AS21) S 
(a7. 
914 
   
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. IIUMMEL OF MOUNT VERNON, NEW YORK. 
weATHER-STRIP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 426,936, dated April 29, 1890. 
Application filed June 10, 1889, Serial No. 313,671. (No model.) 
55 
65 
o 
75 
O 
I5 Fig. 2 is a side view of Fig. 1. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES H. HUMMEL, of 
Mount Vernon, in the county of Westchester 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Weather 
Strips, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
lmarked thereon. 
My invention relates to that class of weath 
er-strips in which a loop of rubber or other 
flexible material is attached to a metallic base. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an end view of my improved weather-strip. 
Fig. 3 is an 
end view of a modification. Fig. 4 is a side 
view of Fig. 3. Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are face views 
of my Weather-strip applied in different ways. 
Fig. 10 is 
Figs. S and 9 are sectional views. 
2O a cross-section of Fig. 6 at aca. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts in the respective figures. 
A is a metallic base, which, as shown in 
Fig. 1, is formed with a central arch at a, and 
25 bent around and under at its sides, as seen at 
b. B is a rubber or flexible body formed into 
a loop, as shown, its outer edges being bent 
OutWard and into the side bends of the me 
tallic base A, which are closely pressed upon 
3o the flexible body. Under each outer edge of 
the flexible body is placed a filler d. The 
filler d may be of cord and sewed or other 
wise attached to the edge of the flexible body, 
or it may be a wire, in which case it is not 
35 attached. The filler, therefore, is interposed 
between the metallic and flexible bodies, and 
when the two parts are compressed together 
greatly assists in effecting a tight and close 
joint between them. Apart from this it gives 
4o a greater thickness and increased rigidity to 
the edge of the weather-strip. Thus formed, 
the metallic base A and flexible loop B are 
firmly clamped together; and it is seen the 
construction is such that in handling the de 
45 vice there is no danger of the detachment of 
the metallic and flexible parts of the strip, 
which would not be the case were the edges 
of the metallic base bent and simply flattened 
over the edges of the flexible body. The use 
5o of the filler also greatly aids in preventing 
the detachment of the parts. 
In practice I have found that the special 
conformation given to the edges of the me 
tallic base is necessary to secure a perfect 
attachment between the base and the flexible 
body, and that the union is considerably 
strengthened by the use of the filler. 
Another important advantage pertaining 
to my weather-strip is that its construction 
admits of its reversibility. Thus in Figs. 5 
and 8 the strip is shown arranged as a right 
handed strip, whereas in Fig. 9 it is shown 
left-handled. 
The attachment of the strip to the door, 
window, or other point is made by driving 
tacks through the central portion of the me 
tallic base, as shown in FigS. 5,6,7,8,9, and 10. 
In Fig. 6 the strip is shown arranged to ex 
clude dust or air from the door or window in 
which the crevice is wider above than below. 
This is done, as will be seen, by gathering in 
a greater portion of the rubber or flexible ma 
terial below than above. 
In Fig. 5 the outer flexible body stands par 
allel to the metallic base, and in Fig. 7 an 
equal portion of the flexible body is on each 
side of the base. The metallic base A is 
formed by suitable rollers or tools into the 
concavo-convex form shown, by which form 
the said base is given greater rigidity than if 
it were flat or of other form. It is seen. that . 
by giving the base the form shown the tack 
ing of it to the object to which it is to be se 
cured has a tendency to draw its edges to 
said object, whereas if the base were flat the 
tendency would be to raise said edges, which 
would be highly objectionable. Further than 
this, the bending over and under of the edges 
of the base upon the flexible body has the 
effect of forcing said edges into the flexible 
body, thus securing a perfect hold of said 
edges upon the body, whereas if the edges of 
the base were simply bent in a flat manner 
upon the body the edges of the base would 
perform no function in grasping the material. 
The filler d, whether of cord or wire, is of 
great importance, effecting a close and per 
manent attachment between the edges of the 
metallic base and the flexible body, and is 
specially adapted for use in connection with 
the arched form of the metallic base, for when 
the tack is driven the tendency of the arch or 
arches to flatten might have the effect of dis 
turbing the joint between the metallic and 
95 
IOO 
426,936 
I make no claim herein to a Weather-strip 
constructed in accordance here with but hav 
ing the filler d omitted, as that is described 
and claimed in my application for Letters 
Patent filed of even date here with, Serial No. 
313,670. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
As a weather-strip, an elastic body having 
the form of a loop with its edges turned or 
bent outward in opposite directions and a 
filler at or under each of its edges, combined 
with an arched metallic base having its edges 
turned or bent inward and clamped under and 
upon the OutWardly-turned parts of the elas 
tic body and the fillers, substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal. 
JAS. II. IIUMMEL. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE II. HOWARD, 
EDWIN CRUSE. 
25 
35 
5 
flexible parts; but it is found that by the in 
terposition of the filler this tendency is com 
pletely avoided. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 a modification of the shape 
of the metallic base is shown. Here the same 
formation is given to the base so far as relates 
to the edges thereof; but the central portion 
of the base at the arch a of Fig.1 is indented 
or depressed, as shown at Ct. Thus instead 
of having but one arch, as seen in Fig. 1, for 
imparting rigidity to the strip, there are in 
Figs. 3 and 4 two smaller arches c c, by the 
use of which it is found the strength of the 
base is even more increased. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that my 
invention Supplies a weather-strip which com 
bines in itself great rigidity and is adapted 
to be handled without danger of detachment 
of the flexible body from the base. Further, 
it will be seen that this strip is adapted to be 
reversed and used in a variety of other ways 
hereinbefore pointed out. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427036.txt	(No Model.) 
F, E, BENTON. 
BAND FASTENER FOR WHIP SOCKETS, 
No. 427,036. 
Patented May 6, 1890, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS E. BENTON, OF STOUGHTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
BAND - FASTENER FoR WHIP-SOCKETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,036, dated May 6, 1890. 
Application filed August 10, 1889, Serial No. 320,328, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS E. BENTON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at 
Stoughton, in the county of Norfolk and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Band 
Fasteners for Whip-Sockets; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
The special object of my invention is to 
make some improvements on the whip 
socket band-fastener described in my patent, 
No. 396,323, granted January 15, 1889. 
My improvements will first be described in 
connection with the drawings and then point 
ed out in the claim. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is an elevation in 
perspective of the band-fastener described in 
the aforesaid patent; Fig. 2, a similar view 
of my new band-fastener; Fig. 3, a vertical 
cross-section, and Fig. 4 a horizontal section. 
In the drawings, A represents the whip 
socket; B, the band which fastens it to the 
dash-rail; C, the screw which holds the band 
about the rail, and DD the two screws which 
hold the band to the socket. 
My patented fastening shown in Fig. 1 of 
the drawingsisprovided with only onescrew D. 
In practice I find that with or without the 
block one screw will not draw the opposite 
parts b b of the band evenly together, so as to 
make it equally tight on rail and socket. In 
fact, when it is tight about the socket, the 
slack about the rail will not be taken up and 
the latter will be comparatively loose. I have 
finally succeeded in overcoming this difficulty 
by dispensing with the single screw and using 
5 
TC) 
3O 
35. 
40 
55 
two parallel screws D D, between which the 
bandis arranged. On the outside of the band 45 
I place two opposite plates E. E", through 
which the screws pass, and may or may not 
be held by end nuts. By this means, after 
the band has been placed around the rail and 
socket, I draw the plates together by the 
screws, and thus draw evenly upon the neck 
b b of the band. The plate E, which receives 
the threaded end of the screw or bolt, is held 
firmly in place by the folds b', which I make 
in the band, and which also serve to give a 
better hold to the screw C. Thus it will be 
perceived that my band-fastener has several 
advantages over those which have been used 
heretofore, the fastener being independent of 
the band and drawing the latter equally tight 
about the rail and socket, 
The screws DD and plates EE' form a yoke 
which rests against both rail and socket, while 
it prevents the inclosed band from working 
up or down. I may use nuts or not on the 
ends of the Screws, the same being a mere 
matter of option; but when I do I also turn 
the edges e' of the plate E, so as to prevent 
the nuts from turning. 
Having thus described all that is necessary 
to a full understanding of my invention, What 
I claim as new, and desire to protect by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The combination, with a band B, having 
the neck b and folds b', of the screws D D 
and plates EE, said band being inclosed by 
said screws and plates, and the folds being 
arranged between the body of the band and 
one of the plates, Substantially as shown and 
described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
75 
FRANCIS.E. BENTON. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHURB. HAYWARD, 
EUGENE. H. MOORE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427136.txt	(No Model.) 
J. S. WALKER 
SHOE SPRINC, 
No. 427,136, 
Patented May 6, 1890. 
Figl: 
2Nitv.cscs 
/2.26-42/7 
4. / 6.224- 
3.11ue-vitov 
%la?/2424. 
&etov 
53 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN S. WALKER, OF CLAREMONT, NEW HAMPSHIRE, 
SHOE-SPRING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,186, dated May 6, 1890. 
Application filed February 4, 1890, Serial No. 339,138, (No model.) 
55 
formed in a plate fixed to the sole of the 
To all whom it may conce7n 
shoe. From the loop a the spring A is bowed 
Be it known that I, JoHN S. WALKER, a 
downward to form a spring-tread d for the 
citizen of the United States, residing at Clare 
ball of the foot; thence the sole part of this 
mont, in the county of Sullivan and State of 
spring is bowed upwardly, terminating in a 
New Hampshire, have invented certain new 
loop-shaped spring-heel tread e, which is ex 
and useful Improvements in Shoe-Springs; 
tended forwardly, forming a heel-seat f, on 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
which is a lug f', corresponding to the lug c 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
at the toe of the spring A, and adapted to 
tion, such as Will enable others skilled in the 
engage with a heel-plate. 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
B designates a spring, which is interposed 
the same. 
between the sole portion of the main spring 
My invention relates to certain novel and 
valuable improvements in springs adapted 
and the instep. I therefore term this spring 
an auxiliary instep-spring, as it aids in 
for application to boots and shoes for the pur 
sustaining the weight of the body. At the 
pose of facilitating movements of the human 
body in walking or jumping; and the objects 
same time it allows perfect freedom of move- . 
of my invention and improvements are, first, 
ments of the foot. 
to provide a spring of any suitable shape with 
The spring B, which I show in the annexed 
drawings, is made of steel, like the well 
means whereby it can be readily attached to 
known semi-elliptic carriage-spring; but this 
or detached from a boot or shoe; second, to 
auxiliary spring may be spiral, helical, or of 
provide a compound Spring with integral 
any other suitable shape, and it may be made 
fastenings for attaching the same to the sole 
of a boot or shoe, and, third, to combine with 
of india-rubber. 
a jumper-spring adapted for a boot or shoe 
While I have above referred to metal dove 
tail interlocking fastenings for securing my 
auxiliary springs of metal, rubber, or other 
improved jumper-spring to a boot or shoe, I 
suitable material interposed between the main 
do not limit myself to such fastenings, as 
Spring and a point located at or near the 
many of the well-known skate-fastenings may 
instep of the foot. I attain these objects by 
be employed for this purpose; or I may use 
the means illustrated in the accompanying 
the well-known skate-strap fastenings. 
drawings, in which 
Having described my invention, what I 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
jumper-spring, showing one practical mode of 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
affixing it to a shoe, which is indicated in 
Patent, is 
The within-described improved article of 
dotted lines. Fig. 2 is a top view of my im 
manufacture, consisting of a shoe - Spring 
proved jumper-spring. Figs, 3 and 4 are per 
spective views showing a toe or heel dovetail formed integral and having a curved foot-rest, 
attachment for securing the spring-jumper to 
a depressed heel-seat for the shoe, the for 
ward and rear curved extensions, the sole 
a boot or shoe, both attachments being con 
portion curved to form front and rear short 
structed of a female portion secured to the 
treads de, and an intermediate arch between 
shoe and a male portion secured to the foot 
these treads, in combination with an elliptic 
rest of the Spring. 
spring secured to the said foot-rest and bear 
Similar letters of Yeference refer to like 
ing at or near the said short treads, and suit 
parts in all the views. 
able fastenings for securing the spring to a . 
Referring to the annexed drawings by let 
shoe, all as specified. 
ters, A designates the main jumper-Spring, 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
which is preferably made of steel, and which 
in presence of two witnesses. 
in cross-section is flat. Taken longitudinally, 
this spring presents at a, a looped toe portion, 
the upper part b of which is extended back 
ward to form a toe-seat, on which may be a 
male dovetail locking-lug c, adapted to inter 
lock with a corresponding female Socket 
JOS. C. ENRIGHT, 
J. S. WALKER, Jr. 
JOHN S, WALKER, 
Witnesses: 
. 
75 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427236.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. JEWELL, 
FILTERING APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 427,236, 
Patented May 6, 1890. 
72/7. Y 
27- 
f 
- 
32. 
f IAE 47 a 
2M 
37SN-2a. 
Sy 22 
2. 
s 
2 
--- 
7 
2. 
--- 
a6 
27 
M? 
NC IB 
h (2. 
- 
S2-2 
3- 
" 
/ 
3y 
37 
 
The Noaalspeters co, photo-ITHo, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 427,236, 
 
 
 
W. M. JEWELL. 
FILTERING APPARATUS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 6, 1890. 
 
IE 
35a 
BSNSS NYSESS 
225 
Pash;NS 
2 
% 
% 
M7 
 
H2HE 
3. 
2SSSSSSS frtifi2A 
III 2 
2 
OH2 
N SS2 / M M 
E2\G223 asses 
3. Aft 
% 2. 
2xas f3 
2. 
 
 
 
 
  
S 
NSSW 
  
 
 
 
 
e 
SH 
  
R 
S S 
 
s 
Ir, 
I H: 
 
2. 
THE MORRIS perers co, PHoro-LTHo, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. JEWELL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
FILTERN GAPPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,236, dated May 6, 1890. 
Application filed December 4, 1889, Serial No. 332,590, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. M. JEWELL, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Water-Filters, of 
Which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to apparatus for fil 
tering Water; and it has for its object to pro 
vide a suitable valve and ports for directing 
the circulation of the water through the filter 
and through discharge-pipes for the several 
purposes of filtering water, of Washing out the 
impurities accumulating in the filter, and of 
reWashing the apparatus before refiltering 
again, all with a single movement of such 
Valve; also, to provide a more efficient arrange 
ment for stirring the filtering material while. 
Washing out the apparatus, and again in pro 
viding an automatic valve to such apparatus 
for the escape of air liberated from the water 
during the filtering process; and with these ob 
jects in view my invention consists of the novel 
devices and combinations of devices herein 
after described, and specifically claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a longitudinal vertical section of 
the entire apparatus; Fig. 2, a transversever 
tical section of the valve and casing on line 
ac a' in Fig. 3, which represents a sectional 
plan of the valve-seat. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 rep 
resent sectional plans of the valve-seat and 
the valve in its several positions. Fig. 7 is a 
longitudinal vertical section of the dome and 
the air-valve with its connections, and Fig. 
S a section of one of the strainer-cups as con 
nected to the filter-pipe. 
Corresponding referential characters in the 
several figures of the drawings designate like 
parts. 
A denotes the filtering-tank having a cen 
tral circular opening in its top re-enforced by 
a ring 1, riveted around the edge thereof, and 
upon this ring is bolted the bottom flange of 
the valve-casing B, closed on top by cover 2 
bolted thereon. The circular valve-seat 3 of 
this casing has four ports 4, 5, 6, and 7 equally 
spaced or rectangular to each other. The 
port 4 communicates with nozzle S centrally 
in the bottom of the casing B, into which is 
screwed the upper end of a vertical pipe 9 ex 
tending to near the bottom of tank A, where 
its lower end is screwed into a foot-casting 10, 
secured upon the bottom of tank A and pro 
viding a series of nozzles for radial pipes ll, 
coupled therein with one end and closed. On 
their opposite ends, and into these radial 
pipes 11 are screwed a series of cups 12, the 
flaring openings of which are closed with wire 
screen or finely-perforated sheet metal to form 
strainers. The port 5, that is diametrically 
opposite to port 4, communicates directly with 
the interior of the tank, the port 6 communi 
cates with a nozzle 13, into which is coupled 
the end of a pipe 14, leading to the purified 
water reservoir, and the port 7 communicates 
with a nozzle 15, into which is coupled the 
pipe 16, leading into the sewer. 
The valve C has a central hub with a Square 
hole for stem 17, to one side of which hub 
said valve is formed as a semicircular Cup 18, 
while at its opposite side the valve is contin 
ued as a semicircular disk having a segmental 
port 19 in the centrally-radial line thereof. 
This valve C can be so adjusted that its cup 
portion 18 will cover two adjacent ports 4, 5, 
6, or 7, while its port 19 will communicate 
with one of the other two ports and the re 
maining port will be closed, the cup portion 
18 thus providing a communicating-channel 
between the two ports covered thereby. The 
lower end of stem 17 is pivoted in a Socket of 
the valve-seat 3, and this stem extends up 
Ward through a stuffing-box in cover 2, and 
upon its upper extremity is mounted a Worm 
wheel 20, engaging a worm 21, mounted upon 
a horizontal shaft 22, journaled in stand 
ard-bearings 23 and having mounted upon 
one of its overhanging ends a hand-wheel 24, 
by which to operate said valve C. The posi 
tions of valve C relative to the ports in valve 
seat 3 may be indicated by suitable marks on 
worm-wheel 20, and by a suitable fixed pointer 
either secured upon cover 2 or to one of the 
standard-bearings 23. Intermediate of valve 
C and cover 2 of the valve-casing B is secured 
a perforated diaphragm 25, and between this 
and cover 2 is the inlet or feed nozzle 26, 
which, by a pipe 27, is to be coupled with the 
feed-pump. For filtering water the valve C 
95 
s 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
427,286 
75 
95 
IOC 
O 
is to be in the position as shown by Figs. 1, 
2, and 4, when the water forced in through 
pipe 27, after passing through the perfora 
tions of diaphragm 25, will enter tank A 
through opening 19 of the valve and through 
port 5 of the valve-casing. This water, after 
trickling through the filtering material, will 
enter, through strainers 12, the pipes 11, will 
thence flow through pipe 9 and through port 4 
into the cup portion 18 of valve C, and thence 
entering port 6, to be carried off through pipe 
14. For Washing out the impurities collect 
ing in the filtering-tank the valve C is ad 
justed to the position shown by Fig. 5, when 
the water from pipe 27 will enter port 4 and 
thence pipe 9 and branch pipes 11, to issue 
from strainers 12, rising through the filtering 
material, thence escaping through port 5 into 
the cup portion 18 of valve C, and thence 
through port 7 and pipe 16 into the sewer. Af 
ter the tank has thus been thoroughly washed 
the unfiltered water remaining in pipes 9 and 
11 must be discharged and replaced by filter 
ing water before the discharge is to be di 
rected into the pure-water reservoir through 
pipe 14. This is accomplished by adjusting 
valve C to the position shown by Fig. 6, when 
the water from pipe 27 will enter the tank 
through port 5, to pass downward through the 
filtering material. Thence through strainer 
cups 12 it will enter pipes 11 and 9, and thence 
through port 4, the cup 18 of valve C, and port 
7 it will enter pipe 16, to be carried off into the 
sewer until perfectly-pure water is obtained 
again, when the valve is readjusted to its first 
position again. (Shown by Figs. 1, 2, and 4.) 
By the adjustment of this single valve it will be 
Seen that the circulation and discharge of the 
water can thus be directed for the several op 
erations desirable with a filtering apparatus. 
The pipe 9, thus fixed to be stationary, will 
provide the shaft or pivot for a larger pipe 
28, sleeved upon pipe 9 and having brass 
bushings 29 and 30 in its ends, that will form 
journal-bearings for the pipe 28, which with 
its lower end rests upon the upper nozzle of 
foot-casting 10. Upon this pipe 28 are mount 
ed a Series of radial arms 31, and upon its 
upper extremity is mounted a sprocket-wheel 
32, which by an endless chain 33 is imparted 
motion from a sprocket-pinion 34, mounted 
upon shaft 35, pivoted with its lower end in 
a bracket 36 and projecting through a stuff 
ing-box 37, Secured upon tank A, with a crank 
38 upon the upper end of said shaft 35, which 
with turning will rotate pipe 28 and arms 31 
for stirring the filtering material, while the 
current of water through tank A is reversed 
for Washing out said tank, whereby all light 
and slimy impurities intermixed with such 
filtering material will be separated and car 
ried off with the water. 
With filtering water the air contained 
therein will become free and rise to the top, 
and without a provision for the escape of such 
air it would soon fill the upper portion of the 
tank A, and, displacing the water, would in 
terfere with the filtering operation; and,again, 
providing a vent to be constantly open Would 
allow water to escape through the same. It 
is therefore necessary to provide a device 
that will discharge the air without allowing 
the escape of water. This device consists in 
providing tank. A with a dome 39, to be her 
metically tight. Under the top of this dome 
39, I secure the valve - casing 40, having an 
air-escape pipe 41, tapped into the crown 
plate of the dome, so that the inner portion of 
the valve-casing 40 will communicate through 
this pipe 41 with the exterior atmosphere. The 
valve-casing 40 consists of a tube having an 
expanded end, upon which is screwed a cap 
42, provided with a central hole and forming 
the seat for one valve 43, and in the opposite 
end of said casing is an interior annular flange 
forming the seat for the other valve 44, both 
valves 43 and 44 being lined with rubber and 
being connected by a screw-stem. 45, upon 
which these valves are adjustably Secured. 
The air-pressure against both valves thus al 
ranged will counterbalance. The valve-stem 
45 being guided at one end in an eye-bracket 
46, its opposite end is connected with one arm 
of a bell-crank 47, pivoted to an elongation of 
bracket, 46, the other arm of bell-crank 47 
being coupled by link48 with the middle por 
tion of a lever 49, pivoted with one end to an 
eyebolt, 50, secured in the side wall of dome 
39. Said lever 49 has suspended to its opposite 
end a float 51. The bottom of the float 51 is 
provided with a projecting stud 52, guided in 
an eye-bracket 53, which is secured in the 
lower part of the dome 39. Thus arranged, 
the weight of float 51, when not supported 
by the water, will move both valves 43 and 
44 away from their seats, allowing a free es 
cape of air through pipe 41; but as the water 
rises it will raise the float, and thereby will 
close the valves so that no air can escape, and 
these valves will then remain thus closed un 
till sufficient air accumulates, displacing the 
water for the float to sink and open the 
valves again, whereby the water in the tank 
and dome will never rise nor fall beyond cer 
tain limits thus automatically regulated. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with filtering-tank A, 
provided with vertical pipe 9, branch pipes 
11, and strainers, of valve-casing B, with in 
let-pipe 27 and with a circular valve-seat 
having follr segmental portS 4, 5, 6, and 7 On 
1relative rectangular positions, the port 4 com 
municating with pipe 9, port 5 communicat 
ing with the interior of tank A, port 6 com 
municating with the purified-water-discharge 
pipe, and port 7 communicating with the 
washout - water - discharge pipe, and rotat 
ing valve C, having cup portion 18 to provide 
communication for two adjacent ports and 
port 19 to communicate with either one of 
the remaining ports, all substantially as set 
2. The combination, with filtering-tank A, 
provided with vertical pipe 9, branch pipes 
forth. 
- 
45 
SO 
55 
 
125 
427,236 
3. The combination, with filtering-tank A, 
11, and strainer-cups 12, of valve - casing 
B, with inlet-pipe 27 and with a circular provided with dome 39, of valve-casing 40, 
communicating through pipe 41 with the ex 
Valve-seat having four segmental ports 4, 5, 
terior atmosphere, and valves 43 and 44 inside 
6, and 7, of equal size and circumferentially 
of casing 40, and secured upon stem 45 of 
equal distances apart, respectively commu 
bell-crank 47, connecting with the valve-stem 
nicating one with pipe 9, one with the inte 
and having suspended by suitable connec 
rior of tank A, one with the pure-water-dis 
tions the float 51 in a manner that the rising 
charge pipe, and one with the washout-wa 
ter-discharge pipe, valve C, having cup por 
and falling of said float will open and close 
such valves, substantially as set forth. 
tion 18 to provide communication between 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
two adjacent ports and port 19 to communi 
presence of two witnesses. 
cate with either one of the remaining ports 
and valve-stem 17, projecting through the top 
WILLIAM M. JEWELL. 
of casing B, and having connected suitable 
gearing for operating such valve, substan 
tially as set forth. 
WILLIAM. H. LOTZ, 
OTTOLUEBKERT, 
Witnesses: 
O 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427336.txt	(No Model.) 
A. MALEKH. 
DRAFT REGULATOR FOR SHIPs' GALLEYS. 
No. 427,336, 
Patented May 6, 1890. 
 
the Norris pert Rs co, PHOTo-LTHo, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
INVENTOR 
72%- 
(Luul 
but e. 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALI MALEKH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
DRAFT-REGULATOR FOR SHIPS GALLEYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,336, dated May 6, 1890. 
Application filed November 21, 1889, Serial No. 331,085, (No model.) 
To all whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, ALI MALEKH, of New 
York, in the county of New York and State of 
New York, have invented a new and Im 
proved Draft-Regulator for Ships Galleys, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means whereby a good draft may be secured 
in a ship's galley stove or range no matter 
what the direction of the wind or in what po 
sition the sails may be trimmed; and my in 
vention consists of an air-deflector and sup 
port combined with the exposed part of the 
galley-pipe, the deflector being arranged to 
convert the back currents from the sails into 
a continuous draft, and also to catch the 
headway wind. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a vessel, showing 
my invention applied to the galley-pipe on 
deck; and Fig. 2 is an enlarged detailed per 
spective view of the same. 
A represents the exposed part of the galley 
stove pipe, B the support, and C the deflector 
attached to the support. The supportin this 
instance is a quadripod, and it may be secured 
to the pipe by a ring b, which surrounds the 
pipe, and the rodsb', which connect the ring to 
the legs d of the quadripod. In case the sup 
O 
25 
Witnesses: 
GEO. E. MEGEE, 
W. H. MEGEE, 
35 
45 
port is of quite heavy material the ring and 
rods may be dispensed with. The deflector 
is attached to the legs d of the support by 
staples f, which may be removed, so that the 
support may be attached to either leg of the 
quadripod, or it may be made permanent and 
the whole support adapted to to be turned 
for holding the deflector in the proper rela 
tive position with the pipe and the direction 
or currents of the wind. The deflector is 
held in a sloping position by the support, SO 
that the upper edge nearly if not quite cov 
ers the top of the pipe, so that it deflects down 
currents from the sail away from the pipe, 
which alone is sufficient to prevent smoking 
in the galley and to produce a fair draft. In 
case considerable draft is desirable the de 
flector will be set to catch the headway wind, 
or the wind pressing forward at the side of the 
mast opposite the trim of the sail. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by letters 
Patent 
The support B, formed with diagonally-ar 
ranged legs united at the top, in combination 
with the deflector C, attached to one of the 
legs and held thereby in inclined position, Sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
AL MALEKH. 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427436.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 427 
436, 
R. S. MERRILL. 
RALWAY SPIKE, 
Patented May 6, 1890. 
S 
 
928) evossos 
%3, 
33 4. &letov vic 
%ual 
3v-u-vitot 
of Pete-126 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUFUS S. MERRILL OF WAKE FIELD, ASSIGNOR OF ONE - HALF TO J OSHUA 
MERRILL OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
RALWAY-SPIKE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,436, dated May 6, 1890. 
Application filed February 20, 1890, Serial No. 341,183, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, RUFUS S. MERRILL, of 
Wakefield, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
5 and Improved Railway-Spike, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
railway-spike which shall have great strength, 
which can be easily driven, which cannot be 
Io drawn or loosened by the constant jars to 
which it necessarily is subjected when in use, 
and which will have great capacity to resist 
the lateral thrusts that come upon it when it 
is used, for example, on railway-curves and 
I5 in like localities. A spike embodying a con 
Struction possessing these advantagesis illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, form 
ing part of this specification, wherein 
Figure 1 is a perspective view. Fig. 2 is a 
20 cross-section, and Fig. 3 is a longitudinal cen 
tral Section, of said spike. Fig. 4 is a view 
of a modified form of spike hereinafter more 
particularly referred to. 
The Spike is one which has a broad body of 
25 Comparatively little thickness. Its sides a 
are parallel With each other and its front and 
rear faces b c are also parallel with each other, 
So that there is no taper in the shank of the 
Spike. This construction renders it most dif 
3O ficult to be drawn after it once has been 
driven. In the rear or outer face c of the 
spike-shank, by which I intend the face oppo 
site that from which the head of the spike pro 
jects, is formed a longitudinal groove or re 
35 cess d, which extends from the point, or what 
in an ordinary spike would be the point, of the 
Spike toward the other end, terminating about 
half an inch or so below the line to which the 
spike is usually driven into the cross-tie or 
40 stringer. At this point the groove or recess 
terminates in a bevel d'. This groove leaves 
the sides C. of the spike as longitudinal and 
parallel ribs. The groove or recess is of the 
same depth throughout, so that its bottom 
45 Will be in substantial parallelism with the 
improved front face c of the spike-shank. 
The shank at the point end of the groove, as 
well as at the point end of the two ribs a, (as 
they may be called.) is finished with a chisel 
5o edge, the bevel being from within the groove 
outward. 
This spike possesses great strength and 55 
When the spike is driven, it usually enters 
the wood as far as the dotted line aca, Fig. 1, 
on the unrecessed portion of the shank. 
stability, as well as capacity to resist outward 
strain that may come upon it. It enters the 
Wood with comparative ease, its chisel-edge, 
which is on the lower edge of both the 
broad face and each of the two side ribs C of 6o 
the spike, (the latter bounding and standing 
at right angles to the cutting-edge on broad 
face.) facilitating the driving of the spike and 
cutting a clean way without crushing or tear 
ing or bunching the fibers. The Substantial 65 
parallelism of all of the opposite faces of the 
spike-shank affords an extended Surface for a 
frictional hold on the wood, which is not Weak 
ened by the partial drawing of the spike, as 
in the case of a tapered shank, and While io 
the spike is exceedingly stiff, yet it has COin 
paratively less metalin it than the usual Spike. 
The only difference between the spike illus 
trated in Figs, 1, 2, and 3 and that illustrated 
in Fig. 4 is that in the latter the shank above 75 
the point where the recess or groove termi 
nates is made broader, so as to have on each 
side a lateral wing e, which extends beyond 
the side of the main portion of the shank be 
low. These wings at their lower ends termi- 8o 
nate in a bevel e', slanting from front to rear 
and similar to the beveld'. The head of the 
spike is made correspondingly broader also. 
The object of this modification is to give in 
creased capacity to the spike to resist thrusts 85 
upon it by the rail. 
IIaving described my invention, I Would 
state that I do not claim, broadly, a spike which 
is longitudinally grooved upon one of its faces, 
nor do I claim, broadly, a spike which is of 90 
considerable width or breadth and of Com 
paratively little thickness. In either one of 
the kinds of spike referred to, however, the 
shank, so far as I am aware, has been of the 
usual taper form. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The herein-described spike, having a 
broad but comparatively thin shank, With par 
allel sides and front and rear faces, provided Ioo 
in its outer face for a portion of its length 
from its front end with a recess or groove (l, 
95 
2 
427,436 
of substantially the same depth throughout, 
which forms the sides of the spike into ribs 
a, and provided at its front end with a chisel 
edge on the broad face and side ribs of the 
5 groove, substantially as and for the purposes 
hereinbefore set forth. 
2. A railway-Spike having a broad but con 
paratively thin shank formed with parallel 
faces bc, a grooved, of substantially the same 
To depth throughout, a chisel-edge on the outer 
end of the bottom and sides of the groove, 
and lateral wings e with beveled lower edges 
e', as and for the purposes hereinbefore set 
forth. 
my hand this 17th day of February, 1890. 
RUFUS S. MERRILL. 
- 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set I5 
Witnesses: 
EWELL A. DICK, 
WILLIAM II. SHIPLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427536.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C, H, BARTLETT, 
PITMAN HOLDER, FOR MOWING OR REAPING MACHINES 
No. 427,536, 
Patented May 13, 1890, 
 
 
WTWESSAES. 722 
delaid 
z 
42% 
2%.-- 
a TTORMAY, 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
G. H. BARTETT. 
PITMAN HOLDER FOR MOWING OR REAPING MACHINEs. 
No. 427,536. 
Patented May 13, 1890, 
 
 
 
 
|| i. 
E. 
 
 
 
E. 
O 
2. 
  
 
I 
N 
assas 
as Firs 
S. 
s 
al 
SO 
SS PS 
es 
N 
SS E. 
iS 
ETS 
s 
Sy 
S. 
Ea. 
resea 
s 
 
Is 
i t 
fift 
J) 7WESSAS 
47%z- 
a ... . 
IW/ENTOR 
427Zazz 
anze 48-on, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE HERMAN BARTLETT, OF HOOSICK FALLS, NEW YORK. 
PT MAN - HOLDER FOR MOWING AND REAPNG MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,536, dated May 13, 1890. 
Application filed November 23, 1889, Serial No. 331275. (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE HERMAN BART 
LETT, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Hoosick Falls, Rensselaer county, New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Pitman-Holders, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to pitman guides or 
holders, which are adapted to hold the pit 
man in the scythe-eye, and also to permit, by 
raising the latch of the holder or guide, the 
removal or insertion of the pitman; and it 
consists, more particularly, in a novel catch 
to lock the latch when lowered in place irre 
spective of the action of the spring by which 
the catch is operated. The catch is provided 
With a calm operated on by a cam on the latch, 
which, when pushed downwardly, serves to 
move the catch to lock the latch. A spring 
is applied to the catch to hold the latch locked, 
and a downward pressure on the catch, owing 
to its cam shape in conjunction with the cam 
shape of the latch, brings about the initial 
displacement of the latch from the catch. 
In order that others skilled in the art to 
Which my invention relates may the more 
readily understand the same, I will now pro 
ceed to describeit with reference to the accom 
panying drawings, in which similar letters of 
reference indicate like parts, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved pitman holder and guide. Fig.2 is a 
perspective view of the catch. Fig. 3 is a 
perspective view of the latch, looking from 
the points of the guards. Fig. 4 is a top plan 
view showing a portion of the finger-bar, 
knife, pitman, and shoe. 
G is the finger-bar, to which the guards g 
are bolted. 
P is the pitman connected to the knife H 
P is the shoe. 
A is the main portion of the guide or holder, 
and is perforated at C. C. to receive bolts by 
which it is secured rigidly to the finger-bar. 
B is a catch perforated at b to receive a 
pivot-pin b, fastened between the lugs a' a' 
on the portion A. The catchis provided with 
a lug b', between which and the portion A is 
in the knife-head S. 
interposed a spiral spring A'. The spiral 
spring tends to hold the catch in the position 
shown in Fig. 1. The catch is provided with 
a lug b, the top of which is curved or cam 
shaped at b, and the under side of which is 
adapted to fit over the adjacent end of the 
latch C at C. The catch B is curved or calm 
shaped at b', and the inner end of the latch 
C is curved or cam-shaped at c'. The latch 
is pivoted at c between ears c c, attached 
to the portion A of the holder, and is adapted 
to be raised or swung up on its pivot a suffi 
cient distance to permit the insertion or re 
moval of the pitman. 
The operation of the invention is as follows: 
When the pitman has been inserted in the 
scythe-eye, which reciprocates in the usual 
well-known way just in front of the latch C, 
the latter is swung downwardly on its pivot, 
and the curved surface c', coming in contact 
with the curved surface b of the catch, the 
latter is moved backwardly on its pivot, Com 
pressing the spiral spring A'. The latch hav 
ing passed the lug b, the cam or curved Sur 
face c', coming in contact with the cam b', 
acts to swing the catch in the opposite direc 
tion in conjunction with the force of expan 
sion of the spring A', and the under side of 
the lug b fitting over the portion c of the 
latch C the latter is held in place. To dis 
engage the pitman, the operator presses 
down upon the spring-catch on the inner end 
thereof, and the cam-face b", by the movement 
of the catch bearing upon the cam-face c, 
raises the latch from engagement with the 
spring-catch, when the latch is further swung 
up on its pivot by the operator a sufficient 
distance to permit the removal of the pitman 
from the scythe-eye. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a pitman guide or holder, the combi 
nation, with a swinging latch formed on its 
free end with a cam-face, of a catch formed 
with two cam-faces successively engaged by 
the cam-face of the latch to move the catch 
backwardly and then forwardly, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination, in a pitman guide or 
holder, of a swinging latch having a cam-face 
on its free end, a catch having a cam-face 
75 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
IOC) 
2 
427,536 
thereon engaged by the cam on the latch to move the catch forwardly in conjunction with Io 
swing the catch, substantially as and for the the spring to lock the latch in place, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
purpose specified. 
In witness whereof I have he reunto Set my 
3. In a pitman guide or holder, the combi- 
nation of a swinging latch having a cam-face hand this 20th day of November, 1889. 
on the free end thereof, a catch having two 
cam-faces thereon engaged by the cam-face 
On the latch to first move the catch back- 
Wardly, compressing the spring, and then . 
GEORGE HERMAN BARTLETT. 
H. P. BLACKINTON, 
D. PEMKLE. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427636.txt	(No Model.) 
F. R. SWALLEY. 
WEHICLE AXLE. 
No. 427,636. 
Patented May 13, 1890. 
 
WZZZZZZ 
W7. 
Mittfy 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK R. SWALLEY, OF TOLEDO, OHIO. 
VEHICLE - AXLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,636, dated May 13, 1890. 
Application filed June 22, 1889, Serial No,315,273, (No model.) 
65 
75 
To all, Luhon, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, FREDERICKR.SWALLEY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at To 
ledo, in the county of Lucas and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Vehicle - Axles; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to vehicle-axles and 
means for holding the wheel upon the spindle. 
The object of the invention is to form a 
complete axle, comprising the axle-tree and 
spindles, of a single piece of sheet metal, 
whereby there shall be a tubular Spindle and 
a central axle-tree formed with a longitudinal 
opening, thereby combining rigidity with 
lightness, as well as dispensing with the Sev 
eral parts heretofore assembled in forming a 
complete axle and spindles. 
A further object is to construct Spindle and 
axle-tree relatively to allow a catch to be en 
gaged there with that shall hold the wheel se 
curely upon the spindle without the aid of 
the ordinary nut or linchpin. 
The invention consists in the parts and 
combination of parts hereinafter described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan View of 
a blank of sheet metal of the proper size to 
form a complete axle-tree and Spindles. Fig. 
2 is a side view of the blank pressed into form 
to give the desired shape to the central por 
tion or axle-tree, wherein there is formed a 
central longitudinal opening, either of U 
form, as shown in Fig. 4, or it may be of any 
preferred form in cross-section. Fig. 3 is a 
side view of a complete axle after the ends 
of the bank have been formed tubular by 
pressure, and also with the collar Secured 
thereon, against which the hub of the wheel 
may abut. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of a por 
tion of a complete axle and spindle, with a 
fastening device for securing the wheel upon 
the spindle. Fig. 5 is a longitudinal vertical 
section of the same, showing the fastening de 
vice in place within the spindle and axle-tree. 
25 
35 
The object of my invention is to construct 
an axle with a central longitudinal opening 
and integral tubular spindles as an article of 
manufacture, with a spring-catch that shall 
be particularly adaptable to a thimble and 
axle of such constructions, whereby the com 
plete axle and fastening may be sold to the 
trade ready for use. 
Heretofore in the branch of the art to which 
my invention belongs the axle-tree has been 
formed of a sheet of metal pressed into shape, 
With an opening throughout the length thereof 
of a U or V shape in cross-section, and the 
spindles have been secured within the open 
ings and held by clips. While this construc 
tion embraces the advantage of strength, ri 
gidity, and lightness to the axle-tree, it re 
quires considerable additional weight to the 
arms of the spindles and the expense of clips 
to Secure the same. Tubular axles have also 
been formed with the spindles integral; but 
this construction requires great weight of 
metal and care in Welding the axle the entire 
length thereof, necessitating, also, the expense 
of turning or grinding the spindle to the 
proper taper. These difficulties are entirely 
overcome by my invention, in which the blank 
A is constructed of the proper form and size, 
preferably by the use of dies, whereby the 
blank is cut from a sheet of metal. The blank 
is then pressed into the desired form for the 
axle-tree of the axle by bending the same 
throughout the entire length of the blank, 
preferably by male and female die, to form a 
channel B of any desired form in cross-sec 
tion. The ends C of the blank are now bent 
or turned to form a spindle D, either straight 
or with any desired taper, said spindle being 
tubular in form and its bore communicating 
with the channel or groove of the axle-tree, 
and at the juncture of the said axle-tree and 
spindle is formed a shoulder E, against which 
the washer E abuts when shrunk upon the 
spindle, as shown. 
F designates a device for securing the wheel 
upon the spindle, and comprises a catch G, 
formed of wire doubled upon itself in parallel 
relation, and with a spring-head formed in T 
shape, the end of one of the side wires H hav 
ing a slight bend at H' to conform to the 
shape of the interior of the axle-tree, and the 
opposite side wire I bent at nearly a right an 
95 
IOO 
427,636 
gle at I, and again at the same angle at I'', to 
cause the end I' to lie in parallel relation 
with the lower side of the axle-tree. 
J designates a washer, through which the 
side wires are passed, causing the washer to 
rest against the T-shaped head of the spring 
catch. 
In operation the wheel is placed upon the 
spindle, the side wires are compressed to the 
interior diameter of the spindles and urged 
through the same, the bend of wire H rests in 
the curved portion of the axle-tree, and the 
angled portion of wire I passes through the 
narrow opening between the two sides of the 
blank just in rear of the point where the two 
sides join in forming the spindle, and the side 
wires are held in this frictional engagement 
of wire H and positive engagement of wire I 
by reason of the spring of the T-head, and 
the hub of the wheel is confined between the 
two washers. To release the catch and allow 
the removal of the wheel from the spindle, 
the end I' of wire I is pressed inwardly to 
remove the angled portion from engagement 
with the axle, and the entire catch is pulled 
out of the spindle. It will be seen that the 
peculiar formation of the axle-tree and spin 
dle renders the same particularly adaptable 
to the spring-catch. 
It will be apparent that I may modify the 
formation of the T-head somewhat by having 
but one side thereof protrude prominently to 
pass through the opening occupied by the an 
gleportion of Wirel, and form the oppositeside 
to rest against the shoulder of the axle-tree at 
the point occupied by the bent portion. H' of 
wire H, and allow the ends of the wires to pro 
trude through the outer end of the spindle 
Cy 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
What I claim is 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, 
an axle formed of a single blank of sheet 
metal and consisting of an axle-tree essentially 
U-shaped in cross-section, spindles arranged 
at each end of the axle-tree, said spindles be 
ing tubular in form and formed with an an 
nular shoulder at the juncture of the spindle 
and axle-tree, against which the collar Eabuts, 
and adapted for engagement with the hub-re 
taining device, substantially as shown and 
described. 
2. As an article of manufacture, a metal 
axle formed with a body portion having a 
longitudinal opening upon the under side 
and tubular spindles upon each end, and a 
spring-catch passed through the tubular por 
tion and engaging with the body portion of 
the axle, with projections upon the outer end 
to hold the wheel upon the spindle, as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
3. An improved wheel-retaining device G. 
for tubular spindles, consisting of a T-shaped 
head portion, the parallel side wires H and I, 
having the bent portion H' and I", respect 
ively, near their inner ends, adapted to en 
gage the inner ends of the tubular spindle 
and hold the device within the same, Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I hereby affix my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
FREDERICIK. R. SWALLEY. 
Witnesses: 
T. B. TUCKER, 
ALANSON WOOD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427736.txt	(No Model.) 
S. BUF KIN. 
STRAW STACKER 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 427,736, 
Patented May 13, 1890, 
 
122 8% 
% 2S A. 
ZY 
N 
72 
2 
yaza 
d 
a 
W 
A. 
% 
%E 
WA 
r 
Z2 AX2 2S 
? 
f 
.." 
As 
SR2 
x 
%22 
(No Model.) 
No. 427,736. 
S. BUFKIN. 
STRAW STACKER 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 13, 1890. 
 
F. G. 2. 
ATTEST. 
INVENTOR 
%22T, 22 
 
(No Model.) 
S. BUFKIN. 
STRAW STACKER 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 427,736, 
Patented May 13, 1890, 
FIG. 4. 
FIG.5. 
swax 
axias 
s List 7 
F. 
 
(No Model.) 
S. BUF KIN. 
STRAW STACKER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 427,736. 
Patented May 13, 1890. 
ill 
S-arini 70 
 
ATTEST 
227A 2. 
INVENTOR. 
2. ar 
THE MORRIs Peters co, PHoro-LTHo., wASHINGTON, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL BUFKIN, OF ANDERSON, INDIANA. 
STRAW, STACKER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,736, dated May 18, 1890. 
Application filed November 6, 1889, 
Serial No, 329,387, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL BUFKIN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Ander 
Son, in the county of Madison and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
full Improvements in Straw-Stackers; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
S30. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
straw-stackers, and more particularly to im 
provements in the mechanism employed in 
raising and lowering the carrier-frame and 
for SWinging the same from side to side auto 
matically. 
My Said invention consists in certain nov. 
elties in the details of the construction, ar 
rangement, and combination of the various 
parts, all of which I will now proceed to point 
out and describe, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I is a perspective of a straw-stacker 
embodying my said invention, showing the 
elevator-frame unfolded and in an inoperative 
position. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
Same, showing the machine in an operative 
Fig. 
position and ready for transportation. 
3 is a side elevation of the opposite from that 
shown in Fig. 2, parts of the same being bro 
ken away, 
Fig. 4 is an end elevation, parts 
of the machine being removed. Fig. 5 is a 
top plan view of the turn-table, the elevator 
frame being removed and one of the switch 
or end pieces of the rack also being removed. 
Fig. 6 is a bottom plan view of a portion of 
the main frame of the machine and the turn 
table Supportedl thereon. Fig. 7 is a bottom 
plan view of the turn-table and the pinion 
engaging the rack of Said table, the swinging 
arm or bracket on which said pinion is sup 
ported being shown in dotted lines. Figs. S, 
9, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 are details illustrating 
various parts of my said invention. 
Referring to said drawings, 1 represents 
the truck O' main frame of the stacker, coln 
sisting of the side bars 2 and transverse bars 
3, forming a substantially square space be 
tween said side and transverse bars. To the 
ends of the frame are secured suitable axles 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
4, upon which are mounted wheels 5. In the 
Corners of the space formed between the side 
and transverse bars are secured diagonal 
brackets 6, said brackets forming braces for 
the frame. To each bracket is secured a 
pintle 7, on which is mounted a roller-bear 
ing 8. 
9 is a circular turn-table provided with a 
central hub 10 and diametrically-arranged 
braces or arms 11, connecting the hub and 
table. The under side of the turn-table is 
provided with an inwardly-projecting annu 
lar flange 12, the bottom of which rests upon 
the roller-bearings S. 
14 are upwardly-projecting studs formed on 
the brackets 6, having projecting pintles 15, 
On which are mounted rollers 16, which en 
gage the upper surface of the annular flange 
12 and serve to hold the table in position 
upon its bearings. 
15 is the elevator-frame, which may be of 
any desired construction, and is provided 
with the hinged and folding section 16, 
17 is a transverse shaft mounted in bear 
ings in the lower rear end of the elevator 
frame. Said shaft projects beyond the sides 
of the frame, and to its ends are pivotally se 
cured lever-arms 18, extending parallel with 
each other and having their opposite ends 
pivotally secured to diametrically-opposite 
points on the outside of the turn-table. Said 
lever-arms are preferably formed in the shape 
of a truss-brace and are provided with the 
brace-bal's 19. 
20 are parallel projecting arms secured to 
21 are upwardly-extending and parallel seg 
mental racks rigidly Secured to said arms and 
to the turn-table, 
22 are downwardly-extending and parallel 
segmental racks rigidly secured to the lower 
rear end of the elevator-frame, Said seg 
mental racks 21 and 22 are arranged upon 
the arcs of circles having different centers, 
the racks 22 being larger than the racks 21 
and formed in the arc of a circle of greater 
diameter than the circle in the arc of which 
the rack 21 is formed. Said racks 22 pass on 
the outside of the racks 21 and slightly over 
lap the Salme. The lever - arms are so ar 
ranged that their ends are pivoted at the cen 
the turn-table. 
90 
95 
IOC 
427,736 
IO 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
ters of the circles in the arcs of which the 
racks are formed. . 
23 are bearings formed in the lever-arms 18, 
and preferably in the cross bars or braces 19, 
as shown. 
24 is a transverse counter-shaft mounted in 
the bearings 23. 
25 are pinions rigidly mounted upon the 
shaft 24 and engaging with the segmental 
racks 22. 
26 are smaller pinions, also rigidly mounted 
upon the shaft 24 and adapted to engage With 
the segmental racks 21. 
27 is a worm-wheel rigidly mounted on the 
shaft 24 at its center. Said worm-wheel is 
inclosed by a box or housing 28, loosely 
mounted on said shaft 24 and formed in up 
per and lower sections bolted to each other. 
The upper section of the box or housing has 
projecting therefrom a sleeve-bearing 29, 
which terminates in a forked end 30. 
31 are bearings formed in the end of each 
arm of the fork. 
32 is a short shaft mounted in the sleeve 
bearing 29, said shaft being arranged sub 
stantially at right angles to the shaft 24. 
33 is a worm formed on one end of the 
shaft 32 and engaging with the worm-wheel 
27, said worm being located within the box 
or housing. 
34 is a bevel-gear rigidly mounted on the 
outer end of the shaft and located between 
the arms of the fork 30. 
35 are bearings formed on the lever-arms 
near their lower pivoted ends. 
36 is a main shaft mounted in said bearings 
35 and passing through the bearings 31 in the 
forked end of the sleeve. 
37 is a bevel-gear mounted on the shaft, 36 
between the forked end of said sleeve and en 
gaging with the bevel-gear 34. 
38 is a crank Secured to one end of the shaft 
36. If desired, each end of the shaft may 
be provided with a crank. The outer ends of 
the arms 20 project beyond the frames of the 
racks 21 and form stops 39. To one side of 
the racks 21, at the point where the teeth ter. 
minate, I provide teeth or projections 40. 
41 are calms rigidly mounted on the shaft 
24 next to and on the inside of the pinions 
26. Said cams are provided with shoulders 
42, which as the shaft is revolved are adapted 
to engage with the teeth or projections 40 and 
throw the pinions 26 in gear with the racks 21. 
The construction. So fal' described consti 
tutes the mechanism by means of which the 
front and rear ends of the elevator-frame 
may be simultaneously raised or lowered. 
For convenience I will now describe the oper 
ation of this part of my said invention. When 
the stacker is in an inoperative position and 
ready for transportation and the hinged sec 
tion of the elevator-frame is folded up, as 
shown in Fig. 2, the pinions 26 are disen 
gaged from the racks 21 and the center of 
gravity of the machine is back of the pivotal 
points of the lower ends of the lever-arms. 
The cams 41 then rest upon the stops 40, thus 
limiting the further downward movement of 
the rear end of the elevator-frame, the for 
ward end of said frame resting upon Supports 
44, secured to the forward end of the truck on 
which said elevator-frame is mounted. When 
it is desired to use the stacker, the elevator 
frame is unfolded, as shown in Fig. 1, the cen 
ter of gravity of said elevator-frame changes 
to the opposite side of the lower pivoted ends 
of the lever-arms from that shown in Fig. 2, and 
the rear end of the elevator-frame rises until 
the cams 41 rest against the under side of the 
teeth or projections 40. As the shaft 24 is 
rotated through the mechanism described, the 
shoulders 42 engage with the stops 40 and 
throw the pinions 26 in gear with the racks 
21. As said shaft is rotated, the pinions 25, 
engaging with the racks 22, raise the forward 
end of the elevator-frame. 
At the same time 
the pinions 26 engage with the racks 21 and 
travel up said racks, thus raising the rear or 
receiving end of the elevator-frame. The 
pinions 25, however, being larger than the 
pinions 26, the forward or distributing end 
of the elevator-frame is raised with greater 
rapidity than the rear receiving end, and, if 
desired, the shaft 24 may be rotated to cause 
the pinions 25 to engage the racks 22 before 
the frame is unfolded to cause the cams 41 to 
engage the stops 40 and throw the pinions 26 
in gear with the racks 21, thus giving the for 
ward distributing end of the frame a greater 
elevation. The object of this feature of my 
said invention is to raise the front end of the 
elevator-frame, so that it will be able to dis 
tribute upon a high stack, and at the same 
time raise the lower receiving end, so that the 
angle of elevation will not be so great, and 
permit the endless belt to readily carry the 
straw up the elevator. 
I will now describe the mechanism by which 
the turn-table is operated and the distribut 
ing end of the elevator-frame automatically 
swung back and forward in the arc of a circle. 
47 is a circular casting secured to the under 
side of the arms 11 of the turn-table and con 
centric there with. On the under side of said 
casting are formed circular racks 48 and 49, 
the teeth of which are oppositely disposed to 
ward each other, the teeth of the rack 48 pro 
jecting in toward the center of the turn-table 
and the teeth of the rack 49 projecting out 
from the center of said turn-table. Said racks 
are also concentric with each other and with 
the turn-table. In the space between said 
lacks and the same distance from each I form 
on the under side of the casting 47 an annular 
flange 50. 
51 is a cross-bar connecting the transverse 
bars of the truck or main frame. 
52 are bearings formed on the under side of 
the bar 51 and one of the side bars of the 
frame. 53 is a shaft mounted in said bear 
ings 52. Said shaft is provided on its outer 
- 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
I O5 
IEC 
II5 
I 25 
427,736 
75 
IO 
35 
O 
45 
55 
- 
end with a crank 54, by means of which it 
may be operated by hand, and also with a 
pulley, so that it can be connected with suit 
ble driving-power. 
55 is a bearing 
secured to one side of the 
bar 51. 
56 is a short vertical shaft mounted in said 
bearing and passing up through the hub of 
the turn-table. 57 is a bevel-gear on the 
lower end of said vertical shaft, which en 
gages with a bevel-gear 58, mounted on the 
inner end of the shaft, 53. 
59 is a pinion, also mounted on the vertical 
shaft 56 and secured to the bevel-gear 57, or 
formed integral there with. 
60 is a vertical pintle secured to and pro 
jecting down from the cross-bar 51. 
61 is a gear mounted on the pintle 60 and 
engaging with the pinion 59. 
62 is a pinion, also mounted on the pintle 
60, and preferably formed integral with the 
gear 61. 
63 is a short vertical shaft mounted in a 
bearing 64, attached to the cross-bar 51, and - 
having loosely mounted on its lower portion 
below the bar 51 a gear 65, which engages 
with the pinion 62. The short vertical shaft 
63 is provided with an eccentric head 66, hav 
ing a spring-actuating clutch-pin 67, adapted 
to engage a hole 68 in the face of the gear 
65 to connector disconnect said gear with the 
shaft 63, so as to throw the turn-table in or 
out of gear, as hereinafter described. 69 is a 
pinion rigidly mounted on the upper end of 
said shaft 63. 
70 is a swinging bracket pivoted on the 
shaft 63 and having a vertical bearing 71 
formed in its free end. 72 is a vertical spin 
dle mounted in said bearing. 
73 is a gear mounted on the upper end of 
the spindle 72 and engaging with the pinion 
69. The bracket 70, having its pivotal point 
on the shaft. 63, the gear 73 and pinion 69 are 
held in engagement at all positions which the 
bracket may assume. 
74 is a pinion mounted on the spindle 72, 
above the gear 73, and is either secured to 
said gear or formed integral therewith. Said 
pinion 74 engages the circular racks of the 
turn-table. 
75 is a pin or stud projecting above the 
center of the pinion 74 and engages with the 
annular flange 50 to hold the pinion in en 
gagement with the racks. 
76 are recesses or openings formed in the 
upper side of the circular casting 47. 
77 are reversible switch or end blocks, which 
conform to the shape of and are placed in the 
openings 76. On one side of said switch 
blocks are oppositely - disposed segmental 
racks 78, the teeth of which are of the same 
size as the teeth of the circular racks. On 
the opposite side of the blocks are segmental 
flanges 79, arranged in the arc of a circle of 
the same diameter as the annular flange 50. 
When said blocks are inserted with the racks 
down, said racks form a communication or 
switch connecting the circular racks 48 and 
When the blocks are inserted with the 
49. 
flanged side down, said flange forms a con 
tinuation of the annular flange 50, and does 
not interfere with the operation of the pinion 
with the circular racks. 
Any desired number of switch-blocks may 
be used. For convenience I have shown but 
three in the present drawings. These switch 
blocks are intended to regulate the distance 
the upper discharging end of the elevator 
frame will Swing, so as to build a large or 
small stack, and also to transfer the pinion 
from one circular rack to the other as it 
reaches the switch-block, thus automatically 
reversing the swinging movement of the ele 
vator-frame, and causing its discharge end to 
swing back and forward in a longer or shorter 
arc, as desired. The operation of this portion 
of my invention will be readily understood. 
The switch-blocks are first adjusted to give 
the turn-table the desired movement, so that 
the end of the elevator-frame will move in a 
greater or smaller arc. The pinion 74 will be 
presumed to be in engagement with the outer 
rack, as shown in the drawings, as said pin 
ion is operated through the mechanism de 
scribed, the turn-table moved in one direction 
until the switch-block reaches the pinion which 
engages with the rack on the block and is trans 
ferred to the inner rack, and the movement 
of the turn-table and consequent movement of 
elevator-frame reversed, the pinion being 
again transferred to the outer rack when it 
reaches the opposite switch-block. 
80 is a horizontal shaft mounted in bear 
ings S1 on the turn-table and having on its 
inner end a bevel-gear 82, which engages with 
a bevel-gear 83, mounted on the upper end of 
the vertical shaft 56. 84 is a pulley mounted 
on the outer end of said shaft S0. 
85 are pulley's mounted on the shaft, 17. SG 
is a belt connecting said pulleys. 
S7 are rollers or pulleys, also mounted on 
the shaft 17, on which the endless carrier-belt 
187 is mounted, and by means of which said 
carrier is operated. 
SS are eccentrics secured on opposite ends 
of the shaft 17. S9 are pitman-arms mounted 
on said eccentrics and having secured to their 
Outer ends an Oscillating receiving and feeder 
table 90, 
91 are braces Secured at one end to the le 
ver-arms 18 and having their upper ends piv 
otally Secured to the under side of the table 
90, The straw is received upon the table and 
is moved forward and deposited upon the car 
rier-belt by the movement of said table. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Ietters Patent, is 
1. In a straw-stacker, the combination, with 
a turn-table having two parallel lever-arms 
secured thereto, of an elevator-frame having 
its lower receiving end pivoted to the other 
95 
IOO 
I o5 
d 
IIS 
I 25 
I 30 
4. 
427,736 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
ends of said lever-arms, two parallel and up- arms, the pinions 25, mounted upon the shaft 
24, engaging the racks 22, the pinions 26, 
wardly-extending segmental racks secured to 
also mounted upon the shaft 24 and engaging 
the turn-table, two parallel and downwardly 
extending racks secured to the elevator-frame, 
the racks 21, the main shaft 36, mounted in 
bearings on the lever-arms, means for rotat 
a transverse shaft mounted in bearings in the 
ing said shaft, a worm-wheel 27, mounted 
lever-arms and interposed between the Op 
upon the shaft 24, a box or housing inclosing 
positely-arranged racks, two sets of pinions 
said worm-wheel, the sleeve-bearing 29, pro 
mounted on the transverse shaft, one Set en 
gaging the upwardly-extending rack and the 
jecting from said box or housing and hav. 
other set engaging the downwardly-extending 
ing its end pivotally supported on the main 
shaft, the short shaft 32, mounted in said 
rack, and mechanism for rotating said Shaft, 
sleeve-bearing, the worm 33 on one end of 
all constructed, arranged, and operating Sub 
said shaft 32, engaging the Worm-wheel, the 
stantially as shown and described. 
bevel-gear 34, mounted on the other end of 
2. In a straw-stacker, the combination, with 
said shaft, and the bevel-gear 37, mounted On 
a turn-table and the parallel lever-arms 18, piv 
said main shaft and engaging the gear 34, all 
oted at one end to said table, of the elevator 
constructed, arranged, and Operating Sub 
frame 15, pivoted at its lower receiving end 
stantially as shown and described. 
to the other ends of said arms, the upwardly 
extending parallel segmental racks 21, Se 
5. In a straw-stacker, the combination, With 
cured to said table, the downwardly-extend 
a truck, of a turn - table suitably mounted 
ing parallel segmental racks 22, Secured to 
thereon and provided on its under side with 
the concentric circular racks 48 and 49, hav 
the elevator-frame, the transverse shaft 24, 
ing oppositely-arranged teeth, the annular 
mounted in bearings 23 in the lever-arms, 
guide-flange 50, located between Said racks, 
the pinions 25, mounted upon the shaft 24 
and engaging with the racks 22, the smaller 
and the removable and reversible Switch 
pinions 26, also mounted upon said shaft and 
blocks 77, having on one face segmental racks 
78, and on their opposite faces the segmental 
engaging the racks 21, and means for rotat 
flanges 79, substantially as shown and de 
ing said shaft 24, all constructed, arranged, 
and operating substantially as shown and de 
scribed, as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a straw-stacker, the combination, with 
Scribed. 
3. In a straw-stacker, the combination, with 
a truck, a turn-table mounted thereon and 
a turn-table and the parallel lever-arms 18, piv 
provided on its under side with concentric 
oted at one end to said table, of the folding 
circular racks 48 and 49, an annular flange 
elevator-frame 15, pivoted at its lower re 
50, located between said racks, and the re 
ceiving end to the other ends of said lever 
movable and reversible switch-blocks 77, hav 
arms, the upwardly-extending parallel seg 
ing on One face the segmental flange 79 and 
on their opposite faces the segmental racks 
mental racks 21, secured to said table, the 
7S, for the purpose set forth, of the Swinging 
stops 39, located below the racks 21, the pro 
bracket 70, pivoted on the truck-frame, the 
jections 40, to one side of and at the lower 
end of said racks, the downwardly-extending 
vertical spindle mounted on said bracket, the 
pinion 74, mounted on said spindle and en 
parallel racks 22, secured to the elevator 
gaging the circular racks, and provided with 
frame, the transverse shaft 24, mounted in 
a centrally-projecting pin or stud engaging 
bearings 23 in the lever-arms, the pinions 25, 
the guide-flange, and mechanism for rotating 
mounted upon the shaft and engaging with 
said pinion 74, all constructed, arranged, and 
the racks. 22, the Smaller pinions 26, also 
operating substantially as shown and de 
mounted upon said shaft and adapted to en 
gage the racks 21, the cams 41, mounted 
Scribed. 
upon the transverse shaft and adapted to rest 
7. In a straw-stacker, the combination, with 
upon the stops 39 when the elevator-frame is in 
a truck, a turn-table mounted thereon and 
an inoperative position, having shoulders 42, 
provided on its under side with concentric cir 
adapted to engage the projections 40 to throw 
cular racks 48 and 49, an annular guide 
the pinions 26 in gear with the racks 21 when 
flange 50, located between said racks, and the 
the elevator-frame is in an operative posi 
removable and reversible switch-blocks 77, 
having on one face the segmental racks 78, 
tion, and means for rotating the transverse 
shaft, all constructed, arranged, and operat 
adapted to form a communication between 
ing substantially as shown and described. 
the racks 48 and 49, and on their opposite 
faces the segmental flanges 79, adapted when 
4. In a straw-stacker, the combination, With 
a turn-table and the parallel lever-arms 18, piv 
in position to form a continuation of the 
guide - flange, of the short vertical shaft 63, 
oted at one end to said table, of the elevator 
frame 15, having its lower receiving end piv 
mounted in bearings on the truck, a gear 65, 
loosely mounted on the shaft, a spring clutch 
oted to the other ends of the lever-arms, the 
upwardly-extending parallel segmental racks 
pin 67 for rigidly securing the gear to said 
21, secured to the turn-table, the downwardly 
shaft, mechanism for rotating, the gear 65, a 
extending parallel segmental racks 22, Se 
pinion 69, rigidly mounted on the upper end 
of the shaft 63, a Swinging bracket 70, piv 
cured to the elevator-frame, the transverse 
shaft 24, mounted in bearings 23 in the lever-loted on said shaft 63, a vertical spindle 72, 
75 
95 
Od 
O 
I 5 
I 25 
427,786 
5 
mounted in said bracket, a gear 73, rigidly 
mounted on said spindle and engaging with 
the pinion (39, and a pinion 74, rigidly mounted 
on said spindle 72 and engaging the circular 
racks, and provided with a centrally-project 
ing pin or stud 75, engaging the guiding 
flange, all constructed, arranged, and operat 
ing substantially as shown and described, as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in To 
presence of two witnesses. 
SAMUEL BUFKIN. 
Witnesses: 
G. O. DRISCOLL, 
HOWARD STURDEVANT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427836.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 427,836, 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented May 13, 1890. 
T, C. CLARKE. 
ELEWATED RAILWAY. 
Z%z 
| 
- Z 2 w 
i------- 
l 
( 47. 
y 
== } 
NS67 GS/ 
rera Encarz 
WITNESSES 
MGu2% 76 
-6. &ezir (s 
N 
INVENTOR: 
ATTORAVEYS 
 
(No Model.) 
T. C. CLARKE, 
EEWATED RAI, WAY 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
s 
No. 427,836. 
Patented May 13, 1890. 
EZHEN AN AN AN AN 
Za. 
s 7| TN 
MW/ Ye 
%fs 
N 
ATP 
NHL7 2 
v 
 
2NN-42 Sai 
KSEE 
i. 
Z t2s2se 
a 1 NS 
SS N 
NY 
>s-S v v 
SARS 
a 
2Z7 
a'i 
43 
2 
 
 
- 
 
 
WITNESSES 
-(2-3% 
-66-2 loco 
 
Z1 | 4 || 
//WWEAVTOR: . 
an 
2/6%ae/62 
a long ge 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS C. CLARIKE, OF SHREWSBURY, NEW JERSEY. 
EEVATED RALWAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,836, dated May 13, 1890. 
Application filed March 6, 1890, Serial No, 342,867, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS C. CLARKE, of 
the township of Shrewsbury, in the county of 
Monmouth and State of New Jersey, have in 
vented a new and Improved Elevated Rail 
way, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved elevated railway which 
is simple and durable and safe in construc 
tion, contains double tracks, takes up little 
room in the street, and does not obstruct to 
a great extent passage of light and air to 
adjoining buildings, and can be readily util 
ized for carrying electric-wire. cables, &c. 
The invention consists of a longitudinally 
extending triangular girder, and side brack 
ets projecting from the same at suitable in 
tervals and serving to support the double 
tracks. 
The invention also consists of certain parts 
and details and combinations of the same, as 
will be hereinafter fully described, and then 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a transverse section of the im 
provement. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
same with the foundation insection. Fig. 3 is 
a plan view of the same; and Fig. 4 is a trans 
verse section of part of the improvement as 
adapted for curves, turn-outs, &c. 
The improved elevated railway A is pro 
vided at suitable intervals with a concrete 
foundation B, in which is set, while the con 
crete is in a plastic state, the base C, extend 
ing at its upper end to about the surface of 
the roadway, in which the elevated railway 
is erected. In the base C is set a column D, 
of any approved construction, slightly curved 
at both sides and at the upper end, as is plainly 
shown in Fig.1. The series of columns D, held 
along the line of the railway, support a longi 
tudinally-extending triangular girder E, of 
any approved construction, but resting with 
its base on the said columns, as is plainly 
shown in the drawings. From the angular 
sides of this triangular girder extend at 
suitable intervals brackets F, adapted to 
support the track-rails G, on which the cars, 
locomotives, &c., are to run. The brackets 
F may also Support, by Suitable means, the 
cable for propelling the cars in case the cable 
system is adopted. Along the longitudinal 
girder E may be strung electric wires, cables, 
&c., for various purposes, they not being in 
the way of the cars traveling on the track G. 
The upper ends of the brackets Fareslightly 
bent upward, and the upper ends of the sev 
eral brackets on each side are connected with 
each other by a railing I, which forms a safe 
guard to prevent cars from falling off the 
tracks in case of accident. Now it will be 
seen that the longitudinal triangular girder 
E permits of putting brackets F on both 
sides, so that the strain is equally divided 
and taken up by the longitudinal girder rest 
ing on the series of columns D. It will fur 
ther be seen that as but a single line of col 
umns is used they can readily be set in the 
center of the street between the lines of the 
surface-railway tracks, thus utilizing a space 
heretofore unoccupied, or the line of the col 
umns may be placed in any other position 
where a single line of columns is admissible. 
I am aware that elevated railways with a 
single line of columns supporting a single 
track have been used, and I do not claim 
such construction, broadly. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. An elevated railway comprising a longi 
tudinally - extending triangular girder, and 
side brackets projecting from the same at 
suitable intervals on each side and adapted 
to support double tracks, substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. An elevated railway comprising a sin 
gle line of columns, a longitudinal triangular 
girder supported on the upper ends of the 
said columns, and side brackets secured on 
each side of the said girder, placed suitable 
distances apart and adapted to support 
double tracks, substantially as shown and 
described. 
O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
2 
427,836 
3. An elevated railway comprising a line of the said triangular girder and adapted to 
of concrete foundations, hollow bases set in support double tracks, substantially as shown 
the said concrete while in the plastic state, and described. 
columns supported in the said bases, a longi- 
5 tudinally-extending triangular girder sup- 
Witnesses: 
ported on the top of the said line of columns, 
and side brackets projecting from each side 
E. M. CLARK, 
THEO. G. HOSTER, 
THOMAS C. CLARKE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US427936.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
J. W. TRAMMIELL, 
RAILROAD CATTLE GUARD, 
No. 427,936, 
Patented May 13, 1890. 
--- 
Z32, Z. 
H. 
a 
 
  
 
2. 
II 
--- 
 
  
s 
 
 
LLL LI. 
EEEEEEEEEEgIEE 
wox so a 
Xerxes 
of c 
ERRERVE 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. TRAMMELL, OF LAKELAND, FLORIDA. 
RAILROAD CATTLE GUARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 427,936, dated May 13, 1890. 
Application filed December 7, 1889, 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, JOHN W. TRAMMELL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Lake 
land, in the county of Polk and State of Flor 
ida, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Railroad Cattle - Guards, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of my im 
proved automatic cattle guard or gate, and 
Fig. 2 a longitudinal sectional view of the 
Sale. 
The invention has relation to that class of 
railway - crossing gates covered by Letters 
Patent numbered 416,043, granted to me on 
the 26th day of November 1889, which are 
designed to prevent live stock passing up or 
down the track while crossing the same, the 
gates and their operating devices normally 
lying down below the level of the tops of the 
railroad-rails to admit of the free passage of 
the rolling-stock when cattle are not cross 
ing, as will be more fully hereinafter set 
forth. 
This invention is designed to simplify and 
improve the general construction of the op 
erating devices and render them more du 
rable and practical, as will presently appear. 
In the drawings annexed, C, designates the 
tilting or operating levers, which run parallel 
with the tracks and are pivotally supported 
upon one of the cross-ties of the railway 
bed, one pair of levers being located between 
the tracks and one pair upon each side of the 
same. The levers between the tracks, and 
also those outside of the tracks, are connected 
by platforms b bb, these platforms running 
parallel with the ties and located to the rear 
of the pivotal points of the levers. The for 
ward ends of the tilting lever are connected 
by transverse beams c c c, which makes each 
pair of tilting levers form a rigid strong 
frame. To cause the tilting levers and plat 
forms to move simultaneously when any one 
of the platforms is depressed, I connect 
the three platforms by a transverse bar d, ar 
ranged beneath the rails and between the 
cross-ties, this bar being provided where it 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
Serial No. 332,958, (No model.) 
intersects the rails with depending loops d' 5o 
to prevent its operation being interfered with 
by the rails. The gates e are suitably piv 
oted upon a cross-tie in front of the forward 
ends of the tilting frames, and they each 
consist, essentially, of two end beams or 55 
posts and connecting wires and rails, the top 
rail being preferably provided with sharpened 
spikes or barbs. The gates are so arranged 
that when they are in their normal positions 
the forward portions of the tilting levers lie 6o 
between the end bars thereof, as shown in my 
former patent hereinbefore referred to. 
In lieu of the pins and slots shown in my 
former patent I now connect the forward 
ends of the tilting levers to the gate-beams 
by means of flat pivotal links or bars.f, which 
lie and work between the adjacent faces of 
the tilting and gate beams. These links, while 
the parts are in their normal positions, in 
cline rearwardly and upwardly, and at their 
upper ends are pivotally secured to the adja 
cent faces of the gate-beams. 
When the forward ends of the tilting 
frames are raised by the depression of the 
platforms by the crossing cattle, the pivotal 
links will cause the gates to rise automati 
cally to the position shown in dotted lines in 
Fig. 2. When pressure is removed from the 
platforms, the parts all resume their normal 
positions. 
below the tracks all the gates will be raised 
every time any one of the platforms is de 
pressed. 
It will be observed that the forward ends 
of the tilting levers are set or extended down 
wardly a short distance, so that the neces 
sary inclination may be given to the pivotal 
links, and in order that the length of the 
links may be sufficient to furnish the lever 
age necessary to raise the gates quickly and 
positively, whether a large or small animal 
treads upon the platforms. 
As shown in the drawings, the gate-wires 
may run parallel with the track, or at right 
angles to the same, as may be desired. 
Having thus fully described my improve 
ments, What I claim is 
1. The combination of the tilting frames 
By means of the connecting-bar 8o 
85 
65 
75 
- 
95 
2 
427,936 
and connected gates with the bar located be- the gate-beams, as and for the purpose de 
low the tracks and connecting all the tilting scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
frames, as and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination of the pivoted gates presence of two witnesses. 
O 
JOHN W. TRAMIMELL. 
5 having end beams, the tilting levers provided 
with platforms and lying between the said 
gate-beams, and pivotal links or bars con- 
necting the forward ends of tilting levers to 
Witnesses: 
J. J. BALDRICK, 
E. R. TRAMMELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428036.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 428,036, 
G. BAUSCH, 
PORTABLE DARK ROOM, 
Patented May 13, 1890. 
S8itv.cscs 
6. -r3'- ? 
c-A- 
3vuevitov 
See 
9-v-16 v-u 
the oasis pers co, picro-THo, WA Stikiro, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE BAUSCII, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, 
PORTABLE DARK, ROOM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,036, dated May 13, 1890. 
Application filed August 17, 1889, Serial No, 321,089, (No model.) 
5 
O 
(5 
O 
45 
To all tufton, it i?lf conce77: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE BAUSCH, of Syr 
acuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the State 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Portable Dark-Rooms, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a ful, clear, 
and exact description. 
My invention relates to photography, and 
particularly to the construction of the dark 
rooms when designed to be portable. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
portable and folding dark-room designed to 
enable any photographer-amateur or profes 
sional-to erect or set up a room at any place 
and to develop his pictures wherever desired, 
all to be capable of ioeing folded or packed 
into the minimum of space, and possessing 
all of the advantages of a permanent room. 
My invention consists in a folding and porta 
ble room provided with armholes to permit 
the proper manipulation, and with proper 
means for enabling the operator to watch the 
development, and in the other novel features 
hereinafter described, and which are specific 
ally set forth in the claims hereunto annexed. 
It is constructed as follows, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is an isometrical elevation of the 
room Set up ready for use. Fig. 2 is a like 
view looking at the opposite diagonal corner 
from Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section on the 
line a' a' in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2, showing the room 
partly folded up. Fig. 4 is an end elevation 
of the room sulbstantially folded up, ready for 
transportation. 
A is the room, consisting of the top 1, the 
siles 2, the ends 3, and a bottom consisting 
of a single piece of wood or other material, to 
which the sides and ends are hinged. 
The top consists of a single piece of mate 
rial provided with an opening, which is filled 
With a pane of ruby-colored glass or any other 
material of Sufficient, transparency to perform 
substantially the same functions, and which 
is mounted the rein, either rigidly or detach 
ably. 
The sides consist of two pieces of material 
hinged to each other centrally, so as to permit 
one section to be folded over upon the other, 
 
55 
75 
and the lower edge of each side is in like 
manner connected to the edges of the bottom, 
and each side is provided with means to con 
nect its upper edge detachably to the top 1. 
The ends consist of sectionshinged together, 
the lower section being hinged to the ends of 
the bottom and the upper Section with means 
for connecting it to the ends of the top. All 
of the joints between the sections composing 
the side and ends between the sides and top, 
bottom, and ends, and between the ends and 
top and bottom are rabbeted in order to cre 
ate a tighter joint and more thoroughly shut 
out the light. 
In the sides I provide openings in which the 
sleeves 4 are secured, which are elastically 
closed at their outer ends, so that they will 
fit closely around the wrist of the operator, 
and are constructed of any dark cloth and 
long enough to enable the operator to reach 
freely around the interior of the room from 
either side with either hand. The sides are 
also provided with panes 5, of any suitable 
material, to properly admit light to the inte 
rior of the room while the operator watches 
the development, through the pane in the top. 
It will be observed that when the ends are 
released from the sides and top the sides will 
fold in Wardly, the top will follow down and 
lie upon the folded sides, and the ends will, 
as to their lower sections, remain upright, 
While their upper sections will fold over upon 
the upper surface of the top, and that when 
all is so folded the whole room is in the most 
compact form, occupying the minimum of 
Space. 
I do not limit myself to the precise form of 
construction shown in the drawings, nor to any 
precise material for the sides, top, ends, or 
bottom, or of the panes for the admission of 
light, or for the inspection of the work, nor 
to the precise means for such inspection, 
hereby expressly reserving to myself the full 
benefit of all equivalents for any or all of the 
means shown in the drawings. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A portable dark-room consisting of a 
bottom, sides composed of sectionshinged to 
gether and hinged to the bottom, ends com 
posed of sectionshinged together and hinged 
95 
do 
2 
428,036 
5 
to the bottom, and a top hinged to the sides, 
and means for securing the sides to the ends 
and for admitting non-actinic light into the 
interior, as set forth. 
2. A portable dark - room consisting of a 
solid bottom, sides composed of sections rab 
beted on their meeting edges and hinged to 
gether externally and hinged on the inside to 
the bottom with a rabbet-joint and to the top 
Io in like manner, ends composed of sections 
hinged together internally and rabbeted upon 
their meeting edges and hinged internally to 
the bottom, and a top hinged to the sides, and 
means for admitting non-actinic light and for 
15 locking the sides, ends, top, and bottom to 
gether, and sleeves secured in the sides, as set 
forth. 
3. A portable dark - room consisting of a 
solid bottom, sides and ends composed of Sec 
tions hinged to each other and to the bottom, 
a top hinged to the sides, and means for lock 
ing the ends to the sides and for admitting 
non-actinic light, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 13th day of August, 1889. 
GEO. BAUSCH. 
In presence of 
C. W. SMITH, 
LOUIS WILL, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428136.txt	(No Model.) 
F. B. R.A.E. 
- 
TROLLEY ARM SUPPORT FOR ELECTRIC RAILWAYS, 
No. 428,136, 
Patented May 20, 1890. 
77 S. 
Fiti. 
Z. 
6. 
x? 7s 
-->G) 
S2s, 27. 
Z3 
C 
C 
72 
M2 
- Z. 
71 
- 1 / 
a 1% 21 
%/2 2. 
1/ 1 / / 
/ // 27 21 
--- 
- 
- 
2%3a/4 
A 9 C747. 
c. / /64 
 2%. 4iorneya 
THE NORRIS PETEAs co. Photo-LTHo, washington, a, c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK B. RAE, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THE DETROIT ELEC 
TRICAL WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
TROLLEY-ARM SUPPORT FOR ELECTRIC RALWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,186, dated May 20, 1890. 
Application filed March 13, 1890, Serial No. 343,715, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK B. RAE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Detroit, 
Wayne county, State of Michigan, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Trolley - Arm Supports for Electric Rail 
Ways, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to trolley-arm sup 
ports for electric railways, and has for its ob 
ject to provide means whereby the trolley 
arm and its trolley may be supported against 
the conductor, generally arranged overhead 
of the track, and to allow the trolley and its 
arm to follow the irregularities of the con 
ductor or the motor-car without danger of 
derailment, 
To these ends my invention consists, gen 
erally, in a trolley-arm support constructed 
and arranged substantially as hereinafter 
pointed out, 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
forming part of this specification, Figure 1 is 
a side view of a portion of a car provided 
With my improved trolley-arm support, and 
Fig. 2 is an end view of the same. 
In electric railways as now generally con 
structed the electric conductor is suspended 
over the track, and the motor-car moving over 
the track is provided with some means of 
forming an electric connection between the 
car and the conductor. This is generally in 
the shape of a trolley-arm carrying a trolley 
bearing on the conductor, the arm being 
mounted upon the top or other portion of the 
motor-car. Owing to the irregularities of the 
Conductor With relation to the track and to 
the jostling and other movements of the car, 
considerable difficulty is experienced in main 
taining good electric contact between the trol 
ley and the conductor, and various means 
have been suggested for this purpose. It has 
been found requisite that the trolley should 
bear against the conductor, and preferably 
trail or follow the motion of the car, and it 
should be so supported that under all condi 
tions it will yield to the inequalities of the 
conductor and the motions of the car without 
Slipping or breaking contact with the con 
ductor. I attain these objects in the present 
instance by providing a trolley-arm support 
Which shall have freedom of motion both lon 
gitudinally in line with the conductor and 
the motion of the car and laterally or trans 
versely thereto, and in all of these motions 
shall be controlled by spring-pressure, which 55 
tends to maintain the trolley-arm Support in 
a vertical position. 
In carrying out my invention I mount upon 
the roof A of the car or other suitable portion 
thereof a base-piece B of the trolley-arm Sup- 6o 
port. This is shown supported by two arch 
or bridge pieces C C, secured to the car-roof. 
Extending from the base-piece are two stand 
ards D D, arranged fore and aft or in a line 
with the travel of the car. Supported on and 65 
pivoted in these standards is the main rock 
ing arm E of the support, which is preferably 
formed with two arms e, forming a Ujin which 
is attached the support proper F. This sup 
port is in the form of a socket to receive the 7c 
trolley-arm G, carrying the trolley H, bearing 
against the conductor I, and is pivotally 
mounted in the arms e of the main Support 
E. Connected to this socket-piece is a coun 
ter-weight F, preferably in the shape of a 75 
segmental plate, substantially as shown, 
which swings between the extensions ee of 
the main support. Extending laterally each 
side of the socket-piece are the Wings or 
flanges KK, having a broadened outer edge, 8o 
as clearly shown in Fig. 2. Adjustably con 
nected to these wings at each extremity are 
the springs LL, the other ends of the Springs 
being secured in some suitable manner to the 
car-roof. In the present instance I have 85 
shown the plate or bar M arranged on the 
roof of the car at each side of the bridge 
pieces C. In this Way I form a suitable sup 
port for the springs, to which they can be se 
cured, and at the same time readily detached, 9o 
if necessary, from the car without danger of 
mutilating or injuring the car-roof. The bars 
and the bridge-pieces, being extended laterally 
or transversely of the car, can better be secured 
to the frame-work of the roof. From this con- 95 
struction it will be seen that under all condi 
tions the tendency of the springs is to main 
tain the trolley-arm in a substantially Verti 
cal position; but at the same time it is free 
to assume an inclined position in the direca Ioa 
tion of the travel of the car and be held there 
under tension of the springs, and to allow for 
O 
25 
35 
So 
428,136 
35 
45 
55 
3. In a trolley-arm support, a base-piece 
provided with fore and aft standards, the main 
support pivotally mounted therein provided 
with extending arms, a socket-piece mounted 
in said extended arms, and having a counter 
weight swinging between said arms, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In a trolley-arm support, a base-piece, a 
main support pivotally mounted therein, a 
Socket-piece pivotally mounted in said Sup 
port, the said socket-piece being provided 
with wings extending from its sides, and four 
springs connecting the ends of the wings with 
the car-roof, substantially as described. 
5. In a trolley-support for electric-motor 
cars, the combination, with the car, of the 
base-piece carrying the Support, and bridge 
pieces interposed between the base-piece and 
the car-roof, substantially as described. 
6. In a trolley-arm support for motor-cars, 
the base-piece for the support, bridge-pieces 
interposed between the base-piece and the 
car-roof, transverse bars secured to the car 
roof, and springs connected to said bars and 
to the trolley-arm support, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
FIRANK B. RAE. 
Witnesses: 
IIENRY F. DE B. CAMERON, 
D. W. BRADIORD. 
O 
the lateral movement of the car or inequali 
ties of the conductor it can swing on the main 
Support transversely of the car, the springs 
acting also to overcome this movement as 
Well, while they tend to restore the support 
to its normal position. By properly adjust 
ing the tension of the springs the trolley-arm 
Support, while given the freedom of motion in 
all directions, will be maintained in such a 
position as to keep up the contact between the 
trolley and conductor under all conditions. 
While I have thus described what I con 
sider the best embodiment of my invention, 
it will be understood that the precise con 
struction and details of arrangement may be 
varied by those skilled in the art without de 
parting from the general principles thereof, 
and I do not therefore limit myself to the 
construction and arrangement shown. 
What I claim is 
1. In a trolley-arm support, a base-piece, a 
main Supporting-piece mounted in the base 
piece and capable of lateral movement, and a 
Socket-piece pivotally mounted in the main 
Support and capable of longitudinal move 
lment, substantially as (lescribed. 
2. In a trolley-alm, a base-piece, a laterally 
movable supporting-piece pivotally mounted 
therein having extendling arms, a socket-piece 
pivotally mounted in said extendled arms, 
wings connected to the socket-piece, and 
Springs connected to the wings and to the car 
roof, substantially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428236.txt	(No Model.) A. SUNDEEN & S. B. MOLANDER. 
No. 428,236. 
SELF HEATING SOLDERING IRON, 
Patented May 20, 1890. 
3. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
2. 
Wilbesses 
2x SS 
S3 
 
22 XXXXXXx 
  
2 
* 
At 
pilepiary 
pe 
M 
sists 
y eratoreys, escozerz,ZR162a2zeeze 
the horris PETERs co. Photo-Litto., WASHINgor, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED SUNDEEN AND SWAN B. MOLANDER, OF MORA, MINNESOTA. 
SELF-HEATING SOLDERING-IRON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,236, dated May 20, 1890. 
Application filed October 4, 1889, Serial No. 326,009. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whone it may conce7n 
Beit known that we, ALFRED SUNDEEN and 
SWAN B. MOLANDER, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Mora, in the county of 
Kanabec and State of Minnesota, have in 
vented a new and useful Self-Heating Solder 
ing-Iron, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to self-heating sol 
dering-irons, and is an improvement on the de 
vice for which Letters Patent of the United 
States, No. 400,509, were granted to us on the 
2d day of April, 1889. 
Our present invention consists in an im 
proved construction and arrangement of 
parts, to be hereinafter more fully described, 
Whereby the soldiering-point is made adjust 
able with relation to the handle. 
It further consists in the improved ar 
rangement of a tubular wick and a stopper 
to check and regulate the flow of the burning 
fluid. 
It further, and finally, consists in the im 
proved construction and arrangement of de 
tails, which will be hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a soldering-iron em 
bodying our improvements. Fig. 2 is a side 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal 
Sectional view of the same. Fig. 4 is a lon 
gitudinal sectional view, on a larger scale, of 
the lower end of the handle and the solder 
ing-point. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
1 designates a tubular handle, constructed 
of metal or other suitable material and pro 
Vided with a wrapping 2, of any suitable non 
conducting material, to enable it to be grasped 
without danger of burning the hand. The 
upper end of the handle 1 has a screw-cap or 
cover 3. In the lower end of the handle 1 is 
secured the valve-casing 4, having a narrow 
passage 5, adapted to be closed by a needle 
valve 6, extending through a packing-box 7, 
formed upon the side of the handle. 
8 designates a tubular wick extending 
through the entirelength of the handle and 
provided near its lower end, just above the 
Valve-casing, with a plug or stopper 9, for the 
purpose of checking and regulating the flow 
of burning-fluid to the valve-casing 4. Near 
the lower end of the handle, below the Valve 
casing, are formed a series of openings 10, 
for the admission of air. 
11 designates the body of the soldering 
point, which is secured pivotally to the lower 
end of the handle by means of transverse 
pins or screws 12. The body of the solder 
ing-point is provided at its upper end with a 
hinged cover 13, which is held normally in a 
closed position by the action of a suitably-ar 
ranged spring 14. 
The body 11 is provided with a segmental 
bracket 15, having a series of notches 16, any 
one of which may be engaged by a rod 17, 
sliding in eyes or bearings 18 on one side of . 
the handle 1, and which is forced automati 
cally in a downward direction to engage the 
said notches by the action of a spring 19, 
which is coiled upon the rod 17 between one 
of its bearings 18 and the transverse pin 20. 
It will be seen that, owing to this construction, 
the body of the soldering-point may be readily 
adjusted to and held in any desired position 
with relation to the handle 1. 
It will also be 
seen that the cover 13 at the upper end of the 
body of the soldering-point will be closed at 
any position which may be assumed by the 
latter, unless intentionally opened by the op 
erator by force exerted against the tension of 
a Spring 14. 
Secured to the lower end of the hollow body 
11 of the device is the point 21, which may 
be of any desired shape, and which, being 
secured detachably by means of ScreWS 22, 
may be readily removed for the substitution 
of a differently-shaped point. The point 21 
is provided with perforations 23, and the body 
11 is likewise provided near its lower end 
with openings 24. 
25 designates a spirit-lamp, which may be 
secured detachably to the handle 1 in such a 
position as to heat that portion of the said 
handie which contains the valve-casing, for 
the purpose of converting a portion of the 
fluid into vapor. 
In operation the body of the tubular handle 
1 is filled with burning-fluid, such as gasoline 
or some equally volatile hydrocarbon. When 
the spirit-lamp 25 is ignited, the heat derived 
therefrom will very soon convert a portion of 
95 
Od 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
SO 
55 
wick, and a stopper arranged in the latter, of 
a soldering-point mounted pivotally at the 
lower end of the handle, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. The combination of a tubular handle 
having the valve-casing and needle-valve, the 
pivoted soldering-point, and the working 
point, mounted detachably at one end of the 
latter by means of screws 22, and having per 
forations 23, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the tubular han 
dle having the valve-casing and needle-valve, 
of the pivoted soldering-point having the de 
tachable working-point and a hinged cover, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of the tubular handle 
having the valve-casing, the needle-valve, the 
tubular wick, the stopper at the lower end of 
the latter, and the air-inlet openings, the piv 
oted soldering-point having the hinged spring 
pressed cover, and the working-point secured 
detachably at the lower end of the body of 
the soldering-point, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a self-heating soldering-iron, the com 
bination of the tubular handle having the 
valve-casing and the needle-valve, the tubul 
lar wick having the stopper at its lower end, 
the air-inlet openings at the lower end of the 
valve-casing, the pivoted soldering-point hav 
ing the hinged spring-pressed cover and the 
segmental rack, the Working-point secured 
detachably at the lower end of the body of 
the soldering-point and having openings or 
perforations formed therein, and the sliding 
spring-pressed rod attached to the tubular 
handle and engaging the segmental rack of 
the soldering-point, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ALFRED SUNDEEN. 
SWAN B. MOLANDER. 
Witnesses: 
S. D. SEAVEY, 
J. C. POPE. 
75 
85 
2 
428,236 
O 
15 
25 
the fluid contained in the wick between the 
stopper 9 and the valve-casing 4 into vapor, 
which by opening the valve 6 will be allowed 
to escape through the passage 5 into the mix 
ing-chamber, which is composed of the lower 
portion of the valve-casing 4, and where it 
will be mixed with atmospheric air entering 
through the openings 10. At this point the 
gas may be ignited, and the flame, passing 
into the body of the soldering-point, will rap 
idly heat the latter to the required degree. 
The openings 23 and 24 serve to admit air to 
the flame, and also to form an outlet for the 
latter. After the fire has once been started, 
the spirit-lamp 25 may be removed, inasmuch 
as the heat generated by the apparatus will 
be sufficient to convert the burning-fluid into 
vapor as it reaches the valve chamber or cas 
ing. It will be seen that while the stopper 9 
intercepts the body of the burning-fluid and 
prevents it from flowing direct to the valve 
casing the wick will be continually kept 
moist and furnish a sufficient supply of the 
burning-fluid to maintain combustion. 
If the soldering-point should at any time 
become overheated, the cover 13 may be 
opened, and the flame will then be allowed to 
escape through the upper end of the body 11, 
instead of being deflected toward the working 
end of the point. 
The device may, by removing the pivoted 
soldering-point 11, be used as a blow-lamp, 
such as is frequently used by plumbers and 
others for the purpose of melting solder in 
places which are not readily accessible to the 
point of the soldering-iron. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. The combination of the tubular handle, 
the valve-casing at the lower end of the same, 
the needle-valve, the tubular wick, and the 
stopper arranged in the latter, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a self-heating soldering-iron, the com 
bination, with the tubular handle having the 
valve-casing, the needle-valve, the tubular 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428336.txt	(No Model.) 
C, L HAIGHT. 
HEATER, 
2 Sheets--Sheet 1. 
No. 428,336, 
Patented May 20, 1890, 
I 
& 
WITNESSES 
(21: 4-(4----. 
64%-/ 
 
1. 
i N 
t E 
NHEN 'N 
Yn N 
/WWEWTOR: 
(6.23% 
Muvvu e 
ATTORNEYS 
(No Model.) 
No. 428,336, 
C. L. HAIGHT. 
HEATER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 20, 1890, 
2 2FP 
WITNESSES: 
G/6%/6 
BY 
1NVENTOR 
te 
- Muw 
ATTORNEYS 
 
soaris Peters co., Photo-ITHo, wastiNGTON, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES LENARD HAIGHT, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,336, dated May 20, 1890. 
Application filed December 28, 1889, Serial No. 335,222, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES LENARD 
HAIGHT, of Pittsburg, in the county of Alle 
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Heaters, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
heaters especially adapted for use in connec 
tion with natural-gas burners, and has for its 
object to concentrate the ignited gas at the 
burner, and conduct the heat generated there 
by, together with the waste products of com 
bustion, downward through a heater to a point 
at or near the floor-line, and from thence up 
Ward through and out from the heater to the 
flue in which the burner is located. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a device of simple and durable construc 
tion capable of being applied to and used in 
connection with any form of burner. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several parts, 
as will be hereinafter fully set forth, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters and figures of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
WeWS. 
Figure I is a side elevation of the device. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section through the 
hood adapted to be placed over the burner, 
and Fig. 3 is a transverse section through the 
Same. Fig. 4 is a central vertical section 
through the drum, and Fig. 5 is a transverse 
Section through the upper portion of the drum 
on line acac of Fig. 4. 
Within the fire-place of a chimney or flue 
10 a burner 11 is located, of any approved 
pattern, especially a burner adapted for use 
with natural gas. Over the burner a hood 12 
is Supported in any suitable or approved man 
ner, which hood is preferably made of greater 
length than width, and provided with down 
Wardly and outwardly inclined sides and ends 
13 and 14 and a flat top 15, as shown in Figs. 
2 and 3. This hood, which acts as a concen 
trating-cap, is preferably provided with an 
inner cap or hood 16, of similar construction 
to the outer hood, open at the bottom, and 
provided with a longitudinal slot 17, prefer 
ably located at the center of its upper surface. 
This inner hood is of sufficient size to neatly 
fit into the outer hood, and the height of the 55 
innerhood is such that quite a spacious cham 
ber 18 is obtained between the opposed Sur 
faces of the two hoods. In the ordinary con 
struction of this duplex hood the inner hood 
is bolted or otherwise secured to the outer 
hood at or near the base of the latter. In the 
upper, preferably central, portion of the outer 
hood 12 a threaded aperture is produced, in 
which one end of a pipe 19 is screwed or oth 
erwise secured, which pipe is led from above 
the hoods to a connection with the central 
stand-pipe of a drum A. 
The drum is preferably constructed in the 
following manner: Two tubular heads 20 are 
formed of any suitable or desired contour, 
one being adapted to constitute the top and 
the other the bottom of the drum. In the 
opposed faces of the heads 20, at the center 
of the same, an interiorly-threaded aperture 
21 is formed, and near the periphery, upon 
said opposed faces of the heads, a Series of 
circular openings 22 is produced, the walls of . 
which openings upon the outer faces of the 
heads are chamfered or rabbeted to receive 
the ends of tubes 23. The heads 20 are pref 
erably made in two pieces-namely, a dish 
like section a, in which the openings 22 and 
the threaded aperture are produced, and a 
second section a', the latter consisting of a 
plate adapted to rest upon a flange or flanges 
formed upon the inner face of the dish-sec 
tion, as best shown in Fig. 4-and the two 
sections are united in any suitable or ap 
proved manner, ordinarily through the me 
dium of bolts 24. 
The central tube or stand-pipe 25 of the 
drum is constructed in the following manner: 
Into each central threaded aperture of each 
head 20 a section of pipe b is screwed, the 
upper section being preferably the smaller, 
and upon the lower end of the upper section 
and the upper end of the lower section of the 
pipes b T-fittingsb' and b are secured. Into 
the opposed ends of the T-fittings b' and b a 
nut bis screwed, which nut consists of a cen 
tral polygonal section and threaded ends, one 
end of the nut being provided with a right 
85 
75 
9o 
OC 
O 
3o 
45 
So 
2 
- 
428,836 
45 
5.o 
55 
7 o 
O 
hand thread and the other with a left-hand 
thread. Thus, when the parts of the drum 
have been put together, as above described, 
and the nut b is screwed to place, the sec 
tions b of the stand-pipe 25 and their T-fit 
tings are drawn together, whereby the heads 
20 are made to approach one another and 
thereby clamp the outer tubes 23 in their 
seats in the heads. Into the lower T-fitting 
b' the outer end of the pipe 19, leading from 
the hoods, is entered, and into the upper fit 
ting a second heat - conducting pipe 26 is 
screwed, the other end of which pipe is car 
ried into the flue and upturned, as best shown 
in Fig. 1. 
In operation the ignited gas passing from 
the burner, being very light, ascends rapidly 
into the hoods 12 and 16, whereby it is ren 
dered more or less concentrated and compact, 
and from thence the heat and waste products 
of combustion pass through the Supply-pipe 
19 into the lower section of the stand-pipe 25 
of the drum. From the lower section of the 
stand-pipe the gas and waste products of 
combuston enter the lower head 20, and from 
thence pass through the various tubes 23 to 
the upper head of the drum and down into 
the upper section of the central stand-pipe 
25, and out from said upper section into the 
pipe 26 to an exit through the flue 10. 
It will be observed from the foregoing de 
scription that the heat of the gas is utilized 
to a maximum extent, and in a simple man 
ner applicable to any burner used in connec 
tion with natural gas. 
I do not confine myself to any particular 
form of the heater, as its shape may be greatly 
varied. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with a burner and a 
heater, of a duplex hood, the inner hood hav 
ing an opening in its upper portion, the said 
duplex hood being adapted for Suspension 
above the burner, and a connection between 
the outer of the two hoods and the said heat 
substantially as and for the purpose speci 
0.C. 
2. The combination, with a burner and the 
stand-pipe of a heater, said stand-pipe con 
structed with two chambers connected with 
each other by a series of chambers and pipes, 
of a hood suspended over the burner having 
an open bottom and downwardly and out 
wardly flaring sides and ends, a tubular con 
nection between the hood and one chamber 
of the heater, and an exit-tube connected 
with the other chamber of the heater, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
3. A heater consisting of two heads, pipes 
connecting said heads, and a central stand 
pipe divided into two disconnected sections, 
substantially as shown and described, and 
for the purpose specified. 
4. A heater consisting of two heads, a se 
ries of tubes loosely entered into said heads, 
a central stand-pipe divided into two sections, 
one section being screwed into each head, 
and a solid nut provided with a right and 
left hand thread uniting the two sections of 
the stand-pipe, substantially as shown and 
described. 
CHARLES LENARD HAIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
E. J. MCKENNA, 
JOHN MCINTYRE. 
30 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428436.txt	(No Model.) 
H. F. WEST & G. P. WOOD. 
w 
TOON, 
No. 428,436. 
Patented May 20, 1890, 
 
SS S 
(2%assee. 
6ez-e 6 sea-4: 
Z7zavezza?: 
Zezzy z zes% 
6eorge Z. 262C2a22 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY F. WEST, OF GLOUCESTER, CITY, NEW JERSEY, AND GEORGE P. 
WOOD, OF OLNEYVILLE, RHODE ISLAND. 
LOOM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,486, dated IVIay 20, 1890. 
Application filed Januaryll 1890, Serial No. 336,637, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Gloucester City, county of Camden, State of 
New Jersey, and GEORGEP. WooD, of Olney 
ville, county of Providence, State of Rhode 
Island, have invented an Improvement in 
Looms, of which the following description, in 
Connection with the accompanying drawings, 
is a specification, like letters and figures on 
the drawings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a loom with devices by which the weft may 
be beat diagonally into the warp at the fell. 
One especial use to which the invention to 
be herein described may be put is that of 
Weaving pockets or bag-like webs having 
diagonal ends for the bottoms of the pockets. 
This diagonal placing of the weft in the warp 
obviates straining or pulling the fabric more 
at or near one Selvage than at or near the 
Other Selvage, as has been attempted in order 
to provide a diagonal bottom for a pocket; 
but such straining of the pocket fabric is very 
detrimental to the selvage and warp and is 
not in our judgment practicable. 
In accordance with our invention we mount 
a reed-frame containing any usual dents upon 
the lay in such manner that it may be oscil 
lated about vertical pivots, the reed-frame 
standing parallel to the inner walls of the 
usual shuttle-boxes while the shuttle con 
taining the weft is being passed through the 
Warp, but as the lay is moved forward the 
reed is Oscillated about its vertical pivots, so 
that the reed-frame stands diagonally to the 
Warp, and, Occupying such position, the dents 
Of the reed act on the weft and leave the lat 
ter in a position diagonal with relation to the 
Warp. The extent of oscillation to be given 
to the reed during the completion of its for 
Ward stroke may be varied, according to the 
angle at which it is desired to lay the weft. 
In this present embodiment of our inven 
tion the reed or its frame is represented as 
pivoted between its ends or nearer one than 
its other end, and it is adapted to be turned 
about Vertical pivots, and to turn the reed we 
have shown in the accompanying drawings 
an Oscillating device, which is represented as 
a lever carried by the lay and acted upon at 
one end by a push-bar, also carried by the lay, 
Be it known that we, HENRY F. WEST, of the said push-bar deriving its motion by 
striking the breast-beam or some other part 
of the loom. 
This invention is not intended to be limited 
to the exact form of oscillating device shown. 
Figure 1 is a partial front elevation of a 
sufficient portion of a loom to enable Our in 
vention to be understood, the breast-beam 
being broken out and both ends of the lay 
being broken off. Fig. 2 is a section in the 
line act of Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 is a top view with 
the hand-rail broken out, the dotted lines 
showing the reed in its diagonal position. 
The loom-frame A, the breast-beam B, and 
the lay C are and may be of usual construc 
tion common to looms for weaving pocketS or 
bags. The dents of the reed, of any usual 
kind are held in the usual manner in a reed 
frame Ct. 
The reed-frame, as herein shown, has at its 
lower side a forwardly-extended horizontal 
shelf a, which lies in such position as to Con 
stitute practically a part of the race of the 
lay, the shuttle passing over it. 
The reed-frame is provided at its upper and 
lower side with suitable vertical pivotS 23, 
which enter suitable bearings or sockets, 
herein shown as forming part of plates b b, 
attached, respectively, to the lay and the hand 
rail, the said pivots being in the same Ver 
tical line and forming points or pivots about 
which the reed oscillates. 
One end of the reed-frame is acted upon by 
a spring c, connected to the lay, the said spring 
normally acting to keep the reed-frame With 
the front side of its dents parallel to the in 
ne) side walls of the usual shuttle-boxes at 
the ends of the lay (but partially shown) 
and at right angles to the length of the Warp. 
The long end of the reed-frame is herein 
shown as acted upon by a reed-oscillating 
device d, herein represented as a lever piV 
oted at d on a stand or ear carried by Or at 
tached to the rear side of the lay. The op 
posite end of the said lever d is herein shown 
as adapted to be acted upon by a push-bar e, 
occupying a substantially horizontal position 
and extended through a suitable guide hole 
or opening in the lay, the outer end of the said I oo 
75 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
428,436 
45 
mounted to turn about vertical pivots, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The lay and reed-frame having vertical 
pivots, combined with an oscillating device, 
whereby the reed-frame may be oscillated and 
made to stand during a part of its forward 
movement diagonal to the warp, substantially 
as described. 
3. The lay, combined with the reed-frame 
having vertical pivots and provided with a 
horizontally-extended shelf, substantially as 
described. 
4. The lay, the reed-frame having vertical 
pivots and a spring to keep the reed-frame 
normally parallel to the inner side walls of 
the shuttle-box, combined with a lever to OS 
cillate the reed-frame, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. The lay and the reed-frame having ver 
tical pivots and a lever acting on one end of 
the reed-frame, combined with a push-bar, to 
operate substantially as described. 
6. The lay and the reed-frame having ver 
tical pivots and a lever acting on one end of 
the reed-frame, combined With a push-bar 
and with an adjusting device to regulate the 
extent of oscillation of the reed-frame, sub- . 
stantially as described. 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 65 
55 
HENRY F. WEST. 
GEORGE P. WOOD. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES E. BRADFORD, 
JAMES B. CARNES. 
push-bar being extended beyond the front of 
the lay for a greater or less distance, so that 
the said bar will strike the breast-beam as the 
lay is moved forward by usual means to beat 
the weft into the cloth. When the shuttle is 
being passed through the Warp, the reedoc 
cupies the full-line position shown in Fig. 3; 
but as soon as the push-bar meets the breast 
beam or some stop, as a screw 12, (see Fig. 3,) 
the said push-bar is stopped, and on the fur 
ther movement of the lay forward the push 
bar, acting on the lever d, turns the said lever 
So that it, acting upon the reed, oscillates the 
same to place the reed diagonally with rela 
tion to the lay and warp, as represented by 
dotted lines Fig. 3, the reed in such position. 
leaving the weft placed diagonally between 
the warp. 
To vary the diagonal position of the weft 
we may either provide the push-bar with an 
adjusting device, as a sleeve 10, screwed upon 
one end of the bar, or we may provide the 
inner side of the breast-beam with a screw 
12, which may be adjusted longitudinally 
With relation to the breast-beam, so that the 
push-bar Will Strike the same sooner or later 
during the forward movement of the lay. 
We have shown the reed-frame as pivoted 
between its ends; but we do not intend to 
limit our invention to the exact location of 
the pivots of the reed-frame, the gist of the 
invention being that the said pivots consti 
tute vertical pivots, and they may be more or 
less near one end of the reed, as desired. 
We claim 
1. The lay, combined with a reed-frane 
3O 
35. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428536.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 428,536, 
W. SMITH, 
GATE. 
Patented May 20, 1890. 
--le. 
74. T 
2. 
99. 
WZZ 72 esses: 
32 
25 a 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WESLEY SMITH, OF PIERCE, OHIO. 
GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,536, dated May 20, 1890. 
Application filed March 3, 1890, Serial No, 342,386, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WESLEY SMITH, of 
Pierce, in the county of Stark and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Gates; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use it, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
gates; and it consists in the combination of 
the gate, having shouldered blocks secured to 
opposite sides near its outer and upper cor 
ner, with pivoted braces, which, by catching 
under the shouldered blocks, hold the outer 
end of the gate raised at any suitable angle, 
and blocks secured to the gate below the ends 
of the braces, which serve to prevent the outer 
end of the gate from being raised, as will be 
more fully described hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to have the 
same braces hold the gate in a raised posi 
tion at its Outer end, or lock the outer end 
So that it cannot be raised. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a gate em 
bodying my invention, and showing the outer 
free end of the gate raised. Fig. 2 is a simi 
lar view showing the outer end of the gate 
locked so that it cannot be raised. 
A represents an ordinary gate, the parts of 
which are pivoted together in the usual man 
ner, So that its outer end can be raised and 
lowered to any desired degree. Secured to 
opposite sides of this gate, near its outer up 
per corner, are the shouldered blocks B, 
against which the upper end of the pivoted 
braces C catch for the purpose of holding the 
outer end of the gate in a slightly-raised po 
sition, either to allow small animals to pass 
back and forth under the gate or to take up 
the Sag that may take place. 
There may be 
any desired number of shoulders upon the 
blocks which are rigidly secured in position 
upon the gate, and hence the outer end of 
the gate can be raised to any desired degree 
either for the purpose of swinging over snow 
IO 
35 
45 
drifts or for the purpose of allowing the 
smaller animals to pass under from One field 
to another, while large animals are prevented 
from passing through. The braces C are se 
cured rigidly together and are pivoted to op 
posite sides of the gate, and can be made to 
incline either toward the outer upper corner 
of the gate or toward the inner corner, as 
may be desired. 
Secured to opposite sides of the gate are 
the two blocks D, which are placed at or 
about a right angle to the blocks B, and 
which serve as supports or bearings for the 
lower ends of the braces when their upper 
ends are turned backward into the position 
shown in Fig. 2. When the braces are turned 
into the position shown in Fig. 2, the outer 
end of the gate is locked, so that it cannot 
be raised, for the blocks D then strike against 
the braces and prevent all upward movement. 
These blocks D and braces C prevent animals 
from raising the gate, so as to unlatch it, as 
when the ordinary latch is used. The braces 
C have their lower ends slightly cut away at 
one corner, as shown, so that they can be 
turned upon their pivot to disengage the 
blocks D, so as to allow the gate to be raised 
into the position shown in Fig. 1. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
The combination, with the gate, of the 
shouldered block secured thereto near its up 
per outer corner and extending at an angle 
thereto, and a block secured to the gate near 
its outer lower corner and extending at a 
different angle from the shouldered blocks, 
and a brace pivoted between the blocks, 
whereby the upper and lower ends thereof 
can be made to alternately engage the upper 
and lower blocks, respectively, substantially 
as shown. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
claim- 
- 
WESLEY SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
S. S. STANDS, 
WM. BARFUSS. 
55 
7 O 
75 
85 
9o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428636.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 428,636. 
F, SANDERSON. 
D00R BELL. 
Patented May 27, 1890, 
 
? 
?ve 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK SANDERSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
DOOR BEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,636, dated May 27, 1890. 
Application filed January 31, 1890, Serial No. 338,775, (No model.) 
55 
7 ? 
75 
... 
" 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICKSANDERSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Door-Bells, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of door-bells which are attached 
directly to a door, and are operated by means 
of a push-button from the opposite side of 
the door from which the bell is situated. 
My objects are to produce a door-bell which 
is cheaper and more durable than any here 
tofore placed on the market, by a construc 
tion which entirely obviates the use of the 
Ordinary frail springs for operating the ham 
mer, and substitute therefor a vertically 
moving hammer which in part is operated 
by gravity, and in also providing means by 
which the hammer is movably attached to 
the vibrating lever which operates it, in com 
bination with a vertically-situated guideway 
for the hammer, which guideway is so placed 
Within the gong that it permits the hammer 
to strike two direct blows on the gong at a 
right angle to the surface struck for every 
in Ward push upon the push-button; also to 
provide an adjustable connection between 
the push-button and the striking mechanism, 
by which the gong can be quickly adjusted 
to various thicknesses of doors found in prac 
tice, and to provide means by which the 
push-button is always stopped in a normal 
position without the usual shoulder on the 
Another object is the introduction of a 
means for cheaply, quickly, and efficiently 
attaching the bell to a door by inverting the 
position of the gong in reference to the door 
as usually applied, and providing a projec 
tion at the back of the gong, at its center, for 
the purpose of an attachment. 
Another object is the application of a cover 
to the open side of the gong to cover the op 
erative parts, and also to act as an attach 
ment for the hammer-guideway, as will be 
hereinafter explained. 
A further object is a simplification of all 
the parts and an adaptation to modern pro 
cesses of manufacture, so that as an article 
button. 
of trade it can be placed on sale at a price 
within the reach of people of very limited 
ea, S. 
I attain these objects by the construction 
shown in the accompanying drawings, in 
which-- 
Figure 1 is a vertical center section of the 
gong on line P Q, Fig. 3, showing gong, door, 
and the hammer and hammer-guide in posi 
tion, together with the other operative parts 
in perspective. Fig. 2 is a transverse center 
sectional view, on line R, S, of the gong, Fig. 
3, showing door, gong, hammer, hammer 
guide, and cover-plate for gong, together with 
the other operative parts in perspective. Fig. 
3 shows, respectively, from left to right, in 
side, side, top, and outside rear views of the 
gong. Fig. 4 shows, respectively, from left to 
right, inside, side, top, and outside views of 
the bell-cover and hammer-guide. Fig. 5 
shows detached views of the operative parts, 
with central longitudinal section of push 
button. Fig. 6 shows views of the construc 
tion of the hammer. Fig. 7 is an isometric 
perspective view showing posts to which the 
gong-cover is attached, the gong being broken 
alWay. 
As usually constructed and attached to a 
door, A is a section of the door, which has a 
round hole B bored through it from side to 
side. 
C is the gong, which in this instance has a 
cylindrically-shaped screw-threaded projec 
tion D at its rear side at the center. This 
projection is slotted at E clear through, as 
shown in the third view, Fig. 3, and the slot 
E is continued through to the inside of gong 
C, forming a mortise in the center of the 
gong, (shown by letter E, Figs. 1, 2, and 3.) 
There are two posts a ca'. (Shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
and 7.) These posts stand out from the inside 
central part of the gong C-one on each side 
of the mortise E'-and the outer ends of these 
posts are even with the outside rim of the 
gong C, Fig. 2. The outside ends of the posts 
a, a? have screw-threaded holes b b', Figs. 2 
and 7. 
F is the cover-plate of the open side of gong 
C, and this cover-plate has a tubular projec 
tion G attached on the inside surface, and 
the position of the tube is central and longi 
- 
95 
I OO 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
428,636 
75 
O 
tudinal direction vertical, as shown in Figs. 
1, 2, and 4. Throughout the whole length of 
the tube is a slot c, and in the cover F is an 
other slot c', longer than the tube G., (first 
and fourth view, Fig. 4.) which slot c' also cuts 
into the tulpe G throughout, its lengtln, hout 
opposite to slot c. 
At d d are two raised places on the inside 
of cover-plate F, through which are two holes 
e e' for screws if f'. The outside diameter of 
the tube G is the same as the distance be 
tween the posts ( (t'. The cover-plate F is 
firmly seculed to the posts a ct' by means of 
screws fif', which pass through the holese e' 
of the cover-plate and into the holes l l in 
the ends of the posts (t (t'. 
The sides of the tube G. fit closely between 
the ends of the posts (ta', Fig. 2, so that when 
the cover-plate is in position, Fig. 2, and 
firmly screwed down it cannot have any 
movement in any direction to throw the slots 
c c' out of line with the operative mechanism, 
which will now be described. 
The elbow-lever II, Figs. 1, 2, and 5, is piv 
oted on a pin (f, Fig. 2, in the slot E of rear 
projection D of the gong C. 
The short aurim i of elbow-lever II is slotted 
at its lower end, and in this slot is pivoted on 
a pin one end of a pitman I. The other end 
of pitman I is threaded along for some dis 
tance from the end, and this threaded endl 
engages the threaded hole in, Fig. 5, in the 
center of the push-button J. The push-but 
ton J slides in a hole in the center of the 
escutcheon Kand protrudes on the opposite 
side of tille door from the gong C. 
The long arm L of the elbow-lever II is made 
of Small diameter, so as to fit loosely in the 
slots c c' of the hammer-guideway G, through 
Which it passes and in which it operates, and 
it is also made of small diameter, so as to have 
a slight degree of elasticity, as will be here 
in after explained. The length of the spring 
arm L is such that it extends out through the 
slot c' of the cover-plate F, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2. 
The body of the hammer N (shown in de 
tail in Fig. 6) is cylindrical, and the ends 
terminate in a hemispherical shape. At the 
center of length and diameter is a slot 0, which 
is cut entirely through the hammer from side 
to side; but the slot is longer on one side than 
the other, as shown. This slot O in the ham 
mer permits the arm L of elbow-lever II to 
pass entirely through the hammer, and con 
tacts only at the points of the slot o, there 
being clearance both at the sides and ends of 
the slot. The arm L operates the hammer, 
and since this arm L has a motion on the seg 
lment of a circle with the pivotal bolt of the 
elbow-level II as the center, this method of 
connecting the hammer to its driving-lever L 
permits the hammer to move in a straight 
line with very little friction, the lever L slid 
ing through the slot O in and out to suit its 
iarying length l'elative to the hammer when 
making an upward or downward stroke. 
The diameter of the hammer N is slightly 
smaller than the diameter of the tube G. of 
the cover-plate F, into which tube the ham 
mer is made to slide vertically by the action 
of arm L, the hammer striking the bell both 
at the top and bottom of its stroke, as will 
be explained. There are shoulder's S and s', 
that form the upper and lower terminus of 
the mortise E, Fig. I and first view Fig. 3, 
and these shoulders act a double purpose: 
first, they are stops to limit the inward and 
outward motion of the push-buttoll J by lim 
iting the vibratory motion of the arm I, and 
these shoulders SS', by limiting the stroke of 
the arm L, act as fulcrums upon which the 
spring-arm I, bears when it acts as a retract 
ing-spring to withdraw the hammer N from 
contact with the gong Cafter the hammer has 
delivered a blow on the gong C at either the 
upper or lower stroke, as will be more fully 
explained. 
The gong C, instead of having its open side 
next to the door, as is the case with ordinary 
door-bells, is inverted, its convex side being 
next, the door, as is shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
In the drawings is shown a cylindrical pro 
jection D, which is threaded, to be screwed 
into a hole B, bored through the door; but 
other forms of attachment embodying this 
same principle can be employed without 
changing the principle of this new form of 
attaching the gong of a door-bell to the door. 
Confining this description, however, to this 
particular device for attaching the gong to the 
door, it is obvious that by screwing this pro 
jection Dinto the hole B of the door a thread 
will be cut in the wood, and when the projec 
tion is screwed in until the shoulder next the 
bell is in contact with the door a perfectly 
secure attachment will be easily and quickly 
made without in the least destroying the res 
onance of the gong C, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. 
On the outside of the door is an escutcheon 
IX to cover the hole Band to support and 
guide the push-button J. Before the projec 
tion ID is screwed into the hole B the pitman 
I and push-button Jare attached to the elbow 
lever II, and after the attachment of the gong 
to the door is made the push-button J will 
project on the opposite side of the door. The 
button J is placed in the hole in the center of 
the escutcheon, and the escutcheon is pressed 
up to the face of the door, and should the 
outer end of button J fail to stand even with 
the outer face of the escutcheon the button 
can be easily screwed inward or outward, as 
required, on the screw-threaded end of pit 
man I, until the required position is attained 
to suit the thickness of the door. Doors vary 
considerably in thickness, so that this means 
of adjustment Saves much time on the part of 
the bell-hanger, which of course reduces the 
cost of introducing door-bells of this construc 
tion. 
To operate this door-bell, the button J is 
pushed in, which causes its connected pitman 
95 
I do 
IO 
II 5 
I 25 
25 
45 
55 
05 
 
428,636 
1 ? 
15 
s 
spring-arm I, by pressure on button J through 
I to partially rotate the elbow-lever H, the 
long arm L. partaking of this motion, and its 
pitman I, for the purpose described. 
2. In a door-bell, the vertical mortise Eright 
Outer end passing through and being engaged 
With hammer N causes the hammer to be through the central part of the gong C and 
longitudinally through threaded projection 
lifted vertically until the arm L strikes the 
D, forming a slot E in threaded projection D, 
upper shoulders, Figs. 1 and 7, at the top end 
elbow-lever H, pivoted and operating in Said 
of slot E, when the momentum of the hammer 
slot Einprojection D, and spring-armL of Said 
bends the arm L and the hammer strikes the 
elbow-lever H, operating vertically and lon 
, gong a direct blow, as shown by the dotted 
gitudinally in said slot E, in combination with 
lines in Fig. 1. It is obvious that if the arm 
hammer N, operating in guideway G, pitman 
L is bent over the shoulder s at the instant 
I, and adjustable press-button J, for the pur 
the hammer contacts with the gong the elas 
pose described. 
ticity of arm L will retract the hammer as 
3. In a door-bell, the posts at a', attached at 
Soon as it has struck, and thus not interfere 
their base to the central inside portion of the 
With the resonance of the gong. If the push 
gong C, and cover F, attached to the tops of 
button is instantly released after being pushed 
said posts a d", said posts a, a? to straddle and 
in, the gravity of the hammer will cause it to 
fit closely the outside of guideway G, in the 
descend down the tube G, carrying arm L with 
manner and for the purpose described. 
it, until it strikes the gong at the bottom. In 
4. In a door-bell, a vertical hammer-guide 
the downward stroke of the hammer the arm 
way G, secured to cover-plate F, said guide 
L contacts with the lower shoulders' of the 
way G provided with longitudinal slots C and 
mortise E, and the momentum of the hammer 
c', hammer N, provided with slot O, spring 
bends the arm Lover the shoulders' as a full 
arm L of elbow-lever H, operating in said slot 
Crum until the hammer strikes the gong C, 
O and longitudinally in said slots c and c' of 
When the hammer by the elasticity of arm L 
said guideway G, and elbow-lever H, pivoted 
is instantly withdrawn and held away from 
and operating in slot E of rear projection D, 
the gong C in the position shown in Fig. 1. 
in combination with pitman I and adjustable 
Thus it will be seen that two strokes can be 
push-button J, all operating for the purpose 
quickly made upon the gong by pressing and 
releasing the push-button once and a great 
described. 
5. In a door-bell, a cover F, in combination 
many strokes made almost instantly without 
with a vertical hammer-guideway G, attached 
the usual complication of frail springs and 
to said cover F, said cover F being secured to 
levers, which are both costly and subject to 
frequent repairs. 
posts at a', said posts act' being secured to the 
central inside portion of gong C, for the pur 
pose described. 
45 
55 
75 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a door-bell, a vertical hammer-guide 
G, supported by plate F, as shown and de 
scribed, hammer N, operating in said vertical 
guide G, said hammer Nhaving a slot o, ar 
ranged as described, spring-arm L, operating 
in said sloto, andelbow-lever II, operating said i 
FREDERICK SANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
SELDEN FISH, 
JOSEPH. A. MILLER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428736.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 428,736, 
W. S. WEST 
SEW ERAGE APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
Patented May 27, l890. 
se 
  
N. 
Y. 
 
928)itvicesco 
247 
26%2%2 
Azz. 
NN N1 
N 
N 
V H 
341.uov tot - 
424.5/e/ 
S3 4- attorney 
62%%/42.472 
The Norris retens co., Photo-LTHo., WASHINGTON, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 428,736, 
 
W. S. WEST. 
SEWERAGE APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 27, 1890 
2 2 
-2 
% 
3 3-2 E2 
  
 
 
 
s 
% 
 
 
 
' ' 
' 
' ' 
i; 
it 
p N 
$ 
' ' 
; 
; 
'til 
. 
; 
; 
 
 
t 
| 
i-li 
 
928)itvicesco 
- (34%-4. 
22%2. 
 
. 
" - 3-2 | Z. 
 
| | | | | 
| 
1 ... 
| | 
3 3 
2 
% N W. 
L 341.uc41 tot 
ZaAre?/he/ 
&lttoz11 ct 
1. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER SCOTT WEST, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, 
SEWE RAGE APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,786, dated May 27, 1890. 
Application filed August 15, 1889, Serial No, 320,895. (No model.) 
55 
w 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WALTER SCOTTWEST, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Sewerage Apparatus; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a vertical sec 
tion of the main building and apparatus, and 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal section. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
adequate means for lifting and transporting 
sewage from the point of discharge to the fil 
tering-beds or other point of disposal, com 
bining therewith devices designed to effect 
the separation of grease, paper, &c., and thor 
ough and effective means of ventilation, all 
as hereinafter set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
this invention, the letter Zdesignates the main 
building of the pumping-station, whereof the 
excavated portion W is quite deep, being usu 
ally deeper than the height of the building V 
above ground. 
A is the chimney, which is usually made 
double and surrounded by the outer chimney 
wall A', between which and the inner chim 
ney Ais the warm-air interspace I, this inter 
Space extending around the chimney or chim 
neys from top to bottom, and communicating 
with the interior of the chimney or chimneys 
by the openings at a below the ground-sur 
face. The chimneys A and their outer wall 
A' extend to a considerable height above the 
building, and they are therefore constructed 
upon a strong foundation B', which extends 
up into the lower chamber W of the building, 
as shown. 
Openings b are made through the outer wall 
A? of the warm-air shaft just above the base 
B' and at the lower end of the shaft below the 
level of the screening-floor L. 
The floor of the lower chamber W of the 
building inclines downward toward the pump 
ing end, forming a trough at c for the accome 
modation of the suction-pipe E of the pump 
or pumps F, two being usually employed. 
At the sides of the warm-air shaft A' are 
the boilers B, and between these is located 
the grease-pan. K, in which it is designed, by 
means of the waste heat and steam from the 
boilers, to reduce the grease which may be 
recovered from the sewage. 
L indicates the screening-floors for the sep 
aration of paper and grease from the sewage 
delivered thereon, and designed to pass 
through the same to the inclined floor of the 
pumping-apartment. The screening-floor is 
laid upon suitable beams d, and consists of 
boards and frame-work filled in with saw 
dust, shavings, excelsior, charcoal, or other 
cheap material, which will serve, after its func-. 
tion as a screen, for the purpose of fuel. . 
The inlet-pipes from the sewer (indicated 
at D) enter the chamber Wa little above the 
screening-floor, as shown, so that the mate 
rial will be spread over the floor as it comes 
from the sewer-pipes, and Will gradually pass 
through the same, leaving the paper, grease, 
and insoluble articles upon the floor, to be 
gathered up and burned or otherwise dis 
posed of. 
To each sewer-inlet pipe D is connected 
near its end a ventilating-pipe G, which rises 
by a bend or necke upward, and, extending 
through the wall A' of the warm-air shaft, 
communicates with the ventilating-chamber 
therein just above the level of the openings a 
into the chimney. 
G' is the discharge-pipe leading from the 
pumps to the filter-beds. 
Exterior to the wall of the underground 
chamber W, and extending downward from 
the ground-level H, are the fresh-air ducts or 
chutes J, which are next said wall, and which 
are provided with openings f at the lower 
ends into the lower portion of the chamber or 
underground apartment W. Above the open 
ings f these chutes or air-ducts are provided 
with other openingsh, having doors or valves . 
The discharging end of each inlet-pipe D is 
provided with a gate-valve N, which can be 
raised or lowered to regulate the discharge, 
the operator passing along the platform. Z'. 
M. indicates the house-connection for the 
sewer-pipe, this connection having a bend in 
at its lower end in the direction of the flow of 
75 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
9o 
OO 
428,786 
35 
45 
the main ventilating-shaft surrounding the 
chimneys and communicating therewith 
above, and with the underground apartment 
below, the screening-floor, the sewage-inlet 
pipes above the same, their adjustable valve 
gates, and their ventilating-pipes leading to 
the ventilating-shaft, substantially as speci 
fied. 
3. The combination, with the sewage-pipes 
leading thereto, of a deep underground re 
ceiving - apartment, its exterior descending 
air-chutes, and central ventilating air-shaft 
having inlet-openings at its base, the chim 
ney inclosed in said air-shaft and communi 
cating therewith, the boilers and pumps, the 
valved sewage-inlet pipes, and their ventilat 
ing-pipes communicating with the ventilat 
ing-shaft, and the screening-floor below the 
sewage-inlet pipes and separating the same 
from the lower or trough portion of the un 
derground apartment from which the suction 
pipe ascends to the pumps, Substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WALTER SCOTT WEST. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. DELANo, 
DUNCAN CAMPBELL. 
O 
the sewage. This bend ?) is formed on the 
union sleeve P, which is provided with the 
base T, and it is designed to prevent clogging. 
The free supply of air to the underground 
apartment W, through the chute or ducts J, 
serves to prevent the exhalation of ferment 
ous odors, the tall chimneys and their sur 
rounded warm-air shaft taking all gases and 
Odors up, and in great measure burning them, 
or excessively rarefying them before their dis 
charge at the top of the chimney. The denser 
gases are drawn into the chimneys themselves 
through the openings (, and burned. 
IIaving described this invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
IS 
1. In a pumping-station for sewage, the com 
bination, with the chimney and its surround 
ing ventilating - shaft communicating with 
said chimney, of the underground pumping 
chamber, its descending fresh-air ducts, boil 
ors, pumps, and Screen-floor, the sewage-inlet 
pipes above said Screen-floor, and the venti 
lating-pipes extending from said inlet-pipes 
to the ventilating-shaft around the chimney, 
substantially as specified. 
2. In a pumping-station for sewage, the com 
bination, with the chimneys, boilers, and 
pumps, and the underground pumping-apart 
3o ment having the descending fresh-air inlet, of 
2 5 
2C) 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428836.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 428,836, 
C. FOX. 
SAD IRON. 
Z27. Z. Patented May 27, 1890. 
7 - 
Zsa 
W SSES 
2. ) 
BY 
 
INVENTOR 
*@ 7% 
layag ice, 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTIAN FOX, OF CHRISTIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO WILLIAM J. 
AITIKIN, OF GAP, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SAD RON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,886, dated May 27, 1890. 
Application filed August 17, 1889, Serial No. 32ll06, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHRISTIAN FOX, of Chris 
tiana, in the county of Lancaster and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and Im 
proved Sad-Iron, of which tha following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
The invention relates to that class of 
smoothing or sad irons in which the handle 
is made detachable; and the object of the in 
Vention is to so improve sad-irons of this char 
acter as to cause the handle to be firmly se 
cured to the body and by simple catch de 
vices that enable the handle to be attached 
and detached expeditiously. 
To these ends the invention consists in the 
novel details of construction and combination 
thereof, as hereinafter particularly described, 
and defined in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a sad-iron 
embodying my improvements, the handle be 
ing shown detached and partly in section, the 
position of the handle when secured in place 
being indicated in dotted lines. Fig. 2 is an 
inverted plan view of the handle, and Fig. 3 
is a viewin perspective of a portion of the sad 
iron on a somewhat larger scale. 
In constructing a sad-iron in accordance 
with my invention the body Athereof, which 
may be made hollow or solid, as desired, is 
provided on its upper surface with two posts 
A", one near each end, the said posts being 
formed with arrow-heads Ct. 
The handle consists of two standards or 
arms BB, Secured to a base-plate B' and pref. 
erably curving outward and upward, the ex 
treme upper ends lying in a vertical plane. 
Abar or handle proper Bunites the said arms 
or standards in the usual manner. At one 
end the base-plate B' is notched, as at b, for 
enabling it to be passed beneath one of the 
headed posts A of the body. 
The arm B, at the end opposite the notch 
b, is formed with a triangular recess b', pref 
erably so formed as to snugly receive the ar 
row-head of a post A', and in the bottom of 
said arm at each side is formed a longitudi 
nal slot or recess b, leaving a web or neckb 
dividing the two notches. 
To the upper side of the base-plate B' of 
the handle a spring-catch C is secured, which 
consists of two spring-arms c c, formed in One 
piece and held to the base-plate by the bent 
portion c' and lying on the base-plate in a 
horizontal plane. 
The arms cc normally tend to approach 
each other and lie in the recesses or slots b 
sufficiently close together to grasp the arrow 
head (, of the post A when brought down 
against the same. 
In securing the handle in place on the body 
the notched end b of the base-plate of the for 
mer is slipped under one of the posts A, and 
the opposite end, provided with the spring 
arms, is then lowered, and as the spring-arms 
strike the inclines of the arrow-head they 
are separated until the said head passes be 
tween them, whereupon they will approach 
each other, springing in beneath the head and 
securely locking the handle in place. 
To provide for the ready release of the 
spring-catch for detaching the handle, I have 
provided a releasing-lever D, which is piv 
oted at the back of that arm B that is adja 
cent to the said catch. The lever D is slightly 
curved, approximating elbow form; and has a 
downwardly-extending cam-head d, Fig. 2, 
which extends between the spring-arms c C 
and works in a slot b', formed for it in the 
base-plate B'. 
In operation, upon the upper end d of the 
lever being pressed toward the arm B, the 
cam-head d forces the spring-arms c apart 
and out of engagement with the headed post 
A', allowing the handle to be readily removed. 
The handle may be reversed with respect 
to the ends of the body of the iron, as the 
notched end of the base-plate and the Spring 
catch will engage, respectively, either post A. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a sad-iron, a handle consisting of the 
base B", having a notch b in one end, the 
standards B, secured to the base, the stand 
ard at the end opposite the notch b being pro 
vided with the recess b', and the bar B', con 
IC) 
20 
35 
45 
95 
Iod 
g 
428,836 
vided with posts A, having arrow-heads (t, of 
the handle comprising a base-plate B, verti 
cal arms B, supporting the handle proper B', 
the base-plate being notched at one end, as 
at b, and the arm B at the opposite end being 
formed with a triangular recess b to corre 
spond with the head of a post A', a spring 
catch consisting of Spring-arms secured to the 
base-plate B of the handle and extending 
into line with the recess l', and a releasing 
lever ID for said spring-arms, having a cam 
head extending between the latter, substan 
tially as described. 
CHRISTIAN FOX. 
Witnesses: 
J. R.UTTER HESS, 
JOHN FOX, Jr. 
necting the standards, in combination with 
the body of the iron provided with posts hav 
ing arrow-heads and spring-arms secured to 
the base of the handle and adapted to engage 
One of the said posts, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. The combination, in a sad-iron, of a body 
provided with headed posts, a handle com 
prising a base-plate notched at one end and 
Vertical arms supporting the handle proper, 
Spring-arms secured to said base-plate, and a 
releasing-lever for said spring-arms, the lever 
being pivoted to one of the vertical arms of 
the handle, and having a cam-head extend 
ing between the spring-arms, substantially as 
described. 
3. The combination, with the body A, pro 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US428936.txt	(No Model.) 
D, D, NOLLEY. 
PAPER BAG AND TWINE HOLDIER, 
No. 428,936, 
Patented May 27, 1890. 
 
Wada e g ses: 
VCee- 
- %2. ' 
77 v e 7z for: 
46, 40-ya A, 
, 
2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID D. NOLLEY, OF WILSON, NORTH CAROLINA. 
PAPER BAG AND TWIN E HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 428,936, dated May 27, 1890. 
Application filed January 31, 1890, Serial No, 338,807, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID D. NOLLEY, of 
Wilson, in the county of Wilson and State of 
North Carolina, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Paper-Bag and 
Twine Holders; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains 
to make and use it, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawing, which forms part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
paper-bag and twine holders; and it consists 
in the combination and arrangement of parts 
to be fully described hereinafter, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
a combined paper-bag and twine holder, in 
Which the ends of two of the wires which hold 
the bags are held in a single hook or catch 
Which has a partially-turning movement. 
The accompanying drawing represents a 
perspective of a device which embodies my 
invention. 
A represents a rod of any suitable length 
or thickness, and which is provided with suit 
able ornaments IB, of any desired description 
at its ends. This rod is intended to be hung 
up above the counter, or in any other con 
venient place. Passed down through this rod 
are a suitable number of L-shaped wires C, 
which have a turning movement in relation 
to the rod, and which have their lower ends 
sharpened, so as to pass readily through the 
paper bags of different sizes, which are to be 
placed upon the horizontal portions of the 
wire. These wires C are preferably arranged 
in pairs, and after they have been filled with 
bags of the desired sizes their sharpened ends 
or points are turned inwardly toward each. 
other and then supported and locked in po 
sition by means of a vertical wire D, which 
is provided with a hook or bend G at its 
lower end. This wire has a partially-turning 
movement, so that the opening into the hook 
can be brought into line with the two wires. 
C, and thus allow their ends to be raised out 
of the hook. This wire serves both to sup 
port the wires after they have been filled with 
bags and to lock them into position, so that 
they will remain in a line with the rod A. 
By using only a single Wire D two wires C 
are supported andlocked in position by means 
of a single fastening. When it is desired to 
loosen one of the wires C to turn it, so that 
its lower portion will extend at an angle with 
the rod A, the wire D must be partially re 
volved, so as to bring the opening of the 
hook G just above the free ends of the wires 
C. After the wires have been filled with bags 
they are turned into line again with the rod 
A, their ends are lifted up so as to pass over 
the top of the hook, and then the rod D is 
turned partially around, so that the bent 
upper end of the hook will catch over the 
tops of the two wires and lock them in posi 
tion, as shown. 
At the center of the rod A, a vertical open 
ing is made, and down through which the 
lower end of the conical twine-holder I is 
passed. This holder I is made conical, so that 
the ball of twine cannot revolve or turn in 
the holder while the twine is being drawn 
out. The ball of twine is held in the holder 
by means of a spring J, which has its ends 
to engage with the top of the holder in any 
suitable manner. This spring prevents the 
twine from falling out should the holder be 
turned over to one side by accident at any 
time. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination, with the rod of the 
L-shaped wires, having their vertical por 
tions passing through the said rod and adapted 
to be turned and their ends to lap, of a verti 
cal wire midway between the L-shaped wires, 
which passes through the said rod and its 
lower end formed into Substantially a com 
plete circle, the end of the wire being sepa 
rated from the vertical portion, so as to allow 
the wires to pass into the circle when it is 
turned in a line parallel with the rod, and to 
lock the wires when turned at an angle to the 
rod, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the rod carrying 
a bag-holder and having a vertical opening, 
of a conical twine-holder having its reduced 
end secured to the rod at the opening, whereby 
the twine passes through the said opening, 
substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
DAVID D, NOILLEY, 
Witnesses: 
J. R. RAWLS, 
MAX HARRIS. 
O 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
90 
95 
Co 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429036.txt	(No Model.) 
D. E. KEMPSTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1 
DE FOR USE IN MAKING. HORSESHOE NAIS. 
No. 429,036, 
 
1890 
ae 
 
 
 
 | 
(No Model.) 
D, E KEMPSTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
DIE FOR USE IN MAKING. HORSE SHOE NAILS, 
No. 429,036, 
Patented May 27, 1890, 
W. 
E 4W 
 
 
% 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
ria 
D. E. KEMPSTER 
DIE FOR USE IN MAKING HORSESHOE NAILS. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented May 27, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 429,036, 
 
C 
Lle SSES 
2. T. 
6a-14 r. 
Invertor 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL E. KEMPSTER, OF BOST ON, MASSA CHUSETTS, 
DE FOR USE IN MAKING HORSE SHOE NAILS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,086, dated May 27, 1890. 
Original application filed March 15, 1889, Serial No. 303,408, Divided and this application filed October 21, 1889, Serial No. 
327,625, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL E. KEMPSTER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Appliances or 
Dies for Use in the Manufacture of Horse 
shoe Nails and Blanks therefor; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as Will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to the manufacture of 
animal-shoe nails, and has for its object to pro 
vide improved means whereby the process, 
method, or art illustrated and described in my 
application for Letters Patent filed in the 
United States Patent Office March 15, 1889, 
Serial No. 303,408, and of which the present 
application is a division, may be expeditiously 
and economically carried out, and thereby 
produce the improved animal-shoe nail and 
nail-blank shown and described in my appli 
cation for Letters Patent, filed in the United 
States Patent Office April 23, 1888, Serial No. 
271,534. 
My invention consists in the construction 
and combination of the appliances or dies 
herein described, and the Special features 
thereof are clearly pointed out in the claims 
at the end of this specification. 
In the drawings hereto annexed and form 
ing a part of this specification similar letters 
of reference indicate corresponding parts 
wherever they occur thereon. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
two duplex platen-dies for cross-rolling or 
roll-forging double or twin' nail-blanks, 
said dies being shown in about the position 
they occupy when first starting to roll the 
metal blank. Fig. 2 is an end view of Said 
dies as seen from the right of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 
is a longitudinal section of said dies on the 
line A B in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a cross-section 
of said dies on the cross-line 7 in Fig. 3. Fig. 
5 is a cross-section of said dies on the CrOSS 
line 8 in Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a cross-section of 
said dies on the cross-line 9 in Fig. 3. Figs. 
d. 
- 
7 and S are side and end views, respect 
ively, of Said dies when made in the form of 
rolls instead of platens, said die-rolls being 
cutaway at in to permit the completed nail 
blank to drop out. Fig. 9 is a perspective 
view of platen-dies for forming single nail 
blanks, said dies being slightly changed in 
construction and arranged to operate in a 
little different manner from the platen-dies 
before alluded to, as will be described here 
inafter. Fig. 10 is a top view of a female 
die for flattening the duplex or twin nail 
blankrolled forging thereon. Fig. 11 is alon 
gitudinal Section of duplex male and female 
flattening-dies, and shows also a punch and 
die for cutting apart and separating the du 
plex or twin nails. Fig. 12 is a central cross 
section of said flattening-dies, and also a side 
view of the nail-separating punch or die. 
Figs. 13 and 14 are side and end views, re 
spectively, of said flattening-dies when made 
in the form of rolls instead of platens. Fig. 
15 is a broken side view of male and female 
flattening - dies for flattening single nail 
blanks. Fig. 16 is a side view of a metal 
saw or toothed cutter, which may be used 
for separating the duplex or twin nails in 
stead of the punch and die shown in Fig. 12. 
Figs. 17, 20, and 23 are top or plan views of 
four nail-pointing dies, showing different ways 
of shaping their converging working-surfaces 
so that they may be able to all act simultane 
ously upon the four sides, on two sides, and 
two edges of the point of the nail. Figs. 18, 
21, and 24 are respective sections of the same 
on the lines 10 in Figs. 17, 20, and 23. Figs. 19, 
22, and 25 are respective sections of the same 
on the lines 12 in Figs. 17, 20, and 23. Figs. 
26 and 27 are respective cross-sections of two 
forms of duplex nail-forging dies, showing the 
central parting-rib arranged to divide the 
metal blank into two separate and complete 
nail-blanks. Fig. 2S is a side view of a round 
duplex or twin nail-blank as formed by 
the dies shown from Figs. 1 to 8, inclusive. 
Fig. 29 is a side view of a round single nail 
blank as formed by the dies shown in Figs. 
9, 26, and 27. Fig. 30 is a face view of a flat 
tened nail as formed by the dies from Figs. 
10 to 15, inclusive. Fig. 31 is a face view of 
a flattened nail bevel-pointed and finished as . 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
429,036 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
formed by the dies from Figs. 17 to 25, in 
clusive. Fig. 32 is a side edge view of said 
flattened and bevel-pointed or finished nail. 
Fig. 33 is a perspective view showing more 
plainly the compressed and beveled point of 
said finished nail. 
As my present, invention has to do only 
with the various special appliances or dies, 
and as machines for operating said dies may 
be modifications of old and Well-known mech 
anisms, I therefore do not deem it essential 
in this specification to enter into a detailed 
description of said machines, as any person 
skilled in the art to which my special appli 
ances or dies pertain will by the description 
thereof herein given leadily see that ma 
chines for operating said appliances or dies 
in the manner I have described can be easily 
produced by any skilled mechanic. 
In view of the foregoing the forging-dies C 
c shown in the drawings from Figs. 1 to 6, in 
clusive, are Straight platens and are assumed 
to be mounted in a suitable machine (one or 
both dies being made to reciprocate) with 
their working-faces adjacent to each other 
and adapted to travel as indicated by the ar 
rows in Fig. 3 when cross-rolling or roll-forg 
ing metal introduced between their converg 
ing faces, and thereby produce round duplex 
or twin nail-llanks (t (t, similar to that shown in 
Fig. 2S. Said dies c have plane-faces c', which 
lie parallel to each other when in working 
position, and within said plane faces are sunk 
longitudinally the working-grooves c', the 
working-surfaces of said grooves being shaped 
in cross-section corresponding to and the con 
verse of the longitudinal configuration of one 
half (more or less) of the round duplex or 
twin nail-blank C. C., as shown in Figs. 1 to 6, 
inclusive. A central rib C within the work 
ing groove c' partly divides said duplex or 
twin nail-blank, as shown in Fig. 2S. 
If preferred, the central rib c may rise flush 
with the plane faces c', substantially as shown 
in Figs. 2G and 27, and thus entirely divide 
and separate said blank into two complete 
nail-blanks similar to that shown in Fig. 29; 
or, if preferred, the central parting-rib c may 
be partly or entirely dispensed with, and the 
two nails be connected by metal nearly or 
quite the full size of the diameter of the head 
or blade or shank, as the case may be. 
The working-grooves c' are formed of equal 
width from end to end, but made tapering as 
to depth-that is to say, the die-grooves c' 
have tapering portions ('', commencing about 
on the cross-line 9 in Fig. 3 and deepening 
toward their starting ends, where said grooves 
are a little deeper than one-half the diameter 
of the metal nail rod or blank from which 
the round nail-blank is to be forged. This 
allows the metal blank to freely enter between 
the tapering surfaces of the die-grooves prior 
to its being rolled therein. Said tapering sur 
faces may be milled or scored, as at 2, if so 
preferred, to aid in the rotation of the blank 
during the operation of the dies; or, if de 
sired, said surfaces may be left Smooth, ex 
cepting the central parting-rib c, which I pre 
fer to mill or score its entire length, and also 
form far enough below the surfaces of the 
plane faces c' c' to leave a metal connection 
between the heads of the two nail-blanks a C, 
as shown in Fig. 2S, as I find a considerable 
saving of time is effected in the subsequent 
operations on said nail-blanks by thus han 
dling them in duplex or twin form. 
The tapering portions c' of the die-grooves 
c', I denominate their reducing and spread 
ing surfaces, and the balance or longitudi 
nally-straight portions of said grooves their 
forming or finishing surfaces. 
The reducing and spreading surfaces c' may 
be formed straight or slightly tapering in 
cross-section, or they may be formed convex 
or crowning, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 7. 
I prefer to form said reducing and spreading 
surfaces in this manner, preferably, as last 
described, as I find the dies will condense and 
draw out the metal gradually into shape with 
out tearing it apart or disrupting the fibers 
of the same, as is often the case when the re 
ducing and spreading surfaces run diagonal 
to the line of movement of the die and stand 
oblique to the plane of the same, as with this 
latter construction a greater longitudinal 
strain is brought upon the metal being forged 
thereby. 
Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are cross-sections of the 
dies C C on the cross-lines 7, S, and 9, respect 
ively, in Fig. 3, showing different positions 
the dies occupy when in operation, and serve 
to illustrate the progression in change of 
form which would be given a metal blank 
being rolled between the converging faces of 
the die-grooves. 
The forging-dies c ( shown in Figs. 7 and 
S are substantially like these just described, 
excepting they are in the form of lolls in 
stead of platens, and it is evident that the 
mail-forging dies may, if so lesired, be both 
formed segmental or curved, or one die may 
be concaved longitudinally and its compan 
ion die convexed longitudinally, or one die 
may be straight and its companion die 
curved or made a roller - die; or they may 
be made of any other form of construc 
tion preferred, and be arranged to (either one 
or both) be revolved, vibrated, or recipro 
cated, as may be required. It is also evi 
dent to any mechanic that I may, if so pre 
ferred, form the working-grooves in any of 
the dies referred to without any tapering 
politions otherein and make them alike from 
end to end, and by simply giving said dies a 
forward and backward movement to cause 
their working-faces to gradually approach 
each other while rolling the metal the same 
result is obtained upon the forging as when 
the dies are tapered and operated as first de 
Scribed. This construction would require no 
invention, but is simply an equivalent, modi 
fication of the forging devices. 
The forging-dies c C shown in Fig. 9 are 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
I o5 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
429,036 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
Substantially like those shown in Fig. 1, ex 
cepting that their working surfaces or grooves 
are shaped to form a single nail-blanka, and 
are made straight longitudinally, or without 
any tapering portions c', and, as before sug 
gested, are assumed to be mounted in a ma 
chine suitably constructed and arranged so 
that the dies will separate from each other 
Sufficiently far apart, as shown, to admit the 
insertion of the metal blank prior to its be 
ing rolled, and then as the dies rotate said 
metal they are caused to gradually approach 
each other, and thus compress, condense, and 
form the metal into the shape of a single 
round nail-blanka, as shown in Fig. 29. If 
preferred, the die-grooves may be formed ta 
pering longitudinally, the shape of the com 
plete nail-blank, as shown in the dotted lines 
cin said figure, and in that case the dies would 
not need to have the opening and closing 
movement before mentioned. 
The forging-dies cc shown in Figs. 26 and 
27 may be formed and operated, so far as 
their working-grooves are concerned, in either 
of the ways before described. The only pecu 
liarity in them which I desire to point out is 
that they have their central parting-rib c 
constructed and arranged so as to divide the 
metal and separate it into two complete nail 
blanks, and thus dispense with any cutting 
devices for separating the two nails after 
they are forged, as is required when using 
forging-dies which have the two nails joined 
by a metal connection either at their heads 
or points. The matter of cutting apart the 
duplex or twin nail-blanks, either while 
forging or when flattening them, is merely a 
question of economy in their manufacture, 
and will be governed by all the attending 
circumstances, and the method and time of 
cutting them apart is adopted which gives 
the best results for the particular size or 
style of nail-blank being made. 
The nail rolling or forging dies chave their 
forming-surfaces c' shaped tapering in cross 
section, so as to distribute the metal and roll 
the round nail-blankinto such tapering shape 
or form as will positively insure that when 
said round blank is flattened on two opposite 
sides to give it the required thickness of a 
finished nail it will also cause said nail to 
assume the proper finished width or tapering 
face form without the necessity of operating 
or acting upon the Side edges of the nail. 
This feature of forming the round nail-blank 
tapering, so as to predetermine the shape and 
form of the flattened nail and insure its as 
suming the proper width or face form by sim 
ply flattening it to the thickness required in 
the finished nail, is a great improvement, and 
will be found fully and minutely described 
and broadly claimed in my product and pro 
cess applications referred to at the beginning 
of this specification, and the dies herein shown 
for rolling the round nail-blanks are shaped 
upon their working-surfaces to produce nail 
blanks of this description or having the par 
ticular tapering form, whereby when they are 
flattened to the required thickness of the fin 
ished nail they will not bulge out across the 
middle portion of the body or blade broader 
than they are in the neck under the head, but 
will take just the required width throughout 
and a SSume the proper face form, as before 
stated. Furthermore, by constructing the 
nail-rolling dies c with their reducing and 
forming surfaces sunk within a working 
groove, as herein shown, I am able to bodily 
confine and roll a metal blank entirely sepa 
rated from the main rod or bar, thus adapting 
said dies for use in automatic nail-rolling ma 
chines, wherein the speed of operating on the 
metal is very much greater than can possibly 
be attained with dies having their forming 
Surfaces raised upon or above their faces, so 
as to adapt them for rolling metal articles 
upon the end of a rod or bar or from metal 
blanks containing more metal than is requi 
site to form the article being made. 
I have shown the forging-dies in all the 
views as having their working-surfaces cut or 
shaped to form a Special-shaped animal-shoe 
nail blank; but it is evident, and I would 
have it understood, that I may change or 
modify the shape of the die-grooves so as to 
produce a nail-blank of another shape, if so 
preferred for any purpose-such as, for in 
stance, when desirable to bevel and finish the 
point of the nail by flattening, indenting, and 
clipping or cutting the metal in the manner 
shown in my application for Letters Patent 
filed in the United States Patent Office Octo 
ber 10, 1889, Serial No. 326,593. In that case 
the nail-blank would be formed straight, or 
nearly So, in the shank or under the head, so 
as to give said blank sufficient metal when 
flattened and indented for the cutters or 
punch and die to act upon and shear or clip 
the nail-blank, and thus finish and bring it 
to a beveled point. 
The flattening-dies d and e shown in Figs. 
10, 11, and 12 are straight plate-dies, and are 
assumed to be mounted in a suitable machine, 
so that one or both dies will reciprocate and 
compress or flatten the metal nail-blanka, a 
introduced between their adjacent working 
faces. The male died has a plane face pro 
vided with the opening d", through which 
passes the nail-Separating punch or male die 
d', suitably mounted in the aforesaid ma 
chine, so as to reciprocate independent of the 
male flattening-died and enter its co-operat 
ing female die e', formed in the female flat 
tening-die e. In the face of said female die 
e is sunk a groove e', the surface of said 
groove being formed in cross-section corre 
sponding to and the converse of the longitudi 
nal configuration of the flattened nails edge 
wise, substantially as shown in Fig. 11. The 
plane faces ee on the female die e act as a 
stop for the male died to strike against, thus 
admitting of great pressure being given the 
nail-blanks to bring them all to an exact 
thickness without danger of crushing them. 
a 
95 
IOC 
O 
II 5 
I 25 
429,036 
5 
15 
3O 
o 
45 
by the blow. It is evident that part or all of 
the plane faces or stops e'e' may be formed 
on the male died, if preferred; or said stops 
may be entirely removed from the dies and 
other means employed for gaging or stopping 
the blow. 
If preferred, the flattening-dies d and e may 
be made solid or unprovided with any nail 
separating dies d' and e', and the flattened 
and connected twin nails may be cut apart or 
separated by other means-as, for instance, 
the metal saw or toothed cutter d8 may be 
suitably held and revolved in the flatten 
ing machine or press, and the flattened du 
plex or twin nails may be automatically fed 
across it and cut apart and separated thereby, 
as is readily understood by any mechanic. 
The nail-flattening dies de shown in Figs. 
13 and 14 are substantially like those just 
described, excepting they are in the form of 
rolls instead of platens, and said roller-dies 
are also unprovided with any nail-separating 
dies, and, furthermore, if preferred, the 
roller-dies may be so constructed or shaped 
on their faces as to roll the round nail-blank 
lengthwise instead of crosswise, and thus 
compress and flatten it to the shape, taper, and 
thickness edgewise of a finished nail. 
The nail-flattening dies d and e shown in 
Fig. 15 are substantially like those shown in 
Fig. 11, excepting they are formed for flatten 
ing a single nail-blank, and they are also 
without any stops formed integral therewith, 
such as are shown in said latter figure. 
It is evident that the flattening-dies, if pre 
ferred, may also be formed in curved or seg 
mental shape, and be revolved, vibrated, or 
reciprocated, as required, and any of said 
flattening-dies described, when operated as 
specified, flatten the round nail-blank a into 
a flattened and unpointed nail b, substan 
tially as shown in Figs. 30 and 32, with the 
exception of the beveled point shown in 
said latter figure. I wish to state, also, that 
in practice the faces or working-surfaces of 
the nail-flattening dies are formed or shaped 
with a suitable curve longitudinally, so as to 
bend as well as to flatten the nails, and thus 
give them the usual and proper curvature or 
set' required for driving, as is readily un 
derstood by those familiar with this class of 
nails, and although I have shown in the 
drawings the surfaces of the flattening-dies, 
and also the flattened nails, as straight longi 
tudinally, it being somewhat easier to so rep 
resent them, yet, as before stated, they may 
be curved more or less, as desired, for any 
particular size or style of nail. 
The nail-pointing dies hikl shown in Figs. 
17 to 25, inclusive, represent different ways 
of shaping the working ends of said dies, so 
that they may all be brought up together si 
multaneously to compress the nail upon all 
sides, and either set of said dies shown may 
be assumed to be properly mounted in a suit 
able machine, and, being shaped or cut away 
as shown, are all four adapted to act simul 
taneously upon the point of the nail b and 
compress it upon all sides, or rather upon its 
two sides and two edges, and thus evenly 
condense the metal and bring it to a perfectly 
beveled and hardened point, as shown in Fig. 
33, without any lateral displacement alter 
nately in opposite directions of the fibers of 
metal composing the point of the nail, as it is 
drawn to a point without spreading the metal 
laterally. 
Heretofore in the usual custom of beveling 
the points of the nails by compressing or ham 
mering said nails when cold it has been found 
necessary, in order to operate upon the Small 
blade or point of the nail and have the point 
ing-dies or hammers clear each other while 
in operation, to act upon said points alter 
nately, first upon two opposite sides and then 
upon two opposite edges, or vice versa. This 
lateral displacement alternately in opposite 
directions of the fibers of metal composing 
the delicate point of the nail necessarily frac 
tures the minute crystals of metal and de 
stroys the tenacity and cohesiveness of the 
fibers thereof, thus engendering laminations 
and minute cracks, and although such nails 
seem apparently sound, as far as any exter 
nal appearance can denote, when they are 
driven into the hoof they develop slivers 
and split points, to the very great danger of 
disabling the animal being shod thereby. 
My improved dies above referred to effect 
ually overcome the objections and defects 
mentioned, and also hasten the operation 
of pointing the nails. I prefer to use said 
dies constructed as shown in Figs. 17, 18, and 
19, and, although they may all four reciprocate 
to and form a common center, I prefer to make 
the die h stationary to form an anvil for the 
back of the nail to rest against, and the dies kil, 
I bevel and shape substantially as shown at 
i' ic' l', so as to permit their working ends or 
faces to come together simultaneously and 
compress the point of the nail against the an 
will or die h, the four dies when all brought to 
gether forming a pocket or complete die of 
the exact shape of the finished and beveled 
nail-point. The dies i klare flared or rounded 
on their upper corners, as shown at i'k't', to 
correspond with thesizeof the mouth of the con 
ductor or spout through which the nails pass 
automatically point first from the flattening 
dies to and into the said pointing-dies. The up 
per or top corner of said dies being flared, as 
before stated, prevents the nails from lodging 
thereon and causes them to drop into proper 
position, where they are firmly held during 
the operation of pointing them. The dies 
i k l are caused, by a suitable cam or other 
mechanism, to reciprocate simultaneously a 
certain number of times, generally about 
three compressions, to condense and bevel 
the point of the nail, and then said dies are 
caused to open apart wide enough to permit 
the finished nail when liberated to pass en 
tirely through, and then immediately close 
together sufficiently far to form a proper 
75 
IOC 
I I5 
I 25 
429,036 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
sized pocket or V to catch the next succeed 
ing nail and allow it to settle far enough into 
Said pocket to give the necessary metal stock 
When held or clamped in position for the dies 
to act upon and condense and bevel to a point. 
The die k is properly-shaped on its face to 
impart the desired bevel to the point of the 
nail, and when reciprocated is forced against 
the plane or anvil die h, and the dies il 
are forced against each other and have their 
faces shaped the proper angle of the tapering 
side edges of the point of the nail, the work. 
ing-edge of the moving dies being beveled, 
substantially as shown, so as to all converge 
to a common center on the anvil-die h, and 
thus condense and bevel the point of the nail 
by acting simultaneously on all sides of it, 
and consequently withoutspreading the metal 
laterally, as hereinbefore stated. 
The pointing-dies h i k l shown in Figs. 20, 
21, and 22 are substantially like those just de 
Scribed, excepting the dieh, being shown as 
also beveled and shaped as at h h', and the 
dies k l being shaped to co-operate there 
With. The dies shown in Figs. 23, 24, and 25 
are Substantially like the two sets just de 
Scribed, they merely showing a little differ 
ent manner of beveling and shaping the 
Working ends of said dies, as at h h' ' 'k' 
k'll', as will be readily understood by any 
mechanic on referring to the drawings with 
out further description other than to state 
that in the operation of either set of the 
pointing-dies shown the end of the round 
edged nail b, Fig. 30, is neatly and squarely 
dra Win out to a perfectly-beveled point, sub 
stantially as shown in Figs. 31, 32, and 33, 
Without leaving any fins or seams thereon 
noting the junction between the several 
eS. 
Having now described the several appli 
ances or dies, I will briefly give a generalde 
Scription of their operations, and also point 
Out the Superior qualities given the nails 
thereby. 
In making the round nail-blanks a the metal 
rod may first be cut up into short pieces or 
blanks containing just sufficient metal stockto 
be forged into a single or duplex nail-blank, 
as desired, and Said blanks may then be au 
tomatically fed, either hot or cold, into the 
forging-dies, where they are quickly rolled 
and formed into shape. I prefer, however, to 
make use of a system or automatic metal-roll 
ing mill, similar to those shown in patents 
granted to me April 10 and August 28, 1888, 
and numbered 380,759 and 388,565, respect 
ively. In that case the coil of wire nail-rod 
is supported upon a suitable reel and passes 
off through a furnace, which heats it nearly 
to a Welding heat, and passing thence through 
feed-rolls, which intermittently feed it into 
the forging-machine, where suitable blanks 
are intermittently severed therefrom, and 
passed into the forging-dies, where they are 
rapidly rolled or forged into shape, said shape 
in its preferred form being the duplex or 
twin nail-blank at a, connected by a metal 
connection at their heads, as shown in Fig. 
28. The entire operation of the nail-forging 
mill being continuous and automatic is there 
fore capable of great speed. The round nail 
blanks when cold, and after having the usual 
Oxide or scale removed therefrom, are next 
placed in suitable bulk in the hopper of the 
combined nail feeding, flattening, and point 
ing machine, where they automatically feed 
down into and between the flattening-dies, 
where they are compressed or stamped and 
flattened into the desired thickness, taper, 
and curvature edgewise of the nails and 
partly beveled on their points or not, as 
preferred, by the descent of the upper or 
male died, and while the double nail-blank 
is thus compressed and firmly held between 
said flattening-dies the die d' descends and 
Severs the metal connection between them, 
and as the flattening-dies are separating the 
two nails are caused to drop and enter point 
firstinto two separate conductors, which guide 
them down into two sets of pointing or bev 
eling dies, where they are quickly given the 
necessary finished and beveled point re 
quired, and are then dropped into suitable 
receptacles provided therefor. 
The entire operation of the combined nail 
feeding, flattening, and pointing machine be 
ing continuous and automatic is therefore 
also, like the forging-mill, capable of great 
speed, and this machine and also a special 
form of forging-machine, both of which are 
designed especially for the manufacture of 
animal-shoe nails, will form subjects for 
other applications for patents hereafter. 
I would state herein that when forming the 
round nail-blanks of cold metal or when forg 
ing them from steel instead of iron I prefer 
to combine and operate the flattening-dies 
in connection with the forming or forging dies, 
thereby forming or forging and flattening the 
nails in one and the same machine, and also 
when working cold metal. I sometimes pre 
fer to combine and operate the pointing-dies 
in connection with the forming or forging 
dies and the flattening-dies, thereby making 
the complete nail in one combined machine. 
In reducing or forging metal by compreSS 
ing and rotating it between adjacent die 
faces in the usual and well-known manner of 
making rolled forgings the surface move 
mentor rotation of the metal blank when Work 
is being performed, if there is no slip, is the 
same as the rate of linear movement of the 
dies, or the length of the working-Surfaces on 
said dies, which have acted upon and forced 
said metal blank to revolve. Consequently in 
roll-forging any small tapering cylindel's Ol' 
spindles similar to the blade or shank of the 
round nail-blank, as the work progresses and 
the blank becomes tapering and variable in 
size, being prevented from slipping by the 
hot plastic metal engaging the milled or 
scored surfaces of the dies, the Smaller di 
ameters of said blank are compelled to rotate 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
Id 
II5 
I 25 
429,036 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
faster than the larger, as must be readily per 
ceived, and thus the fibers of the metal com 
posing the blank are spun or twisted some 
what as represented by the dotted lines in Fig. 
28. The degree of pitch or twist given the fibers 
of metal depends upon the degree of taper 
given the blank and upon whether the smaller 
portions of said blank are permitted to slip 
past the die-surfaces without being rotated 
thereby, as by relieving the die-faces so as to 
reduce the friction on the blank and dispensing 
With the milled or scored surfaces other than 
that on the central parting-rib c the blank 
may be rolled into form without matelially 
twisting the metal, as shown in Fig. 29, it slip 
ping in the dies, so that the smaller portions 
are not revolved any faster than the approxi 
mate speed of the largest diameter of the 
blank. This spinning or twisting of the fibers 
of the hot metal during the formation of the 
nail is especially desirable when using an in 
ferior or low-cost grade of iron, as it tends to 
close up and weld or knit together any seams 
or imperfections existing in the metal and 
materially adds to the homogeneity, strength, 
and durability of the nails, as will be readily 
understood and appreciated by those ac 
quainted with the art of working metal, and 
most especially with the art of forging and 
pointing animal-shoe nails. 
The nails manufactured with my improved 
appliances or dies are necessarily of superior 
quality, as by the use of my roll-forging dies 
the metal composing the nails is condensed 
and toughened, and by the use of the flatten 
ing - dies the nails are hardened, stiffened, 
smoothly finished, and given the proper curva 
ture or set, and by the use of the pointing 
dies the nails are given a solid, dense, hard 
ened, beveled point. 
I Would have it understood that I do not 
wish to limit myself to the specific styles or 
forms of construction of the dies herein de 
Scribed, as they may be modified any way 
within the scope of mechanical skill for pro 
ducing animal-shoe nails of other shapes than 
the particular one herein shown without de 
parting from the essential spirit of my inven 
tion-as, for instance, the nail-pointing dies 
il, if So pleferred, may extend toward the 
head of the nail, so as to compress and flat 
ten the rounded side edges of said nail when 
compressing its point, and, furthermore, the 
four nail-pointing dies may, if so desired, act 
alternately first upon two faces and then upon 
two side edges, or vice versa. I prefer, how 
ever, to arrange and operate said dies as be 
fore described. 
I do not in this application claim the round 
rolled forged nail-blank, nor a nail or nail 
blank having the fibers of its metal twisted, 
nor a nail or nail-blank having other im 
provements herein described, as these fea 
tures are already claimed in my application 
for Letters Patent filed in the United States 
Patent Office April 23, 1888, Serial No. 271,534. 
Neither (lo I claim in this application theim 
proved process, method, or art of manufac 
turing animal-shoe nails herein described, as 
I have already claimed it in my application 
for Letter's Patent filed in the United States 
Patent Office March 15, 1889, Serial No. 303,408. 
Neither do I claim in this application a round 
duplex or twin animal-shoe-mail blank, as I 
have already claimed it in my application for 
Letters Patent filed in the United States Pat 
ent Office October 10, 1889, Serial No.326,593. 
IIaving thus fully described the nature, 
construction, and operation of my invention, 
I wish to secure by Lotters Patent, and claim 
1. In the manufacture of animal-shoe nails, 
the combination of the two nail rolling or 
forging dies c (, provided with the working 
grooves c', of equal width from end to end 
and of tapering depth, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. In the manufacture of animal-shoe nails, 
the combination of the two nail rolling and 
forging dies e c, provided with the Working 
grooves c' c', of equal width from end to end 
and having tapering portions c' c, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In the manufacture of animal-shoe nails, 
the combination of the two nail-flattening 
dies cle, substantially as herein shown and 
described. 
4. In the manufacture of animal-shoe nails, 
in combination, the male flattening-die d, 
having the opening d, provided with the 
punch d', and the female flattening-die e, 
having the opening or die e', groove e', and 
plane faces e'e', all substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
5. In the manufacture of animal-shoe nails, 
the duplex nail-flattening clies, combined with 
each other and with mechanism, substantially 
as hercin described, for cutting apart and 
separating the duplex nails, as set forth. 
6. In the manufacture of animal-shoe nails, 
the combination, with the duplex nail-flat 
tening dies and the described mechanism for 
cutting apart said duplex nails, of the nail 
pointing or beveling dies, substantially as 
described. 
7. The four converging dies h ill, com 
bined and arranged with each other to oper 
ate substantially as described, and for the 
purpose herein set forth. 
8. In the manufacture of animal-shoc nails, 
the combination, with the nail-flattening dies, 
of the nail pointing or beveling dies, sub 
stantially as described. 
9. In the manufacture of animal-shoe nails, 
the combination, with the dies for rolling the 
round nails, of the dies for flattening said 
nails, Substantially as described. 
10. In the manufacture of animal-shoe nails, 
the combination, with the dies for rolling the 
round nails and the dies for flattening said 
nails, of the dies for beveling the points of 
said nails, substantially as described. 
11. In the manufacture of animal-shoe nails, 
75 
95 
IOO 
I O5 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
429,036 
the combination of the following instrumen- 
talities, to wit: the dies for rolling the round presence of two witnesses. 
tapering nails, the dies for flattening said 
round nails on two opposite sides to give them 
the proper width and thickness, and the dies 
for compressing and beveling the points of 
Said nails, all co-operating to produce the fin- 
ished nail, substantially as herein described. 
HENRY CHADBOURN, 
M. B. MCMANUS. 
Witnesses: 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
DANIEL E. KEMPSTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429136.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 429,136. 
L. W. & N, LOMBARD. 
BRAIDING MACHINE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 3, 1890, 
OC 
f 
- 
28 
2? 
Av. f. 
27 
37 
a& S. 
33 
37 
23 
as 
2 W %. 1X 
// 37 /A 
36 V'\ 
123 
1Y 
22 
-> 3. 
52, 
2 
6s 
t 
7 
t 
46 go 
2 
37 
7/ 
67 
47 
124s 
-- Y 
224 7 
27 
a. 6 
47 
37 
37/7/13 
37 
2w 
12-g 
3, 
a2. 
27 
as 
23 
C 
A2. (22 7. 
27 
67 
37 
26 
 
so -- 
2 
Wt 
727, 3. 
62. 
O 
3 y 
37 
Zzzezz7: 
Zev W. Zozz77 
Z27%z7zzez-Zwez7% 
&azazz... aet. 
Wrzesses. 
26 af 
6.7 2 
8, /C, 
A. 
- 
as co, PHors-Lithd. wasHINGTON, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
L. W. & N. LOMBARD. 
BRAIDING MACHINE, 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 429,136, 
Patented June 3, 1890. 
 
 
  
 
  
 
Az2 6, 
ov. 7ze c.2, 
A. N. s. 
SIB|ISSNN.Y. 
23/ N. 
/46.<S. 1SISNN N 
3 
 
/ 
3. 
IKH 
: 
III: 
HE 
SSEFEA/a. 
II. 
IZ.I. 
  
 
 
W7%re: 
7% a (7- 
?. K. (34.7- 
Zavezzavis. 
Zeyz WZZozzara/ 
Z27%avaze/Zozzzzz, 
Graae. 26%. 
I, W. & N, LOMBARD. 
BRAIDING MACHINE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet. 3. 
Patented June 3, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 429,136. 
 
 
WZZ72esses, 
2, 3 
8 . /C. i- 
Zzzezz27ts. 
Zev WZwzzra, 
Zzzazzez Zazafarz, 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
LEVI. W. LOMBARD AND NATHANIEL LOMBARD, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
BRADING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,136, dated June 3, 1890. 
Application filed December 21, 1887, Serial No, 258,603, (No model.) 
55 
To all whon it may concern. 
Be it known that we, LEVI. W. LOMBARD 
and NATHANIEL LOMBARD, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Boston, in the 
county of Suffolk and State of Massachusetts, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Braiding-Machines; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to letters or figures of ref 
erence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification, 
Thisinvention relates to braiding-machines, 
particularly that class employed to produce a 
round solid braid or one having a continuous 
solid core, as occurs in covering wire with 
insulating material, and in which a series of 
bobbins or spools carrying yarn or thread are 
caused to traverse about a central point, or 
that where the braid or cord is being formed. 
The object of our invention is to produce 
a braiding-machine which will be capable of 
forming braid very much more rapidly than 
has hitherto been accomplished by the pres 
ent class of machines, wherein the thread 
carrying bobbins or spools have themselves 
been traversed, and where the Wear and tear 
of the machine have been great and the speed 
slow, due to this method of intermittently 
moving and bringing to rest the spools car 
rying the thread. To illustrate the state of 
the art in this respect we would name the 
patent of Charles E. Barnes, October 5, 1880, 
No. 232,920. 
To the end above stated our invention con 
sists in the construction and combination of 
parts hereinafter particularly set forth and 
claimed. 
The drawings accompanying this specifica 
tion represent, in Figure 1, a general plan of 
a braiding-machine embodying our invention. 
Fig. 2 is a diametrical vertical sectional ele 
vation on line acac in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a plan 
of the carrier-plate with the race-plate car 
rier removed. Fig. 4 is a vertical central Sec 
Fig. 5 is a verti 
tion on line / ) in Fig. 1. 
cal sectional elevation of the race-plate car 
rier. Fig. G is a perspective view of the switch 
bar. Fig. 7 is a rear view, and Fig. S a front 
view, both in elevation, of one of the race 
plates. Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8 are all enlarged to 
more distinctly show details of construction, 
as Well as Fig. 9, which is a transverse section 
of the race-plate. Fig. 10 is an elevation of 
the eccentric-rod 17 and the eccentric a, the 
shaft 14 being shown in cross-section. Fig. 
11 is an enlarged view in section showing the 
relative arrangement of the carrier-plate, 
race-plate carrier, switch-bar, and race-plate, 
With the thread passing beneath the latter. 
Fig. 12 is a top view of the race-plate, show 
ing the thread passing between the switch 
bar and race-plate. Fig. 13 is a modified form 
of the race-plate carrier. Fig. 14 represents 
a section transversely of the raceway, show 
ing the switch-bar tilted and in the position 
indicated in Fig. 12. Fig. 15 is a detail view 
of the pivotal connection between the thread 
carrier and its operating-rod, 
In the above drawings, 2 represents a cast 
ing in which is inserted a hollow vertical post 
3, containing a tubular shaft 4, having an en 
larged portion 5, with a beveled gear 6 firmly 
affixed upon it. Above and inclosing said 
shaft is fitted a sleeve-shaft 7. The lower 
end of the latter is furnished with a second 
beveled gear 8, of the same size and with the 
Same number of teeth as the one 6. At the 
upper extremity of the sleeve-shaft 7 is at 
tached a hollow cone-shaped carrier-plate 9, 
the angle of inclination being forty-five de 
grees. Midway upon said sleeve-shaft and 
between the top of the carrier-plate and the 
gear 8 is loosely mounted a reciprocating 
flanged hub 10. 
Suitably Supported upon the journal-bear 
ings 12 13 is a horizontal shaft 14, having a 
pinion 15, which intermeshes with the gears 
68, while a pulley 16 on its outer extremity 
connects by belt or otherwise with some prime 
motor, whereby continuous rotation of said 
shaft is effected. In the rear of the pinion 
15 is an eccentric Cl, which is also mounted 
on said shaft and operates an actuating-rod 
17, the end of which is united with a pin 18, 
secured in the lower part of the flanged hub 
10. Diametrically opposite is a second pin 
19, which serves as a guide and plays in a 
vertical slot 20, formed in the post 21, se 
cured upon the base 2. 
Attached to the upper end of the tubular 
75 
95 
OO 
o 
25 
35 
45 
 
429,136 
3. 
25 
shaft 4 We have Secured a second hollow cone 
shaped race-plate carrier, with the inner sur 
face of the latter coinciding with the exterior 
surface of the carrier-plate. By the above 
arrangement of mechanism, as described, and 
presuming rotation of the shaft 14 is in the 
direction indicated, the tubular shaft 4, gear 
6, and race-plate carrier move (see Fig. 1) in 
direction of arrow 1, while gear S, sleeve-shaft 
7, and carrier-plate 9 revolve in direction of 
arrow 2, both at the same rate of speed. 
Moreover, the flanged hub 10, by means of 
the eccentric-rod 17 and pins 18 19, recipro 
cates freely upon the sleeve-shaft 7. 
Having now described the main operating 
parts, we will now proceed to fully, clearly, 
and completely show the various other instru 
mentalities, their relations one with the 
other, as well as their modus operandi, where 
by a cylindrical cord or braid is manufac 
tured. 
The carrier-plate 9 is a hollow shell or plate 
frusto-conical in shape by cross-section, and, 
as before premised, is securely fastened to the 
top of the sleeve-shaft 7. Exteriorly and ar 
ranged around the lower edge of said plate 9. 
are a series of stationary spindles 66, 67, 68, 
and 69, having thread-carrying spools 23 24 
25 26 mounted on them, these spindles being 
arranged in pairs diametrically opposite each 
other-that is to say, with a quarter of a cir 
cle of interval between spool and spool fol 
lowing the circumference of the circle. Ten 
sion-rods 27 are arranged in close proximity 
to them, one to each on the same side of the 
spool. On the opposite sides of the spools 
from said tension-rods are similarly arranged, 
but at a Somewhat greater distance, the fixed 
hollow tubes or thread-guides 2S, formed with 
diametrical slots 29 extending longitudinally 
thereof. These tubes are inserted through 
the substance of the material composing the 
carrier-plate and are adapted to receive 
thread-carriers 30. The latter consist each of 
a rod having an eye 31 in its free end, which 
plays in the thread-guide, its other end ex 
tending inwardly beneath the carrier-plate, 
and is united with a rocker-arm 32, pivoted to 
an ear 34, cast upon the interior of the car 
rier-plate and located about in line with the 
top of the reciprocating hub 10. Said rocker. 
arm is provided with a short nose or prong 
35, engaging an annular groove 36 in the top 
flange of the hub. Hence upon rotation of 
55 the shaft 14 and reciprocation of the hub 10 
rocking of the arms 32 is effected to produce 
right-line traverses of the thread - carriers 
30. The latter upon their extreme inward 
thrust convey the threads 37 3S 39 40 into 
four slots 41 424345, which are cut radially 
in an annular rib 51, formed upon the carrier 
plate. (See Fig. 2.) 
All the above parts are fixed relatively to 
each other, but have common rotary motion 
imparted to them by the revolution of the 
carrier-plate 9, to which they are secured. 
Hence the threads 373S 39 40 from the spools 
23242520 will always reciprocate in and out 
of the slots 41424345, while the spools them 
selves revolve upon their axes as the threads 
pass off from them. 
Surmounting the carrier-plate and resting 
thereon is placed the race-plate carrier 46, 
similar in form to said plate 9, and with its 
lower portion thickened. (See Fig. 5.) Upon 
the lower edge of this plate 46 are pivotally 
Secured a series of switch-bars 47. The race 
plates are shown at 48, and consist of curved 
plates with two oppositely-disposed L-shaped 
ribs 49 50, longitudinally arranged, and by 
means of which the race-plates are retained 
upon the raceway. The latter consists of an 
annular rib 51, cast exteriorly of the carrier 
plate and above the point of attachment of 
the thread-guides thereupon. In the upper 
face of this rib 51 is cut a continuous cam 
groove 52, while two other grooves cut therein 
engage the ribs 49 50 of the race-plates. The 
race-plates are inserted by means of a remova 
ble plate 90 (see Fig. 14) cut from the annu 
lar rib 51. When the requisite number of 
race-plates have been mounted upon the rib, 
said plate 90 is restored to its proper position 
and secured by screws or otherwise. Thus it 
will be seen that the race-plates travel con 
tinuously upon the carrier-plate, but are given 
rotation in an opposite direction bodily by 
means of the race-plate carrier through the 
interconnecting agency of the switch-bars 47. 
The latter are pivoted tangentially to the 
lower edge of the race-plate carrier, (see Figs. 
1 and 5,) with laterally-projecting roller-pins 
53 set in the forward ends, so called, with 
relation to their rotation, and which, moreover, 
engage in the cam-groove 52. The latter im 
parts rocking motion to said switch-bars, and 
Such movement is effected by the position and 
form of the cam-groove, which serves to de 
press the forward end of each switch-bar just 
prior to its arrival opposite a radial slot 41 
42 43 45. Similarly and upon advance move 
ment of the race-plates the rear end of said 
switch-bar is depressed and at the same point. 
Moreover said switch-bars are provided at 
each end with an ear or stud 54 50, respect 
ively at the rear and forward ends thereof, 
and these alternately co-operate and engage 
in two depressions 5758, cut in the race-plates. 
The rocking motion of the switch-bars before 
alluded to, and caused by the roller-pins 53 
in their passage about the cam-groove 52, com 
pels the studs 54 56 to alternately engage, re 
spectively, in these depressions. Thus when 
one is disengaged the other is in engagement 
with the race-plate. Therefore the race-plate 
carrier is always directly connected with each 
race-plate, and the latter are forced to rotate 
in unison simultaneously and continuously, 
but oppositely to that of the carrier-plate upon 
which they travel. 
Fig. 11 shows the switch-bar about horizon 
tal, as in Fig. 5, with the thread beneath a 
race-plate. In Fig. 14 said switch-bar is in 
the position shown in Fig. 12, with its forward 
35 
45 
75 
CO 
IO 
I I5 
429,136 
8 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
end depressed, the stud 53 being then in the 
portion 67 of the cam-groove. 
Tension-rods 59 are applied to the spools 60 
61 62 63, which are mounted upon spindles 70 
71 72 in parallelism with the angle of inclina 
tion of the periphery of the carrier-plate or 
at right angles to the spindles 66, 67, 68, and 
69, affixed in the said plate. The object of 
this is to enable a large spool to be employed 
on the race-plates, and at the same time cause a 
minimum travel outwardly of the thread-car 
riers, in order to pass over and clear the race 
plates and spools, which necessarily must pass 
therebeneath in one step of the braiding pro 
OESS... . 
In Fig. 4 the shaft 4 is shown as tubular to 
permit the passage upwardly of a continuous 
wire 64, which, for instance, is to be covered 
with some insulating material. This wire is 
provided with a constant feed device to ad 
vance it upward as the braiding is effected, 
while the threads are better positioned, laid 
in place, and brought compactly to the cen 
tral point by means of a removable conical 
cap 65, the central bore of which corresponds 
very closely to the size of the cord in process 
of being formed. 
The operation of the various component 
parts, arranged substantially as hereinbefore 
described and embodying the gist of our in 
vention, and their relations one with the other, 
are as follows, presuming the shaft 14 is in 
active operation, and assuming that the 
flanged hub 10 is in a raised position, with the 
thread-carriers 30 at their extreme innermost 
point, and with the threads from the spools 23 
242526 resting in the radial slots 41424345, 
and extending to a common central point 
the wire 64. Furthermore, the race - plates 
are advancing in the direction indicated by 
arrow 1 on the carrier-plate, which is travel 
ing in the opposite direction, (see arrow 2) 
and are just in the act of crossing said slots 
41 42 43 45 in the annular rib 48, which 
now contain the Series of outer threads. At 
this particular moment the roller-pins 53 in 
the switch-bars are in the part 67 (see Fig. 
3) of the cam-groove, which causes depres 
sion of the forward end of said switch-bars 
and disengages that end from the race-plates, 
thereby forming an aperture between the 
latter and the switch - bars. When the for 
ward ends of said switch-bars are depressed, 
the rear part is tilted up, and the race-plates 
are now driven by the studs 54 engaging the 
depressions or slots 57. As the two plates 
the carrier 9 and race-plate carrier 46-move 
oppositely, the resultant effect is to induce 
the threads from the spools 2324 2526 to pass 
between the race-plates and the Switch-bars as 
the latter rock, thus carrying said threads be 
neath the co-operating threads from the se 
ries of spools on the race-plates. As the ro 
tation of the various parts proceeds, particu 
larly the race-plates, one consequence of the 
advance movement of the latter is to cause 
the roller-pins 53 on the switch-bars to travel 
in the cam-groove 52 toward that portion 
marked 68, thereby gradually raising the for 
Ward end and simultaneously depressing the 
rear end of said switch-bars. At this time 
the forward stud 56 has engaged the cut 58, 
and the race-plates are still united with the 
race-plate carrier. When the pins 53 have 
reached the point 68 of the cam-groove, the 
rear ends of the switch-bars are depressed and 
the race-plates have passed over the threads 
from the spools on the carrier-plate. Imme 
diately upon the completion of this step the 
eccentric-rod 17 actuates and depresses the 
flanged spool 10, which pulls downward the 
nose 35 of the rocker-arm 32. The latter 
thrusts the thread-carriers 30 simultaneously 
outwardly to their extreme positions in the 
thread-guides 28, the threads moving freely 
in the longitudinal slots29. As a consequence 
of this movement, the threads from the spools 
23 24 2526 upon the carrier-plate are so ele 
vated as to permit the next succeeding race 
plate with its thread-carrying spools to pass 
beneath said threads-that is, instancing that 
the thread from spool 25 passed through the 
Switch and beneath the spool. 61 on the race 
plate, the raising of the thread coming from 
said spool 25 will allow the spool 61 and its 
race-plate to pass freely therebeneath, and 
the continuous and successive in-and-out 
movement required in braiding is thereby ef 
fected. Thus the reciprocations of the threads 
from the spools on the carrier-plate are timed 
to pass into a slot in the annular rib and there 
remain at rest, while a race-plate and its 
switch-bar operate to allow its passage be 
tween them and beneath the thread-carrying 
spool on said race-plate. Moreover, said re 
ciprocating threads are further timed to ad 
vance suddenly outwardly and there remain, 
while the next following race-plate and its 
thread-carrying spool pass beneath it. By 
this means an intertwining movement of the 
several threads in the series is effected and a 
continuous braided cord, solid, or one formed 
about a continuous cord or wire, is produced. 
A prominent feature, as before premised, in 
this machine is that the entire series of 
thread-carrying spools have continuous rotary 
movement bodily, and the machine can be 
operated at high speed without any difficulty, 
since it is only necessary to properly time the 
passage of the spools on the race-plates past 
the slots 41 4243 45 in the annular rib on the 
carrier-plate in unison With the right-line re 
ciprocations of the thread-carriers, which con 
trol the threads from the spools fixed on the 
carrier-plate. 
In lieu of employing, a race-plate carrier 
the periphery of which is an imperforate sur 
face, a series of arms diverging from a cen 
tral hub may be employed, in which event 
each of the series of switch-bars is pivotally 
secured to the end of one of said arms. This 
construction is shown in Fig. 13, and is sim 
ply to render the weight of the machine less 
and reduce the cost. 
75 
8) 
9 O 
95 
Od 
IO5 
I IO 
II5 
5 
 
429,136 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5 o 
55 
What we claim is 
1. The combination, with a circular cone 
shaped carrier-plate adapted to receive spools 
and rotating continuously in one direction, of 
mechanism for causing Such rotation, a frusto 
conical race-plate carrier, a series of race 
plates thereon adapted to receive thread-car 
rying spools, mechanism for causing said car 
rier to rotate continuously but concentrically 
with said carrier-plate in an opposite direc 
tion, a series of thread-carriers secured to the 
carrier-plate, and which reciprocate in right 
lines transversely of the path of travel of the 
spools upon said carrier-plate, thereby to di 
rect the threads of this set of spools over and 
under the opposite and co-operating set of 
spools upon the race-plates, and mechanism 
for causing such reciprocation, substantially 
as stated. 
2. In combination with two series of con 
tinuously but oppositely rotating thread-car 
rying spools arranged about a common cen 
ter, mechanism for rotating one of said series, 
a frusto-conical carrier-plate for the other of 
said series, provided with an annular rib hav 
ing radial slots, mechanism for rotating said 
carrier-plate, the thread-carriers movable in 
right lines, and the flanged hub, means for 
moving said hub longitudinally, and oscillat 
ing arms whereby such motion is given to 
said carriers to move the thread in said slots, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a rotary cone 
shaped carrier-plate having an annular rib 
and adapted to carry concentric thread-bear 
ing spools and mechanism for causing such 
rotation, the thread-carriers secured to said 
carrier-plate, their actuating sleeve-hub mov 
able upon the shaft 7, said shaft, and means 
for moving said sleeve-hub thereon, of the 
frusto-conical race-plate carrier moving op 
positely above said carrier-plate, means for 
causing such motion, the series of race-plates 
which engage said annular rib moving there 
on, and the rocking switch-bars, whereby the 
race-plates are interconnected with and ro 
tated by the race-plate carrier, substantially 
as and for purposes set forth. 
4. A continuously-rotating carrier-plate 
adapted to receive a series of spools and pro 
vided with a series of radial slots and an in 
terior cam-groove, in combination with mech 
anism for rotating said carrier-plate, a Series 
of thread-guides secured to said plate, a se 
ries of thread-carriers which reciprocate the 
threads from said spools, oscillating arms 
which actuate said thread-carriers, a movable 
flanged hub engaging and actuating said arms, 
means for moving said hub, a race-plate, an op 
positely-rotating carrier for said plate, means 
for causing such rotation in said race-plate 
carrier, and tangential switch-bars attached 
to the latter carrier and rocked by said inte 
rior cam-groove, said race-plate being en 
gaged and rotated by said switch-bars and 
adapted to receive thread-bearing spools, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
s 
5. In braiding-machines, the combination, 
with a fixed post 3, tubular shaft 4 and its 
operating mechanism, as described, the frusto 
conical carrier-plate 9, affixed to said shaft 
and adapted to receive a series of thread 
bearing spools, and a series of tubular thread 
guides affixed at right angles upon the cone 
periphery of the carrier-plate, of a flanged 
hub 10, the sleeve 7, on which it is loosely 
mounted, mechanism for moving said hub on 
said sleeve, the rocker-arms 32, engaging said 
hub, and the thread-carriers reciprocated 
thereby within the tubular thread-guides 
transversely of the rotation of the carrier 
plate, as and for purposes specified. 
6. In braiding-machines, the combination, 
with a continuously-rotating conical carrier 
plate 9, having the cam-groove 52, annular rib 
51, and a series of radial slots 41 42 43 45 
cut therein, of mechanism for causing such 
rotation, the tubular thread-guides 28, slotted 
lengthwise and affixed at right angles to said 
carrier-plate and the sleeve-shaft 7 of the 
shaft 4, the eccentric a, carried by said shaft, 
the rod 17, actuated by said eccentric, and 
the flanged hub 10, operated thereby to slide 
upon the sleeve 7, the rocker-arms 32, which 
engage said hub, and the thread-carriers 30, 
reciprocating within the tubular thread 
guides and actuated by the rocker-arms, sub 
stantially as stated. 
7. In a braiding-machine, the race-plate car 
rier 46, provided with a series of tangentially 
arranged switch-bars 47, with their pins 53, in 
combination with the carrier-plate 9, having 
an annular rib 51, radial slots 41 42 43 45, 
and cam-groove 52, the race-plate, and mech 
anism for rotating in opposite directions the 
said race-plate carrier 46 and the carrier-plate 
9, these parts 46 and 9 being frusto-conical in 
shape, concentrically arranged, and adapted 
to carry series of thread-bearing spools, and 
the said pins 53 being arranged to travel in 
cam-groove 52, to cause rocking and alternate 
depression of each end of said switch-bars at 
the commencement and completion of the pas 
sage of the latter past the said slots 41 42 43 
45, substantially as specified. 
S. The carrier-plate 9, having an exterior 
annular rib 51, slotted radially at 41 424345, 
the continuous cam-groove 52, and race-plate 
retaining grooves, in combination with the 
race-plate carrier 46, the race-plates 48, which 
travel upon the annular rib 51, the rocking 
tangentially-disposed switch-bars 47, uniting 
said race-plates with the race-plate carrier, 
and mechanism for rotating said carrier-plate 
9 and race-plate carrier 46 in opposite direc 
tions, these parts 9 and 46 being frusto-coni 
cal in cross-section and adapted to carry sc 
ries of thread-bearing spools, as and for pur 
poses stated. 
9. In a braiding-machine, a continuously 
rotary carrier-plate 9, having a rib 51, formed 
with radial slots, and the cam-groove 53, the 
spindles (36, (37, 68, and C9 upon said plate, 
adapted to receive thread-bearing spools, and 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
To5 
IO 
I 5 
I 25 
s 
429,136 
11. In braiding-machines, a carrier-plate 9, 
mechanism which rotates said carrier-plates, 
the thread-carriers 30, the rocker-arms 32, re- having an annular rib 51, formed with a cam 
ciprocating said thread-carriers, flanged hub 
groove and radial slots, and a series of race 
plates 4S, with cuts 5859, traveling upon said 
10, means for reciprocating said hub, a con 
tinuously-rotating race-plate carrier 46, means 
rib, combined with a race-plate carrier 46 and 
the interconnecting switch-bars 47, pivoted 
for rotating said race-plate carrier, a series 
of race-plates traveling upon the carrier-plate 
thereto and provided with lugs 5456 and pins 
53, said lugs alternately engaging said cuts 
and rotated by the race-plate carrier, com 
and the pins with the cam-groove to permit 
bined with a series of switch-bars 47, inter 
certain of the threads ingress beneath or 
Connecting said race-plates and switch-bar 
egress from under the race-plates, for pur 
carrier, said race-plate having lugs 54 56, 
poses specified. 
Which engage the race-plates, and pins 53, 
12. In braiding-machines, a continuously 
which travel in the cam-groove 52, to cause 
rotating carrier-plate 9, having an annular 
rocking of the switch-bars, substantially for 
rib 51 and a cam-groove 52, and the series of 
purposes specified. 
race-plates which travel thereon, combined 
10. The combination, with a continuously 
rotary carrier-plate 9, furnished with spin 
with mechanism for causing such rotation, a 
race-plate carrier 46, mechanism whereby it 
diles 66, 67, 68, and 69, set at right angles to 
actuates said race-plates reversely from the 
its periphery and adapted to receive thread 
moving carrier-plate, and the tilting Switch 
bearing spools thereon, and means for caus 
bars 47, pivoted upon the race-plate carrier 
ing such rotation, of the continuously re 
and engaging the race-plates front and rear, 
Versely-rotating race-plate carrier 46, means 
and provided with pins 53, which workin cam 
for rotating said race-plate carrier, the series 
groove 52, substantially for purposes herein 
of race-plates 48, actuated thereby and fur 
nished with a series of spindles 70 717273, 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
arranged at right angles to the spindles upon 
the carrier-plate and adapted to receive spools 
in presence of two witnesses. 
revolving axially thereon, means intermediate 
said carrier and said race-plate to actuate the 
latter, and mechanism for reciprocating the 
threads from the spools on the said carrier 
plate, substantially as herein stated. 
LEWI W. LOMBARD. 
NATHANIEL LOMBARD. 
Witnesses: 
H. E. LODGE, 
F. CURTIS. 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429236.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 429,236, 
G. M. GRISWOLD. 
PAPER BOX MAKING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 3, 1890, 
 
 
G. M. GRISWOLD. 
PAPER BOX MAKING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented June 3, 1890, 
JIII 
YN. 
 
9 
(No Model.) 
. 
No. 429,236. 
 
 
(a 
s 
(No Model.) 
C., M. CRISWOLD. 
PAPER BOX MAKING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
 
  
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
 
& 
C., M. GRISWOLD. 
PAPER BOX MAKING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented June 3, 1890, 
(No Model.) 
No. 429,236. 
  
 
  
 
 
 
G. M. GRISWOL.D. 
PAPER BOX MAKING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented June 3, 1890. 
 
 
 
I?iNgill 
 
 
g h as s 
E E O) 
 
S.s 
v 
sV 
e 
s 
Hru 
 
ES E s Sas 
(No Model.) 
No. 429,236, 
 
G. M. GRISWOLD. 
PAPER BOX MAKING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented June 3, 1890, 
Sa 
Hi2 2 
SSSSSS 
(No Model.) 
G. M. GRISWOLD. 
PAPER BOX MAKING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
No. 429,236, 
Patented June 3, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
Z 
s 
 
|H N 
I ld 
Glitnes? 
see 
E 
Fiat ill 
(No Model.) 
G M CRISWOLD. 
PAPER BOX MAKING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
No. 429,236. 
Patented June 3, 1890. 
 
 
 
III & 
 
Z 
9 g 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
"ind 
6(2 
2 
 
 
22 
%tee 
W. J, Z2 
422 
%22re 4.9.2-4- 
/poweve/or 
vry 
4, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE M. GRISWOLD, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
PAPER BOX-MAKNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,236, dated June 8, 1890. 
Application fied July 7, 1888, Serial No, 279,266, (No model.) 
5 5 
75 
To all, whom it may conce77: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE. M. GRISWOLD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Haven, in the county of New Haven and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Paper-Box-Mak 
ing Machines; and Idohereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in machines for making 
paper boxes, but more particularly that class 
of boxes used for the packing of cigarettes, 
candies, and similar goods, and which prima 
rily consist of an outer case or covering and 
a drawer, in which the goods are contained 
and which is designed to slide into the case. 
The machine herein described shapes and 
completes the drawer. 
The objects of my invention are, first, the 
formation of the blanks-two at each opera 
tion-from a continuous strip of paper fed 
from a reel or roll to the several combina 
tions of mechanical elements which are to 
operate thereon in its passage through the 
machine; second, to properly apply to the 
paper the glue by which the blanks are 
finally retained in their finished shape; third, 
to print upon each blank as it is fed any mat 
ter-such, for instance, as the manufacturer's 
name and address or the qualntity or quality 
of the goods the box is designed to contain; 
fourth, to automatically crease and fold the 
cut, glued, and printed blank into the shape 
in which it is finally to be retained by the 
glue, and, fifth, to so nest and pack the com 
pleted boxes as they come from the machine 
that the glue which has been applied to them 
may have ample opportunity to set hard and 
firm, and the tendency of the folded box, ow 
ing to the elasticity of the papers, to return 
toward its flat position or out of its folded 
shape in any way be thereby obviated. 
This nesting or packing of the completed 
boxes, as and for the purpose above set forth, 
is most particularly the object of my present 
invention, and I do not wish to be confined 
to the precise details of construction and com 
bination of mechanical devices which I employ 
in this machine for the accomplishment of that 
result, since many changes of the mechanical 
structure may be made without departing 
from the spirit and aim of my invention, 
which contemplates the nesting of each com 
pleted box within the one which has next pre 
ceded it, so that each shall be firmly held as 
against change from its completed form. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in the structure and organization of me 
chanical elements, which I will hereinafter 
fully set forth, and then recite in the claims. 
In order that such as are skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains may fully 
understand my improved machine, I will de 
Scribe the same in detail, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form a part of this specification, and in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my machine; 
Fig. 2, a similar view from the other side; 
Fig. 3, a central vertical longitudinal section; 
Fig. 4, a plan view; Fig. 5, a detail plan view 
of the cutting-block and the folding-plate and 
folding-die; Fig. 6, a bottom plan of the cut 
ter-head and cutters and the folding-plungers. 
The head, Fig. 6, interacts from above down 
ward upon the plate shown at Fig. 5, as will 
hereinafter appear. Fig. 7 is a bottom plan of 
the machine, the printing mechanism being 
removed; Fig. S, a detail of the printing mech 
anism, partly in section; Fig. 9, a detail sec 
tion through the forward end of the folding 
plate, plunger, and folding-dies, and showing 
the carriage upon which the nested boxes are 
supported and carried downward as they 
come from the machine; Fig. 10, a plan view of 
a blank cut to proper form and ready to be 
folded; Fig. 11, a perspective of a number of 
the completed boxes nested and in the posi 
tion in which they lie upon the carriage; Fig. 
12, a partially folded box; Fig. 13, a detail ver 
tical section through the folding-plunger, the 
sliding carriage, and the ways for the latter, 
a number of boxes being shown upon said 
carriage in the position in which they are de 
posited by the plungers. 
Similar reference numbers and letters de 
note the same parts in all the figures of the 
drawings. 
1 is the frame of the machine, and upon an 
extension 2 from the end of the said frame is 
mounted a reel 3, upon which the roll of 
TO 
35 
45 
95 
I do 
2 
429,286 
75 
O 
25 
35 
55 
blank paper is held, and from which it is 
drawn between guides 4 and over a roller 5, 
which is journaled and free to revolve upon 
a shaft whose bearings are in the frame. 
From this the strip lettered a passes upward 
to the printing mechanism and thence to the 
devices, whereby the glue is applied, which 
mechanisms are operated as follows, reference 
being particularly had to Figs. 2, 3, and S. 
(3 is the transversely-extended pulley-shaft 
which receives motion through the baud 
wheel 7 through a suitable clutch S, and 9 is 
a pinion on the pulley-shaft which meshes 
with and drives a geared wheel 10, fast upon 
the main shaft II. The motion of the main 
shaft is in the direction indicated by the ar 
row upon the gear 10 in Fig. 1. 
At the end of the main shaft, away from 
the gear 10, is secured a crank 12, which, 
through a pitman 13, actuates a bell-crank 
lever 14. This bell-crank is pivoted upon a 
short shaft 15, journaled in the side of the 
frame. 
16 is a pawl, which is pivotally secured to 
that arm of the bell-crank operated by the 
pitman. 
17 is a gear Secured upon the shaft 15, and 
18 is a ratchet-wheel secured against the side 
of the gear last referred to. The to-and-fro 
movement which the libell - crank delives 
through the pitman from the main shaft 
auses the pawl to intermittently rotate the 
ratchet by engagement with the teeth there 
of. As heretofore stated, the gear and ratchet 
wheels are secured together, so that the latter 
partakes of the Salme degree of rotation as the 
former. The printing-roller 21 is driven by 
the gear 17 through a smaller gear 19 upon 
the same shaft 20 as said printing - roller. 
Upon the periphery of the said printing-roller 
are arranged in any ordinary manner suita 
ble types for effecting the printing operation. 
Said types print against the surface of a 
platen-roll 21", over which the paper passes. 
22 is an ink-fount suitably secured upon 
the end of the bed. Within the fount is jour 
naled a roll 23, which acts as a distributer 
for the fount, and receives a slight intermit 
tent rotary movement from a small ratchet 
and-pawl mechanism which I have thought 
it unnecessary to specially describe, but is 
shown at 24, Fig. 2. 
The ink is taken from the distributer by a 
small roller 25, journaled in a novable frame 
26 at the under side of the bed of the machine, 
and by means of a spring 27 said roll is nor 
mally held in contact with an intermediate 
roller 2S, whicl latter rotates against a roller 
29. The inking mechanism just described is 
driven by a small belt 30, which is shown as 
passing over shaft (3, but which may equally 
as well be connected to any constantly-rotat 
ing shaft in the machine. The roller 29 takes 
ink from the roller 2S and supplies it to the 
type-bearing roller. While the roller 25 is in 
contact with roller 2S, which contact is ef 
fected by the action of the spring 27 on the 
frame, it revolves with it by friction and im 
parts ink thereto. At each turn of the ma 
chine, however, said roller 25 and its frame 
are carried along longitudinal of the bed 
against the action of the spring and into con 
tact with the distributing-roll in the fount. 
This is effected by means of a toothed wheel 
31, secured upon and carried by the shaft 15, 
and which by engagement with a tooth or 
pawl 32 on the frame carries the latter along 
beneath the bed until the roller engages with 
the distributer in the fount and receives there 
from a portion of ink. When the wheel by 
continued rotation passes out of engagement 
with the pawl, the frame and roll are re 
turned to their normal position by the spring 
27 and the ink derived from the fount trans 
mitted to the intermediate roller, as hereto 
fore described. 
The intermediate roller 2S has its bearings 
beneath the bed of the machine, and for the 
purpose of more effectual distribution it is 
given a slight traversing movement from a 
pivoted bent lever 40, which is actuated by a 
cam 41, secured to and carried by the toothed 
wheel 10. 
33 is the glue-fount, to which heat is supplied 
by suitable steam-connections 34. A shaft 
35 is journaled across the top of the glue-fount, 
and upon said shaft are secured printing 
arms 35, which take up glue as they revolve 
through the fount and apply it from their faces 
to the paper strip as the latter is drawn over 
them. Said arms are so placed on the shaft 
and the shaft so driven that the glue is printed 
upon the strip at the proper places relative to 
the cutting and folding operations to which 
it is subsequently subjected. The shaft de 
rives an intermittent rotation from the bell 
crank lever 14 through the pitman 36 by 
means of a rachet-wheel 37 and a pawl 3S. 
The ratchet-wheel is fast on the shaft and the 
pawl pivoted upon a crank 39, whose end is 
attached pivotally to the extremity of the 
pitman, and which is also loosely journaled 
upon the shaft 35. From the glue-printing 
devices the strip passes Outward and around 
a tension-roller 42, journaled upon a standard 
or support 43 at Some little distance from the 
machine. The object in carrying the strip 
outward and around this roller is to give the 
freshly-applied glue an opportunity to set 
somewhat before the paper is operated upon 
by the cutting and folding devices. After re 
turning from the roller to the machine the 
strip is introduced upon the flat top of the 
bed and passes between guides 44 to the 
slitting and feeding roller's 45, which divide 
the paper longitudinally into two strips of 
equal width, and also by their grasp upon 
said paper feed it along intermittently as is 
required. 
The slitting operation is necessary, since in 
the machine shown and described herein the 
operating mechanism is in duplicate and 
simultaneously produces boxes at each opera 
tion. The slitting and feeding rolls just re 
95 
Od 
I o5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
429,286 
3 
IC 
I5 
2 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
ferred to are journaled one above the other, 
the under roll with its periphery just flush 
with the surface of the bed. The lower roll 
is driven from the gear 17 through the gear 
46, which by engagement with a duplicate 
thereof imparts Synchronous movement to 
the upper roll. 
47 is the slitting-knife, which is secured 
about the center of the upper roll. 
It runs 
against a shoulder upon the lower roll and 
thereby severs the paper by a shear cut. 
When the paper has been slitted, the rolls 
feed the two strips forward beneath the cut 
ting-dies, which descend and blank out the 
paper into the shape shown at Fig. 10, those 
portions which constitute the scrap or waste, 
and are driven downward and permitted to 
escape through openings in the cutting-block, 
which appear at Fig. 5 and are numbered 49. 
The die, simultaneously with the blanking 
operation, cleases the blank in the proper 
places for the folding up thereof into com 
pleted form, as shown by dotted lines at Fig. 
10. Flat springs 50, secured to the face of 
the dies, serve to hold the cut blanks down 
upon the bed as the dies ascend. 
The blank 
ing operation forms the blank complete, ex 
cept that it does not sever it from the strip 
at the line a, Fig. 10. Said blank is left, thus 
connected, so that it may be fed forward with 
the strip by the push of the feeding-rolls into 
position for the final operation of folding, 
The final severing is effected simultaneously 
with the bending up of the sides and ends of 
the blank by the plungers. 
The downward-cutting movement of the 
dies 4S, whereby the blank is cut as afore 
said, is effected through a lever 51, which is 
hung longitudinally beneath the bed, and is 
operated in proper time by its engagement 
through a stud with a profile cam 52 on the 
main shaft, a cross-head 53, and links 54, 
which connect the ends of the cross-head with 
the cutter-head 55, on which the dies are 
mounted. The said cutter-head slides upon 
Ways formed on the upward extension 56 on 
the frame. When the blanking-dies have 
been raised out of engagement with the cut 
ter-block, the shaped blank is fed along to a 
position over the folding-dies 57. (Shown at 
Fig. 5.) 
It is here proper to state that the folding 
of the blank shown at Fig. 10 into the shape 
shown at Fig. 12 is accomplished by first 
trimming the ears. A upward at right angles 
to the face of the blank and then bending 
the side flaps B, of which the ears A form a 
part, upward at right angles to the blank. 
This last operation leaves the ears. A pro 
jecting inward across the face of the blank 
and edgewise toward it. . The creased end 
apron C is then folded upward and its end 
flap, to which the glue has heretofore been 
applied, as described, doubled over upon itself 
and upon the ears A, whereby the box is re 
tained in the position shown at Fig. 12. The 
upward turning of the ears A is effected by 
means of folding-feet 58, which are formed 
upon the die-block and move with said block. 
As will be understood, the operation of the 
feet upon the blank is always one step be 
hind that of the cutting-die-that is to say, 
their operation upon the cut blank is simul 
taneous with the cutting out of the next suc 
ceeding blank from the strip. These folding 
feet bend up the ears A against the edges of 
blocks 59, below the plane of which the faces 
of the feet pass in their descent. 
Having performed the operation of folding 
the ears upward the feet ascend with the cut 
ter-head, and the plungers 60, whose shape is 
shown in the plan view, Fig. 6, descend upon 
the blanks and drive the latter down into the 
folding-dies shown at Fig. 5. This operation 
turns up the edges B and the end flap C, and 
causes the ears. A to assume the edgewise po 
sition toward and across the face of the 
blank shown at Fig. 12. A small straight 
edged cutter S0, secured at the rear of each 
plunger on the cutter-head, severs the blank 
finally from the strip previous to the down 
Ward action of the plungers. 
In Figs. 5 and 9 are shown springs S7, se 
cured at the sides of the die-openings. The 
function of these springs is to elevate the 
strips of paper between and at the sides of 
the blanks, So that said strips may not be car 
ried downward by the plungers. 
The plungers are mounted upon extremi 
ties of rods 62, supported in guideways in the 
upward extension of the frame. The proper 
ly-timed vertical reciprocation of these rods 
is obtained from a profile-cam 63 on the main 
shaft through a lever 64, operated by said 
cam through a stud or roll connection, an up 
wardly-extended connecting-rod 65, a rock 
arm 66, to which said rod is attached, a jour 
naled rock-shaft 67, upon which the arm 66 
is mounted, and an arm 68, Which is connected 
to a cross-head 69, secured to the plunger 
rods. 
After the blank has been driven down into 
the folding-die, there remains only to fold the 
glue-coated apron C over upon itself and 
upon the inwardly-turned ears, so that the 
glue, by adhesion to the parts just specified, 
may hold the box in shape. This folding 
operation is effected by means of a pair of 
folders 79-One for each box-which are 
operated from beneath the bed. These fold 
ers are shown at Fig. 9, and their move 
ment and method of operation are as follows: 
They have a quadruple movement-first, up- - 
Ward to a plane higher than the edge B of 
the box as it lies in the die; second, forward 
toward and past the edge of the box to turn 
over the end of the apron; third, downward 
to complete the folding of the end of said 
apron, and, fourth, backward to firmly com 
press the turned, folded, and glued end of 
Said apron against its own lower portion and 
against the inwardly-turned ears, so that the 
ears and the double end of the box formed 
by the apron are firmly held together by the 
75 
Iod 
O 
II5 
I 25 
429,236 
O 
2 5 
35 
45 
glue. As the side flaps IB are connected by 
the ears to the end of the box (see Fig. 12) 
they are thereby held in their bent position 
at right angles to the bottom of the box. It 
will be perceived that the front ends of the 
plungers are cut away as to their central 
portions, so as to leave only the narrow pro 
jections 85. (See Fig. 6.) The folders work 
between these projections, while the plun 
gers still hold the boxes firmly in the dies. 
The upward movement of these folders is de 
rived from a calm 70 on the main shaft, through 
a lever 70, which is operated by said cam 
like the levers heretofore referred to, and 
whose end projects under and is adapted to 
raise the standard 71, on which the folders 
are mounted. The lower end of this stand 
ard has a sliding connection with two pins 
72, mounted upon a rock-shaft 73, and this 
shaft receives from a lever 74, operated by a 
calm 74 on the main shaft, the movement 
which it imparts in the form of forward and 
back motion to the folders. Thus the com 
bined action of the two cam-actuated evers 
just described imparts to the said folders the 
compound movement whereby the final hold 
ing is effected in the box. The varying po 
sitions of the folders is shown in dotted lines 
at the detail, Fig. 9. When the box has been 
thus folded in the die, its bottom rests upon 
a small carriage 75, which is adapted to slide 
upon an inclined way 76, and is normally 
held against the bottom of the lower most box 
by the pull of a counter-weight 77. The box 
first made, as will be readily understood, rests 
directly upon this carriage. The second is 
thrust into the first, the third into the second, 
&c., and as the boxes are thus piled one 
within another (see Fig. 11) the carriage is 
forced downward along its way against the 
pull of the counter-weight and forming a sup 
port for the stack or nest of boxes. The boxes 
are prevented from rising off the carriage by 
a shield 7S, which projects downward paral 
lel to the ways upon which the carriage runs. 
When the carriage has been pushed to the 
end of its track by the boxes, those at the 
bottom may be removed, and the carriage will 
be drawn upward against the now shortened 
pile of boxes, so as to support them. I find, 
however, that it is unnecessary in practice to 
remove the boxes, since they will, after the 
carriage and way are filled, rise over the end 
of the carriage and fall by gravity into a 
basket or other receptacle prepared for them. 
By this means the freshly-glued boxes are 
tightly held in the pile for a period of time 
sufficient to allow the glue to set firm and 
hard enough to obviate any danger of the 
box ungluing or becoming misshapen by the 
elasticity of the paper. 
In the operation of the machine it is to be un 
derstood that the intermittent movements by 
which the printing-roller, the gluing mechan 
ism, and the feeding and slitting rolls are 
actuated are all so timed as to admit of the 
properly-timed action of the blanking and 
the folding mechanism. The feeding and 
slitting rolls, operated as hereinbefore de 
scribed through the bell-crank lever 14 and 
the parts 15, 16, 17, and 18, draw forward the 
paper strip, and during this forward feeding 
the printing and the application of the glue 
are effected. Meanwhile the blanking and 
folding mechanisms are at rest. When the 
feeding ceases, the cutter-head descends and 
blanks the strip, and simultaneously the 
folding-feet bend up the ears on the blank 
cut out by the previous operation of the dies. 
Then as the cutter-head ascends the plungers 
descend and force the blank just operated on 
by the folding-feet into the die, where, before 
the plungers recede, the folders complete the 
box. Then the feeding recommences and 
the blank paper for the next box is brought 
under tie (lie and the cut blank fed forward 
for the folding devices. 
I claim as of my invention 
1. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination, with the blanking and fold 
ing devices, of an open die, and a folding 
plunger adapted to co-operate with said die 
for the folding of the box, a movable car 
riage, and a way upon which said carriage 
may travel located beneath the plane of the 
die and adapted to support the boxes as the 
same are folded and thrust downward, and 
means whereby said carriage is upheld against 
the boxes and is caused to ascend into con 
tact with said boxes when a portion of the 
latter have been removed, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination, with the folding-plunger, and 
the open-bottomed die adapted to co-operate 
with said plunger, of an inclined way be 
neath said die, a carriage mounted upon said 
Way, means for imparting to Said carriage a 
movement toward the top of the way, and a 
shield adapted to engage the pile of boxes 
from above, substantially as described. 
3. The carriage located beneath the open 
bottomed folding-die and adapted to receive 
the boxes as the latter are thrust downward 
through the die, as described, in combination 
with the ways upon which said carriage is 
supported, and the counter-weight whereby 
said carriage is 1normally held at the top of 
the ways beneath the die, substantially as set 
4. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination, with the open-bottomed die 
and the folding mechanism operating con 
jointly there with, of a carriage arranged in a 
plane beneath the die and adapted to move 
both downward and outward away from said 
die, ways upon which said carriage is sup 
ported, and means for imparting upward 
movement to said carriage, substantially as 
set forth. 
5. The combination, in a machine of the 
character described, with the feeding and slit 
ting rolls intermittently operated upon the 
bed, of the blanking die and block arranged 
forth. 
- 
75 
OO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
I 30 
429,286 
7 O 
75 
behind the rolls and adapted to blank the 
strip, the folding-feet secured upon the cut 
ter-head and moving therewith, and the ver 
tically-moving folding-plungers and the ec 
centrically-operating folders arranged to act 
upon the box Seriatin after the operation of 
the folding-feet, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the intermit 
tently-operated feeding and slitting rolls, of 
the vertically-reciprocating cutter-head ar 
ranged behind the said rolls and carrying 
both the cutter - dies and the folding-feet, 
the vertically - reciprocating plungers, the 
open-bottomed die, into which said plungers 
descend, the eccentrically-movable folders op 
erated from below the bed of the machine, 
and the movable carriage arranged beneath 
the die and upon which the boxes are suc 
cessively nested or packed by the plungers, 
Substantially as set forth. 
7. In a machine of the character de 
Scribed, the combination, with the feeding 
rollers and the cutting devices carried upon 
said rolls, and whereby the strip of paper is 
longitudinally divided, of the vertically-actu 
ated cutter-head carrying the blanking-dies 
and creases and the severing-knife and hav 
ing the feet for effecting the preliminary fold 
ing mounted thereon, the vertically-actuated 
plungers, the folding-dies, into which the 
plungers descend to fold the box, the folders 
having the fourfold motion, whereby the end 
of the box is folded and secured, and the car 
riage arranged beneath the folding-die, where 
on the completed boxes are deposited in nested 
form, substantially as shown and described. 
8. In a paper-box-making machine, the com 
bination, with the folding-die and a plunger 
adapted to force the blanks downwardly into 
Said die, of an inclined way extending down 
Ward and outward beneath said die, a car 
riage having a floor parallel to the face of the 
die and arranged upon said way, means for 
imparting movement to said carriage, and a 
shield extending downward and outward 
above Said Way and adapted to retain the 
nested boxes upon the carriage, substantially 
as specified. 
9. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination, with the open-bottomed die 
and the plunger operating in conjunction 
therewith, of a movable carriage arranged 
beneath said folding-die, the ways upon which 
Said carriage is mounted, the shield arranged 
above the carriage for the holding of the boxes 
thereon, and means, as a counter-balance, 
whereby said carriage is normally retained 
beneath the folding-die at the top of its ways, 
substantially as specified. 
10. The combination, with the blanking and 
folding devices, substantially as specified, of 
a carriage arranged beneath the folding-die, 
an inclined way upon which said carriage 
may travel, and means, as a counter-Weight, 
whereby said carriage is normally retained 
at the top of its track, the floor of said car 
riage being so placed relative to the Ways as 
to be parallel to the plane of the folding-die, 
whereby a flat surface is afforded for the Sup 
port of the boxes, substantially as described. 
11. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination, with the feeding and slitting 
rolls and means for imparting thereto an in 
termittent rotary movement, of the support 
for the roll of blank paper, a pair of printing 
rollers engaging and adapted to print the 
strip, a glue-printing wheel adapted to Oper 
ate upon said strip and to impart glue there 
to, and a tension-roller separated a little dis 
tance from the machine and over which the 
strip may pass, whereby the glue and ink 
may become somewhat set prior to the action 
of the forming devices, substantially as set 
forth. 
12. The combination, with the plungers and 
the folding-dies within which said plungers 
descend, said plungers having projections S5, 
of the folders and their standards, and the 
duplex cam and lever system arranged be 
neath the bed, and whereby the compound 
folding movement is imparted to the folders, 
Substantially as specified. 
13. The combination, with the folders and 
their standards, of the cam-actuated rock 
shaft 73, upon which said standards are sup 
ported by a sliding connection, said rock-shaft 
adapted to impart to said standards and fold 
ers their to-and-fro movement, and a cam-act 
uated lever projecting under the said stand 
ards and whereby the vertical movement is 
imparted thereto, substantially as specified. 
14. The combination, with the plungers hav 
ing the projections 85, of the folding-dies, 
within which said plungers descend and fold 
the box, the eccentrically - actuated folder's 
arranged at the end of the folding-dies and 
adapted to operate between the projections 
to complete the folding of the apron, and the 
movable carriage arranged beneath the fold 
ing-dies and whereon the boxes are deposited 
by the plungers and upheld during the ac 
tion of the folders, as set forth. 
15. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination, with the folding-die and the 
plunger adapted to co-operate therewith, of 
an upwardly-projecting folder arranged at 
the forward end of the die and provided with 
a depending portion adapted to operate on 
the end flap of the box, and means, as de 
scribed, whereby said folder is operated to 
effect its required four movements, substan 
tially as specified. 
16. The combination of the cutting devices, 
the plunger, the die located beneath the lat 
ter, the four-motion folder, and the movable 
carriage upon which the boxes are deposited, 
substantially as set forth. 
17. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination, with the folding-die and the 
reciprocating plunger adapted to co-operate 
with said die, said plunger being cut away at 
its forward end, of folding devices adapted 
to act upon the end flap of the box and op 
erating in the cut-away portion of the plun 
95 
TOO 
Io5 
IC) 
I I5 
I 25 
15 
2 o 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
429,236 
ger, and means, as described, whereby the front of the die-block, and the folder arranged 
prope' lanovements of the folder are effected, 
at the end of the plunger and adapted to oper 
Substantially as described. 
ate upon the end flap of the box, substantially 
1S. In a machine for making paper boxes, 
as described. 
the combination, with the open folding-die, 
22. In a machine of the character described, 
the plunger adapted to co-operate there with, 
the combination, with the support for the roll 
and means for operating the plunger, of the 
of paper, and means, as described, whereby 
vertically-reciprocating die-block, cutting de 
said paper is conducted to the operating de 
Vices Secured upon said block, and folding 
vices and is drawn forward, of the glue-fount 
feet carried by said die-block, adapted to turn 
33, secured to the frame of the machine, a gluc 
up the ears A of the blank, substantially as 
printing wheel journaled across the glue-fount 
described. 
and having radial glue-printing arms adapted 
19. In a machine of the character described, 
to take up glue from the fount, and to imprint 
the combination, with a die-block provided 
said glue upon the surface of the traveling 
With blanking-dies, and also with mechanism 
strip, a ratchet secured upon the glue-wheel 
for effecting apartial folding of the blank cut 
shaft, a pawlengaging said latchet, and means, 
by said dies, of a folding-plunger and a die 
as described, connected to the operating mech 
adapted to co-operate therewith, said folding 
anism of the machine for imparting to said 
plunger adapted to operate one step behind 
wheel through said pawl a rotary movement, 
the cutting-dies, substantially as described. 
Substantially as set forth. 
20. In a machine of the character described, 
23. In a nachine of the character described, 
the combination, with the die-block having 
the combination, with the open-bottonned ?lie, 
thereon means for blanking and for severing 
the plunger adapted to force the cut blanks 
and for partially folding the stock, and means 
downwardly into said die, and the folding 
for imparting vertical reciprocation to said 
mechanism, of a carriage arranged beneath 
die-block, of a folding-die located in the path 
the die and adapted to receive and support 
of the stock and ahead of the blanking-die, 
the boxes in nested form as said boxes are 
a plunger adapted to co-operate with said die, 
thrust downward, said carriage having liberty 
and means, as described, whereby said plum 
of movement downward and outward from 
ger is operated alternately with the die-block, 
beneath said die, whereby piles of boxes of 
Substantially as described. 
various heights may be supported. 
21. In a machine of the character described, 
In testimony whereof Ia?ix my signature in 
the combination, with feeding- rollers, and 
presence of two witnesses. 
means for imparting thereto an intermittent 
movement, of a die - block having suitable 
blanking-dies located in front of the feeding 
rollers, a folding-die and a folding-plunger 
adapted to co-operate therewith and located in 
P. H. IIUBBARD, 
C. G. COOKE. 
(EORGE M. GRISWOLE). 
Witnesses: 
45 
55 
5 
O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429336.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 429,336. 
L. H. CLARK, 
DEVICE FOR MANIFOLD COPYING, 
Patented June 3, 1890. 
928) twossos 
zeza 8-ca. 
 
3v-uov to 
38 1. 8ttovic; 
The NORRIS FTCRS co, HoTo-LITHo, washingtoN, D. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIE HENRY CLARK, OF DEN VER, COLOR ADO. 
DEVICE FOR MANIFOLD COPYING. : 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,336, dated June 3, 1890. 
Application filed November 25, 1889, Serial No, 331,515, (No model.) 
- 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LOUIEHENRY CLARK, of 
Denver, in the county of Arapahoe and State 
of Colorado, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Devices for Manifold 
Copying; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
devices for manifold copying, the object being 
to facilitate the preparation of duplicate and 
triplicate copies of Writing by the use of a 
single carbon sheet; and with this end in view 
my invention consists in a book having long 
and short leaves alternately bound between 
the covers, the short leaves preferably being 
of transparent material, and the long leaves 
are divided through the middle by perfora 
tions and are printed on opposite sides, so 
that when folded together the printed blanks 
are on the same side, with the short tissue 
leaves between the folds. When folded in 
this manner, a carbon sheet carbonized on 
both sides is placed between the tissue sheet 
and the fold made by the outer end of the 
leaf, thus making a copy on the outer end of 
the leaf and the back of the tissue sheet, 
which latter may be read through the leaf. 
The invention further consists in certain 
novel features of construction and combina 
tions of parts, as will behereinafter described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a view in perspective of my improved book. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional view. Fig. 3 is a modi 
fication in which the outer end of the leaf is 
folded beneath the stub, with carbon between. 
A. A represent the covers of the book be 
tWeen Which the leaves arebound. The leaves 
are preferably of two distinct varieties, as 
shown, and alternately arranged. The long 
leaves are divided by the perforations 11 
into two equal-sized leaves 23, which have 
their blanks printed on opposite sides, so 
that when they are folded together they are 
both the same side up. The alternate leaves 
66 are of thin or tissue paper and bound se 
curely between the covers. These leaves are 
half the size of the long or double leaves and 
adapted to take the copy upon their backs. 
The sheet 7 is carbonized on both sides, and 
to take a copy or two copies, as is usually in 
tended, the carbon sheet is placed behind the 
tissue or small leaf, and the outer portion 3 
of the long leaf in front of this tissue leaf is 
bent around back of the carbon sheet. The 
Writing is then done in the usual manner by 
making the marks on the portion 2 of the 
folded long leaf. This is the original copy. 
Another one is made on the corresponding 
side of the portion 3 of the long leaf, and a 
third copy is made on the back of the tissue 
sheet. Now the object of the transparent 
leaf is made obvious, for it is essential that 
this copy be read through the paper, the im 
print being on its back; hence a thin or tissue 
paper is generally employed. The tissue 
leaves may be made detachable at the stub, 
and the long leaves are provided with the 
perforations at the division-line only and not 
at the stub. Although the double sheet may 
be removed entirely, the tissue sheet is in 
tended to remain in. 
The books may be used for any business 
for which such articles are employed, and they 
are printed to suit the business; but they 
are particularly useful for memoranda, Sale 
books, shipping-books, bill and receipt books, 
delivery-books, &c. 
It is evident that slight changes might be 
resorted to in the form and arrangement of 
the several parts described without departing 
from the spirit and scope of my invention, 
and hence I do not wish to limit myself to 
the particular construction herein set forth; 
but, 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In devices for manifold copying, the com 
bination, with a leaf divided into two or more 
similar portions adapted to be folded back of 
each other, of a transparent leaf and a car 
bon sheet carbonized on both sides, adapted 
to be folded between the portions of the long 
sheet, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a pair of covers, 
of long and short leaves bound between the 
covers, the long leaves made in two or more 
similar portions separated by perforations 
S. 
W 
s 
 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
r - 
429,886 
and having blanks adapted to lie beneath 
each other when the portions are folded to 
gether, Said short sheets being transparent, 
and a carbon sheet carbonized on both sides 
and adapted to be folded with the transpar 
ent leaves between the folds of the long 
leayes, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a pair of covers, 
of long and short leaves bound between the 
COverS, the long leaves made in two or more 
similar portions separated by perforations 
and having blanks adapted to lie beneath 
each other when the portions are folded to 
gether, said short sheets being transparent 
and detachable at the stub, and a carbon 
sheet carbonized on both sides and adapted 
to be folded with the transparent leaves be 
O 
tween the folds of the long leaves, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with a leaf adapted to 
have its outer end folded back of the stub 
end, of a removable carbon sheet to be in 
serted between these folds, whereby impres 
sions made on the stub end are duplicated On 
the portion folded beneath this stub portion, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
pad 25 
LOUIE HENRY CLARIK. 
Witnesses; 
R. W. STEWART, 
J. N. BILLINGS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429436.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 429,436, 
H. L. GILLETTE. 
RAILWAY BEDDING, 
Patented June 3, 1890. 
- A-Z-A- ? 
ZZZ22(ZZZZZZZZ2224227.222 e2e. 2ZZZZ 
2, 
(NSSNS N. Sy 
RXXXX Ea 
--ala- 
were 
 
. 
% --- 
f 
%-47 
 
  
aSSSaxy,323 
22344242.4% 
S3ESS2 2. NES 
&f f NA N 
SYS 
Z2 2% 7 
12 S&S SS 
. 
- 
... 
-- 
N 
3 
6,364. 2.4-2. 
4, 24. Z72 avea aor. 
lay 6/244-62.----, 
s7etoppa eyS, 
} Zrzzosses. 
THE NORRIS PEERs co, photo-Litha, washington, d, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY L. GILLETTE, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK, 
RAILWAY-BEDDING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,436, dated June 3, 1890. 
Application filed February 27, 1890, Serial No, 342,009, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, Luhon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, HARRY L. GILLETTE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Buffalo, in the county of Erie and State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Railway - Bedding, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved rail 
way-bedding, and has for its object to pro 
vide a firm and solid road-bed which is read 
ily replaced or renewed when necessary and 
which is comparatively inexpensive. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a portion of my improved bed 
ding. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal section 
thereof in line v v, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a cross 
section in line a ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a cross 
section in line y 1, Fig. 2, on an enlarged 
scale, showing the construction of the Sup 
ports of the stringer-plates. Fig. 5 is a hori 
Zontal section of the support in line 22, Fig. 
4. Fig. 6 is a cross-section in line 2' 2", 
Fig. 1. 
Iike letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the Several figures. 
AA represent the rails, which are of ordi 
nary construction. 
B represents metallic bed or stringer plates 
extending lengthwise of the rails and form 
ing the immediate supports of the rails. An 
intervening space of about a foot is prefer 
ably left between every two plates on the 
same side of the road-bed, and the plates are 
preferably made about ten feet in length and 
considerably wider than the base of the rails, 
so as to have a broad bearing upon the ground 
or ballast. The stringer-plates on opposite 
sides of the road-bed are connected together 
in pairs by angle-bars or cross-stays b, which 
are riveted or otherwise secured to the ends 
of the plates on the under sides thereof. 
These stay-bar's firmly connect together the 
plates of each pair and retain the same in 
their proper relative position parallel to each 
other. In the drawings the rails are repre 
sented as being secured to the stringer-plates 
by clamping-plates c, which overlap the base 
of the rails; but they may be fastened in any 
other suitable manner. Each stringer-plate 
is provided centrally on its under side with a 
vertical longitudinal rib or flange d, which 
extends to the stay-bars b, as shown. 
E represents vertical frames or supports 
sustaining the stringer-plates at intervals and 
which rest upon cross-ties or sleepers F, em 
bedded in the ground, the supports on oppo 
site sides of the bed being located directly op 
posite each other and resting upon the cross 
tie. Each stringer-plate is preferably sus 
tained by two of these supports arranged near 
opposite ends of the plates, as shown; but a 
greater number may be employed, if desired. 
These supports preferably consist of a trian 
gular frame secured at its base to the em 
bedded cross-tie and open at its upper end to 
form upwardly-converging legs, which grasp 
or embrace the longitudinal flanges d of the 
stay-plates on opposite sides, as represented 
in Fig. 4. These legs are provided at their 
upper ends with outwardly-projecting hori 
Zontal lips or flanges g, which bear against 
the under side of the stringer-plates and are 
secured to the latter by clips or clamps h, 
which embrace the lips g with their cross 
bars, as represented in Figs. 2 and 4. The 
legs of these clips, to which the screw-nuts are 
applied, preferably pass through the adjacent 
clamping-plates C of the rails, as represented 
in the drawings, so as to serve the double 
purpose of securing the lips of the triangular 
Supporting-frames to the stringer-plates and 
fastening the rail-clamping plates c in place. 
The intermediate clamping-plates of the rails, 
located between the triangular supports, may 
be fastened to the stringer-plates by similar 
clips c.', as shown. 
The legs of the triangular supports E are 
preferably provided with longitudinal flanges 
i, which bear with their upper vertical edges 
against opposite sides of the longitudinal 
rib of the stringer-plates, as represented in 
Figs. 4 and 5. These flanges aid in firmly 
holding the rib of the stringer-plates between 
the legs of the triangular support and also 
serve to stiffen the support. 
The stringer-plates are preferably stiffened 
or re-enforced midway between their triangu 
lar supports by inclined braces i, which are 
secured at their upper ends to the under side 
of the stringer-plates and at their lower ends 
to opposite sides of the longitudinal flange of 
the stringer-plates, as illustrated in Fig. 6. 
By my improved construction the stringer 
plates, in addition to the firm support afforded 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
95 
IOO 
2 
429,486 
75 
o 
to the same by the embedded cross-ties and the passage of the rolling-stock over the rails. 
intermediatetriangular frames, are supported 
I claim as my invention 
upon the ground or ballast, which latter is 
1. A railway-bedding composed of discon 
packed or rammed under the comparatively 
nected sections, each consisting of a pair of 
wide stringer-plates, thus providing a double 
stringer-plates arranged on opposite sides of 
support for the bed, which, while having con 
the road-bed and connected together by stay 
siderable solidity, does not render the bed 
bars, vertical frames or supports sustaining 
unduly rigid. The rail-joints should break 
the stringer-plates at intervals, and cross-ties 
joint with the spaces between the adjacent 
supporting the vertical frames on opposite 
ends of the stringer-plates, being preferably 
sides of the road-bed, substantially as set 
located at or near the center of the plates, so 
forth. 
that the pounding which is produced by the 
2. The combination, with the stringer-plates 
rolling of the load over the rails at the meet 
provided on their under sides with a longi 
ing ends of the rails will be distributed over 
tudinal rib or flange, of embedded cross-ties 
the stringer-plates. 
and intermediate supporting-frames resting 
In ordinary road-beds having wooden cross 
upon the cross-ties, supporting the stringer 
ties the joint between two rails is located 
plates at intervals, and provided with arms or 
upon a single tie, and the pounding upon the 
legs which embrace the flanges of the string 
joints is received almost wholly by the nar 
er-plates, substantially as set forth. 
row tie, so that in course of time the tie be 
3. The combination, with the stringer-plate 
comes considerably depressed and the level of 
provided on its under side.with a longitudinal 
the line destroyed. 
rib or flange, of inclined braces connecting 
In my improved bed the pairs of stringer 
the stringer-plate and its rib, vertical sup 
plates on opposite sides of the road-bed, to 
porting-frames sustaining the stringer-plate 
gether with the stay-bars and supports, each 
and provided with arms or legs which embrace 
constitute a solid section of the road-bed, and 
the flange of the stringer-plate, and embedded 
by thus constructing the bed in sections the 
cross-ties upon which said supporting-frames 
pounding at the rail-joints is received by a 
rest, substantially as set forth. 
support of considerable area, which is not as 
4. The combination, with the stringer-plates 
likely to be depressed as the ordinary cross 
provided on their under sides with a longi 
tie, thereby increasing the durability of the 
tudinal rib or flange, of embedded cross-ties, 
road-bed. 
intermediate supporting-frames Sustaining 
The construction of the bed in disconnected 
the stringer-plates at intervals and having 
sections enables impaired sections to be readily 
arms or legs embracing the flanges of the 
renewed or replaced without disturbing other 
stringer-plates and provided with lips which 
sections, which is an important feature in case 
rest against the under side of the stringer 
apart of the road-bed is impaired or destroyed 
plates, and clips or fastenings whereby said 
by an accident. 
lips are secured to the under side of the 
In addition to these advantages my im 
stringer-plates, substantially as set forth. 
proved bed dispenses with a large number of 
5. The combination, with the rails, the 
cross-ties, as the embedded vertical supports 
stringer-plates, and the clamping-plates 
of the bed, by reason of the presence of the 
whereby the rails are secured to the stringer 
stringer-plates, may be located at greater in 
plates, of embedded cross-ties, intermediate 
tervals than in ordinary beddling having 
vertical supports sustaining the stringer 
wooden surface ties, thereby effecting a con 
plates at intervals and having arms or legs 
siderable saving in ties. 
provided with lips resting against the under 
The sections forming the road-bed are light 
side of the stringer-plates, and clips embrac 
and compact in construction, and while the 
ing the lips of said supporting-frames, and 
first cost of the bed may be somewhat greater 
serving at the same time to fasten the adja 
than that of the ordinary road-bed composed 
cent rail - clamping plates to the stringer 
wholly of wooden cross-ties, this is fully com 
plates, substantially as set forth. 
pensated for by the increased solidity and 
Witness my hand this 24th day of Febru 
durability of the bed and the facility with 
ary, 1890. 
which it is replaced. 
If desired, a layer of paper, wood, cloth, or 
other non-metallic material may be inter 
posed between the base of the rails and the 
stringer-plates to deaden the noise caused by 
CARL F. GEYER, 
ALICE G. CONNELLY. 
HARRY L. GILLETTE. 
Witnesses: 
s 
s 
95 
IOC 
To5 
IEO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429536.txt	(N0 Model. ) 
- 
G. H. KING, 
SASH ATTACHMENT, 
No. 429,536, 
Patented June 3, 1890. 
R 
 
a 
Elisa PEEZ 
r 
N 
t N 
 
 
 
S. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE HENRY KING, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI. 
er 
SASH ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,536, dated June 3, 1890. 
Application filed August 3, 1889, Serial No, 819,663, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE HENRY KING, 
of Kansas City, in the county of Jackson and 
State of Missouri, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Sash. Attach 
ments; and Idohereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Sashattachments whereby sashes are adapted 
to tilt, and more particularly being an im 
provement in the construction of the sash 
guide section as described in Letters Patent 
in improvement in windows, No. 363,397, and 
granted May 24, 1887. 
The object is to provide a sash attachment 
as an article of manufacture, simple in con 
Struction, inexpensive and well adapted to 
receive the sash-cord, and easily attached to 
old sashes already in use as well as to new ones. 
A further object is to guard against the 
carelessness of mechanics in making clumsy 
knots in the sash-cords which protrude and 
rub against the window-jamb. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combination of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view of the sash attachment, showing the 
interior construction. Fig. 2 is the same view 
as Fig. 1, with exception of the connection of 
the Sash-cord, which shows the attachment 
reversed when used with the upper sash. Fig. 
3 is a view of the connecting-rod of the at 
tachments when used in conjunction with 
Wide sashes. Fig. 4 is a perspective view of 
the Sash-cord attachment; and Fig. 5 is an ele 
vation of part of the attachment, showing the 
cord. 
A. A represent the attachments, each of 
which has a mitered end a, which makes a 
joint With the sash. 
The letters b b b represent lugs, preferably 
integral with the attachments, around which 
the Sash-cord is placed in a zigzag manner 
and thus secured against endwise displace 
ment Without the use of a knot, 
C is the perforation in one end of the at 
tachment for reception of sash-cord. 
- 
Drepresents the perforation which receives 
the sash-pivot, which is preferably an ordi 
nary wood-screw, No. 16 or 18 wire, and e 
shows the perforation for reception of the 
connecting-rod. 
The lettersff findicate the lugs, around 
which the sash-cordisplaced when the attach 
ment is used with the upper sash. 
H H represent the left and right handed 
screw ends of the connecting-rod. This rod 
or bar extends from one guide-section to the 
other and may be made in a single piece with 
right and left screw-threads at its outer ends. 
This rod or bar closes into a rabbet , formed 
in the upper rail of the upper sash and the 
lower rail of the lower sash. 
In the construction as shown in Fig. 4 the 
end of the attachment is mitered as the most 
approved way of making a joint with the Sash; 
but it is evident that it may be rabbeted, be 
made perfectly square across the end or in 
any other approved manner without depart 
ing from the scope of my invention, as the 
joint is covered by a thickened stop, as ex 
plained in a former patent, as here within re 
ferred to; and in same manner and for said 
reason the attachments may be made with 
rabbeted joints or with projecting edge its 
full length instead of smooth surface, making 
face-joint with sash, as here shown. 
Having in aforesaid patent granted May 
24, 1887, No. 363,397, fully described the con 
struction of sashes for the reception of the 
guide-sections and the relative length of the 
same, what I claim as new, and desire to Se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A sash attachment consisting of a frame 
having a perforation therein for the passage 
of an attaching device and provided with 
lugs projecting alternately from opposite 
sides of the frame, the said lugs having blunt 
bearing-surfaces around which the sash-cord 
is passed, substantially as set forth. 
2. Asash attachment having one perforated 
end, and at a suitable distance therefrom a 
perforation for reception of sash-pivot, and 
at opposite end a perforation for the recep 
tion of a connecting rod or bar, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. A sash attachment having a perforation 
for the reception of a sash-pivot, a perforation 
in one end for the reception of the sash-cord, 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
95 
CO 
2 
429,536 
4. A sash attachment having a perforation passes, substantially as set forth. 
5 connection at one end, and a perforation at specification in the presence of two subscrib 
and lugs over which the sash-cord is adapted ternately from oppositesides thereof, the said 
to pass, Substantially as set forth. 
lugs having blunt edges over which the cord 
for the reception of a sash-pivot, a zigzag cord- 
the opposite end for the attachment of a con-ing witnesses. 
necting-rod, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with a sash, of attach- 
ment secured to the opposite sides of the 
Io sash, each attachment consisting of a hollow 
frame having a Series of lugs projecting al- 
WALTER M. LAMKIN, 
H. J. BARTON. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 15 
y 
GEORGE HENRY KING. 
r 
T 
- 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429637.txt	G. PHILION 
WOOD RIM PULLEY. 
Patented June 10, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 429,637, 
 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
T?? 
as perers cc., rioto-LTHo., WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE PHILION, OF MISHAWAKA, INDIANA. 
WOOD-RIM PULLEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,687, dated June 10, 1890. 
Application filed June 28, 1888, Serial No. 278,499, (No model.) 
55 
To all ??h???, i? ??? concer?: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE PHILION, of 
Misha Waka, in St. Joseph county, in the State 
of Indiana, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Wood-Rim Pulleys; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full 
and accurate description of the same. 
This invention relates to the means for at 
taching or anchoring the outer extremity of 
each spoke or arm to the rim of the pulley. 
In the patent granted to Dodge and Philion 
July 4, 1882, numbered 260,462, the end of 
the spoke entered a notch cut in the rim of 
the pulley and was fastened there with glue 
and nails. In the patent granted to Wallace 
H. Dodge, assignee of Charles McNeal, Octo 
ber 19, 1886, No. 301,064, the arm or spoke 
Was dovetailed at its end and entered a cor 
responding mortise in the rim. It was sol 
idly fastened there by a wedge and glue. In 
the patent granted to Wallace H. Dodge Au 
gust 31, 1886, No. 348,269, the ends of iron 
spokes are provided with dovetailed or other 
undercut form of lugs placed transversely 
across the ends of said spokes. These lugs 
enter corresponding notches in the rim and 
are Secured thereby some solidifying plastic; 
but it will be observed that in neither one of 
these does the anchoring member extend lat 
erally into the substance of the rim beyond 
the lateral side of that part of the arm which 
enters the rim. 
The invention herein described and claimed 
differs from the above named in the particu 
lar alluded to .. abovei. e., the end of the 
arm is embedded in the rim and anchored 
there by a transverse anchor-pin or dowel, 
which is solidly attached to or integral with 
the Substance of the arm and extends later 
ally therefrom into the adjacent material of 
the rim, as clearly shown in the accompany 
ing drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 shows in perspective one-half of 
a pulley having a wooden rim and metallic 
arms, the same being partly in section to show 
the end of the spoke-arm embedded in the 
substance of the rim. Figs. 2, 3, and 4 rep 
resent modified forms of said anchoring por 
tion of the spoke-arm. Figs. 5 and 6 are 
transverse sections of a wooden rim, showing 
the metallic arm embedded and anchored 
therein, Fig. 7 is a transverse section of a 
wooden rim, showing the end of a wooden 
arm and transverse rigidly - attached dowel 
embedded in said rim. 
A is the rim of the pulley, built up of circle 
segments and firmly united together, as is 
customary. BB are spokes or arms of Wood 
or metal joined together at a hub in the cen 
ter of the pulley. At their outer ends the 
spokes B are embedded in the rim A, which 
is easily done in the progress of building up 
said rim out of the circular segments; but 
the rim may be finished and mortised before 
the spokes are inserted, if preferred. The 
proper way, however, is to build the rim to 
the plane of the spokes and then insert said 
spokes, completing the rim afterward, and 
thereby completely embedding the ends of 
the arms and firmly anchoring them in Said 
IIIY., 
The end of the spoke is anchored by one 
or more laterally-extended studs or pins C, 
which are either integral with the Substance 
of the spoke or are solidly and rigidly at 
tached thereto. These studs or pins extend 
from the side of the spoke into the material 
of the rim and serve to increase the surface 
of contact and at the same time render With 
drawal impossible. These results are not at 
tained when the spoke is perforated and a 
bolt or pin. is put through said perforation 
into the rim, because said bolt, not being rig 
idly attached to the arm, does not extend its 
surface of contact with the rim. A wooden 
pin driven tightly into the wooden spoke with 
glue will be practically homogeneous with said 
arm and will be rigidly and firmly attached 
thereto. The lateral extension of the anch 
oring - pins into the material of the rim 
where the same is unsevered by the mortise 
which admits the arm Secures an anchorage 
where the rim is of full strength. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The rim. A and shouldered arms B, em 
bedded at their ends in said rim, and having 
the transverse anchoring-pin Crigid with Said 
arms and extended laterally into the mate 
rial substance of the rim, substantially as set 
forth. - 
2. The rim A and arms embedded in said 
rim, and each arm provided with one or more 
lateral pins or dowels integral with said arm, 
as set forth. 
-'' 
- 
75 
85 
9o 
OO 
O 
2 ? 
35 
45 
2. 
429,637 
3. A pulley having a rim and shouldered the integral transverse anchoring-pins C ex 
arms, the latter embedded at their outer ends tended laterally into the material substance 
in said rim and provided with integral trans- of the rim. 
verse anchoring-pins extended laterally into 
4. The rim. A and shouldered arms B, em- 
bedded at their ends in said rim, and having 
WILL W. DoDGE, 
D. O. EONIDA. 
5 the material substance of the rim. 
Witnesses: 
? 
GEORGE PHILION. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429737.txt	(No Model.) 
IMPRESSION DEWICE FOR MATRIX MAKING MACHINES. 
C. L. REDFIELD. 
No. 429,737, 
Patented June 10, 1890. 
l SSSSSSS 
FAAAAAAN 
M NSNSS 
 
 
f 
 
  
  
 
 
 
2 /7 
See AAAAAA2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CASPER L. REDFIELD, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE CHICAGO MATRIX MACHINE COMPANY. 
IMPRESSION DEVICE FOR MATRX-MAKING MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,737, dated June 10, 1890. 
Application filed April 3, 1889, Serial No, 305,882, (No model, 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CASPER L. REDFIELD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Min 
neapolis, in the county of Hennepin and State 
5 of Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Impression Devices 
for Matrix-Making Machines, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to devices for operat 
Io ing a plunger to impress type-dies into a ma 
trix-body. 
The object of the invention is to improve 
the plunger-reciprocating devices, whereby 
an intermittent reciprocation is given the 
I5 plunger, and but one plunger thrust can be 
made upon each die presented to the plunger. 
These improvements will be hereinafter 
fully described, and particularly pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
my improvements are illustrated, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section of the devices and of a portion 
of the machine-frame. Fig. 2 is a plan view 
of the plunger-operating clutch and the de 
25 Vices for engaging it; and Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 
show plan and elevation views in detail of 
said clutch. 
In said drawings, 1 designates a portion of 
the upper part of the machine-frame, and 2 a. 
3o vertical shaft rotated by any suitable mech 
anism. On the lower end of this shaft is 
formed or secured a clutch-box, composed of 
an upper portion 3, fast on the shaft, and a 
lower sliding portion 4, and extending through 
35 the clutch and into the shaft 2 is a spindle 5, 
carrying the plunger-head 6, and secured to 
the sliding box 4. On the spindle within the 
clutch-box is a coil-spring 7, having its upper 
end attached to the fast portion 3 of the 
4o clutch and its lower end to the sliding por 
tion 4, and serving both to hold the clutch 
faces in engagement and to return the lower 
member to its original position after it has 
been caused to slide therefrom. On the pe 
45riphery of the lower portion 4 of the clutch is 
a pin 8, which, when engaged to stop rotation 
of the lower portion of the clutch, causes the 
upper portion to ride on the inclined surfaces 
of the lower, and thus causes the descent of 
5o the latter to produce the plunger thrust. To 
engage the pin 8 there is provided a stop 9, 
carried in a tubular guide-frame 10, that is 
hung on a pivot 11, and is provided with an 
adjusting-screw 12 at the lower side, and is held 
against the screw by a spring 13 at the oppo- 55 
site side. TBy this arrangement the stop 9 can 
be made to engage the pin S at a higher or 
lower point, as may be desired, to produce a 
shorter or longer thrust. The stop 9 is car 
ried on a stem 14, that extends longitudinally 6o 
through the guide-frame 10 and carries on its 
end a head 15. A spring 16 in the guide 
frame exerts its force against the stop 9, tend 
ing to thrust it outward toward the clutch. 
The stop is held from engagement with the 65 
pin by a spring-catch 17, that engages the 
head 15 of the stem carrying the stop. To 
release the engagement of this catch 17, there. 
are provided an electro-magnet 18 and an ar 
mature 19, that carries a spring-hammer 20. To 
When the current is completed through the 
magnet and the armature is dra Wn to it, the 
spring -hammer 20 delivers a blow to the 
spring-catch, releasing it from engagement 
with the head 15, and immediately upon de- 75 
livering its blow the hammer, by reason of 
its resiliency, rebounds from contact with the 
catch-spring, so that for one electrical contact 
there will be but one blow of the hammer for 
releasing the catch 17. 
The clutch-box being rotated rapidly, and 
the spring-catch 17 being released from en 
gagement, the stop 9 is thrown outward by 
the spring and engages the pin S and holds it - 
and the box member 4 stationary while the 85 
upper portion 3 makes so much of a rotation 
as is necessary to cause the lower portion 4 to 
descend far enough to slide the pin 8 past the 
stop 9, and the stop being then free from the 
pin is engaged by the inclined projection 21 9c 
on the lower clutch portion 4, which is then 
being carried forward by the spring 7, and 
the stop is thus moved backward sufficiently 
for the catch 17 to engage and hold it. The 
spring 7 serves also to draw the lower box 95 
portion back to its original position of en 
gagement with the upper portion 3. 
If desired, the clutch-box can be provided 
with two pins 8 and two inclined surfaces 21 
for insuring quicker engagement. The ten- Ioo 
2 
429,737 
sion of the spring 7 can be regulated by giv 
ing the lower box portion a half-turn in the 
proper direction to tighten or loosen the spring. 
Instead of an electro-magnet and armature for 
operating the spring-hammer 20, it or equiva 
lent devices may be operated by other me 
chanical means. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
1. In a matrix-making machine, an impres 
sion device consisting of a clutch-box having 
a constantly-rotating and an intermittingly 
roating member, a connecting-spring there 
for, a plunger, a projection, and an incline 
carried by the latter member, and a spring 
stop for engaging in turn Said projection and 
incline, for the purpose set forth. 
2. A plunger-operating device for a matrix 
making machine, consisting of a rotating 
clutch-box having upper and lower portions 
connected by a spring, a spring-stop for stop 
ping the rotation of the latter, a catch for 
holding the stop from engagement, and a re 
bounding knocker for releasing the catch, for 
the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the clutch-box 
carrying the plunger and having a pin on its 
reciprocating member, of the stop for engag 
ing the pin, and the adjustable guide-frame 
for the stop for regulating the extent of the 
plunger thrusts, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a matriN-making machine, a rotating 
impression device, a spring-stop therefor, a 
catch for holding the stop, a rebounding 
knocker for releasing said catch, and an ar 
mature and electro-magnet for actuating the 
knocker, substantially as set forth. 
5. In combination, a rotary impression de 
vice, a stop therefor, a catch for the stop, an 
electro-magnet, and an armature carried on a 
spring-knocker arranged to strike a blow to 
release the catch and rebound from it, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. In a matrix-machine, a rotary impres 
sion device consisting of a two-part clutch 
box, one member of which carries a plunger 
and is adapted to reciprocate when inter 
cepted, a spring-actuated stop for engaging 
such member to intercept its rotation, and de 
vices provided on the part engaged for re 
turning the stop to initial position when ro 
tation is resumed, and a catch for holding the 
stop when so returned, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. In a matrix-making machine, the com 
bination, with an impression device adapted 
to reciprocate a plunger upon being engaged 
by a stop, of a reciprocating stop for engag 
ing the same, a catch for holding the stop 
from engagement, and a rebounding knocker 
O 
25 
35 
So 
55 
for releasing the catch, substantially as set 
forth. 
8. The combination, with a clutch-box hav 
ing a continuously-rotating member and an 
alternately rotating and reciprocating mem 
ber, the latter having on its surface a shoul 
dered and an inclined surface, of an axially 
guided reciprocating stop for engaging Said 
shouldered surface to produce a thrust and 
in turn engaging said inclined surface to 
cause the retraction of the stop, substantially 
as set forth. 
9. In a matrix-machine, a rotating impres 
sion device adapted to reciprocate upon be 
ing intercepted, a spring-operated intercept 
ing device, a catch for holding it from en 
gagement, means for releasing the catch, and 
means provided on the part engaged by the 
stop for returning it to its catch upon the 
completion of a thrust of the impression de 
vice, substantially as set forth. 
10. In a matrix-machine, a rotative impres 
sion device composed of a two-part clutch 
box, one member having a lug on its periph 
ery, a stop-pin adapted to be projected in the 
path of the lug, and means whereby the en 
gagement of the lug and stop-pin will cause 
the impression device to make an axial thrust 
of definite length and return instantly to its 
rotative position, substantially as set forth. 
11. In a matrix-machine, a freely-rotating 
impression device, a reciprocating stop-pin 
for causing it to make single thrusts of defi 
nite length, and means whereby the adjust 
ment of the stop-pin may be made to vary the 
length of the plunger thrusts, substantially 
as set forth. 
12. In a matrix-machine, an impression de 
vice having uniform axial movement, a stop 
ping device fol' controlling its reciprocations, 
and a rebounding knocker co-operating there 
with, substantially as set forth. 
13. In a rotative impression device having 
one member adapted to reciprocate when in 
tercepted, a projection thereon, and a stop 
ping device arranged to be interposed in the 
path of Said projection and to remain station 
ary while the latter slides entirely across its 
surface, substantially as set forth. 
14. The combination, with a rotative im 
pressing device adapted to reciprocate when 
intercepted, of a stopping device therefor and 
a lug having engaging surfaces arranged to 
be in rubbing contact during a plunger thrust 
and to separate with the completion of the 
thrust, substantially as set forth. 
CASPER L. REDFIELD. 
Witnesses: 
IP. II. GUNCKEL, 
E. M. SCHUMANN. 
75 
95 
IOO 
IIO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429837.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 429,837, 
H. L. BEACH, 
SAWING MACHINE. 
Patented June 10, 1890. 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
/7) 
724 26.2%, - 
2) 
BY 
C-66 vce 224/Y66 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY LLOYD BEACH, OF MONTROSE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SAWING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,837, dated June 10, 1890. 
Application filed January 2, 1890. Serial No. 335,575, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY LLOYD BEACH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Montrose, in the county of Susquehanna and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Sawing-Ma 
chines, of which the following is a full and 
clear description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
Sawing-machine embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a transverse sectional view of the 
same on the line XX of Fig. 1. Figs.3 and 4 
are details of one means of locking the car 
riage to the main frame. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in sawing - machines, 
and especially to that class adapted for cross 
cutting and slitting purposes; and my inven 
tion consists in the constructions and com 
binations of devices which I shall hereinaf 
ter fully decribe and claim. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will now describe its 
Construction and indicate the manner in which 
I carry the same out. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
frame-work of any desired and appropriate 
construction, having fitted to the upper por 
tions of its sides suitable track-irons B, which 
may be fixed to the frame or may be fitted 
thereon to have a vertical movement, for a 
purpose I Will hereinafter make known. 
Upon the top of the frame A is placed a 
bed or carriage C, whose surface is slotted to 
receive the upperportion of the saw D, which 
is mounted on an arbor E, journaled below 
the bed or carriage in suitable boxes or bear 
ings C. Cin the main frame, the said arbor car 
rying a pulley E", to which power is applied 
in any well-known manner to rotate the saw 
at a high rate of speed. 
The bed or carriage C is provided at or near 
its sides with track-irons F, and between these 
track-irons and the track-irons on the main 
frame I interpose free rolling bearings, each 
consisting of a shaft G, having no fixed bear 
ings, but having a free rolling movement, and 
each shaft being unconnected with the oth 
ers, so that the movement of one shaft is not 
controlled or affected by the others. These 
shafts may be grooved or have fixed to one 
end a flat roller II and to the other a grooved 
roller H', which lies between the adjacent 
faces of the track-irons B and F, respectively, 
so that the groove in the shaft or face of the 
roller will be engaged by said tracks, thereby 
dispensing with two rollers at each end of 
the shafts or with double grooved or faced 
rollers, and simply fixing and cheapening the 
construction of the machine. This manner 
of mounting the bed or carriage provides for 
an easy movement of the same, reducing to a 
minimum the friction between the track-irons 
and dispensing with the power which has 
heretofore been necessary to move the bed or 
carriage upon its ways or tracks. 
While the track-irons B on the frame A 
may be constructed similar to those on the 
bed or carriage, nevertheless I prefer to make 
them substantially as shown in Fig.1, Where 
they are shown as each forming part of a 
single casting having its front portion pro 
vided with a curved slot b, through which 
and across the frame the rod C passes, having 
at one end a head c' and at the opposite end 
a nut or hand-wheel c' for clamping the track 
irons B, and from the track-irons of the frame 
extend projections cl, which are arranged at 
the ends of the tracks and serve as Stops to 
limit the movements of the shafts or rollers, 
while other stops on the carriage limit the re 
ciprocating movements of the bed or carriage. 
Journaled in the upper portion of the main 
frame and near the front and rear portions 
thereof are two shafts II, whose opposite 
ends have secured rigidly to them one end 
of suitable links J, whose opposite ends are 
secured pivotally upon pins or studse, pro 
jecting from the track-irons B, and to the 
shaft is keyed or otherwise rigidly secured 
an arm K, which extends downwardly and 
has an opening in its lower end to receive and 
pivotally secure a threaded bearing, through 
which the lower end of a screw-rod L passes, 
said screw-rod having its upper end passing 
through a pivoted bearing in a casting M on 
the front of the main frame A and provided 
with a hand-wheel N, as shown. From the 
description of these parts it will be seen that 
when the hand-wheel is turned the screw-rod 
L works through its bearings, thereby raising 
the arm IK and rocking the shaft in its bear 
o 
75 
95 
Od 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
2 
429,837 
3O 
35 
55 
75 
ings. This movement raises the links J at 
the front portion of the machine and thereby 
forces the track-irons upward, (the hand 
wheel having been first released,) causing the 
rear links J to likewise move upward, and the 
track-irons and the bed or carriage, and in 
terposed roller-bearing to be adjusted verti 
cally with such relation to the saw that I am 
enabled to regulate under all possible condi 
tions the depth of cut of said saw. 
The track-irons B may be fixed instead of 
movable, and the machine may be almost in 
stantly converted from a crosscut-machine 
to one adapted for slitting purposes by 
simply locking the bed or carriage to some 
part of the main frame A-say to the front 
portion of the track-iron IB-by means of a 
pivoted hook, (see Fig. 4.) slotted link, and 
set-Screw, or other Well-known means engag 
ing a stud or projection X on the carriage. 
The bed or carriage may also be provided 
With any desired form of gage. 
A machine constructed as previously de 
Scribed is compact, may be cheaply con 
Structed, and combines the function of a cross 
cutting and slitting machine,while the mount 
ing of the bed or carriage enables the oper 
at or to move the said carriage toward the 
saw with but little effort, even when the car 
riage is heavily laden. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a sawing-machine, 
of a main frame, a carriage or bed, means for 
detachably connecting the carriage or bed 
with the main frame, whereby said carriage 
or bed may be moved or rigidly held, and 
rollers or wheels between the carriage or bed 
and main frame, said rollers having no fixed 
bearings. 
2. The combination, in a sawing-machine, 
of a main frame, a vertically-adjustable car 
riage or bed, means for temporarily locking 
the carriage to the frame, whereby the ma 
chine is adapted for cross-cutting and slitting 
purposes, and a free l'oller - bearing between 
the carriage or bed and frame, said bearing 
consisting of shafts with fixed end rollers and 
each shaft being independent and uncon 
nected with the remaining shafts. 
3. The combination, in a sawing-machine, 
of a main frame having movable track-irons, 
a bed or carriage having fixed track-irons, 
shafts without fixed bearings having rollers 
provided with grooves in which lie the track 
irons of the main frame and carriage, a Saw 
arbor and saw, and means for communicating 
power thereto, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, in a sawing-machine, 
of a main frame having track-irons adjust 
ably secured thereto, means for adjusting 
said irons, a bed or carriage having track 
irons, shafts beneath the bed or carriage hav 
ing no fixed bearings and provided with roll 
ers at the ends having grooves engaging the 
track-irons of both the carriage and main 
frame, stops for limiting the movement of the 
rollers and carriage, and means for locking 
the carriage to a part of the main frame, 
whereby the machine is adapted for cross 
cutting and slitting purposes, substantially 
as described. 
5. In a sawing-machine, the combination of 
the main frame, the track-irons fitted thereto, 
having curved slots in the forward end, a rod. 
passing through the slots and having a hand 
wheel, the shafts I and I', having links or 
arms pivotally secured to said track-irons, 
an operating-screw and connection with the 
shaft I for raising the track-irons vertically, 
a bed or carriage having track-irons, shafts 
with no fixed bearings beneath the carriage 
having a roller on each end engaging the 
tracks of the frame and carriage, and means 
for locking the carriage to the frame when 
necessary, substantially as described. 
6. In a sawing - machine, the main frame 
having adjustable track-irons and a carriage 
having fixed track-irons immediately over 
and in line with the track-irons of the main 
frame, in combination with a free rolling 
bearing between the carriage and main frame, 
consisting of unconnected shafts having no 
fixed bearings, said shafts carrying upon 
their ends rollers having grooves common to 
both tracks, substantially as described. 
HENRY LLOYD BEACH. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. WARNER, 
W. B. DEANS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US429937.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 429,937, 
 
J. MITCHELL. 
CORRUGATED STRUCTURE, 
Patented June 10, 1890. 
WITNESSES 
(2F (CAC-to- 
 46%rve() 
By 
INVENTOR. 
2 
slunge, 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES 
t 
JOHN MITCHELL OF AUCKLAND, NEW ZEALAND. 
coRRUGATED STRUCTURE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 429,937, dated June 10, 1890, 
Application filed May 28, 1889, Serial No. 312,385, (No model.) Patented in New Zealand May 22, 1888, No. 3,000 in Victoria 
September 27, 1888, No. 6,217, and in New South Wales October 1, 1888, No. 972, 
55 
65 
75 
- 
O. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that, JoHN MITCHELL, of 
Auckland, New Zealand, have invented a new 
and useful Inprovementin Corrugated Struct 
ures, (for which I have obtained Letters Pat 
ent in New Zealand, dated May 22, 1888, No. 
3,000; in New South Wales, dated October 1, 
1888, No. 972, Book 2, and in Victoria, dated 
September 27, 1888, No. 6,217) of which the 
Fellowing is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
This invention, while more particularly de 
signed to be applied to corrugated metal roof. 
ing, and it will here be described more espe 
cially with reference to such use, is suitable 
for any structure or portion of structure in 
which corrugated sheets of iron, brass, steel, 
paper, or other material is required to be fixed 
or supported in place by under or backing 
strips, on or against which said corrugated 
sheets rest, and to which they may be secured 
by any suitable means. Thus the invention 
may not only be applied to the roofs of build 
ings, but also to car-roofs, ceilings, walls, 
fences, and other structures, regardless of 
their shape, which and the corrugated sheets 
used in the structure may either be of a 
plane, curved, or spherical form. 
The object of the invention-as, for in 
stance, applied to iron roofing for buildings 
is to provide a solid support for the corru 
gated sheets composing such roofing, in order 
to give them firmness and strength and to 
lessen the liability of their spreading, being 
depressed, dinted, or shaking with the wind, 
or of being bruised, either when punching 
holes in the sheets for the introduction of 
retaining screws or nails or by treading on 
them, erecting a superstructure on them, or 
by subjecting them to pressure of different 
kinds from any cause. These are more par 
ticularly the objects of the invention; but 
there are others or further special advan 
tages, as hereinafter referred to, which are 
also obtained. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction and arrangement of the corrugated 
sheets upon the corrugated battens, which 
will hereinafter be fully described in the an 
nexed specification and particularly pointed 
out in the claim, 
- 
Reference is to be had to the accompany 
ing drawing, which represents a view in per 
spective of a corrugated-metal roof in part 
with my invention applied. 
AA indicate certain of the corrugated 
metal sheets used in the construction of the 
roof, and B B the corrugated battens, upon 
which said sheets at their under or rear sides 
are secured and supported, said battens being 
arranged to cross the corrugations in the 
sheets and being themselves corrugated trans 
versely of their length. The corrugations in 
sheets A are of a less depth than the corru 
gations in the battens, whereby an open Space, 
as c, is formed at the base of the corrugations 
for a purpose hereinafter explained. 
CC are purlins carrying the battens; or 
they may be supported by boards D, (shown 
by dotted lines) or be otherwise carried and 
secured in place. 
The battens B, having a corrugated sur 
face, as described, may be made of Wood or 
any other suitable material, and the corruga 
tions be formed in them by any suitable 
means or in any desired manner. Nails b, 
screws, or other fastenings may be used to 
hold the corrugated sheets to their places 
upon the corrugated battens. The corrugated 
sheets being thus solidly supported upon and 
secured to the corrugated battens, they will 
not only be better protected against disturb 
ing and deflecting influences, as hereinbefore 
named, and leakage, shaking, and destruc 
tion, or alterationin shape beguarded against, 
but passage of wind and fire and entry of 
birds and vermin will be more effectually 
avoided; also, the nails or fastenings used to 
secure the corrugated sheets to the corru 
gated battens will be less liable to rust, and 
may be fewer in number, and better provision 
consequently be made for expansion and con 
traction of the sheets. 
The corrugated battens may be made in 
any convenient or desired lengths and of any 
suitable size and shape, and be fixed to the 
purlins, framing, rails, studs, rafters, or board 
ing by nails or otherwise. 
The attachment of the corrugated sheets 
to the corrugated battens may be by nails or 
by any other means-such, for instance, as 
corrugated roofing has been heretofore se 
90 
95 
Od 
3O 
35 
45 
5 
O 
cured by to different supports; but in my in 
vention the corrugations in the sheets are ar 
ranged so that they will correspond with and 
nearly fit the corrugations of the battens, and 
thus cause the latter to give the necessary 
support at every fastening, and to receive the 
indents or burrs caused by punching the 
sheets, with holes adapted to receive the se 
curing means, such as screws or nails, and 
which by my invention may be driven close 
home. 
In practice I make the corrugations in the 
battens a little wider spaced than the corru 
gations in the sheets to allow for lateral 
stretching of the corrugated sheets in han 
dling and fixing, thereby reducing trouble 
or labor in applying the sheets, and to a cer 
tain extent saving metal. Furthermore, by 
making the depressed portions of the battens 
a little deeper than the depressed portions of 
the sheets, as shown at c in the drawing, the 
sheets will rest only on the raised portions of 
the battens, and a space will be left between 
the depressed portions of the sheet and bat 
tens for the unobstructed passage of con 
densed moisture or 'sweat into the eaves 
spout of the building. Such construction also 
25 
429,937 
Numerous other advantages might be 3 
permits of ample ventilation beneath the cor 
rugated sheets. 
..named for my invention; but it is unneces 
sary to do so here. 
Having thus described myinvention, what 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
3. 
The hereinbefore-described improvement 
in corrugated structures, consisting of a series 
of purlins or supports, as C, corrugated bat 
tens, as B, supported thereon, having trans 
verse coincident corrugations or depressions, 4c 
and corrugated sheets, as A, supported on 
said battens, the corrugations in said sheets 
being of a less depth than the corrugations 
in the battens, whereby an open space, as c, is 
formed at the base of the corrugations for the 45 
passage of condensed moisture or sweat and 
for ventilation, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. JOHN MITCHELL. 
Witnesses: 
IHETHEN CoNNELL, 
Justice of the Peace, Auckland. 
ARTHUR M. EAMANDs, 
Clerk, Auckland. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430037.txt	(No Model.) 
A. PARTRIDGE, 
LOOM SHUTTLE 
No. 430,037, 
Patented June 10, 1890. 
 
a 
Y 
N 
N. 
. 
. e2 
S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDEREW PARTRIDGE, OF SPRING FIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO BENJAMIN F. PEET, OF SAME PLACE. 
LOOM - SHUTTLE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 430,037, dated June 10, 1890. 
Application filed March 3, 1890, Serial No, 342,361, (No model.) 
55 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW PARTRIDGE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Spring 
field, in the county of Hampden and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Loom-Shuttles, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
loom-shuttles, the object thereof being to pro 
vide in the shuttle a device which is opera 
tive on the occasion of the breaking of a warp 
thread to consequently cause the severing of 
the filling or bobbin thread, and insure, as 
usual, on the severing of said bobbin-thread 
the actuation of the stop mechanism; and the 
invention consists in the combination, with 
the shuttle, of a device for the purpose stated 
consisting of parts, all substantially as will 
hereinafter more fully appear, and be set 
forth in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which similar characters of ref 
erence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views, and in which the present invention and 
the operation thereof are illustrated. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of one corner 
portion of the loom to show the operation of 
the improved shuttle in relation to a usual 
Stop mechanism, as Will be hereinafter con 
cisely explained. Fig. 2 is a perspective view 
of the end portion of the shuttle, as in an 
overturned position, whereby the improved 
appliance of this invention is most clearly 
shown. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the 
shuttle appliance, the same being shown as 
removed from the shuttle; and Figs. 4 and 5 
are vertical cross-sections of the said appli 
ance With the movable parts shown, as in the 
different positions occupied thereby, in use 
under different conditions. 
The device of this invention comprises, es 
sentially, a spring-supported part or catch B, 
adapted to be placed inside of the side wall 
of the shuttle A, with its top portion standing 
normally above the portion of the top edge of 
the shuttle-wall, at which such catch l3 is 
placed, the bottom thereof being adapted for 
such downward projection at the time the 
device should become operative as to consti 
tute an abutment against which the unwind 
ing bobbin-thread may engage, and thereby 
the breaking of said thread is assured. 
Referring to the drawings, a represents the 
top of the shuttle, and at the front side wall 
thereof. 
b represents a metallic frame adapted to be 
secured on the inside of said front Wall, the 
lug - extensions d d affording proper stock 
through which to screw said frame. Vertical 
holes e e' for guideways are formed in the 
upper and lower horizontal portions.ff of the 
frame, through which the vertical spindle 
like memberg of the catchB passes and bears. 
The upper portion h of the said spindle is 
squared to fit the correspondingly-shaped 
hole e, whereby the spindle is prevented from 
turning, so that its cross-head i will always 
remain in its plane alongside the Wall U. A 
spring k is applied to exert an upward press 
ure on the spindle g. The one shown is a 
plate-spring, which by one end is secured to 
said frame and by its other end bears up 
Wardly on the lateral pin l, affixed on the 
spindle. Of course any other kind of spring 
may be applied to effect the same result. The 
spindleg toward its lower end just above the 
portion thereof which normally lies within 
the guiding-hole e' is provided with a notch 
m, and a second spring n is applied to bear 
with a lateral pressure on the spindle. Thus 
when the catch Bisin operation forced down 
wardly the spring 
will force the spindle 
laterally, so that its notched part will engage 
the solid part of the frame adjacent the said 
holee', (see Fig. 4) and the depressed catch will 
be automatically held against assuming its 
normal and upper position. The lower end 
of the spindleg when depressed, as shown in 
Figs. 2 and 4, is in such a position that the 
thread, rapidly unwinding from the bobbin 
o, when the shuttle is shot, as it flies out 
wardly with centrifugal force against the 
walls of the shuttle, passing behind the lower 
end of said spindle, becomes engaged there 
with, and the tension occasioned by Such en 
gagement insures the severing of the bobbin 
yarn. The depression of the catch IB is in 
sured by the breaking of a warp-thread, which 
broken warp-thread causes an entanglement 
therewith of other of the warp-threads, so that 
9o 
95 
Od 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
430,037 
lever-arm 12, the lever remaining unswung, 
and then the thrust by the cam-operated lever 
effects the forward drawing of said lever 10 
and its carrying-block11. The said block 11, 
being connected with a radial arm 18 of a 
rocker-shaft 19, rocks said shaft, and the 
swinging of the other radial arm 20 on said 
rocker-shaft causes such movement of the 
power-shipping lever 21 as to secure the stop 
page of the loom. 
What I claim as my invention is 
A shuttle provided upon its inner wall with 
a frame or casing, as b, having vertical ways 
therein, a catch movable in said ways, and 
spring-supported whereby its upper portion 
is normally in an elevated position relative 
to the adjacent edge of the shuttle-wall, said 
catch having in its lower portion a catch-notch 
n, and the spring n, applied to bear laterally 
upon the vertical part of the said catch, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
ANDREW PARTRIDGE. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
WM. S. BELLOWs, 
H. A. CHAPIN. 
O 
at the time a new shed is made the warp-threads 
adjacent said broken one and entangled there 
with are not permitted to be separated, but 
are held about in the median plane of the 
Warp-shed, and as the shuttle is shot the top 
or cross headli of the catch is impinged upon 
by the so-constrained warp-threads and the 
spindle is depressed. 
The stop mechanism (here shown in part) 
comprises the angular lever 10, which is piv 
otally hung and delicately adjusted on the 
slide-block 11, so as to present its arm 12 in 
the plane which is intersected by the bobbin 
yarn when the shuttle is in the shuttle-box to 
one end of the lay and the battening of the 
filling is taking place. The bobbin - yarn, 
periodically pressing against the said arm 12, 
swings the lever 10, so that the other hooked 
arm 13 is moved out of the line of movement 
of the lever-arm 15, the motion of which is 
regularly imparted thereto by the calm 16, en 
gaging with the other lever-arm 17. When 
the bobbin-thread becomes severed, of course 
at the time the battening takes place there is 
no impingement by said thread upon the 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430137.txt	(No Model.) 
S. C. MEDDICK. 
WETERINARY INSTRUMENT, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
1 
No. 430,137, 
Patented June 17, 1890, 
 
: 
NLY 
N 
W 
R SS 
S 
N 
2 
Z4. 
 
d 
1. SU 2 Qes 
  
E. 
N 
NULL; 2/ 
SZ, 
 
(No Model.) 
S. C. MEDDICK. 
WETERINARY INSTRUMENT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 430,137. 
Patented June 17, 1890. 
 
928) evossos 
- 
3v.u.c. vitov 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SANDFORD C. MEDDICK, OF OVID, NEW YORK. 
VETERINARY INSTRUMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,187, dated June 17, 1890. 
Application filed September 9, 1889, Serial No. 323,356, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SANDFORD C. MEDDICK, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Ovid, in the county of Seneca and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Veterinary Instru 
ments for Aiding Conception in Mares, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a veterinary in 
strument whereby mares and other female 
animals are aided in conception. 
Heretofore great difficulty has often been 
experienced in getting mares to conceive 
properly. Very often in mares during the act 
of Coition the mouth of the uterus is closed 
at a time when it is necessary that it should 
be open, and remains closed for quite a while, 
sufficiently long to prevent conception taking 
place. It has also been noticed that mares 
after coition very often strain or force the 
Semen from the uterus and vagina and there 
by frustrate all intended objects. 
The object of my invention is to remedy 
the above-mentioned evils and to produce an 
instrument which shall be simple in construc 
tion and operation, easily applied, and one 
that is not injurious in its application. 
With these objects in view my invention 
consists of a soft-rubber funnel adapted to be 
inserted and retained in the neck of the 
uterus, and a hard-rubber tube adapted to 
fit into the soft-rubber funnel. 
It consists, further, in the novel construc 
tion and arrangement of the various parts, as 
will be more fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, and in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate similar parts, 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing the 
relative arrangement of the parts, the hard 
rubber tube being drawn slightly outward. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the soft-rub 
ber funnel. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of 
the hard-rubber tube. Fig. 4 is a vertical 
longitudinal Sectional view of the tube and 
funnel. Fig. 5 is a sectional view showing 
method of application. 
In the embodiment of my invention I em 
ploy a funnel A of soft rubber, but sufficient 
ly stiff to accomplish the purpose for which 
it is intended. The said funnel is formed 
I with a broadmouth al, said mouth being quite 
shallow, as shown, and attached to the con 
tracted portion of said mouth is the neck of 
the funnel a?, the sides of said neck extend- 55 
ing a considerable distance from the mouth 
a, and throughout the entire length of the 
neck it is of a uniform diameter; but I pref 
erably contract the lower end, as shown, the 
purpose of which will appear farther on. 
Upon the exterior surface of the neck a? are 
arranged at suitable intervals the transverse 
parallel rings B, said rings being secured to the 
neck in any suitable manner, and attached to 
the said rings are the oblique annular flanges 
or fins C, said flanges or fins being quite thin 
and extending outwardly at an angle to the 
sides of the neck and upwardly toward the 
mouth of the funnel. 
The soft-rubber funnel A is inserted in the 
mouth and neck of the uterus, the neck of 
the funnel extending into the neck of the 
uterus, and the mouth of the funnel covers . 
the mouth thereof and being flexible con 
forms to the shape of the contacting-walls of 
the vagina in case it is brought in contact 
with the same. The contracted end of the 
neck greatly aids in introducing the same, 
and the oblique fins serve to hold the funnel 
securely in the neck of the uterus, and also 
prevents the mare from straining, as in said 
act it is necessary to contract the uterus, but 
the friction of the fins will tend to prevent 
this. Within the funnel A is inserted a hard 
rubber tube D, said tube being of an exter 
nal diameter equal to the internal diame 
ter of the neck of the funnel, one end of 
said tube being flared at d, corresponding to 
the flare of the mouth of the funnel a, and at 
its opposite end said funnel is contracted, as 
at d', which corresponds to the contracted 
end C. When the hard-rubber tube is in 
serted in the funnel, every exterior portion of 
it lies in close contact with the soft-rubber 
funnel, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. The hard 
rubber tube being inserted in the funnel, it is 
impossible for the mare to strain and close 
the mouth of the uterus, and it will be seen 
that the semen introduced into the Vagina, 
will be safely guided into the uterus, thus in 
suring conception. 
The instrument can be quickly and easily 
95 
75 
IOC 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
t 
430,137 
nation, with an inflexible tubular portion, of 
an outer tubular portion embracing or en 
circling the inflexible tubular portion and 
provided with a series of annular flexible 
flanges for retaining the inflexible tubular 
portion in position during use of the instru 
ment. 
2. In an improved veterinary instrument, 
the combination, with a soft-rubber funnel 
constructed as described, of the transverse 
rings surrounding the neck of said funnel, 
the oblique annular flanges or fins attached 
to the transverse rings, and a hard-rubber 
tube constructed as described, adapted to be 
inserted in the funnel, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
SAND FORD C. MEDDICK. 
Witnesses: 
J. D. THOMAS, 
ALFRED B. HAUSS. 
25 
35 
Io 
applied and detached, and is safe in opera 
tion and does not injure the mare either in 
inserting or removing the same. 
From the above description of the various 
parts its operation and advantages are ap 
parent to all skilled in the art to which it 
pertains. While I have given specific con 
structions of the various parts in the descrip 
tion of my invention, I do not confine myself 
to such constructions, but may vary the same 
without departing from the broad principles 
of my invention. Neither do I confine my 
self to the use of the materials named, but 
may use any flexible and inflexible sub 
stances suitable for the purposes described. 
Either of the parts-the tube or funnel-may 
be used independent of the other; but the 
method shown and described is the preferred 
Ole. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1. In a veterinary instrument, the combi 
I claim is 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430237.txt	(No Model.) 
C, D, ROGERS. 
DIE FOR ROLLING SCREW THREADS, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 430,237, 
Patented June 17, 1890. 
 
 
 
MTN ESSES, 
in N/ENTOR, 
(No Model.) 
C. D. R O GER, S, 
DIE FOR, ROLLING SCREW THREADS, 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
No. 430,237. 
Patented June 17, 1890. 
o 
1. 
W T N ESSES 
g 
NNMenT or 7 
R 
6.5 as S\ot\Si\) ARS (NS 3. 
lf-rise427.7% is 
% sent 
 
C. D. R O CERS, 
DIE FOR, ROLLING SCREW THREADS. 
5 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented June 17, 1890, 
 
2 
sk 
a 
Y. 
4. 
- 
--- a-- 
a 
2. 
NS 
(No Model.) 
No. 430,237, 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
C, D, R, O GERS - 
DIE FOR, ROLLING SCREW THREADS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 430,237, 
Patented June 17, 1890. 
Fila. E. 
N 2 N N 
-2 \ Y -2. s 
Ya32 Y 
Z\s 
37%\ 
play --(22 -- N. 
-7 Y3 T 3. f 
Fig. 4. k-2'- 
c 
Sai YN. 
5. 
1 \a 
NYY 2 
7 y 
Akivs N \ross 
t %2 
 
C. D. ROGERS 
DIE FOR ROLLING SCREW TEREADS, 
5 
No. 430,237. 
Patented June 17, 1890. 
 
 
 
S r 2. 
72 
S. 
2, Y & 
2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES D. ROGERS, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
AMERICAN SCREW COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
DE FOR ROLLING SCREW-THREADS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 430,237, dated June 17, 1890. 
Application filed January 28, 1890, Serial No. 338,395, (No model.) 
- 
O 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES D. ROGERS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Provi 
dence, in the county of Providence and State 
of Rhode Island, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Dies for Rolling 
Screw-Threads; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, and to 
letters and figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
My present invention has relation to dies 
for forming screw-threads upon screws, more 
especially Wood-screws, by rolling the screw 
blanks between them, the action of the latter, 
when properly mounted and operated, causing 
the metal to raise radially from the body of 
the blank to form the threads. 
The invention herein described and claimed 
is an improvement upon the die patented to 
meSeptember 20, 1887, by United States Patent 
No. 870,354. In that die the series of inclined 
grooves and ribs were made parallel to each 
other, the obliquity of the ribs and also the 
angle of thesides thereof being constant from 
one end to the other. The action of such 
former dies was to force the ribs into the 
screw-blank to the required maximum depth 
at the commencement of the operation, there 
by limiting the pressure toward the axis to a 
comparatively small degree; the continued 
movement of the dies caused the metal be 
tween the ribs to be more and more com 
pressed laterally, and at the same time radi 
ally expanded into the grooves of the dies 
until at the end of the operation it fills them, 
the thread then being homogeneous or solid 
and a counterpart of the grooves at the end 
of the dies. As the metal between the ribs 
expands radially during the progress of the 
rolling, the diameter of the blank measured 
across the threads increases, and by reason 
of this increase of the diameter a longer por 
tion of the die is required, as the rolling pro 
gresses, to give a complete revolution to the 
blank, and inasmuch as the distance between 
so the central line of the threads of a screw is 
constant, and consequently the distance be 
tween the central line of the ribs of the dies 
is constant, it is necessary, when the length 
of the die required for one revolution of the 
blank is increased, that the angle of the ribs 
of the die with its line of motion should be 
reduced. Unless this is done there is a tend 
ency to move the blank across the dies, and 
in the ordinary way of arranging the dies to 
raise the conical point of the blank away 6o 
from the inclined portions of the faces of the 
dies which form the point of the screw, and 
produce an imperfect thread. An unneces 
sary strain is also brought upon the dies, 
which sometimes results in breaking them. 65 
I have found that I can remedy these diffi 
culties by changing the pitch or inclination 
of the ribs and grooves of the dies to corre 
spond with the increasing diameter of the 
blank as the rolling progresses. Theoreti 
cally this change of the inclination should be 
constant, so that the ribs would present curves, 
but for practical purposes it is sufficient and 
much easier to make the dies in sections with 
a different inclination of the ribs correspond- 75 
ing to the increase of the diameter of the 
blanks. A revolution of the blank does not 
correspond precisely with the circumference 
of the edges of the threads at different stages 
of the rolling but to a circumference interme- 8o 
diate between that and the circumference of 
the bottom of the groove. 
My improved die is represented in the an 
nexed five sheets of drawings, in which 
Figure 1, Sheet 1, shows a front view of the 85 
Working-face of a die having straight in 
clined parallel ribs and grooves, the inclina 
tion being constant from one end to the other. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view showing one example 
of my improved die. As drawn, the die is 
formed of four pieces or sections, the obliq 
uity or inclination of the ribs and grooves 
of one section varying somewhat from those 
of the adjoining section, as may be readily . 
determined by placing the drawing horizon- 95 
tally in front of the eye and nearly level 
therewith and ranging across the figure. 
Fig. 3, Sheet 2, is another example of my im 
proved die. In this drawing, however, the 
ribs and grooves have a curved form, the Ioo 
90 
3O 
35 
45 
 
25 
35 
o 
430,237 
2 
angle of which with the line of movement of 
the die is constantly varying, the entire die 
being in one piece. Fig. 4 is a top or edge 
view showing successive grooves along the 
edge and the increasing distance between 
them measured lengthwise and the increas 
ing width of the top of the ribs. Fig. 5 is a 
longitudinal sectional view taken through 
the bottom of one of the grooves. Fig. 6 rep 
resents a die the same as shown in Fig. 3, ex 
cept that it is in four pieces or sections. 
Fig. 
7 is a diagram introduced to show 
graphically by comparison the difference be 
tween the former method of arranging the 
ribs and my improved way of disposing 
them. Fig. 8, Sheet 3, shows in elevation a 
piece of a screw-blank greatly enlarged be 
, fore being subjected to the action of a pair 
of screw-threading dies. Fig. 9 represents 
the same in section during the screw-thread 
ing operation, the ribs of the dies being im 
pressed into the metal to the required full 
depth and corresponding say to a section 
taken through the blank and dies at the end 
of the first half-revolution of the blank, when 
both dies are made to reciprocate. Figs. 10, 
11, 12, 13, and 14 represent similar sectional 
views showing the progressive development 
of the screw-thread and the increase of di 
ameter. Fig. 15, Sheet 5, shows sectionally 
the fully-developed screw-thread resting in 
the dies at the end of the operation. Fig. 16 
is a view of the front end of a die in reduced 
scale, adapted to roll a gimlet-pointed wood 
screw. Fig. 17 represents the opposite end 
of the die. Fig. 18 shows in cross-section a 
pair of such dies at the completion of the 
screw-threading operation, having a screw re 
tained between them; and Fig. 19 is an en 
larged sectional view of a rolled-thread wood 
screw cut through its longitudinal axis. 
- In the several figures the parts marked r 
indicate the ribs or bars of the dies, and g 
the grooves between the ribs. 
A designates my improved die-that is, a 
die having the inclination or obliquity of the 
ribs and grooves variable or changing from 
one end of the die to the other-while A, Fig. 
1, indicates a die having straight inclined 
grooves and ribs, substantially as common to 
former construction of dies, wherein the 
amount or degree of inclination of the ribs is 
uniform from one end of the die to the other 
end. 
I would state that the several dies repre 
sented in Sheets 1 and 2 of the drawings, as 
drawn, would roll the screw-thread c only on 
the straight or cylindrical part of a rod or 
blank, the face of the ribs of the die trans 
versely being flat. 
In order to produce gimlet-pointed screws 
a, (see Sheet 5 of the drawings,) the general 
contour of the face of the dies transversely 
would be modified accordingly, as indicated 
in Figs. 16, 17, and 18, at the upper and lower 
edges of the dies, wherein the ribs r" and 
grooves g are adapted to produce upon the 
point portion p of the blank a screw-thread c', 
Fig. 19, having a constantly diminishing 
depth toward the point. In the drawings I 
have represented cross-sectionally what I 
consider to be the best form for the grOOVes 
and ribs. The face of the ribs is thin and 
slightly truncated at the entering or front 
end where the rolling commences and much 
wider at the opposite end, the angle of the 
two sides of the ribs being alike and constant 
from one end to the other, as stated in my 
United States patent before referred to. In 
forming the threads of a screw by means of 
a pair of these dies, the thin ends of the 
ribs are forced directly into the metal of the 
body b of a blank at the commencement of 
the operation to the maximum depth required, 
and as the rolling progresses the metalis more 
and more compressed between the ribs, and 
gradually expands into the grooves of the 
dies until at the end of the operation it fills 
them, and the thread is completed. 
A manner of forming the grooves g of the 
die A' (shown in Fig. 1) is to place the steel 
blank (annealed) upon the table of a suitable 
milling-machine and then block it up to the 
desired angle and secure it in place. The 
machine is further provided with a revolving 
arbor carrying a milling tool or cutter or a 
series of cutters, having transversely the 
counterpart of the grooves to be produced. 
Now upon feeding the table ahead slowly the 
revolving cutters will cutaway the blank and 
form ribs r, the angle of its sides being con 
stant from one end of the die to the other. 
The die, after being hardened, is then ready 
for use, 
The die shown in the other figures may be 
cutin a similar manner to that just described, 
except that a cam or former may be employed 
to give an endwise movement to the revolv 
ing cutting-arbor corresponding to the vary 
ing obliquity or inclination of the grooves and 
ribs coincident with the travel of the table. 
By referring to the diagram represented in 
Fig. 7 the light diagonal line m' indicates, 
say, the center of a rib or groove of a die, the 
inclination being constant from its commence 
ment to the end of the die, substantially as 
common to dies formerly made. In said Fig. 
7 the vertical distance between the horizon 
tal lines n, indicates the corresponding or 
axial distance between the screw-threads pro 
duced by a pair of suitably-operated dies. It 
will be seen that as the inclination of the ribs 
m is constant, the horizontal divisions being 
alike, the several intersections of the lines in 
and m' will be equidistant; therefore, the 
horizontal distance between the correspond 
ing Ordinates 1 2 3, &c., along the upper edge 
of the figure are also equal; but, as the metal 
of the blank between the ribs is continuously 
rising during the process of forming the screw 
threads, it follows, as before stated, that each 
Succeeding revolution of the blank on its axis 
should travelan increased distance. This in 
crease I have endeavored to indicate by the 
I 25 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
7 o 
75 
45 
So 
55 
 
430,287 
heavy line m, which corresponds relatively 
with the line m', just described. The curved 
line m, where it intersects the lines m, it will 
be seen, cuts it at unequal points, the result 
ing series of ordinates 1 2 3, &c., being indi 
cated at the lower edge of the figure. As 
suming now that the horizontal distance 
along the die from the commencement O to 
the first ordinate 1 represents, say, one-half 
the circumference of the blank at the root 
of the screw-thread, the successive bottom 
ordinates. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 indicate the cor 
respondingly-increasing circumference of the 
Screw due to the gradual development of the 
thread, the length of the divisions gradually 
increasing in a corresponding ratio, although 
the diameter b' of the screw at the bottom of 
the thread remains practically the same 
throughout the operation, as represented by 
Figs. 9 to 15. 
ft will be seen that an ordinary die, as 
o 
shown in Fig. 1 and as indicated by line 'm', 
Fig. 7, is made considerably shorter than my 
present improved die, notwithstanding the 
number of divisions or revolutions of the 
blank is the same in both cases. 
I claim 
A die for rolling screws by expanding the 
metal axially to form threads provided with 
ribs and grooves, the acute angle of which, 
with the line of movement of the die, dimin 
ishes continually or by sections toward the 
finishing end of the die to correspond with 
the increasing diameter of the threads of the 
SCeW. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES D. ROGERS. 
25 
35 
WitneSSes: 
CHARLES HANNIGAN, 
GEO. H. REMINGTON. 
sh 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430337.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 430,337, 
J. M. DAWIES. 
MOLD FOR, CASTING SAD IRONS 
Patented June 17, 1890. 
Azay Z. 
7 
-6. 
 
 
a2E 
2 32 
Z5 
zz 2 
Zrz: 
 
 
m 
11, as a- all 
14 N.Y. It 
e 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
A/M/ae/6 
6 Seeglier 
INVENTOR: 
24. 
y Muw g 
a 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB M. DAVIES, OF NEW CASTLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MOLD FOR CASTING SAD-RONS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 430,337, dated June 17, 1890. 
Application filed October 17, 1889, Serial No. 327,278, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB M. DAVIES, of 
New Castle, in the county of Lawrence and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Molds for Casting 
Sad-Irons, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
separable metal mold for casting sad-irons in 
pairs and to dispense with the use of sand 
molding, whereby the work may be speedily 
performed by unskilled labor at a great re 
duction of expense. 
To this end my invention consists in the 
construction and combinations of parts, as 
hereinafter described, and indicated in the 
claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional eleva 
tion of the mold taken on the median line 3 
3 in Fig. 3. Fig. 2 is a side elevation in per 
spective of the mold. Fig. 3 is a top plan 
view of the complete device, and Fig. 4 is a 
longitudinal elevation in section of a sad-iron 
Such as is produced in the mold. 
AA are two equal sections of the mold. 
These are duplicates in all respects and have 
the exact shape of half a sad-iron formed in 
each piece, which, when joined, produce a fac 
simile of the body of the sad-iron recessed 
therein, the lower face of the mold being 
open. These hollowimprints are represented 
at C. C. in Fig. 1. 
Duplicate impressions b b are sunken in 
each half of the mold of proper shape, which 
are adapted to register with each other and 
form molds for the handles of the two sad 
irons that are cast at one pouring of iron into 
the mold. 
Four grooves c. c. c care formed of appro 
priate shape. These extend from the handle 
imprints to the sad-iron hollow fac-similes, 
and in these are placed properly-bent Wrought 
iron pieces i, that have their ends extended 
into the spaces mentioned, and thus are cast 
fast into the iron body ci', and handles b', 
5o when the mold isfilled with moltenmetal. Said 
handle-pieces are shown in position connected 
to a sad-iron in Fig. 4. 
35 
40 
45 
To align the two sections of the mold ex 
actly so that there will not be improper shoul 
ders formed on the castings, the dowel-pins ff 55 
are secured in one section and aligning per 
forations are made in the mating section. 
These, when engaged and the mold-sections 
tightly clamped together, will afford a pair of 
molds that will produce clean and perfect sad 
OS. 
A central main-gate orifice d is formed in 
the duplicate sections A A' between the sad 
iron imprints, and lateral runners d' are 
branched therefrom at its base. These branch 
ing channels for the flow of molten metalinto 
the molds C. C. intersect the cavities of the 
molds at their heels, which are adjacent, and 
at points sufficiently above the face of the 
irons that the edges will remain perfect when 
the gates are broken off. The faces of the 
sections A A' are planed off to render their 
jointing together true, and the lower surface 
of each is finished in like manner at right 
angles to the joint-faces mentioned, so that 
the complete mold will rest truly upon a base 
plate B, which is of metal, also planed true 
and adapted to chill the face of the irons 
when they are cast. 
At e smaller gate-orifices are formed for the 
introduction of metal to form the handles b' 
b'. The two sections of the mold are clamped 
together by any preferred means, and to fa 
cilitate the quick adjustment of the ordinary 
molders' clamps, which are simple and effi 
cient, the Vertically-projecting ears h are 
formed integral with each mold-section at 
their ends, and the projecting parallel limbs 
of the clamps can be made to embrace these 
lugs and be Wedged fast thereto, as shown in 
Fig. 3 at g. 
By the use of this metal mold several im 
portant advantages are derived. In ordinary 
molding and casting, sand is employed, mold 
ed in flasks. This work is one requiring 
skilled and high-priced labor, which is avoided 
by the use of this improvement. The work 
is rendered more speedy, smoother castings 
are afforded, and the percentage of loss from 
imperfect pieces is reduced. 
The form of the mold renders it non-liable 
to injury from its expansion and contraction 
USe. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
95 
75 
IOO 
 
2 
430,337 
5 longitudinally on a median line and each im- smaller handle-gate orifices, of a chilling base- 15 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters place wrought-iron uprights for the handles, 
Patent- . 
and a main-gate orifice having two runner 
In a sad-iron mold, the combination, with branches which intersect the body-molds of 
two mating duplicate sections which are joined the two sad-irons above their faces, and two 
printed with fac-similes of the halves of two plate faced off true, substantially as set forth. 
sad-irons, the heels of which are adjacent, 
and further provided with shaped depres- 
sions at proper points for the formation of 
I O. cast sad-iron handles, also grooves to retain in 
JACOB M. DAVIES. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN S. TAGGART, 
J. F. WILLIAMS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430437.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 430,437, 
F. C. ROCKWELL, 
INCANDESCENT LAMP, 
Patented June 17, 1890. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK C. ROCKWELL, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
INCAND ESC ENT LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 430,437, dated June 17, 1890. 
Application filed March 4, 1890, Serial No, 342,581, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK C. ROCK 
WELL, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Hartford, in the county of Hartford and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Incandes 
cent Lamps, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact specification. 
The invention relates to the class of incan 
descent electric lamps in which the current 
traverses the base in passing from the socket 
to the filament, and the object is to so form 
the base of such a lamp that it may be made 
from a cheap and easily-manipulated mate 
rial which is especially adapted for this pur 
pose on account of its insulating heat-non 
conducting and non-expansible qualities and 
to Which the cementing compound that joins 
the base to the end of the globe will more 
firmly adhere than it does to the material 
now used for such bases. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a side view of one form of lamp 
embodying my improvement. Fig.2 is a side 
view of the base. Fig. 3 is a diagram view of 
the blank from which the base is formed. 
Fig. 4 is a central vertical sectional enlarged 
view of the base and the end of the globe. 
Fig. 5 is a side view of the base adapted to 
another form of socket. 
In the views the letter a, indicates the globe, 
b the base, and c the key-socket, which is held to 
the base by the grasp of the spring-fingers d. 
In lamps of this class one of the leads to the 
filament is joined to the metallic base and the 
current passes through the base from the 
Spring-fingers to this lead, and previously this 
base has been formed by first drawing a disk 
of sheet metal to cup shape by the successive 
action of dies, or by spinning it to cup shape 
over a mandrel and then cutting out the 
closed end. This manipulation is expensive 
on account of the waste of material, the dull 
ing and the wearing of the tools, and the nec 
essarily numerous handlings of the base dur 
ing the operations. 
In forming my improved base b a strip of 
the desired size is cut from a roll or sheet of 
paper or a similar thin non-conducting mate 
rial, an opening e is made or a small portion 
is cut away near one end of this strip, and a 
piece of conducting materialf, usually a piece 
of copper, is laid upon and attached to the 
paper a distance from the opening e about 
equal to the circumference of the finished 
base, so that when the strip is rolled into a 
cylindrical form, with the conducting-piecef 
between the layers, a portion of the latter Will 
be exposed through the opening e. This 
blank, which is properly sized, is passed be 
tween rollers, which are usually heated, or it 
may be pressed to form the interior and ex 
terior beads, the former being provided to 
project into the cementing material and aid 
in retaining the base in position, while the 
latter is grasped by the spring-fingers that 
hold the socketin place. When thus formed, 
the blank is rolled on a suitable former Orby 
rolls into a cylinder the size of the base, a 
portion of the conducting-strip f being ex 
posed through the opening e, while the ends 
are securely held between the wraps b'b' of 
the base. The paper or other thin non-con 
ducting material may have been coated or 
treated with a stiffening and cementing mate 
rial, which is preferably an insulating com 
pound containing a gum, so as to harden un 
der the pressure of the formers that roll the 
base to shape; or the base may be coated or 
dipped with this material after it has been 
rolled to shape and stiffened by the harden 
ing of the compound under heat-pressure. 
In one end of the base a piece of insulating 
material h, bearing a central conducting-tube 
i, is inserted and the whole secured to the end 
of a globe by any suitable cementing mate 
rial, as plaster-of-paris, which is molded into 
the base in a moistened condition. One of 
the leads p to the filament passes through 
the cementing material and is joined to the 
conducting-strip f, which is embedded be 
tween the layers of the base, and the other n, 
passes into and is joined to the tube i, which 
comes in contact with a conductor in the in 
terior of the socket. The strip from which 
the base is rolled may be of any desired 
length, so that the layers may be Wrapped 
about each other to give the desired thick 
ness, the outside wraps being of course per 
forated to properly expose a portion of the 
conducting-piece f, which is held between the 
layers, or the base may be made of two sepa 
rate cylinders of paper or the like material, 
which may be placed one within the other, 
2d 
25 
35 
45 
50 
90 
95 
IOC 
430,437 
With the conducting-piece f between the sep 
a rate cylinders, the exterior cylinder being 
provided with the proper opening to expose 
the conducting-piece, as above described, so 
that at least one of the spring-fingers d may 
come in contact with it and make a good 
electrical connection when the socket is in 
place. 
In Fig. 5 the base is shown as formed to re 
ceive the Sockets of lamps of this class that 
are provided with threaded couplings that are 
adapted to screw onto the base. The strip of 
material from which this base is formed is 
partially cut away at one end, so that when 
rolled up the last layer will cover only one 
end of the conducting-piece f, enough being 
covered to firmly hold the piece in place and 
enough being exposed to make a good elec 
trical connection with the threaded coupling 
in the socket through which the current is 
passed. 
My improved base is light, firm, and is 
formed in an inexpensive manner from a 
cheap material which possesses high insulat 
ing qualities, is heat-non-conducting, and does 
not expand or contract under the varying 
temperatures to which such parts are sub 
jected, does not corrode or oxidize, and more 
O 
25 
firmly adheres to the cementing material that 
joins the base with the globe than do the 
prior bases. 
All danger of short-circuiting or diverting 
the current by any accidental contact be 
tween the base and a conductor is eliminated, 
as the conducting part of the base is con 
cealed and protected, the exposed parts of the 
base being of insulating material. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A base for an incandescent lamp, Con 
sisting of superimposed layers of a thin non 
conducting material with a conducting-strip 
embedded between, a portion of the exterior 
layers being cut away to expose a part of the 
conducting-strip, substantially as specified. 
2. A base for an incandescent lamp, Con 
sisting of a number of layers of thin non-con 
ducting material wrapped about each other 
and holding a conducting-strip, the exterior 
layers being perforated to expose a portion 
of the conducting-strip, substantially as speci 
fied. 
35 
45 
FREDERICIK. C. ROCKWELL. 
Witnesses: 
H. R. WILLIAMS, 
A. F. LANGDON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430537.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 430, 537, 
H. L. PAGE, 
ICE CREEPER, 
Patented June 17, 1890. 
 
t 
s ? 
s == 2. 
statist implit 
Wat 22 esses: 
A 72 aye 22 to 7. 
The shris PErgas co., Photo-Lith0, WASHINgro, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY L. PAGE, OF WELLS, NEW YORK. 
CE CREEPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 430,537, dated June 17, 1890. 
Application filed March 21, 1890, Serial No, 344,801 (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRY L. PAGE, of 
Wells, in the county of Hamilton and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Log and Ice Creep 
ers; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it pertains to make 
and use it, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawing, which forms part of this 
Specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
log and ice creepers; and it consists in the 
particular arrangement and construction of 
parts, to be fully described hereinafter, and 
pointed out in the claim. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
attachments for boots or shoes which can 
be used by lumber-men in Walking upon or 
jumping from one log to another, and which 
allows the foot to give and bend as freely as 
though no metallic plates were applied to 
them, and in which the length of the sharp 
pointed projection can be varied to suit the 
wishes of the wearer. 
The accompanying drawing represents a 
perspective of a log - jumping attachment 
which embodies my invention. 
A represents the sole-plates, which are piv 
oted at their front ends, and which are pro 
vided with vertical projections B upon their 
Outer edges to clamp the edges of the sole of 
the boot or shoe. These two plates are 
applied to the sole of the boot or shoe and 
rigidly secured thereto by the clamping 
screw C, which passes through horizontal 
apertures made in the lugs P, which are 
formed upon their rear ends. Both of these 
plates are provided with a number of Screw 
threaded holes, and through which the 
headless sharp-pointed screws are passed. 
These screws are sharpened at their lower 
ends, so as to enable the wearer to walk with 
perfect safety, not only upon the slippery 
surfaces of logs while lumbering, but enable 
the wearer to jump from One log to another, 
and to walk over frozen icy surfaces without 
the danger of slipping. The two heel-plates 
I are similarly constructed, being hinged to 
gether at their rear ends, provided with suit 
able vertical projections J for engaging with 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
opposite sides of the heel, and are secured to- . 
gether by means of a screw L, which passes 
through horizontal apertures made in the lugs 
D, which are formed upon their front ends, 
and which serves to close the two plates upon 
the heel and secure them rigidly thereto. 
These two plates are also provided with per 
forations, through which sharp-pointed screws 
are passed, the screws in these two plates be 
ing made adjustable, as already described. 
In order to allow the foot to bend and give 
in every possible direction, and thus allow 
the wearer of these plates to move with 
greater freedom and safety to himself, the 
two pairs of plates are connected by means of 
the rod O, which is pivoted at each of its ends 
upon the clamping-screwsby which the plates 
are closed. This rod, while it allows the 
greatest freedom in the movement of the foot, 
at the same time serves to connect the two 
pairs of plates, so that if one pair should be 
come detatched from the foot they will not 
be lost in the water, as would otherwise be 
the case. 
As will be seen, the construction of my at 
tachments is very cheap and simple. The 
plates can be quickly secured to or removed 
from the foot, and being connected they are 
not so liable to be lost as when they are dis 
connected in the usual manner. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
In a log and ice creeper, the combination 
of sole and heel plates, which consist, re 
spectively, of two plates pivoted at their front 
and rear ends, respectively, provided with 
vertical projections at their sides, and With 
horizontally-apertured lugs at their adjacent 
ends, a connecting-rod provided with a hori 
zontal aperture at each end, and the clamp 
ing-screws, which pass through the said lugs 
and the connecting-rod, whereby the sole and 
heel plates are clamped upon the shoe and 
allowed a vertical movement independent of 
each other, substantially as shown. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
HARRY L. PAGE. 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN COURTNEY, 
JAMES H. COWLES. 
55 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430638.txt	(No Model.) 
G, GILLIES. 
CARRIAGE TOP OINT, 
No. 430,638, 
Patented June 24, l890. 
 
3 
 
j 
5 
 
 
 
W iposses 
/ 
e 
(v 
y /...as Alfrpeys, 
(4-62724. 
N-ye - 
- - M. 
- 
622, 
p7zpir 
52 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE GILLIES, OF GANANOQUE, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
CARRAGE. TOP JOINT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 430,638, dated June 24, 1890. 
Application filed February 15, 1890, Serial No.340,550, (No model.) Patented in Canada January 9, 1890, No. 33,361, 
55 
65 
To al., Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE GILLIES, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing at 
Gananoque, in the Province of Ontario, Can 
ada, have invented a new and useful. Joint for 
Carriage-Tops, &c., (patented in Canada, No. 
33,361, dated January 9, 1890) of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in joints for carriage-tops, props, seat 
rails, bow-sockets, and the like; and it has 
for its object to construct a joint of this class 
Which shall be simple, easily applied, and in 
Which the parts joined shall not easily be 
come loosened by wear, while in the event of 
their becoming so loosened the joints may be 
readily tightened and restored to a perfect 
condition. 
With these ends in view, the invention con 
sists in the improved construction, arrange 
ment, and combination of parts, which will 
be hereinafter fully described, and particu 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure 1 
is a side elevation of a carriage-top equipped 
With my improved joints. Fig. 2 is a per 
Spective view of one of the seat-rails detached. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view of the seat-rail, pin 
tle, and bow-iron, taken on the line acac in Fig. 
1. Fig. 4 is a sectional view of one of the 
bOWS, the bow-plate, pintle, top-prop, and ex 
tension-brace, taken on the line y y in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is a perspective detail view of the bow 
plate and pintle for the front bow separated 
from each other. Fig. 6 is a perspective de 
tail view of the bow-plate and pintle for the 
middle bow separated from each other. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
1 designates the bow-iron, and 2 is the seat 
rail, which are connected by means of a pin 
tle 3, the ends of which are provided with 
right and left hand screw-threads, as shown 
at 4. The threaded ends of the pintle screw 
into correspondingly-threaded recesses 5 in 
the bow-iron and seat-rail, which, by turning 
the pintle axially, will thus be connected. The 
body of the pintle 3 is preferably polygonal 
in shape, so as to be readily engaged and ro 
tated by means of an ordinary Wrench. It 
will be seen that when the parts are thus con 
nected one of the members constituting the 
joint-namely, the bow-iron 1-will be capa 
ble of rocking on the pintle, so as to allow the 
top to be raised and lowered. 
6 designates an arm extending from the 
seat-rail and forming a support for the top 
brace 7. The outer end of the said arm 6 is 
screw-threaded, as shown at S, to engage the 
screw-threaded recess or perforation at the 
lower end of the top brace 7, which latter is 
screwed onto the said arm 6 prior to having 
its upper end connected to the prop on the 
bow. The ends of the top braces and the 
eyes of the bow-sockets and seat-rail are 
thickened or enlarged to form caps or circul 
lar terminations 9, and the eyes or caps thus 
formed are bored and interiorly ScreW 
threaded for the purpose of receiving the 
screw-threaded ends of the connecting-pin 
tles. 
The bows, which are designated by 10, are 
connected in the usual manner at their lower 
ends with the bow-iron 1. The front bow is 
connected to the middle bow by means of a 
jointed brace 11, the front end of which is 
connected to the front bow by means of a pin 
tle 12, one end of which is screw-threaded to 
engage a screw-threaded recess at the front 
end of the brace 11. The opposite end of the 
pintle 12 has a female-threaded recess to re 
ceive a screw-threaded pin 13, which extends 
laterally from a plate 14, that is bolted or 
otherwise suitably secured to the said front 
bow. The pintle 12 is provided with an an 
nular flange 15, having a series of recesses or 
notches 16, and the plate 14 is provided with 
a screw - threaded recess 17 to receive the 
point of a pin or bolt 18, which is fitted in 
one of the notches of the flange 15 of the pin 
tle. The latter having been properly ad 
justed may in this manner be prevented from 
unscrewing and coming loose. At the same 
time by removing the pin 18 it may be readily 
tightened whenever desired. The upper end 
of the middle bow 10 has secured to it a plate 
19, which is in all respects similar to the 
plate 14, and is provided, like the latter, with 
a laterally-extending screw-threaded pin. 20. 
21 designates the pintie, which has a female 
threaded recess 22 to receive the pin 20, and 
is provided at its opposite end with a Screw 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
90 
OO 
480,638 
threaded pin 23, upon which the rear end of 
the jointed bracell is adjusted loosely, after 
Which the pintle is turned to cause the end 
of the Screw-threaded pin 23 to engage a fe 
male-threaded recess 2 in the upper end of 
the jointed top brace 7. The pintle 21 is pro 
Vided, like the pintle 12, with a notched 
flange 25, to be engaged by a pin 26, adapted 
to be adjusted in a screw-threaded recess 27 
in the plate 19, thereby serving to hold the 
pintle from rotating. 
The Operation and advantages of my in 
Vention will be readily understood from the 
foregoing description, taken in connection 
With the drawings. 
The parts of the device may be very easily 
and quickly put together or separated, as oc 
casion may require, and the several parts will 
l'Ockfreely upon the pintles by which they are 
Connected. Whenever the parts become loose 
from Wear they may be quickly and easily 
tightened and restored to a perfect condition. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a carriage-top, the combination, with 
the bows, of the plates having laterally-ex 
tending Screw-threaded pins, the pintles pro 
vided at their innerends with female-threaded 
recesses and at their outer ends with screw 
threaded pins, and the jointed brace having 
its ends mounted upon the said pins, sub 
Stantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the bows, the plates 
having laterally - extending screw-threaded 
pins, the pintles having female-threaded re 
CeSSes at their inner ends and screw-threaded 
pins at their outer ends, and provided with 
notched flanges, and the holding-pins adapted 
to enter recesses or perforations in the bow. 
O 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
B. O. BRITTON, 
W. E. ORSER. 
45 
55 
plates and to be fitted in the notches of the 4o 
flanges, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of the seat-rail, hav 
ing the arm screw-threaded at its outer end, 
the bow, a plate secured to the latter and 
having a laterally-extending screw-threaded 
pin, the jointed top-brace having its lower 
end screwed to the arm extending from the 
seat-rail, and the connecting pintle provided 
at one end with a female-threaded recess and 
at the other end with a screw-threaded pin, 
Substantially as set forth. 
4. As an improvement in carriage-tops, the 
combination of the seat-rail having a lateral 
ly-extending arm screw-threaded at its outer 
end, the bow-iron, a rightand lefthand threaded 
pintle connecting the seat-rail and bow-iron, 
the bows, the plates mounted upon the front 
and middle bows and having laterally-extend 
ing screw-threaded pins, the jointed rails, the 
pintles having female-threaded recesses at 
their inner ends, screw-threaded pins at their 
Outer ends, and notched flanges, said pintles 
connecting the bow-plates with the ends of 
the jointed brace, and the top-prophaving its 
lower end screwed onto the laterally-extend 
ing arm of the seat-rail and its upper end 
connected with the screw-threaded pin of the 
pintle of the middle bow adjacent to the rear 
end of the jointed brace, which is mounted. 
loosely upon said pintle, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
65 
GEO. GILLIES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430738.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J. LAPPIN. 
CAR COUPLING DRAW HEAD, 
No. 430,738, 
Patented June 24, l890. 
W. 
A A 
 
2. 
/7/2244 ed %g 
2 
- 
47%zzee 
rhE NORRIs PETEAs.co., Phoro-LTHo, washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN JOSEPH LAPPIN, OF TORONTO, ONTARIO, CANADA. 
CAR COUPLNG DRAW HEAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 430,788, dated June 24, 1890. 
Application filed May 13, 1889, Serial No. 310,68l (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN JOSEPH LAPPIN, 
of the city of Toronto, in the county of York, 
and in the Province of Ontario, Canada, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Draw-Heads for Railway-Cars; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to draw-heads now in 
use for the connection and making up of 
trains of cars, and are provided with an ap 
paratus called automatic or self-acting coup 
lers,' this invention being an improvement 
on such draw-heads, and especially upon a 
draw-head having a coupler, for which I ob 
tained a patent for the Dominion of Canada, 
No. 3,634, and bearing date July 16, 1874, 
and also a patent for the United States, No. 
156,889, and bearing date November 17, 1874. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of my improved draw-head. Fig. 
2 is a transverse Sectional elevation of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a side view of a longitudinal 
section of the Same. A portion of the inner 
end is removed as unnecessary in this speci 
fication. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similar 
or corresponding parts. 
A represents the draw-head; B, the trip; C, 
the link; D, the coupling-pin; bb', a compound 
seat for the inner end of the link to rest in 
when about to couple to another car; b, a re 
cess in the floor of the draw-head to allow for 
an increased length of the trip. 
Referring to Fig. 1, it will be seen that this 
figure shows the draw-head without the 
coupler. 
Referring to Fig. 2, which shows a cross 
section through the center of the coupling 
pin D, the pivots bb, the trip B, and mouth 
of the draw-head A, it will be observed that 
the coupling-pin is resting upon the trip B, 
thus showing the position of these parts be 
fore the link enters the draw-head in the act 
of coupling the car. 
Referring to Fig. 3, which shows a longi 
tudinal section through the center of the 
draw-head, showing the draw - head A, the 
trip B, the coupling-pin D, and link C; it 
will be observed that the link is shown to be 
level, which is its true position when its in 
ner end is resting in the seat b, and the trip 
- 
' 
down. 
B is shown in dotted lines in the position it 
will occupy when the inner end of the link is 
placed in seat b and its outer end sloping 
The invention consists in increasing the 
length of the stem of the trip, so that its 
lower end will extend below the surface of 
the floor of the draw-head, a groove bhaving 
been prepared therefor. This increase in the 
length of the trip, together with a limited 
depth in the mouth of the draw-head, renders 
it impossible for the link to pass beyond the 
trip in the act of coupling, which does occur 
With imperfectly-constructed draw-heads. 
The invention also consists in the construc 
tion of the inner or back part of the mouth 
of the draw-head with a compound seat b b' 
for the adjustment of the link in the process 
of coupling, in which seat the link will rest, 
and either in a level or drooping position, as 
placed therein, in order to couple automati 
cally to an approaching car by the simple 
impact of the draw-heads when closing to 
gether. 
It consists, further, in the uniting of the trip 
with the draw-head in the casting of the same, 
by which union they become in reality one 
piece of mechanism, with the trip hinged 
therein and in working order for the full per 
formance of its functious, and the accom 
plishment of this is obtained without any 
Subsequent fitting up on the draw-head after 
leaving the trimming-shop. How such union 
is accomplished I will now describe. 
In making the core for hollowing the mouth 
of the draw-head I use a core-box, which 
forms a recess in the core in which the trip 
is placed, with the pivots b' projecting in 
wardly from the wings of the trip to the core 
for the pin-hole, and outwardly so far that 
the ends of said pivots will be flush with the 
outer surface of this part of the draw-head 
when cast, so as to provide for the ends of 
said pivots being surrounded by and incor 
porated with the molten metal and become 
integral with the metal of the draw-head, by 
which means the pivot ends are thoroughly 
secured in position, so that when the casting 
is removed from the sand and cleaned it is 
fotind that a perfect draw-head with coupler 
has been produced, the journals free and 
ready for delivery. 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
430,738 
5 
O 
To recapitulate my improvements: They 
are, first, the lengthened trip B, extending 
into the floor of the draw-head, as shown in 
Fig. 3, and so constructed that the said trip 
cannot be damaged by the link C, as de 
scribed; second, the compound seat bib' for 
the adjustment of the link C properly and 
readily for coupling to high and low cars; 
third, the casting of the draw-head A by the 
described means and appliances, so that the 
pivot ends of the trip B will be incorporated 
with the molten metal of the draw-head, so 
as to do away with the ordinary fitting up of 
the same, and consequently to lessen the cost 
of the draw-head. 
I am aware that it has been done, the unit 
ing of certain simple pieces of machinery in 
the casting of the larger piece by running 
molten metal around certain parts, which ad 
heres to such parts and unites the same, but 
I do believe that I have been the first to in 
25 
vent and use successfully the described ap 
pliances for the manufacture of a finished 
draw-head. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The draw-head A, in combination with 
a trip B, pivoted in the center line of the 
coupling-pin D and extending into a groove 
bin the floor of the draw-head, as shown and 
described, and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a draw-head A, constructed with a 
trip B, pivoted in the center line of the coup 
ling-pin D and extending into a groove bin 
the floor of the draw-head, the combination 35 
of the link C and seats b b' in the back part 
of the mouth of the draw-head, as shown and 
described, and for the purposes set forth. 
JOHN JOSEPH LAPPIN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN ELLIOTT, 
G. ELLIOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430838.txt	( No Model.) 
METHOD OF ELECTRIC WELDING OR METAL WORKING, 
M. W. DEWEY 
No. 430,838, 
Patented June 24, 1890. 
 
22, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARK W. DEWEY, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE DEWEY 
CORPORATION, OF SAME PLACE. 
METHOD OF ELECTRIC WELDING OR METAL-work NG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 430,838, dated June 24, 1890. 
Application filed October 14, 1889, Serial No. 326,937, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARK W. DEWEY, of 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Methods of Electric 
ally Heating Bars, &c., for Welding and Work 
ing Purposes, of which the following, taken 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings, is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to the application of 
heat to the part or parts of metal or other 
material to be welded, worked, or treated; 
and it consists, essentially, in exposing or 
Subjecting the said part or parts to be oper 
ated upon to the heat of a continuous elec 
trically-heated conductor in proximity there 
to, thereby heating the said part or parts to 
the required welding, working, or treating 
temperature. 
My invention consists, further, in envelop 
ing the part or parts to be heated and oper 
ated upon by the heating-conductor; also, in 
preventing radiation of heat from the said 
heating-conductor in directions not toward 
said part or parts; and it consists, still further, 
in conducting the heat from the said con 
ductor to the said part or parts through a 
non-electric conducting or high-resistance 
electric conducting medium. 
My invention may be utilized for effecting 
all manner of Welding, soldering, brazing, 
Working, or treating operations of metals, and 
also for operations upon partial and non 
conducting bars. 
Some of the advantages of my method of 
heating the work for the above operations are 
as follows: The heat is applied directly to the 
exterior of the bar or blank at the point to 
be welded or treated, and thereby heating the 
same to the required temperature. By thus 
first heating the exterior of the bar or blank 
I insure a perfect Weld. 
It is a Well-known fact that bars or blanks 
when subjected to torsional or lateral strain, 
the greatest strain is exerted near the sur 
face of the bar or blank, especially when sub 
jected to flexure, in which case the central 
portion constitutes the neutral axis at which 
no strain is exerted, while a compressive 
strain is exerted at one side of the neutral 
axis and a tensile strain at the opposite side 
of said axis, and said strains gradually in 
crease to the exterior of the bar or blank. In 
view of this fact it is obvious that it is more 
essential that the exterior of a bar be united 
thoroughly than the interior thereof, espe 
cially when the bar or blank is designed to 
resist the aforesaid strain. Therefore this 
method is superior to that where the heating 
current is passed through the bar itself, as 
the interior of the bar in the latter case is 
heated more than the exterior On account of 
the radiation of heat therefrom, and thus, 
while a good welding or (union may be effected 
of the interior of the bar, the union of the 
exterior is liable to be incomplete, or a burn 
ing of the interior may be caused, while the 
exterior is properly heated and united. 
Further, by my invention bars or blanks of 
different sizes and conductivities can be 
heated without varying the volume of the cur 
rent, and transformation of the current is 
unnecessary in many cases, or at least not to 
the great extent usually required, on account 
of the high resistance of the heating-con 
ductor that may be employed for my method. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1 
and 2 are respectively sectional and side ele 
vations of an apparatus adapted for accom 
plishing my method of treating metals. Figs. 
3 and 4 are respectively sectional and side 
elevations of another form of the heating part 
of said apparatus. Fig. 5 is a sectional view, 
similar to Fig. 3 of another form of the heat 
ing apparatus. Fig. 6 is a side elevation of 
a more simplified form of the apparatus shown 
in Fig. 2. Figs. 7 and S are cross-sectional 
views of modified forms of apparatus, and 
Fig.9 shows anotherform of apparatus adapt 
ed for carrying out the object of my inven 
tion. 
Referring specifically to the drawings, A 
in Figs. 1 and 2 represents the bar or bars to 
be heated, worked, or Welded, Supported upon 
two supports B and B' and secured thereto 
by clamps b and b. Support B is stationary, 
and B is movable toward and from the other 
support, so that by the moving of the support 
B' by means of the screw D the bar or bars 
held by said supports can be subjected either 
to compression endwise or to tension or draw 
ing out lengthwise, as may be desired. 
95 
loo 
O 
3O 
45 
SO 
 
430,838 
O 
O 
25 
40 
45 
55 
C is the heating-conductor, located between 
the aforesaid Supports at the point of the bar 
or blank A to be operated upon, and is sup 
ported by two Supports C and c', mounted 
upon the base-plate C of the apparatus, but 
insulated therefrom and from each other by 
insulation (d. The heating or heat-ladiating 
conductor C and its supports may be moved 
to any position or location between the sup 
ports IB and B' to effect the heating of any 
desired point along the bar, and there fast 
ened by means of the clamp e. 
if and f' are the terminals of the heating 
conductor, which may be of low l'esistance, 
and are connected to the supports c and c'. 
The heating-current to be employed may 
be generated by any suitable means-as, for 
instance, that described in my prior patents 
in metal-working, No. 402,416, dated April 30, 
1SS9, and No. 40S,S75, dated August 13, 1889. 
The Supports C and c' form the terminals of 
the said heating - conductor C, which prefer 
ably envelops or surrounds the bar A, and 
is in tWO parts, So that the same can be read 
ily applied to the bar to be heated and re 
moved from the said bar after the tempera 
ture of the Work is raised to the required ex 
tent. The upper part of the conductor C is 
hinged to the lower part, in this case by the 
hinge E at the ends of the arms of and f', ex 
tending from the conductor C rearward, and 
by means of a handle h, extending from the 
said upper part toward the front of the ap 
paratus, said art of the conductor can be 
easily lifted from the lower part until ar 
rested by stops i i" on the hinged ends of the 
arms 9 o', which stops are in such positions 
as to sustain the lifted part in a rearwardly 
inclined position and at rest. The said parts 
of C call be held separated more or less to 
allow radiation or the escape of heat the re 
f on to control the temperature of the lar 
A or to bell) it the latter to be observed dur. 
ing the heating of the same or operation 
after it is heated by means of the stop-screw 
j, extending through the arm (f' and resting 
with its lower end upon the top of the arm (1. 
The conductoi' ( is continuous or unbroken, 
and may be heated, of course, to any desirable 
extent, even to incan descence, and to prevent 
Waste Of heat said conductor may be envel 
oped ol' inclosed by a covering or envelope 
F, of some refractory or non-heat-conducting 
material, such as fire-brick or asbestus, as 
shown in Figs. 3 and 4. 
Ill Figs. 3 all d 4 the parts of tie conductor 
Care not hiliged togethe'; but the upper part 
is intended to be lifted bodily from the lower 
part by leans of the handles I. I. 
In some cases, when a very great heat is not 
l'equired, this apparatus may be used without 
the upper part of the conductor C. Fig. 7 
shows a Sectional view of a modificatio of a 
similar apparat (is where neither the heating 
conductor nor the moll-heat-conducting mate 
rial completely surrounds the bar A. 
Fig. 5 illustrates a sectional view similar to 
m 
 
Fig. 3; but the conductor C is lined with a 
Substance G that may be raised to incandes 
cence and conduct the heat from the con 
ductor C to the bar A, with which it is in con 
tact. This substance G., forming the lining 
of the conductor, may be of complessed baked 
clay or carbon or other suitable substance. 
If composed of carbon, oxidation of the metal 
7 
When heated will be prevented to a great ex 
tent. While linings formed of the substances 
referred to are imperfect conductors of heat, 
they are much better than the air and inde 
structible or fire-proof to a great eXtent, and 
also on account of their high-resistance pre 
vent the low-tension electric current employed 
to short-circuit through them and bar A. In 
Some cases this lining G may not come in 
contact with the bar A, but simply be brought 
in close proximity thereto. 
Fig. S is a modification of Fig. 5, and rep 
resents the conductor C formed into a box or 
trough and the lining G formed of some 
granulated material-as carbon, coal, sand, or 
other substance-in which the bar A is buried. 
In the simple form of the apparatus illus 
trated in Fig. G the heat-radiating conductor C 
is simply a bar or wire connected at each end 
to its supports C and c' and running along 
parallel with and in close proximity to the 
bar or blank A. The heating-conductor C in 
Fig. 9 is of the form of a coil, and the bar A 
is Within the same, but not in contact there 
with. 
It will be obvious that the apparatus may 
be greatly modified without departing from 
the spirit of my invention, as its scope is not 
confined to the specific form Ol' arrangements 
of aparatus shown and described herein. 
I do not claim, broadly, the method of unit 
ing metals or other objects by the application 
of heat, consisting in passing a heating elec 
tric current through a conductor in juxtapo 
sition to the Worlk, inasmuch as said method 
has been resorted to in uniting metals by sol 
del' Ol' Cement. 
The apparatus herein shown is not specifi 
cally claimed, as it forms the subject-matter 
of anothel' application, Serial No. 347,165, 
filed by me April 9, 1S90, as a division of this 
application. 
IIaving described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to Secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
I. The herein-described method of electric 
Welding or metal-Working, consisting in plac 
ing the bar O' blank in proximity to an elec 
tric heat-ladiating conducto' and then pass 
ing an electric heating-current through said 
heat-radiating conductor, partly or wholly 
surrounding the conductor by a refractory or 
non-heat- conducting material, thereby rais 
ing the temperature of the work to the re 
quired extent, and then Welding, working, or 
treating the work as desired. 
2. The herein-described inctlhool of electric 
Yelding ol' metal-working, consisting in plac 
ing the bar or blank in proximity to an elec 
9 
O 
5 
9 
OO 
O 
25 
I 
430,838 
tric heat-radiating conductor and then pass 
ing an electric heating-current through said 
heat-radiating conductor, partly or wholly 
surrounding the conductor by a refractory or 
non-heat-conducting material, conducting the 
heat from the conductor to the work through 
a non-electric conducting or a high-resist 
ance conducting substance, thereby raising 
the temperature of the work to the required 
degree, and then welding, working, or treat 
ing the said work as desired. 
3. The herein-described method of electric 
welding or metal-working, consisting in envel 
oping the work to be welded or otherwise op 
erated upon or treated in a heat-radiating 
electric conductor, thereby heating said work 
to the requisite temperature, and then subject 
ing said work to the desired operation or treat 
ment. 
4. The herein-described method of electric 
welding or metal-working, consisting in en 
veloping the work to be welded or otherwise 
operated upon or treated in a heat-radiating 
electric conductor, partly or wholly surround 
ing the conductor by a refractory or non-heat 
conducting material, thereby heating the lat 
ter to the requisite temperature, and then 
performing the desired operation or treat 
ment upon the work. 
5. The herein-described method of electric 
welding or metal-working, consisting in en 
veloping the work to be welded or otherwise 
operated upon or treated in an electric con 
ductor, passing an electric heating-current 
through the latter, partly or wholly surround 
ing the conductor by a refractory or non-heat 
conducting material, conducting the heat 
from the conductor to the work through a 
non-electric conducting or a high-resistance 
conducting substance, thereby raising the 
temperature of the work to the required de 
gree, and then welding, working, or treating 
the said work as desired. 
6. The herein-described method of electric 
welding or metal-working, which consists in 
suitably supporting the work upon two sup 
ports, locating a heat-radiating electric con 
ductor between the supports in proximity to 
and enveloping said work at the point to be 
heated, surrounding both the radiating-con 
ductor and the work with a non-heat-con 
ducting envelope, connecting the terminals 
of a low-resistance heating-current conductor 
with the said heat-radiating conductor, and 
thereby heating the work to the requisite 
welding, working, or treating temperature, 
and then treating the said work as desired. 
7. The herein-described method of electric 
welding or metal-working, consisting in sub 
jecting or exposing the work to the heat of a 
heat-radiating electric conductor, controlling 
the heating of the work by varying the con 
finement or retainment of the heat, and there 
by raising the temperature of the work to 
the required extent, as and for the purpose 
described. 
8. The herein-described method of welding 
or metal-working, consisting in enveloping 
the work to be operated upon or treated in 
an electric conductor, passing an electric 
heating-current through the latter, thereby 
raising the temperature of the work to the 
required extent, then removing said con 
ductor and working or treating the work as 
desired. 
9. The herein-described method of electric 
welding or metal-working, consisting in sub 
jecting or exposing the work at a point to be 
heated to the heat of an incandescent high 
resistance body raised to incandescence by 
the heat of a continuous incan descent elec 
tric conductor in contact with said body, 
thereby heating the Work to the required 
temperature, as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name this 11th day of October, 
18S9. 
- 
MARK W. DEWEY. 
L. S. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. DUELL, 
A. F. WALZ. 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
O 
25 
3 5 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US430938.txt	(No Model.) 
F. F. FIFE & W. V. BLEHA. 
SASH BALANCE, 
No. 430,938, 
Patented June 24, 1890. 
   
 
  
 
-4 Zasza 
 
7/ZZ 
2 
47 42 
2STS XGNSS All 
s 
et 
12.SSSXSSSYSSSSS 
(SEAS32ESGS WA 
25. 
Elf, ENAE 
wit 
S 
SS NRNaNSANASSNy NSNSNSSY 
NS& N 
accessexes (e. azzazzazza 
|SSAA 
3. 
NN 
Zir-arzzzzzzza 
- 2%. 7, Zaa. 
W22zzzee PZ722%te, 
Ay (wilk-ta. 
City . 
the Norris reters co., Photo-ri Ho, WASHINGTON, O, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK. F. FIFE AND WILLIAM W. BLEHA, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
SASH-BALANCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 430,938, dated June 24, 1890. 
Application filed January 30, 1890, Serial No, 338,694 (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, FRANK. F. FIFE and 
WILLIAM W. BLHA, both of the city of St. 
Louis, in the State of Missouri, have invented 
a certain new and useful Improvementin Com 
bined Sash-Balance Elevators and Stops, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to devices for a 
spring - balance gear that counteracts the 
gravity of the Sash, in combination with a 
friction-stop that arrests its movement at any 
required point; and the invention consists 
in features of novelty hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
Figure I is a detail elevation of a window 
casing, which incloses a sash that is con 
trolled by our invention. Fig. II is an en 
larged front view of the combined gear and 
tension-spring-actuated wheel. Fig. III is an 
enlarged side view of the same and shows 
the rotating and pressure springs by which 
it is actuated and the cylinder in which it is 
incased. Fig. IV is a vertical section taken 
on line IV IV, Fig. III, and shows the com 
bined gear and friction wheel, the coil-spring 
that actuates the same, with the rubber in 
ner fold and leather outer fold of the friction 
surface of said wheel. Fig. W is a longitudi 
inal detail of the bifurcated spring and jour 
mal-bearing cylinder, and also shows project 
ing therefrom the tongue of the friction-block 
that by the influence of its pressure-spring 
exerts a balance or stop friction on the gear 
Fig. VI is a perspective 
and friction wheel. 
view of the friction-block. Fig. VII is a hori 
Zontal section taken on line VII VII, Fig. III, 
and shows a detail of a window sash and cas 
ing to which our device is attached, and the 
various spring-propelled balance and stop 
elements of the invention; and Fig. VIII is a 
vertical section taken on line VIII VIII, Fig. 
III, and shows the cylinder with its key-slots 
and the bifurcated key seated therein, which 
key is transferable from one key-slot to an 
other to adjust the pressure of the spiral 
Springs. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents a 
window-sash and 2 a casing, to which, respect 
ively, our device is attached, 
3 represents a straight metal cog - rack, 
which is inlaid in the vertical side of the 
sash, and, preferably, is in duplicate on both 
sides of the same, to which it may be secured 
by screws 4 at each end or by any other suit 
able means. The rack is sufficiently inlaid 
in its recessed bed 5 to house the cogs 6, SO 
that their points do not project beyond the 
flush line of the surface edge of the sash. 
7 represents hollow cylinders which house 
the pressure-springs and the combined gear 
and friction-wheels, which cylinders are in 
closed in the boxings 8 in the window-cas 
ings in corresponding positions adjacent to the 
racks that are boxed in the sash, preferably 
on each side thereof. The said cylinders are 
provided with bifurcated forward extensions. 
9, on the forward ends of which extensions 
are brazed or otherwise secured the attach 
ment-plates 10. The said attachment-plates 
with said cylinder and its housed devices 
(hereinafter described) are inlaid at 11 and 
secured to the window-casing by the ScreWS 
12, which pass through perforations 13 in 
said plates and engage in their screw-seats 
14 in said casing. 
The attachment-plate is provided with a 
large rectangular slot 15 in its center, through 
which is passed the geared friction-wheel and 
other devices to be housed in the cylinder. 
16 represents a dovetailsliding plate which 
runs in its dovetail groove seat 17 in the at 
tachment-plate, and which sliding plate has 85 
a rectangular slot 18 in its center. The Said 
plate, while it holds captive the aforesaid 
housed devices within the cylinder, at the 
same time allows the projection of the cog 
gear and friction-surface of the spring-actu 
ated balance and stop wheel for its func 
tional operation as a sash gravity balance and 
stop. The plate when seated in position cons 
stitutes a buffer-stop to the spring-projected 
journal-bearing arms 21 to limit their projec 
tion of the wheel, and also before the inser 
tion of the cylinder within the casing it keeps 
the devices housed therein. The said dove 
tail slide is removed when said devices are 
in the process of insertion therein or of re 
moval from the cylinder. 
19 represents the inner hollow spring-pro 
pelled cylinders that telescope within the 
outer cylinders 7, and are provided at their 
75 
- 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
25 
O 
2 
forward ends with peripherally - enlarged 
flange - collars 20 integral therewith, from 
which collars extend longitudinally of the 
cylinders the bifurcated journal-bearing arms 
21, which are flat on the inside, but are convex 
on the outside, being curved to the arc of a cir 
cle that corresponds with those of the flange 
collars, from which they extend and with 
which they are integral. 
Thus the convex 
Outer surfaces of said journal-bearing arms 
register with the concave inner surfaces of 
the cylinders 7 and of their bifurcated arms 9, 
within which they telescope. 
22 represent axles which are loosely jour 
naled in their perforated bearings 23 in said 
bifurcated arms 21, and on said axles are fast. 
seated the perforate peripherally-enlarged or 
diametrically-extended hubs 24 of the com 
bined gear and friction balance top wheels. 
The said hubs 24, which are preferably 
25. 
of cast metal, have integral unspoked boxed 
extensions from their central journal-bear 
ings to the cog-gears 26 around their periph 
eries on the one side, and which peripheral 
cogs are preferably cast integral therewith, 
and on the other side said boxed hubs ex 
tend to the combination elastic friction-tires 
that are mounted around them. The said 
friction-tires are constituted of elastic rub 
ber bed-hands 27, that are fast seated on the 
hubs on the contrary side to that of the cog 
gears and peripherally surmounting leather 
friction-tires 28, that are fast mounted on 
said elastic rubber beds. Now it will be seen 
that, as shown in Figs. II, III, IV, and VII, 
the cogs extend about their own length be 
yond the friction-tires, for they have to work 
in geared connection with the cog-racks 3, 
which are housed in their recessed beds 5 
Within the sash, while the friction-tires work 
on the surface edges of said sash. 
An inter 
vening frictional surface 29 is left open clear 
to the periphery of the hub between the cog 
bed extension and the friction-tire, for a pur 
pose hereinafter described. 
30 represents spring-boxes that are recessed 
within one side of the hubs 24, in which boxes 
are housed the coil-springs 31. The inner 
terminal loops 32 of said springs are securely 
attached to the axles 22 by the keys 33, that 
engage in said loops and said axles, and the 
Outer terminal loops 34 are secured to one of 
the bifurcated journal-bearing arms 21, that 
carry the wheels 25, by the screw-key 35, which 
engages in said outer loop and is secured in 
its screw-seat 36 in said journal-bearing arm. 
Now it will be understood that as the coil 
Spring is placed in the spring-box within the 
wheel in the required operative direction for 
the cog-rack on the sash, as said sash is low 
ered, acting on the cog-gear of the wheel to 
Wind up said spring, and as it does so the spring 
approximately counterbalances the gravity. 
of the sash, so that the usual counterpoise 
Weights are dispensed with, as also are the 
frequent consequent annoyances of broken 
cords and lodged weights. 
When the sash is 
55 
65 
430,938 
95 
fully lowered, the coil-spring in consequence 
is fully wound. The active strength of the 
spring nearly counterbalances the dead 
weight or gravity of the sash, so that but a 
slight action of the hand in either direction 
will overcome the counterpoise and either 
raise or lower the window; but as this inven 
tion is a combined spring-actuated sash-bal 
ance and friction-stop, the coadjutant and 75 
adjustable spring-pressure devices, &c., that 
actuate said friction-stop enter in combina 
tion as concomitants of the invention, for the 
gravity of the sash is unavoidably increased 
and decreased, respectively, in wet weather 
on the one hand and dry on the other. There 
fore it is required that there should, besides 
the spring-actuated Sash-balance cog-gear, be 
combined the friction-stop shown and de 
scribed on the other side of the wheel. This 
friction-tire 28, as has been described, is itself 
a combination-pad, having a leather friction 
surface lying around an elastic rubber bed 
that combines the wearing qualities of the 
leather with the elastic pressure of the rub 
ber. 
We will now describe the adjustable spring 
pressure devices that elastically force the 
combined gear and friction wheel to its work. 
37 represents pressure - blocks that work 
within the inner hollow cylinders 19, and 
whose forward friction-tongues 3S have con 
cave ends that fit to the convex peripheral 
surfaces of the balance-stop wheels 25 be: 
tween the cog-gear 26 and the friction-pads. 
39 represents the minor spiral springs that 
are housed and work in the spring-chambers 
40 within the inner cylinder 19, to exert their 
spring-pressure on the pressure-blocks 37. 
The said springs are held and forced to their 
work by the disk-heads 41 of the screw-bolts 
42, the disk-heads working within said spring 
chambers. . 
43 represents the major spiral springs that 
are seated in the spring-chambers 44 within 
the outer cylinders. The said major spiral 
springs press against the flange-collars 20 of 
the inner cylinders 19. The rear screw 
threaded ends 45 of the bolts 42 have screw 
nuts 46 adjustably seated thereon in the re 
quired position for the washers 47, that are in 
back contact with said nuts, to sufficiently 
sttffen the pressure of Said major and minor 
spiral springs. The said washer is held to 
its work by the adjustable bifurcated key 48, 
whose forks straddle the bolt 42 and whose 
ends are adjustably seated, respectively, in 
such of the elongated slots 49 in said cylin 
der 7 as will accord with the right position of 
said washer that it locks and the spring 
pressure that it is desired should be exerted 
therefrom. 
50 represents a groove in the rear end of 
the screw-bolt 42, which provides the means, 
with the aid of a screw-driver, for increasing 
or reducing the pressure on the minor spring 
29, and via said spring on the block 37, whose 
friction-pressure is thus adjusted on the pe 
I 25 
IOS 
O 
I 15 
OO 
430,938 
IC) 
25 
35 
40 
ripheral surface 29 of the drum of the com 
bined gear and friction wheel 25. 
In conclusion, it will be seen by the above 
described devices, whose operation has been 
largely pointed out above in connection with 
the description, that the elevation and lower 
ing of the sash are definitely controlled with a 
near approximation to the balance of its grav 
ity by the action of the coil-spring on the cog 
gear connection of the balance-wheel with 
the rack on the sash. At the same time, in 
combination therewith, the action of the com 
bination elastic friction-pad tire, also periph 
erally mounted on said wheel, and the press 
ure-block 37, with frictional action on said 
wheel itself under the operation of the ad 
justable system of pressure-springs, combines 
With the above-stated balance action a stop 
action also at any required position of the 
Sash. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The combination of the rack 3, the com 
bined cog and friction balance-wheel 25, and 
the coil-spring 31, housed in said wheel that 
actuates the same, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the rack 3, the cog 
wheel that gears into said rack, the rubber 
tire fast mounted on said wheel on the re 
verse side to its cog-gear, the leather friction 
tire fast mounted on said rubber tire, and 
the coil-spring mounted within said wheel, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination of the rack 3, the hol 
low cylinder 7, the bifurcated extension-arms 
of said cylinder, the inner cylinder 19, pro 
vided with the flange-collar 20, the journal 
bearing arms 21, that project from said cyl 
inder, the combined cog-gear and friction 
balance-wheel whose axle-shaft is mounted 
in the journal-bearings of said arms 21, the 
said wheel being provided with the spring 
box 30, the coil-actuating spring housed with 
in said box in said wheel, and the major 
pressure spiral spring 43, that pushes on said 
collar 20 of the inner cylinder to hold the cog 
gear of the balance-wheel in gear with the 
rack 3 and the friction-tire of said wheel in 
contact with the sash, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of the rack 3, the com 
bined gear and friction wheel 25, whose cogs 
gear into said rack and whose elastically rub 
ber-bedded leather friction-tire engages with 
the sash, and said wheel provided with a pe 
ripheral friction surface 29 between said cogs 
and said friction-tire, and also provided with 
a spring-box 30, the coil-spring that actuates 
said wheel, said spring being housed in said 
box, the pressure-block 37, provided with the 
friction-tongue 38, that has a friction-press 
ure on said peripheral surface 29 of said 
wheel, and the minor spiral spring 39, that 
actuates said pressure-block, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination of the cog-gear rack, 
the combined cog-gear and elastic bedded 
friction balance and stop wheel 25, the coil 
balance-spring 31, the hollow cylinders 7, that 
house said wheeland its actuating devices, the 
said cylinder being provided with elongated 
key-hole slots, the inner hollow cylinder 19, 
provided with the journal-bearing arms 21, 
the pressure-block 37, the major and minor 
spiral springs 39 and 43, the spring-carrier 
screw-bolt 42, and the bifurcated key 48, seated 
in the slots 49 in the cylinder 7, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination of the cog-gear rack, 
the combined cog-gear and elastically-bedded 
friction-tired wheel, the coil and pressure 
springs that actuate said wheel, the housing 
and journal bearing hollow cylinders 7 and 
19, that house and carry said wheel, the cen 
trally-slotted attachment-plate 10, with its 
screw-fastenings, by which said cylinder 7 is 
secured in its housing, said plate provided 
with the dovetail grooves 17, and the centrally 
slotted dovetail sliding plate 16, said plate 
arranged so that while it allows sufficient pro 
jection of the cog-gear and friction-tire of the 
wheel at the same timekeeps it and its actuat 
ing devices captive within its housing, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
- 
FRANK. F. FIFE. 
WILLIAM W. BLEHA. 
In presence of - 
BENJN. A. KNIGHT, 
THOS, KNIGHT. 
55 
75 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431038.txt	(No Model.). 
. 
L. W. DILLON. 
CEILING BLOCK CONNECTOR FOR INCANDESCENT LAMPS, 
No. 431,038, 
Patented July 1, 1890. 
-Z 7. 7, 
2327% 
aSalf: 2S Naz' 
t3. 
" . 
. 
 
di 
 
 
Azzzzesses. 
 
2.7% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS W. DILLON, OF NORTH ATTLEBOROUGH, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
HOMER. M. DAGGETT, JR., OF ATTLEBOROUGH, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CELING - BLOCK CONNECTOR FOR IN CANDESCENT LAMPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,038, dated July 1, 1890. 
Application filed August 26, 1889, Serial No. 321,984. (No model.) 
IO 
- 
To all, whon, it naily conce77. 
Be it known that I, LOUIS W. DILLON, of 
North Attleborough, county of Bristol, State 
of Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
5 ment in Electric Cut-Out and Connector, of 
which the following description, in connection 
With the accompanying drawings, is a specifi 
cation, like letters on the drawings represent 
ing like parts. 
My invention relates to a connecting device 
or cut-out such as employed for making con 
nection between main current-supplying wires 
or leads and a supplied branch and for auto 
matically severing such connection in case 
I5 the currentis abnormally increased. The said 
connecting device is composed of two mem 
bers, one a base adapted to be connected with 
the Wall or ceiling of an apartment and pro 
vided with clamps to make connection with 
2O the main wires or leads. The other member 
is a cap containing contact-pieces to form the 
terminals of the supplied branch; and the 
invention relates, mainly, to the construction 
of the devices for affording at the same time 
25 secure mechanical connection between the 
base and cap and good electrical connection 
between the conductors on said members 
while providing for the ready separation or 
removal and replacement of the cap. 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of a connecting 
device embodying this invention; Fig. 2, a 
plan view of the side of the cap that comes 
next the base portion; Fig. 3, a plan view of 
the base portion with the cap removed; Figs. 
4 and 5, details of the engaging portions on 
said cap and base piece. 
The base a may be composed of wood or 
other suitable material and is adapted to be 
securely fastened upon the wall or ceiling of 
an apartment. It is preferably provided with 
a shallow countersink, as shown at a, to re 
ceive the engaging wings of the cap portion 
b, and with a central depression a, to receive 
an axial inward extension b on the cap por 
tion for the purpose of conveniently center 
ing the cap relative to the base in connecting 
the two together, 
The base a is provided at opposite sides 
with main-wire clamps cc, to which the main 
5o leads d dare electrically connected by means 
35 
45 
3O 
of clamps or screws e. e. The said clamp 
pieces c c'extend inward toward the center of 
the base-piece far enough to come within the 
periphery of the cap, as shown in Fig. 1, and 
are provided with overhanging lips or projec- 55 
tions c, extending over the countersunkpor 
tion a of the base-piece. 
The cap b is provided with binding-screw 
connectorsff" for receiving the terminals of 
the supplied branch circuit, which terminals 6o 
pass through the central opening in the cap 
and through notches in the central projection 
bthereof, as shown. The cap is also provided 
with fastening and circuit-connecting devices 
g g fastened upon it about midway between 65 
the wire-clamps ff and adapted to be elec 
trically connected with said wire-clamps by 
easily-fusible wires or safety devices h h, 
which melt away and thus break the branch. 
circuit in case the current is dangerously in- 7o, 
creased. The said fastening and circuit-con 
necting devices g g are made, as best shown 
in Fig. 5, each consisting of a base portion g 
rigidly fastened to the cap and having at its 
end an upright g' terminating in a curved 75 
cam-shaped arm g, which, when the cap is 
placed up snugly against the base portion, 
comes beneath the overhanging projections c' 
of the main-wire clamps. The outer surface 
of Said arms g are cam-shaped, as shown, and 8o 
by placing the said arms about midway be 
tween the main-wire clamps and giving the 
cap a quarter-turn the said arms will engage 
the main-wire clamps below their overhanging 
portions, and, owing to their cam shape, will 85 
Wedge tightly against them, so as to afford a 
good electrical connection, the said arms en 
gaging mainly by their outer curved surfaces 
with the clamps cc, and being slightly yield 
ing SO as to press against the Wire-clamps elec 
trically as the cap is turned into place. Pro 
jections g are formed at the rear ends of said 
cam-shaped portion to prevent the cap from 
being turned too far or so as to again disen 
gage from the main-wire clamps. The under 
face of the cap is countersunk, as shown, and 
with the countersinkin the base portion forms 
a recess to receive the several connecting de 
vices, which are thus wholly concealed within 
the instrument when the parts are connected, Ioo 
95 
9o 
481,038 
none of the operative parts showing outside 
the cap, except the portion of the main-wire 
clamps connected with the main wires. Thus 
an excellent finish is afforded in connection 
with a reliable, efficient, and conveniently-op 
erated means for effecting the connection and 
disconnection of the base and cap portion. 
I claim 
The combination of the base having a cen 
tral depression and main-wire clamps with 
inward extensions, the cap having a central 
projection to engage with the central depres 
sion of the base, said projection having pas 
sages for the wires of the supplied branch be 
O 
low the portion that enters the depression of 
the base, and said cap having fastening and 
connecting pieces that engage with said main 
wire clamps by a slight rotary movement of 
the cap relative to the base, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
IOUIS W. DILION. 
Witnesses: 
JOS. P. LIVERMORE, 
JAS. J. MALONEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431138.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERIC COBLYN, OF SERAING, BELGIUM. 
4. 
RAILWAY-CHAIR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,138, dated July 1, 1890. 
Application filed December 6, 1887, Serial No. 257,085, (No model.) Patented in Belgium February 19, 1886, No. 72,053 in 
France March 23, 1886, No. 174,959; in Germany March 28, 1886, No. 37,491; in Spain April 14, 1886, No. 9,214 in Lux 
emburg April 21, 1886, No. 675; in Austria-Hungary April 24, 1886, No. 19,852; in England Septemberly 1886, No, lll46; 
in Italy January 24, 1887, No. 21,149/480, and in Portugal April 18, 1888, No. 1,262, 
5 
o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERIC COBLYN, a 
citizen of the Kingdom of Belgium, and a 
resident of Seraing, Belgium, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Rail 
way-Chairs, (for which I have obtained Letters 
Patent in Belgium, dated February 19, 1886, 
No. 72,053; in Germany, dated March 28, 1886, 
No. 37,491; in England, dated September 1, 
1886, No. 11,146; in Austria-Hungary, dated 
April 24, 1886, No. 19,852; in Spain, dated 
April 14, 1886, No. 9,214; in France, dated 
March 23, 1886, No. 174,959; in Luxemburg, 
dated April 21, 1886, No. 675; in Italy, dated 
January 24, 1887, No. 21,149/480, and in 
Portugal, dated April 18, 1888, No. 1,262) of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
Specification. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
Vertical transverse section of a portion of a 
metallic tie and rail and my improved rail 
fastening devices. Fig. 2 is a horizontal sec 
tion on line acac of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation, the tie being shown in section. 
The invention relates to railway-chairs, and 
to means for securing the rail thereto and to 
the tie, and has for its object, not only to 
provide a secure fastening for the rail, but 
also to provide means for readily disconnect 
ing the rail and replacing it when this be 
comes necessary. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
With the tie and rail, of a chair of peculiar 
Construction, a shoe, and a wedge, substan 
tially as hereinafter described, and as set forth 
in the claims. 
In the drawings, T indicates the tie, pre 
Sumed to be of metal, though of course the 
Ordinary wooden tie would answer as well. 
C is the chair, whose bed-plate c is made 
tapering in the direction of the center of the 
track, and from which projects an abutment 
C, that has approximately the form of a trun 
cated pyramid, and inclines in the direction 
of the rail R, which may be of any usual pat 
tern. 
S is a shoe, constructed in the form of a 
housing, and fits over the abutment and nearly 
incloses the same, except a portion of the 
o 
55 
outer face thereof. The shoe has a central 
vertical and semi-cylindrical grooves', formed 
in the outer face of its inner walls, for pur 
poses presently explained, and said wall is of 
such height or length as to extend down to or 
nearly to the bed-plate of the chair. 
P is a retaining or clamping plate bolted 
to the bed-plate c of the chair and to the tie 
T and overlaps a portion of the inner half of 
the foot of the rail R, and W is a wedge 
driven between the web of the rail and the 
shoe S, and constitutes the means to lock the 
parts together. It is obvious that by driving 
out the wedge W the shoe S can be lifted off 
the abutment C of the chair and the rail 
foot then slipped from under the retaining 
or clamping plate, thus providing a rail-fast 
ening which affords the facility of removing 
the rail without disturbing the chair or its 
fastenings. When a wedge of Wood is em 
ployed and tightly driven between the shoe 
and web of the rail, it will expand into the 
semi-cylindrical grooves', formed in the in 
ner face of the shoe, and thereby prevent its 
working loose, while if a metallic wedge is 
employed said Wedge may be provided with 
a like groove and a bolt inserted into the 
hole so formed to prevent longitudinal dis 
placement of the Wedge. 
As more plainly shown in Fig. 1, the lower 
end of the shoe S extends downward suffi 
ciently far to lie against the foot of the rail, 
thus holding the latter against displacement 
toward the abutment of the chair should the 
wedge Waccidentally workloose. The object 
of forming the inner face of the abutment in 
clined relatively to the web of the rail is to 
lock the shoe against Vertical displacement, 
the inner wall of said shoe increasingin thick 
ness from the caps or upper wall downwardly; 
and to more securely fasten the rail to the tie 
I form the surface of the shoe facing the rail 
also inclined relatively to the web of the rail, 
so that the wedge may be driven more tightly 
in and have a firm bearing against Wertical 
displacement, the Wedge locking the parts 95 
firmly together. If desired, the retaining or 
clamping plate P may be cast in one piece 
with the chair. 
75 
25 
35 
40 
45 
431,188 
The object of forming the base or bed plate 
of the chair tapering is to give the tread of the 
rail R a slightinward inclination. This may, 
however, be effected by a proper construction 
of the tie or by interposing a wedge-shaped 
plate between the chair and tie. It is of course 
a great convenience of construction to provide 
the chair with a bed-plate, yet this may be 
dispensed with and the abutment C and 
clamp P bolted separately to the tie, while 
instead of the clamp spikes may be used with 
Wooden ties. On the other hand, the abut 
ment may be of cylindrical form, the shoe S 
being constructed accordingly, so as to ac 
commodate itself to this form. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, substantially as herein 
described, with a tie, a rail, and fastening de 
vices for confining the rail-foot to the tie on 
one side of the rail, of an abutment project 
ing from the tie on the opposite side, a shoe 
adapted to fit onto said abutment and having 
its face proximate to the rail inclined, and a 
wedge adapted to be driven between the web 
of the rail and the shoe, for the purpose speci 
fied. 
2. The combination, substantially as herein 
described, with a tie, a rail, and fastening 
devices for confining the rail-foot to the tie 
on one side of the rail, of an abutment pro 
jecting from the tie on the opposite side, a 
shoe adapted to fit onto the abutment and 
having its face proximate to the rail inclined 
and abutting against the rail-foot, and a wedge 
adapted to be driven between the web of the 
rail and the shoe, for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination, substantially as herein 
described, with a tie, a rail, and fastening 
devices for confining the rail-foot to the tie. 
on one side of the rail, of an abutment pro 
jecting from the tie on the opposite side of 
the rail, a shoe constructed to fit onto the 
abutment, said shoe having its face proxi 
mate to the rail inclined and provided with a 
vertical groove or recess, and a wedge adapted 
to be driven between the web of the rail and 
the shoe, for the purpose specified. 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
described, with a tie, a rail, and fastening 
devices for confining the rail-foot to the tie 
on one side of the rail, of an abutment pro 
jecting vertically from the tie on the opposite 
side of the rail and having its face proximate 
- 
to the rail inclined, a shoe constructed to fit 
on said abutment and increasing in thickness 
downwardly, and a wedge constructed to be 
driven into the space formed between the in 
clined face of the shoe and the vertical face 
of the rail-web, for the purpose specified. 
5. The herein-described rail-chair, compris 
ing a base-plate, an abutment projecting Ver 
tically therefrom and at right angles thereto, 
in combination with a detachable shoe con 
structed to fit on the abutment and having 
its outer face inclined, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
6. The herein-described rail-chair, compris 
ing a base-plate gradually decreasing in thick 
ness and an abutment projecting vertically 
therefrom and at an angle thereto, in combi 
nation with a detachable shoe constructed to 
fit onto the abutment and having its outer 
face inclined, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
7. The herein-described rail-chair, compris 
ing a base-plate provided on one side with a 
clamping-plate and on the opposite side with 
an abutment projecting vertically from and 
at an angle to said base-plate, in combination 
with a detachable shoe constructed to fit on 
the abutment and increasing in thickness 
downwardly, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
8. The herein-described rail-chair, compris. 
ing a base-plate provided on one side with a 
clamping plate P and on the opposite side 
with an abutment having the form of a trun 
cated pyramid and projecting vertically from 
and at an angle to said base-plate, in combi 
nation with a detachable shoe S, constructed 
to fit on the abutment and increasing in thick 
ness downwardly, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
9. The herein-described rail-chair, compris 
ing a base-plate P on one side thereof, an 
abutment C on the opposite side projecting 
vertically from and at an angle to the base 
plate, in combination with the shoe S, con 
structed as described and provided in its 
outer face with a vertical groove or recess, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 6th day of 
July, 1887. 
. 
FREDERIC COBILYN. 
. . 
Witnesses: 
JEAN BAPTISTE DE Wos, 
AUGUSTE BERNARD. 
- 
O 
25 
35 
So 
55 
65 
75 
95 
ICO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431238.txt	(No Model.) 
G. F. WACHTER SHAUSER. 
SEWING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 431,238, 
Patented July 1, 1890. 
WITNESSES. 
 
is perers co., Phoro-litho, WASHINGTON, D. c. 
ATTORNEY. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 431,238, 
 
G. F. WACHTERSHAUSER, 
SEWING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 1, 1890. 
 
2332, 
singletoe 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE FRIEDRICH WACHTERSHAUSER, OF WILKES-BARRE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SEWN G-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,288, dated July 1, 1890. 
Application filed September 27, 1889, 
Serial No, 325,300, (No model.) 
55 
d 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE FRIEDRICH 
WACHTERSHAUSER, a citizen of the United 
States, residing at Wilkes-Barr, in the county 
of Luzerne and State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Sewing-Machines, which improvement is fully 
set forth in the following specification and ac 
companying drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Sewing-machines; and it consists in mechan 
ism, substantially as described, secured to the 
driving-shaft and the needle-bar for vertically 
reciprocating the latter. 
It further consists in the combination of 
parts herein set forth and claimed. 
Figure I represents a side elevation, partly 
broken away, of a sewing-machine embodying 
my invention. Figs. 2 and 3 represent end 
views thereof, Fig. 3 being partially sectional 
on line acac, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 represents a sec 
tion of a portion on line if /, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
table of a sewing-machine, and B the driving 
shaft thereof. On said shaft B, at the end op 
posite to the looper C, is an eccentric D, which 
is encircled by a yoke E of an oscillating arm 
F, which occupies a vertical position, and has 
its upper end pivoted to the rising and fall 
ing frame or needle-arm G, to which latter the 
needle-bar His secured, said bar and the up 
right limb J of the frame G being guided on 
the goose-neck or equivalent part K of the 
machine. The arm F is provided with a seg 
mental slot L, the same being located above 
the yoke E and receiving a rocking block M, 
the latter being connected by a pivotal pin or 
Screw N. With the limb J of the frame G. The 
connection of the arm F with the frame G is 
by means of a screw P, which is connected 
with said frame, and has a conical head O, on 
which is fitted a conical bushing R, the coni 
cal shape of the exterior of the latter being 
the reverse of that of the head Q, said bush 
ing being located in a conical opening at the 
upper end of the arm F. 
S designates a screw, which is fitted into 
the head Q of the screw P at the outer end 
thereof, and having a head which overlaps the 
joint of the head Q and bushing R, as most 
plainly shown in Fig. 1. 
The operation is as follows: Power is com 
municated to the shaft B, whereby the eccen 
tric D is rotated, and owing to the yoke E os 
cillating motions are imparted to the arm F, 
thus raising and lowering the same. Motion 
is thus imparted to the frame G, and conse 
quently to the needle-bar, it being seen that 
said frame which carries the needle-bar re 
ceives motions in right-lined directions, which 
cause the operation of the needle-bar in an 
easy and rapid manner, avoiding the great 
friction due to a swinging or vibrating arm, 
heretofore employed. The arm F oscillates 
on the head Q of the screw P with but little 
friction, owing to the conical shape of said 
head and the bushing R. The head of the 
screw Sretains the bushing, and consequently 
the upper end of the arm F, in position. When 
said bushing, the head, and the opening in 
said upper end of the arm Wear away in use, 
the screw S is tightened, thus moving in the 
bushing and taking up the Wear of the parts, 
whereby the regularity of motion of the up 
per end of the arm is preserved and looseness 
and rattling of the parts of the joint of the 
arm F and the frame G are prevented. The 
block M. rises with the limb J and oscillates 
thereon, conforming to the motions of the arm 
F, due to the slot. L, whereby said arm is guided 
and caused to run true in its oscillations. 
The eccentric T on the shaft B, which im 
parts motion to the feed-bar U, is connected 
with said shaft by means of a screw V, where 
by said eccentric may be set in different posi 
tions, and thereby correctly adjusted in order 
to impart proper motions to the feed-bar. 
Referring to Fig. 4, W designates a spring 
plate, which is secured at one end to the 
presser-foot arm and is adapted to be engaged 
at the other end by a cam-plate X, which is 
attached to the needle-arm, it being seen that 
the thread passes between the plate W and 
bed or contiguous portion Y of the needle-arm, 
so that as the needle-arm rises and falls the 
plate X comes in contact with and forces out 
the end of the plate W, thus separating said 
plate X from the bed Y and accordingly re 
leasing the thread. When the plate X clears 
the plate W, the latter closes against the bed 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
SO 
 
2. 
481,238 
5 
O 
15 
Y and holds the thread. By these means the 
tension of the thread maybe micely adjusted. 
I do not limit myself to a chain-stitch ma 
chine, as the improvements are equally adapt 
ed to a lock-stitch machine. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure, by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A sewing-machine having a rising and 
falling frame with needle-bar guided in the 
goose-neck or frame of the machine, a driv 
ing-shaft, an arm having an eccentric connec 
tion with said shaft and provided with a seg 
mental slot, a rocking block pivoted to a limb 
of the rising-and-falling frame and working 
in the said segmental slot, the said arm hav 
ing a pivotal connection at its upper end with 
the rising and falling frame, said parts being 
combined substantially as described. 
2. A sewing-machine having the frame G 
with needle-bar and limb J, guided in the 
goose-neck K, the driving-shaft B, the arm F, 
eccentrically connected to the driving-shaft 
B and pivotally connected with the frame G, 
and the rocking block M, pivotally secured to 
the limb J and guided in the segmental slot, 
said parts being combined substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In a sewing-machine, a rising and falling 
frame carrying the needle-bar, an operating 
arm connected with the driving-shaft having 
a conical opening in its upper end, a screw se 
cured to said frame and having a conical head 
in said opening of the arm, a conical bushing 
in said opening bearing on said screw-head, 
and a screw in said screw-head bearing against 
the bushing, said parts being combined sub 
stantially as described. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE FRIEDRICII WACHTERSHAUSER, 
EDWARD A. NIVEN, 
LAWRENCE W. LINE. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431338.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 431,338, 
- 
E. E. DE KALB. 
ARTIST'S CHAIR 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
. 
. 
Patented July 1, 1890. 
EE E-Pi-- 
EE e-TT -- 
7-4, oss ess - 
7. / 
is horris Peras cc, Hororithd., wash Misford, d. c. 
 
E. E. DE KALB, 
ARTIST's CHAIR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 1, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 431338, 
-----    !!!--! 
i----------|--+--------### 
------- 
 
 
%%ZZZZZZZZZ 
Z77/e 7/27 
6 2. 
M2, 
pe 
74%,72-ses: 
-64a 
7 
4. 
776. 
5. / 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ENOCH ELIJAH DE KALB, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO EMMA 
ADELAIDE DE KALB AND ADA BOSARTE DE KALB, OF SAME PLACE. 
ARTIST'S CHAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,838, dated July 1, 1890. 
Application filed February 8, l889, Serial No, 299,127, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, ENOCHELIJAH DEKALB, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Syra 
cuse, in the county of Onondaga, and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Artists Chairs; and 
ido declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable other's skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
5 My invention relates to folding chairs or 
stools for artists, tourists, sight-seers, camp 
ers, and other uses where it is desirable to 
fold the chair or stool into compact form and 
Simall compass for shipping, storing away, and 
more especially for being conveniently car 
ried by the user from point to point. 
In my invention I have provided a stool or 
chair which is capable of such manipulation 
and use in a very ready manner and with a 
said invention and the manner in which I 
construct and use the same. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate what 
I consider the best means for carrying my in 
vention into practice. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the device 
in position for use. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
of the device folded. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
of the seat of the chair. Fig. 4 shows a modi 
fied form of connection between the seat, legs, 
and back, the device being shown in side ele 
vation. Fig. 5 is a detail view of the seat, 
showing the engaging-spring used in Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 is a detail view of the back-support 
and handle. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures where they 
OCC. 
A and B B are the legs, which are hinged 
together at b, preferably by bands encompass 
ing each leg and pivoted together, so as to al 
low the legs to lie in substantially the same 
plane, as seen in Fig. 2. Of these legs the 
two marked B B extend only to the height of 
the seat C or a little above to form side sup- 75 
The stool or chair comprises three legs ports or knobs b'b', and are hinged or piv 
hinged together, with a seat hinged to two of oted to the seat, as shown at bb, by means 
them and adjustable upon the other one in of a through-rod. At the lower end the legs 
such a manner as to permit the legs to lie in B B have an inward bend, as shown at lb, 
and close against them when folded for stor- floor or ground and prevent slipping when 
ing or convenient carrying, and to be spread the chair is occupied. 
out to form a safe support and hold the seat 
The leg or support A is carried up past the 
in a horizontal position when the device is to seat to form the back A. On the upper end 
The invention also comprehends the pro- dles a. a', which are extended out to widen 
vision of a back, which is formed by upward- the back and give a shoulder-rest to the Oc 
ly extending one of the legs and providing cupant and to afford a means for taking hold 
it with curved or bowed top, which may be in of the chair for carrying it. The handles 
and affording a rest for the back and a han-angles to their position when in use as a back 
dle for carrying the stool. The handle or rest to form a hook for resting on the arm of 
handles lmaybe formed to turn a quarter-way the user when he desires to carry it around, 
round, so as to afford a convenient means for and stops may be employed to hold the han 
back-rod A is provided with a cap or collar 
and when the handle or handles are so made 
D, which is slotted horizontally, as shown at 
they are provided with suitable stops to hold 
(l, through which slot the pin d' projects. 
them fixed in the respective positions. 
The collar can be turned upon the rod, and 
The following detailed description more 
the handle a', being fast to the collar, will turn 
5o fully explains the nature and purpose of my 
39 the same plane with the seat parallel with which causes them to set squarely on the 8o 
4o duplicate, extending in opposite directions may be swiveled on the back to turn at right 9o 
45 Swinging the device upon the arm of the user, dles in any position. For this purpose the 95 
35 be used. 
- 
it is provided with the bowed handle or han- 85 
55 
IOO 
25 marked degree of convenience and ease. 
5 
O 
 
481,838 
with it. A quarter-revolution is sufficient 
with a spring g, which engages the stop af, 
turning for the handles. The other handle 
which is elongated, as shown, when the seat 
is set in the top of collar D, and is pro 
is set for use, and embraces the post A above 
vided with a squared bottom e, which can be 
the collar g' when folded The seat is pref 
pushed down to rest in a squared seat e' in 
erably made round, as shown. The chair will 
the base of handle a'. The spring e, abut 
make an ornamental room - chair when not 
ting at the top against a guide through which 
otherwise in use. It can be used as an Ornal 
the handle passes and at the bottom against 
mental stand, can readily be decorated, and 
a ring or stop fast upon the handle, serves to 
will serve as an ornamental easel for holding 
keep the squared end enormally down in seat 
pictures. 
e', which prevents it from being turned; but 
IIaving thus described my invention, what 
when it is desired to turn the handle a quar 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ter-revolution to bring it into position for 
ent, is 
use as a back, or to close the two handles to 
1. In a chair, the combination of a combined 
gether to be used as a handle, the spring e is 
leg and back A A', provided with the projec 
compressed by an upward pull upon the han 
tion a, extending horizontally beneath the 
dle (l, and when the end e leaves the seat e' 
horizontal line of the leg portion A beneath 
the handle can be turned to suit. The han 
the seat, the folding seat C, pivoted in front 
dle a' is correspondingly turned, as already 
to the top of the legs B B and provided at the 
described. 
back with the open spring-clampg for engag 
The seat C is pivoted at b to the posts or 
ing the horizontal projection a when the seat 
legs B B in front, and on rear it is provided 
is in a horizontal position, and the rod A when 
with a hinged slide C", which rides upon the 
the seat is folded, as set forth. 
post A', and rests upon a stop a when the 
2. A chair consisting of the legs B B, Com 
Seat is set horizontally and the chair is in 
bined leg and back A A' and seat C, pivoted 
condition for use, and rises above a spring a 
to legs B and movably connected to part A, 
when the chair is folded for packing or for and the handles a. a' upon the top of part A, 
being carried about. 
said handles each having a movement of a 
The chair can be made of light tough wood 
quarter-revolution, in the manner and for 
or of metal, and the seat can be made of bam 
the purpose set forth. 
boo cane or other material to suit the fancy 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
or afford lightness and security. As folded 
presence of two witnesses. 
into its compact position it can be employed 
as a cane by the user as he travels from point 
to point. 
As shown in Fig. 4, the seat is hinged to 
the top of the shorter legs, and is provided 
ENOCH ELIJAH. DE KALB. 
- 
Witnesses: 
L. M. KINNE, 
W.J. MCJURG. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431438.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. CLARK. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
I 
CASE INDICATOR AND REGISTER, 
No. 431,438, 
Patented July l' 1890, 
a  7  
 
 
 
 
MM 
22 
' 
KY 
\l 
EsF, LF E35 i: 
- y 
& 
I Zaggi:: 
ZEz g: 
27 7 as2 Es alla E 
3 
4 Z1 S'EC E 
& 
Z 
z 
 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZOZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZIZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
ZA 
---- 
 
 
 
 
 
a 
- 
 
(No Model.) 
W. H. CLARK 
CASH INDICATOR AND REGISTER. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 431438, 
Patented July 1, 1890. 
 
 
/ 
 
si 
3. 
/2 
a 
Z 
ZZ 
3. 
g 
43 
Sezzi i 
A 
  
| 
S5 
  
 
 
 
 
 
Z2 zzzzzzzzzi 
A 
  
2 
2 
E 
2 
Z 
AaygVar\ 
zzzZ 
2 
2 
v 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TE Noiris PETERs co, PHoTo-LTHowAsHNCroN, D. c. 
W. B. CLARK 
CASH INDICATOR AND REGISTER, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented July 1, 1890, 
(No Model.) 
No. 431438, 
 
Mnesses. 
777-- 
C 
4S- 
Inventor. 
& zam aZar 
4 266% 2. M 
46 
EORR15 PETEFisco, PHoTo-ko, wAsHNiroN, o 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
W. H. CLARK. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
e 
CASE INDICATOR AND REGISTER, 
- No, 431,438, 
Patented July 1, 1890, 
Witrg5595 
3 a---s 
VetOR 
A/2Zzcz . Zz, CZa?" /6 
 
- UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. CLARK, OF ALBION, PENINSYLVANIA. 
CASH IN DICATOR AND REGISTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,438, dated July 1, 1890, 
Application filed October 8, 1888, Reuewed December 5, 1889, Serial No, 332,6l4. (No model.) 
To alluvhom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. CLARK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Al 
bion, in the county of Erie and State of Penn 
5 sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Cash Indicators and Reg 
isters; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
IO in theart to which it appertains to make and 
I use thesame, reference beinghad to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters and nu 
merals of reference marked thereon, forming 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to cash - registers; 
and it consists in the novel construction and 
combination of the parts hereinafter fully de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front view 
2o of the interior of the machine, showing the 
key-levers and drawer in section. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical cross - section through the machine, 
taken online 2 z in Fig. 1, in the direction of 
the arrows. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section 
25 through the registeringandindicating wheels, 
i taken online acac in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a cross 
section, taken on line y y in Fig. 3, in the di 
rection of the arrows. Fig. 5isa perspective 
view of the indicating and registering mech 
3o anism. Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the out 
side of the machine. 
The inclosing-case 1isprovided with a cash 
drawer 2 at is lower part. A series of hori 
zontal key-levers 4 is provided, and the levers 
35 are pivoted on pinsa, projecting from a frame 
3 inside the case, and the front ends of said 
levers project through the vertical slots 5 in 
the front of the case andare provided with 
keys 6.. Thirty-six keys are shown; but the 
4o numbermaybe varied, if desired. These keys 
are arranged in eight vertical rows, and the 
numbers shown upon the case adjacent to the 
keysare preferablyplacedupon the keysthem 
selves in practice. The first two right-hand 
45 rows of keysare numbered for cents from one 
tonine, inclusive, and the second two rowsby 
tens, from tento ninety, inclusive. The third 
and fourth two rowsare numberedfor dollars 
in the same manner, as indicated by the fig 
5o ures on the front of the case. Eachtwo rows 
of key-leversare operated by similar devices 
 
55 
and in a similar manner, and the description 
will therefore be confined to the first two rows. 
Between the key-levers 4 is a rack-bar 8, pro 
vided with slots 9, whichslide upon the screws 
10, projecting from the frame. 
These screws 
forni guides for the bars to slide on, andare 
clearly shown at the left hand of Fig. 1, the 
return-spring being shown broken awayin the 
middle in orderto expose them. A cross 
piece 11 is secured to the rack-bar directly 
under each pair of key-levers 4, and 12 is a 
spiral spring secured to the cross-piece 13 of 
frame 3 and to the bottom cross-piece 11. 
This spring returns the rack-bar when the 
key is let go, and 8' is a stop at the top of 
the case for limiting the upward motion of 
said bar. Springs 7are secured to frame 3 
and bear against the sides of the key-levers, 
so that when the one-cent key is depressed, 
and with it the rack-bar and all the cross 
pieces 11 under the key-levers, the two-cent 
key and all the other keys operating the same 
rack-bar remain stationary by frictional con 
tact with said springs 7, although the cross 
pieces 11 no longer support them. Stops b 
project from frame 3 and limit the downward 
motion of the key-levers in proportion to their 
denomination-that is to say, for example, 
the four-cent key-lever stop is arranged at 
such a distance beneath it that the four-cent 
lever may depress the rack-bar twice the dis 
tance of the travel of the two-cent lever as 
limited by its stop. 
A non-revoluble shaft 14 is secured by 
brackets 15 to the upper part of frame 3, and 
14' is aloose sleeve journaled on said shaft. 
A pinion 16, having ten teeth, is journaled 
loosely upon the said sleeve and gears into 
the rack-bar. An indicating-wheel 17 is se 
cured to the said toothed pinion, and is pro 
vided with figures from 1 to 0, inclusive, which 
are visible through the opening 53 in front of 
the case. A ratchet-wheel 19 is secured to 
the sleeve 14' inside the indicating-wheel 17', 
and a combined registering and ratchet wheel 
18issecured to the opposite end of the sleeve 
beyond the toothed pinion. The registering 
ratchet-wheel 18.is provided with a series of 
numbers from 1 to 0, inclusive. A disk 22 is 
secured byits collar21 toshaft 14 at the left 
hand of the end of each of the loose sleeves 
65 
75 
95 
OC 
2 
431,438 
O 
14', and the edge of this disk is cutaway upon 
machine cannot actuntil the said drawer has 
oneside. From each ratchet-wheel 19 an arm 
been unlocked and drawn forward. This 
23 extends laterally to the left hand over the 
mechanism consists of two parallel bars 29 
disk 22 and partially over the ratchet-wheel 
and 30, which slide crosswise in guides31, se 
18 upon the next adjacent loose sleeve. A 
cured to frame 3. Spring-actuated pawls 27 
spring-actuated dog 24 is pivoted upon the 
are provided, andare pivoted on pins 27', pro 
end of arm 23 and normally rides upon 
jecting from uprights 29', secured to frame 
the edge of disk 22, out of contact with the 
3. The pawls 27 project upwardly and en 
ratchet registering-wheel to the left of said 
gage with notches 25 in the rack-bars, and the 
disk. Each time the dog comes to the cut 
said pawls are coupled to bar 30. When the 
away portion of said disk, which it does once 
pawls 27 are in the notches 25, the rack-bars 
in each revolution of ratchet-wheel 19, it falls 
cannot be depressed. The pawls 28 project 
into gear with the said ratchet registering 
downwardly andare pivoted on pins 28'. The 
wheel and moves it one-tenth of a revolution 
pawls 28 engage with notches 26 in the rack 
around. The ratchet-wheel 19 is connected 
bars, andare coupled to the bar 29 by pins 
to the indicating-wheel 17' on its right hand 
33. When the pawls 28 are in the notches 
by means of the spring-actuated dog 20. 
26, the rack-bars cannot be moved upward. 
When the one-cent key is depressed, it moves 
The opening of the drawer disengages all the 
the right-hand rack-bar and turns the right 
pawls in the following manner: Alever 34 is 
hand pinion 16 one tooth around. The indi 
pivoted to the case on pin 35, and has its up 
cator-wheel 17', secured to said pinion, indi 
per end connected to the end of bar 30. An 
cates one cent, and the dog 20 turns the 
inclined plate 36 inside the drawer operates 
ratchet-wheel 19, and with it the registering 
the lower endl of lever 34 When the drawer is 
wheel 1S, secured upon the same sleeve 14' 
pulled out, thereby traversing the bar 30 to 
with said ratchet-wheel 19, and the register 
the left and disengaging the pawls 27 from the 
ing-Wheel registers one cent. When more 
rack-bar. To operate bar 29, a lever 37 is 
than nine cents have been run up on the right 
pivoted to the case on pin 38 at its upper end 
hand registering-wheel by the right-hand 
and is connected to bar 29 about the middle 
rack-bar, every tenth cent is carried on and 
of its length. The lower end of lever 37 is 
is registered upon the registering-wheel 1S 
preferably provided with a vertically-sliding 
on the left hand of the aforesaid ratchet 
extension-piece 38, secured to it by a band 
wheel 19 by means of the spring-dog 24, be 
38. An inclined plate 40 inside the drawer 
fore described. 
operates the extension-piece when lowered 
Springs 24' are secured to cross-bar 13 and 
sufficiently to bear against it, so that when 
engage with the ratchet registering-wheels 1S, 
the drawer is pulled open the bar 29 is trav 
so that they cannot be turned backward. All 
ersed to the left, disengaging the pawls 28 
the remaining rack-bars and indicating 
from the rack-bal's. This locking apparatus 
wheels are similar to those before described. 
can be wholly or partially thrown out of ac 
An additional registering-wheel is provided 
tion When required. A lever 44 ispivoted to 
at the extreme left of shaft 14. This wheel 
the case on pin 44", and has its lower end con 
is made in two parts for convenience-18, 
nected to the end of bar 30. A pivoted catch 
which carries the numbers, and 18, which 
42 is provided at the top of the lever. When 
carries the ratchet-teeth. These two parts are 
the bar 30 is traversed to the left and the 
secured together andare journaled directly pawls are out of gear, this catch canbe turned 
upon the shaft 14. The ratchet-teeth are op 
so as to retain the lever 44 and prevent the 
erated by means of a spring-dog and disk22, 
bar from being slid back by the pressure of 
as before described. This left-hand register 
the springs behind the pawls. 
A lever 43 is 
ing-wheel enables the machine to register 
also pivoted to the frame on pin 43' and is 
the total of the amounts taken up to S999.99, 
provided with a pivoted catch 41 which can 
while separate amounts are indicated up to 
be turned to hold the lever 43 in position, 
S99.99 only, which is sufficient for ordinary 
with its bottom end preventing the return 
business requirements. 
motion of the bar 29 toward the right after.it 
The drawer is preferably provided with a 
has been moved to the left to disengage the 
combination-lock4Sof approvedconstruction. 
pawls 28 from the rack-bars, 
51 are the actuating-keys of this lock at the 
front of the case. A bell 45 is Secured to the 
case and is provided with a pivoted hammer 
46. A catch 46' on the rear of the drawer 
raises the hammer, as shown in Fig. 2, when 
the drawer is closed. VVhen the drawer is 
pulled out suddenly, the catch releases the 
hammer and the spring 47 causes it to strike 
the bell. 
The machine may be used as described; but 
in order to guard against improper use the 
drawer is provided with a good lock, and 
locking mechanism is arranged so that the 
VVhat I claim is 
1. The combination, with a revoluble indi, 
cator-wheel 17', having a toothed operating 
pinion secured to it, of a registering-wheel 18, 
journaled on the same axis as the said indi 
cator-wheel, a ratchet-Wheel 19 positively con 
nected to said registering-wheel, a spring 
actuated dog pivoted to the indicator-wheel 
andengaging withratchet-wheel 19, anda fixed 
spring 24, engaging with the said registering 
Wheel and preventingitfrom revolving back 
Ward, substantially asset forth. 
2. The combination, with a revoluble indi 
35 
55 
 
75 
95 
I OO 
E. IO 
II 5 
431,438 
45 
55 
75 
notches 25, of the pivoted spring-actuated 
pawls 27, engaging with said notches, and nor 
mally preventing the downward movement 
of the rack-bars, the sliding bar 30, pivoted 
to said pawls, the pivoted lever34, connected 
to said bar 30, and the inclined plate 36 on 
the cash-drawer for operating said leverand 
disengaging the said pawls from the rack 
bars, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the rack-bars 8, 
provided with notches, and spring-actuated 
pawls engaging with said notches and nor 
mally preventing the rack-bars from moving, 
of a sliding bar pivoted to the pawls for 
drawing them out of gear with the rack-bars, 
a pivoted lever operating on one end of said 
sliding bar, and a pivoted catch forretaining 
said lever and preventing the return of the 
sliding bar, substantially as and for the pur 
N 
pose set forth. 
7. The combination, with the vertically 
reciprocating rack-bars 8, provided with 
notches 26, of the pivoted spring-actuated 
pawls 28, engaging with said notches and nor 
mally preventing the upward movement of 
the rack-bars, the sliding bar 29, pivoted to 
said pawls, the pivoted lever 37, and the in 
clined plate 40, secured on the cash-drawer 
and adapted to operate said lever and disen 
gage the pawls from the rack-bars, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
8. The combination, with the sliding drawer 
provided with a stop 46', of the bell behind the 
drawer, the pivoted hammer having its lever 
operated by said stop, and the spring 47 for 
causing the said hammer to ring the bell 
when the drawer is opened suddenly, sub 
stantially asset forth. 
In testimonywhereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
VVILLIAM II. CLARX. 
VVitnesses: 
WM. P. HAVES, 
C.B. HAYES. 
O 
cator-wheel 17', having a toothed operating 
pinion secured to it, of a registering-wheel 18, 
journaled on the same axis as the said indi 
cator-wheel, a ratchet-wheel 19 positively con 
nected to said registering-wheel, a spring 
actuated dog pivoted to the indicator-wheel 
and engaging with ratchet-wheel 19, a fixed 
spring 24', engaging with the said registering 
wheel and preventingitfrom revolving back 
ward, a second revoluble registering-wheel, 
also journaled on the same axis as the said 
indicator-wheel, a non-revoluble disk 22, hav 
ing one side cut away, and a spring-actuated 
dog 24, pivoted to the ratchet-wheel 19 and 
bearing on said disk 22, for engaging with 
the said second registering-wheelatintervals, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the non-revolu 
ble shaft 14, of a sleeve 14, journaled on said 
shaft, a ratchet-wheel 19, secured on one end 
of the sleeve, a combined registering and 
ratchet wheel secured on the other end of 
said sleeve, an indicator-wheel 17', having a 
toothed operating-pinion 16 secured to itand 
journaled loosely on the middle of said sleeve, 
a spring-actuated dog 20, pivoted to the indi 
cator-wheel and engaging with ratchet-wheel 
19, and a fixed spring 24, engaging with said 
registering ratchet-wheel and preventing its 
backward movement, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. The combination, with a revoluble indi 
cator-wheel 17', having a toothed pinion 16 
secured to it, of a vertically-reciprocating 
rack-bar 8, gearing into said pinion and pro 
vided with notches 25 and 26 in its lower 
end, a key-lever 4, and a spring 12 for oper 
ating the said rack-bar, and removable lock 
i ing-pawls 27 and 28, projecting upwardly and 
downwardly and normally preventing the mo 
tion of the rack-bar, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination, with the vertically 
reciprocating rack - bars 8, provided with 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431538.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 431,538, 
A Zez. 7 
J. WOSBURGH. 
FLOOR AND PARTITION THIMBLE, 
Patented July 1, 1890. 
A. 
D 
C 
a. 
d 
a 
d' 
2 
-- a 
B 
 
... ZZerez /or 
% C2-4642% 
2- 4/7 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOBVOSBURGH, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO THE N. O. NELSO 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FLOOR AND PARTITION THIMBLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,538, dated July 1, 1890. 
Application filed November 4, 1889, Serial No, 329,237. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB WOSBURGH, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of the city of St. Louis and State of Missouri, 
5 have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Floor and Partition. Thimbles, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to thimbles such as 
are used to prevent injury to wood-work by 
heat from steam-pipes passing through floors, 
ceilings, and partitions, and chiefly to that 
class of such thimbles which is adapted to 
be lengthened or shortened, so as to fit within 
certain limits, whether the partition, wall, or 
the flooring, joists, and ceiling, as the case 
may be, are thick or thin. 
The chief objects of my improvement alre, 
first, to lessen the number of necessary parts; 
Second, to make it possible to get an exact: 
2d fit, and, third, to so form the parts as to make 
it easy to put them in place and fasten them 
together with the least possible labor, and 
without making any opening in the floor or 
Wall, except one just large enough to permit 
of the thimbles being inserted. 
Another object whichI gain where the pref 
erable form of my improved thimble is used 
is a more perfect protection from fire than is 
obtained where the old thimbles with which 
I am acquainted are used. 
I attain the objects above mentioned by 
the mechanism illustrated by the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my thimble 
in its preferred form in place with the steam 
pipe passing through it. Fig. 2 is a view 
showing the two parts of the thimble in ele 
vation, but detached from each other. The 
packing is shown in section. Fig. 3 is a lon 
4o gitudinal section of the thimble, the parts 
being united. Fig. 4 is a bottom end view of 
the thimble. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The thimble is tubular and is formed in 
two parts-A and B. A is large enough at its 
inner end to receive the inner end of B. 
45 
25 
35 
C is a flange or collar. 
a' is a covering of asbestus. 
55 
a is a screw-thread on the inside of the 
part A. 
b is a screw-thread on the outside of the 
inner end of B, adapted to engage with the 
screw-thread a. 
b' is a flange or collar on the outer end of B. 
b is a covering of asbestus. 
b b are screw-holes. 
When the thimble is being screwedin place, 
the point of a hook-Wrench may be inserted 
therein and greater ease in screwing the thim 
ble up secured. 
C is a steam-pipe. 
In the drawings, A is the upper and B the 
lower part; but the positions of the parts 
may be reversed, if desired. 
The flanges a, and b are preferably formed 
integral with the parts of the thimble to 
which they are respectively connected; but 
they may be formed out of separate pieces 
and attached to the thimble in any way de 
sired, but preferably so as to turn with the 
connected part. The collars may, for in 
stance, beformed with a hole in the center 
and slipped over the inner end of the parts to 
which they are to be attached, and the outer 
end of such part may be so formed as to pre 
vent the collars either turning or slipping off. 
The thimble may be made of any fire-proof 
material. Where metal is used, I prefer to 
cover the necks of the thimble and the inner 
sides of the flanges with a substance which 
is a poor conductor of heat-such as asbes 
tus-as it insures a more perfect protection 
from fire; but such covering is not essential. 
The screw-thread should preferably extend 
some distance out from the inner end of one 
of the parts, so as to permit of the thimbles 
being shortened by screwing the parts B into 
the part. A for some distance, if desired. 
The thimble need not be attached in place 
by any outside fastening; but, if desired, 
screws may be passed through the holes bb 
and into the ceiling d. 
The parts are put in place as follows: A 
hole is made through the floor and ceiling or 
the partition-wall, as the case maybe, through 
which the steam-pipe is to pass, and the small 
end of one part of the thimble is inserted 
go 
95 
2 
431,588 
from one side and the small end of the other it supports nothing, but is itself supported 
by the upper section, this is immaterial; also, 
part from the other side, and the two parts 
as the threads b engage in the broad spaces 
are attached together by screwing the inner 
between the threads a (see Fig. 3) there is 
end of one part into the inner end of the 
much less danger of binding than if the 
other until the flanges are brought into close 
threads engaged in the ordinary manner. 
contact with the surfaces next thereto, as 
Thus the two sections close together or move 
shown in Fig. 1. After the thimble is in 
place the steam-pipe C is passed through it. 
apart to accommodate the thimble to the fluct 
luations of the floor and ceiling therebelow 
It is preferably a loose fit, so as to permit air 
or to two sections of a partition. 
to pass around it through the thimble, as 
well as for other purposes. 
D, Fig. 1, represents a floor, in which the 
improved thimble is inserted. 
d represents the upper side of the floor, and 
d' the ceiling. 
The part D may also represent a partition. 
It should be particularly noted that the 
part or section. A has instanding threads C, 
and that the threaded and unthreaded parts 
thereof are equal in diameter, and that the 
part or section B has outstanding threads b, 
and that the said threads b engage within the 
section A above the instanding threads a, 
so that the lower section B can be lifted in 
the section A without strain or breakage, the 
two sections thus yielding or giving in order 
to shorten or lengthen the thimble, so that it 
may accommodate itself to the jars or tremors 
of the parts of the floor or partition to which 
it is attached, as the threads b can rise and 
fall in the spaces between the threads a. 
This would be impossible with two sections 
having regularly - engaging screw-threads. 
Moreover, the upper section A, being of equal 
5 diameter throughout, can be more snugly 
fitted into its opening in the floor D, and re 
Quires a smaller opening therein than if it 
had outstanding threads, and the smaller said 
opening is the better, as the upper section is 
the supporting-section, which, if it had out 
standing threads, must have its part there 
above enlarged in diameter. The lower sec 
tion B has its lower end thus enlarged; but as 
What I claim is 
1. A pipe-thimble composed of two parts 
or sections, the upper and wider section be 
ing provided with instanding threads spaced 
a sufficient distance apart, and the lower and 
narrower section being provided with out 
standing threads of less width than the 
spaces between the thread of the upper sec 
tion and arranged to engage internally be 
tween the threads of the upper section, Sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. A pipe-thimble composed of an upper 
section of equal diameter throughout, pro 
vided with an outstanding circumferential 
flange at its upper end to rest on the floor 
when the section is inserted in an opening 
therein and having instanding screw-threads 
spaced a suitable distance apart, and a lower 
section having an outstanding circumferen 
tial flange on its lower end and provided with 
outstanding screw-threads of less width than 
the spaces between the threads of the upper 
section, the lower surfaces of which engage 
on the upper surfaces of the instanding 
threads of the upper section and permit the 
two sections to close in or open out, and thus 
automatically adjust the length of the thim 
ble, substantially as specified. 
Witness my hand this 31st of October, 1889. 
JACOB WOSBURGH. 
Witnesses: 
C. D. MooDY, 
D. W. C. SANFORD. 
25 
45 
50 
75 
3: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431639.txt	(No Model.) 
B. ASCHENBACH, 
WINDOW FRAME 
No. 431,639, 
Patented July 8, 1890. 
 
Artere 4 c/verbac-A- 
334 1uld eletovoi. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BRUNO ASCHENBACH, OF ST. JOSEPH, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
Y TO JOHN A. VEY, OF SAME PLACE. 
WNDOW. FRAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,639, dated July 8, 1890. 
Application filed November 30, 1889, Serial No,332,069, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all Zwhom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BRUNO ASCHENBACH, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at St. Joseph, in the county of Bul 
chanan and State of Missouri, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Win 
dow-Frames; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in window-frames and 
Sashes therefor; and it consists in the con 
struction and combination of the parts, as 
will be hereinafter fully set forth, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
sash-frame with guide-strips, one of which is 
held rigidly in place, while the other is mov 
able and is held in contact with the sashes by 
springs to prevent rattling thereof. 
My invention also consists in providing the 
Sash-guides or vertical strips with grooved 
rollers, over which the sash-cords pass, the 
guide-strips above said rollers being grooved. 
My invention also consists in providing a 
sash-Weight having a longitudinal recess, 
within which the inner side of the sash guide 
strip lies to effect the proper vertical move 
ment of the said weight, and thus dispense 
With the usual boxes. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of a window frame and sash, 
parts thereof being broken away to better 
illustrate the construction. Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse section taken on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a detail perspective view of a sec 
tion of one of the guide-strips removed. Fig. 
4 is a perspective view of one of the sash 
weights removed. 
A indicates the window-frame, and B and 
B' the upper and lower sashes. The window 
frame A is preferably made up of top and 
bottom transverse pieces, outer vertical side 
pieces, and inner vertical strips a a, which 
are parallel with each other, and between 
TO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
which are located the guide-strips C for the 
sash-frames. These guide-strips C C are 
either made up of a single piece or they may 
be made of a central strip C', to which are 
rigidly attached side pieces C and C, the 
part C being located above the rollers D, 
which are mounted upon a shaft passing 
through the central portion of the guide-strip. 
The upper short sections Chave their lower 
edges immediately above the pulleys or roll 
ers grooved to provide, in connection with the 
grooved faces of the rollers, a circular open 
ing, through which the sash-cord passes, thus 
permitting the lower edges of the upper sec 
tions to be placed very near the pulleys to 
prevent the sash-cords becoming displaced. 
The rollers D are loosely mounted on journals 
and rotate independently. 
One of the guide-strips on one side of the 
window-frame is rigidly secured between the 
strips at a, while the opposite strip has at its 
upper and lower portions projecting lugs f, 
which are adapted to abut against the inner 
sides of the vertical strips a. a. and limit the 
inward movement of the guide-strip, and this 
movable guide-strip is pressed inwardly by 
springs gg, attached to the inner side of the 
outer casing, the ends thereof bearing against 
the inner side of the guide-strip. By this 
construction one of the guide-strips is mov 
able inwardly, and will bear upon the sash 
so as to prevent rattling and at the same time 
make a tight joint, which will exclude air, 
&c. By having one of the strips movable the 
sashes can be readily removed. 
One of the strips a on its outer edge is pro 
vided near its upper and lower ends with in 
Wardly-projecting plates h, having perfora 
tions through which pins are passed, said 
pins also engaging with perforationsk, formed 
in the upper and lower ends of the guide 
strips, and when these pins are inserted the 
guide-strip will be held immovable. The 
movable guide-strip can be held inwardly or 
outwardly, as may be desired, by either pass 
ing the pin through the perforations, as ex 
plained, or simply letting it bear transversely 
across the rear edges of said guide-strips. 
If desirable, the inner faces of the guide 
strips which lie within the recesses in the 
go 
95 
Od 
481,639 
sash-frames may be grooved or recessed, as 
shown at y in Fig. 2, so as to form with the 
vertical recesses in the edges of the movable 
sashes circular openings in which the sash 
cords will lie, this construction also partly 
hiding the sash-cords when the sashes are 
lowered. 
It will be observed by the construction 
hereinbefore described that I dispense with 
boxes for the sash-weights, and in order that 
said sash-Weights may move vertically in the 
Space provided therefor I provide the inner 
faces of the sash-weights with longitudinal 
grooves or recesses av, in which the inner faces 
of each of the guide-strips formed by the sec 
tions CC will lie, and as each of said guide 
strips are separated from each other by the 
central portion C, hereinbefore described, the 
Sash-weights will move upon the projecting 
portions, and boxes therefor are dispensed 
With. It will also be observed that the sashes 
can be held in position so as to move easily 
up and down, that they may belocked against 
complete removal by causing one of the guide 
Strips to bear upon the same, and that the 
Vertical guide-strips not only serve as guides 
for the sashes but also as guides for the sash 
weights. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a window-frame con 
structed substantially as shown and provided 
with vertical slots or recesses, of guide-strips 
having inwardly, and outwardly projecting 
side pieces located within said vertical re 
cesses and each composed of upper and lower 
sections, rollers secured to the central portion 
of said guide-strips between the upper and 
lower sections of the side pieces, one of said 
guide-strips being rigidly secured in place 
While the other is held by springs to bear 
upon the sashes, and sash-cords and weights, 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
- 
substantially as shown, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. The combination, in a window-frame, of 
guide-strips provided with side pieces consist 
ing of upper and lower sections, and grooved 
rollers between said upper and lower sections, 
the edge of each upper section adjacent to 
the roller being recessed, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. The combination, in a window-frame, of 
the guide-strips, the inner faces of said guide 
strips having concave recesses, grooved pull 
leys, weights, and sash-cords, substantially as 
shown, and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with guide-strips hav 
ing inner and outer flanges, of sash-Weights 
having longitudinal grooves which are adapt 
ed to fit over the rear flanges of the guide 
strips, substantially as shown, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
5. A window-frame having vertical strips Ct. 
a, guide-strips located between the same, said 
guide-strips having a central portion and side 
flanges, grooved rollers secured to the central 
strips on a line with the side flanges, the face 
of said roller and the inner face of the guide 
strip having semicircular recesses, springs 
for holding one of the guide-strips against the 
sashes, and projecting strips for limiting the 
forward play of said guide-strips, sash-cords 
attached to the sashes and weights, the 
weights being provided with longitudinal 
grooves, so that they will move upon the in 
wardly-projecting portions of the guide-strips, 
substantially as shown, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
. 
BRUNO ASCHENBACH. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN VEY, 
U. SCHNELDER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431739.txt	(No Model. ) 
W. BUHLMAN. 
HYDRAULIC NOZZLE FOR WATER, WHEELS. 
No. 431,739. 
Patented July 8, 1890. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM BUHLMAN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
HYDRAULIC NOZZLE FOR WATER-WHEELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,739, dated July 8, 1890. 
Application filed November 24, 1888, Serial No. 291,738, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM BUHLMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have made certain new and useful Im 
provements in a Hydraulic Nozzle for Water 
Wheels, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, that will enable others 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
a nozzle for delivering a stream of water to a 
Water-wheel for the purpose of increasing the 
force and effectiveness of the jet, and there 
by adding to the power of the wheel. 
Figure 1 is a plan of a turbine water-wheel, 
showing the relative position of my improve 
ment; Fig. 2, a perspective of the nozzle; and 
Fig. 3, a transverse section of the same in 
plane 3, Fig. 1. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
nozzle, and B the motor or water-wheel. The 
delivery-nozzle is of a wedge-shape, terminat 
ing in the irectangular discharge or jet open 
ing at. The dimensions or width of the dis 
charge end of the nozzle will usually depend 
on the width of the buckets in the motor 
wheel, so as to afford the best results. The 
inlet end of the nozzle is square in form, and 
is provided with the round threaded aperture 
C, for the attachment of the hose or service 
pipe d, connecting with the water-supply. 
This end of the nozzle is also made, as shown 
in the drawings, of very large capacity rela 
tive to that of the service-pipe opening in its 
end wall. Thus constructed, there is provided 
in the rear or inlet end of the nozzle a reser 
voir which plays an important part in equal 
izing the pressure of the stream delivered 
from the narrow rectangular opening at its 
discharge end. 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
By gradually contracting the nozzle in the 
form of a wedge, the volume of water is de 
livered through a rectangular orifice, thereby 
Increasing the effective force of the same and 
striking the surface of the buckets their en 
tire width and adding to the power of the 
wheel. 
D is the inlet-passage to the wheel,in which 
the contracted rectangular end of the nozzle 
is inserted, and D' the discharge from the 
wheel. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A hydraulic nozzle for water-wheels of 
the form described-that is to say, of uniform 
width throughout its length, square in cross 
tion at the end, where it is connected to the 
service-pipe, and being at that end of large 
capacity relative to the round threaded serv 
ice-pipe aperture C in its end wall, and taper 
ing gradually in depth toward its discharge 
end, where it terminates in the long narrow 
rectangular jet-opening C, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In combination with a water-wheel hav 
ing the inlet-passage D, a separate nozzle 
therefor of the form described-viz., of uni 
form width throughout its length, square in 
cross-section at the end where connected to 
the service-pipe, and being at that end of 
large capacity relative to the circular thread 
ed service-pipe aperture in its end wall and 
tapering gradually in depth toward its dis 
charge end, where it terminates in a Square 
end having the long, narrow, and rectangu 
lar jet-opening a, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
WILLIAM BUHLMAN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN WALLACK, 
L. B. COUPLAND. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431839.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 431,839, 
 
W. BUSSARD. 
STEEL, OR METAL RAILWAY TIE, 
Patented July 8, 1890, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM BUSSARD, OF PORT JEFFERSON, OHIO. 
STEEL OR METAL RAILWAY-TE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,839, dated July 8, 1890. 
Application filed March 19, 1890, Serial No, 344,558, (No model.) 
O 
- 
- 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM BUSSARD, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Port 
Jefferson, in the county of Shelby and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Steel or Metal Railway 
Ties; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
This invention relates to metal railroad 
rail ties, and aims to provide a tie which will 
be essentially a cast-metal tie and which will 
be cast in one piece, except two keys for 
clamping the rails to their seats and the side 
guards. 
The improvement consists of the novel fea 
tures which will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and claimed, and which are shown in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a tie em 
bodying my invention, showing its applica 
tion. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of one end 
of the tie, the rail and key being removed. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the key. Fig. 
4 is an end view showing a modification. Fig. 
5 is a side view, parts being broken away, of 
the angle-iron or guard, showing its applica 
tion to the tie. 
The tie comprises a base-plate A of proper 
width and length, having raised portions B 
near each end, which are channeled or grooved 
at b to form chairs for the rails C. The chan 
nel b in the raised portions B leaves a ribb' 
on each side of the said channel, which ribs 
embrace the sides of the foot of the rails C. 
To strengthen the base A and the ribs b' a 
series of braces D and E are provided. The 
braces D are located between the rail-chairs, 
and their ends d overhang the channels or 
recesses b to extend over the foot of the rails. 
The braces E are arranged exterior to the 
said raised portions or rail-chairs B, and their 
ends e are adapted to hold the keys F down, 
- 
25 
35 
45 
 
which are inserted between the side of the 
rails and the side of the channel b. The key 
F is slightly tapering in form, and is provided 
with a lipf, which is designed to project over 
the foot of the rail and with the ends d of the 
braces D hold the rail firmly and securely in 
the chair. The base, rail-chairs, and braces 
are cast in one piece for the sake of economy 
and durability, there being no pieces to se 
cure together and no joints to work loose. 
For ballasting the ties, side guards G are 
provided. These guards are angle-irons, 
which are placed on each side of the tie, be 
ing secured thereto at the ends by two bolts 
H and I, which embrace the base between 
them and pass through the vertical members 
of the irons. (See Fig. 4.) The guards have 
depressions h to receive the rails, Fig. 5. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I desire to secure and claim by Letters Pat 
ent is 
1. A metal railroad-rail tie comprising a 
base having raised portions near each end 
which are channeled or recessed to receive 
the rails, a series of braces D, extending from 
the inner side of the raised portion at one to 
the inner side of the raised portion at the 
other end, and the braces E between the outer 
ends of the base and the outer sides of said 
raised portions, the inner ends of the said 
braces projecting over the said recesses or 
channels to secure the rails in place, the base 
and the braces being integrally formed, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the tie, of the an 
gle-irons having depressions to receive the 
rails placed on each side of the tie, and the 
bolts H and I for securing the said irons in 
place, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM BUSSARD. 
Witnesses: 
E. B. HONNELL, 
G. W. DEBOBEN. 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US431939.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 431,939, 
T. F. FALLON. 
PIPETESTING DEWICE, . 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 8, 1890. 
 
- 
. 
N 
  
2. 
M 
 
4- 
 
 
  
E. 
u 
 
S- S 
e 
II, 43%. 2,34 
I 
at 2 22 
E. 5te Es in A2 
| 
It 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
e. 
 
ZZezeze27: 
(No Model.) 
T. F. FALLON. 
PIPE TESTING DEWICE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 431,939, 
Patented July 8, 1890, 
 
Zez/672zoz. 
Z2222easy ZZ26%272. 
-3%-22s, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS F. FALLON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PIPE-TESTING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 431,939, dated July 8, 1890. 
Application filed March 11, 1890, Serial No, 343,537. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS F. FALLON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Pipe-Testing Devices, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
novel, simple, and efficient means for closing 
the ends of pipes air and water tight while 
being tested by internal fluid-pressure to de 
termine if they are free from imperfections 
and suitable for the conditions required in a 
waste or other pipe. 
To accomplish this object my invention in 
Wolves the features of construction and the 
combination and arrangement of parts here 
inafter described and claimed, reference be 
ing made to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation showing my in 
vention applied to the socket or flanged end 
of a pipe. Fig. 2 is a sectional side elevation 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a detailperspective view 
of the pipe-closing device. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tional view showing a modified construction 
of the stopper-cap. Fig. 5 is a detail top plan 
view of the cap shown in Fig. 4. Figs. 6 and 
7 are respectively a side elevation and an end 
view showing a collar to be used with flange 
less pipes. 
In order to enable those skilled in the art 
to make and use my invention, I will now de 
scribe the same in detail, referring to the 
drawings, wherein 
The numeral 1 indicates an ordinary Waste 
or soilpipehaving an end socket or collar2, and 
3 indicates the stopper-cap for closing the end 
of the pipe air and water tight. The cap is 
provided with two or more laterally-project 
ing ears or lugs 4, and with an annular cham 
ber or cavity 5 to receive and fit the end of 
the pipe, this chamber or cavity having its 
bottom Wall countersunk, as at 6, to form a 
groove for containing and holding an annular 
packing-ring 7, of elastic or other material, 
suitable to make an air and water tight joint 
when the cap is clamped upon the end of the 
pipe. The chamber or cavity 5 is in prac 
tice about three-quarters of an inch in depth, 
so that an annular rim is formed Which Over 
lies the exterior of the pipe end to that ex 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
tent, and thus facilitates the application of 
the cap and the formation of a nice joint, A 
screw-rod 8, having a finger-piece or other 
suitable head 9, passes through an orifice in 
each of the ears or lugs 4, and below the 
Same extends through and engages a Screw 
threaded socket 10, formed centrally between 
the ends of a segmental plate 12, which I will 
term a grip. I have exhibited but two 
screw-rods and two segmental grips; but ob 
viously the number may be increased, if de 
sired, and therefore I do not confine myself 
to two of each. The grips on their inner 
faces conform to the circular shape of the 
pipe, and are designed to engage with the 
annular inner end of the enlargement formed 
by the pipe socket or collar 2. 
In practice the stopper-cap is placed over 
the end of the pipe and the grips placed to 
embrace the pipe and then engaged by their 
screw-threaded sockets with the screw - rods, 
after which the latter are rotated as the grips 
hug the pipe, and are thereby prevented from 
turning with the screw-rods. Such grips are 
caused to advance along the pipe until they 
abut the inner end of the pipe socket or col 
lar. The tightening up of the screw - rods 
causes the stopper-cap to be firmly clamped 
upon the end of the pipe, thereby closing such 
end air and water tight, after which the pipe 
may be tested by internal fluid-pressure in 
the usual manner. 
The orifices in the stopper - cap and the 
screw-sockets in the segmental grips are ar 
ranged at an inclination or angle to the lon 
gitudinal axis of the pipe - that is, the two 
orifices in the cap diverge and likewise the 
two sockets in the grip diverge-so that when 
the screw-rods engage the parts they diverge 
from the finger-pieces toward their screw 
threaded extremities. By this peculiar ar 
rangement when the screws are tightened up, 
the grip-pieces are caused to move toward each 
other and grip the pipe, thereby obtaining a 
very secure and steadyattachment of the pipe 
closing devices with the pipe. 
In the construction shown by Figs. 1, 2, and 
3 of the drawings, the pipe-closing devices can 
only be removed from the pipe by unscrew 
ing the screw-rods from engagement with the 
grips; but in the construction shown in Figs. 
4 and 5 the orifices in the stopper-cap 3 are 
95 
OD 
2 
431,939 
formed as slots 13 with open outer ends, 
whereby the screw - rods carrying the seg 
mental grips 12 can be engaged with and dis 
engaged from the stopper cap by laterally 
5 moving the screw-rods into and from the slots. 
If pipes having no end sockets or collars 
are to be tested, an attachable and detachable 
collar 14, Eigs. 6 and 7, is provided, which can 
be applied over the end of the pipe and rig 
Io idly clamped thereto by any desired number 
of set-screws 15, as will be obvious, thereby 
forming the abutment required on the pipe 
for the segmental grips to bear against. 
The stopper-cap is imperforate as regards 
15 that part inside the ears or lugs, and hence it 
serves as a closing device, which is clamped 
On the open end of the pipe by the action of 
the screw-rods and the separate or independ 
ent segmental grips, and the construction and 
2O combination provide very simple and efficient 
means whereby soil, waste, and other pipes. 
used by plumbers in buildings, can be tested 
by internal fluid-pressure. 
To introduce the water, air, or other test 
25 ing-fluid the stopper-cap may be provided 
with a central orifice having a female thread, 
into which is screwed one screw-threaded nip 
ple of a stop. cock or valve 16, the other nip 
ple being adapted to connect with the source 
of fluid-supply. If water is used as the test 
ing-fluid, the cock or valve may, after the test, 
be connected with a hose to run the water 
from the pipe into a sewer or other place. 
As I do not confine myself to any special 
35 means for applying the fluid-pressure, further 
explanation is deemed unnecessary. 
Any contridances suitable for the condi 
tions required may be adapted for introduc 
ing the fluid into the pipe and for removing 
Having thus described my invention, wha 
I claim is- 
1. In a pipe-testing device, the combination 
of a stopper-cap to bear upon and close the 
45 end of a pipe, a series of independent seg 
mental grips to embrace the pipe; each formed 
with a screw-threaded socket, and an inde 
4o the fluid therefrom when desired. 
- 
3. In a pipe-testing device, the combination 6o 
pendent screw-rod for each grip engaged with 
the stopper-cap and having a direct screw 
engagement with the socket of the grip, Sub- 5o 
stantially as described. 
2. In a pipe-testing device, the combination, 
with the stopper-cap to bear upon and close 
the end of a pipe, a series of grips to embrace 
the pipe, and a series of diverging screw-rods 55 
engaging the stopper-cap and grips and serv 
ing to move the latter along a pipe and also 
inwardly toward each other, substantially as 
described. 
of a stopper-cap having a chamber forming 
an annular rim to overlie the exterior of a 
pipe end, a series of grips to embrace the 
pipe, and an independent screw-rod for each 
grip engaged with the stopper-cap outside its 65 
chamber and having a screw-threaded con 
nection with the grip, substantially as-de 
scribed. 
4. In a pipe-testing machine, the combina 
tion of a stopper-cap adapted to close the end 7o 
of a pipe and provided with slots having open 
ends, a series of segmental grips to embrace. 
the pipe and move along the length thereof, 
and screw-rods laterally removable from the 
open end slots and having a screw-threaded 75 
engagement with the grips, substantially as 
described. 
5. In a pipe-testing machine, the combina 
tion of a stopper-cap adapted to bear upon 
and close the open end of a pipe and having 8o 
orifices, a series of segmental grips adapted 
to embrace and move along the length of the 
pipe to abut a collar thereon, and a series of 
independent screw-rods - which engage the 
stopper-cap and grip and operate to move the 85 
grips along the pipe against the pipe-collar 
to clamp the stopper-cap in place, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
TIOMAS F. FAILLON. 
Witnesses: 
W. S. BARNUM, 
S. G. HYATT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432039.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. HARKNESS, 
CAR, COUPLING, 
No. 432,039, 
Patented July 15, 1890. 
 
s 
Ey 
67. -?-, 6a-e-ra-i-66 
c/23-(a 
axers 
Co/z. ?azca 72- c/7/27 67zley.S. 
2, 2-4-6 C-4-3- 
21zzorreey 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM J. HARKNESS, OF YANKEETOWN, ILLINOIS. 
CAR COUPNG. 
SEECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,039, dated July 15, 1890, 
Application filed March 8, 1890, 
Serial No, 343,138. (No model.) 
O 
To all, Luhon, it naty concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM.J. HARKNESs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Yankeetown, in the county of Woodford and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Car-Couplings; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art, 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a 
part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in car-couplings, the object being to 
SO construct the same that the cars will beau 
tomatically coupled on coming together, thus 
obviating the necessity of a brakeman going 
between the cars to manipulate the link, 
which is a source of great danger, frequently 
resulting in loss of life. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of parts hereinaf 
ter more fully described, and then definitely 
pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
the invention, Figure 1 is a perspective view 
of a portion of an ordinary box-car with my 
improved coupling applied thereto. Fig. 2 
is a sectional view of the draw-head. Fig. 3 
is a similar view with the coupling-bar in 
serted. Fig. 4 is a front view of the draw 
head. Fig. 5 is a plan view of the coupling 
bar. 
In the said drawings, the reference-numeral 
1 designates the draw-head provided with a 
recess 2. In the front lower portion of the 
draw-head are two beveled projections 3, with 
a central space 4. Immediately in rear of 
these projections is a transverse lever 5, piv 
oted or fulcrumed in the sides of the draw 
head and projecting outside thereof on one 
or both sides and formed or provided with 
an operating-handle 6. This lever is pro 
vided with an arm or wing 7, centrally located 
thereon within the recess 2, and serves to dis 
engage the coupling-bar and uncouple the 
cars, as will hereinafter appear. Secured to 
the front of the draw-head and projecting 
downwardly and rearwardly into the recess 2 
is a flat spring 8, which bears upon the end 
of the coupling-bar and prevents its accidental 
displacement. 
The coupling-bar seen in Fig. 5 consists of 
a rectangular portion 9, having double Wings 
10 at each end, which are provided with side 
and top and bottom beveled ends. 12, forming 
blunt points. 
They are also provided with 
slots or apertures 13. 
14 designates a vertical aperture in the 
draw-head for receiving an ordinary coup 
ling-pin. 
The operation is as follows: One end of the 
coupling-bar is inserted in the draw-head of a 
car, the portion 9 engaging in recess 4 and 
the wings 10 engaging with projections 3, the 
spring 8 bearing down upon the coupling 
bar and holding it in a horizontal position. 
As the cars approach each other, the pin end 
of the coupling-bar will enter the draw-head 
of the opposite car, the end thereof striking 
the beveled projections 3 and riding over the 
same, when the wings 10 will engage with 
them in the rear, and the cars will thus be 
coupled, the spring S forcing the said bar 
down and holding it in place. To uncouple 
or disengage the coupling-bar, it is simply 
necessary to manipulate lever 5 by means of 
the handle 6, so as to raise the arm 7, forcing 
the end of the coupling-bar from engagement 
with the projections 3, when it can readily be 
withdrawn from the draw-head. 
It is obvious that an ordinary link may be 
used when desired instead of the coupling 
bar, and secured in the draw-head by means 
of an ordinary coupling-pin. The coupling 
bar is provided with slots 13, through which 
said pin may pass, and thus afford additional 
Securing means. 
From the above it will be seen that my in 
vention is simple and economical, and will be 
found to be very effective in practice, as the 
cars may be automatically coupled Without 
the intervention of a brakeman or other op 
erator. 
The handle 6 of lever 5 may be provided 
with a chain leading to the top of the car, so 
as to operate it therefrom, or it may be oper 
ated from the platform, as found most con 
venient, according to the design of car on 
which it is used. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
So 
95 
CO 
2 
432,039 
c 
In a car-coupler, the combination, with the 
draw-head 1, having recess 2, vertical aper 
ture 14, beveled projections 3, space or recess 
4, lever 5, having handle 6, and arm 7, of the 
5 coupling-bar 9, having wings 10, beveled ends 
12, and slots or apertures 13, substantially as 
described. 
- 
In testimony whereof Taffix iny signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
- 
WILLIAM J. HARKNESS. 
Witnesses: 
PORTER HARKNESS, 
SAMUEL E. MELCHERT. . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432139.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. KERNS 
ANIMAT TRAP 
No. 432,139, 
Patented July 15, 1890. 
1. i EL2 
S 
32Za. 2 
SE 
- I f 5 s 
ge S 
 
H. H. E. H. E. 
  
  
 
um 
 
7. 
928). Evlosses 
- Aary 7, 7 rver. 
 
 
 
SI 
  
s 
341 uc11 to 
Aarves (aduzz Atervas, 
2. 33 4-4- &letov victyo 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES CALVIN KERNS, 
OF BUFFALO, MISSOURI. 
ANIMAL-TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,189, dated July 15, 1890. 
Application filed March 11, 1890, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES CALVIN KERNs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Buf 
falo, in the county of Dallas and State of Mis 
Souri, have invented a new and useful Ani 
mal-Trap, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
animal-traps. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide a simple, inexpensive, and durable 
trap adapted for large and small animals and 
capable of killing its victim and preventing 
the latter warning others. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claim hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a trap constructed in accordance with 
this invention and being shown set. Fig. 2 
is a front elevation. Fig. 3 is a vertical sec 
tional view. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 1 
designates the frame or box of a trap, which 
consists of sides 2 and 3, top 4, and bottom 5, 
the bottom and top projecting beyond the 
sides 2 and 3 at the front of the trap. The 
projecting portions 6 and 7 of the top and 
bottom have secured between them pairs of 
rods 8, that are arranged at each side of the 
trap, and have coiled around them heavy 
Spiral springs 9, that are interposed between 
a follower 10 and the top 4, and have their 
lower ends secured to the former, and the said 
follower is adapted to be raised and the 
Springs compressed when the trap is set, and 
When the trap is sprung the spiral springs 9 
force the follower downward upon the back 
of the animal with sufficient force to kill it 
instantly. The strength of the springs is va 
ried with the kind of trap, some animals re 
quiring greater force than others; and I de 
sire it to be understood that I do not limit 
myself to the precise details of construction 
herein shown and described, as I may, with 
out departing from the spirit of the inven 
tion, make minor changes therein. 
The frame or box 1 is provided with a par 
tition 11, that has a perforation 12 near its 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Serial No. 343,486, (No model.) 
lower edge, through which extends a trigger 
13, that is provided with a hook 14 to receive 
a bait, and has its rear end 15 secured to a 
lever 16, that is fulcrumed on a horizontal 
rod 17, extending across the rear upper edge 
of the frame and secured in the sides thereof. 
The top 4 of the frame is provided with a re 
cess, in which the upper end of the lever 16 
Works, and the said lever 16 has its upper end 
provided with a notch 18, that is adapted to 
be engaged by an end of a bar 19, the other 
end of which is connected to the follower by 
cords 20 or the like. The top 4 of the frame 
of the trap is provided with a cleat 21, and 
in setting the trap the bar 19 is fulcrumed on 
the cleat and drawn to a horizontal position, 
which raises the follower, and the latter is 
maintained in its elevated position, ready to 
be sprung, by engaging the pointed end 22 of 
the bar 19 with the notch 18 of the lever 16, 
and when the trigger 13 is pulled or in any 
wise moved by an animal that may be at 
tracted by the bait the bar will be instantly 
released, and the follower will descend upon 
the back or neck of the animal, killing it in 
Stantly. 
It will readily be seen that the trap is ex 
ceedingly sensitive and is readily sprung, and 
is capable of killing its victim and prevent 
ing the latter warning others of its fate. The 
traps may vary in size and be constructed to 
catch mice and rats or larger animals. 
From the foregoing description and the ac 
companying drawings the construction, op 
eration, and advantages of the invention Will 
be readily understood. 
Having thus described theinvention, what I 
claim is- 
In an animal-trap, the combination of the 
frame comprising the sides 2 and 3, the top 
and bottom projecting beyond the sides at the 
front of the frame, and the vertical partition 
bisecting the sides, the vertical guide-bars S, 
arranged in pairs and having their ends se 
cured to the extended portions of the top and 
bottom, the vertically-movable follower ar 
ranged between the bars 8, the springs encir 
cling the bars 8 and interposed between the 
top and the follower, the horizontal bar 17, 
extending across the frame in the rear of the 
partition, the vertical lever fulcrumed on the 
- 
75 
90 
OC. 
2 
432,139 
bar 17 and provided at its lower end with a 
trigger extending through the partition and my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in lo 
having its upper end extending through the presence of two witnesses. 
frame, the cleat 21, and the crossbar adapted 
5 to be arranged upon the seat and having one 
end flexibly connected with the follower and 
the other end arranged to be engaged by the 
lever, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
JAMES CALVIN KERNS. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK FURTH, 
JOHN J. WOLFE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432239.txt	(No Model.) . 
No. 432,239. 
G. A. HOUSTON. 
CAR HEATER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 15, 1890. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 432,239, 
e 
G. A. HOUSTON. 
CAR HEATER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 15, 1890. 
 
z14 
/7zfezesses 
V%-73% 
/ee 2/eae-zeae 
* * 23. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. HOUSTON, OF BELOIT, WISCONSIN. 
CAR HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,239, dated July 15, 1890. 
Application filed June 20, 1889, 
Serial No, 314,976, (No model.) 
O 
25 
55 
 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE A. HOUSTON, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Beloit, in the county of Rock and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain 
Improvements in Car-Heaters, of which the 
following is a specification. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
wherein similar reference-letters indicate the 
same or corresponding parts, Figure 1 is a 
side elevation representing the combined ap 
paratus as arranged for practical use. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section, broken, representing 
the construction of the steam-delivery pipe 
and the chamber in which it acts. 
My invention is here illustrated as applied 
in connection with the well-known Baker 
heater, long used for heating railway-cars by 
of said 
a hot-water circulation. The body 
heater is shown at A, the inclosed heating 
coil in dotted lines at A', the expansion-tank 
at B, the pipe which conveys the hot water 
from the heating-coil to the expansion-tank 
at a, the pipe which conveys the hot water 
from the expansion-tank to the circulation 
pipes at a', and the circulation-pipes at a*a, 
returning the cooled water to the boiler at a. 
These parts are all old and are not disturbed 
or altered by my improvements, except in 
slight particulars, where it is necessary to 
make the proper connections to my appa 
ratus, and when the circulation-pipes are 
charged with water and a fire is made in the 
heater they are capable of operating precisely 
as heretofore. 
My improvements are in the nature of an 
attachment adapted to be applied and used 
with said water-heater system, or With any 
other water-heater having Substantially the 
same general mode of operation for the pur 
pose of performing additional functions and 
producing additional results. 
The objects of my invention are to enable 
the heater to be used not only, as heretofore, 
for warming the car by water heated by a fire: 
under and around the coil, but also for Warm 
ing the car directly by steam introduced from 
the locomotive-boiler or exhaust or any other 
source outside of the car, and for heating the 
water circulation not only by the fire around 
the coil, but also by steam heat derived from 
such outside source. 
Referring now to the structures in which 
my improvements are embodied and applied, 
T is a pipe extending along the train, with 
proper coupling devices between the cars, for 
the purpose of transmitting a supply of live 
or exhaust steam, or both, from the outside 
source, above referred to, to the several cars 
composing the train. From this main pipe, 
which term the train-pipe,Iextenda branch 
pipe C to a point preferably above the Water 
level in the expansion-tank B, and thence down 
to the side of the pipect, which Ienlarge at this 
place into an elongated vertical chamber or 
stand-pipe C". The pipe C extends down into 
the chamber C", as shown in Fig. 2, and is per 
forated to allow the steam to escape fromitinto 
the Water contained in the chamber, or into 
the empty chamber when the Water circula 
tion is not to be used. Desiring to direct the 
steam upward in said chamber to aid in forc 
ing a water circulation, I connect to the pipe 
at each of its perforations a hollow horizontal 
tube c, perforated along its upper side, from 
which the steam will be delivered upward 
To prevent the escaping 
into the chamber. 
steam from causing a boiling sound in the 
water, Isurround the shorthorizontal tubular 
arms c with fine wire-gauze c', or any equiva 
lent material which will break up the steam 
jets, and thus prevent the noise. Preferably 
I arrange a check-valve cat the highest part : 
of the pipe C, to prevent water from backing 
over into the train-pipe in case steam should 
be shut off therefrom for a considerable time, 
or any condensation in the pipe should cre 
ate a backward pressure. 
If the system should be charged with wa 
ter and the steam from the locomotive thus 
admitted into it, as I propose to do, it is 
evident that an excess of Water Would soon 
result from steam-condensation, and hence 
provision must be made for taking care of 
any water not needed in the heating system. 
To this end I lead a piped from the expan 
ision-tank at the Water-level therein to a ver 
tical chamber or stand-pipe D, provided with 
an outflow-port so controlled by an automati 
cally-operating valve that When the chamber 
D fills with water the valve will open and let 
it out and will close again after the chamber 
is sufficiently free of water. 
Many different forms of automatic valve 
o 
: 
45 
5 O. 
35 
75 
9o 
95. 
C 
2 
432,239 
O 
20 
35 
50 
55 
75 
are available for opening and closing the out 
flow-port of the stand-pipe D; but I prefer 
the construction shown in a pending applica 
tion filed by me therefor as a division of the 
original application in this case and officially 
designated as Serial No. 333,294. 
Taking advantage of the pipe (l, which will 
ordinarily be filled or partially filled with 
steam, whether the water circulation be in 
use or not, I arrange a heating-coil F in the 
upper part of the car, directly under the roof 
and in front of one of the ventilator-openings, 
to warm the air which enters through said 
opening, and to aid in warming the car when 
said opening is closed. The coil Fis arranged 
to take steam at its upper end by a short 
branch f, and to drain into the pipe d, as 
shown. A cock g is placed in the pipe C to 
regulate or cut off access of steam from the 
train-pipe when desired, and a drain-tube HI, 
provided with a cock h, is applied at or near 
the lower end of pipe C to free the latter from 
water when necessary. A cock i enables the 
attendant to cut out the coil F and stand 
pipe D, if he desires to dispense with the heat 
of coil F when using the water circulation 
alone. A cock j may also be placed in the 
pipe d, between the coil F and the chamber 
D, to cut out the latter, but leave the coil in 
action for heating purposes when using the 
water circulation alone. A cock l is placed 
in the pipe Ct. above the chamber C, and is to 
be closed when a steam circulation alone is 
desired. Instead of a single coil F, the num 
ber may be multiplied, if preferred, suitable 
connections being made for supplying them 
with steam and draining their condensation 
water into the Water circulation; but I do 
not deem it necessary to illustrate them, as 
their construction will be within the skill of 
the ordinary mechanic. 
To operate the combined apparatus in the 
manner in which the Baker heater is usually 
operated, the attendant closes cocksgi, opens 
cock l, and charges the Water-circulation sys 
tem to the usual level. If he desires heat 
from coil F, he opens cock 
otherwise he 
closes it. Upon now making a fire in heater 
A the water in the coil A' becomes heated 
and is forced upward through the expansion 
tank, and thence down through pipe a' into 
the heating-pipes a ca, and back to the coil 
A", in the manner already well known. 
To operate the apparatus for direct steam 
heating alone, the attendant opens cockg and 
closes cock l. Steam now flows in through 
pipe C to chamber C, thence down through 
coil A' into circulation-pipes a, and thence to 
expansion-tank B and stand-pipe D, from 
which the pressure escapes through the out 
flow-port until the air and water are all blown 
out of the system, whereupon the valve which 
controls the outflow-port will be closed, pre 
venting further loss of steam. In sleeping 
cars this will ordinarily be done only in mild 
weather, when a gentle warmth in the car is 
desirable during the evening, and is to be cut 
off or decreased after the passengers retire 
for the night. The temperature will be regu 
lated by turning the cock g so as to permit a 7o 
more or less active steam circulation. With 
a water circulation alone the heat cannot be 
readily shut off or regulated; but with my 
combined steam apparatus it can be perfectly 
regulated and shut off whenever desired. 
To operate the apparatus for heating the 
water circulation by steam derived from the 
train-pipe, the attendant charges the system 
with water and opens cocks g l ifi. Steam 
now passes from pipe C into chamber C, heat 
ing the water therein and tending to force it 
upward both by mechanical action and by the 
resulting increase of the water temperature. 
If the cock g is wide open, steam will escape 
into the water from all of the short tubes c, 
and the action will be rapid; but if the cock 
gbe only partially open steam will vent into 
the water only from the upper tubesc, and 
the action will be slower; hence by opening 
the cock 9 more or less the temperature of the 
car may be regulated at will. While this ac 
tion is going on a fire may be made in heater 
A, and its heat added to the circulation, if 
desired. The condensation-water will be au 
tomatically disposed of in the manner above 
described. 
It will be seen from the above explanation 
that there are important advantages result 
ing from the vertical position of the steam 
pipe or chamber C", because the water-press 
ure in the lower part of the chamber, when 
steam and water are both used, will tend to 
force the steam out of the upper nozzles to 
the extent that they will afford it deliver 
ance, reducing to a great extent the boiling 
sound, and thus enabling me to regulate the 
circulation more perfectly by the cock g. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the elevated expan 
sion-tank B, provided with a valved waste 
pipe, the heating-pipes a, having the vertical 
connections at a' to the expansion-tank, the 
train-pipe T, the branch C, leading from the 
train-pipe to a suitable point in the line of 
pipe at and provided with a regulating-cock g 
and means for preventing the backflow of 
water through said branch when the cock g 
is open, and a cockl, arranged in the pipe (t, 
between its junction with branch C and its 
opening into tank B, whereby when the sys 
tem is charged with water and the cock l is 
open steam-pressure from branch C will force 
a water circulation upward through pipe a. 
and downward through pipe a' to and through 
the heating-pipes, and when cock l is closed 
the same pressure will force a circulation in 
the reverse direction, clearing the heating 
pipes of water and substituting a steam cir 
culation therein, Substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the elevated expan 
Sion-tank B, provided with a valved waste 
pipe, the heating-pipes (t, having the vertical 
I 25 
IIC) 
I I5 
OO 
482,239 
connections a Ct' to the expansion-tank, the 
enlargement or chamber Cin the line of pipe 
Ct, the train-pipe T, the branch C, leading 
from the train-pipe into the chamber C and 
extending downward therein and provided 
with a regulating-cock g and means for pre 
venting the backflow of water through said 
branch when the valve g is open, and a se 
ries of nozzles c, projecting laterally at dif 
ferent elevations from that part of branch C 
which is within the chamber C' and adapted 
to vent the steam upward, whereby a full 
pressure and volume of steam entering cham 
ber C through branch C will act directly 
upon different parts of the vertical column of 
water in said chamber at substantially dif 
ferent elevations, but in the same direction, 
and thus force a rapid circulation up through 
the chamber, but in proportion as the supply 
of steam is diminished it will cease to deliver 
through the lower nozzles, and will thus re 
duce the activity of the water circulation, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the elevated expan 
sion-tank B, provided with a valved waste 
pipe, the heating-pipesa, having the vertical 
connections Ct. a' to the expansion-tank, the 
train-pipe T, the branch C, leading from the 
train-pipe to a suitable point in the line of 
2C) 
25 
pipe a. and provided with a regulating-cock 
g and means for preventing the backflow of 
water through said branch when the cock g 
is open, and a steam-heating coil F, arranged 
above the level of the Water in the expansion 
tank, having its upper end provided with a 
connection which is adapted to take steam 
from a point above the line of said water 
level, and its lower end adapted to drain into 
the waste-pipe, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of a railway-car pro 
vided with ventilating-orifices in its roof, a 
system of heating-pipes for heating said car, 
a train-pipe T for supplying steam to said 
heating-pipes, an elevated expansion-tank B 
for receiving the condensation - water, pro 
vided with a valved Waste-pipe, and a steam 
heating coil F, arranged near the roof of the 
car and in the vicinity of said ventilating 
Orifices and above the level of the water in 
the expansion-tank, having its upper end 
adapted to take steam from a point above the 
line of the water-level in said tank, and its 
lower end adapted to drain into the waste 
pipe, substantially as described. 
GEO. A. HOUSTON. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
HARRY BITNER, 
WILLIAMLANPHUE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432339.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 432,339. 
A. TAPLIN. 
LAMP, 
Patented July 15, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
III 
EITHIAU 
I 
THE Nos FETRS co., poro-rro, wassron, o. c. 
M/7//7aaaaaf, 
% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALVIN TAPLIN, OF FORESTVILLE, CONNECTICUT. 
LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,339, dated July 15, 1890. 
Application filed February 3, 1890, Serial No. 340,305. (No model.) 
? ? 
To all ??h???, it ??? ??? ?? ?: 
Be it known that I, ALVIN TAPLIN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Forest 
ville, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Lamps, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
lamps of the class having a central draft-tube; 
and the main object of my improvement is to 
facilitate the operation of wicking and re 
wicking the lamp. 
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1 is 
a central vertical section, partly in elevation, 
of a central-draft lamp with my wick-carrier 
attached. Fig. 2 is a detached view of a por 
tion thereof with the wick-carrier in its low 
ermost position. Fig. 3 is a sectional view of 
the same on line (c of Fig. 1, the parts being 
in the same position as in Fig. 1. 
The lamp-fount A, the central draft-tube 
B, the surrounding burner C, and the tubular 
Wick D are of an ordinary construction for 
this class of lamps. . 
6 designates the wick-carrier, which is a 
curved clasp provided, if desired, with suit 
able prongs or spurs 7 for penetrating the 
wick. It is provided with a shank 8, that ex 
tends laterally to one side, where it is rigidly 
connected with the lower end of the lifting 
handle 9, preferably by being bent around 
said handle, as shown, whereby shoulders 10 
10 are formed at the junction of the shank 8 
and handle 9 on that side of the handle which 
faces the wick. I also provide the shank of 
the wick-raiser with a cam 11 at a point near 
the clasp portion of the wick-carrier 6, the 
upper end of said cam being inclined, while its 
lower end is substantially straight, as shown. 
To the bottom of the lamp-fount A, at one. 
side, I attach the base of the spring 12, said 
spring being slotted vertically, as shown, to 
permit of the passage of the shank 8 of the 
wick-carrier between the two members of said 
spring. The extreme upper end of the spring 
12 is preferably curved outwardly a little, 
from which point it extends downwardly sub 
stantially parallel to the central draft-tube 
to a point near the bottom of the cup, where 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
75 
80 
it is inclined outwardly to its base, as shown. 
The heel of the spring is also turned upwardly 
to form a cam 13, which lies immediately un 
derneath the lower end of the lifting-handle 
and the shoulders 10 10. 
In order to place a wick in the lamp, the 
handle 9 is depressed until the shoulders 10 
10 come in contact with the cam 13 and the 
cam 11 falls to a point below the outwardly 
inclined bend of the spring 12, so as to per 
mit of an outward movement of the wick 
carrier 6 as the shoulders 10 are pressed down 
upon the cam 13, thereby withdrawing the 
wick-carrier 6 from the central draft-tube B 
sufficiently to leave room for the passage of the 
wick between said wick-carrier and tube. 
The burner C is removed and the wick D 
slipped upon the central draft - tube and 
dropped down to the bottom of the lamp-cup, 
as shown in Fig. 2. The handle 9 is then lifted, 
when the. upper inclined ends of the cam Il 
will strike the inside of the inclined portion 
near the lower end of the spring 12, and thereby 
force the wick-carrier 6 against the wick with 
all the force of said spring, so that by the 
time the straight portion of the calm 11 is op 
posite the straight portion of the spring 12 
the wick-carrier is compressing the wick be 
tween it and the central draft-tube with Sulf 
ficient force to carry the wick with said car 
rier as it is raised or lowered, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3. The upper end of the wick 
carrier handle 9 is projected through an ori 
fice in the upper part of the lamp, whereby 
the burner C may be wholly detached when 
a wick is being placed in position within the 
lamp. For rewicking the lamp, it is only nec 
essary to again depress the lifting-handle 9 
to carry the wick - carrier into the position 
represented in Fig. 2, when the old wick can 
be removed and a new one inserted in the 
manner before described, and all by a very 
simple and convenient operation. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a lamp having a central draft-tube 
and tubular wick, the combination of the ver 
tically-moving wick-carrier having a handle, 
and the spring 12, fixedly secured to the bot 
tom of the lamp-cup and arranged parallel to 
95 
432,339 
the draft-tube to press upon said wick-car- carrier 6, having the shank S, cam 11, and 
rier, substantially as described, and for the shoulders 10 10, the handle 9, secured to said 
purpose specified. 
2. In a lamp having a central draft-tube bend near its lower end, and the cam 13, 
5 and tubular wick, the combination of the ver- against which the shoulders 10 10 act, sub 
tically-moving wick-carrier having a handle, stantially as described, and for the purpose 
and two cams secured to the bottom of the specified. 
lamp-cup, one for withdrawing said carrier 
from th?wick and the otherfor forcing it 
to against the same, substantially as described. 
3. In a lamp having a central draft-tube 
and tubular wick, the combination of the wick- 
HENRY W. PORTER, 
ISAAC. W. BEACH. 
shank, the spring 12, having the inclined 15 
Witnesses: 
rN 
t 
ALVIN TAPLIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432439.txt	(No Model.) 
H. D. PURSELL. 
WENDING MACHINE, 
No. 432,439, 
Patented July 15, l890. 
 
 
 
 
 
y 
 
2 zz, 
N-N- 
628) itv.cooos 
(ANWul. 
341 uo 41 to 
Jiable S. Paul 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY D. PURSELL, OF WASHINGTON COURT-HOUSE, OHIO. 
VENDING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,439, dated July 15, 1890. 
Application filed April 5, 1890, 
Serial No,346,657, (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, IIARRY D. PURSELL, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Washington Court-House, in the county of 
Fayette and State of Ohio, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Vend 
ing-Machines, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
continuously revolving delivery-drum in com 
bination with a swinging-lever coin-conductor 
So constructed that when the coin is dropped 
into position it, will lock the lever with the 
drum and cause the latter to be moved by the 
lever to deliver the package and deposit the 
coin in the money-drawer, all of which will 
be fully set fourth in the description of the 
accompanying drawings, making a part of 
this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation with the sides 
of the case removed. Fig. 2 is a side eleva 
tion with a side of the casing removed. Fig. 
3 is an inside sectional elevation of the top 
portion of the case. 
1 represents the base of the machine; 2, the 
ends of the casing; 3, the sides of the casing. 
4 represents a shelf on which the package 
is delivered; 5, a money-drawer into which 
the coin 6 is dropped. 
7 represents the coin-chute, which in the 
preferred form of construction forms the le 
wer for moving the package-drum. 
8 represents a package-compartment which 
projects up from the top of the box or case, 
into which the packages or articles to be 
vended are to be placed. The bottom of this 
case is open and rests above recesses 9 in the 
drum 10. 
11 represents a removable section of said 
package - compartment, which is preferably 
one side of the box and attached by tongue 
and groove, so that the piece 1i may be slid 
out and the compartment for packages opened 
for filling or removing the same. On the end 
of the drum I provide a series of teeth 12, 
which project out under the coin-chute. 
13 represents a spring-catch which is held 
by the sides of the casing 2 in the position 
shown in Fig. 1, so that the coin 6 when 
dropped into the coin-chute will be caught on 
said catch and held between two of the teeth 
12 on the end of the drum. 
14 represents a spring, the recoil of which 
tends to move the catch 13 away. As the 
chute-lever is turned it causes the coin to en 
gage with the teeth and revolves the drum 
one space. Said lever and catch move in the 
direction shown by the arrow in Fig. 3. 
15 represents an incline or recess cut in the 
sides of the casing, so that as the catch 13 
moves opposite said recess it will move out 
ward far enough to allow the catch to move 
back far enough to cause the coin to drop 
through. The depth of this recess is ad 
justed to the distance or width of the package 
, which rests in the recess 9, so that by the 
time the drum 10 has been carried far enough 
forward to deliver one package the coin will 
drop through into the money-drawer 5, and at 
the same time a package will be deposited on 
the shelf 4 from the drum 10. 
A represents one of the packages resting 
in the recess. In order to insure the delivery 
of a package or prevent it from sticking, I 
provide two flexible fingers b, which rest in 
grooves c, cut in the drum. Now as the drum 
is turned forward these fingers will pass un 
der the under side of the package and throw 
it up into the position shown in Fig. 2, so 
that it will readily pass down to the shelf 4. 
17 represents a weight attached to the lever 
7, below the center of axis 18 of said lever, so 
as to hold the lever normally in the upright 
position. It is not essential to have the coin 
chute through the lever itself; but it is essen 
tial that the coin shall act in conjunction 
with the lever, and the spring-catch 13 will 
cause the engagement between the lever and 
the teeth of the drum and cause it to be re 
Wolved forward. 
Mode of operation: The package-compart 
ment is filled with packages. The bottom one 
rests in recess 9. Now if the coin be dropped 
into the coin-chute and it is passed down onto 
the spring - catch 13 it will cause an engage 
ment of the lever with the teeth of the drum. 
If now the lever be turned forward, the drum 
will be moved the distance of one package. 
As the spring-catch 13 comes opposite the re 
cess 15, it moves up and lets the coin drop 
through into the money-drawer 5 and frees 
the engagement of the lever, the Weight bring 
ing the lever normally back to position. 
1S represents a curving attached to the lever. 
. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
432,439 
19 represents an outside curving forming ting the catch to spring and release the coin 
when the lever is swung to turn the drum, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a vending-machine, the rotating drum 
10, provided with a series of recesses 9, suit 
ably incased, in combination with the pack 
age - compartment, a coin-chute lever 7, the 
teeth 12, and spring-catch 13, whereby the 
coin engages the lever with the drum for a 
forward movement of said drum to deliver a 
package and deposit the coin in the drawer, 
substantially as herein specified. 
3. In combination with the rotating drum 
10, the lever 7, the coin engaging and dis 
charging catch 13, teeth 12, attached to said 
drum, ratchet-teeth on said drum, and the 
pawl engaging therewith, whereby only a for 
ward movement of the drum can be imparted 
by the moving of lever 7, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. In a vending-machine, the combination 
of the package-compartment S, located above 
the drum 10, having a series of recesses 9, the 
delivery-shelf 4, the delivery-fingers b, the 
lever 7, and a coin engaging and releasing 
device, all substantially as herein specified. 
5. In a vending-machine, the combination 
of a rotating drum 10, having a series of re 
cesses 9 and located under a package - Com 
partment, the lever 7, the teeth 12 on the 
drum, the coin-holding spring-catch 13, and 
a casing having the recess 15 to permit the 
catch springing to release the coin, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
the top of the case. This is slotted, so as to 
allow the lever 7 to move in said slot. Said 
wing 18, being attached to the lever, keeps the 
slot through the casing closed, so as to pre 
vent egress or accident to the interior work 
of the vending-machine. 
In order to prevent the drum 10 from being 
turned backward, I provide a pawl 20 and 
ratchet 21. The weight of the pawl 20 holds 
it in contact with the teeth of the drum, which 
prevents the drum from being turned back 
ward as the weight 17 springs the lever back 
to its normal position when the coin has been 
discharged, so that I obtain a continuous 
forward movement of the drum for the pack 
age-delivery when the coin causes the en 
gagement of the lever with the druna, and the 
lever is free to move forward when the coin 
is released by the catch 13. 
It is obvious that the slide 11 and money 
drawer 5 should be locked, so as to prevent 
tampering with the device. I have not shown 
these locks, as any approved form of con 
struction may be employed. The curving 19 
on the easing is locked by the cleat 22 on the 
package-compartment 7. This package-com 
partment is attached to the top part of the 
curving 24, which is hinged at 23 to the sides 
of the casing or box 3. This is normally locked 
in position. When unlocked, it may be read 
ily swung over and expose the lever and in 
side devices, 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a vending-machine, the combination, 
with a casing, of a rotating drum having a 
series of teeth, a swinging lever 7, a spring 
catch 13, carried by the lever for supporting 
a coin and holding it in engagement with the 
lever and drum-teeth, and means for permit 
HARRY D. PURSELL. 
Witnesses: 
T. SIMMONS, 
EDWARD BOYD. 
45 
55 
75 
O 
I5. 
25 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432539.txt	(No Model.) 
r 
J. F. MAINS. 
BAG TOCK, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 432,539, 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
attazzzzzzzzzz 
 
&Sizzzzzzzzzz 
928)itv.co.ca 
(Wat? (4.4 
841-uz-vibot, 
z- 2 -7a-e- 
33 ~e?. 
THE Norris Persits co. PHoro-Litho, was Noton, b. c. 
(No Model.) 
J. F. MAINS, 
BAC TOCK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 432,539, 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
 
A 'g. 8 
c 
Zr 
  
  
 
  
  
 
2 
SSSSSSSSS 
 
928)-bvicses 
4au4./ 
%-4 %2. 
56 26. &ltto 11 ct 
841-uo-v-toz 
afe 4 - a -7cal 
26, 226aoz. 
THE NORRIS PETEAs co., Photo-LTHo. Washington, c. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. MAINS, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO 
BRUCE CARR AND HARVEY M. LA FOLLETTE, OF SAME PLACE. 
BAG-LOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,539, dated July 22, 1890. 
Application filed December i6, 1889, Serial No, 333,866, (No model.) 
- 
K is a push-bar arranged to slide on the 7o 
To all whom it may concern: 
to form openings, through which the free ends 
Be it known that I, JOHN F. MAINS, a citi- of a cord C pass, the cord lying along and 
Zen of the United States, residing at Indian- in contact with opposite inner sides of the 
apolis, in the county of Marion and State of casing. The bight D of the cord is to be un- 55 
5 Indiana, have invented a new and useful Im-derstood to be laced through the open end of 
provement in Bag-Locks, of which the follow- a mail or other bag. (Not shown.) 
ing is a specification. 
E E are a pair of dogs, which are pivoted 
My invention relates to an improvement in at f to the bottom plate A in such a manner 
the mail-bag lock for which Letters Patent that the outer edges of the free ends of the 6o 
Io No. 413,624 were granted to myself and oth- dogs engage the cord and clamp it against 
ers October 22, 1889. The lock shown in the the upturned edges h. h of the plate when the 
above-mentioned patent consists, essentially, attempt is made to draw the cord through the 
of a metallic casing, through which the free casing in the direction of the bight D, but al 
ends of the lacing-cord of a mail-bag are lowing the cord to slide easily in the opposite 65 
15 threaded, and a pair of dogs pivoted within the direction. The free ends of dogs E are held 
casing between the two ends of the cord, and normally in contact with the cord by a coiled 
having between them a sliding wedge which, springi, whose opposite ends engage the ends 
when forced forward by a cam-shaped key, of the dogs and force them outward. 
operates to force the dogs into engagement 
20 with the cord, thereby locking the cord and bottom plate of the casing and to engage at 
preventing its withdrawal, the dogs being nor- one end both of the dogs on opposite sides of 
mally out of engagement with the cord and the pivotif. The opposite end of bar K is 
the cord free to move longitudinally through turned upward, so as to project into an open 
the lock in either direction. 
25 The objects of my improvement are to pro- provided on opposite sides of the opening l 
vide means for holding the dogs normally in with the inwardly-turned flanges m, n, which 
engagement with the cord, so as to prevent are formed, preferably, by turning down por 
the cord from moving in one direction, and tions of the material of the plate which are 
to provide means contained entirely within removed from the opening l. The lower edges 8o 
3o the lock-case and presenting no projecting of the flanges in are cut away at n, so as to 
parts, whereby the pair of dogs pivoted within rest upon the push-bar and hold it in place 
the case may be simultaneously released from and to form shoulders O o, which limit the 
the cord by the thumb or finger of the oper- outward movement of the push-bar. 
ator, all as hereinafter fully described. 
35 The accompanying drawings illustrate my rivets p p and pivot f, passing through both 
invention. 
In the modification shown in Figs. 6 to 9, 
terior, the top plate having been removed; inclusive, the dogs E, instead of being both 
Fig. 3, a central longitudinal section; Fig. 4, mounted upon a single pivot, are mounted on 9o 
4o a transverse section at C, Fig. 1; and Fig. 5, separate pivots ' ' near opposite sides of the 
a transverse section at b, Fig. 1. Figs. 6, 7, casing, thus increasing the leverage of the 
8, and 9 represent a modification of the same push-bar, the dogs being suitably extended 
general plan as the preceding figures, being and overlapping, as shown, so as to extend 
an exterior plan, an interior plan, a longitudi- into the path of the push-bar. The push-bar 95 
45 nal section, and a transverse section, respect- it is also turned the other side up, so that its 
ively. 
flat portion comes against the under side of 
A and B are plates of sheet metal flanged the top plate, and the opening in the top plate 
at the edges to form a separable hollow cas- is carried forward to the end of the plate. 
ing, of which A is the bottom plate, and B the 
5o top plate. The flanged edges of plates A and having been laced into a bag at its mouth, as 
B are cut away at the corners of the casing before described, and the free ends passed 
The plates A and B are held together by 85 
Figure 1 is a plan; Fig. 2, a plan of the in- 
plates. 
ing l, formed in the top plate B. Plate B is 75 
In operation, the bight D of the cord C I oc 
432,539 
of the casing, the spring arranged to hold the 
dogs normally in engagement with the cord, 
and the push-bar arranged to slide longitudi 
nally in the casing and having one end in 
engagement with both dogs and the other 
end accessible through the casing, whereby 
both dogs are operated simultaneously and 
the use of projecting parts is avoided, as set 35 
forth. 
2. In a bag-lock, the combination of the 
casing formed of plate A and plate B, hav 
ing the opening land inwardly-turned flanges 
m m, provided with shoulders o, the clogs EE, 
pivoted within the casing, and the push-bar 
K, adapted at one end to engage the dogs and 
held in place at the other end by the flanges 
in n, as set forth. 
3. In a bag-lock, the combination, with plate 
A, dogs EE, and push-bar K, of the top plate 
B, having opening l and flanges in m, ar 
ranged to guide and limit the movement of 
the push-bar, substantially as Sct forth. 
JOHN F. MAINS. 
Witnesses: 
H. P. IIOOD, 
W. M. HOOD. 
through the casing between the sides of the 
casing and the faces of dogs EE, as shown, 
the cord may be drawn freely through the 
lock in the direction indicated by the arrow, 
but cannot be drawn in the opposite direc 
tion, the dogs being held in contact with the 
cord by the springi, and being, by reason of 
their relation to their pivot, clamped more 
tightly against the cord when drawn in that 
direction. When the cord is to be released, 
So as to permit the opening of the bag, the 
operator places the end of his thumb in the 
opening l against the end of the push-bar, 
and, pushing thereon toward the dogs, the dogs 
are simultaneously swung inward, thus releas 
ing the cord and permitting its withdrawal. 
By the use of the push-bar arranged in the 
manner shown I am enabled to dispense with 
a key and to operate the dogs simultaneously 
without the use of any parts which project 
beyond the face of the lock-case-a result of 
much value in this class of locks. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a bag-lock, the combination of the 
casing, the pair of dogs pivoted within the 
casing with their faces arranged to engage a 
cord passing along the opposite interior edges 
d 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432640.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J. PHILBRICK. 
METHOD OF PRODUCING BARREL STAWES, 
No. 432,640, 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
 
WITNESSES 
27 (424.27, 
,774,607-za 
63% (?ee II 25-4. A - 
ATTORME. 
//WWENTOR 
? 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSIA H. J. PHILBRICK, OF CHATTAN OO GA, TENN ESSEE. 
METHOD OF PRODUCING BARREL STAVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,640, dated July 22, 1890. 
Application filed December 30, 1889, Serial No. 335,399, (No specimens.) 
55 
o 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSIAHJ. PHILBRICK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chat 
tanooga, in the county of Hamilton and State 
of Tennessee, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in the Method of Pro 
ducing Barrel-Staves; and I do declare the foll 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to make 
and use the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in the art of sawing bar 
rel-staves; and it has for its object to provide 
a means for producing barrel-staves in the 
rough for tight cooperage which shall be of 
uniform thickness and width, and in which 
the flinty or hardest grain of the wood will 
appear upon the faces of the staves. Iaccom 
plish these objects by the method hereinafter 
described for sawing the bolts, and of after 
Ward resawing the same upon lines radial 
With the heart of the tree from which the bolts 
have been produced. 
To the above ends, and to such others as 
the invention may pertain, the same consists 
in the process of sawing and resawing, which 
will be more particularly hereinafter de 
scribed, and shown in the accompanying 
drawings, which drawings form a part of this 
specification, like letters of reference indicat 
ing like parts throughout the several views, 
and in which 
Figure 1 is an end view of a section of a log 
as it appears when in readiness for resawing 
into stave-bolts. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
showing the parts in their relative positions 
after the resawing. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of the same with the heart and outside 
bark and sap-wood removed. Fig. 4 is an end 
view of a resawed bolt. Fig. 5 is a longitudi 
nal view of the heart side of the bolt after re 
sawing, in which the parts are shown in their 
relative position as to the curve of the bolt. 
Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the same. 
Reference now being had to the details of 
the drawings by letter, A designates a segment 
of a log as it appears when in readiness for 
25 
35 
45 
sawing. The segment A is separated, by means 
of a band or other saw adapted to the pull pose, 
into a series of bolts, as shown at C and b, the 
saw-kerfs being upon arcs of circles which 
correspond with the circumference of the tree. 
In the drawings I have shown the segment 
separated into two stave-bolts; but of course 
the number of bolts produced will depend 
upon the diameter of the tree and upon the 
width of the bolt produced. The outer bark 
and sap-wood d, and also the heart c, are dis 
carded, and the bolts a, and b are separated 
by resawing longitudinally into a series of 
parallel strips or staves, as shown clearly in 
Figs. 4 and 6 of the drawings. 
It will be observed that staves produced in 
accordance with the method above described 
the grain of the wood upon the faces of the 
staves will be upon the lines of radiation 
from the center of the tree from which they 
are produced. I thus produce a stronger and 
much more serviceable stave than it is possi 
ble to produce by sawing the staves in such 
manner as to present in the face of the stave 
a grain running at right angles to the lines of 
radiation. 
By my process of cutting timber for staves 
there will be found to be a great saving in 
timber, as the heart-wood is separated in SaW 
ing and may be utilized for tool-handles or 
other purposes for which the heart-Wood of 
oak or other like timbers is best adapted, 
while the bark and outer sap-wood are sepa 
rated and may be utilized for fuel. It will be 
further observed that in resawing the bolts 
in accordance with my process the outer edges 
of the staves will be thicker than the inner 
edges, thus providing sufficient material upon 
the outer edge of the stave to permit the hol 
lowing or rounding of the stave without cut 
ting away the thin edge. 
By my process I am therefore enabled to 
produce a much more serviceable stave than 
heretofore, and also to utilize all the timber 
in the tree. 
A stave produced by my process can be 
readily distinguished from staves of other 
forms by reason of the grain of the wood be 
ingradically different in relation to the length 
and thickness of the stave incident to the 
novel manner of forming the stave. 
95 
Och 
432,640 
I attach importance to the step in my pro 
cess which consists in severing the segments 
into bolts by sawing upon circular lines cor 
responding with the circumference of the log, 
as by this sawing a complete bolt will be de 
tached from the log at each separate sawing, 
thus obviating the necessity of resawing, 
which would be required if sawed upon 
Straight lines. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim to be new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The herein-described process of producing 
barrel-staves, which consists in first separat 
ing the log into proper lengths corresponding 
with the length of the stave to be produced, 
then separating the log into segments, next 
- 
d 
severing the segments into bolts by sawing 
upon circular lines corresponding to the cir 
cumference of the log, and finally sawing the 
bolts longitudinally upon lines parallel with 
the lines of radiation from the heart of the 
tree, whereby a stave is produced whose edges 
shall be parallel with the circumference and 
the face parallel with the lines of radiation 
from the center of the tree from which it is 
cut and tapered from the outer edge inward, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOSIAH. J. PHILBRICK. 
25 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR M. MANN, 
CHAS. H. SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432741.txt	H. SPHL. 
FURNITURE SPRING MAKING MACHINE. 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
ZZZZZZ 
 
No. 432, 
741, 
Z 
C) 
Y 
S 
"NE 
??? 'S 
Wiyowezze. 
?(4 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
H. SIPHIL. 
FURNITURE SPRING MAKING MACHINE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 432,741, 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
 
 
N 
 
S. 
Kee 
W7%as sev: 
.Z 
?? 
Ze eere ?r 
???????. 
?????? 
 
No Model.) 
H. SPHIL. 
FURNTURE SPRING MAKING MACHINE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 432,741, 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
Z12, 2N 
 
2 
 
 
 TE noRRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LIHo. wAsHINGroN, p.c. 
(No Model.) 
a- 
H. SPHL. 
6 Sheets-Sheet .4. 
FURNITURE SPRING MAKING MACHINE, 
No. 432,741. 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
I  
 
(No Model.) 
H. SIPHIL. 
FURNITURE SPRING MAKING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
y 
No. 432,741, 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
 
N? 
S 
??` 
? 
? 
\, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRICH SPHL, OF ST. GALL, ASSIGNOROF ONE-HALF TO THEMASCHINEN 
WERKSTTTEN AND EISEN GIESSEREI ST. GEORGEN BEI ST. GALLEN, OF 
ST. GEORGEN, SWITZERLAND. 
FU RN TURE- SPRING NAK N G MACH || N. E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,741, dated July 22, 1890. 
(application filed June 19, 1889, Serial No,314,848, (No model.) Patented in France January 7, 1889, No, 195,227 in Belgium 
January 7, 1889, No. 84,556; in England January 7, 1889, No. 262, and in Germany January 8, 1889, No. 50,312. 
to all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HEINRICHSPHL, a citi 
Zen of the Federation of Switzerland, residing 
at St. Gall, Switzerland, have invented use 
S ful Improvements in Wire-Spring Machines, 
(for which I have obtained a patent in Ger 
many, No. 50,312, dated January 8, 1889, un 
der the name Maschinen  Werksttten St. 
Georgen;in France, No.195,227, dated January 
Io 7, 1889; in Belgium, No. 84,556, dated January 
7, 1889; in England, No. 262, dated January 7, 
- 1889,underthename Gottfried von Ssskind,) 
of which the following is a clear specification. 
In order to make my invention more clear, 
25 I refer to the accompanying drawings, in 
which similar letters denote similar parts 
throughout the different views. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of my ma 
chine. Fig. 2 shows a horizontal section. Fig. 
2O 3 is a front view of the machine-frame, but 
with the shafts C, and a cut away for the 
sake of clearness, the section-line running 
through the universal joints of the same in 
Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the ma 
25 chine with the cog-wheels i' i' removed. Fig. 
5 shows a top view, partly in section, of the 
guiding mechanism for the wire. 
Fig. 6 
shows a side view of the same, partly in sec 
tion. Fig. 7 shows an end view, partly in 
3o section, of the cutting-off mechanism and 
guiding-rollers. Fig. 8 shows a detail view 
of the cutting - off mechanism in section 
through the outer couplings f andf. Fig. 
9 shows a section on line a, b, Fig. S. Fig. 10 
35 shows a top view of Fig. S. Fig. 11 shows a 
side elevation of Fig. 9. 
The construction of the machine is as foll 
lows: 
The driving-shaft C is journaled in the 
4o stand A. To the shaft a is fitted the fly 
wheel B and friction-coupling b. The coup 
ling b is coupled by pulling the handle b, 
which is connected to the coupling by the rod 
b and lever b'. There is a brake b fitted to 
45 the lower end of the leverb', which, when the 
coupling b is put out of gear, presses on the 
rim of the fly-wheel B and stops the machine. 
The shaft C is fitted at its front end to the 
shaft a', which carries the cutting-off mech 
anism by a universal joint. The upper shaft 5c 
a? is likewise connected to the shaft a by a 
universal joint. The shaft a carries the roller 
c, which, together with the roller c', feeds the 
wire to the machine. The shafts a, and a are 
geared together by the cog-wheels a, a, and 55 
a', and both revolve in the same direction 
and with the same speed. It is necessary 
that they should revolve in the same direction, 
in order that the finished spring shall be cut 
off while moving. The shaft a can be raised 6o 
or lowered in the strape by means of the screw 
g, for which purpose it is fitted in the sliding 
journals did", in order that the cutting-off 
apparatus may be adjusted to suit any di 
ameter of spring. The upper shaft a is also 65 
adjustable by the screw g and spring g, in 
order that wire of different thicknesses may be 
used. The under rollerc' is driven from the 
shaft a by the cog-wheels c and c'. There 
is a small strap e' fitted inside the larger 7o 
strape, Fig. 1, to which is fastened the bear 
ing d' at the bottom and at the top a screw, 
by which means the roller c can be raised in 
order that the wire may be brought between 
the feed-rollers. 
The form and size of the springs are ob 
tained by the following mechanism: On the 
shaft a is fitted a worm a, which gears into 
teeth on the shaft i and revolves the same, 
and by means of the cog-wheels i' and f* and 8o 
adjustable wheel i on the segmenti, Figs. 2 
and 4, the shaft.j is turned. The reason for 
placing gearing-wheel j on the adjustable 
segment j is to enable the taking out and 
changing of wheels i'j*. For instance, if a. 85 
larger wheel be substituted forf' and a smaller 
wheel for f*, a shorter spring will be made, 
since shafti will revolve more quickly, and 
consequently the projection? will come sooner 
under projection m, thus setting the cutting- 9o 
off mechanism earlier in gear. To the end 
of this shaft f is fitted the ring k on the ball 
75 
432,741 
75 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
joint lc and the washer le. The ring k is 
clamped in any desired position by means of 
the nut (c. 
According to the position of the ring ke the 
position of the lever l is varied. This lever 
l turns on the pivot l, and is fitted with the 
guide-roller l' and at the other with a roller 
l, Fig. 5. The pivot is eccentrically fixed 
to a disk, which has rigidly fixed to it a hand 
lever, Fig. 5, and which is in its turn pivoted 
to the lever l. l is pivoted to the machine 
frame, and may be held in any desired posi 
tion by means of the set-screw l. The pin i 
is mounted on the lever l, in order that when 
listands at any point in the circle it describes 
the roller is may be brought against the ring 
le by adjusting the lever l 
otherwise if the 
pivot li were standing nearly in its extreme 
upper position, Fig. 5, the rolleri would stand 
away from the ring k entirely. When the 
lever l is placed in the desired position, it is 
clamped by means of the screw l'. By this 
means any desired pitch may be given to the 
A slight variation in the pitch of the. 
We. 
Spring will necessarily becaused by the ring k, 
but the object of the hand-lever, which may be 
controlled by a workman during the winding 
of the Spring, is either to give the spring a still 
greater pitch in the middle, or by moving the 
hand-lever in the opposite direction to hinder 
the variation necessarily caused by the ring 
k. When the ringle is placed at right angles 
to the axis of the shafti, the lever land the 
roller l are not influenced, but they remain 
in the same position, and the spring will be 
made parallel the whole length. The more 
the ring k is placed from a right angle the 
more is the guide-rolli moved, and the spring 
is made of a larger diameter at the ends than 
in the center. When, the pivot l is moved 
Outward, the spring will have a larger diame 
ter over all, and Vice versa. It will be seen 
from this that the springs may be made of 
any size and form, according to the position 
of the ring k and pivot l. 
The springs are cut off as follows: The cut 
...ting-off mechanism is fitted to the front end of 
the shaft a', and consists of the inner clutches 
f' and f* and the outer clutches or guides f 
5o and f", Figs. 8,9, and 10. Both have straight 
f' and 
Stops, as seen in Fig. 9. The cutters 
fare brought together and the Wire cut, Fig. 
8. f is a ring for moving the back clutch. 
The two back clutches f and f form one 
piece, which is fitted loosely on the shaft a'. 
The clutch f' is fastened to the shaft a' by 
the key f', the end of which is formed into a 
spring. The clutch or guide fis loose on the 
shaft. The whole mechanism, with the ex 
ception of f, only makes one revolution dur 
ing the cutting off of a spring. 
When a spring is finished, the camj comes 
against the nose of the lever m, Fig. 4, and 
the lever and rod n are shoved forward, 
and by means of the ring f" the back clutch 
55 
65 
45 
35 
is also moved forward and is made to revolve 
by coming into contact with the revolving 
clutch f. Thus the back clutches with fare 
set in motion. By being set in motion the back 
partif of the clutch,with the ring f", although 
it has been pushed forward, is not pushed 
so far forward that the nosef" may pass by 
the projection in on the bearing of the shaft. 
On the contrary, immediately when the back 
part begins to revolve the nosef" is driven 
against the projection n, thus pressing said 
back part still farther forward and shoving the 
knives f? f? together, whereby the wire is cut 
off. A soon as the wire is cut off the camj 
passes from under the projection on the lever 
on and the latter falls back under the influ 
ence of the spring m, pulling the coupling 
out of gear. In order, however, that the coup 
ling may be brought into position with the 
knives upward, so that the next spring may 
be cut off at the next revolution of the shaft 
a', which revolves continually, the spring 
end of the key f' snaps into the groove fin 
the back part of coupling f"f* and turns it 
so far around until the nosef Strikes against 
the projection in and holds thereby the back 
part of the coupling stationary in the position 
shown in Fig. 10 until the next spring is 
wound and camjagain comes under the pro 
jection in. 
The object of the spring and spindle mis, 
that on the levers m m' being pushed forward 
by the eam, j the whole coupling shall not be 
forced forward, in which case if the clutches 
do not stand exactly in the right position the 
same would be liable to be broken or be 
come notched; but the back part of the coup 
ling will be able to spring back in the long 
slit in the lever n' and wait until the revolv 
ing part of the same comes into the proper 
position, when it will immediately spring in 
gear under influence of the spring and spindle 
? , Eig. 11. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained my invention, what I claim as my 
invention, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
1. In wire-spring machines, the rotary shaft 
ci, having the roll c mounted thereon, the 
lever l, having at one end the roll l and at 
the other the roll l, the disk c, adjustably 
mounted on and at an angle to the shaft?, 
and intermediate connections between the 
shaftsi and a, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination of the cutting-off ar 
rangement for the springs attached to shaft 
a' and consisting of the inner clutches ff, 
outer clutches ff, combined spring and key 
f, cutters ff, guiding-ringf', back clutch 
ff, having nose f on ring f, with bearing 
cl, having projection n, in the manner sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of the lever l, pivoted 
at , the pivot being eccentrically movable 
on the adjustable lever l with the rollers l' 
95 
ICO 
II. ? 
II 5 
I 25 
432,741. 
3 
and l, the latter running on the diskle, which 
is adjustable on the shaft? by means of ball 
joint k', in the manner substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. The combination of the shafts a a, con 
nected by universal joints with the shafts a 
and a, respectively, the latter running in the 
adjustable bearings d and d', the bearing d 
being adjustable in the strape, bearing d'ad 
justable in strape', in the manner substan- Io 
tially as described. 
hand in presence of two witnesses, 
In witness whereof I have hereunto Set my 
HEINRICH SPHL. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS B. GRANT, 
W. HENRY ROBERTSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432841.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 432,841, 
 
R. W. SEEMANN. 
CAR OR BARN DOOR HASP, 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
928)itv.cscs 
4.4. 
PAA 
A. 
w 
/voodo 4. W.S. 6777 OC 72712 
m 
(y 
w 
3v-ue vitov 
8tto t11 c 
THE cRRs retes co, Photo-lifho., WA NGTON, D.C 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUDOLF W. SEEMANN, OF GERMANTOWN, NEBRASKA. 
CAR OR BARN DOOR HASP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,841, dated July 22, 1890. 
Application filed April 30, 1890, Serial No. 350,066. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
- 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
IBeit known that I, RUDOLF W. SEEMANN, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resid 
ing at Germantown, in the county of Seward 
5 and State of Nebraska, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Car or 
Barn Door Hasps; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
Io others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention, relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in hasps for car-doors, 
gates, or barn-doors. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
hasp in which the bar is pivotally secured to 
20 a housing, the pintle of which is at an angle 
with the catch, so that when said hasp is 
opened or thrown back it will hang or lie 
against the door, and when it is turned upon 
the pintle, so that the bar will be in a hori 
25 Zontal position, it will engage with the catch. 
The invention consists in providing a bar 
or hasp which is obliquely pivoted to the door 
through the medium of an obliquely-arranged 
housing and pintle, and provided adjacent to 
3o its free end with a slot which is adapted to 
engage with a catch having a gravity-latch 
and a perforation through which the bar of a 
padlock may be passed when it is desired to 
use the same as an ordinary hasp-lock, as will 
35 be hereinafter fully set forth, and particu 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front view of a hasp constructed in accord 
ance with my invention, the same being shown 
4o out of engagement with the catch in dotted 
lines. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the catch 
with which the slotted end of the hasp is 
adapted to engage, 
A refers to the door, and A to a part of the 
45 door-frame against which the door abuts. To 
the door A is secured a housing B, having 
outwardly-turned ends b, to which is attached 
a pintle, around which one end of the hasp 
C is bent. This housing may be secured to 
5o the door in any suitable manner, and pref. 
erably lies in a recess at an oblique angle 
with the vertical edges of the door, and the 
hasp or bar C is shaped as shown, and when 
turned upon the pintle to engage with the 
catch the end will lie at right angles with the 
vertical edges of the door and frame, and 
when turned back upon the pintle, as shown 
in dotted lines, the major portion thereof will 
be beneath the housing, so that gravity will 
hold it in close contact with the door. The 
free end of the hasp or bar C is provided with 
a slot d at right angles with the major por 
tion of the bar, so that this opening or slot 
will be vertically disposed when the hasp is 
swung to a horizontal position. The catch E 
is preferably made up of a single piece of 
sheet metal, which is bent to provide parallel 
projecting Walls, which are united, and base 
flanges perforated for the reception of attach 
ing-screws, and the parallel walls e e have an 
opening through the same for the passage of a 
bar of a padlock when a permanent fastening 
is desired. Below these perforations f fisse 
cured a pivoted pawl F, one end of which pro 
jects between the side walls e e, and it is cut 
away so as not to obstruct the opening f when 
the pawl is lowered. When the haspis swung 
over the catch, the Wall of the slot d will con 
tact with the projecting portion of the piv 
oted pawl and raise the same until the hasp 
passes beyond said pawl, when it will drop 
and hold the hasp Securely upon the catch. 
When it is desired to permanently hold the 
hasp upon the catch, a padlock may be passed 
through the opening in the catch, which will 
afford a twofold lock, as the bar of the pad 
lock will prevent the hasp being opened, and 
the pawl will be held projected. 
This form of hasp is applicable to sliding 
as well as hinged doors, and may be advanta 
geously used upon car ol' barn doors and gates, 
and by having a hasp hinged obliquely when 
open it will be held by gravity against the 
door and will not mar the wood-work thereof. 
claim 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a hasp 
having an engaging portion at its outer end 
and at its inner end a portion extending at 
an angle, as described, together with a hous 
ing provided with a pintle upon which said 
inner portion is pivoted, the pintle being ob 
liquely arranged with respect to the main 
body of the hasp, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of a hasp and hous 
95 
Od 
2 
482,841 
5 described, for engaging with an opening in as shown, and for the purpose set forth. 
ing or casing carrying a pintle, said hasp be- projecting beyond the end of the catch, said 
ing secured at an oblique angle to the hous- pawl being cut away so that the upper edge 
ing, and a catch having a transverse perfora- when the pawl is lowered will correspond with I5 
tion and carrying a gravity-pawl recessed, as the openings in the side Walls, substantially 
the free end of the hasp, substantially as set 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
forth. 
3. The combination, with a hasp constructed 
substantially as shown, of a catch having par- 
Io allel side walls and flanged ends, the side 
walls being provided with a central opening, 
a pivoted latch or pawl having a finger-piece 
RUDOLE. W. SEEMANN. 
presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
R. F. SEEMANN, 
R. H. KUHRTS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US432941.txt	(No Model.) 
R. E. HETH 
BOOT JACK, 
No. 432,941, 
Patented July 22, 1890. 
 
 
 
2 
 
- 
 
28i-Evicoscs 
c2 (26-6, 
6. 7(6 /3) -la/ 
 
Z72222 272 ZZZZ, 
72.4%Y 
&11 uo 11 to z 
&ltto: 11 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUDOLPH E. HETH, OF EARLY, IOW.A. 
BOOT JACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 432,941, dated July 22, 1890. 
Application filed April 28, 1890, Serial No. 349,78l (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RUDOLPH. E. HETH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Early, 
in the county of Sac and State of Iowa, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in a Combined Boot Jack and Scraper; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the annexed draw 
ings, making a part of this specification, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in a combined boot jack 
and Scraper; and it has for its object to pro 
vide a simple, cheap, and durable device of 
this character, which can be readily applied 
to a suitable support, and which in use will 
prove very efficient and desirable. 
The device is intended more especially for 
use by farmers, and is designed to be secured 
upon the porch or at the back door or any 
other convenient place outside the house. The 
boots may be first scraped and then pulled 
off, or they may be either scraped or pulled 
off, as the user may desire. The device is not 
designed for use in the house, although it may 
be there used as a boot-jack, if desired. 
The novelty resides in the peculiarities of 
construction and the novel arrangement and 
adaptation of the parts, all as more fully here 
inafter described, shown in the drawings, and 
then particularly pointed out in the appended 
claim. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
through my improved device. Fig.2 is a per 
spective view of the boot-jack detached. Fig. 
3 is a perspective view of the base and scraper 
detached. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the several views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates the base-piece, 
which is formed with a vertical portion B, 
extending at right angles thereto and made 
fanciful in design. It terminates at its upper 
edge in a sharpened portion to form a scraper 
a, which at its ends is strengthened by the 
thickened end portions b, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 3. The base portion is provided with a 
number of suitable holesc, through which may 
pass securing means, by which it may be at 
tached to a floor or any other desirable support. 
Centrally of the vertical portion B and at a 
point near its junction with the base portion 
there is formed in the said vertical portion an 
inclined opening d, upon each side of which 
are provided the inclined ribs e, which join 
the vertical and horizontal portions upon each 
end of the opening to strengthen the same, as 
will be readily understood from Fig. 3. 
C is the boot-jackformed with suitable jaws 
fand with a portiong near its other end, which 
portion is arranged at an angle to the body of 
the boot-jack and is designed to have a flat 
bearing on the upper face of the base portion, 
to which it is designed to be secured by suit 
able means, which may pass through the hole 
h therein. Shoulders i are formed on the 
boot-jack at a point beyond the junction of 
the portion g, and which are adapted to en 
gage against the rear face of the vertical por 
tion B and serve to prevent and take the 
strain from the securing means as the boot 
jack is being used. 
The parts may be readily assembled or taken 
apart when desired, and they may be made of 
any suitable material fitted to the purpose. 
The boot-jack should be so arranged that 
the upper ends of the jaws will be about two 
inches below the top of the scraper. 
I am aware that combined boot jacks and 
Scrapers are not new, broadly, and hence do 
not make any broad claim thereto, but restrict 
myself to the peculiarities of construction 
above specified, attaching importance to the 
inclined braces and the shoulders on the body 
of the boot-jack. The boot-jack portion has 
a firm bearing on the upper and under wall 
of the opening d in the vertical portion B. 
What I claim as new is 
The combined boot jack and scraper herein 
shown and described, consisting of the base 
portion comprising a horizontal portion 
formed with suitable holes and a vertical por 
tion terminating at its upper edge in a scraper 
having thickened end portions, said vertical 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
OC 
432,941 
portion having near its lower edge an open 
ing with inclined walls and inclined braces 
upon opposite ends of the opening and join 
ing the vertical and horizontal portions of the 
base portion, and the boot-jack having jaws 
and passed through the said opening in the 
vertical portion and having a bearing upon 
the upper and lower inclined Walls thereof 
and terminating in a portion secured to the 
Io horizontal portion of the base, and with shoul 
ders which engage the rear wall of the verti 
cal portion, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
RUDOLPH. E. HETH. 
Witnesses: 
R. D. LYNCH, 
PHIL. SCHALLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433041.txt	(No Model.) 
L. SAUNDERSON, 
ELECTRODE FOR ARC LAMPS, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LLEWELLYN SAUNDERSON, OF KINGSTOWN, COUNTY OF DUBLIN, IRELAND. 
ELECTRODE FOR ARC LAMPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 433,041, dated July 29, 1890. 
Application filed May 14, 1890, Serial No. 351,798, (No model.) Patented in Belgium February 20, 1890, No. 89,570, and in 
Italy March 31, 1890, No. 26,966, 
So 
55 
Go 
65 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, LLEWELLYN SAUN 
DERSON, gentleman, a subject of the Queen 
of Great Britain, residing at 10 De Vesci 
Terrace, Kingstown, in the county of Dub 
lin, Ireland, have invented an Improvement 
in Electric-ArcLighting, (for which I have re 
ceived Letters Patent in Belgium, No. 89,570, 
dated February 20, 1890, and in Italy, No. 
26,956, dated March 31, 1890) of which the 
following is a specification. 
In the Specification of a patent granted to 
me, No. 418,474, dated December 31, 1889, I 
have described an improvement in electric 
arc lighting which may be shortly described 
as consisting in Supplying hydrocarbon va 
por to the arc through a hollow electrodeand 
from a tightly-fitting fibrous plug at the cool 
end of this electrode. The plug is allowed 
to absorb hydrocarbon liquid. A minute 
quantity of vapor finds its way into the va 
cant space in the electrode beyond the plug. 
It here becomes highly heated and in this 
State enters the arc. By these means the 
light is much improved. A difficulty has, 
however, been experienced and inconvenience 
has resulted therefrom. It is that carbon is 
Sometimes deposited at the point of the elec 
trode where the are is exhibited, and the pas 
sage of vapor is thereby impeded. The ob 
ject of my present invention is to remove 
this defect, and this I do by inserting a thread 
of asbestus or like mineral fiber or material 
into the void space in the electrode beyond 
the tightly-fitting plug, but So, nevertheless, 
as to leave the space freely open. This thread 
does not act as a wick. In fact the fibrous 
plug prevents any liquid passing to it, and 
the thread need not be in contact with the 
plug. The thread, indeed, is entirely inoper 
ative except at the point of the electrode 
where the arc is displayed, and here it oper 
ates to prevent the growth or mushroom 
ing' of the carbon. The invention is appli 
cable also when coal-gas is supplied through 
the hollow electrode. 
The drawing annexed shows the same ar 
rangement as is shown and described in my 
formerspecification, with the addition to which 
reference has been made. 
d is a vessel containing hydrocarbon oil, 
or it may be a hydrocarbon such as vaseline, 
which when cold is solid. 
b is the hollow carbon electrode, and c is 
the tightly-packed fibrous plug, which allows 
only a Small quantity of hydrocarbon to be 
vaporized within the electrode. This elec 
trode is used in conjunction with a second 
electrode of carbon, which may be either 
hollow or Solid, and there are usual devices 
for the production of the electric arc between 
the electrodes. 
d is the asbestus thread, which I now pro 
vide within the electrode for the purpose al 
ready stated. It does not fill the passage in 
the electrode, and offers no appreciable ob 
struction to the flow of the hydrocarbon vapor. 
Illuminating-gas may be supplied to the 
hollow electrode in place of hydrocarbon liq 
uid. Gas has the same tendency as hydro 
carbon vapor to cause deposition of carbon 
at the point of the electrode So as to clog the 
passage through it, and this is prevented by 
placing an asbestus thread in the passage. 
The use of a thread is not essential. All 
that is required to prevent the clogging of 
the aperture at the point of the electrode is 
that a few fibers of a refractory material 
other than carbon should be there present. 
No deposition or mushrooming of the carbon 
then takes place. 
What I claim is 
1. In an arc lamp, the combination, con 
sisting of carbon electrodes (one or both hol 
low) connected with an electric source, and 
usual devices for the production of the elec 
tric arc between the electrodes, a tightly-fit 
ting fibrous plug inserted a short way up the 
hollow electrode, a thread of asbestus or re 
fractory fibrous material loosely placed in a 
space within the electrode between the fibrous 
plug or packing at one end and the arc at 
75 
25 
35 
40 
45 
2 
- - 
438,041 
the other, and means for supplying liquid hy- supplying coal-gas or other illuminating-gas 
drocarbon to the plug or packing at the end to the electrode up through the hollow or pas 
farthest away from the arc. 
Sage therein. 
, , , 
2. In an arc lamp, the combination, con- 
I 
. 
5 sisting of carbon electrodes (one or both hol- 
JNO. H. WHITEHEAD, 
low) connected with an electric source, and 
usual devices for the production of the elec- 24 Southampton Buildings, London, W. C. 
T. F. BARNES, 
- 
tric arc between the electrodes, a thread of 
??ton Buildings, 
asbestus or refractory fibrous material loosely. Notary's Clerk, 28 Southan 
Io placed in the hollow electrode, and means for 
, ILLEWELLYN YSAUNDERSON. 
London, W. C. 
Witnesses: 
. , 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
. 
. 
, 
. 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433141.txt	(No Model.) 
O. B. PECK 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MACHINE FOR CENTRIFUGALLY TREATING MOLTEN MATERIAL 
No. 433,141, 
Patented July 29, 1890, 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
O. B. PECK 
MACHINE FOR CENTRIFUGALLY TREATING MOLTEN MATERIAI, 
No. 433,141, 
Patented July 29, 1890. 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
O. B. PECK 
MACHINE FOR CENTRIFUGALLY. TREATING MOLTEN MATERIAL, 
No. 433,141, 
Patented July 29, 1890. 
z26. 
III 
 
IIIEEE 
f I 
IFF I 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
H 
 
N 7Z 
N H 
7/ 
22 7-Z Merce 
V 
2 
 
 
 
 
ZZ2 
% 
ELENE 
HIEH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
v 
 
...I. 
Agt 
f 
N 
 
&X 
S Sas 
s 
I 
2 2 2 2 
2 2 
2 2. 
5. 
If 
2 2E22 
2 (i. 
(WA 
2 
IWA AT& 
%II. HI2 
2 
3. 
His 
a 
Silas 
H|| 
N 
HIS N 2 
N2 
I SES 
2 NY SY 
%S. 
2 
 
/ / / 
 
a 
/ 
^ 1 
M 
/ 
// 
Z222-27227, 
O2-zzzz Z3, Z2-27. 
-a-2 with%2% %2. 
a22 
22%2%.S.-- 
(No Model.) 
MACHINE FOR CENTRIFUGALLY TREATING MOLTEN MATERIAL 
No. 433, 4, 
Patented July 29, 1890. 
O. B. PECK 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
 
Zez-6 
: 
-Z7 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ORRIN B. PECR, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO MELIND A PECK, OF 
SAME PLACE. 
MACH NE FOR CENTRFUGALLY TREATING M OTEN MATERA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,141, dated July 29, 1890. 
Application filed March 3, 1890, Serial No. 342,432, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it vally concern: 
Be it known that I, ORRIN B. PECK, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im 
5 provement in Machines for Centrifugally 
Treating Molten Material, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
convenient means for developing and apply. 
to ing the operating power and for adjusting the 
Various parts of the apparatus relatively to 
each other; and the invention consists in the 
features and details of construction herein 
after described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion, partly in section, of the entire machine; 
Fig. 2, a plan view thereof, the driving-wheel, 
&c., being represented in dotted lines; Fig. 
3, a Vertical transverse section on the line 3 
2O 3 Of Fig. 1, looking in the direction of the ar 
rows; Fig. 4, a similar section showing a modi 
fied form of apparatus, and Fig. 5 a plan 
View of the water-wheel or motor shown in 
Fig. 4. 
V is the vessel; B, the curb; C, the shaft 
for supporting and revolving the vessel; D 
D, bearings for supporting and maintaining 
the Vertical position of such shaft; E, a driv 
ing-pulley rigidly secured to the shaft; F, the 
3o Water-wheel or motor: F, the driving-shaft 
upon which the water-wheel is mounted: G, 
the driving-wheel mounted on the shaft F; 
H, the driving-belt; I, the guide-pulley; J, 
the bed plate or frame; J, the power plate 
35 or frame; i, slots in such plate, and j' bolts 
passing through such slots secured to the 
bed-plate; KIX, the hand-wheel and screw 
Shaft for adjusting the power-plate; L, the 
pipe for supplying water to the wheel, and M 
My invention consists, in general terms, of 
a Centrifugal machine having a receiving-ves 
Sel, a curb Surrounding the same, a shaft with 
Suitable bearings for supporting and revolv 
45 ing the receiving-vessel, suitable mechanism 
for applying water-power to the operation of 
Such machine, and suitable means for sup 
porting and adjusting the various parts of 
the apparatus relatively to each other. 
I first construct of any suitable dimensions 
the bed-plate J, a portion of one end thereof 
4o the discharge-pipe. 
I next construct the power plate or frame 7 O 
being preferably raised above the level of the 
remainder of such plate. Upon this raised 
portion I preferably place the centrifugal 
machine having a receiving-Vessel, a curb Sur-55 
rounding the same, a shaft C for supporting 
and revolving the vessel, bearings D ID for 
supporting and maintaining the Vertical pO 
sition of the shaft, and a driving-pulley E, 
rigidly secured to such shaft. In this bed- 6o 
plate I form an opening N, of suitable dimen 
sions. (Shown more particularly in Fig. 2.) The 
object of this opening is to afford space for 
attaching the water-wheel, &c., to the power 
plate when they are secured, as hereinafter 65 
set forth, to the under side thereof, and also 
to afford room for the backward and forward 
adjustment of such wheel, together with the 
parts thereof. 
J'. This plate may be made in the form 
shown in the drawings, and is secured to the 
bed plate or frame J by means of suitable 
bolts j', which are fastened to the bed-plate 
and pass upward through slots in the power- 75 
plate, thereby providing for the backward 
and forward motion of the power-plate upon 
the bed-plate. In the claims I will also call 
this plate or frame a hydraulic power 
plate or frame, meaning the plate or frame 8o 
that serves to support or move the Water 
wheel or motor. Any suitable means may be 
employed for producing this motion of the 
power - plate, and in the drawings I have 
shown one form of mechanism for accomplish- 85 
ing this, which consists of the screw-shaft IX, 
rotatably secured to the lug i on the bed 
plate and passing back through an internal 
screw-threaded bearing k upon the power 
plate. At the end of this shaft. I prefer to 9o 
provide a hand-wheel K. From this con 
struction it will be obvious that the hand 
wheel and shaft are revolving in one direc 
tion or the other and the power-plate will be 
moved back and forth accordingly, the bolts 95 
i' being first loosened to allow of the motion 
of the plate, and afterward screwed up to hold 
it in any desired position. To the power 
plate,and preferably to the under side thereof, 
I secure in any suitable manner the water- IOO 
wheel, together with its shaft. In the draw 
ings, more particularly in Fig. 3, I have shown 
25 
 
433,141 
this wheel and shaft as inclosed in and sup- be used, and that it shall be capable of ad 
ported by a metal casing or shell O, bolted to 
justment toward and from the centrifugal 
the under side of the power-plate; but in some 
machine. 
instances, and with some form of wheel that 
As above stated, the tension of the driving 
night be used, the casing may be omitted and 
belt may be reguilated by moving the power 
the wheeland shaft connected with the power 
plate and driving-wheel back and forth by 
plate in any other suitable manner. The up 
means of the screw-shaft K'; but with this 
per end of the shaft F is preferably jour 
method of adjusting the tension it is difficult 
inaled in a suitable frame-work P, secured to 
to ascertain the amount of pressure applied 
the power-plate, and to this shaft is secured 
to the belt, and I therefore prefer to provide, 
driving-Wheel G, which may either be lig 
in addition to this screw-shaft, what I term a 
idly Secured to the shaft, or, as shown in Fig. 
guide-pulley I. This pulley is adapted to 
4 may be operated by a suitable power 
press against the side of the belt H, as shown 
clutch. 
in Figs. 1 and 2, and is capable of being ad 
The driving-belt I passes over the wheel H 
justed toward and from the belt. To cause 
and the pulley Eupon the vertical shaft, the 
this pulley to apply pressure to the belt, I 
Vessel being revolved by means of the revo 
prefer to provide it with a rope i, passing 
lutions of the wheel G. The tension of this 
over the sheave and down through the bed 
belt may be increased or diminished, as de 
plate, and having weights attached to its 
sired, by moving the power-plate J' back and 
lower end, so that by increasing or diminish 
forth by means of the hand-wheel and screw 
ing the amount of such weight the pulley Iis 
shaft KK, such power-plate being held, as 
caused to press with greater or less force 
above stated, in any desired position by means 
against the side of the belt. 
of the bolts f'. As above pointed oit, suffi 
Cient Space is given for the motion of these 
parts by the opening N, formed in the bed 
plate or frame, and through which the shaft 
and casing are passed. 
In order to permit of the backward and 
forward motion of the wheel and casing, I 
prefer to construct the water-feed pipe L with 
a telescope-joint l, and to provide a similar 
joint in the water-discharge pipe M. 
In Figs. I and 3 I have shown a wheel in 
the form of a turbine for developing the mo 
tive power, and in Figs. 4 and 5 I have shown 
a modification, wherein a positive power 
wheel is the motor employed in place of the 
turbine, this wheel being supported by the 
power-plate and moved back and forth there 
With, as above described when speaking of 
Although I have herein shown and do 
scribed two forms of water-wheel which may 
be advantageously employed with my appa 
atus, it is not my intention to limit myself 
to those precise forms of wheels, or either of 
them, inasmuch as any other suitable water 
Wheel or motor may be employed to develop 
the necessary power for the operation of the 
machine. It will also be evident that the form 
of the power-plate applied is immaterial, and 
that a simple frame-work may be substituted 
therefor, the only requisites being that it shall 
afford a support for the water-wheel or mo 
tor and shaft, together with the casing, if any 
I claim 
1. The combination of a centrifugal ma 
chine and a water-wheel or motor for supply 
ing motive power thereto, a bed-plate adapted 
to support a power-plate, a power-plate ad 
justably mounted on the bed-plate, a Water 
wheel or motor supported by such power-plate 
and movable there with, an expansible pas 
sage or conduit to admit water to the water 
wheel, means for adjusting the power-plate, 
and means for transmitting the motive power 
of wheel or motor to the revoluble vessel of 
the centrifugal machine, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination of a centrifugal ma 
chine and a water-wheel or motor for supply 
ing motive power thereto, a bed-plate adapted 
to support a power-plate and having an open 
ing therein, a power-plate adjustably mounted 
on the bed-plate, a water-wheel or motor sup 
ported by such power-plate and movable there 
with, and suspened through the opening in 
the bed-plate, a passage or conduit to admit 
water to the water-wheel, means for adjust 
ing the power-plate, and means for transmit 
ting the motive power from the wheel or mo 
tor to the revoluble vessel of the centrifugal 
machine, substantially as described. 
GEORGE S. PAYSON, 
SAMUEL E. HIBBEN. 
ORRIN B. PECK. 
Witnesses: 
the turbine. 
- 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
Io: 
O 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433241.txt	(No Model.) 
W. B. HAWKINS, Jr. 
SPARROW TRAP, 
No. 433,241, 
Patented July 29, l890. 
97iorne'. 
rit prris rerers co, Photo-THo., was HINGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM B. HAWKINS, JR., OF EAST SAGINAW, MICHIGAN. 
SPARROW TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 433,241, dated July 29, 1890, 
Application filed November 14, 1889, Serial No. 330,295, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM B. HAWKINS, 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, residing at 
the city of East Saginaw, in the county of 
Saginaw and State of Michigan, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Sparrow-Traps; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same, reference being had to the 
annexed drawings, making a part of this speci 
fication, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon. 
Figure 1 represents the trap set; Fig. 2, 
a top view of the trap sprung; Fig. 3, a side 
View of the trap sprung; Fig. 4, a sectional 
view of one end of the trap, showing coiled 
spring and portion of the frame. Fig. 5 shows 
the set-lock or latch. 
In the drawings, A represents the frame, 
Semicircular in form, and may be made of 
either metal or wood. 
E E are boxes secured to ends of frame A, 
and inclosing coiled wire springs FF, work 
ing on a cylinder F. F., said cylinder having 
its bearings in frame A and boxing E. 
To cylinder F. F is connected on inside of 
frame A the catch G. G., having two arms, one 
extending outward and resting on frame A 
when the trap is set and on ground when 
sprung, the other extending inward and with 
its end bent up forms a hookin which is placed 
the semicircular wire B. B is loosely hinged 
to frame A by Staples a ca, to which are also 
attached semicircular wires C C C. 
D is the covering for the trap, and may be 
of netting, mesh-work or cloth, or both, and 
is secured to the upper edge of frame A and 
to the semicircular wire B, also to CCC when 
they are used. When the trap is sprung, the 
springs carry the wires B C C C, attached to 
them by means of the catch G. G. over, de 
scribing a semicircle, and, together with the 
frame A, forming the inclosure and securing 
the bird. In order that the force of the 
Springs may not cause the frame to rise from 
the ground at E E when the trap is sprung, 
the catch G G is so arranged that it will 
strike against the staple-hinged a before it 
reaches the ground. A' is a catch-bar hinged 
to frame A by projecting staple a', and ar 
ranged to hold the wires B C C C when trap 
is set by engaging a notch in the latch H, 
which is pivoted to the frame A on outside. 
To one end of the latch H is attached a cord. 
Pulling the cord springs the trap. 
Any well-known means may be employed 
for locking and unlocking the trap. 
I do not wish to be understood as confining 
myself to any special form of construction of 
frame or wires, or the manner of connecting 
-them to the frame, and therefore any change 
or modification may be made as comes within 
ordinary mechanical skill without departing 
from the principle of my invention. It is ob 
vious, also, that the leading semicircular wire 
B might be attached to or made a part of the 
coiled springs FF, thus doing away with the 
catch G. G., which I claim the right to do, if 
desirable. 
The supplemental wires C C C may or may 
not be used. They are serviceable in keep 
ing the covering off the bird, and in carrying 
the covering back for resetting. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a sparrow-trap, the combination of the 
frame A, semicircular inform, and the springs 
FF, inclosed in boxing E E, secured to ends 
of frame A and working on cylinders F. F., 
with the semicircular wire B, connected to 
springs FF and the covering D, and the 
catch-bar A, hinged to frame A and engaging 
the latch II and the cord H', forming a set 
lock, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. In a sparrow-trap, the combination of the 
frame A and the springs FF, inclosed in box 
ing E E, secured to ends of frame A and 
working on cylinders FF, and the catch G. G., 
secured to cylinders F. F., with the semicir 
cular wire B, hinged to frame A and resting 
in arm of catch G. G, and the set-lock com 
posed of the catch-bar A' and the latch H 
and the cord II', substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. In a sparrow-trap, the combination of the 
frame A and the springs FF, inclosed in box 
ing E E and secured to end of frame A and 
working on cylinders FF', and the catch G 
G, secured to cylinders F. F., with the semi 
circular wire B, hinged to frame A and rest 
95 
IOC 
fo 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
So 
k 
433,241 
ing in catch G. G, the supplemental wires A', the latch H, and the cord H', substantially 
C C C, the covering D, and the set-lock as and for the purpose set forth. 
composed of the catch-bar A' and the latch 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
H and the cord II, substantially as and for hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
5 the purpose set forth. 
4. In a sparrow-trap, the combination of the 
frame A and the springs FF, and the leading 
wire B, connected with the springs FF, with 
the supplemental wires C C C, the covering 
Io D, and the set-lock composed of the catch-bar 
WILLIAM B. HAWKINS, JR. 
Witnesses: 
W. L. CASE, 
A. H. SWARTHOUT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433341.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 433,341, 
E. FULLFORD, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
REGENERATIVE GAS LAMP, 
Patented July 29, 1890. 
 
 
WN 
Z 
 
S 
S 2.97. 
a numerona7 
the Norris Peters co, Photo-Litho., WASHINGTON, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
E FULLFORD, 
REGENERATIVE GAS LAMP, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 433,341, 
Patented July 29, 1890. 
SSSSSSSSSSS) 
zzzzz!!! 
2 
| 
~] 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
: | ZZZZA 
2 % 
resorts perens co, PHOTo-Litha, WashingtoN 0. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN FULLFORD, OF CLAPTON, COUNTY OF MIDDLESEX, ENGLAND, AS 
SIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO HENRY THEODORE WAN LAUN, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
REGENERATIVE GAS LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 433,341, dated July 29, 1890. 
Application filed April 8, 1890, Serial No. 347,093, (No model) Patented in England June 27, 1889, No. 10,447, and in Belgium 
March 21, 1890, No, 89,910, 
To all, uhon, it 77 of CO7 ce?"72. 
Be it known that I, EDWIN FULLFORD, a 
citizen of England, residing at 8 London 
Road, Clapton, in the county of Middlesex, 
England, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Regenerative Gas-Lamps, (for 
which I have obtained a patent in Belgium, 
dated March 21, 1890,No. 89,910, and in Great 
Britain by an application for patent, which 
patent, when granted, will bear date June 27, 
i889, No. 10,447.) of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to that description of 
gas-lamps with inverted burners known as 
regenerative lamps, in which the gas-Sup 
ply passes down a central tube or passage to 
the burner, while the air-supply is led in con 
tact with surfaces that are heated by the 
flame and the hot products of combustion 
proceeding therefrom, a portion of the air be 
ing made in some cases to pass down centrally 
through the burner, so as to issue through 
orifices situated centrally below the flame. I 
shall describe my invention as applied to 
such lamps, referring to the accompanying 
drawings. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of a lamp em 
bodying my improvements. Fig. 2 is a part 
vertical section showing a modified construc 
tion of the air-heating screens. Fig. 3 is a 
part vertical section showing a modification 
of the burner to suit central air-supply. 
Referring to Fig. 1, G is the gas-supply 
pipe, terminating in a circular burner B, from 
which flameissues horizontally outward, bend 
ing upward within a hollow reflector-ring 
Rto the passages P, by which the hot pro 
ducts of combustion pass up to the chimney 
C'. Air entering by passages A, which cross 
the passages P, passes down the central chan 
nel II, through the perforations of a screen C, 
and then through a number of perforations 
in the turned-down lips of rings D to the 
flame. These rings D, instead of being made 
in one piece, as shown in Fig. 1, may be sep 
arate rings placed one above another. The 
air thus suppled to the upper side of the 
flame is highly heated by its contact with the 
walls of the passages conducting away the 
hot products of combustion, and also by its 
passage through the heated screen C and 
heated rings D. Besides the air thus sup 
plied to the flame, additional air enters the 
annular channel a and hollow reflector R, and 
issues through perforations of the reflector to 
supply the lower and outer side of the flame, 
this air being also heated by its passage 
through C and R. The burner, reflector, and 
passages are inclosed within a glass globe K. 
Referring now to Fig. 2. As in Fig.1, Gis 
the gas-pipe, and B the burner. His the cen 
tral channel for the descending air, and P is 
the passage for the hot products of combus 
tion upward. The perforated screen C and 
the perforated rings D are in this case made 
in a form Somewhat differing from that shown 
in Fig. 1, the air finding its way through the 
perforations of Cinto an annular spaced, and 
thence through the perforations of D. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section of the central 
portion of the lamp With the burner modified 
so as to admit of a central supply of heated 
air to the under side of the flame. In this 
case the gas from pipe G, by two or more 
branches g, enters an annular space K, Sur 
rounding a central tube h, and issues thence 
by an annular mouth B, which constitutes 
the burner. The air from the channel H 
passes partly through the perforations of C 
and D, as in Fig. 2, to the upper side of the 
flame, and partly between the branches g, 
down the tube h to a perforated head L, 
whence it issues heated to supply the under 
side of the flame. 
The construction shown in Fig. 3 is such 
that the central air-tube h and the piece con 
taining the gas-passages g can be readily 
taken out, giving access for cleaning without 
disturbing other parts of the lamp. 
Having thus described the nature of this 
invention and the best means I know for 
carrying the same into practical effect, I 
claim 
A regenerative gas-lamp having the verti 
55 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
438,841 
2 
cal passages P to the chimney, the central 
channel H, the transverse air-passages A, open 
to the external atmosphere and extending 
horizontally across the vertical passages above 
and opening into the central channel, the gas 
pipe G, carrying the burner B, the upper 
screen C, and the ring D, joined to the screen 
and comprising a pendent annular lip pro 
vided with perforations, substantially as 
shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
O 
two subscribing witnesses, this 21st day of 
March, A. D. 1890. 
- 
EDWIN FULLFORD. 
Witnesses: 
OLIVER IMRAY, 
Patent Agent, 28 Southampton Buildings, 
London, W. C. 
JNO. P. M. MILLARD, 
Clerk to Messrs. Abel de Imray, Consulting 
Engineers and Patent Agents, 28 South 
ampton Buildings, London, W. C. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433441.txt	(No Model.) T. L. BISSELL & W. P. PRESCOTT. 
AUTOMATIC WATER, CUT-OFF, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
 
 
 
28). Evesses 
/277/622221a-61 
47474 e/2-sea 
&ltiovvio 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TITUS I. BISSELL AND WILLIAM P, PRESCOTT, OF CHARLESTON, SOUTH 
CAROLINA. 
AUTOMATC WATER CUT OFF. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,441, dated August 5, 1890. 
Application filed April 2, 1890, Serial No. 346,368 (No model) 
55 
o 
75 
To all, whom it may concert: 
Beit known that we, TITUS. L. BISSELL and 
WILLIAMP. PRESCOTT, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Charleston, in the county 
of Charleston and State of South Carolina, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provementsin Automatic Water Cut-Offs; and 
we dodeclare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters and figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
automatic water cut-offs; and it consists in 
the novel construction and arrangement of 
its parts hereinafter described, and pointed 
out in the appended claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an end elevation of our invention. Fig. 2 is 
a front elevation of the same, set so that the 
water will run into the tank. Fig. 3 is a front 
elevation, set so that the water will run into 
the cistern through the pipe A. 
It is intended that this device be situated 
in the immediate vicinity of the cistern or 
tank for collecting rain-Water; and its object 
is to divert from said cistern or tank the first 
water from the roof, which is usually dirty, 
and has mingled with it matter that should 
not be conducted with it into the cistern. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
A represents a tank, above which is erected 
a casing A', provided with a hinged valve A*. 
In Fig.2 said valve A* is represented as hav 
ing fallen to the right, and in this position 
turns the Water off from the spout A, and 
consequently from the cistern, (the cistern 
and its connections are not illustrated in the 
drawings, as it is not deemed necessary,) and 
causes it to run through the spout Hinto the 
elbow-spout B. In the front side of said el 
bow-spout is a V-shaped perforation C, the 
narrowest part of said perforation being 
down, but not quite to the bottom of said pipe. 
D is a small elbow-pipe, connected with 
said V-shaped perforation to the tank A. 
Said tank is provided with a float E, to which 
is attached a rod G, which passes up through 
the cover of said tank. To the upper end of 
said rod G is pivoted a rod g, and to the up 
per end of said rod g is pivoted a rod I, and 
in the upper end of said rod I is pivoted an 
other rod J, and to the upper end of said rod 
J is secured a weight K, of sufficient weight 
when shoved beyond a perpendicular posi 
tion to overcome the weight of the valve A 
and the rods just described. 
When it rains, the water comes down the 
gutter and is conducted by a pipe through 
the open upper end of the casing A' into said 
cut-off, and the float E is down and the valve 
A* to the right, as shown in Fig. 2, the wa 
ter flows in the direction indicated by arrows 
1, 2, and 3, and during a heavy dew or very 
light rain, not sufficient to wash the roof, all 
the water which thus falls passes off through 
the pipe B without any of it rising up high 
enough to pass through the V-shaped perfo 
ration C, the bottom and narrow part of said 
perforation being a little above the bottom 
surface of said pipe. Thus the said tank. A 
is not gradually filled by heavy dews or very 
light rains until the cut-off valve is made to 
turn the first of the next rain into the cistern; 
but when it rains sufficiently hard to Wash. 
off the roof, the Water rises in said pipe B 
and a certain portion of it is carried off 
through said perforation into the pipe D, and 
through it into the tank A, the quantity be 
ing regulated by the size of the tank and of 
said perforation. The higher the water rises 
in pipe B the greater is the quantity carried 
off through Said perforation. As the water 
lises in the tank A, it lifts the float-valve E, 
which, by means of its connecting-rods Gg, 
shoves rod I into a horizontal position, throw 
ipg the Weight K beyond a perpendicular line 
which Overbalances said rods and float E 
and throws the valve A* to the left and closes 
the cut-off, as shown in Fig. 3, thus turning 
the Water through the pipe Ainto the cistern 
or other receptacle. After the rain is over, 
we set the cut-off again by unscrewing the 
plug L at the bottom of the tank and letting 
the water out and by turning the lever J 
back into position, as shown in Fig. 2. 
Having described our invention, what we 
o 
25 
35 
45 
So 
9o 
CO 
2 
433,441 
w 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. The combination of the tank A, provided 
with the bottom opening L, float E, adapted 
to move up and down in said tank, pivoted 
rods G, g, I, and J, and weight K, attached to 
said float and adapted to operate the valve 
A, pipe H, leading down from casing A' and 
connected with horizontal pipe B, said pipe 
B being provided with the V-shaped side 
opening C, itslowest point being a little above 
the bottom inner surface of said pipe, and 
pipe D, its upper end secured to said pipe B 
and communicating with said opening C, and 
its lower end passing into the upper end of 
said tank A, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with a water cut-off, 
O 
15 
substantially as shown and described, of the 
vertical pipe H, terminating in an open waste 
elbow-pipe B a little above the tank A, said 
Waste-pipe B having in its side an opening C, 
its lowest point not coming quite down to 
the bottom inner surface of the said pipe, and 
pipe D, its upper end communicating with 
said opening and its lower end entering into 
the upper end of said tank A, substantially 
as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
TITUS I, BESSELL. 
WILLIAM P. PRESCOTT. 
25 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD NORD, 
G. H. PUCKHABER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433541.txt	(No Model.) 
E. S. RAFF, 
CHECK RATING AND PUNCHING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 433,541, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
 
NSA evoxv.law.asd. Stow sMJ. S.-sw" 
t 
SA 
so-y\\y. 
ATTORAEY 
E. S. RAFF. 
CHECKRATING AND PUNCHING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 433,541, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
..., 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEY 
the Norris PETERs co. PHoro-litrho., WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD S. RAFF, OF CANTON, OHIO. 
CHECK RATING AND PUNCH ING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 433,541, dated August 5, 1890. 
Application filed January 2, 1890, Serial No. 335,678, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all tuhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARDS. RAFF, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Canton, county of Stark, and State of Ohio, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Check Rating and Punching Machines, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, making part of this speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
machines for perforating and printing figures 
on bank-checks or other papers to correspond 
with the amount or value otherwise indicated 
on sach check or paper to prevent subsequent 
alteration. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists of certain features of construction, and 
combination of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and set forth in the claims. 
In the accompanying dra Wings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective illustrating my invention. Fig. 
2 is a similar view of the bottom plate, die 
plate, and bank of keys. Fig. 3 is a similar 
view of a comb or guide-plate; Fig. 4, a simi 
lar view of the frame, showing the guide-plate, 
paper-holder, and sliding guide; Fig. 5, a simi 
lar view of the sliding guide; Fig. 6, a plan 
view of the keys and middle portion of the 
frame; Fig. 7, an end elevation of the Sup 
porting-frame and keys; Fig. 8, a perspective 
comprising the perforating and printing 
punch and die; Fig. 9, a plan view of a key 
blank. Fig. 10 is an enlarged view of a por 
tion of one of the points that outline the type 
character. 
The supporting-frame consists of two por 
tions and may be made of any suitable cast 
metal, and of the form, or substantially so, as 
that shown in Figs. 1 and 4, the bottom por 
tion. A having a wide table portion B. To the 
frame A is secured overhung end frame-pieces 
C against movement by screw-bolts C, as 
shown in Fig. 7, said end frames having up 
wardly-projected portions ai, at the upper 
end portions of which there is provided an 
aperture a, in which is placed a bar D, con 
necting the said portions and forming a sup 
port and slide for the key-frame E. On the 
front end of the frame-pieces C is secured a 
plate F, thus completing the frame of the ma 
chine and providing other features herein 
after explained. 
The key-frame E is composed of the rear 
wardly-descending side bars a, which are se 
cured together at their upper front ends by 
the comb-plate G and at their lower rear end 
portions by the comb-plate H. At the upper 
end portions of the side bars a there is pro 
vided apertures a, through which the bar D 
is passed and upon which the key-frame may 
slide. The bottom plate J is secured at its 
rear portion to the rear portion of the key 
frame E, the front edge to slide upon a ledge 
a', formed on the rear portion of the table B, 
as shown in Fig. 7, the top of the plate to be 
on a line with said table. The rear portion of 
the key-frame is supported on a ledge formed 
on the front side of the rear portion of the 
frame A, the roller a resting against the ver 
tical portion and projecting over the top, as 
shown, and, if preferred, the said portion of 
the said frame maybe supported on the flanged 
portion of said roller resting on the top of the 
frame A, as shown. As shown in this case, 
the plate J is provided with an oblong aper 
tured at its front portion, over which is placed 
the die-plate a; but, if preferred, the dies 
may be formed in the plate J, the said dies 
to consist of a series of small perforations 
outlining the numerals or characters, as 
shown at b, Fig. 8. 
The type-keys L are cut from sheet metal, 
a blank shown in Fig. 9, the upper end por 
tion to be twisted one-fourth of a turn to form 
a finger portion d', as shown in Figs. 1, 6, 
and 7, the lower end portion b having a per 
foration, as b, the arm portion b turned over 
to one side and back on itself, as shown in 
Figs. 1, 6, and 8, the lower face b to be pro 
vided with a raised type-surface or a type 
sunk into face portion b, with either of the 
above-mentioned forms, as type-characters 
may be printed without the use of a die or 
any form other than the paper resting on the 
plate J; but, if desired, die may be formed 
in said plate to correspond with the raised 
type, by which the paper may be perforated, 
said perforations to correspond in character 
with the type; but preferably, and for the pur 
pose of this case, I have constructed a char 
acter-type, as shown in Fig. 8, consisting of a 
IC) 
3o 
35 
45 
So 
95 
IOO 
- 
. 
- 
438,541 
series of steel pins, as t, set in the type-face 
portion b to outline the characters, said pins 
having a short sharpened conical end portion 
provided with longitudinal ink channels or 
grooves b. The die for said type, con 
structed as shown at b, Fig. 8, consists of a 
series of small perforations, as b, to outline 
the characters to correspond with the type 
pins, and in operation a paper is placed over 
the die, the type brought down, the point of 
the pins to puncture the paper, the body of 
the pin to press the paper into the perfora 
tion, thus indenting and puncturing the pa 
per, as will be hereinafter explained. How 
ever, if a character formed of small perfora 
tions is preferred, the end of the pins b may 
be so formed as to cut out the paper by en 
tering the perforations b of the die b", and 
thereby leaving a similar perforation in the 
paper. 
Numerals or characters are placed on the 
finger portion a of the keys to correspond 
with the type on the saine key. The keys so 
formed are placed on the rod 0 and spaced 
apart by the comb-plate H, said plate having 
a series of elongated slots b, in which the 
rear end portion of the keys L are placed, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
In Figs. 2 and 6 a coil-spring b is shown 
placed about the rod 0, between the keys. 
The energy of the spring is exerted to hold 
the front end portion of the key up in the slot 
b in the comb-plate G. 
In Fig. 7 I have shown another form of 
spring, (indicated as d.) which is made of 
plate metal, the body portion of which is se 
cured to the bottom plate J, the front end 
turned up to take under the key, as shown in 
Fig. 2. The front end portion of the key L. 
is secured against lateral movement by the 
comb-plates G, and the lug binto the slot d 
in the plate M to guide the pins or punches 
b of the type b into the perforation b in the 
die D. For the purpose of this case I have 
shown the two comb-plates G and M, both of 
which are secured at their upper end-portions 
to the side bars of the key-frame, as shown, 
and are projected downwardly; but, if pre 
ferred, the comb portion of the plate G may 
be dispensed with and the slots d' in plate M 
extended up to the flanged portion of the plate 
the full height of the vertical movement of 
the key. The bank of keys constructed as 
hereinbefore stated are now placed in the 
frame A, the plate J resting on the ledges, as 
stated, and the bar D passed through the per 
foration a? in the upwardly-projected portion 
of the frame-pieces C and through the perfo 
ations a in the side bars C of the key-frame 
E, thus forming a Support and slide for the 
bank of keys, as shown in the drawings, which 
may be moved thereon from one end of the 
frame to the other. 
In the plate F is provided a series of verti. 
cal slots d to guide the key and type to the 
desired point on the paper, and to provide for 
the desired spacing between characters and 
against mistakes a sliding guide Q is pro 
vided, as shown in Figs. 1, 4, and 5, the lat 
ter showing the reverse side, said slide made 
of sheet metal, and is formed substantially as 
shown in the drawings, having two side por 
tions d and d to embrace and slide upon the 
front plate F, the side d having a V-shaped 
notch R, having one sided graded so as to 
move the slide the distance of one Space to 
bring the small V-notch S in sided of the 
slide over the next slot d to the right. There 
is also provided on the front side of the slide 
a thumb-piece d', and on the plate F a corre 
sponding piece d. 
To hold the check or other paper in posi 
tion to be indented and printed, a Spring 
actuating presser-foot N is provided, as shown 
in Fig. 1, having a footportion provided with 
toes h to hold the paper from sliding or turn 
ing on the table, the spring hexerted against 
the back portion of the lever h". 
To ink the type or the puncturing-pins, 
ink-rollers, as T, are provided, as shown, Sup 
ported on and rotated about pins h, secured 
in the notched guide-plate F, the roller being 
supplied with ink in the usual Way. As the 
keys are moved back and forth in their nor 
mal position, the type or pins hereinbefore 
described will engage said rolls and rotate 
them about the supporting-pins, and in SO do 
ing will receive on the said type or points the 
desired amount of ink, 
In operation the thumb and fingerisplaced 
on the thumb-pieces d' and d', the slide Q, 
drawn against the foot-lever h", by which the 
foot is raised, the check placed on the table 
B under the foot, as shown in Fig.1, the slide 
released, the spring will move the slide to the 
right, the W, S resting over the left-hand 
slot d5 in the plate F, the first key having the 
dollar-character is brought down, the shoul 
der h striking the graded side of the W-notch 
R on the long side at ac and moved along and 
down on said grade to 2, by which movement 
the side will be moved to the right one Space, 
bringing the W-notch S over the second slot 
C, and the type in contact with the paper to 
indent, puncture, and print the dollar-char 
acter. The keys will then be moved to the 
left, bringing the key having the character 3 
over the V-notch S, and the key brought 
down as before stated, to print the character 
3. The keys are then moved farther on to the 
left, bringing the key 7 over the V-notch S, the 
operation of printing repeated. The keys are 
then moved to the right, bringing key 5 over 
the said V-notch, and the operation of print 
ing repeated. The keys are then moved to the 
left to bring the character O over the notch S, 
when the operation of indenting, puncturing, 
and printing are repeated, marking the said 
check $3,750. By providing the points that 
outline the characters with grooves or chan 
nels the ink supplied thereto by the rollers 
will be carried through the check when 
punched, and when the points are withdrawn 
the edge or wall of the puncture will scrape 
- 
O 
2O. 
25. 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IIS 
2 
I 25 
I 3G 
y 
433,541 
O 
the ink from the channels or groove, thus 
printing the check upon each side. 
Having thus fully described the nature and 
object of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a check-rating machine, a type-key 
L, having a finger d, a type-supporting arm 
b', guide b, and a type or punch, a shoulder 
h, and a downwardly and rearwardly pro 
jected portion having a perforation b', by 
which the key is pivotally secured to the key 
frame, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. In a check-rating machine, the combina 
tion, with the type-keys L and the plate F, 
having the spacing-slots d, of the sliding 
guide Q, substantially as described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
3. In a check-rating machine, the combi 
nation, with a character-type consisting of 
pointed pins arranged to outline a character 
and provided with ink-channels, of a die 
plate and means for inking said pins, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In combination with the supporting 
frame, as hereinbefore described, of the type 
key, type, and corresponding dies, spacing 
slots d, slide Q, and presser-foot N, substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose set 
25 
3o forth. 
5. The combination, with the type-keys and 
the slotted spacing-plate, of the automati 
cally-sliding guide, whereby when one of the 
keys is depressed to register with one slot in 
said plate the guide is moved to the adjacent 
slot, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the supporting 
frame provided with a fixed table, of a bank of 
punches supported to slide above said table, 
a notched guide-plate, a sliding guide en 
gaged therewith, and a check-holder located 
in the path of the sliding guide, whereby 
when it is desired to reset the sliding guide 
for another check its movement will trip the 
check-holder and release the punched check, 
substantially as set forth. 
7. In a check-rating machine, the combina 
tion, with a character-type consisting of 
pointed pins arranged to outline a character 
and having grooves in their sides, of a die 
plate having perforations to correspond with 
the pins, and a roller to ink said pins, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 28th day of December, A. D. 
1889. 
' 
EDWARD S, RAFF, 
Witnesses: 
W. K. MILLER, 
CHAS. R. MILLER. 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433641.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 433,641, 
A, BALL. 
DIRECT ACTING ENGINE 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
Ezz 1. 
NZ 3WZVZN, 
 
  
 
NZ2X)N - 
G 
7) 
Azy, 2. 
  
N N. 
Nz 33 N. 
N 
Ny 
N22NZ7 SS NY2 
N%.5%Y 
G 
 
WITNESSES 
A. 
(2% 
2%z 
Q4-e 6 (22-7 
INVENTOR 
l1%---, -6-lee 
% a 1, 22 -- 
ATTorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT BALL OF CILAREMONT, NEW HAMPSHIRE, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
SULLIVAN MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
O RECT-ACT N G ENGINE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 433,641, dated August 5, 1890. 
Application filed April 2, 1889, Serial No. 305,739, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERTBALL, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Claremont, 
in the county of Sullivan and State of New 
Hampshire, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Direct-Acting Steam 
Engines; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
direct-acting engines to be driven by steam or 
other elastic fluid (all which will beincluded in 
this specification under the name of steam) 
whose valves are moved by steam passing 
through ports which are opened and closed 
by the passing of the piston to and fro, and 
has for its object the obtaining a permanent 
fit or close contact between the port-openings 
and the surface of the piston or cylinder 
which is intended to close said ports. 
My invention consists in having a packing 
at the port-opening, with a spring-backing so 
arranged that so fast as the packing becomes 
worn the packing will be pushed-forward and 
always in contact with the bearing-surface of 
the piston or cylinder, as the case may be. 
In the accompanying drawings, like letters 
designate the same part. . 
Figure 1 shows a longitudinal section of a 
cylinder and piston with valve, (so much as 
is necessary to show my invention,) showing 
the port-packing in the ports in the piston. 
Fig.2 shows a similarlongitudinal section, but 
showing a port-packing in a port in the cylin 
der. Fig. 3 shows the port-packing, enlarged, 
with a spring. 
A is the piston. 
C is the cylinder. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
cylinder. 
D D are reversing-ports in the piston and 
F F are the port-packings with springs G. 
As fast as the packings become worn the 
springs (assisted by the steam) force them for 
Ward, and when in time they become too much 
worn they can be easily replaced by new pack 
ings. 
My drawings show one form of steam-engine 
having the distributing-valve inside the pis 
ton; but my invention is equally applicable 
to other forms, and I do not mean to confine 
it to any special form of direct-acting engine. 
I preferably use a spiral spring as most 
convenient to keep the packing to its work; 55 
but it is obvious other equivalent devices can 
be used, and I do not intend to limit myself 
to this particular form. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by ILetters Pat- ?o 
ent, is as follows: 
1. In a direct-acting steam-engine, the com 
bination of a cylinder, an elongated piston A, 
containing the valve and with ports therein 
and working in said cylinder, and a cup-shaped 65 
packing within the cylinder and having a 
steam-passage in its bearing-face and with a 
spring within its body, for the purpose herein 
mentioned. 
2. An improved packing, consisting of a cup 
shaped body having a bearing-face, a steam 
passage extending through said bearing-face, 
and a coiled spring within the said body, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I do affix 'my signa 
ture in presence of two witnesses. 
7 or 
75 
ALBERT BALL. 
Witnesses: 
H. W. PARKER, 
GEO. O. BALL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433741.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 433,741, 
C. A. McKIEARN AN, 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890, 
N 
s 
SY 
S 
53.411-lu- &etota c1 
enorris rereas co. Photo-Litho, wASHINGTON, ; ; 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 433,741, 
C. A. McKIEARN AN. 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
 
28itv.cscs 
%. 2, 
f 
841-Uc v1 oz. 
17/7%. 
531---ul 
&btor4 c.J. 
al 
the Norris 
rers co., Photo-liho. WASHiggi, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
C. A. McKIEARN AN, 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 433,741, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
 
 
 
48 
AI 
28 
  
 
A. A a SNS S 
 
 
s 
z2 
- 
22 
28 
. 
222222a2a 
S maywaaaaaaaaa 
73 
zza 
8 
2 2. 
2 2 s N 
2 
 
 
282 vicesco 
// ? 
e/ 
-- 7 
SNSSNSS 
841 Ue-viet 
-646.44%ra. 
f 
334 rulla- &etovo, 
the MORRIS PETERs co., Photo-Lithd., washington, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 433,741, 
C. A. McKIEARN AN, 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
y 
is 
isy SIP 
S s 
s 
2. 
 
 
 
28-141 casca 
727-27. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 433,741, 
C. A. McKIEARN AN. 
STORE SERWICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890, 
e 
  
  
  
 
4% AssesD P- HM s 
LZ 
SN 
eased Goa 
N IRh 
92.82 Evossos 
S$4 11-lu- (litot-11 ei, 
341.uov fot 
-64-6-44%arza 
7%.Z.7%2. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. A. McKIEARN AN, 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 433,741, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
2% 
meme 
Seas 
mirata O 1 
1. 
Et 
festige 
Usilatilities, is 
Pfi. 
All 
 
 
 
 
Hist 
 
s 
sists 
Kiss 
s SE 
Zefire a 
st 
r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Bis 
  
 
 
28). Evlossos 
 
 
X 
IEEI 
sa 278 
7 
(No Model.) 
C. A. McKIEARN AN. 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
No. 433,741, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
 
 
  
  
 
 
s 
  
  
N E7 
928. Evlooscs 
-- 
A 
3v-uo-vi-tot. 
5-7 
53 \v--J-eletov vict, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 433,741. 
 
C. A. McKIEARN AN. 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 8, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
2%. 
28i-tv.cscs 
7 
3-vuo vitov 
-64-4-7/%ar 
 
(No Model.) S. 
C. A. Mo KIEARN AN, 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 9, 
No. 433,741, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
28i-Evicoooo- 
3v-Uev-bov, 
23, it 22.2.2, ea2 
the noirs perers co., Photo-ITHo, WASHINGTON, ... c. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. A. McKIEARN AN, 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 10, 
No. 433,741, 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
282 ?voocy 
//4 
-62 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. McKIEARN AN, OF CILINTON, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO WILLIAM H. SALMON, OF SAME PIACE. 
STORE SERVICE APPARATUS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,741, dated August 5, 1890. 
Application filed August 7, 1889, Serial No. 320,015, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES A. McKIEAR 
NAN, a citizen of the United States of Amer 
ica, residing at Clinton, in the county of Henry 
5 and State of Missouri, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Store-Service 
Apparatuses, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had therein to the 
accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the class of apparatus known as store-serv 
ice; and it has for its object the provision 
of means whereby a salesman at a sub-station 
is enabled not only to send the cash-carrier 
T5 to a main station, but is also from his place at 
the counter enabled to deposit the contents of 
the carrier at the main station, make change of 
money at the main station, deposit the change 
in the carrier, and return the carrier to his sta 
2o tion, thus avoiding the necessity for a cashier. 
The invention consists, broadly, in the com 
bination, with a cash or package carrier, of a 
change-making apparatus. 
The invention consists, more specifically, in 
25 the combination, with a store-service track or 
Way and a propulsion apparatus and a car 
rier for the track or way, of a change-making 
apparatus capable under the control of a sales 
man at any one of a number of sub-stations 
3o of selecting the desired amount of change 
and automatically delivering the change into 
the carrier. 
The invention consists, further, in certain 
details of construction and combinations of 
35 parts, which will first be described in connec 
tion with the accompanying drawings, and 
then pointed out in the claims. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
view of my improved store-service, showing 
4o the positions of the different parts when the 
carrier is at the sub-station. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective view of that portion of the store 
service which is located at the sub-station. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section taken through the 
45 boxing and key-board. Fig. 4 is a side eleva 
tion illustrating the arrangement of the lazy 
tongs at the main station, and also showing 
the mechanism with which the carrier acts to 
operate certain portions of the clhange-maker. 
5o Fig. 5 is a detail perspective view of the buffer 
 
65 
on the front end of each section of the lazy 
tongs. Fig. 6 is a detail perspective view show 
ing the clamp at the rear of each section of 
the lazy-tongs for securing the lazy-tongs to 
the track-wire. Fig. 7 is a detail perspective 55 
view showing the manner of pivoting the lazy 
tongs and passing the track-wire through the 
pivot-bolt. Fig. S is an elevation of the car 
rier with one side removed and a portion of 
the runner in section. Fig. 9 is a transverse 6o 
section of the carrier, taken on the line acac, 
Fig. 8. Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective 
view of the change-maker and so much of its 
operating mechanism as is located at the main 
station. Fig. 11 is a detail perspective view 
showing the shelf on the rear side of the 
change-maker and the bell-cranks and wires 
thereon. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the 
change-maker, showing the mechanism for op 
erating the coin-slides and the indicator-tab 7o 
lets. Fig. 13 is a detailperspective view of the 
supports for the coin-slides and money-tubes. 
Fig.14 is a perspective view of the change 
guide partly broken away in front. Fig.15 
is a perspective view showing the rear side of 
one of the indicator-tablets. Fig. 16 is a de 
tail side elevation showing the mechanism for 
dropping the indicator-tablets. Fig. 17 is a 
side elevation showing the carrier in the act 
of depositing money in the cash-receptacle 
and operating the change-maker to receive 
change. Fig. 18 is a vertical section of the 
cash-receptacle, showing the parts in the posi 
tions they occupy as the carrier deposits the 
money. Fig. 19 is another vertical section of 
the same, showing the position of the parts 
when the carrier has returned to the sub-sta 
tion. Fig. 19 is a perspective view of the 
sliding box of the cash-receptacle partly 
broken out. Fig. 20 is a perspective view of 93 
so much of the store-service as is necessary to 
show how any desired number of cash-car 
rier apparatuses lmay be connected with the 
change-maker. Fig. 21 is a perspective view, 
partly broken out, of one of the paper-money 95 
boxes. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
A represents a track-wire, one end of which 
is secured in a rigid hanger B at a sub-sta 
tion and its other end in a similar hanger B' Ioo 
85 
75 
433,741 
O 
25 
35 ) 
at the main station, the hangers being se 
cured to the ceiling of the room. 
C, Fig. 2, represents a lever pivoted in a 
bracket c, secured to hanger B and provided 
at its lower end with a handle c'. The lower 
portion of the lever works in an elongated 
metal loop c, secured to hanger B. On the 
outside of this loop there is secured a flat 
spring c', having a hook cat its free end, and 
in the spring and extending through and 
across the loop is a pin c, which locks the 
lever C forward, thereby holding the section 
of lazy-tongs which is pivoted to it in a con 
tracted position. A thumb-lever c, provided 
on its under side with a spring c", (which rests 
on the handle,) is pivoted at c, and its upper 
end engages with hook c, whereby when the 
lower end of said lever is pressed down the 
pin c' will be withdrawn from loop c, releas 
ing lever C. 
To the upper end of lever C there is at 
tached one end of a wire C, the other end of 
which is attached to the upper end of a lever 
C, which is pivoted in a bracket c', secured 
to hanger B'. To this lever C, near its lower 
end, is connected one end of a spiral spring 
c, its other end being secured to hanger IB. 
D D' represent two sections of lazy-tongs, 
one at each end of the track-wire A. These 
are constructed in the same manner as the 
usual form of lazy-tongs, except that where 
the levers cross in the middle I employ, in 
stead of the usual straight fulcrum, a short 
bolt d, having a trunnion d on each end, and 
lace a washer d on each trunnion outside 
of the levers to give a greater bearing for the 
trunnion, and then rivet the latter down into 
the washer, so that the levers fulcrum on the 
trunnions, and are thereby prevented from 
buckling. The bolts d are perforated hori 
Zontally, and the track-wire is passed through 
these perforations, as clearly seen in Fig. 7. 
In order to clamp the rear ends of each sec 
tion of lazy-tongs to the track-wire, as is nec 
essary, I form the trunnions d on one end of 
a rod d about three inches in length, having 
an enlargement d at its other end, which en 
largement tapers rearwardly, is screw-thread 
ed, and is kerfed, as at d, and on this screw 
threaded portion I pass a nut d'. The track 
wire passes through this rod, and as the nut, 
is sciewed on the kerfed portions grasp the 
wire, all as seen in Fig. 6. 
In order to prevent the carrier from strik 
ing the front levers of the lazy-tongs, I pro 
vide a buffer b, which consists of a forward 
ly-projecting perforated metal rod, on the rear 
end of which the trunnions are formed, as 
above explained, and on the front end I se 
cure a rubber tip b', as seen in Fig. 5. The 
outer end levers of section D of the lazy-tongs 
pass through slots in hanger B and are piv 
oted to lever C, as seen in Fig. 2, and the 
outer end levers of section D are each piv 
oted to a shortlink d, which is pivotally con 
nected to a short arm d, rigidly secured to 
lever C, as seen in Fig. 4, one of the levers 
of the lazy-tongs passing through a slot i' in 
hanger B, as seen clearly in Fig. 10. 
As seen in Fig. 4, section D' of lazy-tongs 
is held in contracted position and released 
from that position as follows: As lever C? 
closes in the lazy-tongs, a latch R', pivoted to 
a bracket R, secured to hanger B', engages 
With a pin r on the lazy-tongs, the inclined 
front end of the latch riding up on the pin 
against the stress of a spiral spring r', secured 
to the latch and the bracket in a well-known 
manner. The latch R has a vertical arm r 
at its rear end, which arm carries at its upper 
end a laterally-projecting pin r, with which 
a latch R', pivoted at its rear end to lever C, 
engages to rock latch R' upward, so as to dis 
engage it from pin r and release the lazy 
tongs. At the time latch Ris in engagement 
With latch R, a notch r in the under side of 
the former is over a laterally-projecting pin 
r", Secured in the bracket. From this con 
struction it results that as the lazy-tongs are 
being contracted latch R' engages with them, 
and latch Rengages with latch R', as seen 
in Fig. 10, and when lever Cis moved, so as to 
eXpand the lazy-tongs, latch R will rock and 
release latch R', and at the same time it will 
be raised SO as to release its own hold as its 
notch is drawn back from over pin r, when 
the parts will be in the positions shown in 
Fig. 4. 
Each Section of lazy-tongs D and D is pro 
vided at its inner or forward end with a pair. 
of jaws D* for holding the carrier while at 
the Sub-station or main station. Each pair 
of jaws consists of two bell-crank levers d9, 
pivoted to the inner sides of the lazy-tongs at 
d", the rear arm of each jaw resting loosely 
in a holder d', formed of a strip of thin 
metal bent, in Ward at a right angle at each 
end and riveted to the lazy-tongs, as seen in 
Figs. 1, 10, and 17. A thin flat spring d2 is 
riveted at its rear end to one of the inward 
projections of the holder, its free end resting 
under the rear arm of the jaw in order to 
permit the jaws to yield and open when the 
knob. On the carrier comes into contact with 
them, the jaws being normally closed, while 
the lazy-tongs are contracted. The carrier E 
is a rectangular box having a standard e at 
each end, to which is riveted a tubular run 
nere', having enlargements e near each end, 
On Which to Secure lugs e, in which the 
Wheels e are mounted, the upper sides of the 
enlargements e' being cut out, as at ef, to per 
mit the wheels to rest on the track-wire, as 
seen in Figs. 8 and 9. On each end of this 
runner there is a disk-like knob e, rounded 
On its Outer side, as shown. 
The box is divided into two compartments 
e' and e by a partition e', and has a half-bot 
tom e" to close only one compartment at a 
time. Along each side of the box at the bot 
tom is Secured a cleat e, and on these cleats 
the bottom e", whose side edges are enlarged . 
and grooved to loosely fit over said cleats, is 
free to slide from one compartment to an 
75 
95 
Od 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
433,741 
IC) 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
55 
other. On the under side of the bottom, at 
one end and on each side, there is an ear e', 
in which is secured one end of a coil-spring 
e', the other end being secured in an ear et 
On the opposite side of the box. As thus 
constructed it will be readily understood that 
the bottom will be held normally under the 
compartment nearest the points of fastening 
of the springs to the box, and in order to hold 
it under the other compartment against the 
stress of the springs, I employ a catch e, 
which is a thin strip of metal sliding verti 
cally in keeperse, secured centrally on one 
side of the partition, the lower end of the 
catch entering a slot ein the end of the bot 
ton). To the upper end of the catch is se 
cured a laterally-extending pin et, which 
passes through a hole in one end of a lever 
e', said lever being fulcrumed in an ear e, 
depending from the runner, the outer end of 
said lever having a downward slope, in rear of 
which there is a notche", for a purpose which 
will hereinafter appear. The inner end of 
the lever is held down and the catch in en 
gagement with a slot in the bottom by a coil 
spring e', secured to the end of the lever and 
the top of the partition, as shown in Figs. 8 and 
9. On tipping the lever the catch will be dis 
engaged from the bottom, and the latter will 
be drawn over to the other compartment. A 
short stem e', secured to the bottom, serves 
as a finger-hold for drawing and setting the 
bottom under the other compartment. 
While a cash-carrier apparatus is an essen 
tial element of my improved store-service, 
and While I have shown and described one 
System of apparatus well adapted for use as 
a part of the store-service, it is to be under 
stood that I do not limit myself to the employ 
ment of any particular system of cash-carrier 
apparatus, as there are other systems aside 
from the one herein described, which, by slight 
mechanical changes, can be readily combined 
with the change-maker, and therefore any 
such combination would be clearly within the 
scope of my invention. 
I will now proceed to describe the change 
maker and other mechanisms connected there 
with, which, together with a cash-carrier ap 
paratus, compose my complete store-service. 
F represents the skeleton frame-work of 
the change-maker, which when used in con 
nection with the cash-carrier apparatus herein 
described may, for convenience, be clamped, 
as at a, to hanger B' on one side and to a cor 
responding hanger B on the opposite side. 
It may, however, be otherwise supported at 
the desired elevation. 
At each sub-station (see Figs. 1, 2, and 3) 
there is a boxing G, secured to the hanger B 
and extending from a short distance below 
the wire A to near the ceiling of the room, 
slots h being cut in the boxing in register with 
the slots in the hanger, through which pass 
the end levers of the lazy-tongs, as shown. 
In the lower end of this boxing, which is made 
wide for the purpose, is located a key-board 
H, in which there is a series of keys H', these 
keys bearing figures on their faces, indicat 
ing given amounts of money, ranging from 
five cents to ten dollars, in a manner well un 
derstood. These keys pass through slots h 
in the boxing, and are pivoted at their rear 
ends in the key-board, as at hi. 
As the keys H' must be operated to throw 
up their corresponding indicator-tablets and 
push out the change after the carrier has left 
the sub-station, it is desirable when several 
pieces of money are wanted at one time to 
be able to depress the desired number of keys 
simultaneously. For this purpose I pivot a 
bail H on the rod, on which the keys are piv 
oted, and attach links hito it at proper inter 
vals to engage with hooks h", secured in the 
under side of the keys, the bail being pro 
vided with a suitable hand-hold hi. By thus 
connecting the bail to the desired keys the 
latter may all be operated at once by pulling 
down on the bail. 
To each of the keys II' is connected one 
end of a wire 1, whose other end is connected 
to one arm of a bell-crank 2, pivoted in a 
bracket l, secured to the hanger B near the 
ceiling, there being one bell-crank for each 
Wire, the boxing serving as a housing for these 
Wires. To the other arm of each of the bell 
cranks 2 is attached one end of a wire 4, which 
leads to the main station, where it is attached 
to another bell-crank 5, pivoted in a bracket 
6, Secured to hanger B. These wires are 
housed in a metal tube I, Supported at its 
ends by brackets 7 and 8, secured to the hang 
ers B and B', respectively. The ends of this 
tube are flared outward to receive the wires 
as they radiate from the bell-cranks, and in 
each flared portion there is a perforated disk 
9 through each perforation, in which passes 
one of the wires 4. The wire C', connecting 
levers C and C, also passes through the disks. 
By means of these perforated disks the wires 
are prevented from sagging and buckling. 
Wires 10 lead from bell-cranks 5 to another 
series of bell-cranks 11, pivoted vertically in 
Standards i at one end of a shelf J, secured 
to brackets.f, attached to the rear side of frame 
work F, as clearly shown in Fig. 11. 
On this 
shelf there is another series of bell-cranks 12, 
pivoted horizontally a short distance apart, 
and a Wire 13 connects the rear arm of each of 
these bell-cranks with the lower arm of each 
of the bell-cranks II. 
To the front arm of each of the horizontal 
bell-cranks 12 is pivoted one end of a for 
Wardly-extending arm IK, whose forward end 
is slotted, as at 14. 
L represents a series of levers, each full 
crumed near its center in lugs 15 on top of a 
cross-piece a, which runs transversely of the 
frame-Work F, and is slotted at regular inter 
vals, as at 16, to permit the passage there 
through of said levers, the lower end of each 
of which also passes through the slot 15 in 
each arm IK, and is held in engagement with 
the arm by means of a pin 17 passed through 
75 
90 
95 
TOO 
IT5 
I 25 
 
4 
- 
433,741 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
the lever. 
against a stop 18, which is a light strip of 
wood extending across the frame F, by a spiral 
spring 19, attached to the lever above its full 
crum and to a cross-piece a on the rear side 
of the frame. A wire loop 20 is attached to 
the upper end of each of these levers, for a 
purpose which will presently appear. 
To the upper end of each lever L is piv 
oted one end of a rod L', the other end of 
which is pivoted to the rear end of a metal 
coin-slide L, perforated at 21. The slides are 
of varying thicknesses, ranging from the 
thickness of four silver dollars down to that 
of a ten-cent piece, and the perforation 21 in 
each slide is of a size to receive the piece or 
pieces of money it is designed to take from 
its respective money - tube. Each of these 
slides works in a recess 22 cut in the upper 
face of a slide-support L, which is simply a 
plank secured in and extending across the 
frame near its front side, the depth of the 
recess being just equal to the thickness of 
the slide, 
M represents a money-tube support, which 
is secured squarely on top of the slide-support. 
It consists of a wooden plank perforated at 
intervals, as at 23, for the reception of a se 
ries of metal or glass tubes M', the perfora 
tions 23 registering with the perforations in 
slides L. Each tube is designed to contain 
pieces of money, of a denomination corre 
sponding to that marked on the key that 
operates the slide beneath it. 
Nrepresents what Iterm the change-guide, 
whose function is to direct the pieces of money 
into the proper chute for delivery thence to 
the carrier belonging to any particular sub 
station. It consists of an oblong box divided 
vertically by partitions in into as many com 
partments in as there are sub-stations in com 
munication with the main station, four Such 
compartments being shown in the present in 
stance. In each compartment there is an 
inclined partition in extending from each end 
at the top to the bottom, these partitions con 
verging in such manner as to leave an open 
ing in of the size of the upper end of the chute 
W, as clearly shown in Fig. 14. The said 
chute may be of wood or metal, and of any 
construction adapted to deliver the money 
into the carrier. 
N' represents an inclined apron extending 
from the top edge of the rear wall of the 
change-guide to the slide-support L, to the 
front face of which it is secured, the upper 
and lower edges of the apron being properly 
beveled, so as to fit snugly on said Wall and 
against the slide-support. It is reduced in 
thickness for some distance upward from its 
lower edge, as seen at n', Fig. 12, for a pur 
pose which will presently appear. 
N, Fig. 12, represents a thin leaf, of any 
suitable material, hinged to the top edge of 
one of the vertical partitions 7 in the change 
guide N. The upper edge of the leaf rests 
normally against the recessed portion in 
Each lever L is held normally of apron N', in order that it may offer no 
obstruction to the money as the latter slides 
down the apron. The function of this leaf is 
when thrown back into vertical position to 
prevent, the money falling down the apron 
from going beyond the first compartment of 
the change-guide, and when lying in its nor 
mal position while the money-changer is be 
ing operated from a second sub-station to 
serve as a prolongation of the apron and direct 
the money into the second compartment, the 
second leaf, which is shown in dotted lines in 
Fig. 12 and in full lines in Fig.20, meanwhile 
Serving to prevent the money from going be 
yond the second compartment for which it is 
intended, and so on, it being understood that 
there is to be a leaf for each compartment, 
each operating independently of the others, 
as hereinafter described and as illustrated in 
Fig. 20. The leaves overlap each other at 
their upper edges, and as the apron may be 
made of any thickness it may be recessed 
sufficiently to permit the upper edges of all 
the leaves to lie in said recess. 
O represents what I term the detainer,' 
which holds on the apron N' the money se 
lected as change by the salesman until the 
cash-carrier reaches the main station. It con 
sists of a thin board hinged at its upper edge 
at 24 to the under edge of a cross-piece f' on 
the front side of the frame F, the lower edge 
of the detainer resting against the apron at 
a point above where the leaves come into con 
tact with it, as seen in Fig. 12, and a light 
spring 25 holds the detainer normally in con 
tact with the apron. 
26 represents wires secured at their lower 
ends in the upper edge of the cross-piece f' 
of the frame, and at their upper ends in an 
other similar cross-piece f*, each pair of wires 
Servillg as guides for an indicator-tablet O', 
of metal or other suitable material, bearing 
On its face a figure or figures indicative of a 
money Value equal to that expressed on one 
of the keys. As clearly seen in Fig. 15, the 
tablet is provided on its rear side with two 
transverse metal strips 27, having loops 28 
at their ends, which pass over the wires and 
hold the tablet. At the upper end of the 
tablet on the rear side is secured a laterally 
extending wire bail 29, and also on the rear 
side there is a light strip of spring metal, se 
cured at its upper end to the tablet and car 
rying a forwardly-extending pin 30 at its 
lower end, which pin passes through a per 
foration in the tablet. 
To the upper edge of a face-platef, secured 
to the cross-piece f' of the frame, is hinged, 
as at 31, a narrow strip O', of wood or metal, 
which serves as a support for the tablets when 
in their raised position, the spring-pins on the 
tablets resting on the upper edge of the sup 
port, which is caused to normally press 
against the tablets by a spring 32, attached 
to one of the posts of the frame and bearing 
against the front side of the support, this lat 
ter spring being considerably stronger than 
9 O 
95 
IOc 
( 
II: 
2C 
I 25 
433,741 
- 
5 
those carrying the pins on the indicator 
square shoulder at the front and an incline 
tablets. 
at the rear. When arm P' is in its normal 
P represents a series of right-angularly 
position, this notched part rests on a pin 42, 
bent rock-arms, pivoted on a rod 33, extend 
secured in the post, so that when the upper 
ing transversely of the frame and secured 
end of lever C8 is thrown rearward the bell 
in a beam f* at each side, the rock-arms be 
crank will be rocked to throw arm P' forward, 
ing kept the required distance apart on the 
pressing the indicator-support forward and 
allowing the tablet or tablets to drop. The 
rod by Spools 34. The lower end of the rear 
: Or Vertical portion of each of these rock 
arm P' is raised as the notched portion passes 
O arms is bent laterally at a light angle to 
over the pin until, when the notch has passed 
beyond the pin, the indicator-support is free 
form a finger p, which enters loop 20 on le 
Ver L, thereby loosely connecting the rock 
to resume its normal position, as seen in Fig. 
16, when the spiral spring 37 will rock the 
arm and lever, and the front end of the for 
Ward or horizontal portion of the rock-arm 
bell-crankin the opposite direction and with 
is bent upward to form a hook p' for engage 
draw arm P' as soon as the cord 38 is slack 
ened by the forward movement of the upper 
ment with the bail 29 on one of the indicator 
tablets O'. 
end of lever C. 
In order to prevent manipulation of the 
From the description so far given it will be 
money-changer by an unauthorized person, I 
clear that when the salesman at the counter 
depresses any given key II on the key-board 
apply a lock Q to the bell-cranks 5, SO ar 
ranged as to prevent any of the slides L*from 
II each one of the bell-cranks connected with 
it (2, 5, 11, and 12) will be rocked on its pivot 
being operated while the cash-carrier E is at 
in such manner as to cause the upper end of 
its sub-station. This lock consists of a rect 
angular metal plate hinged at its upper edge 
the lever L to be thrown forward, thus push 
ing the slide L* forward until its perforation 
on a rod 43, mounted in the outer upwardly 
21 has passed entirely beyond the slide sup 
turned arms of the brackets 6, in which the 
bell-cranks 5 are pivoted. A spiral Spring 44, 
port, when the coin that was in the slide will 
fall onto the apron N and lodge against the 
attached to the inner side of the lock and 
detainer O. The same movement of lever L. 
also to the rod on which the bell-cranks are 
pivoted, serves to hold the lock normally over 
will also rock the rock-arm P in a manner to 
elevate its respective indicator-tablet O' until 
the lower arms of the bell-cranks, and a Wire 
the spring-pin 30 on the tablet" has passed 
45, attached to the lock and to lever C, serves 
above the tablet-support O', when the pin will 
to withdraw the lock from engagement with 
be projected forward and rest on the upper 
the bell-cranks whenever the upper end of 
edge of said support, it being understood 
said lever is thrown outward, as seen in Figs. 
that the pin 30 normally extends through the 
1, 10, and 20. It will thus be seen that the 
money-changer remains inoperative until the 
tablet, as seen in Fig. 15; but in the ascent 
of the latter it is forced back until flush with 
carrier has been sent forward. 
I will now describe the mechanism oper 
the front face of the tablet by contact with 
the inclined tablet-support, the spring hold 
ated by the carrier E. The bracket R, se 
ing the latter being sufficiently strong to 
cured to hanger B, as before stated, is pro 
vided on its outer side with two perforated 
overcome the pressure by the pin 30. The 
ears 46, through which passes a slide-bar S, 
full and dotted lines in Fig. 12 clearly indi 
which is held in forward position by a spiral 
cate the above-described operations. The 
indicator-support is thrown forward to per 
spring 47, attached to the front ear and to 
the bar. In the under side of the bar there 
mit the indicator-tablets to drop by means of 
an arm P', whose front end rests normally 
is a notch 4S, (best seen in Fig. 10,) which is 
engaged by a pin 49, carried in the vertical 
against it, as clearly seen in Fig. 16. The 
bifurcated branch of a right-angular arm 50, 
rear end of this arm is pivoted to one arm of 
a bell-crank 35, pivoted on a block 36 on top 
which Straddles the bar. To the horizontal 
of one of the beams f. A spiral spring 37, 
branch of said arm 50 is pivoted the lower 
arm of a bell-crank 51, pivoted to a vertical 
secured to the other arm of the bell-crank 
and to one of the rear posts of the frame, 
extension 52 of bracket R. Arm 50 is held 
tends to hold the arm P' in its normal posi 
so that its pin 49 Will engage with the notch 
in the slide-bar by means of a spiral spring 
tion, the bell-crank being rocked to throw 
said arm P' forward, and thus push the indi 
53, secured to it and to the upper arm of the 
bell-crank. A crescent-shaped lug 54 is se 
cator-support forward by means of lever C, 
cured on the side of bracket R in the path of 
that arm of the bell-crank to which the spring 
is attached being connected with said lever 
arm 50 as it is carried backward by the slide 
by means of a wire or cord 38, which passes 
bar, and a stud 55 in the bracket limits the 
over a pulley 39, mounted on the post of the 
movement of the bell-crank, so that on its re 
turn movement arm 50 will be caused to stop 
frame, as seen in Fig. 10. The front end of 
arm P' passes through and is supported by a 
in the right place to engage the notch in the 
slide-bar. A vertical rod Treciprocates freely 
keeper 40 on the inner side of one of the 
front posts of the frame, the keeper allowing 
through a keeper 56, secured to the outer side 
vertical play of the arm. In the under side of beam f of frame F, the lower end of said 
of the arm there is a notch 41, having a rod being pivoted to bell-crank 51. A small 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
Od 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
6 
433,741 
5 
pin 57 extends laterally from the rod above 
main box just below the slots 72, the rear end 
the keeper and enters the slotted end of one 
wall of the sliding box being grooved, as at 
arm of a bell-crank 58, pivoted to the side of 
74, to fit on the ways, the sides of the box ex 
said beam. 
tending only up to the lower edges of these 
To the other arm of bell-crank 
58 is pivoted one end of a rod T', the other 
grooves. Secured to the front ends of two 
end of which is pivoted to a crank-arm 59, 
arms 75, passed through openings 76 in the 
which is a right-angular extension of the rod 
rear wall of the sliding box, the other ends of 
on which the leaf Nishinged to the change 
said arms being secured to the rear wall of 
guide N. 
The upper end of rod T strikes 
the main box, is another partition-plate 77, 
against the under side of an outwardly 
which stands in line with partition-plate 71. 
extending flange 60 on one arm of a bell 
The sliding box u is provided with a for 
crank 61, pivoted on the side of beam f of 
wardly - extended apron 7S, secured in the 
the frame. To the other arm of this bell 
front edges of its end walls near the bottom. 
crank is pivoted one end of a rod T', on the 
The front wall of the main box down to a 
line even with the lower edge of partition 
outer end of which are secured three set-nuts 
plate 77 is composed of a glass plate 79. 
62 6364. The inner nut 62, when the rod is 
moved forward, rides up on the rear end of a 
The sliding box is drawn rearward by 
latch t and depresses it, thus raising the front 
means of the lever C, to the lower end of 
end, which engages with a metal strip or catch 
which is attached one end of a short spiral 
t on the end of the detainer O, to hold the 
spring S0, to whose other end is attached a 
detainer against the apron. The second nut 
cord 81, which passes under a small pulley 82 
63 abuts against the inner side of catch t to 
in the rear wall of the main box and is se 
push the detainer outward, and the third nut 
cured to the rear wall of the sliding box. A 
64 is for the purpose of pulling the detainer 
spiral spring 83, attached to the lower edge 
back to its place against the apron. 
of the rear wall of the sliding box and to the 
When cash - carrier apparatuses are con 
front wall of the main box, serves to move 
nected with the money-changer on both sides, 
The flap 
said box in the opposite direction. 
as will be explained farther on, there must 
au' is raised and lowered by means of the rod 
be some provision for releasing the catches at 
70, whose lower end is bent at a right angle, 
each end of the detainer O simultaneously, 
enters the slot 72 in its side of the main box, 
and for this purpose I pivot two rods it to 
and is connected to the upper edge of the 
the front side of the detainer, which rods are 
rear wall of the sliding box, the other end of 
arranged in the form of a compound lever. 
the rod 70 being connected as before de 
The rodt, which is pivoted at 65, is enlarged 
scribed. 
and bifurcated at its inner end, as at 66, and 
I have as yet described my improved store 
the inner end of rod f plays in this bifurca 
Service as embracing but a single cash-car 
tion, said rod being pivoted at 67. The outer 
rier apparatus. I will now explain how a 
number of these apparatuses may be con 
end of each rod extends outward a short dis 
tance beyond the frame and engages in a slot 
nected with the money-changer, each one of 
90, cut in each latch t, it being understood 
them independent of the other, there being 
that in this case there is to be a catch at each 
an apparatus for each sub-station. Fig. 20 
side of the frame. 
illustrates this feature so plainly that but 
U represents the cash-receptacle, which is 
little description is necessary, as the con 
designed to receive the money deposited by 
struction involves but a duplication of parts, 
the carrier, it being suitably supported under 
with one or two minor exceptions, the first of 
the track-wire. As seen in Figs. 18 and 19, it 
which is that instead of having a hanger B' 
is a rectangular box, having a hopper it in its 
for each cash-carrier apparatus I secure a 
top, which is secured therein in any suitable 
column B to the hanger, preferably by means 
manner. To one side of the hopper on its 
of pipe-joints, as shown, and attach to it the 
under edge is hinged a flap l', adapted when 
working parts attached to the hanger in the 
in its raised position to cover the opening 
first instance. In the second place, instead 
into the box. The rod 68, on which the flap 
of attaching rod T directly to the bell-crank 
ishinged, extends a short distance outside the 
51, I pivot it to the inner forwardly-extending 
box at one end, and to it is rigidly secured at 
end of a rock-arm V, journaled on the front 
an obtuse angle one end of a short arm 69, 
sides of the hanger and column, and pivot 
the other end of said arm being pivoted to a 
the outer forwardly-extending end of the 
rod 70. On a line with the lower edge of the 
rock-arm to the upper end of a short link 84, 
hopper, opposite the side on which the flap 
whose lower end is pivoted to the bell-crank 
is hinged, there is a partition-plate 71, ex 
51, as shown in Fig. 20, in which figure the 
tending downward nearly half the depth of 
bracket R and the parts which it carries 
the box, and from the lower edge of this par 
(shown in the other figures as attached to the 
tition-plate back to the rear Wall of the box 
hanger) have been omitted for the purpose 
the sides are slotted, as at 72. 
of clear illustration of this attachment of a 
Inside the main box there is a sliding box 
Second cash-carrier apparatus. As seen in 
'u', (clearly shown in Fig. 19,) open at the 
Fig. 20, the wires 10 of all the cash-carrier 
front, side, and bottom, which moves back and 
apparatuses are connected to the bell-cranks 
forth on Ways 78, secured to the sides of the i 1J on shelf J. When a key at any of the sub 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
438,741 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
stations is depressed, causing its wire 10 to 
operate the particular bell-crank 11 with 
which it is connected, all the other wires 10 
connected with that bell-crank will slack, as 
is evident. A third cash-carrier apparatus 
may be connected with the change-maker 
alongside the second, and so on, and also 
Cash-carrier apparatuses may be attached to 
the change-maker on the opposite side in the 
Satellae. 
I will now describe the operation of my 
store-service complete. The money-tubes are 
first filled with coins of a denomination cor 
responding to their respective keys. Those 
of the tubes, however, whose slides are capa 
ble of receiving four silver dollars (and all 
the slides whose respective keys are of greater 
Value than two dollars are of just that ca 
pacity) are charged with small metal boxes X, 
like that shown in Fig. 21, whose lid is flush 
with the periphery of the body and fits snugly. 
In these boxes are placed paper money, each 
bOX containing money of the value of the tube 
in which it is placed. We will now suppose the 
Salesman at his sub-station wishes thirty-five 
cents change out of a dollar and that certain of 
the indicator-tablets are up, indicating the 
amount of change taken at a previous opera 
tion. He first places the dollar (if of paper, 
inclosed in one of the boxes X) in the com 
partment e of the carrier, and then releases 
lever C and draws it backward, when spring 
c will draw the lower end of lever C2 for 
Ward, and thereby throw its upper end out 
ward. In this outward movement of the up 
per end of the lever bell-crank 35, through 
cord 38, will be rocked, so as to push bar P' 
forward to push the indicator-support back 
and allow the tablets to fall. In moving for 
Ward the inclined notch 41 in the bar rides 
up on pin 42, thereby raising the front end of 
the bar above the support, when the spring 
bearing against the latter will return it to its 
place. The outward movement of lever C 
causes the section D of the lazy-tongs to ex 
pand, and as they do so their jaws automati 
cally release their hold on the carrier, which 
latter is given sufficient momentum by the 
lazy-tongs to send it to the main station. So 
Soon as the carrier has been started on its 
Way the salesman depresses the keys marked 
10 and 25, when, through the instrumentality 
of their respective wires 1 4 10 12 and the 
bell-cranks with which they are connected, 
arms IK will be moved rearward, thus draw 
ing the lower ends of levers L in the same di 
rection. This movement of levers I causes 
the coin-slides LP under the respective tubes 
containing the ten and twenty-five cent pieces 
to be pushed forward by the rods L' until 
their perforations (the perforation in each 
slide containing a coin) have passed clear of 
the slide-support L, when the coins will fall 
down onto apron N' and rest against detainer 
O. At the same time the rock-arms P, con 
nected with these particular levers L, will be 
so operated as to carry upward the indicator 
tablets marked 10 and 25, and when they have 
been fully elevated their spring-pins 30 will 
fly forward and rest on top of the indicator 
support, as before explained, holding the tab 
lets elevated until another amount is to be in 
dicated. As soon as pressure is off the keys, the 
springs 19 will draw levers L back to their nor 
mal position against stop 18, (which insures the 
perforation in each coin-slide resting directly 
under its money-tube) thereby causing the 
keys to be raised and also lowering the rock 
arms Paway from their indicator-tabletsinpo 
sition for the bails on the tablets to fall over 
their upturned ends. Just before the knob e 
on the carrier E comes into contact with the 
jaws of lazy-tongs ID' at the main station the 
forward end of lever e on the carrier strikes 
a downwardly-bent pin d8 on the forward end 
of the lazy-tongs, thereby causing that end of 
said lever to be slightly depressed and rais 
ing catch et out of engagement with the car 
rier-bottom, when the latter will immediately 
fly under the compartment e, dropping the 
contents of compartment e into the cash-re 
ceptacle U. As soon as the notch e' in the 
forward end of the carrier-lever has reached 
the pin d', the spiral spring e' will draw 
down the inner end of that lever and force 
the catch et again in engagement with the 
bottom, holding it under compartmente". As 
the rounded face of the knob on the carrier 
comes into contact with the jaws on the lazy 
tongs, the latter are forced open until the 
knob has entered, when the springs under 
their rear ends will cause them to close and 
hold the carrier in position with its compart 
ment e directly under the chute W. In en 
tering the jaws the knob strikes against the 
end of the slide-bar S, which projects slightly 
beyond the buffer b on the lazy-tongs and 
pushes it rearward, the buffer preventing 
shock on the lazy-tongs. As the bar S slides 
backward, the arm 50 (by reason of its pin 49 
being in engagement with notch 48 in the 
under side of the bar) is also moved back 
Ward, thereby rocking bell-crank 51 and rais 
ing rod T. As said arm 50 moves under the 
lug 54, it is thereby depressed, disengaging 
pin 49 from the notch 48 in the slide-bar, 
when the spring 47 will reset said bar in its 
forward position, allowing rod T and parts 
operated thereby to assume their normal po 
sitions. The raising of the rod T operates, 
through bell-crank 58 and rod T', to throw 
the leaf N up into a vertical position, and it 
also operates, through bell-crank 61 and rod 
T, to throw the detainer O outward away 
from the apron N', the movement of the leaf 
being timed slightly ahead of that of the de 
tainer. As the detainer leaves the apron, the 
money will slide down into the change-guide 
N, and thence through chute W to the car 
rier. The salesman now pushes lever C for 
Ward, which throws the lower end of lever C 
outward, thereby expanding section D' of the 
lazy-tongs and sending the carrier back to 
the sub-station. 
By the outward movement 
75 
IOO 
IIC) 
l. I 5 
433,741 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
a 
of the lower end of lever C9 the sliding box 
u in the cash-receptacle U is drawn rearward 
and the money deposited by the carrier, which 
has meanwhile lain on top of said box, is 
Scraped off by partition-plate 71 onto apron 
78, which by this time is in position to re 
ceive it, where it lies exposed to view until 
the lever C is again reversed, when it will be 
scraped off the apron by the glass front and 
fall into the bottom portion of the receptacle, 
which is locked. 
The operation of the duplicated mechanism 
is the same as that already described. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a store-service, the combination, with 
a cash-carrier apparatus, of a change-maker. 
2. In a store-service, the combination, with 
a cash-carrier apparatus, of a change-maker 
embodying mechanism for indicating the 
amount of change desired. 
3. An apparatus comprising a cash-carrier, 
a change-maker, and mechanism for operat 
ing said cash-carrier and change-maker. 
4. In a store-service, the combination, with 
a cash-carrier apparatus whose carrier is pro 
pelled back and forth between a sub-station 
and the main station by mechanism under 
the control of a person at the sub-station, of 
a change-maker. 
5. In a store-service, the combination, witl 
a cash-carrier apparatus whose carrier is pro 
pelled back and forth between a sub-station 
and the main station by mechanism under 
the control of a person at the sub-station, of 
a change-maker embodying mechanism for 
indicating the amount of change desired, lo 
cated at the main station. 
6. In a store-service, a change-maker lo 
cated at the main station, in combination 
with a series of keys located at a sub-station 
connected through wires and bell-cranks with 
said change-maker. 
7. In a store-Service, the combination, with 
a cash-carrier apparatus, of a change-maker 
located at the main station and mechanism 
under the control of a person at a substa 
tion for selecting the desired amount of 
change and placing it in position to be auto 
matically delivered to the carrier. 
8. In a store-service, the combination, with 
a cash-carrier apparatus, of a change-maker 
located at the main station and mechanism 
under the control of a person at a sub-sta 
tion for indicating the amount of change de 
sired and Selecting the change and placing it 
in position to be automatically delivered to 
the carrier. 
9. In a store-service, the combination, with 
a cash-carrier apparatus, of a change-maker 
provided with a change-guide adapted to di 
rect the selected change to the carrier for the 
time being in operation. 
10. In a store-service including a change 
maker and one or more cash-carrier appara 
tuses, the combination, in the change-maker, 
- 
scribed. 
of the coin-tubes, the coin-slides under them, 
the apron below the slides, and the detainer 
resting against the apron of a change-guide 
having as many compartments as there are 
cash-carrier apparatuses, and a leaf for each 
compartment, a chute attached to the under 
side of each compartment, and mechanism 
operated by the carrier to raise the detainer 
and one of the leaves, substantially as de 
11. In a store-service, a change-maker lo 
cated at the main station and provided with 
a series of coin-slides, a series of indicator 
tablets, a series of levers, springs for retract 
ing the levers, rods connecting the upper ends 
of said levers with the coin-slides, and a Se 
ries of rock-arms connected with the levers 
and engaging with the tablets to elevate them, 
in combination with a series of keys at a Sub 
station connected through wires and bell 
cranks with the lower ends of said levers, 
substantially as described. 
12. In a store-service, a change-maker lo 
cated at the main station and provided with 
a series of coin-slides, a series of vertical 
levers, springs for retracting the levers, and 
rods connecting the upper ends of said levers 
with the coin-slides, and a series of keys at a 
sub-station connected through wires and bell 
cranks with the lower ends of the levers, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
13. In a store-service, a change-maker lo 
cated at the main station, having a series of 
indicator-tablets, each provided with a spring 
pin playing through it from its rear side, a 
support upon which said pins rest, when the 
tablets are elevated, and mechanism operated 
from a sub-station to move the support from 
under said pins to permit the tablets to fall, 
substantially as described. 
14. In a store-service, the combination, with 
two levers located, respectively, at the main 
station and a sub-station and connected in 
any suitable manner, the lever at the main 
station being provided with a retracting 
spring, of a change-maker having a hinged 
spring-pressed indicator-tablet support, a 
rod bearing at one end against Said Support 
and pivoted at its other end to one arm of a 
bell-crank, a wire or cord connecting the other 
arm of the bell-crank with the lever at the 
main station, and a spring for retracting the 
bell-crank, for the purpose stated. 
15. In a store-service, the combination, with 
a cash-carrier apparatus, of a change-maker 
located at the main station and provided with 
a series of coin-slides operated from a sub 
station through the medium of keys, wires, 
and bell-cranks, of a device for automatically 
locking one series of the bell-cranks while the 
carrier is at the sub-station, substantially as 
described. 
16. In a store-service including a cash-car 
rier apparatus and a change-maker, the com 
bination, in the change-maker, of a series of 
money-tubes, a series of coin-slides beneath 
75 
95 
IOC) 
O 
25 
483,741 
said tubes, mechanism for operating the slides 
to withdraw coin from the tubes, an inclined 
apron below the slides on which the coins 
fall, and a detainer for holding the coins on 
the apron temporarily, with a change-guide 
having a leaf hinged to its top and resting at 
its upper edge normally on the apron, a chute 
connected to the change-guide, and mechan 
ism operated by the carrier to raise the de 
tainer and the leaf to release the money and 
direct it to the chute and thence to the car 
rier, substantially as described. 
17. In a store-service, a change-maker lo 
cated at the main station and provided with 
a series of tubes for containing coins, a series 
of coin-slides under said tubes, a series of 
vertical levers, springs for retracting them, 
and rods connecting the upper ends of said 
levers and the coin-slides, in combination with 
a series of keys at a sub-station connected 
through wires and bell-cranks with the lower 
ends of said levers, substantially as described, 
and for the purposes set forth. 
18. A store-service comprising a change 
maker, a cash-receptacle, and a carrier whose 
body is divided into two vertical compart 
ments, its bottom, which closes but one com 
partment at a time, being arranged to auto 
matically move from one compartment to the 
other as the carrier reaches the change-maker, 
whereby the contents of one compartment are 
(leposited in the cash-receptacle and the other 
compartment is put into condition to receive 
money from the change-maker. 
19. In a store-service, a carrier comprising 
two vertical compartments, a sliding bottom 
adapted to close only one compartment at a 
time, a lever-operated detent for holding the 
bottom under one of the compartments, and 
a spring for drawing the bottom to the other 
compartment when the lever withdraws the 
detent, Substantially as described, 
20. In a store-service including a change 
maker and a cash-carrier apparatus, the com 
bination, with the detainer O and leaf N, of 
the slide-bar S, having notch 48 and provided 
with a retracting-spring 47, arm 50, provided 
with the pin 49, adapted to engage with the 
notch in the bar, bell-crank 51, one arm of 
which is pivoted to arm 50, spring 53, con 
necting the latter with said bell-crank, rod 
T, pivoted at its lower end to said bell-crank, 
and mechanism operated by said rod to op 
erate the detainer and leaf, the said slide-bar 
being operated by the carrier, substantially 
as described. 
21. In a store-service, the combination, with 
two levers located, respectively, at the main 
station and a sub-station, pivoted to fixed 
supports and connected in any suitable man 
ner, the lever at the main station being pro 
vided with a retracting-spring, of a track 
wire between the two stations and a lazy 
tongs propeller on each end of the track-wire, 
each of said propellers pivoted to the lever 
at its station, substantially as described. 
22. In a store-service, the combination, with 
two levers located, respectively, at the main 
station and a sub-station pivoted to fixed 
supports and connected in any suitable man 
ner, the lever at the main station being pro 
vided with a retracting-spring, of a track-wire 
between the two stations and two sections of 
lazy-tongs, through whose central pivot-bolts 
the track-wire passes, one of said sections be 75 
ing pivoted to the lever at the main station 
and the other to the lever at the sub-station, 
substantially as described. 
23. In a store-service, a lazy-tongs propeller 
having bell-crank jaws pivoted to its forward 
joint, the inward movement of the jaws be 
ing limited by stops on the lazy-tongs, in com 
bination with a carrier having a knob to be 
engaged by the jaws, substantially as de 
scribed. 
24. In a store-service, a lazy-tongs propul 
sion apparatus having bell-crankjaws pivoted 
to its forward joint, Springs bearing against 
the inner sides of the inner ends of the jaws, 
and stops on the lazy-tongs for limiting the 
inward movement of the jaws, in combina 
tion with a carrier having a knob to be en 
gaged by the jaws, substantially as described. 
25. In a store-service, the combination, with 
two levers located, respectively, at the main 
station and a sub-station, pivoted to fixed 
supports and connected in any suitable man 
ner, the lever at the main station being pro 
vided with a retracting-spring, of a track-wire 
between the two stations, a lazy-tongs pro 
peller, on each end of the track-wire, each 
lazy-tongs pivoted to the lever located at its 
station, and a bracket secured to the support 
at the main station, a latch R', provided 
with arm * and pin and adapted to engage 
with pin r on the lazy-tongs, and a latch R', 
pivoted to lever C and adapted to engage 
with lever R', the lever R* having a notch r" 
in its under side to ride over a pin a on the 
bracket, substantially as described, and for 
the purposes stated. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
95 
CHARLES A MCIKEARN AN. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT SPEIDEN, 
G. W. BALLOCH. 
IOC 
IO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433841.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 433,841, 
J. B. WILLIAMSON. 
ADWERTISING DEWICE 
Patented Aug. 5, 1890. 
AITORNEWS. 
 
UNITED STATES 
V. 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. WILLIAMSON, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
ADVERTISING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,841, dated August 5, 1890. 
Application filed April 27, 1889, Serial No. 308,798. (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
To all tuhon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JOHN B. WILLIAMSON, 
of Louisville, in the county of Jefferson and 
State of Kentucky, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Advertising Devices, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
My invention relates to a portable advertis 
ing device, and has for its object to so con 
Struct the device that a tape or scroll may be 
drawn outward therefrom and automatically 
returned when released, upon which scroll or 
tape any advertising matter or information 
may be printed or produced. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a device of this character embodying but 
few parts and capable of being manufactured 
at a minimum cost. 
The invention consists in the novel construc 
tion and combination of the several parts, as 
Will be hereinafter more fully set forth, and 
pointed out in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the device, 
illustrating the tape or scroll as being drawn 
outward a slight distance. Fig. 2 is a central 
vertical and longitudinal section through the 
device. 
Fig. 3 is a section on line acac of Fig. 
2. Fig. 4 is a section on line y if of Fig. 2, and 
Fig. 5 is a detail perspective view of one of 
the bearings for the scroll-shaft. 
In carrying out the invention the body con 
sists of a preferably-cylindrical body 10, con 
structed, ordinarily, of thin plate metal and 
provided at each end with a cap or head 11, 
which caps or heads may be detachable from 
the body or firmly secured thereto. Longi 
tudinally within the body a spindle or shaft 
12 is held to revolve in disk-bearings 13, one 
of which is illustrated in detailin Fig. 5. The 
said bearings are provided with an annular 
flange 14 and a central aperture 15 to re 
ceive the shaft, and are located within the 
body in such manner that the flanges will 
face the caps or heads 11, as illustrated in 
Fig. 2. The body is provided with a longi 
tudinal slot or opening 16, which may, if de 
sired, extend from end to end, that portion of 
- 
the opening near the extremities of the body 
being much reduced, as illustrated at 17 in 
Fig. I. 
fhrough the larger portion of the opening 
16 one end of a tape or scroll 18 is projected, 
the inner end of which tape or scrollis firmly 
secured to the shaft or spindle 12. This tape 
or scroll may be of a width equivalent to the 
length of the larger portion of the opening or 
slot 16 of the body, as illustrated, or smaller, 
if so desired. The outer end of the tape Or 
scroll is enlarged, as illustrated at 19, whereby 
the said end is prevented from being drawn 
through the body-opening. This enlargement 
may be produced by securing to the tape a 
metal or wooden bar or rod 20, as illustrated in 
Figs. 3 and 4; but I do not confine myself to 
such construction. The inner end of the tape 
is not secured directly to the spindle, but to 
a thimble or sleeve 21, which is fast to the 
spindle, and the said tape is adapted to be 
normally wound around said sleeve or thim 
ble, as illustrated in the drawings. The tape 
or scroll is thus kept normally wound up 
through the medium of a coil-spring 22, one 
end of which spring is secured to the spindle 
12, preferably by passing it through a slot 23 
formed in one end, as shown in Figs. 2 and 4. 
The other end of the spring is passed through 
the reduced portion of the body-opening 16 
and clamped down upon the body, as illus 
trated at 24 in Fig.1, and in addition to press 
ing the end of the spring upon the body a 
rivet may be passed through it, if desired. 
The spring 22 is preferably placed immedi 
ately in front of one of the disk-bearings 13, 
and is thereby protected by the said bearing 
and the flange of the same; but if in practice 
it is found desirable the spring may be made 
to face the sleeve or thimble 21 and the bear 
ing at that end be placed between the cap of 
the body and the spring. 
The action of the spring 22 is such that the 
tape will be made to normally remain Wound 
upon the sleeve or thimble 21. Upon the 
faces of the tape or scroll any advertising 
matter or information may be printed or other 
wise produced, and in practice when the tape 
or scroll is drawn outward from the body for 
the purpose of reading the said information 
or advertisement and is released after the 
95 
Od 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
438,841. 
inner end entering the slot 23 and its outer 
end 24 bent over one wall of the slot 16, the 
sleeve or thimble 21 on the shaft, the strip or 15 
scroll secured to said thimble or sleeve and 
extended through the slot, and the end caps 
11, inclosing the ends of the case, substan 
tially as set forth. 
JOHN B. WILLIAMSON. 
Witnesses: 
SAM WEBB, 
GEORGE BIEROD. 
Same has been read, the spring, acting auto 
matically, returns the tape to its normal po 
sition. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
An advertising device consisting in the 
tubular case 10, having a longitudinal slot 16, 
the disk-bearings 13, having peripheral flanges 
14 fitting the bore of the case, the shaft 12, 
mounted on said disks and having a slot 23 
at one end, the flat coiled spring having its 
o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US433941.txt	(No Model.) 
W. L., HIGHT 
AERIAT, RAILWAY TRANSIT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 433,941. 
Patented Aug. 12, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
Z3. 
1. 7. 
Es 
WITNESS E St 
2zeee-2- 
NVENTOR 
 
The Norais PETERs co., Photo-ITHo, WASHINGTON, b. c. 
(No Model.) 
... 
W. L. HIGHT 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
AERIAL RAILWAY TRANSIT. 
No. 433,94l, 
Patented Aug. 12, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
S 
Witness ess 
a2-772e2%t 
 
 
 
invent or: 
%-4% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALLACE L. HIGHT, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
AERAL-RALWAY TRANST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 433,941, dated August 12, 1890. 
- 
Application filed August 20, 1889, Serial No. 321,395 (No model.) 
To all wivon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALLACE L. HIGHT, a 
citizen of the United States of America, and 
a resident of Boston, in the county of Suffolk 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
a certain new and useful Improved Aerial 
Railway Transit, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention, in substance, consists of a 
railway of any suitable construction suitably 
supported, a car or carriage of suitable con 
struction to receive and carry passengers or 
freight, or both, means held on the car and 
adapted and suitable to impart sufficient 
buoyancy to it to support it in the air, means 
for connecting and confining the car to and 
otherwise such as to allow it to move along 
the railway in combination with an electric 
or other suitable motor, preferably an elec 
tric motor, which is held on and is adapted 
to travel along the railway, and, furthermore, 
is connected to the car so as from its opera 
tion to propel the car with its contents sup 
ported, as stated, in the air, along and in either 
one or the other direction of the railway and 
all otherwise, substantially as hereinafter de 
scribed. 
In addition to the above the invention con 
sists in improvements in detail, all as herein 
after fully appears. 
In the drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, the combination of the invention and 
details making part thereof are illustrated 
in conjunction with an elevated railway. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation having a single 
rail railway and showing a section only there 
of. Fig. 2 is a transverse vertical section, 
line 22, Fig. 1, and an end view of the car, 
motor, and connection of car and motor. Fig. 
3 is a side elevation having a double-rail rail 
way and showing a section only thereof. Fig. 
4 is a transverse Vertical Section, line 4 4, 
Fig. 3, and an end view of the car, motor, and 
connection of car and motor. Fig. 5 is an en 
larged detail transverse vertical section of 
one of the rails of the double-rail railway of 
Figs. 3 and 4. Fig. 6 is an enlarged detail 
transverse vertical section of the rail of the 
single railway, Figs. 1 and 2. 
Fig. 7 is a de 
tail view, hereinafter referred to. 
In the drawings, A represents an elevated 
railway, and B is a structure located at in 
termediate points and of any suitable con 
struction for the support of the railway A, 
and all of itself, except as hereinafter appears, 
constituting no part of this invention, and 
which may be in any of the well-known or 
other forms and constructions suitable for 
the purposes, as hereinafter explained, of the 
invention. 
The elevated railway A, Figs. 1 and 2, con 
sists of a single rail having on its opposite 
sides a C, Fig. 6, and at top b and bottom d 
horizontal parallel flanges f, together consti 
tuting upper and lower faces for the run of 
an electric or other motorB, of any well-known 
or other suitable construction and arrange 
ment of parts to secure its own propulsion, as 
also the propulsion of whatever may be con 
nected to it therealong. The motor B is shown 
in blank, and, preferably, for reasons which 
will be obvious, an electric motor is used; 
but the invention is not to be limited in that 
regard. The parts of the motor running on 
the rail A, as explained and as particularly 
shown, are traction-wheels 9, held on and at 
opposite ends of the motor, and lying be 
tween the under face of the upper and the 
upper face of the lower flanges of the rail, 
and otherwise the motor at B, Fig. 2, lies 
across or straddles the upper side of the rail. 
Cis a car, in the present instance illustrated 
as consisting, in substance, of a car-body hav. 
ing windows C, doors C, and a promenade 
C entirely surrounding it, with a guard-rail 
ing C, gateways C, with detachable guard 
chains C for convenience of entering onto 
and passing from the promenade-platforminto 
or from the car. This car C is surmounted 
end to end with an inclosed chamber C, of 
any suitable construction and material, and 
which is to be charged with hydrogen gas or 
other aeriform fluid specifically lighter than 
air, and otherwise all such and as well known 
as to secure the support of the car and its 
appurtenances and applied Weight in the air. 
The inclosed chamber C for containing aeri 
form fluid, as has been explained and for the 
purpose stated, is to be provided with means 
(not shown) for it to be suitably charged 
with and discharged of the fluid; and, again, 
as particularly shown, its opposite ends C 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
90 
Oo 
 
433,941 
- 
--- 
C10 are of conical shape, so as to reduce to 
the minimum its resistance to the passage of 
the car, as will hereinafter appear, through the 
air. The car itself, at its opposite ends, may 
also be similarly shaped. 
D ID are chains or other lines at One end 
suitably held on the car C and at the other 
end held on trucks D', straddling the top of 
the rail A and at each side having wheels D 
to run on the faces of the upper and lower 
flanges of the rail A, as has been described 
for the motor. 
EE are chains or other flexible lines, each 
at its opposite ends held on the car C and on 
a motor B, a motor being located at the op 
posite ends of the car. 
F are rigid bars or rods in a correspond 
ing line and connecting the motors, and the 
intervening trucks D', having wheels D', as 
has been described. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 the railway Ais shown as con 
sisting of two parallel running rails AA, with 
a suitable superstructure B to support them. 
These rails incline upward toward each other, 
and each has on its outer face and at its up 
per and lower edge parallel projecting flanges 
ff, Fig. 5, as before described, for the single 
rail A and constituting the running-faces for 
the traction-wheels g of the motors and the 
wheels D, severally connected to the car, as 
has been particularly explained, for the simi 
lar wheels of Figs. 1 and 2. If electric mo 
tors are used, then electric connection be 
tween them and either an electric generator 
or a storage-battery is to be made, as is well 
known, or otherwise suitably, and neither 
said electric connection nor the electric gen 
erator or electric storage-battery constitutes 
of itself or together any part of this inven 
tion, it being simply necessary for the pur 
poses thereof that it shall be all such, as is 
well known now in the electric systems of rail 
ways, that the motor and the parts, such as 
the car and its aeriform containing-chamber, 
and all other appurtenances, shall by its ac 
tion be propelled along the railway, and also 
regulated and controlled as to the speed or 
rate of movement, starting and stopping, and 
the direction of its travel relative to the 
length of the railway and otherwise, as is ap 
parent. 
A railway and a car supported in the air 
and connected to the railway, in combination 
with a motor running on the railway and con 
nectedtothecar, all substantially as explained, 
obviously secure in the highest degree aerial 
transit of passengers and freight, and in a 
manner affording absolute safety and rapid 
ity of movement, accompanied with a mini 
mum expenditure of power and of Weight and 
friction of the parts on the railway. 
The railway in either form described, or in 
whatever form it may be used, in lieu of be 
- 
ed. 
ing elevated, as particularly shown, may rest 
directly on the ground. 
The flexible connection between the car and 
wheel trucks and motors, as has been ex 
plained, leaves the car perfectly free in its 
aeriform support, as stated. 
The gas-chamber C may have, as in Figs. 
1 and 2, a central longitudinal extending flap 
C along its upper side to impart steadiness 
to its movement through the air. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In combination, a railway, a motor held 
on and itself adapted for propulsion along 
and on said railway, a car located over and 
adapted to be supported in the air above and 
otherwise independently of said motor, and 
means connecting said car and said motor for 
both to travel as one along said railway, sub 
itially as described, for the purposes speci 
2. In combination, a railway,-motors held 
on and adapted for propulsion along said rail 
way and separated from each other, a wheel 
truck or trucks located between said motors 
and held on and adapted to travel along said 
railway, a car located over and adapted to be 
supported independently of said motors and 
said truck or trucks in the air, and means 
connecting said car with said motors and 
truck or trucks for all to travel as one along 
said railway, substantially as described, for 
the purposes specified. 
3. In combination, a railway, motors held 
on and adapted for propulsion along said rail 
way and separated from each other, a wheel 
truck or trucks located between said motors 
and held on and adapted to travel along said 
railway, means connecting said motors to said 
truck or trucks, a car located over and adapted 
to be supported independently of said motors 
and said truck or trucks in the air, and means 
connecting said car with said motors and 
truck or trucks for all to travel as one along 
Said railway, substantially as described, for 
the purposes specified. 
4. In combination, a railway, a motor held 
on and adapted for propulsion along said rail 
way, a car located over and adapted to be sup 
ported independently of said motor in the air, 
a vertical and central longitudinal extending 
flap of said car, and means connecting said 
car and motor for both to travel as one along 
said railway, substantially as described, for 
the purposes specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
WALLACE . HIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT W. BROWN, 
MARION E. BROWN. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95. 
OO 
I o5 
O 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434041.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 434,041, 
 
A. CARPENTIER, 
... WELOCIPEDE WHEEL, 
Patented Aug. 12, 1890. 
7 t e - ess e s , 
64a2.<ssack-a-d 
Z77 /e7 6 or 
C-11---ee-u-CA, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARSENE CARPENTIER, OF CAUDRY, FRANCE. 
VELOCIPEDE-WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 434,041, dated August 12, 1890. 
Application filed March 26, 1890, Serial No, 345,339, (No model.) Patented in France January 21, 1890, No. 203,295, and in 
England February 18, 1890, No. 2,601, 
s 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ARSENE CARPENTIER, 
a citizen of the French Republic, and a resi 
dent of Caudry, in the Department of the 
Nord, France, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Welocipede-Wheels, 
of which the following is a specification; and 
for which I have obtained Letters Patent in 
France, No. 203,295, dated January 21, 1890, 
and in Great Britain, No. 2,601, dated Febru 
ary 18, 1890. 
This invention relates to the construction 
of Wheels such as and similar to those which 
are employed for velocipedes; and it has for 
its object to secure a simplification in the con 
struction and of the details, and conse 
quently an economy in the manufacture. 
According to these improvements the 
Spokes are stamped out of suitable metal with 
a T-head at each end. The hub of the wheel 
consists of two disks having a circumferen 
tial notched projection on the outer side of 
each disk and a central tube. The tube is 
screwed at one end with a right-hand and 
at the other with a left-hand screw-thread, 
and the disks are respectively bored and 
screwed through the eyes with internal 
threads to fit upon the opposite ends of the 
tube. In the inner circumference of the tire 
there are as many openings as there are to be 
spokes in the wheel, and these openings have 
a width transverse to the plane of the wheel 
Sufficient only to admit the heads in the di 
rection of the same plane. Above these slits, 
through which the ends of the spokes are in 
serted, the openings in the tire are enlarged, 
So as to enable the heads to be turned therein 
and to rest across the sides of the slits. There 
are on each of the disks half as many of the 
radial notches as there are spokes in the 
wheel, and the inner Tends of the spokes are 
engaged in these notches, the odd spokes en 
gaging With one of the disks and the even 
spokes with the other. The spokes of each 
wheel are of uniform length, and they can be 
inserted in the notches of the disks only when 
these are screwed toward the centerofthe tube. 
When all the spokes have been inserted, the 
disks are separated by rotating the tube, and 
Figure 1 is an elevation of the hub, 
thus the spokes are stretched between the 
hub and the tire and are securely held. 
I will proceed to more particularly describe 
my invention with reference to the accompa 
nying sheet of drawings, in each of the fig 
ures of which similar parts where they are 
represented are indicated by similar letters 
of reference. 
show 
ing the spokes attached thereto. Fig. 2 is a 
Sectional elevation of the hub with the disks 
separated to their full extent, as when the 
wheel is fully constructed. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tional elevation of the hub with the disks ap 
proached in the position for inserting the 
spokes. Fig. 4 is a section of a tire, and Fig. 
5 is a plan of a spoke with a portion of its 
middle length broken away. 
AA are the disks, which are bored and in 
ternally screwed to fit upon the opposite ends 
of the central tubel3, the ends being screwed, 
respectively, with a right-handandaleft-hand 
thread, as indicated in Figs. 2 and 3. The ends 
of the tube B are provided with radial notches 
D, by means of which the tube may be turned 
by a suitable key, or even by a plain rod of 
iron, when desired. The periphery F of 
each of the disks A is cut with a series of 
equidistant radial notches equal in number 
to one-half of the total number of the spokes 
in the wheel, as represented in Fig. 1. In 
the inner side of the tire there are formed a 
number of narrow slits G just wide enough 
for the insertion of the T-head of the spokes 
when the length of the T-head is transverse 
to the plane of the wheel. Above the slits G 
the openings are enlarged, as at E, Fig. 4, so 
as to permit the head of the spoke to be 
turned therein. When the head of the spoke 
has thus been turned through an angle of 
ninety degrees, it will rest upon and be sup 
ported by the walls of the slit G, so that it 
cannot be withdrawn by an ordinary direct 
pull. The slits or notches in the projecting 
parts FF of the disks AA have such a width 
only as will permit the stems of the spokes to 
be inserted therein comfortably, 
Each of the spokes CC intended for use in 
the same wheel is stamped out of metal or 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
 
2 
434,041 
5 
otherwise produced to exactly equal lengths 
with parallel T-heads at the ends, as shown 
in Fig. 5. 
In constructing the wheel the disks AA 
are screwed upon the tube B to an equal dis 
tance from the ends, as shown in Fig. 3. One 
of the T ends of each of the spokes is then 
inserted in one of the slits G of the tire and 
turned at a right angle. The inner ends of the 
spokes are theninserted into the radial notches 
in FF, alternate spoke ends being inserted in 
alternate disks when the spokes occupy the 
positions in the hub represented in Fig. 1. 
All the spokes being thus engaged by their 
T ends with the tire and with the hub re 
spectively, the tube B is rotated and the disks 
B B are therefore separated. By the sepa 
tion of the disks the distance between the 
parts FF and the tire is increased, and the 
spokes are consequently held firmly by ten 
sion between the tire and the disks. 
If it is desired to avoid the risk of the pos 
sible movement of the disks AA while the 
wheel is in use, these may be secured upon the 
tube by means of rings, set-screws, or other 
known and suitable devices. 
The ends of the spokes have for conven 
ience been described as having parallel T 
ends; but it is obvious that the shape of the 
enlarged ends of the spokes may be equiva 
lent thereto without being precisely T-shaped. 
Particularly that end of the spoke which is 
2d 
25 
30 
35 
destined to be inserted in the notched periph 
riphery F of the hub may be button-shaped, 
or be otherwise formed with an enlarged end. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention 
and in what manner the same is to be per 
formed, I declare that what I claim is 
The combination, with the tube B, having 
right and left hand screw-threaded ends and 
radial notches D, of the disks A, bored and 
screw-threaded to fit the ends of the tube B, 
the periphery F of each disk having a series 
of radial notches, a tire having a series of T 
45 
shaped narrow slits, and a series of spokes, 
each having parallel T-heads at its ends 
adapted to be received in the narrow T 
shaped slitsinthetire and in theradial notches 
in the disks, whereby the spokes can be in 
serted into the tire, rotated a quarter-turn to 
engage their heads with the T-shaped slit en 
gaged with the notches in the disk, and tight 
ened by rotating the tube B by means of a 
wrench applied to the notches D, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ARSENE CARPENTIER, 
55 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS BREICOUT, 
C. W., BRETER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434141.txt	(No Model.). 
C, YAKEL, 
ECC. TESTER, 
No. 434141, 
Patented Aug. 12, 1890. 
282 too 32-y 
9/6646-4- 
8-v-Uovitov 
Waa. Y Key. 
THE NORRisperERs co, PHoro-LTHO. washtingtoN, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL YAKEL, OF ORWIGSBURG, ASSIGNOR TO THE ENGLE SPRING GUN 
COMPANY, OF HAZELTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
EGG-TESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 434,141, dated August 12, 1890. 
Application filed December 17, l889, Serial No. 334,088, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARLYAKEL, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Orwigsburg, 
in the county of Schuylkill, State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Egg-Testers, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention has relation to an egg-tester, 
the main object of the invention being to pro 
-vide a tester which will accurately test the 
purity of the egg, the same to be compact, light, 
and capable of manufacture at a minimum 
CoSt. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will appear in the following description, 
and the novel features thereof will be par 
ticularly pointed out in the claim. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a cen 
tral vertical section of an egg - tester con 
structed in accordance with my invention, 
and Fig. 2 is a bottom view of the same, a por 
tion being removed to expose the interior con 
struction. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in both the figures of the drawings. 
The tester is preferably constructed of thin 
metal, and is composed of two semi-spheroidal 
sections A and B. The section Ais open, and 
is of a size to receive an ordinary egg, as X. 
(Shown by dotted lines.) One end of the sec 
tion A is made small, and is adapted for in 
sertion in the section B, being held therein by 
an annular joint of solder B, this form of 
joint serving to surely exclude the entrance 
of light. The section Bisprovided with a cir 
cular sight-opening B of such a size that a 
IO 
35 
- 
full view may be obtained of the exposing 
mirror C. The mirror C is arranged at an in 
cline, and is securely held from being pressed 
downwardly by resting on the rib C", of wire, 
which is secured therein by solder C at suit 
able points. The mirror C is prevented from 
being pressed upwardly by its fitting snugly 
against the interior sloping walls of the sec 
tion B. The section Bisprovided with a suit 
able bottom D, which forms a suitable base 
for the tester and protects the mirror from 
injury, also adding a finished appearance to 
the tester. 
To test the freshness of an egg, it is placed 
within the section A, with the small end up, 
and held in the sun or near an artificial light, 
the result of the test being shown on the ex 
posing-mirror C. 
By the construction above described it will 
be seen that I produce a compact, finished, 
Serviceable, and cheap article, the most fragile 
portion of which is cheaply held in place and 
thoroughly protected from injury. 
What I claim is 
An egg-tester consisting of the semi-sphe 
roidal sections A and l3, secured together by 
an annular joint of solder B, the section B 
having the sight-opening B, mirror C, wire 
rib C, secured at suitable points by solder C, 
and the bottom D, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
45 
5O. 
55 
CARL YAKEL. 
Witnesses: 
S. R. KEPNER, 
H. W. SHAPPELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434242.txt	(No Model.) 
F. H. BUZZACOTT. 
PORTABLE BAKE OWEN, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 434,242, 
Patented Aug. 12, 1890. 
 
22 
14e 
(Z YA 
-2 161s 42-P, 
77zezzzzo." 
ZZZ72435 ecoz, 
5-3.a. 
The NORRIS PETERs co, Photo-LTHo, wasHINGTON, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 434,242, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
F. H. BUZZACOTT. 
PORTABLE BAKE 'OWEN. 
Patented Aug. 12, 1890. 
-7%. 3, 
w 
C.' 
c., is 
du/ 
- areasese 
Zg 
Ef C 
-c. 
Creer b 
 
Yrts otRI3 PTERs co, Photo-ino, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS HENRY BUZZACOTT, OF FORT SUPPLY, INDIAN TERRITORY. 
PORTABLE BAKE-OVEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 434,242, dated August 12, 1890. 
Application filed December 27, 1889, Serial No. 335,157. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANCIS HENRY BUZZA 
COTT, of Fort Supply, Indian Territory, havein 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Portable Bake-Ovens, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part hereof. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
portable bake-ovens for outdoor uses; and it 
consists in the novel construction and ar 
rangements, hereinafter more fully set forth 
and described. 
In the drawings which illustrate the man 
ner of carrying out my invention, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of the bake-oven with the 
hood removed. Fig. 2 is a perspective view 
of same with a hood or covering placed 
over it. Fig. 3 is a cross-section of same, 
taken on line acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a trans 
verse section taken online y y of Fig. 2. Fig. 
5 is a perspective view of the bake-oven, show 
ing the end partly broken away, revealing 
the baking-pans in position on the inside. 
Fig. 6 is a detail in perspective of the sup 
ports on which said oven rests, and Fig. 7 is 
a detail in perspective of the lifting-hook 
used for removing the lid. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A rep 
resents an oven constructed of sheet metal, 
as illustrated in Fig.1, being provided on the 
inside with rests a, which form bearings for 
smaller baking-pans C, thus leaving an air 
chamber around them, through which the hot 
air circulates. 
B is a hood made similar in shape and de 
sign, but larger, and deep enough to cover 
said oven A and extend down below the base 
thereof in such a manner as to retain the 
heat. 
C is a horizontal bar having its ends c bent 
25 
35 
45 
55 
in such a manner as to form suitable supports 
for said oven, c' are perforations in said 
supports c, by which the oven is transported 
to any desired locality. This may be done by 
running any suitable bar through the perfo 
ration and raising it from the ground. 
D is a pan made larger than those marked 
C', (represented in Fig. 3,) which may be 
placed in the main oven when so desired. 
c' are suitable handles provided for smaller 
baking-pans C", by which they are lifted in 
and out of the oven. 
a' are handles properly secured to the hood 
or covering B, by which it is raised from the 
bake-oven A by using the lifting-hook F. 
said hook F being provided with a suitable 
handle. This portable oven is designed to be 
used for outdoor purposes, and will be found 
very convenient in army or camp life. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as being new, and desire to Se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
A portable bake-oven comprising in its 
structure the pan A, supported above the 6 
ground and having ledges a, inside of it, the 
pan D, supported on said ledges, and the hood 
B, having open bottom and sides of a depth 
greater than the height of pan A, but less 
than the combined height of pan A and its 
supports C, whereby room is left under the 
oven for fire, the tops of pans A and D being 
closed by hood B, and a hot jacket or cham 
ber provided in hood B around pan A, as set 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
forth. 
- 
in presence of two witnesses. 
75 
FRANCIS HENRY BUZZACOTT. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES WILSON, 
JAMES MATTHEW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434342.txt	Z, F JONES. 
WAGON BODY, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 12, 1890. 
-ster 
- 
7 
O 
|=6 
of 10 
-e-...-62 
(No Model.) 
No. 434,342 
e. 
Ket 
% % 
%E2 
2. 
t 
se 
 
A 
AL 
22%2 
  
X 
al 
3 R. 
>2. 
Z. 
on a m w 
WITWESSES 
w 
- 12 2. 
MN. 
(74.28beze 
Z2 
/NVENTOR 
2. A 727(es. 
A 7TORAVEYS 
(No Model.) 
No. 434,342 
7 F JONES 
WAGON BODY, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 12, 1890. 
S 
 
  
 
/NVENTOR; 
a.A./a/76s. 
36 4. a6 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ZACHARIAH F JONES, OF SCOTTSVILLE, VIRGINIA. 
WAG ON BODY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 434,342, dated August 12, 1890. 
Application filed March 22, 1890, Serial No. 344,994, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ZACHARIAH. F. JONES, 
of Scottsville, in the county of Albemarle and 
State of Virginia, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Wagon - Bodies, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in Wagon 
bodies, Seeking to provide a simple novel con 
struction of body which can be easily taken 
apart and put together section by section, 
thus enabling it to be conveniently handled 
by one man, and also permitting its storage in 
a small space when taken apart. 
The invention consists in certain novel con 
Structions and combinations of parts, as will 
be hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my improved Wagon-body, looking at 
the front end thereof. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view of the rear end of said body. Fig. 3 is 
a cross-sectional view of the wagon-body. 
Fig. 4 is a detail sectional view of one side 
thereof, showing the joint between the side 
and bottom and manner of applying the side 
to the bottom. Fig. 5 is a detail view of a 
part of the bottom. Fig.6 shows a somewhat 
different construction of side and bottom in 
terlocking devices. Fig. 7 shows a somewhat 
different construction of the end fastenings, 
and Fig. 8 is a detail view. 
The body is shown as consisting of the bot 
tom A, sides B, front and rear ends C and D, 
and the interlocking pieces or connections. 
The bottom is provided on its under side with 
cross-bars or cleat-beams A, having at their 
ends openings a?, which coincide with open 
ings C in the bottom proper, such openings a? 
being for the hook-bars on the sides, as pres 
ently described. In Figs, 1 and 3 the open 
ings a, a? are in the shape of notches in the 
side edges of the bottom, while in Fig. 6 the 
said openings do not extend to the edges of 
the sides, but are closed at their outer edges, 
The sides are provided at their lower ends 
with hooks E, which lap under the bottom of 
the body, the shanks of such hooks extend 
ing up through openings C. a. By preference 
the shanks e of the hooks extend up to the 
upper edges of the bottom sections of the 
sides and are lapped at e' over the upper edge 
thereof, forming secure rigid braces for such 
O 
15 
25 
30 
35 
o 
45 
w 
bottom. 
side sections. On the bottom I provide in 
wardly-facing bearings F for the side pieces, 
such bearings being, in the construction 
shown in Figs. 1 and 3, angle-plates, having 
One arm secured to the bottom and the other 
arm projecting up at the outer edge of the 
In applying the sides of the construction 
shown in Figs. 1 and 3 the side section may 
be laid flation the bottom with the hooks in 
openings a. a', and then turned to vertical po 
sition, when the hooks will engage under the 
bottom and the side will bear against the stop 
bearings F, so that when the sides are held 
in such upright positions they will be held 
firmly from upward or outward movement. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 6the bear 
ing F is afforded by the outer closed sides or 
wall of the openings for the hooks and is en 
gaged by the shanks of the hooks, as shown 
by the drawings, Fig. 6. The sides are pref 
erably made in two sections, the lower one 
having socket-pieces g and the upper one 
stakes G. to fit in said socket-pieces. The 
sides are provided with slots H, preferably 
re-enforced by Wear-plates h, as shown. 
On the rear end-gate I provide at its lower 
edge hooks i, which engage staples I on the 
end of the body, and may be moved into and 
out of engagement therewith when the gate 
is lowered, but which are held securely in en 
gagement with the staples when the gate is 
in closed position. The front gate fits at its 
lower edge in rear of stop-bearings J on the 
bottom and at its upper rear edge against 
cleatsi, secured to the inner faces of the side 
pieces. These front and rear end-gates are 
secured to the sides in closed position by the 
latches K, arranged, preferably, four to each 
gate, being one at each side of the two sections 
of each gate. These latches consist of shaftsk, 
journaled and movable longitudinally in bear 
ings on the end-gates, having at One end the 
lateral projections or heads K' and at their 
other endshandle-arms K, by which they may 
be turned. A cam-surface L is arranged for 
engagement by the latches in Such manner 
as to move the same in Ward and clamp or 
draw the sides inward when the latches are 
adjusted to locked position. It will be noticed 
that in the constructions shown in Figs. 1 and 
55 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
434,342 
tially as in Fig. 1, except that its portion K' 
is arranged at approximately right angle to 
handle K, instead of being projected in dia 
metrically opposite direction thereto. 
The cam L has a locking seat or portion, 
which receives the latch-handle in the latched 
position of the device and serves to lock the 
parts in such position. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. In a wagon-body, the combination of the 
bottom, the sides having slots for the heads 
of the end latches, the end fitted between the 
Said sides, a latch-bar supported on the end 
and arranged to move longitudinally and ro 
tarily and provided with a head movable 
through the slot in the side and arranged to 
be turned to engage said side, and a cam 
surface arranged for engagement by the han 
dle of said latch and adapted to tighten the 
latch when the latter is turned to bring its 
head into engagement with the side of the 
body, the said cam having a locking-seat to 
receive the handle in the latched position of 
the device, all substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
2. In a wagon-body, the combination of the 
side having an opening for the head of the 
end latch, the end fitted between the said 
sides, a latch-bar supported on the end and 
arranged to be moved longitudinally and ro 
tarily and provided with a head movable 
through the opening in the side, and a fixed 
cam-surface arranged for engagement by the 
end latch, whereby the turning of said latch 
bar will effect the clamping and tightening 
together of the end and side, all substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
> 
ZACHARIAH. F. JONES. 
Witnesses: 
C. A. CONNELL, 
SILAS STAPLES, 
45 
55 
75 
T 5 
25 
3 the cam is arranged for engagement by the 
handle-arms K, and are formed on the inner 
edges of bars, which form journal-bearings for 
the shafts, so that as the latches are turned 
to locked positions their outer ends will be 
drawn inward, drawing in the side piece. The 
heads or projections Kare movable through 
the slots H when the latch is in unlatched po 
sition; but when the latch is given a half-turn, 
as shown in Figs, 1 and 2, the heads K' pro 
ject beyond the walls of slots H and bear 
against the outer sides of the side pieces or 
the wear-plates thereon and operate to secure 
the sides firmly to the end pieces, as will be 
understood from Figs. 1 and 2. The latches 
at the opposite ends of the gates operate to 
draw the sides close toward each other and 
against the ends of the end-gates. 
In Fig. 7 the end fastening consists of a 
long latch extended from one side piece of 
the body to the other through suitable open 
ings in such sides and through suitable guides 
in the end-gate. In such construction, in 
stead of arranging the cam-surface for en 
gagement by the handle-arms, it is arranged 
for engagement by the head R', so that as 
the latch is turned to fastened position the 
head K will, by engaging such cam-surface, 
cause the sides to be drawn together. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that the 
body may be quickly Set up or taken apart, 
and can therefore be easily handled by one 
person. When only a shallow body is needed, 
the top sections of the sides and ends may be 
removed and may be reapplied when desired. 
On the under side of the bottom A, I pro 
vide a handle M, arranged in the construction 
shown to extend between two of the cross 
beams A, such handle being of great con 
venience in carrying and dragging the bot 
tom about. 
In Fig. 8 the latch-bar is shown substan 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434442.txt	No Model.) 
No. 434,442, 
 
T. M. G. ORD ON. 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT, 
Patented Aug. l 9, 1890, 
Wit'sses 
4a, G56,727. 
24% deeee 
the Norris FETERs co. Phorc-LITHo, WASHINGTON, P. c. 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS M. GORDON, OF CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
MECHAN CAL MOVEMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 434,442, dated August 19, 1890. 
Application filed June 4, 1890, Serial No. 354,229, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS M. GORDON, of 
Cambridge, county of Middlesex, State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
ment in Mechanical Movements, of which the 
following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters on the drawings representing like 
palts. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a novel mechanical movement; and it con 
sists in the combination, with one or more 
gears and a rack in mesh therewith, of rolls 
mounted on shafts carried eccentrically by 
the said gears, as will be described. 
Figure 1 is an under side view of my me 
chanical movement as adapted to one class 
of Work; Fig. 2, a side view of the same, and 
Fig. 3 a modification to be referred to. 
Referring to the drawings, one or more 
pairs of gears a, having hubs a?, supported 
in a suitable frame A, receive between them 
and are in mesh with the double rack b, each 
of the said gears carrying eccentrically a 
shaft or stud c. (Herein shown as extended 
through said gears and having mounted upon 
it a feed wheel or roll d, as shown.) 
The mechanical movement herein shown 
and described may be used for a feed or guide 
mechanism in a machine, the material being 
passed between the rolls (l, which will serve 
as feed or guide rolls. The distance between 
the feed wheels or rolls d of each pair is va 
ried by means of the rack b, which when 
moved in the direction of arrow 25 rotates 
the gears a to bring the shafts or studs c, 
carrying the rolls, nearer to each other, and 
when moved in the direction of arrow 26 ro 
tates the gears in the opposite direction to 
carry the shafts or studs and their rolls far 
ther from each other. 
It will be seen that any number of pairs of 
feed wheels or rolls may be employed, the 
O 
25 
35 
distance between the wheels or rolls of each 
pair being increased or diminished at once 
by movement of the rack b. 
I do not desire to limit this invention to a 
double rack having gears upon each side, as 
a single rack having gears upon one side only 
may be employed, as shown in Fig. 3, the 
mechanical movement in this form being 
adapted for use as a feed or guide mechan 
ism in planing and similar machines wherein 
the work is required to be forced upon a ta 
ble or upon a knife or other tool or device; 
neither do I desire to limit myself to the num 
ber of rolls or to the particular form and con 
struction shown, as it is evident any other 
feed or guide device may be employed other 
than the wheels or rolls shown, and the ec 
centricity of the shafts or studs carrying the 
same may be adjusted to accommodate the 
movement to various classes of work. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with several gear 
wheels a, and a rack in mesh therewith, of 
shafts carried eccentrically by said gear 
wheels, and wheels or rolls on said shafts, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the gear-wheels a, 
and a rack between them and in mesh there 
with, of shafts carried eccentrically by said 
gear-wheels, and wheels or rolls on said shafts, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the gear-wheels a, 
and a rack in mesh there with, of a shaft car 
ried eccentrically by the said gear-wheels, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
45 
55 
65 
75 
THOS. M. GORDON. 
Witnesses: 
. 
EMMA. J. BENNETT, 
BERNICE.J. NOYES. 
k 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434542.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. GREEN. 
METALLICTIE AND RAIL FOR RAILROADS, 
No. 434,542. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1890. 
 
 
R 
 6. 
re 
-- 
A. 
-- 
2 
% 
AZ6. Z. 
TNESSES 
NVENTo R: 
R. Safoul- 44;ree 4.4%. 
//Z-2 co- 
? C.A., 
The Norrs Peters co, PHord;LITHo., WASHINGTON, O. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A. GREEN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF TWO 
THIRDS TO THOMAS McDONOUGH AND LEWIS MCDOWELL, BOTH OF 
SAME PLACE. 
METALLC TE AND RAIL FOR RAILROADS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,542, dated August 19, 1890. 
Application filed March 19, 1890, Serial No. 344,463, (No model.) 
25 
Io specification. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES A. GREEN, of 
the city of Philadelphia, and State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented a certain new and use 
5 ful Improvement in Metallic Ties and Rails 
for Railroads; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part of this 
My invention has relation to railroad rails 
and ties; and it consists in a railroad-track 
composed of two rails and metallic ties, each of 
the said rails consisting of substantially three 
15 longitudinal sections, and each having a cen 
ter T-piece resting upon the metallic ties for 
supporting the weight of the train passing 
thereon, and two longitudinal metallic sup 
porting and securing plates provided on each 
2O side of the said center T-piece throughout its 
entire length, which said plates are bolted to 
the metallic ties and secured together to the 
center T-piece by horizontal bolts, as herein 
after particularly described. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
safe and secure system of rails for railroads 
in combination with metallic ties, which may 
readily and easily be secured thereto, at the 
same time forming a most durable system of 
In the accompanying drawings similar let 
ters of reference refer to similar parts through 
Out. 
Figure 1 is a cross-sectional view of the 
35 rails bolted to the metallic tie. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal view of rail, showing the metal 
lic ties in cross-section. Fig. 3 is a perspec 
tive view of my improved combined rail and 
ties on a curve, showing short longitudinal 
4o sections secured to the ends of some of the 
ties, for purposes hereinafter described. 
AA represent the longitudinal guard-rails 
or supporting-plates secured to either side of 
the center T-piece or T-rail B, and firmly fit 
45 ted and secured against the neck of the rail 
on either side thereof and over the foot of the 
T-piece, the whole being bolted together by 
the bolts b, and secured to the metallic tie T 
by means of the bolts b'. The set of two rails 
5.o is in this manner secured firmly to the me 
3o railroad. 
55 
tallic tie T near the ends thereof at the usual 
distance apart. 
In my improved combined rail and metallic 
tie great strength is obtained in the combi 
nation described by reason of the construc 
tion described, and the liability of the rails 
spreading is reduced to a minimum. 
. The strength of the rail is greatly aug 
mented by the construction of the longitudi 
nal supporting-plates A A', which supporting 
plates extend and are provided along the en 
tire length of the rail. The T-rail itself is 
not directly secured to the tie, but indirectly 
through the medium of the supporting-plates 
AA', which provide a broader base than the 
foot of the T-rail and rigidly clamp the rail 
to the tie. ' 
I preferably employ a metallic tie having 
the shape of a T, which allows the stem to 
be buried in the ballast or road-bed, and of a 7c 
broad cross-surface, upon which the rail may 
rest and be secured. At the same time by 
this construction the bolts b' may be readily 
inserted through the head of the tie from be 
low before being passed through the shoe of 
the supporting-plate and secured by the nut 
turned on the Screw-thread from above. I 
also provide near the ends of the metallic tie, 
when desired, a short cross-section t, as shown 
in Fig. 3, to prevent the tie T and the rails 
secured thereon from shifting from side to 
side where there is any lateral strain, as in a 
CUVe. 
The principal merit in my invention re 
sides in the great strength which is obtained 
in the combination, the rails composed of the 
combined parts described secured together 
by the bolts b being much stronger and more 
capable of resisting great strain than a rail 
in one piece of the size of the combined parts, 
and the method of securing the combined rail 
to the tie renders it immovable on the tie and 
capable of resisting any force which the se 
curing-bolts b' can withstand. It will be seen 
that the longitudinal guards or supporting 
plates A A', upon which practically there is 
no wear, may be used for new T pieces or 
rails B, as the old ones may from time to 
time Wear. 
95 
75 
65 
- 
Having thus described my invention, what roo 
3 
434,542 
45 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat- head thereof, said plates secured to said ne 
tallic tie, as described, securing and support 
ent, is 
ing said center rail B, the sections of each of 
1. A railroad-track consisting of two rails 
said respective rails of the said track secured 
and metallic ties, each of said rails consist 
together by transverse securing-bolts b, sub 
ing of substantially three longitudinal sec 
stantially as described. 
tions, each rail having a center T-piece rest 
4. A railroad-track having two composite 
ing upon the metallic ties and supporting the 
rails, each having a broad base or securing 
direct weight of the train passing thereon, 
flange and a substantially straight vertical 
and two longitudinal metallic supporting and 
neck or supporting-rail proper, each of said 
securing plates of a thickness about equal to 
rails composed of three longitudinal metallic 
that of the neck of the center T-piece and 
provided on each side of the said center T 
sections B A A', said sections secured to 
gether by transverse bolts b, forming a sub 
piece throughout its entire length under 
stantially solid vertical rail, the line of said 
neath the head of the said center T-piece, 
securing-plates in cross-section being within 
which said plates are bolted to the metallic 
55 
ties and secured together to the center T 
the line of the head of the rail, as described. 
piece by horizontal bolts, substantially as 
5. A railroad-track composed of metallic T 
shaped ties T, two rails secured to said me 
hereinbefore set forth and described. 
tallic ties by bolts b', each of said rails com 
2. A railroad-track having two rails and 
posed of a center T-rail B, with its base rest 
metallic T-iron ties, to which the said rails 
ing upon said metallic tie, and longitudinal 
are secured at the proper distance, each of 
metallic securing-plates A A', extending the 
said rails composed of three longitudinal sec 
entire length of said center rail B, said secur 
tions secured together and to the metallic T 
ing-plates in cross-section being underneath 
iron tie-viz., a center rail with base resting 
upon said metallic ties, metallic securing 
and within the lines of the head of the rail 
plates A A', each of a thickness about equal 
B, said plates secured to said metallic tie, as 
described, securing and supporting said cen 
to that of the neck of the center T-rail se 
ter rail B, the sections of each said respective 
cured on each side thereof underneath the 
rails of the said track secured together by 
head of said rail for the purpose of strength 
transverse securing-bolts b, and cross-pieces 
ening and supporting the same, said sections 
secured together by transverse bolts b, in the 
t, secured to the metallic tie beneath the bot 
mannersubstantially as hereinbefore set forth 
tom of the rail and transversely to the line 
of the tie, substantially as hereinbefore set 
and described. 
3. A railroad-track composed of metallic T 
forth and described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
shaped ties, two rails secured to said metallic 
tie by bolts b', each of said rails composed 
hand this 18th day of March, A. D. 1890. 
of a center T-rail B, with its base resting upon 
said metallic tie, and narrow longitudinalse 
' curing - plates A A', extending the entire 
length of said center rail B underneath the 
WM. L. NEVIN, 
HORACE PETTIT. 
JAMES A GREEN. 
Witnesses: 
75 
c) 
15 
20 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434642.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 434,642, 
L. MILLER. 
GRAIN BINDING HARWESTER, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1890. 
 
WITWESSES 
ge. ca. 62e2e-e6 
32, 
IWWEWTOR 
& 4.24, 
6-44:26, 
Attorney 
(No Model.) 
L. MILLER. 
GRAIN BINDING HARWESTER, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 434,642. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1890. 
 
s V 
f 
BEa\,. 
WTTWESSES 
ce? h c{C. Cee-ee-ced 
IWWEWTOR 
-&- -4C2 
Attorney. 
(No Model.) 
No. 434,642. 
L. MILLER. 
GRAIN BINDING EARWESTER, 
5 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1890. 
 
 
sSf s 2s. 
- UIETA 
 
t t 
 
WITWESSES 
27, cC Cze-2-2-2-2-26, 
IWVEWTOR 
Attorney, 
h 
- 
(No Model.) 
No. 434,642, 
L. MILLER. 
GRAIN BINDING HARWESTER, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1890. 
OSN 
SR 
AN 
1 \Y s 
A2 as 
s O c 
n 
s/ SS 
is ? 
M N 
 
WITWESSES 
?WWEWTO 
(No Model.) 
L. MILLER. 
GRAIN BINDING HARWESTER, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
 
No. 434,642. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1890. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS MILLER, OF A KRON, OHIO. 
GRAN a B N DNG HARVESTER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 434,642, dated August 19, 1890. 
Application filed December 19, 1887, Serial No. 258,389, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whon it may conceri: 
Be it known that I, LEWIS MILLER, of Ak 
ron, county of Summit, and State of Ohio, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Grain-Binding Harvesters, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, making part of this specification. 
My invention relates to the manner of sup 
porting and effecting the adjustment of the 
binder gear-frame mechanism and binder 
table, and to certain details of construction 
and arrangement, hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of so much of a harvesting 
machine as is necessary to show the binder 
gear-frame Supporting and adjusting devices 
With the adjustable tongue and draft-rod re 
moved. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the ma 
chine, looking from the stubble side. Fig. 3 
is a plan view, partly broken away. Fig. 4 is 
a rear elevation of the machine. Fig. 5 is a 
plan View showing the adjustable draft at 
tachment, and Fig. 5* details of parts of said 
attachment. 
The machine represented in the drawings 
is of the elevated binder type, in which the 
grain is carried over to and bound on the 
Outer or stubble side of the driving-wheel, and 
my improvements will therefore be described 
with reference to said type of machine, 
Which is of a well-known construction. 
A and A' indicate the front and rear sills 
of the main or platform frame; A, a longi 
tudinal tubular bar, to which the inner ends 
of the sills A and A' are connected through 
Suitable corner plates or irons, and B the 
driving-wheel, said parts being constructed 
and connected in any usual or preferred 
The elevator-frame (indicated at C, C, C, 
and C) may be of any usual construction, ex 
cept that I prefer to make the longitudinal bar 
C tubular in form. Said bar is supported by 
and connects uprights C and C on the frame 
C, forming in this instance a curved guiding 
standard which moves up and down on the 
wheel plate or arm B' in the adjustment of 
the frame, and is, by preference, formed on 
the corner plate or iron through which the 
frontsill and the longitudinal bar Aare con 
le. 
nected. The bar C extends forward of the 
upright C and supports a standard C, on 
which a lever P for rocking the machine on 
its wheels is fulcrumed, and a forward sup 
porting-standard a? extends from the forward 
end of an arm or bar ct, attached to the inner 
end of the sill A, or its corner-plate referred 
to, to the forward end of bar C. An addi 
tional brace or support at extends from the 
inner shoe obliquely upward to the forward 
end of the bar C, for giving greater rigidity 
thereto. 
D indicates a longitudinal bar or support 
for the binder gear frame or standard, pref 
erably tubular in form, located on the stub 
ble side of the drive-wheel, and supported 
from the main frame or main and elevator 
frames in suitable brackets, which will be de 
scribed, said bar forming a support for the 
longitudinally-adjustable binder gear-frame 
and mechanism, as will appear. This bar is 
supported at its rear end in a Stationary 
bracket composed of an outwardly and up 
Wardly projecting bar E, secured at its lower 
end to the corner-plate E or iron connecting 
the rear platform sill and the longitudinal 
bar A, and a horizontal bar E', connected at 
its inner end to an upright C of the elevator 
frame. These bars are united at their outer 
ends and form in connection with the cor 
ner-plate and upright C connecting their in 
ner ends a triangular bracket, and are pro 
vided at their jointed ends with a bearing 
sleeve e, in which the rear end of bar D is 
supported and adapted to slide longitudi 
nally. The bracket supporting the forward 
end of the bar D is a pivoted and Swinging 
one composed of rods or bars F and F, the 
rod or bar F being pivoted at its lower end in 
the bar C, at Ct, as shown, or other suitable 
support, and extending obliquely outward 
and upward to the bar D, its upturned end d 
passing through a perforation in the forward 
end of said bar and forming a pivotal con 
nection there with. The bar or lever F, at its 
outer end underlies the bar D, and is perfo 
rated to receive the pivot d on the bar F. The 
bar E extends inward over the forward end 
of the tubular bar C, and is pivoted thereto 
at c, and extends beyond said bar to form a 
lever F, through which the pivoted bracket . 
F F can be vibrated for moving the longitudi 
75 
95 
Od 
431,642 
d 
25 
35 
45 
So 
nal bar D backward or forward, as desired. said frame, while permitting the forward and 
The lever F has a rod f connected to its in 
backward adjustment of said frame with the 
ner end, which extends to an upright lever f", 
swinging end of the pivoted bracket, as above 
explained. 
arranged in convenient position to be oper 
ated by the driver for adjusting the swing 
The binder-table (indicated at IX) is sup 
ing bracket and bar D, and which may be 
ported at its upper end by and adapted to 
held at the desired adjustment by any suit 
slide longitudinally on a rabbeted longitudi 
able arrangement of latch and rack-bar, such 
nal bark, secured to suitable brackets k on 
as is indicated in the drawings. 
the elevator-frame. The lower end of the ta 
ble is secured to and upheld by the sleeve G 
G indicates the binder gear frame or stand 
ard, made substantially U-shaped and placed 
of the binder mechanism frame, and at its 
on its side, its lower tubular arm G being pro 
rear end or side projecting beyond said sleeve 
vided with pendent U-shaped feet or brack 
by a suitable bracket or brackets k, con 
ets g, which rest and pivot the binder gear 
nected to the bar D, the arrangement being 
stand or frame on the bar ID, and are secured 
such that the table, which is of a well-known 
thereon by removable bolts or pins d', which 
form, slotted to permit the needle and pack 
permit said frame to be readily removed from 
ers to work through it, will move with and 
or attached to the bar D. The frame G has 
maintain its proper relation to said parts. 
one or more laterally - projecting arms or 
The packers are operated by means of cranks 
brackets g', which afford bearings for the 
hi on the shaft II, their pivoted ends being 
packer-actuating shaft H, which in this in 
connected by suitable links hwith the binder 
stance forms also the first or main binder 
frame G, so as to move with the latter when 
gear-shaft, and has its rear end supported and 
it is adjusted. 
adapted to slide in a sleeve-bearing h on the 
The tongue N (see Figs. 5 and 5) is piv 
stationary bracket E E'. The shaft H has a 
otally connected, through a sleeve in on the 
sprocket-wheel i fast on it near its forward 
tongue-plate N', with a long sleeve I, on a 
end, which has a bearing in the forward arm 
bolt l, supported in the inner shoe at m and 
in the upright a', and a tongue-brace O is 
or bracket 9', and is held in place therein 
by a suitable pin or key, this arrangement 
also connected, through a sleeve O at its rear 
serving to cause the shaft H to move longi 
end, with the sleeve L, as shown, and a lever 
tudinally with the frame G when the latter 
P, pivoted to the standard C on the tubular 
bar C, and adjustably connected at p' by a 
is adjusted. Motion is communicated from 
the sprocket-wheel i to a drive-chain i' to 
rod p with the pivoted tongue, enables the op 
a sprocket-wheel i, mounted and turning 
erator to rock or tilt the machine on its carry 
loosely on a stud-shaft g' on an arm or 
ing-wheels in a manner that will be under 
bracket g on the frame G, and thence through 
stood without further description. Set-screws 
a pinion i, on the same stud-shaft with the 
n' and o' permit the adjustment laterally on 
sprocket-wheel 
to the binder mechanism. 
the sleeve L of the tongue and tongue-brace 
The sprocket-wheels and are in continuous 
for changing the line of draft, as may be re 
quired. 
motion when the machine is at work, but op 
erate the pinion i to drive the binder mech 
By the use of the swinging bracket com 
anism only when the pinion is thrown into 
posed of the long arms or links pivoted at one 
engagement with the sprocket-wheel by any 
end to the frame-work of the machine on the 
grain side of the driving-wheel and support 
usual or suitable clutch mechanism for that 
ing the longitudinal supporting-bar and the 
purpose. The rear end of the shaft H is 
adapted to slide in the sleeveh, and is grooved 
binder gear frame and mechanism on the 
ath to receive an internally-feathered hub 
stubble side of the wheel, as described, I am 
of a sprocket-wheel H', mounted on and serv 
enabled to adjust the binding mechanism 
ing to rotate the shaft H. The sprocket-wheel 
with much greater ease and less friction than 
H' at the end of its hub adjacent to the bear 
in the ordinary methods of supporting and 
ing-sleeve h is grooved and a fork or hookh' 
adjusting it, and the length of the arms or 
on the rear end of said sleeve engages said 
bracket is such as to permit longitudinal ad 
grooved hub and prevents end movement of 
justment, within the limits required, without 
the sprocket-wheel with the shaft H without 
giving lateral movement enough to interfere 
interfering with its rotation for driving said 
with the proper working relation of the parts. 
shaft. The sprocket-wheel II' is operated 
Having now described my invention, what I 
through a chain h, which, as shown in Fig. 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
4, serves also to drive other parts of the ma 
Patent, is 
chine from a sprocket-wheel 
on a suitable 
1. In a harvesting-machine, the combina 
shaft geared to and driven from the main 
tion, with the main frame and driving-wheel, 
drive wheel or axle in any suitable manner. 
of a binder gear stand or frame supported on 
The binder mechanism frame G has a lug 
the stubble side of the driving-wheel and 
or ear g on its upper side, from which a piv 
supporting-brackets for said stand, one of 
oted rod f extends and has its inner end 
which is pivoted to the main frame on the 
pivoted to a suitable lug or bracketi' on the 
grain side of said wheel, substantially as de 
forward end of the elevator-frame, as shown, 
scribed. 
and which serves to hold up the upper end of 
2. In a harvesting-machine, the binder gear 
75 
95 
OO 
I o5 
IIO 
I I5 
125 
434,642 
stand and a supporting-bracket therefor piv 
otally connected with the machine-frame, in 
combination with a link-rod upholding said 
stand and pivotally connecting its upper end 
with a support rigid on said frame, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
3. In a harvesting-machine, a support for 
the binder gear stand or frame located on the 
stubble side of the driving-wheel, in combi 
nation with a supporting-bracket thereforpiv 
oted to the frame on the grain side and cross 
ing the path of said wheel, substantially as 
described. 
4. In a harvesting-machine, a binder gear 
stand or frame pivoted to its support and 
made longitudinally adjustable relatively to 
the machine-frame for adapting it to the 
length of the straw to be bound, in combina 
tion with a link or rod pivoted at one end to 
said stand and at its other end to a support 
rigid on the machine-frame for adapting it 
to swing and permit the longitudinal adjust 
ment of the binder-frame, and at the same 
time uphold the latter on its pivotal support, 
substantially as described. 
5. In a harvesting-machine, the combina 
tion, with the main frame and driving-wheel, 
of the longitudinally-arranged bar located on 
the stubble side of the driving-wheel, sup 
porting-brackets for said bar connected to the 
frame on the grain side of said wheel, the 
binder gear stand or frame supported on said 
bar, and a rod or link connecting the upper 
end of said gear-stand with a fixed support 
on the main frame and adapted to permit the 
forward and backward adjustment of said 
gear-stand, substantially as described. 
6. In a harvesting-machine, the combina 
tion, with the main frame and driving-wheel, 
of brackets secured to the frame on the grain 
side of the driving-wheel and crossing the 
path thereof and a longitudinal bar forming a 
support for the binder gear frame or stand, 
located on the stubble side of the driving 
wheel and upheld by said brackets, one of 
which is pivoted to the frame and has the 
support for the binder-stand connected to its 
swinging end to move with it, substantially 
as described. 
7. In a harvesting-machine, the combina 
tion, with the main frame, the binder gear 
stand or frame, and a support for the latter, 
of laterally-projecting brackets supporting 
said stand, one of which brackets is con 
nected at one end to the main frame and at 
the other to the binder gear-stand support by 
35 
O 
45 
55 
vertical pivots, adapting it to swing back 
ward and forward and to carry the binder 
gear-stand with it, substantially as described. 
8. In a harvesting-machine, the combina 
tion, with the main frame and driving-wheel, 
of a binder gear stand or frame and a Sup 
port therefor located on the stubble side of 
the driving - wheel, supporting-brackets ex 
tending from said support to the main frame 
on the grain side of said wheel, and one of 
which is pivoted to said frame, and a link 
connecting the upper end of the binder gear 
stand with a support rigid on said main frame, 
substantially as described. 
9. The combination, in a harvesting-ma 
chine, of a binder gear stand or frame, alon 
gitudinal baron which saidstandis supported, 
and supporting-brackets for said bar, one 
of which brackets is pivoted to the machine 
frame, and is provided with a lever-arm ex 
tension through which the backward and for 
ward adjustment of the binder mechanism is 
effected, substantially as described. 
10. In a harvesting-machine, the combina 
tion, with the main frame and driving-wheel, 
of the brackets connected to said frame and 
crossing the plane of the driving-wheel, the 
longitudinally-arranged bar supported on the 
stubble side of said wheel by said brackets, 
the binder gear stand or frame secured to 
and adjustable with said bar, and the binder 
gear and packer actuating shaft, binder and 
packer mechanisms, and the binder-table, all 
connected to said binder gear-stand to move 
with it, substantially as described. 
11. In a harvesting-machine, the combina 
tion of the main frame and driving-wheel, 
the brackets connected to said frame on the 
grain side of the driving-wheel, the longitudi 
nally - arranged bar D, supported by said 
brackets on the stubble side of said wheel, 
the binder gear-stand on said bar, the piv 
oted link connecting the upper end of said 
stand with a support on the main frame, 
binder mechanism connected to and adapted 
to move with said gear-stand, and a lever 
connected to said bar D for adjusting it and 
the binder mechanism, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 21st day of November, A. D. 
1887. 
- 
LEWIS MILLER, 
Witnesses: 
O. L. SADLER, 
W. K. MEANS. 
75 
95 
IOO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434742.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 434,742, 
B. H. TOQUET, 
CALIPERS OR DIVIDERS. 
Patented Aug. 19, 1890. 
 
INVENTOR 
ATTOREYS 
is oasis Peters co. PHoro-LTHo, Washigo, . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN H. TOQUET, OF WESTPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
CAL PERS AND DVDERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 434,742, dated August 19, 1890. 
Application filed April 24, 1890, Serial No. 349,299. (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, BENJAMIN H. TOQUET, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Westport, Fairfield county, Connecticut, 
have invented certain Improvements in Com 
passes for Drafting, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
The main object of my invention is to pro 
vide inexpensive drafting-compasses, which 
Will not beliable to get out of order, and with 
which an ordinary lead-pencil can be used. 
My improvements may, however, be applied 
to more expensive makes of compasses for 
drafting. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of a pair of compasses provided 
With my improvements. Fig. 2 is a corre 
Sponding edge view, partly in section, of the 
upperpart of the same compasses. Figs. 3 and 
4 are views of a modification drawn to a some 
what larger scale. Figs. 5 and 6 are views of 
another modification, and Fig. 7 is a view of 
a still further modification. 
A A' are the legs of the compasses, which 
may be economically made of sheet metal of 
U-section, with corresponding ears or lugs a 
a' at the upper ends, through which passes. 
a central pivot or hinge pin B, by which the 
two legs are hinged together. 
A wedge-piece E is inserted between the 
pairs of lugs of the two compass-legs, and 
this wedge-shaped piece is slotted so as to 
fit over and be guided by the pivot-pin. In 
Figs. 1 and 2 I have shown this wedge-piece 
as a part of the handle D, by which the in 
strument is to be manipulated. By pushing 
this handle in so as to force the wedge be 
tWeen the hinging lugs of the compass-legs, 
the friction between the lugs will be so far 
increased that the compass-legs will remain 
in the position to which they are adjusted 
with sufficient security to enable them to be 
conveniently used in drawing curves or cir 
cles of a size determined by the position to 
which the legs are moved apart or toward each 
other. Although it is convenient to make 
this wedge in one piece with the handle of 
the instrument, it may be made separate, as 
shown in the modification illustrated in Figs, 
3 and 4. In this case the handle D is made 
with forked legs, to embrace the pivoting-lugs 
of the compass-legs. The wedge-piece Epasses 
vertically through the finger-piece D and en 
ters between the two pairs of lugs, as shown 
in Fig. 3, and is slotted, as indicated by the 
dotted lines in Fig. 4, for the passage of the 
pivot or hinge pin of the compasses. This 
wedge-piece is provided with a head or cap 
e, by which the Wedge may be forced in be 
tween the lugs to tighten the hinge-joint, or 
withdrawn to the extent permitted by the slot 
in the wedge-piece to free the hinge-joint. 
In the modification illustrated in FigS. 5 
and 6, the wedge-piece E is intended to be 
drawn upward to tighten the joint, and has 
at its upper end a screw-threaded stem enter 
ing a screw-threaded opening in the handle 
or finger-piece D of the compass. The lower 
end of this handle or finger-piece bears against 
the upper edges of the lugs of the hinge, so 
that by turning this finger-piece the Wedge 
may be drawn up to tighten the joint or may 
be let down to free the hinge-joint. 
In the modification illustrated in Fig. 7, the 
wedge-piece is shown as being made in two 
parts pivoted to washers or to the lugs of one 
of the compass-legs, and the extended por 
tions d of these wedge-pieces extend upward 
to within a short distance of each other, and 
so that they can be nipped together by the 
finger and thumb to force the Wedge-pieces 
in between the lugs of the hinge-joint. These 
extensions at the same time form the handle 
or finger-piece by which the instrument may 
be manipulated. 
As the inexpensive instruments of the char 
acter described are especially adapted for 
pencil-compasses for the use of School chil 
dren in drafting, I provide one of the legs of 
the compasses with a device by which an or 
dinary lead-pencil may be used therewith. 
This device consists simply of an open spiral 
wire or band secured by solder or other means 
at each or some of its coils to the pencil-leg 
of the compass, so as to be practically ine 
The diameter of these coils is such 
lastic. 
that an ordinary lead-pencil L, as shown in 
Fig. 1, will fit tightly therein, so that by turn 
ing the latter the spiral will act as a feed 
screw to cause the pencil to advance or recede 
longitudinally, according to the direction in 
which it is turned. At the same time the pen 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
OC) 
2 
434,742 
O 
cil will be quite firmly held, so that it cannot 
be pushed or pulled longitudinally without 
the application of great force. 
I claim as my invention 
1. Drafting- compasses having legs with 
hinging lugs, an adjustable wedge acting on 
these lugs, and the hinge-pin passing through 
the lugs, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
2. Drafting - compasses having legs with 
hinging lugs, and having their manipulating 
handle provided with a wedge to act on the 
Said lugs, and a hinge-pin passing through 
the lugs, substantially as set forth. 
3. Drafting-compasses having the legs pro 
vided with hinging lugs, an adjustable slotted 
Wedge-piece between the hinging lugs, and a 
hinge-pin passing through said lugs and 
Wedge-piece, substantially as described. 
4. Drafting - compasses having the legs 
formed of grooved sheet metal with pairs of 
hinging lugs at their upper ends, and a slotted 
wedge-piece entering between the pairs of 
lugs and a hinge-pin passing through said 
lugs and wedge. 
5. Drafting-compasses having hinged legs 
and having fixedly secured to one of the legs, 
so as to be inelastic, an open spiral wire, in 
which an ordinary pencil will fit tightly and 
which acts as a feed-screw on the pencil to 
advance or recede it as it is turned in the 
spiral, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
BENJAMIN H. TOQUET. 
Witnesses: 
EDITH J. GRISWOLD, 
JOHN REVELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434842.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 434,842, 
P, H, SOWASH 
JAW TRAP 
Patented Aug. 19, 1890. 
 
 
Witnesses. 
I/Oe/7 for 
A4. 
, 
The Norris Perers co., PHOTO-Litho, WASHINGtan, C. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER HARRISON SOWASH, OF SLIPPERY ROCK, PENNSYLVANIA. 
JAW-TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 434,842, dated August 19, 1890. 
Application filed April 16, 1890. Serial No. 348,244 (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Beitknown that I, PETER HARRISONSOWASH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Slip 
pery Rock, in the county of Butler and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Jaw-Traps; and 
Ido declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
The special object of my invention is to im 
prove that class of steel traps in which jaws 
are employed to clasp the animal about the 
body or one of the limbs. 
My invention consists in making the shank 
of the pan longer than usual and providing 
one side with a stud, then combining with 
this an elbow trip-lever, which is fulcrumed 
to a side post, as hereinafter described. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
- view showing the trap set; Fig. 2, a vertical 
cross-section showing the lever and stud not 
locked together; Fig. 3, a detail view of the 
lever, and Fig. 4 a similar view of the pan 
with its shank. 
In the drawings, A represents the plate 
spring of the trap with two end-apertured 
arms a a, through the upper one of which 
passes the post P and through the other the 
jaws CC. These jaws are trunnioned in the 
opposite posts PP, one being integral with 
the base B, while the other is end threaded, 
- 
35 
45 
passes through a hole thereof, and receives 
a nut N, so as to be detachable. 
D is the pan provided with a long shank d, 
pivoted at d' to a post P and having a side 
stud d between the pan and the shank-pivot 
d'. To the upper end of the post P is full 
crumed a lever L, having the arms lll. In 
the vertex of the angle formed by the arms l' 
l fits the studd, while the jaw C bears up 
wardly against the arm l, so as to make the 
arm l press tightly against the studd. This 
keeps the pan elevated until the animal bears 
upon it and causes it to be disengaged from 
the lever. 
The advantages of my improvemens are that 
it makes the trap easier to set and more cer 
tain to fly up and catch the animal high on 
the muscles of the leg, where he cannot free 
himself by gnawing off the leg. 
What I claim as new, and desire to protect 
by Letters Patent, is 
In a jaw-trap, the pivoted shank of the pan 
provided with a side stud and a three-armed 
lever fulcrumed to the upper end of the post, 
one of the jaws of the trap being held down by 
the upper arm and the said jaw-stud being 
held at the junction of the two lower arms, as 
shown, and for the purpose set forth. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
PETER IHARRISON SOWASH. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK. P. EYTH, 
T. L. MICELHANY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US434942.txt	(No Model.) 
1. 
No. 434, 942, 
 
J. B. ODELL. 
TYPE SETTING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
J. B. ODELL 
TYPE SETTING MACHINE, 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 434, 942, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
/5 
/7 
 
 
::::::: 
is - 
RE: set. | 
t E. s 
(No Model.) 
No. 434, 942, 
J. B. ODELL, 
TYPE SETTING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets 
Sheet 3, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
N N R SNS 
N S. N N N R S N S R R S. N S R R N R S. R R R R N N N R 
(d 
Y 
N N R N R N S 
R R R N N 
R s S R R 
SZZ 
3. Xs 
32 
as 
[33 ] 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
?g) 
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII **** 
// 
 
 
The Nosts perERS co, PHoro-Litha, wash Nation, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
J. B. ODELL, 
TYPE SETTING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 434, 942, 
- 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
 
The Noah's Peters co, FHoto-Litho., WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. ODELL OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO 
HORATION. MAY AND NATHANIEL S. JONES, OF SAME PLACE. 
TYPE-SETTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 434,942, dated August 26, 1890. 
Application filed December 14, 1889, Serial No, 333,742, (No model.) 
O 
25 
33 
55 
65 
To all whon, it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN B. ODELL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Type - Setting Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a practical machine for setting type in line 
and forming the lines into columns. In the 
organization of this machine I provide recep 
taclesfor holding the type, which are arranged 
concentrically about a composing-table, the 
type being fed down by gravity, a bank of 
keys corresponding in number to the type 
holding boxes, levers connecting the key 
levers with plungers to force the type, one at 
a time, from the type-holding boxes upon a 
support and into position to be grasped by 
spring-actuated carrying-levers having grip 
ping-jaws which seize the type, and which 
levers deposit the type in a position opposite 
the lineway on the composing-table, a piv 
oted transfer-lever which is operated to take 
the type from the gripping-jaws and draw 
them into position in the lineway, and mech 
anism for moving the lines along the table to 
assemble them in columns. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of the device showing one 
type-compartment and its corresponding le 
ver, the devices for discharging the type and 
their supporting-frame being omitted. Fig. 
2 is a plan view, Some parts omitted, and de 
signed particularly to show the arrangement 
Fig. 3 is a ver 
of the key-board and levers. 
tical longitudinal section taken centrally of 
the machine, showing one type-compartment 
and set of operating-levers and other parts in. 
elevation. Fig. 4 is a broken plan view of 
the central portion of the composing-table, 
and showing the mechanisms for assembling 
the type in the lineway. Fig. 5 is a sectional 
elevation online 55 of Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is a side 
elevation of the parts shown in Fig. 4 looking 
in the direction of the arrow 6. Fig. 7 is a 
sectional view of a follower, within the hollow 
of which the ends of a pair of lazy-tongs work, 
and which is used to support the type in the 
levers; and Fig. 9 shows an edge and a plan 
view, respectively, of the gripping-jaws with 
the type therein. 
. 
In the drawings, 10 represents the base, 
from which rise standards 11, supporting a 
semicircular table 12, on which the type 
boxes 13 are mounted. These boxes are 
adapted to hold the type superposed upon 
each other flatwise in single columns and 
with their faces projecting toward the rear of 
the boxes. At the lower end of the boxes 
there is an aperture in the front, thereof, 
above the table 12, through which the type 
are ejected. There will be as many of these 
type-boxes as there are letters or characters 
to be represented in type, and the type them 
selves are of the form shown in Fig. 9 of the 
drawings, wherein 14 represents the type and 
14" recesses in one of their edges, for a pur 
pose presently described. There will be as 
many keys 15 as there are type characters. 
These keys may be arranged in any desired 
Way, and each key is seated upon a compres 
sion spiral spring 16, the lower end of the 
spring bearing upon the base-plate and the 
upper end engaging a shoulder on the key or 
the lower side of the key-lever 17. These 
key-levers will project parallel to the top of 
the base-plate, and are pivoted at their rear 
ends, as shown at 18. The spring 16 yield 
ingly sustains the key-lever in its normal po 
sition, and to said key-lever is pivotally con 
nected a link 19, the upper end of which is 
connected to a bell-crank lever 20, the upper 
member of which operates a plunger 21, 
whereby each time a key is depressed the 
plunger ejects a type through the aperture in 
the front of the type-boxes 13. 
22 are standards rising from the base of 
the machine and supporting thereon the com 
posing-table 23. 24 is a semicircular plate 
connected with this table. 25 are the type 
carrying levers, which are provided with the 
gripping-jaws 25*. (Shown in Fig. 9.) One 
of these jaws may be a spring having bends 
therein to enter the notches 14 of the type. 
The lower ends of the type-carrying levers 25 
are pivoted to lugs 24" on the plate 24, and 
each has a rearwardly-projecting arm 26, to 
75 
9o 
95 
45 
5o lineway. Fig. 8 is a detail of one of the key- the end of which is connected a spring 27, the Ioo 
H 
75 
- 
5 
O 
434,942 
2 
upper end of which will be secured to a fixed 
part of the frame, such as the bracket-rod 28. 
The arm 25 also has an extension 29 in front 
of its pivot, to which is pivoted a pendent 
arm 30, the lower end of which has a bearing 
in a notch 30 of the key-levers 17. (See Fig. 
8.) Two guide-pieces 31 are arranged on the 
surface of the table 23 parallel to the sides 
thereof and a distance apart equal to the 
width of the column which it is desired to set. 
32 is a plate carried on the end of a sliding 
bar 33, and which plate constitutes one side 
of the lineway. The bar 33 will have cap 
screws 33, passing through the slots 33 into 
the bed-plate to allow of the free movement 
of the bar preferably the width of the line of 
type. The outer end of the plate may termi 
nate in a handle 34. The second wall of the 
lineway is formed by a block 35, having 
thereon springs 35, adapted to bear against 
the guide-pieces 31, so as to hold said block up 
against the type. 
36 is a follower which is shown in cross 
section in Fig. 7, This follower is a box-like 
structure having one open side, and into its 
hollow is projected the end members of a lazy 
tongs 37, which will be pivoted to the frame 
at 38. These lazy-tongs being operated will 
cause the follower to move along the lineway, 
and it is adapted to be moved so as to bring 
the follower near to that end of the lineway 
at which the type will be introduced. 
In order to prevent the follower from rising 
by the action of the tongs, it has a projection 
36 at its lower side which travels under the 
edge of the plate 32. 
In order to withdraw the type from the 
spring-jaws of the type-carrying level's into 
the lineway, I employ a pivoted transfer-lever 
having a bent end, which lever is adapted to 
be turned to bring its end just behind the 
type and then to be drawn toward the front 
of the machine, carrying the type with it into 
the lineway. This transfer-lever and its 
actuating parts are best shown in Figs. 4, 5, 
and 6 of the drawings. This lever is marked 
39, and it is secured on a stud 40, formed in 
tegrally with a pinion 41 journaled in a slid 
ing box 42. This box moves in Ways 43 se 
cured to the bottom of the table. Formed on 
the side of this box are ways 44, in which 
moves a bar 45, the end of which bar is pro 
vided with rack-teeth 46 adapted to mesh 
with the pinion 41. 
The bar 45 has a stud 
46, to which is connected a sliding rod 47, 
having at its outer end two washers 47, be 
tween which projects the upper end of a bell 
cranklever 48, the lower end of which is pivot 
ed to a stud 49 on the base-plate, the other 
member 50 of said lever projecting forward. 
51 is a bar having ends 51* secured with the 
rod 52, the latter being journaled in brackets 
53 on the base-plate. 
The bar 51 is sustained 
normally parallel to the base-plate by the arm 
50, which is held under its weight by means 
of the coil-spring 488, having one of its ends 
connected to the upright member 48 of the 
bell-crank lever, and its other end connected, 
preferably, with the rod 52, having adjusting 
nuts 54 on the respective sides of a yoke 55. 
The key-levers 17 are adapted when oper 
ated, first, to permit the spring 27 to act on 
the arm 26 of the type-lever 25 to carry the 
type from the circular table 12 down through 
the arc of a circle and deposit it on its end 
upon a block 56 in front of the lineway, and 
then by the further movement of the key 
lever it actuates the transfer-lever 39, bring 
ing it into position to engage the type, and 
then during the completion of its downward 
stroke said transfer-lever is moved to with 
draw the type from the jaws of the carrying 
lever into the lineway. This will be best un 
derstood by reference to Fig. 3, wherein the 
initial movement of the key - lever will be 
understood to have overcome the superior 
tension of spring 16 over spring 27, thus al 
lowing the latter to act upon the type-lever 
25 and throwing it down, carrying with it the 
type, as indicated in the dotted lines of said 
figure. By this time the key-lever 17 will 
have come into contact with the bar 51 and de 
pressed the latter, which will rock the lever 48 
by its engagement with the arm 50, overcom 
ing the tension of the spring 48 and sluding 
the rod connected to the rack, which will op 
erate to turn the pinion in its bearing and 
swing the bent end of the transfer-lever 
around to the position indicated by the dot 
ted lines in Fig. 4. By this time the rack 
will have reached the limit of its travel, pre 
venting the further turning of the bent end, 
and the rack and sliding block 42, being now 
locked together, will both move along the ways 
43, thus withdrawing the type from the grip 
ping-jaws by the engagement of the lever 39 
there with and moving it into the lineway. 
In order to hold the type within the line 
Way, I provide a spring-catch 57, having an 
engaging-pointlocated at the adit of the line 
way, and which is pressed back out of the way 
by the entering type and immediately closes 
behind it, thus maintaining it, by its co-oper 
ation with the follower, in an upright posi 
tion. Upon the release of the key the move 
ment just described will be reversed-that is 
to say, the spring 16 will first act to free the 
key-lever from its contact with the bar 51, and 
this in turn will allow the spring 48 to draw 
the lever 48 back to its normal position, and 
during the movement of the latter the rack 
will first be thrown forward until its stud 
comes in contact with the stop 58. 
During 
this part of the movement the transfer-lever 
39 will have been turned back to its first po 
sition, and when the rack and bar are again 
locked to the sliding block 42 the latter will 
be moved back to its original position. The 
upward movement of the key-lever will act 
through the arm 30, under the influence of 
the spring 16, to return the type-lever 25 back 
to its original position, distending the spring 
27. As this type-lever is returned, the force 
of the spring 16 will be sufficient to cause the 
I 25 
130 
95 
OC) 
c) 
I I5 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
-- 
434,942 
means for carrying the type therefrom to a 
common point opposite a lineWay, of a Com 
posing-table having the lineWay thereon, and 
a pivoted and horizontally-movable transfer 
lever, and means for turning said transfer 
lever on its pivot to engage the type and for 
moving the lever with the engaged type, 
said means being actuated by the key-lever, 
whereby to draw the type into the lineway, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a type-setting machine, the combina 
tion, with the composing-table having a line 
way formed thereon opposite which the type 
are delivered singly, of a pivoted transfer-le 
ver adapted when turned on its pivot to be 
brought to engage the type, said transfer-le 
ver being mounted in a sliding frame, and 
connections between Said lever and frame 
and the key-lever whereby the movement of 
the key-lever is made to first turn the trans 
fer-lever to engage the type and then move 
the same to draw the type into the lineway, 
substantially as described. 
5. In a type-setting machine, the combina 
tion, with a type-compartment from which 
the type are removed one at a time, of an oper 
ating-key, a carrying-lever for the type actu 
ated by said key, a composing-table having a 
lineway thereon opposite which the type are 
delivered, a pivoted and horizontally-mov 
able transfer-lever operated by the key-lever 
to draw the type into said lineway, and a foll 
lower in said lineway against which the line 
is formed, substantially as described. 
6. In a type-setting machine, the combina 
tion, with a composing-table having a line 
way thereon, into the end of which the type 
are introduced, of a follower against which 
the line of type is formed and a lazy-tongs 
loosely connected at one end to the follower 
and secured against endwise movement at the 
end opposite the follower, Substantially as de 
Scribed. 
7. In a type-setting machine, the combina 
tion, with means for delivering the type at a 
common point opposite a lineWay, of a trans 
fer device comprising a lever pivoted in a 
sliding frame, a sliding rod adapted to turn 
said lever on its pivot to cause it to engage 
the type, and a lever connected with said rod 
and actuated by the key-lever to withdraw 
the type into the lineway, substantially as de 
scribed. 
JOHN B. ODELL. 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK C. GOODWIN, 
C. C. LIN THICUM. 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
IO5 
gripping-jaWS to engage another type, and 
thus the Working cycle of the machine is com 
pleted. 
It will be observed that the key-levers 17 
must be pushed downward far enough to al 
low the type-levers 25 to deliver the type upon 
the block 56 before striking the bar 51 and 
the notch 30 in the key-levers 17 deep enough 
to allow the key-levers to travel downward 
far enough to fully operate the transfer de 
vice without disengaging the pin 30 there 
from. As the key - levers are of different 
lengths, according to their position. On the 
key-board, and all have the same stroke, and 
the levers 30, operating the type-levers 25, all 
have the same stroke, but occupying differ 
ent positions upon the key-levers 17, accord 
ing to the position of the type-levers 25, with 
which they are engaged, it follows that there 
is a difference in the stroke of the key-levers 
17 at the point where the levers 30 enter the 
slots 30, and this difference is compensated 
for by slotting the rod 51, so that the key-le 
vers 17 may travel downward far enough to 
allow the type-levers 25 to deliver the type 
upon the block 56 before operating the trans 
fer device. 
I claim 
1. In a type-setting machine, the combina 
tion, with a type box or compartment from 
which the type are removed one at a time, of an 
operating-key having a Spring to return it to 
its normal position, a type-carrying lever piv 
oted at its lower end and provided with type 
grasping jaws at its opposite end, an arm 
seated on the key-lever and normally sup 
porting the carrying-lever in a position to 
grasp the type, and a spring for actuating the 
type-carrying lever to deliver the type at the 
lineway, substantially as described. 
2. In a type-setting machine, the combina 
tion, with a type-holding compartment from 
which the type are removed singly, of a key 
lever, a type-carrying lever adapted to engage 
the type, a pendent arm pivoted to the type 
carrying lever and loosely bearing on the 
key-lever, a spring to sustain the key-lever 
and through said arm the type-carrying le 
ver in a position to normally engage the type, 
and a spring to depress the type-carrying le 
ver when the key-lever is depressed, said 
loose connection permitting the type to be de 
livered opposite a lineway and there remain 
during the continuation of the movement of 
the key-lever, substantially as described. 
3. In a type-Setting machine, the combina 
tion, with a type-holding compartment and 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435042.txt	(No Model.) 
A. LAND. 
WIRE FENCE MACHINE 
5 Sfleets-Sheet , 
No. 435,042, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
121.1a1a1a1a1a. 
mmowow.m. 
In ver/ar. 
2% (24-44. 
per 
A. A (%ama (%. 
7. 
 
No Model. ) 
No. 435,042, 
Fig.2 
A LAND. 
WIRE FENCE MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
ru\ 
p 
S. 
is 
s 
s), 
Gill 
ld//nesses. 
/02 24-14-4-24/ 
WAzazz- 
'... 
An vendor 
c4%-z-z/ 
Aoer 
A. / Cham/n66, 
Att, 
 
THE ORR is petes ce. Hotch-Litc., was crow, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
A. LAND. 
WIRE FENCE MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 3. . 
No. 435,042, 
s Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
th 
fit Elia. 
l/f esses. 
A1,0terr- 
C7%% 6242-2- 
M 
 
Invert (or 
c424-26-7 
MAO/, a 777//774 (2. 
////s. 
per 
- 
- 
(No Model.) 
No. 435,042, 
A., LAND, 
WIRE FENCE MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
 
per 
6%-4-2-/ 
W A (%amber (2. 
//yi. 
(No Model.) 
A., LAND, . 
WIRE FENCE MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5, 
No. 435,042, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
Witnesses: 
f (22.4/72-azz, 
42. (22.2/22-2- 
E 
Inventor. 
c/42624/ 
M A 67hamihn & (2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABEL LAND, OF HUDSON, MICHIGAN. 
WIRE-FENCE MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,042, dated August 26, 1890. 
Application filed May 31, 1890, Serial No. 353,713, (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ABEL LAND, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Hudson, in the 
County of Lenawee and State of Michigan, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in a Wire-Fence Machine; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale, 
My invention relates to a machine or loom 
for manufacturing wire fence; and the object 
of my invention is to provide a machine that 
can be operated by hand or any suitable mo 
tive power, is simple, practical in construc 
tion, and effective in operation. I attain this 
object by a certain combination and arrange 
ment of parts fully described in this specifi 
cation and illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which - 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the machine com 
plete, having the wire in same and in the pro 
ceSS of operation. Fig 2 is a partly-broken 
view in end elevation. Fig. 3 is a similar 
view in side elevation. Fig. 4 is a detailed 
view of the feeding-cylinder detached. Fig. 
5 is a similar view of the taking-up cylinder. 
Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the rocking 
frame upon which the spur-wheel and pinion 
are mounted. Fig. 7 is a perspective view 
of the pinion. Fig. 8 is a detailed view of the 
tension-bar. Fig. 9 is a similar view of the 
sliding plate. Fig. 10 is a perspective view of 
the bar upon which said sliding plate works. 
The mechanism of my invention is arranged 
and mounted in a suitably-constructed frame 
A. Upon the top and across the center of 
said frame there is a bar B, which is con 
structed with the reduced portion b upon its 
under sides. This reduced portion is adapted 
to enter the slots c in the shoulder and upon 
the under side of the sliding plate C. Upon 
the under side of the bar B there are two rows 
of hooks b', through which the wires F pass. 
Said hooks, in connection with the tension 
bar D, serve to guide the wires in their proper 
places when being fed, and also to hold them 
securely when it is necessary to operate the 
tension-bar D, by means of which the wires 
may be crimped or tightened. When it is 
desired to crimp the wires, the lever E is op 
erated to and fro, and as it is connected with 
the bar D by means of the mechanism here 
inafter described it imparts to Said bar a 
horizontal motion. As the bar D moves to 
and fro the teeth d engage the horizontal 
wires F of the fence, which are held in posi 
tion by the hooks b', and forces these wires 
forward against the sides of the hooks. This 
crimps and tightens the wires. The tension 
bar D is located underneath the bar B, and 
has bearings in the slots or vertical orifices C. 
in the sides of the frame A, and upon the top 
of said tension-bar D there are the teeth d, 
which engage the wires and tighten the same 
and help to more fully guide and hold in 
their places the wires when being fed. Said 
tension-bar is operated by means of the crank 
lever E, which has pivotal bearings e in the 
end of the frame A, and is connected with the 
side bar G by means of the rod H. The side 
bar G has bearings g upon the side of the 
frame and has its ends g' bent at right angles. 
To its lower end is attached the rod I, which 
is connected to the lower end of the L-shaped 
lever J. This lever is pivoted in the end of 
the projecting bracket K and has its upper 
end attached to the tension-bar D. To the 
inner side of the frame A there is secured a 
spiral spring L, which also is attached to the 
tension-bar D. The purpose of Said spiral 
spring is to pull back the tension-bar D to its 
normal position when operated by the mech 
anism described. 
M represents the rocking frame, which is 
rigidly secured to the ends of the rod O, that 
has bearings in the projecting ends in of the - 
sliding plate C, whereby said frame M can be 
rocked to and fro with a view of preventing 
the same from coming in contact with the 
wires F when the sliding plate C is being lo 
cated at different points upon the bar B, with 
a view of tying the vertical wire for woof of 
the fence. Upon the end of the rocking frame 
there is a brake n, for the purpose of check 
ing the spur-wheel P. Said brake is operated 
by means of the lever m. 
The spur-wheel P 
is mounted upon the projecting axle in of the 
frame M, and drives the pinion 2, which is 
rigidly secured in the end of the rocking 
frame M. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
95 
Ioo 
485,042 
O 
- 
The pinion 2 is constructed, as shown in 
Fig. 7, with the hollow shaft or journal 2', 
which has bearings in the end of the rocking 
frame M. The periphery of this pinion con 
tains perforations adapted to receive the spurs 
of the wheel P. Said pinion is further con 
structed with the segment 2', cut away, and 
is provided upon its side with a suitable guide 
2' for the woof-wire. It also contains near 
its center an eye 2', through which the woof 
wire is threaded. As the warp-wires F are 
fed through the machine the pinion 2 is 
threaded with the woof-wire, and by means of 
the sliding plate C is located over the warp 
Wire to be tied, so that the warp-wire, owing 
to the slot 2', passes up to the center of said 
pinion. The spur-wheel is then revolved, 
which imparts motion to the pinion, and as 
the pinion revolves it secures the Woof-wire 
around the warp-wire. The pinion is then 
elevated by means of the rocking frame M, 
and the sliding plate C pushed forward until 
the slot in the pinion 2 is again directly over 
the warp-wire, the rocking frame is again low 
ered and the same operation repeated, and so 
on until the woof-wire is extended across the 
The sliding plate C, by means of the 
fence. 
construction heretofore described, slides upon 
the bar B. Upon one side of the plate C there 
is a barn, which has the spiral springs in upon 
one end and works in the boxes in n' n'. 
This bar is operated by means of the lever n. 
This bar adjusts its ends at any desired point 
in the angular teeth r of the cross-bar R, and 
thereby securely prevents the sliding plate C 
from moving forward while the machine is in 
Operation. 
S designates the feeding-cylinder, which 
has bearings in the upper front sides of the 
frame A. Upon the outside of this cylinder 
there are located in grooves at intervals the 
longitudinal bars s, having in their upper 
sides the curved saw-toothed projections s'. 
Over said bar and in front of each of said 
the staple - shaped 
projections there are 
irons N. 
Upon one end of the cylinder S there are 
the spiral springs T, which serve to force and 
keep in their normal position the barss while 
the wires F are passing around and over said 
cylinder. The bars s, in connection with the 
spiral springs T, the toothed projections s', 
and the staple-shaped irons N, answer the 
purpose of guides and clutches for the wire, 
whereby the wire is rigidly clutched and held 
at any point where the machine is stopped. 
The spiral springs T are held in position by 
means of the curved iron U, which is secured 
to the side of the frame A. At one end of 
the cylinder S there is also a pawl or ratchet 
W, which likewise engages the notches a 
upon the end of the cylinder and prevents 
the cylinder from rotating backward. 
W indicates a cylinder which assists the 
wire from the spools X to the feeding-cylinder. 
The revolving spools X revolve upon an iron 
rod Y, which likewise has bearings or jour 
nal-boxes in the frame A underneath the cyl 
inder W. 
In the front end of the frame A there is lo 
cated a cylinder 1, which assists the wire 
fence, when completed, to the taking-up cyl 
inder 10, which is located underneath the 
cylinder 1, and has bearings in removable 
journal-boxes 4, secured to the bottom of the 
frame A. The taking-up cylinder 10 is oper 
ated by means of an L-shaped lever 3, which 
is secured to the shaft of the cylinder 10, ad 
jacent to the journal. There are two bands 
55 around each end of the taking-up cylin 
der 10, having the notches 6, whereby the 
pawls or ratchets 7 (which are operated by 
the springs) engage said cylinder at every 
point and prevent the same from running 
backward when taking up the completed ar 
ticle of wire fence. A very important fea 
ture of this cylinder is the inwardly-bev 
eled - edge staves 13 and the outwardly 
beveled-edge stave 13'. The stave 13' is 
held in position by a brace 12, which is 
hinged thereto and extends across the cylin 
der and rests upon the staves upon the op 
posite side. It will be observed, as all the 
staves composing said cylinder (excepting 
the stave 13) have their side edges beveled 
inwardly and fit closely together, that when 
the stave 13' is forced into its place in said 
cylinder it will compress the staves 13 closely 
together, and that its outwardly-side-beveled 
edges serve as a rest upon which the staves 
13 are supported and held in their normal 
positions. As the stave 13 is supported by 
the brace 12, as aforedescribed, the cylinder 
10 is rigidly and securely held together. The 
brace 12 prevents the staves that compose 
this cylinder from shrinkage or growing 
smaller in the center and the bands 5 5 
from shrinkage or growing smaller at the 
ends, owing to the weight of the wire. This 
is a decided improvement over the ordinary 
taking-up wire cylinder, and obviates a diffi 
culty that has occasioned a considerable loss 
of wire fence, owing to a non-uniformity of 
wrapping the finished product upof a cylin 
der that warps and shrinksin the center, owing 
to the great weight of the wire fence. To re 
move the finished product from this cylinder 
all that is necessary is to remove the bands 
5 5 and force upward the brace 12 by insert 
ing an instrument into the cylinder from the 
end. When this is done, the staves fall in, 
and when removed the wire fence is rolled 
and ready for shipment. By removing the 
journal-boxes 4 the cylinder 10 can be taken 
out and the completed wire fence taken there 
from. There is an outside iron rod 8 running 
through the staples 9 the entire length of the 
cylinder 10, to which the ends of the horizon 
tal wire F are secured when beginning to 
manufacture the fence. Said rod holds the 
completed article upon the cylinder until it 
is thoroughly wound around the same. 
It will be observed that by operating ver 
tically the lever 3 the horizontal wires F are 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
435,042 
pulled through the machine, and in being 
pulled through the tying mechanism hereto 
fore described secures at intervals the ver 
tical wires or woof f. It will also be observed 
that the machine will manufacture a fence of 
as many horizontal wires as desired. 
The machine shown is calculated to make 
a fence with as many as ten horizontal wires 
F, which would be of special value for chicken 
yards. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a wire-fence machine, the combina 
tion, with any suitable frame, of a bar B, lo 
cated near the center and upon the top of said 
frame, having upon its under side the hooks 
through which the warp-wires are guided and 
by means of which said wires may be crimped 
or tightened, the sliding plate C, located and 
operating horizontally upon said bar, the 
rocking frame M, secured to the ends of the 
rod O, which is pivoted in suitable bearings 
upon the top of the sliding plate C, the longi 
tudinal bar n, located upon the top of the 
plate C, the spur-wheelP, mounted upon the 
projecting axle of the rocking frame M, the 
slotted pinion 2, journaled in the end of the 
rocking frame M, the angular-toothed cross 
bar R, located upon the top of the frame and 
in the rear of said sliding plate, the angular 
toothed tension-bar D, located under the slid 
ing bar B and having bearings in the sides of 
said frame, and the mechanism whereby said 
tension-bar D is horizontally operated, sub 
stantially, as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. In a mechanism for manufacturing wire 
fence, comprising warp and Woof wires and se 
cured together where they cross, the combi 
nation, with any suitable frame, of a bar B, 
located near the center and upon the top of 
Said frame, the sliding plate C, located and 
operating horizontally upon said bar, the 
rocking frame M, secured to the rod O, the 
rod O, pivoted to the top of said sliding plate, 
the longitudinal bar n upon the top of the 
plate C, the spur-wheel P, mounted upon the 
projecting axle of said rocking frame, the 
slotted pinion 2, journaled in the end of the 
rocking frame M, the angular-toothed cross 
bar R, the tension-bar D, located under the 
sliding bar B and having bearings in the 
sides of the frame of the machine, the mech 
anism whereby the tension-bar D is horizon 
tally operated, the feeding-cylinder S, having. 
bearing in the sides of the frame, the longi 
tudinal barss, the staple-shaped irons N, and 
- 
. . 
. 
the spiral springs T, the curved irons U, 
which hold in position the spiral Springs T. 
the spools X, rotating upon the stationary. Od 
Y, the assisting-cylinder W, the pawl V, which 
engages the cylinder S, the cylinder, having 
bearings in the upper front part of the frate 
of the machine, the taking-up cylinder 10, 
having bearings in the removable journal 
boxes 4, the pawls and springs at each end 
of the said cylinder 10, whereby said cylinder 
is engaged, and the L-shaped lever 3, secured 
to the revolving shaft of the cylinder 10, 
whereby the mechanism is operated, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In combination with the co-operating 
mechanism of a wire-fence machine, the p.) 
ion 2, having a hollow shaft or journal 2, 
upon which the same is mounted. the Seg 
ment 2', cut away, and an eye near its center 
through which the woof-wires are threaded, 
substantially as described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
4. In combination with the co-operating 
mechanism of a wire-fence machine, the feed 
ing-cylinder S, having upon its outer surface 
grooves, the toothed bars sliding longitudi 
nally in said grooves, the staple-shaped irons 
that secure and hold said bars in position, 
and the spiral springs T, which operate the 
bars, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
5. In combination with the co-operating 
mechanism of a wire-fence machine, the tak 
ing-up cylinder 10, composed of inwardly 
beveled staves and the outwardly-beveled 
stave 13', the stave 13' having the brace 2 
hinged upon its inner side, the notched bands 
5 upon each end of said cylinder, and the rod 
S extending longitudinally the entire length 
thereof, substantially as described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
6. In combination with the co-Operating 
mechanism of a wire-fence machine, the bar 
B, the sliding plate C, located and operating 
horizontally upon said bar, the rocking frame 
M, pivoted upon the ends of the rod O, the 
rod O, having bearings upon the top of the 
sliding plate C, the spur-wheel mounted upon 
a projecting axle of the rocking frame M, and 
the slotted pinion 2, mounted upon its axle 
in the end of the rocking frame M, Substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ABEL, TAND. 
. 
- 
Witnesses: 
BERT D. CHANDLER, 
FRANK FELLOWs. 
- 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55. 
90 
95 
OO 
- 
d 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435142.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheet S-Sheet l, 
R, L, HARRIS, 
FOUNDATION FOR PIERS OR OTHER STRUCTURES, 
No. 435,142, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
/ u/ 7. 7. 
d 
d 
C 
o 
 
o 
o 
o6. 
o C. 
d 
o 
g 
d 
O 
o 
'azoace 
C4-e/412. 
7 e/fa A?- 
w 
- 
 
7? 
hor. 
Verz. zosa. 
--) () ) 
Me? c(. TZ Mej 
g. 
- 
--SA- 
-) 
( (6, 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
R. L. HARRIS, 
FOUNDATION FOR PIERS OR OTHER STRUCTURES, 
No. 435,142, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
 
14 SE 
s 
I 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT L. HARRIS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FOUNDATION FOR PERS OR OTHER STRUCTURES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 435,142, dated August 26, 1890. 
Application filed May 6, 1890, Serial No. 350,806, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT L. HARRIs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented an Improvement in Foundations for 
Piers, Abutments, or other Structures, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Piers for bridges or other structures are 
often built to carry a much less load than 
afterward becomes necessary to put upon 
them, or it is desired to distribute the press 
lure upon a greater area, or in some cases in 
perfectly-constructed foundations sink, or in 
other instances coffer-dams or caissons are 
required around or around and under struct 
ures already built or for building new struct 
ures or repairing or strengthening old struct 
leS, 
My present invention relates to a method 
of introducing hydraulic cement between or 
among materials that are already in position, 
so as to cement those materials together into 
a solid structure, and this improvement, 
while specially adapted to subaqueous struct 
ures, may also be used for subterraneous 
Structures. 
The principal features of this method con 
sist in forming or forcing holes in the earth, 
sand, gravel, rubble, loose materials, or other 
substances that exist in the given position, 
which holes are to extend nearly as far as the 
cement is required to be carried. A suitable 
pipe or pipes are introduced into such holes 
and passed nearly to the distant end, and hy 
draulic cement in a liquid or semi-liquid state 
is forced through such pipe and discharged 
from the distant end among the loose mate 
rials and allowed quietly to accrete, and the 
cement-supplying tube is carried to another 
40 hole, and so to several and returned to the 
first hole, where the operation is repeated 
until the voids to be reached at the depth or 
location are filled by successive accretions. 
The number of operations and accretions, 
whether one or many, depends on the size of 
the faterstices in the material operated upon 
or the depth or distance from the point of in 
let, and the operations are repeated until a 
complete monolith of concrete is built up in 
the loose materials, commencing at the low 
est or more distant points and proceeding 
gradually at higher levels or nearer places 
So 
35 
45 
4. 
o 
fo 
65 
until the loose materials accessible from each 
hole are firmly cemented together. In this 
manner the loose materials in, under, and 
around bridge-piers can be cemented together 55 
without removing them from position. Loose . 
rubble, riprap, sand, gravel, and other porous 
foundations can be consolidated to any re 
quired extent without disturbing the mass 
perceptibly, and in cases where the founda 
tions of piers are not of sufficient area for 
supporting the weight such foundations can 
be extended indefinitely both in depth below 
the structure and in area around such struct 
ure, and also the side or sides and bottom of 
caissons can be constructed in sand, gravel, 
or 6ther loose materials, and afterward exca 
wated for the reception of masonry or rainmed 
concrete of other-work. 
In the diagrams illustrating this invention 
I have represented a plan view in Fig. 1, and 
section in Figs, 2 and 3. 
Let A represent, a pier the foundation of 
which is to be strengthened. Holes are to be 
inserted at proper distances apart, or wherever 
most available-say vertically at a C-down 
through the loose rubble or imperfect ma 
sonry, and should there be a deposit of mud 
or undesirable material on the stones or other 
substances a powerful jet of water maybe 
directed through such holes to wash away 
such mud. Then cement, mixed with water 
and with or without sand, according to the 
material to be dealt with, is forced through a 
straight, angular, or curved pipe b, inserted 
in such hole, and either changed from one 
hole to another, or separate pipes are pi'ovided 
for separate holes, and a quantity of such 
cement is forced to the bottom part of the 
loose laterials and allowed to accrete quietly 
upon and between the coarse material-such 
as rubble or riprap-when under water. After 
this has set sufficiently another charge of cem 
ent is forced, and again quiet and time 
allowed for accretion and setting, and so on 
consecutively, depending on the coarseness of 
the material whether one or many charges 
have to be introduced, until the interstices to 
be reached at this level or position are filled, 
when the pipe is partially withdrawn and an 
other similar series of operations performed, 
and this mode is proceeded with until the 
loose materials are united to the desired ex 
90 
95 
75 
f 
435,142 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
tent into a strong monolith or mass, and this 
is done without disturbing, weakening, or re 
building the structure. 
If desired, holes may be inserted at c around 
the pier or other structure, in the sand, earth, 
or other materials, to deepen the foundation 
to any desired extent, and the holes are to be 
at proper distances apart, and the operations 
before described are performed and should be 
progressive and at oppositesides of the struct 
lure to balance the actions and forces. 
In cases where an inclosure or caisson is re 
quired, or where it is desired to confine the 
existing materials, a cement wall may be built 
gradually by the before-described method 
within the materials as they lie in their natural 
positions, the cement, under pressure, being 
forced through holes at ee progressively, and 
said holes being near enough to each other for 
the cement spread from one to bond with the 
cement spread from the next, until a complete 
wall of the desired thickness is produced, 
and if a floor is required for said caisson, as 
at h, the same may be made by cement forced 
through pipes introduced into holes made to 
a nearly-uniform depth, the cement from one 
hole spreading to and bonding with the cem 
ent from the adjacent holes. 
I find it advantageous to mix more or less 
sand with the hydraulic cement, according to 
the character of the loose materials to be 
united together, and in passing the cement to 
its point of delivery it is important to do so 
with rapidity and to keep the cement vio 
lently agitated to maintain uniformity of in 
termixture with the water and sand immedi 
ately before delivery to the pump or other 
forcing apparatus, in order that the materi 
als may not subside in and clog the forcing 
apparatus or pipes. 
This invention may be availed of in sup 
porting the roof and walls of earth in con 
structing tunnels, as well as in making foun 
dations, or in repairing or strengthening 
foundations and other structures, and in 
sinking shafts, especially in wet or instable 
materials or quicksands, such materials may 
be cemented together in advance of the ex 
cavation by the before-described method. 
In subaqueous structures water may be 
pumped from a pipe introduced into the hole 
that is made, so as to draw out with the wa 
ter the earthy and soluble materials before 
forcing down the cement in between the 
gravel, Stones, or similar laterials around 
the end of the pipe, in some instances, 
where the foundation is of loose laterial, 
the hose, lozzle, or pipe may be inserted 
without, making a hole especially for it at 
wihatever places may be most advantageous. 
With riprap and rubble under water, the 
cement is liable to be carried away by the 
water if introduced in a large (ulatity at a 
time. It is better under these circuistances 
to supply a comparatively small (tlantity of 
cement at a time, so as to allow it to subside 
and accretc upon the stones or other open 
- 
obtained. 
material, and as soon as this has set to add 
more cement until the interstices are filled 
and the stones cemented together. If the 
foundation below a stone structure is defect 
ive, holes may be drilled through the stone, 
as seen at d, Fig. 2, for the insertion of the 
cement-supplying pipe or nozzle b. If the 
riprap or coarse materials are sufficiently 
open for the insertion of the cement-supply 
ing nozzle or pipe, it is not necessary to 
make holes for the same, and the cement 
may be introduced progressively at the vari 
ous points until the desired accretion has been 
IBy the term cement as used herein is 
included hydraulic cement or any proper 
mixture of adhesive material adapted to the 
place where the same is to be used. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The method herein specified of con 
structing, consolidating, or strengthening 
foundations or structures, the same consist 
ing in forcing into the interstices of such 
foundation or adjacent thereto successive 
charges of mixed cement, commencing at the 
bottom and adding thereto progressively from 
the bottom upwardly until the mass is solidi 
fied, substantially as specified. 
2. The method herein specified of progress 
ively making artificial-stone foundations or 
structures in loose materials remaining in 
position, the same consisting in making holes 
between such loose materials and introducing 
thinly-mixed cement through a pipe or pipes 
under pressure to the distant portions of such 
holes, to cause the cement to spread in be 
tween the loose materials, allowing the cement 
to accrete or set, and then repeating the op 
eration at nearer points in such holes until a 
solid cement structure is built up in the 
loose materials, substantially as Set forth. 
3. The method herein specified of cement 
ing together loose materials-such as rubble, 
riprap, gravel, and imperfect masonry-con 
sisting in directing streams of water through 
such materials to remove mud or sediment 
and introducing cement in successive charges 
through holes, commencing at the bottom 
and filling in upwardly, and allowing the suc 
cessive charges of cement to set or to accrete 
between one charge and the next in order to 
fill the interstices progressively, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. The method herein specified of building 
a caisson or a coffer - dam or Supporting 
Structure in Sand, earth, or loose materials, 
consisting in making holes from above in 
such materials and forcing cement into the 
same under pressure at the lowest desired 
places and building by successive operations 
from the lowest, desired level upwardly, the 
holes being sufficiently close together for the 
cement spread laterally by the pressure at 
one hole to extend to and bond with the cem 
ent fron the adjoining holes, substantially as 
set forth. 
5. The method herein specified of intro 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II.5 
I 25 
435,142 
8 
3. 
ducing a floor or supporting-layer into rubble, 
Sand, or other loose material without remov 
ing the same, consisting in introducing into 
Such material at numerous places or holes 
Cement in a semi-liquid condition forced 
through pipes passing down to the same or 
nearly the same level and the places of sup 
ply being sufficiently close together for the 
Cement introduced at one hole to spread to and 
unite with the cement introduced at adja 
cent holes, substantially as specified. 
6. The method herein specified of making 
a caisson under water with bottom and walls 
of cement, consisting in forcing such cement 
through pipes and into the loose materials 15 
existing under the water and in their normal 
condition, such cement being first introduced 
at the lowest places and sufficiently close for 
the cement to spread and unite and form the 
floor, and then building up the walls pro- 20 
gressively from the floor to the higher places, 
substantially as specified. 
Signed by me this 26th day of April, A. D. 
ROBERT L, HARRS. 
1890. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
WILLIAM G. MOTT, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435242.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 435,242, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
W. L. OURDAN & C. A., KOLB, 
PANTOGRAPH, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
WW7 WAFSSAS 
 
3. N/ 
22e. 
JWPAEWTORS 
TVezzoezzz-Z.. Ozz7aa-72/ 
C/26/2es -Z.Z(602. 
A TTORWEYS 
(No Model.) 
No, 435,242, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
W. L. OURDAN & C. A. KOLB, 
PANTOGRAPH, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
/WWEW7 ORS 
Vzzz ceazz Z. 6a7%za721 
Czezrs Z.Z.o.22-. 
76% 4.77OARWAYS 
(No Model.) 
W. L., OURDAN & C. A. KOLB, 
PANTOGRAPH, 
3. Sheets 
No. 435,242. 
 
Pate 
 
 
Sheet 3. 
1890. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
M777 WAESSES 
JM PANTO ARS 
Vzzzcerv 7.627aar 
C2a-22es JZ.A.(772, 
As Y 
4 TTO/RAVAVS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
VINCENT I. OURDAN AND CHARLEs A. KOLB, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT 
OF COLUMBIA, ASSIGNORS TO THE OURDAN & KOLB ENGRAVING MA 
CHINE, ENGRAVING AND MERCANTILE COMPANY, OF VIRGINIA. 
PANTOGRAPH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 435,242, dated August 26, 1890. 
Application filed February 20, 1890, Serial No. 341,137, (No model.) 
I5 is set to copy. 
20 mathematically-correct copy is required. 
To all whom it may concern: - 
Beit known that we, VINCENT L. OURDAN 
and CHARLESA, KOLB, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Washington, in the Dis 
5 trict of Columbia, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Pantographs, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
lingS. 
Io The object of our invention is to produce a 
pantograph adapted to work easily in every 
direction with great rigidity and firmness of 
movement, so as to reproduce with perfect ac 
curacy and smoothness any pattern which it 
Heretofore in pantographs the construction 
attainable under the old forms was such as 
to prevent their employment in the fine arts 
such, for instance, as engraving, where a 
Our invention, while it is adapted to be 
used for all purposes, is by its peculiar con 
struction especially designed for use in the 
art of exact engraving on hard Surfaces, such 
25 as copper and the like. Heretofore it has 
been necessary to have such engraving exe 
cuted by hand through the most skilled work 
men. In chart or map engraving it has also 
been necessary to insure that perfect accu 
3o racy which is in such work absolutely essen 
tial to take repeated measurements in order 
to verify the location of each point with re 
spect to every other. Besides this, the process 
of producing an engraved plate by hand con 
35 sists of a number of steps, all of which must 
be performed with equal care and skill. Con 
sequently the cost of a plate has been very 
great and the time consumed in preparing it 
has been considerable. By the use of our in 
4o vention we can prepare from maps or other 
patternsa perfect reproduction of the outlines. 
Our machine being absolutely accurate in its 
movement, it is not necessary to verifyits work 
by measurement if the pattern upon which it 
45 was executed has first been ascertained to be 
correct. Besides we dispense with all the steps 
necessary to the producing of an engraved 
plate except the actual cutting upon the metal 
itself. The figure produced by our machine 
5o upon the plate is the exact negative of the 
h 
pattern, so that the entire plate is engraved 
by one operation. It may be necessary to 
smooth up the worka little; but that is always 
necessary according to the old method, and 
the amount of it required is not so great where 55 
our machines are used as where the Work is 
done altogether by hand. From the simpli 
fying of the process and dispensing with the 
verification heretofore required the cost of 
engraving may be very largely reduced, and 6o 
that without detracting in the least from the 
character of the work. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of our pantograph, showing the 
arms of equal lengths. Fig. 2 is a plan view 65 
showing one of the arms detached from the 
block and secured to the arm adjacent to 
it. Fig. 3 is a detached view, partly in sec 
tion, showing the arrangement of the parts 
pivoted to the main track. Fig. 4 is a cen- 7c 
tral vertical section of Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a 
top view of one of the blocks which travel on 
the side track, and Fig. 6 one of the blocks 
which travel on the main tracks. Fig. 7 
is a detached view of the collar and hinged 75 
socket adapted to move upon one of the 
connecting-rods. Fig. 8 is a detached view 
of one of the connecting-rods. Fig. 9 is a 
section detached of one of the blocks, show 
ing the gib for regulating the pressure upon 8o 
the track. Fig. 10 shows a desirable form of 
hinge for securing one of the connecting-rods 
to the other, and Fig. 11 the same hinge 
adapted to be secured to one corner of one of 
the blocks. 
Referring to the letters upon the drawings, 
A indicates a track, which is preferably made 
of metal, and is adapted to be firmly secured 
by clamps or brackets, or any Well-known and 
convenient means, to an ordinary table 9o 
adapted to have the pattern and the plate to 
be engraved laid upon it. 
In the drawings the track is shown as con 
sisting of a base a, and integral therewith a 
a ribb upon it, the latter being of wedge or 95 
dovetail form in cross-section; but any form 
of track may be used, some shapes, on account 
of their cheapness and lightness, being better 
adapted to certain purposes than others. 
85 
Upon the center of the track A is firmly roo 
 
 
2 
435,242 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
secured a disk B, which serves as a bearing one of which is internally screw-threaded to 
forthelateral track-arms CC',pivoted above it. 
receive the thumb-screw U, so that the parts 
Dindicates a flange upon the upright rod E, 
of the end of the large section of the rod may 
that is adapted to pivot the lateral arms to 
be clamped together upon the smaller section 
gether and hold them in place. It is provided 
and hold the two sections together. 
Upon each of the rods PP' we provide a 
at its upper end with pivoted guys G, and 
split collar V, adapted to be clamped upon its 
may be screw-threaded on its lower end to be 
screwed into an internally-screw-threaded 
rod by the thumb-screw W. These collars 
are provided with hinged internally-screw 
hole in the track A, or it may be passed 
through the track and secured on the other 
threaded sockets X, corresponding to the 
side by a counters unk nut or the like. Any 
sockets borne upon the blocks. These sock 
ets are adapted to carry the ends of the rods 
convenient means for uniting these parts may 
be employed. 
PP' adjacent to them, respectively, when 
H indicates stays, which are preferably 
they are disengaged from the blocks in the 
manner and for the purpose that will be here 
made of wire, and are connected at one end 
with the guys G and at the other end with 
inafter explained. 
the outer ends of the lateral arms CC' to sup 
The operation of our invention is as fol 
lows: Suppose the rods PP to be adjusted 
port them. 
to equal lengths and secured at their ends to 
II indicate blocks fitted to the ribb, and 
adapted to travel freely upon the opposite 
the blocks II' and MM. Then by operating 
ends of the track A. These blocks are pro 
the block M, which we will assume carries 
vided with gibs K and adjustment-screws L 
the stylus, and causing the stylus to follow a 
for regulating their pressure upon the track 
pattern, the motion of that block to or from 
on which they move. MM' indicate similar 
the center will cause a movement in the con 
blocks provided with similar gibs and set 
trary direction of the block M. This move 
ment is necessary to produce the negative 
screws, that are adapted to move upon the 
plate, because a change of direction in a line 
lateral arms CC. The form of blocks shown 
in the drawings is adopted in order to corre 
toward or from the central perpendicular or 
spond with the track upon which it travels; 
north and south line must produce a contrary 
but the blocks should always conform with 
change of direction in the line upon the plate; 
the shapes of their tracks, which may be 
but all changes of direction of lines with re 
varied, as above indicated, in many Ways. 
spect to a central horizontal or east and West 
Upon each of the blocks M and M' is pro 
line remain the same in the negative as in 
vided a split collar N N' and a thumb-screw 
the positive. Therefore a movement of the 
O O', respectively, for increasing or dimin 
block Mparallel to the north and south line oc 
ishing the size of its internal diameter. It is 
casions a corresponding travel of the block 
immaterial which block carries the tool and 
M' in the same direction. 
which the stylus. They may be interchanged 
. The relative movements of the stylus and 
tool, as just explained, are the result of the 
at will. 
The tool adapted to be borne for engraving 
equality in the lengths of the rods PP. By 
equally diminishing the lengths of the rods 
may, if desired, consist of a rapidly-revolving 
incased point. This instrumentis well known 
secured to the block M, for instance, the 
in the art of engraving, and, as it does not 
movement of the stylus over a given space 
enter into our invention, needs no further 
will produce a movement of the tool over a 
description. 
smaller space. Increasing the relative lengths 
Between the blocks II' and MM', respect 
of those arms will produce the contrary effect. 
ively, are connecting-rods PP'. The ends of 
By disconnecting two of the rods from the 
these rods must be directly or indirectly 
blocks and connecting them with another rod 
hinged to opposite blocks, so as to allow the 
through the collar Vonit many other changes 
blocks to move freely upon their tracks; but 
in the rods of almost endless variety may be 
produced, depending upon the relative lengths 
the rods may be made of any convenient 
shape or size. In the drawings is illustrated 
of the rods and their positions with respect 
a suitable form of connecting-rod. 
to one another. 
On each of the inside corners of the blocks 
This feature of our invention is adapted to 
II' and M M are borne, upon hinges of any 
be used to advantage in cutting plates for 
ordinary kind Q, internally-screw-threaded 
illustrations for newspapers or the like 
sockets R, adapted to receive the externally 
such, for instance, as caricatures, &c.-as the 
outline of the tracing can be grotesquely dis 
screw-threaded ends of the rods PP. It is 
necessary that the rods shall be adjustable in 
torted through the ordinary manipulation of 
length, and we find that the construction 
the machine by simply changing the relations 
shown in the drawings (see Fig. 8) is a con 
and lengths of the arms PP. 
venient means of accomplishing this purpose. 
What we claim is - 
The rods are divided in two parts. The sec 
1. The combination, with a fixed track and 
sliding blocks II, adapted to travel thereon, 
tions of each rod are made tubular and one 
larger than the other, so that the smaller may 
of lateral track-arms pivoted to the fixed 
telescope into it. In the free end of the 
track, sliding blocks MM upon said arms, 
larger tube We provide a slit S and lugs T, I and pivoted connecting-rods between the 
75 
95 
OO 
TIO 
II5 
I25 
13o 
435,242 
3 
blocks II' and M M', respectively, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a fixed block and 
sliding blocks II", adapted to travel thereon, 
of lateral track-arms pivoted to the fixed 
track, sliding blocks M M upon said arms, 
and pivoted adjustable connecting-rods be 
tween the blocks II' and MM, respectively, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a fixed block and 
sliding blocks II, adapted to travel thereon, 
of lateral track-arms pivoted to the fixed 
track, sliding blocks M M upon said arms, 
pivoted connecting-rods between the blocks 
Io 
II and MM, respectively, and hinged sock 
ets adjustably borne upon the connecting 
rods, each adapted to receive one end of one 
of the connecting-rods when disengaged from 
its block, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony of all which we have hereunto 
Subscribed our names. 
I5 
VINCENT L. OURDAN. 
CHARLES A. KOLB. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH. T. ATKINS, 
THOs, S. HoPKINS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435342.txt	 
(No Model.) 
J. E. BLACKMORE, 
PHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERA, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 435,342, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
r 
SSWA 2 
satists 
a 
 
 
is aware arease series assistarr 
 
W 
W.W 
W 
z 
341.u.c. v. Eoc 
//dates A. Apacitzvove 
72zs elitov victs 
- 
G 2. 
. 
( 
24- 
33 
928 itv.cscs 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
J. E. BLACKMORE, 
PHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERA, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 435,342, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
g 
assas 
granur?inierrest 
sts 
5 
9- Weg 
WSZ, 
 
928) it cases 
341.uc4 to 
2% v/6/7tes A. Zidaetzore 
33 ts eletov vict) 
 
 
(No Model.) 
J. E. BLACKMORE, 
PHOTOGRAPHIO CAMERA, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 435,342, 
Patented Aug. 26, 1890. 
 
33 /2 2s elitovicy) 
341.ucv to 
//ves Z.Ziza catazove 
u/6247. % 
reports PETEAs co, PHoro-LTHo, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. BLACKMORE, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. - 
PHOTOGRAPHC CAMERA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 435,342, dated August 26, 1890. 
Application filed August 26, 1889, Serial No. 322,029, (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES E. BLACKMORE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
GrandRapids, in the county of Kent and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Photographic Cam 
eras; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
photographic cameras, and more particularly 
to that class adapted to making instantaneous 
view Work without removing the camera 
proper from its outer casing or box in which 
it is transported. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
Said camera with Sundry improved conven 
iences and devices, as will appear in what fol 
lows. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
perspective of a device embodying my inven 
tion; Fig. 2, a longitudinal vertical section 
of the same; Fig. 3, an elevation of the plate 
holder, with parts broken away; Fig. 4, a ver 
tical Section of the same on the line acac of 
Fig. 3; Fig. 5, a perspective of the ground 
glass frame; Fig. 6, a detail of shutter for 
single objective, and Fig. 7 the same of shut 
ter for stereoscopic objective; Fig. 8, a panel 
20 with single objective, and Fig. 9 the same 
with double objective. 
A is the outer casing or box provided with 
a handle B for carrying the same, a door 
C for inserting and removing the ground 
glass and plate-holders, a door E in its rear 
end for observing the image upon the ground 
glass, a detachable front D, having an oblong 
cap F pivoted to the same near its middle, 
and Serving to close and open the openings in 
said front opposite to objective M, and finder 
lens G', and also with an instantaneous shut 
ter, hereinafter described. 
20is a removable panel having an objective 
Mat its center, Fig. 8, and for which a simi 
lar panel having a double objective for stere 
oscopic work may be substituted, Fig. 9. 
O represents the ground glass, and P the 
focus-screw. 
H' is a strip of metal, which can be ob 
served through the glass plate H. Said strip 
moves to and from the objective with the 
ground glass O, and has marks indicating the 
proper positions of the same to focus objects 
at various distances. 
G is a finder consisting of a ground glass, 
upon which is projected an upright image 
corresponding to the one on the ground glass 
O by means of the lens G' and mirror G'. 
By observing this image on the finder the 
image on O can be determined. 
- 
The shutter for a single objective consists 
of a fan-shaped plate R, arranged within a 
suitable chamber in the front D, having an 
opening M' in the middle of its broader part 
and pivoted near its outer end to vibrate, as 
shown by dottedlines. Said shutterisforced 
downward by a spring L, which is turned 
around the post L' near its middle having 
One arm attached to said shutter and the 
other engaging with notches K in the plate J 
to adjust its tension and determine the speed 
of the shutter. To the narrow end of said 
shutter R is pivoted the bars 11 and 12, the 
latter having the lever I projecting from the 
edge of the front, by means of which the shut 
ter can be set and the former sliding through 
the guide 21 and provided with notches 13 
and 14, engaging with the latch I', which also 
projects outside the edge of the front D. The 
notch 13 engages the latch I when the open 
ing M' is opposite the objective, and the notch 
14 when the shutter is set ready for exposure. 
19 is a buffer to break the shock when the 
shutter R, falls. 
For the double or stereoscopic objectives, I 
provide a front D, having a chamber, within 
which is a rectangular slide R', having open 
ings M'M' corresponding to the objectives, 
arranged to move between parallel ways 15 
15 and forced to the left by a spring L, one 
arm of which engages with the notches K for 
the purpose before cited. 
18 is a bar pivoted to said slide at one end 
and at the other to a lever I'', extending be 
yond and projecting from the edge of the front 
D, by means of which the shutter can be 
moved to the right and set for use. 
I' is a latch projecting from the edge of the 
front and engaging with notches 22 and 23 in 
the plate 17 on the slide R. 
19 is a rubber buffer to break the shock of 
the shutter. 
95 
IOC) 
O 
25 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
 
435,342 
5 
O 
In the plate-holder S S are the slides that 
are withdrawn to expose the plate. 
T are the light-valves, arranged in suitable 
chambers and having hinges U U at their up 
per edges, and Swing outward by the spring 1 
to close the slide-opening. 
4 4 are grooves into which the lower edges 
of the valves strike to insure exclusion of all 
the light, 
2 is the diaphram which separates the plates. 
W is a slide, having tongues 33 engaging 
with grooves in the holder. Y is a bar oppo 
sitely tapering from the middle, and having 
attached a spring Z, which presses against 
the edges of the plates V. By removing this 
slide, bar, and spring the plates can be re 
moved from or inserted in the plate-holder. 
When the plates are in position, the bar Y is 
first inserted, and its tapered ends serve as 
wedges to compress the spring as the slide W. 
is replaced. 
The ground-glass frame 5 is of the usual 
rectangular form, and provided on the inner 
surface of its respective sides with a groove 
or chamber 6 and a detachable portion 7, hav 
ing tenons 8 engaged with said groove and 
secured in place by screws inserted in holes 
9. By removing said screws and the part 7 
the ground glass can be readily removed from 
the grooves 6 or placed therein and Secured 
by replacing the detachable part 7. 
What I claim is as follows: 
1. In a camera, an Outer case inclosing the 
operating parts of a camera, and provided 
with a detachable front having a pivoted cap 
F, a chamber inclosing a spring-actuated 
shutter, the notched plate J, having notches 
engaging the spring of said shutter, a finder 
consisting of a lens G', a mirror G', and a 
ground glass G, a focus-gage H', a top door C, 
and a rear door E, substantially as described. 
2. In combination with the case A, inclos 
ing the operating parts of a camera, a detach 
able front panel, having a chamber inclosing 
a shutter R, pivoted in said chamber, having 
25 
35 
55 
the opening M', actuated by the spring L, and 
having the bars 1 and 12, and the lever I 
and latch projecting from the edge of said 
panel, substantially as described. 
3. In a camera, a case inclosing the operat 
ing parts, said case having a front provided 
with a movable shutter, a spring for actuat 
ing said shutter, one end of which spring pro 
jects outside of said case and engages a 
notched plate, a pivoted lever connected to 
Said shutter for adjusting the same, and a piv 
oted latch engaging a notched plate attached 
to said shutter for holding and releasing the 
latter, said lever and latch also extending out 
side Said case, substantially as described. 
4. In a camera, in combination with a plate 
holder having an opening at one side to in 
Sert or remove the plates, a slide W, closing 
Said opening having tongues 33 engaging with 
grooves in the holder, and a spring between 
Said holder and the bar Y, having the spring 
Zattached, substantially as described. 
5. In a camera, in combination with a plate 
holder having an opening at one side to in 
Sert or remove the plates, a slide having 
tongues 3 3, engaging with grooves in the 
holder, and a spring between said slide and 
the plates SS, said spring adapted to be com 
pressed by the slide when in place, substan 
tially as described. 
6. In a camera, a ground-glass frame hav 
ing the groove 6 and the detachable part 7, 
substantially as described. 
7. In a camera, a ground-glass frame hav 
ing the groove 6 in the inner surface of three 
sides, and a removable part 7 in the fourth 
side provided with screws, substantially as 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
described. 
, 
: 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES E. BLACKMORE. 
75 
 
45 
Witnesses: 
LUTHER. V. MOULTON, 
JOSIAH. W. SHERWOOD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435442.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 435,442, 
 
C. MANNING, 
MACHINE FOR STAMPING SOAP. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
4AZ25 A 
 
w Azza 24 
(No Model.) 
C. MANNING, 
MACHINE FOR STAMPING SOAP, 
4. Sheets--Sheet 2. 
No. 435,442, 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
A 7. aws 4. 
4 
  
 
O 
ga 
| 7. I 
|| 7 
SIE IS 3 
aft 
|| 
S 
A. 
C2S 7 
G21 
77 a 33 33 d 
F 
33 
II 
. 
II 
3- a--- 
 
Mar- e 
Tit 
62 
2 cal 
g 
/3: (...) a 
-2 
series= 
1 * 
: 
 
II 
- 
. 
H 
sis itzi 
still H 
! E: 
a ? 
T. 2 
tillas--- 
, 2 
Cec 2 
I -, 
- 
- 
2 
 
  
 
- 2 % 
all 2. 
44725 A 
te:8 . 
62.%22- 
. 
Zizz-zz z/z 
6424 c/arvez 
zy %.27% &el-4A 
He worris Peters co. Hoo-Ho, washtarot, e. 
(No Model.) 
No. 435,442, 
 
C. MANNING. 
MACHINE FOR STAMPING SOAP. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 435,442, 
C. MANNING, 
MACHINE FOR STAMPING SOAP. . 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
 
er 
222 
Azzz-a ZAZ77. 
6%.4% c/artiz 
zy- (94. 4%. -4Ay. 
is Peters co, Photo-ko. wash.INGrow, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHESTERFIELD MANNING, OF SHARON VILLE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
GEORGE NIXON, OF MONROE, OHIO. 
MACHINE FOR STAMPING so AP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 435,442, dated September 2, 1890. 
Application filed September 26, 1889, Serial No. 325,156, (No model.) 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHESTERFIELD MAN 
NING, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Sharonville, in the county of Hamilton and 
5 State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Stamp 
E. Soap, of which the following is a descrip 
lO. 
The several features of my invention and 
to the various advantages resulting therefrom 
will be fully apparent from the following de 
Scription and claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, making 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a view 
15 in perspective of a machine embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a top view of the ma 
chine, with the following exceptions: Above 
the disks et and e all mechanism has been 
omitted, including the die C (shown in Fig. 
2O 1) at the top of said disks. The upright A 
next to the spectator is consequently shown 
in section. So, also, all the mechanism above 
the shoulder C8 at the other side of the ma 
chine is removed, and the parts of the upright 
25 there located are therefore shown in section. 
These sections of the uprights are taken in a 
horizontal plane just above the tops of the 
disks e'e'. Those parts of the dies C C and 
the forward portion S of the feeding device 
3o which are located in a horizontal plane pass 
ing through the axial center of said disks are 
likewise shown in horizontal section in said 
last-named plane. The upper portions bb' 
of the chute or guideway B of the said feed 
35 ing device and the rear uprights supporting 
the rear part of the trough or chute ) are 
likewise removed, the said uprights being 
shown in horizontal section, the section there 
of being taken at a plane above the parts 
4o b and b. The omission from Fig. 2 of cer 
tain parts of the machine, as aforementioned, 
contributes to the more perfect understand 
ing and comprehension of the remaining parts 
of the machine therein illustrated. Fig. 3 is 
45 a vertical section of the machine, taken at the 
dotted line 33 of Fig. 2 and looking at that 
side of the section which faces toward the 
upper end of the sheet in which Fig. 2 is con 
tained, and omitting from view the mechan 
5o ism pertaining directly to the feeding of the 
soap to the dies. Fig. 4 is a view of that side 
of the cam b10 which is toward the upper side 
of the sheet in Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a section of 
that part of the machine immediate to said 
section and taken at the dotted line 55 of 55 
Fig. 2 and looking at that side of the section 
which faces toward the upper end of the Said 
Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is a side elevation of the guide 
way for operating the ejector for ejecting the 
stamped soap cake from the die. Fig. 7 is a 6o 
view in perspective of the stop for holding 
the cakes of soap within the guide until the 
empty die comes opposite the plunger. Fig. 
S is a view of that side of the cam S which 
is toward the bottom of Fig. 2. 
The machine rests upon a suitable Sulp 
porting-base A. 
B indicates the channel or guideway for 
conducting the cut-up bars or cakes of S0ap 
to the devices for feeding the cakes of Soap 7o 
to the mechanism for stamping the cakes. 
This guideway consists of two portions, an in 
clined part b', connected and leading into a 
vertical part b. The cake passing down 
through the guideway b falls on the floor b, 75 
which is at the bottom of the guideway. Upon 
this floor or upon a horizontal plane there 
with is the reciprocating feed-plunger b. 
This feed-plunger has at top a horizontal ta 
ble b fixed to it. The function of this table 8c 
is to prevent the cakes in guideway b from 
descending while the plunger is pushing the 
cake in front of it into the adjacent soap-dies 
C of the stamp. 
stem or connection b", to which is connected 
the mechanism for reciprocating the plunger. 
This mechanism consists of arm b', rigidly 
attached to the reciprocating bar b, whose 
rear end is secured and slides in a guide d. 9c. 
The forward end of bar b is provided with a 
rotating wrist or roll b', rolling in a pear 
shaped cam-groove b0 in the cam b', fixed 
upon and turned by shaft D. The forward 
end of the reciprocating barb is pivoted to 95 
one end of an oscillating barb', whose other 
end is pivoted to the lower portion of the up 
right A* or other suitable support. The func 
tion of the oscillating bar bis to uphold the 
adjacent end of the reciprocating bar band loo 
The plunger b' is provided with a suitable 85 
 
 
435,442 
Io 
- 
its revolving rollt". . The revolution of cam 
b' causes the bar b8 and the plunger b to 
properly reciprocate. 
A shaft E is journaled in supports, as e'e'. 
Between these latter and on the shaft E are 
the two circular supports or disksee', which 
hold the soap-dies Cin position. The num 
ber of such soap-dies C may be varied, the 
preferred number here shown being four, ar 
ranged at equal distances apart around the 
shaft E. The periphery of one of the disks, 
as e, is provided with a series of stops e, ar 
ranged to engage consecutively a spring-fin 
ger e (whose fixed end is connected to the 
floor A or equivalent support) at the time 
that an empty soap-die comes opposite to the 
feed-plunger b. The soap-dies C and their 
supporting-disks e'e' rotate in the direction 
of the arrows marked on the disk e. 
The mechanism for stopping the empty 
soap-die when opposite to the feed-plungerb 
and for holding it there while the plunger is 
feeding a cake of soap in the die and for 
then releasing it and for rotating the disks 
e'e', and the soap-dies is as follows: In the 
outer side of the disk e' are four curved 
grooves, as e, each deepening in the direction 
in which the disk erotates. On the shaft E 
is pivoted a lever e. The upper end of this 
lever carries a stude, which works succes 
sively in said groovese. This stud is pressed 
forward against the disk e' by means of a 
springe, contained in the heade of the lever 
e'. The lower end of this levere is pivotally 
connected to one end of a connecting-rode' 
and is reciprocated thereby. As the levere 
is moved forward-that is, toward the guide 
Way B-the stud ascends the inclined bottom 
of one of the curved grooves, and the stude 
is pressed back into the head e' of the lever 
e until the stude comes opposite the deepest 
part of the succeeding groovee, at which time 
E. there enter said groove, as shown in 
1g. 2. 
As soon as the feed-plunger b has inserted 
a cake of soap in the die C adjacent thereto 
the levere is reciprocated from right to left, 
and the stude'impinges against the abutment 
e' of the groove e, in which it (the stud) is 
resting, and moves the disksee and the dies 
C forward in the direction of the arrows ll 
one-quarter of an entire revolution-viz., un 
til the empty soap-die next following the one 
filled is brought opposite to the feed-plunger 
b. This die being filled with a soap cake and 
the lever ereciprocated, the stude", acting 
against the abutmentofthe succeeding groove, 
carries the disk around another quarter of a 
circle and presents another empty die to the 
feed-plunger to be filled. In this manner the 
empty soap-dies are successively presented to 
be filled. 
When an empty soap-die is brought oppo 
site the feed-plunger b, it is firmly held in po 
sition by the following means: A stop e is 
fixed to an elastic spring-platee, fixed to the 
bed A or frame of the machine. On the pe 
riphery of disk e' are four studse', one for 
each soap-die-viz., one accompanying and 
adjacent to a soap-die. As the disksee are 
rotated, one of these studs elimpinges against 
the stop e' when the adjacent empty soap-die 
is directly opposite plunger band in position 
to be filled. The stop e' thus holds the disk 
secure from forward rotation, while the spring 
finger e, fitting under and against stope, 
prevents the return or back movement of the 
disks and soap-dies. Thus the dies C are 
firmly held in a fixed position while the feed 
plunger is filling a die with a cake of soap. 
The rode' is reciprocated by a crank move 
ment. As shown herein, the rear end of this 
rode' is pivoted to a crank pin or wriste", 
fixed in the side of camb" and operated by 
shaft D. The same crank-pin operates to re 
tract the stop et and thus disengages it from 
the stude, with which it has been in con 
tact. For this purpose the free end of this 
pin is provided with a friction-rollere, which 
as the crank-pin reciprocates comes into con 
tact with the bearing et of the stop e' and 
pushes the stop e' back out of contact with 
the stude of the disk el. This disengage 
ment of the stop e from stude takes place 
immediately before the reciprocation of the 
rode and lever eand causes the disks and 
soap-dies to be advanced one-quarter of a 
circle. While one soap-die is held in posi 
tion for being filled another with an un 
stamped cake of soap is under the soap-stamp, 
and while the first-named die is receiving its 
empty cake of soap the Soap in the later 
named die is being stamped. Thus the mech 
anism which holds the disks stationary for 
an empty die to be filled at the same time 
holds the die under the stamp stationary while 
the Soap 
in the latter is being filled. The 
soap-stamp C' is of the usual form, and is op 
erated by a shaft C, sliding through a guide C. 
The stamp is elevated by the following 
means, viz: A vertical square shaft C slides 
in a vertical guideway C. This shaft C is 
provided with a lower arm. C and an upper 
arm C:, whereby it is rigidly connected to the 
stamp-shaft C. The arm C passes through 
and slides in close-fitting slots, forming the 
guideway C. One of these slots is shown in 
Fig. 1 and the other is opposite thereto on the 
other side of the guideway. Thus the arm C. 
and the stamp C always travel in fixed ver 
tical planes, and the stamp always properly 
strikes the cake of soap in the die directly be 
neath it and entering the die stamps the soap 
cake. The shaft C and the stamp C are 
elevated by a cam C', provided with an abut 
ment C, which strikes against a shoulder C, 
rigidly fixed to the shaft C. The cam C' is 
fixed on shaft D. After the shoulder Chas 
mounted onto the abutment Cit remains on 
the higher peripheral surface of the abutment 
until it comes to an abrupt end C of said 
abutment, when it is free to fall and does rap 
idly descend until it impinges upon the lower 
peripheral surface of the cam. The shaft Cis 
3o 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
yo 
95 
IO 
O 
II5 
25 
435,442 
3 
O 
35 
O 
45 
55 
thus elevated during one revolution of the 
shaft D. The stamp C and shaft C are de 
pressed by gravity, and the rapidity of their 
descent and the force with which the stamp 
Strikes the soap are regulated by a greater 
or less number of weights, as C, placed upon 
the top of shaft C, and also when desired on 
the shaft C. After the stamp has struck the 
Soap and stamped the latter, it is immediately 
raised up from the soap to the position shown 
in Fig. 1, where it is above the top of the die. 
The latter is thereby free to be rotated with 
The means whereby the stamp 
the disksee'. 
is raised to the position shown in said Fig. 1 
consists of the spring C, fixed on stationary 
seat C of the frame and elastically press 
ing against the stud C, fixed to the shaft C. 
The further elevation of the stamp is effected 
by the cam C', as hereinbefore described. 
A device is present for ejecting the soap 
cake from the die after said cake has been 
stamped, and consists of a stationary curved 
ejecting-guide C. Each die has a false bot 
tom, which is capable of freely moving in the 
die toward the mouth of the latter or toward 
the bottom of the latter. This false bottom 
C'maybe termed an ejector. It is provided 
with a shank C, which passes through the 
real bottom of the die, and is provided with 
the pin C to prevent the shank from sliding 
So far through the die-bottom as that the 
false bottom shall leave the die. As the dies 
are rotated, the free end of the shank C of 
the die just leaving the soap-stamp impinges 
against the ejecting-guide C, and as the 
disks are rotated the ejecting-guide forces 
shank C outward and the ejector is thereby 
moved outward, through the die to the mouth 
of the latter, and the stamped cake of soap 
therein is ejected and received on a proper 
table or in a suitable receptacle. 
For the proper cleansing of the false bot 
tom of the die a swab T is provided, attached 
to the bar T. As the dies move forward, 
their false bottoms are successively cleaned 
against the swab. 
A bar S is pivoted at the sides of the ver 
tical guide b and is worked by a crank-arm 
S, in turn operated by a rodS, at one end 
pivoted to crank-arm Sand at the other end 
pivoted to a connection of the bar b. Thus 
the reciprocation of the bar b operates the 
rod S, in turn operating rock-arm or crank 
S*, which latter operates the stop S. (See 
Figs. 2 and 7.) The loose cakes of soap 
within the guide B are thereby held within 
the guide until an empty die has come oppo 
site the plunger b. As the plunger advances 
and presses the lowest cake in the guide for 
ward into the adjacent die, the stop Sis lifted 
out of the way and the cake is free to pass 
out of the guide into the die. As the plunger, 
after inserting a cake into the empty die, re 
tracts, the stop descends and keeps the re 
maing cakes of soap in the guide until the 
plunger advances and fills the next empty die. 
A receptacle, as V, is filled with a suitable 
liquid for the swabs, to tise in cleaning the 
false bottom of the die and the bottom of the 
stamp. This liquid is conveyed to swab Tby 
a conduit T and to swab S'by a conduit T. 
The flow of liquid through these conduits is 
regulated by faucets, as V8. The swab S' 
cleans the bottom of the stamp C. This SWab 
is fastened on the crank-Wrist of the Crank 
S, operated by the rod S', pivoted to the up 
rights A A' of the frame, and provided with 
the crank S.at its free end pivotally connected 
with the rod S, pivotally connected to the OS 
cillating end of bar. S9, at its lower end piv 
oted at S10 to the frame and operated by a bar 
S1 at one end fixed to it. The bar S has at 
its other end a roller-stud S', fitting into a 
cam-groove S18 in the side of the cam S', fixed 
on shaft D. After the stamp has been ele 
wated to the top of its vertical stroke, and 
before it is dropped, the swab Spasses over 
its face, washing it" and removing therefrom 
any particles of soap that may be adhering 
thereto. 
The mode in which my invention operates 
as an entirety is as follows: The cakes of Soap 
to be stamped are fed to the feed-guideway B. 
The lower one of these cakes of soap is in 
serted by the plunger b' into the adjacent 
soap-die C. A partial revolution of the crank 
shaft carries this die under the stamp, and a 
fresh empty die comes opposite the plunger. 
While the plunger is feeding another cake to 
the empty die the stamp is raised, Swabbed, 
and dropped, and stamps the cake in the die 
immediately beneath it. A second partial 
(quarter) revolution of shaft D ejects the 
stamped cake from its die and presents an 
empty die to be filled in front of the plunger 
and a filled die under the stamp. Thus the 
operations of filling a die with a soap cake and 
stamping the cake in the preceding die and 
ejecting the stamped cake from a die preced 
ing the last are continued until all of the Soap 
to be stamped has passed through the ma 
chine. 
... It will be observed that all of the before 
named mechanical movements are made by 
one shaft D. This one shaft may be rotated 
in any suitable manner. Band-pulleys (the 
one D' being tight and the other D'being 
loose) are here shown as one means for ro 
tating said shaft D. 
... While the various features of my inven 
tion are preferably employed together, one or 
more of the said features may be used with 
out the remainder, and in sofar as applicable 
one or more of the said features may be used 
in connection with soap-stamping machines 
of a description other than the one herein 
specifically described. 
What I claim as new and of my invention, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The soap-dies and the discal supports, in 
combination with the vertical guideway B 
and the horizontally-reciprocating feed-plun 
ger b, provided with table b, substantially as 
and for the purposes specified. 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
12. In a soap-stamping machine, the com- 65 
of the barb being pivotally connected to the 
crank-pin of said wrist, substantially as and 
for the purposes specified. 
11. The soap-dies and feed-plunger b, and 
rod b, laterally-reciprocating barb, stop-rod 
S', pivoted at the face of the guideway Band 
provided with a stop-crank S, and operating 
crank S, whose free end is pivoted to one end 
of rod S, the other end of the latter being 
connected to the barb, substantially as and 
for the purposes specified. 
bination of the reciprocating stamp C and 
rod S, journaled to the frame and provided 
with swab-crank S', carrying the crank S', 
connected to reciprocating rod S, which lat 
ter in turn is pivotally connected to the lever 
S', having its fulcrum pivoted at S' to the 
frame, and the rod S, operating lever S and 
operated by cam SS through the agency 
of roller-stud S, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
13. The soap-dies, circular disks, stude, 
stop e', abutments e, stude, levere, rode', 
crank-pine, pivoted to rode' and carrying 
roller-stude, engaging stop e, the crank 
pine, fixed in the camb', fixed on shaft D 
and having groove b", in which operates 
wrist b, carried by rod t and connected to 
reciprocating barb, fixed to bar b, attached 
to rod b, carrying plunger b, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
14. The soap-dies, circular disks, stude, 
stop e', abutments e', stude, levere, rode', 
crank-pin e, pivoted to rode' and carrying 
roller-stud e, engaging stop e, the crank 
pine, fixed in the cam b', fixed on shaft D 
and having groovebi, in which operates wrist 
b', carried by rod band connected to recip 
rocating bar b, fixed to bar b, attached to 
rod b, carrying plunger b, and shaft C, hav 
ing stud C, engaging cam C on shaft D, and 
cam S., fixed to said shaft D, and bar S, 
having roller-stud S' in said eam and con 
nected to lever S', in turned connected to rod 
S, pivoted to crank S of rod S, carrying 
crank S', and stamp-swab, and reciprocating 
soap-stamp C. substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
CHESTERFIELD MANNING. 
75 
95 
OC 
Attest: . 
A. L. HERERLINGER, 
G. A. W. PAVER. 
435,442 
55 
2. The soap-dies and the discal-supports 
carrying the studs et and the reciprocating 
stope' and reciprocating feed-plungerb', sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
3. The soap - dies and the discal supports 
carrying the studs e, and reciprocating stop 
e', and the spring-finger e, engaging a stop 
e' on the discal support, and the feed-plunger, 
Substantially as and for the purposes specified. 
4. The soap - dies and the discal supports 
carrying studs e, and reciprocating-stop e', 
mounted upon spring-plate et, and the feed 
plunger, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
5. The combination of the soap - dies and 
discal supports provided with inclined grooves 
e and abutments e', and the lever e, having 
stude, pressed forward by spring et and op 
erating in said grooves and against said abut 
ments, and crank ble, rod e1, connecting 
the said lever eand said crank, and friction 
rollere", on crank-pin e, engaging the stop 
substantially as and for the purposes speci 
eC. 
6. The soap - dies and the discal supports 
carrying studs e, and the stop e', and stamp 
and feed-plunger, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
7. The soap-dies mounted on supports re 
volving around the shaft E and the curved 
stationary ejecting-guide C, each of the dies 
having a false bottom C, provided with shank 
C', passing through the true bottom of the 
die and engaging said guide C, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
8. The soap-dies and the stamp C, and ver 
tical shaft C, and shaft C, and the guideways 
C A, and arms C C, the latter engaging in 
the slots C in the upright A', studC, fixed 
to shaft C, and cam C9, having abutment C10 
and abrupt end C, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
9. The soap-dies and the stamp C, and ver 
tical shaft C, and shaft C, and the guide 
Ways CA, and arms C C, the latter engag 
ing in the slots C7 in the upright A', stud C, 
fixed to shaft C, and cam C''', having abut 
ment C, and abrupt end C, and spring Ci', 
and stud C fixed to shaft C, substantially 
as and for the purposes specified. 
10. The soap-dies and feed-plunger b, stem 
b', barb, barb, guided, and wristb" on end of 
lever band engaging cam b0b, the free end 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435542.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 435,542, 
Z%7 Z. 
J. M. KING, 
SEPARATING GRAIN. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
 
  
 
also NS 
//77zege, 
Zzzoezzzz. 
77/2-22 
%ze //zzez 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. KING, OF ROCHESTER, MINNESOTA. 
SEPARATING GRAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 435,542, dated September 2, 1890. 
Application filed April 28, 1890. Serial No. 349,739, (No model.) 
55 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES M. KING, of 
Rochester, in the county of Olmsted and State 
of Minnesota, have invented certain Im 
provements in Separating Grain, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
a process of and apparatus for separating 
grain. 
Considerable difficulty has heretofore been 
experienced in separating oats and other 
Seeds from barley and wheat, owing to the 
fact that if the grain is passed over a screen 
Or separator the oats, being of greater length 
than the barley or wheat, do not pass through 
any Openings in the screen that are small 
enough to prevent the barley and wheat 
from passing through. As, however, oats are 
of less diameter than barley and wheat, if 
the grain can be brought so that the kernels 
Strike endwise against the screen the oats 
Will pass through openings that are small 
enough to prevent the passage of the barley 
or wheat. 
My invention consists in a new method or 
process of separation by means of which the 
grain is moved SO as to bring the oats and 
barley or wheat end foremost against the 
Screen while passing longitudinally through 
it, thereby permitting the oats and seeds that 
are of less diameter than the openings or 
perforations in the screen to pass through the 
Screen, While at the same time such seeds 
may be of such length that if brought length 
wise over the opening they would not pass 
through it. 
The invention consists, further, in the con 
Struction and combination hereinafter de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure. 1 is a rear 
elevation partly in section. Fig. 2 is a front 
sectional view. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sec 
tion on line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a perspec 
tive view of one of the screen-frames. Fig. 
5 is a detail section of one of the screens, 
illustrating the process of separating the 
grain. 
In carrying out my improved process I pass 
a quantity of grain through a rotating cylin 
drical sieve, and retain at all times in the 
sieve a body of grain and cause the kernels 
of grain next the screen to be carried up by 
the screen until they reach the top of the 
body of grain in the screen and then to slide 
down over the inclined surface of the grain 
and strike end foremost against the Surface 
of the screen. By this means the oats and 
other kernels of small diameter are brought 
endwise to the openings or perforations in 
the screen and pass through it. 
In the accompanying drawings, 2 represents 
the frame-work or casing of the machine, 
which may be of any suitable size and con 
struction. Arranged at one end of this cas 
ing is a hopper 3, which preferably extends 
the full width of the casing. A series of end 
wise-inclined shelves 5, projecting, preferably, 
about half-way through the hopper, are ar 
ranged on its opposite walls so as to alternate 
with each other. By this means the weight 
of the grain in the hopper is supported mainly 
by the shelves, so that the grain in each 
part of the hopper is not packed closely to 
gether. 
The hopper is preferably made in two parts, 
being divided vertically, the Sections being 
hinged or otherwise secured together, so that 
the hopper may be opened for convenience in 
manufacturing and for removing accuinula 
tions of dust, &c., as often as necessary. 
Mounted in bearings in the casing are the 
cylindrical screens 7, preferably arranged in 
series, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Each screen 
consists, greferably, of an open tube 9, form 
ing a journal upon one end of the screen and 
secured to a disk 11 and ring 12, a shaft 13, 
having a yoke 15 on its end Secured to the 
ring 12, and spiders 17, carrying the rings 19. 
The screen proper 21, formed of perforated 
metal or other suitable material, is secured 
upon the rings 12 and 19. The shaft 13 pro 
jects beyond the end of the screen, as shown 
in Fig. 3. The rear end of the frame or cas 
ing is preferably made with a double wall 23 
and 25, forming a trunk 27, through which 
the grain that passes through the end of the 
screen is discharged. The Screens are mount 
ed with the hollow journals 9 projecting into 
75 
So 
90 
CO 
 
435,542 
75 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
the hopper, and with their rear ends extend 
ing through the inner wall 23, and with the 
shafts mounted in bearings, 29 in the wall 25. 
Arranged upon the shafts 29, outside of the 
wall 25, are the gear-wheels 31. 
I have shown two series of four screens each; 
but it will be understood that any number of 
series may be used and that there may be any 
number of screens in each series. 
O A shaft 33 is arranged between the central 
screens and is provided with a gear-wheel 35, 
intermeshing with the gear-wheels upon the 
adjacent screens. The shafts 33 are each pro 
vided with sprocket-wheels connected by a 
chain 37, and a belt-pulley 39 is preferably 
arranged upon one of these shafts, by means 
of which power may be applied to drive the 
machine. 
An inclined gather board or plate 41 is ar 
ranged below each series of screens, and open 
spaces are left between the lower ends of 
these boards, so that all of the screenings are 
discharged through the center of the ma 
chime. 
It will be seen that the hollow journals 9 
extend into the hopper, and each journal is 
preferably provided at its end with a series of 
projections, preferably of serrated form, and 
these projections extending into the grain 
in the hopper stir it up and agitate it, so as 
insure the proper feeding of the grain into 
the ends of the tubular screens. 
The screens 7, as before stated, are prefer 
ably in the form of tubes, and in construct 
ing machines I prefer to make them of from 
tWO to six inches in diameter, and each screen 
is also provided at its rear or discharging end 
with an inwardly-projecting flange which 
leaves an open center, so that the grain dis 
charged from the screen must pass over the 
top of this flange. 
This will insure the slow 
passage of the grain through the tubular 
screen, and will cause a considerable body of 
grain to be retained at all times in the tubu 
lar screen. The screens are preferably slightly 
inclined, the feed-openings are sufficiently 
large and the outlets sufficiently small to re 
tain in the screen while in operation a depth 
of grain preferably equal to from one-sixth to 
one-half the diameter of the screen. By this 
process the grain within the tubular screen, 
as said tubes are rotated, is carried up slightly 
by the surface of the screen, and is then per 
lmitted to slide down over the inclined sur 
face of the body of the grain in the screen 
until it strikes the screen again. This will 
cause the oats and the kernels of grain to 
strike the surface of the screen endwise, and 
the oats being of less diameter than the 
Openings in the surface of the screen will 
pass through them, while the wheat or barley 
will be retained. By this process oats may 
be readily separated from barley or from 
wheat. 
Arranged upon the inside of the hopper 
and surrounding each tubular journal is a 
layer of cloth 8 or other suitable material for 
preventing dust, fine seeds, or other sub 
stances from working in around the journal. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The process of separating oats from bar 
ley or wheat, which consists in passing the 
grain through tubular screens in which it is 
held to a considerable depth, rotating said 
screens, and thereby causing the grain next 
to the inner surface of the screen to be car 
ried up to the top of the body of grain in the 
screen and then to slide down over the in 
clined surface of the body of grain in the 
screen, and to be brought endwise against 
the surface of the screen, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination, with a suitable hopper provided 
with a series of inclined shelves, of a series 
of rotating tubular screens provided with hol 
low journals projecting into said hopper be 
tween said shelves. 
3. The combination, with the hopper hav 
ing the inclined shelves 5 arranged upon its 
opposite walls and alternating with each other, 
of the tubular screens having the hollow jour 
nals projecting into the said hopper. 
4. The combination, with the hopper, of the 
tubular screens having the hollow journals 
projecting into said hopper and provided with 
serrated ends, and with a packing around 
said journals, and with a circular flange at 
its outlet end, whereby the grain is retained 
in the screen to the desired depth. 
5. The combination, with the hopper, of the 
tubular screens provided with the hollow 
journals projecting into said hopper, and 
having serrated ends, for the purpose speci 
fied. 
6. The combination, with the divided hop 
per adapted to be opened, of the tubular 
Screens provided with the hollow journals ex 
tending into said hopper. 
7. The combination, with the casing pro 
vided with the hopper 3 and the trunk 27, of 
the tubular screens provided with shafts 13, 
the yoke 15, secured to said shaft, the ring 
12 upon said yoke, the disk 11, connected to 
said ring, and with the hollow journals 9, se 
cured to said disk and arranged with said 
journals projecting into said hopper and 
with the discharge ends of the screens ex 
tending into said trunk, substantially as de 
scribed. 
8. The combination, with the casing 2, of 
the hopper extending across the end of the 
casing and with the discharge-trunk 27 at 
the other end of the casing, of the series of 
tubular screens provided with the hollow 
journals projecting into said hopper, and 
with the opposite ends of the screens arranged 
to discharge into said trunk, substantially as 
described. 
9. The combination, with the casing 2, pro 
95 
IOC) 
IOS 
I ICd 
I 25 
65 
 
435,542 
3 
vided with the oppositely-inclined gather- 
boards 41, arranged with open spaces be-, my hand this 11th day of April, 1890. 
tween them, of the tubular screens arranged 
above each of said gather-boards and pro- 
vided with the hollow journals, and the feed- 
hopper common to all of said screens, sub- 
stantially as described. 
In presence of 
A. C. PAUL, 
A. M. GASKILL. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
JAMES M. KING. 
-- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435642.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 435,642, 
   
 
 
M. W. DEWEY. 
ELECTRIC RAILWAY CAR. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
SISN 
S.SEN 
Asea 2. 
\SY 
WITNESSES: 
23. 
 
-a, ATTORNEYS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARK W. DEWEY, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE DEWEY 
CORPORATION, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRIC-RALWAY CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 435,642, dated September 2, 1890. 
Application filed March 26, 1890. Serial No. 345,427. (No model.) 
To all whom it noty concern. 
Be it known that I, MARK W. DEWEY, of 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
5 useful Improvements in Electric - Railway 
Cars, (Case 54) of which the following, taken 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings, is a full, clear, and exact description. 
Myinvention relates toelectric-railway cars, 
Io with special reference to signaling apparatus 
therefor, similar to that shown and described 
in my prior application filed April 8, 1889, 
Serial No. 306,323, and is for the same pur 
poses therein set forth. 
15 The object of my present invention is to pro 
vide a normally-closed signal-circuit for elec 
tric-railway cars, to place the current-con 
trollers or circuit makers and breakers in said 
signal-circuit in series, to connect the circuit 
2 o makers and breakers in Series with the motor 
and at the same time maintain a current of 
weak and uniform electro-motive force for 
the signal devices, independent of the varied 
amount of current flowing through the motor, 
25 and, further, to provide means for preventing 
the operation of each of the audible signal de 
vices or bells without cutting out or short 
circuiting said devices; and the object of 
my invention, also, is to provide for the opera 
3o tion electrically of the alarm-registers usually 
employed upon electric street-cars. 
To this end my invention consists, collect 
ively, in providing a railway with a Working 
conductor arranged along the railway, a trav 
35 eling vehicle, an electric motor to propel Said 
vehicle, a current-collector extending from the 
vehicle to the conductor, an electric connec 
tion between said motor and collector, two 
electric signal devices, and a plurality of cir 
4o cuit makers and breakers in Series in said 
electric connection and distributed through 
the interior of the vehicle, a shunt including 
a resistance around said signal devices, means 
for automatically varying said resistance to 
45 maintain a uniform flow of current through 
the signal devices independent of the current 
flowing through the motor, and suitable means 
for preventing the operation of each of said 
signal devices, when desired, without short 
5o circuiting the same, 
 
Referring to the drawings, Figurel is a sec 
tional elevation of an electric-railway car sup 
plied with current from a suspended working 
conductor and the track, and equipped with 
my improved invention. Fig. 2 is a diagram 55 
showing the arrangement of the circuits on 
the car. Fig. 3 is a modification of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a form of signal-bell adapted to ring 
when the circuit is broken and is provided 
with a device to prevent its operation when 6o 
desired, even when the circuit is broken. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional view of the bell. Fig. 6 
is a sectional view of a circuit maker and 
breaker or push-button which maintains the 
circuit normally closed, and Fig. 7 is an au- 65 
tomatic current-controller for maintaining a 
weak uniform current or electro-motive force 
for the signal- circuit, as hereinbefore re 
ferred to. 
Referring specifically to the drawings, A 7o 
represents the car or vehicle. 
B is the suspended working-conductor ar 
ranged along the railway or path of the 
vehicle. 
75 
B' is the track or return conductor. 
C is the motor-circuit or the electrical con 
nection leading from the propelling-motor D 
to the current-collector c, which latter extends 
from the vehicle to the suspended working 
conductor and to the current-collector c', ex- 8o 
tending from the vehicle to the track; and E 
denotes the source of electricity connected to 
the working-conductors. 
C* is the ordinary current-controlling de 
vices for the motor D when such devices are 85 
employed for regulating its movement, 
G. and G' are the electric signal devices or 
bells located at each end of the car in the 
electrical connection C, and g g g, &c., are the 
current-controllers or circuit makers and go 
breakers in the same circuit or connection 
and distributed through the interior and ex 
terior of the car. 
F is a shunt containing a resistance around 
the signal devices and circuit-breakers. It 95 
will be apparent that by connecting the sig 
naling devices and controllers in circuit in 
this manner they are placed in a closed cir 
cuit and have all its advantages without a 
great waste of current and the employment of Ioo 
2 
435,642 
5 
O 
I5 
2O 
25 
3o 
as 
4o 
45 
5o 
55 
. 
a great and expensive resistance, as would be 
necessary if said devices were connected in 
parallel with the motor. 
The arrangement of the circuits and con 
nections on the car will be better understood 
by reference to Fig. 2. In this figure the mo 
tor D is represented as being shunt-wound 
that is, the field-magnet is in parallel with 
the armature-circuit-but it will be obvious, 
of course, that thisis immaterial to my inven 
tion, as said motor may be wound in any suit 
able manner. 
The current-controlling devices for the mo 
tor are shown in Fig.2 as the current-reverser 
C and an adjustable resistance C' in the 
field-circuit. 
When the signaling devices are in series 
with the motor, the circuit through said mo 
tor should not be entirely broken at any 
time, as when the car is brought to a stop, as 
that would render the signal devices inopera 
tive. The motor may be run continuously, if 
desired, and the car brought to a stop by em 
ploying a suitable and well-known clutch 
mechanism for tying and releasing the gear 
wheel to and from the axle. (Not necessary to 
be herein illustrated.) 
Instead of placing a dead resistance in the 
shunt F, a couple of cells of a secondary bat 
tery may be employed instead, in which case 
the circuit to the motor may be broken for a 
time, if desired, as the battery will furnish 
at such time the current necessary for the 
signal-bells. 
R and R' in Fig. 2 represent fare-regis 
ters, and r r ir, &c., the circuit makers and 
breakers or current-controllers for the same, 
both being included in a closed circuit and 
in parallel with the other signaling devices. 
The dotted line at e indicates where a con 
nection can be placed, if it is desired to place 
the signaling devices in parallel with the 
motor. 
When it is desired to prevent one or the 
other of the registers or bells from operating 
while the other is operated, they may be short 
circuited, as shown and described in my prior 
application, above referred to, but I prefer to 
do this by locking the armature C of said sig 
nal devices or bells by means of a key or but 
ton b turning on a pin d. 
Fig. 4 shows a view of a bell when the 
armature is attracted by its magnet and is in 
an unlocked condition, and Fig. 5 shows a 
view of the bell when the armature is in a 
locked condition and inoperative. 
The modification shown in Fig. 3 simply 
illustrates the bells G and G' in a derived 
circuit of the electric connection c. The re 
sistance of the bell-magnets prevents any 
appreciable amount of current from flowing 
through the derived circuit; hence the said 
bells, which are vibrating bells, are not op 
erated, the current for the motor flowing 
through the main motor-connection contain 
ing the circuit-breakers g g g, &c., and through 
the shunt F, containing a suitable resistance. 
When, however, one of the circuit-breakers 
is operated to break the circuit C, sufficient 
current flows through the derived circuit, in 
cluding the signal-bells, to operate the one 
that is not locked. G is supposed to be un 
locked, and of the same construction as G', 
which is shown complete and in a locked con 
dition. 
Fig. 6 is a full-sized push-button or circuit 
breaker g, that keeps the circuit normally 
closed between the contact-points and i' by 
a spring in, and may be opened or operated 
to break the circuit by a slight pressure of 
the finger on the button h to separate said 
contacts, thereby controlling the electric cur 
rent to operate the bell. One of said push 
buttons may be located on the exterior at 
each end of the car, and others between the 
windows, or equal distances apart and on 
each side of the interior of the car. 
In order to maintain a weak and uniform 
current for the signal devices when the cur 
rent through the motor is varied, I employ 
an automatic current-controller in the shunt 
F, as shown in Fig. 7. The action of this 
controller is to decrease the current in the 
shunt F when the current flowing to the mo 
tor D is weak, compelling it to flow through 
the signal devices g g g, &c., and to increase 
said current in the shunt when the current 
flowing to the motor is strong, thereby re 
ducing the strength of current flowing through 
the signal devices. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an electric railway, a working-con 
ductor arranged along the railway, a travel 
ing vehicle, an electric motor to propel said 
vehicle, a current-collector extending from 
the vehicle to the conductor, an electric con 
nection between said motor and collector, one 
or more signal-bells, and a plurality of cir 
cuit makers and breakers in said electric con 
nection, and a shunt including a resistance 
around said signal bell or bells and circuit 
makers and breakers, 
2. In an electric railway, a working-con 
ductor arranged along the railway, a travel 
ing vehicle, an electric motor to propel said 
Vehicle, a current-collector extending from 
the vehicle to the conductor, an electric con 
nection between said motor and collector, one 
or more signal-bells, and a plurality of cir 
cuit makers and breakers in said electric con 
nection, a shunt including a resistance around 
Said signal bell or bells and circuit makers 
and breakers, and means for automatically 
varying Said resistance to maintain a uniform 
flow of current through the signal devices in 
dependent of the flow of current through the 
motor. 
3. The combination of a suspended work 
ing-conductor, an electrically-propelled ve 
hicle, a current-collector extending from the 
vehicle to the suspended conductor, an electric 
motor, an electric audible signal device, a 
. 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
13o 
 
435,642 
3 
plurality of current-controllers distributed 
through the interior of the vehicle, and a 
circuit including said motor signal device and 
controllers and receiving current from the 
current-collector. 
4. The combination of a suspended work 
ing-conductor, an electrically-propelled ve 
hicle, a current-collector extending from the 
vehicle to the suspended conductor, an elec 
tric motor, an electric signal device, a plurality 
of current-controllers distributed through the 
interior of the vehicle, and a circuit includ 
ing said motor signal device and controller 
and receiving current from the current-col 
lector. 
5. The combination of a suspended work 
ing-conductor, an electrically-propelled ve 
hicle, a current-collector extending from the 
vehicle to the suspended conductor, an elec 
tric connection between the propelling-motor 
and the current-collector, an electric audible 
signal device, a plurality of current-control 
lers distributed through the interior of the 
vehicle, and a normally-closed circuit includ 
ing said signal device and controllers and re 
ceiving current from the current-collector. 
6. In an electric railway, a working-con 
ductor arranged along the railway, a travel 
ing vehicle, an electric motor to propel said 
vehicle, an electric connection between said 
motor and working-conductor, an electric sig 
nal device on the vehicle, and a plurality of cur 
rent-controlling devices distributed through 
the interior of the vehicle and included in 
circuit in series with the motor. 
7. In an electric railway, a working - con 
ductor arranged along the railway, a travel 
ing vehicle, an electric motor to propel said 
vehicle, an electric connection between said 
motor and working-conductor, an electric bell 
on the vehicle, and a plurality of circuit 
breakers distributed through the interior of 
the vehicle and included in circuit in series 
with the motor. 
8. In an electric railway, a working - con 
ductor arranged along the railway, a travel 
ing vehicle, an electric motor to propel Said 
vehicle, an electric connection between said 
motor and working-conductor, an electric bell 
on the vehicle, and a plurality of circuit 
breakers distributed at intervals through the 
interior of the vehicle and included in circuit 
in series with the motor. 
9. In an electric railway, a working - con 
65 
ductor arranged along the railway, a travel-55 
ing vehicle, an electric motor to propel said 
vehicle, a current-collector extending from 
the vehicle to the conductor, an electric con 
nection between said motor and collector, one 
or more signal-bells, and a plurality of cir- 6o 
cuit makers and breakers in said electric con 
nection distributed through the interior of 
the vehicle, and a shunt including a resist 
ance around said signal bell or bells and cir 
cuit makers and breakers. 
10. In an electric railway, a working-con 
ductor arranged along the railway, a travel 
eling vehicle, an electric motor to propel said 
vehicle, a current-collector extending from 
the vehicle to the conductor, an electric con- to 
nection between said motor and collector, two 
electric signal devices, and a plurality of cir 
cuit makers and breakers in said electric con 
nection, a shunt including a resistance around 
said signal devices, and means for preventing 75 
the operation of each of said signal devices 
without short-circuiting the same. 
11. The combination of a suspended con 
ductor, an electrically-propelled vehicle, a 
movable current-collector extending from the 8o 
vehicle to the suspended conductor, two elec 
tric signal-bells, and a plurality of circuit 
makers and breakers distributed through the 
interior of the vehicle, a circuit connected 
with said signal-bells and makers and break- 85 
ers and receiving current from the current 
collector, and means for preventing the oper 
ation of each of said signal-bells without 
short-circuiting the same. 
ductor extending along the path of the ve 
hicle, an electrically-propelled vehicle, a cur 
rent-collector on the vehicle for collecting 
current-from the working-conductor, an elec 
tric motor to propel the vehicle, an electric 95 
signal device, a plurality of current-control 
lers distributed at intervals through the in 
terior of the vehicle, and electrical connec 
tions on the vehicle connecting the said mo 
tor signal device, and controllers with the Ioo 
said collector. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name this 24th day of March, 1890. 
12. The combination of a line working-con- 9o 
MARK W. DEWEY. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. DUELL, 
J. J. LAASS. 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435742.txt	(No Model,) 
W. R. FOX. 
LOW WATER ALARM. 
2. Sheets-Sheet, i. 
No. 435,742. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. R. FOX. 
LOW WATER ALARM. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 435,742, 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
l 
R" ... 
? 
ON 
N 
3. 
N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. FOX, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
LOW-WATER AARM. 
SPRCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 435,742, dated September 2, 1890. 
Application filed Februaryll 1890, Serial No, 340,026 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM R. Fox, of 
Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent and State 
of Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Low-Water Alarms; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
The invention which is the subject of the 
foregoing petition relates to automatic high 
and low Water alarms of that class in which 
the alarm is caused by the expansion of a 
tube into which the steam is admitted by the 
fall of the Water in the boiler below a certain 
line. Such a low-water alarm is shown in Let 
ters Patent of the United States granted to 
Hardwick on the 24th day of December, A.D. 
1889, and numbered 418,020. The alarm de 
scribed in the said patent is operative as ex 
plained therein; but my said invention is de 
signed to secure certain advantages not se 
cured by the construction in the said patent 
and not to the best attainable extent. I re 
tain the tube extending down into the boiler 
to the line of low water; but in the patent 
the expansion of the tube acts directly upon 
a bell-crank lever, which moves a sliding 
valve to open the passage for the steam to the 
Whistle. In this construction a considerable 
amount of force is required, as the valve is 
under pressure of steam, which must be over 
come by the pressure arising from the expan 
sion of the tube. Further, in the patented 
alarm Some trouble is experienced in secur 
ing the right adjustment between the lever 
which connects the expansible tube with the 
valve, so that when the water should fall be 
low the end of the pipe and the steam be ad 
mitted therein the whistle should sound suf 
ficiently to be heard, while avoiding so sensi 
tive an adjustment that the whistle would 
not be sounded when from any cause other 
than the admission of steam the tube should 
become hotter than usual. In respect to this 
point, my invention, in which the valve is di 
rectly operated by an intermediate motor 
Such as a weight, and not directly-the ex 
pansible tube requires much less expansion 
and renders the alarm operative with a full 
opening of the whistle-valve at the lowest 
steam-pressure, the lowest ordinary pressure 
giving sufficient expansion to release the 
Weight. 
Another defect in the patented alarm I have 
sought to remedy-namely, that by reason of 
the slow cooling of the pipe the whistle would 
continue to sound from fifteen to forty-five 
minutes after the water in the boiler had been 
restored to its high level, and this could not 
be conveniently prevented. 
Further, my invention is designed, by real 
Son of a straight expansion-pipe and remov 
able cap operated by the expansion, to allow 
the pipe to be readily cleaned, as that above 
referred to cannot be. 
My said invention therefore consists, es 
sentially, in combining with an expansible 
tube and a whistle-valve an intermediate 
motor-such as a weight-arranged to act on 
said valve or the force of the steam-pressure, 
and a lever operated by the said expansible 
tube, arranged to set the intermediate motor 
in operation. 
My invention also includes the special de 
tails of construction which I have found best 
in carrying my invention into effect. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate my invention, Figure 1 represents the 
alarm with a weight as the intermediate mo 
tor held out of operation, the figure being in 
side elevation, but showing part of the boiler 
in section. Figs. 2 and 3 show modifications. 
In the drawings, A represents a part of the 
boiler. In the top is screwed a casting B, 
which is formed with one straight stem b and 
a laterally-bent stem c. The straight stem 
is tubular and opens directly through the 
casting. The upper end receives the ex 
pansible tube D, and in the lower end is fixed 
the tube cl, which forms a straight continua 
tion of the expansible tube and extends to 
the low-water limit. The lateral stem. C re 
ceives the tube E, which supports the whistle 
F and conducts steam thereto, the flow of 
steam being controlled by a valve held nor 
mally closed by a spring on the stem f of the 
valve. The expansible tube D is made pref 
erably of copper, and may be conveniently 
used about twenty-four inches in length. 
The lower end communicates with the inte 
rior of the boiler on the line mentioned, and 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
95 
Co 
e 
435,742 
the upper end is closed by the movable plug. 
This upper end is held loosely in the end of 
an arm G, fixed upon the Steam-tube E, so 
that the copper pipe in expanding may move 
freely in the arm. The said arm has a verti 
cal slot, in which is pivoted at 1 a, bell-crank 
lever M, the upper short arm of which carries 
an adjusting-screw and extends Over the up 
per end of the expansible tube, the screw 
bearing on said end. The lower arm of said 
lever is longer and projects into range with a 
lever N, pivoted on the steam-pipe E. The 
lever is formed on a ring encircling the pipe 
E and has pivoting trunnions 3. The inner 
extension o of this lever has a notch 4, fitted 
to receive the edge of the lower end of the 
bell-crank lever, and When the levers are in 
contact the outer end p of the lever N is held 
up and sustains a Weight. This weight is 
connected to the lever Q by a cord or chain 
q, the said lever being pivoted on the bracket 
above the valve-stem. The lever Q has a 
stud which bears on the end of said stem, 
and when the lever is pressed down, as by 
the weight P, it presses on the stem and op 
erates the valve, giving full passage of the 
steam to the whistle. The weight is hung 
upon the end p of the lever N, and in this 
position is held by the bell-crank lever, as 
aforesaid. When the waterfalls in the boiler, 
thereby the steam is admitted to the pipe, ex 
panding it and raising the upper arm of the 
bell-crank lever. A very slight movement 
and force are required for this, and thereby 
the lower arm of the lever is removed from 
the lever N, permitting the weight to drop 
from the other end p, with the result stated 
above. The parts are so arranged that the 
inner end of the lever N falls by gravity after 
the release of the Weight, and the long arm 
of the bell-crank lever swings down by grav 
ity Over said inner end, and to restore the 
parts to normal position it is only necessary 
to hang the weight again on the arm p. As 
the valve is operated solely by the interme 
diate motor, the expansible tube has no work 
to perform, excepting that it releases the 
motor, which requires but very slight move 
ment. The relation of the bell-crank ever 
to the tube D may therefore be easily ad 
justed and with perfect accuracy to secure 
release only when the tube is filled with the 
Stealm, and the Weight or other intermediate 
motor may be made of any required power 
sufficient to move the valve under any cir 
Cumstances. 
To restore the valve and stop the whistle, 
it is necessary only to take the force of weight 
Or other intermediate motor off from the lever 
Which operates the stem of the valve, or to 
push the valve to its seat and secure it. This 
may be done by means of a cord t, attached 
to the Weight and passing over a pulley at 
down to convenient position within reach of 
the attendant. The weight may at any time 
be restored to its place as soon as the tube D 
is cooled, The expansible tube is liable to 
become clogged by scum formed from the sur 
face of the water in the boiler, and thus the 
alarm rendered inoperative. To remedy this 
in my improved construction, it is necessary 
only to remove the bell-crank lever by taking 
out the removable gib on which it is pivoted 
and remove the plug from the top of the tube. 
Then a swab may be inserted, and as the tube 
D is straight this swab may be pushed through 
to the lower end of the tube. . 
While I have shown the weight as the 
simplest and a perfectly effective form of 
intermediate motor, it will be readily under 
StOOd that a spring may be substituted there 
for, and this spring may operate to open the 
valve, while the valve is held normally closed 
by the intermediate lever, or the pressure of 
the Steam may be utilized as an intermediate 
motOr. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown a form in which the 
Steam acts as the intermediate motor. The 
Valve at V is a puppet-valve, and is seated 
on the perforated diaphragm and opens by 
Steam-pressure. Its stem bears on the lever 
P', which is held with the valve sealed by 
means of the upturned end of the lever N, 
and when the lever N is released, as above 
described, the valve opens by the force of the 
Steam acting as the intermediate motor, with 
the effect explained. 
To cause the bell-crank lever to engage with 
the inner end of the lever N, it may have a 
Weight K, and to secure the movement of the 
lever N, I add a cord, by which it may be 
pulled down to engage with the other lever. 
I add also in this modification an arm 7 to the 
lever P with a cord 9, by means of which the 
Valve may be closed before the expansible 
tube has cooled sufficiently to reset the alarm. 
The position of the parts when properly set 
is shown in full lines, the dotted lines repre 
sing the position when the device is oper 
ated. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown a modification, in 
Which I have added to the device heretofore 
described a high-water alarm. An expansi 
ble tube B extends loosely through the 
bracket and down into the boiler to the high 
Water line. It has an arm b' extending over 
an opposite arm 5 of the bell-cranklever pro 
Vided With an adjusting-screw, which bears 
On the arm. When the high-water rises in 
the tube B', it cools and contracts it, drawing 
down the opposite extension 5, releasing also 
the Valve-operating mechanism. 
The lever is pivoted at ac to an ear on a 
sleeve which is held on the pipe by means of 
a Screw. The lever M has a bend, by means 
of which it fits around the sleeve loosely 
enough to allow it to turn on its pivot and 
drop when the lever M is forced out by the 
eXpansion, as aforesaid, and when the ever 
drops it ceases to act as a stop, as before ex 
plained. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with an expansible tube 
extending into the boiler and with a pipe 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
o 
75 
95 
OO 
I D5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
435,742 
3 
3. In combination with the whistle and 
valve, an expansible tube D, a high-water 
tube B', a pivoted lever arranged to be oper 
ated by the expansion of the tube D and the 
contraction of the tube B', and a motor ar 
ranged to be set in action by the lever to op 
erate the whistle, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM R. FOX. 
Witnesses: 
THEO. H. MCCALLA, 
E. HOWARD BURKE. 
having a whistle and whistle-valve, a lever 
operated by the expansion of the tube, and 
an intermediate motor arranged to be set in 
action by the lever to operate the whistle 
valve, substantially as described. 
2. A high-water alarm consisting of the 
tube of expansible material extending through 
the boiler to the high-water line and held 
therein with its upper end loosely held in the 
bracket, a lever arranged to be drawn down 
by the said tube, and an intermediate motor 
normally in engagement with said lever and 
being also arranged to operate the whistle 
valve, substantially as described. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435842.txt	(No Model.) 
C, LAMM. 
MANUFACTURING EXPLOSIWE CHARGES, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 435,842, 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
A22. A 
 
 
Sassasas SaaS 
S. 
aSSSSSSSSSSSS 
- 
 
 
 
% 
M 
E . 
 
- - - - - a 2 
Eiiai Ni 3. 
&I26H2H2 
NS 
5. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
SS:S-S-S- 
Q9929. 
OOOO. 
OOC2O, (s 
SOOOO. 
S.---- (S-I-S-...--& I.S. 
- - - - - - - 
- - - - - - 
- - - - 
- 
W 
- - 
- 
  
  
 
 
 
 
(No Model.). 
C. LAMM, . 
MANUFACTURING EXPLOSIWE CHARGES, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 435,842. 
Patented Sept. 2, 1890. 
ss3 (, 
assasasasasas % % 
NA. 
(N, 
C 
A 
M. A 
A M 
g % 
WA, 
- W 
Zy;4. 
N 
SE---|NS 
% 
W 
4 
2 
SSSSSSSSSSSSS 
% 
w 
% 
WA 
I 
2 
2% AK Alix's 
ZN. 
ZNIR 
IHEN 
  
 
?L 
 
 
122ere, 
42. 
/22/2227 
arz Zazeze, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL LAMM, OF STOCKHOLM, SWEDEN. 
MANUFACTURING EXPLOSIVECHARGES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 435,842, dated September 2, 1890. 
Application filed January 23, 1889. Serial No. 297,293, (No model.) Patented in Sweden June 22, 1888, No. 1,591 in Belgium. 
July 12, 1888, No, 82,539; in England August 15, 1888, No. ll,750; in France December 15, 1888, No, 194,785 in Italy 
JDecember 18, 1888, No. 24,611/738; in Luxemburg December 18, 1888, No. 1066; in Spain December 19, 1888, No. 9,064 
in Switzerland January 7, 1889, No. 271 in Germany January 8, 1889; No. 48,282; in Norway. May 28, 1889, No. 1,388, and 
in Austria-Hungary July 9, 1889, No. 51,580 and No. 30,169, 
: 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARI, LAMM, manager 
of the Bellite Explosive Works, a subject of 
the King of Sweden, and a resident of Stock 
holm, Sweden, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in the Manufacture of Explo 
sive Cartridges, (for which I have received 
patents in the following countries: Great 
Britain, No. 1 1,750, dated August 15, 1888; 
Sweden, No. 1,591, dated June 22, 1888; Bel 
gium, No. 82,539, dated July 12, 1888; France, 
No. 194,785, dated December 15, 1888; Italy, 
No. 24,611 / 738, dated December 18, 1888; 
Spain, No. 9,064, dated December 19, 1888; 
Luxemburg, No. 1,066, dated December 18 
18SS; Switzerland, No. 271, dated January 7, 
1889; Germany, No. 48,282, dated January S, 
1889; Austria-Hungary, No. 51,580 and No. 
30,169, dated July 9, 1889, and Norway, No. 
1,388, dated May 28, 1889,) of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to the manufacture of 
explosive charges or cartridges. 
In carrying my said invention into practice 
I provide suitably-prepared pulverized par 
tially-fusible explosive material or materials 
and place the said material or materials in 
suitable tubes, cells, or molds. The molds 
are then subjected to the action of heat, thus 
causing the fusible part of the mass of explo 
sive material or materials contained in the 
said molds to melt and envelop the infusible 
particles of the same. The explosive mate 
rial or materials contained in the said molds 
are then cooled, and the charges, cartridges, 
or blocks of explosive material thus formed 
are ejected from the latter. 
In the accompanying drawings I have 
shown how my said invention can be conven 
iently and advantageously carried into prac 
tice. 
Figure 1 is a plan, and Fig. 2 is a vertical 
longitudinal section on the line ac ac, Fig. 1, 
showing one form of my said invention. Fig. 
3 is a plan. Fig. 4 is a vertical longitudinal 
section on the line y J, Fig. 3, the movable 
bottom or plate of the box or case being re 
25 
35 
45 
moved; and Fig. 5 is a front elevation, partly 
in section, showing a modification hereinafter 
described. 
Like letters indicate corresponding parts 
throughout the drawings. 
A is the box, case, or frame of the appara 
tus. The box, case, or frame A is provided 
with any suitable number of tubes, cells or 
molds B. The tubes, cells, or molds B pass 
through the bottom and top covers of the box 
or case A, so as to form tight joints therein, 
and are open at both ends and slightly taper 
or larger at the upper ends than at the lower. 
CD are pipes for the admission and escape 
of steam, hot air, Water, or the like for heat 
'ing the apparatus to and from a chamber or 
space A", provided in the box or case Around 
the tubes, cells, or molds B. Pistons or plun 
gers E, carried upon a plate or frame E, are 
arranged to fit easily in the tubes, cells, or 
molds B and to close the lower extremities of 
the said tubes, cells, or molds B when the ex 
plosive material or materials are inserted into 
the latter. E" are supports for maintaining 
the said pistons or plungers E in position in 
the lower extremities of the molds B when 
the latter are being filled with explosive 
material or materials and subjected to the 
action of heat, or cold. The upper extremi 
ties of the molds B are closed by means 
of loose covers F, provided with projections 
or pins F for forming the hole or holes in 
the explosive material or materials for the 
cap or caps. Any desired number of such 
holes can be formed in the explosive mate 
rial by providing a corresponding number of 
the covers F, each provided with one projec 
tion or pin F. The said covers Fareplaced 
one above the other, and the projections or 
pins upon the outer cover or covers project 
through holes provided in the inner cover or 
covers. By means of this arrangement, when 
the molding of the explosive material or ma 
terials forming the charge or cartridge is fin 
ished, the cover or covers F can be removed 
without damaging the said charge or car 
tridge, notwithstanding that the said cover 
or covers require to be rotated for this pur. 
5.o 
55 
75 
85 
2 
435, 842 
O 
23 
25 
pose. When the explosive material O mal 
terials contained in the molds IB have been 
partially melted by the action of the steam, 
hot air, water, or the like admitted to the 
chamber or space A, cold water is admitted 
to the said chamber or space, and the said 
explosive material or materials are solidified 
or partially solidified. The pistons or plun 
gers E are then pushed into the molds IB by 
removing the supports E, which normally 
retain the said pistons or plungers in the 
lower extreinities of tile said molds. The 
charges or cartridges are then pushed out of 
or ejected from the molds by means of the 
said pistons or plunger's E. 
The operation of the apparatus is as fol 
lows-that is to say: The molds B are filled 
with prepared pulverized and partially-fusible 
explosive matelial or materials, and the loose 
covers F al'e placed in position, so that the 
projections or pins F will enter the said ex 
plosive material Ol' materials and form the 
hole or holes for the cap or caps. Steam, hot 
air, water, or the like is then admitted to the 
chamber or space A' in the box o' case A 
round the molds 3 and allowed to circulate 
about the said molds, thereby heating the lat 
ter and causing the fusible part of the mass 
of explosive material or materials contained 
in them to melt and envelop the infusible 
particles of the same. The supply of steam 
is then cut off and cold water is admitted to 
the said space A'. This causes the Said ex 
plosive materials in the said molds B to set 
or solidify, so that the contents of each mold 
forms a solid block, which can be forced out 
by the action of the plungers or pistons, as 
45 
55 
hereinbefore described. When the loose 
cover F is raised above the mold B, it is turned 
Or rotated before removal in order to loosen 
or free the pin or projection F in the explo 
sive material. When two or more covers F 
are employed, the said covers are each rotated 
as soon as they are clear of the mold, and 
thus removed one by One without damaging 
the charge or cartridge. 
Figs. 3 to 5 show a modification of my said 
invention wherein the molds B are formed of 
arious shapes. It is evident, moreovel, that 
the cells or molds may be made of any suit 
able form in order to manufacture charges or 
cartridges of any desired shape or blocks of 
explosive laterial to be afterward put to 
gether, so as to form large blocks for certain 
blasting Operations. 
What I claim is 
The method of manufacturing explosive 
charges or cartridges, consisting in first in 
troducing pulverized partially-fusible explo 
sive material into molds surrounded by a 
heating-chamber, then passing a heating me 
dium through said chamber to melt the con 
tents of the mold, then passing cold Water 
through said chamber to solidify the explosive 
material, and finally ejecting the charges or 
cartridges from the molds, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two Subscribing 
Witnesses. 
CARL LAMMI. 
Witnesses: 
NERE A. ELFWING, 
N. I. LUNDBORG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US435942.txt	(No Model.) 
E. H. MORRIS 
BAND CUTTER AND FEEDER 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1 
No. 435,942, 
Patented Sept. 9, 1890. 
 
1 WITNESSES 
INyENTOR / 
(No Model.) 
E. H. MORRIS 
BAND CUTTER AND FEEDER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 435,942. 
- P 
t. 9, 1890. 
 
%2 i. 
WITNESSES 
55. 
INVENTOR 
(2-4%.4-li, 
THE MORRIs FETERs co, PHoro-LTHo, washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 435,942. 
 
E. H. MORRIS. 
BAND CUTTER AND FEEDER. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Sept. 9, 1890. 
WITNESSES 
 
INVENTOR 
THE MORRIS PETERS co, PHOTo-LITHO, washington, o, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELLIS H. MORRIS, OF CAN TON, OHIO. 
BAND CUTTER AND FEEDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 435,942, dated September 9, 1890. 
Application filed December 26, 1889, Serial No. 335,088, (No model.) 
25 described, and pointed out in the claims. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ELLIs H. MORRIs, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Canton, county of Stark, State of Ohio, have 
5 invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Band-Cutters and Feeders, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, making part of this specification. 
Io My invention relates to improvements in 
band-cutters and feeders for thrashing-ma 
chines. 
The object is to provide means for cutting 
the bands placed about sheaves of grain to 
15 distribute the grain evenly over an endless 
apron or carrier, by which the grain may be 
fed to the thrashing-cylinder evenly. 
Myinvention also relates to improved means 
for regulating the supply of grain to the thrash 
ing-cylinder without changing or interfering 
With the motion of the thrashing-machine. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combination of parts, as will be hereinafter 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
a right-hand side elevation illustrating my 
invention as applied to a thrashing-machine, 
having a part of the side-board removed to 
3o show interior detail. Fig. 2 is a front eleva 
tion looking into the front end of the machine. 
Fig. 3 is an elevation of the right-hand side 
of the machine, partly sectional, showing in 
terior details. Fig. 4 is a perspective of a 
35 fragment of the band-cutting mechanism en 
larged; Fig. 5, a view in cross-section of the 
feeding-cylinder and side view of the spikes. 
Fig. 6 is a longitudinal vertical sectional view 
of the feed-cylinder; Fig. 7, a plan view show 
ing the location of the several parts. Fig. 8 
is a front end elevation showing the driving 
mechanism; and Fig. 9 is a fragment of the 
carrying-apron, showing the cross-cleat and 
metal-toothed rake. 
As my invention is applicable alike to many 
of the thrashing-machines now in use, I will 
proceed with the description, referring only to 
the thrasher parts as conjunctional thereto. 
A represents the body portion of the ma 
So chine as shown in several of the figures of the 
drawings. It is quadrilateral in form and is 
constructed of side and end portions, as A 
and g, and frame in such form and of such 
strength as to form a support for the machin 
ery belonging thereto. The said frame is se-55 
cured to and is supported on the arms B of 
the thrasher in front of the thrashing-cylin 
der. 
At the bottom portion of the body A are 
rollers R and R', the former supported in a 6o 
suitable bearing in a swinging frame Q, the 
latter in adjustable bearings O. About said 
rollers is placed an endless conveyer apron 
or feeder K, having on each side thereof 
sprocket-chains. The lower chain after en- 65 
gaging the lower side of sprocket-wheel J 
passes upwardly and over the roller M. The 
said carrier is further provided with cross 
slats I, to each of which is secured a metal 
plate R, having its upper edge serrated, as to 
shown in Fig. 9. Over said carrier is placed 
a feed-cylinder M', preferably constructed of 
sheet metal, secured to cast-metal heads a C, 
the latter having cast integral therewith an 
eccentric portion H, having about its periph- 75 
ery an annular groove a, and the former hav 
ing cast integral there with a bevel-wheel Y. 
The cylinder is supported on and rotates 
about a cranked shaft U, the heads a and a 
being supported on the journal portions W 8o 
and W. The cylinder is further provided 
with apertures S, through which the teeth 
are projected, said teeth having an eye por 
tion d', (see Fig. 5,) that embraces the cen 
tral portion of the cranked shaft U. The ap- 85 
ertures S may be placed in alignment with 
the body of the cylinder or spirally about it, 
as shown in Fig. 3. The shaft U is supported 
in suitable bearingsa in the frame of the 
body A, and on the front end portion of said 9o 
shaft is secured a segment A' of a Worm 
wheel, which is engaged by a Worm B', se 
cured to a shaft (t. (See Fig. 2.) Said shaft 
is supported in journals a' and projects out 
side of the body of the machine, and on the 95 
end thereof is secured a pulley C, having 
coiled about it a rope D', the free ends of 
which are placed in convenient reach of the 
operator and marked fast and slow. The 
object of said rope is to rotate the worm B', 
and by its engagement with the segment A 
rotate the shaft Uto throw the eccentric mid 
dle portion inwardly, as shown in Fig. 2, by 
which the teeth will be thrown out a greater 
40 
45 
ICO 
2 
485,942 
75 
O 
and J. 
distance into the straw to feed more rapidly, 
Ol' turned back to draw the teeth in and 
thereby check the flow of straw and grain to 
the carriers below and the thrashing-cylin 
der. By drawing on the fast end of the rope 
D' the shaft and teeth will be placed in po 
sition, as shown in Fig. 2, and by drawing 
on the end marked slow, the pulley C' will 
be rotated, and by it the shaft at and worm 
B', engaging the segment A', will turn the 
segment outwardly and upwardly and the 
middle or eccentric portion of the shaft U 
downwardly and outwardly, thereby draw 
ing the teeth back into the cylinder to prevent 
them from entering into and feeding down 
the straw. It will be noticed that this cyl 
inder is placed on a line at right angles to 
the thrashing-cylinder and in line with the 
movement of the carrier. 
It will be noticed that the movement of the 
ropes referred to will rotate the sprocket-wheel 
b' on the worm-shaft a to move the band-cut 
ter to and from the cylinder, as will be here 
in after more fully explained. 
To drive the cylinder M', a shaft G is placed 
across the rear portion of the body of the ma 
chine, supported and rotated in journal-boxes 
a', on the left-hand end of which is placed a 
bevel gear-wheel X, the teeth of which engage 
the teeth of the bevel-wheel Y on the cylin 
der-head, and on said shaft is secured an ec 
centric W, and outside of the body A a 
sprocket-wheela. The said wheel has a chain 
engagement with a similar wheel II, by which 
power is communicated to the sprocket-wheel 
J to drive the carrier K. On the right-hand 
end portion of said shaft G is loosely mounted 
a band-wheel or pulley C, which engages the 
main driving-belt D of the thrashing-machine 
as it passes from the pulley 2' on thrashing 
cylinder shaft forward under and about the 
pulley Cand up and over the idler E, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
The pulley C is held in place on the shaft 
by a removable plate Y', forming an inwardly 
projected collar to engage an annular groove 
at the end of the shaft, and to engage the 
said pulley with the said shaft a clutch is pro 
vided on the inner end portion of the hub of 
said pulley, and on the shaft a clutch-sleeve 
A, Secured from rotation on said shaft by a 
feather B' in the usual way, said sleeve hav 
ing at itsinner end an annular collar, in which 
are placed the prongs of the shipping-lever C. 
The said lever is pivoted to a supporting 
bracket D, the front end being extended for 
ward a little distance and secured by a link 
E to a hook E on the side of the body A, by 
which means the clutch on the sleeve A* is 
held in engagement with a similar clutch on 
the inner end of the hub of the driving-pull 
ley C. A spring Jis provided, the energy of 
which is exerted against the free end of the 
lever C to hold the clutch A* from engage 
ment with the clutch on the hub of the pull 
ley C when the link E is released from the 
hook E, 
The knife H', provided to sever the bands 
by which the grain is bound into sheaves, is 
constructed of a single blade of steel having 
a serrated cutting-edge, as shown in Fig. 4, 
the ends of the blade being secured in the 
brackets 
A finger-bar Q, formed of angle-iron, as 
shown in Fig. 4, is provided, having fingers R' 
secured thereto to embrace and project beyond 
the knife II. The said baris placed in slides 
S in the brackets J and H. A wrist-pin T' 
is secured to said bar, to which one end of a 
connecting-rod U is secured by a journal-box 
of spherical form, the other end of said rod 
being provided with a yoke or strap to em 
brace the eccentric W, thus providing means 
for reciprocating the finger-bar Q, and fingers 
by which the cords or bands about the sheaves 
of grain are drawn over the edge of the cut 
ter H' and severed. The brackets Hand J' 
have a sliding connection with the supporting 
frame to provide for a movement of the knife 
H to and from the cylinder M' to open or 
close the throat or space between the cylin 
der and the knife, which movement is effected 
by means of the screws F and G', turned into 
the lugsb" on the brackets J and H, the heads 
of said screws journaled in the body or frame 
Aatb', and on said ends is mounted sprocket 
wheels b, and on the worm-wheel shaft a is 
mounted a similar wheelb to correspond with 
the wheels b. A sprocket-chain E' is placed 
about said wheels, as shown in Fig. 3, and by 
drawing on said chain, the screws F and G' 
and the worm B' will be rotated to simultane 
ously move the band-cutter to and from the 
cylinder M' and the teeth T out of or into 
the said cylinder to increase or decrease the 
means for supplying grain to the thrasher or 
to stop the supply entirely without in any 
way interfering with the movements of the 
thrasher. To distribute the straw over the 
apron K, a vibrating finger P* is provided, as 
shown, pivotally secured to a pedestal Q, and 
is vibrated by a connecting-rod N, one end of 
which is pivotally secured to the finger P, and 
the other end is pivotally secured to a swing 
ing bar L*, as shown in Fig. 8, said swinging 
bar having a pivoted connection with a part 
of the frame, as shown at M, Fig. 2, the swing 
ing bar being shown by dottedlines, the upper 
end of said bar having a link-connection with 
the eccentric K* on the cylinder-head H. As 
the cylinder M' is rotated the eccentric will 
sway the bar L', which by its connections 
there with will vibrate the finger P over the 
carrier K to spread or distribute the straw. 
As shown in Fig. 3, the rear portion of the car 
rier-Supporting frame is pivoted about a sleeve 
projected in Wardly from the journal-box of 
the shaft supporting the sprocket-wheel J, and 
may be dropped down, as shown, to provide 
access to the thrashing-cylinder and concave. 
In the hopper L' (shown in Fig. 2) there is 
provided a yielding breast-plate N, extend 
ing the length of the feeder, and hinged at 
the upper side of the top of the body, as 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
5 
O 
shown at O'. The lower side portion is sup 
ported on springs P', the object of which is 
to provide a yielding pressure plate or board 
by which the sheaves are held against the 
cylinder, 
In operation, when the thrashing-machine 
is put in operation the driving-belt D will 
rotate the driving-pulley C in the direction 
shown by the arrow, the bevel-wheel X, en 
gaging a similar wheel Y on the cylinder M', 
will rotate said cylinder inwardly, and the 
sheaves of grain thrown into the hopper L' 
(shown in Fig. 2) will be drawn by the teeth 
down against the fingers of the band-cutter, 
which are reciprocated by the eccentric W. 
After the band is cut the straw will fall onto 
the carrier K, which is driven by the sprocket 
chain placed about the sprocket-wheels cand 
H on the cross-shaft G and the shaft carry 
ing the sprocket-wheels J, respectively, and 
to distribute the straw on the carrier the 
finger P* is vibrated by the eccentric K, as 
beforestated. To regulate the supply of grain 
to the thrasher, a pull on the rope D', marked 
fast, will rotate the worm B' to project the 
teeth T and rotate the screws F and G' to 
increase the space between the cylinder and 
the band-cutter, and thereby increase the 
Supply of grain to the carrier and thrasher, 
and a pull on the rope marked slow' will 
reverse the operation by closing the space 
between the band-cutter and the cylinder M', 
and drawing in the teeth, as hereinbefore 
stated, to check the supply of straw or grain; 
or the feeder may be stopped entirely by re 
leasing the link E, thereby disengaging the 
clutch A* from the hub of the wheel C by the 
use of the ever C. 
Having thus fully described the nature and 
object of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a thrashing-cylin 
der, of a carrier K, a feed-cylinder M', hav 
ing teeth T supported above and over said 
carrier and rotating transversely thereto, 
a knife H', and a reciprocating finger-bar Q, 
having fingers R' to sever the bands, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. The combination, with a thrashing-cylin 
der, of a feed-cylinder placed in front of and 
at right angles to said thrashing-cylinder 
and having teeth the projecting portion of 
which may be varied at will during the op 
eration of feeding grain to be thrashed, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
3. The combination, with a thrashing-cylin 
der and a feeding-cylinder placed at right 
angles thereto and having rotary adjustable 
teeth, of a knife and finger-bar to cut the 
band, and a carrier to carry the grain to the 
thrashing-cylinder,substantially as described, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In combination, the cylinder M', pro 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
435,942 
6. In combination, the carrier, the feed-cyl- 8o 
3 
vided with perforations, the cranked shaft 
about which the cylinder revolves, teeth 
mounted on the cranked shaft and projected 
through the perforations, a band-cutter, and 
means for adjusting the band-cutter toward 70 
and away from the cylinder, substantially as 
set forth. 
5. In combination, the cylinder provided 
with perforations, the cranked shaft about 
which the cylinder revolves, teeth mounted 75 
on the cranked shaft and projected through 
the perforations, aband-cutter, and means for 
simultaneously adjusting the shaft and the 
band-cutter, substantially as set forth. 
inder and band-cutter arranged transversely 
to the movement of the carrier, and a vibrat 
ing spreading-finger the free end of which 
has a sweeping movement back and forth 
across the face of the carrier transversely to 
its movement, substantially as set forth. 
7. In combination with the cylinder M', 
supported on and rotating about a shaft hav 
ing a portion eccentric to said cylinder, teeth 
journaled about said eccentric portion, the 
free end projected through the wall of said 
cylinder, a worm-wheel mounted on said shaft, 
a worm to engage said wheel to rotate said 
shaft for the purpose of adjusting the ecce 
tric portion thereof in said cylinder, a band- 95 
cutter secured in movable bearings, and a 
connection between the movable bearings and 
said worm, for the purpose set forth. 
8. The combination, with the cylinder-M', of 
the stationary band-cutter knife H, the re 
ciprocating finger-bar, screw-shafts F and S. 
worm-wheel A, worm B', shaft a, pulley C, 
and ropes D', by which said parts may be 
adjusted and held in desired adjustment, 
substantially as described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
9. In a band-cutter and feeder, the combi 
nation, with the carrier, the feeding mechan 
ism located over the carrier, and the thrash 
ing-cylinder at the rear of the carrier, of a 
carrier-frame having its rear portion pivoted 
about the carrier-actuating shaft and adapted 
to fold down with respect to the frame of the 
machine, substantially as described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
10. The combination, with a feed-hopperand 
band-cutter and feed-cylinder, the latter pro 
vided with feed-teeth adjustable across the 
throat, of a yielding breast-plate whereby the 
throat leading from the hopper to the feed 
cylinder may automatically enlarge and con 
tract, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 21st day of December, A. D. I 25 
1889, 
II5 
IOO 
12 O 
TO 
ELLIS H, MORRIS. 
Witnesses: 
W. K. MILLER, 
CHAS. R. MILLER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436042.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 436,042. 
N. LULL. 
BOOK BINDING, 
Patented Sept. 9, 1890. 
 
SS 63- S. 
Z722/e7222; 
42, 
-7622/222a Zze ZZ 
44%%.4% 
2-(5- 
42 
Norris PETERs co., Photo-Litho. WASH:NGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NEWTON LULL OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
BOOK-BIND ENG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,042, dated September 9, 1890. 
Application filed May 3, 1890. Serial No. 350,504 (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, NEWTON LULL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Book-Binding, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My improvement relates to the character of 
binding heretofore employed for books of 
various kinds, but particularly for blank 
books and account-books, the object being to 
cause the leaves when the book is open to lie 
flat throughout their whole extent. For this 
purpose it has been customary to employ a 
series of stubs secured to the back of the book 
and secure the leaf-sections to the outer edges 
of these stubs by stitching or by some other 
form of flexible connection. In practice each 
stubis formed of about the thickness of a leaf 
Section, by which is meant a group of leaves 
formed by doubling a suitable number of 
sheets upon themselves. In some cases. the 
stubs, or guards, as they are sometimes 
called, are made flexible, and in some cases 
they are made rigid. This general character 
of binding is commonly applied to large and 
heavy blank-books and account-books, As 
the leaf-sections are generally secured to the 
Stubs by means of stitches passing through 
the leaf-sections at the angle of folding and 
thence through the stubs, it is obvious that 
the connection is necessarily frail, so that the 
leaf-sections in the ordinary handling of the 
books are liable to become detached by the 
breaking or wearing of the thread. As books 
of this class have heretofore been made the 
refastening of detached leaf-sections or the 
Substitution of new ones was a matter of con 
siderable difficulty, and without taking apart 
and rebinding the book it was impossible to 
attach the loose section by means of stitching 
corresponding with that originally employed. 
The object of my present invention is to 
overcome this difficulty; and it consists in se 
curing each leaf-section separately to its cor 
responding stub by stitches passed at inter 
vals vertically through the angle at the fold 
of the leaf-section and then transversely 
through the stub near its upper edge and back 
through the angle at the fold of the leaf-sec 
tion. 
In the accompanying drawings, figure 1 is 
a broken perspective view of a book bound 
in accordance with my invention, and Fig. 2 
a perspective view of a single stub illustrat 
ing the mode of stitching. 
In practice I employ stubs of the rigid type 
in contradistinction to the flexible type, 
though obviously my mode of stitching may 
be employed with either type of stub. 
A is the back of the book, and BB the stubs 
secured thereto in any well-known Way. As 
shown in the drawings, and as I prefer to 
make these stubs, each is formed of an inter 
nal layer of card-board or stiffened fabric 
having Manila paper woundabout it, and the 
whole is provided with an external covering 
of musliri or other fabric. This construction 
affords the rigidity which is desirable, while 
the fabric covering gives a firm hold to the 
stitching. Of course the thickness of each 
stub should correspond approximately with 
that of its leaf-section. The stubs may be 
employed in any desired number according 
to the size of the book; but all the stubs are 
independent of each other, aside from the 
fact that they are fastened to a common 
back. 
CC are the leaf-sections, corresponding in 
number with the stubs and each fastenedin 
dependently to its stub by means of the 
stitching D. The course of this stitching is 
clearly illustrated in Fig. 2. At the initial 
and terminal ends it is secured by a knottit, 
and at intermediate points the thread is 
looped through the section and stub, as shown 
at S. The stitching may of course be done 
either with wire or thread. 
In original manufacture it is preferable to 
secure the leaf-sections to thin corresponding 
stubs before grouping the latter and Securing 
them to the back; but in the event of the re 
placement or substitution of a leaf-section 
the stitching is done in the same manner that 
it was originally done without requiring the 
detachment of the stub from the group. 
Aside from the specific advantage named, 
my book has the merit of exceptional sim 
plicity in point of manufacture, coupled with 
as high a degree of strength and durability 
as can be attained with this general charac 
ter of binding. 
What I claim as new, and desire to Secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
s 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
436,042 
1. The combination, with the back A of a 
book, of the stubs B, secured thereto, leaf 
Sections C,and stitching passing down through 
the angles of the leaf-section and transversely 
through the outer margins of the stubs and 
securing each leaf-section and its correspond 
ing stub together independently of the re 
maining leaf-sections and stubs, substantially 
as described. 
2. In combination with the back A of a book, 
the fabric-covered stubs B, secured thereto, 
leaf-sections C, and stitching D, having the 
O 
initial and terminal knots t t and interme 
diate loops S passing through the angles of 
the leaf-sections and transversely through the 
outer margins of the stubs and securing each 
leaf-section to its corresponding stub inde 
pendently of the remaining leaf-sections and 
stubs, substantially as described. 
(5 
NEWTON LULT. 
In presence of - 
J. W. DYRENFORTH, 
M. J. FROST. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436142.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 436,142. 
A. C. LOHMANN, 
KNOCKDOWN PAPER BOX, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Sept. 9, 1890. 
hi 
- 
  
 
ID 
A. 
 
98), twcase 3. 
%24 
(No Model.) 
A. C. LOHMANN. 
KNOCKDOWN PAPER BOX, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
928itv.cscs 
E. 232 
The NORR 
IS PETERs co, Photo-LTH 
O. washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT C. LOHMANN, OF AKRON, OHIO. 
KNOCKDOWN PAPER BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,142, dated September 9, 1890. 
Application filed January 13, 1890, Serial No. 336,771 (No model.) 
O 
To a whom it may concern: 
ed. To any one skilled in the art of box-mak 
Be it known that I, ALBERT C. LOHMANN, a 
ing by machinery this will be evident, and to 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
such a one the importance and advantage 
Akron, county of Summit, and State of Ohio, 
of the form of box herein described will be 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
obvious. 
provements in Knockdown Boxes, of which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a box-blank 
the following is a specification, the principle 
formed according to this invention. Fig. 2 is 
of the invention being herein explained, and 
a plan view of the box in knockdown form 
the best mode in which I have contemplated 
ready for shipping. Fig. 3 is a front eleva 
applying that principle so as to distinguish 
tion view of the box with the inner tuck-flap 
it from other inventions. 
folded into position; and Fig. 4 is a plan view 
My invention relates to knockdown boxes. 
of two companion blanks illustrating how 
My especial object in this invention is a 
they interfit with each other. 
form of box containing the advantages of the 
A piece of straw-board or other box mate 
form herein shown, described, and claimed 
rial is so scored as to define front and rear 
namely, a box that may beset up at any time, 
panels, respectively, Cand A, and side panels 
as Well after pasting as before, so that it may 
B and D, and the paste-flap E. The top cor 
be shipped in its knockdown form and will 
ner tuck-flaps Fare respectively integral with 
not require expert labor to set it up. In com 
the panels B D. The usual top or covertuck 
bination with the above feature I form the 
flap G is also provided, and integral with this 
side panels of the box and the paste-flap of 
is tuck-flap g. The bottom portion of the box 
equal Width, whereby I am enabled to cut the 
blank is cut and scored so as to form bottom 
blanks continuously on a machine without 
panel Lintegral with rear panel A, said bottom 
Waste of material, and make complete boxes 
panel being provided with bottom tuck-flap 
identical in appearance, as hereinafter more 
l. The bottom corner tuck-flap his integral 
fully set forth. 
with panel D, and bottom panel His integral 
In my present form I arrange the scoring 
with side panel B, but free from bottom panel 
On the inner tuck-flap so that it may be 
L. The inner side flap J is formed integral 
cheaply scored on a machine, the angle of 
with bottom panel H and free from front 
the Score being such that the same machine 
panel C. Top tuck-panel b is integral with 
may be used to secure any-sized box by an 
inner side tuck-flap J, the scoreb' defining 
easy adjustment, whereas in other cases the 
the separation of the two. The inner side 
angle of said score was such that it was with 
tuck-flap J is provided with the diagonal 
great difficulty the adjustment could be made 
scorei, that extends at an angle of forty-five 
E. scoring each variation in the size of the 
degrees from lower extremity of score h', 
OX. 
which outlines the separation between panels 
It will be understood that in machines for H and J. In other words, said score i ex 
scoring and making boxes the scoring knives 
tends from the lower corners of panels Hand 9o 
or instruments are set up and secured to a 
J to a point where the upper free edge of 
cylinder, and it is far easier to secure said 
panel J meets the lower common corners of 
scoring-knives so as to form scores at right 
panels C and paste-flap E. The tuck-flap J 
angles to each other or at angles of forty-five 
greatly strengthens the box and also serves 
degrees to each other than at any other an 
to hold tuck-flap g in closed position, as said 95 
gle. On the other hand, if the diagonal score 
flap g is tucked in between flap J and C, and 
of the inner tuck-flap in a small-sized box is 
the weight of the boxcontents pressing against 
extended in a direction at variance from 
flap J serves to bind flap g between J and C. 
forty-five or ninety degrees, with every varia 
The distance from score h' to score b' should 
tion in the size of the panel containing said 
be equal to the length of panel C, in order 
score a corresponding change in the angle 
that the inner tuck-flap J may extend the en 
5o of said score relative to the other scores of 
tire length of panel C. The flap b may then 
the panel would be absolutely necessary, and 
be bent over as an aid to securing a tight 
time, labor, and expense would thus be wast 
cover. Under the construction above de 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
OC 
436,142 
O 
scribed the distance of score i, where it in 
tersects panels C and E, from the common 
point of intersection of panels J C B II is 
equal to the width of panel C, and in this 
form of box said score j is always formed at 
an angle of forty-five degrees to score h and 
the cut that separates panels C and J. It 
will further be noticed that the length of bot 
tom panel H and width of panel C are equal. 
Thus score h' and the cut separating panel 
Cand flap J, together with scorei, outline an 
isosceles triangle, of which the score-line i is 
the base. 
It will be noticed that paste-flap E is of the 
same width as panels B and D, so that either 
of the outer panels E or D may be used as a 
paste-flap. This forming the outer flaps of 
equal width enables me to reverse the blank 
and fit the heads of the same together, as 
shown in Fig. 1, and I can thus continuously 
score and cut said blanks on a machine with 
out waste of material. This is a point of 
great utility, particularly in boxes formed 
with an inner tuck-flap and such as I herein 
show, as otherwise they could not be cut con 
tinuously on a machine nor without great 
Waste of material. It will be further noticed 
that the top tuck-flap g and the bottom flap 
H are located in different planes at right an 
gles to each other in the complete box and in 
different longitudinal planes in the blank 
that is, H does not lie in the same longitudi 
nal plane bounded by scores bounding flap 9 
and panels G. A. L and flap l, while B and H 
lie in the blankin the same longitudinal plane, 
but in the completed box are in planes at 
right angles to each other and at right angles 
to the plane of the top tuck-flap g, said flap 
H and panel B being integral and separated 
25 
35 
45 
55 
OO 
only by a score-line at the bottom edge of the 
bOX. The foregoing description and accompany 
ing drawings set forth in detail forms em 
bodying my invention; but change may be 
made therein, provided the principles of for 
mation respectively recited in the following 
claim are employed. I therefore particularly 
point out and distinctly claim as my inven 
tion A knockdown paper box provided with 
front and rear panels C and A, side panels B, 
D, and E, of equal width, whereby either of 
the extreme side pancls may be used inter 
changeably as a paste-flap, top tuck-flap g, 
and bottom flap II, located in different planes 
at right angles to each other in the complete 
set-up box, said flap II and the central side 
panel B being located in the completed box 
in planes at right angles to each other and at 
right angles to the plane of the tuck-?lap g, 
and the flap II being integral with the panel 
B, inner tuck-flap J integral with the flap H 
and separated therefom by a score h", said 
flap J free from but immediately adjacent to 
the front panel C and extending across the 
entire width of said panel and provided with 
the diagonal scorei, extending at an angle of 
forty-five degrees from the score h", whereby 
the said panel J may be folded and inserted 
Within the box to form a pocket for the top 
tuck-flap g, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing to 
be my invention I have hereunto set my hand 
this 8th day of January, A. D. 1890. 
A. C. LOIIMANN. 
Witnesses: 
J. B. FAY, 
N. T. FAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436242.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 436,242. 
H. W. JORDAN. 
HOOK OR CATCH, 
Patented Sept. 9, 1890. 
A/VAWZO2 
A/VV Voraza 7t 
7. 9-8.2.1477 
aflopaei 
76tzs 
y/7WASSAS 
27, -3- (2-2-seed 
6% &9ece. 
2-A- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY W. JORDAN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
HOOK OR CATCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,242, dated September 9, 1890. 
Application filed January 21, 1890, Serial No. 337,599, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY W. JORDAN, of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and usefullmprovementsin Hooks or Catches; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form part of this speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in hooks or catches. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
an improved hook or catch particularly adapt 
ed for hanging curtains, and which shall be 
exceedingly cheap, simple, and durable in 
construction and composed of a minimum 
number of parts, and which can be easily and 
quickly operated, and will greatly reduce 
the time and trouble heretofore expended in 
hanging curtains. These objects are accom 
plished by my invention, which consists in 
certain novel features of construction and in 
combinations of parts more fully described 
hereinafter, and particularly pointed out in 
the claims. 
Referring to the accmpanying drawings, Fig 
ure 1 is a view of a curtain-pole and a portion 
of a curtain suspended therefrom by the im 
proved hooks. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the 
pole and a portion of the curtain, showing the 
catch in end elevation. Fig. 3 is a perspec 
tive showing the two arms of the hook and 
the wire which binds them together separated. 
Fig. 4 is a cross-section of the end of the arm 
carrying the pins. 
The hook is composed of the two correspond 
ing metal strips or members ab, which are suit 
ably fulcrumed or pivoted together within 
their lengths. Below the pivotal point the 
two sides or strips are correspondingly bulged 
or bent outwardly a suitable distance at c in 
opposite directions, forming the normally 
closed opening d", for the purpose hereinafter 
set forth, and the two clamping-jaws at their 
outer ends. The member a at its clamping 
end or jaw below the outward bulge c is pre 
ferably straight and flat and provided on its 
inner face with the sharp pins did, projecting 
w 
toward the corresponding free end or jaw of 
the member b. These two sharp projections 
are formed from a single metal pin having its 
ends formed into needle-points, which pin is 
then bent into a substantially U shape, and 
the two ends are inserted through two aper 
tures in the end of said member, so that the 
cross-piece of the U will be against the Outer 
face of said end between the perforations, 
and the pointed ends will project a distange 
from the inner face of said end, and the pin 
is held in this position by the extremity fof 
the said member, which is bent back upon 
itself and down upon the portion of the pin 
on the outer face of said end, thereby pre 
venting the pin from pushing back out of the 
perforations. The free end of the other mem 
ber b, below its outward bend or loop C, nor 
mally bears against the corresponding end of 
member a, but opposite the pins d of member 
a the free end of member b is provided with 
an outward bulgee, forming a recess to re 
ceive the points of said pins, the recess being 
of greater depth than the length of the pin 
points from the inner face of the end of mem 
ber a and of greater width than the pins, SO 
that the pins, if they do not pierce the fabric, 
will form a fold or crease therein and forge it 
into the bulgee, and thereby firmly hold it. 
The two members are pivoted together - 
above the outward bends c c by means of a 
wire g twisted around said members, the 
edges of which are grooved, as shown, to re 
ceive the wire, so that it will lie below or 
flush with the edges of the members. The piv 
otal or fulcrum point of the members is thus 
formed. Above the fulcrum the members 
extend outwardly and upwardly in opposite 
directions a suitable distance, and are then 
doubled upon themselves and extend back 
and inwardly again toward the fulcrum-point 
and at a slight distance from the outwardly 
extending portions h, forming the Spring por 
tions i i", the end of spring i being doubled 95 
upon itself to form the eyei, and the end of 
the spring i' being rounded to bear and slide 
on said eye. Thus when the handlesformed 
by the lengths h i i" are pressed together 
against the tension of the springs 
the op 
posite ends or jaws of the members are sepa-. 
rated and opened. 
When it is desired to use the present catch 
75 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
. 
. 
" 
2. 
436,242 
55 
65 
clamping and gripping jaws on one side of 
the fulcrum and the opposite portions extend 
ing outwardly to form lever-handles and hav 
ing their ends bent back toward the fulcrum 
to form springs to hold the jaws together, the 
end of one spring forming an eye and the end 
of the other bearing thereon, substantially as 
described. 
3. The herein-described catch, consisting of 
two integral members fulcrumed together be 
tween their ends, the ends of the members on 
one side of the fulcrum forming. gripping 
jaws and the opposite corresponding portions 
of said members extending outwardly from 
the fulcrum in different directions to form 
lever-handles and having their ends doubled 
back and both extending toward the fulcrum, 
with their extremities bearing against each 
other to form springs and hold the jaws to 
gether, as set forth. 
4. A catch consisting of the two members 
fulcrumed together between their ends and 
each formed of a strip of metal, the members 
on one side being bent outwardly in opposite 
directions from the fulcrum, forming handles 
and provided with springs to hold them apart, 
and on the opposite side forming gripping 
jaws, one of said jaws having a U-shaped pin 
inserted therethrough from the outer side and 
at a distance from the extremity thereof, said 
extremity being doubled tightly back upon 
the outer face of the member and rear portion 
of said pin, the other member opposite said 
pins being bent or bulged outwardly, form 
ing a recess deeper than the length of the pins 
and wider than the same, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
In testimony that Iclaim the foregoing as my 
own I affix my signature in presence of two 
witnesses. 
HENRY W. JORDAN. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS JORDAN, 
P. WIEHMEYER. 
75 
3d 
. 
- 
jured. 
in hanging curtains from poles, the handles 
are pressed together, thereby opening the 
jaws of the catch, which are then slipped 
Over the pole from the top, so that the pole 
will loosely rest in the recess d' formed by 
the bulges c c, and the catch can freely slide 
on said pole. The upper edge of the curtain 
is caught between the jaws of the catch and 
the pins pass through or press a fold of the 
curtain into the recess or bulgee, and there 
by firmly hold the same. The same catch 
thus holds the curtain and slides on the pole. 
If desirable, rings can be used on the pole 
and the present catches secured to them by 
means of the eyesi, as shown in Fig. 1, and 
the hem or upper edge of the curtain can ex 
tend up into the opening d". The manner of 
Securing the members together is cheap and 
strong and cannot be easily broken or in 
This catch is by no means limited to use 
as a curtain-support, but is adapted for many 
Other purposes and uses-such as an attach 
ment for fans, parasols, umbrellas, &c.-and 
can be made of any size suitable for the pur 
pose to which it is to be applied. The catch 
can be attached by means of the eye?i. 
What I claim is 
1. A catch consisting of two integral mem 
bers fulcrumed together between their ends, 
having their ends on one side of the fulcrum 
formed into jaws and the portions between 
Said jaws and the fulcrum provided with cor 
responding opposite outward bends, one of 
Said jaws being provided with a recess and 
the other with pins to extend thereinto, the 
Opposite portions of the members extending 
outwardly to form lever-handles and doubled 
upon themselves and extended inwardly and 
meeting at their ends to form springs and hold 
Said jaws together, substantially as described. 
2. A catch consisting of two integral separ 
ate members united and fulcrumed together 
by a wire twisted around the same between 
their ends, the ends of said members forming 
Cd 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436342.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 436,342, 
Patented Sept. 16, 1890, 
J. B. Z. DUMAIS. 
CUTTER FOR BRICK OR TILE MACHINES, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
=l, EPE e s: t 
ge 
1 
! ---El is ea i 
RS 
"Hi- 
s: 
- - - - - - 
- - 
- - - - 
f 
| 
N 
 
2. 
fift173. 
3-vuo-viot 
/e a pa. Zi Z.Z)zga aiz's 
c/z4/6 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. B. Z. DUMAIS. 
CUTTER FOR BRICK OR TTLE MACHINES. 
No. 436,342, 
A. 
Patented Sept. 16, 1890. 
N As Hill 
 
 
Eile 
I 
 
344-vov to 
Jea Z5.27aza a cs 
6 (146 2-1 
J466/s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JEAN B. Z. DUMAIS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
JOSEPH DONNERSBERGER, OF SAME PLACE. 
CUTTER FOR BRICK OR TILE MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,342, dated September 16, 1890. 
Application filed May 14, 1890, Serial No. 351,777, (No model.) 
arransm 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all whon, it nazy concern. 
Be it known that I, JEAN B. Z. DUMAIS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Cutters for Brick-Machines, 
which arefully set forthin the following speci 
fication, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure I represents a plan view of a brick 
cutting machine embodying my invention, 
and Fig.2 a front side elevation of the same. 
My invention relates to a machine for the 
purpose of severing continuous strips of 
pressed or molded clay, which are produced 
by certain brick-machines of a well-known 
type, whereby the said strips are cut up into 
suitable brick-lengths, and more especially 
to a cutting-machine for this purpose, which 
will suitably sever the strips of clay as they 
are delivered from the brick-machine without 
stopping their forward progress, the strips 
being conducted to the cutter by a suitable 
carrier, moved along by the latter, and at the 
same time severed, and the clay bricks thus 
formed delivered to another suitable carrier, 
which deposits them as may be desired. 
The present invention consists, mainly, in 
an endless slatted carrier open at one side, 
and knives mounted on a rotating cylinder 
arranged at the open side of the said carrier 
and free to slide back and forth on the cylin 
der in a line with the travel of the carrier. 
I will proceed to describe in detail the con 
struction and operation of a machine in 
which I have embodied my invention in one 
practical way, and will then point out more 
definitely in claims the special improvements 
which I believe to be new and wish to pro 
tect by Letters Patent, 
In the drawings, A represents a substan 
tially rectangular frame of considerably 
greater length than width. This is the main 
supporting-frame for the cutting-machine, 
upon which the operative devices are mounted. 
At each end of this frame is a large cylinder 
or drum B and C, the former at the front end 
and the latter at the rear. The shafts of these 
cylinders are mounted in suitable bearings 
secured to the supporting-frame, and their 
circumferential surfaces, instead of being cir 
cular, are polygonal, the Several faces b of the 
former and c of the latter being of a width 
bout equal to the length of a brick, more or 
eSS. 
The shaft b' of the front drum is extended 
out at One Side of the frame and has secured 
upon it a band wheel or pulley B. This is 
the driving-pulley, by means of which a ro 
tary motion is communicated to the cylinder 
B; but instead of a band-pulley a gear-wheel 
or any other suitable device maybe employed, 
the power being obtained from the main 
brick-machine or any other suitable source. 
An endless carrier D is mounted upon these 
two drums. This carrier is composed of long 
metal slats d, which are hinged together at 
One end, the hinges d' being located at the 
ends of the sat on the back side of the ma 
chine. . 
The hinge-connections are made long on 
the adjacent edges of the slats, as seen in 
Fig. 1 of the drawings, so as to give a strong 
Sustaining Vertical Support to the slats, which 
are left open at their other ends at the front 
side of the machine and all the way between 
said ends and the hinges. The width of each 
one of these slatS is Substantially the same as 
the length desired for the bricks of clay, so 
that, if strips of pressed and molded clay are 
delivered out upon this slatted carrier and 
then severed along the Spaces between the 
slats, clay bricks of the required length will 
be produced. The strips of clay are delivered 
immediately upon this slatted carrier by 
means of a chute or apron E, extending di 
rectly from the brick-machine. This deliv 
ering device may also be an endless carrier 
where it is desirable, the particular construc 
tion being an immaterial matter, the only ob 
ject being to direct the strips of pressed clay 
upon the forward end of the carrier. 
As the movement of the carrier is continu 
ous, obviously the cutting device must be con 
structed so as to accommodate the constant 
forward movement of the strips of clay while 
being severed. For this purpose a cylinder 
or drum F is mounted at the front side of the 
frame, its shaft.fbeing at right angles to the 
shafts of the carrier-drums and mounted in 
55 
75 
95 
TOO 
2 
P 
186,342 
7o 
75 
95 
CO 
5 
O 
25 
suitable bearings f', secured to the frontside 
for severing the strips of clay into bricks of 
of the supporting-frame. This shaft is pro 
the required length while upon the carrier and 
longed toward the forward end of the ma 
without stopping their forward movement. 
chine, so as to extend over the shaft of the 
In order to give the slatted carrier addi 
forward carrier-drum B, one of the bearings 
tional stiffness during the cutting operation, 
f' being mounted near the forward end of the 
which of course must occur in the space be 
frame A and in front of the shaft of the drum. 
tween the two carrier-drums, I provide a 
B. This extension of the shaft f is provided 
rigid support for the hinged ends of the slats. 
with a worm f', with which engages a worm 
This support consists of a series of short roll 
gear-wheel F, secured to the end of the shaft 
ers I, mounted in a suitable frame fastened 
b' at thefront of the machine, as seen in Fig. 2 
to the back side of the supporting-frame and 
of the drawings. It will be seen that rotary 
arranged in a level position directly under 
motion will thus be given to the cylinder F, 
the hinged ends of the carrier-slats, as seen 
the movement being inward toward the car 
in Fig. 1, so that the latter pass over these 
rier, as indicated by the arrow in Fig. 1. 
rollers in contact with them and are thereby 
firmly supported, giving greater stiffness to 
The knives G are mounted upon blocks g, 
which are in turn mounted in grooves or 
the carrier during this portion of its travel. 
guideways g in the surface of the cylinder F 
The clay bricks may be delivered from the 
and running lengthwise of the same. The 
slatted-carrier in any way desired. For illus 
2O grooves and blocks are dovetailed, so as to 
tration I have shown an endless carrier J at 
hold the latter to the cylinder; but the blocks 
the rear end of the machine with an apron, 
are perfectly free to slide back and forth in 
by means of which the bricks are delivered 
the grooves lengthwise of the cylinder. The 
upon the said carrier at the rear end of the 
knives are spaced upon the cylinder and the 
cutting-machine, and are carried thence to any 
required point of delivery, motion being given 
movement of the latter so calculated that 
as one of these knives is brought over to the 
to the carrier J by any usual means. In the 
carrier it will register with one of the spaces 
drawings this is done by a chain. K, running 
between two slats of the latter and so strike 
over a sprocket-wheel k on the shaft c', and a 
into this opening the moment it engages with 
similar wheel k" on the rolleri of the carrier. 
the carrier; but as the knife-blocks are free 
I have not shown the brick-machine and 
to move along the cylinder upon which they 
other ordinary parts of machinery used in 
are mounted, and this movement is made 
connection with this art, because they are in 
very easy, the knives and blocks will be slid 
common use and well known and may be of 
along by the forward movement of the car 
any usual construction, it being understood 
rier so long as the knife remains in engage 
that this cutting-machine may be set up to any 
ment between the slats. 
of the brick-machines which produce pressed 
The knives are long enough to reach inward 
and molded strips of clay, so that such strips 
nearly to the hinges of the carrier-slats, so 
may be delivered directly therefrom to the 
that their rotary movement, caused by the 
slatted carrier of the cutting-machine, 
revolution of the cylinder F, will project them 
Changes may be made in details of con 
nearly across the carrier and down through 
struction and in some of the devices herein 
the spaces between the slats, thereby sever 
shown and described; and the manner of 
ing the strip or strips of clay lying upon the 
driving both the carrier-drums and the cut 
latter, while at the same time they are caused 
ter-cylinder may be changed in a variety of 
to partake of the forward movement of the 
ways without removing the main features of 
carrier and so cannot disturb the position of 
my invention, and therefore I do not wish to 
the clay strips thereon. The knives will be 
be understood as limiting myself to all the 
entirely cleared from the carrier before the 
details of construction and arrangement as 
blocks reach the rear ends of their guideways, 
herein described and shown, 
and before they are brought around to the 
Having thus described my invention, what 
carrier again must of course be pushed back 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
to the forward end of the cylinder on which 
ters Patent, is- 
s 
they are mounted. This is accomplished by 
1. In a brick-cutting machine, an endles 
means of a spirally-curved cam or guide H, 
slatted carrier with the spaces open between 
5 which is fastened at one end to the frame be 
the slats at one edge of the carrier, in combi 
low the rear end of the cylinder F, and is 
nation with a revolving cutter-cylinder mount 
thence curved outward, upward, and forward 
ed at one side of the carrier parallel to the 
around said cylinder and as near to the sur 
line of motion of the latter, and knives 
face of the latter as convenient. The rear 
mounted on said cylinder and freely movable 
ends of the knife-blocks as they are brought 
lengthwise thereon, substantially as and for 
around underneath the cylinder F come into 
purposes specified. 
contact with this cam, as seen in Fig. 2, and are 
2. In a brick-cutting machine, the endless 
are thereby gradually pushed forward to their 
carrier D, composed of slats d, hinged to 
extreme position at the forward end of the cyl 
gether at one end only, in combination with 
inderin readiness for Work again, as described the revolving cylinder F, the blocks g, mount 
above. It will be seen, then, that Ithus provide ed in guideways on said cylinder and freely 
45 
Io5 
O 
I I5 
I25 
436,842 
3 
movable thereon, and the knives G, attached 
to said blocks, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
3. In a brick-cutting machine, the endless 
slatted carrier D open at one edge, in com 
bination with the revolving cylinder F, the 
knife-blocks g, mounted loosely in guide 
ways on said cylinder, and the cam or guide 
H, substantially as and for the purposes speci 
fied. 
4. In a brick-cutting machine, the endless 
slatted carrier D, in combination with the 
5 
O 
drums BC, the driving-pulley B on the shaft 
of the drum B, the revolving knife-cylinder 
F, the sliding knives G, mounted on said cyl- 15 
inder, the worm f on the shaft of the cylin 
der F, and the worm-wheel F, secured to the 
shaft of the drum B, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
JEAN B, Z. DUMAIS. 
Witnesses: 
CARRIE FEIGEL 
A.M. BEST. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436442.txt	(N 0 Model.) 
W. B. THOME & E. E. RISSER. 
BREAST STRAP COUPLING, 
No. 436,442, 
Patented Sept. 16, 1890, 
O a d 
Zig 1. 
   
 
 
 
II,D 
I 
IB| 
7, 
H F,75 
Y95 
R 
Jull 
U- 
 
M 
WITNESSES 
ity 6.3% 7- 
INVENTOR 
.. &. 46244e 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM B. THOME, OF MILTON GROVE, AND ELIAS E. RISSER, OF LAWN, 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
BREAST STRAP COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,442, dated September 16, 1890. 
Application filed February 19, 1890, Serial No. 341,089, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM B. THOME 
of Milton Grove, Lancaster county, and ELIAS 
E. RISSER, of Lawn, Lebanon county, both in 
the State of Pennsylvania, citizens of the 
United States, have invented certain Im 
provements in Breast-Strap Couplings, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
that class of couplings employed in connec 
tion. With the breast-straps of harness used 
instead of the ordinary collar. These straps 
as generally made form one continuous piece 
adapted to extend entirely around the breast 
of a horse, being supported at the sides by a 
strap or straps passing over the shoulders of 
the animal. Thus arranged it is necessary 
to pass the breast-strap or the supporting 
strap or straps over the horse's head in har 
messing and unharnessing the animal, which 
is inconvenient and troublesome. 
The object of our invention is to avoid this, 
and We accomplish our object by dividing the 
Strap into two parts in front and connecting 
those parts by a coupling, the novel features 
of which will be hereinafter fully described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Our invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of a breast-stra, 
having a coupling embodying our invention 
attached thereto. Fig. 2 is a top view of the 
Same, portions of the breast-strap being cut 
away. Fig. 3 is a front view of the two sec 
tions disconnected from each other. Fig. 4 
is a vertical transverse section on the linea: ac, 
Fig. 1. 
Referring to the details of the drawings, A 
represents the breast-strap divided into two 
parts in front and connected by the coupling 
B. The coupling is composed of the keeper 
Section C and the hook-section D, and these 
sections are secured to the contiguous ends 
of the two parts of the breast-strap by rivets 
or other like fastenings. When the sections 
are connected, the inner ends thereof lap each 
other, the section D of sufficient thickness 
for the purpose being recessed to receive the 
end of the section C, so that the inner sur 
25 
35 
42 
45 
faces of the two sections are flush with each 
other, as clearly shown in Fig. 2. 
Adjacent to the upper and lower edges of 
the section C, and at such distance from the 
inner end thereof as to afford a sufficient 
bearing for the corresponding end of the sec 
tion D, there is formed a keeper ct, having a 
recess or groove cut therein on the side to 
ward the outer end of the Section. The base 
b of each of the keepers is raised above the 
face of the section and extended inward to 
form an abutment for the shoulders d of the 
section D. In the center of that portion of 
the section C which is lapped by the section 
D is permanently secured a revoluble pin n, 
having a flattened headf formed on its outer 
end and shaped like a thumb-nut, the space 
between the under side of the head and the 
face of the section C being sufficient to ad 
mit the end of section D. 
From the inner end of the section D there 
projects a tongue E, which extends forward 
between the keepers a, and has a bead e 
formed on its extremity. A pin g projects 
from each side of the bead, which is adapted 
to engage the recess in the outer side of one 
of the keepers. This section is also provided 
With a slot F, constructed to permit the head 
f, when in a certain position, to pass through 
the same, the side walls of the slot being re 
cessed at the center to form an opening m, 
adapted to receive the revoluble pin. There 
is a spring H secured to the section D on one 
side of the central opening of the slot, hav 
ing an indentation h formed therein opposite 
that opening, and on the lower end of the sec 
tion there is fastened a martingale-loop R. 
There is also a bead N, extending trans 
versely of the section to correspond with the 
bead formed by the keepers and the bead on 
the end of the tongue E. When the sections 
are to be connected, the head f of the pin is 
turned so that its length may correspond with 
that of the slot F, as shown in Fig. 3. The 
pins g are engaged with the keepers, and the 
section D is turned back until its inner end 
rests on the end of section C, the head f pass 
ing through the slot F, after which the head 
is turned transversely of the slot, as seen in 
Fig. 1. When in the transverse position, one 
9o 
95 
IOC) 
436,442 
end of the head f rests in the indentation 
h of the spring H, the spring serving to pre 
vent the accidental turning of the head. As 
will be seen, the position of the tongue Elbe 
tween the keepers a, and the engagement of 
the revoluble pin with the opening in pre 
Vent transverse movement of the sections on 
each other. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a breast-strap coupling, the combina 
tion, With a keeper-section having keepers 
provided with recesses in the sides thereof 
toward the outer end of said keeper-section, 
and a revoluble headed pin located on the 
inner end of said keeper-section, of a hook 
section constructed to lap the inner end of 
the keeper - section, and having a tongue 
formed on the inner end thereof provided 
With pins projecting from its sides adapted to 
engage the recesses in said outer sides of the 
keepers, said hook - section being provided 
With an aperture to permit the passage of the 
head and receive the pin, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
2. In a breast-strap coupling, the combina 
tion, with a keeper-section having keepers 
provided With recesses in the sides thereof 
toward the outer end of said keeper-section, 
and a revoluble headed pin located on the 
inner end of said keeper-section, of a hook 
section constructed to lap the inner end of 
said keeper-section and having a tongue 
formed on the inner end thereof provided 
O 
25 
35 
with pins projecting from its sides adapted 
to engage the recesses in said outer sides of 
the keepers, said hook-section being provided 
with an aperture to permit the passage of the 
head and receive the pin, and a spring to pre 
went the accidental turning of the revoluble 
pin, substantially as specified. 
3. In a breast-strap coupling, the combina 
tion, with the keeper-section provided With 
keepers, as a, having recesses formed in the 
sides thereof toward the outer end of Said 
keeper-section, and a revoluble headed pin 
located on the inner end of Said keeper-Sec 
tion, of a hook-section constructed to lap the 
inner end of the keeper-section, and having 
a recess in its inner end to receive the inner 
end of the keeper-section, and shoulders d, 
adapted to abut against the base of the inner 
sides of the keepers, a tongue formed on the 
end of the hook-section provided with pins 
projecting from its sides adapted to engage 
the recesses in said outer sides of the keep 
ers, said hook-section being provided with an 
aperture to permit the passage of the head 
and receive the pin, and a spring secured to 
the hook-section and adapted to engage the 
pin-head when in a given position, all con 
structed and operating substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
45 
55 
WM. B. THOME. 
ELIAS E. RISSER. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. A. LANE, 
WM. R. GERHART. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436542.txt	(No Model.) 
G. B. OR SWELL, 
CARPENTERS TOOL, 
No. 436,542, 
Patented Sept, l6, 1890. 
  
 
 
di?posses 
--2C2eea- 
3y 4.s. Affarpeys, 
 
  
 
Ipiapir 
Gkoye 2O2-seed, 
re. Noails Psi ERS &c.. Photo-titho, wasticton, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE B, ORSWELL, OF MITCHELL, (DAKOTA TERRITORY). SOUTH DAKOTA. 
CAR PENTERS TO O. L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,542, dated September 16, 1890. 
Application filed June 5, 1889, Renewed August 6, 1890, Serial No,361,163, (No model.) 
To ai whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE B. ORSWELL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Mitchell, in the county of Davison and Terri 
tory of Dakota, have invented a new and use 
ful Carpenter's Tool, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention has relation to carpenters 
tools, and among the objects in view is to pro 
vide a combined square and bevel and side 
gage, commonly termed clapboard-gage. 
The invention consists in certain features 
of construction hereinafter specified, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
perspective of a combined bevel and square 
constructed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation, the squaring ends 
being raised to operative positions. Fig. 3 is 
a longitudinal vertical section. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
1 represents what is usually termed the 
butt of the device, which is preferably formed 
of wood, and I provide the same with a longitu 
dinal slot 2, extending from one end to near 
the other and transverse to said butt. The 
upperface of the butt is provided with a metal 
plate 3, which is secured to the same by means 
of screws 4, said plate terminating short of 
the ends of the butt, leaving recesses 5 and 6 
in the upper faces of the butt, Within the 
recesses 5 and 6 the butt is longitudinally re 
cessed or slotted, as at 7, and transversely 
slotted or grooved, as at 8, the latter occur 
ring about midway the recesses 5 and 6. 
In the outer ends of each of the recesses 5 
and 6, and occupying about one-half of the 
same, are located metal plates 11, the inner 
ends of which are bent to form one-half of a 
hinge-joint 14 and lie in the transverse slots 
8. The remainder of the recesses are occu 
pied by leaves 10, the outer edges of which 
are bent to form the remaining portions of 
the joint, and the two leaves are connected to 
the plates by pintles 15. The plates 11, lo 
cated at the ends of the butt, are provided 
with screw-openings 12, through which are in 
serted screws terminating in the butt, 
Within the two longitudinal recesses or slots 
7 are mounted flat springs 16, the free ends 
of which bear against cut-away portions 17 
O 
(5 
3O 
35 
45 
formed in the outer surfaces of the hinges 14, 
whereby each leaf is normally maintained in 
the same plane with its plate 11 and yet may 
be raised out of the recess 7 and to an exact 
right angle with the plate 11 and also with 
the butt 1. 
18 represents the blade or bevel, which is 
formed of metal, and with a longitudinal slot 
19 extending for a portion of its length. The 
blade described is inserted within the slot 2 
and is maintained at any angle with relation 
to the butt through the medium of a bind 
ing-bolt 20, passing through the plate 11, lo 
cated at the front of the butt, which bolt is pro 
vided with a set-nut 21 designed to bind upon 
the plate 11. By loosening the binding-bolt 
the blade may be swung upon its pivot until 
partially embraced by and in line with the 
slot 2, when by pushing upon the slotted end 
of the blade the same will be incased by the 
butt. 
By the construction described it is appar 
ent that the device may be used either as a 
square or bevel, and by throwing the hinged 
leaves 10 to a right-angular position and from 
out recesses 7 said device may be used as a 
clapboard-marker. 
The operation is as follows: The butt of the 
device is held in a vertical position, that one of 
the leaves 10 adjacent to the set-screw and 
blade being inserted under the lower edge of. 
the last clapboard applied, after which the 
next board is applied and adjusted to proper 
position by having its lower edge resting 
lightly upon or brought into contact with the 
upper or opposite leaf 10. The board is then 
nailed and the device moved up a board and 
the operation repeated. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. A square the butt of which is recessed 
at opposite ends and provided with opposite 
hinged leaves adapted to fold within the re 
cesses or be swung at a rightangle to the butt 
and transversely of the same, substantially as 
specified. 
2. A square the butt of which is recessed 
at its opposite ends, metal plates secured 
within and occupying the outer halves of the 
recesses, and leaves hinged to the inner edges 
of the plates and occupying the remainder of 
the recesses, substantially as specified. 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
436,542 
3. A square the butt of which is provided 
With opposite end recesses, the bottoms of 
which are transversely and longitudinally 
slotted, metal plates located in the ends of the 
recesses and occupying a portion of the same, 
leaves hinged to the inner ends of the plates, 
and having the hinge-joints seated in the trans 
verse slots and springs seated in the longi 
tudinal slots and bearings on the hinges, sub 
stantially as specified. 
4. The butt 1, slotted longitudinally and 
transversely as at 2, and provided with a su 
perimposed plate 3, terminating short of the 
ends of the butt and forming recesses 5 and 6, 
said butt being transversely grooved, as at 8, 
and longitudinally recessed, as at 7, within 
Io 
the recesses 5 and 6, and provided with flat 
springs within the recesses 7, in combination 
with the plates 11, mounted in the outer ends 
of the recesses 5 and 6, and having hinged 
leaves 10, a binding-screw passed through 
one of the plates, and the blade 18, slotted as 
at 19, mounted thereon and fitting the slot 2, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
GEORGE B. ORSWELL. 
Witnesses: 
J. C. KELSO, 
J. F. KIMBALL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436642.txt	No. 436,642. 
SCH00, DESIK, 
Patented Sept. 16, 1890, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 436,642. 
 
C. B. TOWLE. 
SCHOOL DESK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept, 16, 1890. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES B. TOWLE, OF WALLEJO, CALIFORNIA. 
S C H O O L D ES K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,642, dated September 16, 1890. 
Application filed February 5, 1890, Serial No. 389,303, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all typhi, ??, i? ??? ??? ??fr?: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES B. To WLE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wal 
lejo, Solano county, State of California, have 
invented an Improvement in School-Desks; 
and I hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same. 
Myinvention relates to that class of school 
desks which are provided with a sliding or 
adjustable top, a vertically-adjustable seat, 
and a vertically-adjustable foot-rest. 
My invention consists in the novel details 
of construction and arrangement relating to 
these several parts and to other features, all 
of which will be hereinafter fully described, 
and specifically pointed out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
School-desk of this class, simple in construc 
tion and economical in manufacture. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
for a more complete explanation of my in 
vention, Figure 1 is a perspective view of my 
desk, the sliding top being partially drawn 
down. Fig. 2 is a detail perspective showing 
the adjustable seat. Fig. 3 is a vertical sec 
tion of my desk. Fig. 4 is a perspective of 
bracket H. Fig. 5 is a perspective of the 
lower portion of one of the standards, show 
ing the holes O. Fig. 6 is a view of the two 
ends of the foot-rest. 
A alre the sides of the desk, the lower por 
tion of which forms the legs a. These sides 
are to be made of cast metal of proper design. 
Their tops are formed with outwardly-pro 
jecting flanges B, which serve as guides for 
the sliding top. The sides A are held firmly 
and rigidly together by the intervening plate 
C, which is supported between them. 
D is the back of the desk, which serves as 
the back of the seat, said back being secured 
properly and rigidly to the front edges of the 
sides A. 
E is the sliding top of the desk, the move 
ment of which is limited and defined by 
means of the metal stops b at the upper ends 
of the tops of the sides and the metal stops b' 
at their lower ends. Between these stops and 
adapted to come in contact with them are the 
wooden stops e' under the sliding top. The 
top can therefore be pulled down toward the 
person only a certain distance, whereby it is 
prevented from being pulled off entirely, and 
in being moved up again it comes to its closed 
position with accuracy, both limitations be 
ing effected without noise, as the contact is 
between wood and iron. 
F is the seat of the desk. This is secured 
and is rendered vertically adjustable by the 
following construction: On the rear edges of 
the sides of the desk, about midway of their 
length, are formed the vertical series of teeth 
G. In the sides of the desk are formed the 
openings g, and upon the sides on their inner 
surfaces forward of these openings are formed 
the vertical series of grooves g. 
H are brackets having at their inner or 
backends on their outer surfaces the notched 
projections h, which are adapted to fit the 
teeth G on the rear edges of the sides A. 
These brackets have also on their outer Sur 
faces, near the middle portions, the grooved 
or flanged projections h", which extend 
through the openings g in the sides of the 
desk and overlap the sides forward of said 
openings. The brackets are also provided on 
their outer surfaces with lugs h, which are 
adapted to enter the grooves g on the inner 
surfaces of the sides. 
The brackets are connected with the sides 
by first placing them om the inner surface 
thereof with their flanged or grooved projec 
tions h' opposite the openings g. Said pro 
jections are then passed through the open 
ings, and the brackets are moved forwardly 
until the projections overlap the outer Surface 
of the sides forward of the openings. The 
notched rear projections h engage the teeth 
G on the back edges of the sides, and the lugs 
h'engage the groovesg' on the inner surfaces 
Of the sides. Thus the brackets are held 
firmly, and when it is desired to vertically 
move them they are moved backwardly until 
their various engagements are broken, where 
upon they may be moved up or down, and 
upon being moved forwardly again come to 
proper engagement once more in their new 
position. The seat, being secured to these 
brackets, is thereby moved up and down with 
them, and consequently vertically adjusted. 
The manner of securing the seat to the 
brackets is as follows: On the inner surface 
of the brackets is formed a rearwardly-ex 
tending groove I, the back end of which turns 
downwardly and is open below, as shown at i. 
? ? 
zo 
25 
35 
45 
95 
ICC 
436,642 
TI. ? 
35 
45 
5 ? 
55 
lowing construction: On the inner surface of 
Under the seat F are the usual seat-irons f, 
one of the legs of the desk are made inclined 
which have in their inner ends the elongated 
grooves N in vertical series. In the bottoms 
slots f". Secured to the outer surface of the 
of these grooves are made at intervals the 
rear ends of these irons are the anti-friction 
openings in, which pass entirely through the 
rollers f', which are fitted and adapted to 
legs. In the other lega, of the desk, on itsin 
travel in the grooves I of the brackets, and 
ner surface is made a vertical series of open- . 
On the forward ends of the inner surface of 
ings O, having straight bases and enlarged 
the brackets are mounted the anti-friction 
tops. Between the straight bases of the open 
rollers J, which are adapted to travel in the 
ings the material is left of normal thickness, 
slots f' of the seat-irons. Now when the seat 
but between the enlarged tops of the openings 
is extended to its forward position for use, 
it is grooved or shallowed out, as shown at O. 
the rollers f of the seat-irons are limited by 
the forward ends of the grooves I, and the 
One end of the foot-rest M is formed with a 
plain notch m, leaving on each side the two 
rollers J of the brackets limit the rear ends 
projections m'. The other end of the foot-rest 
of the slots f" of the seat-irons, so that the 
Seat is thereby supported firmly upon two 
is formed with a notch n, the center of which 
is slightly indented, as shown at m, said notch 
bearings and is held well in position. To 
leaving on each side the projections m'. Now, 
turn it to a position out of the way, the seat 
in inserting the foot-rest to place, the last 
is run back, moving on its two sets of rollers 
named end (the right) is directed toward the 
until the rollers f reach the curved inner 
right leg of the desk, and its points or pro 
ends of the grooves I, whereupon the seat 
jections n' are caused to enter the enlarged 
may be turned to a vertical position, its roll 
tops of the openings O. The insertion is far 
ers passing out of the open ends of the 
enough, by reason of the indented base in of 
grooves, the Whole seat turning about the 
the groove or notch an and the grooved in 
bracket-rollers J as fulcrums. 
tervening part O between the holes O, to per 
On the outer side of the seat-irons f are 
mit the other end of the foot-rest to just 
fixed the stops f, which when the seat is 
enter its points m in one of the grooves 
pushed back enter grooves ac on the inner 
N of the other leg. The foot - rest is then 
surface of the front ends of brackets, and 
pushed in at this last-named end (the left) 
come to a stop in the base of said grooves. 
until it is in a straight position, with its 
These stops serve two purposes-namely, pre 
points or projections m' opposite two of the 
vent the seat from being raised bodily when 
holes n. Thereupon it is slipped lengthwise, 
in a position out of use, and also prevent the 
so that said points or projections enter the 
seat when pushed back from coming in con 
holes, and this movement brings the right 
tact with the locking-bar K. It will be ob 
hand end of the foot-rest far enough over to 
Served that the front of the seat F is made 
allow its projections in to drop into the 
longer than the backportion. This is for the 
straight bases of the openings O and its notch 
purpose of making the seat practically as long 
m to snugly embrace the thick material be 
as the desk is wide and yet have its backpor 
tween said openings. In this position the 
???????hort enough to play between the brack 
foot-rest cannot be moved endwise or sidewise, 
etS H. 
and is firm in its position. Now to change it, 
Kis the locking-bar, which also forms the 
so as to alter its position up or down or for 
continuation between the rear end of the seat 
ward or back, or to remove it wholly, its right 
and the back of the desk. This bar also serves 
hand end is raised, so that its projections m' 
as a positive lock for holding the brackets H 
come up into the enlarged tops of the open 
in place. The forward ends of the brackets 
ings O and its indented notch no comes op 
on their outer surfaces are provided with 
posite the groove O between said openings, 
curved backed lugs L, forming between them 
whereupon it is pushed endwise to the right, 
selves and the forward edges of the sides A 
hook-shaped spaces l. The bar K is pro 
so that the projections on its other end are 
freed from the openings n in the leg; but the 
vided on its lower edge with corresponding 
hook-shaped arms le. By holding the bar at 
movement is not sufficient to carry said pro 
an angle forwardly these hook-shaped arms 
jections out of the grooves N, so that while 
are adapted to enter the corresponding spaces 
the rest may be moved in or out it cannot be 
accidentally kicked down or dropped while 
l between the brackets and side A, and as they 
being changed. It is now turned outwardly 
fit to place the bar is turned to its proper po 
to an angle until its left-hand end is free of 
sition against the back of the desk, its arms 
the groove N and of the leg, whereupon its 
passing down in the spaces between the lugs 
L and the forward edges of the sides A of the 
right-hand end may then be removed and the 
operation of putting it in again repeated. 
desk and serving as wedges to hold the 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
brackets firmly, and at the same time, by rea 
son of their shape, preventing the bar Kitself 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
from being accidentally raised from place by 
Patent, is 
1. In a school-desk, the combination of the 
the movement of the scholar in getting up 
sides thereof, having teeth and grooves on op 
from the seat. 
posite edges, the vertically-adjustable seat 
Mis the foot-rest. This is adjustably con 
nected with the legs a of the desk by the fol- 1 brackets having projections to fit said teeth 
75 
95 
OO 
I IO 
II 5 
I 25 
436,642 
and grooves, said brackets having grooved in 
ner surfaces, and a seat adapted to be placed 
on said brackets and having rollers fitting the 
grooved sides thereof and provided with a 
backportion which is short enough to lie and 
play between the brackets and a front por 
tion longer to approximate the width of the 
desk, substantially as herein described. 
2. In a school-desk, thesides thereof having 
On their back edges the vertical series of teeth 
G, the openings g, and the vertical series of 
grooves g on their inner surfaces, in combi 
nation with the vertically-adjustable seat 
brackets. H, having at their rear ends the 
notched projections h, adapted to fit the teeth 
of the sides, the flanged projections h", pass 
ing through the openings of the sides, and the 
lugs h, engaging the grooves of the sides, sub 
stantially as herein described. 
3. In a School-desk, the sides thereof hav 
ing on their rear edges the vertical series of 
teeth G, the openings g, and on their inner 
Surfaces the vertical series of grooves g, in 
combination with the vertically-adjustable 
Seat-brackets H, having on their rear ends 
the notched projections h, adapted to fit the 
teeth of the sides, the flanged projectionsh', 
passing through the openings of the sides, 
and the lugs h, adapted to fit the grooves of 
the sides, and the locking-bar K, having 
hook-shaped arms k, and the curved-backed 
lugs L on the brackets leaving hook-shaped 
spaces lbetween them and the forward edges 
of the sides to receive the arms of the locking 
bar, Substantially as herein described. 
4. In a school-desk, the brackets H, having 
on their inner surfaces the grooves I with 
Open rear ends and at their forward ends the 
anti-friction rollers J, in combination with 
the seat F, having the seat-irons f with elon 
gated slots f' receiving the anti-friction roll 
ers of the brackets, and the anti-friction roll 
ers f on the rear ends of the seat-irons fitting 
the grooves I of the brackets, substantially as 
herein described. 
5. In a school-desk, the brackets H, having 
on the inner surfaces the grooves I with open 
rear ends and at their forward ends the anti 
friction rollers J and stop-grooves a, in com 
bination with the seat F, having the seat 
irons f with elongated slots f receiving the 
anti-friction rollers of the brackets, the anti 
friction rollers f' on the rear ends of the seat 
irons fitting the grooves I of the brackets, 
and the projecting stops f of said seat-irons 
adapted to enter the grooves ac of the brack 
ets, substantially as and for the purpose here 
in described. 
6. In a school-desk, the sides A, having the 
leg portions a, the vertical series of grooves 
N on the inner surface of one of said legs 
having the openings in, the vertical series of 
openings O in the other leg, said openings 
having straight bases and enlarged tops, and 
the grooved or cut-away portions O between 
said tops, in combination with a foot-rest M, 
having the plain notch m at one end and the 
indented notch m at the other end, substan 
tially as herein described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
CHARLES B. TO WIILE. 
Witnesses: 
Jos. R. ENGLISH, 
J. W. BREED. 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
7 ? 
? ? 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436742.txt	(No Model.) 
W. ROBINSON, 
ELECTRIC MOTOR CAR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1: 
No. 436,742, 
Patented Sept. 16, 1890. 
EGS IS M S 
. : 
R 
SS 
is 
S Star 
'A 
t 
t 
SS 
N 
SNS 
NS 
ill 
L 
S 
t 
r 
SS 
 
 
 
N s 
S. 
M 
t 
S 
W 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
Wit-N esses 
|NVENT OR 
* No RS PETERs co, PHoro-Litho, washinero, b. c. 
: 
(No Model.) 
W. ROBINSON. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR CAR, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 436,742. 
Patented Sept. l6, l890. 
 
 
." A . 
taza 7. 
- 
S 
 
 
 
VVTN esses 
2. %. 62 
INVENT OR 
(No Model.) 
No. 436,742. 
 
W. ROBINSON. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR CAR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Sept, l6, l890, 
INVENTO R 
%-7%.-- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM ROBINSON, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE ROB 
INSON RADIAL CAR TRUCK COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
ELECTRIC - MOTOR CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,742, dated September 16, 1890, 
Original application filed April 12, 1889, Serial No. 304,041. Divided and this application filed February 19, 1890, Serial No. 
841,047. (No model.) 
2d danger of leaving the track. 
To all whom it may concern: 
frame. Fig. 8 is a longitudinal section show- 5o 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM ROBINSON, a 
ing the mechanism for connecting the adja 
citizen of the United States, residing at Boston, 
cent axle-frames adjustably together. Figs. 
in the county of Suffolk and State of Massa 
9 and 10 are enlarged views showing the means 
5 chusetts, have invented a new and useful Im 
of supporting one end of the motor flexibly 
provement in Electric-Motor Cars, of which 
on springs; and Figs. 11, 12, and 13 are detail 55 
the following is a specification. 
views showing the bearings between the cor 
This case is Division C of my application 
ners or sides of the axle-frames and the car 
for a patent for an improvement in electric 
frame. 
Io motor cars filed April 12, 1889, Serial No. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
307,041. 
sponding parts in all of the figures. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
A is a car-frame provided with the swivel 
a motor-car having axles adapted to take a 
ing axle-frames B B'. The axle-frame B is 
radial position on curves, and to adapt and 
provided with wheels a, and the axle a', con 
I5 combine the electric motors with the radiating 
necting the same and the axle-frame B with 
apparatus in a simple and practical manner, 
the wheels b, and the axle b connecting said 65 
whereby cars with along wheel-base may run 
wheels in the usual manner. The axle-frame 
around very sharp curves with the greatest 
B is pivoted to the car-frame at the point c 
ease, with economy of power, and without 
between the center of the axle a' and the cen 
ter of said car-frame, and the axle-frame B' 
My invention also makes it possible to con 
is similarly pivoted to the car-frame at the 7o 
struct much longer cars than is at present 
point c' between the center of the axle b" and 
feasible for electric-motor propulsion, to run 
the center of said car-frame. 
them with great steadiness of motion, and to 
C is an axle-frame located between the axle 
25 attain very high rates of speed with perfect 
frames B and B' and adapted to slide bodily 
safety and economy. 
transversely relatively to said car-frame A. 75 
The nature of my invention will be clearly 
Said frame Cisprovided with the wheels dand 
understood from the description which follows, 
their connecting-axle d'. The axles a 'b' d'are 
reference being had to the accompanying draw 
flexibly connected to their respective frames 
3o ings, which form a part of this specification, 
BB' C by means of the pedestals k k'k' and 
in which 
the springs ill'. The sliding frame C is 
rovided with rigid projections or brackets 
car on a curved track, illustrating my inven 
e e' on its opposite sides, and the frames B B', 
tion. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same, 
respectively, are provided with correspond 
35 partly in Section, with the face-wheels removed. 
ing projections or brackets fif'. The brack 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged section of the axle a', 
ets ef are pivoted together adjustably, as 85 
showing the relation thereto of the motor-sup 
shown at g, and the brackets ef' are simi 
porting connections. Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
larly pivoted together, as shown at g'. 
view showing the opposite end of the motor 
The operation is as follows: When the 
4o supporting bar and connections, a portion of 
moving car reaches a curved track, the im 
one side being removed to show the relative 
pinging of the flange of one of the interme- 9o 
position of the flexible joint of the bars ef. 
diate wheels d against one of the rails of the 
Fig. 4 is an end elevation illustrating part of 
curved track causes said wheels and the axle 
the mechanism for suspending the motor flexi 
d', together with the intermediate frame C, to 
45 bly from the axles. Figs. 5 and 6 are side 
move transversely relatively to the car-frame 
elevations illustrating modifications in the 
A. This transverse movement of the frame 95 
method of suspending the motors flexibly. 
C, with its brackets e e', carries the brackets 
Fig. 7 is a longitudinal section showing the fif 
of the frames B B to one side of the lon 
swiveling bearing of the car-frame on the axle. Igitudinal centerline of the car-frame A, thus 
Figure 1 is a bottom plan view of a railway- p 
- 
- 
- - - 
- - 
O 
436,742 
2 
causing said frames B B to swivel on their the possibility of said swiveling plates sepa 
rating from each other by a sudden jar or 
respective axes c and c', whereby the axles Ci' 
otherwise. The plate an is provided with the 
b' are caused to take radial positions on 
recess O for the reception of grease or oil, 
curves, as shown in Fig.1. The intermediate 
which may be poured into said recess through 
axle d', being at the center of the car-frame, 
the orifice o' in the upperplate n, for the pur 
is of course always radial to any curve upon 
pose of lubricating the frictional surfaces of 
which the car may enter without any swivel 
said plates. The channel p leads from the 
ing movement in the frame C. 
recess O to the socket m' to allow a portion of 
I prefer to swivel the axle-frames B B at 
the oil or grease to pass gradually into Said 
points between the centers of the axles a b', 
socket, where it is retained by the recess p' 
respectively, and the center of the car-frame. 
at the bottom of said socket m'. The orifice 
By this arrangement the pivot c becomes a full 
o' is protected from dust by the plate q. Thus 
crum, around which the wheels a and axle C.' 
the bearing-plates m in are kept continuously 
with the frame B swing as a lever, the imping 
lubricated in a simple and effective manner. 
ing of the flange of the outer wheel C against 
The sides or corners of the axle-frames are 
the outer rail of the track when a curve is 
provided with roller-bearings, which I prefer 
reached giving the initial impetus of such 
to make as shown in Figs. 5, 11, 12, and 13, 
swiveling movement. The same operation 
in which the rollers r, secured to the axle 
takes place in connection with the wheels b, 
frames, are grooved, and the bearing or track 
axle b", and frame B'. 
r', secured to the car-frame A, rests upon said 
It will be observed that the greater the dis 
rollers and fits into the grooves of the same. 
tance the pivots c c' are from the axles a b' 
The grooved roller-bearings, together with the 
the greater will the swiveling leverage be 
socketed central bearings, it will be observed, 
and the more easily therefore will the swiv 
allow ease of movement between the axle 
eling movement of Said axles take place; 
frames and the car-frame A without lost mo 
also, the greater the distance of said swivel 
tion. In Fig. 11 and some other figures the 
ing points from said axles the less will be 
roller r is provided with a groove semicircu 
the lateral movement required of the sliding 
lar in cross-section. In Fig. 12 the groove is 
frame C to bring the swiveling axles into a 
angular, while in Figs. 1 and 2 the roller 
true radial position on curves. Furthermore, 
has its periphery convex in cross-section. 
by placing the pivotal point c a short dis 
In the latter case the roller r travels in a 
tance from the axle ct, as shown, and the piv 
grooved track r'. 
otal point g of the adjacent axle-frames mid 
way, or nearly so, between Said pivotal point 
The bars St extend across and above the 
axle-frames B B and are secured thereto. 
c and the intermediate axle d'-that is, the 
Between or upon said bars the swiveling 
center of the car-frame-all slack and lost 
bearing-plate m is secured. Said bars Stare 
motion are taken up and the axles brought 
preferably made of iron or steel plates placed 
in a practical manner into an exactly radial 
edge upward for strength. At or near the 
position on curves. When the axles assume 
ends said plates are bent downward and se 
radial positions on curves, as shown in Fig. 
cured to the axle-frame by the bolts u. Thus 
1, the pivotal point g is thrown to one side of 
space is left under said bars for the motor to 
the longitudinal center line of the car-frame 
rise above the level of the surrounding wheel 
and the brackets ef and e'f'slide upon and 
become elongated relatively to each other. 
frame, all as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, and more 
fully described hereinafter. The bars St rise 
To provide, therefore, for the free relative 
between the intermediate sills v of the car 
elongation and contraction of Said brackets, 
frame A, thus economizing space, and also for 
I provide the bracket e (see Fig. 8) with the 
the purpose of economizing space the bear 
longitudinal sloth, in which is placed the 
ing-plate n is Secured to the car-frame at or 
sliding friction-block h, through which and 
near the upper surface of said sills. 
the jaws i of the bracket f passes the pivotal 
In order that the intermediate wheels d 
boltg. Thus flexible movement of the brack 
may have extreme lateral movement without 
ets ef relatively to each other is provided 
raising the car-body unduly, the side sills y 
for without lost motion or undue wear of the 
are cut away or arched upward at the middle, 
parts moving on each other. The brackets 
and the disconnected or arched parts are con 
e'f'' are flexibly connected together in the 
nected and re-enforced by the vertical arch 
same manner as the brackets ef just de 
ing plates v-one on each side of the sill 
scribed. 
said plates being firmly bolted to the sides 
The swiveling axle-frames B B' are pro 
of said sill, as shown. Thus the central wheel 
vided with the central swiveling bearing 
is permitted to move under said arch, while 
shown in Fig. 7, in which the plate n, provided 
all the normal strength of said sillis retained. 
with the socket m, is secured to the axle 
It will be observed that when the car passes 
frame, and the car-frame is provided with the 
from a curved to a straight track the im 
bearing-plate n, secured thereto. Said plate in 
pinging of the flanges of the wheels on the 
is provided with the projection n', fitting into 
rails causes all the axles and wheel-frames to 
the socket in and swiveling therein. The bolt 
c, passing through the plates in m, prevents assume their normal position and all the 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
ICC 
TO 
II5 
I 25 
436,742 
- 
3 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
axles on the car become parallel to each other. I d' becomes to a large extent an equalizer be 
Thus the axles become radial on curves and 
tween the other two motors. When the in 
parallel on straight lines and only on straigh 
termediate motor d is omitted, then the 
lines. 
bracket l', supported by the axle d', ex 
The axles a 'b' d' are provided, respectively, 
tends therefrom in both directions, termi 
with the motors abd. Each of said motors 
nating on one side in the bracket m-that is, 
has one end supported by its axle, as shown. 
the bracket is extended becomes a perfect 
Fig. 4 clearly shows the motor a as having 
equalizer, supporting the motors ab equally, 
one end supported on the axle a' by the sleeves 
thus relieving the weight on the bars g g and 
c in any usual or suitable manner. 
distributing such weight as remains equally 
The opposite ends of the motors are sup 
between said bars. The supporting-rod s 
ported flexibly in a peculiar manner, as fol 
passes through the spring-seats a b, which 
lows: The bar or frame e, formed of one or 
support the bracket i. (See Figs. 9 and 10.) 
more pieces, is secured adjustably on the mo 
The bracket li is provided with the slot c, 
tor-sleeves c, as shown at f', whereby the 
through which the stems of the spring-seats 
motor and said bar are adjustable somewhat 
ab' pass and meet without pressing tightly 
relatively to each other in a vertical plane. 
upon the upper and lower surfaces of the 
Rigidly secured to the bare or forming a part 
bracket l'. Thus said bracket l is adapted 
thereof is the horizontal bar g, extending, 
to move back and forth with entire freedom 
preferably, above the axle-frame B to or be 
relatively to said spring-seats. 
yond the connecting-point g of the adjacent 
The bearing and operation of the bracket 
axle-frames. The lower end of the bar or 
mon its spring-seats are the same as that of 
frame eterminates in the swiveling point or 
the bracket l', just described, on its spring 
bearing h, which is in a vertical line with the 
seats. The rod s connects adjustably the 
swiveling point c of the axle-frame on the car 
motors ad in the same vertical line with 
body. The axle b" is provided with a similar 
the bolt or ping, which adjustably connects 
bar e, horizontal barg, and swiveling point 
the axle-frames BC, and in like manner the rod 
or bearing hi. The barse e are connected 
s' connects adjustably the motors d' b in the 
by the horizontal bar and swivellon said bar 
same vertical line with the bolt orping', which 
i at the points hh, as shown. From the free 
adjustably connects the axle-frames C. B. 
or inner end of the barg is suspended by the 
When the car enters upon a curve, the 
bracket k the free end lic of the motor a, as 
normal position of the motors relatively to 
shown at , and from the free or inner end of 
each other is changed. Thus the intermedi 
the corresponding bargare suspended by the 
ate motor d is carried bodily with the axle 
brackets min the free endslim of the motors 
d' in a transverse direction relatively to the 
db, as shown. The bracket l is rigidly se 
car-frame A, while the motors ab swivel in 
cured to the back end of the intermediate 
a horizontal plane On the same vertical axes 
motor d and has its free end supported by 
around which their respective axles a b' 
the end of the barg. The springs op'g' are 
swivel. At the same time the brackets cli 
placed around the supporting-rods, which is 
and m n elongate relatively to each other 
supported at 7' from the bar g, as shown, 
in taking the relative angular position, all as 
whereby the motors a d are flexibly sup 
illustrated in Fig. 1. 
ported from said barg by said springs. In 
It will be observed that in the method of 
a similar manner the ends in of the motors 
operation above described the motors are 
db are supported flexibly by the springs at 
wholly supported by the axles-a great desid 
'' v', said springs in turn being supported by 
eratum-since by this arrangement vibrations 
the barg. It will be observed that the mo 
from the motors are not conveyed to the car 
tor-sleeves care adapted to turn adjustably 
body, and it is only necessary to make the 
within that part of the bar e surrounding 
car-springs heavy enough to carry the car. 
said sleeves. Consequently the free end k of 
body with its load of passengers without sup 
the motor is free to move up and down ad 
porting any of the Weight of the motors, 
justably relatively to the supporting-bar g. 
Thus my invention makes my motor-car a 
The bar e would operate as well if sleeved 
much easier riding-vehicle than the motor 
directly to the axle; but this would involve 
cars heretofore used, 
the additional and unnecessary friction and 
Figs. 5 and 6 illustrate modifications in the 
expense of additional journal-boxes. I there 
method of flexibly supporting the motors. 
fore prefer to support said bar e on the mo 
In Fig. 5, as will be seen by inspection, the 
tor-sleeves c, as described. The bar i, en 
free ends of the motors are suspended by 
gaging the lower ends of the bars e'e, keeps 
Springs from their respective axle-frames, 
the bars g g in a horizontal position, notwith 
while in Fig. 6 the mode of suspension is simi 
standing the fact that a large proportion of 
lar, but the lines of suspension coincide with 
the weight of the motors is supported by said 
the flexible joints g and g. In both of these 
last-named bars. The adjacent motors a' d', 
cases, it will be observed, the motors partly 
however, practically support and balance 
Support and balance each other, as described 
each other flexibly through their respective 
in connection with Figs. 1 and 2. 
brackets k l and the springs o' p g, as 
An inspection of Fig. 2 will show that the 
shown. Furthermore, the intermediate motor. 
axle-frames have an open space within their 
95 
Od 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
125 
4. 
436,742 
O 
periphery large enough for the motor to move 
adjustably within and above or below said 
frames during the relative vertical movement 
of said motors and the car-frame. For this 
reason I raise the bearing-bars St above the 
upper surface of said axle-frames, as clearly 
illustrated in Fig. 2. This arrangement also 
allows room for brake-rods and other gearing 
above the motors. 
It is obvious that the invention herein de 
scribed is equally applicable to six-wheeled 
trucks for coaches having two trucks and to 
cars having only six wheels in all. The term 
car-frame therefore herein used must be 
construed, for the purposes of this invention, 
as equivalent to the term truck-frame or 
main truck-frame. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a motor car or truck, the combination, 
substantially as described, of the main frame, 
the driving-axle and wheels, and a motor ar 
ranged to drive the same, said motor and axle 
being movable together in a horizontal plane 
relatively to said main frame. 
2. In a motor car or truck, the combination, 
substantially as described, of the main frame, 
a driving-axle with its wheels, and a motor 
arranged to drive the same, said motor and 
axle being arranged to swivel around a ver 
tical axis relatively to said main frame, 
3. In a motor car or truck, the combination, 
substantially as described, of the main frame, 
an axle or axles having a lateral or SWiveling 
motion around a vertical axis relatively there 
to, a driving-axle with its wheels, and a mo 
tor arranged to drive the same, said driving 
axle and motor being movable transversely 
relatively to said main frame. 
WILLIAM ROBINSON, 
Witnesses: 
GEO. A. FREEMAN, 
HENRY C. WHITE. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436842.txt	(No Model.) 
B, E, SAWYER 
PARALLEL RULER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 436,842. 
Patented Sept. 23, 1890, 
 
Vanesses 
7%z. 
4-6, 2.<2%- 
6-644 
- 
Zauventor: 
7Barnstale E. Sayer, 
y J/02, e1342/. 
-/7ttorney. 
THE NORRis Peter', Co. Photo-iro, was HINGTON, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
B. E. SAW YER 
PARALLEL RULER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
NO, 436,842, 
Patented Sept. 23, 1890. 
 
 
 
Es 
ZEZZe 
S.S.SYS, 
 
E. Zazza222222 
fig.6. 
Z'g.9 
2. 
g 
Afty. S. 
Eig. 7 
p 
y 
V1/atnesses: 
7% & 4.4.4 
4%-2422-24 
Ziraaserator: 
Burnside E. Sayer, 
they u/h 6.6-1. 
tie on is Peters co., Phcro-Litho, washi NGToN, t. c. 
N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BURNSIDE E. SAWYER, OF ATHOL, MASSACHUSETTS, 
PARALLEL - RULER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,842, dated September 23, 1890. 
Application filed Junell, 1890, Serial No, 855,010, (No model.) 
55 
75 
c 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BURNSIDE. E. SAWYER, 
of Athol, in the county of Worcester and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Combined T 
Squares and Protractors or Angles, of which 
the following, taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
My invention relates to a combined T 
square and protractor orangle; and it consists 
in certain novel features of construction, ar 
rangement, and combination of parts, which 
will be readily understood by reference to the 
description of the drawings, and to the claims 
hereinafter given, and in which my invention 
is clearly pointed out. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a plan of a draw 
ing-board, a T-square, and a protractor or 
angle, Fig. 2 is a section through the beam 
and a portion of the tongue of the T-square 
and a small portion of the drawing-board on 
line 1 1 on Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a section through 
the tongue of the square and the head of the 
protractor orangle on line 22 on Fig. 1. Fig. 
4is a transverse section of the protractor-head 
on line 33 on Fig. 3, and showing the parts 
at the right of said line in elevation. Fig. 5 
is a similar view, the cutting-plane being on 
line 4 4 on Fig. 3. 
Fig. 6 is a section online 
55 on Fig. 3 and showing the parts at the 
left of said line in elevation, and Figs, 7 and 
8 are, respectively, an edge view and a plan 
of the gage-bar for setting the tongue of the 
protractor or angle, and Fig. 9 is a plan of a 
modified form of the gage-bar. 
In the drawings, A is the drawing-board, 
having formed in its upper surface along the 
frontside and one end the rectangular grooves 
a, and a', respectively. 
B is the tongue of the T-square, and C is 
the head, rigidly secured thereto in a position 
at right angles to the edge of said tongue. 
D is a secondary head or guide-plate pro 
vided with a slot b to receive the tongue B, 
and firmly secured on the inner end of the 
spindle or stem c, which in turn is mounted 
in a bearing in the hub or boss d, and has fit 
ted upon its threaded outer end the thumb 
nute, as shown. The inner end of the thumb 
nute is counterbored to form a chamber to 
receive one end of the spring f, the opposite 
end of which fits into a corresponding cham 
ber or recess formed in the outer end of the 
hub or boss d, the tension of said spring tend 
ing to move the supplemental head D toward 
the fixed head C. 
In using my improved T-square the head 
C is placed against the left-hand end of the 
drawing-board A. Then by pressing upon the 
outer end of the thumb-nute the secondary 
head or plate D will be moved away from the 
head C until its lower edge is over the groove 
C', into which it drops, when, if the pressure 
is removed from the end of the nute, the 
spring if reacts to force the plate D hard 
against the inner side of the rib a with just 
sufficient force to insure the contact of the 
edge of the head C with the edge of the board, 
While at the same time the Square is free to 
be moved along the board in a direction at 
right angles to the edge of the tongue B. 
E is the tongue of the protractor or angle, 
pivoted at g to a plate F, which has rigidly 
secured thereto the guide plate or head h, so 
as to project below the under surface of said 
plate a distance about equal to the thickness 
of the tongue B of the T-square and has 
formed therein the slot f'. 
G is a secondary guide-plate or head pro 
vided with a rectangular slot to receive the 
plate F, below which it projects to the same 
level as the head h. The secondary guide 
plate or head G is firmly attached to one end 
of the spindle or shank i, which is fitted to a 
bearing in the hub II, which is pivoted to the 
plate Fatk, and is counterbored at its outer 
end to form an annular chamber l around 
said spindle for the reception of one end of 
the spiral spring m, the opposite end of which 
fits into a corresponding recess in the inner 
end of the milled thumb-nut m, screwed 
upon the outer end of the spindle i, as shown 
in Fig. 3. 
The spring in Serves to press the guide 
plate G toward the guide plate or head h, and 
thus insure contact of both of said guide 
plates or heads with the edges of the tongue 
of the T-square when placed thereon, in sub 
stantially the same manner as described in 
reference to the head of the T-square and 
the drawing-board. 
A stud in is screwed into the plate F, upon 
which is mounted so as to be movable verti 
cally thereon the semicircular boss or hub o, . 
95 
OO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
- , 
2 
436,842 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
in the flat vertical side of which is screwed 
the headed studio', as shown in Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5. The boss or hub o has placed be 
tween it and the plate Fa spiral spring p, the 
tension of which tends to raise said hub, and 
the upper end of the stud in is threaded and 
has fitted thereon a milled thumb-nut p', by 
means of which and the spring p said boss O 
may be adjusted vertically. A toothed feed 
wheel r, having secured to its side a ratchet 
wheel r' of somewhatless diameter, is mounted 
upon the stud O'so as to be revoluble thereon, 
the lower side of which wheels project into 
the slot f', so that the wheel r may come in 
contact with the paper on the drawing-board. 
The studio also has loosely mounted thereon, 
contiguous to the ratchet-wheel r", the lever 
s, provided at its free end with the fingerpad 
or button s', and having pivoted to its side 
the pawl t in position to engage with the teeth 
of the ratchet-wheel r", into contact with 
which it is pressed by the spring t'. The free 
end of the lever S is moved upward by the 
spring it, (shown in Figs. 1 and 6,) its move 
ment in said upward direction being limited 
by the stop-pin v coming in contact with the 
upper end of the boss or hub o, (see Fig. 6,) 
and its movement in a downward direction is 
limited by the stop-screw U., which is adjust 
able to vary the length of feed, as shown in 
Figs. 4, 5, and 6. 
The tongue E of the protractor or angle is 
provided with perforations a and ac' ac' as a 
means of attaching to said tongue a gradu 
ated bar or arm for measuring the angle of 
said tongue E relative to the tongue of the 
T-Square. 
For instruments which are not to be used for 
purposes of a protractor for measuring all the 
degrees of angularity, but provided with the 
pivoted tongue E to be adjusted to ten, twenty, 
thirty, forty-five, and sixty degrees, I prefer 
to use the straight bar J, provided with a 
single pin ), and having marked thereon 
the proper graduations for said angles; but 
for instruments that are to be used for the 
purposes of a protractor, I prefer to use the 
segmental bar J, having two pins 2 2 to fit 
the holes ac' ac', and having its convex edge 
beveled and graduated, as shown in Fig. 9. 
The bars or arms J and J are removed after 
measuring or gaging the angle. 
The angle-tongue and its appendages will 
be found very useful in section-lining and 
tinting in lines, and the operation is as fol 
lows: 
When not desired for ruling lines that are 
evenly spaced, the nut p' is so adjusted that 
the spring p Will raise the boss or hub o and 
stud o set therein to such a height that the 
teeth of the wheel r will not touch the paper 
on the drawing-board. If, however, it is de 
sired to use the instrument for section-lining 
or laying an eventint in lines, the nut p' is 
screwed down upon the boss or hub o until 
the teeth of the wheel rbear upon the paper. 
The screw stop-pin v is adjusted to the 
proper height to give the desired movement 
to the bevel-tongue at each depression of the 
levers. The operator moves the angular por 
tion of the instrument along the tongue of 
the square to bring the upper edge of the 
tongue or blade E to the position where he 
wants the first line, draws said line, depresses 
the lever S with the finger of his left hand, 
draws another line, depresses Said lever again, 
and so continues the operation till the Sur 
face to be lined is covered. 
When horizontal lines are to be drawn, the 
tongue E, with its plate F, is removed from 
the Square tongue. 
A great advantage is obtained in the use of 
the T-square having the secondary head and 
its attachments by virtue of the fact that the 
head C is always held firmly against the edge 
of the drawing-board without special atten 
tion being paid thereto by the draftsman. 
- 
I claim 
1. In combination with a T-square having 
a tongue or blade and beam or head rigidly 
attached thereto, a secondary head or gage 
plate provided with a slot to receive the square 
tongue and projecting above and below said 
tongue, a stem or shank attached at one end 
to said secondary head and having a male 
screw-thread at its other end, a hub or boss 
pivoted to the fixed head of said square and 
provided with a bearing for said spindle or 
shank, a nut on the outer end of Said shank, 
and a spring constructed and arranged to 
move said secondary head toward the fixed 
head. . 
2. The combination of a drawing-board 
having a groove a or a? in its upper face, a T 
square composed of the tongue B and head 
C, rigidly connected together, the secondary 
head or guide-plate D, the spindle c, the piv 
oted boss or hub d, the thumb-nute, and the 
spring f, all constructed, arranged, and oper 
ating substantially as described. 
3. In combination with a T-square having 
a tongue and head rigidly attached together, 
the plate F, the head h, firmly secured to said 
plate Fat right angles thereto, the tongue E, 
pivoted to said plate F, the boss or hub H, 
pivotally connected to said plate F, the guide 
plate or secondary head G, provided with the 
spindle i, mounted in a bearing in the boss or 
hub H, the nut m', and the spring m. 
4. The combination, with a T-square, of the 
plate F, the fixed headh, the secondary head 
or guide-plate G, provided with the spindle 
or shank i, the pivoted hub H, the nut m', the 
spring m, the tongue or blade E, pivoted to 
the plate F by a clamping-screw and having 
formed therein a perforation at a point re 
moved from its pivotal connection, and a 
graduated gage bar or arm provided with a 
pin to engage the hole in said blade and 
adapted to locate and determine the angle of 
said blade relative to the square-tongue. 
5. In combination with the tongue of a T 
square, the plate F, provided with the open 
ing f', and the head h, rigidly secured thereto, 
. 
95 
OO 
IIO 
II5 
I25 
436,842 
the boss or hub H, pivoted to said plate, the 
secondary head or guide-plate G, provided 
with the spindle or stem i, mounted in a bear 
ing in said boss H, the nut m', spring m, the 
spindle or stud in, set in said plate F, the boss 
or hub o, mounted thereon, the spring p, be 
tween said boss and the plate F, the nut upon 
the upper end of the stud in, the stud o', set 
in the boss O in a horizontal position, the 
toothed wheels r and r, mounted on said stud 
o', the levers, also mounted on the stud o', 
the pawlt, mounted on said lever in position 
EC) 
to engage the teeth of the wheel r", the spring 
t, to act upon said pawl, and the spring & for 
raising the free end of the lever S, substan- I5 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 7th day of 
June, A. D. 1890. 
BURNSIDE E, SAWYER. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY H. KENDALL, 
N. C. LOMBARD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US436942.txt	(No Model.) 
T. SCHEEN. 
IAWN SPRINKLER, 
No. 436,942. 
Patented Sept, 23, 1890. 
27 z7. Z 
AE 3. 
AAS SS S 
N2) 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS SCHEEN, OF ST. HELENA, CALIFORNIA. 
AWN - SPRINK ER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 436,942, dated September 23, 1890. 
Application filed February 10, 1890, Serial No. 339,876, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS SCHEEN, a citi 
Zen of Norway, residing at St. Helena, Napa, 
county, State of California, have invented an 
Improvement in Lawn - Sprinklers; and I 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same. 
l Myinvention relates to a novellawn-sprink 
e. 
It consists of a short cylindrical head 
adapted to screw upon the end of a nozzle 
or any supply-pipe, and having a peculiarly 
formed slot extending outwardly from a cen 
tral opening to the periphery of the sprinkler. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
for a more complete explanation of my inven 
tion, Figure 1 is a sectional view of one of my 
sprinklers, showing its attachment to an or 
dinary nozzle. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section 
taken through the sprinkler and in the plane 
of the discharge-slit. Fig. 3 is a section show 
ing the plane of discharge at right angles 
with the axis. Fig. 4 shows a former for the 
discharge-slit. 
A is the body of the sprinkler, which is 
made in any suitable or desirable form, either 
as a short cylinder closed at the outer end, 
which end is at right angles with its axis, or 
the closed end may be, as shown in Fig. 1, at 
an angle of thirty-five degrees, more or less. 
In the center of this sprinkler is a screw 
threaded opening. D, adapted to fit upon the 
end of any suitable or convenient nozzle or 
pipe C. From the bottom of this hole a wedge 
shaped slit E extends outwardly to the pe 
riphery. This slit is made thinnest where it, 
connects with the interior opening, and grad 
ually diverges, so that it is widest at its pe 
riphery upon the outside. It is also made 
diverging toward the sides of the slit, extend 
ing from the central opening of the sprinkler 
to the periphery. At the central opening the 
sides of the slit meet at points which will in 
tersect a line drawn through the center of this 
opening, as shown in dotted line, Fig. 2. This 
gives an area of surface to be covered by the 
sprinkler of any desired degree, and the pe 
culiar shape of the slit, being narrowest and 
thinnest at the interior and gradually di 
verging and becoming wider toward the pe 
riphery, produces a fine delicate spray, which 
d 
5 
25 
35 
-45 
under a light pressure is like a fine rain, and 
under a hard pressure becomes an extremely 
fine mist. The slot may be made to suit any 
pressure and to throw any desired volume. 
It will be manifest that the end of the 
sprinkler may be made at any desired angle; 
but I have found the angle shown in the pres 
ent case to be very satisfactory. 
Upon the opposite side of the sprinkler from 
the discharge-slit is made a small hole F, into 
which a pin projects from a supporting-board, 
or the pin may be made so as to be simply 
pressed into the earth, and thus support the 
nozzle and sprinkler in proper shape to throw 
the water, as desired. 
It will be manifest that this sprinkler may 
be equally well used as a hand-sprinkler when 
desired. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a lawn-sprinkler, the cylindrical head 
having a closed end and central opening 
adapted to be fitted to the nozzle, said head 
having a slit extending outwardly from the 
bottom to the periphery and being made 
Widest at its outer end. 
2. In a lawn-sprinkler, the cylindrical head 
having a closed end and central opening 
adapted to be fitted to the nozzle, said head 
having a wedge-shaped slit extending out 
wardly from said opening toward the periph 
ery and being widest at said periphery and 
having also its end walls diverging, substan 
tially as described. 
3. A lawn-sprinkler consisting of the cylin 
drical head having the central opening 
adapted to fit the nozzle and the closed outer 
end at right angles to the axis, a slit made 
through the side of the head, connecting the 
central space with the periphery upon diver 
ging and widening lines, a hole made in the 
side of the head opposite to the slit, and the 
pin upon which the head is supported, Sub 
stantially as herein described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
THOMAS SCHEEN. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
Witnesses: 
S. H. NOURSE, 
H. C. LEE. 
8 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437042.txt	(No Model.) 
C. P. B. PECK 
BOX WITH TWO COMPARTMENTS, 
No. 437,042, 
Patented Sept. 23, 1890. 
WITNESSES 
42% 
44tz 
1 
INVENTOR 
7v ru, V -A 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEs P. B. PECK, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BOX WITH TWO COMPARTMENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,042, dated September 23, 1890. 
Application filed February 7, 1888. 
Serial No, 263,320, (No model.) 
55 
7 5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES P. B. PECK, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Boxes or Cases, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention consists of a box or case of 
box-board, leather, or other suitable material, 
made of one piece, cut to the shape desired, 
and folded to form two distinct compart 
ments united at their base by a continuation 
of the web, so as to permit of their being 
opened at the top away from each other, and 
provided with a suitable clasp (also of the 
same piece of material) to close and secure 
them together, all as hereinafter more fully 
described, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a view of the box or 
case in perspective, partially opened, in good 
position for removal of contents. Fig. 2 rep 
resents a plan view of the sheet spread out 
flat after it has been cut to the proper shape 
and previous to folding, dotted lines showing 
where the sheet or blank is to be folded. 
On the drawings, A indicates one recepta 
cle, and B the other. 
C indicates the clasp - flap, which, when 
folded over, engages with a slit D in the op 
posite side of the opposite compartment, Se 
curing both parts together and covering the 
opening. The material is cutaway or curved, 
as shown at E, to facilitate removal of con 
tents. The two parts are connected at F, 
each having its own bottom, the Web continu 
ation F being outside of the bottom of each 
receptacle, and left free, so that each bottom 
rises away from it as opened. The flap C, 
folded at right angle to the sheet, forms the 
bottom of the receptacle A, and the flap b, 
folded at right angle to the sheet, forms the 
bottom of receptacle B. The parts c and d 
form the two faces of receptacle A, and the 
parts e,f, and g form the edge or side faces 
thereto. The fold is made where shown by 
dotted lines in Fig. 2. 
To complete thereceptacle A and strengthen 
and secure its bottom in position, the parts 
o and p are turned so as to fit thereto either 
over or under the bottom flap C, and pasted, 
stitched, or otherwise secured thereto. The 
outer edges of the flaps e and g are lapped, 
and also pasted, stitched, or otherwise se 
cured together, and the receptacle A is com 
plete. The receptacle B is formed up in the 
same manner, the flap b becoming its bottom, 
with (after folding) the partsm and in lapping 
and secured thereto, the parts h, and consti 
tuting its main faces, and the parts j, k, and 
l forming the edges of the receptacle, i and l 
being lapped and Secured together. 
I do not confine myself to material, but use 
paper, box-board, leather, &c. 
The parts where united may be secured by 
pasting, stitching, or riveting, and if metal is 
used, by soldering, brazing, &c. 
The two receptacles are twins, joined by the 
web F, and when closed united at the top by 
the clasp C. They may be opened so as to 
spread out flat. They are intended for cigar 
ettes, cigars, candies, chocolates, pencils, cray 
ons, tablets, and many other articles which 
dealers may find desirable to sell in cases. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. Abox comprising tWO receptacles or com 
partments A and B, each having its own bot 
tom, the receptacles being held in union at 
their baseby a web F, extending from the out 
ermost bottom edge of each, to which edges 
it is united, but not elsewhere, so that the 
two receptacles may be opened away from 
each other, essentially as shown and described. 
2. A box or case of two receptacles or com 
partments A and B, held together by a web F, 
the receptacle A, formed of the parts c, d, e,f, 
and g, folded so that the parts e and goverlap, 
and the part Cl, forming its bottom with the 
parts o and plapped thereto, the edges where 
lapped or joined being secured together, the 
receptacle B, formed of the parts h, i, j, k, and 
l, folded so that the parts and loverlap, and 
the part b, forming its bottom, with the parts 
in and in lapped thereto, the edges where 
lapped being Secured together, essentially as 
shown and described. 
CHAS. P. B. PECK. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. REILLI, 
JOHN J. SWIFT, 
95 
5 
O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437142.txt	N. H. BRUCE, 
MACHINE FOR SEWINGLOOPED FABRIos, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 23, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 437,142. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
N. H. BRUCE, 
MACHINE FOR SEWING LOOPED FABRICs, 
No. 437,142. 
Patented Sept. 23, 1890. 
 
  
 
 
 
60 
AMI 
 
1272esses, 
9% - Zvezzeaz: 
26-Z242 
727%ze/ZZZeae. 
42z4 - -2%-2. 
as E.2f 
. 
In III 
is 
--- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
N OR MAN H. B R U CE, OF WATER FORD, NEW YORK. 
MACHINE FOR SEWING LOOPED FABRICS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,142, dated September 23, 1890. 
Application filed March 1, 1888, Serial No. 265,821, (No model.) 
It is my further purpose to give to said 55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NORMAN H. BRUCE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wa 
terford, in the county of Saratoga and State 
5 of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Brush Attachments for 
Turning-Off Machines for Uniting Knit Fab 
rics, of which the following is a specification. , 
My invention relates to that class of mech 
Io anism known as cylinder-turning-off ma 
chines,' used for sewing together the two selv 
age edges of knitted fabrics or for securing 
together the cuffs and body portions of under 
shirts and drawers. In mechanism of this 
I5 type it is customary to place the loops of the 
fabric upon the grooved points or hooks of the 
cylinder, the attachment of the cuff being 
guided by the slack course formed in the 
manufacture of the fabric. The sleeveportion 
2O of the goods is then impaled upon the points, 
above which marginal portions of both fabrics 
project. 
The projecting edges are then 
trimmed down either by hand or by automatic 
mechanism, the cut being made so close to the 
25 points that it severs the line of stitches engag 
ing with the loops impaled by the points, leav 
ing the cut ends of the severed stitches still 
lying in the loops and upon the points. In 
order to remove these short fragments of the 
3o yarn, together with the adherent fuzzy or 
fibrous matters, it has been customary to ap 
ply a brushformed of strong bristles or wires, 
by the manual operation whereof the desired 
result was effected. This method, however, 
35 not only involves additional time and labor, 
but the friction of the brush rapidly wears 
away the brass of the hook or point plate, 
thereby necessitating its renewal at compar 
atively frequent intervals and giving rise to 
4o considerable annoyance, interruption of work, 
and expense. The manual application of the 
brush also, unless made by an expert and 
faithful employ is very liable to effect an im 
perfect removal of the Waste particles or to 
45 remove them from Some portions and not 
from others. 
It is my purpose, therefore, to combine with 
mechanism of the type specified a mechanic 
ally-driven and adjustable brush having its 
5o supports mounted at any suitable point and 
acting upon the edges of the fabrics engaged 
with the points or hooks of the cylinder be 
fore the parts reach the sewing mechanism, 
and means for holding said brush to its work. 
brush a rotary movement, in combination with 
a lateral reciprocation, in the plane of the axis 
of the brush-shaft, whereby the result sought 
is more speedily and thoroughly effected. 
It is my purpose, also, to So construct and 
combine the several parts as to render the 
brush easily and instantly removable from 
contact with the cylinder to permit ready ac 
cess to the sewing mechanism or for otherpur 
poses. 
It is also an object of my invention to com 
bine with a cylinder-turning-offmachine and 
a mechanically-driven brush simple means for 
imparting to the same an exact and delicate 
adjustment toward and from the work. 
The invention consists in the several novel 
features of construction and new combina 
tions of parts, hereinafter fully described, and 
then definitely pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a cylinder-turning-offmachine 
with my invention attached. Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation taken from the right hand of Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 is a vertical section in the plane aca, 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a detail view showing a 
slightly-modified construction. 
In the said drawings the reference-numeral 
1 designates any suitable Supporting frame 
or stand, upon which is mounted the bed-plate 
2 of a turning-off machine, having a cylinder 
3, provided with a ring 4, upon which are 
mounted the hooks or points 5 in the usual 
manner. An intermittent movement is im 
parted to the ring by a ratchet 6, with which 
a pawl 7 has periodical engagement, said pawl 
being reciprocated by an eccentric on the 
shaft 8. The sewing mechanism consists of 
the needle and looper shown in Fig. 1, and 
having the ordinary construction. 
Inasmuch as the turning-off machine form 
no portion of ny present invention, it will 
not be further described herein, the construc 
tion and operation thereof being well known. 
Upon any suitable support in convenient 
proximity to the cylinder 3, Iattach a bracket 
9, having a stud-bearing 10. Upon this stud 
is journaled a double pulley having the sepa 
75. 
95 
oc 
2. 
437,142 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
rate belt-grooves 12 and 13. The hub of this 
pulley is prolonged beyond the end of the 
stud and receives a screw 14, which passes 
into a groove 15 in the end of the bearing to 
hold the pulley in place. 
Upon the extended hub 16 is mounted a 
sleeve or ring 17, having a lug 18, overhang 
ing the end of the hub and provided with a 
cam-pin 19, the end of which lies in a cam 
race 20, cut in the periphery of the hub, and 
having such obliquity that at each revolution 
of the pulley the sleeve 17 will receive a re 
ciprocating movement in a direction parallel 
with the axis of the stud. Upon the sleeve 
is formed or mounted a bracket 21, having an 
opening in which is inserted an arm 22, ad. 
justable within the sleeve.andheld at any point 
by a set-screw 23. This arm projects over 
the ring 4, and upon its extremity is formed 
a stud 24, upon which is mounted a rotary 
brush 25, having a pulley 26, which is geared 
by a belt 27 to the pulley 12 upon the stud 
10, the latter being driven by a belt 28, run 
ning on the pulley 13 and actuated from the 
power-shaft or in any other suitable manner. 
Beneath the arm 22 I place a post 29, hav 
ing a female screw, in which is mounted a 
vertically-adjustable set-screw 30, having a 
head, upon which the arm 22 rests, and by 
which the screw may be adjusted. A spring 
31, attached to the arm and to the support or 
table beneath, holds the brush down to its 
work, and at the same time permits the easy 
adjustment of the screw 30. A loose pulley 
32 may be mounted on the stud 10 to receive 
the driving-belt when the operation of the 
brush is not required. The parts being thus 
constructed and arranged, and the fabrics be 
ing in place upon the points and properly 
trimmed, the mechanism is set in motion. 
As the intermittently-moving point-ring ro 
tates beneath the brush 25, the latter revolves 
rapidly against the edges of the fabric looped 
upon the points, and at the same time re 
ceives a rapid horizontal reciprocation in com 
bination with its rotary movement. If prop 
erly adjusted by means of the set-screw 30, 
the revolving brush will speedily and thor 
oughly remove the particles of thread and 
other adherent material and leave the edges 
of the fabrics in a perfectly clean and uni 
form condition throughout. 
I may for the purpose of imparting a hori 
Zontal reciprocation to the brush use the con 
struction shown in Fig. 4, in which a cam-race 
33 is cut upon a hub formed upon the brush, 
a cam-pin 34 being mounted upon the arm 22. 
It should be noted, however, that the com 
bined rotary and reciprocating movement is 
not an essential feature of my invention, as 
I may employ a brush having a rotary move 
ment only, although I regard the combined 
rotary and reciprocating movement as pref 
erable, as it more perfectly removes the sev 
ered ends of the thread or yarn and effects a 
more thorough cleansing of the fabrics. 
I have shown the support for the brush 
mechanism as mounted upon the same table, 
supporting the bed-plate of the turning-off 
machine. The location of the supporting 
basket is, however, of no importance, and I 
may place it upon any Support and at any 
point where the brush may be brought down 
upon the edges of the fabrics. 
When access to the sewing mechanism is 
needed or when for other reasons it is desir 
able to remove the brush, the spring 31 is de 
tached and the arm 22 is lifted, the sleeve 17 
turning upon the hub 16 of the pulley. The 
arm may swing through an arc of nearly one 
hundred and eighty degrees, thereby wholly 
removing the brush and its support from the 
vicinity of the turning-off machine. Wings 
35 are set upon the vertical face of the pulley 
on the brush, by the rapid revolution of 
which a sufficient current of air is produced 
to carry of the particles removed by the 
brush. 
By this invention I am enabled to build the 
brush attachments separately as independent 
mechanism and supply them to the users of 
the turning-off machines of any known pat 
tern, to which they may be applied without 
change or alteration of any kind. 
My invention, also, is adapted for use with 
a straight-point plate as well as with a ring. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a point-carrying 
cylinder of a turning-off machine, of a sup 
port, an arm mounted on Said support and 
carrying a revolving brush located above the 
points, said arm being movable at will to ad 
just the brush to or from the points, means 
for revolving the brush, and a spring con 
nected with the arm and acting to normally 
hold the brush down upon the exposed 
trimmed edges of a fabric on the points, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, with a cylinder-turn 
ing-off machine, of a continuously-driven 
brush, an arm carrying said brush at one end 
and having the other end mounted upon a 
horizontal axis arranged upon a support ad 
jacent to the cylinder, and a vertically-ad 
justable support for said arm, substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination, with a cylinder-turn 
ing-off machine, of an arm mounted at or near 
one end on a horizontal axis adjacent to the 
cylinder, a continuously-driven brush mount 
ed upon the other end, over the cylinder 
points, to act upon the trimmed edges of the 
fabric carried by the latter, a vertically-ad 
justable set-screw supporting the brush-car 
rying end of Said arm, and a spring holding 
the latter in contact with the set-screw, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination, with a cylinder-turn 
ing-off machine, of an arm mounted at one 
end upon a horizontal axis, a brush journaled 
upon the other end of said arm and having a 
pulley provided with wings to create an air 
current, and means for driving said pulley 
and brush, substantially as described. 
75 
95 
do 
to 5 
O 
I 15 
I 25 
 
437,142 
5. The combination, with a cylinder-turn 
ing-off machine, of a pulley having an ex 
tended hub rotating upon a suitable bearing, 
a sleeve or ring loose upon the hub and hav 
ing a pin engaging with a cam-race therein, 
an arm longitudinally adjustable in a bracket 
on the sleeve, and a brush mounted on the 
free end of the arm, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. The combination, with a cylinder-turn 
ing-off machine, of a pulley having an ex 
tended hub splined upon a suitable bearing, 
a sleeve or ring turning upon said hub and 
having a lug provided with a pin running in 
a cam-race in Said hub, an arm longitudinally 
adjustablein a bearing on a ring, a rotary brush 
having a pulley provided with wings on its 
vertical face, an adjustable support for the 
O 
arm, and a spring drawing the arm down 
upon the support, substantially as described. 
7. The combination, with a cylinder-turn 
ing-off mechanism, of a support adjacent to 
the cylinder provided with a journal, a re 
volving hub mounted on the journal and pro 
vided with a cam-race, an arm loose at one 
end on the said hub and having a pin en 
gaging the cam-race, and a rotating brush 
journaled at the other end of the arm to act 
upon the trimmed edges of the fabric carried 
by the cylinder, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses, 
NORMAN H. BRUCE, 
25 
Witnesses: 
JOS. L., COOMBS, 
J. A. RUTHERFORD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437242.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 437,242. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
W. S. REEDER. 
BALING PRESS. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
 
---------|-- 
 
 
S 
 
H 
s 
J. 
N. 
 
V 
- 
No 
Es-s-s-s-Nessa 
N FF 
s' 
S 
SS 
N 
N 
s 
t 
S. 
I 
EI IS 
I, EI IS 
SR 
As T&ill & 
- - 
:assisit 
His H. 
VizZzzesses 
2. 22. 
Zrneroz 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 437,242. 
 
  
  
W. S. REEDER. 
BALING PRESS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
SN 
. 
22 
2ZS 
Sls 
W. 
St 
S 
S. 
1X 
ts 
S S 
S. 
WS 
N 
es i -NS NS 
 
 
N 
SS 
SASH 
O SN 
N S) 
 
NSS 
R 
St 
S. 
E. S 
SB S 
EEE 
e 
 
 
 
e Elects assaiassises 
N SN 
Tzaraesses t 
ayas 
Zes. 
 
A 
SS 
Es=Essen 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 437,242. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
BALING PRESS, 
EN1 
N 
 
24/2es 722. 623. 
26-efz. 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. S. REEDER, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO THE KINGS 
LAND & DOUGLAS MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BALEN G - PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,242, dated September 30, 1890. 
Application filed September 13, 1889, Serial No. 323,870. (No model.) 
p 55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. S. REEDER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at St. 
Louis, in the State of Missouri, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Bal 
ing-Presses, of which the following is such a 
full, clear, and exact description as will enable 
any one skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing part of this specification. 
My invention relates more especially to 
presses for baling cotton, and more particu 
larly to baling-presses wherein the bale is 
made up of several successive charges. 
The novel features of the invention will be 
pointed outin the claims making aparthereof. 
The present invention is an improvement 
upon a baling-press patented to me on the 
13th day of March, 1888, No. 379,414. 
In the accompanying drawings I have illus 
trated a baling-press made in accordance 
with my invention, the same being the best 
form of said invention so far devised by me. 
Figure 1 of said drawings is a front eleva 
tion of my baling-press; Fig. 2, a side eleva 
tion seen from the line 22 of Fig. 1, looking 
in the direction of the arrows to said line; 
Fig. 3, a plan on the line 33 of Fig. 5; Fig. 4, 
a plan on the line 4 4 of Fig. 5; Fig. 5, an en 
larged vertical section on the line 55 of Fig. 
1; Fig. 6, an enlarged horizontal sectional 
view on the line 6 6 of Fig. 1; Fig. 7, a ver 
tical sectional view seen from the line 77 of 
Fig. 6, looking in the direction of the arrows 
to said line; Figs. 8, 9, and 10, views of de 
tails on an enlarged scale, showing the eccen 
trics for shifting the driving mechanism, so 
as to actuate the press in one or the other di 
rection. 
The same figures of reference indicate the 
same parts throughout the several views. 
11 is the upper box, in which the bale is 
compressed and finished, the same being ar 
ranged above a platform or floor 12 of the 
second story. This upper box is provided 
with automatic dogs 13, which retain the suc 
cessive charges therein after the follower has 
receded. The construction and operation of 
this upper box and the dogs make no part of 
this invention, the same being covered by the 
Letters Patent heretofore alluded to. 
14 14 are the revolving charging-boxes, 
which are swung about a stout iron rod 15, 
bolted to the base of the press and to the to 
of the upper box, that is stayed at the other 
side of the press to the base thereof by rods 
These boxes are arranged below the 
1.6 16. 
floor 12, in which is cut an opening 17 at the 
side of the upper box for the cotton to be put 
in said boxes. These charging-boxes are 
made up of vertical slats, which are joined 
together at each side by timbers 1819, between 
which are diagonal pieces 2021. The tim 
bers 1819 at each side of the boxes are joined 
together by cross-timbers 2223 at each end. 
The revolving boxes 14 14 are supported in 
position by bearings in cross-timbers secured 
to the timbers 18 18 and 19 19 midway be 
tween said cross-timbers. The rod 15 is stayed 
near its middle by a bearing 24, supported by 
part of the upper box 11. The boxes are so 
arranged that when one is directly beneath 
and in alignment with the upperbox the other 
is in alignment with and directly beneath the 
opening 17. The charging-box, that is in po 
sition to have its charge compressed, is also 
in alignment with the follower 25, which 
passes through said charging - box in com 
pressing the charge into the upper chamber 
and down through and below the former in 
reaching its lowest position, so that the box 
can be revolved out of line with the upper 
box and brought in position below the open 
ing 17, as the charged box is positioned below 
the upper box and above the follower. 
In order to retain the cotton in the charg 
ing-boxes when they are being filled and while 
rotated from position beneath the opening 17 
to position above the follower, a movable bot 
It is prefer 
tom is provided for said boxes. 
ably made up of two semicircular sections 26 
26, which extend in the direction of the length 
of the boxes and are pivoted about rods 27 27, 
that are carried by end pieces 28, secured to 
the lower end of said boxes and below the 
same. From the timbers 19 at each side of 
the press, about midway of it and the charg 
ing-box, extend bent iron straps 29 29, the 
other end of which is attached to the rods 27. 
75 
OC 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
3. 
437,242 
O 
25 
35 
55 
These bent iron straps are made to retain the 
semicircular parts 26 20 when they are thrown 
outward by the upward movement of the fol 
lower. This movable bottom can be made in 
any other approved way so long as it will 
permit the follower to pass upward and hold 
the cotton in the charging-box before the 
movement of the follower commences. Con 
siderable space may be left between the semi 
circular pieces, as the cotton will not fall 
through an opening except it be quite large. 
They may be constructed in any desired man 
ner, but are here shown as composed of 
quadrant-shaped iron pieces 30, arranged at 
suitable distances apart and pivoted to the 
rods 27. Timbers 31 may be arranged across 
said iron pieces and a covering of sheet-iron 
or other material placed over the same. Said 
iron pieces are stayed together at each end of 
the arc or quadrant by timbers 32 33. The 
timbers 32 strike against thesides of the boxes 
14 when the semicircular parts are pushed in, 
and thus serve to limit the inward play of the 
same. The iron pieces 30 should preferably be 
curved at 34, as shown, in order that they may 
be lifted at their outer ends by the follower 
and thus raised gradually and easily. So far 
as I am aware I am the first to construct a 
charging-box with a bottom that is moved out 
of the way by the rise of the follower. 
The construction of the follower itself is no 
part of this invention, the said follower be 
ing of the customary kind. In order to guide 
the follower and keep it in alignment with 
the box containing the charge to be com 
pressed, I provide a frame 35, 36, 37, and 38, 
which surrounds guide-pieces 39, vertically 
arranged, that are fastened to said frame. 
The lower ends of the four guide-pieces 39 
are secured by brackets 40 to the base-frame 
41 of the press. The upper edges of said 
guide-pieces 39 are beveled, so that the fol 
lower may readily pass down between the 
guides in resuming its normal position. The 
follower is made up of a series of cross-pieces 
25, Fig. 4, arranged upon a timber 42, Fig. 5, 
which is carried at each end by two cross 
timbers 43, each of which cross-timbers 43 is 
bolted to upright timbers 44 at the ends. The 
upright timbers 44, when the follower is down, 
rest, against the base-frame 41 of the press. 
When the follower moves up, the timbers 42, 
the cross-timbers 43, and the uprights 44 rise 
with it and are guided by the guides 39 into 
the box containing the charge to be com 
pressed. Fig. 5 shows the normal position 
of the follower and the semicircular parts 26 
of the movable bottom. In Fig. 1 the semi 
circular parts 26 of the right-hand box are in 
their normal position, closing the bottom of 
the charging-box, and the semicircular parts 
26 of the left-hand box are shown thrown 
outward by the follower, which is up in the 
charging-box. 
45 is the screw that raises the follower. 
This screw is rigidly connected to the follower 
and passes through a nut 40, journaled in 
the base-frame 41, which is generally known 
as the nut-frame. This nut has a bevel 
wheel 46 secured to it, the same as in my 
patent referred to above, and is actuated by 
a bevel gear-wheel 47, arranged upon a shaft 
48, which is supported by bearings carried 
by the base-frame 41. The shaft 48 may be 
rotated in one or the other direction by mech 
anism hereinafter to be described, and thus 
rotates the bevel-wheel and nut 46 in one or 
the other direction. 
It will be understood of course that the nut, 
46, to which the bevel-wheel is attached, is 
provided at the center with a screw-thread 
which meshes with the screw-threads of the 
Screw 45. 
It will be seen from the foregoing that the 
nut and bevel-wheel 46 revolve, but that the 
screw does not rotate. When the bevel-wheel 
is rotated in one direction the screw is driven 
upward, and when rotated in the other direc 
tion the screw and follower are lowered. 
Supported by bearings at each end of the 
base-frame 41 are two shafts 49 and 50, the 
former of which is driven by a pulley 51, 
which is rotated by a belt connected with any 
suitable prime motor. The shaft 49 also car 
ries a pulley 52, which drives, by means of a 
belt, (not shown in the drawings,) a pulley 53 
upon the shaft 50. The shafts 49 and 50 are 
thus rotated in one and the same direction. 
The bearings 54 54, in which the other ends 
of the shafts 49 and 50 are journaled, are piv 
oted by brackets 5555 to the base-frame 41, 
and to them are pivoted bars 56 and 57, which 
terminate in rings 5S 59, that encircle eccen 
trics 60 G1 upon a short shaft (32, that is 
coupled to a rod 63, which passes upward 
through the floor 12 and terminates in a han 
dle 04, which can be made to engage the teeth 
of a curved bar 65. The rod, handle, and 
curved bar are all described in my patent re 
ferred to above. The shafts 49 and 50 carry 
friction-wheels 60 and 67, which are placed 
between an inner rim 6S and an outer rim (39 
of a large friction-wheel 70, that is rigidly 
mounted upon the shaft 48, heretofore de 
scribed. By manipulating the handle 04 the 
eccentrics can be so operated as to throw the 
friction-wheels 66 and 67 both into engage 
ment with the outer rim 69 of the wheel 70 
or both in contact with the inner rim 68 of 
said wheel. When the friction-wheels are 
against the outer rim 69, the bevel-wheel and 
nut 46 are driven so as to raise the follower 
and screw at a slow rate of speed, but with 
an increase of power due to the increase of 
leverage, and when the friction-wheels 66 and 
67 are against the inner rim 68 the follower 
is lowered at a rapid rate of speed to gain 
time. 
In my patent referred to above a mechan 
islm like the foregoing is used to actuate the 
follower; but in said previous patent the boxes 
that journal the power-shafts on the base 
frame slide instead of being pivoted, as in 
the present case. The base-frame and the 
75 
9o 
95 
IO 
I 25 
437,242 
8 
55 
IO 
arrangement of parts thereon in the present 
invention are also more compact and conven 
ient than that shown in said patent. 
The boxes 71 and 72, which journal the 
shafts 49 and 50, respectively, near the drive 
pulleys, should be constructed to allow a 
slight play of said shafts, in order to permit 
them to be readily shifted at the other end 
by the eccentrics heretofore described. 
The revolving boxes 14 at their outer ends 
are furnished with hinged boards 73, which 
are provided with notches that engage the 
two rods 1616 and lock the boxes in position 
during charging and pressing. 
The operation of my apparatus is as fol 
lows: Cotton is thrown in the box 14, which 
is beneath the opening 17, until said box is 
full. The hinged board 73, which engages 
the rods 16, is now folded back, so as to leave 
said boxes free to revolve, and the box which 
is filled is brought above the follower and be. 
neath the upper box. The hinge-board 73, 
carried by the charged box, which is in posi 
tion to have its charge compressed, is folded 
down so as to engage the rods 16 and hold the 
boxes immovable. The friction-pulleys 66 
and 67 are now shifted from their normal po 
sition of rest between the two rings 68 and 
69 against the outer rim 69 by the manipula 
tion of the handle 64, which actuates the ec 
centrics and pivoted boxes, as before de 
scribed. The friction-wheel 70 and the shaft 
48 begin to rotate, and the wheel47 and bevel 
wheel 46' to drive the screw 45, carrying the 
follower upward until the charge is com 
pressed, when the handle 64 is manipulated 
so as to move the friction-wheels 66 and 67 
into contact with the rim 68. The follower 
now begins to rapidly descend. During the 
first part of the rise of the follower the mov 
able semicircular bottoms 26 are forced out 
ward automatically by the follower. During 
the time the charge is being compressed and 
the follower is returning to its normal posi 
tion the other box, which is beneath the open 
ing 17, is being filled. Previous to the filling 
of said latter box the movable bottons 26 are 
pushed inward by hand, so as to close the 
lower end of said box. After the said box is 
filled the same operation as before is gone 
through with. When the follower has reached 
its normal position, the handle 64 is brought 
to its middle position, so as to throw the fric 
tion-wheels 66 and 67 midway between the 
3O 
35 
45 
5 O 
two rims of the friction-wheel 70. Thus the 
rotation of the bevel-wheel and nut 46 ceases, 
while that of the shafts 49 and 50 may con 
tinue. 
Instead of having two revolving boxes I 
may use three or more. 
It is within the spirit of my invention to 
Operate the automatic bottom by other means 
than the follower and also to make said bot 
tom close automatically after the follower has 
receded therefrom. 
I am aware that presses have been con 
structed heretofore with a plurality of charg 
ing-boxes, each of which may be brought in 
position to compress the charge therein; but 
the use of revolving boxes for this purpose is 
made more practical by the movable auto 
matic bottom devised by me. 
What I desire to claim, and secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, as my in 
vention, is 
1. A baling-press having a charging-box 
provided with a movable bottom operated by 
the follower, which bottom is made up of 
semicircular parts 26, pivoted to said charg 
ing-box, and having straps 29, for limiting the 
outward play of said semicircular parts, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, in a baling-press, of 
the base-frame 41, the shafts 49 and 50, jour 
naled in bearings supported thereby, the 
drive-pulley 51, carried by one of said shafts, 
pulleys 52 and 53, carried by the said respect 
ive shafts, brackets 55, for pivoting the bear 
ings of the ends of said shafts remote from 
said pulleys to said base-frame, friction 
wheels carried by said other end of the shafts, 
a wheel 70, having inner and outer rims, be 
tween which said friction-wheels are located, 
a shaft driven by said wheel 70 for actuating 
the pressing mechanism, and connecting-rods 
and eccentrics for shifting the pivoted bear 
ings to bring the friction-wheels in contact 
with the outer or inner rims of said wheel 70 
in order to propel the pressing mechanism in 
one or the other direction. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and affixed my seal this 12th day of 
August, 1889, in the presence of the two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM. S. REEDER. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
A. GIESEN, 
J. A. BACH MAN. 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437342.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 437,342, 
Ay/Z 77. 
E. ANDERSON. 
SHINGLE SAWING MACHINE 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
af. 
d 
7 
Z 
a' 
- 
-- 
o 
7 : 
fi 
Y In a 
g|Hill 
: 
f : 7 
|AFE.241". 
as Systs.iii.4/A 
32" . 
IHI 2. -- 
fg? rary 
He ar'iySO475 
N ..." 
terri 
2 re: 
P 
Of. 
Elli) 
till 
Y - 
d 
2 - 
- 
Y 
- 
i 
: 
4. 
. 
1. 
le. 
i 
th 
Y o 
7 
y 
' 
h 
7. 
av 
l 
l 
a 
2. 
H| "fill Hill|| 
4. 
h 
(7.2. 
77'y 2 
7, r 
7. 
22 
2 
2. 
Y-Zi 
III"Hill HIH 
E. (Q 
a- 
Y 
'til 
22 
2f 
- 
z 
is 
V 
4 
2 
77 
l 
is 
ill' 
o 
67 
It - 
| 
& 
2. 
1- 
22 
5 
Z 
o 
i 
a 
Hill 
2. 
Gd 
a 
o 
2 - 
a 
Y 
s 
Wilpe sses, 
4%Z. 
ress) 
Ipilepir 
A/ezzza224Zzazersova, 
3y 4, 24//lilrpcys. 
(No Model.) 
No. 437,342. 
 
5. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
SHINGLE SAWING MACHINE, 
E, ANDERSON. 
- 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
Olli.HIKEM 
7 
iii. 
Hill 
z 
all 27. 
2ze 
iHE 
4. 
w 
7. In d 
l 
Wilpesses 
A.4. 
- 
fly Aza/Airpys, 
loopir 
AZZZZve-A722ersova, 
(No Model.) 
w 
E. ANDERSON, 
SHINGLE SAWING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 437,342. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
N - N. s.s. J. 
it 
is 
N 
e 
S. 
SY 
R. 
s. 
R. 
Ei se 
| 
R 
NE 
 
, s: By J2 za/ Alfreys, 
Wiftesses: 
/2%. 
OSIQochow- 
Ipilepiar 
ZZzz21zaze/save? 
6%-6. 
THE MORRIS PETERS co, PHOTO-Litho, washingToti, o, c. 
E, ANDERSON. 
SHINGLE SAWING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 437,342. 
 
pve plor 
Z/22/222 12262erson, 
y/zzayAllrpey S. 
Norris Peters Co., Photo-LTHo, washington, d. c. 
E, ANDERSON. 
SHINGLE SAWING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 437,342, 
 
Wilpesses: 
7% Z 
loverfr 
Aaveza Azazersoe, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN ANDERSON, OF TRYON CITY, NORTH CAROLINA. 
SHINGLE-SAWING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,342, dated September 30, 1890. 
Application filed May 1, 1890, Serial No. 350,193, (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN ANDERSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Tryon 
City, in the county of Polk and State of North 
Carolina, have invented a new and useful 
Shingle-Sawing Machine, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
- Thisinvention relates to shingle-sawingma 
chines, and is more particularly an improve 
ment on a similar machine for which United 
Statesletters Patent No. 397,328 were granted 
to me February 5, 1889. 
The object of the invention is to improve 
the operation and details of construction of 
the said machine, and this object I attain by 
the mechanism hereinafter more fully de 
scribed, and illustrated in the drawings, in 
which 
Figures 1 and 2 are elevations of a machine 
embodying my improvement, being taken 
from opposite sides. Fig. 3 is a plan view of 
the same. Fig. 4 is an end View. Fig. 5 is a 
central longitudinal section. Fig. 6 is a trans 
verse section through the leveling-bars. Fig. 
7 is an enlarged perspective view of one of 
the carriages removed from the frame. Fig. 
8 is a similar view of one of the leveling de 
Fig. 9 is a similar view of one of the 
vices. 
oscillating plates and the cam-shaft operated 
thereby. Fig. 10 is an enlarged elevation, 
partly broken away, of the saw-shaft and its 
bearings. Fig. 11 is an enlarged perspective 
view from the under and front side of one of 
the leveling-bars. Fig. 12 is a plan view of 
the upper bearing of the saw-shaft. 
A represents a suitable frame of any de 
sired shape, size, or construction which may 
be preferred, and journaled vertically, pref 
erably at one end thereof, is the main shaft B, 
which has suitable pulleys formed thereon. 
From one of these pulleys extends a belt C, 
which passes around a pulley upon the ver. 
tical shaft D, which has a horizontally-revolv 
ing saw E secured to its upper end. At its 
lower end the shaft D is seated in a step d, 
which is inclosed within a box d', carried by 
a cross-bar a? of the frame, and through the 
sides of this box pass set-screws d, whose 
points abut against the step d, whereby the 
latter may be adjusted to a limited extent. 
The upper bearing is journaled in a box D', 
which has a lug D, closely fitting a socket in 
a cross-bar A', whose ends are journaled in 
the sides of the frame and the bearing held 
therein on a pivot D'. 
D are set-screwspassing through the beam 
A' and bearing upon the side of the box D', 
whereby the latter may be held in any de 
sired position. Over the ends of these set 
screws are engaged the hooks D of a yoke D, 
which passes around the outer half of the 
bearing D, and a set-screw D passes through . 
Said yoke and bears against said outer half 
to tighten it, which half can thereby be made 
separate and independent from the other half. 
With this arrangement I am enabled to cut 
out the beam A', as shown at A', so that the 
outer half of the bearing and the yoke can be 
removed, and afterward the shaft D and with 
it the saw can be taken from the machine. 
From a second pulley on the shaft B ex 
tends the belt Faround the vertical shaft G, 
provided with a pulley, as shown, to receive 
it, and this shaft also carries a beveled wheel 
H. The latter meshes with a similar wheel 
I, which is feathered or keyed upon a hori 
Zontal shaft K, journaled in the sides of the 
frame A and having a crank Lupon its outer 
end. To the end of this crank is connected 
a pitman-rod U, whose outer end is pivoted 
to the lower end of the lever W. To the up 
per end of this lever, in turn, is pivoted the 
connecting-rod V, which is connected with 
the carriages in a manner to be described 
hereinafter, and which therefore serves the 
same purpose as in my former patent, above 
Secured to the side of the frame 
referred to. 
A at one end is a metal plate X, through one 
of a number of holes in which is passed the 
pivot pin or bolt, upon which the lever W is 
mounted, by which construction the pivotal. 
point of the lever can be changed at the will 
of the operator, so as to give the carriages a 
longer or shorter movement, as may be de 
sired, and as will be understood. Pivoted to 
the lever W is a second pitman-rod M, whose 
other end is pivotally connected with a block 
O, which slides upon a guide-bar N on the 
side of the frame. 
P is a rod extending the length of the frame 
and having blocks Qatits ends provided with 
inclined upper faces, and R are nuts on the 
rod P, against which thesliding block Ostrikes 
alternately when near the opposite ends of 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
95 
do 
437,342 
O 
its movement, and it will be seen that by ad 
justing the nuts R the movements of the in 
clined blocks Q can be regulated at will, al 
though they will always move in unison. 
T is a sleeve mounted loosely upon the rod 
P, and which may be adjusted thereon by ad 
justing-nuts at either end thereof, as will be 
understood, and S is a crank, which has a pin 
at its Outer end engaging a slot in the plate 
ti, depending from and carried by said sleeve. 
J is a shaft journaled beneath and extend 
ing across the frame A, and to either end of 
which is secured one of the cranks S. It will 
be understood that the two sides of this ma 
chine are duplicates with respect to the con 
struction above described, and that the shaft 
J, connecting the two cranks S, thereby con 
nects the two rods P and give them a simul 
taneous and synchronous movement in each 
'direction, which movements may be regu 
lated and adjusted by the several nuts in a 
manner which will be readily understood. 
The letter Y designates the carriage-frame, 
which is pivoted at a to the sides of the frame 
A and at their centers, and which frame is 
provided with guides or tracks b for the car 
riages hereinafter described. By this ar 
rangement the carriage-frame is allowed to 
oscillate or rockslightly overits central pivot, 
and its ends c, which are beveled to fit the in 
clined blocks Q, are guided behind plates or 
guides y, secured to the main frame A. The 
movement of the lever W of block O and of 
the rods P will therefore cause the carriage 
frame to rock 'on its pivots, as will be under 
stood. Reciprocating on said tracks b are 
the carriages Y, of which there are two, du 
plicates of each other, one at each end of the 
carriage-frame Y. Each carriage comprises 
a light frame-work, preferably having fric 
tion-rollers d located in its edges, which run 
upon the tracks b in the usual manner. At 
one side of the carriage is secured a station 
ary, toothed dog Z, and sliding in suitable 
grooved guides B at the other side of the car 
riage is a movable toothed dog Z, adapted to 
hold the block from which the sawing is done 
in a manner well known in this art. In the 
upper side of the movable dog are two pro 
jections D and e, and E is an L-shaped lever 
pivoted to the body of the carriage and hav 
ing along slot in its body, which engages the 
innermost projection ID' on the movable dog 
Z'. A spring C', carried by the carriage-body, 
presses the other end of the lever E' inwardly, 
and consequently forces the said dog forward 
in the guides. 
F is a slotted guide carried by the car 
riage-body, within the slot in which the two 
projections D' and e slide freely, the former 
projection fitting said slot, but the latter be 
ing considerably narrower, whereby the mov 
able dog will be permitted a slight lateral or 
pivotal movement around the front projec 
tion, in order to accommodate itself to blocks 
of different sizes and shapes or of uneven 
contour. Projecting from the outer side of 
75 
the carriage is a lever G', having a ping' in 
its inner end, which engages the long slot in 
the lever E', and the outer end of the pivoted 
lever G' preferably carries a friction-roller, 
Which engages an inclined plate H', secured 
to the frame A. When the carriage is ap 
proaching the end of its stroke, the outer end 
of the lever G' strikes this inclined plate so as 
to cause said lever to turn upon its pivot and 
to force the movable dog Z'backward against 
the pressure of the spring C, and thus allow 
the blockfrom which the shingleisbeing sawed 
and which was held between the stationary dog 
Zand the movable one Z' to drop upon the tilt 
ing frame before the carriage begins its back 
Ward movement, and thus saw another shingle 
from the block. This block drops just after 
it passes the edge of the saw and before the 
backward movement of the carriage begins 
As the carriage moves back 
to take place. 
ward and the end of the lever G' becomes dis 
engaged from the inclined plate H', the mov 
able dog Zagain engages with the block and 
holds it while a shingle is being sawed. 
Across the top of the carriage is mounted a 
pair of sliding bars.f, having rods g at their 
ends, which pass through divided bosses at 
each side of the carriage. The lower mem 
bers h of these bosses have screws i passing 
loosely through the upper members, and nuts 
i engage the upper ends of said screws, where 
by the two members may be clamped together. 
Said members are provided in their meeting 
faces with registering-grooves, in which are 
seated the rods g of the bars f. The bars can 
thus be adjusted to blocks of various sizes, 
which blocks are guided between depending 
flanges k, carried by the inner faces of the 
bars.f, and which pass very closely over the 
upper face of the saw; but it will be under 
stood that the blocks are clamped only be 
tween the stationary and movable jaws. 
The carriage-frame Y is provided with alon 
gitudinal slot y', within which moves a block 
l, which is pivotally connected with the free 
end of the lever V, and on the inner side of 
this block are two pins m, located one near 
each end thereof. Upon each of the carriages 
Y is pivoted a latch n, which is adapted to 
engage over one of the pins m, as will be seen. 
When so engaged, the movement of the lever . 
W will reciprocate the blockl, and one or both 
of the carriages Y will be moved in unison 
therewith, according as the operator may en 
gage the latches n. 
Secured to the opposite inner sides of the 
frame A are the horizontally-grooved guides, 
in which are the supporting-frames J, which 
move longitudinally therein and are held at I 25 
any desired position by set-screws j', and 
hence, as the saw becomes worn away by 
sharpening, these frames J can be adjusted 
forward so as to always maintain the same 
relative position to the saw. Pivoted at each 
end of each of the frames J is a tilting frame 
L', to the free inner end of which is adjusta 
bly secured the plate M', upon the upper edge 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
437,842 
3 
Io 
of which the blockis supported when dropped the carriage reciprocates, the plate U is thus 
caused to oscillate upon the shaft Q', which 
by the dogs into position to have another 
oscillation during the in Ward movement of 
shingle sawed from it. The plate M' is piv 
the carriage has no effect upon the shaft; but 
oted at one end to an upright member of the 
tilting frame L' and is adjusted vertically by 
during the outward movement of said car 
riage. turns the shaft a quarter-revolution, 
a set-screw N' beneath it, so that the plate 
and through the cams R', thus alternately 
can be leveled or adjusted at an angle to the 
elevates the two tilting frames L', as will be 
horizontal, as may be desired. 
understood. Rotary power being now applied 
Passing through the tilting frame L' is a 
to the main shaft B, the saw is rapidly ro 
set-screw S', which bears at its lower end upon 
a metallic straps, carried by the tilting frame 
tated and the carriage-frame Y is rocked on 
-for a purpose hereinafter described, and also 
its pivots, as above described. The blockl 
is reciprocated within the slot y' in the car 
passing through said tilting frame is a set 
riage-frame, and the carriages Y may bein 
screw O', which bears upon a strap of the 
dependently connected to said block through 
frame J, and by this latter set-screw the dis 
the latches, as and in the manner above. de 
tance that the tilting frame shall drop down 
scribed. The nuts are now adjusted upon 
ward may be regulated. The adjustment of 
the rod P, so that the block O reciprocates 
this distance regulates the distance which the 
the inclined blocks Q at the ends of said rod 
block shall drop after the jaws release it, and 
and will rock the carriage-frame Y, which 
the regulation or adjustment of the plates M' 
rocking is so timed and regulated that just 
effected by the set-screws N' controls the an 
as one carriage has moved forward and the 
gle at which the block shall be presented to 
block therein has been completely sawed, the 
the saw, and hence regulates the thickness 
sawed-off piece falling to the ground, that end 
of the edges of the pieces sawed. Of course 
of the carriage-frame will rise and the other 
the higher the tilting frames are raised at 
end fall as the frame rocks, so that the piece 
their free ends the shorter the distance the 
block will drop and the thinner the shingles 
of the block which remains will be lifted off 
the revolving saw and will not touch it as it 
Will be. 
is carried back to its position over the tilting 
Passing horizontally and transversely 
frames L. The dogs release the block at 
through the frame A and journaled in the 
this point through the instrumentality of the 
supporting-frame J is a shaft Q', which is 
plate H', and it drops onto the 
provided with cams R', set at an angle to each 
lever G' and 
tilting frames L', where it is tilted lengthwise 
other, which cams, when the shaft is rotated, 
of the grain so as to saw the next shingle at 
alternately raise the tilting frames L' by 
the proper angle. If the shingles are to be 
pressing upwardly against the metallic straps 
made thinner at one edge than at the other, 
s, carried by the tilting frames, as above men 
the plates M' are adjusted by the set-screws 
tioned. The cams are set at an angle to each 
N', or if pieces are to be sawed thinner at one 
other, so that first one tilting frame is oper 
edge than at the other, but of the same thick 
ated and then the other, thus causing the 
ness at each end, these plates are so adjusted; 
ends of the blocks to be alternately raised 
but the latches q are moved so as to disen 
and causing the butt of the shingle to be 
gage the pawls W from the ratchet-wheels T', 
sawed first from one end and then the other. 
and the shafts Q', with their camsR', will not 
The amount of movement given to the tilting 
be intermittently rotated. The degree of rise 
frames by the cams is regulated by the set 
andfall of the tilting frames can be regulated 
screws S. 
by the set-screws, as well as the exact incli 
To the outer end of each of the shafts Q' is 
plates M', all as above de 
rigidly secured a ratchet-wheel T", having 
nation of the 
scribed. As the carriages move forward, the 
four teeth, and mounted loosely upon the 
blocks therein are clamped between the dogs, 
shaft just inside the ratchet-wheel is a plate 
as above described, and after the sawing has 
U, to which is pivoted a spring-actuated pawl 
been done and the carriages recede the dogs 
W', which engages the teeth of the ratchet 
release the block, and the latter drops upon 
and turns the shaft Qin one direction. It is 
the tilting frames, being guided in its descent 
sometimes desirable, however, to operate the 
by the depending flanges k, carried by the 
machine without tilting the block, and for 
bars f. When a differently-sized block is to 
this purpose I have provided a latch q, piv 
be applied, the bars fare adjusted closely but 
oted to the plate U and having a notch r" in 
'not tightly against its sides and the thumb 
its free end. When the latch is pressed for 
nuts i are tightened so as to clamp the two 
wardly and in Wardly, the notch therein en 
members of the bosses h upon the rods g and 
gages a projection on the pawl W' and holds 
hold the bars in proper position, as will be 
the same out of engagement with the ratchet 
readily understood. 
wheel; but when the latch is thrown out 
wardly the pawl is permitted to engage the 
What I claim is- 
1. The combination, with the main frame 
ratchet, as will be understood. Secured to 
and the sawing mechanism carried thereby, of 
each carriage Y is a curved arm W, passing 
a carriage - frame centrally pivoted to said 
over the side bar of the carriage-frame Y, 
main frame, carriages guided in said carriage 
which arm at its lower end is turned out 
wardly and enters a slot in the plate U'. As frame, and means, substantially as described, 
- 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
bo 
75 
95 
I OO 
O 
IIS 
f 25 
4. 
437,342 
- - - 
forth. 
for rocking said carriage-frame on its pivots, 
as and for the purpose described. 
2. The combination, with the main frame 
and the sawing mechanism carried thereby, of 
a carriage-frame centrally pivoted to said 
main frame, carriages guided in said carriage 
frame, a rod carried by said main frame, 
blocks at the ends of said rod having inclined 
upper faces upon which the ends of said car 
riage-frame rest, and connections, substan 
tially as described, between said rod and the 
sawing mechanism, as and for the purpose set 
3. The combination, with the main frame 
and the sawing mechanism carried thereby, of 
a carriage-frame centrally pivoted to said 
main frame, carriages guided in said carriage 
frame, a rod carried by said main frame, 
blocks at the ends of said rod having inclined 
upper faces upon which the ends of said car 
riage-frame rest, nuts adjustably mounted on 
said rod, a block loosely fitting said rod be 
tween said nuts, a rod pivoted to said block, 
and connections between the outer end of said 
rod and said Sawing mechanism, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. The vertical rotating saw-shaft and the 
saw connected thereto, in combination with 
the main frame carrying the carriages, a box 
carried by said frame, a step within said box 
in which the lower end of said shaft is seated, 
set-screws through the sides of said box bear 
ing against said step, a cross-barin said frame 
having a socket, a box having a lug pivoted 
in said socket, in which box said shaft is jour 
naled, and set-screws passing through said 
cross-bar and abutting against the sides of the 
box, substantially as described. 
5. The vertical rotating saw-shaft and the 
saw connected thereto, in combination with 
the main frame carrying the carriages, a box 
carried by said frame, and a step adjustably 
mounted in said box, in which step the lower 
end of said shaft is seated, a cross-bar in said 
frame having a socket, a divided box, one 
member of which has a lug pivoted in said 
socket, set-screws passing through said cross 
bar and abutting against the sides of said 
member, a yoke having its ends hooked over 
said set-screws, a complementary member 
completing said box and forming a bearing 
for said shaft, said member being embraced by 
said yoke, and a set-screw through the latter 
bearing upon said complementary member, 
substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with the mainframe, the 
sawing mechanism carried thereby and at the 
longitudinal center thereof, and the carriage 
frame mounted upon said main frame and 
provided with alongitudinal slot, of the block 
reciprocating in said slot and provided with 
two pins, the carriages sliding in said car 
riage-frame, and latches connected to said car 
riages and adapted to engage said pins inde 
pendently, substantially as described. 
7. The combination, with the main frame, 
the sawing mechanism carried thereby and at 
the longitudinal center thereof, and the car 
riage-frame mounted upon said main frame 
and provided with alongitudinal slot, said car 
riage-frame also having longitudinal guide 
tracks, of a block reciprocating in said slot 
and provided with two pins, the carriages hav 
ing guide-wheels engaging said tracks, fixed 
dogs on said carriages, movable dogs also 
thereon, mechanism, substantially as de 
scribed, located at the rear side of the main 
frame for operating said movable dogs, and 
latches pivoted to the front edges of said car 
riages and adapted to engage Said pins inde 
pendently, all constructed as and for the pur 
pose described. 
8. The carriage, means for reciprocating it 
in the carriage-frame, and a stationary dog 
thereon, in combination with a movable dog 
having two pins engaging a slot in the frame 
of said carriage, the inner pin fitting said slot 
and the outer pin being loose therein, and 
means, substantially as described, for pressing 
said dog inwardly, the whole constructed for 
the purpose set forth. 
9. The combination, with the frame-work of 
a carriage, the fixed and movable dogs at the 
sides thereof, and means for reciprocating it 
in the carriage-frame, of the bars at the front 
and rear ends of said carriagehaving inwardly 
extending and lapping rods, divided bosses, 
the lower members of which are carried by the 
carriage-frame and have upwardly-projecting 
screws, the upper members of which have cen 
tral holes loosely passing over said screws, 
and both members of which have registering 
grooves adapted to embrace said rods, and 
nuts on the upper ends of said screws, all as 
set forth. 
10. The combination, with the supporting 
frame J, of the tilting frame L' pivoted thereto, 
means, substantially as described, for raising 
and lowering the same, the plate M', pivoted 
at one end to the inner end of an upright bar 
of said tilting frame, and the set-screw N 
through the outer end of said frame, as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
11. The combination, with the shaft Q', hav 
ing the ratchet-wheel T on one end, and a 
bar W, mounted on a reciprocating portion 
of the mechanism, of the plate U', mounted 
loosely on said shaft inside said ratchet-wheel 
and having a slot engaged by said bar at each 
reciprocation thereof, a spring-actuated pawl 
V, pivoted to said plate and engaging said 
ratchet-wheel, and a latch g, pivoted also to 
said plate and having a notch r, adapted to 
engage said pawl and hold it out of operative 
position, all substantially as and for the pur 
pose hereinbefore set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
EDWIN ANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
G. H. HILL, 
D. E. STEARNS. 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
II 5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437442.txt	(No. Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
W. MASON, 
MACHINE FOR HEADING CARTRIDGE SHELLS. 
No. 437,442, 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
w } is 
A 
f | 
ITILa 
El 
 
 
- 
Ac2SRReaga s 
- 
: 
7 
I 
Q--e. 
 
 
 
 
---------- 
1 
 
i) tiv 
 
 
 
(No Model.) . 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
MACHINE FOR HEADING CARTRIDGE SHELLS. 
W. MASON. 
- 
No. 437,442. 
 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
A-7. 2 
THE MORRIS PEress co, PHoro-LTHo, washingtoN, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
- 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
W. MASON. 
MACHINE FOR HEADING CARTRIDGE SHELLS. 
No. 437,442. 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM MASON, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WINCHESTER REPEATING ARMS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR HEADING CARTRIDGES HELLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,442, dated September 30, 1890. 
Application filed March 10, 1890, Serial No. 343,314 (No model.) 
55 
O 
25 
To all whon, it invay concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM MASON, of New 
Haven, in the county of New Haven and State 
of Connecticut, have invented new Improve 
ments in Machines for Heading Cartridge 
Shells; and I do hereby declare the following, 
when taken in connection with accompanying 
drawings and the letters of reference marked 
thereon, to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same, and which said drawings con 
stitute part of this specification, and repre 
sent, in 
Figure 1, a front view of the machine, parts 
broken away for the purpose of illustration; 
Fig. 2, a side view showing the anvil, slides, 
and a portion of the bed in vertical central 
section; Fig. 3, a vertical section through the 
anvil, showing the spindle and shell after the 
heading operation; Fig. 4, a transverse section 
on line acac of Fig. 3; Fig. 5, a modification in 
the arrangement of the anvil. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in the construction of a machine for heading 
cartridge-shells of the larger sizes. 
In the more general construction of ma 
chines for heading cartridge-shells, the shell 
is held in a die, and the heading-instrument is 
forced directly against the closed end to upset 
the head to form the flange, and this is per 
formed at a single operation; but in the larger 
class of shells it is difficult to thus upset the 
metal and so as to form perfect heads. 
The object of my present invention is the 
construction of a machine which may effect 
ually and practically head this larger class 
of cartridge-shells and form a perfect and solid 
flange; and the invention consists in an anvil 
through which the shell may be introduced, 
the face of the anvil corresponding to the 
shape of the flange to be produced, and hav 
ing a concentric spindle within the opening 
through the anvil upon which the blank will 
rest, and so that its upper end may properly 
shape the interior of the head, combined with 
a reciprocating and rotatinghammer arranged 
to strike successive blows upon the head of 
the shell resting upon the anvil, the rotation 
of the hammer producing successive blows at 
different points radially on the head, and 
5o whereby the metal is gradually upset into the 
45 
35 
recess in the anviltoform the flange and com 
plete the head. 
A represents the bed or base of the machine, 
and upon which the frame B rests or is made 
a part of the base, the said frame carrying the 
hammer-operating mechanism. 
C represents the driving-shaft, supported 
in suitable bearings D in the frame, and to 
which shaft a rapid rotation is imparted by 
means of a pulley Ethereon. This shaft car 
ries at its front end a crank F. 
Below the crank and in suitable vertical 
guides G the hammer-head H is arranged, so 
as to move freely up and down, and to this head 
reciprocating movement is imparted from 
the crank by means of a pitman I, connected 
to the said head, preferably through an el 
liptical spring J, in a Well-known manner of 
connecting a crank with a forging hammer, 
and so that a quick elastic blow may be im 
parted to the hammer. 
This hammer-head, 
however, may be operated by any of the 
known mechanisms for imparting recipro 
cating movement thereto. 
In the head Ha hammer Kisarranged upon 
a vertical shaft L, supported in said head, so 
that the hammer may receive a rotation in a 
horizontal plane. This rotation is imparted 
from a pulley M on the driving-shaft, con 
nected with a pulley N on the hammer 
through belts O and P, Working upon inter 
mediate pulley's Q and R, and so that as the 
driving-shaft revolves to impart vertical re 
ciprocating movement to the hammer, there. 
will at the same time be imparted to the ham 
mer a rotative movement in a horizontal 
plane. The face of the hammer presents a 
narrow surface S. As here represented, this. 
surface is produced by the introduction of a 
bar diametrically across the face of the ham 
mer. The width of the striking-face is consid 
erably less than the diameter of the head of 
the shell; but the length of the face should 
be at least equal to the full diameter of the 
completed head. Below this reciprocating 
and revolving hammer the anvila is arranged. 
This anvil has an opening through it corre 
sponding in diameter to the exterior of the 
shell, and so that the shell may be introduced 
and pass through from the upper side down 
75 
go 
95 
IOO 
437,42 
Ward. Around the opening in face of the anvil 
a recess bisformed, corresponding to the flange 
to be produced on the shell. 
Inside the an 
vil is a vertical spindle c, concentrically ar 
ranged and supported, this spindle c corre 
Sponding substantially to the interior of the 
shell, and so that the shell may be set through 
the anvil onto the spindle, (seen in Fig. 2) d 
representing the shell. The shell is produced 
in the usual manner, the head ende of suffi 
cient thickness to afford metal for the forma 
tion of the flange, and is usually made con 
vex upon its outer surface, as shown. The 
upper end of the spindle corresponds to the 
interior shape of the shell, and is in the same 
relation to the recess b in the anvil that the in 
terior of the head end of the shell is required 
to be in relation to the flange, and so that the 
space around the spindle within the anvil 
and the recess b in the anvil correspond sub 
stantially to a longitudinal section through 
the head end of the shell. The blank shell 
to be headed is introduced through the an 
vil onto the spindle c, as represented in 
Fig. 2, the end of the shell projecting above 
the face of the anvil. The hammer is then 
set into operation, and through its recipro 
cating movement imparts a succession of 
blows to the protruding end of the shell, 
these blows being diametrically across the 
head and striking a portion of the surface 
considerably less in width than the diam 
eter of the head. At the same time the 
hammer is caused to rotate, as before de 
Scribed, and so that successive blows of the 
hammer will be made radially or diametrically 
across the head, but at different points, these 
repeated blows upsetting the metal at the 
point struck, and until the whole surface has 
been operated upon and the metal of the head 
portion of the shell upset and forced outward 
into the space bin the anvil to form the flange 
around the head end of the shell, as seen in 
Fig. 3. Then the thus completed shell is re 
moved and another blankintroduced and op 
erated upon in like manner. By thus operat 
ing upon a small portion of the surface of the 
head at each blow very little power is required 
to produce the upsetting. The distribution 
of metalunder the repeated diametrical blows 
is equal, and the flange and head produced. 
by Such successive blows are of the most per 
fect character. 
For the convenience of introducing the 
blank and the removal of the headed shell the 
anvil and spindle are arranged upon horizon 
tal slides fg, working in the bed, and so as 
to be moved backward and forward, that the 
anviland spindle may be drawn forward from 
beneath the hammer for the introduction or 
removal of the shell, and then returned be 
neath the hammer for operation, and as in 
dicated in broken lines, Figs. 2 and 4. These 
slides are operated by means of connection 
with a vertical rock-shafth, supported in 
bearings on the bed. This rock-shaft car 
ries an arm l, which is connected by a link m. 
to the slidef, and the shaft also carries a sec 
ond arm in, which is connected by a link p to 
the slide g, and the shaft is also provided with 
a hand-lever r, by which rotation may be im 
parted to the said shaft, such rotation of the 
shaft causing the slides fg, with the anvil 
and spindle they carry, to move correspond 
ingly outward or inward. 
To insure the return of the anvil and spindle 
to their proper position, a locking device (here 
represented as a spring-bolts) is arranged 
in the bed, which when the slides are in their 
working position will engage one of said 
slides, as if, as indicated in Fig.1, the bolt 
provided with a handlet, by which it may be 
disengaged when it is required to withdraw 
the anvil and spindle from beneath the ham 
0. I have represented the mechanism for im 
parting rotation to the hammer, as by belts 
and pulleys; but it will be understood that 
for such mechanical appliances other equally 
well-known mechanical appliances may be 
employed to communicate the rotative move 
ment of the shaft to the hammer, such ap 
pliances being too well known to require illus 
tration, it only being essential to the inven 
tion that the hammer shall receive both a re 
ciprocating movement toward and from the 
anvil, combined with a rotative movement in 
a plane at right angles to the axis of the anvil. 
Instead of arranging the anvil and spindle 
upon slides to be moved backward and for 
ward, as I have described, there may be sub 
stituted therefor the device commonly knoWn. 
in this class of machines as  dial-feed. This 
dial-feed is illustrated in Fig. 5, the dial at 
being arranged to revolve upon an axis v, and 
the dial constructed with a series of anvils 
and spindles corresponding to the anvil and 
spindle a c, before described, each anvil and 
spindle being adapted to receive a blank, and 
so that under the rotation of the dial blanks 
thus introduced will be successively pre 
sented beneath the hammer, and then after 
the heading of the shell the dial advanced to 
present a new blank and permit the removal 
of the headed blank. 
I have illustrated the machine as arranged 
in a vertical position, and so that the recip 
rocation of the hammer is vertical and its ro 
tation horizontal, and this position I prefer; 
but I do not wish to be understood as limit 
ing the invention to such position, I having 
used the terms horizontal and vertical 
as the preferred position of the parts. 
Instead of imparting the rotation in a hori 
zontal plane to the hammer, whereby the 
blows will be struck upon the head of the 
shell in different radial lines, the rotation in 
the horizontal plane may be imparted to the 
die carrying the shell, so that the shell itself 
will revolve, while the hammer will remainsta 
tionary as to such rotation. A modification for 
thisillustrationisrepresented by broken lines, 
Fig. 2, which represents the band Pas carried 
downward with the pulley Narranged upon 
O 
25 
55 
45 
so 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IIo 
II5 
I 25 
 
437,442 
the anvil, so that the anvil itself carrying the 
shell will rotate in the same manner as de 
Scribed for the hammer, so that successive 
blows will be struck in different radial direc 
tions; but I prefer to impart, this rotation to 
the hammer. I however wish to be under 
stood by the expression as hereinafter used 
imparting rotary movement to the ham 
mer' to include such rotation whether im 
parted to the hammer or to the anvil or both, 
it only being essential to the invention that 
there shall be a rotation of one or the other 
in Order to change the point at which the 
Successive strokes are made. 
I claim 
1. In a machine for heading cartridge-shells, 
the combination of an anvil having an open 
ing through it corresponding to the external 
diameter of the blank to be headed, with a 
recess in the face of the anvil around said 
opening corresponding to the flange to be 
produced, a spindle centrally arranged within 
said anvil and corresponding to the interior 
of the shell, with a hammer presenting a face 
in widthless than the diameter of the head to 
be formed, mechanism for imparting recipro 
cating movement to said hammer toward and 
from the face of said anvil, and mechanism to 
impart rotation to said hammer in a plane at 
right angles to the axis of the said spindle 
and anvil, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
2. In a machine for heading cartridge-shells, 
the combination of an anvil having an open 
ing through it corresponding to the exterior 
of the shell to be headed, and constructed 
O 
15 
25 
35 
with a recess in its face around said opening 
corresponding to the flange to be formed, a 
spindle within said opening corresponding to 
the interior of the shell, a hammer-head ar 
ranged in guides and so as to reciprocate in 
a path parallel with the axis of said spindle 
and anvil and toward and from the face of 
said anvil, mechanism for imparting such re 
ciprocating movement to said head, a ham 
mer arranged upon an axis in said head, the 
said axis of the head substantially in line 
with the axis of said spindle and anvil, with 
mechanism substantially such as described 
for imparting rotative movement to said ham 
mer during its reciprocating movement, Sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a machine for heading cartridge-shells, 
the combination of a vertically-reciprocating 
and horizontally-rotating hammer, an anvil 
having an opening through it corresponding 
to the exterior of the shell, the face of the 
anvil toward said hammer constructed with 
a recess around said opening corresponding 
to the flange to be formed, a spindle within 
said anvil corresponding to the interior of 
the shell, the said anviland spindle arranged 
upon horizontal slides, with mechanism Sub 
stantially such as described to operate said 
slides to move the anvil into or from the po 
sition beneath the hammer, substantially as 
described. 
WILLIAM MASON. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
JOHN E. EARLE, 
FRED C. EARLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437542.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 437,542. 
C. J. WERNER. 
FISHING REEL 
 
 
AITORN 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES J. WERNER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FSHN GREEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,542, dated September 30, 1890. 
Application filed February 5, 1890, Serial No. 339,355, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLESJ.WERNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
Vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Fishing-Reels, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to the large reels 
used principally for salmon and other large 
fish, in which reels the winding-bobbin is 
mounted on an open frame which is attached 
to the fishing-pole. 
The object of my invention is to conven 
iently provide for the self-support of such 
reels in an upright position when fixed on 
the pole and for the ready connection and 
disconnection of the bobbin and crank for 
Winding up the fishing-line or letting it run, 
as desired, and to otherwise improve the con 
Struction of reels of this class. 
The invention consists of a novel construc 
tion and combination of parts, as hereinafter 
claimed; and in order that the invention 
may be fully understood, I shall, previous to 
claiming the same, describe in detail the 
mode in which the same may be carried into 
effect. Reference is to be had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a fishing-reel 
embodying my invention applied to a pole, 
the latter being indicated in dotted lines. 
Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional elevation of the 
same. Figs. 3 and 4 are detail views illus 
trating parts hereinafter referred to. 
Like letters of reference designate corre 
Sponding parts in the various figures. 
The frame A of the reel is made of a single 
piece of metal of U shape, having an ordi 
nary pole-socket B at the base of the U and 
split bearings C at the ends of the arms of 
the U for the shaft D of the bobbin E, the 
split ends of each bearing C being extended 
laterally to form lugs C, which are adjust 
able together by binding-screws F, so that 
compensation may be made for wear of the 
bobbin-shaft D. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
On one arm of the U-frame is fixed an 
oval box G, having a removable cover-plate 
G' and inclosing the end of the bobbin-shaft 
D, which projects through that arm and car. 
ries a fast pinion H. 
A balanced handle-crank I is fixed on a 
short shaftJ, which is mounted to turnil and 
slide lengthwise through the cover-plate G', 
and its inner end, which is tubular, mounted 
to slide and turn on a fixed guide-pin K, pro 
jecting within the box G, said inner end of 
the crank-shaft carrying a fast spur-wheel L, 
which normally engages the pinion H and 
causes the bobbin E to revolve much faster 
than the crank I. 
A spring M is placed on the crank-shaft D 
between the cover-plate G' and spur-wheel L. 
to hold the gears normally in engagement, 
and a lever-like handle N, having a fork N' 
On its inner end, is pivotally mounted in a 
slot O in the wall of the box G, with its fork 
N' embracing the guide-pin K behind the 
spur-wheel L and its other end projecting 
outward and downward at theside of the pole 
when attached to the reel, so that, when de 
sirous of letting the fishing-line run, by com 
pressing the pole and handle N together the 
spur-wheel L will be pressed outward and 
separated from the pinion and the bobbin 
thus disconnected from the turning gear. 
The handle N terminates at the plane of 
the bottom of the attached pole, so as to serve 
as a leg to hold the reel upright when placed 
On a flat rest. 
I claim as my invention 
The herein-described U-shaped reel-frame, 
the upper ends of the arms of which are 
formed integrally with split bearings C and 
binding-lugs C, in combination with bearing 
adjusting-screws F, connecting each pair of 
lugs C, substantially as specified. 
55 
75 
CHARLES J. WERNER. 
Witnesses: 
CLARENCE L. BURGER, 
HENRY MEININGER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437642.txt	(No Model.) 
D. COYLE. 
ROD FOR, END GATES, 
No. 437,642, 
Patented Sept. 30, 1890. 
Witness Es. 
A douisv/ 
N/ 
duo? 
E. 
Fl 
tylor 
64, 
MF. HELublin. 
4tty. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAN COYLE, OF CLARKSVILLE, TEXAS. 
ROD FOR END GATES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,642, dated September 30, 1890. 
Application filed July 10, 1890, Serial No. 358,261 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DAN COYLE, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Clarksville, 
in the county of Red River and State of Texas, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Rods for the End-Gates of 
Wagons or Vehicles of any Kind; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
rods for the end-gates of wagons or vehicles 
of any kind; and the object of my improve 
ment is, first, to provide a rod that can be 
readily attached or detached to the end-gate 
of any wagon or vehicle; second, to provide 
a rod that will effectually and rigidly hold 
the end-gate in position and afford practical 
facility whereby the end-gates of vehicles 
can be quickly opened or closed and de 
tached from the wagon-bed or placed in their 
normal position therein. I attain said object 
by a novel construction and arrangement of 
parts, fully described in this specification, 
and illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view of the rod in the vehicle 
gate. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view slightly modi 
fied. Figs. 3 and 4 are detailed views of the 
rod and its fixtures. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter Ades 
ignates the rod, which is constructed with the 
centrally-located U-shaped handle a for the 
purpose of operating the rod and conven 
iently handling the end-gate of the vehicle 
when detached from the vehicle-bed, or in at 
taching and detaching the same to or from 
the vehicle-bed. This handle is made of elas 
tic steel or any flexible substance that will 
permit of the rod Abeing lengthened or short 
ened by means of screwing or unscrewing the 
centrally-located section a. It will be ob 
Served that Said section contains upon each 
end the threaded portions a, which are adapt 
ed to the corresponding threaded orifices in 
the rod at the top of the U-shaped handle ct, 
and that there is in this section an orifice d', 
into which a lever may be placed, whereby 
the same is screwed or unscrewed. Upon 
each end of the rod Athere are the bent bi 
35 
45 
55 
furcated prongs a', which are vertically ad 
justable to the reduced portion b of the bolt 
or end attachments B. Said bolt or end at 
tachment B is secured to the wagon-bed at a 
point so that it will receive and hold the 
curved or bent prongs upon the ends of the 
rod A. It is apparent that when the bent 
prongs a' are adjusted to the reduced por 
tion b of the bolt B and then turned in an op- 6o 
posite direction it is impossible to extricate. 
the rod until it is again turned in the po 
sition in which the prongs were adjusted. 
This is one of the novel features of my inven 
tion and provides a safe and novel manner 
of locking and unlocking the end-gates of ve" 
hicles. I also attach importance to the sim 
plicity of the construction and arrangement 
of the central removable section a, whereby 
the rod. A may be readily lengthened or short- 7o 
ened. 
- 
Fig. 2 is a modified form of my invention 
without the removable central section a, and 
it is especially adapted to the end-gates of ve". 
hicles which let down or open and shut. The 75 
novel features of this modification consist in 
the bent bifurcated prongs a? upon each end 
of the rod, in combination with the end at 
tachments B, whereby the gate is securely 
and easily locked and unlocked by means of 8c 
the handle a. 
The dotted lines in Fig. 2 indicate the posi 
tion the handle a, assumes when it is desired 
to let down the end-gate. When it is desired 
to detach the end-gate, the handle a is turned 85 
to a point directly opposite the position shown 
in Figs. 1 and 3. 
Having fully described my invention and 
pointed out the novel, practical, and useful 
features, I deem it useless to further enlarge 9o 
upon its merits. 
What I claim is 
1. A rod for the end-gates of vehicles, pro 
vided upon each end with the curved or bent 
prongs a', the centrally-located U-shaped 95 
handle, the central section a, having upon 
each end the threaded portions a, which work 
in corresponding threaded orifices in the rod 
at the top of the central U-shaped handle, in 
combination with the bolt B, substantially as 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A rod for the end-gates of vehicles, hav 
OO 
2 
437,642 
ing the centrally-located handle a, and the 
bent bifurcated prongs a? upon each end presence of two witnesses. 
thereof, in combination with the end attach 
ments B, adapted to be adjusted between the 
5 bifurcated openings, whereby a suitable lock- 
ing and unlocking mechanism is provided, 
substantially as described. 
JOHN ALLISON, 
A. W. WIGTON. 
Witnesses: 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
DAN COYLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437743.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 437,743, 
J. D. ZE SLOFT. 
G0AL JIG, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet . 
Patented 00t, 7, 1890. 
% 
 
 
S280it?????? 
 
 
 
 
 
SS 
SA 
ZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZAZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ2 
TE No RRS FETERS 
co, phicro-lirio, was -1GYoit, c. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 437,743, 
J. D. ZEISLOFT, 
C0AL. JIG, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, . 
Patente d 00 t, 7, l890. 
T ? ZZZZZZZZZZ 
2%%2% 
??? 
2 
% 
[T] 
N LLLLLLLiiiiiLiLiiiiiiLiiLiiiLiiLiBiLiLiLiLiLiLiLiiLiiiLiiLiiiLiiLiLiLiLiLiiiiiiLiLiL 
* 
2222222 
E coas retres co, ProTo-LITHo, YAShINGTON, b.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB D. ZEISLOFT, OF FOSTER, PENNSYLVANIA. 
COAL-J G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,743, dated October 7, 1890. 
Application filed January 7, 1889, Serial No. 295,701 (No model.) 
To all wh???, it may conce7-7.: 
Be it known that I, JACOB D. ZEISLOFT, of 
Foster township, county of Luzerne, in the 
State of Pennsylvania, a citizen of the United 
States, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Coal-Jigs, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to coal jigs or washers 
employed for separating slate from coal at the 
mines by Washing with a strong upward and 
intermittent current of water, the water being 
actuated by a movable plunger which forces 
the Water up through the coal and slate and 
Separates them, holding the coal in suspen 
Sion, While the slate and other extraneous 
matters fall down through the perforations or 
Openings in the bottom. 
The objects of my invention are to prevent 
the great Waste of water and effect a better 
Separation by improving the construction of 
the apparatus; and to these ends I close the 
end of the tank, formerly left open, to pre 
vent the free running out of the water with 
the coal and retain a large portion of it in 
the tank to be used again. I slope the bot 
tom of the Washing-chamber from the center 
downward to the sides, so as to throw the 
greatest quantity of the coal and slate adja 
cent to the sides in order that the coal may 
be readily thrown over into the elevation 
boxes, and I provide the washing-chamber with 
an additional floor depressed below the main 
floor to catch the heavy lumps held back by 
the fenders. 
My invention consists in the several novel 
features of construction and operation here 
inafter more fully described, and set forth in 
the claims annexed. 
The invention is constructed as follows, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
longitudinal section. Fig. 3 is a vertical sec 
Fig. 4 is 
tion on the line 33, Figs. 1 and 2. 
a section on the line 4 4, Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 
5 is a transverse vertical section through the 
Fig. 6 is a like view through 
chamber 1. 
chamber 13. 
A is the tank, provided with a vertical 
transverse wall 1, extending nearly to the 
bottom and forming one side of the piston 
1 ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
chamber, and being parallel to the ends 2 and 
at right angles to the sides 3 and 4. 
5 is a frame-work supported at one end 
upon the wall 1, and at the other upon the 
partition 6. The frame-work carries the bot 
tom 7, inclined each way from the center 
downward to the sides and provided with in 
sterstices or large perforations S, and 9 is a 
secondary double-inclined bottom at the end 
of the bottom 7, lying in planes below those 
of the sections of the main bottom. 
B is a plunger-piston operated vertically 
and forcing water from the chamber 10 through 
under the wall 1 and upward through the bot 
tom 7. 
A partition 6 rises vertically from the bot 
tom 9, or it may rise from the bottom of the 
tank, and is provided with a fender 11, pro 
jecting inwardly, substantially as shown, and 
creating a chamber 13 between this partition 
and the front 12 of the tank, and this cham 
ber is also provided with a doubly-inclined 
and perforated bottom7', having perforations 
8. Gates 14 are mounted on each side at the 
lower ends of the bottom 9, through which the 
slate therein is discharged. The chamber 13 
is also provided with gates 15, controlling 
openings at the bottom and on each side 
through which the coal mixed with a small 
quantity of slate is discharged with accom 
panying water into the elevator box or leg 16, 
from which it is lifted by the buckets a of the 
rotating elevator C, and from the fact that the 
buckets are placed diagonally to the periph 
ery of the elevator and consist merely of flat 
pieces, secured at one edge, assoon as a bucket 
rises above the top of the side of the elevator 
box the coal and slate are discharged into the 
inclined chutes 17, whence it is discharged 
through the wicket-gates 18, which are opened 
and closed by the handle, as shown in Fig. 2. 
It will be observed that by the use of the 
partition 6, which operates as a dam, less Wa 
ter is permitted to enter the chamber 13 than 
if no such partition were there, and that the 
fender operates to retard the flow of water 
and to catch and hold back many pieces of 
heavy slate which would otherwise be carried 
over into the chamber 13. It will also be ob 
served that by the use of the flat diagonal 
buckets I am only compelled to raise the coal 
55 
?? 
75 
9o 
95 
I OO 
437,7 43 
settling-chamber, the rearwardly - extending 
guard projecting over the settling-chamber, 
a supplemental chamber forward of the set 
tling-chamber and separated therefrom by the 
rearwardly-extending guard, the outlet-gates 
communicating with the lowest portion of the 
supplemental chamber, and suitable elevat 
ing devices located at the sides of the ma 
chine adjoining the ends of said chambers 
and communicating with said chambers over 
the end partitions, all substantially as herein 
set forth. . 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 1st day of December, 1888. 
. 
25 
JACOB D. ZEISLOFT, 
In presence of - 
JoHN D. HAYES, 
JOHN MILLER. 
and slate to just above the edges of the tank, 
thereby saving a great amount of power as 
compared with the cup-buckets. It will also 
be seen that the doubly-inclined bottoms in 
the main receptacle and of the slate-recep 
tacle and of the coal-receptacle throw or cause 
the coal or slate to slide down to the sides 
???? to the gates in the coal and slate cham 
ETS 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to Secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination of the washing-chamber 
having the perforated bottom, the means for 
forcing Water up through said bottom, the 
settling-chamber having the double-inclined 
perforated bottom located at a lower plane 
than the bottom of the Washing- chamber, 
gates opening from the lowest portion of the 
o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437843.txt	(No Model.) 
D. BARTLETT. 
PHOTOGRAPHIC PRINTING FRAME. 
No. 437,843. 
Patented 00t, 7 l890. 
1 
 
 
2 
It 
2 SN -2 
\\ 
is r 
a assassissa 2 
 
% 
25 
 
WITNESSES 
3-6 as-Jea. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DUDLEY BARTLETT, OF ELIZABETH, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE E. & H. 
T. ANTHONY & COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PHOTOGRAPHC - PRNTING FRAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,843, dated October 7, 1890, 
Application filed February 8, 1890, 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, DUDLEY BARTLETT, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Elizabeth, in the county of Union and State 
5 of New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Printing-Frames, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
printing-frames; and it consists in the de 
1 o vices hereinafter set forth, whereby the curl 
ing up of the negative during inspection of 
the print is prevented, thus obviating an an 
noying and otherwise undesirable incidentin 
the use of printing-frames as now made. 
In the drawings, the same reference-letters 
indicate the same parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 illustrates a top view, partly cut 
away, of my improved frame. Fig. 2 illus 
trates a section of the same. Fig. 3 illustrates 
2O aperspective of the negative-confining frame. 
AAAA are the several sides of the print 
B is the glass or equivalent transparent ma 
C is the pressure-board. 
D D are the compressing-springs. 
EE are the ears, under which the ends of 
the springs D D are sprung. All these parts 
are or may be the same as usual. 
F is a frame, which may be square in shape, 
adapted to fit inside of the recess in the main 
frame, into which the pressure-board fits. It 
is made of thin and preferably, but not nec 
essarily, of resilient material, metal preferred. 
35. It rests upon the edges of the negative dur 
ing use and holds it down. The paper upon 
which the print is to be made rests partly 
upon the frame F if it be so large as to ex 
tend to the frame, and if not then it rests 
4o upon the back of the negative. In order that 
the pressure-board may take the proper bear 
ing on the paper and exert the proper press 
ure on all the parts involved, I either form a 
ing-frame. 
terial. 
25 
ap 
 
45 
55 
Serial No. 339,703, (No model) 
rabbet all about the edges of the under side 
of the pressure-board, into which the frame 
F may fit, so as to be substantially flush with 
the face of the pressure-board, or, what is the 
same thing in effect, I interpose between the 
pressure-board and the paper F a layer F of 
suitable elastic and compressible material 
such as felt-say from about a sixteenth to 
an eighth of an inch thick, more or less. The 
elasticity and compressible quality of this 
material will compensate for the presence of 
the thin frame at the edges of the paper. The 
thin frame F may, if desired, be in the form 
of flanges attached to the glass or like plate. 
The operation of the device is obvious. 
When the hinged part of the pressure-board 
C is turned up for the purpose of inspecting 
the print, the paper or the felt, and the paper, if 
the felt be used instead of the rabbet, may be 
turned up to view the print the same as usual, 
and the negative will be held down and pre 
vented from curling up by the frame F, which 
holds it down. 
It will at once appear to those who are 
skilled in this art that various modifications 
of my idea may be employed. I do not, there 
fore, limit myself to the details of construc 
tion shown and described. 
I claim 
In a printing apparattls, a thin frame inter 
posed between the paper and the negative, 
constructed and arranged to bear upon the 
edges of the negative, whereby it will be held 
down when the pressure-board and the paper 
are turned up, substantially as set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 6th day of 8o 
February, A.D. 1890. 
75 
DUDLEY BARTLETT, 
Witnesses: 
PHILLIPS ABBOTT, 
FREDERICK SMITH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US437943.txt	(No Model.) 
H. W., SPRATT. 
CUTTING APPARATUS, 
No. 437,943, 
Patented Oct. 7, 1890. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY W. SPRATT, OF BANGOR, MAINE, ASSIGNOR TO THE PERU. MOWER 
COMPANY, OF PERU, INDIANA. 
CUTTING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 437,943, dated October 7, 1890. 
Application filed September 17, 1888, Serial No. 285,628, (No model.) 
O 
25 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY W. SPRATT, of 
Bangor, in the county of Penobscot and State 
of Maine, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Cutting Apparatus for 
Mowing-Machines and Harvesters, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to cutting apparatus 
for mowing-machines employing an endless 
series of knives linked or pivoted together 
and driven by a sprocket-wheel to which the 
power of the machine is applied. 
The invention consists in certain improved 
means for guiding and covering the knives, 
which I will now proceed to describe and 
claim. Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a top view of the cutting apparatus of a mow 
ing-machine of the class to which my improve 
ments are applied. Fig. 2 represents a sec 
tion on line acc, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents a 
top view of a part of the chain of knives. 
Fig. 4 represents a section on line y ly, Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 represents a top view of portions of two 
knives at the ends of adjacent gangs, said 
knives being separated. Fig. 6 represents a 
perspective view of the parts shown in Fig. 5. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in all the figures, 
In the drawings, a represents the finger 
bar, which is preferably made of a single 
plate of saw-bladesteel, having teetha' formed 
on its front edge, said teeth forming ledger 
lates which co-operate with the knives, here 
inafter described. Guard-fingers b are secured 
to the finger-bar and interlocked with the 
teeth a? thereof. A rigid rib c is bolted to 
the upper side of the finger-bar and extends 
lengthwise thereof as a guide to the chain or 
series of knives. 
The construction thus far described is not 
new with me, but is substantially shown in 
the patent to James O. Brown, No. 369,095, 
dated August 30, 1887. 
ffrepresent the knives, which are flexibly 
connected so as to form an endless chain, and 
are engaged by sprocket-wheels l at the ends 
of the cutter-bar, one of said wheels being 
shown in Fig. 1, 
My improvements may be described as fol. 
lows: I connect each knife with the next by 
a link h, which has two sockets formed to re 
ceive headed studs or pins, which are attached 
to the knives. Each studi is preferably com 
posed of a rivet 2, having an enlarged head 
3 at one end. A hardened-steel sleeve 4 is 
placed on the shank of the rivet. I perma 
nently connect the rivets and links with the 
knives (excepting at the points where the 6o 
chain or series is to be separable) by insert 
ing the studs in the links, and the ends of the 
rivets in holes formed for the rivet-shanks in 
the knives, and then upsetting the inner ends 
of the rivet-shanks on the under surfaces of 
the knives, as shown in Fig. 4. Each link is 
thus pivotally connected with two knives, so 
that the chain as a whole is very flexible, and 
is therefore adapted to run easily on the 
sprocket-wheels. The steel sleeves make the 
pivotal connection durable and enable softer 
metal to be used for the bodies of the rivets 
than would otherwise be practicable, 
The links are formed to project back of the 
knives, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and thus 
prevent the backs of the knives from bear 
ing against the guiding-rib c, the links them 
selves bearing on said rib and sustaining the 
wear resulting from the guiding action of the 
rib. I prefer to permanently connect six 
knives in the manner described, each six 
knives thus connected constituting a gang, 
The gangs are separably connected by means 
of a tonguei, formed on a stud i' at one end 
of one gang, and a groove k, formed in one 
side of the socket of the link h' permanently 
secured to the corresponding end of the other 
gang. The stud having the tonguefisformed 
to enter the Socket of the link h, when the 
tonguei is in position to coincide with the 
groove lic, said tongue and groove being rela 
tively arranged, as shown in Figs, 3 and 5, so 
that When the gangs are connected and the 
chain in operative position the tongue will be 
out of line with the groove and will project 
over the link h, and thus prevent the sepa 
ration of the stud from it. When it is de 
sired to remove a gang from the chain, the 
stud i' and link hare turned to bring the 
tongue and groove into line, when the stud 
may be readily withdrawn from the link. It 
will be seen that by the described arrange 
35 p. 
45 
OC 
2 
437,943 
ment of the tonguei and groove k accidental 
separation of the gangs of knives is prevented, 
it being necessary to raise the link h from 
the stud in order to separate one gang from 
5 another. Hence said separation cannot be 
caused by any horizontal movement of the 
chain. 
The coverg is secured by screws o to the 
rib c and projects forward from said rib, its 
to forward portion being offset to form a shoul 
der g', and to bring its forward edge down to 
the upper surfaces of the knives f. The shoul 
derg' is formed to bear against the front sides 
of the links h, as shown in Fig. 2. Said shoul 
15 der and the front edge of the rib c constitute 
a way in which the links h are guided while 
the knives are cutting. The knives are thus 
prevented from yielding or swinging back 
wardly while cutting. 
2O. The cover g may be adjustable vertically, 
so that its forward edge may bear upon the 
knives and hold them down upon the ledger 
plates or teeth a', or may be raised to permit 
the knives to bear on the ledger-plates only 
ir represents a cover for the rear portion of 
the chain of knives. Said cover, which is 
preferably of sheet metal, is connected by 
hingess with the cover g, so that it may be 
3o readily raised to expose the knives beneath it, 
25 by their own weight. 
By reference to Fig.1 it will be seen that 
the teeth of the sprocket-wheel it enter the 
spaces between the links h h', and thus impel . 
the chain. 
35 
I claim- 
In a cutting apparatus for mowing-ma 
chines, the combination of the finger-bar a, , 
the ledger plates or teeth a, the longitudinal 
rib c, rigidly connected to said finger-bar and 
having front and rear raised portions, the 4o 
cover g, rigidly secured to said rib and hav 
ing a lower vertical shoulder g' parallel with 
said rib, the longitudinal cover r, hinged to 
said former cover and inclosing the rear por 
tion of said rib, and the gang of knives hav- 45 
ing connecting-links designed to bear against 
the front and rear portions of said rib and 
against said vertical shoulderg' and inclosed 
by said cover r, substantially as set forth, the 
lower edge of said shoulder being designed 5 o 
to bear upon the knives, as stated. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of . 
three subscribing witnesses, this 22d day of 
May, A. D. 1888. 
HENRY W. SPRATT. 
Witnesses: 
J. S. H. TRINK, 
CHARLES E. BATCHELDER, 
T. E. O. MARWIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438043.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. WEBSTER, 
ADJUSTABLE FRUIT JAR HOLDER, 
No. 438,043, 
Patented 00t, 7, 1890, 
  
 
 
I e III e/ 
WITNESSES 
- 
%43. 07%.a 2-z/. 
F v 
8 
IM/WEA/TOR 
Geoye // A%sfer 
By 
ATTORMEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. WEBSTER, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
ADJUSTABLE FRU T-UAR HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,048, dated October 7, 1890. 
Application filed November 18, 1889, Serial No. 330,770. (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. WEBSTER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Co 
lumbus, in the county of Franklin and State 
of Ohio, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Adjustable Fruit-Jar 
Holders, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
devices for holding fruit-jars; and the objects 
of my invention are to provide a device of 
this class by means of which a fruit-jar which 
is being filled, opened, or closed may be 
readily grasped and firmly held without the 
necessity of touching the jar with the hands, 
to SO construct the same as to admit of the 
holding-strap being adjusted to embrace jars 
or vessels of different sizes, and to produce 
said device in a simple and inexpensive form. 
These objects I accomplish in the manner 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure is a side elevation of my device, 
showing a fruit-jar supported thereby. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of the same, and Fig. 3 is a 
central horizontal section of the holding de 
WCe, 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
C. and b represent, respectively, tong. or 
clutch arms, which are pivoted one upon the 
other slightly in front of the center of their 
lengths. Each of these arms has its inner 
face from a point in front of its pivot to its 
forward end cut away until the width of said 
forward portion is equal to one-half the width 
of the central or pivoted portion of the arm. 
The inner surfaces of the narrow forward 
portions or jaws c care made to meet the in 
ner surfaces of their respective bodies by 
beveled shoulders d. The jaw c of the upper 
arma is, as shown, thickened downwardly un 
til its lower surface is, when said jaws are 
closed together, flush with the under side of 
the jaw c' of the lower armb. The rear ends 
of the thickened portions of said jaws are 
beveled so as to conform to and fit closely 
against the shoulder d of the arm-bodies when 
the jaws are closed against each other, thus 
admitting of the two arms of the clutch be 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
ing closed togetherin compact form, as shown 
in Fig. 3 of the drawings. 
Secured to the inner face of the jaw c' and 
countersunk therein until flush with Said 
face is one end of a strape, which, although 
preferably made of leather, may be formed of 
other similar flexible material. From the 
outer end of said jaw c' the strap e extends 
outwardly and returning to form a loop passes 
into the inner end of and through a slotted 
hole or mortisef, formed through the jaW C at 
about the center of its height. 
Projecting outwardly from the outer side 
of the jaw c, slightly in rear of the mortisef, 
is a ping, the outer end of which is bent 
rearwardly, as shown. 
The strape is provided at intervals with 
pin-holes or eyes. 
The mortise of the jaw c is preferably made 
to pass through said jaw at Such incline as to 
prevent making a sharp turn in the strap in 
order to thread it through said mortise while 
a depression is formed in the inner face of 
said jaw between said mortise and the olter 
end of the jaw to form a seat for the strap. 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
The strap e is pushed through the jaw-mor 
tise funtil a loop is formed by said strap in 
front of said jaws of a circumference slightly 
less that the circumference of the jar to be 
grasped. The projecting hook Orping is then 
inserted through the nearest Strap-eye to pre 
vent the strap from slipping outward or in 
ward. The jaws c c' are then opened or 
spread apart by opening out the handles or 
rear portions of the arms a, b, the strap-loop 
passed downward over and made to encircle 
the jar lic at the desired height of the latter, 
and the said jaws forced toward each other 
by pressure upon the handles i. This closing 
of the jaws of the clutch will result in the 
tightening of the strap about the jar, and such 
pressure may be easily given the clutch 
handles as to hold the jar sufficiently rigid 
to admit of the top being screwed thereon. 
or removed therefrom. This method of grasp 
ing and holding the jar will be found of great 
value in handling jars which are being filled 
with fruit, in which case the jars are gener 
ally too hot and wet to be held in the hand. 
55 
75 
95 
Od 
 
" 
2 
488,043 
It is also obvious that by the herein-described 
In an adjustable fruit-jar holder, the combi 
device a much more rigid or firm hold can be nation, with the pivoted arms a, b, having han 
had on the body of the jar while the top is dle i and jaws c c', said jaw c having strap 
being screwed on or off than could be possibly mortise fand projecting hook g, of the strap 
a firm hold is exceedingly desirable where maining end passing loosely through mortise 
there is a tendency of the jar-top to adhere f, and having pin-holes or eyes at intervals, 
to the jar. 
substantially as and for the object set forth. . 
5 attained by the hand, and, as is well known, e, one of its ends secured to jaw c' and its re- 20 
The strap-loop may be readily adjusted to 
Io embrace any fruit jar or vessel by causing 
the pin or hook g to be inserted through the 
desired one of the strap holes or eyes. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
I5 Patent, is 
GEORGE W. WEBSTER. 
In presence of - 
C. C. SHEPHERD, 
JNO. H. FRAVEL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438143.txt	(No Model.) 
W. N. CORNET, 
SCRAPER FOR CLEANING THE PERIPHERIES OF ROLLS, 
No. 438,143, 
Patented 00t, 14, 1890, 
 
 
 
a2azzazzazazawa 
2. 
% 
INVENTO R 
W4AV (%zezz 
ay 26, 46%. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM N. CORNELL OF BROWNVIILE, NEW YORK. 
SCRAPER FOR CLEANING THE PERPHERIES OF ROLLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,143, dated October 14, 1890. 
Application filed Jctober 12, 1889, Serial No, 326,890, (No model.) 
5 
O 
(5 
25 
45 
55 
65 
75 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM.N. CORNELL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brown 
ville, in the county of Jefferson and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
fulmprovements in Scrapers for Cleaning the 
Peripheries of Rolls; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to figures 
of reference marked tnereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to scrapers for clean 
ing the periphery of rolls, particularly the 
stretch-roll, so called, employed in the wet 
part of a Fourdrinier paper-machine. 
The object is to prevent the pulp which runs 
Over the ends of the top couch-roll from drop 
ping off and catching on the inside of the wire 
cloth, whence it collects on the stretch-roll, 
increasing the diameter of the latter, and as 
a consequence stretching the edges of the 
Wire-cloth and rendering the latter worthless. 
This deposit of pulp occurs on the inside face 
of the wire-cloth as follows: In starting the 
machine it is well known to those skilled in 
the art that if the flow of pulp is not heavy 
enough to follow the wire down around the 
lower couch-roll it will stick to the jacket of 
the top couch and follow up to the guard 
board. The pulp at this point is wet, and as 
it rolls up in front of the guard-board works 
Off Over the ends of the roll or is washed off 
by hose-pipe. This action will occur not only 
in starting up the machine, but likewise when 
the Suction-boxes fail to work or whenever 
the sheet breaks at the couch and is carried 
up on the top couch-roll. At such times a cer 
tain portion of the pulp works over the ends 
of the roll and is carried to the stretch-roll of 
the wire. 
The drawings represent, in Figure 1, a dia 
gram of the wet part of a Fourdrinier ma 
chine in elevation, showing the position of a 
pair of Scrapers for cleaning the stretch-roll 
and embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is an 
end elevation of the stretch-roll and scraper. 
Fig. 3 is a front view of the same in position 
upon a roll, the latter having a scraper at 
each end. 
In said drawings, 2 represents the Wire-cloth 
in a Fourdrinier paper-machine traveling, as 
indicated, with the top couch-roll at 3 and the 
stretch-roll at 4. The dekle is indicated at 
5 and the suction-box at 6. In commenc 
ing the formation of a sheet of paper upon 
the wire-cloth in the operation of a Fourdri 
nier machine a certain portion of the pulp 
which is used is washed by a shower-pipe 
from the top couch-roll, runs over the end of 
the latter, and thence drops upon the inside 
of the wire, as more particularly hereinbefore 
described. Such pulp, being now deposited 
upon the inside of the wire, is conveyed along 
until it reaches the stretch-roll. Here it ac 
cumulates, and ridges are formed upon the 
periphery of the roll, by which the diameter 
of the roll at such points is increased. This 
occurs particularly near the ends of the roll, 
and thereby unduly stretches the edge of the 
wire-cloth and soon renders the latter Worth 
less. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
device which shall automatically collect such 
deposit of pulp and then remove it by pass 
ing the same transversely of the path of 
travel of the wire-cloth to each side of the 
machine, whence it may be taken away. 
In Figs. 2 and 3 the stretch-roll is shown 
mounted upon twin screw-threaded posts 77. 
By means of these posts and mechanism for 
rotating the same (not shown, since it has no 
bearing upon the present invention) the po 
sition of said roll is regulated and the stretch 
or tension upon the wire-cloth is determined. 
Longitudinally thereof and preferably paral 
lel with said roll is disposed a shower-pipe 8. 
To cleanse and remove all particles from the 
periphery of said stretch-roll, I have adjust 
ably hung in suitable supports two buckets 
or scrapers 9 9. The latter, in the present 
instance, are of sheet metal in blank, triangul 
lar in shape; hence when bent to a proper 
form approximating in shape to a cone cut 
longitudinally, and hence semi-conoidal or 
funnel shape with the apex pointing toward 
the center of the roll. No portion of the pe 
riphery of these scrapers is concentric with the 
surface of the roll. Further, the edgel, which 
is in contact with the surface of the roll, is 
positioned obliquely with the longitudinal 
axis of said roll, consequently has a Wind' 
95 
IOC 
 
"... 
" 
. 
. 
. 
438,148 
be applied upon the periphery of the roll at 
the desired point. 
To prevent the metal portions of the 
scraper from contacting with a roll of softer 
material to prevent wear of the latter, the 
edge of the scraper bearing upon the roll may 
be armed or tipped with leather or equivalent 
Substance, as shown at 20. 
I find that my invention is applicable to the 
top couch of a Fourdrinier machine in place 
of the guard-board now in use, which is very 
hard on the jackets. By this means a top 
jacket can be dispensed with. 
What I claim is 
1. A device for cleaning the periphery of 
rolls, composed of a curved metal plate ta 
pered toward one end, that nearest the mid 
dle of the roll, and adapted to contact with 
said roll, the edge of the plate formed with a 
Wind to coincide with the contiguous periph 
ery of the roll, substantially as specified. 
2. In combination with a revolving roll, two 
Stationary scrapers, the united length of which 
equals the length of the roll, and semi-funnel 
shaped, having their edges contiguous to the 
roll obliquely disposed with respect to the 
longitudinal axis of said roll, and with their 
ends lapping by each other, substantially as 
Stated. 
3. In combination with a revoluble roll, two 
fixed scrapers, the active edges of which are 
coincident with a helical curve drawn in part 
about its periphery, and the adjusting mech 
anism composed of a fixed post, a loose collar 
10, with its arm 13 thereupon, the bracket 14, 
movable on Said arm, and a supporting-rod 
15 for said scrapers, by which the position and 
edge of each scraper is regulated in place on 
the surface of the roll, substantially as here 
in described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WM. N. CORN ELI. 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
J. T. RAPLEE, 
L. H. PRENTICE. 
or is coincident with a helical curve de 
scribed upon said periphery by said edge. 
Thus the particles collected from the roll are 
directed obliquely and transversely of the 
path of travel of the wire-cloth to either side 
of the machine by each scraper. The base 
of each of such scrapers terminating at the 
ends of the roll give sufficient flare to per 
mit the accumulated pulp to rest upon this 
part of the scraper, from whence it flows by 
gravity into a proper receptacle. Similarly 
at each end of the roll is mounted a scraper, 
with the two inner extremities lapping by 
each other to insure removal of all foreign 
particles resting upon the surface. When 
placed in position, the stretch-roll should re 
Wolve, as indicated-that is, toward the con 
cave portion of the scraper. By this arrange 
ment it is evident that the scrapers are per 
fectly automatic, and never become inopera 
tive through excessive collections of pulp, 
while all foreign particles from the roll are 
forced outwardly and discharged by gravity 
at each end of the roll. 
Since the stretch-roll is adjustable in ver 
tical planes as generally practiced to regulate 
the tension of the wire-cloth, some device is 
requisite to enable the scrapers to be main 
tained in proper position and in contagt with 
the roll as the latter is shifted. This is ef 
fected similarly for each scraper by a loose 
collar 10 upon the post 7, to be held at any 
desired height by nuts 12, such parts being 
provided to enable vertical movement of the 
scrapers to be made to conform with similar 
movement of the stretch-roll, either up or 
down. Furthermore, said collar is fitted with 
a horizontal arm 13, upon which slides a 
bracket or hanger 14. By means of such arm 
and hanger the scraper can be moved end 
wise of the roll, as may be desired. The lower 
or free end of this hanger is transversely 
pierced to receive a rod 15, parallel with the 
arm 13. Upon said rod is hung the scraper, 
which can be swung axially thereabout to 
adjust the edge of the scraper, whereby it can 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438243.txt	(No Model.) 
l 
H, S CHEATZKA. 
WRENCH, 
 
No. 438,243, 
Patented 00t, 14, 1890, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMAN SCHEATZKA, OF BOTHELL WASHINGTON. 
WREN CH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,243, dated October 14, 1890. 
Application filed November 30, 1889, Serial No. 332,160%, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EIERMAN SCHEATZKA, a 
native-born citizen of the United States, re 
siding at Bothell, King county, State of Wash 
ington, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Wrenches, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Wrenches in which the facility of adjusting 
the width of the jaws to the size of the object 
to be turned is improved. One end of the 
wrench is designed for the turning of square 
or oblong objects and the other for pipes or 
rods circular in form. 
The objects of my improvements apply 
equally to either end of the Wrench, My first 
object is to provide for increasing the grip 
on the object to be turned in proportion to 
the amount of power required to turn the 
same. My second object is to afford facili 
ties for easy and quick adjustment of the 
Wrench to the object to be turned. I attain 
these objects by the mechanism illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents the wrench complete 
ready for operation. Fig.2 represents the ad 
justable lever by which the grip is increased, 
and by which the wrench is adjusted to dif 
ferent-sized nuts and pipes, &c. 
The lever is attached by a rivet or pivot 
pin, which passes through a slot at right an 
gles to the lever, allowing it to slide back 
and forth on the rivet. When the lever 
stands at right angles with the main part of 
the wrench, the shank of the inside jaw slides 
back and forth through a loop, which keeps 
it in place, thus enabling the operator to easily 
adjust the wrench to any-sized object. When 
the wrench is properly adjusted, by drawing 
the lever toward the opposite end from the 
one adjusted to the object to be turned the 
cogs on the lever mesh in the cogs on the 
shank of the inside jaw and press down on 
the jaw, thus disminishing the space between 
the two jaws and gripping the object to be 
turned. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the main bar or portion A is provided at one 
end with a jaw B and at its other with a jaw 
C. The jaw C is adapted for use as a pipe 
wrench or for turning round rods or pipes, 
while the jaw B is adapted for use in turning 
square objects. About centrally between its 
ends the bar A is provided with a mortise or 
recess a, forming a seat for the operating-le 
ver, presently described. The bar A is also 
provided about opposite the mortise a with 
a box-like keeper D for the slide-section E. 
This slide-section is movable longitudinally 
in the opening d of the boxD, and is provided 
at one end with a jaw F, arranged to co-op 
erate with the jaW B and having an opening 
f, which fits over the bar A. At its end oppo 
site the jaw F the bar Eisformed or provided 
with a serrated jaw G, arranged to co-operate 
with the jaw C. At its side next to the bar 
A the bar E is provided with a rack of teeth. 
e, such rack being of sufficient length to ena 
ble the lever H to properly operate to adjust 
jaws G or F against their fellowjaws C or B, 
as desired. The operating-lever His pivoted 
at a point about midway between the ends of 
the bar A and within the recess or slot a, and 
is provided with the head I, provided with 
the elongated opening or slot , and with sets 
of teeth J J at its opposite ends and a por 
tion K between its teeth J. The teeth JJ 
are arranged at the opposite end of the head 
and in position to engage the racke, the one 
for use in forcing the jaw G toward jaw C 
and the other for forcing jaw F toward the 
jaw B in the use of the wrench for turning 
round or square objects, as before referred to. 
In pivoting the operating-lever the pivot 
pin L is passed through the slot , so that the 
head I may be readily moved to set one or 
the other sets of teeth J to engage the rack, 
or may be set to adjust both such sets of teeth 
clear of the rack e. When so adjusted, the 
handle-arm of the lever will be about at right 
angles to the bar A and the portion K of the 
head will lie adjacent to the racke, when the 
slide bar or section E may be freely set back 
or forth longitudinally. 
It will be understood that in operation the 
handle-arm of the lever is turned toward the 
end of the Wrench opposite that clamping the 
object to be turned, so that the pressure or 
force for turning the said object may be ex 
erted directly against the handle-arm of the 
operating-lever, so that the greater the re 
sistance offered by the object to be turned 
95 
OO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
438,243 
Io 
the tighter the jaws of the wrench are clamped 
thereon, thus preventing any slipping of the 
wrench, as will be readily seen. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. An improved wrench, substantially as 
described, consisting of the main bar or por 
tion provided at its opposite ends with jaws, 
the sliding bar or portion held to and mov 
able longitudinally along the main portion 
and provided at its opposite ends with jaws 
arranged to co-operate with those of the main 
portion, and the operating-lever pivoted to 
the main portion and arranged to engage and 
operate the sliding portion, the said lever 
being pivoted at approximately the center of 
the main portion and having its handle end 
arranged to be turned toward and adjacent 
to either end of the said main bar, whereby 
the jaws of the wrench may be tightened on 
the object being turned in proportion to the 
resistance offered by such object, all substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a wrench, substantially as described, 
the combination of the main bar or portion, 
the slide bar or portion held to and movable 
along the main portion and provided with a 
toothed rack, and the lever pivoted to the 
main portion and provided with a head hav 
ing teeth to engage the rack of the slide por- 3o 
tion, and having adjacent to the said teeth a 
portion which, when turned next to the rack, 
will lie clear thereof, whereby the lever may 
be adjusted to set the operating-lever to mesh 
the rack of the slide portion, or clear of such 35 
rack to permit the free longitudinal move 
ment or adjustment of the slide portion, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. The improved wrench herein described, 
consisting of the main bar or portion having 
jaws at its opposite ends, the slide bar or por 
tion held to and movable along the main por 
tion, provided at its ends with jaws arranged 
to co-operate with those of the main portion 
and provided between its ends with a toothed 45 
rack, the operating - lever provided with a 
head having an elongated opening or slot for 
the pivot-pin and provided at the ends of 
said head with rack-teeth to engage the rack 
of the slide-bar, and between said ends with So 
a portion arranged when turned next to the 
rack to lie clear thereof, and the pivot-pin 
passed through the slot of the head, all sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
HERMAN SCHEATZKA. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS HENRY LEGG, 
H. J. JACOBS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438343.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 438,343, 
G, H, BUZZELL. 
PIPE WRENCE, 
Patented Oct. 14, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
A7 Z/Y-77S 
2. zazz. 
Av4/V,777 
Z727 
s 
the NORRIS PETERs co, PHOTO-ITHO, wash!NGTON, D, C 
 
-Y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. BUZZELL, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO OZRO C. CLARK, OF SAME PLACE. 
s 
PIPE-WRENCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,343, dated October 14, 1890. 
Application filed August 18, 1890, 
Serial No. 362,275 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE. H. BUZZELL 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk, State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pipe-Wrenches, of 
which the following is a description sufficiently 
full, clear, and exact to enable any person 
skilled in the art or science to which said in 
Vention appertains to make use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
pipe-Wrench represented as in use; Fig. 2, a 
top plan view of the same, and Fig. 3 a lon 
gitudinal section taken on line acac in Fig. 2, 
Like letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the different figures of the 
drawings. 
Myinvention relates especially to that class 
of Wrenches known as pipe-wrenches; and 
it consists in certain novel features herein 
after fully set forth and claimed, the object 
being to produce a simpler, cheaper, and more 
effective device of this character than is now 
in ordinary use. 
The nature and operation of the improver 
ments will be readily understood by all con 
versant with such matters from the following 
explanation. 
In the drawings, A represents the handle, 
which may be of any suitable form, and is 
provided in one end with a chamber b, said 
chamber opening at two sides and through 
the end of said handle. Aspreader dextends 
laterally across the mouth f of the chamber, 
said spreader being wedge-shaped in cross 
section. Each side Wall g of the chamber is 
provided with a longitudinal slot h; 
The jaws B C consist of two levers, which 
project into the chamber at opposite sides of 
the spreader, respectively, said levers being 
pivoted on a bolt i, fitted to slide laterally in 
the slotsh. A check-nut k is turned onto the 
bolt to secure it in position in the slots. The 
edges of one slot may be indented or corru 
gated, as shown at m in Fig. 1, the bolt-head 
p engaging said corrugations and preventing 
the bolt from slipping in the slots when the 
- 
wrench is in use. One jaw B is toothed at 2, So 
the corresponding edge of the companion jaw 
being preferably smooth; but both jaws may 
be toothed, if desired, 
In the use of my improvement the nut k is 
loosened and the bolt i moved in the slots h, 55 
projecting the jaws outward until they are 
spread sufficiently to receive the pipe P, the 
spreader d causing said jaws to separate as 
they move outward. The nut is then turned 
onto the bolt sufficiently to bind it securely 6o 
in its slots and prevent the jaws from being 
accidentally forced inward. The wrench is 
operated to turn the pipe in the usual man 
ner, the toothed jaw preventing it from slip 
ping thereon and causing the pipe to bind 65 
firmly between the jaws as the wrench is 
moved. The distance between the spreader 
d and ends v of the chamber-mouth is slightly 
greater than the width of the jaws, admitting 
free play thereto and enabling the jaws to be 7o 
more readily adjusted on the pipe. Wrenches 
as thus constructed are cheap and durable. 
The jaws when worn may be easily removed 
for sharpening or substituted for others. 
Having thus explained my invention, what I 75 
claim is 
1. In a pipe-wrench, a handle chambered 
longitudinally at one end and provided with 
slots in the walls thereof, in combination with 
two movable jaws mounted on a pivot fitted 8o 
to slide in said slots, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a pipe-Wrench, a handle provided with 
a chamber opening through one end and hav 
ing slots in its walls, in combination with a 
pivot fitted to slide in said slots, two movable 85 
jaws mounted on said pivot and projecting 
from the mouth of said chamber, and mech 
anism for securing said pivot in said slots, 
substantially as described. 
handle, in combination with a movable pivot 
or bolt fitted to slide laterally in slots in the 
chamber-walls, a check-nut for said bolt, two 
jaws pivoted in said bolt and projecting from 
said chamber, and a spreader for said jaws, 95 
substantially as set forth, 
4. In a pipe-Wrench, the body or handle A, 
provided with the chamber b, having the slots 
3. In a pipe-Wrench, a chambered body or 9o 
35 
45 
 
438,343 
2 
h roughened or corrugated at m, in combina- nut k, the toothed jaw B, and smooth jaw C, 
tion with the pivot-bolt i, the check-nut k pivoted on said bolt, all being arranged to op 
thereon, and the jaws B C, pivoted on said erate substantially as set forth. 
bolt, substantially as described. 
5. In a pipe-wrench, the handle A, cham- 
bered at b and provided with the slots hand 
spreader d, in combination with the bolt i and 
GEORGE H. BUZZELT, 
Witnesses: 
O. M. SHAW, 
N. TURNER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438443.txt	(No Model.) 
E. F. O'HAWER. 
CAR COUPLING, 
NO, 438,443. 
Patented Oct. 14, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
s (SiO 
 
 
SEEEEEEEEE 
ea 
as El SA II 
Bt 
g e U 
sissississists is 
Hi-Fi 
S S A. A 
 
E. HEE" (2 Hi (29E 
282-tyloscyco 
zzazz Z.Z.Zvez: 
3v-Uevitov 
tovio 
 
The NORRIS Peters Co., Photo-Litho. wastictor.c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD F. O'HAVER, OF CARBONDALE, ILLINOIS. 
CAR COUPNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,443, dated October 14, 1890. 
Application filed March 10, 1890, 
Serial No. 343,335. (No model.) 
5 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARDF. O'HAVER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Car 
bondale, in the county of Jackson, State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Car-Couplings, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
Ings. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in car-couplings, and it 
is designed more particularly as an improve 
ment upon my Patent No. 333,147. 
I round the outer or lower end of the apron 
and curve it at the upper edge and provide 
it with wings or analogous provisions for the 
purpose of reducing friction and aiding in se 
curely coupling on a curve. I provide springs 
adapted to hold the apron in proper position 
with sufficient force to hold and carry into 
the mouth of the draw-head, and so construct 
it that the approaching draw-head pushes it 
back out of the way, and, as shown, as the 
cars are coupled the Spring or Springs force 
the apron into its normal position ready for 
coupling again. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion hereinafter appear, and the novel fea 
tures thereof will be particularly pointed out 
in the appending claims, the novelty in the 
present instance residing in the peculiarities 
of construction and the combinations, ar 
rangement, and adaptation of parts, so fully 
hereinafter described and shown in the draw 
ings, and afterward claimed. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of the specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, with parts in 
vertical section, of my improved coupler. 
Fig. 2 is a bottom plan of the same. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in both views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A represents a draw-head pro 
vided with the usual mouth C, and vertical 
opening a' of the coupling-pin. 
B is the apron, the object of which is to 
take up the link from the opposite or ap 
proaching draw-head and conduct it into the 
mouth of the draw-head A. The lower end 
of this apron is rounded, as shown at B in 
Fig. 2, to avoid sharp corners, which would 
tend to render it more liable to catch into and 
be injured by contact with the parts. This 
apron is provided with side ribs or wings B', 
inclined, as shown, to reduce frictional con 
tact-surface with the approaching parts, the 
upper ends of said Wings being inclined to 
Ward the mouth of the draw-head, as shown 
at B' in Fig. 1. Attached to the under side 
of the apron, which may or may not be re 
enforced by the ribs or sleeves B, is the sub 
stantially U-shaped frame C. The inner ends 
Hare pivotally secured to the posts or screw 
bolts d, secured to the under side of the draw 
head, the said frame C being provided on its 
parallel branches with the pending arms C, 
to the lower ends of which are pivotally con 
nected the rearwardly - extending inclined 
arms E, the rear ends of which are connected 
With the cross-head F, which is sleeved upon 
and guided by the parallel longitudinal rods 
G, which are held in suitable bearings in posts 
or hangers G', depending from the under side 
of the draw-head, the ends of the rods being 
provided with suitable nuts g. To these rods 
between the cross-head F and the rear hangers 
G' are sleeved coil-springs H. 
In practice the parts are normally in posi 
tion in which they are shown in Fig. 1. As 
the approaching car comes sufficiently near 
for its link to engage the apron the apron 
guides the link into the mouth of the draw 
head A, and as the cars approach each other 
the apron is moved downwardly into a verti 
cal position, the pivotal connections between 
the apron and the cross-head permitting such 
movement, the springs being compressed by 
the draw-head, and the parts are thus held as 
long as the cars are coupled. As soon as the 
cars are coupled the springs force the parts 
back into their normal position. 
While I prefer the two rods and springs, as 
shown, it is evident that a single rod and 
Spring arranged centrally may be employed 
with the same results and without departing 
from the spirit of the invention, and other 
minor details in construction may be resorted 
to, if desired. 
What I claim as new is 
1. The combination, with the draw-head, of 
the yielding inclined support and forwardly 
75 
95 
IOC 
 
2 
438,443 
IO 
inclined guiding-apron, the lengthwise-com 
pressible compression - springs moving on 
guides upon the under side of the draw-head, 
and pivotal connections between the springs 
and the apron, Substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the draw - head 
and the apron, of the bearings sleeved upon 
rods upon the under side of the draw-head 
and cross-head sliding on said rods to com 
preSS the bearings and pivotal connections 
between the head and the apron, substan 
tially as specified. 
3. The combination, with the draw - head 
and the parallel rods sustained beneath the 
Same and the Springs sleeved upon said rods, 
of a cross-head adapted to move upon said 
rods to compress the springs, the rearwardly 
extending frame upon the under side of the 
apron and pivotally connected with the draw 
head, and the pivotal connections between 
said frame and the cross-head, as and for the 
purpose specified. 
4. The combination, with the draw-head, 
the parallel rods sustained from the under 
side thereof and the springs sleeved upon 
25 
said rods, of the cross-head also sleeved upon 
said rods to compress the springs, the U 
shaped frame attached to the under side of 
the apron and pivotally connected with the 
draw-head, a frame with downwardly-extend- 3o 
ing arms, and the rods pivotally connecting 
the lower ends of said arms with the cross 
head, substantially as shown. 
5. The combination, with the draw - head 
and the apron, of the arm C, attached to the 35 
under side of the apron and pivotally con 
nected at its rear ends with the under side of 
the draw-head, and having a depending part 
yieldingly connected with the draw-head, sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EDWARD F. O'HAVER. 
Witnesses: 
JOHNW. ToLER, 
WM. P. SLACK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438543.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 438,543. 
F. A. GUNKELMANN. 
- 
WEHICLE SPRING, 
Patented 00t, l4, 1890. 
 
e 
 
7fe Zze esses. 
7%. 62 & 24 
&ress o-sz-A 
 
Zaze/e72622 
zz-e 1.G zeze ?ee 422 cl 7/7/ 
se-e- 
-it-4 zy z eye7. 17zs 
eZ Zeeve a 
e 
25% - Z. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK A. GUNKELMANN, OF MEDINA, OHIO. 
VEHICLE SPRNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,543, dated October 14, 1890. 
Application filed February 19, 1890, Serial No, 34l,0ll (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beitknown that I, FRANKA. GUNKELMANN, 
of Medina, in the county of Medina and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Spring-Vehicles; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Spring-Vehicles; and it consists in certain 
features of construction and in combination 
of parts hereinafter described, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation. Fig. 2 is a front end eleva 
tion. Figs. 3 and 4 are views in perspective 
of the equalizing or balancing spring de 
tached; Fig. 5, a plan of rear equalizing 
spring. 
A represents the body of the vehicle, to 
which at the longitudinal and lateral center 
thereof is attached the principal spring B of 
the variety shown. The extremes of this 
Spring extend under either axle, the spring 
being Secured to the rear axle in the usual 
manner by means of a clip. The forward end 
of spring B is pivotally secured to the forward 
axle by means of king-bolt C, the latter also 
extending through the cross-bar above, such 
construction serving for or in place of the ordi 
nary fifth-wheel. These parts are furtherse 
cured by a clip c, the latter embracing the 
cross-bar, and the bolt ends of the clip being 
separated far enough to allow the forward 
axle to swing the limited distance necessary. 
D and E are the equalizing or balancing 
Springs. These Springs are constructed each 
of a single flat bar or leaf of spring-steel folded 
diagonally, as shown at e and d, to form ap 
proximately a U-shaped spring. The central 
member D' of spring D is provided with holes 
d for securing this member to the under side 
of the body crosswise thereof, the free ends of 
the Spring extending under the rear axle, to 
which they are secured by clips. The central 
member E of Spring E may serve as a cross 
bar, in which case the central portion of this 
member should be blocked, as shown in Fig. 
3, the ends of the spring being secured to the 
under side of body A, near the sides of the 
latter. Hole e' is for the king-bolt. In case 
it is preferred to use a wooden cross-bar in 
front, the forward equalizing-spring might be 
a fac-simile of the rear spring D, the manner 
of attaching such spring to cross-bar F being 
shown in Fig. 4. The chief function of the 
equalizing or balancing spring is to prevent 
the vehicle-body from rocking sidewise and 
in a measure to prevent the body from rock 
ing endwise and to hold the body steady 
without affecting the easy-riding qualities of 
the vehicle. These springs also help to sus 
tain the load, and to this extent relieve the 
strain on spring B, and more especially they 
relieve spring B from torsional strain. 
What I claim is 
1. In a spring-vehicle, the combination, with 
vehicle-body and longitudinally centrally-lo 
cated spring, of equalizing or balancing 
springs secured to the opposite ends of the 
body and to the axles, one of said. Springs 
constructed of a flat bar or leaf of metal, bent 
substantially as shown, the central member 
being fastened crosswise to the under side of 
the vehicle-body and the ends to the axle and 
the other spring formed, substantially as 
shown, with its ends secured to the vehicle 
body, and the central member constituting a 
cross-bar having a hole adapted to receive 
the king-bolt, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the body of a ve 
hicle and longitudinal centrally - located 
spring, of balancing or equalizing springs se 
cured to the body and to the axles or cross 
bar, said springs composed of a flat bar or 
leaf of metal bent into three members, the 
central member of which is in a different 
plane from the other two inembers and formed 
by bending the end members across the cen 
tral member, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 21st 
day of December, 1889. 
FRANK A, GUNKELMANN. 
Witnesses: 
s 
L. C. GUNKELMANN, 
C. D. ETZEE. 
55 
65 
75 
90 
d 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438643.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 438,643, 
Patented Oct. 21, 1890, 
F. D. RICH. 
MACHINE FOR SLASHING INNER SOLES, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
 
issary 
(S)-(D 
27C/6rac. T.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. D. RICH. 
MACHINE FOR SLASHING INNER SOLES. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 438,643, 
Patented Oct. 21, 1890. 
. 
N 
l SS 
n 
Sas % 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
F. D. RICH, 
MACHINE FOR SLASHING INNER SOLES, 
No. 438,643, 
Patented Oct. 21, 1890. 
-7 
r 
INVENTOR 
VVITN esses 
94.2% area. 24, 22. st 
Fi E. B. 
tenoitris Peters co. Pro-Lithto., washNserie 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK D. RICH, OF SALISBURY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO NATHAN 
D. DODGE, OF NEWBURYPORT, MASSACHUSETTS. 
MACHINE FOR SLASHING INNER SOLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,643, dated October 21, 1890. 
Application filed July 28, 1890, Serial No. 360,170. (No model.) 
(Cd 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICKD. RICH, of 
Salisbury, in the county of Essex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Slash 
ing Inner Soles of Boots and Shoes, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This is a machine for rendering boot and 
shoe inner soles more flexible by making a 
series of slashes or incisions in the surface 
thereof. These cuts or incisions are made 
transversely and on a slant, whereby a greater 
depth of the cut may be obtained, and hence 
proportionately greater flexibility, and they 
are produced by a gang of reciprocating cut 
ters or knives operated by a machine con 
structed substantially as below set forth, and 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a machine em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation of the same with the cutters and cut 
ter-head in vertical Section. Fig. 3 is an en 
larged horizontal section, in detail, of a por 
tion of the cutter-head, showing the method 
of securing the cutters in place. Fig. 4 is a 
sectional detail showing the mechanism for 
limiting the throw. Fig. 5 is a rear elevation 
of the machine. Fig. 6 is a plan of an inner 
sole rendered flexible by having been cut or 
slashed by this machine. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts. 
A represents a bed, preferably metallic, to 
which are bolted the uprights B B, which, 
with the cross-piece C, constitute the frame 
of the machine. 
D is the driving or actuating shaft, sup 
ported in the frame by means of boxes d and 
operated by a hand-lever D' or other means 
or power. Extending up from and integral 
with this shaft D are a pair of levers EE, to 
whose free ends are pivotally Secured the 
lower ends of the links or bars FF, their up 
er ends being secured to the opposite ends 
of a horizontal rod G, which extends through 
a hole H'in the upper end of the reciprocating 
cutter-bar or plunger H. This bar Hlies and 
fits in an opening or hole C''', made at an an 
gle of, say, forty-five degrees in the tubular 
central and guiding portion C of the cross 
piece C. 
I is the cutter-head, adjustably secured by 
45 p. 
a set-screw e or other suitable means to the 
lower end of the plunger H. The lower end 
or foot I' of this cutter-head is grooved on its 
under side transversely to receive a gang of 
cutters K, said grooves and cutters being 
made and set on a line with the plunger, so 
that they are on a Slant or angle of, say, forty 
five degrees with the bed A. The knives are 
held in place removably by graduated pins 
or plugs J, Fig. 3, so that knives or cutters 
of various sizes may be employed. 
In operation the sole S is placed in proper 
position beneath the cutter-head, whose posi 
tion when raised is shown in Figs. 2 and 5. 
The lever D is swung forward, producing 
partial rotation of the shaftD, and the levers 
E on said shaft, by means of the links F, force 
down the plunger H, guided by the portion C 
of the cross-piece into the position shown in 
broken lines in Fig. 2, thus producing the 
slanting cuts or slashes S' in the sole. Re 
versing the lever D' of course raises the plun 
ger into its former position. The movement 
or throw of the plunger (and knives) down 
ward is adjustably limited by means of the 
set-screws l in the stops or projections L in 
tegral with the cross-bar C, said set-screws 
being struck by the levers E, (see Figs. 1, 2, 
and 4) and the movement back is limited by 
the set-screw in in a downward stop or exten 
sion N of the cross-bar C, said set-screw being 
struck by the lug P, extending down from 
one of the levers E. (See Figs. 2, 4, and 5.) 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The herein-described machine for render 
ing boot and shoe soles more flexible by cut 
ting or slashing the surface thereof, compris 
ing the shaft D, supported in the frame, the 
levers or cranks E, links F, and rod G, the 
plunger H, provided with the cutter-head I 
and gang of cutters K, and the guiding cross 
piece C, provided with the central hole C' 
for guiding the plunger, said plunger and 
cutters being set at a slant with the surface 
of the shoe-sole, whereby a series of slanting 
incisions or cuts are produced therein, sub 
stantially as described. 
FREDERICK D. RICH. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN LEWIS, 
JACOB SMITH. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438743.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 438,743, 
 
 
J. MULLER. 
FOLDING BED, 
w 
Patented Oct. 21, 1890. 
s 
x 
S R 
- 
x. 
Ns 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH MULLER, OF NORTH ST. PAUL, ASSIGNOR TO MARY MUELLER, OF 
ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA. 
FOLDING BED. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,743, dated October 21, 1890. 
Application filed April 18, 1890, Serial No, 348,526, (No model.) 
TO 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH MLLER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at North 
St. Paul, in the county of Ramsey and State 
5 of Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Folding Beds; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
My invention relates to folding beds, and 
has for its object the production of a device 
of this kind which will be simple in construc 
15 tion and reliable in operation. With this end 
in view I construct the frame-work of the bed 
With guides in which the head-board is mov 
able and provide each side bar of the head 
board with a rack. On each side of the rear 
end of the bed proper is a toothed segment in 
engagement with the rack. In this manner 
I employ the head-board as a counter-balance 
for the bed. Lugs or pivots projecting from 
the side boards of the bed proper are entered 
in slots in the side plates of the frame. In 
virtue of the construction described both the 
head-board and the bed can be readily re 
moved from the frame in which they are 
mounted for any purpose desired. A rod 
around which a spring is placed may be se 
cured to the foot-board of the frame in which 
the head-board slides, and an eye on the head 
board is fitted over the rod and tends to com 
press the spring when the head-board is raised 
by the descent of the bed. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
like numerals are placed onlike parts through 
out the Several views, Figure 1 is a side ele 
Vation of the invention, partially in section, 
showing the bed in open position. Fig. 2 is 
a front elevation representing the bed as 
closed, with parts broken away to show the 
gearing. 
1 is a frame provided with guides 2, in which 
4 4* are racks attached to the side bars of 
the head-board. 
5 is the frame of the bed proper, which is 
provided with projecting pivots 66*, fitted in 
5o the open slotted bearings 77* of the side 
the head-board 3 is mounted. 
3o 
35 
45 
plates of the head-board. 88* are toothed 
segments, one secured to each side plate of 
the bed at its rear end. 
9 is a rod suitably secured in brackets 10 
10* on the rear side of the head-board frame, 55 
and 11 is a perforated bracket projecting from 
the rear side of the head-board through a slot 
12 in the frame and fitted over the rod. 
13 is a spiral spring surrounding the rod 9. 
14 14* are the usual ornamental brackets 6o 
having projections which serve as supports 
for the bed when lowered to its open position. 
The operation of the invention is as follows: 
When it is desired to raise or lower the bed, 
the bed-section is pulled down or raised up, 65 
turning on its pivots, the racks being in con 
tinuous engagement in all positions of the 
head-board and the bed. The head-board is 
so constructed that when the change in lever 
age afforded by the racks is considered it will 7o 
counterbalance the bed with the necessary 
difference in the extreme positions. The full 
crum remains constant; but there is a differ 
ence in leverage, according to the position of 
the bed, so that when the bed is in its hori- 75 
Zontal position it slightly overcomes the 
weight of the head-board, and when in its 
uppermost position it coacts or co-operates 
with the head-board to hold itself against the 
frame. In all other intermediate positions 8o 
the head-board and bed are substantially 
counterpoised. 
In virtue of the open-ended slots and the 
rack-connections between the head-board and 
bed, the bed may be readily separated from 85 
the head-board and detached from the frame 
whenever desired--as, for example, to packthe 
same for shipment. The re-enforcing spring, 
as before stated, may be employed, but is en 
tirely unnecessary. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is as follows: 
1. A folding bed comprising an upright 
frame, a movable head-board mounted in said 
frame, adapted of itself to counterbalance the 95 
bed, a bed pivoted in the frame, vertical racks 
attached to the lower corners of the head 
board, and segmental racks attached to the 
head-corners of the bed and engagable with 
said vertical racks, whereby the leverage Ioo 
9o 
 
438,743 
ners, engagable with said vertical racks, sub 
stantially as described, whereby the head 
board and bed are counterbalanced, as re 
quired, and the bed is readily separable from 
the head-board and frame for packing. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
JOSEPH MUILLER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. BLODGETT, 
FRANK. D. MERCHANT. 
5 
shifts, as required, to properly counterbalance 
the head-board and bed at all points of their 
movement. 
2. The folding bed comprising the frame 
with vertical head-board guideways and ra 
dial slots for the pivots of the bed, open at 
their outer ends, the head-board movable in 
said guideways, adapted to counterbalance 
the bed, and provided with racks on its lower 
coiners, the bed pivoted in said radial slots 
and having segmental racks on its head-cor 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438843.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 438, 
843 
R. A. G.OWE 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
2 Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 2, 1890. 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 438,843. 
R. A. GOVE. 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented 00t, 21, 1890, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD A. GOVE, OF WAUKESHA, WISCONSIN. 
STEAM - ENG NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,843, dated October 21, 1890. 
Application filed May 10, 1890, Serial No. 351,230, (No model.) 
O 
25 
55 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RICHARD A. GovE, of 
Waukesha, in the county of Waukesha, and 
in the State of Wisconsin, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Steam 
Engines; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
My invention relates more particularly to 
slide-valve steam-engines; and it consists in 
certain peculiarities of construction and com 
bination of parts to be hereinafter described 
With reference to the accompanying draw 
ings and subsequently claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a side 
elevation of my improved steam-engine partly 
in section; Fig. 2, a section on line 22, Fig.1; 
Fig. 3, a detail plan view, partly in horizontal 
Section, and illustrates a portion of the mech 
anism for controlling the exhaust-valves of 
the engine; Fig. 4, a similar view illustrating 
the valve-gear, and Fig. 5 a detail side eleva 
tion of said valve-gear. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, A rep 
resents the engine-frame; B, the cylinder; C 
C', the steam-chests; D, the crank-shaft; E, 
the eccentric; F, the live-steam pipe; G, the 
throttle-valve, and H the governor, the latter 
being belt-geared to said crank-shaft. 
The steam-chest C is provided with an in 
let-port b and a series of outlet-ports c, the 
latter leading to the cylinder B, and the 
steam-chest C has an inlet-port b' and a se 
ries of cylinder-ports c', this construction be 
ing illustrated in Fig. 1. 
The outlet or cylinder ports c c' of the 
steam-chests C C are controlled by the bars 
of gridiron-valves II, and the rods J J' of 
these valves are arranged on opposite sides 
of a slide-bar K, connected by a link L with 
a pitman M, that is in turn connected to the 
eccentric E, the point of connection between 
said link and pitman being supported by an 
arm N, pivoted to the engine-frame, as shown 
in Fig.1. 
The valve-rod J is provided with a trans 
verse lug dupon its upper side, and the valve 
rod J is similarly provided with a similar lug 
d', said lugs heing on opposite sides of a com 
mon center in the path of spring-controlled 
dogs PP, pivotally connected to opposite 
sides of the slide-bar K, and respectively pro 
vided with a bearing-face ee', these faces be 
ing inclined in opposite directions and op 
posed to a cam R., pivoted to a bracket S, and 
provided with an armf, connected by a link 
g with a bell-crank h, controlled by the gov 
ernor mechanism of the engine. 
The valve-rods J J and slide-bar K have 
their bearings in the horizontal arms i. of 
brackets TT, secured to the engine-frame, 
and provided with supports if' for dash-pots 
U U", the pistons in these dash-pots being 
provided with rodsk k', that connect with 
bell-cranks m. m., pivoted to said brackets 
and connected by links n' to said valve 
rods. A linkp connects the slide-bar Kwith 
a lever V, that is pivoted to a bracket r on the 
steam-chest C, and the lower end of the lever 
is pivoted to a rod W, that carries a slide 
blocks, the latter being arranged to travel 
in a slot it cut in a bracket X, that extends 
out from a rod Y, and is provided with an 
other slot it for engagement with a guide-pin 
o' on a bracket a, bolted to the under side of 
the cylinder, as best illustrated in Fig. 2. 
The rod Y has its bearings in the inner end 
walls of chambers at U", and ports a a lead 
from the cylinder Binto said chambers. The 
bottom of the chamber v is provided with a 
series of ports that communicate with a con 
duit, 2 for steam exhausted from the cylinder, 
and the chamber v' has its bottom provided 
with a series of ports that communicate With 
another exhaust-conduit 2', this construction 
being clearly illustrated in Fig. 1. The ports 
of the chambers at U' are controlled by the 
bars of gridiron-valves ZZ", and these valves 
are connected to the ends of the rod Y, as is 
also clearly illustrated in Fig. 1. 
In Figs. I and 5 the engine is shown on 
center and the dog P disengaged from the 
lug d on the valve-rod J, while at the same 
time the dog P' is in engagement with the lug 
d' on the valve-rod J. Now if the slide-bar 
K be moved in the direction of the arrows in 
said figures the dog P', drawing on the lug d, 
will actuate the valve-rod J and bring the 
bars of valve I' away from the ports c' of the 
steam-chest C" to admit steam to the corre 
sponding end of the cylinder B. The travel 
of the inclined face e' of the dog P' against 
45 
75 
95 
OO 
 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
438,843 
2 
the cam R will move said dog on its pivot to 
disengage the lug d' on the valve-rod J before 
the slide-bar completes its stroke toward the 
rear, and the dash-pot mechanism connected to 
5 said valve-rod will automatically return the 
latter to its normal position to close the valve 
I', the piston (not shown) in the cylinder B be 
ing acted upon by the expansion of the steam 
to finish its stroke, and it will be understood 
Io that at the initial movement of the slide-bar K 
the lever V linked thereto moves on its pivot 
to actuate the rod W and thereby cause the 
slide-blocks to travelin the slott of the bracket 
7 on the rod. Y. Prior to the finish of the 
I5 stroke of the piston in the cylinder the slide 
bar K will have reached its limit of travelin 
the direction of the arrows above named, and 
in the meantime the blocks on the rod U 
will have reached the forward end of the slot 
20 t to exert pressure against the bracket n and 
thereby move the rod Y in its bearings to 
shift the valves ZZ", thereby closing the ex 
haust-ports of the chamber v and opening the 
ones of chamber u', this operation being an 
25 effectual preventive of back-pressure in said 
cylinder. The rotation of the shaft D and 
eccentric E causes the slide-bar K to begin its 
return movement the moment the valves ZZ 
are shifted, and the dog P on said slide-bar 
3o coming into contact with the lugdon the valve 
rod J the latter is actuated to bring the bars 
of valve I away from the ports c, leading from 
the steam-chest C into the cylinder, said dog 
being tripped by the cam R at the proper 
35 time and said valve closed by the action of 
the relative dash-pot mechanism when the 
trip takes place. The movements of the sev 
eral parts are now in reverse to that above 
described in connection with the valve I'', and 
4o will be readily understood without further 
description. The rise or fall of the governor 
arms moves the cam R. on its pivot, and thus 
the dogs PP' are tripped at longer or shorter 
intervals in proportion to the position of said 
45 cam with relation to the faces e e' of said 
dogs, or, in other words, each dog is tripped 
at the approximate time it comes into contact 
with the cam. 
In the position of the parts as shown in the 
5o drawings the contact of the cam Rand facesee' 
of the dogs PP' is proportionate to the stand 
ard speed of the engine; but any increase or 
decrease of speed would cause the governor 
mechanism to change the position of said cam, 
55 and thus the trip of said dogs would be at 
shorter or longer intervals, as above de 
Scribed, and consequently no more steam en 
ters the cylinder at any time than is abso 
lutely necessary. It will be noticed that the 
6o link I has a hook-connection b with a stud 
c' on the slide-bar K, and said link is pro 
vided with a handle L', whereby it may be 
readily disconnected from said slide-bar at 
any time. This is of especial advantage 
65 when it is desirable to warm the cylinder be 
fore starting the engine, or in case it may be 
necessary to reverse the movement of Said en 
gine, the operation being accomplished by 
moving the lever V by hand after the discon 
nection of the link and slide-bar. 
In addition to the lugs did on the valve 
rods J J', the latter are provided with stops 
y y', that come against the arms of the 
brackets TT to prevent the valves II' from 
being traveled too far by the action of the 
dash-pot mechanism, and also to be acted upon 
by the dogs P P' to insure the proper work 
ing of said valves prior to the time said dash 
pot mechanism begins its operation, as at the 
time of starting up the engine. 
Having thus described my invention, What 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a steam-engine, the combination of the 
shaft, a slide-bar connected thereto, dogs piv 
oted to the slide-bar, one on each side thereof, 
and having bearing-faces inclined in opposite 
directions, twin steam-chests having ports 
leading to the engine-cylinder, valves con 
trolling said ports, rods extended from the 
valves on opposite sides of said slide-bar, 
catches on the valve-rods in the paths of the 
slide-bar dogs, a dash-pot mechanism con 
nected to each valve-rod, and a tripping-cam 
opposed to the inclined bearing-faces of said 
slide-bar dogs, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a steam-engine, the combination of the 
shaft, the governor geared thereto, a slide 
bar connected to said shaft, dogs pivoted to 
the slide-bar, one on each side thereof, and 
having bearing-faces inclined in opposite 
directions, twin steam-chests having ports 
leading to the engine-cylinder, valves control 
ling said ports, rods extended from the valves 
on opposite sides of said slide-bar, catches on 
the valve-rods in the paths of the slide-bar 
dogs, a dash-pot mechanism connected to each 
valve-rod, a pivoted tripping-cam opposed to 
the inclined bearing-faces of said slide-bar 
dogs, an arm extended from the cam, a bell 
crank connected to the governor, and a link 
connecting the cam-arm and bell-crank, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a steam-engine, the combination of 
the shaft, a slide-bar connected thereto, ex 
haust-valves connected to opposite ends of a 
movable rod, a slotted lateral bracket on the 
rod, a stationary guide engaging a slot in the 
bracket, a rod carrying a slide-block in en 
gagement with another slot in said bracket, 
and a pivoted lever connecting the latter rod 
and said slide-bar, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a steam-engine, the combination of 
the shaft, a slide-bar connected thereto, twin 
steam-chests having ports leading to the en 
gine-cylinder, valves controlling said ports, 
rods extended from the valves, a dash-pot 
mechanism connected to the valve-rods, a trip 
mechanism for engaging and disengaging said 
slide-bar and valve-rods, exhaust-valves con 
nected by a rod, a lateral bracket on the rod, 
a stationary guide for the bracket, a slide 
l I5 
I 25 
 
438,843 
25 
block movable in said bracket, and a pivoted said ports, rods extended from the valves, a 20 
lever connected to the slide-block and afore 
said slide-bar, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a steam-engine, the combination of 
the shaft, a slide-bar connected thereto, dogs 
pivoted to the slide-bar, twin steam-chests 
having ports leading to the engine-cylinder, 
valves controlling the ports and provided with 
rods for engagement with the slide-bar dogs, 
a dash-pot mechanism connected to the valve 
rods, stops on said valve-rods in opposition 
to said slide-bar dogs, stationary arms op 
posed to the stops, and a cam for tripping the 
dogs out of engagement with the valve-rods, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. In a steam-engine, the combination of 
the shaft, a slide-bar detachably connected 
thereto, twin steam-chests having ports lead 
ing to the engine-cylinder, valves controlling 
dash-pot mechanism connected to the valve" 
rods, a trip mechanism for engaging and dis 
engaging said slide-bar and valve-rods, ex 
haust-valves connected by a rod, a slotted lat 
eral bracket on the rod, a stationary guide 
engaging a slot in the bracket, a rod carrying 
a slide-block in engagement with another slot 
in said bracket, and a pivoted lever connect 
ing the aforesaid slide-bar and latter rod, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing.I 
have hereunto set my hand at Milwaukee, in 
the county of Milwaukee and State of Wis 
consin, in the presence of two witnesses. 
RICHARD A. GOVE. 
Witnesses: 
N. E. OLIPHANT, 
WM. KLUG. 
O 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US438943.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
E. W. PERRY, Jr. 
SHUTTER FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS, 
No. 438,943, 
 
Patented 00t. 21, 1890, 
2% 1722(26% /rao/2-2-2. 
(NO Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
E. W. PERRY, Jr. 
SHUTTER FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS, 
N0, 438,943, 
Patented Oct. 21, 1890, 
, AS 
 
 
a 
 
772a2a safer, 
3 
27 a 
1722/272227 
12e26 Vrood/277/7 
the Norris PE is co., Photo-LITHo., WASHINgro, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ENOCII WOOD PERRY, JR OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO EMIL KIPPER, OF ADAMS, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SHUTTER FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 438,943, dated October 21, 1890. 
Application filed April 28, 1890, Serial No. 349,746 (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all whon, it may concer"n. 
Be it known that I, ENOCH WOOD PERRY, 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, residing at 
New York in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Shutters for Photo 
graphic Apparatus, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
My invention relates to shutters for photo 
graphic cameras, the purpose thereof being 
to enable the shutter to be reset after ex 
posure without uncovering the lens-opening. 
The invention consists to this end in the 
Several novel features of construction and 
new combinations of parts fully set forth here 
inafter, and then definitely pointed out in the 
claims which follow this specification. 
To enable others skilled in the art to prac 
tice my invention, I will describe the same in 
detail, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a shutter, 
showing the parts in position for operation. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view showing the parts in 
the position which they occupy when the ex 
posure is made. Fig. 3 is a similar elevation 
showing the position of the parts after the ex 
posure is made and the lens-opening closed. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical cross-section taken through 
the axis of the shutter. Fig. 5 is a front ele 
vation showing a modified construction. Fig. 
6 is a cross-section of Fig. 5. 
In the said drawings, the reference-numeral 
1 denotes the front of the camera-box, in 
which is formed a portion or space 3, either 
cut a Way or recessed, making a segmental 
Space, the lens-opening 2 being formed at or 
near the lower angle of the segment. Within 
this recessed or depressed portion 3 is ar 
ranged a segmental plate 4, cut upon Sub 
Stantially the same radius and pivoted upon 
a pin 5 at the apex of the segmental space 3. 
This plate is of such width that when swung 
in one direction it will wholly uncover the 
lens-opening 2, and when swung in the other 
direction will entirely cover said opening. 
The plate 4 is of such thickness that it lies in 
the recessed portion 3 with its outer face a 
little less than flush with the outer surface of 
the front of the camera-box. 
Pivotally mounted on the pin 5 is a seg 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
mental plate 6, of such dimensions as to 
cover the whole of the recessed Space 3. In 
this plate 6 is formed a lens-opening 7 of Sub 
stantially the same size as the opening 2 and 
located upon one side of the center of Said 
plate 6. 
Coiled upon the pivot 5 is a spring 5", by 
which the plate is swung in the direction in 
dicated by the arrow in Fig. 1. 
Mounted upon the plate 4 is a small stud, 
pin, or projection Snear one edge of the plate 
and lying within the lens-opening 7 of the 
large plate 6, said opening 7 being provided 
with opposite notches , which receive the 
stud S as the plate 6 swings in opposite di 
rections. 
Mounted on the face of the plate 6, near the 
lower edge thereof, is a stop 10, of any suit 
able form, with which a trigger 12 engages 
when the plate is turned into the position 
shown in Fig.1, the trigger being thrown into 
engagement by a light spring 13. Upon the 
front plate of the camera is mounted any sin 
ple form of spring-actuated detent 14, adapted 
to engage a lug or projection 15 on the plate 
4. Two of these lugs or projections are formed 
upon the said plate at or near the extremities 
of its curved edge, their purpose being as 
follows: The parts being in the position. 
shown in Fig. 1, if the trigger 12 is pulled or 
disengaged from the stop 10 on the plate 6 
the latter will spring quickly under the im 
pulse of the spring in the direction of the ar 
row, and in its course it will momentarily un 
cover the lens-opening 2, the opening 7 in 
said plate coinciding for an instant with the 
opening 2 in the front of the camera-box. As 
the plate 6 begins to turn upon its pivotal axis, 
the plate 4, lying in the recessed segmental 
space 3, remains stationary, its Surface being 
removed from contact with the inner face of 
the plate 6 and said plate 4 being held, more 
over, by the Spring-detent 14. As the plate 6 
reaches the position shown in Fig. 2, the notch 
9 engages the projection or pin S, and the de 
tent 14 being instantly sprung or disengaged 
from the lug 15 the plate 4 swings With the 
plate 6 and instantly covers the lens-Opening 
2, the parts assuming the position shown in 
Fig. 3. At this point the plate 6 stands at its 
limit of movement under the impulse of the 
90 
95 
CO 
2 
A. 
438,943 
whereby the latter resets the auxiliary shut 
ter-plate, substantially as described. 
3. In a photographic camera, the combina 
tion of a main shutter-plate having a lens 
opening, the edge of which is provided with 
notches 9, and an auxiliary shutter-plate hav 
ing a stud 8, movable across said lens-opening 
to engage either of the notches, said auxiliary 
plate being thereby moved by the direct ac 
tion of the main shutter-plate after exposure 
to its reset position, substantially as described. 
4. In a photographic camera, the combina 
tion, with a camera-box having a lens-open 
ing, of an imperforate plate arranged to cover 
and uncover said opening, a plate having an 
opening arranged to coincide during a por 
tion of the movement of said plate with the 
lens-opening, a connection between said plate 
and the imperforate plate, said connection 
consisting of a pin or stud on the imperforate 
plate lying in an opening of the other plate, 
and a spring-detent tripped by the imper 
forate plate and holding it at its two limits of 
movement, substantially as described. 
5. In a photographic apparatus, the combi 
nation, with the camera-box, of a pivotally 
mounted imperforate plate arranged to Swing 
Over the lens-opening and engaging with a 
tripping spring-detent at each extremity of 
its movement, a plate pivoted upon the same 
axis and having an opening arranged to coin 
cide at each movement with the lens-opening, 
said plate being connected with the imper 
forate plate by a pin or projection on the lat 
terlying in the lens-opening of the other plate, 
means for imparting a swinging or pivotal 
movement to the latter plate, and a latch or 
trigger holding the said plate in normal posi 
tion, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
ENOCH WOOD PERRY, JR. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
C. SEDGWICK, 
H. KRONFELO, Jr. 
O 
I5. 
25 
30 
spring, while the second lug or projection 15 
has made engagement with the detent 14, 
holding the plate 4 over the lens-opening. It 
will now be seen that in resetting the shutter 
it is only necessary to swing the plate 6 by a 
suitable lever or finger-piece back to the posi 
tion shown in Fig.1. In so doing the opening 
7 in said plate will completely pass the lens 
opening 2 before the notch 9 engages the pin 
or projection 8. As this engagement is made, 
the plate 4 begins to move and is restored to 
its original position, as shown in Fig. 1; but 
the lens-opening 2 is at no time uncovered. 
I may substitute for the spring by which the 
plate 6 is turned any other form of spring ar 
ranged at any other suitable point. The de 
tent 14, also, may be of any preferred form. 
I may also use any suitable means for oper 
ating the trigger or latch 12 and for return 
ing the segmental plate 6 to its normal posi 
tion. I may also substitute for the pivotally 
mounted plates shown and described the 
sliding plates shown in Figs. 5 and 6. In this 
modified construction the front plate of the 
camera is provided with parallel guides 16 of 
any suitable form, in which an inner plate 17 
is arranged to move, and an outer plate 18, 
the latter having a lens-opening 19. The two 
plates are connected by a pin or stud 20 on 
the inner plate, which lies within the opening 
19 of the outer plate. The movement is lim 
ited in both directions by stops 21, and the 
shutter is operated by a weight, a spring, or 
by pneumatic devices of any suitable form. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with the main shutter 
plate of a camera, of an auxiliary shutter-plate 
having a loose connection with the main shut 
ter-plate and moved by the direct action of the 
said main shutter-plate after the exposure to 
its reset position, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, in a shutter for a pho 
tographic calmera, of a main shutter-plate and 
an auxiliary shutter-plate loosely engaged 
with and positively moved in both directions 
by the direct action of the main shutter-plate, 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439043.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 439,043, 
J. D. STIRCKLER. 
PROCESS OF RIVETING, 
Patented Oct. 21, 1890, 
 
  
 
N 
 
 
ov 
 
 
f 
w 
N 
a. 
aNN3 2. 3I seat 2-cy 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1, N 
  
 
 
Witg E. E. G. E.G. 
2: 
 
asara 
6/ sea 17. 
3S3-, 
SS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN DAVID STIRCKLER, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
STANDARD RIVET COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PROCESS OF RIVETING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,043, dated October 21, 1890. 
Application filed April 21, 1890, Serial No. 348,937, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHNDAVIDSTIRCKLER, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Process of Riveting, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view showing a rivet through 
material, with a punch in position to strike 
the end of the shank. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
view of what is shown in Fig. 1, the punch 
being in its lowest position. Fig. 3 is a plan 
of the rivet in place in stock after the end 
of the shank has been operated on by the 
punch. Fig. 4 is a view, partly in section, of 
my new rivet in place in stock and ready to 
receive the blow of an upsetting-die. Fig. 5 
is a view, partly in section, of the rivet in 
place in stock and of the upsetting-die, show 
ing the end of the rivet after its shank has 
been upset, Fig. 6 is a plan of the upset 
rivet in place in stock. Figs, 7 and 8 show a 
modification. 
My invention is an improvement on the 
process or mode of riveting set forth in my 
patent, No. 415,885, dated November 26, 1889, 
the object of my present invention being to 
cheapen and simplify the process set forth in 
my patent, and at the same time to produce 
a method better adapted than my patented 
method for practice on a commercial scale. 
In my patent, No. 415,885, my plan is to 
break or cut of the central core after upset 
ting or spreading the circumferential portion 
of the shank surrounding the central core, 
My present invention consists in putting 
the rivet through the stock, the rivet being 
inserted through a hole already formed or 
making its own hole and then cupping and 
upsetting the end of the shank, 
In the drawings, a is thematerial,b the rivet, 
and d the hollow punch which I prefer to use 
to cup the end of the shank. This hollow 
punch is like the one I use in my patent, and 
forms an annular grooved in the end of the 
shank, this groove separating the circumfer 
ential portion d from the central core d. 
Since making my patented invention I have 
discovered that it is quite unnecessary to cut 
out or break off the central cored. The hol 
low punch which I preferably employ is 
forced into the end of the shank forming the 
cored and circumferential portion, which is 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
 
55 
65 
75 
bent outward. This enables me to have the 
shank of the rivet fill the hole in the mate 
rial, this being a very important matter, as is 
well known to all skilled in the art. When 
the punch is withdrawn, a die f is brought 
into play and the circumferential part of the 
shank upset, forming a flange and securing 
the rivet securely in place. At the same 
time by the same die the central core is 
smashed down, as shown in the drawings. 
In the modification the punch, instead of 
being hollow, is solid, and simply cups the 
end of the rivet-shank, and this cupped end 
is then upset. By this plan I am enabled to 
have the rivet-shank fill the hole in the ma 
terial; but I greatly prefer to use the hollow 
punch and treat the rivet-shank as shown in 
my other figures, because the solid punch in 
forming the cup compresses the metal in some 
cases more than is desirable. The hollow 
punch cuts into the shank and the upset is 
formed without fracture and with great neat 
ness and smoothness. The central cor being 
Smashed down, adds somewhat to the strength 
of the fastening, re-enforcing in a measure 
the upset flange. 
Another feature of my invention is the die 
f, the face of which is formed with a cup 1 
Within a cup 2, the bottom or end wall of the 
cup 1 engaging the end of the central core 
and forcing the core toward the main part of 
the shank at the same time the circumferen 
tial portion is turned over or upset to form 
the flange. 
What I claim is 
1. The improvement in the art of riveting, 
consisting in putting the rivet through the 
material and then cupping the end of the 
Shank and upsetting that cupped end, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The improvement in the art of riveting, 
consisting in putting the rivet through the 
material, then forming the end of the shank 
with the circumferential part and central core, 
and then smashing down the circumferential 
part and central core, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth, 
3. A die having its face formed with a cup 
1 within a cup 2, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth, 
JOHN DAVID STIRCKLER, 
Witnesses: 
J. E. MAYNADIER, 
EDWARDS, BEACH, 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439143.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 439,143, 
 
C. GLENCROSS, 
D00R, HANGING DEVICE FOR, CABS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet it. 
Patented Oct. 28, 1890, 
A? G, 2 
WITNESSES, 
0hauea. Gef buw, 
WVENTOR, 
He carts sters co., Photo-Ti. Ashington, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 439,143. 
 
C. GLENCROSS. 
D00R HANGING DEVICE FOR CABS. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 28, 1890. 
h 4 
//WVENTOR, 
 
THE McRats PETERs co, PHOToutha, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES GLENCROSS, OF SYDNEY, NEW SOUTH WALES. 
Doo R-HANGING DEVICE FOR CABS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 439,143, dated October 28, 1890. 
Both doors of the vehicle have exactly cor- 55 
Victoria January 21, 1889, No. 6,479, and in England July 30, 1889, No. 12,097, 
Application filed May 13, 1890, Serial No. 351,613, (No model. Patented in New South Wales January 19, 1888, No. 446, in 
ing-links at the top of the doors. Fig. 5 is a 
similar sketch showing the arrangement of 
the hanging-links at the foot of the doors. 
responding parts, and by suitably arranging 
the operating mechanism the doors may be 
manipulated separately or together. 
Referring to Fig. 5 of the drawings, the full 
lines show the relative positions of the right- 6o 
hand door and of the pair of hanging-links at 
the foot of it when closed, and the dotted lines 
show the relative positions of the same when 
Open. A is the door, and B and Care the hanging 
links. These links work from the respective 
centers band c. The innerlinkB is a straight 
bar, and the outer link C is bent in the form 
of a figure somewhat resembling the letter V 
inform, one of the arms being curved inward, 
so as to coincide with the segment of a circle 
having its center in the pivot at the extremity 
of the straight arm and having a radius equal 
in length to that arm. The outer extremity 
of each link is attached to the door by means 
of a pivot-lug, the positions whereof are re 
spectively indicated by the letters b' and c'. 
Since it is intended that when open the 
doors should swing out over the front quar 
ters of the vehicle and into a position in which 
they cannot impede passage into or out of the 
vehicle, it is necessary to make the link C 
shorter than the link B, for by this construc 
tion the door is made to traverse a path gov 
erned by the relative lengths of the bars B 
and C and ultimately to fall into a position 
approximately parallel with the curve of the 
face of the vehicle. 
The standing pillars D, as well as serving 
the purpose of jambs for the doors when 
closed, act also as hinge-tops for them when 
open, in which position (see Fig. 5) the straight 
arm of the link C strikes against the pillar D 
and can proceed no farther. The reason that 
the link C is made with a curved arm is to 
allow its outer end to pass the pillar D, which 
it could not if made straight. On top of the 
cab both hanging-links are made straight. 
An L-piece is fitted to the link H, and to the 
L-piece controlling cordsorrods are connected 
to enable the driver to manipulate the doors 
and to open and close them at will. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES GLENCROSS, 
coach-builder, a subject of the Queen of Great 
Britain, residing in the city of Sydney, in the 
5 Colony of New South Wales, have invented a 
new and useful Method of Hanging the Doors 
of Brougham Hansom-Cabs and Similar Vehi 
cles, (for which I have obtained a patent in 
New South Wales, No. 446, bearing date Janu 
ary 19, 1888; in Victoria, No. 6,479, bearing 
date January 21, 1889, and in Great Britain, 
No. 12,097, bearing date July 30, 1889) o 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved 
method of hanging the doors of brougham han 
som-cabs, and other vehicles of similar con 
struction. 
The object of the invention is to dispense 
with the use of hinges and slides for the doors 
and to substitute for these contrivances a de 
vice which is more easy of manipulation and 
at the same time less cumbersome and incon 
venient than either of them, and in which the 
operation of opening and closing the doors is 
My invention consists, essentially, in hang 
ing the doors by means of links on a princi 
ple similar to that applied in uniting the bars 
of linked parallel rulers; but to make the in 
vention better understood I will now proceed 
to more particularly describe the same with 
reference to the five figures on the accom 
panying sheets of drawings, in all of which 
like letters of reference indicate similar or 
corresponding parts. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a brougham 
hansom-cab with perpendicular flush doors 
hung according to the method herein de 
scribed. Fig. 2 is a plan or cant view of the 
same. The mechanism illustrated in this fig 
ure shows the general arrangement of the 
hanging-links at the top of the doors and an 
L-piece fitted to one of the links of each pair, 
by operating which, with the aid of cords or 
rods, the driver is enabled to open or close the 
said door from his perch. Fig. 3 is also a plan 
or cant view, a portion of the roof of the ve 
hicle being shown broken away to illustrate 
the arrangement and construction of the pair 
of hanging-links at the foot. Fig. 4 is a Work 
ing sketch of the arrangement of the hang 
25 effected within a restricted space. 
- 
65 
75 
95 
Idc 
o 
3O 
35 
45 
2 
439,143 
E is an operating-stock moving in guides e 
and mechanically connected with the operat 
ing bars or joints F, which are secured to the 
L-piece before referred to. The standing 
5 pillars and the door-stiles are beveled, as 
shown, in order to facilitate entrance of the 
doors into the door-space. 
I would have it understood that I do not 
confine myself to the use of the special method 
to of arrangement or form of links hereinbefore 
described, as the essential feature of novelty 
in the invention is to hang the doors so that 
the outer edges thereof will have less throw 
or swing than the inner edges, whereby the 
I5 same are made to move in a curve approxi 
mately parallel with the contour of the vehi 
cle-face. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. Hanging the doors of broughamhansom-2o 
cabs by means of a pair of links at the top 
and a pair of links at the bottom of the doors, 
the outer link of each pair having a shorter 
radial length than the inner one, for the pur 
poses set forth. 
2. The form of the links Cat, the foot of the 
doors and the combination of the same with 
links of corresponding radial length at the top 
of the doors and with a pair of links, one at 
the top and the other at the foot of the doors, 3o 
of greater radial length, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
25 
CHARLES GLENCROSS. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES G. HEPBURN, 
W. I. SPRUSON, 
Both Patent Agents, Sydney, N. S. W. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439243.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 439,243, 
J. E. HARTMAN. 
WASHING MACHINE. 
Patented 00t, 28, 1890. 
 
2/ 
Az-Z 
a/ 
a age. I 
II. I 
... I 
TI 
V5 
7 
 
See 
A-2 de NW2. 
Set 
y 
AS t 
2 
2 
 
  
  
 
NSNN 
 
f all 
? 
f 
f / 
1 
/ 
/ 
/ 
f 
A, 2. 
W 
te, 
\ 
\ 
\ 
\ 
\ 
W 
V-1 
341.ucv-to 
227. 
2: Zee 6- 4 well 
262-263.6 C (13422 
-4 attevieq. 
22dy- 
- 
R 
Phot-unto., WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. HARTMAN, OF COLLEGE SPRINGS, IOWA. 
WASHING - MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 439,243, dated October 28, 1890. 
Application filed April 19, 1890, Serial No. 348,640, (No model.) 
5 
O 
- 
7 o 
55 
of the latter extends through the side of the 
To all whom, it noty concern: 
tub and is bent up to form a crank-arm J, 
Be it, known that I, JAMES E. HARTMAN, a 
having a suitable handle J'. Thus the turn 
citizen of the United States, residing at Col 
lege Springs, in the county of Page and State 
ing of the crank will cause the revolution of 
large roller, and this motion will be imparted 
of Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Washing-Machines; and I 
to the smaller one through the medium of the 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
ropes K, which pass around both rollers and 
work in peripheral grooves L in the same. 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
These ropes are preferably three in number, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
and each one has attached to it a number of 
loops M, in which pieces of clothes are fast 
Sae. 
My invention has relation to Washing-ma 
ened, to be carried around. Behind the larger 
chines, but more particularly to that class in 
roller is situated a wash-board N, having a 65 
corrugated face O, and pivoted by means of 
which the clothes are passed between corru 
gated rollers and corrugated boards; and my 
its legs P to the base of the sides of the tub, 
as seen at p in Fig. 2. A coil-spring Q is in 
object is to produce a more efficient, service 
terposed between the back of this board and 
able, and convenient device than has hereto 
the end piece of the tub, and will thus give 
fore been in use. 
the board a spring-pressure against the roller, 
With this end in view my invention con 
sists in certain peculiarities of construction 
and hence allow it to adjust itself to material 
passing between them. The spring is Sup 
and combinations of parts more fully de 
ported and held in proper position by means 
scribed hereinafter, and pointed out in the 
of transverse strips R. S., secured to the board 
claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
and tub, respectively, the strip S being pro 
vided with a depression or grooves, in which 
Fig. 1 is a top view of the structure, and Fig. 
the end of the spring drops. It will thus be 
2 a side elevation with the side of the tub or 
seen that the spring is readily removable. 
box broken away to show the interior. 
The reference-letter Arepresents the tub or 
Beneath the smaller roller a loose wash-board 8o 
box for containing the clothes, being mounted 
T is placed, which rests upon the bottom of 
the tub, and is provided with end pieces U, 
On Suitable legs C, and provided with a cover 
bearing against the end of the tub to keep 
B. The tub is lined with a suitable material 
the board in proper position. The roller will 
and its bottom slopes at either end, as seen 
then have free access to rub the clothes be- 85 
at b, so that all the water can be drawn off 
through the outlet C in the bottom of the 
tween it and this loose board, and Will adjust 
itself to the material passing through. As it 
front side of the tub. 
The rollers D and E are mounted in the op 
has been previously stated, the lower end of 
posite ends of a frame fitting within the tub. 
the frameisfree of the tub, and can move up or 
down on its pivot I. A further advantage of 9o 
between the long sides thereof, and consist 
ing of the side bars F and cross-pieces G, con 
this arrangement is that if the clothes become 
necting them intermediate of the rollers. Both 
caught underneath or the loose board slips 
rollers are corrugated lengthwise, and the 
from its place the frame can be elevated to 
ribs d of the roller Dare made straight, while 
the position shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2, 
the ribs e of the roller E have a spiral form, 
and thus access gained to the bottom of the 95 
as will be seen more clearly in Fig. 1. 
tub, which is advantageous for divers reasons. 
The operation will now be apparent, and 
The shaft H, on which the smaller roller D 
is mounted, simply extends into the side bars 
needs but little description. The pieces of 
of the frame, thus leaving the lower end of 
clothes to be washed will be attached in the 
the frame free; but the shaft I of the larger 
loops M, secured to the ropes K, and the cover Ioo 
roller E passes through said side bars and 
shut, when the crank will be turned and the 
into the sides of the box, thus also constitut 
clothes thus carried around between the two 
ing a pivot for the frame. 
The roller E is rollers and their respective boards and rubbed 
rigidly mounted on this shaft I, and one end through between them, it being understood 
75 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
489,243 
O 
that Water has been previously introduced 
into the tub. When the clothes have been 
sufficiently treated, the roller-frame can be 
thrown up and the pieces removed and others 
Substituted. Thus a simple and convenient 
structure is produced, which at the same time 
is efficient in its working and thoroughly rubs 
and cleans the clothes in a short space of 
time, as they pass successively from one set 
of rubbers to another. 
It is evident that my device might be va 
ried in many slight ways which might sug 
gest themselves to a skilled mechanic, and 
hence I do not wish to confine myself to the 
precise construction and arrangement herein 
shown, but consider myself entitled to all such 
slight variations as come within the spirit 
and Scope of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
In a washing-machine, the combination of 
a frame contained within the clothes-recepta 
cle, a pivot extending through said frame and 
journaled in the sides of Said receptacle, a 
corrugated roller rigid on said pivot, a wash 
board pivoted back of said roller and having 
Spring-pressure against it, a stationary Wash 
board on the bottom of the receptacle, a gravi 
tating corrugated roller mounted in the oppo 
site end of said pivoted frame directly above 
said stationary wash-board and adapted to 
rest upon it, and suitable connections between 
the two rollers for carrying the clothes around 
them, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
35 
JAMES E. HARTMAN. 
Witnesses: 
L. G. PRICHARD, 
G. F. BOWERS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439343.txt	 
(No Model.) 
J. W. BRUTON, 
PORTABLE FENCE, 
No. 439,343, 
Patented Oct. 28, 1890. 
 
 
  
 
a-basess 
33 
faz's 
THE MORRs perers co, PHora-tirho. was INGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACKSON W. BRUTON, OF GUTHRIE, MISSOURI. 
PORTABLE FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 439,343, dated October 28, 1890. 
Application filed July 18, 1889, Serial No. 317,874. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
Zo all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACKSON W. BRUTON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Guth 
rie, in the county of Callaway and State of Mis 
souri, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Portable Fences; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to portable fences, 
and has for its object to provide a fence that 
will be composed of panels, and which can be 
quickly set up and taken down and conven 
iently transported. The rails comprising a 
panel will project beyond the end batten of 
said panel on opposite sides thereof, so as to 
embrace the sides of the end batten of the 
adjacent panel, thereby forming a lock-joint, 
which will prevent the lateral displacement 
of one panel relative to the other, 
The improvement consists of the novel fea 
tures which will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and claimed, and which are shown in 
the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of a fence embody 
ing my invention. Fig.2 is a vertical section 
on the line XX of Fig. 1, looking to the left. 
Fig. 3 is a top plan view of the ends of two 
adjacent panels, Fig. 4 is a top edge view of 
a panel. Fig. 5 is an end view of a panel. 
Fig. 6 is a side view of a panel. Fig. 7 is 
a perspective view showing a modification 
which admits of the fence inclosing a small 
space. 
The panels are constructed alike. Hence a 
description of one will suffice for all. The 
longitudinal rails are arranged in two series 
A and B. The rails A of one series are ar 
ranged in reverse order to the rails B of the 
other series. 
C and D are the end battens, to which the 
rails A and B are fastened. The rails A are 
secured at one end to the obverse side of bat 
ten C and near the other end to the leverse 
side of batten D. The intermediate rails B 
are fastened at one end to the reverse side of 
batten C and near the other end to the obs 
verse side of batten D. In edge view the two 
sets of rails cross at a point midway between 
the two battens, and the ends of the rails 
project beyond the batten C on oppositesides 
thereof, and are adapted to embrace the sides 
of the batten D of the adjacent panel. Ob 
viously the ends of the rails could project be 
yond both battens; but the construction shown 
and described is deemed best and more eco 
nomical, 
When the fence is constructed, the adja 
cent end battens of two panels come together 
and are held from separating by the wire 
band or loop E, which embraces the ends of 
the said battens, as shown most clearly in 
Figs, 1 and 3. The panels rest on cross-bars 
F, and are braced laterally by the wire G, 
Which is fastened atits ends to the ends of the 
cross-bar and passes over one of the rails. 
Pins fare driven in the cross-bar on each side 
of the lower edge of the panel to prevent the 
panel slipping on the said cross-bars, Sta 
les are driven over the wire and into the 
rails where the wire passes over the rails to 
prevent the wire from slipping. 
If the fence is built on a steep hillside or 
in localities where there are severe winds, a 
staub is driven into the ground at the angle 
formed by the cross-bar and panel, and the 
staub so shaped that the top of same extends 
over the top of cross-bar, said staub holding 
the fence firmly to the ground, as well as pre 
venting the cross-bar from being moved in 
any direction. 
Fig. 7 shows a construction in which the 
rails alternately project beyond the end bat 
ten, whereby the fence can be arranged to 
form a small inclosure for stock. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
The herein shown and described fence, com 
posed of a series of panels, each panel com 
prising rails and end battens, some of the rails 
being secured at one end to the obverse side 
of one end batten and at the other end to the 
reverse side of the other batten, and the re 
maining rails being secured in a similar man 
ner to the said end battens in reverse order, 
the ends of the rails projecting beyond the 
end batten to embrace the sides of the end 
S- 
- 
OO 
o 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
489,343 
batten of the next panel, the wire loop emi- 
bracing the adjoining end battens of two pan- presence of two witnesses. 
els, the cross-bars or sills having pins which 
embrace the foot of the panels, and the wires 
5 G, passing over a rail of the panels and se- 
cured at their ends to the ends of the sills or 
cross-bars, substantially as set forth. 
D. D. FORD, 
GEO. W. PENN, 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
Witnesses: 
JACKSON W. BRUTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439443.txt	(No Model.) 
C. A. THURMOND. 
BACK BAND BUCKLE, 
No. 439,443, 
Patented Oct. 28, 1890. 
ZZez267: 
42627%2S4. Z22zzzzzozez, 
(262/ 
w 
ZYee2. 
EoRRS PETERs ce. Photo-irrito, washisto, c. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. THURMOND, OF PERRY, GEORGIA. 
BACK BAND BUCKLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 439,443, dated October 28, 1890. 
Application filed March 5, 1890. 
Serial No. 342,774, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, CHARLESA. THURMOND, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Perry, 
in the county of Houston and State of Geor 
gia, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Back-Band Buckles; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion, and in which 
Figure 1 is a view illustrating my inven 
tion in its application to the harness. Fig. 
2 is a top plan view of the buckle. Fig. 3 is 
a Section thereof, taken on line acac of Fig. 1; 
and Fig. 4 is a section taken on line y y of 
Fig 2. 
The invention relates to back-band buckles 
or hooks, and has for its object to provide a 
simple and efficient means for adjustably con 
necting the back-band to the traces, and to 
prevent the traces from slipping and cha?ing 
the animal. 
To these ends the invention consists in the 
construction of the buckle and in the com 
bination of the parts thereof, as will now be 
fully described, reference being had to the 
drawings, in which I have illustrated the 
buckle as applied to a plow-harness. It 
will, however, be understood that the im 
proved back-band and trace fastener and ad 
juster may be used on other classes of harness. 
The buckle B comprises a frame b, that is 
provided with a hook- extension B', in the 
outer or hook end b of which is formed a 
hole t, that registers with a like hole b in 
the said extension. The frame b has two 
slots S and S for the passage of the back 
band, the said slots being provided along their 
upper transverse edges with teeth S and s', 
respectively, and from opposite sides of the 
frame on the line of the cross bar or bridge 
B, between the slots S and S', project bear 
ing-lugs b, in which is journaled the locking 
lever H, that is adapted to engage the holes 
band b in the hook b' and extension B and 
a link of the trace-chain. The locking-lever H 
also serves as a wedging-lever to Wedge Orlock 
the back-band to the bridge B of the buckle 
frame B, it being provided with teeth h, 
adapted to engage the back-band. 
From the upper face of the bridge B pro 
ject three or more teeth b, that co-operate 
with the teeth h on the locking and wedging 
lever and with the teeth of the buckle-frame 
slots, thus holding the back-band securely 
against Slipping. 
In Operation the back band is slipped from 
the under side of the buckle-frame b first 
through slot S, thence over bridge B and un 
der the wedging and locking-lever H, which 
for this purpose is turned back into the po 
sition shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3, and the 
back-band is then passed through slot S. 
The trace is now laid in hook U of extension 
B' and the parts properly adjusted, and when 
so adjusted the wedging and locking lever is 
pressed down so as to enter hole b, engage a 
link of the trace, and enter hole b in exten 
sion B', the toothed axis of the lever acting 
as a cam or eccentric to wedge the back-band. 
In this manner the back-band is securely held 
in position by the Wedging and locking lever 
H, the teeth b on the bridge B, said teeth 
being arranged slightly in rear of the teeth 
on lever H, so that the back-band is effectually 
held against slipping, and, finally, by the teeth 
S and s', projecting into the slots S and S, re 
spectively. 
Whenever it is desired to disconnect the 
buckle from the trace or adjust the trace or 
the back-band all that is necessary is to lift 
the lever, thereby releasing the trace, the 
back-band being still held by the teeth S and 
s', said back-band being released from said 
teeth in a Well-known manner, so that the 
trace can be adjusted independently of the 
back-band, thus providing a single and effi 
cient buckle for the purposes specified. 
It is not absolutely necessary that the hook, 
extension or tongue B' be provided with the 
hole t', as it will readily be seen that this 
may be dispensed with and is used only as a 
means to provide a more solid bearing for the 
locking-hook. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
IS 
1. Aback-band buckle comprising a buckle 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOC 
2 
- 
439,443 
frame provided with an extension bent upon 
itself to form a hook, said hook having a hole 
adapted to register with a corresponding hole 
in the frame-extension, in combination with 
a lever pivoted to the frame and adapted to 
lock the back-band thereto, and provided with 
an arm adapted to engage the holes in the 
hook-extension of the frame, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. A back-band buckle comprising the 
slotted and toothed buckle-frameb, having the 
hook-extension B', and the hook b', which is 
provided with a hole adapted to register with 
a corresponding hole in said extension, in com 
O 
bination with the toothed cam or eccentric I5 
lever, the toothed portion of which is adapted 
to wedge the back-band to the buckle-frame, 
said lever having hooked end adapted to en 
gage the holes in the hook-extension of the 
frame, substantially as and for the purposes 2 o 
specified. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
CHARLES A THURMOND. 
Witnesses: 
W. M. STRIPLING, 
E. S. WELLONS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439544.txt	(No Model.) 
U. S. McCORMACK 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 439,544, 
Patented Oct. 28, 1890. 
R.C.lc 
E E 
 
- WITNESSES-INVENIOR, 
%2a 6. 2.e46. Cycznar 7tarmac/?. 
An 24, 426-4%a 
BY (9-2/2 v-e-ATTYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 439,544, 
 
U. S. McCORMACK 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 28, 1890. 
WITNESSES: 
A 
A. 
y 
r 
N-- 
777. 6. 
NVENTORs 
26%. 28. U.s/vermvaro -70 (armoo/, 
7-4A 7-6a-144% 
BY e-cle 6, ATTYS. 
- N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ULYSSES SHERMAN McCORMACK, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE AMERICAN WRITING MACHINE COMPANY, OF HARTFORD, CON. 
NECTICUT, 
TYPE - WRITING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 439,544, dated October 28, 1890. 
Application filed June 17, 1886, Serial No, 205,391 (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
5 
O 
To all thon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ULYSSES SHERMAN MC 
CORMACK, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Newark, in the county of Essex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Type-Writ 
ing Machines; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
This invention relates more particularly, 
though not exclusively, to certain improve 
ments in that class of type-writing machines 
represented by the one commonly known in 
the market as a calligraph, the object of the 
invention being to facilitate the process of 
Writing on a sheet or page columns of Words 
or figures, and to do so more accurately, 
whereby the appearance of the page is greatly 
improved, and in the case of figures greater 
correctness in adding is obtained. 
The invention consists in the alrangements 
and combinations of parts, substantially as 
will be hereinafter set forth, and finally em 
bodied in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
in which like letters indicate corresponding 
parts in each of the several figures, Figure 1, 
Sheet 1, is a side elevation of a portion of a 
calligraph-frame having my improvements 
thereon. Fig. 2 is a plan of the paper or 
sheet carrying portion thereof, having Secured 
thereto a slotted stop bar or rack, upon which 
are arranged certain adjustable stop-pieces 
which embody important features of the in 
4o vention; and Fig. 3 is a detail view of a cer 
tain stop, hereinafter more particularly re 
ferred to. Fig. 4, Sheet 2, is a back view of 
the machine or that portion thereof to which 
my improvements more particularly relate. 
Fig. 5 is an enlarged rear elevation of the 
rack above referred to. Fig. 6 is a sectional 
view taken through line a' in the last said 
figure. Fig. 7 is a detail view showing a 
modification in the construction of an adjust 
able stop-piece, and Fig. 8 is a front elevation 
of the lower part of the said piece. 
In said drawings, at indicates the frame or 
bed of the type-writing machine, which may 
be of any suitable construction to receive the 
type and mechanism for operating the same, 
which last parts it is deemed unnecessary to 
show herein. 
b is the platen supported by the carriage 
C in any usual manner. To the rear carriage 
bar c', depending therefrom over the carriage 
shaft d, is secured a rack e of peculiar con 
Struction, being provided with teeth to en 
gage the letter-space dog' in the usual man 
ner, and in addition thereto adjustable stops 
by means of which the columns are formed 
on the page in the positions desired. The said 
rack is vertically and longitudinally slotted, 
as shown at e, Figs. 2 and 6, and on the 
under side, back of the ordinary teeth f and 
9, said rack is provided with teeth or a notched 
surface or edge h, which is engaged by a for 
Wardly-extending lug of the adjustable stop 
piecej. Said stop-piecej extends vertically 
through the slot of the rack, as shown in Fig. 
6, the forwardly-extending lugi engaging the 
notched under surface of the rack. At the 
upper side of the rack the stop-piece is pro 
vided with a set screw or nut k, Fig. 7, or 
with any other suitable holding device or 
clamp, the preferred construction being shown 
in Figs. 5 and 6, in which l is an eccentric 
which is pivoted on the stop-piece and bears 
on the top of the rack or on a plate in ar 
ranged thereon. By raising the finger-piece 
l' of the eccentric the lug is allowed to fall 
from engagement with the rack-teeth h; but 
by depressing said finger-piece the said lug 
will be brought up into holding relation, as 
in Fig. 6. When the stop is thus clamped 
and when the dog is released from the usual 
spacing-teeth of the rack and the carriage is 
thus allowed to move on the ways of the frame 
under the influence of the ordinary main act 
luating-spring ', the concussion caused by the 
engagement of the holding-dog n with the said 
stop-piece will not displace the latter and 
35 
25 
95 
45 
 
439,544 
5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
produce an irregularity in the vertical align 
ment of the column of Words or figures, as 
will be understood. 
The rear face of the rack is provided with 
graduation-marks oo, Fig. 5, which are num 
bered to tally with those of the ordinary car 
riage-scale p, Fig. 1, at the front of the ma 
chine, the stop-pieces or the plates n moving 
there with being provided with pointers or in 
dex-fingers q, to allow an exact adjustment of 
the said stops. 
The dog in, the dog-holder S, and rocking 
bart are of the usual construction and ar 
rangement, and are operated by the univer 
sal bar' at in the usual manner, the dog n. 
being thrown by said universal bar from the 
teeth f of the sliding portion of the rack to 
the teeth g of the body portion thereof when 
the key and the said bar at are depressed, To 
throw the dog n forward beyond the teeth f 
g, so that the carriage with the column-stops 
therein will move under the influence of the 
main spring v until its motion is obstructed 
by the said stopsi, I have provided a lever or 
arm v, which is attached to the rocking bar 
tat a point near its pivotal bearings at the 
side of the machine, and extends upward and 
forward at one side of the group of connect 
ing bars or rods (not shown) for operating the 
type hammers or levers to the fore part of the 
machine, where it is provided with a finger 
portion or piece w'. The spring action and 
the adjustment of this said lever or arm at 
causes it to normally hug the inner surface of 
the portion v', Fig. 1, of the frame, which is 
provided with a stoppiece or portion v', which 
projects beyond the saidinner line and serves 
to hold said arm u in place while the machine 
is in ordinary use. The forward movement 
of the dog in, under the influence of the de 
pressed arm u', is limited by that portion of 
the rack marked h, Fig. 6, which hangs down 
slightly below the line of the teeth fg. 
In operating the device the column-stops 
are first arranged in or on the rack e in a se 
ries corresponding with the line of first let 
ters or numbers of the desired columns. The 
carriage is then brought to a position to begin 
the line of written matter, and the said line 
is commenced by operating the keys in the 
usual manner. When the first column is fin 
ished and it is desired to begin the second 
column, I press upon the lever U, which throws 
the dog off of the rack e into a slot or space 
behind said rack, as will be understood upon 
reference to Fig. 1, which allows the carriage 
to move forward until it comes to the stop, as 
will be understood upon reference to Figs. 1 
and 6, when the spring which actuates the dog 
will throw the latter back into engagement 
with the rack e, preparatory to repeating the 
operation. 
UlleS. 
- 
75 
The chief advantage in this improvement 
is that when it is desired to make a break in 
a line or lines of printing, as in making out 65 
a bill, and leave a space of some length be 
tween the items and the figures at the end of 
the lines it can be done by setting the stops 
on the rack e to the figures corresponding with 
the carriage-scale where it is desired. Then 
by simply pressing once upon the lever w, 
when it is desired to make the break in the 
lines and move to the figure-column, the cal 
riage will at once move forward until the dog 
meets the stop. This secures automatically 
absolute uniformity in the vertical line of fig 
In the ordinary machines it is necessary to 
strike the space-bar thirty times (more or less) 
to secure the desired length of break, and thus 
in the improvement considerable time is saved 
and the machine is less noisy. 
There may be as many breaks in a line as 
there are stops on the machine. Usually I 
employ six or eight. 
I do not claim, broadly, as my invention the 
combination, with the carriage, of adjustable 
column-stops, a dog to engage the same, and 
a finger piece or key to actuate said dog, nor 
the combination, with a dog and slotted rack, 90 
of a series of stops adjustably arranged on 
said racks, Neither do I claim the combina 
tion of the driving mechanism, the rocking 
frame carrying the pawl, the carriage pro 
vided with three racks, one of them having a 
less number of teeth than the others, and 
means for vibrating the rocking frame and 
throwing the pawl farther forward to co-op 
erate with the rack having the less number 
of teeth. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of the dog n and means for operating the 
same, and rack having teeth f, g, and h, of an 
adjustable column-stop, said parts being ar 
ranged and adapted to operate substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the slotted rack having the teeth f, 
g, and h, a dog n, and means for operating the 
same, of an adjustable stopi, held in the slot 
of said rack, Substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 7th day of 
June, 1886. 
95 
OO 
I o5 
U. SHERMAN MCCORMACK. 
Witnesses: 
OLIVER DRAKE, 
CHARLES H. PELL, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439644.txt	 
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
R. B. FITHIAN & J. A. WYMAN. 
SEWER, OR, SEWER PIPE, 
No. 439,644 
Patented Nov. 4, 1890. 
 
ss??,<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<s<ssss?k<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<s&2zzzzzzzzzzzz) 
 2 N 
c O do do O O. d g o O 
do o do o O O o do 0 
o d do o O do o o 0 
o d do do o co did 
o oooooooooo b 
o e o o do o do o do 
o es d o O O. d O. O. d co 
No. ? 
SغzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZzZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
fie Norris reTeras co., F-too-thio. washi GTON, d. e. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
-------- 
RICHARD BEATTY FITHIAN AND JOHN ADAMS WYMAN, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
SEWER OR SEWER - PPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 439,644, dated November 4, 1890. 
Application filed July 24, 1886, Serial No. 209,005, (No model.) 
55 
75 
sewer-pipe near its entrance into the filter 
To all, whom it may concern: 
box, and a curved straining or deflecting plate 
Be it known that we, RICHARD BEATTY 
5 slides in vertical grooves 6 in the sides of 
FITHIAN and JOHN ADAMS WYMAN, of New 
the sewer-pipe at the mouth of said branch 
York city, in the county and State of New 
pipe, deflecting the solid sewage into the same. 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
The lower portion 7 of this deflecting-plate 5 
Improvements in Sewers; and we do hereby 
is solid and the upper portion 8 is perforated, 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
and said solid portion may be sunk into a 
exact description of the invention, which will 
groove or recess 9 in the bottom of the sewer 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pipe. Aledge or flange 10, which forms a con 
pertains to make and use the same. 
tinuation of the side of the sewer-pipe, pro 
Our invention relates to sewers, and more 
jects into and partly across the mouth of the 
particularly to devices for collecting solid 
branch pipe and serves to prevent eddies or 
Sewage; and it consists in the improved con 
backflow in the sewer-pipe. The branch pipe 
Struction and arrangement or combination of 
extends to a tank 11 -for the reception of the 
parts hereinafter fully disclosed in the de 
solid sewage. 
Scription, drawings, and claims. 
The filter-box2 has a filter 12 Secured near 
The objects of our invention are, first, to 
its end and oblique to its sides, and said filter 
provide means for deflecting the thick and 
is formed of frames 13, hinged together and 
solid sewage to a tank and for straining all 
having perforations 14. Suitable straining or 
Solid matter from the thin and fluid sewage; 
filtering cloth 15 is placed between said hinged 
second, to provide means for deflecting the 
frames and clamped between them, as shown 
thick and solid sewage into a tank and for re 
in Fig. 5 of the drawings, and the frames are 
ceiving the overflow under a heavy flow of 
supported in ways 16 in the sides of the filter 
Sewage and straining or filtering the same; 
box. The filter 12 is placed oblique to the 
third, to provide means for preventing eddies 
sides of the box 2, and the side forming the 
or backflow in the deflected branch pipe; 
acute angle between it and the filter has an 
fourth, to provide means for skimming off the 
opening 17 near or at the top of the box, over 
light solid sewage in the filter-box, and, fifth, 
which opening a gate 18 slides in flanged ver 
to provide means for straining or filtering the 
tical ways 19. An arm 20 is pivoted to the 
sewage in the filter-box. These objects we 
filter and has a float 21 adjustably secured 
attain by the apparatus or device illustrated 
upon its outer free portion, and a stud 22, 
in the accompanying drawings, forming part 
which projects upward and inward from said 
of this specification, in which the same refer 
gate 18, is pivoted in said arm near its inner 
erence-numerals indicate the same parts, and 
pivoted end, so that the gate may be verti 
in which 
cally slid by rocking said arm. A pipe 23 ex 
Figure 1 represents a horizontal Section of 
tends from the opening 17 in the side of the 
a sewer-pipe, the receiving-tank, the deflect 
ing-pipe for the same, the filter-box, and pipes 
filter-box to the tank 11. 
The filter-box is provided with a suitable 
pertaining to the same; Fig. 2, a longitudinal 
man-hole 24 for cleaning or repairing it, and 
vertical section of a portion of the filter-box; 
may have a suitable outlet or tap 25 in the 
Fig. 3, a longitudinal vertical section of the 
bottom for draining it. Under a normal flow 
sewer-pipe and deflecting-plate; Fig.4, a trans 
of sewage the deflecting-plate 5 is raised so 
verse section of the filter-box; Fig. 5, a Sec 
as to bring the solid portion 7 of the saihe to a 
tional detail view of the filter; Fig. 6, an edge 
suitable height for deflecting the solid sewage 
view of the deflector, and Fig. 7 a front view 
into the branch pipe 4, while the thin sewage 
of the same. 
mayflow through the perforated portion into 
In the drawings, the numeral 1 indicates the 
the filter-box, where it will be sufficiently re 
sewer-pipe, which is of the usual Or of any 
tarded in its progress, on account of the larger 
desired construction, and which enters one 
diameter of said box, to allow the lighter par 
end of the filter-box 2, which has an outlet 
ticles to float on top and to be deflected by 
pipe 3 at the opposite end. The deflecting 
pipe or branch pipe 4 enters the side of the the oblique filter 12 into the shallow opening 
9o 
95 
IOC) 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
439,644 
17, which will at all times be kept slightly be 
low the level of the sewage in the tank by 
the arm, float, and stud. The water will pass 
through the filter 12, while the solid sewage 
will either be carried off through the opening 
17 and pipe 23 to the tank 11, if it is suffi 
ciently light to float, or it may sink to the 
bottom of the filter-box and be removed there 
from in any suitable manner. 
If a heavy flow of sewage occurs-such as a 
flow caused by a heavy rain-the deflecting 
plate is depressed so as to present only the 
perforated portion, and the thin sewage will 
flow freely through the same and be strained 
or filtered in the filter-box, while the coarser 
sewage will be deflected into the tank. 
Various modifications may be made in the 
deflecting-plate, in the filter, and in other parts 
of the apparatus or device without departing 
from the spirit of our invention. 
Having thus fully described the construc 
tion and arrangement or combination of the 
several parts of our improved device for col 
lecting Solid sewage, its operation, and advan 
tages, what we claim as new is 
1. The combination of a sewer-pipe, a per 
forated deflecting-plate in the same, a branch 
pipe in front of said deflecting-plate, and a 
filtering-tank at the rear of said plate and 
provided with means for separating the solid 
and fluid sewage, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a sewer-pipe, a ver 
tically-adjustable deflecting-plate having a 
solid lower and a perforated upper portion, a 
O 
25 
branch pipe in front of said deflecting-plate, 35 
and a filtering-tank at the rear of said plate 
and provided with means for separating the 
solid and fluid sewage, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination of the sewer-pipe I, hav 
ing vertical grooves 6 and a recess 9 in its 
bottom, the curved deflecting-plate 5, having 
the solid lower portion 7 and the perforated 
upper portion 8 and sliding adjustably in said 
grooves 6, the branch pipe 4, and the filtering 
box 2, having the filter 12, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination of the sewer-pipe 1, the 
branch pipe 4, the deflecting-plate 5, and the 
ledge or flange 10, substantially as described. 5 o 
5. The combination of the filter-box 2, hav 
ing the opening 17 and vertical flanged ways 
19, the oblique filter 12, the pipe 23, the gate 
18, sliding in said ways 19 and having stud 
22, and the arm 20, having the adjustable float 55 
21, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of the sewer-pipe 1, the 
curved deflecting-plate 5, the branch pipe 4, 
the tank 11, the filter-box 2, having outlet 
pipe 3, the oblique filter 12, the pipe 23, and 6o 
the gate 18, and float-arm 2021, substantially 
as described. 
15 
RICHARD BEATTY FITIAN. 
JOHN ADAMS WYMAN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN WIECHMAN, 
HENRY FICKEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439744.txt	(No Model.). 
No. 439,744. 
J. B. DEAN & H. H. EARLE. 
BRUSH ATTACHMENT FOR DUST PANs, 
Patented Nov. 4, 1890. 
F. G. l. 
 
 
 
 
f 12 W 
A 
 
  
AAA 
W 
s 
A 7 
B 
28-bvicsecs 
site. 
al?o y 
m 
 
3." 
2 2. 
/ 2, as c 
1. 
oRR's Peters Co., Photo-LITHo, washisato, c.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES, B. DEAN, OF LOMPOC, AND HENRY H. EARLE, OF SAN FRANCISCO, 
CALFORNIA, 
BRUSH ATTACH fMENT FOR DUSTPANS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 439,744, dated November 4, 1890. 
Application filed June 9, 1890, Serial No, 854,854. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern 
Be it known that we, JAMES B. DEAN, of 
Lompoc, in the county of Santa Barbara, and 
State of California, and HENRY H. EARLE, of 
the city and county of San Francisco, in said 
State, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Brush. Attachments for 
Dust-Pans, &c., of which the following is a 
specification. 
Our invention relates to certain improve 
ments, hereinafter claimed, in brush attach 
ments for dust-pans, crumb-trays, &c., of the 
class in which the brushes are jointed thereto 
and adapted to be swung outward in advance 
of the front edges thereof and then swung in 
ward to sweep into them dust, bread-crumbs, 
&c., from floors, tables, or other surfaces. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in perspective, and Fig. 2 a part eleva 
tion, of a pan with our improvements, and 
Fig. 3 a detail view showing a modification 
of the joint connecting the brush and pan. 
The pan or tray A has a brush B hinged 
thereto, the jointed connection between the 
parts, as shown by Figs. 1 and 2, consisting of 
the socket b, formed at one end of the back or 
carrier C of the brush, and the bent rod a, se 
cured to the part of the pan at one corner 
thereof and forming a pivot for the brush 
carrier socket. The free end of the brush is 
adapted to be secured to the pan when the de 
vice is not in use by means of a jointed hook 
D and eye d, the one attached to the brush 
carrier and the other provided at the front 
corner of the pan opposite the hinged con 
nection between the pan and brush. 
In using the device the hook is lifted from 
the eye and the brush swung outward and 
then inward horizontally, or nearly So, thus 
sweeping into the pan when properly held the 
dust, crumbs, &c., to be removed. The joint 
between the pan and brush should be loose 
enough to allow some vertical play of the 
brushin order that when the panis in position 
the brush may swing outward over the dust 
to be swept into the pan. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
A two-way or universal joint of suitable 
kind-such, for instance, as shown by Fig. 3 
may be employed for connecting the brush to 
the pan, thus admitting of greaterfreedom of 
movement of the brush and allowing it to be 
swung back to bring its free end adjacent to 
the pan-handle, and so getting the brush out 
of the way in event of its being desired to use 
an independent broom or brush in connection 
with the pan instead of the hinged brush. 
This construction would also allow of the 
brush being used to sweep dust, &c., from the 
pan, to do which the brush would be lifted 
and swung back and then lowered and swung 
forward. 
By our improvements it will be seen that we 
provide a simple and inexpensive combined 
brush and pan, compactly arranged SO as to OC 
cupy but little space, of the classin which the 
brush is always in place, the one combined de 
vice serving the purposes of an independent 
pan or tray and broom or brush, frequently 
left in different places, and requiring waste of 
time to get both when wanted for use. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The combination of the pan and the 
swinging brush jointed to the pan at one of 
the front corners thereof, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination of the pan, the swing 
ing brush jointed to the pan at one of the 
front corners thereof, and the fastening for se 
curing the free end of the brush to the pan, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto 
subscribed our names. 
75 
JAMES 3. OEAN. 
HENRY H. EARLE. 
Witnesses to signature of James B. Dean: 
Witnesses to signature of Henry H. Earle: 
J. T. MONTGOMERY, 
D. C. MONTGOMERY. 
HOLLAND SMITH, 
GEORGE GOODMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439844.txt	(No Model.) 
C. J. LATZ. 
ELEWATOR, GUARD. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 439,844. 
Patented Nov. 4, 1890, 
i 
s s 
SS is 
 
(No Model.) 
C. J. LATZ 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 439,844. 
Patented Nov. 4, 1890, 
ELEWATOR GUARD, . 
. 
 
 
NZN Ny 
 
 
 
 
s SN 
& 
N 
EastE 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES J. LATZ, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNORTO JOHN WEHLE. 
ELEVATOR. GUARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 439,844, dated November 4, 1890. 
Application filed September 24, 1889, Serial No, 324965. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES.J. LATZ, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Roches 
ter, in the county of Monroe and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Elevator-Guards, of which 
the following is a description. 
Myimprovement relates to elevator-guards; 
and it consists of a shifting-gear of peculiar 
construction, whereby the opening and clos 
ing movements of the gate are automatic with 
the movements of the elevator, but are pro 
duced hy a power independent therefrom, as 
will be more fully described. It also consists 
in a new construction of the gate itself, as 
will be more fully set forth. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of a portion of the well and an exterior 
view of the gate, showing the same in the 
closed position, parts being broken away to 
show the interior construction. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section of one side of the well and 
car, showing the means for shifting the gear 
ing. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section through 
the doorway of the well, showing the folding 
gate or door in its extended position and clos 
ing the doorway. Fig. 4 is a similar view of 
one side, showing the gate opened and folded 
back. Fig. 5 is a diagram showing a top plan 
view of a portion of the folding gate. Fig. 6 
is an enlarged vertical cross-section in line 2 
2 of Fig. 1. Figs. 7 and 8 are detail views. 
A indicates the casing of the elevator-Well, 
and a the ordinary doorway opening into the 
Sale. 
B is the car, which is of ordinary construc 
tion. 
C is the gate or door that guards the en 
trance to the elevator-well. This door is of 
peculiar construction. It consists of a series 
of narrow sections b bb, which are hinged to 
gether at c in such form that the gate can 
fold up in the zigzag form shown in Figs. 4 
and 5. When so folded, as shown in Fig. 4, 
the sections lie close together face to face and 
occupy but little space and allow free en 
trance to the elevator-car. When extended, 
as shown in Fig. 3, they stretch across the 
passage and shut of entrance or exit. One 
end of the door is hinged permanently to the 
side of the well, while the other is free to move 
forward and back. 
d d are hangers attached to the inner joints 
of the gate and provided with rollers d' d', 
that run on a track e on the outside of the 
Well. 
The gearing for running the door is all lo 
cated inside the door and between it and the 
casing of the well. 
E is a vertical shaft which receives con 
stant rotation in one direction only. 
FF' are two friction-gears attached to the 
shaft and rotating with it. These gears are 
held in a casting or frame G, attached to the 
face of the well on one side of the doorway. 
H is a third bevel-gear standing vertically 
between the other two FF and of such size 
that when standing centrally it is out of en 
gagement with both. Its shaft f is hollow 
and rests in a sliding box g, Figs. 1 and 6. 
The box is attached to the face of the casting 
G by means of bolts h h, that pass through 
slots 
of the box, thus allowing vertical 
movement to the box sufficient to bring the 
center gear H in engagement with either of 
the other gears. 
I is a screw-rod having free end movement, 
one end resting in the hollow shaft f of gear 
H and the other in one or more bearings ii 
at the free end of the gate. 
J is a nut attached to the door and resting 
on the screw. By turning the screw in one 
direction or the other the door will be corre 
spondingly opened or closed. The nut J has 
a flange J, provided with slots k c, through 
which pass bolts (ck', or is otherwise arranged 
to have slight movement independent of the 
gate to compensate for the opening and clos 
ing movement of the clutch, as will be pres 
ently described. 
ll are two clutch-heads attached, respect 
ively, to the ends of the center gear-shaftf 
and the Screw I. When the clutch-heads are 
engaged, the Screw receives rotation, and when 
separated the screw remains motionless and 
the gate remains still. The screw is pressed 
up to engage the clutch-heads by means of a 
coiled or other spring n. (Shown at the right 
in Fig. 1.) 
o, Fig. 1, is a clutch-lever having a forked 
upper end that embraces the spool of clutch 
head l, and by which means said clutch-head 
is thrown out of engagement with clutch-head 
l, when the motion of the screw is to be ar 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
Od 
 
439,844 
rested. The lower end of lever o is cranked 
and is provided with a friction-roller. O'. The 
lever o is operated to disengage the clutch by 
means of a wedge-shaped camp, attached to 
one of the angles of the folding gate near its 
free end, by which means in the opening 
movement of the gate and at the end of its 
stroke the clutches are disengaged, and the 
gate then remains open. 
K is a cord or chain attached to the top of 
sliding boxg, thence extending up over a pull 
ley q, and thence extending down and being 
attached to one end of a bell-crank r, pivoted 
centrally to the inner face of the well and be 
tween it and the elevator-car. 
T is a depending arm attached to the bot 
tom of sliding box g and provided with a 
friction-rollers. In the closing movement of 
the gate and at the end of the stroke a wedge 
shaped camt, attached to the gate, strikes un 
der arm L and raises it and elevates the cen 
ter gear H half-way between the gears FF', 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
M is a curved spring forming a cam at 
tached to the outside of the car and between 
it and the wall of the well and serving to 
operate the bell-crank r. The upper end of 
the cam is permanently pivoted at u to the car, 
while the lower end has a stud that slides up 
and down in a slot v of the car. In its nor 
mal position the cam M is curved, as shown 
in Fig. 1, and when the car passes up or down 
it strikes the lower end of bell-crank r and 
throws the same sufficiently to draw on cord 
K and raise the sliding box g. The cam has 
a central stud U, to which is attached a rod 
y, extending down and connected with a han 
dle P, by depressing which the spring-cam can 
be drawn back into a straight position, in 
which case it runs clear of the bell-crank r. 
The operation is as follows: When the car 
goes up or down, the cam M strikes the bell 
crank r, draws on cord K, and raises the slid 
ing box g. This brings the center gear Hup 
into engagement with the upper gear F. The 
clutches ll being then in engagement, motion 
is imparted to screw I and the door is drawn 
open. At the extreme of the opening move 
ment the camp on the door strikes the lower 
end of clutch-levero, raises the same, and dis 
engages the clutches ll, thus stopping the 
motion of the door. The door remains sta 
tionary as long as the car remains at the open 
ing of the well. As soon as the car leaves 
and releases the bell-crank r the sliding box 
g drops of its own weight and brings the cen 
ter gear Hin engagement with the lower gear 
F' and closes the door again. At the end of 
the closing movement of the door the cam t 
on the door strikes under arm L and raises 
the sliding box g sufficiently to raise the gear 
H from engagement with the lower gear F. 
and midway between the two gears FF', in 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
which position it remains till the car operates. 
bell-crank r again. The nut J, through which 
the screw I passes, necessarily has a slight 
sliding movement to compensate for the move 
ment of the clutches in engaging and disen 
gaging, as before described. 
To enable the screw to run both ways to 
open and close the door, the clutches l l are 
made of the form shown in Fig. 1, having 
straight lugs that interlock and hold in both 
directions. 
Having described my invention, I do not 
claim in this application any of the combina 
tions shown in my pending application, Serial 
No. 317,133; but 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the cam on the car, 
a bell-crank on the side of the well, with 
which said came comes in contact, a sliding 
box connected with the bell-crank by a cord, 
a center gear resting in the sliding box and 
movable up and down with it, two outside . 
gears attached to a rotating shaft, with which 
said center gear engages, a screw rod or shaft 
connected at one end with the center gear 
and at the other with a nut on the door, said 
center gear and screw-rod being provided 
with suitable engaging and disengaging 
clutches, as shown and described, and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. The combination, with the flexible fold 
ing door and the screw rod or shaft for oper 
ating the same, of a nut, through which the 
screw passes, attached to the door by a slide 
that allows it loose movement, as and for the 
purpose specified. 
3. The combination, with the folding door, 
of a nut attached to the door and having a 
sliding movement, a screw rod or shaft pass 
ing through the nut, a gear with which the 
screw rod or shaft engages by a clutch, a le 
wer engaging with the clutch for disengaging 
the same, and a reacting spring on the outer 
end of the screw-shaft for engaging the clutch, 
as herein shown and described. 
4. The combination, with the gears FF, 
attached to the vertical shaft and revolving 
with it, of the center gear H, resting between 
the exterior gears, a sliding box in which the 
center gear has its bearing, a cord attached 
at one end to said box, by which it is raised, 
and a bell-crank to which the other end of 
the cord is attached, as shown and described, 
and for the purpose specified. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
CHARLES J. LATZ. 
9o 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
Witnesses: 
R. F. OSGOOD, 
P. A. COSTICH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US439945.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 439,945, 
  
 
A. HALLER. 
SALT EVAPORATING TANK, 
Patented NOW, 4, 1890. 
2-4--------- 
N. 
S. 
SA= 
&ealee Rs. 
NAsssssss in Nissen'N 
in 
(N 
ZN 
Lee 
f 
S 
f 
e 
S. 
e 
e- 
A. 
 
 
a. 
7. 9 
d 
s 
S-7--- H- x 
N 
N 
R 
a. 
as 
sassassassassassassassassaAN 
SS 32 
The Norris press co., Photo-Litho., washington, O. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTINE HALLER, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SALT EVAPORATING TANK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 439,945, dated November 4, 1890. 
Application filed January 30, 1889, Serial No. 298,077, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUSTINE HALLER, a 
resident of Pittsburg, in the county of Alle 
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvementin Salt 
Evaporating Tanks; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription thereof. 
My invention relates to salt-evaporating 
tanks or grainers which receive the brine and 
in which the salt formed is deposited. The 
Supply of saltis obtained from three sources 
from rock salt in the crystalline state, from 
the evaporation of sea-water, or from the natu 
ral brine which flows or is pumped from 
Springs or wells. From the latter source most 
of the coarse grades of salt are obtained, such 
as are used for the preservation of meats, fish, 
and other substances. 
To obtain the salt from the natural brine 
the process most commonly employed is what 
is known in the trade as the steam process, 
which consists in raising the brine to a high 
temperature by means of steam-heating pipes 
passing through the brine. This process is 
generally carried on in a long building with 
open sides to allow the escape of the steam 
arising from the brine and situated near the 
well or spring from which the brine is sup 
plied. Within this building are arranged 
long narrow tanks side by side, extending the 
length of the building, said tanks being usu 
ally constructed of heavy timbers securely 
fastened together, so as to prevent as much 
as possible the escape of the brine and with 
stand the pressure due to the weight of the 
brine and the salt deposited in them. There 
are two classes of these tanks, one class be-, 
ing called the purifying-tanks and the 
other the evaporating-tanks' or grainers, 
the former being made deeper than the others 
and often wider but fewer in number than 
the evaporating tanks or grainers. The brine 
coming from the well or spring is first carried 
into the purifying-tank, and is heated by 
means of steam passing through copper pipes 
extending the entire length of the tank, said 
pipes being arranged parallel to each other, 
and usually three in number, although the 
number depends on the width of the tank. 
In this tank any of the impurities in the brine 
are collected and deposited on the bottom of 
said tank, when the brine, thus purified and 
concentrated, is then carried by suitable pipes 
to the evaporating or graining tanks, Which 
are arranged close to the purifying-tanks and 
supplied with copper steam-heating pipes in 
the same manner. The brine is allowed to re 
main in said evaporating-tanks or grainers 
for about twelve hours, subject to the heat of 
the steam passing through the copper pipes, 
and the salt is crystallized and deposited On 
the bottom or floors of said tanks, whence it 
is removed by shovels, the tanks being made 
about two feet in depth to allow the Workmen 
from platforms along the side of the tanks to 
conveniently remove the salt and pile it upon 
the draining-platforms above the tanks, 
whence any brine may drip into the tanks. 
As above stated, these evaporating-tanks or 
grainers are constructed of wood, and to these 
tanks as so constructed there are several Seri 
ous objections. One of these objections is 
due to the action of the heat upon the bottom 
and sides of the tank, for, as the brine is 
raised to a high temperature, the steam-pipes 
are very hot, and this has the effect of burn 
ing and charring the wood, so that when the 
salt is removed by means of shovels and 
scrapers particles of charred Wood Will neces 
sarily be removed, together with the salt, and 
be intermingled therewith. Again, the sharp 
edge of the shovels coming into contact with 
the bottom extracts slivers and splinters from 
the wood, so that it is impossible to procure the 
salt free from these particles of charred wood 
and splinters, while to expend time and labor 
in removing them would greatly add to the 
cost of the salt. The chemical action, too, of 
the brine during the evaporating process has 
an injurious effect on the wood, while the salt 
becomes hardened and adheres to the wood, 
so that with the above objections the life of 
an ordinary Wooden tank or grainer is gen 
erally not more than three years, 
The object of my invention, therefore, is to 
provide a lining for these evaporating-tanks 
or grainers which will not have the objection 
able features of the wooden tanks and which 
will furnish the salt pure and clean. 
To these ends my invention consists, gen 
erally stated, in combining with the grainer 
having wooden outer sides and bottom, con 
stituting a trough, vertical tiles or slabs 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
2 
439,945 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
formed of clay, glass, or stone, held at the top 
against the wooden side walls by screws pass 
ing through grooves in the slabs, and like 
tiles or slabs resting on the bottom of the 
grainer and bearing against the lower edges 
of the side slabs. 
It also consists in combining with the 
Wooden tank or grainer side tiles having rab 
bets along their upper edges, a securing-strip 
fitting into said rabbets, and bolts securing 
the strip to the tank-body, all as hereinafter 
more specifically set forth and claimed. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe the same 
more fully, referring to the accompanying 
drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section 
of a tank with my invention applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a cross-section. Fig. 3 is a perspec 
tive of one of the bottom tiles. Fig. 4 is a 
view of side tiles. Fig. 5 shows means of join 
ing side tiles to the side of the tank. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in each of the figures of the drawings. 
The evaporating-tank or grainer a is con 
structed of heavy timbers, forming the bot 
toma', the sides a, and the ends a thereof. 
These timbers may be joined together in any 
Suitable manner, so as to allow as little as 
possible of the brine to leak from the tank. 
The manner of joining these timbers shown 
in the drawings is well suited to the purpose, 
in which the bottom pieces a? are supported 
by and rest on cross-beams b of suitable size, 
arranged at regular intervals and at such a 
distance from each other as to insure a strong 
support. The end pieces a rest upon the 
faces of the bottom pieces a?, and the sides a 
against the ends of the end pieces a and 
against the side edges of the bottom piece, 
and in order to hold these pieces in position 
beams c are placed across the tank, resting 
on the side pieces a, said beams c being ar 
ranged directly above the beams b and cor 
responding in size thereto. These beams b 
and c extend beyond the body of the tank a 
and have in their ends the slots d, into which 
the uprights e enter, while wedges f are also 
driven into the slots d to hold the uprights e 
in position and to force the side pieces a 
closer together, and, as said side pieces rest 
against the end pieces a, as the Wedges fare 
driven into the slots d the tendency will be 
to hold the timbers close together. 
Copper pipesg, supported by suitable hang 
ers g', are arranged within the tanka, at regu 
lar intervals apart and extending the entire 
length of the tank. 
On the bottoma', within the tank a, I place 
the square tilesh, which may be made of clay, 
glass, or may be cut from stone to the desired 
shape and size, said tiles being usually about 
twelve inches square and thick enough to : 
withstand the wear to which they are sub 
jected, two inches being about the proper 
thickness. The sides a and ends a are also 
lined with tiles i of the same material, but 
somewhat larger than the bottom tiles, so that 
one tile will extend from the bottom to the 
top of the tank, and only one row of tiles is 
necessary. These tilesi are rabbeted at their 
upper edges, as at , and recesses 
are 
formed at the upper corners, so that by means 
of bolts i, passing through said recesses 2 
and through corresponding bolt-holes in the 
sides a and ends a, together with the nuts 
j', the tiles i are securely held in 
place and 
prevented from falling or being displaced. 
A strip k, of wood, copper, or other suitable 
material, is placed along the rabbet edge to 
hold these tiles in place and prevent the head 
of the bolt i from being directly in contact 
with the tile and wearing away the same and 
to give a bearing-face for the head of said 
bolt when the nuti' is screwed up tight 
By this construction I obtain a tank lined 
on all sides with a smooth even material to 
which the salt will not adhere, as in the case 
of wooden tanks, and from which the salt can 
be readily removed, and one on which the heat 
will have no effect, as such tiles are non-Con 
ductors of heat and therefore protect the Wood 
of the tank from injury thereby, and conse 
quently the salt will be free from the parti 
cles of charred wood and splinters, which is 
the most objectionable feature in the use of 
the wooden tank. Nor will the chemical ac 
tion of the brine have any effect on the tiles, 
as in the case of wood, so that a tank Con 
structed in this manner will long outlast the 
wooden tank, and as the lining is composed 
of separate tiles, if one of said tiles either on 
the bottom or side becomes worn or defective 
for any reason, it may be readily removed and 
another inserted in its place with little trouble 
and delay. 
As great quantities of the salt obtained by 
this process are used for the preservation of 
meats and fish and as food for animals, it is 
a matter of importance that it be pure and 
clean, and this was practically impossible 
where the wooden tank was employed. The 
advantages of a tanklined with tiles are read 
ily apparent. 
I am aware that fire-tiles have been used 
as linings for sulphuric-acid concentrators, in 
which two or more strata of tile were Sup 
ported by backings or strata of sand, and 
therefore do not claim the use of tiles broadly. 
Such concentrator differs, however, from my 
invention, in which the tiles are supported by 
the wooden body of the tank resting directly 
against the same, so that a firm support for 
the tiles is provided, which will permit of the 
shoveling and other like work on the tiles 
and the side tiles and secured to the side walls 
of the tank. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the wooden outer 
sides and bottom of a salt-grainer, constitut 
ing a trough, of vertical tiles or slabs formed 
of clay or its described equivalent held at the 
top against the Wooden side walls by screws 
- 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
439,945 
5 
passing through grooves in the slabs, and like 
tiles resting on the bottom of the grainer and 
bearing against the lower edges of the side 
tiles, substantially as and for the purposes 
Set forth. 
2. In combination with a salt-evaporating 
tank, side tiles having rabbets along their 
upper edges, a securing-strip fitting into said 
rabbets, and bolts securing the strip to the 
Io tank-body, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
3. In combination with a salt-evaporating 
tank, side tiles having rabbets along their 
upper edges and having recesses at the upper 
corners thereof, a securing-strip fitting within I5 
said rabbets, and bolts fitting within said re 
cesses and securing the tiles to the tank-body, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
Intestimony whereof I, the said AUGUSTINE 
HALLER, have hereunto set my hand. 
AUGUSTINE HAILLER. 
Witnesses: 
J. N. COOKE, 
F. G. KAY, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440045.txt	(No Model.) 
J. S. LEWIS 
FIRE ESCAPE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 440,045. 
Patented Nov. 4, 1890, 
rives S. 
(22% 
472-e1(6-4%21 
IWVEWTOR 
44 o?-4-2 
4. Attorney 
 
(No Model.) 
J. S. LEWIS. 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 440,045, 
Patented Now, 4 l890, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITWESSES 
IWWEWTOR 
A1 2/4-w 
76 & 62-4- 
4- Attorney 
The Norris peters co, PHoro-tTHo., was inco, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. S. LEWIS. 
FIRE ESCAPE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 440,045. 
Patented Nov. 4, 1890, 
-22, 6. 
 
  
O 
stees 
yO N y 
 
7 
z 27, 
WITWESSES 
2n 
62-5-12, 
u?z-66%-- 
IWWEWTOR 
Az/a/4-cy 
47 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 440,045. 
 
J. S. LEWIS. 
FIRE ESCAPE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Nov. 4, 1890. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES S. LEWIS, OF KIMBALL, VIRGINIA. 
FIRE - ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,045, dated November 4, 1890. 
Application filed July 1, 1890, Serial No. 357,365, (No model.) 
- 
d 
25 
35 
a joint d. The lower end of this pole is pivot 
To all, whom it invay concern: 
ally secured to the turn-table by means of the 
Be it known that I, JAMES S. LEWIS, a citi 
bolt or casting b, hereinbefore referred to, the 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
upper end of the said bolt or casting being 
Kimball, in the county of Page and State of 
provided with a slot b', which is adapted to 
Virginia, have invented certain new and use 
receive the lower end of the pole D, which is 
ful Improvements in Fire-Escapes; and I do 
pivotally secured therein by means of the 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
pin b. The lower end of said bolt or cast 
exact description of the invention, such as 
ing is firmly keyed or secured beneath the 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
platform B. 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
D' represents a frame, which is secured at 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
at its lower end to the turn-table C, and 
and to letters of reference marked thereon, 
adapted to move therewith, and is supported 
- which form a part of this specification. 
by the braces d. This frame D' consists of 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
the two uprights D', which are secured to op 
of my device in side elevation. Fig. 2 is a 
posite sides of the turn-table, and connected 
plan view. - Fig. 3 is detail view; Figs. 4, 5, 
at their upper ends by cross-piece D. Near 
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11, detail views. 
the upper end of this frame, on a shaft C, is 
My invention relates to improvements in 
mounted a sprocket-wheel E, provided with 
fire-escapes; and it consists in the provision 
a sprocket-chain E", extending to and passing 
of a Suitable carriage or truck provided with 
over a smaller sprocket-wheel E, which is 
a turn-table on which is mounted a sectional 
mounted on a shaft e' near the lower end of 
shooting-pole; further, in the provision of a 
said frame, said shaft being provided with 
set of guide and brace ropes, a carrier adapted 
the cranks e. A rod or cable F is connected 
to move theron, and an operating-rope; further, 
at one end to the windlass-wheel E and at its 
in the provision of means for operating the 
opposite end to the intermediate portion of 
Said parts, and, finally, in the general con 
pole D, as shown. It will be seen that by 
struction and combination of features, all of 
this means the operation of the crankse will 
which will be fully described, specifically 
raise or lower the pole D. 
claimed, and clearly illustrated in the accom 
In the drawings, Fig. 2, the pole is shown 
panying drawings. 
as being swung around to one side of the 
In the drawings, A represents the truck 
truck; but when in normal position it is 
frame mounted on suitable wheels, and con 
adapted to project rearwardly therefrom. 
sisting of the side pieces a, axletrees a, cir 
G represents a frame through which the 
cular platform B, and fifth-wheel B. 
pole D passes, said frame being secured to 
C represents a circular turn-table, which is : 
The pole is held or braced by 
the pole. 
mounted upon the circular platform of the 
means of the rope H, one end of which is se 
truck and pivotally secured thereto by the 
cured to the frame G., passing down around a 
bolt or casting b. The said platform is pro 
groove in the lower end of the pole, thence up 
vided near its outer circumference with an 
along the under side of the pole to its up 
annular groove B, which is adapted to receive 
per end, passing over a pulley attached to 
friction balls or rollers for facilitating the 
said end, thence back along the upper side 
movement of the turn-table. This turn-table 
of the pole to frame G, where it passes around 
is provided on its periphery with sprocket 
and is connected to a small crank-wheel G', 
teeth, which are adapted to engage a sprocket 
mounted on Said frame, and by means of 
chain c, which passes around the said table, 
which the brace-rope is operated. 
and to and around a small sprocket-wheel C, 
I represents the sprocket-carrier rope or 
mounted upon the truck-frame, and provided 
chain, one end of which is attached to the 
with an operating-crank c', by the movement 
carrier J, passing down and over a sprocket 
of which the table may be turned to the de 
wheel J, mounted on the upper end of frame 
sired point. 
G, thence up along the upper side of the pole 
Drepresents the pole, which may be formed 
in sections, said sections being connected by above rope or brace H, where it passes around 
45 
 
55 
7 to 
75 
CO 
440,045 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
a small sprocket-wheelh, mounted on a cross 
piece secured to the pole, and thence back to 
and attached to the carrier. This rope and the 
carrier attached thereto, as will be hereinaf 
ter described, are operated by a sprocket 
chain, which passes from the wheel J to and 
around a sprocket crank-wheel K, which is 
mounted at the opposite end of the frame G. 
within reach of the ground or from the plat 
form and turn-table. 
The carrier J consists of the carriage or 
body portion k, to which are pivotally se 
cured the four uprights k', on the upper ends 
of which are mounted grooved friction-rollers 
l, which engage the upper part of the brace 
rope H and ride thereon, the body portion of 
the carrier being suspended beneath the pole. 
This body portion preferably consists of a 
cage or basket of wire-netting or other suit 
able non-combustible material. The top por 
tions of the uprights c' are connected by the 
hood L, to which they are pivotally secured, 
and to the opposite ends of this hood are con 
nected the ends of the rope I, as hereinbefore 
described. The pivotal connection of the up 
rights k' to the body portion of the carriage 
and to the hood will allow the carrier to keep 
a horizontal position at any and all degrees of 
elevation of the pole. 
Between the two rear uprights k', near their 
central portions, and having bearings in the 
Same, is a grooved friction-roller m, which is 
adapted to engage and ride on the under side 
of the lower brace-rope H, thus forming a 
brace or support for keeping the carrier 
steady. It will be seen that the rope or cable 
H acts both as a brace for the pole and as a 
guide or track for the carrier. The friction 
wheels l are grooved, in order that they may 
run on the upper side of the pole, thus taking 
the strain partially from the guide-rope. 
In Fig. 4 the pole D is shown as being dis 
jointed, the lower end of the upper section 
resting upon the turn-table and supported by 
passing through a slot in the frame G, as 
show in the said figure. 
The truck is provided at each corner with 
the anchors M, which are adapted to be se 
cured in the ground when the device is in use 
and serve to hold the truck firmly in position. 
'These anchors are connected to the truck by 
means of ropes or chains N, and a small wind 
lass is provided at each corner for taking up 
the slack after the anchors are driven into or 
Secured to the ground. 
The operation is as follows: The truck is 
driven to the desired position, the anchors 
made fast, the sections of the pole jointed to 
gether, and the ropes and carrier adjusted in 
position. The turn-table is then operated to 
swing the pole to the desired position upon 
the building, and is elevated to the desired 
height by the operation of crank e. The 
carrier J is then pulled up to the window, 
where it may be entered by the person or per 
sons escaping, and the carriage. lowered. 
 
75 
When the truck is in motion, the pole may be 
swung around corners and clear of obstacles 
by operating the crank c'. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and that for which I de 
sire to secure Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the truck, the 
turn-table mounted thereon, and the sprocket 
gear for operating said turn-table, of the Sec 
tional pole pivotally secured to said turn 
table, and the upright frame also carried on 
the turn-table and having mounted there.On 
the sprocket-gear mechanism for operating 
the pole and having a connection with the in 
termediate portion of said pole, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the sectional pole 
pivotally mounted on the turn-table of the 
truck, of the brace-rope secured to a frame 
mounted on said pole, said rope extending 
around the ends of said pole and serving also 
as a guide for a carrier or carriage suspended 
from and adapted to move thereon, Substan 
tially as described, 
3. In a fire-escape, the combination, with 
the truck and its platform having the circular 
groove or channel, of the turn-table mounted 
thereon and having a corresponding groove, 
said table having the peripheral sprocket 
teeth and carrying the sectional pole and the 
upright frame having the pole - operating 
sprocket-gear mechanism thereon, and the 
friction balls or rollers adapted to work in 
the said grooves or channels, substantially as 
set forth, 
4. The combination, with a truck having a 
turn-table mounted thereon, a sectional pole 
pivotally secured to said turn-table, sprocket 
wheels and gear for operating said table and 
pole, and a frame mounted on the said pole, 
of a rope or cable acting as a brace for the 
pole and as a guide for a carrier suspended 
from and adapted to move thereon, a carrier 
provided with friction rollers or wheels for 
engaging said guides, an operating-rope con 
nected to said carrier, and crank-wheel and 
gear for operating said carrier mounted on 
the frame on the said pole, substantially as 
described. 
5. The fire-escape comprising the truck 
and the anchors therefor, the turn - table 
mounted on the truck, and the sprocket-gear 
for operating the same, the sectional pole 
pivotally secured to the turn-table, the cross 
frame mounted on the pole, the rope serving 
as a brace for said pole and as a guide for a 
carrier, the carrier and its operating-rope, 
and the sprocketgear mechanism mounted 
on the turn-table for operating the pole, Sub 
stantially as described. 
Intestimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES S. LEWIS. 
9o 
ECO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
Witnesses: 
A. J. MASON, 
C. T. HOELZMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440145.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 440,145. 
J. M. FARMER. 
ROTARY ENGINE 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 11, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GSIESS 
SIS 
S 
N 
S 
S 
S. 
S 
S 
S 
S 
S 
S. 
S 
N 
S. 
S 
- - - - - 
i O 
AeSE 
ES 
 
a 
  
 
 
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
. 
. 
. 
J. M., FARMER. 
ROTARY ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 440,145. 
Patented Nov. 11, 1890. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. M. FARMER. 
ROTARY ENGINE 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 3, 
No. 440,145. 
Patented NOW... l. l890. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
C) 
27 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS M. FARMER, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS 
TO COLWERT K. PIER AND ISADORE IEISER, OF SAME PLACE. 
ROTARY ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,145, dated November 11, 1890. 
Application filed December 26, 1889, Serial No. 334,955, (No model.) 
15 on December 18, 1888. 
To all whon, it may concein, 
Beit known that I, JULIUS M. FARMER, of 
Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented new and 
5 useful Improvements in Rotary Engines; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of said invention, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters of reference 
Io marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the rotary engine for which Letters Patent 
No 394,684 were issued to myself and others 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of an engine 
embodying my improvements, parts being 
broken away to show interior and rear parts. 
Fig. 2 is a central vertical section of the en 
2O gine at right angles to Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is the 
face of a block containing the Steam-ducts 
and showing the ports thereof. Fig. 4 is a 
part of the disk, showing the face or end 
of the hub of the disk, which hub contains 
25 steam-ducts and receives the bearing of the 
face of the block shown in Fig. 3 against it, 
forming a steam-tight joint therewith. Fig. 
5 is a central longitudinal section of a device 
for guiding the cross-heads and taking up 
3o wear therein. Fig. 6 is a central longitudi 
nal section of a part of the same device shown 
in Fig. 5, taken at right angles thereto. Fig. 
7 is a view of the same block shown in Fig. 
3, with the steam-pipes leading thereto and 
5 a four-way cock in the pipes for controlling 
the direction or passage of steam to the cyl 
inders. Fig. S is a transverse section of the 
four-way cock on line 88 of Fig. 7. 
The base A supports the standards A", A', 
4o and A' rigidly thereon. A horizontal shaft 
B has its bearings in the standard A', and is 
provided with a band-wheel B' for transmit 
ting power therefrom. The shaft B also car 
ries rigid thereon a disk C, to the face of 
45 which are secured four steam-cylinders pref 
erably integral therewith, arranged in sets or 
pairs D D and D'D' opposite each other, the 
pistons in each set of cylinders being con 
nected rigidly together by a single piston-rod 
each provided with a central slotted cross 
head F and F, respectively. 
The standard A' terminates at its upper 
end in a short horizontal cylindrical head G, 
the center line of which is in the line of the 55 
axis of the shaft B. A hub H, bearing and 
rotatable on the head G, is provided with ra 
dial arms HH, which at their outer ends are 
secured rigidly to the cylinders DD and D'D', 
whereby the cylinders are braced and held 6o 
firmly in position on the disk. A cross-head 
guide I, supported in the head Gat one side of 
the line of the axis of shaft B, is constructed 
of an interior bolt I' and a sleeve I'', which 
sleeve I' turns by a screw-thread through 65 
the head G, and has a rigid collar K, which 
bears against a block L, beveled on two op 
posite sides, which beveled sides bear against 
and move on correspondingly-beveled walls 
of the slot in the cross-head F., by the turn- 7o 
ing inwardly of which sleeve the block L is 
forced into the slot in the cross-head F, being 
thus adapted to adjust the block, taking up 
any wear in the cross-head, and to guide the 
cross-head exactly in its reciprocation. A 75 
jam-nut M turns on the sleeve I'' against the 
head G and is adapted to lock the sleeve in 
position. The bolt I' passes movably through 
the sleeve I'', and is provided with a nut N, 
turning on it against the outer end of the 8o 
sleeve I'', and with a nut N' turning on the 
other end of the bolt against a block L', hav 
ing two opposite beveled sides which bear 
against horizontally-beveled walls of the slot 
in the cross-head F, whereby the block L' 85 
may be adjusted to the cross-head, taking up 
any wear therein, being thus adapted to guide 
the cross-head in its movements. The bolt I' 
is provided with a head N'. 
steam-ducts, one set of which O and O' lead, re 
spectively, from the outer surface of the hub 
to the inner end of one cylinder D and to the 
Outer end of the opposite cylinder D, as shown 
in dottedlines in Fig.1. Corresponding ducts 95 
O' and O' lead in the same manner to the 
inner and outer ends, respectively, of the two 
other steam-cylinders. A movable block P, 
which for convenience is in the form of a 
The disk C is provided with two sets of 9o 
5o E and E', respectively, which piston-rods are sleeve on the shaftB, is provided with a steam- Ioo 
 
 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
induction duct R, which at its outer end re 
ceives the live-steam-Supply pipe S, and which 
at its inner end terminates in a segmental 
port R' in the inner surface of the block P. 
This block is also provided with an eduction 
steam-duct T, provided at its inner end with 
a segmental port T in the face of the block 
P, which duct at its other end is open to the 
air, preferably through the four-way cock W. 
The ports R' and T' are each so located as to 
be intermittingly in front of the ducts O, O, 
O', and O' as the disk Crevolves. A steam 
tight joint is formed between the block Pand 
the hub of the disk C, the block being held 
up to the hubby the spring U, around the shaft 
B, bearing against a collar V, fixed thereon, 
and the outer end of the block P, but prefer 
ably with the interposed washer V. Only 
such slight movement in the block P is re 
quired as is necessary to permit its constant 
adjustment to the surface of the hub of the 
disk C, so as to make a steam-tight though 
movable joint between them, and this move 
ment is permitted by the slight flexibility of 
the steam-pipes S and T. To protect the block 
against any considerable rotatable move 
ment, a standard W is provided, fixed on the 
base A and terminating in a flat top near to 
the bottom of the block P, against the top of 
which standard the block would impinge and 
be held against rotation if such rotation be 
yond a slight movement were otherwise per 
mitted. 
The steam-ducts S and T preferably lead 
by pipes into the same four-way cock. W', 
which is provided with the live-steam pipe S' 
and exhaust-pipe T'. By means of this four 
way cock. W' the steam may be controlled as 
desired, either admitting it or shutting it off 
from the cylinders, or transmitting the live 
steam through either port R' or T, the other 
port being thereby made the exhaust-port, 
thus being able to run the engine in either 
direction, or to reverse it at pleasure. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a rotary engine with 
a rotating disk provided with steam-ducts 
leading to cylinders thereon, of a movable 
block provided with steam-ducts registering 
with the ducts in the disk, and a spring bear 
ing against the movable block, whereby it is 
held closely but yieldingly to the hub of the 
disk, substantially as described. 
2. In a rotary engine, the combination, with 
a disk provided with steam-ducts leading 
from the outer surface of its hub to steam 
cylinders thereon and a shaft fixed in the disk, 
of a block about the shaft, which block is 
provided with induction and eduction ducts 
registering with the ducts in the disk and is 
connected with the live-steam supply, and a 
spring about the shaft bearing against a col 
lar thereon and holding the block up to its 
work, substantially as described. 
3. In a rotary engine, the combination, with 
a rotating disk provided With steam-ducts 
leading from the outer surface of its hub, of 
a slightly-movable block provided with steam 
ducts and segmental ports registering with 
the ducts in the hub of the disk, with which 
hub the block forms a movable steam-tight 
connection, substantially as described. 
4. In a rotary engine, the combination, with 
a rotating disk having steam-cylinders there 
on arranged in pairs opposite each other, the 
cylinders being provided with pistons con 
nected together in pairs by rods crossing each 
other medially, and with steam-ducts in the 
disk leading thereto in sets from the hub of the 
disk, of a movable block provided with steam 
ducts registering with the ducts in the disk, 
and means, substantially as described, where 
by the movable block is held yieldingly 
against the hub of the disk. 
5. In a rotary engine having cylinders ar 
ranged in pairs opposite to each other on a 
rotating disk, the combination, with rods con 
necting the pistons in pairs, which rods cross 
each other medially and are provided with 
transverse slots having a varying but con 
stantly existing crossing-point, of beveled 
sliding blocks fitted in the slots in the piston 
rods, and a block adjuster and guide fixed ec 
centrically to the axis of the disk in a part of 
the frame, consisting of a sleeve turning by 
screw-thread in the frame and a bolt turning 
by screw-thread in the sleeve, the sleeve and 
bolt being secured movably, respectively, to 
the blocks, Substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with the slotted cross 
heads F and F, having a common point of 
cross movement opposite each other, of bev 
eled blocks L and L', fitted to corresponding 
beveled walls of the slots in the cross-heads, 
a bolt I', and a sleeve I'', carrying thereon 
the blocks L and L, respectively, and ad 
justable in a fixed support G, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JULIUS M. FARMER. 
Witnesses: 
C. T. BENEDICT, 
I, LEISER. 
75 
95 
OC 
O 
g 
440,145 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440245.txt	(No Model.) 
H. A. BENEDICT. 
DOOR, 
No. 440,245. 
Patented Nov. 11, 1890. 
O2- -3SSS3S2S22 
928)ifiasco 
s 
3-1 vo.11 to 
Zezzavaz7. Zie/Zeazca, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEMAN A. BENEDICT, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO CLARENCE 
V. KELLOGG, OF SAME PLACE. 
DOOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,245, dated November 11, 1890. 
Application filed January 21, 1890, Serial No. 337,612, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, HEMAN A. BENEDICT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Syra 
cuse, in the county of Onondaga, State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Doors, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings, 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in doors; and it has 
for its object, primarily, the saving of mate 
rial, forming a door of what would otherwise 
be waste pieces and furnishing to the trade 
what to all outward appearances is a thick 
door, but in reality composed of thin pieces 
of lumber. A door thus constructed also 
forms to a certain extent a barrier against 
fire as Well as heat and cold, being formed 
with air-chambers, as will be hereinafter men 
tioned. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will appear in the following description, 
and the novel features thereof will be par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a side and edge elevation of a 
door embodying my improvements, portions 
of the door in the side view being broken 
away. Fig. 2 is a cross-section on the line ac 
ac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail in perspective 
showing a portion of one of the side stiles. 
Fig. 4 is a like view of a central stile, and 
Fig. 5 is a sectional perspective view of a 
modification. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in all the figures of the drawings. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates one of the side 
stiles, which is constructed as shown best in 
Fig. 3, and is composed of the two pieces A' 
A, separated by and held at the proper dis 
tance apart to form a door of the desired 
thickness by means of the strips a, one of 
which is flush with the outer edge of the two 
pieces A' A', as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, and 
the other arranged so as to form a mortise 
or groove upon the inner edge, as shown at 
a' in Fig. 3. 
The center stile B is formed substantially 
O 
35 
45 
the same as the side stile A, being composed 
of the two strips Band B, held together the 
desired distance apart by means of the nar 
row strips b, arranged between them, as shown 
best in Fig. 4, leaving a mortise or recess or 
groove b' upon each side of the stile, as seen 
best in said Fig. 4. 
The panels are of the ordinary construc 
tion, and are adapted to be fitted within the 
mortises or grooves above mentioned in the 
stiles, 
The parts are assembled to constitute a 
door in the following manner: Mortise-blocks 
C are arranged, as shown best in Fig. 1, to 
connect the longitudinal and the cross pieces 
and by re-enforcing blocks C, said blocks 
being secured to one part and glued as the 
parts are put together, the parts then being 
clamped or otherwise held together until the 
glue has set, Nails or other securing means 
other than glue may be employed, if desired; 
but the glue is preferred, as it provides per 
fect outside finish, avoiding nail holes and 
heads to be puttied and otherwise cow 
ered up, 
It will of course be understood that the end 
stiles or cross-pieces D of the door are con 
structed in the same manner as theside stiles, 
having one strip a flush with the outer edges 
of the two pieces A and A. 
It will be observed that a door constructed 
as above described may be made at a mini 
mum cost, utilizing narrow and short waste 
pieces, and permitting me to construct a 
door, say, two inches in thickness, which to 
all intenUS and purposes Will be as strong and 
durable as a solid door, being less liable to 
warp, and being formed with air chambers or 
passages which serve to resist the heat or 
cold and fire. 
In Fig. 5 I have shown a construction 
wherein I employ double panels, forming the 
stiles as above described, but separating 
them by means of a spacing-block E. This 
provides a large air-chamber E between the 
panels. 
What I claim as new is 
1. In a door, a stile formed of a plurality of 
pieces, with an air-space between them and a 
Actise upon one edge, substantially as speci 
EC 
2. In a door, a stile formed of a plurality of 
55 
75 
IO) 
 
m 
2 
440,245 
edges, a composite rail having mortises upon 
its opposite edges, panels held in said mor 
tises, and interior mortise-blocks for holding 
the parts together, substantially as specified. 
6. A door formed of composite stiles and 
end pieces having mortises upon their inner 
edges, a composite rail having mortises upon 
its opposite edges, panels held in said mor 
tises, and interior mortise-blocks, and inte 
rior re-enforcing blocks holding the parts to 
gether, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HEMAN A, BENEDICT, 
25 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN M. WELLs, 
CLARENCE W. KELLOGG, 
pieces forming a mortise upon one edge and 
one of the intermediate strips having its outer 
edge flush with the outer edge of the inner 
and outer pieces of the stile, substantially as 
specified. 
3. In a door, composite stiles and rails and 
mortise-blocks arranged within the same for 
connecting them together, substantially as 
specified. 
4. In a door, composite stiles and rails, mor 
tise-blocks arranged within the same and 
connecting them together, and re-enforcing 
blocks connecting the center stiles, center 
rails, and cross-pieces, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. A door formed of composite stiles and 
end pieces having mortises upon their inner 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440345.txt	(No Model.) 
J. CLEAR. 
CHURN, 
No. 440,345, 
Patented Nov. 11, 1890. 
  
 
 
 
 
2 2 
 
 
 
 
 
perfor 
John Clear: 
272, y &zy Atlrpys, 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIN CLEAR, OF ANDERSON VILLE, TENNESSEE. 
CHURN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,345, dated November 11, 1890. 
Application filed May 19, 1890. Serial No. 352,353, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN CLEAR, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Anderson 
ville, in the county of Anderson and State of 
Tennessee, have invented a new and useful 
Churn, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
churns. 
The object of the present invention is to 
simplify and improve the construction of ver 
tical double-dasher churns having parallel 
shafts and to enable the dashers and operat 
ing mechanism to be readily removed from 
and replaced in the churn-body. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and particul 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of a churn constructed in accordance 
with this invention. Fig. 2 is a centrally ver 
tical sectional view. Fig. 3 is a horizontal 
sectional view. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
1 designates a churn-body preferably approxi 
mately cylindrical and provided on the upper 
face of its bottom with a block 2, having a 
rectangular recess 3, in which is stepped a post 
4, that is adapted to be readily inserted in and 
removed from the recess of the block. The 
upper end 5 of the post is oppositely beveled 
and pointed and supports a vertical frame 6, 
that carries the operative parts of the churn, 
and comprises two sections 7 and 8, forming 
a longitudinal opening between them, the 
former of which is provided at its lower end 
with forked arms 9, which receive between 
them the beveled end 5 of the post 4, and is 
Secured thereto by bolts or the like, and the 
upper end of the section terminates in a han 
dle 10, which is slanting and is adapted to be 
grasped to hold the post in the step during the 
operation of the churn and to remove the same 
from the body after the operation of churn 
ing has been completed. The section 7 is pro 
vided near its upper and lower ends with the 
flanges 11 and 12, which form shoulders, 
against which the other section 8 abuts, and 
the said sections are bolted together and have 
between them a space 13, in the upper portion 
of which is journaled a main shaft 14. The 
main shaft 14 is provided with a crank-han 
dle 15, and has rigidly mounted upon it a cog 55 
wheel16, that meshes with a pinion 17, mounted 
upon a shaft 18 and provided at its ends with 
wheels 19. The wheels 19 have connected to 
their wrist-pins 19 the upper ends of con 
necting - rods 20, and the lower ends of the 
connecting-rods are bifurcated and have piv 
oted in their bifurcations the upper ends of 
dasher-rods 21. The dasher-rods are arranged 
upon opposite sides of the vertical post 4 and 
are provided with a pair of dashers 22 and 23, 
that have central openings to receive the post. 
The churn-body is provided with a cover 24, 
having a central opening 25 and side openings 
26 to receive the dasher-rod. 
From the foregoing description and the ac 
companying drawings the construction, opera 
tion, and advantages of the invention will be 
readily understood. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a churn, the combination of the body 
provided with the block 2, secured to the bot 
tom and having a rectangular recess, the post 
4, having its lower end stepped in the recess, 
the vertical frame 6, mounted upon the post 4 
and having a longitudinal opening, the main 
shaft journaled in the frame and carrying the 
cog-wheel arranged in the longitudinal open 
ings of the frame, the shaft 1S, provided with 
a pinion meshing with the cog-wheel, the 
wheels 19, arranged at the ends of the shaft 
18, the dasher-rods provided with dashers, and 
the pitmen connecting the dasher-rod and the 
wheels, Substantially as described. 
2. In a churn, the combination of the body, 
the vertical post removably stepped therein 
and having its upper end oppositely beveled, 
the frame comprising the section 7, provided 
with the forked arms at its lower end, having 
secured between them the upper end of the 
post, the upper end of Said section terminat 
ing in a handle, and the section 8, secured to 
the section 7, the main shaft mounted in the 
75 
9 O 
95 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
440,845 
E. 18, mounted in the lower portion of presence of two witnesses. 
upper portion of the frame and carrying the 
cog-wheel and provided with a crank-handle, my own I have hereto affixed my signature in Io 
: 
the frame and carrying a pinion meshing with 
5 the cog-wheel, the wheels E. at th ends 
of the shaft 18, the dasher-rods, and the pit- 
men connecting the dasher - rods and the 
wheels, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
JOHN CLEAR. 
Witnesses: 
J. C. SCRUGGs, 
A. B. CARNS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440445.txt	(No Model.) 
M. A. STEWAR.T. 
IEWELING INSTRUMENT, 
No. 440,445, 
Patented Now, ll l890. 
WITNESSES: 
(64.o. C/3 
6/6 a2N- 
= A 
 
44.7-2. 
vows 9 
JAWWENTOR; 
AT TORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARCELLUS A. STEWART, OF CRYSTAL SPRINGS, MISSISSIPPI, ASSIGNOR TO 
HIMSELF AND AUGUSTUS LOTTERHOS, OF SAME PLACE. 
LEVELING-INSTRUMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,445, dated November 11, 1890. 
Application filed June 2, 1890, Sorial No. 354,008, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARCELLUSA. STEW 
ART, of Crystal Springs, in the county of Co 
piah and State of Mississippi, have invented 
a new and Improved Leveling-Instrument, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
leveling-instruments; and the object of my 
invention is to produce an instrument that 
may be quickly leveled both laterally and 
longitudinally, that may be easily held in po 
sition, and that will be especially adapted to 
leveling, ditching, and grading land, and to 
other analogous work. 
To this end my invention consists in cer 
tain features of construction and combina 
tions of parts, which will be hereinafter fully 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the leveling-in 
strument embodying my invention with the 
stand removed. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of 
the same, partly in section, and showing the 
connection between the body of the instru 
ment and the stand, Fig. 3 is a transverse 
section on the line acac of Fig. 1, looking in 
the direction of the arrow; and Fig. 4 is a 
transverse section on the line by y of Fig. 1, 
looking in the direction of the arrow, 
The central body portion A is preferably 
circular in form, and is provided with two 
oppositely-extending horizontal arms A", one 
of said arms having a water or spirit level C. 
mounted transversely thereon, and the other 
of said arms having a similar level amounted 
longitudinally thereon, so that said levels will 
be at right angles to each other, 
Attached to the outer ends of the arms A 
are the vertical standards B and B, said 
standards being provided with horizonal 
flanges B", which afford an easy means of at 
tachment to the arms. The standard B is 
provided with a horizontal widened portion 
B, each end of said portion having a vertical 
arm B' formed thereon, and said arms are 
provided with suitable scales b, the scales be 
ing marked off into spaces preferably repre 
senting one-sixteenth of an inch each. The 
outer portions of the arms B are provided 
with vertical dovetailed tongues b', and 
mounted upon said tongues, so as to slide 
easily thereon, are the slidesc, having suitable 
set-screws c' therein, by means of which the 
position of the slides upon the tongues may 
be regulated. A sight-line d is fixed to the 
upper ends of the slides c, and extends above 
the portion B and parallel therewith from 
one slide c to the other. The standard B' is 
Widened at the top to form the transverse arm 
B, said arm having a longitudinal sight-slot 
btherein, as best shown in Fig. 3. 
Centrally fixed to the under side of the body 
A is a supporting-plate D, and extending ver 
tically through said plate and through the 
perforation a of the body A is the shaft E, 
which is screw-threaded at the top and pro 
vided with a suitable thumb-nute, and which 
has at its lower end a ball E", said ball being 
inclosed by the jaws G, which are mounted 
on a tripod in the usual manner, and which 
needs no detailed description. The shaft E 
is provided with a suitable collar F between 
the Support D and the jaws G. A bolt II ex 
tends through the jaws G and is provided 
with a suitable nut H', so that by tightening 
said nut the jaws may be forced upon the 
ball E', and the position of the level will be 
thereby fixed. It will thus be seen that the 
body A and arms A may be swung vertically 
and their position fixed by the bolt H and 
jaWS G, and that by loosening the thumb-nut 
e Said parts may be swung horizontally and 
their position fixed by tightening said nut. 
It will be seen that by having the levels a 
and a? arranged at right angles to each other 
the instrument may be quickly leveled in 
both directions-that is, longitudinally and 
laterally, 
The device is operated in much the same 
manner as the ordinary surveyor's level. The 
operator sights through the slot band over 
the sight-line d. A target is carried in front 
of the instrument, and when the target ap: 
pears either above or below the sight-line 
the carrier of the target is motioned up or 
down in the usual manner until the taget is 
in perfect alignment. The operation is then 
repeated until the whole line is run, 
95 
IOd 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
440,445 
The spaces on the scale b are preferably 
made one-sixteenth of an inch in width, and 
by moving the slides c so as to move the 
sight-lined the distance of one of said spaces 
a change will be made in the grade of three 
fourths of an inch to the rod. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The herein-described sight-bar, having 
vertical standards at its ends, one arm hav 
ing a transverse sight-slot and the other hav 
ing vertical parallel arms BB, provided with 
scales b, and vertically-movable slides C C on 
the said arms and connected by the sight 
lined, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a leveling-instrument, the combina 
IO 
 
J. W. W. NEWTON, 
W. D. RAY. 
tion, with the body A, having arms A and 
levels a, and at arranged at right angles to 
each other, said body being pivotally mounted 
upon a stand, and having means, as shown, for 
fixing its position thereon, of the standard B, 
having the horizontal portion Band the up 
wardly-extending arms B, said arms being 
provided with scales b and tongues b', thead 
justable slides c, mounted upon the tongues 
b' and connected by a sight-line d, and the 
standard B', mounted upon the opposite arm 
A' and provided with a horizontal slot b, 
substantially as described. 
MARCELLUS A. STEWART. 
Witnesses: 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440545.txt	(No Model.) 
K. DOUGAN. 
BALL.0T BOLDER. 
N 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 440,545. 
Patented Nov. 11, 1890. 
 
WJ--re 
J 
ress seek. 
2 22222212 
2. 22 
 
Wzz72 esses: 
(2C2 TC-2 
/3/3-2za 
7a, 2./ 
 
(No Model.) 
K. DOUGAN. 
BALLOT HOLDER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 440,545, 
Patented Nov. ll, 1890. 
N N 
2 2 
2 
AND BE 
2 Z. 
St. 
222 22 
22, 2 2 22 
LIII. I. 
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNY 
Wedza esses: 
( foea 
/3/34-zz, 
77a i e a for: 
sty (yer 
(7dal. 
TE Nohais PETERs co, photo-tro-washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
KENNEDY DOUGAN, OF MISSOULA, MONTANA. 
BAL LOT HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,545, dated November 11, 1890. 
Application filed January 9, 1890, Serial No. 336,370. (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it inctly concei'il. 
Be it known that I, KENNEDY DOUGAN, of 
Missoula, in the county of Missoula and State 
of Montana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Ballot-Holders; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use it, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form part of this specification. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
ballot-holders; and its objects are to provide 
a ballot-holder with a roll of paper of suit 
able width and of sufficient length to allow 
any desired number of ballots to be cut or 
torn from it, and which ballots are drawn from 
the roll as, rapidly as one is cut or torn off by 
the mechanism connected to the ballot-box 
for that purpose, and to provide a mechan 
ism which shall regulate the length of each 
ballot that is to be cut or torn from the roll. 
Figure l is a plan view, partly in section, 
showing a ballot-holder which embodiesmyin 
vention. Fig.2 is a side elevation of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a side elevation of a mechanism 
which is connected with the ballot-box for 
drawing the ballot out of the ballot-holders. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical cross-section. Fig. 5 is a 
view of a portion of a recording-machine in 
which the holder is placed, showing the holder 
placed therein and some of the rods passing 
through it for operating the recording mech 
anism. 
A represents the frame of the ballot-holder, 
which will be given any length, size, or shape 
that may be preferred, and which is provided 
with a handle B at one end. Upon the top 
of this ballot-holder will be printed, painted, 
written, or otherwise marked the names of 
all of the candidates of the different parties 
to be voted for, and opposite each name of 
each candidate is a perforation or opening C 
of any suitable shape, and these openings ex 
tend entirely through the frame. Secured to 
the under side of the inner end of the ballot 
holder A is a circular box D, in which is 
placed a roll of paper of any desired length 
and width, but which is intended to be suffi 
ciently long to supply all of the voters who 
may use the ballot-holder in a single day with 
ballots, and thus save the time and trouble of 
inserting a separate one each time a vote is 
to be recorded. This roll of paper will be 
blank, and thus save the necessity of having 
to print the separate ballots, as has heretofore 
been found necessary to do. The outer end 
of this roll of paper is always in the position 
shown in Fig. 2, and extends along under the 
two rows of holes C, ready to be perforated, 
as will be more fully described hereinafter. 
In order to prevent the judges orinspectors 
of election from seeing how each voter has 
voted, there will be placed in direct contact 
with both the top and bottom sides of the 
frame A the endwise-moving slides E, which 
consist of narrow pieces or strips of metal just 
wide enough to cover the perforations, and 
which are secured to the top of the frame by 
means of the links F. To the inner end of each 
of the slides E is connected a link G, which is 
connected at its outer end to the spring-actu 
ated thumb-piece H. When the thumb-piece 
is forced forward by the voter, these slides 
force the Slides E outward and backward so 
as to expose the openings C; but as soon as 
the thumb-piece is released the spring in 
stantly returns it to position and draws the 
slides E back over the perforations C. 
Placed under the top of the frame is an 
endwise-moving slide I for every perforation 
C, and these slides have only an endlwise 
movement, and that when direct force is ap 
plied to either their inner or outer ends for 
that purpose. The inner ends of these slides 
are notched or rounded out, so as to allow the 
perforating-needle to pass down through the 
perforations from either side of the ballot 
holder, and their outer ends are provided 
With a flange or projection which is made to 
engage with the grooved locking-plate J, 
which is used to lock the slides I positively 
in position. These grooved plates J are piv 
oted at opposite outer corners and have the 
Springs K applied to opposite ends for the 
purpose of holding the plates J pressed down 
Ward ready to engage with and lock the slides 
I in position. Each of the plates I, when in 
its normal position, is forced forward, so that 
its inner end will cover its corresponding per 
foration C. 
When a voter wishes to vote for any one 
candidate, he takes the perforating-needle 
and forces it down or up through the perfo 
95 
Ioo 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
 
440,545 
TC) 
3o 
35 
40 
55 
ration opposite the candidate's name after he 
has noved the thumb-piece H, and thereby 
moved the slides E, So as to leave all of the per 
forations exposed. As the tapering needle 
passes down or up through any one of the 
perforations C, it forces the corresponding 
plate I backward from over the hole C, and a 
corresponding perforation is made in the pa 
per ballot. As each slide I is forced back 
ward, its end, provided with a flange or catch, 
is forced under the grooved locking-plate J, 
and is thus held in position, so that the bal 
lot cannot be talmpered with even by the voter 
himself. After the slides have been forced 
forward so as to cover the perforations they 
remain in that position until positive force is 
applied to them to force them backward, when 
they are caught by the locking-plates J. 
Loosely connected to the ballot-holder un 
derneath its top by means of the link L are 
the endwise-moving rods M, which are also 
given a backward and forward movement by 
the links. These rods have their outer ends 
turned outward, as shown at N, SO as to en 
gage with the slide O, which is provided with 
a projection P', which extends through the 
top of the ballot-holder, and which slide is 
operated by suitable catches or other devices 
placed in the ballot-recording machine, and 
which moves the slide O outward toward the 
outer end of the ballot-holder as it is removed 
from the machine. When the slide O is 
moved outward, its bent or U-shaped ends en 
gage with the projections N on the outer ends 
of the rods M to cause the rods M to both 
move endwise and to move toward the outer 
ends of the slides I. As these rods M move 
both endwise and inwardly, they catch under 
the edges of the locking-piates J, SO as to 
raise them far enough to release the plates I, 
which have been forced backward by the 
needle, and then the rods M strike against 
their outer ends so as to force them back into 
position to cause their inner ends to again 
close the perforation. The links L are placed 
at such an angle to the rods M that the links 
can never get into a straight line with the 
slides I, and hence when the slides I are 
forced back by the needle the rods M are 
forced backward by the pressure of the outer 
ends of the slides I, and then the act of remov 
ing the ballot-holder from the vote-recording 
machine into which it is to be inserted causes 
the rods M through the slide O to be moved 
back into position again, and at the same 
time return the slides I to position. So as to de 
stroy all evidence as to how the voter voted. 
This ballot-holder containing the perfo 
rated ballot is placed in a vote-recording ma 
chine, which is provided with a number of 
endwise-moving rods O', which pass through 
all of the perforations which have been made 
through the ballot for the purpose of operat 
ing corresponding registering mechanisms in 
the machine. Where no perforations have 
been made through the ballot opposite the 
names of the candidates, the slides I cover the 
perforations C, so that the endwise-moving 
rods O' in the recording-machine cannot pass 
through the ballot-holder for the purpose of 
operating the corresponding registering mech 
anisms. The slides I serve to protect the pa 
per from being perforated by the endwise 
moving rods in the vote-recording machine, 
and hence when the slides have not been 
forced back by the needle the rods descend 
and rest upon the tops of the inner ends of 
the slides, but do nothing more. 
In order to withdraw the blank perforated 
ballot from the holder after the vote has been 
recorded in the vote-recording machine, there 
are two rollers P, journaled in suitable bear 
ings Q upon the outer end of the ballot-holder, 
and these rollers are slightly enlarged at their 
centers, so as to exert sufficient frictional con 
tact against opposite sides of the ballot to be 
caused to revolve as the ballot is withdrawn 
from the holder. These rollers P are oper 
ated entirely by the movement of the roller 
in the ballot-box. In order to regulate the 
length of each ballot, a screw-thread R is 
formed upon the upper roller Pinear one end, 
and placed upon this rollier is an endwise 
sliding frame S, which has a hinged portion 
T, which carries a screw U to move with a 
thread R when the frame T is moved into the 
position shown in dotted lines in Fig.2. When 
the ballot is to be withdrawn from the holder, 
the frames ST are moved toward the center of 
the roller P as far as the screw R will allow, 
and then the part T is closed over upon the 
top of the franne S, so that the threads U R. 
will move together. Before this frame S can 
be moved upon the roller the hinged part T 
must be opened back, as shown in solid lines 
in Figs. 1 and 2, so as to permit the threads 
U to be moved past the thread R. 
The vote having been recorded in the ma 
chine provided for that purpose, and it being 
desired to remove the ballot from the holder, 
this holder is taken to the ballot-box V shown 
in Fig. 3, and which is specially constructed 
for this purpose. The ballot-holder is placed 
upon the top of the box and the rollers are in 
serted under a spring W, which holds the 
lower roller down in contact with the roller X, 
placed in the top of the ballot-box near one 
corner, and which is operated by the crank or 
handle Y, and which roller Xis provided with 
a ratchet Z, with which the pawl A' engages 
to prevent the roller Xfrom ever being turned 
backward. When the operator turns the roller 
X by means of the crank or handle Y, the 
rollers P are caused to revolve and draw the 
perforated ballot out of the holder and at the 
Same time replace it by another ballot from 
the roll of paper ready for the next voter. 
Before this ballot is placed in the position 
shown in Fig. 3 the hinged part T must be 
turned up over the frame S, so that the two 
threads U R will engage, as shown in solid 
lines in Fig. 3, and then when the roller X 
causes the roller P to revolve the revolution 
of the Screw R will cause the thread U to move 
7 o 
95 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
440,545 
3 
the frames S T endwise until the inner end and spaces for the names of candidates op 
of the frame S strikes against the inner end posite the said perforations, and a paper 
holder at one end of the said frame from 
of the thread R and the outer end of the 
which the paper is fed to the holder, Sub 
frame strikes against the bearing Q, when the 
stantially as shown. 
upper roller is locked in position by the two 
2. The combination, in a ballot-holder, of a 
threads and can revolve no farther. These 
frame adapted to receive a continuous strip 
two rollers P being geared together by wheels 
of paper from which the ballots are formed, 
B', the revolution of both is stopped, so that 
and having a series of perforations and spaces 
the outward movement of the paper is also 
for the names of candidates opposite the 
stopped, and then the ballot is cut off in any 
said perforations, a paper-holder at one end 
suitable manner. In order to carry the bal 
of the said frame from which the paper is 
lot directly into the ballot-box after its outer 
fed, and feeding-rollers journaled at the op 
end has been moved beyond the outer end 
posite end of the said frame, substantially-as 
of the ballot-holder, the two rollers C are 
shown and described. 
used, the upper one of which is forced down 
upon the lower one by the spring D'. The 
3. The combination, with a ballot-holder 
and the rollers for withdrawing the ballot, 
lower roller C is in direct contact with the 
one of the rollers being provided with a 
large roller X, and when this roller X is re 
screw-thread, of the sliding hinged frames S 
volved the two rollers Care caused to revolve 
T, provided with a thread U, substantially as 
at the same time, and thus cause them to catch 
shown. 
the end of the ballot between them and draw 
4. The combination of the ballot-holder, 
it directly into the ballot-box. V. While the 
ballot-holder is in position upon the top of 
the rollers connected thereto, and a paper 
holder for holding the paper, with a ballot 
the ballot-box it is held pressed into position 
box provided with an operating-roller for op 
by means of the spring G', which bears 
erating the rollers on the ballot-holder, sub 
against the outer end of its handle. 
stantially as set forth. 
- No claim is made in this application to the 
perforations,through the ballot-holder, the con 
5. The combination of a ballot-box pro 
cealing-slides E, the operating thumb-piece 
vided with an operating-roller and a pair of 
rollers for drawing the ballot into the ballot 
connected thereto, the rod O, the rods M, and 
box, with a ballot-holder, a paper-holder se 
the locking-plates J, for these are all shown 
cured thereto, rollers for withdrawing the 
and described in a separate application which 
ballots, and an automatically-acting mechan 
bears even date herewith. Neither is any 
ism for regulating the length of the ballots, 
claim made to the vote-recording machine 
shown in Fig. 5, for this is also shown and 
substantially as specified. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
claimed in a separate application which bears 
presence of two witnesses. 
even date hereWith. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination, in a ballot-holder, of a 
frame adapted to receive a continuous strip 
of paper and having a series of perforations 
F. A. LEHMANN, 
J. M. NESBIT. 
K. DOUGAN. 
Witnesses: 
35 
45 
55 
75 
e 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440645.txt	(No Model.) 
W. C. NASON, 
CAR TRUCK. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 18, 1890, 
 
 
 
 
72 2. 
25 
2 
Za 
S 
C2 
26 
- s 
C 
W 
SB 
% 
341 ug 14to, 
7. 
1-vis eletoviego 
Zia-772 62% sort 
33 
THE Norris PETERs co, Piot 
O-Litho. WASHINGron, D.e. 
(No Model.) 
No. 440,645, 
W. C. NASON 
- 
CAR TRUCK. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 18, 1890. 
- As 
Pao 
e 
PR% 
T.F.. ITN, 
REL: 
Wiz 
I 
 
-33 
e 
242 
3. 
22 
-A-37. HP2. 
Anurs sm 
r 
2 
64 2 27. 
727- 
y 
2.2% 
 
 
3 
72 
 
  
 
7 
s 
q 
2 
628)iticssos 
341 uova tot 
4?.4- 
Yilliozza-C, Z/2-sozz 
%.6%r (222-54. 
S. &letozvote 
N- - - a 
33 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WITILIAM CHESTER NASON, OF NORTH WATERBOROUGH, MAINE. 
CART RUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,645, dated November 18, 1890. 
Application filed February 4, 1890, 
Serial No. 339,148, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM CIESTER 
NASON, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at North Waterborough, in the county of 
York and State of Maine, have invented a new 
and useful Truck for Street and Railroad Cars, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to trucks for street 
and railroad cars, and it has for its objects to 
construct a truck in which the several revolv 
ing axles-threein number-aresupplied with 
wheels that hay revolve upon the axles and 
mounted in Separate frames, the front and 
rear frames being mounted pivotally, while 
the central or intermediate frame is arranged 
to slide laterally, thereby enabling the wheels 
of the truck to adjust themselves to turn much 
sharper curves than they would be able to do 
otherwise. 
My invention consists in the improved con 
struction, arrangement, and combination of 
details, which will hereinafter be fully de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
. In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure J. 
is a perspective view, showing the truck em 
bodying my improvements in an inverted po 
sition. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view 
taken centrally and vertically through the 
truck. Fig. 3 is a transverse vertical sec 
tional view taken on the line ac a' of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical transverse sectional view 
taken on the line if y of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a 
top view of the truck, showing the frame-work 
of the same partly broken away for the pur 
pose of illustrating the detail construction 
more clearly, Fig. 6 is a detail view of the 
brake mechanism. Fig. 7 is a sectional view 
of the axle and wheel connection. Fig. 8 is a 
detail view of the end of an axle and the roller 
on truck-bearings. Fig. 9 is a bottom view 
of one end of the truck. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
The frame of my improved truck may be 
described as consisting of a rectangular frame 
comprising the sides 11, the end pieces 22, 
and the central longitudinal frame-beams 33, 
which are arranged parallel to each other, as 
shown. The frame-beams 33 are connected 
near their front and rear ends by means of 
blocks 44, which form bearings or means of 
attachment for the short vertical shafts 5 5, 
upon which are pivotally mounted the frames 
66, which are of any suitable construction, 
and which are provided with boxes or truck 
bearings 7, in which the transverse end axles 
S of the truck are journaled. . The said boxes 
7 have rollers 7, journaled therein above the 
axles, which bear against the said rollers, 
thereby reducing friction to a minimum. The 
frames 6 are provided above the boxes 7 and 
in the same vertical plane as the axles S. With 
inwardly-extending stud-axles 9, upon which 
are journaled grooved caster wheels or rollers 
10, which bear upon segmental tracks 11, that 
are suitably secured upon the under side of 
the floor or floors 12, which are mounted upon 
the main truck-frame. It will be seen that 
by this construction the individual frames 6 
are free to swing upon their respective shafts 
or pivots 5 with but little friction with rela 
tion to the main frame of the truck. Upon 
the ends of the shafts or axles 8 are revolu 
bly mounted the flanged car-wheels 13, which 
may revolve upon the axles in going round a 
curve, thus preventing the wheels from drag 
ging or sliding upon the rails. 
The frame-beams 3 are provided with cen 
trally-located cross-pieces 14, which are pro 
vided with downwardly-extending brackets 
15, which are arranged parallel to each other 
and are provided with inwardly-extending 
flanges 16. Cross-braces 17 connect the brack 
ets 15, as shown, for the purpose of bracing 
the said brackets. The brackets 15 are pro 
vided with bearings for a longitudinal shaft 
18, provided near its ends and adjacent to the 
inner sides of the said brackets With grooved 
rollers 19, which may be constructed inte 
grally with the said shaft. The flanges 16 of 
the brackets 15 are provided with perforations 
or bearings 20 for the transversely-sliding 
rods 21, to the outer ends of which are at 
tached suitably-constructed frames 22, in 
which are mounted the vertically-sliding 
boxes 23, having roller-bearings for the cen 
tral or intermediate axle 24. Springs 25 are 
interposed between the upper sides of the 
boxes 23 and the frames 22, Said springs be 
ing either coiled, elliptical, or of any other 
suitable construction. 
The frames 22 are connected independently 
of the transverse rods 21 by means of trans 
verse yokes 25", which serve in the nature of 
95 
ICC 
o 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
440,645 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
braces, and which impart considerable rigid 
ity and stability to the said frames and to the 
boxes journaled therein. The transverse rods 
21 are in practice guided in the annular 
grooves in the wheels or rollers 19, and by 
this construction undue friction is prevented 
during the operation of the device. 
The frames 6 are provided with inwardly 
extending arms or brackets 26, which are pro 
vided at their inner ends with upwardly-ex 
tending studs 27, upon which rollers 28 may 
be mounted. These rollers work in longitudi 
nal slots 28, formed centrally in the yokes 
25. It follows that when the frames 6 swing 
upon their respective pivots the yokes 25 and 
the frames 22, carried by said yokes, will be 
forced laterally and outwardly in a direction 
corresponding with the movement of the piv 
oted or swinging frames 6. The result of this 
is that the wheels mounted upon the central 
or intermediate axle 24 will adapt themselves 
to the curvature of the track upon which the 
truck is traveling, and there will be no strain 
whatever either upon the track or upon the 
flanges of the wheels, for the reason that the 
axles will adjust themselves to run at right 
angles with the track on any curve. Hence 
the truck will be enabled to turn the sharp 
est of curves without danger of injury or 
breakage to any parts thereof. 
The frames 6 are provided at their inner 
ends with pendent brackets 28, in which are 
mounted the inner ends of longitudinal rods 
29, the front and rear ends of which carry the 
brake-beams 30 and 31. The front or outer 
brake-beams 30 are forced automatically in 
an upward direction by means of leaf-springs 
32, which may be mounted upon the king 
bolts 5, by means of which the frames 6 are 
connected pivotally with the truck-frame. 
The said outer brake-beams 30 are also pro 
vided with yokes or bails 33, between which 
and the said brake-bars extend the operating 
yokes or levers 34, which are connected piv 
otally to arms or brackets 35, depending from 
the main truck-frames. The operating yokes 
or levers 34 are provided with brackets 36, 
extending upwardly through the main truck 
frames and adapted to be operated by press 
ing down with the foot or by power of any 
suitable description. 
Coupling-yokes 40 of suitable construction 
are connected or attached to the outer sides 
of the pivoted frames 6, as will be seen in the 
drawings. 
The frames 6, in which the axles 8 are jour 
naled, are to be provided with suitably-con 
structed boxes or truck-bearings for the said 
axles, which may be cushioned by springs of 
any suitable construction. 
The operation of my invention and its ad 
vantages will be readily understood from the 
foregoing description, taken in connection 
with the drawings hereto annexed. It will be 
seen that the front and rear frames of the 
truck are pivoted independently, so as to be 
capable of swinging in opposite directions for 
. 
sition. 
the purpose of enabling the wheels to adapt 
themselves to the curvatures of the tracks. 
At the same time the center frame, Carrying 
the central or intermediate axle of the truck, 
will slide laterally to an extent proportionate 
to the swinging of the end frames, thereby 
preventing the central wheels from hugging 
the rails with their flanges and assisting them 
in conforming themselves to any curves in 
the track. This is accomplished without un 
due or excessive friction between the Work 
ing parts of the device, owing to the herein 
described arrangement of friction - rollers, 
which take up the wear and friction of cont 
tiguous parts. The brake mechanism is ex 
ceedingly simple in its construction, and it 
will be observed that when the outer brake 
bar is depressed downward against the ten 
sion of the spring 32 it will be carried down 
with the wheels, and will thus be practically 
set automatically and with the expense of but 
trifling force on the part of the operator. At 
the same time as soon as the pressure in a 
downward direction upon the said brake-bar 
is released, the brake-bar will be restored by 
the spring 32 to its normal or inoperative po 
The general construction of the device is 
simple and inexpensive, and cars of Ordinary 
construction may be readily mounted upon 
my improved trucks without necessitating 
expensive or troublesome changes. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a car-truck, the combination of the 
main truck-frame, the end frames mounted 
upon vertical bolts or pivots, the transversely 
sliding central frame having yokes provided 
with longitudinal slots, and the arms extend 
ing inwardly upon the end frames and hav 
ing pins or rollers working in the said slots, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a car-truck, the combination, With the 
main truck-frame, of the swinging frames 
mounted upon vertical bolts or pivots and 
having the roller-bearings, the axles and the 
flanged wheels loosely mounted on said axles, 
grooved caster wheels or rollers suitably jour 
naled upon the said Swinging frames, and the 
segmental tracks for the said caster-wheels, 
secured upon the under side of the car-floor, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination of the main truck 
frame, the swinging frames mounted pivot 
ally upon vertical bolts under the same, the 
boxes mounted in the said swinging frames 
and having roller-bearings, the interposed 
spring-cushions, and the axles journaled in 
the said boxes bearing against the rollers and 
having the flanged wheels loosely mounted 
on said axles, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the main truck-frame, 
the swinging end frames mounted upon ver 
tical pivotal bolts, the vertically-sliding boxes 
mounted in the said frames, the interposed 
spring cushions, the grooved wheels or cast 
ers journaled upon the said frames, and the 
75 
. 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
2C) 
I 25 
55 
 
440,645 
segmental tracks for saidcasters, secured upon 
the under side of the car-floor, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. The combination of the main truck-frame, 
the swinging end frames mounted upon ver 
tical pivotal bolts, the depending flanged 
brackets arranged between said swinging 
frames, the transversely-sliding guide-rods 
mounted in the flanges of said brackets and 
supporting a pair of frames, the boxes mounted 
in said frames and in the swinging end 
frames, having the transverse axles carrying 
the flanged wheels, the transverse yokes con 
necting the central boxes and provided with 
longitudinal slots, and the arms or brackets 
extending inwardly from the swinging end 
frames and having pins or rollers playing in 
the said slots, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a car-truck, the combination, with the 
main truck-frame, of the swinging end frames 
mounted upon vertical pivotal bolts and hav 
ing transverse axles and wheels mounted 
thereon, the central or intermediate depend 
ing flanged brackets, a shaft mounted longi 
tudinally in the latter and having grooved 
rollers, the transversely-sliding guide-rods 
engaging the said rollers, the frame mounted 
at the ends of said guide-rods, the boxes 
mounted in said frames and having roller 
bearings for transverse axles provided with 
wheels mounted revolubly upon the axles, 
and suitably-sliding connections between the 
laterally-sliding central wheel-frame and the 
swinging end frame, substantially asset forth. 
7. In a car-truck, the combination, with the 
Swinging wheel carrying end frames mounted 
upon vertical pivotal bolts, of the depending 
brackets, the longitudinal rods mounted in 
the latter and having brake-bars at their front 
and rear ends, the springs arranged to force 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
62. 
the front or outer brake-bars automatically 
in an upward direction, and means for de 
pressing the said brake-bars against the ten 
sion of the springs, substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination of the truck-frame, the 
swinging end frames mounted upon vertical 
pivots, the brackets depending from the in 
ner sides of said swinging frames, the longi 
tudinal bars mounted on said brackets, the 
brake-bars secured upon said rods, the leaf 
springs mounted upon the pivotal bolts and 
bearing upwardly against the under sides of 
said brake-bars, and means for depressing the 
latter against the tension of the springs, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
9. In a car-truck, the combination of the 
swinging wheel carrying end frames, the 
transversely-sliding wheel carrying interme 
diate frames connected slidingly with the 
swinging end frames, the brackets depending 
from the inner ends of the latter, the rods 
mounted in said brackets and supporting the 
transverse brake-bars, the springs arranged 
to force the latter in an upward direction, the 
yokes or bails attached to the outer brake 
bars, and the operating yokes or levers piv 
oted to brackets depending from the truck 
frame, extending between the outer brake 
bars and the bails attached to the latter and 
bent upwardly through the truck-frame, sub 
stantially in the manner and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM CHESTER NASON. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. MCNEALLY, 
MI., F. KELLY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440745.txt	(No Model.) 
E. MOREAU. 
R00K DRILLING MAGHINE. 
W 
10 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 440,745, 
Patented Nov. 18, 1890. 
 
) A 
zezZYr. 
AVzrve ull/7?oreazd, 
 
"" 
* 
* 
* 
. 
EP 
 
(No Model.) 
E. MOREAU. 
R00K DRILLING MACHINIE. 
10 Sheets-Sheet 2. * 
No. 440,745, 
Patented Nov. 18, 1890. 
/zezvezzZ7TZ 
- Zugrve JZ77e realize 
N 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 440,745, 
E. MOREAU, 
R00 K DRILLING MACHINIE. 
10 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented N0W. Il 8, 1890, 
N 
) 
SN  
A | 
N   N  
SSSR 
III 
N 
Nr. 
A 
 
 
 
 ? 
<<<<<<No.  
O 
N 
 
 
 UN 
2 
N  
(No Model.) 
E. MOREAU, 
R00K DIRILING MA0HINE, 
0 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 440,745, 
Patented N0W. 18, 1890. 
flera, 
NessassassassassassarDessas 
 
| 
7 4z2zzaYeeye 
(No Model.) 
No. 440,745, 
E, MOREAU. 
R00K DRILLING MACHINE. 
10 Sheets-Sheet 8, 
Patented Nov. 18, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
 
UNII 
| 
(No Model.) 
E, MOREAU. 
- 
R 0 CK DRING MACENE 
10 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
No. 440,745, 
Patented N0 v, 18, 1890. 
 
 
 
2 serw | 
2 
| 
 
(No Model.) 
E. MOREAU. 
R 0 GIK DRILLING MACHINE 
10 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
No. 440,745, 
Patented N0 v. 18, 1890. 
 
5/%ZzZzzeSSeS 
-e, 92 
r 
ZZZZweZZZ77/ 
Z7 veyrve J77?e reave, 
Z ZaE-SAber z: 
- ZASY Zzzzez 
 
(No Model.) 
E, MOREAU, 
R00 K DRILLING MAGHINIE. 
10 Sheets-Sheet 9. 
| 
N0, 440,745, 
Patented N0 v. 18, 1890. 
 
 
 
(No Model.) . 
No, 440,745, 
E. MOREAU. 
R00 K DIRILING MACHINE, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 10. 
Patented Nov. 18, 1890. 
Z?e?zeeSses K 
-42- y  
* 
f 
*-massassassasszaeser 
 
ZzZ-ZwezeZ2Zr 
 Z/zey7ve -77Zoreau 
*7. ee/zez6 
4% eZZZ7-azez. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EUGNE MIOREAU, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
M 
THIEODORE W. STERILING, OEF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
R O C K - D R || L | N G MAC H I N E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,745, dated November 18, 1890. 
Application filed March 19, 1890, Serial No, 344473, (No model.) 
I O 
2 CO 
3O 
40 
To all av Jo7n, it 77va/ co7ucer7v.: 
Be it known that I, EUGNE MOREAU, a citi 
zem of France, residing at Philadelphia, in the 
county of Philadelphia, and State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Rock - Drilling Machines; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
This invention relates to rock-drilling ma 
chines, and particularly to that class in which 
blows are struck upon the drill-tool or a part 
holding it and in which the drill-toolis rotated 
between the blow S. 
The object is to provide a rock-drilling ma 
chine which shall be compact, comparatively 
light, and simple and inexpensive of con 
struction, capable of operation with expendi 
ture of a minimum amount of power, and 
capable of being rapidly and conveniently 
manipulated to bring it into any desirable 
position for use; furthermore, to accomplish 
the rotation of the tool or part holding the 
tool in a simple and efficient manner; fur 
thermore, to accomplish forward feed of the 
machine automatically, and, finally, to ac 
complish the forward feed automatically, but 
cause the forward movement to be checked 
automatically should the advance be pro 
portionately too rapid. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in the combination, with a dirill and 
the operating mechanism of a striking de 
vice therefor, of means connected with the 
operating mecbanism which will cause a par 
tial rotation of the drill-tool between blows; 
furthermore, in the combination, with a drill 
and the operating mechanism of the striking 
device therefor, of means connected with the 
operating mechanism acting automatically to 
accomplish forward feed of the machine, and, 
finally, in the combination, with a drill and 
the operating mechanism of a striking device 
therefor, of means connected with the operat 
ing mechanism for accomplishing the forward 
feed of the machine automatically and for 
checking the advance automatically when this 
becomes too rapid. 
The striking device, consisting of two ham 
- 
N 
mers adapted to reciprocate in the direction 
of impact and to be reciprocated to and from 
the line thereof, is no part of the present ap 
plication, but forms the subject-matter of 
another filed of even date herewith, Serial 
No. 344,472. 
The present invention is capable of use 
with various striking mechanisms. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, and in which like 
letters of reference indicate like parts, Figure 
1 is a view in perspective representing a drill 
ing-machine, the drill-shaft being in a tube 
supported on a staladard by collar and sleeve 
which permit the drill to be tilted up and , 
down and turned or shifted around, and also 
to be moved longitudinally or to slide, the 
striking mechanism to which this rock-drill 
ing mechanism is here, for mere illustration 
of a mode of use, shown attached being in a 
housing (the cover of which is removed) pro 
jecting backward from the tube of the drill, 
the view showing the end of the drill-shaft, 
the tube, the sleeve, the standard, and its col 
lar, and also a rock-shaft outside of the hous 
ing of the striking mechanism, this rock-shaft 
having an arm at one end projecting laterally 
into the housing and toothed at its end, as 
shown in Figs. 2 and 3, to mesh with a seg 
mental gear loose at the upper part of the drill 
shaft, as shown in Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 6, and hav 
ing a lateral extension at its other end taken 
under by a cam on the main shaft of the strik 
ing mechanism, as seen more fully in Figs. 2. 
and 7, a boxing over the main shaft being cut 
away to show the extension from the rock 
shaft of the drill and the cam on the shaft of the 
striking mechanism, the striking device, to 
which the drillis here applied, having its ham 
mers so arranged in connection with the driv 
ing-shaft that upon rotation of the driving 
shaft actuating the rock-shaft the drill tool or 
shaft in which it is fixed will begiven a partial 
rotation between the blows, the striking device 
here being one with two hammers arranged 
one above the other, there being seen the up 
per hammer with two stems and two actuat 
ing-springs-one on each stempart of two 
portionsa forward projecting portion anda 
rear or upright portion-of a movable frame 
in which the hammers are mounted, one of 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
I O O 
45 
 
440,745 
two longitudinal tonges r guide-ribs for | head of one hammer, part of the two portions 
each hammer on the forward-projecting por 
of the movable frame in which the hammerS 
are mounted, an upper set of tubes set in the 
tion of this frame employed with grooves in 
upright portion and into which the stems of 
the hammers to steady the hammers and hold 
them in. proper position against individual 
the hammers slide, the place of the grooves 
in the rear or upright portion, which grooves 
displacement to or from the lin? of stroke 
take upon upright guide-bars on the station 
and the place of one of two upright grooves 
ary frame or block, the top of the stationary 
one at each side of the rear or upright por 
frame or block, into a recess of which the up 
tion of this movable frameas shown in de 
right portion of the movable frame is set, the 
tail in Fig. 15, to take upon upright guide 
upright guide-bars extending in ward, and 
bars on a stationary frame or a block having 
upon which the grooves in the stationary 
a recess or jaw, as more fully shown in Fig. 
frame take, the upper pawl-springs to oper 
14, to receive the movable frame, and pro 
vided with upright guide-bars extending in 
ate in connection with the locking-levers or 
roller-pawls, as shown in Fig. 13, the situation 
ward, upon which the movable frame slides 
by the grooves in its sides, upper pawl springs 
of the cleft in the block from above down 
ward, the arm fixed to and projecting back 
to operate in connection with locking-levers 
or roller-pawls, as shown in Fig. 13, and a cleft 
ward from the movable frame through this 
cleft into a, box on a crank or crank-bend on 
in the block from above downward to receive 
a second shaft, as shown in Figs. 6 and 12, by 
an arm fixed to and projecting backward 
from the movable frame, as shown in Figs. 6 
which the movable frame is actuated to re 
ciprocate, gear-wheels and cranks on the sec 
and 15, into a box on a crank or crank-bend 
ond shaft to operate with links to draw back 
on a second shaft, as shown in FigS. 2, 6, 7, 8, 
the upper hammer, as shown in Fig. 11, and, 
and 12, by which the movable frame 1s actu 
finally, the main shaft and studs bracing the 
ated to reciprocate from the crank or crank 
stationary frame in the housing. Fig. 3 is a 
bend on the second shaft by means of the 
view in elevation looking at and into the 
box; also, the main shaft, and, finally, a Sec 
housing of the striking mechanism between 
ond shaft above the main shaft with gear 
the end of the forward-projecting portion of 
wheels. Fig. 2 is a top plan view represent" 
ing the operation of the means for rotating 
the movable frame and the upper end of the 
drill-shaft, with the housing, the rock-shaft, 
the drill-shaft and part of the means for ac 
complishing automatically feed forward of 
and a tube at the under part of the housing 
for containing a feed-screw and an interiorly 
the drill and automatic arrest thereof, the 
cover of the striking mechanism being Off, 
screw-threaded tube, as shown in Fig. 6 in 
section, the view representing in detail the 
the stems of the upper hammer and the actu 
ating-springs removed, and the end of the 
means from the shaft-rock of giving a par 
drill-tube broken off, showing part of the 
tial rotation to the drill-shaft between the 
blows of the hammers, showing the rock-shaft, 
tube and its sleeve, the roclk-shaft outside of 
its crank-arm projecting into the housing, 
the housing of the striking mechanism, the 
crank-armat one end projecting laterally into 
having the spring to throw it up and toothed 
at its end meshing with the segmental gear, 
the housing and toothed at its end meshing 
with the segmental gear loose at the upper 
being a number of Spur-teeth on the rim of 
the en larged end or head of a gear-shell loose 
end of the drill-shaft, a spring attached to 
upon a ratchet-shell, as seen in Fig. 5, on the 
the crank-arm and the housing to throw 
upper end of the drill-shaft, this gear-shell 
the crank-arm, and the segmental gear back, 
having, furthermore, the front part of a por 
as more fully shown in Fig. 3, after it has 
been moved down by the turning of the rock 
tion of its rinn Or circumference of its head cult 
away, leaving a flange at the back for a hanger 
shaft from its extension by the cam on the 
or depending plate to take against to hold the 
main shaft, and a lateral extension at the 
shell against displacement inward, showing, 
other end of the rock-shaft taken under by 
also, the hanger or plate depending from the 
the cam on the main shaft of the strilking 
mechanism, showing, also, part of a longi 
end of the housing, the flange of the wheel 
tudinally - movable connecting - frame, (seen 
being set behind it, the head or face or wheel 
fully in Fig. 9) through which means actu 
of the ratchet-shell, (shown in Fig. 5,) which 
shell is held upon the upper end of the drill 
ated from the operating mechanism and act 
ing to accomplish forward feed of the ma 
shaft by short feathers projecting toward the 
center from the head, taking into long grooves 
chine are automatically disconnected from or 
in the drill-shaft, as seen in Fig. 5, causing 
connected with the drill-tool, or are discon 
nected or connected by hand, the connecting 
the ratchet-shell to turn within the shaft, 
but leaving the shaft free to move longitudi 
frame having a pin at the front end set into 
nally independently of the ratchet-shell-that 
a well or hole in the drill-casing, as shown 
fully in Fig. 9, pins at the other end to en 
is, to slide in it--a ratchet or feed pawl pro 
jecting toward the center from the gear-shell 
ter wells or holes in the casing, these pins be 
ing surrounded by springs bearing against 
head and pushed by a spring, as shown in 
the connecting - frame and the housing to 
Fig. 4, taking against a tooth of the ratchet 
wheel, and showing, finally, a stop-pawl with 
keep the frame normally pushed forward of 
its spring, this pawl being pivoted to the cas 
the striking mechanism, there appearing the 
O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
oo 
75 
90 
95 
OKO 
I o5 
I, I, o 
I I5 
I 25 
440,745 
7 o 
75 
in the housing, but being fixed therein against 
ing and taking through a slot (shown fully in 
longitudinal motion, whereby upon turning 
Fig. 4) in the rim of the head of the gear 
shell against a tooth of the ratchet-wheel to 
the shaft in one direction or the other the 
prevent the ratchet-shell from turning back 
machine will be advanced or retired on its 
standard; showing, furthermore, a skew gear 
ward. Fig. 4 is a view partly in section and 
wheel (seen fully in Fig. 9) fixed upon a col 
partly in elevation, being a vertical central 
longitudinal section through the head of the 
lar loose upon the screw-shaft in connection 
gear-shell, having its ratchet or feed pawl and 
with a collar behind it turning with the 
screw-shaft by means of a spline and groove, 
spring and the ratchet-shell on the end of the 
but free to move on the shaft longitudinally, 
drill-shaft in front elevation, showing par 
ticularly, the spring to the feed-pawl secured 
as more fully shown in Fig. 9, and also a skew 
gear-wheel on the main shaft, as more fully 
in a countersink on the rim, the slot through 
which the stop-pawl passes, and the flange. 
seen in Figs. 7, 8, and 9, from which the skew 
gear-wheel on the loose collar on the screw 
Fig. 5 is a view in vertical and diagonal or 
angular longitudinal section, taken on the 
shaft is turned, and by which, when it is con 
nected with the spline-collar behind it, as 
line ac ac of Fig. 4, showing the drill-shaft hav 
ing surface-grooves into which the splines or 
more fully shown in Fig. 9, the shaft will be 
turned, but which will turn idle when it is 
feathers of the ratchet-wheel are set for a short 
not connected with or attached to the spline 
distance to hold the wheel on the shaft against 
turning independently thereof, but leaving 
collar; showing, also, part of the longitudi 
nally-movableconnecting-frame with its front 
the shaft free to slide orbe pushed back, show 
pin projecting through the front of the hous 
ing, furthermore, the ratchet-shell with head 
and body, the head having the feathers or 
ing into the tube of the drill, the rear cross 
piece of the frame taking into a groove in the 
splines and the body a cleat at its end to take 
spline-collar behind the skew gear-wheel on 
against the body of the gear-shell to hold the 
ratchet against displacement in ward; fur 
the screw-shaft, whereby when the frame is 
moved backward the spline - collar will be 
thermore, the gear-shell with head and body, 
moved backward out of engagement with the 
the headl having the countersink for secure 
ment of the feed-pawl spring, the Spring be 
loose collar or collar of the skew gear-wheel, 
ing in place, and showing, finally, the flange. 
letting this gear-wheel turn idly on the screw 
shaft and the screw-shaft be stopped, stop 
Fig. 6 is a view in vertical longitudinal sec 
tion, taken through the rock-drilling mechan 
ping the feed, and when the frame is pushed 
ism and through the housing of the striking 
forward by the springs (seen in Fig. 2) the 
spline-collar will be thrown into engagement 
mechanism attached thereto, the end of the 
rock-drilling mechanism being broken away, 
with the loose collar on the skew gear-wheel, 
leaving in elevation, segmental of the drill 
causing the Screw-shaft to be turned there 
from, actuating the feed; showing, also, part 
shaft, the part gear - wheel with depending 
plate to hold it against displacement in Ward, 
of a rod in the casing of the drill-tool, which 
rod at its upper end abuts against the front 
the feed-screw for the dirilil, a rod in the caS 
pin of the connecting-frame and at its lower 
ing of the drill-tool attached at its outer or 
or outer end is attached to the drill-shaft by 
lower end to the drill-shaft by means of a pro 
jection therefrom to be moved longitudinally 
means of a projection therefrom to be moved 
longitudinally thereby, as shown in Fig. 9, 
thereby, as shown in Fig. 9, a part of the front 
pushing the drill backward against a spring, 
pin from the longitudinally-movable connect 
ing-frame, part of this connecting-frame and 
(not shown, but seen in Fig. 9.) as by excess 
ive resistance, thus stopping the feed auto 
a cam-shaft with cam to enable the shaft to be 
pulled back by hand; furthermore, leaving 
matically; also showing a small shaft with 
im elevation of the striking mechanism the 
a cam on its inner end taking over the 
hammers to display their shape, their Springs, 
rear CrOSS-piece of the frame and a handle 
to e actuate it, whereby the frame may be 
the stem appearing of the lower one, and its 
tube, (more fully seen in Fig. 13,) the view 
pulled back by hand to stop the feed, and 
showing, also, the segmental gear-wheel with 
representing the means for producing for 
flange, countersink, and pawl-spring screw 
ward feed of the machine and parts of the 
therein, and the depending plate against the 
means for automatically arresting the feed 
flange holding the Wheel against displace 
in conformity with the work to be performed, 
showing part of the drill-shaft, its upper end 
ment of the striking mechanism, there ap 
with the grooves, the body of the ratchet 
pearing the upper and lower hammers and 
one each of their actuating-springs, the upper 
shell with its cleats, the body of the gear 
hammer being drawn back and the lower one 
shell, and a sleeve screwed into the end of the 
housing for sustaining the shaft and shells; 
extended, having just delivered its blow, a 
furthermore, the tube and its sleeve, an in 
stem of the lower hammer and one of the 
ternally-screw-threaded tube fixed thereto, a 
tubes fixed in the movable frame, into which 
tube in the lower part of the housing of the 
tubes the stems of the hammers are received 
and in which they slide, as shown fully in 
striking mechanism which the first tube en 
Fig. 13, the movable frame in which the 
ters and in which it is free to slide, and a 
hammers are mounted, its arm in position, 
screw - threaded shaft entering the Screw 
threaded tube, this shaft being free to turn i and part of one of the recesses for the lock 
95 
OG 
Io5 
I O 
I T 5 
I 2 C 
I 25 
O 
2 O 
3o 
45 
| 55 
 
4 
440,745 
O 
ing-levers or roller-pawls with a lower pawl 
spring, as shown fully in Figs. 13 and 15, 
and, finally, showing the stationary frame or 
block_with the lower part of one of the up 
right guide-bars, the main shaft, and the 
second shaft carrying the box, the free end of 
the arm extending into the box, whereby the 
movable frame is reciprocated from this 
second shaft. Fig. 7 is a view in elevation, 
the end of the housing being removed to dis 
play the parts representing the rear of the 
striking mechanism, with means from the 
operating mechanism thereof of actuating 
the feed of the machine androtating the drill, 
showing upon the main shaft a skew gear 
wheel (seen again in Fig. 8) for meshing with 
and driving the skew gear-wheel upon the 
loose collar on the screw-shaft employed to 
advance or retire the drill on the standard, 
as seen in Fig. 9; showing, also, the cam on 
the main shaft and the end of the rock-shaft 
with its lateral extension, and, finally, the 
opening in the lower part of the housing for 
the screw-shaft of the striking mechanism, 
there appearing part of the stationary frame, 
being upright strips or pieces con ?ining the 
shafts at their bearings in the frame, the com 
mon main shaft with its gear-wheels for driv 
ing the striking mechanism, between which 
is the skew gear-wheel for actuating the feed, 
and a second shaft with its gear-wheels, the 
gear-wheels on the second shaft intermesh 
ing in pairs, the box on the second shaft 
with the arm from the movable frame pro 
jecting through it, and, finally, the sides and 
bottom of the housing with attach ments for 
the rear plate. Fig. 8 is a view in perspec 
tive representing the main driving-shaft with 
means for actuating the feed of the machine 
and the rotation of the drill, showing the 
skew gear-wheel and the cam, there appear 
ing also the gear-wheels for driving the strik 
ing mechanism and crank-bends to connect 
through links with pins on the head of the 
lower hammer to draw the hammer back 
against its spring or springs, as fully shown 
in Fig. 11. Fig. 9 is a view in perspective 
with a portion of the drill-tube removed to 
display parts therein and the drill - shaft 
and tube being cut off outside of or be 
yond the situation of the shells, representing 
in detail the means for automatically causing 
and for automatically arresting the feed of 
the machine on its standard, showing the 
tube and its sleeve, the outside of the inter 
nally-screw-threaded tube fixed to a bracket 
on the sleeve, the rear end of the screw 
threaded shaft which enters the Screw-thread 
ed tube, the skew gear-wheel fixed upon a 
collar loose upon the screw-shaft, a collar be 
hind it having a groove which takes upon a 
spline on the screw-shaft, so that it turns 
with the screw-shaft, but is free to move on 
the shaft longitudinally, the two collars be 
ing provided with teeth on their adjacent 
edges, forming a clutch, the skew gear-wheel 
on the main shaft set at an angle to and 
meshing with its fellow on the screw-shaft, 
the longitudinally-movable connecting-frame 
with its front pin projecting through the 
front of the housing into the tube of the drill 
and with rear pins provided with springs, the 
rear cross-piece of the frame taking into a 
groove in the spline-collar behind the skew 
gear-wheel on the screw-shaft, whereby when 
the frame is moved backward the spline-col 
lar will be moved backward out of engage 
ment with the loose collar or collar of the 
skew gear-wheel on the feed-shaft, letting 
this gear-wheel turn idly on the feed-shaft 
and the screw-shaft be stopped, stopping the 
feed, and when the frame is pushed forward 
by the Springs the spline-collar will be thrown 
into engagement with the loose collar on the 
skew gear-wheel, causing the screw-shaft to 
be turned therefrom, actuating the feed; 
showing, also, part of the drill-shaft with a 
projection at its lower end, the rod in the cas 
ing of the drill-tool abutting at its upper end 
against the front pin of the connecting-frame 
and at its lower or outer end attached to the 
drill-shaft by means of the projection there 
from to be moved longitudinally thereby, a 
disk fixred in the tube, but free on the drill 
shaft, a Spring on the drill-shaft between 
this disk and the projection, an enlargement 
or fixed collar on the drill-shaft bearing 
against the projection, and, finally, an end 
bearing for the drill-shaft screwed into the 
tube, pushing the drill backward against 
the Spring, as by excessive resistance, thus 
Stopping the feed automatically. Fig. 10 is 
a view, partly in elevation and partly in sec 
tion, showing the end of the drill-shaft with 
a Square socket screwed upon it to receive 
and hold the drill-tool. Fig. 11 is a view in 
side elevation, the housing being removed, 
representing the manner of drawing back the 
hammers against their springs, showing the 
hammers with one of the pins on the head of 
each, and the actuating-springs, the hammer 
stems, the tubes, and part of the movable 
frame being indicated by dotted lines, one of 
the grooves in the hammers employed with 
the longitudinal tongues or guide-ribs on the 
frame to steady the hammers and hold them in 
proper position against individual displace 
ment to or from the line of stroke, part of the 
movable frame, part of the stationary frame 
or the block, the end of the main shaft in full 
lines, and in dotted line the end of the sec 
ond shaft; furthermore, the gear-wheels on 
the shafts, one of the cranks that are on the 
ends of the second shaft, and (of the links 
counecting the cranks with the hammer-heads 
by the pins) the links on this side, the po 
Sition of the links being such that while the 
crank on the secondl i shaft is back, having 
drawn the hammers backward against its 
Spring or springs, to be held by mechanism 
not seen, but shown in Fig. 13, the crank 
on the lower shaft will be forward, and vice 
versathat is to say, the two shafts being 
so geared that their cranks will be held, re 
2 O 
35 
45 
55 
 
95 
OCO 
Io5 
O : 
I I 5 
2 C 
I 25 
440,745 
5 
O 
I 5 
2 5 
35 
55 
Spectively, in positions relatively diametri 
cally opposite, and each link having an open 
ing of sufficient length to permit its hammer 
to deliver full stroke upon being released, 
there also appearing in this figure the cam 
On the Imain shaft. Fig. 12 is a view in per 
Spective representing in detail the means of 
moving the arm up and down to reciprocate 
the movable frame, showing the second shaft 
With the box (seen in Figs. 2 and 7) on a 
crank in the length of the shaft and the arm 
belonging to the movable frame, with a groove 
ndi projections for its securement; showing, 
also, the gear-wheels of the second shaft and 
a crank for attachment of a link. Fig. 13 is 
a VieW in vertical longitudinal section, taken 
through the fore part of the stationary frame 
and the rear portion of the movable frame in 
the line of a stem each for the upper and 
lower hammers, leaving the stems (broken 
a Way toward the hammers) in elevation, as 
Well as locking-levers or roller-pawls, pawl 
Springs, and a guide-bar, the casing being re 
moved to display the parts, showing a stem 
of each hammer provided with a notch for re 
ceiving a roller of a locking-lever or roller 
pawl, part of the movable frame carrying 
the tubes in which the stems slide, and the 
locking-levers or roller-pawls, and part of the 
Stationary frame with the pawl-springs, a 
stop for the locking-levers of roller-pawls to 
Strike to be released from the notches in 
their respective stems, and an upright guide 
bar. Fig. 14 is a view in perspective repre 
senting the greater portion of the stationary 
frame on the block, in a front recess or jaw 
of which the movable frame carrying the ham 
mers slides, showing the recess orjaw provided 
with upright guide-bars extending in ward 
for taking into the grooves in the sides of the 
movable frame, the upper and lower pawl 
Springs to operate in connection with the 
locking-levers or roller-pawls, the stops for 
the locking-levers to strike to release the ham 
mers, the Cleft from above downward to re 
ceive the arm fixed to and projecting back 
ward from the movable frame through this 
block into the box on a crank on the second 
shaft, and depressions at the back of the frame 
to form portions of the bearings of the main 
and second shafts; and Fig. 15 is a view in 
perspective representing the greater portion 
of the movable frame in which the hammers 
are mounted, showing the recesses from above 
downward and from below upward rounded 
within and holding the back ends of the tubes 
into which the stems slide, the recesses hav 
ing the locking-levers or roller-pawls in posi 
tion, (the locking-levers or roller-pawls being 
een in three of these recesses,) and upright 
grooves at the sides to take upon the guide 
bars On the stationary frame and the arm in 
position in the frame by which the frame is 
actuated. 
In the drawings, Hrepresents the drill-shaft 
in a tube H, supported on a standard I by a 
sleeve h, and collar i, which permit the drill 
| to be moved longitudinally or to slide on the 
standard and also to be tilted up and down 
and turned or shifted around. At itS upper 
| end the drill-shaft is provided at its surface 
with longitudinal i grooves h, and upon this 
end is a shell which I call the ratchet-shell, 
consisting of a head portion h, provided cir 
cumferentially with ratchet-teeth and a body 
portion hi, the shell being secured upon the 
shaft in such manner as to turn with it, but 
yet to slide thereonthat is, allow the shaft 
to be moved longitudinally without moving 
the shellthe securement being by short 
feathers or splines h, which project from the 
head portion toward the center into the 
grooves in the shaft, the feathers filling the 
grooves in width, but not filling them in 
length. Upon the end of its body portion the 
ratchet-shell is provided with a cleat h, tak 
ing against the end of the body of an Outer 
shell, for a purpose presently to be explained. 
Surrounding the ratchet-shell and turning 
loosely thereon is this outer shell, which I call 
the gear-shell, having a head portion h 
and a body portion fhi, the head portion being 
provided at a part of its circumference with 
spur-teeth h and being cut away at the front 
portion at another part h10 of its circumfer 
ence, leaving a flange h11, at the back for a 
hanger or plate h*, dependling from the hous 
ing of the striking mechanism, to take against 
to hold the shell against displacement inward. 
The gear-shell has a feed-pawl h set through 
an Opening in the rim and projecting toWard 
the center, and this pawl takes against One 
of the ratchet-teeth on the head of the ratchet 
shell, the pawl being held in engagement by 
a spring h1, set in a countersink h in the 
rim. At a portion of the circumference op 
posite the teeth the rim of the head of the 
ratchet-shell has an opening or slot?h, through. 
which takes a stop-pawlh 7 against a ratchet 
tooth, the stop-pawl being pivoted to the hous 
ing and having a suitable spring. It will 
now be clear that as the depending plate pre 
vents the gear-wheel from being displaced in 
ward and as the cleat on the body of the 
ratchet-shellbears against the end of the body 
of the gear-shell this cleat serves to keep the 
ratchet-shell also from displacement inward. 
The upper end of the shaft and the shells are 
set and turn in a sleeve h, screwed into the 
upper end of the tube. 
Mounted laterally outside the housing of 
the Striking apparatus is a rock-shaft K, haV 
ing a crank-arm k projecting into the hous 
ing and provided with a spring k, fixed at 
one end to the housing and at the other end 
to this arm to throw the arm up, the arm hav 
ing teeth, k at its end meshing with a seg 
mental gear, being the spur-teeth h on the 
rim of the head of the gear-shell. At the 
other end the rock-shaft has a lateral exten 
sion k*, which is taken under by a cam e on 
It will be 
the main shaft E of the machine. 
obvious that as the main shaft revolves the 
cam coming under the extension at the rock 
7 O 
75 
95 
O O 
I O 
I I5 
* 
2 CO 
I 25 
 
"A" Kroz 
440,745 
O 
I 5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
shaft will move this, causing from its arm a 
partial rotation i downward of the gear-shell, 
by the feed-pawl of which the ratchet-shell 
will be turned to the extent of one tooth, giv 
ing this extent of the turn to the drill-shaft, 
while as soon as the cam escapes from under 
the lateral extension of the rock-shaft the 
spring on the crank-arm will throw the arm 
up, giving a partial rotation to the gear-shell 
in the opposite direction, thus bringing its 
pawl into engagement with a higher tooth, 
the stop-pawl acting to retain the ratchet 
shell in position while the feed-pawl is out of 
contact with a tooth. The position of the 
cam upon the drilling-shaft is such with re 
lation to the actuating mechanism of the strik 
ing device and its operation so timed with 
relation to the operation of the hammers that 
the drill-shaft will be given a partial rotation 
between the blows of the hammers. 
To the sleeve h of the tube H, preferably 
to a bracket projecting from the sleeve, is at 
tached an internally-screw-threaded tube IL, 
and this tube enters and is free to slide in 
another tube Min the lower part of the hous 
ing of the striking mechanism, and entering 
the other end of the Screw-threaded tube 
through the tube in the housing is a screw 
shaft N, free to turn in the housing, but fixed 
therein, as by a collar abutting against an off 
set in the tube against longitudinal motion, 
whereby upon turning the shaft in one di 
rection or the other the machine will be ad 
vanced or retired on its standard. This screw 
shaft has upon it a loose collar m, provided at 
its rear with teeth, and formed with or fixed 
to this loose collar is a skew gear-wheel n. 
Behind the collar n is a second collar min, pro 
vided at its front end with teeth and ar 
ranged to turn with the Screw-shaft by means 
of a spline and groove or the like, but free to 
move on the shaft longitudinally. Upon the 
main shaft E is another skew gear-wheel e, 
from which the slanting toothed gear-wheel 
on the loose collar on the screw-shaft is turned, 
and by which, when it is connected with the 
spline-collar behind it by the teeth on both, 
the shaft will be turned, but which will turn 
idly when it is not connected with or attached 
to the spine-collar. 
In the lower part of the housing is a con 
necting-frame O, capable of limited longitudi 
nal movement, through which frame the 
screw-shaft is automatically thrown into ac 
tion to accomplish forward feed of the ma 
chine or automatically stopped to discontinue 
the feed, the rear cross-piece of the connect 
ing-frame taking into a groove n of the spline 
collar, so that the spline-collar can be moved 
longitudinally on the shaft by the frame. 
Projecting backward from the frame are pins 
o, which enter suitable holes in the housing, 
and upon these pins between the housing 
and the end of the frame are spiral springs o*, 
which tend to push the frame forward. As 
the frame is pushed forward it carries with it 
the spline-collar, whereupon the teeth upon 
 
75 
95 
OO 
its front end catch into the teeth at the rear 
end of the loose collar carrying the skew gear 
wheel, forming a clutch, so that when from 
the slanting toothed gear-wheel on the main 
shaft the skew gear-wheel and collar om the 
screw-shaft are turned the spline-collar Will 
be turned, and by it the shaft; but when the 
frame is pushed backwardit carries back with 
it the spline-collar, whereupon the teeth upon 
its front end part from engagement with the 
teeth at the rear end of the loose collar car 
rying the skew gear-wheel, uncoupling the 
clutch, so that when from the skew gear-wheel 
on, the main shaft the skew gear-wheel and 
the collar on the screw-shaft are turned these 
will turn idly and the shaft will not be turned. 
The connecting-frame has at its front end 
another pin o, which projects into the tube 
of the drill or into a channel h along the 
under side thereof. In the lower part of the 
tube or in the channel is a rod h, which 
abuts against the pin of the frame, the other 
end being attached by means of a collar h**, 
surrounding it, to the drill - shaft to be 
moved longitudinally thereby. Fixed in the 
tube is a disk h, through which the shaft 
passes freely, and outside of the collar the 
shaft has an enlargement h**, which bears 
against the collar. Between the collar and 
the disk the shaft is surrounded by a Strong 
coil-spring, and into the end of the tube is 
screwed an end bearing for the drill-shaft, the 
drill-shaft having screwed upon its enda 
square socket h* to receive and hold the drill 
tool. 
It will be obvious that when the drillil is 
pushed backward against the spring, as by 
excessive resistance, which would otherwise 
result in more rapid feed of the machine than 
penetration of the drill-tool, the rod will push 
against the front pin of the frame and the 
frame will uncouple the clutch, thus stopping 
the feed automatically. 
To arrest the feed by hand there is provided 
a cam-shaft h*, the cam h of which takes 
over the rear cross-piece of the connecting 
frame. The shaft is provided with a handle 
h outside the housing. By turning the han 
dle, bringing the broader part of the cam 
against the cross-piece of the frame, the frame 
will be drawn backward and the clutch un 
coupled. Upon turning the handle, bringing 
the narrow part or edge of the cam against 
the cross-piece of the frame, the frame will 
be thrown forward by the springs at the rear 
and the clutch uncoupled. 
Of the striking mechanism, to which the 
drill is here shown applied, A A* designate 
two hammers having en larged portions or 
heads a, a, provided with pins a a, and one 
or more reduced portions each or stems aa, 
provided with outward - facing rounded 
notches Ca Ca near their ends. The hammers 
are mounted one above the other, but free to 
slide independently lengthwise in a movable 
frame B, consisting of two portions- an up 
right portion band a forwardly-extending por 
I o 5 
O 
II 5 
I 25 
440,745 
tion b-the extension having at the side of 
each hammer an in wardly-projecting longi 
tudinaltongue orguide-ribb, which takesinto 
a corresponding groove alto steady each ham 
mer and hold it in proper position against 
individual displacement to or from the line of 
Strokethat is, in the present embodiment, 
against displacement up or down, as the ham 
mers in this instance are shown one above the 
other, though they may be side by sidethe 
movable frame having, furthermore, tubes b 
b fixed in the front face of the main portion 
b toward the hammers, and which the ends of 
the stems of the hammers enter free to slide 
therein. Upon the stems of the hammers are 
spiral springs C C, which about at one end 
against the front face of the movable frame 
over the tubes and at the other against the 
en largements or heads of the hammers, these 
Springs being the hammer-actuating springs. 
The movable frame has grooves b in the 
sides of the upright portion to permit the 
frame to be guided in its movement, and 
has, furthermore, an arm b fixed in it near 
its top and projecting backward beyond its 
rear face, by which arm the frame can be 
moved, and recesses b b in the rear face, re 
spectively from above downward and from 
below upward, each recess endingin a rounded 
opening, into which a tube is set, the recesses 
containing locking levers or pawls b10 b'11 to 
engage the notches in the stems of the ham 
mers, as shown in Fig. 13, the levers carrying 
rollers that enter the notches, in order that 
upon pressure of the levers outward the pawls 
may readily slip out of engagement with the 
hammers and release them to be actuated by 
the springs, and having their free ends pro 
jecting beyond the plane of the rear face of 
the movable frame to be struck and thrown 
out of engagement with the notches. 
Behind the movable frame is the station 
alry frame or the block D, consisting of a 
main, portion d and upright strips or pieces 
d*, confining the shafts at their bearings in 
the frame, the main portion d having a re 
cess or jaw dl, into which the movable frame 
is set, with its grooves upon guide-bars d and 
with its arm in a cleft d. Projecting into 
the jaw from the top and bottom of the block 
are springs d d", which, being opposite the 
recess in the movable frame, are in position 
to act against the locking-levers as required, 
the locking-levers being thrown out of en 
gagement with their notches in the hammers 
by striking against stops dl. Set into the 
block at the rear and at its lower part is the 
main shaft E, having spur gear-wheels e e 
and cranks or crank-bends e et, also a cam 
e, and above the main shaft a second shaft 
F, with spur gear-wheels ff*, the gear-wheels 
e and fand e and f*, respectively, on the two 
shafts intermeshing, cranks f*f* at the ends 
of the shaft, and a crank f between the gear 
wheels or intermediate in the length of the 
shaft, the two shafts being so geared that the 
cranks or crank-bends On the main shaft and 
the cranks on the ends of the second shaft 
will be respectively in position relatively dia 
metrically opposite, and the cranks carrying 
links G. G, which turn on them at one end 
(the rear end) and at the other end take over 
the pins on the hammer-heads, the cranks on 
the main shaft bearing the links which take 
over the pins on the head of the lower ham 
mer and those on the second shaft carrying 
the links which take over the pins om the 
head of the upper hammer. It will be ob 
vious that as the main shaft revolves the 
hammers will be drawm back one after the 
other by the links. Upon the intermediate 
crank of the second shaft is journaled a b0X 
f, into which an arm b7 passes through the 
cleft dl, the box sliding slightly but freely on 
the arm. It will be obvious that as the Sec 
ond shaft is turned and its intermediate crank 
or crank-bend revolves with its box the arm 
will be moved up and down, carrying with it 
the movable frame, which is in this manner 
moved up and down, whereby the hammers 
by it carried will be reciprocated, and there 
will be a period of rest at the end of each 
movement up or down before the opposite 
movement begins, it being clear that the pe 
riod of rest may be made. greater or less by 
well-known meansfor example, greater by 
having the box larger in vertical diameter 
than the end of the arm. 
As already described, the stems of the ham 
mers are provided near their ends with 
notches and the movable frame with pawls. 
Now the intermediate crank on the second 
shaft is so set that when the upper hammer 
is drawn back, with its spring or springs com 
pressed to the fullest extent, the movable 
frame will be at its uppermost limit of mo 
tion, bringing the upper pawlor pawls against 
the upper pawl spring or springs and forcing 
the pawls into the notch or notches of the up 
per hammer, retaining it until, upon move 
ment of the frame in its contrary direction, 
about centrally, the pawl or pawls will strike 
against the stop on the stationary frame, and, 
releasing the stem or stems, the upper ham 
mer will be shot forward by the actuating 
spring or springs to deliver its blow, while 
when the lower hammer is drawn back, with 
its spring or springs compressed to the fullest 
extent, the movable frame will be at its low 
ermost limit of motion, bringing the lower 
pawl or pawls against the lower pawl spring 
or springs and forcing the pawl into the notch 
or notches of the lower hammer, retaining it 
until, upon movement of the frame in the con 
trary direction, about centrally, the pawl or 
pawls will strike against the projection on the 
stationary frame, and, releasing the stem or 
stems, the lower hammer will be shot forward 
by the actuating spring or springs to deliver 
its blow. Otherwise stated, the shafts are so 
geared with each other that they actupon the 
respective actuating - springs through their 
cranks and connecting-links alternately, and 
the box mounted on the shaft is so arranged 
75 
95 
I O O 
I I O 
II 5 
I 2 O 
I 25 
TO 
35 
55 
 
8 
440,745 
5 E 
75 
| 
with relation to the other moving parts of the || striking device composed of two hammers re 
machine and its operation is so timed that i ciprocating in the direction of impact and 
each hammer, respectively, is at the outward || also in a line crossing that of impact, mech 
limit of the motion of the frame farthest re- || anism, for imparting the desired movements 
moved from the drill-tool or part holding the | to the striking mechanism, a drill-tool, and a 
drill-tool when its spring is compressed and | rock-shaft connected to the drill-tool or to a 
the notch in the hammer is entered by its | part holding a drill-tool by a ratchet-feed and 
pawl, and it is carried to a point opposite the | receiving motion from the operating mech 
drill-tool when its locking-lever is moved from | anism of the striking device. 
the hammer releasing it. 
3. In a rock-drilling machine comprising a 
It may be here noted that delivery of a blow || striking device composed of two hammers re 
takes place at a time when the reciprocating- || ciprocating in the direction of impact and 
ly-moving frame, having reached its extreme || also in a line crossing that of impact, mech 
position in one direction or the other, is about | anism for imparting the desired movements 
to retrace its coursethat is, at a moment | to the striking device, a standard upon which 
when it is deprived of motion having nomo- || the machine is mounted, a connection be 
tion either in one direction or the other. The | tween the standard and the operating mech 
delivery of the blow being practically instan- || anism of the striking device, and a screw re 
taneous under the quick action of the springs, i ceiving motion from the operating mechan 
it may be said that the movement of the ham- | ism and imparting a longitudinal movement 
mer at that time is all in one directionthat | to the connection, substantially as described. 
4. In a rock-drilling machine comprising a 
is, in the direction of the object to be struck. 
The advantage of reciprocation of the op- || striking device composed of two hammers re 
ciprocating in the direction of impact and 
erative part to and from the line of direction 
also in a line crossing that of impact, mech 
of its action is, first, that by reciprocation 
anism for imparting the desired movements 
more than one hammer can be employed, in 
to the striking device, a standard upon which 
stead of having to use a single hammer, thus 
the machine is mounted, a longitudinally 
dividing the labor and consequent wear and 
tear, and, secondly, that by reciprocation or 
movable connection between the standard 
and the operating mechanism, and a clutch 
alternation as distinguished from constant 
attaching the connection to the operating 
motion onward or succession a period of rest 
mechanism, substantially as described. 
is afforded at the end of each movement 
5. In a rock-drilling machine comprising a 
namely, just before returnand just then the 
striking can be performed. 
striking device composed of two hammers re 
ciprocating in the direction of impact and 
It will be obvious that the screw device 
may be employed for causing the striking de 
also in a line crossing that of impact, mech 
anism for imparting the desired movements 
vice to advance or recede by itself. 
to the striking device, a standard upon which 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
the machine is mounted, a longitudinally 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
movable connection between the Standard 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a rock-drilling machine comprising a 
and the operating mechanism, a clutch at 
taching the connection to the operating mech 
striking device composed of two hammers re 
anism, a drill-tool holder having a limited 
ciprocating in the direction of impact and 
longitudinal movement, and a connection be 
also in a line crossing that of the impact, 
mechanism for imparting the desired move 
tween the tool-holder and the clutch, sub 
stantially as described. 
ments to the striking mechanism, a drill-tool, 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
and a rock-shaft connected to the drill-tool 
presence of two witnesses. 
or to a part holding a drill-tool and receiv 
EUGNE MOREAU. 
ing motion from the operating mechanism of 
the striking device, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. In a rock-drilling machine comprising a 
R. G. DYRENFORTH, 
T. B. KEEFER. 
Witnesses: 
95 
I O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440845.txt	2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
C. H. HERRICK, 
ELECTRIC SWITCH, 
Patented Nov. 18, 1890, 
(No Model.) 
No. 440,845. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
(Z- ????????"( 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES HUBBARD HERRICK, OF WINCHESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ELECTRIC SWITCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,845, dated November 18, 1890. 
Application filed August 19, 1890, Serial No. 362,399, (No model.) 
5 
? ? 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
To all, whom it may concern 
Beitknown that I, CHARLESHUBBARD HER 
RICK, of Winchester, county of Middlesex, 
State of Massachusetts, have invented an Im 
provement in Electric Switches or Cut-Outs, 
of which the following description, in connec 
tion with the accompanying drawings, is a 
Specification, like letters on the drawings 
representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object the pro 
duction of a simple, effective, and compact 
electric switch or cut-out. 
In accordance with this invention the usual 
base has a suitable bearing for tha support 
of a rotatable spindle, on which is mounted a 
sliding Spring-controlled disk or plate, pref 
erably of insulating material, provided upon 
One of its faces with a series of ratchet-teeth 
and adapted to co-operate with contacts se 
cured to the base to make and break an elec 
tric circuit. The conducting-faces of any 
tWO or more teeth may be electrically con 
nected, so that when the spindle is rotated 
the current will be alternately permitted to 
paSS from one contact to the other through 
the said conducting-faces or will be inter 
rupted or broken by the insulated teeth, as 
Will be described. 
One part of my invention therefore con 
sists in the combination, with the base and a 
rotatable Spindle carried thereby, of a spring 
Controlled disk mounted to rotate with and 
to slide on the said spindle and provided with 
a Series of ratchet-teeth and co-operating 
fixed contacts, to operate substantially as will 
be described. 
Other features of my invention will be here 
inafter described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
Figure 1 is a pel'spective view of a switch 
embodying this invention; Fig. 1, a side elle 
Vation of the same; Fig. 2, a view similar to 
Fig. 1, showing the spindle partially rotated; 
Fig. 3, a plan view of the base; Figs. 4 and 5, 
details to be referred to, and Figs, G to 11. 
modifications to be described. 
Referring to the drawings, the base A, of 
desired shape and preferably of insulating 
material, has a suitable bearing for the sup 
port of the vertical spindle C, herein shown 
as held in place by a nut a', (see Fig. 1) and 
the said spindle is provided at its upper end 
With a suitable handle C*. 
A disk or plate b, preferably of insulating 
material, is mounted to slide on the spindle 
Cl, the said disk being provided with keys 2, 
which enter and slide in the longitudinal 
splines or grooves 3 in the said spindle, (see 
Figs. 1, 4, and 5,) to thus cause the disk to 
rotate with the spindle and at the same time 
permit, a movement longitudinally thereon. 
The disk or plate b has arranged radially 
upon its lower face a series of ratchet-teeth 
b', herein represented as four in number, 
which co-operate with the fixed beveled con 
tacts c c', secured to the base A and provided. 
with binding-screws c, to which are con 
nected tlne line-wires. 
Asherein represented, every alternate tooth 
b' on the insulated disk U is fitted with a me 
tallic or other conducting-face 5, secured by 
screws 6, passed through the said disk from a 
plate l upon the upper face thereof, (see 
Figs. 1 and 2.) thus electrically connecting, 
as shown, the opposite conducting-faces 5 
through the said screws and plate b. 
A spiral or other spring dis interposed be 
tween the handle Cl* and the disk b to thus 
keep the said disk firmly pressed upon the 
contacts c c'. 
In practice the line-wires 16 are connected 
to the binding-screws c, (see Fig. 3,) and as 
suming the various parts to be in the posi 
tion shown in Fig. 1, with the current pass 
ing from one side of the line to the other 
through the connected conducting-faces 5, the 
operation of my improved Switch is as follows: 
As the spindle C is rotated by means of the 
handle ct, 
in the direction of arrow 20, the 
disk to is caused to rotate with it, the inclined 
faces of the ratchet-teeth b' acting against 
the inclined fixed contacts c c', causing the 
said disk to move upward on the spindle ct, 
compressing tille spring dl, as shoWYn in Fig. 2. 
Further rotation of the spindle causes the 
teeth upon the disk to be carried by or be 
yond the contacts C c', when the spring will 
immediately force said disk down to its nor 
mal position, this time with the insulated 
teeth of the disk in contact with the contacts 
c c', thus interrupting or breaking the cir 
cuit through the switch. By again rotating 
90 
IOC 
 
2 
440,845 
the spindle one tooth in the same direction 
the circuit may again be established in pre 
cisely the same manner as described. As the 
teeth are moved practically instantaneously 
into and out of contact with the contacts c c', 
the formation of an arc is impossible, and the 
contacting-faces are always kept bright and 
clean by the rubbing action of one surface 
upon the other. 
If desired, I may provide the contacting 
conducting-faces of the ratchet-teeth and of 
the fixed contacts with flexible or yielding 
plates 15 to insure a perfect contact between 
the two surfaces. 
The construction hereinbefore described is 
adapted for what are commonly termed 
single-pole switches; but my improved con 
struction is equally adapted to double-pole' 
switches, (see Fig. 6,) wherein two contacts 9 
and 10 are provided in place of each contact 
c c" described, the top plate b in this con 
struction being omitted, so that when the 
switch is in the position shown in Fig. 1 the 
current will pass from the contact 9 to the 
contact 10 through the face-plate 5, and when 
rotated a distance of one tooth the insulated 
tooth Will break the connection from one con 
tact to the other. 
In practice the operating parts will be in 
closed in a case h. (Shown by dotted lines, 
Figs. 1 and 2.) 
It is obvious that the number of teeth, on 
the disk b may be increased or decreased, as 
desired, and that the number and arrange 
ment of contacts on the base may also be as 
desired to accommodate the switch to various 
classes of work. 
I have herein shown the alternate teeth as 
made conducting and non-conducting; but I 
desire it to be understood that all the teeth 
may be made conducting, as shown in Figs. S, 
S', and 9, to adapt the switch to other classes 
of work-as, for instance, when it is desired 
to keep a light or series of lights continually 
lighted, or where a continuous current is re 
quired for some purpose-such as charging 
storage-cells--it is desirable to have two gen 
erators, either one of which may be thrown 
into or out of circuit at will. 
Referring to Figs. 8, 8, and 9, the base A 
has a Series of contacts, shown as six in num 
ber, wires 2021 being attached to two of the 
contacts, said wires leading to a light or se 
ries of lightS or to a storage-cell, and the wires 
22 23, attached to two other contacts, and lead 
ing to a generator, and wires 24 25, attached 
to the remaining two contacts, leading to an 
other generator. The toothed disk b (shown 
separately in Fig. 9) has its teeth electrically 
connected in pairs by plates b, and screws 6, 
as shown, and when said disk is in position 
shown in the drawings the current from the 
generator entering over the wires 22 23 will 
pass out over the wires 2021 to the lights or 
to the storage-cell, the wires 24 25 being cut 
off from the wires 2021; but by rotating the 
disk bone tooth in the direction of arrow the 
wires 22 23 are cut off from the wires 2021, 
and the wires 24 25, leading from the other 
generator, are electrically connected with the 
wires 20 21. 
Referring to Figs. 10 and 11 yet anotherar 
rangementis illustrated. The Wire 30, secured 
to one contact, is the positive Wire leading 
from a generator, and the two negative wires 
3132, secured to two other contacts, return to 
the generator, each including in its line, for 
instance, a certain proportion of the lights in 
one large chandelier. As shown, all the lights 
are cut out; but by rotating the diskb in the 
direction of the arrow one tooth the lightS on 
wire 31 would be cut in, and further rotation 
one tooth would cut in additionally the lights 
on wire 32. 
While I have shown these modifications as 
an illustration of some of the uses to which 
my improved switch may be applied, still I 
do not desire to limit this invention to these 
alone, as by varying the number and arrange 
ment of contacts and teeth upon the disks 
the switch may be adapted to almost any Val 
riety of work desired. 
Instead of the construction herein shown, 
wherein the ratchet-shaped contacts lift the 
disk b, I may employ a construction Such as, 
is shown in Fig. 7, wherein an independent 
ratchet m, lifts the disk, the conducting teeth 
or faces of the said disk extending beyond 
the ratchet in sufficiently far to make and 
break contact with independent contacts in, 
it being possible by this arrangement to make 
the contacts in flexible or spring-like, which 
is frequently desirable. 
In lieu of the cylindrical spindle having 
the disk splined thereon, I may employ a 
square or other than round spindle with the 
disk fitted to slide on it, or a slotted Spindle, 
the disk having a pin which passes through 
the slot. Therefore I do not desire to limit 
this invention to the particular shape and 
construction of the various parts shown, as 
the same may be varied without departing 
from the scope of the invention, the gist of 
the invention lying in the vertically-movable 
disk or plate, which may be provided with two 
or more contacts to be moved over and to co 
operate with fixed contacts of the base; 
neither do I desire to limit my invention to 
the particular application herein shown, as 
the same is applicable to a variety of uses. 
I claim 
1. The herein-described switch, consisting, 
essentially, of the base A, fixed contacts 
thereon, a disk provided with ratchet-teeth, a 
rotatable spindle on which the said disk is 
mounted to slide vertically, and a Spring, the 
rotation of the spindle taking with it the disk 
and moving the same over the said contacts, 
the parts operating substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the base A, the 
fixed contacts thereon, and the rotatable 
spindle carried by said base, of a disk b, 
splined on the said spindle and provided 
with a series of alternately - arranged insul 
7 o 
75 
90 
95 
Oc 
O 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
65 
440,845 
3 
lated and conducting teeth, and a spring to 
force said disk upon the said contacts, sub 
stantially as described. 
8. The base A and ratchet-tooth-shaped 
contacts c c' thereon, combined with the spin 
dle a, the ratchettoothed disk b, splined there 
on, the plate l', face-plates 5, and screws 6, 
and the spring d, to operate substantially as 
described. 
4. The combination, with the base anda se 
ries of ratchet tooth-shaped contacts thereon, 
of a rotatable spindle, and a spring-controlled 
d 
- 
plate mounted to rotate with and to slide on. 
the said spindle, said plate having three or 
more circumferentially-arranged contacts, to 15 
operate substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
CHARLES HUBBARD HERRICK. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. II. CHURCHILL, 
EDWARD F. ALLEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US440945.txt	(No Model.) 
P. M. DE WITT. 
BUTTON FOR; BILLIARD COUNTERS, 
No. 440,945, 
Patented NOW, 18, 1890. 
2275. 
N a 
 
2. 
wm-K 
/*7 2 676.2 
$233,235. 
-titorney P 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILLIP MELVIN DE WITT, OF MIDLAND, TEXAS. 
BUTTON FOR BARD COUNTERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 440,945, dated November 18, 1890. 
Application filed July 1, 1890, Serial No. 357,376 (No model.) 
To all, whom it nudly concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILLIP MELVIN DE 
WITT, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Midland, in the county of Midland and State 
of Texas, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Buttons for Billiard 
Counters; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention has relation to improve 
ments in that class of devices known as but 
tons for billiard-counters; and it consists in 
the novel construction and arrangement of 
parts of which it is composed, all as will be 
hereinafter more fully explained. 
The annexed drawings, to which reference 
is made, fully illustrate my invention, in 
which-e 
Figure 1 represents a face view of my de 
vice. Fig.2 is a vertical sectional view of the 
same. Fig. 3 is also a face view of my device, 
showing the same slightly modified; and Fig. 
4 is also a face view showing the device in 
modified form. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, Adesignates a billiard-counter but 
ton, which is designed to be strung upon Wire 
in the usual vertical position for sliding there 
on. This button is constructed with the central 
opening a, through which the Wire is passed, 
and a slot or opening b, which communicates 
with the central. opening and extends out 
wardly to the periphery of said button, thus 
forming a passage for the wire, which, when 
the button is applied, enters the mouth or 
outer portion of this passage and is carried 
therein to the central opening. This button 
is provided with a longitudinal opening c 
about its center and to one side of the Cen 
tral opening aforesaid, and in which perfo 
ration is inserted a pin d, that passes acroSS 
the passage or slot and thereby closing the 
same, thus preventing accidential displace 
ment of said button, at the same time permit 
ting it to move freely upon a wire. 
It will be readily observed from the above 
35 
45 
In Fig. 3 I show my device in modified form, 6o 
description and by reference to the annexed 
drawings that a button constructed as I here- 5o 
in show and describe can be readily strung 
upon the wire by withdrawing the pin and 
passing the wire through the passage, after 
which the pin is again inserted, closing said 
passage, thereby holding the button thereon, 55 
and should a button be broken it can be re 
moved and another substituted readily with 
out disturbing the wire or the other buttons 
thereon. 
wherein. I dispense with the pin and its per 
foration, and instead I insert a block or plug 
e of suitable material into the passage, which 
can be easily removed when necessary, and 
at the same time serves to keep the wire in 65 
the central opening. In Fig. 4 I also show 
my device in still another form-that instead 
of the pin and block I employ a semicircular 
plate f, which is pivoted to one side of the 
central opening on the face of the button, 7o 
while the opposite end of said plate is held 
in position by a pin, which can be removed 
from said end and allowing the plate to Swing 
to one side of the passage, thus permitting the 
button to be removed from said wire, and 75 
when this plate is in its normal position the 
wire is kept in the central opening, as the 
plate crosses the passage on the face of said 
button, and it is simple in operation, easily 
and quickly applied to a wire, and at the same 8o 
time cheap to manufacture. 
What I claim is 
The within - described button having the 
transverse Opening and passage extending 
therefrom to the periphery thereof and com- 85 
municating with said opening and the longi 
tudinal hole in close proximity to the trans 
verse opening, and the pin adapted to engage 
said hole, whereby the button is removably 
secured to a wire, substantially as described. 9o 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
PHILLIP MELVIN DE WITT, 
Witnesses: 
J. S. COE, 
JOHN M. MOODY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441045.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 441,045. 
P. WHITE, 
WATER CLOSET, 
Patented Nov. 18, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
N 
2222 
Zazzazz 
a 
a 
Z242-2, 777zz 
a 7272/3-1 
as 
4%f 
the Norris Peters co, Photo-IT-d. WAStingtoN, C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER WHITE, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
WATER CLOSET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,045, dated November 18, 1890, 
Application filed March 31, 1890, Serial No, 346,060, (No model.) 
- 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
the tank or cistern C, as shown in Fig. 2. The 
Be it known that I, PETER WHITE, of the 
water in its passage from the tank to the bowl 
city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have 
is controlled by means of a valve H, located 
in a housing I, situated in the pipe D. The 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
inside arrangement of the housing is illus 
ment in Water-Closets, of which the follow. 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description, ref 
trated in Figs. 3 and 4, it having a seat J for 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
the valve H and a chamber or cylinder K, lo 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
cated over the valve. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
L represents the stem of the valve, which 
extends through a stuffing-box M, and to the 
ments in Water-closets; and my invention con 
sists in features of novelty hereinafter fully 
lower end of which a lever Nissecured. The 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
lever N has two arms, one being pivoted to the 
pipe D, (preferably to thatportion of the pipe 
Figure 1 is an illustration of my invention, 
part in side view and part in section. Fig.2 
D upon which the housing I is formed.) and 
S is a detail view, part in elevation and part in 
the other is formed at an angle to the first, 
Section, showing a portion of the tank or cis 
so that it will rest against the pipe D and 
tern of the closet, a portion of the discharge 
parallel there with, out of the way when not 
pipe, through which the water passes from 
in use. The stem L extends above the valve, 
and upon its upper end is secured a piston 
the tank or cistern to the bowl, and showing 
also the portion of the foul-air pipe, with its 
O, which fits and works in the cylinder K. 
The piston O has a downturned cup-leather P. 
float-valve, which is located within the tank 
Q represents a small port or passage form 
or cistern. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged section 
through the main valve and its housing. Fig. 
ing a communication between the upper end 
4 is a similar view showing the valve open, 
of the cylinder and the interior of the hous 
it being shown closed in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 illus 
ing beneath the piston, the size of this port 
or passage being controlled by means of a 
trates a modification. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
screw or other suitable Valve R. 
S represents a pipe extending from the air 
bowl of a closet having the usual air-cham 
chamber B of the bowl in an upward di 
ber B. 
Crepresents the tank or cistern, which com 
rection, and entering the tank extends up 
municates with the bowl through a discharge 
Ward therein and is formed with an un 
pipe D, the latter extending directly from the 
broken return-bend T, thus forming a siphon 
bottom of the tank, whereby it (the pipe) will 
Whose shorter leg extends in a downward di 
be permanently filled with water without the 
rection Within the tank and terminates near 
employment of a siphon or other means for 
the bottom of the tank over the upper end. 
of the pipe D. (See Figs, 1 and 2.) Within 
this purpose, and its connection with the tank 
the tank this pipe S is perforated at U, and 
is preferably direct, for the further reason 
this perforation is controlled by a valve V, 
that such connection gives a maximum of 
pressure in the pipe D, whereas the pressure 
secured to one arm of a bell-crank lever W, 
of a siphonic flow through said pipe would 
to the other arm of which a float Xis secured. 
only be equal to the weight of the water 
The lever is pivoted at Y to the pipe. 
The operation is as follows: When the bowl 
within the pipe itself minus the weight of the W 
water in the short leg of the siphon. 
is to be flushed, the lever N is moved out 
E represents a pipe, through which the wa 
Wardly from the pipe D from the position 
shown in Fig. 3 to or toward the position 
ter enters the tank or cistern C, and F repre 
sents a valve controlling the pipe E, and 
shown in Fig. 4. This lifts the valve H from 
which is provided with a float G, as usual. 
its seat, allowing the Water to pass from the . 
The operation of the valve F and its float 
tank or cistern through the pipe D into the 
is well understood and needs no explanation, 
bowl. As the valve is raised, the piston O is 
The upper end of the pipe D is open, hav-i moved upwardly in the chamber or cylinder K, 
ing a free communication with the interior of the water above the piston escaping through 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
441,045 
the port or passage Q, and around the piston 
O, past the cup-leather, the cup-leather being 
collapsed or forced inwardly from the walls 
of the cylinder by the pressure of the water. 
When the lever has been thus moved to raise 
the valve, it is released and gradually de 
scends or closes, this movement being regul 
lated by the Water entering the chamber or 
cylinder above the piston through the port Q, 
the cup-leather P preventing an upward flow 
of water past the piston. The duration of 
the flush depends upon the period of time it 
takes the valve to close, and by adjusting the 
yye R. this duration may be regulated at 
W. 
By locating the valve J and its housing in 
the pipe Dit is in a convenient and accessible 
place and within handy reach. 
In Fig. 5 I have shown a modification with 
the valve H and its housing located at the 
tank. With this arrangement the stem L. 
of the valve would be extended downwardly, 
so that its lever N would be within conven 
ient reach. As the bowl is being flushed, the 
foul air in the chamber B is carried down by 
the water. As soon as the flush commences 
the water in the bend T of the pipe S, which 
of course is on a level with the water in the 
tank, passes down the pipe D, creating a suc 
tion in the pipe S, and by purifying the air 
in the chamber B permits the siphonic action 
in the bowl. By providing the pipe S with 
the valve W and float X, located in the tank 
near the bottom, the suction in the pipe 
ceases just as the flush is completed and air 
is permitted to enter the chamber B of the bowl 
to break the siphonic action therein before 
all the water has passed out of the pipe D into 
the bowl, so that a sufficient amount of water 
will be left in the bowl to produce the neces 
sary seal. It will be seen that the water in 
the tank will form a seal, preventing gases 
from escaping from the chamber B through 
the pipe S, and at the same time the pipe S 
prevents an overflow of the tank, as its bend 
Z is beneath the top of the tank, so that the 
water before it will overflow will pass up the 
bend T and down the main part of the pipe 
into the bowl, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with the tank and the 
bowl, of the discharge-pipe D, extending di 
rectly from the bottom of the tank to the 
bowl and forming the Sole communication be 
tween said tank and bowl for permitting the 
Water to flow directly from the bottom of the 
tank downward, a gradually-closing valve in 
said discharge-pipe for entirely shutting off 
communication between the bowl and tank, 
the trap B, the pipe S, of smaller diameter 
than the discharge-pipe, extending from the 
trap and having an upwardly-extending re 
turn-bend in the tank, and a valve V, ar 
ranged in said pipe S near the bottom of the 
tank, said bend being closed throughout its 
whole extent above said valve V, and extend 
ing near the top of the tank, but not above 
it, with its end arranged near the bottom of 
the tank directly over the end of the dis 
charge-pipe, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the tank and the 
bowl, of the discharge-pipe D, extending di- . 
rectly from the bottom of the tank to the 
bowl and forming the sole communication be 
tween said tank and bowl for permitting the 
water to flow directly from the bottom of the 
tank downward, a gradually-closing valve in 
said discharge-pipe for entirely shutting off 
communication between the bowl and tank, 
a lever for opening said Valve having two 
arms, one of its arms being pivoted to the 
pipe D with its other arranged parallel with 
Said pipe, the trap B, the pipe S, of smaller 
diameter than the discharge-pipe, extending 
from the trap and having an upwardly-ex 
tending return-bend in the tank, and a valve 
V, arranged in said pipe S near the bottom of 
the tank, said bend being closed throughout 
its whole extent above said valve V, and ex 
tending near the top of the tank, but not 
above it, with its end arranged near the bot 
tom of the tank directly over the end of the 
discharge-pipe, substantially as set forth. 
PETER WHITE. 
65 
75 
In presence of - 
E. S. KNIGHT, 
A. M. EBERSOLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441146.txt	(Model.) 
W. A. FARMER, 
DEHORNING SEEARS, 
No. 441,146. 
Patented Nov. 25, 1890. 
Wk); iposses: 
has 3yff's allery 
s 
. 
rty/.../armer. 
p?optr 
 
. 
. 
." N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLY ANDERSON FARMER, OF NEBO, ILLINOIS. 
DEHORNING-SHEARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,146, dated November 25, 1890. 
Application filed June 18, 1890, Serial No. 355,863, (Model.) 
To all whon, it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLY ANDERSON 
FARMER, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Nebo, in the county of Pike and State 
of Illinois, have invented new and useful De 
horning-Shears, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention has relation to a device for 
dehorning cattle; and the objects of the in 
vention are to provide a very simple, cheap, 
and durably-constructed device of the above 
class, the same being adapted for removing 
the horns of the cattle without the danger of 
cracking or fracturing the same below the 
cut; furthermore, to accomplish the above 
quickly without aid, all as will hereinafter 
appear in the following description, and be 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is an 
inverted plan view of a dehorning device 
constructed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig.2 is a perspective in detail of the clamp 
ing-jaws. Fig. 3 is a transverse section on the 
line acac, Fig. 4 is a plan view of the skeleton 
frame. Fig. 5 is a detail view of the knife. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings, 
In practicing my invention I provide two 
opposite members, designated as 1 and 2, and 
to the lattersecure a triangular plate or frame 
3, the same being preferably formed open and 
connected at opposite sides by a pair of par 
allel and in cross-section U-shaped guides 4, 
extending transverse the frame. Beyond the 
end of the outer guide 4 the frame is extended, 
forming guiding projections 5, and at the in 
ner side of the frame there is located a lug 6, 
and further along said frame a laterally-dis 
posed triangular plate 7. 
The inner bar 8 of the frame has located 
thereon a transversely-slotted plate 9, and 
through said slot is passed a tongue 10 struck 
up from the bar S. 
11 designates a pair of opposite curved 
clamping plates or arms pivoted at their inner 
ends, as at 12, to the plate 9 at the inner end 
of the guides 4. The outer ends of the plates 
11 have their outer edges cutaway or inclined 
toward each other, as shown at 13, and said 
plates lie and slide upon the plate 7 of the 
frame 3. 
25 
35 
45 
50 
as at 15, to the lug 6, and provided near its 
opposite end with a slot 16, through which 
passes the outer end of the plate 7 and also 
55 
the ends of the plates 11. The plates 11 are 
connected near their pivoted ends by a U 
shaped spring 17, the terminals of which are 
Seated in openings formed in the plates, and 
said springs exert a tendency to separate the 
plates 11 to their fullest extent, as determined 
by the degree of their insertion into the slot 
16. A pair of links 18 embrace the guide-lugs 
5 at opposite sides, and are pivoted, as at 19, 
to the free end of the slotted guide-bar 14. 
20 designates the knife, which is of oblong 
shape and mounted in the opposite guides 4, 
and therefore adapted to reciprocate in said 
guides and over the clamping-arms 11. The 
outer end of the knife is provided with an in 
clined slot 21, through which passes a pin 22, 
connecting the ends of a sleeve 23, which em 
braces a lever 24, pivoted at its outer end to 
the opposite links 18, as at 25, and secured at 
its inner end to the member 1. 
In operating the device the members are 
Separated and the two curved clamping-plates 
inserted over the horn of the animal to a de 
sired depth. The members are then brought 
together, the horn acting as the fulcrum for 
the lever or member 1, in that the knifebears 
upon said horn and serves to draw the links 
18 and the guide-bar 14 toward the knife, so 
that the ends of the slot in said guide-bar 
tend to ride along the opposite converging 
edges of the clamping-plates, and previous to 
the time the cut is made said clamping-plates 
are compressed, SO as to embrace the horns 
snugly at a point just below the plane of the 
knife. In this Way any fracturing or uneven 
ragged cutting of the horn is avoided. 
It will be apparent that the lip 10 may be 
bent upward out of an interlocking position 
with the plate 9 and other plates provided 
with other sizes of horn embracing arms read 
ily substituted and locked in position. When 
the members are separated and the guide-bar 
released, the spring 17 separates the opposite 
curved clamping - plates, and by reason of 
their converging edges riding against the ends 
Of the slot 16 of the bar said bar 4 is forced 
toward the extremities of said plates ready 
for the introduction of the plates over an 
95 
75 
OO 
14 designates a U-shaped guide-bar pivoted, other horn. 
 
441,146 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a dehorner, the combination, with a 
frame provided with opposite transverse 
guides attached to abandle, of a pair of curved 
clamping-plates having opposite converging 
edges, a guide-bar pivoted to the frame and 
slotted to receive the converging edges of the 
clamps, a reciprocating knife mounted in the 
guides, a lever, a link loosely connecting the 
outer end of the lever with that of the guide 
bar, and a sleeve loosely mounted on the lever 
and loosely connected with the knife, substan 
tially as specified. 
2. In a dehorner, the combination, with a 
frame having opposite guides, a reciprocating 
knife mounted in the guides, and a lever piv 
oted to said knife, of a pair of curved clamp 
ing-plates pivoted below the guides, said 
plates having opposite converging edges, a U 
shaped spring pivoted at its terminals to the 
plates and adapted to separate the same, a 
guide-bar pivoted to the frame and slotted to 
receive the ends of the clamping-plates, and 
connections between the guide-bar and the 
outer end of the knife-operating lever, sub 
stantially as specified. 
3. In a dehorner, the combination, with a 
frame having opposite knife-guides, a recip 
rocating knife mounted therein, and means 
for reciprocating the same, of a pair of pivoted 
curved clamping-plates located below the 
knife and detachably secured to the frame, 
and means for closing said plates simultane 
ously with the operation of the knife, sub 
stantially as specified. 
- 
O 
f5 
3o 
35 
- 
4. In a dehorner, the combination, with an 
open frame provided with opposite guides 
and a knife mounted in said guides and pro 
vided with an inclined slot, of a leverloosely 
connected at one end to the frame, a clip or 
sleeve mounted for sliding upon the lever, 
and a pin passing through the clip and adapted 
for movement in the slot of the knife, sub 
stantially as specified. 
5. In a dehorner, the combination, with the 
frame having the opposite guides and the 
Struck-up tongue below the same, of the trans 
versely-slotted plate 9, the opposite curved 
clamping-plates 11, pivoted, as at 12, to said 
plate, a knife mounted for reciprocation in 
the guides, and mechanism, substantially as 
described, for simultaneously operating the 
clamping-plates and knife, substantially as 
specified. 
6. In a dehorner, the frame having opposite 
guides and secured to a handle, combined 
With a pair of curved clamping-plates, a slot 
ted guide-bar for receiving the ends of said 
plates, a knife mounted for reciprocation in 
the guides of the frame, a lever loosely con 
nected to the knife, and connecting devices 
between the lever and guide-bar, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
65 
WILLY ANDERSON FARMER. 
Witnesses: 
J. T. HARVEY, 
C. A. FARMER, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441246.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 441,246, 
C. A. LIEB, 
ARMATURE BODY, 
Patented Nov. 25, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
????) 
//I///EN 
?????? 
AITORNEY 
the nostis PETERs co, Photo-Litho, wash;Natch, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. LIEB, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ARMATURE-BODY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,246, dated November 25, 1890. 
Application filed September 18, 1890, serial No. 365,56l. (No model.) 
55 
?? 
To al? ?v???, it ??? ???cer?: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES A. LIEB, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of New York city, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Arnature 
|????fics, of which the following is a specifica 
Ol. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
armature bodies and shafts for dynamo-elec 
tric machines; and it consists in the construc 
tion, arrangement, and combination of the 
parts, as hereinafter set forth. 
In the drawings the same reference-letters 
indicate the same parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 illustrates a longitudinal section 
of the armature-body, its shaft being shown 
in elevation. Fig. 2 illustrates an end eleva 
ation of the armature-body. Fig. 3illustrates 
an elevation, partly in section, of an alter 
native construction of the stay-rods which 
are employed to bind the outer portions of 
the disks together. 
A is the shaft. 
B is the armature-body. It is composed of 
disks of metal C and insulating material D, 
all as usual. 
E is a tube, preferably of brass, which is 
passed or forced through a hole made in all 
the disks. 
The end plates FF of the armature-body 
are or may be reamed or countersunk, as at 
G, and the ends of the brass tube are ex 
panded and forcibly turned back into the 
reamed-out or countersunk parts, while the 
disks are forcibly pressed together. Thus 
this central tube serves not only as a box or 
bushing for the armature-shaft, but it also 
firmly binds the disks together and does away 
with the shoulder and nut both on the shaft, 
now usually employed as a means of pressing 
and holding the disks together. 
His an inwardly-projecting annular ring, 
which is secured either to the central tube E 
or to the shaft; or, as I ordinarily prefer, it 
may be an integral part of the tube or of the 
shaft, thus avoiding joints. Its function is 
to prevent contact of the shaft with the tube, 
except at its central portion, so that any 
change of form which the armature-body 
may undergo will not be transmitted to the 
shaft, and in this way bending or twisting of 
the shaft is avoided. Of course the connec 
tion between the armature and the shaft 
through the part H is such that there will be 
no slipping. 
I do not limit myself to the above-described 
means of connecting the armature and the 
shaft. It (the shaft) may take a bearing on 
the tube throughout, if preferred. Nor do I 
limit myself to brass as a metal frame from 
It may be 
which the tube is to be made. 
being 
made of any other suitable material, 
insulated, if desired. 
II, &c., are stay rods or bolts, which pass 
through the disks between the shaft and 
their periphery to bind the disks or plates 
more firmly together. These I use especially 
in large machines. They may be made of 
tubes, the same as the central tube E, but 
preferably smaller, or they may be solid rods. 
If of brass, they need not be insulated; but I 
prefer to make them of solid iron rods, as 
shown at I, Fig. 3. Ibore out the ends of the 
rods, as shown at KIK, leaving a relatively 
thin edge L, which can be readily expanded 
into the countersunk part M of the outer 
plates or disks in the same manner that the 
ends of the central tube or bushing is. 
In Fig. 3 I show the solid rod I with one 
end expanded into the countersunk hole in 
the end plate of the armature-body and the 
other end left straight, as it appears before 
expanding. 
It is not essential that the holes in the out 
side plates or disks should be countersunk. 
I prefer them to be, however. The metal of 
the tubes or rods may be expanded over onto 
the flat surface of the plates or disks; but 
this does not make so finished a job. I also 
sometimes expand the tubes after insertion 
in the holes through the disks throughout 
their entire length, thus by friction holding 
each individual metallic disk C in its proper 
place, thus preventing shifting or turning 
thereof. If this construction be employed, it 
will not always be necessary to expand the 
ends of the tubes. 
I do not limit myself to the details of con 
struction shown, since they may be Somewhat 
departed from and still the essentials of my 
invention be employed. 
? ? 
15 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
75 
95 
OC, 
 
g 
441,246 
O 
I claim 
1. An armature-body comprising, essen 
tially, a series of disks of iron and insulat 
ing material and a tube passing through the 
center thereof, the ends of which are turned 
Over and expanded against the outermost 
plates or disks, substantially as set forth. 
2. An armature - body comprising, essen 
tially, a series of disks of iron and insulating 
material, a tube passing through the center 
thereof, the ends of which are turned over or 
eXpanded against the outermost plates or 
disks, and a ring or projection between and 
Connecting the interior of the tube and the 
shaft, substantially as set forth. 
3. An armature-body comprising, essen 
tially, a series of disks of iron and insulating 
material, a tube passing through the center 
thereof, the ends of which are turned over or 
expanded against the outer plates or disks, 
and stay-rods between the central tube and 
the periphery of the disks, the ends whereof 
are also turned over or expanded against the 
15 
 
25 
outer plates or disks, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. An armature - body having its several 
disks held together by means of a centrally 
disposed hollow tube, the ends whereof are 
turned over or expanded against the outer 
most plates or disks, Substantially as set 3o 
forth. 
5. An armature-body having its Several 
plates or disks held together by stay-rods of 
solid metal, the ends whereof are turned over 
or expanded against the outermost plates or 35 
disks, and a central tube having a ring or 
projection between and connecting its inte 
rior and the shaft, substantially as set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 12th day 4o 
of September, A. D. 1890. 
CHIARTILES A. ILIEB. 
Witnesses: 
PHILLIPS ABBOTT, 
FREDERICKSMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441346.txt	(No Model.) 
a- 
No. 441346, 
T. S. W. ATR OUS. 
ROAD CART, 
Patented Nov. 25, 1890. 
w 
 
 
 
f 
CH 
SSS NSI 
 
 
24-26-4 
6%.2% at 
21ZZorzend 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS S. WATROUs, OF PENNY AN, NEW YORK. 
ROAD . CART. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,346, dated November 25, 1890. 
Application filed July 12, 1890, Serial No. 358,570, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS S. WATROUs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Penn 
Yan, in the county of Yates and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Road-Carts; and Idohereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to two-wheeled vehi 
cles or road-carts. 
The object of my invention is to improve 
the riding qualities of said vehicles by reduc 
ing the so-called horse motion to a mini 
mum in a simple and effective manner. 
The invention has special reference to the 
attachment of the thills or shafts to the axle, 
and is designed as an improvement upon 
the invention for which Letters Patent No. 
427,939 were granted to me May 13, 1890, or 
So much of said patent as relates hereto, and 
which consists in the combination of the sev 
eral parts comprising the thill or shaft at 
tachment, whereby the desired object is at 
tained, as will appear from the following de 
scription and claim, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which only 
such parts of the vehicle are shown as is 
necessary to illustrate my invention, and in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved thill 
or shaft attachment for road-carts. Fig. 2 is 
a vertical cross-section of the same, taken on 
the plane indicated by the dotted line ac ac, 
Fig. 3 is a plan view of my improved 
Fig. 1. 
thill or shaft attachment for road-carts. 
Referring to the drawings, Adesignates the 
axle; B, the thills or shaft; C, the front spring 
plate; C, the rear spring-plate; D, the clip or 
yoke securing the parts to the axle and the 
spring-plates together; E, the strap-bolt by 
which the end of the thillor shaft is connected 
to the rear spring-plate. C. C. are bolts secur 
ing the front spring-plate to the thills or shaft. 
In carrying out my invention the spring is 
preferably made of two pieces C and C, which 
overlap each other over the top of the axle to 
C. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
give greater strength for the insertion of the 
clip D. The front spring-plate C extendslon 
gitudinally along the upper side of the thills 
or shaft Band is bolted firmly thereto. The 
rear spring-plate C extends down past the 
end of the thills or shaft and is connected 
thereto by means of the strap-bolt and nut E, 
the connection being loosely formed to allow 
for the ordinary vibration of the thills with 
out contact of the parts. The spring-plates C 
C are solidly attached to the upper side of 
the axle by means of the clip D, and are bent 
downward to sustain and support the thills 
or shaft under the axle and out of contact 
there with. 
It will be observed that the combination, as 
described, is peculiarly adapted to give the 
desired result, the resilient qualities of the at 
tachment being such that under the ordinary 
conditions of travel the vibrations or horse 
motion of the thills will not be imparted to 
the axle and to the body of the cart or vehicle. 
In my former patent, already referred to, 
the location of the thills or shaft in relation 
to the spring attachment is such that a Sud 
den forward jerk or movement of the horse 
tends to cause the body of the vehicle to tip 
or fall back, and which is obviated by my 
present invention, thereby securing greater 
steadiness and freedom from a rocking Imo 
tion. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
In a vehicle of the kind described, the com 
bination of the spring-plates C C, formed or 
bent as described, the forward end of which 
is solidly attached to the thills or shafts B 
and the rearward end of said spring-plate per 
forated and adapted to form a loose connec 
tion with the ends of said thills or shaft by 
means of the strap-bolt E, the said spring 
plate also adapted to be solidly attached to 
the axle A, as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
THOS. S. WATROUS. 
Witnesses: 
A. C. HARWICK, 
S. W. SMITH. 
 
8 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441446.txt	(No Model.) 
F. M., SIMS 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
AMP FOR BURNING HEAWYHYDRO CARBON OIS. 
No. 441446, 
Patented Nov. 25, 1890. 
 
G1. 
EC 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 441446. 
F. M. SIMS 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
LAMP FOR BURNING HEAVY HYDROCARBON OILs. 
Patented Nov. 25, 1890. 
65. 
a 
Pra:4. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS M. SIMS, OF MANCHESTER, ASSIGNOR TO MORITZ BLUMANN, OF 
LONDON, ENGLAND. 
LAMP FOR BURNING HEAVY HYDROCARBON oils. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,446, dated November 25, 1890, 
Application filed September 3, 1889, Serial No,322,890, (No model.) Patented in England July 3, 1889, No. 10,724, 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS MONTAGUE 
SIMS, a Subject of the Queen of Great Britain 
and Ireland, residing at Manchester, in the 
County of Lancaster, England, have invented 
Improvements in Lamps for Burning Heavy 
Hydrocarbon Oils, which improvements are 
also applicable to other purposes wherein it 
is desirable to maintain a fluid at a constant 
level, (for which I have obtained Letters Pat 
ent in Great Britain, No. 10,724, dated July 
E.") of which the following is a specifica 
02, 
This invention relates especially to appli 
ances designed for burning heavy hydrocar 
bon oils-such, for example, as those found 
in the Russian Empire, in the Province of 
Burmah, and elsewhere-the specific gravity 
of which is such that they cannot be burned 
in ordinary lamps employed for burning the 
lighter kinds of hydrocarbon oils, as the cap 
illary attraction is too weak to cause them to 
ascend the wick, and for this reason their 
use has hitherto been confined principally to 
lubricating purposes. In burning oils of this 
class, beyond the question of the form of 
burner and the regulation of the draft, the 
primary requisite (as the heavy oil will not 
ascend the wick, excepting for a very short 
distance by capillary attraction) is to provide 
means whereby the level of the oil in the 
burner can be automatically maintained at a 
point perfectly constant, or as nearly so as 
possible, and this level must be only a short 
distance below the burning portion of the 
wick, so that the capillarity of the wick may 
be practically a constant force, in order that 
the wick shall be kept at all times sufficiently 
supplied with oil, at the same time that there 
shall be no danger of the flooding' or over 
flowing of the oil. The maintaining of the 
oil in the wick-holder at a constantlevel is a 
most important feature, because any varia 
tions of the level of the oil in the burner will 
cause corresponding fluctuations in the light, 
as will be well understood by any competent 
person. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
illustrates the general arrangement by which 
I propose to effect the desired result, the oil 
reservoir being shown in section. Figs. 2, 
2, 3, and 4 are detached sectional elevations 
of various modifications of the overflow 
chamber D, hereinafter more particularly re 
ferred to. 
A is an oil-reservoir, which is air-tight and 
is placed at some distance above the level of 
the burner B. 
C is the supply-pipe, which proceeds from 
the bottom of the reservoir. 
As in this pneumatic system the air enter 
ing the reservoir to supply the place of the 
oil withdrawn therefrom (be the quantity 
small or great) is subject to the law appli 
cable to air and gases, that the force With 
which it seeks to expand is equal to the com 
pressing force and, inversely, as to the space 
which it Occupies, I have, in addition to keep 
ing the oil at a constant level, to provide 
means for the absorption of an excess and 
varying quantity of oil, due to the fact that 
the oil issuing from the reservoir is greater 
in bulk than the air which entered the res 
ervoir, which would tend both to disturb the 
level and to cause an overflow. 
In order to apply my improved principle to 
any existing pipes or gasoliers or other simi 
lar fittings, I may proceed either, first, by di 
viding the pipe Cabove the level of the burner 
B, or, second, by leaving the pipe uncut, if 
preferred. In either case the lower portion 
of the supply-pipe is bent upward, and the 
wick-holder is attached to the end thereof. 
The former case (wherein I divide the pipe C 
above the level of the burner) is illustrated 
by the detached section, Fig. 2, which is drawn 
to a larger scale. Inside the lower end of the 
pipe C, (below the cut.) I insert a short inner 
tube (t, of tapering form, its upper end fitting 
air and liquid tight into the Supply-pipe C 
and its lower end or mouth tapering off to a 
smaller diameter and extending to a point 
corresponding with the point in the wick 
holder B at which I desire to preserve a con 
stant level. I then reconnect the divided por 
tion of the pipe with or without the addition 
at this point of a stop-tap b. I then perforate 
the outer pipe, as at c, so that air is admitted 
freely between the two concentric pipes c and 
a and can reach the lower opening or mouth 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
TOO 
 
2 
441,446 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5.o. 
of the inner tube a. or in some cases I dis 
pense with the perforation c in the outer tube 
and admit air at the point c, as shown in sec 
tion at Fig. 3, the socket cl acting as a cover 
and preventing the ingress of dust or other 
extraneous matter; or, if preferred, I admit 
air at the point e. (See Fig. 3.) In case I do 
not desire to cut the supply-pipe, I surround 
it at this point (see Fig. 2) with a short piece 
of tube a of a slightly larger diameter, mak 
ing a liquid-tight joint at the bottom end and 
leave the upper end open to the atmosphere, 
having previously perforated the supply-pipe 
at a point corresponding with the point in the 
wick and oil holder at which I desire to pre 
serve the level. This arrangementis virtually 
the same as the above, with the exception that 
the feed-pipe c is in the one case the outer of 
tWO concentric tubes and in the other it is 
the inner one of the two, and in both cases 
the level of the oil will be maintained ap 
proximately at the point which corresponds 
in one case with the lower orifice or mouth of 
the inner tube and in the other case with the 
perforation of the Supply-pipe. As soon as 
the level of the oil falls below the mouth of 
the inner tube at in the one case or of the per 
foration in the feed-pipe C in the other case 
air is admitted and passes in the form of bub 
bles up the supply-pipe C into the upper 
part of the reservoir A, allowing a corre 
sponding proportion of oil to descend and 
raise the level, so as to again close the mouth 
or perforation and stop further descent of 
oil. Owing, however, to the causes above 
mentioned this level would not always re 
main absolutely constant, and it is neces 
sary, therefore, to provide for fluctuations 
in the level due to any excessive issue of 
oil which might at times cause overflow or 
flooding, and for this purpose I fit the pipe C 
or the wick-holder B with what I term an 
overflow-chamber ID, Fig. 1, the diameter 
of the said chamber being greater than its 
height and considerably larger than that of 
the Space between the outer and inner tubes 
C and Cl, so that any rise of level which would 
be quite appreciable in that space (and con 
sequently in the wick-holder) will, when spread 
over this increased area, be reduced almost to 
nil. This overflow-chamber Displaced round 
the feed-pipe (in the first case above referred 
to) in such a position that the bottom of the 
chamber D stands level with the mouth of 
the inner tube (t, the outer tube Chaving been 
perforated at this point c to allow the oil 
access to the overflow-chamber D. 
In case two or second construction the outer 
tube carries the overflow-chamber through 
which it passes, both tubes being perforated 
at the same level at the bottom of the cham 
ber to allow the oil access to the chamber, 
and the upper part of the outer tube being 
also perforated or left open for the admission 
of air. The upper end of the said outer tube 
is covered to prevent ingress of the foreign 
matter. The action Will then be as follows: 
When the apparatus is in use, the excess of 
oil due to air-expansion instead of raising 
the oil level in the wick-holder B, and possi 
bly flooding, will be received into this over 
?low-chamber ID, where it will be spread over 
the much greater superficial area, and the 
level of the oil in the wick-holder will not 
therefore becaused to exceed the bounds set 
to it, and this excess in the said overflow 
chamber must all flow back again into the 
feed-pipe C and wick-holder B and be con 
sumed before the level of the oil can fall 
sufficiently low to admit air and renew the 
supply of oil. 
The overflow-chamber D and concentric tube 
'may be so constructed that by raising or low 
ering them the level of the oil in the wick 
holder can be altered, as desired, in order to 
suit oils of different specific gravities. This 
arrangement is shown in section at Fig. 4. 
In this case the supply-pipe C is uncut, and 
is provided with two or more sets of air-holes 
fand f', the outer sliding pipe C* carrying 
the overflow-chamber D, and being provided 
with one set of air-holes only at g at the bot 
tom of the chamber. Upon sliding this outer 
tube C* up or down so as to bring the holes 
g level with either the holes for f' on the in 
ner or supply pipe c the level of the oil in 
the wick-holder will be raised or lowered ac 
cordingly. It will be evident that this pneu 
matic arrangement will be equally applica 
ble to various other purposes, wherein it is 
desired to maintain a liquid at a constant 
level. 
In the case of portable lamps, whether 
hand or pillar lamps, the oil-reservoir and the 
overflow-chamber D will be either placed in 
or be otherwise attached to the body of the 
lamp itself; but in the case of permanent fit 
tings (whether suspended or otherwise) the 
said chamber may be attached to the gaso 
lier-bracket or other fitting; or it may be at 
tached to the supply-pipe, as shown at Fig. 1 
or otherwise, so long as it is on the same level 
as the wick-holder or burner,' and, as be 
fore stated, it may be either permanently fixed 
at that level or it may be adjustable to dif 
ferent levels to suit oils of varying specific 
gravities. The oil-reservoir must be placed 
at a higher level. 
In all cases provision is made by causing 
the lower end of the feed-opening to project 
into the reservoir, as shown at Fig. 1, or by a 
dome or otherwise to leave a sufficient quan 
tity of air in the reservoir when it is filled. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In appliances for burning heavy hydro 
carbon oils, the combination of an air-tight 
pneumatic oil-reservoir and a supply-pipe, 
With a tube concentric to the supply-pipe, and 
an overflow-chamber surrounding the supply 
pipe at a level with the burner, the said 
chamber communicating at its lower part 
with the supply-pipe and having an extended 
area, all substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
441,446 
8 
2. In appliances for burning heavy hydro 
carbon oils, the combination of an air-tight 
pneumatic oil-reservoir, a Supply-pipe, and a 
tapering tube, the larger end of which is fit 
5 ted air-tight within the supply-pipe, the 
smaller and lower end being on a level with 
the burner, an air-inlet in the supply between 
the two ends of the tube, with an overflow 
chamber communicating at the base with the 
Io supply-pipe, as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In appliances for burning heavy hydro 
carbon oils, the combination of an air-tight 
pneumatic oil-reservoir and supply-pipe, with 
an overflow-chamber on a level with the 
burner, communicating at its base with the 15 
supply-pipe and provided with an inlet at 
the top, and a tapering tube fitted in the Slip 
ply-pipe, as and for the purposes Set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 20 
two subscribing witnesses. 
FRAS. M. SIMS. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. HUGHES, 
J. E. HUGHES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441546.txt	(No Model.). 
No. 441,546 
J. F. FUIL KERSON. 
FENCE, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES IF. FULKERSON, OF RAUM, ILLINOIS. 
FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,546, dated November 25, 1890. 
Application filed September 26, 1889, Serial No. 325,146. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES F. FULKERSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Raum, in the county of Pope and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Fences; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
fences, and more especially to what is gen 
erally known as a farm-fence, the object of 
the invention being the production of a fence 
which can be quickly built of rails and wire, 
which will resist the damaging influences of 
the wind, and which will be cheap and effect 
ive, thus combining all the essentials in a 
fence of this character. 
The invention consists of a fence con 
structed substantially as herein illustrated, 
described, and specifically claimed. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
a fence constructed in accordance with and 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 represents 
a plan view thereof. Fig. 3 represents a de 
tail view to illustrate more clearly the man 
ner of securing the end posts and rails. 
Referring by numerals to the drawings, the 
numeral 1 designates the rails of my fence, 
which are arranged in a zigzag or reverse di 
rection to each other and have their ends 
crossed, as shown, forming the recesses or 
notches 2. In the notches 2 are placed the 
posts 3 and 4, which are secured in the proper 
position by means of binding wires or loops 
5, passing around the posts near the upper 
and lower ends. The posts 4 are longer than 
posts 3, or are formed with the upper ex 
tended ends, and in said ends on Opposite 
sides of alternate posts are placed Staples or 
eyes 6 to receive the wires 7, which form a 
barrier above the rails and make the fence 
of sufficient height to prevent animals from 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
7 ? 
75 
scaling it, as is evident. In addition to form 
ing a barrier, these wires serve the purpose 
of strengthening the fence-that is to say 
if an animal comes to a fence of this con 
struction to get over he naturally goes into 
an angle as far as possible and there pushes 
against the rails and post. Such force might 
cause the lapping ends of the rails 1 to slip On 
each other until they move from between 
the posts 3 and 4, even though the latter were 
connected by the loops 5; but by stretching 
the wires 7 and passing outside the upper 
ends of one or both posts at each angle such 
outward movement of the posts is avoided, 
and hence the outward slipping of the rails 
is rendered impossible. The inward slipping 
of the rails is prevented by the binding of 
the loops. 
At the ends of the fence I prefer to use posts 
having recesses or notches 8 to receive the 
ends of the rails, and secure the loops in the 
Same manner as before. 
It will thus be seen that I provide a cheap 
and durable farm-fence which will effectu 
ally serve the purpose for whichitis intended. 
I claim as my invention, and desire to Se 
cure by Letters Patent 
The herein-described fence, the same com 
prising zigzag panels of rails 1, with their 
ends crossing those of the adjacent panels, 
vertical posts 3 and 4 in the longitudinal 
angles of each crossing, the posts 4 rising 
above the upper rail, loops 5, connecting each 
pair of posts near the top and bottom of the 
fence, and taut wires 7, extending the length 
of the fence and passing outside the upper 
end of each longer post 4, all as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES F. FULIKERSON. 
 
Witnesses: 
JOHN B. HART, 
J. C. SMITH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441646.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 441,646. 
Z 
 
J. L. C0X. 
PAPER F0ILDING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Deo, 2, 1890. 
Ahhhhhill 
NINH | 
|||||||||||||| 
 
 
|| 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH L. COX, OF BATTLE CREEK, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THIE DUPLEX 
PRINTING PRESS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PAPER-FOLDING MACH IN E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,646, dated December 2, 1890. 
Application filed November il 1889, Serial No, 328,954. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all avhom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH L. COX, of Bat 
tle Creek, in the county of Calhoun and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Paper-Folding Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form part of this 
: Specificatiora, in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan view of my improved 
folding-machine, showing the delivery-tapes 
and sheets of paper thereon. Fig.2 is an end 
view of the folder. Fig. 3 is a diagrammatical 
sectional view showing the operation of the 
folding and breaking blade. Fig.4 is a simi 
lar view showing the folding-rolls. Fig. 5 
is an enlarged vertical transverse section 
through the folder, showing the operative 
parts thereof. Figs. 6 and 7 are details. 
This invention is an improvement in paper 
folding and cutting mechanisms, and it is es 
pecially designed for use in connection with 
printing-presses, and its object is to sever a 
Single sheet of paper and fold it into the form 
of an eight-page paper, and to fold this paper 
subsequently into quarter size, ready for de 
livery to subscribers; and to this end the in 
vention consists in the novel construction, 
combination, and arrangement of parts here 
inafter described and claimed. 
Referring to the drawings by letters, A 
designates the portion of the frame-work of 
the folder, and B B designate tapes running 
over pulleys b b, mounted on shafts b, jour 
naled in proper bearings on the end and top 
of the frame A. 
C C designate clamping-bars lying parallel 
with tapes B B and with each other at oppo 
site sides of the center of the press, and here 
inafter referred to, the paper being brought 
directly over said bars by tapes B until 
stopped by guides C' C', as indicated in 
the drawings. 
D designates a vertically-reciprocating cut 
ter and folder blade, which mioves in a verti 
cal guide-slotD" formed in the end of the ma 
chine, centrallythereof, andin vertical guides 
dl dl', guides dl being supported above tapes B 
by a bar dl, secured to brackets d of frame 
A, and guides d'being supported on the main 
frame vertically below guides d' and in line 
therewith, so that the inner end of blade Dis 
directed by said guides in its vertical move 
ments, and yet no obstruction presented to 
the advance of a sheet of paper on tapes BB. 
Blade D is reciprocated by means of a pit 
man D, attached to a pin D, projecting 
through slot ID', the other end of the pitman 
being connected to a wrist-pin D, secured in 
a slot on a disk D, which is mounted on a 
transverse shaft D, journaled in the maim 
frame and rotated by gears d d from a gear 
d on a shaft E, lying longitudinally of frame 
A and mounted in proper bearings thereon. 
IF designates a horizontal roller lying par 
allel with shaft IE and below tapesB, its immer 
periphery lying nearly in the path of blade 
?D; and F" is a similar roller journaled in 
proper bearings just below roll F, with which 
it co-operates, said rolls being driven in op 
posite directions by any suitable gearing not 
shown. 
F3 is a third roller lying parallel with and 
beside roll E" and driven therefrom and CO 
operating therewith. 
F designates a pair of rolls standing ver 
tical to roll F and immediately below the lat 
ter, as shown, being driven by suitable gear 
ing from shaft E. 
f is a table outside of rolls F, and fis a de 
livery-fly, operated by any suitable means in 
the ordinary manner. 
G designates a tucker-blade opposite rolls 
EF F' and mounted on a vertical lever G", 
which is fulcrumed on a stud G near its 
lower end, the lower end of the lever being 
connected to a rod G, which passes through 
an ear a, on the main frame; and G is a coiled 
spring on said rod, bearing against said ear 
and a collar on the rod, by which the tucker 
blade is thrown away from rolls FF". After 
operation the blade is thrown forward toward 
said rolls by means of a pitman-rod g, which 
is connected to lever G" above its fulcrum, 
and its other end is slotted and rests upon 
shaft E; and g' is a stud projecting laterally 
from the slotted end of pitman g, and which 
is engaged at the proper moment by a cam 
N 
95 
O CD 
I O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
 
-441,646 
I O 
I 5 
23 
25 
35 
45 
disk g on shaft E, as shown in Figs. 5 and 7, 
thus thrusting the blade toward the rolls EF F'. 
II designates a tucker-blade above rolls IF' 
F, mounted on an oscillating lever HII, piv 
oted on a studi H*, the outer end of said lever 
being connected to a vertical rod H, the lower 
end of which passes through an ear a on 
frame A, and between this ear and the lower 
end of the rod is a spring H, which holds the 
blade normally suspended above the rolls. 
7, is a bell-crank lever pivoted on a stud l', 
and having one of its arms pivotally con 
mected to rodil H and its other arm connected 
to a pitman h, the other end of which is sup 
ported upon shaft IE and operated by a cam 
disk lu, similarly to the pitman g, as indi 
cated, so that at the proper time tucker-blade 
HI is depressed. 
I designates a vertical tucker-blde, which 
is mounted on the end of a horizontal lever 
I in front of rolls F8 F8, which lever is oper 
ated by a pitmanI3 from a cam II on shaft E, 
similar to pitmen g and h. 
J designates, a pair of movable clamping 
bars lying parallel with and above bars C C 
and above tapes IB IB, said bars being sup 
ported by arms jij on rock-shaftsJ "J", mount 
ed above tapes B B in brackets A A, rising 
on the end of frame A, and in hangers J4 J, 
depending from rod d, as shown. 
K designates a crank-lever secured to one 
shaft J, its short arm being connected by a 
link IK with a crank-arm K on the opposite 
shaft J, by which said shafts can be oper 
ated simultaneously to throw bars J J into 
contact with bars C C to clamp a sheet of pa 
per lying between said bars. The other arm 
of lever K is connected to the upper end of 
a pitman-rod k, the lower end of which is en 
gaged and operated by a cam k' on a shaft E., || 
similar to the other pitmen and cams thereon. 
The operation of the machine in folding an 
eight-page paper is as follows: The sheet W 
of paperis imprinted in th press (not shown) 
with four-page impressions on each side and 
parallel with each other, as indicated in Fig. 
1. It is brought forward by tapes B B in such 
position that the blank space between the 
two inner pages is just below and in line with 
blade D, this space being in the center of the 
length of the sheet. The mechanisms are so 
adjusted that when the sheet has been stopped 
by the guides blade ID is drawn downward, 
catching the sheet at the center and drawing it 
down between two parallel bars N N and giv 
ing a first fold to the sheet. The lower edge 
of blade D is preferably serrated, and just as 
the sheet W has been drawn down So much 
that its end edges are between bars C and J 
the latter are actuated and clamp the edges of 
the paper against bars C. The blade D con 
tinuing to descend, its serrated edge first 
draws the sheet taut and then perforates and 
breaks through the same in the center line 
thereof, thus dividing the sheet into two equal 
halves. Then the tucker-blade G is thrown 
forward, which catches the halves of the sheet 
at their centers and tucks them between the 
rolls IF EF, as indicated in Fig. 3. Simulta 
neously with this tucking the bars J J are 
thrown up, releasing the upper edges of the 
severed sheet, and the rolls IF F draw the 
two halves sinultaneouslythrough them, fold 
ing them into quarter-size of the original 
sheet, as is evident. The blade G is thrown 
back as soon as its tucking operation is 
completed, and as soon as rolls IF F' have 
drawn the halves of the sheet out of the way 
blade D is thrown upward ready for opera 
tion upon the next sheet brought forward by 
tapes B B. The rolls EF F' deliver the folded 
halves i directly over roll F, and when the 
quarter-folded sheet has been paid out from 
rolls IF F' blade II is operated, which in its de 
scent tucks the quarter-folded sheet between 
rolls F F", which immediately draw the quar 
ter-folded sheet downward and give it an 
other fold, reducing its size to one-eighth the 
size of the original sheet, asis evident. After 
passing through roll F' F the eight-folded 
sheet drops upon a guide-bar O in front of 
rolls F8 EF8 and between the same and tucker 
blade I, which is then operated and tucks the 
eight-fold sheet between rolls F8F8, by which 
it is folded yet again into a sixteenth size of 
the original sheet. From rolls F8F8 the folded 
sheet passes out upon the table, where they 
are laid by the delivery-fly. The several 
tucker-blades, as soon as they have completed 
their operation on the one Sheet, are drawn 
back out of the way until another sheet is 
brought forward for their operation. By this 
means it will be seen that I take a single 
sheet, fold it into equal halves, and then cult 
or sever these halves at one operation by one 
blade, then by a pair of rollsfold these halves 
into quarter size, then by a succeeding pair 
fold these quarter size into eighth size, and then 
by a final pair fold these eighth size into six 
teenth size. In other words, the paper, if am 
eight-page newspaper, is delivered upon the 
table properly paged and folded into quarter 
size of its pages for distribution. 
Having now described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
thereon, is 
1. In a paper-folding machine, the combi 
nation of delivery-tapes for bringing forward 
a sheet of paper, with a reciprocating blade 
moving between the tapes and adapted to 
draw a sheet of paper off the tapes, fold it im 
halves, and break the halves apartindepend 
ently of the tapes or feed-rolls, and mechan 
ism for clamping the edges of the sheet as the 
knife breaks through the same, substantially 
as specified. 
2. In a paper-folding machine, the combi 
nation of the delivery-tapes, the vertically 
reciprocating blade lying parallel with said 
tapes, and the camping-bars at each side of 
said blade, whereby the sheet is folded in 
halves and broken in two at one operation of 
said blade, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
55 
65 
75 
95 
LOO 
I o5 
O 
I I 5 
I 2 O 
I 25 
441,646 
3 
and mechanism for operating the same, for I 5 
the purpose substantially as described. 
5. The combination of the vertically-recip 
rocating blade D, the clamping-bars CandJ, 
and the horizontal rolls IF F' below the same, 
with the delivery-tapes and the tucker-blade 2o 
G, all substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
JOSEPH L. COX. 
Witnesses: 
A. E. DOWELL, 
P. T. BROOKS. 
3. The combination of the delivery-tapes, 
the vertically-movable blade adapted to draw 
the sheet from said tapes and fold itin halves 
and split the halves apart, and the devices 
for clamping the edges of the sheet before 
the knife breaks through, with the paper-fold 
ing rolls parallel with said blade, and the 
tucking-blade adapted to force the halves of 
the sheet into said rolls, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. The combination of the frame, the clamp 
ing-bars C C, and the vertically-reciprocating 
blade D, and the mechanism for operating the 
same, with the movable clamping-bars J J 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441746.txt	(No Model.) 
M. F. CARROLL. 
WEHICLE SPRING, 
No. 441,746. 
Patent 
Zr2/2 
a 
12 
. In 
: 
lay a 
HHHHHHI, 
ill-III 
27 
7 - 9 H 
I 
Z 
lif 
A. 
al 
| || 
Hil 
a 
 
  
Wifrossos: 
4%dlv4. 
 
 
pilep?r 
//zz/2ae/27.622222, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL F. CARROLL OF HILLSBOROUGH, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO A. W. DOWNHAM, OF SAME PLACE. 
VEHICLE-SPRING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,746, dated December 2, 1890. 
Application filed April 16, 1890, Serial No. 348,220. (No model.) 
siderably greater movement of the two men 
To add twhom it invay concern. 
bers than heretofore. I prefer to attach the 
Be it known that I, MICHAEL F. CARROLL, 
socket to the upper member in order that dirt 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
will not accumulate thereim, although it will 
Hillsborough, in the county of Highland and 
be obvious that the parts may be inverted, if 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and use 
desired, without departing from the spirit of 
ful Vehicle-Spring, of which the following is 
my invention or detracting from its success 
a Specification. 
ful operation. 
This invention relates to vehicle-springs; 
In order to bring the vehicle-body still far 
and the object thereof is to provide an im 
ther down between the axles, which is Well 
to proved pivot between the two members of a 
known to be desirable, I provide the strong 
bow or elliptical spring. 
metallic connection C, which is of Z-shape in 
To this end the invention consists of an 
elongated bearing at the ends of the lower 
cross-section. The lower bar of this connec 
tion is screwed or otherwise secured beneath 
member and an elongated socket at the ends 
the vehicle-body V, and the upper bar, which 
of the upper member, all as hereinafter more 
is considerably shorter, is bolted or otherwise 
fully described, and illustrated in the draw 
connected to the upper member U of the ellip 
ings, in which 
tical spring. By this arrangement it will be 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my im 
seen that the vehicle-body will be permitted 
proved spring, showing it as connected to the 
to pass inside the upper and inner member of 
2O front end of a vehicle-body. Fig. 2 is a plan 
the spring and will stand normally below the 
view of the spring removed. Fig. 3 is an en 
highest point thereof at the center, and the 
larged perspective view of the ends of the two 
desired end is therefore attained. . 
members, taken from the under side, and show 
I claim as the salient points of this inven 
ing them slightly separated. Fig. 4 is an en 
25 larged cross-section through the center of the 
The herein-described vehicle-spring, the 
connection and the upper member. 
same comprising a downwardly-bowed front 
The spring proper consists of two branches 
member L, having integral cylindrical bear 
or members U L, whose bodies stand in par 
ings B, standing at right angles to its ends, 
allel vertical planes, but the upper member 
projecting partly to the rear thereof, and pro 
Said upper 
vided with longitudinal perforations, an up 
member U is provided at its ends with elon 
wardly-bowed rear member U, standing out 
gated sockets K of semicircular section, the 
of the vertical plane of said front member 
ends E of which are turned down and perfo 
and having integral sockets across its ends 
rated, and the lower member L is provided 
and projecting partly forward thereof, said 
35 with elongated bearings B, centrally perfo- . 
sockets consisting of semi-cylindrical bodies 
rated so as to align with the perforations in 
said ends when the bearings are seated in the K, fitting over said bearings, and turned-down 
perforated ends E, fitting against the end of 
sockets. The spring of the upper member is 
said bearings, and bolts O, passing through 
made integral with the sockets and extends 
the aligned perforations in said ends and 
4o from the rear half thereof, and the spring of 
bearings, all as specified. 
the lower member extends from the front half 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
of the bearings, as shown in Fig. 2, whereby 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
when the parts are assembled and held con 
presence of two witnesses. 
nected by the bolt O the upper member can 
45 spring without interfering with the lower or 
striking the same at all. By this construc 
tion I dispense with the rubber buffers so 
common in elliptical springs and allow a con 
3o slightly in rear of the lower. 
SAM. H. FRANK, 
A. D. WIGGINS. 
MICHAEL F. CARROLL. 
Witnesses: 
- 
tion- 
- 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441846.txt	(No Model.) 
D. N. HURLBUT. 
PAPER TUBE. 
 
No. 441,846. 
Patented Dec. 2, 1890. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL N. HURLBUT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PAPER TU BE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,846, dated December 2, 1890. 
Application filed July 5, 1889, Serial No. 316,602, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern 
w 
Be it known that I, DANIEL N. HURLBUT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Paper Tube, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention has reference especially to 
tubes made of paper or fibrous material, they 
being especially adaptable, by reason of the 
cheapness of the material, for electrical con 
duits for electric-light and other wires, for the 
manufacture of speaking tubes, &c. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
paper tube which shall resist ordinary crush 
ing strains, and which shall be capable of use 
in lengths without danger of breaking. Such 
a tube is shown in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of a length of the 
completed tube; Fig. 2, a similar view show 
ing at one end the wrappings unwound from 
the core, and Fig. 3 an end view. 
a is the core of the tube, which is prefer 
ably a fillet of paper bent into a cylinder with 
the seam formed either by the edges of the 
fillet abutting, as shown at b, Figs. 2 and 3, 
or by slightly overlapping, the core thereby 
having, except where the overlap is made when 
that character of seam is used, a single thick 
ness of Wall. 
c is a wrapping, preferably of the same ma 
terial as the core C, applied to the core spi 
rally and secured thereto by a suitable paste 
or cement. 
d is another wrapping, also preferably of 
the same material as the core a, applied to 
the wrapping c spirally, so as to break joints 
there with and secured thereto by a suitable 
paste or cement. 
I do not deem it necessary in all cases to 
use more than one spiral Wrapping for the 
core a, one wrapping being sufficient to pre 
O 
3O 
35 
serve the core in tube formation, and the sec 
ond wrapping being applied to secure addi 
tional strength. A third or other wrappings 
may be applied for the same purpose. 
The tube above described may be made by 
hand or by machinery. In an application 
filed by me, Serial No. 316,601, I have described 
a machine adapted to produce such tube in 
quantities, and such machine I prefer to use. 
The tube herein shown and described with 
stands crushing to such an extent that it is 
not liable to collapse and lose its tubular 
form, and it is not liable to break, when used 
in lengths, from its own weight or any ordi 
nary weight which it may be called upon to 
carry. 
While I regard the tube when made of pa 
per as the better construction, because more 
economical, I do not limit myself to a paper 
tubing, as metal might be used without de 
arting from my invention. 
What I claim is 
1. In a tube, the combination of a cylin 
drical core formed from a single thickness of 
material and having an abutting or slightly 
overlapped seam, said core being covered 
throughout by a spirally-wound tape, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a paper tube, the combination of a 
cylindrical core formed from a single thick 
ness of paper and having an abutting or over 
lapped seam, tapes of the same material spi 
rally wound about said core and breaking 
joints, and an adhesive material to bind said 
core and tapes, substantially as described. 
This specification signed and witnessed 
this 25th day of June, 1889. 
DANIEI, N. HURLBUT. 
45 
50 
55 
7 o 
75 
Witnesses: 
D. H. DRISCOLL, 
WILLIAM BELZER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US441946.txt	(No Model.) 
F, E, DROWN, 
APPARATUS FOR BLEACHING. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 441946. 
- 
Patented Deo. 2, 1890. 
 
Zzzazzar. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. E. DROWN. 
APPARATUS FOR BLEACHING. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 441,946. 
Patented Dec. 2, 1890. 
 
A2.272 esses 
/2Zerez227 
recars perers co, PHoro-litho. Washington, 
 
F. E. DROWN, 
APPARATUS FOR BLEACHING. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Deo, 2, 1890. 
(No Model.) 
No. 441,946. 
  
as 
SS 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
2n 
N. 
S. 
N 
SC2 
ZN 
s 
N 
eas 
N 
N 2 2 
N. A N f/3. 
(G) 
2 2 
rt. 
sia 
PRSHt2 
Z$Y 
al 
V 
Aezveza doz: 
3.4 see day-2 ove 
N W 
N 
NS 
N. Y. 
Saa NEN 
Lisa 
A 27. Y 
A 
ZUltra-esses 
4. 
24, 1722/ 
 
renoRRIs Peters co., Photo-lith.O., WASHINGTON, D.C. 
No. 441,946. 
Patented Deo. 2, 1890. 
 
7%vesses 
222 2/3 
221 
2-4 
/zzezea/ 
%-44 (7.2 ove 
its peters co., poro-it-Ho, WASHINGTON, D.C. ' 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK EUGENE DROWN, OF PAWTUCKET, RHODE ISLAND. 
APPARATUS FOR BLEACHING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 441,946, dated December 2, 1890, 
Application filed March 24, 1890, Serial No,345,153, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK EUGENE 
DROWN, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Pawtucket, in the county of Providence 
and State of Rhode Island, have invented a 
new and useful Apparatus for Bleaching and 
Dyeing Textile Fabrics, Braids, and Yarns, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved appa 
ratus for the purpose; and my invention has 
for its object the bleaching and dyeing of 
cotton and other textile fabrics and braids 
arranged in a specific manner. The pieces 
of fabric Sewed together at the ends are wound 
in a continuous manner many thousandyards 
in length upon a portable roll, which can 
be arranged to fit, first, the winding-machine; 
Second, the bleaching and dyeing vessel; 
third, the finishing machinery. By having 
its ends arranged for this purpose, or, as is 
more usually the case in practice,itis arranged 
to be placed on a shaft adapted to the ma 
The fabric in bulk wound on a port 
chine. 
able roll is placed in the bleaching and dye 
ing vessel and therein treated in a thin sheet 
with the bleaching or dyeing agents, solu 
tions, steam, and gases, or air above or below 
the normal pressure of the atmosphere, as 
sisting the action of the bleaching and dyeing 
agents or exhausting them from the fabric 
by pressing the fabric between squeezing 
rolls, and after the bleaching or dyeing op 
erations have terminated removing the fabric 
from the bleaching or dyeing vessel in bulk 
wound on a portable roll. I attain these ob 
jects by the mechanism illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of the appa 
ratus and vessel A and the fabric in the form 
of a roll wound on a portable roll B and in 
position to be lowered into vessel A. Fig. 2 
is a longitudinal vertical section of the vessel 
A on line C of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an elevation 
of the fabric in the form of a roll wound on 
a roll B. Fig. 4 is an end view of the roll B. 
Fig. 5 is an elevation of the braid wound in 
the form of a roll onto a roll B, having sheets 
or plates a fixed to roll B, between which the 
braid is wound. Fig. 6 is a plan of slotted 
guide a' in vessel A. Fig. 7 is a transverse 
section of the vessel A and an opposite end 
elevation of the apparatus from that shown 
in Fig. 1. Fig. 8 is a transverse vertical sec 
tion of another form of the vessel A on line 
c of Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a plan of another form 
of the vessel A in which two chambers A* and 
A8 are connected together, having a space be 
tween same for the squeezing -rolls G and 
having tight-closing lids k and k'. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
In bleaching cotton fabric by my method 
I proceed as follows: The fabric is wound in 
the form of a roll onto a portable roll B in a 
continuous manner many thousand yards in 
length. The fabric is then placed in the ves 
sel A with the portable roll B supported by 
and fixed to rotate with the rotating shafts E 
and F. Another portable roll B, the same 
as roll B, is fixed to rotate with the rotating 
shafts E' and F. The end of fabric on roll B 
is then carried up over the roll cand through 
the slotted guide a and between the squeez 
ing-rolls G and fastened around the roll B. 
The fabric may be carried directly onto rollB' 
without going through the guide a or over 
the roll c and treated in this manner. The 
lid A' is then closed and firmly fastened and 
the fabric is ready to be treated in the vessel 
A. The fabric is passed in a thin sheet 
through the bleaching and dyeing agents and 
pressed between the squeezing-rolls G by ro 
tating the rolls B and B, and the squeezing 
rolls G winding the fabric off of roll B and 
onto roll B, or, vice versa, off of roll B and 
onto roll B by reversing the rotating mech 
anism. 
By winding and unwinding the fabric and 
passing it in a thin sheet in contact with the 
bleaching and dyeing agents in vessel A, and 
assisting the action of said agents or exhaust 
ing them from the fabric by pressing the fab 
ric between squeezing-rolls G, the fabric can 
be very uniformly and expeditiously treated 
by the different agents and can be washed 
and squeezed, and, furthermore, the steps re 
quired for different qualities of bleaching or 
dyeing or for different kinds of fabrics can 
be successfully carried out without removing 
the fabric from the vessel A. 
As the different steps in bleaching and dye 
ing anil the agents used can be varied to a 
so 
95 
OC 
5 
3o 
45 
 
441,946 
85 
Od 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
great extent in my apparatus, I will proceed 
pipes connecting with the vessel. A closed. 
to describe but one series of steps in bleach 
Then valves f" and fin pipe R are opened, and 
valve y' in suction-pipe l', connecting pipe 
ing, as follows: . 
The fabric on a roll B having been placed 
R with vacuum-pump T, is also opened, and 
5 in the vessel A, with the end of roll B fixed to 
the vacuum is at once formed in vessel A. 
shafts E and F for the purpose of being ro 
Valve g is then closed and valve f opened 
tated and the end of the fabric made fast to 
and the chlorine solution in tank S. drawn 
into vessel A, followed by pneumatic press 
roll B" and the lid A' closed and made steam 
tight, and all pipes connecting with the ves 
ure, formed by air-compressor T as follows: 
Io sel. A closed, the valve e in vent-pipe II is 
Valve f is closed, and valve gin discharge 
I pipe v', connecting pipe R with air-compressor 
opened and the valved in steam - pipe 
opened and steam blown through vessel Ato T, is opened and an air-pressure maintained 
expel the air. Then valve e is closed and 
in vessel A. Valve g is then closed. 
Valved also closed and sufficient Water ad 
After the fabric has been treated in the man 
15 mitted to condense the steam and form a 
ner heretofore described by passing it in a 
Vacuum in the vessel A through water-pipe J 
thin sheet through the solutions by unwind 
and perforated water-pipe e. The valves d' 
ing it from roll B and rewinding it onto roll 
and d in pipe K, connecting vessel A with 
B' and the fabric pressed between the squeez 
the alkali-tank L, are then opened and the 
ing-rolls G the chlorine solution is drawn. 
2O alkali solutions in tankL drawn into vessel A. 
back into vessel Sby vacuum-pump T as fol 
Valve dis then closed and a steam-pressure 
lows: The valve gin suction-pipe l', connect 
admitted through steam-pipe I. The rolls B 
ing tank S with vacuum-pump T, is opened 
and B and the squeezing-rolls G are then ro 
and a vacuum formed in tank S. Valve fin 
tated, winding the fabric onto roll B. After 
pipe R is then opened, and valvee' in vent 
25 the fabric has been rewound onto roll B' the 
pipe H also opened and the solution with 
motion is reversed, thus reversing the motion 
drawn into tank S. The fabric is now washed 
of roll Band B and the squeezing-rolls G and 
and squeezed as before. . 
rewinding the fabric again upon the roll B. 
In souring, the treatment is the same as 
When the fabric has been sufficiently treated 
with chlorine. A vacuum is formed in Vessel 
3O. With the hot alkali solutions, the valve dis 
A and the diluted acid is drawn in from ves 
sel U through valves f* and f' and pipe R, 
opened and the solution forced backinto tank 
L by steam-pressure admitted through pipe I. 
followed by pneumatic pressure, if desired. 
Valves d and dare now closed and valvee 
After treatment the solutions are withdrawn 
in Vent-pipe H opened and the valve e in 
into the tank U and the fabric washed and 
35 Steam-pipe O, which is connected with the 
squeezed as before. 
This concludes onese 
perforated Steam-pipe e' in vessel A, is opened, 
ries of steps for bleaching cotton fabric. 
For jute fabric, permanganates and sul 
and the treatment of the fabric on roll Bre 
sumed by passing said fabric between the 
phurous acid solutions can be used alternate 
Squeezing-rolls G, thence over the perforated 
ly, or weak hypochlorites and alkali solutions 
4O steam-pipe e', and winding it up on roll B'. 
and other agents for the bleaching and dye 
In admitting hot solutions into vessel A, I 
ing of different kinds of fabrics. After bleach 
prefer to form a vacuum in vessel A, as afore 
ing, the lid A' is taken off and the fabric 
said, by admitting steam and then condens 
taken out of the vessel A in the form of a 
ing it by spray of water. In ejecting hot 
roll on a portable roll B. Lid A' is arranged 
45 solutions from vessel A, I prefer to do so 
hinged to one side of vessel A and counter 
by steam-pressure admitted through steam 
balanced over a frame Y by weight X and 
pipe I. In forming a vacuum and also an 
the roll B taken out by a hoist h. 
The air-compressor and exhaust-pump T, 
air-pressure in vessel A when cold solutions 
are used I prefer to use a vacuum and air 
mounted upon an air chamber or receiver ar 
ranged to contain an air-pressure above or 
After alkali treat 
below the normal pressure of the atmosphere, 
ments have terminated and the vessel A 
blown out free from alkali solutions the fabric 
is connected to tanks S and U by discharge 
is washed with water in the following man 
pipe - and suction-pipe U and to vessel A by 
ner: The valve d' in Water-pipe J, connecting 
discharge-pipe v' and suction-pipe v' and the 
55 with the perforated pipe e in vessel A, is 
pipe R. By this arrangement of connecting 
opened, and the valve e' in vent-pipe II and 
pipes the air can be compressed in or ex 
valve e' in waste-pipe P are opened to some 
hausted from the vessel A, the acid-tank U, 
extent. Then, as the fabric is unwound from 
or the chlorine-tank S. 
roll B and rewound onto roll B, it passes 
The vessel A can be made in many differ 
6o by the perforated water-pipe e, from which a 
ent forms and shapes. I have shown in Fig. 
spray of Water is forced against the fabric. 
S-a transverse vertical section of the Vessel 
The fabric is then pressed by squeezing-rolls 
A on line c' of Fig. 9, which is a plan-two 
G. and wound onto the roll B. 
chambers A* and A connected together, hav 
In treating the fabric with chlorine solu 
ing a space between same for the squeeze 
65 tions I proceed as follows: If desired, a vacu 
rolls G, the perforated steam-pipe e', and the 
perforated water-pipe e, and having tight 
um is formed in vessel A as follows: The lid 
A' is closed and made steam-tight and all 
closing lids k. and k'. The fabric wound on 
5o compression pump T. 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
441,946 
roll B is placed in vessel A and the roll B 
connected to shaft E, which has a steam-tight 
joint with vessel A. The shaft E is arranged 
to rotate the roll B. The other end of roll B 
is supported by a short shaft F, fixed to re 
movable arms, which are fastened to the side 
of the vessel A. The fabric on roll B is 
passed by the water-pipe e and between the 
squeeze-roll G by the steam-pipe e' and 
Wound upon roll B", which is arranged in ves 
sel A', and is connected to the shafts E' and 
F, similar to the roll B with shafts E and F. 
When the fabric has been wound upon roll B', 
the motion of shafts E E and the rolls G is 
reversed and the fabric again wound upon 
roll B. 
The foregoing described modified form of 
the vessel A is adapted more particularly for 
the bleaching and dyeing of textile fabrics 
and yarns in a rope form. In this case the 
portable rolls B and B have circular plates 
Ct' fixed to each end, between which the fabric 
or yarns are Wound in a rope form, the same 
as thread upon a spool, and the fabric or 
yarn as it travels in vessel. A from roll B to 
B', or vice versa, is wound in a traverse 
manner by a traverse guide arranged in the 
vessel A. 
Having herein described my method and 
apparatus for the purpose, I claim and desire 
to Secure by Letters Patent 
1. In the bleaching and dyeing of textile 
fabrics and yarns, a bleaching and dyeing ves 
sel having two chambers connected together 
and having tight-closing lids, and portable 
rolls having plates fixed to their ends, upon 
which the fabric and yarns are wound in a 
rope form in a traverse manner to facilitate its 
travel in the bleaching and dyeing vessel and 
its removal therefrom, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In the bleaching and dyeing of textile 
fabrics, an apparatus having a bleaching and 
dyeing vessel fitted with a tight-closing lid, 
portable rolls on which the fabric is wound, 
and a squeezing device between which the 
fabric is pressed, as set forth. 
3. An apparatus for bleaching and dyeing 
textile fabrics, composed of a steam and air 
tight bleaching and dyeing vessel having a 
tight-closing lid, portable rolls on which the 
fabric is wound, and rotating shafts having 
Steam-tight joints, with the vessel arranged 
to rotate the portable rolls, as set forth. 
4. An apparatus for bleaching and dyeing 
textile fabrics, composed of a steam and air 
tight bleaching and dyeing vessel having a 
tight-closing lid, the portable rolls on which 
the fabric is wound, the rotating shafts hav 
ing steam-tight joints, with the vessel arranged 
to rotate the portable rolls, and the rotating 
squeeze-rolls having steam-tight joints with 
the vessel, as described. 
5. An apparatus for bleaching and dyeing 
textile fabrics, composed of a steam and air 
tight bleaching and dyeing vessel A, having 
a tight-closing lid A', the portable rolls B and 
B', on which the fabric is wound, the rotat 
ing shafts E and F and E' and F, having 
steam-tight joints, with vessel A arranged to 
rotate the portable rolls B and B', the rotat 
ing squeeze-rolls G, having steam-tight joints 
with vessel A, and the perforated Steam-pipe 
e' and the perforated Water-pipe e, as set 
forth. 
6. An apparatus for bleaching and dyeing 
textile fabrics, composed of a steam and air 
tight bleaching and dyeing vessel A, having 
a tight-closing lid A', the portable rolls B and 
B', on which the fabric is wound, the rotat 
ing shafts E and F and E' and F, having 
steam-tight joints, with vessel A arranged to 
rotate the portable rolls B and B, the rotat 
ing squeezing-roll G, having steam-tight joints 
with vessel A, and the guide a and the roll 
c, as set forth. 
7. An apparatus for bleaching and dyeing 
braids, composed of a steam and air tight 
bleaching and dyeing vessel A, having a 
tight-closing lid A', and the portable rolls B 
and B, on which the braid is wound, having 
sheets or plates a fixed to rolls B and B', 
between which the braid is Wound, as de 
scribed. 
8. An apparatus for bleaching and dyeing 
textile fabrics, composed of a steam and air 
tight bleaching and dyeing vessel A, having 
a tight-closing lid A', portable rolls B and B', 
on which the fabric is wound, the squeezing 
rolls G, between which the fabric is pressed, 
and the roll c, over which it passes, pipe K 
and R for solutions and gases, steam-pipe I, 
perforated steam-pipe e', water-pipe J, per 
forated water-pipee, vent-pipe H, and outlet 
pipe P, as set forth. 
9. An apparatus for bleaching and dyeing 
textile fabrics, composed of a steam and air 
tight bleaching and dyeing vessel A, having 
a tight-closing lid A', portable rolls B and B', 
on which the fabric is wound, the Squeezing 
rolls G, between which the fabric is squeezed, 
and roll c, over which it passes, pipe K and 
R for solutions and gases, steam-pipe I, per 
forated steam-pipe e', water-pipe J, perforated 
water-pipe e, the vent-pipe II, outlet-pipe P, 
and the air-compressor and vacuum-pump T, 
as set forth. 
FREDERICK EUGENE DROWN. 
March 18, 1890. 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL B. LORD, 
CHARLES. W. LORD. 
9c. 
95 
O 
II5 
O 
35 
45 
55 
oo 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442046.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 442,046. 
W. & J. B. HEIGHINGTON. 
CRICKET.BAT, 
Patented Dec. 2, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WY 
 
N 
No.: N 
N ?N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HEIGHINGTON AND JOHN BREARLY HEIGHINGTON, OF TORONTO, 
CANADA. 
- 
CRICKET-BAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,046, dated December 2, 1890. 
Application filed November 22, 1889, Serial No, 33l2ll (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM IIEIGHING 
TON and JOHN BREARLY HEIGHINGTON, pat 
tern-makers, of the city of Toronto, in the 
5 county of York, in the Province of Ontario, 
Canada, have jointly invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Cricket - Bats, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of our invention is to make 
to a strong, solid, compact, and cheaply-con 
structed cricket-bat which when injured can 
be easily and cheaply repaired; and it con 
sists, essentially, of making the bat of several 
longitudinal sections joined together by an 
(.5 improved means, which consists, essentially, 
of a self-interlocking joint, in the groove or 
channel of which is joined a V or wedge 
shaped tongue running longitudinally in the 
said groove and forming in the tenon a V or 
2 o Wedge shaped groove corresponding to the V 
or wedge shaped tongue in the groove or chan 
nel. The groove in the tenon is somewhat 
Smaller than the wedge-shaped tongue, so that 
when the tenon and the groove are brought 
25 together the tongue, pressing into the groove, 
expands the tenon so as to fit closely the re 
clining sides of the groove, thus making a 
perfectly strong, solid, and compact joint. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional 
3o view of a cricket-bat, showing seeral longi 
tudinal sections joined by our improved 
means. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of Fig. 1 at 
A. B. Fig. 3 is a cross-section of a cricket 
bat composed of three longitudinal sections. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
throughout the specification and drawings. 
Our improved bat consists of a number of 
longitudinal sections A, compactly and sol 
4o idly joined by means of an improved joint B, 
which consists, essentially, of a groove or chan 
nel C, having formed in it a V or wedge shaped 
tongue D, running longitudinally through 
the said groove, and a tenon E, having a 
45 groove F formed in it, corresponding to the 
tongue D. The groove F is made somewhat 
smaller than the tongue D, so that when 
the tenon E is fitted into the groove C the 
tongue D, pressing into the groove F, expands 
5o the tenon E outward against the reclining 
sides of the groove or channel C, thus making 
a strong, solid, compact, and perfectly Water 
or air tight joint, 
35 Fig. 4 is a cross-section of the handle. 
65 
As is well known to manufacturers of crick 
et-bats and the like, it is extremely difficult 55 
to obtain a piece of wood large enough to 
manufacture the article entirely free from 
flaws, and consequently a large part of the 
valuable timber is thrown away as useless, 
and thus the price of not only the actual cost 
of manufacture and material used, but also 
the cost of the material that is wasted, is 
placed upon the bat. By making the bat of 
several sections A, by our method we are en 
abled to make as strong and as durable a bat 
and to use the choicest parts of the timber, 
thus saving a large amount of material and 
considerably reducing the cost of manufac 
ture. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to Secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. As an improvement in cricket-bats, the 
combination of a series of sections, the meet 
ing face of one of the series being provided 
with a central longitudinal tongue or tenon 
having a V-shaped groove and the contiguous 
section provided with a longitudinal groove 
registering with the tenon of the adjacent 
section, and also provided with a tongue fit 
ting into the V-shaped groove of said tenon, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. As an improvement in cricket-loats, the 
combination of a series of sections, the meet 
ing face of one of the series being provided 
with a central longitudinal tongue or tenon 
having a central V-shaped groove, the outer 
sides of which are inclined, and the contigu 
ous section provided with a groove having 
the sides which border the same inclined So 
as to register with the inclines of the tongue 
or tenon, and also provided with a tongue 
fitting in the V-shaped groove of said tenon, 
the tongue being somewhat larger than said 
groove, so as to expand the tenon and effect a 
close fit against the reclining sides of the 
groove, substantially as set forth. 
Toronto, October 18, 1889. 
7 c. 
7 5 
WIAM HEIGHINGTON. 
JOHN BREARLY EIGIIINGTON. 
In presence of 
CUSTAR A. PRIEST, 
H. RICHES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442146.txt	(No Model.) 
C. E. SCRIBNER, 
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE APPARATUS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
No. 442,146, 
Patented Dec. 9, 1890. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2EN 
 
 
 
 
3D 
can 
Sis 
2A 
 
(No Model.) 
C. E. SCRIBNER, 
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 442,146, 
Patented Deo, 9, 1890. 
O 
O 
Z27, 2 
E 
O O 
6 (227.2 eases, 
Z722/272.227. 
The nor Rie PETERs co., Photo-lirho., washington, a.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. SCRIBNER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE WESTERN 
ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE APPARATUS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,146, dated December 9, 1890. 
Application filed December 10, 1888, Serial No, 293,165. (No model.) 
to ings, forming a part of this specification. 
To all, uhon, it inval/ concern. 
Beit known that I, CHARLES E. SCRIBNER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
5 nois, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Telephone-Exchange Appa 
ratus, (Case 181) of which the following is a 
full, clear, coincise, and exact description, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
VIy invention relates to telephone-exchanges 
in which metallic circuits are employed; and 
its object is to provide apparatus which shall 
mit of looping the different lines together 
I5 without including any tunnecessary resistance 
in the talking-circuit. 
My invention as herein described is espe 
cially adapted for use in exchanges having 
only a moderate number of subscribers-say 
less than one thousand-in which multiple 
Switch-boards are not required. Certain fea 
tures of my invention shown herein have 
been heretofore described and claimed in my 
application, Serial No. 291,658, filed Novem 
25 ber 23, 1888, executed November 17, 1 SSS, for 
multiple-switch-board system. In said appli 
cation one feature consists of the use of con 
densers, one being placed in one of the con 
necting-cords and the other in circuit with 
the operator's telephone to prevent a false 
test signal. 
In my application, Serial No. 291,65S, filed 
November 23, 18SS, for telephone - exchange 
apparatus I have described and claimed a me 
tallic telephone-line circuit consisting of two 
branches, one branch being normally con 
lected with ground at the subscriber's sta 
tion and thence through the subscriber's bell 
to the telephone-switch, and thence to the 
central office, said branch being connected 
With the test portion of a socket on each of 
two or more switch-boards and being nor 
mally open, while the other branch, being nor 
mally open at the subscriber's station, ex 
45 tends to the other terminals of the same sock 
ets on said switch-boards, and thence through 
an annunciator and a battery to ground, in 
combination with the telephone-switch and a 
groundl-key at the subscriber's station, where. 
5o by on depressing the grounding-key current 
from the battery is sent through the indi 
vidual annunciator, while on operating the 
telephone-switch the two branches are united 
in metallic circuit; the combination, with the 
telephone-line extending from ground at the 55 
central office through a battery to terminals, 
one on each switch-board, and thence to the 
subscriber's station, and thence back to test 
terminals, one on each switch - board, of 
switching apparatus at the subscriber's sta- 6 O 
tion for forming a ground connection for the 
battery, or uniting the telephone-line through 
the subscriber's station in metallic circuit to 
connect the battery to the said test-terminals; 
the combination, with the telephone-line ex- 65 
tending from ground at the central office 
through a battery to terminals, one on each 
switch-board, and thence to the subscriber's 
station, and thence back to test-terminals, 
one on each switch-board, of Switching ap- 7 O 
paratus at the subscribel's station for form 
ing a ground connection for the battery, or 
uniting the telephone-line through the sub 
scriber's station in metallic circuit to connect 
the battery to the said test-terminals, and 75 
testing apparatus for determining the pres 
ence or absence of battery-current at said 
test-terminals at the different boards to de 
termine whether the line is in use. Such 
specific matter is therefore disclaimed as to 8o 
this application. 
My invention as described herein requires 
no test-circuits, and hence the condensel's are 
dispensed with. My invention hereill con 
sists of metallic telephone-circuits, each pro- 85 
vided with two branches, one branch being 
normally closed at the subscriber's station 
and open at a contact or terminal of the switch 
or connecting device upon the switch-board, 
while the other branch is normally open at 9C 
the subscriber's station and connects with an 
other terminal of the switch or connecting 
device upon the switch-board, and extends 
from said terminal through an annunciator, 
preferably constructed to operate as a self-in- 93 
duction coil, and thence through a battery to 
ground at the central office, a key being pro 
vided in this branch at the subscribers sta 
tion for closing the same to ground to operate 
the individual annunciator. 
ICO 
3O 
35 
 
3. 
442,146 
25 
5 
IO 
My invention consists, also, in a pair of loop 
plugs and their cords, the cords being con 
lected diagonally with the different terminals 
of the plugs, so that when the two plugs are 
inserted in terminals of two different lines 
only the telephone outfits will be included in 
the talking-circuit, the different sides of this 
talking-circuit being branched each through 
an individual annunciator and a battery to 
ground, the said individual annunciators be 
... ing constructed to act as self-induction coils. 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a diagram showing three sub 
scribers' stations, each connected with the 
switch-board at the central office with a pair 
Of loop-plugs and their cords, and the oper 
ator's telephone and calling apparatus upon 
the switch-board, the metallic circuits of two 
of said stations being looped together by 
means of plugs and cords. Fig. 2 is an ilius 
trative diagram of the circuits of four sub 
scribers stations, each connected through its 
individual annunciator at the central office 
and through a common ground-wire contain 
ing a battery, two of said stations being shown 
looped together. 
Like parts are indicated by similar letters 
of reference throughout the different figures. 
In Fig. 1 the circuits of station 3 are shown 
in their normal condition, the telephone rest 
ing upon the switch. The circuit of branch C. 
may be traced from ground through the bell 
to the telephone-switch and thence to socket 
or terminal b of the switch-board, the branch 
Cl being shown open at terminal b. Branch C 
is shown open at the upper contact of the 
Switch and may be traced through the tele 
phone and transmitter to terminale upon the 
Switch-board, and thence through the annun 
ciator f, and thence to the ground-wire g, in 
cluding the battery h. By means of a key i 
at station 3 branch c may be closed to ground, 
thus closing battery 7 through the annunci 
ator f to operate said annunciator, thus noti 
fying the central office of the call. 
The operator may call up any subscriber 
by inserting one of the loop-plugs in the 
Socket of the subscriber wanted and connect 
ing the generator k with the branch, which is 
normally closed at the subscriber's station 
that is to say, in case of station 3 the oper 
ator, by inserting a plug in the socket con 
sisting of terminals lye, would close the sleeve 
of the plug to terminal b, and thus by de 
pressing key c' or k', as the case might be, 
would send current through the bell at sta 
tion 3. Stations 1 and 2 are shown connected 
together for conversation by means of the 
loop-plugs l n and the cords connecting said 
plugs together. It will be observed that the 
strand n is connected with the sleeve of plug 
land with the tip of plug in, while the strand 
o, which connects with the tip of plug l, ex 
tends to the sleeve of plug m. Each plug is 
provided, as before stated, with two terminals, 
one terminal being upon the sleeve or shank 
of the plug and the other terminal being the 
tip of the plug. This is shown in detail in 
the sectional view of plug l. The sleeve of 
the plug when inserted, as shown, in a Socket 
of any line makes connection with the nor 
mally-open terminal of the socket, While the 
tip is closed to the terminal of the socket, 
which is provided with a branch connection 
through the annunciator and battery to 
ground. Thus, as more clearly shown in Fig. 
2, the normally-open branch p of the line of 
station 1 is connected with the normally 
closed branch q of station 2 through strand n, 
while the normally-closed branch q of the line 
of station 1 is connected through strand O with 
the normally-open branch p' of the line of 
station 2-that is to say, the open branches 
of any two lines are reciprocally connected, 
respectively, with the closed branches or limbs 
of said lines-that is to say, as before stated, 
open branch p is connected with closed branch 
of and closed branch q' is connected with 
open branch p. The talking-circuit thus 
formed includes only the telephones of the re 
spective subscribers. Moreover, the two sides 
of the metallic circuit, thus formed will be 
found branched each through a different coil 
to a common line including battery, and thence 
to ground at the central office. By means of 
a loop-switch the operator's telephone may 
be bridged into the circuit between the strands 
no, when desired. When the subscribers are 
through talking, each one on hanging up his 
telephone operates the individual annun 
ciator of the other, thus indicating that the 
conversation is finished. 
My invention admits of various modifica 
tions, which would readily suggest themselves 
to those skilled in the art, and I therefore do 
not limit myself to the constructions shown. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letter's 
Patent 
1. The combination, with two subscribers' 
stations, of their metallic-circuit telephone 
lines looped together to form a single metal 
lic circuit for conversation free of resistance, 
except the telephones, the different sides of 
said metallic circuit being provided with a 
branch circuit, each such branch circuit con 
taining the individual annunciator of its line, 
each annunciator constructed to Operate as a 
self-induction coil, and each of said branch 
circuits being connected to a ground branch, 
including a battery. 
2. The combination, with a switch-board, of 
telephone-lines connected there with, said tele 
phone-lines each consisting of two branches, 
one branch being normally closed at the sub 
scriber's station and connected through the 
bell and switch of the station and extending 
to one terminal of the line upon the Switch 
board, while the other branch is normally 
open at the subscriber's station and extends 
through the telephone at said station to the 
corresponding terminal upon the Switch 
board, from which terminal it is connected 
- 
45 
55 
75 
IOC 
2C 
2 
 
442,146 
3 
through an annunciator and a battery to 
ground, and Switching apparatus at the cen 
tral office adapted to loop together any two of 
said telephone-lines, the open terminals of the 
two lines being reciprocally connected with 
the grounded terminals of the other, whereby 
a talking-circuit is formed which includes the 
resistance of no electro-magnet coils except 
those of the telephone, while the different 
sides of said circuits are balanced through 
ground branches, including, respectively, the 
individual annunciators of the lines. 
:3. The loop-plugs connected with flexible 
cords, the two strands of said cords being 
each connected diagonally with the different 
terminals of said plugs, a switching device, 
and a telephone adapted to be bridged across 
said strands, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
4. A telephone - line consisting of two 
branches, one branch, as branch (t, extending 
through the signal-bell and telephone-switch 
of the subscriber's station, and thence to a 
normally-open terminal, as terminal b, upon 
the switch-board, the other branch, as branch 
c, being normally open at the subscriber's 
station and extending through the telephone 
to a terminal e, corresponding with terminal 
b, said terminale being connected through an 
individual annunciator f to a ground branch 
1, including battery, and a key i, connected 
O 
25 
35 
! with branch cat the subscriber's station, and 
switching and signaling apparatus at the Cen 
tral office, whereby the subscriber may call 
the central office or the central office the Sub 
scriber at will, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
5. A metallic-circuit telephone-line consist 
ing of two branches, one branch being ground 
ed at the subscriber's station through the Sub 
scriber's bell and the other branch being nor 
mally open at the subscriber's switch, the said 
grounded branch being normally open at the 
central office and the other branch being con 
nected through a switch and an annunciator 
at the central office to a wire containing a 
battery, in combination with a circuit-closing 
device between the bell and the bell contact 
of a telephone-switch for closing the branch 
containing the bell to the side of the circuit 
including the individual annunciator and 
battery, whereby the subscriber on operating 
said circuit-closing device may throw down 
the individual annunciator, substantially as 
described. 
In witness whereof I hereunto subscribe my 
name this 1st day of December, A. D. 1SSS. 
CHARLES E. SCRIBNER. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE P. BARTO, 
ELLA. EDLER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442246.txt	(No Model ) 
R. P. CHAPMAN. 
APPARATUS FOR ORNAMENTING. HOLLOW WARE, 
No. 442,246. 
Patented Dec. 9, 1890. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
$3xo-A 
E 
al 
seeI 
e 
AN 24 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
\ N 
N 
SSSSSSSSSS 
itri 
 
 
 
7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUSII P. CHAPMAN, OF IARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
APPARATUS FOR ORNAMENTING HOLLOW WARE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,246, dated December 9, 1890. 
Application filed July 2, 1890, Serial No, 357,535, (No model.) 
5 
EO 
25 
35 
-45 
To all, whom it may concer'7. 
Be it known that I, RUSH. P. CHAPMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hart 
ford, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Apparatus for Orna 
menting Hollow Ware, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact specification. 
The invention relates to the class of appa 
ratus for embossing and reproducing by hy 
draulic pressure repouss raised or engraved 
designs on hollow ware, as tea and coffee pots, 
sugar-bowls, cream-pitchers, and the like; 
and the object of the improvement is to pro 
vide a simple, Substantial, efficient, and easily 
operated apparatus wherein blanks may be 
placed and subjected to the force of liquid 
under great pressure, whereby they are ex 
panded and made to conform to all the details 
of the design. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the apparatus 
with part cut in central vertical section. 
Fig. 2 is a detail enlarged sectional view of a 
portion of the apparatus. Fig. 3 is a hori 
Zontal section of a portion on plane denoted 
by the broken line acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a 
detail view of the plug used to cover the 
dies, showing a modified means for removal. 
In the views, the letter Ci indicates the bed 
of the apparatus, which is cast of metal to 
any desirable shape which will give the requi 
site strength to sustain the severe pressure 
to which it is subjected. In the chamber b, 
formed in the lower part of the bed and closed 
at the bottom by a plug c, is placed a piston 
d, which has on its lower side a suitable 
packing d" to make it tight and on its upper 
side a hub f of much less diameter, with a 
packing f', that fits a reduced portion b' of 
the chamber b. A duct e, provided with a 
stop - cock e', leads from the force-pump 
through the bed to the chamber below the 
piston, through which liquid may be pumped 
into the chamber to raise the piston, and lead 
ing from the pump through the bed into the 
chamber above the piston is a duct g, having 
a stop-cock g. 
In the upper part of the bed is a die-cham 
ber h for holding the dies i, in the faces of 
which the pattern of the ornamentation to 
 
be reproduced is formed. A portion of the 
wall of this chamber is preferably tapering, 
so that the dies may be easily removed, and 
a portion is formed to receive the plug or 
coveri, which is screwed down upon the tops 
of the dies to hold them in place. This plug 
may be turned into place by a hand-wheel, as 
shown in Fig. 1, or it may be provided with a 
shaft f' and pulley f', that can be driven by 
a belt to screw in or out the plug. A portion 
of the shaft may be provided with a thread 
of the same pitch as the thread on the hub, 
and this thread may travel in a bracket, so 
as to raise the hub away from the top of the 
bed when removing or inserting the dies. 
An 
annular bushing k of the proper diameter, 
having a flange which extends beneath the 
dies, is placed around the neck of the blank 
B to fill the bottom of the chamber and make 
it tight, and, if desired, a packing O may be 
placed beneath the bushing to prevent the 
leakage of liquid back of the bushing and 
dies. 
A small passage l is made from the reduced 
portion b of the chamber l to the die-clham 
ber h, and the bottom of the die-chamber 
around this passage is provided with a re 
movable outwardly-expanding packing in, of 
a size that fits the interior of the neck of the 
blank, so that when the liquid is forced into 
the blank this packing seals the neck and 
prevents leakage. This packing is preferably 
held in place by a centrally-perforated screw 
in, the opening through which coincides with 
A pipe p, provided with a stop 
the passage l. 
cockp', leads from the outside of the bed to 
the top of the interior of the blank through 
the passage l to permit the escape of air when 
the blank is being filled with liquid. 
In practicing the invention a blank which 
has been turned or spun to approximate the 
final shape is placed within the cavity of the 
dies, the dies inserted in the die-chamber with 
the blank in an inverted position, and the plug 
screwed down upon the dies to hold them in 
place. With the cock e' closed and the cocks 
g' and p' opened, the pump is started and 
the blank filled with liquid through the duct 
g, air being allowed to escape through the 
pipe p. After all the air has been expelled 
and the blank filled with liquid the cock p' is 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
442,246 
closed and the pressure of the liquid expands 
the blank, so that it partially conforms to 
the dies. The cock g is then closed and the 
cock e' opened, and the pressure of the liq 
uid from the pumps is exerted on the large 
area of the lower surface of the piston in the 
chamber b, which pressure is transmitted 
with greatly-multiplied power by the small 
hub f to the liquid already in the blank, caus 
ing it to further expand and conform to every 
detail of the ornamentation of the design in 
the dies. If it is desired, the blank may be 
filled with liquid, which is retained by a 
small cork q, inserted in the neck before it is 
placed in the dies, then it will be unneces 
sary to provide an outlet for the escape of air 
from the blank, which, on account of its elas 
ticity, in case of the giving away of any of 
the parts would be followed by disastrous re 
sults. After the blank has been sufficiently 
expanded the plug i is unscrewed, the dies 
removed, a new blank substituted for the fin 
ished vessel, and the hydraulic process re 
peated. The blank containing the liquid is 
thoroughly sealed in the bed, and there is no 
possibility of leakage of the liquid to the ex 
terior of the bed or behind the blank, and a 
separate hydraulic press to support the parts 
is not required, as in the prior existing appa 
ratus for this purpose. As the blank is al 
most completely expanded into the orna 
mentation of the dies by pressure of the liq 
uid pumped directly into it through the duct 
g, it requires but little more liquid to further 
complete the expanding. The area of the 
hub has compared with the area of the pis 
ton may be very small, whereby great press 
ure may be obtained in the final operation 
with but little movement of the piston and 
hub. 
I claim as my invention: 
1. A hydraulic shaping apparatus consist 
ing of a bed provided with a piston-chamber 
containing a piston, a die-chamber contain 
ing dies which inclose a blank, a passage 
from the piston-chamber to the die-chamber, 
and a duct leading from a pump to the pis 
ton-chamber below the piston, substantially 
as specified. 
2. A hydraulic shaping apparatus consist 
ing of a bed provided with a piston-chamber 
containing a piston, a die-chamber contain 
ing dies which inclose a blank, a passage 
from the piston-chamber to the die-chamber, 
and ducts leading from a pump to the piston 
chamber, one above and the other below the 
piston, substantially as specified. 
3. A hydraulic shaping apparatus consist 
ing of a bed provided with a piston-chamber 
containing a piston, a die-chamber contain 
ing dies which inclose a blank, a passage 
from the piston-chamber to the die-chamber, 
a duct leading from a pump to the piston 
chamber below the piston, and a pipe leading 
from the interior of the blank to the exterior 
of the bed, substantially as specified. 
4. A hydraulic shaping apparatus consist 
ing of a bed provided with a piston-chamber 
containing a piston, a die-chamber contain 
ing dies which inclose a blank, a passage 
from the piston-chamber to the die-chamber, 
ducts leading from a pump to the piston 
chamber, one above and the other below the 
piston, and a pipe leading from the interior 
of the blank to the exterior of the bed, sub 
stantially as specified. 
5. A hydraulic shaping apparatus consist 
ing of a bed provided with a piston-ehamber 
of two different diameters, containing a pis 
ton of two diameters, a die-chamber contain 
ing dies which inclose a blank, a passage 
from the smaller part of the piston-chamber 
to the die-chamber, and ducts leading from a 
pump to the piston-chamber, one below the 
enlarged part and the other above the smaller 
part of the piston, substantially as specified. 
6. A hydraulic shaping apparatus consist 
ing of a bed provided with a piston-chamber 
containing a piston, a removable plug closing 
the piston-chamber, a die-chamber contain 
ing dies which inclose a blank, the neck of 
which is surrounded with a removable bush 
ing, a removable plug closing the die-cham 
ber, a passage leading from the piston-cham 
ber to the die-chamber, and ducts leading 
from a pump into the piston-chamber, one 
above and the other below the piston, sub 
stantially as specified. 
RUSH. P. CHAPMAN. 
Witnesses: 
HARRY R. WILLIAMS, 
ARTHUR. B. J.ENKINS. 
55 
75 
95 
IO 
35 
45 
So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442346.txt	(No Model.) 
E. WRIGHT. 
FRICTION BAND CUTCH, 
No. 442,346. 
Patented Dec. 9, 1890. 
 
 
 
A 2 
z-. 
-//v22 zz zr. 
rtz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD WRIGIIT, OF WORCESTER, MASSACEIUSETTS, 
FR CON - BAND CUTCH 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,846, dated December 9, 1890. 
Application filed May 10, 1890, Serial No. 351,248, (No model.) 
To all who in it inctly conce fil. 
Beit known that I, EDWARD WRIGHT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Worces 
ter, in the county of Worcester and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a rew and use 
ful Friction-Band Clutch, of which the follow 
ing, together with the accompanying draw 
ings, is a specification sufficiently full, clear, 
and exact to enable persons skilled in the art 
to which this invention appertains to make 
and use the Salme. 
The object of my present invention is to 
afford a friction-band clutch of improved con 
struction adapted for clutching onto the hub 
of a wheel or pulley, and to provide therein 
means for the convenient adjustment of the 
operating parts to take up the wear in the 
mechanism and give accuracy of actio). 
These objects I attain by the mechanism here 
in shown and described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side yiew of 
my improved clutch. Fig. 2 is a transverse 
section through the shaft and pulley-hub, 
showing an end of the clutch mechanism. 
Fig. 3 is a horizontal section at line car. Fig. 
4 is a perspective view of the friction-band. 
Fig. 5 shows the inner side of the closing 
lever. Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the ad 
justing-block, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view 
showing a spring that may in Some instances 
be employed. 
Referring to parts, A denotes the shaft; B, 
the drive wheel or pulley; C, the body or 
case of the clutch; D, the fiction-band; F, 
the closing-lever; G, the shipper-sleeve pro 
vided with the wedge-shaped tongue for mov 
ing the closing-lever; I, an adjustable seat or 
fulcrum-block, and IX the adjusting-screw for 
said fulcrum-block. 
The casing C is fitted upon and secured to 
the shaft. A by a set-screw or in other suit 
able manner, and has at one end a cylin 
drical chamber for receiving the end of the 
wheel-hub and containing the friction-band 
ID, which surrounds the end of said hub in a 
well-known manner. The adjacent surfaces 
of the hub and band are turned off or finished 
in the proper manner to engage each other 
by frictional contact. Adjoining said cylin 
drical chamber is a side chamber, within 
which is arranged the fulcrum-block I and the 
head of the closing-lever F. 
The friction-band D is made, as shown in. 
Figs. 2 and 4, open at one side and provided 
with a lug or shoulder or transverse rib d on 
each of its ends. One of said ribs bears, 
against a shoulder e on the casing, while the 
other engages with the closing-lever F, which 
is made, as shown in Figs. 2 and 5, of semi 
circular form to extend around the case, so 
that its tail end F will be at the opposite side 
of the shaft-axis from its head. Said lever 
is best provided with a rounded head having 
an in Wardly-projecting lip at fanda bearing 
shoulder F on its outer side. The rounded 
part of the lever-head fits into a concavity in 
the fulcrum-block I, its lip flocks over the 
flanged on the end of the friction-band, and 
its upper shoulder F bears against the up 
per part i of the fulcrum-block, the fulcrum 
point being just above the rounded portion. 
The tail end F of the lever is confined be 
tween lugs L, that project from the exterior 
of the casing C. 
The fulcrum-block I is fitted and supported 
within the case in such nanner that it can be 
adjusted back and forth, and it is sustained 
against the pressure of the closing-lever by 
the adjusting-screw ly, which is screw 
threaded in the side of the body, its end en 
tering a recess Ix in the back of the block, as 
indicated. The casing, the lever, and the full 
crum-block are so made that the pieces match 
together directly from the castings without 
any special fitting, and said lever and block 
are confined in a manner to give freedom of 
action, while prevented from dropping out of 
the casing, by means of a stud, pin, or screw 
M, that is fixed in the metal of the casing and 
passes down through an opening in in the 
block and a recess 
in the lever-head in ra 
dial direction, as indicated by dotted lines in 
Fig. 2. 
The tongue of the shipper-sleeve is wedge 
shaped, as at G', and enters between a lug C, 
fixed on the casing, and the tail end F, and 
Swings the lever F outward, the shoulder at 
F' acting as a fulcrum against the block I, 
causing the lip f to press forward the end of 
the band D, so that said band will bind firmly 
by frictional contact upon the end of the pull 
ley-hub, thus clutching the shaft and pulley 
together for operation. 
The friction-band may be made, in some 
75 
95 
CO 
IO 
2o. 
35 
45 
442,846 
45 
55 
friction-band D, the closing-lever F, having 
the lip f and bearing-shoulder F, the adjust 
able fulcrum-block I, fitted in the casing and 
bearing against the closing-lever at said shoul 
der, and the adjusting-screw K, acting against 
said fulcrum-block, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, Substantially as de 
scribed, of the chambered body or casing C, 
the friction-band D, having transverse lugs d 
at its ends, the closing-lever F, having the lip 
fand shoulder F, the fulcrum-block I, and 
the expanding-spring S between the ends of 
the friction-band, for the purposes set forth. 
3. The combination, with the casing C, le 
ver F, and fulcrum-block I, of the stud, pin, 
or screw M, fixed in the casing and engaging 
recesses m, 
in said lever-head and fulcrum 
block, for confining said lever and fulcrum 
block within the chamber of the casing, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the shaft A, the wheel 
B, rotatable thereon, the clutch-casing C, keyed 
to said shaft and chambered to receive the 
end of the wheel-hubb, the open-side friction 
band D, embracing said hub within the casing 
and provided with ribs datits ends, the semi 
circular closing-lever F, having the fulcrum 
shoulder F, the lip f for engaging said band, 
and the tail F at the opposite side of the 
axis, the adjustable fulcrum-block I, sustain 
ing the head of said lever, the block-adjust 
ing screw K, and the shipper-sleeve G, pro 
vided with a wedge-shaped tongue G', enter 
ing between the tail of the closing-lever and 
a lug C' fixed on the casing, all substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
Witness my hand this 24th day of April, 
A. D. 1890. 
EDWARD WRIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
FANNIE. W. WRIGHT, 
ELLA P. BLENUS. 
O 
25 
instances, of metal that will itself spring out 
Ward from the face of the hub. In other in 
stances it may be desirable to form this band 
of copper or some metal that will not have 
sufficient expansive force to relieve the fric 
tional contact. In such cases I introduce a 
spring S for opening the band. Said spring 
is best formed, substantially as indicated in 
Figs. 2 and 7, in U shape, of flat metal, and 
introduced into the chamber beneath the le 
ver-head, the ends of the spring resting against 
the lugs on the ends of the friction-band for 
exerting thereon an expansive force tending 
to open the band when the latter is released 
by the withdrawal of the wedge-shaped tongue 
from beneath the tail of the lever. I do not, 
however, desire to confine my invention to 
this particular form of spring, as a spiral coil 
or other suitably-shaped spring can be used 
in the same position, to give equivalent ac 
tion as the U-shaped spring here shown. 
The shipper-sleeve G is fitted with a spline g 
to move longitudinally on the shaft, and can 
be operated in the usual manner. 
By the use of the adjustable fulcrum-block 
I, in combination with the head of the lever, 
as herein described, the clutch can be readily 
adjusted for giving the required degree of 
friction without undue pressure, or for tak 
ing up the wear of the parts oc3asioned by 
use. The operation of the clutch will thus be 
smooth and easy, and the shipper can move 
in and out freely without binding or sticking 
and Without requiring the exertion of extreme 
force to effect the clutching operation. 
It will be understood that I do not claim, 
broadly, a friction-band with a lever for op 
erating the same in a clutch, as such parts 
have heretofore been known and used. 
What I claim as my invention, herein to be 
secured by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the casing C, the 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442446.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 442,446. 
H. H. LUS COMB, 
TROLLEY WIRE HANCER 
Patented Dec. 9, 1890. 
 
 
  
 
5 
IO 
15 
23 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY HERBERT LUSCOMB, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO 
CHARLES TENNANT LEE AND THE GOUILD & WATSON COMPANY, BOTH 
OF SAME PLACE. 
RO LLEY W RE HAN G E R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,446, dated December 9, 1890. 
Application filed September 19, 1890, Serial No, 365,493, (No model.) 
To al./ ? /voni, ili 7?? ? ??? ????: 
Be it known that I, HENRY HERBERT LUS 
COMB, of Boston, county of Suffolk, State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Insulators, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the drawings accompanying and 
forming a part hereof, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation showing my device 
as embodied in an insulator for securing an 
Overhead conductor to the supporting-wires. 
Fig. 2 is a section on line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
shows a modification of the device applied to 
an insulator of different shape. 
I have shown and I will describe my im 
provement as embodied in an insulator 
adapted for use in securing an overhead con 
ductor such as is employed for electric-rail 
way purposes to the cross-wires which sup 
port it; but it is obvious that my improve. 
ment may be applied to any form of insu 
lator adapted to secure a conductor or other 
part, which it may be desirable to take down 
and replace, to the permanent construction 
by which it is supported. 
Overhead conductors are now commonly 
Secured to the insulators which hold them in 
position by solder, and the operation of sol 
dering, as also the action of the solder itself, 
tends to diminish the strength of the con 
ductor and is otherwise undesirable. WVilhen 
the conductor is soldered to the insulator, it 
is difficult to detach it, and this is also in 
convenient and expensive. Overhead con 
ductors have also been secured in place by 
clamping devices; but so far as known to me 
these devices encircle the conductor or pro 
ject below it, and so offer an obstruction to 
the passage of the trolley, which is objec 
tionable. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
an insulator which will obviate these objec 
tions, by means of which the conductor may 
be held securely in place and at the same 
time be detached when desired, and which 
will also, when used to secure overhead con 
ductors for railways, present no obstacle or 
roughness to the trolley in passing; and it 
consists in the clamping insulator constructed 
as hereinafter described, and which is more 
particularly pointed out in the claim which 
is appended hereto and which forms a part 
hereof. 
In the following description I will refer to 
the parts as shown in the accompanying draw 
ings. 
A is the overhead conductor. 
B is the cross-wire to which the insulator 
is secured. 
C is a rod of metal, which is enlarged at the . 
end which comes in contact with the Con 
ductor, as shown at d, the enlarged end be 
ing split at e, so that its two halves will form 
a clamp, the jaws of which may be sprung 
apart, and which are shaped to receive the 
conductor, the ends of the clamps shown at 
if being shaped to embrace the conductor 
without entirely encircling it and to clasp it 
without forming an obstruction to the pas 
sage of the trolley. That portion of the rod 
Cwhich adjoins the clamping-jaws is beveled 
or conical, as shown at ki, and a correspond 
ingly-beveled collar g is placed on the rod C, 
so that as the collar is crowded down on the 
enlarged portion of the rod the clamps are 
forced together and made to clamp the con 
ductor and hold it securely. The insulating 
material M is placed on the rod and may be 
of any suitable shape, and above it a nutlis 
screwed onto the rod, the upper end of which 
is threaded for the purpose, and by ScreWing 
down the nut the collar g may be crowded 
down and the clamps set on the conductor. 
A washer of metal is preferably placed be 
tween the nut land the insulating material. 
The unscrewing of the nut enables the collar 
ty to be moved back from the conical portion 
of the rod Cand the clamps released. As Will 
be clear, instead of the nut and collar for 
closing the clamp, a simple nut I lnay be em 
ployed, the conical portion of the rod C be 
ing threaded and the nut being of a shape to 
correspond thereto, as shown in Fig. 3. To 
loosen the clamp and remove the conductor 
it is only necessary to un screw the nuut h, 
while the reverse movement of the nut Se 
cures the clamp rigidly to the conductor. If 
the open space between the ends f of the 
clamp-jaws is not sufficient to admit of the 
conductor being inserted when the clamp is 
55 
75 
I OO 
2 
442,446 
What I claim is 
An insulator for overhead conductors, Con - 
sisting of an insulated clamping device, said 
clamping device having two jaws curved and 
tapered at the ends to partially encircle the 
conductor and having beveled portions k and 
a correspondingly-beveled collar co-operating 
with said beveled portions to close said clamp 
ing device, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
IENRY HERBERT LUSCOMB. 
15 
2 ? 
Witnesses: 
- 
WM. A. MACLEOD, 
C. E. NOLTE. 
Open, the Workman may spring the clamp 
apart sufficiently to enable him to insert the 
conductor by employing the end of a screw 
driver orother simpletool. Thejawsjof the 
clamp are so curved and tapered or thinned 
down, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, that they 
partially encircle and clamp the conductor, 
while at the same time offering no obstruc 
tion to the passage of the trolley. 
Should the nuth, Fig. 3, tend to loosen when 
the device is in use, a check-nut may be ap 
plied to the rod C above said nut h, or any 
well-known means may be employed to pre 
vent said nut loosening. 
I. ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442546.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
S. S. PUTNAM, Jr., & W. W. WHITMARSH. 
SEIF ADJUSTING FENDER OR GUARD FOR, RAILWAY CARS, 
No. 442,546. 
Patented Dec. 9, 1890, 
 
 
 
tly-e 
VSE, 
Saif 
mi S.E. Still e 
SENSENSE 
A 
C 
\ A 4-4-Sada 
E Self 
An 
 
SSS-SE 
SS 
s 
(No Model.) 
S. S. PUTNAM, Jr., & W. W. WHITMARSH. 
SEIF ADJUSTING FENDER OR GUARD FOR RAILWAY CARS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 442,546. 
a- 
Patented Deo. 9, 1890. 
   
92729.45s FA 
Eisgu 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SILAS S. PUTN AM, JR., AND WILLIAM W. WHITMARSH, OF BOSTON, MASSA 
CHUSETTS, 
SELF-AJUST N G F ENDER OR GUARD FOR RAWAY CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,546, dated December 9, 1890. 
Application filed Septemberll, 1890, Serial No. 364,704 (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, SILAS S. PUTNAM, Jr., 
and WILLIAM W. WHITMARSH, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Boston, in the county 
of Suffolk and State of Massachusetts, have 
invented certain Improvements in Self-Ad 
justing Fenders or Guards for Railway-Cars, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, making part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of one end 
of a street-railway car having our improved 
fender or guard applied thereto. Fig. 2 is an 
end elevation of the lower portion of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a pian view of the under side of the 
same. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal vertical sec 
tion on the line aca: of Fig. 2. 
Our invention relates to an improvement 
on the Self-adjusting fender or guard for rail 
way-cars for which Letters Patent of the 
United States were granted to S. S. Putnam, 
Jr., July 1, 1890, No. 431,393, and has for its 
object to provide a means whereby the fender 
or guard may be pushed back horizontally 
beneath the end of the car to which it is at 
tached, so that it will be entirely out of the 
Way When not required for use-as, for in 
stance, when the car is to be stored away in 
the car-house, where it is desirable to econo 
mize space by placing the cars as near to 
gether as possible, or where two cars are to 
be coupled together. 
To this end our invention consists in the 
combination, with a railway-car, of a fender 
or guard arranged to slide horizontally be 
neath the end of the car to which it is at 
tached, whereby it may be drawn out into a 
position for use or pushed back out of the way 
When not required, a suitable catch or retain 
ing device being provided for locking or hold 
ing the fender in place when drawn out or 
pushed in, as hereinafter set forth. 
In the said drawings, A represents the front 
portion of a railway-car, to the under side of 
which are secured two guide-bars B B, pro 
vided on their inner sides with grooves a, 
within which fit the side pieces c. c of a hori 
Zontally-sliding frame C, the said side pieces 
c c being connected to transverse rods d d. 
To the front end of this frame C is pivoted 
the fender D, preferably composed of sheet 
metal, and of any suitable or desirable form. 
The bolts ee, upon which the fender Dishung, 
pass through suitable apertures at or near its 
rear upper corners and enter the front ends 
of the supporting-frame C, the fender being 
supported with its lower edge quite close to 
the ground and being free to rock or oscillate 
upon its pivots e. e. either downwardly or up 
wardly. The pivots e e are so placed that the 
fender will swing downward by its own weight 
to its proper level, in which position it is Sup 
ported by a spring f, coiled around one of the 
transverse rods d, the front looped end of said 
spring fitting within a guide 9, secured to the 
under side of the fender, whereby if the fender 
is depressed or rocked downward by encoun 
tering an obstruction it will be instantly re 
turned to its original position when released 
in a manner similar to that shown in the pat 
ent of S. S. Putnam, Jr., before referred to. 
In case, however, the fender is brought into 
contact with the ground by the excessive jolt 
ing or longitudinal rocking motion of the car, 
it will readily yield or rock upward on its piv 
ots ee and be instantly returned to its proper 
level by its own weight, combined with the ac 
tion of the spring f, as the end of the car to 
which it is attached rises, thus avoiding any lia 
bility of breakage or injury to the parts, as 
would occur if the fender were rigidly attached 
to the car. The spring.fmay be of any suitable 
form or description, and may be so applied, 
as shown in the drawings, that it will return 
the fender to its normal position when rocked 
either upward or downward; or it may bear 
ranged to merely raise the fender after hav 
ing been depressed, in which case the weight 
of the fender will be relied upon to carry it 
down after it has been rocked upward. 
The front edge of the fender is provided 
with a curved or crescent shaped flange i, the 
inner edge 10 of which is slightly below the 
level of the front edge of the fender, whereby 
the latter is prevented from actually striking 
the ground, the edge 10 of the flange receiv 
ing the blow and sliding along the ground, 
thus preventing the front edge of the fender, 
if brought down near to the ground, from 
catching under a stone or other obstruction, 
and thereby avoiding liability of accident 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
45 
 
2 
442,546 
from this cause. This flange, however, is 
fully described and claimed in the aforesaid 
patent of S. S. Putnam, Jr., and forms no part 
of the present invention. 
5. When the car is to be used, the horizontal 
ly-sliding supporting-frame C is moved for: 
Ward in its guideways into the position seen 
in Figs. I and 3, a suitable stop or stops h be 
ing provided to limit its outward movement. 
(O This causes the fender D to project beyond 
the front end of the dasher of the car, as de 
sired, in which position it is locked by a suit 
able catch or retaining device, which in the 
present instance consists of a double lever G, 
I5 fulcrumed on the front rod d, the front looped 
end of said lever G being adapted to engage 
with a hook k, projecting from the under side 
of the draw-head or bumper n, thus holding 
the frame C and fender D securely in place 
2O against any force which may tend to push 
them backward. When the car is to be placed 
in the car-house, where it is desirable to econo 
mize space to the greatest possible extent, or 
where two cars are to be coupled together, the 
25 retaining device G is unfastened and the 
frame C, with the fender D, slid back hori 
Zontally beneath the front end of the car, as 
seen in Fig. 4, in which position the fender is 
entirely under the car, out of the way, no por 
3o tion of it projecting beyond the platform H. 
Suitable stops in serve to limit the backward 
movement of the frame C, and when the 
fender is pushed back as far as permitted by 
said stops it is held securely in place by the 
35 retaining-lever G, which is adapted to engage 
with a hook q, suitably placed to receive it, 
It is obvious that the retaining device may 
be adapted to hold the frame C in any desired 
position intermediate between its extremes of 
4o movement, whereby the fender may be se 
cured in place with its front end projecting 
more or less beyond the end of the car, as may 
o be desired. 
Each end of the car is to be provided with 
45 one of the above-described horizontally-slid 
ing fenders, and when the car is in use the 
fender at the rear end is pushed beneath the 
car into the position seen in Fig. 4, entirely 
out of the way. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
-- 
1. The combination, with a railway-car, of 
a fender or guard arranged to slide horizon" 
tally beneath the end of the car to which it 
is attached, whereby it may be drawn out into 
a position for use or pushed back out of the 
way when not required, substantially as set 
fortl). 
2. The combination, with a railway-car, of . 
a fender or guard secured to a supporting 
frame adapted to slide horizontally in guides 
beneath the end of the car, means for holding 
said fender in place when adjusted, and stops 
for limiting the horizontal sliding movement 
of the fender in either direction, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a railway-car, a self-adjusting fender 
or guard pivoted to a supporting-frame adapt 
ed to slide horizontally in suitable guides be 
neath the end of the car to which the fender 
is attached, said fender being adapted to rock 
or oscillate on its pivots toward or from the 
ground independently of the car to which it 
is attached, means for holding said fender at 
the proper level and automatically returning 
it to its normal position after being rocked or 
oscillated, and a retaining device for holding 
the sliding frame and fender in position when 
drawn out into an operative position or 
pushed in beneath the car when not required 
for use, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a railway-car, the combination of the 
fender D, pivoted to the frame C, arranged 
to slide horizontally in guides on the under 
side of the car, the spring f, adapted to sup 
port the fender at its proper level and auto 
matically return it to its normal position af 
ter being rocked or oscillated, stops for limit 
ing the horizontal sliding movement of the 
frame C in either direction, and the lever G, 
adapted to engage with hooks or catches and 
lock or hold the frame C and fender D in po 
sition when drawn out for use or pushed back 
out of the way beneath the car, substantially 
as set forth. 
Witness our hands this 5th day of Septem 
ber, A.D. 1890. 
SILAS S, PUTNAM, JR. 
WILLIAM W. WHITMARSHI. 
In presence of- 
P. E. TESCHEMACHER, 
HARRY W. AIKEN. 
- 
55 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442646.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 442,646. 
 
G. T. SONGER. 
GATE LATCH, 
Patented De 0, 16, 1890. 
I 
s e 
I Am I 
g 
IIH A44N 
Im/W I 
IHI. TH s4Y-2 
it is A. 
A 
s S 
'E 
 
 
 
Ipiopiar 
l&oore 626.3267er 
"A" 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GORDON T. SONGER, OF ELIZABETHTON, TENNESSEE. 
GATE LATCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,646, dated December 16, 1890. 
Application filed August 5, 1890, Serial No. 361,062, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GORDON T. SONGER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Eliza 
bethton, in the county of Carter and State of 
Tennessee, have invented a new and useful 
Gate-Latch, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
gate-latches; and it consists in certain novel 
features hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a gate provided with my 
improved latch, the gate being shown locked 
and with parts broken away. Fig. 2 is a simi 
lar view showing the gate unlocked. Fig. 3 
is a view of a modification. Fig. 4 is a detail 
View of the vertically-movable bar. 
The gate A is of the usual construction, 
and is supported on the hinge-post B in any 
desired manner. The latch-post C is pro 
vided in its inner side with recesses D, and 
on the gate I mount the horizontal sliding 
bolts E, which are adapted to engage the said 
recesses. The bolts slide through suitable 
openings in the end bar of the gate, and their 
rear ends are guided by a supporting-bar F, 
secured to the rails of the gate. A leaf-spring 
G is secured to the inner side of this sup 
porting-bar between the bolts, and its ends 
bear on the rear ends of the bolts, so as to pro 
ject them normally into engagement with the 
recesses D. The bolts are provided in their 
under sides near their rear ends with recesses 
or sockets H, which are engaged by the upper 
ends of the angle-levers I, which are full 
crumed on the rails of the gate and have their 
Outer ends engaging recesses or sockets J in 
a vertically-disposed bar K at the front end 
of the gate, which is reciprocated vertically 
by an operating - lever L, fulcrumed on a 
standard M, projecting from the upper rail of 
the gate. 
In practice the bolts are normally projected 
into engagement with the recesses in the latch 
post by the spring G, as shown and as will 
be readily understood. When it is desired 
to open the gate, the operating-lever is vi 
brated, so as to raise the reciprocating bar K, 
thereby causing the levers I to swing on their 
pivots, so as to slide the bolts backward. The 
bolts will thus be disengaged from the latch 
post and the gate permitted to Swing open. 
It will be observed from the foregoing de 
scription that I have provided a gate-latch 
which is simple in its construction and which 
is composed of few parts compactly arranged. 
The latch is easily operated and will effect 
ually prevent sagging or twisting of the gate, 
as it employs two bolts, one near the top and 
bottom, respectively, of the gate, as shown. 
When the latch is applied to a large gate, 
the reciprocating bar is operated by the lever 
L, as above described; but when applied to a 
small gate the said bar is preferably operated 
by means of the devices shown in Fig. 3. The 
reciprocating bar is provided with a series of 
rack-teeth N on its inner or rear side, and 
these rack-teeth are engaged by a segmental 
gear O on a rock-shaft P, which is mounted 
on the upper rail of the gate and provided 
with suitable handles Q at its ends. This 
device will operate in the same manner as 
that shown in the other figures, but will be 
more desirable on a small gate, as it requires 
less room. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
The combination of the sliding bolts, the 
spring bearing thereon, the angle-levers con 
nected to the bolts, the vertically-reciprocat 
ing bar connected to the angle-levers, and 
mechanism for operating said bar, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GORDON T. SONGER. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES D. JENKINS, 
IDAVID STORER JENKINS. 
so 
60 
7 o 
85. 
IO 
T 5 
3O 
45 
 
EPs 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442746.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 442,746. 
A. R. BUSH, 
PENDENT CLEAT, 
sil. Patented Deo, 16, 1890. 
- - - - - - - - - - w - - - - - - - - - - - m - - - - - - - - - r- -'-- 
 
 
  
53 
s w. NSNS 7% 
SN y s A l 
w 
s 
S.SS9. 
NSS5/ % S 
2 
V I 
W. ESSES 
-% CZ-47 
62-6-64 
| nue tor. 
622-67622 Ze. Zsas/ea 
27 4-4, 727-7 
EnoRRs PETERs co, Photo-ITHo, washingTON, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR. R. BUSH, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO PAINE & 
FRANCIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
PENDENT CLEAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,746, dated December 16, 1890. 
Application filed June 4, 1890, Serial No. 354,222 (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whon, it invay concern. 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR. R. BUSH, of 
Boston, county of Suffolk, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvement in Pend 
ent Cleats, of which the following description, 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings, is a specification, like letters on the draw 
ings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a pendent cleat especially adapted to be used 
as a substitute for rosettes, by which incan 
descent electric lights may be suspended. 
My improved pendent cleat is more partic 
ularly designed for use in mills, factories, and 
like buildings, especially on high-tension cir 
cuits. 
The particular features of my invention will 
be pointed out in the claim at the end of this 
specification. 
Figure 1 represents in elevation a pendent 
cleat embodying my invention as secured to 
the ceiling and having suspended from it an 
incandescent lamp; Fig. 2, a longitudinal sec 
tion through the center of the cleat, the sec 
tion being supposed to be taken on line at ac, 
Fig. 3; and Fig. 3, a top or plan view of the 
lower part or member removed. 
My improved pendent cleat is preferably 
composed of two blocks or members a ca', of 
mica, porcelian, or other insulating material. 
The member a is preferably made oblong in 
shape, and on its rear side, preferably near the 
longitudinal center of the same, the said mem 
ber is provided with a cavity or recess a, ex 
tended, preferably, about half-way through the 
said member. The member a is provided with 
a hole or opening Ci', through which are passed 
the usual insulated wires b' b, connected to 
the socket b of the incandescent lamp b. The 
wires b' bare preferably tied into a knot b 
within the recess C, and the ends of the said 
wires are bared or uncovered, and the said 
uncovered ends are passed out through suit 
able holes c c' and electrically joined to the 
line-wires c' c, preferably by metallic washers 
c c, which are clamped together and secured 
45 
to the member a by binding-screws c' c'. The 
member a, is secured, as herein shown, to the 
member a' by screws c, which are extended 
through the member a' and into the ceiling c" 
of the mill-room or other structure. The mem 
bera' is preferably provided with a flange or 
lip d, within which the member a is fitted. I 
prefer to employ the member a', but it is evil 
dent the ceiling itself may constitute the Said 
member. By means of the knot b strain is 
removed from the ends of the wires connected 
to the binding-screws. 
My improved pendent cleat is simple in con 
struction, cheap, and efficient in operation, 
and can be very quickly and easily placed in 
position, thereby effecting a very considerable 
saving in the cost of wiring a mill, factory, or 
other building. 
I prefer to make the member a of insulat 
ing material, but I do not desire to limit my 
self in this respect, as the said block might be 
made of metallined with insulating material 
such, for instance, as mica or asbestus. 
claim 
55 
The combination, with a pendent cleat con 
sisting of the members a ca', the member a 
having a cavity o on its rear side and pro 
vided with holes a c c', extended from said 
cavity to the outside of the member C, bind 
ing - screws secured to the member Cl, and 
screws c, to secure the member a to the men 
ber a , of an incandescent electric light hav 
ing its insulated wires b' b extended through 
the hole a' into the cavity and provided therein 
with a knot b, the ends of the said wires be 
ing extended out through the holes C c' and 
secured to the binding-screws c, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. . 
75 
85 
ARTHUR. R. BUSH, 
Witnesses: 
JAS. H. CHURCHILL, 
EMMA. J. BENNETT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442846.txt	(No Model.) 
E. T. WHITING 
HOT AIR, DRUM, 
No. 442,846, 
Patented Deo, 16, 1890. 
Q is 
- 
S. 
- 
U 
* - 
f 
-s 
NQ 
r 
O - 
S 
"all 
his 
=== Elli", it's 
st 
s 
O 
----- 
Al-L-- 
- 
28%.coyoy 
Sy 
, 
N 
u 
c 
3Wvew?ov 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EZR.A. T. WHITING, OF DARTFORD, WISCONSIN. 
HOTAR DRUM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,846, dated December 16, 1890. 
Application filed January 3, 1890, Serial No. 335,783, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it Tay concern: 
Beit known that I, EZR.A.T. WHITING, of 
Dartford, in the county of Green Lake, and in 
the State of Wisconsin, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Hot - Air 
Drums; and I do hereby declare that the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof. 
My invention relates to hot-air drums; and 
it consists in certain peculiarities of construc 
tion, as will be fully set forth hereinafter and 
Subsequently claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion, partly in broken elevation, of my im 
proved device. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section 
on the line 22 of Fig. 1. 
A represents the lower chamber, and B the 
upper chamber, the latter being preferably 
made detachable, and both shown in the pre 
ferred form herein illustrated as being partly 
conical for greater ease in cleansing them 
When necessary. Each chamber has a central 
pipe-section (marked a and b, respectively) for 
Connection with the sections of any ordinary 
Stove-pipe, the latter being indicated in dot 
tedlines, and inline therewith the under plate 
of the chamber Band upper plate of the cham 
ber A are permanently united by the central 
pipe C, which latterisprovided with a damper 
D, another and similar damper E in the upper 
pipe-section b, the said dampers having con 
Yenient rods or handles d e, as shown. The 
chambers A B are further connected by a se 
ries of pipes c c c, arranged around the cen 
tral pipe C, there being other pipes FFF 
Within the said pipes cc ( and extending en 
tirely through the lower chamber A, and pref 
erably, also, terminating within the upper. 
chamber Bjust above the lower plate thereof, 
This plate B has an exterior vertical flange g 
lising to about the saune height as that of the 
Said pipes F, the upper part of said chamber 
Bhaving a corresponding downward flangeh, 
adapted to just fit over said flange g, as shown 
in Fig. 1. A series of short pipe-sections fff 
extend through the said upper part of said 
chamber and down below said vertical flange 
h, and are of a diameter just a trifle larger 
than the pipes F, as shown, or, if preferred, 
smaller than the diameter of the said pipes 
F, so as to snugly fit either outside or inside 
Said latter pipes and make a tight joint there 
with Within the said pipes c. 
By constructing the upper chamber B in 
two parts ready and convenient access is af 
forded to the interior of the drum for remov 
ing soot and other accumulations therefrom, 
and also for inserting and removing the Val 
rious interior pipes or flues, as circumstances 
may require. It will thus be seen that when 
my device is put together the pipes F and 
their continuations f form continuous pipe 
sections through the upper and lower cham 
bers of the drum and intermediate pipes c and 
are open at each end, while the central pipe C 
forms an open connection (subject to the con 
trol of the damper D) between the said upper 
and lower chambers, which latter are similarly 
connected by the open pipes C C C. 
The chamber A is preferably provided with 
braces iii, permanently fastened (as by riv 
ets) to the pipe-section C, and the upper plate 
of said chamber, and the pipe-section b has 
similar braces iii, which are riveted or other 
wise fastened to the upper pipe-section b, but 
whose lower ends merely rest upon the lower 
plate of the upper chamber B to strengthen 
the same and yet permit of the ready removal 
of the upper part of said chamber. 
If desired, the upper and lower parts of the 
upper chamber B may, like those of the lower 
chamber A, be permanently Secured together, 
in which case the pipes F would of course ex 
tendentirely through both chambers, and the 
said chambers need not be conical; but ordi 
narily I prefer the construction illustrated 
and described. 
The operation of my device will be readily 
understood from the foregoing description of 
its construction. To secure a circulation of 
the smoke and other products of combustion 
through my device, it is only necessary, when 
it is placed on a stove-pipe, to close the damper 
D, when the slmoke and hot gases will pass 
first through the pipe-section C into the lower 
chamber A, and thence through the pipes cc 
c into the upper chamber B, and then pass up 
and out through the pipe-section b. The cool 
air in the room is thus drawn up through the 
pipes F and out through the upper ends of 
said pipes (or their extensions f) into the room, 
being heated in such passage by the said 
90 
do 
 
II 
- 
442,846 
2 
smoke and hot gases in the pipes c. The up- ?lue and opening at their lowei'and upperends, 
per damper E may be turned as desired to 
respectively, into the upper part of the lower 
regulate this circulation, or both dampers may 
chamber and the lower part of the upper cham 
be opened to permit the said smoke and gases 
ber, air - heating pipes inclosed in the auxil 
5 to pass directly up and out through the cen 
iary flues and extending completely through 
tral pipe C and pipe - sections a, b and stove 
the lower and upper chambers and open at 
pipe in line there with whenever it is not de 
their upper and lower ends, braces i in the 
sired to utilize the drum for heating purposes. 
lower chamber rigidly secured at their up 
IIaving thus described my invention, what I 
per and lower ends and located between the 
Io claim as new, and desire to secure by I.etters 
flues, the bracesi in the upper chamber per 
Patent, is 
manently secured to the pipe-extension and 
An improved hot-air drum comprising an 
resting on the bottom of the upper chamber 
upper and a lower chamber having top and 
between the flues, and dampers for regulating 
bottom plates or portions and central openings 
the draft, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
15 in their top and bottom, respectively, for the 
usual smoke-?lue, said upper chamber being 
have hereunto set my hand, at Milwaukee, in 
constructed with a removable top section, a 
the county of Milwaukee and State of Wis 
central smoke-flue opening at its lower end 
consin, in the presence of two witnesses. 
into the upper part of the lower chamber and 
co at its upper end into the lower part of the 
upper chamber, a number of auxiliary smoke 
flues arranged around the said central smoke 
H. G. UNDERWOOD, 
WM. IXLUG. 
EZR.A. T. WHITING. 
Witnesses: 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
, 
, 
35 
. 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US442946.txt	(No Model.) 
J. L. BOTTORFF & C. A. CONYERS. 
CORN CULTIVATOR, 
No. 442,946, 
- 
Patented Dec. 16. l890. 
 
 
 
zzie 
- 
L7 
"Ec 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN L, BOTTORFF AND CHARLEY A. CONYERS, OF UNION STAR, MISSOURI. 
CORN CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 442,946, dated December 16, 1890, 
Application filed July 29, 1890, Serial No. 360,256, (No model.) 
To all whon it may concei'7. 
Be it known that we, JOHN L. BOTTORFF 
and CHARLEY A. CONYERS, both residents of 
Union Star, in the county of DeKalb and State 
of Missouri, have invented certain new and 
usefullmprovementsin Corn-Cultivators; and 
We do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
corn-cultivators, the object being to provide 
a cheap, simple, and effective apparatus for 
cutting or destroying the weeds and other in 
jurious growth between the rows and turning 
over the soil upon the growing corn in such 
quantities as may be desired. 
The invention consists in the novel fea 
tures of construction and new combinations 
of parts, hereinafter fully described, and defi 
nitely pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a plan view of a corn-cultivator 
constructed in accordance with our invention. 
Fig. 2 is a central sectional view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is an end view. 
In the said drawings, the reference-numeral 
1 designates the side pieces of the improved 
cultivator composed of metal bars having 
their fronts and bottoms formed with cutting 
edges. 
2 designates the front cross-bar connecting 
the front end of said side pieces, and to which 
the whiffletree or other devices which connect 
with the harness of the draft-animals are con 
nected. Secured to this plate or bar 2 is a 
segment 3, having rack-teeth 3, the rear end 
of said segment being connected with rear 
connecting-bar 4. 
Intermediate of the cross pieces or bars 2 
and 4 and Supported by uprights 5 is the driv 
er's seat 6, and pivoted in lugs 7 on the front 
connecting-piece is a lever Swithin convenient 
reach of the driver, provided with a pivoted 
pawl 9, which engages with the teeth in the 
said segment, said lever being connected by 
means of bar or rod 10 with the earth-turn 
ing disks, hereinafter described. At the for 
ward ends of the side pieces 1 are formed or 
provided the outwardly - extending curved 
- 
5 
3o 
35 
45 
SO 
cutting knives or blades 12, which serve to 
cut the weeds between the rows of corn. Se- 55 
cured to the rear connecting piece or bar 4 
and projecting rearwardly are two arms 16, 
having screw-threaded apertures at their rear 
ends, within which work the screw-threaded 
vertical rods or standards 14, carrying at their 
lower ends inwardly-turned lugs, upon which 
are pivotally secured the rotary disks 15. 
These disks are made of metal and concavo 
convex in form, the concave portions facing 
At their upper ends the stand- 6 
each other. 
ards 14 are provided with rigidinwardly-pro 
jecting arms 13, connected together at their 
inner ends and pivotally connected with the 
The rods or standards 14 are verti 
rod 10. 
cally adjustable in the arms 16, so as to regul 
late the height of the disks. 
The operation will be readily understood. 
The apparatus is designed to straddle the 
rows of corn with the knives or blades and 
disks on each side of the same, and When 
drawn over the field said knives or blades 
will cut the weeds between the rows, while the 
disks will turn the earth upon the rows. 
These disks can be oscillated or inclined so as 
to turn up the earth more or less, according to 
requirements, by means of the lever 8, con 
necting-rod 10, arms 16, and rods 14, which 
are oscillated to vary such inclination. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim is 
In a corn-cultivator, the combination, with 
the side pieces 1 and front and rear connect 
ing-pieces, of the curved cutting-blades 12, 
the segment 3, with teeth 3, the lever 8, hav 
ing pawl 9, the rearwardly-extending arms 
16, having screw-threaded apertures, the ver 
tically-adjustable rotary rods 14, carrying at 
their lower ends the concavo-convex diskS 15 
and at their upper ends the inwardly-project 
ing arms 13, and the rod 10, connecting said 
arms with the lever 8, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereunto affixed our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
75 
90 
95 
JOHN J. BOTTORFF. 
CARLEY A. CONYERS, . 
Witnesses: 
SOLOMON WISE, 
JONATHAN IP. EADES, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443046.txt	(No Model.) 
P, HAIRTRAMPF, 
ENGINE CONNECTION. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 443,046. 
Patented Dec. 16, 1890. 
st 
V 
6 || 
6. 
s 
|| G 
o 
-- --- 
- R 
N 
s 
M 
S. 
\ 
E 
-EN- 
s 
is 
SE- N 
AE is 
See 
l 
E-E FIS 
s S 
E.- - 
E s 
Ny 
H 
R 
s s 
S 
F R 
is 
l 
(1. - 
928). Evessey 
ScCe...re- 
4t. W 27-4--. 
83; via' &ltsov was 
3-vvuowto. 
fuel/arrary/. 
%2%%246 
 
(No Model.) 
P. H.A.RTRAMPF. 
ENGINE CONNECTION, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 443,046. 
Patented De0, l6, l890. 
s 
(? 
E 
1272 SS 
v. As 2 
'SA, 
28).itv.coco 
decC(Sa...ra. 
/ / 7.2-4- 
53 Aio &letoz votio 
&vuovtov 
Aat/V/6ar&rarre/2/ 
269-2-2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL IIARTRAMPF, OF BIRMINGHAM, ALABAMA. 
ENGINE CONNECT ON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,046, dated D3cember 16, 1890. 
Application filed December 24, 1889, Serial No. 334,812, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
To all whon it may concer'72: 
Be it known that I, PAUL HAIRTRAMPF, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bir 
mingham, Jefferson county, State of Alabama, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Engine Connections, of which 
the following is such a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription as will enable any one skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to an engine having 
a main shaft connected with a secondary 
shaft through the intermediary of peculiar 
Cranks and levers in such manner as to trans 
mit the power of the main to the secondary 
shaft at increased speed, all as hereinafter 
more fully described, and then pointed out in 
the claims. 
The chief objects of my invention are to 
multiply the speed obtained from an engine 
Without increasing the speed of the piston. 
In the accompanying drawings of an en 
gine made after the manner of my invention, 
and in which like letters of reference desig 
nate like parts throughout, Figure 1 is a top 
plan view, and Fig. 2 is a side elevation there 
of with the cylinder and valve-plate and valve 
in central vertical section, and with part of 
the connecting-levers and engine-frame bro 
ken away. 
As the mechanism for transmitting the mo 
tion of the main shaft to the secondary shaft 
is duplicated, it will only be necessary to de 
scribe one set of such duplicated parts, and in 
order to distinguish one set from the other I 
will mark the reference-letters of one set with 
primes. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
engine-frame, having a be?t-plate, and B is a 
cylinder mounted horizontally in the frame 
to one side of the center of length thereof. 
At the other end of the frame is the main or 
crank shaft C, set in suitable bearings and 
driven by the piston D through the usual in 
termediary of piston-rod E, connecting-rod F, 
and crank G, the cross-head of the piston-rod 
being mounted in the ordinary guideways. 
At the end of the frame remote from the 
main shaft C is mounted the secondary or 
speed shaft H, parallel with the main shaft 
and provided with a fly-wheel I. The main 
or crank shaft C is connected to and drives 
at increased speed the shaft H through means 
of the following duplicate parts: A rocker 
crank J is mounted at the side of the frame 
upon a stud K, so as to vibrate in the vertical 
plane. The arms L and M of this crank are 
shown as forming an acute angle with each 
other, and the former is of greater length than 
the latter; or, in other words, the distance 
from the points K to l is greater than K to n, 
the points land in being respectively the at 
taching-points of the connecting-levers O and 
P, which are connected by their other ends 
to the main shaft C and secondary shaft II 
by crank-disk Q and crank R., respectively. 
These parts just described are preferably lo 
cated to the outside of the engine-frame, 
though of course any desired disposition may 
be made of them; but the arrangement shown 
secures the greatest economy in length of 
space occupied by the engine. The ratio of 
the lengths of the crank-arms L and M is rep 
resented as two to one, and with this construc 
tion I obviously obtain two revolutions of the 
secondary shaft II for one of the main shaft 
C. The cranks J J are pivoted, preferably, 
below the center line of the engine, so as to 
allow of the proper proportioning of the con 
necting-levers. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
understood that at each stroke of the piston 
the main shaft C performs one revolution, the 
connecting-lever O rocks the crank on its 
axis, so as to move the arm M to and fro over 
the arc 4 5 and the long arm L to and fro over 
the arc 6 and 7, thereby producing two revo 
lutions of the secondary shaft, since at each 
one-way movements of arm Lover its arc such 
shaft is given one revolution, 
In the arrangement of the duplicate parts 
Q Q', O O", J J', P P', and R. R', they are so 
placed that one set has a lead on the other to 
overcome dead-centers. The lead here shown 
is about a half-center, making a quarter-cen 
ter lead when considered in reference to the 
crank G, as will be readily understood from 
the drawings, wherein the crank G. is a quar 
ter of a circle in lead of the crank Q and the 
crank Q is the same distance in advance of 
95 
CO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
443,046 
the main crank G. The same relation in the 
lead of the cranks is observed for both the 
main and secondary shafts. The lead these 
parts are set at is a matter of adjustment and 
is of course necessary to successfully over 
come dead-centers, and, moreover, to prevent 
reversal and consequent rupture of the mech 
anism after the Steam is shut off and the en 
gine runs idly under its momentum. 
There are many applications that may be 
made of my novel speed-multiplying mechan 
ism. It may also readily be used to reduce 
speed, especially in connection with electric 
motors, wherein, for instance, the secondary 
shaft could be lised as the armature-shaft and 
the main shaft C as the drive-shaft, thereby 
reducing the speed one-half. 
Having thus described my improvements 
in engines, what I claim as my invention, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. An engine having in combination a 
main or crankshaft and a Secondary Ol' speed 
shaft, a set of cranks having arms of differ 
ent lengths-for instance, one arm double the 
length of the other-level's connecting the 
main shaft with the short arms of the cranks, 
respectively, and levers connecting the sec 
ondary shaft with the long arms of the cranks, 
respectively, whereby the speed of the sec 
ondary shaft may be increased over that of 
the main shaft, through means of Such cranks 
and levers, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. An engine having in combination a 
main or crankshaft suitably driven by a con 
O 
25 
30 
35 
necting-rod connected thereto by a crank, a 
crank on such main shaft at each side of the 
said first crank, a secondary or speed shaft, 
rocker-cranks located intermediate the said 
main and speed shafts and having One arm 4o 
thereof double the length of the other, con 
necting-levers intermediate the Said cranks 
at each side of the main crank and the short 
arms of the rocker-cranks, and connecting 
levers intermediate the secondary shaft and 45 
the long arms of the rocker-cranks, whereby 
the main shaft may drive the secondary shaft 
at double its speed. 
3. An engine having a suitably-driven 
crank-shaft C and a secondary or speed shaft 5o 
H, the vibrating rocker-cranks J J', the con 
necting-levers O O", connected by one end 
by suitable cranks to the shaft C and by the 
other end to the said, rocker-cranks J J', re 
spectively, and the connecting - levers PP, 55 
connected intermediate the said shaft FI and 
the said rocker-cranks J J', the points of at 
tachment of said levers P P' to the said 
cranks J J' being a greater distance from the 
center of motion of the same than the points o 
of attachment of the said levers O O", sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and seal, this 11th day of December, 
1889, in the presence of the two subscribing 65 
Witnesses. 
PAUL HARTRAMPF. 
L. S. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD BRAUNINGER, 
WILLIS FOWLER, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443146.txt	(No Model.) 
A, D, NEFF, 
GATE FOR WIRE FENCES, 
No. 443,146. 
 
Patented Dec. 23, 1890. 
essaysays SYYAYYYYYAYYYYAA 
SSAYSwxxyyxxxv-xxYxistra Sixxxxxxxxxxas.SixxxxYs, yixaxiwayassawa SSSNs 
SS 22 
As SSS as as Sassas a sea assass was assass ar, 
seabelxSNSANSNx 
S2, 
 
98). Evlossos 
46.7///. 
C2 
3v.u.c. v. Bot 
/ra Z7, 7'eff. 
33 M AS &lt-to-vicio 
Tenorris reters co, FHord-Tho. WASH1'ictor, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARD DRAYTON NEFF, OF PETERSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
GATE FOR WIRE FENCES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,146, dated December 23, 1890. 
Application filed March 28, 1890, Serial No, 345,731 (No model.) 
55 
60 
To Cull, Luhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ARD DRAYTON NEFF, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Pe. 
tersburg, in the county of Huntingdon and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Wire Fence, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to wire fences, and 
more particularly, to the gates adapted to be 
used in connection there with. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
durable and cheap gate for the purpose, which 
shall be meat in appearance and durable in 
use and which can be constructed of materials 
near at hand and of any size and shape de 
sirable, according to the requirements of the 
case. This object I accomplish by my im 
proved gate, which consists, essentially, of 
four tubes seated in metallic sockets at the 
Corners of the gate, wires stretched from end 
to end of the gate and wound upon the end 
tubes, a barbed wire along the top and bot 
tom of the gate, passing around the outerface 
of each socket, nuts upon the vertical por 
tions of the Sockets for holding said barbed 
Wire in place, and a diagonal brace to pre 
Vent the Sagging of the gate, together with an 
improved construction of hinge-leaf, espe 
cially adapted for use in connection here 
With, and certain specific and adjunctive de 
tails of construction of parts, all as more fully 
described hereinafter, and illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I is a side elevation of the gate com 
plete. Fig. 2 is a central vertical section 
thereof. Fig. 3 is a top edge view, and Fig. 
4 is a top view, of one of the end bars in sec: 
tion and the hinges in plan, 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the letters TT and it designate, respectively, 
the two horizontal and the two vertical bars 
forming the frame or outline of this gate, said 
bars being each composed of pieces of tube 
or pipe of the necessary length to make a 
Complete gate of the desired size. These 
tubes are seated at their meeting ends in 
Sockets S, preferably of metal, as shown, the 
Outer upper and the inner lower sockets hav 
ing cast thereon integral lugs I, one having 
a slotted inner face and the other a threaded 
opening. Within this opening is screwed the 
end of the inclined brace I, which is prefera 
bly composed of a stiff rod of metal whose op 
posite end is seated in a cup-shaped piece C, 
the latter being pivoted within said slot in 
the other lug. The end of the socket C op 
posite the end in which the diagonal brace I is 
seated may be slotted and then opened suffi 
ciently to allow it to rest like shoulders di 
rectly on the corner S without the use of in 
tegral lugs without departing from the spirit 
of the present invention. 
The horizontal bars TT have each a right 
hand thread on the one end and a left-hand 
thread on the other, so that by turning them 
the ends of the bars can be partially with 
drawn from the sockets S and the wires be 
given the desired tension. The vertical bars 
it are also screwed into the corners S, but 
the thread on both ends is alike-i. e., both 
are either right-hand or else both are left 
hand threads. 
A barbed wire U is provided, which extends 
along the top and bottom of the gate, and the 
corner sockets are each provided with a groove 
G, for the reception of this wire. The barbs 
prevent animals from pushing under the gate 
or rubbing on the top thereof, which would 
soon cause it to sag and its parts to become 
loose. 
The vertically-facing ends of the sockets S 
are provided with external screw-threads, and 
on these are screwed nuts N. The grooves G. 
grow gradually deeper as they near these 
screw-threaded extremities, and when the 
nuts N are turned the ends of the barbed 
wires U are clamped in the grooves. 
The letter W designates horizontal wires, 
the same as are used in the fence of which 
this gate forms a part, and these may be 
barbed or plain, as preferred. At their ends 
these wires are fastened to the end tubes it 
in any suitable manner. It will be under 
stood that by turning one or both of these 
tubes in the proper direction a considerable 
degree of tension can be imparted to these 
wires, and in this manner the latter are kept 
tight. 
In constructing a gate of this description 
the four tubes are first cut to the desired 
length and inserted in the sockets at the cor 
ners of the gate. The barbed wires U are 
then applied and passed through the four 
nuts where they occur, and these wires are 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
15 
3o 
35 
45 
448,146 
seated in grooves around the outer faces of 
said sockets and extending along the top and 
bottom of the gate, and nuts upon said screw 
threaded arms embracing said barbed wires, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The herein-described gate, the same com 
posed of tubes seated in sockets at their meet 
ing ends, the diagonally-opposite sockets hav 
ing inwardly-projecting lugs, a cup-shaped 
piece C, pivoted in a slot in one of said lugs, 
and a diagonal brace-rod seated at one end 
in said cup-shaped piece and screwed at its 
other end into the other lug, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the gate having 
the vertical tube it, of the two-part hinge-con 
nection comprising members II h, detachably 
connected at their outer ends and One of them 
carrying an eye a', for the purpose set forth, 
the inner ends of said members having the 
perforated ears E, and the bolte, passing there 
through, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with the gate having 
the vertical tubel, of the two-part hinge-con 
nection, the same comprising a curved mem 
ber H, having a vertical notch V near its outer 
end and a perforated ear E at its inner end, 
an oppositely-curved member it, having an 
eye at its outer end and a perforated ear E 
at its inner end, the body thereof passing 
through said notch, and a bolt e, passing 
through said perforated ears, the whole con 
structed and operating Substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ARD DRAYTON NEFF. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. M. BAILEY, 
M. L. SHENEFELT. 
IO 
3O 
drawn tight and held so by the nuts N. The 
inclined brace I is then applied, or if the cup 
shaped piece C is used this brace is applied 
When the parts are first assembled. The 
wires W are then put in place and secured 
at their ends to the two end tubes f, after 
which the tubest are turned so as to tighten 
the wires, and the gate is completed. 
All 
the wires are now drawn very tight by turn 
ing the top and bottom tubes in a direction 
partially to unscrew their ends from the 
sockets S, and this can be done from time to 
time as the wires stretch and need tighten 
ing. If the barbed wires are much looser, the 
lnuts N are unscrewed, the barbed wires tight 
ened by hard, and then all the wires drawn 
Very tight, as above. 
The improved hinge-leaf which I prefer 
ably use in connection with this gate is com 
posed of two entirely independent members 
II h, the former having a vertical notch V in 
its body near its outer end, through which the 
body of the latter member passes, and the 
member 1 having an eye a' at its tip adapted 
to form part of the hinge proper-that is to 
say, to engage over the pintle of the hinge 
leaf, which is secured to the gate-post. The 
bodies of these members are curved through 
out their length, whereby they are adapted 
to fit around one of the vertical tubes t, and 
their inner ends are provided with ears E, 
which are perforated, as shown. IPassing 
through the perforations in these ears is a bolt 
e, whereby the two members are securely 
clamped around said tube t, all as clearly 
shown in Fig. 4 of the drawings. 
I claim as the salient features of my inven 
tion 
1. The herein-described gate, the same com 
posed of tubes seated in Sockets at their meet 
ing ends, the vertical arms of said sockets be 
ing externally screw-threaded, barbed wires 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443246.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 443,246. 
G. VECSEY & T. DAVIDSON. 
FILTER, 
Patented Deo, 23, 1890. 
 
727. Z. 
7ty 
  
 
E. 
 
A% 
I 
\7. 
s 
T -2 t 
%-46% a 
the NORRIS PETEAS co., Photo-Litho, washingtoN, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GIDEON VECSEY AND THOMAS DAVIDSON, OF SYDNEY, NEW SOUTH WALES, 
ASSIGNORS TO SAID DAVIDSON AND EDWIN JOSIAH TOBIN, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
FILTER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,246, dated December 23, 1890. 
Application filed August 16, 1890, 
Serial No. 362,182, (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all twhon it may concern: 
Beit known that we, GIDEON WECSEY and 
THOMAS DAVIDSON, filter - manufacturers, 
both subjects of the Queen of Great Britain, 
5 residing at Darlinghurst, in the city of Syd 
ney and British Colony of New South Wales, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Filters and Filtering Apparatus, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates more particularly to 
the domestic or household filter, although it 
is equally applicable to other kinds of filter 
ing apparatus. It has been specially devised 
in Order to provide increased effective ca 
15 pacity of filtering media with, if anything, a 
decrease of size of the same. 
These improvements in filters and filtering 
apparatus consist, first, in the combination 
and arrangement with the respective reser 
voirs of unfiltered and filtered liquid of the 
filtering media constructed as hollow walls 
around an open space, the hollow of such 
Walls being hermetically closed top and bot 
tom, but communicating with the reservoir 
for filtered liquid, and, secondly, in the par 
ticular combination and arrangement of parts, 
hereinafter more particularly set forth. 
In constructing a domestic filter according 
to this invention we divide a chamber into 
two parts by a disk or wall firmly cemented 
in, so that there shall be reservoirs for the 
unfiltered and filtered liquid, respectively, 
and this disk or wall we prefer should be 
composed of the filtering media, preferably 
limestone, and should have through it a com 
municating passage between the reservoirs. 
The filtering media we make by cutting a deep 
groove or annulus in the walls of a cylinder, 
also preferably of limestone, and firmly clos 
ing the ends of such groove or annulus. On 
the face or foot of this cylinder we fix a valve 
or cone with a port or passage to such annu 
lus. Now, this hollow annulus is seated upon 
the dividing-plate in the chamber with its 
valve or cone taking into and forming a tight 
joint on a seating in the communicating-ori 
fice on said division. 
In constructing filtering apparatus accord 
ing to this invention the filtering media hav 
ing a hollow annulus or space between closed 
35 
45 
55 
walls would be set inside the reservoir for un 
filtered liquid and the filtered-liquid reservoir 
communicating with said hollow annulus or 
space would be set inside or outside of the 
first-mentioned reservoir. 
In order that this invention may be clearly 
understood, reference will now be made to 
the drawings herewith, in which 
Figure 1 is a section of a filter constructed 
according to these improvements, and Figs. 
2, 3, and 4 are enlarged details of parts of 
Sale. 
A is the filter-body, B filtering cylinder or 
media, and C draw-off tap. 
A is the reservoir for unfiltered liquid, and 65 
A the receiver for filtered liquid. 
A is the orifice, and At the valve-seating of 
india-rubber. 
B' is the porous dividing disk or wall; B', 
the annulus or groove; B, the valve or cone, 
and B the port or passage, 
C is an air-pipe. 
The filtering-cylinder B is placed upon the 
dividing-disk B within chamber A', the valve 
or cone B resting upon and making a tight 
joint with the valve-seating A'. The cham 
ber or reservoir A' is supplied with the water 
or liquid to be filtered, which liquid surrounds 
and filters through the exterior and interior 
walls of the cylinder B into the annulus or 
groove B*, from whence it passes by port or 
passage B through valve B8 and orifice A 
into the chamber A, from whence it is drawn 
through cock or tap C. 
A filtering apparatus constructed according 
to this invention does not need drawings to 
enable the same to be understood, for it would 
consist of a tank or reservoir for unfiltered 
liquid upon the bottom of which or level with 
the bottom of which is placed a filtering-cyl 
inderB, having a port or passage B, as illus 
trated in the drawings, but, instead of the 
valve or cone B, having a screwed socket or 
other connection to which a pipe might beat 
tached, said pipe having its own tap or dis 
charging or communicating with a receiver or 
reservoir for filtered liquid having its own 
draw-off cock or tap and having the necessary 
air-escape pipe. 
75 
Having now particularly described and ex- Ioo 
g 
443,216 
plained the nature of this said invention and 
the manner in which the same is to be per 
formed, we declare that what we claim is 
1. A filter divided into two superposed cham 
5 bers by a partition constructed of a filtering 
material, said partition being provided with a 
port or passage, of a hollow annulus coln 
structed of a filtering material loosely seated 
on said partition and provided with a dis 
to charge-lnozzle fitting fluid-tight into the polt 
of the partition, as Set forth. 
2. A filter divided into two chambers by a 
partition constructed of filtering material, 
said partition being provided with a port, a 
15 bushing seated fluid-tight in said port and 
having substantially the form of a truncated 
cone, the passage through which is enlarged 
at one end, and a cylindrical packing-ring 
scated in said bushing, of a hollow annulus 
constructed of a filtering material and adapt 
ed to seat on the partition, and a discharge 
nozzle for said annulus in communication 
with the interior thereof, said nozzle Seating 
in the packing-ring, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
..a 
G. WECSEY. 
TIOS. DAVIDSON. 
 
Witnesses: 
l'RED WALSH, 
THOMAS JAMES WARD, 
I. I. Inst. IP. f. 
('le'll to Ed tard Waters, Sydney. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443346.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 443,346. 
 
J. ALLEN. 
HORSESHOEING JACK. 
Patented Dec. 23, 1890. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES ALLEN, OF ALLISTON, CANADA. 
HORSESHOENG - JACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,846, dated December 28, 1890. 
Application filed May 8, 1890, Serial No. 350,999, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES ALLEN, black 
Smith, of the village of Alliston, in the county 
of Simcoe, in the Province of Ontario, Can 
ada, have invented a certain new and Im 
proved Horseshoeing-Jack, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
suitable jack for supporting the leg and foot 
of the horse while being shod; and it con 
sists, essentially, of a substantially horizon 
tal rest shaped either to support the foot and 
knee of the fore leg or the foot and fetlock of 
the hind leg, the said horizontal rest being 
longitudinally adjustable, so that it may be 
altered to suit the legs of horses of different 
sizes, and is provided with a standard to fit 
into a vertical stand in such a manner that 
the height of the horizontal rest may be ad 
justed to suit the height of the horse being 
shod, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my horse 
shoeing-jack with the horizontal rest for the 
hind leg. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of my 
horseshoeing-jack with the horizontal rest for 
the front leg. 
In both views I show in dotted lines the 
foot and part of the leg of the horse. 
In the drawings, A represents a vertical 
stand supported by suitable flaring legs B. 
C is a standard fitted into a Vertical hole 
made through the stand A. 
D is a lever pivoted in suitable brackets E, 
extending from the stand A. 
F is a latch connected to and extending 
from the lever D and is designed to project 
through a slot made in the vertical stand A, 
so that it may be forced by the Spring Ginto 
one of the notches H made in the standard 
C, as indicated. It will be observed that the 
spring G acts on the lower end of the lever D 
so as to force the latch F, as stated, into One 
of the notches referred to. 
The portion of my jack which I term the 
horizontal rest consists of a horn-shaped 
bracket I, which in Fig. 1 is located imme 
diately over the standard C, while in Fig. 2 
it is attached to the end of a projecting plate 
5 
25 
35 
45 . 
55 
J, which extends, as indicated, on a slightin- 5O 
cline behind the standard C, the said horn 
shaped bracket being designed to hold the 
foot of the horse being shod. 
K is a cup-shaped bracket, which in Fig. 1 
is shaped to receive the fetlock of the horse, 
while in Fig. 2 it is shaped to receive the 
knee of the horse. In both figures the bracket 
K is fixed to the plate L, which rests upon 
and is supported by the horizontal plate M, 
which is fixed to and extends in front of the 
Standard C. 
A longitudinal slot N (see Fig. 1) is made 
in the horizontal plate M, through which a 
bolt O, provided with a suitable nut P, is 
passed after having passed through a hole 
made in the plate L. 
In order to shorten or lengthen the distance 
between the bracket and bracket K, it is 
merely necessary to loosen the nut P, when 
the plate L. may be adjusted and held at any 
desired point to suit the length of the leg of 
the horse being shod. 
A number of notches H are made in the 
standard C, so that the height of the hori 
Zontal rest may be easily adjusted by merely 
pressing against the lower end of the lever 
D, so as to withdraw the latch E clear of the 
notches, then raising or lowering the said 
standard C to the proper height, when by re 
moving the pressure from the lever D the 
spring G will force the latch E into the notch 
H, which may at the time be opposite to it. 
With a view of bracing the jack I provide, 
as shown in Fig. 2, two rods Q and R. 
From this description it will be seen that 
the jack I have described may be used for 
horses of all sizes, and that its use will make 
the work of the blacksmith much easier, and 
consequently his Work may be much more ex 
peditiously performed. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A horizontal rest provided with the horn 
I and adjustable Cup-shaped bracket K, se 
cured to a vertically-adjustable standard C, 
in combination with a vertical stand to sup 
port said standard C and provided with a 
catch to engage notches made in said stand 
ard, substantially as described. 
75 
9o 
 
2 
443,346 
2. A lhorizontal rest composed of a horn- G, substantially as and for the purpoSc Speci 
shaped bracket I, supported on a plate M, fied. 
fixed to the adjustable standard C, a cup- 
shaped bracket R, fixed on said plate M, in 
5 combination with a pivoted lever D, having a 
latch F to fit into one of the notches II on said 
adjustable standard and actuated by a spring 
Alliston, April 28, 1890. 
In presence of 
A. G. ROWE, 
MI. A. Y. OUNG. 
JAMES ALLEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443446.txt	k (No Model.) 
W. KOUNS, 
STOCK WATERING TROUGH 
No. 443,446. 
Patented De0, 23, 1890. 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
M3 Eff :NATFR)-ilaritic? 
I 2, 
%|ZZIZWZZ 
f 
SHUHR2% 
IIIE 
TE A 
HiFEER 
3-2.1%ff 
N 
- 
- 
- - - 
 
 
 
 
 
2Z. Z23% %3 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
W E SLEY KOUNS, OF SAL INA, KANSAS. 
STOCK-WATERING TROUGH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,446, dated December 23, 1890. 
Application filed December 16, 1889, Serial No. 383,978, (No model.) 
5 
IO 
To all whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, WESLEY KOUNS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Salina, 
in the county of Saline and State of Kansas, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Stock-Watering Troughs; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to new and usefulim 
provements in stock-Watering troughs; and it 
consists in the improved construction and ar 
rangement or combination of parts, hereinaf 
ter fully disclosed in the description, draw 
ings, and claims. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to 
provide improved means for keeping water in 
a stock-watering reservoir or trough at a Sub 
stantially uniform temperature during the 
different seasons of the year, or cool in Warm 
weather and at about the Same temperature, 
or free from freezing, in cold Weather; Sec 
ond, to provide a stock-watering reservoir or 
trough with outer, intermediate or central, 
and inner walls or shells for forming tWO OF 
more air-spaces; third, to provide Such a stock 
watering trough with a bottom which is raised 
a considerable distance toward its top, SO as 
to leave a large air chamber or Space below 
said bottom, and, fourth, to provide improved 
means for connecting and securing the Com 
ponent parts of my stock-watering reservoir 
or trough. These objects are accomplished 
by the novel construction and arrangement 
of the parts illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which the same reference-numerals indi 
cate the same parts, and in Which - 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section of my 
improved stock-watering reservoir or trough, 
showing it in operative position or seated in 
a cavity in the earth; and Fig. 2, a horizontal 
transverse section of said trough, the Section 
being taken on a line beneath the Water 
chamber. 
In the drawings, the numeral 1 indicates 
the entire stock-watering reservoir or trough, 
which is preferably cylindrical in form, al 
though it may be constructed in any other 
suitable desired shape. This trough is closed 
at its upper end by a top or cover 2, having 
an annular flange 3 projecting downwardly 
from its periphery and overlapping the upper 
end of the outer wallor shell 4 of said trough; 55 
also, said top or cover is formed with another 
inner annular flange 5 on its under side for 
Supporting and Spacing or holding apart the 
intermediate or central wall or shell 6 and 
the inner wall or shell 7 of said trough, which 6o 
are respectively placed with their upper ends 
against the Outer and inner sides or faces of 
said flange 5. The lower ends of these cylin 
drical walls or shells rest upon blocks 8, formed 
with curved transverse grooves 9 in their up- 65 
per faces, within which are fitted the edges of 
the lower ends of said shells. The reservoir 
or trough, as thus constructed with three 
Shells, is spaced or formed to contain two air 
spaces 10. A suitable number of rods or long to 
bolts 11 are passed through the outer air-space 
10 and are formed with screw-threaded upper 
and lower ends, which extend through the 
cover 2 of the trough and the blocks 8, and 
are secured in place by the Washers 12 and 75 
the nuts 13. These rods or bolts, washers, 
nuts, grooved blocks, and the flanged top or 
cover of the trough serve to properly space 
and rigidly hold the three shells in their 
proper relative positions when assembled for 8o 
use, and also to permit of their detachment 
for cleaning, repair, transportation, and simi 
lar purposes. 
Interiorly of the inner shell 7 and at or near 
the mid-length of the trough 1 is suitably se- 85 
cured the bottom 14, which, in connection with 
the lower portion of said inner shell, forms a 
large air-space 15 within said trough and be 
neath the Water-chamber 16, this air-space, in 
connection with the surrounding air-spaces go 
10, practically isolating said water-chamber 
from the effects of heat and cold. The Water 
pipe 17, which receives its supply from any 
suitable source, passes up through this large 
air-space and enters said water-chamber cen- 95 
trally of its bottom. This pipe along its inner 
vertical portion is also practically isolated 
from the effects of heat and cold. Also, said 
pipe is provided with the inlet-valve 18, se 
cured to the inner end of the lever 19, which loo 
is connected to the float 20 by means of the rod 
21, these parts operating to regulate the flow 
3O 
35 
45 
g 
443,446 
of water into said water-chamber in the same 
manner as the corresponding devices in the 
patent granted to me November 2, 1SSG, No. 
351,781. 
The cover 2 is formed with the openings 22 
for receiving and supporting the removable 
lbuckets 23, which are formed with smallholes 
in or near their bottoms, which are covered 
by the flap-valves 24, pivoted to the inner 
walls of said buckets. These valves admit 
the inflow of the water while the buckets are 
in place, but close by the pressure of the wa 
ter when said buckets are lemoved for clean 
ing and the like, and prevent the escape into 
the water-chamber of any refuse or dirt which 
may accumulate in said buckets. The cover 
2 is preferably made of cast metal and pro 
vided on its undel' side with the re-enforcing 
rib or strip 25, which may be made of any 
suitable material for strengthening said coyor. 
It will be obvious from the foregoing that 
in the use of my improved stock-watering res 
ervoir or trough it is so placed in a corre 
spondiugly-shaped cavity formed in the earth 
that a sufficient portion of its length will pro 
ject above the earth's surface to enable stock 
to easily obtain access thereto; that the wa 
ter-supply pipe projects downwardly and hori 
Zontally, leads to a source of supply for the 
water, and is embedded in the earth to a Suf 
ficient depth to prevent the water passing 
therethrough from freezing in cold weather 
and keep the same cool in warm Weather, but 
that this pipe as thus arranged is not always 
indispensable, as the water may be delivered 
into the water - chamber in other ways, as 
through the openings in the cover, and the 
usefulness of the trough remain the same; 
that the water-chamber in the form of the in 
vention herein disclosed is surrounded by a 
double air-space and arranged above the large 
air-space which is formed below its bottom 
and surrounds the water-supply pipe; that 
these air-spaces will practically leep the wa 
ter in said water-clamber at an even tempera 
ture, or prevent the same from freezing in 
cold weather and keep it coolin warm Weather; 
that the rods or long bolts, the nuts, the top 
or cover of the trough, and the blocks at the 
lower end thereof Serve to firmly unite or se. 
cure together the several parts of said trough 
when operatively assembled; that the use of 
the last-named devices permit the several 
parts of the stock-watering trough to be manu 
factured, shipped, and sold separately, so as 
to provide for wear and breakage, to be easily 
placed together, and also secured in position 
by an ordinary wrench in the hands of any 
person of average intellect, and to be easy of 
removal for cleaning and repairs, and that 
minor changes in the construction and ar 
rangement of the parts can be made without 
departing from the nature or principle of my 
invention, such as providing the trough with 
more than two surrounding air-spaces, 
IIaving thus fully described the construc 
tion and arrangement or combination of the 
several parts of my improved stock-watering 
trough, its use, purposes, and advantages, 
what I claim as new is 
1. In a stock-watering trough, the combi 
nation, with a water-chamber, of walls or shells 
surrounding the same and forming air-spaces, 
a cover extending over said chamber and clos 
ing the upper ends of said shells, and a raised 
bottom secured to the inner surface of the in 
ner shell and forming an air-space below said 
bottom, substantially as described. 
2. In a stock-Watering trough, the combina 
tion, with a water-clhamber, of walls or shells 
surrounding the same and forming air-spaces, 
a cover extending over said chamber and clos 
ing the upper ends of Said shells, a raised bot. 
tom Secured to the inner Surface of the inle1 
shell and forming an air-space below said bot 
ton), and a water-supply pipe communicating 
with said chamber, Substantially as described. 
3. In a stock-watering trough, the combina. 
tion, With all Outer, an inner, and a central 
wall or shell, of a cover having a peripheral 
flange overhanging the upper end of the outer 
shell and an illner flange upon its under side 
for spacing said inner and central shells, and 
means for holding said cover in place, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a Stock-Watering trough, the combina 
tion, With all Outer, an inner, and a central 
Wall or shell, of a cover having a peripheral 
flange overhanging the upper end of the outer 
shell and all inner flange upon its under side 
for spacing the inner and central shells, a 
Water - Chaliber having a raised bottom so 
cured to said inlier casing, and means for so 
curing Said shells and cover together, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a stock-Watering trough, the combina. 
tion, with the walls or shells arranged to form 
air-spaces between them, the cover, the water 
chain be having the raised bottom, the sup 
porting-blocks, and means for connecting said 
cover and blocks and holding said shells in 
place, substantially as described. 
6. In a stock-Watering trough, the combina 
tion, with an Olter, an inner, and a central 
Wall or shell and a cover having a peripheral 
flange overhanging the upper end of said outer 
shell and an inner flange upon its under side 
for spacing said inner and central shells, of 
nutted rods or bolts and supporting-blocks se 
cured to the lower ends of said rods or bolts 
and formed With grooves in their upper sur 
faces for Supporting and spacing the lower 
ends of Said shells, substantially as described. 
7. A Stock-Watering trough 1, provided with 
the Outer shell 4, the central shell 6, the inner 
shell 7, the Water-chamber 16, having the 
raised bottom 14, the cover 2, formed with the 
Openings 22 and with the peripheral and in 
her flages 3 and 5, the buckets 23, supported 
in said openings, the supporting-blocks 8, 
formed with the curved grooves 9 in their up 
per faces for receiving the lower ends of said 
O 
OC 
O 
II5 
13o 
O 
35 
40 
45 
5 5 
6 5 
 
443,446 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WESLEY KOUNS. 
Witnesses: . 
F. C. MILLER, 
P. D. LOCKWOOD. 
shells, the rods or bolts 11, formed with screw 
threaded upper and lower ends, extended 
through said cover and blocks and provided 
with the washers 12 and nuts 13 at their up 
per and lower ends, and the water-supply pipe 
17, entering said water-chamber centrally of 
its bottom, substantially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443546.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 443,546. 
R. T. SMITH, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
8 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 30, 1890, 
 
s 
hy--- 
s i 
W vs 
UFL rts 
- 
S\ 
(No Model.) 
R. T. SMITH, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 443,546, 
Patented Dec. 30, 1890. 
N. 
N 
SA 
SS 
sis 
S. 
7 
S & 
3. 
fe N 
2. 
. 
S 
 2 2 
2 s: 
SS, 
3 
E. 
A. 
S. 
; 
: 
%. 22. 
SH: 
 
(2S 
the NORRIS PETERS Co., PHOTO-tithe, wastingro, o, c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 443,546, 
 
R. T. SMITH, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Deo, 30, 1890. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROS WELL T. SMITH, OF NASHUA, NEW HAMPSHIRE, ASSIGNOR TO GEORGE 
F. KING, OF SWAMPSCOTT, MASSACHUSETTS, 
TYPE-WRITING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,546, dated December 30, 1890, 
Application filed March 8, 1888, Serial No. 266,523, (No model.) 
w 
5 
15 
25 
cation. 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, Rosw:LL T. SMITH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Nashua, in the county of Hillsborough and 
State of New Hampshire, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Type-Writing 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
My invention relates to type-writers; and 
Io the purpose thereof is to provide a printing 
mechanism capable of operating upon either 
an ordinary sheet of paper or upon the page 
of a blank book. 
It is my purpose also to organize a type 
writer in which the capital and small letters 
are arranged side by side upon the index, 
making the selection less difficult and com 
plicated. 
My invention also contemplates positive 
23 and simple means capable of certain action 
for advancing the carriage after each im 
pression in order to bring the paper or page 
into proper position to receive the impression 
of the succeeding letter. 
It is also my purpose to provide a type 
writer in which the type shall be mounted 
upon elastic arms or springs and to combine 
therewith hammers, which when operated 
will descend upon the type and strike them 
Finally, it is one purpose of my invention 
to so organize the parts of a type-Writer as to 
permit the type to be mounted upon spring 
arms in the arc of a circle, and to combine 
therewith simple means for projecting said 
type against the paper, each type-spring be 
ing capable of entirely independent operation, 
The invention consists in the several novel 
features of construction and new combina 
4o tions of parts hereinafter fully set forth, and 
then definitely pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of part of a type-writing mechan 
ism embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section in the plane 22, Fig.1. Fig. 
3 is a vertical section in the plane 33 of Fig. 
1. Fig. 4 is a detail section showing a modi 
fication. Fig. 5 is a front elevation of the de 
vices feeding the printing-bed forward. Fig. 
so. 6 is a side elevation of the parts shown in 
3o against the paper. 
35 
45 
55 
75 
Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 is a detail Section showing one 
of the sliding bars with its slotted sleeve. 
Fig. 8 is a detail elevation, on an enlarged 
scale, of the trip-hammer-actuating mechan 
ism. Fig. 9 is a detail view showing a slightly 
modified construction of the trip-hammer, and 
Fig. 10 is a detail view showing a modifica 
tion of the feed device. 
In the said drawings, the reference-numeral 
1 designates the platen or platform, upon 
which the paper sheet or back page is 
mounted to receive the impression. This 
platen or platform is stationary and consti 
tutes the sole Support for the entire type 
writer mechanism hereinafter described. 
This stationary platen is of such dimensions 
as to support the entire leaf of a book or 
other sheet on which the printing is to be 
effected, and it is of wedge shape, as shown 
in the sectional view, Fig. 2, the left-hand 
margin being comparatively sharp or finished 
off to a fine edge to permit its insertion be 
tween the leaves of a bound book and enable 
it to be driven therein close up to the bind 
ing-wires. From the left to the right of the 
operator's position the platform increases in 
thickness, the upper surface being substan 
tially horizontal in the direction of the sec 
tion plane, while the lower face has a down 
ward inclination from left to right. 
Upon the flat surface of the platen 1 spread 
a thin sheet of rubber or other elastic medium 
1, extending over the entire surface thereof. 
Upon the thicker edge of the platen 1, at or 
near each extremity thereof, I mount a bracket 
2, having a loop or ring 3. On each bracket 
within these loops I mount a bar 4, having at 
regular intervals circumferential grooves or 
channels 5, for a purpose presently to be ex 
plained. Upon the brackets 2, or, if preferred, 
upon some suitable portion of the bed 1, I 
pivotally mount claimps (5, which are actuated 
by leaf-springs 7, bearing against the out 
wardly-projecting ends and throwing said 
clamps down upon the edge or marginal por 
tion of the bed 1 to clamp the sheet in place 
and hold it during the time the machine is 
Operated. 
Upon the bar 4, having the channels 5, I 
mount the double bracket consisting of the 
w 
I do 
2 
443,546 
O 
2C) 
35 
O 
45 
parts S and 9, laving substantially similar 
construction and connected together by the 
lar 10, so as to be essentially integral there 
with. The double bracket is adapted to slide 
along the length of the spacing-bar 4 and 
also to turn or rotate thereupon, and said 
bracket has sleeves 12, which receive and 
serve as bearings for the parallel rods 13 and 
14, to which the sleeves may be fastened by 
Set-screw's 15, tapped through them and bear 
ing on the rods. The rods 13 and 14 are con 
nected at the left-hand end by a rigid bar 10 
and constitute the race way upon which the 
type-carriage travels as the successive im 
pressions are made, as hereinafter explained. 
To retain the rods 13 and 14 in parallel re 
lations to the bed 1 of the type-writer, stand 
ing lugs 16 and 17 are formed upon each of 
said bars, respectively, said lugs having such 
length as to rest upon the printing surface or 
platform 1 in such manner as to preserve the 
said bars in substantially parallel relations to 
the bed or carriage. 
Upon the rod 14 are formed laterally-pro 
jecting pins or teeth 1S, arranged at regular 
intervals throughout the entire working length 
of said rod or bar. On said bar are mounted 
two collars or sleeves 19, which slide freely 
thereon, said sleeves having slots 20 in one side 
to permit the passage of the pins 18, as shown 
in Fig. 7. Upon the parallel bar 13 is mounted 
the sleeve 21, which forms part of the type 
carriage, which consists of a circular plate 22, 
part of which is occupied by the index, while 
part or all of the remaining portion may be 
utilized as a support and guide for the regul 
lating-lever. The circular plate or ring 22 is 
carried by arms 23, joined to the sleeves 19, 
that slide on the rod 14, said arms extending 
across the circular plate from left to right, 
Fig. 2, and dividing such plate into two sub 
stantially equal portions. An arm 24 ex 
tends from the center of the circle directly 
rearward until it connects with the plate 22, 
and thereby divides the rear semi-circumfer 
ence of the latter into two equal parts, or 
quarter-circles. The arm 24 is provided at 
its junction with the arms 23, with a platform 
25, having a central bearing 26, constituting 
a pivot on which the type-carriage revolves. 
This carriage consists of a central sleeve 27, 
turning upon the vertical bearing 26, the parts 
being united by a pin 2S, passing through the 
sleeve or collar 27 and into a circumferential 
slot in the central bearing or hub 26. The 
sleeve carries a type-wheel composed of a 
disk 27, which revolves freely upon the verti 
callbearing 26 to the extent of one-half its 
circumference, and would pass freely around 
the entire circle but for the bracket 29, which 
forms a bearing for the upper end of the shaft 
30, lying in the vertical bearing 26. The 
bracket 29 is formed upon a collal' 21, sliding 
upon the bar 13, and extends over the type 
wheel, as shown in Fig. 1. 
It will be evident that the type-carriage is 
properly sustained in its movements on the 
rods 13 and 14 through the medium of the 
sleeves or collars 19, arms 23, sleeve or collar 
21, and the bracket 29, the latter bracing the 
shaft 30. 
Extending from the periphery of the type 
carriage are the spring-arms 32, formed of 
any suitable spring metal, and upon the outer 
extremities of these arms are mounted the 
type 33, said spring-arms radiating from the 
periphery of the carriage through about onc 
half of its circumference, the said arms being 
of Substantially equal length, whereby the 
type will be at about the same radial distance 
from the center of rotation of said carriage. 
Upon the type-carriage is mounted a circum 
ferential covering-plate 34. (Shown in Figs. 2 
and 3.) Upon this covering-plate I mount 
the bracket 35, and upon this bracket is piv 
otally mounted the lever 36, having a slot 37, 
through which the central shaft 30 extends, 
thereby giving said lever a bearing upon the 
shaft, whereby it may move up and down 
therein. Formed upon the shaft 30 is a but 
ton or head 3S, which directly underlies the 
lever 36, whereby vibration of the latter upon 
its pivotal axis or bearing will depress the 
shaft. Upon the outer end of the lover 36 is 
mounted a handle 39, having a suitable but 
ton or knob 40, whereby the vibration of said 
lever in the practical operation of the type 
Writer may be effected. The lower end of the 
shaft 30 rests upon the leaf-spring 41, where 
by the said shaft is pressed upward, lifting 
with it the lever 36. Below the button 3S the 
shaft 30 is made square or angular; or, if pre 
ferred, it may be splined to its bearing to pre 
vent axial movement. Below the bearing or 
platform 25 the shaft 30 is cut away upon 
One side of its axis to form a flat face 42, 
upon which is pivotally mounted a dog 43, hav 
ing an angular end 44, which projects beyond 
the shaft toward the right, or in the line of the 
shaft 14. A Stop-pin 45 is inserted in front 
of the dog, as shown in Fig. 5, and a spring 
46 bears upon it behind just below the pivotal 
point which normally throws the dog toward 
the right. Below the dog 43 the shaft is cut 
away upon the side adjacent to said dog, form. 
ing a plane surface 47. IParallel to the plano 
of pivotal movement and above said surface is 
formed a shoulder or incline 4S, having an an 
gle of inclination to the axis of the shaft which 
is substantially similar to the angle of the 
extremity 44 of the dog 43. This end of the 
dog Overhangs one of the pins 18 on the bar 
14 at all times, and by the depression of the 
shaft 30 through the action of the lever 36 
the pin is carried under the incline 4S, so 
that the type-carriage is advanced toward the 
right-hand end, Figs, 1 and 2. As the leaf. 
Spring 4l raises the shaft 30 after each action 
of the lever 30 the end 44 of the dog is thrown 
back by contact with the succeeding pin 18, 
this retractile movement being permitted by 
the spring 46, whereby after the shaft rises 
and carries the dog past the succeeding pin 
the end 44 is thrown forward and brought 
yo 
95 
IO) 
I O5 
d 
I 25 
443,546 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
Over the said pin in readiness for the next 
stroke of the lever 36. 
Upon the bracket 29 is mounted the trip 
hammer 49, having a pivotal bearing at 50. 
Upon the inner end of said trip-hammer is 
mounted by a pivotal joint 51 the hammer 
tripping dog 52, having a lug or tooth 53, in 
the path of which is placed a stop-pin 54, the 
latter mounted upon the inner end of the 
hammer. Upon the bracket 29 is mounted a 
Spring 55, acting upon the hammer 49 in such 
manner as to depress the letter. Upon the 
bracket 29, under the acting end of the hammer 
49, is mounted a bracket 56, in which is a 
striker 57, which is suspended directly over the 
arc within which the type are carried by the 
rotation of the type - carriage. Beneath the 
spring 55 is placed a stop-pin 58, whereby the 
effective force of said spring is arrested at 
the moment when the type is about to make 
impression upon the sheet, this arrest of the 
hammer movement giving all the results nec 
essary from the momentum of the hammer 
only, and the hammer and type are both suf 
fered to recoil after each blow or impact to 
produce an instantaneous impression upon 
the paper and prevent danger of slurring or 
producing indistinct impressions. After each 
stroke the hammer is brought back into po 
sition to impart the next stroke by means of 
a light spring 59. The dog 52 has a lip 60, 
which underlies the margin of the button 38 
on the shaft 30. As the button is thrown 
down by lever 36 the hammer is raised until 
the lip or angle 60 of the dog 52 has passed 
the margin of the button, whereupon the 
spring 55 throws the hammer down until it 
impinges upon the striker 57, whereby a suf 
ficient blow is given to the type to force it 
downward and make an instantaneous im 
pression upon the sheet, the hammer-impel 
ling spring 55 being arrested in its action an 
instant before the hammer strikes the striker, 
whereby the momentum of said hammer only 
is utilized, enabling the type to rebound by 
the elasticity of its spring-arm and to cause 
a rebound of the striker 57 also. As the le 
ver returns to its normal position the button 
rises, the dog 52 allowing it to pass to its po 
sition above the latter. 
The dog 52, spring 55, and button 38 or 
similar device on the shaft 30 constitute the 
hammer-tripping mechanism. It will be ob 
served that the hammer is above the type 
wheel and is first raised. It is then released 
or tripped and the spring throws it suddenly 
downward to operate the type-carrying arm 
with a quick sudden blow, which is of con 
siderable importance in obtaining perfect 
printing. 
Upon the type wheel or carriage 27 is 
mounted an index-hand or pointer 62, which 
lies over the index part of the plate 22, and is 
swung or vibrated in each direction over said 
plate by means of the lever 36. Upon that 
portion of the plate opposite the index are 
formed notches or channels 63, with one of 
which a depending lug 64 on the extremity 
of the lever-arm 36 engages at each depression 
of the lever, said notches acting as guides to 
justify the indexical relation of the type-car 
riage to the series of letters on the plate 22 
and secure the striking of the proper type by 
the hammer-rod or striker 57. 
I have shown in Fig. 9 a modified form of 
type-striking device, the same consisting of 
a hammer-rod or striker 57, above which is 
fulcrumed a lever 65, having one end lying 
over the striker and its other end connected 
by a rod 66 to one extremity of a similar le 
ver 67, fulcrumed in such position that its 
free end lies in the path of one edge of the 
button 38 on the shaft 30. As the latter is 
thrown downward by the stroke of the lever 
36 the two levers 65 and 67 are actuated simul 
taneously by the impact of the button, and the 
movement is communicated from lever 65 to 
the rod or striker 57. In this arrangement 
the type will print from the blow of the lever 
65, but by power derived directly from the 
lever 36. 
I may ink the type by a saturated ink 
cushion, with which said type have contacted; 
or I may use an ink-ribbon of any ordinary 
construction, or a strip of carbon-paper lying 
upon the sheet or page, or any other means 
for producing a legible impression by the type. 
Upon that part of the circle reserved for 
the index 22 I place the several letters, fig 
ures, and symbols in substantially the order 
observed in an ordinary type-writer index, 
save that where both capital and small letters 
are used I place the latter in a space adjacent 
to the former to enable the operator to locate 
the letters with less effort of memory. 
The rod 4 is channeled or grooved at inter 
vals corresponding to the distance by which 
the lines of printing are to be separated upon 
the page. When the carriage has reached its 
right-hand limit of movement, the operator 
seizes the button 38, lifts the shaft 30 above 
the pins, and slides the carriage to the left 
hand of the raceway. He then lifts pin 4 to 
release it from the groove 5 in rod 4 and draws 
the sleeves 9 and 10 toward himself until the 
pin drops into the next groove, moving the 
raceway and carriage to the next lower line. 
It will be seen that instead of moving the 
paper to the printing mechanism I reverse 
the operation and move the printing mech 
anism to the paper. 
Instead of using the platen or platform 1 
as a support for printing a book, I purpose 
providing a clamp by which one part of a 
cover and the leaves of an open book can be 
clamped to the grooved spacing-bar 4, as in 
Fig. 4. In this modification each of the loops 
or rings 3 on the bar 4 is provided with a jaw 
3, Fig. 4, through which is tapped a set 
screw 3', having a head 3, on which rests an 
other jaw 3, so that part of a book can be 
clamped between said jaws, as clearly shown, 
by lightening up the screw 3. The clamping 
action may be increased by a secondary set 
75 
OO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
443,546 
7 o 
95 
IOO 
O 
screw 2, tapped through the jaw 3' to bear ing mechanism, of a stationary platen having 
its upper surface arranged parallel to the line 
against the loop or ring 3. 
of movement of the type-carriage and its un 
The raceway-rods and carriage may be lifted 
der surface forming an acute angle with said 
from the paper, as shown in Fig. 2 in dotted 
upper surface, said platen serving as the Sup 
lines. 
port for the type - carriage supports and 
In place of the feed shown in Figs. 5, 6, 
adapted to be inserted in a bound volume, 
and 7, I may use the device shown in Fig. 
substantially as described. 
10, consisting of a pawl 70, pivoted on the 
7. The combination of a stationary platen 
shaft 30 and taking into the teeth of a rack 
having its under surface forming an acute an 
71 on the bar 14. 
gle with its upper paper-supporting surface, 
To obtain suitable spaces between the 
with a type-carriage, type-carriage Supports 
words, I provide a blank space in the dial, so 
having a hinged connection with the thickest 
that the operating-lever can make a stroke 
edge of the platen to permit the Supports and 
without printing or making an impression. 
the type-carriage to be swung upward to in 
sert the platen in a bound volume, and type 
operating mechanism carried by said type 
carriage, substantially as described. 
S. The combination of a stationary platen 
having its under surface forming an acute an 
gie with its upper supporting-surface, with a 
type-carriage carrying type-operating mech 
anism and supported by and movable over 
the platen in a plane parallel to the top sur 
face thereof, substantially as described. 
9. The combination, in a type-writer, of a 
spacing-bar, a stationary Support for the mat 
ter to be printed, the raceway-rods adapted to 
slide along the length of the Spacing-bar and 
one having pins or teeth, a type-carriage mov 
able along the length of the raceway-rods and 
comprising a centrally - journaled rotating 
disk carrying spring-supported type arranged 
in the arc of a circle, a shaft extending up 
through the center of said disk and having a 
dog to engage the pins or teeth on the race 
way - rods, and means, substantially as de 
scribed, for depressing the shaft to advance 
the type-carriage and depress the type, sub 
stantially as described. 
10. The combination of a rigid bracket, a 
spring trip-hammer pivoted thereon and car 
rying a tripping-dog, a rotary type-wheel lo 
cated below the trip-hammer and having elas 
tic type-carrying arms, a vertical shaft con 
stituting the axis of the type-wheel, a lever 
for depressing the shaft, and a but to on the 
shaft for acting on the tripping-dog carried 
by the hammer to raise and release the ham 
mer and permit its spring to throw it Sud 
denly downward, substantially as described. 
11. The combination of the raceway-rods, 
one of which is provided with pins or teeth, 
the type-carriage movable on the rods and 
comprising a rotary type-wheel having elastic 
type-carrying arms, the rigid bracket, the 
Spring trip-hammer pivoted on the bracket 
above. the type-wheel, a vertically-movable 
shaft constituting the axis of the type-wheel, 
a lever for depressing the shaft, and means, 
Substantially as described, which advances 
the type-carriage and trips the hammer as the 
said shaft is forced downward, substantially 
as described. 
12. The combination of the raceway. rods, 
one of which is provided with pins or teeth, 
the type-carriage movable on the rods and 
What I claim is 
1. In a type-writer, the combination, with a 
type-carriage and the type-operating mech 
anism therefor, of a platen or platform hav 
ing a supporting-surface arranged in proper 
parallel relation to the type-carriage and all 
opposite surface forming an acute angle with 
said supporting-surface, whereby the platen 
or platform can be inserted in a bound vol 
ume, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
2. The combination, with the type-carriage 
of a type-writer, of a stationary platen or plat 
form having an elastic supporting-surface 
arranged parallel to the type-cal'riage and an 
opposite surface forming an acute angle with 
said elastic supporting-surface, said platen 
adapted to be inserted into a bound volume 
to support an entire leaf thereof, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
3. The combination, in a type-writer, of a 
stationary platen having its under side form 
ing an acute angle with its upper side and 
adapted to be inserted into a bound volume, 
a clamp for holding the paper or book to be 
printed in a fixed position on the surface of 
the platell, and a type-carriage having type 
operating mechanism and movable back and 
forth in lines at right angles to each other, 
substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the stationary platen 
having its upper surface arranged in a hori 
Zontal plane and its under surface forming 
an acute angle with the upper surface, said 
platen adapted to be inserted into a bound 
volume to support an entire leaf thereof, with 
a type-carriage carrying type-Operating mech 
anism and type-carriage supports located over 
and solely supported by the platen, substan 
tially as described. 
5. The combination of the stationary platen 
having its upper surface continuously cow 
ered with an elastic material and arranged in 
a horizontal plane and its under surface form 
ing an acute angle with said upper surface 
and adapted to be inserted into a bound vol 
ume to support an entire leaf thereof, with a 
type-carriage having type-operating mechan 
ism and located wholly over and supported 
by the said stationary platen, substantially as 
described. 
6. In a type-writer, the combination, with a 
traveling type-carriage carrying type-operat 
O 
2 5 
O 
5 O 
5 5 
- OO 
5 
movable along the raceway-rods and carrying 
type-operating mechanism and comprising a 
rotary type-wheel, a lengthwise-movable shaft 
constituting the axis of the type-wheel, a lever 
for moving the shaft, and means, substan 
tially as described, for advancing the type 
carriage and operating the type by the de 
scending movement of the said shaft. 
15. The combination of a rigid bracket, a 
rotary type-wheel having elastic type-carry 
ing arms and moving beneath the bracket, a 
spring trip-hammer pivoted on the bracket 
above the type-wheel, a lengthwise-movable 
shaft having a button, a tripping-dog pivoted 
on the hammer, and a lever to depress the 
shaft and cause the button to raise. and re 
lease the hammer, substantially as described. 
16. In combination, a type-carriage support, 
a type-carriage having type-operating mech 
anism and movable in two directions at right 
angles to each other, and a platen having a 
uniformly smooth and continuously unob 
structed top surface for insertion between the 
leaves of a book to continuously support a 
leaf throughoutits extent where the printing 
is to be effected, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ROSWELL T. SMITH. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
J. A. SPALDING, 
S. J. M. SMITH, 
443,546 
comprising a rotary type-wheel having elastic 
type-carrying arms, a rigid bracket, a spring 
trip-hammer pivoted on the bracket above the 
type-wheel, a vertically-movable shaft consti 
tuting the axis of the type-wheel and having 
a pawl or dog to engage the pins or teeth of 
the raceway-rods, a lever for depressing the 
shaft, and means, substantially as described, 
for advancing the type-carriage and raising 
and releasing the trip-hammer as the shaft 
descends, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a stationary sup 
port for the matter to be printed, a type-car 
riage movable back and forth and comprising 
a rotary type-wheel having elastic type-carry 
ing arms, a shaft constituting the axis of the 
type-wheel, a swinging trip-hammer pivoted 
above the type-wheel and by its descent act 
luating the type-arms, a lever for depressing 
the shaft, and means, substantially as de 
Scribed, operated by the shaft in its descend 
ing movement to advance the type-carriage 
and raise and release the trip-hammer and 
permit its spring to throw it downward and 
depress a type-arm. 
14. The combination of a transverse spac 
ing-bar, a bracket supporting said spacing 
bar and carrying a clamp to hold the matter 
to be printed, the raceway-rods sliding along 
the length of the spacing-bar and journaled 
thereupon to swing upward and downward on 
said spacing-bar as a pivot, a type-carriage 
IO 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443646.txt	(No Model.) . 
W. H. KILBOURN 
MAGNETO ELECTRIC STOP MECHANISM, 
No. 443,646, 
Patented Dec, 30, 1890. 
 
28)----essey 
E/; 
2. %my. 
8vvuo vot 
CU ( Go 
-, -( -S.--e. 
884 bus hovoys 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WASHINGTON. H. KILBOURN, OF GREENFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR 
TO HERBERT O. EDGERTON, OF SAME PLACE. 
VAGNETO-ELECTRIC STOP MECHANISV. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,646, dated December 30, 1890. 
Application filed June 4, 1890, Serial No, 354,284 (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all, Luhon it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, WASHINGTON II. ISIL 
BOURN, a citizen of Greenfield, in the county 
of Franklin and State of Massachusetts, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improve 
lments in Stop Mechanism; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
electric Stop mechanism, and is designed 
more particularly to be used in factories, ma 
chine-shops, mills, and like places to stop 
the Supply of power to such machinery, the 
object of the invention being to produce an 
apparatus by means of which the supply of 
power to machinery may be instantaneously 
stopped from any point in the building in 
which the machinery is located, 
A further object is to provide an apparatus 
by which the Supply of power may be cut off 
from an engine or Water-wheel with electrical 
devices, whereby the supply of power may be 
cut off, said electrical device being capable of 
manipulation from any part of the building 
containing the machinery. 
A further object is to produce an improved 
belt-tightener to be actuated through the 
medium of electrical appliances. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion and Combinations and arrangements of 
parts, as hereinafter set forth, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawing the figure is 
a view of my invention in elevation. 
The apparatus is designed to be located in 
proximity to the Supply of power to a water 
wheel or Steam-engine. 
Mounted in Suitable bearings at points near 
the Supply of power are two pulleys A B, con 
nected by a normally-loose belt C, the shaft 
of one of said pulleys (preferably pulley B) 
being connected with the valve, which con 
trols the supply of power, whether the power 
or motive force be steam, water, or any other 
source of power. Located in proximity to the 
belt C is an upright D, on which a lever E is 
5o pivotally supported. At the end of the short 
arm of this level a roller F is mounted and 
adapted to bear against the belt C, and 
througll the medium of a weight F on the 
long arm of said lever to tighten said belt 
when the level E is operated, as presently ex- 55 
plained. 
IPivotally connected to the long arm of the 
lover E, and supported by a suitable bracket 
G', secured to the lever E, is an upwardly 
projecting bar G, provided at or near its up - 6o 
per end with a hook or projection Cl. The 
bar G is adapted to normally engage a detent 
l) on a shaft or arbor c, which latter is mounted 
in suitable supports (d. A spring e is coiled 
about the shaft c, one end being secured to 65 
said shaft and the other end to one of the 
supports d, whereby the detent may be re 
turned to its normal position after the lar G 
shall have been released. 
2, is an electro-magnet 3, and pivotally Sup 
ported between the uprights 2 is an armature 
4, adapted to be actuated by the magnet 3. 
Secured at one end to the armature 4 is a le 
ver 5, the other end of which is pivotally con- 75 
nected to a horizontal bar 6, said bar passing 
between two rollers 77, between which it is 
adapted to have a sliding movement, being 
limited by a collar S. The free end of the bar 
G is pivotally connected to a lig 9 on the 8o 
shaft c. 
Iocated on a base-plate1, having an upright 7o 
- 
85 
A foot-lever II is secured to the lever E, by 
means of which to move said lever and parts 
carried thereby back to their normal positions 
When desired. 
A battery I is included in circuit with the 
coils of the magnet 3, said circuit extending 
to any part of the mill, factory, or other place 
where machinery is employed, and one or 
more push-buttons or circuit-closers 10 in- 9o 
cluded in Said circuit. 
When it is desired to stop the machinery in 
case of accident or for other reasons, one of the 
push-buttons will be pressed to close the circuit 
through the coils of magnet 3, whereby the ar- 95 
mature 4 will be attracted and the lever 5 and 
bar 6 withdrawn, thus moving the detent b out 
of the path of the hook a of bar G, whereupon 
said bar will drop, and through the medium 
of the weight F" the roller F will be made to Ioo 
2 
443,646 
5 
IO 
15 
bear on the band C and tighten it. This will connected to a source of power, a loose belt 
cause the pulley's A B to rotate and the source 
passing over said pulley and a driving-pulley, 
of power to be shut off. After bar G has left 
a pivoted lever carrying a roller to bear on 
the detent a said detent will be returned to 
said belt, a weight also attached to the lever, 
its normal position by the springs. When it 
a pivoted detent, an electro-magnet, a lever 
is desired to again start the mechanism, it is 
attached to the armature of said electl'O-mag 
simply necessary to operate the foot-lever, 
net, a rod connecting said lever with the de 
whereupon the belt C will be loosened and 
tent, rollers for supporting said rod, and a 
the bar G moved up and made to engage the 
stop for limiting the movement of said rod, 
detent Cl, when the apparatus will be again 
substantially as set forth. 
in position to be operated to stop the mech 
6. A stop mechanism consisting of a pulley 
connected to a source of power, a loose belt 
St. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
passing over said pulley and a driving-pulley, 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
a pivoted lever carrying a roller to bear on 
Patent, is 
said belt, a bar attached to said level", a weight 
1. The combination, with a source of power, 
also attached to the lever, a pivoted detent, a 
of a pulley connected thereto, a driving-pull 
spring for maintaining said detent normally 
ley, a belt passing over said pulleys, a belt 
in the path of the bar, an electro-magnet, a 
tightenel', trip mechanism, an electro-mag 
lever attached to the arnature of Said mag 
letic device for actuating said trip mechan 
net, and a rod connecting said lever with the 
isln, and an electric circuit including the elec 
detent, substantially as set forth. 
tro-magnetic device and circuit-closers, sub 
7. A stop mechanism adapted to be coll 
stantially as set forth. 
nected to a source of power, consisting of a 
2. The combination, with a source of power, 
pulley connected with a source of power, a 
of a pulley connected thereto, a driving-pull 
driving-pulley, a loose belt passing over said 
ley, a belt passing over said pulleys, a pivoted 
pulleys, a pivoted lever, a roller mounted in 
level' carrying a roller to bear on said belt, a 
one end of said lever and adapted to be 
bar attached to said lever, a detent to main 
brought into contact with the belt, a foot-lever 
tain said bar normally elevated, and an elec 
projecting from said pivoted lever at one end 
trically-actuated apparatus for manipulating 
thereof, a weight attached to the other end 
said detent to release said bar, substantially 
of the lever, an upright bar having a hook 
as Set forth. 
shaped upper end ivotally connected to the 
3. The combination, with a source of power, 
lever, a pivoted bar or arbor having a detent 
of a pulley connected thereto, a driving-pull 
thereon with which said upright bar engages, 
ley, a belt passing over said pulleys, a pivoted 
and an electro-magnetic device for withdraw 
level carrying a roller to bear on said belt, a 
ing said detent, slabstantially as set forth. 
bar attached to said lever, a weight also at 
S. A stop mechanism consisting of a pulley 
tached to the lever, a pivoted detent adapted 
connected with a source of power, a loose belt 
to be engaged by said bar, an electro-magnet, 
passing over said pulley and driving-pulley, a 
a lever attached to the armature of said mag 
weighted lever carrying a rollel' adapted to 
net, and a lod connecting said lever with the 
bear on said belt, a bar extending upwardly 
(letent, substantially as set forth. 
from said lever, a shaft carrying a detent to 
4. The combination, with a source of power, 
engage Said bar, a Spring on said shaft to 
of a pulley connected thereto, a driving-pull 
maintain the detent in its normal position, an 
ley, a belt passing over said pulleys, a pivoted 
electro-magnet, and a rod pivotally connect 
lever carrying a roller to bear on said belt, a 
ing the shaft with the al'mature of the elec 
bar attached to said lever, a weight also at 
tro-magnet, substantially as set forth. 
tached to the lever, a pivoted detent adapted 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
to be engaged by said bar, an electro-magnet, 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
a lever attached to the armature of said mag 
ing Witnesses. 
net, a rod connecting said level with the de 
tent, and roller's for supporting said rod, sub 
Witnesses: 
sfantially as set forth. 
5. A stop mechanism consisting of a pulley 
HERBERT O. EDGERTON, 
C. H. KEITH. 
WASHINGTON II. KILIBOURN. 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
90 
dO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443746.txt	(No Model.) 
J, T, DEMPSTER, 
ELECTRIC AMP SOCKET, 
No. 443,746. 
Patented De0, 30, 1890. 
4 z-z- 
t 
errs Svolouk, 
S3 ka. alteracy. 
3.C. 
9.7-8enade 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. DEMPSTER, OF SUMMIT, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO BERGMANN & 
COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRIC-LAMP SOCKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,746, dated December 30, 1890. 
Application filed May 24, 1890, Serial No. 362,989, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concein. 
Be it known that I, JOHN T. DEMPSTER, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at Summit, in the county of Union and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Electric-Lamp Sock 
ets, of which the following is a specification. 
My improvement relates to sockets em 
ployed with incandescent electric lamps. 
The invention consists in improved circuit 
connections for the socket, and in certain fea 
tures of construction which will be hereinaf 
ter fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate the invention, Figure 1 shows a side 
view of a lamp, and below the lamp a cross 
section of the socket, the two parts of the 
socket being separated. Fig. 2 shows a side 
elevation of the socket, the two parts of the 
socket being separated. Fig. 3 shows a side 
view of the lower part of the socket at right 
angles to the view in Fig. 2, and Fig. 4 is a 
plan view of the Socket. 
The upper section of the socket consists of 
three parts-the outer metal shell or sleeve 1, 
provided at its lower end with a screw-thread 
or other fastening means 2, and preferably 
provided at its top with a bead 3. Within 
this shell is an insulating-lining 4, preferably 
of vulcanized fiber. Within this layer of in 
sulation is a second metal'sleeve 5, extending 
partially through the outer sleeves and termi 
nating at the bottom in a flange 6. In manu 
facturing this part of the socket a sheet of 
metal is rolled onto a sheet of the fiber, the 
screw-thread being impressed on both sheets. 
They are then bent into cylindrical shape and 
inserted into the outer tube, and are properly 
cemented in place. 
The lower section of the socket consists of 
a cup-shaped cap 7, having the screw-threaded 
flange 8 and the extension 9 for connection 
with a light fixture or bracket. Within the 
cap is supported an insulating-block, prefer 
ably of vulcanized fiber. This block in its 
preferred form is cylindrical at its base, with 
a segment cut away at 10. The block may be 
held in place by screws passing through the 
bottom of the cap. On the side of the block 
which has been cut away are supported tWO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
metal contact-pieces 11 12, secured in place 
by screws or otherwise. These pieces are bent 
to extend over the top of the insulating-block, 
as clearly shown in Figs. 3 and 4. The ends 
of the springs are preferably, though not nec 55 
essarily, left a little above the face of the 
block, so that they may act as springs when 
the parts are in use. 
The Wires from the lighting-circuit pass 
through extensions 9. One wire is connected 
to contact 11 and the other to contact12, When 
the two sections of the socket are put together, 
flange 6 will bear on the spring end of con 
tact 11, and contact 12 will occupy a portion 
of the central space within the flange. When 
the lamp is screwed into its socket, the metal 
sleeve 13 on the lamp-base will make intimate 
contact with the sleeve 5, which, as we have 
just seen, bears on contact 11. The central 
terminal 14 of the lamp will bear on the other 
contact 12, thus completing the circuit from 
the line through the filament of the lamp. 
Instead of connecting the upper and lower 
sections of the Socket by means of the screw 
connection shown, it is evident that a bayonet 
joint connection or other suitable locking 
means may be employed. 
In the construction above described the 
parts are very simple and of such construction 
that they cannot well get out of adjustment, 
and there is no electrical connection between 
the exposed portion of the socket and the 
screw-threaded sleeve into which the lamp 
base, which is connected with the filament, is 
screwed. The circuit is complete independent 
of the Outer sleeve. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The combination, in an electric-lamp 
socket, of a metal sleeve, a second metal sleeve 
within the same and insulated therefrom, ter 
minating in a flange, an insulating-block in 
Sertible into the outer sleeve and carrying a 
contact co-operating with the flange, and a 
Second contact, Substantially as described. 
2. The combination, in an electric - lamp 
socket, of a metal sleeve with insulating lin 
ing, a central metal sleeve shorter than the 
first and terminating in a flange, an insulat 
ing-block insertible into the outer sleeve and 
95 
75 
CO 
-1 
2 
443,746 
within the same and insulated therefrom, ter 
minating in a flange, an insulating-block in 
sertible into the outer sleeve and carrying a 
contact co-operating with the flange, a second 
contact, said block being supported in a cap, 
and means for locking the cap to the sleeve, 
substantially as described. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
18th day of April, 1890. 
JOIN. T. DEMPSTER. 
Witnesses: 
JoWN W. McGHIE, 
JNO. F. GEIDEL. 
carrying a spring-contact which bears against 
said flange, and a central spring-contact, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, in an electric-lamp 
Socket, of a metal sleeve, a second metal sleeve 
within the same and insulated therefrom, ter 
minating in a flange, an insulating-block in 
sertible into the outer sleeve and carrying a 
contact co-operating with the flange, a second 
contact, and means for locking the block in 
place, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, in an electric-lamp 
socket, of a metal sleeve, a second metal sleeve 
Id 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443846.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 443,846, 
 
D., CONBOY, 
BUGGY TOP, 
Patented Dec. 30, 1890. 
f/27 gesses 
/2. 72%. 
7-4.2%2. 
17-zz-'ez (Coz 
4.2. 
'l- 
The noRRIS PETERs co., Phord-LIrHo., washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL CONBOY, OF TORONTO, CANADA. 
BU GGY - TOP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,846, dated December 30, 1890. 
Application filed August 26, 1890. Serial No. 363,143, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL CONBOY, manu 
facturer, of the city of Toronto, in the county 
of York, in the Province of Ontario, Canada, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Buggy-Tops, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of the invention is to pivot the 
buggy-top in such a manner that when folded 
down it will project as little as possible be 
hind the back of the buggy, and will be au 
tomatically locked down until the front bows 
are raised; and it consists, essentially, of a 
bow pivoted on the goose-neck and having an 
extension projecting below or behind its pivot 
point, and on which the other bows of the top 
are pivoted, a hook-shaped projection being 
formed upon or attached to the back bow in 
such a manner that when the top is folded 
back the said hook will engage with the prop 
block. 
Figure 1 is a view of the top as it will ap 
pear when up. Fig. 2 is a view of the top as 
it will appear when down. 
In the drawings, A is the front bow, pivoted 
at C on the goose-neck B. A curved exten 
sion C is formed upon or attached to the end 
of the bow A, which projection extends be 
hind or below the pivot-point a, and is pref 
erably curved backwardly, as indicated, and 
on which the bows D are pivoted, as shown. 
As the extension-piece C is below the pivot 
point C of the bow A, the said extension is 
thrown forward when the bow A is folded 
back, and consequently the bows Dare thrown 
forward toward the front of the buggy by the 
forward action of the extension-piece C. In 
practice I find that I am able to thus draw in 
the top so that it will project at least four 
O 
25 
35 
45 
inches less than when the bows are pivoted 4o 
in the ordinary way, but of course the move 
ment will change according to the length. Ol' 
position of the extension-piece C. A hook or 
catch E is fixed to the back bow D', and it 
will be observed that when the said back bow 
D' is horizontal and the front bow A folded 
back the said hook or catch E is drawn for 
ward, so as to cause the said hook or catch E 
to engage with the prop-block F, and in this 
way the bow D' is locked down, so as to pre 
vent it being jolted up, as would be the case 
were it not thus secured in position. I pre 
fer to have the extension-piece C project be 
hind and substantially on a line with the 
pivot-point of the front bow, but it will of 
course be understood that it will operate if 
it simply projects below the pivot-point. I 
therefore say in my description behind or 
below the pivot-point, as the effect would be 
substantially the same in either case, and I 
might also mention that it would operate 
even though the extension-piece were slightly 
above the pivot-point, but it would have to be 
behind it. 
55 
What I claim as my invention is 
A buggy-top having a bow with an exten 
sion-piece projecting behind or below the 
pivot-point of the said bow and on which pro 
jection the other bows of the top are pivoted, 
in combination with a hook or catch fixed to 
the back bow and designed to engage with 
the prop-block when the top is thrown back, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
DANIEL CON BOY. 
Toronto, July 23, 1890. 
In presence of 
65 
o 
CHARLES C. BALDWIN, 
T. A. WOODWARD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US443946.txt	(No Model.) 
T. W. MORAN, 
CYLINDER COUPLING JOINT, 
No. 443,946, 
Patented Dec. 30, 1890. 
Z7 A 
Z7 
f 
- 7 
Z 
i 
H 
: 
a 
- 
- 7 - 
Zzz- 
--------- 
- 
7 
  
 
 
 
y 
a 
e 
Z7 
- (2 ill Z. 
2 SES N 
56ESSES 2 I 
S2 s RNP 
I 
 
N Q 
N 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
A. 
M 
C 
BY 
2, ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS W. MORAN, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR TO THE MORAN 
FLEXIBLE STEAM JOINT COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CYLN DER COUPLN G. J O N T. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 443,946, dated December 30, 1890. 
Application filed February 24, 1890, Serial No, 341,525, (No model.) 
15 
To all whon, it invay conce77. 
Beit known that I, THOMAS W. MoRAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Louisville, in the county of Jefferson and State 
5 of Kentucky, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Cylinder Coupling 
Joints; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
Io art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification, 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
View of my invention. Fig. 2 is a verticallon 
gitudinal section, and Fig. 3 is a detail view. 
This invention has relation to cylinder 
couplings for pipes designed to carry steam, 
2O air, or water under pressure; and it consists in 
the novel construction and combination of 
parts, as hereinafter set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letters 
A. A designate the sections of the coupling, 
25 which consist of the cylinder portions B B 
and their clamping devices C. C. 
The outer end of each cylinder B is pro 
vided with a wrench-seat at D, and is threaded 
to enable it to be connected to a joint of pipe. 
3o Its inner end E is usually plane, and is adapt 
ed to be abutted against the inner end of the 
opposite section, to which it is to be coupled. 
Each cylinder is chambered in cylindrical 
form, as indicated at F, and the opening of 
35 this chamber is threaded, usually at G, to pro 
vide for securing the annular guard H within 
the mouth of the cylinder. Within the cyl 
inder-chamber and back of this guard is lo 
cated the piston-form joint-piece J, which is 
4o formed with a central opening K, extending 
through its cylindrical or tubular projection L, 
which is provided with a plane circular ground 
bearing-face in. The tubular projection L 
projects through the opening of the annular 
45 guard, and its face is designed to engage the 
ground bearing-face of the tubular portion of 
the joint-piece of the opposite coupling-sec 
tion A. When these sections are connected 
together. 
So The piston-form joint-piece J is provided 
with the flange I of proper diameter to fit 
easily within the cylinder-chamber, and this 
 
flange is provided with a recess bearing 
around its edge to receive the packing P, SO 
that it will have a steam-tight bearing against 55 
the cylinder-wall. When the coupling-sec 
tions are connected and steam is turned into 
the pipes, the pressure of the steam, acting 
against the flanges of the piston-form joint 
pieces, forces their tubular portions against 6o 
each other, and the plane circular faces of 
these portions become automatically c0apted, 
so that the joint between them is steam-tight. 
It therefore makes no difference whether the 
coupling-sections AA have lateral movement. 65 
or are not in true relation. The automatic 
righting of the joint-pieces J J under the 
pressure of the steam is sufficient to secure a 
steam-tight joint. 
preferably provided with perforations to af 
ford purchase to a wrench, so that they can 
be readily removed and replaced when neces 
Sary. 
The annular guards H of the cylinders are 7 O 
Having described this invention, what I 75 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
The cylinder coupling-joint consisting of 
the hollow cylinder-sections having integral 
therewith at opposite ends clamping devices 8o 
reversely engaging the distant ends of said 
sections, said sections also having each at its 
outer end a cylindric chamber of greater diam 
eter than the bore of the section, and fitted 
with an annular guard at its outer edge, form- 85 
ing with the inner wall or end of the cylindric 
chamber a supplemental chamber or space, 
and the cylindric hollow piston-joint pieces 
of a diameter to fit said supplemental cham 
bers or spaces, and provided with tubular 90 
extensions or projections- of a diameter to 
adapt them to fit and slide within said annu 
lar guards, said piston-joint pieces being 
adapted to be acted upon and have their 
meeting outer ends to be engaged steam-tight 95 
by the pressure of the steam itself, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
TIOS. W. MORAN. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP C. MASI, 
C. L. TAYLOR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444046.txt	(No Model.) 
P. J. CAIRNS, 
PEN HOLDER, 
No. 444,046, 
Patented Jan. 6, 1891, 
 
HV/7A/ESSAS, 
2, 5 (22-zzza22 
(? (6? WZ. We 
(?/ (2---4-- INVENTOR. 
2.22 
4 TTOARWAE J. 
The MoRR's PETERs co., PHoro-Litha, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER JAMES CAIRNS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PEN - HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,046, dated January 6, 1891. 
Application filed August 29, 1889, Serial No, 822,361 (No model.) 
55 
Go 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PETER JAMES CAIRNs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi. 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Pen-Holders; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, which 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to pen-holders; and 
the invention consists in a holder having a 
duplicate set of barrels, one within the other, 
and adapted to hold one or more pens, all as 
shown and described, and particularly pointed 
Out in the claims. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of my im 
proved holder. Fig. 2 is a cross-section on 
line a ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a perspective view 
of the inner barrel or tube, and Fig. 4 is a 
plan view thereof. 
The design of the invention is to furnish a 
holder which may be converted from a single 
pen-holder to a double pen-holder, thus afford 
ing a feeding or supply arrangement, whereby 
the device in a sense becomes a fountain-penor 
a pen carrying an extra supply of ink stored 
for gradual use; or, on the contrary, the double 
holder or arrangement may be changed to a 
single holder and the pen be used as ordi 
marily. 
To these ends I employ two barrels, tubes, 
Or cylinders A. B. The outer tube or barrel 
is adapted to the stem C in any suitable way, 
and is straight and plain in the portion ex 
tending beyond or below the stem. The in 
ner barrel or tube B has the form of a convo 
lute Spring with overlapping free sides of suf 
ficient width in their overlapped portion to 
receive and hold a pend between them, while 
the Outer lap or portion forms the inner seat 
or bearing for a pen c, that is held between it 
and the outer barrel. The inner barrel in its 
Original formation has beads b or ribs struck 
up on the overlapping portion to bear against 
the inner surface of the outer pen and hold 
it a sufficient distance from the inner pen to 
enable the two pens to work together advan 
tageously as contemplated. The convolute 
form of inner barrel affords a yielding holder 
O 
25 
35 
45 
for the introduction of both pens c d, so that 
either pen can be introduced or removed in 
dependently of the other, and either can be 
used separately or with the other, and the 
holder will be sufficient and convenient in 
either case. 
In order that the beads lo should retain 
their shape and not flatten out when the sheet 
is formed into shape for use, I cut curved slits 
e on either side of said beads. This enables 
me to bend the sheet into cylindrical form 
Without affecting the shape or elevation of 
the beads. The inner and outer barrels have 
their extremities on about the same vertical 
plane, and the two are riveted or otherwise 
suitably fastened together at their lower por 
tion. 
Ordinarily when two pens are used the up 
per one becomes the feeder, while the lower 
one is used for Writing, and the ink is held in 
considerable quantity by capillary attraction 
between the two. A quantity of ink can be 
thus stored and a considerable amount of con 
tinuous Writing done without replenishing 
the ink. The feeder, whether it be part c or 
d, need not necessarily be a pen, as a suitable 
stub of sheet metal or the like instead of the 
pen Would answer the purpose. However, a 
Worn-out pen c is preferred, as it costs noth 
ing and always is on hand, and can be ex 
changed for another worn-out pen when nec 
essary. It is but the work of a moment to 
change from a single to the double form or 
back again at pleasure. In other respects my 
improved holder has the appearance of other 
common holders, and it is as convenient as 
any for single use. When the lower pen is 
used as a feeder, it should be pressed up far 
enough away from the point of the upperpen 
not to interfere with Writing, which is easily 
done, as there is abundant room to adjust 
either pen up and down with respect to the 
Other. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A pen-holder having separate barrels, 
one within the other, and the inner barrel 
having free overlapping edges or sides, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
444,046 
2. A pen-holder formed of barrels, one with 
in the other, the outer barrel being a plain 
cylinder and the inner barrel a cylinder hav 
ing free overlapping sides, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. A pen-holder having two barrels, one of 
which has free overlapping sides with a bead 
On the overlapping portion and extends 
Within the other barrel, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. A pen-holder provided with separate 
Seats for a pen and feeder, between which is a 
yielding portion of the holder provided with 
IO 
a bead or other means for holding the pen 
and feeder apart, substantially as Set forth. I5 
5. A pen-holder having an inner barrel of 
convolute form and an outer barrel to which 
said inner barrel is secured, substantially as 
described. 
hand this 16th day of August, 1889. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 2 o 
PETER JAMES CAIRNS. 
Witnesses: 
E. HOLLAND, 
C. A. CAIRNS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444146.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 444,146. 
W. T. BOTHWELL, 
AUTOMATIC PNEUMATIC BRAKE, 
Patented Jan, 6, 1891. 
 
2 2 2 24 
SS 
| 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM T. BOTHWELL, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO ALFRED R. BOLUSS, OF NORWOOD, OHIO. 
AUTOMATIC PNEU MATC BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,146, dated January 6, 1891. 
Application filed May 31, 1890, Serial No, 353,720. (No model.) 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, WILLIAM T. BOTHWELL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Jer 
sey City, in the county of Hudson and State 
5 of New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Automatic Pneumatic 
Brakes; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
1o art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale, 
This invention has relation to car-brakes, 
and is designed as an improvement upon the 
devices shown and described in my applica 
15 tion for Letters Patent filed April 18, 1890, 
Serial No. 348,514. 
In the application referred to I have illus 
trated my invention in connection with a 
brake-rod, brake-lever, and chains; but such 
parts are omitted from the present applica 
tion, as they form no part of my invention, 
and with the cross reference made herein I 
deem a description of such devices unneces 
sary. In said application I have shown and 
described a piston with a plurality of Spiral 
grooves, and employ balls engaging the 
grooves, so as to impart to the piston a par 
tial rotation or rocking motion simultane 
ously with its backward and forward or recip 
rocating movements, and thereby cause a 
draft upon the brake-chains at each outward 
stroke of the piston. 
In the present invention I have simplified 
the construction of the parts by Omitting the 
grooves in the piston, the balls for engaging 
the grooves, and consequently the ring Oran 
nulus which holds the balls in position. 
The improvements will be fully understood 
from the following description and claims, 
4o when taken in connection with the annexed 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical sectional 
view of a brake-cylinder, showing the piston 
with my improvements in position. Fig. 2 is 
45 a cross-sectional view of the same, and Fig. 
3 is a perspective view of the piston removed 
from the cylinder. 
Referring by letter to the said drawings, A 
indicates the piston or brake-cylinder, which 
so is of a construction substantially the same as 
55 
75 
that in my application above referred to, hav 
ing at one end an induction-pipe a, which is 
designed to communicate with the fluid-press 
ure-line-pipe or a pipe leading from a storage 
cylinder, as the case maybe. 
B indicates the piston which is arranged 
within the cylinder, and is provided with a 
head b for the impact of the steam or fluid 
pressure. The piston B is provided at its op 
posite end with a plate c, and from this plate 
extends a stem or rod D, passing through 
a suitable guide E. The plate c is provided 
at diametrically opposite points with pins or 
studs d for the attachment of brake-chains, 
such as F. 
Between the head b and the plate c the pis 
ton is provided lengthwise with a series of 
spiral flanges G, there being preferably three 
of such flanges employed, for a purpose which 
will be presently explained. 
Secured in the open or outer end of the cyl 
inder A are guides composed of rollers f. 
These guides are arranged in pairs, one on 
each side of the spiral flanges G and in close 
relation thereto, said guides having stems or 
shafts g secured in the wall of the cylinder, 
and the friction-rollersh are journaled on the 
inner ends of said shafts, so that as the piston 
is driven forwardly and rearwardly it will be 
given a partial rotatable movement, 
In operation, when air or fluid is let into 
the cylinder through the pipe a, it will first 
act upon the head b of the piston, driving the 
latter outwardly, and the rollers engaging the 
flanges of said piston will direct it in a partly 
rotatable direction. This movement will 
cause the plate c to move in a corresponding 
direction, and through the medium of the 
chains F and Suitable brake mechanism 
brakes may be applied to the wheels of a car 
truck. As pressure is relieved on the headb 
of the piston the latter will be allowed to re 
verse its movement and consequently release 
the brake. 
I am aWare that a steam-engine has been 
constructed with a piston having a flat or 
rectangular portion intermediate of its length 
and a cylinder arranged loosely on said rect 
angular portion, the cylinder having a re 
verse spiral groove arranged hetween two roo 
95 
44.1,146 
" 
. 
o 
5 claim is- 
heads and a pin or trundle head projectiing - 
in Wardly from the steam-cylinder and enter 
ing the grooves in the headed cylinder. 
der having the roller-guides arranged in pairs 
in one end thereof, of the piston having lon 
gitudinal spiral flanges embraced by Sail 15 
Having described my invention, what I guides, and also having a plate at its outer 
end for the attachment of brake-chains, sub 
1. In a car-brake, the combination, with a stantially as specified. 
piston or brake-cylinder having roller-guides. In testimony whereof Ia ?ix my signature in 
in one end, of a piston adapted to receive presence of two witnesses. 
brake-chains and having longitudinal spiral 
(O flanges adapted to move between the guides 
in the cylinder, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the brake-cylin- 
OTTO CROUSE, 
WILLIAM. A. RENT, 
WILLIAM. I. 3() 
Witnesses: 
WELI, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444246.txt	F. I. MAULE. 
STRAINER, 
Patented Jan, 6, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 444,246. 
 
s 
 
 
S 
Z7tzverzifor." 
A7arvcos Z.7%azode, 
als % Jes /(exogeys. 
i 
WASH 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS I. MAULE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
STRAiNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,246, dated January 6, 1891. 
Application filed October 27, 1890, Serial No. 869,408, (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all whon, it inval? concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS I. MAULE, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain Improvements in Strainers, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to so con 
struct a strainer for the inlet-pipes of pumps 
and for analogous uses that the making of 
the same will be facilitated and cheapened; 
and this object I attain in the manner here 
inafter set forth, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a strainer 
constructed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the parts 
of the strainer detached from each other, and 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view illustrating certain 
modifications of my invention. 
Various devices for attachment to the in 
let-pipes of pumps or other pipes for the pur 
pose of preventing leaves, sticks, and other 
refuse from entering the same have been 
proposed and are known to the trade under 
the general name of strainers,' the com 
monest form of such strainer consisting of a 
hollow metal cylinder with perforated side 
walls, said cylinder being closed at the bot 
tom and provided at the upper end with a 
screw-thread, whereby it is connected to the 
pipe. Such strainers have usually been made 
in a single piece of cast-iron; but the great 
care required in molding then and the neces 
sity for using elaborate cores for such mold 
ing have rendered them expensive, and to 
this is added the liability of the perforations 
to become filled or partially filled with metal 
in casting, so as to necessitate subsequent 
drilling of many of said perforations. Hence 
these objections have been serious drawbacks 
to their manufacture in this way. 
In carrying out my invention I make the 
strainer in sections-that is to say, it com 
prises a top or cap piece A, a bottom piece B, 
and a series of body-sections D, each shaped 
to correspond with the desired shape of said 
body portion of the strainer. For instance, if 
the latter is cylindrical, each of the body-sec 
tions will be of segmental form, as shown in 
Fig. 2 of the drawings. Each of said body 
sections, and by preference the bottom plate 
also, of the strainer is perforated; but these 
perforations will not interfere with the ready 
casting of the parts without cores, as said 
parts can be molded flatwise. Hence special 
skill in molding is not required, and the Work 
can be performed at much less expense than 
the ordinary molding operations involved in 
the manufacture of this class of work. More 
over, the perforations will be uniform and of 
full area, and the bottom end plate, as well as 
the body-sections, can be perforated, whereas 
in a strainer cast in one piece the perfora 
tion of the bottom is considered impracti 
cable. 
Each of the body-sections of the strainer 
has at top and bottom a projecting lug or 
tang a, and in the top and bottom pieces of 
the strainer are formed slots b, which, when 
the parts are properly fitted together, receive 
the lugs or tangsa of the body-sections, these 
lugs being of such length as to project be. 
yond the bottom plate and beyond the flange 
of the cap or top piece, so that the project 
ing portions can be bent down, as shown in 
Fig. 1, for instance, in order to firmly confine 
said top and bottom pieces to the body, it be 
ing understood, of course, that the body-sec 
tions are made of malleable iron, cast-steel, or 
other metal which will permit such bending 
of the lugs. 
If desired, the construction may be modi 
fied by forming laterally-projecting lugs or 
tangs upon the top and bottom pieces of the 
strainer, these tangs being passed through 
slots in the body-sections and bent down be 
yond the same, or the tangs of the body-sec 
tions may be upset or hammered into coun 
tersunk recesses in the top and bottom pieces, 
Both of these modifications are illustrated in 
Fig. 3, in which A represents the top piece, 
having tangSC passing laterally through slots 
in the body-sections D' and bent down be 
yond the same, and a represents tangs on the 
body-sections upset or hammered down into 
undercut recesses in the bottom end piece B'. 
I am aware that it has been proposed to 
make a strainer having a head composed of 
Semi-tubular halves, each carrying one-half 
of the bottom piece, these halves being 
clamped together and to the pipe by a trans 
verse bolt and each half having a central 
IC 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
95 
loo 
2 
444,246 
row of perforations and notched edges form 
ing parts of two other rows; but by making 
the body of the strainer independent of the 
top and bottom pieces, and Securing the parts 
together in the manner which I have herein 
before set forth 
m enabled to make the 
body in as many Sctions as desired, and I 
can perforate each section of the body 
throughout its entire extent without interfer 
ing with the casting of said sections, and am 
also enabled to perforate the bottom end piece. 
IIaving thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
O 
The within-described strainer, consisting of 15 
a top end piece, a perforated bottom end 
piece, and a series of body-sections perforated 
throughout, said body-sections and end pieces 
being secured together by malleable lugs 
formed on one part and adapted to recesses 20 
in the other part, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
FRANCIS I. MAULE. 
Witnesses: 
EUGENEELTERICH, 
HARRY SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444347.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
J. W. GAR,RETT, 
WAGON JACK. 
No. 444,347. 
Patented Jan. 6, 1891, 
 
2-2. 
& 3. 
w 
Marves W (7ccrrett. 
8vvuo vitov 
6 
y 
&ltiovvic 
recaris pereas co, Photo-Litho., WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. GARRETT, OF CASEY, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CHARLES F. JOHNSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
WAG ON - JACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,847, dated January 6, 1891. 
Application filed September 25, 1890, Serial No, 366,134, No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES W. GARRETT, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Casey, in the county of Clark and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Wagon-Jacks; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawing, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in lifting-jacks. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
simple, cheap, and effective lifting or wagon 
jack; and it consists in the construction 
hereinafter described and set forth. 
In the accompanying drawing I have illus 
trated my invention by a perspective view. 
A refers to the base, to which the standard 
B is rigidly secured and braced by the bar C. 
The standard has a tenon formed on its lower 
end, which enters a mortise in the base, and 
is locked in position by the bent end of the 
catch-rod D, which passes through a perfora 
tion in the base and standard, the end thereof 
being bent at right angles, as shown. This 
catch-rod has its upper end formed into a 
loop which passes over the lever E, the up 
per cross-bar of said loop being adapted to 
engage with one of the recesses e e, formed 
in the upper edge of the lever. 
F refers to a bracket which is made up of 
a single flat piece of metal, bent as shown and 
secured at its lower end to the side of the 
standard. This bracket serves as a support 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
for the fulcrum-pin G, which passes through 
a perforation in the same and enters the 
standard opposite thereto. 
The lever E, hereinbefore referred to, is 
provided with a segmental slot H, which ex 
tends diagonally across said lever, the upper 
portion of said slot having formed therein re 
cesses I, with which the fulcrum-pin can en 
gage, the lever adjacent to these slots being in 
creased in width, so that it will not be mate 
rially weakened. By providing the lever 
with a slot constructed as described the end 
of the same can be positioned to occupy dif 
ferent heights. 
The lifting-jack hereinbefore described cau 
be cheaply manufactured, and is easily ima 
nipulated and effective in operation. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
A lifting-jack comprising the base A, a stand 
ard having its tenon bearing therein, a 
bracket F, Secured on said standard, for main 
taining one end of a fulcrum-pin, the other 
end of said pin being secured in the stand 
ard, and a lever E, provided with a vertically 
inclined slot, having its upper wall provided 
with a series of depressions, the said lever 
being of increased thickness adjacent to said 
slot, together with a locking-bar having its 
lower end bent to pierce the base and stand 
ard-tenon and its upper end engaging with 
the lever, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES W. GARRETT. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. F. JOHNSON, 
CHAs. H. COLLINs. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444447.txt	(No Model.) 
No, 444447, . 
  
 
 
 
  
 
S. % 
Z 
 
 
 
C. A. LIEB. 
ELASTIC TROLLEY, 
Patented Jan, 13, 1891, 
2146 a 3. 
% 61 
 
 
 
77 
 
 
s s 
 
 
-44-4-/22 
2.43% 
ATTORNEY 
the Norris Peters co, Photo-titHo., WASHINoron, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. LIEB, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELASTC TRO LEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,44?, dated January 13, 1891. 
Application filed November 28, 1890, Serial No, 372,790, (No model.) 
To Cld, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs A. LIEB, a 
citizen of the United States, and resident of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improved Elastic Trolley, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
trolley Wheels or slides, whereby I reduce 
noise, reduce wear, prevent or reduce spark 
ing, and secure better and more uniform con 
tact between the trolley and the trolley-wire. 
My invention generally stated consists in 
providing the groove or contact-surface of the 
trolley Wheel or slide with an elastic, flexible, 
Or yielding face, whereby the above-stated 
beneficial results will follow. This may be 
done in a number of ways. 
I Will illustrate and describe some, but not 
by any means all, of the forms in which my 
invention may be practiced. 
Figure 1 illustrates a longitudinal section 
of a trolley-Wheel, showing the invention in 
the form of a lining of springs in the groove 
of the trolley-Wheel. Fig.2 illustrates across 
Section on the line acac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 illus 
trates a plan of the metallic ribbon, showing 
one mode in which the spring-lining seen in 
FigS. 1 and 2 may be made. Fig. 4 illustrates 
a longitudinal section of a sliding trolley hav 
ing the yielding lining in the groove of the 
sliding block. Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8 illustrate 
transverse sections of trolley-wheels, showing 
in each a different method of applying the 
yielding Surface to the groove thereof. 
Referring first to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, A is the 
trolley-wheel made fast on its shaft B by a pin 
C. D is a lining for the wheel, as shown. It 
is a piece of brass or other suitable metal, 
from which the springs E are cut, (see Fig. 3.) 
and they are curved outwardly away from 
the plane of the sheet and having their ends 
F curved inwardly again, as seen in Fig. 1, so 
that they will not catch and be turned back 
by the trolley-wire when running in either di 
rection. The operation is obvious. The press 
ure of the trolley-wire on the springs com 
presses them. Thus there is relatively no shock 
orjar of the trolley against the wire, and sepa 
ration of them one from the other is largely 
avoided, and also the shock of the trolley, 
when it comes in contact with the clamps or 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
other devices whereby the trolley-wire is SuS 
pended, is largely avoided. Thus the move 
ment of the trolley upon and along the trolley 
wire is smooth and even, and Sparking, Wear 
on the parts, and noise are all avoided or 
largely reduced. 
It will be especially observed that whereas 
in the old forms the trolley-wire comes in con 
tact with a very small arc only of the trolley 
wheel and at one point only at and through 
which the contact must be made, in my in 
proved construction the flattening or Com 
pressing of the yielding surface of the wheel 
upon pressure by the wire or its attachments 
greatly enlarges the area of contact and also 
affords a plurality of points of contact, one 
or more of which at all times affords electri 
cal connection, the effect being the Salme as 
though a series of trolley-wheels were used to 
make the same electrical connection. 
In Fig. 4 I show substantially the same 
form of the invention applied to a sliding 
trolley-block. G is the block attached to the 
trolley-pole II by pivot or ball-and-socket 
joint I. J are the springs, which are or may 
be the same as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, or of 
other construction, as preferred. The opera 
tion is obvious from what has already been 
said and does not require further description. 
In Fig. 5 I show a form in which an ex 
pansible lining for the trolley-wheel made of 
circular metallic sections is employed. Kare 
the circular expansible sections. Their ends 
are somewhat separated from each other, So 
that they will not jam against each other end 
wise during their inward movement. They 
are supported upon springs L at their ends 
and intermediate their ends also, if desired. 
These springs may be spiral Springs, some 
what like those shown in Fig. 8, hereinafter 
described; but I prefer the form of spring 
shown in Fig. 5, which pass through slots N 
N in the trolley-wheel, and are attached by 
suitable means O to the Web of the trolley 
wheel. The slots N N are made sufficiently 
wide to allow of the necessary movement of 
the springs. These springs convey the cur 
rent from the sections K to the trolley-wheel. 
In Fig. 6 I show a form of the invention 
in which a lining P of metal Sponge or equiva 
lent elastic or flexible conveyer of electricity 
is placed in the groove of the wheel, 
55 
So 
95 
444,447 
2. A trolley device having a groove and a 
In Fig. 7 I show at Q a woven or spirally 
arranged spring-netal lining for the trolley- bearing-surface for the trolley-wire within the 
grooves supported upon a spling or Springs, 
wheel. It may be simply convoluted pieces 
substantially as set forth. 
of elastic wire placed side by side crosswise 
3. A trolley-wheel having its contact-sur 
5 of the groove in the wheel or trolley-block, if 
face composed of a plurality of yielding con 
it be a sliding trolley, or it may be woven 
tact-points, substantially as set forth. 
similar to certain kinds of spring-mattresses, 
4. A contact-surface for trolleys, compris 
but of course of smaller mesh. 
ing, essentially, a series of compressible clas 
In Fig. S I show still another form in which 
Io a series of short spiral springs R are arranged 
tic contact-points adapted to contact succes 
in the bottom of the groove of the trolley 
sively with the wire, substantially asset forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
side by side or near each other. 
From the foregoing it abundantly appears 
York and State of New York, this 25th day of 
that my invention may be constructed in a 
November, A. D. 890. 
15 large number of forms. I do not therefore 
limit myself to the details of construction. 
CHARLES A. LIEB. 
25 
I claim 
1. A trolley device provided with a groove 
and a yielding Surface in the groove, substan 
20 tially as set forth. 
Witnesses: 
PHILLIP ABBOTT, 
FREDERICK SMITH, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444547.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 444,547 
A/ G. A 
J. H. SAMUELS, 
BAND AND THRE SETTING MACHINE, 
Patented Jan, 13, 1891. 
 
 
A77 AS 7 
4%-42%. 4-4 a 7-7 w 
2. 3-22-446 - - 
//VV2/V 7 of Aza24%-44 m 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J ON AT HAN H. SAMUELS, OF MOLINE, ILLIN OIS. 
BAND AND TRE SETTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,547, dated January 13, 1891. 
Application filed March 28, 1890, Serial No,345,789, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JONATHAN H. SAMUELs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Mo 
line, in the county of Rock Island and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Hydrostatic Band and 
Tire Setters for Wagon-Wheels and other Pur 
POSes, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings, making part of this 
Specification. 
The present invention has for its object to 
provide a band and tire setting machine oper 
ated by hydrostatic pressure against a vertical 
piston, by which a series of pivoted clamps or 
encircling sections are made to converge or 
approach each other in consequence of being 
forced longitudinally within the interior of a 
frustum of a cone. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of my im 
proved band and tire setting machine in com 
plete Working order setting one of the middle 
bands on a Wagon-hub. Fig. 2 is a top view 
of the same parts, except that the hub and 
center standard are omitted. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tion of the machine not in operation with the 
piston down to the lower end of its stroke and 
the clamps or encircling sections thrown to 
gether to receive the band and the hub on 
which the band is to be set. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tion of the operating parts shown in Fig. 1 in 
the act of setting one of the end bands on a 
hub, a few of the minor details being omit 
ted. Fig. 5 is an interior view of one of the 
Series of pivoted clamps or encircling sections 
as viewed from the center standard. Fig. 6 
is a Section, and Fig. 7 a view, of the under 
side of the annular packing-ring u, on an en 
larged Scale and having a coil-spring at'em 
bedded in its fold. 
A represents the hub of the wheel on which 
B is preferably a frustum of a hollow cone 
C is a hydrostatic piston; D, the cylinder 
FFFF are four vertical standards sup 
his one of the pivoted converging clamps, 
i is a slotted bracket, to which the lower 
ends of the clamps are pivoted, and is bolted 
to the upper end of the piston, 
the bands are to be set. 
or Zone of a sphere. 
Surrounding it; E, the base-plate. 
porting the part B. 
fandi' are removable steel dies that encir 
cle the band which is being set upon a hub, 
and are adapted to fit and be fastened in a 
seat provided for them in the upper ends of 
the clamps h, where they are held by the 
countersunk bolts k. 
lis a center standard passing upward in 
the center of the hub, and is made firm to the 
upper end of the piston C, and having a Screw 
thread cut upon it. 
in is an adjustable plate made to be raised 
and lowered by means of a thread cutthrough 
it, so that it can be turned up or down upon 
the center standard l to any height necessary 
to accommodate the different lengths of hubs, 
and is then made fast by the lock-nut 7, 
Fig. 3. 
O is one of the middle bands of the hub be 
ing operated upon, as shown in Fig. 1; 7, the 
end band being set, as shown in Fig. 4. 
S is the inlet to the cylinder D, and through 
which the water or other fluid is to be forced 
for operating the piston C. 
it is an annular packing-ring seated in a 
groove formed by the packing-ring t and the 
upper end of the cylinder, as shown. 
u' is an annular coil-spring embedded in 
the packing-ring it. The clamp-brackets 
are each secured to the top of the piston by 
the cap-screws ; and 2', as shown in Fig. 1, 
or may be secured thereto by any other suit 
able means, or they may, if desirable, be cast 
integral with the piston itself. 
A simple metallic ring d, Fig. 4, encircling 
the center screw-standard l, serves as a hitch 
ing device for one end of the coil draw-springs 
f, which act between said ring and the piv 
oted clamps to draw them inwardly until 
their upper ends impinge against each other 
and form a continuous circle. The object of 
these coil-springs is to keep the upper ends of 
the pivoted clamps drawn inwardly as far as 
they can move, so that an iron band which it 
is proposed to set upon a hub or rim of a 
wheel may be forced down into its seat, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 4, the rounded upper 
ends of the clamps causing the pivoted clamps 
to yield outwardly as the band or tire is 
pressed down between them, the elastic bear 
ings holding it in position during the process 
of upsetting it to fit the hub or rim of the 
Wheel, 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
25 
3 5 
45 
 
2 
44,4,547 
d 
2O Sought to be accomplished. 
The object of the coil-spling u' is to coll 
stallatly crowd the flanges of the packing-ling 
more firmly against the piston and cylinder. 
The result is that the usual leakage around 
5 the packing-ring, consequent upon the first 
rush of water into the cylinder, is by this coil 
Spring checked or stayed until the full press 
ure of water is exerted upon the hollow of the 
packing-ring. 
No force pumping apparatus is shown in 
the drawings, as almost any of the usual make 
of force-pumps can be used, there being no 
peculiarity of pump required with this ma 
If preferred, stored pressure can be 
chine. 
I5 used. 
Instead of employing a frustum of a cone, 
as described in the drawings, a zone of a 
Sphere may be used or any other form that 
will not interfere with the general functions 
Having now sufficiently illustrated the me 
chanical features of my said improved band 
and tire setting machine, its operation is as 
follows: The piston C being down to the low 
25 ermost end of the stroke, as shown in Fig. 3 
of the drawings, and the pivoted clamps hill, 
&c., being slightly drawn inwardly at the 
top ends, so as not to touch the surround 
ing inclined surface of the hollow cone IB, 
3o the band is then to be forced down into its 
seat in the jaws of the clamps, the latter 
yielding outwardly to receive it. The hub 
is then to be dropped down over the center 
standard and rest upon the adjustable plate 
35 ml. Now the force-pump is set in operation, 
forcing the water or other fluid into the cyl 
inder through the inlet S, and the raising of 
the piston causes the upper ends of the clamps 
h it h, &c., to draw inwardly by the converg 
4o ing form of the hollow cone-shaped rim lis, 
thus upsetting or shortening the band to the 
required size to bind the hub as tightly as de 
sired. As soon as the band is properly set, 
the force-pump is made to cease working and 
45 the Water or other fluid, as the case may be, 
is allowed to escape out of the cylinder 
through any ordinary stop-valve into a cistern 
below, the piston having settled down into 
the cylinder, as before. The hub, with the 
5o band properly set, may now be removed and 
the machine put in readiness to receive an 
Other band and hub. 
Although the machine as represented in the 
drawings is seemingly fitted to set bands on 
55 hubs only on wheels of vehicles, still it is evi 
dent that by enlarging the diameter of the 
| machine the same would be equally appli 
cable, and it is my desire to use it for setting 
the tires on the rims of said wheels. In order 
to accommodate the same machine to setting 
bands of different sizes within certain limits, 
I have provided the pivoted clamps h h, &c., 
with removable steel dies or jaws of different 
I thicknesses, as shown ati, Fig. 1, and j', Fig. 
4, the purpose being to extend in Wardly a 
i little farther or not so far, as the case may 
be, to accommodate different diameters of 
bands. In the drawings I have shown and 
illustrated six of these pivoted clampsh, but, 
inasmuch as the same result may be substall 
| tially accomplished with some other number, 
I do not wish to be limited by that exact 
number. I have chosen that number merely 
from preference. 
It will be seen that by my plan of construc 
tion the middle bands may be set upon a hub 
so as to be a little smaller of diameter on the 
side next to the spokes, thereby offering addi 
tional resistance against their coming off when 
the hub has become thoroughly seasoned and 
shrunken, and in like manner also the end 
bands on the hub can be slightly contracted 
on the inner side of the band as a further Se 
curity against slipping off. 
I claim 
1. In a band and tire setting machine, the 
combination of a series of pivoted clamps h. 
h h, consisting of two or more such clamps, 
the hydrostatic piston C, and the converging 
or cone-shaped ring B, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a band and tire setting machine, the 
combination of the piston C, center standard 
l, and pivoted clamps h. h. h, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a band and tire setting machine, the 
combination of the center standard l, adjust 
able plate an, lock-nut in, pivoted clamps 
h. h. h, and movable diesi, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a band and tire setting machine, the 
combination of the pull-springs f, annular 
ring d, and pivoted clamps h, as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
5. In a band and tire setting machine, the 
combination of the annular packing-ring at 
and the inclosed coil-spring u?, as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
JONATHAN H. SAMUELS, 
Witnesses: 
W. J. WALTON, 
K. M. WHITE, 
75 
95 
OO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444647.txt	(No Model.) 
L. B. MARTIN, 
PAPER WEIGHT, 
No. 444,647. 
Patented Jan, l3, 1891. 
56323 
72, 
se 
1zz Z. 
WITNESSES: 
ef, cf. 62-ee-ag. 
?(222-22 
INVENTOR 
- 6 22-4 
or 32%-4-g 
ATTORAEY. 
THE NORRIs Pet ERs co., Phoro-Litho. washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IUCIEN B. MARTIN, OF FOSTORIA, OHIO. 
PAPERWEIGHT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,647, dated January 13, 1891. 
Application filed June 2, 1890, Serial No. 354,002, (No model.) 
55 
glass for adapting it to receive the markings 5o 
of a lead-pencil. A number of lines C. are 
formed upon the surface B by etching the 
Surfaces in strips b, and leaving between the 
several strips a narrow portion of the clear 
glass, which, due to the contrast between the 
etched or frosted glass and the clear glass, is 
brought out, defining a clear dark line on 
the frosted writing - surface. In the same 
manner any advertisement may be formed on 
the writing-surface and the paper-weights be 
distributed gratuitously, by which means it 
would serve not only as a paper-weight but 
as an advertising medium of great efficiency, 
being always in use and conspicuously placed. 
The paper-weight, with its writing-surface, 
being always at hand not only preserves such 
memoranda as may have been written thereon, 
but is not apt to be lost sight of among the 
papers which usually cover the desk. When 
such memoranda has served its purpose, it 
may be erased by wiping the surface with a 
damp cloth or by moistening the finger and 
rubbing it over the writing. 
The bottom of the paper-weight is prefer 
ably made with a cavity formed therein, and 
in which a calendar or calendar-card may be 
inserted and used to great advantage. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a paper 
Weight having an etched or ground surface, 
substantially as described, whereby the same 
is adapted to be written on and the writing 
erased, as set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, the 
combined paper-weight and memoranda-tab 
let consisting of a body of glass having a 
plain surface which is etched or ground, and 
having lines formed thereon of the clear 
glass, Substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
LUCIEN B. MARTIN. 
75 
o 
Witnesses: 
PHENE A. HIGBEE, 
W. T. BRADY. 
5 
To all whon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, LUCIEN B. MARTIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Fos 
tolia, in the county of Seneca and State of 
Ohio, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Paper-Weights; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of said invention, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters or figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to new and useful in 
provements in paper-weights, and has for its 
object the novel combination of a writing 
Surface formed on the glass paper-weight for 
the purpose of keeping such memoranda as 
Occasion may require, and which shall be 
always at One's hand, the surface of the 
Weight and tablet combined admitting the 
erasure of any Writings as they become of no 
Value. 
The invention consists in forming a glass 
body of any suitable form having sufficient 
Weight to perform the function of a paper 
Weight, the same being provided with a rough 
ened or ground top or upper surface, on which 
Writings in lead-pencil will be distinctly legi 
ble and easily erased therefrom when de 
sired, thus serving the twofold purpose of a 
paper-weight and writing-tablet. 
The invention also consists in certain other 
novel features, which will be fully hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a top or plan view of the paper-weight, show 
ing the ground or etched writing-surface, on 
Which can be Written a note or memorandum. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view taken 
on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a side view 
in elevation of the paper-weight and memo 
randa-tablet. 
The paper-weight A is preferably made of 
clear glass and of rectangular form; but any 
45 variety of form would suffice provided it pre 
Sented a suitable writing-surface B. This 
Writing portion B is formed by etching the 
Surface of the glass, or by any other method 
of producing a slightly-roughened surface on 
re 
4C 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444747.txt	(No Model.) 
C. C. FUNK 
SEWER TRAP 
No. 444,747, 
Patented Jam, 13, 1891. 
fit era. 
feeae 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTIAN C. FUNK, OF SPRING FIELD, OHIO. 
SEWER-TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,747, dated January 18, 1891. 
Application filed December 26, 1889, Serial No. 335,015, (No model.) 
45 
55 
bring the slot a vertically over the pin a', 
when it is dropped into position, as shown. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown a modification of the 
hinge, inasmuch as the hinge aislet into the 
side of the box a, which is provided With a 
recess a, adapted to receive the hinge in the 
manner above stated, thereby permitting the 
sides to be made with a smooth outer surface. 
It will be observed that by pivoting the Valve 
in the rear of its center the flow of Water and 
sewage opens the valve and the force of 
gravity automatically returns the same to its 
Seat, as shown. 
By constructing a sewer-trap in the man 
ner shown and described displacement of 
parts is entirely avoided and the cost of 
manufacture materially reduced. 
Having thus fully shown and described my 
invention, what I claim as new, and desire to 
Secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a sewer-trap the combination here 
in before stated of a gate or valve having off 
Set lugs projecting from one side or face and 
having L-shaped slots formed therein, as and 
for the purposes shown and described. 
2. In a sewer-trap, the combination here 
in before stated of a gate or valve having off 
set lugs projecting therefrom and L-shaped 
slots formed therein, with the projecting pin 
a', for the purposes described and shown. 
3. In a sewer-trap, the combination here 
in before stated of a box C, having a recess a 
cast therein, With a valve having hinges cast 
thereon, with longitudinal and perpendicular 
slots, as shown and described, and for the pur 
poses Stated. 
Witnesses: 
CHRISTIAN C. FUNK. 
WILBER COLVIN, 
ORRA. B. CHAPMAN. 
75 
O 
5 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHRISTIAN C. FUNK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Spring 
field, in the county of Clark and State of Ohio, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Sewer-Traps, of which the following is a 
full and clear description, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to sewer-traps, and 
more especially to hinging or pivoting the 
valve of the same; and it consists in construct 
ing a valve with a hinge of such a shape as 
may be easily cast with the valve and applied 
to the trap-box in such a way that when once 
placed in position sewage - matter passing 
through the trap cannot dislocate the valve 
or impair its efficiency. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view showing the valve closed in full 
and open in dotted lines. Fig. 2 is a side view 
of same. Fig. 3 is a section through the cen 
ter, and Fig. 4 is a modification in the appli 
cation of the hinge. 
The letter a designates the box of the trap, 
which is flat on top and bottom for the pur 
pose of building a square wall around the 
same, and inclined on top and bottom of the 
outlet or valve side. The valve a' is provided 
with hinges a, which are cast with the valve 
a' and forms the prime feature of my inven 
tion. The hinge a' is provided with an L 
shaped slot Cl, one portion being in the direc 
tion of the length of the hinge, as a, and the 
slot a, opening downwardly at an angle of 
ninety degrees to the slot a' for the purpose 
of placing the same in position to engage the 
projecting pin C', cast upon the box a for that 
purpose. To attach the valve a to the boxa, 
4o the valve a' is raised to such a position as will 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444848.txt	(No Model.) 
R. F. PRATT. 
SAW JOINTER, 
No. 444,848, 
Patented Jan, 20, 1891, 
 
 
M 
 
 
 
 
 
g; 
PSR 
n SS SS 
a 
S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RONELLO F. PRATT, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
SAW. ONE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,848, dated January 20, 1891. 
Application filed May 10, 1890, Serial No. 351,246, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RONELLO F. PRATT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
aid useful Improvements in Saw Jointers, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
Saw-jointer in which the lower portion of the 
frame acts as a guide and in which the file is 
held, so that the whole surface of both its 
sides can be utilized. 
The invention consists in constructing the 
frame in two parts and in the peculiar man 
ner of holding the file, as hereinafter fully 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a side view of a saw 
jointer embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
view of the under side. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
section taken on line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is 
a similar section of a modification. 
The frame is made in halves or two parts 
AA, secured together by screws B. The up 
per portions C, a of the frames form a handle 
and the lower portions b b form guides to 
keep the jointer straight upon the saw when 
in operation. 
C is a file that passes through oblong slots 
or openings D, and is held in place by four 
screws E, that pass through bosses d, formed 
on the sides of the pieces A. Extending be 
low the slot D is an opening F, in which the 
teeth of the saw pass, and from the end of 
this opening to the bottom of the jointer is 
a space G, into which passes the blade of the 
saw. The slot or opening D is wider than 
the ?ile C, so that when it is worn in one 
part it can be readily shifted by means of 
the screws E, so as to present a fresh surface 
to the saw-teeth. Thus the whole surface of 
file can be utilized, and when worn out on one 
side it can be turned over and the other side 
used in the same manner. 
In operation the jointer is passed on to the 
saw, the teeth entering the space F and the 
body or blade entering the space G, which is 
only wide enough to admit the blade, while 
the space F is much wider to allow for the 
slant of the saw-teeth. The jointer is then 
run over the saw from end to end and the 
edge of the teeth coming into contact with 
the file are cut to a level. Should it be de 
sired to joint a saw the blade of which is 
thicker than the opening G, the screWS B B 
can be loosened and a packing of card, 
leather, or other suitable material of the re 
quired thickness can be introduced between 
the two parts A above the file and the screws 
again tightened up; or the upper portion of 
the jointer may be formed as shown in Fig. 
4, in which one side A is formed with a pro 
jecting portion a' and the other side A" with 
a corresponding recess a. In this case the 
screws B' are held at their inner ends in the 
projecting piece a' by a screw C', as shown, 
and the hole in the part A through which 
the screw B' passes is screw-threaded, S0 that 
by turning the screws Bone way or the other 
the two portions A A' are forced further 
apart or drawn nearer together, whereby the 
width of the opening G can be adjusted ac 
cording to the thickness of the saw to be 
jointed. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A saw-jointer consisting of tWO pieces 
secured together by screws and having ob. 
long slots or openings in which a file is held 
by means of four screws, substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. A saw-jointer consisting of two pieces A, 
secured together by screws B and having ob 
long slots or openings D to receive a file C, 
that is held therein by screws E, and a space 
F, in which the saw-teeth pass, and a space 
G for the blade of the saw, substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. In a saw-jointer, a file held by set-screws 
in an oblong opening, whereby the full width 
of the file can be utilized, substantially as set 
4. A saw-jointer consisting of two pieces 
secured together by screws, the upper portion 
forming a handle and the lower portion a 
guide with a file adjustably secured therein, 
whereby the full width of the file can be util 
ized, substantially as Set forth. 
5. A saw-jointer consisting of two pieces 
forth. 
. 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
ECO 
O 
25 
40 
45 
2 
444,848 
secured together by screws, the upper portion 
forming a handle and the lower portion hav 
ing openings to admit the saw-blade and 
teeth, and oblong slots in which a file is ad 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of | 
5 justably secured, substantially as set forth. 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 7th day 
of May, A. D. 1890. 
RONELLO F. PRATT. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. STEERE, 
EDWIN PLANTA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US444948.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 444,948. 
G. J. CAPEWELL, 
NAIL, EXTRACTOR, 
Patented Jan. 20, 1891, 
 
 
 
off 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE J. CAPEWELL, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
NAL - EXTRACTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 444,948, dated January 20, 1891. 
Application filed June 21, 1890, Serial No. 356,188, (No model.) 
55 
75 
ing movemnt of the former is thrust outward 
To all whon it may conce7n 
Beit known that I, GEORGE.J. CAPEWELL, toward the outer jaw e. The jaws are each 
of Hartford, in the county of New Haven and formed, preferably, of steel, with a shank por 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain ition of about half the thickness of the rest, so 
new and useful Improvements in Nail-Extract- that the two jaws overlap each other as they 
ors, of which the following is a full, clear, and lie in the socket and present their upper ends 
exact description, whereby any one skilled in side by side to the impact of the hammer. 
the art can make and use the same. 
The jaWS are normally thrust apart by means 
My invention relates to the class of nail- of a Spring g, that is supported between the 
pullers in which the nail-holding jaws are jaws, a pinh, passing through and through the 
supported independently of the percussive foot-piece and the jaw-socket, serving merely 
device; and the object of the invention is to to prevent the accidental removal of the jaws. 
provide a nail-puller in which the biting power The points of the jaws are hook-shaped, con 
of the jaws shall be comparatively uniform veX on the outer and lower edge, and concave 
and one in which a great leverage is obtained on the inner near the point, so as to adapt 
for pulling the nail. 
them to grasp a nail and allow room back of 
Myinvention consists in details of the sev- the points to receive the head of the nail and 
eral parts making up the device as a whole enable them to grasp the shank of the nail 
and in their combination, as more particularly below the head. In case there is any irregu 
hereinafter described, and pointed out in the larity of shape at or below the head of the 
nail the jaws are supported in the socket 
claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure is a de 
loosely enough to allow either of them to slide 
tail view in elevation, showing parts cut away 
lengthwise far enough to secure a firm hold 
on the nail at a point that may not lie just 
in vertical section to show construction. Fig. 
opposite to the point of the other jaw, and this 
2 is a detail view of the lower part of the nail 
puller, illustrating the operation in closing 
permits an extremely firm grasp of the nail. 
the jaws upon a nail-head. Fig. 3 is a detail 
On the bottom of the foot-piece a, and as 
view illustrating the position of the parts in 
near the jaWS as available, there is formed a 
fixed fulcrum k, that preferably projects 
pulling a nail, Fig. 4 is a bottom view of the 
foot-piece. 
slightly from the lower surface of the foot 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter C. 
piece, and in the fulcrum-arm a, that pro 
denotes a foot-piece that forms the immedi 
jects from the side of the foot-piece, there is 
ate jaw-support, and b the jaw-lever, that is 
located a yielding fulcrum i. This consists 
hinged or pivoted to the foot-piece by means 
of a spring-seated sliding plunger i, with its 
of a pivot c, and supports the percussive de 
lower end projected below the lower surface 
vice or hammer d, that is preferably a bar or of the fulcrum-arm a sufficient distance to 
rod fitted within the hollow stock, in which it form a rest or support for the foot-piece that 
has a limited sliding movement, the lower end when the nail-puller is set upright upon the 
of the hammer overlying the upper part of the bottom surfaces of the two fulcrums the jaws 
foot-piece directly over the jaws. The foot- are held practically upright and while the jaw 
piece, that is preferably made of metal cast lever is used to close the jaws upon a nail. 
to shape, has in the end a? the jaw-socket a, 
As soon as the nail has been grasped by the 
within which the jaws e and fare supported jaws, a continued rocking motion of the lever 
in such manner as to be capable of a limited throws a pressure upon the plunger, and the 
vertical movement, as well as a movement spring yields and allows the foot-piece to 
toward and from each other. In this regard rock on the fixed fulcrum, so as to bring the 
the jaws may be said to be loosely supported lower surface of the fulcrum-arm in contact 
within the jaw-socket, The lower end b' of with the surface of the board from which the 
the jaw-lever extends within the foot-piece a, nail is being withdrawn. The first stress in 
and its front edge is in contact with the back pulling the nail comes upon the fixed fulcrum, 
edge of the jaw.f, so that the latter by a swing- and that is so near the jaws that a very large 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
95 
ICO 
2 
444,948 
O 
leverage is obtained. The spring in the yield 
ing fulcrum is not of sufficient strength to offer 
any serious obstacle to the rocking of the lever 
by means of which the nail is withdrawn. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a nail-puller, in combination, the jaw 
lever, the foot-piece hinged to said lever, the 
nail-jaws, and the yielding fulcrum located 
back of the main fulcrum, all substantially as 
described. 
2. In combination, in a nail-puller, a foot 
piece having a jaw-socket, the sliding jaws 
located and supported in said socket in the 
line of movement of a percussive device, the 
jaw-lever hinged to the foot-piece independ 
ently of the nail-grasping jaws, and the per 
cussive device supported on the jaw-lever, all 
substantially as described. 
3. In combination, in a nail-puller, a foot 
piece having a jaw-socket, the sliding jaws 
located in said socket in the line of movement 
of a percussive device, and a yielding fulcrum 
- 
25 
located outside of the main fulcrum, all sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In combination with the foot-piece hav 
ing the jaw-socket and a fulcrum-arm, the 
independently-movable nail-grasping jaws 
wholly supported within said socket, the jaw 
lever hinged to the foot-piece and forming a 
back support for one of the jaws, and the per 
cussive device supported on the jaw-lever, all 
substantially as described. 
5. In combination with the foot-piece hav 
ing the nail jaw-socket and the fulcrum, the 
independently-movable jaws located in said 
socket and halved together at their outer end, 
the spring located between the inner edges of 
the jaws, the jaw-retaining pin, the percus 
sive device supported on the jaw-lever, and 
the jaw-lever, all substantially as described. 4o 
35 
GEORGE J. CAPEWELL, 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. L. BURDETT, 
ARTHUR B. J.ENKINS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445048.txt	(No Model.) 
D. CRIPPS 
FRUIT TREE PROTECTOR, 
No. 445,048, 
Patented Jan. 20, 1891. 
 
Wz/aesses. 
Z722e.72 for." 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID CRIPPS, OF NEAR IUKA, ILLINOIS. 
FRU T-T REE PROTECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,048, dated January 20, 1891. 
Application filed September 17, 1890, Serial No, 365,203, (No model.) 
To all livion, it invatty concert. 
Be it known that I, DAVID CRIPPS, of near 
Iuka, in the county of Marion and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Fruit-Tree Protectors; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable other's skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use it, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawing, which forms part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
fruit-tree protectors; and it consists in the 
construction which will be fully described 
hereinafter, and pointed out in the claim. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
protector for trees which will last until the - 
tree has outgrown it, and which will protect. 
the tiree from bo'et's and animals which de 
stroy the bark, and which will prevent, the 
tree from being injured by the whiffle tree in 
plowing. 
The accompanying drawing represents a 
side elevation of a protector which embodies 
my invention. 
I take a piece of coal-tal' or other prepared 
paper or material A of suitable width and 
length and Wrap it. One and One - half time 
around the tree. In order to hold this pro 
tector in position, I apply at its upper and 
lower ends and at any intermediate points 
desired the spiral springs 13, which serve to 
prevent the paper from unwrapping and which 
hold it in contact with the tree. These 
25 
35 
45 
springs being expansible, they allow the pa 
per to gradually expand with the growing of 
the tree until it has reached such a growth 
that the paper will no longer answer to pro 
teet it, when another slip of paper is inserted 
under the springs to fill the vacancy. 
This protector will be made to extend up 
ward around the tree sufficiently high to pre 
vent sheep, rabbits, and calves from eating 
the bark of the tree, and it also serves to pro 
itect the tree from borers and other insects by 
its stench, and to protect the tree from sud 
den changes of temperature and from the ex 
treme heat of the sun. 
This protector does not need to be looked 
after a number of times during the year; but 
after it is once placed in position it answers 
every purpose to which it is applied until the 
tree outgrows it. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
calin 
A fruit-tree protector consisting of a sheet 
: of suitable material coiled longitudinally 
around the tree, and spiral springs placed 
upon the outer surface of the paper between 
its upper and lower ends for yieldingly hold 
ing the paper in contact with the tree, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
DAVID CRIPPS. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN F. EDDINGS, 
ISAAC. N. GORDON, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445149.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1 
J. GRANT, 
MACHINE FOR MAKING TIMBER HANGERs, 
No. 445,149. 
Patented Jan. 20, 1891. 
r 
A. 
r 
G 
---Trv 
Af: 
; 
 
y 
s Et x 
lw it is 
 
 
 
S S 3. 
a 
 
--- w - 
 
 
a 
7 
O 
 
res marris Peters co, rhoto-Tho...washington, d. c. 
m 
J. GRANT. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING, TIMBER HANGERS 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
3 
3 2 | 
THEN 
orris PerERs co, PHoto-irrho.washingtoN, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
- 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J. GRANT, 
MACHINE FOR MAKING, TIMBER HANGERS, 
 
  
 
  
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
No. 445,149. 
Patented Jan. 20, 1891. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
a "fate 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
22 
- 
 
 
 
 
S\Y SSa? 
E. 
274, 
F. 
it in 
2- . 
d 
6. 
UB Af 
a 
s 
 
 
J. 
S. 
P 
 
  
3 2 
2 
 
 
the worris PETERs co., Photo-LTHo., washiwoton, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN GRANT, OF CIIICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE GRANT 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING TIMBER-HANGERs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,149, dated January 20, 1891. 
Application filed April 17, 1890, Serial No. 348,362. (No model. 
To all tuft. On it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN GRANT, of Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Metal-Bending Machines; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to machines for mak 
ing stirrup-irons or timber-hangers, such as 
are used for connecting ceiling-joists with the 
timbers which Sustain the same. 
The invention consists in the matters here 
inafter described, and pointed out in the ap 
pended claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
a machine embodying my invention, Figure 
1 is a side view of the machine ready for in 
sertion of the blank or bar. Fig. 2 is an end 
elevation thereof, showing machine in posi 
tion after completion of the hanger. Fig. 3 
is a central longitudinal section thereof, taken 
upon line 33 of fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a plan there 
of, showing machine in same position as in 
Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is an enlarged detail section 
taken upon line 55 of Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is an en 
larged sectional plan view showing Working 
table nearly at the limit of its backward move 
ment, taken upon line 6 6 of Fig. 3. Fig. 7 is 
a detail section taken upon line 77 of Fig. 6. 
Fig. S is a still further enlarged section of 
movable champing device. Fig. 9 is a sec 
tional plan view of same, taken upon line 99 
of Fig. 8. 
Fig. 10 is a detail sectional view 
of device for operating the movable forming 
dies. Fig. 11 is a sectional plan view on line 
11 11 of Fig. 10. Fig. 12 is a perspective view 
of a finished hanger made by the machine. 
Fig.13 is an enlarged detail section showing fin 
ished hanger and parts of the machine en 
gaged there with. Fig.14 is a detail section on 
line 1414 of Fig. 13. Fig. 15 is a detail section 
on line 15 15 of Fig. 13. Fig. 16 illustrates a 
modification of the construction of the clamp 
ing device. Fig. 17 is a detail section on line 
17 17 of Fig. 16. Fig. 18 illustrates a modifi 
cation of the construction of the forming 
dies. Fig. 19 is a detail section on line 1919 
of Fig. 18. Fig. 20 is an end view of the parts 
shown in Fig. 1S. Fig. 21 is a plan view of 
the forming-dies shown in Fig. 18 and a pro 
jection on the fraine which actuates said dies. 
The main frame of the machine illustrated 
consists of a bed-plate A, provided with legs 
or standards C C, sustaining it in horizontal 
position. The bed-plate A is provided at its 
side margins with upwardly-extending flanges 
A' A', to the upper edges of which is secured 
a flat top plate A, the flanged bed plate and 
top plate together forming a rectangular 
guide-passage, Fig. 2, open at both ends. 
Within said guide-passage is located a slid 
ing plate or carriage B, which is given a lon 
gitudinal reciprocatory motion by the device 
hereinafter described. In the particular con 
struction shown the carriage B is provided at 
its side margins with downwardly-extending 
flanges b b, Fig. 3, which rest upon the bed 
plate A, thereby lessening the area of the 
parts in frictional contact. Said carriage is 
also provided in its rear or inner part with 
upwardly-extending flanges l'b', which rest 
and slide in contact with the top plate A, 
and thereby hold the carriage from being 
lifted above the bed-plate during the opera 
tion of the machine. Reciprocatory motion 
is given to the carriage by means of a crank 
disk C, which is mounted on a shaft C at 
the rear end of the machine, and is con 
nected with the said carriage by means of a 
pitman C. Said shaft, C' is driven from a 
pulley-shaft D by means of gear-wheels D' 
C on said shafts D and C, said shaft D being 
provided with belt-pulleys d d", by means of 
which motion is communicated to the work 
ing parts of the machine. 
By reference to Fig. 12 it will be seen that 
the stirrup iron or hanger consists of a piece 
of bar-iron of greater width than thickness, 
and which is bent twice at right angles near 
its middle to form a loop a and two parallel 
arms C'C', each of which has a quarter-twist 
a' d', bringing the flat faces of the upper 
parts of the arms in the same plane with the 
loop Ct. The said arms at their upper ends 
are each provided with two right-angled bends 
a C., giving a hooked form thereto. The 
hanger, constructed as described, is suspend 
ed from the top of a beam by means of its 
IO 
IS 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
445,149 
O 
25 
4C 
45 
55 
hooked ends and supports a second beam lo 
cated at right angles to the first one by the 
insertion of the end of the second beam within 
the loop (t. 
The means employed for making the two 
right-angled bends forming the loop C of the 
hanger will now be described. 
Upon the upper surface of the carriage B 
near the front end of the machine is located 
an elevated projection or form-block B", hav 
ing the same width as the said loop C of the 
hanger. 
EE are two bending-roller's mounted upon 
studs e e, supported upon the top plate A', 
and extending downwardly therefrom at 
either side of the path of the form-block, said 
rollers being located at some distance later 
ally from the form-block. 
E'E' indicate another pair of bending-roll 
ers mounted on vertical studs e'e', which are 
also supported upon the top plate A', said 
rollers E'E' being arranged at opposite sides 
of the path of the form-block at a distance 
from the latter equal to the thickness of the 
bar of metal to be operated upon. The lower 
end faces of the rollers EEE E are located 
adjacent to the flat top surface of the car 
riage B, which slides freely beneath the same. 
The said carriage B is reciprocated through 
such distance that the rear or inner end of 
the form-block B is carried outwardly past 
the rollers E E and inwardly past, the rollers 
E'E', and in making the central bend in the 
bar the latter is placed across the end of the 
form-block when it is at the outward limit of 
its movement with the center of the bar rest 
ing in contact with the end face of the form 
block, and the loop is formed by the conjoint 
action of said rollers and the form-block in 
the rearward or inward movement of the car 
riage. During such movement of the carriage 
the end portions of the bar or blank are first 
brought against the rollers EE, by which the 
ends of the bar are bent to an angular posi 
tion relatively to the sides of the form-block, 
and as soon as the rear end of the form-block 
reaches and passes between the rollers E'E' 
the end portions of the bar are pressed flat 
against the sides of the form-block, thereby 
making two right-angled bends in the bar. 
In order to prevent displacement of the 
blank during the movement of the carriage 
and form-block in the manner described, a 
clamp device is preferably employed to hold 
or clamp the middle part of the bar against 
the end face of the form-block. This clamp 
device is herein shown in Figs. 1 to 9 made 
as follows: F is a metal block or bar bolted 
to the top surface of the carriage at the rear 
of and in line with the form-block, said bar 
being provided at its end adjacent to the 
form-block, with two guide-armsff, between 
which slides a longitudinal clamping-jaw F, 
Figs. S and 9, said clamping-jaw being pro 
vided with a Working-face opposite and par 
allel with the inner end of the form-block, 
and preferably of the same width as the said 
end face of the form-block. In connection 
with such clamping-jaw a device is provided 
for throwing and holding the same against 
the blank, so as to clamp the latter between 
the clamping-jaw and the end of the form 
block, the same consisting, as herein shown, 
of a rock-shaft E, mounted in the casting E, 
and provided with an eccentric F, arranged 
to engage the clamping-jaw. F in such man 
ner as to move the same toward and from the 
form-block when the rock-shaft is turned, Said 
rock-shaft being provided at one end with a 
lever f', by which it may be rotated for tight 
ening and loosening the clamping-jaw. In 
the particular construction of the parts herein 
illustrated the clamping-jaw is held in place 
vertically by contact with the guide-arms ff, 
and is held from lateral displacement by 
means of two parallel arms fif', which ex 
tend rearwardly from the body of the clamp 
ing-jaw and engage the Opposite parallel side 
faces of the casting F, Fig. 9. The rock-shaft 
Fis herein shown as arranged vertically and 
mounted at its ends in the guide-arms ff, the 
eccentric F being located at the middle of the 
rock-shaft in a rectangular recessf, formed 
in the body of the clamping-jaw, said jaw be 
ing provided with slots fif', through which 
the rock-shaft passes at either side of the said 
recess f. The engagement of the eccentric 
with opposite sides of the said recessf, as 
shown in Fig. 9, gives positive movement to 
the clamping-jaw during both its forward and 
backward movement and holds it at all times 
positively in position. The opposing faces of 
the form-block in the clamping-jaw F are 
preferably provided with lining-plates BF, 
which are conveniently held in position by 
dovetailed tongues engaging corresponding 
grooves in said parts. By using thicker or 
thinner lining-plates provision may be made 
for operating upon metal bars or blanks of 
greater or less thickness, as desired. 
The lever f may he moved by hand to ef 
fect the engagement of the clamp-jaw with 
and its disengagement from the blank. As a 
means of insuring the clamping of the blank 
during the bending operation, Iso arrange the 
lever f" that it will stand parallel with the 
path of the carriage when the clamp-jaws are 
closed, and place the said lever above the 
level of the top of the form-block, so that it 
will enter and pass through a longitudinal 
groove A, formed in the lower face of the top 
plate A, Fig. 8, for the reception of said lever 
- during the back and forward movement of 
the carriage. In a construction of this kind 
the lever f will be actuated to automatically 
close the clamp-jaw against the blank, and 
said lever may be moved to release the blank 
either by hand or by an automatic actuating 
device. When actuated by hand the lever 
may be thrown around to release the jaw by 
a hand tool; but a similar movement may be 
automatically accomplished by means of a 
Spring suitably applied for the purpose. In 
the drawings, Fig. 8, f' indicates a spiral 
9 O 
95 
IOO . 
ITO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
445, i49 
spring encircling the rock-shaft F and con- T of making the twist in the bar. 
nected with said shaft and with the casting 
F, said spring being so arranged as to tend 
to hold the eccentric in position to retract 
the clamp-jaw. 
In Figs. 16 and 17 I have shown another 
device for automatically actuating the clamp 
pin F. In this instance the clamp-jaw is pro 
vided with two guide-rods if f', which slide 
in the casting F, and springs FF are applied 
to said rods in such mannel as to retract the 
clamp-jaw or draw it toward the said casting 
F. Fis a cam-plate which is adapted to swing 
on a transverse pivotif, secured in the cast 
ing F, said cam-plate being adapted to en 
gage at its free end with the rear or inner 
face of the jaw in Such nannner as to ad 
vance the jaw when the cam - plate is de 
pressed. A spring F is applied to lift said 
am - plate, and the latter is so arranged 
that when in its elevated position its upper 
surface stands above the level of the top of 
the form-block and in position to engage the 
top plate A*. In the operation of the machine 
when thus made, when the blank is placed 
across the rear end of the form-block and the 
carriage begins its backward movement, the 
cam-plate F will strike the top plate A', and 
will be thrust downwardly thereby so as to 
advance a clamp-jaw and clamp the blank. 
When the carriage returns to its original po 
sition, however, the cam-plate will rise under 
the action of the spring F as soon as it is 
free from the top plate, and the clamp-jaw 
will thereby become automatically released 
from the blank. 
The form-block B may be cast integral 
with the carriage B, or otherwise permanently 
secured thereto, in case the machine is in 
tended for making only one size of hanger. 
Preferably, however, said form-block is re 
movably secured to the carriage, whereby 
form-blocks of different widths may be em. 
ployed when it is desired to vary the size of 
the loop a of the hanger. A device for de 
tachably securing the form-block to the car 
riage herein shown consists of heavy inte 
gral lugs or posts BB, extending upwardly 
from the top surface of the carriage and pass 
ing through sockets or recesses to b in the 
form-block, the latter being held downwardly 
in place by means of screws b b passing 
through the form-block and into the carriage. 
The recess b is conveniently formed near 
the rear or inner end of the form-block, while 
the recess t has the form of a notch in the 
outer or front end of the Said form-block. 
The means employed for making the quar 
ter-twists a a in the bar or blank will now 
be described. Said twists are made, gene 
rally speaking, by the conjoint action of 
two laterally-projecting forming-dies G. G., 
extending laterally outward from the upper 
part of the form-block, and two cam-arms II 
II, which are pivotally supported in the car 
riage below the form-block, and are adapted 
to rise toward the forming-dies G G in the act 
Said form 
ing-dies are beveled or inclined on their rear 
and under surfaces to correspond generally 
with the inclination or curvature of the fin 
ished hanger at a point adjacent to the twist. 
The cam-arms H H are similarly beveled or 
inclined upon their upper and outer surfaces 
h h to correspond with the curved surface of 
the hanger. Said beveled surfaces h. h. are 
furthermore arranged eccentrically with the 
pivots h' . of the cam-arms, as clearly shown 
in Fig. 7. Said cam-arms H swing through a 
distance approximately equal to a quarter of 
a rotation during the operation of forming 
the twists in the hanger, the curvature of the 
Working-faces h. h of the cam-arms being 
such that when said cam-arms are swung 
downwardly and are out of action the cam 
surfaces are entirely below the level of the 
top of the carriage, so that the ends of the 
bar or blank may swing freely over the cam 
arms when said ends of the blank are brought 
against the sides of the form-block in the 
preliminary bending of the same. Said cam 
faces are so shaped, furthermore, that when 
the cam-arms are swung upwardly and rear 
Wardly they will come approximately parallel 
to the inclined under surface of the forming 
dies G G, thereby acting, in connection with 
said dies, to give the desired shape or twist 
to the blank. It will of course be under 
stood that the working-faces h. h of the cam 
arms are inclined inwardly and downwardly 
toward the form-block, so that their outer 
margins are highest, and thereby act to bend 
or carry upwardly the Outer margins of the 
blank, as is clearly shown in the sectional view, 
Fig. 13. Said cam-surfaces h. h. terminate in 
flat surfaces l'h', which, when the cam-arms 
H H are swung upwardly to the upward limit 
of their movement, are horizontal and stand 
at a distance below the under surface of the 
top plate A* of the machine equal to the thick 
ness of the metal blank, Fig. 13. These flat 
surfaces h hserve to bring the flat parts of 
the hanger above the twists a a in the same 
plane with the inner edge of the loop a, so 
that when the hooks are engaged with the 
timber the loop of the hanger will rest against 
the side of the timber both above and below 
the twists therein. 
In order to provide for working upon metal 
of different thicknesses, removable blocks h; 
| are Secured to the cam-arms, so as to form 
the flat surfaces hill', which blocks may be 
removed and replaced by others of greater or 
less thickness, as necessary in operating the 
machine with thicker or thinner blanks. The 
said cam-arms II H are lifted for the purpose 
of forming the twist in the blank during the 
rearward or inward movement of the carriage, 
by contact of a roller H' upon the bed-plate 
A with the said cam-arms, the top of said 
roller being arranged on a level with the top 
of the bed plate, so that the roller will lift 
the arms into a horizontal position and the 
latter will be sustained in such position dur 
IOO 
IT5 
I 25 
m 
445,149 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
, 
, 
... 
, 
; 
: 
ing the free inward movement of the carriage 
being arranged with their upper surfaces 
by resting upon said bed-plate. The roller 
flush with the top of the form-block, which 
His arranged beneath the forward end of 
latter is provided with recesses G' G', adapted 
the top plate A, so that when the cam-arms 
to receive the dies when the latter are swung 
are thrown upwardly the flat surfaces hh 
about the pivots g g. 
thereof will come beneath the top plate and 
G is a gear-pinion mounted upon a verti 
will thereby bring the parts of the blank ad 
cal shaft g' between the pivots g g of the dies, 
jacent to the twists therein in the same plane 
and intermeshing with gear-segments gg, 
with each other and with the inner edge of 
formed upon the inner end of the dies, con 
the loop a. Flangesh hat the inner edges 
centric with the pivots gg, in the manner 
of the cam-faces h. h. are desirably employed 
illustrated, Fig.11. By reason of the engage 
to engage the inner edges of the blank, and 
ment of both of the arms with the pinion G* 
thereby prevent the same from becoming 
when the shaft g' is rotated said arms are 
caught between the cam-arms and the form 
turned or moved in opposite directions so that 
one arm swings toward the outer end and the 
block as the cam-arms rise. 
The bending-rollers EE, hereinbefore de 
other arm toward the inner end of the form 
scribed, aid in the bending of the blank by 
block when said arms are swung inwardly into 
acting against the outer edges thereof to hold 
their folded position, as clearly shown in the 
the same against the form-block. Said rollers 
drawings. 
To the upper end of the shaft g' 
E for this purpose are located at a distance 
is secured an actuating-leverg, which may 
from the sides of the form-block equal to the 
be moved either by hand or automatically 
width of the blank. During the inward move 
by contact with a part of the machine to turn 
ment of the carriage, after the cam-arms have 
the dies G. G. As herein shown, the leverg 
been lifted to form the twists in the blank, 
is adapted to enter the groove A in the un 
the end portions of the blank adjacent to the 
der surface of the top plate, and said lever is 
twists will be confined above and below by 
so arranged with reference to the dies that 
the cam-arms and top plate and at their inner 
the latter will be held in their extended or 
and outer edges by contact with the form 
operative position when the lever is within 
block and rollers EE, Fig. 15, so that these 
the groove. The lever may be turned by 
ortions of the blank will be closely confined 
hand to close the dies inwardly, and thus per 
or held during the inward movement of the 
mit the finished hanger to be lifted from the 
carriage. 
form-block; but in order to make the opera 
For the purpose of allowing adjustment 
tion of these parts entirely automatic a spring 
of the rollers EE toward and from the form 
g" may be applied to turn the shaft g' in a 
block in operating upon wider or narrower 
direction to close the dies. Such spring is 
blanks the pivot-studs ee of said rollers are 
shown as made of the form of a coil surround 
mounted in blocks E E, Fig. 15, secured to 
ing the shaft g' and connected at one end 
the front edge of the top plate A' by adjust 
with the shaft and at its opposite end with 
able attaching devices adapted for conven 
the form-block. 
iently shifting the position of said blocks 
In Figs. 18, 19, and 20 I have shown an 
horizontally. As herein shown, the top plate 
other consfruction in means for actuating the 
A is provided with a T-groove A, Fig. 13, in 
forming-dies G. G. In this instance G8 Gare 
which fit and slide T-shaped projections e'e 
two rock-shafts mounted in the form-block 
upon the said blocks EE, and an oppositely 
B' parallel with each other and with the 
screw-threaded shaft E is engaged with the 
sides of the form-block. The dies G. G. are 
projections of both blocks, said shaft having 
rigidly Secured to the rock-shafts, so as to 
a squared end by which it may be conven 
turn with the latter, said dies in this con 
iently turned for adjusting the blocks. As 
struction swinging in a plane at right angles 
an additional means of rigidly securing in 
to the sides of the form-block and being 
place the said blocks E E after the same 
adapted to move through a quarter of a cir 
have been adjusted by means of the shaft, 
cle or from a position standing horizontally 
bolts ee, Fig. 5, having heads engaging the 
out from the sides of the form-block to a ver 
T-slot, AA, are inserted through the said 
tical position extending upwardly from the 
blocks and provided with nuts by which the 
top of the form-block. The rock-shafts G3 G3 
blocks, may be clamped against the end of 
extend at their ends outwardly past the end 
the top plate. 
of the form-block, and are there provided 
The forming-dies G. G., instead of being rig 
with rigid arms gg, to which are connected 
idly attached to the form-block, are preferably 
the opposite ends of a spring G', acting to 
mounted thereon, so that they may be swung 
turn the rock-shaft in opposite directions and 
inwardly to allow the finished hanger to be 
to hold the dies in their closed or vertical 
lifted from the form-block. For the purpose 
position. In a construction of this kind the 
stated said dies G. G. may be mounted in any 
dies G. G. are held outwardly or in position 
one of a great variety of ways. One desir 
for operation by contact of their upper sur 
able construction in said dies is herein shown, 
faces with the under surface of the top plate 
Figs. 10 and 11, which is as follows: Said dies 
A', said dies being located beneath said top 
are pivoted at their inner ends upon vertical plate at the time the upward pressure comes 
pivots g g, secured in the form-block, the dies thereon in the act of bending or forming the 
o 
75 
95 
Iod 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
(25 
5 5 
 
445,149 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
So 
hanger. The dies are opened or spread by 
means of a Wedge-shaped or pointed projec 
tion N, located on the top-plate Aalbove the 
form-block, the point of the projection enter 
ing between the dies and forcing the same 
apart as the carriage moves inwardly or rear 
wardly, as clearly shown in Fig. 21. 
The construction in the parts by which the 
double bends act of the hanger are formed 
Will now be described. Generally speaking, 
the said bends are formed by bending the 
end portions of the blank over surfaces or 
dies, FigS. 4 and 13, attached to or formed on 
the end of the top plate A and having flat ver 
tical faces A' A' and horizontal top surfaces 
A A' by means of bending-levers II, hinged 
to the cam-arms H II, and other bending 
arms JJ, which are hinged to the bending 
levers I I, the bending-levers II being ar 
ranged to press the blank against the sur 
faces A' A', while the bending-arms J J are 
adapted to bring the ends of the blank 
against the horizontal surfaces A' A'. To 
first describe the construction and operation 
of the bending-levers I I, said levers are 
hinged by means of horizontal pivots 
to 
the Outer or forward ends of the cam-arms 
II II, the said bending-levers being provided 
adjacent to the said cam-arms with flat 
working-faces ' ', adapted to come into po 
sition parallel with the vertical faces A' A' of 
the top plate when the said bending-levers 
are swung upwardly into vertical position or 
at right angles to the cam-arms, the said 
bending-surface being extended outwardly 
past or above the said surface i i", for the pur 
pose hereinafter described. The said bend 
ing-levers I are furthermore provided with 
arms II", extending from the lower or inner 
sides of the pivots ii, and adapted for engage 
ment with a calm or wiper K, which is mounted 
upon a horizontal shaft K, located beneath 
the bed-plate of the machine. Said shaft is is 
driven by a spur-wheel K, intermeshing with 
the gear-wheels D', heretofore described. The 
calm or wiper EX is so located and actuated as 
to strike the arms II of the bending-levers 
and throw said bending-levers upwardly into 
a vertical position after the inward move 
ment of the carriage B has ceased. When 
said carriage has completed its inward move 
ment and twists lave been formed in the 
blank by the action of the cam-arms III and 
forming-dies G G, as hereinbefore described, 
the flat parts of the hanger will be leld by 
the said cam-arms, the top plate, the form 
block, and the rollers E E in position parallel 
with each other, with their flat sides horizon 
tal and projecting outwardly from beneath 
the top plate, their ends at this time stand 
ing over the surfaces i' i' of the bending-le 
yers. When said bending-levers are thrown 
upwardly, therefore, they will act upon the 
ends of the blank, to bend the same up 
wardly and bring them into contact with the 
flat vertical faces A' A' of the opposing dies 
in an obvious manner. By the movement of 
the bending-levers in the manner described, 
the right-angled bends act will be formed. 
The final movement by which the bends a 
at are made is accomplished by means as fol 
lows: The bending-arms JJ are connected by 
pivots ij with the bending-levers II, and said 
bending-arms are adapted to swing upon the 
said pivots in such manner that they may be 
placed either at right angles to the level's or 
thrown outwardly at an angle thereto and 
into the position shown in Fig. 1. During 
the upward movement of the bending-levers 
II the said arms J J stand at an angle to the 
arms, as shown in Fig. 1; but when said bend 
ing-levers are near the end of their move 
ment said arms J J are thrust down Wardly 
into position at right angles to the bending 
levers and above and parallel with the top 
surfaces A A' of the dies, so as to bring the 
extreme ends of the blank against the said 
top surfaces. 
The movement of the arms J J in the man 
ner described is accomplished by means as 
follows: L L are levers pivoted at points be 
tween their ends, by means of pivot-pins l, to 
laterally-projecting lugs ii on the levers I. 
Said levers L are connected with the free 
ends of the arms J by means of links L'. 
Springs l are applied to throw the outer ends 
of the levers L L away from the bending-le 
vers II, so as to hold the arms J J normally 
outward or at an angle with the bending-le 
vers, this position of the parts being shown 
in Fig. 1. M is a horizontal bar mounted 
upon standards MI'M' at a considerable dis 
tance above the top plate A of the machine, 
said bar M being so located that it will be 
encountered by the outer ends of the level's 
L L when the bending-levers II are swung 
upwardly into a vertical position. The said 
bar M is disposed in such position relatively 
to the said levels I, L that said levers will 
strike the bar shortly before the bending-le 
vers II reach their vertical position, so that 
said evers I will be actuated to thrust the 
bending-arms JJ downwardly during the last 
part of the movement of the said bending-le 
vers, and so as to bring the said alms J J into 
a horizontal position at the termination of 
the movement of said bending-levers. 
It follows from the construction described 
that when the bending-levers II are thrown 
upwardly by the action of the calm or wiper 
IV both of the right-angled bends Ci (l', fol'in 
ing the hooks, will be automatically made. 
After the bending of the blank has been 
accomplished in the manner above described, 
the wiper R will pass the arms I'I' of the 
bending-level's II, thereby allowing the said 
bending-levers to fall in the horizontal posi 
tion shown in Fig. 1, after which the return 
movement of the carriage will take place, al 
lowing the cam-arms II II to fall into a ver 
tical position, and thereby releasing the fin 
ished hanger, which at the termination of the 
forward movement of the carriage may be 
lifted from the form-block after the die G. G. 
95 
OO 
Io5 
IC 
I T5 
I 25 
445,149 
IO 
25 
have been turned or moved to free the hanger, 
in the manner hereinbefore described. 
In order to enable the machine to be ad 
justed for making the distance between the 
bends a a greater or less, and thereby mak 
ing the hooks wider or narrower, the parts 
are constructed as follows: The lugs i, in 
stead of being permanently secured to the le 
vers II, are connected therewith by means of 
bolts i i", and the levers are provided with 
additional bolt-holes, as '', and one or more 
additional apertures i ij are provided for re 
ceiving the pivots if of the arms J.J. By the 
construction described the said hooks may 
be made of as many different widths as there 
are sets of bolt holes and apertures for secur 
ing the lugs and pivots ij to the bending 
arms. When the position of the bending 
arms J J is changed in the manner described, 
it is obviously necessary to change the width 
of the vertical faces A' A', over which the 
ends of the blank are bent. 
For this pur 
pose Said surfaces A' A' are formed on or by 
removable die-blocks AA, held in place by 
the bolts A", which enter and engage the T 
grooves A of the top plate A*, Fig. 15. When 
the said bending-arms J J and levers L L are 
shifted in position in the manner described, 
it is further necessary to change the vertical 
position of the bar M, and for this purpose 
said bar is held at its ends in the vertical 
slots m in by means of clamp-nuts n' m', 
which may be loosened to allow the bar to be 
shifted vertically. In order to provide an ac 
curate adjustment of the parts, so that the 
bending-arms J J may be moved to exactly 
the right extent, the bar M is preferably pro 
vided with eccentric ends or trunnions nam, 
engaging the slots m, n, so that by turning 
the bar its part or surface which strikes the 
levers L. L. may be shifted back or forth as 
desired. 
In order to hold the ends of the blank ae 
curately in vertical position during the time 
they are being bent upwardly by the action 
of the bending-levers, vertical guide-surfaces 
are located at the opposite sides of the work 
ing-faces AA in such position as to engage 
the side edges of the blanks, said guide-sur 
faces being arranged at a distance apart 
equal to the width of the blank. 
The guides 
for the outer edges of the blank are herein 
shown as formed by the inner surfaces of the 
blocks E E, which support the rollers E E. 
Said inner faces of the blanks are of course 
located vertically in alignment with the in 
ner surfaces of the said rollers E E, it ob 
viously being necessary that the said guide 
surfaces should be located the same distance 
from the vertical side faces of the form-block 
as the said rollers-to wit, a distance equal to 
the width of the blank. The guide-surfaces 
for the inner edges of the blank are formed 
by the side of the projection or guide-block 
N, Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 15, which is preferably 
made separate from the top plate and secured 
to the said top plate between the said sur 
faces AA, the side faces of the said block 
being desirably curved or rounded in the 
manner shown. When the form of movable 
forming-dies G. G. shown in Figs. 18, 19, 20, 
and 21 is used, said projection N will be made 
of wedge shape and pointed at its lower part, 
so as to enter between and open the dies, as 
herein before set forth. 
In order to provide for making hanger's hav 
ing central loops of different widths, it is ob 
viously necessary that the projection or guide 
block N should be changed to correspond in 
width with the form-block B', and when the 
said form-block is changed or when a wider 
or narrower blank is used it is necessary that 
the external guide - surfaces formed by the 
blocks E E should also be moved. I pro 
vide for change in the width of the guide 
blockN by making said block detachable, the 
same being secured in place, as herein shown, 
Fig. 3, by means of a bolt passing through 
the block and having a head at its inner end 
which engages the T-groove A* of the top 
plate A. Said guide-block can therefore be 
removed and a wider or narrower one Sub 
stituted, as may be necessary or desirable. 
The external guide-surfaces formed by the 
blocks E E will of course come in proper po 
sition for engagement with the said edges of 
the blank when the rollers E E are placed at 
a proper distance from the form-block to also 
engage the external side edges of the blank 
| in the manner heretofore described. 
In operating upon blanks of different thick 
nesses it is obviously necessary to shift the 
rollers E E toward and from the form-block, 
and for this purpose I adjustably secure the 
studs e'e' of said rollers in transverse slots 
a'a' in the top plate A, Fig. 4, and in order 
to enable said studs to be easily shifted, a 
screw-shaft a is inserted through the top 
plate and provided with oppositely-directed 
screw-threads engaging the said studs, said 
shaft having a squared end at one side of the 
top plate by which it may be turned by the 
application of a suitable tool. 
It is obviously desirable that means should 
be provided for accurately determining the 
position of the straight blank when putting 
the same in the machine, So that the ends of 
the same will come in proper position after 
the blank is bent. For this purpose I attach 
to the sides of the frame two outwardly-ex 
tending horizontal arms OO, Fig. 4, and place 
upon the same two adjustable gages O O, which 
extend vertically upward in position to en 
gage the ends of the straight blank when the 
latter is placed across the rear end of the 
form-block in the manner hereinbefore de 
scribed. The position of the said blank when 
placed in the machine is indicated in full 
lines in said Fig. 4. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with a reciprocating 
form-block, of two stationary bending- rolls 
located at opposite sides of the form-block 
and two other bending-rolls located at oppo 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
O 
I 15 
2 5 
I 30 
45 
55 
 
445,149 
ID 
35 
45 
site sides of the form-block and at a distance surfaces or dies opposed to said bending 
levers, substantially as described. 
therefrom equal to the thickness of the bar 
S. The combination of a form-block, bend 
to be bent, substantially as described. 
ing - rollers operating in connection there 
2. The combination, with a reciprocating 
with to make a central bend or loop in the 
form-block, a movable carriage supporting the 
blank, forming - dies mounted on the form 
latter, and bending-rollers located at opposite 
block and extending laterally from opposite 
sides of the form-block, of forming- dies 
sides thereof, cam-arms operating in connec 
In Ounted upon the part of the form-block re 
tion with said forming-dies to give a twisted 
note from the carriage and movably con 
form to the blank, bending-levers pivoted to 
nected with said form-block, and means upon 
the ends of said cam-arms, and a revolving 
the carriage acting in connection with said 
cam or wiper for actuating said bending-le 
forming-dies to give a twisted form to the 
vers, substantially as described. 
blank, Substantially as described. 
9. The combination of a reciprocating car 
3. The combination, with a reciprocating 
riage, a form-block mounted thereon, stal 
form-block, a movable carriage supporting the 
tionary bending-roller's operating in connec 
lattel', and bending-rollers located at opposite 
tion with the form-block to make a central 
sides of the form-block, of two forming-dies 
loop in the blank, forming-dies mounted upon 
mounted upon the part of the form-block re 
the form-block and extending laterally at Op 
note from the carriage and extending later 
posite sides thereof, cam-arms mounted upon 
ally at opposite sides of the form-block, said 
the carriage and operating in connection with 
forming-dies being pivotally connected with 
said forming-dies to give a twisted form to 
the form-block, and means upon the carriage 
the blank, stationary parts or rollers for actu 
acting in connection with said forming-dies 
ating said cam-arms, bending-levers pivoted 
to give a twisted form to the blank, substan 
to the ends of said cam-arms, and a revolving 
tially as described. 
cam' or wiper actuating said bending-levers, 
4. The combination, with a reciprocating 
substantially as described. 
carriage and a form-block thereon, of station 
10. The combination of a reciprocating call 
alry binding-rollers, forming-dies mounted on 
riage, a form-block mounted thereon, sta 
the form-block and extending laterally from 
tionary bending-rollers operating in Connec 
opposite sides thereof, and cam-arms pivotally 
tion with the form-block to make a central 
supported upon the carriage and operating 
loop in the blank, forming-dies mounted upon 
in connection with the said forming-dies to 
the form-block and extending laterally at op 
give a twisted form to the blank, substantially 
posite sides thereof, cam-arms mounted upon 
as described. 
the carriage and operating in connection With 
5. The combination, with a reciprocating 
said forming-dies to give a twisted form to 
carriage, a form-block thereon, and stationary 
the blank, stationary parts or rollers for actu 
bending-rollers, of forming-dies mounted on 
ating said cam-arms, bending-levers pivoted 
the block and extending laterally at opposite 
to the end of said cam-arms, a revolving cam 
sides thereof, cam-arms mounted on the car 
or wiper actuating said bending-levers, bend 
riage and operating in connection with the 
ing-arms pivoted to the outer parts of said 
said forming-dies to give a twisted form to 
bending-levers, actuating-levers pivoted upon 
the blank, and a stationary part or roller 
the bending-levers and connected with the 
adapted for contact with the said cam-arms, 
said bending-arms, and a stationary part or 
by which the latter are actuated during the 
bar upon the machine-frame adapted for con 
movement of the carriage, substantially as 
tact with said actuating-levers, whereby the 
described. 
said bending-arms are moved, substantially 
6. The combination, with a form-block and 
bending-rollers operating in connection there 
as described. 
11. The combination, with a reciprocating 
With to make a central bend or loop in the 
carriage and a form-block mounted thereon, 
blank, of forming-dies mounted on the form 
of stationary bending-rollers located at oppo 
block and extending laterally from opposite 
site sides of the form-block at a distance 
sides thereof, cam-arms operating in connec 
therefrom equal to the thickness of the blank, 
tion with Said forming-dies to give a twisted 
forming-dies mounted upon the form-block 
form to the blank, bending-levers pivoted to 
and extending laterally from opposite sides 
the ends of said cam-arms, and stationary sur 
thereof, cam-arms pivoted to the carriage and 
faces or dies opposed to said bending-levers, 
operating in connection with said forming 
Substantially as described. 
dies to give a twisted form to the blank, and 
7. The combination, with a form-block and 
other stationary bending-rollers located at Op 
bending-rollers operating in connection there 
posite sides of the form-block at a distance 
with to make a central bend or loop in the 
therefroin equal to the width of the blank, 
blank, of forming-dies mounted on the form 
substantially as described. 
block and extending laterally from opposite 
12. The combination, with a reciprocating 
sides thereof, cam-arms operating in connec 
carriage and a form-block mounted thereon, 
tion with said forming-dies to give a twisted 
of stationary bending-rollers located at oppo 
form to the blank, bending-levers pivoted to 
site sides of the form-block at, a distance 
the ends of Said cam-arms, bending-arms piv 
oted to the said bending-levers, and stationary therefrom equal to the thickness of the blank, 
o 
75 
90 
95 
Co. 
O 
115 
I 25 
445,149 
O 
forming-dies mounted upon the form-block 
and extending laterally from opposite sides 
thereof, cam-arms pivoted to the carriage and 
operating in connection with said forming 
5 
dies to give a twisted form to the blank, other 
stationary bending-rollers located at opposite 
sides of the form-block at a distance there 
from equal to the width of the blank, and 
bending - lever's pivoted to the ends of the 
cam-arms, substantially as described. 
13. The combination, with a reciprocating 
form-block and bending-rollers operating in 
connection there with to form a central loop 
in the blank, of a clamping device for holding 
the blank against the end of the form-block, 
a lever for actuating said clamping device, 
and a stationary part of or upon the ma 
Chine-frame adapted for engagement with 
said lever during the reciprocatory movement 
of the block, whereby the clamp is auto 
matically actuated, substantially as described. 
14. The combination, with a reciprocating 
form-block and bending-rollers operating in 
connection there with to form a central loop 
in the blank, of a clamping device for holding 
the blank against the end of the form-block, 
a lever for actuating said clamping device, 
and a stationary part of or upon the ma 
chine-frame adapted for engagement with 
said lever during the reciprocatory movement 
of the block, whereby the clamp is automati 
cally actuated, and a spring for releasing the 
clamp, Substantially as described. 
25 
15. The combination of a reciprocating 
form-block, bending-rollers operating in Con 
nection therewith, forming-dies mounted on 
and extending laterally from opposite sides 
of the form-block, and cam-arms operating in 
connection with said forming-dies, said form 
ing-dies being movably connected with the 
form-block, and a stationary part of or upon 
the machine-frame engaging said forming 
dies or a part connected there with during the 
reciprocation of the form-block, whereby said 
forming-dies are moved or shifted into op 
erative position, substantially as described. 
16. The combination, with a machine-frame, 
a reciprocating form-block, and bending-roll 
ers operating in connection therewith, of 
forming-dies pivotally connected with the 
form-block, cam-arms operating in connection 
with said forming-dies to give a twisted form 
to the blank, an actuating-lever connected 
with said forming-dies, and a part of or upon 
the machine-frame adapted to engage said 
actuating-lever to move the forming-dies dur 
ing the reciprocation of the form-block, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I affix my signature in presence 
of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
JOHN GRANT. 
Witnesses: 
C. CLARENCE POOLE, 
GEORGE W. HIGGINS, Jr. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445249.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 445,249, 
 
W. A. HATCHER 
FURNA CE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 27, 1891. 
oRRIS FETERS co, Photo-ric, was 
(No Model.) 
No. 445,249. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. A. HATCHER, 
FURNACE, 
 
 
H 
u 
 
R) 
y 
 
 
s 
s 
 
JNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM ANDREW HATCHER, OF DALLAS, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
FOURTH TO M. W. KEENE, OF SAME PLACE. 
FURN ACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,249, dated January 27, 1891. 
Application filed April 15, 1890, Serial No. 348,072, (No model.) 
- 
To add tw/lo1, it ju?tly concei'i. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM ANDREW 
IIATCHER, a citizen of Dallas, in the county 
of Dallas and State of Texas, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Fur 
naces; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as Will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the Same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
furnaces, and more particularly to such as are 
employed for burning offal, refuse from 
slaughtering-houses, &c., and has for its ob 
ject to construct a furnace in Such a manner 
that the requisite amount of heat may be em 
ployed without the liability of destroying any 
part of the furnace. 
A further object is to SO construct a fur 
nace for burning refuse, &c., that the mate 
rials inserted therein may be consumed, and 
any liquid matter be vaporized and discharged 
in the form of Vapor. 
A further object is to produce a furnace 
for burning refuse, &c., in which the chamber 
for containing the material to be consumed 
shall be surrounded by Water. 
A further object is to so construct a furnace 
to be used in connection with slaughtering 
establishments for burning Offal, &c., that the 
chamber in which the Offal is to be consumed 
shall be surrounded With Water, and a suffi 
cient amount of steam generated by the en 
gine of such slaughtering-establishment or 
other machinery. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion and combinations and arrangements of 
parts, as hereinafter set forth, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front view of the furnace. Fig. 2 is a lon 
gitudinal sectional view. Figs. 3 and 4 are 
views of certain details. 
A represents the front portion of the fur 
nace, made of suitable material and contain 
ing a fire-box B, grate C, and ash-pit D, suit 
able doors B' and D being provided for the 
fire-box and ash-pit, respectively, and above 
the door B' a stoke-hole B' is made. 
Located in and surrounded by the brick 
Work of the furnace in rear of the fire-box is 
a boiler F, having a large flue G communi 
cating at its front end with the fire-box of the 
furnace. The outer and inner shells Ct. b of 
the boiler are closed by means of heads cd, 
One at each end, each of said heads being pro 
vided with flanges c', which enter the ends of 
the boiler, and these flanges are secured to 
the shells a, b by means of rivets c or in any 
other suitable manner. The inner and outer 
shells a, b are so arranged relatively to each. 
other that the water-space at the upper por 
tion of the boiler will be greater than the 
Space at the lower portion of said boiler, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. At one end of the 
boiler a space e is made, with which space an 
opening e' in the rear end of the boiler is made 
to communicate, by means of which opening 
access may be had to the interior of the boil 
er. The opening e' is normally closed by 
means of a cover l, connected at one end of 
a screw-threaded rod f, the other end of said 
rod being passed through a screw-threaded 
perforation in a yoke f', secured to the rear 
head dof the boiler and prevented from work 
ing loose by means of a nut di. Below the 
cover H the masonry is arched concentric 
with the boiler, as shown in Fig. 2, and be-, 
neath this arch an opening g is made in the 
rear wall of the furnace, through which an 
implement may be inserted for agitating the 
materials in the flue of the boiler, such ma 
terials being introduced into said flue in a 
manner presently explained. 
In the upper part of the boiler the two 
shells a, b are provided with openings h, the 
opening in the outer shell a, being made larger 
than the opening in the inner shell b. Se 
cured to the outer shell C, and surrounding 
each opening h, therein is an annular sleeve i, 
which extends upwardly through the ma 
sonry on top the boiler to the top surface 
thereof. A similar annular sleeve ", of smaller 
diameter, is secured to the inner shell b and 
adapted to surround each perforation therein, 
these sleeves i' also extending upwardly to 
the top of the masonry over the boiler. The 
chambers , formed by the sleeves i i", are 
closed by annular plates i, which plates are 
provided with in Wardly-projecting flanges, 
by means of which they are riveted or other 
s 
O 
25 
35 
45 
o 
75 
go 
Od 
445,249 
wise secured to the sleeves i i". Thus it will 
be seen that the flue G in the boiler F is pro 
vided with openings or mouths II, through 
which material may be inserted into said flue. 
The inlets or mouths H are covered by 
means of lids Hof fire-clay or other suitable 
material, having handles II secured thereto 
by means of which to remove and replace 
them. 
Beneath the boiler and extending beyond 
the rear end thereof a chamber I is formed 
between said boiler and the masonry at the 
base of the furnace. The chamber I is 
adapted to communicate with the flue G of 
the boiler at the rear end thereof, as shown 
in Fig. 2, and also by means of perforations 
j, made through the shells a b at the lower por 
tion of the boiler. These perforations i are 
preferably arranged in two series, as shown 
in Fig. 2, each series extending from end to 
end of the boiler, or nearly so. In producing 
the perforations i the shells C. l are provided 
with aligned screw-threaded perforations, and 
in each pair of these aligned perforations a 
section of pipei' is screwed and riveted in 
any suitable manner. 
Communicating with the chamber I at the 
forward end and at opposite sides thereof are 
two flues J J, which flues extend in a diago 
inal direction to the top of the furnace at the 
forward end thereof. The two flues J com 
municate at their upper ends with a common 
chamber J', which chamber in turn commu 
nicates with a stack J. 
Fire having been built in the fire-box, and 
the boiler having been filled with water, the 
offal, refuse, or other material is introduced 
into the flue G through the mouths H, any 
liquid introduced with such material finding 
its way through the perforations i into the 
chamber I. The heat from the fire passes 
from the fire-box through the flue G and acts 
on the material contained therein. From the 
flue G the heat passes into and through the 
chamber I, and finally out through the flues 
J to the stack J. During the passage of the 
heat through the flue G the material therein 
will be consumed, and during its passage 
through the chamber I the gases will be con 
sumed and the liquid in said chamber will be 
vaporized. 
By constructing and arranging a furnace 
for burning offal, &c., as above described, the 
boiler will be protected by the masonry sur 
rounding it, and a great heat may be employed 
for burning refuse, &c. 
My improved furnace is admirably adapted 
for use at a sanitary crematory where garbage 
and city offals are burned in connection with 
a slaughtering-establishment, and the steam 
generated may be employed for running nec 
essary machinery. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a furnace, the combination, with suit 
able masonry having a fire-box built therein, 
of a boiler inclosed by said masonry and hav 
ing a flue in communication with Said fire 
box, and means for introducing material into 
said flue, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a furnace, the combination, with a fire 
box, of a boiler having a flue therein, said 
boiler having mouths or openings communi 
cating with said flues, and a chamber beneath 
the boiler and communicating with the flue 
in the boiler, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a furnace, the combination, with a fire 
box, of a boiler having a flue in communica 
tion with said fire-box, Said boiler being pro 
vided with openings or mouths in its upper 
portion and ?lues or passages in its lower por 
tion in communication with the flue in the 
boiler, and a chamber beneath the boiler, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In a furnace, the combination, with a fire 
box, of a boiler having a flue in communica 
tion with said fire-box, said boiler being pro 
vided with mouths which extend to the top 
of the furnace and communicate with the flue 
in the boiler, lids for said mouths, and a cham 
ber beneath the boiler, in communication with 
the flue therein, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a furnace, the combination, with a fire 
box, of a boiler having a flue in communica 
tion with said fire-box, said boiler being pro 
vided with openings in its upper portion, 
sleeves secured to and Surrounding said open 
ings and extending to the top of the furnace, 
lids adapted to cover said sleeves, and a cham 
ber beneath the boiler, in communication with 
the flue in the boiler, substantially asset forth. 
6. In a furnace, the combination, with a fire 
box, of a boiler having a flue in communica 
tion with said fire-box, said, boiler being pro 
vided with openings in its upper and lower 
portions, which communicate with the flue in 
the boiler, a chamber beneath the boiler, in 
communication with the flue therein, and flues 
connecting said chamber with a smoke-stack, 
substantially as set forth. 
7. In a furnace, the combination, with a fire 
box, of a boiler having a flue in communica 
tion with said fire-box, said boiler being pro 
vided with openings in its upper and lower 
portions, which communicate with the flue in 
said boiler, a chamber beneath the boiler, and 
flues communicating at one end with said 
chamber at opposite sides of the boiler and 
at their other ends in a common Smoke-stack, 
substantially as set forth. 
8. In a furnace, the combination, with suit 
able inclosing masonry and a fire-box, of a 
boiler having a flue in communication with 
said fire-box, said boiler having openings or 
mouths in communication with the flue there 
in, the boiler also having an opening in one 
end, a valve or door for closing said opening, 
a chamber beneath the boiler, and flues con 
necting said valve with the open air, substan 
tially as set forth. 
9. In a furnace, the combination, with suit 
. 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
5. 5 
65 
75 
95 
IOC 
IIo 
I I5 
I 25 
I 30 
445,249 
3 
able inclosing masonry and a fire-bOX, of a 
boiler having a flue in communication there 
with, mouths in said boiler in communication 
with said flue, a chamber beneath the boiler, 
in communication with the flue in the boiler, 
said masonry being provided with an opening 
in one end of the furnace, by means of which 
access may be had to the flue in the boiler, 
Substantially as set forth. 
10. In a furnace, the combination, with a fire 
box, of a boiler having a flue in communica 
tion there with, said boiler comprising two 
shells arranged eccentrically one within the 
other, said shells being provided with open 
d 
ings in their upper and lower portions, sleeves 
connected to the tops of said shells and Sur 
rounding the openings to produce mouths 
communicating with the fiue in the boiler, 
flues inserted in the openings in the lower 
portion of the shells, and a chamber beneath 
the boiler, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM ANDREW HATCHER. 
S. A. NANCE, 
J. W. BROWN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445349.txt	(No Model.) 
W. BAUSCH. 
LENS GRINDING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 445,349, 
Patented Jan. 27, 1891. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 445,349. 
W. BAUSCH, 
TENS GRINDING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 27, 1891. 
 
 
 
 
2. 
 
75 
 
Z5 
es. 
III 
nam Allied 
m 
it is 
o, 
Illi 
"" 
 
U 
II 
(No Model.) 
No. 445,349, 
 
W. BAUSCH. 
LENS GRINDING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Jan, 27, 1891, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 445,349. 
 
W. BAUSCH. 
LENS GRINDING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Jan. 27, 1891, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM BAUSCH, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
ENS. GRN DING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,849, dated January 27, 1891. 
Application filed February 14, 1890, Serial No, 840,422. (No model,) 
55 
IO 
25 
To all whon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM BAUSCH, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented certain Improve 
ments in L ins-Grinding Machincs, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The aim of the invention is to provide a 
simple machine for grinding and polishing 
cylindrical lenses-that is to say, lenses hav 
ing either or both surfaces segments of cyl 
inders; and to this end it consists in combin 
ing, with a cylindrical block or support for 
the lenses, a corresponding grinding-shell, the 
two having complementary cylindrical sur 
faces and mechanism by which the shell is 
reciprocated endwise and also rocked later 
ally, so that it pursues a constantly-changing 
path in its course to and fro over the lenses. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a machine constructed 
on my plan and containing a series of blocks 
and rubbers. Fig. 2 is an end elevation 
showing one of the lens-Supporting blocks, 
the grinding-shell thereover, and a pitman 
for moving the latter. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
section on the line ac a' of Fig. 2 of the parts 
therein shown and also through the pitman 
and eccentric-gear for moving the grinding 
shell. Fig. 4 is a diagram illustrating in plan 
view the parts shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is an 
edge view of one of the eccentrics, showing 
the stop devices therein. Fig. G is an edge 
view showing the eccentric-strap on the out 
side. Figs. 7 and S are respectively a side 
view and a top plan view of pitman-connec 
tions used when the shell has a curvature of 
long radius. Figs. 9, 10, and 11 are views of 
the parts in modified forms. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
rigid main frame containing two horizontal 
decks or platforms C, and a?, intended to sus 
tain the grinding devices. 
BB' represent blocks the surfaces of which 
are segments of cylinders. They are made of 
cast-iron or other Suitable material adapted 
to have the blank lensest cemented to their 
faces, and they are secured in position on the 
decks of the main frame, as shown in the 
drawings, and hereinafter described in de 
tail. The upper operative faces of these 
blocks are made of concave or convex form in 
cross-section, according to the character of 
the lenses to be ground. Blocks of both forms 
are shown in the drawings. Over each of 
these blocks, resting upon and supported by 
the lenses therein, is placed a grinding-shell 
C, usually of cast-iron. It is made of a size 
approximating that of the underlying block, 
and its under surface is of true cylindrical 
form, the radius of the curve being greater or 
less, according to the focallength of the lenses 
to be produced. The grinding of the lenses 
is effected by moving the shells endwise to 
and fro over the underlying lenses and at 
the same time vibrating them laterally, the 
surfaces being supplied With Water or other 
fluid and with suitable abrasive material, as 
in ordinary lens-grinding. 
For the purpose of imparting the requi 
site motion to the shells and of operating 
each shell independently of the others the 
following mechanism is used: Two shafts 
D ID' are mounted horizontally in bearings in 
the main frame behind and somewhat above 
the respective decks. Each shaft is pro 
vided at the end with a driving-pulley d' 
and mounted in its bearings so that it may 
rotate freely and at the same time move 
endwise, for a purpose which will presently 
appear. On each shaft opposite the respect 
ive shells is mounted a series of eccentrics 
E, carrying pitman F, the forward ends of 
which are connected to the respective shells 
by universal joints, so that as the eccentrics 
rotate they cause the pitmen to move the 
shells endwise. Each eccentric is embraced 
between two large disks e', keyed firmly to 
the shaft and serving to support the eccen 
trics and pitmen against the lateral strains 
and maintain them in fixed relations to the 
shaft. Each of the main shafts D and D is 
provided at any suitable point in its length 
with a grooved collar d or its equivalent, 
which receives the wrist of a crank d on the 
end of a shaft d, provided with an independ 
ent drive-pulley d and arranged in bearings 
in the frame at right angles to the main shaft. 
(See Fig. 4.) The crank-shaft, being inde 
pendently rotated, acts to move the main shaft 
to and fro in an endwise direction, the result 
being that the pitmen of the main shaft will 
move laterally at the same time that they 
move end Wise, whereby they are caused to 
impart a lateral as well as longitudinal mo 
So 
9 O 
OC 
mm 
445,849 
O. 
20 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
tion to the shells C. The result of this com 
pound movement is that the shells are moved 
through a constantly-changing circuitous 
path, each and every point in the shell being 
carried over the underlying lenses constantly 
and in a constantly-changing direction. The 
course thus pursued by a given point in the 
shell will be akin to that produced by what is 
known as a geometric or engine lathe. 
By changing the extent to which the pitmen 
are moved laterally in relation to the length 
of their stroke, and by changing the relative 
speeds at which the main shafts and the crank 
shafts are driven the course of movement of 
the shells may be greatly varied. The ad 
vantage of thus constantly changing the mo 
tion of the shells is twofold: first, that they 
are more certain to produce lenses of true cy 
lindrical form, and, second, that the surfaces 
of the lenses are ground more smoothly and 
with higher finish than would be possible were 
the shells simply reciprocated in right lines. 
When moved in accordance with the pres 
ent invention, the shells do not leave any per 
ceptible lines upon the faces of the lenses, 
and this because at each stroke the lines of 
the previous stroke are crossed. 
The essence of the invention resides in coin 
bining with the shells means for moving them 
laterally and longitudinally in changing 
paths, and it is manifest that the details of 
construction may be variously modified with 
out departing from the limits of the inven 
tion. It is preferred, however, to retain the 
details shown in the drawings, and which will 
now be described. 
Each pitman is provided at its end with a 
strong head f, secured thereon by a tapered 
pin f' and a nut f', and the lower side of this 
head is provided with a rigid tapered pin f', 
the lower end of which is made of spherical 
form and seated in a corresponding cavity in 
the top or back of the shell, as plainly shown 
in Fig. 3. This construction answers all pur 
poses when the shells are of a curvature of 
short radius. In shells which are of more 
flattened form-that is, with curves of longer 
radius-it is preferred to provide them on the 
back with notched ears.f, and to seat in these 
ears a rock-bar f, having at the middle a 
socket f, mounted on a transverse pivotif, 
and adapted to receive a neck f' on the lower 
end of the pitman-head, the pin f being at 
such time removed. 
The blocks which sustain the lenses are 
commonly made of cast-iron, and each pro 
vided with three supporting-feet bb'b', which 
are seated on V-shaped ribs g g g, rising 
rigidly from a plate on the main frame. 
Two of these ribs lie transversely at the front, 
while the other, which is of greater length, 
lies longitudinally of the shell, thus facilitat 
ing the proper adjustment of the block, which 
requires to be frequently removed from the 
machine. The block is held down in place by 
a hook b or equivalent fastening. 
In order that the pitman and shells may be 
75 
go 
stopped independently of each other, so as to 
permit a removal of any one shell and block 
without stopping the machine, I provide 
means by which the eccentrics may be inde 
pendently unlocked at will. 
As shown in Fig. 5, each eccentric is mount 
ed loosely on the shaft and driven by a trans 
verse driving-pine, mounted therein and en 
gaging one of the side disks e', keyed to the 
shaft. A spring e, fixed in the eccentric, acts 
at one end against a stud on the driving-pin 
and urges it endwise into engagement with the 
driving-disk, while a fingere, pivoted in the 
eccentric to swing laterally, bears against the 
stud on the opposite side to retract the driv 
ing-pin and unlock the eccentrie. This fin 
ger is exposed in a circumferential groove in 
the eccentric. The end of the pitman encir 
cling the eccentric, technically known as the 
eccentric-strap,' contains a sliding trip-pin 
e', the inner beveled end of which may be pro 
jected into the groove in the eccentric, while 
the outer end is pivoted to a sustaining-link 
e and to an operating-handle e', which latter 
is extended along the pitman within conven 
ient reach of the attendant and notched at ef 
to engage a loelking-stude on the pitman. 
95 
When the handle and the trip-pine are drawn 
forward, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3, 
the pin is inactive and the driving-pin re 
mains in engagement, carrying the eccentric 
with the shaft. When, however, the handle 
is pushed rearward, the end of the trip-pin is 
thrust into the groove of the eccentric. As 
the latter revolves, its trip - finger e rides 
against the end of the trip-pin e, which car 
ries the finger to one side, thereby withdraw 
ing the driving-pine from the disk, The ec 
centric is thus stopped and held at rest until 
the trip-pin is again drawn out of action by 
the handle. 
It is to be understood that the described 
mechanism is in effect but a clutch for driv 
ing the eccentric, and that any ordinary clutch 
mechanism of appropriate form may be sub 
stituted therefor, or that the clutch mechan 
ism may be omitted and the pitmen driven 
by eccentrics or cranks on the driving-shaft, 
Instead of moving the driving-shaft endwise 
by cranks, as shown, they may each be moved 
by grooved eccentricS fixed thereon and en 
gaging a roller on the frame, as shown in Fig. 
9; or end motion may be imparted to the shaft 
by providing the same, as shown in Fig. 10, 
with a collar b, receiving one end of a lever 
b', the opposite end of which is connected by 
a pitman b to a crank bon an independently 
driven shaft. 
Instead of moving the pitman laterally to 
effect the rocking or rolling motion of the 
shells, the blocks on which the shells rest may 
receive a reciprocating motion at right angles 
to the line in which the pitmen reciprocate, 
in which case it will be unnecessary to move 
the pitmen laterally. Such arrangement is 
shown in Fig.11, in which B represents the 
block mounted on guides b and reciprocated 
Too 
IO5 
O 
II5 
2O 
I 25 
 
445,849 
transversely by the pitman B and eccentric 
E, while C is the shell reciprocated in a right 
line by pitman C and crank C8 on a shaft 
which is without end motion. 
I believe myself to be the first to combine, 
with a lens-block and grinding-shell adapted 
to grind cylindrical lenses, automatic mech 
anism for moving them in relation to each 
other so that the shell passes in a circulatory 
and constantly - changing course over the 
lenses, and it is to be distinctly understood 
that my invention includes any mechanism 
the mechanical equivalent of that herein 
shown, for the purpose named. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a machine for grinding cylindrical 
lenses, the combination of a cylindrical block, 
a complementary cylindrical shell, and mech 
anism, Substantially as shown, for producing 
simultaneously longitudinal and lateral re 
ciprocation between said shell and block. 
2. In a lens-grinding machine, the cylin 
dricallens-block, the complementary shell, the 
shell-operating pitman, its actuating crank or 
eccentric, and means, substantially as shown, 
for rotating said eccentric and moving the 
same laterally. 
3. In combination with the lens-block, the 
grinding-shell, a pitman to move the shell, an 
eccentric and crank to actuate the pitman, 
and independently - driven mechanism for 
moving the first-named shaft endwise, where 
by the course of the shell over the lenses may 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
be varied by changing the relative speeds of 
the shaft. 
4. In combination with the lens-block, the 
grinding-shell, the shell-operating pitman, the 
eccentric to move the same, the driving-shaft 
eccentric, and an intermediate clutch mech 
anism whereby the sihell may be stopped with 
out arresting the motion of the shaft. 
5. In combination with the laterally and 
longitudinally reciprocating pitman, the pin 
or finger having a spherical end, a grind 
ing-shell having a corresponding socket to re 
ceive the pin, and the cylindrical block on 
which the shell is loosely mounted, whereby 
the shell is moved by the pitman, but permit 
ted entire freedom of motion on the block. 
6. In combination with the grinding-shell, 
its actuating-pitman, the eccentric carrying 
said pitman, the driving-disk, the driving-pin, 
its actuating-spring, and the trip-pin mounted 
in the pitman and movable at the will of the 
operator. 
7. In a lens-grinding machine, and in com 
bination with the removable lens-block, the 
support having the longitudinal and trans 
verse ribs to receive the block. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 3d day of December, 18S9, in the 
presence of two attesting witnesses. 
WILLIAM BAUSCH. 
Witnesses; 
JAMES J. ALLEN, 
C. D. IXIEHEL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445449.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 445,449. 
Patented Jan. 27, l891. 
DEVICE TO PREVENT RAILROAD RAILS FROM SPREADING, 
C. KEELER 
 
 
 
 
a 
a 
ses 
sexae 
NSSS 
73 
St. 
S) 
S. 
Sasarasavaaraxas 
2222222222222 
t 
 
 
 
 
I 
 
 
 
. 
a y \ 
LA. 
... W. W. H. 
all HIII 
2 
 
WITNESSES: 
Crue, 
C2. 
2% r 
EAS co, PHoTo-LTHo., washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CALVIN KEELER, OF HOBART, NEW YORK. 
DEVICE TO PREVENT RAILROAD-RAILS FROM SPREADING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,449, dated January 27, 1891. 
Application filed June 13, 1890, Serial No. 355,274 (No model.) 
5 
o 
25 
40 
To all whon it inctly conceri. 
Be it known that I, CALVIN KEELER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of Ho 
bart, in the county of Delaware and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Devices for Preventing 
Railroad-Rails from Spreading; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable other's skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being. had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
devices for preventing railroad-rails from 
spreading, and also more effectually holding 
and retaining the fish-plate in position, where 
by the safety of the trains running on the 
rails is enhanced. 
One of the chief causes of railway acci 
dents is due to what is termed spreading of 
the railsthat is, they are forced apart-caus 
ing the cars to jump the track. This spread 
ing is particularly liable to occur on curves 
and in bad weather, and is frequently the 
cause of serious accidents. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and economical device, in which the 
rails are securely held and prevented from 
spreading or displacement under ordinary 
circumstances. The improved construction 
also provides for holding the fish-plates at the 
joints securely, and also acts as a nut lock 
for locking the nuts of Said fish-plates. 
The invention Consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of parts hereinaf 
ter fully described, and definitely pointed out 
in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a cross-sectional view of a railroad construct 
ed in accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 
is a plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view of the retaining-plates detached. 
In the said drawings, the reference-nu 
meral 1 designates the lies, and 2 the rails. 
These may be of any ordinary or suitable 
construction. 
The numeral 4 designates fish-plates for 
connecting the adjoining ends of two rails, 
Said plates being located on both sides of the 
rails and secured by means of bolts 6 and 
nuts 7. 
The numerals 8 and 9 designate retaining 
plates for holding the rails and serving to pre 
Vent them from spreading. These plates have 
their outer ends bent over, forming grips 10, 
which embrace or engage with the webs of 
the rails, and they extend to about the center 
of the track, where their inner ends are an 
gularly bent, forming projections 12, through 
which pass bolts 13, secured by nuts 14. For 
the purpose of forming a nut-lock these plates 
may have their outer ends also bent up 
Wardly, forming projecting portions li, which 
are recessed or cut away at 16, so as to en 
gage with the nuts 7 of the bolts 6 and pre 
vent them from turning, whereby the fish 
plates are securely held in place. The device 
also acts as a brake to prevent the rails from 
tipping Over. 
From the above it will be seen that an ef 
ficient and reliable device is provided for 
preventing the rails from spreading, which in 
practical use will be found to be of great 
value and importance. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
In a railroad, the combination, with the 
rails 2, the fish-plates 4, the bolts 6, and nuts 
7, Of the retaining-plates S and 9, connected 
together at their inner ends, and their other 
ends provided with grips to engage the rails, 
and with upwardly-projecting portions 15, 
recessed at l, to engage with and lock the 
nuts of the fish-plates, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CALVIN KEELER. 
Witnesses: 
A. M. WARNER, 
J. DEWITT CHURCH. 
55 
7 o 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445549.txt	{NO Model.) 
No. 445,549, 
 
G. FITCH. 
MAST ARM FOR ELECTRIC LIGHTS, 
Patented Feb. 3, 1891. 
 
 
 
AW, 
&\sseurs. 
NWENOR. 
121 
The Norts PETERs co, Photo-ITHo, was imaro, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE FITCII, OF SHARPSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MAST-ARM FOR ELECTRIC LIGHTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,549, dated February 8, 1891. 
Application filed July 3, 1890, 
Serial No. 357,603, (No model. 
To aid. It'hon it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE EITCH, of 
Sharpsburg, county of Allegheny, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented or discovered a 
new and useful Improvement in Mast-Arms 
for Electric Lights; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, concise, and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, making a part 
Of this Specification, in which-like figures in 
dicating like parts 
Figure 1 is a side elevation showing the 
lamp in position for use. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged detail view at right angles to Fig. 1, 
showing the automatic cut-out and short-cir 
guiting arrangement. Fig. 3 is a detail view 
in perspective further illustrating this feature 
of my invention. Fig. 4 is a face view of the 
lamp, showing manner of hanging from two 
Supports. 
My invention relates to that class of mast 
arms in which the lamp is suspended at the 
end of an arm pivotally connected to the post 
and counterweighted at the other side; and 
it consists in the special construction of such 
Counter-weight, an automatic cut-off, and in 
Suspending the lamp from two depending 
points of Support, as hereinafter described. 
Mounted upon the post 1 is the bracket 2, 
provided with depending bearings 33, through 
which passes the shaft 4, which forms a piv 
otal bearing for the arm 5, which supports the 
lamp. Rigidly attached to the shaft 4 is the 
double-crank arm G, connected to a similar 
Crank-arm 7 by two connecting rods or links 
SS, and the crank-arm 7 is attached to the 
shaft 9, forming a bearing for the inner end 
of the counterweighted arm 10, considerably 
lower down. By this construction it will be 
readily seen that the counter-weight 11, act 
ing through arm 10, crank-arm 7, links SS, 
and crank-arm 6, will act as a balance for the 
Weight of the lamp and arm 5 in a similar 
manner to the ordinary continuous counter 
Weighted arm. A special advantage of this 
construction consists in the arrangement of 
the various parts when the lamp is in the 
lowered position for renewing the carbons. 
(Shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1.) 
It will be 
seen that the counter-weight, being pivoted at 
a point relatively lower than the bearing-point 
of the lamp-arm, will assume the vertical po 
sition shown in dotted lines without interfel'- 
ing with any of the parts mounted to the post. 
The various parts are firmly braced and held 
in position by the rods 12 13, 1'emovably at 
tached to a pin 14, and these rods serve to 
raise and lower the arm into position. Mount 
ed in a suitable bracket are the terminals 15 
16, making electrical connection with the cir 
cular grooved disk-blocks 17 18, as shown in 
Fig. 2, when the lamp is raised. Circuit is 
made from disk-block 17 through hollow in 
sulated shaft 4 to one pole of the lamp, and 
from disk-block 1S directly by wire to the 
other pole. The disk-blocks 171S are insul 
lated from one another, and are provided with 
a flat or cut-away face 19, so that when the 
lamp is lowered the blocks 171S are released 
from contact, and the terminals 15 16 Will 
rest upon a short-circuiting wire 20, thus all 
tomatically cutting out the circuit from the 
lamp and avoiding all danger to the carbon 
setter. Upon raising the lamp again into po 
sition the grooved periphery of the circuial' 
disk-blocks will again come into contact with 
the terminals, releasing them from short-cir 
cuiting wire and restoring the current to the 
lamp. Attached to the end of the arm 5 is a 
cross-bar 21, provided with two supporting 
eyes 22 22, to which are secured the current 
wires from disk-blocks 17 lS. 
I preferably construct the lamp of a frame 
work provided with two side supporting-rods 
23 23, depending from eyes 22 22 and forming 
electrical connection there with, and it will be 
readily seen that the lamp will be thus rigidly 
secured against undue swaying or twisting, 
Having described my invention, what I de 
sire to claim, and secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
I. In a mast-arm, the combination of a main 
arm pivotally connected at the inner end, and 
a secondary counterweighted balancing-arm 
pivoted at a point below and connected to the 
main armby equalizing links and levers, Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
2. In a counterweighted mast-arm, the colm 
bination there with of interposed equalizing 
links for transmitting leverage, and means 
for operating and holding the parts in posi 
tion, substantially as shown, 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
o 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
2 
445,549 
ch 
3. In a mast-arm, the combination of cir- 
cuit-terminal points, a short-circuiting wire, my hand. 
and disk-blocksprovided with flattened faces, 
whereby a circuit is automatically made and 
5 broken by the movement of such disk-blocks 
operated by the mast-arm, substantially as 
shown. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
GEORGE FITCH. 
- 
Witnesses: 
F. K. McCANCE, 
JoHN E. POTTER. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445649.txt	(No Model.) 
R. W. HARDIE 
BRUSH. 
No. 445,649. 
Patented Feb. 3, 1891, 
 
  
 
his 
 
A. 
WZTIVASSZg 
7/WVZEWZOA, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ROBERT W. HARDIE, OF ALBANY, NEW YORK. 
BRUSH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,649, dated February 3, 1891. 
Application filed July 31, 1890, Serial No. 360,535, (No model.) 
55 
75 
IO 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ROBERT W. HARDIE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Al 
bany, in the county of Albany and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Brushes, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
daubers having a brush-head consisting of a 
single knot of bristles secured within a head 
band, and has for its object, first, to secure 
the knot of bristles firmly within the head 
band. The root of every bristle is naturally 
provided with a burr or bulb which increases 
the thickness of the bristle at that end. 
These bristles are arranged in brushes of 
this description with their slender or pointed 
ends downward and their root ends within 
the head-band. I enlarge the diameter of 
the upper portion of the head-band so as to 
adapt it to the increased size of the upper 
end of the knot of bristles, due to the burred 
ends of the bristles or to the use of pitch, as 
hereinafter described, and in this manner 
cause the upper end of the knot to serve in 
effect as a wedge to hold itself firmly in the 
head-band. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide means for preventing the bristles from 
working up out of place, and also for con 
cealing the roughness of the top of the bris 
tles, and to this end I place a cap upon the top 
of the knot of bristles; but the top of the knot 
is rough and uneven when left uncut,in order to 
utilize the burred ends or pitch to help hold the 
bristles in place, as before mentioned, and the 
cap will not in such case rest evenly in place 
if supported by the upper end of the knot, 
and I therefore form the cap integral with a 
handle and secure the shank of the handle 
to a lateral extension formed on the head 
band, so that the cap will be supported in a 
level position irrespective of the condition of 
the top of the bristles. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a brush embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional perspective view of a 
knot of bristles inclosed Within a head-band. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a combined 
5o cap and handle detached from the head-band. 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section of said handle, 
taken on line I. 1 of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a side 
..) 
45 
35 
40 
elevation of a complete brush embodying a 
modification of my invention. Fig. 6 is a 
plan view of the head-band used in the con 
struction illustrated in Fig. 5 with its arms 
separated. Fig. 7 is a plan view of the same 
head-band with its arms closed as when com 
pressed to hold the knot of bristles. 
In the construction illustrated in Figs. 1 to 
4 of the drawings, A represents a knot of bris 
tles inclosed within a head-band B. The di 
a meter of the head-band is enlarged at its 
upper portion and contracted gradually down 
Ward, so that said upper portion will be 
adapted to conform to the increased size of 
the upper end of the knot of bristles caused 
by pitch or by the roughness of the bristles 
at that end, while the lower portion of the 
head-band grasps the bristles and holds the 
knot wedged in the head-band. The head 
band is provided with a lateral extension C, 
which is preferably made to project outward 
from the head-band in an inclined plane, as 
shown in Fig. 2. A cap D is placed on the 
top of the knot of bristles, and a handle E is 
formed integral with said cap. The shanke 
of the handle rests upon the lateral extension 
C of the head-band, and is secured to said 
extension by means of the rivets d', which 
pass through the perforations d in the shank 
of the handle and the corresponding perfora 
tions c of the extension of the head-band. 
The brush is thereby provided with a cap 
which aids in preventing the bristles from 
Working up out of place and which conceals 
the unevenness of the upper end of the knot 
of bristles, and which also serves as a base for 
a label, and the handle is strengthened at its 
Shank by means of the lateral extension of 
the head-band, whereas the handle would oth 
erwise be required to sustain the greatest 
strain at its weakest point. I prefer to curve 
the handle transversely, as shown in Fig. 4, 
and thus secure the greatest strength with 
the least weight of metal, although this is not 
essential to my invention. 
When the head-band is constructed as illus 
trated in Fig. 2, the upper ends of the bristles 
should be coated with some adhesive sub 
Stance-Such as cement, pitch, or varnish 
and the knot then pressed firmly into the head 
band, the pointed ends of the bristles being 
preferably entered first. The upper ends of 
90 
95 
CO 
445,649 
the bristles will then separate slightly by rea 
son of the diameter of the head-band being 
greater at the top than at the bottom, and 
when the adhesive material hardens the up 
per end of the knot will be securely wedged 
in the head-band. I prefer in most instances, 
however, to construct the head-band in the 
manner shown in Figs. 5, 6, and 7. This head 
band F is constructed of compressible metal, 
such as malleable iron, and is in form an open 
ring, provided with laterally-projecting arms 
G, which are separated when first made, as 
shown in Fig. 6, but are adapted to be drawn 
together, so as to contract the inner area of 
the head-band until it assumes the proportion 
indicated by the dotted circular line shown 
in Fig. 6. 
The bristles are inserted in the head-band 
when it is open, as shown in Fig. 6, and the 
head-band is then compressed until one of the 
arms Goverlap the other, as shown in Fig. 7, 
forming in effect but a single lateral projec 
tion. When the head - band is thus com 
pressed, the bristles are pressed so tightly 
together that they are held in the head 
band without the aid of any adhesive sub 
Stance. 
A cap and handle similar to that shown in 
Fig. 3 is placed on the knot of bristles when 
the arms of the head-band are pressed to 
gether, the cap resting upon the top of the 
knot of bristles and the Shank e of the han 
dle resting on the extension G of the head 
band. The shank of the handle is secured to 
35 the extension by means of rivets d", passed 
through the openings d of the shank and the 
3O 
40 
45 
55 
corresponding openingsg' of the extension of 
the head-band. 
- 
When the parts are constructed and ar 
ranged in the manner last described, the arms 
G perform a triple function. They not only 
serve as means for supporting the cap and 
securing it in place, but they also serve as 
means for holding the head-band compressed 
against the bristles, and they also strengthen 
the shank of the handle at its weakest point. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a knot of bristles, 
of a head-hand having its inner wall inclined 
upward and outward from the shortest diam 
eter of the head-band, a cap placed upon the 
top of the bristles, and a handle formed in 
tegral with said cap and secured at its shank 
to a lateral extension formed on the head 
band, substantially as described, for the pur 
pose specified. 
2. The combination, with a knot of bristles, 
of a compressible head-band having its inner 
wall inclined upward and outward from the 
shortest diameter of the head-band, a cap 
placed upon the top of the bristles, and a 
handle formed integral with said cap and se 
cured at its shank to a lateral extension con 
sisting of two overlapping arms formed on the 
head-band, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ROBERT W. HARDE. 
Witnesses: 
W. B. SPALDING, 
EDWIN G, DAY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445749.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 445,749. 
 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
A. K. DEWENPORT. 
SANDPAPERING MACHINE, 
Patented Feb. 3, 1891, 
J12Zresses 
= 
Z7tuezozor: 
(No Model.) 
No. 445,749. 
A. K. DEVENPORT. 
SANDPAPERING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 3, 1891. 
Ay, 5. 
al 
2. 
%) O) 
33N2 
SAS 
2 
Yi) (S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 2 
A. 
 
  
INSlf, 
ESSEE 
N 
2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR. K. DEVENPORT, OF JACKSON, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
- 
TOS, HEYSER & SONS, OF SAME PLACE. . 
SANDPAPERING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,749, dated February 3, 1891. 
Application filed September 26, 1889, serial No. 325,122, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ARTHUR. K. DEVENPORT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Jackson, in the county of Jackson and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvellents in Sandpapering-Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to sandpapering-na 
chines, and consists, primarily, in the employ 
ment of flexible abrading-disks carried by an 
arbor and arranged to be rotated at, high 
speed, the disks being free at their outer 
edges, 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a machine designed to carry out my 
improvements, one of the disks being shown 
in position upon and the other removed from 
the arbor; Fig. 2, a sectional view of the parts 
in position; Figs, 3 and 4, similar views show 
ing modifications; Figs. 5. and 6, enlarged 
views designed to illustrate.the action of the 
machine; Figure 7, a view illustrating means 
for"adjusting the bridge or work-support in 
dependently of the table. 
Prior tomy invention machines for sandpa 
pering panels and other wood-work have been 
constructed with two disks or rotary heads, 
each faced with sand-paper or other abrad 
ing material, which material has, however, 
been tightly drawn or stretched over the face 
of the disk or head and clamped or bound at 
the edges. To prevent the outer edges of the 
disks or heads thus covered from marring the 
Work, it has been customary to round off or 
bevel them; but as a result of such construc-. 
tion it has been impracticable to work close 
up to the edges or boundaries of the raised 
portion of the panel, and in attempting to do 
so the edges have unavoidably been cut away. 
In other words, one of two difficulties has in 
evitably resulted from the use of abrading 
disks having fixed edges-failure to dress the 
entire face of the sunken portion or cutting 
away the edges of the raised portion. I avoid 
these difficulties and attain most satisfactory 
results by the employment of the free-edged 
trading-disks in the manner explained be 
OW. 
A indicates a stout frame, which may be of 
wood or metal; B, an arbor provided with a 
band-pulley C and mounted in boxes or bear 
ings D upon the frame A, and E E two disks 
of sand-paper or other suitable material, as 
emery-paper or cloth, applied to said arbor 55 
and arranged to rotate therewith, the disks 
being clamped in any suitable manner at their 
central portions, but free at their outer edges. 
These parts are all that are essential to the 
carrying out of my invention; but better re- 6o 
sults may be secured by the adoption of the 
further parts and features indicated in the 
drawings. Thus in practice I find it advan 
tageous to employ two disks FF, one back or 
outside of each of the abrading-disks EE, to 
prevent the latter from falling over, buckling, 
or otherwise getting out of shape, and a 
spacing collar or disk (; between the abrad 
ing-disks, to serve the double purpose of de 
termining their distance apart and of aiding '7o 
in clamping, them. 
The outside or supporting disks are pref 
erahly made of metal and quite thin, their in 
ner or opposing faces being slightly beveled 
or curved outward toward their peripheries, 75 
as best shown in Figs. 5 and 6. The arbor B 
is formed with a reduced end portion, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2, and with a fixed col 
lar or shoulder a, against which one of the 
supporting-disks rests, and abrading-disk E 8o 
coming next, then the spacing-collar G, then 
the outer abrading-disk, followed by the sec 
ond'supporting-disk F, and lastly by a nut H, 
which screws upon the threaded end of the 
arbor and binds the several disks together 85 
and secures them so firmly to the arbor that 
they rotate there with. A feather or spline 
may be provided to prevent the several disks 
from turning upon or independently of the 
arbor; but this is not important and is not or 9o 
dinarily used. By varying the thickness of 
the spacing disk or collar G the distance be 
tween the abrading-disks may be varied and 
determined as required. A like result may 
also be attained by either of the modifica. 95 
tions illustrated in Figs. 3 and 4. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown a separate arbor B' 
for each of the abrading-disks with its back 
ing or supporting disk, one of the arbors be 
ing longitudinally adjustable in its bearings Od 
O 
20 
25 
- 
445,749 
2 
bridge being properly regulated, the free 
to permit variation of the distance between 
edges of the abrading-disks will work up to 
the disks. A yoke I, having the arms of its 
fork seated in a circumferential groove in the but never beyond the required point, and as 
a consequence the sunken, reduced, or bev. 
arbor B', has swiveled in it, an adjusting 
eled outer portions of a panel of like piece of 
Screw J, the stem of which screws into a suit 
ably-threaded socket in- one of the bearings 
work may be perfectly dressed even up t? 
of the arbor or in some other fixed part of the 
and in the angle E. by the meeting of 
the sunken and raised portions of the panel 
machine. By turning the screw J the mov 
able arbor may be adjusted with ease and 
or other work. The outer or sunken portion 
of panels and like work is now generally re 
nicety and held at any desired adjustment. 
Another equivalent construction is shown in 
duced in thickness toward the edges, and al 
though the disks work very efficiently upon 
Fig. 4, in which the adjustable arbor B is 
represented as passing centrally or axially 
parallel faces they work, especially well upon 
through a tubular arbor B, the tubular arbor 
such beveled or inclined faces, because of the 
being formed with a longitudinalsiot b to re 
tendency of the abrading-disks to hug against 
them through their centrifugal action. The 
ceive a screw c, which serves to clamp the 
central arbor and hold it firmly in any de 
precise character of the disks EE is not ma 
sired relation to the fixed arbor. The term 
terial-that is to say, they may have coarser 
fixed 'as above employed has reference only 
or finer faces, according to the degree of fin 
to longitudinal movement, it being under 
ish required. In other words, while the mail 
stood, of course, that both arbors rotate. 
..chine is referred to under the general and 
common name of sandpapering-machine,' it 
It is not essential that more than one abrad 
ing-disk be used, though it is generally de 
is not my intention to convey the idea that the 
sirable to dress or smooth both faces of the 
invention is restricted to the use of sand 
work, and will therefore be desirable ordi 
paper disks. 
narily to employ the two. If but one be used, 
It has been proposed hitherto to make 
any form of support, either the supporting 
abrading and polishing disks for dental Work 
disk For a fixed support, may be used to keep 
and for cleaning or dressing shoe-soles by 
the Work in position while being acted upon 
gluing or cementing two disks of sand-paper 
by the abrading-disk. 
or like abrading material to an intermediate 
K indicates a bridge-piece extending be 
disk or body of cloth or other material which 
will remain pliable during the process of 
tWeen the disks from one end of the slotd. of 
the Work-table. L to the other end thereof, its 
manufacture. It is manifest, however, that 
purpose being to sustain the work while pass 
an abrading-disk comprising two layers of 
ing between the disks and to limit its descent. 
abrading material, such as sand-paper, emery 
between them. The work-table is hinged or 
paper, or the like, an intermediate body, and 
otherwise made adjustable as to height, and 
two layers of glue or cement will not possess . 
by raising or lowering it the depth to which 
great or even considerable flexibility. In one 
the Work may enter may be regulated and 
instance it has been proposed to permit, the 
edges of the abrading-disks to project slightly 
varied at will. 
Referring now to Figs. 5 and 6, the prin 
beyond the intervening disk or body, so as 
ciple of operation will be more fully ex 
to bend over and cover the edge thereof, such 
plained. Fig. 5 represents the abrading 
construction necessarily involving the use of 
disks as they appear when at rest, their flexi 
an intermediate body of considerable thick 
bility permitting them to fall back against 
ness. Such disks are unsuited to the Work 
the supporting-disks or away from them, as 
for which my machine is designed and can 
may be. Fig.6 represents the position which 
not be successfully or advantageously used 
the flexible disks will assume if the outside 
therein, because the thickness and compara 
Supporting-disks be omitted or if they be 
tive stiffness of the composite disks preclude 
considerably beveled, so as to leave a com 
the perfect freedom of movement and the 
paratively wide space between the plane of 
ready and certain adaptation and adjustment 
the abrading-disks and the inner faces of the 
of the disks to the surfaces to be operated . 
supporting - disks. Under such conditions 
upon, and for the further reason that it is 
the centrifugal force due to the high speed 
only after continued use and wear that such 
of rotation will cause the abrading-disks to 
possess even the compara 
composite disks 
straighten out in planes perpendictiilar to the 
tively slight degree of flexibility claimed for 
axis of the arbor, as indicated; but if the out 
them if they ever possess it. 
side or supporting disks be not considerably 
To be effective for the purposes of my in 
beveled the abrading-disks will hugelosely to 
vention the disks must be so thin and light 
them by reason of the expulsion of air from 
and must possess such. degree of flexibility 
between the abrading and the supporting 
that the partial vacuum produced by the ex 
disks and the pressure of the air upon the 
pulsion of air from between the abrading 
abrading-faces a fact developed in practical 
disks or supports shall cause the abrading 
use of the machine, The bridge K may be 
disks to hug normally to such backing or 
adjusted by means of set-screws, as indicated 
supporting disks and to lie flat and smooth 
in Fig. 7, without altering the elevation of the 
thereon, while leaving their outer edges free 
table. The elevation of the work-table or its 
from folds or bends and consequently in the 
. 
. 
. 
35 
45 
55. 
65 
So 
445,749 
3 
shape best adapted to permit then to work I said frame, and a flexible abrading or smooth 
closely into the angle where the raised portion ing disk secured concentrically upon the ar 
bor and having its free edge extended be 
and the reduced portion of the panel meet. 
yond the work-support. 
Such action and result are unattainable with 
5. In a machine for finishing wood-work and 
composite disks such as heretofore proposed. 
the like, the combination of a flexible disk to 
Moreover, so far as I am aware, such compos 
act upon one face of the work, a second flexi 
ite disks have never been combined with an 
ble disk to act upon the opposite face of the 
independent backing or support; nor has 
work, one disk adjustable toward and from 
any one before proposed to employ a thin 
the other, and means for imparting rotation 
flexible disk with a backing or support with 
to both of said disks, both of said disks be-, 
out securing the one firmly and fixedly to the 
ing free at their peripheries. 
This combination enables me to at 
other, 
6. The herein-described machine for dress 
tain results never before reached by any ma 
ing wood-work and the like, consisting of a 
chine of this character, so far as I have knowl 
frame, an arbor mounted and rotatable there 
edge. 
in, two flexible abrading. disks concentric 
Having thus described my invention, what 
ally secured upon said arbor, but otherwise . 
I claim is- 
free, and two supporting-disks also carried by 
1. In a machine for smoothing wood or the 
said arbor, one behind each of the abrading 
like, the combination of a frame, a work-sup 
disks. . 
o port, a rotatable arbor, and a flexible smooth 
7. The combination, with frame A and ar 
ing-disk carried by said arbor and free from 
bor'B, of disks E E, supporting-disks FF, 
its outer edge to the central clamp, by which 
and an intermediate supporting-bridge. 
it is made fast to the arbor. 
8. In combination with frame A, arbor B, 
2. In a sand papering-machine, the combi 
free flexible disks EE, and supporting-disks 
nation of a suitable frame, an arbor journaled 
FF, carried by said arbor, spacing-collar G, 
therein and provided with a wheel through 
interposed between the disks EE, substan 
which to receive motion from a suitable 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
source, a flexible abrading-disk made fast at 
9. In combination with frame A and table 
its center to the arbor, but free at its outer 
L, having slot D, and a work-support or 
7o 
edge and arranged to rotate with the arbor, 
bridge-arbor B and disks EE, carried by the . . . 
; and a guide opposite the working face of the 
arbor and extending through the slot on Op 
disk to guide the work in passing the same. 
posite sides of the bridge. 
hand 
3. In a sand papering-machine, the combi 
nation of two flexible abrading-disks, means 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
for rotating said disks, and an intermediate 
ARTHUR. K. DEVENPORT. 
work-support, each disk being centrally sup 
ported, but free at its periphery. 
4. In combination with a suitable frame, a 
Work-support mounted thereon and adjust 
able relatively thereto, an arbor mounted in 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my 
GEO. N. WHITNEY, 
HENRY E. EDWARDS. 
Witnesses: 
. 
. 
. 
65 
- 
- 
5 
O 
5 
35 
40 
is 
illus- ... 
 
It is hereby certified that in Letters Patent No. 445,749, granted February 3, 1891, 
upon the application of Arthur K. Devenport, of Jackson, Michigan, for an improver 
ment in Sandpapering-Machines, errors appear in the printed specification requir 
ing correction, as follows: Iuline 80, page 1, the word and should read an in lines 
24 and 33, page 3, t. wurus sand papering-machine' should read sandpapering 
inachine, and in line 71, same page, a comma should be substituted for the hyphen 
between the words bridge and arbor; and the said Letters Patent should be 
read with these corrections therein that the same may conform to the record of the 
case in the Patent Office. 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 10th day of February A.D. 1891, 
SEAL. 
- 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 
OY RUS BUSSEY, 
Countersigned: 
O. E. MITCHELL, 
Commissioner of Patents. 
. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445849.txt	(No Model.) 
A. W. CHEWERS. 
PIPE FOR WIND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS, 
No. 445,849, 
Patented Feb. 3, 1891, 
oval 
79. 7. e 
O (4. 
 
 
 
 
 
1 
 
 
 
s 5 : a 
RS S 
 
(2 226/, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AURION VILA CHEVERS, OF PROVIDENCE, RIIODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR OF 
THREE-FOURTS TO FRANK WINFIELD ROCKWELL AND DANIEL RUS 
SELL BROWN, OF SAME PLACE, AND PATRICR JOSEPH MICELROY, OF 
EAST CAAIBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
PIPE FOR WIND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,849, dated February 8, 1891. 
Application filed May 10, 1888, Serial No. 273,405, (No model.) 
To cult will Oil it Tactity concern: 
longitudinally without special manipulation 
l3e it known that I, AURION VILACHEVERS, 
as, for instance, Said sleeve or pipe may be 
of the city and county of Providence, and State 
provided with a screw - thread or a spiral 
of Rhode Island, have invented certain new 
groove and a stud, so that in tuning a pipe 
and useful Improvements in Pipes for Wind 
the movable sleeve must be rotated by hand, 
Musical Instruments; and I do hereby declare 
in order that it may be longitudinally ad 
that the following specification, taken in con 
justed, or with a thumb-screw or other form 
nection with the drawings furnished and form 
of locking device which will firmly secure the 
ing a part of the same, is a clear, true, and 
sleeve in its adjusted position, and which must 
complete description of my invention. 
be released before any longitudinal movement 
My Said improvements relate to such pipes 
will be possible. 
as were disclosed in my Letters Patent No. 
After describing the several embodiments 
373,012, dated November S, 1887. In the manu 
of my invention illustrated in the drawings, 
facture of these pipes glass is mainly relied 
the features deemed novel will be specified 
upon, and little or no difficulty is encountered 
in the Several clauses of claims hereunto an 
in initially getting very nearly the desired 
nexed. 
tone in each pipe; but the necessity for nice 
Figure 1 illustrates in side view a novel 
graduation and maintaining it securely is im 
musical pipe embodying my invention in a 
perative, and to accomplish this is one object 
desirable form. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of 
of my invention. In other words, I desire 
the same. Fig. 3 is a side view of a simpler 
that this tuning the pipes' should be read 
form of pipe with its tuning appliance. Fig. 
ily performed and by means which will not 
4 in Section illustrates the tuning appliance, 
be liable to Subsequent derangement. In my 
Fig. 3, detached and having a glass bushing 
said Letters Patent I provided fortuning such 
in one end thereof. Figs. 5 and 6 illustrate 
pipes on the Well-known telescopic principle, 
still another form of my musical pipe pro 
and this I still employ; but I now provide the 
vided with a tuning-sleeve and a locking de 
telescoped parts of the pipes with means which 
vice. 
enable the tuning adjustment to be readily 
It will be understood that my pipes neces 
and accurately performed and permanently 
Sarily include an air-pipe C, which is coupled 
to a Sounding or musical pipel, so that a cur 
Secured as against variation. 
Certain novel forms of my musical pipes de 
rent of air passing out of the air-pipe will be 
vised by me have straight lengths of different 
directed at substantially right angles across 
and progressively-reduced diameters, and by 
or partially into the mouth of the sounding 
pipe. 
employing two or more of these tuning appli 
The musical or Sounding pipel of Figs. 1 and 
ances, one in each of said lengths, I am enabled 
2 is constructed in three straight lengths pro 
not only to obtain the requisite sound, but also 
gressively reduced in diameter. 
to more or less varyit as to richness or quality. 
The mouth 
piece length ) is of the largest diameter, the 
In the use of the telescoped pipes I have dis 
covered that their vibratory action is liable to 
next or middle length b is of a reduced di 
clerange the position of the sliding portion of 
ameter, and the next or terminal length l is 
the pipe or sleeve which is adjusted for tun 
of still Slmaller diameter, and each of these is 
ing, and I find it important to not only guard 
usually composed of glass. Between each. 
against this derangement, but also to provide 
two of these lengths a metal tube and a tuning 
sleeve are interposed, and these are respect 
for convenient and accurate adjustment. I 
therefore so combine the slidig pipe or sleeve 
ively coupled to the glass portions. These 
tubes c and sleeves care telescoped together 
with the pipe or sleeve to which it serves 
and coupled by means of a spiral groove, as 
as an extension that said sliding sleeve or 
pipe cannot when once adjusted be moved clearly shown, so that by slightly turning one 
AO 
45 
SO 
7 O 
75 
So 
2 
445,849 
55 
75 
85 
cure them against the derangement otherwise 
liable to occur as a result of the vibrations 
incident to the use of the musical pipe; but 
said sleeves must also be capable of being 
moved easily and even delicately for pur 
poses of adjustment when said locking de 
vices have been loosened. It will also some 
times be unnecessary to employ more than 
the metal sleeve c' with its locking device, as 
when the sounding-pipe or a branch thereof 
is long enough and has a concentric exterior 
surface capable of being properly telescoped 
by said sleeve. 
It will also be understood 
that the tuning-sleeve need not always have 
an open end, because, as is clearly indicated 
in my aforesaid Letters Patent, it is at times 
only necessary to vary the interior dimen 
sions of a sounding-pipe for varying its tone. 
In some cases I find it desirable to employ 
paper or other packing between the sliding 
sleeve or pipe and the pipe on which it slides, 
whether both pipes be composed of glass or 
of metal, the packing absolutely preventing . 
all liability of rattling vibration. 
Having thus described myinvention,I claim 
as new and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
1. The combination of a musical sounding 
pipe constructed in two or more straight 
lengths of different and progressively-reduced 
diameters and an air-pipe coupled to the 
mouth of said pipe, substantially as described. 
2. A musical sounding-pipe constructed in 
two or more straight lengths of different and 
progressively-reduced diameters and having 
tuning-sleeves between said lengths, in-com 
bination with an air-pipe coupled to the mouth 
of said pipe, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a musical sounding 
pipe, an air-pipe coupled to it at its mouth, 
and a tuning-sleeve on the sounding-pipe ad 
justably secured against longitudinal de 
rangement, substantially as described, where 
by the interior capacity of said sounding-pipe 
may be varied for accurately tuning and 
then securely maintaining it against such va 
riations in adjustment as would otherwise be 
liable to occur as a result of the vibrations of 
the pipe. 
ent- 
- 
AURION VILA CHEVERS. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS R. SOUTHWORTH, 
AUGUSTU's J. WINSHIP, Jr. 
OO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
. 
. 
- 
- 
the tone. 
of either or both of the two sleeves the pipe 
may be elongated or shortened. The metal 
tubes and sleeves are firmly secured to the 
glass, preferably by means of a cementing 
material, which will become quite hard, and 
the sleeves should fit the tubes as snugly as 
practicable, so as to avoid independent vibra 
tion. In tuning such a pipe it will sometimes 
be necessary to only manipulate one of the 
sleeves; but in other cases both sleeves should 
be adjusted. If the required elongation or 
retraction be considerable in extent and it 
be wholly accomplished at one sleeve, the va 
riation in tone is restricted to that particular 
portion of the pipe, whereas if the variation 
be divided among two or more portions of said 
pipe of different diameters more or less varia 
tion will accrue in the richness or quality of 
In Fig. 3 the upper or mouth section b is 
as in Fig. 1, and it has a reduced tip to which 
the tube cisattached, and this, with the sleeve 
c', constitutes the lower or second straight 
length of the pipe, having a reduced diame 
ter. In many cases such a sleeve is provided 
with a short glass tip or bushing d, as shown 
in Fig. 4, said tip being secured therein and 
serving to obviate such objectionable vibra 
tions as are sometimes liable with the thin 
spun or drawn metal of which the sleeves are 
preferably composed. It is to be understood 
that in Some cases I construct my glass pipes 
in one piece with the two or more straight 
lengths progressively reduced in diameter, in 
which case one sleeve or a tube and a tuning 
sleeve may be applied to the small end. 
In many cases the simple spiral connection 
will be all that is required to confine the 
sleeves against longitudinal derangement; 
but I sometimes supplement said spiral con 
nection with a thumb-screw, as at e, Fig. 1, 
which, by engaging with the inner tube, 
serves as a locking device. So, also, in some 
cases the spiral feature may be dispensed 
with, as illustrated in Figs. 5 and 6, wherein 
the musical pipe has its air-pipe a. at one end, 
while the tuning pipe and sleeve c care at 
right angles to the body of the pipe and at 
tached to a neck b, provided for the purpose. 
In this case the sleeve c' is held in place only 
by the thumb-screw e, and it will obviously 
be immaterial in what manner the sleeves are 
locked against longitudinal movement, so long 
as they are so confined as to thoroughly se 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US445949.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 445,949. 
C, T, HACKEN. 
NIPPLE HOLDER. 
Patented Feb. 3, 1891. 
G 
z \;? 
e 
z /9 a. 
|AZ 
, 
, 
A. 
C 
a- c17 
a 
E. 
9 
e - - - 
27 
(Y 
o/ 
RA - 
le, 7, A 
  
  
  
 
 
as 
-79. 5. 4. A cy 
 
ult in rea 
. 
 
 
a/ 
2. 
 
Isaac 
 
 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CIARIES T. HACKEN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
NPPLE-HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 445,949, dated February 3, 1891. 
- 
Application filed August 22, 1890, Serial No. 362,740, (No model.) 
Io. 
15 
55 
To all whon, it in?tity concern. 
ing device for this purpose which will hold 
Be it known that I, CHARLEST. HACKEN, a 
the nipple securely while the thread is cut 
citizen of the United States, and residing at 
upon the other end withoutinjuring the thread 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
already cut. It is the purpose of my inven 
Illinois, have invented a certain new and use 
tion to entirely overcome this difficulty and 
ful Improvement in Nipple-Holders, which is 
provide a holder for the threaded end of the 
fully set forth in the following specification, 
nipple which receives this end of the nipple 
reference being had to the accompanying 
and firmly holds the latter from turning with 
drawings, in which 
out possibility of injury to the thread. 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of a nipple 
The main portion or body of this holder is 
holder embodying my invention; Fig. 2, a 
a metal tube B, the thickness of which is suf 
section of the same, taken on the line 22 of 
ficient to give it great strength. The extrem 
Fig.1; and Fig. 3, a similar section taken on 
ity of this tube is provided with a short ex 
the line 33 of Fig. 2. 
ternally-threaded section b. A wide ring C 
My invention relates to a device for hold 
is threaded internally and adapted at one 
ing a coupling-nipple while its ends are 
end to be turned upon the threaded end of 
threaded, being intended more especially for 
the tube B, and at the other end to receive 
holding the nipple after the thread has been 
the threaded end a of the nipple. 
cut upon one end and while it is being cut on 
In the open end of the tube B a plunger D 
the other. 
is mounted, the stem d of which is fitted to 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
the tube internally, while the head d' is con 
device which will securely hold the nipple by 
siderably larger, being of a diameter to nearly 
its threaded end and prevent it from turning 
fill the interior of the ring C, though of course 
while the other end is threaded and at the 
without entering the thread thereof. The 
same time without any danger of injuring 
diameter of this head must always be larger 
the thread already cut. 
than the inside diameter of the nipple, so that 
I will proceed to describe in detail the con 
when brought up to the end of the nipple it 
struction and operation of a nipple-holder in 
will abut against it and not enter it. This 
which I have embodied my invention in one 
plunger is free to move back and forth in the 
practical way, and will then point out more 
tube, and immediately behind it a cam E is 
definitely in claims the special improvements 
mounted in the tube B. As shown in the 
which I believe to be new and wish to secure 
drawings, this cam consists of a straight cy 
by Letters Patent. 
lindrical pin passing centrally through the 
In the drawings, A represents, a nipple or 
tube from one side to the other, and having 
coupling-section, which is a Well-known de 
a flat face e, provided on one side thereof by 
vice used in coupling pipes together. When 
cutting away the surface of the pin. This 
completed and ready for use this device is 
pin is inserted in suitable perforations b' in 
threaded upon each end. Now, there is no 
the tube, in which it is free to turn. At one 
difficulty in cutting the thread upon one end 
end outside of the tube it is provided with an 
of the nipple, for of course the other end is a 
angular-shaped heade', and at the other is fast 
plain pipe or cylinder and can be clamped 
ened by any suitable device, such as nut and 
and held firmly in any suitable device with 
washere, as seen in Fig.2. An arm Fisfastened 
out injury to the nipple. Now suppose one 
to the angular head e' of this pin and extends 
backward along the upper side of the tube 95 
end a of the nipple has been thus threaded. 
It is obvious that in order to thread the other 
a little distance, and at its free or rear end is 
end a' the nipple must be held during the 
preferably widened somewhat to provide a 
process by the enda, which is already thread 
tail-piece f, by which it is held in place. The 
ed. If any ordinary clamping device is em 
extremity of this end of the arm is rounded 
ployed for this purpose, there is great danger 
or convex and has a notch f', so that as the 
of injuring the threading on the end of the 
arm is swung it will readily engage with a 
nipple to which the clamp is applied. In fact, 
hand-lever G, pivoted to the tube and pro 
it is almost impossible to employ any clamp- vided with a thin edge g on the face toward 
75 
So 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
445,949 
the arm F, adapted to enter said notch in the 
arm. As shown in the drawings, this lever 
is mounted within the tube by means of a 
pivot-ping, passing through the tube, and 
the lever extends outward therefrom through 
a suitable opening 0 in the latter, a little 
larger than the lever, so as to permit some 
vibration thereof. A spring II is arranged 
immediately behind the lever G, which oper 
ates to hold the latter up toward the arm F 
and cause the notch in the arm to engage 
therewith. Immediately behind the cam E 
there is a cross-pin J, fitted in the tube and 
passing through the same at right angles 
to the cam and in contact with its circum 
ference, as seen in Figs. 2 and 3. This pin 
is for the purpose of bracing and giving 
strength to the cam, so that the latter will be 
perfectly firm and rigid. The cam works be 
tween this cross-pin and the inner end of the 
plunger-stem, and the parts are so constructed 
relatively that when the flat face e is turned 
toward the plunger the latter may be pushed 
back into the tube until its head comes in 
contact with the end of the tube, but when 
the cam is turned out of this position its 
greater circumference will drive the plunger 
outward from the tube. 
The operation of these devices is as follows: 
Suppose the nipple A has received a thread 
upon the end a, and it is desired to cut a 
thread upon the other end a?, the arm F is 
turned, thereby oscillating the cam until its 
flat face is brought opposite to the plunger 
and the latter is pushed inward. The ring C 
is turned upon the end of the tube B and the 
threaded end a of the nipple turned into the 
opposite end of the ring, or vice versa, these 
parts being adjusted so that a little space is 
left between the head of the plunger and the 
inner end of the nipple. The arm F is then 
swung around toward the tube, thereby bring 
ing the cam into action against the inner end 
of the plunger and driving the latter out into 
contact with the end of the nipple, as seen in 
Figs. 2 and 3. By means of the cam and its 
operating-arm great force can be brought to 
bear upon the plunger and thereby produce 
a frictional contact between the plunger-head 
and the inner end of the nipple sufficient to 
prevent any rotation of the latter and hold it 
perfectly firm during the threading of the 
other end. It will be seen that this must be 
so, for any rotation of the nipple must of 
course be in the threaded ring, and this 
movement only forces the nipple in Ward. 
against the plunger with greater force. The 
nipple will therefore be held perfectly firm 
and steady, so that the thread may be cut 
on the opposite end (t' without any diffi 
culty. At the same time it is perfectly evi 
dent that the thread on the end a cannot be 
injured. Where it is in contact with any 
, 
thing it is in a nicely-fitting threaded ring, 
and the strain on the parts cannot, therefore, 65 
damage the thread. Preferably the several 
parts of the device are arranged so that in 
operation the cam may be turlued around far 
enough to bring its operative arm into con 
tact with the spring-lever G, as seen in Figs. 
1 and 2, so that the arm and cam will be held 
in proper position during the threading oper 
ation. This may always be secured by turn 
ing the cam into this position, thereby giving 
the plunger its full outward thrust before the 
nipple is turned into the ring. Of course, 
the nipple will then be turned up against the 
plunger, if not completely at first fully by the 
very operation of threading the opposite end. 
The nipple is shown in the drawings as it will 
appear after this operation is completed 
that is, both ends are threaded. 
In the drawings I have shown the nipple 
and tube of the same circumference. This 
is not necessary, however, as they may differ 
in this dimension, the holding-ring C being 
constructed accCrdingly. The devices for op 
erating the plunger may be varied from those 
here shown and described. 
The main feature of the device is the plun 
ger in connection with the holding-ring and 
any devices adapted to force the plunger out 
ward and hold it firmly against the nipple, 
may be substituted for those here shown and 
described. It is also obvious that the ring 
may be fastened to the tube in any suitable 
way other than that here described. It is 
only necessary that the ring shall be fast to 
the tube and the latter stationary. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The tube B, provided with threaded end 
b, in combination with the internally-threaded 
ring C, the plunger D, fitted in the end of the 
tube and provided with an enlarged head d", 
and an oscillating cam E, mounted in the tube 
and arranged to force the plunger outward 
against the threaded end of the nipple A when 
turned into the ring, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
2. The tube B, in combination with the ring 
C, adapted to receive the threaded end of the 
nipple A, the plunger D, the cam E, arm F, 
and spring-lever G, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
3. The tube B, in combination with the ring 
C, adapted to receive the threaded end of the 
nipple A, the plunger D, Oscillating cam E, 
and bracing-pin J, Substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
4. 
". 
. 
9 O 
95 
Ioo 
fo5 
IO 
CHARLES T. HACKEN. 
Witnesses: 
CARRIE FEIGEL, 
H. D. HOLLISTER. 
IO 
25 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446049.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 446,049. 
J. WOOD. 
LUBRICATOR, 
Patented Feb. 10, 1891, 
3 
% assara 
 
 
2 % N 
>2. 8 
...turm' was 
FG 
  
 
 
N NXN 
S 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH WOOD, OF RED BANK, NEW TERSEY. 
UBRICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 446,049, dated February 10, 1891. 
Application filed May 13, 1890, Serial No. 351,596, (No model.) 
Io 
"N. 
To ?tilitvilon, it may conce77: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. WooD, residing 
at Red Bank, in the county of Monmouth and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Lubricators, which 
invention is fully set forth in the following 
Specification. 
My invention has for its object to supply 
to the journal-bearing of the axle of a rail 
Way-car or the shafting of machinery a con 
tinuous and regular supply of oil or lubricant. 
It is especially adapted to prevent hot box on 
an engine or car. 
The method in which I prefer to carry out 
my invention is as follows: I use a spring 
coil which so coils around itself horizontally 
at the bottom as to form a sufficiently firm 
support. The other end of this spring coils 
upward to such an extent as may be neces 
Sary in accordance with the location of the 
oil-chalmber and the journal or shaft to be 
lubricated. To the upper portion of this 
Spring is attached a flat rectangular piece of 
Wood. If this is intended to be inserted in 
the journal-box of a car or engine, it should 
be made Somewhat smaller than the section 
of the journal-box in which it is designed to 
be inclosed, so as to allow of a slight play. 
Thus in a journal-box six inches by eight 
inches a wooden top five inches by six inches 
and half an inch thick (more or less) will be 
Sufficient. Over this wooden top and fast 
ened thereto I place an ordinary thick cot 
ton Wick, the length of which should be suffi 
cient to reach down upon either side into the 
oil - chamber. This cotton wick should be 
nailed or otherwise firmly attached to the 
WOOden top, preferably at the sides thereof, 
So that the top surface of the wick should lie 
smootli upon the Wooden top, and so that the 
nails or other means of attaching the same to 
the Wooden top should not be upon the top 
surface of the cotton wick. At fight angles 
to this wick I place another wick over the 
first, whose ends hang down the other two 
sides of the wooden top, and it should be of 
a length Sufficient to reach into the oil-recep 
tacle below. This wick should be fastened 
in the same manner as the other, and should 
likewise present a smooth even surface upon 
its top. Over this second wick I place a cov 
ering of wire-gauze, which should preferably 
be somewhat narrower than the second Wick, 
and the second wick should preferably be of 
a width slightly narrower than the wooden 
top, so as to leave, say, half an inch upon 
either side. The first-mentioned wick should 
preferably be not quite as wide as the Wooden 
top, but very nearly so. The wire-gauze is 
itself a conductor of oil. 
It also serves to 
protect the wick. The wire-gauze and the 
top wick should preferably be so arranged 
that their length should run parallel to the 
axle or shaft to which the oil is to be applied. 
This device should then be placed in such a 
position that by force of the spring it will at 
all times gently press against the shaft or 
axle while the same is revolving. It should 
be placed immediately underneath the jour 
nal-bearing. 
The accompanying drawings will serve to 
illustrate my invention. 
Figure I is a section of the lubricator length 
wise of a car-axle, in connection with which 
it is illustrated; and Fig. II is a cross-section 
Cf the same. 
A represents a car-axle, and B is the jour 
mal-box, which contains a suitable quantity 
of oil in a chamber beneath the axle. 
D represents a spiral spring having a flat 
coil at the bottom, which rests upon the bot 
tom of chamber B. The spring D supports 
a flat block or piece of wood E, on which is 
placed a broad wick F, whose ends hang over 
the board and dip into the oil. Above and 
at right angles to this wick is a second wick 
G, whose ends likewise hang down into the 
oil, and upon wick G is a rectangular strip 
II, of wire gauze or netting, which comes into 
contact with the axle A and is caused to press 
gently against the same by the action of 
spring D. 
It will of course be understood that the 
illustration is given only as an example of a 
convenient way in which the invention may 
be applied, and that the improved lubricator 
may be used in connection with shafts in 
various kinds of machinery, the details being 
modified as may be required. 
It will be found that by means of this de 
vice a constant, free, and regular supply of 
oil will be led to the axle or shaft, and that 
neither the gauze nor the wick-surface will 
become glazed or clotted, which is one of the 
--- 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
So 
IOO 
 
446,049 
The wire-gauze can be omitted, or any Well 
known substitute therefor might be used, 
A single 
such as a perforated metal sheet. 
wick alone or more than two wicks can be 
used, or the method of fastening the Wicks 
can be varied without departing from the 
spirit of my invention. 
In place of resting upon the horizontal coil 
or coils of the spring, the spring may be at 
tached to a flat board, upon which it is Sup 
ported, or the spring may be attached to the 
bottom or side of the box. 
Numerous other changes both of material 
and of construction might readily be made by 
one skilled in the art. 
- 
I believe that the use of a wire-gauze or per 
forated sheet metal and the use of a flat board 
of wood or its equivalent in a lubricator are 
both broadly new. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
tel's Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a shaft having a 
receptacle beneath the bearing for containing 
oil, of a lubricating device in said receptacle, 
comprising one or more wicks of cotton or 
other suitable material fastened to a flat Slip 
port of a material such as wood, which is a 
good conductor of oil, so as to present a fiat, 
smooth, and even surface to the shaft or axle 
to be lubricated, and held against the axle by 
the pressure of a spring or spiral coil or other 
suitable means, substantially as described. 
2. A lubricating device adapted to be placed 
in an oil-receptacle beneath the journal-bear 
ing of a shaft, said device comprising, in cont 
bination, the following elements: a flat Sup 
port, one or more wicks secured thereon so as 
to present an even flat surface on top of the 
support, a sheet of wire-gauze or perforated 
sheet metal placed over the wick or wicks, 
and a spring or similar means for pressing 
the lubricator against the shaft, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
45 event of any unexpected destruction of the specification in the presence of two subscrib 
JOSEPH WOOD. 
principal difficulties which this device is do 
signed to avoid. 
I am aware that the use of a spring or spiral 
coil for such a purpose as this is old. I am 
also aware that a sponge or a mass of cotton 
or Waste pressed against the axle or shaft by 
a spiral coil or spring has been used as a lu 
bricating device. I am also aware of Letters 
Patent No. 103,617, granted to William B. 
Howe on the 31st day of May, 1870; but in 
none of these is there the smooth flat surface 
of a cotton wick firmly held in a horizontal 
position and smooth and even throughout all 
that portion of its length which comes in con 
tact with the axle or shaft to be lubricated; 
nor is there shown a wire-gauze or anything 
equivalent thereto, such as has been hereto 
fore described. 
I am aware also that a lubricator composed 
of hair-netting or fine cloth stuffed with 
fibrous material has been heretofore devised, 
and that it has been proposed to use metal 
pad-holders slightly concave and supported 
The former device would not be 
On Springs. 
Serviceable, as it would quickly cake on the 
Surface, causing an imperfect, irregular, and 
unreliable supply of oil. It is also an impor 
tant feature of my invention that the sup 
port is a flat strip of wood or equivalent ma 
terial, which itself is a good conductor of oil, 
as this device is found to assist materially in 
producing regularity of action and economy 
of oil. 
I prefer the exact arrangement here de 
scribed; but obviously many alterations and 
changes could be made without departing 
from the spirit of my invention. Among the 
advantages of the exact structure that I have 
described are the following: In case the wire 
gauze should be worn through, the cotton is 
itself a powerful conductor of oil, and would 
itself serve as a lubricant. In case the wick 
or wicks should be worn through, the wood is 
also a good conductor of oil, so that in the 
Wire, or even of both the wire and the Wicks, ing witnesses. 
the device would still perform its work for 
Some time. 
The axle or shaft in its rapid revolution 
creates a partial vacuum, and for this reason 
and by reason of its rapid motion performs, 
as it were, the function of a pump in drawing 
the oil upward. 
W. H. L. LEE, 
FREDERICK GET,LER. 
Witnesses: 
- 
- 
25 
S 
 
wr 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446149.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 446,149, 
 
C. A. E. MEINICKE. 
SIZING APPARATUS FOR SLIME, &c. 
Patented Feb. 10, 1891. 
7/2/aesses\ 
%26.4% 
423 
co., PHoro-LitHo, WASH4NGTON, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL AUGUST EMIL MEINICKE, OF CLAUSTIAL, PRUSSIA, GERMANY. 
SZING APPARATUS FOR SLIME, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 446,149, dated February 10, 1891. 
Application filed October 29, 1890, Serial No. 869,758, (No model.) Patented in Germany August 29, 1888, No. 47,025, and in 
Austria-Hungary August 16, 1889, No, 85,790 and No. 59,062, 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
To G.22 Ltion, ii, 7 (if CO: C(772: 
Be it known that I, CARL AUGUST EMIL 
MEINICKE, a subject of the King of Prussia, 
residing at Clausthal, in the Kingdom of 
Prussia, Germany, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Sizing Apparatus for 
Slime and the Like, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention has reference to hydraulic 
slime-classifiers; and it consists, essentially, 
in a series of concentric vessels provided with 
conical lower ends forming between them 
channels for the mixed ore and water, dis 
charge-channels for each class of ore, Sedi 
ment-chambers, discharge-pipes, and water 
supply pipes for producing an inverse cur 
rent, all of which is more fully pointed out 
in the following specification and claims and 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a vertical central section of an 
apparatus embodying my invention. Fig. 2 
is a plan or top view of the same, part being 
broken away. Fig. 3 is a section of a modi 
fied form of part of the apparatus. . 
Similar letters indicate corresponding 
parts. 
In the drawings, the letters A, B, C, and D 
designate a series of concentric vessels having 
their lower ends made conical. 
E and E are two conical partitions placed 
concentrically within the conical ends of the 
vessels B and D, respectively, said partitions 
being also provided with short cylindrical 
portions extending into the cylindrical parts 
of the vessels B and D. 
are cones open at their apexes 
only, placed within the extreme lower ends of 
the vessels B and D, the interior of said cones 
forming the water-chambers i' and i. 
i8 and are the sediment-chambers, formed 
at the lower conical ends of the concentric 
vessels B and D. 
c' is the inlet-pipe for the mixed slime and 
water, which pipe is located centrally Within 
the vessel A and is secured at its lower end 
to the lower end of said vessel. The Walls of 
thisinlet-pipe are conical-that is to Say, flare 
downwardly. 
C is a feed-trough, and b a funnel for con 
I and 
ducting the mixed slime and water to the in 
let-pipe. 
k' is a discharge-pipe leading from the sedi 
ment-chamber i, and a similar pipe lead 
ing from the sediment-chamber it. 
f is the annular overflow extending around 
the upper edge of the vessel D, and f' is the 
discharge-trough leading therefrom. 
The upper or cylindrical portions of the 
concentric vessels A, B, C, and D form be 
tween them the two concentric channels e' 
and e and an intermediate downtake c, 
while their lower or conical portions, in con 
nection with the partitions E and E' and the 
cones I and I, form the concentric channels 
d' and d, the sediment-pockets g and g, the 
passages h. and h", communicating, respect 
ively, with the pockets g and g and the sedi 
ment-chambers, and the passages hh, join 
ing the channels d' d' with the passages h. 
and h'. It will be noticed that the channel 
e is greater in area of horizontal cross-sec 
tion than the channel e', and that the chan 
nois d' and d increase in cross-section from 
the bottom up. 
l' is an induction-pipe passing through the 
inlet-pipe c' and communicating with the 
chamber i in the cone I, and l is a similar 
induction-pipe entering the chamber i in cone 
from below. 
The mixed slime and water entering the in 
let c', passes through the conical channel d' 
and rises in the channel e'. From thence it 
passes into the downtake c and rises in the 
channels dande, and finally passing into the 
overflow f. The heavier or larger particles of 
ore are deposited from the channelle' into the 
pocket g', paSS through the passage h to the 
sediment-chamber , and are conducted away 
by the discharge-pipe l'. The next class falls 
into the pocketgand passes through the pas 
sage h' to the sediment - chamber , from 
which it is conducted by the pipe l'. The 
lightest particles pass over the upper edge of 
the vessel D and fall into the overflow f. In 
Working the apparatus in this manner smaller 
or lighter particles of ore are always depos 
ited With the larger and heavier particles, and 
in order therefore to keep the several classes 
distinct I make use of a current of water in 
75 
95 
OC 
2 
446,149 
O 
25 
troduced into the apparatus to flow in a di 
rection contrary to the settling of the ore. 
The water introduced at the pipes l and l 
enters the respective chambers i' and i and 
flows through the passages h h in a direc 
tion opposite to the descending particles of 
ore and carries the lighter particles of ore 
into the channels d' and d, and consequently 
back to the upward currents in the channels 
e' and e. 
The passages h. h. and h' hare of the same 
cross-section at their juncture; but at their 
outlets and inlets the said passages maybe of 
any suitable cross-section. 
The relation may 
either be such that the clear water enters the 
passages h and h' with less speed than it es 
capes from the passages hand h, or vice 
versa. The said passages h and h' may ex 
tend over the entire circumference, or, pref 
erably, they may be contracted, as shown in 
Fig. 3, by means of Solid portions, such as m, 
thus transforming them into a series of small 
isolated channels h, whereby the quantity of 
clear water necessary is considerably dimin 
ished. 
The apparatus shown in the drawings is in 
tended for separating the slime into two 
classes. However, it is evident that by increas 
ing the number of parts the slime can be sep 
arated into a greater number. 
By the peculiar construction and arrange 
ment of the parts I am enabled to combine 
in a single apparatus occupying a small space 
all the compartments formerly used and oc 
cupying a very large space, and, furthermore, 
the mixed water and slimeis distributed quite 
uniformly in all parts of the apparatus, since 
the spaces increase from the center toward 
the exterior, and the purification by the clear 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
4o water also takes place uniformly. 
: by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a slime-classifier, a series (two or more) 
of concentric vessels provided with conical 
ends and forming annular channels for the 
passage of the mixed ore and water, a central 
inlet-pipe, and a series of conical partitions 
forming the sediment pockets, chambers, and 
passages for the discharge of the class or 
classes, substantially as described. 
2. In a slime-classifier, a series of concen 
tric vessels provided with conical ends and 
forming channels for the passage of the mixed 
ore and water, a central inlet-pipe, a series of 
interpolated conical partitions forming the 
sediment-pockets, sediment- chambers, and 
passages for the mixed ore and water, and in 
duction-pipes for the introduction of clearwa 
ter, substantially as described. 
3. In a slime-classifier, a series of concen 
tric vessels provided with conical ends and 
forming channels for the passage of the mixed 
ore and water, a central inlet-pipe, a Series of 
comical partitions forming the sediment-pock 
ets, sediment-chambers, and passages for the 
mixed ore and water, induction-pipes for the 
introduction of clear water, and an overflow, 
substantially as described. 
4. In an apparatus of the character speci 
fied, a series of concentric vessels having 
conical ends and forming a channel for the 
passage of the mixed ore and water, an inlet 
pipe for introducing the water to the central 
part of the apparatus, and a partition, as E, 
and cone I'', forming with the vessels the 
channel d' and passage h, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
CAR AUGUST EMI MEINICKE. 
Witnesses: 
FREDRICH CARL GLASER, 
G. HULSMANN. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446249.txt	(N0 Mode1) 
N0, 446,249, 
 
J,W,0RAIG, 
CHAIR, 
Patented Feb,10,1891, 
 
? C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE? 
JUTIA W.CRAIG,OFSAN FRANCISCO,CATIFORNTA, 
SPECTETCATIONformingpart of Letters Patent No.446.249,dated February10,1891? 
ApplicationfledJune13,1890,SedalNo,355362,(Nomodel) 
75 
- 
55 
To a//zohony?noz/co72cern? 
Beit known thatI,JULTAV.CRAIG,of the 
cityandcounty of San Francisco,intheState 
of California,haveinvented certainnewand 
usefulImprovementsinChairs;andIdohere 
by declare the folowing to be a fulland 
exactdeScriptionoftheinvention,Suchaswil 
enableothersskiledinthearttowhichitap 
?ertainsto make and usetheSame? 
Ylyinvention relates more particularlyto 
achilds nursery-chair;andits object isto 
Drovide a Simple mode of construction for 
articles ofthisclass,whichwilallowoftheir 
folding and reduction to a smal package 
Suitablefortraveling persons, 
Tothisendand purpose myinventioncon 
sistsin makingthe chairof Severalfapsor 
panelsoflight1naterial,which arehingedor 
hookedtogetherandmaybereadilydetached 
and Swung out of theirrespective planes,so 
astocausethe chairtocolapseanditscom 
?onent partstofallfatone upontheother, 
Referringtothe accompanying drawings, 
which forn part ofthisspecification,Figure 
1is a perspective view showing the whole 
frame-work of myimproved chair;Fig,2,a 
Dlan of the Same,partly folded,with the 
chair-backandarm-restsremoved;Fig,3,an 
enlarged detail view,in Section andeleva 
tion,0fthe means Iusefor unitingthe vari 
ouspartsofthechair,Fig.4isadetailview, 
inperSpective,Ofone ofthesideframes,show 
ing8 panelin place and the groovein the 
frame for the reception of the panel;and 
?ig.?isa.similaryiewoftheseat-frame?also 
Showingthe ringG,providedwithacushion 
Or pad? 
The Samelettersof reference indicatethe 
Saine parts throughouttheseveralviews. 
A,B,C,D,E,and F represent separate 
frames ofanearlyuniformsize,which,taken 
together,Constitute the frame-work of the 
Chair,Bypreference these framesaremade 
of Stoutwireandquadrangularinshape;but 
they mayalso be made ofwoodorothersuit 
able materialandtheirform alteredas may 
be foundexpedient? 
The quadranglesABC Dare adapted to 
bejoined toone another by means ofhinges 
Orlinks dand hooks b,and when set np?in 
the p0sition illustratedin Fig.1theyform 
thelowerportion of the chair,their vertical 
CrOSS-barS? 
sidesstandingforthelegs andtheirtopsand 
bottomstaking the place of the Ordinary 
The hingesdand hooksbarelo9sely?tted 
ingroovesordepressionsinthe sides_of the 
respectiveframes or between bOSSesformed 
thereon,asshown in Fig.3,Soasto prevent 
theirdisplacementand at the Sametimeal 
lowthe quadranglesthe necessaryplay_The 
shape ofthese hinges and hooks might be 
alteredifthechairwere madeof wood;but 
theywouldperformthesamefunctions,, 
Asitisdesirabletoshutinthe underside 
of nursery-chairs,this may be Convenie?tly 
done bytheuse ofpanels of pasteb0ardI0? 
other ightmateriaImortisedinthesides of 
the diversQuadrangles,care beingtakento 
provideeyeletsoropeningsfortheinsertion 
of the hinges and hooks?These panelsare 
clearlyshownin Figs.4 and5,the mQrtisein 
Fig.4 beingindicated bytheletterdandin 
Fig.5bythe1ettere,Asimplepiece ofcan 
vas,carpeting,or cloth stretched aCrOS8the 
framesandwrappedaroundandfastenedt0 
theirsideswouldanswerthe Same puTpOSe? 
Eistheseat-frame,whichis placed up0n 
orbetween the/tops of theframesABCD 
and fastenedtothe front quadrangle Band 
to the chair-back F,described below?ItiS 
providedwithacentralringG,C0rresponding 
tothecentral aperture commonto chairsof 
this description,and this ringis held up by 
shortarmsorrodsc,projectinginwardyfr0m 
the sides of the seat-frame,EalSO iSSup 
posedtobecovered,withtheexception9fthe 
Centralaperture,soasto provide a Suitable 
seat,andsuch coveringmaybesimila?tothe 
panels or screens usedforthe lowerframes 
and Set substantialyin the Same manner, 
TheringG may be padded orlinedwithany 
soft material,Said padding beingindicated 
bytheletterJ, 
The frame Fis a quadrangle havingthe 
generalform of the others,exceptthatitis 
nade oftwo parts linked togetherat ffor 
convenienceinfolding,ItisconnectedtoD 
and E by hingesd,and wheninthe position 
shown in Fig.1 servesasthe Chair-back,It 
is held up byarm-rests HH,providedatone 
endwith hooksengagingitssidesandlinked 
atthe othertothe8eat-frame E,TheSearm 
restsare made,preferably,of stout wire bent 
- 
TC) 
25 
35 
45 
? 
totherequiredshapeand,althoughnotshown, 
1nay becovered orpaddedin asimilar1nan 
nertoringG,The frane F may be fitted 
with panels or coveredinthe Same manner 
and with the Same materialastheotherparts 
of the chair.? 
Ineed not de8Cribethe modein which1ny 
improved Chairisset upforuse,asthis may 
bereadiyunderstood byaglance at Fig,1, 
andshalthereforesimplyindicate howitis 
folded?Thehooksbarefirstdisengagedand 
the arm-rests detachedfrom the chair-back 
andlaidacrosstheseat,ThesideAisnext 
Dushedinagainst thefront quadrangleBand 
the Side Coutagainst the rear frame D,as 
representedin Fig,2,TheframesA and B 
arethen Swung u)intotheseat E over the 
arm-rests,and the quadrangles C and D 
down undertheseat-frame?Jastly,theback 
Fis bent at fand brought down overthe 
whole?Thus folded,the chair may be put 
intO aValise or done up in apackage and 
easilytransportedfromonelocalitytoanother? 
Ianawarethatflaps made of oneormore 
pieCes1may beusedinsteadof the framesand 
panelsorcoveringsabove described,andthat 
otherchangesmaybeefectedinthepartsnow 
usedwithout departingfrom theprinciple of 
myimprovements;and I do not wish,there 
fore,to Confine myself to the precise details 
Of Construction andthe exaetforms herein 
before Set forth? 
Having described my invention,what I 
Claim as new,and desiretO SeCureprotection 
in by LettersPatent oftheUnitedStates,is? 
1.Anurseryfolding chaircomposed offou? 
pivotaly-connectedfapsorframesconstitut 
 
ingits lower portion,asimiar horizontal 
frameformingthe Seat,Said frane pivotaly 
Connected with the lower franes,acentral 
ring,and arms Connecting the Central ring 
with the sidepieces ofthe Seat-frame,sub 
stantialyassetforth, 
2,AnurSeryfoldingchaircomposed offour 
openframes or faps constituting its lower 
portion,doublelinksfittingingroovesformed 
intwo of the adjacent verticalside pieces of 
thelowerframes,80_asto forn pivotaleon 
nections,and double hooks engaging the 
groovesin the other adjacent vertical side 
pieces of the lowerframes,a horizontalseat 
frame,and double linksfor Connecting the 
Samewith the lower frames,Substantialyas 
Set forth? 
3,Anursery foldingchair havingitslower 
portion,Seat,and backcompoSed of a Series 
Of Open pivotaly-Connected frameS,Said 
frames havingtheirsidepiecesprovidedwith 
mortises,in Combination with panels fitting 
in Said mortises,Substantially as Setforth 
4,A nurSery folding Chair comprising a 
lower portion Composed Of Separate flaps or 
frames hinged and hooked together,a Cen 
trally-aperturedSeat hingedtothe top there 
of,achair-back hinged tosaidlower portion 
and Seat,andarm-restsadapted to hold Said 
backin position,SubStantiallyaSSetforth? 
Intestinony whereof I have hereuntoset 
my handand Seal. 
JULTA W.CRAIG,[L.8] 
Witnesses: 
R.R.STRAIN, 
THO8.S.HARLOE? 
45 
55 
65 
446249 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446349.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 446,349, 
S. E. HYNDMAN. 
BOTTLE CASE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 10, 1891. 
   
  
 
 
EEEEEEEES 
III IIHF 
Hill 
| || 
| 
| | | | | 
 
III III H Sinfining H 
 
 
 
Y2YZLiNEsses 
NyZEN LOEe 
-64. %u/ 
2% 
%iorney 
The Norrus perers co., Photo-LTHo., WASHINGTON, B.C. 
(No Model.) 
S. E. HYNDMAN, 
BOTTLE CASE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 446,349. 
Patented Feb. 10, 1891. 
(Z% 
E N 
. 
: 
 
 
 
3. 
E3 
2752? 
State Oru ula O 
a. 
ast N& w C. 
23333333.5%2N 
- Carl-SSSessesses Sassessee 
SeSigsayssea easas e 
y; 
 
N 
 
- 
Aig II. 
WZLINEsses 
TNNZEN LOEe 
4itorne' 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL E. HYNDMAN, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
BOTTLE - CAS E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 446,849, dated February 10, 1891. 
Application filed September 8, 1890, Serial No. 364,375, (No model.) 
O 
5 
25 
35 
To all, Luhon, it half conce77. 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL E. HYNDMAN, 
of Cincinnati, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Packing-Boxes for Bot 
tles, &c., which improvement is fully set forth 
in the following specification and accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure I is a top view of my improved de 
vice for packing bottles and other fragile ves 
sels; Fig. II, a section of the same, showing 
the plan of construction; and Fig. III, a sec 
tional side elevation of a box, showing a se 
ries of bottles packed for transportation. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
appliances for packing glass ware and other 
fragile articles; and its object is to provide a 
simple and inexpensive device, whereby bot 
tles of every description, jars, lamp-chim 
neys, &c., may be easily and safely packed 
for transportation without incurring danger 
of breakage or other damage. 
The invention consists of a rack Or frame 
work of wire, which is made vertically ad 
justable in an ordinary packing-box. The 
transverse wires of the fame form meshes 
or openings which engage and give lateral 
support to the bottles and prevent contact 
one with the other. The meshes are so Con 
structed that they may be readily altered in 
size and shape and adapted to the various 
forms and dimensions of the bottles or other 
articles which they are designed to protect. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
A designates the marginal wire of the frame, 
preferably made of a single piece. 
B are transverse wires having their ends 
bent around the marginal wire, preferably of 
a size considerably smaller than that of which 
the margin is made. These wires are corru 
gated or crimped at regular intervals, and 
are so arranged that they mutually interlock 
at their intersections in the same manner as 
the transverse threads in an ordinary Woven 
fabric. If it be desired to change the size of 
the meshes or openings, they may be readily 
enlarged or diminished by shifting both se 
ries of the transverse wires. The shape of 
the meshes may be modified by shifting either 
one of the series. By this means the frame 
may be adapted to round, square, or flatbot 
tles. 
It will be observed that the transverse 
wires are disposed in pairs. By this arrange 
ment the bottles are kept separate and can 
not come into contact even if the box should 
be carelessly or roughly handled. 
The peculiar advantage of the device and 
its application will be manifest. A suitable 
quantity of sawdust or other packing mate 
rial C is evenly distributed upon the bottom 
of the box D and covered by a sheet of heavy 
paper E. The frame A is adjusted at the 
proper height and fastened to the inner sides 
of the box by the wire staples F, which strad 
dle the marginal wire, and so not only sus 
tain the shelf but prevent any upward move 
ment of it. The bottles are placed in their 
respective openings or meshes, and the top 
of the box being fastened the operation is 
complete. In addition to other advantages 
it is obvious that the device will effect a ma 
terial Saving in time, labor, and material. 
What I claim as new is 
I. A rack for packing-boxes, composed of 
a single marginal wire of large size and pro 
vided with corrugated transverse wires of 
smaller size arranged in pairs mutually in 
terlocking at their intersections and forming 
adjustable openings or meshes adapted to 
engage the bottles, and prevent their contact 
with each other, substantially as specified. 
2. In a packing-box, as described, the hori 
Zontally-disposed wire rack A, its marginal 
wire made of a single piece of large size and 
provided with meshing-wires B of smaller 
size, combined with the staples F, which strad 
dle the marginal wire and hold the rack in a 
horizontal position. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing. I 
have hereunto set my hand, this 6th day of 
September, 1890, in the presence of two wit. 
heSSeS. 
SAMUEL E. EIYNDMAN. 
Witnesses; 
R. S. MILLAR, 
L. M. ADAMS, 
55 
75 
go 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446451.txt	T. HIATT. 
MACHINE FOR WRAPPING ORANGES. 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 17 l89l. 
(No Model.) 
No. 446,45l. 
 
"/6 
(No Model.) 
No, 446,451. 
T. HIATT, 
MACHINE FOR WRAPPING ORANGES. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
e 
Z267. a. 
if.- 
92. 
te 
| 
Patented Feb. 17, 1891. 
- 26. 
a-2 
a 
ls. 
a 
-2. 
2 
se, 
23. 
37 
z 2. 
e 
3. 
: 
e 
de 
1, 
-79 
: 
a 6 
lecte se 
c.c. cer 
69. 6-( 
-. 
| 6a 
es/ -%2. 
327 
3. 
-z. 
2. 2 2 
3. 
2 
Ipilepir 
7 Zozas Zzzzzz 
8 
 
 
(No Modei.) 
No. 446,451, 
 
T. HIATT. 
MACHINE FOR WRAPPING ORANGEs, 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
Patented Feb. 17, 1891, 
 
 
2s 
eme 
e2. 
S2 
 
Net 77 732 
2 2 2. 
it 
is SS 
 
  
  
 
 
Hi?posses 
C7(6-4- 
Jy lus Affarpeys, 
Ipiopiar 
TZ Zorras Zzade 
A-TY 
The NORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHo, washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
T. HIATT. 
MACHINE FOR, WRAPPING ORANGES, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 446,451, 
Patented Feb. 17, 1891. 
 
 
jy futs Affarpeys, 
 
UNITED STATES PARENT OFFICE, 
TFI OMAS III A TT, OF LE ESBURG, FLORIDA. 
WAC - N E FOR WRAPPNG ORANGES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 446,451, dated February 17, 1891. 
Application filed June 15, 1889, Serial No,314,865, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS IIIATT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Leesburg, 
in the county of Take and State of Florida, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Machines for Wrapping Oranges, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to machines for 
Wrapping oranges of that class which is shown 
in an application for Letters Patent filed 
by myself on the Sth day of March, 1889, Se 
rial No. 302,430, and patented June 10, 1890, 
No. 429,729; and it has for its object to pro 
vide the said machine with an attachment 
for feeding the Wrapping-paper from an end 
less roll placed in a suitable hopper or recep 
tacle. 
The invention furthermore consists in mech 
anism for cutting or severing the sheets of 
paper of the proper size and for feeding or 
dropping the oranges one by one into the 
wrapping mechanism, the entire mechanism 
to be operated simultaneously by means of a 
single reciprocating slide, all substantially in 
the manner which will be hereinafter fully 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view showing my invention ap 
plied to an orange-wrapping machine in posi 
tion for operation. Fig. 2 is a top yiew of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a side elevation showing the 
operating-slide at the beginning of its stroke 
and the presser-bar lowered to hold the Wrap 
ping-paper in position for being cut. Fig. 4 
is a side elevation showing the operating-slide 
at the end of the stroke and the presser-bar 
in a raised position. Fig. 5 is a vertical trans 
verse sectional view taken on the line a' ac in 
Fig. 2. 
Fig. G is a detail view illustrating 
the arrangement and operation of the aper 
tured slide which is attached to the Wrapping 
mechanism. Fig. 7 is a detail view of the 
reciprocating knife or cutter. Fig. 8 is a de 
tail view of the roller by means of Which the 
paper-feeding mechanism is actuated. Fig. 
9 is a perspective detail view of the paper 
feeding mechanism. Fig. 10 is a sectional 
detail view taken on the line 2, 2 in Fig. 2. 
The same numbers refer to the Same parts 
in all the figures. 
The wrapping mechanism which is used in 
connection with my present invention may be 
that which has been described and shown in 
my Letters Patent, to which reference is made 
above, or any other suitable mechanism may 
be substituted. Said mechanism, however, 
forms no part of the present invention, and 
will therefore not be described in the present 
application. 
In the drawings, 1 designates the box or 
casing containing said Wrapping mechanism, 
of which only such parts have been shown as 
necessarily co-operate with my present inven 
tion. 
2 designates a longitudinal frame-bar suit 
ably attached to one side of the said box or 
casing and having a longitudinal groove 3 in 
its inner side to accommodate a longitudi 
nally-sliding bar 4, which is provided at one 
end with a handle 5, by means of which it may 
be conveniently operated. The opposite or 
rear end of the slide 4 is provided with a 
block 6, having an upwardly-extending arm 
7. The latter is connected with the handle 
5 by means of a cord or rope S, which in prac 
tice is Wrapped around and serves to operate 
the Wrapping mechanism, as shown in my 
previous application. 
The frame-bar or guide-bar 2 is provided 
on its outer side with bearings 9, in which is 
journaled a shaft or roller 10, provided with 
a spirally-coiled 1'ib 11, extending over the 
entire length of said shaft and forming one 
complete coil upon the same. At the front 
end of the shaft and close to the beginning 
or front end of the lib 11 is a short longitudi 
nal rib 12, and another short spiral rib 13 is 
secured upon the shaft or roller, extending 
across or beyond the rear end of the spirally 
coiled rib 11. The slide4, which moves in the 
longitudinal groove 3 in the frontside of the 
guide-bar 2, is provided with a spur 14, ex 
tending through a slot 15 in the said guide 
bar, which registers with the shaft 10. The 
said spur is adapted to engage the ribs formed 
upon the shaft 10, So as to rotate the latter in 
the following manner: At the beginning of 
the stroke the spur 14 is ranged between the 
front ends of the ribs 11 and 12. When the 
slide carrying the Spur moves in a rearward 
direction, the spur does not engage the spi 
ral rib 11 and the shaft remains stationary. 
When the spur 14 reaches the rear end of its 
95 
Od 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
446,451 
O 
25 
45 
SO 
55 
stroke, it engages the diagonal rib 13 and 
turns the shaft 10 slightly backward until 
the rear end of the rib 11 reaches a point at 
which it shall be engaged by the spur 14 on 
the forward stroke of the latter. When the 
slide carrying the spur 14 moves forwardly, 
the spur 14 engages the spirally-coiled rib II. 
and causes the shaft l0 to make one complete 
revolution. When the spur 14 approaches 
the forward limit of its movement, it enters 
between the ribs 11 and 12, and the shaft 10 
is thus retained in proper position when the 
spur begins its rearward movement in re 
peating the operation. It will thus be seen 
that on the rearward stroke of the slide the 
shaft 10 remains stationary, while by the for 
ward movement of said slide the shaft is 
caused to make one complete revolution. It 
will furthermore be seen that by this method 
of operating the shaft the latter will not be 
disturbed by any accidental movement of the 
slide. This I consider a valuable feature of 
my invention, inasmuch as the feed mechan 
ism for the wrapping-paper, which is actuated 
by said shaft, would otherwise beliable to be 
come entangled and out of order. 
Suitably secured to the side of the guide 
bar 2 above the shaft 10 is a box or hopper 
16, in the lower outer end of which is jour 
naled a shaft 17, having at one end a cone 
pulley 18, connected by a band 19 with a 
cone-pulley 20, mounted on one end of the 
shaft 10. The shaft 17 is connected by 
an endless web composed of three or more 
bands 21 21 with a shaft 22, journaled near 
the upper inner end of the hopper 16. Suit. 
ably journaled above the shaft or roller 22 is 
a pressure-roller 23. 
24 designates an endless roll of paper, which 
is placed in the box or hopper 10 in such a 
manner. that its free end shall rest upon the 
endless web. It will be seen that the weight 
of said paper roll tends to carry it down to 
ward the lower outer end of the hopper, thus 
keeping the paper strip which extends over 
the web and under the pressure-roller 23 
smooth and taut. It will be seen that when 
the shaft 17 is revolved by means of the band 
from the shaft 10 the paper is fed by means 
of the endless Web in an upward and forward 
direction, the pressure-roller serving to hold 
the paper in contact with the said Web. 
The guide-bar 2 is provided near its rear 
end with ears or lugs 24', between which is 
mounted a pivoted bar 25, which constitutes 
the pressure-bar by means of which the paper 
is held securely in position while it is being 
cut. The under side of the Said presser-bar 
is provided with a longitudinal strip 26, of 
rubber or other suitable material, which serves 
to prevent the paper from slipping out of po 
sition while it is being acted upon by the 
knives or cutters, as will be presently de 
scribed. 
The guide-bar 2 is provided with an up 
wardly-extending bar 27, havinga vertical slot 
2S to receive the front end of the presser-bar 
25, which is guided in the said slot. The up 
per side of the presser-bar is provided with a 
yoke or yokes 29, forming bearings for the 
longitudinally-sliding cutter-bar 30, the under 
side of which is provided with two or more 
downwardly-extending knives or cutters 31 
31, which may be held in position by means 
of transverse screws or bolts 32 or in any 
other convenient manner. The knives or cut 
ters extend downwardly through a longitudi 
nal slot 33 in the presser-bar 25 and strip 26 
upon the under side of the latter, and the ex 
treme lower ends of said knives or cutters are 
adapted to extend into a slot34, which extends 
longitudinally through the guide-bar 2, said 
slot or groove being merely of sufficient depth 
to accommodate the downwardly-projecting 
ends of the knives or cutters. 
My object in using two or more knives or 
cutters, as herein described, is to enable the 
severing of the paper to be accomplished by 
a much shorter Stroke of the cutter-bar than 
would otherwise be required, it being ob 
vious that when two cutters are used the 
length of the stroke need but slightly exceed 
one-half the width of the sheet of paper to be 
severed, while when additional cutters are 
used the length of the stroke of the cutter 
bar may be correspondingly decreased. 
The presser-bar 25 and cutter-bar 30 are 
operated by means of the slide 4 in the fol 
lowing manner: Suitably pivoted to the inner 
side of the guide-bar 2, above the groove 3, 
are the cams 35 and 36, the former of which 
is placed a short distance in rear of the box 1, 
containing the Wrapping mechanism, while 
the latter 36 is placed near the rear end of the 
guide-bar. 
The cam 35 consists of an ap 
proximately circular disk, which is connected 
by means of a link or pivoted rod 37 with the 
pivoted presser-bar 25. The link 37 is so 
located that when the cam 35 is turned upon 
its pivot 3S until the link 37 approaches the 
dead-center, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3 
of the drawings, it shall draw the presser-bar 
25 tightly down upon the upper side of the 
guide-bar 2, While by turning the cam in the 
direction indicated by the arrow in Fig. 3 the 
link 37 shall raise or lift the cutter-bar to the 
position shown in Fig. 4 of the drawings. 
The cam 35 is connected by a pivoted link or 
rod 39 with the cam 30. The latter is pro 
vided with a downwardly-extending arm 40, 
adapted to be engaged by the block 6 at the 
rear end of the Slide 4 when the latter moves 
in a rearward direction. The cam 35 is also 
provided with a downwardly-extending lug or 
projection 41, which is likewise engaged by 
the block 6 on the rearward stroke of the 
latter. The cam 35 is furthermore provided 
with a notch 42, adapted to be engaged by a 
pawl 43, which is pivoted to the side of the 
guide-bar 2 and actuated by means of a spring 
44, which keeps it in contact with the edge 
of the cam 35. A pin 43' is arranged to limit 
the movement of the pawl 43. The lower end 
of the pawl 43 is provided with a laterally 
75 
95 
CO 
IO 
II5 
446,451 
3 
75 
9o 
OO 
O 
I I5 
IO 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
extending arm 45, which is adapted to be 
engaged by the block 6, attached to the slide 
4, on the forward stroke of the latter. 
The upwardly-extending arm 7 of the block 
6 is provided near its upper end with a later 
ally-extending bracket 46, which, when the 
slide 4 is moved in a forward direction, is 
adapted to engage an arm 47, that extends 
laterally from the cutter-bar 30. The extreme 
upper end of the arm 7 may be beveled, as 
shown at 48; but this is not essential. Se 
cured upon the upper side of the presser-bar 
25, at the rear end of the latter, is a wedge 
shaped stop 49, which, when the cutter-bar 
approaches the rearward limit of its stroke, 
raises or lifts the rear end of said cutter-bar, 
so as to disengage the arm 47 from the bracket 
46, extending from the arm 7, which is then 
allowed to complete its rearward movement 
without further actuating the cutter-bar. 
When the slide 4 moves in a forward direc 
tion, the arm 7 engages a laterally-extending 
arm 50 of the cutter-bar, carrying the latter 
in a forward direction to the limit of its stroke. 
The initial position of the operating-slide, 
the calms, and the presser and cutter bars has 
been shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings. It will 
be seen that when the slide is moved in a rear 
ward direction the block 6 first engages the 
downwardly-extending lug 41 of the cam 35, 
thus turning the latter upon its pivot until 
the link 37 nearly reaches the dead-center, 
thereby drawing the presser-bar down tightly 
upon the guide-bar 2 and serving to hold the 
paper, which passes between said presser-bar 
and guide-bar, securely in position. A lug or 
stud 51, extending laterally from the guide 
bar 2, serves as a stop for the lug 41 and pre 
vents the cam from being turned beyond the 
dead-center. At the same time the link 39, 
connecting the cam 35 with the cam 36, turns 
the latter upon its pivot until its arm 40 ex 
tends directly across the groove 3 in the path 
of the slide 4, so as to be engaged with abso 
lute certainty by the block 6, attached to the 
said slide. As the slide 4 progresses rear 
wardly, the bracket 46 of the arm 7 operates 
the cutter-bar, which is thus caused to sever 
a sheet of paper from the endless roll. When 
the slide approaches the limit of its rearward 
stroke, the cutter - bar engages the Wedge 
shaped stop 49, and the arm 47 is thus thrown 
out of engagement with the bracket 46, there 
by terminating the movement of the cutter 
bar. At the same time the block 6 engages 
the arm 40 of the cam 36, thus turning the 
latter upon its pivot and causing motion to 
be communicated through the medium of the 
link 39 to the cam 35. The latter, being thus 
oscillated, serves through the medium of the 
link 37 to raise or elevate the presser-bar to the 
position shown in Fig. 4, the motion continu 
ing until the spring-actuated pawl 43 engages 
the notch 42 in the edge of Said cam 35, there 
by retaining the presser-bar securely in a 
raised position. 
The slide 4, having reached 
the rearward limit of its stroke, now com 
mences the forward movement. The arm 7 
first engages the laterally-extending arm 50 of 
the cutter-bar, thus carrying the latter in a 
forward direction toward its initial position. 
The presser - bar meanwhile remains in a 
raised position, thus enabling the paper to be 
fed between itself and the guide-bar 2 by the 
mechanism which has already been described 
and which is actuated by the slide 4 on its 
forward stroke. When the slide 4 reaches the 
forward limit of its stroke, the block 6 en 
gages the arm 45 of the spring-pawl 43, which 
latter is thus disengaged from the notch 42 in 
the cam 35. The presser-bar 25 and cutter 
bar 30 will then drop by their own weight un 
til the Said presser-bar rests upon the guide 
bar, as shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings. The 
operating-slide is now again in a position to be 
gin its rearward movement, by which the op 
eration is repeated. 
The guide-bar 2 is provided at its rear end 
with a laterally-extending bracket 52, having 
an upwardly-extending arm 53, which sup 
ports the rear end of a trough or hopper 54, 
the front end of which is supported by means 
of a bracket 55, extending upwardly from the 
rear side of the box 1. 
50 designates a horizontal bar connecting 
the arms or brackets 53 and 55 and provided 
at its front end with a longitudinally-sliding 
yoke 57, the arms of which fit against the 
sides of the said horizontal bar 56 and are 
connected to the latter by means of suitable 
straps or cross-pieces 58, which admit of a 
longitudinally-sliding movement of the said 
U-shaped yoke. The front or outer end of 
the latter registers with the lower or dis 
charge end of the bopper 54 and serves to re 
ceive the oranges as they are fed from the 
said hopper one by one. The bracket 52 has 
a forwardly-extending arm 59, to the inner 
side of which is pivoted a rock bar or lever 
60, the upper end of which is connected by 
means of a link or connecting-rod 61 with the 
under side of one of the straps 58 of the lon 
gitudinally-sliding yoke 57. The rod or pin 
62, by means of which the link 61 is pivoted 
to the link 60, projects on One side so as to 
form a lug or stud, against which bears a 
spring 63, which is suitably secured to the 
undel' side of the horizontal bar 56. Said 
spring serves to normally hold or force the 
yoke 57 in a rearward direction. The lower 
end of the lever 60 is provided with a notch 
64, adapted to be engaged by a pin or stud 
65, extending laterally from the block 6 at the 
rear end of the longitudinally-moving slide 
4. It will be seen that when the latter com 
pletes its rearward stroke the stud 65 engages 
the lower end of the lever 60, throwing the 
upper end of the latter, and with it the yoke 
57, in a forward direction. When the slide is 
moved forwardly, the position of the lever 60 
is reversed and the spring 63 then acts to re 
store the yoke 57 to its normal position. 
66 designates a bail, which may be con 
structed of wire or other suitable material, 
55 
 
446,451 
and which is connected pivotally to the dis- reaches the limit of its rearward movement, 
the presser-bar and cutter-bar are thrown out 
charge end of the hopper 54, and which serves 
of operation in the manner described. At 
when in a lowered position to retain the con 
the same time the yoke 57 is moved forwardly, 
tents of said hopper. The longitudinally-slid 
thus causing the Orange to drop down upon 
ing yoke 57 is provided with upwardly-ex 
the severed sheet of paper, which rests upon 
tending lugs or studs 67, adapted to engage 
the slide 70 directly above the openings 71. 
the under sides of the arms of the pivoted 
and 68. The Weight of the orange carries the 
bail 66. It will thus be seen that when the 
paper down through the said openings and 
yoke 57 is moved in a rearward direction the 
causes it to be enveloped by the said paper in 
bail 66 is raised, thus permitting an orange 
such a manner that it may be acted upon by 
to drop down into the space between the 
the wrapping mechanism. The slide 4 now 
front end of the yoke 57 and the front end of 
starts in a forward direction, carrying the 
the horizontal bar 56, which latter extends 
cutter-bar back to its initial position, operat 
slightly in front of the discharge end of the 
ing the paper-feeding mechanism, moving the 
hopper. When the yoke 57 is moved for 
support of the yoke 57 in a rearward direc 
wardly, the orange which it supports is per 
tion, and raising the bail 66, so that another 
mitted to drop between the said yoke and the 
Orange may drop down into position upon the 
front end of the bar 56, and at the same time 
said yoke, and at the same time the slide 70 
the bail 66 is lowered by its own weight, so as 
is moved in an outward direction, thus caus 
to retain the contents of the hopper 54 in the 
ing any edges of the paper which may pro 
latter until the yoke 57 has been again moved 
ject through the openings (38 and 71 to be 
in a rearward direction. 
smoothed down through the said openings, so 
The box I, which contains the Wrapping 
as not to interfere with the sheet of paper 
mechanism, is provided in its upper side with 
which is at the same time being fed forward 
an opening GS, through which the orange fed 
by the feed mechanism. 
from the hopper 54 in the manner described 
It will be observed from the foregoing that 
may drop down and be acted upon by the 
my improved machineserves to automatically 
wrapping mechanism. The upper side of the 
feed and cut the Wrapping-paper and to feed 
said box is provided with transverse cleats 69 
the oranges one by one and drop them in tha 
69, between which is arranged a transversely 
desired position upon the Wrapping-paper, 
movable slide 70, having a central opening or 
which is carried by the weight of the oranges 
aperture 71. Mounted vertically in the box 
into the wrapping-machine, which automati 
or casing 1 is a rock-shaft 72, the upper end 
cally completes the operation of wrapping the 
of which is connected with the slide 70 by 
means of an arm 73, having an upwardly-ex 
Oranges. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what I 
tending pin or lug 74, that works in a slot 75 
claim, and desire to secure by letters Patent, 
in the under side of the said slide. The lower 
end of the shaft 72 is provided with an out 
S 
wardly-extending arm 76, having a slot or loop 
1. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination of a guide-bar, a longitudinally 
77, which is engaged by a pin 7S, projecting 
movable slide having a laterally-projecting 
upwardly from a pawl 79, which is mounted 
stud extending through a slot in the said 
pivotally in the casing 1, and which may be 
guide-bar, a shaft journaled upon the outer 
made to serve to support the orange while the 
side of the said guide-bar and provided with 
latter is being acted upon by the wrapping 
a spirally - coiled rib extending completely 
mechanism. The pawl 79 is actuated by means 
once around the said shaft and adapted to be 
of the slide 4, which has a notch or recess 80, 
engaged by the said spur, and the paper-feed 
adapted to engage the free end of the said 
ing mechanism comprising, essentially, the 
pawl, which latter is thrown into engagement 
shafts 17 and 22 and bands 21, all arranged 
with the said notch by means of a suitably 
and operating substantially as set forth. 
arranged spring S1, which normally holds the 
2. In a machine of the class described, the 
free end of the said pawl in contact with the 
combination of a guide-bar, a longitudinally 
face of the slide and in readiness to engage 
movable slide having a spur extending 
the notch S0 when the slide is in operation. 
through a slot in the said guide-bar, a lon 
It will be seen that when the slide 4 in op 
gitudinal shaft journaled to the outer side of 
eration moves in a rearward direction the 
said guide-bar and having a spirally-coiled 
portion of the paper roll which extends over 
rib, a straight longitudinal rib at the front 
the box 1 contained in the Wrapping mechan 
end of said spirally-coiled rib, a short diagonal 
ism is severed by the cutting mechanism al 
rib at the rear end of the latter, and the pa 
ready described. At the same time an orange 
per-feeding mechanism comprising, essen 
is held between the yoke and the front end 
tially, the shafts 17 and 22 and bands 21, all 
of the horizontal bar 56 in readiness to be 
arranged and operating substantially as set 
dropped. By the rearward movement of the 
forth. 
slide the pawl 79 is actuated and operates the 
3. The combination of a guide-bar, a longi 
rock-shaft 72 in such a manner as to move 
tudinally-movable slide having a spur ex 
the slide 70 toward the presser-bar until its 
tending through a slot in the said guide-bar, 
aperture 71 registers with the opening (38 in 
a longitudinal shaft journaled to the side of 
the top of the wrapper-box. When the slide 
O 
I 5. 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
65 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOC) 
I IO 
I 25 
446,45. 
C 
2) 
25 
45 
55 
the latter and having a spirally-coiled rib ex 
tending through its entire length, a short 
straight longitudinal rib at the front end of 
Said spirally-coiled rib and a short diagonal 
rib at the rear end of the latter, a box or hop 
per secured to the outer side of the guide-bar, 
shafts journaled in the latter, three or more 
endless bands connecting the said shafts, an 
Operating-band connecting cone - pulleys 
mounted upon one of said shafts and upon 
the end of the ribbed shaft, and a pressure 
roller, all arranged and operating substan 
tially in the manner and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
4. In a machine for Wrapping oranges, the 
herein-described paper-feeding mechanism, 
comprising a box or hopper, shafts suitably 
journaled in the same, an inclined endless 
Web composed of bands connecting the said 
shafts and adapted to support a roll of paper 
suitably mounted to bear against the said web 
at the upper end of the latter, and suitable 
operating mechanism, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. The combination, with a machine for 
Wrapping Oranges, of a paper-feeding device 
comprising a series of inclined endless bands 
adapted to support a paper roll, mechanism 
for intermittingly operating the said endless 
bands, and a pressure-roller arranged to bear 
against the said endless bands at the upper 
end of the same, substantilaly as and for the 
purpose herein set forth. 
6. The combination of the guide-bar, the 
iongitudinally - movable slide, a presser-bar 
connected pivotally to the said guide - bar, 
the cutter-bar arranged to slidelongitudinally 
upon the said presser-bar, mechanism for op 
erating the presser-bar and cutter-bar from 
the longitudinally-movable slide, and mech 
anism for feeding a paper roll intermittently 
between the said presser-bar and the guide 
bar, Substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
7. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination, with mechanism for intermit 
tently feeding a roll of paper, of a reciprocat 
ing cutter-bar having a plurality of knives or 
cutters for Severing sheets from the said roll, 
whereby Such sheets may be severed by a 
movement of the cutter - bar of less extent 
than the width of the roll, substantially as set 
forth. 
S. The combination of a longitudinal guide 
bar, a pivoted presser - bar, a reciprocating 
cutter-bar mounted to slide upon the said 
presser-bar and having knives or cutters ex 
tending downwardly through a slot in the lat 
ter, mechanism for operating the said press 
er-bar and cutter - bar, and mechanism for 
feeding a paper strip between the said press 
er-bar and the guide-bar, substantially as 
herein set forth and specified. 
9. The combination of the longitudinal 
guide-bar, the pivoted presser-bar having a 
wedge-shaped stop at its rear end, the longi 
tudinally-reciprocating cutter-bar having a 
laterally-extending arm, and a longitudinal 
reciprocating slide having an upwardly-ex 
tending arm provided with a laterally-extend 
ing bracket to engage the arm of the Cutter 
bar, substantially as set forth. 
10. The combination of the longitudinal 
guide-bar, the presser-bar mounted pivotally 
upon the same, the cutter-bar arranged to 
slide longitudinally upon the said presser-bar 
and having laterally-extending arms, and a 
longitudinally-reciprocating slide having an 
upwardly-extending arm adapted to engage 
the laterally-extending arms of the cutter 
bar, substantially in the manner and for the 
purpose set forth. 
11. In a machine for wrapping oranges, the 
combination of the longitudinal guide-bar, 
the presser-bar mounted pivotally upon the 
same, a disk or calm mounted pivotally upon 
the guide-bar, a link or pivoted rod connect 
ing the said cam with the presser-bar, a lon 
gitudinally-reciprocating slide adapted to en 
gage a lug extending radially from the said 
cam, and mechanism for feeding a paper roll 
between the presser-bar and the guide-bar 
and for cutting or severing the papel', Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
12. The combination of the longitudinal 
guide-bar, the pivoted presser-bar having the 
longitudinally-reciprocating cutter-bar, a can 
or disk pivoted to the side of the guide-bar, 
a pivoted link or rod connecting said calm 
with the presser-bar, a cam pivoted to the 
side of the guide-bar and having a down 
wardly-extending arm, a pivoted link or rod 
connecting the two cams, and the longitudi 
nally - reciprocating slide having a block 
adapted to engage the said cams, substantially 
as herein set forth. 
13. The combination of the guide-bar, the 
presser-bar mounted pivotally upon the same 
and carrying the longitudinally-reciprocating 
cutter-bar, a cam mounted pivotally upon the 
side of the guide-bar and having a radially 
extending lug, a link or pivoted rod connect 
ing the said cam with the presser-bar, a stud 
extending laterally from the guide-bar and 
forming a stop for the radially-extending lug 
or the cam, and the longitudinally-recipro 
cating slide having a block adapted to engage 
the said lug, substantially as herein set forth. 
14. The combination of the longitudinal 
guide-bar, the presser-bar mounted pivotally 
upon the same and having the longitudinally 
reciprocating cutter-bar, the cam pivoted 
upon the side of the guide-bar and connected 
with the presser-bar by the pivoted link, a 
spring-pawl pivoted to the side of the guide 
bar and adapted to engage a notch formed in 
the rim of the said cam and having a down 
wardly-extending arm, and a longitudinally 
reciprocating slide having a block adapted to 
engage the arm of the said pawl and a lug 
extending radially from the said calm, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
15. The combination of the longitudinal 
guide-bar, the pivoted longitudinally-slotted 
- 
8o 
95 
OO 
TC) 
II5 
I 25 
446,451 
presser-bar provided on its under side with a 
rubber strip or cushion, the longitudinally 
reciprocating cutter-bar mounted upon the 
Said presser-bar and having cutters extend 
ing through the slot in the latter and into a 
longitudinal groove in the guide-bar, a verti 
cally-slotted arm forming a guide for the 
Outer end of the presser-bar, and mechanism 
for Operating the latter and the cutter-bar, 
Substantially in the manner and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
16. The combination of the guide-bar, th 
pivoted presser-bar having a wedge-shaped 
stop at its rear end, the longitudinally-recip 
rocating cutter-bar having laterally-extend 
ing arms and provided with knives or cutters 
eXtending through a slot in the presser-bar, 
the arms extending laterally from the cutter 
bar, the longitudinally - reciprocating slide 
provided at its rear end with a block having 
an upwardly - extending arm provided with 
a laterally - extending bracket, a cam piv 
oted to the side of the guide-bar, and hav 
ing a notch and a radially - extending lug, a 
link connecting the said cam with the piv 
oted presser-bar, a spring-pawl arranged to 
engage the notch in the rim of the cam and 
having a downwardly-extending arm adapted 
to be engaged by the reciprocating slide, a 
cam mounted pivotally upon the side of the 
guide-bar and having a downwardly-extend 
ing arm lying in the path of the reciprocating 
slide, and a link connecting the said cams, all 
combined and arranged to operate in con 
junction. With the paper-?eeding mechanism 
and an Orange-wrapping machine substan 
tially in the manner and for the purpose set 
forth. 
17. The combination of the inclined trough 
or hopper, a horizontal bar arranged below 
the same and projecting slightly in front 
thereof, and a U-shaped yoke mounted to re 
ciprocate longitudinally upon the said hori 
Zontal board, Substantially in the manner and 
for the purpose set forth. 
18. The combination of the inclined trough 
or hopper, the bail mounted pivotally at the 
discharge end of the same, the longitudinally 
reciprocating U-shaped yoke having up 
wardly - extending studs adapted to bear 
against the under side of the said bail, and 
mechanism for imparting an intermittent re 
ciprocating motion to the said U-shaped 
25 
35 
45 
yoke, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein set forth. 
19. The combination of the inclined trough 
or hopper, the horizontal bar arranged be 
low the same, the longitudinally-reciprocat 
ing U-shaped yoke having upwardly-extend 
ing lugs or studs, the bail mounted pivotally 
at the discharge end of the hopper, and a 
spring arranged to move the said U-shaped 
yoke normally in a rearward direction to 
ward the discharge end of the hopper, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
20. The combination of the guide-bar, the 
iongitudinally-reciprocating slide having a 
block provided with a laterally - extending 
stud, the inclined trough or hopper having 
the bail mounted pivotally at its discharge 
end, the horizontal bar arranged below the 
said hopper and projecting slightly in front. 
of the latter, the U-shaped yoke arranged to 
slide upon said horizontal board and having 
upwardly-extending studs bearing against 
the under side of the pivoted bail, a lever piv 
oted to a bracket suitably attached to the rear 
end of the guide-bar and having at-its lower 
end a notch adapted to engage the Stud pro 
jecting laterally from the longitudinally-re 
ciprocating slide, a link or rod connecting the 
upper end of said lever with the U-shaped 
yoke, and a spring arranged to force the lat 
ter normally into a rearward direction, sub 
stantially as herein set forth. 
21. The combination of the Wrapper-box, 
the transversely - movable slide, a vertical 
rock-shaft having at its upper end an arm 
provided with an upwardly-extending stud 
working in a groove in the under side of said 
slide, a spring-pawl mounted in the wrapper 
box and having an upWardly-extending stud 
engaging a slotted arm extending from the 
lower end of the rock-shaft, and the longi 
tudinally-reciprocating slide provided with a 
notch adapted to engage the free end of the 
said spring-pawl, Substantially as herein set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
TOMAS IIIATT. 
55 
65 
75 
8 5 
95 
CO 
Witnesses: 
J. T. GREEN, 
J. W. LEES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446551.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 446,551, 
 
F. W. CHAMBERLAIN. 
KNIFE OR SCISSORS SHARPENER, 
Patented Feb. 17, 1891, 
Z 7/4 7 
77.77/2-2.AAAst 
24- 
2732, 
Z/2,7W7 Z77 
3 uomou, W. Sawk law. 
Zzzi e o Msgaaru. 
1775 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS W. CHAMBERLAIN, OF BRIDGEWATER, MASSACHUSETTS. 
KNIFE OR SCIS SORS SHARPENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 446,551, dated February 17, 1891. 
Application filed August 19, 1890, Serial No. 362,372 (No model) 
When in use, the operator grasps the han- 4o 
45 
55 
IO 
25 
To all, whon, it inctly concern: 
. Be it known that I, FRANCIS. W. CHAMBER 
LAIN, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Bridgewater, in the county of Plymouth 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Knife 
or Scissor's Sharpeners, of which the follow 
ing, taken in connection with the accompa 
inying drawings, is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
knife or scissors sharpener that will be sim 
ple, cheap, and efficient. 
The invention consists of a single plate of 
steel having beveled edges secured by a screw 
to a block of wood or other suitable material 
provided with a handle. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a view of a knife or scissors 
sharpener embodying my invention, showing 
it as being used for sharpening a knife. Fig. 
2 is a front view of the knife or scissors sharp 
ener. Fig. 3 is a vertical section taken on line 
acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 shows a sharpener hav 
ing a triangular plate. 
A represents a square block of wood or other 
suitable material formed with a handle A'. 
B is a thin square piece of steel beveled on 
all its sides at or about an angle of forty-five 
degrees, and provided in its center with a hole, 
through which is passed a screw C, that se 
cures it to the block A. 
The plate B is of a width somewhat larger 
than the block A, and is set thereon, as shown 
that is, the forward lower point 1 is on a line 
with the lower edge of the block A, and the 
rear upper point 2 is on a line with the upper 
edge of said block, so that the edges of the 
plate stand at an angle with the edges of the 
block. 
dle of the sharpener in his right hand, with 
the plate B toward him, and holds the knife 
or scissors in his left hand, the block A rest 
ing upon the blade D of the knife and the 
lower edge of the plate B in contact with but 
at a slight angle to the edge cl of the knife. 
He then draws the sharpener from the hilt 3 
to the point 4 of the knife one or more times. 
He then reverses the knife and performs the 
same operation on the other side. When one 
edge of the plate B has lecome dull, then it 
is turned to present another edge, and so on 
until all the edges have become blunt, when 
the plate would have to be removed and re 
sharpened by grinding or otherwise. 
instead of a square plate, as above described, 
a triangular plate B", as shown in Fig. 4, may 
be employed, or a plate of any other desired 
form might be used. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A knife-sharpener consisting of a plate 
of steel having beveled edges and secured by 
a screw to a square block of wood or other 
suitable material provided with a handle, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
2. A knife-sharpener consisting of the block 
A, having a handle A', and the steel plate B, 
secured thereto by screw C, the plate being 
larger and set on an angle to the block, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 16th day 
of July, A. D. 1890. 
FRANCIS. W. CHAMBERLAIN. 
Witnesses: 
HOSEA KAIGMAN, 
C. F. MYER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446651.txt	A. WAHLIN, C. J. LUNDSTROM & T. COLLINS, 
EXTRACTOR, CHURN 
Patented Feb. 17, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 446,651, 
s 
s xxx 
 
 
 
2 
SS 
s 
III 3a 
St 
s 
Ms. Base, E. E. 
2 E. 
ls N. 
 
 
 
 
 
retaris FereRs co., PHoro-Lito. WASHINGT3N, - c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPH WAHLIN AND CARL J. LUNDSTROM, OF STOCKHOLM, SWEDEN, AND 
THOMAS COLLINS, OF WINCHESTER, NEW HAMPSHIRE, ASSIGNORS TO R. 
DUNCAN IIARRIS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
EXTRACTOR CHURN 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 446,651, dated February 17, 1891. 
Application filed January 20, 1890, Serial No, 337,422, (No model.) 
to tion. 
To all whom it inctly concern: 
Be it known that we, ADOLPH WAHLIN and 
CARL JOHAN LUNDSTRM, subjects of the 
lxing of Sweden, and residing in Stockholm, 
5 Sweden, and THOMAS COLLINS, a subject of 
the Queen of Great Britain, residing in Win 
chester, in the State of New Hampshire, have 
invented an Improvement in Extractor 
Churns, of which the following is a specifica 
Centrifugal separators for cream have been 
made use of in which the skim-milk is dis 
charged at a different place from the cream, 
and according to the extent of the centrifu 
15 gal action. So the cream will be more or less 
Concentrated. In some cases the cream has 
been Subjected to an agitating operation re 
Sulting from contact with the cream of ro 
tary or Stationary agitators or trundles, 
2O Our invention as distinguished from pre 
existing devices relates to the combination, 
with a revolving separator, of a butter-accu 
mulator composed of plates or wings, upon 
which the buttery particles are caused to ad 
25 here by the violence of the centrifugal move 
lment and upon which they remain sufficiently 
for the more watery skim-milk to pass away, 
and the butter particles, striking against each 
Other upon the accumulator, adhere together 
3O and produce globules and small masses of 
butter that are easily separated from the 
skim-milk. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion of the apparatus in one form employed 
35 by uS. Fig. 2 is a sectional plan view of the 
Same, and FigS. 3, 4, 5, and (3 are similar views 
in slightly modified form. 
The centrifugal vessel A is upon a revolv 
ing Shaft, and its axis may be either vertical 
4O Ol' horizontal. The vessel A is preferably 
conical, and the milk is supplied by the pipe 
B from any Suitable vessel C, and the centrifu 
galaction produces a separation of the skim 
milk and the cream, the former passing off 
45 by the pipe E and the cream being thrown 
off from the edge F of the separator. 
The revolving Separator may be inclosed in 
any Suitable case, and there is a receiving 
VeSSel for the cream and skim-milk, 
In Fig. I a single receiving-vessel II is 
5O 
The butter-accumulator I is made with nu- 55 
shown, and in Fig. 3 this vessel is represented 
as divided by a partition 2, So that the cream 
passes into the upper vessel and the skim 
milk into the lower Wessel. 
merous surfaces, against which the buttery 
particles are projected with the violence due 
to the centrifugal action, and such buttery 
particles adhere thereto and to each other 
sufficiently to form granules or particles that 6o 
accumulate, and the skim-milk continues to 
move and passes away and the granules or 
buttery particles increase in size and are de 
tached from time to time by the impacts of 
the skim-milk against them and they pass of 65 
with such skim- milk. 
In Figs, 1 and 2 the accumulator is shown 
as a series of diagonal blades or wings 33, 
pendent from a ring 4, that receives its Sup 
port from cross-bars, and a collar 5 around 7c 
the milk-supply pipe, and in Figs. 3 and 4 
the accumulator-surfaces are shown as Wings 
upon separate arbors or shafts 7, supported 
within the receiving vessel II, while in Figs. 
5 and 6 the accumulator-surfaces are shown 75 
aS plates between disks on Separate pivots S, 
supported within the receiving-vessel II. In 
both cases the accumulators are free to re 
volve by the impact of the butter particles 
against the surfaces, and this revolving action 8o 
promotes the efficiency of the apparatus. 
We have represented the Wings or accumu 
lators, FigS. 1 and 2, as diagonal to the Fadii 
in order that the butter particles striking the 
surfaces of the wings may spread outwardly 85 
and adhere sufficiently for the succeeding 
particles to accumulate by adhering to the 
first, and the skim-milk will run off the ac 
cumulator the more rapidly in consequence 
of being Watery. We prefer, also, to have the 9o 
butter particles Strike the surfaces of the ac 
cumulators higher up than the skim-milk, and 
in Fig. 3 there is represented a partition 2 for 
separating the butter particles and cream 
from the skim-milk, and a spout M for the 95 
skim-milk and a spout N for the butter par 
ticles to paSS off. In all cases the skin-milk, 
being the heaviest, is thrown off first, and . 
Striking against the accumulators will set 
them in motion, so that the impact of the Iog 
446,651 
cream particles against the surfaces of the 
accumulators will not be too violent. If the 
pipe E for the skim-milk extends up higher 
than the edge from which the cream is thrown 
off, as shown in Fig. 5, the skim-milk will run 
down upon the accumulator - surfaces and 
moisten the same sufficiently to prevent the 
butter particles adhering too firmly. 
Upon reference to Figs. 1 and 2 it will be 
seen that the accumulators present diagonal 
Surfaces to the skim-milk and cream, and the 
ring from which they are suspended is sup 
ported by the stationary pipe B. Hence the 
ring and the accumulators may either revolve 
or remain stationary and the accumulators 
act in nearly the same manner when station 
ary that they do when revolving. 
It is to be borne in mind that the cream is 
composed of buttery particles and skim-milk 
or buttermilk, and the particles of cream sepa 
rate as they strike forcibly against the ac 
cumulators, because there is a slight adhesion 
betWeen the surfaces of the accumulators 
and the buttery particles, and there is little 
or no adhesion of the skim-milk that there is 
in the cream. With such surfaces. IIence 
there will always be sufficient moisture on the 
surfaces of the accumulators to prevent the 
buttery particles adhering too firmly, and 
when the centrifugal action of the materials 
is availed of to rotate the accumulators the 
speed of rotation will be augmented by the 
O 
25 
30 
joint action of the cream and skim - milk; 
but this does not materially change the action. 
of the accumulators in gathering the buttery 
particles. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The combination, with a centrifugal sepa 
rating-vessel having skim-milk and cream 
deliveries and a surrounding stationary ves 
sel, of butter-accumulators within such vessel 
and adjacent to the cream-delivery, and upon 
the surface of which accumulators the butter 
particles strike as they are thrown off cen 
trifugally and adhere sufficiently for the skim 
lmilk to separate, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a centrifugal sepa 
rating-vessel having cream and skim-milk 
deliveries, of a butter-accumulator adjacent 
to the cream-delivery and composed of a 
range of plates against which the butter par 
ticles are thrown from the separator, and a 
support for such accumulator, around which 
the accumulator revolves by the impact of 
the butter particles and skim-milk, substan 
tially as set forth. 
Signed by us this Sth day of January, 1890. 
ADOLPH WAHLIN. 
C. J. LUNDSTROMI. 
TIOS. COLLINS, 
w 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
WILLIAM G. MOTT. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446751.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 446,751, 
S, JAMES & J. K. SANDER. S. 
SPINDLE DRIVING DEVICE FOR SPINNING MACHINEs. 
Patented Feb. 17, 1891, 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL JAMES AND JEREMIAH. K. SANDERS, OF LEBANON, MISSOURI. 
SPN DE- DRVN G. DEW C E FOR SPN N N G - VACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 446,751, dated February 17, 1891. 
Application filed August 20, 1889, Serial No. 321,340, (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
To all whom it. Tay conce772: 
Be it known that we, SAMUEL JAMEs and 
JEREMIAH. K. SANDERS, of Lebanon, in the 
county of Laclede and State of Missouri, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Spindle-Driving Devices for Spinning-Ma 
chines, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
banding and tension devices for spinning and 
twisting machines. 
The object of our invention is to provide 
a simple and economical construction and ar 
rangement of parts for the banding and ten 
Sion mechanism of a spinning-jack and yarn 
twisting-machine, whereby the series of spin 
dles in a section of the machine will be simul 
taneously rotated in the same direction by a 
single band, the tension of said band being 
automatically regulated in an efficient man 
ner with a new and improved tension mech 
allST. 
A further object is to provide the novel 
tension device hereinafter mentioned with a 
self-feeding oiler, which will enable the ap 
paratus to be run longer without stoppag 
than can otherwise be effected. 
With these objects in view, our invention 
consists in the novel construction and com 
bination of the several parts, as will be here 
inafter fully set forth, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is an end elevation in section of 
the device. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the 
spindles and their supports. Fig. 3 is a top 
plan view of a section of a spinning-jack, 
the spindles being shown in section, and Fig. 
4 is an enlarged detached sectional view of 
one of the important features of our inven 
tion. 
A is the frame of a spinning-jack, of which 
A' and A* are parallel front rails, which sup 
port the series of spindles B B B, which are 
spaced apart and seated in suitable boxes f, 
which receive their lower ends and permit 
the spindles to rotate therein, On the upper 
rail. A supporting-boxes g are fixed to re 
ceive and support revolubly the bodies of the 
spindles. 
At a proper point rearward of the gang of 
spindles a cylindrical band-roller C is sup 
ported by its journal ends e on the frame of 
the jack, which roller extends throughout the 
length of the spinning-machine, and is re 
volved by any suitable means. (Not shown.) 
It is preferred to arrange a convenient num 
ber of the spindles in a section. While the 
number may be varied, it is found advanta 
geous in a jack having an aggregate number 
of spindles equal to two hundred and forty 
to run twenty-four spindles together. The 
end spindles B'B' have the whirls c c' and 
c c, which whirls are each formed with two 
belt-grooves, as shown. 
The intermediate spindles B of a section 
are furnished with whirls c', which are singly 
grooved to receive a belt. 
A belt-tightener or tension device is fur 
nished to regulate the draft of the belt G. 
Said tension-regulator consists of a guide 
Way D, which is made extensible by its sup 
port on a slotted bracket, D', to which it is 
bolted at b, the opposite end of the guide 
way being furnished with a flange D, that 
is bolted or otherwise attached to the jack 
frame A. 
The guideway D is preferably constructed 
as a flat metal bar having a longitudinal slot 
formed in it to receive the sliding block E, 
which is loosely fitted therein in a manner 
to prevent displacement and allow it to re 
ciprocate freely throughout the extent of the 
elongated slot it lies in. 
On the sliding block E a grooved whirl. 1 
is supported to rotate by mounting it loosely 
on a stud-bolt Ci, which is firmly inserted in 
the sliding block and secured in place by a 
nut Ct. (See Fig. 4.) Upon the upper end of 
the stud-bolt Ct an oil-cup C' is formed. It, 
constituting the head of the bolt, retains the 
whirl F from displacement. The oil-chamber 
of the cup a' is formed as shown, and axially 
central with the body of the bolt a' a feed 
hole h, penetrates the bolt a short distance 
and then intersects a transverse hole i, which 
is in proper position to convey oil to lubricate 
O 
25 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
446,751. 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
( 
the whirl F. Wool or cotton in small quam- given that the endless belt, G will transmit 
so 
rotary motion from the cylinder C to all of 
tity is inserted in the feed-channels in ell 
the spindles B B' 3 of a section, which may 
tioned, which restrains the flow of oil and 
be any convenient number of Spindles. 
graduates its delivery to continually supply 
In arranging the belt G it is so proportioned 
the lubricant as it is needed. 
in length relatively that the sliding block E 
The bracket D, which supports the front 
will be drawn up near the top of the guide 
end of the guideway D, has its slotted pro 
way D, so that the full contractile force of 
jecting portion inclined from a horizontal 
the spring I will be available to take up 
plane downwardly, thus affording a proper 
slack which may occur in the belt from use. 
support for the guideway, which is down 
A number of manifest advantages result 
wardly inclined from front to rear end, as 
from the novel construction and arrangement 
shown in Fig. 1. 
of parts herein described. 
The more eSSen 
A coiled spring I is attached to the front 
tial are that the number of belts used to 
portion of the jack-frame, or to the bracket 
transmit motion to the spindles is reduced; 
D*, as shown, by one of its ends, said spring 
the tension device is automatically and eco 
extending rearwardly below the guideway D 
nomically oiled; the tension arrangement Will 
in line with it. 
be effective for a long time, avoiding the fre 
The rear end of the spring I is connected 
quent cutting of the belt to take up slack, 
to a cord or other flexible strand J, which is 
and further, the motion of the spindles in a 
passed around the grooved pulley J', that is 
section being transmitted thereto by a single 
pivoted on the lower end of the guideway-bar 
belt is more regular than in ordinary spin 
in its slot, and said cord being returned above 
ning-jacks using a number of independent 
the guideway is attached by its other end to 
belts for the purpose. The tension-guideway 
the sliding block E at d. 
The connection of 
D being extensible, its length may be ad 
the spring. I to the sliding block E by the 
justed to suit jack-frames of different dimen 
cord J, as 'stated, will draw the block toward 
sions considered from front to rear of Same, 
the lower end of the guideway. 
which is of advantage where frames of varied 
An endless belt G is provided to drive all 
width are fitted up to use our improved ten 
the spindles of a section at one time in the 
sion and banding device. 
same direction. To effect this operation the 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
belt is given a half-turn over the grooved 
we claim as new and desire to secure by Tiet 
whirl F, which is mounted on the sliding 
block E, as shown in Fig. 3. 
It is then ex 
ters Patent- 
1. In a spinning-machine, the combination, 
tended diagonally toward the end spindle B', 
with a frame, a cylindrical roller, a series of 
and around the lower whirl c' of said spindle, 
spindles comprising a section, and loosely 
thence rearwardly over the cylindrical roller 
secured on the frame, a whirl having two 
C and returned, as at 2, to the upper whirl c 
grooves mounted on each end spindle of the 
of the spindle IB'. From the whirl c' the belt 
section, and a single-grooved whirl attached 
G is extended rearward and upward, passing 
to each intermediate spindle of the section, 
around the cylinder C and bearing on its 
of an endless belt which engages with a half 
rear half, thence diagonally sidewise, so as to 
turn the double and single grooves of the 
engage the whirl c' on the first spindle E3, 
whirls on the end and intermediate spindles 
nearest the end spindle B'. Irom the whirl 
and alternately with the cylindrical roller, 
of the said spindle B the belt is drawn straight 
back, as at 4, and passes around the cylinder 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a spinning-machine, the combination, 
C, then forward diagonally, as at 5, around 
with a frame, a sliding tension device, a cy 
the whirl of the second spindle from the end 
spindle B', then straight to the rear and up 
lindrical roller, a series of revoluble spindles 
comprising a section and mounted on the 
Wardly, to again pass around the rear half of 
frame, a double-grooved whirl for each end 
the cylinder, as shown at 6, Fig. 3. The belt 
spindle of the section, and a single-grooved 
is arranged to successively engage the series 
whirl for each intermediate spindle in the 
of whirls of the several intermediate spindles 
Binmanner similar to that already explained, 
section, of an endless-belt alternately engaged 
with the cylindrical roller and the whirls of 
and at the end spindle 13, which terminates 
the spindles and also with the sliding ten 
the section of the spinning-jack driven by 
sion device, substantially as set forth. 
one endless belt, the belt G, which has been 
diagonally extended from the lower side of 
3. In a banding and tension device for 
the cylinder C to engage the upper whirl c, 
spinning-machines, the combination, with a 
as at 7, is thence rearwardly and upwardly 
frame, a cylindrical roller, a series of spin 
dles, each having an attached grooved whirl, 
drawn, as at S, to pass over and around the 
cylinder, thence forward and around the 
and an endless belt, of an automatic tension 
regulating device comprising an extensible 
groove in the whirl c' on the spindle B, and 
guideway, a sliding block adapted to travel 
thence diagonally to an engagement with 
the whirl I on the sliding carriage E. before 
on the guideway, a loose whirl mounted on a 
fixed stud-bolt attached to the sliding block, 
It will be evident from the description 
an automatic oiler for the loose whirl, a spiral 
- 
- 
95 
Od 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
65 mentioned: 
 
446,751 
. 
8 
5 
spring which is attached to the frame and connected with said block, and an idler-pull- Io 
also to the sliding block by a flexible connec- ley mounted on the spindle of the bolt, sub 
tion, and a pulley over which said connection stantially as specified. 
passes, Substantially as set forth. 
4. In a band-tensioning device for spin- 
ning-machines, the combination of a slotted 
bar, a block arranged upon said bar and hav. 
ing a portion that works in the slot, a bolt 
passing through said block and bar, a spring 
SAMUEL JAMES 
JEREMIAH. K. SANDERS. 
fi SA NL 
Witnesses: 
W. E. RYAN, 
E. B. IXELLERMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446851.txt	(No Model.) 
B. H. COFFEY. 
GAS ENGINE, 
5. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 24, 1891, 
 
 
w 
??????2 
hne S S es 
?? 
the snoRRis pereas co., PHoto-1, ITHo., WASHINGTON, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 446,851, 
B. H., COFFEY. 
GAS ENGINIE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 24, 1891. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
F. 
? 
 
 
 
. 
(No Model.) 
B. H. COFFEY. 
GAS ENGINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 446,85l. 
Patented Feb. 24, 1891, 
 
 
 
Witnesses: 
Jin Wenfor 
(No Model.) 
. 
No. 446,851, 
B. H. COFFEY. 
5 sheets-Sheet 5. 
GAS ENGINE, 
Patented Feb. 24, 1891, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BARTON II. COFFEY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
GAS ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 446,851, dated February 24, 1891. 
Application filed January 27, 1890, Renewed December 1, 1890, Serial No. 378,128, (No model.) 
To all Ipho? ?? ??? concer?: 
Beit known that I, BARTON. H. COFFEY, of 
the city and county of Philadelphia, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improved Gas-Engine, of which the fol 
lowing is a true and exact description, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
gas engines, and has for its object to simplify 
and improve the construction and operation 
of the same. 
The nature of my improvements will best 
be understood as described in connection 
With the drawings in which they are illus 
trated, and the novel features which I desire 
to protect by Letters Patent are hereinafter 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, which represent a gas-en 
gine constructed with my improvements, Fig 
urelis a side elevation showing the cylinder 
and its valves in section. Fig. 2 is an end 
elevation of the cylinder end of the engine. 
Fig. 3 is an elevation of the other end of the 
engine. Fig. 4 is a view of the guiding-pivot 
shaft. and its connections, taken on the line 
at 20 of Fig.1. Fig. 5 is a face view of a fly 
Wheel, showing a governor and its connection 
With the guiding-pivot shaft. Fig. 6 is a side 
view of the same parts. Figs. 7 and 8 show 
details. Fig. 9 is a plan of the end plate of 
the cylinder, showing the ports formed in it. 
Fig.10 is a section on liney y of Fig. 9. Fig. 
11 is a plan view of the inner face of the valve 
acting on the end plate; and Figs, 12 and 13 
are diagrams illustrating the action of the 
engine in two positions of the guiding-pivot 
shaft. 
A is the frame of the engine; B, the cylin 
der; C, the trunk-piston; C, the pin by which 
it is connected with the connecting-rod G. 
D is the end plate of the cylinder; E, the 
Valve-plate, having a circular rack E' formed 
On its outer rim; F', a shaft which actuates 
the valve E by means of the gear-wheel F en 
gaging rack E'. 
W. 
There are novel features in connection with 
the valve and valve-ports shown which I will 
describe hereinafter; but I may here state 
that my principal novel feature which I am 
about to describe can be employed in connec 
tion with any convenient valve system. 
K is the main shaft of the engine; I/ I', 
crank-arms secured to said shaft, and I the 
crank-pin. 
Jis a pivot, preferably made adjustable or 
movable, for reasons which I will state, and 
II is a link of substantially triangular form 
and provided with a slot II", which may be 
straight, as shown, or, if desired, may have a 
curved outline. This link is pivoted to the 
crank-pin I, as shown, and to the connecting 
rod Gath, and also to the guiding-pivot J 
by means of its slot II", the connection being 
made in the plan shown by means of a block 
J sliding in slot II' and turning on pivot J'. 
The effect of this combination of the connect 
ing-rod, crank-shaft, guiding-pivot, and slot 
ted link upon the motion of the piston is shown 
in the diagrams 12 and 13, the piston making 
two strokes for each revolution of the shaft 
and an explosion occurring for each revolu 
tion. For instance, in the diagrams X, 1234 
indicate the different extreme positions of 
the piston during each revolution of the main 
shaft; Y, 1234 the corresponding positions of 
the pivot h at the end of the connecting-rod 
G, and Z, 1 2 3 4 the corresponding positions 
of the crank-pin I, while the position of the 
guiding-pivot is indicated in Fig. 12 at at and 
in Fig. 13 at at'. As the crank-pin moves 
from 1 to 2, the piston moves from 1 to 2 ? 
sucking in the charge of gas and air. As the 
pin moves from 2 to 3, the piston moves back 
to 3, compressing the charge. The explosion 
then occurs, forcing the piston to 4 and im 
pelling the crank-pin from 3 tO 4, and the 1'O- 
tation of the crank-pin from the piston back 
to 1, expelling the burned charge and com 
pleting the cycle. The curve described by 
the end of the connecting-rod is indicated at Y. 
My device of the slotted link and its con 
nection with the connecting-rod, crank, and 
guide-pivot is, I believe, entirely new, and it 
is a simpler and more convenient device for 
accomplishing the desired movements of the 
piston than any with which I am familiar, 
besides giving a capacity for regulating and 
altering the operation of the engine by mak 
ing the guide-pivot adjustable. For instance, 
referring to Figs. 12 and 13, by making the 
guide-pivot adjustable between points at and 
at the movements of the piston are changed 
in degree, so that when the pivot is at u' the 
???? 
7 ? 
75. 
95 
? ? 
2 ? 
45 
446,851 
outward stroke of the piston which draws in 
the charge is longer than when the pivot is at 
at alld the compression-stroke correspondingly 
altered. This adjustability of the guide 
pivot is another important feature of my in 
vention. 
lBy connecting a governor with a movable 
guide-lpivot by mechanism which will cause 
the said pivot to change its position as the 
load on the engine varies, I am enabled to 
regulate and govern the engine in the most 
effective way-that is, to shorten the suction 
stroke as the load falls and lengthen it as it 
increases, and this also is an important fea 
ture of my invention. 
Referring again to the drawings, I will de 
Scribe the mechanism there shown for ad 
justing the guiding-pivot and for actuating 
it by the governor, the construction shown be 
ing, I believe, well adapted for its purpose, but 
being capable of almost indefinite change and 
modification in its details of construction. 
The guide-pivot J' is formed as a shaft on 
which the sliding block J can turn freely, and 
to said shaft are secured bearing rings or 
wheels J J and spur-gears J J', a worm 
wheel J being secured to one end. 
MMI are blocks in which are formed guide 
learings M. M., to secure the wheels or rings 
J and racks M' M', in which the gear-wheels 
Jengage. It is obvious that by this crn 
struction the rotation of shaft J will cause it 
to travel back or forward in the guiding 
bearings VIMI. 
N is a worm which engages worm-wheel J. 
It is secured to a shaft N' by means of a slot 
n", which engages a feather n on said shaft, 
the Worm being thus free to move along the 
shaft while it turns with it. On the lower end 
of Worm N is secured by means of bolts in an 
extension, which is free to move to and from 
the worm for a short distance, being held nor 
mally at the greater distance from it by 
gravity, or, if desired, a light spring. A shoul 
der', with gradual inclined slopen", is formed 
on its face. As the shaft N' revolves in the 
direction indicated by the arrow in Fig. 7, the 
worm revolving with it rotates shaft.J' by en 
gaging with worm-wheel J", and as the shaft 
moves up on racks M' the worm moves up 
along the shaft N' until the end of feather 
comes beneath the extension 
of the worm, 
when the worm ceases to turn, and the further 
revolution of the shaft simply causes the ex 
tension 
to move to and fro on its support 
ing-bolts; but as soon as the rotation of shaft 
N' changes in direction the feather nengages 
shoulder n and rotates the worm, which im 
mediately begins its backward movement 
along the shaft. The purpose of this construc 
tion is to provide a limit to the upward move 
ment of the guiding-pivot when it is coupled 
with a governor in the way shown, and which 
I am about to describe. 
On the upper end of shaft. N' is fixed a fric 
tion-cone N, fitting between beveled collars 
0 o' on a ring O, which ring is internally 
- 
threaded and screwed upon a screw-threaded 
rigor collar K' on shaft. K. Extending from 
ring O are arms O' O', to which are pivoted 
at one end links PP, which at their ends are 
pivoted to links PP', the other ends of which 
are pivoted, as at p, to the fly-wheel L. 
On 
links P' are secured weights P', and springs 
are provided to hold the weighted links 
normally in their desired position and to act 
against the centrifugal force of the weights als 
the fly-wheel revolves. 
The operation of the device shown is easily 
followed. As the fly-wheel revolves with in 
creasing speed the centrifugal force of the 
weighted levers overcomes the springs and as 
they move outward they act upon the arms O' 
of ring O, causing it to turn on shaft K, and 
by reason of its engagement with threaded 
ring K' to move along it. This brings the 
ring o' in contact with cone N', causing shaft 
N' to revolve, as shown by arrow in Fig. 7, 
and by the connections described causing the 
pivot-shaft J' to move up and shorten the Suc 
tion-stroke of the piston. On the other hand 
the slowing down of the ?ly-wheel causes the 
springs to overcome the centrifugal force of 
the governor-weights and the ring O is rotated 
in the opposite direction on shaft IX, thre ring 
O being brought in contact with the cone N 
and the guide-pivot, J caused to move down 
ward, with the result of lengthening the suc 
tion-stroke of the piston. 
Referring now to the engine, valves, and 
ports, the construction of the end plate D is 
shown in Figs. 1, 9, and 10. It is secured to 
the cylinder by a number of bolts, as cl, and 
has a water-space (l' formed in it. 
d d are exhaust-ports connected together 
by a passage (l, and d" is a passage leading 
from one of them to the open air or exhaust 
pipe. 
did are air-inlet ports, and d a gas-inlet 
port. As shown, it is separated from an ad 
joining air-port d by a partition (l", and the 
gas-pipe d' leads through the air-port and the 
partition. 
did, &c., are ports leading through plate 
D to the interior of the cylinder. 
(l) is the ignition-port, into which leads a 
passage (l, into which is fastened a closed 
tube R', situated in a flue R, in which a Bun 
sen burner is situated in the usual way. 
The valve E is chambered out, as shown at 
e' e', said chambers connecting with the an 
nular opening e' and being open on the face 
of the valve through slots e. e. The valve is 
held in position by a bolt E, screwing into 
plate E and having a threaded end e, upon 
which screws a hand-wheel E. 
E is a plate which rests against the end of 
valve E, balls e being preferably used to 
convert sliding into rolling friction. A spring 
E", situated between plate E and wheel EP, 
keeps the valve pressed against the end plate 
D with a force regulated by the compression 
of the spring. 
The valve E is given a constant movement 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
3 5 
45 
55 
65 
7 ? 
9o 
I do 
I IO 
I I5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
446,851 
of rotation by means of the gear-wheel F, 
illesling with its circular rack E' and driven 
by shaft F", which has at its end a spirally 
toothed wheel F, engaging a spiral gear Q, 
the gearing being such as will cause the valve 
E to made a half-revolution for each complete 
revolution of the shaft IK. The action of the 
valve is very simple. When its ports e e 
register with the air and gas ports d' d' d', the 
charge is drawn in, passing through open 
ings e'e' to the ports d and thence to the 
cylinder, the valve continuing to revolve. Its 
openings e are closed by the plain face of 
plate D during the compression of the charge, 
and One of said openings e registers with the 
firing-port d" at the end of the compression 
stroke, allowing the mixture in the cylinder 
to enter the heated tube R'' and become ig 
nited, the ignition being freely communicated 
through passaged, port d', opening e, cham 
ber e', opening e, and ports d to the cylin 
der. At the end of the explosion-stroke of 
the piston the openings e of the valve regis 
ter with the exhaust-ports d and the gases 
are freely expelled during the return-stroke 
of the piston. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
connecting-rod, the crank of the main shaft, 
and a guiding-pivot J', with a link H, pivoted 
to the connecting-rod and crank at fixed 
points and to the pivot J by means of a slot 
III, formed in said link, all substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
2. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
connecting-rod, the crank of the main shaft, 
and a movable guiding-pivot J', with a link H, 
pivoted to the connecting-rod and crank at 
fixed points and to the pivot J' by means of 
a slot H' formed in said link, all substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
connecting-rod, the crank of the main shaft, 
and a movable guiding-pivot J, with a link 
II, pivoted to the connecting-rod and crank at 
fixed points and to the pivot J' by means of 
a slot H' formed in said link, a governor and 
mechanism connecting said governor, and the 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
45 
55 
75 
movable guide-pivot arranged to change its 
position as the load of the engine varies. 
4. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
connecting-rod, the crank on the main shaft, 
a guiding-pivot shaft J, having gear-wheels 
J attached to it, racks M, engaging gear 
wheels J, mechanism for rotating shaft J' 
and its gears J to change its position on the 
racks, and a slotted link H, pivoted to the 
connecting-rod and crank at fixed points and 
to the shaft J by means of its slot, all Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
5. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
connecting-rod, the crank on the main shaft, 
a guiding-pivot shaft J, having gear-wheels 
J attached to it, racks M, engaging geal 
wheels J, mechanism for rotating shaft J 
and its gears J to change its position on the 
racks, a governor connected with and con 
trolling the movement of said mechanism, and 
a slotted link II, pivoted to the connecting 
rod and crank at fixed points and to the shaft 
J' by means of its slot, all substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
6. In a gas-engine having the slotted link 
H and movable pivot J', as described, and a 
shaft N', actuated by the governor, the Com 
bination of the worm N, mounted on shaft N' 
and connected with it by feather n, the mov 
able extension in of said Worm having shoul 
der n", and the worm-wheel Jon shaft J", all 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
7. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
cylinder end plate D, having induction-ports 
d, exhaust-ports did, air-ports d' d', and gas 
port d, arranged substantially as specified, 
and a rotating valve E, having openings e e, 
chambers e'e', and passage e. 
S. In a gas-engine, the combination of the 
cylinder end plate D, having induction-ports 
di, exhaust-ports d d', air-ports d d', gas 
port d, and ignition-port d", with passage d", 
arranged substantially as specified, and a ro 
tating valve E, having openings e e, chambers 
e'e', and passage e. 
BARTON II. COFFEY. 
Witnesses: 
LEWIS R. DICK, 
 JOSHUA MATLACK, Jr. 
an 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US446952.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 446,952, 
E. J. RICHARD. 
REGISTER SHEET, 
Patented Feb. 24, 1891. 
-77. Z. 
AMOUN. 
PURCHASER 
SHPPNG PONT 
P. O.ADDRESS 
N0. CASE 
Fig.2- 
Date 
purchaser 
to whom shipped 
SHIPPINc point layoung SE No.of case 
No. of case 
Za 
73 
A. 
Z3 
Z6 
Z7 
--- 
8 
Z8 
zo 
9 
WITIVESSES 
IWWEWTOR 
Attorneys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIAS JACKSON RICHARD, OF SELMA, ALABAMA. 
REGISTER-S HEET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 446,952, dated February 24, 1891. 
Application filed November 10, 1890, Serial No, 370,939, (No specimens.) 
- 
To all, whon, it naily conce/7 
Beitknown that I, ELIASJACKSONRICHARD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Selma, in the county of Dallas and State of Ala 
bama, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Register-Sheets; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
Myinvention is a register-sheet arranged to 
be used by shippers of bottled goods such as 
soda and mineral waters, which are shipped 
in cases and the cases, with empty bottles, 
returned to the shipper to be again used. 
In the drawings I have illustrated two regis 
ter-sheets embodying my invention, differing 
somewhat from each other in the way they 
are ruled and the printing they contain and 
which are designated Figures 1 and 2. 
The sheets may be of any suitable size and 
bound in books or kept separate, as best suits 
the convenience of the user. 
The sheet shown in Fig. 1 is divided by 
vertical lines into seven columns, numbered 
on the drawings 1 to 7, respectively, and across 
the heads of which columns are printed, in 
the order named, the following words: Date. 
Amount. Purchaser. Shipping-point. 
P. O. address. How shipped. No. case. 
The page is ruled with parallel horizontallines 
in the usual manner, and one of these lines is 
filled up, by way of illustration, as it should be 
in practice. In column 1 is Written the date 
when the case was shipped, as Oct. 11, and 
for convenience I subdivide this column by 
a vertical line, making separate Spaces for 
the month and day of the month. In column 
2 is written the price of the goods shipped, 
as $5.00, and for convenience this column is 
likewise subdivided, giving Separate spaces 
for dollars and cents. The next column 3 
contains the name of the purchaser or the 
person to whom the goods are shipped, as J. 
L. Bishop, and in the next column 4 is Writ 
ten the name of the point to which they are 
shipped, as Selma, Ala., while in column 5 
is written the post-office address of the con 
signee or purchaser, which in some cases will 
be different from the shipping-point. In col 
umn 6 is written the way the goods are ship 
ped-for example, Express Adams'-and in 
5 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
50 
the last column 7 is written the number o' 
name of the case or boxin which the goods are 
packed. Along the vertical line which sepa 
rates the columns 6 and 7 is a row of perfora 
tions S, while rows of perforations 9 follow the 
horizontal lines of the page from the row of 
perforations S to the edge of the sheet. The 
sheet is thus perforated in order to permit 
the tearing off of any section 10 of column 
7 between any two horizontal lines without 
disturbing any other portions or section 
thereof, two sections being indicated as torn 
off at 0 0 on the drawings. A section 10 is 
torn of when the case, the number of which 
appears thereon, is returned by the purchaser 
or consignee to the shipper and indicates that 
the case referred to in the description written 
on the horizontal line, of which the torn-off 
section 10 was a part, has been properly re 
turned, and hence need not be further traced. 
up so far as that shipment is concerned. 
The sheet shown in Fig. 2 differs from that 
described in the arrangement and the number 
of the columns. On this sheet there are eight 
columns, numbered 11 to 18, respectively, and 
having at the heads of the various columns 
the following Words, beginning at the right: 
* Date. Purchaser. To whom shipped. 
Shipping-point. Amount. No. of bot 
tles lost or broken. No. of case. No. of 
case. So far as columns 11, 12, 14, 15, and 
18 are concerned their use need not be de 
scribed, as they correspond, respectively, with 
columns 1, 3, 4, 2, and 7 of the other sheet. 
Column 13 is used when the person to whom 
the goods are shipped is different from the 
purchaser. Column 16 is filled in when the 
case is returned, the number of bottles miss 
ing or broken being Written therein. Column 
17 is a duplicate of column 18, but is a per 
manent part of the sheet and shows what par 
ticular case Was Shipped even after the de 
tachable section 10 of column 18 has been re 
moved, for it will be understood that column 
18 is surrounded by the lines of perforations 
S and 9, as is column 7 of Fig. 1. 
The sheet shown in Fig. 2 is the one which 
I prefer for the use to which tho invention is 
particularly adapted as hereinbefore setforth; 
but it will be seen that the invention, in so 
far as it consists in making one of the col 
umns with detachable sections, one for each 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
IOC) 
446,952 
entry, may be applied to record - sheets of 
many different kinds and for many purposes. 
What I claim is 
1. A record-sheet divided into columns to 
facilitate making entries and having one of 
the columns divided into a number of detach 
able sections, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. A record-sheet divided into columns to 
facilitate the making of entries and having 
the column next the edge of the sheet divided 
into a number of detachable sections, one for 
each entry-space, substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. A record-sheet for use by shippers of 
bottled goods in returnable cases, having a 
15 
series of vertical columns with the following 
words at the heads thereof, to wit: Date, 
Purchaser, To whom shipped, Shipping 
point, Amount, No. of bottles lost or 
broken, No. of case, and No. of case, the 
last column next the edge of the leaf being 
divided into a number of separable sections, 
one for each entry-space, Substantially as 
shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ELIAS JACKSON RICARD. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES L. BISHOP, 
WALTER JONES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447052.txt	E. W. FANT, W. B., ANDERSON & S. W. RICHARD. 
T00I, HANDLEATTACHMENT, 
Patented Feb. 24, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 447,052, 
 
 
 
   
St. 
2 He 4. 
 
4. C 
2 
}} 
W ilpesses 
462%- 
2 a 
YB, 
2 
Jy 77her Atlrgeys, 
Z% oc/Z 27 t 
I p?epfairs 
27tzan AAzadersova 
Azc/ha re 
Sava za e 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ENOCI W. FANT, WILLIAMI B. ANDERSON, AND SAMUEI, W. RICHARD, OF 
FRANKLIN, WEST WIRGINIA. 
Too L-HANDLE ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,052, dated February 24, 1891. 
Application filed June 30, 1890, Serial No. 357,926, (No model.) 
To all whon, it nucly conce7'id: 
Beit known that we, ENOCH. W. FANT, WIL 
LIAM B. ANDERSON, and SAMUEL W. RICH 
ARD, citizens of the United States, residing 
at Franklin, in the county of Pendleton and 
State of West Virginia, have invented a new 
and useful Tool-Handle Attachment, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to wood - working 
tools, and more especially to the handles 
thereof; and the same consists in an attach 
inent adapted to be applied to such handles 
to prevent the tool from slipping off an in 
clined roof when laid thereon by the user. 
To this end the invention consists in the 
details of construction hereinafter more fully 
described, and illustrated in the drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the attach 
ment in its closed position. Fig. 2 is a cen 
tral transverse section of the same in its open 
position. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a 
hatchet, and Fig. 4 of a saw, with our improved 
attachment applied thereto. Fig. 5 is a per 
spective view of the attachment with the 
tooth raised, showing the former as Secured 
by screws to the bottom of a box, as a miter 
box, which is shown inverted. 
Referring to the said drawings, the letter 
B designates the base, upon the outer face of 
which is formed a raised socket S of about 
the shape shown in Fig. 5, and within this 
socket, near the closed end C thereof, On a 
pivot P, is mounted a sharp tooth T, having 
corners at its lower end. A leaf-spring L is 
secured to the base near the outer end of the 
socket and bears upwardly against One side 
of the tooth when the latter is closed, or 
against the end of the same when it is open. 
This attachment is applied to the handle 
of a saw, a hatchet, or any other tool of simi 
lar character, or it may be applied to the bot 
tom of a miter-box, tool-box, or receptacle for 
nails, &c., as shown in Fig. 5, ordinary screws 
being passed through holes in the base to se 
cure the attachment in position. 
Care must be taken that the attachment be 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
applied at one end (preferably the lighter) of 
the tool, the tool-handle, or the box, and that 
the open end of the socket S stand toward 
the other end. Under ordinary circumstances 
when the tooth is in closed position, as seen 
in Fig. 1, the attachment is not the least in 
the way, being very small in size; but when 
it is desired to use the tool or tool-box upon 
a slanting roof, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4, the 
tooth T is raised so that its rear side will 
stand against the closed end C of the socket, 
after which the tool or box may be dropped 
or placed upon the roof, and the pointed or 
sharpened end of the tooth will slightly em 
bed itself into the same and prevent the tool 
or box from slipping off. 
It will be obvious that a number of these 
attachments can be secured to the bottom of 
a box, and that one can be placed on each side 
of a saw or hammer handle. The attachment 
is preferably of metal, with a steel tooth, 
which latter may be ground from time to time 
as it becomes dulled by constant use. 
What we claim is 
The combination, with a tool, of an attach 
ment Secured to the lower side thereof near 
one end, the said attachment comprising a 
base B, a socket S thereon, having one closed 
end C, a pointed tooth T, having a Squared 
butt mounted on a pivot P within said socket 
and striking said closed end when the tooth 
is raised, and a leaf-spring L, secured in the 
outer end of said socket, with its free end 
bearing upwardly against said tooth, the open 
end of the socket standing toward the oppo 
site end of the tool, and the whole adapted 
for use substantially as and for the purpose 
hereinbefore set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ENOCH. W. FANT. 
WILLIAM B. ANDERSON. 
SAMUEL W. RICHARD. 
Witnesses: 
. 
TEE BENNETT, 
J. W. MORRAL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447152.txt	eet S 
MACHINE FOR, DECORTICATING FIBROUS PLANTS, 
J. G. HERN ANDEZ, 
2. Sheet -sheet l, 
(No Model.) 
No. 447,152, 
A. 
Patented Feb. 24, 1891, 
A. 
| N 
- 
KS 
S 
 
A 
Witwasses E IWWENTOR; 
(s 
Y 
4wse 
ATTORMEYS 
(No Model. ) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
J. G. HERN ANDEZ. 
MACHINE FOR, DECORTICATING FIBROUS PLANTS, 
No. 447,152, 
Patented Feb. 24 l891, 
 
 
 
 
s' - Y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSE GARCIA HERNANDEZ, OF HAVANA, CUBA. 
MACHINE FOR DECORT CATING F BRO US PLANTS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,152, dated February 24, 1891. 
Application filed May 2, 1890, Serial No, 850,374, (No model.) 
5 
O 
d 
To all whom it inctly COF2Cer'72: 
Be it known that I, JoSf. GARCTA FIERNAN 
DEZ, of Havana, Cuba, have invented a new 
and Improved Machine for Decorticating Fi 
brous Plants, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. . 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved decorticating- machine 
which is simple and durable in construction, 
very effective in operation, and adapted for 
breaking ramie, jute, hemp, or other similar 
fibrous plants in such a manner that the fiber 
is left clean of any ligneous Or Woody matter, 
and at the same time the fiber is rendered 
very smooth, the exterior pelicle or film being 
to a great extent removed. 
The invention consists of a reciprocating 
double knife operating in conjunction with a 
fixed and a yieldingly-mounted presser-bar, 
The invention also consists in certain parts 
and details and combinations of the same, as 
will be described hereinafter, and then pointed 
out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figtire 1 is a front view of my improyed 
machine with parts broken out. Fig. 2 is a 
sectional side elevation of the same on the 
line a a of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a side elevation 
of the mechanism for actuating the feeding 
devices. Fig. 4 is a face view of a modified 
form of the cam for operating the yielding 
resser-bar, and Fig. 5 is an enlarged sectional 
side elevation of part of the improvement. 
The improved decorticating-machine is pro 
vided with a suitably - constructed frame. A 
supporting in its rear a table B, on which the 
material to be treated is placed to be fed to 
the feeding-rollers C and D, arranged one 
above the other and at the front end of the 
said table B. The feeding rollers C and D 
are journaled in the sides of the main frame 
A and are connected with each other by gear 
wheels E and E, so that when a rotary mo 
tionis imparted to one of the rollers the other 
rotates With it. 
On the outer end of the lower roller C is ar 
ranged a ratchet-wheelF, engaged by a Spring 
3O 
35 p 
40 
45 
So 
55 
y 65 
75 
pressed pawl G, pivoted on a lever II, loosely 
fulcrumed on the shaft of the said roller C. 
The outer end of lever II has a lengthwise slot 
H'. An arm J is fixed on one end of the shaft 
K, which has its bearings in the upper part 
of frame A. The arm J is likewise provided 
with a slot J' and is connected by a bolt or 
pin I with said lever H, as shown-that is to 
say, the bolt I is clamped by a nut at any 
desired point in the slot of arm J and slides 
freely in the slot of lever H. It is therefore 
a crank or wrist pin for the latter. The shaft 
K has a fast pulley K' and loose pulley K?, 
respectively, connected in the usual manner 
with suitable machinery for imparting a rotar 
motion to the said driving-shaft K. On the 
latter is also secured a suitable fly-wheel K. 
When the shaft K is rotated, the arm Jim 
parts a swinging motion to the lever H, which 
in its forward stroke imparts, by the pawl G, 
motion to the ratchet-Wheel F, and conse 
quently to the feed-roller C, which operates 
the other feed-roller D. On the return-stroke 
of the lever H the two feed-rollers remainsta 
tionary. The throw given by the pawl G. to 
the ratchet-wheel F can be varied by adjust 
ing the pivot-pin I in the slot J of the arm J, 
so that the material may be fed a greater or 
less distance, as desired. On the main driv 
ing-shaft K are also arranged the crank-arms 
K", pivotally connected with links L., extend 
ing downward and pivotally connected with 
a rectangular fraine N, having its ends fitted 
to slide vertically in slots A, arranged in the 
sides of the main frame A. On the top and 
the bottom bars of the rectangular frame N 
are secured the knives O and O', held trans 
versely adjustable on the side bars by means 
of screws, as shown. The knives O and O' 
have opposite cutting-edges, as is plainly 
shown in Fig. 2, the bevel of the cutting-edge 
of the knife O extending upward, while that. 
of the other knife O' extends downward, as 
is plainly shown in Fig. 2. 
In the rear of the frame N and its knives 
O and O' is arranged a transversely-extend 
ing fixed presser-bar P, located in front of the 
roller C, and having its top about in line with 
the top of the table B and the roller C. Above 
this fixed presser-bar Pisarranged a movable 
9o 
co 
-- 
447,153 
O 
25 
presser-bar Q, similar in shape to the fixed 
presser-bar and provided on its ends with up 
wardly-extending arms Q', fitted against the 
inner surfaces of the sides of the main frame 
A, and each provided with vertically-arranged 
slots Q, through which pass bolts Q, screw 
ing in the sides of the main frame. 
On the upper end of each arm Q is ar 
ranged a projection Q, adapted to be engaged 
by a cam R, which may be single, as shown 
in Fig. 2, or double, as illustrated in Fig. 4, 
the said cam being secured on the driving 
shaft K. Against the under side of each arm 
Q presses a coiled spring Q, coiled around 
the rod Q, extending from the arm Q down 
ward through a suitable bearing Q', formed 
on each of the sides of the main frame A. 
The springs Q serve to hold the presser-bar 
Q in an uppermost position, the upward move 
ment being limited by the arms Q' resting 
against the peripheries of the cams R. When 
the main shaft IK is rotated, the said cams R, 
acting on the arms Q', press the latter down 
ward, and consequently impart a vertical 
sliding motion to the presser-bar Q, being 
vertically guided by the bolts Q' passing 
through the slots Q' of the said arms Q', sup 
porting the said presser-bar. 
Above the table B is arranged a transverse 
board S slightly inclined and serving to pre 
vent the material from passing over the roller 
D. The presser-bar P serves also as a guide 
to the roller C in order to prevent the material 
from taking any other direction than that con 
ducting directly to the knives; and as the 
presser-bar Q is movable its thickness will 
be reduced somewhat, so as to adapt a fixed 
guide T (see Fig. 5) between the same and the 
rollers C and D, in order to force the material 
to take its way right through the knives. 
The operation is as follows: When the main 
driving-shaft K is set in motion, a reciprocat 
ing motion is imparted to the knives O and 
O, held in the knife-frame N so that the cut 
ting-edges of the two knives alternately pass 
the opening made between the presser-bars 
P and Q. The ramie, jute, hemp, or otheran 
alogous material is placed by the operator on 
the table Band showed between the two rollers 
C and D, which on the forward stroke of the 
lever Hare rotated to feed the material be 
tween and past the presser-bars P and Q into 
the opening formed between the two knives 
O and O. When the lever II is on the re 
turn-stroke, the feeding ceases, and then the 
cams R press the presser Q downward onto 
the material so as to clamp the latter in place. 
Then the knife O descends, and by its cutting 
edge passing onto the material breaks the lat 
ter, and at the upward stroke the lower knife 
O' acts against the under side of the material 
and cleans the latter from the Woody portion 
broken by the knife O. When the knife 
frame Nagain commences to move downward 
and the presser Q is in its uppermost posi 
tion, caused by the action of the springs Q, 
then the lever II is on its forward stroke and 
turns the rollers C and D So as to feed the 
material forward again. As soon as the lever 
II commences its return-stroke the movable 
presser-bar Q clamps the material again and 
the knives O and O' operate on the material 
on the downward and upward stroke, as pre 
viously described. 
It will be seen that as the decorticated por 
tion of the material when passing out of the 
machine is resting on the dull edge of the 
lower knife O', while the remainder portion 
of the material is not yet broken, but clamped 
by the bars P and Q and the rollers C and D, 
the ligneous part, that although loosened 
could perhaps still remain mingled within the 
decorticated part of the material, is separated 
by the friction and agitation of the recipro 
cating knives O and O' in their rapid up-and 
down movement. 
The rollers C and D are made smooth, and 
are preferably of rubber, so as not to press or 
break the material, thereby preventing the 
Woody portions from becoming like leather 
and less breakable after being crushed, as is 
the case in machines as at present constructed. 
The limit attained by both the cutting 
edges of the knives O and O' on their upward 
and downward strokes, respectively, in pass 
ing the front faces of the bars P and Q should 
not be leSS than the forward movement of the 
material, so that the knives in passing the 
bars strip off by friction the pellicle. The 
knives O and O' are transversely adjustable 
in order to be enabled to graduate, as needed, 
the Space between the knives and the front 
faces of the bars P and Q without touching 
the frame N, thus being able to adjust the 
Same in case the Space should be too narrow 
and in breaking the ligneous part to avoid 
also the cutting of the fiber. By removing 
the transversely-adjustable knives O and O' 
on frame N they can be exactly graduated, 
so as to break indefectibly the ligneous part, 
preventing at the Same time its interference 
between the knives O and O' and the faces of 
the bars P and Q. 
It will be seen that this machine is very 
simple in construction and dispenses with all 
grooved rollers and breakers previously em 
ployed in machines of this kind. In breaking 
the material in Small fragments this machine 
not only leaves the fiber clean of the ligneous 
parts and to a great extent without the exte 
rior pellicle, but also works as a cleaning and 
Smoothing machine for the fibers, which when 
dried are preferably passed through the ma 
Chine a Second time, SO as to obtain a first 
class product. 
In this machine the material may be fed to 
the Tollers C and D with the leaves and buds 
On, thus dispensing with the difficult and ex 
pensive Operation of stripping off the leaves 
previous to passing the material into the ma 
chine. 
It Will further be understood that there is 
no loSS of material whatever, as all the stems 
of all sizes must infallibly pass between the 
75 
95 
Od 
IC 
I 15 
I 25 
55 
 
---. 
447,152 
3 
- 
rollers C and D to the bars P and Q and the 
knives O and O' to be treated, as above de 
scribed. 
It will further be seen that the machine op 
erates, no matter in which direction the shaft 
K is rotated. By this machine the drying of 
the fibers is facilitated on account of the re 
moval of the pellicle, as in this way the fiber 
is more directly exposed to the influence of 
the drier. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In a decorticating-machine, the combina 
tion, with reciprocating double knives, of a 
fixed presser-bar and a movable presser-bar 
arranged in the rear of the said knives and 
in line with the same, and means for operat 
ing said bar, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. In a decorticating-machine, the combi 
nation, with reciprocating double knives, of 
a fixed presser-bar and a movable presser 
bar arranged in the rear of the said knives 
and in line with the same, and means for op 
erating said bar, and feed-rollers having an 
intermittent rotary motion and serving to 
feed the material to the said bars and knives, 
and means for intermittingly rotating said 
rollers, substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a decorticating-machine, the combi 
nation, with reciprocating double knives, of 
a fixed presser-bar and a movable presser 
bar arranged in the rear of the said knives 
and in line with the same, feed-rollers having 
an intermittent rotary motion and serving to 
feed the material to the said bars and knives, 
and means, substantially as described, for in 
termittingly rotating said rollers and for im 
parting motion to the said knives and mov 
able presser-bar, as Set forth. 
4. In a decorticating-machine, the combi 
nation, with a knife-frame having a recipro 
cating motion and knives Secured on opposite 
bars of the said frame, of a fixed presser-bar 
arranged in the rear of the Said frame in line 
with the said knives, and a movable presser 
n 
55 
bar arranged above the said fixed presser-bar 
and adapted to clamp the material on the said 
fixed presser-bar while the knives operate on 5o 
the material, and means for Operating said 
bar, substantially as shown and described. 
5. In a decorticating-machine, the combi 
nation, with a knife-frame having a recipro 
cating motion and knives secured on opposite 
bars of the said frame, of a fixed presser-bar 
arranged in the rear of the said frame inline 
with the said knives, a movable presser-bar 
arranged above the said fixed presser-bar and 
adapted to clamp the material. On the said 
fixed presser-bar while the knives operate on 
the material, and means, substantially as de 
scribed, for imparting a reciprocating motion 
to the said knife-frame, and a downward mo 
tion to the said movable presser-bar, Substan 
tially as shown and described. 
6. In a decorticating-machine, the combi 
nation, with a knife-frame having a recipro 
cating motion and knives secured on opposite 
bars of the said frame, of a fixed presser-bar 7o 
arranged in the rear of the said frame in line. 
with the said knives, a movable presser-bar 
arranged above the said fixed presser-bar and 
adapted to clamp the material on the said 
fixed presser-bar while the knives operate on 75 
the material, means, substantially as de 
scribed, for imparting a reciprocating motion. 
to the said knife-frame and a downward mo 
tion to the said movable presser-bar, and . 
springs for raising the said presser-bar, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
7. In a decorticating-machine, the combi 
nation, with a fixed presser-bar, of a movable 
presser-bar having arms guided vertically, 
springs pressing on the said arms to raise the 85 
movable presser-bar, and cams adapted to 
press on the said arms to lower the said 
presser-bar, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
JOSE GARCIA HERNANDEZ. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH A. SPRINGER, 
JORGE D. ALBERTINI. 
d 
3O 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447252.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 447,252, 
W. A. MACK. 
PRESSER FOOT FOR SEWING MACHINES, 
Patented Feb. 24, 1891. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
WILLIAM. A. MACK, OF NORWALK, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE STANDARD 
- 
SEWING MACHINE COMPANY, OF OHIO. 
PRESSER-FOOT FOR SEWING-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,252, dated February 24, 1891. 
Application filed July 26, 1887, Serial No. 245,306, (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. A. MACK, a 
citizen of Norwalk, county of Huron, and State 
of Ohio, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Automatic Vibrating Presser 
Feet for Sewing-Machines, of which the foll 
lowing, taken in connection with the drawings, 
is a specification. 
My invention consists in the construction 
and arrangement of the means employed, in 
combination with the needle-bar or projection 
thereon, for operating the presser-foot, form 
ing part of the attachment, as will hereinafter 
be described in detail, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means for connection with the said presser 
bar to serve as an automatic vibrating presser, 
more especially adapted for use in the opera 
tion of etching, embroidering, braiding, and 
other purposes, capable of being supported 
at a convenient point between the presser and 
needle bar, operated through the medium of 
the latter by a lever connected to and held by 
an attaching frame supporting and carrying 
the presser-foot, whereby the device may be 
more perfectly timed with the vibrations of 
the needle and act with a greater degree of 
sensitiveness than the ordinary foot directly 
attached to the end of the presser-bar in com 
On Se. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents my attachment connected to a sewing 
machine with the presser bearing upon the 
cloth-plate thereof. Fig.2 represents the same 
invention with the presser-foot elevated above 
the cloth-plate. Fig. 3 represents the attach 
ment detached from the sewing-machine, rep 
resenting the same side appearing in Figs. 1 
and 2. 
Fig. 4 represents the same attachment 
at a side opposite that shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 
3; and Fig. 5 is a top view of the attachment, 
Referring again to the drawings, A repre 
sents the frame to which all the elements form 
ing my improved attachment are held, its en 
tire form being shown more clearly in Figs, 
3, 4, and 5. 
B represents the post or shaft, supporting 
or provided with a presser, (indicated at IK.) 
the latter being provided with a needle-hole 
at a point near its toe. 
C represents a coiled spring, although it is 
obvious that other forms of springs may be 
employed, the chief object of the spring be 
ing to cause the presser-foot to bear with an 
elastic pressure on the material operated upon 
on the cloth-plate. In the present instance 
the spring surrounds the shaft B, and is main 
tained in position by a pin or projection (rep 
resented at a) secured to or extending through 
said shaft, the opposite end being allowed to 
push against an overhanging projection or 
flange forming a part of the frame A. 
D represents a lever with its fulcrum in the 
shaft B, one end of which is hinged to a link 
(represented at E) secured by a pin or rivet, 
(represented at D.) the other end of the link 
being pivoted to a flange or projecting part 
of the frame proper by a pin or other means, 
(Represented at E'.) 
To those skilled in the art it will be under 
stood that the operating device, instead of be 
ing connected by a pin to the shaft, may ex 
tend through a slot therein, and may also be 
pivotally connected with the shaft, and the 
end represented as hinged to the link may in 
tersect an opening provided to support it at 
the proper point, or various other methods 
might be suggested which will readily occur 
to a mechanic skilled in the art, without fur 
ther explanation. 
The frame is provided with a slotted flange 
adapted to be intersected by the end of the 
presser-bar, by which it is held. The free end 
of the lever D engages a projection or screw, 
in the present instance located at a proper 
point upon the needle-bar F, which projection 
in its ascent lifts the presser from the mate 
rial operated upon at a time when the needle 
(represented at I) has been withdrawn at a 
distance above it, The spring C by its elas 
ticity and location causes the presser of the 
attachment to follow the needle-bar in its 
downward stroke until it again rests and 
presses upon the fabric, which is done before 
the needle touches the material operated upon, 
and thus the operator is enabled to follow a 
pattern, however delicate and fine, with a de 
gree of precision hitherto extremely difficult. 
The lifting of the presser by the means in the 
manner described enables the operator to 
turn the material at the proper moment for 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
2 
447,252 
the next thrust of the needle without difficulty 
and presses with a firm but an elastic press 
ure at the proper moment for the formation 
of the Stitch. 
Having thus set forth my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is- 
1. A sewing-machine attachment consisting 
of a Supporting plate or frame provided with 
means for connection with the presser-bar, 
an elastically-supported shaft provided with 
a presser-foot, an actuating-lever pivoted on 
Said shaft and having a link connection with 
said supporting plate or frame, in combina 
tion with the needle-bar provided with a pro 
jection thereon for engagement with said act 
ulating-lever, substantially as described, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
, 
O 
15 
2. A sewing-machine attachment consisting 
of a supporting plate or frame provided With 
a shank for detachable connection with the 
presser-bar of a sewing-machine and with a 
vertical slot therein, a vertically-arranged 
shaft and foot carried by said supporting 
plate or frame, provided with a projection 
adapted to extend within said vertical slot in 
the supporting-frame, a coiled spring, and an 
actuating-lever pivoted to said vertical shaft 
and having a pivotal link connection with said 
supporting-plate, substantially as and for the 3o 
purpose set forth. 
25 
WILLIAM A. MACIX. 
Witnesses: 
D. E. COLE, 
GEO. D. HENDERSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447352.txt	No. 447,352. 
Patente d Mar, 3, l89 l. 
COMMUTATOR BRUSH, 
 
C 
M17 massas 
Q:42-?-C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN WILBUR RICE, JR., OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
THOMSON-HOUSTON ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF CONNECTICUT. 
COMMUTATOR-BRUSH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,352, dated March 3, 1891. 
Application filed November 28, 1890, Serial No,372,859, (No model.) 
5 
? ? 
I 5 
2 ? 
w 
To cuZZ zuvh/oTna, iiti 7m?nCuy/ co7nce7?7a: 
3e it known that I, EDWIN WILBUR RICE, 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Lynn, county of Essex, and State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Commutator-Brushes, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My present invention relates to carbon com 
mutator - brushes for dynamo - electric ma 
chines; and it consists in providing such a 
brush with a coating of metal gradually de 
creasing in thickness toward its wearing-sur 
face, for I have found that such a coating 
gives the brush all the advantages gained by 
the metal coating of brushes now in use, and, 
furthermore, avoids peeling of the coating 
from the carbon with the evil results incident 
thereto, which have proved heretofore a se 
rious defect. 
It has been customary to cover a carbon 
brush with a coating of copper of uniform 
thickness, as indicated in Figures 4 and 5 of the 
accompanying drawings, for securing a com 
paratively high degree of conductivity and 
avoiding heating. Upon using these brushes, 
however, it is found that the lower portions 
of the coating will peel off from the carbon, 
forming a rough jagged wearing-edge, liable 
to cause short circuits in the machine, poor 
contacts, and to interfere with freedom of play 
of the brush in its holder. This peeling is 
what I now aim to avoid, and I have found 
that it can be done by gradually decreasing 
the thickness of the metal coating, so that at 
the Wearing-surface of the brush the coating 
is very thin, practically no more than a metal 
film. It will then wear of smoothly and does 
not readily become caught, thereby stripping 
or peeling the coating. 
Tl'hese improvements are illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, wherein 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3 are respectively sections 
taken through one of my improved brushes 
with the metal coating applied in slightly 
modified ways; and Figs. 4 and 5 illustrate 
in perspective and in Section an old form of 
commutator-brush upon which my invention 
is an improvement. 
In the drawings, A represents a carbon 
commutator-brush similar to those now in use, 
and B the metal coating. In Fig. I this coat 
ing tapers uniformly from one end of the 
brush nearly down to its wearing-surface, 
while in Fig. 2 the coating is of uniform thick 
ness to a point at about the middle of the 
brush, and from there on tapers down, so that 
the thickness of the coating is gradually de 
creased, terminating at Cl, as before, in a mere 
film. Fig. 3 shows a similar coating of grad 
ually-decreasing thickness; but in this modi 
fication the coating resembles a succession of 
layers of varying and gradually-decreasing 
thickness. This arrangement, while the same 
in idea, is not considered so good as that in 
either of the preceding figures, for the in 
crease in conductivity and thickness of the 
metal is not uniforn. 
The coating can best be applied as a plat 
ing of copper and the variations in thickness 
gained in a number of ways. For instance, 
the brush can be placed in the plating-bath 
and gradually raised out of it manually or 
automatically, so that the portions of the 
brush where a heavy coating is desired would 
be the longest in the bath; or the brush may 
simply be arranged in the copper bath with 
that part which is to have a thick plating 
nearest the copper electrode; or, again, a plat 
ing of uniform thickness could be applied 
and portions dissolved by acid to gain the 
desired thinness. The first method is the 
one I consider preferable. 
In Figs. 4 and 5 the old plating of uniform 
thickness is represented at C, and the jagged 
lower edge formed by peeling of the coating 
is shown much as it appears in actual prac 
tice. By my improvements this is all avoided 
and Without Sacrificing any of the other func 
tions for which such a coating is used. The 
thin portion of the coating adheres closely 
and firmly to the carbon and wears away 
smoothly, while the thick upper portion is 
Sufficient to keep down the resistance of the 
brush and avoid heating. 
I claim 
1. A carbon commutator-brush having a 
metal coating gradually decreasing in thick 
ness toward the wearing-surface of the brush, 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. A carbon commutator-brush coated with 
35 
45 
55 
75 
I OC) 
2 
- 
447,352 
a plating of copper gradually decreasing in 
???es toward the wearing-surface of the hand this 25th day of November, 1890. 
In testimony whereof I have hereto set my 
U.S. 
3. A carbon commutator-brush coated with 
5 a plating of metal tapering down toward the 
wearing-surface of the brush until it termi- 
nates in practically a mere film, as set forth. 
EDWIN WILBUR RICE, JR. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN W. GIBBONEY, 
ELIHU THOMSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447453.txt	(No Model.) 
H. H. UNLAND. 
INCUBATOR 
No. 447,453, 
Patented Mar. 3, 1891, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
| 
I s . 
 
22 
22, 
s 126 Up 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIERMAN H. UNIAND, OF CIMARRON, KANSAS. 
W 
INCUBATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,453, dated March 3, 1891. 
Application filed March 7, 1889, Serial No. 302,386, (No model. 
IQ 
3o 
35 
40 
55 
65 
75 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HERMAN H. UNLAND, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cim 
arron, in the county of Gray and State of 
Kansas, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Incubators, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to incubators; and it 
consists in certain improvements by the means 
of which it is possible to dispense with the 
use of a liquid for transmitting the heat and 
at the same time to retain certain arrange 
ment of the egg-drawers, fully set forth in 
the following specification, and shown in the 
accompanying drawings, which forms a part 
of said specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
an incubator that will hatch all fertile eggs 
placed therein without the use of a liquid for 
transmitting the heat and at the same time 
to retain the arrangement of several drawers 
One above another. I attain these objects by 
the mechanism illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side and rear perspective of 
the incubator with the one side of both out 
side and inside cases taken away, exposing 
the arrangement of the drawers and shelves 
and a portion of the back of the outside case 
broken away, showing the position of the hot 
air chamber C. Fig. 2 is a view of the hot 
air chamber with its projecting conductors 
and the ends of slides. Fig. 3 is a view of a 
stop with its slide and opening. Fig. 4 is a 
view of an egg-drawer. Fig. 5 is a front and 
side perspective of theincubator when closed. 
A in Fig. 1 is a case of any convenient size, 
usually made of wood. In the back of case 
A is a door opposite the hot-air chamber C, 
as shown in the drawings. This door is for 
the purpose of opening in order to reach the 
ends of the slides projecting through the sides 
of the chamber C. In the front of case Aare 
openings through which the drawers D may 
slide. (See Fig. 5.) There is also an open 
ing in the bottom over which the hot-air 
chamber C is placed. Within the case A is 
the case B. The spaces between the sides 
and top of case A and case B may be from 
two to six inches to suit convenience; but the 
front and bottom of case B forms a portion 
and is fastened to the front and bottom of 
case A. The space between case A and case 
B in the rear is sufficient to allow the hot-air 
chamber C to be three or four inches distant 
from the back of case B, so the direct heat 
from the chamber C may not affect the tem 
perature in the egg-drawers. Within the case 
B are the egg-drawers D and the shelves F, 
arranged one above another. The shelves F 
are made of either wood or metal. They are 
made to fit closely and fastened to the sides 
of case B. These shelves are for the purpose 
of holding down the hot air over the several 
drawers immediately below them. 
They also 
serve to hold the pan placed upon them to 
hold the moisture for the eggs above. The 
spaces between the top of the egg-drawer and 
the shelf above is three inches, and the space 
between the bottom of the egg-drawer and 
the shelf below it is two inches. 
The hot-air chamber C, Fig. 2, is made of 
metal. It is a hollow pipe of any convenient 
size or shape as to the perimeter of its ends. 
The hot-air chamber C is supplied with con 
ductors J. They are hollow metal pipes or 
tubes and fit closely in (and one end barely en 
tering) openings cut in the sides of the hot-air 
chamber C. They pass through and fit in 
openings cut in the back of case B. The ends 
may extend within the case B a few inches, if 
desired. These conductors J are for the pur 
pose of conveying the heat from the hot-air 
chamber C through the back of case B to the 
atmosphere over the Several egg-drawers. 
The hot-air chamber C is also supplied with 
metal stops G, Fig. 3. These stops are ad 
justed and fit close within the hot-air cham 
ber C directly above the point where the con 
ductors J enter. The stops G are for the pur 
pose of diverting portions of the heated air 
from its upward course laterally through the 
conductors J. The stops G are supplied with 
slides H and openings I. The slides H have 
perforated projections, which pass through 
the sides of the hot-air chamber, so the slides 
may be manipulated from the outside of the 
air-chamber. The slides Hare for the pur 
pose of opening or closing the openings I in 
order to make the heat uniform in the vari 
ous parts of the hot-air chamber. The hot 
air chamber C may be entirely closed at the 
top. 
The egg-drawers D, Fig. 5, are made to fit 
85 
95 
OO 
- 
2 
447,453 
one in the back. I have also shown the air 
rangement for the use of a four-drawer incu 
A greater or less number of drawers 
bator, 
may be used by a similar arrangement. 
IIaving described my invention and the 
mode of applying it, what I claim as new, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
In an incubator, the combination of the 
casing A, a hatching-chamber B, egg-trays D, 
arranged a short distance apart in the hatch 
ing-chamber, a vertical hot-air chamber C 
within the casing A, pipes J, connecting the 
chamber C with the hatching-chamber just 
above each egg-tray, and means for heating 
the air in said chamber, as and for the pur-35 
pose set forth. 
Witnesses: 
IIERMIAN II. UNLAND. 
IIARRY T. W. BRICE, 
JAMES FAIREURST. 
TC) 
in the case B. The bottom of the drawers 
are well perforated to admit moisture from 
the pans on the shelves below them. 
In preparing the incubator for use I place 
it upon a trestle high enough to admit the 
lamp E, which is inclosed in a metal lamp 
safe. (See Fig. 1.) The drawers Dare taken 
out and pans of water are placed on the shelves. 
The egg-drawers are then returned in place 
and the eggs placed therein loosely, so they 
may be turned over with the hand. Over the 
eggs I place a thermometer and spread a 
thick woolen cloth to hold the moisture around 
the eggs. 
In the drawings and specification I have 
shown and specified the arrangement and use 
of one hot-air chamber; but two may be used 
by placing them on the sides instead of the 
back with a similar arrangement, or three 
2O may be used, placing one on each side and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447553.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 447,553, 
W. BARKER 
MACHINE FOR GRINDING LATHE CENTERS. 
Patented Mar, 3, 1891. 
 
le 
IN 
 
 
 
 
2A 
FIG - 4. 
2. 
HTIT-4 
' 
NS: 
2- N. 
7 N W 
 
 
 
Af 
928)i?ticssos 
(2.G. Ca- 
344-uo vitov 
sy % iteras24 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM BARKER, OF NEWPORT, KENTUCKY. 
MACH NE FOR GRIN DING LATHE CENTERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,553, dated March 3, 1891. 
Application filed September 22, 1890, Serial No. 365,724, (No model.) 
The shaft C extends beyond the tube B at 55 
To all whon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM BARKER, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Newport, in the county of Campbelland State 
of Kentucky, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Grind 
ing Lathe-Centers, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
The object of my invention is a machine for 
grinding the hardened centers of lathes, which 
can be readily attached for use without remov 
ing theface-plate or making any attachments to 
it, which can be readily set to grind the centers 
at any angle from forty-five degrees to sixty 
degrees, and when set grinds all centers to 
exactly the same angle, thus insuring perfect 
fits in mandrels and work without the use of 
gages. These objects are attained by the 
means illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the device. 
Fig. 2 is a top view. Fig. 3 is a detail view 
in side elevation of the sleeve, which carries 
the grinding-wheel spindle and furnishes its 
bearing. Fig. 4 is an elevation of the turret 
by which the spindle-sleeve, the spindle, and 
its attachments are moved longitudinally in 
the stock or frame which carries the moving 
parts. Fig. 5 is a sectional view taken in line 
acac of Fig. 1, the supporting-arm for connect 
ing the device to the foot-stock being re 
moved. 
Referring to the parts, each one of which, 
wherever it appears in any of the views, is 
indicated by the same reference-letter, the 
stock or frame which supports the moving 
parts consists of a perforated cylindrical por 
tion A, an upright standard A', a boss A', and 
lug A. These are preferably made of cast-iron 
and molded in a single piece. There is also 
formed on one side of the cylinder a lug Ct. 
The cylindrical part A is bored out true to 
receive the tubular sleeve B, which is the 
journal-bearing of the shaft C, which carries 
the emery-wheel D. The cylinder A, after it 
is bored out and the sleeve fitted to slide in 
the bore, is longitudinally slotted through its 
entire length upon one side, the slot passing 
centrally through the lug (, in order that the 
cylinder may be contracted by tightening the 
screw-bolt-a', which passes freely through the 
upper half of the lug and is tapped into the 
lower half, and thus compensates for wear 
of the joint between the cylinder and sleeve. 
each end. Near one end it has secured upon 
it a disk E and upon the other end is fitted 
by Spline-connection, as shown in Fig. 5, a 
long pinion F. After the shaft is slipped 
through the sleeve B until the disk E bears 
against one end of the tube the pinion F is 
pushed against the opposite end of the tube, 
and the shaft is held in place and prevented 
from moving longitudinally independent of 
the tube by the nut c and washer c'. 
The end of the shaft C, which extends be 
yond the disk E to receive the emery-wheel 
D, is screw-threaded to receive a nutc., which 
clamps the emery-wheel against the disk E. 
The shaft C is driven by a cog-rimmed hand 
wheel G, which is journaled on a stud-ping, 
Secured in the upper end of the standard A. 
The teethg' of the hand-wheel mesh with the 
teeth of the pinion F. 
The sleeve B has rack-teeth b formed upon 
One Side, and the boss A is bored down ver 
tically to near its bottom. The bore in the 
boss extends into the bore in the cylinder 
A, SO that when the cylinder B is in place 
its rack-teeth extend into the bore in the 
bOSS A* to mesh with the teeth of the tur 
ret-pinion H, which fits into the bore in the 
boss A*. The turret-shaft has formed upon 
it two collars l'h', the one h' to rest on the 
rim of boss A and protect the pinion from 
emery-dust and the other to receive a pin h9, 
by which the shaft and its pinion are turned 
to move the tube B, shaft C, and its connec. 
tions back and forth in the cylinder A. The 
pinion H may be secured to its shaft hin any 
approved manner or formed integral with it. 
The lower part of the shaft passes through a 
central perforation in the bottom of the boss 
A, and is held in place by a pin hf. Upon 
the lug A is jointed a tubular arm I. One 
end of the plug J is made to fit this tubular 
arm, within which it is held by a set-screw i. 
The Opposite end of the plug is turned off to 
fit into the foot-stock of any lathe. It will 
thus be seen that it is only necessary to re 
move the center of the dead-spindle and place 
the plug J in the foot-stock, when the ma 
75 
95 
OC 
O 
45 
So 
2 
447,553 
35 
45 
55 
gear for revolving the spindle, the cogged tur 
ret for reciprocating the sleeve and spindle, 
and the swiveled arm and plug for connect 
ing the machine to the lathe. 
2. In a center - grinding attachment for 
lathes, the combination of the stock carrying 
the moving parts, a spindle carrying the 
grinding-wheel longitudinally movable in said 
stock, a hand-wheel and gearing to revolve 
the spindle, the arm swiveled to said stock, 
and a plug to connect said arm and the foot 
stock of the lathe, substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. The combination, substantially as speci 
fied, of the stock comprising the cylinder A, 
standard A', boss A, and lug A', the sleeve B, 
having rack-teeth upon one side fitted to slide 
in Said cylinder, and the teeth projecting into 
the bore in boss A, the cogged turret jour 
naled in said boss and having its teeth mesh 
ing with the rack-teeth on the sleeve, the spin 
dle C, journaled in said sleeve and movable 
longitudinally with it, the pinion F, disk E, 
and grinding-wheel D, secured upon said 
shaft, the cogged hand-wheel journaled on a 
Stud in said standard and meshing with the 
pinion to revolve the shaft, the hollow arm I, 
swiveled upon lug A', and the plug J for con 
necting the device to the foot-stock of a lathe. 
WILLIAM BARRER. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. J. MURRAY, 
FRANK S. DAVIS. 
Io 
chine is ready for work. The angle to which 
the centers are to be ground is regulated by 
loosening the set-screw I and turning the ma 
chine around until the face of the emery 
wheel D is at the desired angle to the axis of 
the live-spindle or center to be ground and 
then tightening the screw I. When once the 
shaft C is set to the proper angle, it need not 
be again changed, and will be in exactly the 
right position to grind all centers to the same 
angle so soon as placed in the foot-stock. 
Thus all gaging is unnecessary. 
To operate the device, the emery-wheel is 
brought into position by moving up the foot 
stock. The emery-wheel is revolved by turn 
ing the wheel G by means of the handleg 
with one hand, while with the other hand the 
turret-shaft h is rocked to feed it back and 
forth in contact with the cone end of the cen 
ter to be ground while it is revolving. 
It is 
obvious that the plug J may be shaped to fit 
the tool-post of a lathe; but so arranged it 
could not be so quickly adjusted to its work, 
it would require gaging each time it was set 
25 to work, and the work would not be so reli 
able and much more difficult to perform. 
I claim 
1. The combination, in a center-grinding at 
tachment for lathes, of the stock, the cylin 
der B, having rack-teeth b, fitted to slide lon 
gitudinally in said stock, the spindle carry 
ing the grinding - wheel journaled in said 
sleeve and movable longitudinally with it, the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447653.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 447,653, 
J. ARBTIN. 
SMOKING PIPE, 
Patented Mar. 3, 1891. 
   
 
ass 22 
 
 
YZZWASSAS: 
eff & G-c-e- 
N-N 
72%/62/6 
--- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIN ARBTIN, OF DES MOINES, IOWA. 
SM OKING a PPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,653, dated March 3, 1891. 
Application filed July 29, 1890, Serial No. 360,262, (No model.) 
o 
I5 p. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN ARBTIN, a citizen 
of the United States, and a resident of Des 
Moines, in the county of Polk and State of 
Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Smoking-Pipes; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
tion, and in which- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
roved smoking-pipe. Fig. 2 is a longitudi 
nal sectional view of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
transverse sectional view of the device on 
line acac in Fig. 2, and Fig. 4 is a perspective 
detail view of the bowl with the cover and 
mouth-piece removed. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in the Several figures. 
My invention relates to smoking-pipes of 
the type generally termed smoking-tubes, 
and has for its object to provide means for se 
curely holding the bowl in the stem or mouth 
piece while the device is in use and still re 
quire no great amount of force to separate the 
parts when it is desired to clean the device. 
Furthermore, to provide means whereby the 
fingers of the user will be kept from being 
burned in handling the device. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter Ades 
ignates the stem or mouth-piece of the pipe, 
which is exactly like an ordinary cigar 
smoker, except that it is notched inside, as 
shown at B. 
C designates the metallic bowl, the end C 
of which is conical in shape to correspond 
with the shape of the inside of the stem A. 
This conical portion is slotted longitudinally 
at D, and its extreme outer end is formed into 
lugs E, which are designed to fit into the 
notch B. These lugs are of such a shape that 
when the conical portion of the bowl is put 
25 
35 
45 
into the stem or mouth-piece the lugs will be 
brought into contact with the inside surface 
of the stem just before the notch, and by 
pushing the bowl a little farther into the stem 
the lugs will be forced into and engage the 
notch, and by So doing the whole inside sur 
face of the stem from the notch to the for 
ward end will be in contact with the bowl. 
The opposite or outer end of the bowl is 
flanged at F, the object of which will be ex 
plained farther on in this specification. 
The letter G designates a cylindrical sleeve, 
which is slightly larger in cross-section than 
the bowl C, thus leaving an air-space H be 
tween the two parts. This cylinder is just 
long enough to fit between the stem and the 
flange F on the end of the bowl, and is made 
of any suitable light material. 
When it is desired to put the device to 
gether, the sleeve is first put on the bowl and 
the conical-shaped end of the bowl inserted 
into the stem, as before described. The bowl 
is then filled with tobacco and the device is 
ready for use. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
The combination of the cylindrical bowl 
having a flange at its outer end and slotted 
longitudinally at its inner tapering end, said 
slotted part bent to form lugs, the stem or 
mouth-piece having an inside annular notch 
or recess adapted to engage said lugs, and the 
cylindrical sleeve of larger diameter than the 
bowl and confined endwise between the outer 
flange on the same and the mouth-piece, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose shown and 
set forth, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOIN ARBTIN. 
Witnesses: 
O. C. PETERSON, 
A. M. MILLER. 
55 
7 o 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447753.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 447,753, 
B, BALDWIN. 
FASTENER FOR THE MEETING RAILS OF SASHES 
Patented Mar, 10, 1891. 
 
4. 
7% 
o Pipe: 22 
IW/EWT0? 
272-7 -k2, 24% 
21iorneys. 
reas co, Photo-LITHo, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BYRON BALDWIN, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FAST ENER FOR THE MEETING RAILS OF SAS HES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,753, dated March 10, 1891. 
Application filed July 2, 1890, Serial No. 357,512, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, uhon, it inval/ concern. 
IBe it known that I, BYRON BALDWIN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at IBrooklyn, 
county of Kings, State of New York, have in 
Vented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Window-Fasteners; and I declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention is designed to produce a win 
dow-fastener which shall be of such construc 
tion that when attached to a window it will 
allow the lower sash to be raised or the up 
per Sash lowered so far and no farther, and 
will prevent the device from being disengaged 
and the windows freed, except when both 
Sashes are closed. 
The invention consists in a combination of 
devices and appliances hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a part section 
of a window with my device attached thereto. 
Fig. 2 shows the construction in detail. 
In carrying out the invention, A represents 
the upper sash, and B the lower sash, of the 
window. 
C is a suitable plate rigidly engaged to the 
upper sash and provided with the slotc. The 
edges c' of this slot are raised slightly from 
the main portion of the plate, so that there is 
a recess between the edges of the slot and the 
Sash. At the base of the slot is a widened 
portion c. 
D is another plate rigidly engaged to the 
lower sash and provided with the lugs d. 
Pivoted between these lugs by the pivot d' is 
One end of the rod E. The upper end of this 
rod is so formed that it will be engaged in 
and retained in the slot c of the plate C. There 
are various ways of Soforming the upper end 
of the rod that this result may be obtained, 
that shown by me being a convenient one, 
and consisting of making the diameter of the 
rod larger than the width of the slot, and then 
providing two groovese, one on each side of 
the end, which will fit onto and travel over 
the edges c' of the slot c. The widened por 
tion c of the slot is wider than the diameter 
of the rod, so that when the end of the rod is 
lowered to this widened portion it can be 
withdrawn from the slot, and thus be disen 
gaged from the plate. 
In order that the distance to which the win 
dows may be opened may be regulated, I pro 
vide the adjustable set-screw F, and by 
loosening and adjusting this to the height de 
sired the play of the window may be limited 
as desired. So, also, in order that the operator 
may tell to just what range of play his win 
dow is limited, I provide the face of the plate 
with graduations and indicate the distance by 
numbers. Thus the figure 6 might marka play 
of six inches, which the window is permitted 
to have, and the figure 9 nine inches, &c. 
The operation of the device will at once be 
seen. The plate C is solocated on the upper 
sash that when the windows are closed the 
upper end of the rod will be at the lower end 
of the slot or at the widened portion. When 
in this position, the rod can be swung away 
from the plate, and the window thus be free 
to be raised and lowered at Will; but Suppos 
ing it is desired to open the window, say, for 
sake of illustration, six inches, to allow for Ven 
tilation, the set-screw F is set at six inches, 
thus permitting the end of the rod to play 
freely up and down in the slot until it comes 
in contact with the set-screw, when it can be 
raised no farther; or, supposing it is desired 
to allow the window to be raised twelve inches, 
the set-screw is then placed at 12 and the 
window is permitted to be opened to that ex 
tent and no farther. By this arrangement, 
as will be seen, a person can set his window, 
say, at six inches, which would not leave space 
for a person to enter, and obtain a good ven 
tilation, while feeling himself absolutely Se 
cure from any person opening the Window 
from the outside and entering. When it is 
desired to open the window to its fullest ex 
tent, all that is necessary is to close both the 
upper and lower sashes, and then the rod may 
be disengaged from the plate. In order that 
the rod cannot be disengaged from the plate 
by jarring or otherwise, except from the in 
side, I extend the lugs d out somewhat and 
provide orifices d, through which a pind 
may be inserted, thus locking the rod in an 
upright position until the pin is withdrawn. 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
447,753 
right rod E. connected at its lower extremity 
to the plate on the lower sash and having its 
upper extremity loosely connected with and 
sliding in the slotted part of the plate on the 
upper sash, and a set-screw F, adjustable 
along the slotted plate above the upper end 
of the upright rod to Serve as an abutment 
for the latter, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the upper sash of 
a window, provided with the plate C, having 
the vertical slot c, and the rod D, pivotally 
engaged to the lowel sash, having its upper 
end engaged in said slot c, of the pin (l' for 
retaining the rod in the slot c, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
BYRON BAD WIN. 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD MULLONNY, 
WILLIAM II. FRY. 
25 
35 
O 
It is, of course, ol) vious that the gradual 
tions on the face of the plate and the set 
screw might be omitted and the length of the 
slot c be made permanent. So, also, the val 
rious details of construction might be altered 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with the upper and 
lower sashes of a window, of the vertically 
slotted plate C, secured to the upper sash, a 
plate D, attached to the lower Sash, and an 
upright rod E, pivoted at its lower extremity 
to the plate on the lower sash and having its 
upper extremity loosely engaged with and 
sliding in the slotted part of the plate on the 
upper sash, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the upper and 
lower sashes of a window, of the vertically 
slotted plate C, secured to the upper sash, a 
plate I), attached to the lower sash, an up 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447853.txt	S. R. W AG G. 
PULP REFINING AND DRESSING ENGINE. 
3. Sheets-Sheet i. 
(No Model.) 
 
He mosas Peters co. Photo-thio. 
(No Model.) 
S. R. WAG; G. 
PULP REFINING AND DRESSING ENGINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 447,853, 
Patented Mar. 10, l89l. 
 
 
? ?A  
N 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
S. R. WAG G, 
PULP REFINING AND DRESSING ENGINE. 
Patented Mar, 10, 1891, 
No. 447,853, 
 
 
(2.22222222-2-2-24 
S. 
Z 
? 
| Ie, v/eventor. 
-re Norris pereas co, Photo-lif-a-, YAS: 
N, ). 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
S O L O M ON R. W. A. G. G, O F A PIP LET O N, W Is C ON SIN. 
PULP REFINING AND DRESSING ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,858, dated March 10, 1891. 
Application filed August 31, 1889, Serial No, 822,628, (No model.) 
?? 
S, with a long sleeve extending to the right 
through engine-case ending at packing-gland 
D'. Upon the inside at D is a packing-gland 55 
to prevent pulp fiber from working in between 
the shaft S and the sleeve of revolving disk 
F. On the outward end is also a packing- . 
gland D'. This disk is movable upon feather 
key K or its equivalent, sliding upon it and 
shaft S and moved back and forward by op 
erating-screws and hand-wheel C. Hand 
wheel C is attached to shaft c, which has a 
Screw-threaded engagement with nut d on 
Some fixed part of the frame. The other end 
of shaft has a bearing (direct or indirect) 
against standard e. This standard is pivoted 
at some fixed point, as g, and bears against 
collar f. The key or spline K connects collar 
f to the shaft. A compressible receptacle A, 
for oil or other fluid, is interposed between 
shaft C and standard e. A pressure-gage B 
is attached to vessel A. The pressure trans 
mitted through collar fand standard e to the 
receptacle A will be indicated on gage B, and 
this indicator shows the pressure on the stock 
between the grinding-disks. The gage will 
show the pressure, but may not correctly point 
out the exact position of disk F. The posi 
tion will be shown by the index-plate o and 8o 
a pointer p, either the index-plate or the 
pointer being attached to a fixed part of the 
machine and the other being attached to a 
movable part. This index and pointer may 
be used as an addition to the gage device 
heretofore described. 
It will be understood that modifications 
may be made, wherein equivalents are used, 
without departing from the spirit of this in 
vention. 
85 
75 
90 
O 
2 ? 
25 
To cvZZ tU7l,oin a, z, ina/Cuy/ cO1a, Ce7?72: 
Be it known that I, SOLOMON R. WAGG, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ap 
pleton, in the county of Outagamie, State of 
5 Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pulp Refining and 
Dressing Engines for Making Paper - Pulp 
Fiber, of which the following is a true speci 
fication, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings. 
My invention has for its object the improve 
ment of the work heretofore accomplished by 
the plain cone - engine, whereby a larger 
amount and better grade of Work is performed 
I5 and the pulp fibers better and more strongly 
prepared, so that it can be used in the best 
classes of writing-paper for clearing from 
shreds and knots, making long Slim fibers of 
great strength and smoothness. 
The general arrangement of parts in a plain 
taper cone-engine is well known to those 
skilled in the art, My invention is an im 
provement thereon. 
The accompanying drawings represent and 
form part of this specification, reference-let 
ters indicate like parts in the figures. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a ver 
tical longitudinal section through the engine. 
Fig. 2 is an elevation of the circular plate 
formed with or affixed to the end of cone 
shell. Fig. 3 is a partial section showing hand 
wheels for the separate and independent ad 
justments of the cone and revolving disk and 
graduated scale and pointers and packing 
gland between shaft and sleeve and the 
feather-key for sleeve to move forward and 
backward upon and cause its revolution. Fig. 
4 is an elevation of the adjustable revolving 
disk F. Fig. 5 is a perspective view, partly 
in section, showing the general relation of 
parts. 
S indicates the revolving shaft, which is 
driven by suitable power. A cone G', having 
a grinding-surface of the usual character, is 
attached to the shaft S, so as to revolve there 
with. The cone is within the casing G', which 
has interior grinding-surfaces, as usual. 
E is a circular plate or disk, having upon its 
face numerous knives, as shown in elevation 
5o in Fig. 2, and is attached to and made an ex 
tension of the ordinary cone-shell, 
35 
40 
45 
- 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with the rotating shaft, 
of a grinding-disk rotating with said shaft, 
but movable lengthwise thereof, a, fixed sur 
face against which Said disk bears the mate 
rial to be ground, and packing-glands sur 
rounding the shaft and covering the central 
part of the disk, so as to protect the same, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the fixed grind 
ing-surface, of the rotating shaft, a grinding 
disk movable lengthwise thereof and facing 
the grinding-surface, a standard connected to 
F is a circular revolving disk fitted to shaft said disk, substantially as described, and a 
95 
- 
'" 
2 
447,853 
a gage on which the standard bears, and a 
screw-shaft resting against said gage, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination, with the rotating shaft 
and a fixed grinding-surface, of a disk mov 
able on the shaft with relation to the grind 
ing-surface, and an index or indicator show 
ing the position of the grinding-disk, substan 
tially as described. 
In presence of 
SOILOMON R. WAGG. 
H. G. FREEMAN, 
C. NELSON. 
screw-shaft operating on said standard to sup 
port the same, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the fixed grinding 
surface, a rotating shaft, a movable disk on 
said shaft facing said surface, devices for 
shifting said disks lengthwise of the shaft, 
and a pressure-gage interposed in said devices 
to indicate the pressure on Said disk, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The combination of the fixed grinding 
surface, the driving-shaft and disk thereon, a 
movable standard, connections, substantially 
as described, between said standard and disk, 
I. ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US447954.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. KNIGHT. 
COMBINED MILEAGE BOOK INDICATOR AND GUARD. 
No. 447,954. 
Patented Mar. 10, 1891. 
 
 
aaya Safeway, 
SM/Zas 
 
WITNESSES- 
2-446-5 
INVENT OR. 
7%. 644. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. KNIGHT, OF NEWBURY, MASSACHUSETTS. 
COMBINED MILEAGE-BOOK INDICATOR AND GUARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 447,954, dated March 10, 1891. 
Application filed January 17, 1891, Serial No. 378,172, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. KNIGHT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
bury, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Mileage - Book Indicator and Guard, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings. 
The object of my invention is a device 
which may be readily inserted in and com 
bined with a mileage-book for these purposes, 
namely: to indicate upon its face the number 
of miles between certain places on the road 
for which the book is issued, to hold certain 
coupons which have been partially separated 
-(for instance, by the passenger) from the re 
maining coupons, so as to be conveniently 
taken, (as by the conductor,) to allow a par 
tial view of the remaining coupons, and to 
act as a guard to preserve the shape of the 
book, the invention consisting in the devices 
and combinations of devices hereinafter de 
scribed, and specifically pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a mileage-book (from which a part of 
the coupons has been removed) having a de 
vice combined there with illustrating my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of said 
device separated from the book. Fig. 3 is a 
longitudinal section of the book closed and. 
of said device combined therewith. 
The covers C and b of the mileage-book are 
generally quite thin. 
At c are shown the stubs of the leaves or 
coupons which have been removed. 
At A are the remaining leaves or coupons, 
with the exception of a part of a leaf or five 
coupons at d. 
I cut or form a plate B, preferably of heavy 
card-board, in such shape that it will have 
about the same Superficial dimensions of a 
leaf of the book, that there will be two lipse 
in the same plane with the body of the plate, 
and also that there will be open spaces fin 
the plate. An endless band or elastic C ex 
tends around each lipe and along the back 
of the plate. On the face of this plate is to 
be printed matter giving the distances be 
tween certain places, thus being a ready re 
minder of the number of coupons required. 
These required coupons-as, for instance, 
those shown at d-having been separated 
from the remaining coupons, and the leaf or 
part of leaf formed of them having been 
turned up, the plate B is inserted in the book 
so as to hold said leaf or part of leaf in con 
dition to be readily grasped and torn off with 
out disturbing the remaining leaves or cou 
pons, as illustrated in Fig. 1. When the 
plate has been thus inserted, it is held on and 
firmly against the body of the remaining 
leaves by means of the elastic, which is car 
ried around the same and the rear cover of 
the book, as shown. If there are remaining 
coupons, it is necessary that the fact be 
known when coupons are removed. The 
openings in the plate provide for this While 
the plate remains in the book. When most 
of the coupons have been removed, the thin 
covers of the book are apt to be crumpled 
when carried in the pocket or otherwise. The 
plate in the book, being more rigid than the 
covers, will operate to keep the book in shape. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with a plate B, provided 
with lipse in the same plane with the body 
of the plate, an endless band or elastic, Sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In combination with a plate B, provided 
with lipse in the same plane with the body 
of the plate and having the openings f, an 
endless band or elastic, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
3. In combination with a mileage-book, a 
plate B, provided with lips e in the same 
plane with the body of the plate and having 
openingsf, and a band or elastic engaging 
with said lips to bind said plate in the book, 
substantially as specified. 
WILLIAM. H. KNIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN I. KNIGHT, 
J. T. BROWN, 
55 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448054.txt	'"W. F. KINGERY & J. B. CAVANAUGH, 
No. 448,054, 
DERRICK FOR SLAUGHTERING ANIMALS, 
Patented Mar, 10, 1891, 
 
----- 
--- 
sess 
- rise 
re 
v.-- 
inter 
e. 
"T 
97C7-4 
7. E. 7"S 
427, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM FRANKLIN KINGERY AND J. BURDETT CAVANAUGH, OF GREEN 
FIELD, IOW.A. 
DERRICK FOR SLAUGHTERING ANIMALS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 448,054, dated March 10, 1891. 
Application filed December 16, 1890, Serial No. 374,937, (No model.) 
To all whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM FRANKLIN 
KINGERY and J. BURDETT CAVANAUGH, of 
Greenfield, in the county of Adair and State of 
5 Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Derricks for Slaughtering 
Animals; and we do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
Io skilled in the art to which it pertains to make 
and use it, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawing, which forms part of this 
specification. 
Our invention relates to an improvement 
I5 in derricks for slaughtering animals; and it 
consists in the combination of the top beam, 
the legs by which it is supported, the braces 
applied to the legs and to the top beam for 
rendering them rigid, the platform, and the 
20 tank and tank-frame, as will be more fully 
described hereinafter. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
folding derrick, which is designed to be used 
more especially by farmersin slaughteringani 
25 mals of all kinds, and which when no longer 
needed for immediate use can be folded up 
and packed away. 
The accompanying drawing represents a 
perspective of a derrick which embodies our 
A represents the top beam upon which the 
animals are to be hung, and which beam is 
to be supported by two pairs of legs B, which 
are pivoted thereto. These legs are connect 
35 ed together by the end braces C, the side 
arms D, and the side braces F. The side arms 
and side braces are to be removed whenever 
cattle or other heavy animals are to be slaugh 
tered. When cattle are to be slaughtered, the 
4o Side arms D and braces F are removed, and 
then the middle brace G is secured to the un 
der side of the top beam and to the end C at 
the opposite end from the hoisting apparatus. 
If hogs and sheep are to be slaughtered, the 
45 middle brace G is not used, but the side arms 
and side braces are. Placed upon the top of 
the side arms is the platform H, and placed 
againstone end of the platform is the inclined 
plank I, up which the slaughtered animals 
3o invention. 
 
The hoisting apparatus consists of a drum 6o 
are drawn by the hoisting apparatus. Se- 5o 
cured to the side arm opposite the end of the 
platform are the two legs or supports J, and 
pivoted or otherwise secured to these legs at 
any angle thereto are the supports L, which 
form the tank-frame and which are connected 55 
at their upper ends by a cross-lever O. The 
tank, which is formed of any suitable mate 
rial, contains the hot water which is to be 
used in scalding the animals. 
P, provided with a crank, around which a rope 
Q is passed. This rope passes up over the 
double block R and around the single block 
S, which is provided with a swivel-hook T. 
Upon the top of the beam are placed the roll- 65 
ers U, from which extend the hangers V, to 
the outer ends of which the hooks Ware fast 
ened. Upon these hooks W the slaughtered 
animals are hung as fast as they are finished, 
and then the animals are moved back out of 70. 
the way, the middle brace G not being used, 
as before stated, except when large animals, 
like beeves, are being killed. 
When the derrick is not needed for imme 
diate use, the platform, draw-tank, side arms, 75 
and side and middle braces are removed, and 
the legs are then folded up under the beam. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim 
1. In a slaughtering apparatus, the support- 8o 
ing-legs, the beam supported at their upper 
ends, the side arms, a platform, and a tank or 
receptacle at one end of the platform having 
its open end substantially in a plane with the 
surface of the said platform, whereby the ani- 85 
mals may be passed from the platform into the 
tank, substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination of the beam, the sup 
porting-legs, the side arms, the platform, the 
legs or supports J, the Supports L, cross-lever, 9o 
and the tank, Substantially as shown. 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
WILLIAMI FRANKLIN KINGERY, 
J. BURDETT CAYANAUGH. 
Witnesses: 
JESSE HINES, 
JAMES A. BOYD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448154.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 448,154, 
H. A. MACE, 
FOOD FENCE, 
Patented Mar. 10, 1891, 
 
 
YY (repres: 
694, 
6. (7. 24-6. 
v 
\, 
A 
A 
Aer 
c/nventor 
Z.A. W1ace 
224-444 
6 ZZo/ne/ 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARVEY A. MACE, OF MOUNT ZION, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ON E-HALF To 
DAVID BLALOCK, OF SAME PLACE. 
FOOD FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 448,154, dated March 10, 1891. 
Application filed October 1, 1890, Serial No, 366,785, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
5 
To Cult, twiwon, it inctly concern: 
IBe it known that I, IIARVEY A. MACE, of 
Mount Zion, in the county of Macon and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Flood-Fences; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art 
to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form part of this speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in flood-fences. 
The object of the invention is to provide an 
improved flood-fence extremely strong and 
durable, effectively closing the opening when 
the Water is low and allowing the free pas 
Sage of water and drift in time of flood. 
These objects are accomplished by and the 
invention consists in certain novel features 
of Construction and combinations of parts 
more fully described hereinafter, and particu 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a perspective showing the fence, 
the anchors or holding-stakes being shown in 
dotted lines. 
Fig. 2 is an end view of the 
Construction of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-sec 
tion through the swinging beam. 
In the drawings, the reference-letter a, in 
dicates the two horizontal ground-sills buried 
below the surface of the ground. Each sill 
has the swinging clevises to pivoted to and 
eXtending beyond its beveled ends, and 
Stakes care driven into the earth in inclined 
directions, as shown through said clevises 
and against the ends of the sills, thereby 
firmly and rigidly anchoring the same. These 
Stakes tightly wedge against the ends of the 
Sill and are held by the clevises, which, being 
loosely joined to the sills, can accommodate 
themselves to the angle at which the stakes 
enter the ground. Each sill is provided with 
a Supporting-frame composed of a pair of in 
clined beams d at their lower ends, secured 
rigidly to the sill a distance apart and from 
thence extending upwardly and secured to 
gether at their upper ends, thus forming a 
frame of great rigidity in the form of an isos 
celes triangle. A strong horizontal bolt e is 
passed through the upper portions of each 
pair of beams d a short distance below the 
upper ends thereof and the apex of the angle 
formed thereby. The swinging beam f ex 
tends between said ground-sills, and at its 
ends extends beneath the supporting-bolts e 
e, and is suspended loosely from the Salme by 
means of links g, embracing and sliding on 
said bolts, and at their lower ends pivotally 
and strongly secured to the respective ends 
of the swinging beam. h. are the vertical 
pickets carried by said beam. This swinging 
beam is preferably formed in two longitudi 
nal sections, one of which on its inner face is 
provided with sockets to receive the lower 
ends of the pickets, and the two sections are 
then rigidly secured together. This mall 
ner of securing the pickets makes the struct 
ure very rigid and the pickets cannot be 
knocked off except by breaking them. In 
case of flood or high water drift floating down 
will strike the pickets, and thereby rotate the 
beam so as to swing down the pickets into a 
horizontal position. When the beam fswings 
so as to turn the pickets down, it swings on 
said links up against one of the inclined 
beams and the links slide to the opposite end 
of the supporting-bolts. 
The many advantages and great durability 
and effectiveness of this combination are ob 
vious. 
I do not herein broadly claim a swinging 
beam carried by links suspended from hori 
Zontal bolts connecting parallel vertical posts 
mounted on horizontal sills; nor do I broadly 
claim inclined stakes for anchoring a hori 
Zontal sill, nor other features herein set forth 
and separately disclosed in the prior state of 
the art; but 
- 
What I claim is 
The herein-described flood-fence, consisting 
in the combination of the parallel horizontal 
sills Cl (, buried beneath the surface of the 
earth and having beveled ends and anchored 
by stakes driven through clevises against Said 
ends, a triangular supporting-frame on each 
sill, consisting of the two beams did, at their 
lower ends secured on the silla distance apart 
95 
O 9 
35 
45 
 
2. 
448,154 
and rigidly and directly bolted together at 
their upper ends, the swinging beam f, loosely my own I affix my signature in presence of fo 
suspended within said frames from the upper two witnesses. 
portions of said beams d, the horizontal bolts 
e, and the suspending-links thereon carrying 
beam f, said swinging beam being formed in 
longitudinal sections between which the pick 
ets are clamped, as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
IIARVEY A. MACE. 
Witnesses. 
WILLIAM B. HUNTER, 
J. M. HUTCHISON. 
5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448254.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
- 
C. R. PENFIELD. 
CUTTER HEAD, 
2 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 448,254, 
Patented Mar, 17, 1891. 
 
(No Model.) 
C, R, PENFIELD, 
CUTTER HEAD, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 448,254, 
Patented Mar, 17, 1891. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IC 
E: 
% 
N 
1734. A 4 
W. W. W. 
N4% 4 4N 
D 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
?a 
EA ad, /62 
341.uc-viot 
UNITEL STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIIARLES R. PEN FIELD, OF LANSING, MICHIGAN. 
CTER HEAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 448,254, dated March 17, 1891. 
Application filed Februaryl, 1890, Serial No, 338,942, (No model.) 
55 
75 
f of Fig. 1. 
To all whon, it in Gulf CO7 ce/'7. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES R. PENFIELD, 
of Lansing, in the county of Ingham and State 
of Michigan, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Cutter - Heads; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the drawings accom 
panying this application. 
My improvement relates to cutter-heads for 
matching lumber, dressing moldings, and for 
similar uses; and it consists in the construc 
tion and arrangement of parts hereinafter de 
Scribed and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an end view 
of my improved cutter-head. 
Fig. 2 is a cen 
tral horizontal section of the same in line aca: 
of Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a central vertical section 
of the same in line if 
Fig. 4 is a 
diagram showing a central horizontal section 
of a portion of the head and two of the knives 
resting therein, said knives being reversed or 
turned in the opposite direction from their 
position in cutting and designed to exhibit 
the method of finishing the knives in an en 
gine-lathe preparatory to use. Fig. 5 is a 
horizontal section of a portion of the guide 
band or case that Surrounds the head. Fig. 
6 is a plan view of Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a dia 
gram showing a plan view of two of the groov 
ing-knives and exhibiting the alternating off 
set position of the points of said knives to 
prevent binding in cutting the lumber and 
provide clearance in operation. Figs. S, 9, 
10, 11, and 12 are views showing different 
forms of the knives. 
The cutter-head is composed of two parts 
A and A', which are divided by a cleft Ct, that 
extends nearly or quite through to the cen 
ter, thus making the head in the form of a 
clamp, the two parts of which are united by 
clamp-screws BB. B. The rim of the head is 
provided with a series of round holes b l, 
formed partially in each half of the head to 
receive the round shanks of the knives, and 
the inner ends of the holes are provided with 
screw-threads to receive corresponding screw 
threads on the Shanks. 
C C are the knives, provided with cylin 
drical shanks C C, which enter the round 
holes b b in the head and are held fast by the 
clamp-screws that pass through the head. The 
inner ends of the shanks have screw-threads 
c c, which enter the internal threads of the 
holes to b, as before described. The shanks 
are located at an acute angle to the cutting 
blades, as shown. This angle is determined 
by the diameter of the head, the object be 
ing to enable the knives to be turned up and 
dressed on the same head in which they are 
afterward used. To do this the knives are 
turned to the position shown in Fig. 4-that 
is, the points are turned in the reverse direc 
tion from that in which they run in use. In 
this position the inner sides of the cutters 
rest close to the head and the Otter sides form 
a true circle concentric with the head itself. 
When the cutters are thus arranged, the cut 
ter-head can be placed in an engine-lathe and 
all the cutter's be turned up and finished at One 
operation. After being thus finished the cut 
ters are turned half-Way around to bring them 
in the reverse position for use and the points 
stand out like saw-teeth, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. The shanks, might radiate from the 
center; but in such case the cutter's Would 
have to be turned up and dressed on a head 
made for that special purpose. The cutting 
points of the knives are beveled inward, as 
shown at did. By this means the knives can 
be sharpened by holding the beveled edges 
to an emery-wheel, the grinding being done 
on the beveled edge only. Harder cutters 
can be used than those ordinarily employed, 
and they will therefore wear much longer be 
fore being lesharpened. 
Various forms of cutters may be used, ac 
cording to the Work to be done. Figs. 1, 2, 
and 3 show grooving cutters for matching 
boards. Fig. S shows the corresponding cut 
ter for tonguing boards. Fig. 9 shows a cut 
ter for forming a half-round on a rod or other 
piece. Fig. 10 shows a straight-edger. Fig. 
11 shows an ogee-edger, and Fig. 12 one form 
for cutting moldings. 
Cutters of any desired shape and any pur 
pose where lumber is to be fashioned and 
dressed may be employed. 
The points of the tonguing-and-grooving 
knives are set in the alternate position shown 
in Fig. 7-that is, they are slightly offset at 
opposite points, SO that in action they cut a 
tongue or groove somewhat wider than the 
cutters themselves. This gives clearance back 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
9 O 
95 
OC 
o 
448,254 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
of the points of the knives and prevents in a 
great degree the friction that occurs by a 
close contact of the sides of the knives with 
the sides of the wood. Said sides are entirely 
removed from contact with the wood, 
G is a guard consisting of a case provided 
with a face-plate g, that covers one end of 
the cutter-head, and a rim h, that embraces 
the periphery of the head. Holes i are made 
in the rim to allow passage of the cutter 
shanks C C, and these holes are elongated, 
as shown in Figs. 5 and 6, to allow a degree 
of turning movement to the guard, for a pur 
pose presently to be described. Back of each 
of these holes is a lug k of greater thickness 
than the body of the rim and gradually ta 
pering away from the holes. On each side 
of these lugs are vertical tongues l l at such 
a distance apart as to allow the knives C C 
to rest between them. 
When the cutter-head is fitted for work, 
the guard G is turned back, so that the tongues 
ll embrace the sides of the cutters, as shown 
in Fig. 1, and the lugs k k rest in and fill the 
angular spaces under the cutters and next to 
the head. The guard is held in position by 
three of the clamping-bolts B B B, which pass 
through concentric slots n n n of the guard 
and have nuts in n n on their ends. The slots 
are of sufficient length to allow the necessary 
turning movement of the guard. 
The lugs kle by filling the angular spaces 
under the cutters prevent the lodgment of 
chips and dust at those points, and therefore 
prevent clogging and irregular action. They 
also give stiffness and strength to the cutters 
and prevent trembling. The tongues l l by 
embracing the cutters keep them always in 
line and prevent any accidental turning to 
the right or left. Whenever it is necessary 
to turn the cutters or remove them the guard 
can be turned to relieve the tongues from the 
cutters and they can then be turned or re 
moved without difficulty. 
K is the hollow hub by which the cutter 
head is attached to the operating-mandrel. 
By the use of a divided cutter-head with 
round holes for holding cutters with round 
shanks, such as described, said shanks can be 
tightened or loosened in a few moments time. 
The screw-threads on the ends of the shanks 
enable the cutters to be adjusted outward at 
any time to compensate for wear or the grind 
ing away of points. To adjust them it is only 
necessary to loosen the guard G and then give 
one or more turns to the cutter-shanks to screw 
them out. These Screw-threads also prevent 
the cutters from being thrown out of the head 
or becoming loosened by the centrifugal ac 
tion under rapid motion. By this special 
construction a greater number of cutters can 
be inserted in the head, and therefore more 
rapid work can be done than by ordinary cut 
ter-heads. 
65 
o 
75 
85 
90 
95 
Od 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of a cutter-head com 
posed of two parts and provided with round 
holes in its periphery, a set of cutters pro 
vided with cylindrical shanks resting in said 
holes, and clamping-screws passing through 
the head and clamping the parts of the same 
to the cutter-shanks, as herein shown and de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with a cutter - head 
composed of two parts and having round 
holes in its periphery, of a set of cutters hav 
ing cylindrical shanks resting in said holes, 
the ends of the shanks and the inner ends of 
the holes having screw-threads which fit to 
gether, and a set of clamping-screws passing 
through the head to clamp the parts together, 
as herein shown and described. 
3. The combination, with a circular cutter 
head composed of two parts and provided 
with round holes arranged tangentially to 
the axis of rotation, of a set of cutters With 
cylindrical shanks fitting in said holes and 
standing at an acute angle to the cutter 
head, whereby when said cutters are set in 
reverse positions from their position in use 
they form a true circle at their periphery, as 
herein shown and described. 
4. The combination, with a circular cutter 
head and a set of cutter's provided with cy 
lindrical shanks that rest in round holes of 
said head, of a guard consisting of a band 
which encircles the head, provided with elon 
gated holes for the passage of the cutter 
shanks and with filling-lugs which rest un 
der the cutters and between them and the 
head, as herein specified. 
5. The combination, with a circular cutter 
head and a set of cutters provided with cy 
lindrical shanks that rest in round holes of 
said head, of a guard consisting of a band 
which encircles the head, provided with elon 
gated holes for the passage of the cutter 
shanks and With tongues on opposite sides 
which embrace the sides of the cutters to 
hold them in position, as herein specified. 
6. The combination, with a cutter-head hav 
ing round holes in its periphery, of a series 
of knives consisting of segmental cutting 
blades and cylindrical shanks adapted to fit 
in holes of the cutter-head, whereby the cut 
ting-points can be set in alternately offset po 
sitions by turning the cutters on the axes of 
the shanks, as herein shown and described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
CHARLES R. PENFIELD. 
Witnesses: 
FRANKLIN S. PORTER, 
FRANK. E. ROBSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448354.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 448,354, 
7.2" 
F. MESKER & T. O. ARBEGUST. 
WINDOW. SASH, 
/7 z. 
" 
. 
. 
. ." 
WITNESSES: 
2.444 
%Y 24- 
II. WEATORS 
37:46:2:2, 7. 
(26%.7% 
ATTOREV 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRANK MIESIKER AND THOMAS O. ARBEGUST, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
WINDOW. SASH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 448,354, dated March 17, 1891. 
Application filed May 3, 1890, Serial No. 350,527. (No model.) 
- 
backward, as shown at b', and the panel is 
Be it known that we, FRANK MESKER and provided with or shaped to form a flange d', 
which rests upon the beveled edge b' and ex 
tendis backward and upward to the upper cor 
ner  of the bottom rail, and thence the pan 
el-flange d'is extended downward at diagainst 
the back surface l of the bottom rail, and 
the panel is secured to the botton rail by 
means of nails d, driven through the flange 
extension d into the bottom rail, as shown. 
In the former construction the entire panel 
is not allowed to project in front of the rab 
bet H, which is formed in each of the stiles. 
In the present construction a portion d', Fig. 
5, does project in front of the rabbets, and to 
provide for such portion the projecting edge 
a of the stile in each stile is removed, as at a'. 
While this mode of joining the panel and 
stiles is perhaps more expensive, it serves to 
unite the panel more securely with the stiles. 
The panel is also, as in the former construc 
tion, provided at its side edges with nailing 
flanges d, which are nailed to the stiles, as 
shown. The transom-bar is similarly united 
with the stiles, the bar having a portion or 
portions ff, which project in front of the rab 
bets, and the edge C. of the stiles being re 
moved, as at a, to admit the portions f. 
To aid, whon, it naif conce77. 
THOMAS O. ARBEGUST, of St. Louis, Missouri, 
have jointly made a new and useful Improve 
ment in Window-Sashes, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
Our invention relates to what are known to 
the trade as show-sashes, and particularly 
to that class of show-sashes having metal 
panels and transom-bars, or either thereof; 
and it consists in the special mode of con 
structing the metal portions of the sash and 
uniting them with the stiles and rails of 
the sash, substantially as is hereinafter set 
forth and described, aided by the annexed 
drawings, making part of this specification, 
in which- 
Figure 1 is an elevation of the upper left 
hand corner of the improved sash; Fig. 2, a ver 
tical section on the line 22 of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, an 
elevation of the lower left-hand corner of the 
sash; Fig. 4, a horizontal section on the line 
4 4 of Fig. 3, and Fig. 5 a vertical section on 
the line 55 of Fig. 4. 
Only those portions of the sash are shown 
which are essential to an understanding of 
the construction. 
The same letters of reference denote the 
Saline pal'ts. 
A represents one of the sash-stiles; IB, the 
bottom rail; C, the top rail; D, the panel 
above the bottom rail; E, the glass pane 
above the panel; F, the transom-bar, and G 
the transom light or pane. All these parts 
are respectively shaped and are combined 
Substantially as is exemplified in a concur 
rent application (Serial No. 349,195, filed 
April 23, 1890) of ours for an improvement 
in window-sashes, wherein a metal panel and 
transom-bar and other features of construc 
tion alre shown, saying as helreinafter specified. 
In the construction referred to the panel at its 
lower edged projects slightly in front of the 
front surfaceb of the bottom rail. In the pres 
ent instance the panel does not so project in 
front of the bottom rail, but is united there 
with, as shown substantially-that is, the 
panel, oratleast the main portion thereof, is set 
in from the front surface of the bottom rail, 
and it meets the bottom rail preferably about 
half-Way through to the back of the bottom 
rail. The bottom rail is beveled upward and 
We claim 
1. In a sash, the counbination of the 'ab 
beted stiles and the sheet-metal panel having 
the projecting portion d', substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a sash, the combination, with the rab 
beted stiles, of the sheet-metal transon-bar 
having one or more projecting portions ff. 
substantially as described. 
3. In a sash, the combination, with the rab 
beted stiles having portions of the edge a re 
moved, of the panel having a projecting por 
tion d', and the transon-bar having one or 
more projecting portions, substantially as de 
scribed. 
Witness our hands this 21st day of April, 
FRANIX MIESIXER. 
TIOMIAS O. ARBEGUST. 
Witnesses: 
C. D. MOODY, 
B. F. REX. 
1890. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
G ) 
7 o 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448454.txt	(No Model.) 
E, B. OWEN. 
DOOR KNOB. 
No, 448,454. 
| Patented Mar, 17, 1891. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDMUND B. OWEN, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO WILLIAM W. THOMAS, OF SAME PLACE. 
N 
D. COR. KNOB. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 448,454, dated March 17, 1891. 
w 
Application filed September 26, 1889, Serial No. 325,186, (No model.) 
. 
IC) 
25 
To Cull tw/v07), i 7nval? concer7n: 
Be it known that I, EDMUND B. OWEN, of 
Jersey City, in the county of Hudson and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a certain 
new and useful Improvement in Means for 
Attaching Door-Knobs, of which the follow 
ing is a Specification. 
I will describe in detail a door-knob em 
bodying my improvement, and then point out 
the novel features in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section of a door-knob embodying 
my improvement. Fig. 2 is a face view of a 
door-knob, certain parts shown in Fig. 1 be 
ing removed. Fig. 3 is a detail view of a cer 
tain locking-piece which I employ. Fig. 4 is 
a central section of the locking-piece shown 
in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is an end view of the same, 
looking in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 3. 
Fig. 6 is a detail in section of a shank which 
I employ. 
Similar letters of reference designate cor 
responding parts in all the figures. 
A designates the door-knob, which may be 
of amy suitable material and shape. The 
door-knob is provided about centrally and 
upon one side with a recess C. This recess 
has upon opposite sides grooves C', which ex 
tend from the outer to the inner end of the 
recess and taper gradually from end to end, 
or, in other words, the grooves are deeper at 
their inner ends than at their Outer ends. 
B designates a locking-piece. This lock 
ing-piece is preferably made of metal and is 
provided upon opposite sides with external 
wings b, These wings conform substantially 
in shape to the grooves Ce' in the knob, The 
locking-piece is, however, of less diameter 
than is the recess C, and is provided with an 
opening b" therein larger than the door-spin 
dle herein after described, whereby a consid 
erable range of adjustment for spindles of 
different lengths is obtained. 
C designates a shank, which shank, as 
45 shown, consists of a metal cylinder c, in 
which is secureda, bushing c', having formed 
in it a rectangular opening adapted to re 
ceive a spindle D. Encircling the metal cyl 
inder c is a collar E. 
In assembling the parts the locking-piece 
30 
35 
50 
55 
60 
65 
B is placed within the recess C. The metal 
Cylinder C is then passed into the recess Cr, but 
outside of the locking-piece B. It is then, by 
a blow or otherwise, driven in wardly, when 
the wings b operate to expand the metal cyl 
inder into the grooves Cl'. When thus ex 
panded, the cylinder cannot be withdrawn 
and the shank and knobare firmly secured 
together. When thus driven in, the collar E 
rests against the Side of the knob Aand ef 
fectually closes the outer end of the recess ca. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
Secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a knob provided 
upon one side with a recess having grooves, 
as C', of a locking-piece arranged in said re 
cess, provided with wings extending into said 
grooves, and a shank comprising a metallic 
cylinder adapted to be foreed into said recess 
and spread into said grooves by the wings of 
the locking-piece, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with a door-knob haV 
inga dovetailed or inwardly-enlarged recess, 
of a tubular Shank having a substantially 
Straight and uniform bore and at One end 
adapted to Snuglyfit Said recess, and a central 
expander made Separate from the knob and 
Consisting of a tapering plug larger in its 
greatest diameter than the internal diameter 
of the shank and having a hole formed there 
in larger than the door - spindle, whereby 
When the expander is placed in the knob-re 
Cess and haS the end of the shank forced in 
ward over it it forces said end in all direc 
tions against the wall of the recess, and when 85 
all the parts are Secured together a consider 
able range of adjustment for spindies of dif 
ferent lengths is obtained. 
3. The combination, witha, door-knobhaving 
a, dovetailed or in Wardly-enlarged recess, of a 
tubularshankhaving a substantially straight 
and uniform bore and at one end adapted to 
Snugly fit said recess, and a central expander 
made Separate from the knob and consisting 
of a tapering plug larger in its greatest di 
ameter than the internal diameter of the 
Shank and provided with one or more pro 
jecting parts upon its surface, whereby when 
the expander is placed in the knob-recess it 
is prevented from turning therein, and when 
75 
95 
IOO) 
448,454 
it has the end of the shank forcedinward over 
it it forees said end in all directions against 
the walls of the recess. 
4. The Combination, with a door-knob hav 
inga dovetailed or inwardly-enlarged recess 
and One or more depressions in the walls of 
the recess, of a tubular shank having a sub 
stantially Straight and uniform bore and at 
one end adapted to Snuglyfit said recess, anda 
central expander made separate from the 
knob and consisting of a tapering plug larger 
in its greatest diameter than the internal di 
ameter of the shank and provided with one 
or more projecting parts upon its surface 
adapted to fit in one or more of the depres 
sions in the walls of the recess in the knob. 
5. The combination, with a door-knob hav 
inga dovetailed or inwardly-enlarged recess, 
5 
15 
of a tubular shank having a substantially 
Straight and uniform bore and at One end 
adapted to fit Said recess and a central ex 
pander madeseparate from the knob and con 
sisting of a tapering plug largerinits greatest 
diameter than the internal diameter of the 
shank and provided with one or more project 
ing parts upon its side surface, whereby when 
the expander is placed in the knob-recess and 
has the end of the shank forced in ward over 
it it forces said end in all directions against 
the wall of the recess and the projections on 
the side surface engage with said end of the 
tubular Shank. 
25 
30 
EDIMUND B. OWEN. 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
D.H. HAYWOOD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448554.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. SNAMAN, Jr. 
COMBINED TRUNK AND BED, 
2. Sheets-Sheet it. 
No. 448,554. 
Patented Mar. 17, 1891, 
WITNESSES: 
(27%/62-Z, 
-47ccer 
- 
2 INVENTOR: 
57%-72, 
* Muw is 
ATTORMEYS 
(No Model.) 
G. W. SNAMAN, Jr. 
COMBINED TRUNK AND BED, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 448,554, 
22 tented Mar, 17, 1891, 
Z - Yasasasay 
te 
WFTNESSES 
18-ga- 
r 
N A. Yaaa s Sax. M ar 
 
As 
BY 
4-cyl ve. 
ATTOR/WEWS 
THE NOARIs PETERs co, * cry-Li Ho, WASHIrors", , c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. SNAMAN, JR., OF ALLEGHENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
coMBINED TRUNK AND BED. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 448,554, dated March 17, 1891. 
Application filed September 6 1890, Serial No, 364l38, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. SNAMAN, 
Jr., of Allegheny, in the county of Allegheny 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
5 new and useful Combined Trunk and Bed, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
chest or trunk which is adapted for speedy 
conversion into a bed, and more particularly 
to furnish a compact folding bedstead for 
temporary use by parties camping out, the 
device being capable of holding the bedding 
and articles of personal wear also when 
changed from a bedstead into the form of a 
chest or trunk. 
A further object is to furnish a convertible 
bed and trunk with removable supports to 
elevate the device in bedstead form from the 
ground or flooring, and also to provide a re 
movable covering or screen which will shield 
the occupant from the attacks of venomous 
insects. 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
construction and combination of parts, as is 
hereinafter described, and indicated in the 
claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
3o in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure l is a perspective view of the device 
with the parts adjusted to form a trunk or 
chest. Fig.2 represents the parts in the form 
of a trunk, with one end removed to expose 
the contents, one mattress - Section being 
broken to expose other parts below it. Fig. 3 
is a view of the end wall of the trunk that is 
adjustable and that has been removed from 
place in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 represents the parts of 
the device and a portion of its contents when 
in trunk form converted into a bedstead, a 
bed within, and a screening-cover, the latter 
being broken away to display the mattress in 
position for use, a covered tray being also 
shown, which is one of the essential features 
of the device. Fig. 5 is a view of the trunk 
tray, showing its lid open and broken away. 
Fig. 6 is an enlarged longitudinal sectional 
elevation of one end portion of a trunk-sec 
tion and a trunk-tray in position therein. 
Fig. 7 is a viewin section of one corner of the 
35 
45 
So 
device and an attached leg; and Fig. 8 is a 
transverse section in elevation of the trunk 
tray and its lid closed, with legs for the lid 
shown in the tray. 
There are two main portions or sections. A 
A provided, which are of rectangular form 
and similar dimensions. Said sections are 
open at one end. One section. A has a sub 
stantial bottom a, secured to the sides band 
an attached end c, the other section A' having 
similar sides and end wall and a lidd hinged 
to one side edge and provided with a secure 
hasp-lock d' of any preferred form. 
At the open ends of the sections A A' there 
are vertical strips e, secured thereto, which 
strips project in Wardly a sufficient distance 
to produce keeper-ledges, and on the inner 
Surfaces of the side Walls to on each section 
there are rabbeted strips e', secured adjacent 
to the projected portions of the end strips e, 
a proper space intervening. The end strips 
e and rabbeted strips e' afford L-shaped 
grooves, which will become continuous on 
each side when the section A' is located ex 
actly upon the other section A and their edges 
maintained in alignment by hinge-jointing 
the sections together at the open ends, as 
shown at e in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The loose end wall f (shown detached in 
Fig. 3) is made of proper dimensions to fit 
neatly between the edges of the vertical strips 
e, and also between the lid d and bottom c. 
when inserted. The side edges of the remov. 
able end wall having flanges f' formed on or 
secured thereto, which are adapted to slide 
in the grooves produced by the junction of 
the rabbeted strips e' with the side walls b, 
and thus lock the two sections A A' together 
so as to form a rectangular box or trunk 
body when the end wall is in position, as 
shown in Fig. 1. 
To relieve the hinges e from lateral strain 
and retain the joined edges of the two sec 
tions A A' in vertical alignment, there are 
opposite earsg, secured on the inner surfaces 
of the side walls b, near the free end of one 
section, which ears by their contact with the 
inner faces of the side wall on the other sec 
tion will prevent lateral displacement when 
the two sections are folded together, and when 
So adjusted they may be secured at their un 
hinged ends by the hook g on one end wall 
7 O 
9 O 
95 
CO 
448,554 
that should engage the staple if on the other 
end wall, and thus removably hold the parts 
connected. 
The tray C is made of such relative propor 
tions that it may be freely inserted in the 
trunk When the Sections are connected to form 
such a receptacle, and as shown in Figs. 5 and 
S, has any desired number of separated in 
closures formed by division-walls in it, so that 
articles of apparel may be kept therein from 
contact with other material of a different na 
ture. The tray is provided with a lid C, 
which is hinge-jointed to the tray-body C in 
a manner to permit a quick removal of the 
lid, the hinges i (shown in Fig. 5) being well 
adapted to afford such a connection and re 
moval of the lid by a slight longitudinal nove 
ment of the same in the right direction. On 
the lid C, near its four corner's perforated 
and threaded disks i', are secured, which fur 
nish means for the adjustable connection of 
loose legs that are kept in the tray C when 
not in use. Said legs. When attached to the lid 
by screwing them into the disks i', will sup 
ort the lid and convert it into a table. 
When the trunk is to be converted into a 
bedstead, the end wall f is removed and the 
two sections A A' opened out to lie in the same 
plane, forming an open box of half the height 
of the trunk and double its length, the bed 
frame thus provided having the legs at 
tached thereto by the threaded engagement 
of their upper ends with the nuts he', (see Fig. 
7,) that are affixed near each corner of the bot 
tom C, and the lid (l, that now becomes a part 
of the bed-bottom. 
Two mattresses I) are provided which will 
fit loosely in the trunk when the parts are as 
sembled in that form. Said mattresses when 
placed end wise together in the sections A A', 
that have been arranged to form a bedstead, 
as in Fig. 4, will afford a confortable bed; 
and as the side and end walls of the sections 
named are higher than the mattresses, side 
drafts of air are prevented from reaching the 
occupant of the bed. 
Upon the upper edges of the sections A A' 
when adjusted in the form of a bedstead, the 
bent wire rods 
are erected by a loose in 
sertion of their ends into Suitable perforations 
in said edges, these bows of Wire together 
forming a support for a gauze fabric E, which 
when in place will protect the occupant of 
the bed from mosquitoes or other insect pests 
that fly. 
When the parts are to be assembled and 
packed, the netting E is placed in one of the 
compartments of the tray C, and the bed-legs 
k with the wire rods in are introduced be 
tween the mattresses D or any other preferred 
place in the trunk. The tray C, being located 
on the depending hooks n, is supported by 
them in a horizontal position, and said tray 
may be placed above both mattresses or be 
tween them, as may be preferred. When the 
tray is in place, the slide-bolts O on its lid may 
be slid outwardly to enter perforations in the 
end walls of the section it is inserted in, and 
thus the tray and parts below' it will be re 
tained in place. 
The combined trunk and bed herein de 
Scribed is useful for hunting and fishing par 
ties, travelers, and tourists, and is also con 
venient as a household article of furniture 
when a bed is temporarily required. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a convertible trunk, the combination, 
with two equal body-sections that are open at 
one end and are hinged together at the open 
end so as to permit said sections to be extended 
in the same plane, vertical strips secured on 
the sides of the body-sections at their open 
ends, and adjacent parallel ral) beted strips 
which with the end strips afford locking 
grooves on the inner surfaces of the body-sec 
tions at their open ends, of an end wall which 
is adapted to slide in the locking-grooves when 
the body-sections are folded one above the 
other, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a trunk comprised 
of two body-sections that are each open at one 
end and hinged together at said open ends, of 
an insertible loose end wall which is adapted 
to interlock with grooves formed at the open 
ends of the body-sections, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. The combination, with a trunk comprised 
of two body-sections that are open at one end 
and hinged together at said open ends, an in 
sertible end Wall, and depending hooks in 
the trunk-body, of a tray that is adapted to 
rest on these hooks, and sliding latch-bolts 
which secure the hinged lid of the tray, sub 
stantially as Set, forth. 
GEORGE W. SNAMAN, JR. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES EBERLE, 
C. R. WEITERSHAUSEN. 
65 
75 
85 
95 
Io 
IO 5 
O 
25 D 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448654.txt	(No Model.) 
G, H, JANT Z. 
WASHING MACHINE, 
No. 448,654, 
Patented Mar, 24, 1891. 
 
7 ft 
IZ. 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
FIFIGS FT in 
I-7. 
I 
: 
2 I. 
T. 
 
SW 
SteWS 
S\HS 
SAW 
SWS 
2 
2 
2 
SHHS2 
SEIS2 
\ 2Sssssinnnn.nss. se 
2. 2 SS S 
I 
  
 
 
6:22. 
3. 
The noaats Peters co, Photo-Litho, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAV H. JANTZ, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
WASHING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 448,654, dated March 24, 1891. 
Application filed January 20, 1890, Serial No, 337,438, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that , GUSTAV H. JANTZ, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cin 
cinnati, in the county of Hamilton and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Washing-Machines; and Ido 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, refer 
ence being had to the annexed drawings, 
which form part of this specification. 
Myinvention comprises a specific construc 
tion of those Washing-machines which have a 
hollow reciprocating plunger that contains 
the clothes to be cleansed, the details of said 
machine being hereinafter more fully de 
Scribed, and then pointed out in the claim. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a ver 
tical section of my washing-machine, the hol 
low plunger being seen at the bottom of the 
tub. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the upper 
portion of the machine. 
A represents an upright tub or suds-box 
whose interioris cylindrical, while its exterior 
is slightly larger in diameter at bottom than 
at top, in order that the hoops a may not fall 
off when said vessel shrinks, the vessel being 
maintained at any convenient height by 
means of feet B, perforated at b to admit pins 
C. These pins engage also with suitable 
holes in sockets or keepers D, secured to the 
sides of the tub and near the lower end there 
of. The upper end of said tub has a bearer E 
attached across it, which bearer has a pair of 
solid or imperforate covers FF' hinged to it, 
as at fif". 
Gare hooks or other convenient fastenings 
wherewith said lids are closed firmly against a 
packing-ring H at the top of the tub. 
Attached to bearer E is a standard I, more 
clearly seen in Fig. 2, which standard has piv 
oted to it at a lever or handle J, having a 
linki, coupled to a rod K, occupying an axial 
position within the Washing-machine and car 
rying the hollow plunger. This plunger con 
sists of a short cylinder L, preferably of sheet 
metal, and of somewhat less diameter than 
the tub, so as to afford room for the attach 
ment of a pair of packings MM, which are 
secured in place by rivets m, m'. The outer 
margins of these packings bear against the in 
terior of the vessel A, thereby preventing a 
flow of water through the annular space be 
tween said vessel and plunger L. The bottom 
or lower head N of this plunger is a fixture to 
the latter, and is either composed of perforated 
metal or wire-cloth, or otherwise arranged to 
support the weight of the clothes, and at the 
same time to allow a free passage of Water 
through them; but the top or upper head of 
said plunger consists of a pair of perforated 
plates or wire-cloth lids O O", hinged ato o' to 
the same cross-bar P to which the plunger 
rod K is secured. The free edges of these 
lids must be locked by Some simple appliance, 
spring-fasteners being preferably used, as 
seen at R. R. 
In constructing this machine the tub Ais 
made a little more than twice the length of 
plunger L, in order that the latter may ap 
proach quite near the top and bottom of said 
tub at every alternate stroke. Consequently 
when the clothes are loosely placed within the 
plunger, the tub filled about half full of water, 
and the lever J set in motion, said plunger is 
caused to reciprocate vertically within said 
vessel A. As the plunger ascends, the upper" 
packing M prevents the suds descending di 
rectly into the bottom of the tub and compels 
the water to pass through the lids O O", and 
then down through all the clothes or other 
soiled articles housed within said plunger. 
This forcible driving of the water through the 
plunger and its contents is due to the fact that 
there are no openings in the lids FF for the 
escape of the fluid, and on this account it is 
subjected to considerable pressure between 
said plunger and lids; hence the necessity of 
the fastenings G. G. for holding said lids tightly 
against the packing H; but during the down 
stroke of the plunger this action is exactly 
reversed, the lower packing M' preventing 
any direct upward escape of the suds and com 
pelling them to ascend through the perforated 
bottom N and then pass through the clothes. 
It will thus be seen that the water or suds are 
forced through the garments, thereby cleans 
ing them by an infiltration or sluicing pro 
cess and preventing the injurious action in 
cidental to all rubbing or rolling machines. 
Iam aware that it is not new to provide wash 
ing-machines with hollow reciprocating plun 
gers to contain the clothes, and therefore my 
75 - 
95 
OCs 
O 
3o 
35 
40 
So 
448,654 
claim is not to be construed broadly, but is 
expressly limited to the within-described spo 
cific combination of devices. 
The object of the corrugations S or W is to 
produce some littlefriction against the clothes 
as they surge up and down within the plunger 
at every alternate stroke of the latter. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination, in a washing-machine, of 
the closed cylindrical tub A, a rod K, travers 
ing the top of said tub and carrying a hollow 
plunger L, which punger has a perforated 
bottom N, a pair of perforated lids O O", 
IO 
hinged to its top at 00', an upwardly and out 
wardly inclined packing MI, Secured near its 15 
upper end, and a downwardly and outwardly 
sloping packing MI, attached near its bottom, 
all as herein described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 20 
GUSTAV II. JANTZ. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES II. LAYMAN, 
FRANCIS M. BIDDLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448754.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 448,754, 
J. RADLEY. 
SLECH RUNNER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
- 
Patented Mar. 24, 1891, 
 
WZZMASSZ-S 
2. Q. ea-rk- 
2.2. 
RIs Peters co. Phoro-Litho., WASHINGTON, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
J. RADLEY. 
SEIGH RUNNER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 448,754, 
Patented Mar. 24, 1891, 
 
--ee-2422-22 
 
SS N 
 
WZZWZ'ssays 
AWYALW707. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN RADLEY, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
SEG H RUNNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 448,754, dated March 24, 1891, 
Application filed January 6, 1891, Serial No. 376,849, (No model.) 
To all tuft OT}, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN RADLEY, a citizen 
of Great Britain, residing at Jersey City, 
in the county of Hudson and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Sleigh-Runners; and 
I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable other's skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention has relation to improve 
ments in sleigh runners of the class designed 
to be removably secured to the wheels or 
running-gear of a vehicle, (wheeled;) and it 
consists in the construction and novel ar 
rangement and combination of parts, all as 
will be hereinafter fully described. 
The annexed drawings, to which reference 
is made, fully illustrate my invention, in 
which 
Figure I represents a vertical longitudinal 
sectional view of my device. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail sectional 
view of a portion of one of the runners. Fig. 
4 is a detail view of a portion of the trans 
verse rod c, and Fig. 5 is a side view of the 
device, showing a modification. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A designates the sleigh-runners, 
Which are constructed with the curved front 
end in the usual manner and having a tire, 
and at the outside thereof is provided a metal 
shield or plate C, which extends from front 
to rear thereof, and also extends somewhat 
above the upper surface of the runner, as 
shown in the annexed drawings. 
To the inner face of each of the runners is 
removably secured uprights or supports b b, 
which are connected together at their upper 
ends by a cross bar or rod c, the same being 
pivoted to the ends thereof. These supports 
form legs, and the same are perforated at 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
their lower ends, through which passes a set 
screw d, which latter engages a female 
threaded blocke, set within the runner and 
being flush with the inner face thereof. This 
cross-bar c is provided with a pair of loops J. 
each of which is arranged near each end of 
said bar, and said loops are provided With 
straps.g., having buckles, whereby the bar call 
be firmly secured to the axle or a wheeled 
vehicle. 
To the inner face of each runner is Secured 
one end of a chain h, while the free end 
thereof is designed to be attached to the axle 
or other convenient part of the vehicle. 
It will thus be seen that I provide a detach 
able runner for wheeled vehicles, which can 
be readily applied or detached from a ve 
hicle in a very short time, and in case it is 
desirable to store the runners when not in 
use and to take up very little room, the 
thumb-screw on each runner can be With 
drawn, and by the legs turning on the pivotal 
ends thereof said legs and bar, with its strap, 
can be laid flat, and it is simple in operation, 
easily and quickly applied to a vehicle, as 
well as being removed therefrom, and it is 
also durable and at the same time cheap to 
manufacture. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
In a device of the character described, the 
combination, with the runners, the legs or Sup 
ports secured to the runners by the thumb 
screws, the side plates, the cross-bar having 
the loop and pivotally connected to said legs, 
the strap engaging said loop, and the stay 
chains, all substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN RADI.EY. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS.M. RAMSAY, 
ALBERT SPIES. 
50 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448854.txt	No Mode.) 
C. L. CURTIS, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
BOTTLE WIRING MACHINE, 
Patented Mar. 24, 1891. 
33 
67 
6. 
7 Figlo 
No. 448,854 
-- 
Fig.l. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
6. 
a YS-67 
6A 
B 
66 
S3 
INVENTOR: 
a -3%-4 6--> 
Attorney. 
Eois PEERs ca. p-too-thio. WASHINGToei.e. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 448,854, 
 
C. L. CURTIS. 
BOTTLE WIRING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 24, 1891. 
enous press co, photo-LTHOWASH:NGTON, D. 
(No Model.) 
C. L. CURTIS. 
BOTTLE WIRING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 448,854, 
Patented Mar, 24, 1891, , 
Fig. 49 
EII-37 
37 
 
 
 
  
: 
 
P 
 
37 
INVENTOR: 
4-4-4-6-4- 
(No Model.) 
C. L. CURTIS, 
BOTTLE WIRING MACHINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 448,854, 
Patented Mar. 24 l891. 
 
WITNESSES: 
ywd's 
INVENTOR: 
64-4, 4 16-z. 
By % 
w 
Attorney. 
(No Model.) 
No. 448,854. 
C. L. CURTIS, 
BOTTLE WIRING MACHINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Mar. 24, 1891, 
 
 
 
A 
a 
7a 
 
2 
2 
M 
s 
872 
S. 86 p. 
WITNESSES: 
A3' 
INVENTOR: 
* 14-76.--> 
Attorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARIES L. CURTIS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE N. B. 
ABBOTT MACHINE COMPANY, OF NEW YORK. 
BOTTLE-WIRING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 448,854, dated March 24, 1891. 
Application filed December 31, 1890, Serial No, 376,373, (No model.) 
55 
65 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all it'? OI), it inctly conce'll 
Be it known that I, CHARLES L. CURTIS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Brook 
lyn, Kings county, New York, have invented 
certain Improvements in Bottle-Wiring Ma 
chines, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to the class of ma 
chines employed for applying the Wire stop 
per-retainer to bottles and similar recepta 
cles; and the object of the invention is to pro 
duce a comparatively simple machine adapted 
to receive, hold, and wire the bottle auto 
matically at one operation of the machine. 
The wire retainer applied by my machine con 
sists of a band about the bottle-neck below 
the fillet and branches which spring from said 
band extend up over the cork and are united 
by a single twist on the top of the latter. By 
preference the band is of a single strand of 
wire, and the retainer is made up of three 
pieces of wire laid about the bottle-neck by 
the machine, and these twisted together to 
form three branches. By preference, also, 
the strands of wire are united by a short 
twist, and the two untwisted strands are car 
ried up over the cork, where the six strands 
are united by a single twist, which is trimmed 
off and the twist then flattened down on the 
cork. 
Before proceeding to describe the machine 
minutely with reference to the accompanying 
drawings, I will describe it generally with a 
view of imparting a better understanding of 
the principles upon which it operates and the 
objects sought to be attained by the special 
construction thereof. 
The machine is adapted for applying a wire 
retainer having three strands over the cork. 
In the vertical axis of the machine below is 
rotatively mounted an automatic holder for 
the bottle adapted to clamp on and hold bot 
tles of different dimensions within limits. 
When placed in the machine by the attend 
ant, the bottle stands erect in the axis of the 
machine with its stoppered or corked end up 
permost. Guide-fingers on the holder serve 
to guide the operator in placing the bottle. 
Arranged about the bottle-holder and equally 
spaced are set three posts or uprights consti 
tuting parts of the machine-frame, and on 
- 
each of these postS is mounted a mechanism 
for feeding a wire from a wireholder or reelin 
Ward to and alongside the bottle-neck, a cutter 
to sever a piece from the wire, a twister to form 
one of the three twists where the branches 
join the band, and a lifter to lift the pair of 
wires forming the branch into an upright po 
sition. The three mechanisms placed about 
the bottles are alike or may be alike. Each 
has, as stated, a feeder which draws the wire 
from the reel or holder and projects itinward 
past the bottle-neck and parallel to a tan 
gent thereto, the end of the wire entering 
between the jaws of the twister on the next 
adjacent device. Thus when each device 
has fed its wire forward the bottle-neck will 
be embraced by three substantially straight 
strands of wire forming a triangle, and these 
strands will meet and cross each other at 
three points, and these three points will be 
in the jaws of the respective twisters. The 
twister-jaws now close on the wires at these 
crossing points, and simultaneously each wire 
is cut off and the twisters move inward radially 
toward the bottle-neck. The twisters now ro 
tate axially, making, by preference, two com 
plete revolutions. When the twists are made, 
the effect is to close the wires on the bottle 
neck to form the band and to leave three 
branches in the twisters. The jaws of the 
twisters now open and draw back and the 
lifters take under the three branches formed 
by the twists and lift them into an upright 
position. 
Directly over the cork in the bottle and in 
the vertical axis of the machine is mounted 
a gripper-head, which is in the nature of a 
block with three vertically-arranged radial 
slots so set as to receive the three branches 
of the wire retainer when they are lifted, and 
there are three gripping-jaws pivoted above 
and suspended, which now Swing downward, 
engage the wires of the respective branches, 
and gather them into the respective slots, 
bending them over the cork and pressing them 
against a central abutment in the gripper 
head. As soon as the branches are thus gath 
ered and clamped fast the head rises a little 
and the holderin which the bottle is mounted 
is rotated automatically, and this rotation 
twists the sixwires forming the three branches 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
448,854 
O 
25 
35 
45 
togethel' on the top of the cork. The head 
now lifts still higher, and a cutter mounted 
on the face of the gripper-head sweeps around, 
nips and shears off the frayed end of the final 
twist, bending the twist over to one side at 
the same time and down into the soft mate 
rial of the cork. At this moment the bottle 
is released by the relieving of the clamps in 
the holder and the machine stops automati 
cally to receive another bottle. Thus one 
bottle is wired at each operation of the ma 
chine. I may say, however, that while the 
twist on the top of the cork is being trimmed, 
and after the branches have been lifted out 
of the twisters, the wire-feeders operate to 
place a new set of wires, so that when the 
next bottle is placed in the holder by the at 
tendant he will find the triangle of wires al 
ready formed. 
The cams and other mechanisms which 
operate the devices named are placed, as here 
in shown, in the base of the machine and are 
driven from the power-shaft. 
I will now proceed to describe the machine 
more minutely with reference to the accom 
panying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in sec. 
tion, of a machine for wiring bottles embody 
ing my improvements. This view is taken 
from the point indicated by the arrow if in 
Fig. 2. Fig. 1 is a front view of the extreme 
upper part of the machine, omitted from 
Fig. 1 for lack of space. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
plan of the machine, taken in the plane indi 
cated by the dotted line AA in Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a side elevation of the mechanism in the 
base of the machine as seen from the point 
indicated by the arrow 2 in Fig. 2. This may 
be considered the front of the machine. Fig. 
4 is a plan view of one of the wire feeding, 
cutting, and twisting mechanisms detached 
and on a large scale. This view also shows 
in dotted lines the relative positions of the 
other two twisters. Figs. 4'', 4', and 4 are 
detached detail views of parts of the device 
illustrated in Fig. 4. Fig. 5 is a side view of 
the gears which operate the radial twisters 
detached and on the same Scale as Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 is a side elevation, partly broken away, 
of the wire-feeder on the same scale as Fig. 
4. Fig. 6 is a view showing one of the feed 
wheels and its geal's detached. Fig. 7 is a 
plan view of the bottle-holder, showing the 
centering-clamp. Figs. S and 8" are respect 
ively side views of the base and upper part 
of the bottle-holder. Fig. 9 is a side eleva 
tion of the gripper-head and grippers de 
tached and on a larger Scale than Fig. l. 
Fig. 
10 is an underside view of Said gripper-head, 
showing the trimmerfor the top twist; and Fig. 
10 is a similar view showing the jaws of the 
trimmer in a position different from that 
seen in Fig. 10. Fig. 11 is an enlarged sec 
tional view of a gripper-head and grippers 
constructed according to my invention. This 
view is designed to illustrate more clearly the 
operation of this mechanism. Fig. 12 shows 
tle stoppeled end of a bottle as it appears 
when wired by my machine. 
1 represents the base-frame of the machine; 
1, the upper bed arranged on the latter, and 
1 uprights, three in number, mounted on the 
base-frame 1. The uprights are connected at 
their upper ends by a frame 1. These con 
stitute the fixed frame of the machine, and 
it may have any form or construction most 
convenient or desirable. Within the frame 
and below the bed 1 are arranged the several 
cam-shafts, cams, and driving mechanism. 
2 is the main shaft, which may be driven 
with a belt and pulley in the usual way, and 
an automatic Stop mechanism may be em 
ployed to arrest the machine at the end of 
each wiring operation. 
33 3 are three radially-arranged cam 
shafts, each provided with a set of cams for 
operating the respective like feeding and 
twisting mechanisms above. The cam-shaft 
3 is driven from the main shaft 2 through the 
medium of a bevel-pinion 4 on the latter, gear 
ing with a bevel-wheel 5 on the former. As 
herein shown, the main shaft makes four revo 
lutions to one of the cam-shaft, and one revo 
lution of the latter is necessary to a single 
wiring operation. The cam-shaft 3 drives the 
other two cam-shafts 3 through the medium 
of a bevel-wheel 6, which rotates loosely on a 
central shaft. 7 in the base-frame. 
The shaft 7 carries on its upper end a cross 
head, to which are pivoted the two jaws 8 S 
of the bottle clamp and holder. These jaws 
are provided at their upper ends each with a 
padded fork, so that when brought together 
the bottle is embraced between the forks. 
The jaws are drawn together on the bottle by 
a spring, herein represented by a coil-spring 
9, attached at its ends to the respective jaws. 
The jaws are provided with knuckles at their 
pivots to gear them together, and are opened 
by means of a treadle 10, coupled by a link 
11 to a lever 12, which has a pin or projection 
engaging a circumferentially-grooved collar 
13, which slides up and down on the shaft 7, 
and is coupled to the respective jaws by links 
14. Springs 15 are arranged to retract the 
collar 13, one end of said springs being se 
cured to the collar and the other ends to the 
head of shaft 7. The spring 9 tends to re 
tract said collar; but it is important that the 
collar should have Some movement independ 
ent of that of the jaws fol' reasons to be ex 
plained, and hence the links 14 are slightly 
slotted. 
The jaws 8 clamp on the body of the bottle, 
and there is a centering device and guide, 
which embraces the bottle-neck just below the 
fillet. This device comprises the following 
mechanical features: Carried by a head 16* 
on the shaft 7 is a frame comprising a curved 
plate 16, mounted on uprights 16. This plate 
16 is at about the level of the fillet on the 
bottle to be wired. An upright rock-shaft 17 
is mounted in the plate 16 and head 16* and 
carries on its upper end a curved finger 18. 
9 O 
ICO 
I C5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
448,854 
3 
O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
which gears with a pinion 27 on one of the 
Two other like curved fingers 1S are pivot 
ally mounted on the plate 16, (see Figs. 7 and 
feed-rollers 23. The rod 25 is coupled at its 
8,) and arms on the latter-fingers are coupled 
lower end to a lever which rests on the cam, 
and when the cam passes it descends of its 
by links 19 to the respective ends of a cross 
own weight, drawing back the pawl. After 
bar 20, fixed on the upper end of the shaft 17. 
passing the feed-rollers 23 (see Figs. 6 and 
When this shaft is rocked in the proper di 
6) the wire passes through a cutter 29, (seen 
rection, the several fingers 18 18, 18 are 
in dotted lines in Fig. 4) which is adapted to 
brought in toward the axis of the bottle 
sever it at the right moment. This cutter 
holder, and their tips press on the neck of the 
may be of any kind. Herein it consists of a 
bottle just back of the fillet, and thus serve 
plug which extends transversely across the 
to center the bottle and steady it during the 
wiring operation. 
path of the wire and has a transverse bore 
aligned with that along which the wire trav 
The shaft 17 is rocked by means of the de 
els. By merely rocking the plug axially the 
vice comprising an oblique groove 13 (see 
Fig. 8) in a block on the side of the splined 
wire is severed. This plug-cutter is rocked 
sliding collar 13, a stud 13 on a boss 17 on 
by means of a cam 30 and a rod 30. After 
passing the cutter the wire moves through 
the lower end of shaft 17 engaging said groove. 
the jaws of the radial twister, and thence 
Thus when the collar is drawn down by the 
operator the shaft 17 is rocked and the fingers 
across and into the jaws of the twister next 
adjacent, the jaws being retracted and open. 
of the centering-clamp are opened, and when 
As represented in Fig. 4, the wire passes to 
the operator removes the pressure from the 
that twister next adjacent at the right. 
treadle 10 and the springs 15 move the collar 
31 and 31' are the two jaws of the twister 
13 up on the shaft 7 the stud 13 rocks the 
31. These jaws are pivotally mounted on one 
shaft 17 in the other direction and closes the 
centering-fingers on the bottle-neck. The 
end of a shaft 32, mounted rotatively in 
brackets 33 and 33", (see Figs, 4 and 4,) and 
slotted connection of the links 14 to the jaws 
S of the bottle-clamp allows of some varia 
is capable of Some end wise movement in its 
bearing. On the other end of said shaft is a 
tion in proportion between the bodies and 
long pinion 34, which gears with a spur-wheel 
necks of the bottles and provides a holder 
adapted to clamp bottles having bodies of 
35, mounted on a stud on the frame. With 
the proportions here shown one-fourth of a 
uniform size and necks varying in diameter, 
rotation of the wheel35 imparts two complete 
and also those having necks of uniform diame 
rotations to the pinion. 34. The wheel 35 is 
ter and bodies varying in size. The center 
intermittently rotated by a cam 36 through 
ing-clamp is rendered variable by reason of 
the medium of a pawl-rod 37, a pawl 38, and 
the springs 15; but when the fingers of this 
a four-toothed ratchet-wheel 39 (see Fig. 5) 
clamp have been set on the bottle-neck they 
cannot be spread apart by any ordinary force 
on the wheel 35. Thus each time the cam 36 
rotates it impartS tWO complete rotations to 
applied to themselves by reason of the stud 
the pinion 34 and the twister-shaft 32. 
and oblique slot device employed for convert 
In Fig. 4 the axis of the bottle-holder is in 
ing the rectilineal motion of the collar 13 into 
dicated by a small circle at ac, and this axis 
rotary motion of the shaft 17. This device 
introduces an inclined plane or Wedge be 
will coincide with the axis of the bottle-neck 
when a bottle is in the holder. The wires 
tween said fingers and the collar, which is im 
portant, as it prevents any strain on the up 
from the three like feeders are fed so as to 
form the straight sides of a plane figure, in 
per part of the bottle from pressing back the 
fingers. My holder combines thus a yielding 
this case an euilateral triangle of which the 
point a is the center. The respective wires 
and variable clamp for the body of the bottle 
cross at the angles of the figure, and these 
and a non-yielding but variable clamp for the 
are situated in the respective twisters, the in 
neck thereof, both clamps setting themselves 
automatically. 
tersection being in the axis of the twister and 
between the jaws of the same. Within each 
Figs. 7, 8, and 8 best illustrate the construc 
angle formed by the wires, which latter are 
tion of the bottle-holding mechanism. 
represented by broken lines in Fig. 4, is a 
I Will now describe the mechanism for feed 
ing the wires and twisting them together upon 
stud 40 on the twister 31. The object of these 
studs is to hold the wires apart and distinct, 
the bottle-neck, premising that there are. 
during the twisting. 
three like sets of these mechanisms arranged 
to be actuated simultaneously, and a minute 
I may say that where the wires form three 
sides of an equilateral triangle, as herein 
description of one will suffice for all. The 
wire is led from a spool or reel 21 (see Fig.1) 
shown, the axis of each wire-feeder will be at 
an angle of thirty degrees with the axis of 
of any kind through a wire guide and straight 
the twister adjacent thereto. 
ener 22, Figs. 4 and 6, which will beformed, by 
preference, of a series of horizontally and ver 
When the twister is moved inward radially 
tically arranged rollers to and between a pair 
toward the point a, the jaws thereof close on 
the wire, and when it is retracted they open. . 
of feed - rollers 23. These feed - rollers are 
The longitudinal movement of the twister 
driven from a cam 24, which acts through a 
cam-rod 25 and a pawl and ratchet 25 to im- shaft is effected by a cam 41 and a shifting 
partintermittent rotation to a spur-wheel 26, rod 42, the upper extremity of which is coupled 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
-m-m-mm mm 
M 
A. 
4. 
448,854. 
70 
75 
to a lever 42, which as a Y on its end, the 
branches of which engage a circumferential 
groove 43 in a collar fixed on the shaft 32. In 
a longitudinal slot in said shaft is mounted a 
flat bar 44, on the end of which, within the 
hollow of the twister, is a double rack 44". 
This rack is clearly seen in Fig. 4, which is 
a sectional view showing the interior mech 
anism of the twister. The teeth on the double 
rack gear with teeth on mutilated pinions 45 
on or forming part of the respective twister 
jaws 31* and 31. Fig. 4 is an edge view of 
the jaw 318 with one of the pinions 45 at 
tached. The rack is carried around with the 
shaft 32, but does not move longitudinally 
with it. IIence from the engagment of the 
teeth of the rack with the pinions on the 
jaws the latter are caused to open and close 
by the endwise movement of the shaft which 
carries them. The rack-bar 44 is prevented 
from moving endwise by being secured to a 
circumferentially-grooved collar 45, mounted 
loosely on the shaft 32, adjacent to the bear 
ing-bracket 33, a pendent portion of Said 
bracket engaging the groove in said collar 45". 
The end of the wire as it enters the twister 
from the rear passes under an overhanging 
portion on the back part of jaw 31', then 
crosses over obliquely and along the face of 
jaw 318. To form a keeper for the wire, this 
jaw has an overhanging lip 31**. (Seen best 
in Fig. 49, which is an end view of the twister 
on a somewhat larger Scale than Fig. 4.) 
There is also a pivoted keeper 32, mounted 
in the twister 31 under the jaw 31, the inner 
upturned end of which is thrown up outside 
of the wire, so as to keep it in place next the 
jaw. When the jaws stand open, as in the 
drawings, the jaw 31 stands over and de 
presses the outer end of the keeper 32", thus 
elevating its inner end; but as the jaw moves 
in in closing it moves off this extremity of 
the pivoted keeper, and the inner end there 
of, which is the heavier, falls by gravity un 
til the lip thereon is below the wire, whereby. 
the wire is set free. This device or Some simi 
lar keeper is rendered desirable as a precau 
tionary device to insure against the free end 
of the wire getting out of or away from the 
jaw and out of line with the adjacent twister. 
In order that the wire coming from One twister 
may properly enter the jaws of that next ad 
jacent, I prefer to cutaway or flare the twister, 
as seen at 31* in the Several figures, So as to 
facilitate its entrance. As the jaWS of the 
twister come together on the wires, they clamp 
the latter just outside of or beyond the stud 
40, and the two wires are engaged in a fork 
31', (see Fig. 4") formed in a beak on the jaw 
31, which laps over on the jaw 31". This 
beak is broken away in Fig. 4. At the mo 
ment the radial twisters move in and the jaws 
close on the wires the cutters 29 Operate and 
Sever the wires. 
Fig. 4 represents the position of the feeders 
and radial twisters at the beginning of the 
wiring operation, the wires being already in 
place about the axis of the bottle - holder. 
When the bottle shall have been placed and 
clamped, the machine is set in motion, the 
twisters advance and close, the cutters sever 
the wires, and the twisters are rotated. This 
twists down the three pairs of wires on the 
bottle-neck, forming a band thereabout, and 
leaving three branches therefrom in the twist 
ers. These latter retract and open and in 
stantly three lifters 46 are brought into play. 
This lifter is a lever of an L-shape fulcrumed 
at 47 and its operative arm 46 arranged to 
play up and down in front of the twister and 
adjacent to the bottle-neck. The arm 46 
takes under the twisted branch of wire re 
leased by the twister, and by its upward move 
ment bends the branch into a position paral. 
lel with the bottle-axis, or substantially so. 
The lifter is held in its normal depressed po 
sition by a calm 4S and rod 49, and when the 
Cann passes a Spring 49' acts to throw up the 
operative arm of the lifter. However, both 
movements of the lifter may be effected by a 
calm or cams. When the branches of the wire 
band or retainer are lifted into an upright 
position by the lifters, they enter radially-ar 
ranged vertical slits 50 in a head 51, arranged 
in the prolongation of the bottle-axis and 
above the bottle. This head 51 is fixed to a 
tubular stem 52, mounted to slide longitudi 
nally in a bearing in the frame 1. (See Fig. 1.) 
In it is arranged a slide-rod 53, which is 
coupled at its lower inner end to a collar 54, 
mounted to slide on the stem 52. The coup 
ling of the collar and rod is effected by a stud 
54", which plays in a slot of limited length in 
the tubular stem 52. A spring 55 between 
the collar 54 and head 51 tends by extension 
to force the two apart and to keep the collar 
pressed upward as far as the slot will per 
limit. On the head 51 are pivotally, mounted 
three gripper-jaws 56, arranged to enter the 
respective slots and gather the three branches 
in against the central abutment 51 in the 
head. These grippers are actuated by the 
collar 54, to which they are coupled, respect 
ively, by links 57. The spring 55 retracts the 
gripper-jaws by pushing the collar upward. 
The resistance to compression of the spring 
55 is such that when the slide-rod 53 is pushed 
down it carries the head 51 and its stem down 
With it until the head meets a resistance-as 
the Cork in the bottle, for example-when the 
further movement downward of the rod and 
collar compresses the spring 55 and the jaws 
56 of the gripper are made to clamp the 
branches of the retainer, as stated. The rod 
53 is pushed or driven down by a cam 58 on 
Shaft 3, a rod 59, and a lever 60, mounted on 
the top of the machine-frame. This lever is 
coupled to the cam-rod 59 at one end and to the 
rod 53 at its other end. As the head 51 will 
be apt to meet with resistance at differentley 
els, Owing to the different sizes of bottles and 
different heights of their corks, provision is 
made for lost motion (the throw of the oper 
ating-cam being constant) by connecting the 
95 
OC 
O 
O 
25 
45 
55 
 
448,854 
lever 60 to the rod 53 by a pair of strong dis 
tending springs, 61. The retraction of the 
Od 53 is effected by a spring-pawl 62 on the 
lever, Which engages the teeth of a ratchet 
On Said rod, and as this pawl may, owing to 
the distention of the springs 61, engage the 
ratchet at different points, I provide a device 
for disengaging the pawl at a given point in 
its upWard movement, no matter at what 
point it may be engaged at the time with the 
ratchet on the bar. The pawl is provided 
With tWO lugs 63, which, as the lever carries 
the pawl upward, engage cam-faces on in 
clines 64 on a fixed upright 65, mounted on 
the top of the machine-frame. As the lever 
60 descends, the head 51 strikes the cork, and 
its further downward movement is arrested. 
Then the gripper-jaws clamp on the branches 
Of the retainer, as described. At this mo 
ment the lever 60 in its descent strikes and 
preSSes down a lever 60, mounted on the top 
of the machine-frame. To the short arm of 
this lever 66 is coupled a lifting-pawl 67, 
(seen in Fig. 1.) which is thus protruded in 
an upward direction and made to engage a 
ratchet On the tubular stem 52, whereby said 
Stem and its attached head, together with the 
gripper-jaws, are lifted a little and the press 
ure is taken off the cork. At this moment 
the bottle-holder and, of course, the bottle 
clamped therein are rotated, and the three 
branches of the retainer twisted together on 
the top of the cork. 
The mechanism for ef 
fecting this rotation of the bottle-holder is 
best illustrated in Figs.1 and 2. On the shaft 
7 is a toothed wheel 68, which gears, through 
an intermediate 69, with a wheel 70. On the 
shaft of the wheel 70 is a bevel-pinion 71, 
which gears with a bevel-wheel 72 on a hori 
Zontal shaft, and on this shaft is ratcheted a 
crank 73, which is coupled by a link to the 
free end of a lever 74. As the shaft 3 rotates, 
a stud 75, projecting from the back of wheel 
5, (or it may be from a disk on shaft 3,) takes 
under the lever 74 and raises it, thus turning 
the crank 73 partly round and through it 
imparting the proper number of complete 
rotations to the shaft 7 and the bottle-holder. 
In order to keep the bottle-holder steady dur 
ing the wiring operation, a suitable automatic 
lock may be provided. The twist having been 
formed on the top of the cork, the cam 5S 
passes, and a spring 59 (see Fig. 1) throws 
up the lever 60 and lifts the gripper-head 
5l high enough to permit the twist to be 
trimmed. This trimmer is illustrated in Figs. 
9, 10, and 10. 
A calm 70 on shaft 3 acts 
through a cam-rod 77 to rock an elbow-lever 
78, to one arm of which is coupled a link 79. 
This link is coupled at its other end to a crank 
arm S0 on a vertically-arranged rock-shaft 81, 
mounted at its lower end in a flange-bearing 
on the gripper-head 51 and at its upper end 
in a sliding bearing in the machine-frame. 
On the lower end of this shaft is fixed an arm 
82, which carries the fixed jaw 82 of the trim 
mer. The movable jaw 82 of the trimmer is 
pivoted to the arm 82 and its tail is coupled 
to one end of a link 83, the other end of which 
is pivotally attached to the face of the head 
51. (See Fig. 10.) When the arm swings over 
the lower face of the head, the movable jaw 
82 encounters the twist of the wire retainer 
and, actuated by the link 83, presses Said 
twist up to the stationary jaw 82, and these 
jaws then trim it off. Fig. 10 shows the po 
sition of the jaws after they have closed on 
the twist. The further swing of the trimmer 
serves to bend over and flatten down the twist, 
and at this moment the cam 58 acts to depress 
the gripper-head and with it the trimmer, and 
the pressure from the head serves to press the 
twist down on or into the soft material of the 
cork, as seen in Fig. 12, wherein 84 represents 
the bottle-neck, S5 the fillet thereon, S6 the 
cork, 87 the wire band about the bottle-neck 
behind the fillet, 88 the branches of the re 
tainer, and S9 the twist flattened down on the 
top of the cork. 
It will be obvious to those skilled in the art 
that by simply adding the necessary parts, 
duplicates of those shown, a retainer having 
four or more branches SS may be applied, and 
it will also be obvious that the means last de 
scribed for trimming the last twist and flat 
tening it down might be omitted from the 
machine and these offices performed by hand 
or by another machine after the wired bottle 
is removed, 
In Fig. 11, which is on a larger scale than 
Fig. 9, I have shown a gripper-head 51 pro 
vided with four equally-spaced gripper's 57, 
as this number of grippers is better adapted 
for illustration than three in a sectional ele 
vation. It will be seen that the branches SS 
of the retainer are engaged at the moment 
the twisting operation begins in the Several 
slots 50 in the head, the lower face of which 
stands quite close to the cork S6. As the bot 
tle rotates, the walls of these slots guide the 
wires, and when the slack is taken up by the 
twist the wires of the branches slip under the 
grippers until at the finish they grasp only 
the extreme tips of the wires. The head 51 
will by preference have a face-plate 90, as 
seen in Fig. 11, not integral With the head. 
Figs, 9 and 11 show only one spring 55 ar 
ranged within the hollow stem 52 and under 
the end of the slide-bar 53; but two or more 
of such springs may be employed, arranged 
exteriorly in any convenient manner to effect 
the object sought. 
As herein shown, the machine is SO coll 
structed that the bottle stands erect with its 
axis vertical, and some of the reciprocating 
parts of the machine are represented as moved 
in one direction by cams and in the other di 
rection by their own weight; but it is not es 
sential that the machine be constructed in 
this way, the bottle need not stand upright, 
and the parts referred to may be moved in 
both directions by cams. 
I am aware that the details of construction 
embodied in the machine as herein shown 
95 
Oc 
O 
II5 
I 25 
25 
35 
45 
: 
55 
6 
448,854 
o 
O 
25 
45 
7 o 
75 
85 
IOC 
O 
inity be varied to a considerable exelt with 
Out departing materially from my invention, 
and I do not, therefore, limit myself to these 
details. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a machine for wiring bottles and the 
like, the combination, with a holder for the 
bottle, of feeding mechanism for placing the 
Strands of wire to form the sides of an angul 
lar plane figure about the axis of the bottle 
holder, twisters radially arranged about said 
axis, one at each angle of said figure, said 
twisters being adapted to twist the adjacent 
Strands at each angle together in couples, thus 
forming the band and branches of the retainer, 
and the cutters for severing the wire, situated 
between the respective twisters and the wire 
feeding mechanisms and operating after the 
twisting thereof. 
2. In a machine for wiring bottles and the 
like, the combination, with a centering-lholder 
for the bottle-neck and three or more wire 
feeders arranged about said holder and adapt 
ed to feed the wires from one twister to that 
next adjacent, whereby the bottle-neck is en 
braced by substantially straight wires form 
ing the sides of a plane figure, of the twisters, 
One adjacent to each feeder, said twisters be 
ing adapted to twist together the adjacent, 
Wires at each angle in pairs to for the band 
and branches of the wire retainer, and cut 
ters for severing the wires, situated between 
the respective twisters and the wire-feeding 
mechanisms and operating after the twisting 
thereof. 
3. In a machine fol' wiring bottles and the 
like, the combination, with a centering-holder 
for the neck of the bottle and the twisters 
l'adially arranged about said holder, of the 
wire-feeders, one arranged at each twister 
and adapted to feed the wire from said twister 
into the twister next adjacent, whereby the 
several wires are crossed within the twisters 
in pairs, as Set forth, and the cutter's for the 
wires arranged adjacent to and operating in 
connection with the feeders. 
4. In a bottle-Wiring machine, means for 
bending the branches of the retainer into po 
sition about the stoppered end of the bottle, 
a gripper-head having radial slots to receive 
Said branches, and a central abutment at the 
point of convergence of said slots, grippers 
adapted to play in Said slots in the head and 
to clamp the respective branches firmly 
against the Central abutment, and means for 
actuating Said grippel's, all combined and ar 
ranged to operate substantially as set forth. 
5. In a machine for Wiring bottles and the 
like, the combination, to form the bottle 
holder, of the shaft 7, the knuckled jaws 8, 
mounted pivotally on the same, the spring 
which draws said jaws together, the sliding 
coilar 13 on the shaft 7, a spring for sliding 
Said collar upward on the shaft, the links con 
necting said collar with the jaws 8, the rock 
shaft 17, provided with a stud engaging an 
oblique groove in the collar 13, the said stud, 
the finger 18 on the shaft 17, the ?ingel's lS', 
mounted on the frame of the holder, the cross 
bar 20 on the shaft 17, and the links coupling 
the respective ends of said cross-bar to the 
fingers 18, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a machine for wiring bottles and the 
like, the combination, to form a twister, of a 
rotatively-mounted shaft 32, capable of end 
wise movement in its bearings, the jaws piv 
otally mounted on said shaft, and provided 
each with a mutilated gear 45, the rack-bar 
44, mounted in a longitudinal slot in said shaft, 
means for rotating said shaft, and means for 
moving said shaft longitudinally independent 
of said rack-bar, whereby the jaws are closed 
by said endwise movement of the bar. 
7. In a machine for wiring bottles and the 
like, the combination, with three radially-ar 
ranged twisters, of three wire-feeders, one 
adjacent to each twister, the axis of the feeder 
being at an angle to that of the twister and 
said angle being such that the wire fed through 
the twister intersects the axis of the twister 
between the jaws of the latter, substantially 
as Set forth. 
S. in a machine for wiring bottles and the 
like, the combination of three radially-al 
ranged twisters placed at uniform distances 
apart about the axis of the bottle-holder, said 
bottle-holder, and three wire-feeders, one ar 
ranged adjacent to each twister, the axis of 
the Wire-feedler being at an angle of thirty 
degrees with that of the adjacent twister, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
9. As a means for imparting intermittent 
rotation to the bottle-holder, the combination, 
with the shaft 7, which carries said holder, 
and the toothed wheel 68 on said shaft, of 
the rotatively-mounted toothed wheel 72 and 
its shaft, the train of wheels between the 
wheels (3S and 72, whereby the latter drives 
the former, a crank 73, ratcheted on the shaft 
of the wheel 72, whereby each vibration of 
said crank imparts a rotary forward impulse 
to said wheel, a lever 74, pivoted to the frame 
at one end and coupled to said crank at the 
other end, and means, Substantially as de 
scribed, for imparting a vibrating movement 
to said lever at each wiring operation. 
10. In a bottle-wiring machine, the combi 
nation, with an intermittently-rotating holder 
for the bottle and means for placing and 
twisting the wires of the retainer about the 
neck of the bottle, of the slotted gripper-head 
arranged over the cork of the bottle and pro 
vided with a central abutment 51, the grip 
per-jaWSpivotally mounted on Said head and 
adapted to enter the respective slots in the 
same, and means, substantially as set forth, 
for operating said jaws. 
11. The combination, with the slotted grip 
per-head 51 and its stem 52, of the slide-bar 
53, the compression-spring 55 between said 
slide-bar and head, whereby the bar may con 
tinue to descend after the head shall have 
met a resistance, the gripper-jaws 56, carried 
 
by Said head, and means whereby the said whereby when the latter descends it will 
jaws are closed by the independent down 
strike the lever 66 and cause the pawl 67 to 
engage the stem of the gripper-head and lift 
Ward movement of said slide-bar, as set forth. 
the latter, substantially as and for the pur 
12. The combination, with the slotted grip 
per-head and its stem, the slide-bar 53, pro 
pose set forth. 
vided with a ratchet, and the compression 
14. The combination, with the gripper-head, 
Spring between said slide-bar and head, of the 
of the trimmer for the top twist mounted 
operating-lever 60, the springs 61, connecting 
thereon, said trimmer comprising the vibrat 
Said lever and the slide-bar, the pawl 62, car 
ing arm S2, the fixed jaw S2 on said arm, the 
ried by the lever and engaging the ratchet on 
movable jaw S2, pivoted on said arm, and 
the slide-bar, and means, substantially as de 
the link 83, coupled to the tail of the movable 
scribed, for disengaging the said pawl when 
jaw and pivotally attached to the head, sub 
the lever rises, substantially as and for the 
stantially as set forth. 
purposes Set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
13. The combination, with the gripper-head 
and its stem, the latter provided with a ratchet, 
Witnesses. 
the slide-bar, and the compression-spring be 
tween said head and slide-bar, of the lifting 
lever 66, the pawl 67, carried by said lever, 
and the lever 60, which actuates the slide-bar, 
the lever 66 being in the path of the lever 60, 
HENRY CONNETT, 
J. D. CAPLINGER. 
CHARLES L. CURTIS. 
25 
35 
448,854 
Witnesses: 
O 
15 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US448955.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 448,955, 
 
J. F. GILPIN & J. ELLIOT, 
GAS FURNA CE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar, 24, 1891, 
77 f 2. 
22 
3. 
Z9 a.0 
6 
l 
2 
28 
--- 
7 
74. 
h  
M 
aesae 
- 
A. 
ve- 
G 
r 
8 
9 
fg's 7 
6- AIR 
WITWESSES 
(.262.-- 
5 
5. 
N 
2. 
sac'. 
J. F. GILPIN & J. ELLIOT. 
GAS FURNACE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 24, 1891. 
22 F. 2. 
  
T 
T-I-I 
TTLE Get TT 
T-- as T-T-I- 
is 
2 | 
24T1-6 S2, ... 
21st 
| 
... i. 7 sil. Esz 
T ON, 2O: 
CTAT 
  
 
asS346S 
- 
 
 
 
 
bassa 
e 
(No Model.) 
No. 448,955, 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
6%- 
c6-4, U 7%-4- 
IWWEWTOGRS 
... 
c/7% puzz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH F. GILPIN AND JOHN ELLIOT, OF ANSONIA, CONNECTICUT. 
GAS-FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of illetters Patent No. 448,955, dated March 24, 1891. 
Application filed June 9, 1890, Serial No. 354,761 (No model.) 
95 
OO 
55 
75 
To ali, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, Jose PH F. GILPIN, a 
citizen of the United States, and JoHN EL 
LIOT, a subject of the Queen of Great Brit 
ain, residing at Ansonia, in the county of New 
Haven and State of Connecticut, have in 
yented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Gas-Furnaces; and we do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
other's skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
Our invention has for its object to so im 
prove the construction of this class of fur 
naces that an almost perfect combustion of 
gas shall be secured, the resultin practice be 
ing that We are enabled to reduce the size of 
the furnace and to greatly reduce the amount 
of gas required to produce any required de 
gree of heat. We thereby effect a saving in 
Space required, a great saving in the cost of 
Construction, and a great and continual sav 
ing in the cost of running the furnace. 
With these ends in view we have devised 
the novel gas-furnace of which the following 
description, in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification, numer 
als being used to denote the several parts. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of our improved 
furnace; Fig. 2, a vertical longitudinal sec 
tion; Fig. 3, a front end elevation, and Fig. 4 
is a horizontal section on the line acacinFig. 2: 
l is the combustion-chamber; 2, the heat 
ing-chamber; 3, the air-heating chamber; 4, 
the air-chamber; 5, the flue; 6, the gas-supply 
pipe, and 7 air-supply pipes. The gas-sup 
ply pipe is provided with a suitable valve 8, 
an ordinary slide-valve being shown in the 
drawings, by which the supply of gas is regul 
lated, a Screw-plug 9 being also provided, in 
Order that the pipe may be cleaned or the in 
terior examined at any time, if required. The 
air is Supplied from a blower of any ordinary 
or preferred construction, which forms no por 
tion of our present invention, and is conse 
quently not illustrated in the drawings. The 
gas also is supplied underpressure. The air 
supply pipes (see Figs. 2 and 4) pass across 
the combustion - chamber near the bottom 
thereof and into the air-heating chamber and 
are coiled or doubled backward upon them 
selves, as shown in the drawings, in order to 
provide a large amount of heating-surface 
within the air-heating chamber, The air 
pipes then pass outfrom the air-heating cham 
ber and across the combustion-chamber and 
open into air-chamber 4, as indicated at 10 in 
Fig. 2. From the air-chamber the air passes 
to the combustion-chamber by two independ 
ent sets of pipes. Near the bottom of the air 
chamber and directly opposite the openings 
of pipes 7 are the openings 11 of main air 
feeding pipes 12. These pipes are preferably 
smaller than pipes 7 and pass outward at the 
front of the furnace, in order to permit the 
convenient regulation by means of suitable 
valves 13 of the supply of air furnished to the 
combustion-chamber at the point where the 
combustion of the gas commences. 
These 
pipes then pass inward again and across 
the air - chamber near the bottom thereof 
and open into the combustion - chamber, as 
indicated at 14. 15 denotes the secondary 
air-feeding pipes, which pass from the front 
of the furnace across the air-chamber and 
the combustion-chamber and deliver air into 
the passage.16, leading from the combustion 
chamber to the heating-chamber, the end of 
this passage toward the heating-chamber be 
ing contracted, as clearly shown in Fig. 2, and 
the pipes extending approximately midway 
the length of the passage. The air passes 
into these pipes from the air-chamber through 
perforations 17 and passes out into passage 
16 through perforations 18 at the inner ends 
of said pipes. In order that the amount of 
air delivered by these pipes in passage 16 
may be regulated with absolute accuracy, we 
provide suitable valves 19 for that purpose. 
We have shown in the drawings slide-valves 
having perforations adapted to register with 
perforations 17 in the pipes. The stems 20 
of these valves extend outward at the front 
of the furnace, as clearly shown, and are pro 
vided with teeth adapted to be engaged by 
pawls 21, so that the slide may be locked in 
such a position as to place the perforations 
wholly or partially in alignment with perfora 
tions 17 or wholly out of alignment therewith. 
It will of course be apparent that the com 
bustion of the gas will commence near the 
bottom of the combustion-chamber-that is, 
where the gas as it passes from the gas-Sup 
ply pipe becomes mixed with the air received 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
448,955 
from the main air-feeding pipes 12. By the 
use of the secondary air-feeding pipes which 
deliver air at the point where the partially 
consumed gases pass into the heating-chamber 
We produce an almost perfect consumption 
of gases, so that the current which passes out 
Of the heating-chamber is free from uncon 
Sulined carbonaceous matter, a practically per 
fect combustion of all carbonaceous matterbe 
ing callsed to take place in the heating-cham 
ber by means of the current of heated air 
J'eceived from the secondary air-feeding pipes 
at the instant that the partially-consumed 
gases are about to pass into the heating 
chamber. We thus produce within the heat 
ing-chamber the highest degree of heat that 
it is possible to produce-that is, the heat of 
final perfect combustion. From the heating 
chamber the products of combustion pass 
downward through a passage 22 into the air 
heating chamber, where they are utilized to 
heat the air in the air-supply pipes, and from 
thence they pass out through flue 5 into the 
chimney. (Not shown.) In the furnace shown 
flue 5 opens into a transverse flue leading di 
J'ectly to the chimney, the transverse fluebe. 
ing indicated by 5. 
23 denotes the ordinary vertically-sliding 
doors, which close the side of the heating 
chamber. These doors may of course be op 
erated in the ordinary or any preferred man 
ner, which forms no portion of our present 
invention. 
It will of course be apparent that our in 
vention is not limited to the special style of 
furnace illustrated in the drawings, but is 
equally applicable to boiler and other fur 
naces, which, however, we have not deemed 
it necessary to illustrate and describe, as the 
details of construction of no two furnaces are 
exactly alike. 
The furnace above described is practically 
Self-cleaning in respect of the tar which, where 
Ol'dinary made gas is used, condenses in the 
pipes, necessitating that the latter be cleaned 
very frequently, usually every night. This 
difficult job of cleaning is obviated by our 
improvement. In our furnace the air is ad 
mitted at the lowest point in the pipe. This 
burns the tar and at the same time heats the 
gils. 
Having thus described oul invention, we 
claim 
1. In a gas-furnage, the combination of the 
heating-chamber, the combustion-chamber at 
O 
3O 
45 
5 O 
55 
the front of the same, a connecting passage 
between said chambers, the air-heating cham 
ber situated beneath the main heating-cham 
ber and connected there with, the air-chamber 
situated in front of the combustion-chamber, 
air-pipes leading from a suitable blast device 
through said air-heating chamber and deliver 
ing into the said air-chamber, pipes leading 
from the air-chamber to the lower part of the 
combustion-chamber, a gas-Supply pipe Con 
municating with the combustion - chamber, 
and a secondary air-pipe leading from the air 
chamber through the combustion-chamber to 
the said connecting-passage, Substantially as 
set forth. 
2. In a gas-furnace, the combination of the 
heating-chamber 2, the combustion-chamber 
1 at the front of the same, the passage 16, con 
necting said chambers, the air-heating cham 
ber 3, situated beneath the ?hamber 2, Com 
municating there with and having air-pipes 7 
leading from a suitable blast device passing 
through the chamber 3 and delivering into 
the chamber 4, pipes 12, leading from the lat 
ter chamber to the chamber 1 and having 
valves 13, a gas-supply pipe communicating 
with the combustion-chamber, and a Second 
ary air-pipe leading from chamber 4 and 
having a perforated nozzle situated in line 
with the passage 16, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a gas-furnace, the combination of the 
heating-chamber 2, the combustion-chamber 
1 at the front of the same, the passage 16, con 
necting said chambers, the air-heating cham 
ber 3, situated beneath the chamber 2, com 
municating there with and having air-pipes 7 
leading from a suitable blast device passing 
through the chamber 3 and delivering into 
the chamber 4, pipes 12, leading from the lat 
ter chamber outside the furnace and thence 
to the chamber 1 and having valves 13, a gas 
supply pipe communicating with the com 
bustion-chamber, and a secondary air-pipe 
leading from the outside of the furnace 
through chambers 4 and 1, having a perfo 
rated nozzle situated in line with the passage 
16, and having a valved communication with 
chamber 4, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH F. GILPN. 
JOHN ELLOT. 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
Witnesses: 
A. M. WoOSTER, 
C. M. NEWMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449055.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 449,055, 
C. H. PERKINS, 
HORSESHOE BLANK BAR. 
Patented Mar, 24, l891. 
 
Z72 vez2(or: 
56%-6, 2vy (26-6-4- 
/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES HENRY PERKINS, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR TO 
TIE RHODE ISLAND HORSE SHOE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
HORSE SHOE-BLANK BAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 449,055, dated March 24, 1891. 
Application filed October 1, 1890, Serial No. 366,723, (No model.) 
to complete description of my invention. 
To a (Zivil Oil, it 77-?ty concer'72: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES HENRY PER 
KINS, of the city and county of Providence, in 
the State of Rhode Island, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in IIorse 
shoe-Blank Bars; and I do hereby declare that 
the following specification, taken in connec 
tion with the drawings furnished and form 
ing a part of the same, is a clear, true, and 
My said horseshoe-blank bars are restricted 
to use in the manufacture of toe-weighted 
shoes for horses and mules, said bars contain 
ing blanks which are substantially uniform 
I5 in thickness, are straight on one edge, and 
reversely inclined at the other edge from the 
middle to the ends. In the production of 
these blanks I have devised methods and 
means whereby they are produced in the form 
2O of double blank-bars, which must be divided 
on central ZigZag lines in order to produce 
the single-line blank-bar, which is the subject 
of this application. I have, however, devised 
still other methods and means whereby said 
25 Ioe-weighted horseshoe-blank bars may be 
produced both in double-line bars and in sin 
gle-line bars; but it is to be understood that 
it is immaterial by what methods or means 
said single-line bars may be produced, inas 
so much as said blank-bars are radical novelties 
in the art and trade, and they were, as I be 
lieve, devised and first produced by me, and 
I have practically demonstrated their value 
in the economical and successful manufac 
35 ture of toe-Weighted shoes. In their best form 
these single-line blank-bars are beveled at 
one edge from their widest or toe portions to 
ward the heels, the bevel being variable in 
the best forms of shoes; but for use in mak 
4o ing another form of shoe the blanks are not 
beveled at all. 
Blank-bars for various other 
uses have been heretofore produced which in 
volved one straight edge and reversed in 
clines at the opposite edge; but I know of no 
45 prior blank-bars thus shaped and beveled at 
One edge, nor any So-shaped blank-bars suited 
for the manufacture of horseshoes, nor any 
so-shaped bars which contained nail-head 
prints or nail-scores for rendering the bars 
5o suitable to be cut into lengths required for 
toe-weighted horseshoes. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 in top 
and edge and in several sectional views illus 
trates one of my single-line toe-Weighted 
horseshoe-blank bars in what I deem its best 55 
form and suited for use in the manufacture 
of high-gradeshoes. Fig. 2 illustrates in like 
manner a plainer blank-bar suited for Ordi 
nary toe-Weighted shoes. 
Fig. 3 illustrates in 
top view a similar blank-bar with nail-creases 6o 
at the angular edge. 
The blank-bar A, Fig. 1, is substantially 
uniform in thickness and contains a single 
line of toe - weighted horseshoe - blanks (t. 
Each blank is reversely inclined at One edge 65 
and is of the required length for bending into 
horseshoe form. The middle or toe portion a 
is wider than the ends a or heel portions. 
At the toe portion one edge is flatly beveled, 
as at a, and said bevel merges in both direc- 7o 
tions into a steep bevel C" at the ends. This 
bar, as thus far described, has practical Value 
and is a substantially important novelty in 
this art. It is, however, better fitted for use 
by horseshoers or by manufacturers of horse- 75 
shoes when it is provided with the nail-creases 
b, whether or not said creases be also pro 
vided with nail-head prints b, although the 
presence of the latter contributes greatly to 
the practical value of the blank-bar. 
The blank-bar A, Fig. 2, contains blanks C, 
which, like those first described, are uniform 
in thickness, reversely inclined at One edge 
from the middle toward the ends, and the Cen 
tral or toe portions c' are wider than the ends 85 
c" or heel portions, and each is provided with 
nail-scores b. 
It is to be understood that in some shoes 
there is a crease extending from heel to heel, 
and that for the manufacture of such shoes 90 
the bars will have, preferably near their 
straight edges, a continuous crease, although 
only those portions thereof nearer the toe por 
tion than the ends will actually serve as nail 
SCOeS O Clea.SeS. 
In bending the blanks which are not bev 
eled at one edge they may be curved in either 
direction, and hence it is comparatively im 
material at which edge the nail-creases are 
located, provided that each crease be in line Iocy 
with the adjacent edge, as illustrated in Fig. 
3, wherein the creases b are each in line with 
95 
So 
449,055 
the appropriate inclined edge. With the bev 
eled - edge blank the nail - creases must of 
course be located adjacent to the opposite or 
non-beveled edge, and it is to be understood 
that the straight edge of the blank-bar, Fig. 
3, may be beveled, and in that case the blanks, 
when cut therefrom, will afford horseshoes 
like those made from the blanks from the bar 
A, Fig. 1. 
It is to be understood that the blank-bars 
herein shown and described have been inci 
dentally disclosed in my several applications 
for patents heretofore filed and bearing Se 
rial Nos. 361,962, 366,218, and 366,534; but 
I now claim as new and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent 
Io 
Witnesses: 
R. W. COMSTOCK, 
CHARLES R. STARK. 
1. A toe-weighted horseshoe-blank bar con 
taining a single line of blanks, each having 
one straight edge and one edge reversely in 
clined from the middle toward the ends, and 
each provided with appropriate nail-scores, 
substantially as described. 
2. A toe-weighted horseshoe-blank bar con 
taining a single line of blanks, each having 
one straight edge, one edge reversely in 
clined from the middle toward the ends and 
beveled at one of its edges, substantially as 
described. 
CHARLES IIENRY PERIINS. 
. 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449155.txt	(No Model.) 
G. G., GEIGER. 
CAR DOOR, 
No. 449,155, 
Patented Mar, 31, 1891. 
 
CZ72. 
3. 
2...e. 42. 
a/ 772. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE G. GEIGER, OF PEORIA, ILLINOIS. 
CAR-DOOR. 
r 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 449,155, dated March 31, 1891. 
- 
Application filed March 27, 1890, Serial No,345,623, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To cult, whon, it in Gulf conce71. 
sition the door may be raised. The door is 
Be it known that I, GEORGE G. GEIGER, a 
further provided with an arc-shaped T-rail, 
citizen of the United States, residing at Peoria, 
properly fastened upon its outwardly-facing 
in the county of Peoria and State of Illinois, 
surface in such a manner that the said rail, 
beginning with the lower edge of the door 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Car-Doors; and I do hereby de 
near its middle, describes an arc terminating 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
with the upper right-hand corner as viewed 
exact description of the invention, which will 
in the drawings. FF are angle-irons or two 
sections which together form a clamp, the 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
saidsections being securely bolted at the edge 
My invention relates to certain new and 
of the opening in the side of the car. E. G. 
useful improvements in car-doors, by means 
are angle-irons purposed to bear against the 
of which a car-door is provided, being simple 
door and hold it in position. H I are stops 
in construction, durable, and cheap in first 
purposed to bear against the lower part of 
the door and hold it in position when closed. 
COSt. 
More particularly my invention relates to 
In Fig. 2 J is a T-rail bolted to the car 
door B. F. Fare angle-irons, which together 
that class of car-doors which are adapted to 
be used upon the inside of the cars and use 
form a clamp, which, bearing upon the flanges 
ful when the cars to which they are applied 
of the T-rail J, holds the same in position, be 
are loaded with grain. 
sides forming a slot or passage-way through 
That my invention may be more particu 
which the T-rail travels in raising and low 
larly understood reference is had to the ac 
ering the car-door. C is a cleat on the car 
companying drawings, in which 
door at its side. B is the car-door. A is the 
Figure 1 is a side view of the inside of the 
side of the car. 
car with my improved door attached thereto 
In Fig. 3 FF are angle-irons, with base 
and shown in its various adjustments. Fig. 
plates provided with suitable holes for bolts 
and having the outwardly- tending flanges 
2 is a detailed view showing cut sections of 
the side of the car, the door-clamp, and T-rail 
having the shape and form shown in this fig 
in proper adjustment for working. Fig. 3 is 
ure and with the indentations fif', the com 
a detailed view showing the two sections of 
bination of the two sections forming the com 
the clamp. Fig. 4 is a detailed view of sec 
plete clamp, as before described. The inden 
tions of a T-rail. 
tations.ff' are cut in the angle-irons FF' for 
In Fig. 1. A represents the side of a car, a 
the reception of the flanges k on the respect 
view from the inside. B B'B' is the car. 
ive ends of the T-rail J. 
door in its several adjustments. 
In Fig. 4 is shown the T-rail J, which is 
C. C. are 
provided with perforations through its flange 
cleats on the car - door. IS is a fastening 
means or catch-lever having oppositely-ex 
or crown and its neck for the passage of bolts 
tending short arms at its respective ends, 
to secure it to the car-door. k is a stop at the 
with the body or that portion of the catch-le 
end of the rail, the said rail being provided 
ver between its said arms carried in a per 
with one at either of its respective ends. i. 
foration in the cleat Cl, and in which said per 
refers to perforations through the crown and 
foration it is carried back and forth to en 
neck of the T-rail J. 
gage or release the angle-iron E when the 
In use, the door being provided with the 
T-rail J in proper adjustment upon its out 
short arm which is carried on the outside of 
the car-door is raised or lowered, this engage 
Wardly-facing surface, and being further pro 
ment being made with the angle-iron E when 
vided with the fastening means K, the sec 
tions FF are then clamped over the flanges 
the catch-lever is pushed out from the side 
or crown of the T-rail and firmly bolted at 
of the door to its full extent and the detach 
ment is made by raising the short arm of the 
the edges of the opening in the car. The door 
is then ready for use, and in operation it will 
catch-lever on the outside of the car-door and 
drawing the projecting end of the catch-lever be seen that the car-dooris adjusted as shown 
in until it is flush with the door, in which po- by B in Fig. 1 when it is desired to load the 
25 
45 
95 
OO 
449,155 
car with grain. In this position the door is 
firmly secured to the side of the car at the 
lower portion of the opening in said car, with 
the arc-shaped T-rail carried in the clamp 
5 formed by the parts FF at the upper right 
hand corner of the door, and with the clamp 
E securing the door at its forward extremity 
by means of the catch or fastening means IX, 
with the angle-irons III securing the lower 
Iu corners of the door, in which position it is 
impossible for the door to become detached 
or loosened of itself or by motion of the car, 
and by providing suitable cleats at the sides 
of the door, as shown by a C', to prevent the 
15 escape of grain at those points a door is pro 
vided which effectually closes the lower por 
tion of the opening in the side of the car. 
When it is desired to unload the car, it will 
be seen by raising the lower arm of the catch 
2o K the upwardly-tending arm which engages 
the clamp E is detached therefrom, and the 
catch may then be drawn inflush with the edge 
of the door, thus offering no obstacle to its be 
ing raised perpendicularly, and it is so raised 
25 to allow the grain to escape from the car. 
The lower right-hand corner, being cut off in 
the manner shown, provides an easy turning 
point, as it will be seen that this corner, if not 
so cut off, would present an obstacle to the 
3o operation of the door; and in addition to the 
advantage just shown it has the further ad 
vantage of Sooner providing an avenue of 
escape for the grain at that end of the door 
than if the corner formed a right angle, as 
35 the other corners, and by means of this ave 
nue of escape, provided when the door is 
slightly raised, the grain running out at this 
point relieves the bearing of that end of the 
door against the grain and allows it to be 
4o freely and easily raised, and may be adjusted 
in position as shown by letter B', (designat 
ing the door,) or in the perpendicular posi 
tion, as shown by B', (also designating the 
door.) In the passage of the door from the 
lowered or horizontal position to the perpen 45 
dicular position at the side of the car the arc 
shaped T-rail bearing in the clamp formed of 
the parts FF is carried backward through 
the opening of the said clamp until the door 
is in the position as shown by B', and the 
said T-rail is prevented from detachment 
from the clamp by means of the stop before 
described on the end of the T-rail. The door 
is closed in the same manner-viz., the T-rail 
bearing and traveling in the clamp in the 
same manner as in raising the door. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In combination with a car, the door B, 
provided with the cleats a ?t', the catch K, 
the arc-shaped T-rail J, having the stops k at 
its respective ends, the sections F E, bolted 
to the edge of the opening in the car and form 
ing the clamp in which the said T-rail J bears 
and travels, all substantially as described and 
set forth. 
2. In a car-door, the frame part B, having 
the cleats a. a', the catch K, the arc-shaped 
T-rail J, the sections FF, forming the bear 
ing in which the T-rail travels, the clamps E 
G, the stops HI, all substantially as described 
and set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
55 
(GEORGE G. GEIGER, 
Witnesses: 
D. K. BERTZ, 
C. B. MICVEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449255.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 449,255. 
E. KL, AHN, 
WATCH BOW FASTENER, 
Patented Mar, 3l l89l. 
 
ATTORNEYS 
The NOFRs p 
Rts PETERs co, PHoTo-Litho., washi Nero, c.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
iEMIL KLAHN, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE KEYSTONE 
WATCH CASE COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
WATCH - BOW FAST ENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 449,255, dated March 31, 1891. 
Application filed January 2, 1891, 
Serial No. 376,536, No model.) 
To (t/l, it'll 01), it inctly concern: 
lse it known that I, EMIL KLAHN, a citizen 
of the United States, and a resident of Jersey 
City Heights, in the county of Hudson and 
5 State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Devices for 
Fastening Watch-Bows, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved bow 
Io fastening device for watch-cases; and it con 
sists of certain improvements which are fully 
set forth and described hereinafter, and which 
are shown in the accompanying drawings. 
In carrying out my invention I employ : 
I5 Watch-case pendant provided with holes or 
apertures and a bow having its ends, which 
are inserted in these apertures of the pend 
ant, provided with locking-heads, which are 
journaled in an eccentric position upon the 
20 ends of the bow. When the bow ends are 
inserted in the apertures, these heads are 
turned so as not to prevent the passage of 
the bow ends through the apertures, and 
are then turned out so as to project over 
25 the apertures upon the inside of the pendant, 
and thus lock the bow ends in place. These 
heads may be carried upon pins or screws 
passing through the ends of the bow, as is 
hereinafter set forth. 
In the drawings, Figure I represents a front 
view of a watch-pendant with a bow attached 
to the same by means of my improved fasten 
ing device, and Fig. 2 shows the pendant in 
vertical section and the bow partially in sec 
Similar lette's of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A in the drawings represents a watch, the 
pendant B of which is provided with two 
4o holes or apertules l to, diametrically opposite 
each other. The bow C is of an annular shape 
with a part cult out, as usual. The so-formed 
ends of the bow are provided with screw 
holes terminating in the flat surfaces of the 
D D, are Sc1'ews ol' pins having eccentric 
heads d d, which are screwed or pushed into 
the holes of the bow ends, so that the eccen 
tric-heads are in face with the flat surfaces 
45 ends. 
35 tion. 
5o of the bow ends. 
 
7 O 
The bow is fastened to the pendant in the 
following manner: The screw's or pins D are 
screwed or pushed through the holes of the 
bow ends until both eccentric-heads of the 
same come in contact, or nearly SO, with the 
surfaces of the ends and without projecting 
beyond the ends laterally, as shown at the 
left-hand side of Fig. 2. The ends of the bow 
are then bent apart, so that they can pass 
over the surface of the watch-pendant, and 
are pressed into the holes of the Said pend 
ant. When this has been clone, the eccentric 
heads (ld are turned until they have such a 
position that they overlap the lower borders 
of the holes b in the pendant B, as shown at 
the right-hand side of Fig. 2. The bow is 
thus kept in a reliable position on the pend 
ant as the heads press against the inner Sull 
faces of the pendant and do not allow the 
bow to be removed therefrom unless the heads 
(ld are turned back so that they do not pro 
ject laterally beyond the ends of the bow. 
When turned into position for locking the 
bow in place, the pins or screw's may be sol 
dered to the bow or otherwise secured against 
lm O Velment. 
The free ends of the screws or pins may be 
cut off and provided with notches, as shown 
in Fig. , so that they can be turned by means 
of a screw-driver when it shall be necessary 
to put the heads inside of the pendant into 
another position. 
The chief feature of the invention consists 
of the heads did, journaled eccentrically upon 
the ends of the bow, so that they may be 85 
turned so as not to project laterally when the 
bow ends are inserted, but maybe turned out 
when the bow is in place, so as to project over 
the apertures of the pendant on the inside, 
and thus lock the bow ends in place. 
Having now described my invention, What 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letter's 
Patent, is 
1. A device for fastening Watch-bows, con 
sisting of a hollow pendant of a watch-case 95 
with two holes, a boy having screw-holester 
minating in the surfaces of its ends, and 
screws or pins with eccentric-heads screwed 
or pushed into the holes of the bow, which 
heads, when turned, press against the inner Ioo 
So 
75 
9 O 
2 
449,255 
2. In a watch-bow fastener, the combina- 
5 ing apertures upon opposite sides, a bow, and of November, A. D. 1890. 
borders of the holes in theneck, substantially said apertures on the inside, substantially as to 
as and for the purpose specified. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
tion, with the pendant, of a watch-case hav- York and State of New York, this 22d day 
heads journaled in an eccentric position upon 
the ends of said bow, adapted to be turned, 
when the bow ends are inserted in the aper- 
tures of the pendant, so as to project beyond 
and for the purpose specified. 
EMI, KAIN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN J. HOGAN, 
CHARLES KARP. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449355.txt	(No Model.) 
T. SUCHL AND. 
CHAIR 
No. 449,355. 
Patented Mar. 3l l891, 
  
 
 
  
F I G 2. t 
 
  
if it 22 % 
 
7%inesses: 
(5.6 
6, 2. 
linven to it. 
Theodor such land, / 
Ay 2 C2 2farneys, - 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODOR SUCHLAND, OF BERLIN, ASSIGNOR TO VALENTIN LANDSBERG, 
OF POSEN, GERMANY. 
CHAIR, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 449,355, dated March 31, 1891. 
Application filed August 27, 1888, Serial No. 283,887, (No model.) Patented in Germany February 10, 1888, No. 44,374, 
50 
7 O 
75 
O 
To all who11 it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THEODOR SUCH LAND, 
of the city of Berlin, Prussia, Germany, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improved 
Chair with Adjustable Seat, (a patent for 
which was granted to me in Germany, dated 
February 10, 1888, No. 44,374) of which I de 
clare the following to be a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved chair 
in which the seat is adjustable, so that the 
same can be raised or lowered, as may be de 
sired, and will be securely held in any posi 
tion by means of appropriate clamping-levers, 
which can be released from their engagement 
with the vertical guide-rods by means of a 
knob or handle arranged so as to be readily 
operated on. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure is 
a vertical section of the chair, and Fig. 2 is a 
horizontal section of the same. 
Vertical rods Ct. are fixed in appropriate 
manner to the lower surface of the frame 
work of the seat h or to the seat itself and 
arranged to slide up and down in suitable 
tubes or guides b, preferably either fixed to 
or located within the legs of the said chair. 
The upper ends of the tubest are either slot 
ted or are screwed or fixed to suitably-formed 
shells or sleeves c, cut away at c, so that the 
case-hardened ends d of the clamping-levers 
d can firmly bite on the rods a, fixed to the 
seat-frame h. 
The clamping-levers d turn on the bolts d", 
which run through the rail or railse of strong 
sheet or thin bar or single iron, the ends of 
which can be bent over to form the sleeves c, 
or the sleeves c can be made of a separate 
piece of metal and be screwed or otherwise 
attached to the rail or rails e or the frame of 
the chair. The opposite ends of the clamp 
ing-levers dare carried by springs f, of helical 
form, and hung in the eyes f', but flat springs 
can be used. I prefer, however, to employ 
helical springs, as the same are not so liable 
to be ruptured as flat or leaf springs. 
The clamping-levers d will allow the seat 
to be raised, but will allow no downward move 
ment until the said levers are brought out of 
engagement with the rods a by operating the 
knob or handle i. 
As soon as the seat h has been raised to the 
desired height, the hardened tips d' of the le 
vers d will securely bite on the rods a, and 
thus prevent all downward movement of the 
seat h, which is thus held in raised position, 
So that the heavier the weight is on the seat 
the firmer will be the engagement of the ends 
d of the clamping-levers d with the rods (a. 
In order to release the levers d from their 
engagement with the rods C, and allow the 
seat h to be lowered, I employ a L-formed 
bent rail k, the ends of which are arranged 
to turn on suitable hinges l. The forward 
end of the raill, is carried by a helical spring 
o, hung in an eye o', said rail being, further 
more, provided with a knob or handle i. On 
each side of the rail k is a lug m, carrying a 
bolt in or its equivalent, which latter lies im 
mediately above the rear ends of the clamp. 
ing-level's d without in any way preventing 
the lowering of the same. 
If it is desired to lower the seat, the knob 
or handle i, and consequently the lugs in and 
raille, are depressed until the bolts in or their 
equivalents come in contact with the rear 
arms of the levers d, press the same down 
Ward, and release the tips d' from their en 
gagement with the rods a, so that the said 
seat can be readily lowered. As soon as the 
knob or handle i is released the lever I will 
be immediately raised by the spring 0 and 
the rear ends of the clamping-levers d by the 
springs f, so that the forward ends d of the 
said claimping-levers will be caused to imme 
diately bite on and engage with the rods a. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a vertically-adjustable chair-seat, the 
combination, with the seat and frame, the 
tubes b, the sleeves c c', and the rods a, work 
ing therein, of the levers d, having the hard 
ened sharp tips dengaging with said rods by 
biting thereon, whereby the seat is held at 
the desired height, substantially as described. 
2. In a vertically-adjustable chair-seat con 
structed as above described, the combination, 
3O 
35 
45 
2 
449,355 
with the sliding rods C, and levers cl, engag 
ing therewith, of the bent lever or hinged rail 
k, provided with the lug in, and bolt or stud 
7, engaging with the levers d, whereby the 
5 seat is lowered when desired, substantially as 
described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
THEODOR SUCHLAND. 
Witnesses: 
ANTHONY STEFFEN, 
B. ROI, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449455.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER. R. WADE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
PROCESS OF DEG UMMING AND PRE PARING FBERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 449,455, dated March 31, 1891. 
Application filed May 22, 1890, Serial No. 352,782, (No specimens.) 
... O 
7 O 
75 
To cut. Uh OT, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WALTER. R. WADE, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Processes of Degumming 
and Preparing Fibers, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention consists of a new process of 
degumming and preparing raw fibers derived 
from ramie, hemp, flax, &c., so as to fit them 
for the use of manufacturers in the produc 
tion of the finest textile fabrics, as hereinafter 
fully described and claimed. 
In practicing my invention I take the fiber 
from any of these plants as it is removed by 
the decorticator, of which there are numer 
Olls Varieties in the market, all more or less 
effective in decorticating the plants-that is, 
peeling the bark containing the fiber from 
the same and separating it from the woody 
stems, in which condition the different fibers, 
notably ramie, can be had in the various 
lmarkets of the world, although the fibers of 
flax and hemp are often still freed from their 
adherent Woody stems by a different process. 
Any of the above fibers Iboilin an alkaline 
Solution containing quillaia-bark, or else a 
decoction of or extract made from quillaia 
bark. The principal ingredient of the quil 
laia-bark valuable in this process is the 
thing known as saponin, and this is known 
to exist in other plants than quillaia; and 
for the purposes of this invention I declare 
that these other plants are equivalents of the 
quillaia bark, though I prefer quillaia-bark. 
The proportion of potash or soda and quil 
laia-bark or its equivalent may be varied 
within considerable limits for any of the 
above-named fibers, and even with different 
Samples of the same fiber should be varied 
to Some extent, as the quantity and quality 
of the gum by which the fibers are aggluti 
nated differ in these different plants and in 
the different lots of the same plants. 
A man 
skilled in the art of treating fibers will through 
the exercise of his acquired skill vary the 
proportions of the alkali and the quillaia-bark 
by observing its action upon each different 
lot which he is treating or preparing. 
Ramie, for instance, may be prepared as 
follows: Take the decorticated fiber, as above 
described, boil it at a pressure of from thirty 
five to fifty pounds, from four to five hours 
in an aqueous Solution of caustic soda of the 
Strength of from One and one-half to two and 
one-half degrees of Baum's areometer, (ten 
perature 60Fahrenheit,) to which has been 
added the decoction or extract from One and 
one-half to two pounds of quillaia-bark to 
every one hundred gallons of the alkaline so 
lution, the strength of the solution within the 
above limits varying according to the purity 
of the articles used, the amount of pressure 
employed, and the maturity reached by the 
plants from which the fibers have been Ob 
tained, which latter is easily known to the 
experienced eye. I give ramie for an illus 
tration, as without its undergoing a previous 
chemical preparation the fiber is unsuited 
for the manufacture of the finer textile fab 
rics. As soon as this process has dissolved 
the gum from the fiber, which is evident from 
the separation of the fine fibers which com 
pose the large fiber-strands in their raw 
state, I cleanse the fiber from the solution 
and gum by Washing and pressing. A Very 
good way is to remove the fiber from the so 
lution, wring it or press it until comparatively 
dry, then wash it, and finally wring or press 
out the water. I now immerse the fiber in a 
bath of acidulated water, making the bath 
of such strength as not to permit the acid to 
injure the fiber. (Sulphuric acid will do, tak 
ing about one pound of the ordinary com 
mercial sulphuric acid to one hundred gal 
lons of water.) After remaining in this bath 
usually only a few minutes I take the fiber 
out of the bath and bleach it by application 
of ordinary known bleaching agents. When 
the fiber is sufficiently bleached, I rinse it in 9 
Water to remove the bleaching agent and 
then boil it in a weak alkaline bath contain 
ing Soft Soap or other equivalent Sapona 
ceous material, until the fiber is sufficiently 
softened to be fit for use, and then allow it to 
cool gradually, after which I wash or rinse it 
and dry it, when it is ready to be made into 
threads or yarns by the manufacturers. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to Secure by Letters Patent, is 
The herein - described process of degum 
ming and preparing raw fiber, consisting in 
boiling them in an alkaline solution contain 
ing quillaia-bark or a decoction or extract 
thereof. 
WALTER, R. WADE. 
Witnesses: 
IIENRY IB. LOTHROP, 
GERTRUDE H. ANDERSON. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449555.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 449,555. 
F. P. MIGHELL. 
CLOTHES POUNDER. 
Patented Mar. 3l l89l. 
Az-Z, 
% 
/ 
C 
C 
W-c 
Z7 
V 
/ 4. 
A. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANKLIN P. MIGHELT, OF SUGAR GROVE, ILLINOIS. 
CLOTHES-POUNDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 449,555, dated March 31, 1891. 
Application filed December 18, 1890, Serial No. 375,127. (No model.) 
45 
so 
65 
75 
IO 
To all tuhon it nucly concern 
Be it known that I, FRANKLIN P.M.IGHELL, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Sugar Grove, in the county of Kane 
and State of Illinois, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Clothes 
Pounders; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
clothes-pounders; and it consists in the con 
struction and combination of the parts, as will 
be hereinafter more fully set forth, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure is a ver 
tical sectional view of a clothes-pounder con 
structed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a bottom view. 
A refers to a truncated cone, which is pro 
vided at a suitable distance above its base 
with a transverse partition a, from which de 
pend a series of vertical partition-plates b, 
which are also secured to the sides of the 
cone. Through the center of the cone A ex 
tends a tube B, which at a suitable distance 
below its upper end is provided with perfo 
rations c, said perforations being located above 
the upper end of the cone. 
C refers to a cap or cylinder having a suit 
able cover and means for connecting the same 
to the upper end of the tube B. The lower 
edge of this cap is provided with openings d. 
The handle or stick by which the clothes 
pounder is operated is forced into the upper 
end of the tube B, but not to the extent to 
extend below the perforations c. 
The cap C, which incases the upper end 
of the tube and cone, may be of any suit 
able construction, that illustrated being pre 
ferred. 
A clothes-pounder constructed as herein 
shown and described will have an air-tight 
compartment E, and beneath the same several 
open-ended chambers, as well as a chamber 
which connects with the lower open end of 
the central tube and apertures d. 
In practice the pounder is operated in the 
usual manner, and when forced down the air 
or a large portion of that confined will pass 
up the tube B through the perforations (and 
out of the openings d, carrying with it at the 
same time a certain amount of water, which 
will be agitated to rapidly form suds. The 
inclosed air-chamber E will give buoyancy to 
the pounder. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
In a clothes-pounder, the combination of an 
outer frustum-shaped shell A, having secured 
to its upper end a tube B, with perforations 
c, vertical walls b, secured to the lower por 
tion of the shell, to the central tube, and to a 
transverse wall Cl, within the shell, so as to 
form a dead-air space E, a cap secured to the 
shell A and provided adjacent to said shell 
with perforations d, a cover for the cap C, se 
cured to said cap and to the upper end of the 
tube B, substantially as shown, whereby an 
air-passage is provided through the tube B 
and cap C for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
FRANKLIN P. MIGHELL. 
Witnesses: 
PERRY WILDER, 
ALBERT MIGHELL, 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449656.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 449,656. 
G ANDREEN. 
SHUTTER WORKER, 
Patented Apr. 7, 1891. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GUSTAVE ANDREEN, OF OMAHA, NEBRASKA. 
SHUTTER-work ER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 449,656, dated April 7, 1891. 
Application filed May 12, 1890, Serial No.351,372, (No model.) 
55 
- 
- 
To all whon, it 77 (tly concern: 
Be it known that I, GUSTAVE ANDREEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Oma 
ha, county of Douglas, in the State of Ne 
braska, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Means for Operating 
Fire-Proof Shutters and Doors, of which I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming part of this 
specification. 
My present invention has for its object to 
provide a novel means whereby fire-proof 
shutters or doors may be readily operated by 
the impact of the hose-stream directed against 
the same, so that such shutters or doors can 
be quickly opened and closed by the firemen. 
In Letters Patent No. 413,219, granted to 
me October 22, 1889, is shown and broadly 
claimed a fire-proof shutter or door having 
combined therewith a striker-plate project 
ing from the shutter in position to receive 
the impact of the hose-stream. 
In the constructions hereinafter described 
I likewise employ a striker-plate, and the 
striker-plate is furnished with an overhang 
ing top, as in my former patent. In addition 
to this striker-plate, I provide by my present 
invention a downward extension of the over 
hanging top plate, so as to form a pocket or 
cavity better adapted to catch the water, and 
thus more effectively apply the force of the 
stream in the operation of the shutter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows an outside view of a shutter or door 
having my invention applied thereto. Fig. 
2 is a vertical sectional view thereof. Fig. 3 
is an outside view of a shutter, showing a 
modified embodiment of my invention. Fig. 
4 is a horizontal Sectional view of the con 
struction shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is an out 
side view showing a further modified embodi 
ment of my invention. 
The door or shutter D is furnished with 
suitable hangers E, carrying rollers e, which 
travel upon the horizontal top rail B, secured shutter or door to be readily effected. 
above the opening of the door or window, and 
beneath such opening is provided a bottom 
rail B', whereby the lower portion of the door 
or shutter will be guided in well-known man 
ner. Upon the outer face of each section of 
the shutter or door D is fixed at any conven 
ient point a striker-plate A, the inner edge of 
this striker-plate being suitably attached to 
the door or shutter, and above this striker 
plate A extends a top plate (t, as in the con 
struction set out in my prior patent. From 
the outer edge of the top plate a depends a 
front plate C", which, with the striker-plate A 
and the top plate Cl, Serves to form the pock 
ets upon each side of the striker-plate A to 
receive the stream of water from the hose. 
The front plate Cl, serving, as it does, to make 
a more perfect pocket or cavity for the water, 
enables the force of the Water to be more ef- 6 
fectually applied to the operation of the shut 
ter. From this construction it will be seen 
that the stream of water may be directed by 
the pipe-men againsteither face of the striker 
plate A and into the pocket formed by the 
striker-plate A, the top plate a, and front 
plate Ct. 
In the form of my invention illustrated in 
Figs. 2 and 3 of the drawings the striker-plate 
A is shown as extending from top to bottom 
of the door or shutter D, this door or shutter 
being Sustained by hangers E, as in the con 
struction hereinbefore described. The striker 
plate A is suitably bolted-as, for example, 
by a base-flange 2-to the face of the shutter 
and serves to give increased strength to the 
shutter to resist Warping under intense heat. 
In this form of my invention the top plate a 
and front plate Clare shown as extending. 
from side to side of the shutter at its upper 
portion, these parts being formed from a sin 
gle piece of metal conveniently attached to 
the upper portion of the shutter by means of 
a base-flange 3. By preference, also, that 
part of the striker-plate A beneath the front 
plate C' is provided with a flange a, to which 
the front plate may be conveniently attached. 
From this construction it will be seen that 
the striker-plate A and the top and front 
plates C. and a form suitable pockets adapted 
to receive the impact of the stream of water 
from the hose and enable the shifting of the 
In the construction illustrated in Figs. 5 
and 6 of the drawings the striker-plate A is 
shown as a continuous plate extending around 
the shutter adjacent its top corners, and over 
the corners or points where the striker-plate 
A joins the top plate Ct. are placed the front 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
449,656 
plates (t'. In this construction the striker 
plate A serves not only to receive the impact 
of the water stream, but the front plate Ct, co 
operates with the striker-piate A and with the 
top plate at in forming pockets, which enable 
the force of the water to be effectually ap 
plied to move the shutter in either direction. 
It will be readily understood that when the 
shutter is to be moved in either direction the 
hose-stream will be directed into the pocket 
at the corner farthest from the pipe-men. 
It is obvious that a striker-plate can be ap 
plied in other positions upon the shutter, and 
its details of construction and location may 
be varied within wide limits by the skill of 
the mechanic. So, also, the front plate may 
be modified as to its precise shape and incli 
nation, so long as it serves to co-operate in 
forming a pocket for the effective application 
of the hose-stream. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Tetters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a sliding door or 
shutter, of a pocket projecting from the door 
or shutter in position to receive the impact of 
the hose-stream, said pocket having a front 
plate to better confine the water, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination, with a sliding door or 
shutter, of a striker-plate, a top plate, and a 
Io 
25 
30 
35 
front plate adapted to form a pocket to re 
ceive the impact of the hose-stream, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The combination, with a sliding door or 
shutter, of a striker-plate extending approxi 
mately from top to bottom of the door or 
shutter and serving to stiffen the door or shut 
ter against warping, said striker-plate pro 
jecting in position to receive the impact of 
the hose-stream, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with a door or shutter, 
of a striker-plate, and a top plate extending 
approximately from side to side of the door 
or shutter and serving to stiffen the door or 
shutter against Warping, Said top plate and 
said striker-plate serving to form a cavity 
against which a hose-stream may be directed 
to shift the door or shutter, substantially as 
described. 
5. The combination, with a sliding door or 
shutter, of a striker-plate connected to the 
door or shutter and projecting outwardly 
from the sides thereof, a top plate, and a front 
plate or plates extending over across the top 55 
of the door at the upper corners or points of 
union with the striker-plate, substantially as 
described. 
45 
GUSTAVE ANDREEN. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. P. FISHER, Jr., 
JAMES II. PEIRCE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449756.txt	(No Model.). 
No. 449,756, 
C. W. EGAN 
REED ORGAN. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 7, l89l. 
 
  
en 
 
 
on 
a 
tower as 
conse are are 
a 
 
  
 
 
 
3/2 
H. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
if 
 
g 
 
or. 
 
 
&P 5 
 
W 
 
a e2e 
N.N. G. 
SN 
it 
WITNESSES: 
| 
r= i =se. F= 
i. 
is H H II 
, 
7.7 
i-e- 
-d 
it 
the Norris PETERs co, Photo-LITHo., WASHIWGTON, D.C., 
7TOR 
By 72,624.4% 
ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
C. W. EGAN, 
REED ORGAN, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 449,756, 
Patented Apr. 7, 1891. 
essee 
W17A/ESSES 
2%-e 
INVENTOR 
By 27/62-6- 47 
AITORNEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. EGAN, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLU \IIIA. 
REED ORGAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 449,756, dated April 7, 1891. 
Application filed May 29, 1890, Serial No, 858,563, (No model.) 
5 
O 
To ct/ It'? On it inctly conce77: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES W. EGAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Reed-Organs; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
el's skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
inlusical instruments belonging to the class of 
reed-Organs, which will be hereinafter more 
particularly described and pointed out. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a transverse section be 
tween two keys of Fig. 7, showing the air-box 
and reed-board. Fig. 2 is a transverse sec 
tion between two keys of Fig. 7 without the 
air-box and reed-board. Figs, 3, 4, 5, and Gare 
details which will be explained hereinafter. 
Fig. 7 is a perspective view of a piano-forte 
With the device applied thereto for use. 
This musical instrument, which may be 
Called the euphonette, with a chromatic 
Compass of three and one-half octaves, (from 
G basso to C in extreme alto) is a solo instru 
ment With more compass than any of the brass 
Or reed instrulinents and within two notes of 
the extreme compass of that king of instru 
lmentS, the Violin, which it most resembles in 
tone, Sympathy, shading, and, above all, the 
tremolo. 
The first feature is that of the combination 
of the tones produced by this instrument and 
any piano, whereby the musical feat is accom 
plished of one performer playing on two sepa 
late and distinct instruments at one and the 
Same time, the air (or right-hand score) of any 
piece of piano music being performed by the 
right hand on the euphonette, while the ac 
Companiment (or bass score) is played on the 
piano with the left hand. 
A simple mechanical arrangement (not 
shown) suffices to attach the euphonette to any 
piano-forte, as seen in Fig. 7, or it can be 
played alone. 
The keys are sawed out of a solid piece. 
Each key is divided from its fellow by a metal 
Washer A', Fig. 1, and works on a stiff metal 
(brass) rod (l, which runs through the whole 
of the keys and is firmly fixed in slots b at 
each fixed end IS of the key-board. By this 
arrangement, the whole key - board can be 
moved from the body of the instrument, or 
any single one of the keys may be detached 
at will by removing the bar B, which is fixed 
to the end pieces at each end over the rod, as 
shown. Each white key A and black key A' 
is governed by a spring S, which keeps that 
end of the key down, (its exact position over 
the hole being governed by the little guide 
rods R.) unless the other is pressed down on 
the pads c c' by the finger, which being done, 
the air from the air-chest D rushes through 
the hole cl and the reed is vibrated. 
The springs S are all fixed into the spling 
bar E, and the tension of the springs is gov 
erned by screws e, which are screwed into the 
Spring-bal' rest F. This rest F is permanently 
fixed as a part of the bar B and is fastened 
by Screws at each end of the fixed end piece 
IS. 
It has a beveled edge, while each spring 
S is firmly driven into the spring-bar E, which 
bar is fastened by a series of screws to the 
Spring-bar rest F, and as they are screwed 
down the Space O is lessened and greater or 
less strength is thereby given to the springs. 
This governs the action of the instrument. 
G is a flexible tube, which is detachably 
fixed in a hole g in one end of the wind-box 
D. The other end has a suitable mouth-piece 
l. Through this tube G the air required for 
the reeds is supplied by the breath of the per 
former, thus avoiding the droning effect of 
all bellows, and the monotonous effect of me 
chanical air always given by the bellows ar 
rangement is done away with and each note 
is given Staccato or legato, accentuated, 
SWelled, or diminished, and a soul of tone is 
given by the breath, which is governed by the 
performer, as in the clarinet, the oboe, the 
flute, and other beautiful instruments capa 
ble of the highest degree of Soulful expression 
approaching to the human Voice. The tremolo 
of the voice, so admirably imitated on stringed 
instruments, (notably the violin and cello,) is 
here produced in a novel way entirely at the 
Will of the performer, who can by governing 
the air-Supply press it to a beating throb or 
reduce it to a single pure tone in softer moods 
at will. This is the great beauty of the instru 
ment. It is produced by using a doubletongue 
or reed II', made of brass, silver, or alloy, in 
AO 
45 
75 
So 
85 
90 
95 
OO 
449,756 
said rod being removably secured in slots at 
the ends of the key-board, the keys being 
separated from each other by metal washers, 
so that the whole board may be removed with 
all the keys or any one key may be taken out 
when necessary. 
2. In a reed-organ supplied with air from 
the mouth by a tube, the siphon in the tube 
supplied with a keyed valve, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a reed-organ, the combination of the 
spring-bar E, the fixed bar F, and adjusting 
screws e, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
35 
CHARLES. W. EGAN. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. H. YoUNG, 
AUSTIN HOLCOMB. 
O 
stead of a single one, the duplicate reed I' 
being tuned a mere shade flatter than the sin 
gle one I. So as not to increase the size of 
the instrument, these double tongues or reeds 
are arranged point to point on the reed-board 
J, (seen in Fig. 4.) both of them being acted 
on by the raising of the same key. The flexi 
ble tube G has a siphong', which enters the 
air-chamber through the air-chamber case H, 
this siphong' having a key L to enable the 
moisture of the breath to be blown out through 
the key, and is furnished with an amber 
mouth-piece l, which completes the instru 
ment. The air-chamber case His removably 
attached to the frame H' by means of clamp 
pieces M, which turn on pivot-bolts m, screwed 
into the frame H'. 
I claim- 
1. The keys of a musical instrument ar 
ranged on a metal rod which runs through 
the whole of the keys in open slots therein, 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449856.txt	(No Model.) 
T. J. KING, 
TRACK CILEARER AND LUBRICATOR, 
 
No. 449,856 
Patented Apr. 7, 1891. 
the Norris Peters co., PHoro-lirho., WASH Noston, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODORE J. KING, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
TRACK CLEARER AND LUBRICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Fatent No. 449,856, dated April 7, 1891. 
Application filed July 19, 1890, Serial No, 359,271 (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
To all tufton, it naty concern. 
Be it known that I, THEODORE. J. KING, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Track Clearers and Lubricators; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention has relation to improve 
ments in track clearing and lubricating de 
vices, and while it is more particularly adapt 
ed for use on street-cars to serve in cleaning 
and lubricating grooved rails, yet it may be 
used for cleaning and lubricating side and 
center bearing rails. 
In my application filed February 25, 1890, 
Serial No. 341,729, I have shown and described 
the angular lever or rock-shaft, the weighted 
or gravitating arm, and the angular lever con 
nected there with, the same being here shown 
for the purpose of illustrating my improve 
ments. 
The invention and its advantages will be 
fully understood from the following descrip 
tion and claims, when taken in connection 
With the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a portion 
of a car, showing also in perspective my im 
provements attached thereto. Fig.2 is a side 
elevation of the same, showing the clearing 
devices depressed to engage the track; and 
Fig. 3 is a sectional detail view of my im 
provements removed from the car. 
Referring by letter to said drawings, A in 
dicates a portion of a car-body, and B indi 
cates a receptacle designed to contain the lu 
bricating agent, although in some cases it may 
contain Sand or the like. 
C indicates the angular lever or rock-shaft, 
D the Weighted or gravitating arm fixed to 
said shaft, and E the angular pedal-lever con 
nected with the weighted arm, all of which 
are of a construction substantially the same 
as that shown in my application for Letters 
Patent above referred to. 
F indicates a brush-head carrying bristles 
or like devices for clearing the track. Ex 
tending from one end of this head is a guide 
eye Cl, which is designed to receive a short 
metallic tube b, which is externally threaded 
and adjustably secured with respect to said 
head and eye by means of nuts c and d, ar 
ranged, respectively, above and below the eye 55 
and taking into the threads of the tube. By 
this means it will be seen that the tube may 
be adjusted with respect to the bristles of 
the brush, so that it may approach or recede 
from the track to any suitable point desired. 6o 
G indicates a tube, which may be metal or 
other rigid material. This tube depends from 
the floor of the receptacle B, which is prefer 
ably provided with a hopper-shaped bottom 
and carries a valve-seat e, within which is ar- 65 
ranged a valve-key or plug H, having an all 
gular branch f, which is connected with the 
angular or depending branches of the lever 
C by means of a suitably-shaped connection 
I, so that as said lever has been rocked in its 7c 
bearing it may open and close the Valve or 
key and thereby stop and start the flow of 
lubricant from the receptacle to the track. 
The tubes b and Gare connected by means of 
a flexible tubing K, as shown. 
L indicates a scraper, which has its lower 
end shaped to conform to the bearing-surface 
of the rail and, in grooved rails this scraper 
has a tongue, as better shown in Fig. 1, to en 
ter the groove in the rail. This scraper is 8o 
pivoted in a boxing of a peculiar construction, 
as will be presently referred to, and the arm 
carrying the same has its upper end provided 
with a lug or stud g, adapted to enter a hole 
or recess in the boxing, when the clearing de- 85 
vices are raised from the track or thro Wn Oult 
of an operative position. 
M. indicates the boxing, which is preferably 
composed of an upper and a lower plate h 
and i, having inclosed sides and their upper 9o 
ends bolted or otherwise Secured to the angul 
lar branches of the shaft C. This boxing, as 
will be better seen from Fig. 3, is of a greater 
depth at its upper end, as at l, than at its 
lower end, as at m or, in other Words, the in- 95 
ternal area of the boxing increases from its 
mouth upwardly, the object of which will be 
presently explained. 
The scraper-arm N is pivoted near its up 
per end adjacent to the mouth of the boxing Ico 
by means of a bolt p, So that said arm may 
have a lateral movement within the boxing 
and to some extent a universal movement. 
This armN also carries a clearing or advanc 
35 
45 
s 
449,856 
ing point P and has secured to it the brush 
head, as shown, so that the advancing point, 
the scraper, the brush, and the discharge end 
of the lubricating-tube will be governed in 
their movements according to the movements 
of said arm. The boxing is also provided 
with transverse studs or bolts p", which assist 
in securing the plates together and may to 
some extent serve as lateral stops for the arm 
N. The boxing has a hole Qin its upper side 
and centrally therein, so as to receive the lug 
or stud g on the upper end of the arm N. 
From the construction illustrated it will be 
seen that the boxing will permit an upward 
or lifting motion of the broom and scraper 
and also a lateral movement thereof, and that 
when the scraping devices have been raised 
out of use they will be prevented from lat 
eral or sidewise motion by means of the shape 
of the boxing, the hole therein, and the lug or 
Stop on the upper end of the arm carrying 
said devices. 
While I have described the parts in the ex 
act construction here shown, yet I do not 
wish to be confined to the precise construc 
tion and exact arrangement of the devices 
illustrated. So far as I am aware, Iain the 
first to ever provide a track clearing or lubri 
cating device that upon coming in contact 
with the rail will be given a freedom of mo 
tion laterally and upon being thrown out of 
engagement with the rail will be prevented 
from lateral motion. 
In operation it will be seen that when the 
driver or attendant of a car depresses the 
vertical branch of the angular lever E the 
outer end of the weighted arm D will be 
lifted and the angular lever or shaft C will be 
l'Ocked in its bearings, SO as to bring down 
the angular branches thereof, and conse 
quently the scraper and brush, in contact 
with the track. As thus brought down, the 
arm N, by reason of its being pivoted, as 
shown, will cause its stud or lugg to with 
draw from the hole or recess in the boxing, 
and thereby allow the clearing devices a free 
lateral motion. This movement will simul 
taneously cause the key or valve in the pipe 
G to open through the medium of the con 
nection I, and thereby allow the lubricant to 
flow through the tube IX and deposit upon 
the track. As the driver removes pressure 
from said vertical branch the weighted arm 
will rock the shaft C in an opposite direction, 
so as to lift the depending branches of said 
shaft, and consequently the brush, scraper, 
and lubricating device, which will momenta 
rily cause the stud or lug on the upper end 
of the arm N, by reason of gravity, to enter 
the eye or hole in the boxing and thereby 
hold the abrading parts from lateral motion. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
l. In a track-clearing device, the combina 
tion, with a pivoted brush-holder, of a boxing 
to sustain the same, said boxing being adapted 
to allow a lateral movement of the holder, and 
provided with a recess to serve in fixing the 
position of the holder. 
2. A laterally-movable arm adapted to carry 
a track-clearing device and provided at its 
upper end with a stop, in combination with a 
sustaining - boxing pivotally receiving said 
arm and provided with means for receiving 
the stop, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with a boxing increas 
ing in internal area from its mouth, of an arm 
for the attachment of track-clearing devices, 
said arm being pivoted in the boxing and 
provided at one end with a stop adapted to 
engage one of the walls of the boxing at a 
predetermined point, so as to stay the lateral 
movement thereof. 
4. In a track-clearing device, the combina 
tion, with the angular lever or rock-shaft, of 
the boxing secured to the angular branches 
thereof and having an aperture in one of 
the walls, the arm provided with a stop to 
engage said aperture and pivoted in the box 
ing, and track-clearing devices Secured to the 
lower end of the arm, substantially as speci 
fied. 
5. In a track-clearing device, substantially 
as described, the combination, with the brush 
having the guide - eye, of the externally 
threaded tube arranged in said eye, the nuts 
for adjustably securing the tube to the eye, 
and a flexible tube leading from a lubricant 
receptacle, substantially as specified. 
6. In a track-clearing device, the combina 
tion, with the angular lever or rock-shaft, of 
the lubricant receptacle, the conveyer lead 
ing therefrom, the valve-key, and the arm 
connecting the depending branches of the 
rock - shaft with the key, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
. 
THEODORE. J., IKING. 
Witnesses: 
C. II. RAEDER, 
T. E. TURPIN. 
75 
90 
95 
CC 
5 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US449956.txt	G. F. SIMONDS, 
BALL BEARING, 
Patented Apr. 7, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 449,956, 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
N 
 
  
 
772a2eessas; 
2.&z. 
N S 
N s 
SN 
7 
"S 
N 
 
N 
SN 
2N N 
N iN tZN 
 
N 
Zezeeez. 
622%212s2 ozaez, 
zee. -7.12. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE. F. SIMONDS, OF FITCHBURG, MASSACHUSETTS. 
BALL-BEARING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 449,956, dated April 7, 1891. 
Application filed August 2, 1890, Serial No, 360,808, (No model.) 
in 
55. 
The tubular piece or sleeve 
or balls S and 9. 
To all whon, it inval/ CO7 ce172. 
6 is formed intermediate its ends with an an 
Be it known that I, GEORGE FREDERICK 
nular rib or collar 10, the side walls or sur 
SIMONDS, a citizen of the United States, re 
faces of which are located at right angles to 
siding at Fitchburg, in the county of Worces 
the axis of the shaft, and this rib or collar is 
ter and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
formed or provided with a screw-threaded 
new and useful Improvements in Ball-Bear 
ings, of which the following is a specification. 
orifice 12 to receive the screw-threaded plug 
or bolt 13, having its inner end portion 14 
This invention relates to that type of ball 
plane or smooth, and entering a recess 15 in 
bearings wherein annular sets of spherical 
the shaft, in such manner that the tubular 
rollers or balls are employed to sustain and 
support radial pressure or Weight, and other 
piece or sleeve 6 is caused to revolve with the 
shaft, while the latter can, if desired, slightly 
annular sets of similar rollers or balls serve 
move lengthwise by reason of the recess 15 
to resist or counteract endwise thrusts of a 
being constructed slightly greater in length 
shaft or journal, as in the several Letters Pat 
than in width. This peculiar construction is 
ent issued to me August 19, 1890. 
The object of the present invention is to particularly designed for the armature-shafts 
provide novel means whereby the parts are of dynamo-machines where a slight longitudi 
adapted for a through-shaft, and dust, dirt, 
nal movement of the shaft is desirable. 
The extremities of the tubular piece or 
or other foreign matter is effectually excluded 
sleeve 6 are provided with external screw 
from each end of the ball-bearing. 
threads 16, with which are engaged screw 
The invention also has for its object to pro 
threaded rings 17, having their external pe 
vide novel means for connecting the tubular 
ripheries formed with annular packing 
pieces or sleeve with the shaft or journal in 
grooves 18 for the purpose of containing pack 75 
such manner that they rotate together. 
ings of any material suitable for the condi 
To accomplish these objects my invention 
tions required to exclude dust, dirt, or other 
involves the features of construction, the com 
foreign matter from the ball-bearing at each 
bination or arrangement of parts, and the 
principles of operation hereinafter described 
end thereof. 
The annular packings in the packing 
and claimed, reference being had to the ac 
grooves bear against the internal surfaces of - 
companying drawings, in which 
the rings or annular pieces 7 to produce tight 
Figure 1 is a sectional plan view showing 
joints between the parts, and the rings oran 
a shaft supported in ball-bearings constructed 
nular pieces are each provided with an annu 
in accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is 
lar rib or collar 19 projecting inwardly to 
a sectional view taken on the line acac, Fig. 1. 
Ward the shaft. 
In order to enable those skilled in the art 
In the channels or spaces between the screw 
to make and use my invention, I will now de 
rings 17 and the ribs or collars 19 are ar 
scribe the same in detail, referring to the 
ranged the annular sets of spherical rollers 
drawings, wherein 
or balls 8, while between the parallel side sur 
The numeral 1 indicates a shaft supported 
at different points by ball-bearings located in 
faces or walls of the rib or collar 10 of the tu 
bular piece or sleeve 6 and the ribs or collars 
boxes 2 and 3, such boxes being provided with 
19 of the rings or annular pieces are arranged 
flanges 4 or other means by which to secure 
the annular sets of spherical balls or rollers 
them in a fixed position on a suitable support. 
9. The spherical balls or roilers 8 have no 
The boxes are composed of two sections, the 
pressure-supporting contact with the adja 
lower one of which is provided with the flanges 
cent parallel surface of the rings 17 and the 
4, while the upper one is detachably secured 
collars 19, but have a pressure-supporting 
by bolts 5 or other devices for the purpose 
contact with the tubular piece or sleeve 6 and 
of permitting it to be removed and replaced 
the internal surfaces of the rings or annular 
when occasion requires. 
pieces 7, in consequence of which such spher 
The ball-bearing in the box 3 comprises a 
ical rollers or balls operate to sustain or sup 
tubular piece or sleeve 6, rings or annular 
port radial pressure or weight, 
pieces 7, and annular sets of spherical rollers 
95 
85 
15 
25 
45 
IOC 
449,956 
The spherical rollers or balls 9 have. no 
pressure-supporting contact with the internal 
surface of the rings or annular pieces, but 
bear against the parallel adjacent surfaces of 
the rib or collar 10 on the tubular piece or 
sleeve 6 and the ribs or collars 19 on the ridge 
or annular pieces 7 for the purpose of resist 
ing or counteracting endwise thrusts of the 
shaft. 
By the construction described and shown 
the tubular piece or sleeve 6 is connected 
with the shaft in a practical and economical 
manner, while dust, dirt, or other foreign 
matter is effectually excluded from each end 
of a ball-bearing adapted for a through shaft. 
The box 2 is constructed substantially the 
same as described with reference to the box 
3; but the rings which contain the annular 
packing-grooves 18, instead of being screw 
threaded and applied to the tubular piece or 
sleeve 6, are formed integral with or other 
wise provided on the rings or annular pieces 
7, while the annular sets of spherical balls or 
rollers 8 are located in the channels or spaces 
between the grooved and packed flanges and 
the annular rib or collar 10 on the tubular 
piece or sleeve 6, the main object of this con 
struction being to provide a supplemental 
ball-bearing for supporting the shaft 1 to en 
able the latter to run at high speed, while the 
friction is materially and largely reduced. 
By the construction described and shown 
the parts are adapted for a through-shaft, and 
dust, dirt, or other foreign matter is effectu 
ally excluded from each end of the ball-bear 
ing, and the tubular piece or sleeve is detach 
ably connected with the shaft by a simple 
and economical contrivance or device. 
I have exhibited two independent ball-bear 
ings on the same shaft, as such are desirable 
in dynamo-electric machines; but I do not 
herein claim the construction of ball-bearing 
contained in the box 2. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A ball-bearing for a through-shaft, com 
prising a tubular piece or sleeve having an 
55 
6 5 
o 
75 
annular rib or collar intermediate its ends, 
rings or annular pieces surrounding the tubu 
lar piece or sleeve, a ring located at each end 
of the tubular piece or sleeve and formed in 
its periphery with a circular packing-groove 
containing a packing for excluding dust or 
dirt, and annular sets of spherical rollers or 
balls located between the tubular piece or 
sleeve and the rings or annular pieces, Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A ball-bearing comprising an annular 
piece or sleeve having a surrounding rib or 
collar provided with a screw-threaded orifice, 
a screw plug or bolt located in said orifice and 
adapted to engage a shaft, rings or annular 
pieces surrounding the tubular piece or sleeve, 
a ring located at each end of the tubular piece 
or sleeve and formed in its periphery with an 
annular packing-groove containing a packing 
for excluding dust or dirt, and annular sets 
of spherical rollers or balls interposed between 
the tubular piece or sleeve and the rings or 
annular pieces, substantially as described. 
3. A ball-bearing comprising a tubular piece 
or sleeve having screw-threaded ends and a 
surrounding rib or collar located intermediate 
its ends and containing a screw-threaded ori 
fice, a screw plug or bolt located in said ori 
fice and adapted to engage the shaft, a screw 
threaded ring arranged on each end of the 
tubular piece or sleeve and formed in its pe. 
riphery with an annular packing-groove con 
taining a packing for excluding dust or dirt, 
rings or annular pieces provided with annu 
lar ribs or collars, and annular sets of spher 
ical rollers or balls interposed between the tu 
bular pieces or sleeve and the rings or annu 
lar pieces for sustaining or supporting radial 
pressure or Weight and resisting or counter 
acting endwise thrusts of the shaft, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
GEO. F. SIMONDS. 
Witnesses. 
JAMES A. RUTHERFORD, 
ALBERT H. NORRIS. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450056.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 450,056. 
Patented Apr. 7, 1891. 
J. CLERET. 
MACHINE FOR PIERCING PEARL BUTTONS. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
2 22 
2 
22---------- : 22222 
(No Model.) 
J. CLERET. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR PIER, CING PEARL BUTTONS, . . 
No. 450,056. 
Patented Apr. 7, 1891. 
t 
 
the noass perers co., PHoTo-THo., WASHINGTON, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULES CLERET, OF BEAUVAIS, FRANCE. 
MACHINE FOR PIERCING PEARL BUTTONs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,056, dated April 7, 1891. 
Application filed October 27, 1890, Serial No, 369,487, (No model.) 
O 
To all whon it 77 Cy conce7'7. 
Be it known that I, JULES CLRET, of Beau 
vais, in the Republic of France, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Machines 
for Piercing Pearl Buttons and Similar Arti 
cles, which improvement is fully set forth in 
the following specification. 
The present invention has reference to 
mechanism for piercing or perforating pearl 
buttons or other articles similar in form, the 
invention being particularly applicable for 
the manufacture of buttons having two or 
four holes. The drills are preferably ar 
ranged in pairs with their points so disposed 
as to pierce two holes simultaneously at points 
diametrically opposite to each other, which 
arrangement is found to be very efficient and 
advantageous. The button or other article 
is presented to the action of the drills by 
means of a chariot sliding longitudinally in 
the frame. It carries a button-holder which 
is removably supported thereon, this piece 
being made according to the dimensions of 
the button-blank. A platform carried by the 
frame supports the button during the drill 
ing operation, this platform being vertically 
adjustable and placed adjacent to a dis 
charge-opening in the frame, through which 
the button drops into a suitable receptacle 
when the chariot is withdrawn. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure is 
a vertical longitudinal section, partly in ele 
vation, and Fig. 2 a plan view, of a machine 
or apparatus constructed in accordance with 
the invention. 
The tool-holders are composed of a taper 
ing sleeve a, whose forward ends are shoul 
dered to rotate in a journal-box b, the other 
ends being supported in cylindrical journals 
c. Within each sleeve C, is a hollow spindle 
composed of three parts f,g, and h, surround 
ing the drill-rod i. Partif projects from the 
journal c and carries a milled-edge button i. 
Its inner end is threaded to engage with the 
internal threads of sleeve (t. The other parts 
g and h of the spindle are held in sleeve a 
by slight friction. The bore of sleeve C is 
conically contracted at its forward end k, and 
parth of the spindle is split for the greater 
5o part of its length. Consequently when part 
f is screwed home the hold of part h upon 
the spindle is tightened by the pressure of 
45 
25 
35 
the contracted part of k of the sleeve, against 
which the end of part habuts. This arrange 
ment permits the ready removal and inser 
tion of the drills. Each tool-holder has its 
pulley l, and a belt or cord passing over them 
all drives the tool-holders at a uniform speed. 
To the frame d is fixed a table n, upon 
which slides the chariot m, which in the ma 
chine shown is adapted to be actuated by a 
hand-lever O. The chariot carries in a recess 
in the face opposite the drills a button-blank 
holder p, adapted to the diameter and thick 
ness of the button and removable for inser 
tion of a different holder when required. 
In action the button rests upon the plat 
form q, composed of two parallel bars united 
by a cross-piece r, the ends of these bars en 
tering a space under the sliding chariot in. 
It is adjustable vertically by means of a nut 
and-Screw arrangement S, as shown in the 
drawings, so as to present the central portion 
to the action of the drills. The platform is 
adjacent to an openingt in the frame through 
which the button drops, when the chariot in 
is withdrawn, into a suitable receptacle. 
An adjustable screw it limits the motion of 
the chariot toward the drill, arresting it at 
the proper point, according to the thickness 
of the button. 
The invention, while it specially includes 
the arrangement of drills to operate in pairs 
at diametrically-opposite points on the but 
ton, is not limited to a single pair, as shown, 
but would include the use of two pairs oper 
ating alternately, and preferably from oppo 
site sides. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with the buttom-hold 
ing device, of the drill-holder comprising a 
journaled sleeve provided with a pulley for 
turning and being internally contracted at 
its forward end, a hollow spindle in several 
parts, the forward part being split and abut 
ting against the contracted portion of the 
sleeve, so that when forced forward it will 
clamp the drill, and the rear part projecting 
beyond the sleeve and being provided with a 
button for turning and with threads engag 
ing threads on said rotatory sleeve, whereby 
the spindle, drill, and sleeve are coupled to 
gether for action, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the drills, of the 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
2 
450,056 
frame having a discharge-opening, the chariot specification in the presence of two subscrib 
adapted to slide on said frame, the button-ling witnesses. 
holder carried by said chariot across said 
Opening, and the vertically-adjustable plat- 
5 form beneath said holder, substantially as 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
WM. FOUIN, 
ROBT. M. FOOPER. 
Witnesses: 
described. 
y 
JULES CLERET. 
? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450156.txt	No. 450,156. 
 
Patented Apr, l 4, 1891, 
E NoRRLs PE 
rers co. Poto-LTHo., WASHINGTON, D.C 
(No Model.). 
No. 450,156, 
M. G. HUBBARD. 
CAR TRUCK. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 14, 1891, 
s 
s 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MOSES G. HUBBARD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
CAR TRUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,156, dated April 14, 1891. 
Application filed July 5, 1889, Serial No. 316,516, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
65 
7 ? 
7 5 
8 5 
outside of the journal-boxes S S sufficiently 
To all |LUh???, i? ??? ??? ??/*?:  
Be it known that I, MOSES G. HUBBARD, of 
for that purpose and the car-springs mounted 
Chicago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
on the ends thereof. To do this cheaply and 
have invented a new and useful Improvement conveniently, I construct the wheel-pieces A 
in Car-Trucks, of which the following is a full, 
A of two bars of iron or steel b and b', Fig. 2. 
glear, and exact description, reference being 
One of these bars should be of angle-iron and 
had to the accompanying drawings, making 
the other may be of ordinary flat iron, as 
part of this specification. 
shown. The upper bar b may be extended 
My invention consists in an improved con 
entirely around the truck or gear, as shown 
struction and arrangement of a truck or car 
in Fig. 1, to give rigidity to the parts and a 
gear for mounting street-cars; and it relates, 
proper attachment of the brakes thereof to 
first, to the arrangement of the journal boxes 
relieve the springs and body of the car from 
and Springs in such manner as to give the car 
the vertical action of the brakes. The lower 
or truck a short wheel-base and a long spring 
barb' should terminate at its attachments to 
base to facilitate curying and diminish the 
form one side of the skeleton pedestals G. G. 
rocking of the car. 
and short cross-pieces EE, bolted across the 
It further relates to the construction of the 
opening to the braces did, for convenience in 
Wheel-pieces and spring-supports and hang 
removing the journal-boxes, axles, and wheels. 
ing and Working the brakes and to the at 
In the detached view, Fig. 5, the abutting 
tachment of the cross-bars for carrying elec 
shoulders formed upon these cross-pieces fit 
tric moto's or cable-grip and to the manner 
in between the ends of the braces did and the 
of constructing the skeleton pedestals for 
ends of the lower barb, to form a continuous 
holding the journal-boxes and attaching the 
brace from one end of the wheel-piece to the 
other to support the springs and the load. 
Spring-supports and checking the downward 
and the upward movement of the springs, and 
The braces did extend up and support the 
spring-bedsii, on which the springs i i rest, 
to other details of construction and arrange 
ment to improve the working and the conven 
which support the car-body. The upper ends 
of the springs are held in place by the spring 
ience of the truck or gear, as shown in the ac 
companying drawings, which form a part of 
caps KK, Fig. 2, which are held in position 
this specification, and in which 
vertically by the loose check rods or links L 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the truck or gear. 
I, which pass through holes somewhat larger 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation thereof. Fig. 3 is 
than the rods and down between the springs 
and through the spring - beds and check 
an end view thereof. Fig. 4 represents a floor 
frame of a long car-body mounted on my im 
springs n n and have the check-keys , 
, 
proved truck or gear and having an opening 
through their lower ends. These loose check 
for giving convenient access to the machin 
rods or links I prefer to hook into eyes cast 
on the under side of the spring caps, and pass 
ery. Fig. 5 is a detached view of the shoul 
ing down loosely through the spring-beds con 
dered cross-piece. Fig. 6 is a side elevation 
showing a modification of a part of my inven 
nect the check or recoiling springs m in with 
tion for mounting horse-cars and trailing cars. 
the car-body and hold it down upon the car 
springs, thereby limiting its upward move 
My invention is particularly applicable to 
ments and preventing any rattling or noise 
electric cars where it is desired to apply the 
from the car-springs. It thus forms what I 
power to all of the wheels, and therefore the 
term an elastic check-link. The elastic 
cal should be mounted on two axles. It is de 
concussion-seats C C serve to protect the 
sirable to construct such cars longer than or 
extended wheel-pieces from any excessive 
dinary street-cars and to prevent any exces 
sive longitudinal rocking of the car-body and 
strains, as they are adapted to check the 
downward movement of the car and sustain 
to curve around street-corners with as little 
over or mear the journal-box any excess of 
resistance as possible. To accomplish these 
objects I construct my car-body about twen 
load. These concussion-seats may be located 
over the journal-boxes or near them, and may 
ty-two feet long and make my wheel-base 
be made of rubber or of low stiff coil-springs. 
about six feet and myspring-base about nime 
feet, the wheel-pieces A A being extended 
The brakes TT are attached to the exten 
? ? 
15 
25 
35 
O 
45 
I OO 
3. 
450,156 
chinery. 
manner, except that they stand edgewise, and 
sions of the wheel-pieces by ordinary brake 
are firmly secured at their outer ends to the 
hangers at P and are worked by the brake 
upper bar and to vertical flanges cast on the 
levers O O, which are pivoted to the brake 
under sides of the malleable-iron spring-beds 
beams v ., Fig. 1. 
It is important to incline 
jij, Fig, 6, the upper barand the braces and 
these brake-levers laterally in opposite direc 
the said flanges being all bolted or riveted to 
tions, as shown in Fig. 3, in order to locate 
gether. The cross-pieces E. E., Fig. 6, being 
the brake-rods acac on the sides of the open 
bolted to the lower ends of the braces and to the 
ing in the car-floor, and by extending each 
lower bar b' and having shoulders which fit 
brake-rod to the end of the car and connect 
between the ends of the braces and the ends 
ing it to the ordinary brake-wheel each brake 
lever becomes an equalizing - lever for the 
of the lower barb' form a continuous brace 
from one end of the wheel-piece to the other 
Other, and the brakes are worked equally 
without relying wholly upon the bolts by 
from either end of the car. These brake-le 
which it is secured, and it also thus holds the 
VerS may be so inclined laterally as to extend 
journal-box in position. 
the brake-rods directly from them to the brake 
On the sides and top and bottom of the 
wheel shafts on a line outside of the opening 
journal-boxes (see Figs. 2 and 6) I form suit 
through the car-floor, and when thus arranged 
able ribs to embrace the bars forming the 
and the lower ends of the brake-levers con 
skeleton pedestals to hold them securely in 
nected by the slanted or horizontally-inclined 
brake-connecting rod W, extending from one 
position, and I mount the springs and brakes 
and the car-body, as shown in Fig. 2. The 
brake-lever to the other under the cross-bars 
R. R., all of the parts are conveniently out of 
downward bends or drooping of the exten 
sions of these wheel-pieces are for the pur 
the Way and operate in nearly direct lines. 
pose of setting the car-body lower for horse 
The brakes being attached independently of 
cars or trailing cars, while in the arrange 
the car-body do not affect it by their vertical 
action, nor do they interfere with the free 
ment shown in Fig. 2 the extensions are car 
action of the springs, which are adapted to 
ried out straight, in order to locate the car 
body high enough to clear the electric ma 
carry the car-body without auxiliary lateral 
Supports of any kind, and any excessive lon 
m 
gitudinal strain is prevented by pivoting 
I am aware that to attain a greater Wheel 
the car-body directly to the truck by the 
base others have made long trucks, nearly as 
long as the car-body; but to do so they had 
draft-links Y Y, which I construct in such 
manner as to be elastic in both directions by 
to mount the truck on wheels, all of which 
locating a small stiff spring each side of the 
were independent in order to curve around 
bracket or ear to which they are attached, as 
street-corners, which required divided axles 
shown at Y' Y. This imparts to the car 
and double the number of journals and jour 
nal-boxes, besides being impracticable in 
body an unusual steadiness and freedom from 
jars and vibrations in all directions and great 
other respects. 
Strength to resist violent concussions. 
My object in the above-described invention 
The cross-bars R. R. serve to support the 
has been to make as short a truck as possible 
motors in the ordinary manner; but it will be 
and to enable me to use the ordinary standard 
observed that by the free action of the springs 
axle and wheels as being much preferable to 
upon which the car-body is mounted the mo 
independent wheels in many respects; but 
tors will be entirely free from the lateral as 
my rigidly-attached pair of wheels to each one 
of my two axles require the shortest possible 
Well as the vertical movements of the car 
body, and being journaled to the axles and 
wheel-base to enable them to curve around 
resting upon the cross-bars both ends of the 
street-corners, and hence my truck must be 
motors will always be acted upon alike by 
short, and to attain the stability of a long car 
the lateral motions of the car-wheels, while 
body on a short truck I increase my spring 
baseby locating my Springs upon the extended 
the Vertical motions of the wheels will be 
cushioned by small springs, upon which they 
ends of the wheel-pieces of the truck-frame, 
rest in the ordinary manner. 
which extends considerably beyond the axle 
The modification shown in Fig. 6 is adapted 
journal-boxes and entirely around the wheels. 
to ordinary horse-cars and trailing cars, and 
I am also aware that efforts have been made 
is a very strong, cheap, and convenient way 
to accomplish some of the objects of my in 
of attaining for these cars some of the most 
vention by employing two longside bars hav 
valuable advantages of my invention. The 
ing no lateral connection with each other, but 
wheel-piece in Fig. 6 being composed of the 
having their ends rigidly connected to the car 
flat bars b and b', standing edgewise, give 
body laterally. In my above-described plan 
great vertical stiffness. The straight portion 
the complete truck-frame is made as short as 
of the lower bar is bent at right angles at its 
possible to conform to the requirements of the 
ends, and is firmly attached to the upper bar, 
standard and approved style of street-car 
as shown, and thereby forms the inner sides 
axles and wheels, which require a short wheel 
of the skeleton pedestals for inclosing the 
base for curving; but by locating my springs 
journal-boxes S S in a similar manner to the 
out on the ends of this short truck-frame I get 
a sufficiently long spring-base to carry my 
arrangement shown in Fig. 2. The braces 
d d are attached to the upper bar in a similar car steadily and easily. I am thus enabled 
? ? 
25 
35 
40 
45 
5 ? 
55 
?? 
75 
95 
? . ? 
II 5 
25 
I 30 
450,156 
5 
I. ? 
25 
to combine the desired long car-body and suf 
ficiently long spring-base with a short truck 
and wheel-base and the standard axles and 
wheels, and thereby produce a car admirably 
adapted to the purpose enumerated and at 
greatly reduced cost as compared with other 
constructions. 
Having now described my invention, I claim 
S e WW 
1. In a four-wheeled car, the combination 
of the car-body, the wheels, and the wheel 
pieces, with the springs located outside of the 
wheel-centers, and the brakes having their 
attachment directly to the ends of the ex 
tended wheel-pieces and independent of the 
car-body, whereby the car is adapted to curve 
easily, the car-body is carried steadily, and is 
free from the vertical action of the brakes, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The wheel-pieces composed of the upper 
and lower metallic bars and their separate 
extensions or braces bolted thereto, in combi 
nation with the cross-bars connecting them 
and the movable pieces by which the lower 
ends of the skeleton pedestal are connected, 
whereby the wheel-pieces are held together, 
a continuous lower bar is formed, and the 
journal-boxes may be conveniently removed, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the springs, the jour 
mal-boxes, the rigid connecting-bars, and the 
draft-links, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
4. The car-body pivoted to the truck-frame 
by the draft-links, substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
5. The combination of the springs, the ex 
tended truck or gear frame, and the journal 
boxes, with the draft-links located between 
the journal-boxes, substantially as and for 
the purposes specified. 
6. In the extended wheel-piece, the combi 
nation of the upper bars extending entirely 
across the journal-boxes and the lower bar 
bent at right angles and bolted to the other, 
with the braces bent at right angles and bolted 
thereto, whereby the skeleton pedestal is open 
at its lower end and closed at its upper end by 
the said projecting upper bar and is formed to 
embrace the journal-box and permit the con 
venient removal thereof, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. The skeleton pedestal, open at its lower 
end and closed at its upper end, formed in the 
extended wheel-piece by bending the lower 
bar and bolting it to the upper bar, in com 
bination with the shouldered cross - piece 
adapted to hold the journal-box in position 
and for convenient removal, and also by its 
shoulders to form a continuous support from 
one end of the truck to the other, substan 
tially as set forth. 
S. A pivoted and elastic draft-link inter 
posed between the car-body and its carrying 
wheels and adapted to yield in either direc 
tion, substantially as and for the purpose de 
Scribed. 
. 
9. The car - body supported on upright 
springs om the truck, in combination With 
elastic and pivoted draft-links connecting the 
truck and car-body and permitting them to 
vibrate in all directions, substantially as de 
scribed. 
10. The two brake-levers pivoted to the 
transverse brake-beams and inclined later 
ally in opposite directions, in combination 
with brake-rods extending from the upper 
ends thereof at the sides of the central open 
ing in the truck-frame, and the brake con 
nection or pivoted rod directly connecting the 
lower ends of said levers, substantially as de 
scribed. 
11. The combination of the two laterally 
inclined brake-levers and the brake-rods with 
the lower slanted or horizontally-inclined 
brake connection, whereby the two brake-le 
vers are adapted to act as equalizing-levers 
for each other, substantially as specified. 
12. The combination of the two laterally 
inclined brake-levers, each of which is in 
clined in a direction opposite to the other and 
in such manner as to locate its brake-rod and 
brake-wheel on the right-hand end of each 
end of the car, and the slanted or horizon 
tally-inclined brake-connecting rod under the 
cross-bars, substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
13. The elastic concussion-seats located 
over or near the journal-boxes, in combina 
tion with the springs located at the ends of 
the extended wheel-pieces at considerable dis 
tance from the journal-boxes, whereby the 
extensions of the wheel-pieces are relieved 
from any excessive vertical strain, Substan 
tially as set forth. 
14. The check rods or links and the check 
springs at their lower ends, in combination 
with car-springs located under the car-sills, 
for the purposes substantially as described. 
15. The combination of the long car-body, 
the short truck having the springs at its ends, 
said springs being arranged to support the 
body laterally without the aid of posts, ped 
estals, or side supports, and the pivoted and 
elastic draft-links, substantially as described. 
16. The extended wheel-pieces, each com 
posed of two metallic bars rigidly connected 
at their centers by vertical hraces and ar 
ranged to rest upon and hold the interme 
diate journal-boxes and support the car-body 
on springs mounted upon their extended ends, 
said extended ends being connected laterally 
by cross-pieces in such manner as to form a 
strong andrigid rectangular truck-frame hav 
ing a short wilheel-base and a long spring-base, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
hand. 
MOSES G. HUBBARD. 
Witnesses: 
JULIUS H. P. GAUSS, 
Mrs. R. HOWARD IKELLY. 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
95 
I OO 
?? 5 
IO 
II 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450256.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 450,256, 
P, A SANGUINET'TI. 
WINDOW VENTILATOR 
Patented Apr, 14, 1891. 
 
 
S 
 
  
 
  
WTHESSES: 
626%cga/ 
2.4%z. 
 
l =S. 
 s-G z 
n "gro v 
d'23 ATTORAVE y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PERCY A. SANGUINETTI, OF PHILADELPIIIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
VVINDOW-VENT LATO R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,256, dated April 14, 1891 
Application filed April 5, 1890. Serial No. 346,703, (No model) 
To al vfon, it nay concern, 
Beit known that I, PERCYA. SANGUINETTI, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Window-Ventilators, 
which improvement is fully set forth in the 
following specification and accompanying 
drawings. 
Myinvention consists of a Window-ventila 
tor having a deflecting board, plate, or bar, 
Which maybe angularly adjusted for varying 
the direction and volume of airit is desired 
to directinto an apartment. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view ofia 
portion of a Window-ventilator embodyingmy 
invention. Fig. 2 represents a vertical sec 
tion thereof. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in both the figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates 
two grooved or channeled pieces, preferably 
formed of cast metal, and rigidly secured to 
the side stiles of a Window-frame and pro 
vided with a number of radial divisions D, 
forming a series of grooves or channels and 
having a foot G. A board, plate, or bar Eis 
removablyfitted in the channels orgrooves D 
of said pieces Alto form a defector and the 
lower end thereof rests on the foot G. By 
means of Said defector the contents ofair ad 
mitted bellow the sash maybe directed up 
Wardly into the apartment without necessa 
O 
25 
Witnesses: 
JOHNA. WIEDERSHIELM, 
WM. C. WIEDERSHEIM. 
rily being blown upon a person sitting near 
the window, The defiector maybe placed in 
either of the grooves or channels G of the 
pieces A, to thereby vary the angularity of 
the Said defector and increase or decrease 
the volume of air entering the window. 
Interposed between the deflector and base 
of the sash is a screen F, for preventing the 
entrance of insects and dust whenso desired. 
Having thus described my invention, what, 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1: A Window-ventilator having endpieces 
with a series of. channels or grooves therein, 
and a deflector removably fitted therein and 
adjustable at varying angles, substantially as 
described. 
2. A window-ventilator having stationary 
end pieces with a series of channels orgrooves 
therein, a deflector removably fitted therein 
and adjustable at varyingangles, and a Screen 
interposed between said delector and base of 
the sash, substantially as described. 
3. A window-ventilator consisting of end 
pieces with a series of channels or grooves 
therein and feet at the lower portions thereof, 
and a deflector removably fitted insaid chan 
nels or grooves and adapted to rest on said 
feet, substantially as described. 
PERCY A SANGUINETTI. 
35 
45 
5 o 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450356.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 450,356. 
J. GREEN. 
CAR COUPLING. 
- 
Patented Apr. 14, 1891. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN GREEN, OF RENOVO, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
WILLIAM T. HOLMAN AND JOHN MCCORD, OF SAME: PLACE. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,356, dated April 14, 1891. 
Application filed January 20, 1891, Serial No, 878,448, (No model.) 
55 
65 
7o 
75 
To all whon it may concern 
Be it known that I, JOHN GREEN, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Renovo, in 
the county of Clinton and State of Pennsylva 
nia, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Automatic Car-Couplings; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art 
to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
My invention relates to car-couplings, and 
has especial reference to that class of coup 
lings known as the Janney, and has for its 
object certain improvements in means for 
throwing the hook into and retaining it in 
position for automatic coupling. 
The invention will be hereinafter described, 
and particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a perspective view of my improved coupling, 
showing the hook in position for coupling; 
Fig. 2, a similar view taken from the rear 
side and showing the hook closed; Fig. 3, a 
section through the lugs on the draw-head 
and the lug on the coupling-hook; Fig. 4, a 
perspective, on an enlarged scale, of the main 
spring; Fig. 5, a similar view of the auxiliary 
spring, and Fig. 6 a. perspective of a modi 
fied form of the auxiliary spring. 
By placing the spring on the outside of the 
draw-head it is protected from being crushed 
by the tongue of the hook in the act of coup 
ling, and can be readily inspected and re 
paired in the event of its being injured by 
any cause. 
Reference being had to the drawings and 
the letters thereon, A indicates a draw-bar 
having a head B, which is provided with lugs 
a, b, between which the hook C is secured by 
a pin D, which passes through the lugs C. b 
and the lug c on the hook. In the rear of the 
head and passing vertically through the draw 
bar is a pin E, with which the end of the 
tongue F of the hook C engages when the 
hook is coupled with an adjacent coupling, 
and to the rear side of the head B is Secured 
a spring G, the end d of which rests upon the 
rear of the tongue F When the parts are 
coupled and provides a ready and effectual 
means for automatically throwing the hook 
in position for coupling when released from 
the pin E. The spring G is made of a con 
tinuous piece of steel and comprises two heli 
cal springs ef, one on each side, and a termi 
nal bent or volute spring g, which rests upon 
the tongue F of the hook and is secured to 
the draw-head by its arms h, , through which 
screw-bolts or rivets k l are inserted. The 
rear side of the draw-head is open at l, and 
the spring g protrudes into the head through 
said opening as the hook is thrown forward 
by the spring. 
In the upper surface of the 
lug c on the hook C is a recess m, in which 
is a coiled spring II, one end of which is in 
serted in an aperture in in the lug c and the 
opposite end in an aperture O in the lower 
Surface of the lug C. of the head, and serves 
to hold or retain the hook C in position for au 
tomatic coupling. The pin D passes through 
the spring H and secures it in position, and 
the spring is relieved entirely of the weight 
of the hook by being placed on the upper 
side of the lug c, and is, furthermore, inclosed 
in the head, so that it cannot be tampered 
with or be affected by accident. 
In Fig. 6 is shown a modified construction 
of the auxiliary spring, which consists of a 
volute spring I, made of a flat piece of steel 
and provided with ends p q for securing it in 
position. 
When the tongue of the hook is pressed 
back into the draw-head in the act of coup 
ling, the volute spring g is pushed back and 
spiral springs ef and the arms h put under 
tension, and when the pin E is raised by any 
means the spring throws the hook forward, 
thereby avoiding the necessity of a brake 
man or other employ using and endangering 
his hand to set the hook. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. In an automatic car-coupler, a swinging 
hook, in combination with a spring secured to 
the outer surface of the rear side of the draw 
head and bearing upon the tongue of the 
hook to automatically throw the hook for 
Ward. - 
2. In an automatic car-coupler, a draw-head 
having an opening in the rear side thereof 
and a swinging hook, in combination with a 
- 
9o 
95 
Od 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
450,356 
throwing the hook forward and an auxiliary 
spring for retaining the hook in position for 
coupling. 
7. In an automatic car-coupler, a Swinging 
hook having a recess in its lug and a spring 
secured to said hook and to the upper lug of 
the draw-head, in combination. With a spring 
secured to the draw-head and bearing upon 
the tongue of the locked hook. 
S. In an automatic car-coupler, a swinging 
hook having a recess in the upper side of its 
lug and a volute spring having oppositely 
projecting ends which engage with the lug 
on the hook and the upper lug on the draw 
head. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN GREEN, 
35 
Witnesses: 
M. Do YLE MARKS, 
GEO. B. COLESTOCK. 
w 
5 
O 
spring secured to the outside of the draw 
head and protruding through said opening 
into the head. 
3. In an automatic car-coupler, a draw-bar 
having an aperture in the rear side of the 
head and a swinging hook, in combination 
with a double spiral spring secured to the 
outside of the draw-head and operating upon 
the hook through said aperture. 
4. In an automatic car-coupler, a swinging 
hook, in combination with a double spiral 
spring having arms and secured to the draw 
head by said arms and operating upon the 
tongue of the hook. 
5. In an automatic car-coupler, a swinging 
hook, in combination with a . triple spring 
consisting of two Spiral and a volute spring 
constructed and arranged to automatically 
throw the hook forward into position for coup 
ling. 
6. In an automatic car-coupler, a swinging 
hook, in combination with a main spring for 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450456.txt	(No Model.) 
E, O, GOSS. 
MACHINE FOR, SCOURING METAL, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 450,456, 
- 
Patented Apr. 14, 1891. 
 
(No Model.) 
E. O, GOSS, 
MACHINE FOR SCOURING METAL, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 450,456, 
Patented Apr. 14, 1891. 
, 2-z-z- 
 
E. O. GOSS 
MACHINE FOR SCOURING METAL, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr, l 4, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 450,456. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD O. GOSS, OF WATERBURY, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OFSAME PLACE. 
MACH NE FOR SCOURING METAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,456, dated April 14, 1891. 
Application filed November 17, 1890, Serial No. 371,667, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whom it. Ivctly concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD O. GOSS, of 
Waterbury, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new Im 
provementin Machines for Scouring Metal; 
and I do hereby declare the following, when 
taken in connection with accompanying three 
sheets of drawings and the letters of reference 
marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same, and which said draw 
ings constitute part of this specification, and 
represent, in 
Figure 1, a side view of the machine com 
plete; Fig. 2, a top or plan view of the same; 
Fig. 3, a longitudinal central section through 
the machine, on line acac of Fig. 2; Fig. 4, an 
enlarged view of a portion of the frame, show 
ing the bearings of the feed-rollers at One end 
and the bearings for the first pair of scour 
ing-rollers. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in machinery for scouring or finishing the 
surface of flat metal. 
In the manufacture of rolled sheet metal 
or metal plate preparatory for market it is in 
many cases required to perform the opera 
tion commonly called Scouring the sur 
faces. Various devices have been employed 
for scouring sheet metal, the most successful 
being that in which the metal is passed be 
tween positively-driven scouring-rollers, the 
metal being wound upon a reel at one end, 
tending to draw it through the machine as 
fast as the operation of Scouring is performed. 
While such an apparatus Works satisfactorily 
on a long continuous strip of metal, it is not 
well adapted for metal in comparatively short 
sheets or metal too thick to be readily Wound 
upon a reel, 
The object of my invention is the construc 
tion of a machine which may be adapted to 
scouring short or independent sheets, plates, 
or bars of metal; and the invention consists 
in the combination of one series of Scouring 
rollers arranged upon stationary axes, a Sec 
ond series of similar rollers, arranged above 
the said first series of rollers, but automati 
cally adjustable with relation to said first se 
ries of rollers, so as to adapt themselves to 
the varying thickness which may pass be 
tween the two series of rollers, with a pair of 
feed-rollegs at the delivery end of the series 
of rollers, and a like pair of feed-rollers at 
the opposite end of the said series of rollers, 
with pulleys on the arbors of each of the said 
rollers, and corresponding pulleys at each 
end of the machine in connection with the 
feed-rollers, an endless band passing around 
the said end pulleys and the intermediate 
roller-pulleys, whereby a like revolution is 
imparted to all the rollers of the said two se 
ries, the surface revolution of said two se 
ries of rollers being more rapid than that of 
the surface revolution of the said two sets of 
feed-rollers, and whereby the feed of the 
sheet through the rollers is so much slower 
than the velocity of revolution of the inter 
mediate rollers, that the said intermediate 
rollers produce a corresponding rubbing ef 
fect upon the surface of the metal passing be 
tween them, and as more fully hereinafter de 
scribed. 
A represents the frame of the machine, 
which is supported on suitable legs B or other 
wise. In suitable stationary bearings C in 
the frame a series of rollers D are arranged, 
(here represented as three,) and represented 
as of equal diameter and all in the same 
lane. 
Directly over the rollers D a like series of 
rollers E are arranged; but this second series 
of rollers are supported in bearings F, which 
arearranged invertical guides G in the frame, 
see Fig. 4) and so that each of the rollers E 
of the upper series is vertically adjustable 
toward or from the corresponding rollers be 
low and each independent of the other, their 
own gravity tending to yieldingly hold them 
in their proper relation to the rollers below, 
and so that as the thickness of anything pass 
ing between the rollers shall vary the upper 
rollers will adapt themselves accordingly. 
The rollers of both series should be of equal 
diameter. These two series of rollers are the 
scouring-rollers. 
At the entrance end of the machine a pair 
of feed-rollers H I are arranged, the lower 
roller being arranged in a fixed bearing J and 
the upper roller I in a vertically-adjustable 
bearing K, (see Fig. 4) the latter being pro 
vided with a spring L and an adjusting-screw 
Mat each bearing, whereby a yielding press 
55 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
 
450,456 
7 O 
75 
5 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ure may be applied to the roller I. On the 
arbor of the lower or fixed roller II a pulley 
N is arranged, and at the opposite end of the 
machine there is a like pair of rollers O P, 
the lower roller O being supported in station 
ary bearings and the roller P in yielding 
bearings the same as that shown and described 
for the roller I at the entrance end of the 
machine. The plane between the feed-roll 
ers at both ends of the machine is in line 
with that between the intermediate or scour 
ing-rollers. The pressure of the feed-rollers 
is such that their frictional hold upon the 
metal passing between them is so much 
greater than that of the scouring-rollers that 
the scouring-rollers may operate upon the 
surface of the metal without interfering with 
the advance of metal by the feed-rollers. On 
the arbor of the lower or stationary roller a 
pulley Q is arranged of the same diameter as 
that of the pulley N. These pulleys, as here 
represented, are outside the frame of the ma 
chine. On each of the arbors of the lower 
series of intermediate rollers a pulley R is 
arranged, these pulleys being preferably all 
of the same diameter, and on the upper se 
ries of rollers like pulley's S are arranged. 
(See Fig. 1.) The pulley's Q and N are of 
considerably larger diameter than the pulleys 
R and S. Around the pulley's Q N and the 
intermediate pulleys R and San endless band 
T runs, which connects all the pulleys, the 
lower run of the band from the pulley N pass 
ing up and around the first pulley R of the 
lower series of rollers, thence back upward, 
and over the corresponding pulley S of the 
first roller of the series above, thence down 
and around the next pulley R of the lower 
series, thence back up and around the sec 
ond pulley S of the upper series, and so on 
to and around the pulley Q, and so that 
the revolution imparted to the lower rollers 
will be in the opposite direction to that of the 
upper rollers, and SO that the adjacent sur 
faces of the rollerS all run in the same ad 
vancing direction; but the size of the pulleys 
N and Q is such with relation to the pulleys 
R and S that the surface velocity of the roll 
ers D and E will be considerably greater than 
the surface velocity of the feed-rollers at both 
ends of the machine, the velocity of the said 
feed-rollers being alike at both ends of the 
machine. 
Revolution is imparted to the pulleys from 
a driving-shaft U, Supported in bearings W. 
on the frame, and carrying, as here repre 
sented, a loose and fast pulley W and X at 
one end. At the other end a pinion Y is made 
fast to the shaft U, Which Works into a corre 
sponding gear Z on the arbor of the pulley Q. 
The direction of revolution of the parts is 
represented by arrows. 
In Fig. 2 the same arrangement of pulleys 
and band is made upon both sides of the ma 
chine, so that power is applied to both ends 
of the rollers. 
In operation power is applied to produce 
the revolution of the feed-rollers and of the 
intern ediate rollers D and E. The metal to 
be scoured is passed between the first feed 
rollers I H at the entrance end of the ma 
chine, which forces the metal forward at a 
velocity corresponding to the surface travel 
of the said feed-rollers III. Thence the metal 
passes between the first pair of the interme 
diate or scouring rollers, thence through the 
second pair, and so on until the feed-rollers 
O Pat the opposite end are reached, the metal 
being in surface contact with all the rollers, 
the rollers yielding, as before described, to 
adapt themselves to the thickness of the metal, 
and so that firm contact is had with both sur 
faces, the metal being represented in broken 
lines, Fig. 3. The surface velocity of the in 
termediate or scouring rollers being consid 
erably greater than that of the travel of the 
sheet under the action of the feed-rollers, 
the scouring-rollers produce a rubbing upon 
both surfaces of the metal, and so as to scour 
those surfaces, any suitable scouring mate 
rial being applied as desirable to produce the 
required result. By the arrangement of two 
pairs of feed-rollers, one at the entrance and 
the other at the exit end of the metal, the 
metal is driven by the first pair of feed-rollers 
through the scouring-rollers until the feed at 
the opposite end is reached. Then when the 
last end of the metal has passed from the first 
pair of feed-rollers the rollers at the exit end 
of the machine will continue their hold upon 
the metal and draw it through the machine un 
til it finally delivers it complete from the ma 
chine. This is the operation when the metal is 
of a length somewhat greater than the distance 
between the two pairs of feed-rollers; or if the 
metal be so thick as to possess the requisite ri 
gidity the metal may be shorter, a second piece 
of metal abutting against the first, so as to 
force said first piece of metal through until it 
is taken by the exit feed-rollers, the machine 
being thus adapted to scouring thick rigid 
plates or bars. 
By this construction of machine the operator 
has nothing to do but simply introduce one 
end of the metal to the entrance feed-rollers. 
From that time the machine takes care of 
itself and the metal is delivered complete 
from the other end of the machine. The op 
erator may continue feeding pieces or sheets 
in succession, introducing the forward end of 
one as soon as the last end of the preceding 
piece or sheet shall have passed beyond the 
entrance feed-rollers. . 
To adjust the tension of the endless band 
which drives the several rollers, an idler a is 
hung upon an axis b in a bracket d, hinged 
to the frame, as at e, and so as to swing in a 
Vertical plane, the position of the idler a be 
ing between one of the feed-roller pulleys and 
the next pulley in the series of scouring-roll 
ers and SO that the band will run over the 
Said idler. The bracket is hinged so that it 
may swing up and down in a vertical plane, 
and the pulley stands directly in the path of 
95 
OO 
I 15 
I 25 
I 30 
450,456 
3 
the band, as seen in Fig. 1. The bracket is 
provided with a suitable handle f and is also 
constructed with a toothed segment g, the 
teeth of which are adapted to engage a dog 
h on the frame, and so that as the pulley is 
raised to increase the tension a correspond 
ing tooth of the segment will engage the said 
dog and hold the pulley at any point to which 
it may be set; or whenever it is desired to 
lessen or remove the tension the segment is 
thrown up from the dog, when the idler will 
drop, as seen in broken lines, Fig. 1. This 
tension device may be applied to increase the 
pressure of the upper series of rollers toward 
the lower series-that is to say, if a greater 
pressure is required upon the metal between 
the scouring-rollers the ider is raised to in 
crease the tension of the band, and as the 
band practically forms loops around the up 
per and lower rollers such increased tension 
serves to draw the rollers more closely to 
gether and to increase the pressure between 
the rollers; or the removal of the tension, as 
indicated in broken lines, Fig. 1, will so loosen 
the band that the revolution of the interme 
diate rollers may practically cease. Thus 
the operation of the scouring-rollers is at all 
times within the control of the operator. 
From the foregoing it will be understood 
that I do not claim, broadly, a machine for 
scouring sheet metal, which consists of an up 
per and a lower series of driven scouring-roll 
ers between which the metal passes; but 
What Ido claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination of two series of Scour 
ing-rollers, the one arranged above the other, 
One of said series supported in bearings yield 
ing toward and from the other series of roll 
ers, with a pair of feed-rollers at the entrance 
end of said series, and a like pair of feed 
rollers at the exit end of said series, mechan 
ism, substantially such as described, to im 
part revolution to the said two pairs of feed 
rollers and to the said two series of rollers, 
the surface revolution of the said series of 
rollers being more rapid than the surface revo 
lution of the said feed-rollers, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination of a series of rollers ar- 5o 
ranged in stationary bearings, a correspond 
ing series of rollers arranged in yielding bear 
ings above the said series of rollers, and a 
pair of feed-rollers at each end of the said 
series of rollers, one of each pair of feed-roll- 55 
ers being arranged in a stationary bearing, 
and the other roller of each of said pairs ar 
ranged in a yielding bearing, a pulley on the 
arbor of each stationary feed-roller and a cor 
responding pulley on the arbor of each of the 6o 
rollers of the said two series, an endless band 
passing around the two pulleys of the feed 
rollers and one run of the band alternately 
around the pulleys of the said two series of 
rollers, the diameters of the several pulleys 65 
being such with relation to each other that 
the surface velocity of the rollers of the said 
two series will be more rapid than the sur 
face velocity of the said feed-rollers, but all 
in the same working direction, substantially 7c 
as described. 
3. In a machine for Scouring metal, a se 
ries of rollers arranged in stationary bearings, 
a corresponding second series of rollers ar 
ranged above the first series of rollers, but in 5 
yielding bearings, a pair of feed-rollers at 
each end of the said two series of rollers, one 
of each of the pairs of feed-rollers being in 
a stationary bearing, and the other roller 
of the said pairs of feed-rollers arranged in 8o 
a yielding bearing, the stationary rollers pro 
vided each with a pulley upon its arbor, and 
the two series of rollers each provided with a 
corresponding pulley, an endless band around 
the pulleys of the said feed-rollers, one run 85 
of said band passing alternately around the 
pulleys of the said two series of rollers, and 
an adjustable idler arranged to bear upon 
the said band between one of the feed-roller 
pulleys and the next roller of the series, sub- 9o 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses, 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD O, GOSS, 
T. R. HYDE, Jr., 
M. L. SPERRY. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
'''' 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450556.txt	(No Model.) 
F. C. CASH, 
SAFETY GATE FOR STREET CARS, 
No. 450,556, 
Patented Apr. 14, 1891, 
2ay. Z, 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs co., Photo-Litho., washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS C. CASH, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SAFETY GATE FOR STREET CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,556, dated April 14, 1891. 
Application filed September 4, 1890, Serial No. 368,926, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all who1, it may concern. 
attendant standing on the front of the car. 
Beit known that IFRANCISC, CASH, a citi 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section of one of the 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
gates and its sliding connections, 
at Lynn, in the county of Essex and State of 
In the drawings, A represents the body of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
an Ordinary open car. The transverse seats 
and useful Improvements in Safety-Gates for 
are shown at B, and the sides of the car be 
Street-Cars, of which the following is a speci 
ing open these seats are ordinarily accessible 
on the sides at any point, so that a passenger 
fication. 
My said invention is designed to protect 
may step on or off at any point or place on 
passengers in the ordinary street-railway cars 
the car. The same accessibility renders the 
and to prevent them from falling out when 
passenger liable to fall out, as above explained. 
the cars are in motion. It is designed for that 
The safety-gates are shown at D. The spirit 
class of cars in which the seats are placed 
of my invention requires that these be mov 
transversely, as is the case with the ordinary 
able at the will of the attendant, so that he 
summer-cars now commonly used on street 
may open them for the admission or exit of a 
railways. In cars of this class the sides are 
passenger or close them and hold them closed. 
open and passengers, particularly children, 
These gates or the whole series of them may 
are liable to fall or be thrown out when the 
be arranged to move in various ways; but I 
cars are in motion, particularly when the car 
have devised one which is simple and effective. 
is passing a curve. The danger is increased 
In this the gates are mounted on a bar or se 
on the cable or electric roads, on which the 
ries of connected blocks arranged to slide 
cars run around curves at a higher rate of 
longitudinally of the car and carry in their 
speed than that of the ordinary horse-cars. 
movement all the gates, the movement being 
At the same time it is impracticable to have 
sufficient to shift the gates from a position 
the ends of the seat-spaces entirely closed, 
between the seats or in the space between the 
and my invention is especially designed to 
Seat ends to a position covering the seat ends, 
provide a removable gate for each seat, so that 
the former position closing and the latter 
opening the passage to the seats. 
at the will of the conductor or driver the side 
of the car or the spaces between the seats may 
The gates B are made of any suitable ma 
be closed or opened as occasion may require. 
As shown, they consist. 
terial or dimensions, 
Obviously the purpose had in view requires 
of a frame C, covered with woven wire. This 
that the spaces between all the seats should 
forms a light and secure gate; but I do not 
be thus closed for the better and more effectual 
confine myself to this, The gate is fixed each 
carrying out of the said invention, and these 
to a sliding blocke, held by a dovetail tongue 
gates which close the sides or spaces between 
a' in a corresponding grooveb' on the side of 
the seats at the ends thereof should be under 
the car-body. The block projects to the outside 
the control of the conductor or some other 
and the gate is made to conform to the shape 
person having charge of the car. 
of the car-seat end, So that as it is moved aside 
For the purposes above specified my inven 
to open the passage it shuts Snugly againstor 
tion is made to consist of a series of movable 
in front of the said seat end and the Whole 
gates arranged to be closed and obstruct the 
shows like an ordinary car. The blocks are 
spaces between the seats at the ends thereof 
connected to each other by means of rods b, 
by mechanism within the control of the con 
so that all on one side move together in either 
ductor or other attendant on the cal'. 
direction. The reciprocating movement is 
I have shown in the accompanying draw 
just sufficient to bring the gates from the po 
ings the means I have devised for carrying 
sition last described to the position shown in 
my said invention into practical use. 
Fig. 2, in which they close all the seats by 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a side 
shutting the passages thereto at the ends. 
elevation of the car with the gates open. Fig. 
In order that this series of gates may be 
2 shows the same with the gates closed. Fig. 
Within the control of the proper attendant, I 
3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of the 
provide a cord or chaing, Fig. 2, which is at 
connections for the driver, gripman, or other tached to one end of the series of blocks, and 
go 
IOC 
25 
35 
 
2 
450,556 
35 
40 
45 
this the conductor passes at times to collect 
the fares. By my construction the ordinary 
use of this running-board is not interfered 
with, as the gates slide parallel with the run 
ning-board, and this does not interfere with 
persons standing thereon. There is no lia 
bility of accident in the operation of my gates. 
I claim 
1. In a summer-car having transverse Seats, 
the series of safety-gates, of about the height 
of the seat, to close the transverse spaces, and a 
guideway extending longitudinally of the car 
body on the outside, the gates being supported 
at their lower ends only and held against lat 
eral displacement by said guideway to slide 
longitudinally outside of the car and to fit 
over the seat ends parallel with the running 
board, substantially as described. 
2. In a summer-car having transverse Seats, 
the series of safety-gates extending up about 
the height of the seats and unsupported at their 
upper ends, and means at the lower ends of 
the gates for connecting, Sustaining, and guid 
ing them, consisting of the connecting-bar, 
the blocks, and the dovetailed guide in which 
said blocks slide, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRANCIS C. CASI. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE. B. BIGELOW, 
CHAS. 3. LORD. 
55 
thence runs over a pulley it, placed in line 
with the movement of the blocks and far 
enough away to allow sufficient movement. 
From this pulley the rope runs up to or near 
to the top of the car, thence over a pulley , 
and back to the other end of the car over a 
pulley l, and down and over a pulley n, and 
back to the other end of the Series of blocks. 
Short ropes or straps N may be attached to 
the main rope g about midway between the 
posts of the car-top and run to and over pull 
leys and down to within reach of the conductor, 
so that he may move the gates at any point : 
on the car. I contemplate also connecting 
the ends of the series of blocks and gates with 
a shaft O at each end of the car, so that the 
driver may operate the gates. 
Ordinarily a set of gates will be required 
These I connect to 
on each side of the car. 
each other by means of a rope p, (shown at 
the right-hand end of the diagram, Fig. 3,) so 
that both gates may be moved together. This 
is not necessary where the gates are connected 
to the shafts o, as shown at the left of Fig. 3. 
I do not limit myself to these details of con 
struction shown, neither in the form of the 
gates, their supports, nor in the means for 
moving them; nor is the invention neces 
sarily confined to street-cars, but may be used 
on like vehicles. 
In a summer-car a running-board X is used 
along the outside, and this is often filled with 
passengers when the car is crowded, and along 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450656.txt	(No Model.) 
M. BEAL, 
CORE DRILLING MACHINERY, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
. 
No. 450,656, 
Patented Apr. 21 l891, 
YNH4227 
DI2 
 
 
 
I SA 
 
7 
WS 
 
 
Cy 
YYitnesses. 
22 
Inventor. 
3. # 14.2, 4, 27, 
 
(No Model.) 
M. BEA.L. 
CORE DRILLING MACHINERY. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 450,656, 
Patented Apr. 21, 1891. 
"NIW, 
7III 
 
YYitnesses. 
4.4- 
Inventor. 
the NCRR's FETERs co, proto-thc. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MOSES BEAL OF ELYRIA, OHIO. 
CORE, DRILLING MACH NERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,656, dated April 21, 1891. 
Application filed June 21, 1890, Serial No. 356,294 (No model.) 
55 
75 
So 
end of said opening is enlarged or recessed 
out in proper shape to receive the semicircu 
lar contracting rings R R, which are made 
alike and so constructed that when joined to 
gether the central hole through same will be 
of such diameter as to loosely fit the drill 
stem S, and the outside of said rings will fit 
the enlarged opening or recessed part of the 
drill-wheel C. Each of these semicircular 
lings is provided with perpendicular lugs r, 
which fit in corresponding grooves in the drill 
stem and by which the same is rotated. 
The outside of each of the contracting rings 
is provided with an arm or lug ' ', which is 
so constructed as to fit into a recess in the top 
of the rotating wheel C and prevents the rings 
R. R. turning in the rotating wheel when the 
same is rotated. 
Erepresents a core-extractor, which is nearly 
the size of the drill used, and consequently 
will pass through the opening c' of the rotat 
ing wheel. The upper end is provided with 
a handlee, provided with a screw on the end, 
to which may be attached a rod for lowering 
same into the hole drilled. This extractor is 
made of sheet metal rolled up into tubular 
shape of proper size, with a narrow opening 
e' left its entire length. Near the lower end 
are cut for any desired distance along this 
opening teeth e', the upper edges of which 
are twisted or bent inward. The teeth may be 
of the form shown in the drawings, or any 
other in which the upper ends are turned or 
bent inward. 
The dri-stem S is hollow or tubular its eln 
tire length. To the upper end is attached a 
packing-box s, which is provided with an in 
let-pipes' for the purpose of introducing or 
forcing water down through the drill-stem and 
drill to the lower end of the drill. 
s' represents the drill with part of one side 
cut away, which drill is of the ordinary form 
of core-drills. 
h, represents my core-holder in broken sec 
tions, and consists of a long rod, the upper 
end of which passes through the packing or 
stuffing box s, the lower end of which is 
pointed and provided with a wheel l' circu 
lar in form and of right size to fit the inside 
of the drill. This wheel may be perforated 
With holes or have sections cut out of its 
edges to allow of the free passage of water. 
90 
g 
co 
To all It'hon it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, MOSES BEAL, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Elyria, in 
the county of Lorain and State of Ohio, have 
invented new and useful Core-Drilling Ma 
chinery, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
drilling machinery for producing specimens 
of the different strata underlying the surface 
of the earthin the form of cores of cylindrical 
form which may be extracted, inspected, and 
preserved as desired. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
Such drilling machinery as can be easily and 
effectually operated, be simple in construction 
and durable, and produce longer and larger 
cores than ordinarily obtained, showing all 
seams and irregularities in the strata drilled 
through. I attain these objects by means of 
the mechanism illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure I is a side elevation of my rotating 
mechanism. Fig. II is a top view of rotating 
wheel. Fig. III is a longitudinal sectional 
view of Fig. II. Fig. IV is side and end ele 
vation of my core-extractor. Fig. V shows: 
Sectional view of my core-holder when in use. 
Fig. VI shows an enlarged view of the lower 
end of my core-holder and an end elevation 
of same. Fig. VII represents a cross-section 
of the drill-stem. Fig. VIII represents an en 
larged sectional view of my core-extractor, 
showing in detail the form and construction 
of the teeth of same. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
A represents a frame for said machine. 
B represents any suitable driving - shaft 
which runs in the boxes to l, to which is at 
tached the driving-pulley ()' and the bevel 
gear-wheel l'. 
C represents the rotating wheel, which is 
provided with bevel-gear c. The lower end 
of this wheel is provided with an arbor c', 
which runs or turns in the thimble or casing 
D, which casing or thimble is attached to and 
Supported on the main frame A by the cross 
bars or supports did. Through the center of 
the rotating wheel is a circular perpendicular 
opening C' sufficiently large to admit of the 
free passage of any desired drill. The upper 
out the several views. 
O 
25 
35 
45. 
5 o 
 
2 
450,656 
5 
To the upper end of the rod h is attached a 
clamp and arm h', to prevent said rod from 
turning when drill-stem is rotated. 
K represents the core in the drill, and K 
the rock or strata in which same is operated. 
The operation of my invention is as follows, 
to wit: When it is desired to drill a hole for 
a core, after the machine is in proper position 
the rings R. R. are removed from the rotating 
Wheel. The drill is passed through the open 
ing, and the drill-stem S and core-holder h. 
are attached, when the rings R. Rare placed in 
position in the rotating wheel with the lugs r 
in the slot or grooves of the drill-stem. Then 
power is applied through the driving-shaft 
and the drill rapidly rotated by means of the 
rotating wheel and rings R. R. The core 
holder h rests on top of the core and by its 
Weight and construction holds same upright 
and prevents its breaking apart and turning 
On itself by striking the sides of the drill when 
the drill is revolving. 
The point of the core 
holder enters into the end of the core far 
enough to steady saune and prevent the top 
from falling over to one side when it becomes 
long. The wheel h' being of about the di 
a meter of the inside of the drill would strike 
the sides of the drill first in case there were 
any tendency for the core to fall over side 
wise and prevent the core from striking the 
drill. The wheel would freely revolve with 
the drill without turning the core. When the 
drill reaches nearly its length, or as long as core 
is cut, as desired, the drill and core-holder are 
withdrawn by removing the rings R. R. and 
raising same out of the hole. The core-ex 
tractor is then lowered into the hole, and be 
ing made of such diameter as to fit the core 
tightly.it is forced down over it by means of 
a handle or rod attached to its upper end. 
3O 
40 
... 
.... 
--- 
scribed. 
The core-extractor having an opening on One 
side allows the same to expand sufficiently to 
admit the core freely. Then when the same is 
drawn upward the upper edges of the teeth 
e' e' engage with the core and prevent the 
core falling out and the whole is raised Out 
together. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to obtain by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a core-drilling machine, the combina 
tion of a hollow round vertical grooved drill 
stem with ring-sections provided with verti 
cal inwardly-projecting lugs and drill-wheel, 
all as above set forth and substantially as de 
2. In a core-drilling machine, the detached 
ring-sections R. R., provided with the arms r 
r' and perpendicular lugs r , in combination 
with the grooved drill-stem S and the drill 
wheel C and the recesses thereof, all as above 
set forth and substantially as described. 
3. The core-extractor E, provided with the 
opening e' and inwardly-projecting teeth e' 
along the line of the opening e', all as above 
set forth and substantially as described. 
4. The core-holder h, provided with the 
wheel h', in combination with the drills', all 
for the purposes above set forth and substan 
tially as described. 
5. A core-holder consisting of a rod h, pass 
ing through the drill-stem. S, the lower end so 
constructed as to rest and bear on top of the 
core, in combination with the drills', all for 
the purposes above set forth and substantially 
as described. 
MOSES BEAT. 
Witnesses: 
LELIA BOYNTON, 
E. C. MANTER. 
45 
55 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450756.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM S. IIULL AND JAMES C. ANDERSON, OF SHEFFIELD, ALABAMA. 
O RE-WAS H ER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,756, dated April 21, 1891. 
Application filed October 21, 1890, Serial No. 368,8l4, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
55 
?? 
75 
10 (ill tehom it Tinay concert. 
Beit known that we, WILLIAMS. HULL and 
JAMES C. ANDERSON, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Sheffield, in the county of 
Colbert, State of Alabama, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Ore 
Washers, of which the following is a specifi 
cation, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawing. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in ore-washers; and it 
has for its object, among others, to provide an 
improved device for the purpose of washing 
Ores in which the ore will be better washed in 
less time and With less care and attention on 
the part of the operator. We provide a ro 
tary cylinder through which is passed a hol 
low shaft receiving water under pressure and 
through which it is distributed onto the ore 
in the cylinder, The ore is fed to the cylin 
der in any suitable manner, the cylinder be 
ing preferably provided internally with spiral 
ribs or analogous provisions for forcing the 
ore along in opposition to the flow of water, 
the cylinder or a portion thereof being in 
clined toward its receiving end to provide for 
the discharge of all the water and the dirt 
and refuse removed from the ore. We may 
or may not employ an outer cylinder or cas 
ing, which should be provided internally with 
Spiral ribs or projections. The washed ore 
is delivered either onto a jig or upon a con 
veyer or belt and carried to a bin or recepta 
cle from which it is taken by a belt or eleva 
tor into a storage-bin, or into cars, if desired. 
We provide simple means for agitating the 
jig through the rotary movement of the cyl 
inder. We provide as a whole a machine 
capable of accomplishing the work more satis 
factorily than is done by prior constructions. 
Other objects and advantages of our inven 
tion will hereinafter appear, and the novel 
features thereof will be specifically defined 
by the appended claims. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawing, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, forms apart 
of this specification, and in which our inven 
tion is shown invertical longitudinal section 
With parts in side elevation, 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ing by letter, A designates a suitable fram 
ing or support for the operating parts. 
A is a receiving-hopper into which the Ina 
terial is fed in any suitable manner, being 
provided with a slotted bottom A', and within 
this hopper are arranged pipes A, perforated 
or provided with small discharge-nozzles, as 
shown, being designed to receive water from 
any suitably source, said water being dis 
charged upon the ore, as illustrated in the 
drawing, to partially wash the same and 
loosen the dirt and clay therefrom. Beneath 
this hopper is arranged an inclined chute A', 
upon which the material discharges from the 
hopper and which delivers said material to 
the interior of the cylinder, soon to be de 
scribed. The hopper and chute are supported 
in the drawing A in any suitable manner. 
B is a hollow shaft supported in suitable 
bearings and designed to receive Water from 
any suitable source either under pressure or 
not, either from a pump, a stand-pipe, or ele 
wated tank, and this pipe is provided for its 
portion within the cylinder with perforations 
or small discharge-nozzles b, through which 
the water is designed to be discharged onto 
the material in the cylinder. 
C is the cylinder of suitable length and di 
ameter and of any suitable material. It is 
supported by suitable means to revolve 
around the hollow shaft which is passed cen 
trally therethrough. The hollow center pipe 
or shaft may be made of rolled iron round, or 
two half-round bolted together, or of cast-iron 
round, octagonal, square, or of any other 
shape, or it may be of one or more lengths 
secured together in any suitable manner; but 
it is preferred to make it of one piece of 
round pipe, so as to avoid joint and reduce 
the friction to a minimum. The cylinder may 
be revolved in any suitable manner. In the 
accompanying drawing I have show n a sim 
ple means. 
C is a shaft journaled in suitable bearings 
in the franing and arranged parallel with the 
hollow shaft B. 
C is a pulley on this shaft C", to which 
power is imparted from any suitable source. 
(Not shown.) 
C is a pinion fast on the shaft C" and mesh 
ing with a circumferential gear C on the 
- 
95 
1 ? ? 
3 
450,756 
 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
: 
: 
... 
other periphery of the cylinder, by which, l'u- 
tary motion is imparted to said cylinder. 
c is an oiling device for the bearing c' of 
the cylinder on the shaft. 
The cylinder C is conical-shaped at its ore 
receiving end, which end is open and into 
which the chute A delivers. The cylinder 
is provided interiorly with suitable provis 
ions for forcing the ore from its receiving to 
its delivery end. In the drawing we have 
shown spirally-arranged plates or ribs d, sub 
stantially L-shaped in cross-section. The 
conical portion of the cylinder is provided 
with an encircling collar e, provided with a 
groove e', in which works an anti-friction 
roller f, arranged beneath the cylinder and 
journaled in suitable bearings, as shown. 
D is an outer cylinder surrounding a por 
tion of the cylinder C and provided with in 
ternal spiral ribs or projections g, similar to 
those in the cylinder C. This is revolved by 
a pinion h on the shaft C", which engages a 
peripheral gear i on the outer cylinder. It 
is supported and guided by the anti-friction 
rolleri, working in the groove i' of the collar 
i. The larger end of the cylinder D may be 
supported in any suitable manner. 
E is a pipe supplied with water from any 
suitable source and arranged to discharge the 
same between the two cylinders, being pref 
erably provided with discharge - nozzle, as 
shown. The inner cylinder is provided with 
perforations c, through which the fine parti 
cles of ore find their way into the other cyl 
G is a discharge-spout at the receiving end 
of the cylinder C, and G' is a discharge spout 
or chute for receiving the water and dirt from 
the outer cylinder. They both communicate 
with the spout G', which conducts the water 
and dirt to any desired place of deposit. 
II is an endless belt or apron supported 
upon suitable rollers H', carried by suitable 
shafts, and this apron is arranged to receive 
the washed ore from the cylinders, as illus 
trated. Motion is imparted to the belt or 
apron by means of the belt I and pulley I on 
the slhaft C. 
J is an elevator of any preferred construc 
tion arranged at the discharge end of the belt 
H and adapted to receive the washed ore 
therefrom. It is operated through the me 
dium of the belts J and J, actuated from the 
shaft C. 
The operation will be readily understood. 
Ore is fed to the enlarged conical end of the 
inner cylinder through hopper and chute, as 
shown, and as the cylinder revolves the screw 
or spiral ribs on the inside wind or carry the 
ore forward, while the incline allows the wa 
ter, which is admitted through the central hol 
low pipe or shaft, to overflow the flanges and 
flow back to the end at which the ore is in 
troduced. As the ore is moved forward the 
jets of water thereon clean the same of clay 
and dirt, which is carried off through the 
spout G', and the fine ore passes through the 
inder. 
w 
perforations in the cylinder into the Outer 
cylinder or shell. From the inner and outer 
cylinders the ore falls onto the endless belt, 
where it is carried to the elevator, by Which 
it may be carried to suitable bins or other de 
sired receptacle or place. The belt H should 
be slightly inclined, so as to allow any Water 
that night still be with the ore to run off. 
Various modifications and details may.be 
resorted to without departing from the spirit 
of or sacrificing the advantages of the in Yell 
tion. We propose to sometimes make smaller 
sized machines of a portable character for the 
purpose of washing small beds of ore. 
If desired, the hollow shaft may becaused 
to revolve, in which case the Water Will be car 
ried into the shaft through a packed joint. 
What we claim as new is 
1. The combination, with the revoluble cyl 
inder having internal spirally-arranged pro 
jections and external supports and gearing, 
of a non-rotatable hollow shaft arranged cell 
trally within the cylinder, and boxes and airns 
operatively connecting the cylinder and shaft, 
substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with the revoluble cyl 
inder having conical receiving end and Spi 
rally-arranged interior projections and perfo" 
rations, of the outer rotatable cylinder, Sub 
stantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with the revoluble cyl 
inder of uniform diameter having conical re 
ceiving end and spirally-arranged interior 
projections and perforations, of the outero 
tatable shell provided with interior spirally 
arranged projections, substantially as Speci 
4. The combination, with the revoluble cyl 
inder, the rotatable outer cylinder, and the 
central non-rotatable perforated Water-Sup 
ply pipe, of a water-supply pipe arranged to 
discharge between the two cylinders, as set 
forth. 
5. The combination, with the perforated 
revoluble cylinder having conical receiving 
end, of the outer rotatable conical cylinder 
and the non-rotatable perforated water-supply 
pipe, substantially as specified. 
6. The combination, with the perforated 
revoluble cylinder having conical receiving 
end and interior spirally-arranged projec 
tions, of the outer revoluble shell having in 
terior spirally-arranged projections, and the 
axially-arranged water-supply pipe, substan 
tially as specified. 
7. The combination, with the perforated 
revoluble cylinder having conical receiving 
end and interior spirally-arranged projec 
tions, of the outer revoluble shell having in 
terior spirally-arranged projections, and the 
water-supply pipes, one arranged axially 
within the inner cylinder and the other ar 
ranged to discharge between the two cylin 
ders, substantially as specified.. 
8. The combination, with the revoluble cyl 
inder having exterior supports and gearing, 
conical receiving end, and interior spirally 
fied. 
- - - 
- 
. 
7o 
75 
So 
95 
Od 
c 
f is 
I 25 
450,756 
arranged projections and perforations, of the ble cylinder having conical portion with its 
outer revoluble cylinder, embracing the per-smaller end extending inward, of the outer 
revoluble cylinder, the discharge-Spout fronl 
forated portion of the inner cylinder and pro 
the outer cylinder, the discharge-spout from 
vided with interior spirally-arranged projec 
the inner cylinder, and the discharge-spout 
tions, and the perforated non-rotative water 
common to and communicating with both of 
Supply pipe forming a support for the inner 
the first-mentioned spouts, substantially as 
bearings of the inner cylinder, substantially 
as Specified. 
described. 
12. The combination, with the hollow shaft 
9. The combination, with the perforated 
and the revoluble inner cylinder having bear 
revoluble inner and outer cylinders and the 
ings on said shaft and exterior circumferen 
interior perforated water-supply pipe, of the 
tial gear, and the outer revoluble cylinder hav 
belt arranged to receive the discharge from 
ing circumferential gear, and roller-bearings 
said cylinders, and connections, substantially 
for both of said cylinders, of the main shaft 
as described, whereby said cylinders and belt 
and means for imparting motion thereto, and 4o 
are operated from the same shaft, substan 
pinions on said shaft meshing with the cir 
tially as specified. 
cumferential gear on said cylinders, substan 
10. The combination, with the perforated 
tially as shown and described. 
revoluble inner and outer cylinders and the 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
interior perforated non-rotatable water-sup 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ply pipe, of the belt arranged to receive the 
discharge from said cylinders, the elevator 
for taking the ore from the belt, and gearing 
operatively connecting the elevator and belt 
to the main shaft, substantially as specified. 
11. The combination, with the inner revolu 
WILLIAMI S. HULL. 
JAS. C. ANDERSON. 
35 
Witnesses: 
C. T. MORRIS, 
G. C. GRAFF. 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450856.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 450,856. 
A. J. WRIGHT. 
FLOAT, 
Patented Apr. 2l l891, 
He 
 
N? 
@zzzzzzzzzzZ2:22,2% 
|-ZZZZZZZ!!!!!!!! 
% 
O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
He nor Rig PETERS co, PhotoLITHo., Washington, c. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALLEN J. WRIGHT, OF CILEVELAND, OHIO. 
FLOAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,856, dated April 21, 1891. 
Application filed August 6, 1890, 
To al? ?v/y??? ? ??? ???ce77?: 
Beit known that, ALLEN J. WRIGHT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Floats; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
floats the strength of which has heretofore 
been limited and in many cases unequal to 
the demands of modern mechanics; and it 
consists in the novel mode of construction 
whereby practically unlimited strength is ob 
tained with the least possible increase in 
weight, while imperfections due to latent de 
fects in the material are avoided and the ex 
pense of construction is lessened. 
It has until the invention of my patent No. 
340,534 been regarded as impracticable to 
manufacture floats capable of withstanding 
very high pressure, or even such pressure as 
is commonly carried on the boilers of ocean 
steamers. Even in the manufacture of such 
floats as have been used it has been found 
necessary to use very thick metal in order to 
get the required strength, and in most cases 
this metal has been so heavy that it was im 
practicable to spin it, and the manner of con 
structing the float was to hanmer it into form 
over wooden or other blocks, which, by the 
way, is the same primeval form of handling 
sheet-copper that was in vogue before the 
spinning process was discovered. This plan 
of constructing floats is extremely unsatis 
factory in many respects. The process is a 
very slow, and hence expensive, one, requiring 
considerable peculiar skill and a great amount 
of labor, while the result is far from satis 
factory, the floats being very heavy and weak, 
as compared with their weight, and lacking 
in buoyancy, while hidden defects in the metal 
have proven fatal to their usefulness. My in 
vention obviates all this trouble, doing away 
with the waste of labor, increasing the buoy 
ancy of the float, which is an important con 
sideration, and giving it practically unlimited 
strength, while obviating all the trouble 
which has hitherto existed on account of the 
imperceptible flaws in the copper or other 
I KO 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
50 
Serial No. 361,214, (No model.) 
material. These flaws or imperfections have 
been One of the chief obstacles to success in 
making floats beyond the objectionable fea 
ture of Soldering or brazing, as set forth in 
my patentNo. 340,534. They arise from vari 
ous causes--such as imperfect rolling, foreign 
substance on the sheet when being rolled, burn 
ing of the metal in annealing, poor material, 
&c.-and are generally small and impercepti 
ble to the eye, frequently existing below the 
surface, and generally escape detection when 
the sheet of metal is examined before making 
it up into floats. Nevertheless, when the 
completed float is subjected to pressure, as 
it usually is, the external pressure forces 
steam or causes water to sweat through 
the imperfect spots in the metal, as is well 
known, and this Water or steam condensing 
and collecting in the float eventually loads 
it down and destroys itse buoyancy. Fur 
thermore, the pressure is more liable to col 
lapse the float, if such defective spots ex 
ist, as the metal is Correspondingly weak at 
such spots, and a float is no stronger than its 
Weakest point. The importance of avoiding 
such leakage and weakness in floats will be 
appreciated when it is understood that for 
many purposes floats are required to with 
Stand an external pressure of one hundred to 
one hundred and fifty pounds to the square 
inch of Surface, and often in excess of these 
figures. I have recently had occasion to con 
struct large floats, which when in use are re 
quired to sustain an average working-press 
ure of one hundred and sixty pounds to the 
square inch. In large floatssay of a di 
ameter of twelve inches or upward-the 
pressure Sustained is enormous and necessi 
tates very great strength, while the buoyancy 
necessary to render them useful requires that 
they shall at the same time be light. The 
combined qualities of strength, lightness, and 
impermeability are secured by constructing 
the floats of sheet metal, copper being pre 
ferred on account of its tenacity and ductility, 
by employing more than one thickness of the 
metal. It is practically impossible that flaws 
or defective spots should occur at the same 
point in each layer, but to prevent water, 
steam, or other substance in which the float 
may be used from being forced through the 
outer shell, and thence through the successive 
?? 
65 
? ? 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
450,856 
--- 
desirable. 
the different layers down on each other be 
fore putting the float together, the latter be 
ing then regarded and treated as a single 
part. In making these floats after either 
plan the cement Substance referred to may 
be brought into use by coating one or more 
of the layers therewith before spinning or 
or otherwise bringing them into contact. 
Although but two layers are shown in the 
drawings and are sufficient in most cases, I 
do not limit myself to the number of layers 
shown, as I employ as many as may be found 
In the manner before described have con 
structed large floats which have withstood a 
pressure of upward of three hundred pounds 
to the square inch, which, I believe, is far in 
excess of what any float otherwise constructed 
has sustained, and it is certain that these 
floats are very muchlighter, and consequently 
of greater lifting capacity, and hence greater 
Value to mechanics than any heretofore made 
capable of standing even ordinarily high 
pressure. Furthermore, by the process cov 
ered by this invention it is practical to make 
floats capable of withstanding any pressure 
that is at all likely to be desired, there being 
practically no limit to the strength which can 
in this manner be given to a float. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A float composed of a shell having layers 
made to conform to each other by pressure, 
substantially as described. 
2. A float composed of layers of metal su 
perposed on each other by spinning, substan 
tially as described. 
3. A float composed of layers of metal suc 
cessively applied by spinning over the pre 
ceding layer, Substantially as described. 
4. The herein-described methed of forming 
floats, consisting in applying successive layers 
and forcing each into close contact with the 
preceding layer, Substantially as described. 
5. In a float, the plurality of layers pre 
viously shaped and made to conform to each 
other by pressure, substantially as described. 
6. In a float composed of layers, a cement 
ing or obstructing substance between them, 
substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
In festimony whereof I hereto affix my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
ALLEN J. WRIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. NEWTON, 
I. PRENTISS. 
75 
95 
IOO 
- 
inner ones, as might occur if the various 
layers of metal were not in perfectly-close 
contact throughout, a cement or obstructing 
substance may be used, which when hard 
ened by time will successfully resist all such 
action and at the same time form a perfect 
contact between the shells, thereby greatly 
strengthening the float. 
The important quality of tightness, so far 
as it relates to the joint, I have secured by 
my invention described in Letters Patent 
No. 340,534 and by an improvement there 
on which is the subject-matter of my appli 
cation for patent filed concurrently herewith 
and designated as Case B, Serial No. 361,215. 
In the drawings, Figures 1 and 2 represent 
central vertical sections of a float constructed 
according to my invention, while Fig. 3 is a 
similar view showing a slight modification of 
the construction. 
A A' A' A', &c., represent the respective 
parts of the shell of the float. 
B represents a flanged ring sometimes 
used in constructing the float, while a, a? a 
a represent shoulders or offsets formed on 
the several pieces for the purpose hereinafter 
Set forth. 
In the drawings I show the forms of mak 
ing the joint after the manner covered by 
Letters Patent granted to me; but it is ob 
vious that the invention which is the Subject 
of this specification and application is equally 
applicable to floats of the ordinary construc 
tion, 
I prefer to make these floats, in so far as 
this invention is concerned, in the following 
manner: The innershells AA are first formed 
in the desired shape in the usual Way and 
joined together. To add the successive layers 
of metal the float thus formed may be used as 
a former, the successive layers being spun 
down over it, taking care to have their edges 
sufficiently overlapped to form a tight joint 
with or without the aid of a cement sub 
stance. To guard against any possible dis 
placement and add to the strength, I pre 
fer to form shoulders Ct. a' in the inner layer, 
to which the other layers are made to con 
form by spinning down shoulders (ta, &c., 
thereon, the outer layer being spun down at 
its edge over the shoulder below it, as shown 
at a, Fig. 2, although this is not essential ex 
cept where the requirements are exception 
ally exacting. It is also possible to construct 
a float on this principle by forming separate 
shells, which are inserted into each other so 
as to come into close contact, or by Spinning 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US450956.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 450,956, 
P. WILHELM. 
BURGLAR PROOF SAFE. 
Patented Apr. 21, 1891. 
 
 
 
2 
6, 2 
% 
Sise 
% 
3S2 
% 
 E. 
2 
SE 
BSS 26 
2SzS2 
2, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
555,555,252. 25% 
%2% 
zzi, a 
2%at: 
Jha yer. tor. 
c. M i? 
hy 2244. his -Attorney. 
The NORRS PEERs co, PHot-Litho., washingron, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER WILHELM, OF PORTLAND, OREGON. 
BURG LAR-PRO OF SAFE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 450,956, dated April 21, 1891. 
Application filed August 28, 1890, Serial No,363,355, (No model.) 
To all livhon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PETER WILHELM, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Portland, 
Multnomah county, and State of Oregon, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Burglar-Proof Safes, of which the following 
is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to the means employed 
for rendering the doors and walls of safes, 
Vaults, and like work impenetrable by the 
drill. 
I accomplish this by providing in the 
Safe-body and door thereof a section or inner 
Wall of short loose rods laid and resting one 
On the other at right angles to the face of the 
Safe, or so that one of their ends will point 
toward the exterior thereof, and thus consti 
tute a net-Work of rods embedded in a dry 
non-combustible lubricous substance, facili 
tating their revolving freely in their places 
Whenever a drilling-tool is brought to bear 
against them, my invention being arranged 
as shown in the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part hereof. 
Figure 1 in the drawings is a front eleva 
tion of a safe with its door open and at right 
angles to the body of the safe. Figs. 2 and 3 
are partial transversevertical sectional views, 
Fig. 4 is a partial perspective view, (said fig 
ures 2, 3, and 4 illustrating practical means 
for adapting my invention for use.) Fig. 5 is 
a perspective view of the rods, also showing 
a full plan view of one of them; and Fig.6 is a 
partial longitudinal vertical section showing 
the arrangement of the rods. 
Like letters refer to like parts. 
The rods a, preferably of the shape shown 
in Fig. 5 and of suitable size, are arranged as 
shown in Fig. 6, being so laid that their butt 
ends b willpoint toward the interior and their 
tapering ends c toward the exterior of the 
Safe, this arrangement being adopted so that 
the rods may not act as a chisel, against which 
a sledge might be used with effect, and for 
Other reasons, as will appear hereinafter. The 
interstices or places about the rods a are filled 
in with some dry lubricous substance unaf 
fected by strong heat-as, e.g., black-lead 
so that there will be but little friction of the 
rods against each other and enable the same 
to revolve freely in their places when oper 
ated upon with a drill, the ends b of the rods 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
being rounded so as to diminish the friction 
upon the plate or frame-work against which 
they are placed, and the tapering ends c Serv 
ing to turn the drilling-tool aside as Well as, 
because of its said construction, offering no 
salient point to facilitate the action of the 
drill. In the corners and spaces left at the 
sides of the alternate rows of rods are placed 
small triangular (or semicircular) bars d, 
somewhat tapering at their exterior ends, so 
as to leave no unprotected aperture. The 
rods, arranged and embedded in a lubricous 
substance, as described, are inclosed by a suit 
able frame-work that will retain them in po 
sition and secure them from being forced out 
of place. 
If desired, the places in which the spindle 
and mechanism for operating the bolts, as well 
as such bolts, are located may be protected 
by plate-work in the manner now in use for 
that purpose. 
The edges of the safe-body and verge of the 
door are constructed of solid frame-work as 
well as the interior and exterior of the body 
and door being all according to the well-known 
methods now employed for that purpose. Be 
tween the plates of this frame-work a section 
is left open in which to introduce my inven 
tion, as seen in Figs, 2 and 3, the latter figure 
showing a section of the walls of a fire-proof 
safe with my invention combined thereWith, 
or, if deemed preferable, my invention may 
also be inclosed in a separate frame-work of 
its own, (see Fig. 4.) so that it may be inserted 
in and between the plates constituting the 
frame-work of the walls or door of the safe. 
The means I have described, constituting 
my invention for rendering safes and vaults 
burglar-proof, may be applied to every part 
thereof offering an advantageous or accessi 
ble point for being operated upon with a drill, 
or the same may be adopted in the door there 
of only. Should a burglar attempt to drill 
through the walls of a safe containing myin 
vention and succeed in getting as far as the 
net-work of rods, the drill can execute no fur 
ther work, for, being operated on the rods, it 
will cause these to revolve with it without ac 
complishing any further work. 
I am aware that a layer or series of layers 
of loose bars or rods capable of revolving in 
55 
75 
1 OO 
2 
450,956 
their places have heretofore been used ar 
ranged parallel with the surface or face of the 
Safe and its door; but I do not believe that 
these means could substitute my invention or 
5 that the same are in any way analogous to the 
means employed by me, consisting, substan 
tially, of an inner wall of loose rods, as de 
Scribed. 
What I claim, therefore, as my invention, 
Io and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
As an improvement in safes, the combina 
tion, with the frame, of a dry non-combusti 
ble lubricous filling therein, a net-work of 
loose rods embedded in the said filling at right 
angles to the face of the frame and having 15 
their outer ends tapered, and the corner or 
end pieces d, substantially as described and 
set forth. 
PETER WILHELMI. 
Witnesses: 
W. W. MCCREDIE, 
T. J. GEISLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451056.txt	(No Model.) 
No, 45l, 056, 
H. H. KIEN IDRICK. 
STRAW CUTTER, ATTACHIMIENT, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 28, 1891, 
* 
M% a 
O-SO. EM- 
w 
F3 ?. 
% Vaire ?9vvive vnitot 
&lttov vnes 
 
* 
* 
* 
* i - 
- - - 
- 
" 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
" 
? "* 
* * * *- 
 
STRAW GUTTER ATTACHIMENT, 
No. 451,056. 
Patented Apr. 28, l. 89 l. 
 
SMR)itvooooo 
CAF---- 
6, C7.  
A 
%4 
97% ?el********** 
D8 4. lttov v et e 
(No Model.) 
H. H. KENDRICK. 
STRAW CUTTER ATTACHIMIENT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 451,056, 
\ 
Patented Apr. 28, 189 l. 
M4 3%7<-%-2% vvvmnitoz 
A2 
4\la 
f 
F3 
989itvncseco 
  ?utla-J 
( 4 KKJ-Z 
. -- 
MZ 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HILAND HI. IKENDRICK, OF FULTON, NEW YORK. 
STRAW - C UTTER ATTACH MENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,056, dated April 28, 1891. 
Application filed November 26, 1889. Serial No, 331,674 (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all av ?von, it 7) ay coTulce77.: 
from the shaft of the drive-wheel to the Shaft 
7, and thence by the bevel-gears 10 to the 
Be it known that I, HILAND H. KENDRICK, 
shaft 11, upon which are mounted the pulleys 
of Fulton, in the county of Oswego, in the 
which drive the elevator-belt 13. 14 is the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
elevator, the foot of which is so arranged and 
useful Improvements in Straw-Cutter Attach 
mounted upon its supports upon the frame 
ments, of which the following, taken in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings, is | B as to be in proper position to receive the 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
cut material. This is a construction shown 
This invention relates to straw-cutters, and | in Fig. 1, in whic the cut material is to be 
especially to devices for supporting the foot || conducted to one side. 
In Fig.2, where the material is to be deliv 
of an elevator used to carry away the cut ma- 
terial. 
ered infront, the shaft 11 has been shifted, so as 
The object of my invention is to produce a | to stand transversely across the frame by mov 
separate attachment applicable to any power- || ing its journal-boxes and the shaft and the 
cutter, consisting of a separate frame adapted | foot of the elevator to that position, and the 
to receive the forward legs of the cutter and | sprocket S is removed from the shaft 7 and 
extending forward and rearward thereof and || put onto the outer end of the shaft 11, and 
carrying the shafting and gearing to operate | the driving-belt thus leads directly from the 
the elevator-apron and adapted to be shifted so | main shaft to the sprocket on the shaft 11 
as to bring the elevator in front of the cutter or | and drives this shaft entirely independent of 
upon either side thereof, so as to carry the | the shaft 7. It will be observed that this 
cut material to the front or to either side of F changing of the elevator from either side to 
the machine. 
the front is accomplished without moving the 
My invention consists in the several novel || cutter or withol?t moving the frame itself, 
features of construction and operation here- || and thus without disturbing the set of the 
inafter described, and specifically set forth || straW - cutter by simply shifting the shaft, 
in the caim annexed. It is constructed as | which drives the elevator-belt from a position 
follows, reference being had to the accom- || longitudinal to the frame to a position trans 
panying drawings, in which  
verse thereto. It will be further observed 
Figure il is an isometrical elevation of the | that this frame is of such construction that 
straw-cutter, having the elevator attached, so | it can be manufactured separate from the 
as to conduct the material away to one side. I straw-cutter and applied to any straw-cutter 
Fig. 2 is a like view of the same with the ele- || using an elevator. 
What I claim is 
Vator attached, so as to throw the material to 
The combination, with a straw-cutter, of a 
the front; and Fig. 3 is an isometrical view 
of the frame carrying the foot of the elevator i rectangular frame consisting of side bars 
detached. 
notched to receive the front legs of the straw 
A is the straw-cutter, of any desired con- || cutter, cross-bars connecting the side bars, 
struction, provided with front legs 1, which || journal-boxes mounted upon the cross-bars 
are connected at their lower ends by the base | and adapted to be changed over to the side 
2, and as the working parts of this straw-cut- || bars, a shaft mounted in said journal-boxes 
ter do not performa part of this invention I | and carrying the foot of the elevator, gearing 
upon said shaft carrying the elevator-belt, 
will not here describe them in detail. 
B is a rectangular frame consisting of the i and means to rotate said shaft. 
side bar 3 3, the end bar 4, and a cross-bar 5, 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
iad, cal of 
vertical notch 6, and the base 2 fits in those || 
notches. Upon the side bars Ierect the boxes, 
in which the shaft 7 is journaled, carrying on 
its Outer end a sprocket 8, and the belt 9, pass- 
ing around this sprocket, transmits the power 
siis bas is provided with a | hand this 21st day of November, 1889. 
In presence of 
ARRIN RICE, 
EMMA COATES. 
YAYI 
HILAND HI. KENDRICK. 
T T 
95 
O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451156.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MILTON JACKSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PAD LOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,156, dated April 28, 1891. 
Application filed June 18, 1890, Serial No. 355,839, (Model.) 
le, 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MILTON JACKSON, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain Improvements in Padlocks, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
an improved padlock which can be readily 
made from Wrought metal struck up to the 
proper form. This object I attain in the fol 
lowing manner, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved pad 
lock with the front plate removed, showing 
the shackle locked. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
to Fig.1, showing the shackle unlocked. Fig. 
8 is a Section on the line 12, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 
is a perspective view of the shackle and the 
carrying-plate, and Fig. 5 is a perspective 
view showing the series of dogs. 
A is the casing of the lock. 
Cl is the face-plate, which is secured to the 
body of the lock by riveting in the usual man 
B is the shackle of the swinging type and 
having a notched end b adapted to a notched 
projection d, secured to or forming part of 
the carrying-plate D. The lower end of this 
carrying-plate has an extension d', which is 
adapted to the grooved portion b' of the long 
arm of the shackle, and consequently the car. 
lying-plate moves up and down with the 
shackle. The long arm of the shackle is 
adapted to bearings in the upper section of 
the casing and to a lug a?, secured to the cas 
ing, and the projection or lug d is adapted to 
an orifice in the upper portion of the casing. 
Surrounding the long arm of the shackle B 
is a coiled spring E, which not only turns the 
shackle at right angles to the face of the lock, 
but also tends to force the shackle and plate 
down, as shown in Fig. 1. The lower end of 
the Spring passes through the long arm of the 
shackle, and its upper end is secured back of 
a lug Ci on the casing. A squared projection 
b. On the lower end of the long arm of the 
shackle B passes through a slot in the lug a 
When the shackle and plate are raised, as will 
be readily understood by referring to Fig. 1. 
This lug prevents the shackle from turning 
until its short arm is clear of the case. The 
5 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
projection is then free of the lug a', and will 
allow the shackle to turn on its pivot to the 
position shown in Fig. 2. The carrying-plate 
D is slotted at d, and adapted to this slot is 
the key-post c on the case A. On a pin f on 
the carrier D are a series of dogs g. (Shown 
clearly in Fig. 5.) Each of these dogs has a 
springg', bearing against a pin f' on the car 
rying-plate. The lower portions of the dogs 
engage with a pin i on the casing, and when 
the key is inserted in the key-hole the dogs 
are so moved that they clear the pin, thus al 
lowing the key to lift the shackle, and when 
the shackle reaches the limit of its upward 
movement it is turned by the spring to the 
position shown in Fig. 2, the projection bon 
the long arm passing over the lug a', which 
retains the shackle in its raised position. To 
relock the shackle, it is sinaply turned, and is 
drawn down into the orifice of the lug d by 
the spring and locked automatically. 
On the carrying-plate are two or more ribs 
le, pressed from the plate, which rest against 
the back plate of the case and reduce the fric 
tion between the carrier and the case. The 
ribs, however, may be on the case instead of 
the carrier without departing from my inven 
tion. In some instances the lug d on the car 
lying-plate may be dispensed with, the end 
of the short arm in this instance merely ex 
tending into or onto the casing. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, in a padlock, of the 
casing, the shackle adapted to slide and swing 
in the casing, a carrying-plate attached to 
the shackle, but in which it is free to swing, 
a spring acting both to swing the shackle and 
to Withdraw the Salme, and dogs pivoted to a 
pin on the carrying-plate, with a pin on the cas- 9 
ing, with which the dogs engage, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. The combination, in a padlock, of the 
Casing, a projection C, thereon, a shackle 
round in cross-section, having its bearings in 
the top plate of the casing and in the projec 
tion and adapted to move vertically in said 
bearings and also to vibrate therein, a lug b 
On the long arm of the shackle, adapted to a 
slot in the projection C.", a carrying-plate hav 
ing an extension attached to the long arm of 
the shackle and having a notched projection 
95 
OO 
2 
451,156 
5 carrying-plate, and dogs pivoted thereto, with 
d, adapted to engage with the notched short the carrying frame or casing, said ribs being 
arm of the shackle, said carrying-plate mov- forced up from the sheet metal, with locking 
ing vertically with the shackle, a coiled spring dogs and a pin with which they engage, all I5 
on the long arm of the shackle, a pin f on the substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
a pin on the casing, with which the dogs en- name to this specification in the presence of 
gage, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, in a padlock, of the 
struck-up back casing, a shackle adapted tO 
Io move vertically in said casing, a struck-up 
sheet-metal carrying-frame attached to and 
moving vertically with the shackle, and ribson 
EUGENE ELTERICH, 
HARRY SMITH. 
two subscribing witnesses. 
m 
Witnesses: 
MILTON JACKSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451256.txt	D. E. BARTON. 
CULTIVATOR ATTACHMENT, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 28, 1891. 
/2 vetz eve: 
-- 
- 6e - 6 (2-2, 
%2a- 1 - 
(No Model.) 
No. 451,256. 
 
hitueus 6.f. 
6%zeze, 2. 
(2) 
6(& 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 451,256. 
D, E, BARTON, 
CULTIVATOR, ATTACHMENT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 28, 1891, 
 
s 
1 
HXEEE 
- WNS 
2 
7a 
na 
n 
W 
issiles 
r 
r 
e 
Elie 
te 
areer.S.N. 
ify 
A 
- 
 
 
in 
  
ger1. 
  
HITSL 
 
Wieanedded. 
atta 
g 
// 5. 
a 
1. 
Zaven Zaa: 
 
D. E. BARTON. 
CULTIVATOR, ATTACHMENT, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 28, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 451,256, 
 
N 
W 
--- 
A. 
'- lyria 
 
 
1. S 
Y 
AS 
f 
 
 
 
AE2 
 
 
Widzzedded. 
1.--&.-- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DELBERT E. BARTON, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
CULTIVATOR ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,256, dated April 28, 1891. 
Application filed October 1, 1890, 
Serial No. 366,710, (No model.) 
thereof. The forward axle and guide-roller 
To all whom, it may concern. 
are connected by means of the curved braces 
Be it known that I, DELBERT E. BARTON, a 
D. From the rear of said braces projects the 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
seat. The braces Dare connected by means 
city and in the county of San Francisco, and 
of the rod F and rack-bar F", upon which op 
State of California, have invented certain 
erates the raising and shifting mechanism, 
new and useful Improvements in Cultivators; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
hereinafter described. 
The rod F is secured by means of ears f to 
full, clear, and exact description of said in 
the upwardly-extending bracket G, which is 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
connected to bracket G' by means of rotating 
the art to which it most nearly appertains to 
rod G. The bracket G' is held in position by 
make, use, and practice the same. 
means of outwardly-extending flange g, which 
My invention has relation to certain new 
fits beneath the rack-bar F" and segmental 
and useful improvements in cultivators, har 
ack H, which is movably secured to axle or 
rOWS, plows, or the like, which consists of the 
shaft G, and the teeth of which mesh with 
arrangement of parts and details of construc 
openings g, formed in rack bar F. The 
tion, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
forth in the drawings, described, and pointed 
brackets G and G' are further connected by 
means of shafts or axles g', upon which Work 
out in the specification. 
the chain-drums H II'', which are operated 
The main feature of my invention consists 
or rotated through the medium of gear H, 
in providing suitable mechanism whereby the 
which inter meshes with gear H, which meshes 
entire beam and teeth thereof may be shifted 
with gear II, which is located upon shafts 
laterally to the rear of draft without creating 
or necessitating a delay or stoppage in the 
g', said brackets and their connections form 
ing a movable frame, as hereinafter more fully 
forward movement of the machine. 
shown. If so desired, the drums H' H' may 
My invention further consists in providing 
be provided with geared periphery and gears 
for the automatic lifting of the teeth and 
H' and H be dispensed with. 
beam when contacting with obstacles in move 
The gear His keyed to shaft or axle G' by 
ment, thereby obviating liability of damage 
ensuing by breakage or otherwise. 
means of bolts h, so as to revolve in unison 
Myinvention further consists in providing 
therewith. Upon the outer end of said shaft 
I locate loosely the rack-wheel I, which is 
a cultivator which shall be simpler of con 
rigidly secured to the bracket G. Within the 
struction, more effective in its operation, and 
teeth of said rack-wheel is adapted to engage 
less expensive than any device of a similar 
the end of the spring-catch I', which is con 
nature heretofore known to me. 
nected with operating - handle I, rigidly se 
Referring to the drawingsforming a part of 
this application, wherein similar letters of 
cured to shaft G. 
Fastened to and depending from drums II 
reference are used to denote corresponding 
parts throughout the entire specification and 
H' are chains J J', which at their lower end 
several views, Figure 1 is a longitudinal sec 
are secured to tilting rods f, fastened to the 
cultivator-beam i and axle B through the me 
tional view in elevation; Fig. 2, a similar view 
dium of connecting braces or rods K, to which 
showing the teeth thrown upward; Fig. 3, a 
they are pivotally secured, as shown in Figs. 
top plan view; Fig. 4, a detail view of the trip 
mechanism; Fig. 5, a top plan of Fig. 4; Fig. 
1 and 2. 
The chains J J' are secured to the tilting 
6, a front view in elevation of the shifting 
rod f by means of swiveled link O. (Shown 
mechanism; Fig. 7, an end view of Fig. 6, and 
in Fig. 4.) The inner ends of said tilting rods 
Fig. 8 a top plan of Fig. 7. 
rest upon the rearwardly-extending shoulders 
The letter A indicates the ordinary drive 
j' of tripping-rods L, which I pivotally secure 
wheels of the cultivator, which are mounted 
upon the axle B, and C the guide or rear roller to connecting-rods IX by means of bolts or 
- 
95 
25 
35 
 
IP 
451,256 
o 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
pins k. Upon said tripping-rod I locate the 
weight L', which is sufficient to overcome the 
downward pressure of tilting rods f while the 
teeth of the cultivator are passing through 
the ground. The normal position of weighted 
tripping- rods is clearly shown in Fig. 1. 
However, should the teeth of the cultivator 
during the movement of cultivation contact 
with large bowlders, stumps, or the like the 
forward movement of the cultivator will ex 
ert a downward pressure upon the rods f, 
which, bearing against the rearwardly-extend 
ing shouldersi, will cause the upward move 
ment of tilting rods L until rods i are re 
moved from contact with shoulders j', which 
allows the teeth to give to the strain exerted 
thereon and move upward, while rods j move 
downward until contact is made with the 
ground, when said teeth will have been lifted 
Sufficiently high to overcome the obstruction. 
In order to release the teeth from their up 
lifted position it is necessary that the chains 
J J' be wound upon the drums HFI' through 
the medium of operating-handle I, the wind 
ing of which will cause the uplifting of tilt 
ingrods and allow the teeth.L to fall. With 
the dropping of said teeth the rod j moves 
upward and contacts with shoulders lof trip 
ping-rods L., throwing the same forward into 
normal position. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown the relative position 
of the parts when the teeth are thrown up 
Ward. The letter M indicates the guide for 
rodj in order to hold same in position to con 
necting-rods K, as shown. Connecting-rod K 
is pivotally secured to axle B by pins lc. 
By providing the double drums I equalize 
the hanging of the beam, and thus prevent the 
dropping of either end, which will follow if 
both chains be wound upon the same drum. 
The raising and shifting of the cultivator 
beam and teeth is accomplished as follows: 
In Order to raise or lift the beam so as to raise 
the teeth above the ground, it is only neces 
sary that the driver or operator turn or ro 
tate the crank-handle I, at the same time rais 
ing Spring-actuated catch I until free of rack 
bar I. Upon the turning of handle I the 
shaft G' is caused to revolve, carrying there 
with gear II*, rigidly secured thereto, which 
intermeshes with gear II, causing rotation 
thereof and of gear H. The rotation of said 
gears is transmitted to drums H. H., which 
necessarily causes the winding of chains J J' 
thereon, and inasmuch as the same are fast 
ened to the tilting rods j* (secured to the cul 
tivator-beam) the entire frame of the beam is 
raised. By raising the spring-catch I the beam 
may be Secured at any height. The entire 
frame and teeth may be moved laterally any 
required distance by a movement of segmental 
rack II, the teeth of which mesh with the 
rack-bar F. With the movement of the seg 
mental rack the entire bar-frame and sus 
pended cultivator-beam are shifted laterally 
any desired distance. In order to facilitate 
the shifting of the beam, I provide the draft 
clhain N, which I connect centrally thereto 
and to the whiffletree N of the cultivator. 
As the beam is moved from the rear or cen 
ter to either side the pulling strain exerted 
on chain N will tend greatly to shift the en 
tire beam. 
I am aware that minor changes may be 
made in the arrangement of parts and de 
tails of construction herein shown and de 
scribed without creating or necessitating a 
departure from the nature and scope of my 
invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to Secure protection 
in by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a cultivator, the combination of up 
wardly-extending brackets, an upper rotat 
able rod connecting said brackets, carrying 
a rigidly-mounted gear, a rack-bar mounted 
loosely upon the end of the rotatable rod, a 
crank also upon the end thereof carrying a 
spring-actuated dog or pawl for engaging the 
rack-bar, lower shafts or rods having drums 
mounted thereon, a hinged plow-beam, and 
chains connecting the same with the drums, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a cultivator, the combination of a 
plow-beam, tilting rods secured thereto, con 
necting-rods having their forward ends con 
nected to the axle and their rear ends pivot 
ally connected to the tilting rods, and tripping 
rods provided with weighted forward ends, 
having their opposite ends provided with 
rearwardly - extending shoulders, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. In a cultivator, the combination of a 
plow-beam, tilting rods secured thereto and 
provided with guides, connecting-rods hav 
ing their forward ends connected to the axle 
and their rear ends pivotally connected to the 
tilting rods, and tripping-rods provided with 
weighted forward ends and having their op 
posite ends provided with rearwardly-extend 
ing shoulders, the latter provided with lugs 
or stops with which the tilting rods contact 
when said rods are brought back to their nor 
mal position, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a cultivator, the combination of curved 
braces, a rod connecting Said braces, arear up 
wardly-extending bracket provided at its low 
er ends with apertured lugs through which the 
transverse rod passes, a transverse rack-bar 
connecting the two braces, a forward bracket 
connected to the rear one by means of a rod 
or shaft, said bracket provided with a flange 
extending beneath the rack-bar, a segmental 
rack loosely mounted upon the rod or shaft 
which connects the two brackets and mesh 
ing with the rack-bar, a plow-beam having 
a lateral pivotal connection with the axle of 
the machine, and chains connecting the lat 
erally-moving brackets with said beam, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
5. In a cultivator, the combination of the 
beam thereof, the herein-described mechan 
75 
9o 
95 
Oo 
d 
II5 
I 25 
ism for raising and shifting the same later. 
ally, and the chain N, having one end con-presence of two witnesses. 
nected to the beam and the other end to the 
evener, adapted to assist the lateral move- 
5 ment of the beam, by reason of the strain 
thereon, through said lateral movement of 
the beam, substantially as set forth. 
N. A. ACKER, 
P. A. WAGNER. 
Witnesses: 
151,256 
3 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
IDELBERT E. BARTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451356.txt	(Model.) 
No. 451356, 
L. H. AYRES, 
PERMUTATION PADLOCK, 
Patented Apr. 28, 1891. 
 
 
 
 
 
SNSSS 
ses FS S. 
S 
Ya 
XXSWSeaws 
 
2 SS 
 
f 
 
% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
4. 
LEMUEL H. AYRES, OF GUTHRIE, KENTUCKY. 
PERMUTATION PAD LOC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,356, dated April 28, 1891. 
Application filed January 31, 1891, Serial No. 379,836. (Model.) 
To all whom it T20I? Concert: 
Be it known that I, LEMUEL H. AYRES, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Guth 
rie, in the county of Todd and State of Ken 
tucky, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Permutation-Padlocks, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in permutation-locks, and particularly 
in that class of locks adapted to secure the 
bows of padlocks. 
It is the purpose of my invention to provide 
a simple and comparatively inexpensive con 
Struction and organization of parts, whereby 
ihe locking-bolt may be securely held when 
shot by devices which are brought into action 
by operating combining elements of the lockin 
accordance with a predetermined sequence of 
Selected numbers or characters upon one or 
more of Said elements or parts. 
It is my purpose, also, to provide a padlock 
With a sliding head having a locking-bolt, and 
to combine therewith suitable permuting ele 
ments to fasten the locking-bolt, the pivot 
bolt on Which the latter turns, and on which, 
also, the sliding head moves, being sofastened 
by moving the sliding bolt to shoot the bolt 
as to prevent said pivot-bolt from turning for 
the purpose of detaching the same, while by 
Withdrawing the locking-bolt the pivot-pin 
may be readily detached. 
It is my purpose, further, to provide a lock 
capable of permutation, and which may be 
used upon a padlock or elsewhere, the con 
Struction being simple and comparatively 
cheap, and the parts being easily operated 
and not liable to get out of order. 
It is my purpose, also, to provide a combi 
nation-lock suitable for use upon a padlock, 
in which the locking-bolt shall be retained in 
position when shot by holding devices which 
are acted upon by gravity, the permuting 
parts consisting of a dial of tumblers, one of 
which sets or permutes the lock, while the other 
completes the combination. 
To these ends the invention consists in the 
Several novel features of construction and 
new combinations of parts hereinafter fully 
set forth, and then definitely pointed out in 
the claims following this specification. 
To enable those skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will proceed to de 
scribe the same in detail, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure l is a side elevation showing a pad 
lock embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
horizontal section of Fig.1 in the plane XX, 
the dial and tumblers being removed to show 
the locking-bolt and the bolt-head. Fig. 3 is 
a vertical section on the line YY, Fig. 2, show 
ing the parts in place and the bolt shot. Fig. 
4 is an inverted plan view of the dial, with the 
tumblers removed to show the ball-chambers 
and the intermediate apertures which receive 
the point or nipple on the face of one of the 
permuting-tumblers. Fig. 5 is a detail view 
of one of the tumblers referred to in Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 is a detail view of the other tumbler. 
Fig. 7 is a detail view of the central pivot-bolt, 
which is locked in such manner that when the 
bolt is shot said bolt cannot be turned to ef 
fect its removal. Fig. S is a view showing the 
lock reversed in position, and illustrating the 
manner in which the balls pass by gravity 
from the opening in the bolt-head back to the 
ball-chambers in the dial to permit the re 
traction of the bolt. 
In the said drawings the reference-numeral 
1 designates the metallic body of the padlock, 
upon one end of which are formed lugs 2, be 
tween which is hinged or pivoted the shackle 
or bow 3, consisting of a strong metal barbent 
into a curved or nearly semicircular form and 
having at the extremity opposite its hinged 
end a tongue or point 4, formed to enter a 
socket 5, the metal within which the latter is 
formed projecting upward from the end of the 
body 1. In the tongue 4 is formed an open 
ing 6, substantially in the central line of the 
body 1, to receive the fastening-bolt. 
Upon the body of the padlock, between its 
ends, is formed a substantially circular plat 
form 7, having its upper flat face flush, or 
nearly so, with the upper flattened face of said 
body. Upon this platform rests the bolt-head 
8, consisting of a flat thick disk of metal of 
the same diameter as the platform, or nearly 
so. From the edge of this head or disk pro 
jects a rectangular bar of metal 9, carrying 
upon its end the bolt 10, which enters the 
wall of the socket 5 through an opening 13. 
In the central or diametrical line of the head 
S is formed an opening resembling in form a 
key-hole slot-that is to say, consisting of an 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
2 
451,356 
TO 
25 
35 
intervals are formed small apertures 30, for a 
enlarged circular portion 14, in to which opens 
purpose presently to be shown. 
a straight short slot 15, having a square eld, 
The liumeral 21 denotes the permuting-tum 
which extends beyond the center of the disk 
bler, consisting of a thin metallic disk hav 
toward the hinged end of the bow. The pur 
ing a central opening 32, and provided with 
pose of this opening and of the relative di 
two circular openings 33 and 34, arranged 
mensions of its two parts will be explained 
upon opposite sides of the central opening in 
hereinafter. Upon each side of the central 
such manner that one ant the same diam 
opening, and substantially parallel there with, 
eter drawn from edge to edge of the tum 
is formed an opening having somewhat simi 
ber shall coincide with the diameter of each 
lar form, its end being rounded and the open 
of the openings 33 and 34. The former is 
ing itself being, preferably, not quite as long 
placed close to the edge of the permuting 
as the central opening. Each of the lateral 
tumbler and the latter close to the central 
openings consists of an enlarged circular pol'- 
opening 32. At one side of the circular open 
tion 16 and a straight or nearly straight, nar 
ing 34 is set a stud or nipple 35 of such size 
rower portion 17. These openings receive 
that it may readily enter any one of the small 
studs 1S, rising from the platform 7, and Serv 
apertures 30. It will be seen that when placed 
ing to keep the bolt-head in place and guide 
in certain of said apertures-as, for example, 
the same. These studs also have a further 
the openings 30-the circular opening 33 will 
and still more important function, which will 
substantially coincide with the chamber 29, 
be explained hereinafter. 
lying near the periphery. On the other hand, 
The numeral 19 denotes the rotary tumbler, 
if the nipple or stud 35 be inserted in the 
which is so termed for the reason that by its 
opening 30", the circular aperture 34 will co 
rotary adjustment to a fixed point the lock 
incide with the chamber 28, which is the mid 
ing and unlocking of the bolt are completed, 
dle chamber of the series, lying close to the 
this movement being combined with a prede 
central opening. By adjusting the tumbler 
termined adjustment of the dial, as shown 
in the manner described-viz., by removing 
hereinafter. The tumbler is composed of a 
the stud 34 from one aperture 30 to another 
thin metallic plate, of circular form, having a 
the lock-combination may be changed or per 
diameter equal to that of the bolt-head S, but 
provided with a point 20 projecting slightly 
muted as often as desired. 
The parts heretofore described are arranged, 
beyond the periphery of the bolt-head and 
when assembled, in the following manner: 
Serving as an index, while upon another part 
Upon the bolt-head, as it rests upon the plat 
of the periphery, preferably opposite the point 
form 7, is placed the rotary tumbler 19, and 
20, are formed two of these projections 21, 
upon the latter rests the permuting-tumbler 
the intermediate notch, as well as the points, 
31, with its stud 35 placed in one of the open 
providing convenient means whereby the 
ings 30 of the dial 25, which rests upon the 
tumblers may be turned. In the center of the 
tumbler 31, the chambers in said dial being 
plate is formed an opening 22 to receive the 
each supplied with a metallic ball 36 of such 
pivot-pin upon which the tumbler turns. 
size as to readily enter and leave its chamber 
Near the periphery of the plate 19 is formed 
by the force of gravity only. Through the 
a circular opening 23, so arranged that its 
central openings in the tumbler is passed a 
diameter shall coincide with a radius of the 
pivot -bolt 37, having a threaded extremity 
tumblers or plate 19, which will pass, if pro 
which enters a central threaded aperture in 
longed, through the center of the projection 
the platform 7. Above the threaded end is 
20. A second and similar opening 24 is also 
a square portion 3S, of such size that when 
formed in the tumbler-plate 19, its diameter 
forming a right angle, or nearly so, with the 
turned until two of its sides are in Substan 
tial parallelism with the sides of the slot 15 
radial line passing through the center of the 
in the bolt-head, the latter may be pushed 
opening 23. This second opening 24 is placed 
forward until the bolt enters the socket in 
as far from the periphery of the tumblers as 
the bow, whereupon the pivot-bolt cannot be 
the opening 23 is removed from the central 
turned in either direction. Therefore to insert 
opening 22. 
the threaded end of said pivot-bolt in its 
The numeral 25 indicates the dial of the 
opening the bolt-head is drawn back until 
lock, consisting of a thick metal disk provided 
the bolt stands in the enlarged circular por 
with a central opening 26, having the same 
tion 14 of the opening in the bolt-head, where 
or substantially the same diameter as the 
it can be turned easily. Above the square 
opening 22 in the tumbler 19. The dial itself 
portion 38 is a cylindrical part 39, upon which 
is of about the same diameter but of a little 
greater thickness than the bolt-head S. In 
the dial turns. 
The pivot-bolt 37 being set up to the proper 
the dial are formed a double series of cham 
point, the operation is as follows: Upon the 
bel's 27 28 29, the central chamber 2S in each 
periphery of the dial are formed at suitable 
of said series being removed from the periph 
intervals a series of letters, figures, or other 
ery of the dial a distance substantially equal 
symbols, the space between the successive 
to the space separating the two extreme cham 
characters being immaterial, provided that 
bers 27 and 29 from the central opening 26. 
Near the periphery of the dial and at equal one of said characters shall lie in the radial 
SO 
55 
65 
So 
95 
OO 
I IO 
I I5 
451,856 
3 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
u 
line passing from the center of the dial 
What I claim is 
through the center of each ball-chamber. In 
1. In a permuting-lock, the combination, 
attaching the permuting-tumbler 31 the op 
with a shackle, of a bolt-head movable upon 
erator notes the letter or other character at 
a support to insert and withdraw the locking 
this point or coinciding with this line and re 
bolt, said bolt-headl having an enlarged open 
tains this character or figure in mind as be 
ing and a communicating narrower opening 
ing one element of the combination upon 
inclosed between two parallel walls, a pivot 
which the lock is operated. When the lock 
bolt entering said opening and tapped into 
ing-bolt is thrown forward to fasten the 
the support, said bolt having a rectangular 
shackle or bow, the enlarged circular open 
portion, which may be revolved in the en 
ings 16, forming part of the lateral openings 
larged opening in the bolt-head when the 
which receive the studs 18, are left vacant, 
locking-bolt is withdrawn and is prevented 
the studs now having passed into the nar 
from turning when the bolt is shot and the 
rectangular portion of the pivot-bolt brought 
rower parts of these openings. If a radial 
line is drawn from the center of the bolt 
between the parallel walls of the narrower 
head through the center of either enlarged 
opening, and means for locking the bolt-head 
portion 16 it will coincide with one of a series 
in its locked position, substantially as de 
of characters inscribed upon the outer face 
scribed. 
or periphery of the bolt-head. If the dial 25 
2. In a permuting-lock, the combination, 
is turned until the character coinciding with 
with a suitable support and a shackle, of a 
the ball-chamber uncovered by the opening 
bolt-head having a locking-bolt projecting 
in the permuting-tumbler is brought into 
from it, said head being guided by studs ris 
ing from the support into openings in the 
vertical line with the character on the bolt 
bolt-head having such length that when the 
head which coincides with the center of either 
circular or enlarged opening 16, and if the 
locking-bolt is shot the forward ends of said 
openings are unoccupied, a dial superimposed 
rotary tumbler is then turned until the point 
or index thereon is brought into the same 
upon the bolt-head and having chambers 
line the ball will pass through the openings 
containing loose balls, a permuting-tumblel 
in both tumblers and drop from the chamber 
connected with the dial, and a rotary tumbler, 
in the disk into one of the said openings. 
both interposed between the dial and bolt 
This ball, lying in front of the stud 18, pre 
head, the former being adjustably connected 
vents the bolt from being retracted. When 
with the dial and each having openings to 
the padlock is to be unlocked, it is turned 
register with each other, with one of the ball 
until the dial is undermost, and the parts be 
chambers in the dial, and with one of the 
ing brought into the position already de 
openings in the bolt-head as the rotary tum 
scribed, the ball drops back into its chamber 
bler is turned and the dial adjusted, substan 
and the locking-bolt is released. 
tially as described. 
It will be understood that when the per 
3. In a permuting-lock, the combination, 
muting-dial is so arranged as to disclose a 
with a body portion having a support and a 
ball-chamber through one of the openingsly 
shackle, of a bolt-head movable on the latter 
ing near the central opening of the dial the 
and provided with openings to receive studs 
rising from the support, a dial having cham 
latter must be turned until the outer letter 
or character coinciding with said chamber 
bers containing loose balls, a permuting-tum 
shall register with a mark 40 upon the cen 
bler having one or more openings detachably 
ter of the bar carrying the locking-bolt, and 
connected to and turning with the dial to 
in like manner the index or point on the ro 
cause either opening to coincide with one of 
tary tumbler must be brought into alignment 
the chambers, a rotary tumbler having one or 
with a character on the bolt-head, by which 
more similar openings, and a pivot-bolt paSS 
the opening 24 in the rotary tumblershall be 
ing centrally through the dial and tumblers 
brought directly over the enlarged circular 
and through an elongated opening in the bolt 
portion 14 of the central opening in the bolt 
head, said opening having an enlarged and a 
head. When the permuting-tumbler is ar 
narrower portion to permit the movement of 
ranged to deliver the ball from the dial 
the head and to allow the attachment and de 
through the opening 34, the delivery-opening 
tachment of the pivot-bolt when the bolt is 
in the rotary tumbler will not coincide with 
drawn and to prevent said detachment when 
the point or projection 20, but lies about 
the bolt is shot, substantially as described. 
ninety degrees from it. By knowing this the 
4. In a permuting-lock, the combination, 
operator can easily tell how to adjust the ro 
with a shackle and a bolt-head movable upon 
tary tumbler ill order to cause the opening 24 
studs standing in elongated openings therein, 
to coincide with the opening 14 in the cen 
of a dial pivoted over the bolt-head and con 
tral line of the disk, and this can be accom- ! centric therewith when the bolt is shot, said 
plished simply by turning the tumbler until 
dial containing chambers having balls stored 
Said opening is brought into position and 
loosely therein, and tumblers arranged inter 
then noting upon the exterior of the bolt-head 
mediate of the dial and bolt-head, one of said 
what figure or character the point, or index 
tumblers turning independently of the dial 
and both having openings for the escape of 
20 coincides with. 
- 
- 
75 
So 
95 
IOO 
II d 
II5 
I25 
4 
451,356 
25 
6. In a permuting-lock, the combination, 
with a shackle and a movable bolt-head carry 
ing the locking-bolt and provided with open 
ings receiving the pivot-bolt, of studs guiding 
the bolt-head, a dial centrally mounted on the 
pivot-bolt and having chambers set at differ 
ent distances from its center and detachably 
connected to said dial, a rotary tumbler turn 
ing upon the same axis with the dial and hav 
ing openings registering successively with one 
or the other of the chambers in the dial, and 
balls loosely placed in said chambers, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and affixed my seal in the presence 
of two subscribing witnesses. 
LEMUEL II. AYRES. 
Witnesses: 
J. II. BOWLING, Jr., 
C. M. DUFFY. 
L. S. 
5 
O 
the balls into one of the openings in the bolt 
head when the bolt is shot, substantially as 
described. 
5. In a permuting-lock, the combination, 
With a shackle and a bolt-head sliding on a 
support to shoot and withdraw the locking 
bolt and having openings on each side of its 
center to receive rigid studs, of a dial arranged 
to turn concentrically with the bolt-head when 
the bolt is shot, said dial having chambers 
containing loose balls, a tumbler consisting 
of a thin metallic plate having a stud detach 
ably connected to the dial and turning with 
it and having openings, either one or more of 
Which may be made to coincide with one or 
the other of the ball-chambers, and an inde 
pendent tumbler having differently-arranged 
openings, one of which may be caused to reg 
ister with that in the other tumbler and with 
One of the openings in the bolt-head, substan 
tially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451456.txt	(No Model.) 
F. G. CORNING. 
SAND BOX, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 451456, 
 
Patented May 5, 1891. 
AITORNEY 
(No Model.) 
No. 451456, 
F, G, CORNING, 
SAND BOX, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 5, 1891, 
P==================================,BYZZ 
SN? 
N?N 
ZZZZZZZZZ 
SSS 
2 2 
 
 
WITNESSES 
NVENTOR 
ATTORNEY 
The Nonis PETEis co, PHOTO-LITHo, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK G. CORNING, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SANDBOX 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,456, dated May 5, 1891. 
Application filed February 4, 1891, Serial No. 380,218, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FREDERICK G. CORNING, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
yented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Sand-Boxes, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
Myinvention relates to means for distribut 
ing sand upon street-railways or other tracks 
or surfaces automatically for the purpose of 
Promoting traction. The invention applies 
either to motor-driven street cars or motors, 
or horse-cars requiring a sanded track to ren. 
der the brakes effectual. 
The object of my invention is to securea pos 
itive delivery of the sand in a measured quan 
tity, Whether in a dry condition or in a slightly 
damp or partially frozen condition, as fre 
gllently incident to its use upon street-cars. 
Heretofore mechanical delivery has been ef 
fected by means of devices acting in a com 
mon direction with the descent of the Sand, 
having converging surfaces engaging with 
the Sand, that move in the direction in which 
they converge. The objectionable feature 
thus arises that any solid objects or caked por 
tions of the sand will become jammed between 
the movable parts and render the machine 
inoperative. 
My invention consists in a sand-box pro 
vided With a bladed wheel beneath the body 
of Sand, rotating in a plane substantially at 
right angles to the line, of force exerted by 
gravity and controlling the delivery. The 
Wheel is not essentially horizontal, but in in 
stances. Where the sand may be fed at an an 
gle to the verticle the plane of the wheel may 
Yary, correspondingly to preserve a perpen 
dicular relation to the line of pressure. The 
blades of the wheel are radial and between 
them pockets are formed extending through 
the Wheel to the bottom of the box. The bot 
tom of the box is perforated to permit the 
passage of the sand through the wheel to the 
chute. A plowing or cutting surface is con 
stituted by the radial blades of the wheel, in 
cluding the entire, or nearly the entire, cross 
Sectional area of the sand, whereby the weight 
of the latter, or the majorportion thereof, rests 
So llpon the said plowing-surface, and is fed 
thereto by gravity, 
My invention also embodies certain vari 
- 
45 
25 
35 
ous novel features of improvement contribut 
ing to the operation of the device, such as Will. 
be hereinafter fully described and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts throughout the several 
views, Figure 1 is a vertical sectional elevation 
taken on the line acac of Fig.2, showing a portion 
of a street-car provided with my improved 
sand-box. Fig. 2 is a plan view of Fig.1, show 
ing the bed-frame of the car, the floor thereof 
being removed. Fig. 3 is a cross-section of 
Fig. 2, taken on the line y J. 
Fig. 4 is an en 
larged vertical section taken on the line 2 2, 
Fig. 5, certain modifications of the form of 
box. shown in the first three figures being 
therein illustrated; Fig. 5, a horizontal section 
of Fig. 4, taken on the line aca', the wheel 
being removed; and Fig.6, a plan yiew of the 
wheel adapted to the box shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 
Fig. 7 is an enlarged vertical section of the 
box, illustrating further modifications; Fig. 
8, a plan view of Fig. 7, the wheel being re 
moved; Fig. 9, a plan view of the wheel sepa. 
rated from the box; and Fig. 10, a vertical 
cross-section on the line y' y' of Fig. 7. Fig. 
11 is an enlarged vertical section taken on 
the line 2'2' of Fig. 12, showing a further 
modification; Fig. 12, a horizontal section of 
Fig. 11, taken on the line acac; and Fig. 13, 
a plan view of the wheel in Fig. 11 shown 
Separately. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, A represents 
the floor of the car; B, the platform; C C, the 
bed-sills; and D, Fig. 3, the longitudinal seats 
within the car. E represents the track and 
F the truck-wheels, to which either motive 
power or brakes or both are applied. His 
the sand-box attached to and extending 
through the floor of the car, being open at the 
top. The sand-box II is preferably of cylin 
dric form, whereby the circular wheel coin 
ciding there with occupies the entire cross-sec 
tional area of the body of sand resting thereon. 
A similar box. His placed upon either side of 
the car, as illustrated in Figs. 2 and 3, and 
these boxes may be filled by lifting the seats 
D or sections, thereof hinged at d. J J are 
chutes through which the loose sand gravi 
tates in small quantities after being delivered 
from the box. K is the rotary-bladed wheel, 
represented throughout the views as occupy 
55 
75 
95 
OC 
451,456 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ing a horizontal plane of rotation, or that sub 
stantially perpendicular to the pressure of 
the S&nd. The wheel IV is pivoted upon the 
Vertical shaft , having supports at the top 
and bottom of the box, or in bearings other 
Wise Suitably arranged. The wheel may be 
rotated by means of this shaft, or by means 
of a circular flange upon the wheel extend 
ing through the sides of the box provided 
with Suitable gear-teeth. 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 3 I illustrate a circular 
rack (l, having gear-teeth on its lower sur 
face with which a pinion to engages to drive 
the Same. The box proper or cylinder II is 
Secured to the floor of the car, while the lower 
portion or funnel J of the chute J is sup 
ported in brackets i, attached beneath the 
floor, So that the upper and lower portions of 
the device, although separated by the pe 
ripheral projection of the wheel, remain rigid 
With reference to one another. 
As one suitable means of producing and 
controlling the delivery of the sand, I have 
illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 a hand-crank 
C, mounted upon the shaft c, located upon 
the dash-board of the car in a position acces 
sible to the driver or other attendant. Rota 
tion is transmitted thence to the shafts c' c', 
bearing the respective pinions b. The shaft 
c rotates the shaft c through bevel-gears 
d, and the shaft crotates the shaft c' through 
bevel-gears e. 
As seen in plan view in Fig. 2 I have indi 
cated spiral blades upon the wheel or those 
disposed at an angle to the radii, whereby 
When the Said wheel is rotated in the direc 
tion indicated by arrows a tendency to move 
the Sand from the center of the wheel toward 
its circumference or the position having the 
greater range of motion is created. The same 
effect is also produced by raising the center 
of the wheel or giving its upper surface a cone 
shape or conoidal form, as indicated in Figs. 
1, 4, 7, and 11. 
Further details pertaining to the character 
of wheel illustrated in Fig. 1 are more fully 
shown in Figs. 4, 5, and 6. 
It will be here 
observed that I employ two outlets f in the 
bottom of box II of sectoral form correspond 
With the Sectoral shape of the pockets in the 
wheel between the bladess thereof. A single 
Openingf, however, may be employed, or any 
plurality thereof, without regard to shape or 
position, provided they are located eccentri 
cally to the wheel. 
In order to close the outlets to prevent the 
escape of sand when the wheel is at rest, I pro 
vide One or more covers (1 on the wheel or a 
bridge L on the box, to be brought or located 
vertically coincident with the outlet or outlets 
f. In order to confine the sand the stoppage 
of the wheel K in the construction of device 
illustrated in Figs. 1 to G, inclusive, is invari 
ably effected at the point of rotation at which 
the covers or WebS g are coincident with the 
outlets f. Such point of rotation occurring 
Simultaneously with the wheels on hoth sides 
of the car is indicated by a suitable dial and 
index i. Fig.1, upon the crank ( or shaft there." 
of visible to the operator. In order to prevent 
the rotation of the sand bodily within the cy 
lindric box when the wheel K is turned pro 
vide vertical parallel ridges i'adjacent thereto 
above the same, having any suitable length, 
depth, or position whereby to permit the vel 
tical motion of the sand but oppose its hori" 
Zontal rotation. In reference to this function 
the radial walls L* in Fig. 12 are to be re 
garded as the equivalent of the blades j'. 
In Fig. 4I illustrate a further feature of my 
invention, consisting in diverging the Walls of 
the box from the top thereof toward the bot 
tom, whereby a tendency is created to release 
the sand as it descends, especially when damp 
or congealed in a united mass. The pressure 
of the entire weight of the sand upon the 
Wheel is thus insured. 
In Figs. 7, 8, and 10 I illustrate a single 
opening f and a sector-shaped bridge over 
hanging a portion of the wheel above the said 
opening. The bridge L prevents the escape 
of the sand from the box when the wheel 
IX is at rest irrespective of its position of 
stoppage, and to this end the circumfer 
ential breadth of the bridge is made Sufi 
ciently in excess of that of the opening f to 
close the pockets ' when above the outlet, as 
indicated in Fig. 10. In this instance the webs 
g in Fig. 6 may obviously be omitted. The 
upper face of the bridge L is provided with 
inclined surfaces l, as clearly seen in Fig. 10, 
designed to lift and partially free the sand 
from the blades S as they pass under the 
bridge, contributing thereby to freedom of 
rotation. I also illustrate in Figs. 7 to 10, in 
clusive, a modification in the construction of 
the box and wheel, whereby a convenient 
means of driving the latter is attained. To 
this end I provide a ring M, having an inte 
rior annular groove or recess into which the 
rim in of the wheel projects, revolving freely 
therein, but forming a joint sufficiently tight 
to prevent the escape of sand. The rim mis 
toothed throughout its circumference, as in 
dicated by broken lines in Fig.9, and an open 
ing n is provided at a suitable portion of said 
ring, within which a driving-pinion 0 engages 
with the said toothed rim to propel the wheel. 
In Figs. 11, 12, and 13 I illustrate a sectoral 
bridge L', having a similar function to that 
shown in Fig. 7, and moreover provided with 
vertical walls L', extending from the margins 
of the bridge upward to the top of the box, 
whereby the mass of Sand gravitates unob 
structed between perfectly-parallel walls or 
walls diverging from the top toward the bot 
tom of the box, as described with reference to 
Fig. 4. I also extend the vertical walls above 
the bridge to cover the space vertically above 
the hub of the wheel, as indicated at I in 
EigS. 11 and 12, causing the Sand to rest en 
tirely upon the effective plowing-surface of 
the wheel. The vertical walls L* also serve 
to prevent the sand rotating bodily with the 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
I o5 
IO 
I I5 
1 25 
I 30 
 
451,456 
3 
O 
25 
wheel. As seen in Fig. 13, the rim of the 
wheel is omitted, leaving the pockets thereof 
Open at the circumference, and the chute J 
extends to a point opposite the circumference 
of the wheel, as indicated at p, Fig.11. Thus 
it will be seen that the sand may be delivered 
through an opening or openings in the box 
located at any suitable position in the lower 
portion thereof other than the bottom, pro 
vided such openings are below the level of the 
impinging surface of the wheel, whereby the 
sand shall pass through the pockets between 
the blades to find its exit. 
The wheels illustrated in Figs. 4 and 11 are 
designed to be driven by means of their shafts 
l; by application of suitable gearing or rotat 
ing mechanism. The upper edges of the 
wheel-blades are preferably knife-shaped, so 
as to plow or cut the body of sand impinging 
thereon. When damp or caked by partial freez 
ing and granulate it or grind it off prepara 
tory to delivery through the opening or open 
ings f. 
In operation the wheel K may be rotated in 
either direction with like effect, and, having 
the full area of its upper face or the major 
portion thereof exposed to the body of sand 
impinging thereon, the ridges of the blades 
plow through the material, filling the pockets 
of the wheel, which are discharged succes 
sively as they pass over the opening or open 
ings f 
In the absence of the bridge L the weight 
of the column of sand above the opening or 
openingsf, when the same are exposed, assists 
in effecting the discharge by direct pressure. 
When a bridge constructed as shown in 
Figs. 7, 8, and 10 is employed, its upper sur 
face or ridge tends to oppose the rotation of 
the body of sand, or while permitting it to ro 
tate to a certain extent up and over the in 
clined sides l will constantly agitate and aid 
to break up the mass when moved by the 
wheel. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of a cylindric sand-box, 
a discharge-opening at or near the bottom 
5o thereof, and a radially-bladed wheel equal in 
35 
45 
diameter to that of the box occupying a plane 
of rotation substantially at rightangles to the 
line of force exerted by the pressure of the 
sand intermediate between the same and the 
Oltlet. 
2. The combination, with a sand-box pro 
vided with a perforated bottom, of a perfo 
rated wheel interposed between the bottom 
of the box and the body of sand. 
3. The combination, with a sand-box pro 
vided with a perforated bottom, of a perfo 
rated wheel occupying a plane of rotation 
substantially perpendicular to the direction 
of pressure of the sand and plowing-ridges 
upon the wheel impinging upon the Sand. 
4. The combination of a sand-box pro 
vided with a perforated bottom and a perfo 
rated wheel occupying a plane of rotation 
substantially parallel to the bottom, provided 
with radiating cutting-ridges impinging upon 
the sand. 
5. The combination of a sand-box, a gravity 
outlet, a wheel interposed between the body 
of sand and the outlet, having sectoral perfo 
rations, and a sectoral bridge above the out 
let, for the purposes described. 
6. The combination, with a cylindric sand 
box, of outlets at or near one end thereof, a per 
forated wheel occupying a plane of rotation 
substantially perpendicular to the axis of the 
cylinder, said wheel provided with radial 
blades, and stationary blades or Walls upon 
the cylinder parallel with the axis thereof, 
adjacent the wheel, for the purposes de 
Scribed. 
7. A sand-box of sectoral shape in CrOSS 
section provided with a substantially hori 
zontal bladed wheel fitting the arc of the Sec 
tor and exposed to the pressure of the sand 
at the bottom of the box, and an outlet be 
neath the portion of the wheel not included 
beneath the body of sand, but divided there 
from between the vertical planes of the radial 
walls of the sectoral box, for the purposes 
described. 
FREDERICK G. CORNING. 
Witnesses: 
M.J. SPENCER, 
WILLIS WAN WALKENBURGH. 
55 
65 
75 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451556.txt	(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet . 
B, HALLETT, 
COIN OPERATED LOCKING MECHANISM, 
No. 45,556. 
Patented May 5, 1891. 
Invenfor: 
per % 
fertie Haldezz. 
Attorney. 
Witresses: 
-17.2%-67 
(7.4 of (24 kg 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
B. HALLETT. 
COIN OPERATED LOCKING MECHANISM, 
No. 451,556, 
Patented May 5, 1891. 
   
 
 
| 
 
 
 
 
 
co (4-67. 
L 
I 
 
 
is 
s s 
ls AEIN 
SRI. 
ISHESH 
ISHER 
  
 
 
 
S. 
Y N e 
Invenfor 
Aertze HaZZett 
PA272 2. / 
Azzorney. 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, photo-Litro, washington, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
B. HALLETT. 
COIN OPERATED LOCKING MECHANISM, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 451,556, 
Patented May 5, 1891. 
 
SNS2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IBERTIE HALLETT, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
CON - O PERATED LOC KING MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,556, dated May 5, 1891. 
Application filed July 3, 1889, Serial No. 316,480, (No model.) Patented in England July 5, 1888, No. 9,802, and November 3, 
1888, No. 15,917; in France November 21, 1888, No, 194,489 in Germany December 22, 1888, No. 48,505, and September 20, 
1889, No. 52,917, and in Canada, July 8, 1889, No, 31983, 
55 
65 
75 
So 
To Cull, whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, BERTIE HALLETT, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at No. 61 Charlotte Street, Portland Place, 
in the county of Middlesex, England, have in 
vented certain new and Improved Coin-Oper 
ated Locking Mechanism, (for which I have 
obtained the following Letters Patent, viz: 
Great Britain, Nos. 9,802, July 5, 1888, and 
15,917, November 3, 1888; France, No. 194,489, 
November 21, 1888; Germany, Nos. 48;505, 
December 22, 1888, and 52,917, September 20, 
1889, and Canada, No. 31,983, July 8, 1889,) 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improved coin-op 
erated locking mechanism for controlling the 
public use of seals, doors, lids, and the like 
by way of locking them against their being 
used, the locking mechanism being adapted 
for release by pressure brought to bear upon 
a member of it through the coin previously 
introduced into the said mechanism by the 
intending user. 
In order that my invention and the means 
by which the same are to be carried into 
practical effect may be thoroughly under 
stood, I will now proceed to describe them in 
detail, referring in so doing to the accompa 
nying figures, which are to be taken as part 
of this specification and read therewith. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view illustrating 
the application of my invention to a public 
seat-e.g., a park-chair. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
side elevation of the improved locking, and 
releasing mechanism. Fig. 3 is a rear eleva 
tion of parts in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a sectional 
side elevation illustrating a modified con 
struction of rocking lever and curtain. Fig. 
5 is a sectional side elevation of a modified 
form of my invention. Fig. 6 is a rear eleva 
tion of corresponding parts. 
Fig. 7 is a view 
of the side plate and coin-rest. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the two former 
show the chair-seat A as pivoted or hinged to 
the frame A", on part of which-viz., one side 
the case B, containing the locking and releas 
ing mechanism, is fixed. The latter figure 
illustrates the locking and releasing mech 
anism in detail. 
w 
Figs. 1 and 2 show the seat as fast to a rod 
a, one end of which is continued into the in 
terior of B, the case which contains the lock 
ing and releasing mechanism. A returning 
spring b is provided under the chair-seat for 
the purpose of raising the seat after it has 
been used. A counterpoise may be substi 
tuted for a spring. 
C is the money-slit; d, the intending user's 
coin; e, a coin-guide, and F a cranked lock 
ing-lever having its fulcrum at f. The short 
end of this lever furnishes a seat for the coin 
d and has a projection g formed upon it im 
mediately in front of the said seat. His a 
ratchet-wheel fast upon the pivot C. The le 
ver F has a tooth i, which is kept in contact 
with the wheel by the springi, and has also 
a studi K on its side. 
L is a rocking lever having its fulcrum at l. 
Its opposite end engages with a curtain n, at 
tached to the coin-guide e. It will be ob 
served from an examination of Fig. 2 that the 
engagement of the lever L with the curtain n. 
is a Self-adjusting one-that is to say, there 
is a notch in the top of the lever I, into which 
notch the adjacent and bent-down nose of the 
curtain an enters. The notch is larger than 
the said nose, and is wider at its bottom than 
at its top, as shown in Fig. 2, so that the op 
erative connection between the said lever I, 
and the said nose of the curtain n is self-ad 
justing during the motion of the top of the 
lever Lin either direction about its axis. 
N is an eccentric fast upon the end of the 
rod C in a position proper for engaging with 
the surfaces of a cavity in the lever L for the 
purpose of moving it to and fro about its full 
C. 
O is a steadying-pin projecting from the le 
ver L and adapted to the purpose of steady 
ing the coin on its seat. P is a stud upon the 
said lever, so positioned that the stud Kshall 
rise over it for a certain distance and rest 
upon it when the seatis down, for the purpose 
of holding the tooth clear of the teeth of the 
ratchet-Wheel. 
The operation of my invention constructed 
as above described is as follows: The seat A 
being held closed against the intending user 
by the returning-springbin the position indi 
cated by the full lines in Fig. 2, a coin of the 
proper diameteris dropped into the coin-slit C. 
The coin will drop down the guide e onto its 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
95 
OO . 
451,556 
75 
seat, upon which it will restloetween the steady 
ing-pin O and the projection (1, its top being 
embraced by the top of the guide. The seat 
is next pulled forward, when the eccentric N 
on the same pivot as the seat throws the lever 
L to the front, causing the latter to move the 
curtain an and the coin-guide e forward, by 
which motion pressure is brought to bear 
through the coin d upon the projection (1, with 
the result that the lever l is moved on its 
fulcrum against the pull of the springi and 
the tooth i lifted away from the ratchet. The 
seat can then be pulled down into a horizon 
tal position. The full lines of Figs. 2 and 3 
show the relative positions of the several 
parts of the mechanism when the seat is up, 
and the dotted lines of Fig. 2 show the rela 
tive positions when the seat is down. When 
the curtain is moved forward, as above de 
scribed, it closes the coin - slit, thereby pre 
venting the insertion of a second coin while 
the seat is down. The bottom of the case IB 
serves as a till, the size of which may be de 
termined by experience. Access to the till is 
provided for by a suitable locking-door. 
Referring to Fig. 4, which illustrates the 
relative positions of the several parts of the 
mechanism when the seat is down, the con 
nection between the curtain n, and the lever 
L is therein illustrated as a rigid instead of 
a self-adjusting one, as is that illustrated in 
Fig. 2 and as described above with reference 
thereto. This rigidity of connection necessi 
tates both curtain and case-top being arc 
shaped, the respective arcs being struck from 
the axis of the lever L as a center. 
The operation of the mechanism is the same 
as described with reference to Figs. 2 and 3. 
Referring to the modification illustrated in 
Figs. 5, 6, and 7, the quadrant R has two pro 
jections r r formed upon it. These projec 
tions produce a recess adapted to receive the 
coin d when it drops from the coin-slit C. W. 
is a bracket upon the inside face of the case 
side B, adapted to serve as a seat for the coin 
when it is between the projections ' ', as 
shown by Fig. 6. 
N is a pawl pivoted on the screw-pin it, and 
Y is its tooth. The tooth is adapted to en 
gage in the top of the coin-recess under the 
action of the spring ac'. This coin-recess is 
the space between the two projections ' '. 
The pawl N has an extension i?, making a 
right angle with it and projecting from it par 
allel with the coin-recess. The underneath 
edge has two subsidiary extensions ' ' de 
pending from it. These two extensions are 
equidistant from a vertical diameter of the 
coin when the latter is on its Seat, as will be 
seen from an inspection of Fig. G. One of 
them may be omitted, but I prefer that there 
should be a pair. 
The coin d must be of the proper diameter 
i.e, large enough when it is on its seat to pro 
ject above the coin-recess and not too large 
to just pass under the extensions '. 
The operation of the last-described modifi 
cation is as follows: So long as the seat is up 
i. e., in the position illustrated in Fig. 5-the 
coin-recess stands under the coin-slit C and 
the tooth Y in front of it. If the seat be now 
pulled forward without there being a coin of 
the proper diameterin the coin-recess, the tooth 
will be forced into the top of the coin-recess; 
but if a coin be in the position illustrated in 
Fig. 6 it will be pulled under the extensions 
r' and support the pawl, so keeping the tooth 
Yout of the coin-recess until the latter has 
passed the said tooth. 
The accompanying figures illustrate the ap 
plication of my invention to a flap the axis 
of which is horizontal. In applying it to a 
door the axis of which is vertical the neces 
sary modifications will be confined to the po 
sition of the coin chute and guide and the 
shape of the lever to enable it to connect with 
the slide; or instead of modifying the arrange 
ment of the mechanism, as indicated, the axis 
of the door may be connected with that of the 
pivot C by a pair of miter-wheels. 
I wish it to be distinctly understood that 
my invention is not confined to the one appli 
cation illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings and described there with-viz., to the con 
trol of a chair-seat-but is equally applicable 
to the control of a door, lid, or flap of any 
kind adapted to move about an axis, if it is 
required that the Several motions of such 
door, lid, or flap shall be consequent upon the 
prior introduction of a coin or its equivalent 
into a private receptacle containing the mech 
anism which is the subject of my invention. 
I claim 
1. In coin - operated locking mechanism, 
the combination of a Seat adapted to move 
through an arc, a quadrant fixed to the said 
seat, a coin-recess formed in said quadrant, 
coin-slit, Seat for the coin, and a pawl adapted 
to automatically engage in the said coin-re 
cess if the latter is pulled up to it without 
containing a coin of the proper diameter, the 
said pawl having an extension upon its under 
side, by which it can be raised by the coin 
when the latter is pulled against it, as set 
forth. 
2. In coin operated locking mechanism, 
the combination of a chair-seat moving about 
an axis Outside itself, a quadrant fixed thereto 
and adapted to Work backward and forward 
in a closed case, a coin-slit in the said quad 
rant, a coin-shelf adapted to support a coin in 
the said coin-recess, a pawl having a tooth 
adapted to engage in the coin-recess when the 
Seat is pulled for Ward, and also an extension 
adapted to rest upon the top of the coin as 
the said tooth moves over the coin-recess. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 31st day of August, 1SSS. 
3. IAJETI. 
Witnesses: 
22 Southampton. Buildings, London, W. C. 
17 Gracechurch Street, London, E. C. 
IIENRY II. LEIGH, 
WALTER J. SKERTEN, 
9 O 
95 
OC) 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
O 
25 
45 
50 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451656.txt	(No Model.) 
S. DEACON & M.J. WIGHTMAN, 
SOCKET FOR IN CANDESCENT LAMPS, 
No. 451,656, 
Patented May 5, 1891. 
 
3. AS25 s S S 
 
 
 
is 
Saunaging 
S. % . 
NG7. 
N 
t 
E. S 
: 
s 3. 
2 
  
  
3. 
S. 
s 
RG 
I 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
f 
f 
 
 
 
2. 
25 
If 
W 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL DEACON, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, AND MERLE. J. WIGHTMAN, 
OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNORS TO THE THOMSON-HOUSTON 
ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF CONNECTICUT. 
SOCKET FOR INCANDEscENT LAMPs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,656, dated May 5, 1891. 
Application filed March 15, 1890, Serial No. 344,041. (No model.) 
*To all whon, it navy concern: 
Be it known that we, SAMUEL DEACON, of 
Iynn, county of Essex, State of Massachu 
Setts, and MERLE.J. WIGHTMAN, of Hartford, 
Collinty of Hartford, State of Connecticut, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve. 
ments in Sockets for Incandescent Lamps, of 
Which the following is a specification. 
Our invention, relates to certain details of 
construction of the circuit-breaking switch in 
the lamp-circuit, which will be hereinafter set 
forth. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a vertical section online 11 of Fig. 
6. Fig. 2 is a section on the line 22, Fig. 6. 
Fig. 3 is a section on the line 33, Fig. G. Fig. 
4 is an end elevation with the circuit open. 
Fig. 5 is a plan of the disk J. Fig. 6 is a plan 
of the Socket with the lamp removed, and it 
is taken from underneath relatively to the 
previous figures. Fig. 7 shows the switch when 
being operated, and Fig. 8 is a modification. 
Referring to the drawings more particular 
ly, A is an incandescent lamp having the two 
Wires connected to the carbon filament ter 
minating, respectively, in the ring B and the 
Central Socket C. The central socket C is 
Screw-threaded internally and adapted to re 
ceive a screw attached to the socket, by means 
of which the lamp is held in place. 
J is a disk of insulating material set in the 
holder D. On the under side of disk J are at 
tached two U-shaped pieces of metal F and 
H, the latter being inverted and the two being 
insulated from each other by the material of 
the disk. The lower transverse part of piece 
F is attached to the screw L, adapted to enter 
Socket C. The piece F forms a supporting 
frame - Work connecting the disk J and the 
lamp, the latter being also surrounded by the 
usual casing. The piece H has its two legs 
perforated to form a bearing for the insulat 
ing-spindle K, which is turned by the handle 
E. The spring Misattached to the under side 
of the horizontal part of the piece H and ex 
tends parallel therewith. On the end of spin 
dle K is loosely pivoted a rectangular block G, 
which in its normal upright position is main 
tained between the spring M and the ring B, 
forming an electrical connection between the 
two, and thereby closing the circuit to the la limp. 
The block G is adapted to turn with the spin 
dle K, but has considerable slack motion, so 
that the spindle K must be turned a certain 
distance by means of the handle E before it 
engages with the block G, and the two move 
together. This gives to the switch a positive 
snap action, the circuit being broken suddenly 
and completely, so as to prevent arcing. Wal 
rious devices may be employed to obtain this 
loose action between the spindle IX and the 
block G. In Fig. 1 I have shown a pin pass 
ing diametrically through spindle K and en 
gaging with a slot in block G. In this case 
spindle K has the pin near its outer end, and 
the part of the spindle projecting beyond the 
pin passes first through the block G, then 
through the slotted hole in the piece El, the 
latter feature being provided to allow a slight 
vertical play of the spindle, so that the block 
G can always adjust itself between the spring 
M and the ring B. In Fig. 8 the pin is passed 
through the spindle at a point inside of the 
block G. In action the spindle Kis first turned 
a short, distance, when it engages with the 
block G and tends to move it and turn the 
block with it. The block thus assumes the po 
sition shown in Fig. 7, where the spring M is 
raised to a distance from the ring B equal to 
the diagonal line of the rectangular block G, 
and further movement throws the block Ginto 
a horizontal position with a snap movement, 
which completely severs the connection be 
tween spring M and the ring B, as shown in 
Fig. 4. 
The circuit-connections are as follows: The 
two U-shaped pieces Hand F, which are insyl 
lated from each other by the material of the 
disk J, are connected, respectively, to the tWO 
terminals of the wires leading from the Sup 
ply-conductors into the socket, as shown in 
Figs, 1 and 3. These wires are indicated in all 
the figures except Fig. 7, and are marked X 
and Y. The former passes to the screw O, 
Figs, 2 and 3, on one side of the piece F, and 
the latter is connected to the screW R in 
a transverse extension from the piece H, Fig. 
3. When, therefore, the switch is closed, the 
75 
90 
95 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
2 
451,656 
40 
2. The combination, in a lamp-Socket, of tWO 35 
m 
insulated pieces II and F, the latter having 
In eas for attaching one terminal of the lamp 
thereto and the former carrying a spindle pro 
vided with a loose contact-block and adjust 
ing-spring for connecting the said piece to the 
opposite terminal of the lamp. 
3. The combination, with an incan descent 
lamp having its two wires connected, respect 
ively, to concentrie terminals in the lanp-base, 
of the socket containing a switch which is Coll 
structed of two pieces attached to an insulat 
ing-disk, one of said pieces being adapted to 
connect with one of said terminals, while the 
other piece has a spindle and a switch-block 
adapted to connect with the opposite lamp 
terminal and provided with a spring for ad 
justing it between the parts which it con 
neCt.S. 
Signed at Lynn, county of Essex and State 
of Niassachusetts, this 3d day of March, A. D. 
S) (). 
SAMUEL, I) EACON. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. GIBBONEY, 
DU CALD MICKILLOP. 
Signed at Philadelphia, county of Philadel 
phia, State of Pennsylvania, this 10th day of 
March, A. D. 1890. MERLE.J. WIGITMAN. 
Witnesses: 
AIDELINA (). THONISON, 
IERMAN BERC IIOILTZ. 
circuit will be from wire X to the U-shaped 
piece F, to the screw L and socket C, thence 
through the filament of the lan) and back to 
the ring 3, and from the ring 3 it is connected 
5 by the block G. to the spring Mi, to the piece 
l, and thence to the wire Y. 
Myinvention, while consisting in details, dis 
closes a form of lamp socket and switch which 
is exceedingly cheap in construction and e? 
to fective in action and separates the different 
parts of the circuit as far apart as possible in 
the necessarily limited space. It will also be 
seen that one of the lamp-terminals--namely, 
the central socket C--is adapted to connect di 
I5 rectly with the insulated piece F, while the 
other insulated piece II is provided with a 
Switch which bears directly upon the opposite 
lamp-terminal B. It has been heretofore cus 
tomary to provide a third piece adapted to 
2O. connect with one lamp-terminal and receive 
the switch-contact. Our invention dispenses 
with this third piece and its essential insula 
tion and permits the switch to bear directly 
upon the terminal in the base of the lamp. 
What we claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. A lamp-socket switch consisting of a rect 
angular block, a spidle for turning the same 
loosely connected thereto, the said block con 
necting at one side with one terminal of the 
circuit and on the other side with a spring Con 
nected to the opposite terminal and having 
freedom to adjust itself between the two ter 
milials. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451756.txt	J. L. CLOUDSLEY. 
WALUE AND QUANTITY REGISTER FOR GAS METERS. 
Patented May 5, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 451,756. 
 
 
A//77VASSAS, 
74 - 
2. 
26S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN LESLIE CLOUDSLEY, OF WESTMINSTER, ENGLAND. 
VALUE AND QUANTITY REGISTER FOR GAS-METERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,756, dated May 5, 1891. 
Application filed August 5, 1890, Serial No, 861,046, CNo model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN LESLIE CLOUDS 
LEY, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
residing at Smith Square Works, Westmin 
Ster, England, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Value and Quantity 
Registers for Gas-Meters, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact specification. 
This invention relates to gas-meters, and 
has for its object to provide novel mechanism 
for indicating or registering the quantity and 
value of gas flowing through the meter, and 
to render such mechanism susceptible of full 
filling the conditions required if changes oc 
cur in the value of gas, the construction be 
ing such that if a change in the value of gas 
occurs it is only essential to remove a value 
and quantity dial card and substitute there 
for another card bearing the required char 
acters to suit the change in value, whereby I 
entirely avoid disturbing the internal con 
Struction, arrangement, or mode of operation 
of the gear mechanism by which the index 
hands of the registering mechanism are op 
erated. 
The object of my invention is accomplished 
by the features of construction and the com 
bination or arrangement of devices herein 
after described and claimed, reference being 
made to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation showing my in 
proved value and quantity indicator or reg 
ister arranged beneath the ordinary register 
ing mechanism of a gas-meter. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation of the same, and Fig. 3 is a rear 
elevation of the same. 
I do not deem it essential to illustrate an 
entire gas-meter, as such is not essential for 
the proper understanding of my invention by 
those skilled in the art. 
In the drawings, the numeral 1 indicates 
the ordinary registering mechanism of a gas 
meter, comprising the usual dials and index 
hands for reading the meter in the usual man 
ner. The shaft 2, carrying the index-hand 3 
of the hundreds-dial 4, is provided with a gear 
wheel 5, engaging a gear-Wheel 6, mounted 
on a shaft 7, suitably journaied in a frame 8, 
and provided with a pinion 9, which engages 
a slip gear-wheel 10, carried by a shaft 12, 
which projects through the front of the frame 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
S, and is there provided with an index-hand 
13. The gear-wheel 6 meshes into a slip gear 
wheel 14, mounted on a shaft 15, which pro 
jects through the front. of the frame 8 and 
carries an index-hand 16. 
The shafts 12 and 15 are rotated by the 
gear-wheels 10 and 14, through the medium 
of leaf-springs 17 and 18, which are attached 
to the said shafts and have frictional contact 
with the gear-wheels, in such manner that 
during the operation of the register the shafts 
12 and 15 will be turned forward by the fric 
tional contact of the springs with the gear 
wheels 10 and 14; but the shafts can be turned 
backward for the purpose of placing the in 
dex-hands 13 and 16 at zero, without disturb 
ing the gear mechanism. 
The Outer eXtremities of the index-hand 
shafts 12 and 15 are provided with milled 
nuts 19 and 20, for the purpose of permitting 
the prompt and convenient removal of the 
index-hands 13 and 16 from the shafts 12 and 
15, whereby the value and quantity dial-card 
21 can be removed and a fresh card placed in 
Osition, as Occasion may demand, when the 
value of gas is changed. 
The dial-card 21 is struck with two concen 
tric scales, the outer one being provided with 
numerals for indicating quantity from one 
hundred to one thousand, while the inner 
scale is provided with figures, characters, or 
other signs to indicate the value of gas. The 
value-indicating characters or signs are re 
spectively arranged in juxtaposition to the 
numerals which indicate the quantity of gas. 
For example, the signs 3d. 6d. 9d., &c., are 
arranged, respectively, opposite the numerals 
indicating one hundred, two hundred, three 
hundred, &c. 
The dial-card is provided with a supple 
mental dial 22, through the center of which 
projects the shaft 12, which carries the index 
hand 13 for indicating or registering larger 
quantities and Values than the concentric 
scales on the dial-card 21. 
The slip gear-wheel 10 is by its gear mech 
anism with the registering mechanism 1 
caused to make One complete revolution for 
each complete revolution of the shaft 2, which 
carries the index-hand 3 of the hundreds-dial 
4, in consequence of which the index-hand 16 
will indicate or register in harmony with the 
90 
95 
ICO 
451,756 
1. In a gas-meter, the combination, with 
the ordinary registering mechanism, of the 
gear-wheel 6, actuated by said registering 
mechanism, the shafts 12 and 15, carrying the 
index-hands 13 and 16 and provided, respect 
ively, with slip gear-wheels 10 and 14, and 
the value and quantity dial-card carrying a 
supplemental dial 22, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
2. In a gas-meter, the combination, with 
the ordinary registering mechanism 1, of a 
shaft 15, carrying an index-hand 16 and pro 
vided with a slip-gear 14, which is rotated by 
gear connection with said ordinary register 
ing mechanism, and a value and quantity dial 
card detachably secured in rear of the index 
hand for the purpose of permitting the ex 
change of dial-cards to meet the conditions 
required when the value of gas is changed, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a gas-meter, the combination, with 
the ordinary registering mechanism 1, of a 
value and quantity indicator or register con 
sisting of a gear-wheel 6, rotated by the said 
ordinary registering mechanism, a pair of 
shafts 12 and 15, carrying index-hands 13 and 
16 and provided, respectively, with slip-gears 
10 and 14, milled or thumb nuts 19 and 20, 
which detachably secure the index-hands to 
the said shafts, and a value and quantity 
dial-card 21, carrying a supplemental dial 22 
and detachably secured upon the said shafts 
in rear of the index-hands, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name, in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses, this 18th day of July, 1890. 
JOHN LESLIE CLOUDSLEY. 
45 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
W. W. BENNETT, 
WM. B. LAMPARD. 
IO 
index-hand 3 of the hundreds-dial 4. In other 
words, if one hundred feet of gas is registered 
by the hundreds-dial 4 and its index-hand 3, 
a hundred feet will be indicated or registered 
by the dial-card 21 and index-hand 16. 
The shaft 12 carrying the index-hand 13 
for the Supplemental die 22 is caused to make 
one complete revolution for every ten revo 
lutions of the shaft 2, which carries the index 
hand 3 of the hundreds-dial 4-that is to say, 
the shaft 12 makes one complete revolution 
for each ten thousand feet of gas registered 
by the ordinary registering mechanism 1. 
The dial-card is made of paper, card-board, 
or some suitable material which is sufficiently 
thin to fulfill the conditions required, and in 
practice a series of dial-cards will be pro 
vided, so that if the value of gas is changed 
a dial-card can be quickly and conveniently 
removed and the appropriate dial-card placed 
in position. 
The dial-card 21 is provided with and car 
lies the Supplemental dial 22, and by reason 
of the milled or thumb nuts 19 and 20, the 
dial-card can be placed in and removed from 
position whenever occasion requires. This is 
an important feature of my invention in that 
it renders the value and quantity register sus 
ceptible of meeting the contingency of 
changes in the value of gas without disturb 
ing the internal construction, arrangement, 
or mode of operation of the gear mechanism 
by which the index-hands are operated. 
In practice it is intended to place an adhe 
sive Seal or stamp upon the value and quan 
tity register in some proper manner to pre 
vent consumers from tampering with the reg 
ister; but as this constitutes no part of my 
invention, I do not deem it essential to illus 
trate the same. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451856.txt	(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
W. E. ELAM, R. S. THOMAS & S. W. HARDWICK. 
Patented May 5, 1891. 
COTTON CONVEYING AND CLEANING APPARATUS, 
No. 451,856. 
 
W7TWESSES 
(ef (2.7% ee/ 
26. 
2.72. 
ANVENTORS 
Y 
C2-st 
s. 
As et.21 
2%22 A1 TTORNEY. 
THE NoRRis picteRs co., Photo-LTHo., washington, D. c. 
 
ITF 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. E. ELAM, R. S. THOMAS & S. W. HARDWICK. 
COTTON CONWEYING AND CLEANING APPARATUS, 
No. 451,856. 
Patented May 5, 1891. 
Z3.7. 2. 
W77 WESSES 
36 27024 eear 
fe 
f 
 
4E NORR's PereRs co, Photo-LTHo, wasMNation, D. c. 
JAVWENTORS 
4 
f 
2124 
t 
6-deportes 
4 TTORWAFV. 
 
(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
W. E. ELAM, R. S. THOMAS & S. W. HARDWICK. 
COTTON CONVEYING AND CLEANING APPARATUS. 
No. 451,856. 
Patented May 5, 1891. 
M/illnesses; 
 
-4-zee- aoe- 
sta- 
77ven/ors: 
?ets. a-e-le 
(s.20 alleucale1 
Zy 
u/ZZ07/2 ev.S. 
The Norris Perers co. Photo-LiTHo., WASHINGTON, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. EIAM, ROBERT S. THOMAS, AND SAUNIE W. IIARD WICIX, OF 
- DALLAS, TEXAS. 
COTTON CONVEYNG AND CLEANING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,856, dated May 5, 1891. 
Application filed January 6, 1891, Serial No. 376,846, (No model.) 
55 
To all whon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM E. ELAM, 
ROBERT S. THOMAS, and SAUNIE. W. HARD 
WICK, citizens of the United States, residing 
at Dallas, in the county of Dallas and State 
of Texas, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Cotton Conveying and 
Cleaning Apparatus; and we do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters and figures of reference marked thereon, 
Which form a part of this specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
means for taking seed-cotton from any source 
of Supply and for feeding it evenly to one or 
more gins automatically and in such manner 
that neither anygin nor any other part of the 
apparatus can become clogged, however rap 
idly or irregularly cotton is taken from the 
supply. The feeder' now generally em 
ployed to prevent clogging of the gin itself 
transfers the difficulty one step back, where 
it is only less serious than before, and if de 
vices be employed to obviate clogging in the 
feeder the trouble is moved still farther back 
and the congestion occurs in the apparatus 
bringing cotton to the feeder. If such appa 
ratus involves pneumatic tubes the case is 
most serious, for when the accumulation is 
sufficient to arrest the current, notwithstand 
ing its momentum, no attainable blast will 
put the maSS again in motion. For these real 
Sons most of the mechanisms heretofore em 
ployed require skill and judgment in feeding 
the supply apparatus at the wagon or store 
We do away with all difficulty by de 
TOO 
vices for preventing undue accumulation in 
any part of the apparatus and at the same 
time permitting the continuous movement of 
the cotton in all the parts. We also provide 
means for cutting out any gin entirely with 
out interfering with the working of any other 
part, it being sometimes desired to stop a gin 
for repairs or other purposes. 
With our de 
vices no gin has its supply increased by taking 
cotton rapidly from the source of supply, nor 
can any feeder ever be filled to a harmful ex 
tent, No obstruction whatever is placed in 
- 
the devices bringing cotton to the feeders to 
diminish under any circumstances their ca 
pacity to convey all that can enter at the 
point of Supply. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of two gins provided with our devices, 
parts being broken away. Fig. 2 shows the 
apparatus seen from the right in Fig. 1, parts 
being broken away and, the fronts of the 
feeders and of a separator-box resting there 
on being removed. Fig. 3 is a rear elevation 
of the same apparatus, parts being broken 
away and the rear wall of a certain conveyer 
being removed. Fig. 4 is a view like Fig. 2, 
but with a slight modification, used for a 
single gin or the last gin in a series. Fig. 5 
is a side view of a certain plate operated by 
the pressure of cotton accumulating in the 
feeder or in certain cases by an attendant. 
Figs. 6 and 7 show another slight modifica 
tion in construction. 
In the figures wherever the letters appear, 
AA are gins, B B' feeders thereon, and C is 
a pneumatic tube in which an air-current is 
produced by suitable means, as by a Suction 
fan at X. The tube C has a branch C', 
through which surplus cotton, if there be any 
after all the gins are Supplied, may be re 
turned to the main tube and again offered to 
the gins at any convenient time. Above the 
gins cotton is removed out of the tube C by 
devices at D. (Not claimed in this applica 
tion.) Each feeder has the usual conveyer 
belt B', traveling in the direction of the ar 
row, and a toothed roller B', which permits 
only a certain amount of cotton to pass be 
neath it to the gin, the excess being con 
stantly pushed rearward by the teeth. 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 3, which illustrate a com 
bination of two gins, the feeders differ from 
all with which we are acquainted in that they 
are rearwardly open, so that the cotton pushed 
rearward in each by the toothed roller may 
escape freely. In thus combining them we 
place upon the Fear ends of the feeders a sepa 
rator-box E in position to receive through its 
open top cotton dropped from the tube C by 
the devices at D. As the cotton enters the 
box it falls upon the edge of a wedge E.', 
whose inclined faces each normally deflect 
half the cotton to the respective feeders. A 
75 
so 
9 O 
95 
CO 
O 
(5 
3o 
35 
45 
 
o 
plate F is hinged to the edge of the wedge in 
such manner that it may lie upon either in 
clined face or may be swung upward into the 
plane of either, cutting off from the other its 
supply of cotton and throwing the whole into 
one feeder. The plate is held in any desired 
position by friction in its bearings or other 
common expedients. The gin thus cut out 
may then be stopped for repairs or other pur 
poses, while the rest of the apparatus contin 
ues in operation. 
In the rear of the feeders is an endless con 
veyer-belt G, running in a suitable trough or 
box G', contiguous to the feeders and trans 
verse with reference to the conveyell-belts 
therein. The belt G is provided with the 
usual cleats, and its trough or box is cut 
away, so as to communicate with each feeder 
or with the upper and greater portion thereof. 
It follows from this construction that cotton 
delivered to the feeder in excess of the 
amount that can be fed to the gin is pushed 
back out of the feeder by the toothed roller 
and falls into the trough or box, where the 
belt G receives it and deposits it near the 
mouth of the branch C of the pneumatic tube, 
which at some convenient time, when the 
main supply is cut off or diminished, returns 
it to the feeders. 
The various parts of the apparatus may be 
driven in any suitable manne'; but, as illus 
trated, the transverse conveyer-belt is actu 
ated by a belt from the devices at D. It is 
evident that other gins may be added to the 
system. 
The principal advantages may be secured 
for one gin alone or for one gin added to a 
series of two or more if the gin in question 
be provided with the modified construction 
shown in Figs. 4 and 5. In such case the 
trough in the rear of the feeders is open at 
the top, and a plate II is hinged to the devices 
at D and extends downward to the top of the 
feeder, forming a vertical wall at one side of 
the path of the falling cotton. At each end 
of the plate lips H extend into the feeder, 
and through these accumulating cotton, 
pushed back by the toothed-roller, swings the 
whole plate rearward before any undue press 
ure arises, and thus all or a part of the fall 
ing cotton passes directly to the transverse 
conveyer. As the accumulation in the feeder 
diminishes the plate gradually returns to its 
normal position, and thus the amount of cot 
ton entering the feeder is automatically regu 
lated better than it could well be by personal 
supervision. It may at times be desirable to 
stop the supply of cotton to this feeder and 
gin without interfering with the other parts, 
and for this purpose we pivot to the lower 
edge of the plate a bar II'', lying above the 
feeder, and provided with a notch H' to en 
gage a catch H', fixed upon the feeder, when 
the plate has been swung to the position in 
dicated in dotted lines. 
By the modified arrangement of Figs. 6 and 
7 we avoid, when desired, the necessity for 
extending the rear conveyer to the lastfeeder, 
which, therefore, is not open in the rear. In 
this case the last two feeders are provided 
With a separator analogous to that of Fig. 1; 
but the plate 2, corresponding to the plate 
F, SWings upon a rock-shaft 3, mounted upon 
the apparatus above. The last feeder is pro 
vided with a plate or plates 4, mounted upon 
a rock-shaft 5 at right angles to the one above. 
The shafts 35 have respectively rigid arms 
67, and these are connected by a rod 8. Now 
when the plate 4 is swung rearward, in the 
manner already described, the plate 2 obvi 
ously Swings toward the separator and ulti 
mately coinciding with the slope leading to 
the other feeder cuts off the flow to the last 
gin and throws the whole into the preceding 
feeder, whence the surplus, if any, passes to 
the rear conveyer as before. 
What we claim is 
1. A gin-feeder rearwardly open to permit 
the escape of surplus cotton. 
2. A gin-feeder rearwardly open and pro 
vided with means for forcing accumulated 
cotton rearwardly in the feeder. 
3. The combination, with a rearwardly-open 
gin-feeder, of a conveyer located in the rear 
of the feeder in position to receive cotton dis 
charged therefrom. 
4. The combination, with a gin-feeder and 
mechanism supplying cotton thereto, of a 
conveyer in the rear of the feeder, and means 
whereby the pressure of cottom in the feeder 
may deflect the approaching supply to said 
conveyer. 
5. The combination, with a rearwardly-open 
feeder and a conveyer in position to receive 
cotton discharge at the rear of the feeder, of 
a conveyer bringing cotton to the feeder and 
provided with a branch in position to take 
up the cotton delivered by the conveyer first 
mentioned. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
W. E. EIAMI. 
R. S. THOMAS. 
S. W. HARDWICK. 
Witnesses: 
F. C. HERNICHEL, 
II. T. BURNS. 
75 
95 
I OO 
IO5 
O 
2 
451,856 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US451956.txt	(No Model.) 
F, SANDERSON, 
GAME AND ADWERTISING DEWICE, 
No. 45,956. 
 
Patented May 12, 1891. 
t 
ETERS co, Photo-Litho, wastiNGroN, p. c. 
 
8: 
v. 
O 
l 
gh 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK SANDERSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
GAME AND ADVERT SING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 451,956, dated May 12, 1891. 
Application filed January 9, 1891, Serial No. 377,263, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, FREDERICKSANDERSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Game 
and Advertising Device, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to devices into which 
Cards are placed which have pictures, letters, 
Words, or anything to amuse painted or af 
fixed to their exposed surfaces, and which 
cards have their relative positions changed 
at each operation of the device. 
My objects are to provide a construction in 
Which is a strip of thin material attached to 
Wheels, which strip is furnished with hooks 
or clasps specially arranged for the attach 
ment of cards, and which hooks permit the 
ready removal of the cards and the easy in 
Sertion of others when found necessary to 
change the series. 
Another object is to provide a construction 
for the wheels which hold the strips to which 
the cards are attached, so that the wheels will 
turn in either one or both directions, and that 
When placed in series on the same shaft either 
one can be revolved independent of the others, 
or all simultaneously. 
Another object is a stop mechanism which 
is So arranged that when all the wheels are 
rapidly revolved with the shaft and the 
shaft is suddenly stopped the wheels will 
continue their revolution by the momentum 
attained and take different positions rela 
tively than they occupied before the shaft 
Was rotated. 
Still another object is to provide mechani 
cal movements which attach the wheels to the 
shaft so that the wheels cannot stop in their 
revolution exceptin certain relative positions, 
and thus invariably bring the attached cards 
in an exact line, as will be fully explained; 
and, lastly, my object is to so combine the 
mechanism for mixing the cards with a case 
that many amusing games can be played 
with cards having words written or printed 
upon their faces, which, when thrown into a 
row in different positions, can be made to con 
stitute sentences, or pictures of various kinds 
can be exhibited with fancy advertising-cards, 
or ordinary playing-cards be made to assume 
an endless variety of a musing combinations 
- 
by the changed positions of the wheels at 
every operation of the device. 
These objects are attained by the mech 
anism illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which - 
Figure 1 is a front elevation, and Fig.2 an 
end elevation, of the exterior of the device. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical central longitudinal sec 
tion on dotted line c d, Fig. 2, of the case, 
showing the interior with the operative parts 
in elevation. Fig. 4 is a vertical transverse 
section of the case on linea, b, Fig.1, showing 
inside one of the card-wheels in elevation. 
Fig. 5 is part of the left-hand end of operat 
ing-shaft, together with the hubs of the card 
carrying pulleys and the clutches for attach 
ing them to the operating-shaft. Fig.6 is the 
right-hand end of the operating-shaft, Fig. 5, 
to illustrate the stop mechanism. Fig. 7 is the 
stop-wheel; Fig. 8, respectively side and end 
views of part of clutch mechanism; Fig. 9, parts 
of clutch mechanism, as will be described; 
Fig. 10, a spring for holding clutch mechan 
ism in gear; Fig. 11, a central portion or hub 
of one of the card-wheels, spokes, and rim 
broken away. Fig. 12 is a perspective view of 
part of the metal rim to which the cards are 
attached, but here shown in a straight con 
dition; but when in use it is bent around the 
wheels and secured in place. Fig. 13 is a view 
of a modified form of clutch-gearing which 
will be described. 
The drawings from Fig. 5 to Fig. 13 are 
double the scale of Figs, 1,2,3, and 4. 
The case or box. A contains the greatest 
part of the mechanism. 
At B is a window in case A, which is of a 
length and width to expose to view a row of 
cards B, which cards are attached to wheels 
on the inside of the case. The window B is 
filled with a sheet of glass to exclude dust, 
&c. 
At C' is a card, upon which is printed di 
rections for operating the device. 
Referring to Figs. 3 and 4, it will be seen 
that the operative mechanism consists, first, 
of a shaft D, journaled at the ends e and f 
in the ends of case A, the shaft passing 
through the case far enough at both ends to 
receive a hand-crank g. Journaled upon the 
shaft D inside the case are a number of pull 
ley's E, whose rims are separated enough to 
95 
ICC 
IO 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
451,956 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
give ample clearance. The pulleys E are at 
tached to shaft D, so that they can be rotated 
relatively to the ghaft in one direction, as 
shown in Fig. 5, but are provided, also, with 
a modified form of clutch, (shown in Fig. 13.) 
by which they can be rotated relatively to the 
shaft in both directions, when necessary, when 
the device is used for playing games with cards 
or for any other reason. 
I will confine myself in this description to 
the construction shown in Figs. 5, 8, and 9, 
since the principle of operation in both in 
stances is substantially the same. Fig. 8 is 
respectively a side and end view of a cylin 
drical collar F, with a hole F" to fit shaft D, 
Fig. 5, and at one end of Fare shown a number 
of teeth h, which in this instance approach 
the form of a hook. These teeth h register 
as to number with and match as to form with 
teeth h' of sliding sleeve H, Figs. 5 and 9. 
Sliding sleeve H is slotted longitudinally at 
land, leaving two projections i' and i'. Fig. 
11 is an end and side view of hub E' of pull 
leys E. The left side only of this hub is slot. 
ted and has projections to register with the 
slots described for sleeve H, so that the pro 
jections of one operate in the slots of the 
other, the three parts F, H, and hub E' form 
ing a clutch. 
It is necessary part of the time in this de 
vice to hold the teeth h of collar F in gear 
With the teeth in the end of sleeve H until 
the instant when the teeth will be thrown out 
of gear, in the manner as will be described 
hereinafter. Around sleeve II is a collar i, 
and against this collar bears a helical spring 
I, and the other end of this spring bears 
against hub E'. In the drawings, Fig. 5, 
there are three clutches and three pulley 
hubs shown. The first two clutches have the 
spring I in position; but it is removed in the 
third better to show the relative position of 
the operative parts. The collars F are the 
only parts of the clutch system which are 
firmly secured to shaft D, and these pieces 
are usually secured by means of a small rivet 
or pin l, which passes through both collar and 
shaft. Four collars F are shown in Fig. 5, 
and any number can be added in proportion 
to the number of card-pulleys, each pulley 
having its own clutch; but the numbershown 
Will fully illustrate the action of this clutch 
mechanism. Shaft D is shown as broken off 
at the right-hand end, Fig. 5. 
It is obvious that, since sleeve His attached 
to hub E' in the manner shown and de 
scribed, it must revolve with the hub; also, 
that sleeve H can have enough play be 
tween hub E' and collar F to allow of a longi 
tudinal motion of the sleeve greater than the 
depth of teeth h in collar F. It is also ob 
vious that from the position occupied by 
spring I it will slide sleeve Hinto gear with 
collar F, and should shaft D be revolved its 
motion through the described parts would 
cause the pulley-hubs to revolve with shaft D. 
The thin metal strip (shown in Fig. 12) for 
holding the cards is punched at regula in 
tervals with a V or U shaped punch, which 
permits the central portion between the co 
verging cuts to be turned up and form hooks S. 
One-half of these hooks are turned each Way 
and the long space t, dotted line, is for the 
card's position, the ends of the card passing 
under the hooks, which are then closed down, 
holding the ends of the card by friction. The 
metal strips for holding the cards are bent in 
the form of a hoop and are secured one to the 
face of each pulley. 
In the construction shown in the dra Wings 
it is intended to have five wheels E and each 
wheel to be divided into ten spaces at its pe 
riphery for holding cards, thus making a total 
of fifty spaces for cards. 
Figs. 3, 6, and 7 show the stop-wheel J, 
which is firmly secured to shaft ID. This 
stop-wheel has ten notches r around its cir 
cumference. On a line with the vertical cen 
ter and above stop-wheel J is a pawl J, which 
is held in position and slides vertically 
through lug in and through the top of case A. 
A spring n bears against lug in and against 
pino of the pawl and holds the pawl out of 
contact with stop-wheel J. At the left-hand 
end of shaft D, Figs. 3 and 5, is a ratchet 
wheel K, with its pawl p for preventing 
shaft D from being turned but in one direc 
tion; but its action can be dispensed with at 
any time by lifting the pawl up and back 
ward until it falls and hangs in a vertical pO 
sition from its center pin. 
In Fig. 13 the collar F and sleeve H are 
shown with notches u, which are not hook 
shape, as shown by notches h, Figs. 5,8, and 
9; but the bevel on each side is practically 
the same. This form of notch is preferred 
when it is intended to turn shaft D in either 
direction in exhibiting some classes of illumi 
nated cards, in which case the pawl and 
ratchet p K can be entirely dispensed with. 
The operation of this device is very simple. 
IBy means of the hand-crank g the shaft Dis 
turned very rapidly. The collars F, through 
the medium of their clutch connection. With 
hubs E, cause wheels E to revolve with shaft 
D. If now the operator removes his hand 
from crank g and pressure is applied down 
ward upon the button q, the lower end of 
pawl J will engage one of the notches r of 
stop-wheel J and instantly arrest the rotation 
of shaft D. The momentum of wheels E. Will 
cause them to continue in motion by slipping 
the teeth of sleeve H on the bevel of teeth h. 
of collar F against the light pressure of the 
spring I until the friction between the teeth 
brings the wheels to a stop with five cards in 
a row at window B. There are ten notches 
in stop-wheel J, ten teeth h. in collar F to 
match ten teeth in sliding sleeve H, and ten 
spaces around the periphery of the wheels E 
for cards, which all register so that the wheels 
cannot stop in any other position than the 
one where, in this instance, five cards Will 
show in exact horizontal line at the window 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
451,956 
B, Fig. 1, this perfect alignment of the cards 
at each stop of the device being insured by 
the pressure of springs I, which will draw the 
ten teeth of collar F in close connection with 
the teeth of sleeve H, so that should a card 
pass its right position at the window the wheel 
holding it will be drawn backward and be 
forced to assume its proper position to place 
the card in the row. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a game and advertising device, a strip 
of thin metal forming a hoop around the pe 
riphery of wheels E, said hoop being provided 
with hooks at the described intervals, formed 
out of the metal of said hoop in the manner 
described, the hooks forming the beginning 
and ending of each described interval for 
cards having their hooks pointing in opposi 
tion and used in combination with a bent 
card upon the periphery of said wheel, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
2. In a game and advertising device, a se 
ries of card-carrying wheels E, independently 
mounted upon the same shaft, as described, 
in combination with the described series of 
clutches consisting of collars fixed to said 
shaft, said collars having teeth h, which reg 
ister with and operate in combination with 
teeth h', formed at one end of sleeves H, as 
O 
25 
35 
described, said sleeves having a longitudinal 
motion on said shaft greater than the depth 
of teeth h, hub E' of pulleys E, movably con 
nected to sleeves H in the manner described, 
and the springs I, contacting with hubs E 
at one end and sleeves H at the other end 
for the purpose of operating said sleeves, the 
whole operating in combination with a stop 
wheel J and its pawl J', substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. In a game and advertising device, a se- 4o 
ries of card-carrying wheels E, independently 
mounted upon the same shaft, as described, 
all the wheels having the same number of 
cards mounted upon their peripheries, said 
wheels operated by clutches having teeth h. 
and h", said teeth on each clutch equal in 
number to the number of cards mounted upon 
each wheel E, the whole operating in combi 
nation with a stop-wheel J, secured to said 
shaft, said stop-wheel having a pawl J' oper 
ating in notches r, said notches being equal 
in number to the number of cards mounted 
upon wheels E, the whole operating in combi 
nation, substantially as shown and described. 
FREDERICK SANDERSON. 
45 
Witnesses: 
OSCAR SNELL, 
THOMAS W. GILES. 
  
it 
" 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452056.txt	(No Model) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
C. ZIPER NOWSKY, 
APPARATus FOR HEATING BY ELECTRICITY, 
No. 452,056, 
Patented May 12, 1891, 
%xis 
3 SR zz %.S. 
SS 
 
  
 
 
WZ 
  
 
ZZZZZYZZZZZZZZZaa 
  
SY 
 
 
 
 
(e 22222 
2 
C s 
WITNESSES 
3.9% /24.2 
INVENTOR: 
BY 
2-4-6-4-C-C- 
ATTORAVEYS 
 
s-g 
THE NORRIs Pettasco. Photo-Iy -ko., was HINGT3, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 452,056, 
Patented May 12, 1891. 
C. ZIPERNOWSKY. 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING BY ELECTRICITY. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
WITNESSES 
-Y262 26, 
 
INVENTQR 
6.4%22e. r: 
BY 
%-4C 
ATTORNE 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES ZIPERNOWSKY, OF BUDA-PESTH, AUSTRIA-HUNGARY. 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING BY ELECTRICTY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,056, dated May 12, 1891. 
Application filed September 16, 1890. Serial No, 365,196, (No model.) 
To cell, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLESZIPERNOWSKY, 
a Subject of the King of Hungary, residing at 
Buda-Pesth, Austria-Hungary, have invented 
an Improved Method and Device for IIeating 
by Means of Electric Currents, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to heating by means 
of an imperfect contact purposely introduced 
into an electric circuit and the regulation of 
the heat by means of the degree of contact 
obtained. 
Heretofore, so far as I am aware, heating by 
electricity has been obtained in two ways. 
The first by the electric arc, the second by 
means of a body introduced into an electric 
circuit, which presents a relatively greater 
resistance to the passage of the current trans 
mitted than the balance of the circuit within 
which it is included. In the case of the elec 
tric arc there is total separation between the 
electrodes. In the second method there is ab 
solute contact or continuity between the body 
presenting high resistance and the balance of 
the circuit. My improved method may be said 
to stand midway between the two, and I have 
found by experiment that a large degree of 
heat may be obtained by means of an imper 
fect contact and that the heat may be regul 
lated by determining the degree of contact. 
In order to more fully explain my inven 
tion, I have applied the principle to an appa 
ratus for soldering, which I will now proceed 
to describe. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate my invention, similar letters of reference 
indicate like parts. 
Figure I is a view in elevation of a solder 
ing apparatus such as may be used for Seal 
ing cans, &c. At the bottom of the design 
the leading-in wires are shown. Fig. 2 is a 
view of the apparatus in Vertical section. Fig. 
3 is a vertical section of the soldering end of 
the apparatus and shows a removable con 
tact-point. Fig. 4 is a similar section show 
ing the soldering-point removable. Fig. 5 is 
a similar section showing the soldering-point 
made in circular form and provided with three 
contact-points arranged concentrically. Fig. 
6 is a transverse section through Fig. 5. Fig. 
7 is a vertical elevation and section of a Stove 
for heating a soldering-iron, and is shown con- point may be changed at Will. 
nected in the secondary circuit of a trans 
former, which is connected to an alternating 
current device. Figs. 8 and 9 are diagrams, 
respectively, showing heating devices located 
in the secondary circuit of transforming de 
vices arranged in multiple of main conductors 
conveying an alternating current and heating 
devices arranged in multiple of main con 
ductors conveying a direct current. 
In the drawings, A is a tubular metallic 
body provided with a solid soldering-point B. 
This tubular body is provided with perfora 
tions C, for a purpose which will be herein 
after described. At one side of this tubular 
body is attached a similar tubular portion, 
which forms the handle D, having a wooden 
envelope E and perforated at F. 
The soldering portion A and handle D are 
connected to one of the leading-in wires G by 
means of a metallic connector H. Located 
within the tubular portion A is a tubular por 
tion I of smaller diameter than A and at 
tached to or forming a part of its outer end and 
near to the soldering portion B is a contact 
point J, which may be made of the same ma 
terial from which the tube I is made-that is 
to say, iron or any other conducting material, 
but preferably of any metal, such as hard 
steel, which is not easily fusible by heat. 
Near the right-hand end of the tube I is a 
collar K, over which and around the tube I is 
placed a helical spring L, which bears at One 
end upon the collar K and the other end upon 
the insulating-cap M, which is secured on the 
tube A, so that by rotating the cap M the de 
gree of contact between the contact-point J 
and soldering portion B may be determined. 
The tube I has a sliding contact with the 
tube N, located in the tube D, and which is 
connected to the second leading-in Wire O. 
The tubes A aid D are insulated from each 
other by means of the insulating-rings P, 
which may be made of any insulating mate 
rial, such as asbestus, which will resist heat. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown the contact-point J 
as removable for the purpose of allowing its 
replacement or removal when destroyed in the 
course of time. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown the soldering end B 
of the tube A removable, so that different sizes 
of soldering-point or character of Soldering 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
OO 
 
452,056 
7 o 
75 
2 C. 
25 
5 used. 
Io iron T. 
In Fig. 5 I have shown a circular soldering rent employed, provided of cotli'se that the 
requisite amount of current be used. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. An apparatus for heating by electricity, 
comprising two conducting bodies so arranged 
relatively to each other that an imperfect con 
tact of high resistance shall exist between 
them and said bodies included in the circuit 
of an electrical conductor. 
2. An apparatus for heating by electricity, 
comprising two or more conducting bodies SO 
arranged relatively to each other that two or 
more imperfect contacts of high resistance 
shall exist between them and said bodies in 
cluded in the circuit of an electrical COn 
ductor. 
3. An apparatus for heating by electricity, 
comprising two conducting bodies so arranged 
relatively to each other that an imperfect con 
tact of high resistance shall exist between 
them, means for regulating the degree of Con 
tact between said bodies, and means for COn 
necting said bodies in the circuit of an elec 
trical conductor. 
4. An apparatus for heating by electricity, 
comprising two conducting bodies so arranged 
relatively to each other that an imperfect Con 
tact of high resistance shall exist between 
them, an inclosing casing for said bodies, 
means for regulating the degree of contact 
between said bodies, and means for connect 
ing said bodies in the circuit of an electrical 
conductor. 
5. An electical soldering device comprising 
a body portion, a soldering portion connected 
to one terminal of an electrical conductor, a 
tube or rod provided with a contact-point in 
cluded within said body portion, but insulated 
therefrom, and connected to the other termi 
nal of the electric circuit. 
6. An electrical Soldering device comprising 
a body portion, a soldering end connected to 
one terminal of an electric circuit, a tube pro 
vided with a contact-point included within 
said body portion, but insulated there from, 
and connected to the other terminal of the 
source of electricity, and means for effecting 
the adjustment of the contact-point relatively 
to the soldering end. 
7. An electrical soldering device comprising 
two concentric tubes, one within the other, 
the outer of which is provided with a solder 
ing end and handle and the inner of which 
is provided with a removable contact-point, 
and means for effecting the adjustment of the 
contact-point, and Said two conductors re 
spectively connected to the terminals of a 
Source of electricity. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
portion B and three contact portions J, so that 
a greater degree of heat may be obtained than 
is possible where a single contact-point is 
In Fig. 7 I have shown what may be called an 
electrical stove, which consists of the base 
Q, Standard R., gravitally-acting adjustable 
contact-pointJ, and support for the soldering 
U is the soldering-iron, and Wa sec 
Ondary transformer, having the primary and 
Secondary circuits 10 and 20 included in the 
base of the stove and connected with the 
main circuit 30 of the dynamo 40. It will be 
observed that the secondary circuit 20 has one 
terminal connected to the contact-point J and 
the other terminal to the support for the Sol 
dering-iron T, and that the stove itself is ar 
ranged in multiple of the main circuit. 
In Fig. S I have shown three transforming 
devices in multiple of the main circuit 30. 
In Fig. 9 I have shown two circuits 50 in 
multiple of the main circuit 30, and two cir 
cuits 60 in multiple of each of said circuits 
50, in which are located heating devices A. 
In practice any number of heating devices 
may be arranged as shown in Figs. S and 9. 
As I have previously stated, the heat ob 
tained is due entirely to the resistance of the 
imperfect contact obtained. It will readily 
be understood that where the tubes of con 
ducting material and the contact-point J are 
forced into contact with the part B no heat 
Will result when the quantity of current trans 
mitted is within the conducting capacity of 
the point J, and, further, that if the point J 
be brought into imperfect contact without 
increasing the quantity of current transmit 
ted considerable heat will be evolved and 
that the degree of heat evolved will be in 
proportion to the resistance of the imperfect 
Contact. 
The perforations C, F, and F are provided 
for keeping the tubes A and D cool by al 
lowing the egress of the heated air between 
the tubes A and I and E and N. 
One great advantage of the construction 
shown in Figs. I to (, inclusive, is due to the 
fact that the heat is evolved within the ap 
little heat is lost 
by radiation. 
I do not limit myself in any wise to the 
Construction shown and described in the 
drawings, as my improved method of heating 
may be applied in many different ways and 
to all classes of apparatus where a consider 
able degree of temperature is required. 
I have mentioned in this specification that 
in the case of the stove the imperfect contact 
occurred in the secondary circuit of the con 
verter, whose primary was connected to a 
Source of electric energy. 
I do not limit myself to the employment of 
an alternating current, as it will be evident 
65 to any one skilled in the art to which this in 
vention belongs that the heating results will 
be obtained irrespective of the class of cur 
CIARLES ZIPIERNOWSKY. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. II. BENJAMIN. 
OTTO. T. BLATHY. 
So paratus itself, and that very 
35 
45 
55 
9 O 
95 
OC, 
O 
II 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452156.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WALTER H. BAGSHAW, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS. 
COM B. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,156, dated May 12, 1891. 
Application filed October 13, 1890, 
Serial No, 367,937, (No model.) 
To all lifton it inclf concern. 
Be it known that I, WALTER H. BAGSHAW, 
of Lowell, in the county of Middlesex, State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Combs, of which 
the following is a description sufficiently full, 
clear, and exact to enable any person skilled 
in the art or Science to which said invention 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of my improved 
toilet-comb attached to the supporting-chain, 
and Fig.2 a side elevation of the same, show 
ing a modification in the formation of the slot. 
Like letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the different figures of the 
drawings. 
My invention relates especially to toilet 
combs which are adapted to be secured to a 
cord or chain in convenient position for use 
before a looking-glass; and it consists in cer 
tain novel features hereinafter fully set forth 
and claimed, the object being to produce a 
simpler, cheaper, and more effective device of 
this character than is now in ordinary use. 
The nature and operation of the improve 
ment will be readily understood by all con 
versant with such matters from the following 
explanation. 
In the drawings, A represents the comb con 
sidered as a whole. The comb is preferably 
constructed of metal, and comprises a back d, 
in which parallel metallic teeth fare secured 
in the usual manner. A longitudinally-ar 
ranged rod g is secured to the backd, the ends 
of said rod being bent downward and passed 
a 
through the extreme ends of the comb-back, 
as shown by dotted lines 
in Fig. 1. This 
forms a slot or groove ) on the back of the 
comb. The chain B is secured by a ring p on 
the rod g and is fitted to slide thereon, the 
opposite end of the chain being attached to a 
screw-eye q, disposed in any convenient posi 
tion. By attaching the comb to a chain or 
cord, as described, it will readily slip through 
the ring p, so that it may be conveniently 
used with either hand, the ring falling read 
ily to the lower end of the slot as the comb is 
passed from one side of the person to the other. 
In Fig. 2 the slot in is formed longitudinally in 
the back d of the comb, obviating the neces 
sity of employing the rod g. 
Having thus explained my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A toilet-comb provided with a longitudi 
nal slot in its back, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. In a toilet-comb, a rod arranged longi 
tudinally and secured by its ends to the back 
of said comb, forming a slot for receiving an 
attaching-ring, substantially as described. 
3. The comb A, provided with the slot na, 
in combination with the ring p, fitted to slide 
in said slot, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
4. The comb A, in combination with the 
rod g, ring p, and chain B, arranged substan 
tially as described. 
y 
45 
55 
WALTER H. BAGSHAW. 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL B. WYMAN, 
GEO. H. STEVENS. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452256.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 452,256. 
 
3 Sheets-Sheet l. 
E, BROOK. 
GAS PRODUCER. 
Patented May 12, 1891, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
E. BROOK. 
GAS PR ODUCER. 
- 
IE 
Patented May 12, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 452,256, 
 
(No Model.) 
E, BROOK. 
GAS PRODUCER. 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
No. 452,256. 
Patented May 12, 1891. 
71zzecar 
14, 
Z7zzle/2227 
C 264 A4 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD BROOK, OF RASHCLIFFE, HUDDERSFIELD, ENGLAND. 
GAS - PRODUCER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,256, dated May 12, 1891. 
Application filed February 26, 1889, Serial No, 301,271 (No model.) Patented in England May 1, 1888, No. 6,454, 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARD BROOK, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain and Ire 
land, residing at Rashcliffe, Huddersfield, in 
the county of York, England, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Gas 
Producers, (for which I have obtained a pat 
ent in Great Britain, No. 6,454, dated May 1, 
1888) of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
According to this invention a gas-producer 
of the kind in which a water channel or jacket 
is included in the wall has one or more tuyeres 
arranged to project from the said water-jacket 
into the fuel or fire. Across the base, which 
may contain Water, I place a cross-bar for the 
purpose of occasionally supporting temporary 
bars. To facilitate the lighting of the fire or 
the complete removal of clinker and ashes 
from the ash-pit, I arrange an opening or a 
Series of Openings on two opposite sides of 
the producer at or a little above the level of 
the CrOSS-bar, which openings are kept closed 
When temporary bars are not inserted. To 
facilitate their closing it is convenient to 
make them in the form of boxes with flap 
doors. Through these openings I pass tem 
porary bars of iron, whose inner ends rest 
upon the cross-bar, and I am thus enabled to 
light the fire on a temporary grate and with 
draw the same at pleasure; also, when the 
producer is at Work the bars will support the 
fire While the clinker and ashes are thoroughly 
cleaned out. I prefer the cross-bar to a solid 
Wall or support, although I sometimes make 
use of the latter, as I am enabled to push the 
poker, rake, or shovel underneath and 
through to the other side, which a solid sup 
port would prevent. 
In place of admitting the air to the center 
of the fuel through a tuyere, it may be deliv 
ered from a hollow bar, bridge, or channel 
passing across the lower part of the producer 
at about the water-level. This bar, bridge, 
Or channel, besides serving as an air-inlet, full 
fills the function of the cross-bar mentioned 
above. It is open at the bottom, which dips 
into Water, while at the sides it has perfora 
tions or outlets for the emission of air, which 
is forced into it by a steam-jetor other blower. 
The iron channel being open at the bottom, 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
and only being partially immersed in water, 
allows any clinker or other solid matter that 
may fall or run into the perforations to drop 
through onto the floor instead of choking up 
the passage. It also permits of the poker, 
rake, or Shovel being passed underneath it, 
thus providing access to all parts of the 
hearth, as well as giving more space for the 
accumulation of ashes. The fact that the 
channel is partly immersed in water preserves 
it from being injured by the heat of the fuel 
and prevents clinker sticking to it. When 
the tuyeres are not employed, the Water chan 
nel or jacket in the wall may be dispensed 
with, the lower part of the producer being 
parallel or tapered inward. 
The accompanying drawings show gas-pro 
ducers according to my invention. 
Figures 1 and 2 on Sheet 1 are respectively 
an elevation, partly in section, and a sec 
tional plan of one arrangement. Figs. 3 and 
4. On Sheet 2 are similar views of a modifica 
tion of the apparatus, and Figs. 5 and 6 on 
Sheet 3 both represent in sectional elevation 
further modifications thereof. 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, W is the water 
jacket or channel provided with the tuyere 
T, which projects into the fire and admits air 
thereto by the internal pipe extending through 
the Water-jacket to the outer air, where it 
may be connected to the annular blast-cham 
ber B under the water-jacket or be provided 
with its own steam-blower. 
B is the annular blast-chamber, having air 
Supplied to it by the steam-blower S, and from 
which chamber the air passes into the fire, 
urging combustion in the outer portion of the 
Sale. 
C is the central cross-bar or air-channel ex 
tending from side to side across the center of 
the producer, and upon which the points of 
the temporary bars (shown in dotted lines) 
rest when inserted for the purpose of holding 
up the fire. This cross-bar or channel is 
partly immersed in the water at the bottom, 
and is thus kept cool, while clinker is pre 
Vented from Sticking to it. 
O O are the openings or slots for the pas 
Sage of the temporary bars, and are closed by 
the swing flaps or doors ID, which also close 
the openings for removal of ashes and clinker. 
55 
75 
95 
co 
s 
452,256 
1. In a gas-producer, the combination of the 
producing-chamber having the Solid or sta 
tionary floor, the hollow cross-bar C, horizon 
tally arranged Oll said floor, a Water space 
or channel, said cross-bar being located in 
the water-channel and So arranged and Con 
structed that the water extends up into said 
ball C, preventing Said. bar burning and 
clinker adhering thereto, and means, sub 
stantially as described, for supplying air or 
steam into said producing-chamber, Substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a gas-producer, the combination of the 
chamber having a normally-closed bottom, 
temporary grate-bars, the hollow metal cross 
bar extending centrally and horizontally 
across said bottom, having perforations in its 
upper portions arranged to deliver air or steam 
beneath the temporary grate-bars, means, sub 
stantially as described, for maintaining water 
within said hollow cross-bar, means, substan 
tially as described, for supplying air or steam 
to said cross-bar, the openings opposite said 
cross-bar for the insertion and withdrawal of 
the temporary grate-bars, and flap-doors D, 
normally closing said openings, as set forth. 
3. The combination, in a gas-producer, of 
the chamber h, the water bottom thereof, the 
hollow metal cross-bar C, open below and ex 
tending horizontally and centrally across the 
bottom of said chamber, with its lower side 
extending into said water bottom, means for 
supplying air or steam to Said bar C, tempo 
rary grate-bars, openings in said bar to deliver 
air or steam beneath the temporary grate 
bars, side openings OO opposite said cross 
bar to admit insertion and withdrawal of the 
temporary grate-bars, and exterior flap-doors 
D D, normally closing said openings and at 
their lower ends dipping into said water bot 
tom, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Ilhave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
EDWARD IBROOK. 
Willnesses: 
A. W. DENTON, 
IIENRY KING, 
Clerks to lessrs. Brook, Freeman ce. Bottley, 
Solicitors, Huddersfield. 
55 
65 
75 
Sc. 
9o 
25 
O 
The doors I) are swung or hinged at the top, 
and their lower edges dip into and are luted 
by the Water at the bottom. 
When desired, the tuyere T may be dis 
5 pensed with, the air being then admitted to 
the center of the fire through the cross-bar C, 
which is perforated near the center, so as to 
insure the air being passed into the fire at 
that point, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4 on Sheet 
2, where it will be noticed the annular water 
jacket W and the tuyere T are absent, the 
whole of the air for combustion being passed 
into the fire through the central cross-bar or 
air-channel C by means of the side openings 
I5 E at the center, as indicated by the small ar 
roWs. These openings Eare purposely placed 
near the center, so as to keep the air away 
from the side walls and to cause it to pass 
through the body of the fire. The water on 
the floor seals the bottom of the cross-bar or 
air-channel C, and thus prevents the air from 
escaping into the fire at any point, excepting 
through the openings E. One end of the 
cross-bar or channel C is connected through 
the side of the pooducer with an ordinary 
steam-jet blower S. 
The ashes and clinker collect in the water 
upon the floor of the producer and are re 
moved from time to time through the door 
Way's D D, the temporary bars being inserted 
meanwhile through the slots or openings OO 
whenever requisite. 
Figs. 5 and 6 on Sheet 3 are two further 
modifications, both having the central cross 
bar or air-channel C cooled by water, as pre 
viously described; but the floor of the pro 
ducer is not covered with water, the fire rest 
ing directly upon the brick base. In Fig. 5 
a Slmall channel A is formed in the base, so as 
to connect the water-troughs MMI at the out 
side with the water-trough under the air 
channel C. The lower edges of the door's D 
D dip, as before described, into and are luted 
by the water, whereas in Fig. 6 these doors 
are entirely out of water. 
IIaving described the nature of my said in 
Vention and in what manner the same is to 
be performed, I hereby declare that what I 
consider to be novel and original, and there 
So fore claim, in a gas-producer is 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452356.txt	(No Model.) 
G. B. BALL OU. 
CAR, COUPLING, 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 452,356, 
Patented May 19, 1891, 
/3 
 
MA 
W 
Ma 
A. 
M? 
W 
WITNESSES 
AN VENTOR, 
- 
-assie 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 452,356 
G, B, BALL OU, 
CAR COUPLING, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 19, 1891. 
 
 
ar tes 
  
W7TWESSES 
66 leading & 
 
gz. 266-ee 
NVAEWZOAR, 
g -4 - A TTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE BROWN BALLOU, OF HOPEDALE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CAR-COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,356, dated May 19, 1891. 
Application filed November 8, 1890, Serial No, 370,751, (No model.) 
O 
35 
- 
Sale, 
To cul, whon, it navy concern. 
Beit known that I, GEORGE BROWN BALLOU, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Hope 
dale, in the county of Worcester and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Car-Couplers; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as Will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
My invention relates to improvements in 
car-couplings, and particularly to that class 
which are automatic in their action. 
Heretofore in the car-couplers ordinarily in 
use it has been necessary for a man to go be 
tween the cars to attach the coupling to the 
draw-bars, which is a very dangerous Service 
and is the cause of great loss of life among 
railway employs. 
Attempts have been made to produce a car 
coupling which will obviate the danger of men 
being crushed between the cars by working 
the couplers automatic in their action; but of 
all the devices of this kind in use of which I 
am aware this has been done at the Sacrifice 
of the simplicity of the coupler and at the ex 
pense of the safe coupling of the cars. 
It is the object of my improved car-coup 
ling to overcome these difficulties; and to that 
end my invention consists in certain features 
of construction to be hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and the novel features then particu 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figurel is 
a plan view showing parts of two cars united 
by my improved coupling. Fig.2 is an under 
side view thereof. Fig. 3 is an end view of a 
car provided with one member of the coup 
ling. Fig. 4 is an enlarged side view of a 
draw-bar and its draw-head. Fig. 5 is a lon 
gitudinal section on line V V, Fig. 4. Fig.6 
is a longitudinal section online V 'V', Fig. 5, 
of the draw-head alone. Fig. 7 is a detail per 
spective view. 
The draw-bar and draw-head of each car 1 
isidentical, and a description of one member 
of the coupling will therefore suffice for both. 
On the under side of each car-body 1 are 
arallel cleats 2, extending longitudinally. 
The ends of a block 3 are recessed into the 
inner sides of the cleats. In front of the block 
3 is a rectangular frame 4, having ears 5, 
whereby it is secured to the cleats 2 by screws 
6, and providing opposite guideways 77. The 
draw-bar 8 slides in a transverse perforation 
9 in the block 3, and has at its front end a 
yoke 10, the sides 11 of which slide in the 
guideways 7. Surrounding the draw-bar 8, 
between the yoke and the block 3, is a com 
pression-Spring 12, and Surrounding the draw 
bar between the block and the pin 13, at the 
inner end of the draw-bar, is another compres 
Sion-spring 14, the former spring being adapt 
ed to take up inward strain and the latter out 
Ward strain. . 
The draw-head is pivoted between the sides 
of the yoke 10. 
The draw-head has at its rear 
end a pair of opposite parallel lugs 15, hav 
ing opposite slots 16, forming opposite projec. 
tions 17. Through opposite perforations or 
openings 18 in the lugs 15 the pivot bolt or 
pin 19 passes, said bolt or pin also passing 
through perforations or openings 20 in the 
sides of the yoke 10, whereby the draw-head 
is pivoted to the draw-bar between the sides of 
the yoke. In pivoting in the yoke 10 the draw 
head is cushioned against the rubber spring 21 
in the base of theyoke, projections forming the 
draw-heads. At one side of the bases of the 
lugs 15 is an outwardly and forwardly project 
ing curved horn 22, and opposite the latter is 
a pair of opposite jaws 23, one at the top and 
bottom of the head, a mouth 23 being left 
between the horn and jaws. The inner sides 
of the jaws 23 are inclined at 24 away from 
their bottoms and are provided with opposite 
semi-cylindrical recesses 25. These recesses 
25 are adapted to receive and provide a bear 
ing for a semi-cylindrical or half lock-pin 26 
to turn in the round part, being received by 
the recesses, and the flat face being adapted 
to come flush with the inclined inner sides 24 
of the jaws, Midway of one side of the half 
lock-pin projects a stem 27, having at its end 
an eye 28, which eye is fitted between the 
pair of eyes 29 at the outer end of a slide 30, 
a pivot-pin 30 passing through eyes 28 and 
29 and pivotally connecting the parts. The 
slide 30 moves in the space 31, between the 
paired jaWS 23, and in Space 32 being the 
paired lugs, passing through an opening 33 to 
one side of a cross-strip 34, secured to the 
shoulders 35 of the offsets 36 at the bases of 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
OO 
y 
452,356 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
projections 17. Projecting laterally from the 
slide 30 are guide-pins 37, that are received 
by the slots 16, whereby the slide is guided 
in its sliding movement. From opposite sides 
of the rear end of the slide 30 lugs 3S and 39 
project. From the inner face of lug 38 a stud 
40 projects, over which is seated the rear end 
of a spiral spring 41, whose outer end is Seated 
in a recess 42 in the back of the draw-head 
between the paired lugs 15. The side of the 
spring 41 contiguous to the slide is received 
by a longitudinal groove 43. A shaft 44 is 
fixed at its ends in the opposite offsets 36 and 
provides a bearing for the roller 45 therein. 
The mechanism for opening the coupler 
consists of an upright revoluble shaft 46, that 
is journaled in bearings 47 and 48, Secured, 
respectively, to one end of the car-body and 
to the projecting end of one of the cleats 2. 
At the upper end of the shaft 46 is a cross 
bar or handle 49, and near the lower end of 
the shaft is a collar 50, that turns on the bear 
ing 4S and supports the shaft. On the lower 
end of this shaft is a drum 51, upon which is 
adapted to be wound a chain or cable 52, one 
end of which is secured at 53 thereto, and the 
other end of which is Secured to the lug 39 
of slide 30 and passes over the roller 45. 
This shaft may be used for uncoupling When 
the cars are in motion or at a standstill. 
When at a standstill they may also be un 
coupled by means of a horizontal hand-lever 
54, pivoted intermediately of its ends at 55 
on a bracket 56 on the under side of the car 
body. The inner end of the lever is connected 
with one end of a chain or cable 57, the other 
end of which is secured to the drum 51, around 
which the cable is Wound. 
The operation of my improved car-coupling 
is as follows: When a car having a draw-head, 
as above described, is brought up to and 
coupled with another car laving a similar draw 
head, the two cars will be coupled as shown 
in Figs.1 and 2. In the operation of coupling 
the respective mouths 23 between the jaws 
23 and the lugs 15 will receive the respective 
jaws of the opposing draw-heads, the horns 
22 being on the outside of the two pairs, of 
jaws, the inclined parts of the opposing jaws 
of each pair being brought in contact. The 
tendency of the spiral Springs 41 is to throw 
the slides 30 as far back as possible, thus 
causing the half lock-pins to stand at right 
angles to the paired jaws. Now the bringing 
of the two sets of paired jaws together will 
overcome this tendency of the Springs and 
cause the inclines 24 of the jaws of each draw 
head to bear against and turn the semi-cylin 
drical or half lock-pin 26 of the other draw 
head in its bearings 25, thus moving the slides 
outward and depressing the Springs and bring 
ing the half lock-pin face to face at this mo 
ment and just before the draw - heads are 
brought completely together, the half lock 
pins will, by reason of the action of the springs 
41, turn back to their former position at right 
angles to the jaws, forming a complete longi 
tudinally - divided cylindrical lock-pin that 
freely locks the two coupled draw-heads to 
gether. The pivot-bolts or pins 19, that con 
nect the locked draw-heads to the draw-bars, 
permit of the necessary oscillation of the cars 
when running on straight tracks and of the 
turning of the cars around curves. 
To uncouple the cars, either the hand-shaft 
46 or the hand-lever 54 is turned in the right 
direction, which acting through the medium 
of cable 52 turns the lock-pin so that its sec 
tions may separate when one car is moved 
away from the other. 
An automatic car-coupling constructed as 
described is simple in construction, inexpen 
sive, strong, and safe, and will always do the 
work desired without the dangerous practice 
of going between the cars. The coupling is 
so made that it will readily work on high or 
low cars, whether loaded or otherwise, and 
with either a platform or box car. Should 
occasion require, the old-fashion link can be 
used. 
The draw-bar being simple and plain, can 
with little expense be attached to any car. 
The coupling is so made that if from any 
cause any part give out it can be easily dupli 
cated with but slmall expense. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a car-coupling, the combination of 
a draw-head provided with a mouth formed 
by a horn at one side and a recessed jaw at 
the other side, a flat-faced semi-cylindrical or 
half lock-pin adapted to turn in the recess 
and provided with a laterally-projecting stem, 
a longitudinally-guided slide pivotally con 
nected with said stem, the draw-head having 
longitudinal recesses or spaces to guide the 
slide, and means for operating said slide, sub 
Stantially as alld for the purpose set forth, 
2. In a car-coupling, the combination of the 
draw-heads provided with mouths, with a di 
vided lock-pin adapted to turn in bearings at 
the sides of Said mouths, slides to which the 
respective sections of the pin are pivoted, a 
roller carried by one of the draw-heads, and 
a cable or chain passing over said roller and 
connected with one of Said slides, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a car-coupling, the combination of the 
draw-heads provided with mouths, with a di 
vided lock-pin adapted to turn in bearings at 
the sides of Said mouths, longitudinal slides 
to which the respective sections of the pin are 
piyoted, Springs alongside of and acting on 
Said slides in One direction, and means for 
acting on the slides in the other direction, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a car-Coupling, the combination of the 
draw-heads provided with mouths, with a di. 
vided lock-pin adapted to turn in bearings at 
the sides of Said mouths, longitudinal slides 
to which the respective sections of the pins 
are piyoted, spiral Springs acting on said 
slides in One direction, and a chain or cable 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IEC 
I 15 
I 25 
452,356 
3 
lock-pin adapted to turn in the recess, a pair 
of slotted lugs at the rear of the draw-head, 
a slide between said lugs to which the half 
pin is pivoted, and guide-pins projecting from 
the slide and movable in the slots of the lugs, 
substantially as set forth. 
7. In a car-coupling, the herein-described 
draw-head, the same comprising a horn at One 
side, a jaw at the other side provided with a 
recessed incline, a semi-cylindrical or half 
lock-pin adapted to turn in the recess, a slide 
to which the half-pin is pivoted, guide-pins 
projecting from the slide, and guides for the 
pins, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
3 O 
5 
GEORGE BROWN BATIOU, 
Witnesses: 
LEWIS HAYDEN, 
ABRAHAM L. BUCK. 
for acting on them in the other direction, and 
a pulley journaled in bearings in the draw 
head, over which the chain or cable passes to 
one side, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
5. In a car-coupling, the herein-described 
draw-head, the same comprising a horn at one 
side, a jaw at the other side provided with a 
recessed inner incline, a flat-faced semi-cylin 
drical or half lock-pin adapted to turn in the 
recess and provided with a stem, and a slide 
with which the stem is pivotally connected, 
and provided with a lug, and a spiral spring 
at one side of the slide, one end of which 
spring is received by a recess in the draw 
head, and the other end has bearing against 
said lug, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a car-coupling, the herein-described 
draw-head, the same comprising a horn at one 
side, a jaw at the other side provided with a 
recessed incline, a semi-cylindrical or half 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452456.txt	J. R. SEWER ANCE, 
KNOTTING MECHANISM FOR GRAIN BINDERS. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 452,456. 
Patented May 19, 1891. 
Elsa 
- st 
ced 
172 
SS 
: 
w 
- 
- 
- - - 
a 
 
Y 
R 
is 
 
It 
f 
 
928) by ossos 
6%-42. 
3v-uo-vitov 
33 %26 &etovo 
-6-eo. 63. Se-eele--- 
 
  
 
 
J. R. SEWER ANCE, 
KNOTTING MECHANISMFOR GRAIN BINDERS. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 452,456, 
Patented May 19, 1891. 
J. R. SEWER ANCE, 
KNOTTING MECHANISM FOR GRAIN BINDERS. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 452,456, 
Patented May 19, 1891. 
 
  
 
 
 
  
N 
W 
ES NSN 
   
(A 
928)itv.cscs 
4-211%. 
(? W.14 n- 
s 3v-uo-1 tot 
e-u-e-r-a--- e. e. 
4-race (P. 
&y 4- &etovic 
 
J. R. SEWER ANCE, 
KNOTTING MECHANISM FOR GRAIN BINDERS. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
(No Model.) 
No. 452,456. 
 
Fig. 9. 
... 
' 
Fig. 12, 
Patented May 19, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
5 sheets-Sheet 5. 
J. R. SEWER ANCE, 
KNOTTING MECHANISM FOR GRAIN BINDERS. 
No. 452,456, 
Patented May 19, 1891, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
LTTE 
ETEI 
 
 
 
 
e 
-, 6.2. 63. Seeeee 
15 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES R. S EVER AN CE, OF POUGHIKEEP SIE, NEW Y, OR, X. 
KNOTTING MECHANISM FOR GRAN-BINDERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,456, dated May 19, 1891. 
Application filed August 14, 1890, Serial No. 362,010, (No model.) 
O 
To all uvhon), it may concei'7. 
Be it known that I, JAMES R. SEVERANCE, 
of Poughkeepsie, in the county of Dutchess 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
Improvements in IXnotting Mechanism for 
Grain-Binders, of which the following is a 
Specification, reference baing had to the ac 
Companying drawings. 
My present invention relates to certain im 
provements in the construction of knotting 
mechanism for grain-binders of that type 
shown in my patents, No.237,135, dated Feb 
y 1, 1881, and No. 382,773, dated May 15, 
My improvements are fully described and 
illustrated in the following specification and 
accompanying drawings, and the novel fea 
tures thereof specified in the claims annexed 
to the said specification. 
My improvements in knotters are repre 
Sented in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure is a plan view, the knotter-casing 
being partially broken away to show the parts 
underneath. Fig. 2 is a central longitudinal 
section through the knotter-spirals, showing 
the cam-shell partially in elevation. Fig. 3 
is a plan view of my improved knotter. Fig. 
4 is a section on the line 4 4, Fig. 1, showing 
the knotting mechanism in side elevation. 
Fig. 5 is an elevation of the cord holder and 
Fig. 6 is a 
Clutter as seen from the inside. 
side elevation of the cord-holder. Fig. 7 is a 
section of the same on the line 77, Fig. 8, 
showing the parts to the left of that line. Fig. 
S is an elevation of the cord holder and cut 
ter, showing the clamping-plate partially in 
section. Fig. 9 is a diagrammatic represen 
tation showing the position of the parts at the 
commencement of the knotting operation, one 
end of the band being secured in the holder 
and the other end carried around the bundle 
and brought within the path of the spirals by 
the binder-arm. Fig. 10 is a diagram repre 
Senting the position of the parts after the spi 
rals have engaged the binder-arm end of the 
band and the cord-holder and horn have ad 
vanced, bringing the point of the horn in po 
sition to engage the cord on the continued 
backward motion of the binder-arm. Fig.11 
shows the position of the parts after the spi 
rals have completed their forward movement. 
Fig. 12 represents the position of the parts 
when the end of the band has been carried 
into the jaws on the spirals by the movement 
of the cord-holder. Fig. 13 represents the po 
sition of the parts at the time when the loop 
is about to come off the points of the spirals 
during the return movement of the Spirals. 
Fig.14 represents the completion of the knot, 
the jaws of the spirals having released the 
cord and the binder-arm end of the cord hav 
ing been severed by the knife and gripped by 
the cord-holder. Fig. 15 is a diagram repre 
senting the knot in loose or open formation. 
Fig. 16 is a view of the cord holder and cut 
ter, showing the adjustable spring for the 
clamping-plate and the clearer. Fig. 17 rep 
resents the same as seen from the left hand 
in Fig. 16. Fig. 18 represents the same as 
seen from the right hand in Fig. 16. 
Fig. 19 
is a transverse section on the line a c, Figs. 
17 and 18, 
In the accompanying drawings, A A' are the 
parallel rods of the binder-frame, and B the 
driving-shaft of the knotter. 
B', Fig. 4, is the intermediate shaft for driv 
ing the binding mechanism. 
C, Fig. 4, is a cross-bar uniting the rods A 
A' immediately underneath the knotter and 
serving to support the driving-shaft B near 
the combined cam and segmental gear D G. 
The cam D actuates the vibrating toothed 
segment E, which transmits motion to the 
knotter-spirals I I'. The driving-shaft B 
makes a single revolution for each bundle 
bound. The segmental gear G operates the 
cord holder and cutter H. 
The knotter herein described is designed to 
be used in connection with any suitable bind 
ing mechanism-such, for instance, as that 
shown in my patents, Nos. 237,135 and 345,546, 
or in my pending applications, Serial Nos. 
217,390 and 220,509. 
The knotter-casing J is attached to the rod 
A by the bolts a, a, Fig. 1, and to the rod A' 
by the standards b b. It is given a suitable 
shape adapted to inclose and protect the op 
erative parts of the knotter, its upper surface 
preferably having a general inclination down 
ward toward the grain-receiving side of the 
apparatus. The point of the needle or binder 
25 
35 
40 
45 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
3. 
452,456 
O 
25 
35 
55 
arm E, Fig. 4, ente's the slot. lx, Fig. , to 
bring the cord within the grasp of the knot 
ter-spirals, the sides of the slot being provided 
with the upwardly-projecting flanges c c'. A 
slot L permits the movement of the recipro 
cating gate or side compressor described in my 
pending applications, Serial Nos. 217,390 and 
220,509. The knotter-casing J may be made 
in one or more pieces, as convenience may 
dictate. As indicated in the drawings, the 
flanges or guards c care formed in one piece, 
being connected together at 's', Fig. 3, so as 
to be detached from the casing J. Access is 
had to the knotter through a removable sec 
tion F, Fig. 3. The axis or stem M, which 
Supports the knotter-spirals, is secured in the 
boss d on the outer end of the knotter-casing. 
At its inner end the stem is provided with the 
cord-guide e, which guides the cord within 
the path of the points of the knotter-spirals. 
The construction and operation of the knot 
ter-spirals are substantially similar to that 
shown in my patent, No. 3S2,773, dated May 
15, 18SS. They are, however, driven in a sim 
pler and better manner, and the use of the 
journal-boxes l't' enables me to dispense 
with the bracket or support at the inner end 
of the knotter-stem in the construction shown 
in the said patent and to provide the end of 
the stem with the cord-guide e. The free por 
tions of the spirals are also made somewhat 
shorter. The omission of the bracket facili 
tates the construction and permits the free 
parts of the spirals to be shorter and conse 
quently stiffer. The spirals are operated by 
the cam-shell N, which revolves on the ston 
M, receiving motion from the knotter-driv. 
ing shaft B by the cam D, vibrating segmental 
rack E, and pinion F. The cam D may be in 
dependently attached to the shaft, or it may, as 
indicated in the accompanying drawings, be 
formed with the segmental gear G, which actu 
ates the cord-holder II. The rack E is supported 
by the radial bar O, which is pivoted at 1, 
Fig. 1, to a lug depending from the knotter 
casing or other suitable support. An arm I, 
attached to the bar O, carries the roller i, fit 
ting the groovej of the cam D. As shown in 
the side view, Fig. 4, the cam-groove is made 
of such a shape as to give the rack E an ap 
proximately uniform motion up and down, ex 
cept at the extremity of its upward motion, 
where it is started downward by the portion 
of the groove marked k, and then arrested for 
a short interval by that part of the groove 
marked l, which is concentric with the axis of 
revolution, after which the rack then de 
scends nearly uniformly. The object of this 
arrangement will be understood when it, is 
stated that the jaws on the ends of the spirals 
close on the cord while the roller i is passing 
through the cam-groove at k, and that the 
commencement of the further return move 
ment of the spirals is delayed while the roller 
titraverses the concentric portion l of the cam 
groove, in order to permit the cord-holder 
time to let go of the end of the cord. The 
rack E during its upward movement is pro 
tected by the guard P, Fig. 4, which projects 
above he knotter-casing, and also serves as 
a detent to close the outer side of the binding 
receptacle. The bar O is bent or offset at its 
outer end, so that it may swing clear of the 
cam-shell N while sustaining the rack E in 
mesh with the pinion F. A lug O, Fig. 1, cast 
on or secured to the knotter-casing, Supports 
the back of the rack E and keeps it engaged 
with the pinion. The pinion F is attached to 
the cam - shell by a suitable sleeve or collar 
p, Fig. 2, so that the shell revolves with the 
pinion. 
The movements of the spiral are substan 
tially the same as those described in my be 
fore-mentioned application-that is, as the 
cam - shell revolves the spirals screw them 
selves forward toward the cord-holder through 
the journal-boxes l')', and at the extremity 
of their forward movement, the jaws at the 
free ends of the spirals are opened, so as to 
receive the cord by the roller or knurl com 
ing in contact with a suitable stop on the 
knotter-casing, so that the spiral I is arrested 
in its movement, while the other spiral. I' con 
tinues to advance, thus separating the jaws 
at the extremities of the spirals. The open 
condition of the jaws n' o' is indicated in 
Fig. 2. The knurl 
travels entirely out of 
the track o' in the cam-shell N and comes in 
contact with a stop on the casing located at 
'', IFig. 1, in about the same horizontal plane 
as the axis of the spirals. The journal-boxes 
l' ly' are made of a form adapted to fit the 
thread and sustain the body of the spiral I", 
being divided in the horizontal plane and Se 
cured together and to the casing by suitable 
screws, or one of the journal-boxes may be 
made integral with the casing. 
The construction and operation of the cam 
shell N are the same as described in my pre 
vious patent, No. 382,773, dated May 15, 18SS. 
It is provided with two longitudinal tracks, in 
which the rollers or knurls attached to the 
spirals II' travel, and with a spring t, Fig. 
2, by which devices the operations of open 
ing and closing the jaws n' o' are performed 
at the proper times, as described in said last 
mentioned patent. 
Proceeding now to a description of the cord 
holder and cutter, it consists, essentially, of 
the intermittently-revolving pinion Q, carry 
ing the clamping-plate V, the hook or horn 
R, and the knife S. The clamping-plate con 
fines the end of the cord against the station 
ary segmental circular clamping-jaw T. The 
cord-holder is supported on a shaft U; which 
is held in a boss on the knotter-casing by a 
screw or other suitable device q, Fig. 1. It 
will be observed from Fig. I that the shaft 
of the cord-holder is set at an angle with the 
axis of the spirals in order to enable the hook 
R to clear the spirals as it revolves and to 
facilitate the seizing of the cord. The axis of 
the cord-holder is also inclined downward, so 
that its prolongation intersects the shaft B. 
75 
So 
95 
Od 
I I5 
 
452,456 
, 
3 
7 O 
O 
15. 
25 
45 
55 
AS indicated in the drawings 
gs, the shaft U is 
made hollow to receive the stem d', Fig. 7, of 
the knife S. The pinion Q is provided with 
a hub X, having a projection K", to which the 
clamping-plate and horn are attached, as in 
dicated at Y, Fig. 6, so that the horn and the 
clamping-plate revolve with the pinion. The 
shaft U is provided with a plate or disk Z, 
Which carries the segmental clamping-jaw T. 
The arrangement of the parts will be readily 
understood from an examination of Figs. 7 
and 8, from which it will be perceived that the 
glamping-plate revolves outside the clamping 
jaw and that the knife revolves inside of it. 
The clainping-plate is made slightly flexible or 
elastic, so that the end of the cord will be 
compressed or held by friction between the 
glamping-plate and the jaw. The knife Sas 
it revolves severs the cord against the end of 
the clamping-jaw T, the outside of the knife 
being turned to fit against the inside of the 
jaw. The outer edge of the end of the clamp 
ing-plate is rounded, so as to facilitate the en 
trance of the cord between it and the clamp 
ing-plates, as indicated at 2, Fig. 8. 
The horn R, the clamping-plate, and the 
knife make one revolution for each knottied 
by the mechanism, being actuated by the seg 
mental rack 7" on the gear G. The rim of the 
gear is provided with the delay-shoes, which 
fits against a corresponding surface on the 
pinion Q, as indicated by the dotted lines in 
Fig. 5, and which holds the pinion from rotat 
ing during a part of the revolution of the 
gear. The pinion is also provided with the 
tooth it, placed on one side of the rim of teeth 
v, which as the gear revolves is struck by the 
forward end t, Fig. 4, of the delay-shoe v on 
the gear, so that the pinion and attachments 
are given a partial rotation at this time and 
are then held stationary, while the delay-shoe 
at passes along between the tooth at and the 
second tooth ac of the rim of teeth , which is 
extended lengthwise of the axis of the pinion, 
so as to lie across the path of the shoe v. 
The path of the rim of the shoe at is indicated 
by the dotted line w' in Fig. 5. After the 
shoe v has passed beyond the tooth a the 
revolution of the pinion is completed by the 
engagement of the teeth v of the pinion Q 
with those of the rack r, the first tooth n', 
Fig. 4, of the rack coming in contact with th 
tooth in of the pinioh. 
The knife S is carried by an arma', which 
extends radially inward toward the center of 
the pinion, and is provided with a central stem 
d', Fig. 7, which passes either partially or en 
tirely through the axis U of the pinion. The 
outer end of the knife is fitted to a notch in 
the inner margin of the clamping-plate V, as 
indicated at f', Figs. 5 and 7. This notch 
serves to cause the knife to revolve with the 
clamping-plate and horn. The knife S is 
sharpened on its forward edge, as indicated 
in the drawings. The knife, the arma', and 
the stem d' are conveniently formed by forg 
ing in one piece. Where the stem of the 
knife passes entirely through the axis U a pin 
or other device is used to hold it in place, as 
indicated at W, Fig. 7. 
It will be understood that the pinion, clamp 
ing-plate, horn, and the knife, with its arm 
and stem, revolve together with the pinion, 
while the axis U, disk Z, and clamping-jaw T 
remain stationary. 
In Figs. 16, 17, 18, and 19 I have represented 
the cord holder and cutter as provided with a 
clamping-plate having an adjustable spring 
and also with a clearer. In this case the clamp 
ing-plate V, instead of being secured to the 
pinion by screws, as indicated at Y, Fig. 6, is 
attached thereto by the staple D', the arms 
g'g'' of which are threaded and provided 
with nuts h h, which compress the spring i", 
so as to draw the clamping-plate toward the 
pinion with a yielding pressure. In addition 
to the arms of the staples, which pass through 
the clamping-plate, the latter may be attached 
to the pinion by one or more pins f", Fig. 17. 
The construction and arrangement of the teeth 
of the pinion, the delay-surfaces, the horn, and 
clamping-jaware the same as before described. 
The elasticity of the spring is increased by 
the bearing-plate k", which is interposed be 
tween the spring and the nuts and has its 
ends l'l bent inward, so as to bear on the 
ends of the spring. 
The disk Zis extended outward opposite or 
nearly opposite the clamping-jaw and carries 
the clearer L', which passes between the . 
clamping-plate and the knife as these parts 
revolve, so as to clean out the Space between 
them of any pieces of cord, straw, or other 
refuse. 
The operation of my improved knot-tying 
mechanism is as follows: The end of the cord 
being held in the cord-holder at m', Fig.9, the 
other part of the cord is passed around the 
bundle and brought within the path of the 
knotter-spirals by the binder-arm E'. The 
cord passes under the horizontal part of the 
cord-guide e on the end of the axis M. of the 
spirals and is prevented by its downward ex 
tension from traveling out of the path of the 
spirals. The spirals now begin to move for 
ward and their points pass under the cord at', 
Fig. 9, and around below the axis M and up 
ward behind it, as represented in Fig. 10. 
The cord-holder has now made its first move 
ment, bringing the cord from m', Fig. 9, to m', 
Fig. 10, so that the points of the spirals pass 
over above it, as shown in Fig.10. The binder 
arm has in the meantime begun its return 
movement, drawing the cord u, Fig. 10, 
around the spirals and forming a loop. The 
point of the horn IR has also emerged from 
behind the guide-plate c' (see Fig. 3) and 
projects below the same, as indicated in Fig. 
10, in position to engage the cord u', Fig. 11, 
as it is drawn upward by the continued back 
ward motion of the binder-arm. At the ex 
tremity of their forward movement the jaws 
on the ends of the spirals are opened and the 
cord na', Fig. 11, is placed between them by 
go 
95 
ICO 
Io5 
IC 
If 5 
I 25 
452,456 
the revolution of the cord-holder, which has axis and cam-shell, and the vibrating rack 
for opcrating the spirals, arranged to travel 
again commenced. The jaws now close on 
in a path protected by a guard, substantially 
the cord, the cord-holder releases the cord by 
carrying it beyond the end of the stationary 
as described. 
2. The combination, with the knotter-cas 
clamping-plate, and the spirals commence 
ing having a guard projecting upward there 
their backward movement. The return nove 
from, of the knotter-spirals, their supporting 
ment of the spirals carries the end of the cord 
axis and cam-shell, the vibrating rack for 
held in the jaws through the loop at', formed 
| operating the spirals, arranged to travel in a 
on the spirals, as indicated in Fig. 13. The 
path protected by the guard and pivoted to 
continued movement of the cord-holder car 
the casing, and the revolving cam for vibrat 
ries the cord '' into the path of the clamp 
ing the rack, substantially as described. 
ing-plate, between, which and the clamping 
3. The combination, with the knotter mech 
jaw it is gripped, as indicated in Fig. 14. The 
anism of a grain-binder, of the knotter-casing 
cord is severed by the knife S against the 
having a projecting rack-guard attached to 
edge of the clamping-jaw shortly after the 
its outer end, adapted to form the outer side 
cord has been gripped between the jaw and 
of the binding-chamber and to protect the 
the clamping-plate. The continued back 
knotter-operating rack during its vibration, 
Ward movement of the spirals draws the knot 
substantially as described. 
tight, and at the end of this movement the 
4. The combination, in a cord-holder, of the 
jaws are opened, so as to release the knot, as 
revolving clamping-plate, horn, and knife 
represented in Fig. 14. 
with the stationary clamping-jaw and the 55 
IFig. 15 shows the knot in open formation, 
clearer L', substantially as described. 
from which condition it would be pulled tight 
5. The combination, in a cord-holder, of the 
by the backward movement of the needle 
revolving pinion Q, stationary clamping-jaw 
drawing on the cord at'. 
T, horn R, and clamping-plate V, Secured to 
The rotation of the cord-holder may be 
the pinion by an adjustable spring, substan 
made continuous by a proper adjustment of 
tially as described. 
the parts and timing of the movements of the 
spirals. 
JAMES IR. SEWEIRANCE. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with the knotter-cas 
ing having a guard projecting upward there 
from, of the knotter-spirals, their supporting 
Witnesses: 
GEO. B. SELDEN, 
C. G. CRANNELL. 
4. 
IC) 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452556.txt	. (No Model.) 
C, TIMM, 
TRIMMING ATTACHMENT FOR, SEWING MACHINES, 
No. 452,556, 
Patented May 19, 1891. 
72 Y 
O 
tre p E. 
sta 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLESTIMM, OF MORGAN PARK, ASSIGNOR TO THE UNION SPECIAL 
SEWING MACHINE COMPANY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
TRIMMING ATTACHMENT FOR SEWING-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,556, dated May 19, 1891. 
Application filed February 2, 1891, Serial No. 379,912, (No model.) 
O 
To all, Luhon, it inctly conce772. 
Be it known that I, CHARLESTIMM, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Morgan 
Park, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Sewing-Machine Trimmer-Knives, of 
which the following is a specification. 
In performing its function upon cloth while 
being sewed on a sewing-machine by cutting 
away the material close to the seam the trim 
mer - knife, in its reciprocating movement 
through the slot commonly provided close to 
an edge of the throat-plate to admit the knife 
through it, tends to compact in the slot, and 
particularly behind the knife, fibers or lint 
freed from the cloth by the cutting operation. 
Thus it quite frequently happens that a mass. 
of such fibers will become so compactly wedged 
in the throat-plate slot as to cause the move 
ments of the knife, in forcing its Way past the 
mass it is at the same time further increas 
ing and compacting, to break out the edge 
piece of the throat-plate forming one side of 
the trimmer-knife slot.. This obviously irre 
parably injures the throat-plate, necessitat 
ing its being supplanted by a new one, and 
besides, of course, it interrupts the operation 
of the machine, entailing inconvenience and 
annoyance. 
The object of my improvement is to provide 
a construction of trimmer-blade for Sewing 
machines whereby it shall be adapted in its 
stroke to clear the throat-plate slot of the 
fibers or lint released from the material by 
cutting it and prevent its gathering and be 
ing compacted in the manner stated. To this 
end I form the blade with a desired number 
of teeth, preferably on the back edge of the 
blade, though they may be provided on one or 
both sides thereof or on one or both sides 
and the rear edge-thus, generically stated, 
on the blade behind the plane of its cutting 
edge, whereby such tooth or teeth will in the 
stroke of the knife engage the loose fibers and 
carry them through the slot and thus main 
tain it clear, or comparatively S0. 
In the accompanying drawings Ishow, by a 
perspective view, in Figure 1 a sewing-ma 
chine throat-plate with feed-dogs protruding 
through it and a trimmer-knife of my im 
proved construction in position in a suitable 
trimmer-frame and protruding through its 
slot in the throat-plate. Fig. 2 is a view in 
elevation of my improved trimmer-knife de 
tached. 
A designates the throat plate, and B is a 
trimmer-frame supporting the knife C, which 
projects through the slot r and is operated to 
reciprocate through the slot by a common or 
any suitable mechanism, which forms no part 
of my present invention, and need not there 
fore be herein shown and described, being 
Well-known to those skilled in the art to which 
my improvement relates. On the back of the 
blade C or the edge opposite the cutting-edge 
p, and on that portion thereof which comes in 
the movement of the knife within the plane 
of the slot r, is a series of serrations o, the 
teeth being formed, preferably, to project out 
ward and upward, and thereby adapted to 
perform the function stated in the manner de 
scribed. One tooth O may in a measure an 
Swer the purpose. Hence I do not wish to 
limit the number to a series of the teeth, 
though such series is the more effective and 
desirable. Furthermore, the tooth or teeth 
may be arranged anywhere back of the plane 
of the cutting-edge of the knife and to extend 
in any desired direction or directions without 
thereby departing from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the throat-plate of 
a sewing-machine, said throat-plate having a 
slot for the trimmer-knife, a trimmer-knife, 
and means for reciprocating it through the 
throat-plate slot, said knife having one or 
more teeth on the blade behind the plane of 
its cutting-edge, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. In combination with the throat-plate of 
a sewing-machine, said throat-plate having a 
slot for the trimmer-knife, a trimmer-knife, 
and means for reciprocating it through the 
throat-plate slot, said knife having a series 
95 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
2 
452,556 
3. In combination with the throat-plate of stantially as and for the purpose. Set forth. 
CIARLES TIMM. 
of teeth formed in the back edge of the blade, of upward and outward extending teeth O 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth, formed in the back edge of the blade, sub 
a sewing-machine, said throat-plate having a 
5 slot for the trimmer-knife, a trimmer-knife, 
and means for reciprocating it through the 
throat-plate slot, said knife having a series 
In presence of 
J. W. DYRENFORTH, 
M. J. FROST. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452656.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 452,656. 
 
S. AARONS ON, 
BAKE PAN, 
- 
. 
. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 19, 189l. 
WITNESSES : 
III/ENTOR 
V/ 
%2. 
? 
BY 
64/6214-doo 
- AT TORNEY. 
THE Noaas PerERs ca. Phoro-tuto. WASHINGTM, ... c. 
(No Model.) 
S, AARONS ON. 
BAKE PAN. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 452,656. 
Patented May 19, l89l. 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSNS 
%222222222 ge 
SSSSSSSNSNSNS geS 
SSSSSSSN 
22-24 
SSSSSSSSSSSaSaaS SS 2 X 
L s % 
s 
  
  
2. 2 
WITNESSES 
 
INVENTOR 
esano e1a1a1a. 
"6%. 442n 
al ATTORNEY. 
reoris Peters co, Horo-Ho., wAshington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMON AARONSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BAKE-PAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,656, dated May 19, 1891. 
Application filed December 13, 1890, Serial No, 374,585, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
25 
O 
To all tufton it Trudy concern: 
form and position shown in Fig. 3. The larger 
part of each of the corner portions is then 
Beit known that I, SIMON AARONSON, a citi 
bent over and folded around the smaller por 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of New 
York, in the county of New York and State 
tion, as shown in Fig. 4, and the whole then 
bent over tightly against the outer surface of 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
the transverse edge portions of the pan, as 
useful Improvements in Bake-Pans; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
shown in Fig. 5 and indicated in dotted lines 
in Fig. 2, and forming a double seam. Re 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enforcing wires h. h. are then placed in posi 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
tion, and the upper edges of the side portions 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
bent over to inclose them, and this is prefer 
ably done before the sides and ends are bent 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
into position. These wires are provided with 
form a part of this specification. 
the arms h h' at right angles thereto, which 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representa 
tion of the blank. Fig. 2 is a top plan view 
extend around the corners and are inclosed 
in the overturned upper edges of the end por 
of the pan. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are sectional 
detail views of the corners, showing the dif 
tions, as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 2, handles 
FI being also fixed in position at the same 
ferent stages of formation. 
time. These handles consist each of a wire 
This invention has relation to certain im 
bent into their loops k, forming the handles 
provements in baking-pans and blanks there 
proper, and having the arms k parallel with 
for, the object being to provide a blank so 
the longitudinal plane of said loop, and these 
formed as to enable it to be bent into its 
arms are inclosed in the overturned upper 
finished shape by hand, obviating the use of 
edges of the end portions, these ends being 
heavy and expensive machinery. Further, to 
adjacent to the ends of the arms h' of the re 
provide a finished article of superior quality 
enforcing wires h, the notches d, hereinbe 
and neatness. 
fore referred to, permitting a slight play or 
With these objects in view the invention 
pivotal movement of the handles, the ver 
consists in the construction of the blank and 
tical edge of the pan serving as bearings for 
pan hereinafter set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
the arms l'. By splitting the corners in the 
manner indicated the blank may be bent into 
sents the blank, of malleable sheet metal, 
form without the aid of machinery. The 
which, originally of rectangular form, has its 
angles or corners obliquely cutaway, as shown, 
corner portions thus formed moreover unite 
giving the block an octagonal form, having 
in the manner described to form a neat and 
its opposite sides parallel. The sides C. a. are 
durable double-seamed re-enforced corner. 
The handle described hay also be quickly 
of greater length than thesides b b and form 
put and held in place without the use of any 
the sides of the finished pan bb, forming the 
clips, eyes, or rivets. 
ends thereof, and the obliquely-cut corner 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
portions c forming the corners. The corner 
portions c are each cut or split diagonally at 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
a point exactly one-third of their width, as 
Patent, is 
1. The herein-described octagonal blank for 
measured from the ends of the side-forming 
the purpose described having the central rect 
portions a. a, said splits or cuts extending to 
angular bottom-forming portions, the side 
the points, forming, respectively, the four 
corners of the bottom-forming portion, as forming portions C C, the end-forming por 
tions b b, the triangular corner-forming por 
shown. Small notches d are also cut from 
the central portion of each end-forming por 
tions c, located between the ends of the end 
and side forming portions, said corner-form 
tion for the accommodation of the handles, 
ing portions each having a diagonal sit at a 
as hereinafter described. The side and end 
5o forming portions are then bent up on the 
point one-third of their width as measured 
from the ends of the side-forming portions act, 
lines, as indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 
said slits extending to the points forming, re 
1, the corner-forming portions assuming the 
- 
35 
40 
45 
OO 
2 
452,656 
angular portions of said blank between the 
side and end forming portions being slitted 
diagonally into two parts, having the propor 
tion to each other of one to two, said por 
tions being interlocked and double - Seamed, 
in the manner shown and described, to form 
the corners of the pan, the upper edges of 
said side and end portions overturned and 
inclosing the re-enforcing arms and the lat 
eral arms of the handle-loops loosely bearing 
therein, said end portions being cut away 
thereat to permit the movement of said han 
dles in a vertical plane, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
SIAION AARONSON. 
Witnesses: 
M. AARONSON, 
PHILIP WENDLAND. 
25 
35 
5 
O 
spectively, the four corners of the bottom 
forming portion, substantially as specified. 
2. The herein-described bake-pan, compris 
ing the octagonal blank having its end and 
side portions bent up to form the end and 
side portions of the pan and its triangular 
corner portions slitted in the proportion of 
one to three, bent up, interlocked, and double 
seamed to form the corners of the pan, the 
upper edges of the side portions being over 
turned to inclose re-enforcing wires and the 
upper edges of the end portions being over 
turned to inclose arms of said wires and the 
lateral arms of the handles, said end portions 
also having recesses cut therein to permit the 
play of the said handles, substantially as 
specified. 
3. The baking-pain formed from an octag 
onal blank bent up at the sides and ends to 
form the sides and ends of the pan, the tri 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452756.txt	(No Model.) 
D. LIPPY, 
WEHICLE SPRING, 
No. 452,756, 
Patented May 19, 1891. 
2.75 
C-SE 
Fiq 1. 
al....... 
I 
k 
A - 
t 
--- 
h 
 
A47 
 az77 
Z 
us 
a s 
C 
E BE 
X-----e 
- . 
as? 
J 
Azz, 
Zv7/774, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID LIPPY, OF MANSFIELD, ASSIGNOR TO DANIEL L. SPOTTS, OF 
CANTON, OHIO. 
VEHICLE-SPRING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,756, dated May 19, 1891. 
Application filed December 27, 1890, Serial No. 375,938, (No model.) 
To all whon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DAVID LIPPY, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Mansfield, in 
the county of Richland and State of Ohio, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Vehicle-Springs; and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same. 
Myinvention relates to vehicle-springs; and 
the objects of my invention are, first, to pro 
vide a cheap, durable, and efficient spring for 
two or four wheeled vehicles; second, to so 
construct the spring that the vehicle-body 
Will have a swinging motion in any direction, 
obviating all danger in breaking the springs 
When the running-gear is on a twist. I attain 
these objects by the construction shown and 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a top view of my vehicle-spring 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation of same. Fig. 3 is a detail view of my 
Spring having adjustable connections for the 
Spring. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
A indicates the axle-spring, which is formed 
at each end with an eye or thimble a, in which 
are secured one end of the arms B and B', 
having cups D at the free ends thereof, said 
cups having each a slot d therein to allow the 
entrance of the rods E, which have a ball E' 
at each end. 
The body-spring G is provided at each end 
With a cup H, also having a sloth to allow the 
entrance of the rods E, the balls on said rods 
fitting in the cups, as clearly shown. In the 
form shown in Fig. 3 the rods E are threaded 
and are adjustable in the threaded sleeve I. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
From this construction it will be seen that the 
spring members are allowed a universal 
movement and are adjustable. 
In a four-wheeled vehicle the spring A is 
secured to the axle and in line with the axle 
J by clips K. The body-spring is secured upon 
the body by the spring-bar M, both the front 
and back spring. In a two-wheeled vehicle 
the elliptical spring A is secured crosswise 
upon the axle and in line with the wheels, 
one on each side of the body. A cross-bar is 
secured to the under side of the vehicle-seat, 
the ends secured to the center of the body 
spring G supporting the body by the connec 
tions connecting the elliptical springs A and 
G together, giving to the vehicle-body a swing 
ing motion, obviating all horse motion to the 
said vehicle-body. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
Iclaim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A vehicle-spring consisting of the men 
ber having the ends formed with eyes or thim 
bles, the arms having one end fitting in Said 
thimbles and formed with cups, the spring 
member having cups, and the rods having 
balls fitting and bearing in the cups of the 
arms and spring. 
2. A vehicle-spring consisting of the axle 
spring, the arms carried by said spring and 
formed with cups, the body-spring formed 
with cups, the rods having balls arranged in 
said cups, and the sleeve on the rods for ad 
justing said springs. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
IDAVID LIPPY. 
Witnesses: 
- 
C. W. MARRIOTT, 
H. D. KIRTH. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452856.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
SHEAF CARRIER FOR, SEIF BINDING HARWESTERS 
A STEVENS, 
No. 452,856, 
Patented May 26, 1891. 
928. Evlossos 
 
62(Se...-ea 
C4 (46. 52.4a. 
The Norris perets co, Photo-Ho., wash.1NSTON, D. C. 
r 
/?resea-Jaeo'ere, 
2%/6% 
&btov-vi of 
A. STEVENS, 
SHEAF CARRIER FOR SELF BINDING HARWESTERS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 452,856, 
Patented May 26, 1891, 
A. 
S 
A 
A 
A. 
s 
28). Evlosses 
CA C/6 (Al.24. 
--- 
811 uo 11 to 
t/20 yeaJeeee, 
&letov vios 
HE noRRS PETERS co., PHoro-Litho., washington, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANSEL STEVENS, OF GORHAM, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JOHN J. FRYE, 
OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
SHEAF - CARRIER FOR SELF-B N DING HARWESTERS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,856, dated May 26, 1891. 
Application filed April 8, 1890, Serial No. 347,046. (No model.) 
55 
To al., ZUh OT, it inctly concern. 
Be it known that I, ANSEL STEVENs, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Gorham, 
in the county of Cumberland and State of 
Maine, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Sheaf - Carriers for Self 
Binding Harvesters; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My present invention relates to sheaf-car 
riers for self-binding harvesters; and it has 
for its object to provide a carrier which when 
released will dump by the weight of the 
sheaves, and which will insure a prompt and 
clean discharge of the bundles and a quick 
return to the receiving position. 
Bundle-carriers have heretofore been used 
Consisting of laterally-projecting fingers in 
dividually pivoted to a rocking bar, which is 
in turn pivoted to the lower sills of the har 
Vester-frame, the carrier being dumped by 
allowing the outer ends of the fingers to drop 
to the ground and the bundles to roll off. 
My invention relates to this type of car 
riers; but with a view to improving its oper 
ation in the respects above referred to the 
fingers are individually pivoted to a rigid bar 
carried by a Swinging frame or links pivoted 
at their upper ends to the binder-table, so that 
when the carrier is dumped the bar swings in 
under the table, withdrawing the fingers from 
under the bundles and causing them to fall 
in a heap, instead of straggling along. To 
still further help this discharge, I contem 
plate using a supplementary device to move 
outwardly as the bar swings inwardly and 
push or strip the bundles off the fingers. I 
also hang the carrier from the movable bind 
er, so that it need not be made so wide as 
those supported on the harvester-frame, and I 
furthermore pivot the fingers to the bar so 
that they may individually or collectively 
Swing to the rear upon meeting any obstruc 
tion, or move upward upon coming in contact 
with any obstacle from beneath, or upon their 
ends meeting the ground as their supporting 
bar swings inward and upward. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a rear elevation of a self-binder with one of 
my improved carriers attached, it being shown 
in receiving position by full lines and in its 
dumping position by broken lines. Fig. 2 is 
a perspective view of the carrier detached, 
showing the details of its construction. 
The machine shown needs no description, 
being of the well-known Marsh-Appleby type. 
The carrier may, however, be applied to any 
other type. 
A. A denote a pair of short stout angle-iron 
brackets, riveted or otherwise secured to the 
binder-table near its front and rear outer 
corners. B B are two links pivoted at their 
upper ends to these brackets, and forming a 
swinging frame carrying at its lower end the 
finger-supporting bar C, shown in this in 
stance as a channel-iron. 
The carrier-fingers D may be made of stout 
steel wire. They are slightly bent upward at 
their outer ends to prevent the bundles jolt 
ing or rolling off. At their inner ends they 
are bent at a right angle, forming short Ver 
tical pivoted portions a, which have bearings 
in the upper and lower horizontal flanges b c 
of the channel-iron bar. From the lower end 
of this vertical pivot they are bent back upon 
and parallel with the body of the finger, form 
ing a cranked end, as at d. The upper flange 
b of the channel-iron is formed with circular 
openings or perforations to receive the piv 
otal portions of the fingers, said openings be 
ing large enough to allow slight play, for a 
purpose presently to be described. The lower 
flange c of the channel-iron is provided with 
slots e, cut transversely, or so as to stand 
lengthwise of tile fingers in their receiving 
position. 
E is a chain connecting the cranked ends 
d of all the fingers together. 
F is a spring, (here shown as a coil) one end 
being connected to the front end of the chain 
and the other to the swinging frame-link B, 
the spring serving to keep the fingers extend 
ed normally at a right angle to the bar C, or, 
in other words, in their receiving position, and 
any suitable stop being provided to prevent 
their being carried too far forward-as, for ex 
ample, a lug or lugs, as shown at 5, on the 
lowerflange of the channel-bar for the cranked 
ends d of the fingers to strike against. 
To one of the swinging frame-links B, pref 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 
O 
25 
35 
45 
3 
452,856 
erably the rear one, is connected the pitman 
G, said pitman extending over and being at 
tached at its other end to a crankfon a short 
shaft g, mounted on the seat-plank in conven 
ient position to be rocked in either direction 
by the driver putting his foot on the pedalsh, 
The crank and the pitman may be arranged 
in such relative positions that when the car 
rier, as shown in Fig. 1, is in its receiving po 
sition they shall form, a toggle-lock to hold it 
up against the weight of the bundles. Two 
pedals are shown in the drawings, one pro 
jecting from each side of the shaft g. With 
this construction it is not necessary to use 
the toggle-lock, as the driver may by holding 
his foot upon the grainward pedal keep the 
carrier from dumping. 
Pivoted to the brackets. A by suitable lugs 
or straps i, so as to swing in the direction of 
the length of the fingers, is the board J, form 
ing the supplementary bundle-discharging 
device above referred to. The board prefer 
erably occupies nearly the entire space be 
tween the frame-links and prevents the bun 
dles from jolting or falling off that side of 
the carrier. As a convenient means for mov 
ing this push-board in opposition to the move 
ment of the Swinging carrier-frame, I pivot to 
a leg II, depending from the underlying arm 
of the binder, or to any other suitable part of 
the frame, a lever I, whose lower end hangs 
down inside of and against the finger-support 
ing bar C, and whose upper end extends some 
distance above its pivot, where it bears upon 
the upper part of the push-board, so as to 
force the latter outward as its upper end is 
carried in Ward by the finger-supporting bar 
in the act of dumping the carrier. I do not 
Wish to be limited to this means for actuating 
the Supplementary discharger, nor, indeed, to 
the use of the discharger itself. When used, 
it may be actuated by any other suitable 
means, actuated either by the carrier in the 
act of dumping or by extraneous devices; nor 
do I intend to confine myself to the details of 
construction of the other parts, as they may 
be varied within wide limits and still be with 
in the spirit and scope of my invention. 
The construction being as above described, 
the operation is simple. When a sufficient 
number of bundles have been bound and 
dropped into the carrier to form a shock, 
(usually six or eight,) the driver, without nec 
essarily stopping the machine, presses his 
foot upon the treadleh, and breaks the tog 
gle-lock, when the weight of the bundles 
upon the fingers causes the carrier to be au 
tomatically dumped, the driver, if he finds it 
desirable, assisting the withdrawal of the fin 
ger's by continuing the pressure on the treadle. 
In this dumping action the finger-supporting 
bar, instead of rocking on its own axis, 
SWings about the pivots of the frame-links 
some distance above. This draws the fingers 
in under the machine and drops their outer 
ends to the ground, giving them a much 
steeper inclination when in the discharging 
position than if the bar simply rocked on its 
own axis. The slots in the lower flange of 
the channel-iron not only permit the Outer 
ends of the fingers to move up so as to ride 
over any obstructions, but allow the bar to 
continue to move after the fingers have struck 
the ground. As the bar moves inward in this 
dumping action it carries the lower end of 
the push-board lever with it, rocking it on its 
pivot and forcing its upper end against the 
board, pushing it outward and causing it to 
strip or shove the bundles off the fingers. 
After the sheaves are dropped gravity causes 
all the parts to return promptly to their nor 
mal position in time to catch the next bull 
dle falling from the binder. As above stated, 
I prefer to connect the cranked inner ends of 
the fingers by a chain instead of a rigid bar, 
as usual, as this being a flexible connection 
permits some of the fingers to Swing horizon-. 
tally without the others. In some connec 
tions, however, I may use the bar. Though 
the finger-supporting bar is here shown as a 
channel-iron, it may be otherwise formed, and 
the bearings for the vertical pivots of the 
fingers altered accordingly. It is also obvi 
ous that the feature of the upwardly-moving 
fingers may be used in connection with a 
supporting-bar which rocks on its own axis, 
instead of swinging bodily, as herein shown. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A sheaf-carrier having a finger-support 
ing bar pivoted at the side of the machine, a 
plurality of fingers projecting laterally from 
the bar, vertical pivots for the fingers, where 
by they are adapted to swing sidewise, and a 
flexible connection between the several fin 
gers, substantially as described. 
2. A sheaf-carrier for binders, consisting of 
laterally-projecting fingers individually piv 
oted so as to turn rearward on a supporting 
bar mounted in a swinging frame pivoted at 
its upper end so as to swing toward and from 
the side of the machine. 
3. The combination of a binder with a sheaf 
carrier, the latter consisting of a frame piv 
oted to the binder and carrying a finger-Sulp 
porting bar in its lower part, from which pro 
ject laterally a series of carrying-fingers, 
whereby the carrier in dumping swings in 
ward under the binder. 
4. A sheaf-carrier for binders, consisting of 
a frame pivoted at its upper end, a finger 
supporting bar fixed in the lower part of the 
frame and carrying a set of fingers individu 
ally pivoted so as to swing rearward upon 
Ieeting any obstruction as the machine moves 
forward, and to move upward upon striking 
the ground or any obstacle from the under 
5. A sheaf-carrier for binders, consisting of 
the channel-iron bar C, having perforations 
in its upper flange and slots transversely of 
its length in its lower flange, fingers D, having 
vertical pivotal portions Ct at their inner ends, 
side. 
- 
IO 
25 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
Go 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 5 
IO 
II5 
I25 
452,856 
O 
and cranks d, the latter being connected to 
gether by a chain, a spring F, connected to 
the chain and the bar, said bar being fixed in 
the lower ends of links pivoted at their upper 
ends, and means for swinging the links inward 
to dump the carrier. 
6. The combination of a sheaf-carrier con 
sisting of fingers projecting laterally from a 
supporting-bar, the latter being mounted in a 
frame so as to swing bodily in dumping, a 
supplemental discharger pivoted above the 
Supporting-bar, a discharger-operating lever 
pivoted between its ends hehind the dis 
charger, its lower end extending within the 
path of the carrier as it moves inward in 
dumping and its upper end being arranged 
to strike the discharger and push the same 
OutWard, the pitman G, connecting the frame 
of the carrier with a crank on the shaft g, and 
2O the treadleh, substantially as described. 
7. The combination of the links B, pivoted 
at their upper ends to the binder and carry 
ing the channel-iron bar Cat their lower ends, 
the fingers D, pivoted to the bar so as to move 
individually or collectively to the rear, means 
for holding them extended in receiving posi 
tion, and means for permitting them to rise 
upon meeting an obstruction from the under 
side, the push-board J, pivoted at its upper 
end to the binder, the lever I, also pivoted to 
the binder and extending down behind the 
supporting-bar, the pitman G, the crank f, 
the shaft g, and the treadle h, all substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ANSEL STEVENS. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
H. B. ZEVELY, 
J. A. GOLDSBOROUGH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US452956.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet l. 
H. S. PRENTISS, 
SYNCHRONIZER FOR ELECTRIC CLOCKS, 
No. 452,956. 
Patented May 26, 1891. 
 
Dipngrum 
 
 
 
 
 
li 
 
 
ar 
La 
al I 
s 
is 
ot. It 
 
W 
w 
- 
-1 
a 
--1, 
2 
sea 
7NA 
t & a. 
'NYE 
r. 
E 
- 1 
s 
- 
- - 
- 
y 
 
we 
so 
-axis 
a 7 W. 
2. 
2 SX 
t R. 
EZF a; 6 : 
- 
: 
; 
E so ..., \ 
E led y. 
D 
:Sri 
1- 
AS / 
w feat 
3s2. It 
S as 
see 
Sists 
a. 
Z 
it 
WITNESSES ar- 
<7, 24, 24. 2.-- 
INVENTOR 
Jey S. Freytes, 
ATTORNEY 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
H. S. PRENTISS, 
SYNCHRONIZER FOR ELECTRIC CLOCKS, 
No. 452,956, 
Patented May 26, 1891, 
 
27, 9222; 4. % 
< 1. (2-4--- 
-3- 
NVENTOR 
s in a 
e 
Cufulculus 
ATTORNEY 
S.Freyss 
THE MORRIS PETERs Co., Photo-ITHo., washington, b, c. 
SYNCHRONIZER FOR ELECTRIC CLOCKS, 
Patented May 26, 1891. 
 
 ; ;f-------?-----+ | ;------ 
--------* 
----i?-.--j|-------- - - - - - 
 
INVENTOR 
St. 
BY sey 
:, ATTORNEY 
(N0 Model.) 
H. S. PRENTISS, 
SYNCHRONIZER FOR ELECTRIC CLOCKS, 
4. Sheets 
Sheet 4. 
No. 452,956. 
 
Patented May 26, 1891, 
 
 
"s------ 
tr 
|||||| 
- INVENTOR 
s Prey 
Clilulculu 
ATTO 
RNEY 
tiss, 
BY 
He noRais petes co, Pho 
set 
o, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HENRY S. PRENT ISS, OF ELIZABET II, N E W J ERS EY. 
SYNCHRONIZER FOR ELECTRIC clocks. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 452,956, dated May 26, 1891. 
Application filed June 6, 1890, Serial No. 354,448, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, IIENRY S. PRENTISs, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Elizabeth, in the county of Union and State 
of New Jersey, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Synchronizers 
for Electric Clocks, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention has reference to synchroniz 
ers for electric or electro-mechanical clocks; 
and it consists, essentially, in combining with 
a Series of secondary clocks a primary clock 
or a transmitter having an incorporated 
Synchronizing device for sending repeated 
impulses through the secondary clocks at the 
expiration of the synchronizing period. The 
primary clock or transmitter is provided with 
a main-circuit closer through which the cir 
cuit of the mainline is closed at determinated 
intervals to actuate the secondary clocks, and 
with means for switching the current through 
the synchronizing line at a certain prede 
termined time before the expiration of the 
Synchronizing period. Each secondary clock 
embodies a Switch, which, dependent on the 
time indicated by the clock, either establishes 
the circuit through the clock to receive the 
impulses sent through the synchronizing line 
prior to the expiration of the synchronizing 
period to receive the same, and also part or 
all of the impulses of the synchronizing-cir 
cuit closer, or it cuts the clock out of the cir 
cuit to lose part or all of the impulses sent 
through the Synchronizing line prior to the 
expiration of the synchronizing period, and 
also the impulses sent by the synchronizing 
circuit closer. In practice the main-line cir 
cuit is broken at the main switch and closed 
through the synchronizing line five minutes 
in advance of the hour or the expiration of 
the synchronizing period, whereby all the 
hands of the clocks continue to be advanced 
as before, with the exception of those which 
may be fast, which latter lose part or all of 
the impulses. At the end of each hour or 
the expiration of the synchronizing period the 
synchronizing-circuit closer is permitted to 
operate and repeated impulses are sent 
through the synchronizing line. Such of the 
clocks as may be slow receive these impulses 
and their hands are advanced until brought 
to the correct time, provided the error does 
not exceed certain limits. Such as may be 
6o 
correct lose all the synchronizing impulses, 
and those which may be or may have been 55 
fast, besides losing part or all of the impulses 
sent through the synchronizing line before 
the expiration of the synchronizing period, 
lose also the synchronizing impulses at the 
termination of the synchronizing period. 
\ly invention furthermore embodies certain 
details in construction of the synchronizing 
devices and switches, all of which are more 
fully pointed out in the following specifica 
tion and claims, and illustrated in the accom- 65. 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a face view of a trans 
mitter provided with my in proved synchro 
nizing-circuit closer and switch. Fig. 2 is a 
side view thereof. Fig. 3 is a face view of 7o 
the transmitter, showing the synchronizing 
circuit closer in a different position from that 
shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a face view of a 
secondary clock embodying my invention, 
Fig. 5 is a diagram illustrating the electrical 75 
connections, all the clocks being here shown 
as indicating the correct time. Fig. 6 is a 
similar diagram, some of the clocks, however, 
being slow and other's fast, 
Similar letters and figures indicate corre- 8o 
Sponding parts. 
In these drawings I have shown my inven 
tion applied to electro-mechanical clocks in 
which the movements are normally held out 
of action and released periodically to move 85 
the hands through a space corresponding to 
the time elapsed. IIowever I do not wish to 
restrict myself to the use of the synchroniz 
ing device to this particular class of clocks, 
as it can be equally well applied to purely 9o 
electrical clocks. 
Referring at present to Figs. I and 2, the 
letter A designates the frame of the trans 
mitter T, said frame being provided with suit 
able bearings for the Several parts of a train 95 
constituting a usual form of clock-movement, 
of which B is the mainspring, and C, the first 
or great wheel. This latter wheel is ulti 
mately connected through the train of wheels 
with a pinion l, rigidly mounted upon an ar- I Oo 
bor c, upon which latter is secured to turn 
there with a scape-wheel C, formed with a 
number of radial arms (l, d, d, and d, pro 
vided near their outer terminals with later 
ally-projecting teeth 1, 2, 3, and 4. These IO5 
teeth are adapted to be successively engaged 
m 
O 
25 
35 
45 
g 
452,956 
in the rotation of the scape-wheel by the pal 
lets 5 and 6 of pallet-lever ID, arranged to vi 
brate about a pivot g, the motion of said pal 
let-lever being limited in either direction by 
5 contact with suitable stops, such as e and f. 
The pallets 5 and 6 of the pallet-lever it will 
be noticed are in different vertical and hori 
Zontal planes. Referring to Fig. 1, the palliet 
lever is normally held against the stop e by 
to the pressure of a spring g', in which position 
of the pallet-level the upper pallet 5 thereon 
is in the proper position to cross the path of 
the teeth on the scape-wheel and to prevent 
the rotation of the latter by engagement with 
I5 the upper portion of one of its teeth-say tooth 
1. Consequently the train is held out of action. 
If now the pallet-lever ID is turned about its 
pivot in the direction of arrow 1*, Fig. 1, 
tooth I is released from pallet 5 and the scape 
2O wheel can turn in the direction of arrow 2. 
The pallet-lever now being against pallet f, 
the stop 6 thereon is in the proper plane to 
engage with the lower edge of tooth 1. Con 
Sequently the scape-wheel at this stage ro 
25 tates Only through a very small arc when its 
motion is arrested by pallet G. The pallet 
lever now returning to its normal position 
against stop e, pallet 6 releases tooth 1 and 
the Scape-Wheel completes a quarter of a revo 
3o lution, whereupon its motion is arrested by 
engagement of its tooth 2 with pallet 5 of the 
anchor. The proportions of the train in this 
example are such that for each quarter of a 
revolution of the scape-wheel the hands move 
35 over a space on the dial corresponding to one 
minute of time. 
The release of the transmitter-movement 
can be effected by various means-for in 
stance, by its connection with a master or 
40 primary clock by the rod F, which depresses 
the pallet-lever D once a minute; or the trans 
mitter could embody a train having an inter 
mittent movement-such, for instance, as that 
described in Letters Patent No. 416,804, 
45 granted to me December 10, 1889, whereby it 
Would constitute both a primary clock and a 
transmitter. 
The circuit-closer of the transmitter con 
Sists, preferably, of a contact-wheel G and a 
5o brush H, the former being connected by gears 
k and l with the arbor c of the scape-wheel, 
Said geal's being so proportioned that the con 
tact is closed once for each quarter of a revo 
ution of the scape-wheel-that is to say, once 
On the arbor E of the minute-hand n is 
rigidly mounted a disk I, provided with two 
projections or pins 7 and S, arranged on op 
posite sides thereof. The pin 7 is adapted in 
6o the rotation of the disk to engage with one 
end of a Swinging arm or lever J, pivoted at 
in to the frame. This arm or lever, which I 
shall hereinafter term the synchronizing-cir 
cuit closer, can swing freely about its pivot, 
65 and when not engaged by the pin 7 hangs 
in an approximately perpendicular position. 
On the hub of the lever, to one side of the 
55 every minute. 
center line, is formed a contact O, opposite to 
which and extending past the same is ar 
ranged a spring contact-arm K, secured to a 
suitable post p, insulated from the frame of 
the transmitter. In the rotation of the disk 
in the direction of arrow 3, Fig. , the pin 
once in each rotation engages with the Syn 
chronizing-circuit closer and gradually turns 
it about its pivot until it reaches the position 
shown in Fig. 3, whereupon in the further 
rotation of the disk the circuit-closer is re 
leased. The impulse thereby imparted to the 
circuit-closer causes repeated vibrations of the 
same, and for each oscillation the circuit is 
closed once at the contact O and contact K. 
The pin S on the opposite side of the disk I 
is arranged to engage with one arm of a le 
ver or switch L, pivoted at q to the frame and 
provided at its lower end with a contact or 
brush r, playing between two stationary coln 
tacts S s', insulated from the frame. A spring 
l, bearing against the switch, normally holds 
the contact against the contact S. When, 
however, the pin S engages with the switch, 
it is turned about its pivot to bring the con 
tact 1 against stop s'. The pin, coming op 
posite a notched portion of the lever, permits 
the same to fall back to its normal position. 
It will be noticed that the contact 7 of the 
switch L is brought into contact with the con 
tacts' at some time before the hour or the 
expiration of the synchronizing period, and 
in practice I make this contact preferably at 
least five minutes before the hour, for a rea 
son to be subsequently explained. 
The secondary clock S, referring to Fig. 4, 
is identical in construction to the transmitter 
as far as the train and escapement devices 
are concerned, with the exception that the 
pallet-lever D' is provided with an armature 
?n', in juxtaposition with which is arranged 
an electro-magnet M, which attracts said ar 
mature whenever one of its bobbins is vital 
ized. 
On the arbor of the minute-hand an is rig 
idly mounted a cam I, which engages with a 
switch L', pivoted at q' to the frame and pro 
vided at its lower end with a contact or brush 
'', playing between two contacts ss, insul 
lated from the frame. A spring t', bearing 
against the Switch, holds the same against the 
cam. While the upper end of the switch is 
in contact with the elevated portion of the 
cam the contact ris in engagement with con 
tacts. When, however, said switch is in en 
gagement with the depressed portion of the 
cam, the contact ' is in engagement with con 
tacts. It will be noticed that approximately 
one-half of the cam I is elevated and one 
half depressed, so that for one-half an hour 
the contact i? is in engagement with the con 
tacts and for the same time it is in engage 
ment with contact s. 
It now remains to describe the arrangement 
of the circuits and the operation of the syn 
chronizing device. 
In Fig. 5 I have shown the clocks arranged 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IIO 
II5 
25 
I 30 
452,956 
3. 
O 
in a Series, T being the primary clock or 
transmitter, G H the circuit-closer, S, S', and 
S the several secondary clocks, B* the bat 
tery or other source of electricity, and M, MI', 
and M the respective electro-magnets em 
bodied in the secondary clocks. These elec 
tro-magnets may be double wound-i. e., cov 
ered with a coil each of the main line and 
Synchronizing line-or, as shown in this draw 
ing, one coil of the magnet is connected with 
th main line and one with the synchronizing 
16. 
The connections of the transmitter or pri 
mary clock are as follows: One pole of bat 
tery B is connected by wire 10 with the con 
tactO of synchronizing-circuit closer J. From 
thence a wire 11 connects with the disk G of 
circuit-closer G. H. From H a wire leads to 
the contact r of the main switch L, and con 
tact S thereof is connected by wire 12 with 
the coil n of the electro-magnets M, M', MI, 
12 being the return-wire to the opposite pole 
of the battery, 
The Synchonizing-circuit is as follows: The 
contact S' of main switch L is connected by 
a Wire 14 with the contact r" of switch-lever 
L' of secondary clock S. Wire 15 connects 
contact K with wire 14. Wire 16 connects 
contacts of switch L' with one end of the 
coil in of electro-magnet M. Wire 17 con 
nects the opposite end of the coil with con 
tact r* of switch L on clock S', the contacts 
of Said switch being connected with one end 
of the coil on of electro-magnet M' by wire 
18. The opposite end of said coilis connected 
by wire 19 with contact r of switch Li on 
clock S. The contacts of clock S is simi 
larly connected by wire 20 to coil n of clock 
S', the opposite end of said coil being con 
nected by wire 21 with the return-wire 12. 
The contacts s, S', and s are connected, re 
spectively, with wires 17, 19, and 21 by wires 
22, 23, and 24, suitable resistances R., R', and 
R being interposed to balance the line in 
case any one of the clocks is cut out. Dur 
ing the main part of the hour the switch L 
is in a position to close the circuit at con 
tact S. The impulses now pass through the 
main-line wire as follows: From one pole of 
the battery over wires 10 and 11 to contact 
G, contact H, wire 13, contact r of the main 
switch, contacts through the coils an of the 
electro-magnets M, M', and M, and wire 12* 
to the battery, thereby advancing the hands 
of the clocks by one minute for each impulse. 
When, however, the hands of the primary 
clock or transmitter are within five minutes 
of the hour or expiration of the synchroniz 
ing period, the pin 8 engages the main switch 
and throws it into the position shown in Fig. 
5. Consequently the circuit is now closed 
through the synchronizing line, as follows: 
From one pole of battery B, over wires 10 
and 11, contacts G. H., wire 13, contact r, con 
tact S', wire 14, contact r", stop s, wire 16, 
coil in of electro-magnet M, wire 17, contact 
r', contacts, wire 18, coil in of electro-mag 
net MI', wire 19 to contact r, contacts, Wire 
20, coil in of electro-magnet M, wire 21, and 
through return-wire 12* to the opposite pole 
of battery, thereby releasing the train of the 
secondary clocks once each minute, as be 
fore. At the termination of the hour or the 
synchronizing period the synchronizing-cir 
cuit closer drops, and repeated electricalim 
pulses are sent into the synchronizing line. 
The clocks all being correct in Fig. 5, the 
switches L', L*, and L at the termination of 
the hour or synchronizing period will be in 
position to bring contacts , 
, and 1 into 
engagement with contacts s', S', and s, Con 
sequently all the impulses sent by the Syn 
chronizing-circuit closer J will be lost-i.e., 
passed through the resistances R. R', and R. 
In Fig. G I have shown the clock S correct, 
clock S' slow, and clock S9 as having been 
The time on the pri 
fast by six minutes. 
mary clock is shown within one minute of 
the hour. Consequently the current will pass 
through the circuit as follows: battery B, 
wires 10 and 11, contacts G. H., wire 13, con 
tacts and s', wire 14, contacts i' and s, wire 
16, coil m3 of electro-magnet M, thereby bring 
ing the clock S to the hour, whereupon its 
switch is turned to bring contact ' against 
contact s?. From the coil in 
the current 
passes over wire 17, contacts 's', wire IS, and 
coil n of electro-magnet M' to advance the 
hands of the clock S' by one minute. From 
coil 7 of electro-magnet M'the current passes 
over wire 19, contacts 
s", resistance R', 
wires 24 and 21 to return-wire 12 and to the 
battery. Consequently the clock Sis cut out 
of the circuit another minute. 
At the hour or the expiration of the Syn 
chronizing period the synchronizing-circuit 
closer is released and the circuit is now closed 
as follows: battery B, over wire 10, contacts 
oIX, wires 15 and 14, resistance R, wire 22, Wire 
17, contacts rs, wire 18, and coil in of elec 
tro-magnet M', thereby advancing the hands 
of clock S' one minute and bringing it to the 
correct time, whereupon the switch L'breaks 
contact at sand closes it at St. From the coil 
mofelectro-magnetM'the current passes over 
wire 19, contacts and s, resistance R, and 
wires 24, 21, and 12* back to the battery. The 
next impulse sent by the synchronizing in 
pulse will be lost to all the clocks. It will be 
noticed that clock S* has remained out of ac 
tion for five minutes and is still one minute 
fast. At the next period it will be cut out of 
synchronizing circuit for one impulse and 
then resume action. 
It is evident that the circuit could be closed 
through the synchronizing line ten or more 
minutes in advance of the expiration of the 
synchronizing period. However, five minutes 
in advance is sufficient for all practical pur 
poses. 
I do not wish to restrict myself to the gravi 
tating synchronizing device herein described, 
as it is evident that a spring could be substi 
tuted to repeatedly close the circuit, 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
IOC 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
N 
- 
452,956 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
5 O 
55 
70 
75 
In practice I have found that the synchro 
nizing-lever makes from three to five vibra 
tions at each release, so that an error of three 
to five minutes can be rectified at the lapse. 
of each synchronizing period. 
The construction of the transmitter-move 
ment, the secondary clock-movement, as well 
as the connections between the transmittel 
and the primary clock and the main-circuit 
closer I have fully described in a pending 
application, filed June 6, 1890, Serial No. 
354,447, and therefore I do not claim the same 
in this application. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an electric-clock system, a switch actu 
ated at determined intervals to break the coll 
nection at the main line and to close it 
through a synchronizing line, in combination 
With a series of switches, one for each clock, 
for throwing such clocks into or out of 
the synchronizing line, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. A primary clock or transmitter provided 
With a main-circuit closer, a main Switch, and 
a synchronizing-circuit closer automatically 
set into operation at determinate intervals by 
the clock or transmitter, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In an electric-clock system, a switch actu 
ated at determinate intervals to break the 
connection at the main line and to close it 
through the synchronizing line and a syn 
chronizing-circuit closer adapted to repeat 
edly close the circuit through the synchroniz 
ing line at the expiration of the synchroniz 
ing period, substantially as described. 
4. In an electric-clock system, a synchro 
nizing - circuit closer adapted to repeatedly 
close the circuit through the synchronizing 
line at determinate intervals, in combination 
with switches for throwing the respective 
clocks into or out of the circuit, substantially 
as described. 
5. In an electric-clock system, a primary 
clock (or transmitter) provided with a main 
circuit closer, a synchronizing-circuit closer, 
and a main switch, in combination with a se 
ries of secondary clocks, each provided with 
a switch to throw its respective clock into or 
out of the synchronizing line, a battery, and 
electrical connections, substantially as de 
6. A primary clock (or transmitter) pro 
vided with a switch for closing the circuit 
through the synchronizing line in advance of 
the synchronizing period, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
7. A primary clock (or transmitter) pro 
vided with a switch for closing the circuit 
through the Synchronizing line in advance of 
the synchronizing period, in combination with 
a circuit-closer thrown into action at the ex 
piration of the synchronizing period, substan 
tially as described. 
8. A primary clock (or transmitter) pro 
vided with means for closing the circuit 
scribed. 
- 
through the mainline and a switch for break 
ing said circuit and closing it through a Syn 
chronizing line, in combination with a circuit. 
closer thrown into action at the expi ration of 
the synchronizing period to send repeated in 
pulses through the synchronizing line, Sub 
stantially as described. 
9. A circuit-closer consisting of the pendu 
lous lever J, combined with contacts O and k, 
substantially as described. 
10. A circuit-closer consisting of the pendul 
lous lever J, combined with the contacts O and 
k and disk I, engaging with said lever, Sub 
stantially as described. 
11. A clock provided with a main-circuit 
closer, a switch, and a synchronizing-circuit 
closer, in combination with the disk I for actill 
ating the switch and releasing the Synchro 
nizing - circuit closer, substantially as de 
scribed. 
12. In combination with a primary clock or 
transmitter, a circuit-closer consisting of a 
vibratory arm or lever released at determined 
intervals by the clock for repeatedly making 
contact, and a flexible contact arranged to be 
engaged by said arm or lever in its vibra 
tions, substantially as described. 
13. A secondary electric clock provided 
with a doubly-wound magnet or two separate 
magnets acting upon a common al'mature and 
respectively connected with the main line and 
synchronizing line, and a switch adapted to 
close the circuit through the clock or to cut 
the clock out of the circuit, substantially as 
described. 
14. In an electric-clock system, two electric 
circuits, a series of electric clocks connected 
with the two circuits, a switch for closing the 
current through either circuit, and means 
whereby the clocks are advanced by the pas 
sage of the current through either circuit, 
substantially as described. 
15. In an electric-clock system, two electric 
circuits, a series of electric clocks connected 
with the two circuits, whereby the clocks are 
advanced by the passage of the current 
through either circuit, and means actuated by 
the clocks to throw said clocks out of one of 
the circuits, substantially as described. 
16. In an electric-clock system, two electric 
circuits, two magnets arranged to act upon a 
common armature and connected independ 
ently with the two circuits, or a doubly 
wound magnet similarly connected, whereby 
the passage of the current through either cir 
cuit or through both circuits at the same time 
will produce an equivalent effect upon the 
armature, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 2d day of June, 
1S90. 
HENRY S. PRENTISS. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE A. CROOK, 
L. N. LEGENDRE. 
IOS 
IO 
(I5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453056.txt	(No Model.) 
T. W. WELSH. 
CASTING PLANT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 453,056. 
- 
Hil 
= \\i. 
\ 
Patented May 26, 1891. 
| 
|| 
} \)/24. 
ARIA Ally" || || 
A "Y2" || || || 5 || 
NEA-2 is: 
| || IN), 
-\ 
t | E. 
| E. 
i? 3. 
4: 
2. | 
i. 
At III: 
SS 
T | 
| 
IIHF: 
-- 
| 
 
ESS 
i 
t 
H | 
R s 
! 
3, 
SNN ill 
.. 
S. E. % 
Sk 2a3 24 
II. 
ls 
in S. NISA || || 
He is 
& 
Sis 
3. S. S 
| 
A.  t 
l 
4/, as N 
Y. RS t 
: Ell 
ASEL/SE 
Mm 
t 
g 
a 
11 
six 11 
th easis y 
s 
\ 
| || 
\ 
III, III || || 
3'a'.C.7 g (223, 
Systis 
| | | 
rer----- 
-mm- 
| 
: 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
T. W. WELSH. 
CASTING PLANT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 453,056, 
Patented May 26, 1891. 
 
 
Lili 
SS . S. y 
S 
NSN 
SNS 
a 
Y. 
RS 
S. 
is 
DT 
| 
H 
Y, 
O 
Ng) 
s 
t 
t 
A. n. 
s (i. 
1. 
milit 
2, 
34 6-4a 26-4 % 
e-M 
T 
ka 
S.S.NS.sSSS.N 
C C 
is 
N 
3) 
3) 
BY 
o 
SSR 
72.72% 
7%f7% (2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS W. WELSH, OF WILMERDING, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
CASTING-PLANT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 453,056, dated May 26, 1891. 
Application filed November 13, 1890, Serial No, 371,290, (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it nually concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS W. WELSH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wil 
merding, in the county of Allegheny and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented or discovered 
a certain new and useful Improvement in the 
Manufacture of Castings, of which improve 
ment the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to enable the 
manufacture of castings to be conducted with 
materially greater expedition, and with a sub 
stantial reduction of labor and expense as 
Compared with the system ordinarily prac 
ticed. 
To this end my invention, generally stated, 
consists in the combination of a molding-ma 
chine, a cupola, and a series of carriers con 
nected to an endless chain, which is located 
between the molding-machine and cupola, 
and is adapted to traverse longitudinally be 
tween the molding-machine and cupola and a 
cleaning-space. 
The improvement claimed is hereinafter 
fully set forth. 
In the ordinary foundry practice of me 
chanical molding, as is familiar to those 
skilled in the art, the flasks or mold-boxes, 
after being filled with sand and rammed, are 
carried by hand from the molding-machine to 
a location on the floor convenient for pouring, 
and after the mold-cavities have been filled 
with molten metal are allowed to remain un 
til the metal has solidified, after which the 
castings are removed and carried to the clean 
ing-room, and the flasks are brought back to 
the molding-machine for the formation of 
new molds. These operations involve con 
siderable time and labor, and require a large 
area of floor-space, particularly when a com 
paratively large number of molds is to be 
made daily. 
My invention is specially designed for the 
production of a large daily output of cast 
ings, in which it has been found to reduce in 
a substantial degree the objections above 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in perspective of a foundry - plant 
adapted to the practice of my invention, and 
Fig. 2 a plan or top view exemplifying the ex 
tended application of the same. 
In the practice of my invention one or more 
molding-machines I, of any suitable and pre 
ferred construction, are located in a foundry, 
preferably adjacent to one of its ends and at 
a convenient distance laterally from one or 
more cupolas or melting-furnaces 2. A clean 
ing space or room 17 is located at or near the 
opposite end of the foundry for the reception 
of the flasks 16, while the molds are opened 
and the castings removed, and for the clean 
ing of the castings, which latter operation is 
usually effected in rattlers or cleaning-barrels 
7. "A series of traversing carriers or tables 3 
is provided for the conveyance of the flasks, 
each of which carriers is of size and strength 
proper to support flasks containing finished 
molds, and is mounted upon wheels 4, which 
move over a track 5, extending longitudi 
nally along the foundry-floor between the 
molding-machines and the cupolas. Each of 
the carriers is connected to an endless chain 6, 
which at its ends passes around and engages 
the teeth of sprocket-wheels S and 9, which 
are fixed upon vertical shafts 10 and 11. One 
of said sprocket-wheels, as S, is connected 
with and rotated by mechanism to which 
power is imparted from a suitable prime 
mover, and serves as a driver to impart longi 
tudinal movement to the chain and connected 
carriers. The sprocket-wheel at the opposite 
extremity of the endless chain acts as an idler 
or guide wheel to maintain the parallelism of 
the sides of the endless chain and reverse the 
direction of movement of its links and the 
carriers connected thereto. 
The molding-machines are supplied with 
sand by a conveyer 12, and are in the instance 
shown operated by fluid supplied by a pipe 
13 and brought to the required degree of 
working pressure by a forcing-pump 14 and 
accumulator 15. The structural and opera 
tive details of the molding-machines and the 
specific details of construction of the carrier 
chain and carriers do not, however, formany. 
part of my present invention, and not being 
necessary to an understanding of its govern 
ing principle and operation will not be herein 
Fig. 2 illustrates an extension of the sys 
item above described by the employment of 
an additional series of connected traversing 
carriers on the opposite side of the cupolas, 
said series operating in conjunction with the 
mentioned. 
described. 
- 
- 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
EOC) 
2 
453,056 
w 
C 
cupolas and with another machine or ma 
chines located in relation to the additional 
Series of carriers similarly to those of the se 
ries above described. 
In the manufacture of castings in accord 
ance with my invention the metal is melted 
in the usual manner in the cupolas and a 
flask is deposited on the table of each of the 
molding-machines, by which the flasks are 
properly filled and rammed, forming the molds 
required for the castings. Each flask is then 
placed on one of the carriers or tables, to the 
connected series of which movement is im 
parted by the driving mechanism in the di 
rections indicated by the arrows, and the 
flasks are thereby conveyed, primarily, to 
points adjacent to the cupolas, where the 
mold-cavity of each is filled with molten metal. 
The flasks and filled molds are thereupon con 
Veyed by the continued movement of the car 
liers to the cleaning-room, the molten metal 
being wholly or to a material degree solidified 
in the traverse of the molds thereto, so that 
the castings are ready for removal from the 
molds upon or very shortly after their arrival 
at the cleaning-room, according to the greater 
or less length of the series of carriers and the 
The 
speed at which the latter are moved. 
flasks are then taken off the carriers, the cast 
ings and sand removed, and the castings are 
put into the rattlers to be cleaned. After be 
ing emptied the flasks are again placed upon 
the carriers, by the continued movement of 
which they are returned to the molding-ma 
chines, and the several operations above de 
Scribed are repeated. 
It will be seen that the several steps of form 
ing the molds, conveying the completed molds 
to the cupolas, pouring the molten metal, 
conveying the filled molds to the cleaning 
room, and returning the empty flasks to the 
molding-machines, are performed continu 
ously and in orderly sequence with each 
flask or set of flasks, accordingly as one or 
more molding-machines are employed. These 
Several operations are, further, simultaneous- my hand. 
ly performed with different flasks or different 
Sets of flasks, as the case may be, and as the 
Solidification of the molten metal is effected, 
Or nearly So, at the period when the flasks 
reach the point of removal from the carriers, 
a resultant saving of time, labor in handling, 
and floor-space for stowage is attained, there 
by correspondingly facilitating and expedit 
ing the production of the castings, increasing 5 
the output of a plant, and reducing the cost 
of manufacture. 
I claim as my invention and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent- 
1. In a plant for the manufacture of cast- 6 
ings, the combination of a molding-machine, 
a cupola, an endless chain located wholly ex 
terior to and between the molding-machine 
and cupola and adapted to traverse longi 
tudinally between said molding-machine and 6 
cupola and a cleaning-space located adjacent 
to the further extremity of the chain, a series 
of carriers or flask-supporting tables con 
nected to said chain, and driving mechanism 
for effecting the longitudinal movement of 
said chain, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a plant for the manufacture of cast 
ings, the combination of a molding-machine, 
a cupola, an endless chain located between 
the molding-machine and cupola, sprocket- 7 
wheels engaging said chain adjacent to said 
molding-machine and cupola and adjacent to 
a cleaning-space, respectively, driving mech 
anism by which power is imparted for the ro 
tation of one of the sprocket-wheels, and a 
series of wheeled carriers or flask-supporting 
tables connected to the endless chain, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a plant, for the manufacture of cast 
ings, the combination of one or more cupolas, 8 
two sets of molding-machines located. On op 
posite sides of the cupolas, respectively, two 
endless chains, each located between the cu 
polas and a set of molding-machines and 
adapted to traverse longitudinally between 9 
the cupolas and molding-machines and a 
cleaning-space, and a series of carriers or 
flask-supporting tables connected to said 
chains, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 9 
L. E. LOVE, 
JOHN F. MILLER. 
THOMAS W. WELSH. 
Witnesses: 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
- 
- 
C 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453156.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 453,156. 
W. McENTEE, 
CARTRIDGE BELT, 
Patented May 26, 1891. 
D. 
-- 
SS S 
28i-tvlooooy 
344-uovtov 
33 
7ca 8Letovoy 
ty ~. 
(7%e2ee-6ee 
% 7.6%. , 24-26- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM MCENTEE, OF ERIN, MINNESOTA. 
CARTRIDGE-BELT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 453,156, dated May 26, 1891. 
Application filed Februaryll, 1890, Serial No. 340,049, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM MCENTEE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Erin, 
in the county of Rice and State of Minnesota, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Cartridge-Belts, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means for adjusting the cartridge-holding de 
vices on the belt, so as to adapt them to car 
tridges of varying sizes, and to take up any 
looseness or slack in the holders occasioned 
by use. This object is accomplished by the 
devicesillustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a portion of a 
belt provided with my improvements; Fig. 2, 
a rear elevation of the same; Fig. 3, a similar 
view with the adjusting-strap broken away; 
Fig. 4, a top or plan view of the same; Fig. 5, 
a transverse section on the line acac of Fig. 4, 
and Fig.6 a transverse section on the line if y 
of Fig. 4. 
In said drawings, 1 designates a belt of 
leather or other suitable material, the ends of 
which may be arranged to be fastened to 
gether by a buckle. In this belt are cut ver 
tical slits 2 2 of any desirable length. 
Through these slits is passed a leather or 
other suitable band 3 by running it inward 
and outward through them in alternation, SO 
as to form loops 4 at the front for the recep 
tion of the cartridges. The ends 5 of the band 
O 
25 
Witnesses: 
J. B. O'MALLEY, 
ANDY JACKSON. 
35 
45 
3, that project beyond the ends of the belt, are 
turned to the inside and may be secured by 
passing them through alternate slits 2 at in 
tervals, as shown in Figs. 2 and 4. The band 
should fit tight enough in the slits to prevent 
the loops 4 from being distorted in ordinary 
use. In this manner loops may be formed to 
receive cartridges of any desired size, and the 
ends of the band being secured the loops will 
remain of proper size to receive and hold 
firmly cartridges of the selected size. Should 
any looseness occur in use, the slack can 
readily be taken up by pulling the ends of 
the band and again securing them. To adapt 
the loops to receive cartridges of a different 
size requires only the loosening or tightening 
of the band 3 and the securing of its ends. 
A serviceable and cheaply-constructed car 
tridge-belt is thus made that can be readily 
adapted to carry cartridges of different or va 
rying sizes. 
What I claim is 
A cartridge-belt formed of two leather 
straps 13, the strap 3 passing through Cross 
slots 2 of strap I and having its ends 5 ad 
justably secured on the inside of the belt, 
thus making cartridge-loops 4 adjustable to 
any one size or to several sizes of cartridge, 
as set forth. 
WILLIAM MCENTEE. 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453256.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 453,256, 
Z7 
J. W. CORMLEY. 
VEHICLE SHAFTs. 
Patented June 2, 1891. 
 
  
 
af Zavazor 
ae?" 24.2% 
- - 
77tara e2/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN W. GORMLEY, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
MICHAEL T. FOLEY, OF SAME PLACE. 
VEHICLE-SHAFT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 453,256, dated June 2, 1891. 
Application filed February 6, 1891. Serial No, 880,487, (No model.) 
55 
O 
To Cull, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN W. GORMLEY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city of Cincinnati, in the county of Ham 
ilton and State of Ohio, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Means for Splicing, 
Strengthening, and Protecting Vehicle Shafts, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The several features of my invention and 
the various advantages resulting from their 
use, conjointly or otherwise, will be apparent 
from the following description and claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this application, and to which refer 
ence is hereby made, Figure 1 is a plan or top 
View of a pair of shafts and whiffletree con 
nected thereto, the said figure illustrating my 
invention. In this figure one of the shafts is 
Straight and the other curved, in order to fur 
ther illustrate certain features of my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the tip or front 
end of the case or sleeve which is a feature 
of my invention. Fig. 3 is a front end view 
of the sleeve formed in one way, so as to be 
readily adjusted upon the shank or rear por 
tion of the tip, as hereinafter more particu 
larly Set forth. Fig. 4 is a vertical sectional 
view of the rear portion of the said sleeve and 
of the leather backing-loop and the mode in 
Which the backing-loop is connected to the 
sleeve and shaft and by which the sleeve is 
made firm to the base. Fig. 5 is a transverse 
Section of the shaft, taken in the plane of the 
dotted line 55 of Fig.1, that side of the section 
Which faces toward the bottom or left-hand end 
of the drawings being shown in said figure. 
In this figure the rear end or rim of the sleeve 
aforementioned is seen in elevation. Fig. 6 
is a view of the end of the shaft adapted to 
receive the sleeve. Fig. 7 is a view of the 
Supplemental piece employed upon the end 
Of the shaft within the sleeve in cases where 
the forward end of the shaft being broken off 
it becomes necessary to splice the same. Fig. 
S is an elevation of the tip shown in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 9 is a side elevation of the supplemental 
piece employed in connection with the curved 
Shaft protected by the curved sleeve herein. 
before mentioned. Fig. 10 is an elevation of 
that portion of the curved shaft which is di 
rectly on the rear of and which is connected to 
the Supplemental piece, substantially as here 
inafter described. Fig. 1) is an elevation of 
the curved sleeve and tip used in connection 
with the curved shaft, the dotted lines in said 
figure showing the arrangement of parts 
Within the sleeve in relation to the sleeve and 
to one another. Fig. 12 is a longitudinalver 
tical section of the end of the shaft provided 
With the tip and protecting-sleeve and illus 
trating the preferred mode of enabling the tip 
to be firmly fixed to and within the end portion 
of the said sleeve. Fig. 13 is a longitudinal 
vertical section of the tip and of the front por 
tion of the sleeve and accompanying part of 
the shaft, and also of the cover, of leather or 
like material, employed to cover, protect, and 
beautify the metallic sleeve aforementioned. 
This figure also shows the preferred mode of 
enabling the tip to be fixedly secured to the 
sleeve. Fig. 14 is a transverse vertical Sec 
tion taken in the plane of the dotted line 14 
14 of Fig. 13. Fig. 15 is a top view of the 
blank employed to form the shaft-protector 
or sleeve at or in the vicinity where the trace 
loop is connected to the shaft. Fig. 16 is an 
elevation of that end or edge of the said blank 
which is at the right hand in Fig. 15. Fig. 17 
is a view of the said blank shown in Fig. 15 
after it has been curved into the form of a 
sleeve ready for application to the said shaft. 
It may be here remarked that the blank 
shown in Figs. 15, 16, and 17 is applicable to 
protect the shaft at the trace-loop, as herein 
after mentioned, and also applicable to the 
whiffletree at the point where the latter comes 
into contact with the leather safety-loop. The 
dotted lines show the shape of the ends of 
the blank when the latter is to be employed 
upon the shaft, while the solid lines at the 
ends of the bank show the form of the latter 
When employed upon the tapering piece, as 
is the whiffletree where the said blank is ap 
plied thereto. 
AA. respectively indicate the shafts. 
In Fig. 1 the forward portion of each shaft 
is shown covered and protected by a tube B. 
This tube is preferably made out of a flat 
sheet of metal by bringing together the op 
posite long edges and fastening them by bend 
ing them, so as to interlock. The tube tapers 
down from front to rear, the taper of the tube 
25 
35 
45 
90 
95 
OO 
g 
453,256 
part corresponding to the taper on that por 
tion of the shaft which it covers and protects. 
When desired, the rear edge of the tube may 
be formed into or be otherwise provided with 
a bead, as B. 
At the forward end of the tube is located a 
tip D, preferably of metal, and having a for 
Ward portion D' and a rear part D. At the 
point where the part D joins the front por 
tion D the former is smaller than the latter, 
thereby forming a shoulder D. The height 
of this shoulder is substantially that of the 
thickness of the tube B. The portion D of 
the tip D is located within the forward end of 
the tube and secured thereto in any suitable 
manner. I have, however, invented two valu 
able modes of making such attachment. One 
of these modes is as follows: The forward end. 
of the tube B is slit, so as to form a number of 
tongues, as B'. (Shown in Fig. 3.) These 
tongues are preferably formed on the metal 
blank of the tube before the tube is made. 
The portion D of the tip is next inserted 
within the circle formed by this slitted por 
tion B', and the latter is then bent down upon 
Dimmediately in the rear of the part D' 
and there soldered to the tip. 
The preferred mode of securing the tip to 
the tube B is shown in Fig. 12, and consists 
as follows: At one point on the exterior of the 
tip D is the teat or lug D. When the tube 
B is formed, a longitudinal groove or gutter 
D will be present in the latter in the vicinity 
of the interlocked edges of the tube. This 
groove is shown in Figs. 12, 13, and 14. The 
tube B having been formed around the por 
tion D of the tip D, the lug D lying in the 
groove D and the forward edge D8 of the 
seam D having been bent up against the 
shoulder D', the tube B will be held securely 
in position upon the tip. The attachment of 
the tube and tip may be further strengthened 
by the well-known process of soldering or 
brazing. When desired, the tube B may be ex 
teriorly provided with an enameled surface, 
or, as shown in Fig. 13, be surrounded with a 
layer or sheath of leather E, the latter being 
preferably enameled for making its exterior 
attractive. The tip is provided with a recess 
D, beginning at its rear end and extending 
in toward the front end thereof. This recess 
is made tapering in order to accommodate 
the tapering front end C of the shaft or splic 
ing-piece and the better to enable the said tip 
to be tightly wedged upon the said shaft or 
splicing-piece. Where the forward portion of 
the shaft is straight, the tube will be straight; 
but when that portion of the shaft which the 
tube covers is curved the tube will be also. 
In case the tube B is on a straight shaft, as 
shown in Fig. 1, the shaft is readily inserted 
after the tube is made, and where the shaft 
is to be a curved one the shaft and the tube 
thereon may together be bent. 
Where the front part of a shaft has been 
broken and requires to be spliced, the pre 
ferred mode of doing this is a novel one of 
my invention, and which is as follows: The 
forward end of that portion of the shaft whicll 
is left-viz., the point where the fracture OC 
curred-is tapered down, as C, and a splic 
ing-piece, as C, of the required length, is in 
serted between the tip D and the remaining 
part of the shaft. The splicing-piece has a 
tapered end C, which is fitted into the recess 
ID of the tip. The rear end of this splicing 
piece C is provided with a tapered recess C, 
which latter receives the tapered end C of the 
shaft C. Such mode of splicing will be used 
in both curved and straight shafts. In the 
case of new curved shafts, when the latter is to 
be provided with my protecting tube and tip, 
I avoid making the shaft full length, but make 
it (the part C) of the length shown by dotted 
lines in Fig. 1, (see lower shaft of said figure.) 
and then provide a curved splicing-piece C, 
having a tapered front end C and a rear re 
cess C". The end C of said piece C is in 
serted into the recess D of the tip D. The 
tube is then formed around the tip D and 
bent splicing-piece C. The rear portion of 
the tube is formed around a former. The 
tube is now fully formed and of the curved 
shape shown in Fig. 11. The former having 
been withdrawn, the end C of the main por 
tion C of the shaft is now run into the tube 
and inserted into the recess C of the splicing 
piece C. 
A novel and preferred means for holding 
the tube B in place upon the shaft is shown 
in Figs. 1 and 4, and consists in inserting the 
screw F (which holds the leather backing-loop 
F' in position) through the loop and protect 
ing-tube B and into the wood of the shaft, 
thereby securing all these parts firmly in 
place. 
I have provided a shaft-protector or sleeve 
G, which embraces the shaft at or in the vi 
cinity of the trace-loop. This loop I prefer 
to make as follows: A blank G' is provided, 
and near one edge are bored a number of 
holes or perforations G*. On the other end 
of the blank are formed a number of tongues 
G, each tongue being of such a size as to be 
capable of being received into and passed 
through its adjacent respective hole G' when 
the blank is bent in the form of a sleeve, as 
shown in Fig. 17. In the form shown in Fig. 
17 a protector G is placed upon the shaft at 
the proper point, and the tongues Gare then 
introduced or passed through the respective 
hole G' and clamped down. The trace-loop 
is now placed upon the protector G, and a 
screw G is inserted through the loop and pro 
tector, thereby holding the loop, protector, 
and the shaft firmly together. To impart a 
finish to the edges ot the protector, each edge 
may be provided with a bead G, formed out 
of the edge by manipulating the latter, or at 
tached thereto. When desired, this protector 
may be employed to cover a whiffletree I 
at the place where the latter comes in con 
tact with the leather safety-loop J. In the 
latter event the protector will be made of a 
o 
75 
9o 
95 
ICO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
453,256 
. 
3. 
4. As a means of splicing, strengthening, 45 
tapering form, as shown. This protector, when D' and the reduced portion of the part D', 
used upon a whiftietree, prevents abrasion of the tube being secured on the part D, and 4o 
the Whiffletree and preserves the wood thereof the front end of the seam of the tube being 
intact, thereby lengthening the life of the bent up, as at D, against the shoulder D', 
Whiffletree. By the use of this protector in substantially as and for the purposes speci 
connection with the trace-loop of the shaft 
fied. 
the life of the shaft is lengthened. Not only 
So, but the shaft is prevented from being 
and protecting a shaft, the tube B, having 
marred or otherwise injured when coming in 
tip D, provided with recess D, and a splic 
contact with the rear axle of another vehicle. 
ing-piece C, having rear recess C and tapered 
This latter event usually takes place when, 
front portion C", and the shaftportion C, hav 
ing tapered portion C", the splicing-piece be- 5o 
as is often the case, the shafts of one vehicle 
ing located within the said tube and having 
are run under the rear axle of another vehi 
cle in front, in order to economize room in the 
its forward end in the recess D of the tip, 
stable or carriage-house or other place where the forward portion of the shaft being like 
the vehicles are stored. 
wise located in the tube, the tapered tip C of 
What I claim as new and of my invention, the shaft fitted into the recess C of the splic- 55 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is- ing-piece, and the backing loop and screWF, 
1. The tipD, having shoulder D and recess connected to the latter and passed through 
D, and the tube or sleeve B, secured on and the tube and into the shaft and securing in 
to the part D of the said tip behind the said place the said loop and tube and splicing 
shoulder and adapted to receive the forward piece and shaft, substantially as and for the 62 
portion of the shaft into the said tip and re-purposes specified. 
cess D, substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
tube B, secured thereto, the tube being pro- ered with an envelope of leather, Substan- 65 
vided with a seam formed by its interlocking tially as and for the purposes specified. 
edges, and the lug D being located in the 
6. The shaft or whiffletree protector con 
space D of the seam, substantially as and sisting of a sleeve G, constructed of a blank 
for the purposes specified. 
having the tongues G and openings G' to 
tube B, secured thereto, the tube being pro- tially as and for the purposes specified. 
vided with a seam formed by its interlocking 
edges, and the lug D being located in the 
space D of the seam, the tip D having the 
head or partl)' and the portion D and shoul- 
der D', formed at the junction of the head 
5. A shaft-protector consisting of the ta 
pered tube and tip and adapted to receive 
2. The tip D, having the lug D and the the shaft or shaft and splicing-piece, and cov 
3. The tip D, having the lug D and the respectively receive the said tongue, substan- 7o 
JOHN W. GORMLEY. 
Attest: 
A. L. HERRLINGER, 
K. SMITH. 
O 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453356.txt	(No Model.) 
C, H, JOHNSON. 
GRAIN DRILL CLEANER, 
No. 453,356. 
Patented June 2, 1891. 
22-24. 
The Nostas Peters co. Hoo-lirho, wash-Moon, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARROLL II. JOHNSON, OF GRAIN WALLEY, MISSOURI. 
GRAN DRL CLEANER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 453,856, dated June 2, 1891, 
Application filed March 7, 1891, Serial No. 384,114, (No model.) 
To one side of one of the arms E is secured 
the open box I, in which is located the pis 
ton-rod and spring J, the same being adapted 
to bear against the rod B and hold the 
scrapef in contact with the drill F. A coil 
spring K is located on the rod 3 and bears 
against the piston-head J in the box I in 
Such manner as to continually cause a down 
ward pressure of arms E and the drill F. Be 
tween the head A and the top of the spring 
My invention relates to improvements in K is fastened an adjustable clamp L, having 
the set-screw M for regulating the pressure of 
the spring. The rear of the drill-tooth F is 
provided with a rope or chair passing through 
the beam U, by means of which the drill may 
be elevated. It will be seen that when the 
drill F is raised the piston-head and spring J 
will cause the scraper to bear against the 
drill and clear the same of anything sticking 
thereto, and, further, that when the drill is 
released the spring IK on the rod B will force 
the drill into its proper or normal position. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
Iclaim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In a grain-drill cleaner, the combination, 
with pivotal arms, a drill pivoted to the free 
ends of said arms, a box secured to one of 
said arms, a spring within Said box, and 
means for raising the drill, of a rod passing 
through said box, a scraper on the free end 
of said rod, and a spring located on said rod 
bearing against the box, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
To all ZwhoI), it may concern 
Be it known that I, CARROLL H. JOHNSON, 
of Grain Valley, in the county of Jackson 
and State of Missouri, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Grain-Drill 
Cleaners; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
grain-drill cleaners, the object of the same 
being to provide means for cleaning the drills 
of earth which naturally forms thereon and 
clings thereto. 
A further object is to provide means for 
accomplishing the above, which will be sim 
ple and economical in construction and du 
rable and efficient in use. 
With the above ends in view my inven 
tion consists in the certain features of con 
struction and combinations of parts, as will be 
hereinafter fully described, and pointed out 
in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a perspective view of the device. Fig. 2 is 
a view in side elevation, and Fig. 3 is a top 
plan view. 
A represents a main head-piece secured to 
the-bottom of the drill-box, the same being 
rendered adjustable, if desired. 
B represents a rod secured to the head 
piece, and is provided with the rectangular 
and depending end C, to which is secured the 
scraper D. The object of forming the said 
end rectangular is to insure a true connec 
tion between the scraper and the drill. The 
bifurcated arms E are pivotally connected to 
the forward part of the drill - carriage, as 
shown, the drill-tooth F being pivotally con 
nected to the free end thereof by means of 
the arm G, which is provided with the stop 
pin H to prevent the drill-tooth F from tilt 
ing when in operation. 
CARROLL H. JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS, JOHNSON, 
M. N. WOMACKS. 
45 
55 
75 
O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453456.txt	(No Model.) 
C. H. WOLF, 
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING DEVICE, 
No. 453,456. 
Patented June 2, 1891. 
 
 
 
E/ LE E 
INVENTOR: 
re %-2 e -----e. 
WITNESSEs: 
8.7/5 lar-?- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL HUGO WOLF, OF ZWICKAU, GERMANY. 
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 453,456, dated June 2, 1891. 
Application filed August 20, 1890, Serial No. 362,549, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
To all whom it may conce77. 
erated for igniting the friction priming, rib 
Be it known that I, CARL HUGO WoLF, a bon, or strip. Fig. 3 is a like section repre 
Subject of the Emperor of Germany, residing 
senting the parts in the position they occupy 
at Zwickau, Germany, have invented certain 
when the knob has been released and the 
Improvements in Automatic Lighting De 
spring freed so that the burning ribbon can 
vices, of which the following is a specifica 
be automatically fed upward and outside the 
casing. Fig. 4 is a vertical section on the 
tion. 
My invention relates to an improved auto 
line acac in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a top view with 
matic igniting device with friction priming or 
opened lid. Figs. 6, 7, and 8 represent, on an 
ribbon, which iatter will, after being ignited 
enlarged scale, the elevation and top views of 
by the igniting device, be automatically 
the toothing to the pocket-lighter for produc 
caused to protrude from the casing or boxin 
ing the ignition of the ribbon and the trans 
burning condition. The ribbon itself is ap 
portation of the same outside the device. 
propriately impregnated and will burn, after 
The igniting or lighting device consists of 
being ignited by the friction priming or pill 
an exterior casing a, and an interior casing or 
of fulminating material, with a bright flame, 
box b, the inner casing b being arranged to 
so that my improved igniting device can not 
move or slide up and down in the outer cas 
Only be employed as is now customary with or 
ing a. The downward movement when the 
dinary igniting devices for igniting or lighting 
device is arranged vertically or rear stroke 
lamps, lanterns, and the like, with very vola 
when arranged at an angle to the Wick to be 
tile hydrocarbons, such as benzine, but also for 
lighted is attained by means of a knob or 
igniting carriage and other lamps or lanterns 
button c, extending from the inner casing to 
in Which candles, petroleum, &c., are used, 
through a slot or Orifice in the outer casing Ct. 
for miners lamps with the ordinary oil or pe 
In this manner the spring d is compressed and 
iroleum or other charge, or for igniting any 
will, as soon as the knob or handle is released, 
other kind of light which it is desired to ig 
drive the inner casingly forward. The inner 
casing b serves to receive the primer or rib 
nite from the exterior of the lamp, lantern, 
bone of paper, linen, cotton, or other appro 
or the like. 
Myinproved automatic igniting or lighting 
priate material impregnated with paraffine, 
device can also be employed as a pocket-igniter 
wax or other suitable matter, and provided 
at given distances with primers, pellets, or 
for lighting cigars, &c.; and in order to cause 
caps of appropriate explosive material, which 
my invention to be more perfectly under 
will ignite when subjected to friction. The 
stood I have represented the same in the ac 
companying drawings in the form of a pocket 
ribbon e runs through a slot or orifice in one 
lighter. 
of the walls of the inner casing or receptacle 
b, and is forced upward or outward in operat 
It will also be evident that my invention 
ing the receptacleb by the teeth fand the rod 
can be used for very many useful purposes, for 
g, fixed to or formed integrally with the outer 
which reason I do not confine myself to the 
casing a, and through an opening in the lid 
Special form or arrangement of the parts 
or cover, when it burns with a bright flame. 
herein specified, as these can be varied ac 
cording to the object to be ignited or lighted. 
The saw-like teeth of the rod g are so ar 
ranged that they will entirely prevent the 
The length of movement, and the compression 
of the spring will of course depend on the 
downward or inward movement of the ribbon 
e, but will in no way hinder the upward or 
distance between the caps in the ribbon pro 
vided with pellets of friction-priming. 
outward movement of the said ribbon. The 
object of the teeth f of the inner casing or re 
In order that my invention may be the bet 
ceptacle b is to ignite the primers in the rib 
ter understood, I have illustrated it in the ac 
companying drawings, wherein 
bone, which is prevented from moving down 
Figure 1 is an elevation of a pocket cigar 
ward or inward by the toothed rod g when 
the receptacle is moved to compress the 
lighter to which is applied my improved 
lighting or igniting device. Fig. 2 is a verti 
spring d. When the knob or button is re 
cal section of Fig. 1, showing the parts as op- leased, the Spring d Will impel the inner cas 
o 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
95 
IOC 
2 
458,456 
ner sliding casing b, bearing the igniting-rib 
ing upward, and with it the ignited ribbon e, 
bone, said casingly being provided with ig 
by means of the teeth f, so that the said rib 
initing teeth f, arranged facing the strip-hold 
bon protrudes from the casing or box a in or 
der to light the wick of a candle or lamp and 
ing-teeth on rod g, a handle c on said inner 
to allow a cigar or cigarette to be lighted. 
casing, which projects through the wall of 
the outer casing, and a spring under said 
In order to cause the teeth f of the inner 
inner casing adapted to drive said casing up 
case or box b to firmly press the ribbon 
against the teeth of the rod g or against teeth 
ward when the latter is released, the free ends 
of the stripe being arranged between the ig 
projecting from the inner side of the outer 
niting-teeth f and the stationary holding 
box or casing a, and for securely transport 
teeth on projection g, substantially as set 
ing the said ribbon e when the spring dis re 
leased, the knob or button for operating the 
forth. 
Said inner casing is preferably arranged at 
2. In an automatic lighter, the combination, 
with the outer casing having an apertured 
one lower corner of the inner casing b, and 
the spring d arranged to press obliquely or at 
cover and a toothed rod or projection to hold 
the igniting-ribbon against backward move 
One side only against the bottom of the inner 
ment, of an inner casing b for the igniting 
box or casing b, in order to tilt the same to 
strip, arranged to slide freely and loosely in 
ward the toothed rod g, and thus, in combi 
said outer casing and provided with igniting 
nation with the one-sided pressure on box b 
teeth f, which face the strip-holding teeth, a 
in operating the knob c, cause the teeth f, to 
spring d under said inner casing and bear 
gether with the teeth on rod g, to remain in 
ing on same at the side opposite to the teeth 
close contact with the ribbone. 
As shown in the drawings, the knob or han 
f, and a handle c on the side of the said in 
dle c is composed of a small recessed slide, 
ner casing, where the teeth fare placed, 
whereby when the said handle is depressed 
which, when the igniting device or box is 
in order to draw down the casing b the lat 
turned on the one side, will drop into the in 
terior of the same, so as to prevent all wear iter will be tilted, substantially as and for the 
and tear of the pocket when the device is not purposes set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
in use; but I desire it to be understood that 
any suitable rod, knob, or handle can be em- my name in the presence of two subscribing 
ployed. 
witnesses. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In an automatic lighter, the combination, 
With a casing a, having an apertured cover 
and a toothed rod or projection g, of an in 
CARI, IIUGO WOLF. 
Witnesses: 
FRIECH. K6VNER, 
CARL BORNGRAEBER. 
45 
55 
65 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453556.txt	(No Model. ) 
W. E, FRANK, 
SPRING BED, 
No. 453,556, 
Patented June 2, 1891. 
 
  
 
  
 
3. 
E. 
3 C3333333333 
  
928-1---osso. 
7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. FRANK, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO FOSTER 
BROTHERS & COMPANY, OF SAME PIACE. 
SPRING B E. D. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 453,556, dated June 2, 1891. 
Application filed December 15, 1888, Serial No. 293,714. (No model.) 
To all who77, it nay concer'72: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. FRANK, of 
the city of St. Louis and State of Missouri, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Spring-Beds; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Spring-beds. 
The object is to provide a simple and secure 
arrangement of parts in a spring-bed by re 
ducing the parts to a minimum, and at the 
same time furnish a strong, elastic, and dura 
ble article of furniture having the quality of 
equalizing and resisting weight and strain 
upon it, and yet furnishing a larger amount 
Of ease and comfort Without an increased out 
lay of time, labor, or expense. 
With this end in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of constructions and 
combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in perspective of a portion of my im 
proved spring a bed. Fig. 2 is a plan view. 
Fig. 3 is a detached view of zigzag connect 
ing-wire, and Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail view 
of a portion of said wire. 
A. A represent a pair of border-wires pass 
ing around the entire bed and constituting 
the edge and frame of the bed, serving to hold 
the parts together and in shape and to give a 
certain amount of rigidity to the whole struct 
ure. These border-wires may be made in sec 
tions, the ends a of which are held together 
by blocking band wedges c. The springs com 
posing the body of the bed are in two slightly 
different forms-the border-springs and the 
inclosed or inside springs. 
B B represent the border-springs. These 
are for the most part nothing more nor less 
than the ordinary approved form of double 
cone-shaped spiral spring with the addition 
of the loop C, preferably horizontal, formed 
by one complete bend of the wire back around 
upon itself and finally on again in continua 
tion of itself and the arm ID, which latter is 
formed by the end of the wire after making 
the last spiral turn, which is completed by its 
return to the loop C, passing into said loop, 
where it is locked to the spring, and finally 
bending outwardly and terminating in a hook 
d, adapted to clasp the upper and lower bor 
der-wires. 
EE represent the inside springs. These are 
similar to the border-springs, except that the 
arms D are dispensed with and the end e is 
simply hooked into the loop C. The springs 
are placed in alternating long and short rows, 
which extend lengthwise of the frame, the 
outside rows having the greatest number of 
springs possible, while the alternate rows pref 
erably have one spring less, so that the springs 
in the short rows are located opposite the 
spaces between the springs in the long rows. 
The springs are connected lengthwise or in 
rows by chain-links or similar means f, and 
the end springs of the short rows, if not joined 
to the border-wires in the same manner as the 
other border-springs are, may be connected 
thereto by links g instead. 
Zigzag coupling-wires H connect the rows 
of springs in a novel and peculiar manner, as 
follows: The wires are bent at their ends 
around the border-wires A A', and between 
these points their bends h project into the 
springs, as shown in the drawings, the upper 
ones beneath the upper coil and the lower one 
above the lower coil. These bends h are pref 
erably V-shaped, and after being placed, as 
above described, above and below the outer 
coils of the springs composing the body of the 
bed this portion of the wire His bent obliquely 
or at an angle of about forty-five degrees to 
the main portion and at point i. Again the 
tip i is bent between the parts of the zigzag 
Wire and into a plane at about right angles to 
that of the main portion of the wire, the bends 
in each instance being as sharp as possible in 
order to have the desired effect, which is to 
bind upon the coils of the spring when weightis 
applied from one direction and to hinge when 
weight is applied from the opposite direction. 
This result is produced by the position of the 
curved coil of the spring within the triangul 
lar space formed by the bends in the zigzag 
coupling-wire, which when pressure is applied 
in one direction has bearing contact at four 
points 1, 2, 3, and 4 out of alignment with 
each other and on opposite sides of the coil 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
O 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
 
2 
453,556 
25 
35 
connected with the springs in such a manner 
that the upper surface is always yielding and 
the lower one is always rigid to a pressure 
coming from the direction of the yielding sur 
face, substantially as set forth. 
2. A reversible bed-bottom consisting of 
rows of spiral springs arranged so that the 
springs in adjacent rows alternate with one 
another, and zigzag tie-wires having their 
bends hooked around the end coils of the 
springs in such a manner that the upper side 
of the bed-bottom is always yielding and the 
under side is always rigid to a downward 
pressure or a pressure coming from the direc 
tion of the yielding surface, substantially as 
Set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
WILLIAM E. FRANK. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES W. ALLEN, 
N. H. FosTER. 
5 
IO 
and when pressure is applied in the opposite 
direction has bearing-contact practically at 
two points 2 and 3 only, which of course are 
in alignment, and hence hinge, but do not pro 
duce, a fulcrum. Now in the practical work 
ing of the bed-bottom the top is always yield 
ing and the bottom is rigid, or practically so, 
distributing and equalizing the weight. When 
the bottom is reversed or inverted, it acts the 
same as before, because of the peculiar con 
nection of the coupling-wire with the springs, 
as previously described. 
The border may be double or single, and it 
is evident that other slight changes might be 
resorted to in the form and arrangement of 
the several parts described without departing 
from the spirit and scope of my invention. 
Hence I do not wish to limit myself to the ex 
act construction herein set forth; but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A reversible bed-bottom consisting, es 
sentially, of rows of spiral springs and tie wires 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453656.txt	(No Model.) 
G. PENDLETON, Jr. 
BUTTON FASTENER, 
No. 453,656, 
Patented June 9, 1891, 
Fig.1. 
 
Aa 
SNS SNSN 
A 
2' 
6 
/3 
Fig. 6, 
a 
- 8/O 
SSS 
sy ~ 7 
tee 
^ 
R 2 
SI: 
W. W M3 
S. 
 
  
Fig. 3, 
3. 
7, 
6 - I 5 
AN,% 
7 
W7f72esses. 
 JK.( b 
- 
-%. 4.4%-2 
//ave/zifor. 
Garzaz ZazaaZezov, A. 
3.7%.<sv 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GURDON PENDIETON, JR., OF MELROSE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
BUTTON FAST ENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 453,656, dated June 9, 1891. 
Application filed January 15, 1891, Serial No. 377,826 (No model.) 
55 
To all whon it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, GURDON, PENDLETON, 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Melrose, in the county of Middlesex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and usefull Improvements in Removable But 
ton-Fasteners; and Idohereby declare the foll 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to that class of but 
ton-fasteners which permit of removal of 
the button without injury from the fabric 
to which it is secured, and thus allows of its 
being changed in position, or from one gar 
ment to a different one. 
My fastener consists, in brief, of a flanged 
stud with a reduced portion, which is to pass 
centrally through the button, while a fasten 
ing-disk with a radial aperture is adapted to 
engage the reduced portion and rests within a 
recess formed in the button-top, the inherent 
elasticity of the fabric to which the fastener 
is attached being sufficient to retain the fast 
ening-disk within the recessed portion of the 
button, the stud being made so short that the 
material or fabric is always slightly com 
pressed, all as hereinafter more fully de 
Scribed and claimed. 
The drawings represent, in Figure 1, a central 
vertical sectional elevation of a button Se 
cured to a fabric with a fastener containing 
Fig. 2 is a plan. Fig. 3 is a 
my invention. 
sectional elevation of the stud member. Fig. 4 
is an edge view of the fastening-disk. Fig. 5 
is a plan of the same. Fig. 6 is a sectional ele 
vation on line acac of Fig. 2, showing an elastic 
washer between the button and the fabric. 
In said drawings, 2 represents a, button of 
any desired shape or style, in the present in 
stance circular in plan view, having a central 
bore 3 and a recessed portion 4 upon its up 
per surface. These buttons may be of any 
material, hard rubber, bone, metal, or other 
substances, and the fastener Works equally 
well with all. This button-fastener is shown 
at 5 as composed of a central shaft or stud 6, 
adapted to fit the bore of the button, and 
formed with a reduced upper end or neck 7. 
The latter is surmounted by a cap or band S, 
preferably of the same diameter as that of the 
stud. The lower end of the latter is flanged 
or formed with a circular plate 9 to act as a 
washer and rest upon the under side of the 
fabric to prevent the latter from tearing out 
and the button coming off. 
In connection with the fastenel 5 is a cir 
cular disk 10, having a radial aperture 12, ex 
tending from the center to the circumference. 
This aperture is of a width equal to or slightly 
larger than the neck portion 7 of the stud, 
while the size of the recess ill the button is 
the same as the diameter of the disk 10, and 
of a depth about equal to the thickness of 
said plate, so that when the button is fastened 
to the garment or other fabric the upper sur 
face of said button 2 and disk 10 are flush, or 
thereabout. This assemblage of parts co 
operate as follows: Presuming abutton is now 
to be secured to a fabric, represented at 13, 
having previously punched or formed a hole 
in the fabric, the stud is pushed from the 
under side up through the fabric. The but 
ton is then inserted over the projecting end 
portion of said studland rests upon the upper 
side of the fabric. The button and fabric are 
now pressed against each other in order to 
compress the fabric sufficiently to bring the 
reduced part or neck of the stud above the 
top surface of the button. While this press 
ure is continued the fastening-disk is ad 
justed in position upon the top of the button, 
but on one side of the latter, and then pushed 
transversely of the Stud, the neck of the lat 
ter entering the aperture 12 until it contacts 
against the end. At this moment the said 
disk 10 is in adjustment above the recess in 
the button and drops therein. This act com 
pleted, the pressure is removed, when the in 
herent elasticity of the fabric causes the stud 
to retreat until the cap 8 engages against the 
upper side of the plate. No ordinary move 
ment of the Wearer can now possibly disen 
gage the parts and the button is held securely 
attached until removal is desired. This is 
accomplished as follows: The garmentor other 
article at the point where the button is at 
tached is held preferably in a vertical posi 
tion, or in any event obliquely to the horizon 
tal, with the aperture 12 above the stud. 
75 
85 
95 
O 
f5 
25 
35 
45 
 
453,656 
button which contains it, since they may be 
varied, but both be similar in shape. 
What I claim is 
A removable button consisting of the stud 
6, having the elongated neck 7, the cap or 
flange 8, and the plate 9, combined with the 
head or button proper 2, having a recess 4 in 
its outer face, and the fastening disk or plate 
10, of proper size and shape to fit in said re 
cess and provided with the radial aperture 
12, said neck 7 being of greater length than 
the thickness of said plate or disk 10, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
. 
25 
GURDON PENDLETON, JR. 
Witnesses: 
II. E. LODGE, 
JOHN A. DOUGHERTY. 
O 
Pressure is now applied to compress the fabric 
sufficiently to permit the stud to advance 
through the button and allow the fastener 
disk 10 to move out from the recess in the 
button. When its under side is slightly above 
the upper surface of the button, it is free to 
disengage from the stud and drops off through 
the action of gravity. In the event of the 
stud being too long when used upon a thin 
fabric an elastic medium, as a Washer 14, may 
be employed. (See Fig. 6.) This enhances 
the security of the fastener. It is evident 
that by the use of one or more Washers the 
varying thicknesses of fabrics are readily com 
pensated for and a uniformlength of fastener 
may be employed, except perhaps in excep 
tional instances. 
I do not desire to be limited to the precise 
form of fastening-disk nor to the recess in the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453756.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. COTTON. 
ART OF SETTING, TIRES, 
No. 453,756, 
Patented June 9, 1891. 
itnesses : 
(PSE 
7/s I344/ 
cal. roletter 
eyewly: 
Attorney 
Inventor 
renorris retaRS co., Photo-Ir40. WASH18Gto. b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES WARD COTTON, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
ART OF SETTING T RES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,756, dated June 9, 1891. 
Application filed January 30, 1891, Serial No. 379,620, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To al., whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLESWARD COTTON, 
of Indianapolis, Marion county, Indiana, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in the Art of Setting Tires, of which 
the following is a specification. 
In Setting tires upon vehicle-wheels it is 
quite common to make the tire larger than 
the wheeland then compressit upon the wheel 
by the action of in Wardly-moving compress 
ors. Generally the wheel is laid upon a plate 
or table and supported at its rim during the 
Operation of compressing the tire, and as the 
Compression takes place the center of the 
Wheel rises till the proper dishing of the wheel 
is produced; but the wheel, before the tire is 
applied, may be warped or sprung or slightly 
dished the wrong way, and in the latter case 
While the wheel is in the tire-setting machine 
the unsupported center of the wheel forms by 
its gravity, a Serious resistance to the proper 
dishing and the compression of the tire is 
therefore apt to produce an undesired crush 
ing effect upon the wheel. 
My invention pertains to improvements in 
this art, and my improvements will be readily 
understood from the following description, 
taken in connection with the accompanying 
drawing, which is a vertical section of a tire 
Setting machine, the description of the oper 
ation of which will enable my improved meth 
od of Setting tires to be better understood. 
In the drawing, A indicates the usual table 
of a tire-setting machine; B, the rim of the 
wheel on which the tire is to be set; C, the 
tire; D, the spokes of the wheel; E, the hub 
of the Wheel; F, the compressors, to act in 
Wardly, by any usual means, and compress 
the tire upon the rim; G, the central stud pro 
jecting up from the center of the table and 
through the eye in the hub of the wheel, this 
stud in the case chosen to illustrate the present 
invention being capable of upward motion in 
the table; H, the usual removable key through 
the stud over the hub at that distance above 
the hub representing the position of the top of 
the hub when the wheel is properly dished, 
due allowance being made, of course, for the 
elastic recovery of the wheel when the com 
pression is removed; J, a pressing device bear 
ing upon the top of the rim of the wheel, the 
pressing device chosen for illustration con 
sisting simply of a rising and falling frame 
having legs bearing with their feet upon the 
rim of the wheel, these legs being distributed 
properly around the wheel; K, a lever for op 
erating the pressing device and producing 
downward pressure upon the rim of the wheel; 
L., a ring upon the table, of a siz to freely 
admit the hub and of a height to engage the 
lower edges of the spokes at the hub, this ring 
forming a central support for the wheel, so 
that when the wheel is first laid upon the ta 
ble it will be supported solely by this central 
Support; MI, an alarm-bell; N, the bell-strik 
ing lever triggered to the stud G, so that when 
the stud rises the bell is struck, and O gages 
upon the table under the rim to limit the de 
scent of the rim, which gages may, however, 
be dispensed with and the rim allowed to de 
scend to the table. 
The ring I is of such height that when the 
wheel is laid upon the table it is supported 
thereby with the rim above and free from the 
table or the gages O., if the gages are employed. 
A support directly under the hub would all 
swer the purpose of the ring L; but the ring 
under the spokes is preferable, by reason of 
the fact that downward strains upon the rim. 
will then bring less hurtful strains upon the 
tenons and mortises upon the hub. When 
the wheel is thus laid upon the table and sup 
ported at its center, it is obvious that the rim 
tends to drop and produce an initial dishing, 
and whether it drops or not it is a certainty 
that the center of the wheel cannot by its 
gravity oppose the dishing of the wheel so as 
to call for crushing strains before the dishing 
takes place; but after the wheel is in place On 
the table and supported at its center only I 
produce a downward pressure upon the rim 
by means of the pressing device J, and this 
pressure may, if desired, depress the rim as . 
far as permitted by the table or by the gages, 
if the gages are present. An initial dishing 
is therefore insured and in the right direc 
tion, even if the wheel happens to be sprung 
or warped into a reversed dish, and if the 
wheel-rim be Warped then the downward 
pressure on the rim flattens the rim out upon 
the gages or table. While the wheel is thus 
held with an upward strain upon its center 
the tire is compressed in the usual manner, 
and as the compression proceeds the center 
95 
CO 
O 
3O 
45 
 
2 
453,756 
of the Wheel rises from its support and the tirely at the hub, pressing downward upon 
the rim, and initiating the compression of the 
dishing continues. The hub willin the course 
tire upon the wheel while thus supported and 
of the procedure reach the key II, which is 
pressed. 
usually an unyielding stop, which limits the 
3. That improvement in the art of setting 
dishing and results in crushing strains if the 
tires on wheels which consists in disposing 
Compression be continued; but by my system 
the wheel horizontally and supporting it en 
the key or stop is a mere indication of limit and 
tirely at the hub, disposing a yielding stop 
is lifted by the hub as the hub rises, and the 
over the hub, initiating the compression of 
lifting of this indicator gives the alarm, and 
the compression may be stopped. If the com 
the tire while the wheel is thus supported en 
tirely at the center, causing the support of 
pression be not stopped when the alarm is 
the wheel to change from the center to the 
given, the effect will be simply to overdish 
rim as the tire is compressed, and continuing 
the Wheel, but not to crush it, the center of 
t Wheel coming up against no unyielding 
the compression till the hub rises to the limit 
indicated by the yielding stop. 
Stop. 
4. That improvement in the art of Setting 
tires on wheels which consists in initiating 
the compressive strains upon the tire while 
the wheel is being pressed into dish shape by 
pressure in one direction at the rim and in 
an opposite direction at the hub. 
CHARLES WARD COTTON. 
I claim as my invention 
1. That improvement in the art of setting 
tires on wheels which consists in disposing 
the wheel horizontally and supporting it en 
tirely at the hub and initiating the compres 
Sion of the tire upon the wheel while the wheel 
is thus supported. 
2. That improvement in the art of setting 
tires on wheels which consists in disposing 
the wheel horizontally and supporting it en 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM JACKSON, 
JASPER A. CARROLL. 
35 
45 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453856.txt	(No Model.) L. F. CHRISTY & E. ALDENDERFER. 
No. 453,856. 
BARREL STAND, 
Patented June 9, 189l. 
 
2 
A. A. 
v. 
A-LeB 
7-8 
7W/ZMASSAS 
2.z A32: ree21 
6. e7% 
AV/AWZOfS 
rvor 
Hist 
2-C. 
THE cars peers co., Photo-t-. Washingtok, p. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS F. CIIRISTY AND ELI ALDENDERFER, OF AMANDA, OHIO. 
BARREL STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 453,856, dated June 9, 1891. 
Application filed February 24, 1891, Serial No. 382,465. (No model.) 
To all, whon it invay conce71. 
Beit known that we, LEWIS F. CHRISTY and 
ELIALDENDERFER, both residents of Aman 
da, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Combined Barrel Trucks 
and Stands; and we do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, which will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
combined barrel trucks and stands. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
an improved device of the above description 
in which a barrel may be moved from place 
to place and held in an upright position, the 
construction being such that a barrel may be 
readily rolled onto the truck, and when used 
as a stand the barrel is securely held without 
liability of the same being accidentally dis 
placed or of the stand tipping or turning over. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
Struction and combination of parts hereinaf 
ter fully described, and specifically pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a combined truck and 
stand, showing the device in an upright posi 
tion and adapted to be employed as a stand. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal sectional view of the de 
vice depressed or lowered to receive a barrel. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view of the stand with the 
turn-table removed. 
In the said drawings, the reference - nu 
meral 1 designates the side bars of the truck 
connected together by means of transverse 
bars 2 and having their upper ends formed 
into handles 3'. In the other ends of these 
bars is journaled a shaft or axle 3, provided 
with supporting-wheels 4. These parts may 
be of any ordinary or suitable construction. 
Secured to these bars near their lower ends 
by means of bolts 5 and nuts 6 are the angle 
bars 7, each consisting of metal plate having 
vertical portions S and 9 and horizontal por 
tion 10. The vertical portion S is secured to 
the side bars by means of bolts 5 and nuts 6, 
while the portions 9 serve as supports or legs 
to the device when used as a stand. 
To the 
horizontal portion 10 is secured a platform 14 
by means of bolts and nuts 1516, which serves 
as a support for the barrel. 
For the purpose of allowing the barrel to 
rotate so that the faucet therein may be 
turned out of the way we provide the follow 
ing means: The platform is provided with a 
series of three or more slots 17, in which are 
journaled the lugs 18 of rollers or wheels 19. 
Upon these rollers or wheels rests a circular 
table 20, pivoted centrally in the said plat 
form by means of pivot-bar 21. To the up 
per ends of the bars is pivoted a curved bail 
22, which is adapted to be engaged with a bar 
rel placed in the truck, whereby it may be 
held Securely in position. 
The operation is as follows: When it is de 
sired to place a barrel on the truck, the lat 
ter is lowered to the position illustrated in 
Fig. 2, when the barrel can be rolled thereon 
and be supported by the cross-bars 2, which 
are slightly hollowed for that purpose. The 
bail is then turned over the barrel, whereby 
it is secured to the truck. The truck with the 
barrel thereon can now be moved to any de 
sired place and turned or elevated to an up 
right position with the ends of the legs or 
supports resting upon the ground, forming a 
stand, by which the barrel may be securely 
supported in a vertical position. The rotat 
ing table is employed so that the barrel may 
be turned to bring the faucet or spigot out of 
the way when desired. 
iIaving thus described our invention, what 
we claim is 
1. The combination, with a truck, of the 
angular bars secured to theside bars thereof, 
the platform secured to said bars, the rotat 
able table supported by said platform, and 
the curved bail pivoted to the side bars, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination, with a truck provided 
with a curved pivoted bail, of the angular 
bars having vertical portions Secured to the 
side bars of the truck, vertical portions form 
ing Supports or legs, horizontal portions, the 
platform secured thereto having slots in 
which are journaled wheels or rollers, and the 
table pivoted to the platform and resting on 
the rollers, substantially as described. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereunto affixed our signa 
tures in presence of two Witnesses. 
- 
LEWIS F. CHRISTY. 
ELIALDENDERFER, 
Witnesses: 
REBECCA THOMPSON, 
ELLEN SCHADEL, 
75 
9o 
95 
ICO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US453956.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BEAZLEY. 
CASTER. 
No. 453,956. 
- 
Patented June 9, 1891. 
7%aea/ 
?t sity 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIN BEAZLEY, OF NEW BARNET, ENGLAND. 
CASTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 453,956, dated June 9, 1891. 
Application filed September 17, 1890, Serial No. 365,208, (No model) Patented in England December 13, 1889, No. 20,075 in 
Belgium September 18, 1890, No. 91,986; in France September 13, 1890, No. 208,215; in Italy September 29, 1890, IV, 
in Cape of GoodHope October 4, 1890, No. 634; in Victoria October 9, 1890, No. 8,147 in Natal October 9, 1890 in South 
tralia October 10, 1890, No. 1752; in Spain November 13, 1890, No, i1,254, and in Canada November 19,1890, No,35,448. 
To all vivon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN BEAZLEY, a citi 
zen of England, residing at Tavistock Villa, 
Station Road, New Barnet, in the county of 
Herts, England, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Casters or Receptacles 
for Pepper and other Pulverulent Materials, 
(for which I have obtained patents in Great 
Britain, dated December 13, 1889, No. 20,075; 
in Victoria, dated October 9, 1890, No. 8,147; 
in South Australia, dated October 10, 1890, 
No. 1,752; in Canada, dated November 19, 1890, 
No. 35,448; in Belgium, dated September 13, 
1890, No. 91,986; in Cape of Good IIope, dated 
October 4, 1890, No. 634; in France, dated 
September 13, 1890, No. 208,215; in Italy, 
dated September 29, 1890, Vol. IV, 267; in Na 
tal, dated October 9, 1890, and in Spain, dated 
November 13, 1890, No. 11,254) of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
novel, simple, and economical caster, which 
will prevent the escape of the volatile con 
stituents of ground pepper and other pulveru. 
lent material therein contained, while per 
mitting such material to be readily discharged 
through the perforated end of the caster. 
To accomplish this object my invention in 
volves the combination or arrangement of 
devices and the principles of operation here 
inafter described and claimed, reference be 
ing made to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a vertical central sectional view 
of a caster constructed in accordance with 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a similar view show 
ing a modification, and Fig. 3 is a similar 
view showing another modification. 
In order to enable those skilled in the art 
to make and use my invention, I will now de 
scribe the same in detail, referring to the draw 
ings, wherein 
The letter A indicates a conical metallic 
case or receptacle, the upper end of which is 
perforated, as at Cl, for the escape of the 
ground pepper or other pulverulent material. 
The case or receptacle is provided at a point 
below the perforations with the rigidly-at 
tached immovable diaphragm or partition 
inverted. 
plate B, having a central orifice, which is 
adapted to be opened and closed through the 
medium of a conical valve C, in such manner 
that when the valve is seated the ground pep 
per or other pulverulent material is confined 
within the case or receptacle between its bot 
tom wall D and the movable diaphragm or 
partition-plate B. 
The bottom wall of the case or receptacle is 
elastic, and is so constructed that when pressed 
inwardly it will by its resiliency spring back 
and resume its normal position of rest. The 
elastic bottom wall is connected with the 
conical valve by means of a rigid stem C, so 
that when the bottom wall is pressed inward 
the conical valve is moved away from its seat, 
and the orifice in the movable diaphragm or 
partition-plate D is unclosed for the passage 
of the pulverulent material to the discharge 
perforations a when the case or receptacle is 
In the modification illustrated by Fig. 2 the 
bottom wall of the case or receptacle A 
may be rigid, while the stem C projects 
through the bottom wall and is provided with 
a finger-piece or button C, between which and 
the bottom wall of the case or receptacle is 
arranged the spiral or other suitable spring 
E, so that by pressing on the finger-piece or 
button the stem is moved lengthwise, and the 
conical valve C is thereby moved from its 
seat for the purpose of unclosing the central 
orifice in the movable diaphragm or partition 
plate B. Instead of placing the spring Elbe 
tween the finger-piece or button C and the 
bottom of the case or receptacle A, the Spring 
may be arranged upon an extension of the 
stem C at a point above the valve C, as illus 
trated in the modification Fig. 3. 
Iaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A caster for ground pepper and other 
pulverulent material, consisting of a conical 
case or receptacle having its small end pro 
vided with perforations (t, a transverse dia 
phragm or partition IB, fixed immovably in 
the case or receptacle at a point below the 
perforated portion thereof and provided with 
a central orifice, and a valve C, seating on 
s 
o 
75 
OO 
95 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
458,956 
2 
the top portion of the movable diaphragm 
and having a rigid spring-impelled stem C, 
by which to move the valve away from its 
seat, substantially as described. 
5' 2. A caster for ground pepper and other 
pulverulent material, consisting of a conical 
case or receptacle A, having its small end 
portion perforated, and provided with a trans 
verse diaphragm or partition-plate B immov 
fo ably fixed in position at a point below the 
perforated portion of the case or receptacle 
and provided with a central orifice, an elastic 
botton wall D to the case or receptacle, and 
a conical valve seating in the central orifice 
I5 of the diaphragm or partition-plate and hav 
ing a rigid stem C connected with the elastie 
bottom wall, substantially as described 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 4th day of Sep- 20 
tember, A. D. 1890. 
w 
JOHN BEAZLEY. 
Witnesses: 
Patent Agent, 28 Southampton Buildings, 
HAROLD IMRAY, 
. . . 
London, W. C. 
JNO. P. M. MILLARD, 
Clerk to Messrs. Abel de Imray, Consulting 
Engineers and Patent Agents, 28 Southamp 
ton Buildings, London, W. C. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454057.txt	W. MACMILLAN. 
GAI WANIC BATTERY. 
Patented June 16, 1891. 
LSLS0L0L0L 
(No Model.) 
No. 454,057. 
Fey. 1, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM MACMIILILAN, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BATTERY. 
GALVAN 1 C 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 454,057, dated June 16, 1891. 
Application filed October 17, 1890, Serial No. 368,424 (No model.) 
55 
7 ? 
75 
To all, ? ???, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM MACMILLAN, 
a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, and 
a resident of New York city, New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Galvanic Batteries, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming part 
hereof. 
This invention relates to galvanic batteries 
for generating electric currents, and has for 
its object to improve the construction of such 
batteries. 
The invention consists of certain improve 
ments in the construction of the porous cells 
and in the construction of the negative elle 
ments, and the combination with such ele 
ments of improved depolarizers. 
It also consists of an improved construc 
tion of receptacle for transporting the bat 
tery materials adapted to be used in combi 
nation with a cup or cell of the battery. 
Portions of my invention are especially 
adapted for batteries having a single fluid 
and a negative element consisting of a car 
bon plate and pieces of carbon packed around 
it, such as sal-ammoniac batteries. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section on the line l l of a com 
plete cell of a galvanic battery constructed 
according to my invention. Fig. 2 is a hori 
Zontal section of the same on the line 22, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of the car 
bon plate or element, partly in section. Fig. 
4 is a side elevation of the porous cup and 
covering and a sectional elevation of the re 
ceptacle for battery Substances constructed 
according to my invention. 
The battery shown in the drawings is of the 
single-fluid or sal-ammoniac type. The nega 
tive element consists of a carbon platea, 
placed within a porous cell b, The positive 
element is a zinc plate c, located outside the 
porous cell. The porous cell and the elle 
ments are all held within a jar or cup d. The 
carbon plate a is provided with slots, within 
which depolarizing material in cakes or 
plates of suitable shape or form may be ar 
ranged and thus virtually form part of the 
element or plate. I find that the depolariz 
ing material when thus arranged is highly 
efficient and acts directly upon the plate to 
remove the hydrogen - bubbles therefrom. 
When my entire invention is used, the depo 
larizing material is in form to fit the slots in 
the carbon or negative element. The depo 
larizing substance when in this form is much 
more durable and efficient than the loose 
powder heretofore used, and may be more 
readily fitted to the elements, and when ex 
hausted removed therefrom. 
The slots a' a', above referred to, may be 
formed as shown, extending horizontally 
through the plate or element. Two of such 
slots are shown; but it is obvious that their 
number may be increased or diminished. 
Within each of these slots is placed depolar 
izing material e in the form of a plate or cake, 
as aforesaid, which fits loosely in the slot, so 
that it may be readily inserted and removed. 
The depolarizing material preferred for this 
purpose is manganese dioxide. 
The space between the carbon plate and the 
walls of the porous cell b is filled nearly to 
the top of the cell with small pieces of car 
bon. The upper surface of this carbon filling 
is covered with a suitable sealing material 
such as ordinary sealing-wax-having suit 
able vents or tubes h h, provided for the es 
cape of gases from within the cell, 
The porous cell b consists of a perforated 
cup of fluid-proofed stiff paper or card-board, 
covered by a thin and porous fabric extend 
ing over the perforations in the cup. Coarse 
heavy straw-board is a cheap and efficient 
material for the cup, and it is prepared for 
use by immersing it in a solution of paraffine 
or resinous or other fluid-proofing solution or 
by otherwise saturating or coating it with a 
fluid-resisting material. It can be made in 
one piece or of several pieces. In the latter 
case the various pieces are held together by 
sealing-wax or other suitable material. The 
perforations b'b' are formed in the side wall 
of the cup. These perforations are clearly 
shown in Fig. 4, a portion of the covering ma 
terial of the cup being broken away for that 
purpose. 
This covering material or fabric if 
preferably extends over the outer surface of 
the cup, covering the side wall and bottom of 
the cup and passing over the upper edge and 
down into the sealing material at the top of 
the cup. Cambric is a cheap and efficient 
material for this covering. 
IO 
2 ? 
35 
45 
90 
95 
- ?. ? ? 
454,057 
The porous cups made according to my in 
vention are very cheap and of simple con 
struction. The fluid-proofedcard-board forms 
a stiff and strong cup, and the holes therein 
permit the battery-fluid to freely enter the 
porous cell through the fabric covering. The 
fabric covering prevents the carbon from es 
caping from the porous cell and prevents en 
try of any solid material from the outer cell, 
and also permits of larger perforations or of 
greater porosity in the cell. 
The receptacle for battery materials con 
sists of the cup g, shaped to fit over the lower 
part of the porous cup b. This cup g is pref 
erably made of coarse straw-board or other 
cheap material. When the batteries are trans 
ported in parts, the receptacle g is partly filled 
with the battery material-such as sal-ammo 
niac-in the battery of the kind shown in the 
drawings, and the porous cup placed upon it 
so as to act as a cover for the receptacle. 
(Shown in Fig. 4.) In setting up the batteries 
it is only necessary to separate the porous cup 
from the receptacle and then pour the sal 
ammoniac or other material into the battery 
jar. The receptacle can then be thrown away. 
This construction provides a receptacle for 
battery-salts which is strong and tight and 
durable and which takes up little extra room 
when the parts of the battery are packed for 
transportation. The paper bags heretofore 
used very often spill their contents, as they 
break or work open in transportation. My 
improved receptacle is free from all these ob 
jectionable features, as it will not break or 
leak under the ordinary stress of packing and 
transportation. The receptacle is also very 
convenient for pouring the salts into the bat 
tery-jar. 
A very great advantage which this form of 
battery has over the form now in use is that 
it produces a long-continued current and re 
cuperates very rapidly, a fact which is par 
tially due to the condition of the depolarizer. 
The carbon element can also be used without 
the cell and packing. 
What I claim is 
1. A porous cell for galvanic batteries, con 
sisting of a perforated cup of a stiff fluid-re 
sisting paper, substantially as set forth. 
2. A porous cell for galvanic batteries, con 
sisting of a perforated cup of stiff fluid-resist 
ing paper and of a covering of fibrous mate 
rial, substantially as specified. 
3. In a galvanic battery, the combination of 
5 
1 ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
7 o 
75 
a porous cell consisting of a perforated cup 
of a stiff fluid-resisting paper and of a cover 
ing of fibrous material with the carbon elle 
ment, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a galvanic battery, the combination of 
the carbon element, consisting of a carbon 
suitably slotted to receive a plate or plates of 
depolarizing material, and of one or more 
plates of depolarizing material fitted in the 
slot or slots, and of the carbon-filling material, 
with the cell consisting of a perforated cup of 
stiff fluid-resisting paper or analogous sub 
stance and of a covering of fibrous material, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. In a galvanic battery, the combination of 
a porous cell, with the carbon element ar 
ranged within said cell and consisting of a 
carbon provided with one or more suitable 
slots, each adapted to receive a movable plate 
of depolarizing material, and of one or more 
plates of depolarizing material fitted in the 
slot or slots, and of a carbon filling surround 
ing said carbon, and of a suitable sealing ma 
terial covering the mouth of said cup, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. In a galvanic battery, the combination of 
the positive elements thereof with the nega 
tive elements, said negative elements being 
slotted to receive a removable piece of suit 
able depolarizing material, substantially as 
set forth. 
7. A porous cell for a single-fluid galvanic 
battery, consisting of a perforated cup b, of 
stiff fluid-resisting paper, and the coveringf, 
of fibrous material, substantially asset forth. 
8. In a galvanic battery, the combination of 
the porous cell b for a single-fluid battery, 
said cell consisting of a perforated cup of stiff 
fluid-resisting paper and of the covering f, of 
fibrous material, with the carbon element d 
arranged within said cell and provided with 
suitable slots, into which the plates or cakes 
of depolarizing material e fit, and of the car 
bon filling arranged within said cellb, and of 
the sealing material covering the mouth of 
the said cup, substantially as set forth. 
9. In combination with a cup or cell of a 
galvanic battery, a receptacle for battery ma 
terials, consisting of a cap or cup adapted to 
fit the closed end of said battery-cell and be 
closed thereby, substantially as described. 
WM. MIACMILIAN. 
95 
I OO 
VWitnesses: 
HENRY D. WILLIAMS, 
ILIVINGSTON EMERY. 
a 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454157.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
. 
L., M. SMITH, 
ROAD CART, 
No. 454,157, 
Patented June 16, 1891, 
 
  
 
ar 
less 2 sig 
P-TE 
22 
- 2 262. 
%2 (3.2% 7-2 eer-r. 
-z-z 27 4-4 
IW/EWTO2 
Aliorneys. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 454,157. 
 
L., M. SMITH, 
ROAD CART. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 16, 1891. 
c227. 
z %26% 
4. IWWEWTOf 
(3-2427 af2-y. 
24lidorneys. 
The Noah's Peters co., PHoro-LTRo., WASHINGTON, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LORING M. SMITH, OF ROMEO, MICHIGAN. 
ROAD. CART, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 454,157, dated June 16, 1891. 
Application filed June 19, 1890, Renewed May 18, 1891, Serial No. 398,077, (No model.) 
55 
- 
Fig. 5 is a part in detail. 
To att, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LORING M. SMITH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Romeo, 
County of Macomb, State of Michigan, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Road-Carts; and I declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it pertains to make 
and use the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form a part 
of this specification. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of the road-cart embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of the same. Fig. 3 
shows a variation in the form of the rear 
Springs. Fig. 4 shows a portion of the shafts 
and axle, illustrating a variation in the con 
struction. 
In carrying out the invention, A represents 
the body, B the axle, and C the shafts, of my 
road-cart. 
I have illustrated my invention in connec 
tion with what is known as the phaeton 
cart and double-bent shafts-that is, a cart 
in which the shafts adjacent to the side of the 
body are horizontal, the horizontal portion 
terminating adjacent to the axle. 
D is a semi-elliptic spring attached to the 
rear portion of the body and supporting the 
Sale. 
F is a C-spring, there being one for each 
side of the vehicle, rigidly engaged by a suit 
able clip at f to the axle, the forward portion 
extending horizontally from the axle to a 
point adjacent to the end of the semi-elliptic 
spring E, with which it is suitably connected, 
while the rear portion curves upward and for 
ward in the form of a C to a point adjacent 
to the end of the semi-elliptic spring D, where 
the two are connected together. The forward 
end of the C-spring is connected to the semi 
elliptic spring E by what is known as the 
barrel-shackle  d, while the rear end has 
the shacklee engaged to it. This shackle e is 
formed, as shown in Fig. 5, with one or more 
hookse' projecting from the inner face of it 
and engaged to the C-spring F by a suitable 
bolt. A loope on the end of the cross-spring 
D may be made either to engage this hooke 
or to rest on the shackle, thus providing an 
adjustment for the rear portion of the body. 
G is a cross-piece extending between the 
arms H and rigidly engaged thereto, to which 
the horizontal portion of the C-spring F is en 
gaged, as at f'. 
H is an arm rigidly engaged at h to the 
axle, the rear portion extending upward in 
the form of a loop h, as shown in Fig. 2, while 
the forward portion extends out horizontally 
and is pivoted to the shafts at hadjacent to 
where the cross-bar G is attached. Playing 
freely in the loop h' of the arm H is the end 
of the shaft. 
J J are coil-springs, one located above and 
the other beneath the shaft, so that while the 
end of the shaft may have a free vertical mo 
tion it will be cushioned by the springs. 
It is of course obvious that instead of the 
coil-springs, as shown, I might employ leaf 
springs, such as illustrated in Fig. 4, they 
serving the same purpose as the coil-springs. 
It will be seen that by this construction what 
is popularly termed horse motion is almost 
entirely done away with, since, the end of the 
shafts being free to play up and down, the 
up-and-down motion of the horse is not trans 
mitted to the body of the vehicle and a far 
easier riding-cart is produced than has here 
tofore been the case. 
In Fig. 3 is shown a variation in the posi 
tion of the C-springs. The latter instead of 
extending rearwardly and upward, as in Figs. 
1 and 2, are extended laterally and upward, 
and the forward end of the body is suitably 
engaged with the shafts. This manner of at 
taching the C-springs is of course the equiv 
alent of the first named and would be con 
templated by my invention. 
What I claim is 
1. In a road-cart, the combination, with the 
axle, the body, and springs supported on said 
axle for sustaining the body, of arms Secured 
to and extended forward from the axle, a 
cross-bar extended between said arms and 
rigidly secured thereto, the shafts pivoted to 
the forward ends of said arms and having 
their rear free ends terminating above the 
axle, and springs bearing on the rear ends of 
said shafts to cushion the same in their verti 
cal motion, substantially as described. 
2. In a road-cart, the combination, with the 
axle, arms rigidly engaged thereto and extend 
ing forward therefrom, and shafts pivoted to 
90 
95 
OC) 
O 
35 
45 
454,157 
4. In a road-cart, the combination, with the 
body and the axle, of the semi-elliptic springs 
D and E, the C-springs F, the arms H, Se 
cured to the axle and provided at their rear 
ends with upright loops h", the shafts C, piv 
oted to said arms and having their rear ends 
engaged in said loops, and the springs J J' to 
cushion the rear ends of the shafts, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
- 
LORING. M. SMITH. 
2. 
25 
Witnesses: 
W. H. CHAMBERLIN, 
MARION A. REEVE. 
said arms at their forward ends and the free 
ends of the shafts terminating adjacent to the 
axle, of springs located above and beneath 
the free ends of said shafts and adapted to 
bear on the same, whereby the motion of the 
free ends is cushioned substantially as de 
scribed. . 
3. In a road-cart, the combination, with the 
axle and the arms H, engaged to said axle and 
having the upright loopsh', of the shafts piv 
oted to the forward ends of the arms II, the 
rear ends of the shafts playing in said loops, 
and coil-springs located in said loops above 
and beneath said free ends, substantially as 
described. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454257.txt	(No Model.) 
D. F. CREAN & W. F. STONE. 
CASTER SOCKET. 
No. 454,257. 
Patented June 16, l891. 
 
WITNESSES: 
3. 2arrow 0% 
cy24 acace, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL F. CREAN AND WILLIAM. F. STONE, OF WOODBURY, NEW JERSEY. 
CASTER SOCKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 454,257, dated June 16, 1891. 
Application filed October 4, 1890, Serial No. 367,130, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, DANIEL F. CREAN, 
and WILLIAM. F. STONE, both citizens of the 
United States, and residents of Woodbury, in 
the county of Gloucester, and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Caster Sockets, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to the sockets which 
are set in place within recesses in the legs 
and lower portion of articles of furniture, and 
are in such position designed to receive the 
pintles or stems of casters applied to such 
furniture, and which are usually provided 
with retaining springs which engage with 
such pintles. 
It is the object of our invention to provide 
an inexpensive, simple, and durable, caster 
socket, which possesses in its completed form 
certain novel and advantageous features of 
structure and operation. 
In the drawings we show and herein we de 
scribe a caster socket manufactured in ac 
cordance with our invention,-consisting of a 
socket proper embodying intermediately of 
its length a spring composed of a tongue cut 
from its own metal, and a track plate in the 
nature of an outwardly and rearwardly flaring 
lip at the open end of said socket. It is how 
ever to be understood that our invention is 
of applicability in connection with the for 
mation of sockets of other design than that 
shown in the drawings. 
The method referred to of forming the 
sockets, consists generally stated, in doubling 
a strip of blank of metal upon itself, and in 
bringing the respectively opposing pairs of 
edges of the two legs or halves of the blank 
into contact with each other, the Spring being 
cut in the metal of the blank before the lat 
ter is bent as above described. The track 
plate of the completed caster socket is pref 
erably formed integral with the metal of the 
socket itself, by providing each end of the 
original blank with a head, which heads are 
together with the respective halves of the 
blank, brought together in the doubling of 
the blank to form said track plate. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a 
55 
blank of suitable shape to be bent up to form 5o 
a track plate provided caster socket. Fig. 2 
is a view in perspective of the blank of Fig. 
1 in an intermediate stage of the process of 
doubling. Fig. 3 is a view in perspective of 
the completed caster socket. Fig. 4 is a view 
partly in central vertical section of the caster 
Socket as applied to the leg or block of an ar 
ticle of furniture, illustrating also a caster in 
lace within said socket. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
In Fig. l of the drawings A is a blank 
Which is in readiness to be bent or doubled to 
form a socket, said blank being a strip of 
metal, preferably cold rolled steel, conven 
iently embodying a notch a in each edge at 
its center, and, as the completed socket is to 
be provided with an integral track plate, pro 
vided at each end with a head a', the profile 
of which heads may be generally described 
as fan-like, and embodying near the base of 
each head notches c. A blank of this outline 
is preferably cut by a single stroke of an ap 
propriate cutting die. From the metal of one 
of the halves or legs of the blank is cut a U 
75 
shaped section, the removal of which leaves a 
tongue B, the body of which exists in an open 
ing Sufficiently larger than itself to insure its 
entire freedom of movement as hereinafter ex 
plained. The cutting out of this U-shaped sec 
tion is conveniently accomplished by a single 
stroke of a second cutting die. The blank so 
shaped is longitudinally and laterally bent to 
form the socket, and this bending is conven 
iently effected by the successive operation of 
two bending dies. The first bending die 
doubles the blank longitudinally into a form 
which may be described as A shaped, at the 
same time bends the body portions, or legs, 
of the blank, from the notches C. to the notches 
c, into semicylindrical form, with convexity 
outward, -at the same time preferably bellies 
bodily outward or away from each other the 
central portions of the legs or members of the 
blank, as for example the metal between the 
points de to form a bulb g in the completed 
Socket, and, finally, conveniently also bends 
outward and away from each other the fan 
95 
o 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
454,257 
75 
like heads of the blank helreinbefore referred 
to. The operation of the second pair of shap 
ing dies brings the two halves of the blank 
together to form the cylindrical socket, their 
respective opposing edges except between the 
points cle being brought into contact, -also 
bends or curls the edges of the two heads, 
now the track plate, rearwardly or toward the 
apex of the socket, -also cuts the edge of said 
track plate to form a series of serrations, 
(which operation incidentally evens or trims 
said edges)--and also if desired forces down 
upon the socket and to a point close to the 
track plate, a binding ring f. 
If desired the edges of the blank are slightly 
recessed as shown between the points de, but 
such recesses are not strictly necessary. The 
tongue B is at any desired stage of the forma 
tion of the socket to be bent or set inward to 
constitute it a spring. In the operation of 
the dies in forcing the track plate into the 
form shown, a slight drawing of the metal of 
the apex or closed end of the socket occurs. 
The method of forming a socket by doub 
ling a strip of metal upon itself produces a 
socket the upper end of which is integral 
with the metal of its body and therefore nat 
urally the better able to endure the heavy 
strains to which its bealing upon the upper 
end of the pintle subjects it. This method 
also permits the formation of a tongue or 
spring by the removal of a U-shaped section 
of metal from the blank itself and before the 
formation of the socket, and therefore makes 
it possible to form such a spring even in the 
smallest sizes of sockets, a thing which has 
been impossible in such small sized sockets 
as are formed by being drawn from a blank 
of metal, and in which the spring is cut after 
the socket is formed, because the diameter of 
such completely formed small sized sockets is 
practically equal to the necessary breadth of 
the U-shaped sections, and the dies which cut 
the latter cannot operate upon such small 
sized sockets. The bulbs g formed in the 
completed socket by the bellied out portions 
between the points d and e, constitute in ef 
fect a socket retaining spring, the object of 
which is to impart to the socket a degree of 
self adjustability enabling it to seat itself 
firmly within recesses to which it may be 
applied notwithstanding slight variations in 
size of said recesses. The degree to which 
said bellying shall be carried out is a matter 
within the province of the manufacturer. 
The normal diameter of the socket is its size 
between the points ct and d and e and c. 
When the socket is applied to a recess of 
exactly its normal size, the bulb portion is 
compressed by the entrance of the socket 
within the recess, and operates to retain the 
socket very tightly in position. When the 
socket is applied to a recess slightly larger 
than its own normal size and within which 
the ordinary socket could not be retained in 
place, said bulb portion takes up or compen 
sates for, so to speak, the additional area of 
the recess, and retains itself firmly in posi 
tion. It is apparent that our invention is 
broad enough to cover socket retaining springs 
of other character than the bulb described. 
The invention, as is obvious, is not re 
stricted to the sockets herein described pro 
vided with integral track plates but may also 
be practiced in the formation of sockets to be 
provided with the detachable track plates 
- 
well known in the art. 
By the method herein described the manu 
facture of sockets is improved, because the 
doubling of the blank requires a less numbel' 
of operations than the methods heretofore in 
vogue of drawing sockets from circular 
blanks, and is effected furthermore without 
the necessity of annealing. 
The pintle spring described has by reason 
of the large opening in which it is situated 
great freedom of action, and is secure against 
being caught by the edge of said opening in 
the rotation of the pintle. 
H, Fig. 4, indicates the pintle of a caster, 
beneath the head or ball I of which the pin 
tle spring of the socket is shown as engaged. 
The notches a hereinbefore referred to are 
cut in the substance of the blank for the pur 
pose of avoiding the presence of the two 
sharp projecting corners of metal at opposite 
sides of the upper end or apex of the socket 
which would otherwise beformed in the doub 
ling of the blank upon itself as described, 
and, said corners being thus dispensed with, 
the action of the shaping dies leaves the exte 
rior of Said socket smooth, while the notches 
c permit the necessary flow or readjustment 
of the metal incident to the bending back 
Ward of the track plate. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim: 
1. As an article of manufacture, a caster 
Socket formed of resilient metal, the body of 
which is for a portion of its length of a nor 
mal diameter, and as to the remainder of its 
length of an enlarged diameter, in the nature 
of an abrupt bulge, the wall of which en 
larged portion embodies openings, whereby 
Said enlarged portion is adapted to be com 
pressed and to act as a Socket retaining spring, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. As an article of manufacture, a caster 
Socket consisting of an integral strip of spring 
metal bent into Suitable shape to form the 
upper end or apex and the two semi-cylindric 
halves of said socket, said halves being so 
longitudinally bent that the completed socket 
is as to its upper and lower portions of a sub 
stantially common and normal diameter, and 
the intermediate portion of an enlarged di 
ameter, said enlarged portion being provided 
With openings So as to be compressible and 
adapted to act as a socket-retaining spring, 
substantially as set forth. 
95 
I IO 
I I5 
I 25 
O 
3O 
35 
.5 
55 
 
454,257 
3 
8. As an article of manufacture, a caster our names this 10th day of September, A.D. 
Socket formed of a strip of metal doubled 1890. 
upon itself and having its opposing edges 
forced into contact with each other, and held 
5 in position by a circumscribing ring, substan- 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing 
as our invention, we have hereunto signed 
GEO. H. BARKER, 
H. S. FALMAN. 
In presence of - 
RANHF SES 
o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454357.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. HOWARD. 
CATTLE RACK 
No. 454,357. 
Patented June 16, 1891, 
g 7 st 
 
 
s/ a 
 
 
as As s 
| 
 
axexemental 
N lista 
 
WS 
S. 
y N. 
WN h 
S. 
YE 
\SS 
S 
N 
  
A V W 77 Yn 
R 
A 
t 
is 
Will St. 
(Ol 
\ 
W. VIII 
| A T if 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JAMES HERVEY HO WARI), OF BALDWIN, KANSAS, 
CATTLE RACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 454,357, dated June 16, 1891. 
Application filed February 19, 1891. Serial No. 382,070. (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
So 
85 
To all tuflon, it Tay concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES HERVEY ILOW 
ARD, of Baldwin, in the county of Douglas and 
State of Kansas, have invented a new and Im 
proved Cattle-Rack, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to cattle-racks, and 
has for its object to provide a means whereby 
cattle may be fed from stacks of hay or other 
food located in a field without wasting the 
food and without danger of the stack when 
undermined falling upon the cattle to their 
injury. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a means whereby the rack may be ex 
peditiously and conveniently shifted to or 
from the stack, as may be required. 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
vide a rack of simple, durable, and economic 
construction, and which may be readily set 
up in any field. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
Struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in both the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the rack 
in Operative position, and Fig. 2 is a perspec 
tive view of a fence-panel used in connection 
With the rack. 
A number of posts 10 are fixedly secured in 
the ground, the said posts being arranged in 
rows between rows of hay-stacks or stacks of 
other food to be fed to the cattle. Two con 
tiguous posts in one or more of the rows are 
connected by rails 11, the rails being prefer 
ably parallel, as shown in Fig. 1. The rails 
are attached to the posts through the medium 
of bolts provided with suitable nuts, and in 
each rail a number of longitudinally-arranged 
apertures 12 are produced. 
In connection with the posts 10 and their 
rails 11 adjustable fence-panels A are em 
ployed. The panels preferably consist of a 
series of longitudinally-arranged slats 13, con 
nected by a series of uprights 14. At the 
center of each panel a longitudinal Opening 
15 is formed by omitting slats, the said open 
ing being of sufficient height to admit of the 
passage of the heads of the cattle. The slats 
at the top and bottom of the openings 15 in the 
panels are longer than the other slats, and the 
extremities of these longer slats are utilized to 
connect two or more panels. The rails 11 pass 
through the openings 15 in the panels, and one 
panel is preferably located between each two 
opposed rails. The panels are held in an up 
right position through the medium of arms 
16, which may be termed runners, the said 
arms being provided with straps 7 or their 
equivalents at their lower ends, which straps 
are passed over the ends of the lower long 
slats of the panels, and the upper ends of the 
arms or runners are connected with the rails 
11 by passing bolts through the runners 
and through one of apertures 12 in the rails, 
the said bolts being provided with suitable 
nuts. One runner only need be employed 
at the junction of two panels, as the lower 
long slats of the panels are preferably made 
to overlap and are connected by a bolt or an 
equivalent thereof. The upper long slats of 
the abutting panels are also made to overlap 
and are tied together, preferably, through the 
medium of a chain 18 secured to one of the 
long slats near its ends, and the chains are 
passed over the overlapping portions of the 
upper slats and are carried downward and 
attached to the rails 11 by passing bolts 
through links of the chains and through the 
apertures in the rails. If in practice it is 
found desirable, the openings 15 in the panels 
may be closed by doors 19, hinged to one of 
the slats, as illustrated in Fig. 2. 
When panels are connected in a sufficient 
number to extend across a field, the end pan 
els are attached to the fence B inclosing the 
field, as illustrated in Fig. 1; but when the 
stacks are located at one corner of a field, for 
instance, or in the center of the field, and it 
is desired to inclose the stacks in such man 
ner that the cattle can feed at all sides, a 
fence is constructed upon three sides of 
the stacks, the fence being formed by panels 
D, constructed as illustrated in Fig. 2. These 
panels are made practically in like manner 
to the panels A; but the slats are ordinarily 
of equal length, and the center upright 14 has 
a chain 20 attached at or near its lower end, 
provided with a stake or pin 21, which pin is 
O 
25. 
40 
45 
I do 
454,857 
driven in the ground, serving as a brace when dermining a stack, and thus causing the up 
per portion to fall over upon them, is avoided, 
the panels are in position. The panels D are 
as when any undermining has taken place 
secured to the posts 10 by means of bolts 22, 
an attendant may level the stack by the use 
and the panels are Ordinarily held some dis 
of any suitable implement and bring the hay 
tance away from the posts through the me 
close to the panels A. 
dium of washers 23, surrounding the bolts. It 
Having thus described my invention, I 
will be understood that when a fence incos 
ing three sides of the stacks is employed the 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
fourth side is closed or protected by the ad 
Patent 
justable panels A; but two or more sides may 
1. The combination, with a series of posts 
arranged in rows and rails detachably at 
be made up of adjustable panels, if desired. 
tached at their ends to the posts, of panels 
If it is desired to have the cattle feed from 
separate and independent of said posts Con 
one side only of the inclosure, the doors 19 in 
taining feed - openings and adjustably at 
the panels at the other sides of the inclosing 
tached to the rails, substantially as and for 
structure are closed. The panels A, consti 
the purpose specified. 
tuting one side of the inclosure, may be ex 
peditiously and conveniently moved in the 
2. The combination, with posts and rails 
removably attached thereto and provided 
direction of the stack or stacks as the hay is 
exhausted by removing the bolts connecting 
with a series of apertures, of fence-panels con 
taining feed-openings and arms or runners 
the runners 16 with the rails 11 and carrying 
attached to the panels at one end and adjust 
the panels the desired distance forward, and 
when the proper position is obtained the run 
ably secured to the rails at their opposite end, 
as and for the purpose Specified. 
ners are again attached to the rails by pass 
ing the bolts through another of the apertures 
3. The combination, With a series of posts 
arranged in rows and rails containing aper 
12 therein. When the hay in one line of 
tures and removably attached to the posts, 
stacks has been used up, the rails II are 
of fence-panels containing feed-openings, the 
transferred to the next set of posts, and the 
said panels being arranged at an angle to the 
adjustable panels are shifted and attached to 
the rails in their new position. When the 
rails, a connection between the panels, and 
adjustable panels are extended to the or 
arms or runners secured at one end to the 
panels and adjustably connected at their op 
dinary fence, as shown in Fig. 1, the end rail 
posite end to the rails, as and for the purpose 
11 is located Some distance inside the fence 
specified. 
line, and the space between the rail and fence 
is closed by a short panel, which panel may 
4. The combination, with posts arranged in 
be secured to the adjacent adjustable panel 
rows and rails removably connecting the 
posts, of fence-panels provided with feed 
and to the fence in any suitable or approved 
openings and doors adapted to close the same 
manner. The short section may also be 
hinged, if desired, to act as a gate, whereby 
and runners or arms secured at one end to 
the panels and adjustably attached at their 
access may be had to that portion of the field 
opposite end to the rails, as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
By means of a rack constructed as described 
it is evident that the cattle will be prevented 
from wasting the food and that the food can 
be brought at all times within easy reach of 
the cattle. Again, the danger of the cattle 
becoming Smothered in consequence of un 
JAMES HERVEY OWARD. 
Witnesses: 
S. K. KIDDER, 
L. E. KIDDER. 
4o in which the stacks are located. 
55 
75 
O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454458.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 454,458, 
S. C. COBB, 
SEEDING MACHINE . 
Patented June 23, 1891. 
 
MVATWAESSES : 
242 2/324-2- 
%, 7%. , s: 
IWVEWTOA, 
dio -4-2 4-4 
"62 / 2. 2.-- 
ATIOARNVEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL C. COBB, OF JANESVILLE, WISCONSIN. 
SEED ING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 454,458, dated June 23, 1891. 
Application filed April 17, 1891, 
Serial No,389,373, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all w/von it invaly concert: 
Beitknown that I, SAMUEL C. COBB, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Janes 
ville, in the county of Rock and State of Wis 
consin, have invented certain new and use. 
ful Improvements in Seeding-Machines; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
S80, 
My invention has for its object to support 
a seed-box upon disk-gangs having an end 
Wise movement independently of a main 
frame, so that said box will assume a level 
and uniform position during all changes of 
the disk-gangs. This I accomplish by the 
means illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a real view of a machine em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
cross-section of the same, taken on line 1 1 of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a cen 
tral supporting-standard. Fig. 4 is a vertical 
Cross-section of an end Standard. 
As illustrated in the drawings, each disk 
gang consists of a series of disks C, secured 
upon an axle-rod D and separated by spools 
E. The inner end of the rod D is provided 
with a head or buffer F. Standards G, hav 
ing their upper ends connected by means of 
the cross-bar H and their lower ends pro 
vided with bearing-boxes 9, engaging with 
the spools E, complete the disk-gangs. 
The main frame consists of a pole A, a lat 
erally-extending cross-bar B, and a seat-stand 
ard Y. The disk-gangs are connected to the 
main frame by 1means of laterally-movable 
draft-bars , pivoted at their forward ends to 
the cross-bar B and at their rear ends to the 
standard G, and by brace-bars V, which are 
pivoted to the cross-bar II and to the bar B. 
When the machine is not in operation, the 
gangs are arranged in a line at right angles 
to the line of progression of the machine; but 
when in operation the inner ends of the gangs 
are thrown backward, as illustrated by dotted 
lines in Fig. 2, the gangs then being arranged 
obliquely to said line of progression. In 
moving backward the inner ends of the gangs 
separate from each other, thereby leaving a 
wide strip of ground uncultivated. To over 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
come this objection and to bring the inner 
ends of the gangs together, so that the buf 
fers F may come in contact, the draft-rods I, 
which connect the gangs to the main frame, 
swing laterally on their pivots and permit a 
limited bodily movement of the gangs end 
wise. The buffers F are brought into con 
tact, in order that each gang may resist the 
side thrust or pressure of the opposite gang, 
and thereby avoid the lateral friction on the 
journal-bearings commonly found in this class 
of machines. 
In order to support a seed-box upon disk 
gangs having the bodily end Wise movement 
already described, it is necessary to provide 
Some means for compensating for said end 
Wise movement and at the same time hold 
the box in a level position at right angles to 
the central longitudinal line of the machine. 
To accomplish this result the seed-box J is 
supported at one end by a standard composed 
of two sections, the upper section M being 
secured to the seed-box and the lower section 
Kattached to the cross-bar II or other suit 
able portion of the disk-gang. The two sec 
tions are united by means of a bolt S, which 
is held in place by means of a transverse bolt 
Q. The seed-box is supported at its center 
by a standard N, having its lower end pivot 
ally secured to the main frame by means of 
a pin or bolt R. and its upper end clasped 
freely by the Overlapping lip I, so as to allow 
a limited lateral movement to said end of the 
standard. The seed-box is preferably pivoted 
to the standard N by means of a bolt P, so 
that the box may adjust itself to a horizontal 
position during all changes of the disk-gangs. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a main frame and 
disk-gangs pivoted thereto, of a seed-box, a 
Sectional end Supporting standard, and a cen 
tral standard pivoted at its lower end to the 
main frame and movable laterally at its upper 
end, substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination, with a main frame, of 
disk-gangs movable vertically and laterally 
independently of said frame, a seed-box piv 
otally Supported upon a Standard pivoted at 
its lower end to the main frame and movable 
laterally at its upper end, and a sectional end 
Supporting standard, Substantially as shown 
and described. 
90 
95 
Ioo 
1 
- 
454,458 
3. The combination, with a main frame, of 
disk-gangs pivoted to the main frame, a seed- presence of two witnesses. 
box, a swivel end supporting standard, and a 
central standard pivoted at its lower end to 
5 the main frame and movable laterally at its 
upper end, substantially as shown and de- 
scribed. 
ROBERT W. HARDIE, 
COLIN C. MCLEAN, 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL C. COBB. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454558.txt	(No Model.) 
T. A., EDIS ON, 
INCANDESCENT ELECTRIC I AMP, 
No. 454,558, 
Patented June 23, 1891. 
WITNESSES : 
6) IS. c.(off- 
c/aa-1 6.2cie?. 
 
INVENTOR: 
S&L &disow 
"as?if 37 
ATTORNEY. 
v 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS A. EDISON, OF MENLO PARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
EDISON ELECTRIC LIGHT COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
IN CAND ESCENT ELECTRIC LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 454,558, dated June 23, 1891. 
Application filed August 7, 1882, Serial No. 68,606, (No model.) 
other may be used separately. This may be 
better understood by reference to the accom 
panying drawing, in which the figure repre 
sents the carbon and connections, the globe of 
the lamp being omitted. 
A is the interior supporting tube or stem 
of an incandescent lamp. 12 are the leading 
in wires sealed therein and supporting the 
limbs C C of the carbon, to which they are 
secured by electroplating. A third leading 
in wire 3 is also sealed in the glass stem A, 
and is attached above at the center of the 
arch by electroplating the wire to the carbon 
at b. 
Suitable arrangements of contacts and cir 
cuit-controllers are made in the base of the 
lamp or elsewhere, so that the proper connec 
tions for the various uses of the la mp may be 
made, as described. 
What I claim is 
In an incandescent electric lamp, the colm 
bination of an inclosing globe, a continuous 
integral loop-shaped carbon filament therein, 
conducting-wires attached to the ends of said 
filament and extending outside the globe for 
electrical connection with an external circuit, 
and a third conducting-wire connected with 
the middle point of the filamentary loop and 
also extending outside the globe for electrical 
connection, substantially as set forth. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
5th day of December, 1881. 
T. A. EDISON. 
45 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
H. W. SEELY, 
WM. H. MEADOWCROFT, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS A. EDISON, of 
Menlo Park, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Incandescing Elec 
tric Lamps; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full and exact description of 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
an incandescent electric lamp in which one 
double-limbed carbon is used made integral 
throughout its length, such carbon being so 
arranged and connected that both limbs may 
be used together in series in the ordinary 
manner, or both may be used in multiple arc, 
or either limb may be used separately with 
out the other. 
In carrying my invention into effect the 
limbs of the carbon (which is the ordinary 
horseshoe carbon commonly employed by 
me) are supported in the usual manner by 
electroplating to leading-in' wires sealed 
in the glass of the inclosing globe. Between 
these leading-in wires is sealed a third, which 
extends up between the limbs of the carbon, 
and is attached at the center of the arch or 
loop by electroplating tiereto. When all 
these wires are properly connected to the sys 
tem, the current passes through the central 
wire and is divided between the two limbs of 
the carbon, the latter thus being in multiple 
arc. If the central wire is disconnected and 
the two limbs attached to opposite wires of 
the system, the two are of course in series, or 
if one limb of the carbon is disconnected the 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454658.txt	(No Model.) 
S. E. NUTTING, 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 454,658, 
Patented June 23, 1891, 
 
A3, 
y-s veg 
He wars PEERs co. Photo-Lito., WAshgTor, d. c. 
 
S. E. NUTTING, 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 23, 1891. 
  
a) NEHINIHA 
HINNIH 
HIEVE 
 
Z22 e22%z' 
&ze/Z.12%-2 
(No Model.) 
s 
No. 454,658, 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- - - - 
SAMUEL E. NUTTING, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE NUTTING 
ELECTRIC MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 454,658, dated June 23, 1891. 
Application filed August 7, 1890, Serial No. 361,343, (No model.) 
55 
to 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL E. NUTTING, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Mechanical Move 
ments, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of my invention is to make a 
machine in which the relative speed of the 
driving-shaft and the driven shaft may beau 
tomatically varied according to the work 
which the driven shaft is required to per 
form without being obliged to vary the speed 
of the driving-shaft; and my invention con 
sists in the features and details of construc 
tion hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion showing the arrangement of the parts 
mounted on the driving-shaft and on the 
driven shaft. Fig. 2 is a perspective view 
of one of the disks disconnected from the 
other parts. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of 
the same disk, viewed from the other side. 
Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the driving 
shaft and the hub mounted and fixed there 
on, which is arranged intermediate the disks 
with a loose collar around the hub and con 
necting parts. Fig. 5 is a side elevation of 
the parts shown in Fig. 1 in another position, 
and Fig. 6 is an end elevation taken in the 
line 6 of Fig. 1. 
In making a machine in which I can oper 
ate the driving-shaft at any desired or given 
speed, and automatically vary the speed of 
the shaft or shafts driven by it according to 
the work which they are to perform, I arrange 
a shaft A in Suitable journals or bearings 
and adapted to be driven or rotated by any 
conyenient motive power-as steam, hand, 
electric, or other power. In use, however, I 
contemplate more particularly the employ 
ment of an electric motor for imparting rota 
tion to the shaft A. At any convenient point 
on this shaft I arrange a hub B, which is 
fixed to the shaft by a set-bolt or otherwise 
so as to rotate with it. On one or both sides 
of this hub, as it may be desirable to drive 
one or more shafts, I arrange a disk or disks 
C. For convenience, however, I will describe 
the construction, arrangement, and operation 
- 
of the parts where two disks are employed 
for imparting rotary motion to shafts. These 
disks are mounted eccentrically on shaft A 
through means of slots D at one side of their 
centers. They are, however, centrally con 
nected with the hub B by means of pins E, 
extending out from the hub at one side of its 
center, as from the holese into holes in the cen 
ters of the disk. On one side of each of the 
disks is arranged an eccentric F, preferably 
grooved and castor made integral with the disk 
and having its center, when in a state of rest, 
corresponding with the center of the shaft A. 
Around this grooved eccentric is arranged a 
collar G, carrying a pitman or reciprocating 
bar H. This pitman is connected with a de 
vice on the shafts I which are to be driven, 
adapted to convert a reciprocating motion 
into a rotary motion. 
I have shown in Fig. 1 
such a device; but as I have made it the sub 
ject of another application for a patent bear 
ing even date with this one, and numbered 
361,344, I need not describe it in detail. Any 
other device adapted to convert reciprocating 
motion into rotary motion may be employed, 
however, if preferred. At one side of each 
of the disks is arranged a weight J. Before 
the addition of these weights it will be un 
derstood that the disks with their eccentrics 
are balanced on the pins or studs E, connect 
ing their centers eccentrically with the hub. 
The addition of these weights serves to make 
the disks heavier at the particular point where 
they are placed than at any other point. The 
slots D in the disks may be of any desired 
size or shape, as they are simply intended to 
afford space to permit the disks to move or 
change their position relatively to the hub. 
In other words, the slots permit the disks to 
partially rotate on the pins E, which they 
could not do if they were held at two places 
by the pin and the shaft A. The extent of 
their rotation may be governed by the size or 
length of the slot. 
As the shaft. A rotates . 
and with it rotates the hub B, the disks C 
will be carried around by the pins E. This 
would cause the eccentric E also to be carried 
around with the shaft A as its center of rota 
tion. In this case, however, the collar G would 
simply slide around the eccentric without im 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
95 
 
g 
454,658 
25 
15 
parting any motion to the bars H. As, how 
ever, the disks are provided with weights J, 
the action of the contrifugal force produced 
by the carrying around of the disks by the 
pin E tends to cause such weights, or, in 
other words, the heaviest portion of the disks, 
to be moved or thrown to the farthest posi 
tion possible from the center of rotation, 
which, as above explained, is the shaft A. 
This movement of the Weighted portion of 
the disks under the action of centrifugal force 
partially turns or rotates the disks on the pins 
E. As the weighted portions of the disks 
thus move under the action of centrifugal 
force, the eccentric F, arranged on them, is 
also moved so that it ceases to have the shaft 
A for its center. The degree of eccentricity 
which it assumes to such shaft depends upon 
and is proportioned to the extent to which 
the Weights cause the disks to be turned or 
moved on the pins E as soon as the disks and 
the eccentric are moved by the weights, so 
that the shaft. A ceases to be the center of 
the eccentric and reciprocating motion is im 
parted to the bars H. As the eccentric is 
moved farther away from its original center 
the shaft A-the greater becomes the recip 
locating motion of the bars H. In other 
Words, the greater the degree of eccentricity 
3o which the eccentric assumes to the shaft A 
the greater will become the reciprocating mo 
tion of the bars H; and, as above explained, 
the degree of eccentricity which exists at 
any time between the eccentric and the shaft 
depends upon the extent to which the cen 
trifugal force can move or partially rotate the 
disks on the pin E. Where the work to be 
performed by the rotation of the shafts I is 
Small, the more easily will such shafts be ro 
4otated and the less will the power exerted in 
their rotation operate against or counteract 
the operation of the centrifugal force tend 
ing to move the disks on the pins E. As the 
Work to be performed increases, however, so 
that more power is necessary to rotate the 
shafts I, the greater force or resistance there 
will be opposed to the operation of the cen 
trifugal force. When the centrifugal force 
is only able to move the weighted portions of 
the disks a small distance, and thus produce 
but a small degree of eccentricity between 
the eccentric F and the shaft A, but a short 
reciprocating movement will be imparted to 
the bars H. The length of movement or 
stroke in these bars increases or diminishes 
according as a greater or less amount of ec 
centricity in the eccentric is produced and 
maintained by the centrifugal force, and the 
extent that a given amount of centrifugal 
force will be able to move the disks and pro 
duce this eccentricity in the eccentric con 
stantly depends upon the amount of resist 
ance which the operation of the shafts op 
poses to its action, Hence, although the shaft 
A may be constantly rotated at a uniform 
speed, and thus develop a uniform amount of 
centrifugal force, such force will only be able 
to move the weights on the disks a distance 
from the center of rotation and produce a 
degree of eccentricity between the eccentric 
and the shaft proportioned to the amount of 
resistance necessary to be overcome in the 
rotation of the driven shafts I. In other 
words, in proportion to the amount of Work 
to be performed. If the shaft A is constantly 
rotating at uniform speed and producing uni 
form amount of centrifugal force, the extent 
of movement of the reciprocating bars Will 
be long or short according to the Work to be 
done, and therefore the rotation of the shafts 
I will be slow or rapid according to the 
amount of such work. I wish to say, how 
ever, that I of course understand that by va 
rying the speed of rotation of the driving 
shaft I can increase or decrease the amount 
of centrifugal force developed, the degree of 
eccentricity between the eccentric and the 
shaft, the extent of movement of the recipro 
cating bars and the speed of rotation of the 
driven shafts, as well as by varying the load 
or work to be done. 
In order to connect the disks and cause 
them to move together, I have provided the 
hub with a loose collar K, with links L., which 
are pivoted, respectively, to the holes l in the 
disks. 
Although I have shown the disks C as cir 
cular in form, yet I have employed this form 
simply as a matter of convenience for bal 
ancing the parts and not from necessity, as 
the weights might be hung on projecting arms 
connected with the eccentric, so as to be held 
in proper position, and other means employed 
for properly balancing the parts on the pin E. 
If, therefore, I use the term disks in my 
specification and claims, I desire it to be un 
derstood that I use such term merely as a 
convenient way of designating some device or 
means enabling the weights to be arranged at 
proper positions at the side of the center of 
rotation and balancing the parts on the pins E. 
It is also merely as a matter of convenience 
that I have termed the connection between 
the shaft A and the eccentric F as a hub.' 
Any device or means that will serve to form 
a connection so as to impart rotation from the 
shaft to the eccentric will serve the purpose, 
and in using the word hub in the specifica 
tion and claims I wish it to be understood in 
this broad sense. 
I may say in conclusion that, stripped of its 
non-essentials, my invention consists in the 
employment of a shaft that may be rotated 
by any convenient motive power, an eccen 
tric which is rotated by the shaft and which 
in a state of rest has its center approximately 
corresponding to the center of the shaft or 
center of rotation, and which is movable by 
the action of centrifugal force into a position 
eccentric to the shaft, the degree of eccen 
tricity produced by the centrifugal force be 
ing proportionate to the difficulty of operating 
the parts dependent upon the eccentric for 
their motion, and in connecting with the ec 
45 
35 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
454,658 
3 
O 
centric a bar for imparting movement to the 
parts which are intended to be operated or 
which are intended to do the Work desired. 
What I regard as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for producing mechanical 
movement, the combination of a revoluble 
shaft, an eccentric revoluble by the shaft and 
in a state of rest having its center correspond 
ing approximately to the center of the shaft 
and movable by the action of centrifugal force 
into position eccentric to the shaft, a revolu 
ble shaft provided with a device for convert 
ing reciprocating into rotary motion, and a 
bar connected to the eccentric and to such de 
vice for imparting motion to its shaft, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a machine for producing mechanical 
movement, the combination of a revoluble 
shaft, an eccentric revoluble by the shaft and 
in a state of rest having its center approxi 
mately corresponding to the center of the 
shaft, a weight at one side of the center of ro 
tation, said eccentric movable by the action 
of centrifugal force into a position eccentric 
to the shaft, and a bar connected to the ec 
centric for imparting movement to other parts, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a machine for producing mechanical 
movement, the combination of a revoluble 
shaft, a hub revoluble with the shaft, an ec 
centric having its center in a state of rest ap 
proximately corresponding to the center of 
the shaft and pivoted to the hub at a point 
eccentric to the shaft and movable on its piv- 35 
otal point by the action of centrifugal force 
to a position eccentric to the shaft, and a bar 
connected to the eccentric for imparting move 
ment to other parts, substantially as described. 
SAMUEL E. NUTTING. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS A. BANNING, 
JAMES W. HEDENBERG, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454758.txt	(No Model.) 
J. O'BOUR KE. 
CANE PLANTING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 454,758. 
Patented June 23, 1891. 
s 
WZZrvesses 
C2%ive, 
CY) news. 
v 
77voyerZor 
I Jo?erv OZjover?ee 
s 2% 22 rveys 
THE Norris PETERs co., Photo-litHo., WASHINGTON, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 454,758, 
J. O'BOUR KE. 
CANE PLANTING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented June 23, 1891, 
  
Wazruesses. 
7%;7 Caze 
City. So, 
 
Zivorczar. 
: 3:2:11: 
27g 
the Norris PETERs co, photo-Litho., WASHINGToki, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN OBOURKE, OF CIENFUEGOS, CUBA. 
CAN E-PLANTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 454,758, dated June 23, 1891. 
Application filed November 15, 1890, Serial No. 371,538, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN OBOURKE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Cienfuegos, Cuba, have invented certain Im 
provements in Cane-Planting Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a simple and effective machine for planting 
Sections of Sugar-cane or sorghum in sugar 
producing countries, the machine being so 
Constructed as to open the ground, deposit the 
Sections of cane at regular predetermined in 
tervals in the furrows, and finally to cover 
the cane with earth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a machine constructed in ac 
cordance with my invention, the platform on 
the frame of the machine being removed in 
order to more clearly show the operating parts; 
and Fig. 2 is a vertical section on the line 1 
2, Fig. 1. 
The main frame-work A is carried by an 
axle Ct, on the opposite ends of which are 
mounted two. Wheels A. This frame serves 
to Support the operating parts and from its 
front end extends a guiding-tongue A*. Im 
mediately under the front of the frame A are 
a pair of plows or furrowing-blades B, which 
are firmly secured to each other by a yoke B', 
from the center of which extends the plow 
beam B, to which the oxen or horses are 
hitched. The rear ends of the plows are se 
cured together by a transverse brace-bar C 
and are kept in proper position by vertical 
guide-bars D, which pass up over the tongue 
A, and to which are secured guiding-rods b 
passing between rollers b on either side of 
the tongue. These plows are of the peculiar 
form shown and have their opposite faces of 
similar mold-board shape, so that they will 
make simple furrows in the ground, the space 
between the plows being sufficient to permit 
the accumulation of the earth turned up by 
the adjacent faces of the plows. 
On the front portion of the frame A is 
mounted an axle or shaft E, at the center of 
which is secured a wheel or quadrant E', and 
to which is secured a hoisting-chain (t', ex 
tending down to the plow-beam B. That end 
of the shaft nearest the driver's seat is pro 
vided with ratchet-wheels FF, and with the 
ratchet-wheel F engages a pawl?, pivoted to 
a lever G and adapted to be operated by a 
pawl-bar f'. By using this lever the driver 
can readily lower the plows to any desired 
distance in the ground or may remove them 
entirely from contact with the ground in trav 
eling to and from the field of operation. 
In order to depress the point of the plow 
to suit different soils, I provide a lever H, piv 
oted to the tongue A, and having its lower 
end embracing the plow-beam B, and adapted 
to bear on the upper face of Said plow-beam, 
so that by the operation of a lever I the op 
erator may move the lever H in the direction 
of the arrow and depress the plow-beam and 
the point of the plow to a greater or less ex 
tent, as desired, the position which the oper 
rating-lever I assumes when the plows are 
fully depressed being shown by dotted lines 
in Fig. 2. 
At some distance in the rear of the plows 
are curved cane-chutes J, hinged at j to the 
frame A, and each having communication 
with an inclined chute Kabove the platform 
A and forming feeders for the cane-chute, 
the sections of cane being lifted from a suit 
able receptacle on the platform A by the at 
tendants and dropped one by one into the in 
clined chutes K, from which they descendlinto 
the curved chutes J. Midway of their length 
these chutes are provided with gates Ol' shut 
ters k, hinged at their outer upper ends to the 
chute, and each connected by a rod k' to an 
armi', secured to a rock-shaft l, held in bear 
ings on the main frame A. At one end of 
this rock-shaftis secured an arm I, having an 
upwardly-inclined portion m, with which en 
gage a series of pins in on a disk M. This 
disk is secured to the hub of one of the sup 
porting-wheels, so that it will revolve as the 
machine is moved, and is provided with a 
number of equidistant Orifices n, in which 
the pins in may be placed. These pins may 
be readily removed and placed at any dis 
tance from each other, so that the sections of 
cane may be dropped at any desired distance 
from each other, the pins as they rotate press 
ing the arm IL back and partially rotating the 
rock-shaft l, so that the shutters k are opened 
as each pin comes in contact with the arm 
and a piece of cane is permitted to fall from 
each chute into the furrows. 
On the rods k'are placed springsk', so that 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
Ido 
454,758 
any forward movement of the arm L will 
merely compress the spring, this construction 
being desirable when the machine has to be 
backed, in which case the pins n will cause a 
Yement of the arm L in the wrong direc 
1O. 
Immediately in the rear of the cane-chutes 
J are a pair of covering-blades P, supported 
at the rear end of an adjustable framing Q, of 
Which the transverse bar C, extending across 
and secured to the rear end of the plows, 
forms the front portion. This frame-work 
is formed of a number of transversely-placed 
bracing -bars and is adjustable, as shown 
more clearly in Fig. 2, the covering-blades P 
being secured to said frame by braces p, 
which may also be adjusted to various posi 
tions on their bars. 
Immediately above the covering-blades P 
is a rock-shaft S, held in bearings on the main 
frame-work and provided with two quadrants 
S' and T, the quadrant S having secured to 
it a chains, extending down to the rear por 
tion of the covering-blade frame, while the 
quadrant T is provided with a chaint, extend 
ing to a Small winding-drum formed in the 
center of the double ratchet-wheel F at the 
front portion of the machine. By using the 
lever G, therefore, the operator by a single 
movement can raise the plows and the cover 
ing-blades to any height from the ground, 
and by means of a roller v, secured to the 
frame-Work Q and pressing against the cane 
chutes J, this upward movement of the frame 
and plows will cause a tilting or swinging of the 
cane-chutes on their hingesi and will elevate 
their discharging ends some distance above 
the ground. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The combination, in a cane-planting ma 
chine, of the twin plows or furrowing devices 
at the front end of the machine and adapted 
to form two parallel furrows, the cane-chutes 
in the rear of said plows, and a single pair of 
covering-blades by which the tworows of cane 
planted are covered in one hill, substantially 
as specified. 
65 
2. The combination, in a cane-planting ma" 
chine, of the main frame.A, the lower frame Q, 5o 
covering-blades carried thereby, and a plow or 
plows attached to the frontend of said frame, 
with devices for raising and lowering said plow 
and frame,comprising the quadrants S, T, and 
E", chains connecting said quadrants to a 55 
power-shaft, and mechanism for turning said 
shaft, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, in a cane-planting ma 
chine, of the main frame A, the lower frame 
Q, covering-blades carried thereby, a plow- 6o 
beam attached to the front of said frame, a 
cane-chute hinged to the frame A, and a roller 
carried by said frame Q and adapted to act on 
said cane-chute on the raising or lowering of 
said frame, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination, in a cane-planting ma 
chine, of the frame A, the tongue A, extend 
ing therefrom, the plows B,hung to said frame, 
the plow-beam B, a lever H, hinged to said 
tongue and adapted to bear upon the plow- 7 O 
beam, and a hand-lever I, fulcrumed to the 
frame-work and connected to the lever H, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination, in a cane-planting ma 
chine, of a delivery-chute, a hinged shutter or 75 
door thereon, and devices for opening said 
shutter, comprising a rotated disk, a series of 
pins thereon, a rock-shaft l, an arm L on said 
rock-shaft, adapted to engage with said pins, 
an arm j' on the rock-shaft l, and a rod k', 8o 
connecting the arm i' with the shutter, sub 
stantially as specified. 
6. A device for regulating the discharge of 
cane from the feed-chute of a planting-ma 
chine, consisting of a disk having a series of 85 
equidistant or nearly equidistant orifices and 
pins adapted to such orifices, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 90 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN O'BOURRE. 
Witnesses: 
JULIO EHNINGER, 
LUIS EHNINGER. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454858.txt	Yi 
(No Model.) 
E. R. DUCKWALL, 
AUTOMATIC SAFETY STOP FOR INCLINED CABLE RAILWAYS. 
No. 454,858. 
 
Patented June 30, 1891, 
O 
as 
5a- Za 
2 ZGSs is 
y 
78...a6,228 fed 
All- 
a 7- - 
- - Al-e- 
427. 
 
 
S2 
the Norris PETERs co, Photo-lirho., washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIAS R. DUCKWALL OF BANTAM, OFIIO. 
AUTOMATIC SAFETY-STOP FOR IN CLINED CABLE RAILWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 45 4,858, dated June 30, 1891. 
Application filed February 24, 1891, Serial No. 382,364, (No model.) 
W 
To all whom it nagy conce77: 
is encircled by a coil-spring 16, confined be- . 
Beit known that I, ELIAS R. DUCKWALL, a 
tween said timber and a stop 17, held upon 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ban 
the end of draw-bar 12 by means of a nut 18. 
tam, in the county of Clermont and State of 
When the truck is at rest and the cable not 55 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
pulling, spring 16, by its expansive force, 
Improvements in Automatic Safety-Stops for 
moves draw-bar 12 some distance rearwardly, 
Inclined Cable Railways; and I do declare the 
as shown in Fig. 2. The eye 19 at the forward 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
end of the draw-bar, being larger than the hole 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
in timber 15, through which the draw-bar pass 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
es, prevents the latter from passing out from 
make and use the same, reference being had 
its position. A cam 20, having oblique slots 21 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the fig 
in its vertical parts, is rigidly secured to draw 
ures of reference marked thereon, which form 
bar 12, its slots being occupied by a pin 22, 
a part of this specification. 
passing through two hooks 23. These hooks 
This invention relates to an automatic 
are held in bearings 24, secured to timber 14, 
Safety-stop to be used in connection with in 
and, extending out rearwardly, are encircled 
clined cable railways for the purpose of stop 
by coil-springs 25, held in place by stops 26 
ping a moving car or truck instantly in case 
and nuts 27 in the same manner as in the case 
the cable should part or become loose from its 
of the draw-bar. A shoulder 28, secured to 
fastenings. The actuation of this device is 
the shank of each hook, limits the action of 
dependent on the cable, and it is kept inop 
the springs 25 and prevents said hooks from 
erative while the cable is under strain or 
being pulled too far rearwardly. Bearings 24 
pulling, but becomes active the moment the 
are widened in one direction, (vertically,) 
cable ceases to pull-as in case of parting, for 
so as to permit the hooks to go through a 
instance. 
limited movement toward or from the track. 
The special features of this invention are 
Those parts of the draw-bar and the hooks 
described in the following specification and 
passing through the timber or through the 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
bearings thereon and those portions of the 
which 
former supporting the cam are preferably 
Figure 1 is a side view of a truck, the wheels 
square to prevent them from turning out of 
and rail nearest the observer being omitted. 
their proper positions. This vertical move: 
Fig. 2 is a top view of the device. Fig. 3 is a 
ment of the hooks is controlled by Cam 20 
side view of Fig. 2, the stop-rail being shown in 
through the intervention of the slots therein 
section. Fig. 4 is a section online 44 of Fig. 
and pin 22, which passes through all. 
3. Fig. 5 is a section through the hooks and 
Before the car or truck starts up draw-bar 
draw-bar immediately in front of their bear 
2 is pulled out first to the limit of the ex 
ings. Fig. 6 is a section on line 6 6 of Fig. 
panded coil-spring 16, and while going through 
1. Figs. 2 to 6 are shown at an enlarged scale. 
this movement raises hooks 23 by means of 
S is a truck supporting a car, or it might 
the slotted cam. The hooks remain in this 
represent the lower part of a car itself. 
position as long as the draw-bar is held in its 
9 and 10 are longitudinal and cross tim 
corresponding forward position by the pull 
bers, respectively, of the truck-frame, and 11 
ing of the cable. (See Fig. 1 and dotted lines 
are the wheels. 
in Fig. 3.) As soon as the cable slackens 
12 is the draw-bar connecting to the cable 
from any cause whatsoever, be it a stop at the 
13 and passing through two cross-timbers 14 
end of the track or a break, the expansivepress 
15, by which it is held in position. 
ure of the compressed spring asserts itself, 
The arrangement and construction of the 
forces the now released draw-bar with its cam 
parts so far described may vary in different 
back, and drops the hooks, as shown most 
Systems, but are easily changed to accommo 
plainly in Figs. 2 and 3. When down, these lat 
date the attachment of my device. As will 
ter are capable of engagement with the Sockets 
be seen, the rear end of the draw-bar passes 
29 of stop-rails 30, secured to cross-ties 31 ver 
through and extends beyond timber 14 and litically below the hooks by means of stirrups32, 
95 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
454,858 
In this manner the downward progress of the 
truck is arrested at once and before it has 
had time to gain any momentum. The en 
gagement of the hooks being rather sudden, 
especially in case of a break, springs 25 are 
provided for the purpose of lessening the 
shock and preventing breakage of any of the 
parts. 
Pin 22 reaches through the four slots 21 in 
cam 20 and is provided with shoulders 34, 
thereby serving as a brace for the cam, as 
shown in Fig. 4, and preventing lateral dis 
placement of the hooks, which might cause 
them to miss the stop-rails. 
The means for operating the hooks 23 may 
be modified, as shown in Figs. 1 and 6, where 
inclined planes 33 are secured to the cam and 
engage With Correspondingly-shaped surfaces 
on the hooks. In this case loop-shaped guides 
35, depending from a cross-timber 36, serve to 
Confine the movement of the hooks to one in 
a vertical plane and prevent them from miss 
ing the stop-rails. These guides 35 prevent, 
also, the hooks from dropping too far and act 
ing as an obstruction during the ascent of the 
car should they lose their support on cam 
20 or otherwise become disengaged. In or 
der to provide for such a contingency, the 
ends of the hooks and the upper edge of the 
recesses in the stop-rails have been beveled, 
as most plainly shown in Fig. 3, which facili 
tates the passage of the former over the latter. 
By reversing the parts and their move 
ments-that is, by setting the stop-rails up on 
edge and having the hooks moving in a hori 
ZOntal plane toward and from the stop-rails 
the same results may be attained. Where an 
extraordinary degree of safety is desirable, 
draw-bar 12 may be of sufficient length and 
two or more sets of hooks may be provided, 
all of which operate simultaneously. 
Having described my invention, I claim as 
eW 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
5 O 
I. An automatic safety-stop for inclined 
cable railways, consisting of a movable draw 
bar to which the cable connects and encircled 
by a coil-spring which counteracts the pull of 
the cable, movable hooks secured by their 
rear ends to the truck-frame, suitable me 
chanical means connected to the draw-bar for 
the purpose of operating said hooks, stop-rails 
30, located within reach of the hooks, and 
guides 35, limiting the movement of the hooks, 
so as to prevent them from missing the stop 
rails, all substantially as shown and described. 
2. An automatic safety-stop for inclined 
cable railways, consisting of a movable draw 
bar to which the cable connects and encircled 
by a coil-spring which counteracts the pull of 
the cable, movable hooks secured by their rear 
ends to the truck-frame, a cam provided with 
inclined surfaces or slots connected to the 
draw-bar for the purpose of operating said 
hooks, and stop-rails 30, located within reach 
of the hooks, all substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. An automatic safety - stop for inclined 
cable railways, consisting of a movable draw 
bar to which the cable connects and encircled 
by a coil-spring which counteracts the pull of 
the cable, movable hooks secured by their rear 
ends to the truck-frame, a calm provided with 
inclined surfaces or slots connected to the 
draw-bar for the purpose of operating Said 
hooks, a pin passing through the hooks and 
cam, bracing the latter, and preventing dis 
placement of the former, and stop-rails 30, 
located within reach of the hooks, all substan 
tially as shown and described. 
Intestimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ELIAS R. DUCKWALL. 
7 c. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER O. EDWARDS, 
SAMUEL M. QUINN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US454958.txt	(No Model.) 
E. A. WALKER, 
BELT SHIFTER FOR PLANING MACHINES, 
No. 454,958. 
Patented June 30, 1891. 
9itnesses: 
PG-r 
2 
th 
H-6 
 
 
D 
iven to: 
-z, . 
the Norris PereRsco. PHoro-lit Ho., wasHINGTON, O. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD A. WALIKER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
BELT-SHIFTER FOR PLANING-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 454,958, dated June 30, 1891. 
Application filed October 1, 1890, Serial No. 366,776, (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD A. WALKER, 
of the city and county of Philadelphia, State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improved Belt-Shifter for Plan 
ing-Machines, of which the following is a true 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
Myinvention relates to belt-shifting devices 
used on the class of planing-machines in which 
the carriage traveling over the bed of the ma 
chine is used to hold the tool and carry it over 
the face of a stationary work-bed; and the ob 
ject of my invention is to provide improved 
means for enabling the operative to start, 
stop, and reverse the machine at will and 
from the position which he should occupy in 
Watching the work. My new device for ac 
complishing this result will be best under 
stood as described in connection with the 
drawings, in which it is illustrated, and the 
novel features which I desire to protect are 
hereinafter clearly pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
a planing-machine provided with my improve 
ment, and Fig. 2 a section taken on the line 
12 of Fig. 1. 
A is the bed of the planer; B, the carriage 
supported on said bed and carrying the tool 
holder C. 
D is a shaft directly controlling the feed of 
the tool; D', a crank-handle on the end of 
said shaft; E, a connecting-rod by which mo 
tion is given to shaftD from the feed-shaft F, 
which last-mentioned shaft is journaled on 
the carriage, as shown, and is given an oscil 
latory motion by mechanism which, as it 
forms no part of my present invention, I have 
not thought it necessary to illustrate. 
G is a sleeve-shaft loosely journaled on 
the shaft F and having at one end a hand 
wheel I, situated near the end of the carriage 
at which the operative should stand, and at 
its other end a spur-pinion H, placed so as to 
be in engagement with a rack i of slightly 
greater length than the maximum travel of 
the table, formed on or secured to a belt-shift 
ing rod J, which runs parallel to the bed and 
is connected at its end J' with belt-shifting 
devices (indicated at MandM'.) and the func 
tion of which is to shift the belts to and from 
the two loose pulleys N' and N and the fast 
pulley N. 
IK and K' are stops secured upon the shift 
ing-rod J, and L a stop adjustably secured 
upon the carriage B. 
O is a feed-screw journaled in the bed of 
the machine and engaged with a nut, (not 
shown,) which is secured to the bottom of the 
carriage B. The loose pulleys N' and N* are 
journaled to the end of this feed-Screw, and 
the fast pulley N is secured between the said 
loose pulleys upon the shaft of the Screw. 
Q is the work-carrying bed, secured, as 
shown, to the side of the stationary bed of the 
planer. The belts running upon the pulleys 
N N' N are of course of the usual character, 
arranged to run in opposite directions. I 
have not thought it necessary to illustrate 
them in the drawings. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The forward driving-belt being engaged with 
the fast pulley turns feed-shaft O and causes 
the table B to move forward along the bed of 
the machine until the stop L comes in contact 
with the stop Kon the belt-shifting rod, upon 
which said rod is moved, so as to draw the 
forward driving-belt onto a loose pulley, and 
at the same time draw the backward driving 
belt onto the fast pulley. The revolution of 
the feed-screw is thus reversed and the car 
riage moved backward until the stop T. comes 
in contact with the stop K', when the direc 
tion of movement is again changed. As the 
carriage moves forward and backward upon 
the bed of the planer, the pinion II, which is 
engaged with the racki on the belt-shifting 
rod, revolves and causes its shaft G and the 
hand-wheel I also to revolve. Said shaft, being 
loosely journaled, is free to turn in either di 
rection. Whenever the operative wishes to 
stop or reverse the machine before the regular 
stops come into operation, he has only to take 
hold of the hand-wheel I and turn it in the 
opposite direction to that in which it is re 
volving. This of course causes the shifting 
ing-rod J, which is in engagement with the 
pinion H, to move, thus shifting the belts in 
the way desired. He can by turning this 
wheel start, stop, or reverse the machine at 
any time or point of its travel. 
As will be 
seen, the operative, standing at the end of the 
table, is thus enabled to control the motion of 
- 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
Ioo 
454,958 
the table, a shaft, as G, journaled on the car 
riage, a hand-wheel, as I, secured to said 
shaft, and a pinion H, also secured to said 
shaft and in engagement with the rack on the 
shifting-rod, all substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. In a planing-machine having a traveling 
tool-carrying carriage, the combination, with 
a belt-shifter, of a shifting-rod, as J, having 
a rack formed or secured thereon, a feed-shaft, 
as F, journaled on the carriage and running 
transversely to the bed of the planer, a sleeve 
shaft, as G, supported on shaft F, so as to 
turn freely thereon, a hand-wheel, as I, se 
cured to the sleeve, and a pinion H, also se 
cured to the sleeve and in engagement with 
the rack on the shifting-rod. 
EDWARD A, WALKER. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE HOUSE, 
JOSHUA MATLACK, Jr. 
IO 
the machine at all times and without moving 
away from his work. 
The construction shown in the drawings, 
in which the shaft G is formed in sleeve shape 
and journaled on the main feed-shaft F, is a 
convenient one in this class of machines; but 
of course the shaft G may be journaled in 
any convenient way and may be entirely in 
dependent of the feed-shaft. 
It is not, of course, essential that the wheel 
H should directly engage the rack j. Any 
Convenient intermediate gearing can inter 
vene between them; but the construction 
shown is, I believe, the best. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a planing-machine having a traveling 
tool-carrying carriage, the combination, with 
a belt-shifter, of a shifting-rod, as J, having 
a rack formed or secured thereon of a length 
slightly greater than the maximum travel of 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455058.txt	(No Model.) 
L. W. RHOADES, 
WELOCIPEDE. 
No. 455,058, 
Patented June 30, 1891. 
 
w 2SS 
3R 2SS 
X 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEONARD W. RHOADES, OF NORTHAMPTON, ASSIGNOR TO THE OVERMAN 
WHEEL COMPANY, OF CHICOPEE FALLS, MASSACHUSETTS, 
VELOCIPEDE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 455,058, dated June 30, 1891. 
Application filed January 19, 1891, Serial No. 378,233, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
To ali, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEONARD W. RHOADES, 
of Northampton, in the county of Hampshire 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new Improvement in Velocipedes; and I do 
hereby declare the following, when taken in 
connection with accompanying drawings and 
the letters of reference marked thereon, to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
and which said drawings constitute part of 
this specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a view in side elevation of a sad 
dle constructed in accordance with my inven 
tion; Fig. 2, a detached plan view of the frame 
thereof, together with the movable perch-block 
and the toggle mechanism for moving the same; 
Fig. 3, a detached view in side elevation of 
the adjustable head mounted upon the sad 
dle-post with the pivotal arms removed; Fig. 
4, a view in transverse section on line acac of 
Fig. 3 with the pivotal arms in place; Fig. 5, 
a broken plan view of the said head. Fig. 6 
is a detached view in inside elevation of the 
movable perch-block and the forward perch 
which it carries; Fig. 7, a detached broken 
view in perspective, showing the yoke for 
joining the inner ends of the forward pivotal 
arms; Fig. 8, a detached sectional view of the 
saddle-post, showing my improved joint; and 
Fig. 9, a broken view in side elevation, show 
ing another mode of flexibly connecting the 
inner ends of the pivotal arm for their coac 
tion. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
velocipedes, the object being to produce a 
saddle adapted to cushion under the weight 
of the rider, to have its rear and forward ends 
vertically adjusted independently, and to 
have its seat removed and attached at pleas 
ure, and, further, to provide for a neat, stiff, 
and inexpensive joint between tubular and 
solid parts. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists, first, in a saddle having forward and 
rear pivotal arms flexibly connected at their 
inner ends for coaction, and, second, in a joint 
composed of a cylindrical solid part formed 
with a tapering socket and a very thin edge, 
and a tubehaving its end tapered and adapted 
to fit entirely within the said socket in which 
it is brazed, and the said parts being fitted 
and finished so that the thin edge of the solid 
part merges in a straight line into the full 
diameter of the tube to form an invisible 
joint. 
My invention further consists in certain de 
tails of construction and combinations of 
parts, as will be hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
As herein shown, my improved saddle is 
provided with two substantially horizontal 
pivotal forward arms AA and two correspond 
ing rear arms B B, the inner ends of the said 
arms being pivotally attached by means of 
screw-studs C to flat bearings D, formed upon 
the opposite faces of the sliding block E, which 
is furnished with a set-screw F for securing 
it upon an L-shaped saddle-post, to be par 
ticularly described later on. The extreme in 
ner ends of these arms are provided with 
teeth H, arranged on the arc of a large circle 
and meshing into each other, whereby the 
arms coact, So that as the front arms are de 
pressed the rear arms will be correspondingly 
depressed, and vice versa. 
If desired, instead of providing the inner 
ends of the pivotal arms with intermeshing 
teeth, as described, they may be connected, 
as shown by Fig. 9 of the drawings, by form 
ing an elongated slot I in one and providing 
the other with a pin J, arranged to play 
therein. The toothed construction is, how 
ever, preferred, inasmuch as by removing 
either the forward or rear arms they may be 
re-engaged with the teeth of the other pair of 
arms at a different inclination therewith, 
whereby the normal vertical adjustment of 
the rear and forward ends of the saddle may 
be varied, as desired. Each pair of arms is 
provided with an upright transverse yoke K, 
located near their inner ends and rigidly con 
necting them, so that they act as one arm. If 
desired, however, the arms of each pair may 
be left free to act independently of each other. 
A spring L, connecting the upper ends of the 
said yokes. K, and made adjustable for ten 
sion by means of nuts MM, exerts a constant 
effort to elevate the outer ends of the arms of 
both pairs, the arms being depressed under 
weight against its tension. The spring there 
75 
85 
90 
95 
-dC 
45 
 
2 
455,058 
O 
25 
9 O 
95 
7 o 
75 
fore controls the pivotal action of the arms. 
If desired, more than one spring may be em 
ployed, and in this case it is not necessary 
that the two pairs of arms should be directly 
coupled together by them, as shown herein. 
The outer ends of the rear pivotal arms B B 
are provided with links N N, the inner ends 
whereof are pivotally connected with a trans 
verse strap O, rigidly secured to the two hori 
zontal and nearly parallel members PP of a 
saddle-frame composed of a heavy piece of 
wire bent at its rear end to form a perch P 
for the rear end of the flexible cover or seat 
Q, which is provided within its rear end with 
a longitudinally-bowed piece of sheet metal 
R., of U-shaped cross-section, whereby it is 
adapted to be attached to and removed from 
the said perch P at pleasure. The extreme 
inner ends of the links N are shaped to form 
stops N', which engage with the under edges 
of the frame members PP and arrest the de 
pression of the said saddle-frame. The outer 
ends of the forward pivotal arms A A are re 
spectively pivoted to two lugs SS, depending 
from the lower face of a perch-block S', which 
is mounted So as to be longitudinally movable 
upon the extreme forward ends of the frame 
members P P, being thereto provided with 
two horizontal openings S*S* to receive the 
same. The said block is also provided above 
the openings S*S* with two corresponding 
openings SS, into which the ends of the for 
ward perch T are inserted and rigidly secured 
by brazing. A hook Q', secured to the for 
ward end of the cover or seat Q, is adapted to 
be readily engaged with and disengaged from 
the said perch. A toggle-lever U, pivoted at 
its rear end to a heavy transverse strap V, 
uniting the two frame members PP, is con 
nected by a pivot U to a link W, which is 
pivoted to the inner end of the perch-block 
S'. In the open position of the toggle-lever 
U the said pivot U' stands above the frame 
members P P, which lie in the line of the 
strain exerted by the flexible cover or seat 
when the same is under tension; but when the 
toggle-lever is in its closed position the said 
pivot U' stands below the said members and 
therefore below the said line, and is so held 
by the tension of the cover or seat, whereby 
the perch-block S is locked in its forward ad 
justment. By lifting the toggle-lever into its 
open position the perch-block S is permitted 
by the pivotal arms A A and B B to move 
rearwardly upon the members PP of the sad 
die-frame, and thus slacken the tension of the 
cover or seat Q, which may then be removed 
or replaced at pleasure. After the said cover 
has been replaced it is drawn to the required 
tension by pushing the outer end of the tog 
gle-lever U down, whereby the perch-block S 
is moved forward and held, as described. 
My improved joint is formed by tapering 
the end of a tube by forging or swaging, or 
in some other way not involving the removal 
of material, and inserting it into a socket of 
corresponding taper formed in a solid part 
having a very thin edge. As herein shown, 
it is utilized in the construction of the L 
shaped saddle-post, which consists of two 
parts G and X, the former being made tubul 
lar and straight and the latter solid and angu 
lar. The upper end of the part G is tapered, 
as at G', and inserted and brazedlinto a socket 
X' of corresponding taper, formed in the 
part X, which has a very thin edge; but pre 
paratory to brazing and to hold the tapered 
end of the tube in the said socket during that 
operation the two parts are secured together 
by a pin G. The outer end of the part X is 
bored out, as at X*, to lighten it; but it is left 
solid where it is bent, the greatest strain com 
ing at that point. After the parts have been 
brazed together their exterior surfaces are 
filed smooth at the joint, so that the edge of 
the solid part will merge into the full diame 
ter of the tube. The joint thus formed is 
practically invisible when the work is done, 
and very strong, as no material is removed 
from the tube except what little may be taken 
off in filing them, as described. The joint is 
also very easily and cheaply made. This 
principle of joining tubular and solid parts 
is not limited to saddle-posts, but may be 
widely applied in cycle construction. 
The spring L is adjusted in tension accord 
ing to the weight of the rider, so that it will 
yield to permit the arms to work with the 
best effect. By using the said pivotal arms 
and flexibly connecting them together, so that 
they move correspondingly, and controlling 
their action by means of one or more springs, 
a saddle is secured which is not only very 
easy to ride, as it cushions freely, but also 
adjustable to a variety of requirements in 
volving the weight of the rider and his pref 
erences as to its horizontal inclination. I 
would have it understood, in view of the 
changes suggested herein, that I do not limit 
myself to the exact construction shown and 
described, but hold myself at liberty to make 
such changes and alterations as fairly fall 
within the spirit and scope of my invention. 
I am aware that it is old to taper a tube 
and insert it into a corresponding socket, and 
therefore do not claim such a construction 
broadly. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a Velocipede-saddle, the combination 
of substantially horizontal pivotal front and 
lear arms flexibly connected together at their 
inner ends for coaction, and a flexible cover 
or Seat Suspendled between the outer ends 
of the arms, substantially as described, and 
Whereby the movement of the front arms is 
duplicated in the lear arms, and vice versa. 
2. In a velocipede-saddle, the combination 
of pivotai front and rear arms provided at 
their inner ends with intermeshing teeth, and 
a flexible cover or seat suspendled between 
the outer ends of the said arms, substantially 
as described. 
65 
35 
45 
CO 
IO5 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
455,058 
3 
4d. 
45 
55 
- 
seat, a frame adapted to have the rear end of 
the cover detachably connected with it, links 
connecting the outer ends of the rear pivotal 
arms with the said frame, a perch-block piv 
oted to the outer ends of the front pivotal 
arms and receiving the forward end of the 
frame on which it is movable, a perch carried 
by said block and adapted to have the for 
ward end of the cover detachably connected 
with it, and a toggle-lever for connecting the 
said movable perch-block with the frame, sub 
stantially as described. 
7. In a joint for velocipede-frames, the com 
bination, with a cylindrical solid partformed 
with a tapering socket and a very thin edge, 
of a tubehaving its end tapered and adapted 
to fit entirely within the said socketin which 
it is brazed, and the said parts being fitted 
and finished so that the thin edge of the solid 
part merges in a straight line into the full 
diameter of the tube to form an invisible 
joint. 
8. An L-shaped saddle-post composed of a 
straight tubular and a bent solid part, one 
end of the tube being tapered and one end of 
the solid part being formed with a correspond 
ing socket, into which the tapered end of the 
tube is inserted and brazed, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
LEONARD W. RHOADES. 
Witnesses: 
 
LUTHER WHITE, 
DELLA HUBBARD. 
O 
25 
- 
3. In a velocipede-saddle, the combination 
of pivotal front and rear arms provided at 
their inner ends with intermeshing teeth, one 
or more springs for elevating the outer ends 
of the arms which are depressed under weight 
against the tension of the said spring or 
springs, and a flexible cover or seat suspended 
between the outer ends of the arms, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In a velocipede-saddle, the combination 
of pivotal front and rear arms flexibly con 
nected at their inner ends for coaction, a 
flexible cover or seat, a frame supported upon 
the outer ends of the said arms and adapted 
at its rear end to support the rear end of the 
cover, a perch for the forward end of the cover 
movably mounted upon the forward end of the 
Said frame, and toggle mechanism connecting 
the movable perch with the said frame, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a velocipede-saddle, the combination 
of two pivotal front and two pivotal rear 
arms flexibly connected at their inner ends 
for coaction, each pair of arms being pro 
vided with an upright transverse yoke rig 
idly connecting them, a coupling-spring unit 
ing the said yokes for controlling the action 
of the pivotal arms, and a flexible cover or 
seat suspended between the outer ends of the 
Said arms, substantially as described. 
6. In a velocipede-saddle, the combination 
of pivotal front and rear arms flexibly con 
nected at their inner ends for coaction, ahead 
to which the said ends of the arms are piv 
oted, one or more springs for controlling the 
action of the said arms, a flexible cover or 
- 
35 
--- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455158.txt	(No Model.) 
J, T, BR, ODNAX. 
SUSPENDERS, 
No. 455,158, 
Patented June 30, 1891. 
ATIORNEYS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. BRODNAX, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA. 
SUSPENDERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 455,158, dated June 30, 1891. 
Application filed November 26, 1890, Serial No, 372,750, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
40 
- 
detail. 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN T. BRODNAX, of 
New Orleans, in the parish of Orleans - and 
State of Louisiana, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Suspenders and Sus 
pender Attachments, of which the following 
is a specification. 
Myinvention includes improvements in the 
attachments for connecting different parts of 
the Same, and also in means for attaching 
Suspender-ends or button-straps. 
In accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
view of my improved suspenders and attach 
ments complete. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
blank from which the end attachment is 
formed. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the 
end attachment. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are detail 
Vertical sections. Fig. 7 shows the buckle in 
The Suspenders proper are composed of the 
tWO front and shoulder parts or pieces A A 
and the single back part or piece B. The lat 
ter is connected with the former by means of 
a D-shaped metal loop C. The convergent 
ends of the parts A A B are narrowed, as 
shown, in order that the said loop may be made 
as Small as practicable, thereby avoiding any 
discomfort to the wearer. In practice the loop 
should be located on the back of the wearer 
a distance from the neckband of the shirt 
equal to one-third the width of the yoke. For 
example, if the width of the yoke is eighteen 
inches, the loop C should be six inches from 
the neckband. When thus located, the sus 
penders A A do not press upon nor interfere 
With the movement of the shoulder-blades. I 
propose to employ any suitable or preferred 
form of suspender-ends or button-straps D, 
and the drawings illustrate some varieties. 
An important feature of my invention is 
the construction of the end attachment E, 
which is applied to the folded ends of the 
parts A A and the lower free end of the back 
strap B. The frame of such attachment E is 
formed integrally of a thin sheet-metal blank 
A', having the shape shown in Fig. 2. The 
parts b' c' of such blank form the spring 
tongue a and hook b of the complete attach 
ment E, Fig. 3, and the part d' forms the 
cross-bard at the bottom of the tube or guide 
box of the buckle, through which guide-box 
the suspenders pass. The lateral edges of 
the broad blank bar d' are turned inward to 
ward each other to form the cross-bar d, as 
will be readily understood. 
The back of the blank A' is provided with 
slots e, having one edge e' serrated to adapt 
the attachment E to be clamped to the sus 
penders. It will be understood that these 
slots e are only used by me in connection with 
the back strap B and enable me to cut of 
the free end of such back strap and then se 
cure the back-end attachment to such free 
endin any desired adjustment to suit persons 
of different heights. 
It will be understood that for convenience 
in manufacture I make the front and back 
end attachments E alike, but in the use of the 
front attachments E the slots e have no func 
tion. 
In Fig. 4 the end of a suspender proper 
passes through the tube or box of the attach 
ment E and is looped around the bard, which 
traverses or crosses the lower end of said tube, 
the suspender being then directed through 
the slots e and tucked at its extremity in the 
top of the box or tube, as shown. This con 
struction serves to unite the attachment firmly 
to the back suspender, and at the same time 
permits the adjustment of the attachment, 
as may be desired. 
In Figs. 5 and 6 I show the manner of dis 
posing the ends of the front suspenders around 
the buckles. In Fig. 5 the suspender is shown 
drawn up through the tube of the end attach 
ment and out through the lower slote' of the 
buckle A, it being held in said slot by the 
teeth at the lower edge of such slot. In Fig. 
6 illustrate the manner of securing the sus 
pender in the upper slot e of the buckle A'. 
In this case the suspender is inserted from 
above, beneath the toothed bar, and passes 
out through said slot and down over the back. 
of the buckle A. This method is particulariy 
applicable when the suspender is long and 
the surplus length requires to be taken up 
and held out of the way. When the sus 
pender is thus secured, as shown in Figs. 5 
and 6, in a slot e, a toothed dog or catch f is 
employed to prevent the buckle A* from slip 
ping on the body of the suspenders. This 
dogfishinged or pivoted at f', and is pro 
vided at or near its pivot with teeth fand at 
or near its swinging end With teeth f, such 
7 O 
95 
TOC 
45 
 
455,158 
d 
teeth f* f being arranged to bite into the 
front Suspenders when the dog is closed. 
It will be understood that the buckle A 
may be employed in other connections than 
Suspenders, being useful on men's vests and 
pantaloons, and also that they may be used 
on skirt-supporters, or for other purposes, and 
that they may be made any size to suit the 
purpose for which they are intended. 
What I claim is 
1. The improved suspenders consisting of 
the parts A A and B, having tapered ends, 
their connecting back loop C, the rear-end at 
tachment provided with a slot in its back, and 
the front end attachment provided with the 
bottom bar d, all as shown and described. 
2. In suspenders, the end attachment herein 
described, consisting of the box or tube pro 
vided at its lower end with a cross-bard, hav 
ing in its rear side slots having serrated or 
toothed walls and having its front side pro 
vided with a hook and with a tongue to close 
the same, substantially as set forth. 
3. The improvement in suspenders, consist 
ing of the tubular front attachments E, hav 
ing a hook b, tongue a, and the cross-bar (l, 
extending across the lower portion of the open 
ing of the tube lengthwise, the buckles A', 
having the dogs f for clamping the suspend 
ers and provided in the back with serrated 
edged slots for passage of the suspenders, as 
shown and described. 
The above specification of my invention 
signed by me in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
25 
JNO. T. BRODNAX. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. A. PETTIT, 
SOLON C. EXEMON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455258.txt	(No Model.) 
B. R OPER 
CAR COUPLING, 
No. 455,258, 
Patented June 30, 1891, 
  
 
 
id: 
i. l 
g 
I?aac 
t 2 
S 222s 
gt 
25 ar 
 
 
--- 
ad 
2 
A. 
F.g 3 
 
- REVErly RDDET 
3v-uovtov 
ying 
elttoaves 
282.v-cocy 
c42% ave/ 
zz24- 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
BEVERLY ROPER, OF 
ATLANTA, GEORGIA. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 455,258, dated June 30, 1891. 
Application filed March 19, 1891, 
Serial No. 385,668, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BEVERLYROPER, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, and a resi 
dent of Atlanta, in the county of Fulton and 
State of Georgia, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Car-Couplings; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
This invention, as above stated, relates to 
car-couplings having particular reference to 
that class of such devices as employ a gravity 
block or latch in conjunction with a pin and 
Coupling-bar, the object of the invention being 
to provide a device of this class which will be 
durable and easy and efficient of operation, 
and at the same time convenient of construc 
tion, the details of all of which are hereinaf 
ter fully specified, and the parts for which 
special novelty is claimed are hereinafter 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of the device, the draw-head 
proper being in longitudinal central section, 
a rock-shaft and levers being shown, whereby 
the coupling may be operated from the side 
of the car without the necessity of going 
therebetween. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of 
a car, showing the present invention attached, 
illustrating its appearance as seen when look 
ing in at the mouth of the draw-head. Fig. 
3 is a horizontal section through the draw 
head on the line of the top side of the open 
ing in the draw-head, showing the form of 
said bar and the correlative construction and 
operation of the gravity latch and pin. Fig. 
4 is an inverted plan view of the gravity-latch, 
showing the concaved under side thereof for 
guiding the coupling-bar into coupling posi 
In the figures like reference-marks are em 
ployed in the designation of corresponding 
elements of construction in all the views. 
The draw-head. A may be of any form ex 
teriorly, but should have upon its upper side 
an abundance of metal for sake of strength. 
A recess a, as usual, is provided in the said 
draw-head, having, however, two backward 
extensions a' and a, as will be hereinafter. 
specified. Two holes are cast in the upper 
half of the draw-head, the larger one being 
near the back end of the recess C, and the 
smaller one a being near the front end of 
said recess and extending through both top 
and bottom of the draw-head, being smaller 
at its top end. An annular flange a pro 
jects thereinto at that point, thus reducing 
the hole. The pin B is set in said hole a', 
being introduced by way of the bottom 
thereof, after which an eye is bent upon the 
reduced upward extension of said pin to 
prevent its dropping out, and to this eye is 
secured the chain which connects with the 
lever c, secured to the rock-shaft C, which is 
provided with a downwardly-projecting han 
dle c'. The coupling-bar D is formed of a 
single piece of metal having punched therein, 
near its middle portion, two holes d for the 
pins B of the two connecting draw-heads, the 
ends of said bar being provided with up 
Wardly-projecting flanges, curved, as shown 
in Fig. 3, in order to center upon the gravity 
block E, which will be presently described. 
The end of said bar D is provided with a 
rounded or beveled portion d', and is curved 
transversely to about the same curve as the 
flanged. When pressed into place in the 
draw-head recess, this rounded or beveled 
end d' enters and fits within the extension a', 
as shown ill Fig. 1, and so prevents the de 
pression or drooping of the distant extremity 
of the coupling-bar, holding it in such a posi 
tion as Will enter the approaching draw-head, 
the lower portion of the beveled end d/ as 
sisting therein by guiding said bar upon the 
floor of the draw-head recess. It is evident 
that the seating of the inner end of the draw 
bar within the recessa' will also prevent the 
displacement thereof in such a manner as 
Would lift the gravity-block E, which block is 
oblong in form of cross-section, its front and 
back sides being rounded or oval, and its lower 
end is beveled so as to be longer at the back, 
and the surface of said bevel is concaved, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 4, in order to guide the 
coupling-bar into the recess a when said bar 
is pressed into the recess a lifting said grav 
ity-block. To assist in guiding the block in 
its vertical movement and to prevent the dis 
95 
IOC) 
O 
25 
35 
45 tion. 
 
2 
455,258 
placement thereof, a slot e is cast therein and 
a pin a' is passed through holes in the sides 
of the draw-head and through this slot, being 
riveted at its end for security. With this pin 
and slot it is immaterial how hard the draw 
bar is pressed against the under side of the 
block E, as said block cannot be thrown out 
of its seat in the recess. In case there is dan 
ger of the block E being burred on its lower 
back edge by long-continued service a recess 
a is provided for such burr; but said recess 
is simply a precaution against the block stick 
ing in case burring should take place, inas 
much as said block should be made of a ma 
terial that will not upset or burr. An eye e 
is set in the upper end of said block, and to 
this eye is secured the chain e, which con 
nects at its other end with the lever c on the 
rock-shaft, said chain being somewhat longer 
than a direct line between the points of con 
nection, so that the pin B may be raised and 
release the bar first, which will allow said bar 
to be passed under the end of said pin B in 
coupling and force the block upwardly. 
Secured to the block E by the eye e, pass 
ing through a hole therein, is a water-shed F, 
which is curved downwardly at its edges and 
performs the function of keeping water and 
snow from the block E, which might other 
wise freeze therearound and interfere with 
the proper operation thereof. 
The operation of this device is as follows: 
To uncouple, the elements being in the posi 
tion shown in Fig. I, the lever c' is rotated 
in the direction which will move the lever 
c upwardly, which will obviously lift both 
the gravity-block and the pin and release the 
coupling-bar. To couple, the lever c' is par 
tially rotated in the direction to lift the pin, 
said rotation stopping at the time said pin is 
lifted, and as soon as the chain on the grav 
ity-block becomes taut and when the ap 
25 
45 
55 
proaching draw-head carrying the coupling 
bar passes said bar into the recess (t, forcing 
it home under the gravity-block, being guided 
into the recess a by the concave on the un 
der side of said block, and upon reaching its 
ultimate limit of introduction, the block will 
descend in front of the flange on the bar by 
its owngravity, and so grasp and hold the said 
bar, after which the locking-pin is engaged 
by allowing it to fall, the rock-shaft being ro 
tated for that purpose. The pin B may be 
used for coupling to the ordinary link, and in 
case of the breakage of the flanged said pin 
will act as a safeguard against uncoupling. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a car-coupling, a coupling-bar having 
upwardly-extending curved flange on each 
end, and a draw-head provided with a cham 
ber, and a gravity-block adapted to engage 
said flange, for the purpose specified. 
2. In a device of the class specified, the 
gravity-block E, in combination with an end 
flanged bar, said block being grooved longi 
tudinally on its under side for the purpose of 
guiding said bar thereunder, for the purpose 
specified. 
3. In a device of the class specified, the 
draw-head A, having recess at and extension 
a? thereof, the draw-bar ID, having an up 
Wardly-projecting flange and an end confor 
mation adapted to enter said extension, and 
the gravity-block E, adapted to drop in front 
of said curved upwardly-extending flange, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I here unto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
BEWERTY ROPER. 
7 o 
75 
Witnesses: 
A. P. WooD, 
A. A. WOOD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455359.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 455,359. 
fis-1- 
H. S. ROBINSON. 
APPARATUS FOR FORCING AIR. 
Patented July 7, 1891. 
 
2 2Z. 
2 
 
 
 
z-ZzZ 
Z. 
2 
Lillies. ISL 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNEsses 
In\/ENTOR 
Aerzy S. Zozzz-soul 
The moRRs rettas co-, photo-the-washtarox, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY S. ROBINSON, OF ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS, 
APPARATUS FOR FORCING AR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 455,359, dated July 7, 1891. 
Application filed July 24, 1890, Serial No. 359,806, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY S. ROBINSON, of 
Andover, county of Essex, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvement in Ap 
paratus for Forcing Air, of which the follow 
ing description, in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification, like let 
ters and figures on the drawings representing 
like parts. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means for utilizing the disturbance of the air 
produced by the fly-wheels of steam-engines 
for the purpose of creating air currents or 
blasts, which may be utilized in any suitable 
or usual manner, either for the purpose of 
ventilation, for providing a forced draft for 
furnaces, for exhausting or removing vitiated 
air from apartments, or for forcing currents 
of air to be heated and then employed for 
heating buildings or for drying or other simi 
lar purposes. The motion of the fly-wheel 
Or belt-pulley of a steam-engine tends to 
cause a disturbance in the air, throwing the 
same outward by centrifugal force from the 
hub toward the periphery of the wheel; but 
such movement cannot be availed of as in 
Ordinary centrifugal blowers, for the reason 
that the continuous periphery of the wheel 
or pulley tends to confine the air and does 
not afford a tangential path of escape, by 
which the air thrown outward from the hub 
toward the periphery can be received in suit 
able ducts outside of the periphery of the 
Wheel. I have discovered that by combining 
with a fly-wheel suitable deflectors or guides 
the air which is thrown outward and carried 
around with the wheel may be directed into 
suitable ducts, affording a strong blast, which 
may be utilized for various purposes without 
causing the expenditure of any considerable 
amount of additional power by the fly-wheel, 
so that considerable-saving is effected when 
ever it is desired to use an air-blast in estab 
lishments provided with an engine. 
The invention consists, mainly, in the com 
bination, with a fly-wheel, of deflectors lo 
cated between the periphery and the axis of 
the wheel and extended as close as possible 
to the inner surface of the wheel-rim and to 
the sides of its spokes and substantially tan 
gential thereto, the said deflectors gradually 
curving from their tangential position and 
being located at the terminals of ducts or 
blast-pipes, so that the air carried by the 
wheel and moving mainly in a tangential di 
rection with greatest force and velocity near 
the outer end of the spokes, strikes upon said 
deflectors and is carried away by them from 
the wheel and into the air-ducts, the said de 
flectors acting, as it were, to skim or scoop 
the air off from the portion of the wheel by 
which it is carried. In some cases it may be 
desirable to have such deflectors, or skim 
mers, as they may be called, one at each 
side of the plane of revolution of the wheel; 
but when it is necessary or desirable to have 
the air carried away from one side of the 
wheel only a deflector may be employed 
at the other side which curves inward toward 
the plane of revolution of the wheel, and thus 
tends to throw the air transversely to the 
other side of the wheel, where a skimming 
deflector takes the air that has thus been 
thrown across from the other side of the 
wheel, as well as that from the adjacent side 
of the wheel, and directs it all into the air 
duct or blast-pipe. 
Figure l is a side elevation of an air-forc 
ing apparatus embodying this invention, the 
fly-wheel being shown as having two sets of 
air-collecting devices, one arranged to take 
the air from both sides or faces of the wheel 
and the other arranged to throw the air from 
one to the other side of the wheel and to take 
the air from theside to which it is thus thrown. 
Fig. 2 is a partial section on line ac, Fig. 1; 
Fig. 3, a sectional view on line 1, Fig. 1; and 
Figs. 4 and 5, sectional details on line 2 and 
2', respectively, Fig. 1. 
The invention may be employed in connec 
tion with an engine fly-wheel C, of any suit 
able or usual construction; and it consists in 
the combination, with said wheel, of certain 
air deflecting and conducting devices to be 
described, by which the air which is set in 
movement by the fly-wheel is caused to pro 
duce a definite current or blast of air in a 
suitable duct or blast-pipe, instead of merely 
producing irregular and useless air-currents, 
as is commonly done by the fly-wheel of an 
engine. A portion of the periphery of the 
wheel is inclosed in a casing b, which may be 
of usual construction, and the direction or 
motion of the wheel is indicated by the arrow 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
75 
90 
95 
d 
O 
15 
20 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
455,859 
O 
25 
30 
35 
2, such motion causing outward currents of casing toward the spokes of the wheel, and 
passes across through the spaces between 
air from the hub toward the periphery, as in 
the spokes of the wheel to the other side and 
dicated by arrows 3, while at the inside of the 
enters the mouth c of the duct d, which 
rim and near the periphery the air is of some 
mouth acts with a scooping action upon the 
what greater density than that of the atmos 
air at the same side of the wheel with it 
phere, and is carried with considerable ve 
while receiving the current of air, which is 
locity in the direction of motion of the wheel 
forced over from the other side of the Wheel 
itself. 
through the spaces between the spokes, as 
Fly-wheels as commonly constructed for 
before described. In this manner the air dis 
engines of large size have sufficient uneven 
turbed by the wheel, instead of making local 
ness or irregularity in the periphery to cause 
currents or being thrown off from the part 
a considerable disturbance of the air, they 
near the periphery of the wheel wherever it 
engaging the air by the projections formed at 
meets an obstruction-as, for example, Where 
the junctions of the spokes with the rim, by 
the wheel passes through the floor-and again 
the spokes themselves, and by the junction be 
drawn in near the center of the wheel and 
tween different sections of the rim when the 
carried outward toward the periphery of the 
wheel is made in sections bolted together and 
wheel by centrifugal force, is caused to make 
otherwise, so that it will not usually be nec 
a steady current, having a slight exhausting 
essary to change existing wheels at all in O'- 
or rarefying action near the hub of the wheel 
der to utilize them in connection with the air 
and a slight condensing action near the pe 
ducts and collecting device in accordance 
riphery of the wheel, producing a steady press 
with this invention, although it is obvious 
ure, by which a continuous steady current or 
that the engaging portions of the wheel may 
blast is maintained in the blast-pipe. 
be increased, if necessary, when it is desired 
It is obvious that the shaping of the ducts 
to utilize the air-currents produced by the 
and deflectors by which the air is taken off 
motion of the wheel in accordance with the 
from the wheel and directed into said ducts 
present invention. 
may be varied considerably without depart 
At suitable points near the outer ends of 
ing from the essential features of construc 
the spokes and near the rim or periphery of 
tion and mode of operation of the invention 
the wheel suitable deflectors c are employed, 
herein described, and will depend largely upon 
said deflectors being formed at the end and 
existing conditions of the wheel and adjacent 
constituting the mouth of a blast-pipe or air 
parts. 
duct d, and so shaped that their end portions 
It is not essential for the operation of the 
are substantially tangential with the path of 
apparatus herein described that the wheel 
rotation of the outer ends of the spokes, so 
should be incased, although the casing con 
that the air carried by the spokes and within 
tributes to the efficiency and may be made 
the periphery of the wheel naturally strikes 
more effective by extending it farther inward 
upon the said deflectors and is directed away 
toward the hub of the wheel, as shown, than 
from the wheel and into the air-ducts, pro 
is usually done. 
ducing the desired blast in said ducts. As 
If desired, a deflector e (see Figs. 1 and 5) 
shown at the right hand of Fig.1 and in Figs. 
may be employed at the outside of the rim of 
2 and 3, there are two of said ducts, terminat 
ing in deflecting mouth-pieces or inlet-open 
the wheel in addition to those at the inside 
of the rim, such deflector being shown in this 
ings, within but near the periphery of the 
instance as crossing the space between the 
wheel and one at each side of the spokes 
wheel-rim and inside of the casing and con 
thereof, thus making two independent air 
stituting, practically, a continuation of the 
passages, one taking the air from each side 
surface e c, as shown in Fig. 5. In other 
of the wheel, which passages or ducts may, 
words, the surfaces e, e, and c (shown at the 
however, if desired, be brought into one in 
left hand in Fig. 1 and in Fig. 5) practically 
case a single current of air is used. When, 
constitute a single curved deflector having 
however, it is not convenient to take the air 
openings in it to accommodate the passage of 
from both sides of the wheel independently, 
the wheel rim and spokes. 
the construction shown at the left handi of 
Fig. 1 and in Figs. 4 and 5 may be employed, 
the same comprising a deflector c and air 
duct dat one side of the wheel, which may 
be substantially like the deflector c and duct 
d, before described, except that the portion 
of the deflector extending toward the spokes 
makes a greater angle with their path of 
movement or does not come quite to the tan 
gential position. On the other side of the 
wheel and the inside of the casing a deflectore 
is employed, extending from the inner wall of 
the casing inward toward the spokes of the 
wheel, so that the air carried around in the 
said casing is crowded over the wall of the 
claim 
1. An air-forcing apparatus comprising a 
wheel having a continuous periphery or rim, 
as the fly-wheel of a steam-engine, said rim 
constituting the main air-propelling part, com 
bined with air-ducts and deflecting mouth 
pieces therefor, extending into proximity to 
said rim for the purpose of removing the air 
from the wheel and directing it into said ducts, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a wheel having a rim 
and spokes, which constitute an air-propeller, 
with an inwardly-curved deflector at one side 
of said wheel, curving toward the middle plane 
45 
55 
9o 
95 
IOC 
Io5. 
IO 
II5 
2. 
(25 
455,859 
3 
gential to the wheel, substantially as and for 
a 
the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
- 
HENRY S. ROBINSON. 
Witnesses: 
JOS. P. LIVERMORE, 
M. E. HILL. 
5 
of said wheel, and an air-duct having an open 
mouth with deflecting-walls at the other side 
of said wheel, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
3. The combination of a fly-wheel having a 
continuous periphery or rim with an air-duct 
and a deflecting mouth-piece for said duct, 
extending toward the said wheel between the 
rim and the axis of rotation of the wheel and 
Io terminating in a position substantially tan 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455459.txt	(No Model.) 
A. P. GATHRIGHT. 
MOTOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 455,459. 
Patented July 7, 1891. 
 
Witgesses: 
fastWes&zar- 
Ipepir 
Albert P Gaihrigh 
jy futs Affarpeys, 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs co., Photo-ITHo, washinaran, D. c. 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 455,459. 
A. P. GATHRIGHT, 
MOTOR, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 7, 1891. 
SS s 
N 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
: 
  
O 
a &es NS N. 
s 
re 
22% 
HS w s 
s' s 
e 
Witposses 
evizes(aean- 
pepfar 
Albert RGathright 
3y 720s Affarpeys, 
renorris perers co, Phorotho. WashNoto 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT P. GATHRIGHT, OF MERIDIAN, MISSISSIPEPI. 
MotoR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 455,459, dated July 7, 1891, 
Application filed January 17, 1891, Serial No. 378,119, (No model.) 
55 
power. 
- 
To all willion it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERT P. GATHRIGHT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Meridian, in the county of Lauderdale and 
State of Mississippi, have invented a new and 
useful Motor, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention has relation to improve 
ments in spring-motors adapted for running 
light machinery, and is especially adapted 
for operating sewing-machines. 
The objects of the invention are to provide 
a spring-motor of cheap and simple construc 
rion adapted to receive its motive power from 
the simple form of coiled spring, to provide 
means for placing the spring or springs under 
tension and for converting their strength into 
rotary power, and, furthermore, to provide a 
means for regulating the expending of the 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will appear in the following description, 
and the novel features thereof will be par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan 
of a motor constructed in accordance with 
my invention. Fig. 2 is an end elevation. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical longitudinal section. 
Fig. 
4 is a transverse section. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
In practicing my invention I construct a 
frame-work which consists of opposite longi 
tudinal side bars 1, connected at their outer 
ends by a transverse end bar 2. The opposite 
or inner ends of the side bars are fastened to 
an oblong transverse frame 3, disposed at a 
right angle to the main frame, and the two 
frames are bolted together and supported by 
suitable legs 4. To the end bar 2 of the main 
frame there is secured an inwardly-disposed 
bracket 5, having a bearing at its inner end, 
which is longitudinally opposite a similar 
bearing 6 in the side bar of the frame 3. In 
these bearings there is mounted for rotation 
a shaft 7, the inner end of which extends be 
yond the bearing 6 and into the frame 3. 
The cross-bar 2 and the side bar of the frame 
3 forming the cross-bar at the opposite end 
of the machine are connected at each side of 
the shaft 7 by means of guide-rods 9. 
of which are recessed or bifurcated to loosely 
embrace the opposite longitudinal side bars 
of the main frame. This yoke-plate is pro 
vided with perforations 11 for the passage of 
the guide-rods, and from its rear face there 
projects a bored stud 12 for the reception of 
the shaft 7. The shaft 7 between its bear 
ings is provided with spiral grooves 13, and 
above the stud there projects rearwardly 
from the yoke-plate a bar 14, provided upon 
one side with rearwardly-disposed teeth 15, 
combined to form a ratchet or rack-bar. A 
transverse strap or supporting-bar 16 spans 
the distance between and connects the two 
longitudinal side bars, and upon the same is 
mounted a guide - block 17, through which 
the rack - bar passes. At one side of the 
block there is pivoted to the supporting 
bar, as at 19, a lever 20, to the inner end of 
which is pivoted a pawl 21, the inner end of 
which is designed to engage the rack-bar. A 
bell-crank 22 is pivoted to the lever, and a rod. 
23 leads from the lower end of the bell-crank 
to the outer end of the ratchet, said rod pass 
ing through a bracket-eye 24, between which 
and the ratchet and coiled about the rod is a 
spring 25, serving to normally disengage the 
pawl from the teeth of the rack-bar. By op 
erating the bell-crank lever it will be appar 
ent that said pawl will be thrown into en 
gagement with the teeth of the bar. 
A transverse-pin 26 passes through the bear 
ing-bracket of the main frame, and the oppo 
site ends of said pin protrude at each side of 
the bracket, Coiled springs 27 have their 
outer ends connected to the pins and their 
inner ends connected to the yoke-plate and 
serve to draw the plate toward the outer end 
of the main frame. Auxiliary springs 28 en 9o 
circle the guide-rods between the side bar of 
. 
the supplemental frame and the yoke-plate 
and aid the main springs in forcing the yoke 
plate to the rear. 
Loosely mounted upon the shaft 7 within 
the oblong transverse frame 3 is a large gear 
29, having a pawl 30, spring-pressed into en 
gagement with a ratchet-wheel 31, fixed upon 
the shaft. The gear is loose upon the shaft 
and Operates thereWith when moved in one 
direction, by reason of its pawl engaging with 
said ratchet-wheel, while at the same time 
10 designates a yoke-plate, the opposite ends I said gear can move in the opposite direction 
95 
... 
- 
c. , 
- 
25 
35 
45 
455,459 
Ud 
25 
35 
75 
tion during said movement of the yoke, sub 
independent of the shaft, during which move 
stantially as specified. 
ment the pawl will ride over the teeth of the 
2. In a motor, the combination of the frame 
ratchet. The large gear engages and drives 
work, the spirally-grooved shaft, the gear 
a small pinion 33, mounted upon a shaft 34 
wheel, the sliding yoke having an opening 
at the opposite end of the oblong frame 3, and 
fitting the shaft, springs for drawing the yoke 
upon said shaft is mounted a grooved pulley 
in one direction, and means for operating the 
35, which connects with the wheel of the sew 
yoke in the opposite direction, of a tension 
ing-machine, or may lead to the drive-wheel 
yce for said shaft, substantially as speci 
of any machine. Secured to one end of the 
ed. 
frame 3 is a curved standard 36, formed of 
3. In a motor, the combination of the frame, 
spring metal and provided with keeperS 37, 
the spirally-grooved shaft, the gear - wheel 
in which is located a spring metal curved 
mounted on the shaft, the sliding yoke hav. 
friction-arm 38, terminating in a plate em 
ing an opening for the reception of the shaft, 
bracing the periphery of the large gear 29 
Springs for drawing the yoke in one direction 
and being adjustable upon the standard by 
and means for operating the yoke in the op 
means of a set-screw 39. 
posite direction, a support, a pair of spring 
40 designates a pair of spring-clamping 
clamps extending from the support and em 
arms, secured to the end of the frame 3 and 
bracing the shaft, a stirrup embracing the 
embracing the shaft 7 beyond the gear 29. A 
clamps, and a set-screw passing through the 
stirrup 41 loosely embraces the clamping 
stirrup and bearing against one of said arms, 
arms and a set-screw 42 projects through the 
substantially as specified. 
stirrup and bears upon the arms, thus serv 
4. In a motor, the combination, with the 
ing to clamp the arms upon the shaft. 
spirally-grooved shaft, the frame - work for 
In operation, the bell-cranklever is pressed 
supporting the same, the reciprocating yoke, 
so as to engage with the teeth of the rack-bar 
and means for reciprocating the same, of 
and the operating-lever thrown to the rear, 
springs for drawing the yoke in one direction, 
which serves to force the rack-bar and the 
a large gear having a pawl and loosely mount 
yoke inwardly. The pawl is then withdrawn 
ed on the shaft, a ratchet-wheel rigidly mount 
and the lever thrown to the front, and said 
ed on the shaft and engaged by the pawl, a 
pawl swung into re-engagement with a suc 
curved spring-metal standard located oppo 
ceeding tooth, and in this manner the rack 
site the periphery of the gear and provided 
bar is fed. As the yoke moves to the front 
with keepers, and a sliding spring-arm mount 
by reason of the spirally-bored stud thereof 
ed therein bearing against the gear, and a set 
engaging with the grooves of the shaft 7, 
screw-for adjusting the arm upon the stand 
said shaft is rotated and its rotations are not 
ard, substantially as specified. 
imparted to the large gear 29 by reason of the 
5. In a motor, the combination, with the 
fact that the pawl of said gear rides over the 
frame-Work, the rotatable spirally-grooved 
teeth of the ratchet of the shaft, and hence no 
shaft, and the wheel upon the same, of a sliding 
connection is made between the shaft and 
yoke grooved to receive and fit the shaft, a 
ratchet. In order to prevent any possibility 
rack-bar projecting from the yoke, a lever 
of the gear turning during this winding up of 
pivoted at One side of the rack-bar, and a 
the spring and a storing of the power, I pro 
spring-pressed pawl for engaging the rack 
vide the curved spring-clamp heretofore de 
bar, Substantially as specified. 
scribed, which is moved over upon the periph 
6. In a motor, the combination, with the 
ery of the wheel and serves to retain the same 
frame provided at one end with an inwardly 
against any movement whatever. By means 
disposed bearing-bracket and a bearing-open 
of the set-screw and its stirrup, as heretofore 
ing aligning With an opening formed in the 
described, said tension-arms may be clamped 
end of the same, a spirally-grooved shaft jour 
upon the shaft 7, and when the spring-clamp 
naled in the opening, a wheel mounted upon 
or brake is removed from the wheel the springs 
the shaft, and a pin passing transversely 
serve to draw the yoke-plate toward the outer 
through the bracket, of a yoke-plate mounted 
end of the main frame, and in So doing rotate 
for reciprocation upon and having an open 
the shaft 7 and its gear, which latter imparts 
ing receiving and fitting the shaft, a rack bar 
motion, through the medium of the pinion and 
extending rear Wardly from the yoke, a lever 
pulley, to a machine to which it is desired to 
pivoted at one side of the rack-bar, a pawl 
transmit power. 
pivoted in the end of the lever, a spring for 
Having described my invention, what I 
Withdrawing the pawl, mechanism for throw 
claim is 
ing the pawl into engagement with the rack 
1. In a motor, the combination of the frame 
bar, and a pair of coiled springs connected at 
work, a spirally-grooved shaft, a yoke having 
their frontends to the yoke and at their op 
an opening fitting and receiving the shaft, 
posite ends to the frame, substantially as 
springs for drawing the yoke in one direction, 
specified. 
means for moving the yoke in the opposite 
7. In a motor, the combination, with an ob 
direction, a gear loosely mounted on the shaft, 
long frame, a bracket extending from one end 
a pawl on the gear, a ratchet fixed upon the 
of the frame in Wardly, a spirally-grooved 
shaft and normally engaging the pawl, and 
a device for locking the Wheel against rota-i shaft journaled in the frame and in the end 
So 
55 
45 
95 
OO 
I o5 
d 
II5 
I25 
I 30 
 
455,459 
3 
spirally-grooved shaft and carrying a pinion 
and pulley, the former engaged by the large 
gear, the tension-clamp embracing the grooved 
shaft, the means for locking the gear against 
movement, and the transverse pin passing 
through the bearing-bracket, of the pair of 
coiled springs connected to the pins and to 
the yoke, the latter being mounted upon the 
spirally-grooved shaft, bifurcated at its oppo 
site ends to embrace the frame, the rack-bar 
extending rearwardly from the yoke, the 
guide-rods passing through the yoke, the 
coiled springs encircling the same between 
the front face of the yoke and the secondary 
frame, the pivoted lever having the bell 
crank, the spring-pressed pawl, and the rod 
connecting the same with the rear end of the 
pawl, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ALBERT P. GATHRIGHT. 
35 
45 
O 
of the bracket and extending beyond the end 
of the frame, a wheel mounted on said end, a 
yoke mounted on the shaft and having an 
opening fitting and receiving the shaft, coiled 
springs connected at their front ends to the 
yoke and at their rear ends to the end of the 
frame, rods passing through the yoke-plate 
and connecting the opposite ends of the frame, 
and coiled springs interposed between the 
yoke-plate and the inner end of the frame, of 
means for distending the rear coiled springs 
and compressing the front pair of springs, sub 
stantially as specified. 
8. The combination, with the main oblong 
frame, the secondary frame located at one 
end of the same and disposed at a right angle 
thereto, the inwardly - disposed bearing 
bracket, the bearing of which aligns with a 
bearing formed in the side of the secondary 
frame, a spirally-grooved shaft mounted in 
the bearings and having its inner end pro 
jecting into said secondary frame, a ratchet . 
fixed upon the shaft, a gear loose upon the 
shaft at one side of the ratchet and having 
the spring-pressed pawl for engaging the 
same, a short shaft mounted at one side of the 
Witnesses: 
W. D. CAMERON, 
W. W. HENRY. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455559.txt	(No Model.) 
H. P. BALL, 
LAMP SOCKET AND SWITCH AND CIRCUIT CLOSER THEREFOR. 
No. 455,559, 
Patented July 7, 1891. 
28). E-1 cooes 
Jeorrs 
bRon & 
&6 
fa 46.1-7 (7%.c. 43286 
elitov-1 c.14 
31-uo-1-1 to 
e critis petris co. Hero-lit-3. WASHINsf3 N. c. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY PRICE BALL, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO THE EDISON GENERAI, 
ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
LAMP-SOCKET AND SWITCH AND CIRCUIT. CLOSER THE REFOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 455,559, dated July 7, 1891. 
Application filed December 16, 1890, Serial No, 374,879, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY PRICE BALL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, County of Kings, and State of New York, 
5 have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Lamp - Sockets, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The invention relates to a socket adapted 
to receive the base of an incandescent lamp 
Io and to connect the lamp filament to the light 
ing-circuit. 
The invention consists in several features 
of improvement in the socket and in the auto 
matic switch in or forming a part of the 
I5 socket; and the invention also consists in the 
potential - circuit closer in the base of the 
socket, the devices all being constructed and 
arranged substantially in the manner here 
inafter specified. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of the socket with a lamp in place 
therein. Fig. 2 is an end view of the socket 
with the lamp removed. Fig. 3 is an end 
view of the socket, looking in the opposite di 
25 rection, with the cover or cap removed. Fig. 
4 is a plan view of one member of the switch 
and circuit-closer, and Fig. 5 is an end view 
thereof. Fig. 6 is a plan view of the second 
member of the switch and circuit-closer, and 
3o Fig. 7 is an end view thereof. Figs. S and 9 
are central sections of the socket at right an 
gles to each other. 
The socket to be described is especially 
adapted for use in series or multiple-series 
35 Systems and is designed to maintain the cir 
cuit closed when the lamp is removed from 
its Socket, and it is designed also to maintain 
or form a continuous circuit when the fila 
ment breaks or when for any other reason the 
The socket illustrated is of the general form 
used in connection with the Edison lamps, 
there being a screw sleeve or terminal 1 and 
a central pin or electrode 2, which, when the 
45 lamp or any device having a similar base is 
screwed into the Socket, make contact, respect 
ively, with the two ends of the lamp filament, 
In the present socket the central pin or elec 
trode 2 is not rigidly supported at the center of 
So the socket, as is usually the case, but is loosely 
4o lamp becomes inoperative. 
or movably held within a central rubber or 
other similar tube 3. The outer end of the 
pin 2 rests upon or is secured to the T-shaped 
spring or switch member 4, the position of 
which is indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 2, 
and which is more clearly shown in Figs. 3, 6, 
and 7. 4 is secured in place by a single screw 
4' passing through the wall of the socket. 
This T-piece is provided with a screw 5, by 
means of which one of the circuit-wires (3 is 
connected thereto. 
7 is a second member of the switch and cir 
cuit-closer supported on the opposite side of 
the space in the base of the socket, as shown 
in Fig. 3. This member is held in place and 
metallically connected with the sleeve 1 by 
a screw or screw's 7' passing through a flange 
in the sleeve and through the body of 7, as 
indicated in Figs. 2 and 3. It is convenient 
to make this member U-shaped and to place 
on it near the center a binding-screw S, by 
means of which the other circuit-wire 9 is 
connected thereto. The two ends of this U 
shaped member are bent or folded back, as 
clearly indicated in Figs. 3, 4, and 5 at 10. 
Two ends of the cross-piece of the T member 
pass between the body of the U-shaped piece 
and the bent ends thereof. This is indicated 
in Fig. 3, and also in Fig. 5, where 11 is an 
end view of the cross-piece. As shown in 
S. 
Figs. 3 and 5, the cross-piece is in direct me 
tallic contact with the opposite member 7. 
Above said cross-piece is placed a strip of 
paper 12 or other film of insulating material 
for the purpose of preventing metallic con 
tact between the cross-piece and the bent 
ends 10 during normal operation of the lamp 
in the Socket. 
The operation of the switch and circuit 
closer Will now be described. When there is 
no lamp in the socket, the circuit enters 
through wire 6 to binding - post 5, through 
member 4 to 7, binding-post S, and through 
wire $) to the succeeding lamp. When, how 
ever, a lamp is placed in the Socket, its base 
presses against pin 2 and moves the same out 
ward. This raises the two ends 11 from their 
metallic contact with 7, thereby breaking the 
direct circuit through the switch and estab 
lishing a direct circuit through the filament Ioo 
90 
(C 
75 
95 
 
2 
455,559 
5 O 
2. The combination, in a socket, with the 
of the lamp. The pape' strip 12 allows the 
terminals of a circuit, of a compound switch 
two ends ll to approach very close to the 
and potential-circuit, closer consisting of a 
ends 10 10, but prevents actual contact. If 
metallic ember Conlected to one of the tel'- 
in this condition of the switch the filament 
lminals and a second member connected to 
should break or burn out, the potential of 
the other terminal, one of said members ex 
the circuit at the points 10 11 would be so 
tending on both sides of the Other member 
great that the paper would be punctured and 
and being in contact on one side when there 
a circuit formed directly between 10 11 in a 
is no lamp in the socket, and being separated 
manner well known in devices termed po 
on the other side by an insulating strip or 
tential or disruptive circuit closers. To 
film when the lamp is inserted, substantially 
replace the paper in the socket it is only nec 
as described. 
essary to loosen the cap of the socket suffi 
3. A circuit-controller for sockets, consist 
ciently to expose the openings in the side of 
ing of a U-shaped member, the ends of which 
the same, (indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 
are folded back and which is adapted for 
11) into which the paper is slipped. Before 
connection to one wire of the circuit, and a 
this is done the lamp should be loosened, in | second member adapted for connection to the 
order to allow the cross-piece to move away 
other wire of the circuit, passing between the 
from the ends 10, allowing the paper to slip 
body and the ends of the first member, said 
easily between them. The cap of the socket 
members being in contact when there is no 
is then pushed over the openings and the 
lamp or device in the socket, substantially as 
lamp is screwed home in the socket. 
described. 
The socket above described provides a very 
4. A circuit-controller for sockets, consist 
simple and compact form of switch and cir 
ing of a U-shaped member, the ehds of which 
cuit-closer. The potential-circuit closer is 
are folded back, and a T-shaped member, the 
very efficient, since it has two points where 
ends of which pass between the body and the 
the current can breakthrough the paper to the 
ends of the first member, said members being 
Opposite terminal. There is also an absolute 
in contact when there is no lamp or device in 
short circuit around the lamp-socket termi 
the socket, the T member being movable 
mals at two places when the lamp is screwed 
away from the body of the first member and 
out of the Socket. It will be seen, also, that 
into proximity to the bent ends of the first 
there is a spring-contact between the central 
member, substantially as described. 
terminal of the lamp and the point 2, since 
5. A circuit-controller for sockets, consist 
the latter is supported by the member of 
ing of a U shaped member, the ends of which 
the switch, which is of spring metal. The 
are folded back, and a T-shaped member, the 
body of the socket is preferably made of in 
ends of which pass between the body and the 
combustible material, and the metallic por 
ends of the first member, said members being 
tions which are connected with the circuit 
in contact when there is no lamp or device in 
are entirely covered and protected. 
the socket, the T member being movable 
Having thus described the invention, what I 
away from the body of the first member and 
claim is 
in proximity to the bentends of the first mem 
1. The combination, in a lamp-socket, of 
ber, and a paper strip, substantially as de 
terminals for the circuit, a potential or dis 
scribed. 
ruptive circuit closer in the base of the socket, 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
consisting of two conducting members, a film 
12th day of December, 1890. 
of insulating material between the members, 
and means operated by insertion of the lamp 
for moving the parts of said potential or dis 
ruptive circuit closer near together, substan 
tially as described. 
W. S. ANDREW, 
W. S. IRELLEY. 
IIENRY PRICE BALL. 
Witnesses: 
45 
65 
So 
90 
O 
I 5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455659.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 455,659. 
TILE. 
Patented July 7, 1891. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
a 
2 R 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRE)'R'K ). ('0?)K, (FAI.T.E.ENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
E. 
PECIFICATION forming part of Letteraratent No. 458889, dated July 7, 1891. 
Application led October 9, 19, orial Ho, 326,443, 
a pedanu, 
to all tilten, it may concern 
Be it known that, REERICK ). ('Yok, 
citizen of the t'aited State, residing at All. 
glheny, in he county of Allegheny and State 
of ennsylvania, live invented certain rew 
and useful Improvalants in Tiles or 'attels 
all Method of Afaanufacturing the same; and 
do liertly declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact lek"ription af the invention, 
reference being litial to the accompanying 
drawings, which farin part of this specifica 
tion. 
Mly invention relaf as to decorative tiles or 
panels and to methods of nanufacturing the 
same, and has for its olject the production of 
a cast iru or steel tile or panel actapted and 
designed for use.as a substitute for tie urdi. 
nary and well-known terra-cotta orother vit 
reous tiles and panels now extensively used 
in the decorative art. 
in carrying my invention into effect I first 
produce a cast iroit or steel base or lody hav 
ing any desired pattern in relief oil one or 
anore of its surfaces, as by casting iron in it 
suitable mold, and theti, having filled the ill 
taglioor depressed portion of the patter-sur 
face with suitable enameling interial of any 
lesired color or of various colors at will, I 
lake the article intil the enanel has firmly 
adhered to the netal, and finally finish the 
projecting portions of the metallic surface by 
grinding and polithing, electroplating, nr oth. 
erwise. 
In practice I have found it desirable to coat 
the entire surfec if the article with an en 
amel of light color, which is baked in previ 
ously to applying the colored enamels to the 
intaglio portions of the surface, and which is 
reno'ed from the raised partion of lic pnt. 
terra 
Iy the grindling operation before re. 
ferred top. 
"w - 
ticle of tianufacture,' 'ist irot or steel tile 
or panel liavilizi raised metallie puttern El 
itterstitial depressell risinted spaces, nil, 
shelly, in the press of prolicing the Niini. 
liferti after ti's rijit Aet liest. 
in thic lite it laying drawings, figur' is 
a jhati view, and lig. 2 is section filview, if a. 
files restrict al Jureitling to by it via is, 
the thi?'k it'ss f l (rainil' Marfa'('s tig 
My investion 'insists il, ?i's, as it 
5 
25 
40 
o 
greatly exaggerated sui as to be easily distill 
gaishable. 
tile, 
A designates the base or intly i? 1 
which is preferably a malleille-iron castiug, 
and which is formed with tit raised surface 
a ?t, which constitute the pattern in relief. 
lon the pattern-surface A is since first a 
coating 
of vitreous enanel of athy color, 
generally of light hue, which is then well 6s 
liked. This first coating is lait all over the 
surface and may be, and generally is, applied 
to the back and edges as well as the pattern 
surface, the article being dipped is a ball of 
citanneling material. After the coating lhas 65 
dried to the proper degree he article is baked 
in a suitable ?urnace until the entiel fuses 
and allier's to the net al. The article is the 
cooled and a second (nails (" of tenancel is 
applied, but only to the in tigiit or depressel 
portions l l l of the pattern. 
The enanel is applied in a littil form and 
allowed todry, whethearticle is again lakel, 
as before, and again allowel tu coil. in lak 
ing the enanael spreads itself shoothly over 
the surface if the Inetial ic lecumes bright 
at tissy, the surface being similit' tits that 
of well-haked tile of ?ite quality. When the 
cen?el fuses of the surface of the tilt, it 
creeps up the edites of the raised parts of the 
pattern to the top of the salie and covers the 
sides of the fillets that compose the atter 
and add greatly to the artistic effect. 
After the enameled coatings have been al 
lied, as described, the raised parts of the pat 
tern are ground, renoving theenancel there 
frch, are polished, and finally electroplate 
or otherwise (ottetl with still, silver, tickel, 
nother metal. 
tortious of the pattern civiltrasting with the 
entimeled it tagli portina is prjiltice a highly 
artistic : Il tautiful effect but it tailable in 
tiling of lic arclinary claracter, 
single' ('star or in a variety of 'lirs at will 
It airi'irling to it it ris' fur which th' 
t is is tile sell 
attlau trist of thi' (health r. 
it was that it is not broadly illuw 
coastruct a lilu by first fibriting a late et 
stitutig tie inly of the tilt with raisit is 
res tir traituits at 
"tailling the 
''lic bright metallie surfit' of lies raiseki ya 
"I'll cantling if the atter lay like it 
that 
los 
at 
Sr. 
S s 
95 
rficielleeing decribed in 'tter tigny claim to a tile in whirl the exo 
'act No. 34, teleich, boswer, refrie) Intelli enainn brtion ital in reli 
stil" in whirl he raised arts as well as this 
it wing clereriley isviation, clain 
tlersialis are elitel', this rudicing, a 
faire, tile 
As it 
stotel in sail patent, "a surface whicle will sisting of a cast-baiell plate having a ris 
have precisely the samo appearance attle ornamental patrin integral with the body 
glazed clay ties." I am also aware that it is the tilo and having Alienatinel enting 
not new to construct a tile in which the alier rectly poss the surface of the lepressed 
tallie surfaces of the oranelatalportions are lion, the surface of the earnel tieing belt 
exposed, an in the well-known "cloisan?' the surface of the raised patternoa top 
enamel, in whicle, however, the his sent the latter in distinct relief and expo 
ground down so as to be ?usli will tile the Ilietalli surfaces af the relief portio 
name, in which there is no attempt Iliade substantially as descrities. 
to pryduce the effect of uncil orninct in 
in testimonly that claim the foregoing 
relief. Aly invention is neither intended to have hereunto set my lined this 20th day 
initate cloisonni ware nor to produce a tile September, 1884. 
which will have precisely or even approxi- 
FERC "K ). ("()(). 
unately the appearance of a glazed clay tile, 
and expressly disclaimi as my invention any 
tile of such imitation or appearance, this liti- 
Egs ('oxNR, 
RANK AVN. 
wartiele is 
Witnessea. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455759.txt	(No Model.) 
A. B. McCOY. 
BUTTON MARKER FOR SHOE UPPERS, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 455,759. 
Patented July 14, 1891. 
FIG 1 
etc. ag 
M-2E 
 
 
 
WNESSES 
22; 
392/.4 
NVENTOR 
George 4.7te 6ay 
4. acle: . (foodels 
vretta. 
THE Norris Petersco, photo-Litig., washington, D.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
A, B, McCOY, 
BUTTON MARKER FOR SHOE UPPERs, 
No. 455,759. 
Patented July 14, 1891. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N M 
F 
 
% 
A 
WITNESSES 
era. 
3%av4. 
INVENT OR 
(largo /3 7e 6ay .. 
4 dued 4, 24 662-67 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALONZO B. McCOY, OF BURLINGTON, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO HENRY B. 
ANTHONY, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY. 
BUTTON-MARKER FOR SHOE-UPPERS. 
SPECIFlCATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 455,759, dated July 14, 1891. 
Application filed December 13, 1890. Serial No. 374,635. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, ALONZO B. McCoy, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bur 
lington, in the county of Burlington and 
5 State of New Jersey, have invented a new 
and usefull Button and Button-FIole Marker 
for Shoe-Uppers, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to a machine for si 
Io multaneously and correctly marking on a 
shoe-upper the places for the buttons and 
button-holes. 
On reference to the accompanying sheets 
of drawings, making part of this specifica 
15 tion, Figure 1 is a front elevation of a ma 
chine embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation. Fig. 3 is a vertical and trans 
verse section with a shoe-upper on the divid 
ing-bar. Fig. 4 is a top or plan view. Fig. 5 
2O is a plan view of a shoe-upper having its 
button and button-hole flaps folded on the 
narrow quarter, the dividing-bar being be 
tween the narrow quarter on the bottom side 
and the button and button-hole flaps on the 
25 top ready for marking. Fig. 6 is a spread 
out view of an upper after marking. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts in the 
several views. 
A is the base of the machine employed for 
3o marking; B, its upright, and CD brackets ex 
tending from it. 
E is a driving-shaft in bearings of the up 
rights B F, which is actuated by a pulley, 
clutch, or other suitable device. To the front 
35 end of the shaft E is fixed a crank or crank 
wheel G, whose connecting-rod H is engaged 
with a loose collar I on a vertical presser-bar 
J, passing through and guided by the brack 
ets CD. A hollow screw K may be used in 
L is an adjustable collar at the top of the 
presser-bar J for regulating its stroke by its 
distance from the top of the bracket C. When 
the hollow screw K is used for top-guiding 
45 the presser-bar, the length of its stroke will 
be the distance between the collar and it. 
Misan adjustable collar on the presser-bar, 
which engages with the loose collar I of the . 
connecting-rod H for imparting an upward 
N is a spiral spring on the presser-bar be 
4o connection with the upper bracket C. 
5o motion to the said presser-bar. 
tween the loose collar I and an adjustable 
collar O. It is the connection between the 
crank G. or other actuating device and the 
presser-bar and the means of converting the 
circular motion of the crankinto a downward 
and yielding motion of the presser-bar, the 
degree of elasticity depending on the adjust 
ment of the collar O. 
At the bottona of the presser-bar J is a re 
movable presser-foot P, with its bottom in 
dented at a to correspond with an upwardly 
projecting marker b of a dividing-bar Q, hav 
ing its loose end c and markerb between the 
presser-foot and an anvil R of the base A. It 
other end is fixed to a block S. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
On the application of power the rotary mo 
tion of the shaft E is imparted to the crank 
G, and through the intervention of the con 
necting-rod H, its collar I, and the fixed col 
lar M an upward motion is given to the 
presser-bar J. For a downward stroke the 
motion of the crank G. is imparted by the col 
lar I, sliding on the presser-bar J, to the spring 
N, which converts the rotary motion of the 
actuating means into a down or reverse move 
ment of the bar. The said spring N serves, 
as it were, for an elastic connection or trans 
mitter, and its compression forces the bar on 
the upper with an elastic pressure, which pre 
vents its end from injuring the leather. 
The upper T, Figs. 5 and 6, is made ready 
for marking by turning the button-hole flap 
U back on the narrow quarter V, and the 
button-hole or scallop flap W on the but 
ton-hole flap. The upper is next passed over 
the dividing-bar Q, the narrow quarter V 
below, and the button and button-hole flaps 
above. It is guided by the operator to the 
proper position for the downstroke of the 
presser-bar by sliding it along the dividing 
bar until the first scallop d to be marked. 
is axially beneath the bar, or its foot P 
when one is used. The stroke of the bar 
forces the upper and the dividing-bar on the 
anvil R., by which the marker b is pressed 
against the button and button - hole flaps 
and simultaneously and correctly marks the 
places for the buttons and button-holes. The 
narrow quarter V, being beneath the divid 
ing-bar, is not marked. The shape of the 
55 
75 
95 
Ioo 
455,759 
marker, and actuating means for marking Io 
the places of the buttons and button-holes of 
a shoe-upper. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ALONZO B. MCCOY. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS D. PASTORIUS, 
MARTIN W. BERGEN. 
presser-foot P should conform to that of the 
Scallops, and, as it is removable, it may be 
taken off and dispensed with. 
I claim 
In a marker for shoe-uppers, the combina 
tion of a reciprocating presser-bar, a collar 
for transmitting motion to the presser-bar 
through the medium of a spring of the same, 
a spring-adjusting collar, a dividing-bar, a 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455859.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 455,859, 
A. J. SMART, 
TAP WRENCH, 
Patented July 14, 1891. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
9 
2 
N N 
3 
 
 
See Y 
31 2. 
Zze. 
a 
C 
726 77e56 e6 
76 43.77%%. 
ey. 4. re-ee-en- 
m 
77ve 226 7. 
- Sval? 
a;-&-ko-va 
ohiaur field 
7orzewo 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT J. SMART, OF GREENFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WILEY & RUSSELI, MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TAP-WREN CH. 
------------ 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 455,859, dated July 14, 1891. 
Application filed March 7, 1891, Serial No. 384,128, (No model.) 
O 
2c - 
25 
- 
To aid, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERT.J. SMART, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Green 
field, in the county of Franklin and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Tap-Wrenches; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
Myinvention relates to adjustable wrenches; 
and it has for its object the providing of strong 
and enduring tap - Wrenches which may be 
readily adjusted. 
The advantages of my improved wrench will 
be understood by reference to the accompa 
nying drawings, wherein the same parts are 
indicated by the same letters. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
the wrench-stock with parts ready for assem 
bling. Fig. 2 represents a longitudinal sec 
tion of the same. Fig. 3 represents the tool 
with the parts in place and ready for use. 
Figs. 4 and 5 represent sections along the line 
acac of Figs. 2 and 3 and showing my method 
of adjusting the spline-rods. 
A represents the wrench-stock, having a 
rectangular recess in the center bounded by 
vertical walls. In the side walls grooves a 
are provided, said grooves having a depth 
somewhat greater than the diameter of the 
spline-rods h. On one side of the stock and 
above the said scores I have screw-threaded 
holes a, two or more on each side. One end 
of the stock has a chamber a, greater in 
width and depth than the diameter and length 
of the screw E. This chamber has a shoulder 
or bearing-surface a around its mouth. The 
handles B are screwed in or otherwise secured 
to the stock A. 
C and D are two blocks forming the jaws 
of the wrench. Both of the said blocks fit 
snugly in the rectangular recess in the stock. 
Both may be moved longitudinally in the said 
recess; but when in use one C bears against 
the vertical wall at one end of the said rect 
angular recess, while the other D is moved 
backward or forward, and is adjusted at the 
proper distance from C by the nut F on the 
screw E. This screw E is firmly attached to 
the base of the block D, as by the pine, and 
enters freely the cavity a. It will be seen 
that the walls of the stock support all the 
various wrenching strains on the blocks. C 
and D; but in order to keep the said blocks 
from dropping out of the said recess and at 
the same time to allow them free motion lon 
gitudinally, as well as to retain the nut F in 
place, I have provided spline-rods h, which 
are adjusted as follows: These spline-rods, 
being in less diameter than the depth of the 
grooves C, are placed in the said grooves before 
the blocks C and D are placed in the stock, 
away from the end having the chamber a, and 
the said blocks can then be easily inserted. 
After the spline-rods and blocks are in the 
screws g, with conical points g', are screwed 
into the holesa'. The points g, entering the 
cavities a behind the ceuters of the spline 
rods, wedge the said rods outward until they 
partly or wholly occupy the grooves c and d in 
the blocks C and D, respectively. In this way 
the spline-rods furnish longitudinal guides 
for the said blocks and prevent their up-and 
down motion. By having the spline - rods 
shorter than the groove C. by the length of 
the nut F and placing them away from the 
end of the stock having the cavity a when 
the said spline-rods are forced out by the 
screws g their ends will engage the face of 
the said nut, and, keeping it between the said 
ends and the interior face of the stock, will 
hold it against longitudinal motion, at the 
same time leaving it free to revolve, thus 
keeping the said nut in place and rendering 
it possible to adjust the distance between the 
blocks C and D by simply turning the nut F. 
When the ends of the spline-rods are badly 
worn, the rods may readily be removed and new 
ones may be inserted. The ends of the grooves 
Ct, in the wake of the nut should be rounded 
somewhat to give free motion to the nut. 
While I have shown the said blocks C and D 
as adapted for square nuts or bolt-heads, it 
will readily be seen that with slight modifica 
tions they may be used for hexagonal or other 
shapes. It Will also be seen that while the 
chamber a should be slightly larger in diame 
ter than the screw E' the exact shape of said 
chamber is immaterial. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
35 
45 
So 
55 
7o 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
OC 
455,859 
. 
s 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States, is- 
1. In a tap-wrench, the combination, with 
a stock having a rectangular recess with four 
vertical walls, parallel scores in the two par 
allel side Walls, greater in diameter and depth 
than the spline-rods, and bolt-holes over the 
said scores, of two adjustable jaw-blocks fit 
ting in the said rectangular recess, said 
blocks having side scores registering with the 
scores in said stock, spline-rods fitting partly 
within the said scores in the jaw-blocks and 
partly with said scores in the stock, and 
screws or bolts having conical points entering 
the said scores in the stock behind the said 
spline-rods, substantially as described. 
2. In a tap-Wrench, the combination, with 
the stock A, having a rectangular recess 
therein with four vertical walls, and scores a 
and a and holesa', of the jaw-blocks C and D, 
having side scores c and d, the spline-rods h, 
and the screwsg, having conical pointsg', sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a tap-Wrench, the combination, With 
a stock having an interior recess with paral 
lel side walls, a chamber at one end of the 
said recess, and a shoulder surrounding the 
mouth of the said chamber, of a jaw-block 
moving longitudinally between the said par 
allel side walls, a screw attached to the base 
of said block, smaller in diameter than the 
said chamber in the stock, and a nut on the 
said screw adapted to bear against the shoul 
der surrounding the mouth of said chamber, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a tap-wrench, the combination, with 
the stock A, having a rectanguiar recess there 
in, and a chamber a, with shoulder a at one 
end of said recess, of the jaw-block D, slid 
ing in said recess and held therein by suit 
able guides, the screw E, attached to the said 
jaw-block and freely entering the said cham 
ber a, and the nut F, engaging said screw 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE A. PAULL, 
WILLIAM.S. ALLEN. 
45 
55 
and bearing against the shoulder a, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a tap-wrench, the combination, with 
a stock having a recess therein, with parallel 
side walls, parallel grooves in the said side 
walls, screw-holes penetrating into the said 
grooves, and a chamber at one end of the stock 
between the said grooves, with a shoulder sur 
rounding the entrance thereto, of a jaw-block 
inserted in the said recess, having grooves 
registering with the groovesin said side walls, 
screws fitting in said screw-holes in the stock, 
spline-rods held by said screws partly within 
said grooves in the stock and partly within 
said grooves in the block, a screw attached to 
said jaw-block and entering freely said cham 
ber in the stock, and a nut on said screw held 
against longitudinal motion between the ends 
of said spline-rods and the shoulder surround 
ing the entrance to said chamber, substan 
tially as described. 
6. In a tap-wrench, the combination, with 
the stock A, having a rectangular recess there 
in and vertical side walls, with horizontal 
grooves a, in said walls, the screw-holes d', 
penetrating said grooves, and the chamber a 
and shoulder a at one. end of said recess, of 
the jaw-blocks C and D, having grooves a, and 
d, registering with the grooves C, the spline 
rods h, shorter and less in diameter than said 
grooves, the screws g, entering said grooves 
behind said spline-rods, the screw E, attached 
to the jaw-block D and entering freely into 
the chamber a, and the nut F, turning on the 
said screw E and held against longitudinal 
motion between the shoulder a and the ends 
of the spline-rods, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ALBERT J. SMART, 
7 o 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US455960.txt	C. BAYER & P. SCHERBNER, 
FOLDING GATE, 
Patented July 14, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 455,960, 
 
WITNESSES: 
44. /3 
72 2744. 
ar 
INVENTORS 
test; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES BAYER AND PAUL SCHERBNER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FOLDING GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 455,960, dated Jtly 14, 1891. 
Application filed April 3, 1891, Serial No. 387,485, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concer'7. 
Be it known that we, CHARLES BAYER and 
PAUL SCHERBNER, citizens of the United 
States, and residents of the city of New York, 
in the county and State of New York, havein 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Folding Gates, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
folding gates, which when opened completely 
fill the opening with which they are provided 
and when closed occupy a very small space. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
new and improved gate of this kind, which 
is simple in construction, light, strong, and 
durable, and the parts of which at all times 
remain parallel and open and close without 
binding, whether the power is supplied to the 
top, center, or bottom. 
The invention consists in a folding gate, 
constructed with main bars, lazy-tongs at the 
top and bottom connecting the main bars, and 
auxiliary bars arranged between the main 
bars, which auxiliary bars are adapted to 
fold in between the main bars when the gate 
is closed. 
The invention also consists in the construc 
tion and combination of parts and details, 
which will be fully described hereinafter, and 
finally pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
an elevation of our improved gate open. Fig. 
II is an elevation of the same closed. Fig. III 
is an end elevation of the same; and Fig. IV 
is a detail view, partly in section, showing 
the parallel guide-piece. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
The gate is composed of a series of vertical 
main bars A and intermediate auxiliary bars 
B, the main bars A having greater width, 
length, and thickness than the auxiliary bars 
B, which can be made quite light. The main 
bars A are connected at the bottom and top 
by a series of pivoted levers C, crossing each 
other and forming lazy-tongs, the said level's 
being pivoted to the main bars A at the in 
tersections of said levers and pivoted to each 
other at the ends. The auxiliary bars B con 
nect the bottom and top lazy-tongs, and in 
the alternating fields are connected with the 
top and bottom joints of said lazy-tongs. 
In order to insure an absolute parallelism 
of movement, two auxiliary bars B B are ar 
ranged in one space between two main bars. 
One of the auxiliary bars B connects the top 
pivots of the lazy-tong sections and the other 
bar B' connects the bottom edges, the said 
bar B' being provided at the upper and lower 
ends with the bends B B, as shown in Fig. 
IV, so as to pass the lazy-tong levers. The 
said auxiliary sliding bar B' is provided with 
two fixed collars DD, through which the corre 
sponding bar B can slide. 
When the gate is opened, the parts are in 
the position shown in Fig. I, and when it is 
closed the parts are in the position shown in 
Fig. II, the lazy-tongs and the auxiliary bars 
B being folded in between the main bars A. 
To permit of this folding of the auxiliary bars 
in between the main bars, the width of the 
auxiliary bars must not be greater than one 
half the width of the main bars. The main 
bars, which form the main support of the 
gate, can be spaced a considerable distance 
from each other, thus materially reducing the 
Weight of metal required in the gate, and at 
the same time the interstices or openings in 
, the gate will not be very large, as the light 
intermediate or auxiliary bars B are arranged 
between said main bars. As the doubleaux 
iliary bars B B slide on each other parallel 
ism is maintained in all the main and aux 
iliary bars, and thus the gate can be opened 
or closed without binding by applying the 
power required to open or close the gate 
either at the top, bottom, or middle, or at any 
desired point, 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
1. In a folding gate, the combination, with 
main bars, of lazy-tongs connecting said main 
bars at the top and bottom, and auxiliary 
bars arranged between the main bars and con 
necting the top and bottom lazy-tongs, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a folding gate, the combination, with 
main bars and lazy-tongs connecting them at 
the top and bottom, of auxiliary bars arranged 
Patent- 
- 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
95 
OCd 
455,960 
connects the upper joints of the lazy-tongs 
and the other the lower, and collars fixed on 
one of said double auxiliary bars, substan- I5 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our invention we have signed our names in 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
CHARLES BAYER. 
PAUI, SCHERBNER, 
- 
Witnesses: 
OSCAR F. GUNZ, 
A. M. BAKER. 
between the main bars and connecting the top 
and bottom lazy-tongs, said auxiliary bars be 
ing connected in the fields between the main 
bars alternately with the top and bottom 
joints of the lazy-tongs, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In a folding gate, the combination, with 
main bars, of lazy-tongs connecting the main 
bars at the top and bottom, auxiliary bars ar 
ranged between the main bars and connect 
ing the lazy-tongs, some of said auxiliary bars 
being made double, of which double bars one 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456060.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 456,060. 
 
M. E. REILLY. 
ICE CREEPER. 
Patented July 14, 1891, 
3-vuovov 
7622%aez A. Zezzzz/. 
hiv "72% Aza 22 
33 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL E. REILLY, OF MONTESANO, WASHINGTON. 
CE CREEPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,060, dated July 14, 1891. 
Application filed February 26, 1891, Serial No. 382,899, (No model.) 
5 
O 
provided. These prongs are split to form two 
Be it known that I, MICHAEL E. REILLY, a members, which after being passed through 
openings h in the sole-plates are bent in op 
posite directions and clinched. The open 
ings or slots h in the sole-plates are provided 
in sufficient number to receive the prongs g. 
The calkis thrust through the fastening until 
its head comes in contact therewith, and the 
prongs of the said fastening are thrust through 
the openings in the sole-plate from below and 
clinched on the upper side of the sole plate in 
the manner aforesaid. 
The heel-strap is adjustably connected with 
the hooks of the rod E and remains fixed in the 
adjusted position. The device is placed 
against the sole of the shoe with the flanged 
of the toe-piece projecting up in front of the 
toe of the shoe. The heel-strap is drawn back 
and sprung up over the heel of the shoe. Ob 
viously, when drawing on the heel-strap the 
sole-plates A and A' are drawn back and the 
projections a, riding in the diverging Ways d', 
cause the said plates A and A' to approach 
and clamp the lips B against the edges of the 
sole and retain the device in position. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is-- 
1. An ice-creeper provided with a sole-plate 
and a calk secured thereto by means of a fast 
ening-plate apertured to receive the shank of 
the calk and having prongs to project through 
the sole-plate and be clinched thereon, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. An ice-creeper provided with a sole-plate 
85 
having four slots, as h, and a calk secured . 
thereto by means of a fastening-plate having 
an opening to receive the shank of the calk 
and having a series of prongs, one at each 
edge, to correspond in number and position 
with and projected through the slots in the 
said plate, and having the prongs split and 
clinched in opposite directions, substantially 
as described, for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
MICHAEL E. REILLY. 
To all whom it may concern 
citizen of the United States, residing at Monte 
sano, in the county of Chehalis and State of 
Washington, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Ice-Creepers; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sate. 
This invention relates to ice-creepers, and 
aims to provide a device that can be quickly 
adjusted to the foot, and which when in po 
sition will not be liable to become detached 
at an inopportune moment. 
The improvement consists of the novel fea 
tures which will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and claimed, and which are shown in 
the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a bottom plan view of a device 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a side 
view of the toe-piece which connects the sole 
plates. Fig. 3 is a side view of a sole-plate. 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of the calk-fastener. 
Fig. 5 is a detail view of the calk. Fig. 6 is a 
detail view showing the relative position of 
the calk and the manner of securing it to the 
Sole-plate. Fig. 7 is a cross-section of the calk 
fastener, showing the calk in place. 
The device is composed of two sole-plates 
A and A', rights and lefts, each covering 
about a longitudinal half of the sole and pro 
vided with a series of calks C and with a re 
taining-lip B at its outer edge to extend up 
alongside of the sole and prevent lateral dis 
placement of the device. The toe-piece D 
has a vertical flanged to project up in front 
of the sole at the toe of the shoe and diverg 
ing slots or ways d' to receive projections a 
at the front ends of the sole-plates. The rod 
E is held in the bent ends a? of the sole-plates, 
and is provided at each end with a hooke, 
which have the ends of the heel-strap F fast 
ened thereto. 
45 
The calks Care tapering and have flat heads 
... and the fastenings are plates centrally aper 
tured to receive the shanks of the calks and 
provided with the prongsg, which extend ver 
tically from the edges of the plates, four being 
B. O'SULLIVAN, 
M. J. GERAGHTY. 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 
ad 
55 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456160.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 456,160, 
 
J. PECORD. 
KITCHEN CABINET, 
2 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
Patented July 21, 1891. 
difesses 
Igiopia: 
Jerry Aecozz 
The Nonas PETERs co, FHoto-Litho., washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
J. PECORD 
KITCHEN CABINET, 
2. Sheets-Sh eet, 2, 
No. 456,160, 
Patented July 21, 1891. 
s 
w 
S. 
ye 
(s 
DWIFs 
a--- 
WE 
SNEssrs 
 
S. S. 
f 
S 
st SY: 
 s 
32-is: 
Yn 
cy 
t 
Igioplar 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JERRY PECORD, OF THEBES, ILLINOIS. 
KITCHEN-CABINET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,160, dated July 21, 1891. 
Application filed December 1, 1890, Serial No. 378,222, (No model.) 
5 
O 
- 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Zen of the United States, residing at Thebes, ends of the bin, and the slides are adapted to 55 
in the county of Alexander and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Kitchen 
Cabinet, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
kitchen-cabinets. 
The object of the present invention is to 
simplify and improve the construction of 
kitchen-cabinets and provide convenient 
means for keeping flour, meal, and the like 
and for sifting the same. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of a kitchen-cabinet embodying the in 
vention, two of the doors being open, and 
showing the arrangement of the compart 
ments and drawers, Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
tional view on line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
vertical sectional view on the line y y of Fig. 
2. Fig. 4 is a horizontal sectional view of the 
sifter. Fig. 5 is a detail perspective view of 
the sifter and the pivoted frame supporting 
the sifter. Fig. 6 is a reverse plan view, 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 1 
designates the casing, which is divided by a 
horizontal partition 2 and a vertical partition 
3, and has sliding in suitable Ways arranged 
below the horizontal partitions 2 drawers 4 
and 5, and is provided below the drawers 5 
with shelves 6 and above with the shelves 7. 
The shelves 7 are arranged in the upper por 
tion of the casing and extend between the 
vertical partition 3 and one side of the casing, 
and between the said partition 3 and the op 
posite side of the casing is arranged a pair 
of cylindrical bins 8, having frustum-shaped 
lower ends 9, supported by a brace 10, and 
the upper ends of the bin are secured to a 
plate 11, having circular openings and at 
tached to the lower face of the top 12 of the 
casing, and the said top is provided with a 
hinged door 13 to open and close the bins. 
The brace 10 is provided with circular open 
ings 14 and has its lower face recessed at 15 
and provided with dovetail grooves 16 in the 
side walls of the recesses to form ways, in 
Be it known that I, JERRY PECORD, a citi- which are arranged slides 17 to close the lower 
be withdrawn to permit the contents of the 
bins to fall into a sifter 18. The sifter is 
mounted upon a movable frame 19, having 
one end pivoted to the brace at a point be 
tween the bins and being adapted to swing on 
its pivot 20 to bring the sifter 18 beneath 
either of the bins 8. The sifter consists of a 
cylindrical body 21, provided with a gauze 
bottom 22 and having at its top a plate 23, Se 
cured to the upper edges of the cylindrical 
body, and being rectangular in form and pro 
vided with a central opening registering with 
the lower end of the bin, and having its edges 
projecting beyond the sides of the body and 
engaging ways 24, arranged on the lowerface 
of the pivoted frame 19 near the outer end 
of the same, and the said sifter is adapted to 
be removed from the frame when it is desired 
to clean the same or for some similar purpose, 
and it is maintained within the ways 21 of 
the frame by a spring-actuated bolt 25, adapt 
ed to engage a notch 26. 
The free edge of 
the movable frame 19 is curved and rabbeted 
and is adapted to engage rabbeted strips 27, 
secured to the ends of the brace on the lower 
face of the same, and the said pivoted frame 
is maintained in proper position beneath the 
bins by spring-actuated catches 28, secured 
to the strips 27 and arranged to engage a 
notch 29 of the pivoted frame. The sifter is 
provided with a vertical shaft 30, which is 
journaled in cross-bars 31 and 32, arranged . 
near the top and bottom of the sieve-body and 
at an angle to each other, and the lower end 
of the shaft is provided with an operating 
handle 33, by means of which the agitator 
arms 34 are caused to move over the upper 
face of the sieve-bottom 22. The agitator 
arms 34 are rigidly secured to the shaft, and 
are held in engagement with the bottom 22 
by a spring 35, which is curved or bowed, and 
provided at its ends with eyes to receive 
1S 
the shaft, and it bears against the agitator 
and the upper cross-bar 31, The sifter is pro 
vided with handles 36, by means of which it 
may readily be removed. Beneath the sifter 
is arranged a tray. 37 and a kneading-board 
38, which are supported upon the horizontal 
position 2 of the casing. 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
456,160 
oted to the brace at a point between the bins, 
and having its free end rabbeted and provided 
near the same with ways 24, the sifter arranged 
within the ways, the curved strips arranged 
at the ends of the brace and adapted to receive 
the rabbeted ends of the movable frame and 
provided with spring-catches to engage the 
same, substantially as described. 
3. In a kitchen-cabinet, the combination of 
a casing, the bins arranged within the casing, 
the brace supporting the bins, the movable 
frame pivoted between the bins and provided 
at its outer end with ways and having a notch 
26, the sieve engaging the ways, the Spring 
actuated bolt arranged upon the body of the 
sieve and adapted to engage the said notch 20, 
the shaft journaled in the sieve and provided 
with agitator-arms, and the operating-han 
dles, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JERRY PECORD. 
Witnesses: 
EUGENE F. MICHAAIe, 
GEORGE W. SAMMONS. 
35 
45 
O 
From the foregoing description and the ac 
companying drawings the construction, oper 
ation, and advantages of the invention will 
readily be understood. 
What I claim is 
1. In a kitchen-cabinet, the combination of 
the casing, the brace 10, provided with open 
ings, the bins arranged within the casing and 
supported by the brace and having their lower 
ends arranged over the openings of said brace, 
the sifter, the movable frame having one end 
carrying the sifter and having its other end 
pivoted to the brace at a point between the 
bins, and being adapted to swing on its pivot 
to carry the sifter beneath either of the bins, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a kitchen-cabinet, the combination of 
the casing, the bins arranged within the cas 
ing and provided with frustum-shaped lower 
ends, the brace Supporting the bins and pro 
vided with openings receiving the lower ends 
of the bins and provided with ways, the slide 
arranged in the ways and closing the lower 
ends of the bin, the movable frame provided 
with an opening adapted to register with the 
lower ends of the bin and having one end piv 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456260.txt	(No Model 
No. 456,260. 
 
C. W. THOMPSON. 
GATE, 
Patented July 21, 1891, 
 
 
 
y 
: 4 
 
 
 
 
if 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES WILLIAM THOMPSON, OF TOMALES, CALIFORNIA. 
GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,260, dated July 21, 1891. 
Application filed March 4, 1891, Serial No. 383,776 (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may (nice7n 
Be it known that I, CHARLES WILLIAM 
THOMPSON, a citizen of the United States, re 
siding at Tomales, in the county of Marin and 
State of California, have invented a new and 
useful Gate, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to automatic wagon 
gates, and it is an improvement on the device 
of this class for which Letters Patent of the 
United States No. 440,853 were granted to my 
self on the 18th day of November, 1890. This 
is one of that class of gates in which the gate 
is connected by suitable connecting devices 
with a rock-shaft having an upwardly-extend 
ing bail or wheel-iron lying in the path of the 
passing vehicles, said rock-shaft serving to 
impart a Swinging movement to the gate, and 
the rock-shaft being retained in and restored 
to its normal position after operation by the 
use of a spring. In my previous patent, to 
which reference has above been made, the 
said rock-shaft is connected with one end of 
a flat leaf-spring, the other end of which is 
connected with a fixed point of attachment. 
My present invention has for its object to 
provide an improved spring for actuating the 
rock-shaft which shall be simple in construc 
tion and efficientin operation; and the inven 
tion resides particularly in the means for re 
taining the bail or wheel-iron in operative 
position and restoring the same to the nor 
mal position after operation; and it consists 
in the improved construction and arrange 
ment of details, which will be hereinafter fully 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure 1 
is a perspective view of the rock-shaft and 
the spring for operating the same which con 
stitutes my invention. Fig. 2 is a longitudi 
nal sectional view of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
vertical transverse sectional view. Fig. 4 is 
a perspective detail view of one of the lugs 
forming part of the invention. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
1 designates a sill or base which is pro 
vided with bearings for the rock-shaft 2, hav 
ing the upwardly-extending bail or wheel 
iron 3. 
4 designates a spring which is coiled upon 
the rock-shaft and having projecting ends 55. 
This spring is arranged directly above a re 
cess 6, formed in the sill or base, and the pro 
jecting ends 5 of the Spring 4 rest upon the 
upper edges of said recess. Suitably secured 
upon the rock-shaft 2, adjacent to the spring 
4, are the collars 77, having set-screws 8, by 
means of which they are secured adjustably 
in position, Said collars are provided with 
laterally-extending lugs 9, extending under 
the oppositely-disposed arms 5 of the spring 
4. The several parts are to be so arranged 
that the bail or wheel-iron 5 shall normally 
extend vertically in an upward direction. 
The rock-shaft is to be connected in any 
suitable manner with the gate which is to be 
operated; but this forms no part of my pres 
ent invention and has not been illustrated in 
the drawings hereto annexed, it being under 
stood that my invention is applicable to a 
great variety of gates of different construction. 
In operation the wheel-iron is depressed by 
the wheels or vehicles passing over the same, 
thus Oscillating the rock-shaft, which imme 
diately after the passage of such vehicle is 
restored to its normal position by the action 
of the spring. This device is exceedingly 
simple in construction and permits of the 
Spring being easily adjusted or its tension 
regulated whenever it shall be desired to do so. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of the rock-shaft having an up 
Wardly-extending bail or wheel-iron, a spring 
coiled upon said rock-shaft and having out 
Wardly-extending arms, and collars secured to 
said rock-shaft and having lugs extending 
laterally under the ends or arms of said 
spring, substantially as and for the purpose 
N 
Set forth. 
2. The combination of the rock-shaft hav 
ing an upwardly-extending bail or wheel-iron, 
a spring coiled upon said shaft and having 
Oppositely-extending arms, and collars hav 
ing Set-screws whereby they are mounted ad 
justably upon the rock-shaft adjacent to the 
spring and provided with lugs extending lat 
erally under the ends of the latter, substan 
tially as set forth. 
25 
35 
45 
85 
95 
OC 
) 
456,260 
3. The combination of a sill having a recess, 
the rock-shaft mounted upon the sill and hav 
ing an upwardly-extending bailor wheel-iron, 
a spring coiled upon the shaft above the re 
5 cess in the sill and having oppositely-extend 
ing arms resting upon the upper edges of the 
latter, the collars secured adjustably adja 
cent to the ends of the spring, and the lugs 
extending from said collars laterally under 
the arms of said spring, Substantially as and to 
for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHAS. WILLIAM THOMPSON. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. J. ABLES, 
W. F. BASSETT. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456361.txt	E. GRAWES 
HYDRAULIC TRAVELING CRANE, 
Patented July 21, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 456,36l. 
 
sez, 
S.22% 
aimed Tsaga 
f 
m 
ca 
a 
. 
NYENTon: 
?eAlouarr 
SaareVal. m 
The Norris Peters co., Photo-ThowsHINGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERWIN GRAVES, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND 
MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO WALTER WOOD, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENN 
SYLVANIA. 
HYDRAULIC TRAVELING CRAN E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,361, dated July 21, 1891. 
Application filed April 15, 1890, Serial No. 347,972, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ERWIN GRAVES, a citi 
Zen of Camden, in the county of Camden, and 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Hydraulic 
Traveling Cranes, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to the class of appa 
atus in which tracks, extending in parallel 
ism over the area with respect to which the 
apparatus operates, support a travelingbridge 
upon which in turn is mounted a carriage 
Which receives the weight of the load to be 
elevated and transported. The necessarily 
large size of engine required to furnish the 
power to propel a heavily weighted crane of 
the foregoing character-the desirability of 
escaping the limitations as to size which the 
restricted space afforded by the surface of 
the bridge imposes,-the desirability of hav 
ing the engine located at a point where it is 
not only readily accessible for inspection oil 
ing and repairing, but also protected from 
dust and exposure-and the desirability of 
lightening as far as possible the weight of 
the bridge and its load-all render it a de 
sideratum, in apparatus of this character, that 
the motor should be stationary and located 
upon the ground, and that from such fixed po 
sition it should, by appropriate connective 
gearing, operate and control the bridge. 
Myinvention aims to provide a craue which 
shallfulfill the desirable conditions indicated; 
in which connective gearing of simple char 
acter shall transmit the propelling power of 
the motor to the bridge is provided; and in. 
which hydraulic pressure shall be utilized as 
the bridge driving power, and by a suitable 
arrangement of pipes so distributed that a 
portion of the bridge-operating gearing other 
Wise necessary may be dispensed with. 
In the drawings I illustrate and herein Ide 
Scribe a preferred form of a convenient em 
bodiment of my invention, the particular sub 
ject matter claimed as novel being hereinaf 
ter definitely specified. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in per 
spective of an apparatus conveniently em 
bodying my invention, and Fig. 2 is a ver 
tical, longitudinal, sectional, elevation of the 
operating valve. 
In the drawings, A A are the bridge-ways 
or tracks, conveniently mounted upon Sup 
ports (t. Each bridge-way conveniently con 
sists of a rail a and a longitudinal rack a 
extending in parallelism with it. 
B is the bridge, the same being of any pre 
ferred construction, and being provided with 
flanged rollers l adapted to the rails a. 
These rollers, of which two are shown at each 
end of the bridge, take the weight of the 
bridge, and carry it backward and forward 
under the stress of the operating ropes, where 
of hereinafter. 
C is a carriage mounted upon the bridge, 
and designed to receive the weight of the 
load to be carried and to transport it trans 
versely to the inclosure. To such end the 
carriage is in practice equipped with suita 
ble rope connections or equivalent devices 
through which it may be propelled and 
through which also the load may be elevated 
and secured to it. Illustration of these con 
nections is omitted as immaterial to the Sub 
ject matter herein claimed. 
D ID' are two ropes, both secured to the 
bridge, and each also secured to a separate 
power-operated device or motor adapted to 
effect a pull upon it. 
D, Fig. 1, is the left hand rope, and D' the 
right hand rope. These ropes are respect 
ively represented as existing on opposite 
sides of the bridge, and as each having one ex 
tremity secured to a staple or eye attached to 
the bridge. 
E E' are two hydraulic motors or rams 
structurally independent of each other and 
preferably occupying positions at opposite. 
ends of the inclosure, the motor designated E 
being at the left and the motor Eat the right 
hand end thereof. These motors are dupli 
cates of each other, and I therefore confine 
the following description to but one of them, 
namely E:- 
F are a pair of vertical standards, which 
support in a vertical position between their 
upper ends a hydraulic cylinder G. The up 
per end of this cylinder is conveniently pro 
vided with sheaves.g., of which two are shown 
in the drawings. These sheaves are mounted 
upon an axle which is supported in lugs g 
erected upon the cylinder head. Within the 
25 
35 
45. 
55 
65 
75 
95 
dO 
456,361 
IO 
cylinder plays a plunger or piston, the rod H 
of which protrudes through the lower cylin 
der head, and as to its outer or free elud is 
equipped with sheaves h, two being shown, 
Which are mounted upon an axle conveniently 
Supported in a bracket head being a cross 
piece h' the ends of which are equipped with 
downwardly-extending lugs in which said 
axle is journaled. The breadth of the bracket 
head is preferably such as to extend between 
the respective inside faces of the two sup 
ports F, which therefore constitute a guide 
for the vertical movement of the bracket head 
and piston. 
The bridge-operating rope which is con 
nected with the hydraulic cylinder and piston 
under consideration, may be a textile or metal 
rope or a chain, and is led from the bridge 
over one of the sheaves g, then down to and 
around one of the sheaves h, then up again 
to and around the second sheave 9, then down 
to and around the second sheave h, and is 
then, as to its free end, secured to the cylinder. 
AS Will now be apparent, when the piston is 
forced outward, the rope which is engaged 
with its sheaves will be taken up to an extent 
proportioned to the number of times it is lon 
gitudinally doubled around the cylinder and 
piston, and, as will be understood, by suitable 
multiplication of the number of the sheaves, 
a rope sufficiently long to extend along any 
desired length of apartment may be applied 
and operated. One rope and motor such as 
the foregoing being so mounted and connected 
with the bridge as to pull it in one direction, 
and another rope and motor of precisely simi 
lar character being so mounted and connected 
With the bridge as to pull it in an opposite 
direction,--it is apparent that, in order to se 
cure the most advantageous lesult, both mo 
tors should co-operate in such manner that as 
One rope is taken up the other will be corre 
spondingly slackened. This co-operation is 
conveniently effected in the manner herein 
after described. 
I prefer to operate the pistons ly hydraulic, 
as opposed to steam pneumatic or kindred, 
pressure, but I do not restrict myself to hy 
draulic pressure. 
I is a pipe, tube Ol' its equivalent, leading 
into the cylinder of the motor E, and J is a 
similar pipe leading into the cylinder of the 
motor E'. These pipes both preferably lead 
from a common valve K, situated at some 
convenient point within the building. In 
practice the pipes I and J may be led beneath 
the floor and through the wall of the apart 
ment or inclosure in such manner as will pre 
vent them from taking up room or present 
ing any obstruction to the work ordinarily 
carried on in the apartment. The valve IK is 
of an ordinary type, c' being a pressure cham 
ber, k'a pressure supply pipe leading there 
into, k'a port leading to the pipe I, k'a port 
leading to the pipe J, k an exhaust port, k" 
a slide valve, and is a valve stem the central 
portion of which is secured to the valve li: 
and the extremities of which pass out through 
suitably packed openings in opposite ends of 
the pressure chamber. The valve as an en 
tirety will, when the respective extremities of 
its stem pass out of the pressure chamber, re 
main without locking in whatever position it 
may be set. 
L is a lever the lower end of which is piv 
oted to the lower portion of the valve casing, 
and the intermediate portion of which is en 
gaged with one extremity of the valve stem, 
so that said lever operates as a valve moving 
Stem. 
In the operation of the crane to carry the 
bridge in one or the other direction it is nec 
essary (according to the direction of the de 
sired movement) that the pressure should ex 
ist in one of the pipes I and J, and that the 
lead should be given to the exhaust from the 
other, in order that the piston of the cylinder 
so receiving the pressure may be protruded 
and thereby take up its rope and draw the 
bridge toward it, and that the piston of the 
cylinder which is exhausted may be re 
tracted under the pull of its rope occasioned 
by the moving away of the bridge. 
In Fig. 2 the valve k" is shown as covering 
the exhaust port and permitting the pressure 
to enter both pipes I and J. This holds the 
bridge firmly in one position. In order to 
move the bridge in one or the other direction, 
the valve is simply moved to the right or left 
as desired. 
It is apparent that the arrangement de 
scribed is very simple and compact, a coln 
plex system of operating ropes is dispensed 
with, and a direct pull exerted upon the 
bridge in whichever direction it is desired to 
draw it. The hydraulic rams are, as shown, 
inverted, and this arrangement is resorted to 
in order that in the event of the shutting off 
of the hydraulic pressure from both pipes I 
and J contemporaneously, the pistons will not 
drop down into their cylinders and permit 
the disengagement of the ropes from the 
sheaves as would be the case were the cylin 
ders beneath and the pistons uppermost. In 
the arrangement shown in the drawings the 
drop of the pistons tends to take up the rope 
and not to release it. 
Of course it is to be understood that, while 
I prefer to place the hydraulic rams at the 
extremities of the apartment as shown, and 
to place them in a vertical position, I do not 
restrict myself thereto, as it is clearly within 
the scope of my invention to arrange the 
rams at other points or in other positions, -it 
being in such arrangement only necessary to 
make such changes in the direction in which 
the operating ropes are led to the rains, and 
to apply the appropriate intermediate pull 
leys, to enable me to carry into effect very 
different arrangements in the sense of mere 
dispositions of the rams. 
To prevent the swaying, impacting, or une 
qual movement of the ends of the bridge, in 
i its travel, I prefer to provide the bridge ways 
35 
o 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
95 
Od 
IO5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
456,361. 
- 
O 
other. 
- 
with the racks a referred to, and to provide 
one of the motors and fixedly secured, sub 
the bridge with the axle M which is equipped 
stantially as set forth. 
. 
with two toothed wheels ll, the wheel lbe 
5. In combination with bridge ways or rails, 
ing in mesh with one, and the wheell in mesh 
a bridge mounted upon said ways, a pair of 
With the other, of said racks. As is apparent 
structurally independent hydraulic cylinders 45 
therefore, it will be impossible for one end of and pistons substantially as described, a valve 
said bridge to travel in advance of the other, 
controlled source of hydraulicpressureincom 
for the reason that any movement taken by 
munication with both cylinders, a pair of 
one end will be positively transmitted to the 
ropes each of which is secured as to one end 
to the bridge and as to its other end portion 5o 
Having thus described my invention, I 
engaged with the motor sheaves, and fixedly 
claim: 
secured, substantially as set forth. 
1. In combination with bridge ways or rails, 
6. In combination with bridge ways or rails, 
a bridge mounted upon said ways, two hy 
a bridge mounted upon said ways, two hy 
draulic motors, and suitable connections lead 
draulic motors provided with sheaves and 55 
ing from said bridge in opposite directions, 
situated in adjacency to opposite respective 
and respectively connected with said motors, 
ends of the ways, a source of hydraulic preSS 
Substantially as set forth. 
ure, pipes leading from said source of press 
2. In combination with bridge ways or rails, 
ure respectively to said motors, and a pair of c. 
a bridge mounted upon said ways, two hy 
ropes each of which is secured as to one end 6o 
draulic motors connected with a common 
to the bridge and as to its other end portion 
source of hydraulic pressure, and independ 
engaged with the motor sheaves and fixedly 
ent rope connections leading from said motors 
secured, substantially as set forth. 
to said bridge, and approaching said bridge 
7. In combination with bridge ways or rails, 
in opposite directions, substantially as set 
embodying racks, a bridge mounted upon Said 65 
forth. 
ways, a shaft mounted in said bridge and 
3. In combination with bridge ways or rails, 
equipped with toothed wheels engaged with 
a bridge mounted upon said ways, two hy 
said racks, a pair of hydraulic motors con 
draulic motors, a source of hydraulic pressure, 
nected with a common source of hydraulic 
pipes leading from said source of hydraulic 
pressure, and flexible connections by which 7o 
pressure respectively to said motors, and flexi 
said motors are respectively connected to said 
ble connections by which said motors are re 
bridge, substantially as set forth. 
spectively connected to said bridge to occa 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
sion its travel in opposite directions, substan 
my invention, I have hereunto signed my 
tially as set forth. 
name this 14th day of April, A. D. 1890. 
4. In combination with bridge ways or rails, 
a bridge mounted upon said ways, a pair of 
hydraulic motors, a pair of ropes, each of 
which is secured as to one end to the bridge, 
4o and as to the other end portion engaged with 
J. BONSALL TAYLOR, . 
F. NORMAN DIXON. 
ERWIN GRAVES. 
In presence of 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456461.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 456,461, 
 
E. ALEXANDER. 
SASH CORD GUIDE, 
Patented July 21, 1891, 
 
 
WitnesseS 
as 42-66-6-26-6 
Ewin Alexandet, 
NVENTOR: 
a Attorn EY. 
 
BY 
is worris pergasco, roto-Litho...washion. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
d 
EWIN ALEXANDER, OF LAKE CITY, MINNESOTA. 
SASH - CORD GUIDE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,461, dated July 21, 1891, 
Application filed February 2, 1891, Serial No. 379,928 (No model.) 
- 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whom it nudity concert: 
the screws thus being set into the solid wood 
Be it known that I, EWIN ALEXANDER, a 
upon each side of the mortise instead of at 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lake 
each end, as in the common construction. The 
City, in the county of Wabasha and State of 
blank is bent at its middle line, as at 5 in 
Minnesota, have invented certain new and Fig. 4, so that the metal upon each side forms 
useful Improvements in Window - Pulleys; 
parallel sides for the sheath. The bend at 5 
and I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
is preferably in a regular curve whose di 
and exact description of the invention, such 
ameter is the width of the sheath, and at each 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
end, as at G 6, is bent up on a similar curve, 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
as shown in Fig. 2. The pulley 7 is also made 
reference being had to the accompanying 
from wrought metal, and is mounted between 
drawings, and to the figures of reference 
the sides of the sheath by means of a steel 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
pin S passing through the sides of the sheath. 
specification. 
and the pulley. It is intended to use with 
This invention relates to improvements in 
this pulley a wire cable as a means of sup 
Window-sash pulleys; and the object of the 
port in the place of the cord commonly used 
invention is to reduce to a minimum the 
to connect the sash with the weight, and 
quantity of metal used in the construction of 
hence the thickness of the pulley is only a 
the pulley and sheath, to avoid the weaken 
trifle greater than the diameter of the wire 
ing of the window-frame by the necessity of 
cable of a size necessary to support the Weight 
Cutting a large mortise for the reception of 
of the Sash, generally not to exceed one 
the sheath, and to secure strength, neatness 
eighth of an inch. The entire thickness of 
of appearance, and cheapness in the article 
the sheath, and hence the width of the mor 
itself and in its attachment to the window 
tise necessary to be cut, need therefore be but 
frame. To this end the pulley and sheath 
a trifle, if any, in excess of one-fourth of an 
are stamped out of wrought metal and the 
inch, while affording sufficient strength for 
sheath pressed into proper shape by means 
the support of heavy windows. The projec 
of suitable dies. The groove of the pulley 
tions 2 2, before mentioned, are described 
may be formed in a lathe. It will be under 
from a center at a distance from the edge of 
stood that in this manner a sheath and pulley 
the blank equal to one-half the distance apart 
may be constructed with great strength with 
of the sides or the thickness of the sheath 
but little weight of metal, consequently 
when bent into proper form, so that the pe 
greatly reducing the size of the necessary 
ripheries of the flanges formed thereby form 
lmortise in the window-frame and the labor of 
opposite arcs of the same circle. The object 
putting in place. 
of this, as well as the regular curvature of the 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
ends or top and bottom of the sheath, will be 
panying drawings, in which 
readily understood, the first to enable a coun 
Figure 1 represents a side view of the sheath 
tersink for the flanges to be formed in the 
with the pulley mounted therein; Fig. 2, a 
frame by the use of an ordinary bit and the 
face view of the same; Fig. 3, a section through 
latter to enable the ends of the mortise to be 
the center of the pulley and the sheath, and 
formed in the same way, and thus form a se 
Fig. 4 the blank from which the sheath is 
cure seat closely fitting the sheath. The ex 
formed. 
tensions 33 are described from the center 
In the drawings, I represents the blank 
upon which the pulley turns and have the 
from which the sheath or casing is formed, 
same or a slightly greater radius than the pull 
having side projections 22 and 33 on oppo 
ley to afford complete protection for the sides 
site sides and at equal distances from the 
of the same without the necessity of making 
middle of the blank. The projections 22 are 
the width of the entire sheath-blank as great 
bent over at right angles to the plane of the 
as the diameter of the pulley. The latter is 
body of the blank to form flanges, as shown 
so mounted that the bottom of its groove is 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, by means of which the 
flush with the face of the sheath. 
In putting up it is only necessary to form 
sheath is secured to the frame by screws 44, 
25 
35 
45 
95 
IOO 
...-: " ":"...'" - "...i. .*-as-a-'aloters::::::::::::::::: "...is 
--stice 
. 
2 
456,461 
ing its extremities bent inwardly to form a 
similar curve, and projections formed upon 
one side of the blank of such form and in 
such position that when bent back to lie in a 
plane at right angles to the body of the sheath 
their peripheries form opposite equal arcs of 
the same circle, substantially as and for the 
purpose herein specified. 
In testimony whereof. I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EWIN ALEXANDER. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN F. MERRILL, 
F. W. IANE. 
the countersink for the flanges with an ordi 
nally bit, bore the ends of the mortise in the 
same manner, and cut out the balance of the 
In Ortise with a saw. The screws, being in 
line with the middle of the sheath, have a 
firm hold in the wood at the sides without 
liability to split the frame or tear out. 
By the use of a wire cable as a suspension 
device the deep grooving of the sash, as when 
a cord is employed, is avoided. 
I claim as my invention 
A sash-pulley sheath formed from a single 
piece of wrought metal bent in a regular 
curve at its middle, so as to form two par 
allel sides at a short distance apart, and hav 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456561.txt	(No Model.) 
F. D., GLOWER, 
CAR, WENTILATING WINDOW. 
No. 456,561, 
Patented July 28, 1891. 
Fig. 7. 
  
 
2-2 
 
E. 
 
 
H 
a C 
Fl 
Af 
 
P 
 
e 
22 
6-Q 
% 
Nazi N3 ty 
% 
N 
NSS, 
2 
3.7z 3 % 
2 7.7%% % 3 (i. 
22 
  
  
 
 
 
  
SS 
S 
3. 
3. A 
di?possgs 
esca. 
live star 
Afree/Z. Geover. 
Aftis PETERs ca. Photo-urtho, washingtoN, o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRED. D. GLOVER, OF CAMPBELL, MINNESOTA. 
CARVENT LATING WINDOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,561, dated July 28, 1891. 
Application filed January 29, 1891. Serial No. 379,541 (No model.) 
- 
- 
See out. 
To all, uhon, it pay concern. 
Be it known that I, FRED. D. GLOVER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Camp 
bell, in the county of Wilkin and State of 
Minnesota, have invented a new and useful 
Car-Ventilating Window, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to railway-cars, and 
more especially to the windows thereof, the 
object of the same being to provide an im 
proved window which will effect the ventila 
tion of the car, but permit the passengers to 
To this end the invention consists of a ven 
tilator - window constructed as hereinafter 
more fully described and claimed, and as 
illustrated on the sheet of drawings, where 
m 
Figure I is an inner side view of this im 
proved window in position in the side of a 
car. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section through 
the side of a car, showing the ordinary win 
dow, the ventilator-window, and the wooden 
blind in section. Fig. 3 is a considerably en 
larged vertical section of the ventilator-win 
dow removed from the side of the car. Fig. 
4 is a perspective view of one corner of the 
improved ventilator - window, showing the 
manner in which the side bars, thereof are 
connected. Fig. 5 is a perspective detail of 
this improved window on a reduced scale. 
Referring to the said drawings, the letter 
C designates the side of a passenger-car, W 
the ordinary window therein, and B the or 
dinary wooden blind therein, all as usually 
constructed and as well known in the art. 
Between the window and the blind the win 
dow-frame Q, is provided at its sides with 
two vertical strips V, which are secured to 
the frame by any well-known means not illus 
trated, while outside the window and blind 
are the usual beads W. Between the strip 
thus formed is located my improved Window, 
which can obviously be raised and lowered 
therein. 
This ventilator-window is constructed as 
follows: F is a rectangular frame-work com 
prising horizontal bars F and vertical bars 
F, connected at their corners in any suitable 
35 
45 
 
manner, preferably as shown, and A' A' are 
strips secured upon both faces of the hori 
Zontal members F of this frame and flush 
with the inner edges thereof. G. G. are glass 
slats arranged horizontally and in parallel 
planes, with their edges slightly lapping and 
spaced about one-quarter of an inch, and 
these slats are of exactly the same length as 
the distance between the inner faces of the 
vertical members of the frame. Blocks K 
are arranged between these slats at their 
ends, and the ends of the blocks are beveled 
off so as to stand flush with the faces of the 
vertical members of the frame above men 
tioned. Strips A A are then secured upon 
the faces of the vertical members F and 
overlap their inner edges slightly, whereby 
the blocks and the ends of the slats G are 
held in place, these strips finishing the frame 
and making its vertical members of the same 
apparent size as its horizontal members. 
In operation this improved ventilator-win 
dow is placed between the vertical strips V, 
in which it has a vertical movement, as de 
sired. Referring to Fig. 2 it will be seen that 
if the window W and blind B are open the 
car will be ventilated by the gentle outward 
flow of air between the glass stats G. At 
the same time the sight of the passenger will 
be uninterrupted and no sparks can enter the 
Although I have shown and described this 
improved ventilator-window as located be 
tween the ordinary window and the blind, it 
will be understood that it may be used at 
any convenient point, and that either or both 
said ordinary window and blind may be omit 
ted without departing from the spirit of my 
invention. 
What is claimed as new is 
The herein - described car - ventilator Win 
dow, the same comprising a rectangular 
frame, horizontal glass slats between the in 
mer edges of the vertical members of said 
frame and standing in parallel planes with 
their edges lapping and out of contact with 
each other, blocks between said slats at their 
ends and against said inner edges, the ends 
of the blocks being beveled off flush with the 
Cal. 
- 
85 
90 
75 
95 
456,561. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
faces of said vertical members, strips on the 
faces of the horizontal members of the frame my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
flush with their edges, and strips on the faces presence of two witnesses. 
of the vertical members extending inwardly 
is over said blocks and the ends of the slats and 
their outer faces flush with said other strips, 
Substantially as Set forth. 
M. H. GIDDINGS, 
CHAS. H. GATES. 
m 
Witnesses: 
FRED. D. GLOVER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456661.txt	(No Model.) 
C. J. W. S.HEARER. 
STEAM PIPE COWERING, 
No. 456,66l, 
Patented July 28, 1891, 
El E - - - - 
3v-uo vitov 
33. -3-ua elitovicy 
GS- 
GS, Sre-esta, 
the torrs heters co., Phororithd., WAS-tier D. s. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES J. W. S.HEARER, OF CARTERSBURG, INDIANA. 
4- 
STEAM - PIPE Cove RING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,661, dated July 28, 1891. 
Application filed February 16, 1891, Serial No. 381,616, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it nually concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES.J. W. S.HEARER, 
of Cartersburg, county of Hendricks and State 
of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Steam-Pipe Cover 
ings; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description there 
of, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which like letters refer to like 
parts. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
jackets or coverings for steam-pipes and will 
be understood from the following description. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a section of my device, the outer can 
was covering being removed, showing the ar 
rangement of the successive layers with re 
spect to each other. Fig. 2 is a cross-section 
of my device, showing also the outer cover 
ing and the ties ready to be clasped about the 
pipe. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a part 
of one of the completed Sections, showing the 
outside covering and the ends sealed. 
In detail my device consists of a plain layer 
1, upon which is superimposed a fluted or cor 
rugated layer2. This is succeeded by another 
plain layer I, and then again by a fluted layer 
2, and so on throughout the entire series tan 
til the roll is of the proper size. The plain 
layers and the fluted layers may be cemented 
together in the first instance or may be rolled 
up separately and them cemented, whichever 
is the most convenient, it being understood 
that each layer throughout the entire series 
is made of asbestus or other non-combustible 
material, and one layer alternates with the 
other, so that longitudinal air-channels will 
be formed the entire length, and when the 
ends are closed by the pieces 4, which are also 
asbestus or similar material, these channels 
become dead-air spaces and prevent the ac 
cumulation or radiation of heat. After the 
material has been rolled up SO as to form a 
continuous cylindrical pipe it is sawed or cut 
through half-way and the edges separated, as 
shown at 6 in Fig. 2, so as to allow its being 
clasped about a pipe without disconnecting 
the latter, and the edges of this cut are cov 
ered over with asbestus, and then ties 5, com 
posed of metal, are placed about the roll at 
Suitable distances along the entire section, 
and over these wires on the outside is placed 
an additional cover of canvas 3, and the ends 
are sealed or covered with asbestus 4, as 
shown in Fig. 3. When, therefore, a stop is 
made, the section of covering is completely 
closed at the ends, and no further treatment 
is required. When it has been placed upon 
the pipe, the ties are drawn together and 
twisted, so as to close up the opening 6, and 
the end of the canvas cover 3 is then pasted 
Ol' cemented down over the ties and over the 
joint, completely closing and protecting the 
Sale, 
I am aware that pipe coverings or jackets 
made of layers of paper or some other non 
conducting material having perforations or 
short grooves have been heretofore used, and 
I do not claim the same as my invention; but 
I am not aware that any pipe-covering made 
of material which is at once non-combustible 
and non-conducting and of alternating plain 
and fluted layers, whereby longitudinal air 
spaces are formed throughout the entire 
length of the section, the section also sealed 
at the ends and covered on the outside, has 
ever been known or used. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is the following: 
A detachable pipe - covering section com 
posed of alternate layers of corrugated and 
plain non-combustible material, wherebylon 
gitudinal air-spaces are formed throughout 
the entire length of the section, the ends 
closed by asbestus or similar material and 
having a canvas cover, with means, such as 
wires, beneath such cover for closing the joint 
when the section has been placed upon the 
pipe, all combined substantially as shown and 
described. . 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 13th day of February, 1891. 
CIARES J. W. S.HEARER, 
Witnesses; 
C. P. JACOBS, 
E. B. GRIFFITH. 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456761.txt	(No Model.) 
ROTARY CYLINDER AND CUTTING KNIFE FOR PLANING MACHINEs. 
Patented July 28, 1891. 
No. 456,761, 
S. ERB. 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL ERB, OF MESABA, MINNESOTA. 
ROTARY CYLNDER AND CUTTING-KNIFE FOR PLANNG-MACH NES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,761, dated July 28, 1891. 
Application filed March 4, 1890, Serial No, 342,620, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL ERB, of Me 
Saba, in the county of St. Louis and State of 
Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Rotary Cylinders 
and Cutting-Knives for Planing-Machines; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
and to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a cylinder and cutting-knives for planing-ma 
chines, which will do their work easier and 
better than those heretofore employed, with 
little or no danger of breaking the knives, 
and which will not knock out the knots nor 
tear the lumber when cross-grained, and, fur 
ther, will readily clear themselves while in 
operation. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a cylinder and knives 
Secured thereon. Fig. 2 is a similar view of 
one of the knives. Fig. 3 is a sectional view 
taken transversely through the cylinder and 
knives. Fig. 4 is a cross-section showing a 
modification. 
Similar letters of reference indicate the 
Same parts in all the figures. 
The cylinder proper A is, in the preferred 
construction, formed integral with the shaft 
B, the latter, in effect, constituting gudgeons, 
which form the journals and carry the drive 
pulleys, through which motion is imparted to 
the cylinder. On each of the four sides of 
the cylinder, when the same is square or sub 
stantially so, is formed a concavity, semicylin 
drical in cross-section and extending from one 
end of the cylinder to the other. These con 
cavities are preferably located to one side 
of the center of each face, thereby leaving a 
relatively thick section C, which serves as a 
brace for the knives, as will be now ex 
plained. 
The knives D are given a curvature in 
cross-section, corresponding to the curvature 
of the concavities in the cylinder, and are 
adapted to be fitted in said concavities with 
their cutting-edges at the corners of the cyl 
inders. Thus the cutting ends of each knife 
have a strong backing formed by the solid sec 
tions a of the cylinder. At the bottom of each 
of the concavities dovetailed recesses are 
formed in the cylinder, into which are fit 
ted the correspondingly-shaped heads of the 
bolts E, which pass through slots or aper 
tures d therein, and have washers e and 
nuts E' applied thereto to retain the knives 
rigidly ill place, but at the same time per 
mitting them to be readily adjusted so as to 
compensate for wear on the cutting-edge, 
such adjustment being effected by simply 
loosening the nuts and moving the knives 
forward, as will be readily understood. With 
this construction of semi-cylindrical knives 
and cylinder it will be noted that the knives 
are supported clear up to the cutting-edges 
by the solid metal of the cylinder. The 
nuts and bolt ends are entirely below the 
surface of the same, and ample room is given 
for the clearance of chips, &c. 
Where the cylinder is of small size and a 
sufficient thickness of metal would not be 
left between the shaft (when the latter passes 
through the cylinder) and bottom of the con 
cavities for the dovetailed recesses or bolt 
holes, the curvature of the knives and con 
cavities into which they fit may be made 
sharper and the bolts passed into one side of 
the shaft, as indicated in Fig. 4. 
In operation the action of knives con 
structed as herein described will be found 
much more satisfactory than those ordinarily 
used, there being no danger of chips or splin 
ters forcing their way between the knives 
and cylinder, as all the chips and splinters 
which are removed remain in front of the 
knives instead of in a space formed in the 
angle between the cutting-edge and cylinder; 
but to further insure against any accident of 
this nature the extreme edges of the cylin 
ders immediately back of the cutting-edges 
are beveled away, as at f, thereby keeping 
the edge of the cylinder below the level if the 
knife and any splinters passed by the cut 
ting-edge be deflected and prevented from 
forcing their way between the cutter and cyl 
inder. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
456,761 
A cutter-cylinder for planers, having the 
plane faces arranged at an angle to each other, 
forming cornel's, with the semi-cylindrical 
concavities, in each of said faces, at one side 
5 and extending from end to end of the cylin 
der, and the semi-cylindrical knives secured 
in said concavities, with the cutting-edges at 
the corners, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit- lo 
heSSOS. 
SAMUEL ERB. 
Witnesses: 
A. G. MCIKINLEY, 
D. J. KINNEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456861.txt	(No Model.) 
H. SPOOR. 
SANDPAPERING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 456,861, 
Patented July 28, 1891, 
 
zz 1. 
7, 22. Z. 
. 
  
 
 
 
(a) It 
ill 
 
WITNESSES: 
%2-vee 
t6. essive, 
'' 
INVENTOR: 
$7($4eer 
4am. e 
AITORNEYs. 
the Norris perers ca, PHOTo-LITHo, wastNGTON, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
H. SPOOR. 
SANDPAPERING MACHINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 456,861, 
Patented July 28, 1891, 
44. 
124 
P 
2 
- 
s 
2WS 
t 
  
e asS& 
SU(2) 
S62 
Gas-S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
26.asea, 
6&carters 
\ 
O------O 
O z2 O 
- OE) 
- g 
 
5. 
P 
INVENTOR: 
7%. 
BY -kwe 
ATIORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
SANDPAPERING MACHINE, 
No. 456,861, 
- 
Patented July 28, 1891, 
 
C PS 
HIH III 
WITNESSES: 
f/WEWTOR: 
ATTORNEYS. 
ERs co. Photo-Ho, wash;Netc., b. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 456,861, 
H. SPOOR. 
SANDPAPERING MACHINE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented July 28, 1891. 
 
 
must Ss is 
NS2&N 
- 
A 
 
NNNNN 
N 
In 
2. Sir T 
(25. 
S 
S. 
N 
N N 
2N 
it's 
N 
 
 
. 
 
  
 
 
is 
BE 
": . 
i: ... 
 
 
: 
 
- . 
- 
SSY 
H 
Sl 
3S2% 
2 % E; R N 
w 
3. is 
W initial 
| 
I 
EN NSNNNNNNNN 
s 
a 
as 
- 
BY 
INVENTOR: 
7/8/oar 
e 
L. 
ATTORNEYS." 
WITNESSES: 
2%ase26 
-68 serve (d 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 456,861, 
H, SPOOR. 
SANDPAPERING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented July 28, 1891. 
 
 
 
- at - 
 
 
25& 
B 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
25%- 
2 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
N22 S 
as? - 
-26 
 
N N 
25 
s 
NS 
Rar 
 
 
 
 
IS 
ZZ Estrees 
2 s 
40 
f 
y 
By 
INVENTOR: 
Munw 
ATTORNEWS. 
a. 
2 
ar 
3. 
l-6 
S 
S 
S 
s 
sts 
s 
e s s 
s 
rhetoRRIS PErERS co., PipTo-Limha, washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HERBERT SPOOR, OF BERLIN, WISCONSIN. 
SAND PAPERING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,861, dated July 28, 1891. 
Application filed August 30, 1889, Serial No. 322,467. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, HERBERTSPOOR, of Ber 
lin, in the county of Green Lake and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented a new and Im 
proved Sandpapering-Machine, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to sandpapering-ma 
chines of the class wherein the sand-paper is 
Secured about the peripheral face of a hori 
Zontal cylinder, the material to be operated 
upon being fed over said cylinder by means 
of feeding-rollers, the main objects of the in 
Vention being to provide for the uniform ad 
justment of the cylinder and of the feeding 
rollers and to impart a reciprocating motion 
to the cylinder as it is rotated. 
To the ends above named the invention con 
sists of certain novel constructions, arrange 
ments, and combinations of elements, to be 
hereinafter fully described, and specifically 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
WeWS. 
Figure I is a side view of my in proved sand 
papering-machine, the cylinder-driving shaft 
being shown in section. Fig. 2 is a view of 
the opposite side of the machine. Fig. 3 is a 
plan View of the machine, some of the shafts 
being broken away. Fig. 4 is a cross-sectional 
elevation on line 44 of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a de 
tail view illustrating the construction of one 
of the yokes which support the cylinder-shaft 
bearings. Fig. 6 is a detail perspective view 
of the upper feeding-roll. Fig. 7 is a central 
longitudinal sectional view of the sandpaper 
ing-cylinder. Fig. S is a sectional detail view 
illustrating the feed-roll-adjusting devices, 
and Fig. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the 
Sand-paper-carrying cylinder. 
In the drawings, 10 represents the main 
frame of the machine, to the sides of which 
frame there are bolted steps 11, in which the 
lower ends of the shanks 12 of yokes 13 bear. 
These yokes 13 each carry a tubular bearing 
14, the bearings being held to place by set 
Screws 15, and through the bearings 14 there 
is passed the shaft 16 of a sand-paper drum 
20. The yoke-shanks are guided by brackets 
17, and between the brackets the shanks are 
threaded, as shown at 18. Upon the threaded 
sections 18 I mount nuts 19, that are formed 
with worm-gears 21, the said worm-gears be 
ing engaged by Worms 22, that are carried by 
a transverse shaft 23, such shaft being pro 
vided with a crank arm or handle 24, the ar 
rangement being such that by turning the 
shaft 23 the drum 20 may be raised or lowered. 
In order that a reciprocating motion may 
be imparted to the drum, I mount a horizontal 
shaft 25 in bearings 26, that extend outward 
from the sides of the frame 10, the central 
portion a of this shaft 25 being eccentric. 
Upon the eccentric section I mount an eccen 
tric-strap 27 and the end of the strap I pivot 
ally connect to a sleeve 28, that is held between 
collars 29 and 29, that are rigidly connected 
to the shaft 16, the eccentric-stem 30 being 
formed with a right and left hand thread, as 
shown in Fig. 4, to engage correspondingly 
threaded sockets carried by the eccentric 
strap .27 and by the coupling-piece 31, by 
means of which the stem is connected to the 
sleeve 28. This arrangement provides for the 
lengthening or shortening of the eccentric 
stem, so as to vary the position of the drum 
20, as will be understood. The shaft 16 car 
ries a pulley 32, over which a driving-belt is 
passed, in order that a rotary motion may be 
imparted to the shaft, the eccentric-shaft 25 
being provided with a bevel-gear 33, that is 
engaged by a corresponding gear 34, carried 
by a transverse shaft 35, which said shaft 
also carries a driving-pulley 36, that is en 
gaged by a driving-belt. The upper portion 
of the frame 10 is recessed to receive bear 
ing-boxes 37, in which there are mounted the 
shafts 38 of feeding-rollers 39, the boxes 37 
being engaged by adjusting-screws 40, formed 
with right and left hand threaded sections, 
such screws engaging the frame, and also 
threaded apertures that are formed in the 
boxes and being held to place by lock-nuts 41, 
the arrangement being such that the boxes 
and with them the rollers may be adjusted 
to the required position and there locked to 
place. 
Above the frame 10 the upper feeding-roll 
ers (which will be presently described) are 
carried by an auxiliary frame 50, which is 
adjustably mounted above the main frame 
10, such auxiliary frame being supported by 
3o 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
75 
95 
do 
2 
456,861 
sleeves that are engaged by stems 83, Said 
stems being connected to a clamping-strip 84. 
The internally-threaded sleeves (which are 
shown at e in Fig. 7) are each provided with 
bevel-pinions 85, that are engaged by corre 
sponding pinions 86, carried by a shaft 87, 
said shaftbeing journaled in bearings formed 
in the heads 81 and being squared or irregul 
larly formed at one end, as shown at c, to fit 
the socket of a key. 
In applying the sand-paper such paper is 
passed about the peripheral face of the drum 
and the edges are brought within the over 
hanging flanged of the clamping-strip 84, af 
ter which a rod or strip 88 is passed in, so as 
to press the sand-paper against a cushion 89, 
that is carried by the strip 84. The parts 
having been adjusted as above described and 
as represented in the drawings, a movement 
of the shaft 87 in a-direction proper to draw 
the clamping-strip inward will act to bind the 
sand-paper firmly to the drum. 
From the construction above described it 
will be seen that any required adjustment of 
the several parts of the sandpapering-ma 
chine may be obtained, and that in operation 
the material will be fed regularly forward, 
the cylinder 20 will be revolved, and, as it is 
so revolved will also be reciprocated. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to Secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a sandpapering-machine, the combi 
nation, with the sand-paper-carrying drum, 
of bearings in which the drum-shaft rides, 
yokes by which the bearings are supported, 
the stems of said yokes being formed with 
threaded sections, sleeves which engage said 
threaded sections, gears carried by the sleeves, 
and a shaft formed with worms which engage 
said gears, substantially as described. 
2. In a sand-paper-carrying drum, the com 
bination, with a clamping-Strip, of a rod and a 
means for adjusting the strip, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a sand-paper-carrying drum, the com 
bination, with the drum-body, of a clamping 
strip, threaded stems carried thereby, threaded 
sleeves which said stems engage, pinions car 
ried by the sleeves, a transverse shaft, and 
pinions carried thereby, the shaft-pinions be 
ing arranged to engage the stem-pinions, sub 
stantially as described. 
HERBERT SPOOR. 
Witnesses: 
J. P. LUTHER, 
E. B. TULLCOTT. 
70 
75 
9o 
95 
ICO 
IC5 
IIC) 
adjusting-screws 42, each of which screws 
carries a bevel-gear 43, which said bevel-gears 
are engaged by corresponding gears 44, that 
are carried by horizontal shafts 45, mounted 
in bearings above the frame 50, and one of 
these shafts is provided with a crank arm or 
handle 46, the arrangement being such that 
by turning the crank-arm a rotary motion 
Will be imparted to each of the adjusting 
ScreWS 42 and the frame 50 will be raised or 
lowered in accordance with the direction of 
rotation. The frame 50 is recessed to receive 
boxes 47, and these boxes serve as bearings 
for shafts 48, which carry the upper feeding 
rolls 51, the boxes being adjusted by means 
of adjusting-screws 52, that are provided with 
lock-nuts 53, as in the case of the screws 40. 
In order that the feeding-rollers may be 
turned to feed the material forward, I pro 
vide the shaft 35 with a gear 56, which gear 
engages a gear 57 carried by a shaft 58, a 
second gear 57* being arranged at the oppo 
site end of the shaft. The gear 57 engages 
a gear 58, that is carried by the shaft of the 
adjacent feeding-roller 39, and the gear 58 
in turn engages an idler 59, which idler en 
gages a gear 58, that is carried by the shaft 
of the remote lower feeding-roller 39. In this 
Way motion is imparted to the two lower feed 
ing-rollers, the upper feeding-rollers being 
driven by the train of gearing shown in Fig. 
2, wherein the gear 57 is represented as en 
gaging an idler 60, which engages a gear 61, 
carried by the shaft of the adjacent upper 
feeding-roller 51, the gear 61 in turn engag 
ing an idler 62 and the idler 62 engaging a 
gear 61, that is carried by the other upper 
feeding-roller. 
Just above the cylinder 20I mount a press 
ure-roller 70, the shaft of said roller being 
journaled in boxes 71, that are provided with 
upwardly-extending threaded stems 72, such 
stems projecting through apertures that are 
formed in the upper walls of the frame 50, 
there to be engaged by toothed nuts 73, which 
said nuts are in turn engaged by pinions 74, 
carried by a tranverse shaft 75, which is pro 
vided with a crank-arm 76, the arrangement 
being such that the boxes and with them the 
pressure-roller may be raised or lowered. 
The sand-paper cylinder 20 embodies a me 
tallic sheet 80, that is bent to cylindrical form 
and supported by heads 81, rigidly connected 
to the shaft 16, this sheet forming the pe. 
ripheral face of the drum. The edges of the 
sheet 80 are bent inward and secured to lugs 
82, carried by the heads 81. These lugs 82 
serve as bearings for internally-threaded 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US456961.txt	(No Model.) 
J. N. MARS O. 
RAILROAD SWITCH, 
No. 456,961, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1891. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN N. MARSO, OF JOLIET, ILLINOIS. 
RAILROAD-SWITCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 456,961, dated August 4, 1891. 
Application filed March 26, 1891, 
Serial No. 386,466, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN N. MARSO, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Joliet, in the county of Will and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Railroad-Switches, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
ings, and the letters of reference thereon, 
forming a part of this specification, in which 
Figures 1 and 2 are plan views of a rail 
road-switch having the mechanism for mov 
ing the switch-rail applied. Fig. 3 is a plan 
view of the mechanism for moving the switch 
rail as it would appear detached from the 
rails. Figs. 4 and 5 are plan views of the 
mechanism designed to be attached to the un 
der side of a locomotive or car for engaging 
the switch mechanism. Fig. 6 is a side view 
of a section of one of the rails and of the 
mechanism shown in Figs. 4 and 5 and a side 
view of one of the cranks and its connecting 
rod, and Fig. 7 is a side view of the locking 
mechanism for locking the slide-rails. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in railroad-switches, and is of that 
class in which the switch is moved by an ap 
proaching train in case it should chance not 
to be set right for the track of the approach 
ing train. 
Referring to the drawings, R. R. represent 
the two slide rails of the switch, being a por 
tion of the main track, and R represent the 
various tracks to which the switch-rails may 
be set. 
B, D, and F are circular plates pivoted to 
ties or other suitable foundation between the 
rails forming the main track. These plates 
turn on a central pivot, and the plates D and 
F are connected by means of a pair of par 
allel rods 
, and the plates B and D are 
connected by means of the tWO cross-rods C. c. 
The pivot connections of said rods with said 
plates are such that said plates may be rotated 
the required distance to move the switch-rails 
in either direction to make the switch. The 
central plate D is located between the free 
ends of the slide or switch rails R. R. and is 
connected therewith by means of the connect 
ing-rod c, and the free ends of said rails are 
connected by means of a cross-bar r" for hold 
ing them the required distance apart and so 
that said plate and connecting-rod may move 
said rails together. 
The plates B and F are each provided with 
an upwardly-extending pin or stud P, ar 
ranged at right angles with the point of pivot 
of the rods a, and v with said plates, and the 
rods a C are crossed, so that the plates B and 
F may be caused to rotate in opposite direc 
tions, so that their pins P will be moved later 
ally in the same direction. 
J in Figs. 4 and 5 represent guide-bars that 
are intended to be attached to the under side 
of a locomotive or car by means of suspend 
ers Z. These bars are jointed together at 
their center in such manner that they may 
be moved laterally at their center by means 
of a lever that may be attached to the outer 
end of the bar K, which is pivotally con 
nected to said bars at their center. Said 
bar K is arched over the space between said 
bars, so that it will not strike the pins P as it 
passes over them. The engine or car to 
which said bars are designed to be attached 
is not necessary to be shown, as it forms no 
part of this invention. When these guide 
bars move along over the track in either di 
rection, they are located near enough to the 
track and in such position that they will 
stride the pins P and gather them in between 
them, so as to cause plates B D F to be ro 
tated and move the switch-railsR to the track 
upon which the train is moving. 
To illustrate better the operation of the 
said bars with said switch mechanism, sup 
pose a train were moving in Fig. 2 on the 
central or main track from the bottom of the 
figure, carrying With it the guide-bars J. 
(shown in Fig. 5) in the direction of the ar 
row, said guide-bars would engage the pin 
P on plate F and turn it and also the other 
plates and move the Switch-rails R and set 
the Switch for the main track, as shown in 
Fig. 1. The Same result would be attained 
if the train were approaching from the oppo 
site direction and engaged pin P on plate B. 
In case the train was approaching from above 
on the main track and it was desired to switch 
off on one of the side tracks in either direc 
tion, the engineer would, by means of a lever 
connected with bar K, move the central part 
of guide-bars J laterally in either direction, 
so that when they engaged pin P they would 
| 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
70 
75 
95 
CO 
456,961 
O 
move it, so as to turn the plates lis, D, and IF 
and set the switch-rails for the proper side 
track-for instance, as shown in Fig. 2-so 
that the switch is set by means of the pass 
ing train through the medium of the guide 
bars J and pins P engaging each other and 
for such track as the engineer may desire, 
simply by his moving the guide-bars later 
ally, so as to move said pins laterally to move 
the switch-rails to the position controlled by 
said guide-bars. 
If desired, auxiliary rotatable plates Band 
Fmay belocated between the siding or switch 
tracks, as shown in Fig. 3, as it might be that 
the guide-bars could not always reach the 
pins on the plates between the rails of the 
main track. 
When the switch-rails R. R. are set for any 
track, they must be held so that they cannot 
move laterally and derail the train. This is ac 
complished by means of the spring-bolt S, se 
cured to a bed-plate under the switch-rails and 
in such manner that its forward end may enter 
one of a series of holes in the connecting-bar 
r, as shown in Figs. I and 7. The resiliency 
of the spring holds the said bolt forward in its 
proper position. When a train approaches 
and it is necessary to move the Switch-rails, 
said bolt must be driven back free from said 
bar r. This is done by means of the car com 
ing in contact with the upwardly-extending 
end of the lever For lever E, located one re 
spectively at the plates Band F, so that it will 
beengaged simultaneously with said pin P, and 
35 
45 
through its connection with bolt S by means 
of rods o and o' and lever Libe withdrawn long 
enough so that said switch-rails can be moved, 
and then move forward again and enter a 
hole in bar r after lever F' or E is released 
and hold the switch set for the rails controlled 
by said guide-bars. The levers F and E are 
so constructed that they will only engage the 
rod O when it is desired to withdraw the bolt 
S, and will permit a train to engage it and 
not disturb said bolt when the train ap 
proaches it from the switch. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is as follows, to wit: 
1. In the railroad-switch shown and de 
scribed, the combination of the jointed guide 
bars J, bar K for connecting said bars at 
their joint, plates B and F, having the pins P, 
plate D, cross-rods for connecting plates B 
and D, and parallel rods W for connecting 
plates D and F, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. In the railroad-switch shown and de 
scribed, the combination of the guide-bars J, 
having a joint at their center, the bar K for 
connecting and moving said guide-bars at 
their jointed centers, and the suspenders Z. 
for supporting said guide-bars, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
JOHN N. MARSO. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. H. HuTCHINS, 
KATIE C. HUTCHINS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457061.txt	(No Model.) 
E., TIFF ANY., 
SUPPORTING SPRING, &c., FOR STRAIGHT KNITTING MACHINEs. 
Patented Aug. 4, 1891. 
No. 457,061. 
. 
----------------- 
2S 
r 
A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
St"yzese 
7TL II Eta 2A/NY, 
O 
27azzAziz 
&z- 
(764, a Lillor NEY. 
Y 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELITIFF ANY, OF BENNINGTON, WERMONT. 
SUPPORTING - SPRING, &c., FoR stral GHT-KNITTING MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,061, dated August 4, 1891, 
Application filed April 3, 1890, Serial No. 346,384 (No model.) 
55 
IO 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ELITIFF ANY, of the 
town of Bennington, in the county of Ben 
nington and State of Vermont, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Sup 
porting - Springs, &c., for Straight-Knitting 
Machines; and I hereby declare that the fol 
lowing description, in connection with the ac 
Companying sheet of drawings, constitutes a 
specification of the same. 
The subject-matter of this patent is an im 
provement on the system of springs and bars 
for supporting sinkers in straight-knitting 
machines shown in my patents, No. 374,280, 
dated December 6, 1887, and No.408,270, dated 
August 6, 1889. 
The drawings fully disclose the invention, 
and in the drawings Figure 1 is a vertical trans 
Verse Section of a portion of a straight-knit 
ting machine, taken through the sinker and 
falling bars. 
Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the 
back sinker-bars, the front-sinker-bar and the 
falling bar having been removed, showing the 
front edges of a number of sinkers and their 
Supporting-Springs. Fig. 3 is a side view of 
a detached Spring. Fig. 4 is a side view of 
one of the sinkers used in existing machines, 
which the improved sinker herein described 
is designed to supersede. 
By referring to the above-named patents it 
Will be seen that the sinkers are of the form 
shown in Fig. 4 and are adapted to slide in 
vertical grooves in the opposed faces of two 
bars at the top end of the sinker, and in Pat 
ent No. 408,270 in another bar placed in rear 
of the sinkers near their lower ends. In those 
patents when the sinkers are lifted by the 
falling bar they are supported, after the fall 
ing bar drops, by the springs attached to a 
bar, which is attached to the upper back 
sinker-bar, and which springs have a lateral 
pressure against the sides of the sinkers in 
their grooves at a point coincident with the 
upper surface of the back sinker-bar. The 
springs bear against the prolongations in on 
the sinkers which run in the grooves of the 
back sinker-bar, as seen in dotted lines in 
Fig. 1. Experience has demonstrated that 
the blow imparted by the slur-cock J to the 
5o top of the sinker as it passes over it back and 
I forth has the effect of starting and continuing 
a fracture in the main plate of the sinker, as 
shown at fin Fig. 4, so that after a limited 
service the top m breaks off at that point and 
the provision for the spring to bear against 
is lost, besides leaving the sinker free to drop 
down and produce damage either to the ma 
chine or the fabric. It will also be seen by 
reference to said patents that the sinker-sup 
porting Springs are all rigidly and inseparably 
attached to a transverse bar, which construc 
tion is objectionable for various reasons. One 
is that if one of these springs gets broken or 
damaged in any way, so as to require repair 
or replacement, the machine must lie idlewhile 
the spring-bar is detached from the machine 
and the defective or broken spring is repaired 
or removed. This operation is attended with 
great loss of time and expense, resulting 
from the fact that the springs in such ma 
chines are not readily and separately detach 
able without removing the bar from the ma 
chine. In the present invention these difficul 
ties are overcome by changing the position of 
the spring-bar and employing independently 
detachable and insertible supporting-springs. 
To remedy these evils I have changed the 
form of the sinker by cutting off the two pro 
longations at the top of the sinker on the line 
12, Fig. 4, thus leaving a square top, as seen 
in full lines in Fig.1. This change permits 
the use of broader re-enforcing cheeks rand 
a much thicker slur-cock, as is evident by 
comparing the one shown in Fig. 1 with that 
seen in Fig. 4. When the sinkers of this form 
are in position, their edges nearest the slur 
cock when in action are always supported by 
the walls of the grooves in which they play. 
Thus breakage from the before-mentioned 
causes is impossible. To support the sinkers 
when elevated, I employ a spring B, similar 
in shape to those shown in the patents cited; 
but I have changed its position so as to utilize 
much of its length and thus secure a larger 
surface of contact where it impinges against 
the sinker. For this purpose I have located 
the spring below the upper rear sinker-bar 
and in rear of the falling bar. As a provision 
for holding these springs the back-Supporting 
bar D is transversely grooved across that part 
45 
3o 
35 
75 
90 
95 
Od 
457,061 
5 p. 
IO 
of its surface which formis a joint with the between fixed abutments on some part of the 
machine, and the edges of the sinkers; but all 
under side of the back sinker-bar G, as seen 
such devices lacked means of Self-support 
at g g of Fig. 2. These grooves fall between 
when the sinker was broken or removed. 
those in which the sinkers play, as seen at p 
The spring here shown is distinguished from 
The upper part of the bar D is rabbeted 
all such in possessing an attaching-shank, 
a Way on its face a little deeper than the depth 
whereby it is independently held. 
of the grooves pip, so that the back edges of 
I therefore claim as my invention and de 
the sinkers shall not strike the front of bar 
sire to secure by Letters Patent 
D. This rabbet forms a recess for the tongue 
1. In combination with the sinkers of a 
t of the spring B. The springs are fixed in 
straight-knitting machine and a bar in real' 
position by pressing their shanks S S S into 
of the sinkers, a series of independently-de 
the grooves g g g of bar D, in which they are 
tachable sinker-supporting springs, each hav 
held by frictional contact, and are so con 
ing a spring-tongue adapted to bear against 
structed that when inserted their tongues are 
the sinker, and an attaching-shank adapted 
bent around to one side, as seen at the left of 
to be inserted in a slot or seat provided there 
Fig. 2. The bar D is held in position by the 
for in said bar in rear of the sinkers and to 
bolts K, Fig. 1. The springs are not held so 
be held therein by frictional contact, Sub 
tightly but that they may be drawn from the 
stantially in the manner described, and for 
grooves g g with pliers, so that no difficulty 
the purposes set forth. 
is experienced in making changes or repairs. 
2. The combination, with the sinkers of a 
The front edges of the sinkers playingrooves 
straight-knitting machine, of two parallel 
provided in the front sinker-bar E, a con 
transversely-grooved bars which form the 
struction well understood, and the falling bar 
back guides for the sinkers, and a series of 
F plays between the shoulders and h in the 
independently-detachable sinker-supporting 
gap in the front edges of the sinkers in the 
springs interposed between said bars, each 
usual manner. The lateral pressure imparted 
having a spring blade or tongue, Substan 
by this style of spring against the side of the 
tially in the manner described, and for the 
sinker effects frictional contact between the 
Opposite side of the sinker and the wall of 
purposes set forth. 
3. The described individual supporting 
the grooves in which it plays in both upper 
spring B, having a spring-tongue t and an 
and lower grooves and has the effect of dis 
attaching-shank s, in combination. With a 
tributing the frictional support throughout 
spring-supporting bar having a slot or socket 
the entire length of that part of the sinker 
for the reception of said spring-shank and 
which runs in the grooves. Less cramp on 
in which said shank is held by frictional 
the sinker in the grooves is occasioned in ac 
contact, after insertion, substantially in the 
tion by this construction than by the old 
manner described, and for the purpose Set 
method, and as a result the sinkers and 
springs both wear longer. 
forth. 
4. The combination, in a straight-knitting 
Another advantage lies in the fact that 
machine, of a series of sinkers, a bar provided 
When the falling bar is removed both sinkers 
with a series of spring-shank Sockets behind 
and springs are accessible for change or re 
said sinkers coinciding with the intervals 
pairs from the front of the machine. The lo 
between the sinkers, and a series of shanked 
cation of the spring between the upper and 
supporting-springs severally capable of inser 
lower Series of sinker-grooves, so as to enable 
tion and detachment from their respective 
its force to be exerted upon the sinker nearly 
sockets, substantially in the manner described, 
midway of its length, is quite advantageous. 
and for the purpose set forth. 
It is apparent that the grooves g g g may 
5. In combination with the sinkers of a 
be cut either in the top of the bar D or in the 
straight-knitting machine, a structure be 
bottom of the sinker-bar G, or the bars D 
hind the sinkers provided with the series of 
and G could be made integral and the shanks 
upper guiding-slots n n n and the lower guid 
of the Springs could be inserted and held in 
ing-slots ppp, and the series of individually 
any kind of suitable sockets provided there 
removable supporting-springs B, having the 
for in the back bar; but all such modifica 
described spring tongues and shanks, at 
tions involve no departure from the essence 
tached and held in position by means sub 
of my invention, and therefore are not spe 
stantially as described and set forth. 
cifically considered here. The dotted posi 
6. The combination of the sinkers A, re 
tions of the bar S, spring R, and prolongation 
enforced on each side by the pieces r r, hav 
m (shown at top of Fig. 1) are simply to 
ing square tops, substantially as shown with 
show the positions of those parts in the old 
the broad-faced slur-cock J, bars E, G, and 
machines, and are here introduced simply to 
D, and the independently-detachable springs 
aid the reader in understanding the nature 
B, arranged to operate substantially in the 
of the improvement. 
manner described and Set forth. 
I am aware that heretofore loose springs 
7. A spring for supporting a sinker in 
for supporting sinkers by frictional contact 
straight-knitting machines, having a spring 
have been independently interposed between 
blade or tongue adapted to bear against the 
sinkers for their mutual support, and also 
s 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
I I5 
I 25 
8 
sinker and provided with an attaching-shank scribed my name, at Bennington, Vermont, 
adapted to be inserted in a stationary slot in this 29th day of March, A. D. 1890. 
some fixed part of the machine and to be 
held therein by frictional contact, said springs 
5 being severally capable of removal and re- 
placement, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereto sub- 
FRANKLIN SCOTT, 
F. M. TIFF ANY. 
ELITIFF ANY. 
457,061 
. 
In presence of - 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457161.txt	(No Model.) 
T. C. KNUDSEN & A. NORHOLM. 
SHIP'S COMPASS, 
4. sheets-sheet i. 
No. 457,161, 
w 
Patented Aug. 4, 1891. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
av 
l 
 
r 
 
 
 
WGTW 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Ea 
Witn erre : 
At preza Zoos 
6.7%4-7oal 
A 60 reeswa 
 
(No Model.) 
T. C. KNUD SEN & A. NORHOLM. 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 457,161, 
SHIP'S COMPASS, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1891. 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
Sir21 
age 
"Witnesses : 
ap- p 
aventors 
A. 4%-4e 4-2- 
A. oritys, 
THE NORRIS PETEAs co, photo-LTHo, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
4. sheets-Sheet 3, 
T. C. KNUD SEN & A. NORHOLM. 
SHIP's COMPASS, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1891. 
22g 3 
No. 457,161, 
 
 
 
 
 
; 
: 
se 
sys 
SISYSIS 
SESIS. S. 
sinS 
s 
SS LS 
SRES 
Suissillisons 
S. See-S, S. 
O 
Irt 
thir 
 
2. 
m 
Witnesses: 
2%, 2% Me- 
T. 
4. 
Z. 5. 
s 
to ars 
17, 24-444 
i-6. Zueeze 
sys 
 
(No Model.) 
T, C, KNUD SEN & A. NORHOLM. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 457,16l. 
SHIP'S COMPASS, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1891. 
I'll 
 
". 
43% 
'%tnesses: 
nue to rs 
/ 12%-4-4--- 
36. 
The NORRIs Peters co., Photo-To., WASHINGtor, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODOR CORNELIUS KNUDSEN AND ANTON NRHOLM, OF COPENHAGEN, 
DENMARK, 
SHIPS COMPASS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,161, dated August 4, 1891. 
Application filed April 13, 1889, Serial No. 307,178, (No model.) Patented in England March 9, 1889, No. 4,182; in France May 
l, 1889, No. 183,458; in Italy May 2, 1889, No. 25,047 in Norway July 15, 1889, No. 1,252 in Austria-Hungary Septembe 
l3, 1889, No. 10,572; in Sweden October 31, 1889, No. 2,027, and in Germany December 16, 1889, No. 50,029, 
- 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that we, THEODOR CORNELIUS 
KNUDSEN and ANTON NRHOLM, citizens of 
Denmark, and residents of Copenhagen, Den 
5 mark, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Ships' Compasses, (for which 
We have obtained Letters Patent in the follow 
ing countries: in France, No. 183,458, issued 
May 1, 1889; in Germany, No. 50,029, issued 
Io December 16, 1889; in England, No. 4,182, is 
sued March 9, 1889; in Austria-Hungary, No. 
10,572, issued September 13, 1889; in Italy, No. 
25,047, issued May 2, 1889; in Sweden, No. 
2,027, issued October 31, 1889, and in Norway, 
15 No. 1,252, issued July 15, 1889,) of which the 
followingis a specification. 
It is well known that for the purpose of re 
moving the so-called local attractions on 
the ship's compass, caused by the great quan 
2o tities of iron in vessels, permanent magnets 
of different size and strength have been ar 
ranged adjacent to the compass. The man 
ner in Which these permanent magnets were 
arranged heretofore was connected with nu 
25 merous and quite serious disadvantages, the 
principal one of which was that the compasses 
had to be regulated very frequently, which is 
connected with more or less difficulties and 
requires considerable time, and, furthermore, 
3o the first adjustment of the magnet was quite 
difficult. 
The object of our invention is to provide 
an improved compass in which the semicir 
cular deviation and the heeling error are ob 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical longitudinal sectional view of a 
binnacle provided with our improvements. 
Fig. 2 is an elevation of a standard in the bin 
4o nacle for holding the device used for remov 
ing the semicircular deviation and heeling 
error. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a side view of a compass-casing pro 
vided with our improved devices for moving 
45 the quadrantal deviation. Fig. 4 is a plan 
view of one-half of the same, the compass-- 
casing not being shown. Fig. 5 is a plan view 
of the compass-card. Fig. 6 is a side view of 
the same. 
Fig. 7 is a sectional view of the 
35 Viated or at least decreased 
 
s 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
The tube A is open at the top and closed 
magnet-supporting frame, and Fig. 8 is a side 5o 
view of one of the magnets. 
sponding parts. 
at the bottom and provided with a base B, 55 
which base is secured to the bottom of the . . 
casing ac of the compass, or said base may be 
screwed into the bottom of said compass-cas 
ing. The said tube A is provided with the 
two longitudinal slots C and C, through 6o 
which slots the lugs of two slides D' Don the 
tubular standard pass, said slides being pro 
vided with the binding-screws E E for lock 
ing them at any desired elevation. Said 
screws engage nuts FF in the interior of 65 
the tube A and are adapted to slide up and 
down with the slides. Each slide forms a 
bearing I' or I for one or more bar-magnets 
G' G, which are adjusted centrally on the 
slides and held in place by means of the 70 
binding-screws H'. H in said slides. These 
magnets serve only for removing the semi 
circular deviation. When the slides are 
moved up and down, the magnets at all times 
remain in horizontal position. 
In addition to the above-mentioned slides, 
a third slide D is arranged in the tube and 
can be locked at any desired elevation by 
means of the screw E, passing through a ver 
tical slot in the tube and passed through a 8o 
block F on the outside of the tube. The 
slide D8 serves to hold the vertical magnet G 
in the line of the axis of the tube. A, which 
magnet serves only for removing the heeling 
error. The slide D is provided with a suit- 85 
able bearing or support for the said vertical 
magnet D, which magnet is held in place and 
supported by the binding-screw IH. 
For removing the quadrantial deviation 
caused by the local attractions we arrange a go 
series of soft-iron cylindrical rods ill a circle 
and horizontally around the compass, Some 
of which rods are vertically adjustable. As 
long as the soft-irou rods are in a common 
korizontal plane and also in the plane of the 95 
magnetic needle, the setting power of the nee 
dle is increased, for the reason that said iron 
rods are made of very soft iron and are induced 
75 
457, 61. 
O 
d 
75 
by the earth's magnetisii and also by the 
magnetism of the needle. Magnetic poles are 
thus formed in said iron rods, which coact on 
the rose with the natural magnetic poles of 
the earth, and thus increase the power of the 
rose to set in the direction north-south. It is 
well known that in any soft iron magnetic 
poles are very easily formed by induction. 
Referring to Figs. 3 and 4, A represents a 
compass-casing; B, B, and B, the soft-iron 
rods; C, a vertically-adjustable horizontal 
ring in which the rods B, B, and B rest, 
D are stems which connect the ring C with 
the hub E, said hub surrounding a screw 
spindle F on the under side of the compass 
casing, and in said arms a nut G is mounted 
to turn, so that by turning said nut the ring 
C can be raised or lowered in relation to the 
compass. The two diametrically - opposite 
iron rods B are not to participate in the 
movement of the ring C, and for this reason 
rest in a supporting-plate G, projecting from 
arms H, which are adjustably fixed by means 
of screws I to the under side of the casing, 
said screws passing through the segmental 
slots I in the under side of the compass-cas. 
ing. The rods will only rest in their notches 
in the ring C when said ring is in its high 
'est position. The prongs between the notches 
in the supporting-plate G project for all po 
sitions of said ring C upward between the 
iron bars BBB and are supported by the ring 
C, so that said ring C is compelled to follow 
the plates G when the same are adjusted lat 
erally. For the rods B suitable notches are 
provided in the Supporting-plate G, which 
notches are lower than the bearings for the 
rods B. The rods Brest in notches in the 
ring C, so that when said ring is lowered in 
relation to the supporting-plate G the re 
maining rods can descend with the ring and 
said rods Bremain in the notches in the sup 
porting-plate G. The rods Bare surrounded 
by rings K, secured to rods L', passing through 
suitable apertures in the ring C, which rods 
are surrounded by spiral springs N', the up 
per ends of said springs resting against the 
under side of the arms Hand their lower ends 
against the heads on the lower ends of said 
rods. Said springs serve to draw the rods B 
downward and at all times press them upon 
their bearings or notches. When the ring C 
is brought to its highest position, as shown in 
Fig. 3, all the rods B B B are arranged 
around the compass-casing in a horizontal 
plane, in which plane is also the needle. If the 
ring C is lowered, then the plane described by 
the several rods will not be horizontal, but will 
form a curved surface, the two curves of which 
are diametrically opposite to each other and 
the curvature of which increases proportion 
ately to the distance that thering Cislowered. 
During the time that the ring C is being low 
ered the rods B at all times remain hori 
zontal and radial to the compass. The two 
curves formed by the rods Band B by the 
lowering of the ring C together cause a de 
viation of the compass-needle in the courses 
N E, SE, SW, N W, which deviation in 
creases correspondingly with the increase of 
the curvature of the said curves and with the 
distance that the ring C is lowered, and this 
deviation can be utilized for neutralizing the 
quadrantal deviation produced by the local 
attractions, providing that the semicircular 
deviation has first been neutralized when the 
ship is in the courses N E, SW or NW and 
S E, or vice versa. The ring C cannot only 
be raised and lowered for neutralizing the 
quadrantal deviation, but with the support 
ing-plates. G' the rods B B B can be ad 
justed laterally around the compass. If the 
quadrantal deviation in the ship is plus, the 
rods are so adjusted that the rods B7 are 
transverse to the axis of the vessel. If, on 
the contrary, the quadrantal deviation is 
minus, the binding-screws that hold the arms 
H' are loosened and the arms H and the 
ring Care turned until the rods B7 are par 
allel with the longitudinal axis of the vessel, 
and then the parts are locked in place. If 
masses of iron are arranged unsymmetrically 
in the body of the vessel, a deviation occurs, 
which is known as the constant E.' To 
neutralize this deviation, the slots I are pro 
vided in the arms H to permit of adjusting 
the arms H' and the ring C to the right or 
left, according as the constant E is plus or 
minus. 
Referring to Figs. 9 to 12, the paper disk 
R is fastened to a ring S of very thin angle 
sheet-iron. The ring S is connected with the 
cap T at the center of the rose by the tubes 
V V, the walls of which are made as thin as 
possible. To each tube V' V* a T-shaped de 
pendent bracket W is fastened, the cross 
piece of which is arranged below the rose and 
parallel with the same. Each cross-piece is 
provided with a series of apertures for receiv 
ing the compass-needle /. For the purpose 
of avoiding soldering the compass-needles on 
the cross-pieces, whereby the magnetic prop 
erties of the needles might be interfered with, 
the needles have notches 2, as shown in Fig. 
12, into which notches the edges of the aper 
tures in the cross-pieces W pass. The cross 
pieces W. are made hollow of sheet-iron, as 
shown in Fig. 11, for the purpose of making 
them strong and as light as possible. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with a compass-casing, 
of a ring of iron rods surrounding the same, 
and means for adjusting some of the rods 
vertically, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a ship's-compass 
casing, of a ring of iron rods surrounding the 
same, and Supporting-plates for holding some 
of the rods, Substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a ship's-compass 
casing, of a ring of iron rods surrounding the 
same, means for adjusting some of the rods 
higher than others, and means for turning 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
95 
Ioo 
TIO 
II5 
20 
(25 
457, 161 
- 
- 
3. 
P. 
said rods, and stepped notches on the top 
edges of said supporting-plates, substantially 
as set forth. 
S. In a ship's compass, the combination of 
a tubular standard provided with slots, slides 
provided with lugs engaging said slots, bar 
magnets supported on said slides, set-screWS 
passing through said slides and slots, and nuts 
on the interior of said standard engaged by 
said set-screws. 
9. A rose for a ship's compass, consisting of 
a frame composed of a ring S, diametrical 
tubes V. V., dependent T-shaped brackets W. 
connected with said tubes and provided with 
apertures, notched needles supported in said 
brackets in said apertures, and a disk Sup 
ported on said frame, 
Intestimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
35 
TIEODOR CORN ELIUS KNUDSEN, 
ANTON NCRHOI.M. 
Witnesses: 
O. R. LEVRING, 
WILH. PIEFFER. 
O 
the rods and supporting devices of the same 
around the casing, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with a ship's-compass 
casing, of a ring surrounding the same, iron 
rods on said ling, and means for adjusting the 
ring, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination, with a ship's-compass 
casing, of a ring surrounding the same, iron 
rods on said ring, supporting-plates having 
stepped notches for supporting said iron rods, 
and means for adjusting the ring vertically, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with a ship's-compass 
Casing, of a ring surrounding the same, a hub 
connected by arms with said ring, a screw 
projecting from the bottom of the casing, and 
a nut arranged within a slot of said hub and 
engaged with the thread of the screw, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
7. The combination, with a ship's-compass 
casing, of a screw projecting down from the 
Same, a hub on said screw, a ring supported 
by arms from said hub, iron rods held by said 
ring, a nut mounted in the slot of the hub and 
engaging the screw, arms supporting some of 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457261.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 457,261, 
C. G. DEMING 
SAFETY PIN. 
Patented Aug. 4, 1891, 
Rs co, photo-Lithio., washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES G. DEMING, OF WOODSTOCK, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND 
MESNEASSIGNMENTS, TO THE CONSOLIDATED SAFETY PIN COMPANY, OF 
BLOOMFIELD, NEWJERSEY. 
SAFETY - PIN. 
1SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,261, dated August 4, 1891. 
Application filed April 26, 1890. Serial No. 349,638, (No model.) 
o 
s 
Io of this specification. 
To all whon it may concern 
Be it known that I, CHARLES G. DEMING, of 
Woodstock, in the county of Ulster and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
5 Improvement in Safety-Pins; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full and exact 
description thereof, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the letters 
of reference marked thereon, making a part 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
the construction of safety-pins, and has for 
its object to produce a pin which shall be 
self-fastening when inserted in a fabric and 
I5 will admit of being unfastened by a simple 
outward pull thereon. 
It consists in the novel combination and 
arrangement of the sharpened and unsharp 
ened members and the shield of the safety 
2d pin, substantially as hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in perspective of the improved pin; 
Fig. 2, a side elevation thereof, and Fig. 3 
25 illustrates a modification in its construction. 
My improved pin is preferably made of a 
single piece of wire bent in substantially the 
form of the figure 8, as shown in the draw 
ings, in which 
A represents the bar of the pin; B, its sharp 
ened member or pin proper; C, its spring end; 
D, its head, and E the shield for the point, 
The bar A and pin B are connected at the 
spring end C of the pin, and, by a curvature 
35 in the latter, are made to cross each other 
about midway in their length. The un 
sharpened member or bar A is extended and 
curved at the opposite end to form the 
rounded head D, preferably made, for the 
4o sake of symmetry, to correspond substan 
tially in form with the opposite end C, and 
which terminates in a shield E, adapted to re 
ceive and guard the point of the pin B. This 
shield is formed by bending the wire in cus 
45 tomary manner to form a loop f transverse 
to the length of the pin, and which connects 
two lateral loops g g, the loop f serving to 
stop the pin-point and the side loops to guard 
it; but the open end of loop f of the shield is 
55 
turned to face outwardly away from the op- 5o 
posite portion of the shield and the bar of the 
pin to which it is secured. The outer face i 
of the shield is preferably made to incline in 
ward, so as to approach more or less a direc 
tion parallel with the length of the bar A. 
The curvature of the spring end C of the wire 
will operate, as shown in Fig. 3, to form a 
spring whose tendency, when free and unre 
strained, will be to carry the pin-point auto 
matically toward the open outwardly-facing 6o 
loop of the shield. Its resiliency may be in 
creased and the pin re-enforced by forming a 
coil H in said end, as shown in Figs, 1 and 2. 
It is evident that without departing from 
my invention the head and shield of the pin 
or the shield alone may be formed of sheet 
metal bent or stamped up in proper form in 
dependently of the bar of the pin and at 
tached thereto in manner as well known to 
the art, and which need not herein be more 
particularly described, (see E, Fig. 3) and 
that the spring end C may be variously 
shaped and may be re-enforced, as shown at I 
in Fig. 3; also, that the bar. A may be vari 
ously ornamented and fashioned as taste and 75 
fancy may dictate, the main features of my 
invention consisting in so combining the 
shield with the pin that the open end or loop 
of the shield shall be turned away from the 
bar of the pin, and causing the bar to be 
intersected by the pin, so that the latter shall 
be normally held in the outwardly-facing 
shield, substantially in the manner and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In operation my improved safety-pin con 
structed as described differs from the pins of 
this class heretofore manufactured in that 
in the old forms of pins the stress of the 
spring operates automatically to carry the 
pin-point away from the shield, whereas in 
my pin the Spring operates automatically to 
carry the pin-point toward the shield. 
In the use of this improved safety-pin it is 
automatically fastened in a piece of fabric by 
simply pushing the pin-pointforward therein. 
So soon as the pin-point has taken hold and 
passed through the cloth so as to emerge on 
the same side or face as that which it entered, 
95 
45,26. 
35 
the point, the face of whose outer end is in 
clined or bent inward substantially into par 
allelism with said bar, and its open loop 
turned outward in the same plane as said bar, 
in combination with a spring-actuated pin 
intersecting said bar and held normally under 
the stress of its spring within the shield, sub 
stantially in the manner and for the purpose 
herein set forth. . 
3. The safety-pin constructed of a single 
piece of wire twisted in substantially the form 
of the figure 8, and provided at one end with 
a shield having its open end or loop turned 4o 
outwardly to receive the opposite sharpened 
end forming the pin-point, the intermediate 
portion of the wire being coiled to form a 
spring whose stress shall operate to carry the 
point of the pin automatically toward the 45 
open loop of the shield, substantially in the 
manner and for the purpose herein set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
a 
CHARLES G. DEMING. 
Witnesses: 
A. N. JESBERA, 
E. M. WATSON. 
O 
it will automatically spring up toward and 
into the shield and thus be fastened. If held 
in the same position and pulled back, it will 
automatically unfasten itself; but if turned 
upon its side to lie flat upon the fabric it 
will be impossible to detach it unless the pin 
be forced outward by hand. The fact that 
the pin is self-fastening and self-detachable 
when held out at a right angle to the face of 
the fabric and simply pushed forward or 
drawn backward, and that it is not detach 
able when turned over into parallelism with 
the face without special effort to that end, 
renders it more useful and effective for vari 
ous purposes than the customary forms of 
safety-pins. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The safety-pin, substantially as de 
scribed, having the open end or loop of the 
shield turned outwardly in the same plane as 
the body of the pin, and the unsharpened 
member or bar carrying the shield bent in 
form to cross the sharpened member or pin 
about midway its length, Substantially in the 
manner and for the purpose herein set forth. 
2. The combination, with the unsharpened 
member or bar of a safety-pin, of a shield for 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457361.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 457,361, 
T. MILLS. 
PROPELLING WESSELS, 
Patented Aug. 11, 1891. 
7.1. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS MILLS, OF CHARTERSTOWERS, QUEENSLAND. 
PROPELL N G VESSELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,361, dated August 11, 1891. 
Application filed February 18, 1891, Serial No. 381780, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS MILLs, miner, 
a Subject of the Queen of Great Britain, re 
siding at Charterstowers, in the Colony of 
Queensland, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Propelling Vessels, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The propeller I place at the front end of 
the vessel instead of at the stern, as is com 
mon With screw-propellers, and I form the 
propeller in such a manner that it bores, as 
it were, through the water, displacing the wa 
ter from the front of the vessel and drawing 
the vessel forward instead of thrusting it 
forward from the stern. The front end of 
the vessel I make in the form of a pointed 
Cone, With the point some distance below the 
Water-line. The propeller I form of a corre 
Sponding hollow cone to fit over the coned 
front end of the vessel, but with a slight 
Space between the two. 
The pointed end of the propeller is secured 
to the end of the driving-shaft, which is car 
ried out through the pointed frontend of the 
Vessel. Small rollers are also placed between 
the front end of the vessel and the rear end 
of the hollow propeller to give support to this 
end of the propeller. Holes may also be 
formed through the front of the propeller to 
admit water to its interior, if desired. 
The exterior of the propeller has a web or 
WebS projecting out from it, preferably, but 
not necessarily, at right angles to its surface 
and passing spirally around it, commencing 
at the point at Only a slight inclination to the 
shaft, and becoming more and more inclined 
to it as the diameter becomes greater, so that 
it bores through the waterlike an auger, each 
part of the inclined web being adapted to ad 
vance through the water an equal distance 
for each revolution or part of the propeller. 
The main shaft may be carried back to any 
desired point within the vessel wherever the 
propelling-engines are situated. Protection 
may, if desired, be given to the propeller by 
a protecting-cage, formed of bars fixed to the 
keel and sides and deck of the vessel. 
Figure 1 of the drawings annexed is a per 
spective view of a vessel constructed and pro 
vided with a propeller, as above described. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the same with 
S 
Id 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
S 5 
the propeller removed. Fig. 3 is an eleva 
tion of the propeller. Fig. 4 is a vertical sec 
tion, on a larger scale, of the fore part of the 
vessel, showing how friction-rollers may be in 
terposed between the ship and the rear end of 
the propeller to reduce friction and to steady 
the cone. 
As will be seen from the drawings, the whole 
fore part A of the vessel is made of much the 
same form as the fore part of projectiles as 
now made for firing from guns. Surrounding 
this portion of the vessel is the propeller B. 
C is the propeller-shaft, to which the point 
ed end of the propeller is secured. 
DD are rollers interposed between the ves 
sel and the rear end of the propeller. Their 
axes may be carried in bearings which can 
oiled from the 
be set inward or outward or 
interior of the vessel. 
E E are the curved blades projecting out 
from the exterior of the propeller. They may, 
if desired, be formed with a flange extending 
backward from their outer edge, or may be 
plain, and either at rightangles to the surface 
of the propeller or somewhat inclined to it. 
There may be any desired number of and 
depth and length of blades. The pitch of the 
blades may also be considerably varied, ac 
cording to the nature of the vessel and the 
speed at which it is to be propelled. 
What I claim is 
1. A vessel with the whole fore part of a 
Stationary curved conical form, surrounded 
by a hollow conical propeller of correspond 
ing form and adapted to revolve thereon and 
having blades projecting from its exterior and 
Winding around it, like the screw-threads at 
the point of an auger, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. A vessel having at its front end a sta 
tionary conical portion A, in combination 
With a hollow conical propeller adapted to 
revolve about said portion A, having spirally 
arranged blades and provided with means for 
revolving it. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS MILLS. 
FREDERICKSPANSWICK, 
JOSEPH LAKE, 
24 Southampton. Buildings, London. 
17 Gracechurch Street, London. 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457461.txt	(No Model.) 
A. E. FRANCIS, 
WIRE CLOTHES PIN. 
No. 457,461, 
Patented Aug. ll, l891, 
7%ities. 
Zzaveto.7. 
13 G2a2-d2C127. 
rate cars PETERs co, Photo-Litho, washingtoN, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALLAN E. FRANCIS, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
WIRE CO THES - P. N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,461, dated August 11, 1891. 
Application fied January 24, 1890. Serial No. 338,029, (No model.) 
bend D of the wire. Both legs have crooks, 
Be it known that I, ALLAN E. FRANCIS, a as shown, and the single leg B springs in be 
tween the two side members of double leg C. 
The end of the wire forming the member C 
is looped and clasped around the neck of the 
single leg B. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
The improved wire clothes-pin composed of 25 
one piece of wire and consisting of the coiled 
head A, single crooked leg B, and double 
crooked leg C, the end of the wire forming 
the leg C clasped onto leg B near the head A, 
substantially as shown and described. 
To all whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Wire Clothes-Pins, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The invention consists of a pin formed of 
one piece of wire bent, and formed in the 
manner hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of my new wire pin, showing 
crooks and bends. Fig. 2 is an end elevation 
of the same. 
The pin is formed from one piece of wire 
having a coiled head A with one single leg 
B and one double leg C, formed by a return 
ATLAN E. FRANCIS. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE W. TIBBTTS, 
ABNER SLUTZ. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457562.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 457,562, 
B. LAWRENCE 
LETTER, OR; BILL FILE, 
Patented Aug. ll, l891. 
t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2. 
3. 
20 
f0. 
& S \SN& 4. 
O A33, 2 
s 
2 2. 
2 
S 
ff 
 
  
 
 
S. S. 
S 
 
 
 
 
2% 
S 
 
&SSSSL 
2 3 
 
WITNESSES 
(2a9-67-4-2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN LAWRENCE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO LOUISA 
LAWRENCE, OF SAME PLACE. 
LETTER OR BLL FLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,562, dated August 11, 1891. 
Application filed May 19, 1891, Serial No, 393,252, (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN LAWRENCE, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York city, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Letter Or 
Bill Files, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention has for its main object to pro 
vide a simple, durable, and effective letter Or 
bill file; and it consists in the various features 
of construction and combinations of devices, 
hereinafter more fully described, and particul 
larly set forth in the appended claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a top plan view of a letter or bill file embody 
ing my improvements, the board or tablet be 
ing broken away to economize in Space. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section taken at the line acac of 
Fig. 1 and looking in the direction of the air 
row. Fig. 3 is a similar section with the file 
in an open condition. Fig. 4 is a side eleva 
tion of a modification in detail construction 
of my improved file, and Fig. 5 is a top plan 
view thereof. 
In the several views the same part Will be 
found designated by the same numeral of ref 
eleCe. 
is the board or tablet upon which the file 
is mounted. 
2 is the base-plate of the file Which is per 
forated at suitable places to enable the file, 
by means of screws 8, to be firmly Secured 
upon the board or tablet, and said base-plate 
is provided with an extension 4, having a hole 
5, by which the contriyance may be suspended 
At the front of the base-plate are arranged 
two vertical hollow wires or tubes 6 at Suit 
able distances apart, adapted to receive the 
letters or bills to be filed. Centrally of the 
base-plate is affixed a vertical cylindrical post 
or pillar 7, upon which is adapted to slide a 
hollow stem or sleeve 8, preferably provided 
at its upper end with a knob or finger-piece 
9. The lower end of the said hollow stem or 
sleeve 8 is driven into or otherwise Securely 
attached to a plate 10, which supports and 
carries the arched or transfer Wires 11. The 
post or pillar 7 is arranged midway between 
so the set of receiving or impaling wires and 
the set of transfer-wires, and is slotted or 
45 
35 
 
milled at one side at 12 to accommodate a 
wire spring 13, whose lower end is riveted to 
the post at 14 and whose upper end is pro 
vided with a bend 15. The said spring is 
adapted to sustain the arched or transfer 
wires and their connections when raised or 
when the file is open, and Will also assist in 
locking or holding together the receiving and 
transferring wires when it may be desired to 
have the file remain in a closed condition. 
When the file is closed, as shown at Fig. 2, the 
bent upper end 15 of the spring is adapted to 
take into a recess or opening 16 in the sleeve 
8, and by its tension or friction operate to keep 
the receiving-wires and the transfer-wires in 
close contact against accCidental separation. 
When the file has been opened, as shown at 
Fig. 3, the lowermost end of the sleeve 8 is 
adapted to rest upon the upper bent end of 
the spring and be supported thereby against 
dropping, due to the Weight of the said sleeve 
and the transfer-wires and their connections, 
as well as against the additional weight of 
any papers which in practice may happen to 
be upon the transfer-wires. When the trans 
fer-wires have been raised to their full ex 
tent, the bent end of the spring is adapted to 
fly outwardly to catch under the lower end of 
the sleeve, as shown at Fig. 3, and when the 
transfer-wires are depressed to their lower 
most position the said bent end of the spring, 
by reason of its outward tendency, is adapted 
to fly into the recess or opening in the sleeve S. 
In order to facilitate the opening and clos 
ing of the file, an air hole or vent is provided 
at 17 in the sleeve. The transfer-wires are pre 
vented from rotating or losing their align 
ment with the receiving or impaling wires by 
means of a guide-pin 18, driven into or other 
wise firmly secured to the base-plate 2 and 
extending up Vertically through a perfora 
tion in the carrier-plate 10 to the desired 
height. 
In order to limit the raising of the trans 
fer-wires, a stop is provided at the upper end 
of said guide-pin. In this instance the said 
stop consists of a removable pin 19, which is 
passed through a transverse perforation at or 
near the upper extremity of the guide-pin; 
but instead of this form of stop the said 
guide-pin may be simply headed or enlarged. 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
457,562 
75 
5 
35 
45 
50 
55 
I employ the removable stop or pin 19 for the 
from the center; but it of course may be made 
oblong or triangularin shape. The function 
purpose of enabling the transfer-wires and 
of this device is to support and carry the 
their appendages to be removed from the 
transfer-wires, and its shape is therefore im 
contrivance, so as to enable the letters or 
other papers on the receiving-wires to be all 
material. The post 7 is arranged about mid 
way between the set of receiving-wires and 
bodily removed, and, if desired, transferred 
to a binding-case. 
the set of transfer-wires considered trans 
versely of the file, in order that the papers 
In practice, when the transfer-wires have 
may be carried over freely from the receiv 
been detached from the contrivance, I prefer 
ing-wires onto the transfer-wires in the op 
to employ a transfer-frame, such as patented 
eration of filing or removing individual pa 
by me August 28, 1888, No. 388,421. The legs 
pers. If desired, the knob or handle 9 may 
of this frame are inserted into the tubular 
be omitted, though I prefer to employ it, and 
receiving - wires 6, and the pile of papers 
the post 7 and the sleeve 8 may be shortened 
thereupon are then transferred to said frame, 
and the file opened and closed by takinghold 
which may then be returned to the binding 
directly of the transfer-wires. 
case and the papers shifted onto the tubular 
filing-wires thereof. After transferring the 
From the foregoing it will be understood 
papers from the receiving-wires 6, the trans 
that when the file is in the condition shown 
at Fig. 3 the papers may be readily placed 
fer-wires are then readjusted by sliding the 
upon the receiving-wires, and that when the 
sleeve 8 down upon the post 7 and reinsert 
ing the stop-pin 19. The free ends of the 
file is in the condition shown at Fig. 2 the 
papers are held upon Said Wires against casual 
arched transfer-wires are reduced in diameter 
to form short tapering studs or pins 20, capa 
detachment and in a manner such that they 
ble of entering the upper ends of the tubular 
may be readily transferred to the arched 
receiving-wires, so as to afford a perfectly 
wires for the usual purposes of adding new 
papers or removing some of those already on 
flush and smooth joint at the junction of the 
receiving and transfer wires, and thus pre 
file. 
vent effectually the enlargement of the holes 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
in the papers in constantly moving them from 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of a base - plate pro 
one set of wires to the other. 
vided with a set of receiving or impaling wires, 
The carrier or plate 10, upon which the 
a carrier-plate adapted to move vertically up 
transfer-wires are mounted in the manufac 
ture, is preferably arranged to stand a slight 
and down and provided with a set of transfer 
wires, and a post arranged between the two 
distance above the base-plate 2 when the file 
sets of wires and adapted to guide said car 
is closed, and the upper ends of the receiv 
rier-plate in its vertical movements, substan 
ing - wires abut against the shoulders 21, 
formed by reducing the free ends of the 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination of a base-plate pro 
arched transfer-wires. By this construction 
provision is made for the proper interlocking 
vided with a set of receiving or impaling wires, 
a carrier-plate provided with a set of transfer 
of the receiving and transfer wires to obtain 
wires, a post arranged between said two sets 
the smooth joint referred to in the event in 
of wires, and a sleeve attached to said car 
the use of the file that the transfer-wires 
rier-plate and adapted to slide up and down 
should become bent and shortened to an ex 
on said post, substantially as set forth, 
tent such that when the plate 10 has been 
3. The combination of a base-plate pro 
brought to the position shown at Fig. 2 the 
vided with a set of receiving or impaling wires, 
shoulders 2-1 will not quite rest upon the ends 
a carrier-plate provided with a set of transfer 
of the receiving-wires 6. In this contingency 
wires, a post arranged between said two sets 
the plate may be forced farther down and, if 
necessary, in contact with the base-plate 2, in 
of wires, a sleeve attached to said carrier 
plate and adapted to slide up and down on 
order to fully close the joint between the free 
said post, and a friction or holding spring, 
ends of the receiving-wires and the free ends 
substantially as set forth. 
of the transfer-wires. 
4. The combination of a base - plate pro 
In the modification shown at Figs. 4 and 5 
vided with a set of receiving orimpaling wires, 
the plate 10 is made straight or like a bar and 
a carrier-plate provided with a set of transfer 
the transfer-wires are bent horizontally at 
wires, a post arranged between said two sets 
their lower ends and extended forwardly to 
of wires, a spring attached to said post, and 
connect with said plate. This is the only dif 
a sleeve attached to said carrier-plate and 
ference in construction existing between the 
adapted to slide up and down on said post, 
file shown at Figs. 4 and 5 and that shown in 
substantially as set forth. 
the other views. The plate 10 of the file 
5. The combination of a base-plate pro 
shown at Figs. 1, 2, and 3 is bent or shaped to 
vided with a set of receiving or impaling wires, 
extend from the center of the base-plate diag 
onally on opposite sides rearwardly to the 
a carrier-plate provided with a set of transfer 
wires, a post arranged between said two sets 
points at which the lower ends of the vertical 
of wires, a Spring attached to said post and 
portions of the transfer-wires are to be at 
having a bend at One end, and a sleeve at 
tached, and this plate 10 is made in skeleton 
form or as consisting of two arms branching tached to said carrier-plate and provided with 
- 
- 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
457,562 
AO 
55 
a depression to receive the free bent end of of wires, a guide-pin, a sleeve, and a spring, 
said spring when the file is closed, substan 
substantially as set forth. 
tially as set forth. 
10. The combination of a base-plate pro 
6. The combination of a base-plate pro 
vided with a set of receiving orimpaling wires, 
vided with a set of receiving or impaling wires, 
a carrier-plate provided with a set of transfer 
a carrier-plate provided with a set of transfer 
wires, a post arranged between said two sets 
wires, a post arranged between said two sets 
of wires, a sleeve adapted to slide on said post 45 
of wires and having a slot extending length 
and having at one end a knob or handle and 
wise thereof, a spring secured to said post and 
attached at the other end to said carrier-plate, 
extending lengthwise of the same and bent 
and means for preventing rotation of said car 
rier-plate, substantially as set forth. 
at its upper free end, and a sleeve attached 
to said carrier-plate and adapted to slide up 
11. The combination of a base-plate pro 
and down on said post and provided with a 
vided with a set of receiving or impaling wires, 
depression, the arrangement being such that 
a carrier-plate arranged to stand normally 
when the file is closed the free end of Said 
above said base-plate in the closed condition 
spring is adapted to enter said depression 
of the file and provided with a set of transfer 
and when the file is open the said spring is 
wires, and means, substantially as described, 
adapted to prop or support the carrier-plate 
for guiding said carrier-plate in its up and 
and its appendages, substantially as set forth. 
down movements, substantially asset forth. 
7. The combination of a base-plate pro 
12. The combination of a base-plate pro 
vided with a set of receiving or impaling wires, 
vided with a set of hollow receiving or impal 
a carrier-plate provided with a set of transfer 
ing wires, a carrier-plate arranged to stand 
wires, a post arranged between said two sets 
normally above said base-plate in the closed 
of wires for said carrier-plate, and a guide-pin 
condition of the file and provided with a set 
to prevent rotation of said carrier-plate about 
of transfer-wires, the free ends of which are 
said post, substantially as set forth. 
reduced in diameter to enter said receiving 
8. The combination of a base-plate pro 
or impaling wires, a post arranged between 
vided with a set of receiving or impaling wires, 
said two sets of wires, a sleeve attached to 
a carrier-plate provided with a set of transfer 
said carrier-plate and adapted to slide up and 
wires, a post arranged between said two sets of 
down on said post, a guide-pin, and a spring, 
wires, a guide-pin fastened to said base-plate, 
substantially as set forth. 
and a sleeve attached to said carrier-plate and 
Signed at New York city, in the county of 
adapted to slide up and down on said post, 
New York and State of New York, this 15th 
substantially as set forth. 
day of May, A. D. 1891. 
9. The combination of a base-plate pro 
BENJAMIN LAWRENCE. 
vided with a set of receiving or impaling wires, 
a carrier-plate provided with a set of transfer 
wires, a post arranged between said two sets 
JACOB FELBEL, 
IILLIE BROWNING. 
Witnesses: 
O 
3o 
35. 
------- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457662.txt	(No Model.) 
A, NIEKAMP. 
THILL COUPING, 
No. 457,662, 
Patented Aug. ll, 1891. 
 
THE MORR3 PETERS cc., PKoro-utho., washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTON NIEKAMP, OF MARIA STEIN, OHIO. 
THILL-COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,662, dated August 11, 1891. 
Application filed May 8, 1891, Serial No. 392,084, (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANTON NIEKAMP, of 
Maria, Stein, in the county of Mercer and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Thill-Couplings, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription. 
My invention relates to an improvement 
in thill-couplings, and has for its object to 
provide a coupling of exceedingly simple and 
durable construction in which rubbers or 
Springs are not employed, and wherein the 
parts comprising the coupling are so con 
structed that when properly grouped the 
coupling will be an anti-rattling one. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a coupling constructed in a manner to 
admit of the fastening devices being readily 
loosened and tightened by hand, thus dis 
pensing with the necessity of a wrench. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several parts, 
as will be hereinafter fully set forth, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is an end view of the coupling, the 
axle being shown in section. Fig. 2 is a cen 
tral vertical section taken upon the line 22 
of Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the coup 
ling, a portion thereof being broken a Way, 
and Fig. 4 is a detail perspective view of a 
lock-bar constituting a portion of the coup 
ling. 
The body of the coupling consists of a cyl 
inder or a circular tubular casting 10, having 
a clip 11 of any approved construction inte 
gral with or attached to its rear side face at 
or near the center thereof. In the upper face 
of the cylindrical body a longitudinal slot 12 
is produced, extending ordinarily from end to 
end of the body, but not through said ends, 
and the end portions of the body are prefer 
ably quite thick, as illustrated at 13 in Figs. 
1 and 3. The slot 12 in the body is inter 
sected by a circumferential opening 14, pro 
duced in the center of the front face of the 
body, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. In the ends 
of the slotted portion of the body, two aper 
 
ertures 15 and 16 are produced. The aper 
ture 16 is made to extend through the end; 
but the aperture 15 partakes of the nature of 
a recess and does not extend through the end, 
as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 3. 
In connection with the body portion of the 
coupling a lock-bar 17 is employed. (Shown 
in detail in Fig. 4.) The lock-bar is adapted 
to fit snugly in the slot 12 of the body. Its 
upper outer surface is convexed, and a rib 18 
is formed upon the upper convexed surface 
at one end, the end carrying the rib having 
a threaded aperture 19 formed therein, and 
a stud 20 is produced upon the opposite end. 
The under face of the lock-bar is concaved, 
as illustrated at a, in Fig. 4, and in the outer 
face of said bar at its center a beveled receSS 
21 is made, and when the lock-baris placed in 
position in the slot of the body the base-Wall 
of its recess 21 constitutes the upper Wall of 
the opening in the side of the body. The 
lock-bar is held in position in the body by 
entering the stud 20 into the recess 15 and by 
passing a set-screw 22 through the opposite 
aperture 16 into the threaded opening 19 of 
the bar, as is shown in Fig. 3. The thill A, 
employed in connection with the body, has 
its iron 23 curved downward in the usual 
manner; but the lower portion of the iron is 
horizontal, as shown at 23, and terminates 
in a head 24, extending beyond the sides of 
the iron at a right angle thereto, preferably 
an equal distance. The head 24 is round in 
cross-section, and is adapted to fit and turn 
in the interior of the body, the base-wall of 
the interior chamber being circular or con 
caved, as illustrated in Fig. 2. 
A locking-sleeve 25 is held to slide upon 
the horizontal member of the thill-iron. The 
locking-sleeve comprises a rear Semicircular 
section 25 and a forward collar-section 25. 
The rear curved section 25 of the locking 
sleeve is apertured in alignment with the 
opening in the collar-section 25 to admit of 
the horizontal member of the thill-iron ex 
tending rearwardly beyond the curved sec 
tion, as is best shown in Fig. 2. 
The locking-sleeve may be readily attached 
to the thill-iron whenever desired, which is 
accomplished through the medium of a set 
Screw 26. 
55 
70 
75 
95 
CC 
457,662 
45 
slot in its upper face and a diametrical open 
ing in its front face intersecting the upper 40 
slot and a clip secured at the rear of the 
body, of a thill having its rear end horizontal 
and provided with a head extending beyond 
the sides of the iron and adapted to enter the 
chamber of the body, a lock-bar closing the 
slot in the body above the head of the thill 
iron, a sleeve held to slide upon the thill-iron 
to an engagement with the body, and locking 
devices, substantially as described, for secur 
ing the lock-bar in place and likewise the 
sleeve, as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a thill-coupling, the combination, with 
a tubular body having a clip secured to its 
rear side having a longitudinal slot in its 
outer face and a circumferential opening in 
its front face leading into said slot, of a thill 
the outer end whereof is horizontal and pro 
vided with a head circular in cross-section 
extending beyond opposite sides of the iron 
and adapted to enter and turn in the interior 
of the body, a lock-bar adapted to close the 
outer slot of the body, the said bar being pro 
vided with a recess in its forward edge con 
stituting the upper wall of the body-opening, 
a sleeve held to slide upon the horizontal 
member of the thill-iron having its rear sec 
tion curved to correspond to the radius of the 
body, said Section being adapted for engage 
ment with said body, a set-screw carried by 
the sleeve, and a similar screw carried by the 
body and adapted to enter the lock-bar, as 
and for the purpose set forth. . 
65 
55 
ANTON NIEKAMP. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. KRAMER, 
FREDHECKMANN. 
O 
25 
Tn operation the coupling is effected by 
sliding the locking-sleeve forward upon the 
thill-iron, and the lock-bar 17, having been re 
moved from the slot 12 in the body of the 
coupling, the head 24 of the thill-iron is passed 
downward into the interior chamber of the 
body, the thill-iron being located when this is 
accomplished in the slot 14 of the body. The 
lock-bar is then placed in position and Se 
cured through the medium of the set-screw 
22, and the sleeve 25 is slid rearward to an 
engagement with the forward side of the 
body and is held in this position by manipu 
lating its set-screw 26. The sleeve 25, when 
adjusted to the body in this manner, extends 
over the lock-bar 17, and the coupling may be 
raised or lowered in the usual manner as the 
horizontal member of the thill-iron is capable 
of vertical play in the opening 14 of the body. 
When it is desired to disengage the thills 
from the axle of a vehicle, it is only neces 
Sary to loosen the set-screw 26, slide forward 
the sleeve 25, and unscrew the set-screw 22 
from the lock-bar 17. By lifting upward upon 
the thills, the heads of the thill-irons may be 
carried out of the body of the coupling, the 
lock-bar 17 passing out with the head. It 
will be observed that springs or rubber wash 
ers are not employed, and that the locking 
devices of the coupling may be conveniently 
manipulated by hand, thus dispensing with 
the necessity of a wrench, which tool is not 
always conveniently at hand when required. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. Inathill-coupling, the combination, with 
a hollow body provided with a longitudinal 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457762.txt	(No Model.) 
A. A. DITTMAR & H., FALKENHAUSEN. 
EECTRIC AIR PUMP. 
No. 457,762, 
Patented Aug. 11, 1891. 
 
 
  
 
 
A SNN NG NN NN 
a? a 2.Nf El N.E. ?as 
6. 
N.e 1 
2 
 
  
 
 
 
2. 
S 
 
 
 
 
Z. 
as 
S 
4- 
  
s 
 
s 
1 NHEINES 
S 
S 
271 
3 
% 
2 % % 
N 
Nr. - 
N NZ 'N 
N , 
i 
4, 
2NT 
2:- 
t 
- Z. 
B' 24-76. 
ATFORNEY. 
O 
S 
 
N 
NE N2 FN vz 
% 
S3 
V 
2- 
WWEWTORS 
D 
WITNESSES 
  
 
 
2.12 
The Morris. PETERs co, Pitoto-irthd, wish Nation, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALLEN A. DITTMAR AND HUGO FAILKENHAUSEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., AS 
SIGNORS OF ONE-THIRD TO ALBERT L. REINMANN, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRIC AIR-PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,762, dated August 11, 1891. 
Application filed January 23, 1891, Serial No. 378,782, -(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ALLEN A. DITTMAR 
and HUGO FALKENHAUSEN, citizens of the 
United States, and residents of New York, in 
the county of New York and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Electric Air-Pumps, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Our invention has reference to improve 
ments in air-pumps; and the invention con 
sists of an electric air-pump in which the Suc 
tion and discharge valves are worked by elec 
tricity. This object is attained by the mech 
anism shown in the accompanying drawing, 
which is a vertical section of an air-pump in 
accordance with our invention, with a plan 
showing the connection of the air-pump with 
an electric generator. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A in the drawing is a chamber or casing, 
and B B' are the pump-cylinders, which are 
perpendicularly mounted upon the chamber 
by means of flanges bb', screwed or otherwise 
secured on the upper part of the said cham 
ber. The upper part or top plate of the said 
chamber A has openings which communicate 
with the lower openings of the cylinders. 
Through the chamber. A passes a crank 
shaft C, one end of which is fitted to the in 
ner side of one wall of the chamber by means 
of a bearing, while the other end passes out 
through the opposite wall of the same with 
bearing and stuffing-box. The crank-shaft 
has two cranks c c', opposite each other, and 
each crank arranged directly below the cen 
ter of one of the pump-cylinders BB'. The 
pistons FF, within the said pump-cylinders, 
are operated by means of the connecting-rods 
D D, which are connected with the cranks of 
the crank-shaft, and the pins ff of the pis 
tons. The upper ends of the pump-cylinders 
are closed by the casings G and G', the out 
wardly-extending flanges of the bottom plates 
of which are screwed or riveted to the out 
wardly-extending flanges at the upper ends of 
the cylinders. The bottom plates of the cas 
ings G. G' are provided with valve-openings 
g, g, g, and g, conical in shape, the open 
ings g and g tapering upward and the open 
ings g and g tapering in a downward direc 
tion. 
The casing G, as well as the casing G', is 
divided into two compartments H. H. The 
suction-pipes h. h., to which the vessels to be 
evacuated are connected, enter the compart 
ments H, and the discharge-pipes h h' lead 
from the compartments H to the trap-cylin 
der J. The latter is mounted on the top plate 
of the base-chamber A and communicates 
with the interior of the same. The upper 
part of the trap-cylinder is provided with air 
holesi and covered by a dome I. 
K, IK, K, and Kare solenoids placed upon 
the top plate of the chambers G and G', the 
bores of the same communicating with the in 
terior of the compartments H. Hand H' H'. 
The movable cores k k' lick within the so 
lenoids serve as valve-stems, and are provided 
at their lower ends with conically-shaped 
valve-pistons, which fit into the respective 
valve-openings g g g g in the bottom plates 
of the chambers G. G. 
To the top portions of the solenoids Kand 
K' longitudinal guide-casings i i" are secured, 
in which the coresk and k'are suspended by 
means of spiral springs and . 
The pistons of the Valve-stems or cores are 
provided with suitable packing-rings, so as 
to form an air-tight closing of the valve-open 
ings. The cores are made of soft iron, but 
the lower portions of the same consist of 
brass, so that these portions may not be mag 
netized by the electric current and not affec 
the iron parts of the pump. 
L is an electric commutator, made of hard 
rubber or any other non-conducting material, 
in the shape of a disk, which is mounted on 
the crank-shaft and receives by the same its 
rotary motion. Semi-annular conducting 
rings land l are secured to the commmuta 
tor-disk, the ring l being somewhat smaller 
than the ring l', so that each semi-annular 
ring lies in a different periphery, as shown in 
the plan view, Fig. 2. A standard M is pro 
vided with a spring-acting conducting-brush 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
457,762 
O 
25 
35 
40 
o, which presses alternately upon the ring 
sections land l when the commutator-diskis 
in rotary motion. The ring-sections l and l' 
are so arranged that both sections receive the 
electric current simultaneously by the brush 
o. The standard Mis, furthermore, provided 
with one pair of stationary conducting 
brushes m and m' and with one pair of like 
brushes in and n, the brushes in and in com 
ing alternately in contact with the ring-sec 
tion l and the brushes in and n' in contact 
with the ring-section l when the pump is in 
motion. The electric current is conducted 
from an electric generator N through the 
spring-acting brush O to the commutator and 
through the ring-sections land land the con 
ducting-brushes m, n' and in n', respectively, 
to the solenoids, the electric current being 
closed by wires leading from the solenoids 
back to the electric generator, as clearly 
shown in the plan attached to the drawing. 
The chamber A, the cylinders BB, and the 
trap-cylinder J are filled with oil, as usualin 
air-pumps. The crank-shaft may be rotated 
by hand or power, as desired. 
In the illustration shown in Fig. I the pis 
ton F is in a position about to close the valve 
g of the compartment H' of the casing G, the 
air being forced through the said valve and 
the discharge-pipe h' into the trap-cylinder J, 
from where the air escapes through the air 
openings.j. The valve-stem or core k is about 
to drop from the suction-valve g in the com 
partment H of the casing G with the down 
stroke of the piston F, whereby the suction 
compartment H of the casing G is opened. 
The stop-pin d prevents the core k from drop 
ping too far down. Of course the valve g 
will be closed before the valve g is opened. 
The piston F is in a position about to com 
plete its stroke, and the valves g g are in a 
position reversed to the valves gg. 
The opening and closing of the valves is 
performed by electricity, and the electricity 
operates when the pump is in motion in the 
followingmanner: The brush Opresses against 
the ring-section land transfers the positive 
current from the electric generator N to the 
ring-sections, and from there by means of the 
conducting-brushes m m? to the solenoids K 
K. The current is closed by the wires lead 
ing from the said solenoids to the negative 
pole of the electric generator. The coreskk 
of the solenoids KK are thus magnetized and 
automatically drawn up, whereby the valve 
g is closed and the valve g opened by the 
valve-pistons of the said cores, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 1. When a further motion is 
made by the crank-shaft, the conducting 
brush n' will come in contact with the ring o 
section l and the brush in in contact with the 
ring-section l, and the current will be con 
ducted through the brushes in n' and the re 
spective wires to the solenoids K. K. The 
cores k' 
will then be magnetized and drawn 
s 
up, whereby the valve g is opened and the 
valve g closed, while the valve g will be 
opened and the valve g closed, as by the 
broken current in the solenoids K K the 
cores c. c become demagnetized and drop 
i. e., they assume the position of the cores 
k' k shown in the drawing. In this manner 
the opening or closing of the respective valves 
is performed simultaneously with the alter 
nating up and down strokes of the pistons in 
the pump-cylinders. 
The process of the evacuation of vessels, 
&c., is the same as in other mechanical air 
pumps, and therefore not illustrated in the 
drawing. 
Our improved air-pump is very simple, and 
has the advantage that any complicated mech 
anism for opening or closing the suction and 
discharge valves is entirely dispensed with by 
the same. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In an electric air-pump, suction and dis 
charge compartments communicating with 
the pump-cylinders by valve-openings, incom 
bination. With Solenoids placed over openings 
in the top plates of the compartments and 
having movable cores which pass through the 
openings in the said top plates and act as 
Valve-stems, so as to open and close the re 
spective valve-openings by electric currents 
conducted alternately through the respective 
Solenoids, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an electric air-pump, the combination 
of the top plates of the suction and discharge 
compartments, which have openings for the 
valve-stems with the movable solenoids, cores 
passing through said openings of the top 
plates and acting as Valve-stems for the valve 
openings, by which the said compartments 
communicate with the pump-cylinders, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In an electric air-pump, suction and dis 
charge compartments communicating with 
the pump-cylinders by valve-openings,in com 
bination with Solenoids placed over openings 
in the top plates of the compartments and 
having movable cores which pass through the 
openings in the said top plates, and an elec 
tric commutator connected with the solenoids, 
by which commutator electric currents are 
conducted alternately through the respect 
ive Solenoids and the cores magnetized, so as 
to open and close the respective valve-open 
ings in the pump-cylinders, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. In an electric air-pump, suction and dis 
charge compartments communicating with 
the pump-cylinders by valve-openings, in com 
bination with Solenoids placed over openings 
in the top plates of the compartments and 
having movable cores, and the piston crank 
shaft bearing an electric commutator which 
is electrically connected with the solenoids, 
7 O 
75 
95 
Od 
IO5 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
45 
55 
65 
 
457,762 
3 
York and State of New York, this 17th day of 
January, A. D. 1891. 
ALLEN A. DITTMAR. 
HUGO FALKENHAUSEN, 
Witnesses: 
- ALBERT L. REINMANN, 
THOMAS CONRAD. 
so that by the rotation of the crank-shaft 
electric currents are conducted through the 
respective solenoids, and the cores are mag 
netized and open and close the respective 
valve-openings simultaneously with thestroke 
of the pump-pistons, substantially as shown 
and described. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457862.txt	E. F. CHUMARD. 
BRUSH, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 457,862, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDMUND F. CHUMARD, OF COLFAX, WASHINGTON. 
BRUSH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,862, dated August 18, 1891. 
Application filed October 29, 1889, Serial No. 328,563. (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDMUND F. CHUMARD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Col 
fax, in the county of Whitman and State of 
Washington, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Brushes, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement 
in brushes; and it consists in the construction 
and arrangement of the parts thereof, which 
will be more fully described hereinafter, and 
carefully defined in the claims. 
The object of my invention is in part to 
provide an improved brush with a detach 
able bridle or extension-band, which may be 
readily removed when required and which 
while in position holds the bristles in a se 
cure and firm manner, and in part to provide 
Such a brush With a removable extension 
block held in place, as will be hereinafter de 
scribed. I attain this object in a hollow cen 
ter brush by the construction illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, wherein like ref 
erence-letters indicate corresponding parts in 
the several views, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a flathol 
low center brush with my bridle in place. 
Fig. 2 is a central longitudinal section of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a detail perspective view of 
the extension-block, and Fig. 4 is a detail per 
spective view of the bristle - retaining band 
and bridle, the latter being represented as 
partly detached. Fig. 5 is a detail sectional 
view of another mode of uniting the retain 
ing-band and bridle. 
In the drawings, A represents the handle, 
B the stock or that portion of the handle to 
which the bristles are secured, and C the 
bristles of the brush. The bristles are secured 
to the handle by a band D, preferably of 
metal, in the usual or any well-known man 
le. 
The material which forms the band D and 
the bridle E is creased along the line or groove 
e deep enough to allow of the bridle being 
torn away readily from the band D when the 
bristles become sufficiently worn down to 
necessitate the removal of the said bridle E 
in order to free thatportion of them primarily 
inclosed thereby; or, the band D and bridle 
E may be formed of separate strips or pieces 
of metal, if metal be employed, the bridle E 
slightly overlapping the band D on the out 
side and lightly soldered thereto before being . 
put on the brush. 
In the common flat Wall-brush with hollow 
center I place an extension-block G. on the end 
of the stock B and secure it to the stock till 
the brush is finished by means of a small nail 
or otherwise. 
When the bristles, the band, and the bridle 
are in position and fastened to the handle or 
Stock, I fasten the overlapping diagonal end 
F of the bridle lightly with solder. I then 
pass the end of a wire or thread H through a 
Small hole or aperture in the bridle, said hole 
being near the edge of the bridle farthest 
from the band D. I pass the end of the wire 
through the bristles and out through a simi 
lar hole in the bridle on the opposite side of 
the brush. I pass the end of the wire two or 
more times through the brush, and the holes 
in the bridle then draw it tight and fasten 
the ends with solder or otherwise. The wires 
in traversing the brush pass across or over 
the outer end of the extension-block, as seen 
in Fig. 2. This sewing or stitching of wire, 
thread, or the like serves to hold the bridle 
up snugly to the bristles and to maintain the 
flat form of the brush. The wire or stitch 
ing serves to hold the block G in place also 
permanently until the bridle is removed. 
When the bristles become worn off and it 
is desirable to remove the bridle E, the wire 
H is cut or broken. The end F of the bridle 
is then torn up with any sharp instrument, 
and the said bridle may then be easily torn 
away, thus Securing again the necessary Work 
ing length of bristles. The block G will now 
be freed and will be removed together with 
said bridle. 
The groove e along the line uniting the 
bridle E to the band D extends by preference 
throughout the entirelength of said band and 
bridle, and the same is true of the construc 
tion where these parts are united by solder. 
Thus a weakened line of separation is pro 
vided without entirely separating the parts 
at any point. 
I am aware that it is not new to provide a 
brush with a detachable bridle, and I am also 
aware that it is not new to provide a cylin 
drical brush which has its bristles secured to 
the stock by a spirally-wrapped binding wire 
95. 
ICC 
75 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
-- 
- 
g 
457,862 
band, of the extension-block situated at the 20 
inner end of the handle, and the retaining 
wire extending through the said bridle and 
bristles and over said block to hold said block 
in place, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a flat hollow-center brush, the combi 
nation, with the handle, the bristles, and the 
bristle-retaining band, of a detachable bridle 
E, an extension-block arranged in the hollow 
of the brush, and means, substantially as de 
scribed, for retaining said block in place un-3o 
til the said bridle is removed, as set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
25 
EDMUND F. CHUMARD. 
Witnesses: 
U. I. ETTINGER, 
W. H. ALFRED. 
or cord with a cylindrical metallic tube formed 
so as to screw onto said wires, said tube hav 
ing a series of circumferential slits which par 
tially sever it, so that it may be removed in 
sections. Such a construction is obviously 
not adapted to a flatbrush, and it differs from 
the construction herein shown in the bridle, 
not being a part of the bristle-retaining band. 
In my brush no wrapping of wire is employed, 
and the band D is applied directly to the bris 
tles and secured rigidly in position, thus form 
ing a permanent part of the brush, the bridle 
only being removable. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a flat hollow-center brush, the combi 
nation, with the handle, the bristles, the bris 
tle-retaining band, and the detachable and 
removable bridle united at one edge to said 
O 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US457962.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 457,962, 
 
H. L. TROTTER. 
REFRIGERATOR, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1891, 
WTWESSES 
c4/6/3.a4 
AAWWENTOR, 
S. SA------ 
aulo A TTORMEY.3 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY L. TROTTER, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
REFRIGE RATOR 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 457,962, dated August 18, 1891. 
Application filed April 20, 1891, Serial No. 389,675, (No model.) 
55 
which permits access of air to all parts, ex 
cept that directly in contact with the sharp 
edges of the angle bars or irons, the air in 
said channels being thereby cooled and fall 
ing, creating a cold current. Of course nu 
merous means may be devised for securing 
these angle-bars to the chamber walls; but I 
find that the best and most economical Way 
is to punch holes in the sides of the bars near 
their upper ends and connect each to the ad 
jacent one by strips 5 of sheet metal, prefer 
ably band iron or steel, which pieces are se 
cured by rivets 6, passing through the strip 
ends and the apertures in the bars. These 
strips are then secured directly to the sides 
of the ice-chamber by screws or bolts 7, as 
shown, and while for security I prefer to em 
ploy connecting-strips 8 near the lower por 
tions of the bars, secured by corresponding 
screws 9, as shown, these may be dispensed 
with, if desired, and the first - mentioned 
ones will be found to constitute a sufficient 
fastening for ordinary family refrigerators, 
though also, if desired, supporting-bars 10, as 
in dotted lines, could be placed underneath 
the horizontal bars, if necessary, in large re 
frigerators. These angle-bars, beside being 
cheap and readily utilized for the purpose in 
tended, are very strong and do not increase 
the weight of the refrigerator in proportion 
to the strength and stability they insure, as 
Would be the case if corrugated metal of suf 
8s 
ficient thickness were employed for the pur 
pose, and as they are preferably plated or 
galvanized the chamber will be found to be 
very cleanly and the inside as well as the out 
side can be easily cleansed and washed, when 
desired, to remove any deposit that might 
collect upon them. The air-channels insure 
a free air-circulation, thus securing the maxi 
mum effect of the ice on the articles in the 
refrigerator. 
This same construction of ice - chamber 
could be employed in rooms or cars, and may 
be of different shape, if desired, from that 
shown herein, 
95 
9o 
75 
8o 
I claim as my invention 
l. In an ice-chamber for refrigerators, and 
in combination with the walls thereof, the 
separate angle-bars secured to the wall hav 
ing the vertical and horizontal portions, the 
edges of said vertical portions co-operating 
OO 
O 
To all whom it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRY L. TROTTER, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Refrigerators; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, and 
to the figures of reference marked thereon. 
My invention relates to ice-boxes or recep 
tacles for refrigerators and refrigerating 
chambers, and has for its objects to improve 
their construction, whereby not only will they 
be simplified, cheapened, and strengthened, 
but a free circulation and the better refrigera 
tion of the air insured; and to these ends it 
consists in certain improvements in construc 
tion and combinations of parts, all as will be 
hereinafter described, and the novel features 
pointed out particularly in the claims at the 
end of this specification. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View, partly in section, of a portion of an ice 
receptacle constructed in accordance with my 
invention; Fig. 2, a horizontal section of a 
portion showing the attachment of the ribs to 
the chamber walls. 
Similar figures of reference indicate similar 
partS. 
In carrying out my invention I first provide 
the interior walls of the ice or refrigerant 
chamber with a sheet-metal covering 1 or its 
equivalent, as usual, and then secure to the 
side and end walls sections 24 of angle iron, 
With the open sides toward the lining, form 
ing with the latter vertical air-passages 3 from 
top to bottom of the chamber, while the sharp 
projecting angles of said irons form supports 
for the ice, holding the latter out of contact 
With the lining and providing for a free cir 
culation of air between them. While these 
side irons may belong enough to extend only 
from near the top of the chamber to near the 
bottom thereof, and the bottom may be 
formed of any suitable material, I prefer to 
make the bottom bars integral with the bars 
4 on two of the sides, continuing bars from 
the top of one side down across the bottom 
and up the other side, as shown in Fig. 1, 
thereby materially cheapening the construc 
tion and forming a strong support for the ice, 
25 
30 
35 
45 
457,962 
with the walls and constituting vertical air 
passages open at their ends, and the horizontal 
portions serving as an ice-support, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In an ice-chamber for refrigerators, and 
in combination with the walls thereof, the 
Separate vertical angle-bars connected to each 
other and to said walls by the connecting 
5 
strips, the open sides of said bars forming 
with the walls vertical air-channels, substan- to 
tially as described. 
HARRY L. TROTTER. 
Witnesses: 
FRED F. CHURCH, 
G. ADELE RODA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458062.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. McKEE, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. * 
PEN - HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,062, dated August 18, 1891. 
Application filed January 26, 1891, Serial No. 379,216 (No model) 
O 
To alZ whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES H. McKEE, of 
St. Louis, Missouri, havemadea new and use 
ful Improvement in Pen-Holders, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription. 
The improvement relates to the construc 
tion of that portion of the holder in which 
the pen is immediately held; and it consists 
in the means whereby Such portiom can be 
readily opened to receive and closed to grasp 
the pen, substantially as is hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed, aided by the annexed 
drawings, making part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 isa, side elevation of the improved 
holder, a pen being inserted therein; Fig. 2, 
a similar wiew showing a modification; Fig. 
3, a view in perspective of the holder closed; 
Fig. 4, a view in perspective of the holder 
opened; Fig. 5, a cross-section on the line 55 
of Fig. 3; Fig. 6, a cross-section on the same 
line, the holder being opened; and Fig. 7, a 
cross-section on the line 77 of Fig, 2. 
The first twowiewsare upon the same scale, 
the next two wiews are upon a larger Scale, 
the next two are upon astillarger Scale, and 
Fig. 7 is upon a scale differing from that of 
all others. 
The same letters of reference denote the 
same partS. 
Arepresentstheimproved holder; B, a suit 
able holder-handle, and C any pen adapted 
to be inserted in the holder. 
The holder consists, mainly, of an upper 
parta, whichis fixed upon the handle andre 
taining the same position with relation there 
to, andalower parta", whose Shape Conforms 
to the under side of the upper part ( and 
which is adapted to be closed toward and 
opened from the fixed part, and when moved 
away from the fixed part to providean open 
ing to receive the pen, and when moved to 
ward the fixed part to grasp and hold the pen 
between it and the fixed part and in posi 
tion for use. Said movable parta" is prefer 
ably of acylindrical form, but slit upon its 
upper side, substantially asshown at (t", and 
having its opposing edges a a* spaced Some 
what apart, and it is made of Springy mate 
rial to enable said edges a* a, by coming 
| against the pen when the parta" is closed, to 
be sprung toward each other, and thereby pro 
vide for holding the pen more securely and 
advantageously. The parta" is adapted to 
bethus moved toward and from the parta by 
i hinging it either to the fixed partor to the 
handle. The preferable constructionisshowm 
in Figs. 1, 3, and 4, the parta"being hinged at 
D to the inner tubularenda" of the fixed part 
a, substantiallyasshown. Aspring E, ofany 
suitable style and strength, acts when the 
parta is released to close it toward the part 
a. To enable the parta" to be readily drawn 
away from the part a, it is preferably fur 
nishedon its under side, toward the outerend 
of the part, witha projectiona, substantially 
as shown. The spring of itself is useful im 
holding the partain its closed position; but 
I preferably employ other means therefor, 
and which are preferably in the form of the 
projectionsa" ("upom the parta", which, when 
the parta is closed, spring into correspond 
ing recesses a" a in the parta, substantially 
as is indicated in Fig. 7. 
A modification of the construction is ex 
hibited in Fig. 2, the hinge being dispensed 
with and the spring being made to serwe both 
asa hinge and asa meansfor closing the part 
a". In this last form the spring is suitably 
connected with the parta", substantiallyas 
showm. 
To enable the holder when closed to pre 
sent a more symmetrical appearance and to 
strengthen the Construction an additional 
part F may be employed. This last-named 
partis semi-cylindrical to fit the under side 
of the parta" and is fastened thereto at the 
under side thereof and by means of the rivets 
(* a. The part F, in conjunction with the 
parta, thus forms a substantially cylindrical 
construction. When the part Fis used, the 
hinge is applied to the Outer surfacethereof, 
asshowm, and the free end of the spring bears 
immediately againstit; but this part may be 
dispensed with and the parta be immedi 
ately connected with the part a, and the 
spring may bear directly againstit. 
30 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
75 
80 
85 
90 
95 
2 
458,062 
I claim 
In a pen-holder, the combination of the | 1891. 
semi-cylindrical part (, having the tubular 
inner end, the cylindrical split parta", the 
5 hinge, the spring, and the Semi-cylindrical 
part attached to the under side of Said part 
a", substantially as described. 
Witness my hand this 14th day of January, 
{ w 
CHARTLES H. MCKIEE. 
* 
| 
Witnesses: 
C. D. MOODY, 
A. BONVILLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458162.txt	(No Model.) 
L. GUTMANN. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR. 
5 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 458,162, 
Patented Aug. 25, 1891, 
Fig 15 Izzi. 
of test 
4 2- 
214214 
17 ventor 
-427 (zzuzazz. 
WS w-Rs Syser v-sy 
: 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 458,162. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
L. GUTMANN, 
ELECTRIC MOTOR. 
Patented Aug. 25, 1891. 
O 
 
%224 
 
In 767 to ra 
-Ns \\ is Syl ortrey 
24-44242% 
 
(No Model.) 
L. GUTMANN. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 458,162, 
Patented Aug. 25, 1891, 
 
Jr. 2/g2 iO7 
ly vis-SA.V. orm sy 
2-4-44-24? v-yaa 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUD WIG GUTMANN, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,162, dated August 25, 1891. 
Application filed December l, 1888, Serial No, 292,386, (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all whom it may conce77: 
Be it known that I, IUD WIG GUTMANN, a 
subject of the German Emperor, and a resi 
dent of Fort Wayne, in the county of Allen 
and State of Indiana, have invented a certain 
new and useful Improvement in Electric Mo 
tors, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an electric motor 
so constructed as to operate by the action of 
an alternating or similar inducing electric 
current. 
The object of the invention is to provide an 
electric motor of the above-named nature, 
such that it will serve as an economic motor 
having as high an efficiency as the Ordinary 
type of direct-current motor. I have discov 
ered that if I send through the field-magnet 
coils of a motor (with subdivided or laminated 
iron core) an alternating electric current that 
the armature (whether of the independent coil 
or open or closed coil type) will revolve if some 
of the armature-coils are short-circuited in a 
novel manner and the equilibrium in the ar 
mature thereby disturbed. This principle is 
that underlying my motor, and its application 
thereto is described by reference to the ac 
companying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of the motor 
at right angles to the axis of the armature, 
which, together with the commutator, is not 
shown in section, but in end view. Fig. 1" is 
a view of the top, and Fig. 1 a view of the 
bottom or lower, commutator-brush holder, the 
upperbrush resting by gravity or spring-press 
ure like in every dynamo, and the lower One 
also by force of a spring upon the commutator. 
Fig. 2 is a view in elevation of one end of the 
complete motor, a portion of the same being 
shown in section, and the field-magnet COil 
being shown in Fig. 3, as it would cause Con 
fusion if entered in Fig. 2. In Fig. 3 is shown 
also the earth connection and the field-imag 
net core in part. Fig. 4 represents the appli 
cation of the motor to Work circuits, the follr 
motors shown being differently connected up 
in the circuit. Fig. 5 is a modification of the 
construction of the brush, While Fig. 7 is an 
other modification. Fig. 6 illustrates, partly 
in diagram, one way in which the coils of the 
5o armature may be short - circuited by the 
brushes, and by which figure the reason of 
45 
35 
 
7 O 
75 
continuous rotation may be understood. Fig. 
S shows means for regulation. 
The device consists of the combination of 
field-magnets built up of Superposed insu 
lated plates (t, each of such a shape as to be 
comparable to a double E, connected by arc 
shaped pieces II, insulated legs b for support 
ing the Said magnets in an insulated condi 
tion from the earth, coils c of the electrical 
conductors Wound upon the Said cores as to 
the central portion of the double E and hav 
ing their terminals connected to the binding 
posts d, which are insulated from the field 
magnet cores, Screw-capse, Screwed upon the 
insulators of the said posts, and through 
which the said conductors of the Coils are 
continued to the terminals of the alternating 
dynamo f an amature whose commutator 
is represented by the letterg, located between 
the poles of the field-magnets, the armature 
being of any Suitable type mentioned above, 
brushes or contact-piecesh, constructed suffi 
ciently wide as to short-circuit the greater 
part of the idle coils in the Weakest position 
of the magnetic field and connected in an 
insulated manner to the motor by suitable 
Supports, and armature-coils whose terminals 
are indicated in Fig. 6 by numerals plus 1, 
minus 1, plus 2, minus 2, &c., and which are 
shown electrically connected to the commu 
tator-plates in such a manner that the brushes 
embrace a number nearly equal to or larger 
than the number of armature-coils lying in 
the neutral position or in position of least, 
activity, a good conducting - cylinder I, of 
copper, provided with perforations surround 
ing the poles of the field-magnets and lo 
cated within the magnet-coils, the said cylin 
der being connected to earth by the conductor 
and a second earth connection between the 
field-magnet cores and represented by the 
letter l. 
In FigS. 1, 1, 1", and 2 the brushes l are 
each shown as connected to a piece of insu 
lating material 17, which passes through holes 
in supporting-pieces in. The contact between 
the brushes and commutator is established 
in Well-known manner. The upper brush is 
shown here to establish connection by grav 
ity, while in the case of the lower brush the 
Spring O forces the brush against the com 
90 
95 
Od 
g 
458,162 
O 
25 
3) 
35 
40 
o 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
mutator. It is evident that springs may be 
adopted for either brush, or else both may be 
rigidly fixed and act or yield by the elasticity 
of the metal the brush is made of. 
In Fig. 5 the brush is shown resting upon 
the commutator (shown in outline) and sup 
ported in a frame n', in which is a slide p, 
adapted to be pressed against the brush by 
means of screws q, passing through the said 
frame, the said frame being attached to an 
insulator m', provided with a slot through 
which passes a screw. This screw is attached 
to the support ". 
In Fig. 7 the brush is shown to be in con 
tact at both ends with the commutator and 
supported midway by a wedge-shaped piece 
?m', also provided with a slot to be able to 
short-circuit more or less commutator-Sec 
tions by placing the brush nearer to or far 
ther away from the commutator. When the 
binding-posts clare connected to the poles of 
the dynamo F, an alternating current trav 
erses the coils C. 
Experiments show that if I short-circuit 
a number of armature - coils diametrically 
opposite each other and place these short 
circuited coils either equally distant from 
both the field-magnet poles or else in maxi 
mum position (just opposite the poles) that 
there will be no rotation, as the equilibrium 
of the two equal and opposite currents in 
duced in the armature-coils are undisturbed; 
but if these short-circuited coils are placed 
nearer to one field-pole than to the other the 
equilibrium is disturbed. There will be a 
difference of potential at the ends of the short 
circuiting wires and a current will flow from 
the point lying in the stronger magnetic field 
to the point in the weaker position, causing 
a very powerful repulsion and rotation in the 
direction toward the wire end lying in the 
better position. If these coils are perma 
nently short-circuited, they would come to 
rest when arriving at the point of equal maxi 
mum position, as equilibrium is again estab 
lished. It is therefore necessary to effect a 
short-circuit, which remains stationary and is 
prevented to rotate with the armature. If 
this is obtained, the equilibrium will be con 
Stantly disturbed, resulting in constant rota 
tion. This is effected by the use of very wide 
stationary brushes. I prefer the use of double 
tangential brushes, each side of the brush 
forming with the periphery of the commu 
tator an equal or nearly equal angle. The 
width of the brush for short-circuiting a num 
ber of sections depends on the distance of the 
pole-pieces from one another. If there is a 
large distance between the field-magnet poles, 
then it is preferred to have wide brushes; 
but if the distance from one pole to the other 
or the gap is small then the brushes have to 
embrace but a comparatively small number 
of commutator-sections. It is preferred to 
make the brushes embrace all or nearly all 
the coils lying in the neutral or weak posi 
tion. The reason is that as soon as we shift 
the brushes in one or the other direction, as 
shown in Fig. 6, we put one end of the brush. 
in maximum position, while the other end is 
in neutral or minimum position. A powerful 
current will flow from the point of maximum 
position to that of minimum position, and 
causing a powerful repulsion and rotation to 
Ward the point of lmaximum position, as in 
dicated by the arrows, Fig. 6, the dotted lines 
indicating the position of the brushes causing 
that rotation, while in the position in which 
the brushes are drawn in full no rotation 
takes place. In this latter case both the brush 
ends are connecting-coils of equal potential. 
If the brushes are shifted in the opposite di 
rection, the motor slows quickly down and re 
Verses its direction, because the current en 
ters in the opposite direction into the brush 
and armature-coils. As it is only required to 
disturb the equilibrium in the armature to ob 
tain rotation, no outside connections are re 
Quired from the brushes to any circuit nor to 
one another. The potential of the current cir 
culating through the brushes being low and the 
conductivity of said brushes being high, there 
is no need for insulating the brushes; but it is 
preferred to separate them from the field-mag 
nets to prevent any strain and the entering of 
the primary current into the armature-coils. 
The double tangential brush has been designed 
for two reasons-first, to permit the use of the 
same brush for either direction of rotation 
backward and forward; second, to short-cir 
cuit without trouble nearly all the idle por 
tion of the armature-coils, restricting the work 
exclusively to the coils in best position, and 
thereby increasing the efficiency of the mo 
tor. More or less of the coils in weakest mag 
netic position can be cut out by fixing the 
brush h, Fig. 7, nearer to the commutator or 
farther away from it. The farther the brush 
h being removed the more the ends of the 
brush will close up and the smaller will be the 
number of sections embraced; but the more 
it is approached to the commutator the more 
the ends will spread. The amount of current 
circulating through the armature can be regul 
lated by the position of the brushes. As these 
brushes are independent of the remaining 
part of the motor and very little or no spark 
ing is observed, it is convenient to inclose 
them by means of plates S, through which the 
armature-shaft t passes. 
Referring to Fig. 4, the motor A, motor B, 
and motor C are represented as connected in 
multiple arc and each in series with a suit 
able rheostat, by means of which a variable 
number of resistance-coils can be introduced 
into the circuit with the field-magnet coils of 
the motors. This rheostat, preferably an elec 
tro-magnetic rheostat, in each case is repre 
sented by the letter it. The length of the 
conductor of the field-magnet coils and that 
of the rheostat combined is so chosen that 
When the brushes are removed from the com 
mutator the counter electro-motive force 
which the field-magnet coils and those of the 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
45 
 
458,162 
3. 
O 
rheostat can together produce should equal 
or approximately equal the electro-motive 
force in the line or at the terminals of the 
generator. If that is so, there is practically 
no current in the field-magnet coils when the 
motor is doing no work. The current in the 
field-magnet coils is increased by reducing 
the resistance in the exciting-circuit, and as 
that of the motor is a fixed resistance the Wa 
riable resistance is the rheostat, the resist 
ance of which can be varied in different ways 
by varying the amount of iron influenced, by 
decreasing the capacity of the iron, influenc 
ing it by another conductor, or by reducing 
the length, or, what is the same, reducing the 
number of coils of the rheostat in circuit With 
the motor field-coils. The weaker the rheostat 
is made the less opposing resistance is in the 
exciting-circuit, and the larger can be in con 
sequence the current flowing. In the case of 
small motors they may be connected and run 
economically in secondary electric circuits, as 
shown by motor D in Fig. 4. The converter is 
v, connected to the generator f, and the field 
magnet coils are shown connected in the sec 
ondary circuit v of the converter. 
The object of connecting the conductors i 
or the core of the field-magnet to ground is to 
afford greater safety to those who attend the 
machine. 
Referring to Fig. 8, there are additional 
coils c' and c', independent of each other, 
next to the coils cupon the field-magnet core, 
these coils forming secondary conductors for 
carrying currents induced by the current in 
the coils c. The coils c' and c' are shown 
open and independent of one another. One 
terminal of coil c' is connected to the half-cir 
cle F, and one terminal of coil c' is connected 
to the second half-circle marked F. The coils 
c' and c' are subdivided, and the subdivisions 
are connected to the arc-shaped contact-blocks 
of B and B'. Those of coil c' are connected 
to the contact-blocks numbered 1, 2, 3, and 4, 
and those of coil c' are connected to the ter 
minal-blocks marked 5, 6, 7, and S. 
If the 
handle or switch h. h., formed either of a sin 
gle piece or of two insulated contact-pieces, 
rotates to the right, the half-circles F and F' 
are respectively connected with the other ter 
minal of the sub-coil connected to block 1 and 
5, respectively. It will be noticed that an equal 
number of reacting-coils are switched on by 
lever h 1', so as to maintain the pole strength 
of either pole D equal. It is very advanta 
geous to interpose in either of the reacting 
coils c' and c' resistances in parallel to con 
sume the current induced and to prevent po 
lar development; but as the combination is 
fully described and claimed by me in another 
specification, it is only necessary to mention 
it at this place. In the position given in the 
drawings both reacting-coils c' and c' are 
open. As the lever h h' turns to the right or 
left, it inserts one, two, three, four, &c., sub 
divisions of each of the reacting-coils c' c' in 
series with the former subdivisions. It is evi 
dent that the regulation ought to be effected 
mainly in the exciting-circuit, as the power 
which the motor will develop will depend on 
the field strength. Nevertheless it may be 
convenient to be able to increase or decrease 
at Will the armature-carrent. 
In the above specification a special form of 
field-magnet has been referred to; but it is 
evident that the form has little to do with the 
principle. This form has been chosen as be 
ing most effective and simple. Any other form 
may be used. 
I claim as my invention 
1. An alternating-current motor consisting 
of the combination of field-magnet coils con 
nected to the terminals of an alternating-cur 
rent generator, an armature provided with 
coils, and brushes independent and insulated 
from each other, permanently short-circuiting 
less than all the armature-coils. 
2. In an alternating-current motor, the com 
bination of field-magnet coils connected to a 
suitable generator, an armature provided with 
coils connected to a commutator, and brushes 
eachindependentandinsulated from the other, 
each having more than one contact-surface 
in contact with the armature-coils, Some of 
said armature-coils lying in a weak magnetic 
field, the other in a stronger magnetic field. 
3. In a system of alternating-current distri 
bution, the combination of an alternating-cur 
rent generator, a motor whose field-magnet 
coils are in circuit with the said generator, 
external coils also in the same circuit, the 
length of all the said coils being such that 
their total length is adapted to produce a 
counter electro-motive force equal or approxi 
mately equal to that of the main line, the mo 
tor being in its normal condition and doing 
no work, and means for including more or 
less of the external coils into the circuit. 
4. In an electric motor, an insulated bind 
ing-post, combined with a screw-cap screwed 
upon the insulation of the said post and pro 
vided with an aperture for the passage of the 
conductor, which lnay be connected to the 
said post. 
5. In an alternating-current motor, the com 
bination, with an armature, of field-magnet 
cores, field - exciting coils mounted on said 
field-magnet cores and connected in circuit 
with a suitable generator, and subdivided sec 
ondary coils, also mounted on the said field 
magnet cores, connected to a suitable switch, 
the latter being provided with a contact-bar 
adapted to vary the active length of said sec 
ondary coils. 
6. In an alternating-current motor, the com 
bination of rotary armature-coils and station 
alry independent brushes or similar contact 
pieces permanently short-circuiting idle coils 
of the armature. 
7. In an alternating-electric-current motor, 
the combination of an armature and brushes 
or similar contact-pieces, each independent of 
the other and independent of the remaining 
part of the motor, each connecting two dis. 
25 
35 
45 
 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
IIC 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
458,162 
tant commutator-Sections Separated from one 
another by One or more intermediate commu 
tator-sections, the said two sections having a 
different potential. 
8. In an alternating-current motor, field 
magnet coils consisting of such a length of 
conductor as Will produce a counter-pressure 
or counter electro-motive force equal or nearly 
equal to the pressure in the main line, the 
brushes of the motor-armature being sup 
posed to be removed. 
9. In an alternating-current motor, primary 
or exciting coils mounted upon the field-mag 
nets and multiple secondary coils also mount 
ed upon the field-magnets within inductive re 
lation of the said primary coils, and means for 
closing and opening the said secondary coils. 
O 
10. In an alternating-current motor, the com 
bination of field-exciting coils having a defi 
nite length or capacity, an armature inde 
pendent of the field-exciting coils, choking 
coils in series with the field-exciting coils, and 
means for increasing the current round the 
said field-exciting coils. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 24th day of No 
vember, 1888. 
25 
LUDWIG GUTMIANN. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. C. RYAN, 
CHAS. RYAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458262.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 458,262. 
E. J. SW ARTWOUT. 
CORSET. 
Patented Aug. 25, 1891. 
Az-Z 
WITNESSES 
... 32. 
/ -42e/e 
 
1/WWERITOR 
22-221-22 
aara-1, 
1.764%orr 
? 
7.2.2, 6.6% 
AITORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMMA J. SWARTWOUT, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
DELSARTE CORSET COMPANY. 
CO RSET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,262, dated August 25, 1891. 
Application filed November 8, 1890, Serial No, 370,778, (No model.) 
5 
O 
I5 
25 
40 
My invention is a combined corset and adapting itself to the natural form. 
To all whom, it may concern: 
plemental stiffening-strip F, secured thereto 
Be it known that I, EMMA. J. SWARTWOUT, on the inside of the corset to co-operate with 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident the main strip opposite the bust C in pro 
of Newark, in the county of Essex and State ducing the desired form. This supplemental 
of New Jersey, have invented certain new and strip F has suitable stays F, and extends 
lseful Improvements in a Combined Corset horizontally across the proper part, while it 
and Waist, of which the following is a speci- is a section of an ellipse in shape, causing it 
fication. 
to taper toward both ends, thereby better 
Each of the vertical stiffening-strips C has 
Waist embodying certain novel features of 
construction, as hereinafter fully described, eyelet-holes S or other similar fastenings at 
and illustrated in the accompanying draw- its upper end to receive the free end of a 
ings, in which 
shoulder-strap I, extending from the rear or 
Figure I represents a side view thereof. 
waist part of each corset-section, this strap 
Fig. II represents a front view thereof. Fig. 
being permanently fastened on such Waist 
part. By connecting this shoulder-strap to 
III represents a horizontal section thereof. 
Fig. IV represents a partial inside view 
the strip C it is brought into the required po 
thereof, looking toward the front. 
sition on the person, and obtains a very firm 
support at the front of the corset without af. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts. 
fecting its shape. Said waist part of each 
corset-section is usually furnished with but 
The letters A B indicate the two sections 
of the combined corset and waist having any 
tons J at or near the lower edge for adapting 
the corset to support the clothing, as a skirt, 
usual or suitable clasps at the front and the 
usual lacing at the back thereof. Each of 
of the wearer. 
these sections A B is substantially a counter 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
part of the other, and has a stiffening-strip C 
by Letters Patent, is 
at the front of the corset extending vertically 
The combined corset and waist having two 
sections, each formed with a stiffening-strip 
from the top to the bottom thereof, and side 
at the front thereof, extending the vertical 
pieces D D, which are stitched or otherwise 
joined to such strip. The strip C has cords 
length from top to bottom of the article, the 
C at the center and stays C at the edges 
upper end of which strip has fastenings for 
a shoulder-strap, side pieces joined to said 
thereof, both the cords and the stays extend 
ing throughout the length of the strip for 
vertical strip by curved edges for reducing 
imparting thereto the required stiffness. The 
the width of the side pieces at the top and 
bottom above and below the bust line, thereby 
side pieces D D are curved or rounded on 
producing a protuberant bust form, a hori 
One of the edges e thereof, where they are 
zontal stiffening-strip of tapering form on the 
joined to the stiffening-strip C in such a man 
inside of the waist, intersecting said vertical 
ner as to reduce the width of such pieces at 
strip opposite the bust, and a shoulder-strap 
the top and bottom-that is to say, above and 
joined to the rear of each section and pro 
below the bust line or portion of the corset 
the effect of which is to draw the stiffening 
vided with means for engaging Said fasten 
ings of the vertical stiffening-strip, substan 
Strips inward to the corsets at those points, 
causing the intermediate portion of the strip 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
to take a protuberant form, which, thus being 
imparted to the bust portion of either corset 
Section, renders it of a form corresponding to 
that of the female bust. Said protuberant 
bust portion of each corset-section has a sup 
JAS. S. EWBANK, 
CHAS. WAHLERS. 
EMMIA. J. SWARTWOUT. 
Witnesses: 
7 O 
75 
85 
90 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458362.txt	(No Model.) 
J. GIBBONS 
BROILING APPARATUS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 458,362. 
- 6 Patented Aug. 25, 1891, 
Z'ev Z. 
 
  
 
Z'eza 
 
s 
  
ATTORMEY 
 
No. 458,362. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. GIBBONS 
BROLING APRARATUS, 
Patented Aug. 25, 1891. 
A'za 6. 
Z. 
 
N 
WITNESSES. 
(-fa 
2C-4- 
ATTORMEY 
The MoRRis FETERs co., Hore-Tho...washington, c. c. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES GIBBONS, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
BROLING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,362, dated August 25, 1891. 
Application filed April 13, 1891, Serial No. 388,744 (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it...known that I, JAMES GIBBONS, resid 
ing at Jersey City, in the county of Hudson 
and State of New Jersey, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Broil 
ing Apparatus, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
Myinvention relates to apparatus designed 
for broiling meats, fish, and other food pro 
O duets, and more especially adapted for use 
in hotels or restaurants, where extensive and 
prompt service of food is necessary. This 
apparatus is of duplex or multiple charac 
ter-that is to say, there are a series of broil 
ing-chambers arranged side by side. 
The object of the present invention is to 
improve the construction of the broiling and 
cooking apparatus shown and described in 
pending or concurrent applications bearing 
Serial Nos. 351,243,353,375, and 387,417, in 
such manner as shall make the apparatus 
more convenient, safe, and economical in use. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction and combinations of 
parts of the apparatus, all as hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
and in which similar letters of reference in 
dicate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my im 
proved broiler with the fluid-fuel-feed pipes 
partly broken away. Fig. 2 is a plan view 
of the apparatus partly broken away and in 
section in different horizontal planes. Fig. 3 
is a front view of the rear wall-plates of the 
broiling and fire chambers. Fig. 4 is a de 
tail perspective view of a few of the upper 
fume-conduits of the apparatus. Fig. 5 is a 
transverse vertical sectional view taken 
through one of the broiling-chambers, with 
two grids indicated therein in dotted lines. 
Fig. 6 is a transverse vertical sectional view 
taken through one of the fire-chambers of the 
apparatus, and Fig. 7 is a front vertical Sec 
tional view of the apparatus. 
The broiler shown in the drawings is of 
quadruplex construction, or has four inde 
pendent broiling-chambers AA AA and five 
fire-chambers B B B B B to heat them, all 
preferably arranged within a common casing 
or frame C. It will be understood, however, 
25 
35 
45 
that the same novel principles of construction 
may be embodied in a broiling apparatus 
having but two or three or more than four 
broiling-chambers. 
The outside walls of the two end fire-chann 
bers B B of the apparatus are formed, pref 
erably, of inclined fire-bricks b b, with a back 
ing b', of asbestus or other non-conducting 
material, behind them or between them and 
the end walls of the main casing. The other 
or inner walls of the two end fire-chambers, 
as also both side Walls of the other or inter 
mediate fire-chambers, are formed by the 
cooking plates or walls a cit, which are prefer 
ably made of comparatively thin metal, either 
cast or rolled, and are preferably fitted to 
slide into place from the front of the casing 
upon or into suitable guides or slideways a', 
which, as shown, form parts of the top and 
bottom walls or plates of the fire and broil 
ing chambers of the broiler. These cooking 
walls C, will be hereinafter more particularly 
described. 
Below each fire-chamber B there is a com 
municating or auxiliary chamberID, in which 
is located the burner or, it may be, burners E, 
of any suitable character or any other ap 
proved source of heat, the hot products of 
which will rise into the fire-chamber to heat 
the cooking walls or plates a of the broiling 
chambers. I prefer the fluid-fuel burners 
shown, which are held to mixing-tubes e, ex 
tended to atmospheric air-inlet and gas-nip 
ple Supply-bulbs or devices e' outside the 
main casing and connecting by suitable cocks 
e' with a main tubular raile', to which a gas 
Supply pipe will be coupled. The side walls 
of the burner-chambers Dare preferably fixed 
or permanent, as also is the lower plated, 
which forms the bottom to all these chambers, 
and the lower chambers A', located below the 
broiling-chambers A, and being practically 
lower extensions thereof. The plate d has 
apertures or openings at the bottoms of the 
chambers A to allow final drip of the fat 
from the food being broiled in the chambers 
A to receiving pans or drawers F, which are 
fitted to draw out from and close the front of 
the casing between its plate d and bottom 
plate c. 
I prefer to intercept the dripping 
fat by trays.f, placed on the plated and pro 
vided with a few comparatively small bottom 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
458,362 
O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
holes, through which the fat finally falls into ward past the meat or food and cause it to be 
nicely browned on both sides, and at the same 
the main receivers F below. The trays pro 
time the air is highly Superheated as it passes 
tect the main body of the fat in the pans F 
by the hot cooking-walls. This superheated 
from the heat of the broiling-chambers and 
air laden with fatty fumes escaping from the 
prevent lighting of the fat in the pans and 
food is then drawn rearward through the 
The trays 
also shield the pans from dust. 
broiling-chamber opening g into the passage 
draw out from the fixed front plate c' of the 
H, and thence downward to and through the 
casing, to which the burner-pipes are held, and 
openingg' into the burner-chamber D, whence 
above this plate c' is a removable or openable 
the commingled superheated air and fatty 
front plate c, giving free access to the burn 
fumes rise past the burner-tips to maintain 
ers and retained by suitable lips and turn 
very hot combustion thereat and in the fire 
buckles. Front holes c' also are provided at 
chambers B B at opposite sides of the broil 
the lower front portions of the fire-chambers 
ing-chamber, the fatty fumes serving as ad 
to allow introduction of a taper to light the 
ditional fuel and promoting economy of fluid 
burners and also permit inspection of them 
fuel in operating the apparatus. The pro 
to determine if they are working properly. 
ducts of combustion enter the upper cham 
These sight-holes may be closed either by 
ber J and pass off at k K to the final exit-fiue. 
sliding or hinged lids or covers, as shown in 
The atmospheric air and gas entering the 
Fig. 1 of the drawings. 
burner-bulbs e' and commingling within their 
A partition-plate G extends clear across the 
mixing-tubes e and fed thence to the burner 
casing C, preferably within an inch or two of 
tips is entirely free from the fatty fumes 
its rear wall, and forms the back wall of all 
which pass upward around the outside of the 9 
the broiling, fire, and burner chambers of the 
apparatus. The upper edge portion of this 
burner into the fire-chambers. Hence the 
burners always give clear blue and very hot 
plate G is flanged rearward to the rear wall 
flames to promote most effective consumption 
of the casing, thereby making a space or pas 
of the fatty fumes as fuel within the fire 
sage H between the plate and said rear wall. 
Openings g in the plate Gestablish commu 
chambers. It will also be noticed that be 
cause of the indirect or circuitous course of 
nication between the passage Hand the upper 
the hot air and fatty fumes from the broiling 
rear portion of each of the broiling-chambers 
chamber to the fire-chambers, together with 
A of the apparatus, and lower openings g in 
the substantially imperforate construction of 
the plate G connect said passage with each of 
the broiling-chamber cooking-walls, the broil 
the burner-chambers D of the broiler. The 
ing is effected without contamination of the 
tops of the broiling- chambers are closed, 
food by gaseous or other products of the 
either by the bottoms of the upper fatty-fume 
sources of heat employed in the fire-chambers. 
conduits I, which are in the upper hot pro 
I prefer to subdivide the superheated air 
duct-chamber J of the apparatus, or it may 
and fatty-funne passage H, in order to restrict 
be by separate imperforate cap-plates. A 
said air-and-fume mixture escaping from one 
wide flanged opening i conducts the waste 
broiling-chamber within certain limits, or to 
hot products received in the chamber J from 
cause said mixture to be consumed only in 
all the fire-chambers B out through an elbow 
the fire-chambers nearest to the broiling 
or other suitable fitting K, to which a flue 
connecting pipe will be attached, said hot 
chamber whence it came, to secure the best 
products escaping from the chamber J through 
results when only one or two or less than all 
of the broiling-chambers are in use. This 
a few quite contracted openingsk in the back 
subdivision is well effected by a series of 
wall of the casing, in order to prevent too free 
flanges or partitions h, which extend between 
draft through the apparatus and confine the 
the plate G and the rear wall of the casing 
heat, and assure most effective heating of the 
from top to bottom of the passage H. As 
broiling-chamber, cooking-walls, and also to 
there is always one more burner-chambers 
allow boiling, Stewing, or frying on the top 
than there are broiling-chambers in the ap 
plate C of the casing, which has ordinary 
paratus, the hot air and fatty-fume mixture 
pot-holes to receive the cooking vessels or 
from one of the broiling-chambers will be 
utensils. After the contiguous opposing cook 
conducted to two fire-chambers, while this 
ing walls or plates a C of any one or more of 
mixture from every other broiling-chamber 
the broiling- chambers A are heated suffi 
will pass to but one burner and fire-chamber, 
ciently by the burners E, flaming behind 
the burner or burners of which are of suffi 
them, and one or more grids L (shown in dot 
cient capacity to assure combustion of the 
ted lines in Fig. 5 of the drawings and con 
mixture to the best advantage. The location 
taining food to be broiled) are suspended or 
of the partitions h relatively to the broil 
supported within a broiling-chamber, and 
ing-chamber outlets g and fire-chamber inlets 
after the doors A* of said chamber are closed 
g' of the plate G is shown in Fig. 3 of the 
as far as the grid-handles will allow (or should 
drawings. Not quite all of the fatty fumes 
the doors be left open) the food will be broiled 
will pass rearward with the air drawn through 
on both sides at once by heat radiated from 
the broiling-chambers and thence to the fire 
the cooking-walls a ct of the chamber, and 
chambers, as above described, as a compara 
atmospherie air, which is drawn inward freely 
tively small volume of the fumes will es 
at the front of the chamber, will sweep rear 
I do. 
d 
II5 
25 
I3) 
 
458,862 
cape at the front of the broiling chamber or 
chambers. I dispose of these latter fumes by 
providing a hood Mat the front of the broiler 
and a series of the above-named fume-con 
duits I, which are arranged one above each 
broiling-chamber and are open at both ends, 
one end of each conduit communicating with 
the hood M and its other end discharging the 
fatty fumes drawn rearward from beneath the 
hood into the flue-outlet K of the apparatus. 
These interior conduits I, which extend across 
the upper hot-product chamber J, are shown 
in Fig. 4 of the drawings as made of a single 
piece of sheet metal turned or bent upward 
and inward at the ends, which are seamed to 
gether along the top, while their laterally 
projected rear end flanges i are riveted to 
each other and to the rear wall of the casing, 
the contracted outlets k being made in or 
through both flanges and wall. (See Fig. 7 
of the drawings.) 
A special feature of construction consists in 
the extension of the front doors A of the 
broiling-chamber. A upwardly sufficiently far 
to cause them to close the front ends of the 
conduits I, as they close the fronts of the 
broiling-chambers, as shown in Fig. 5 of the 
drawings. With this arrangement, when the 
broiling chamber or chambers not in use are 
closed at the front by corresponding doors A, 
said doors also closing the conduits I above 
these unused chambers, will prevent rear 
Ward draft through said chambers and con 
duits and facilitate a better draft through the 
other chamber or chambers which are in use 
and the conduits over them. . It will also be 
noticed that by closing the doors of the un 
used broiling-chambers, and therefore also 
closing the conduits above said chambers, the 
fumes escaping at the front of the used broil 
ing-chambers are excluded from the unused 
chambers and the conduits above them. 
Hence said fumes cannot permeate other por 
tions of the apparatus, but will be swept rear 
ward from the hood M by and with the in 
creased draft of air through the open con 
duit or conduits over the broiling chamber or 
chambers in use. 
A pipe N, which extends along the front of 
the upper hot-product chamber J, and thence 
rearward at both ends through the rear wall 
of the main casing C for pipe connections to a 
circulating-boiler (not shown) of any ap 
proved construction, provides an effective 
water-back device, which is economically 
heated by waste hot products from the fire 
chambers B before the products take final 
exit from the apparatus. This pipe water 
backis sustained partly or alongits front por 
tion by or from the fume-conduits I. (See 
Figs. 5 and 6 of the drawings.) 
An important feature of this invention 
consists in the use of a heat distributing and 
radiating plate or body in the intermediate 
fire-chambers of the broiler apparatus, or those 
fire-chambers receiving hot products from one 
source of heat and having opposing side walls 
- 
forming cooking walls or plates of two adja 
cent independent broiling-chambers. This 
heat distributing and radiating plate con 
sists, preferably, of a slab or piece O, of soap 
stone or fire-brick or other refractory mate 
rial, which is held centrally edgewise between 
the two adjacent cooking-walls C. C. of two in 
dependent broiling-chambers A A. It prefer 
to sustain the slab or plate O by shoulders o 
O of it resting upon corresponding shoulders 
of vertically-ranging front and rear soap 
stone or fire-brick or other refractory slabs 
or plates PP, which are sustained next the 
front wall of the casing and the rear partition 
plate G of the apparatus. These plates P 
are centrally grooved at p to receive the 
edges of the heat distributer or radiator. O, 
which is slipped downward into the grooves 
after the plates P are in position. A cap 
piece or plate o' may or may not be secured 
across the casing above the parts OPP to 
hold them down to promote Safety during 
transportation. The lower portion of the 
heat distributer and radiator O is preferably 
tapered downward to present a comparatively 
thin edge to the flame rising from the burner 
Ebelow it or from any other source of heat 
in the fire-chamber. The plate O is also 
preferably perforated with a series of holes 
o, which increase its heat-radiating func 
tion. These holes may be substituted by 
pockets or recesses or corrugations of any 
suitable character, as instanced by the cen 
ter plate in Fig. 7 of the drawings, the object 
being to obtain as large a heat-radiating sur 
face as possible. It is manifest that the hot 
products rising from the burner E or other 
source of heat in any one of the intermediate 
fire-chambers will on striking the lower edge. 
of the plate Obe deflected or distributed to 
both sides of the plate and will be led upward 
quite closely to the adjacent cooking-walls a 
a to heat both of them evenly and effectively, 
and the heat taken up by the plate and ra 
diated therefrom to the cooking-walls very 
materially assists in keeping them at proper 
temperature. Ifind in practice that by using 
this heat distributer and radiator, as above 
described, a very marked economy in con 
sumption of gaseous fuel is assured, as two. 
cooking-walls of two adjacent but independ 
ent broiling-chambers can be heated with but 
one-third more gas than is required to heat 
but one cooking-wall, the outside cooking 
wall of the end broiling- chambers, for in 
stance. 
It will be understood that these heat dis 
tributers and radiators give specially good 
results when used in combination with fluid 
fuel burners which flame with concentrated 
heating effect directly against their lower 
edges. Hence I hereinafter specially claim 
the heat distributers and burners in this mu 
tual relation. It is further obvious that these 
heat distributers and radiators are not limited, 
in use to the multiple-broiler apparatus herein 
shown and described. Hence they may be 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
CO 
IO 
II5 
I3) 
458,862 
7 O 
75 
tween the broiling and fire chambers, an up 
used in the multiple-broiler apparatus shown 
per hot-product chamber J being provided 
in the above-named concurrent applications 
in the casing, conduits I in Said chamber J, 
and with very advantageous results. I also 
and final outlets, as at kK, from this chamber 
find it desirable in practice to corrugate the 
for the hot waste products, substantially as 
opposing or inner faces of the cooking-walls 
ct of the broiling-chambers. These corruga 
described. 
4. The combination, in a broiling apparatus, 
tions may extend in any or all directions 
of a casing or frame, a series of food-broiling 
across the surface of the plate; but I prefer. 
and air-superheating chambers A and adja 
at present to corrugate the plate vertically, 
cent fire- chambers B therein, chambers A 
as shown at the right hand in Fig. 7 of the 
below the chambers A, chambers D below 
drawings, and to make the plate quite thin, 
the chambers B, fluid-fuel burners in the 
so that these corrugations appear alike at 
chambers D and provided at their mixing 
both its outer and inner faces. These facial 
corrugations give the plate a larger heating 
tubes and outside the burner or fire chambers 
with air-inlets, a partition G in the casing, 
and radiating surface and also provide for 
provided with openings g g and forming a 
taking up expansion of the plate within it 
passage H, giving indirect communication be 
self or prevent lengthening of the plate, as it 
tween the broiling and fire chambers, an up 
is gradually heated to a proper temperature, 
per hot-product chamber J being provided 
and preferably to a dull-red color. This cor 
rugated cooking plate or wall may or may not 
in the casing, conduits I in said chamber J, 
be provided with a laterally-extending front 
final outlets, as at k R, from this chamber for 
the hot-waste products, and a hood M in front 
flange to lap onto the front of the casing E, 
of the conduits I, substantially as described. 
and when the plate is to be used for a broil 
5. The combination, in a broiling apparatus, 
ing-chamber, having sufficient height to ac 
of a casing or frame, a series of broiling 
commodate two grids L, one above the other, 
chambers A and fire-chambers B therein, 
said cooking plates or walls will have two in 
wardly-extending flanges act, on which the 
chambers A' below the chambers A, chambers 
grids will be sustained centrally within the 
D below the chambers B, fluid-fuel burn 
ers in the chambers l), said casing having a 
broiling-chamber by lateral projections rest 
front portion c', sustaining the burner-fittings, 
These flanges a may be 
ing on the flanges. 
and a removable or operable front portion c', 
cast directly on the plate or may be secured 
giving access to the burners, substantially as 
thereto in any approved manner. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
described. 
6. A broiling apparatus made with two or 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
more broiling-chambers, fire-chambers at the 
ters Patent 
sides thereof and with which the broiling 
1. The combination, in a broiling appara 
chambers indirectly communicate, fatty-fume 
tus, of a casing or frame, a series of food 
conduits above the broiling- chambers, and 
broiling and air-superheating chambers A and 
doors fitted to the broiling-chambers and ex 
adjacent fire-chambers B therein, and a rear 
partition G in the casing, having upper open 
tended to close the fume-conduits, substan 
tially as described, whereby when the doors of 
ings g and lower openings g and providing a 
the unused broiling-chambers are closed the 
passage H, giving indirect communication be 
corresponding fume - conduits will also be 
tween the broiling and fire chambers, sub 
closed to increase the draft through the broil 
stantially as described. 
ing and fire chambers and the respective con 
2. The combination, in a broiling apparatus, 
duits in use and exclude the fatty fumes from 
of a casing or frame, a series of food-broiling 
unused parts of the apparatus, as herein set 
and air-superheating chambers A and adja 
cent fire-chambers B therein, and a rear parti 
forth. 
tion G in the casing, having upper openingsg 
7. A broiling apparatus made with two or 
more broiling-chambers, fire-chambers at the 
and lower openings g and providing a pas 
sides thereof, and heat-radiating deflectors in 
sage H, giving indirect communication be 
tween the broiling and fire chambers, said pas 
the intermediate fire chamber or chambers 
distributing the flame or heat toward cooking 
sage being fitted with partitions apportioning 
Walls of two adjacent broiling-chambers, sub 
the hot, air and fatty-fume mixture from the 
stantially as described. 
broiling-chambers to the adjacent fire-chain 
S. A broiling apparatus made with two or 
bers, substantially as described. 
more broiling-chambers, fire-chambers at the 
3. The combination, in a broiling apparatus, 
sides thereof, fluid-fuel burners adapted to 
of a casing or frame, a series of food-broiling 
and air-superheating chambers A and adja 
flame into said fire-chambers, and heat-radi 
ating deflectors in the intermediate fire-cham 
cent fire-chambers B therein, chambers A' 
bers above the burners and distributing their 
below the chambers A, chambers D below the 
flames or heat toward cooking-walls of two 
chambers B, and fluid-fuel burners, in the 
adjacent broiling-chambers, substantially as 
chambers D and provided at their mixing 
described. 
tubes and outside the burner or fire chambers 
9. A broiling apparatus made with two or 
with air-inlets, a partition G in the casing, 
more broiling-chambers, fire-chambers at the 
provided with openings g g and forming a 
passage H, giving indirect communication be- sides thereof, and heat-radiating deflectors in 
OC 
I I5 
I 25 
IC) 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
 
458,362 
25 
35 
two adjacent broiling-chambers, substantially 
as described. 
12. The combination, in a broiling appara 
tus, of a series of broiling- chambers, fire 
chambers at the sides thereof, sources of heat 
in the fire-chambers, front and rear Supports 
in the intermediate fire-chambers, and heat 
radiating deflecting-plates fitted to slide in 
the supports and sustained edgewise by them. 
between opposing cooking-walls of adjacent 
broiling-chambers, substantially as described. 
13. The combination, in a broiling appara 
tus and with a series of adjacent broiling 
chambers and fire-chambers betweenthem, of 
heat-radiating deflectors O, having shoulders 
O and lateral or facial perforations or corru 
gations, and grooved and shouldered front 
and rear plates P, sustaining the deflectors 
within the intermediate fire-chambers, sub 
stantially as described. 
JAMES GIBBONS. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER H. BABCOCK, 
LOUIS G. CLARK, 
O 
the intermediate fire-chambers, provided with 
downwardly-tapering lower parts presented 
edgewise to the source of heat in the fire 
chambers and distributing the flame or heat 
toward cooking-walls of two adjacent broil 
ing-chambers, substantially as described. 
10. A broiling apparatus made with two or 
more broiling-chambers, fire-chambers at the 
sides thereof, and heat-deflectors in the inter 
mediate fire-chanbers distributing the flame 
or heat toward cooking-walls of two adjacent 
broiling-chambers, said deflectors having lat 
eral or facial perforations or corrugations, 
substantially as described. 
11. A broiling apparatus made with a cas 
ing or frame, two or more broiling-chambers 
therein, fire - chambers at the sides of the 
broiling- chambers, said broiling - chambers 
-communicating indirectly with the fire-cham 
2O bers which consume fatty fumes from the 
food, and heat-radiating deflectors in the in 
termediate fire - chambers distributing the 
flame or heat from the consuming hot air and 
fatty-fume mixture toward cooking-walls of 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458462.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 458,462. 
 
E. A. KAESTNER, 
MILK CAN. 
Patented Aug. 25, 1891, 
ass 
2. 
S. - - - 
s 
S. at 
2. 
W2727esses, 
 
7 s 24 a X 
w 
P 
a 
Z722/ea/2 
r 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNEST A. KAESTNER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
MLK CAN. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,462, dated August 25, 1891. 
Anglication filed May 8, 1891, Serial No, 391,995, (No model.) 
O 
To all Lwhom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ERNEST A. KAESTNER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bal 
timore city, in the State of Maryland, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Milk-Cans; and I do declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the Salme. 
This invention has relation to an improve 
ment in milk-cans and like articles; and it 
has for its main object to provide an auto 
matic or self-locking top, which may be ap 
plied to cans such as at present in use or 
placed on cans of new manufacture. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide, in connection with such a fastening, a 
cheap and efficient means of ventilation, the 
parts being SO constructed and arranged for 
joint operation as to prevent any possibility 
of the cover or top flying from the can by 
rough or careless handling, as well as pre 
venting the Waste of any milk should the can 
be thrown over or upset. 
Other objects and advantages will appear 
from the following description and claims, 
when taken in connection with the annexed 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the upper 
portion of a can with the cover in position 
and my improvements applied. Fig. 2 is a 
diametrical vertical sectional view of the 
Same; and Fig. 3 is a sectional detail view 
taken at the point indicated by the dotted 
line cac on Fig. 2. 
Referring by letter to said drawings, Ain 
dicates the neck of a milk-can, which may be 
of any ordinary or approved form. This 
neck is provided in one of its outer sides with 
a groove or recess C. This groove, which is 
formed by dropping or depressing the mate 
rial in Wardly in a vertical position, forms a 
correspondingly-shaped ribb on the inner side 
of the neck, for a purpose which will be pres 
ently explained. 
B indicates a catch, which may be formed 
of brass, spring-steel wire, or other suitable 
material. This catch is secured at its lower 
end in the lower end of the groove or recess 
Ct by solder or otherwise, and its opposite or 
upper end is provided with a short angular 
or inwardly-directed branch c, which passes 
through a hole d at the upper end of the 
groove C, and through a hole e in the depend 
ing flange or skirt C of the cover. It will be 
observed that the normal position of the catch 
or fastener B is seated in the groove or recess . 
of the neck, with its inwardly-directed branch 
in the hole d of the neck, so that it will al 
ways be in a position to enter the hole in 
the cover, so as to effect a quick fastening. 
The cover has a longitudinal vertical groove 
f in the skirt or depending flange C, which 
starts from the lower end of said flange and 
is of a length approximately the same or 
greater than the rib or projection in the neck. 
This groove fin the cover is designed to re 
ceive the rib on the inner side of the neck, and 
is provided at or near its upper end with a 
transverse hole e, designed to coincide with 
the hole d in the neck to receive the upper 
end c of the spring-catch B. The hole e in 
the cover is closed from communication with 
the interior thereof by a plate D, which is 
so arranged around said hole on the inner 
side of the cover as to form an interspace or 
chamber 1. 
E indicates a hole in the roof of the cover, 
which is placed at a point within the cham 
ber h, so as to form a communication between 
the chamber and the open air. 
It will thus 
be seen that the depending flange of the 
cover has a hole which enters the chamber h, 
and that the top of Said chamber also has a 
hole, so that when the top or cover has been 
inserted in the neck a certain amount of air 
in the can, which would be caused by a rapid 
placement of the cover to force up milk, will 
be exhausted from the can bypassing through 
the hole e into the chamber h, and thence out 
through the hole E in the top thereof. 
F indicates a stop or guard for the catch or 
fastener B. This stop bridges the groove a 
of the neck and also the fastener B at a suit 
able point from its upper end. Said guard or 
stop is soldiered or otherwise secured to the 
neck of the can and is provided at opposite 
ends with branches i, which are designed to 
serve the additional function of bearings for 
an implement which may be used to prize or 
disengage the fastener from the hole in the 
depending flange of the cover, as the continual 
operation of lifting out the catch or fastener 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
o 
75 
95 
OC 
458,462 
45 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
having a vertical groove in the Outer side of 
its neck and a corresponding rib on the inner 
side and also having the hole in the upper 
end of the groove, and a spring-catch secured 
in the lower end of the groove and its upper 
angular end adapted to enter the hole in both 
the neck and cover, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination, with a milk-can hav 
ing a transverse hole in its neck, of a catch 
fixedly connected at one end to the neck and 
having an inwardly-directed branch movable 
in said hole, and a top or cover having a verti 
cal groove in its depending flange and also 
having a hole in the upper end of the groove 
to receive the catch, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination, with a milk-can hav 
ing a vertical groove in the outer side of its 
neck and a hole in the upper end of Said 
groove, of a spring-catch having its upper end 
directed inwardly through said hole and its 
opposite end secured in the groove, the guard 
arranged over the groove and catch and hav 
ing the bearing branches, and a cover having 
a groove in its depending flange and a hole 
in the upper end of said groove to receive the 
catch, Substantially as Specified. 
4. A can or vessel top having a vertical 
groove in its depending flange and a hole in 
the upper end of said groove, in combination 
with a can or vessel having a vertical groove 
in the outer side of its neck and a hole in the 
upper end of said groove, and a spring-catch 
having its upper end directel inwardly 
through said hole and its opposite end fixedly 
secured in the groove, Substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ERNEST A K AESTNER, 
Witnesses; 
HENRY KLEES, 
S. A. MORSE. 
O 
from the hole in the cover-flange will have a 
tendency to injure the neck of the can at that 
point. 
The top is provided with an overhanging 
marginal flange G, which is designed to re 
ceive Within it the neck of the can, as shown, 
and also an interposed gasket, which may be 
made of rubber or other suitable material. 
By the employment of this overhanging flange 
and the gasket therein it is obvious that a 
very tight joint will be effected between the 
upper edge of the neck and the cover and all 
liability of spilling or wasting of milk pre 
vented. 
To place the top or cover upon a can pro 
vided with my improvements, it is simply 
necessary to bring the groove in the flange 
of the cover over the branch C of the fastener 
in the neck, when by plunging the former 
down to its seat the catch will spring into the 
hole e of the cover and securely hold it in po 
sition. To remove the top, it is simply neces 
sary to insert any pointed implement, which 
in Some cases might be a knife-blade, under 
the catch, so as to bring its branch c out of 
the hole in the cover-flange, when said cover 
may be easily removed. 
While I have described minutely the con 
struction here shown, yet it is obvious that 
changes in the shape and arrangement of 
parts may be made without departing from 
the spirit of my invention, and it is also ob 
vious that my improvements may be applied 
to devices besides milk-cans. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A can or vessel top having a vertical 
groove in its depending flange and a hole in 
the upper end of Said groove, and also having 
a chamber surrounding said hole on the inner 
side thereof and an opening in the top of the 
chamber, in combination with a can or vessel 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458562.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. EGGLESTON, 
PRINTER'S GACE PIN, 
No. 458,562, 
Patented Sept, l, 1891. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. EGGLESTON, OF MIN NEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA. 
PRINTERS GAG E. P. N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,562, dated September 1, 1891. 
Application filed May 14, 1891. Serial No. 392,725, (No model.) 
To all whom it invay conce7n 
Be it known that I, JAMES W. EGGLESTON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Min 
neapolis, in the county of Hennepin and State 
of Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Printers' Gage-Pins; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
an improvement in printers' gage-pins. To 
this end I employ a device comprising a base 
securable to the platen and a series of inter 
changeable retaining-pieces differing in width 
of face or retaining-surface securable to the 
base-piece. 
The device is illustrated in the accompany. 
ing drawings, wherein like letters refer to 
like parts throughout the several views. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the device in 
Working position. Figs. 2 and 3 are respect 
ively a plan and rear elevation of the platen 
of the printing-press with two of the gage 
pins in position thereon. Fig. 4 is a plan view 
of the base-piece of the gage secured to a por 
tion of the platen-covering, and Fig. 5 is a 
sectional elevation of the same on the line X 
X'. Fig. 6 shows the series of interchange 
able parts. Fig. 7 is a rear view of a yoke 
like strip for more permanently securing the 
base of the gage-pin to the platen-covering. 
A B C are respectively the frame, the im 
pression-bed, and the platen of a hand print 
ing-press. 
D is a covering, of paper or felt, secured on 
the upper face of the platen, and D' repre 
sents an envelope or other blank material 
held in position by the gage-pins. 
E F are the gage-pins, of which E is the 
base, and F is one of the interchangeable re 
taining pieces. This base-piece E is of T 
shape, having its head provided with an elon 
gated slite, extending lengthwise thereof. To 
the under side, at either extremity of this 
head, are secured brad-like pins e', extending 
55 
slightly downward, then bent upon themselves 
rearward to permit their insertion below the 
surface of the platen-covering, as best shown 5o 
in Figs. 4 and 5. The interchageable parts 
F are angular pieces of thin metal, the de 
pending portions f of which fit the slite of 
the base-piece E, where they will be held by 
friction. One or another of the interchanger 
able pieces is employed, according to the re 
quirements of the work. 
To more rigidly secure the base of the gage: 
pin to the platen, I may employ a strip G, of 
heavy paper or other suitable material, which 
is looped over the stem of the base-piece, as 
shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 7. 
It may be possi 
ble to dispense with the bradse' and rely on 
the loop A alone to secure the base to the 
laten. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is as follows: 
1. In a gage-pin, the combination, With a 
base-piece attachable to the face of the platen, 
of a series of interchangeable retaining-pieces 
securable to the base-piece, having different 
widths of face or retaining-Surface. 
2. In a gage-pin, the combination, With a slit 
ted base-piece attachable to the face of the 
platen, of a series of interchangeable retain 
ing-pieces having different widths of face of 
retaining-surface provided with a downturned 
flange fitting the slit in the base-piece for ser 
curing the same therein. 
. 
3. In a gage-pin, the combination, with the 
T-shaped base-piece, of a strip of flexible ma 
terial overlapping the stem of the base-piece 
and secured to the face of the platen by ad 
hesive material. 
4. In a gage-pin, the combination, With a 
T-shaped base-piece E, having the bradse', 
of the strip of flexible material G, Substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES W. EGGLESTON. 
75 
so 
Witnesses: 
ENOS B. WHITMORE, 
M. D. PHILLIPS, 
IO 
15 
25 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458662.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. PENDLETON, 
MILL, 
4. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 458,662, 
 
Patented Sept. 1, 1891. 
its, 
Sounendletom. 
his Attorney 
(No Model.) 
No. 458,662. 
J. H., PENDLETON, 
MILL. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 1891. 
Fi 
VI 
evastaway 
Wit. ESSES 
: % 
7 *-74% els 
14 
2- 
invarior 
also 
JSny 
Q 
Y. 
OY 
04-16-v Z-6 
h 3ttorney. 
by 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 458,662. 
 
J. H. PENDLETON, 
M.ILL. 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Sept. 1, 1891. 
IIILudhun 
- VIII 
is 34 
| 
M2 . 
d 
/7 
2 Y 
s 
y 
- 2 E. 
iz 38 
r 
Y 
a 3 
* 
YNit. In E S S E S 
2. 21- 2%. 
6(e-C 
77/2244. 
r v. 
ca 
12 
aa 
1. 
2 f 
A1 
Irve Dr. 
onry 
F. 
nvy endleton 
a 3 J0 
b 1224-44 
will tomew 
 
(No Model.) 
J. H. PIENDLETON, 
MILL. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
No. 458,662. 
Patented Sept. 1, 1891. 
  
 
s 
etzee NSN % S 
  
 
 
  
wire SS B S 
genessess 222 
2nSSA s 
S. Z. 4 
ass 
Inve r r 
Jenny. Pendleton 
sq 2.2126-0 
his 
termel. 
is oals peers co., protorlito, WASHINGTON, - e. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. PENDLETON, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO DAVID 
J. NEWLAND AND CHARLES W. THOMAS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
M. L.L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,662, dated September 1, 1891. 
Application filed April 27, 1891, Serial No. 390,671. (No model.) 
2O panying drawings, in which- 
Io hulling, grinding, screening, or separating are levers attached at one end to the recepta- 6o 
I5 and the walls of the mill. 
the bed-plate of the frame 1. A door 12 is 65 
25 the positions of the various parts and the ing, as the case may be. For grinding and 75 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and ling centrally through the receptacle 5, the 55 
ings 1414 are applied, which are made up of 7c 
To all, whom it invady concern. 
the material to be treated is placed. 22 are 
Be it known that I, JOHN FI. PENDLETON, a short shafts, from which project two arms 3 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 3 to form crank-shafts. To the outer ends of 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State said crank-shafts is secured the shaft 4, pass 
useful Improvements in Mills, of which the latter either being free to turn upon said 
following is a specification. 
shaft or the shaft to turn in bearings in the 
My invention has reference to improve- arms 33. To one of the shafts 2 are attached 
ments in mills, and especially to mills for the driving and loose pulleys 7 and 7. SS 
and polishing grain and other substances, in cle 5, their opposite ends having bearings on 
which centrifugal force is utilized to produce a horizontal shaft 9, which is rigidly secured 
pressure, while at the same time a relative to links 10 10, having their lower ends se 
motion is produced between the substance cured to a shaft 11, which has its bearings in 
My invention consists in certain novel fea- provided at the upper side of the receptacle 
tures in the construction of Such mills, as for charging the same, and at the lower side 
fully pointed out in the following specifica- a door 13 is provided for discharging. On the 
tion and claims, and illustrated in the accom- heads and inner walls of the receptacle lin 
Figure 1 represents an end elevation of a material to suit the work to be performed 
mill constructed in accordance with my in- such, for instance, as buhr-stone, corrugated 
vention. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. iron, or any other suitable material for hull 
Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are cross-sections showing ing, grinding, scouring, pulverizing, or polish 
contents of the receptacle during certain the like a hard lining is necessary, while for 
periods of a revolution. Fig. 5 is a cross-polishing a softer one must be used. Suit 
section illustrating a modified form of the able counterpoise-Weights 66 are provided to 
receptacle. Fig. 6 is a side elevation, partly balance the system. The material to be op 
ous feed. Fig. 7 is a section in the plane and shaft 2 is caused to revolve rapidly by 
aca, Fig. 6. 
Fig. S is a side elevation of a means of pulley 7. The receptacle as a whole 
duplex mill with double continuous feed ar- is thereby caused to revolve about the center 
ranged horizontally. Fig. 9 represents a de-line of shafts 22 as a center, but is always 
used with a system of four receptacles. Fig. Fig.1 by the action of the lever system-that 
10 is a plan view of the same. Fig. 11 is a is to say, the vertical diameter of the recep 
side elevation of the mill illustrated in Fig. tacle always remains approximately vertical. 
8, a portion being broken away on the line y Consequently the charging-door is always at 
a larger scale than the preceding figures, tom. In the motion of the receptacle about 
showing the method of feeding the material the shafts 2 as a center of revolution, which 
from the hopper to the mill. Fig. 13 illus-might also be called the center of force, the 
trates means whereby the motion can be ob- tendency of its contents is to seek the far 
thest point; and since the receptacle is re- 95 
Similar numerals indicate corresponding strained, as described, the contents are caused 
arts. 
to move on the Walls of the receptacle in 
In the drawings, referring at present to the same direction as the direction of revolu 
Figs. 1 and 2, the numeral 
designates a tion of the mill. Consequently a grinding 
3o in section, of a vertical mill with continu-erated upon is placed into the receptacle 5, 8o 
35 tail view of belt connections that may be held approximately in the position shown in 85 
4o gi, Fig. S. Fig. 12 is a sectional elevation on the top and the discharging-door at the bot- 9o 
45 tained by the use of gearing. 
so frame supporting the receptacle 5, into which action is produced with a pressure depend. Ioo 
 
458,662 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
ing on the angular velocity of the mill, the 
contents making a complete circuit of the re 
ceptacle for each revolution of the mill. 
In Figs. 3, 4, and 5 I have shown the mill 
at various stages of a revolution, with the at 
tendant position of the contents. For sepa 
rating or screening substances the receptacle 
is made foraminous, wholly or only in part, 
as shown in Fig. 2. When intended for dry 
ing grain or other cereals or malt, the recep 
tacle should be made foraminous throughout. 
In Fig. 5, Ihave shown a modified form for 
the receptacle 5, said form being such that 
the material 15 is forced to travel against the 
sides of the receptacle during a portion of the 
revolution, whereupon it is caused to jump 
from the part marked 5 to the roughened 
part 5, at the same time striking a blow and 
thus assisting the pulverization of any large 
particles. It is evident that the receptacle 
may be built in other forms for various pur 
poses. Therefore I do not wish to restrict my 
self to any particular form. 
In Figs. 6 and 7 I have illustrated a verti 
cal mill with a continuous feed. In this con 
struction the interior of the receptacle 5 is 
divided into a number of compartments by 
horizontal partitions 16, containing openings 
17, alternating on opposite sides of the recep 
tacle, said openings having adjustable covers 
17' to regulate the downward feed. The re 
ceptacle is provided with a lining 14, of stone 
or other grinding, scouring, or polishing ma 
terial, as the case may require, as described 
in the previous example. The material to be 
fed into the receptacle 5 is thrown into a 
stationary hopper 18, from which it passes 
through the hollow shaft 2 and the pipe 19, 
which latter is secured to the arm 3 and re 
volves with the receptacle into the upper com 
partment of the receptacle. From this com 
partmentitfalls into the second compartment, 
where the grinding action commences to take 
place against the lining 14. At each revolu 
tion a portion of the material passes through 
the respective opening 17 in the partition to 
the next compartment below, where the grind 
ing action is repeated, and so on, until it is 
finally discharged through the spout 23 into 
a suitable bin 20. It will be noticed that the 
discharge takes place only when the recepta 
cle is approximately in the position shown in 
the drawings, as in the other positions the 
mass is not above the spout, owing to the ac 
tion of centrifugal force. The wall of the bin 
20 is covered with a suitable padding 21 in 
case tender cereals or other substances are 
treated to prevent breakage by being dis 
charged against the wall of the bin. From 
the bin the material is conducted away by 
means of the spout 22 to any convenient 
place. The arms 8 10, shafts 9 11, weights 
66, and frame 1 are substantially the same 
as in the former example and need not be 
more fully described here. 
In Figs. S and 11 I have shown a duplex 
system, in which two oppositely-placed recep 
tacles are caused to revolve about a common 
axis, the use of counterpoises being then dis 
pensed with, while two different substances 
may be treated at the same time, or the hull 
ing may be done in one and the polishing or 
separating in the other. 
1 is the frame sup- . 
porting the system. 33 are vertical arms, 
having at their opposite ends bearings for 
the shafts 44 of the respective receptacles 5 
and 5'. The arms are provided with central 
hollow trunnions 2 and 2', mounted to turn 
freely in bearings in the frame I. A rod 2, 
forked at both ends, acts as a connection and 
stay between the arms and at the same time 
permits the feed-pipes 1919 to the vessels 5 
and 5' to pass between the forks. To one of 
the hollow trunnions is rigidly secured the 
driving-pulley 7 for revolving the system. To 
the shafts 4 4 are Secured, respectively, the 
sprocket-wheels 27 27, which are connected 
by suitable chains 28 28 with two wheels 25 
25, the latter being secured by pins 26 to the 
frame, so as to hold them stationary. Thus 
it will be seen that upon revolving the sys 
tem the two receptacles are held always with 
the discharge spouts or openings 23 down, 
the same result being produced relative to the 
movement of the contacts, as before explained. 
The material with which the receptacles are 
to be charged is thrown into the hoppers 18 
18, (see also Fig. 12.) from whence it passes 
into the hollow shafts 2', the latter being 
slightly flared to facilitate the flow of mate 
rial into the pipes 1919, which lead to the first 
compartments of the respective receptacles 
5 and 5', said compartments being padded to 
prevent breakage of the grain. The interior 
of each receptacle is the same as shown in 
Figs. 6 and 7 and need not be more fully de 
scribed here. The discharge takes place 
through the spouts 23 23 into different bins 
20 and 20', and the material is finally led 
away by suitable troughs 22 22. It will be 
noticed that the discharge from the recepta 
cles can take place only when they are in 
their lowest positions-i. e., that in which re 
ceptacle 5' is shown to be in the drawings 
as the centrifugal action causes the contents 
of the same to be held away from the dis 
charge-openings when the receptacles are in 
their other positions. 
In Figs. 9 and 10 I have illustrated a driv 
ing-gear for a quadruplex system, the same 
consisting of a stationary pulley a, around 
which a belt b is placed, which connects with 
a pulley C and controls the motion of the 
same. On the same shaft as pulley c is 
mounted a pulley c', which controls the sys 
tem of receptacles to which the pulleys c', e, 
f, and g are attached, said four pulleys being 
connected by an endless beltd, passing round 
the same. Chains and chain-wheels may be 
substituted for the belts and pulleys. 
In Fig. 13 I have shown the receptacles 5 
as controlled by gearing. (See also Fig. 12.) 
In this example three receptacles are shown 
as revolving about a common axis. 29 rep 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
458,662 
resents a gear mounted loosely upon the hol 
low trunnion 2 and prevented from rotating 
by means of the pin 27 passing through the 
same and entering the frame 1. 
29 repre 
sents gears made fast to the respective shafts 
4 of the receptacles, and 29 are intermediate 
gears having bearings on horizontal studs Se 
cured to the arms 3, said gears Serving to con 
nect gears 29 with the gear 29. It is now 
evident that if the arms are caused to re 
volve the several gears will control the re 
ceptacles in the manner before described. If 
desired, the gears may be so proportioned that 
the receptacles will actually have a rotary 
motion imparted thereto about their centers 
at any desired speed, so as to produce a 
greater or relative motion between the con 
tents and the walls of the receptacle, or else 
by rotating the receptacles in the same direc 
tion as the movement of the material a less 
relative motion is obtained. 
It is evident that various other means could 
be made use of to control the receptacles in 
the manner described. Therefore I do not 
wish to restrict myself to any of the specific 
means herein described, nor do I wish to re 
strict myself to holding the receptacle in one 
and the same position, as on Some materials 
I have found by experiment that it is ad 
vantageous to permit of or give to the recep 
tacle a movement about its own axis in One 
direction or the other. 
In order that the lining may be exchanged, 
using the same receptacle for grinding, Scour 
ing, polishing, or other kindred purpose, the 
same is made removable, either by having 
the receptacle formed of two shells bolted to 
gether, as shown in Fig. 8, or by having one 
or both of the heads removable. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a mill, a receptacle caused to revolve 
and means for rotating the receptacle about 
its own axis in the same direction as the di 
rection of revolution, Substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. A receptacle revolving about a fixed axis, 
combined with a stationary hopper arranged 
in line with said axis of revolution and a feed 
pipe connected with said hopper and having 
a portion rotating about said fixed axis and 
a radial portion extending into and revolv 
ing with the receptacle, substantially as de 
scribed, 
3. The receptacle 5, mounted to rotate about 
a central axis and provided with a series of 
compartments connected by contracted open 
ings, means for causing the receptacle to re 
volve about a second axis, and a mechanism 
acting on the receptacle for controlling its 
motion about its central axis while revolving, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a mill, a receptacle caused to revolve, 
combined with a stationary gear concentric 
with the axis of revolution, a Second gear on 
the receptacle, and an intermediate gear, all 
proportioned to hold the receptacle in a defi 
- 
nite position while revolving, Substantially as 
described. 
5. In a mill, two or more receptacles caused 
to revolve about a common axis, a stationary 
gear arranged concentric with the axis of revo 
lution, gears attached to the several recepta 
cles, and intermediate gears, all proportioned 
to hold the receptacles in certain definite po 
sitions, substantially as described. 
6. In a mill, a receptacle caused to revolve 
and held in a certain definite position by a 
stationary pulley or chain wheel arranged con 
centric with the axis of revolution, and a sec 
ond pulley or chain wheel secured to the re 
ceptacle and connected by a belt or chain with 
the first wheel, substantially as described. 
7. The receptacle 5, having the irregular 
form described and provided with roughened 
portions 5, combined with means for revolv 
ing the receptacle and controlling its position, 
the form of said receptacle allowing the ma 
terial to fly off tangentially and against the 
roughened parts, substantially as described. 
8. In a mill, a receptacle for the material 
to be treated, crank-shafts and cranks, the 
cranks pivoted to journals projecting from the 
receptacle, a driving-pulley for rotating the 
crank-shafts and revolving the receptacle, and 
an arm or arms projecting from the recepta 
cle and pivoted to a link or links pivoted to 
a fixed part, Substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
9. In a mill, a receptacle for the material to 
be treated, having a counterpoise attached, 
means for revolving the receptacle, and an arm 
or arms projecting from the receptacle and 
pivoted to a link or links pivoted to a fixed 
part, Substantially as described. 
10. In a mill, a receptacle for the material to 
be treated, having a counterpoise attached, 
crank-shafts and cranks, the latter connected 
to journals projecting from the receptacle, a 
driving-pulley for rotating the crank-shafts 
and revolving the receptacle, and means for 
rotating the receptacle on the axis of the jour 
nals, Substantially as shown and described. 
11. In a mill, a receptacle for the material to 
be treated, having a balance-weight attached, 
crank-shafts and cranks, the cranks pivoted 
to journals projecting from the receptacle, a 
driving-pulley for rotating the crank-shafts 
and revolving the l'eceptacle, and an arm or 
arms projecting from the receptacle and piv. 
oted to a link or links pivoted to a fixed part, 
substantially as shown and described. 
12. In a mill, the combination of the frame 
1, shafts 22, cranks 33, journals 44, recep 
tacle 5, provided with means for charging the 
material and for discharging the same and 
with lining 14, a balance-weight 6, driving 
pulley 7, and arms S, projecting from the recep 
tacle and pivoted to links 10, pivoted to fixed 
parts of the machine, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
13. In a mill, the combination of frame 1, 
shafts 22, cranks 33, journals 44, receptacle 
5, provided with charging-door 12 and dis 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
ICC) 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
458,662 
charging-door 13, lining 14, Counterpoise 6, 
driving-pulley 7, and arms 8, projecting from 
the receptacle and pivoted to links 10, pivoted 
to fixed parts of the machine, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
14. The receptacle 5, provided with com 
partments opening in the partitions at alter 
nate sides, means for causing the receptacle 
to revolve, and means for holding it in a fixed 
position with respect to its axis, substantially 
as described. 
15. A receptacle provided with an interior 
O 
padding of soft material at its receiving endl 
to avoid breakage of the grain while entering 
said receptacle, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as , 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 24th day of April, 
891. 
JOHN H. PENDLETON, 
I5 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. W. THOMAS, 
M.W. BIDGOOD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458762.txt	(No Model.) 
A. A. CHARON NAT, 
WARIABLE NOZZLE, 
No. 458,762. 
 
Patented Sept, l, 1891, 
129, 1 
if 
1, 
. 
2%N3. 
r 
/7.3 
ze. 
e 
- 
a2a W 
in 
Vil 
 
  
 
 
the Norts PETERs cc. rhoto-tro. was 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANSELME ARRISTED CHARONNAT, OF NEWADA CITY, CALIFORNIA. 
WARAB, E N OZZ E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,762, dated September 1, 1891. 
Application filed May 29, 1891, Serial No. 394,575. (No model.) 
25 
O 
Either or both of the stuffing-boxes can be 
To all whon, it inctly COF2Cern: 
removable to permit the removal of the regu 
Be it known that I, ANSELME ARRISTED 
lating-plate. 
CHARONNAT, a citizen of the United States, 
residing at Nevada City, Nevada county, 
In order to operate the regulating-plate any 
suitable mechanism may be employed. The 
State of California, have invented an Im 
provement in Variable Nozzles; and hereby 
simplest form of it is a lever E, controlled by 
a spring-pawl e, engaging a rack-bar F, said: 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
lever being connected by a link G. with one 
exact description of the same. 
of the stems of the regulating-plate. The 
My invention relates to the class of variable 
nozzles, and especially to those designed for 
sizes of the nozzles may be marked on the 
the discharge of water. 
rack, so as to show which one is in use or to 
be used. Another form is a shaft H, having 
My invention consists of a nozzle having 
on one end a bevel-pinion h, engaging with 
fitted to its end a transverse hollow seat, in 
which is adapted to be reciprocated a plate 
the bevel-pinion i of a nut I, threaded upon 
the screw connecting-rod J of the plate-stem. 
formed with a succession of apertures of vary 
ing diameters, said plate having a stem on 
The shaft is operated by a hand-wheel IX, and 
each end passing through stuffing-boxes, 
the amount of movement of the regulating 
plate may be accurately determined by means 
Whereby it is moved to bring any of its aper 
of the indicator L, traveling over a graduated 
tures into alignment with the nozzle or to 
bring a Solid portion opposite thereto to serve 
plate and operated by means of the beveled 
gearing l with the shaft, 
as a gate, as I shall hereinafter fully describe, 
and Specifically point out in the claims, 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
When it is desired to change the capacity of 
simple and effective nozzle the discharge of 
the nozzle to a greater or less degree, the 
regulating-plate is moved to one side or the 
which can be varied and regulated by means 
other in Order to bring the proper aperture c 
of a regulating-plate so constructed and ar 
into alignment with the nozzle-passage. In 
ranged as to be perfectly balanced to permit 
the ready and easy operation, 
this movement the plate operates with the 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
exercise of but little power, as it is a balanced 
for a more complete explanation of my inven 
one, being mounted in its seat with a stuffing 
tion, Figure 1 is a horizontal section. Fig. 2 
box at each end and a stem projecting from 
each end, whereby the Water which passes to 
is a front view, the seat being broken away to 
show the regulating-plate. Fig. 3 is a cross 
each end of the plate is confined and effects 
an equal pressure thereon. The groove c' in 
section of the regulating-plate on the line 77 
the plate is to permit of the ready passage of 
of Fig. 1. 
the water to each end of the plate. The regula 
A is the nozzle. Across it is the seat B, in 
lating-plate serves also as a gate for the noz 
which is mounted and adapted to slide longi 
tudinally the regulating-plate C. This plate 
zle, when desired, by moving it into such a 
position that a solid portion between the ap 
is provided with a number of apertules c of 
ertures may be brought across the nozzle 
different diameters, and it has extending from 
passage, thereby completely shutting off the 
each end a stem D, connected therewith by a 
loose connection,in the manner of many valve 
Water. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
stems, so that the plate may seat itself per 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
fectly without interference from the stems. 
These stems extend outwardly through each 
ters Patent, is- 
1. A nozzle having a transverse seat, a plate 
end of the seat B in stuffing-boxes b, so that 
mounted in said seat and having apertures of 
a tight joint is formed at each end. The regul 
lating-plate is also provided with a longitudi 
various diameters adapted by the movement 
of the plate to be brought into alignment with 
nal groove c', connecting its ends, and the ap 
the nozzle-passage, a stuffing-box at each end 
So ertures c in said plate may be arranged or 
formed with a proper bevel to serve as nozzles, of the seat, and a stem connected with each 
45 
- 
35 
40 
55 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
 
2 
458,762 
25 
35 
a stuffing-box in each end, the sliding plate 
mounted in the seat and having apertures of 
different diameters adapted to be brought into 
alignment with the passage of the nozzle, a 
stem connected with each end of the plate 
and extending outwardly through the stuffing 
box, and suitable power connections with one 
of said stems for moving the plate, consisting 
of the shaft II, the connecting-rod J, the nut 
on said rod, the pinions connecting the nut 
and shaft, and the indicator operated by the 
shaft H, substantially as herein described. 
5. A nozzle having a transverse seat with 
end stuffing-boxes, and a longitudinally-slid 
ing plate in said seat having end stems pass 
ing through the stuffing-boxes, said plate 
crossing and regulating the nozzle-passage, 
substantially as herein described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
- 
ANSEEME ARRISTED CHARON NAT, 
Witnesses: 
B. J. WATSON, 
ED. MLLER. 
O 
end of the plate and projecting outwardly 
through the stuffing-box, substantially as 
herein described. 
2. A nozzle having a transverse seat and a 
longitudinally-movable plate mounted in Said 
seat having apertures of different diameters 
adapted by the movement of the plate to be 
brought into alignment with the nozzle-pas 
sage, a groove extending longitudinally of 
the sliding plate, a stuffing-box at each end 
of the seat, and a stem at each end of the 
plate extending through the stuffing-box, 
substantially as herein described. 
3. Anozzle having the transverse seat with 
a stuffing-box in each end, the sliding plate 
mounted in the seat and having apertures of 
different diameters adapted to be brought 
into alignment with the passage of the nozzle, 
a stem connected with each end of the plate 
and extending outwardly through the stuffing 
box, and Suitable power connections with one 
of said stems for moving the plate, substan 
tially as herein described. 
4. A nozzle having the transverse seat with 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458862.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 458,862. 
 
N. R., STREETER, 
BAG. HOLDER. 
Patented Sept. 1, 1891. 
 
ASRIll 
W of vesses: 
47.7%-47 
77v e a to 7: 
7a. 4-, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NELSON R. STREETER, OF GROTON, NEW YORK. 
BAG - HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,862, dated September 1, 1891. 
Application filed March 31, 1890, Renewed July 2, 1891, Serial No. 398,234 (No model.) 
m 
tion. 
To Cultuhon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, NELSON. R. STREETER, 
of Groton, in the county of Tompkins and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Bag-Holders; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it pertains to make and use 
it, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form part of this specifica 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
bag-holders; and it consists in the combina 
tion of a bar of any suitable length, a suit 
able number of metallic strips which are se 
Cured thereto and which have their lower 
ends pronged and these prongs then bent 
backward upon themselves, so as to form U 
shaped springs, and sharp-pointed headed 
Wires upon which the bags are strung, and 
Which wires are made to catch in the springs. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
Very cheap and simple bag-holder in which 
the different sizes of bags are strung upon 
Separate Wires and then placed in suitable 
Stilpporting-springs, from which they can be 
readily and quickly removed or returned to 
position. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a bag-holder 
which embodies my invention. Fig. 2 is an 
end view of the same. 
A represents a wooden bar or strip of any 
desired length, and which is intended to be 
Supported in any suitable manner above the 
counter Olin any other convenient place. In 
the lower edge of this strip is formed a cut 
or groove B, of any suitable depth, and into 
this cut or groove the upper ends of the sup 
porting metallic strip C are inserted, and then 
Secured in place by any suitable means. 
These strips are of any desired length and 
width and preferably have their lower ends 
divided into two prongs which are bent back 
upon themselves, so as to form the U-shaped 
Springs D for the support of the headed 
sharp-pointed wires G, upon which the bags are 
strung. Two of the springs are required for 
each Wire, One spring upon one Strip being 
used to support the head of the wire and an 
other strip to support the point. The heads 
upon the wires serve to prevent the Wires 
from having an endwise movement and thus 
becoming displaced, and the slots or cuts be 
tween the springs serve for the heads upon 
the wires to catch in and thus prevent any 
possibility of one wire interfering with an 
other. There will preferably be six wires upon 
which the different sizes of bags are placed. 
Each wire has only to be forced upward out 
of the two springs in which it is held, and 
then after being filled with bags it is returned 
to position. The bags are then drawn off as 
rapidly as they are needed. The springs being 
partially closed at their upper ends, prevent 
the wires from being moved vertically and 
thus becoming accidentally misplaced. The 
two central supporting - strips are placed 
slightly farther apart than the others, and 
serve, in addition to helping to support the 
wires, to support the twine-holder I, of any 
suitable construction. This twine-holder has 
projections J extending from opposite sides, 
and these two projections catch in the two in 
ner springs upon the two supporting-strips, 
and thus support the twine-holder below the 
center of the bar A. This twine-holder can be 
displaced and returned to position the same 
as one of the wires. 
It will be seen that the construction here 
shown and described is very cheap and Sim 
ple and the parts strong, durable, and not 
likely to get out of order while in daily use. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a bag-holder, the combination of a 
supporting -bar, supporting-Strips Secured 
thereto and having their lower ends formed 
into springs, and the wires which are made to 
catch in the Springs, Substantially as shown. 
2. The combination of the bar, the support 
ing-strips secured thereto, and having their 
lower ends divided into prongs which form 
U-shaped springs, and the headed wires upon 
which the bags are placed, substantially as 
described. 
3. The combination, with a supporting 
strip having arms which are provided with 
U-shaped springs on their ends, of a twine 
holder having projections which catch in the 
said springs, substantially as shown. 
4. In a combined bag and twine holder, the 
- 
O 
o 
25 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
S5. 
65 
75 
9 O 
95 
Ico 
m 
 
2 
458,862 
Combination of the bar, the supporting-strips 
Secured thereto and having their lower ends presence of two witnesses. 
pronged and then bent into U-shaped springs, 
the headed wires, each one of which is held 
by two of the Springs, and the twine-holder 
provided with projections upon opposite 
sides, substantially as specified. 
CHAS. O. RHODES, 
CHAS. B. COOLEY. 
Witnesses: 
r 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
Aft 
NELSON. R. STREETEER. 
tri 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US458962.txt	(No Model.) 
S. WILLERSHAUSEN. 
TABLE. 
No. 458,962. 
Patented Sept, l, 1891. 
Fis : 
ta. 2. 
E 
  
   
 
 
SSSas 
a 
NissS Sissa.g32Es...S 
NSNSG SNS 
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 
 
 
W17A/ESSES 
%ar-ka- 
77%. 27, 
(2. 
   
  
 
E 
NSN 
 
|WWEAVTOR: 
By 
Sigri. /2Zlariazzfez. . 
/all/aa-z-z-e G-7A 
AT TORNEYS 
Ado 
. 
The Norris Peters co-p-gro-it-o., washingtao. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEGFRIED WILLERSHAUSEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO FRANK 
RHONER & CO., OF SAME PIACE. 
TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 458,962, dated September 1, 1891. 
Application filed December 18, 1890, Serial No. 375, l 29, (No model.) 
top. By providing the wings E with pads H, 
Fig. 3, said wings will not scratch or deface 
the tops of the receptacles. The legs. A may 
be provided with a support or platform I for 
holding glasses, cigars, and the like. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. A table consisting of suitable legs, a 
frame carried by the legs and having a series 
of receptacles, and a rotating table-top pivot 
ally connected at its axis or center with the 
frame and having a series of radiating wings 
corresponding to and which cover and uncover 
the receptacles as the table-top is rotated on 
its pivotal connection, Substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. A table consisting of suitable legs, a 
frame carried by the legs and having a series 
of receptacles, and a rising-and-falling and 
rotating table-top pivotally connected at its 
axis or center with the frame and having 
wing portions which cover and uncover the 
receptacles as the table-top is rotated, Sub 
stantially as described. 
3. A table consisting of suitable legs, a 
frame carried by the legs and having a series 
of receptacles, a rising-and-falling pivot-pin 
journaled at the center of the frame, and a 
winged table-top having its center portion se 
cured to the pivot-pin and rising and falling 
and rotating there with, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. A table consisting of suitable legs, a 
frame having a series of receptacles, and a ro 
tating table-top pivotally connected at its axis 
or center with the frame and having wing 
portions provided with pads which cover and 
uncover the receptacles as the table-top is ro 
tated, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
SEGERIED WILLERSHAUSEN. 
75 
Witnesses: 
WM. C. HAUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER, 
IS 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SIEGFRIED WILLERS 
HAUSEN, a citizen of the United States, re 
siding at New York, in the county and State 
5 of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Tables, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in tables; and the invention consists in the 
Io details of construction Set forth in the follow 
ing Specification and claims, and illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a table contain 
ing my invention. Fig. 2 is a view similar to 
Fig. 1, with parts in a different position than 
in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a section along aca, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a section along | y, Fig. 2. 
The letters A indicate the table-legs sup 
porting a suitable frame B, preferably com 
posed of four radiating arms, as clearly in 
dicated by dotted lines, Fig. 1. The arms are 
provided with receptacles or dishes C, suit 
able for accommodating a game apparatus, 
such as poker-chips, dominos, or the like. 
The table has a rotary top D, pivotally con 
nected at its axis or center with the frame 
B, and when the top is rotated the receptacles 
Care covered or uncovered, as desired. The 
top is shown provided with a series of radiat 
ing Wings or projecting portions E, and when 
the top is in the position shown in Figs. 1 and 
3 the wings Ecover the receptacles, said wings 
resting on said receptacles. When the top is 
properly rotated, the receptacles are uncov 
ered, as shown in Figs. 2 and 4. The pivot F, 
arranged at the axis or center of the table 
top, renders the latter not only rotary, but 
also vertically movable a suitable distance, 
and when the top is in the uncovering posi 
tion, the top, with its Wings, sinks down so as 
to be flush with the tops of the receptacles, 
as in Fig. 4. The receptacles in this last case 
act as stops to prevent the cover D being ro 
tated until it is lifted high enough for its 
45 wings E to pass over the receptacles. The top 
has a stop G, which limits the rotation of said 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459062.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 459,062, 
 
C. A. & A, BARRETT, 
COIN FREED DYNAMOMETER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
Patented Sept. 8, 1891, 
 
(No Model.) 
C. A., & A, BARRETT, 
COIN FREED DYNAMOMETER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 459,062. 
Patented Sept. 8, 1891. 
- - - 
S 
o 
wwa -N al 
w 
-- 
- 
2 s 
m 
A. 
 
 
 
 
 
| 
9 
 
 
E. A A. 
//tve/t/ois. 
64-4, 2.27, 
-% 
26 2a2a2 -21 %a. 
7. 
M- /22ez 
(4:3 
C2 af2.62. 
WA. a 2. 
2 
*HE MORRIS PETERS cc., Photo-IrHo, was INGrow, t.e. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES ARTHUR BARRETT AND ALFRED BARRETT, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
CON - FREED DYNAMO METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,062, dated September 8, 1891. 
Application filed June 26, 1891, Serial No,397,630. (No model.) Patented in England February 14, 1890, No. 2,452; in Victoria 
September 6, 1890, No. 8,050; in South Australia September 9, 1890, No. 1,703 in New South Wales September 9, 1890, No. 
2,468, and in New Zealand September 22, 1890, No, 4,615. 
45 
65 
and at the other end against the faces qigon 
the brackets q q. Two of the pins g g are con 
nected together inside the apparatus by a bar 
S, provided with a projections', against which 
bears an arm it, attached to a flap t', hinged 
in the chute f, the said flap being weighted 
to cause the arm t to bear against the said 
projection. The flap t' is normally arranged 
at such an angle beneath the front extremity 
of the edges if' of the bracketi that if the 
handle c be pulled without at the same time 
gripping the handlel the coin, if moved to 
the said front extremity of the edges.jj', will 
be diverted from the chute i* into the money 
drawer; but if the handle b be gripped to 
gether with the handle c the former will be 
caused to compress the springs?' ' and move 
the arm t, and thereby move the flap tout of 
the way of the coin, as shown by the dotted 
lines in Fig. 1, which will then be free to pass 
through the chute j if a sufficient strength of 
grip be exerted. 
IIaving now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of our said invention 
and in what manner the same is to be per 
formed, we declare that what we claim is 
In a coin-freed dynamometer adapted for 
testing the power of a hand-grip, the combi 
nation, with the handleb, bracketi, and coin 
receiving chutei, of the spring-extensions q' 
on the handle-bracket q, the bars, carrying 
the projection s', and the weighted flap t', 
hinged to the chutei, operating in the man 
mer and for the purpose set forth. 
CHARLES ARTHUR BARRETT. 
ALERED BARRETT. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN E. BOUSFIELD, 
Of the firm of G. F. Redfern de Co., 4 South 
Street, Finsbury, London, Patent Agents. 
A. S. ALBUTT. 
To all whon, it naily conce77. 
Be it known that we, CHARLES ARTHUR 
BARRETT and ALFRED BARRETT, subjects of 
the Queen of Great Britain, residing at Lon 
5 don, England, have jointly invented new and 
useful Improvements in Automatic or Coin 
Freed Dynamometers or Muscular-Power 
Testing Machines, (for which we have ob 
tained patents in the following countries, 
Io viz: in Great Britain February 14, 1890, No. 
2,452; in Victoria, September 6, 1890, No. 
8,050; in South Australia, September 9, 1890, 
No. 1,703; in New South Wales September 9, 
1890, No. 2,468, and in New Zealand Septem 
15 ber 22, 1890, No. 4,615,) of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Our present invention relates to improve 
ments in the automatic or coin-freed dyna 
mometer or muscular-power-testing machine 
2 o for which a patent was granted to us dated 
May 19, 1891, No. 452, GSS, the object being 
to provide means whereby, if the machine be 
used as a pulling-machine, the return of the 
coin to the operator will be rendered practi 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation, partly in section, of such an 
automatic or coin-freed dynamometer or mus 
cular-power-testing machine embodying our 
3o present improvements; and Fig. 2 is a rear 
elevation of the same, partly in section, the 
section being taken on the line C C of Fig. 1. 
Similar letters in both the figures indicate 
similar parts. 
According to our present invention we pro 
vide the brackets g q, to which the handleb 
is fixed, with pins q' q', extending into the 
interior of the apparatus. The pins q' q' pass 
through and slide in sockets ' 
', in which are 
4o located springs r" ', the said springs bearing 
at one end against the ends of the sockets 7 
25 cally impossible. 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459162.txt	(No Model.) 
J. R. WONACOTT, 
FLOOD FEMCE, 
No. 459,162, 
Patented Sept. 8, 1891. 
 
 
 
 
I 
27s 
//7- 
7 
 
a 
|n\ento R 
J.RYYonacott 
by his abhorney 
1.5. Shaka 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN R. WONACOTT, OF MOUNT ZON, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALFTO 
S. R. MAY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FOOD - FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,162, dated September 8, 1891. 
Application filed May 2, 1891, Serial No, 391,327, (No model.) 
To act, whom it invaly concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN R. WONACOTT, 
of Mount Zion, in the county of Macon and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Flood-Fences, of 
Which the following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
flood-fence that will tilt in either direction 
and right itself automatically, that may be 
?o adjusted With relation to its points of sus 
pension in Such manner as to maintain the 
pickets in a vertical position under all nor 
mal conditions, that may be attached more 
or less closely to its points of support to meet 
i5 conditions that will be hereinafter specified, 
and in which the pickets or any of them may 
be adjusted in the beam to conform to the 
Surface of the bed of the stream. These re 
Sults are attained in the manner hereinafter 
2O Set forth in detail, reference being had to the 
drawings accompanying and forming a part 
of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of a section of the 
fence as seen from a point below the same. 
25 Fig. 2 is an enlarged end view of the section 
of fence. Fig. 3 is a plan of a section of 
the fence, and Fig. 4 is a separate representa 
tion of a clevis used to support the beam ad 
justably. 
The beam is composed of two strips, which 
are secured together by bolts 14, and which 
clamp between them the pickets 3 and inter 
vening blocks 2. The truss-rod 12 is secured 
at its ends to the beam on the downstream 
35 side thereof, and it extends through the eye 
of the threaded and centrally-located bolt 13. 
Nut 13 on bolt 13 bears against a washer in 
contact with the beam, and is used to force 
the eye away from the beam, thus tightening 
4o the truss-rod and strengthening the beam 
against the downward flow of the water. The 
posts 4 are placed one on each side of each 
end of the beam and extend into the ground 
to a depth sufficient to firmly sustain the 
45 fence. Caps 5 are secured to the tops of the 
posts by stirrups 6, which extend over the 
caps and are secured to the posts by bolts 6*. 
- 
to an end of the beam. 
A strap 7 extends downward from the longi 
tudinal center of each side of each cap, and 
the straps of each cap are secured to such 5o 
cap by means of a bolt S. The lower ends of 
the straps extend some little distance below 
the lower edge of the caps, and are secured 
by means of bolt 9 to one of the several holes 
of clevis 10, which is attached by means of 55 
bolt 
In constructing the fence the clevis 10 is 
connected higher or lower on the beam, ac 
cording as the beam is heavier or lighter, the 
object being to leave sufficient weight below 60 
the tilting bearing to cause the fence to right 
itself promptly and to yield readily to logs, 
&c., passing either above or below the beam. 
The truss-rod adds to the weight of one side 
of the beam, thus tending to throw the pick- 65 
ets out of perpendicular, and the effect is in 
creased or lessened, according as the truSS 
rod is pressed more or less distant from the 
beam. To meet this tendency and to enable 
the pickets to be made to swing true under 7 : 
all circumstances is the function of the clevis 
with its set of holes, the point of connection 
being made toward the heavy side of the 
beam, as indicated in the drawings. The 
blocks 2 are of the same material as pickets 75 
3, and the pickets are held between the bars 
of the beam by friction only. When the 
fence is built, the pickets are adjusted to 
conform to the surface of the ground, as 
shown in the drawings, and may be changed 8o 
at any time to correspond to a change of the 
surface by driving them either down or up. 
The clevis permits the pickets to be inclined 
downstream during freezing weather, in or 
der to permit ice to pass over without break- 85 
ing the pickets, and the adjustment is effected 
by connecting strap 7 with the hole of the 
clevis farthest upstrealm. 
I claim 
1. In a flood-fence, the combination of the 90 
posts and connections, the straps 7, secured 
to the connections of the posts, the beam car 
lying pickets, the clevises 10, secured to the 
ends of the beam and having the sets of holes, 
2 
- 
459,162 
and bolts 9, adapted to connect the clevis caps, and bolts 9, connecting the straps with 
with the straps, as set forth. 
2. In a flood-fence, the combination of the 
In testimony whereof Isign my name in the 
beam having on one side the truss-rod 12 and presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
5 the customary pickets, the clevises 10, secured 
to the ends of the beam and having the sets 
of holes, the posts 4, having caps 5, secured 
thereto by stirrups 6, straps 7, secured to the 
I. D. WALKER, 
L. P. GRAHAM. 
JOHN R. WONACOTT. 
the clevises, as set forth. 
O 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459262.txt	(No Model.) 
C. ALLEN. 
MACHINE FOR BORING POST HOLES, 
No. 459,262. 
Patented Sept. 8, 1891. 
r 
EE-Fi 
24AA 122 
se 
 
t 
26, 
 
62%e2%f 422e2e. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES AL LEN, OF ROCK IS LAND, II, LIN OIS. 
MACHINE FOR BORING Post-HoLEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,262, dated September 8, 1891. 
Application filed January 31, 1891, Serial No. 379,802, (No model.) 
IO 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLESALLEN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Rock 
Island, in the county of Rock Island and State 
of Illinois, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Machines for Boring Post 
Holes, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in machines for digging post-holes. 
It is my purpose to provide a simple and 
portable mechanism of this type whereby 
holes may be bored of any desired depth and 
the Soil removed therefrom with a minimum 
expenditure of labor and time. 
It is my purpose, also, to simplify and im 
prove the construction of machines of this 
type and to provide mounting for the gear 
ing Operating the auger and for the shaft of 
the latter which will not bind in its support 
ing-Ways and which may be hoisted to re 
move the displaced earth with the least pos 
Sible frictional or other resistance. 
The invention consists, to these ends, in the 
Several novel features of construction and 
new combinations of parts hereinafter fully 
described, and more particularly pointed out 
and defined in the claims following this speci 
fication. 
To enable others skilled in the art to con 
struct and use machines embodying my said 
invention, I will now proceed to decribe the 
same in detail, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a post 
hole-digging machine embodying said inven 
vention, the operative parts being shown as 
mounted upon a light carriage to facilitate 
transportation. Fig. 2 is an edge elevation 
of the guiding-standards and frame support 
ing the gearing, the standards being partly in 
section to show more fully the construction 
of the parts. Fig. 3 is a detail view of the 
frame Supporting the gearing removed from 
the uprights and partially dismembered. 
In the said drawings the reference-numeral 
1 denotes the carriage upon which the bor 
ing mechanism is mounted, said carriage con 
sisting of parallel side bars 2, formed of metal, 
their rear ends connected to an axle 3 and 
their forward ends to a bolster 4, having a 
central pivotal connection 5 with the forward 
axle 6, a fifth-wheel 7 being combined there 
With in any well-known manner. The side 
bars 2 are preferably formed of light iron 
rails arranged edgewise and having their 
ends twisted or turned to engage the loops 
connecting them to the axle and bolster. The 
axles are supported by light iron wheels 8, 
having staggered spokes, the whole structure 
being of the greatest possible strength and 
the least possible weight. 
At a suitable point between the ends of the 
side bars 2 are arranged uprights 9, of metal, 
their lower ends being rabbeted to overlap 
the inner faces of the side bars 2 and at the 
same time to form flush exterior surfaces, the 
parts being connected by bolts or rivets 10. 
The uprights 9 are connected at their upper 
ends by a light skeleton frame 12, and in each 
upright 9 is formed a longitudinal slot 13, ex 
tending from a point a little below its upper 
extremity to the side bar of the carriage or 
thereabout. In order to brace and stiffen 
the structure, inclined braces 14 are extended 
from the rear portions of the side bars 2 to 
the upper ends of the standards 9 aud may be 
fastened at both ends by bolts or rivets. 
Between the uprights or standards 9 is ar 
ranged a rectangular frame 91, consisting of 
two parallel cross-bars 15, arranged horizon 
tally, having their ends united by vertical 
bars 16, said frame being of such length that 
the end pieces or bars 16 will be close to the 
inner faces of the standards or uprights 9, 
but capable of free vertical movement be 
tween Said uprights. 
Upon the outer edges or surfaces of the end 
bars 16 of the rectangular frame 91, at or near 
the upper end thereof, are inserted bolts 17, 
one of said bolts being arranged very neal 
the end of each end bar, its axis being paral 
lel with the side ball 15, and at a short dis 
tance from the said bolt 17 is a second and 
similar bolt 18, parallel with the first. These 
bolts are preferably tapped into the end bars, 
as shown; but they may be attached in any 
suitable manner. The unthreaded portion of 
each bolt is so formel that it may serve as a 
bearing for a roll 1S, having a length sub 
stantially equal to the thickness of the stand 
ards or uprights 9, the diameter of said roll 
being very slightly less than the width of the 
55 
90 
ICO 
35 
45 
 
459,262 
2C) 
25 
O 
slots or channels 13 in said standards. Two 
bolts having similar construction and arrange 
ment and provided with rolls having bearing 
thereon are mounted at corresponding points 
upon the other ends of the vertical bars 16, 
and all of these bolts are provided with heads, 
and are of such length that a steel plate 20, 
having suitable openings to receive the bolts, 
may lie between the outer ends of the rolls 
18 and the heads of the bolts. Each plate 20 
is of somewhat greater width than the slots 
13 of the standards 9, so that when the frame 
or head is arranged between said standards 
with the rolls 18 lying in the slots 13 the 
plates 20 will lie outside the standards and 
extend beyond the sides of the slots, their 
edges lying and moving upon the outer faces 
of the standards. By turning the bolts 19 in 
One or the other direction the contact of the 
plate 20 may be adjusted with perfect ac 
curacy. 
Arranged at or about the center of the 
frame or head 91 is a shaft 21, parallel with 
the bars 15 and lying in suitable openings 92, 
formed in the vertical bars 16 and steel plates 
20, beyond which the shaft projects at both 
ends. Upon said shaft 21, within the frame 
or head, are rigidly-mounted collars 22, which 
abut against the inner faces of the vertical 
bars 16 to prevent longitudinal displacement 
of the shaft. Upon the ends of the latter, 
which project beyond the exterior faces of 
the steel plates 20, are mounted working 
cranks 23, to enable two operators to be em 
35 ployed should the nature of the work require 
it. Wheels 24 are also placed on the shaft 
between the steel plates 20 and the cranks 23; 
but these may be omitted, if preferred. 
Upon the shaft 21 is mounted a miter-gear 
25, having mesh with a similar gear 26, keyed 
upon the head of a vertical shaft 27. The end 
of this shaft passes up through a bearing 93 
in the lower bar 15 of the vertically-movable 
head or frame 91, this bar being somewhat 
thickened at or near its middle portion to 
furnish the required support. The miter-gear 
26 is keyed upon the end of the shaft 27 above 
the bar 15, upon which said gear rests, and 
below the bar the shaft is provided with 
a collar 27, rigidly secured thereto to pre 
vent the upward movement of the shaft and 
the binding of the miter-gears. The shaft 27 
extends downward to the point where the 
auger 28 is attached, passing through a me 
tallic brace 29, the ends of which diverge and 
are provided at their ends with right-angled 
lugs, fastened to the inner faces of the up 
rights 9 by the bolts securing the latter. 
This brace affords a firm bearing for the shaft 
and stiffens and strengthens the entire struct 
le, 
Between the uprights 9 and the bolster 4 
is a brace 30, having diverging ends provided 
with right-angled lugs which lie against the 
inner faces of the parallel sidebars 2, and are 
fastened by bolts like the brace 29. Upon 
this brace 30 is formed or mounted a frame 
65 
45 
having two uprights 31, upon which is jour 
naled a shaft 94, carrying a drum 32, rotated 
by a crank 33. From the drum, to which one 
end thereof is fastened, a strong cord or small 
wire cable 34 is led over a pulley 35, Sus 
pended from the skeleton frame 12 and at 
tached to an eye 36 upon the movable head 
91. The function of this drum is to raise the 
movable head 91 and lift the shaft and auger 
from the post-hole to remove the soil dis 
placed and lying upon the auger. This tool 
may consist of cutting-plates of suitable pitch 
mounted upon an axis having a sharp point: 
but as these features are all known in O Spe 
cific description is necessary. The auger is 
detachable from the shaft, and one or more 
augers, together with the other necessary 
tools, are carried in a tool-chest 37, supported 
upon the rear end of the wagon-frame. 
In connecting the front axle to the bolster 
a strap 38, connected with the king-bolt 5, is 
extended backward and fastened to the brace 
30, the ends of the fifth-wheel being projected 
beyond or forward of the axle and its ends 
being bent toward and bolted to the end of 
the tongue. 
In Fig.1. Ishow the skeleton frame 12 bolted 
to the tops of the standards 9; but its ends 
may be lapped over upon the outer faces of 
the said standards and fastened by bolts 95, 
passing through both horizontally, as shown 
in Fig. 2. 
- 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a machine for boring post-holes, the 
combination, with a frame provided with up 
rights or standards having longitudinal slots 
or channels, of a movable frame or head Sup 
porting the driving-shaft and auger and hav 
ing end bars lying in close proximity to the 
inner faces of the uprights and provided with 
bearing-bolts near both ends of each of said 
end bars, said bearing-bolts having rolls lying 
in the slots or channels of the uprights and 
being provided with plates mounted on said 
bolts between their heads and the outer ends 
of the rolls and having their edges resting 
upon the outer faces of the uprights on both 
sides of the slots therein, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a machine for boring post-holes, the - 
combination, with a frame having slotted up 
rights or standards rising therefrom, of a rect 
angular movable frame or head arranged be 
tween said standards and having near the ex 
tremities of each end barthereof bearings con 
sisting of bolts tapped into said end bars and 
projecting through the slots in the uprights, 
rolls journaled on said bearings and lying in 
said slots, plates mounted on said bolts be 
tween the said rolls and the heads of the bolts, 
the edges of said plates resting on the outer 
faces of the uprights on both sides of the slots, 
a driving-shaft passing through the end bars 
of the movable frame or head and through the 
slots in the uprights and through openings in 
the plates, and an auger-shaft passing through 
the lower horizontal bar of the movable frame 
95 
od 
 
459,262 
8 
35 
45 
mounted on said bolts and lying in the slots 
of the uprights, plates mounted on said bolts 
between their heads and the outer ends of the 
rolls and resting on the outer faces of the up 
rights on both sides of the slots, a driving 
shaft passing through the end bars of the 
movable frame and through the plates and 
having cranks on its projecting ends, an au 
ger-shaft having bearing in the lower hori 
Zontal member of said frame and in a CrOSS 
brace interposed between the lower ends of 
the uprights, a windlass mounted on the 
wheeled frame, and a cable connected with 
the windlass and with the movable frame, 
substantially as described. 
5. In a machine for boring post-holes, the 
combination, with a supporting-frame having 
uprights provided with slots, of a movable 
frame or head having end bars provided with 
upper and lower stud-bolts carrying rollers 
which lie in the slots of the standards, plates 
arranged outside the bolts, secured to the 
stud-bolts and retaining the rollers in posi 
tion thereupon, gearing carried by the mov 
able frame, and an alger having one end Sup 
ported by the latter, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and affixed my seal in presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
55 
CHARLES ALLEN. 
L. S. 
Witnesses: 
F. BAHNSEN, 
M. F. BAHNSEN. 
O 
and having a miter-gear keyed thereon mesh 
ing with a miter-gear of the driving - shaft, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a machine for boring post-holes, the 
combination, with a supporting-frame having 
slotted Standards, of a rectangular movable 
head or frame arranged between said uprights, 
its end bars lying close to the inner faces of 
said uprights, rolls lying in the slots of the 
uprights and mounted on bolts tapped into 
the end bars of the movable frame, two of said 
rolls being mounted near each end of each 
end bar of Said frame, a plate mounted on 
said bolts between their heads and the rolls, 
the edges of said plates resting on the outer 
faces of the uprights on each side of the slots 
therein, a driving-shaft having support in the 
movable head or frame, its ends passing 
through the slots and through the plates and 
having cranks mounted thereon, an auger 
shaft, one end of which has bearing in the 
lower bar of the movable frame and is geared 
to the driving-shaft, and a windlass mounted 
on the supporting-frame and having a cord 
attached to its drum and passing over a pull 
ley to the movable head, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a machine for boring post-holes, the 
combination, with a frame comprising metal 
lic side bars and slotted uprights, the latter 
connected at their tops and bottoms, of a rect 
angular movable frame or head arranged be 
tween said uprights and having bolts tapped 
into its end bars near each end thereof, rolls 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459362.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 459,362. 
J. M. GUILBERT, 
NECKTIE FASTENER. 
Patented Sept. 8, 1891, 
- 
Z72. 27. 
Gzc4%. 
WITNESSES: 
52s652 
M 
 
INVENTO) 
ATTORNEY. 
orris Peters co, PHOTo-LTHO, washco". 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN MURRAY GUILBERT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR 
TO WILLIAM H. HART, JR., OF SAME PLACE. 
NECKTE-FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,362, dated September 8, 1891. 
Application filed December 3, 1890, Serial No, 373,456, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To ali, Luhon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN MURRAY GUIL 
BERT, a citizen of the United States, residing 
in the city and county of Philadelphia, State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Necktie and other Re 
tainers, which improvement is fully set forth 
in the following specification and accompany 
ing drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
necktie and other retainers; and it consists 
of a sheet-metal buckle or slide having par 
allel closed side loops and an intervening 
bight, which grasps and pinches a band in 
serted therein. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
the portion of a necktie or other retainer em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 represents a 
face view thereof. Fig. 3 represents a sec 
tion on line ac ac, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 represents a 
longitudinal section of the retainer on an en 
larged Scale. 
Similar letters and numerals of reference 
indicate corresponding parts in the several 
figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
buckle or side formed of sheet metal and 
consisting of loops 1 and 2, the intervening 
wall 3 of which is formed with a partially 
extending slit or slot, leaving the neck 5, 
which connects the frames of Said loops and 
imparts a certain elasticity thereto. The 
walls of the slot 4 form jaws 6 6, between 
which one end or part of a necktie-retaining 
band or other band or strap Orpiece of elastic 
or other material is Secured, it being Seen 
that said end or part is forced into the slot 
from the open end thereof and compressed 
by the walls or jaws 6 6 after the manner of 
a bight, after which the band or strap or 
piece is passed through the loop 1, then un 
der the walls 3, and next formed into a loop 
7, then through the loop 2, over the walls 3, 
and again through the loop 1, leaving the 
end 8 outside of the buckle, said end being 
adapted to be connected with a neckband or 
other band or strap, while the loop 7 holds a 
ring 9, which is fitted thereon before the piece 
of material is converted into such loop. 
It will be seen that the retaining or attach 
ing device as formed is of superior nature. 
It may be adjusted in length by properly 
moving the buckle as a slide, and the piece 
of elastic or material is firmly gripped by the 
walls 6 of the slot 4 without liability to dis 
engage therefrom unless properly moved lat 
erally from the buckle through the open end 
of Said slot. It will also be seen that the 
band or strap is attached to the buckle or 
slide without necessarily sewing, stitching, 
riveting, or otherwise similarly connecting 
the same thereto, whereby the article pro 
duced is cheaper and better than those here 
tofore made. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire. to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
buckle or slide having parallel closed side 
loops with an intervening wall, the latter be 
ing extended outside of the plane of said 
loops and provided with a bight open at one 
end of the Wall, substantially as described. 
JOHN MURERAY GUILBERT. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
A. P. JENNINGS. 
55 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459462.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 459,462, 
J, T, SMITH, 
OILER, 
Patented Sept. 15, 1891. 
  
 
 
 
 
2. R 
Witnedged. 
22. /y, 5. 92.3, 
2-/62// 
40- 
war e. 
 
 
An yeae (0. 
THE MORR8 PETER6 co, ProTourHo, wasyncrooc. 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. SMITH, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
OLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,462, dated September 15, 1891. 
Application filed June 13, 1890, Serial No. 355,366 (No model.) 
55 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN T. SMITH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city and county of San Francisco, in the 
State of California, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Oilers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention has reference to an automatic 
Oiler, and it is particularly designed as an im 
provement upon my patents, Nos. 306,542 and 
365,153, dated, respectively, October 14, 1884, 
and June 21, 1887. 
The object of my present improvement is 
to provide an oiler which will not only be as 
effective as those previously patented by me, 
but still more desirable on ac?ount of its 
greater simplicity of construction and lower 
cost of manufacture. 
- Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which form part of this specification, Figure 
1 is a Sectional elevation of a shaft-oiler con 
taining my improvement; Fig. 2, a similar 
view of a machine-oiler; Fig. 3, a like view of 
a loose-pulley oiler; Fig. 4, a sectional eleva 
tion of my improved oiler for vehicle-axles; 
Fig. 5, a plan of the axle or huboiler with the 
cap removed, and Fig. 6 a detail view of the 
oil-feeding tube. 
The same letters of reference indicate cor-. 
responding parts in all the views. 
Let A designate a cup or vessel containing 
oil. This vessel may be made of any suitable 
material and given any required shape, as cir 
cumstances may suggest. The bowl of the 
cup is perforated at the bottom and provided 
with a boss or short hollow stem B. The lat 
ter is not indispensable, but it facilitates the 
fitting of the oiler. 
Within the stem B, I fit a tube C, extend 
ing from the inside of the cup down to the 
point which is to be lubricated-such, for in 
stance, as the shaftD, Fig.1, which it reaches 
through the cap of the bearing or journal 
box. The upper end of the tube C is bent 
down so as to constantly dip in the oil, and 
thus forms a convenient means for draining 
the cup of its contents by capillary attrac 
tion, as will more fully appear hereinafter. 
Perforations c are provided in the sides of 
the shorter branch of the siphon to allow the 
oil to rise within it more readily. 
To retard the outflow of oil or check it in 
a certain measure Islightly contract the tube 
Cat its lower end and fill its interior with Solne 
permeable material E-wool, preferably 
through which the oil has to pass before com: 
ing out. The filling not only acts to conduct 
to the axle by capillary attraction, but also 
acts as a strainer for the oil, so that no for 
eign substances can be conveyed to the bear 
ing and all sediments settle at the bottom of 
the vessel. The filling E has a core F, pref 
erably made of metal and usually composed 
of from one to five strands of copper Wire, 
one strand only being shown in the drawings. 
This core runs the entire length of the tube 
C and comes in contact with both the supply 
of oil and the point lubricated. The filling E 
and core Farebound together or surrounded 
by a wire G, loosely wound about said filling. 
In order to more adequately regulate the 
flow of oil from the vessel, I provide the up 
per portion of the tube with a thumb-screw 
H, adapted to compress the filling material 
within it and reduce the passage usually af 
forded to the oil. One is thereby enabled to 
gage the feed of the oiler to the greatest ad 
vantage. By preference a seat h, having in 
ternal screw-threads, is formed upon the bent 
tube for the thumb-screw H. It Will be seen 
that this seat is provided with a lateral flange 
th', upon which the edges bordering the aper 
ture of the upper part of the oil-vessel or top 
restS. 
The height of the tube within the vessel is 
determined by circumstances; but it is in 
most cases brought up to a point near the 
lid or cover I, which is conformed or raised 
so as not to interfere with the screw H. Thus 
the cover may be curved up, as in Fig. 1, 
which represents an ordinary shaft-oiler. 
In the case of a machine-oiler, which usually 
consists of a glass cylinder set in brass mount 
ings, the screw His preferably made to project 
above the top of the vessel and confined in a 
tubular seat covered by a small cap, as illus 
trated in Fig. 2. The purpose of this Special 
construction is to bring the compressing-ScreW 
within easy reach and yet prevent all leakage 
of oil. In this form of oiler the main cover Or 
brass top has to be cemented, as well as the bot 
tom portion, to the glass cylinder in order 
to insure a tight joint, and were the compress 
ing-screw placed wholly below the top, as in the 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
459,462 
Ordinary cup, it could not be handled with 
convenience through the small aperture com 
monly left for filling up this kind of lubri 
cator with oil. Were the screw applied, on 
the other hand, directly from the outside, it 
would be subject to let the oil escape, as it 
becomes loose at times, owing to the continu 
ous jar of machinery; but by using the cov 
ered tubular seat, which is provided with 
a flange h', bearing on the edges bordering 
the aperture in the top, the compressing-screw 
may be brought up to any desirable height, 
So as to be close at hand, and though it may 
become loose the oil escaping from the bent 
tube on account of that will be duly collected 
in the space inclosed by the sides of the seat. 
This machine-lubricator is rendered still more 
oil-tight by the use of bolts or tie-rods J J, 
which are secured to the stem or bossa of 
the oil-vessel by their lower ends, and are pro 
vided with nuts at their upper ends, pressing 
down upon the top. The brass top and bot 
tom parts of the cup will thus be firmly tied 
together over the ends of the glass tube and 
the cemented joints will not be loosened by 
the concussions they are constantly sub 
jected to. 
. The form of oiler shown in Fig. 3 is better 
adapted to oilers for loose pulleys, and that 
in Fig. 4 to hub-oilers. 
The oiler illustrated in Fig. 4 is somewhat 
different in shape from that represented in 
the other views; but it contains the same ele 
ments and performs the same functions. This 
sort of oiler is intended for use in the hubs 
of vehicle-wheels, and it therefore calls for a 
special design. I thus produce an oiling de 
vice which is made of but few parts, easily 
constructed, and very economicalin its Work 
lilgS. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure protection 
in by Letters Patent of the United States, is - 
1. In an oiler, the combination of an oil 
vessel provided with an apertured upper por 
tion, a covered tubular seat passing through 
the aperture in the top, a bent feeding-tube 
within the oil-vessel, a permeable filling within 
the tube, and a thumb-screw working Within 
the tubular seat and through the tube, so as 
to compress the filling therein, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. In an oiler, the combination of an oil 
vessel having an apertured top and provided 
with an interiorly upwardly-extending stem, 
tie-bolts passing through the top, provided 
upon their upper ends with nuts and having 
their lower ends secured to the stem, a COV 
ered tubular seat passing through the aper 
ture of the top and provided with a lateral 
flange bearing on the edges bordering the said 
aperture, a bent tube within the oil-vessel, a 
permeablefilling within the tube, and a thumb 
screw working within the seat and through 
the tube, so as to compress the permeable 
filling, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and affixed my seal in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
J. T. SMITH. L. s. 
In presence of 
R. A. CAMPBELL, 
R. R. STRAIN. 
O 
25 
3) 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459562.txt	J. DAY. 
CORSET CLASP, 
Patented Sept. 15, 1891. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 459,562 
A% / 
 
24. w/2c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH DAY, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
CORSET CLASP 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,562, dated September 15, 1891. 
Application filed June 30, 1890, Serial No. 357,215. (No model). 
To all whom, it moly concern 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH DAY, of New 
Haven, in the county of New Haven and State 
of Connecticut, have invented new Improve 
ments in Corset-Clasps; and I do hereby de 
clare the following, when taken in connection 
with accompanying drawings and the letters 
of reference marked thereon, to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, and which 
said drawings constitute part of this specifi 
cation, and represent, in 
Figure I, a view in elevation of two corset 
busks made in accordance with my invention 
and shown as clasped or fastened; Fig. 2, a 
similar view of the busks, showing them un 
fastened. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
corset-clasps, the object being to provide a 
simple, cheap, convenient, and reliable corset 
fastening. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in the combination, with a busk-steel 
provided with headed studs, and a locking 
pin, of a busk-steel provided with openings 
corresponding to the studs and enlarged at 
One end and in Wardly inclined at the other 
end, and with a locking perforation corre 
sponding to the locking-pin, the said pin and 
perforation being arranged to align when the 
studs are in the narrow inclined portions of 
the said openings. Each busk consists of a 
flat strip of steel A, longitudinally bowed in 
the usual manner and inclosed in a stitched 
casing B of fabric, to the inner edges whereof 
the other portions of the corset are attached. 
One busk-steel is provided with a series of 
headed pins C and the other with a corre 
sponding series of openings D, inclined to the 
length of the steel and enlarged at the outer 
ends to receive the headed ends of the studs. 
As herein shown, the lower ends of the open 
ings are enlarged and their other ends in 
clined inwardly and upward; but, if desired, 
the upper ends of the openings may be en 
larged and their other ends inclined inwardly 
and downward. The steel having the headed 
stud is also provided at its upper end with a 
locking-pin E, while the steel having the 
openings has formed in it a corresponding 
o 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
locking perforation F, the said pin and per- 5o 
foration being arranged so that they will align 
When the headed studs have been forced into 
the narrow inclined ends of the openings, in 
which they are held by the pin which by en 
tering the perforation locks the two steels 
against relative endwise movement. The cor 
Set is therefore clasped by drawing the bands 
together and introducing the studs into the 
enlarged ends of the openings and then mov 
ing the busks endwise to force the studs into 
the inclined ends of the openings until the 
locking-pin will enter its locking perforation. 
To unfasten the corset, it is only necessary to 
lift the outer busk, which contains the lock 
ing perforation, enough to release the lock 
ing-pin, when the strain on the corset will at 
Once act to draw the studs into the enlarged 
ends of the openings, from which they are 
readily withdrawn. 
The advantages of my improved construc 
tion are that it enables the corset to be un 
fastened without having to draw the busks 
laterally together, as has heretofore been re 
quired, at the expense of time and with the 
imposition of additional pressure upon the 
Wearer, whereas it is often desirable to re 
move the corset very quickly and without in 
Creasing its pressure. At the same time my 
improved construction secures a very secure 
and reliable fastening. 
I am aware that it is old to provide one of 
the busks of a corset with headed studs and 
a locking-pin and the other busk with a lock 
ing perforation and with openings extending 
parallel with it and enlarged at one end, 
Whereby the busks must be drawn laterally 
together before they can be disengaged. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The herein-described corset-clasp, consisting 
of two overlapping busk-Steels, one provided 
with headed studs, the other steel constructed 
With slots in the body thereof corresponding 
in position to the position of the studs on the 
One steel, the said slots at one end enlarged 
corresponding to the head of the stud and 
Contracted therefrom to a width less than the 
o 
75 
9o 
95 
2 
459,562 
diameter of the heads of the studs, the said steel have passed into the contracted portion 
slots inclining rearward from their enlarged of the inclined slots of the other steel, sub 
end, one of said steels provided with a lock- stantially as described. 
ing-pin and the other steel with a correspond- 
5 ing perforation, the perforation and the lock- 
ing-pin corresponding with and arranged to 
engage each other when the studs of the one 
CONNER. J. EAGAN, 
PHILIP T. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH DAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459662.txt	(No Model.) 
H. C. STEIN HOFF. 
WATER HEATING ATTACHMENT FOR RANGES, 
No. 459,662, 
Patented Sept. 15, 1891. 
77-z 
 
a 
  
 
aa. wa ava a aFar ava apa aa aa. a 
a. aa aa. aaw: al at: a. attan ara 
a ar a. 
R. 
KSaza Aasia. 
R SaaS 
C 
NS 
(NSS 
. E Eg 
. 
E. 
: 
O ?izzazz H4 
Y 
Z-SO (94 
OO 
t 
is 
Z-...-4 STPSP 
I 
D 
t 
arts gazz. 
. 
2 
. 
. 
ASE 
- 
. G is us 
Azzir Sezzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz) 
al 
2 
Zf 
2 
-- - - 7 
 
aara a ar : 
 
 
 
was E. 
BY -/6v. d 
ATTORNEYS 
z73 
THE MORRIS PETAS co, PHOTO-titko...washisara, b, c 
 
  
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
MAAC/aeAs 
fee; r 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. STEINHOFF, OF UNION, NEWJERSEY. 
WATER-HEATING ATTACHMENT FOR RANGES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,662, dated September 15, 1891. 
Application filed December 24, 1890, Serial No. 375,696, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY C. STEINHOFF, 
of the town of Union, in the county of Hud 
Son and State of New Jersey, have invented 
a new and Improved Water-Heating Attach 
ment for Ranges, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Water-heating attachments for ranges; and the 
object of my invention is to produce a simple 
and efficient attachment which may be easily 
applied to ranges of the ordinary form and 
by means of which the waste heat of the range 
may be utilized to heat Water, so that it may 
be circulated through pipes and radiators in 
adjoining rooms and made to heat the same. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide means for shutting off the heating at 
tachment from the range or stove, so that the 
Water will not be heated in summer, and to 
provide means for heating the water very 
slightly, so that it will be adapted for use in 
early fall and Spring. 
To this end my invention consists in certain 
features of construction and combinations of 
parts, which will be hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
on the line I 1 of Fig. 2, showing the heating 
attachment applied to a range and with the 
front wall of the heating attachment broken 
away. Fig. 2 is a sectional plan of the range 
and heating attachment on the line 22 of Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 is a vertical cross-section on the line 
33 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a broken detail per 
spective view showing the slide in position in 
front of the auxiliary water-back. Fig. 5 is a 
broken detail perspective view of the auxil 
iary Water-back, showing also the pipe con 
nections with the same; and Fig. 6 is a broken 
detail sectional view on the line 6 6 of Fig. 2. 
The range A is in the main substantially 
like an Ordinary cooking-range, and has at One 
end a fire-pot A' and at the back a space A 
beneath the top plate, at one end of which is 
the ordinary fluea, and the space above the 
oven is formed by a vertical partition C. The 
range has also at one side of the fire-pot the 
usual water-back B, with the inlet and outlet 
pipes b and b', respectively, which may con 
nect with the common form of hot-Water tank 
in the ordinary way. 
On the back of the range is secured a cas 
ing D, which extends the entire length of the 
range or stove and the width of which corre 
sponds to the width of the space A, above 
which it is located, and the casing has at one 
end a flue D', which aligns with the fluect of 
the range. The casing D has also at one end 
an outlet-pipe D for connecting with the 
chimney, which pipe is located on the side, 
but may be on the top, as indicated by dot 
ted lines in Fig. 1. The casing D has also 
deflector-plates d, extending throughout near 
ly its entire length, the plates being arranged 
to extend from opposite ends, and they will 
thus cause the heat which passes through the 
casing from the fire-pot to be retained in the 
casing and to circulate among the pipes there 
in for a sufficient time to thoroughly heat the 
water in the pipes, and the heat is thus en 
tirely utilized, so that bint little, if any, es 
capes into the chimney. The front plate D'of 
the casing is removable, being held by screws 
at the corners, and the casing may be got at 
to be cleaned by removing the plate. The 
flue D'aligns with the flue C of the stove and 
is used only in summer, when the water is not 
heated for Warming rooms, and the flue is 
closed by a damper d", (indicated by dotted 
lines in Fig. 1) which damper is turned by a 
convenient handle d', and it will be seen that 
when the damper is turned into a horizontal 
position, as shown in Fig. 1, the flue D will 
be closed, and the hot products from the fire 
pot will then be forced to pass through the 
casing D and will escape above the damper; 
but when the Water is not to be heated the 
damper is turned into a vertical position, so 
that the hot products will pass upward 
through the flue. 
The auxiliary water-back E is fitted into 
the range at the back end of the fire-pot A' 
and of the water-back B, and said water-back 
is hollow and comprises the enlarged end por 
tions E and E and the comparatively thin 
center portion E, connecting the two, a recess 
being thus formed between the two end por 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
o 
75 
90 
95 
O 
459,662 
tions to receive the grate J, which is elongated, 
so as to extend into the recess, and which is 
pivoted in a suitable support e, secured to 
the lower edge of the water-back. The end 
portion E' and the thin portion E extend only 
to the top of the fire-pot; but the part E is 
made to extend upward into the chamber 
formed by the casing D, and the heating 
pipes are connected with the upper end of 
the portion E, as best shown in Fig. 5. The 
inlet-pipe F, through which the cooler Water 
from the circulating-pipes is admitted to the 
auxiliary water-back, enters the part E. at 
its lower end, and the heating-pipes G are 
connected with the upper end of the part E 
of the water-back, as described, and extend 
longitudinally through the lower portion of 
the casing D, and are then bent twice at right 
angles, as shown at g, and made to extend 
back to the front end of the casing, when they 
are again doubled, as shown at g', and made 
to extend to the rear end, where they fermi 
nate in a head G', which has an outlet-pipe 
H, to connect with the ordinary circulation 
pipes. The deflectors d are located between 
the different coils of the pipes, as best shown 
in Fig. 1, and the waste heat and hot products 
from the fire-pot will, when the damper d' is 
properly arranged, pass through the casing 
D, thus heating the water in the pipes G, and 
the water from the pipes will be carried to ad 
joining rooms in the ordinary way, so that 
said rooms may be heated at practically no 
expense. 
In order that the pipes may not be heated 
in summer, a shield K is shaped to fit in the 
rear. end of the fire-pot and in front of the 
auxiliary water-back E, the shield having 
slots IK in its lower end, so that it may fit 
nicely over the grate-bars, and the shield is 
held in place by a suitable catch k, or it may 
be held in any convenient way. The shield 
will thus prevent the water-back and pipes 
connecting therewith from being heated, and 
when the shield is used the damper d' is 
turned so that the hot products from the fire 
pot will pass through the ordinary range-flue 
a, and up through the flue D' to the chimney. 
The shield K has a series of perforations 
through the upper part thereof, as shown in 
Fig. 4, and mounted on the shield so as to 
slide over the perforations is a slide L, which 
has a series of perforations l, corresponding 
to the perforations in the shield, and by mov 
ing the slide so that the perforations align a 
small amount of heat will pass through the 
perforations and into the casing D, thus 
slightly heating the pipes G, and as the water 
circulates as soon as it is heated to any ex 
tent the rooms connected with the pipes G. 
may be thus slightly warmed; but when the 
rooms are to be thoroughly heated the shield 
is entirely removed, so that sufficient heat 
will pass from the fire-pot through the casing 
to heat the pipes thoroughly. 
Having thus described my invention, I claim 
- 
ent- 
as new and desire to secure by Letter's Pat 
1. In a water-heating attachment for ranges, 
the combination, with a range and a hot-pro 
duct casing thereon, of the water-back E, 
mounted in one end of the fire-pot and hav 
ing a suitable inlet-pipe, coils of pipe cont 
nected with the water-back and arranged 
within the hot-product casing, said pipes hav 
ing an outlet connecting with the circulation 
pipes, a flue in the casing aligning With the 
range-flue, and a damper for the casing, Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a water-heating attachment for ranges, 
the combination, with a range and a hot-pro 
duct casing mounted thereon and connecting 
with the chimney and with one end of the fire 
pot, of the water-back E, located in one end 
of the fire-pot of the range, pipe-coils con 
nected with the water-back and arranged 
within the casing, and connections between 
the pipes and water-back and the circulation 
pipes, substantially as described. 
3. In a water-heating attachment for ranges, 
the combination, with a range and a hot-pro 
duct casing mounted thereon and connecting 
with the chimney, of the Water-back E, located 
in one end of the fire-pot of the range, said 
water-backhaving a central recess to receive 
the range-grate and having one end elon 
gated and connecting with coils of pipe ar 
ranged within the casing, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination, with a range, a hot-pro 
duct casing, and pipe-coils within the casing, 
of the water-back E in the fire-pot of the 
range having a central recess to receive the 
range-grate, said water-back having one end 
connected with the inlet of the circulation 
pipes and the opposite end elongated to enter 
the hot-product casing and connected with the 
pipe-coils within the casing, substantially as 
described. 
5. The combination, with a range, a hot-pro 
duct casing mounted on the range and con 
nected with one end of the fire-pot and with 
the chimney, and the Water-back E, located 
in one end of the fire-pot of the range, of a 
shield adapted to fit between the fire-pot and 
the water-back and close the entrance to the 
hot-product casing, substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with a range, a hot-pro 
duct casing mounted on the range and con 
necting with the fire-pot and chimney, and 
the water-back E in one end of the fire-pot 
of the range, of a shield shaped to fit be 
tween the fire-pot and the water-back and 
close the entrance to the hot-product casing, 
said shield having perforations therein, and 
a perforated slide mounted on the shield to 
move opposite the perforations of the shield, 
substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination, with a range and an 
auxiliary water-back therein, of a shield for 
the water-back, said shield having slots in its 
lower edge to fit the grate-bars and having 
75 
So 
95 
OO 
d 
II5 
O 
2C) 
35 
45 
55 
65 
459,662 
perforations in its upper portion, a catch for pot and the damper in the casing, for send 
the shield, and a perforated slide mounted on ing the heat through or around the casing, Io 
the shield to move opposite its perforations, 
Substantially as described. 
8. The combination, with a range, of a wa 
ter-heating casing thereon, heat-passages 
through the casing from the fire-pot to the 
chimney, and means, as the shield in the fire 
HENRY REINERS, 
JOSEPH E. CHAMBERS. 
substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY C. STEINHOFF. 
5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459762.txt	(No Model.) 
H. MCDANIEL. 
SEEDER AND PLANTER 
No. 459,762. 
Patented Sept. 22, 1891. 
  
 
III III 
 
 
WTAESSES 
4 6-2 ?ee 24 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARDY McDANIEL, OF DONALDSON, ARKANSAS. 
SEEDER AND PANTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,762, dated September 22, 1891. 
Application filed November 24, 1890, Serial No. 372,474. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it in Gulf CO7 cer'7. 
Be it known that I, HARDY MCDANIEL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at DOn 
aldson, in the county of Hot Springs and State 
of Arkansas, have invented certain neW and 
useful Improvements in Seeders and Planters; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention has relation to planters; and 
it consists in the novel construction and ar 
rangement of its parts. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a side elevation of my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
top elevation of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is a detail 
view of the hopper. 
My invention is described as follows: It 
consists of the beam A, rear standards a, front 
standards (', handles C, and braces C, all 
secured in piace by proper bolts and nuts. 
Between a pair of spring-arms b, secured 
to the rear standards C, is journaled a track 
wheel B, the tire of which is provided with a 
marker b'. 
A hopper C has the arms c and c'. Said 
arms chave one end pivoted to Said hopper 
at cand the other end pivoted on the round 
ci, and arms c' have one end rigidly secured 
to the front side of said hopper and the other 
end pivoted on a bolt c, passing through the 
beam A. Said hopper has passing through it 
near its bottoman axle D, to the ends of Which 
is secured a pair of bearing-wheels d. Said 
axle is provided either with an ordinary cy 
indrical feed-shaft, as shown in FigS. 1 and 
2, or with the ordinary agitator-arms and cut 
of slides. 
My invention is further provided with the 
point 1, attached to the side of hopper A, 
point 2 on the upper side of the spring-arm 
b, near its middle, point 3 on the felly of 
wheeld, point 4 on the free end of said arm 
b, immediately over the axle of the track 
wheel B, and point 5 on the axle of Said track 
wheel. 
The operation of my invention is described 
as follows: If it is desired to plant the Seed 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
in hills, the hopper and feed-wheel, with the 
cut-off, is used, and the points 1, 2, and 3 are 
arranged in a straight line (see Fig. 1) and 
the points 4 and 5 are arranged parallel to 
each other. Point 5 points always to the 
marker b'. As the planter moves along, the 
shovel on the standard a makes a furrow, 
and the feed-wheel drops a seed into Said fur 
row. Then the rear shovels cover the seed 
and the marker on the track-wheel B stamps 
on the ground immediately over the seed. 
Thus, the operator is able to plant the seed so 
that it is in rows each Way, and hence admits 
of cultivation each way. When the seed is 
to be drilled, the hopper, with the agitator, as 
shown in Fig. 3, is used. In this case it will 
be unnecessary to adjust the points. The 
operation of the planter is the same as above 
described. As the planter passes over rough 
or cloddy ground, the hopper C, pivoted at 
c and c, will allow both of the wheels d to be 
on the ground at the same time, and the hop 
per so attached is continually jolting and 
keeps the seed from banking. 
Having described myinvention, what Iclaim 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
1. In a seed-planter having the beam A, 
standards C and C., handles a, and braces a, 
spring-arms b, having one end secured to the 
rear standard Ct, track-wheel B, having the 
marker b', hopper C, having the arms c and 
c', and axle D, journaled in its bottom, and 
wheels d, and points 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, all sub 
stantially as ShoWn and described, and for the 
purposes set forth. 
2. In a planter, Substantially as shown and 
described, the combination of the frame pro 
vided with suitable plow-standards and han 
diles, side arms having pivoted between their 
rear ends the track-wheel, a hopper swung on 
pivoted arms, SO that it may move up and 
down, and having secured on the ends of its 
axle side wheels, points 1, 2, and 3, points 4 
5, and marker b', all substantially as shown 
and described, and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HARDY MCDANIEI. 
Witnesses: 
WARREN RAIN WATERs, 
W. C. RAIN WATERS. 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459862.txt	(No Model.) 
G. E., WOOD, 
CANOPY TOP FOR, WEHICLES, 
No. 459,862, 
 
Patented Sept. 23, l891, 
WTWESSAS y%. Cavce. 
4. a6%ador 
AWAAV7OAR 
efined:"Woa, 
lefel (Avia. 
A1 TTORNAEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE E. WOOD, OF TERRE HAUTE, INDIANA. 
CAN OPY TOP FOR VEHICLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,862, dated September 22, 1891. 
Application filed January 31, 1891, Serial No. 379,776, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE E. WOOD, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Terre 
Haute, in the county of Vigo and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in a Vehicle Canopy-Top; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters and figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
vehicle canopy-tops; and the objects of myim 
provements are to provide a cheap and light, 
but strong and rigid, canopy-top that may be 
let down or raised up at pleasure. I attain 
these objects by the mechanism hereinafter 
described, and illustrated in the accompany 
ing dra Wings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view of a section of the side 
of the canopy-top, showing a side elevation 
of the front support-rods, their joints, &c. 
Fig. 2 is a view of a cross-section of a side 
piece of the canopy-frame and an elevation of 
its Support-rods. Fig. 3 is an elevation of a 
Section of the canopy-top, taken from the rear, 
and its rear support-rods. Fig. 4 is a side ele 
Vation of the canopy-top closed down. Fig. 
5 is a side elevation of the canopy-top when 
erected. 
Similar letters and figures refer to similar 
parts throughout the several views. 
In the drawings, the letter C indicates the 
top proper, which is simply an ordinary can 
opy-top, consisting of a frame c and any con 
venient covering. 
The letters a' and b' indicate flat oblong 
plates of strong metal, which are screwed 
firmly to the frame c, b' near the front of the 
frame and on the inside of c, and a back of 
b' and upon the outside of c, as shown in 
Figs.1 and 5. These plates are perforated to 
receive the strong metal pivots 1 and 2, re 
spectively. Said pivots are provided at one 
end with heads and at the other with screw 
threads to receive set-nuts. 
The letterse' and e' indicate strong angle 
irons, which are screwed firmly to the under 
Id 
25 
35 
45 
side of the frame c, e' at either of the two 
rear corners of the top, and e' a short dis 
tance toward the middle of the back of C. 
These angle-irons are perforated to receive 
the metal pivots 4 and 5. 
The letter A indicates a strong metal sup 
port-rod or standard, which consists of two 
sectionshinged together at the middle or any 
other desired position by a knuckle-joint a. 
These standards are provided at their lower 
ends with a T-shoulder av and a screw-thread 
or any other similar contrivance by means 
of which the standards may be fastened upon 
the bed of a vehicle. Also at the upper end A 
is flattened and perforated with an eye to re 
ceive the pivot 1, upon which it revolves and 
by which it is attached to the top C. At or 
near the middle of the upper section of A 
there is integral with it a pivot 3, as shown 
in Fig. 2. 
B is a spring-bar brace provided at the mid 
dle With a knuckle-jointhinge b, and each end 
is flattened and perforated to receive the piv 
ots 2 and 3, respectively. 
The letter Eindicates the rear support-rod 
Or standard, which consists of two sections 
hinged together like Aby means of a knuckle 
joint e, also, it is provided at the lower end 
with a T-shoulder eV and screw-thread simi 
lar to Ct', and at the upper end E is flattened 
and perforated to receive the pivot 4, upon 
which it revolves and by which it is attached 
to the top C. 
Near the upper end of E and integral with 
it there is a branch arm or bracef, as shown 
in Fig. 3. The arm or brace f is provided at 
its upper end and integral with it with a T 
shoulder and pivot 5, which works in the eye 
of the angle-iron e'. 
From the construction of the parts of this 
device as thus defined the operation of the 
same will be seen to be as follows: Supposing 
the top to be raised, to lower it Isimply break 
the joint b of the brace B and then bear back 
upon the Standards A or E, and the knuckle 
joints C, and e will open and allow the top to 
fall back and close down upon the lower sec 
tions of the several standards, as seen in Fig. 4. 
To again raise the top, Ibear forward and up 
ward upon either of the upper sections of the 
standards or upon either side or the back of 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IO 
2 
459,862 
O 
the frame C, and the top easily rises to an 
erect position, where it is locked by simply 
closing the knuckle-joint b in the brace B. 
The particular advantages of my invention 
are to enable a vehicle to be sheltered in a 
barn whose roof is lower than the usual can 
opy-top of a surrey or other vehicle, to make 
the covering of the vehicle, when not in use, 
more easily accomplished, &c. 
I am aware that prior to my invention can 
opy-tops have been erected over vehicle 
bodies upon standards. I therefore make no 
claim upon such combination, broadly; but 
What I do claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Tetters Patent, is 
The combination, in a canopy-top for ve 
hicles, with any ordinary canopy C upon a 
frame c, the plates b' and a', the angle-irons 
e' and e', and the pivots 1 2 4, of the stand 
ards or support-rods A and A, said standards 
being provided with the knuckle-joint hinges 
C, and a, the pivots 3 and 3, and the T-shoul 
ders a Y and a V at the lower end and eyes at 
the upper end, the brace-bars B and B, pro 
vided with the knuckle-joints b and b and 
eyes at either end, the standards or Support 
bars E and E, provided with the knuckle 
joint hinges e and e, the T-shoulders eY and 
e' at the lower ends and eyes at the upper 
ends, and the brace-rod?, provided with a T 
shoulder and pivot 5 at its upper end, all 
substantially as described and set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of two 
witnesses. 
25 
GEORGE E. WOOD. 
Witnesses: 
II. A. CONDIT, 
GEO. M. DAVIS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US459962.txt	(No Model.) 
NO, 459,962. 
J. W. GUNNISON. 
WIND MIT.I. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 22, 1891. 
se 
 
Mravendor: 
/oseph Warren Gunnesota 
The sofas Peters co, Photo-Liig, washington, b, c 
(No Model.) 
No. 459,962, 
 
J. W. GUNNISON, 
WIND MILL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 22, 1891. 
Az-evator: 
/osae Marveze 62evee Zsole 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH WARREN GUNNISON, OF DE WITT, MICHIGAN. 
WNDMLL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 459,962, dated September 22, 1891. 
Application filed May 1, 1891, Serial No. 391,267, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern.' 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH WARREN GUN 
NISON, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at DeWitt, in the county of Clinton and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Windmills, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
1ngS. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
improvements in windmills; and the inven 
tion consists in the peculiar construction of 
a brake designed to be applied to the wheel 
When the same is turned out of the wind. 
The invention further consists in the pecul 
liar construction, arrangement, and combina 
tion of the various parts, all as more fully 
hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of my improved windmill. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged elevation from the opposite side from 
that in Fig. 1 and illustrating the brake. Fig. 
3 is a horizontal section showing the brake 
mechanism in combination with the brake 
applied. Fig. 4 is a rear elevation with the 
parts in the position shown in Fig. 3. 
A is the wheel, which is secured to the 
shaft B, journaled in suitable boxes C upon 
the main frame D, which is pivoted upon the 
standard E, engaged in top of the tower F. 
This shaft B is provided at its rear end with 
a face-plate G and the crank-pins G'. 
His a tail-vane hinged to the standard by 
means of the head I. 
J is a side vane secured to the main frame 
in front of its pivotal point and extending to 
one side of the wheel, so constructed that 
when the wind becomes too great the press 
ure upon the side vane will cause the wheel 
to turn with its edge to the wind and in par 
allelism with the tail-vane, a counterbalanc 
ing-weight K (which is connected by means 
of the connecting-rod L to the tail-vane) being 
used to return the mill into the wind again 
as soon as the pressure is reduced. 
The parts thus described may be of any 
known and usual construction, and to a mill 
thus constructed I apply my brake, which is 
constructed as follows: 
Cl is a brake-head having the actuating-le 
verb. This brake-head is pivoted upon the 
bracket c, which is secured to the main cast 
ing D beneath the face-plate G. The brake 
head is provided with a suitable curved face. 
to engage with the rim of the face-plate when 55 
it is brought into use, and the lever is pro 
vided with an inclined bearing or cam faced. 
The actuating-lever is curved around the 
standard E a suitable distance and the parts 
so arranged that when the tail - vane ap- 6o 
proaches a position parallel with the wheel 
some portion of such vane-preferably the 
head I thereof-will engage upon the in 
clined bearing d and gradually apply the 
brake to the face-plate G, the power of such 65 
application increasing as the tail-vane ap 
proaches the wheel. As soon as the tail-wane 
is moved to its normal position at right angles 
to the wheel the brake-head will be released 
from engagement with the face-plate and the 7o 
wheel will be again free to turn; but as long 
as the wheel is out of the wind the weight of 
the tail-vane bearing upon the actuating-le 
wer of the brake will prevent the turning of 
the face-plate, which is secured to the pivotal 75 
shaft of the wheel, and thus preventing any 
possibility of its movement. The object of 
such a construction is to prevent the pump 
ing of the mill in cold weather when the 
wheel is desired to be out of use, and thus 8o 
preventing any danger of freezing up of the 
pump and connections below. 
What I claim as my invention is 
In a wind-wheel, the combination, with the 
main frame, the wheel, the axle therefor jour- 85 
naled in the frame, and a hinged tail-vane, of 
a circular face-plate on the end of the axle, a 
brake-head engaging the plate and pivoted to 
the frame, a horizontally-curved actuating 
lever for the brake-head, having its outer end 9o 
curved downwardly to a point below the plane 
of the lower edge of the pivotal connection of 
the tail-vane and in the path of the same, 
whereby the curved end of the lever is en 
gaged and forced down by the tail-vane as the 95 
latter is moved, substantially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
JOSEPH WARREN GUNNISON. 
M. B. O'DoGHERTY, 
P. M. HULBERT, 
Witnesses 
2O 
3o 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460062.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 460,062. 
 
H, J, ROSENBERG 
WRENCE. 
Patented Sept. 22, 1891. 
y 
(74 /62----. 
C 
A. 
- 94. 311-uo 11 for 
a 7-1-4-7 
- 
&lifor 11c is 
33 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HELFRED JOHN ROSENBERG, OF PONTOTOC, TEXAS. 
WREN CH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,062, dated September 22, 1891. 
Application filed May 18, 1891, Serial No. 393,127, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HELFRED JOHN ROSEN 
BERG, of Pontotoc, in the county of Mason, 
in the State of Texas, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Wrenches, of which 
the following, taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a full, clear, and 
exact description. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
wrenches. 
My object is to produce a wrench having a 
revoluble head, and which is provided with 
nut-seats of different sizes to fit nuts of dif 
ferent sizes, cheap and very durable in con 
struction, and of great utility. 
My invention consists in the several novel 
features of construction and operation here 
inafter described, and which are specifically 
set forth in the claims hereunto annexed. 
It is constructed as follows, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a face view of the wrench com 
plete ready for use. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
thereof with the washer removed, showing the 
internal construction thereof and showing the 
plate in the position it takes when it is desired 
to rotate it to fit various-sized nuts. Fig. 3 
is a plan view of the plate containing the nut 
seats detached. Fig. 4 are edge views of all 
of the parts detached. 
Similar letters and figures of reference in 
dicate corresponding parts. 
A is any ordinary handle constructed as 
shown, or may be constructed in any other 
design that may be desired, provided with a 
lug 1 upon the upper end and another lug 2 
a short distance below, as more clearly shown 
in Fig. 4. 
B is a plate of any size desired, either cast 
or forged, in the periphery of which are nut 
seats 33, constructed of any size desired to 
fitnuts of various sizes or designs. The plate 
B has a central circular opening C and in 
wardly-extending pieces 44, forming the re 
cesses 55, one to correspond with each nut 
seat, for the purposes hereinafter set forth. 
55 
6 is a bolt or rivet passing through the han 
dle at 7 and through the center of the bolt 
and into the washer 8, where it is secured 
either by a screw or in any other well-known 
manner, by which means the plate B is se 
cured to the handle. 
My invention is operated as follows: To ro 
tate the plate B to any desired position, it is 
thrust out as far as possible to the end of the 
handle until the lug 1 is out of engagement 
with the recess 5, as shown in Fig. 2, and the 
plate may then be rotated in either direction 
until the desired size is in a position in which 
it may be used. Then when the desired po 
sition is reached it is again pushed down 
until the lug 1 engages with the recess 5, as 
shown in Fig. 1, and the directly-opposite nut 
seat engages with the lug 2 and prevents it 
from further rotating. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A Wrench consisting of a handle provided 
with lugs 1 and 2, a plate B, having nut-seats 
in its periphery, and a central opening C, hav 
ing a recess 5 adapted to engage with the lug 
1 upon the handle, and means for securing 
the plate rotatably upon the handle, as set 
forth. 
2. In a Wrench, the combination, with the 
handle provided with lugs 1 and 2, and a plate 
B, having nut-seats in its periphery and a 
central opening C, and having recesses 5, 
which are adapted to engage with the lug 1, of 
a bolt or rivet passing through the handle and 
the plate and secured to the washer for the 
purpose of holding the plate upon the handle, 
and the Washer, Substantially as described, 
for the purposes set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 15th day of April, 1891. 
75 
85 
HELFRED JOHN ROSENBERG. 
In presence of 
EVANDER LIGHT, 
ILEONIDAS CARTER. 
O 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460162.txt	(No Model.) 
W. F. RICHARDS, 
CAR BRAKE MECHANISM, 
3. Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 460,162, 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
 
 
--   -          r r -- 
_ _ _                  ?-     ^   ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~+                      
8 ! |  } 
r 
- ------ 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
s 
WITNESSES: 
"W43. 
es 
ATTOREA. 
He gigs rees co, roto-H... was lito, b. c. 
 
 
(No Model.) 
W. F. RICHARDS, 
CAR BRAKE MECHANISM, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 460,162. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
 
 
WITA/ESSES 
u/64. 2s AG 
W.S. 
cars arrests co., photo-Ho., WASHI86 to O. c. 
(No Model.) 
W. F. RICHARDS, 
CAR BRAKE MECHANISM, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 460,162, 
Patented Sept, 29, 1891. 
FG.8 
2. 
2.7, i// 
(%2. yeyor 
%2- ATTOR 
the paris Peters co. PHoorlirho., WAS-GTox, d. c. 
S. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARD F. RICHARDS, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CAR- BRAKE MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,162, dated September 29, 1891. 
Application filed November 28, 1890, Serial No, 372,766, (No model.) 
55 
To all uhon, it inctly conce7n 
Be it known that I, WILLARD F. RICHARDS, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Pittsburg, county of Allegheny, and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Car-librake Mech 
anism, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, the principle of the invention being 
herein explained and the best mode in which 
I have contemplated applying that principle 
So as to distinguish it from other inventions. 
My invention relates especially to brake-op 
erating mechanisms for railway-cars, having 
means for governing the power of the brake 
actuating means, according to the load upon 
the trucks. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
an improved arrangement of brake-actuating 
air or other fluid-cylinders to independently 
operate the brakes of each truck; to provide 
improved means for independently operating 
the brakes of each truck of a railway-car by 
fluid-pressure and for jointly operating the 
brakes of both trucks by hand-power from 
one end of the car, and to provide improved 
means for independently operating the brakes 
of each truck by fluid-pressure, and for jointly 
operating the brakes of both trucks by hand 
power from both ends of the car. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a side elevation of a gondola-car pro 
vided with my improved brake mechanism; 
Fig. 2, a bottom plan view of the same; Fig. 
3, a side elevation of a passenger-car provided 
with the brake mechanism; Fig. 4, a bottom 
plan view of the same; Fig. 5, a plan view of 
the lever mechanism, showing the mechanism 
in position with the brakes off; Fig. 6, a 
side view of the same; Fig. 7, a plan view of 
the mechanism, showing the levers and cylin 
ders in the act of applying the brakes by 
fluid-pressure; and Fig. S, a plan view of the 
brake mechanism, showing the levers oper 
ated by the hand-wheel to apply the brakes. 
In said drawings, the numerals 1 and 2 in 
dicate the brake-levers, which are connected 
at their middles by a rod 3, the forked ends 
of which straddle said levers and slide with 
longitudinal slots 6 and 7 upon studs or pins 
4 and 5 upon said levers. The lever 1 has a 
stationary fulcrum S, rigidly secured to the 
car, and the lever 2 has its fulcrum upon a 
stud or pin 11, which slides in a longitudinal 
slot 10 in a bar or bracket 9, secured to the 
car. The rods 12 and 13 are pivotally con 
nected to the extreme ends of the levers 2 and 
1, and have their other ends suitably con 
nected to the truck-levers, which operate the 
brake-beams of the two trucks. The piston 
rods 18 and 19 of the individual air-cylinders 
16 and 17 are pivotally connected to the brake 
levers 2 and 1, near the ends to which the 
brake-rods 12 and 13 are pivoted, and said 
cylinders have the usual air-pipes 20 con 
nected to them. Said air-pipes have prefer 
ably graduating or regulating devices 21 con 
nected to them, by means of which the admis 
sion or exhaust of the air or other brake-op 
erating medium is controlled and governed 
according to the load bearing upon each 
truck. 
As the detail construction of these devices 
forms no part of this present invention, but 
is simply claimed in combination with the 
operating mechanism, and may either be the 
devices for which I have filed an application 
for Letters Patent on the 24th day of April, 
1890, under Serial No. 349,228, allowed Au 
gust 2, 1890, or any equivalent devices for 
the same purpose, I have deemed it unneces 
sary to illustrate said devices in detail. 
A rod 15, terminating in a chain and oper 
ated by a suitable brake-stand 14 for manipu 
lation by hand-power, is pivotally connected 
to the end of the brake-lever 2 beyond its 
sliding fulcrum 11, and when it is desired to 
operate the brakes by hand from either end 
of the car, a similar rod is pivoted to the op 
posite end of the other lever, which in that 
case has a sliding fulcrum instead of a sta 
tionary fulcrum. 
In practice, when the brakes are applied 
by means of the air-cylinders and their pis 
tons, the brake-levers will be forced toward 
each other and the longitudinal slots in the 
ends of the rod 3 Will admit of said levers, be 
ing moved toward each other without bend 
ing or buckling of the rod. Said rod 3 may 
be substituted by a chain or by a rod having 
a sliding joint, or of any suitable construc 
tion that will allow the Tod to form a non 
extensible but contractible coupling between 
the levers. When the brakes are operated 
by hand, the lever 2 may be tilted by the 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
5 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
 
460,162 
brake-stand and its fulcrum II may slide in 
the slotted bracket 9. This will cause said 
lever to draw upon the coupling-rod 3 and to 
tilt the lever 1, so that both sets of brakes 
will be simultaneously applied with the same 
force exerted against the wheels of both 
trucks. The coupling rod 3 will thus admit 
of the brakes of both trucks being simulta 
neously applied with the same force when 
the mechanism is operated by hand, and of 
the brakes of either one or of both trucks 
being applied by fluid-pressure with varying 
force, according to the load upon each truck. 
This feature would be impossible to carry 
out with one single air-cylinder, and would 
also be impossible to carry out with the 
usual system of brake-levers without the 
contractible but non-extensible coupling be 
tween said levers, as said levers could not 
be tilted toward each other without said con 
tractible coupling. As the coupling-rod is 
attached to the middles of the two brake-le 
vers, the brakes of both trucks will be ap 
plied with equal force when the brakes are 
operated by hand. 
The foregoing description and accompany 
ing drawings set forth in detail mechanism 
embodying my invention. Change may be 
made therein, provided the principles of con 
struction respectively recited in the following 
claims are employed. 
I therefore particularly point out and dis 
tinctly claim as my invention 
1. In a railway-car brake mechanism, the 
combination, with individual brake - levers 
and brakes for the trucks, of individual fluid 
cylinders connected to operate said levers and 
brakes, a non-extensible but contractible coup 
ling between said levers, and hand-power 
brake - Operating mechanisms connected to 
said brake-levers, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a railway-car brake mechanism, the 
combination, with individual brake-levers 
and brakes for the trucks, of individual fluid 
cylinders connected to operate said levers and 
brakes, fluid-regulating devices for said cyl 
inders for graduating the braking-power of 
each cylinder in proportion to the load upon 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
the truck, a non-extensible but contractible 
coupling between said levers, and hand-power 
brake-operating mechanisms connected to 
said brake-levers, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a railway-car brake mechanism, the 
combination of two brake-levers, a station 
ary fulcrum for one lever and a longitudi 
nally-sliding fulcrum for the other lever, fluid 
cylinders connected to operate said levers, a 
non-extensible but contractible coupling be 
tween said levers, and a brake-rod and chain 
attached to one lever near its sliding fulcrum, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. In a railway-car brake mechanism, the 
combination of two brake-levers, one having 
a stationary fulcrum at one end and the other 
having a sliding fulcrum at one end, means 
for individually rocking said levers, a non 
extensible but contractible coupling between 
said levers, and a hand-operated brake-rod 
attached to the sliding end of the one lever, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. In a railway-car brake mechanism, the 
combination of two hand-operated brake-le 
vers, a non-extensible but contractible coup 
ling between said levers, and individual op 
erating mechanism connected to each lever, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. In a railway-car brake mechanism, the 
combination of two brake-levers, a station 
ary fulcrum for the end of one lever, a longi 
tudinally-slotted bracket forming a sliding 
fulcrum for the end of the other lever, fluid 
cylinders having their piston-rods connected 
to said levers, brake-operating rods pivoted 
to the free ends of said levers, a rod having 
its longitudinally-slotted ends pivotally con 
nected to the middles of said levers, and a 
brake-rod, chain, and hand-wheel attached to 
the sliding end of the one lever, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing to 
be my invention I have hereunto set my hand 
this 22d day of November, A. D. 1890. 
WILLARD F. RICHARDS. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
EDWD. B. CLARK, 
S. H. LLOYD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460262.txt	(No Model.) 
H. A. HARWEY. 
DECREMENT ALLY HARDENED ARMOR PTATE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 460,262. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
32 | ::::: 
| 
H. A. HARWEY. 
DECREMENT ALLY HARDENED ARMOR PLATE, 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
No. 460,262. 
 
 
60/ci/ces.seas 
(7ee 60/ ca-laew 
(No Model.) 
H, A, HARWEY, 
DECREMENT ALLY HARDENED ARMOR PLATE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 460,262. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
 
: 
  
 
, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
63 TE THE I-Fir 
EIS 
% 
It if lesses 
(7ee. (4'eco---a--- 
- 
Irven?or 
1.2. 2. . A 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
H A Y WAR. D. A. II ARVEY, OF ORAN (; E, 
NEW J E FRSEY. 
DECREMENTALLY - HARDENED ARMoR-PLATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,262, dated September 29, 1891. 
Application filed April 1, 1891. Serial No. 387,209 (No model.) 
55 
Od 
7 o 
- 
- 
fication. 
To all, whom, it nually concern: 
Be it known that I, HAYWARD A. HARVEY, 
of Orange, New Jersey, have invented certain 
Improvements in Decrementally -IIardened 
Armor-Plates and in the Art of Manufactur 
ing the Same, of which the following is a speci 
This invention embraces a method of facili 
tating the transformation of homogeneous low 
steel armor-plates into plates which present 
lipon the side intended to receive the impact 
of projectiles a stratum of tenacious steel of 
heterogeneous crystalline structure highly 
and uniformly carburized and excessively 
hard upon its exposed surface and less and 
less carburized and gradually diminishing in 
hardness as the depth from said surfaee in 
creases. The required transformation is ef 
fected by inclosing the low steel plate be 
tween a mass of non-carbonaceous granular 
material on one side and a mass of granular 
carbonaceous material packed firmly against 
the other side in a compartment erected within 
the heating-chamber of a suitable furnace 
and in then raising the heat of said heating 
chainber and maintaining it at a temperature 
above the melting-point of cast-iron for a pe 
riod of time sufficient to effect the desired in 
crease in the tenacity of the steel and the 
Supercarburization to the desired extent and 
depth of the side of the plate against which 
the granular carbonaceous material is be 
ing constantly pressed. The plate is subse 
quently removed from the furnace and chilled 
by immersion in a cold bath or otherwise, as 
hereinafter set forth, whereby its supercar 
burized side is hardened. The heat to which 
the plate is subjected during the described 
treatment is so intense that the plate would 
be melted but for the granular materials sur 
rounding it, by which all parts of it are pro 
tected from the air. The continuous firm 
compression of the carlbonaceous material 
against the plate during the entire treatment 
secures the perfect contact of the carbonace 
ous material with all portions of the adjacent 
side of the plate and promotes the rapid and 
uniform supercarburization thereof. 
The product of the described treatment, ex 
cept in respect of its crystalline structure, is 
a homogeneous armor-plate of highly-tena 
cious steel, which upon the side intended to re. 
ceive the impact of projectiles presents a 
stratum of prescribed thickness which is dec 
rementally carburized, and consequently has 
an ununiform crystalline structure, and is ex 
cessively hard at its exposed surface and 
gradually diminishes in hardness as the dis 
tance inward from its exposed surface in 
creases. The differences in granulation or 
crystalline structure are those which are re 
spectively incident to the different percent 
ages of carbon present at different depths be. 
neath the surface. The said product is herein 
designated as a decrementally-hardened ar 
mor-plate, because the hardening process is 
the final step in its production, and because 
decremental hardening is dependent upon 
previous decremental carburization and in 
volves the presence in the finished product of 
a heterogeneous crystalline structure, which 
increases its resistance to cleavage. , 
The treatment is analogous to that de 
seribed in Letters Patent of the United States 
No. 376,194, issued to II. A. IIarvey January 
10, 1888. 
As modified for the present purpose the 
process is conducted as follows: The armor 
plate having been formed of the desired size 
and shape from a comparatively low steel, 
such as Bessemer steel or open-hearth steel, 
containing, say .10 to .35 per cent. of carbon, 
is laid, preferably, flatwise upon a bed of 
finely-powdered dry clay or sand deposited 
upon the bottom of a fire-brick cell or con 
partment erected within the heating-cham 
ber of a suitable furnace. The plate may be 
so embedded that its upper surface is in the 
same plane with the upper surface of those 
portions of the bed of clay or sand which al 
join the sides and ends of the plate, or the 
plate may, if desired, be allowed to project to 
a greater or less distance above the surface 
of the clay or sand. In either case the treat 
ing-compartment is the partially filled up 
with granular carbonaceous material, which, 
having been rammed down upon the plate, is 
covered with a stratum of sand, upon which 
there is laid a covering of heavy fire-bricks. 
The furnace is then raised to an intense heat, 
which is kept up for such period of time as 
may be required for the absorption by the 
metal adjoining the upper surface of the 
plate of, Say, an additional one per cent. 
CO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
75 
2 
460,262 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
25 
(more or less) of carbon, or, in other words, 
the quantity of carbon, in addition to that 
originally present, which may be necessary 
to enable the said metal to acquire the ca 
pacity of hardening to the desired degree. 
The temperature of the heating-chamber out 
side of the treating-compartment is brought 
up to a height equal to or above that required 
to melt cast-iron, and is kept up for a greater 
or less length of time, according to the depth 
of the stratum of steel which it is intended 
to charge with an excess of carbon. 
This 
period, however, will of course vary accord 
ing to the efficiency of the furnace. 
The degrees of efficiency possessed by dif 
ferent furnaces can only be satisfactorily as 
certained by actual trial. When ascertained, 
the reproduction of given results merely re 
quires the re-establishment of the conditions 
20 as to time and temperature under which said 
results have been previously observed to be 
obtained. This involves merely the main 
tenance of the furnace at a heat sufficient to 
melt cast-iron for the period which by pre 
yious observation has been ascertained to be 
the period required for adding to the tenacity 
of the steel and for the supercarburization of 
the plate to the prescribed extent and depth. 
For example, a plate, say, ten and one-half 
inches in thickness, composed of a compara 
tively low steel containing, say, .35 percent. 
of carbon, may be charged with additional 
quantities of carbon, gradually varying in 
amount from, say, one-tenth of one per cent. 
at a depth of three, inches beneath the sur 
face of the exposed side of the plate to one 
per cent. at the surface thereof by a contin 
uance of the treatment for a period of, say, 
one hundred and twenty hours after the fur 
nace has been raised to the required temper 
ature. 
The statement that the heat at which the 
furnace is maintained is sufficient to melt 
cast-iron is to be regarded as approximate 
merely. The more intense the heat the bet 
ter, and while it will of course be understood 
that the longer the treatment is continued the 
greater will be the depth to which the carbon 
penetrates beneath the surface against which 
the carbonaceous material is packed, it is also 
to be remarked that the penetration of the 
carbon is greatly facilitated by the continu 
ous firm compression of the carbonaceous ma 
terial against the plate. As a general rule 
the thicker the armor-plate the greater will 
be the permissible depth of supercarburiza 
tion. A ten-and-a-half-inch plate and a depth 
of supercarburization of three inches are here 
in referred to merely for the purpose of illus 
tration. After the conclusion of the carburiz 
ing treatment the plate is taken out of the 
furnace, and without removal of the carbona 
ceous material from its surface is allowed to 
cool down to the proper temperature for chill 
ing. During the cooling operation the car 
bonaceous material protects the hot super 
carburized surface from the air, and thus pre 
4o 
45 
So 
55 
vents the formation of scale, which, if pres 
ent, would interfere with the subsequent hard 
ening of the metal beneath it. The carbo 
naceous material, however, may without inju 
rious consequences be temporarily removed 
from and quickly replaced upon small por 
tions of the supercarburized surface for the 
purpose of exposing them for observation. 
When it is seen that the supercarburized sur 
face is so far cooled down as to have a dull 
cherry-red color, the carbonaceous material S 
quickly removed, and the plate is then chilled 
by being sprayed with torrents of cold fluid 
or by being submerged and kept in motion 
untii cold in a large body of cooling-fluid-las, 
for example, a more or less rapidly-running 
stream or river of fresh water or a tidal cur 
rent of salt water. The exercise of this pre 
caution insures the subsequent uniform hard 
ening of the supercarburized surface of the 
plate. 
The accompanying drawings, symbolically 
illustrating a furnace suitable for the de 
scribed treatment and mechanical appliances 
for handling the plate and for facilitating the 
chilling operation, are as follows: 
Figure is a top view of a furnace provided 
with a removable cover, erected upon the bank 
of a river or other body of water in suitable 
proximity to a crane and to a car-track ex 
tending down the bank along the bottom of 
the stream or body of water, showing a cal' 
upon which the treated plate is deposited by 
means of the crane, a windlass-chain Con 
nected with the car, and an engine for Operat 
ing the windlass, and thereby controlling the 
movements of the car up and down the in 
clined track. Fig. 2 is a side elevation, partly 
in section, of the plant represented in Fig.1. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse vertical section of the 
furnace, showing the armor-plate and the cell 
or compartment containing the bodies of ma 
terial in which the armor-plate is inclosed. 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section of a portion of 
an armor-plate shaded to symbolically rep 
resent variable degrees of supercarburization 
at different depths beneath the surface upon 
the side intended for exposure to the impact 
of projectiles. Fig. 5 is an elevation of a treat 
ing-furnace illustrating a mode of arranging 
the track so that the armor-plate can be taken 
out of one end of the furnace directly onto 
the car upon which it is supported during the 
chilling operation. Fig. 6 illustrates a pro 
vision for chilling the plate by spraying it 
with torrents of cooling-fluid, and shows a 
stationary platform extending from one end 
of the furnace to a position beneath the spray 
ing-tank. 
The drawings represent a furnace A, which 
may be provided with a movable cover A', as 
symbolically represented in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, 
or which may be constructed with reference 
to having one or both of its end walls re 
moved to facilitate the removal of the plate 
in a horizontal direction, as illustrated in Fig. 
6. Within the heating-chamber A of the fur 
95 
do 
IO 
II5 
25 
460,262 
O 
25 
15 
nace is the treating cell or compartment 3, 
which is preferably provided at the bottom 
with a series b of parallel rails, which are em 
bedded in a stratum of sand C of the same 
height as the rails and are intended for the 
support of the armor-plate I). The space 
around the ends and sides of the armor-plate 
is also filled with sand ('' nearly or quite to 
the top of the plate. A stratum of granular 
carbonaceous material E, rising to a height of, 
say, eight inches above the upper surface of 
the plate D, is tightly rammed down onto the 
top of the plate and is surmounted by a strat 
um of, say, two inches of sand F, covered by 
a layer G of heavy fire-brick. The stratum 
of sand F and the layer of fire-brick G not 
only protect the carbonaceous material from 
the fire, but serve to weight the carbonaceous 
material down upon the plate. 
The treating-compartment IB is heated by 
the flames and hot products of combustion 
from the fire-chamber II, which are led up 
ward through the flues II' and directed in 
Ward over the tops of the treating-compart 
inent and finally discharged into the chimney 
or Sanoke-stack li. 
In Fig. I the furnace is represented as 
erected upon the sloping bank I of a river or 
body of water J in suitable proximity to a 
crane K and a car-track I, extending down 
the bank and along the bottom of the body 
of water J. When the carburizing treatment 
is completed, if the furnace shown in Fig. 1 
is employed, the cover A' is removed, the fire 
is drawn, and the furnace allowed to cool off 
preparatory to the removal of the superin 
cumbent materials from the plate D and the 
lifting of the plate ID by means of the crane 
out of the treating-compartment and its de 
posit upon the car M. The track L is so in 
clined that the car when freed to the influ 
ence of gravity will run down into the water 
and a greater or less distance along the sub 
45 merged portion L' of the track. The car is 
hauled up the inclined portion I of the track 
by means of a windlass-chain N, fastened to 
the shore end of the car M and wound around 
the drum of the windlass O, which is operated 
by the engine O'. The chilling of the plate 
is effected by alternately hauling the car up 
the inclined portion L of the track and allow 
ing it to run backward by its own gravity. 
In dealing with a heavy plate it will usually 
be found more convenient to construct the 
55 furnace with reference to the removal of one 
or both of its end walls to facilitate the re 
moval of the plate from the treating-furnace 
by sliding it in a horizontal path onto a car, 
as indicated in Fig. 5, or onto a platform IP, 
which is on a level with the top of the rails to 
at the bottom of the treating-compartment, 
as indicated in Fig. G. The plate having been 
thus deposited upon the car, the latter can be 
run down into the water, as already described, 
or can be run under a spraying-tank Q, or the 
platform P may be prolonged sufficiently to 
reach from the end of the furnace to a posi 
35 
tion beneath the spraying-tank, as illustrated 
in Fig. 6. The spraying-tank has a perforated 
bottom (1, which is elevated, say, ten feet 
above the platform on which the plate is sup 
ported. The tank is supplied with water or 
other liquid by a service pipe or pipes Q' of 
sufficient capacity to supply a quantity 
greater thin the quantity discharged by the 
apertures in bottom othereof. After the car 
bonaceous material has been removed fronn 
the top of the plate and when the plate, hav 
ing been placed beneath the spraying-tank, 
has so far cooled down as to have a dull-rect 
color, the tank is supplied with the cooling 
fluid, which is discharged therefrom in jets 
from the perforated bottom directly upon the 
plate. 
With a furnace of the character shown in 
the drawings a period of about forty-eight 
hours will be required to bring up the heat to 
the required point, and such heat will be re 
quired to be kept up about one hundred and 
twenty hours. A further period of four or 
five hours will ordinarily be required after the 
fire has been drawn to remove the plate from 
the furnace and have it cool down to the desiresl 
dull-red color. The spraying operation Will 
be required to be continuously kept up for a 
period of about four hours in order to effect 
and preserve the chilling of the supercarbu 
rized surface until the remainder of the plate 
has become completely cool. A plate of ten 
and a half inches in thickness thus treated will 
be found to be excessively hardened upon its 
supercarburized surface and at the same time 
to be remarkably tenacious, so that a hard 
ened projectile of, say, six inches diameter, 
weighing one hundred pounds, fired at it with 
a striking velocity of two thousand feet per 
second will be shivered to fragments without 
deeply penetrating the plate. 
The extreme 
point of the projectile, which may slightly 
penetrate the plate, will be found to be welded 
thereto by the great heat resulting from the 
sudden stoppage of the projectile in its flight, 
Owing to the great tenacity and the hetero 
geneous crystalline structure of the super 
carburized and hardened stratum, its tough 
backing, and the entire homogeneity of the 
plate from one surface to the other, except as 
to its crystalline structure, there will be no 
cracking off of the hardened exterior stratum 
and no complete piercing of the plate by the 
projectile. In these particulars the plate will 
be found to differ in a marked degree from all 
armor-plates heretofore known. 
Its 
i20 
D 
What is claimed as the invention is 
J. The herein-described method of produc 
ing a decrementally-hardened tenacious ar 
mor-plate, which consists in inclosing a low 
steel plate between a mass of non-carbo 
naceous material on one side and a mass of 
granular carbonaceous material firmly packed 
upon the other side contained in a compart 
ment formed within the heating-chamber of 
a suitable furnace and in maintaining the said 
heating-chamber for a predetermined period 
70 
75 
I 25 
130 
4. 
460,262 
of time at a temperature above the melting- plate herein described, consisting of a plate 
point of cast-iron, and in subsequently chill- of tenacious steel presenting upon the side 
ing said plate, whereby a stratum of steel of intended for receiving the impact of projec 
prescribed thickness upon the side of the tiles a stratum of prescribed thickness of un 
plate against which said carbonaceous mate- uniform crystalline structure uniformly and 
rial has been pressed is made to acquire a highly supercarburized and excessively hard 
heterogeneous crystalline structure and a con- at its exposed surface and less and less ear 
dition of excessive hardness upon its exposed burized and gradually diminishing in hard 
surface and a condition of gradually-dimin-ness as the depth from said surface increases. 
ishing hardness as the depth from said sur- 
IIAYWAR) A. ARVEY. 
face increases. 
2. As a product of the herein-described pro- 
cess, the decrenientally-lardened steel armor- 
A. M. JONES, 
J. E. BURNS. 
2 cy 
O 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460362.txt	(No Model.) 
H. DAWIES. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MECHANISM FOR WORKING SELF ACTING GRABS, 
No. 460,362. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
 
 
WITNESSES 
| NVENTOR 
A 7TOARNEYS 
recaris perERs co., Photo-Latho. washio, p. 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
H. DAVIES. 
MECHANISM FOR WORKING SELF ACTING GRABS, 
No. 460,362. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
AZ67. 2. 
1. 
N Svy 
s 
2 
S 
2 S 
2AS 
I 
y C 
AT 
 
  
 
WITNESSES: 
as 76%-62. 
% -- 
1N WEWTOR 
% - 9a 
"(2. ATTORMEYS 
(No Model.) 
H. DAWIES, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
w 
MECHANISM FOR WORKING SELF ACTING GRABS, 
- No. 460,362. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
A'zay. 4. 
A, 24 
* 222222 
2 2 
7. 
2 
2. 
A. 
2. 
12 NN F. 
A SN eS 24a, 
O 
asses. 
o 27; ZZ2 
22 2? Ya? 2 
WITIVESSES. 
aaf262.42. 
- 
fNVENTOR 
*4-9-e- 
BY 
A 7TORNEYS 
THE hosts psters co, PHors-Litho. WASHINGT9, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
H, DAWIES, 
MECHANISM FOR WORKING SELF ACTING GRABs. 
No. 460,362. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
767. 6. 
SS 
P 
Maw 
A. 
L 
2 
Z2 
%277ZZ 
S 
A. 
2. 
% 
--- 2N2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
2,\ZZ24&% 
N. 
N 
CR 
Z2 
 
 
N 
2 
2 
2 
ZN 
7, 2N. 
z ZN 
2 2SSN L 
224 
W/TWESSES 
3.2. 
 
/NVENTOR 
A 77OAPMEYS 
The Norris PETERs co, Photo-THo., WASHNGTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
MECHANISM FOR WORKING SELF ACTING GRABS, 
H, DAWIES, 
No. 460,362. 
A. Z9. SP. z7, 2 
 
 
2. 
2NS 
  
 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
Fig. 9. 
 
 
Az/ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N N a 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
YN N&N 
Nza S N 
N 
NS SNZ, 
2 
N 
7 
2 
2 
2 
2 
Azzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz 27 2 
2. 
Z4 
2 2 
  
f t 
3. s ES 
2. 
WITNESSES; 
asz66ezzt 
 
AIV 
AITORNEYS 
the NORAf8 psTERS coPHoro-Litho, washioroN, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY DAVIES, OF PETER SHAM, NEW SOUTH W AL ES. 
MECHANISM FOR WORKING SELFACT NG GRABS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,862, dated September 29, 1891. 
Application filed August 6, 1889, 
Serial No. 319,954 (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY DAVIES, engineer, 
of Heathfield, Blairgowrie Street, Old Canter 
bury Road, Petersham, in the Colony of New 
South Wales, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Mechanism for Working 
Self-Acting Grabs, Buckets, Claws, and the 
Like Apparatus, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention has for its object the improve 
ment of mechanical contrivances used for 
Working self-acting grabs, buckets, grabs 
with tines or claws, and other apparatus used 
for performing the operations of dredging, 
excavating, digging, raising, and discharging 
or depositing. 
My improvements consist in the removal of 
the usual counterbalance-weight or counter 
balance-barrelsuspended in chains or running 
in racks at the back of the crane or other con 
trivances operating by means of a complicated 
System of messenger-chains, pitch-chains, and 
wheels and the substitution therefor of two 
chain or rope barrels mounted on one shaft, 
each having its own independent brake and 
both connected with a winding engine, winch, 
or hoist, from which variable and differential 
motions are imparted to them by means of 
Wheels and pinions, which may be either 
bevel, miter, spur, or friction wheels and pin 
ions. 
My invention is illustrated by the accom 
panying drawings, in which the same letters 
are used throughout the various views to in 
dicate similar parts. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a grab 
dredger and crane fitted with my improved 
mechanism. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the 
same, omitting a portion of the jib. Fig. 3 is 
a sectional elevation in detail, showing a form 
of my differential gear, in which bevel or 
miter-wheels and pinions are used. Fig. 4 is 
a sectional elevation in detail, showing an 
other form of my differential gear, in which 
spur wheels and pinions are used; and Fig. 5 
is a sectional elevation of a form of my dif 
ferential gear in which the mechanism con 
sists of pinions gearing into a spur-wheel and 
an internally-toothed wheel. Fig. 6 is a simi 
lar view showing the use of friction-gearing 
for directly driving the pinion-disk. Fig. 7 
is a side elevation of the devices shown in 
Fig. 6. Fig. 8 is a sectional view illustrating 
the braking devices. Fig. 9 is a side view of 
the same. Fig. 10 is a sectional view illus 
trating the use of friction-gearing for driving 
the main shaft. Fig. 11 is a similar view, in 
which the pinion disk is shown in the form of 
a pulley adapted to be driven by a belt. Fig. 
12 is an elevation of the same, the main shaft 
being shown in detail. 
In Figs. I and 2 the boiler A, table A', jib 
A', and winch-frame A' are essential parts 
of a steam-crane such as is ordinarily used in 
conjunction with grabs for the purpose of 
excavating or dredging. 
B is a bucket-grab. The barrel B', yoke B. 
closing-chain B', and opening-chain B' 
are the various parts and connections neces 
sary to effect the operations of opening, clos 
ing, raising, and lowering the same when in 
lSe. 
C is a bearing formed in the side frames Ol' 
cheeks of the winch to receive the main shaft. 
D is the main shaft. 
E is a loose barrel for receiving the closing 
chain, and F is another loose barrel for re 
ceiving the opening-chain, which is connected 
to the yoke B' of the grab. 
G G are the brake-treads formed upon the 
barres E and F. 
G' and G' are brakes. 
H is a friction-pulley transmitting motion 
to the friction-wheel I. 
J is an eccentric placed in the eye of the 
friction-wheel and operated by means of lever 
J' to produce contact between the friction 
pulley Hand wheel I. 
IK is a driver keyed to the main shaft and 
engaging the friction-wheel I by means of the 
crank-pin L, fitting in the slot M, formed in 
the said friction-wheel, and permitting the 
eccentric adjustment of the latter. 
N is a disk keyed upon the main shaft car 
rying the bevel-pinions OO upon studs O'O'. 
P P are bevel gear-wheels secured to the 
barrels E and F and gearing with the pinions 
O O. 
I make the barrels E and F of the same or 
different diameters, as may be most suitable 
for the particular work to be performed; but 
for working a bucket-grab such as is shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2 I prefer to make the barrels 
of different diameters, as shown on Figs. 2 
- 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
3. aw 
460,362 
7 o 
75 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
and 3, and to arrange the gearing as shown 
On Figs. 1, 2, and 3, from which it will be seen 
that the two barrels E and F are loose on the 
main shaft D of the winch, from which they 
receive a differential motion by means of one 
or more bevel-pinions OO, mounted on a disk 
N, made fast on the main shaft D and turned 
by it. The pinions carried by the disk run 
loose on their bearings and engage with the 
bevel gear-wheels PP, fixed on the ends of 
the barrels, so as either to give motion to or 
receive motion from either barrel, according 
to requirements. 
In the arrangement shown by Fig. 4 the 
disk N carries one or more pairs of spur 
wheels or pinions O', each pair of two sizes, 
running loosely on journals O, placed paral 
lel with the axis of the main shaft, the said 
spur wheels or pinions gearing with two spur 
toothed wheels P, fixed one upon the end of 
each barrel. 
In another form of my mechanism (shown 
by Fig. 5) I transmit motion to the barrels by 
means of one or more spur-pinions O', which 
are made to gear with an internally-toothed 
wheel P, attached to one barrel, and an ex 
ternally - toothed wheel P', attached to the 
other barrel. The barrels are made of any 
Suitable diameter, according to the system of 
wheel-gearing used and the work to be per 
formed in each particular case, certain modi 
fications being necessary to obtain a variable 
differential motion of the two barrels when 
used for the purposes set forth. To each bar 
rel I attach the necessary brake treads, which 
are operated by independent brakes and le 
vers, as in Fig. 3. The disk N is made to re 
volve in either direction and is under the con 
trol of the brake-pad J.' 
I may cause the diskN to become the driver 
by affixing to it a rim or face exterior to the 
pinions adapted to receive motion by some 
such old and well-known method as a belt, 
Figs. 11 and 12, spur, or friction gear, Figs. 
6 and 7, which will be transmitted to the 
barrels by means of the differential gear al 
ready described and illustrated, in which case 
the disk N may revolve loose on the shaft D 
or be secured thereto by a key or feather, when 
the shaft will revolve with it in the journals 
C. With this arrangement the friction-wheel 
I, the eccentric J, the driver K, and the brake 
pad J' may be dispensed with, giving greater 
length of barrels for the same width of winch; 
or I may drive the shaft D by means of a 
wheel I', Fig. 10, similar to the friction-wheel 
I, but Secured to the shaft by key or feather, 
actuated by such old and well-known methods 
as a belt, spur, or friction gearing. The in 
vention may thus be availed of, though re 
ceiving its motive power otherwise than by 
cylinders, &c., attached to itself-as, for in 
stance, by a portable engine located at a dis 
My invention serves to operate many kinds 
of grabs, and the arrangement shown by Figs. 
1, 2, and 3 is that which I use preferably for 
aCe 
- 
working a bucket-grab, such as is shown. On 
Figs. 1 and 2. In this method the closing chain 
or rope B' is coiled around and secured to the 
barrel B' of the grab, and is led thence over 
one of the jib-head pulleys to the barrel E, to 
which its other extremity is secured. The 
opening chain or rope B', secured to the 
cross-bar or yoke B' of the grab, is led over 
the other jib-head pulley and thence to the 
barrel F, to which its other extremity is se 
The friction-wheel I is mounted loose 
cured. 
on an eccentric J, placed upon the main shaft, 
the eccentric being operated by a lever J, 
which brings the friction-wheel into contact 
with the driving-pulley H or in contact with 
the brake-pad J', Figs. 1 and 2. In the fric 
tion-wheel I construct a radial slot M to re 
ceive the crank-pin L, attached to the driver 
IK, which is keyed upon the main shaft. 
When the eccentric J is turned in one direc 
tion, the friction-wheel is made to engage with 
the driving-pulley, thus giving the required 
motion to the main shaft, upon which the bar 
rels are placed. By a reverse movement of 
the eccentric the main shaft is arrested, con 
tact being produced between the wheels face 
and the brake-pad. 
The various motions required to operate 
the grab are effected as follows: If the grab 
is suspended as shown in the drawings, the 
Wheel I being on the brake-pad J', and it is 
desired to open it, the brake G of the open 
ing-barrel F is applied. The lever J is then 
operated so as to gently release the wheel I, 
when the grab will open and the spoil will be 
discharged. The grab is then swung into the 
required position for descent. The grab may 
now be said to be ready for lowering for the 
purpose of excavating, to accomplish which, 
the wheel I being still kept free, the brake 
G' is to be judiciously eased, when the de 
scent will be made, both chains being finally 
allowed to overrun a little in order that the 
grab may strike with its full weight on the ma 
terial to be lifted and press with the greatest 
possible effect upon it. During the subse 
quent operation of closing, which is effected 
by again applying the opening-brake G', care 
should be taken that the opening-chain is 
well paid out and quite slack. By operating 
the lever J contact is now made between the 
friction-wheel I and the driving-pulley H. 
The grab will then be made to close upon the 
material to be excavated. The opening 
brake G' is then released, and the grab will 
at once be raised with its contents to any de 
sired elevation and may be swung into the 
original position ready to again discharge the 
Spoil. 
An important feature in connection with 
the cut made by the grab actuated by my gear 
is that it rests with a maximum force upon 
the material to be excavated and is not de 
prived of the least part of its effectiveness 
by the operation of the opening-chain, which 
in most other appliances used for this pur 
pose lifts the grab partly of its work at this 
95 
Ioo 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
460,862 
s 
5 
O 
period, when it is desirable for it to press 
most forcibly upon the ground. In other 
mechanism for operating grabs it has also 
been observed that there is considerable dif 
ficulty in releasing and raising the grab when 
it has closed upon an immovable object, such 
as a Snag; but With this invention it is merely 
requisite to pay out the closing-chain B' 
quite slack and apply the closing-brake G' 
and, placing the wheel I and pulley Hin con 
tact, haul on the opening-chain B', when the 
grab will open and release the snag. 
It has hitherto been found that grabs have 
a difficulty in operating on refractory ground, 
Such as hard clays and certain impacted and 
cemented sands. Much of this difficulty is re 
moved by the property which my gear possesses 
of enabling the grab to gnaw or repeatedly 
bite at the ground before finally cutting it. 
Thisis effected as follows: The grabbeing open 
and resting on the ground, some slack chain 
is paid out, and, the brake G being applied, 
the winch is made to haul on the closing 
chain B', but only to make a partial closing. 
Brake G' is released and slack chain is again 
paid out. Brake G' is then applied and the 
Winch is made to haul on the opening-chain 
B', when the grab will open, and so on, re 
peating the operation of gnawing the surface 
until a good hold is obtained, when the final 
cut is made, as before described. 
An additional advantage associated with 
the use of my differential gear is that the 
depth at which it will work a grab effectively 
is not limited, and it does not require any ad 
justment of Weights and pulleys to suit va 
riations of depth. My gear also does away 
with the Severe shocks, such as are incident 
to the use of other mechanism when the 
Weight of the grab and excavated material 
contained therein is being transferred from 
one chain to the other. It is also to be noted 
that in lieu of the chains which are impera 
tively used with other arrangements I can 
substitute iron or steel wire ropes, and that 
whether chains or ropes be employed they 
may be much lighter than those required by 
other systems, because with my gear each 
chain does half the work. 
My invention may be operated by means 
of either hand, steam, or any other motive 
power. 
Having thus described the nature of my 
invention and the manner in which the same 
is carried into effect, I desire to state that I 
do not confine myself to the precise form of 
the mechanism hereinbefore described and 
shown for working self-acting grabs, buckets, 
and claws, and the like apparatus, as the req 
uisite differential motion of the barrels may 
be obtained by mechanical variations of my 
method. 
I make no claim for the devi?e of the grabs, 
buckets, or claws, nor yet for the principle of 
working such apparatus by means of winches 
or cranes, or for the use of a differential gear 
in a windlass or winch used for other pur 
poses than for dredging, excavating, raising, 
and discharging or depositing, in combination 
with grabs, buckets, claws, &c.; but what I 
believe to be new is the particular arrange 
ment and combination of mechanism for the 
purpose of operating grabs, buckets, claws, 
and the like apparatushereinbefore described, 
and illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings; and 
- What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a grab or bucket, 
of opening and closing connections therefor 
and two barrels for operating said connec 
tions, connected by differential gearing, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the grab B, the con 
nections B' B' for closing and opening 
the same, the barrels E F, differential gear 
ing connecting said barrels, brakes G'G' for 
controlling the barrels, and means for actu 
atting the differential gearing, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a grab or bucket, 
of opening and closing connections therefor, 
two barrels for operating said connections, 
connected by differential gearing, and shaft 
D, eccentric J, wheel I, and brake-pad J for 
operating and controlling said gearing, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
The foregoing specification of my improve 
ments in mechanism for working self-acting 
grabs, buckets, claws, and the like apparatus 
signed by me this 10th day of June, 1889. 
HRY. DAVIES. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED DE LON, 
- 
JOHN J. STONE, 
Solr., Sydney. 
Civil Engineer, Sydney. 
3O 
45. 
55 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460462.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 460,462. 
 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
W. J. BUR KE, 
REFLECTING LIGHT. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
-----' 
s 
No. 460,462, 
 
W. J. BUR KE. 
REFLECTING LIGHT, 
S. 
23- 
a. 
ad 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2 
Patented Sept. 29, 1891. 
es. 
7 N-aa. 
a. 
3a. 
W 
ae 
as, 
Z8. 
72. 
s 
P- - 
(No Model.) 
c. 
No. 460,462, 
 
Z6. 
 
 
W. J. BURKE. 
REFLECTING LIGHT, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Sept, 29, 1891. 
 
a 
3-vuovo 
72/Zza7 J. Bzurze 
33 Aze eittorney/ 
(222-6. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM J. BURKE, OF SEATTLE, WASHINGTON. 
REFLECTING LIGHT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,462, dated September 29, 1891. 
Application filed November 26, 1889, Renewed January 30, 1891, Serial No, 379,654, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM J. BURKE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Seat 
tle, in the county of King and State of Wash 
ington, have invented a new and useful Re 
flecting-Light, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to reflecting-lights 
Or signals for railroad-cars and for similar pur 
poses; and it consists in a multiple reflector, 
by means of which a single light may be du 
plicated a number of times, so as to show a 
number of signals for the production of which 
by Ordinary methods several separate and dis 
tinct lights would be required. 
The invention further consists in the im 
proved construction and arrangement of 
parts, which will be hereinafter fully de 
Scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a reflecting-light em 
bodying my improvements and adapted to be 
applied to the cupola of a caboose. Fig. 2 is 
a horizontal sectional view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a longitudinal vertical sectional view 
taken on the line at ac in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a 
longitudinal vertical sectional view taken on 
the line y y in Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a detail-per 
spective view of the main lantern-casing. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
1 designates the main lantern-casing, the 
bottom of which is provided with a circular 
opening 2, Surrounded by an annular flange 
3, within which the lamp 4, which is of ordi 
nary construction, may be mounted and se 
cured by means of bayonet-fastenings 5. The 
top of the lantern-casing is provided with a 
horizontal concave reflector 6, having a cen 
tral opening 7 for the passage of the lamp 
chimney 8, and the upper end of the casing 
has a cap 9, which is open at both ends for 
the escape of the products of combustion. 
45 The four sides of the main lantern-casing are 
provided with circular openings 10, in which 
glasses 11 are fitted. The said circular open 
ings are surrounded by the annular flanges 
12 for the purpose to be hereinafter set forth. 
The main lantern-casing is adapted to be fit 
ted centrally in the top of the cupola of a 
caboose, where it remains as a permanent fix 
ture. Its bottom flange 3, however, extends 
through the roof of the cupola, in order that 
the lamp may be conveniently removed and 
replaced from the inside of the caboose. 
To the annular flanges 12 upon the front 
and rear sides of the main lantern-casing are 
detachably connected the frustum - shaped 
tubes 13 13, to the outer ends of which caps 
14 are secured by means of bayonet-joints 15. 
The caps 14 have glasses 16, which may be of 
different colors, according to the signals which 
are to be conveyed. The inner sides of the 
tubes 13 should be brightly polished in order 
that the said tubes may act as reflectors to 
reflect the light from the lamp placed within 
the main lantern-casing. The tubes 13 are 
made tapering from the lantern-casing in an 
outward direction, as will be clearly seen by 
reference to Fig. 2 of the drawings. 
To the flanges 12 on opposite sides of the 
main lantern-casing are detachably secured 
the tubes 17, which converge toward their 
outer ends, and which are provided at their 
outer ends with rectangular casings 18, hav 
ing laterally - extending annular flanges 19, 
surrounding openings 20, and provided with 
bayonet-joints 21, by means of which they 
may be connected detachably with the outer 
ends of the tubes 17. The front and rear 
sides of the casings 18 are provided with 
flanges 22, upon which caps 23, having glasses 
24, are mounted detachably by means of bayo 
net-joints 25. Within the casings 18 are 
placed the V-shaped vertical reflectors 26, 
which serve to throw the light reflected 
through the tubes 17 in a forward and rear 
Ward direction. 
It will be understood from the construction 
of the device as herein described that the 
light from the single lamp placed in the main 
lantern-casing will be reflected forwardly and 
rearwardly through the reflecting-tubes at 
tached to the front and rear sides of said lan 
tern-casing and laterally through the reflect 
ing-tubes attached to the sides of said casing. 
The V-shaped reflectors mounted in the cas 
ings at the outer ends of said laterally-ex 
tending tubes likewise reflect the light for 
Wardly and rearwardly through the said sup 
plemental casings, thus duplicating the light 
to the extent that six separate and distinct 
signals are produced from the single light 
35 
40 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
EOC) 
460,462 
IO 
mounted in the main lantern-casing. It is 
obvious that by changing the colors of the 
glasses the signals may be changed; also, that 
a non-transparent cap may be substituted for 
any one of the transparent caps, for any one 
of the supplementary reflecting-casings, or for 
any one of the reflecting-tubes, as occasion 
may require. The reflecting-tubes are made 
(letachable from the main lantern-casing, as 
described, partly for the purpose of enabling 
such changes and substitutions to be conven 
iently made and partly to enable their interior 
reflecting-surfaces to be conveniently cleaned 
and polished, when desired. 
In the manufacture of my invention. I do 
not limit myself to the precise construction 
and arrangement of details herein described, 
but reserve the right to any modifications 
which may be resorted to without departing 
from the spirit of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination, with the main lantern 
casing, of the radially-extending reflecting 
tubes, the casings mounted detachably at the 
outer ends of said reflecting-tube and having 
openings in their front and rear sides, the 
caps mounted detachably upon the flanges 
Surrounding the said openings and having 
colored glasses, and the V-shaped reflectors 
mounted vertically in the said casings, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination, with the main lantern 
casing, of a supplemental reflecting-casing 
having front and rear openings, a V-shaped re 
flector mounted in the supplemental casing, 
and a connecting-tube, Substantially as set 
forth. 
3. The combination of the main casing, the 
horizontal concave reflector having an open 
ing for the passage of the lamp-chimney, the 
supplemental reflecting-casings, the V-shaped 
reflectors mounted in the latter, and the con 
necting-tubes, substantially as and for the 45 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
35 
W. J. BURKE 
Witnesses: 
JAS. HAMILTON LEWIS, 
S. E. BOYNTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460562.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
A, D, COOK & G, E. WILLERS. 
WALWE FOR STEAM PUMPS, 
No. 460,562, 
Patented 00t, 6, 1891. 
aa 
A267.7. 
fo 
OY as 
4 
 2fall 
--- 'F -m- 
a? 
O 
O 
a. 
w 
S-4. 
 
Ipiegfrs 
a 7ugust Zl Coo/, 
Goo?e Zwiere) 
(No Model.) 
 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
 
B? 
$ 3  
co, photo-thic...washington, d. c. 
A. D. COOK & G. E. WILLERS. 
WALWE FOR STEAM PUMPS. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 460,562, 
Patented Oct. 6, 1891. 
S 
R 
YN 
2 
2% 
22  
$ $ $ $ $ 
 
 
 
id:ligesses 
Ipilepirs 
7aggust 77. Coo7. 
George A. Ailers ..) 
y their Affairyzys, 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
A, D. COOK & G. E. WILLERS. 
WALWE FOR STEAM PUMPS, 
No. 460,562. 
Patented Oct. 6, 1891. 
72.7.1. 
3 
2 
f 
2 3. 
2 
As 
e. 
2 
 
 
 g 
EASE 
A-X S. 2 
 
 
2. 
2S 
S 
WZN (9) ) 
2 it 
aws NE  
a 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
SN2S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST D. COOK AND GEORGE E. WILLERS, OF LAWRENCEBURG, INDIANA; 
SAID WILLERS ASSIGNOR TO SAID COOK. 
VALVE FOR STEAM - PUMPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,562, dated October 6, 1891. 
Application filed April 1, 1891, Serial No. 387,466, (No model.) 
O 
To all uphon, it may concern. 
Be it known that we, AUGUST D. COOK 
and GEORGE E. WILLERs, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Lawrenceburg, in 
the county of Dearborn and State of Indiana, 
have invented a new and useful Valve for 
Steam-Pumps, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to steam-pumps of 
that class in which the plunger of the pump 
is adapted to be directly connected with the 
piston-rod of the motor - engine; and it has 
for its object to improve the construction of 
the said engine in the particulars to be here 
inafter fully described, and particularly. 
pointed out in the claims. 
Heretofore the class of steam-pumps to 
which our invention particularly relates have 
usually been provided with oscillating valves 
operated by an arm extending laterally from 
the piston-rod of the engine, which said arm 
at each end of the stroke has been carried 
into engagement with a cam-shaped bracket 
mounted upon the Valve-stem, two such 
brackets being secured and properly adjust 
ed upon the latter, and thus oscillating the 
stem and the valve mounted upon the latter. 
One part of our invention has for its ob 
ject to so construct the engine as to dispense 
with a valve which requires to be bodily os 
cillated, and to Substitute therefor a slide 
valve which may be actuated by the oscillat 
ing movement of the stem. 
Our invention has for a further object to so 
construct and arrange the main valve, where 
by the admission of the steam into the cyl 
inder is controlled, that it may be thrown or 
operated by the pressure of steam against a 
cylindrical piston mounted in the steam-chest 
roper. 
A further object of our invention is to so 
construct the engine that the steam shall be 
admitted into the cylinder by degrees, thus 
starting the piston at a slow rate of speed, 
and gradually increasing the speed toward 
the end of the stroke, and hence avoiding ex 
cessive vibration of the working parts, and 
also insuring the most complete and economi 
cal use of the steam. 
A further object of the invention is to sim 
plify the construction of the working parts. 
With these ends in view the invention con 
sists in the improved construction, arrange 
ment, and combination of parts, which will 
be hereinafter fully described, and particu- 55 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings hereto annexed, Figure 1 
is a side elevation of a steam pumping-engine 
constructed in accordance with our invention, 
the steam-chest having been removed from 
the same to expose the valve-seat. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal sectional view taken through the 
cylinder and steam-chest and showing the lat 
ter in position. Fig. 3 is a similar view show 
ing the valve-operating piston in a different 
position. Fig. 4 is a transverse sectional 
view taken on the line 4 4 in Fig. 2. Fig. 5 
is a transverse sectional view, taken on the 
line 55 in Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is a plan view of 
the steam-chest with the cover removed and 
with the slide-valve 51 and covering-plate 67 
likewise removed and partly inverted in per 
spective. Fig. 7 is a detail perspective of 
the slide-valve 51 and its operating mechan 
ism. Fig. 8 is a detail perspective of the roll 
er-frame 8 and rollers 9. Fig. 9 is a detail 
perspective view of a modified form of the 
valve-operating crank. 
Like numerals and letters of reference indi 
cate like parts in all the figures. 
Our improved steam pumping-engine may 
be arranged and operated in a horizontal or 
vertical position, as may be desired. 
In the drawings hereto annexed the cylin 
der 1 has been shown as mounted upon suit 
able supports 2 in a vertical position. The 
piston 3, which is of ordinary construction, 
has the stem or rod 4, which extends through 
a packing-box 5 in one end of the cylinder. 
Said piston-rod is provided with a laterally- 9o 
extending arm 6, suitably mounted thereon 
and having a transverse elliptical opening 7, 
in which is mounted a frame 8, at the ends of 
which are journaled rollers 9 9, which are 
preferably made of steel in order that they 95 
may be able to resist the wear to which they 
will be subjected. 
The cylinder 1 is provided at one side near 
its lower end with the valve-seat 10, having 
a central port or opening ill, communicating 
with a pocket or recess 12, which is connected 
with the exhaust-pipe 13 at one side of the 
85 
IOO 
65 
7 o 
75 
3O 
40 ) 
45 
2 
460,562 
O 
35 
45 
valve-seat. To the opposite side is connected 
the steam-pipe 14, which communicates with 
a receSS 15 at one side of the steam-chest into 
which live steam may thus be admitted. Ad 
jacent to the central port 11 are the exhaust 
ports 16 and 17, which are connected by chan 
nels 18 and 19 with the interior of the cylin 
der near the ends of the same. The live 
Steam ports 20 and 21 near the ends of the 
Valve-seat are connected with the ends of the 
cylinder by channels 22 and 23. The said 
channels 22 and 23 are provided near their 
ends with valves 24 and 25, by means of which 
the admission of steam into the ends of the 
cylindler may be regulated, and they are con 
nected with the channels 18 and 19 by means 
of auxiliary channels or passages 26 and 27, 
having valves 28 and 29, by means of which 
the passage of steam through the said chan 
nels may be controlled and regulated. The 
Steam-chest 30, which is bolted or otherwise 
secured upon the side of the cylinder, has a 
cylindrical bore 31, and it is provided in the 
side adjacent to the valve-seat 10 with a re 
CeSS or steam-chamber 32, which receives 
steam through the port or recess 15. In this 
Space or recess 32 is mounted the slide-valve 
33, which is provided near its ends with open 
ings 34 and 35, adapted to register with the 
steam-ports 20 and 21, respectively. Adjacent 
to said openings the valve is provided with 
recesses 36 and 37, adapted to connect the ex 
haust-ports 16 and 17, respectively, and alter 
1nately with the central exhaust-port 11. In 
the cylindrical bore of the steam-chest 30 is 
mounted a piston 3S, having the stem 39, 
which extends through a packing-box 40 in 
the end of the said steam-chest. The piston 3S 
is provided with a central annular recess 41, 
and it has in one side an opening 42 to re 
ceive the head 43, projecting from the slide 
Valve 33, which latter is thereby connected 
with the piston. The latter is preferably 
made hollow for the greater portion of its 
length, and is provided with an interior bush 
ing 43, forming a bearing for the valve-stem 
39, upon which it is usually mounted. The 
valve-stem is provided near its inner ends 
with a metallic collar at', which is shown as 
being recessed into the lower end of piston 38, 
and at the end of the said valve-stem 39 there 
is provided a clip 44, securely mounted there 
on by means of transverse bolts 45. The space 
on the valve-stem 39 between the metallic 
collar a? and the said clip 44 is such as to co 
incide with the length of the annular hole 
through bushing 43 in the lower end of the 
piston 3S, and the parts are so arranged that 
undue end motion may be taken up by the 
proper adjusting of said clip 44, and at the 
same time allow for the oscillation of the 
valve-stem 39 within the bushing 43, for pur 
poses hereinafter explained. Said clip 44 
forms a bearing for a stem 46, which is mount 
ed in a recess 47 in the head 43 of the slide 
valve, and around which is coiled a spring 48, 
the function of which is to hold the said valve 
to its seat. The opposite side of the clip 44 
is provided with a longitudinal segmental rib 
49, the function of which will be presently 
more fully described. 
Upon the outer side of the steam-chest 30 
is formed a seat 50 for the auxiliary slide-valve 
51, which is provided with a stem or head 52, 
extending through the opening 53 in the side 
of the steam-chest 30 and through a corre 
sponding opening 54 in the side of the piston 
3S, and having a groove 55 to receive the rib 
49. The valve-seat 50 is provided at one side 
of the central opening 53 with exhaust-ports 
56 and 57, which are connected with the ends 
of the cylindrical bore 31 by channels 58 and 
59. Between the ports 56 and 57 is formed 
the central exhaust-port 60, which communi 
cates through a channel or passage 61 with 
the exhaust-chamber 12. At the opposite 
side of the central opening 53 in the valve 
seat are formed the steam-ports (2 and 63, 
which are likewise connected with the ends 
of the cylindrical bore 31 by means of chan 
nels or passages 64 and 65. To the side of 
the steam-chest 30 is secured a casing 66, form 
ing an auxiliary steam-chest. The slide-valve 
51 is held to its seat by means of a plate 67, 
which is secured by means of screws or stud 
bolts to the flanges 68, between which the 
said slide-valve is mounted. Steam ports or 
passages 69 extend through the said flanges 
and covering-plate, as well as through the 
wall of the steam-chest 30 and connect the 
cylindirical bore of the latter with the aux 
iliary steam-chest formed by the casing 60, 
into which live steam may thus be admitted. 
The slide-valve 51, which is fitted upon the 
seat 50, is provided at one side of the stem 
52 with recesses 70 and 71, adapted to place 
the exhaust-ports 56 and 57 alternately in 
communication with the central exhaust-port 
60. Said valve is also provided with a per 
foration 72, which is adapted to align with 
the steam-port 63 when the steam-port 62 is 
covered by the valve 51. When the said valve 
is at the opposite end of its stroke and the 
port 62 is uncovered and open to steam, the 
port 63 is obviously covered by the solid por 
tion of the valve. 
The stem 39 of the valve-piston has a bear 
ing in a bracket 73, and it is provided with cam 
shaped arms 74 and 75, adjustably mounted 
thereon and adapted to be alternately engaged 
by the rollers 9 of the frame S, mounted in the 
arm or bracket 6 upon the piston-rod of the 
engine when the said piston-rod approaches 
the ends of its strolke. 
The operation of the invention is as follows: 
Steam is admitted to the steam-chamber 32 
through the pipe 14 and recess 15. Assuming 
the piston 3 to be in the position shown in Fig. 
2 of the drawings, near the extreme lower end 
of its stroke, one of the rollers mounted in the 
arm 6 has already engaged the cam-shaped 
arm 75, so as to oscillate the valve-stem 39, 
causing the clip 44 of the latter to actuate the 
slide-valve 51, thus opening the upper end of 
75 
95 
IOO 
Id 
I IS 
I 25 
... N 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
85 
460,562 
B. 
the tubular bore 31 to steam through the port sides of the hollow piston 38 cause the latter 
62 and channel 64 and connecting the lower to be constantly filled with live steam, which 
end of said tubular bore, through the channel 
completely surrounds the clip 44 and impinges 7o 
59, port 57, recess 71, port 60, and passage 61, 
against the stem 52 of the valve 51, thus bal 
With the exhaust-chamber 12. The piston 38 
ancing the latter. 
has accordingly been driven to the lower end 
The general construction of our improved 
of its stroke, carrying with it the slide-valve 
steam pumping-engine is simple and durable, 
33, the recess 36 of which connects the ex 
and it will be found to be very effective in 75 
haust-port 11, through the channel 16, with 
operation. 
the upper end of the cylinder 1, while the 
We have in the foregoing described the 
lower end of said cylinder is connected by 
preferred construction of our invention; but 
the channel 23 and auxiliary passage 27 with 
we desire it to be understood that We reserve 
the steam-port 21, which, being in alignment 
the right to any changes and modifications 8o 
With the opening 35 in the slide-valve, receives 
which may be resorted to without departing 
steam from the chamber 32. The piston 3 is 
from the spirit of our invention. 
accordingly forced in an upward direction, as 
Having thus described our invention, We 
indicated by the arrow in Fig. 2, at a com 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
paratively slow rate of speed until it passes 
of the United States- 
the channel 19, through which a fuller head of 
1. In a steam pumping-engine, the combi 
steam is admitted, thus accelerating the up 
nation, with the oscillating valve-stem having 
Ward movement of the piston. This upward 
cam-shaped arms or brackets, of the piston 
rod having a laterally-extending arm, and a 
movement continues until one of the rollers 
9 in the arm 6 engages the cam-shaped arm 74. 
plate mounted detachably in said arm and 9o 
The step 39 is thus oscillated to cause the clip 
provided at its ends with rollers adapted to 
44 to operate the slide-valve 51, so as to con 
engage the said cam-shaped arms or brackets, 
nect the upper end of the bore 31 with the 
substantially as set forth. 
exhaust through the channel 58, port 56, re 
2. The combination, with the arm or bracket 
extending laterally from the piston-rod and 95 
cess 70, port 60, and passage 51 and open 
having an elliptical perforation, of the frame 
ing the lower end of the bore 31 to steam 
through the channel 65 and port (33. The 
mounted detachably in said perforation and 
piston 38 is now forced in an upward direc 
provided at its ends with rollers, substantially 
tion, carrying with it the valve 31, thus open 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
ing the lower end of the cylinder 1 to the 
exhaust through the channel 19 and port 17, 
nation of the cylinder having steam channels 
recess 37, and port 11, and connecting the 
or passages controlled by valves, substan 
upper end of the cylinder with the live 
tially as described, the steam-chest having a 
steam space 32 through the channel 22, port 
cylindrical bore, the steam-actuated piston 
20, and valve - opening 34, and after the 
mounted to reciprocate in the latter and hav- Io5 
ing an oscillating stem provided with a clip 
piston has started on the downstroke also 
through the channel 18. It will be seen that 
at its inner end, the slide-valve carried by 
the passage of steam into the ends of the cyl 
said reciprocating piston, and a spring al 
inder is capable of being regulated by the 
ranged to bear against the clip upon the os. 
valves 24, 25, 2S, and 29, thus enabling the 
cillating stem and serving to force the said 1 Io 
weight of the piston and the pump-plunger 
valve to its seat, substantially as set forth. 
attached thereto, as well as the volume of 
4. The combination of the cylinder having 
water that is being raised by the pump, to be 
channels or passages, as herein described, 
balanced, thus insuring an easy and steady 
and provided with a valve-seat having ports 
motion. The main valve 31, instead of being 
connected with said passages and with the II5 
operated by the direct action of the piston 
exhaust, the steam-chest having a cylindrical 
rod, is carried by the steam-actuated recipro 
bore, the steam-actuated piston mounted to 
cating piston 3S, and its movement is thus 
reciprocate in the latter, and the valve car 
rendered not only absolutely certain, but 
ried by said piston and provided with re 
cesses and perforations, substantially as and I2O 
smooth and easy, and is carried into effect 
with less Wear upon the operating parts of 
for the purpose set forth. 
the machinery than would ordinarily be the 
5. In a machine of the class described, the 
case. The only part that requires to be op 
combination of the steam-chest having a cy 
erated by the direct impact of the arm 6, ex 
lindrical bore, with the piston mounted to re 
tending from the piston-rod 4, is the oscillat 
ciprocate therein and carrying the main slide- I 25 
ing valve-stem 39, the clip 44 of which oper 
valve, and an oscillating stem mounted ill 
ates the auxiliary slide-valve 51, which con 
said piston and having a clip or head at its 
trols the admission of steam to the chamber 
inner end engaging and adapted to actuate 
in which the reciprocating piston 38 is lo 
an auxiliary slide-valve whereby the admis 
cated. The annular recess 41 in the body of 
sion and exhaust of steam to and from the I3o 
the said piston permits the steam to pass to 
ends of the cylindrical bore of said steam 
the openings 69, through which it is conducted 
chest are controlled, substantially as set forth. 
into the auxiliary steam-chest composed by 
6. In a machine of the class described, the . 
the casing 66. The openings in the opposite combination of a steam-chest having a cylin 
3. In a steam pumping-engine, the combi- I co 
-4 
460,562 
drical bore, the reciprocating piston mounted 
therein and carrying the main slide-valve, 
and an oscillating stem having a bearing in 
Said piston and serving to actuate the mech 
anism whereby the steam for operating the 
reciprocating piston is controlled independ 
ently of the main slide-valve, substantially 
as Set forth. 
7. In a machine of the class described, the 
Combination of a reciprocating piston carry 
ing the main slide-valve with a stem mounted 
to oscillate in said piston, and an auxiliary 
slide-valve operated by said stem, and chan 
nels and passages, substantially as described, 
whereby the main and auxiliary valves are 
opened to the same steam-supply, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
S. The combination of the cylinder, the 
Steam-chest having a cylindrical bore, the 
Steam-act lated piston mounted in the latter 
and carrying the main slide-valve, an oscillat 
ing stem journaled in said piston and having 
a clip or head engaging an auxiliary valve 
Whereby the admission and exhaust of steam 
to and from the ends of the cylindrical bore 
of the steam-chest are controlled, cam-shaped 
a 'ms mounted upon the oscillating stem of 
the reciprocating piston, and an arm or bracket 
extending from the main piston-rod and hav 
ing rollers adapted to engage said cam-shaped 
arms, Substantially as set forth. 
9. The combination, with the reciprocating 
piston having an interior annular hole, of the 
Stem mounted to oscillate in the latter and 
having a clip or head provided with a seg 
mental rib and the slide-valve carried by the 
latter, substantially as set forth. 
10. The combination of the cylinder having 
Io 
25 
35 
40 
45 
the valve-seat, the steam-chest having a cylin 
drical bore, the piston mounted in the latter 
and having an annular groove, the main slide 
valve carried by said piston, the oscillating 
stem journaled in the latter and having a clip 
or head, the auxiliary valve engaged and actu 
ated by the latter, which valve is provided 
with a covering-plate, the steam supply and 
exhaust pipes, and the ports and channels or 
passages, all constructed and arranged Sub 
stantially as herein described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
11. In a steam pumping-engine, the cylin 
der having the valve-seat provided with a 
central port communicating with a pocket o' 
recess connected with the exhaust-ports ad 
jacent to said central port and connected by 
channels or passages with the interior of the 
cylinder near the ends of the latter, independ 
ent outer ports connected with the ends of the 
cylinder by channels or passages running in 
the direction of said ports adjacent to the cen 
tral port, auxiliary channels connecting the 
said channels or passages in pairs, and inde 
pendent valves located near the opposite encks 
of the passages communicating with said outer 
ports to regulate the passage of steam through 
said auxiliary channels and the outer passages 
or channels, respectively, substantially as 
herein described, and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing 
as our own we have hereto affixed our signa- 7 O 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
AUGUST D. COOK. 
GEORGE E. W.I.T,ERS. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES II. SKINNER, 
WILLIAM. F. COOK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460663.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 460,663, 
a 
a. 
J. SEARWOGLE, 
MAT FOR PICTURES, 
Patented Oct. 6, 1891, 
6 
& 
6 
i 
s 
 
z - H - 
4. 
Z27. / 
ca 
- - - 
e 
e Z27, 2 
 
 
c 42 
to a 
Zzzezzaar; 
4eeaeez, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN SEARVOGLE, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
MAT FOR PICTURES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,663, dated October 6, 1891. 
Application filed April 20, 1891, Serial No. 389,683, (No model.) 
O 
To adt, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN SEARVOGLE, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Mats for Pictures, which 
improvement is fully set forth in the follow 
ing specification, and shown in the accompa 
nying drawings. 
Myinvention is a novel construction of mats 
for pictures; and it consists in the manner of 
mounting the covering upon the frame of the 
mat. The invention is hereinafter fully de 
Scribed, and more particularly pointed out in 
the claims. It is found in practice that the 
joints at the corners of mat-frames are apt to 
Open after being covered with the paper and 
tear the latter, as indicated at the lower right 
hand corner of Figure 1 in the drawings, 
This opening at the joints results from a 
shrinking or moving of the wooden pieces of 
which the frames are made, and it occurs 
Sometimes even after the wood has been thor 
oughly kiln-dried. Furthermore, the two 
pieces forming a joint, when brought to an 
even surface, will frequently become uneven 
or rough on account of one piece rising slightly 
above the other. This unevenness appears 
through the paper covering when the latter 
is pasted directly onto the wood, causing the 
mat to be disfigured at the corners. It is 
found that the frames open at one or more 
of the inner corners, which openings extend 
usually from one-half to two-thirds of the dis 
tance to the outer corners. This opening of 
the joints, whatever may be the cause, is a 
serious difficulty in the manufacture of mats, 
and to overcome this difficulty is the object 
of my invention. 
Referring to the drawings, Fig. 1 is a front 
view of a mat with parts of the covering 
broken away. Fig. 2 is an edge view of the 
same, a part of the first or lower covering be 
ing broken away. Fig. 3 is a rear view of the 
lmat; and Fig. 4, a transverse Section on the 
line 4 4 in Fig. 1, drawn to a larger scale. 
Referring to the parts shown in the draw 
ings, A is the frame of the mat, it being sub 
stantially of common construction. These 
frames are usually made of wooden strips d, 
preferably mitered at the corners and glued 
or otherwise fastened together. 
- 
In constructing my improved mat I first 
cover the face of the frame with cloth a or 
similar material, which, however, is not glued 
or pasted onto the front face of the wood, as 
is usually done, but is turned over on the 
outer edges of the frame and there secured 
by tacks b or other simple means of fasten 
ing. The inner edges of the cloth are also 
carried through the frame and turned over 
against the back surface thereof, as shown in 
Fig. 3, and secured by tacks b or other sim 
ple fastening as an adhesive substance. Upon 
this cloth I mount the paper or outer cover 
ing c of the mat, securing it to the cloth by 
paste or other adhesive substance. Thus 
mounted, the clothis free from the face of the 
fraue, and it and the outer paper covering 
are independent of any expansion or contrac 
tion of the wood beneath them resulting in 
the opening of the corner joints or the un 
evenness at flhe corners of the frame above 
described. In consequence of this no rough 
ness or irregularity of the face of the frame 
is shown on the face of the paper covering, 
which accomplishes the object sought. 
The cloth applied as above described may 
be such that it will be the only covering for 
the frame and constitute the visible portion 
of the mat, or the paper, made strong and 
tough, applied in the same manner, may itself 
constitute the only covering for the frame. 
Either of these methods of covering the frame 
comes within my invention, the spirit of which 
is to leave the covering of the frame clear or 
free from the face of the latter and fasten 
said covering at the outer edges or the back 
of the frame, as described, and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
The sheet of cloth is formed with an open 
ing at its center, corresponding in a general 
way with the view - opening in the frame. 
(Clearly shown in Fig. 3.) The middle part of 
the cloth, being thus cut out, forms four inte 
rior edges, in which short kerfs are made at 
the corners, forming flaps, which are turned 
through the frame and secured to its rear 
surface, as above set forth. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A mat for pictures, consisting of an open 
frame formed of strips of wood rigidly joined 
at their ends, the faces of said strips of wood 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
M OO 
65 
75 
95 
IOC 
480,663 
5 back thereof, the outer edges of the cloth be- scribed. 
being covered with cloth permanently at cured to the outer edges of the frairie, and a 
tached to the frame, said cloth having an open- paper covering for the canvas secured there 
ing formed at its middle portion, with flaps to, said canvas being free from the faces of I5 
turned through the frame and secured to the said strips, substantially as shown and de 
In witness whereof I have hereunto Set my 
ing secured to the outer edges of the frame, 
substantially as described and shown. 
hand, this 17th day of April, 1891, in the 
formed of strips rigidly joined, a canvas cov- 
Ici ering for said strips open at its center, with 
flaps turned through the frame and secured 
thereto and the outer edges of the cloth se- 
2. A mat for pictures, consisting of a frame presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN SEARWOGLE. 
Witnesses: . 
ENOSB. WHITMORE, 
M. L. MCDERMOTT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460763.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 460,763, 
J. A. SEG-BERS, 
FOP BOARD FOR BOLTING DEWICES, 
Patented Oct. 6, 1891. 
O 
O 
O 
19, Z 
% 
% 
% 
W 
% 
% 
N 
a 
s 
N 
s 
N 
S 
s 
N 
A 
 
z% 
% 
3N4. A.S.,2 
%z% 
% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH A. SEGBERS, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
FLOP-BOARD FOR BOLTING DEVICEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,763, dated October 6, 1891. 
Application filed March 2, 1891, Serial No. 383,463, No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. A. SEGBERs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of 
California, have invented an Improvement in 
Flop-Boards for Bolting Devices; and I here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to a device which I 
call a flop-board, which is especially appli 
cable to four-bolting devices. 
It consists in certain details of construc 
tion, which will be more fully explained by 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a transverse section showing the 
arrangement of my device with relation to 
the reel, Cant-boards, and conveyers. Fig.2 
is a perspective view of my flop-board. Fig. 
3 is a view of one of the boards removed from 
the channel. 
A is the bolting-reel, which is made of any 
suitable Or desired length and has its sur 
face covered with bolting-cloth of different 
sized meshes. The discharge from this reel 
falls upon the cant-boards B, by which it is 
delivered into along open-bottomed trough or 
channel which extends longitudinally be 
neath the bolting-reel and receives the vari 
ous grades of material discharged from the 
reel. The sides or rails C C of this channel 
are of peculiar shape in transverse section, 
having the in Wardly-projecting portion C, 
forming a sort of V-shaped orangular trough 
in connection with the outer portion C, and 
these troughs serve to receive the lower edges 
of the cant-boards, which are supported in 
then, so as to deliver the material which falls 
upon the cant-boards into the central chan 
From the lower edges 
nel before described. 
of these side pieces project the lips C, and 
these serve as a guide in the attachment of 
the semicircular metallic strips D, which are 
secured to the lower part of each of the sides 
C and form a concave curvature beneath the 
channel or trough. 
E E are partition-plates, which are made of 
thin sheet metal and have their lower edges 
curved to correspond with the semicircular 
bands D. The sides C of the channel-pieces 
have saw kerfs or grooves made vertically in 
them to receive these partition-plates, which 
35 
45 
are slipped down into these saw kerfs or 
grooves, so that their lower semicircular edges 
will fit into the centers of the semicircu 
lar bands D, and they thus serve to cut off 
each of the chambers or spaces formed be 
tween the partition-plates from those adja 
cent thereto and also as braces to stiffen the 
thin semicircular bands D, within which they 
rest. 
F F are what are termed flop-boards, 
and they are adapted, by changing their po 
sitions in the bottom of the open trough or 
channel, to direct the material falling from 
the bolting-reel into this channel and deliver 
it to one or the other of two screw conveyers 
G, which are rotated in horizontal troughs or 
channels H beneath the bolting-reel and the 
channel which contains the flop-boards. In 
my construction these boards have semicii'- 
cular channels or grooves formed in the edges 
to correspond with the edges of the curved 
Strips D, and as these strips project a short 
distance, as before described, upon each side 
of the vertical partitions these projecting 
edges will enter the corresponding grooves in 
the boards, and thus hold them in place and 
Serve as guides upon which the boards inay 
be moved from one side to the other, at the 
Same time making a tight joint where each 
partition is introduced, so that the material 
will remain in its own compartment. In the 
center of the bottom of each board is made a 
depression, or, if desired, a knob or attach 
ment may be fixed thereto, by which the 
boards may be moved. When drawn upon 
One side, they will fit just outside of the lip 
C of the rails of the channel, and their inner 
surfaces will stand at such an angle as to de 
liver the material falling upon them into one 
of the screw-conveyer channels before de 
scribed. 
If it is desired to reverse the flop-boards so 
as to feed into the opposite screw conveyer, 
it is only necessary to push them around, 
sliding upon the semicircular guides before 
described, and they will stand at the same 
angle upon the other side, so as to deliver into 
the opposite conveyer-channel. 
It will be manifest that by making the con 
veyers with the flights running in different 
directions the material which is delivered to 
the conveye's between one end and the other 
9o 
95 
Od 
3. 
460,763 
35 
40 
45 
55 
diverge therefrom, a bolting-reel journaled 
centrally above the channel between the rails, 
and the direction or flop boards adjustable in 
the bottom of the channel, substantially as 
herein described. 
3. The combination, with a bolting device, 
of the side rails and cant-boards forming a 
channel beneath the bolting-reel, the semi 
circular metallic guide-strips fixed traus 
versely beneath the bottom of said channel, 
and the vertical partition-plates having the 
bottom or lower edges made semicircular and 
fitting the curvature of the guide-strips, sub 
stantially as herein described. 
4. The side rails of the open-bottomed chan 
nel, the semicircular guide-strips fastened to 
the rails and forming a concave curvature be 
neath the open channel between the rails, 
thin transverse partitions fitted into slots in 
the adjacent faces of the rails having a curva 
ture at the bottom to fit the curved guide 
strips, and the flop or direction boards hav 
ing grooves or channels formed in their ends 
to correspond with the curvature of the semi 
circular strips, said channels fitting upon the 
edges of the strips, so that the boards may be 
moved from one side to the other, Substan 
tially as herein described. 
h In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
and. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH. A. SEGBERS. 
S. H. NOURSE, . 
J. A. BAYLESS. 
5 
IO 
29 
25 
may be carried in different directions to a 
proper discharge, and by the use of these 
flop-boards, as above described, the different 
grades which are delivered from the reel may 
be separated as closely as is desirable. 
The ends of the rails or side pieces C C are 
supported in the end pieces I, which have 
channels cut in them to receive and fit the 
peculiar shape of the bottom of the strip and 
lip C', and these end pieces are made diverg 
ent, so as to present a considerable base, 
which rests upon the top of the conveyer 
channels, as shown. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a flour-bolting de 
vice, of an open trough or channel having an 
adjustable flop or direction board in the bot 
tom, the side rails of the channel having a 
V-shaped trough for the reception of the lower 
ends of the cant-board and provided with de 
pending lips C and forming-guides, and trans 
verse strips secured to said lips, substantially 
as herein described. 
2. The side rails C, having the projection 
C formed in a single piece there with and 
forming a V-shaped trough, the lips on the 
lower edges of the rails, and curved guide 
strips secured to the lips and forming a con 
cave curvature beneath the open channelbe 
tween the rails, inclined cant-boards, the 
lower edges of which fit into and are sup 
ported in said trough, while the upper sides 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460863.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 460,863, 
C. GUMBEL. 
STRINGED INSTRUMENT, 
Patented Oct. 6, 1891. 
 
 
 
1zzezzazi 
o, roto-Lito., washingto 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL GUMBEL, OF KROFDORF, NEAR WETZLAR, ASSIGNOR TO JULIUS 
HEINRICH ZIMMERMANN, OF TEIPSIC, GERMANY. 
STRING ED INSTRUMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,863, dated October 6, 1891, 
Application filed April 13, 1891, Serial No. 388,720, (No model.) Patented in Germany May 1, 1888, No. 45,762, 
To add, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARL GMBEL, a citi 
Zen of Germany, residing at Krofdorf, near 
Wetzlar, in the Kingdom of Prussia, Ger 
many, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Stringed Instruments, (for 
which I have obtained a patent in Germany, 
dated May 1, 1888, No. 45,762;) and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to mechanism for pro 
ducing musical sounds and harmonies, and 
especially to that type of instrument in which 
the musical tones and combinations of tones 
are produced by Strings stretched to a proper 
tension and giving forth, when vibrated, a 
musical tone, the pitch of the latter being 
governed by the size and length of the string. 
It is the purpose of my invention to pro 
vide simple means which may be substituted 
for the single-stroke hammers-such, for ex 
ample, as those used upon pianos-for pro 
ducing vibration of the string, whereby a sus 
tained vibration shall be produced and a mu 
sical tone or note of increased strength, purity, 
and duration. 
The invention consists to these ends in the 
Several novel features of construction and new 
combinations of parts hereinafter fully de 
Scribed, and then more particularly pointed 
Out and defined in the claims which conclude 
this specification. 
To enable others skilled in the art to which 
my invention pertains to understand, con 
struct, and use the same, I will proceed to de 
scribe said invention in detail, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section upon the line 
acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is an elevation showing 
a single device embodying my invention, a 
portion of a string under tension being shown 
in said figure. Fig. 3 is a detail vertical sec 
tion showing a modified construction. Fig. 4 is 
a vertical section upon the line y if, Fig. 3. 
In the said drawings the reference-numeral 
1 indicates a string formed of any suitable 
material and prepared either by Winding it 
or in any other suitable manner, Said string 
being placed under tension and associated 
with a series of strings of various lengths and 
tension. 
Arranged within suitable proximity and at 
right angles to the longitudinal axis of the 
string 1 is a tubular casing 2, closed at one 
end and open at the other. This casing may 
be arranged vertically or horizontally or in 
an inclined position, and in one of its sides 
is formed a slot, 3, extending nearly from end 
to end, and mounted upon the same is an 
elastic strip 4, of metal or other suitable ma 
terial, of such size as to fit the slot 3 without 
material contact with the edges or end of the 
same. The strip or tongue 4 extends trans 
versely to the string 1 and is entirely discon 
nected there from in such manner that the 
free vibratory end of the tongue lies in or 
over that end of the slot which is adjacent to 
the closed end of the casing. The tongue is 
of thin material, and, having suitable elas 
ticity, it will be readily seen that by forcing 
a current of air from without through the 
slot and through the open end of the tube a 
vibration of the tongue 4 will be set up simi 
lar to that of the reed of an Organ. If the 
casing 2 be arranged properly, SO that the Wi 
brating end of the tongue shall just fail to 
strike the string 1 at each vibration, it will, 
provided said string is of suitable size and 
length, set up vibrations therein similar in 
number to those of the tongue. By Varying 
the width and length of the latter its vibra 
tions may be multiplied or diminished in 
number in the same period of time, and in 
this manner a series of Strings may be ad 
justed to sound the chromatic scale, each 
string being vibrated by a tongue or strip 
having a corresponding rapidity of vibration. 
Thus a series of strings of any number may 
be used to produce harmony by vibrations 
sustained for any length of time, like those 
of the reeds of an organ, the tones being pro 
duced by the sonorous vibration of the strings 
instead of the reeds. 
With the construction shown in Figs. 1 and 
2 I may use a suction or exhaust; but I haye 
shown in Figs. 3 and 4 a construction by 
which a forced blast may be used, if preferred. 
This device consists of a two-part casing, in 
one or both of the legs 5 of which is formed 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
2 
460,868 
to both the legs 5. 
a slot 3, a vibratory tongue 4 being mounted 
over said slot upon the side on which the air 
approaches the slot. The string 1 is arranged 
to pass through openings 6, of such size as to 
permit the sonorous vibration without con 
tact. 
Air enters the casing by a flue 7, common 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, with a string capable 
of sonorous vibration, of a casing open at One 
end and having a slot over which is arranged 
a vibratory tongue or strip of elastic material 
extending transversely to the longitudinal 
axis of the string, fastened at one end to the 
casing, and having its free end in suitable 
proximity to the string, substantially as de 
scribed. 
O 
2. The combination, with a two-part casing 
having a flue common to both parts, of an 
elastic strip or tongue rigidly attached at 
one end over a slot in the part or leg of Said 
casing, and a string capable of sonorous vi 
bration, arranged to pass through the part of 
said casing, entirely disconnected from but : 
adapted to strike the free vibratory end of 
said strip, the string lying in openings in the 
wall of said casing large enough to permit 
free vibration, substantially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 3o 
3ARL GUMBEL. 
Witnesses: 
ALVESTO S. HOGUE, 
JEAN GRUND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US460964.txt	(No Model.) 
S. J. HARRIS, 
DOUBLE ACTION FORCE PUMP, 
No. 460,964, 
Patented Oct. 13, 1891, 
sts N. 
 
Wvases 
%fully s 35 sessory cutory -4 
W\\ewWv , 6as $4. Ma - , 
% 
G2/ 11e. 
2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SCOTT J. HARRIS, OF ORT ON VILLE, IOW. A. 
D OUBLE-ACT ON FORCE - PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 460,964, dated October 18, 1891. 
Application filed May 1, 1891, Serial No. 391,243, (No model.) 
Toolz whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SCOTT.J. HARRIs, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Ortonville, in the county of Dallas and 
State of Iowa, have invented a new and use 
ful Double-Action Force-Pump, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My object is to provide means for forcing a 
continuous stream of water through a well 
tube and also of providing a cheap and con 
Venient Supporting-post for the well-tube and 
the Operative parts on the outside of the well 
tube; and my invention consists in the con 
struction and combination of a supporting 
post having a lever or handle fulcrumed in 
its top and a submerged force-pump having 
two Sets of valves and two pistons which are 
alternately reciprocated, as required to force 
a continuous stream of water through the well 
tube and pump-spout connected therewith, 
by means of connecting-rods which are at 
tached to the pistons and to the pump-handle 
on Opposite sides of the supporting-posts in 
Such a manner as to elevate one connecting 
rod, piston, and set of valves while the other 
connecting-rod, piston, and set of valves is 
being lowered, as hereinafter more fully de 
Scribed, pointed out in my claim, and illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is an enlarged detail view of the 
Submerged part of the pump, showing the con 
Struction, arrangement, and combination of 
the pistons and valves with the connecting 
rods and other parts. Fig. 2 is a front eleva 
tion of the complete device placed in a well 
as required for practical use; and Fig. 3 is a 
side elevation of the complete device, taken 
from a point at right angles from Fig. 2. 
A is a base, preferably made of cast metal, 
complete in one piece and adapted to allow a 
Supporting-post to be fixed thereto. 
B is a supporting-post, preferably made of 
tubular iron and attached to the base A by 
means of a screw on its lower end that enters 
a screw-threaded bore in the base A. It is 
adapted to support a well-tube and has at its 
top perforated projections adapted to allow a 
pump-handle to be fulcrumed thereto. 
C is a pump-handle of common form full 
crumed in the top of the supporting-post B. 
D is a well-tube attached to the supporting 
post and curved at its top, as required, to form 
a spout D', and its lower end has branches D', 
as required, to connect it with the two valve 
chambers, as shown in Fig. 1. 
E are valve-chambers made in two parts. 
They are connected to the branches D and 
are adapted to allow spherical balls F to op 
erate therein, and their lower sections are SO 
shaped as to produce valve-seats F for the 
ball-valves. 
II are open-ended cylinders connected with 
the lower ends of the valve-chambers F. 
Their lower ends are slotted, as required, to 
allow piston-rods to be connected with pis 
tons therein. 
J are open-ended pump-pistons on the in 
side of the cylinders H. They are cylindrical 
in shape, and attached to their tops in a com 
mon way are check-valves J. 
IK are stirrup-shaped piston-rods attached 
to the lower ends of the piston J. They op 
erate on the outside of the cylinders H and 
valve-chamber F and traverse the slots in th 
ends of the cylinders H. 
L are connecting-rods attached to the pump 
handle G on opposite sides of its fulcrum and 
to the piston-rods K to impart reciprocating 
motions to the pistons J and thereby alter 
nately open the check-valves J', attached 
thereto, when the handle C is operated, as re 
quired, to forcea continuous stream of Water 
up through the valve-chambers F and the 
well-tube D and its spout D. 
It is believed from the foregoing detailed 
description of the construction and function 
of the various parts which comprise my in 
vention that the construction and operation 
of the whole device will be readily understood 
by any one skilled in the art to which it per 
tains. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
An improved double-action force-pump 
comprising a base, a supporting-post, and a 
handle fulcrumed therein, substantially as de 
scribed, a well-tube attached to the support 
ing-post and curved at the top, as represented, 
to form a spout, a branch having two arms 
extending in opposite directions and having 
a screw-threaded connection with the said 
tube, two ball-valve chambers formed com 
plete in themselves and having screw-thread 
IC 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
460,964 
and having approximately stirrup-shaped de 
vices on their lower ends which are extended 
through the vertical slots in the said cylin 
ders and attached to the valve-bearing pis 
tons, substantially as shown and described. 
SCOTT J. HARRIS. 
C 
Witnesses: 
C. C. JOHNSON, 
THOMAS G. ORWIG. 
ed connections with the said branches, open- | 
ended cylinders provided with vertical slots 
at their lower ends and detachably connected 
with the said valve-chambers, pistons having 
their lower ends open and a check-valve at 
their tops placed in the said open-ended cyl 
inders and adapted to be vertically recipro 
cated therein, and piston-rods connected with 
the handle on opposite sides of its fulcrum 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461064.txt	(No Model.) 
F. K. WRIGHT 
TUBULAR LANTERN, 
No. 461064, 
- Z79.-Z. 
Patented 00t, 13, 1891. 
- 74,7. 2. 
  
 
ES 
Weze ers eas: 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK K. WRIGHT, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
STEAM GAUGE AND LANTERN COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE, AND THE R. 
E. DIETZ COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TUBULAR LANTERN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 46 1,064, dated October 13, 1891. 
Application filed November 20, 1890, Serial No, 372,003, 
(No model.) 
To all whon, it nalty conce77: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK K. WRIGHT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga and State 
5 of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Tubular Lanterns, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in tubular lanterns, and has for its objects 
IO to secure the upper portions of the air-tubes 
together more securely and at less expense 
than heretofore and to provide simple means 
for holding the tilting globe-frame in its nor 
mal position. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation, partly in section, of a tubu 
lar lantern provided with my improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation with one tube broken 
away. Fig. 3 is a horizontal Section through 
20 the upper portion of the tubes in line a ac, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a horizontal section in line 
of y, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a fragmentary perspec 
tive view showing one of the tubes before the 
elbow-bond is formed in the same. Figs. 6 
25 and 7 are perspective views showing a modi 
fied construction of the fastening by which 
the tubes are secured together. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the several figures. 
A represents the oil-pot; (l, the air-chamber 
on the same, and b the burner. 
CC represent the air-tubes, which are each 
composed of a side portion d, bottom portion 
e, top portion f, and depending portion g. 
35 These tubes are constructed With flat backs, 
as set forth in Letters Patent No. 390,553, 
granted to L. F. Betts October 2, 1888, and are 
preferably square in cross-section, as shown 
in the drawings. The depending portions g of 
4o at the upper ends of the tubes are arranged 
back to back and are Secured together by a 
rivet or eyelet h, which passes through the 
contiguous backs of these sections. The de 
pending portion g is preferably formed in 
45 one piece with the horizonial top portion of 
the tube, and in that case the two tubes are 
secured together after the longitudinal edges 
of each tube are united, but before the tube 
is bent at the angles or elbows, as represented 
5o in Fig. 5. The rivet or eyelet is applied to 
the contiguous backs of the depending por 
tions g through the notch or opening which 
exists in each tube preparatory to bending it 
at the upper end of the depending portion 
and while the tube is still straight. After the 55 
rivet or eyelet has been applied the tube is 
bent, whereby the opening is closed. When 
the depending portions of the tubes are made 
separate from the other portions of the tubes, 
which may be done when tools for forming 6o 
each tube of a single blank are not available, 
the two depending portions are first secured 
together by the rivet or eyelet and then sol 
dered to the horizontal top portions of the 
tubes. This improved construction avoids 65 
the necessity of soldering the two depending 
portions of the tubes together and provides a 
fastening which is cheaper than soldering 
and more durable, because it is not affected 
by heat. 
h' represents the bell, which is secured to 
the lower ends of the depending portions of 
the tubes in the usual manner. 
In the construction represented in Figs. 1. 
and 3 the rivet or eyelet is made separate 75 
from the tubes. If preferred, however, the 
rivet may be formed in one piece with the 
tube, as represented in Figs. 6 and 7, in which 
the back of one of the tubes is formed with a 
projecting lip , which is passed through a 8o 
slit i? in the back of the adjoining tube and 
clinched on the inner side of the latter. 
I represents the plate upon which the globe 
rests and which is hinged to a standard I' on 
the rear side of the lantern in a well-known 85 
manner, so that it can be swung back or 
tilted with the globe J to expose the burner. 
K is a catch secured to the plate I at the 
front of the lantern and engaging over a pro 
jection or stop k' on the front side of the oil- 9o 
pot for locking the plate in a horizontal posi 
tion upon the burner. 
L L are upright wires which extend from 
the globe-plate upwardly on the front and 
rear sides of the globe and are connected at 95 
the top by a semicircular bow which bears 
against one side of the globe a lad rests upon 
the top bead thereof. 
M is a guard-ring which is secured to the 
upright Wires I opposite the breast or swell Ioo 
3 
of the globe and which is arranged between 
the tubes. This ring is provided with lateral 
projections m, which bear against the rear 
sides of the tubes when the catch is engaged 
with the stop ic' and which brace the globe 
frame against forward movement. These 
projections are preferably formed by indent 
ing the guard-ring. 
The catch K bears upon the top of the oil 
pot and under the stop k'. In drawing the 
catch down to engage it with the stop the lat 
eral projections of the guard-ring are drawn 
tightly against the rear sides of the tubes, so 
that when the catch has been sprung over the 
stop the latter prevents rearward movement 
of the globe-frame and the lateral stops on 
the guard-ring prevent forward movement, 
whereby the globe-frame formed by the plate, 
the upright wires, and the guard-ring is rig 
idly held in its normal position. 
O 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a tubular lamp or lantern, the combi 
nation of two air-tubes having the contiguous 
backs of their depending politions secured to 
25 gether by a rivet or eyelet, substantially as 
set forth. 
461,C64. 
2. The combination, with the oil-pot and 
air-tubes, of a tilting globe-frame hinged to 
the lantern on the rear side thereof, a catch. 
secured to the tilting globe-frame and engag- 3 
ing under a stop on the front side of the lan 
tern, and lateral projections on the globe 
frame on the rear side of the lantern, which 
projections are drawn against the rear sides 
of the tubes in springing the catch over the 
stop, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the oil-pot and 
air-tubes, of a globe-plate hinged to the lan 
tern on the rear side thereof, a catch attached 
to the globe-plate and engaging over a stop 40 
on the front side of the oil-pot, upright wires 
secured to said globe-plate, and a horizontal 
guard-ring secured to said upright wires and 
provided with lateral projections adapted to 
bear against the rear sides of the tubes, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
Witness my hand this 8th day of Novem 
ber, 1890. 
35 
45 
FREDERICK. K. WRIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK SIVES, 
P. L. SALMON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461165.txt	(No Model.) 
R. BOWDEN. 
DINKING BLOCK SUPPORT, 
No. 461,165. 
Patented Oct. 13, 1891, 
Q) 
R. 
22 
ZE 
e 
 
 
 
With Ess E is . 
2-ce/'e-6-21 
, 
I rve to r. 
Zizosse & Zio ceaezza 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUSSELL BOW DEN, OF MARBLEHEAD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
D NK N G - BLOCK SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 461,165, dated October 13, 1891. 
Application filed February 13, 1891, Serial No. 381,299, (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, RUSSELL Bow DEN, of 
Marblehead, county of Essex, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Dinking-Block Supports, of which the follow 
ing description, in connection with the ac 
companying drawings, is a specification, like 
letters and figures on the drawings represent 
ing like parts. 
In boot and shoe factories sides or pieces of 
leather are laid upon dinking-blocks, with 
the end of the grain of the wood uppermost, 
and the leather is cut to shape by dies, which 
are struck by mallets, the cutting-edges of 
the dies entering or cutting into the grain 
of the wood. As the blocks become worn by 
the action of the dies the upper surface is 
sawed or planed off, and at each time that the 
upper surface is so sawed or planed off the 
height of the block is reduced, and hence suit 
able means must be provided for supporting 
the block so that its upper surface will always 
remain at substantially the same height. In 
practice this has been done by blocks or pieces 
of board and the like placed beneath the diak 
ing-block, and such support is very unstable 
and cumbersome. 
This invention has for its object to construct 
a suitable support for the dinking-block, which 
is made adjustable to support the block at 
any height desired. 
My invention consists in the combination 
of suitable side rails and uprights or posts at 
each end thereof, to which the said side rails 
are adjustably connected. 
Figurel shows in side elevation a dinking 
block and its support embodying this inven 
tion; Fig. 2, a section of the parts shown in 
Fig. 1, taken on the dotted line acac; and Fig. 
3, a sectional detail of a portion of the uprights 
shown in Fig. 1, taken on the dotted line yy. 
The wooden dinking-block at, with the end 
of the grain uppermost, rests on cross-bars b 
b, mounted on parallel side rails c c, having 
tongues or tenons c' at the ends, which enter 
grooves c, formed in vertical uprights or posts 
d, there being four such uprights or posts, two 
at each end of the side rails, and connected 
together by dowels 4. The uprights or posts 
dare embraced by suitable clamps e, shown 
as of metal and of loop form, (see Fig. 1) each 
clamp being pivotally connected to the ends 
of the side rails cc, there being four such 
clamps, one embracing each upright or post, 
and loosely connected to one end of a side 
rail. As represented at the right, Fig.1, the 
uprights or posts d have notches 2 at regular 
intervals apart, and the loop-like clamp e, en 
bracing the said uprights or posts, enters Olie 
or another notch. The loop-like clamp e is 
of suitable length to allow the side rail to 
which it is connected to be moved vertically 
when the said clamp e is in a substantially 
horizontal position, and when the said clamp 
e engages one of the notches and the said rail 
is allowed to drop a short distance it will be 
held by the said clamp, as shown in Fig.1. 
The uprights or posts don opposite sides 
of the apparatus may have notches, as 2, or, 
in lieu of said notches, a suitable notched 
wedged block U may be provided, as shown, 
which is engaged by a loop-like clamp e, and 
the weight of the side rails c C draws the loop 
like clamp against the wedge-block U and 
holds it firmly against the uprights or posts, 
so that by this means the said side rails ma 
- 
be supported. 
As the dinking-block C is sawed or planed 
off and it is desired to raise it the side rails 
c care lifted and the loop-like clamps ethere 
by straightened or caused to assume substan 
tially horizontal positions, and when in such 
position the side rails or one end thereof may 
be raised and the clamp e caused to engage a 
notch above it, or caused to engage the wedge 
block u at a higher point on the uprights or 
posts. It will be seen that the ends of the side 
rails may be lifted independently, and there 
by any corner of the block may be raised in 
dependently, if desired. 
On the top side of the side rails c C a series 
of holes are formed, into which pins, as 5, may 
be placed to assist in holding the block a 
against lateral movement, and on the top side 
of the cross-bars b b holes are formed, into 
which pins 6 may be placed to assist in hold 
ing the block a against a movement forward 
or backward, and the cross-bars b have on 
their under sides pins 7, (see dotted lines,) 
which hold the said bars in place. The 
notches and the wedge constitute two forms 
of locking device for the clamps, and either 
may be used at will. 
The supporting-frame constructed as de 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
2 
461,165. 
- 
Scribed. 
being held between the clamps and the ends 
of the side rails, and a sliding locking-Wedge 
for one of said clamps, substantially as de 
3. The herein-described dinking-block sup 
port, consisting of side rails having pins, as 
described, and cross-bars placed on said side 
rails and also having pins, as described, and 
uprights or posts to which said side rails are 
adjustably connected, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
25 
RUSSELL BOW DEN. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. GREGORY, 
BERNICE. J. NOYES. 
Scribed is inexpensive and may be readily 
adjusted, not only to true level, but also to 
proper height to adapt the block to the con 
Venience of the user, whereas when the block 
rests on the usual bench this cannot be easily 
done. 
I claim 
l. The herein-described dinking-block sup 
port, consisting of side rails, and grooved up 
rights or posts to which they are adjustably 
connected at their ends, and means, substan 
tially as described, to adjust each end inde 
pendently, the ends of the side rails moving 
in said grooves, substantially as described. 
2. The herein-described dinking-block sup 
port, consisting of side rails having loop-like 
clampse pivoted thereto, and uprights or sup 
ports, embraced by said clamps, the uprights 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461265.txt	(No Model.) 
F. J. LEIBMANN. 
CAR, AXLE LUBRICATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 461265. 
Patented Oct. 13.1891. 
(ZWZ), NN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
E. : 
e Z2 
s 
s 
1. 
FA F. 
WITNESSES : 
a 
-%2% 
. 
- 
twVENTOR: 
cea. 
BY 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 461265, 
F. J., LEIBMANN. 
CAR, AXLE LUBRICATOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 13, 1891. 
 
 
2 
 
 
 
 
r E 
2 
WITNESSES : 
-%2244 
-642& 26%-24. 
2. 
4. 
 
2 
/NVENTOR 
2a. 
ATTORNEYS 
The Norris PETERs co, PHoro-LTHO, WA6MNSN, c. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK. J. LEIBMANN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CAR-AXE LUBRICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 461,265, dated October 13, 1891. 
Application filed December 1, 1890, Renewed July 24, 1891, Serial No. 400,583, (No model.) 
5 5 
To all whon, it may conce/7. 
Be it known that I, FRANK. J. LEIBMANN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Car-Axle Lubricators, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the car-axle lubricator for which 
Letters Patent No. 315,042 were granted to 
me under date of April 7, 1885, the improve 
ments being designed with a view to simplify 
the application of the lubricator and permit 
the same to be easily inserted into and re 
moved from the car-axle box and to make 
the construction stronger and more durable; 
and the invention consists of a lubricating 
attachment to car-axle boxes the parts of 
which can be so arranged that the height of 
the lubricator is reduced when the attachment 
is to be introduced through the open end of 
the axle-box and placed in position below the 
journal of the axle, in which position the lu 
bricator assumes its normal position, so as to 
apply the lubricating-oil to the journal. The 
lubricator is composed of a rectangular main 
frame, which is supported on pivoted and 
spring-cushioned legs having eccentrics at 
their upper ends that are acted upon by flat 
springs inserted into the frame. A contact 
roller is supported below the axle in bearings 
guided in longitudinally-slotted boxes and 
rotated by contact with the journal. A sec 
ond roller is arranged in guide-boxes below 
the upper roller and provided with a wiper 
that takes up the oil and transmits it to the 
intermediate contact-roller and from the same 
to the journal. The guide-boxes containing 
the bearings of these rollers are pivoted to 
the main frame and adapted to be swung ap 
proximately up into the plane of the same, in 
which position they are held by means of 
springs that pass on the flat side portions of 
the guide-boxes, while when the lubricator is 
in use the guide-boxes and rollers are sup 
ported at right angles to the main frame by 
the springs pressing on the upper ends of the 
guide-boxes. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a vertical longitudinal section of a 
car-axle box, showing my improved lubricat 
ing attachment in position in side elevation 
as applied to the car-axle. Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation of the lubricating attachment, partly 
in section, and drawn on a larger scale. Fig. 
3 is a plan of the same, also partly in section. 
Fig. 4 is a front elevation of the lubricating 
attachment; and Figs. 5 and 6 are a side and 
top view of the same, arranged in flattened 
position ready to be introduced into or re 
moved from the car-axle box. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
A in the drawings represents a car-axle, B 
a car-axle box, and C the lid of the same. 
Below the journal of the car-axle A is lo 
cated a spring-cushioned lubricator D, which 
consists of a metallic rectangular main frame 
a, which is supported on legs b b that are 
pivoted to recesses of the main frame C, and 
connected in pairs by means of transverse 
rods b' near their lower ends. The pivots of 
the supporting-legs b are provided at their in 
ner ends with eccentrics b, which are acted 
upon by flat transverse steel springs b, the 
ends of which are inserted into recesses of the 
main frame a, as shown clearly in Fig. 2. 
The flat springs bserve to exert a spring-ac 
tion on the supporting-legs b b and to press 
thereby the main frame C, which is provided 
at the front and rear sides with segmental re 
cesses for the axle-journal in upward direc 
tion toward the journal, while the lower ends 
of the legs rest on the bottom of the car-axle 
box. To the central recesses a? of the front 
and rear sides of the main frame a are pivoted 
longitudinally-slotted guide-boxes E, which 
are closed at their upper and lower ends and 
provided with longitudinal grooves, in which 
the bearings e. e. and the spindles ff of an 
upper contact-roller F and a lower friction 
roller F, which is in contact with the up 
per roller F, are supported. The bearings e' 
of the lower roller F are supported on spiral 
springs f', which are located in the lower 
parts of the grooves of the guide-boxes and 
which serve to press the lower roller against the 
upper contact-roller F and to hold the latter in 
contact with the axle-journal. To the lower 
roller F is applied a wiper g of leather or 
other suitable material, which is applied to the 
middle contracted portion of the lower roller 
F', said wiper dipping into the oil and bring 
ing the same in contact with the roller F and 
75 
8 
90 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
y 
481,265 
parts, so that the lubricator becomes more 
durable and effective iri use. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 55 
Patent 
1. A lubricator for car-axles, consisting of 
a spring-Supported main frame, guide-boxes 
pivoted to said main frame, a contact-roller 
Supported in bearings of Said guide-boxes, a 
secondi roller below the contact-roller sup 
ported in spring-cushioned bearings of the 
guide-boxes, a wiper attached to the lower 
rollers, and means for retaining the guide 
boxes and rollers in a position at right angles ( 
to the main frame or in a plane with the same, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of a main frame, Sup 
porting-legs pivoted to the same and provided 
with eccentrics at their upper ends, trans 
verse cushioning-springs bearing guide-boxes 
pivoted to the main frame on said eccentrics, 
a contact-roller supported in bearings guided 
in said boxes, a transmitting-roller Supported 
below the contact-roller in spring-cushioned 
bearings in said guide-boxes, a wiper applied 
to the middle contracted part of the lower 
roller for transmitting the lubricating-oil to 
the contact - roller and axle, and locking 
springs for the guide-boxes, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. The combination of a main frame sup 
ported on spring-cushioned legs pivoted to 
the main frame, longitudinally grooved and . 
slotted guide-boxes pivoted centrally to the 
main frame, a contact-roller supported in 
bearings guided in said boxes, a lower wiper 
carrying roller supported on spring-cushioned 
bearings of the guide-boxes below the con 
tact-roller and held infrictional contact there 
with, retaining-springs attached to the main 
frame and adapted to hold the guide-boxes, 
and oil-transmitting rollers at right angles 
to the main frame or approximately in One 
plane there with, Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
95 
7 o 
75 
9o 
FRANK J. LEIBMANN. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
MARTIN PETRY. 
by the latter with the journal at every rota 
tion of the car-axle. The cushioning-springs 
of the lower roller F impart the required 
elasticity to the bearings of the upper con 
tact-roller F, so that the same is held in con 
tact with the axle-journal, 
Flat springs h are attached to the main 
frame a below the segmentally-recessed ends 
of the same, which springs bear on the up 
per ends of the slotted guide-box E and hold 
the same and the rollers FF' below the axle 
in a position at right angles to the main 
frame C, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. When it 
is desired, however, to remove the lubricator 
from the car-axle box, the rollers F E are 
SWung with their pivoted guide-boxes ap 
proximately into the plane of the main frame 
C at the interior of the same, as shown in 
Figs. 5 and 6, in which position the transverse 
Springs h bear on the straight upper ends of 
the guide-boxes E and retain the same in po 
sition by preventing them from dropping 
again into vertical position at the center of 
the main frame a. When the contact-rollers 
F F are in this position, the yoke-shaped 
legs can be readily moved against the tension 
of their springs b into line with the sides of 
the main frame a, as shown in Fig. 5, so that the 
height of the lubricator is greatly reduced, in 
which position it can be readily removed 
from below the axle-journal and taken out of 
the axle-box, in case it should be necessary to 
put in a new wiper or exchange other parts, 
and replaced in position below the car-axle. 
When the lubricator is inserted below the 
axle-journal, the contact-rollers are turned in 
downward direction by pressure of the fin 
gers until the resistance of the springs h is 
overcome. When they arrive in a vertical 
position below the car-axle, the springs h, bear 
on the upper ends of the guide-boxes E and 
hold them in vertical position, so that the con 
tact-roller F and wiper-roller F can perform 
the work allotted to them. 
As compared with my former lubricator, it 
will be seen that the main difference consists 
in the arrangement by which the entire de 
vice can be elongated or flattened out, whereby 
the insertion and removal of the lubricator 
into or from the car-axlebox is facilitated and 
in a stronger and simpler construction of the 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461365.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M C KEON, OF OAKLAND, CA LIF OR NIA. 
PROCESS OF PRESERVN G T M BER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 461,865, dated October 13, 1891. 
Application filed January 24, 1891, Serial No. 378,936, (No specimens.) 
55. 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMESMcKEON, of Oak 
land, in the county of Alameda and State of 
California, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Preserving Timber, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to the preservation 
of piles and wood intended to be submerged 
in sea-water from destruction by the Teredo 
na'alis, Limnoria terebrains, and other para 
sites of the sea; of sewer-timber extending to 
Sea-Water or otherwise; of foundation-timbers 
and underpinnings of dwellings and timbers 
in mines and tunnels from mildew or dry-rot; 
of bridge-timbers, telegraph-poles, posts, &c., 
under and above ground, from the ravages of 
air, earth, and water, and of timber generally 
from the above causes, the ravages of white 
ants or other insects, or any other destructive 
agency. 
Supposing my invention to be applied to 
the preservation of a pile, I first remove the 
bark from that portion of the pile to be treated, 
give the said portion any desired shape, as 
round, Square, pentagonal, hexagonal, &c., 
and impart thereto a smooth surface, and then 
proceed as follows: 
First. By means of a machine or tool (not 
forming a part of my present invention) 
Worked by hand or other power, containing a 
collection of square steel spikes set one-half 
inch or more apart, I prick or puncture the 
timber on all sides to the depth of, say, three 
eighths of one inch or any other desired depth, 
the indentations being a distance of about 
half an inch apart and at an angle of from 
sixty to forty-five degrees depression toward 
the point or ground end of the pile, thus form 
ing Square sacks or pockets. I then give the 
Surface so indented a bath of sulphate of iron, 
the proportions being eight pounds of sul 
phate of iron to three gallons of water. In 
designating the proportions of the several in 
gredients or substances employed I give them, 
for convenience and uniformity, in pounds 
and gallons. 
Second. The timber having become suffi 
ciently dry, I apply thereto a light coat of oil 
of rosin, five gallons, mixed with vitrified lead, 
fifteen pounds, pulverized glass, fifteen 
pounds, and marble-dust, twelve pounds. 
Third. This coating having dried, I take a 
thick solution of five (5) gallons of india or 
para rubber in solution, twenty (20) gallons 
coal-tar, and three (3) gallons boiled linseed 
oil, put them into a kettle, and bring all to a 
scalding heat. I now slack or draw the fire 
for, say, ten (10) minutes, then add seven (7) 
pounds of sugar of lead, twelve (12) pounds 
of litharge, and ten (10) pounds of black OX 
ide, and again bring up to a scalding heat. 
The mixture must be constantly stirred for, 
say, twenty (20) minutes from the time when 
the first ingredients are put in the kettle, and 
then ten (10) pounds of a drier (as japan) 
must be added. The mixture, while kept at 
a scalding heat, is now to be applied to tim 
ber with vigor. 
Fourth. Inext immediately spread over the 
timber thus treated pulverized clinkers and 
birned iron-dust, mixed with iron-filings and 
quartz or (as an equivalent therefor) marble 
dust, in or about the proportions of eight 
pounds of each. I then take a heavy roller 
and press these ingredients into the sacks or 
pockets, filling each cavity. The ingredients 
may, however, be pressed in with a troWel. 
Fifth. When this coat is sufficiently hard, 
I make a compound of asphaltum, seventy 
five pounds, dissolved in boiling tar, twenty 
five gallons, and mixed with quartz-dust, 
twenty-five pounds, and sand, twenty-five 
pounds, and to each five (5) gallons of this I 
add five (5) pounds of the exterior fibrous 
covering of the cocoanut reduced to a coarse 
pulp and fine threads. 
The advantages of the process conducted 
under the various steps described may be 
briefly stated as follows: By shaping the pile 
and giving thereto a flat smooth surface the 
timber may be pricked evenly and at such 
distances apart as to allow the compounds to 
enter and permeate all its pores and fibers. 
By the formation of square sacks or pockets 
at an acute angle toward the point or ground 
end of the pile the compounds filling the cavi 
ties are so permanently protected against the 
friction of tides and the action of sea-Water 
that they cannot be washed out. The sub 
stances of the second, third, and fourth treat 
ments will enter each pore and interstice of 
the timber to the depth of one inch or more, 
TCC 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
461,365 
and the other coatings, being insoluble, im 
pervious to water, and indestructible by sa 
line action, will hold the inner coatings firmly 
against removal for any length of time. The 
addition of the outer covering of the cocoa 
nut, which is of a tough, fibrous, and anti 
septic nature, teredo-proof, and indestructible 
by the action of sea-water, air, or earth, causes 
the asphaltum and other substances to be 
held more firmly together and prevents any 
possibility of their cracking or opening. 
My invention is specially adapted for ap 
plication to sewer-timbers extending to sea 
Water, for, as it gives the timber a glassy 
smooth surface, it is made non-absorbent, and 
no foul matter can adhere thereto for the gen 
eration of noxious gases. For foundations or 
underpinnings of dwellings, timbers in mines, 
tunnels, &c., my invention is of great value, 
for, the ingredients employed being strong 
antiseptics and disinfectants, the timber 
treated is rendered proof against mildew or 
dry rot, thus conducing to health. 
The ingredients entering into my process 
are cheap, and the process is easily worked 
and simple of application. 
I am aware that heretofore some of the in 
O 
25 
gredients herein inentioned have been used 
for preserving piles and for other purposes, 
but not in the proportions or combinations 
used by me. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The within-described method of preserv 
ing timber, consisting in puncturing the tim 
ber, subjecting it to a bath of sulphate of iron 
and water, and successively applying a coat, 
of resinous and vitreous material, a paint, a 
pulverulent composition, and a bituminous 
coating, substantially as set forth. 
2. The within-described method of preserv 
ing timber, consisting in puncturing the tim 
ber, subjecting it to a bath of sulphate of iron 
and water, and successively applying a coat 
of resinous and vitreous material, a paint, a 
pulverulent composition, and a coating Con 
sisting of a bituminous substance, powdered . 
mineral, and the exterior fibrous covering of 
the cocoanut, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I hereto set my hand 
35 
45 
and Seal. 
- 
Witnesses: 
JAMES McKEON. L. S. 
- 
- 
J. J. MCCARTHY, 
WM. T. HAMILTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461465.txt	(No Model.) 
R. ASHWORTH, 
DERRICK SHED, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 461465, 
Patented Oct. 20, 1891. 
 
Avoyevozov 
carris pereas co., Photo-Litho. WASHFNGTON, d. c. 
R. ASHWORTH, 
DERRICK SEED, 
2 sheeta-sheet 2. 
' 
- 
Patented Oct. 20, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 461,465. 
 
7)izvesses - 
-6.3-6zezee, 
- 
- 
77trenzor 
- 
o6erz. As/yro777, 
zorveys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERTASHWORTH, OF ST. CLOUD, MINNESOTA. 
DERRICKSHED. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 461,465, dated October 20, 1891. 
Application filed September 29, 1890, Serial No, 366,606, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ROBERTASHWORTH, of 
St. Cloud, Stearns county, Minnesota, have 
invented certain Improvements in Derrick 
Sheds, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
sheds or roofs connected to and supported on 
derrick - masts and extending beyond the 
Swing of the boom, so as to cover and protect 
from the Weather the workmen and materials 
underneath and within reach of the derrick 
Without interfering in any manner with the 
operation of the derrick. 
To this end my invention consists in sup 
porting upon a collar surrounding the mast 
and connected to the guy-plate at the top of 
the mast a conical roof extending underneath 
the guy-ropes and over the boom and tackle, 
so that the entire working apparatus is shel 
tered and work can be carried on under it in 
stormy as well as in fair weather. 
My invention further consists in the con 
struction and combination hereinafter de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure l is an ele 
vation and partial section of my improved 
derrick, showing the arrangement of the roof 
upon the mast. Fig. 2 is a detail of the top 
of the mast, the guy-plate, roof-collar and 
connections, and Fig. 3 is a detail plan view 
of the roof-collar. 
In the drawings, 2 represents the derrick 
mast; 3, the pivotal support for the foot; 4, 
the boom connected in the ordinary manner 
to the mast, both being provided with the 
ordinary tackle and windlass. At the top of 
the mast is secured the plate 5, to which are 
connected the ropes 6, which have anchorage 
or support at the other end tC stay the mast. 
A plate or collar 8 is supported by the plate 
5 by means of heavy bolts 7 passing through 
the same, and anti-friction rolls 13 upon the 
bolts bear upon the band-plate 9, encircling 
the mast. Upon the plate 8 are secured the 
upper ends of the rafters 10 by means of 
bolts 11, passing through the ends of the 
rafters and the plate 8. Upon the rafters is 
secured any suitable rigid roofing material, 
such as boards 12, forming a conical roof ex 
TO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
2. In a derrick, the 
tending beyond and covering the derrick 
boom and its connections and attachments. 
The plates, bolts, and other connections of 
the guys, roof, and mast are made, preferably, 
of steel to secure the greatest strength and 
durability. 
I claim 
1. The combination, with a derrick-mast, 
its guys, and guy-plate, of a roof of substan 
tially conical shape Supported at its apex from 
the guy-plate and extending over the boom 
and tackle, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
combination, with its 
mast, of a roof surrounding the mast and sup 
ported by the guy-plate and extending be 
neath the guys and over the boom, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. In a derrick, the combination of its mast, 
the guy-rope plate pivotally secured upon said 
mast, an annular plate surrounding said mast 
beneath said guy-plate, means for supporting 
said annular plate from the guy-plate, and 
conical roof supported at its apex upon said 
annular plate, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
4. In a derrick, the combination, with its 
mast, guys, and guy-plate, of an annular plate 
arranged beneath the guy-plate, bolts sup 
porting said annular plate from said guy 
plate, radial depending rafters supported at 
their upper ends upon said annular plate, and 
a rigid covering upon said rafters, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
5. The combination, with a derrick-mast, of . 
a substantially conical roof journaled and 
supported at its apex on the mast between the 
guys and boom, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
6. The combination, with a derrick-mast, of 
an annular plate inclosing, supported, and 
free to turn thereon between the guys and 
boom, and a conical roof secured at its apex 
to and supported by said plate, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 12th day of September, 1890. 
ROBERT ASHWORTH. 
75 
90 
95 
In presence of 
C. G. ORLAND, 
GEO. H. REYNOLDS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461565.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. & F. M. BOOKWALTER, 
WATER, WHEEL. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 461,565. 
Patented Oct. 20, 1891. 
 
ZZZZ/ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
J. W. & F. M. BOOKWALTER, 
WATER WHEEL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 461,565, 
Patented 00t, 20, 1891, 
 
WITNESSES : 
JAWSRa3, . 
INVENTORS 
st it: 
--- 
77/zle TTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN W. BOOKWALTER AND FRANCIS M. BOOKWALTER, OF SPRINGFIELD, 
OHIO, ASSIGNORS TO THE JAMES LEFFEL & COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
WATER - WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 461,565, dated October 20, 1891. 
Application filed December 29, 1890, Serial No. 376,016, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, JOHNW. BOOKWALTER 
and FRANCIS M. BOOKWALTER, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Springfield, in the 
5 county of Clark and State of Ohio, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Water-Wheels, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in Water-wheels, and be 
longs to the hurdy-gurdy variety of wheels. 
Our improvements have reference to the 
provision of a double series of buckets, there 
I5 being one series on each side of the wheel 
rim and the series being somewhat remote in 
a lateral direction from each other and in 
combining there with a duplex stream, one 
branch of which enters the buckets of onese 
2O ries and the other branch of which enters the 
buckets of the other series, the divergence of 
the branches being substantially equal, so that. 
the wheel is not moved laterally by either 
branch, and the full effect of the stream de 
25 veloped in a rotative direction; have reference 
to SO arranging this duplex series of buckets 
and forming their inner edge to receive the 
stream, so that such edge shall be the en 
trance side of the bucket, whereby the stream 
3o will continue to enter the buckets through a 
considerable arc of a circle, the Water-enter 
ing edge of the bucket traveling in a straight 
line, such arrangement resulting in lessening 
the number of buckets to a wheel, because 
35 each bucket remains longer in the path of the 
stream; have reference to so shaping the en 
tering edge of the bucket that the stream shall 
strike it approximately perpendicularly at all 
times, whereby the stream is not deflected 
4o radially in nor out as it enters the buckets; 
have reference to forming a duplex stream by 
dividing one stream into branches, and have 
reference to certain details, hereinafter point 
ed out. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, and on which like ref 
erence-letters indicate corresponding parts, 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a por 
tion of a wheel with a series of buckets and 
5o of a nozzle and stream-dividing device; Fig. 
45 
2, an edge view of a portion of the same parts; 
Fig. 3, an enlarged view of the parts shown 
in Fig. 1, more clearly illustrating the action 
of the same; Fig. 4, an enlarged diagrammatic 
view, also more clearly showing the arrange- 55 
ment and action of the parts; Fig. 5, a sec 
tional view of the wheel-rim, looking into a 
pair of buckets; Fig. 5", a similar view with 
out the buckets; Fig. 6, detail views of a noz 
zle and a stream-dividing device, and Fig. 7 6o 
a modified form of nozzle and stream-dividing 
device. 
The letter A designates a portion of a wheel 
of any approved type, but preferably having 
the sides of its rim faced off. The width or 65 
breast of this rim will vary in wheels of dif 
ferent sizes; but it is designed to be such as 
to so locate the buckets secured to the oppo 
site sides thereof that a plurality of them 
say three-will be reached at the same time 
by each branch of a divided stream when the 
branches are so diverged as not to interfere 
materially with their force and speed. 
The letters B and C designate two series of 
buckets, the one secured to one side of the 
rim and the other secured to the other side 
Each bucket of each Series has a 
of the rim. 
shank D, adapted to be bolted or otherwise 
fastened to the wheel-rim. It is preferred to 
arrange the buckets so that each bucket of 
one series shall be opposite to a bucket of the 
other series, as suggested in Figs. 2 and 4. 
They may, however, be otherwise arranged; 
but this is the preferred relative position of 
the buckets of one series with respect to those 
of the other series. These buckets are pecu 
liar in several respects. Viewing them in 
Figs. 1 and 3, they will be seen to have the 
inner edge E higher than the remaining edges. 
This inner edge is also peculiarly shaped. It 
is so shaped that the projecting stream strikes 
it at approximately a perpendicular, irre 
spective of whether it has just crossed the 
stream, is midway in the length of the path 
of the stream, or has just passed out of the 
reach of the stream; or, otherwise expressed, 
this entering edge of the buckets is so shaped 
that the stream is approximately perpendicu 
lar thereto during all of the time that the 
stream is entering the bucket. This is clearly Ioo 
90 
75 
95 
461,565. 
IC) 
25 
35 
4. 
45 
illustrated in Figs. 1 and 3, in which three 
buckets are shown to be in action, having 
their entering edges approximately perpen 
dicular to the line of the stream. This in 
sures the full effect of the stream and pre 
vents the buckets from tending to deflect the 
stream from its straight course. It will also 
be seen that this entering edge is the inner 
edge of the bucket, and that the bucket-bot 
tom curves downward and outward for the 
greater portion of its length and then up 
ward and slightly outward, as seen in Figs. 2 
and 4, viewing the line F, which is outside of 
the bottom of the bucket. It will further be 
seen that the outer or discharge edge G. of 
the buckets is lower than the entering edge. 
This facilitates the discharge. It will be seen 
that the forward and rear sides of the bucket, 
looking toward the rim from a position ra 
dially beyond the rim, are inclined and curved, 
so as to narrow up the bottom of the bucket 
as compared to the top or edge thereof, such 
sides being shown at II. 
It will also be un 
derstood that as the water enters the inner 
edge of the bucket and discharges at the outer 
side it merely makes one change in its direc 
tion, being guided or turned outward, and by 
this time operating with reactionary effect to 
propel the wheel. 
Referring to the nozzle proper, it is desig 
nated by the letter I, and is in practice con 
nected with a head of water, by which the 
stream receives great velocity and force. 
This nozzle is so located with respect to the 
wheel proper that its stream can be divided 
into equal portions, constituting two branches 
which enter the respective series of buck 
ets at the same angle to the plane of rota 
tion, whereby the wheel is balanced in the 
sense that there is no tendency of it to be 
shifted laterally by either branch of the 
stream, as each branch acts equally in its lat 
eral effects. There are several ways of di 
viding the stream into two branches. We 
have shown two of these ways, one of which 
we prefer to the other. The preferred form 
consists of a wedge-shaped bladle J, Supported 
in the path of the stream a suitable distance 
from the nozzle extension I'. The sharp edge 
of the blade is toward the nozzle extension, 
and its cross-section is such that it gradually, 
but promptly, divides the stream into two 
equally diverging members. A bracket IX 
may be secured to the nozzle extension and 
the blade pivoted to it by means of a stud L. 
An arm MI is secured to this stud and held by 
a pin O, passing through it and into the hole 
in the bracket. By withdrawing the pin the 
blade can be turned sidewise more or less to 
adjust its edge to equally divide the stream 
to free it of . any accumulations-such as 
weeds-that may possibly adhere to it. It is 
intended, however, that the reduced edge of 
the blade will sever the foreign matter and 
prevent accumulations. Any form of device 
may be used for holding the blade and allow 
 
85 
90 
95 
ing it to be turned sidewise for the purpose 
described. In Figs. 1 and 3 the blade is 
shown as inclined, so that it will allow of 
more readily freeing itself of foreign matter. 
The inclination is slight, however, so as not 
to change the direction of the stream. In 
these figures the blade is made in one piece 
with the bracket and the latter firmly se 
cured to the nozzle extension. 
Referring to Fig. 7, it will be seen that we 
provide two nozzle extensions, (designated J',) 
and that the two are diverged near their dis 
charge ends and connected by a right and left 
hand screw-threaded rod P, which engages 
with the lugs Q on the respective extensions, 
and is provided with a nut R or other means 
of manipulating it, so as to adjust the exten 
sions the proper distance apart. In this man 
ner the stream is divided into two, and the 
branches are diverged to agree with the dis 
tance between the entering edge of one se 
ries of buckets from the entering edge of 
the other Series of buckets 
Referring to the mode of operation, the 
same will be understood from the foregoing, 
taken in connection with the following: As 
before described, the branches of the stream 
enter, respectively, the respective series of 
buckets. Looking at Figs.-3 and 4, where this 
is most clearly shown, it will be noticed from 
the former that three buckets are being filled 
at different points, measured radially along 
their entering edge, and it will be seen from 
the latter figure that one-third of each branch 
enters a bucket. As the entering edge of the 
bucket travels in a straight line and as the 
stream may enter the entering edge all along 
its length, it will be seen that each bucket is 
in action during a comparatively protracted 
period. This will be appreciated if this 
mode of operation is compared to directing 
the Water against the outer or peripherial side 
of the bucket, which side, having no length 
in the direction of rotation, quickly passes 
into and out of the line of the stream which 
is just opposite, to the fact when the water 
enters the inner edge, as herein indicated. 
IBy reason of the prolonged period of action 
by each bucket fewer buckets may be em 
ployed, and so lessen the weight and incur 
ring less expense while equal results are ob 
tainable. The water entering such inner 
edge gradually turns outward and discharges 
at the outer edge after operating with reac 
tionary effect. It is important that the spent 
water in leaving the buckets should so fall as 
to not interfere with or be struck by the on 
coming bucket. It is also necessary to change 
the direction of the water from entering to 
discharging as little as possible. These two 
results flow from the organization and ar 
rangment herein shown and set forth. 
Referring again to the wheel A, we would 
observe that it is preferred to provide it, with 
a space between the parts to which the buck 
ets are bolted. In Figs. 5 and 5' this con 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
461,565 
3 
struction is shown. In the former figure the 
parts to which the buckets are bolted extend 
beyond the rim of the wheel, while in the lat 
ter figure the reverse construction is shown. 
In either case an annular space is left to admit 
of applying the bolts, the heads of which may 
be within the space or outside of it. This 
space avoids the necessity of boring long holes 
from one side of the wheel to the other in 
which to insert the bolts. Short holes only 
need to be bored and short bolts be used, 
there being a set of bolts for each bucket, 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a wheel and two 
series of buckets, one series being at one side 
of the rim and the other series being at the 
other side and separated by an annular space, 
of a water-delivering nozzle located to dis 
charge between the inner sides of the respect 
ive series of buckets, and means to divide the 
stream into a branch for each series of buck 
ets before its impingement on said separate 
inner sides. 
2. The combination, with a water-wheeland 
two series of buckets secured thereto, one 
series at either side of the rim and separated 
from the other by an annular space to form 
independent series, the inner edge of each 
bucket of each series being reduced and 
adapted to direct the water into its bucket, 
of a nozzle located to discharge between the 
inner sides of the respective series of buckets, 
and means separate from the buckets adapted 
to divide the stream into a branch for each 
series before its impingement on said buck 
ets, each branch entering a bucket at the said 
inner edge thereof. 
3. The combination, with a wheel and two 
series of buckets, the buckets of each series 
being secured to opposite sides of the rim of 
the wheel and each bucket having its inner 
edge sharpened and raised above the re 
maining edges thereof, such edge being a re 
ceiving edge and the outer edge the discharg 
ing edge, of a nozzle located to discharge be 
tween the inner sides of the respective series 
of buckets, and a wedge-shaped blade located 
in the path of the stream and adapted to di 
vide it into two equally-diverging branches. 
4. The combination, with a wheel and two 
series of buckets, each series being at the 
opposite sides of the wheel-rim and separated 
from each other to form an independent se 
ries and each bucket of each series having 
its inner edge sharpened, of a nozzle located 
to discharge between the inner sides of the 
respective series of buckets and dividing 
means mounted between the nozzle and the 
buckets and adapted to divide the stream 
8o 
5. The combination, with a wheel, of two 65 
into a branch for each independent series, 
such branches entering the buckets at their 
said sharpened inner edges. 
series of buckets separated by an annular 
space, substantially as shown, one series be 
ing at either side of the rim and each bucket 
having its inner edge sharpened and curved 
upward and outward in the plane of the 7o 
wheel, so as to maintain its position perpen 
dicular to the entering stream, substantially 
as described, a nozzle located to discharge 
between the inner sides of the said series of 
buckets thus separated, and means to divide 75. 
the stream into a branch for each series, such 
branches entering the buckets at said inner 
edge and intersecting the same perpendicu 
larly thereto as each branch travels along said 
edge through the entering period. 
6. In a water-wheel, a bucket, the entering 
edge of which is curved upward toward the 
entering stream in the plane of the wheel 
between the point where the propelling 
stream first strikes said edge and where it 85 
last strikes said edge, whereby it is adapted 
to receive the stream perpendicularly thereto 
during the entering period. 
7. The combination, with a water-wheel, of 
a dividing-blade having a wedge-shaped cross- 9o 
section provided with a sharp reduced edge, 
and pivotally mounted in the path of the is 
suing stream with the edge toward the stream, 
whereby obstructing materials may be cut 
by impingement thereon, or the blade may 95 
be turned on its axis to free it of accumula 
tions. 
8. The combination, with a nozzle, of a 
pivoted dividing-blade having a sharp di 
viding edge and a deflecting wedge portion 
adapted to gradually divide and then deflect 
the issuing stream into two planes or branches, 
a supporting bracket-bearing for the axle of 
said blade, and an operative arm secured to 
said axle. 
9. The combination, with a water - wheel 
having its rim formed with side portions, be 
tween which is a space, of buckets secured to 
each side portion by a set of fastening de 
vices for each bucket, such space admitting 
of the use of short bolts and necessitating 
only the boring of short holes therefor. 
Intestimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
J. W. BOOKWALTER. 
FRANCIS M. BOOKWALTER. 
Witnesses for John W. Bookwalter: 
CO 
Io5 
O 
Witnesses for Francis M. Bookwalter: 
GEO. PLUMB, 
M. DERRICK. 
WARREN HULL, 
H. M. PLAISTED. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
fo 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461665.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS WM. CAPPON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
PRocess of PRODUCING HYDROFLUOSILICIC ACID. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 461,665, dated October 20, 1891. 
Application filed May 5, 1891. Serial No. 391,683. (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS WM, CAPPON, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Processes of 
Producing Hydrofluosilicic Acid, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention pertains to a new and im 
proved process of producing hydrofluosilicic 
acid, whereby a stronger and purer acid is 
produced and one that can be transported in 
glass or earthenware bottles without detri 
ment to the latter. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
hydrofluosilicic acid of such degree of con 
Centration and purity as has not been attain 
able by any of the methods now in use. The 
old process consisted in distilling a mixture 
of equal parts of pulverized fluor-spar and 
silica, with twice their weight of sulphuric 
acid in an iron retort with a leaden tube dip 
ping into water contained in the receiver, 
whereby silicon fluoride is set free and comes 
Over, but in passing into the solution is de 
composed into hydrofluosilicic acid and silica, 
Which separates as a light flocculent precipi 
tate. The reaction which takes place is ex 
pressed by the following equation: 3SiF-- 
2HO = SiO,-2H,SiF. As the distillation 
Went on this gelatinous mass would accumu 
late in the delivery-tube of the still and choke 
it, thus incurring the risk of explosion. This 
is prevented to some extent in the older pro 
cess by letting the end of the tube dip into a 
small vessel of mercury placed at the bottom 
of the receiver. As the distillation proceeds 
this jelly accumulates in the interior until 
the gas can hardly force its way through it 
or escapes from the semi-solid mass unacted 
upon, which generally happens when the so 
lution contains about ten per cent. of acid, 
or probably not as much. The acid is then 
pressed out on a filter by squeezing the silica 
and the latter remains. 
I produce the hydrofluosilicic acid bypass 
ing fluoride of silicon into an aqueous Solu 
tion containing free hydrofluoric acid, (HF) 
the relative quantity of which may be varied 
from ten to twenty percent, or even more, 
according to the strength it is desired the re 
sultant acid should possess. The silica (SiO) 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
which forms by contact with the Water, in 
stead of accumulating and obstructing the ac 
tion and choking the distilling-tube, is dis 
solved as fast as it forms, and by dissolving 
forms a fresh addition of hydrofluosilicic acid. 
The process continues until all the free fluoric 
acid in the solution is converted into fluo 
silicic acid, which will occur when the silica 
which forms or collects on the surface is 
slightly in excess, say, to the extent of about 
the depth of one inch. When the silica be 
gins to thus collect on the surface of the so 
lution, it is apparent that all the free fluorine 
has been converted into fluosilicic acid, and 
the solution, together with the silica, is si 
phoned off and collected into glass bottles or 
other suitable vessels, and the receiver is then 
recharged with water and free fluoric acid, 
and the process continues, as before, until the 
supply of gas (SiF) is exhausted. This re 
suitaitacid, while possessing greaterstrength 
and purity than the acid as heretofore pro 
duced, can be conveyed in glass or earthen: 
ware bottles without danger of attacking and 
destroying such bottles, as has heretofore been 
the case. 
The fluoride of silicon is made in the usual 
way by acting on a mixture of equal parts of 
puiverized fluoride of calcium and pulverized 
silica, with concentrated sulphuric acid. 
The silica as it separates is dissolved by 
hydrofluoric acid (HF) introduced for that 
purpose into the liquid, thus not only remov: 
ing a dangerous obstruction, but in the act of 
dissolving it makes by its union with hydro 
fluoric acid (HF) the very acid sought to be 
produced (2SiF-4HF=2HSiF) and leaves 
the solution quite fluid and in a condition to 
combine with fresh additions of silicon fluor 
ide and form further amounts of hydrofluo 
silicic acid until an extraordinary degree of 
concentration is reached over 60 Baum, in 
stead of 9, as under the old process. Icon 
tinue to pass the gaseous silicon fluoride,into 
the liquid until all the hydrofluoric acid (HF) 
originally added is converted into HSiF6 and 
slight excess of silica remains in the acid, thus 
enabling it to be easily transported in glass 
and earthenware vessels. Otherwise, if free 
fluoric acid were allowed to remain in the 
liquid it would attack the silicious material 
of the vessel and destroy it. 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
difficuly mentioned and produce an acid of a 
degree of strength and purity at present un 
known in commerce, thus converting what 
was formerly an obstruction and danger into 
a positive advantage. 
The amount of the solvent added varies 
according to the degree of concentration re 
quired. In practice I find from ten per cent. 
to twelve per-cent. of hydrofluoric acid (HF) 
in proportion to the weight of water in the re 
ceiver sufficient for producing acid of a den 
sity of about 34 Baum. 
When an acid is required not strictly free 
from uncombined hydrofluoric acid, (HF) the 
process may be stopped a little before this 
point is reached. This is a much more eco 
nomical process than the old one above de 
scribed. In the method of dissolving silica 
(SiO) in hydrofluoric acid, inasmuch as the 
fluoric acid has to be first distilled and then 
further treated with pulverized silica until it 
is nearly Saturated, which is a practice ex 
tremely difficult, as the ordinary forms of sil 
ica are quite insoluble in water and with great 
difficulty in dilute hydrofluoric acid, which is 
the condition which results when the acid is 
nearly saturated with silica. This difficulty 
does not occur in my improved method, as the 
silica which then separates in its gelatinous 
and most soluble form is in such a peculiar 
condition that it will dissolve not only in very 
dilute hydrofluoric acid, but is even soluble 
in water, thus insuring the removal of the 
last traces of hydrofluoric acid (HF) and ren 
dering transportation in glass and earthen 
ware vessels possible. In the improved meth 
I claim as my invention 
1. The herein-described process of produc 
ing hydrofluosilicic acid, which consists in 
passing fluoride of silicon into an aqueous so 
lution of hydrofluoric acid in the presence of a 
free soluble acid. 
2. The herein-described process of produc 
ing hydrofluosilicic acid, which consists in 
passing fluoride of silicon into an acqueous so 
lution containing free hydrofluoric acid, dur 
ing the presence of which the silica is dis 
Solved, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
TIOMAS WMI, CAPPON. 
Witnesses: 
J. NOTA MCGILL, 
WM. S. HoDGEs. 
2 
461,665 
By my invention I am enabled to avoid the od the hydrofluosilicic acid is obtained by 
One distillation. 
The advantages of my invention will be ap 
parent to those skilled in the art. Concen 
trated acids have special powers. Thus with 
out a very concentrated sulphuric and nitric 
acid nitro-glycerine cannot be made. With 
out an alcohol almost entirely free from water 
iodide of ethyl and many ethers cannot be 
produced. The distillation by this method 
is simple, easy, and unattended with danger. 
No mercury trapping is required. 
My improved acid is applicable for all uses 
to which hydrofluosilicic acid is generally 
employed, and is especially used in the treat 
ment or defecation of beet-rootsugar, the same 
acting on the potash contained therein and 
removing it as fluosilicate of potash. 
45 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461765.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 461,765. 
 
N. H. MILLER, 
HAY RAKE, 
Patented Oct. 20, 1891. 
WITNESSES 
(62%a. 4% 
-6es-vie 
AITORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
NATHAN H. MILLER, OF RUSH VILLE, OHIO. 
HAY. RAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 461,765, dated October 20, 189. 
Application filed April 25, 1891, Serial No. 390,425, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NATHAN H. MILLER, of 
Rushville, in the county of Fairfield and State 
of Ohio, have invented a new and Improved 
Hay-Rake, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
My invention is an improvement in that 
class of rakes whose toothed heads revolve 
in forwardly-extended arms to which the draft 
animal is attached. 
The improvement relates to the means for 
rotating the toothed head or rake-shaft, as 
hereinafter described. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the improve 
ment. Fig. 2 is a sectional side elevation of 
Fig. 3 is 
the same on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
a like view of the same in a different posi 
tion. Fig. 4 is a front view of part of the 
improvement, and Fig. 5 is an enlarged trans 
verse section of the rake-shaft. 
The revolving hay-rake is provided with a 
shaft A, carrying the diametrically-extending 
rake-fingers B, as is plainly illustrated in the 
drawings. The shaft A is mounted to turn 
in suitable bearings formed in the side arms 
C of the draft-frame, the said side arms being 
preferably L-shaped and connected at their 
free ends by a cross-bar D. The draft-frame 
is adapted to be connected in the usual manner 
with the traces E, carried by the animal for 
pulling the rake over the field. 
In the middle of the shaft A is pivoted an 
upwardly-extending arm F, preferably forked, 
as illustrated in the drawings, and carrying 
at its front a spring G, adapted to abut at 
its free end against a projection or lug H', 
formed on a ring H, secured to the shaft A. 
On the ring H is arranged a second lug or 
projection H", located diametrically opposite 
the lug H', as is plainly shown in Figs. 2, 3, 
and 5, the said second lug H being adapted 
to be engaged by the free end of a lever I, full 
crumed at I' to a plate F, secured to the rear 
of the arm F. The lever I extends upward 
and is pivotally connected with a second le 
ver J, fulcrumed at J'to the above-mentioned 
plate F. The upper end of the lever J is 
hung on a pivot K', held on the rear end 
of an arm IK, extending through the forked 
arm F to connect pivotally with the cross-bar 
D of the draft-frame. The pivot-pin IX' ex 
tends sufficiently on each side of the arm F 
to engage the rear end of the latter to prevent 
or limit the inward swinging motion of the 
upper end of the lever J. 
In the upper end of the arm F is pivoted 
a lever L, carrying at its extreme upper end 
a handle N, adapted to be taken hold of by 
the operator or pivotally connected with a 
rod O, extending forward to the operator when 
seated on the animal harnessed to the traces 
E. In the lower end of the lever L are ar 
ranged two transverse apertures L and I, 
adapted to be engaged by a bolt P, held in 
the upper end of the arm F. The aperture 
L' is engaged by the bolt P, as shown in Fig. 
2, when the rod O is used; but when it is de 
sired to operate the rake from the rear by 
the operator walking on the ground then the 
bolt P engages the opening L*, as illustrated 
in Fig. 3. The lever I, then extends in an 
inclined position and rearward to permit the 
operator to conveniently take hold of the 
handles N. 
The operation is as follows: When the rake 
is to be actuated by the driver seated on the 
animal pulling the rake over the field, then 
the several parts are in the position illus 
trated in Figs. 1 and 2. When a sufficient 
quantity of hay has accumulated on the rake 
fingers B, projecting in front of the shaft A, 
the operator pulls on the rod O, so that the 
lever L, on account of being rigidly connected 
with the arm F, imparts a forward swinging 
motion to the latter, whereby the free end of . 
the spring Gabuts against the projection H', 
and the rod IK by pressing on the lever J 
causes a swinging of the lever I. So that the 
lower end of the latter is thrown out of the 
path of the projection H. When the spring 
G presses on the lug H', the forwardly-pro 
jecting pointed ends of the raking-fingers B 
engage the ground, so that the rake is revolved, 
the shaft. A turning in the bearings in the 
draft-frames C. Thus a windrow is formed. 
After the operator has pulled on the rod Ohe 
releases the pressure, so that the arm F as 
sumes its former position and the lever I en 
gages the lug H'. When the turning of the 
rake has been completed, the lug H' passes 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
 
461,765 
1. In a rake of the class described, the com 
under the free end of the spring G, so that 
bination, with the rake-shaft having lugs, as 
the Several parts are again in the position 
specified, and the fingers and draft-frame, of 
shown in Fig. 2, with the only difference that 
the lugs Hand H have exchanged positions. 
an arm pivoted vertically on said shaft, a 
spring attached to said arm and adapted to 
It is understood that the levers I and J are 
engage one of said lugs, two levers I and J, 
actuated by their connection with the rod K 
and the arm F, which carries the fulcrums pivoted separately but in alignment on the 
rear side of the said arm, a rod K, pivotally 
for the said levers, so that when the arm F is 
connected with the free upper end of the le 
Swung forward the fulcrums move with the 
ver J, and means for operating the rake, as 
arms, and the rod K by being connected with 
shown and described, whereby the forward 
the draft-frame causes the said levers to swing. 
movement of said arm tilts the levers I and 
When it is desired to actuate the rack from 
J and thus disengages the latter from the 
the rear without the usual rod O, then the le 
ver L is swung rearward into the position 
lug on the rake-shaft. 
2. In a rake of the class described, the com 
shown in Fig. 3 and locked in its position by 
bination, with the rake - shaft, fingers, and 
the bolt P. The operation is the same as 
draft-frame, of an arm pivoted on the said 
above described-that is, when the operator 
rake-shaft, a lever pivoted on the said arm 
desires to turn the rack he pulls on the han 
and adapted to engage a lug on the said rake 
dles N of the lever L, so as to swing the arm 
shaft, a second lever pivoted on the said arm 
F forward. The above-described operation 
and pivotally connected with the first-named 
is then repeated. 
lever, a rod or link pivoted on the draft-frame 
It will be seen that the rake thus constructed 
and connected with the said second lever, a 
is very simple and durable and contains but 
spring held in the said arm and adapted to 
few parts, which are not liable to get out of 
engage a lug on the said rake-shaft, and means 
order and in case of injury can be readily 
replaced. 
for operating the said pivoted arm, substan 
As illustrated in Fig. 5, the ring is prefer 
tially as shown and described. 
ably made in two parts, so as to be readily 
clipped to the shaft A. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
OWEN YOST, 
JOHN H. YARNELL. 
NATEAN II. MILLER. 
Witnesses: 
35 
45 
55 
o 
25 
3d 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461865.txt	B. A. BROOKS, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented 00t, 27, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 461,865. 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 461,865, 
 
B. A. BR00KS, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 27, 1891. 
e 
77.7/e72or. 
(No Model.) 
B. A. BROOKS, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 46,865, 
Patented Oct. 27, 1891. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BYRON A. BROOKS, OF BROOKIYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE PHILA 
DELPIIIA TYPEWRITER COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
TYPE-WRITING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 461,865, dated October 27, 1891. 
Application filed March 5, 1887, Serial No. 229,758, (No model.) 
O 
To (t/l, whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, BYRON A. BROOKS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
5 York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Type-Writing Machines, of 
which the following is a description in such 
full, clear, concise, and exact terms as will en 
able any one skilled in the art or science to 
which my invention relates to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, making part of this specifi 
cation, and to the letters and figures of refer 
ence marked thereon, similar letters and fig 
ures of reference indicating corresponding 
parts in all of said drawings. 
My invention relates to that class of ma 
chines known as wheel type-writers, and 
especially to such machines wherein the power 
employed to revolve said wheel and print the 
type is derived from the power applied by the 
Operator in depressing the finger-keys; and 
my invention consists in certain novel parts 
and combination of parts constituting such 
25 an improved machine, and hereinafter fully 
set forth. 
Figure l illustrates a side view of my im 
proved machine, partly in section; Fig. 2, a 
top view of the sane; and Figs. 3, 4, 5, 6, and 
7 detail parts thereof, Figs. 6 and 7 being, re 
spectively, top and side views of the same 
device. 
Referring to Fig. 1 of the annexed draw 
ings, b is a finger-key attached to a key-lever 
35 C, provided in its lower side with a projection 
c, extending downward, and a tongued. This 
key-lever is pivoted at , and thence extends 
upward, as shown in the drawings. 
Referring to Fig. 4, f and f' are arms piv 
40 oted at g and fashioned at the opposite ends 
into arcs cut with the gear-teeth h and pro 
vided with projections i. The upper ends e 
of the several key-levers are arranged in a 
row behind said bars f and f', and when the 
45 several keys are depressed cause said bars to 
travel forward. ii' are wheels, of which a 
portion of the periphery is cut in gear-teeth, 
corresponding to the teeth on said bars ff', 
so that as the bar for f' is thrown forward 
5o the wheels or f' are caused to revolve and 
the shaft l turned with either a left-hand or 
3o 
 
 
right-hand revolution. Attached to the shaft 
l is a projection k, bent downward at its end 
and standing between the projections when 
the bars f and f' are in the initial position, 
as illustrated at Fig. 4. The pinion-wheels.j 
are attached to shaft l, (see Fig. 1) as is also 
the rod fashioned into the projection k. In 
stead of employing a single pinion.j, I prefer 
to employ two pinions, as clearly illustrated 
in Fig. 1, both attached to the same shaft 
and one set above the other, one of said pin 
ions being in gear with the arm f and the 
other with the arm f', and the gear so cut 
that when one of said arms is thrown for 
ward and in gear with its fellow pinion the 
gear-teeth on the other arm will stand oppo 
site the uncut periphery of its fellow wheel, 
and hence be locked against being thrown 
forward. The shaft l is set at its bottom 7 O 
end in an anti-friction Socket and is car 
ried through the sleeve m to support and 
steady it. Attached to the shaft l near its 
bottom end is a cog-wheel ?, meshing into the 
teeth of a pivoted cog-segment O, carrying the 
rod p. The upper end of the shaft l passes 
through the type-wheel q, carrying the type t 
in a plurality of rows upon its periphery. 
The type-wheel fits snugly on the shaft l, but 
is free to move longitudinally thereon. It is 
caused to move synchronously there with by 
means of the croSS-tree r and pins S, which 
pierce its cap. 
at is a cylindrical shell surrounding the 
type-wheel to protect it from injury. At its 
rear side it is cut away to expose the types 
which are brought to the printing-point to the 
opposing surface of the paper v to receive 
their imprint. Surrounding the shaft land 
abutting above against the cross-tree r and 
below upon the wheel q is a spring it, which 
holds the wheel down upon the anti-friction 
roller stop ac. This stop is carried and its po 
sition determined by the pivoted rod ly, which 
is operated by the forked rod 2. The key-le 
vers a' and beach have laterally-projecting 
pins traveling, when said key-levers are de 
pressed, in the path of the flukes in the fork 
2, and, owing to the peculiar form of said 
flukes (clearly shown in Fig. 1) as one or the 
other of said key-levers is depressed, elevate 
the stop ac to a greater or less extent to bring. 
90 
75 
IOO 
461,865 
5 
O 
either the bottom or the middle rows of types 
On the type-wheel opposite the printing-point. 
At either end of the machine an arm c' is 
pivoted on a rode'. By means of the springs 
f' these arms are pressed forward and held 
in the position illustrated in Fig.1. A rod 
d', planed flat on one side, is attached to and 
extends between said arms on a level with 
the printing-point on the type-wheel. Against 
this rod the paper rests. A bent lever g', 
pivoted on the rod i', extends forward under 
the key-levers and is attached to a rod h', 
which extends the entire width of the ma 
chine immediately under all the tongues d' 
on the several key-levers. The tongues d'are 
fashioned, as shown, so as to be readily bent 
up or down to regulate the throw of the bent 
lever g' when a key-lever is depressed. At 
the opposite end of said bent lever a pivoted 
hood f' is set, said hood being provided with 
a spring k' to throw it back against the stop 
pin carried by said lever g. This hood, in 
combination with the bar 2, forms a trip de 
vice. The trip-bar 2 is attached to the car 
riage and extends the entire length of said 
carriage, while the bar g', carrying the trip 
ping-hood j', remains stationary. 
m is a rack of ordinary construction, into 
the teeth of which a fast and loose dog alter 
nately engage in the ordinary manner. These 
dogs are attached to the vibrating bent le 
verg'. 
p' is a handle for lifting the rack out of con 
nection with the said dogs when it is desired 
to move the platen to the right or the left 
without operating any other part of the ma 
chine. The platen is fed forward by the 
spring-drum and crrd q', which will be read 
ily understood without further description. 
Attached to the rod hunder the key-levers 
is a jointed rod r", which operates the inking 
ribbon. A rod u', attached to said rod r", is 
provided with dogst', (see Fig. 3,) which make 
connection with the ratchet - teeth on the 
wheels', attached to one of the inking-ribbon 
spools. A sliding bar at carries one of said 
dogs it at each end, and as the bar is slid one 
way or the other one or the other of said dogs 
is brought in connection with the ratchet 
teeth on the wheel attached to one of the ink 
ing-ribbon spools. A collar v' is provided to 
hold the bar in a desired position. This col 
lar is removable, and when it is desired to 
shift the rock-shaft at longitudinally this col 
lar is removed. The shaft is then shifted and 
the collar put in place at the opposite end of 
the shaft to hold it in its new position. 
Attached to one of the paper-feeding roll 
ers w' is a ratchet-wheel ac', into which the 
dog y' meshes, said dog being provided with 
a handle 2', by which it is drawn forward to 
feed the paper and space between the lines. 
Attached to this same handle is a hooked arm 
a', which, when the handle is drawn forward, 
raises the rack n out of connection with the 
dogs in o'. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
When a key b is depressed, the gear arm or 
bar forf, behind which it stands, is thrown 
forward, and the stop i is drawn out of the 
path of revolution of the hook-lock k just be 
fore the teeth on the rack h comes in contact 
with its corresponding tooth - segment at 
tached to the shaft l. The said shaft is thus 
caused to revolve, and with it the type-wheel, 
to bring the proper letter to the printing 
point. At the same time the projection c on 
the key-lever has been pressed down into the 
path of the oscillating arm p, which is at 
tached to the shaft l by cog-gearing, and the 
parts are so proportioned that the arm p will 
come in contact with the stop c when the re 
quired type is opposite the printing-point, 
and thus arresting the revolution of the type 
wheel at the proper time. The same is true 
of each of the key-levers b. When the fin 
ger-key is released, the spring c' draws the 
arm for f' back until the hook lic strikes the 
projection i on the other bar, when it is locked 
in position, as shown in Fig. 4. 
It is to be here observed that after each 
type is printed the type-wheel is brought back 
to an initial position, and that the wheel to 
print any type on its periphery makes no 
more than one-half revolution-that is to say, 
the wheel turns to the right to bring the types 
on that half to the printing-point and to the 
left to bring the types on that half to the 
printing-point. This is true of each of the 
several rows of type carried by the type-wheel. 
The types most used occupy the positions 
nearest to the initial point on either side and 
increase in distance from said point as they 
are less frequently used. The key-levers are 
arranged in the same order, those operating 
the types nearest the initial point being near 
est the central transverse line on the key 
board and increasing in distance from Said 
central line as their respective types are far 
ther away from the initial point on the type 
wheel. Since the bars f and f' are pivoted 
at the outside frames of the machine, it will 
be seen that said bars, when actuated by the 
depression of the several type-keys, are moved 
forward a greater or less extent, depending 
upon the position of the key struck in the 
key-board, the nearer the key being to said 
central line the smaller being the arc through 
which the bars move. Thus the force applied 
to move the bars f and f' is, by the construe 
tion of the machine, regulated so as to ex 
actly bring the desired type to the printing 
point. To more accurately insure the accom 
plishment of this and to prevent the mo 
mentum of the type-wheel carrying the type 
beyond the printing-point, the device in O p is 
added to the combination already described. 
In view of the corresponding arrangement of 
the type upon the type-wheel and the keys 
upon the key-board, already described, it will 
be seen that the rod p strikes against the stop 
c, projected in its path just as the correspond 
ing type reaches the printing-point. If prop 
erly adjusted and constructed, the rod p will 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
ICO 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
461,865 
- 
i. 
with its dogs n' o' and permits the paper-car 
strike said stop with scarcely perceptible 
riage to be drawn back to begin a new line. 
force, because the type-wheel should be made 
Figs. 6 and 7 illustrate a modification of 
of some very light although strong material, 
the device shown in Fig. 4, dispensing with 
and hence have little momentum. I prefer 
In these figures 
the hook is and stops i. 
to construct it of a shell of gutta-percha. 
the cog-wheels i are not shown. In front of 
On the type-wheel one row contains all the 
each of the arms fand f' an arm k' (both 
small letters, another row the corresponding 
attached to a common rock-shaft l') is placed. 
capitals in similar positions, and hence oper 
The rock-shaft l' carries a pointern', resting 
ated by the same keys, respectively, and the 
upon an eccentric-disk n', against which the 
third row figures, punctuation - marks, and 
spring o' causes it constantly to bear. When 
other Symbols. To print the types in the mid 
dle row (that containing the capitals) the key 
the arm for f' is thrown forward by the action 
of the key-levers, the rod k' is pressed for 
a' is to be depressed before striking the let 
ward, causing the pointer m' to lift out of 
ter-key. To print figures, the key b' is to be 
the notch on the periphery of the disk n' at 
first depressed. These keys both operate the 
its smallest radius, where it has been resting, 
stop a by the intervening mechanism 2 gy to 
and permitting said disk attached to the shaft 
raise the type-wheel to the second or third 
l to revolve as the printing-type is brought to 
position, where it is then operated by the key 
the printing-point. 
As the arm for f' re. 
b, as before described. 
turns to its normal position the pointer m' 
I have described by what means the print 
is released, falling against the periphery of 
ing-type is brought to the printing point op 
the disk in', which it follows until it drops 
posite to and facing the rod d'. I will now 
into the notch before described, thus insur 
explain the manner in which the type is im 
ing the return of the type-wheel after each 
pressed upon the paper. 
printing action to the normal position and 
When one of the key-levers b is depressed, 
locking it there. It is also to be observed 
as above described, the tongue d' throws the 
that the pressure of the pointer m'against 
rod hdown and presses the front end of the 
the periphery of the eccentric-disk n' exerts 
hood f against the lower end of the curved 
a force independent of the spring c' to re 
bars c', carrying the platen-rod d' and throw 
volve the type-wheel all the way back to its 
ing said rod back from the position illustrated 
normal position, and that this influence con 
in Fig. 1. This motion continues until the 
tinues, therefore, after the gear-segments h 
point of the hood' slips under the lower end 
have passed out of connection with the gear 
of the rod c' or trips, when the spring f' 
throws the platen-rod forward, impressing the 
wheels i. 
It will of course be understood that my in 
paper against the type with a sharp blow. 
vention is not limited to the precise devices 
The spring g' then returns the rod g to its 
and combinations of devices herein described, 
original position, the hood nodding under the 
illustrated, and claimed, as equivalent devices 
lower end of the rod-c' as it returns and as 
and combinations may be employed without 
suming its original position under the influ 
departing from the spirit of my invention or 
ence of the spring k'. To insure the sudden 
the scope of the concluding claims. 
and uniform tripping of said hood, I prefer to. 
enploy a stop l', striking against the lower 
I do not claim the combination, in a type 
writing machine, of the fixed wheel, the 
rend of the hood as it travels forward, and thus 
ratchet, the transverse bar, the levers, and 
causing it to trip even if it has not pushed 
the type-wheel geared to the shaft. 
the lower end of the rod c' out of its path. 
The operation of moving the paper-carriage 
I do not claim the combination, in a type 
writer, of the fixed wheel, the ratchet, the 
forward to space between letters may be thus 
transverse bar, the levers, and the type-wheel 
described: A spring-drum q' is attached to 
geared to the shaft, substantially as shown 
the paper-carriage by means of a cord con 
and described in the patent of John H. For 
stantly tending to draw the carriage forward. 
rest, No. 438,617; nor do I claim the combi 
The oscillating motion of the rod h", caused 
nation of two rows of actuating-keys, tWO 
by depressing a key b, vibrates the fast and 
sets of transmitting-lever mechanisms, each 
loose dogs in o' through the teeth of the rack 
operated by the keys of one row, a type-wheel 
m", attached to said paper-carriage in a man 
shaft, a type-wheel supported on said shaft, 
ner now well known in the art, and feeds the 
toothed segments oscillated by said lever 
carriage forward. The feeding of the inking 
mechanisms, mutilated pinions on the type 
ribbon is accomplished through the agency of 
wheel shaft, and radial stop-arms Secured to 
the rod r '', dogs t', and ratchet-wheels, said 
said shaft, said arms engaging stops on the 
rod ' ' being attached to the rod h, as al 
segments, so as to lock the type-wheel shaft 
ready described. To space between lines, the 
in a normal position, substantially as de 
operator draws toward him the handle 2', Fig. 
scribed in the patent of Aloys Wirsching, No. 
5, which, by means of the doggy', revolves the 
422,276; nor do I claim the combination, in a 
ratchet-wheel ac', connected to one or both of 
type-writing machine, of the pivoted impres 
the paper-feeding rolls at', which carry the 
sion-rod frame provided with a notched bar, 
paper forward the required space. At the 
with a pivoted pawl adapted to engage with 
Same time the hook ct', attached to said han 
dle 2', raises the rack n' out of connection said notched bar, means, substantially as de 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Go 
75 
85 
90 
OO 
O. 
II5 
I 25 
4 
- 
461,865 
d 
5 
scribed, for actuating Said pawl, and adjust 
able stops adapted to cause the disengage 
ment of said pawl from said notched bar, sub 
stantially as described and claimed in an 
application of George B. Webb, as I am not 
the inventor thereof. 
Having described my invention, I claim, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, the follow 
ling: 
1. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of gear-arms, a type-wheel shaft, a pinion 
carried by said shaft, said arms being brought 
independently in gear with said pinion to ro 
late Said type-wheel in either direction from 
a fixed point and subsequently to return said 
type-wheel to its initial point, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a type-writing machine, a pinion on 
the shaft of a type-wheel and a plurality of 
gear-arms which are out of gear with said 
pinion. When at rest, combined with a device, 
substantially as described, for holding the 
type-wheelin its initial position, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a type-writing machine, a type-wheel, 
gear-arms, and a series of key-levers, each le 
ver provided with two projections, one for 
actuating said type-wheel and the other for 
arresting its motion, combined with interven 
ing mechanism, substantially as described, 
for stopping said type-wheel by said arresting 
projections. 
4. In a type-writing machine, key-levers 
provided with two projections, one for actu 
ating the type-wheel and the other for arrest 
ing it, combined with a plurality of gear 
arms brought independently in gear with the 
shaft carrying said type-wheel, and a vibrat 
ing arm also in gear with said shaft, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a type-writing-machine, the combina 
tion of key-levers, a type-wheel shaft, a vi 
brating arm attached by intermediate gear 
ing to said shaft, and a plurality of gear-arms 
normally out of gear with a pinion on said 
shaft, each of said key-levers being provided 
with two projections, one for operating said 
gear-arms and one for arresting the motion 
of said vibrating arm, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. In a type-writing machine, a series of 
key-levers, each provided with two projec 
tions, one for actuating the type-wheel and 
one for arresting its motion, combined with 
gear-arms and with a vibrating arm attached 
by intermediate gearing to a pinion on the 
shaft of said type-wheel, substantially as de 
scribed. 
35 
45 
55 
7. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a traveling paper-carriage, a trip-bar 
attached thereto, and means, substantially as 
described, for operating said trip-bar. 
8. In a type-writing machine, a traveling 
paper-carriage, feed-rolls thereon, a platen 
bar pivotally attached to the carriage, means 
for retracting said bar, and a trip-bar for re 
leasing it, whereby the paper is struck sharply 
against the printing-type, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
9. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a traveling paper-carriage, a bar for 
striking the paper against the face of the 
printing-type, a trip-bar attached to the car 
riage, and means, substantially as described, 
for operating the same. 
10. In a type-writing machine, a paper-car 
riage, a trip-bar, and a bar for pressing the 
paper against the face of the printing-type, 
both attached to the paper-carriage, com 
bined with a universal bar extending beneath 
all the key-levers and connecting mechanism, 
substantially as described. 
11. In a type-writing machine, key-levers, 
a type-wheel shaft, a mutilated pinion on said 
shaft, and a plurality of independent gear 
arms adapted to engage said pinion singly, 
each of said key-levers being provided with 
a projection for operating one of said gear 
arms to rotate said type-wheel shaft, the mu 
tilated portion of said pinion at such time 
being opposite to and out of engagement with 
the other gear-arm, substantially as described. 
12. In a type-writing machine, the combi- . 
nation of paper-feed rolls, a traveling trip-bar 
attached to the paper-carriage, and a station 
ary tripping device operating said trip-bar, 
substantially as described. . 
13. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a trip-hood and a spacing-dog, both 
connected to and operated by a vibrating bar 
extending beneath all the key-levers, sub 
stantially as described. 
14. In a type-writing machine, key-levers, 
a type-wheel shaft, a vibrating arm attached 
by intermediate gearing to Said shaft, and a 
plurality of gear-arms normally out of gear 
with a pinion on said shaft, each of Said key 
levers being provided with two projections, 
one for operating said gear-arms and one for 
arresting the motion of said vibrating arm, 
combined with locking mechanism, substan 
tially as described. 
BYRON A. BROOKS. 
Witnesses: 
J. EDGAR BULL, 
ROBERT BARTLETT. 
65 
75 
90 
CO 
IOS 
O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US461965.txt	(No Model.) 
C. N. SOUTHER. 
GALWANIC BATTERY, 
No. 461,965, 
Patented Oct. 27, 1891. 
 
 
A2ZZze-s-ses. 
42-62-7- yez-z-- 
Z7azvezza27. 
-Zy ?yce 45.2. %-, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CALVIN N. SOUTHER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
GALVANIC BATTERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 461,965, dated October 27, 1891. 
Application filed March 23, 1891, 
Serial No. 386,053, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CALVINN. SOUTHER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Galvanic Batteries; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
This improvement relates to galvanic bat 
teries which are designed principally to be 
used on closed-circuit work. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
cell of strong and uniform current and which 
may be cheaply constructed and maintained. 
The cell is to be classed among the so-called 
two-liquid batteries, though in fact it can 
hardly be said that I use more than one liq 
uid, one of my liquids scarcely entering into 
the chemical action and being limited in 
quantity. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section of a battery embodying my 
improvement. Fig. 2 is a plan of the same. 
J is an ordinary jar of glass or other suit 
able material for containing the operative 
portions of the battery. 
P is the well-known porous cup heretofore 
used in two-liquid batteries. This is located 
within the jar J and may be of any suitable 
shape. 
C is an electrode located within the porous 
cup. This may be of copper or lead or any 
other metal which has a sulphate suitable for 
use as an exciting agent, or, in lieu of a me 
tallic electrode, a carbon electrode may be 
used. Surrounding the electrode C and fill 
ing the space between the latter and the 
porous cup is a sulphate of any metal which 
is suitable as an exciting agent-as, for ex 
ample, copper sulphate, lead Sulphate, or 
mercury sulphate. If a metallic electrode C 
is used, the sulphate of that metal should be 
used. If a carbon electrode is used, the 
metal of the sulphate is deposited upon the 
carbon, so that the latter is finally a carbon 
metal electrode. The sulphate may be in the 
. . " 
3o 
35 
45 
form of a solution, preferably saturated, and 
in addition to the solution there may be pow 
der or crystal in the solution or arranged to 
descend into the solution to dissolve and main- 55 
tain the strength of the solution. 
Z is a zinc electrode, preferably in the form 
of a hollow cylinder or a part of a hollow cyl 
inder, and surrounding the porous cup and 
bearing against the outer surface of the latter 
and there secured by one or more bands B. 
The portions of the outer surface of the por 
ous cup which are not covered by the zinc are 
preferably sealed with a coating of paraffine 
P or other similar matter. The space be 
tween the glass jar and the zinc electrode is 
filled with water. It may, however, be filled 
With a sulphate solution; but I prefer a solu 
tion which is neutral, in order that there may 
be no or only slight chemical action upon the 
Outer surface of the zinc. By thus placing 
the Zinc directly against the outer face of the 
porous cup the saturated solution is kept en 
tirely or almost entirely within the porous 
Cup, only enough passing through the latter 
to act upon the inner face of the zinc. 
By the tests it has been ascertained that a 
cell constructed as described generates a cur 
rent as Soon as it is set up and continues to 
generate a strong and uniform current for a 
long time. 
75 
o 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a galvanic battery, the combination, 
With a suitable retaining-vessel, of a porous 
Wall, an electrode located at one side of said 
wall, a metallic sulphate surrounding said 
electrode and extending to said porous wall, 
a zinc electrode located at the opposite side 
of and in contact with said porous wall, and 
a suitable liquid, preferably water, resting 
against Said Zinc and the exposed portions of 
the side of said porous wall at which the zinc 
is located, Substantially as described. 
2. In a galvanic battery, the combination, 
with a suitable retaining-vessel, of a porous 
cup. located within said retaining-vessel, an 
electrode located within said porous cup, a 
metallic sulphate surrounding said electrode 
within said porous cup and extending to the 
inner face of the latter, a zinc electrode ap 
plied to the Outer face of said porous cup, 
and a suitable liquid, preferably water, in the 
95 
IOO 
 
461,965 
space between said Zinc and the retaining 
vessel, substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a galvanic battery, the combination, 
with a suitable retaining-vessel, of a porous 
cup located within said retaining-vessel, a car 
bon electrode located within said porous cup, 
a metallic sulphate surrounding said, carbon 
electrode within said porous cup and extend 
ing to the inner face of the latter, a zinc elec 
trode applied to the outerface of said porous 
cup, and a suitable liquid, preferably Water, 
in the space between said zinc and the retain 
ing-vessel, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
4. In a galvanic battery, the combination, 
With a suitable retaining-vessel, of a porous 
cup located within said retaining-vessel, a 
d 
15 
carbon electrode located within said porous 
cup, copper sulphate surrounding said car 
bon electrode within said porous cup and ex 2O 
tending to the inner face of the latter, a Zinc . 
electrode applied to the outer face of said 
porous cup, and a suitable liquid, preferably 
water, in the space between said zinc and the 
retaining-vessel, substantially as shown and 
described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 18th day of 
March, 1891. 
25 
CALVIN N. SOUTHER. 
Witnesses: 
CYRUS KEHR, 
AMBROSE RISDON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462065.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 462,065, 
2. 
  
W. W. SAWYER 
HAND STAMP, 
Patented Oct. 27, 1891. 
 
 
atta 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARD W. SAWYER, OF SPRING FIELD, MLASSACIUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-IIALF TO ROBERT A. STEWART, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
H AND STAM P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,065, dated October 27, 1891. 
Application filed November 24, 1890, Serial No. 372,459, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it Tucu? concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLARD W. SAWYER, 
of Springfield, in the county of Hampden and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a cel 
tain new and useful Improvement in Hand 
Stamps, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My improvement relates particularly to 
hand-stamps which are designed for marking 
consecutive numbers upon various articles. 
I will describe a hand-stamp embodying my 
improvement, and then point out the novel 
features in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front view of a stamp embodying my in 
provement. Fig. 2 is a back view of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a vertical Section taken as 
indicated by the dotted linea ac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 
4 is a view similar to Fig. 3, except that parts 
are represented in different positions. Fig. 
5 is an end view of a cylinder and a side view 
of numbering-wheels and ratchets mounted 
thereon. Fig. 6 is a view of the other end of 
such cylinder, and also shows the numbering 
wheels and a ratchet-wheel mounted upon the 
same. Fig. 7 is a transverse section at the 
plane of the dotted line y i?, Fig. G. Fig. Sis 
a back view of a frame-like lever carrying 
pawls for operating on the ratchet-wheels. 
Fig. 9 is a side view of such lever and pawls. 
Fig. 10 is a view of the periphery of the num 
bering-wheels developed in a straight line. 
Fig. 11 is a side view of a ratchet-wheel de 
veloped in a straightline and having its teeth 
in position to correspond to the numbers of 
the adjacent wheel in Fig. 10. 
Similar letters and numerals of reference 
designate corresponding parts in all the fig 
leS. 
A designates a frame, here shown as con 
sisting, essentially, of two side pieces C. C., 
formed integral with a cross-piece Cland con 
nected at the lower end by ScreWS or other 
suitable devices with a foot-plate C". The 
cross-piece a of the frame has a cylindric 
hole passing through it and is provided above 
this cylindric hole with a cylindric Socket (t. 
Through this socket and the said hole a rod 
B works vertically. To the lower end of the 
rod B is attached a yoke C, consisting, essen 
tially, of a cross-piece and two downwardly 
extending parallel arms c' c'. These arms 
embrace a cylinder D and are rigidly secured 
thereto by means of screws which pass through 
them and engage with tapped holes in the 
cylinder. From the arms c' c of the yoke 
extend pins c, which may consist of screws 
engaging with tapped holes in the arms. 
These pins extend into vertical grooves 
formed in the side pieces C. 
C. of the frame 
A and travel along the same when the rod B 
is moved up and down. 
On the cylinder D is fitted a series of 
numbering-wheels E" E E; E E, provided 
with ratchet-wheels e. e. e. e. e. Before ex 
plaining these in detail I will add a few words 
to the description of the rod B. This rod is 
hollow and is provided with opposite longi 
tudinal slots b, through which passes a pin 
l', that engages with holes in the socket a of 
the frame A. This pin lo' is shown as made 
in the form of a screw having a head at one 
end and having a nut engaged with the oppo 
site end. The upper end of the rod B is pro 
vided with a hand-piece b, which may be se 
cured to the upper end of the rod by screw 
threads. 
Within the rod Ba spring bisarranged. As 
here shown, it is of helical form, and bears at 
one end against the pin b and at the other 
end against the hand-piece U. This spring 
elevates the rod B as far as the pinb' will 
permit it to move and normally retains it in 
this position. The downward movement of 
the rod B is produced by a pressure of the 
hand upon the hand-piece. 
In the upper end of one of the slots b of the 
rod B is formed a cylindrical enlargement l', 
which is large enough to receive the nut of 
the pin l'. 
If pressure is applied to the nut 
of said pin, so as to force it inward when 
the cylindric enlargement b is opposite said 
lnut, the rod B may be locked. Thus the rod 
B may be retained in the position which it 
aSSunes When depressed. When the rod B 
is depressed, the numbering-wheels E" E E8 
E E will be lowered, so as to present a row 
of numbers through an opening which is 
formed centrally in the foot-plate cut of the 
frame A. The numbering-wheels are uniform 
in that they bear the numbers 1 2 3 4 5 G 7 S 
90, and these are similarly spaced. They are 
90 
95 
CO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
462,065 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
also alike in that they have extra long spaces 
between l and 0. This spacing may best be 
understood by reference to Fig. 10. They are 
rotated as far as may be necessary to enable 
the wheels to mark or stamp consecutive num 
bers. They are rotated by means of a num 
ber of pawls f, which co-operate with the 
ratchet-wheel. These pawls are secured to a 
bar F, having downwardly-extending arms 
that are pivotally connected by a pin f' to 
the side walls of a recess formed in one of 
the cross-pieces g of a lever G, lmade in the 
form of a rectangular frame and hung on the 
pins c, extending from the side pieces of the 
yoke C. A spring f is coiled around the pin 
f' and so connected with the bar F and the 
frame that it will force the upper part of the 
bar F in a direction to carry the pawls toward 
the ratchet-wheels. The rear end of the lever 
G is pivotally connected to a lever II, which 
is at one end fulcrumed by pins or screws h. 
to the side pieces of the frame A. The con 
nection between the lever G and the lever H 
may be made by means of pins or screws g 
and is intermediate of the ends of the lever 
H. When the rod B is moved downward, it 
of course carries the level G downward. The 
lever G in its downward movement swings 
the lever II rear Wardly, and as the lever II 
limits the downward movement of the rear end 
of the lever G a swinging movement of the le 
wer G is produced. Owing to this swinging 
movement of the lever G, the bar F and the 
pawls f will be moved transversely to the axes 
of the numbering - wheels. This movement 
causes the pawls to impart motion to the 
ratchet-wheels e' ee e' e, and hence to 
the numbering-wheels E" EE E'. The last 
numbering-wheel E has to be moved so sel 
dom that it can be turned by hand. When 
the rod B is in its elevated position, the 
forward or lower end of the lever II is be 
neath the numbering-wheels, as indicated in 
Fig. 3; but when said rod is moved downward 
the lever G so oscillates the lever II that the 
forward or lower end of the latter is carried 
from beneath the numbering-wheels to a po 
sition in rear thereof, as indicated in Fig. 4. 
The forward or lower end of the lever II is 
utilized to form an iniking appliance, and for 
this purpose has a pad of absorbent material 
saturated with ink applied to that surface 
which is moved beneath the numbering 
wheels. It will be seen that the pawls f are 
of different lengths, the one which coacts with 
the ratchet-wheel e' of the first numbering 
wheel E' being the longest and the others 
being successively shorter. The ratchet-wheel 
e' of the numbering-wheel E' has nine teeth 
1, of uniform length, and a tenth tooth 2, 
which is much deeper. While the opposite 
pawl f is coacting with the shallow teeth 1 
none of the other pawls f can coact with the 
teeth of their ratchet-wheels; but whenever 
the pawl opposite to the ratchet-wheel e' 
drops into the deep tooth 2 of said ratchet 
wheel one or more of the other pawls f will 
be free to operate upon its ratchet-wheel. 
Each of the ratchet-wheels is similar to the 
ratchet-wheel e' in respect to having nine 
shallow teeth and one deep tooth. If, for ex 
ample, the pawl f belonging to the ratchet 
wheele' comes opposite the deep tooth 2 of 
said ratchet-wheel at a time when the ratchet 
wheel e of the second numbering-wheel E' 
ought to move, the said pawl f which coacts 
with the ratchet-wheele' will drop far enough 
into the deep tooth to allow the second pawl 
f, coacting with the ratchet-wheel e' of the 
second numbering-wheel E, to engage with 
one of the teeth of the ratchet-wineel e' and 
move it sufficiently far to remove one number 
out of position for printing and bring the 
next into position for use. If at the time the 
pawl of the ratchet-wheel e' of the first num 
bering-wheel comes opposite the deep tooth 
2 of said ratchet-wheel the second, third, and 
fourth numbering-wheels or any one or more 
of the same ought to be moved, then the pawl 
belonging to the ratchet-wheele' will drop to 
the proper distance into the deep tooth of its 
latchet-wheel e' but in order that it shall 
drop far enough to enable any of the pawls 
except that belonging to the latchet-wheele' 
of the second numbering-wheel to co-operate 
it will be necessary that the deep tooth of the 
ratchet-wheele'shall be presented to the op 
posite pawl, for if this does not happen the 
ratchet-wheele will prevent the pawls from 
dropping far enough to operate any except 
the ratchet-wheels of the first and second 
numbering-wheels. Obviously if the ratchet 
wheel of the fourth numbering-wheel is to be 
operated the deep tooth of the ratchet-wheel 
e' belonging to the third numbering-wheel 
must be opposite its pawl. 
The Several ratchet-wheels are held against 
movement by means of detents i, consisting 
of pins arranged radially in the cylinder D 
and forced outwardly by springs i, which co 
act with notches , formed in the inner cir 
cumference of the numbering-wheels and their 
ratchet-wheels. This construction may, per 
haps, be best understood by reference to Fig. 
6. Although but one detent and the notches 
of but One numbering-wheel can be here seen, 
it Suffices to illustrate the detents and notches 
of the other numbering-wheels, because they 
may all be similar in construction. It will be 
seen that the detenti has a rounded or pointed 
end and that the notches are tapering from 
their innel ends. Owing to this construction 
each detent serves to hold its numbering 
Wheel against accidental movement, but, new 
ertheless, yields to permit of its movement 
under force applied through the correspond 
ing pawlf. 
f is a pawl which is loosely mounted upon 
the pin f' adjacent to one end of the bar F. 
A pin f extends through the upper part of 
the bar F and is free to enter any one of a 
number of holes in the pawlf. The pawlf 
coacts with a ratchet-wheele, which is loosely 
mollinted on the cylindler D at the side of the 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IC5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
462,065 
3 
d 
lowest numbering-wheel. This ratchet-wheel 
may be seen in Fig. 6. By reference to it it 
will be observed that it has first a deep tooth 
and then a shallow tooth, and so on through 
out its circumference. This ratchet-wheel has 
no function except to coact with the pawlf 
to regulate the movement of the pawls f to 
ward their ratchet-wheels. By engaging the 
pin with one hole of this pawlf such pawl 
may be entirely thrown out of action, and by 
engaging it with one of the others it will con 
trol the movements of the pawls. 
I do not want to be confined to any particu 
lar number of numering-wheels and ratchet 
wheels. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a stamp, the combination of a main 
frame, a series of similarly-spaced number 
ing-wheels, corresponding ratchet-wheels, de 
tents for these numbering-wheels and ratchet 
wheels operating radially within a support, 
pawls for imparting motion to said ratchet 
wheels, a movable yoke sustaining the num 
25 
35 
bering and ratchet wheels, a frame-like lever 
carrying the pawls and pivotally connected 
to said yoke and also to the main frame, and 
an inking-lever fulcrumed to the main frame 
and pivotally connected between its ends with 
the said lever which moves the pawls, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. In a stamp, the combination of a main 
frame, a longitudinally-movable rod fitted 
thereto and carrying similarly-spaced num 
bering-wheels, slots in said rod, a cross-pin 
connected to the main frame and passing 
through said slots, and an enlargement in one 
of said slots for receiving an enlarged portion 
of said pin to lock the rod in its depressed 
condition, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
w 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILLARD W. SAWYER. 
Witnesses: 
IIARRY CONTANT, 
WILLIAM MI. LIFF, 
F. E. l 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462165.txt	(No Model.) 
M. R O SENBAUM, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
COMBINED EXTENSION SHOW TABLE AND BED STEAD, 
No. 462,165, 
 
Patented 00t, 27, 1891. 
2. 
SS23SS 
sias2S2see2. 
tes 2 
- E 
the Porris PETERS co, Photo-utho washanator, o, c. 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
COMBINED EXTENSION SHOW TABLE AND BEDSTEAD, 
M. ROSENBAUM. 
No. 462,165, 
Patented Oct. 27, 1891, 
Z2. Z. 
 
 
1%zzzzz /2avezzaze2721 
- 22, 
M. R O SENBAUM. 
COMBINED EXTENSION SHOW TABLE AND BEDSTEAD, 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 462,165. 
Patented 00t, 27, 1891. 
 
29 
so 
Eas 
Ely 
E 
1.2 as Asses 
| HIE HTHE l 
; 
- E as 
a 
- Z 7 
so 
ii. 
11 
s 
 
Zezesues: 
2% / (6%.e., 
&e?e & e-6- 
1zzezzzzzz 
-27222 /2uezzazeezzo 
t16.2% 
(No Model.) 
M, ROSENBAUM, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
COMBINED EXTENSION SHOW TABLE AND BED STEAD, 
No. 462,165, 
Patented Oct. 27, 1891, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN ROSENBAUM, OF TACOMA, WASHINGTON. 
COMBINED EXTENSION SHOW-TABLE AND BED STEAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,165, dated October 27, 1891. 
Application filed November 10, 1890, Serial No, 370,885 (No model.) 
m 
0. 
To all willon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARTIN ROSENBAUM, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ta 
coma, in the county of Pierce and State of 
Washington, have invented a new and useful 
Combined Extension Show-Table and Bed 
tal, of which the following is a specifica 
My invention relates to a new article of 
furniture for hotels and boarding - houses, 
Where, for the lack of sufficient room, it is de 
sirable to combine sleeping accommodation 
with a show-table. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
Commercial travelers or drummers with a 
large show-table for the display of their goods, 
having combined therewith a concealed bed 
Stead, So as to impart a show-room appear 
ance to the room during business hours, while 
at other times the room can be utilized as a 
Sleeping-apartment. 
Reference is made to another application 
of even date herewith, Serial No. 370,884, in 
which are shown, described, and claimed cer 
tain features of construction shown and de 
scribed in this application. 
My improvement consists in certain novel 
features of construction, as hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
In order that my invention may be fully 
understood, I will proceed to describe it with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure I is a front elevation of my com 
bined extension show-table and bedstead. 
Fig. II is a central vertical longitudinal sec 
tion thereof. Fig. III is an under side view 
of the upper sliding extension or shelf. Fig. 
IV is an under side view of the lower sliding 
extension or shelf. Fig. W is an end view, 
the mirror being omitted and the bedstead 
being partly drawn out. Fig. VI is a plan 
view of the structure, the table top and ex 
tensions or shelves being omitted and the 
bedstead being partly drawn out. Fig. WII 
is a front elevation showing the structure ar 
ranged as a show-table. Fig. VIII is a longi 
tudinal section on a larger scale of the outer 
end of a bracket and the outer end of an 
arm, showing the hook end of the arm in 
serted in the recess of the bracket. Fig. IX 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
is a similar view showing the hooked end 
pressed to its seat in the recess. 
1 is the front, 2 the back, 34 the ends, and 
5 a bottom strip, of a casing providing a Sup 
port for a plane table-top 6, overhanging the 
front and the ends of the casing. Secured in 
upright position over the back of the casing 
is a mirror 7. The casing is mounted On 
Casters 8. 
9 are rack-bars secured to the ends 3 4, on 
the inside of the latter at the base thereof, 
and arranged with their teeth projecting 
upwardly, so as to present cogged rails Or 
tracks. 
10 is a sliding bed-frame shiftable over the 
bottom strip, having a suitable bed-bottom 
10 and provided with brackets 11 at the back. 
Journaled in these brackets is a shaft or axle 
12, having either fixed or loosely mounted 
thereon the cog-wheels 13, meshing with the 
rack-bars. The front of the bed-frame is pro 
vided with a hinged door 13 for closing the 
opening between the latter and the front of 
the casing. 
14 are lugs secured to the back of the bed 
frame to prevent its entire removal, and 15 
are cleats secured to the ends of the casing 
for retaining the bed-frame in place and the 
cog-wheels in engagement with the rack-bars. 
Extending lengthwise of and within the cas 
ing, forming an upper compartment 16 there 
in, and secured to the ends of the casing are 
strips 17 for supporting upper and lower Su 
perposed sliding extensions or shelves 1819, 
similar to those shown in my other applica 
tion hereinbefore referred to. The upper ex 
tension or shelf is constructed with a frame 20, 
forming a chamber 21. Within this chamber 
are two transverse strips 2223, between which 
is hinged, by means of its cross-bar 24 and 
plates 25, secured to the strips, a support hav 
ing arms 26, whose outer hooked ends 27 rest 
on the lower extension within the compart 
ment. When the upper extension is drawn 
out, the hooked ends of the arms rest in un 
dercut recesses 28 of the brackets 29, Secured 
to the end 3 of the casing, so as to support the 
outer portion of the extension. The recesses 
28 are of such form as to provide each bracket 
with an end wall 29 and with a ledge 29, over 
hanging the under-cuts 29. The hooked ends 
55 
75 
IOO 
462,165 
- 
back thereof, and a shaft 12, journaled in the 
brackets, having cog-wheels 13, meshing with 
and traveling on the rack-bars, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination of the casing having 
the ends 34, the table-top 6, and the front 1, 
and the sliding bed-frame 10, having a suit 
able bed-bottom and provided with a hinged 
door 13 for closing the opening between the 
bed-frame and the front of the casing, Sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a casing, of an 
extension provided with a support formed 
with a cross-bar and inwardly-projecting 
arms, and the brackets secured to the casing, 
having recesses and inclined guide-grooves 
leading to the recesses, down which the ends 
of the arms slide into place when the exten 
sion is withdrawn, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the casing having a 
horizontal partition and a table-top forming 
an upper compartment, the Superposed up 
per and lower extensions provided with sup 
ports, each formed with a cross-bar and in 
wardly-projecting arms, and the brackets Se 
cured to the ends of the casing, having re 
cesses and inclined guide-grooves leading to 
the recesses, down which the ends of the arms 
slide into place when the extensions are with 
drawn, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with a casing, of an 
extension provided with a support formed 
with a cross-bar and a pair of in Wardly-pro 
jecting arms having hooked ends, and the 
brackets constructed with recesses and un 
der-cuts, providing end walls and ledges over 
hanging the under-cuts, the brackets being 
secured to the casing, and the hooked ends 
being adapted to engage the recesses and un 
der-cuts of the brackets, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. The combination of the casing having 
ends, the brackets secured to the ends, hav 
ing undercut recesses, the Superposed upper 
and lower extensions provided with supports, 
each formed with a cross-bar, and in Wardly 
projecting arms having hooked ends adapted 
to engage in the recesses of the brackets, sub 
stantially as described. 
MARTIN ROSENBAUM. 
Winesses: 
A. A KNIGHT, 
H. M. MUMFORD. 
55 
go 
OO 
of the arms have sufficient play in the recesses 
between the walls and the under-cuts to enable 
them to be readily inserted and removed from 
the recesses; but accidental withdrawal of 
the hooked ends is prevented in a direction 
end Wise of the bracket by the hooks coming 
against the end walls and in an upward direc 
tion by the heads of the hooks engaging with 
the ledges beneath which they seat. 
The 
brackets 29 are formed with inclined chan 
nels or grooves 30, by which the ends of the 
arms are guided into the outer ends of the 
recesses 28. By merely lifting the outer end 
of the extension to draw the arms outward 
and then lifting the arms into the chamber 
all obstruction to the return of the extension 
into place will be removed. Secured to the 
inner end of the edges of the extension are 
lugs 31, which, coming in contact with the 
portions 32 of the end 3, will prevent the en 
tire removal of the extension. The lower ex 
tension is constructed with a frame 33, form 
ing a chamber 34. Within this chamber are 
two transverse strips 35 36, between which is 
hinged, by means of its cross-bar 37 and 
plates 38, Secured to the strip, a support hav 
ing arms 39, whose outer hooked ends 40 rest 
On the strips 17 within the compartment. 
This extension is further provided with 
Wedge-shaped blocks 41, as shown in my other 
application, hereinbefore referred to, at its 
inner end, by which it is lifted into the same 
horizontal plane as the upper extension when 
drawn out, and also, as an addition thereto, 
With pendent lugs 42, which, coming against 
the end 4 of the casing, prevent the entire 
withdrawal of the extension. 
43 are brackets secured to end 4 of the cas 
ing, and are similar to the brackets on the op 
posite end of the casing, being formed with re 
cesses 44 to receive the hooked ends 40 and 
with channels or grooves 45 for guiding the 
ends to their seats. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
1. The combination of the casing having 
the ends 34 and table-top 6, the rack-bars 9, 
secured to the ends of the casing with their 
teeth projecting upwardly, so as to provide 
cogged tracks, and the sliding bed-frame 10, 
having a suitable bed-bottom and provided 
with rearwardly-extending brackets 11 at the 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462265.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 462,265. 
 
B. F. MASON. 
VEHICLE SEAT ATTACHMENT, 
Patented Nov. 3, 1891. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN FRANKLIN MASON, OF ORANGE SPRINGS, FILORIDA. 
VEHICLE - SEAT ATACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,265, dated November 8, 1891. 
Application filed July 25, 1891, 
Serial No. 400,751 (No model.) 
25 
O 
15 
To all, whom it may concern: . 
Beit known that I, BENJAMEN FRANKLINMA 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Orange Springs, in the county of Marion and 
State of Florida, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Vehicle-Seat At 
tachments; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in seat attachments for 
vehicles; and it has for its objects, among oth 
ers, to provide a simple, cheap, efficient, and 
durable seat attachment designed primarily 
for holding umbrellas, which may be readily 
attached to a vehicle-seat and in which the 
parts may be readily adjusted to suit the va 
rying circumstances under which it may be 
desired to use it. I provide an arm which is 
designed to be adjustably connected with the 
seat, and to this arm is adjustably connected 
another arm which carries a holder which is 
connected there with by a pivot or swivel con 
nection, so that it may be turned to any de 
sired angle, so that the device may be ad 
justed to bring the umbrella at any desired 
angle dependent upon the direction in which 
the rain is falling, or for any other purpose. 
The various adjustments may be readily made 
from the seat without the occupants of the 
same moving from the seat, and they can be 
done so readily as not to subject the rider 
to the inconvenience of getting nearly wet 
through before he has made the necessary 
changes in position of the parts. The longi 
tudinal adjustment provides for different 
styles and shapes of vehicles, so that the 
holder may be moved nearer to or farther 
from the seat. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear, and the novel 
features thereof will be specifically defined 
by the appended claim. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
So accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
35 
30 
45 
ters of reference marked thereon, form apart 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing my 
improvement applied to a seat. Fig. 2 is a 
plan of the same detached. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in both views where they occur. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates a seat of a vehi 
cle of known construction. 
B is an arm, which is designed to be se 
cured to the under side of the seat in any 
well-known manner, preferably by being at 
tached to a cleat or bar upon the under side 
thereof, although the inner end of this arm 
may be formed at right angles to its forward 
portion, so as to have a flat bearing against 
the under side of the seat. This may be ac 
complished by giving the arm a twist, which 
twist will also tend to strengthen the arm. 
This arm I prefer to make in two parts ad 
justable in any suitable manner-as, for in 
stance, by forming the same with an elon 
gated slot b, and the two parts held in their 
adjusted positions by a thumb-screw b', work 
ing therein and arranged to clamp the two 
parts together by the turning up of the screw, 
as will be readily understood. 
C is an arm which is provided with an elon 
gated slot c. This arm is adjustably held to 
the arm B by means of a thumb-screw c' and 
washers c, by which means the arms B and 
C may be lengthened or shortened, as occa 
sion may require, and the arm C may also be 
turned on its thumb-screw as a pivot to bring 
the said arms in different positions and at 
different angles relatively to each other. 
To the outer end of the arm C there is held 
by a pivot d the holder ID, which is formed 
with a lug or extension d', through which the 
said pivot passes. The pivot is preferably a 
thumb-screw, so as to provide for ready ad 
justment of the holder relatively to the arm 
C. Upon the opposite edge of the holder 
there is a lug or extension d, through which 
passes the bolt E, which has one end curved 
or bent into substantially a semicircle, as seen 
in Fig. 1, to embrace the handle of the um 
brella and the other end screw-threaded and 
receiving a nut E", by which it may be drawn 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
CO 
 
2 
462,265 
5 umbrella-handle. 
up to hold the hooked or bent end around the 
handle of the umbrella. 
The vertical portion of the holder is con 
caved, as shown at e', for the reception of the 
The manner of use will be readily under 
What I claim as new is 
An umbrella or shade support adapted to 
Io be attached to a seat and to be adjusted rela 
tively thereto, consisting of an adjustable arm 
having a horizontal portion to extend beneath 
the seat, a twisted vertical portion, a second 
stood and is illustrated in Fig. 1. 
arm slotted and pivotally and adjustably cair 
ried thereby, a holder pivotally connected. I5 
with the last-mentioned arm, and a bent hook 
or bolt passed through an extension of the 
holder and provided with an adjusting-nut, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 20 
BENJAMIN FRANKLIN MASON. 
Witnesses: 
C. A. LOPEZ, 
BERT D. HARRISON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462365.txt	REGISTERING APPARATUS, CHIEFLY FOR AMOUNTS DUE FOR PIECE WORK, 
T. PINK, 
(No Model.) 
No. 462,365, 
Patented Nov. 3, 1891. 
Fia.3. 
THE MORRIS Perers co., f HoTo-Litho., washingtoN 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS PINIX, OF I.ONDON, ENGTAND. 
REGISTERING APPARATUS, CHIEFLY FOR AMOUNTS DUE FOR PIECE-WORK, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,865, dated November 3, 1891. 
Application filed August 6, 1890, Serial No. 361,186, (No model. 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, Luhon, it in Cuzy CO7 Ce77. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS PINK, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at Bermondsey, London, England, have in 
vented new and useful Improvements in Reg 
istering Apparatus, Chiefly Designed for Reg 
istering Amounts Due for Piece-Work, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to apparatus for reg 
istering the amounts due for piece-Work and 
for similar purposes; and it comprises a de 
vice, hereinafter termed a workman's regis 
ter, which is capable of having registered 
upon it the amounts due to a Workman for 
work done, and a second device, termed a 
foremans register, adapted to have regis 
tered upon it the sum of the amounts regis 
tered upon several Workmen's registers. 
According to my invention the workmans 
register comprises a case the face of which is 
provided with dials for indicating pounds, 
shillings, and pence, or other values, the fin 
gers working over the said dials being geared 
together in a Well-known manner, So that they 
can be operated by depressing or pushing a 
key or the like against a ratchet or other de 
vice for operating the train of wheels. 
The foremans register is constructed in 
substantially the same manner as the Work 
man's register, except that the dials are adapt 
ed to register a larger amount, in Order to 
register the sum of the amounts indicated 
upon several workmen's registers. This fore 
man's register is advantageously constructed 
with a key or pusher, the outer end of which 
is designed for operating the Workmen's reg 
isters. With this construction it will be un 
derstood that when a Workman's register is 
pushed onto the projecting key of the fore 
man's register the same movement will oper 
ate both the said Workman's and the fore 
man's register, the number of pushes corre 
sponding to the amount to be registered. By 
applying the workmen's registers one after 
the other the amountindicated on each Work 
mans register will be added to the amount 
indicated by the foreman's register. 
To enable my invention to be fully under 
stood, I will describe the same with reference 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of a Workman's reg 
ister constructed according to my invention, 
and Fig. 2 is an end view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a section on the line acac of Fig. 2, show 
ing the mechanism in side elevation; and Fig. 
4 is a section on the line | y, Fig. 3, showing 
the mechanism in plan. Fig. 5 is a view simi 
lar to Fig. 1 of the foreman's registering 
mechanism, and Fig. 6 is a view similar to 
Fig, 3 of the mechanism of the foremans reg 
ister. 
The Workman's and the foremans register 
are constructed in Substantially the same man 
ner-that is to say, each of them is provided 
with an Outer case C, one side b of which is 
advantageously formed of glass and has ar 
ranged behind it a face having a series of 
dials graduated according to the amount to 
be registered-for instance, for pounds, shil 
lings, and pence, or for dollars and cents-a 
finger or pointer c working in conjunction 
With each dial, which ?inger's or pointers c c 
are operated by a train of gearing d in a well 
known manner, or they may be operated by 
any other Suitable means. The arbor of the 
first-motion wheel of the train of gearing has 
secured to it a ratchet-wheele, and in engage 
ment with this ratchet-wheel is a pawl f, car 
ried by an arm gy, projecting from a block I, 
adapted to slide in a tubular guide i, the arm 
g projecting through a slot in the side of the 
guide. It will be obvious that when the block 
h is pushed backward in the tubular guide 
motion Will be imparted to the ratchet-wheel 
e and thence to the train of gearing, the 
amountildlicated upon the dials correspond 
ing to the number of movements imparted to 
the said block. Springs k serve to return 
the block to its normal position. 
The tubular guide of the workman's register 
is provided with a tubular extension l, adapted 
to enter the guide of the foreman's register to 
move the block h, therein, and secured to the 
end of the guide is a rod n, adapted to pass 
through the tubular extension l of the work 
man's register into the tubular guide i in or 
der to operate the block I of the said Work 
mans legister. 
With this construction it 
will be obvious that when the rod in of the 
foremans registeris introduced into the guide 
of the Workman's and foremans register and 
the said Workman's and foreman's register 
Ioo 
Io 
3O 
35 
45 
 
462,365 
55 
7 O 
75 
the amounts allowed by the foreman being 
indicated upon the foremans register. 
In Some cases it may be advisable to ar 
range a key or pusher in connection with each 
dial of the workman's register and of the 
foreman's register, so that, say, Shillings may 
be indicated without it being necessary to 
add each penny of the aunounts separately. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of the said invention 
and in what manner the same is to be per 
formed, I declare that what I claim is 
1. Registering apparatus comprising two 
essential parts, each of which is provided with 
a registering mechanism, a locking mechan 
ism, and a key or unlocking mechanism, the 
lock and key of one apparatus adapted to act 
uate the lock and key of the other apparatus 
and operate the respective registering mech 
anisms simultaneously. 
2. Registering apparatus comprising two 
essential parts, each of which parts is provided 
With registering mechanism and a key or 
pusher, said registering mechanism adapted 
to be operated by the key or pusher on the 
other part, the said keys or pushers being 
adapted to fit one within the other, so that 
both sets of registering mechanism can be op 
erated simultaneously, Substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In registering apparatus comprising two 
parts adapted to be connected and operated 
simultaneously, the combination in each part 
of a train of gearing, a block sliding in a 
tubular guide and carrying a pawl engaging 
with a ratchet-wheel secured to the arbor of 
one of the wheels of the train of gearing, and 
a key or pusher adapted to operate the block 
of the other part, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereto signed 
my name this 23d day of July, 1890. 
TIOMAS PINIX. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN E. BOUSFIELD, 
Of the firm of G. F. Redfern, de Co., 4 South 
St., Finsbury, London, Patent. Agents. 
A. L. ALBUTT. 
pressed toward each other the two blocks h 
will be simultaneously moved and so cause a 
corresponding rotation to be recorded upon 
the respective dials. 
in is a spring-detent pawl, with which each 
apparatus is provided to prevent the move 
ment of the ratchet-wheel in a backward di 
rection. 
In order to prevent the workmans register 
from being operated by the introduction of a 
plain rod into the tubular guide and to prevent 
the foremans register from being operated by 
simply pressing a tube into its guide, I pro 
wide for normally locking each block in its 
guide. For this purpose I advantageously pro 
vide each block h, with an upward extension 
o, to which are pivoted two tumblers p p, each 
of which has at or near one end pins or projec 
tions q q., and in connection with the tubular 
guide is arranged a locking-plater, having an 
aperture therethrough sufficiently large to al 
low the pins or projections qi q to pass when the 
tumblers p pare raised to a certain position, 
but which when the said tumble's are in their 
normal position forms an abutment against 
which the pins qi q can bear to prevent the 
movement of the block h relatively to the 
tubular guide. Each tumbler is also provided 
with an arms, projecting into the tube , and 
the ends of the tubular extension l and the 
rod n are So shaped that when they are in 
troduced into the respective guides they will 
first of all lift the tumblers to the required 
position to allow their pins g g to pass through 
the openings in the locking-plates r r and 
then push the blocks h, backward. 
In using the apparatus hereinbefore de 
scribed the Workman's register is retained 
by the workman, while the foreman's regis 
ter is kept by a foreman. When a workman 
has completed a certain amount of work, the 
foreman, having passed it, takes the Work 
mans register and indicates on such register 
in the manner hereinbefore described the 
amount due to the Workman for such work, 
the amount being at the same time indicated 
upon the foreman's register. This operation 
is repeated with each workman, the total of 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462465.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL F. BERRY, OF TOLEDO, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO WILLIAM 
II. ATWILL OF SAME PLACE. 
LOCK SNAP HOOK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,465, dated November 8, 1891. 
Application filed April 9, 1891, Serial No. 388,220, (No model.) 
C 
To att, whon, it may conce7n: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL F. BERRY, of 
Toledo, county of Lucas, and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
5 provements in Lock-Snap Iooks; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form part of this speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to a lock-snap hook, 
and has particular reference to that class of 
hooks used upon the tugs, straps, &c., of har 
leSS. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
hook of inexpensive construction and that 
shall be provided with an automatic locking 
mechanism, whereby a ring or other object 
Secured within the hook will be locked from 
accidental disconnection therefrom, and also 
with means for conveniently releasing the 
locking mechanism when it is desired to re 
move the ring or other object from the snap. 
The invention consists in the parts and com 
bination of parts hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of one form of hook provided with my 
improved lock-snap. Fig. 2 is a longitudi 
nal vertical sectional view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a transverse section on lines at ac, Fig. 
35 2. Fig. 4 is a like view showing the hook 
concave upon the inner face, with the revolu 
ble disk or snap convexed to fit the same. 
1 designates the hook, in the present in 
stance shown as an ordinary harness-hook, 
although I wish it to be understood that the 
construction, form, and size of the hook may 
be varied to suit the different classes of work 
to which it may be put. 
2 designates a circular recess formed by the 
bend of the hook and into which is revolubly 
secured a snap or disk 3, said disk 3 being 
held within the recess 2, with the periphery 
in close contact with the inner side of the 
chamber and held in place by means of the 
45 
25 
It will be seen by the foregoing descrip- 6o 
the sides of the hook. The disk 3 is formed 
of two like sections, as shown in Fig. 3, hav 
ing a circular portion 4 of a diameter to fit 
within the recess of the hook, and side flanges 
5 to bear against the side of the hook, or, as 55 
shown in Fig. 4, the recess is concaved in form 
in cross-section and the periphery of the disk 
convex to fit the same, the two sections of disk 
being secured together by screws or pins 6. 
tion that the disk is revolubly secured with 
in the hook without the necessity of jour 
nals of any character, thereby giving to the 
bearing the full strength of the hook or disk 
and rendering this part of construction very 65 
simple and inexpensive. 
Disk 3 is chambered at 7 to form a semi 
circular recess of a shape to allow of insert 
ing a ring of the desired size therein and al 
low the disk to revolve, carrying the ring be- 7 c. 
yond opening S of the hook, thereby securing 
the ring within the hook, as is clearly illus 
trated by the positions of disk 3 in Figs. 1 
and 2. 
a perforation 9 in the disk and provide a lock 
ing-pin 10, adapted to enter the perforation 
when the disk is turned in the position shown 
in Fig. 1. Pin 10 is secured in a lever 1J, Se 
cured in a chamber 12, formed in the body of 8o 
the hook, the lever being secured therein by 
at the end opposite to the pits by means of a 
spring 14, whereby the tendency of pin 10 
is to bear upon the periphery of the disk until 85 
the perforation is brought into coincidence 
with the pin when it enters the perforation 
and locks the disk from revolution, thereby 
positively securing the ring or other object 
within the hook. 
In operation, the snap or disk being in the 
position shown in Fig. 2, the ring or other ob 
ject is passed through the opening in the hook 
and is seated in the semicircular recess 7, 
when by a pull upon the ring the Snap is 95 
caused to l'evolve until in the position shown 
in Fig. 1, when pin 10 enters the perforation 
9 and locks the Snap in place. In Order to 
release the ring from the hook, the end of the 
In order to lock the snap or disk 3, I form 75 
9o 
5o projecting edges of the disk contacting with lever opposite to the pin is depressed, with- I oc 
 
462,465 
drawing the pin, when the snap or disk is free 
to revolve to the position shown in Fig. 2, 
thereby releasing the ring. 
What I claim is 
1. A lock-snap hook formed with a circular 
recess, and circular chambered disk or snap 
revolubly secured therein by flanges on the 
disk, in combination with the locking mech 
anism on the hook to coact with the snap or 
disk. 
2. In a lock-snap hook, a hook formed with 
a circular recess, a chamber upon the rear 
O 
 
side, a spring-actuated lever fulcrumed within 
the chamber and carrying a locking-pin, and 
a chambered snap or disk revolubly Secured 
in the recess of the hook formed with a per 
foration adapted to receive the locking-pin. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I hereby affix my signature in pres 
ence of two Witnesses. 
SAMUEL F. BERRY. 
Witnesses: 
- 
WILLIAM WEBSTER, 
CARROLLJ. WEBSTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462565.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 462,565, 
H. J. LEWIS. 
TACK SETTER AND HAMMER, 
Patented Nov. 3, 1891. 
 
28.1-11-coooo. 
77). Altdars o7a, 
42-121 - . 
76/s 
&ffet lies 
the Norris PETERs co. Photo-tithd., was Ncrow, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
II ENRY J. LEWIS, O F O LAT II E, KANSAS. 
TACK SETTER AND HAMMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,565, dated November 3, 1891. 
Application filed October 18, 1890, Serial No, 868,582, (No model.) 
s 
s 
To all it flon, it inctly CO7 ce.772: 
Be it known that I, HENRY J. LEWIS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Olathe, in the county of Johnson and State of 
Kansas, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Tack Setters and Hammers; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable other's skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawing, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
The figure of the drawing is a representa 
tion of the invention and is partly a vertical 
section. 
This invention has relation to combined 
tack-hamulers and tack-setters; and it cor 
sists in the novel construction and combina 
tion of parts, as hereinafter set forth. 
In the accompanying drawing, the letter 
A designates a downwardly-tapering tube or 
guide for the tapering shank or set portion of 
the hammer C, provided with head E. 
D indicates a feed-tube for tacks, which 
connects with and leads into the tube. A near 
its lower tapered end and which extends ob 
liquely upward, being connected to said tube 
by an interposed brace (d. The tube D is de 
signed to receive the tacks at its upper end 
and guide them to the tube A, which, when 
resting vertically upon any Surface, Sustains 
the tacks, one at a time, in an erect position 
until the set C of the hallmmel' has been forced 
down upon the head of the tack, which is 
thereby caused to stick in the surface. When 
the tack is left exposed in removing the tube 
from its erect position, the latter becomes the 
handle of the hammer, which is grasped to 
reverse the implement and bring into play 
the hammer-head E, by means of which the 
tack is driven home. 
The hanner consists of the solid shank or 
set portion C and the solid head E, formed by 
bending the latter at a right angle to the said 
Shank. 
A spiral spring g is interposed between the 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
75 
head E of the hammer and the tube A, Se 
cured to both in a suitable manner, as by a 
soldering, as shown, and surrounding the ex 
posed portion l of the shank C. This spring 
g is designed to retain the hammer in its 
normal position in the tube, with its lower end 
sufficiently raised to permit the tacks to pass 
beneath it from the feed-tube into the main 
It is obvious that by this spring a 1'-. 
tube A. 
rangement the set or shank is adapted to be 
forced down into the tube upon the head of 
the tack for setting the latter, and to be in 
mediately returned to its original or normal 
position when released from pressure above. 
By the tapering form of the tube A sufficient 
space is afforded at the upper end for the set 
C, which must be of a size to give it sufficient 
weight. The taper of the tube is such that 
at its lower end it is of just sufficient size to 
form a guide for the tack, which will receive 
upon its head the full concentrated blow of 
the set, owing to its also being tapered. The 
working of the device is thus rendered more 
effective than if the tube A were suddenly 
contracted at its lower end to form the guide 
for the tack. A neater form is also the result 
of the taper. 
IIaving described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
IS 
The tack setter and hammer comprising the 
tapered sleeve or tube open at both ends, and 
a second tube oblique thereto and communi 
cating there with near its smaller end, and a 
brace interposed between said tubes, in com 
bination with the tapered rod having its 
smaller end reciprocating in said sleeve or 
tube and its opposite end turned at right 
angles thereto and headed, and a spring sur 
rounding said rod and connected at one end 
thereto and at the opposite end to said sleeve, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY J. LEWIS. 
Witnesses: 
S. D. SCOTT, 
J. N. NEELY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462665.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. W. DICK & A. L. EASTIN. 
AUTOGRAPHIC MANIFOLDING AND REGISTERING MACHINE. 
No. 462,665, 
 
Patented Nov. 3, 1891, 
25%22M 
m aw 
w 
v2t 
r 
w 
M 
a 
12' 
t 
cc cess 
re-r-, -i ill g HHI, IIIMF 
12, 2. 
//L/27/7Z7472 
44-4 4.e5 a--- 
4s 4-4 2- 4 - 6 
(2-4 M62-6-4-4-2 2-)-4- 
 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. W. DICK & A. L. EASTIN. 
AUTOGRAPHIC MANIFOLDING AND REGISTERING MACHINE, 
No. 462,665, 
Patented Nov. 3, 1891. 
 
 
Ma2724.442 
e/6-64, 25 2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. DICK AND ARTHUR L. EASTIN, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
AUTOGRAPHC MANFOLDING AND REGISTERING MACHINE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,665, dated November 3, 1891. 
Application filed May 20, 1890, Serial No,352,438, (No model.) 
d 
To all, whom it 7-cy concern. 
Be it known that we, JOHN W. DICK and 
ARTHUR L. EASTIN, citizens of the United 
States, residing in the city of St. Louis and 
State of Missouri, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Autographic 
Manifolding and Registering Machines, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
that class of machines known as auto 
graphic registers,' used for making several 
copies of a memorandum simultaneously with 
the production of the original, and in which 
there is generally provided means for pre 
serving one or more of the copies for future 
reference, so as to be inaccessible to the per 
Son using the machine. 
Our invention consists in the combination, 
with the supply-roller, of a large friction 
wheel mounted on the shaft thereof, a copy 
sheet-receiving spool loosely journaled in the 
frame and having a friction-wheel secured to 
its shaft, an interposed Swinging friction-roll, 
a spring for holding said frictional rolls in 
frictional contact, and a paper-supporting 
platform intermediate the supply and copy 
receiving rolls. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
like letters of reference denote like parts in 
the Several figures, Figure l is a side eleva 
tion of our improved machine with the rear 
side of the containing-case removed. Fig. 2 
is a plan view of the same with a portion of 
the Supporting-platform for the writing-sur 
face removed and portions of the memoran 
dum and carbon sheets torn away, showing 
the superposed position of the several sheets. 
Fig. 3 is an end view of our machine with a 
portion of the containing-case removed, show 
ing the copy-receiving mandrel and the pins 
thereon for securing the end of the sheet 
wound on it, also showing the slot in the end 
of the containing-case. Fig. 4 is a side view 
of the copy-receiving spool, showing the re 
movable end. Fig. 5 is an end view of the 
copy-receiving spool, the detachable end re 
moved, showing the inclination of the pins for 
securing the end of the sheet of paper. 
In our machine We inclose the Working 
parts in a containing - case A, made in two 
parts C, and C, the upper part or lid a being 
secured at one end to the lower or box part a 
by a hinge and fastened at the other end with 
a lock. The top of the lid a is made, prefer 
ably, of sheet metal, with the middle portion 
thereof cut away, forming a frame or scrollB, 
for holding the paper flat and exposing a por 
tion of the top sheet on which to write the 
memorandum. One end of the frame B is 
extended beyond the margin of the box and 
beveled, forming the cutting-edge b, against 
which the paper can be torn in separating 
the memorandum slips from the sheets in the 
machine. Immediately under the cutting 
edge the material of the containing-case A is 
cut away, forming the slot b' across the upper 
edge of that end of the containing-case through 
which the sheets of paper are passed to the 
outside of the containing-case. The frame 
work C for supporting the Working parts of 
the machine is made to fit snugly the contain 
ing-case A when the lid c is closed down. 
The platform D for supporting the sheets of 
paper when being written on is supported by 
the frame C immediately under the opening 
in the frame B. The platform D is formed 
with a raised edged along each side, leaving 
a shallow longitudinal groove throughout the 
length of the supporting-platform D a little 
wider than the width of the sheets of paper 
used, acting as a guide for the sheets and pre 
venting the frame B from binding on the paper. 
The depth of this groove formed by the raised 
edges d is governed by the number of sheets 
of paper used on the machine. In the draw 
ings it is somewhat exaggerated in order to 
properly show the sheets of paper. 
The journal-bearings in the frame C for the 
ends of the supply-roll mandrel Eare formed 
in the ends of inclined slotse, so that the sup 
ply-roll can be conveniently inserted in or re 
moved from the machine. On one end of the 
mandrel E there is rigidly secured the large 
flat-faced friction-wheel F. The mandrel G. 
for the preserved copy roll or spool, which has 
its journal-bearings in the frame C, carries 
on one of its ends a small friction wheel or 
pulley c. The journal-bearing for the shaft 
or mandrel G at this end is a slot h, cut in 
the frame C, so as to permit of an adjustable 
movement of the end of the mandrel G, carry 
ing the friction-pulley c in a direction to 
ward and from the friction-wheel F. It has 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
462,665 
been found preferable to place an interme 
diate friction-wheel H between the two wheels 
Or pulleys F and c. 
This wheel His mounted 
on the free end of an arm i, which is pivot 
ally secured at its other end to the frame 
Work C, so as to freely assume a position be 
tween the two wheels F and c and merely 
transmit the motion of rotation from one to 
the other. The proper friction between the 
faces of the wheels is produced by the spring 
k, the tendency of which is to press the fric 
tion-wheel c against the wheel H, and this 
being free to move against the large wheel F. 
The office of this combination of friction 
Wheels is to operate the copy-roll mandrel in 
rolling up the preserved copy-sheet by the ro 
tation of the mandrel of the supply-rol caused 
by the unwinding of the paper on it. 
It is obvious that the mandrel G. for the 
copy-roll will have to travel faster relatively 
When the paper is first started on it and the 
roll of paper on the supply-mandrel E is 
larger than when the paper on the supply 
mandrel has been partly used and unreeled 
and the roll on the mandrel Glarger. The 
proportionate size of the two wheels F and c 
is such and the friction between them suffi 
cient to keep the copy-sheet rolled up and 
taut at first, and when the conditions become. 
Such that it is not necessary for the copy-roll 
to rotate so fast relatively its friction-wheel 
Will slip on the other. The sheets of paper 
are carried from the supply-roll on the man 
drel E over independent rollers o o'o', which 
have their journal-bearing near the upper 
edge of the frame C so separated as to leave 
room for the recesses in n', cut in the upper 
edge of the frame C to accommodate the ends 
of the clamping-rods m m', which are used 
to Secure the ends of the sheets of carbon 
paper. This arrangement permits of the 
carbon-sheets t t being properly interleaved 
between the memorandum-sheetsu, u' u' and 
Securely held there. The lower memoran 
dum-sheet is carried down over the roller s 
at the other end of the writing-table D and 
the end Secured to the mandrel or spool G. 
The end of the paper is secured to the spool 
by pressing it over two short pins ac, protrud 
ing from the surface of the material of the 
spool G near each end, which are slightly in 
clined in the direction of rotation of the spool 
in winding up the sheet of paper, so that 
when the roll of paper is turned as a whole 
on the spool in the opposite direction from 
which it was wound the roll will be loosened 
and will slip off the retaining-pins ac. The 
roll can then be slipped off the spool, one end 
of which is removable for that purpose. 
The comparative wide part K of the frame 
B at one end of the top of the box forms a 
convenient resting-place for the hand when 
writing on the machine. 
When the memorandum has been written 
on the machine, the protruding ends of the 
paper are grasped and pulled out and torn 
off. In polling the sheets the supply-roll on 
the mandrel E is rotated, and with it, by 
means of the friction-wheels mounted on the 
same, the mandrel G, which takes and reels 
up the copy-sheet, the end of which has been 
fastened to it. 
It may in practice prove preferable to se 
cure the carbon-papers in their position be 
tween the memorandum-sheets by clamping 
devices secured to the sides of the platform 
D and pass the several sheets of memoran 
dum-paper over the same roller, thereby doing 
away with the friction of the other rollers. 
If it is not desired to preserve a copy, as is 
done in the machine described, the copy-roll 
can be dispensed with and all the sheets 
withdrawn together. 
We claim 
In a manifold-copying machine, the combi 
nation, with the supply-roller, of a large fric 
tion-wheel mounted on the shaft thereof, a 
copy-sheet-receiving spool loosely journaled 
in the frame and having a friction-wheel se. 
cured to its shaft, an interposed swinging 
friction-roll, a spring for holding said fric 
tion-wheels in frictional contact, and a paper 
supporting platform intermediate the supply 
and copy-receiving rolls, substantially as and 
for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof we have affixed our 
signatures, in presence of two witnesses, this 
9th day of May, 1890. 
JOHN. W. DICK. 
ARTHUR I. EASTIN. 
Witnesses: 
Jos. W. CROOKES, 
A. RAINES. 
15 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
95 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462765.txt	(No Model.) 
J. HENAHAN. 
APPARATUS FOR CRUSHING STONE 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 462,765. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
N 
N 
  
 
 
  
N 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3. 2 E. 
r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
" 27.4-7. T 
A/WAW777A. 
7% 724. 24. 22 
 
torous vulitz- 
76 y C. V&44. 
 
(No Model. ) 
No. 462,765. 
 
J. HENAHAN. 
APPARATUS FOR CRUSHING STONE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIN HENAHAN, OF TOLEIDO, OHIO. 
APPARATUS FOR CRUSH N G STONE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,765, dated November 10, 1891. 
Application filed May 1, 1891, Serial No. 391,244 (No model.) 
. 
opening 15 extending vertically through the 
To all whon, it nay concern 
Be it known that JOHN HENAHAN, of Toledo, 
Sle. 
16 designates a cone-shaped crusher formed 
county of Lucas, and State of Ohio, have in 
of a plurality of segmental crushing-jaws 17, 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
each jaw being formed with a hanger 1S, 
in Apparatus for Crushing Stone; and I do 
pivotally connected with the top plate 14 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
and suspended therefrom by means of pins 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
19, so that each jaw may have a radial move 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the 
ment from the axial center of the crusher. 
The outer surface of the jaws is corrugated, 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
as clearly shown in Fig. 2. 
ing drawings, and to the numerals of refer 
20 designates spiral Springs, arranged trans 
ence marked thereon, which form part of this 
versely of the crusher and Secured at opposite 
specification. 
ends to diametrically - opposite jaws of the 
My invention relates to an apparatus for 
same, the tendency of the springs being to 
crushing stone, and has for its object to COn 
hold the sections of crusher closely assembled. 
struct a crusher having a series of coincident 
ly-actuated segmental crushing-jaws and 
21 designates a shaft extending vertically 
through the shell and passing through open 
means for imparting thereto a vertical recip 
ing 15 of the top plate, boxing 6 of plate 5, 
rocatory movement and also a certain lateral 
boxing 8 of plate 7, and resting at the lower 
movement in a plane transverse to the axis 
end upon Spring 11 in step 9. The upper 
of the crusher. 
portion of shaft 21 is formed with a yoke 22, 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists, broadly, in a shell or casing and a 
to which is secured a boxing 23, in which is 
segmental crusher movably secured therein, 
journaled a horizontal shaft 24, having an ec 
with the segments of the crusher held yield 
centric 25 Secured thereto, by which means 
shaft 21 is given a vertical reciprocatory 
ingly assembled to allow of lateral movement 
movement by the revolution of shaft 24, which 
thereto, 
In the drawings, Figure i is a longitudinal 
may be driven by any preferred power. 
26 designates toggle arms or levers, there 
vertical sectional view of a crushing appa 
being one arm to each jaw of the crusher, the 
ratus constructed in accordance With my in 
vention, part of shaft being omitted. Fig. 2 
inner ends of which arms are secured in a 
sleeve 27, secured upon the shaft by means 
is a transverse section on ines & 3, Fig. l. 
Fig. 3 is an elevation of the upper portion of 
of set-screws 2S, the outer ends of the arms 
the shaft, showing the eccentric for recipro 
being seated in recesses 29, formed in the 
cating the same. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal 
inner surface of each jaw of the crusher. 
30 designates resilient buffers, preferably 
vertical sectional view of the top of the shell. 
1 designates the shell or casing, formed of 
formed of rubber, and which are interposed 
between the jaws of the crusher to receive 
a central section 2 and upper and lower Sec 
tions 3 and 4, respectively, the Sections being 
the jar and impact due to any unusual strain 
that may be exerted thereupon, there being 
securely bolted together and of sufficient 
resilient bearings 31 secured in the top plate, 
strength to withstand the great strain to 
which they are subjected. The lower section 
and which bear upon shaft 21 and allow the 
same a yielding motion. 
4 is formed with a conical portion 5, having 
32 designates an opening formed in the base 
a central orifice into which a boxing 6 is Se 
cured, and also with a base-plate 7, having a 
portion 4, through Which the crushed stone 
light boxing 8, there being a depending step 
finds egress from the shell. In operation the 
9, having a circular chamber 10, into which 
stone to be crushed is introduced into the 
is placed a coiled spring 11, for a purpose 
shell at the top and between the curved arms 
13. A reciprocatory movement is given to 
hereinafter stated. The upper Section 3 Com 
shaft 21 by the revolution of shaft 24 and eccen 
prises an annular base 12, curved arms 13, 
and a circular top plate 14, having a central tric 25, this movement raising the inner end 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
462,765 
- 
ing, a vertically-reciprocating shaft held 
therein, a circular cone-shaped crusher con 
sisting of a series of segmental crushing-jaws 
pivoted within the casing, and toggle-levers 
actuated by the shaft for spreading the said 
jaws. 
5. In a machine for crushing stone, a cas 
ing, a vertically-reciprocating shaft held 
therein, a circular cone-shaped crusher con 
sisting of a series of segmental crushing-jaws 
pivoted within the casing, toggle-levers act 
uated by the shaft for spreading saidjaws, and 
springs for returning the jaws to their normal 
position. 
6. In a machine for crushing stone, a cas 
ing, a circular cone-shaped crusher pivoted 
to arms secured thereto, consisting of a series 
of segmental crushing-jaws, and buffers ar 
ranged between the jaws. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own Iaffix my signature in presence of two 
Witnesses. 
35 
45 
JOHN HENAIHAN. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM WEBSTER, 
CARROLL J. WEBSTER. 
of toggle-arms 26, and the springs 20, acting 
upon the jaws of the crusher, draw them in 
ward toward the shaft, thus causing the 
crusher to assume its smallest diameter, when 
by an inverse reciprocation of shaft 21 the 
toggle-arms assume a horizontal position, 
thereby projecting the jaws to their greatest 
diameter and causing a lateral movement of 
each jaw within the shell, with the effect of 
gradually crushing and reducing the stone to 
the preferred size. 
What I claim is 
1. In a machine for crushing stone, a cas 
ing, a circular cone-shaped crusher consisting 
of a series of segmental crushing-jaws, and 
means for operating the same. 
2. In a machine for crushing stone, a cas 
ing, a circular cone-shaped crusher consisting 
of a series of pivoted segmental crushing 
jaws, and means for operating the same. 
3. In a machine for crushing stone, a cas 
ing, a circular cone-shaped crusher consisting 
of a series of pivoted segmental crushing 
jaws having corrugated outer surfaces piv 
oted to arms secured to the casing, and means 
for separating the jaws. 
4. In a machine for crushing stone, a cas 
5 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462865.txt	(No Model.) 
G, S, HILL, 
BUTTON HOLE STITCHING MACHINE. 
5 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 462,865, 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
S 
L E. 
y S 
 
 
Zova2zoesses. 
22.22% of -ee-c634, 
Z7ezvezdao, 
62eopraze at Zee. 
 
(No Model.) 
G, S, HILL, 
BUTTON HOLE STITCHING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 462,865, 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891, 
(No Model.) 
G. S. HILL, 
BUTTON HOLE STITCHING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 462,865, 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
 
Z 
NS 
 
(No Model.) 
G, S, HILL, 
BUTTON HOLE STITCHINC MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 462,865, 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
Ze/227(esses. 
2, 22. 
Z7eeve-Yeae.7, 
4.2.7. 
 
(No Model.) 
G. S. HILL, 
BUTTON HOLE STITCHING MACHINE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 462,865, 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
33 
2222222222 
2 
 
21 12 2772 
2 
 
 
2 
- E. 
(NE EN 
2. 
% IILL 2ZZZZZ 
% 
 
2 
  
M 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE S. HILL OF BRADFORD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE REECE 
BUTTON-IIOLE MACHINE COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
BUTTON- HOLE - STTCH ING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,865, dated November 10, 1891. 
Application filed March 23, 1891, Serial No. 386,044 (No model.) 
I desire it to be understood that prior to 55 
To at whon, it Tay concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE S. HILL, of 
Bradford, county of Essex, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Button-Hole-Stitching Machines, of which the 
following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a Specification, like 
letters on the drawings representing like 
parts. 
United States Patent No. 349,359, dated 
September 21, 1886, shows and describes a 
machine for stitching button-holes, the said 
machine containing the following elements, 
viz: a work-clamp; a Stitch-forming mechan 
ism and co-operating throat-palte, the latter 
supporting the edges of the material while 
the stitch-forming mechanism acts to over 
stitch one straight side of a button-hole slit, 
the eye thereof, and along the other straight 
side of the Said slit; a button - hole - cutting 
mechanism which at the proper time, as after 
a button-hole has been finished, is put into 
position with relation to the work-clamp so 
that when the material in which a button 
hole has just been Stitched has been removed 
from the work-clamp and the material again 
reclamped the cutter may be again operated 
to cut the material for the next button-hole to 
be overstitched, the cutting mechanism being 
thereafter retracted until the Stitch-forming 
mechanism and work-clamp are again brought 
into proper working position with relation to 
the work in the work-clamp to stitch the said 
slit, and feeding mechanism to effect the feed 
ing of the frame carrying the Stitch-forming 
mechanism to thus space the stitches. 
In the patent referred to the frame carry 
ing the stitch-forming mechanism, the throat 
plate, and the cutting mechanism is made 
movable in the direction of the length of the 
button-hole, while the Work-clamp is held sta 
tionary, and it is only while the throat-plate 
is between the members of the work-clamp 
that the edge of the button - hole is being 
Stitched. 
In the patent mentioned about one-half of 
the time occupied by the movement in each 
direction of the frame carrying the stitch 
forming mechanism is consumed for the stitch 
ing operation, the other half of the time be 
ing consumed in moving the cutting mechan 
is m into and out of operative position with 
relation to the Work-clamp to cut the mate 
rial held therein and then to retire. 
my invention it has also been common to 
move the work - clamp longitudinally while 
the Straight sides of the button-hole are being 
Stitched, the frame carrying the stitch-form 
ing mechanism and throat-plate remaining 
fixed, and consequently my invention would 
not be departed from by simply moving the 
Work-clamp longitudinally or in the direction 
of the length of the button-hole slit, instead 
of moving the stitch-forming mechanism in 
the direction of the straight sides of the but 
ton-hole slit, for one plan is a well-known 
equivalent for the other; and by the term to 
change the relative positions of the work 
clamp on the one part and the stitch-forming 
mechanism and throat-plate on the other 
part I mean and intend to cover moving 
either the stitch-forming mechanism and 
throat-plate along the edges of the button 
hole slit or moving the clamp to carry the 
edges of the button-hole slit along the throat 
plate and between the members of the stitch 
forming mechanism, and in the machine here 
in to be described, with but very slight alter 
ations, which will be designated, it will be 
seen that the work-clamp may be made to 
travel longitudinally and the frame carry 
ing the Stitch-forming mechanism be left sta 
tionary. 
This present invention has for its object to 
SO improve the class of button-hole machines 
in which the button-hole is both cut and 
Worked on the same machine that the said 
machines may be made very much more pro 
ductive than heretofore. I have accom 
plished this by combining with the feeding 
and Spacing mechanism, which moves either 
the frame carrying the stitch-forming mech 
anism and throatplate or the work-clamp 
longitudinally in the direction of the length 
of the button-hole slit to space the stitches, 
actuating mechanism for the said feeding and 
Spacing mechanism and devices to automati 
cally increase the effective movement of the 
Said actuating mechanism, so that when the 
Stitch-forming mechanism is not operating to 
stitch a button-hole the feeding will be more 
O 
25 
3. 
45 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
462,865 
rapid than when the stitch-forming mechan 
ism is operating to stitch. There is a limit 
beyond which the feeding speed during stitch 
ing cannot be increased, but the limit of the 
feeding speed during the time that the cut 
ting mechanism is being put into and moved 
out of operative position with relation to the 
work-clamp may be as fast as the mechanism 
employed can perform its work. 
Figure 1, in side elevation with the lower 
frame partially broken out, shows a sufficient 
portion of a well-known button-hole-stitching 
machine with my improvements added to en 
able my invention to be understood, the said 
figure showing the cutting mechanism in po 
sition to cut the material after the latter 
shall have been put into the work-holder and 
clamped therein. Fig. 2 is a partial plan 
view with the overhanging arm of the stitch 
carrying frame and with the upper blade of 
the cutting mechanism and its carrier re 
moved. Figs. 3 and 4 show details of an arm 
which co-operates with a controller-bar to 
stop and start the stitch-forming mechanism 
to overstitch the edges of the button-hole. 
Figs. 5 and 6 are respectively an edge and top 
view of the controlling-bar detached. Figs. 
7 and 8 are respectively an edge and plan view 
of the feed-controlling block. Fig. 9 is a de 
tail chiefly to show the actuating mechanism 
for the feeding and spacing mechanism, the 
said actuating mechanism serving to increase 
the effective speed of the feeding while the 
stitch-forming mechanism is not acting to 
Fig. 10 is a section 
Stitch a button-hole slit. 
in the dotted line ac, Fig. 9. Fig. 11 is a de 
tail showing parts of the feeding mechanism; 
Fig. 12, a modification to be described; and 
Fig. 13 shows the lever 33 detached. 
The frame-work C, the stationary plate a', 
having ways upon which the said frame a 
travels, the lower frame a, to which in Figs. 
1 and 2 the plate a' is shown as pivoted by 
pivotsa, the main. shaft a having upon it 
Within the frame a suitable eccentrics and 
cams to actuate the stitch-forming mechan 
ism, including a needle-bar b', having a nee 
dle d and a gear d, engaged by a segment 
lever e, pivoted at e, the eccentric 55, the 
rock-shaft 71, having an arm 74, provided 
with a stud 75, the curb a', connected to or 
forming part of the frame a, the cutting 
bed g, attached to the curb a', the cutting 
blade G, carried by the lever G, pivoted at 
G", the ears 24, rising from the lower mem 
bers m of the work-clamp attached to the 
plate a?, the pivoted fingers 22, carrying the 
upper serrated members in 
of the work 
clamp, the L-shaped blocks 26, pivoted there 
to, the arms 29, the rock-shaft 30, to which 
they are connected, the spring-plates 28, car 
ried by the arms 29 and engaging the hooked 
lower ends of the blocks 26 when depressed 
by the cam-lever 33 to close the work-clamp, 
the throat-plate C, which Supports the edges 
of the material to be stitched while held in 
the clamp, and the feeding and spacing mech 
anism composed, essentially, of the cam-wheel. 
fi, having a rim 50, engaged by a clutch-dog 
49, the dog in its movements engaging and 
rotating the said wheel intermittingly, the 
calm 57, to close the cutting mechanism and 
the stationary stud, are and may be all sub 
stantially as in United States Patent No. 
349,359, to which reference may be had, where 
in the said parts are designated by like letters, 
and herein all the said parts will be operated 
as provided for in the said patent, with the 
exception of the dog 49, forming part of the 
feeding and spacing mechanism, which dog, 
in accordance with my invention, is operated 
by novel devices which I have added to the 
machine. 
The patent referred to had a belt-pulley 
loose on the shaft a, and co-operating with 
it was a clutch, which was controlled by the 
stud 75 of the lever 74 when the rock-shaft, 
71 was moved, so as to start in operation the 
stitch-forming mechanism at the proper time 
and to stop the operation of the stitch-form 
ing mechanism after the stitching of the sec 
ond straight side of the button-hole. 
Herein I have shown as applied to the shaft, 
a a belt-pulley and clutch such as contained 
in United States. Patent No. 367,063, dated 
July 26, 1887, which patentis an improvement 
upon the clutch - pulley contrivance repre 
sented in Patent No. 349,359. 
The rock-shaft 71 has an arm d", provided 
with a toe d', and upon this arm is loosely 
pivoted a toe e, the said toe serving, in con 
nection with the cam projection e', (see Figs. 
5 and 6 on the controller-bar e.) to lift the 
arm d' and place the toe d' upon the shelf 
e', forming part of the controller-bar, the said 
arm, when turned to place the toe upon the 
shelf, effecting the release of the clutch used, 
so that the belt-pulley is made fast to and will 
rotate the shaft a and start in operation the 
stitch-forming mechanism, the said shaft con 
tinuing to rotate and actuate the stitch-form 
ing mechanism, while the latterstitches along 
one side of and about the end and along the 
second side of the button-hole, at which time 
the toe drops from the abrupt end of the shelf, 
causing the stud 75 to come in the path of 
and effect the disengagement of the clutch 
fast with relation to the shaft a from the 
loose belt-pulley, thus stopping the stitch 
forming mechanism. 
The devices thus far described and re 
ferred to specifically by letter are not of my 
invention. 
I have applied to the frame a? a feed-regu 
lating cam-blockh, and about the eccentric 55, 
near the outer end of the shaft a, I have ap 
plied an eccentric-strap and connecting-rod 
h'. The rod h' is jointed by the pin h to 
the upper end of the lever h, provided at its 
lower end with a rod h, adapted to strike 
and move a clutch-dog 49, common to the 
said patent. To enable the lever his to re 
ciprocate the rod h for a greater or less dis 
tance and consequently move the dog 49 more 
d 
25 
35 
AO 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IC5 
IIo 
II5 
I 25 
462,865 
3. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
or less to increase or lessen, as desired, the shocks, as would be the case if the eccentric 
feed-speed, the said lever h. has been slotted 
struck a lever, as in said Patent No. 349,359, 
at h", and the slot receives a movable full 
and as the fulcrum h for the lever h is va 
crum h, mounted on an adjustable fulcrum 
ried, the throw of the rod his will be greater 
carrier h", pivoted on a hub h., extended lat 
or less, and consequently the dog 49 will have 
erally from the frame a, and through which 
a greater or less throw and move the frame C. 
hub is extended the rock-shaft, 71. The lever 
faster or slower. 
hat its rear side, as best shown in Fig. 10, 
There is a maximum speed for good work 
has an arm h, provided with a pin or projec 
while the stitch-forming mechanism is acting 
tion, which enters a guide-slot in an arm h", 
to overstitch the edges of the button-hole; but 
forming part of a bracket extended from the 
at all other times during the movement of the 
plate C", the sole purpose of the arm h" re 
frame Ct, in order to increase the productive 
ferred to and of the projection entering there 
neSS of the machine, it is desirable to move 
in being to prevent vertical movement of 
the said frame ct, it carrying the stitch-form 
the lever h, but yet not interfere with the 
ing mechanism, and also the button-hole-cut 
positive vibrations to be imparted to it by or 
ting mechanism, as rapidly as possible, in or 
through the connecting rod or link hf. This 
der that the button-hole-cutting mechanism 
being the case, the particular shape of the 
may be put into position between the open 
projection h' or the particular part of the 
jaws of the work-clamp to cut a slit in the 
mechanism which supports it is immaterial. 
work held by its jaws and to retire from such 
The eccentric 55, the connecting-rodh', lever 
position to enable the stitch-forming mechan 
ism to be again started as quickly as possible 
h, and rod h', constitute what I denominate 
the actuating mechanism for feeding or 
to stitch the button-hole slit. 
changing the relative positions of the stitch 
In accordance with my invention, as herein 
forming and cutting mechanism on the one 
represented, one of the arms 29 of the rock 
part with relation to the work-clamp on the 
shaft 30, common to the latter patent, is pro 
other part, while the adjustable fulcrum-car 
vided with a stand 69, upon which is pivoted 
at 70 a locking-bar 77, normally held up by a 
rier and cam-block h, constitute the mechan 
ism by which to automatically increase the 
Spring 72, SO as to engage a toe 73, connected 
movement of the rod h, and consequently 
to the dog 49. As the frame C, and the dog 49 
the Speed of the frame a during the time that 
complete their movement toward the left, 
viewing Figs.1 and 2, to put the cutting mech 
the said frame is being moved to put the cut 
ting mechanism into and out of operative po 
anism into cutting position with relation to 
sition with relatio: to the work-clamp; but 
the work-clamp, the toe 73 rides up over the 
inclined outer end of the locking-bar 77 until 
this invention is not intended to be limited 
to the exact devices shown for producing the 
just about as the cloth-cutting devices come 
feeding and spacing movements or to the ex 
into correct working position, when the lock 
ing-bar 77 moves upwardly and engages the 
act actuating devices, as the said devices may 
be Variously modified without departing from 
toe 73, thus locking the feed-dog and prevent 
ing its further movement, and consequently 
my invention-as, for instance, instead I may 
use any suitable devices for engaging and ro 
any further movement of the frame a until 
tating the wheeli, or for varying the fulcrum 
after the locking device is released. 
of the lever h between the time of complet 
Viewing the drawings, let it be assumed 
ing the stitching of one button-hole and the 
that a piece of material to be cut and stitched 
time of commencing the stitching of the next 
has just been laid between the upper and 
lower members of the work - clamp. If the 
button-hole. The inner end of the rod 18 
plays through a suitable guide h", connected 
cam-lever 33, common to the said patent, is 
preferably with the lower frame a, and 
now turned so that its cam part strikes one 
strikes the dog 49, fully described in the said 
of the arms 29 of the rock-shaft 30, the other 
arm in its movement will depress the locking 
Patent No. 349,359 referred to, the dog biting 
upon or engaging the cylindrical curb 50, ris 
device and disengage the toe 73, thus permit 
ting the dog 49 to be struck by the constantly 
ing from the plate or wheel i, the said wheel 
reciprocating rod h, which immediately 
in its step-by-step rotation causing the frame 
C and stitch-forming mechanism carried there 
starts the machine and causes cam 57, common 
by to travel on the usual ways of the platea', 
to Patent No. 349,359, to immediately actuate 
so that the throat-plate C may be made to 
the cutter. As shown in the drawings, the 
travel longitudinally between the spread or 
fulcrum h is nearest the pivot of the lever 
as the feeding mechanism starts or is put in 
open members of the work-clamp, while the 
Stitch-forming mechanism is Operated to 
touch with the rodh, and at this time the 
speed of the feeding movement is the faster, 
stitch along one straight side of and about the 
eye, and back along the other straight side of 
for the arm of the lever h to which the rod 
his connected is the longer. The lever h9 
a button-hole slit, all as provided for in the 
has a finger I, provided with a rollhi, which 
said Patent No. 349,359. 
meets the incline 66 of the feed-regulating 
It will be understood that the eccentric 55, 
working through the eccentric-strap l', will 
cam-block h, as the frame a is being moved to 
the right, viewing Figs. 1 and 2, and just at 
actuate it and the lever h positively, uni 
formly, and silently, or without blows or the time that the rock-shaft 71 is turned to start 
75 
95 
IOC 
IIo 
I 5 
I 25 
4. 
462,865 
the stitch-forming mechanism in operation, 
This movement imparted to the lever has 
the roll his goes up the incline 66 is such as 
to shorten the stroke of the rod h9 and de 
crease the speed of the feeding or spacing 
movement of the frame Ct. When the frame 
Ia is near the end of its stroke to the right, 
viewing Figs. 1 and 2, the stitch-forming 
mechanism, as provided for in said Patent 
No. 349,359, stitches about the eye of the but 
ton-hole, and at this time it is desirable to 
yet further shorten the stroke of the rod h' 
and the stitch, and to do this I have provided 
the block referred to with a second incline. 
against which the roll h; 
67, (see Fig. 9,) 
strikes. As the roll his leaves the upper end 
of the incline 66 the usual cam-grooves in 
the cam or wheel referred to, which is moved 
by the dog 49, as provided for in said Patent 
No. 349,359, reverse the movement of the 
frame a, carrying the stitch-forming mechan 
ism, to cause the second part or straight side 
of the button-hole to be stitched, the throat 
plate traveling along under that side of the 
button-hole and between the jaws of the 
work-clamp. As soon as the second part of 
the button-hole has been stitched the roller 
hit travels down the incline 66 and a suitable 
spring 68, acting upon the lever h", aids in 
moving the fulcrumh upwardly in the slot 
h' to thus increase the stroke of the rod h' 
to quickly increase the speed of movement 
of the feeding mechanism and frame while 
the cutting mechanism carried by the said 
frame is being moved forward into correct 
position with relation to the work-clamp to 
receive between its members the work which 
is to be next clamped between the jaws there 
of. The frame a having been moved far 
enough to place the cutting mechanism into 
position with relation to the work-clamp, the 
locking-bar 77 again engages the toe 73 and 
stops the mechanism, it remaining stopped 
while the piece of material having a button 
hole properly stitched is taken out from the 
work-clamp and the material is again put 
into the work-clamp to be again cut for a new 
button-hole to..be stitched. 
I desire it to be understood that the lock 
ing device 77 might be applied to advantage 
to the machine shown in United States Pat 
ent No. 349,359, the said locking device en 
gaging a suitable pin or projection at the 
lower end of the lever which actuates the dog 
49, to thus hold locked the lower end of the 
said lever to keep its upper end out of the 
range of movement of the rod h". By turn 
ing down the screw 80, carried by the lever 
h', the said screw acting upon the finger h', 
the fulcrum h of the lever h will be moved 
toward the lower end of the said lever, and 
consequently the number of stitches put into 
the button-hole will be increased, and vice 
WeSa. 
Having described my invention as applied 
to a machine wherein the frame carrying the 
stitch-forming mechanism and throat-plate 
- 
TS 
25 
35 
45 
55 
are moved longitudinally with relation to a 
stationary work-clamp to travel along both 
sides of a button-hole slit, I will now describe 
one form of my invention wherein the work 
clamp may be moved longitudinally while 
the frame carrying the stitch-forming mech 
anism and throat-plate remain stationary. 
In Fig.1 the plate a' is shown as united by 
suitable usual pivot - screws a to the lower 
frame a but in the plan last proposed these 
pivot-pins a would enter suitable holes in 
the curb a', and the curb may have lugs 81. 
to rest upon ears 82, projected inwardly from 
the lower frame a. In Fig. 2 I have shown 
by dotted lines the front portion of the curb 
and have added to it, the lugs 81 to reston 
the ears 82. With this change of the pivots 
a 10 the rotation of the main shaft a would 
result in causing the plate d', having the 
work - clamp, to travel longitudinally or in 
the direction of the length of the button-hole 
slit. 
75 
I claim 
1. Abutton-hole-stitching machine contain 9o 
ing the following instrumentalities, viz: a 
frame provided with a throat-plate, cloth-cut 
ting mechanism and stitch-forming mechan 
ism, a Work-clamp, feeding and Spacing mech 
anism, and actuating mechanism for the said 
feeding and spacing mechanism, and devices 
to automatically increase the effective speed 
of the feeding and spacing mechanism after 
: the stitching of the button-hole and while the 
cutting mechanism is being put into and re 
moved from position with relation to the 
work-clamp, or between the times of operat 
ing the stitch-forming mechanism for the pro 
duction of two button-holes in succession, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. Abutton-hole-stitching machine contain 
ing the following instrumentalities, viz: a 
frame provided with a throat-plate, cloth-cut 
ting mechanism and stitch-forming mechan 
ism, a Work-clamp, feeding and spacing mech 
anism, and actuating mechanism for the said 
feeding and Spacing mechanism, and devices 
to automatically increase the effective speed 
of the feeding and spacing mechanism after 
the stitching of a button-hole and while the 
cutting mechanism is being put into and re 
moved from position with relation to the 
work-clamp, or between the times of operat 
ing the stitch-forming mechanism for the pro 
duction of two button-holes in succession, 
and devices to automatically start and stop 
the Stitch-forming mechanism to stitch the 
material, the feeding and spacing mechanism 
at such time moving at a slower speed, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. A button-hole-stitching machine contain 
ing the following instrumentalities, viz: a 
feeding mechanism containing a feed-lever, 
an eccentric, a connecting-rod actuated there 
by to move the feed-lever, a cam and a dog, 
and means between the said lever and dog to 
actuate the latter, a movable fulcrum and 
fulcrum-carrier, and a cam-block to automati 
95 
IOC 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
462,865 
cally change the position of the said fulcrum- the said dog, and a device comprising the 
carrier to lengthen the effective stroke of the rock-shaft 30 and arms 29, connected with 15 
lever and consequently the speed of the ma- and actuated by the work-clamp, to release 
chine in order that the speed of the feeding the said dog as the material to be stitched is 
5 movement may be automatically increased at being confined in the work-clamp, to operate 
the desired time, Substantially as described. substantially as described. 
strumentalities, viz: a frame carrying the name to this specification in the presence of 
stitch-forming mechanism, and a cam-wheel two subscribing witnesses. 
Io for effecting the feeding motion, a bed-plate, 
a Work-clamp, cutting mechanism to cut the 
Work held in the clamp, an actuating-dog for 
the feeding mechanism, a locking device for 
In festimony whereof I have signed my 20 
4. In a Sewing-machine, the following in- 
GEORGE S. HILL. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. GREGORY, 
EDWARD F. ALLEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US462965.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 462,965, 
C. L., DARBY. 
CLOTHING PROTECTOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
x 
WITWESSES 
22. 
7..., 
IWWEWTOR, 
5-6-4-3 
7-77%rg. 
THE NORAS PETERS co, PHoro-Litho., washington, p. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 462,965, 
C. L. DARBY. 
CLOTHING PROTECTOR, 
n 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
WITWESSES 
IWWEWTOR 
"HE MORRIS PETERS co, PHOTO-LITHo, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CATHARINE I. DARBY, OF STAMFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
CLOTHING-PROTECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 462,965, dated November 10, 1891. 
Application filed February 2, 1891, Serial No. 379,870, (No model.) 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
To aid, whon, it nay concern. 
Be it known that I, CATHARINE L. DARBY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Stamford, in the county of Fairfield and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvenents in Clothing-Protectors; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale, 
My invention has for its object to provide a 
simple, inexpensive, and comfortable article 
to be worn by ladies as a protector for under 
clothing, bedclothing, &c. 
- 
It is of course well understood that at cer 
tain periods it is necessary for ladies to take 
great pains to protect their ?lothing, and that 
for this purpose napkins, absorbent-pads, and 
various other devices are worn. With the 
greatest care, however, as these devices have 
heretofore been constructed it is not infre 
quent that in moving about, and also while 
sleeping, the clothing becomes Soiled and not 
infrequently ruined by staining. 
In order to wholly avoid accidents of this 
sort, and thereby give to the wearer a feeling 
of perfect safety at all times, I have devised 
the novel protector which I will now describe, 
referring by numerals to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of my novel pro 
tector complete; Fig. 2, a section on the line 
acac in Fig.1; and Fig. 3 is a diagram on a re 
duced scale, showing the shape of the single 
piece of cloth from which the body portion of 
the protector is made. 
1 denotes the body portion, which may be 
made of any suitable Water-proof material 
as, for instance, light rubber cloth or oiled 
I preferably, however, use 
silk, or muslin. 
the grade of rubber cloth commonly known 
as stockinet rubber cloth, which is used so 
extensively in the manufacture of the better 
grade under-arm shields. The body portion 
is made large enough SO as to paSS freely over 
the hips, and in use is closed tightly, except 
at the waist, where it is secured by a suitable 
string or band 2. (See dotted lines, Fig. 1.) 
This string or band may be run into the top 
of the body portion itself, or may be held by 
loops 3, as shown in the drawings. 4 denotes 
strong elastic bands at the leg-openings, which 
in use close tightly about the thighs. 
It will of course be understood that it is a b 
solutely essential that the body portion should 
be full between the legs, and that that por 
tion should be wholly free from seams. I 
therefore cut out the pieces of material from 
which the protectors are made to substan 
tially the form illustrated in Fig. 3, the por 
tions marked C. C. being at the Waist when the 
protector is made up, and the portions marked 
b b being joined together preferably by ce 
mented seams at the side. At opposite sides 
of the piece the materialis cut a Way, as at C C, 
leaving rounded openings, which, when the 
sides are joined together, Constitute leg-open 
ings, around which the strong elastic leg-bands 
4 are firmly attached, preferably by cementing. 
The result is that in the completed protector 
there is a fullness, as at 5, between the leg 
bands. At the top of the body portion at 
front and back I place straps 6, (see dotted 
lines, Fig. 1, also shown in section in Fig. 2.) 
which are preferably provided with buckles, 
and which may or may not be made elastic. 
These straps constitute the support for the 
napkin 7. 
In practice I preferably use an endiessnap 
kin, as clearly shown in Fig. 2, which may be 
made wide enough to form two or more folds, 
as may be preferred. It will be seen that my 
novel protector provides a perfect safeguard 
against soiling the clothing and renders it 
practically impossible for accidents to hap 
pen. The napkin may be adjusted to the re 
quired tightness by means of straps 6. The 
fullness at 5 is ample to receive the napkin 
Without the slightest inconvenience to the 
wearer. It should be noticed, furthermore, 
that at each end of fullness 5 the material 
of the body portion is drawn up close to the 
trunk of the Wearer by the leg-bands, so that 
even should the napkin become saturated the 
water-proof character of the body portion and 
the special manner in which the protector is 
made and held in place insure practically ab 
Solute protection to the clothing of the wearer. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. A clothing-protector the body portion of 
which is made from a single piece of water 
95 
OO 
 
3 
, 
462,965 
proof material secured together by seams at joined together, as described, elastic bands 4 
the sides, substantially as described and about the leg-openings, which close the ma 
shown, said protector being provided with leg-terial tightly about the thighs, leaving a full- I5 
openings having elastic bands 4, which hold ness 5, straps 6 for the attachment of a nap 
the protector tightly about the thighs, leaving kin, and a band 2 by which it is held in place. 
a fullness 5 between said leg-bands and being 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
provided at front and back with straps 6 for presence of two witnesses. 
the attachment of the napkin. 
2. A clothing-protector the body portion of 
which consists of a piece of water-proof ma Witnesses: 
iterial having cut-away portions at opposite 
sides to form leg-openings, said sides being 
CHARLESS. DARBY, Jr., 
WILLIAM R. DARBY. 
IO 
v7 . 
CATIARINE L. DARBY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463065.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 463,065. 
H. R. MASON, 
TRAIN. SIGNALING APPARATUS, 
7. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
still 
IIIb 
 
6. 7 
f rt 
years 
63-644y 
WSJ 
 
it. It sel - | 
"zves 
72-72/7?, 7% 22, 
(No Model.) 
No. 463,065. 
. 
. 
H. R. MASON. 
TRAIN SIGNALING APPARATUS, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
t r 
-T - 
| 
IL-1 
mr. 
--- 
w 
%3 O 
7| |||IHF. 
i 
(ANN-Y 
i.e. 
O' 
 
-4). A sy/ 
Ng - 
 
S 
A SN NY) 
 
2 
HN2S 
 
 
1 
ly 1, , , 42-4 
 
1% l 
 
 
to 
of 
3E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
It 
, NE). 
 
Z722-e/22 
A 
24%gesses." 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 463,065. 
 
H. R. MASON. 
TRAIN SIGNALING APPARATUS, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
MaySSYYXXSS 
* 
-- 
- - 
S. 
- - - 
wa, HIH 
SSXSYYZZZZZWa 
m 
b 
(No Model.). 
No. 463,065. 
H. R. MASON, 
TRAIN SIGNALING APPARATUS, 
-7 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891, 
 
 
 
Z42%ass es 
 
E 
C E 
  
2. 
AS 2S 
2/ A. 5, 
Z22/e72%; 
727-72/72.7% so?, 
SS 9/74. 
S C 
s NN E. E. 
SS NAS SIis:syn. 
IE I 
aii % 34% a 
EE6 L. 
filler 
7% 2. Z 2 
2W2.. 
&reased taxa 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
or 
25 
% 
f 
S 
S23:2 
M 
s 
RA 
8. 
 
  
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
H. R. MASON, 
TRAIN SIGNALING APPARATUS, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 463,065, 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891, 
ZA42 e SS eS, 
6c82, Y 
72% 
/22/e7222' 
727-2/ 72.7%so77. 
a 9.737 
 
H. R. MASON, 
TRAIN SIGNALING APPARATUS, 
Sheets-Sheet 7. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 463,065. 
 
Azz/2 
z 
Zzz //, 
A 
77 
Z/z%zesses, 
66%, 3a/ 
62.4% 
iT 
7 
Z722/e72%7, 
72 - 22/7 -7%.so72 
Z3-94.2/s4% 
Ca2/y--- 
is co, Photo-it-tc., washi Ngo, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY R. MASON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
TRAIN SIGNALING APPARATUs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 463,065, dated November 10, 1891. 
Application filed September 25, 1891, Serial No. 406,840, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
TOC 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRY R. MASON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Train Signaling Apparatus, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My present invention is in the nature of an 
improvement upon train signaling apparatus 
described in Letters Patent of the United 
States No. 450,335, granted to me April 14, 
1891, and relates to improvement in signal 
ing apparatus for railway-trains, in which, 
generally stated, the signaling mechanism is 
actuated by impulses effected in the main 
train or brake-pipe by venting limited quan 
tities of air therefrom at conductor's signal 
ing-valves communicating directly with the 
brake-pipe and located upon cars of the train. 
In my said patent I have stated that when 
the handle of the engineer's brake-valve is 
turned from release' to running position 
there is danger that the signal will be actu 
ated unless special means are provided for 
obviating this difficulty. Means for prevent 
ing the signal from Sounding when the engi 
neer's brake-valve is turned from release to 
running position are shown and described in 
that patent, and the means therein described 
are found amply satisfactory for the purpose 
for which they are intended to be applied. 
I have improved upon this construction, how 
ever, and this improvement forms the sub 
ject of the present application, being adapted 
to operate in connection with a train of a 
large number of cars, as well as with a train 
of a lesser number, and in this particular it is 
found to be more efficacious under certain 
circumstances than the construction illus 
trated and described in my aforesaid Letters 
Patent. 
My present object is to provide mechanism 
which will operate automatically to prevent 
the sounding of the signal in the signaling 
system above defined when the engineer's 
brake-valve is turned from release to running 
position, irrespective of the length of the 
train or the time consumed in turning the en 
gineer's brake-valve. To accomplish my said 
object involves changes in minor details of 
the construction of the engineer's brake-valve 
shown and described in my aforesaid patent 
2 
and the addition of features, all of which are 
hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a broken dia 
grammatic view of an air-brake and signaling 
System provided with my improvement, the 
features to the right of the coupling being 
upon the locomotive and those to the left upon 
each car if a passenger-train and upOn the 
caboose if a freight-train; Fig. 2, an enlarged 
view in elevation of my improved engineer's 
brake-valve detached from its connections; 
Fig. 8, a broken partly sectional elevation of 
the same, the section being taken on line 3 of 
Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a top plan view of the valve. 
seat of the engineer's brake-valve, with parts 
broken away to expose details of the construc. 
tion which would otherwise be hidden; Fig. 5, 
atop plan yiew of the regulating-valveportion 
of the engineer's brake-valve and which turns 
upon the valve-seat shown in Fig. 4; Fig. 6, a 
bottom plan view of the said regulating 
valve; Fig. 7, a section taken on line 77 of 
Fig. 3 and viewed in the direction of the ar. 
OW's; Fig. 8, an enlarged broken central sec 
tional view of the signal-valve; Fig. 9, an en 
larged top plan view of what I designate for 
Wantofabetter term an equalizing or "press 
! re-relief Valve; Fig. 10, a section taken on 
line. 10 of Fig. 9 and viewed in the direction 
of the arrow, and Fig. 11 a central section of 
What I term the limiting-chamber for the 
equalizing-reservoir. 
A is the engineer's brake-valve; B, the main 
air-reservoir; C, the train-pipe; D, a signal 
Valve; E, a signal; F, a supplemental res 
ervoir; G, a conductor's signaling-valve; H, 
an equalizing or pressure-relief Valve; I, an 
alizing-reservoir, and K a limiting-cham 
The parts X shown in Fig. 1 are the brake 
applying and releasing mechanisms on each 
car of the train, which have no direct bear. 
ing upon the present application. 
The Valve-seat it of the engineer's brake 
valve is provided with a direct application 
and Supply ports, communicating through a 
passages' with the train-pipe C, a directex 
haust port', communicating with the outside 
air, a service-stop exhaust-port Q communi 
cating through a passage g with a pipeg, a 
port 29 leading to a passage p, and pipe p, 
communicating with the limiting-chamber K, 
9. 
w 
45 
 
468,065 
75 
90 
a port O, leading to a passage. O', which com 
municates through a pipe o' with the equal 
izing-valve H and equalizing-reservoir I, and 
a service-feed or running-position portin, In 
the face of the valve-seat t is a segmental re 
cesss or cavity n. The ports and cavity m. 
should be in the relative positions shown in 
Fig. 4. The regulating valve l is provided 
with a large passage land a small passage, 
extending through it in the relative positions 
shown. In the lower face of the regulating 
valvel are segmental recesses and cavities l, 
l, and l of the relative dimensions and in the 
relative positions shown. 
The service-feed or running-position port 
in communicates with a chamber n', (see Fig. 
7,) and the chamber n' communicates through 
a passage in with the passages', which, as 
before stated, leads to the train-pipe. In the 
sidewall of the chamber n' is a longitudinally 
extending groove n. In the chamber n' is a 
valve n, maintained normally by a spring in 
against a seat in'. When thus seated, the 
valve is beyond the end of the groove in and 
closes communication between the port in and 
passages'. The spring n should in practice 
have a resistance of about twenty pounds, 
whereby the yalve in will be maintained in 
its normally-closed position until pressure in 
the passages' is more than twenty pounds 
below pressure, entering at the port in, as 
hereinafter described, when it will be forced 
in the direction of the seat in and open com 
munication around the valve through the 
groove n. 
The function and operation of the valve in. 
are described and claimed in a pending ap 
plication for Letters Patent, filed July 9, 1891, 
and bearing Serial No. 398,928. 
The signaling-valve D is substantially the 
same as that shown and described in my 
aforesaid Letters Patent No. 450,335. It com 
prises a shell containing a piston-chamber k, 
opening at its upper end into the train-pipe 
C. At the center of the lower end of the 
chamber k is an opening k", communicating 
with a pipe k, which extends to the signal E. 
Communicating with the lower end of the 
chamber k is a pipe F, which leads to the 
supplemental reservoir F, and the pipe g, 
which, as before stated, leads to the service 
stop port q in the engineer's brake-valve and 
communicates near the signal-valve D with 
the pipe F. Extending from the lower part 
of the chamber k to the train-pipe C is a 
passagek. Interposed in the passage hand 
seating in the direction of the train-pipe is a 
check-valve le", which is held normally to its 
seat by a spring lic of slight resistance. 
Through the valve k is a small constantly 
open passage k". In the chamber k is a pis 
ton or movable diaphragm le", which at its 
circumference fits closely and slides against 
the inner wall of the chamber. The piston 
Act has a stem k, which moves in a guide k' 
and seats normally at its end over the outlet 
le' to effectively close the latter. Between 
the normal position of the piston k and top 
of the chamber k is a groove c0 in the cham 
ber-wall. Centrally above the piston k and 
normally out of contact therewith is a verti 
cally-movable graduating-piston lic, which is 
housed in the valve-shell and held normally 
at the lowest limits of its play by a graduat 
ing-spring k. The groove k is of a length 
in excess of the thickness of the piston lic. 
The train-pipe pressure-gage is attached to 
the valve at V and the main-reservoir press 
ure-gage at W. 
The equalizing or pressure-relief valve H 
comprises a shell affording a chamber i and 
communicating at its top with the pipe O, 
which, as before stated, extends to the engi 
neer's brake-valve and terminates in the pas 
Sage O' leading to the port O. At the center 
of its lower end the valve-chamber i is pro 
vided with an outlet-port i' to the outside 
air. In the lower part of the chamber i is 
an opening , at which the valve communi 
cates through a pipe i* with the pipeg. 
In 
the upper part of the chamber i is a piston 
or movable abutment i, which fits at its cir 
cumference and moves against the inner wall 
of the shell. The piston is provided with 
a stem i, which moves in a guide and seats 9 
at its lower end over the outlet-opening i' and 
maintains the said opening normally closed. 
The equalizing-reservoir I is upon the end 
of the pipe o and has no other inlet or out 
let. The limiting-chamber K is upon the end 
of the pipe p' and has no other outlet or in 
let. It may be provided in its lower end with 
a removable and replaceable screw-plug K 
for draining it of accumulated moisture when 
desired. 
In the shell of the engineer's brake-valve 
is a valve-chamber o', which communicates 
through a passage O with the chamber n' in 
front of the valve n-that is to say, on the 
same side of the latter as the port in, The 
chamber o' is provided also with an opening 
to the passage O'. In the chamber o' is a 
pressure-reducing valveo, which seats in the 
direction of the passage of and is held nor 
mally closed or seated by a spring. O. 
The regulating-valve l is upon a stem h, 
which extends through the top of the casing 
of the engineer's brake-valve and is provided 
with a handle h. Upon the handle h' is a 
spring-indicator catch h, which moves around 
and in contact with the upper rim of the shell 
of the engineer's brake-valve. Formed upon 
the said rim are stopsy, y', y, y, and y, with 
which the indicator his caused to register 
and indicate the position of the regulating 
valve upon its seat t. When the spring his 
turned to the stop ly, the valve is at release 
position, wherein air from the main reservoir 
B passes from the pipe B through the pas 
Sage g to the top of the regulating-valve, 
thence down through the opening l to the 
groove m, and thence through the groovel to 
the port S and direct to the train-pipe. When 
in this position the groovel is blanked, the 
o 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
65 
Od 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
463,065. 
75 
95 
OO 
d 
II5 
I25 
O 
35 
40 
45 
groovel registers with the ports rip, the pas 
sage registers with the port O, and the port 
in is blanked. Thus air will also pass down 
through the passage to the passage o', and 
thence to the equalizing-valve Hand reservoir 
I. The air passing to the train-pipe C fills that 
pipe and all reservoirs upon cars connected 
there with up to about seventy pounds' press 
ure. The reservoir F will be filled with sub 
stantially the same pressure, which will pass 
to it from the train-pipe through the channel 
k' (opening the check-valve k") and pipe F. 
When the pressure is established, the same 
force substantially will be exerted against 
opposite sides of the diaphragm lic and the 
check-valve k will close, leaving only the 
small open passage to equalize slight vari 
ations of pressure on opposite sides of the dia 
phragm k, which may be due to ordinary 
leakage in the system. The diaphragm lic in 
the valve D will thus be maintained in the 
position shown in Fig. 8, with its stem k clos 
ing the outletle' to the signal. As the press 
ure passes into the pipe F it also fills the 
pipe q, and through the latter the pipe i, 
which extends to the equalizing-valve Hat the 
under side of the piston i. The air passing 
through the opening in the regulating-valve 
and port o fills the valve H over the piston 
i", and the reservoir Ialso, with substantially 
seventy pounds pressure. Thus the force ex 
erted against opposite sides of the piston i* 
by the air in the pipes o and , respectively, 
will be substantially equal and cause the stem 
i to maintain the outlet - opening i? closed. 
The groove l in the regulating-valve l, regis 
tering with the ports p r, as described, opens 
the limiting - chamber K to the outside air, 
whereby it is vented of its pressure. 
It will be understood that the port q being 
blanked will prevent the escape of air from 
the pipe. q through the engineer's brake 
valve, and the port n being blanked no press 
ure will enter the chamber n' through that 
channel. The check-valve oin the chamber 
o' will prevent pressure passing from the pas 
sage o' to the passage O' and chamber n', and 
the valve in will be maintained closed by its 
spring in and the pressure against it of air 
from the passages' through n. 
When the indicator his turned to the stop 
y', the engineer's brake valve is at running 
position. When the valve has reached this 
position, the passage l' of the regulating 
valve is blanked and the supply of air to the 
ports cut off. Although the groove l' reg 
isters with the exhaust-port r, the Said port 
and groove are virtually blanked, and the 
port q is also blanked. The opening l of the 
regulating-valve registers with the port in, and 
the chamber n' in front of the valve in will 
be charged with the main-reservoir pressure, 
and at the same time the passage of will be 
charged with the same pressure. 
In practice the spring in, governing the 
valven", and the spring o', governing the 
valveo, will each be capable of withstanding 
about twenty pounds of pressure exerted 
against the respective valves in the direction 
to open them. The resistance of the spring 
in permits the main-reservoir pressure to be 
raised by the pump to ninety pounds or 
twenty pounds above the pressure established 
in the train-pipe and its connections. This 
is desirable, as it permits an excessive press 
ure to be stored in the main reservoir for use 
in releasing brakes when the engineer's valve 
is turned to the release position before de 
scribed. The train-pipe pressure of seventy 
pounds and spring-pressure of twenty pounds 
will cause the valve n" to be normally balanced 
against the pressure from the main reservoir. 
In case of leakage in the train-pipe, which 
will reduce its pressure below seventy pounds, 
the superior pressure from the main reser 
voir will force the valve in backward to the 
groove in, when the passage of pressure 
through that groove around the said valve 
will quickly re-establish the pressure in the 
train-pipe. In case of a sudden great reduc 
tion of pressure, which might be caused by 
breakage in the system or the parting of a 
coupling between cars, the valve in will be 
forced to its seat n by the reservoir-pressure, 
and the latter thus prevented from escaping 
to exhaust itself. 
AS before stated, it is usual in practice to 
maintain about seventy pounds pressure 
throughout the train-pipe, and the pressure 
will be established by turning the engineer's 
Valve to release position. It is obvious, how 
ever, that the air which may flow to the train 
pipe from the main reservoir will be much 
greater in quantity in long trains than in short 
trains. Consequently the initial pressure es 
tablished in long trains would be less than 
that in short trains, and if the valve is turned 
from release to running position before the 
pump has raised the main-reservoir pressure 
to ninety pounds, the additional pressure to 
raise the train-pipe to seventy pounds will 
have to flow through the valve n". 
The same 
reasons which may prevent the train-pipe 
pressure from being raised to the established 
limit While the valve is in release position 
would also prevent the pressure in the equal 
izing-reservoir from being raised to that limit. 
Therefore when pressure in the train-pipe is 
being raised through the valve n' it will also 
have to be raised in substantially the same 
Way in the equalizing-reservoir to equalize 
the pressures on opposite sides of the dia 
phragm in the valve H. If this is not done, 
the pressure from the train-pipe against the 
under side of the piston i will be greater 
than the pressure from the equalizing-reser 
voir above the said piston, and the latter will 
be raised and Vent pressure from the train 
pipe as fast as it is raised above that in the 
equalizing-reservoir. To prevent this diffi 
culty from ever arising I provide the channel 
o' and reducing-valve o', above described, 
55 
 
4. 
m 
463,065 
O 
stated before the closing of the outlet i' can 
which will permit the same pressure to flow 
from the port in to the equalizing-reservoir as 
be effected. Consequently no matter hoW 
short or long the train is the pressure must 
can flow from the said port to the train-pipe. 
As stated at the beginning of this specifi 
be reduced in the manner Stated and the out 
let to the signal maintained closed. When 
cation, when the engineer's brake-valve is 
turned from release position to running posi 
the indicator is turned to the stop f, the en 
gineer's brake-valve is on lap. In this po 
tion there is danger, particularly in long 
trains, that the signal will be sounded if this 
sition all the ports are blanked, except the 
ports O p, which remain in communication 
operation is effected too quickly. The rea 
through the groove l. This is the position 
sons for this danger are that when the valve is 
to which the brake-valve is usually brought 
turned from release position the flow of press 
ure to the train-pipe is suddenly cut off, and 
before a service or an emergency stop. 
When the indicator his turned to the stop 
what may, for the want of a better reason, be 
gy, the engineer's brake-valve is at service 
called the inertia' of the air that has passed in 
stop. When in this position the groovel in 
to the train-pipe, will cause it momentarily to 
the regulating-valve registers with the ex 
decrease in pressure at the forward end of the 
haust-port r and service-stop inlet-port g. 
train. This creates a momentary impulse of 
reduction of pressure over the diaphragm lic 
All the other ports are blanked, except O and 
in the signal-valve B, causing the sudden su 
n, which are brought into communication by 
the groove li. When the engineer's brake 
perior pressure from the supplemental reser 
valve is in this position, pressure will retro 
voir F to raise said diaphragm (before the 
gress from the train-pipe through the pas 
pressures can be equalized through the Small 
sage lc of the signal-valve D and pipeg and 
open passage lic) and open the outlet ' to 
escape at the exhaust-port r. At the same 
sound the signal. 
time the pressure in the supplemental reser 
In my present construction, as the valve is 
voir F will vent through the pipe of in the 
turned from release to running position, the 
groove li, after leaving the exhaust-port , 
same manner. After the train-pipe pressure 
causes the ports O and p to be brought imme 
has been reduced twenty pounds and the 
pressure on the under side of the piston of 
diately into communication and remain so 
until the valve is brought to running posi 
the valve H to the same extent the pressure 
in the equalizing - reservoir will retrogress 
tion and afterward. Thus with the initial 
turning of the regulating-valve pressure from 
through the pipe O, passage O', port O, groove 
the equalizing-chamber I will flow through the 
l, and port in to the chamber n', and by ex 
ports O p and groove to the limiting-chamber 
erting itself against the valve n open the 
latter and escape through the groove into the 
K. In practice the relative sizes of the reser 
train-pipe. This will relieve the pressure on 
voir I and chamber K may be such as to cause 
the upper side of the piston and prevent 
the flow from the former to fill the latter to 
reduce the pressure in the reservoir-say five 
more than a difference of twenty pounds on 
pounds. This causes the superior pressure 
oppositesides thereof from being established. 
then suddenly exerted against the under side 
This is desirable for the reason that a too 
of the piston in the equalizing-valve H to 
great difference of pressure on opposite sides 
of the piston i* is apt to effect it injuriously. 
raise the said piston and permit air to pass 
from the pipe 
to the outside air until the 
When the indicator his turned to the stop 
ly, the engineer's brake-valve is at emergency 
pressure has become a trifle less on the under 
stop. In this position the ports S and rare 
side of the said piston than that above it, 
brought into communication by the groovel, 
- when the piston will be forced down again 
to close the outlet . The venting of press 
all other ports being closed. This produces 
ure from the pipe produces a corresponding 
a rapid venting of the train-pipe and its con 
venting of the pipes q F and reservoir F, 
nections, and effects an immediate and forci 
which are behind the signal-valve D, and 
ble application of brakes. While in the emer 
this will cause the train-pipe pressure C to 
gency-stop the pressure is not relieved from 
be higher than that in the reservoir F and 
the top of the piston in the valve H, such a 
exert itself against the diaphragmic to main 
stop Occurs SO rarely that it can make but 
tain the outlet c' to the signal closed. The 
little difference. It is the frequent strains 
ressures on opposite sides of the diaphragm 
upon the said piston which would be effected 
k", however, will be quickly brought to an 
in Service-stops that it is most desirable to 
guard against. 
equilibrium by the flow of pressure from the 
train-pipe through the passage. When the 
The drawings and foregoing description 
pressure in the train-pipe and reservoir F 
present the construction I prefer to employ. 
have reduced to a degree slightly below that 
This construction, however, is to a large ex 
above the piston 
in the valve H, the latter 
tent arbitrary, and is subject to modifications 
which would not depart from the spirit of my 
will be closed, as before described, and the 
flow of pressure from the train-pipe and res 
invention. . 
ervoir F shut off. It will be seen that the 
The valves shown and described are con 
pressure substantially throughout the entire structed with a view to economy, compact. 
train-pipe C must be reduced to the extent iness, and durability; but valves of any other 
3o 
35 
45 
55 O 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
IOS 
C 
II5 
I 25 
463,065 
5 
O 
25 
35 
forms which in operation would be the sub 
stantial equivalents of those shown may ob 
viously be employed in their stead. 
My invention involves a new method for 
preventing the sounding of the signal when 
the engineer's valve is turned from release 
position and the supply of air to the train 
pipe is checked, and this method consists in 
venting from the train-pipe and from behind 
the signal-valve a controlled or predeter 
mined extent of pressure. The amount of 
air vented to effect this result will vary in 
trains of different lengths. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a signal system for railway-trains, the 
combination, with the train-pipe and the en 
gineer's brake-valve and signal-valve com 
municating there with, of pressure - relief 
mechanism governed by the engineer's brake 
valve and communicating with the signal 
valve and operated by the said brake-valve 
in its movement from the release position to 
vent air from behind the signal-valve to an 
extent governed by the length of the train 
pipe, substantially as described. 
2. In a combined air-brake and a signal 
ing system for railway-trains, the combina 
tion, with the train-pipe and signal-valve, of an 
engineer's brake-valve communicating with 
said pipe and signal-valve and operating when 
turned from release to running position to 
vent pressure from behind the signal-valve 
to a predetermined extent without reference 
to the time consumed in the said turning of 
the engineer's brake-valve, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a signaling system for railway-trains, 
the combination, with the train-pipe and the 
engineer's brake-valve and signal-valve com 
municating therewith, of a pressure-relief 
valve having a chamber provided with an ex 
haust-opening, an opening communicating 
with the engineer's brake-valve and an open 
ing communicating with the signal-valve and 
train-pipe, and a movable abutment in said 
chamber between the opening to the engineer's 
brake-valve and the other said openings and 
45 
 
55 
75 
normally closing the said exhaust- opening, 
the said engineer's brake - valve operating 
when at release position to feed the pressure 
relief valve and when moved from said po 
sition to vent pressure from the pressure-re 
lief valve to move said abutment, and thus 
cause a corresponding venting of the signal 
valve and train-pipe, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. In an air-brake and signaling system for 
railway-trains, the combination, with the en 
gineer's brake-valve, train-pipe, and signal 
valve, of a reservoir I, communicating with 
the engineer's valve to be charged with press 
ure by said valve when it is turned to release 
position, a limiting-chamber K, communicat 
ing with the engineer's valve to be thrown 
into communication by said valve with the 
reservoir I to reduce the pressure in said res 
ervoir when the said valve is turned from 
release position and to be cut off from the 
reservoir I and vented of pressure when the 
said valve is turned to release position, and 
a pressure-relief valve communicating with 
the reservoir I and with the signal-valve and 
train-pipe and operating when the pressure 
in the reservoir I is reduced, as described, to 
vent pressure from the signal-valve and train 
pipe, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
5. In an air-brake and signal system for 
railway-trains, the combination, with the main 
reservoir, engineer's brake-valve, and reser 
voir I, of a passage in the engineer's brake 
valve between the main reservoir and reser 
voir I opened by turning said valve to release 
position and closed by turning said valve 
from release position, a second passage in 
the engineer's brake-valve between the main 
reservoir and reservoir I opened when the 
said valve is turned to running position, and 
a pressure-reducing valve in said second pas 
sage, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth, 
HARRY R. MASON. 
In presence of 
J. N. HANSON, 
M. J. FROST, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463165.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 463,165, 
 
R. F. PAINTER 
CANOPY ROID CLAMP, 
Patented Now, 17, 1891, 
W 
W 
A 
i 
v 
\, V 
', 
\ 
\, 
- 
- 
w 
y 
/ 
- 
A. Y - 
- 1 
y v vy 
f2 as -- 
| S2 - 
SS - 
v-SS Ss 2 
--- 
23 
% e 
S 
R MS s^4 
SS 
W 
- 
- 
- 
S. 
It's 
HSS 
W 
e 
d 
o gear A. AA/wrea, 
azarveys 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT F. PAINTER, OF GREEN FIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WARNER MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CANOPY-ROD CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 463,165, lated November 17, 1891. 
Application filed June 3, 1891, Serial No, 394,979, (No model.) 
55 
Io and combinations hereinafter set forth. 
To all twhom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT F. PAINTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Green 
field, in the county of Franklin and State of 
5 Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Canopy-Rod Clamps, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to canopy-rod holders; 
and it consists in various features, details, 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my improved holder or clamp; Fig. 
2, a perspective view of the parts separated; 
IFig. 3, a vertical sectional view on the line a 
15 ac of Fig. 4; and Fig. 4 a vertical transverse 
sectional view on the line y 21, Fig. 3. 
A represents the supporting bracket or 
frame adapted to be secured to the back of 
the carriage, and which in this instance is 
2O provided at its outer end with a cross-bar a, 
having a rounded face, and with pintles b b, 
which extend laterally from the ends or from 
continuations of the cross-bar C. Pivoted to 
the pintles of the bracket is a yoke or bail B, 
25 made preferably of malleable cast-iron, so 
that the arms c. c may be bent down to en 
gage with the pintles b b. Before this is done, 
however, the two-part swivel-block C must be 
placed in position. This block is composed 
3O of two parts D and E, the front face of the 
latter being made concave, so as to conform 
to the bearing-surface of the cross-bara, while 
on its rear face is formed a circular rim or 
projection d, which takes into a correspond 
35 ing opening e in the front face of part D. 
Part D is further provided with the vertical 
opening f, the side walls of which preferably 
incline toward each other, and through this 
opening the canopy - lod G passes and is 
4o clamped. In the rear face of block Disformed 
an opening g, which opening is adapted to re 
ceive a hub or sleeve h, which projects for 
wardly from the inner face of yoke B. This 
hub is threaded internally to receive a set 
45 screw F, the inner end of which projects into 
the block D, in line with the opening f, to 
bear against the rod G, seated in Said opening. 
In assembling the parts, swivel-block C is 
placed within the yoke B, the hub h. entering 
opening g, and the parts are then placed so 
that the concave face of the swivel-block C 
rests upon the cross-bar ct, when the arms c C 
of the yoke are bent down, so as to engage 
the pintles bb, thus securely holding the parts 
together in their proper relative positions, 
but leaving the yoke with the swivel-block 
free to swing vertically on the pintles bb, and 
the swivel-block D free to oscillate laterally 
with reference to the yoke. 
As seen in Figs. 3 and 4, great latitude of 
movement is possible on account of the swing 
ing of the whole clamp and the lateral move 
ment of swivel-block, and it will also be no 
ticed that even though the set-screw be with 
drawn the swivel-block will remain in its 
position and not become detached and lost. 
Furthermore, by my construction a very slight 
movement of the set-screw will enable the 
rod to be changed in its position, while cramp 
ing of the different parts is avoided. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a canopy-rod holder, the combination 
of a frame or bracket, a yoke pivoted thereto, 
a swivel-block secured within said yoke and 
adapted to receive the rod, and means for 
clamping the rod and block, all substantially 
as shown and described. 
2. In a canopy-rod holder, the combination 
of a frame or bracket, a yoke pivoted thereto, 
a screw carried by said yoke, and a two-part 
swivel-block adapted to receive the rod, all 
substantially as described. 
3. In combination with a bracket having a 
cross-bar, a bail pivoted to the bracket, a two 
part block mounted in the bail and bearing 
at opposite ends against the bail and cross 
bar, and a set-screw carried by the bail and 
adapted, substantially as described and shown, 
to clamp the rod in the block and the latter 
against the cross-bar. 
4. In combination with a bracket having a 
cross-bar, a bail pivoted to the bracket, a two 
part block mounted in the bail, the front por 
tion of the block adapted to bear against the 
cross-bar and the real portion swiveled and 
adapted to receive the l'od, and a set-screw 
carried by the bail and adapted to clamp the 
75 
So 
95 
463,165 
bail and adapted to fit the opening g, all sub- Io 
stantially as shown and described. 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand 
ROBERT F. PAINTER. 
- 
Witnesses: 
J. E. GRANT, 
L. H. WILCOX. 
rod and block in position, substantially as 
shown and described. 
5. In combination with bracket A, having 
cross-bar a and pintles b b, bail B, pivoted to 
the bracket and carrying set-screw F, block 
C, composed of two parts DE, the latter of 
which has a concave front face and a rim d 
on its face, part D being provided with open 
ings e,f, and g, and a hub h, formed on the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463265.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 463,265. 
A. S. ADLER, 
STREET LETTER BOX, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1891. 
NSSg 
15 
SS 
2 
% 
4. 2 2 2 2 2. 2 2 
2 Y 2 
rStaaaaaaaaaaSassssssssa S4 
x 
as a 
 
SassassSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSassssssssssssssssss Sassasa Sassass 
m/zVASSAs 
e/6. MC , 2-2-3 
\ 
S 
AWVA2/702 
-7%. 57&zer, 
21zzopaeus 
the Norris PETERs co, PHorg-THo, washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM S. ADLER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
STREET LETTER BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 463,265, dated November 17, 1891. 
Application filed June 2, 1891, Serial No. 394,814, (No model.). 
r 
O 
25 
75 
When it is desired to deposit a letter, the 6o 
To all whom it inally concern: 
against a lug or stop c on the inside of the box 
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM. S. ADLER, a 
and cuts off communication with the news 
citizen of the United States, residing at Balti 
paper-compartment. This arrangement pre- 55 
more city and State of Maryland, have in 
cludes the possibility of any of the mail being 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
abstracted, and also prevents dust and rain 
in Letter-Boxes, as set forth in the accompa 
from entering the compartments and injuring 
nying drawings, forming part of this specifi 
the contents of the same. 
cation, in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of a letter-box 
head is pushed back, so as to uncover the top 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a similar 
of the letter - compartment; but while this 
view showing the box open to receive the mail. 
movement is taking place the lower curved 
My invention relates to devices adapted for 
end of the pivoted plate C is moving toward 
the reception of individual or general mail; 
the front, and when the letter-entrance is open 65 
and it consists of the constructions and combi 
to receive the letter the lower portion of the 
nations of devices, which I shall hereinafter 
plate has entered a recess d, formed in the 
fully describe and claim. 
front of the box, thereby cutting off commu 
To enable others skilled in the art to which 
nication with the lower part of the box and 
my invention appertains to make and use the 
forming a supplemental chamber, into which 
Same, I will now describe its construction and 
the letter drops and is retained until the head 
indicate the manner in which the same is car 
is allowed to drop forward again, when the 
ried out. 
lower portion of the plate moves backward 
In the said drawings, A represents a recep 
and permits the deposited mail to drop into 
tacle, which may include any, well-known form 
the box proper. 
of street letter-box or any box or receptacle 
When newspapers or packages are to be de 
adapted for house or office mail, the said box 
posited, the head is forced back and the arti 
being of any appropriate design and having 
cle passed through the opening in the head 
its inside divided by a vertical partition into 
and drops out of the rear end into the rear 
two separate compartments A and B, the for 
compartment. 
mer of which may be designated the letter 
from the weighted head, the latter drops for 
compartment and the latter the compart 
ward by its own gravity and automatically 
ment for newspapers and small packages of 
closes the entrance to both front and rear com 
merchandise. 
partments. This arrangement of parts obvi 
Extending between the ends of the box is a 
lates the liability of the mail being stolen and 85 
. plate C, curved, preferably, throughout its 
makes a cheap, Substantial, and Secure box, 
length and being pivotally hung at a point 
35 
either for street-corner purposes or for resi 
near its center to the box and having at its 
dences and offices. 
upper end a curved hollow head E, extending 
If desired, the letter and newspaper com 
front and rear of the plate and consisting of 
partments may have separate doors to facili 
top and bottom walls C, and b, joined together 
tate the removal of the contents, or one door 
at their ends and separated from each other a 
may be used for both compartments, and in 
Sufficient distance to provide a wide opening 
the sides of the box may be placed glass-cov 
for the introduction of newspapers and small 
ered inspection-openings, through which it 
packages, the said lower wall b being pro 
may be observed if any mailis within the box. 95 
longed or extended to form a cut-off,' as I 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
shall presently describe. 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
The head D is of sufficient weight to nor 
Patent, is 
mally hold the front of the head projected 
1. In a letter-box having a division-plate 
through an opening E in the upper end of the 
forming separate compartments, a plate piv 
box, so as to close communication with the 
otally held at its center within the box and 
front or letter compartment of the box, while 
having a weighted head normally projected 
at the same time the prolongation or exten 
through an opening in the upper portion of 
Sion of the lower Wall of the head strikes the box and adapted to be moved back to per 
When the hand is removed 8o 
AO 
45 
90 
LOO 
2 
463,265 
mit the introduction of the mail-matter, said 
plate having its lower end curved forward and 
adapted to 'cut off communication with the 
compartment in the forward lower part of the 
5 box when the head is pushed back, substan 
tially as herein described. 
2. In a letter-box having a centrally-dis 
posed vertical plate forming separate front 
and rear compartments, a curved plate pivot 
ally hung within the box, having a head nor 
mally projected through an opening in the 
upper portion of the box, said head having an 
opening through it for the passage of mail to 
the rear receptacle and having a rear exten 
Io 
I5 
sion, which serves as a cut-off to the rear com 
partment when the head is projected, substan 
tially as herein described. 
3. In a letter-box having a vertically-dis 
posed plate forming front and rear compart 
ments, a centrally-pivoted curved plate within 
said box, having a head at its upper end ex 
tending in front and rear of the plate, so as to 
cut off communication with both compart 
ments when the head is in its normal position. 
ABRAHAM S. ADLER. 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL S. BOGGs, 
GEORGE D. DEAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463365.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 463,365, 
C. E. HOUGHT ON. 
NAIL MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 17, 1891. 
 
a 2C 
%-- 
A/AWZO? 
44.26%-44. 
42. 4, 164: 
(No Model.) 
w 
No. 463,365, 
 
C E HOUGHT ON, 
NAIL MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
. 
Patented Nov. 17, 1891, 
2 edit 
rzyzsz. 
% Gior- 
zf %-y . 4. 4. ?c 
Awawzo? 
64- 6 4 
212to??Zep 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CIIARLES E. HOUGHTON, OF NORTHUMBERLAND, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR 
OF ONE-HAILE TO IORACE RU FUS JOHNSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
NAL MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 463,365, dated November 17, 1891. 
Application filed January 24, 1891, Renewed October 23, 1891, Serial No,409,572, (No model.) 
To ?till, Tuhon, it In?tity conce71. 
Be it known that I, CHARLESE. HOUGHTON, 
it citizen of the United States, residing at 
Northumberland, in the county of Northum 
berland and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented a new and useful Nail-Machine, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
machines for cutting nails from a rolled nail 
plate, the object being to provide a machine 
of this character with point-cutting dies and 
Operating mechanism therefor, whereby a 
clean-cut point is formed upon the nail. 
Heretofore it has been attempted to form a 
point upon nails cut from a plate by the use 
of dies acting by direct cutting contact or 
pressure; but great difficulty has been ex 
perienced owing to the strain or wear upon 
the edges of the dies and the obstruction to 
the cutting or forming process caused by the 
Superfluous metal removed from the mail to 
form the point. 
My invention consists in the mechanism 
hereinafter fully described, by means of which 
I impart a shearing or sliding movement to 
the point-cutting dies, thus avoiding undue 
strain upon the die-edges and expelling the 
superfluous metal from the forming-dies. 
Myimprovements are adapted to be applied 
to the ordinary high-post nail-machine in 
common use, and I have illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings only Such parts of a 
nail-machine as are essential to a clear under 
standing of my invention. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
point-cutting dies in proper relation with the 
gripping-dies and of a part of the mechan 
ism for operating the point-cutting dies. Fig. 
2 is a side view of a bracket-arm for support 
ing the sliding block carrying the point-cut 
ting die-rods. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are detail 
views of the sliding block and its attachments. 
Fig. 6 illustrates in detail one of the rod-re 
tracting Springs. Fig. 7 is a plan view of a 
part of a nail-machine bed with my improve 
ments applied thereto. Fig. S is a side eleva 
tion of a nail-machine with my improvements 
added thereto. Fig. 9 is a view showing the 
faces of the point-cutting dies, and Fig. 10 
shows the beveled ends of the die-bearing 
pieces. 
1 indicates the bed of the machine, upon 
which is located the bed-gripping die 2, formed 
with a longitudinal recess 3 in its front side, 
said recess opening into the face or gripping 55 
end of the die and serving as a Seat for a 
bearing-piece 4, the front end 5 of which is 
beveled to correspond to the beveled side 6 of . 
the point-cutting die 7. This bearing-piece, 
as shown, does not extend out to the face of 6o 
the gripping-die 2, thus leaving a space within 
which the point-cutting die 7 has bearing. 
8 indicates the moving die, recessed at its 
side to receive an adjustable bearing-piece 9, 
which latter, as in the case of the piece 4, is 65 
beveled at its ends and extends only a part of 
the length of the die to leave a space 10 for 
the other point-cutting die II. The piece 9 
may be adjusted by the set-screw 12. 
1314 are the rod portions or stems of the 
point-cutting dies, the forward ends of which 
(7 and 11) constitute the die-faces proper. 
These die-rods are counterparts, and their 
ends are supported on a sliding block or clamp 
17, the construction of which will now be de- 75 
scribed. 
18 indicates the body of the sliding clamp 
ing-block, formed on its under face with a 
dovetail receSS or groove to take a correspond 
ing tongue On a Supporting-bracket 19, ad- 8o 
justably secured upon an arm 20, projecting 
from the bed of the machine. 
21 and 22 are oppositely - arranged lugs 
formed on the sliding block 18. Midway of 
these lugs is an upwardly-projecting bearing- 85 
lug 23. These lugs, thus arranged, form. 
spaces. 24, within which the rods 13 and 14 
rest, as clearly shown in Fig. 1. The lugs 
21 and 22 have threaded openings to receive 
bolts 25 for securing a spanning keeper, or go 
clamp 26, which clamps the rods in place. 
One side of the keeper 26 is formed with a 
slot ac, through which one of the securing-bolts 
passes. Projecting from one side of the slid 
ing block 18 is an eye 27, within which is se 
cured an operating push-rod 28, the free end 
of which is adapted to be struck by the head 
ing-lever 29 to force the block 18 backward. 
30 is a Spring Secured at one end to the 
bracket 19 and bearing at its free end against Ioo 
the block 18 to return the latter and the die 
| rods to their forward or normal positions. At 
95 
w 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
463,365 
each side of the front end of the block IS is 
secured a curved spring 31, the free ends of 
which are bent or turned to engage the rods 
13 14, as shown, and force said rods apart 
after their contact to cut the point. 
An important advantage in my improve 
ment consists in the fact that the die-rods are 
readily removable from the machine. To re 
move them it is only necessary to loosen one 
of the nuts of the keeper 26 and turn said 
keeper to one side to clear the rods, when the 
latter may be lifted out of their seats in the 
gripping-dies. 
To compensate for wear upon the rods 13. 
14, I make the bracket 19 adjustable upon 
its arm 20. By adjusting said bracket as re 
quired the rods may be moved toward the 
gripping-dies as often as may be necessary. 
The operation of the parts thus described 
is as follows: It will be understood that the 
usual knives and gage are employed, and the 
plate is fed to the machine by any preferred 
feeder. As the moving die 8 contacts with the 
bed-die to grip the nail, the point-cutting die 
faces are brought together, and the heading 
lever strikes the push-rod 28, thus sliding the 
block 18 backward to effect a shearing cut on 
the nail-point. This shearing action not only 
results in the formation of a clear-cut point, 
but discharges the Superfluous metal rear 
Ward between the die-rods. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies, of point-cutting die-rods 
formed with dies in their inner longitudinal 
faces and mechanism for imparting a sliding 
movement thereto to effect a shearing action, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies, of point-cutting dies con 
sisting of reciprocating rods formed in their 
inner longitudinal faces with integral dies, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies and with the heading-lever, 
of point-cutting die-rods formed with dies in 
their inner longitudinal faces and operated 
from said heading-lever, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies, recessed as described, of a 
pair of reciprocating rods the forward ends 
of which are formed with point-cutting dies 
in their inner longitudinal faces and rest with 
in the ends of the recesses of the gripping 
dies, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies, of a pair of reciprocating 
rods, the forward ends of which constitute 
point-cutting dies, a sliding block supporting 
said rods, an operating-rod attached to said 
block, and a lever adapted to contact with 
the operating-rod and force the longitudinal 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
faces of said point-cutting rods together, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies, of a pair of reciprocating 
rods formed with dies in their inner longi 
tudinal faces, mechanism for throwing said 
dies backward, and a spring for returning the 
dies to their forward position, substantially as 
Set forth. 
7. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies and point-cutting dies, of a 
sliding block upon which the point-cutting 
dies are supported, means for sliding said 
block backward, springs for forcing said rods 
apart, and a spring for returning the block 
and dies, substantially as set forth. 
8. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies recessed to receive bearing 
pieces, of the point-cutting die-rods the for 
ward ends of which rest against said bearing 
pieces, the sliding block upon which said rods 
are removably secured, and mechanism for 
reciprocating the block and rods, substan 
tially as set forth. 
9. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
gripping-dies, of a pair of point-cutting die 
rods formed with dies in their inner longi 
tudinal faces and mechanism for moving said 
rods both laterally and longitudinally, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
10. Point-cutting dies for nail-machines, 
consisting of rods formed with dies in their 
inner longitudinal faces, in combination with 
means for reciprocating said rods and de 
vices for securing said rods removably upon 
the machine, substantially as set forth. 
11. The combination, in a nail-machine, of 
the gripping-dies, point-cutting die-rods, and 
sliding block, of the rod-retracting springs 
secured to said block and engaging the die 
rods, substantially as set forth. 
12. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies formed with recessed seats, 
of a sliding block and point-cutting die-rods 
resting in said seats and supported upon said 
block and having a limited pivotal movement 
upon said blocks, substantially as set forth. 
13. In a nail-machine, the combination, with 
the gripping-dies and the sliding block pro 
vided with side lugs and a central bearing 
lug, of removable point-cutting die-rods and 
a keeper secured upon the side lugs of the 
sliding block, substantially as described. 
14. The point-cutting dies herein described, 
consisting of steel rods having point-cutting 
die-surfaces formed on their inner longitudi 
nal end faces and beveled surfaces on the 
ends on the opposite sides of the die-faces. 
In witness whereof I have hereto set my 
hand in the presence of two attesting wit 
GSS0S. 
CHARLES E. IOUGHTON. 
Attest: 
A. G. HEYLMAN, 
REUBEN JOHNSON. 
75 
95 
I do 
Io5 
Id 
I I5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463465.txt	 
  
 
 
 
  
(No Model.) 
No. 463,465, 
J. STARKEY, . 
WINDOW S CREEN, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1891. 
N 
SS 
 
XXXXXX 
&XXXXXXX & 
 
LA-ALS, W N A. 
7 
e/2/272-927ew 
the Norris Peters co, PHoro-Litho., WASHINGton, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN STARKEY, OF MINERVA, OHIO. 
WINDow. SCREEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 463,465, dated November 17, 1891. 
Application filed March 2, 1891. Serial No. 383,522. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN STARKEY, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Minerva, 
in the county of Stark and State of Ohio, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Window-Screens; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, reference be 
ing had to the annexed drawings, making a 
part of this specification, and to the letters 
of reference marked thereon, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing the 
outside of the window proper and illustrat 
ing the location of the screen. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal section illustrating the window 
sashes in proper position to close the window. 
Fig. 3 is a detached view of one of the part 
ing-strips. Fig. 4 is a transverse . section 
through line aca, Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is a side ele 
vation illustrating the window-screen proper 
elevated. Fig. 6 is a detached view of the 
window-screen proper. Fig. 7 is a transverse 
section through line y J, Fig. 6. 
The present invention has relation to win 
dow-screens; and it consists in the different 
parts and combination of parts hereinafter 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claim. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lingS. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the window-frame, which is constructed 
in the ordinary manner and may be of any 
desired size. 
The parting-strips B are located upon the 
inner sides of the frame A and extend the 
entire length of the frame. To the parting 
strips B are attached the pins a, which pins 
are for the purpose hereinafter described. 
The window-screen frame C is substantially 
of the form shown in Fig. 6. To the window 
screen frame C is securely attached the wire 
gauze b, said wire-gauze extending over the 
shoulders c, which shoulders extend entirely 
around the frame C. The Wire-gauze b is 
clamped between the shoulders c and the side 
extensions d and the bars d'. 
For the purpose of adjusting the window 
screen frame C to different-sized Window 
frames I provide the side extensions d, and 
in use form said side extensions wider than 
necessary, so that they may be cut down to fit 
Or adjust the window-screen frame C to dif 
ferent-sized window-frames. 
In use the side extensions d are properly 
adjusted to the window-frame, at which time 
the window-screen frame C together with its 
different parts are placed in the position illus 
trated in Figs. 1, 4, and 5. 
The pins a are for the purpose of engaging 
the side extensions d and thereby properly 
hold the window-screenframe C in the desired 
position. 
For the purpose of providing a means for 
elevating the window-screen frame C together 
with its different parts I prefer to form the 
frame C. Somewhat shorter than the space be 
tween the bottom of the window-frame A and 
the bottom or lower end of the upper window 
Sash, thereby permitting the window-screen 
proper to be elevated for the purpose of oper 
ating the window-blinds or for any other de 
sired purpose. 
It will be understood that by my peculiar 
manner of securing the wire-gauze b to the 
window-screen frame C said gauze will be 
flush with the side extensions d and the 
bars d', thereby providing or forming a win 
dow-screen proper that can be placed within 
the Window-frame A and so located that the 
lower Window-sash can be operated the same 
and in the same manner that it could be op 
erated if the Screen was not located within 
the frame A. 
It will also be understood that by my pe 
culiar arrangement I am enabled to quickly 
and easily remove the window-screen frame 
C from the window-frame A and again re 
place the same. It will also be understood 
that by forming the window-screen frame C 
Somewhat shorter than the space below the 
upper WindoW-Sash I am enabled to lower the 
upper Sash, thereby providing a means for 
Ventilation. 
In order to provide a means for bringing 
the wire-gauzeb into close proximity with the 
Window-sash, Ilocate the gauze so that it will 
be flush with the frame C upon the side of 
Said frame located against the window-sash. 
The object and purpose are to provide a means 
for preventing insects from entering between 
the Window-sash and the screen, and by this 
arrangement the Screen and sash will be close 
25 
35 
45 
85 
95 
Oc 
2 
463,465 
O 
together at all times without reference to the 
adjustment of the window. 
It will be understood that the window 
screen frame may be secured to the outer 
5 side of the upper window, if desired; or a 
frame may be provided for the upper and 
lower window-sashes, it being understood that 
separate frames are to be provided for the 
upper and lower Sashes. By attaching the 
reducible extensions d upon the sides of the 
frame and the bars d' at the top and bottom 
of said frame the wire-gauze will be securely 
held in proper position on said frame, and by 
forming the bars and extensions d and d of 
a thickness corresponding with the depth of 
the shoulders e the gauze will be flush with 
the back faces of said parts. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
The combination of the window-screen 
2O ters Patent, is 
25 
frame C, provided with the shoulder c on both 
sides and on the top and bottom thereof, the 
reducible side extensions d and the bars d', 
fitted in the shoulders c on the sides, top, and 
bottom, respectively, and of a thickness cor 
responding to the depth of the said shoulders, 
whereby the back face of the screen-frame 
and the faces of said extensions and bars are 
all in one plane, the wire-gauze b, located on 3o 
the back face of said screen-frame, and the 
parting-strip B, having pins Ct, adapted to be 
secured to the window-frame A, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 35 
JOHN STARKEY. 
Witnesses: 
HOWARD W. SPEAKMAN, 
J. H. EAKIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463565.txt	O, B, WILSON. 
L00P FOR COW BELLS, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 463,565, 
 
Azzszy 
2622-142.1-2 
a 2-4- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OSCAR B. WILSON, OF COLLINS VILLE, ILLINOIS, 
LOOP FOR COW-BELLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 463,565, dated November 17, 1891. 
Application filed July 31, 1891, Serial No. 401,310, (No model.) 
55 
7 S 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OSCAR B. WILSON, of 
Collinsville, Illinois, have made a new and 
useful Improvement in Loops for Cow-Bells, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
IIitherto in the construction and attach 
ment of loops for cow-bells the practice has 
been substantially as follows: The pieces from 
which the loops were made were cut from a 
metallic rod of suitable size and cross-see 
tional shape, and after being cut of the pieces 
were properly bent into loops and then at 
tached to the blanks, and the blanks were sub 
sequently formed into bells. 
The present improvement is based upon an 
analogous practice-that is, the loops are 
formed from pieces cut from rods, and after 
being formed the loops are secured to the 
blanks and the blanks are shaped and fin 
ished as heretofore. The special shape of the 
loop and the mode of attaching it to the blank, 
however, vary materially from the previous 
usage; and it is to such shape and method 
that the present improvement especially re 
lates, substantially as is hereiuafter set forth 
and claimed, aided by the annexed drawings, 
making part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the improved 
loop-piece; Fig. 2, an end view of the same; 
Fig. 3, a view showing the improved loop in end 
elevation applied to the blank but its points 
not yet clinched; Fig. 4, a side elevation of 
the same, the points clinched; Fig. 5, a bot 
tom view of the blank having the loop at 
tached, and Fig. 6 a top view of the loop at 
tached to the blank. The views are not all 
upon the same Scale, 
The same letters of reference denote the 
same parts, 
To more readily define the present improved 
construction the old form of loop is repre 
sented at A, Fig. 3. In cutting the loop-piece 
A from the rod a tenon a is formed at each 
end of the piece. The tenon is formed in the 
middle of the end of the piece with a shoulder 
a' a' at each side of the tenon. The piece is 
then bent to form a loop, which is attached 
by inserting the tenons in perforations b in 
the blank B, from which the bellis ultimately 
formed. The loop is then secured by rivet 
ing the tenons on the under side of the blank, 
substantially as is indicated by the broken 
lines a, Fig. 3. This practice, which in some 
respects is desirable, is not free from objec 
tions. A piece of the rod is wasted with every 
cutting. To form the described tenon C, re 
quires a piece of the rod at least one-fourth 
of an inch in length to be cut out between 
the Successive loop - pieces, for as a tenon 
occurs at each end of a loop-piece the tenons 
upon successive pieces cannot in practice be 
formed without at the same time cutting out 
of the rod an intermediate piece of iron of 
the length mentioned. Furthermore, it re 
quires special machinery to form the described 
tenons, and the dies of said machinery are 
liable to get out of order. Another objection 
is that the tenons must be carefully headed 
or the loop is liable to work loose from the 
bell. By means of the present improvement 
the loop-piece can be readily cut without 
waste from the rod, the cutting can be ef. 
fected by means of ordinary tools, and the 
loop can be readily and securely attached to 
the blank, and all so that the cost of the loop 
and the operation are materially reduced. 
C represents the improved loop-piece. It 
is formed by cutting the rod obliquely, sub 
stantially as shown at c. The bar is always 
sheared the same Way, causing the two bevels 
cc at the ends, respectively, of the piece C to 
be parallel. In this manner each piece Chas 
a pointed end cat one side of the piece and 
another pointed end c' at the other side of 
the piece. The loop is then formed by bend 
ing the piece C into the form C, Figs. 6, 7, 
and 9, and the loop is attached by inserting 
its pointed ends in the perforations b in the 
blank B, and the loop is then secured to the 
blank by clinching its ends c' c upon the 
under side of the blank, substantially as shown 
in Figs. 7 and 8. The piece C being wider 
than the perforations b, the pointed ends of 
the loop in attaching the loop to the blank 
cannot, as seen in Fig. 6 and also in Fig. 9, 
entirely enter the perforations, and a portion 
c of each of the ends c' cremains above the 
blank, and Serves as a shoulder to hold the 
loop in place upon the outer side of the blank. 
These shoulders c, as seen in Fig. 9, come, 
respectively, upon opposite sides of the loop. 
The loop is thereby steadied laterally. Owing 
to their pointed form, the ends c'c' can be 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
95 
IOO 
2 
468,565 
wedged tightly into the perforations to b, and 
when said ends are finally clinched, as de 
scribed, the loop is secured very rigidly and 
effectually to the blank. At the same time 
the entire operation can be readily performed 
and with comparatively unskilled labor. 
I claim 
i. The combination of the blank and the 
loop, said blank having perforations narrower 
than said loop, and said loop having its ends 
beveled, inserted part way through said per 
forations, and clinched upon the under side 
of said blank, substantially as described. 
5 
IO 
2. The combination of the perforated blank 
and the loop having the beveled and pointed 15 
ends, said loop being wider than said perfo 
rations, and said loop ends being wedged in 
said perforations and clinched upon the under 
side of said blank, substantially as described. 
IS). 
Witness my hand this 27th day of July, 2O 
OSCAR B. WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
C. D. MOODY, 
A. BON VILLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463666.txt	(No Model.) 
W. A. JAMES 
SKATE, 
No. 463,666, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1891. 
 
  
 
 
 
s 
as issa Eisel 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. JAMES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND 
WILLIAM H. O'BRIEN, OF SAME PLACE. 
W s 
SKATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,666, dated November 24, 1891. 
Application filed February 7, 1891, Serial No. 380,683, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. A. JAMES, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Skates, of which the follow 
ing is a Specification, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the skate. 
Fig. 2 is a top view, with that portion of the 
plate on which the ball of the foot rests broken 
away, showing the clamp beneath it. Fig. 3 
is a Section of a portion of said skate on line 
33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a top view of the lever, 
the heel-clamp, and adjustable parts. Fig. 5 
is an under side view of the lever or stop. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
the body of the skate, and also to the means 
of securing it to the foot, and is chiefly useful 
in that class of skates which are secured to 
the Sole of the boot or shoe by adjustable 
clamps, which are fastened by a lever. 
The principal object of my invention is to 
cheapen the manufacture of skates, at the 
Same time providing a light and durable ar 
ticle of good appearance. I accomplish these 
results as illustrated in the accompanying 
dra WingS and as hereinafter described. That 
which I regard as new will be pointed out in 
the claims, 
to similar parts 
Similar letters refer 
throughout the drawings. 
In the drawings, A is the body of the skate, 
of which B is the runner. The body of the 
skate is formed of two plates a, and a', which 
are SO Cut as to form the supporting-tongues 
c c'. The plate a is bent at or nearly at right 
angles a short distance above the origin of 
the tongues c. The portion b thus formed 
serves to support and strengthen the upper 
portion of the plate a, which upper portion 
forms one-half of the plate on which the foot 
The plate a' is similarly cut to form 
restS. 
supporting-tongues c', and is similarly bent 
at or nearly at right angles, but in an oppo 
site direction, the two plates thus being com 
plements of each other. They are fastened 
together by rivets p or by brazing, or in any 
Suitable manner. The runner B is inserted 
between the supporting-tongues C candfast 50 
ened by rivets p', or by brazing, or in any 
suitable manner. That portion of the plates C. 
a', on which the ball of the foot rests, is best 
curved to conform to the curve of the Sole of 
the shoe. The front clamps are formed on 55 
the ends of two racks d. by turning up the 
ends thereof d. These clamps are adapted 
to clamp the SQle of the shoe under the ball 
of the foot when said clamps approach each 
other. Said clamps are provided with teeth 6o 
adapted to engage with opposite sides of a 
cog-wheele, and will be moved in opposite di 
rections by turning said wheel. Said racks are 
fastened to and slide under the foot-plate in 
a direction at right angles to the runner of 65 
the skate. Each rack is provided with a slot 
d'. Through this slot passes a screw f, the 
stem of which is slightly smaller and the head 
much larger than the breadth of said slot. 
The screws are screwed into the foot-plate 7 O 
from below and securely fastened therein. 
The head projects far enough below said plate 
to allow the racks to slide easily on the stem 
of said screw. Said racks also slide in a slot 
cut in the supporting-barb, and such slot is 75 
of such length that the ends thereof Will hold 
the teeth on said rack at all times securely 
meshed with the cogs of the wheele, These 
racks may be secured to said foot-plate in 
many ways, and I do not wish to be confined 8o 
to any particular way of doing the same. The 
cogwheel e rotates on a ping, and in the 
lower end of said ping is a slot q, adapted to 
fit over two of the supporting-tongues c c', 
Fig. 3. From said tongues c c' is cut a rect- 85 
angular notch r, (shown by dotted lines in 
Fig. 1) adapted to receive the ping. The 
slot q and the notch thus hold the lower 
end of the ping firmly in place. The ping 
is inserted through a hole in the foot-plate 9o 
and firmly fastened therein by spreading the 
head of it with a riveting-hammer or by fast 
ening it in any suitable manner. A lever h . 
is provided with an elliptical sloth, through 
which slot the ping passes. Secured to this 95 
lever is a catch i. This catch may be made 
of a segment of a circle toothed on the inside 
and adapted to engage with more than One 
O 
25 
45 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
tooth of the wheele, or as shown. When the 
lever h is in either of the positions shown in 
Ifigs. 2 and 4, the catch i will engage with the 
cogs of the wheele, and turning the lever on 
the ping will rotate the wheele. When the 
lever h is pulled endwise, the lever will slide 
on the pin g until the pin g is in the other 
end of the elliptical slot h", and the catch i 
will then not engage with the cogs of the 
wheele, so that the wheel e and the lever h. 
can each move independently and the racks 
d can be adjusted to the proper width for 
clamping the sole of the shoe and then tight 
ened by pushing the catch i into engagement 
with the cogs of the wheel e and turning the 
lever. Upon the lever h is provided a pini, 
(best shown in Fig. 5,) which extends down 
ward from said lever and is so placed that it 
will strike against the supporting-tongue c. 
and limit the outward motion of the lever. In 
front of the heel the foot-plate is considerably 
narrowed, and on the same is a sliding piecek, 
adapted to slide lengthwise on said foot-plate 
by having its edges turned over the edges of 
said foot-plate. Between said foot-plate and 
the sliding piece k is another sliding piece l, 
adapted to slide between the sliding piece k 
and the foot-plate, and the end of said piece 
l, which is nearest the heel, is turned up, so 
as to form a catch l, adapted to clamp the 
heel of the shoe from in front and press it 
against the ears m, n, which are bent from 
the foot-plate. Said ears in m. may be re-en 
forced, if thought best, in any way desired. 
The end of an adjusting-screw ) is journaled 
in the catch l' and the screw passes through 
the screw-eye k', which is fastened securely 
to the sliding piecek, or it may be formed by 
cutting an ear properly provided with a thread 
from the piece k and turning it up at right 
angles, so that the thread will receive the 
screw n. By turning the adjusting-screw . 
the distance between the catch l and the 
ears n n may be varied, so as to adapt the 
clamp to heels of differentsizes. The sliding 
piece lc and the lever h are joined by a link 
o, which is pivotally attached to each of them 
and is attached to the lever near its fulcrum. 
A rivet o', which attaches the link o to the 
sliding piece k, extends through far enough 
to hold the lever h in its place when pushed 
in toward the runner of the skate and slipped 
behind the end of said rivet o', as shown in 
Fig. 1. Drawing the lever h toward the run 
ner of the skate will push the sliding piecek. 
back, So as to clamp the heel between the ears 
in in and the catch l, and the same motion 
of the lever also rotates the wheele and fast 
ens the clamps d' d', securing the skate to the 
shoe. When the skate is held in position on 
the foot and the sliding piece k held by the 
contact of the catch l with the heel, the lever 
h is pushed forward by the link O and the 
catch held firmly meshed with the cogs of 
the wheele, as shown in Fig. 1. When the 
skate is loosened from the foot by moving the 
loose end of the lever h away from the run 
ner B, the link o pulls the catch i away from 
engagement with the wheel e, so that the 
same movement of the lever which loosens 
the skate from the foot also throws the catch 
i out of engagement with the wheele. 
That which I claim as new, and desire to 
secure by ILetters Patent, is 
1. A skate consisting of a pair of united 
foot-plates a. a', each the counterpart of the 
other and provided with the strengthening 
portion b and pendent tongue-pieces, and a 
runner interposed between and secured to the 
tongue-pieces, substantially as described. 
2. In a skate, the combination, with a ping, 
a foot-platea, a?, having fastened thereto and 
sliding thereon racks d, adapted to engage 
with a cog-wheel e, having clamps d', of a 
cog-wheele and a lever h, adapted to rotate 
the wheele, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
3. In a skate, the combination, with a ping, 
cog-wheele, and racks d, adapted to be moved 
by said cog-wheele and having clamps d', of 
a lever h, having an elliptical slot r, and catch 
i, adapted to be engaged or disengaged with 
said cog-wheel, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
4. In a skate, the combination, with a skate 
body having a cog-wheel e pivoted thereto, 
leverh, having an enlarged opening l, having 
catchi, adapted to engage with said cog-wheel, 
and forward clamps adapted to be operated 
by said cog-wheel, of rear clamps for said 
skate and devices for operating said rear 
clamps by said lever h, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
5. In a skate, the combination, with a skate 
body having a cog-wheele pivoted thereto, a 
lever h, having an enlarged opening l', having 
a catch i, adapted to engage with said cog 
wheel, and forward clamps adapted to be op 
erated by said cog-wheel, of the sliding plate 
k, catch l, secured to said sliding plate k, 
and baro, connecting said sliding plate With 
said lever h, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
6. In a skate, the combination, with a foot 
plate having clamps m, lever h, having the 
plate k, adapted to slide on said foot-plate, 
and platel, adapted to slide between the plate 
k and said foot-plate and having the catch l' 
thereon, of an adjusting-screw n, connecting 
the catch land the plate k, and devices for 
operating said plate k, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
7. A skate having its body composed of two 
plates of metal cut, bent, and fastened to 
gether to form a foot-plate, and provided with 
pendent tongue-pieces between which the 
metallic runner is interposed and riveted in 
place, substantially as described. 
8. In a skate, the combination, with a skate 
body having rear clamps in and having a cog 
75 
95 
OO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
2 
468,666 
65 
 
468,666 
wheele pivoted to said skate-body, and racks connecting said clamp land sliding piecek, 
d, having clamps d' thereon and adapted to substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
be moved by said cog-wheel and having a le 
WILLIAM A. JAMES. 
ver h, with an enlarged openingh', and catch 
i, adapted to engage with said cog-wheel, of a 
link O, and sliding piece k, sliding piece l, 
having the clamp l', and adjusting-screw n, 
ROBERTA. MILLAR, 
JOHN L. JACKSON. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463766.txt	(No Model.) 
F. O. BLACKWELL, 
SWITCH FOR ELECTRIC RAILWAYS, 
No. 463,766. 
Patented Nov. 24, 1891, 
WITNESSES: 
(222-2-2-C. S. 
ces-(2/c2-6-44. 
NVENTOR: 
ATYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS O. BLACKWELL, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
THOMSON-HOUSTON ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF CONNECTICUT. 
SWITCH FOR ELECTRIC RALWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 463,766, dated November 24, 1891. 
Application filed January 26, 1891, Serial No. 379,093, (No model.) 
. 
I5 underrunning trolley. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, FRANCISO. BLACKWELL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
5 Massachusetts, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Switches for 
Electric Railways, of which the following is 
a specification. 
Myinvention relates to an improved switch 
1o ing device for guiding the contact-trolley in 
its passage along the main and branch con 
ductors of an electric railway, and it is 
adapted particularly for use with conductors 
suspended over the car and engaged by an 
Briefly stated, it consists in a folding switch 
section or gate, which normally stands in a 
position guiding the trolley along the main 
line, but may be turned down, allowing the 
2O trolley to ride over it when coming out of the 
branch line. 
The accompanying drawing is a perspec 
tive view showing this invention. 
A A' A' are the main and branch con 
25 ductors, which come together in the usual 
manner at a switch, and are attached to what 
is commonly known as a switch-box B, 
consisting of a horizontal extension-plate C 
and side ribs D, SO arranged as to form 
3o branching ways for the guidance of the trol 
ley. A folding switch section or gate E is 
suspended from the plate by pivots e e, ex 
tending lengthwise of the gate, so that nor 
mally gravity tends to hold the switch in a 
35 position closing the Way F, assumed herein 
to be that leading to the branch line. When 
now the trolley H is traveling in the direc 
tion of the arrow, the branchway F is closed 
and the trolley guided past it continues along 
4o the main line. When, on the other hand, 
the trolley is coming out of the branch line, 
traveling along conductors Ain the oppo 
site direction to that already assumed, it 
strikes against the gate, folding it over flat 
45 wise into the dotted-line position, when it 
runs over it and passes out along the main. 
The gate will then automatically swing back 
to its normal position, and if gravity be in 
55 
65 
sufficient to hold it in place, a weak Spring 
may be inserted in the hinge to assist this 5o 
action. The gate, however, can swing only 
to the side indicated, for the ribs constitute 
stops preventing movement in the other di 
rection. 
This form of switch is simple in construc 
tion and reduces to a minimum the liability 
of the trolley-wheel getting caught in the 
switch-box, as there are no projections either 
on the switch or at the angle between the 
branching ways on which the wheel may 
Strike. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with main and branch 
conductors of an electric railway, of a fold 
ing switch or gate pivoted so as to fold down 
flatwise in the path of travel of the trolley, 
thereby allowing the trolley to pass over it, 
as set forth. 
2. The combination of main and branch 
conductors of an electric railway connected 
at the branching point by an extension-plate 
having a plane surface for the trolley to en 
gage, of a folding switch or gate for direct 
ing the trolley pivoted and swinging on an 
axis substantially parallel with the longitudi 
nal axis of the gate, as Set forth. 
3. The combination, with main and branch 
conductors of an electric railway, of an ex 
tension - plate provided with ribs forming 
branching ways for the trolley, and a folding 
switch or gate normally closing one of said 
ways and pivoted on an axis substantially 
parallel with the axis of the gate, as de 
scribed. 
4. A Switch for electric railways, compris 
ing a plate or box having ribs forming branch 
ing ways, and a gate or Switch normally clos 
ing one of Said Ways and pivoted to the plate 
at its upper end on a pivot substantially par 
allel with the longitudinal axis of the gate, 
whereby the gate may be folded down flat 
against the plate, as set forth. 
5. The combination of main and branch 
conductors of an electric railway and an ex- 95 
tension-piece provided with ribs forming 
7 O 
75 
2 
463,766 
branching ways for the trolley at the switch- held against movement in the opposite direc 
ing-point, with a switch or gate suspended tion, as set forth. 
from the extension-piece by a longitudinal 
In testimony whereof I have hereto set my 
pivot, whereby gravity tends to maintain the hand this 19th day of January, 1891. 
gate in a position closing one of said ways, 
said gate Swinging freely from its normal po- 
sition in a direction permitting the passage 
of the trolley from out the closed way, but 
E. L. RAWSON, 
GEO. R. BLODGETT. 
IO 
FRANCIS O. BLACKWELL, 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463866.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 463,866, 
 
 
 
A, C, MERRITT, 
CAR COUPLING, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1891. 
St. N IN 
 
SY 
 
OWICy AWVAWZO2: 
WZZWZSSAS 
(2-4-2-2-2C W 23257 
zz 2.2% 
- 
/ z 
21zzopaevs 
, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AMOS CLINTON MERRITT, OF ALLENTOWN, NEW YORK. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
s 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,866, dated November 24, 1891. 
Application filed May 4, 1891, Serial No. 391,474 (No model.) 
55 
69 
65 
7 O 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, AMOS CLINTON MERRITT, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Allentown, in the county of Allegany and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Car-Couplings; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved coupling-link. Fig. 2 is a longitudi 
nal sectional view on a vertical plane, show 
ing the link inserted ready for coupling into 
the mouth of the draw-head, the dotted lines 
showing the link as adjusted in its elevated 
position. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the link, 
and Fig. 4 is a transverse vertical sectional 
view on line y y in Fig. 3. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in all the figures. 
This invention relates to car-couplings of 
that class employing a link and pin; and it 
consists in an improved construction of the 
link adapted to be used in connection with the 
coupling for which Letters Patent No. 429,539 
were granted to me on the 3d day of June, 
1890, and other couplings of the same type, 
the object of my present invention being to 
provide means for the ready and accurate 
adjustment of the link to its proper position 
for entering the draw-head with which it is 
to be coupled, substantially as will be herein 
after more fully described and claimed. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter Ades 
ignates a draw-head of any approved construc 
tion. 
The coupling-pin is shown at Band my im 
proved link at C. The latter consists of an 
oblong link of the usual shape and construc 
tion, upon the two parallel sides of which is 
fastened about midway a crossbar or brace 
D. This fixed brace is bored through trans 
versely, parallel to the sides of the link, to re 
ceive the outer screw-threaded end of a mov 
able rod E, having a nut F for lengthening 
or shortening the longer end of the rod which 
projects on the other side of the brace. Upon 
the other end of this rod is fastened a block 
G, having a concave recess H in that side 
which faces the coupling-pin B, and a coiled 
spring I is placed around this end of the rod, 
bearing with one end against block G and 
with the other end against the fixed brace D. 
Thus it will be seen that the tension of this 
spring operates to force the recessed block or 
bearing G up against the adjacent side of the 
pin which fits into the recess. 
To maintain block G. in its proper position, 
it is provided with pins JJ, inserted through 
it transversely, and the ends of which project 
on opposite sides, respectively, above and be 
low the link, so as to form guides for the mo 
When 
tion of the block forward or back. 
the pin is withdrawn from the link, the nut 
F at the outer end of rod E will prevent the 
rod and block from being pushed too far to 
ward the rear end of the link by the tension 
of the spring, said nut being so adjusted that 
there will always be room enough between 
the concaved side of the block and the inner 
end of the link for the insertion of the pin B, 
to facilitate which the top and bottom of the 
block may be made slanting or beveled on the 
side facing the pin, as shown at g in Fig. 2. 
Spring I should be made sufficiently stiff and 
strong to cause the concaved side H of the 
block to bear against the pin with consider 
able pressure, thereby causing the free end of 
the link to project from the mouth of the 
draw-head horizontally, and as this concaved 
bearing-block G projects longer on one side 
of the link than on the other, (see Fig.2) the 
link may be raised, as indicated in dotted 
lines, or lowered to correspond to the eleva 
tion of the opposite draw-head by placing 
either one side or the other uppermost. Thus 
it will be seen that by simply reversing the 
link its elevation in the draw-head may be 
adjusted. In this manner I dispense entirely 
with the use of blocks, wedges, keys, or other 
contrivances for regulating the elevation of 
the free end of the link. 
IIaving thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent of 
of the United States 
The combination, with the coupling-link 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
95 
Ioo 
2 
463,866 
provided with the fixed transverse brace bored 
through parallel to the sides of the link, of 
the concaved block or bearing having lateral 
guides overlapping the link, screw-threaded 
and nutted rod, and coiled spring encircling 
Said rod between the fixed brace and movable 
block, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature Io 
in presence of two witnesses. 
AMIOS CLINTON MERRITT. 
Witnesses: 
G. D. GIGEE, 
G. II. GIGEE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US463966.txt	(No. Model.) 
J. E. REED, 
AGRICULTURAL MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 463,966, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1891. 
 
 
  
Witnesses 
fl. 6.6a (2- 
Q4. ed J%. S. 
N"S" V' 
P 
A 
a siZOZ2n 
Q 
A. 
 
Giusetts. - 
s 
E 
: 
: 
 
O 
 
 
 
 
Inventor 
S/2.6% 
2 s 
cer-64, Ras 
(No Model.) , 
J. E. REED, 
AGRICULTURAL MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 463,966, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1891. 
h 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
Witnesses, 
77-6. 6.4. 
Inventor: 
8/2-c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN E. REED, OF LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA. 
AGRICULTURAL MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 463,966, dated November 24, 1891. 
Application filed January 9, 1891, Serial No, 377,206, No model.) 
 
invention. 
plants when the machine is used in cultivat 
To all whom, it may concern. 
ing orchards or any growing crops. 
Be it known that I, JoHN E. REED, a citizen 
My improved frame is so constructed that 
of the United States, residing at Los Angeles, 
it forms a continuous smooth guard, which is 
in the county of Los Angeles and State of Cali 
not liable to injure the bark of the trees or 
fornia, have invented a new and useful Agri 
break or tear the plants. 
cultural Machine, of which the following is a 
specification. 
It consists of the continuous outer U-shaped 
member A, formed of a single bar of iron, 
My invention relates to that class of agri 
Steel, or other suitable material, and cross 
cultural machines in Which the cultivator 
ties or braces, such as the rear cross-bar B 
teeth are mounted on a frame sustained by 
of like Suitable material extending acrossbe 
clod-crushing rollers. 
tween and Secured to the two limbs of the U 
The object of my invention is to increase 
near the ends thereof, leaving a portion of 
the strength and diminish the weight of the 
Such limbs projecting behind the cross-bar to 
machine, and also to increase the convenience 
form the rearwardly-projecting attachment 
of its operation and the variety of work which 
arms C, and the front cross bar or tie H, ex 
it will perform; also, to secure greater uni 
tending across the U in front of the roller. 
formity in the depth of cultivation. It com 
The rear cross-bar is provided with two rear 
prises the machine proper and the different 
Wardly-projecting intermediate attachment 
attachments therefor which are designed to 
be used successively in preparing the ground 
arms a' a'. 
Myinvention comprises an agricultural ma 
and fitting it for growing crops or for irriga 
chine provided with the above - described 
tion. 
frame, in combination with clod-crushing and 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
frame - Supporting rollers journaled to the 
frame and suitable attachments, such as here 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the main part of 
in set forth. 
the machine with its attachments detached. 
In practice the Weed-cutter C is secured by 
Fig. 2 is a perspective side elevation of the 
its standard-arms c c to the lateral attach 
machine in operation as a Weed-cutter. Fig. 
3 is a longitudinal mid-section showing the 
ment-arms C, a when it is desired to cut the 
Weeds, and when that has been accomplished, 
machine adjusted to stir the ground. Fig. 4 
the Weed-cutter is removed and the rake Dis 
is a plan view of the weed-cutter. Fig. 5 is a 
rear view of one of the plows designed to be 
attached. 
The rake-shaft d is journaled in the jour 
attached to the attachment-arms C. C. Fig. 
nal-posts N, which are clamped in the clips 
G is a rear view of the center plow. Fig. 7 is 
E, arranged to fit upon the intermediate at 
a perspective view of the clip used to secure 
tachment-arms Ct and provided with means 
the rake-posts to the attachment-arms. 
such as the bolt b-for securing them to such 
- One of the valuable features of my inven 
arms. Such bolt is passed through the clip, 
tion is the peculiar outer frame within which 
post, and arm, and the journal-posts N, fit 
all the parts are secured. This frame enables 
ting closely in the deep channel E, and the 
me to secure greater strength with smaller 
lugs e, projecting from each side of the chan 
bulk and weight of material than has hereto 
nel and fitting closely against the top and 
fore been secured with machines of this class. 
bottom of the attachment-arms, and, in com 
My invention also comprises the means em 
bination with the bolt b, holds such posts rig 
ployed for securing these parts to the frame; 
idly in position. Ordinarily the shaft is made 
also, the peculiar combination of the several 
so rigid that only two of the clips E are re 
parts by which I secure superior efficiency of 
quired, such clips being secured, respectively, 
operation. 
to the intermediate attachment-arms a, a 
It is often desirable in machines of this 
but if it is desired, four posts and clips may 
class that there be no projecting parts which 
be used, one for each attachment-arm. The 
are liable to come into contact with the trees 
or plants to injure the bark or break the rake is formed of a cylindrical shaft d, and 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
75 
95 
IOC 
2 
463,966 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the teeth d are inserted through it, project 
ing equidistant on each side thereof. 
A series of clod-crushing rollers F are jour 
maled immediately in front of the rear cross 
bar B on the roiler-shaft G, which is journaled 
at its ends to the side limbs of the outer U 
member of the frame. The frame is provided 
immediately in front of the roller with the 
transverse tie or cross bar II to give superior 
strength at this point to prevent any spring 
ing of the outer member, which might cause 
the journals g and the roller-shaft to bind. 
The rollers F are arranged slightly apart to 
leave a space e' at the mid-line of the ma 
chine, and the rake-operating bar or lever I 
is journaled upon the roller-shaft between 
the two rollers FF and projects to the front 
and rear of the rollers and is provided at its 
front end with the foot-plate f and at its rear 
end with the cross-piece i, which is arranged 
to move across the upper portion of the path 
of the teeth of the revolving rake D to be op 
erated to hold the teeth from moving and to 
release the teeth to allow the rake to revolve 
to clean itself. The seat-bow J is fixed to the 
tie H and cross-bar B and extends over the 
rollers midway between the side members of 
the U to sustain the seat K, which may be 
secured thereto immediately if a low seat is 
desired, or by brackets h. h if a high seat is 
desired. In case it is not desired to use the 
rollers, they may be removed and wheels sub 
stituted in their stead. Cultivator-teeth-Sus 
taining shafts L L are secured to the U and 
are provided with adjustable collars m, which 
slide upon the shafts and are placed one upon 
each side of the cultivator-tooth shanks, which 
are provided with a hole at the upper end 
thereof, through which the shaft is passed, 
and when in place, the collars are secured in 
position by means of set-screws. 
The weed - cutter comprises a single V 
shaped blade bent up at right angles at its 
ends to form attaching standards, and pro 
vided on the outside of the horizontal portion 
t of the V with the cutting-edge m'. The 
rollers, attachment, standards, and cutter are 
so proportioned and arranged that when the 
upper ends of the Standards are fixed to the 
attachment-arms by Suitable means, such as 
the two bolts at each end shown in Fig. 2, 
the cutting-edge will extend beneath the 
roller, so that when the machine is advanced 
the roller will press the weeds down and the 
cutter will sever the roots while the weeds 
are thus held down. 
In case it is desired to make furrows for 
irrigating or planting seeds or for any other 
purpose, the plows O are attached to the at 
tachment-arms by the same clips that are 
used to attach the rake-posts to the attach 
ment-arms, and two plows on each side are 
attached to the lateral attachment-arms C, of 
the frame, and the posts O' thereof are bent 
in opposite directions, So that when secured 
in position the outer plow will extend later 
ally about six inches beyond the outside of 
the frame A, and the inner one about the 
same distance inside. One plow is also at 
tached to the center of the machine by loos 
ening the bolts a 1, which secure the clip Z, 
and the arm J to the cross-bar B, and insert 
ing therethrough the post P of the plow, which 
is bent to fit upon the seat-arm J, and when 
in place the bolts are tightened, thus bring 
ing the post firmly against the arm J and So 
holding the plow in position. The post P of 
the plow is so bent as to prevent contact with 
the rake-bar I. The width between the fur 
rows can be changed at will by removing the 
plows that are not desired. 
A valuable feature of my invention con 
sists in the combination and arrangement of 
parts for controlling the cultivator-teeth. 
The cultivator-teeth are so attached to their 
shafts I, L' as to allow them to swing up and 
down. This may be done by using cylindri 
cal shafts and journaling the shank of the 
tooth thereupon or the shafts may be jour 
naled to the frame. The cultivator-shanks S 
are bent at their free ends to form the two 
members l n. The long arm or member l is 
pivoted to the shaft and the short post or 
member n is provided with the cultivator 
tooth M. 
The main rock-shaft R is provided with the 
rigid radial arms T, which are connected with 
the arms l by connecting-rods W near the 
bend in the shanks S. The combined length 
of the arm l and radial arm T is approxi 
mately equal to but slightly greater than the 
space between the main rock-shaft R and the 
cultivator-shaft Li, and the posts in and con 
necting-rod Vare of such length with relation 
to the height of the cultivator-shaft Landra 
dial arm T that when the lever Q is thrown for 
ward to force the tooth into the ground the post 
in and connecting-rod V will move axially in the 
direction of the cultivator-tooth, thus apply 
ing the force more directly and effectively 
than heretofore and giving greater rigidity to 
the teeth, so that they will cultivate to a uni 
form depth. The cultivator-controlling lever 
Q is attached firmly to the main rock-shaft R, 
and the pitman V, which actuates rock-shaft 
L', is pivoted to the lever Qatapoint the same 
distance from the pivotal point of the lever 
as the pivotal point of the radial arms T, so 
that the rock-shafts will operate uniformly 
with each other. The pitman Wextends for 
Ward to the radial arm S', which extends 
from the rock-shaft L'. 
The front end of the frame is supported by 
a caster-wheel U, journaled to the front end 
or point of the frame. A by means of a piece 
of gas-pipe bearing W, which is firmly fast 
ened to the frame by means of the bracket, 
which is recessed upon one side to fit the gas. 
pipe and upon the other side to fit the inner 
side of the frame at the point thereof, and is 
secured in place by means of the clip X. The 
gas-pipe bearing W projects below the bot 
75 
95 
IOC 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
463,966 
 
3 
tom of the frame A and passes through the 
eye of the draft-hook. W', which is secured 
from sliding down into the way of the caster 
wheel by battering the end of the gas-pipe. 
The journal-shaft X of the caster-wheel U' 
is inserted from below through the gas-pipe 
and secured by a key or other suitable means. 
The gas-pipe bearing W is held rigidly erect 
by means of the two braces , which are se 
cured to the frame. 
The cultivator-teeth supporting-shafts L 
Land the rock-shafts R and L'are journaled 
to the frame by means of clips N', which are 
provided with a gain l', which fit snugly upon 
the inner side of the frame A, and the clip is 
held in place by a single bolta', and the rock 
shaft L'' and the cultivator-tooth shaft L'are 
both journaled to the same clip L'above the 
frame A and L' below. 
Now, having described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of the weed-cutter com 
prising a V-shaped blade bent up at right an 
gles at its ends to form the standards, the 
frame provided with the attachment-arms, 
means for securing the standards to the arms, 
and the rollers, all so proportioned and ar 
ranged that when the standards are attached 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
to the arms the point of the cutter will ex 
tend beneath the roller. 
2. The combination of the continuous outer 
frame, the rollers journaled to the frame, the 
cultivator-shanks journaled to the cultivator 
shafts, the rock-shafts provided with the ra 
dial arms and connected to the cultivator 
shanks by pitmen in such a manner that the 
power applied to force the teeth into the 
ground will move the pitmen axially in the 
direction of the cultivator-teeth. 
3. The combination of the continuous outer 
frame, the caster-wheel journaled to the front 
of the frame, the cultivator-shanks journaled 
to the shafts secured to the frame, the rock 
shafts journaled to the frame, means opera 
tively connecting such rock-shafts with the 
cultivator-shanks, means for operating the 
rock-shafts, the clod-crushing rollers jour 
naled to the frame behind the cultivator 
shanks, and the weed-cutter Secured to the 5o 
attachment-arms and so arranged and pro 
portioned that when the Weed-cutter is in op 
eration the point thereof will be underneath 
the point where the rollers touch the ground. 
45 
JOHN E. REED. 
Witnesses: 
M. C. GALER, 
ALFRED I. TOWNSEND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464066.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. FOSTER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE SINGER 
MANUE ACTURING COMPANY OF NEW JERSEY. 
WORK-GUDING ATTACHMENT FOR OVERSEAMING SEWING-MACHINES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,066, dated December 1, 1891. 
Application filed April 4, 1891, Serial No. 387,625, (No model.) 
65 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES H. FOSTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York city, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Sewing-Machine 
Attachments, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had therein to the 
accompanying drawings. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
an attachment for overseaming sewing-ma 
chines which will so present the work to the 
needle that a kind of a blind-stitch overseam 
may be formed, or, in other words, an over 
seam which will show but little on one side of 
the work but the stitches of which will have 
a deep engagement from the edge of the goods 
on the other side of the work. 
My attachment is more especially intended 
for overseaming or 'serging the raw or cut 
edges of velvet, moquette, and other carpets, 
but may be used for other work in which 
blind-stitch overseams may be desirable. 
In carrying my invention into effect I pro 
vide a suitable guide for the edge of the work, 
and adjacent to said guide is a raised work 
support, which is separated from the guide a 
suitable distance to form a passage-way to re 
ceive the edge of the work, the said guide be 
ing provided with an arm or arms extending 
across said passage-Way and serving, in con 
nection with the raised work-support, to bend 
over the edge of the work in such a manner 
that it will be inclined relative to the vertical 
path of the needle, so that the latter in pene 
trating the Work, in making the puncturing 
stitches of the overseam, will have a deep en 
gagement from the edge thereof on one side 
of the work, but will come out much closer to 
the edge on the other side, thus forming an 
overseam which has a deep hold from the 
edge on one side of the work, but which will 
show but little on the other. The work is 
preferably fed by a feeding-wheel or other 
feeding device arranged over said work-sup 
Ort. 
p In the drawings, Figure 1 is a partial front 
side view of a Singer overseaming-machine 
with my attachment applied thereto. Fig. 2 
is a rear side view of the attachment. Fig. 3 
is a plan view, and Figs. 4 and 5 opposite end 
views, of the same. IFigs. 6 and 7 are detail 
plan and sectional views, respectively, of the 
guide and parts of the bed-plate of the at 
tachment. Fig. 8 is a plan view of the Work 55 
support and a part of the bed-plate. Fig. 9 
is a section online 9, Fig. 8. Fig.10 is a bot 
tom view of the guide and its fingers. 
A denotes the bed-plate of the attachment, 
to be secured to the Work-plate of a sewing 
machine in any suitable manner, as by screws 
a. Said bed-plate, as herein shown, is pro 
vided with a raised work-supporta', a stand 
ard or block a, and posts aanda', all rigidly 
attached thereto in any Suitable manner, or 
they may be formed integral therewith. The 
bed-plate A is also provided with a needle 
slot or throat a. 
B denotes a guide for the edge of the work, 
said guide being preferably provided with the 
fingers b and b. The outer or working edge. 
of the guide B is inclined relative to a ver 
tical plane, or the plane in which the needle 
reciprocates, and is separated from the inner 
edge of the Work-support a' to form a passage 
for the edge of the work, and the fingers b 
and b' extend across Said passage so as to 
overlap the Work-supporta', being somewhat 
above the same. (Shown more clearly in Figs. 
1 and 2.) Between the fingers b and b'is a re 
cess b, which permits the needle to descend 
outside of the edge of the work when form 
ing overedge stitches. The forward edge of 
the guide B is inclined slightly at b, and the 
said guide is preferably adjustably secured 
to the base-plate, this being effected in the 
present instance by providing the guide with 
an arm b, fitting in a recess a? in the base 
plate beneath a bridge-piece C, through which 
passes a set-screw c, which engages said arm 
and holds said guide in place. 
The floor of the passage-way between the 
Work-support and the guide is constructed 
with an incline p, beginning at the front edge 
of the attachment and gradually rising as it 
runs backward to the needle-slot a, where it 
reaches its highest point. When the carpet 
or other fabric to be overstitched is inserted, 
the pile (at the under side of the work) rests 
on the said incline, and as the work is moved 
forward the pile is pushed back by the incline, 
and is thus prevented from becoming entan 
9o 
95 
75 
O O 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
 
464,066 
O 
3O 
35 
gled with the needle-thread, and thus a smooth 
edge is secured. 
To the standard or block Ci is secured an 
arm or support D, in which is mounted a shaft 
E, carrying a feed-wheele, which overhangs 
the work-support a, and between which and 
said support the work passes. The inner por 
tion of the arm D is made thin, so that the 
feed-wheel can be slightly raised or lowered 
to provide for different thickness of work, 
and so that the pressure of said wheel on the 
work will be more or less yielding, the verti 
cal adjustments of the outer end of the arm 
D and of the said wheel being effected by the 
nut f on the upper threaded end of the post 
a and by the adjusting or stop screwg, tapped 
through a lug d on the arm D and abutting 
against the top of the post at on the base 
plate A. 
The shaft E is provided near its end with 
a ratchet-wheele', adjacent to which and piv 
oted on said shaft is an arm h, provided with 
a spring-pressed pawl i, engaging said ratchet 
wheel. The arm or pawl carrier h is oper 
ated from an eccentric J on the driving-shaft 
Kin the overhanging arm I of the machine, 
the eccentric-strap being connected to Said 
arm by the rod M through a pin in, having a 
dovetailed slide n' fitting in a groove in the 
said pawl-carrying arm h and having on its 
outer threaded end a set-nut . The slide 
may thus be adjustably secured in different 
positions in said grooved arm, nearer to or 
farther from its pivotal point, to vary the 
throw of the speed of rotation of the feed 
wheel, as will be readily understood. Back 
ward movement of the ratchet-wheel is pre 
vented by the detent e. 
The Singer overseaming sewing-machine, 
to which my invention is shown applied as in 
Fig.1, makes an overseaming stitch in a Well 
known manner by reciprocating the needle 
bar and needle horizontally, so that the nee 
dle will descend alternately in different ver 
tical planes, the needle descending at one 
stitch over the edge of the work and at the 
next or puncturing stitch through the work, 
the edge of which is turned up at an inclina 
tion, as shown in Fig. 7, thus finishing the 
edge of the work by an overseam, which is 
almost entirely invisible on the face or pile 
side thereof. 
In the use of my attachment the work u is 
inserted beneath the feed-wheel e, with its 
edge bent down in the passage between the 
work-support a' and in contact with the guide 
B, the portion of the workin the said passage 
and beneath the fingers b, and b' overhang 
ing said passage being bent over at an angle 
of about forty-five degrees to the vertical 
plane in which the needle reciprocates, so that 
the needle in making puncturing stitches 
will have a comparatively deep engagement. 
from the edge of the work at the upper side 
thereof, but will come out much closer to the 
-edge on the lower side thereof, as shown in 
Fig. 7, so that the overseam will show but 
55 
45 
75 
little on the lower or face side of the work, 
but will be well anchored into the work at 
the upper or back side thereof, thus binding 
and finishing the edge thereof in a smooth, 
Thus it will 
strong, and substantial manner. 
be understood that it is essential to the oper 
ation of my invention to have the upper sur 
face of the work-support a? elevated above 
the base of the edge-guide B, and that it is 
desirable that there should be one or more 
fingers (preferably two, as shown) overhanging 
the space between said guide and Work-Sup 
port to turn up the portion of the work in 
said passage partly edgewise, the said fingers 
extending over the work-support enough to 
steady and hold the work. As hereinbefore 
stated, these fingers are preferably formed 
on the guide B, as shown, but they might be 
separate therefrom and supported from the 
machine-arm above. 
The working or guiding edge of the guide 
B is inclined relative to a vertical plane, or 
the plane in which the needle reciprocates, as 
hereinbefore stated, for the purpose of pre 
senting the edge of the work to be overseamed 
in an inclined position, as more clearly shown 
in Fig. 7; and the term an inclined guide 
for the edge of the work, as employed in the 
claims of this specification, will therefore be 
understood to mean a guide the working or 
guiding edge of which is inclined relative to 
a vertical plane, or the plane in which the 
needle reciprocates. 
I claim 
1. A sewing-machine attachment compris 
ing an inclined guide for the edge of the work 
and a work-support, the upper surface of 
which is elevated above said guide, said work 
support being separated from said guide to 
form a work-passage between them and in 
which passage the edge of the work is pre 
sented to the needle at an inclination to the 
vertical plane in which the latter reciprocates, 
combined with an overseaming mechanism in 
which the needle descends alternately in dif 
ferent vertical planes. 
2. A sewing-machine attachment compris 
ing an inclined guide for the edge of the work, 
combined with a work-support the uppersur 
face of which is elevated above the base of 
Said guide, said work-support being separated 
from Said guide to form a passage, between 
them, and one or more fingers overhanging 
Said passage, whereby the portion of the work 
in Said passage will be presented to the nee 
dle at an inclination to the vertical plane, in 
which the latter reciprocates, as set forth. 
3. A sewing-machine attachment compris 
ing a guide for the edge of the work, combined 
With a Work-support the upper surface of 
which is elevated above the base of said 
guide, Said Work-support being separated from 
Said guide to form a work-passage between 
them, and the floor of said passage, being 
constructed with a rearwardly-rising incline 
to turn in the pile at the edge of the fabric. 
4. A sewing-machine attachment compris 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
IO 
IIS 
I 25 
 
464,066 - 
3 
8. The combination, with the base-plate A, 35 
7. The combination, with the base-plate A, 
of the guide B, attached thereto and having 
the fingers and b', with the recess bbetween 3o 
them, the work-support a', the surface of 
which is elevated above the base of said 
guide, and a feeding device arranged above 
said work-support. 
having the elevated Work-support a, the 
standard or block a, and the posts a and C, 
of the guide B, separated from said work 
Support to form a passage between said sup 
port and guide, the latter having the fingers 
band b' extending over said passage, the arm 
D, sustained by said standard or block, the 
shaft E, journaled in said arm and provided 
with a feed-wheel e and the ratchet-wheele', 
the pawl-carrier h and its pawl, means for 45 
operating said pawl-carrier, the stop-screw g, 
tapped in Said arm, and the adjusting-nutf 
on the threaded upper end of the said posta. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHAS, H. FOSTER, 
s 
Witnesses: 
J. G. GREENE, 
J. F. JAQUITH, 
IO 
ing a work-guide having an inclined guiding 
edge, a work-support separated from said 
guide to form a work-passage between them, 
and the floor of said passage being provided 
with a rearwardly-rising incline, combined 
with one or more fingers overhanging said 
Work-passage. 
5. A sewing-machine attachment compris 
ing an inclined guide for the edge of the work, 
combined with a support separated from 
said guide to form a passage between them 
and having its upper surface elevated above 
the base of said guide, one or more fingers 
extending over said passage, a feeding device 
or wheel arranged above said work-support, 
and means for operating said feeding device. 
6. The combination, with the base-plate A, 
of the guide B, having one or more project 
ing fingers, the elevated Work-supporta', sep 
arated from said guide to form a passage be 
tween them and over which passage said fin 
gers extend, the spring support or armD, con 
nected with said base-plate but raised above 
the same, the shaft E, journaled in said sup 
port or arm and carrying the feeding-wheel 
e, overhanging said work-support, and means 
for intermittingly rotating said shaft, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464166.txt	W. WENULETH. 
EWAPORATING APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented DeC, l, 1891. 
 
  
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 464,166. 
 
 
  
N  
6/3 
WITNESSES, a 
S-NN INN 
SSISS 
S 
e4/62a SES SO's 2. %2. 47-64 
BY a 24-26 
WVEWTOR 
R 
 
N 
s 
ATTORNEYS 
THE MORRs is rers co, F-oto-ITHo, washingtoN, o, e. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 464,166. 
Patented Dec. 1, 1891. 
 
 
ez ZZZZ 
WITNESSES 
BY 
/NVENTOR 
ATTORNEYS 
ORRs ETRs 
o., WASHNGTON, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELMI VENULETH, OF DARMSTADT, GERMANY. 
EVAPORATING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,166, dated December 1, 1891. 
Application filed April 14, 1890, Serial No, 347,868, (No model.) 
I the water of condensation therein into the 
central longitudinal hollow part of the shaft, 
so that the heating-surfaces are kept free 
from Water of condensation, and will conse 
quently better transmit the heat. The whole 
arrangement will effect strong circulation of 
the mash, which insures a rapid evaporation. 
The peculiar fan-shaped form of the heat 
ing-pipes, the heating-surfaces of which are 
located in the planes of rotation, will prevent 
the burning of the mash on the heating-sur 
faces, while in consequence of the continued 
friction and motion of mash and heating-sur 
faces no particle of the mash can settle on 
the stirrers. 
The whole apparatus is arranged slightly 
inclining toward B', in order to effect a quicker 
discharge of the water of condensation from 
the hollow shaft. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. An apparatus for evaporating, consist 
ing, essentially, of a hollow shaft, fan-shaped 
pipes arranged in pairs and on opposite sides 
of Said shaft, tenons on said pipes inserted in 
said shaft, screw-bolts connecting the pipes 
of each pair, passing through their hollow part 
and tenons, and movable valves carried by 
said screw-bolts between these tenons, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. In a Jn evaporating apparatus, the combi 
nation, With the shaft and the hollow stirrers 
having tenons, of screw-bolts passing through 
and connecting said stirrers, and movable 
plates or valves between the tenons of the stir 
rers and adapted to slide on said screw-bolts, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this Specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILHELMI VENULETH. 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD WIRTH, 
FRAN Z HASSLACHER. 
55 
65 
75 
O 
25 
s 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILHELM. VENULETH, 
a Subject of the Emperor of Germany, resid 
ing at Darmstadt, Germany, have invented 
new and useful Improvements in Evaporat 
ing Apparatus for Semi-Liquid Substances, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
In the annexed drawings, which form a 
part of this specification, Figure I represents 
a longitudinal section of the apparatus. Fig. 
2 represents a cross-section of the same, and 
Fig. 3 represents on an enlarged scale a cross 
section of the hollow shaft and stirrers. 
A hollow shaft B B rotates in a vessel A 
of suitable form-in this example of a trough 
like shape-containing the mash which is to 
be evaporated. This hollow shaft is provided 
along its entire length within the vessel with 
hollow fan - shaped stirrers C, arranged in 
pairs, as represented in the drawings, in such 
manner that the two stirrers of each pair are 
opposite each other, so that both can be fast 
ened to the shaft B B with a single screw 
bolt D. The steam used for heating purposes 
is introduced at B, passes through the hollow 
shaft and the hollow stirrers, and the water of 
condensation is discharged through the pipe F. 
As shown in Fig. 3, the stirrers are inserted 
in the shaft B B with their tenons project 
ing into the hollow thereof nearly to the cen 
ter, so that the Water of condensation collect 
ing in the lower part of the shaft hollow can 
not flow into the stirrers. In order to pre 
vent the water of condensation formed in the 
upper stirrers from dropping into the oppo 
site stirrers, I have arranged small movable 
plates or automatic valves G between the 
tenons of the stirrers and sliding on the 
screw rod or bolt D, which valves will auto 
matically drop down on and close the open 
ing or mouth of the lower stirrer. 
The rotary motion of the shaft is obtained 
by means of pulleys or wheels H. At every 
revolution of the shaft the stirrers will empty 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464266.txt	J. PEARSE & E. L. KEEHN. 
HARNESS HANGER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Dec. 1, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
No. 464,266, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 464,266, 
 
 
WITNESSES 
J. PEARSE & E. L. KEEHN. 
HARNESS HANGER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Deo. 1, 1891. 
MS 
till 
3 
29 
S736 = , 
c) 
A.E. 
ATTORNEY. 
THE MORRS PETERS co., Photo-ITHo, washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
KEEHN, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
HANGER. 
JULIUS PEARSE AND EDWARD L. 
HARNESS - 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,266, dated December 1, 1891. 
Application filed February 28, 1891, Serial No,883,296, (No model.) 
tion. 
- 
- 
desirable. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JULIUS PEARSE and 
EDWARD L. KEEHN, both citizens of the 
United States of America, residing at Denver, 
in the county of Arapahoe and State of Colo 
rado, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Harness-Hangers; and we 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
harness hangers or supporters of the class de 
signed for use by the fire departments of 
cities, where the best facilities for quick work 
in attaching the harness to the team and re 
leasing it from its supports are necessary and 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
device of the class stated which shall be sim 
ple in construction, economical in cost, reli 
able in operation, and durable in use, and 
which shall meet every requirement in a de 
vice of this kind. 
To this end the invention consists of the 
features hereinafter described and claimed, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, wherein is illustrated an embodi 
inent of the invention. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of our improved device in position for 
use, a harness being shown in position thereon. 
Only such portions of the harness are shown, 
however, as are considered necessary to illus 
trate the use of the device. Fig. 2 is a side 
view of the device in the closed position or 
at the moment the harness is released there 
from. Fig. 3 is a top view of the mechanism 
on an enlarged scale, the long arms being 
partially broken away. Fig. 4 is an enlarged 
underneath view partially broken away. 
Figs. 5 and 6 are rear and top views, respect 
ively, illustrating the rear transverse arm. 
In the views, wherein similar reference 
characters indicate corresponding parts or 
elements of the mechanism, let the numeral 
10 designate a vertical rod, to the upper ex 
tremity of which is attached a cord 11, by 
means of which the device is suspended from 
the ceiling of the room. This cord usually 
passes over guide-pulleys secured to the ceil 
ing, and is provided at its opposite extremity 
with a suitable weight, the gravity of which 
is so regulated that as soon as the harness is 
released from the supporter the device is car 
ried upward to the ceiling and entirely out 
of the way. Rod 10 passes through a suit 
able aperture in a short bar 12, which has a 
free sliding vertical movement upon said rod. 
To one extremity of bar 12 is pivoted one ex 
tremity of an arm 13, extending forward and 
terminating in a hook 14, over which is passed 
a ring 15, slidingly secured to a metal strap 
16, having its extremities made fast to the col 
lar 17, thus forming an elongated eye, which 
permits the collar to be locked upon the 
horse without releasing it from the support. 
To the opposite extremity of bar 12 is pivoted . 
another arm 18, which extends backward and 
forms a support for the rear transverse bar 
19, which is centrally pivoted thereon. Bar 
19 terminates at its extremities in hooks 20, 
over which pass rings or eyes 21, secured to 
straps made fast to the tugs 23 on each side 
of the harness. To the lower extremity of 
rod 10 are pivoted two pairs of arms 24, one 
pair extending forward and the other back 
ward, these pairs being respectively pivoted 
to arms 13 and 18. Arm 13 is provided with 
a movable weight 9 for the purpose of bal 
ancing the mechanism, since the rear portion 
is heavier than the forward portion when the 
device is supported at its longitudinal center 
and the corresponding parts made of the same 
gravity, which is preferable. This weight is 
regulated by a set-screw 8. 
Centrally pivoted upon bar 12 is a bell 
cranklocking-lever 25, terminating at the outer 
extremity of its upper arm in an eye, into 
which is tied or otherwise suitably secured a 
cord 26, which should terminate within con 
venient reach of the driver when in his seat 
and ready to leave the barn. The free ex 
tremity of the lower arm of lever 25 termi 
nates in a hook 27, adapted to engage the pivot 
28, which connects rod 10 with arms 24, said 
pivot being of sufficient length for the pur 
pose, as shown in Fig. 4. Rod 10 consists of 
two parts 10 and 10, pivoted at 29 and form 
ing a joint the parts of which move freely upon 
25 
35 
o 
45 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95. 
IOO 
c 
464,266 
. 
. 
. 
O 
therefrom. 
each other. The object of this joint is to al 
low the device to adapt itself to the position 
of the horses in case they should take a few 
steps, as is often the case, after the harness is 
attached, but before the device is released 
In the use of the device the horse Walks un 
der the harness when in the position upon the 
supporter as shown in Fig. 1. From this 
view it will be observed that the outside of 
the harness is supported higher than the in 
ner side. This position is permitted by reason 
of bar 19 being pivoted upon arm. 18, as 
hereinbefore explained, and results from the 
fact that when the collar is unhooked from 
the neck of the horse the outer side is thrown 
upward to the position shown, the inner side 
being held back by a chain 30, which is se 
cured to the collar at one extremity and to the 
outer end of the pole or tongue of the vehicle 
at the opposite extremity, the two chains 
30 forming the neck-yoke for the team. Hence 
as the outer side of the collar is drawn from 
the locked position the corresponding side of 
the harness is raised, the opposite side drawn 
down, and bar 19 tilted to the position shown 
in Fig. 1, its outer extremity being higher 
than its inner extremity, and the harness so 
raised on the outside as to permit the horse 
to walk thereunder freely and without coming 
in contact with its parts. When the collar is 
locked around the neck of the horse, the tugs 
being already hooked to chains 35, secured to 
the whiffletrees, the driver pulls cord 26, which 
releases lever 25 from the locking position, 
when the weight of the harness causes the de 
vice to assume at Once the position shown in 
Fig. 2, the inner extremities of arms 13 and 
18 being raised while the Outer arms are 
drawn inward, thus releasing the harness 
from the device, which is immediately drawn 
up out of the way, as heretofore explained, 
the parts at the same time returning to the 
locked position, as shown in Fig. 1. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim is 
1. A harness-hanger consisting of a vertical 
supporting-rod, a bar or block slidingly se 
cured thereon, two arms 13 and 18, pivoted to 
block 12 at opposite sides of the rod, arm 13 
So 
extending forward and terminating in a hook 
- and arm 18 extending backward and provided 
with a transverse horizontal bar 19, centraily 
secured thereto at its outer extremity, bar 19, 
terminating in hooked extremities, and two 
arms 24, pivoted at their Outer extremities to 
rods 13 and 18, respectively, at equal dis 
tances from block 12, the opposite extremities 
of said last-named arms being both pivoted 
to the lower extremity of rod 10, and suitable 
55 
45 
35 
s 
means of locking the sliding block in such a 
position on its rod as to maintain arms 13 and 
18 in a horizontal position or in a position ap 
proximating the horizontal, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A harness-hanger consisting of a Sup 
porting-rod 10, provided at a suitable point 
between its extremities with a flexible joint, 
a block 12, slidingly secured on said rod, two 
arms 13 and 18, pivoted to block 12 upon op 
posite sides of rod 10, arm 13 extending for 
ward and terminating in a hook and arm 18 
extending backward and provided with a 
transverse cross-bar centrally secured to the 
outer extremity of the arm, bar 19, terminat 
ing in hooked extremities, two bars 24, having 
their outer extremities pivoted to arms 13 and 
18, respectively, at a suitable distance from 
block 12, the opposite extremities of arms 24 
being both pivoted to rod 10 below the joint, 
and means for locking block 12 in a suitable 
position upon its rod, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
3. A harness-hanger consisting of a sup 
porting-rod 10, a block 12, slidingly secured 
thereon, arms 13 and 18, pivoted to block 12 
On Opposite sides of the rod, one arm 13 ex 
tending forward and provided with a hook to 
support the collar and artn 18 extending back 
Ward and provided with a transverse arm piv 
oted thereon and provided with hooks at its 
extremities to support the rear part of the 
harness, and two arms 24, pivoted at their 
outer extremities to arms 13 and 18, respect 
ively, and pivoted at their inner extremities 
to the supporting-rod at a suitable point, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. A harness-hanger consisting of a sup 
porting-rod 10, a block 12, slidingly secured 
thereon, arms 13 and 18, pivoted to block 12 
On opposite sides of the block, rod 13 extend 
ing forward and fashioned to support the har 
ness in front and rod 18 extending backward 
and provided with a transverse bar secured 
thereon and fashioned to support the harness 
in the rear, two arms 24, pivoted at their outer 
extremities to rods 13 and 18, respectively, 
their inner extremities being pivoted to rod 
10 at a suitable point, and a locking-lever 
fulcrumed on block 12 and adapted to auto 
matically maintain said block in a suitable 
position upon the supporting-rod, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JULIUS PEARSE. 
EDWARD I. KEEPHN. 
Witnesses: 
WM. McCoNNELL, 
F. H. JOHNSON. 
75 
95 
OC) 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464367.txt	106, COMPOSITIONS, 
COATING OR PLASTIC, 
84 
SMITII. W. KIMBLE, OF DENVER, COLORAO, ASSIGNOR TO THE MICA 
ASBETITE INSULATING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
INSULATING COMPOSITION. 
o 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,367, dated December 1, 1891. 
Application filed February 24, 1891, Serial No. 382,577, (No specimens.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, SMITH.W. KIMBLE, a resi 
dent of Denver, Arapahoe county, Colorado, 
and a citizen of the United States of America, 
have invented a new and useful Improve 
linent in Insulating Compositions, which im 
provement is fully set forth in the following 
specification. 
This invention relates to the production of 
compositions of matter having the properties 
of high electrical resistance and of self-lubri 
infinist, Water DOO 
y reason of these properties 
tion or compositions produced according to 
this invention are capable of many industrial 
applications. 
Mica, which is an essential ingredient of 
the compositions herein described, has been 
long recognized as an efficient substance for 
insulating electrical conductors, as capable of 
resisting the action of fire, and also as an anti 
friction substance; but difficulty has been 
experienced in attempting to combine this 
inineral with other substances which will pro 
duce a plastic moldable compound without 
impairing the properties mentioned. When 
compounded with shellac and resinous sub 
stances, the resulting product lacks strength 
and cohesion, and therefore is usually com 
bined with metal strengthening plates or 
pieces. 
Moreover, binding agents of this 
character are more or less inflammable or sub 
ject to the influence of heat. 
It has been proposed heretofore to consoli 
date finely-divided mica with soluble glass 
(silicate of soda) alone; but while these sub 
stances unite under high pressure in a mold 
the mass is elastic and swells out as soon as 
pressure is removed. It has also been pro 
posed to combine the mica and silicate of 
Soda with earthy substances, such as lime, 
sand, plaster-of-paris, or paris-white; but the 
chemical action between the alkaline silicate 
and the line in any form produces effects that 
are very detrimental. To obtain a composi 
tion suitable for the purposesindicated herein, 
I have found it necessary to exclude lime en 
tirely. 
According to my invention compositions 
are formed by combining mica and silicate of 
soda (preferably in the form of soluble glass) 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
with another mineral substance or substances 
which will promote cohesion of the several in 
gredients and enable the compound to be 
molded by pressure to any desired form with- 55 
out changing its shape after pressure is re 
moved. Of these mineral substances several 
may be specified which have the properties 
necessary for the purposes of this invention. 
I obtain good results by the use of a peculia' 6o 
variety of tale mined in Colorado and there 
known as "Chinese tallow.' It is important 
to use talc free fron line or its compounds 
which are often found in association with it; 
otherwise the mass, instead of being tough, 65 
hard, and coherent, will be liable to disinte 
gration. The presence and chemical action 
of lime are also indicated by a frost-like film 
or crust which gathers on the exterior of the . 
molded article. 
In place of talc I have used with good ef 
fect feldspar ground to a very fine powder 
tied to 
very fine EEE asbestus 
a fine state of division. It will be understood, 
therefore, that these substance are equiva 
lents for talc for the purposes of this inven 
tion. 
In preparing the coln position I take, say, 
forty parts, by weight, of mica in the form 
known as atomized lea, ofty parts of 
talc or its equivalent, and about three parts 
of silicate of soda. These proportions may of 
corse vary. 
he materials are thoroughly 
mixed or incorporated by attrition, using any 
well-known mixing apparatus. The mass at 
this stage does not contain sufficient moisture 
to make it pasty or coherent, but is in a loose 
conditio 
When subjected, however, to a 
pressure of, say, five th 
the 
square inch, more or less, it compacts into a 9o 
dense solid coherent mass and retains its ... 
shape perfectly after t 
ressure is renoved. , ? 
vention to avoid excess of moisture. When, 
say, from three to five percent. Of Water-glass 95 
is used in making the mixture, this e s 
contains all the moisture necessary for proper 
action under the press. If the silicate is used 
in the form of dr 
Stas, two percent, of 
water, or thereabout, must be added. The ico 
amount of water is so slight that its presence 
is scarcely noticeable, and it will not cause 
. . . 
75 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
. 
, 4, 
is of importance in carrying out the in-A, ?; 
- 
- 
. .2 
| 
 
464,867 
cohesion of the particles under moderate 
pressure. Nevertheless when high pressure 
is applied, as above specified, it produces a 
compact and tenacious mass. 
In drying it is desirable, though not neces 
Sary, to use moderate heat to assist in expel 
ling the little moisture which the article con 
tains. 
In order to make the mass thoroughly wa 
ter-proof and also to increase its density, I 
treat it. With parafine Qr other analogous Wa 
ter-proof substance. 
It has been common heretofore to water 
proof various substances and articles by im 
mersing them in paraffine liquefied by heat. 
For the purposes of this invention it is de 
sirable to cause the paraffine to permeate the 
interior of the mass, and this I effect by heat 
ing the latter to 150 Fahrenheit and upward 
and then treating it with pariffine. The mass 
being thus heated throughout, the paraffine 
does not congeal at or near the surface, but 
is drawn into all the pores of the article. 
For such cases as require a very hard and re 
fractory compound I add to the above in 
gredients sulphur either in the form of com 
mercial 
E. or as a natural sul 
phur compound, such as iron, copper, or an 
imony.pyrites. This subcompound is within 
eG eand scope of my invention. I 
do not, however, claim specifically a compo 
sition of sulphur, mica, asbestus, and silicate 
of soda, as I have inade a separate applica. 
tion therefor, filed February 26, 1891, Serial 
No. 382,871. 
These compounds are useful in the manu 
facture of electrical appliances and in many. 
plastic: 
other industries in which moldable 
substances are used, being particularly ap 
plicable to devices in which it is desired to 
tang 
combine or mold the 
against or around metallic or other parts. 
t 
is useful for lining or surfacing journal-boxes 
and other friction-bearings, particularly in 
case of devices that are difficult of access for 
oiling. The sheaves on which the cables of 
traction railways are supported is an example. , 
The material can be readily sawed or drilled 
or otherwise acted on by edge-tools. 
A screw 
thread can be cut upon it when desired. 
plastice 
I claim 
The composition described, consisting, es 
sentially, of pulverized mica, silicate of soda, 
and a mineral substance, such as talc free 
from lime, combined and molded under press 
ure, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
SMITH W. KMBI.E. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP MAURO, 
JONA. B. CILLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464467.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 464,467 
A. J. TUCKER 
DANDY ROLT FOR PAPER MACHINES, 
Patented Deo. l 
1891 
 
Mr. 
the Noarts FTERs co, Photo-Litko, washi NGron, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW J. TUCKER, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
CHENEY BIGELOW WIRE WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
DANDY-ROLL FOR PAPER-MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,467, dated December 1, 1891. 
Application filed November 22, 1890, Serial No, 372,329, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW J. TUCKER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at 
Springfield, in the county of Hampden and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Dandy-Rolls for 
Paper-Machines, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to dandy-rolls for 
paper-machines and to other parts intimately 
related to such rolls, the object being to so 
mount the roll for its usual action with rela 
tion to the Web that the axial shaft heretofore 
found in dandy-rolls may be omitted, so that 
a jet-pipe may be introduced within and along 
the roll Without interference with the rotation 
of same for insuring the discharge of water 
against the side of the roll for freeing the lat 
ter of any fiber or pulp which may be taken 
up from the web. 
The invention has for its object, also, other 
improvements in the dandy-roll appliances. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts, all substantially as 
will hereinafter more fully appear, and be set 
forth in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
the dandy-roll and of the devices for support 
ing and constraining same for its proper move 
ments, parts, however, being broken away 
and shown in horizontal section. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical cross-section on line 22, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 
3 is a perspective view of an end portion of the 
apron and trough to be hereinafter more par 
ticularly referred to, and Fig. 4 is a perspec 
tive representation of the adjustable supports 
for the guide-rollers which are combined with 
the dandy-roll, 
In the drawings, A A represent the side 
Standards of a paper-making machine or a 
portion thereof, and B represents a horizontal 
layer of felt, as usual, above which the dandy 
roll C is mounted for rotation. The dandy 
roll C is of any usual construction, so far as 
the cylindrical shell or annulus for rolling on 
the web is concerned; but it will be seen that 
the heads a of the roll are formed by rings, 
which are entirely open and free as to their 
central portion, there being no axial shaft or 
axial bearings for the roll. The roll rests upon 
the said layer. B, or in the running of the ma 
chine upon the web of paper upon said layer, 
and is confined against any movement across 
its axis or in the direction of the travel of the 
web by the rollers b b bb, which are mounted 55 
on the uprights d, the axes of said rollersbe 
ing about in the same horizontal plane as the 
axis of the dandy-roll, so that there is a space 
between the periphery of front and rear pairs 
of said rollers equal to the diameter of the end 6o 
rings or flangesa of the dandy-roll, which rings 
form a continuous and even circular bearing 
for the dandy-roll; and, of course, owing to such 
relation of the rollers b b with the flange-rings 
a no impediment is constituted to the rising 65 
and falling of the dandy-roll, which rising 
and falling movements in practice are within 
very slight and almost imperceptible limits. 
The rolls b b are vertically adjustable on their 
supports of the machine-frame, so as to ac- 7o 
commodate themselves as to their height and 
degree of separation to the different sizes of 
dandy-rolls or to the different sizes of the 
bearing-rings on the extremities thereof, and 
a practical means for constituting such ad- 75 
justable support consists in the block f, on 
which the pintleg for a roller b is provided, 
which is vertically adjustable on the uprights 
did, which uprights in turn are adjustable hori 
Zontally toward and from each other on the 8o 
machine-frame and transversely of the axis of 
the dandy-roll. As particularly shown, the 
uprights clhave vertical waysh therein, within 
which the tonguesi of the blocks f fit, and 
the said uprights are vertically slotted, as at 85 
i, through which slots the studs k of said 
blocks pass, the said studs receiving on their 
extremities, which are screw-threaded, con 
fining-bolts m. The feet or bases of the up 
rights d are slotted, as at n, whereby said up- 9o 
rights are capable of the transverse move 
ment above mentioned about the bolts p when 
the nuts thereon are suitably loosened. 
The jet-pipe D, which is horizontally and 
longitudiually extended through the dandy- 95 
roll, substantially as shown, is coupled by its 
ends to suitable pipes, one of which constitutes 
the water supply pipe for said jet-pipe D, 
whereby water under suitable pressure may 
be supplied to the jet-pipe, the pipe coupled at Ioo 
45 
-2 
464,467 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the other end serving, if desired, to carry off 
any Surplus Water, or Water may be introduced 
under pressure to the jet-pipe at either end 
thereof. The jet-openings of the pipe D are 
Opposite and directed toward one side of the 
dandy-roll-say, perhaps, at about a line hori 
- Zontally opposite the axis of the roll, outside 
of which latter is the apron or shield E, which 
is Suitably upwardly extended and is also 
downwardly extended from the line opposite 
the jet-openings of the pipe D, conforming 
more or less closely to the curve of the roll, 
the bottom of the apron having a turned-up 
portion at its lower extremity to form a trough, 
which is ranged in a line inside of and under 
a line on the dandy-roll at which the water 
jet from the pipe D impinges. The greater 
proportion of the Water projected against the 
side of the dandy - roll passes outwardly 
through the mesh thereof, carrying therewith 
pulp or fiber which may be lodged on the 
outer wire-cloth; but substantially all of the 
residue of the water which may not be forced 
horizontally through the interstices of the 
dandy-roll will drip through the mesh and be 
received by the apron-trough almost directly 
after being thrown against the inner side of 
the roll. 
The trough-provided apron is supported on 
the standards A of the machine through means 
of the feet 7', it being practicable to form the 
apron and trough and said supporting-feet 
integrally of sheet metal or other suitable 
material. 
By the employment of dandy-rolls and con 
straining devices therefor substantially as de 
Scribed there is consequently a considerable 
economy, for the dandy-roll, having its ends 
formed by the open flange-rings and without 
any shaft or axial bearing, may be produced 
at less expense than would be the case were 
such shaft or axial bearings comprised there 
in; and having provided one set of the bear 
ing and constraining rollers and the adjust 
able sets therefor on the paper-machine such 
Set of devices suffices for an indefinite time, 
and dandy-rolls may be replaced time and 
time again, as may be necessary, and without 
the expense of also providing new bearing 
portions or devices therefor other than the 
flanges Or rings C. C., having even and con 
tinuous peripheries, and which rings neces 
Sarily form a part of the dandy-roll structure. 
It is a well-known fact that dandy-rolls 
vary greatly in diameter, there being hardly 
any two of exactly the same size, and the 
means set forth for accommodating varying 
sized rolls and so mounting them that they 
may have slight rising and falling move 
ments instead of being rigidly confined and 
So that without complicated or expensive con 
trivances the longitudinally-running jet-pipe 
may have its arrangement within the roll and 
yet not constitute any impediment to the 
movement or motion of the dandy-roll are 
most simple, practical, and convenient. 
v 
Having fully described my invention, What 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is-- 
1. The combination, with a dandy-roll and i 
a support therefor at the under portion there 
of, which support extends substantially the 
entire length of the dandy-roll, of rollers 
which bear peripherally on the portions of 
the roll next to its ends at the front and real' 
thereof, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
2. The combination, with a dandy-roll and 
a support therefor at the under side thereof, 
which support extends substantially the en 
tire length of the dandy-roll, of rollers which 
bear peripherally on the portions of the 
dandy-roll next to its ends at the front and 
rear thereof which are adjustable to the bear 
ing portions of dandy-rolls which are of dif 
ferent diameters, for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with a dandy-roll Sup 
ported and constrained for its rotary move 
ment and also for a slight rising-and-falling 
movement and having its ends and central 
portion open and unobstructed, substantially 
as described, of a jet-pipe, as D, longitudi 
nally ranged through the said roll and hav 
ing connected thereto a water-supply pipe, 
and said jet-pipe being entirely free from and 
without engagement with any portion of Said 
roll, for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with a dandy-roll Sup 
ported and constrained for its rotary move 
ment and having its ends and central portion 
open and unobstructed, substantially as de 
scribed, of a jet-pipe longitudinally ranged 
through the said roll, and the apron E, Oppo 
site the said jet-pipe and outside of the roll, 
provided with the trough q, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
5. The combination, with a dandy-roll suit 
ably supported by its under portion, having 
its ends and central portion unobstructed, 
substantially as described, and rollers which 
bear peripherally on the portions of the dandy 
roll next to its ends at the front and real 
thereof, of a jet-pipe longitudinally ranged 
through the said dandy-roll and having cont 
nected thereto a water-supply pipe, and said 
jet-pipe being entirely free from and without 
any engagement with any portion of Said roll, 
for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination, with a dandy-roll Sup 
ported by its under portion and the uprights 
did, each provided with the vertical way h. 
and slot i, of the blocksf, each provided with 
the tonguei, which fits in said way, and the 
stud k, which plays through said slots, and 
the nut in, which engages with said stud, and 
the rollers to b, mounted for rotation on Said 
blocksf, all arranged in the manner and for 
the purpose set forth. 
7. The combination, with a dandy-roll and 
a support therefor at the under side thereof, 
and the uprights did, each provided with a 
slot , and confining-bolts p, whereby said 
90 
95 
CO 
loS 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
464,467 
8. The combination, with the frame of the and bearings for constraining the roll for its 2d 
uprights are adjustable transversely of the of the machine, all substantially as and for 15 
axis of the dandy-roll, of the rollers b b and the purpose described. 
9. A dandy-roll having its ends and inter 
supports on which said rollers freely rotate, 
which supports are vertically adjustable on nal portions open and unobstructed, substan 
the said uprights, substantially as described. tially as described, combined with a support 
machine and a dandy-roll supported and con- rotary movement, and a jet-pipe extended 
fined for a rotary movement and having its into said roll through the open end thereof 
ends and central portion open and unob- and supported independently of the roll, for 
structed, of a jet-pipe longitudinally extended the purposes set forth. 
through said dandy-roll, having connected 
thereto a water-supply conduit, the apron E, 
having the trough q, and the feet r, through . 
which said apronis supported from the frame 
ANDREW J., TUCKER. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. CHAPIN, 
G. M. CHAMBERLAIN. 
v 
O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464567.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. B. HUNTER. 
SASH OPERATING DEWICE, 
 
No. 464,567, 
1, 
Patented De 0, 8, 1891. 
fi TV 
Fiql 
11 it i? ill 
less-(e) 
|||| 
ill 
Illi', 'litti littl'iik. 'I hia 
Elit, I 
Ez l, it'.",". "I 
lull"i"infilly 
III, III, III. 
E. & 
Eas S. Sa S RS N 
S S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WALTER J. B. HUNTER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
SASH-OPERATING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,567, dated December 8, 1891. 
Application filed February 3, 1891, Serial No. 379,954, (No model.) 
4O 
So 
or lowering the sash, as desired. Both sashes 
are operated in the same way. The arrange 
ment of the chains one above the other, as 
specified, renders both chains readily ac 
cessible. 
45 
Some of the advantages of my invention 
are that the window cannot be opened from 
the outside, the mechanism is compact and 
requires little space in the pulley-stile, mak 
ing it practical to construct the frames of iron 
instead of Wood, and the sash can be more 
easily taken out of the frame. 
I do not wish to limit myself to the exact 
construction shown and described, as the same 
may be slightly varied without departing 
from the spirit of my invention. 
I am aware of English patents No. 1,252 of 
1881 and No. 5,770 of 1829, and make no claim 
to the invention therein disclosed. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The herein-described device for raising and 
lowering window-sashes, consisting of a win 
dow-casing provided with a recess underneath 
the sill, a door for closing said recess, window 
sashes mounted to slide in the casing and pro 
vided with racks E, rods F, arranged in each 
side of the casing and provided with Worms 
to engage said racks and having sprocket 
wheels on their lower ends within the recess 
in the casing, and sprocket-chains connecting 
said rods in pairs and arranged within the 
said recess one above the other, substantially 
as set forth. 
55 
WALTER J. B. HUNTER. 
Witnesses: 
L. V. LEMOYNE, 
F. J. LEMOYNE. 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, WALTER J. B. HUNTER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, county of Cook, State of Illinois, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Devices for Raising and Lowering Sashes, of 
Which the following is a specification. 
My invention consists of details of con 
Struction and operation hereinafter more fully 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claim. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a window 
With part of the casing broken away, showing 
my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional view on 
lines 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a sectional view on 
lines 33, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a sectional view on 
lines 44, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is an edge view of a 
portion of the sash, showing the racks. 
A represents the window-frame; B, the 
lower Sash; C, the upper sash; D, the worm 
Screws; E, the racks; F, the rods; G, the 
chain-wheels; H, the chains, and I the door 
in the window-apron. The worm-screws D 
are set into the pulley-stile with their threads 
projecting beyond its face, one a little above 
the other, the upper one engaging the rack 
On the upper sash and the lower one the rack 
on the lower sash. These worm-screws are 
attached to one end of the rods F and the 
chain-wheels G to the other end. Both sides 
of the Window are provided with racks, worm 
Screws, &c., in the same manner. The chain 
wheels G are connected by the chains Hin 
order to revolve the worm-screws on each side 
simultaneously. 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
The door I is raised and the chains H drawn 
from one side to the other by the hand revolv 
ing the worm-screws on each side and raising 
w 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464667.txt	(No Model.) 
N. TESLA, 
ELECTRICAL CONDENSER, 
No. 464,667. 
Patented Dec. 8, 1891. 
A27.7 
  
   
NAN 
P 
NyayyyyaraxNyas 
 
Wavzesses 
72%aezvaze- 
face /8w-4-1, 
 
7u? 
Avazyevzaoz' 
&rea 44& 
&/ 44 
22eavyzeys. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
NIKOLATESLA, OF 
NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRICAL CONDEN SER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,667, dated December 8, 1891. 
Application filed August 1, 1891, 
Serial No,401.356, (No model) 
45 
tionary plates, and Fig. 2 is a similar view of 
a condenser With adjustable plates. 
I use any suitable box or receptacle A to 
contain the plates or armatures. These lat 
ter are designated by B and C and are con 
nected, respectively, to terminals D and E, 
which pass out through the sides of the case. 
The plates ordinarily are separated by strips 
of porous insulating material F, which are 
used merely for the purpose of maintaining 
them in position. The space within the can 
is filled with oil G. Such a condenser will 55 
prove highly efficient and will not become 
heated Or permanently injured. 
In many cases it is desirable to vary or ad 
just the capacity of a condenser, and this I 
provide for by securing the plates to adjust 
able supports-as, for example, to rods II 
passing through stuffing-boxes IK in the sides 
of the case A and furnished with nuts L, the 
ends of the rods being threaded for engage 
ment with the nuts. 
It is well known that oils possess insulating 
properties, and it has been a common prac 
tice to interpose a body of oil between two 
conductors for purposes of insulation; but I 
have discovered peculiar properties in oils 
which render them very valuable in this par 
ticular form of device, their employment in 
which has never heretofore and, so far as I 
am aware, been regarded as necessary or even 
desirable. 
65 
7 O 
75 
What I claim is 
1. An electric condensel composed of plates 
2. An electrical condenser composed of 
i or armatures immersed in oil. 
plates or armatures adjustable with respect 8o 
to one another and immersed in oil. 
NIKOA TESLA. 
Witnesses: 
PARKER. W. PAGE, 
MARCELLA. G. TRACY, 
To cult, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, NIKOLA TESLA, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Electrical Condensers, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings. 
The subject of my present application is a 
new and improved electrical condenser con 
structed with a view of obviating certain de 
fects which I have observed to exist in the or 
dinary forms of Such apparatus When em 
ployed in the system devised by me of pro 
ducing light and other effects, by means of 
currents of high frequency and high poten 
tial. 
I have found that insulating material such 
as glass, mica, and, in general, those bodies 
which possess the highest specific inductive 
capacity are inferior as insulators in such 
devices when currents of the kind described 
are employed to those possessing high insu 
lating power, together with a smaller specific 
inductive capacity, and I have also found that 
it is very desirable to exclude all gaseous mat 
ter from the apparatus, or any access to the 
same to the electrified Surfaces, in order to 
prevent heating by molecular bombardment 
and the loss or injury consequent thereon. I 
have found that I may accomplish these re 
sults and produce highly efficient and reliable 
condensers by using oil as the dielectric, and 
in this my invention resides. 
No special construction of the condenser is 
necessary to a demonstration of the inven 
tion; but the plan admits of a particular con 
struction of condenser, in which the distance 
between the plates is adjustable, and of which 
I take advantage. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure i is 
a section of a condenser constructed in ac 
cordance with my invention and having sta 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464767.txt	(No Model.) 
C. E. W. WOODWARD, 
VEHICLE WHEEL. 
No. 464,767. 
- 
Patented De 0, 8, 1891, . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. W. WOODWARD, OF CHICOPEE FALLS, MASSACHUSETTS, AS 
SIGNOR TO THE OVERMAN WHEEL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
VEHICE WHEE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,767, dated December 8, 1891. 
Application filed November 24, 1890, Serial No, 372,444 (No model.) 
) 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLESE. W. WooD 
WARD, of Chicopee Falls, in the county of 
Hampden and State of Massachusetts, have 
invented a new Improvement in Vehicle 
Wheels; and Idohereby declare the following, 
When taken in connection with accompany 
ing drawings and the letters of reference 
marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same, and which said draw 
ings constitute part of this specification, and 
represent, in 
Figure 1, a view in transverse section of a 
rim and tire constructed in accordance with 
my invention; Figs. 2 to 10, inclusive, views 
of modified forms which they may assume. 
Heretofore hollow or inflatable tires have 
been objectionable on account of their lia 
bility to tear or fracture on or near the line 
of their attachment to the rim, where the par 
ticles of rubber, by reason of their attach 
ment thereto, are prevented from moving and 
adapting themselves to stress, without being 
forced beyond the limits of cohesion and on 
account of their liability to roll and slide 
under Severe lateral Strain. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
these difficulties and to produce a tire at once 
durable and stable. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in a wheel-rim having two outwardly-in 
clined seats for the tire to rest upon. 
My invention further consists in a tire hav 
ing its outer edges attached to the rim at 
lower points thereon than its inner edges, 
whereby a protecting body of practically in 
- ert rubber is secured between the outer lines 
of juncture and the lines on which the Se 
verest tearing strain is exerted. 
My invention further consists in a tire hav 
ing its side walls thickened upon their outer 
faces, and in certain details of construction 
and combinations of parts, as will be herein 
after described, and pointed out in the claims. 
It will be seen by an examination of the 
drawings that all of the tires shown therein 
are arch-shaped in transverse section, that 
their inner side Walls are shorter than their 
outer side walls, and that the side walls of all 
of the arches are thickened near their bases 
55 
upon their outer faces, with the exception of 
the tire shown by Fig. 10 of the drawings, 
which is of uniform thickness. It will be no 
ticed, also, that the outer edges of all of the 
tires shown by the several figures of the draw 
ings bear upon the respective rims at lower 
points thereupon than their inner edges, and 
that all of the rims, except those represented 
in Figs. 5, 6, and 8 of the drawings, have out 
wardly-inclined seats. By making the inner 
side walls of the tires shorter than their outer 
side walls and providing the rims with out 
wardly-inclined seats the tires are braced 
against lateral action, while by making the 
outer side walls of the tires relatively longer 
than their inner side Walls a freer OutWard 
or lateral displacement of the tires is secured, 
thus favoring the inward displacement under 
pressure of their middle or crowning portions 
into their interior spaces, whereby a stable 
bearing-face for the wheel to roll upon is ob 
tained. By thickening the side walls of the 
tires at their bases, as described, they are re 
enforced where the greatest lateral Strain is 
exerted, and being so re-enforced are ren 
dered less liable to roll and slide than tires of 
uniform thickness. By thickening the tires 
upon the outer rather than the inner faces of 
their side walls their interior spaces are not 
contracted and the tires are caused to project 
beyond the rims, which are thus protected 
if they are made narrower than the tires, 
which is their preferred construction. The 
location of the extra rubber upon the outer 
faces of the side walls of the tires also enables 
a greater cushioning effect to be secured from 
the rubber than if it were otherwise disposed, 
inasmuch as when solocated it is free to move 
under pressure. By joining the Outer edges 
of the tires to the rim at lower points thereon 
than their inner edges the Outer lines of junc 
ture, which are the lines on which the severest 
tearing strains are exerted in tires as ordi 
marily applied, are taken out of the range of 
those strains, which are exerted with the 
95 
greatest severity onlinespassing transversely . 
through those portions of the rim nearest to 
the crown of the tire, which will be broken. 
down, so to speak, over the rigid points of 
the rim nearest to the pressure. Although it OO 
75 
25 
35 
45 
 
464,767 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
is true that the juncture of the inner edges of 
the tire with the rim are left, under my con 
Struction, necessarily in line with the lateral 
Or tearing Strains, they are very much pro 
tected by the body of rubber between them 
and the outer surfaces of the tire and by the 
practically inert body of rubber between the 
lines of lateral strain, which I have indicated 
in Fig. 1 of the drawings by the broken line 
a, b, and the juncture of the outer edges of 
the tire with the lim. It will be observed, 
finally, that the side walls of all of the tires 
take an endwise bearing upon their rims. 
Having now spoken of the peculiarities of 
my improved construction and set forth some 
of the advantages which accrue from them, I 
will now proceed to describe the specific forms 
of tires and rims which I have chosen for 
illustration. 
As shown by Fig. 1 of the drawings, the tire 
A, which in transverse section has the form 
of a low arch, has the bases of its side walls 
turned inwardly and shaped to form pointed 
ends B B, which fit into deep grooves C C, 
formed in the opposite sides of the hollow rim 
D, the lower walls of the said grooves form 
ing OutWardly-inclined seats for the bases of 
the tire to bear upon. It will be observed 
that the Outer edges a (t of the tire are at 
tached to the rim at points thereon consider 
ably lower than its inner edges a'a', thus se 
curing a considerable body of virtually-inert 
rubber between the points C, Ct. and the broken 
line C, b, which is the line where the severest 
tearing Strain is exerted. It will be noticed, 
also, that the inner side walls c C of the tire 
are much shorter than the outer side walls c' 
c' thereof, whereby the said short inner walls, 
together with the outwardly-inclined seats 
before mentioned, form braces to resist lat 
eral strain upon the tire. It will be noticed, 
also, that the side walls of the tire are thick 
ened upon their outerfaces, whereby the tire 
is re-enforced against lateral strain, and 
therefore against tearing and fracture. The 
tire in this case is much broader than the rim 
is wide, wherefore the tire is left free to be 
displaced laterally and the rim protected 
against injury. The rim D, by virtue of its 
peculiar construction, takes a wedge-shaped 
form within the tire and prevents the same 
from being torn away from it radially. 
The tire E (shown by Fig. 2 of the draw 
ings) is broader and lower than the tire. A 
and Supported upon the outwardly-inclined 
seats E' E' of a solid rim EP, provided with 
flanges Eupon the opposite edges of its seats 
for retaining the tire in place, the bases of 
the side walls of the tire being beveled to cor 
respond to the inclination of the seats. The 
Outer faces of the side walls of this tire are 
also thickened near the bases thereof for the 
purposes specified in connection with the de 
Scription of the tire shown by Fig. 1. 
The tire F (shown by Fig. 3 of the drawings) 
has an arch of Somewhat more Stilted form 
and is supported upon the outwardly-inclined 
seats E E of a hollow rim E, the bases of the 
side walls of the tire being shaped to corro 
spond to the inclination of the said seats and 
to lap for a short distance upon the tread F. 
of the tire, the feature of construction last 
mentioned facilitating the placing of the tire 
upon the rim for its compression in being af 
fixed thereto. 
The tire G (shown by Fig. 4 of the draw 
ings) is affixed to a hollow rim G', having 
outwardly-inclined seats G. G and a concave 
tread G8, the feature of construction last men 
tioned securing a greater interior space for 
the inward displacement of the tire. In this 
case, also, the inner edges of the tire are 
lapped over upon the tread in order to facili 
tate securing it to the rim. 
The tire H (shown by Fig. 5 of the draw 
ings) is secured to a hollow rim H', having 
vertical seats H8 H, terminating at their lower 
ends in shoulders H8 II. In this case, also, 
the inner edges of the tire are overlapped 
upon the flat tread II of the rim. Although 
this rim has no outwardly-inclined Seafs, yet 
the outer edges of the tire are joined to the 
rim at lower points thereon than its inner 
edges, whereby this form of tire is brought 
within one of the fundamental features. Of 
my invention. 
Fig. 6 of the drawing shows a construction 
broadly corresponding to the construction 
shown by Fig. 5, the essential difference be 
ing that the tire I is solid instead of hollow. 
It has vertical seats I'I', terminating at their 
lower ends in retaining-flanges II, the inner 
edges II of the tire being seated upon the 
inner edges II of the rim. 
In the construction shown by Fig. 7 of the 
drawings the tire J has its ends secured to 
outwardly-inclined but convex seats J J', 
formed at the edges of a curved solid rim J. 
The tire K (shown by Fig. 8 of the draw 
ings) has the bases of its side walls rounded 
and adapted to be fitted into outwardly-in 
clined but concave seats IX' IX', formed in the 
hollow rim K. 
Fig. 9 of the drawings shows how my inven 
tion may be applied to an old crescentic rim 
L of ordinary construction, the bases of the 
side walls of a tire L', formed in accordance 
with my invention, being notched, as at LL", 
to adapt them to fit over the horns LL, SO 
to speak, of the rim. It will be noticed that 
in this case, as well as in the preceding Con 
structions, the outer edges of the tire ioin the 
rim at lower points thereon than its inner 
edges. In all of the constructions mentioned 
thus far the side walls of the tires have been 
thickened upon their outer faces and near 
their bases; but I have shown in Fig.10 a con 
struction in which that has not been done, 
the tire M being of uniform thickness and 
having the bases of its side walls beveled to 
correspond to the outwardly-inclined seats M' 
M' of the hollow rim M, which in this case is 
made in two parts. This construction, how 
ever, contains the feature of joining the outer 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
464,767 
3 
O 
23 
w 
edges of the tire at lower points on the rim 
than its inner edges. 
All of the tires mentioned thus far are 
adapted to be used withoutinflation, although 
all of them may be hermetically secured to 
their rims and filled with compressed air, if 
desired. 
Although I have shown only tires having in 
terior spaces, my invention is applicable to 
Solid tires in its feature of attaching their 
outer edges to lower points on the rim than 
their inner edges. 
It is apparent that in carrying out my in 
vention it may take still other forms than 
those herein shown and described. I would 
therefore have it understood that I do not 
limit myself to the said forms, but hold myself 
at liberty to make such changes and altera 
tions as fairly fall within the spirit and scope 
of my invention. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a wheel-rim, of a 
hollow rubber tire constructed to have its 
outer edges take a bearing at lower points 
upon the rim than its inner edges, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, with a wheel-rim hav 
ing outwardly-inclined seats, of a hollow tire 
constructed to be supported upon the said 
seats, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a wheel-rim hav 
ing outwardly-inclined seats, of a tire having 
an interior open space and its side walls 
shaped to take an endwise bearing upon the 
- 
said seats, their outer edges being secured to 
the rim at lower points thereon than their in 
ner edges, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with a wheel-rim hav 
ing outwardly-inclined seats, of a tire having. 
an interior open space and its side walls bev 
eled at their bases to take an end Wise bear 
ing upon the said inclined seats, and also 
thickened to increase the bulk of rubber to 
better resist lateral strains upon the tire, Sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination, with a wheel-rim hav 
ing outwardly-inclined seats, of a tire having 
an interior open space and its side walls beV 
eled at their bases to take an endwise bear 
ing upon the said seats and thickened upon 
their outer faces to increase the bulk of ma 
terial at the points of the greatest lateral strain 
without contracting the said interior space, 
substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with a wheel-rim hav 
ing each of its sides deeply grooved to form 
outwardly-inclined seats, of an arch-shaped 
tire having the bases of its side walls turned 
inwardly and pointed to fit into the said 
grooves, its outer edges being attached to the 
rim at lower points thereon than its inner 
edges, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
CHARIES E. W. WOODWARD. 
55 
Witnesses: 
- 
W. P. HADLEY, 
W. S. L. HAWKINS, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464868.txt	(No Model.) 
M, HEARN & M. DONNE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 464,868. 
Patented Dec. 8, 1891. 
7, 
(Zartasses. 
azz 2 &e 4-24- 
A4 42- 
ZZzvezz/ors 
(ty fi22T 
72-72 
Attorveys 
THE noRRIS FETERs co, FHoro-irko, washington, D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
M. HEARN & M. DONNE. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 464,868, 
Patented Deo. 8, 1891. 
gies 
--4-------R 
7 
WZaftesses. 
242. Suat 4 
?et. 4.1/21/zeu- 
evzzo/s 
10%zz 20-ce 
by 7%-6 
Attor/4/s. 
- 
onals perEBs co, PHOTO-tho, YASKINGTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 464,868. 
- 
8. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
M. HEARN & M. DONNE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
Patented Deo. 8, 1891. 
  
  
 
\ 
I 
l 
 
 
E. 
 
iii. If == 
itself a 
- - :----e. Z 
. 
WZZytesses. 
afzel 28te-2-24 
3 44 
5.it 
Z7zte/tt07S. 
is 
Atzov'vteyes. 
 
*RR's ETERS co, Photo-uTHo, washington, i.e. 
(No Model.) 
No. 464,868, 
M. HEARN & M. DONNE. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Deo. 8, 1891, 
22 
22 
& 23) E2 2 
ofeed 
W. 
(Stetzee A. 
A. . 
A 4% 
77tzerz?ors. 
u122C/262e.7%teetz 
2122627 222ee 
% 7-2 
The horris PETERs co, PHoro-ITHo, WASHINGTON, O. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 464,868, 
M. HEARN & M. DONNE. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Dec. 8, 1891. 
RH 
Y 
 
 
Ay:73. 
?a 
H. H. 
 
al 
Ag:12. 
 
2S 
SS 
 
 
 
 
 
7zey f6 
726-77 
 
2 2 
WZ77te5565. 
c.49% 
%. (c. %24a- 
'' 
 
eZ 7/2e2772 
anA42%2. 
v16%zz 2222ae 
7ta - 6 
Attz7tte/s. 
ty 
(No Model.) 
No. 464,868, 
 
M, HEARN & M. DONNE. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Dec. 8, 1891. 
1-|--+----------- 
 
 
97627. Zozae, 
s 
v. 
Attoryte/s 
o, Photo-urbo, wastics 
toM, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
M, HEARN & M. DONNE. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE 
8 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
No. 464,868, 
Patented Dec. 8, 1891. 
 
frzzzcesses. 
3. 
is petens co. ProTo-Tho...wash NGTort. d. c. 
(27 222a2ze. 
e7ttors 
6 
Azz7/te/5 
(/ 77tacle.-- 
(No Model.) 
M. HEARN & M. DONNE. 
r 
8. Sheets-Sheet 8. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
X 
No. 464,868. 
Patented Dec. 8, 1891. 
A3 a 
 
 
 
 
3. 
Fig.28. 
A. 
u 
tr.Ta. 
24, 222222 
?ix -4- 2-- 
 
27tfo/5 
a24 76eoz77e. 
2g22%z7z Ze???ge. 
Atzortzeys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICIIAEL HEARN AND MORGAN DONNE, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
TYPE-WRT N G MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,868, dated D2cember 8, 1891. 
Application filed October 30, 1890, Serial No. 369,858, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it nually conce77. 
Be it known that we, MICHAEL HEARN, sec 
retary to the English Type-Writer, Limited, 
of 6 Birchin Lane, in the city of London, Eng 
land, and MORGAN DONNE, manager of the 
Works of the said company, of 6 Birchin Lane 
aforesaid, have made an Improvement in 
Type - Writing Machines; and we, the said 
MICHAEL HEARN and MORGAN DONNE, do 
hereby declare the nature of the said inven 
tion and in what manner the same is to be 
performed to be particularly described and 
ascertained in and by the following statement 
thereof, reference being had to the drawings 
hereunto annexed, and to the letters marked 
thereon, like parts being indicated by simi 
lar letters of reference-that is to say: 
Figure 1 represents a plan of a machine 
constructed according to our invention. Fig. 
2 is an under side view thereof. Fig. 3 is a 
rear elevation thereof. Fig. 4 is a side eleva 
tion thereof. Fig. 5 is a vertical transverse 
section thereof, taken on the line 1 1 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. G is a detail view showing the broad 
Spacer-key and connected parts separately. 
Fig. 7 is a side view of one of the type-levers 
separately. Fig. 8 is an edge view thereof. 
Fig. 9 is a transverse section of the semicir 
cular plates or guide-comb for the type-levers. 
Fig. 10 is an elevation of part thereof. Fig. 
11 is a plan thereof. Fig. 12 is a side view of 
one of the key-levers separately, and Fig. 13 
is an end view thereof. Fig. 14 is a trans 
verse section of the slotted segment or comb 
for supporting the key-levers. 
Fig. 15 is a 
plan of part thereof. 
Fig. 16 is a sectional 
side view showing separately one of the pis 
tons or keys and connected parts for moving 
forward the paper-carriage. Fig.17 is an end 
view thereof. Fig 18 is a plan of the paper 
carriage separately. Fig. 19 is an under side 
view thereof. Fig. 20 is a rear elevation 
thereof. Fig. 21 is an end elevation thereof. 
Fig. 22 is a transverse section thereof, taken 
on the line 22 of Fig. 18. Fig. 23 is a detail 
view of the escapement-rack bar and pallets 
separately. 
Fig. 24 is a sectional elevation of 
the spring-drum and device for giving an 
audible indication during the traverse of the 
paper-carriage, and Fig. 25 is a plan thereof. 
Fig. 26 is a side view of the ribbon-spools, 
the alignment device, and connected parts 
separately. Fig. 27 is a plan thereof. Fig. 
28 is an under side view showing the shunt 
wheels and some connected parts Separately. 
Fig. 29, is an elevation of the shunt-wheels, 
the escapement - rack, and some connected 
parts separately, looking toward the rear of 
the machine. Fig. 30 is a vertical section of 
parts taken on the line 33 of Fig. 27, show 
ing a type-piece in position for printing. 
Figs. 7 to 17 and 26 to 30 are drawn to twice 
the scale of Figs. 1 to 6, while Figs. 18 to 25 
are drawn to a scale one-third less than that 
of Figs. 7 to 17 and 26 to 30. 
a represents the frame of the machine, a 
represents a casing which is attached thereto, 
and a' represents parts of the framing which 
form feet upon which the machine is sup 
ported, and b represents a cap or cover which 
incloses some of the working parts. 
c' represents the type pieces or blocks, which 
are fixed upon the upper ends of type-levers c, 
and these type-levers are mounted upon an 
axis of motion c', common to all and arranged 
in the arc of a circle. The type-levers c at 
their lower ends are cranked or curved and 
spread out or enlarged to form weighted heels 
c in order to counterbalance and normally 
retain them in a position slightly reclining 
from a vertical plane, in which position they 
rest against an india-rubber cushion or buffer 
b', arranged within a semicircular hood or 
shield b, which forms part of the cap or cover 
b, and partially incases the type-levers c, as 
shown more particularly at Fig. 5. The type 
pieces or blocks c' are each formed with an 
elongated face upon which are provided three 
distinct characters, such as a small letter of 
the alphabet, a capital letter, and a numeral, 
as will be seen more clearly in reference to 
Fig. 8, and each of these characters is capable 
of being brought into use at the times de 
sired, as hereinafter more fully described. 
The type-levers care, near to their heels c, 
formed with holes c' therein, through which is 
passed a wirect, bent into a semicircular form, 
and which constitutes their axes, and this 
bent wire c is clamped in a groove c, formed 
in one of the meeting faces of two segmental 
or semicircular plates c', which are clamped 
together by means of screws c', and are fixed 
upon a semicircular bar a, supported upon 
posts (t, forming part of the framing a, and 
3O 
35 
45 
 
75 
95 
Iod. 
2. 
464,868 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
levers c in order to give the required impulse 
the semicircular plates c' are formed with ra 
thereto, and the key-levers d are at their in 
dial open-ended slots c, within each of which 
ner ends formed with hollows or depressions d 
a type-lever c is located, and they are thus 
to receive the corresponding curved weighted 
equally spaced, while the upper one of these 
heels c of the type-levers c, and beyond such 
slotted plates c' is formed with vertical par 
hollows or depressions the key-levers d are 
tition-walls c' between each slot in order to 
formed with vertical noses d, shaped to a 
form a kind of comb to guide the type-levers 
point, and such points are so located as to 
c to the printing-point. By these means the 
strike or act upon the type-levers c near to 
type-levers may be readily and equally mount 
their axes c', and thus produce a quick or sud 
ed in position, while any one of then may be 
easily dismounted for repairs or other pur 
den action of such levers c. The outer ends 
of the key-levers d are fitted with keys d', ar 
poses and replaced by another. The type 
ranged in two curved rows for convenience 
pieces or blocks c', from the center of the arc 
of manipulation and each marked with simi 
or semicircle toward each end thereof, are 
lar characters to those upon the face of the 
each fixed upon its lever c at such an angle 
corresponding type piece or block c', and the 
as will cause it at the moment of giving its 
key-levers d are held in and returned to their 
impression to assume a position at right an 
normal position by the weighted heels c of 
gles to the line of printing, as will be readily 
the type-levers c. 
understood upon reference to Figs. 3 and 27, 
A curved spacing-bar e is arranged imme 
and in order that each type-piece c may 
diately beneath the key-levers d near to their 
be guided truly to the printing-point and 
outer ends, and this curved spacing-bar e is 
steadied at the moment of giving its im 
pression, We employ an alignment device con 
continued to the rear of the machine, where 
it is mounted upon centers of motione', car 
structed as follows: To the slotted segment 
c of the type-levers c we fix one end of an 
ried by the framing a, and is acted upon by 
springs e', which normally retain it in its 
arm c, upon the side of which near the print 
raised position immediately beneath the key 
ing-point is formed a bracket or projection 
levers d and against a stop a upon the frame 
ci, which is formed with an opening c' in the 
Cl, so that it is capable of being depressed by 
center thereof, somewhat in the form of a 
any one of such levers, and the curved spac 
horseshoe, and at the rear of this opening c' 
ing-bar e has fixed thereto near to its ends, 
a slot or passage c is cut through the bracket, 
and so as to extend across the machine, an 
the walls of the slot or passage being formed 
escapement-rack bare, which is formed with 
with inclined faces, constituting a guide into 
ratchet-teeth e'e', upon its upper and lower 
which each type piece or block c' is received 
edges and partakes of the downward and up 
in its descent. By the peculiar formation of 
Ward movements of the spacing-bar e. 
the bracket or projection c' a clear way is 
The paper-carriage consists of a frame f, 
left between and adjacent to the inclined walls 
which at its front is mounted with capability 
of the slot c' for the passage of the type 
of sliding upon a barg, which is carried by 
pieces or blocks c', and in order to prevent 
vertical arms g, rising from a rock-shaft g', 
the type-levers c in their descent coming into 
at its ends mounted in bearings a, carried by 
contact with the bracket c1 such levers c at 
the framing (, and the arms g' are acted upon 
their ends are slightly cranked or bent for 
by springs g, at one end attached thereto 
that purpose. By these means the type pieces 
and at the other end attached to the framing 
or blocks c' will be truly guided to the print 
a to normally retain the carriage fand cylin 
ing-point and there held firmly during the 
printing operation, as shown more particu 
drical platen f (hereinafter more fully re 
ferred to) in such a position that the paper 
larly at Figs. 27 and 30, while at the same 
will receive the impression of the ordinary 
time an unobstructed view can be obtained 
Small typographical characters, while the car 
of the printing at the rear of the alignment 
riage fat its rear is supported upon a caster 
device immediately that the impression has 
Wheelf', which traverses a horizontal table 
been given. 
(t, carried by the framing a, and the carriage 
The ends of the type-levers c, carrying the 
f is thus adapted to receive the necessary 
type pieces or blocks c', are impelled to the 
printing - point by means of corresponding 
spacing or escapement movements across the 
key-levers d, which are mounted in a comb or 
machine and to be moved forward into posi 
tion for the paper to receive the impression 
radially-slotted segment in a somewhat simi 
of either the capitals or numerals, according 
lar manner to that described with respect to 
the type-levers-that is to say, they are formed 
to the extent of such movement, as indicated 
by the dotted lines a y 2 in Figs. 5 and 26. 
with holes d' therethrough to receive a semi 
The forward movement of the paper-carriage 
circular wired, which forms an axis common 
is obtained by means of a leverg, which is 
to all, and this wire d is received in a groove 
formed in one of two slotted plates or bars d", 
at one end fixed to the rock-shaft g' and at 
which are clamped together by means of 
the other end is spread out or formed with 
enlargements g, in order that it may be acted 
screws and fixed to the framing a, the key 
upon by either one of two pistons h h, the 
levers d being located and working in the 
slots d of the segment d'. The key-levers done h of which represents the capitals and is 
act upon the Weighted heels c of the type-I capable of being depressed a given distance, 
55 
 
75 
95 
Od 
IIO 
I I5 
I 25 
464,868 
while the other h represents the numerals 
ment device consists of the escapement-rack 
and is capable of twice the amount of depres 
bare, hereinbefore referred to and which is 
sion, and the paper-carriage f is thus, through 
carried by the spacing-bar e, and two broad 
the rock-shaft g' and vertical armsg', moved 
pallets ff, the upper one f of which con 
forward the required distance. The pistons 
stantly remains in engagement with the cor 
responding teeth e' of the escapement-rack 
hhare fitted with capability of vertical move 
ment in tubular fittings or guides h", fixed to 
bar e during the forward and backward 
the framing a, and at their lower ends they 
movements of the paper-carriage f, controlled 
by the leverg and pistonsh hi. The pallets f 
are threaded to receive nuts h", which act as 
stops to limit their upward movement, and 
fare carried by a bracket or bar f* of the pa 
they are held in their raised or normal posi 
per-carriage?, and they are arranged one in 
tion by means of springs h, which at one end 
advance of the other to the extent of half a 
tooth of the escapement-racks e' e', while 
are fixed to the frame c and at the other end 
the escapement-racke' is normally held in en 
are formed with holes or slots therein to fit 
the nuts h", while the pistons h. h. are each 
gagement with the upper one f of such pal 
provided with a stud or projection h, or it 
lets by the upward tendency of the curved 
might be a feather, which normally travels in 
spacing-bar e. 
By this arrangement of parts 
at every depression of a key d or of the 
a vertical slot or groove hi, formed in the 
tubular fitting or guide h", (shown more par 
spacer-key the curved spacing-bar e will 
ticularly at Figs. 16 and 17,) but which in the 
be depressed and the escapement-rack e will 
depressed position of the piston h or his ca 
be disengaged from the upper pallet f8 and 
pable, by giving a partial revolution to the 
brought into engagement with the lower one 
piston, of being turned into a right-angle slot 
f', and upon the spacing-bar e rising and re 
or recess h' in order to hold such piston de 
turning to its normal position the reverse ac 
pressed when it is desired to print a number 
tion will take place, and the paper-carriage if 
of capitals or numerals in succession. It will 
will thus be permitted to advance the dis 
tance of one tooth of the escapement-racks et 
be understood that in order to admit of the 
extra depression of the piston h the position 
e' at every depression of a key d" or of the 
of the stud or projection h thereon must be 
spacer-key i. 
arranged accordingly. 
In order to disengage the upper pallet f: 
A broad spacer-key , adapted to act upon 
from the corresponding escapement-rack e. 
the curved spacing-bar e, is located immedi 
and permit the carriage f to be freely trav 
ately in front of the type-keys, so that the 
ersed to and fro across the machine for the 
curved spacing-bar e may be actuated with 
purpose of adjusting the position of the sheet 
out giving motion to the key-levers d when it 
of paper being printed upon in relation to the 
printing-point or commencing a fresh line of 
is desired to leave spaces between words or 
sentences, and in order that the spacer-key i 
printing, we, as shown more particularly at 
may not be affected by the depression of the 
Figs. 18 to 22, mount or form the upper pal 
key-levers d we fix it to the outer ends of in 
let f upon an arm f", which is acted upon by 
dependent arms or levers i', (shown more 
a spring f to hold the pallet f in position to 
engage the escapement-rack e' and is fixed 
clearly at Fig. 6,) which are near to their in 
ner ends mounted upon axes or centers of 
upon a shaft or spindle f", mounted in bear 
ings f", formed in the carriage - frame, and 
motion i, formed by screws screwing into the 
frame a, and beyond such axes the ends of 
which shaft f extends to the end of the car. 
the levers are acted upon by a spring to 
riage-frame, where it terminates in an offset 
normally retain the spacer-key in its raised 
f, which is capable of being acted upon by 
the short arm f' of a bell-crank-releasingle 
position, and the levers i are provided with 
short vertical standards i, formed with hori 
ver f', mounted upon an axis of motion fi, 
Zontal arms it, adapted to engage the curved 
supported in a bracket f from the carriage 
spacing-bar e in the downward motion of the 
fin order to partially rotate the shaft or spin 
spacer-key i, but leaving the curved spac 
dlef, and the upper pallet f is thus disen 
ing-bar e free to move independently thereof 
gaged from the corresponding escapement 
when depressed by a key-lever d. 
racke". The position of the upper pallet f8 
in relation to the escapement-racke is capa 
The paper-carriage f is traversed across the 
ble of regulation by means of a set-screw f, 
machine in one direction and during the 
printing operation by means of a chain f', one 
passing through a tapped hole in the carriage 
end of which is attached to the paper-carriage 
frame f and at its end bearing against the un 
der side of the supporting-arm f of the up 
if and the other end of which is attached to a 
spring-drum i, mounted with capability of 
per pallet f. As the upper pallet f8 is dis 
revolution upon a vertical spindle j', fixed to 
engaged from the escapement-rack e', gener 
the framing a, and which drum i exerts a con 
ally in order that the carriage may be trav 
stant pull upon the paper-carriage f, while 
ersed across the machine to the starting-point 
the traverse of the paper-carriage fis is con 
to commence a fresh line of printing, it is de 
trolled by means of an escapement or spacing 
sirable at the same time to rotate the cylin 
device, which permits the paper-carriage f to 
drical platen f the distance of the space be 
advance only the distance of one letter at 
tween two lines, and thus bring a fresh sur 
each depression of a key d". This escape- face of paper into alignment with the print 
. 
7 o 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5.of 
75 
434,868 
i 
ing-point. To attain this end we fix the cylin 
the form of a scroll or scrolls or the outer 
drical platen f, which is preferably a hard 
coil or coils of a flat helix, and fixed upon a 
horizontal bar f', supported upon legs or 
wood or metal roller covered with india-rub 
posts f, removably fitting into holes or sock 
ber, as is well understood, upon a shaft or. 
spindle f", which is at each end mounted with 
ets f, formed in the carriage-frame f. By 
capability of revolution in bearings f, 
means of this device the sheet of paper it, as 
formed in the framing f 
of the carriage, and 
it leaves the platen f', is curled or rolled up 
we fix upon the shaft or spindle flat one end 
in the form of a scroll with the printing in 
of the cylindrical platen f a ratchet-wheel 
side, so that it may be left in the machine 
f, with which engages a clawker or driver 
without fear of the printing being read by a 
f, which is held up to its work by a spring 
person other than the operator and such as a 
casual caller, thus obviating the necessity for 
ft. The clawker or driver fi is mounted 
with capability of oscillation upon a stud or 
removing the sheet from the machine in or 
axis f", carried by one end of an arm or lever 
der to conceal the writing, while at the same 
f, which at its other end is mounted upon 
time the paper is truly guided, and the risk 
an axis of motion f', carried by the carriage 
of its position being disarranged by the top 
frame f, and the arm or lever fis acted upon 
edge thereof coming into contact with an ob 
by the short arm f* of a bell-crank lever f', 
ject upon the table of the operator is avoided. 
mounted upon an axis f', supported by the 
In order to give an audible indication when 
the paper-carriage f has traversed a prede 
bracket f to cause the clawker or driver fif 
to rotate the cylindrical platen f', and as the 
termined distance governing the length of 
bell-cranklever f* for rotating the platen f', 
the line of printing, and to regulate that point 
and which we will call the platen-feed le 
in the traverse of the paper-carriage at which 
ver, is mounted parallel with the pallet-re 
such audible indication shall be given, we ar 
range around the upper side of the spring 
leasing lever f the same movement of the 
hand which is required to actuate the lever 
drumi and which is mounted flush with the 
coverb of the machine, so as to appear through 
f' and to traverse the carriage across thema 
a corresponding aperture formed therein, a 
chine may also be caused to actuate the le 
verf 19. 
circular scale graduated to correspond with 
In order to prevent the too free revolution 
that upon the divided bar f', and we form 
of the cylindrical platen f and to enable the 
the drum j with a number of holes j there 
operator readily to know the extent to which 
through, arranged in a circle adjacent to the 
it is being moved, a spring stopf, mounted 
divided scale and corresponding with cer 
upon the carriage-frame?, is caused to engage 
tain of the divisions thereof, and we pro 
vide a loose pin f', which is adapted to fit 
the recesses between the teeth of the ratchet 
wheelf, and in rising and falling as it is 
into the holesi and pass through the drum 
displaced by such, teeth clearly gives the re 
if and project from the lower side thereof. 
quired indication. 
Below and at the side of the spring-drum i 
The sheet of paper w is held in contact 
and mounted upon a posti, fixed to the frame 
with the cylindrical platen f by means of 
a, is arranged a bell or gongf, and at the side 
two semicircular spring bands or fingers f, 
of the bell or gong f is located a hammer or 
strikerf, which is fixed upon one end of a 
which are at one end fixed to the framef of 
the carriage and at the other end bear upon 
coiled-spring armi", the other end of which is 
the platen f near to the printing-line with 
fixed to the framea, as shown more particu 
an elastic pressure. The paper 2U is passed 
larly at Figs, 24 and 25, and the projecting 
over a table f*, and, as shown at Figs. 21 
lower end of the pini in the revolution of the 
and 22, it is carried forward, together with 
drum is adapted to act upon the nosef of the 
the platen f as it is rotated by the platen 
hammer or striker j', and thereby to sound 
feed-lever f', by means of two endless bands 
the bell or gong f. It will thus be seen that 
by placing the loose pini in any given hole 
8 of india-rubber, which are passed around 
three rollers f, located around one side of 
jof the circle the bell or gongjmay be caused 
the cylindrical platen f and mounted with 
to Sound an alarm at any predetermined point 
capability of free revolution in bearings f", 
of the traverse of the paper-carriage. 
formed in the carriage-frame f, the bands f* 
The spools carrying the inking-ribbon, in 
being thus held in frictional contact with, so 
stead of being mounted upon inclined axes, 
as to be driven by, the platen f. After pass 
as heretofore, are arranged in the following 
ing the printing-line the paper it is carried 
manner, and as shown more particularly at 
under a barf, which is marked with a di 
Figs. 26 and 27. The shafts or axes lin' of the 
spools l n are screwed into tapped holes formed 
vided scale, as is well understood, and is fixed 
upon the upper ends of arms f", which are at 
in a short standard lic, fixed to the frame aim 
their lower ends mounted upon axes of mo 
mediately beneath the slotted segment c, and 
tion f, carried by the frame fand acted upon 
the shaft or axis l is arranged in a position 
by a spring f, in order to hold the bar f' 
parallel with the axis of the platen fi and so 
against the platen f with a light spring 
that the ribbon n, winding off the spool l, 
pressure, and as the sheet of paper it passes 
passes over the a guide-bar o', formed on a 
under the bar fit is received by a curling 
standard O, fixed to the standard k, thence 
guide consisting of three bars f, coiled in beneath the alignment-bracket c1 in a direc 
95 
O 
Io. 
I 
II. 
2 ( 
I2. 
3. 
55 
 
464,868 
5 
O 
tion at right angles to the axis of the platen 
f'. The ribbon in thence passes around an an 
gularly-disposed bar c', formed on the arm 
or bracket c' of the slotted segment c', and it 
then returns in an angular direction over the 
angular bar O' to the other ribbon - spool n, 
whose shaft or axis m' is correspondingly 
disposed at right angles to such direction. 
By this arrangement of the spools l'in' the 
printing is less obscured by the ribbon in than 
When the axes of both spools are arranged at 
equal angles to a line drawn at right angles 
to the platen f', as heretofore. In order to 
give a step-by-step motion to the inking-rib 
bon n, the spools l n' have fixed upon the 
inner sides thereof toothed wheels lin, the 
Wheel l having simple spur-teeth, while the 
wheel m is provided with beveled teeth. 
Between these wheels l n and fixed upon a 
horizontal shaft p, mounted in bearings pion 
the frame C. and disposed parallel to the axis 
of the platen f' and capable of endwise and 
rotary motion, is a broad ratchet - wheel p', 
which is adapted to receive a step-by-step 
motion at each depression of the spacing-bar 
e from a pawl p, carried by a horizontal arm 
p', fixed to the escapement-rack bar e, and 
upon each side of the ratchet-wheel p', and 
fixed thereto or formed thereon, is a pin 
ion, one p' of such pinions being formed with 
Spur-teeth to engage the corresponding teeth 
of the wheell of the spooll, while the other p 
of such pinions isformed with angular or spiral 
teeth to engage the beveled teeth of the corre 
sponding spool-wheel na; but such compound 
or shunt wheel pip'pis so arranged that only 
one of suchpinions porpata timeis capable of 
engaging its spool-wheel or m, according to 
which spool it is desired to drive. The shaft 
p of the compound or shunt wheel is capable 
of receiving end Wise movement, in order to 
move the pinions pp into or out of gear with 
their respective spool-wheels l n or into a 
midway position out of gear with both; and 
in order to impart such endwise movement 
thereto We employ a vertical spindle q, at one 
end stepped in a bearing q', formed on or 
fixed to the frame Cl and at the other end ris 
ing through a bearing formed in a bracket g, 
fixed to the frame C, and projecting through 
the cover b, where it is provided upon its ex 
treme end with a shunt-handle q, and upon 
this spindle q we fix a lever q', which at one 
end engages an annular groove or recess p" in 
the shunt-shaft p and at the other end is 
formed with a nose which engages one or other 
of three recesses or stops q, formed in one end 
of an arm q', which is at its other end mounted 
upon an axis of motion g, carried by the frame 
C, and is acted upon by a spring qi, fixed to 
the frame cl, in order to hold the recessed bar 
or plate q in engagement with the nose of the 
lever q. By turning the shunt-handle q to 
the extreme right or left the nose of the lever 
g may be caused to engage either one of the 
recesses or stops q, and by moving endwise 
the shunt-shaft cause one of the pinions pp 
of the compound or shunt wheel to engage 
and give motion to either of the spools l or m. 
through its toothed wheel l or n, according 
to which of them it is desired to wind the rib 
bon upon, while by placing the shunt-handle 
q in a central position the nose of the lever q 
will be caused to engage the central one of the 
recesses or stops q, and the compound or 
shunt wheels p' p' p will accordingly be held 
in a central position, so that no motion will 
be given to the ribbon-spools l in, and the rib 
bon in may be moved out of the way, and the 
machine may be employed to produce a sten 
cil in waxed paper, as has heretofore been 
proposed. 
The shunt-shaft p extends to the 
side of the machine, where it is provided with 
a crank-handle p, by means of which it may 
be rotated when it is desired to rotate one or 
other of the ribbon-spools l n without giving 
motion to the machine generally. 
IIaving now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of our said invention 
and in what manner the same is to be per 
formed, we declare that what we claim is 
!. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a number of independent type-levers 
c, formed with cranked weighted heels cand 
mounted upon axes of motion arranged in the 
arc of a circle and normally held in a verti 
cal or approximately vertical position by their 
own gravity and at their ends furnished with 
long type-pieces c', having several characters 
upon the face thereof, a number of key-levers 
d, mounted upon axes of motion, arranged in 
the arc of a circle to correspond with the type 
levers c, and a cylindrical platen f', mounted 
in a frame f, connected by arms g', and a rock 
shaft g', with a lever g, adapted to receive a 
differential depression by pistons h h' in or 
der to bring the platen f forward into posi 
tion to receive the impression of the capitals 
or numerals of the type-pieces c', Substan 
tially as herein shown and described. 
2. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of the platen f', mounted in a frame f, 
the arms g, rock shaft g', and lever g, the 
pistons h h, capable of differential depres 
sion and provided with studs h, and the 
tubular guides h", formed with vertical and 
horizontal slots hill', Substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
3. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a paper-carriage f a caster-Wheel f' 
at the rear of such carriage, a table C, upon 
which the caster-wheel travels, a bar 9, upon 
which the front of the carriage is mounted, 
with capability of sliding arms g connect 
ing the bar g with a rock-shaft g', a lever g, 
fixed to the rock-shaft g', and means for shift 
ing the lever, substantially as herein shown 
and described. 
4. In a type-Writing machine, the colnlbina 
tion of a curved spacing-bar e, located be 
neath the key-levers cl and mounted upon 
axes of motion at the rear of the machine, an 
escapement rack-bar e, fixed to the spacing 
bare and provided with toothed racks e'e', 
35 
AO 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
464,868 
55 
with a ring of holes j therethrough, a loose 
pini, to fit such holes, a bell or gong j, and 
a hammer or striker j', the latter fixed upon 
a flexible armi' and provided with a nose or 
projectioni, adapted to engage the lower end 
of the pin j in the revolution of the drum j, 
substantially as herein shown and described. 
7. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with a cylindrical platen f, of two rib 
bon-spools, one l mounted upon an axis par 
allel with the platen and the other m mounted 
upon an axis at an angle to the platen, a guide 
bar c', carried by the arm cand disposed at 
a corresponding angle to the Spool in, a Spur 
wheel l', fixed to the spool l, a beveled wheel 
n, fixed to the spool n, a shaft p, mounted 
in bearings with capability of endwise and 
rotary motion, a ratchet-wheel p', fixed upon 
such shaft, a pawl p, engaging the ratchet 
wheel and carried by an arm p of the rack 
bare', a spur-pinion p", fixed upon the shaft 
p at one side of the ratchet-wheel p' and 
adapted to engage the spur-wheel l', and a 
spiral pinion p, fixed upon the shaft p at the 
other side of the ratchet-wheelp' and adapted 
to engage the beveled wheel?), and means 
for moving the shaft p endwise, substantially 
as herein shown and described. 
S. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of the two spools l n, one mounted upon 
an axis parallel to the platen f and the other 
mounted at an angle thereto, the Spur-wheel 
l and beveled wheelin, fixed upon the spools, 
the shaft p, having the corresponding wheels 
pp fixed thereon, a lever Q', at one end en 
gaging an annular groove in the Shaft p and 
at the other end engaging the notches of of 
a spring-bar, and a handle qi to turn such 
lever and move the shaft pendwise, substan- 85 
tially as herein shown and described. 
75 
MICHAEL HEARN. 
MORGAN DONNE. 
Witnesses: 
C. MELBOURNE WHITE, 
F. W. WOODINGTON, 
O 
a paper-carriage fat the rear supported upon 
a Caster-wheel f' and at the front supported 
With capability of sliding upon a barg, con 
nected by arms g with a rock-shaft g', to 
Which is fixed a leverg, means for shifting 
the latter, two broad pallets ff, attached to 
the carriage f and adapted to alternately en 
gage the racks e'e', the pallet f being fixed 
and the pallet f movable, an arm f', mounted 
upon a shaft f and on which the pallet f8 is 
formed, a spring f to retain the pallet if 
normally in engagement with the rack e", an 
arm or offset f upon the shaft f, a bell 
Crank lever f', mounted upon the end of the 
Carriage and adapted to partially rotate the 
shaft f and lift the pallet f out of engage 
ment with the rack e', and a spring-drumi to 
draw the carriage forward, substantially as 
herein shown and described. 
5. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion, With a vertically-movable escapement 
rack-bar e, a paper-carriage f, provided with 
broad pallets to engage the teeth e'e', of the 
rack-bar, a shaft f', connected with one of 
Such pallets and provided with an offsetif, a 
bell-rank lever fi, mounted upon the end of 
the carriage and adapted to partially rotate 
the shaft f' and lift the pallet f8 out of en 
gagement with the racke", a spring-drumi to 
3O draw the carriage forward, a cylindrical platen 
f, mounted upon the carriage f with capa 
bility of revolution, a ratchet-wheelf, fixed 
upon the platen f', a spring-stop fit to regu 
late the movement of the platen, and a clawker 
35 or driver f, engaging the wheel fi and act 
luated by a bell-cranklever f', mounted upon 
the end of the carriage at the side of the lever 
f' and adapted to actuate the clawker or 
driver and rotate the platen, substantially as 
6. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a paper-carriage f, having a barfs, 
provided with a divided scale, a spring-drum 
j, connected with the carriage by a chain and 
45 provided with a circular scale corresponding 
with that of the paper-carriage and formed 
4o herein shown and described. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US464970.txt	(No Model.) 
C. P. JOHNSON, 
MACHINE FOR OLEANING BROOMS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 464,970. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1891. 
| ...' 
h 
or - 
 
 
 
 
zzzzesses. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
C. P. JOHNSON, 
MACHINE FOR CLEANING BROOMS. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1891. 
No. 464,970, 
 
6. 
ifesses. 
42 
Zizzatator, 
m 
photo-it-owASHINoron, to.c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHESTER P. JOHNSON, OF AMSTERDAM, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO JOHN D. 
BLOOD, JAMES BLOOD, AND FRANK A. BLOOD, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR CLEANING BROOMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 464,970, dated December 15, 1891. 
Application filed July 24, 1891, Serial No. 400,656, (No model.) 
IC) 
25 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHESTER P. JoHNSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the city 
of Amsterdam, in the county of Montgomery 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Machines for 
Cleaning Brooms; and Idohereby declare the 
following to be a fuli, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
machinery for Scraping or combing brooms, 
after being made, of the seeds that remain 
upon the brush of the broom and straightening 
out in proper form the brush that may have 
become tangled or mislaid in the process of 
making. I attain these objects by the special 
and novel mechanism illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, making a part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan. Fig. 2 is a side eleva 
tion. Fig. 3 is a partial plan. Fig. 4 is a par 
tial sectional elevation upon the broken line 
ac in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a modification of a part 
of my invention. Fig. 6 is a transverse sec 
tion on the broken line y in Fig. 5; and Fig. 7 
exhibits a vertical spur O', which is an equiv 
alent for the hooks O. 
Similar letters of reference refer to similar 
port for the carriage G-as, for instance, sim 
ply cross-rods would perform the same func 
tions. 
G (see the several drawings) is a carriage 
of the relative proportions, substantially as 
shown, and provided with a rest-piece N, hav 
ing a semicircular depression N to receive 
the upper part of the broom-handle while the 
broom is being cleaned and an oblong slot H 
to receive the spring-supporting rod K and 
the spring I. The spring I, slot H, and rod K 
may be entirely dispensed with and the ma 
chine be used successfully by operating the 
carriage G. by hand. The only difference in 
the operation is with the rod and spring the 
carriage G is automatically returned to its nor 
mal position, when without the spring the 
carriage G is returned to its normal position 
by hand. However, I prefer the employment 
of the spring and rod, as the machine is some 
what more convenient to use. 
The extreme forward end of the carriage G., 
I construct somewhat of the form of a section 
of a circle, Substantially as shown in the sev 
eral views of the drawings, and place at nearly 
equal distances apart the retaining-hooks O, 
substantially of the form as shown in the 
drawings, and more particularly in Fig. 2, 
These hooks O engage the broom S against 
and with their points extending under the 
lower seam S' of the seams or stitchings, which 
The arrows indicate the direction of mo 
revents the broom while being operated upon 
from being drawn forward by the force of the 
The wooden pieces A constitute the frame 
combing-cylinder far enough to injure the 
that supports the working parts of the ma 
seaming with the teeth c of cylinder C. I can 
chine. The cylinder C is provided with teeth 
also clean or comb off all seeds, &c., from 
c of the ordinary kind used for that purpose, 
brooms without the use of these hooks O, just 
and is supported and revolves upon its cen 
above described, by holding the broom en 
tral shaft D in suitable boxes e, placed upon 
tirely by hand or by placing a gage at the ex 
the frame A, by power communicated from 
treme rear end of the handle of the broom S 
any prime motor by a belt-engaging pulley d. 
in such position that when the handle of each 
Bare side boards, and P is a coverthereto 
broom is pressed firmly rearward against a 
to prevent the seeds and dust that is combed 
gage the brush will extend forward to the 
or brushed from the brooms from flying ln 
action of the combing-cylinder a positive dis 
necessarily around the room wherein the ma 
tance as a matter of course. This last-men 
chine is placed. 
tioned arrangement of holding the handle of 
E is a bed-sole of the general form and con 
the broom firmly rearward against a station 
struction and secured to the frame A, Substan 
ary gage requires great skill and care in op 
tially as indicated and shown in the several 
erating on account of the great danger, from 
views of the drawings. The bed-Sole E may 
accident or carelessness, of the seaming or 
be substituted with any other suitable sup-stitching of the broom coming in contact with 
tion. 
parts throughout the several views. 
- 
r 
55 
75 
90 . 
95 
IOO 
45 
 
2 
464,970 
75 
the cylinder-teeth, which revolve at a high ve 
locity, thereby destroying the broom and ex 
posing the operator's hands to injury. With 
the use of this particular part of my inven 
tion-to wit., the hooks O and the manner of 
using themit would be impossible to injure 
the seaming or stitching, as the gage M may 
be so closely adjusted that the teeth c will 
reach within one-quarter of an inch of the 
seaming S', thereby securing perfect Work 
and safety to the broom being operated upon, 
and without any danger of injury to the op 
erator by the broom through carelessness or 
accident being suddenly torn forward by the 
action of the rapidly-revolving cylinder. 
Figs. 5 and 6 of the drawings represent a 
modification of my invention wherein C is the 
cylinder, D the central shaft, G' the carriage 
containing the hooks O, and E the track or 
way upon which the carriage G' travels. The 
track is placed obliquely to the cylinder, sub 
stantially as shown in the drawings. The car 
riage G' and track E' extend to the left end of 
the cylinder a sufficient distance to allow a 
broom to be placed upon hooks O, as indicated 
by the broken lines r, representing a broom, 
with the lower seam or stitching of the broom 
firmly secured upon the hooks O, as heretofore 
described. The operator simply pushes the car 
riage G', holding the broom, slowly to the right 
to the position shown by the broken lines a'. 
This convergent movement of the carriage G', 
as relates to the cylinder C, causes the brush 
to be submited to the action of the cylinder 
teeth from the extreme ends up to or near the 
lower seam or stitching S', engaging the hooks 
O. By passing the carriage containing the 
broom back to its normal position the operator 
is enabled to release the broom from the hooks 
O and then submit the opposite side of the 
broom to the same operation, thereby clean 
ing the broom successfully and without dan 
ger of injury. 
Over the central part of the carriage G, I 
secure to the bed-sole E the strap L, con 
structed of the form substantially as shown 
in Figs. 2 and 3, and of sufficient length and 
height to allow the carriage to freely pass for 
ward and backward, and also to have a lateral 
movement, as indicated by the broken lines 
a. a. a. a. (See Figs. 1 and 3.) Within the slot 
H, I insert the rod K, with its forward end 
angled upward, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, 
and secured to the strap L, through perfora 
tion l, with the rear end of the Said rod extend 
ing through a central longitudinal pole i (see 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3) in carriage G. This rod K. 
is introduced to support and hold into place 
the spring I, which said spring I is employed 
to automatically return the carriage G to its 
normal position, as heretofore referred to and 
described. 
M is a gage, which I adjust with the screws 
m at an equal distance from the strap L, that 
I desire to comb or clean the broom; or, in 
other words, this gage M may be adjusted at 
any desired place, as just above indicated, to 
suit the requirements of the different lengths 
of the brush used in the manufacture of the 
brooms desired to be cleaned. The strap L. 
performs the functions of and is a stop for the 
gage M to contact with, thereby stopping the 
carriage at that point. 
F (see Figs. 1, 2, and 3) are stops to gage 
the lateral motion of the forward part of the 
carriage G while being moved forward and 
backward to present the broom to the action 
of the cylinder C. 
The operation of my invention is as fol 
lows: Proper motion is given to the cylinder 
in the direction as indicated by the arrows. 
The carriage G is presumed to be in its nor 
mal position, as shown in the several views of 
the drawings. The operator places a broom 
upon the hooks O so that the said hooks O 
shall engage the lower seam S of the seams or 
stitchings, thereby preventing the broom from 
being drawn farther forward by the action of 
the cylinder, while the upper end of the handle 
is held firmly in the depression N' of the rest 
piece N. The attendant then pushes the car 
riage forward, at the same time giving the car 
riage a lateral movement, as indicated by the 
broken lines C. C. C. C., until the gage M contacts 
with the stop or strap, and then allows the car 
riage G to return by the force of thespiralspring 
(which was compressed by the forward move 
ment of the carriage) to its normal position. 
During the return movement it is also ad 
visable to give the carriage a lateral move 
ment, as indicated by the broken lines a. 
The broom is then turned over, and the same 
operation is repeated with the opposite side, 
as just above described. The operation is 
rapid, simple, and very effective. The gage 
M may be set so close and accurately that the 
broom may be combed by the cylinder-teeth 
to within one-quarter of an inch of the lower 
seam S' without injury to the stitching, which 
I am not aWare has heretofore been accom 
plished. 
I will here remark that the rest-piece N may 
be dispensed with and like results be pro 
duced by a simple readjustment of the bed 
sole piece E, so as to present the brush to the 
action of the cylinder-teeth in a proper man 
ner. However, I prefer the use of the rest 
piece N, as it elevates the handle a short dis 
tance above the carriage G between the brush 
of the broom and the rest-piece N, thereby 
enabling the operator properfacilities to grasp 
the handle without injury to his hands by 
contacting With the carriage. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A cylinder provided with teeth, combined 
With hooks secured to a carriage, and adapted 
to hold the broom by engaging a seam or 
stitching of the broom. 
2. The cylinder provided with teeth, com 
bined with a carriage provided with hooks 
gage, all operating as described and set 
Orth. 
90 
95 
OO 
d. 
1 I5 
I 25 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
464,970 
O 
3. The cylinder provided with teeth, com 
bined with a carriage provided with hooks 
and an adjustable gage and a stop, all oper 
ating as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. The cylinder provided with the teeth, 
combined with a carriage provided withhooks 
and an adjustable gage, a stop L, and a Sole 
piece E, all operating as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
5. The carriage G, having a longitudinal 
and lateral movement, combined with the cyl 
inder C, provided with teeth, all operating as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
6. The carriage G, having longitudinal and 
lateral movements and provided with hooks 
to engage and hold a broom in position while 
being cleaned, combined with the cylinder C, 
provided with teeth, substantially as shown, 
described, and set forth. 
 
7. The combination of the cylinder C, pro- 20 
vided with teeth, with the carriage G., pro 
vided with hooks O, the spiral spring I, and 
guide-rod K, and susceptible of longitudinal 
lateral movements, as specified and set 
Orth. 
S. The cylinder C, provided with teeth, com 
bined with the carriage G., provided with 
hooks O, guide-rod K, surrounded with spiral 
spring I, and a rest N, and susceptible of a 
longitudinal and lateral movement, as speci- 3o 
fied, set forth, and described. 
In witness whereof Ihereunto subscribe my 
name and affix myseal this 20th day of July, 
1891. 
- 
Witnesses: 
CHESTER P. JOHNSON. L. s. 
JNO. W. A. LANSING, 
JNO. H. LANSING. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465070.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 465,070, 
 
T. J. TREW 
DISH WASHER 
Patented Dec. 15, 1891. 
ks 
ks 
f s 
 
 
  
 
III. 
y 
Veya SNSS 
lifestyle 
 
 
 
 
 
S^ 
yo 
All All - 6 
TIAI, 
liliili 
 
Z/ozazes 7.77e, 
Ipilepir 
Jy 
4./Affarneys 
Affrgeys, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS J. TREW, OF MACON CITY, MISSOURI. 
D SH-WASHER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,070, dated December 15, 1891. 
Application filed April 11, 1891, Serial No. 388,612, (No model.) 
To all, whom it inval? conce77. 
Be it known that I, THOMASJ. TREW, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Macon 
City, in the county of Macon and State of Mis 
Souri, have invented a new and useful Dish 
Washer, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
dish-washers. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide a simple and inexpensive device 
whereby dishes may be thoroughly washed 
and drained and held in convenient position. 
for wiping after draining. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claim hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a dish-washer constructed in accord 
ance. With this invention. Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse sectional view. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal 
sectional view. Fig. 4 is a reverse plan view. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 1 
designates a rectangular frame, open at the 
top and bottom and constructed of suitable 
metal and composed of sides 2 and ends 3, 
and provided at its corner's with triangular 
bracket-plates 4, arranged within the frame 
and adapted to support a removable dish 
holding tray 5. The dish-holding tray 5 is 
supported within the frame, and is rectangul 
lar and composed of side pieces 6 and end 
pieces7, and is provided with a series of parallel 
bars S, arranged longitudinally of the frame. 
Arranged on the tray and extending longi 
tudinally of the same is a main coil-spring 9, 
extending within a short distance of the ends 
of the tray to provide open spaces to enable 
cups, pitchers, and similar receptacles to be 
placed within it and having its coils secured 
between the central bar's S and the two adja 
cent ones and adapted to receive in the in 
tervals between its coils plates and similar 
dishes, and the ends of the coiled spring are 
secured by soldering or similar means, and 
one or more main coil-springs may be pro 
d 
25 
3 5 
45 
55 
75 
vided. A small coiled spring 10 is arranged on 
each side of the large coil-spring 9, and is coiled 
around one of the longitudinal bars and its 
ends secured to the tray by soldering or the 
like, and is adapted to hold small dishes. 
The plates and similar dishes to be washed 
are arranged in the coils of the main springs 
and small springs, and cups, bowls, pitchers, 
and similar vessels are arranged within the 
main coil-spring and the frame, and the dish 
washer and its entire contents are immersed 
in a suitable receptacle or tank containing 
the water and a suitable soap or the like. By 
raising and lowering the dish-washer currents 
of water are forced through the dishes and 
thoroughly clean the same, and after the op 
eration of washing has been completed the 
tray is supported over the tank or receptacle 
containing the dish-water, and the dishes are 
allowed to drain, and are in convenient posi 
tion for drying or wiping. 
The frame is provided with a bail 11, by 
means of which the dish-washer can be raised 
and lowered in the tank or receptacle Con 
taining the dish-water, and the ends of the 
bail are secured to the end pieces of the frame. 
From the foregoing description and the ac 
companying drawings the construction, op 
eration, and advantages of the invention will 
readily be understood. 
What I claim is 
In a dish-washer, the combination of the 
frame, open at the top and bottom and adapted 
to be raised and lowered to wash dishes, pro 
vided with supporting-plates 4, the tray ar 
ranged on the plates and provided with par 
allel bars, the large coiled spring extending 
along the tray and secured to the bars, and 
the small coiled springs arranged on bars at 
each side of the large spring, Substantially as 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS J. TREW. 
Witnesses: 
W. M. WILLIS, 
W. II. FEAGAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465170.txt	R. J. & A, EDWARDS, 
MACHINERY OR APPARATUS FOR G-RINDING OR POLISHING. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 465,170, 
Patented Dec. 15, 1891, 
 
trict. 
The Noaris PETERs co, Phoro-Litho, washington, d. c. 
No. 465,179. 
 
 
Patented Dec. 15, 1891. 
(No Model.) 
R. J. & A, EDWARDS, 
MACHINERY OR APPARATUS FOR GRINDING OR POLISHING. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
R 
III 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD JOHN EDWARDS AND ARCHER EDWARDS, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
MACHINERY OR APPARATUS FOR GRINDING OR POLISHING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,170, dated December 15, 1891. 
Application filed February 18, 1891, Serial No. 381,881. (No model.) Patented in England January 29, 1885, No. 1,292, and in 
France November 17, 1885, No. 172,319, 
w , 
To all whon, it may conce': 
, 
Be it known that we, RICHARD JOHN ED 
WARDS and ARCHER EDWARDS, both subjects 
of the Queen of Great Britain, residing at 
London, in the county of Middlesex, England, 
have jointly invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Machinery or Apparatus 
for Grinding and Polishing, (for which we 
have received Letters Patent in England, No. 
1,292, dated January 29, 1885, and in France, 
No. 172,319, dated November 17, 1885,) of 
which the following is a specification. 
Our present invention relates to machinery 
or apparatus for grinding and polishing the 
surface of bars or tubes more or less cylin 
drical in transverse section and of any length 
of metal or other material; and it has for its 
objects to provide for the grinding and pol 
ishing of tubes or bars at a single continu 
operation, to prevent the escape of dust and 
the wear of the moving parts, to cause the 
tubes or bars to turn upon their axes and at 
the same time to move forward at any desired 
speed, to keep the tubes or bars steadily 
ressed down and held while being ground 
and polished, to afford ready access for the 
purpose of changing the abrasive bands, 
and to keep the abrasive bands constantly 
stretched while in use. We attain these ob 
jects by the mechanism illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section through 
the machine; Fig. 2, a top view of the ma 
Fig. 4 is 
chine; Fig. 3, a horizontal section. 
a vertical section of an end of a tube and a 
portion of the trough, showing our method of 
preventing the escape of polishing-dust. Fig. 
5 represents an end view of the same tube 
and dust-tight attachment. Fig.6 represents 
a section through the axes of the pulleys of 
the polishing-belt. Fig. 7 represents a side 
view of the bar and spring-pressure attach 
ment. Fig. 8 represents a section across a 
bar being polished, and shows our device for 
holding the bars in position, adjusting the 
pressure thereon, and regulating the motion 
thereof. Fig. 9 represents a side view of one 
of the angularly-disposed disks and its mount 
ings. Fig. 10 represents a plan view of the 
same. Fig. 11 represents a side view of the 
adjustable pulley for the polishing-bands, and 
Fig. 12 represents an end view of the same. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 3, B is a horizontal bed or 55 
trough, above which the tubes or shafts did 
to be ground and polished are adjusted. This 
trough B is provided with a sufficient number 
of moving abrasive bands AAAA in contact 
with the tube or shaft d. at different parts of 
its length, the bands. A being supported by 
end pulleys or drums if y', as well as by inter 
mediate ones f. The pulleys if y', by which 
the bands A are driven, are carried and rotate 
upon spindles supported in bearings C, bolted 65 
to the trough B, and they are provided with 
pulleys driven by belts 2 from driving-pull 
leys upon the driving-shaft D below, which 
is itself driven by the fast and loose pulleys 
E by steam or other power. The trough Bis 
divided by longitudinal partitions H H into 
separate compartments, in some of which the 
belts. A run, while in the others the driving 
apparatus and the mechanism for turning the 
tubes or bars upon their axes and feeding 
thern forward while being ground and pol 
ished are placed. The several compartments 
are kept entirely separate from each other, 
by the means hereinafter described, so that 
no dust, or particles of the emery, or other 
abrasive material used can pass from one to 
another, and the bearings and other parts 
liable to wear are thuskept from injury. Each 
of the pulleys y', which carry the outer ends 
of the bands AA, is carried upon a lever I, 
turning upon a center K and provided with 
a Weight. L, passing round a pulley, by which 
the moving bands are kept properly stretched. 
f* are pulleys which support the bands A at 
the middle of their length. Each of the pull 
leys y ly'?, which drive and support the belt 
A, is carried upon the end of its spindle and 
revolve in compartments in which the grind 
ing and polishing processes, take place, the 
spindles of the pulleys y if passing through: 95 
holes in the partition HH, with the interven 
tion of disks or pieces of soft felt by which 
dust is prevented from passing. 
The spindles upon the leversI, which carry . 
the pulleys y', (shown upon a larger seale at CO 
75 
9o 
O 
25 P 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
465,170 
5 
O 
35 
O 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
Figs. 11 and 12) pass through curved holes 
L' in the partition H, and the lever I has a 
plate Mupon its upperend which always covers 
the hole L', in whatever position the lever I 
may be, a piece of soft felt N being inter 
posed between the plate M and the partition 
H, so that dust is prevented from passing 
through the hole L' when the lever moves 
backward and forward as the belt A is more 
or less stretched. 
Fig. 13 shows an arrangement for preserv 
ing the bearings upon which the pulleys re 
volve from dust and wear by means of disks 
or washers of felt. The spindle v, upon which 
the pulleys frevolve, is made tubular, and u 
is a ring of felt pressed into a recess in the 
side of the pulley and held by the plate a. 
The pulleys are lubricated through the hol 
low spindle v, which is perforated inside the 
pulley at v', and the outer end of the spindle 
is closed by a screw w, having a head which 
keeps the pulley in its place, the thread of the 
screw being made in the same direction as 
the pulley revolves. 
The tubes or bars did to be ground and 
polished pass through holes in the sides of 
the trough B, the holes being kept dust-tight 
in a somewhat similar way by means of felt, 
as illustrated in Figs. 4 and 5, in which disa 
tube passing through a hole O in the side of 
the trough B, a piece of felt P being fitted 
round the tube d and held in position in a 
chamber or recess Q. The felt P is cut at R, 
so that it can readily be fitted over the tube. 
The tube or bar d or d is supported upon 
trestles or supports and pushed forward un 
til its end is caught by the feeding and turn 
ing device, which is illustrated at Figs. 8, 9, 
and 10. This consists of a roller f, covered 
with india-rubber or other suitable material 
and fixed upon a spindle which revolves in 
the fork f', upon the lower end of which is 
formed a spindleg, which turns in a vertical 
guide or standard h, fixed directly below the 
tube or bard, so that the latter is supported 
upon the roller f. The spindle or axis of the 
roller is provided with a pulley i for a cord 
or band k, which is driven by a driving-pull 
ley upon a shaft l below, Figs. 1 and 3, which 
isitself set in revolution at the proper speed 
by pulley's m 'm' and a strap in from the driv 
ing-shaft D, Figs. 1 and 8. 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 3 two tubes did of differ 
ent sizes are being ground and polished, the 
same bands AAA AAA acting upon both 
of them, and these Supporting and feeding 
rollers fare shown under each tube, as shown 
in Fig. 3, one being arranged at the center 
and one outside each side of the trough B. 
The two shafts l are connected by a belt O, 
passing round pulleys o'o, Figs. 1 and 8, 
upon the shafts, so that all the rollers fare 
driven at the required speed. If the tubes d 
d' be held down upon the rollers f, when the 
latter are revolving, the tubes are also made 
to revolve upon their axes, and if at the same 
time the rollers fare made to take a position 
somewhat inclined across the tubes, as shown 
in Figs. 3, 8,9, and 10, the latter are made to 
travel forward as well as to revolve, the speed 
of their forward movement depending upon 
the angle of the rollers f. In order to adjust 
and hold the rollers at any desired angle, the 
lower ends of the spindles g have fitted upon 
them levers p, to the outer ends of which is 
jointed a rod r, the end of which is provided 
with a screw and wheel S, Fig. 3, by which 
the exact position of the levers p and the an 
gle of the pulleys f can be simultaneously al 
tered and adjusted. 
In order to hold down the tubes or bars d 
d upon the pulleys f, we arrange across the 
trough B, above each tube or bar, a transverse 
beam or framee, Figs. 1 and 2, pivoted upon 
arms b to the sides of the trough B, so that it 
can be turned up out of the way when de 
sired. These beams e are shown upon a larger 
scale in Figs. 6 and 7, and upon the upper 
sides they have formed upon them vertical 
guides or sockets b'b'b', in which fit spindles 
c, the lower ends of which carry the guiding 
carriages TTT. Each of these carriages has 
fitted and fixed upon its lower side two par 
allel tubes U U, in which turn freely spindles 
having fixed upon their ends wheels or rollers 
WW, covered with india-rubber, which press 
upon and hold down the tubes or bars d d". 
The spindle c has at its upper end an adjust 
able, cross-bar W, to which springs XX are 
attached, by which the spindle c and the roll 
ers V are pressed down with any desired force 
upon the tubes or bars did, directly above the 
pulleys f". 
The parts of the trough B below the bands 
AAA are closed by horizontal partitions B. 
These horizontal partitions form the floors 
and the partitions H the side walls of a num 
ber of separate closed compartments, and 
these separate closed compartments in which 
the bands move are supplied with emery or 
other abrasive powder of different degrees of 
fineness, the coarsest being supplied to the 
compartment which the tube or bar first en- . 
ters and the finest to that which it passes 
through last, and the several compartments 
are closed by covers Z, which can be readily 
removed and replaced when desired, but when 
in position entirely close the trough B, so that 
no dust can escape. 
Two machines may be placed side by side, 
the tubes or bars did passing from one to the 
other. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The driving-shaft D being set in revolution, 
driven by the belts a, the pulleysy, which carry 
the endless bands A, are thus kept in rapid 
movement, and are kept stretched and in 
proper position by the Weighted pulleys y'at 
the other end, and the central pulleys y, 
their surfaces being kept supplied with suit 
able grinding and polishing powders. The 
tubes d and d are introduced through holes 
Oc 
C 
, 
I 25 
 
465,170 
3 
s, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth and shown. 
5. The combination, with the endless abra 
sive bands A, of the pulleys y', levers I, par 
titions H, provided with curved elongated 
holes L', plate M, felt N, and weights L, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth 
and shown. 
6. In a device for holding tubes or bars 
while being polished, the combination, with 
the tube or bar, of a rotating shaft, a disk set 
angularly thereon for turning the tube or bar 
and moving it in the line of said shaft, a 
spring-plunger mounted over said disk, a 
plurality of anti-friction rollers at the base of 
said plunger and attached thereto for engag 
ing said tube or bar, and a pivoted arm for 
bearing down said spring-plunger and adjust 
ing the pressure on said bar, substantially as 
described. 
7. In a device for holding tubes or bars 
while being polished, the combination, with 
the tube or bar, of a rotating shaft, a plural 
ity of disks set at an angle thereon for turn 
ing the tube or bar about its axis and moving 
it in the direction of said shaft, a plurality of 
spring-plungers mounted over said tube or 
bar and adjusting the pressure thereon and 
on said rotating disks, a transverse beam con 
nected to the springs of all of said spring-plun 
gers, a plurality of arms connected to said 
beams, and a rock-shaft actuating said arms 
and so adjusting the pressure of said tube or 
bar on said angularly-placed disks, substan 
tially as described. 
8. In a device for polishing tubes or bars, 
the combination, with the tube or bar, of a 
trough for holding the polishing material, 
said trough having holes in the side thereof 
loosely inclosing said tube or bar, a felt. 
washer fitting snugly against said tube or 
bar, and a following plate or board holding 
said felt washer in position, substantially as 
9. The combination of the pulley ly, hollow. 
spindle v, having perforations v', felt disk u, 
screw it, and plates a and 2, substantially as 
set forth, and shown in Fig. 13. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in the presence of two witnesses. 
RICHARD JOHN EDWARDS. 
ARCHER EDWARDS. 
described. 
, 
Witnesses: 
JANE G. A. RIDGWAY, 
ARTHURERNESTEDWARDS. 
75 
95 
Ioo. 
in the sides of the trough B, made dust-tight 
by felt packing P, and are supported and fed 
forward by the inclined rollers f, while they 
are held down by the rollers W, carried by 
the hinged cross-framese, and pressed down 
by the springs X. The rollers fare set and 
held at the proper angle by the levers p, rods 
r, and adjusting-wheels S, and are made to 
revolve at the proper speed to turn and feed 
forward the tubes or bars d d" by the pulleys 
and belts m, m', n, o, o', o, i, and k. It will 
be seen that the machine is entirely closed in 
and that the parts in which the grinding and 
polishing take place are completely sepa 
rated from the parts in which the bearings 
and other parts liable to wear are situated, so 
that the machine is very durable and requires 
little attention or repair. 
. 
When necessary, the covers Z, can be re 
moved and the cross-beams e turned upon 
their hinged arms b, and easy access can then 
be had to the interior to change the bands A, 
or for other purposes. 
As the pulleys which carry the bands. A 
have no bearings or other obstructions on 
their outer side, the bands can be very easily 
removed and changed. 
In the figures two tubes did are shown; but 
it is evident that any other number may be 
simultaneously operated upon by increasing 
the number of cross-beams e, with their spring 
rollers, and of the inclined supporting and 
feeding rollers f below. 
. 
The bands A may consist of strips of emery 
cloth or other abrasive material of varying 
fineness, or of plain bands of cloth or other 
material to which the abrasive powder is kept 
supplied. 
What we claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- 
1. The combination, in a machine for grind 
ing and polishing tubes and bars, of the 
trough B, partitions H, pulleys y y' ly, fixed 
bearings C, abrasive bands A, and weighted 
levers I, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the abrasive bands 
A, of the adjustable inclined turning and 
feeding rollers f, the transverse beams e, 
pressure - wheels V, and springs X, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. The spindle C, carriages T, tubes U, 
pressure-wheels V, standardb, movable cross 
bar W, and springs X, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
4. The spindleg, forkf, adjustable roller 
f, pulley i, lever p, rod r, and adjusting-wheel 
f 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465270.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 465,270, 
 
E. L. HOWE. 
HARNESS SADDLE, 
Patented Dec. 15, 1891. 
 
 
 
 
less 
Sesa S 
N, 
 
 
WITNESSES 
NWENOR. 
27t- 7 :- 
w (2Zr2. 4. 
The Norris Peters co. Photo-Litha. wAshcron, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EUGENEL. HOWE, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
HARNESS - SADD E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,270, dated December 15, 1891. 
Application filed June 15, 1891, Serial No. 396,294 (No model.) 
45 
55 
75 
with, is cheaply made, and after the skirt is 
placed in position the lug 10 and spur 11 can 
be immediately pushed to place, after which 
the terret 13 and nut 12 are screwed home, 
obviating any slipping of the parts necessi 
tated by the slow drawing to place by means 
of screws. 
I claim 
1. In a harness-saddle, a burr-plate having 
integral there with an externally-threaded lug, 
a spur, and an internally-threaded boss, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a harness-saddle, the combination of 
a jockey, a burr-plate having integral there 
with an externally-threaded lug, a spur, an 
internally-threaded boss, and a nut engaging 
the lug, substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
3. In a harness-Saddle, the combination of 
a jockey, a burr-plate having integral there 
with a threaded lug, a spur, and an inter 
nally-threaded boss, a terret passing through 
the jockey and engaging the boss, and a nut 
engaging the threaded lug and bearing on 
the surface of the jockey, substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
4. In a harness-Saddle, the combination of 
a grooved jockey, a skirt located in said 
groove, a pad-leather beneath the skirt, a 
burr-plate having integral there with a thread 
edlug, a spur, and an internally-threaded boss, 
a terret passing through the jockey and pad 
leather and engaging the boss, and a nut en 
gaging the threaded lug and bearing on the 
surface of the jockey, substantially as and 
for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 11th day of June, A. D. 1891. 
EUGENE L. HOWE. 
Witnesses: 
MARTIN O. SENSENY, 
EMIL W. JAITE. 
Io 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EUGENE. L. HOWE, of 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and use 
5 ful Improvementin Harness-Saddles, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view, partly in section, 
of my improved harness-saddle. Fig. 2 is a 
top plan view of a portion thereof, and Figs. 
3 and 4 are enlarged detail views of the pad 
plate. 
In the drawings, 22 represent the jockeys, 
which are hinged to each other at 3 and pro 
vided thereat with the cover-plate 4, bearing 
the water-hook 5. Each jockey consists of a 
metallic strip of the general shape shown in 
2 o Fig. 2 and flanged at the edges to produce a 
groove 6, within which the skirt 7 is secured. 
Beneath the jockey lies the pad-leather 8, and 
under the pad-leather is secured the burr 
plate 9. This burr-plate is of a peculiar shape, 
25 as shown in Figs. 3 and 4, having cast in 
tegral there with a threaded lug 10, a spur 11, 
and a burr or boss 14. The burr-plate is se 
cured to the jockey by means of the nut 12, 
which engages the threaded lug 10 and bears 
3o upon the upper surface of the metal jockey, 
and also by means of the terret-screw 13, 
which passes through a hole in the jockey and 
engages the internally-threaded boss 14. The 
spur 11 projects upwardly from the burr 
352 plate 9 and passes through the pad-leathers 
and skirt 7, holding the same in position, 
while they are clamped between the jockey 
and burr-plate by screwing down the terret 
13 and nut 12 to their places. 
The advantages of my construction lie in 
its simplicity, cheapness, and the ease of as 
sembling the parts. The burr-plate, having 
the threaded lug and spur castintegral there 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465370.txt	F. H. HARRIS. 
WAGON RUNNING GEAR. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1891, 
(No Model.) 
No. 465,370. 
: 
s 
f/1. 
- 1 
- 
Irvivervior 
favrve/7//arre's 
4 wavesses 
4A 4-6- 
2, 44%-72% 
% Atlys 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 465,370. 
 
7-7.6. 
F. H. HARRIS. 
WACON RUNNING GEAR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1891. 
A. 
- 
fron/hy H. Havrres 
4%vesses 
47, ?, VA-44.2/ 
M%. 44- 
Ay 1% 
A ty. 
 
the MoRRs PEERs to... roto-irrhio, washiGror. . c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK H. HARRIS, OF TOLEDO, OHIO. 
WAGON RUNNING-GEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,370, dated December 15, 1891. 
Application filed December 26, 1890, Serial No. 375,910. (No model.) 
To all whom it invity conce71. 
of the eye portion C of 
over and fit the top 
the eyebolt. 
Beit known that I, FRANK H. HARRIS, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Toledo, in 
When the axle-cap is placed upon the axle, 
the county of Lucas and State of Ohio, have 
with the bearing E engaging the eyebolt in 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
the manner described, the operator, placing 
ments in Wagon Running-Gear, of which the 
the eyebolts upon the anvil or other suitable 
following is a specification, reference being 
block, heads the bolt portion b, as shown in 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
Fig. 3. The same operation will tightly clamp 
This invention relates to new and useful 
the eye portion a upon the axle and prevent 
improvements in wagon running-gear; and it 
any lateral movement thereof in addition to 
consists in the peculiar construction of the 
securing the axle-cap to the axle by the head 
axle-cap and brackets designed to rest upon 
formed upon the bolt portion b. 
the axle, and of an eyebolt having the eye 
G is a bolster provided with suitable up 
portion sleeved upon the axle, and a bolt por 
Wardly - extended arms or brackets G', by 
tion passing through a socket formed in the 
means of which it is secured to the under side 
of the Wagon-body. 
cap and headed thereon; and, further, in the 
peculiar construction of the axle-cap and 
H is a squared socket formed on the under 
bolster and the means for securing the king 
side of the axle-cap in the central bearing D', 
bolt therein, and, further, in the peculiar con 
while a corresponding squared bearing I is 
Struction and combination of the various 
formed on the top of the bolster G. The bol 
parts, all as more fully hereinafter described. 
ster and axle-cap are apertured to receive a 
My invention is especially designed to be 
king-bolt K, the head of which is engaged in 
used in the construction of toy express-wag 
the bearing H, while the bolt extends u 
ons and other similar devices, and I have 
through the bolster. A suitable nut L being 
shown it in the drawings applied to an ex 
placed upon this bolt, it is turned down until 
press-wagon of this type. 
it engages in the squared bearing I in the bol 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation of 
ster, and then the two parts may be firmly se 
the front axle of a toy express-wagon em 
cured together by turning the bolster upon 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a top plan 
the axle-cap, the bearing I carrying the nut 
view thereof. Fig. 3 is a cross-section on line 
with it, while the bolt-head is prevented from 
acac in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a detached perspective 
being turned by engaging in the squared bear 
view of the rear bracket. Fig. 5 is a detached 
ing H. It is evident, if the bolster is now 
perspective view of the eyebolt. 
Fig. 6 is a 
secured to the body of the wagon, that the 
vertical central longitudinal section through 
parts cannot become disengaged except by 
the wagon and gear. Eigs. 7 and S are views 
turning the axle a number of times around 
showing the application of different parts to 
beneath the body, which is not likely to hap 
the axle. 
pen in the ordinary use of such a wagon. 
A is the body, B is the front axle, and C is. 
Mare the brackets supporting the rear por 
the rear axle, of an express-wagon of ordinary 
tion of the body upon the rear axle. These 
construction. 
brackets are provided with a suitable bearing 
D is the axle-cap, having the central bear. 
E, the same as on the axle-cap, and the eye 
ing or yoke D'and the end bearing D', resting 
bolt F is engaged upon the rear axle, the 
upon the top of the front axle B. This cap is 
parts being secured together in the same man 
provided near its ends with the raised bear 
ner described for the front axle. 
ings E, which are provided with a central 
While I have shown my improved device 
aperture extending through the top. 
applied to the running-gear of a toy wagon, 
F is an eyebolt, of wrought or malleable 
it is evident that the same construction may 
iron, the eye portion C, thereof being sleeved 
be employed in Securing gears of other ve 
upon the axle, while the bolt portion b passes 
hicles to the axle. For instance, in Fig. 7 I 
through the aperture in the raised bearing E. have shown itemployed in securing a bracket 
The bearing E is provided with a suitable O to the axle, which bracket carries a spring 
saddle or recess F, and adapted to engage P, designed to be employed in the manufac. 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
55 
p 75 
9o. 
95 
I do 
 
2 
. 
- 
465,370 
ceive the head of the king-bolt, the king-bolt 
having its head secured therein and extend 
ing through the top of the axle-cap, and a 
bolster apertured to receive the nut on said I5 
bolt, substantially as described. 
presence of two witnesses, 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
FRANK H. HARRIS, 
Witnesses: 
L. G. RICHARDSON, 
EDW. S. BARKDULL. 
ture of baby-carriages, and in Fig. 8 I have 
shown itemployed in securing the forked ends 
of the backbone of a tricycle to the rear axle. 
It is evident that many other uses may be 
5 found for my improvements, and I do not 
limit myself to its specific use to wagon run 
ning-gear. 
What I claim as my invention is 
In a wagon running-gear, the combination, 
to with the axle-cap and bolster, of a bearing on 
the under side of the axle-cap, adapted to re 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465470.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 465,470. 
H. A. FOSTER, 
G, OBE HOLDER FOR ELECTRICAR CLAMPS, 
Patented Dec. 22, 1891. 
 
B 
E  
fig. 
R 
" ' 
ILLIII, IIT III 
fish 
/7 
i 
i 
t 
( 
D 
27'y 
2D 
B 
B, 
E3 
WITNESSES 
(26a-z-le- 
2 
2 
 
 
 
2E 
IDs.-4- 
 - D 
N.VENTOR 
NNN (222-222 1762%- 
B 
7%-44 
ATTYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORATIO A. FOSTER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE THOMSON 
HOUSTON ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF CONNECTICUT. 
GLOBE-HOLDER FOR ELECTRIC-ARC LAMPs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,470, dated December 22, 1891. 
Application filed November 3, 1890, Serial No 370,205. (No model.) 
IC 
25 
35 
To all u?ion, it Ti-City conce77. 
Be it known that I, HORATIO A. FOSTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York city, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Globe-Holders for Elec 
tric-Arc Lamps, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My present invention relates to globe-hold 
ers for electric-arc lamps; and my object is 
to provide a holder simple in construction, 
easily and cheaply manufactured, and by 
which the globe may be securely fastened in 
position to one of the standards of the lamp. 
With this object in view I have devised my 
improved holder, which comprises simply a 
flat metal frame, arc or ring shaped, which 
rests on top of the globe, and a clamping de 
vice thereon for securing the whole to one of 
the lamp-standards. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in elevation showing the globe and 
holder in position upon a lamp. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view of the holder, showing the lamp 
standard in section. Fig. 3 is a section of the 
holder on line acac, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a second 
section at right angles to Fig. 3, and Fig. 5 
shows the pivoted clamping-jaw in detail. 
In the views, A represents a flat metal frame, 
which rests on the top of the globe, and Will 
preferably be arc-shaped, as shown. At the 
two ends of this frame, and likewise at its 
center, are lugs or flanges B, projecting down 
ward, through which pass screws B', which 
serve to attach the globe to the frame, as will 
be understood. 
Upon the upper side of the frame over the 
central flange B is a clamping device for at 
taching the holder to the standard of the lamp, 
which is preferably constructed as follows: A 
lug or bearing C is cast or otherwise made 
part of the frame, and has a fixed jaw C fit 
ting the lamp-standard, and two ears D D, 
between which is pivoted a second and mov 
 
45 
55 
Go 
able jaw F, a vertical bolt E serving as the 
pivot and holding the parts in place. A set 
Screw G passes through a screw-thread in the 
jaw F at a point in the rear of the pivot and 
has a bearing against a similar projection 
upon the fixed lug C. To secure the globe in 
place, it is only necessary to hold it so that the 
jaws embrace one of the standards and then 
screw up the set-screw G, so as to clamp them 
together on the standard. The frame A is of . 
considerable stiffness, so that when supported 
by a single such clamping device the globe 
will be held firmly. 
This holderis adapted particularly forglobes 
placed outside of and close to the standards 
of the lamp, as seen in Fig. 1; but it may be 
used to Support a globe in other situations as 
well. It affords means for readily adjusting 
the position of the globe upon the standard 
and facilitates the work of the attendant, be 
cause as there is only a single clamping de 
vice one hand is left free to support the globe. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is- . 
1. The combination, with the standards of 
an arc lamp, of a globe surrounding the stand 
ards, a globe-holder attached to the top of the 
globe, having a bearing upon its upper side, 
and a clamping-jaw pivoted in said bearing 
and furnishing means for clamping the holder 
to one of the standards of the lamp. 
2. The combination of the standards of an 
arc lamp and the globe surrounding the 
standards with the globe-holder resting on 
the globe and having a clamping device on 
its upper side for attachment to one of the 
standards, as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 27th day of October, 1890. 
- 
IORATIO. A. FOSTER. 
70 
75 
Witnesses: 
J. W. HENRY, 
BERNARD LEVEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465570.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 465,570, 
 
F, E, TREMPER 
SPEEDING AND REWER SING GEAR, 
Patented Deo. 22, 1891. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK E. TREMPER, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
SPEEDING AND REVERSING GEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,570, dated December 22, 1891. 
Application filed May 25, 1891, Serial No. 394,055, (No model.) 
- 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK E. TREMPER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of 
California, have invented an Improvement in 
Speeding and Reversing Gears; and I hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to that class of mech 
anism for reversing the movement of an en 
gine usually termed speeding and reversing 
gear. 
It consists in the novel construction and 
arrangement of parts hereinafter fully de 
scribed, and specifically pointed out in the 
claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and effective gear of this class which 
is especially adapted for small-boat engines, 
in which the driving-shaft of the engine may 
be placed transversely of the boat and may 
communicate power to the screw-shaft, which 
is located longitudinally thereof. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
for a more complete explanation of my inven 
tion, Figure l is an elevation of my device. 
Fig.2 is a view showing one of the interme 
diate wheels on the face of the fly-wheel. Fig. 
3 is a view showing a pawl and rack for Con 
trolling the lever carrying the intermediate 
A represents, generally, the engine, B the 
engine shaft, and C a fly-wheel on each end 
of said shaft. 
D is the screw-shaft, to which the power of 
the engine-shaft is to be transmitted, and it 
will be seen that these two shafts are in lines 
at right angles to each other. Upon the 
driven shaft D is a wheel E, preferably a fric 
tion-wheel. The inner faces of the fly-wheels 
Care made very broad to provide engaging 
surfaces, preferably frictional. 
F is a swinging lever, having arms G ex 
tending to each side. At the extremities of 
these arms are suitably mounted the inter 
mediate wheels H, one for each arm. The po 
sition of these wheels is such that they are 
adapted to fit alternately between the fric 
tion-surfaces of the wheel E and the fly-Wheels 
C, and when one of these intermediate wheels 
is thrown into action the other is thrown out 
wheels. 
2, 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
When the lever is moved in the 65 
of action, and vice versa. A spring I may be 
made to hold one of these wheels normally in 
active position. Other means may be em 
ployed for mounting and carrying these in- 55 
termediate wheels into and out of action, and 
in Fig. 3 I have shown the lever as controlled 
by a rack and pawl. 
The operation of this mechanism is as foll 
lows: By the movement of the lever in one 6o 
direction one of the intermediate wheels His 
thrown into engagement and the power of the 
fly-wheel on that side is transmitted through 
it to the friction-wheel E and thence to the 
driven shaft. 
other direction, the first intermediate wheel is 
raised up out of engagement and the other in 
termediate wheel is thrown into action, where 
by the power of the fly-wheel on the other side 
is transmitted to the friction-wheel E to rotate 7o 
it and the driven shaft in the opposite direc 
tion. Thus the driving-shaft of the engine 
may be placed transversely in a boat and may 
be easily made to drive in either direction the 
screw-shaft of the boat. By making the fric- 75 
tion-wheel E one-half the diameter of the fly 
wheel I can give double speed to the propel 
ler-shaft, to which wheel E is attached. The 
intermediate wheels H, which are thrown into 
and out of action, need not be of any given 8o 
diameter except as will best fit and conform 
to the space between the fly-wheels and the 
friction-wheel E. The fly-wheels can be made 
of metal, and also the wheel E, or of other 
materials, and the intermediate wheels Hmay 85 
likewise be made of metal, or it may be found 
of advantage to face them with rubber, paper, 
leather, &c. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 9c 
Patent, is 
1. A speeding and reversing gear consisting 
of a driving-shaft and a driven shaft in lines at 
right angles to each other, fly-wheels, one on 
each end of the driving-shaft, a wheel on the 95 
driven shaft, and intermediate wheels, one on 
each side, adapted to be alternately thrown 
into the space between the sides of the fly. 
Wheels and the wheel on the driven shaft to 
form contact there with, Substantially as here- loo 
in described. 
2. A speeding and reversing gear consisting 
2 
A65,570 
of a driving and a driven shaft in lines at tact therewith, substantially as herein de 
right angles to each other, a fly- wheel on scribed. 
each end of the driving-shaft, a wheel on the 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
driven shaft, a lever with arms, and inter- hand. 
5 mediate wheels, one at the end of each arm 
and adapted to be alternately thrown into the 
space between the sides of the fly-wheel and 
the wheel on the driven shaft and form con- 
JAMES L. KING, 
W. N. KEMPSTON, 
Witnesses: 
FRANK E. TREMPER, 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465670.txt	(No Model.) 
L. A. LE MIEUX. 
STEAM ENGINE WALWE. 
No. 465,670. 
Patented Deo, 22, 1891, 
 
 
$%NSS3 
. SE22232 
Q3 
is 2 SNE 7, 
Sv% 
QN 
lo 
N 
T's 
is 
w 
S. 
w 
7 
w 
 
  
. 
sis is 
N R) 
SS 
N 
SI. 
SYY 
R N SS 
S s 
2 22 D 
 
 
  
 
Q 
Ez-Z 
WA2% 
4,222 
  
 
N) 
2M 
  
 
 
 
s f 
2S s 
%2% 
I 
S. NS 
, S. SS 
Zl 2% 
%cysey 
WWve-yy& 
Z 33 
  
 
r . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUCIUS A. T.E MIEUX, OF SEYMOUR, WISCONSIN. 
STEAM - ENGINE WALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,670, dated December 22, 1891. 
Application filed April 3, 1891, Serial No. 387,548, (No model.) 
To (tli, Luhon, it in Gulf concer'7. 
Beit known that I, LUCIUSA. LEMIEUX, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Seymour, in the county of Outagamie, and in 
the State of Wisconsin, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Steam-En 
gine Valves; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in steam-engine valves 
and relates more particularly to a novel con 
Struction in rotary valves of the same gen 
eral construction as that shown in a prior pat 
ent, granted to me on November 25, 1890, and 
numbered 441,176. 
The invention consists in the matters here 
inafter described, and pointed out in the ap 
pended claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a longitudinal sec 
tion of a rotary valve embodying my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the same on 
line 22 of Fig.1. Fig. 3 is a cross-section on 
line 33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal sec 
tional view illustrating a modified form of my 
improvement, taken online 44 of Fig. 5. Fig. 
5 is a cross-section online 55 of Fig. 4. Fig. 
6 is a separate view of one of the parts. 
In said drawings, A indicates a cylindrical 
Steam-chest, provided with steam inlet and 
exhaust ports C, and a ', respectively, and with 
ports act', leading to the opposite ends of the 
cylinder. 
B indicates as a whole the rotary valve, 
which comprises a frame provided with cy 
lindrical ends B B', connected together by 
parallel bars or side walls b b, said frame be 
ing centrally supported within the cylindrical 
steam-chest upon a shaft B, by means of 
which motion is communicated to the valve 
through the medium of any suitable mechan 
ism. Packing-rings B* B are located upon 
the outside of the two end portions B B of 
the valve-frame, as shown in Figs. I and 2 of 
the drawings. 
shape, Said valve-plates being adjustably en 
gaged with the valve-frame B. 
As shown in the drawings, the shank of 
each of the T-shaped valve-plates CC is mov 
ably engaged between the two parallel side 
C C are valve-plates of substantially 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
walls b b of the said frame, and the outer por 
tions of said valve-plates are curved, so as to 
fit closely against the inner surface of the 
steam-chest A. 
In order to keep the valve-plates C C con 
stantly pressed outwardly against the inner 
surface of the steam-chest, I provide means 
for introducing steam into the interior of the 
valve, between the inner ends of the valve 
plates C C. As shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, I 
provide a duct D upon the inner surface of 
the steam-chest A, said duct communicating 
with a neripheral groove Dupon the outer sur 
face of one of the packing-rings B* B, and a 
radial duct D, leading to the center of one of 
the cylindrical ends B B of the valve-frame 
and communicating with the peripheral groove 
or duct D'at its outer end. The ductor groove 
D is located in the inner surface of the steam 
chest in such a position as to open into the 
steam-inlet port, so as to afford a constant 
supply of steam to the interior of the valve. 
By this construction steam is permitted to 
enter through the ducts D, D, and D to the 
interior of the valve, and the steam thus ad 
mitted serves to press the two valve-plates 
outwardly against the walls of the steam 
chest, so as to prevent any leakage of steam 
between the said valve-plates and the walls 
of the Steam-chest. 
In the form of construction shown in Figs. 
4, 5, and 6 a steam-passage E is provided in 
each of the valve-plates, said passages being 
arranged to come alternately into communi 
cation with the steam-inlet port as the rotary 
valve is revolved by the valve-actuating mech 
anism. A reciprocating valve E is located 
between the plates C C and is provided with 
two bearing-surfaces, preferably of Substan 
tially conical form, arranged to engage corre 
spondingly-shaped seatse e in the two valve 
plates CC. Two stems e'e' are provided upon 
the opposite ends of the reciprocating valve 
E", said stems being arranged to move loosely 
within the steam-passages E, as shown in Figs. 
4 and 5. By this arrangement a sufficient 
space is left outside of the stems e'e' to per 
mit steam to enter through the inside of the 
passages E E and around the stems e'e' to 
the inside of the rotary valve, so as to press. 
the two valve-plates outwardly against the 
walls of the steam-chest. The stems e'e' are 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
465,670 
5 
made of tubular form, so as to admit steam to 
the inside of the valve E' also, and said valve 
is provided with a diaphragm E upon its in 
side to prevent the steam from passing through 
the said valve E. By this arrangement, when 
the passage E in one of the valve-plates C 
Comes into communication with the steam 
inlet port, steam immediately enters through 
Said passage to the interior of the valve E/ 
and by its pressure upon the diaphragm E 
forces said valve against the seat in the oppo 
site Valve-plate C. At the same time steam 
DaSSes around the outside of the stem e and 
enters the Space between the two valve-plates 
C: C, thereby operating to hold said valve 
plates closely against the walls of the steam 
chest and to prevent any leakage of steam 
past Said plates. In this form of construction, 
also, the outer surfaces of the valve-plates C 
C are provided with short transverse grooves 
e'e', communicating with the outer ends of 
the Steam-passages E E and extending nearly 
to the edges of the bearing-surfaces of the 
said Valve-plates, so that as soon as one of said 
Valve-plates begins to move across the steam 
inlet port the steam will pass through said 
transverse groove and immediately enter the 
passage E, so as to hold the valve-plates out 
Wardly against the walls of the steam-chest, 
as before described. 
By my improvements I am enabled to pro 
vide a rotary valve which works with the 
least possible amount of friction, being prac 
tically balanced by the steam-pressure, and 
also Working smoothly and tightly with vary 
ing degrees of steam-pressure. 
A great advantage of the constructions 
herein described over the form shown in the 
before-mentioned prior patent, in which the 
valve-plates are held apart by springs, is that 
in order to insure the operation of the rotary 
Valve under varying degrees of steam-press 
ure the springs which hold said valve-plates 
apart must be made sufficiently strong and 
stiff to hold said valve - plates outwardly 
against a heavy steam-pressure, so that when 
steam under a lesser pressure is used the fric 
tion caused by the outward pressure of said 
springs is greater than if the springs were 
only stiff enough to hold the valve-plates out 
Ward against the steam under this lesser 
pressure, while by the forms of construction 
herein described the pressure of the steam 
between the valve-plates to hold said plates 
apart is always proportionate to the pressure 
25 
45 
55 
 
- 
of the steam in the inlet-port. This arrange 
ment therefore produces a much more satis 
factory operation of the valve under varying 
degrees of pressure. By my improvements, 
also, Iain enabled to provide a rotary valve 
of very simple construction and one in which 
the parts may be readily removed for inspec 
tion or repair. 
IIaving described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The herein - described rollary valve for 
steam-engines, comprising a revoluble frame 
carrying two valve-plates expansibly con 
nected there with, and means for introducing 
live steam between the said valve-plates upon 
the interior of said frame, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
2. The herein-described valve for steam 
engines, comprising a revoluble frame having 
cylindrical end portions and parallel longitudi 
nal side bars or walls, two valve-plates expan 
sibly connected with said side bars or walls, 
and means for introducing live steam between 
said valve-plates upon the interior of said 
frame, substantially as described. 
3. The herein - described rotary valve for 
steam-engines, comprising a revoluble valve 
frame provided with cylindrical end portions 
and parallel longitudinal side bars or walls, 
two valve-plates expansibly engaged with 
said longitudinal walls, and a steam-passage 
communicating at one end with the steam 
inlet port and at the other end with the space 
between the inner ends of said valve-plates 
within said revoluble frame, substantially as 
described. 
4. The herein - described rotary valve for 
steam - engines, comprising a rotary frame 
having cylindrical end portions and parallel 
longitudinal side bars or walls, two valve 
plates of substantially T shape expansibly 
engaged with said side walls, and a steam 
passage leading from the steam-inlet port and 
communicating with the space between the 
inner ends of said valve-plates within said 
revoluble frame, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
in testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand, at Milwaukee, in 
the county of Milwaukee and State of Wis 
consin, in the presence of two witnesses. 
LUCIUS A. LE MIEUX. 
Witnesses: 
H. G. UNDERWOOD, 
JOHN E. WILES. 
7 O 
75 
So 
90 
95 
IOO 
I C5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465771.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 465,771. 
 
S, J. ADAMS, 
MOLD FOR TUBULAR ARTICLES, 
Patented DeC, 22, 1891, 
%2.4% 
2H2 / NN 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHOTO-titho, wASHINGroN, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN JARVIS ADAMS, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MOLD FOR TUBULAR ARTICLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,771, dated December 22, 1891. 
Application filed September 30, 1889, Serial No, 325,611. (No model.) 
- 
55 
Ed 
To all whon, it may concert: 
Beitknown that I, STEPHENJARVISADAMS, 
a resident of Pittsburg, in the county of Alle 
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
Vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Molds for Tubular Articles; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description thereof. 
My invention relates to molds for forming 
axle-boxes and other tubular articles. In 
these molds as heretofore formed the mold 
Or matrix for the body of the mold was molded 
Vertically in a flask, the upper end of the ma 
trix being open and closed by the core, which 
fitted into a seat or print at the upper end 
thereof, and the matrix being either closed 
at its lower end and the core seated at the 
base thereof or the matrix extending through 
the flask and its lower end being closed by a 
Separate core, in which the end of the main 
core was seated. The gates or sprues through 
which the molten metal entered the mold 
cavity were formed at the upper end of the 
mold beside the core and the metal flowed 
downwardly into the mold-cavity in filling it. 
It is found that in deep molds formed as 
above described, if the walls of the matrix or 
core are soft or unevenly packed, the metal 
will cut into the walls, carrying the sand into 
the body of the casting and rendering the 
casting rough and uneven, or in some cases 
useless, on account of the sand contained in 
the metal. In case the walls of the mold are 
packed too hard, however, it will not vent 
properly and it is found that the metal will 
not lie against it, and consequently scabs or 
blow-holes are formed therein. By my in 
vention I am enabled to form molds in which 
these difficulties are overcome; and I also 
provide for the forming of the molds without 
the ordinary bottom boards. 
It consists, generally stated, in a nold for 
such tubular castings having a matrix, a core 
entering the matrix and closing the upper 
end thereof, a runner extending entirely 
through the mold, and a gate connecting the 
base of the runner and base of the matrix, 
these parts being contained and supported 
within a single flask, in combination with a 
level sand-bed supporting the mold and clos 
ing the base of the runner and gate. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
- 
in each. 
and use my invention, I will describe the same 
more fully, referring to the accompanying 
drawings, in which - 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section show 
ing the patterns within the mold. Figs. 2 and 
3 are central vertical sections showing two 
different forms of molds and showing the 
cores within the molds, and Fig. 4 is a bottom 
plan view of the finished mold. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in forming a mold in accordance with my 
invention where the mold is straight or ta 
pering from the upper end it is formed as 
shown in Fig. 3, the mold-cavities not extend 
ing entirely through the body of sand; but 
where the lower end of the mold-cavity is 
larger than the central part thereof the pat 
term is formed in two parts and extends en 
tirely through the flask and body of sand 
therein, and one part is withdrawn from the 
lower part and the other part or main body 
of the pattern is withdrawn from the upper 
art of the mold, cores being introduced into 
each end of the mold-cavity, as described in 
Letters Patent No. 377,009, granted to me Jan 
uary 31, 1888. 
I will first describe the mold embodying the 
latter construction, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The patterns Ct. a' for the molds and the pat 
terne for the runner are secured to the pat 
tern plate or block b and extend upwardly 
through the stripping-plate c. In forming 
the mold the flask (lis placed around the pat 
terns, resting on the stripping-plate, and the 
sand is packed therein in any suitable man 
ner. I thus mold the matrices in the body of 
sand, which in such case extend through the 
body of sand and the runner g, extending al 
most to the lower end of the mold, as shown 
in Figs. 2 and 3. 
Prior to the removal of the 
patterns, however, I form by any suitable 
means the gate-cavity h, connecting the run 
nerg and matrices f, as shown in Figs, 2 and 
3. This may be accomplished by a gate-knife, 
or, as preferred by me, by a cylindrical cut 
ter passing down between the molds and cut 
ting out a circular cavity, and SO forming a 
gate to all the mold-cavities. The patterns are 
then withdrawn, the pattern a being first with 
drawn through the lower end, while the mold is 
resting on its upper end, and the main patterns 
90 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
2 
465,771 
O 
C. being subsequently withdrawn through the 
upper end through the stripping-plate c. To 
close the lower ends of the matrices f, Iemploy 
the ring or cup coresk, (shown in Fig. 2,) these 
cores being seated in the seats or printsformed 
for them at the base of the matrices before the 
mold is inverted, and these cores practically 
closing the ends of the matrices. The cores 
may have gates formed in the side thereof 
to permit the flow of the metal from the gate 
cavity h into the mold-cavity in case the ring 
cores extend beyond the gate-cavity hi. The 
mold is then inverted and a core l is inserted 
through the upper end of each matrix, the 
core having suitably-shaped seats at its upper 
and lower ends, the seat at the upper end fit 
ting into the print in at the top of the matrix 
. f and the seat at the lower end fitting into the 
print in in the ring or cup core le. 
The finished mold may be placed either 
upon a bottom board or drag having a plain 
Sanded surface or upon a suitably-prepared 
surface on the casting-floor, either such sur 
face forming the base of the gate-cavity h, so 
that the molten metal will flow down the run 
nerg into the gate-cavity h and thence into 
the base of each mold-cavity. 
The mold shown in Fig. 3 is practically the 
same as that above described, differing only 
in the fact that as the mold-cavities are 
straight or tapering toward the lower end the 
entire patterns can be withdrawn through 
the upper end, and consequently the lower 
ends of the matrices are closed by the sand 
of the mold instead of by the auxiliary cores, 
the core-prints in being molded at the base of 
the matrices by prints on the patterns. In 
such case the gate-cavity is formed before 
the withdrawal of the patterns, and it com 
municates with the runner g and the mold 
cavities, as shown. The cores lenter the 
matrices through the upper end of the mold 
and are seated in the prints in n, as shown. 
During the pouring of the molds the molten 
metal, entering the upper end of the runner, 
will flow down through the same, entering 
the gate-cavity h and being confined therein 
by the flat surface of the casting-floor or drag. 
It will then flow into the lower ends of the 
mold-cavities and gradually rise within the 
same, filling them without any cutting or like 
action upon the surfaces of the cores or mat 
rices, and so insuring smooth and solid cast 
ings. I am also enabled to used green-sand 
cores if it is found desirable. 
Myinvention has been described and shown 
as applied to a group of molds; but it is evi 
dent that it can be employed where a single 
mold is formed in a flask, such as in making 
wagon-skeins and other long tubular cast 
ings, the runner passing through the flask at 
one side of the matrix. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
A mold for tubular articles, having a matrix, 
a core entering the matrix from above and 
closing the upper end thereof, a runner eX 
tending entirely through the mold, and a gate 
connecting the base of the runner and the 
base of the matrix, these parts being con 
tained and supported within a single flask, in 
combination with a level sand-bed supporting 
the mold and closing the base of the runner. 
In testimony whereof I, the said S. JARVIS 
ADAMS, have hereunto set my hand. 
STEPHEN JARWIS ADAMS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES I. KAY, 
J. N. COOKE. 
. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465871.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 465,871, 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
SR 
S. MASON, Jr., 
APPARATUS FOR, DYEING WOOL 
Patented Dec. 29, 1891. 
NZN N 
Sajaa 
Ni 
N4% 
s. 
| 
R & s 
N 
BAE HEHES ta. 
Nil?; if 
SN2RNS 
 N %  NSN : 
a. 
W 
Sn 
S 
ry 
M 
2. 
Y 
i. 
3-1 
t 
IN%.S. 
I 
E. ESSEE 
AEE 
w S-a N 
N SSS 
S3S. 
&2%& 
: 
NEERIES it. 
N % it lifi 
2S X 
K 
linesses: 
(26-24-ce 
N4 
t 
S. 
7. 
the NORRIS PEERs co, Photo-urtho, wASHINGTON, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL MASON, JR, OF MANCIESTER, ENGLAND. 
APPARATUS FOR DYEING WOOL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,871, dated December 29, 1891. 
Application filed May 13, 1891, Serial No. 392,635. (No model.) Patented in England June 3, 1889, No. 9,149, 
55 
65 
O 
To all, whon it Hay conce77. 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL MASON, Jr., a 
Subject of the Queen of Great Britain, and 
a resident of Manchester, in the county of 
Lancaster, Kingdom of Great Britain, have in 
vented new and useful Apparatus for Dyeing 
or otherwise Treating Wool, (for which I have 
obtained a patent in Great Britain, No. 9,149, 
bearing date June 3, 1889,) of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
apparatus for dyeing, mordanting, scouring, 
or otherwise treating wool, and has for its ob 
ject to provide means which will permit the 
treatment of wool in top form or rowing 
bobbins in a keir or other similar hermeti. 
cally-closed vessel. I attain this object by the 
apparatus described in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section, Fig 2, an end 
view, and Fig. 3 a sectional plan, of my im 
proved apparatus for dyeing or otherwise 
treating wool tops or bobbins. Fig. 4 is a ver 
tical section of the lower part of the keir, show 
ing a modification thereof. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The hermetically - closed vessel C, herein 
after termed the keir, made of iron or other 
suitable material, according to requirements 
of the colors and treatment to be performed, 
is internally furnished with a perforated false 
bottomb, arranged stationary, Fig. 4, or pref 
erably with a bottom b, arranged to revolve 
in a stuffing-box b', (see Fig. 1) formed on the 
keir-bottom a'. When employing a station 
ary perforated false bottomb, the keir-bottom 
a' is formed with a number of channels c, Fig. 
4; otherwise the said channels are or a cavity 
c is formed underneath the revolving bottom 
l, Fig. 1. The said channels or the cavity c 
communicates with the pipe d, which serves 
both as an inlet and as an outlet for the liquor, 
and with perforated pipes e, suitably fitted 
into the keir-bottom a' or false perforated 
bottomb, on which are placed the wool tops 
or bobbins f to be treated. A weight g is 
placed on the top thereof, having a short piece 
of hose-piping h attached, (the free end of 
which is closed,) which weight g, when the 
tops or bobbins f shrink during the treatment, 
draws the hose down the perforated pipe e, 
thus covering the perforations and compel 
ling all the liquor to pass through the tops or 
bobbins f. 
To the inlet and outlet d are suitably con 
nected two pipes f' and f*, respectively in 
communication with an elevator k and rotary 
or other suction pump land with the liquor 
tank i by means of pipes.f, f, and f. The 
liquor-tank i is arranged at a level higher 
than the liquor-level in the keir ct, and the 
said elevator k and rotary or other suction 
pump l are brought, respectively, into com 
munication with the inlet-pipe O on the top of 
the keir a by means of the pipes f and valve 
in and the pipe f and valve m'. The inlet 
pipe O is also connected to a vacuum-pump 
(not shown) and a water-supply, respectively, 
by means of the pipes p p' and the top of the 
keir ct, formed with a man-hole C, which can 
be hermetically closed and facilitates the plac 
ing and removing of the wool tops or bobbins 
f onto or from the perforated pipes e. No 
circulation of the current takes place through 
these pipes p p", as one serves for the inlet of 
water and the other for producing a vacuum. 
By revolving the bottomb in the keir C, the 
perforated pipes e can be successively brought 
underneath the man-hole a', which greatly fa 
cilitates the placing on or removal of the tops 
or bobbins f from the same. Below the inlet 
pipe O a distributer q is arranged in the keir 
a, and on the outside thereof a liquor-gage 7. 
To facilitate the draining or washing of the 
keir a, a waste-pipes, furnished with a valve 
s', may be connected to the keir-bottom Ct'. 
For such colors as require the liquor to be 
heated or boiled to fix the dye the keir a, is 
provided with a circular steam-coil it, ar 
ranged close to its inner surface, and the sup 
ply-tank may be heated in a similar man 
ner or by an open steam-jet. 
The operation of the apparatus is as fol 
lows: After placing the wool tops or bobbins 
95 
f to be treated onto the perforated pipes e 
one on top of the other-in the keira, the 
same are subjected to a vacuum, during 
which time communication with the liquor 
tank i and elevator k and rotary or other 
suction pump l is cut off by means of the 
valves in, m, n, m, and . The valve in 
75 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
3 
465,87i. 
pipe f', leading to the liquor-tank i, is then 
opened, which causes the liquor to rush into 
the keira, through pipes.ff' and inlet d and 
through the perforated pipes e and wool tops 
or bobbins f. When the latter are fully im 
mersed in the liquor, which can be ascertained 
by the gage-glass , the valve i, leading to the 
liquor-tanki, is closed and the valves n and 
mare opened, which establishes communica 
tion through pipes f', f', and O between the 
keir a, and the liquor-tank i. The pump l. 
is then set in operation, which circulates the 
liquor in the keir a through the tops or bob 
bins f, perforated pipes e, channels or cavity 
c, outlet d, pipes.f, f, and f', and back into 
the tank i. 
Where the nature of the liquor will allow 
it, an elevator lc may be used, which, on the 
valves i', m, m, and m being closed and the 
valve in opened, raises the liquor previously 
run into the keir a from the outlet d through 
the pipes f', f', and o onto the distributer q in 
the top of the keir a, whereby a continuous 
circulation of the liquor through the wool tops 
or bobbins f can also be maintained. When 
the operation of dyeing is completed, the 
liquor in the keir C. can be returned into the 
tank by means of the rotary or other suc 
tion pump l through outlet d, pipes.f, f, and 
O 
25 
f', and valve m', which latter otherwise re 
mains closed. 
v 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an apparatus for treating Wool, a 
hermetically-closed vessel having a man-hole, 
vacuum, or liquor-inlet at the top, an outlet at 
the bottom, perforated pipes, a perforated 
bottom adapted to be circularly movable for 
the purpose of bringing Said perforated pipes 
in succession beneath the man-hole, channels 
communicating therewith, and Weight g, pro 
vided with a flexible pipe, said pipe being 
drawn over the perforations in the before-men 
tioned pipes by the Weight, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. The combination, with the perforated 
pipe e, adapted to receive the tops or bob 
bins f to be treated, of a weight g, having at 
tached a flexible pipe h, which weight, while 
the tops or bobbins f are shrinking during 
treatment, descends and draws the flexible 
pipe I gradually over the perforations in e, 
substantially as set forth. 
35 
45 
SAMUEL MASON, JR. 
Witnesses: 
FERDINAND BOSSHARDT, 
S. E. BRAMALL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US465971.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
r 
- 
T. A. EDIS.ON. 
MEANS FORTRANSMITTING SIGNALS ELECTRICALLY. 
Patented Dec. 29, 1891. 
No. 465,971, 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
T. A. EDISON, 
MEANS FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNALS ELECTRICALLY. 
No. 465,971, 
Patented Dec. 29, 1891. 
 
UNITEL STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
TIOMAS A. EDISON, OF MENLO PARK, NEWJERSEY. 
MEANS FoR TRANSMITTING SIGNALS ELECTRICALLY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 465,971, dated December 29, 1891. 
r 
Application filed May 23, 1885, Serial No. 166455. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS A. EDISON, of 
Menlo Park, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of New Jersey, have discovered a new 
and useful Improvement in Means for Trans 
mitting Signals Electrically, (Case No. 652) 
of which the following is a specification. 
The present invention consists in the sig 
naling system having elevated induction 
plates ordevices, as hereinafter described and 
claimed. . 
I have discovered that if sufficient elevation 
be obtained to overcome the curvature of the 
earth's surface and to reduce to the minimum 
the earth's absorption electric telegraphing 
or signaling between distant points can be 
carried on by induction without the use of 
wires connecting such distant points. This 
discovery is especially applicable to tele 
graphing across bodies of water, thus avoid 
ing the use of submarine cables, or for com 
municating between vessels at sea, or between 
vessels at sea, and points on land; but it is 
also applicable to electric communication be 
tween distant points on land, it being neces 
sary, however, on land (with the exception of 
communication over open prairie) to increase 
the elevation in order to reduce to the mini 
mum the induction-absorbing effect of houses, 
trees, and elevations in the land itself. At 
sea from an elevation of one hundred feet I 
can communicate electrically a great distance, 
and since this elevation or one sufficiently 
high can be had by utilizing the masts of 
ships signals can be sent and received be 
tween ships separated a considerable distance, 
and by repeating the signals from ship to 
ship communication can be established be 
tween points at any distance apart or across 
the largest seas and even oceans. The col 
lision of ships in fogs can be prevented by 
this character of signaling, by the use of which, 
also, the Safety of a ship in approaching a 
dangerous coast in foggy weather can be as 
sured. In communicating between points on 
land poles of great height can be used or cap 
points, 
tive balloons, At these elevated 
whether upon the masts of ships, upon poles 
or balloons, condensing-surfaces of metal or 
other conductor of electricity are located. 
Each condensing-surface is connected with 
earth by an electrical conducting-wire. On 
land this earth connection would be one of 
usual character in telegraphy. At sea the 
wire would run to one or more metal plates on 
the bottom of the vessel where the earth con 
nection would be made with the Water. 
The 
high-resistance secondary circuit of an induc 
tion-coil is located in circuit between the con 
densing-surface and the ground. The primary 
circuit of the induction-coil includes a bat 
tery and a device for transmitting signals, 
which may be a revolving circuit-breaker op 
erated continually by a motor of any suitable 
kind, either electrical or mechanical, and a 
key normally short-circuiting the circuit 
breaker or secondary coil. For receiving 
signals I locate in said circuit between the 
condensing-surface and the ground a dia 
phragm-sounder, which is preferably one of 
my electro-motograph telephone-receivers. 
The key normally short-circuiting the re 
volving circuit-breaker, no impulses are pro 
duced in the induction-coil until the key is 
depressed, when a large number of impulses 
are produced in primary, and by means of 
the secondary corresponding impulses, or 
variations in tension are produced at the ele 
vated condensing-surface, producing thereat 
electrostatic impulses. These electrostatic 
impulses are transmitted inductively to the 
elevated condensing-surface at the distant 
point and are made audible by the electro 
motograph connected in the ground-circuit 
with such distant condensing-surface. The 
intervening body of air forms the dielectric 
of the condenser, the condensing-surfaces of 
which are connected by the earth. The effect 
is a circuit in which is interposed a condenser 
formed of distantly-separated and elevated 
condensing-surfaces with the intervening air 
as a dielectric. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part hereof, Figure 1 is a view showing two 
vessels placed in communication by my dis 
covery; Fig. 2, a view showing signaling-sta 
tions on opposite banks of a river; Fig. 3, a 
separate view, principally in diagram, of the 
apparatus; Fig. 4, a diagram of a portion of 
the earth's surface, showing communication 
by captive balloons; Fig. 5, a view of a sin 
gle captive balloon constructed for use in 
signaling. 
a and Bare two vessels, each having a me 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
485,971 
20 
d 
tallic condensing-surface C, supported at the 
heads of the masts. This condensing-surface 
may be of canvas covered with flexible sheet 
inctal or metallic foil secured thereto in any 
5 suitable way. From the condensing-surface 
Ca wire l extends to the hull of each vessel 
and through the signal receiving and trans 
mitting apparatus to a metallic plate a on the 
vessel's bottom. This wire extends through 
an electro-motograph telephone-receiver D or 
other suitable receiver, and also includes the 
secondary circuit of an induction-coil F. In 
the primary of this induction-coil is a bat 
tery band a revolving circuit-breaker G. This 
circuit-breaker is revolved rapidly by a mo 
tor, (not shown,) electrical or mechanical. It 
is short-circuited normally by a back point 
key II, by depressing which the short circuit 
is broken and the circuit-breaker breaks affid 
makes the primary circuit of the induction 
coil with great rapidity. This apparatus is 
lmore particularly shown in Fig. 3. 
In Fig. 2, I X are stations on land, having 
poles I supporting condensing - surfaces C, 
25 which may be light cylinders or frames of 
wood covered with sheet metal. These drums 
are adapted to be raised and lowered by block 
and tackle and are connected by wires with 
carth-plates through signal receiving and 
transmitting apparatus, such as has already 
been described. 
In Fig. 5, M is a captive balloon having 
condensing-surfaces C of metallic foil. The 
ground-wire 1 is carried down the rope c, by 
5 which the balloon is held captive. In Fig. 4 
three of these captive balloons are represent 
ed in position to communicate from one to 
the other and to repeat to the third, the curva 
ture of the earth's surface being represented. 
What I claim as my discovery is 
1. Means for signaling between stations 
separated from each other, consisting of an 
elevated condensing surface or body at each 
station, a transmitter operatively connected 
to one of said condensing-surfaces for vary 
ing its electrical tension in conformity to the 
signal to be transmitted, and thereby corre 
spondingly varying the tension of the other 
condensing-surface, and a signal-receiver op 
eratively connected to said other condensing 
surface, substantially as described. 
2. Means for signaling between stations 
45 
40 
separated from each other, consisting of a 
condensing-surface at each station at such an 
elevation that a straight line between said 
surfaces will avoid the curvature of the earth's 
surface and intervening induction-absorbing 
obstacles, a signal - transmitter operatively 
connected to one of said surfaces for varying 
its electrical tension and thereby correspond 
ingly varying the electrical tension of the 
other surface, and a signal-receiver operat 
ively connected to the latter surface, substan 
tially as described. 
3. Means for signaling between stations 
separated from each other, consisting of an 
elevated condensing surface or body at each . 
station, an induction-transmitter operatively 
connected to one of said condensing-surfaces 
for varying its electrical tension in conform 
ity to the signal to be transmitted and there 
by correspondingly varying the tension of the 
other condensing-surface, and a signal-receiv 
er operatively connected to said other con 
densing-surface, substantially as described. 
4. Means for signaling between stations 
separated from each other, consisting of an 
elevated metallic condensing-surface at each 
station, a conductor from the surface at one 
station, including the secondary of an induc 
tion-coil, a primary coil including a source of 
current and a transmitting key or device for 
changing the primary circuit for signaling, 
and a conductor from the condensing-surface 
at the other station, including a telephone-re 
ceiver, substantially as described. 
5. Means for signaling between stations 
separated from each other, consisting of an 
elevated metallic condensing-surface at each 
station, a conductor from the surface at one 
station, including a signal-receiver and the 
secondary of an induction-coil, a primary coil 
including a source of current and means for 
making and breaking or varying the primary 
circuit for signaling, and a conductor from 
the condensing-surface at the other station, 
including similar receiving and transmitting 
instruments, substantially as described. 
ification signed and witnessed this 
This spec 
14th day of May, 1885. 
. 
TIOS. A. EDSON. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP S. DYER, 
JOHNC. TOM LINSON. 
55 
o 
75 
So 
85 
90 
95. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466071.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. COX, 
NUT WRENCE, 
No. 466,071. 
* - - 
Patented Dec. 29, 1891. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. COX, OF VIRDEN, ILLINOIS. 
NUT-WRENCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,071, dated December 29, 1891. 
Application filed June 20, 1891, Serial No, 896,922, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. Cox, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Virden, 
in the county of Macoupin and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Nut-Wrenches; and Idohereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to that class of car 
riage-Wrenches adapted to grasp the nut and 
Wheel together, so that both can be rotated at 
th Same time in applying and removing the 
ll. . 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
more simple, convenient, and desirable de 
vice for accomplishing this purpose. 
In order that my invention may be under 
stood, I will now proceed to describe the same 
With reference to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a front view showing the wrench 
as it is first applied to the nut in full lines 
and the position it assumes when locked to 
the hub of the wheel in dotted lines. Fig. 2 is a 
front view showing the nut-socket removed 
and the handles being broken away. Fig. 
3 is a view of the inner side of the lower mem 
ber, the handle being broken away. Fig. 4 is 
a side view of the device, the handles being 
broken off. . Fig. 5 is an under side view of 
the nut-socket, 
The Wrench consists, principally, of two re 
movable members, to one of which the various 
parts are attached. The lower member con 
sists of a plate a, provided with a laterally 
projecting handle a', and the upper member 
consists of a plate b, provided with a later 
ally-projecting handle b. At the center of 
the inner side of the platea of the lower mem 
ber is a circular boss c, provided at top with 
a non-circular or square portion d. Through 
the non-circular portion d, the boss c, and the 
plate C passes the bolt-hole e. Near the pe 
riphery of the plate C, is a series of studs or 
pivotsf, arranged concentrically with boss c. 
Pivoted at their inner ends on these studs if 
is a series of curved arms g, that move over 
and upon the inner side of the plate C. Each 
arm g, has at its outer or free end a laterally 
and forwardly projecting jaw or fingerh, which 
jaws are adapted to spread or contract with 
the arms. At the center of the plate b of the 
upper member is an annular opening, which 
receives the circular boss c. Also formed in 
plate b is a series of equally-spaced eccentric 
slots i, which are arranged similarly. The 
jaws or fingers h project through these ec 
centric slots i for the purpose to be herein 
after specified. 
The nut socket or box k may be made of 
different sizes to fit different-sized nuts and is 
provided at its bottom with a non-circular or 
Square opening l, corresponding to the non 
circular portion d of the boss, which fits in 
the opening and prevents the movement of 
the nut-socket. 
in is a washer, which is of greater diameter 
than opening land is placed within the nut 
socket or box k, through which washer passes 
the bolt in, which also passes through bolt 
hole e. 
In operation the nut-socket is placed over 
the nut in the hub and the handles of the 
Wrench drawn apart, contracting the moving 
jaws h, so as to firmly take hold of or clamp 
the outside of the hub-band. This holds the 
mut securely and rigidly in its seat in the end 
of the hub. The wheel being now revolved 
rapidly backward, the nut is quickly un 
Screwed, and the wheel may be removed and 
set to one side while the lubricant is being ap 
lied. The wheel is now replaced on the axle 
and revolved forward until the nut is screwed 
home. 
Slight changes apparent to any skilled me 
chanic will readily suggest themselves with 
out departing from the scope and spirit of my 
invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a nut-Wrench, the combination of a 
late provided with gripping-jaws movableto 
ward and from the axis of the plate, another 
plate adapted to actuate Said jaws, and a nut 
Socket or box fixed to one of the plates, said 
lates and socket having their axes in the 
lane of the axis of the nut to be operated 
upon, as and for the purpose substantially as 
described, 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
  
2 
466,071 
jaws will be operated, substantially as set 
forth. 
6. In a nut-wrench, the combination, with 
one member provided with a circular boss, a 
nut-socket mounted on the boss, and a mov 
able series of jaws or fingers, of another 
member having a circular opening to receive 
said boss and constructed to operate said 
jaws or fingers, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a nut-wrench, the combination, with 
a lower plate provided with a handle, a cen 
tral circular boss on said plate, a nut-socket 
mounted on the boss, a pivoted series of arms 
on said plate, and jaws projecting from the 
arm, of an upper plate provided with a han 
dle and having a circular opening to receive 
said boss, said upper plate also being con 
structed with an eccentric series of slots 
through which the jaws project, whereby 
when the handles are moved the jaws will be 
operated, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM II. COX. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. II. HILL, 
G. J. PATTISON, Jr. 
3d 
35 
45 
2. In a nut-wrench, the combination, with 
a plate provided with a handle, of gripping 
jaws movable toward and from the axis of the 
plate, another plate provided with a handle 
and eccentric surfaces for actuating said 
jaws, and a nut-socket located at the center 
of the plates, as set forth. 
3. In a nut-wrench, the combination of a 
pair of plates having a common axis and ra 
dial handles, a nut-socket located at the cen 
tel' of the plates, and gripping-jaws movable 
toward and from the axis of the plates, as set 
forth. 
4. In a nut-wrench, the combination, with 
One member provided with a nut-socket and 
with a movable series of jaws, of another 
member provided with eccentric slots through 
which the jaws project, whereby when the 
members are moved the jaws will be operated, 
Substantially as set forth. 
5. In a nut-wrench, the combination, with 
a lower plate provided with a handle and a 
movable series of jaws and a nut-socket on 
the plate, of another and upper plate pro 
vided with a handle and constructed with ec 
centric slots through which the jaws project, 
whereby when the members are moved the 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466171.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 466,171. 
W. KROMER. 
BUSH FOR BUNG. HOLES, 
Patented Deo. 29, 1891. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELM KROMER, OF FREIBURG, GERMANY. 
BUSH FOR BUNG - HOLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,171, dated December 29, 1891. 
Application filed September 24, 1891, Serial No. 406,682, (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILHELM. KROMER, a 
subject of the Emperor of Germany, and a 
resident of Freiburg, Baden, in the Empire of 
Germany, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Bushes for Bung-Holes 
of Casks and Barrels, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to bushes for bung 
holes of casks and barrels. 
In the operation of pitching casks or barrels 
hot air is blown into them by means of the 
so called pitching-machine for the purpose 
of liquefying the old pitch. This hot air is 
conducted through an iron tube inserted into 
the bung-hole of the cask or barrel. Owing to 
the intense heat the said tube often becomes 
red hot and imparts a great amount of its 
heat to the metallic bush in the bung-hole, 
thereby causing the same to expand and as a 
result of the subsequent cooling it becomes 
loose, so that the joint which the bush forms 
with the wood ceases to be tight. In many 
instances the heat caused in the above-men 
tioned manner is so great that the Wood round 
the bush becomes charred or burned should 
the hot-air tube not be removed in time. 
My said invention has for its object to pre 
vent the occurrence of the above-mentioned 
defects. For this purpose the part of the bush 
which forms a tight joint with the stave is 
isolated as much as practicable from the part 
which touches or is in closest proximity to 
the pitching-pipe, providing between the said 
parts an annular chamber. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows a vertical transverse section, and Fig. 
2 a plan, of my improved bung-hole bush. 
Figs. 3 and 4 are a vertical section and plan 
showing the same bush in a modified form 
provided with a sheet-metal cylinder h. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in the drawings. 
The outer wall a is provided with screw 
45 
 
threads and screwed into the bung-hole. The 
inner wall b forms a tight joint with the bung. 
These two walls are connected with each other 
by a very thin bottom or based, and, if nec 
essary, also by thin strengthening-ribs g, 
thereby forming the annular chamber c. 
When in this arrangement the hot pitching 
tube inserted into the hole f causes the wall 
b to become heated, the air in the chamber c 
will take up a great part of the heat from the 
aforesaid Walland conduct the same by a con 
tinual giving off or radiation of heat into the 
open air, thereby obviating an excessive heat 
ing of the said wall. As the wallb gradually 
cools, the bottom d will conduct less heat to 
the wall a in consequence of the small trans 
verse section which this bottom d presents to 
the passage of the heat, while the wall a in 
its turn gives off heat to the outer atmos 
phere. The Wall C, is in this manner prevented 
from excessively heating the joint which it 
forms with the wood, thus the latter cannot 
become charred. In order to obviate the radi 
ation of heat from the warmer wall b to the 
outer wall a, a sheet-metal ring h may be 
placed in the channel, Figs. 3 and 4, the said 
ring being attached to the ribs (i. This cylin 
der, (sheet-metal ring,) however, does not ex 
tend quite, to the bottom d, for the purpose of 
causing an accelerated circulation of air by 
the unequal heating of the same on both sides 
of the ring. 
What I claim is 
A bung-bush consisting of inner and outer 
walls united at the botton and separated from 
each other by a surrounding chamber c, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereofI have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
WILEIELM. KROMER. 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE GIFFORD, 
CHS. A. RICHTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466271.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 466,271. 
WRENCE, 
Patented Dec. 29, 1891, 
27S7 
ESS 2 2 SS 
 
 
 
E. E. 
8X, 
S38 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LORING COES, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE COES 
WRENCH COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
WREN CH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,271, dated December 29, 1891. 
Application filed November 9, 1891. Serial No. 411,238, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LORING COEs, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Worcester, 
in the county of Worcester and State of Mas 
Sachusetts, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Wrenches, of which the fol 
lowing, together with the accompanying draw 
ings, is a specification sufficiently full, clear, 
and exact to enable persons skilled in the art 
to which this invention appertains to make 
and use the same. 
The object of my present invention is to 
afford a simple, efficient, and improved con 
struction for Wrenches of the class illustrated, 
and to provide therein supporting-knees, dogs, 
or brace-plates for sustaining the ferrule in 
combination with the bar-shank at the oppo 
site sides thereof, said knees being construct 
ed and arranged for engaging the shoulder or 
end of the ferrules and for attachment to the 
side bar-shank, in the manner substantially 
as shown and herein described, thereby af 
fording facility and convenience of manu 
facture and producing a wrench of superior 
strength and efficiency. 
The particular subject-matter claimed is 
hereinafter definitely specified. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a part side part 
sectional view of a Coes' wrench, illustrat 
ing my present improvement. Fig. 2 is a lon 
gitudinal section through the handle at line 
a 3. Fig. 8 is a transverse section at line y), 
and Fig. 4 shows a separate view of the knee 
or brace-plate and the blank from which the 
same may be formed. 
In my present wrench the main portion of 
the bar A, head, or fixed jawa, movable jaw 
B, rosette-Screw C, and ferrule F are of suit 
able Well-known form or as heretofore em 
ployed in the Coes wrench. The shank A' of 
the bar A is formed with parallel edges did, 
that are milled off on a cylindrical curve and 
reduced in thickness laterally with flat sides 
e e. The ferrule E is formed with two inte 
riorbearing-surfaces that rest against thesides 
of the bar A, and with a transverse surface or 
shoulder if at its lower end, preferably with 
an overhanging lip n for receiving the end of 
the scale-plates or Woodportion of the handle. 
The top end of the ferrule has the step c for 
supporting the rosette-screw, and is fitted to 
match against the shoulder h on the bar A in 
the usual manner. 
Upon the two opposite sides ee of the bar 
shank A in my present invention I employ 
longitudinally-disposed metal knees or brace 
plates I, the upper ends of which are fitted 
to abut firmly against the end or shoulder f 
On the ferrule F, and said knees or brace 
plates are rigidly attached to the bar-shank 
by a rivet J, (one or more, as desired,) which 
passes through suitable holes in the brace. 
plates and bar-shank and has its ends firmly 
riveted down on the exterior of the parts, as 
shown in Fig. 2. These knees or brace-plates 
force the ferrule rigidly against the shoulder 
h and efficiently sustain said ferrule against 
the backward or downward pressure exerted 
thereon from the jaw B. and rosette-screw 
When the Wrench is in use. The knees I are 
preferably made with an outwardly-project 
ing lip at their upper end i, or of such other 
form as Will afford ample support against the 
ferrule and which will permit the end of the 
Wood scales or side plates E to pass under the 
lip m. These knees or brace-plates I can be 
readily made by first rolling a metal bar or 
blank I of suitable shape and then shearing 
the knees or brace-plates in their proper 
width from the end of said blank, (see Fig. 4) 
and then forming therein a hole or holes to 
receive the rivet J. In this matter the parts 
can be quickly and cheaply manufactured. 
The tip D at the end of the handle is pro 
vided with the lip in for receiving the end of 
the Wood side plates E, as heretofore em 
ployed. Said side plates are fitted to match 
together in halves, and are properly recessed 
on their inner sides, as at k, to afford space 
for the bar-shank and the knees I. The side 
plates are secured together by a transversely 
disposed rivet P in well-known manner. 
When assembling the parts the jaw B, ro 
sette-screw, and ferrule F are severally ar 
ranged upon the bar, the ferrule fitting against 
the shoulder h. The knees or brace-plates I 
are then put onto the sides of the bar, with 
their heads abutting against the end or shoul 
der f of the ferrule, and the rivet J is inserted 
and clinched, thus securely fastening the fer 
rule in place. The side scales E, which give 
form to the handle, are then put in position 
o 
35 
40 
45 
So 
S5 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
and the tip D put onto the reduced end of shank and having their upper ends or shoul 
ders abutting against the lower end or shoul 
the bar, which latter is then riveted down 
der of the ferrule, substantially as shown, 
upon said tip, as at '. 
In a previous application for Letters Pat 
and for the purpose described. 
2. The wrench-handle composed of the fer 
ent, Serial No. 407,827, I have described a 
rule F, the scales or side plates E, and metal 
wrench-ferrule wherein the ferrule is pro 
tip D, mounted on the bar-shank and having 
vided with means for its support upon the 
the knees or brace-plates Idisposed upon the 
sides of the bar-shank, but in which the sup 
opposite sides of said bar-shank, with their 
porting parts are integral with the ferrule; 
upper ends abutting against the ferrule and 
but in my present invention the supporting 
rigidly secured in position thereon by a rivet 
parts or knees I are made independent and 
that extends transversely through said plates 
separate from the ferrule. It will therefore 
and shank, the said side plates covering said 
be understood that the present invention em 
knees and rigidly attached together by the 
braces the independent attached knees or 
pin or rivet P, substantially as shown and de 
braceplates made separate from the ferrule 
and arranged on the bar-shank in the pecu 
scribed. 
liar manner substantially as above set forth. 
Witness my hand this 6th day of Novem 
I claim as my invention herein to be se 
ber, A.D. 1891. 
cured by Letters Patent 
1. In an adjustable Wrench of the class 
shown, the combination, with the ferrule and 
the bar-shank, of two knees or brace-plates 
rigidly secured upon opposite sides of the bar 
JOHN H. COES, 
CHAS. H. BURLEIGH. 
LORING COES. 
25 
35 
466,271 
Witnesses: 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466371.txt	(Specimens.) 
No. 466,371. 
J. H. PLACE. 
HEM FOR STOCKINGS AND METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME. 
Patented Jan. 5, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
6%. 26.4.- 
NN/ENT OR 
John H. Plac E. 
bly his attorne 
S.S. yakan 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. PLACE, OF DECATUR, ILLINOIS. 
HEM FOR STOCKINGS AND METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,371, dated January 5, 1892. 
Application filed April 14, 1891, Serial No. 388,918, (Specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN H. PLACE, of De 
catur, in the county of Macon and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Hems for Stockings and 
Methods of Making Same, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to stocking-hems 
formed by knitting; and it consists in the 
method employed to form the hem and in the 
hem so formed, both of which are hereinafter 
set forth in detail and specifically claimed. 
In the drawings accompanying and forming 
a part of this specification, Figures 1,2,3, and 
4 represent steps in the method of forming the. 
hem, and Fig. 5 represents the interior sur 
face of a fragment of hem as completed. 
The yarn is set up on the needles in the cus 
tomary manner and a few rounds knitted. 
The hemstiteh-yarn is then looped around 
each alternate needle, as seen at 5 in Fig. 1. 
Knitting is next resumed with the original 
yarn, the loops 5 being interknitted with such 
yarn, and knitting is continued until a strip 
wide enough to form the hem is produced. 
The parts 4 of the henstitch-yarn, being the 
connections between loops 5, are then brought 
up and placed each over two needles, as seen 
in Fig. 3. Knitting is again resumed and the 
helmstitch-yarn is caught between each two 
pairs of loops of the body-yarn, as will be in 
dicated by the position of the hemstitch-yarn 
in Fig. 3, the parts 4 are thrown to the inside 
of the fabric, as seen in Fig. 5, by the action 
of the needles, and.thehem is practically com 
pleted. Subsequently the stocking is finished 
and the first few rounds knitted by the body 
yarn are raveled down to the hemstitch-yarn. 
A desirable way to form the hem practically 
is to complete the stocking to the toe in the 
manner described, then knit the few prepara 
tory rounds, lay in the hemstitch-yarn, knit 
the hem, complete the stocking and others in 
the same manner, and finally cut the stockings 
apart near the hemstitch and ravel down, as 
specified. 
25 
35 
45 
 
In Fig. 4 the hem is shown in section as it 5o 
In Fig. 3 is shown a needle with a section 
of the preliminary fabric 3 thereon and a loop 
5 of the hemstitch above such fabric. 
appears at the time the step shown in Fig. 3 
is taken, 1 representing the hem and 3 the 
preliminary fabric, which is finally unraveled. 
In Fig. 5, 1 represents the hem, and 2 the 
body part of the stocking. The loops 5 of the 
hemistitch-yarn are shown interknitted with 
the margin of the hem, and the connections 
4 are shown caught by loops of the body por 
tion 2. 
The hemstitch is of course applicable to 
other tubular fabrics beside stockings, and its 
utility resides in its strength, its good appear 
ance, and in its stretchiness or yielding pe 
culiarity, which enables it to perfectly adapt 
itself to all conditions of the fabric. 
55 
79 
75 
85 
I claim 
1. The method of forming a hem on tubul 
lar fabric, which consists in knitting a few 
rounds in the customary manner, then loop 
ing a hemstitch-yarn around each alternate 
needle of the machine, then knitting with the 
original yarn a strip wide enough to form the 
hem and incidentally interknitting the loops 
of the hemistitch-yarn, then throwing each 
connecting part of the loops of the hemstitch 
yarn over two needles of the machine, and 
then continuing knitting with the original 
thread, as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a tubular fabric, 
of a hemistitch-yarn having loops interknitted 
with each alternate wale of the margin of the 
fabric and having the connections between 
loops caught by loops of the body of the fabric, 
whereby a hem is formed, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Isign my name in the 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN H. PLACE. 
Attest: 
I. D. WALKER, 
CHAS. B. WAGGONER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466471.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT FOR ELECTRIC RAILWAYS 
C. P. TATR0. 
No. 466,471. 
Patented Jan. 5, 1892. 
A 7- 
SSIS's 
- 
a. 
S. 
S.S. N. NNN zo. -- 
N \\ 
Sa 
s 
2.7 
-5.6 
f (SS5 
267 
32 
Z 
e- 
36 
S 
 
28itv.cscs 
3v-uovtov 
Czaz-Ze:AZazza 
hy 33. his eletotvic a/6 (2%rea 
9 
O 
ERs co., PHoTo-LTHo, WASH-i6Ton, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 466,471. 
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT FOR ELECTRIC RAILWAYS. 
Patented Jan. 5, 1892. 
C. P. TATR0. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
 
 
S2 
2 
S Y. 
V 
Za 
al- 
R 
2 
3S 
S S 
 
.. 
- 
3s 30 
22. 
S. 
-its----d 
/32 
2 s 
% S 
3-vuovtov 
Czaz Zeca Zaira. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES P. TATRO, OF SPOKANE, WASHINGTON. 
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT FOR ELECTRIC RAILWAYs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,471, dated January 5, 1892. 
Application filed November 14, 1891, Serial No. 411,931 (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, CHARLESP.TATRO, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Spokane, 
in the county of Spokane and State of Wash 
ington, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Underground Conduits for 
Electric Railways; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, 
My invention relates to underground con 
duits for electric railways; and its object is to 
provide as follows: first, means for obtaining 
continuous electric communication between 
an insulated line-wire buried along the road 
as an electric conduit and one or more cars 
traveling on the road; second, means for per 
fectly insulating a buried live line-wire and 
for temporarily communicating with branch 
ends of segments thereof without exposing 
the said ends or any other portion of the said 
line-wire, or its immediate insulator to the 
open atmosphere or to moisture, whereby loss 
of electric energy would result; third, means 
whereby any car may make communication 
with a single line-wire to be propelled either 
forward or backward upon the same track, and, 
fourth, means for overcoming the variation 
from its perfect line of travel of each com 
municator-arm of the car, whereby proper reg 
istry thereof with the coacting parts located 
on the road is insured. 
To this end my invention consists in the con 
struction and combination of parts forming an 
underground conduit for an electric railway, 
hereinafter described and claimed, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which- 
Figure 1 represents an electric railway-car 
in side elevation, showing the relative posi 
tions of the turnstiles in the underground 
channel and the hangers upon the car adapt 
ed to register with the turnstiles, and also 
segmental tracks and a trolley adapted to re 
ceive electric energy from the said tracks. 
Fig. 2 represents a joint in the conduit in 
horizontal section, showing the means of Con 
necting wires thereat and the means of com 
munication to receive electric energy there 
from. Fig. 3 represents the turnstiles as seen 
from the right-hand end in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a 
. . 
transverse vertical section at line ac of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 5 is a top view of one of the trolleys, also 
showing a portion of the channel in horizontal 
Section. Fig. 6 is a transverse vertical section 
of the channel, showing an end view of the in 
terior parts. 
10 represents a car provided with a motor, 
which is adapted to be driven by electric en 
propel 
ergy received from a line-wire 11 to 
the car upon the road by the aid of the trolley 
system, this line-wire being the electric con 
duit proper. 
12 represents a pipe such as that used for 
Water or gas distribution, cutin lengths some 
what shorter than the length of a car and 
joined at its ends by means of the usual T 
coupling 13. This pipe serves as a complete 
casing to protect the line-wire 11, which is lo 
cated within it and separated from it by in 
sulating material 14. The ends of the wire 
project some distance from each end of the 
line-pipe, that distance to correspond to the 
distance which the pipe lies from the chan 
nel 15, and a branch pipe 16, secured to the 
T-coupling, covers the projecting wires. In 
constructing this joint first pass the end of 
a wire into one end of the T and then out at 
the side opening. Then screw its pipe in place. 
Second, put the other wire and pipe in place 
in the same manner, and after bringing the 
wire ends together side by side, as shown in 
Fig. 2, solder them along the portion 17 to in 
sure permanent metallic contact. Third, 
screw in the branch pipe 16, and then pour 
insulating material 18 in to entirely fill the 
cavity around the wires. Now shape the end 
19, as required, and then screw a shield 20 
upon the end of the branch 16, which projects 
within the channel-wall 15. 
21 is a cap screwed firmly into the body of 
the shield and serves as one bearing for a 
rock-shaft 22, the other bearing being in the 
bottom of the box. 
23 is the switch, fixed permanently in the 
shaft 22, but insulated therefrom by means 
of a hard-rubber bushing 24 or other suitable 
material. 
25 25 are contact-springs Secured upon the 
arms of the switch 23, one spring to slide on 
and off the incoming end 19 of the line-wire 
11 and the other spring to slide at the same 
time on and off the end of the outgoing wire 26. 
- 
90 
95 
CO 
O 
25. 
35 
4O 
45 
So 
 
 
2 
466,471 
O 
15 
3o 
35 
55 
75 
27 represents the conducting-rail divided passed a few inches onto the next rail forward. 
Just at the time when the two trolley-wheels 
bridge across the insulated ends of the rail 
segments both those rails are alive, but the 
rear rail is left alive only long enough to in 
sure the passage of the joint, the hanger 35 of 
each car closing the switch to vitalize each 
rail as the car goes forward to the left and 
the hanger 32 opening the switch to kill the 
same rail after the trolley has passed off from 
it. Now if the motor be reversed to back the 
car the hanger 32 becomes the forward one, 
and by acting to the right on arm 30 it closes 
the switch, while 35 becomes the rear hanger, 
and acting to the right against arm 34 opens 
the switch. Thus the motor is handled like 
a locomotive - engine, the engineer having 
nothing to change but merely to reverse the 
motor in the usual manner in order to travel 
the other way. 
I have provided lugs 47, fixed upon the cap 
21, to stop the arms of the turnstile from be 
ing rocked too far in either direction in rapid 
service and enabling the constructer of a line 
to set the shields exactly right relative to the 
wires ending therein by noting the location 
of these outside lugs. 
The walls 15 of the channel may be of any 
usual or preferred construction; but it is ad 
visable to leave the bottom open for the free 
escape of water and to give good under drain 
age to take the same entirely away. By this 
system the conduit or main-line wire may be 
located close beside the channel or in it or far 
enough to one side of the tracks to serve two 
tracks at the same time, the branches 1617 
in each case being long enough to reach the 
desired spot in the channel to have the shield 
20 screwed solidly upon the branch, thus leav 
ing no open idle point for the waste of elec 
tric energy and entirely protecting both the 
wire and its insular covering from the intru 
sion of moisture from wear and from acci 
dental damage. 
The rails are made in segments discon 
nected from the live wife at all times, except 
when a car is passing, for two reasons: first, in 
order that they may not offer an exposed idle 
surface for the escape of electric energy, and, 
second, though they are at all times out of 
reasonable reach of the public, yet by leaving 
them dead, except at the instant when a car 
is passing over each, it reduces the chances 
for an accident by contact with any live con 
ductor of this system almost impossible. 
A covered switch to make and break connec 
tion between common insulated wires would 
not meet this invention unless the said cover 
were mechanically secured to a shield for 
both the wire and its insular covering. 
A common turnstile fitted to revolve com 
pletely around in operating a switch or to be 
turned but one Way would not be an equiva 
lent of this invention, because the same hang 
ers could not operate it to back a car. 
If the two lines of a double-track road are 
to be operated by a single line-wire buried 
into a series of segments corresponding in 
length with the segments of the conduit-pipe 
12. Each rail-segment is permanently fixed 
within the channel upon insulating-blocks 28 
and is connected with an outgoing wire 26. 
29 is a turnstile fixed upon the switch 
shaft 22 and provided with arms 30 and 31, 
to be engaged by a hanger 32, which depends 
from the car through the slot in the top of the 
channel, and with arms 33 and 34, to be en 
gaged by another hanger 35. 
44 represents wedge-shaped guides where 
by the ends of hangers 32 and 35 will be di 
rected to their respective ends of the turn 
stile if the parts should become loose by long 
Wear. 
36 is the trolley, comprising a body of wood 
37, two wheels 38, journaled upon the body to 
engage and roll upon the track 27, a third 
wheel 39, journaled upon the body 37 midway 
to roll against the wall 15 of the channel, a 
hanger 40, depending from the car midway to 
hold the trolley, and insulated wires 41, paSS 
ing in grooves up the edges of the hanger 40 
and connecting the bearings of the wheels 38 
with the motor on the car. The journal-bear 
ings 42 of the wheels 3S are insulated from 
the wood 37 by any suitable material 43 to 
prevent loss of electricity if the wooden body 
becomes Wet. The wheel 39 is mounted mid 
way between and opposite to the wheels 38 to 
form the third element of a tripod-bearing 
for the trolley, whereby perfect contact of 
the wheels 38 with the rail 27 will be insured, 
and the wheel 39 is free to travel in a verti 
cally-irregular track varying laterally from 
its line of movement to accommodate the 
trolley to any irregularities of distance be 
tween the track 27 and the opposite wall 15 
in going around curves or otherwise, and I 
mount the bearing 44 upon the bar 37 by 
means of springs 45 or any similarly-yielding 
connections to further aid in this direction. 
In operation, let us suppose the car to be 
moving to the left. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 the 
switch is set with the circuit open as it would 
have been left by the passage of the rear 
hanger 32 of the previous car; but when the 
forward hanger 35 of this car strikes the arm 
33 the turnstile will be rocked to the position 
shown in dotted lines and the Switch-arms 25 
be brought in contact with the live-wire end 
19 and the rail-wire 26, whereby the current is 
directed through the rail, the trolley-wheels 38, 
and the wires 4 to the motor, and thence to 
the ground in any usual mauner, as by the car 
wheels and rails, thus Switching enough cur 
rent through the motor to propel the car. The 
hangers 35 and 32 are located upon the car 
near its ends about a foot farther apart than 
the length of a rail-segment and the Switches 
are set midway the rail-segments, so that the 
trolley at the middle of the car will always 
have one of its wheels at least upon a live 
rail and each rail will be switched dead at 
the instant when the rear trolley-wheel has 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
466,4?, 
55 
between them, a common pipe cross-connec 
4. The combination of an electricline-wire 
tion may be used in place of the T and the 
having lateral branches, a series of segmental 
joined wires made to extend laterally each 
rails fixed along a road and provided each 
way. Of course the branch of the T might 
with a branch wire, a switch adapted to make 
be extended and the shield fastened over the 
and break connection between the said branch 
end thereof instead of using the separate 
wires and mounted on a rock-shaft, a turn 
branch pipe 16, or the Titself might be shaped 
stile having cross-arms fixed upon the rock 
with the shield-body attached; but I prefer to 
shaft in the path of arms depending from the 
adopt the construction for use with common 
car, and means, substantially as described, for 
pipe Connections such as are already common 
limiting the turnstile to an oscillating move 
and readily obtainable. The outgoing wire 
ment, whereby the operation of the switch is 
26 is properly an intercepted or broken por 
reversed by reversing the direction of travel 
tion of the branch wire 19. 
of the car. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
5. The combination, in conduits for electric 
what I believe to be new, and desire to secure 
railways, of an electrical switch comprising a 
by Letters Patent, is the following: 
turnstile having two pairs of oppositely-pro 
1. The combination, in conduits for electric 
jecting arms, a lug to limit the motion of the 
railways, of a series of pipe-sections having 
arms, and hangers upon the car adapted to 
an insulated wire in each, the wire having 
strike opposite arms of the turnstile alter 
projecting branch ends, a branch coupling 
nately to give an oscillating motion thereto, 
joining the adjacent ends of pipe-sections, a 
substantially as described, whereby the switch 
branch pipe in the coupling. covering the 
will be operated properly whether the car be 
branch ends of wire, the said branches being 
run forward or backward upon the same track. 
secured together in a metallic contact, and a 
6. The combination, in conduits for electric 
switch-shield secured upon the said branch 
railways, of an electric switch mounted upon 
pipe over the end of the said wires, substan 
a rock-shaft provided with turnstile-arms, 
tially as described. 
hangers from the car adapted to engage the 
2. The combination of a pipe, an electric 
said arms at opposite ends alternately, and 
line-wire insulated therein and projecting 
guiding-Wedges for the hangers, located in 
from the end thereof, a shield secured upon 
line of the turnstile, substantially as described. 
the pipe over the end of the wire, an outgoing 
7. The combination, in conduits for electric 
wire from the shield, a switch journaled to 
railways, of an electric rail located along the 
rock in the shield to make and break connec 
road, a wall opposite thereto, and a trolley 
tion between the said line-wire and outgoing 
having two wheels to roll on the rail, and one 
wire, a turnstile upon the switch-shaft hav 
Wheel opposite to and intermediate between 
ing oppositely-projecting arms outside the 
the two wheels to roll freely on the wall, there 
shield adapted to be engaged by hangers from 
being a yielding connection between one of 
a car, and lugs in the path of the turnstile, 
the said wheels and the trolley-body, substan 
substantially as described, whereby the rotary tially as described, whereby the trolley is 
motion of the switch is limited. 
kept in contact with the conducting-rail at 
3. The combination, in electric conduits for 
one side, but is free to move on the other side 
railways, of a line-wire provided with broken 
transversely to the line of travel to conform 
branches, a shield covering the broken ends to the irregularities of the track. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
of the branches, a turnstile mounted on a 
shaft journaled in the said shield, a switch 
bar passing radially through the said shaft 
and insulated therefrom, and contact-springs 
upon the said bar adapted to make and break 
electric connection between the said branch 
ends, substantially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES P. TATRO. 
Witnesses: 
P. E. STEVENS, 
M. C. HILLYARD. 
75 
90 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466571.txt	(No Model.) 
A. MILLER, 
ELEWATING APPARATUS, 
No. 466,571, 
Patented Jan. 5, 1892. 
 
22g al 
N 
al 
ra ZZ 
 
772^2 esses: 
Zzzz/e72467 
The nor as perERs co., PHoto-Litto., WASH1NGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER MILLER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO BROWN & MILLER, 
OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
ELEVATING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,571, dated January 5, 1892. 
Application filed September 19, 1890, Serial No,365,467, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALEXANDERMILLER, of 
the city of New York, in the county and State 
of New York, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Elevating Appa 
ratus, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
elevating apparatus, and more particularly 
to the discharge mechanism of a salt-evapo 
rating apparatus in which the salt is carried 
by a series of buckets on an endless belt up 
and over belt-supporting wheels and dis 
charged from the buckets as they pass over 
the supporting-wheel. 
The object is to provide means for prevent 
ing the salt, which is liable to fall from the 
bucket beforeitbecomes completely reversed, 
from draining into the pocket formed by the 
reversed and emptied bucket below. 
With this end in view my invention consists 
in certain features of construction and combi 
nations of parts, as will be hereinafter de 
Scribed, and pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure.1 
represents a vertical central section through 
the upper portion of an elevator, the section 
being taken transversely to the shaft upon 
which the endless-belt-elevator-supporting 
Wheels are mounted, showing the relative po 
sitions of the elevator-buckets and the shield 
as in operation. Fig. 2 is a view in front ele 
Vation, the elevator-casing being removed to 
show the elevator-belt and discharging mech 
anism more clearly, 
A represents the elevator-casing, terminat 
ing at one side in a discharge-spout a. An 
endless belt B, in the present instance formed 
by a pair of sprocket-chains, extends up and 
over a pair of belt-supporting wheels C, se 
cured upon a rotary shaft D, driven by suit 
able mechanism. 
(Not shown.) The endless 
belt B is provided at intervals with buckets 
E, which become more or less completely filled 
with the damp salt at the bottom of the ele 
Vator, and, as they pass over the tops of the 
supporting-wheels C, become gradually tilted, 
and finally, as they pass downwardly along 
theside of said wheels, become completely re 
versed and discharge their loads at a point 
above the discharge-spout a, The bucket 
which I find particularly well adapted for 
this purpose consists of a skeleton frame 
worke, within which fits an elongated flexi 
ble cup e', made of canvas or other suitable 
flexible material and secured at its margin to 55 
the rim e of the skeleton frame, preferably 
at a short distance below the upper edge of 
said rim. The flexible cup e' is not secured 
to the skeleton frame other than at its edge 
along the rim of the skeleton frame, and is 6o 
therefore free to fall out of the skeleton frame 
with its load as it becomes completely re 
versed in passing over and down from the 
supporting-wheels C, thereby insuring the 
emptying of the load of damp salt from the 65 
bucket. The position which the cup e' as 
sumes after it has discharged its load is 
clearly shown in Fig. 1. It will be observed 
that when it has dropped with its load from 
the frame it forms a pocket on the opposite 7o 
side, which pocket would be liable to catch 
any salt which might fall from the next suc 
ceeding bucket as it becomes gradually tilted 
at the top of the supporting-wheels, and that 
such salt would be carried by it along down 75 
the elevator, instead of being discharged at 
the spout a, as desired. To convey the said 
bucket out of the path of the falling salt as 
quickly as may be feasible, guide-wheels F 
are located beneath the supporting-wheels C, 8o 
which engage the belt and throw it to one 
side of the path of the falling salt. 
To still further and effectually prevent the 
loading of the reverse pockets with the Salt 
which may escape before the load is fully 85 
discharged, I provide a shield or chute G, 
consisting of a flat plate of any suitable ma 
terial set at an angle, as shown, between the 
supporting-wheels C and supported in its po 
sition by suitable braces g, projecting up- 9o 
Wardly and laterally from supports H, at 
tached to the casing. The shield G is suffi 
ciently wide to intercept any salt which might 
fall from the bucket throughout its length 
and is preferably made as long as may be 95 
without interfering with the passage of the 
buckets past its ends. It is set at such an 
angle that any salt falling thereon will fall off 
from its lower end under a sufficientimpulse 
to throw it outwardly beyond the path of the Ioo 
s 
35 
45 
so 
 
466,571. 
tween the belt-supporting wheels above their 
centers and below the path of the partially 
reversed buckets, whereby the material fall 
ing upon the shield from the partially-tilted 
bucket is thrown across the path of the com 
pletely-reversed bucket into the discharge 
spout, substantially as set forth. 
AIEXAN IDER MILLER. 
Witnesses: 
FREDK, HAYNES, 
K. E. PEMBLETON. 
reverse pocket into a position such that it will 
fall without obstruction through the dis 
charge-spout Ct. 
What I claim as my invention is 
The combination, with an endless-belt ele 
vator, supporting wheels over which the ele 
vator-belt passes, a discharge-spout beneath 
One side of the supporting-wheels, and a series 
ofbucketssecured to the belt and provided with 
flexible pockets, of guide-wheels for throw 
ing the belt to one side of the discharge-spout, 
and an inclined stationary shield located be 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466671.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. G-ALE, OF NORTHVILLE, NEW YORK. 
CHURN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,671, dated January 5, 1892. 
Application filed September 17, 1891, Serial No. 405,991 (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs E. G-ALE, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
: siding at Northville, in the county of Fulton 
and State of New York, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Churns; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
churns, and has for its object to provide a 
churn which is simple and cheap in construc 
tion and which can be operated with a mini 
mum expenditure of power; and the inven 
tion consists in the construction and combi 
nation of the parts, as will be hereinafter fully 
Set forth and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
Spective view of a churn constructed in ac 
cordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
transverse sectional view. Fig. 3 is a verti 
cal sectional view through the line acac of Fig. 
2. Fig. 4 is a detail perspective view. 
A and A' refer to the standards, which form 
bearings for the rotary churn-body and for 
the driving-shaft. 
These standards are rig 
idly connected to each other at their lower 
ends by a cross-piece B and at their upper 
ends by a shaft B', which has suitable col 
lars or shoulders for holding said standards 
in proper position with respect to each other. 
One end of the shaft B is key-ended beyond 
the vertically-adjustable bearing or box b, 
said box being held normally depressed by a 
spring upon which bears a set-screw b'. To 
the outer end of the shaft is secured a crank 
handle C. This shaft carries a friction-wheel 
D, which engages with a circular disk at 
tached to one side of the churn-body E, said 
churn-body being supported upon gudgeons 
e and e', the gudgeon e' being hollow, for the 
purpose hereinafter set forth. The lower 
5o cross-piece B is provided with wheelsb, which 
45 
35 
40 
are secured to an axle carrying uprights con 
nected by a transverse bar upon which a le 
ver c' rests when in engagement with a staple 
d', attached to the cross-piece. The outer or 
free end of this lever is adapted to be engaged 
by a turn-button carried by the standard A, 
and when said lever is held depressed by this 
turn-button the wheels will be projected and 
the standard A' elevated from the floor, so that 
the churn can be readily moved from place to 
place. When the lever is out of engagement 
with the turn-button, the feet of the standard 
will rest upon the floor. 
The rotary churn-body is preferably made 
hexagonal, as shown, and is provided on one 
side with a disk F, with the periphery of 
which the friction-wheel D engages, and to the 
gudgeons or supports e and e', which project 
within the churn-body, is secured a short 
shaft f, which is tapered at one end, while the 
opposite end is bifurcated and perforated for 
attachment with the inner end of the gudgeon 
e. This short central shaft is apertured lon 
gitudinally for part of its distance and per 
forated transversely, so as to provide, with the 
hollow gudgeone', means for ventilating the 
contents of the churn. The short shaft can 
be readily attached and detached, and to this 
shaft are attached by means of wires one or 
more spheres or globes H, which may be either 
of heavy material or weighted, or of material 
of less specific gravity than cream. These 
spheres or globes may be attached or hung 
directly upon the shaft, or one of them may 
be secured to the shaft and the other hung 
upon the connecting means. 
The churn is provided with an outlet-open 
ing I and a cover K, the cover being provided 
with a gasket to provide a tight joint, a 
slightly-bowed bark being provided having 
reduced ends which engage with brackets at 
tached to the churn-body, so that when the 
handle attached to the bar is elevated it may 
be readily passed over the top and under the 
brackets, and when turned to present the 
handle parallel with the cover it will exert a 
spring-pressure upon the cover and retain it 
securely in place. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
5 5 
75 
95 
OO 
g 
466,671 
1. The combination, with a churn having a 
rotary body, of a disk F, rigidly attached to said 
body, standards A and A', carrying at their 
upper ends a shaft having a friction-wheel D, 
and crank-handle, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a churn having a 
rotary body, of Supporting-standards aper 
tured to form bearings for supports e and e', 
carried by the churn-body, one of said sup 
ports being hollow, a central shaftlf, also hol 
low, to connect with the supporte, and means 
for connecting the central shaft to the sup 
port e, substantially as shown, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. In combination with a rotary churn-body 
Supported by standards, Substantially as 
shown, of gudgeons e and e, rigidly attached 
to the churn-body and movable in the stand 
ards, one of the gudgeons having a socketed 
2O inner end and the other a reduced end, a re 
15 
movable shaft f, secured thereto, and spheres 
II, connected to the shaft, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. In combination with a churn-body carry 
ing gudgeonse and e', which are removably 
secured thereto, the gudgeon e' being longi 
tudinally apertured and provided with an in 
ner socketed end, a gudgeone, having a trans 
verse aperture, a central shaft?, having ends 
for engagement with the gudgeons e and e, 
said shaft having a transverse aperture con 
nected with a longitudinal aperture therein, 
substantially as shown, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES E. GAILE. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN PATTERSON, 
NELSON WHITMAN. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466771.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 466,771, 
 
G. M. CLARK, 
HARROW, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 12, 1892. 
of 
Z 
C 
C2 
f 
Cy 
C 
I 
c 
9. 
f 
2. 
d 
76 
f 
c1//esz, 
(No Model.) 
No. 466,771, 
G. M. CLARK. 
HARROW, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 12, 1892. 
 
729.4. 
postagio o so s 
44c I ZWS ES 
s 
s 
i 
i: 
l 
At 
(No Model.) 
G., M. CLARK, 
HARROW, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 466,771. 
Patented Jan, 12, 1892. 
Sest 
  
IHE 
Nay 41E intez.9 
sessesse 
- 
T 
T 
 
 
cit, 22. 
", 2 " 64,424 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE MARSHALL CLARK, OF HIGGANUM, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
CLEMENTS. IIUBBARD, OF SAME PLACE. 
HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,771, dated January 12, 1892, 
Application filed April 23, 1889, Serial No, 308,295. (No model.) 
To oil, whon, it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE MARSHALL 
CLARK, of Higganum, in the county of Mid 
dlesex and State of Connecticut, have in 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Harrows; and I do hereby declare that the 
following specification, taken in connection 
with the drawings furnished and forming a 
part of the Salme, is a clear, true, and com 
Io plete description of the several features of 
my invention. 
Harrows embodying my said improvements 
pertain to that class of machines in which 
soil-working devices are revolved; but the 
I5 character of said devices may be widely va 
ried without departure from my invention. 
It is well known that various soils, crops, and 
weeds require more or less radical variations 
in the form and operation of the soil-working 
2 o devices for securing the best results in each 
case, and hence I employ many forms of 
disks, such as the plain, concavo-convex, cor 
rugated, bladed and toothed, and also star 
wheels of various forms, according to the par 
25 ticular duty for which my harrow may bein 
tended. 
A harrow embodying my invention essen 
tially embodies two gangs of rotative soil 
working devices, one in front of the other, a 
3o frame which is supported upon both of said 
axles, and a pole which is adjustable rigidly 
With relation to said frame, So that the entire 
Weight of the frame-pole (and a driver, if de 
sired) may be borne wholly by the front axle, 
35 or partially by both axles, according to ad 
justment, thus enabling wide variation in ca 
pacity for service. For affording still fur 
ther capacities the two gang-axles are geared 
together, so that either gang of soil-workers 
4o can rotate independently of the other, al 
though at varied speed, if desired, and either 
gang of soil-working devices may be made to 
cut deeper into the Soil than the other, or the 
rear gang may be elevated and placed wholly 
It is to be understood that my invention 
does not relate to that class of machines in 
which one or more sets of rotative soil-work 
ing devices are suspended in hanger-frames 
5o from main frames which are supported on 
the axles of carrying-wheels or on rollers, 
45 out of service as soil-Workers. 
Referring to the drawings, Figures 1 and 255 
whether plain or provided with teeth or 
spikes, and which serve also as means for 
driving the rotative soil-working devices. 
illustrate in side elevation and in top or plan 
view one of my novel harrows embodying all 
of the features of my invention in a desirable 
form. Fig. 3 illustrates in side view one of 
my harrows adjusted so that one gang of soil- 6o 
working devices will operate upon the soil 
Fig. 
and the other gang operate as clearers, 
4 illustrates in top or plan view one of my 
harrows in which the gang-axles are inclined 
to the line of draft, instead of being at right 65 
angles thereto, as in Fig. 2. Fig. 5 in side 
view illustrates one of my harrows in which 
: the gangs are geared to operate at the same 
speed. Fig. 6 illustrates the harrow-frame 
and its pole arranged to admit of only two 7o 
adjustments of the gangs. Figs. 7 to 10 illus 
trate some other of the various forms of soil 
Working devices suitable for use in my har 
rows, according to the character of work in 
tended. 
In the harrow shown in Fig. there are two 
gangs of rotative soil-Working devices, re 
spectively mounted upon and rotatable with 
their axles a, and b. In this instance said de 
vices are thin twisted steel plates, substan- 8o 
tially alike in both gangs, although the plates 
c and c' on the axle C are coupled together in 
pairs. The plates con the axleb are mounted 
singly thereon, but are varied in their axial 
relations to the axle, and they are of such 85 
length and are so arranged that their ends, as 
they revolve intermittingly, occupy the spaces 
between the pairs of plates on the axle C. 
The axles are mounted in a frame, which can 
be widely varied in its construction without 9o 
affecting my invention. In this instance the 
frame has at each side a hanger-plated, and 
these two plates are coupled together by 
means of a cross-bar e, and to the ends of 
said bar a pole A is attached by means of a 95 
yoke f, rigid on the pole, but pivoted at f to 
the ends of the bar. Upon the rear end of 
the pole there is also a rigid forked or slotted 
arm g, provided with a lateral bolt or ping', 
and on the bar e there is a rigid segmental Ioo 
plate h, which is provided with lateral holes 
h', and said plate so occupies the fork or slot of 
75 
2 
466,771 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
the arm g that the pin orboltg' may be placed 
in any one of said holes and thus enable the 
bar to be axially adjusted with relation to 
the pole and firmly secured in any one of the 
positions of adjustment. When the two axles 
occupy the same horizontal plane, both Sets 
of soil-working devices operate in the soil to 
an equal depth; but it will readily be seen that 
either set or gang may be more or less raised 
and that the rear set lmay be wholly lifted 
from the surface of the ground and made to 
operate as a clearer for the other set for de 
taching such Weeds, roots, and balled soil 
therefrom as are liable to be accumulated. 
The two axles are rotatively coupled, prefer 
ably by means of sprocket-wheels i and chain 
le, and in some cases chains should be applied 
at both ends of the axles, and in others a sin 
gle chain or other suitable gearing can be re 
lied upon, and, as a rule, the chains or other 
gearing should be housed within a shielding 
cover to prevent undue accretion of obstruct 
ive matter. As here shown, the chain-gearing 
is arranged to drive the rear set of Soil-Work 
ing devices at a higher speed than the front 
set; but they may operate at uniform speed, 
or the rear set may be revolved slower than 
the front set without departure from my in 
vention. With a harrow, thus organized both 
sets of soil-working devices may operate with 
uniformity as to depth or either set adjusted 
to operate, at a higher level than the other. 
Being geared together, should one setlag as to 
rotation, the other set will assist the first. 
Should one set only be needed for soil-work 
ing, the harrow can be adjusted, as in Fig. 3, 
the rear set then operating as a clearer, even 
if not geared, because obstructive matter car 
ried by the Working set would be presented 
to the overlying set and thereby detached. 
In this machine the frame includes a cross 
bare, but the hanger-plates d are mounted 
upon but one axle C, and the rear axle b is 
coupled to the front axle by means of links or 
bars di. The vertical adjustment of the rear 
axle is effected by means of segmentally 
curved arms d, passing through open mortises 
in the hanger-plates, and pins or bolts, which 
occupy lateral holes through the mortises and 
appropriate holes in the curved arms, as 
clearly indicated. 
It is to be understood that I do not restrict 
myself to the use of any special form of frame 
or to particular means for rendering either of 
the revolving gangs vertically adjustable, in 
asmuch as variations in Such means could in 
no manner affect or vary the practical work 
ing of both gangs upon the Soil, or one gang 
as clearers, to the other. 
It will be obvious that the character of the 
soil-working devices may be widely varied 
without affecting the main features of my 
invention, and that With some forms of these 
devices it will be desirable that the axles, be 
inclined with reference to each other and to 
the line of draft-as, for instance, as shown 
in Fig. 4, wherein the soil-working devices are 
the well-known concavo-convex disks l, these 
being so arranged that the side thrust of one 
set will be substantially balanced by that of 
the other when both are operating at same 
depth in the soil; but either set can be adjust 
ed somewhat higher than the other. 
With 
the axles geared together it will be seen that 
neither gang is absolutely dependent for its 
rotation upon its own contact with the soil, 
and therefore each may at times aid the other. 
In this machine the boxes for the axles are 
longitudinally adjustable in the frame, thus 
providing for variations in their angular ad 
justment. 
In some soils and under certain conditions 
two kinds of soil-working devices can be 
profitably employed-as, for instance, as 
shown in Fig. 5, wherein the front axle ct, is 
provided with bladed disks devised by me and 
disclosed in my Letters Patent No. 369,163, 
the blades in this instance being bent or 
twisted at their outer ends. The rear axle b 
has a set of spiral-toothed wheels. These 
axles may be geared for Securing uniform ro 
tation, as shown, or variably geared, it being 
obvious that in adapting my harrows for use 
in any particular kind of soil beset with any 
peculiar variety of weeds or grasses, it will be 
important that the form of the soil-working 
devices, as well as the relative rotation of the 
gangs, should be carefully considered for ob 
taining the most satisfactory results. 
For meeting certain requirements my har 
rows need only be capable of working under 
two positions of adjustment-as, for instance, 
as illustrated in Fig. 6, wherein the cross 
bar e is bolted directly to the rear end of the 
pole A, the bar having two holes at right an 
gles to each other for receiving the bolt in, 
thus by one adjustment arranging both sets 
of soil-working devices, so that, they will op 
erate upon the soil, and with the other ad 
justment confining the soil-working to the 
front set, the other or rear set then occupying 
an elevated position and operating as clearing 
In this simple 
devices for the other set, 
form of harrow the soil-working devices will 
i of course be varied to meet local require 
ments, and in some cases it will be found ad 
vantageous to employ only the front set for 
soil-Working, and at times the other set need 
not be revolved at all, as when no clearing 
operation would be needed, as in non-adhe 
sive soils free from heavy weeds, &c. 
Among the many forms of revolving soil 
working devices which can be effectively em 
ployed in my harrows is the one shown in 
Fig. 7, having round-pointed blades, which 
may be either flat or twisted. Another (shown 
in Fig. 8) is of disk form, having sharp 
pointed serrations, or teeth at the periphery, 
and this disk may be either flat or concavo 
convex. Another (shown in Fig.9) is one of 
the star-wheel variety, with or without cut 
ting-edges at the ends and edges of the arms 
which may be either flat or twisted. In Fig. 
10 a plain flat disk is shown; but this has 
o 
75 
95 
O 
II5 
I 25 
466,771. 
3 
value only in harrows having the angularly 
arranged axles. It will be obvious that the 
teeth, blades, or arms of the Soil-Working de 
vices should as a rule be more or less twisted 
or alternately offset, or bent in opposite di 
rections, when employed on axles arranged at 
right angles to the line of draft, although 
when the front set is mainly relied upon for 
earth-working, and the rear set revolved at a 
higher speed than the front set, the teeth of 
the rear devices may or may not be thus 
twisted or bent. 
IIaving thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a harrow, the combination of a pole 
and a frame rigidly adjustable with relation 
to each other, as by means of a segmental 
plate with holes, and a bolt or pin, and two 
gangs of rotative soil-Working devices, one in 20 
front of the other, in the same path, the said 
frame being mounted upon the axles of both 
gangs, and capable according to adjustment 
of being carried wholly by the front gang 
axle, or equally by both axles, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a harrow, the combination of a frame, 
a pole adjustable rigidly with relation to said 
frame, and two gangs of rotative Soil-Working 
devices which support said frame and the 
pole, and are geared together, as described, 
and adapted to operate together or separately, 
and at variable depths in the soil. 
25 
GEORGE MARSHALL CLARIX. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT B. CLARKE, 
ROBERT S. CRUTTENDEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466871.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 466,871, 
H. KROG-STED & A, SWANSON, 
TRY SQUARE, 
 
Patented Jan. 12, 1892. 
30 
 
S  N S N N N R N N 
LZizzz as as as at av 
Zaza af2Z Zazza. 
Azzzst Zazz za za z 
lazz Azawz Karazzzas Azzz. 
y Go.csww.--- 
-2.dry as - 
The Norris Perers co., photo-Litho, WASHINgron, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HANS KROGSTED AND ANDREW SWANSON, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA. 
TRY-SQUARE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,871, dated January 12, 1892. 
Application filed May 15, 1891, Serial No,392,876, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that we, HANS KROGSTED and 
ANDREW SVANSON, both of Minneapolis, in 
the county of Hennepin and State of Minne 
sota, have invented certain Improvements in 
Try-Squares, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
Our invention relates to try-squares and 
means whereby the use thereof is made more 
aCCurate. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
try-square which may be held flat upon the 
surface and which may also be used as a 
level; and our invention consists in various 
Constructions and combinations hereinafter 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
Our invention will be more readily under 
stood by reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view showing a try-square 
embodying our invention. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional view thereof, showing the inner sec 
tion of the try-square handle. 
As shown in the drawings, the try-square 
handle 2 is secured at right angles to the 
blade 3, provided with ordinary scale 4. 
This blade is thin and is notched into the 
head or handle. The handle is provided with 
the large slot 5, of a rectangular form, adapt. 
ed to receive a wooden block 6, provided with 
the level 7, secured in the bearings thereon 
by the side and guard pieces S, having glass 
portions 9, through which to observe the po 
sition of the level. This frame S for the 
level is shown in Fig. 2, and has sleeves 10, 
adapted to receive the ends of the spirit-tube 
7. When using the level upon its side, with 
the blade upon the board, it is necessary and 
convenient to support the end 11 of the head 
or handle. This we accomplish by providing 
the pin 12 of the same thickness as the blade 
3 and centrally located in the edge of the 
handle, whereby the same, being rested upon 
the top of the board or the top of the sur 
faces to be tried, the try-square is held in 
place without additional support from the 
hand of the user. This pin may be pushed 
back so that the end thereof is flush with 
the inner edge 13 of the handle and is held 
back in that position by the snap-plate 14. 
(Shown in Fig. 2.) The outer end of the pin 
12 is held in the sleeve 15, and the pin is 
normally pressed out by the coiled spring 16, 
bearing against the enlarged portion or shoul 
der 17 on the pin. The inner side of this 
shoulder is engaged by a shoulder 18 of the 
plate 14 when the pin 12 is pushed back, at 
which time the plate is pushed into engage 
ment with the shoulder on the pin by the 
coiled spring 19, acting against the shoulder 
20. The plate is provided with lugs 21, Sup 
ported in the bearings 22 and 23, as indicated, 
and adapted to hold the same in position. 
The thumb or finger recess 25 is provided in 
the end of the handle, whereby the lug 21 
may be pushed back out of the Way, and 
whereby it is made unnecessary for the lug 
21 to extend beyond the end 26 of the try 
square. The plate 14 may be pushed back, 
so as to disengage the pin 12, and is provided 
with the beveled inner shoulder 27, whereby 
the disengagement of the pin 12 is insured. 
These parts of the try-square may be secured 
in the wooden block 6 or may be formed di 
rectly in connection with the iron lugs ex 
tending from the sides of the slot 5, the block 
6 being hollowed out to accommodate the 
Sale. 
In Fig. 1 the head is shown beveled at 30, 
whereby the same may be used as an angle 
square, while in Fig. 2 the head is shown to 
extend out flush with the edge of the blade. 
The wooden block 6 may be replaced by 
suitable iron plates. 
Having thus described our invention, We 
claim as new and desire to secure by Lette's 
Patent 
1. The combination, in a try-square, of the 
blade 3, with the handle 2, the slot 5, pro 
vided therein, a level arranged to be inserted 
therein longitudinally with respect to the 
handle, the pin 12, normally held out, and a 
snap-plate 14, adapted to engage a shoulder 
on said pin to hold the same back, Substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, with the blade 3 and 
handle 2, of a slot 5, provided in said handle, 
55 
75 
O 
(5 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
 
466,871 
a Wooden block 6, arranged with a level 7, 
fixed in guards 8, provided with glass 9, the our hands this 11th day of May, 391. 
pin 12, having the shoulder 17, the sleeve 15 
for retaining the outer end of the pin, the 
Spiral Spring 16, the recess 25, and the plate 14, 
having lugs 21 and normally held in engage 
ment with said shoulder 17 by the coiled 
Spring 19, substantially as described. 
In presence of 
C. G. HAWLEY, 
FRED S. LYON. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
HANS KROGSTED. 
ANDEREW SWANSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US466971.txt	(No Model.) 
H. M. ANGLE & W. D. HESS, 
LUBRICATOR FOR ELEVATOR GUIDEs. 
No. 466,971, 
Patented Jan, 12, 1892, 
 
7, e. 777rezzas: 
-77 6, 6-4/22(23.7%ge 
C- 
24 v4% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
IIARRISON M. ANGLE AND WINTER D. HESS, OF EVANSTON, ILLINOIS. 
LUBRICATOR FOR EL EVATOR- GUIDES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 466,971, dated January 12, 1892. 
Application filed December 22, 1890, Serial No. 375,462, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, HARRISON M. ANGLE 
and WINTER. D. HESS, of Evanston, in the 
county of Cook and State of Illinois, have in 
vented a new, useful, and Improved Lubri 
cating Device for Elevator-Guides, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of an elevator, show 
ing the usual guide-posts and our improved 
lubricating device in connection therewith. 
Fig. 2 is a side view in detail of a portion of 
the elevator guide-beam and guide-post, re 
spectively, showing our improved lubricating 
device applied thereto. Fig. 3 is a similar 
view showing said lubricating device in ver 
tical section. Fig. 4 is a plan view of said 
lubricating device as it appears in connection 
with the guide-post, the latter being shown in 
transverse Section. Fig. 5 is a horizontal sec 
tional view in detail of said lubricating de 
vice; and Fig. 6 is a sectional detail view 
taken upon the line aca, Fig. 5, viewed in the 
direction of the arrow there shown. 
Corresponding letters of reference in the 
different figures indicate like parts. 
Much trouble has been heretofore experi 
enced in the operation of elevators and lifts 
owing to the difficulty of keeping the guide 
posts properly lubricated. As the weight in 
the car is liable to be constantly shifted and 
is rarely balanced, any deficiency in the lu 
brication of the guide-posts is not only liable 
to interfere with the running of the car by 
causing it to jump,' as a result of excessive 
friction, but to Wear the guide-posts and ren 
der the surface thereof uneven. To over 
come these objections, lubricate the guide 
posts evenly and uniformly, and enable the 
car to run smoothly and easily is the object 
of our invention, which object we accomplish 
in the manner hereinafter more particularly 
described and claimed. 
Referring to the drawings, Cl, represents an 
ordinary passenger-elevator, of which b b are 
the usual transverse guide-beams arranged 
at the bottom and top, respectively, said 
guide-beams being notched or bifurcated at 
the ends to engage with the usual vertical 
guide-posts c c. To the respective ends of 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
Said guide-beams, and preferably at the top 
thereof, as shown in Figs, 1 and 2, we attach 
Our improved lubricators d. Each of said 
lubricators consists of a frame preferably cast 
in one piece and comprising a main portion e 
and two wings ee', arranged at right angles 
thereto, SO as embrace the three exposed faces 
of the guide-post. At the corners of said 
frame, where the wings are joined to the main 
body e, are perforations ff, by means of which 
Said frame may be rigidly attached with bolts 
ff' to the guide-beam. 
Within the three portions e e'e' of the 
frame are formed recesses or cavities g h h, 
respectively, (shown in Fig. 5 and indicated 
by dotted lines in Fig. 4.) which have their 
openings presented toward the guide-post. 
Within the cavity gisplaced a rolleri, adapted 
to press against the front face of the guide 
post C, as shown in FigS. 3 and 4, while within 
the recesses h. h. are placed like rollers k, l, 
adapted to press in like manner against the 
side faces, respectively, of said guide-posts. 
At the respective ends of each of said several 
recesses are formed parallel guides l l, be 
tween which are loosely placed sliding blocks 
ll. Between said blocks and the back of 
the frame are interposed spiral springs m, 
Figs. 3, 5, and 6, which tend to push said 
blocks forward to Ward the outer ends of the 
guides. The blocksl, with the guides l, serve 
as rests for the projecting axes of the respect 
ive rollers, as clearly shown in Fig. 5. 
On top of the frame is placed an oil-cup n, 
the Outlet of which is connected with a tube 
O, bent to conform to the shape of the frame, as 
shown in Fig. 4, and communicating by means 
of ducts O', Fig. 3, also indicated in dotted 
lines in Fig. 4, with the recesses g h h, di 
rectly Over the rollersi c. 
, so that the oil in 
dropping therein falls upon said rollers, and 
as the latter are pressed against the guide 
posts c, by means of the springs m, said posts 
are kept constantly lubricated as the elevator 
moves up and down, the rollers being pressed 
Constantly against the posts, regardless of the 
manner in which the load is distributed upon 
the elevator. It Will thus be seen that it is 
only necessary to keep the oil-cups filled in 
Order to maintain automatically a perfect and 
uniform lubrication of the guide-posts, 
We are aware that it is not, in a broad 
95 
od 
2 
466,971 
 
sense, new to use a roller for distributing oil 
over a surface to be lubricated, and do not 
claim such as our invention. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim 
1. The combination, with an elevator-cage 
and a guide-post, of a lubricator consisting of 
a frame comprising the main portion e and 
the wings e'e', embracing the three faces of 
the guide-post, a roller i, journaled in the 
main portion e of said frame, rollersk k, jour 
naled in the wings e'e', respectively, means 
for forcing said rollers into contact with the 
faces of the guide opposite which they are re 
spectively arranged, and means for supplying 
oil directly to said rollers, by which latter it 
is distributed over the guide, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. The combination, with an elevator-cage 
and the guide-post thereof, of a lubricator 
having a suitable frame, a roller journaled 
in said frame, means for forcing said roller 
against the face of the guide with a yielding 
pressure, and an oil-cup having its discharge 
situated directly over the roller, so as to sup 
ply oil to its periphery drop by drop, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with an elevator-cage 
and a guide-post, of a lubricator consisting of 
a frame comprising the main portion e, hav 
ing recess g opening toward the front face of 
the guide-post, and the wings e'e', having re 
cesses h. h opening toward the opposite side 
faces of said post, respectively, a roller situ 
ated in each of said recesses, means for hold 
ing said rollers with a yielding pressure in 
contact with the faces of the guide oppo 
site which they are respectively arranged, 
and means for supplying them with oil, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with an elevator-cage 
and a guide-post, of a lubricator consisting of 
a frame comprising the main portion e, hav 
ing recess g opening toward the front face of 
the guide-post, and the wings e'e', having re 
cesses h. h opening toward the opposite side 
faces of said post, respectively, a roller situ 
ated in each of said recesses, means. for hold 
5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
ing said rollers with a yielding pressure in 
contact with the faces of the guide oppo 
site which they are respectively situated, and 
means for supplying oil directly to the pe 
riphery of each of said rollers, substantially 
aS set forth. 
5. The combination, with an elevator-cage 
and the guide-post, of a lubricator consisting 
of a frame comprising the portion e, having 
the recess g opening toward the front face of 
the guide-post, the wings e'e', having recesses 
h h opening toward the opposite side faces 
of said post, respectively, the parallel guides 
ll, situated at the ends of said recesses, the 
rollersikk, situated in said recesses and hav 
ing journals projecting between said guides, 
the follower-blocks ll, situated between said 
guides and engaging said journals, the springs 
m, engaging said blocks and forcing them 
outward, and means for supplying the rollers 
with oil, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with an elevator-cage 
and the guide-post, of a lubricator consisting 
of the integral frame comprising the portion 
e, having the recess g opening toward the 
front face of the guide-post, the wings e'e', 
having recesses h. h opening toward the oppo 
site side faces of said post, respectively, the 
parallel guides ll, situated at the ends of said 
recesses, the rollersikk, situated in the re 
spective recesses and having journals pro 
jecting between said guides, the follower 
blocks l'l', situated between said guides and 
engaging said journals, the springs m, engag 
ing said blocks and forcing them outward, the 
oil-cup in, situated on top of the frame, and 
the tube o, having ducts o' o' o' opening into 
the respective recesses directly over the roll 
ers, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed this 
specification, in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
HARRISON M. ANGLE. 
WINTER, D. HESS. 
Witnesses: 
D. H. FLETCHER, 
J. B. HALPENNY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467072.txt	(No Model.) 
A. L. WHITE. 
WATER, EIEWATOR. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 467,072, 
Patented Jan. 12, 1892. 
3t 
30 
: 
ao 
t NS 3. 
3. Psa 
2 
F. G. - 
N N80 
use 
Nd 
N S 
| 
3 hit A 
Sir 
8 
N. A. 
N 
AH 
 
 
t1. 
A1. 
 
 
 
 
Af 
\ is ful 
222 
had v?. //56zharu 
2-z- By 720s Affreys, 
7(freez Z.77%ize 
(No Model.) 
No. 467,072, 
A. L., WHITE. 
WATER ELEVATOR. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 12, 1892, 
2o 
FIG 5- 
32 
35. 
<> 
ti. 
30 
* 
3. 
8, W/47 
SKX 
2 
- 
36 
36 
36 
: 
29 
3A. 
17, a 
20 
36 
af 
 
2 
| 
l, 
31 
H|| 
: 
H. N. . 
24 
2. 
23 
| 
- 
| 
8 
| 
i 
's 
S-32 
, 
40 
... 
- - 
s i H es 
33 
List 
--- H -- 
- 
- 
ko H a AG. 
I 
HH 
E 
' 
| T 
s 
|| 
  
 
19 
 
 
 
 
 
2 
  
 
Za 
% 
t 
 
N 31. 12 
37 
N 
A. 
N 
/ / 
 
N 
Wise 
Jea.Ji/%zlez 
Ipepir 
c/frez ZL.7%zze 
y Vezs o/ffrgeys, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED LIN COLN WHITE, OF SUISUN, CALIFORNIA. 
WATER - E L EVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 467,072, dated January 12, 1892. 
Application filed May 13, 1891, Serial No, 392,580, (No model. 
, 
To al., twhom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ALFREDLINCOLNWHITE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Sui. 
Sun, in the county of Solano and State of Cali 
fornia, have invented a new and useful Water 
Elevator, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
Water-elevators. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide effective means whereby water can be 
elevated to a great height and be distributed 
to the upper stories of buildings and the like 
and which will be automatic in its operation 
as long as the supply holds out. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
Out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of tanks provided with apparatus con 
Structed in accordance with this invention. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 
is a vertical sectional view on line acac of Fig. 
2. Fig. 4 is a horizontal sectional view on 
line / / of Fig. 3, one of the floats being re 
moved. Fig. 5 is a central vertical longitudi 
nal Sectional view. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
1 and 2 designate rectangular tanks arranged 
adjacent to each other and composed of a bot 
tom 3, Vertical side walls 4 and 5, end walls 6, 
and a transverse partition 7, which consists 
of Vertical Sections 8, forming a space between 
them. The sides 5 of the tanks are provided 
With outlet-openings 9 and inlet-openings 10, 
the openings of each tank being alternately 
opened and closed by vertically-sliding gates 
ll, arranged on the inner faces of the sides 5 
in Suitable Ways 12. The ways 12 are formed 
by recessing the sides and securing strips 13 
at the edges of the recesses, and the strips pro 
ject over the recesses and have boards 14 se 
cured to their outer faces, whereby passages 
for Water are formed, and the passages con 
duct water from the inlet-openings, which are 
arranged at the tops of the sides, to the bot 
tom of the tanks. The vertically-sliding gates 
11 are provided near their upper ends with 
openings 15 and at their lower ends with re 
cesses 16, which are arranged to register al 
ternately with the inlet-openings 10 and the 
outlet-openings 9, whereby when the inlet 10 
is open the outlet will be closed. 
The tanks are supplied with Water by means 
of a trough 17, which is arranged at the tops 
of the sides 5 and communicates with the in 
lets 10. When the water in the tanks rises 
to the top, it passes out through overflow-pipes 
18, which have their inner ends communicat 
ing with the tanks and each of which ex 
tends along the tops of the sides 5 to the 
outer end of the tank opposite that with 
which it communicates. The overflow-pipes 
18 empty into buckets 19, which are suspend 
ed from the ends of a walking-beam 20 and 
are provided in their bottoms with inwardly 
opening valves 21, provided with depending 
stems 22, arranged to engage extensions 23 of 
the bottom to open the valves. The walking 
beam is centrally pivoted to a frame 24, and 
the upper end of the gates 11 are attached to 
the walking-beam on opposite sides of the 
pivotal point, whereby when one tank be 
comes full the overflow Will fill the bucket at 
the outer end of the other tank and will lower 
the adjacent end of the Walking-beam, which 
will raise the gate 11 of the full tank and 
close the inlet and open the outlet and lower 
the gate of the empty tank and open the in 
let and close the outlet. By this arrangement 
one tank is always being filled while the 
other tank is emptying, and it will be seen 
that the operation is automatic as long as 
there is a supply of water. Each tank is pro 
vided with a vertical cylinder 25, which has 
its upper end open and its lower end closed, 
and the latter is provided with an inlet-pipe 
26 and communicates with an outlet-pipe 27, 
which leads to a distributing-pipe 28, and the 
inlet-pipe 26 is provided with an inwardly 
opening valve to prevent the escape of Water 
through the inlet-pipe after having once en 
tered the cylinder, and the outlet-pipe is pro 
vided with an outwardly-opening valve to 
prevent the return of water. In the cylinder 
25 is arranged a plunger 29, which is con 
nected by a frame 30 with a float 31, and the 
latter has a central opening 32 to receive the 
cylinder and extends around the same and is 
provided with an air-chamber 33. The float 
31 by being provided with an air-chamber is 
exceedingly buoyant and is weighted to its 
d 
25 
35 
O 
45 
SO 
6. 
75 
85 
90 
95 
CO 
with inlets, the trough arranged at the tops 
of the tanks and communicating With the 
tops of the inlets, the vertically-sliding gates 
arranged in ways and provided near their 
upper ends with openings and at their lower 
ends with recesses adapted to register alter 
nately with the inlets and outlets, the Walk 
ing-beam connected to and operating the 
gates, the buckets provided with valves and 
suspended from the walking-beam, and the 
supply-pipes emptying into buckets, Substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination of the tanks having in 
lets and outlets and provided at their outer 
ends with posts forming ways 37, the frames 
24 and 39, arranged at the inner elds of the 
tanks and forming ways 38, the vertically 
sliding gates, the walking-beam pivotally 
mounted in the frame 24 and connected to 
and operating the sliding gates, the buckets 
provided with valves and suspended from the 
walking-beam and arranged to receive the 
overflow, the cylinders, the plungers arranged 
in the cylinders, the floats, and the frames 
connecting the cylinders and the floats and 
provided with projecting pins arranged in the 
ways 37 and 3S, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the tanks provided 
With inlet and outlet openings, the gates ar 
ranged to open and close the openings of the 
tanks alternately, means for operating the 
gates to open the inlet of one tank and close 
the outlet thereof and close the inlet and open 
the outlet of the other tank alternately, and 
the adjustable gates 41, arranged to vary the 
size of the inlet and outlet openings, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
AFRED LIN COLN WHITE. 
Witnesses: 
J. COHN, 
E. E. LONG. 
55 
75 
O 
utmost floating capacity, and as the water 
rises in the tank the float is carried upward, 
which raises the plunger and fills the cylin 
der 25. As the water of the tank escapes and 
empties through the outlet, the weighted float 
and plunger fall and sufficient pressure is 
exerted on the water within the cylinder to 
raise the water sufficiently to distribute it to 
upper stories of high buildings. The float 
frame consists of uprights 34, rising from the 
float, and a cross-bar 35, secured intermediate 
its ends to the top of the plunger and having 
its ends Secured to the upper ends of the up 
rights, and projecting from the outer sides of 
the uprights are pins 36, which are arranged 
in Ways 37 and 38. The way's 37 are formed 
by Vertical posts secured to the ends 6 and 
connected at their top by blocks, and the 
Ways 38 are formed by the adjacent posts of 
frames 24 and 39. 
It will be seen that the water-elevator is 
automatic in its operation and will continue 
as long as there is a supply and is capable of 
raising Water to a great height. 
Cross-bars 40 are secured to the bottoms of 
the tanks and are adapted to support the 
floats when the tanks are empty and prevent 
them coming in contact with the inlet and 
Outlet pipes. 
The water-elevator may be found useful for 
Imining purposes in places where it is neces 
sary to go a considerable distance for water, 
and the invention may also be found advan 
tageous for irrigating land. 
: In Order to regulate the supply and dis 
charge of water and to enable one tank to 
empty in the time the other is being filled, 
the tanks are provided with adjustable gates 
41, which are provided with openings 42 and 
are arranged in suitable ways and are adapt 
ed to increase and diminish the inlet and out 
let Openings of the tanks. 
What I claim is- . 
1. The combination of the tanks provided at 
their bottoms with outlets and at their tops 
35 
45 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467172.txt	(No Model.) 
E. W. MACKENZIE-HUGHES. 
CAR, COUPLING 
No. 467,172. 
 
Patented Jan. 19, 1892, 
TiES 9. N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD WILLIAM MACKENZIE-HUGHES, OF ERICSTANE, HELENSBURGH, 
SCOTAND. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 467,172, dated January 19, 1892. 
Application filed June 17, 1891, Serial No,396,608, (No model.) Patented in England June 4, 1891, No. 9,463, 
I5. 
To all lufton, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD WILLIAM MAC 
KENZIE-HUGHES, a citizen of the United King 
dom of Great Britain and Ireland, residing at 
5 EricStane, Helensburgh, in the county of Dum 
barton, Scotland, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Car-Couplings, (which 
have not been patented in any country except 
Great Britain, by Letters Patent dated June 
IO 4, 1891, No. 9,463;) and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, which will enable 
others skilled in the art or manufacture to 
which it relates to make and use the same. 
This invention has for its object improve 
ments in the manufacture of couplings for 
railway carriages, cars, and wagons, and 
whereby the coupler can be made entirely 
from Wrought-iron or steel instead of cast 
2O iron or partly of cast and partly of wrought 
metal, as heretofore, the improved coupler 
being much lighter in weight and of greater 
Strength than couplers as ordinarily made. 
The method of manufacture constituting 
25 my invention is illustrated by Figures 1 to 6 
of the accompanying drawings. 
Fig. I shows the initial processin the manu 
facture; Fig. 2, the second process; Fig. 3, the 
third process; Fig. 4, the fourth process. 
3o Fig. 5 shows a part of the coupler-head, and 
Fig. 6 the completed coupler. 
The improved method of construction can 
be applied to any form of coupler, it being 
understood that I do not claim as part of my 
35 invention any particular design, and for illus 
trative purposes I have depicted the type made 
by the Standard Car-Coupling Company, of 
Troy, State of New York, United States of 
America. 
As shown by the drawings, the shank and 
the walls of the coupler-head are made from 
one piece of Wrought-iron or steel, the latter 
by preference, and in the manufacture a solid 
tube of any required length, diameter, and 
45 thickness of Wall is used. As seen by Fig. 1, 
this tube is sawed or split between the points 
a, and b. After being reheated the split part 
is by hydraulic or other pressure spread or 
flared out at right angles to the unsplit part 
5o of the tube, as seen at Fig. 2, the flared part 
being then placed in a cramp or between dies 
and bent to the form shown by Fig. 3, a piece 
being cut off one of the legs ac, after which by 
other dies or formers the legs are shaped 
round, as illustrated by Fig. 4, to constitute 55 
the walls of the coupler-head, and the ends 
are then welded at c by electric Welding or 
otherwise, or when the parts ac are left of 
equal length the Weld is at another point. 
Top and bottom gusset or web plates d, 6o 
stamped out of wrought metal, as shown at 
Fig. 5, are then inserted in the space So in 
closed by the walls of the head and welded 
in position, the complete body of the coupler 
being thereby formed, as seen at Fig. 6, with 65 
the exception of the forging marked e, which 
is subsequently riveted on to constitute a 
stop-plate and prevent the coupler from turn 
ing round when in service. Holes fare made 
in the stop-plate e and in the gusset or Web 7o 
plates d to receive the locking-pin of the 
knuckleg, the latter being made from a solid 
block of Wrought metal and working between 
the gusset or web plates d in the usual man 
ner-that is to say, in a hole in the coupler- 75 
face, which is punched in the Walls before 
bending or welding takes place and subse 
quently machined out. 
Having now described the invention, what 
I desire to claim and secure by Letters Patent 8o 
S 
1. In a car-coupler, a combined wrought 
metal shank and draw-head body, composed 
of a tube, part of which constitutes the shank, 
the remainder being split, flared, and shaped 85 
to the desired contour and welded to consti 
tute the walls of the coupler-head, substan 
tially as described. 
2 In a car-coupler, a shank and draw-head 
body formed from a single piece of Wrought- go 
metal tube, as set forth, in combination with 
two stamped wrought-metal gusset-plates 
welded or otherwise united to said draw-head 
body, substantially as described. 
shank and draw-head body formed integral 
with each other from a single piece of Wrought 
metal tube, substantially as set forth, stamped 
Wrought-metal gusset-plates welded or other 
wise united to said draw-head body, and a Ioo 
3. In a car-coupler, the combination of a 95 
- 
2 
467,172 
Wrought-metal coupling-knuckle situated be- plate, said stop-plate and gusset-plate having 
tween said gusset-plates and acting in the holes for the reception of a bolt to lock the 
usual manner, substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
5 shank and draw-head body formed integral hand and seal this 5th day of June, 1891. 
EDWARD WILLIAM MACKENZIE-IIUGIES. I. s. 
Witnesses: 
4. In a car-coupler, the combination of a 
With each other from a single piece of wrought- 
metal tube, substantially asset forth, wrought- 
metal stamped gusset-plates welded or other- 
wise united to said draw-head body, a wrought- Fel. Inst. Patent Agents, 62 St. Vincent St., 
?o metal coupling-knuckle acting between said 
gusset-plates, and a stop-plate riveted or other- 
wise secured to said shank and one gusset- Clerk, 62 St. Vincent St., Glasgol'. 
coupling-knuckle, substantially as described. 15 
EO. M. CRUIKSHANK, 
Glasgow. 
JOHN ARMSTRONG, Junr., 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467272.txt	E. BARTON. 
SWIVEL I,00M. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan l9, l892, 
(No Model.) 
No. 467,272, 
 
NSS 
A2vesses:- 
M% 4. 22g276 
2-7%z-N 
Zezezzar 
322 
(No Model.) 
No. 467,272, 
E. BARTON. 
SWIWEL, LOOM. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Jan. 19, 1892. 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
l 
NE E - NE 
Film at 
25 
7. is 
c 
A. 
 
I 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN BARTON, OF PATERSON, NEW JERSEY. 
SWIVEL-LOOM. 
SPECIFTCATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 467,272, dated January 19, 1892. 
Application filed June 24, 1891, Serial No. 397,306, (No model,) 
IO 
5 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN BARTON, of Pat 
erSon, in the county of Passaic and State of 
New Jersey, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Swivel-Looms, of which the 
following is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
Swivel-looms in which the mechanism for call 
ing the swivel-shuttles into play serves to 
throw the fly-shuttle-operating mechanism 
Out of play. 
A practical embodiment of my invention is 
represented in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is an end view of a loom, certain 
parts being omitted. Fig.2 is a vertical trans 
verse section of the same. Fig. 3 is a partial 
view in rear elevation; and Fig. 4 is a partial 
plan view, certain of the parts being shown 
in section. 
A represents the main frame of the loom; 
B, the drive-shaft; C, the cam-shaft; D, the 
lay-swords; d, the lay-sole; d, the reed; d, the 
rail; E, the swivel-shuttle beam e, the ver 
tically-movable rods for bringing the swivel 
shuttles into and out of use, and F the picker 
Staffs. 
The Several parts above named may be of 
the ordinary form and arrangement, such, for 
example, as found in the well-known loom 
structure in which a single series of swivel 
shuttles is employed. 
My present invention contemplates the low 
ering of the swivel-shuttle beam at such in 
tervals as shall be determined by the pattern 
in the Jacquard mechanism, which may be 
employed in connection with the loom and 
the disengagement of the picker-staff-operat 
ing treadle from its actuating mechanism by 
the calling of the swivel-shuttle-operating 
mechanism into play. 
The vertically-movable rode for raising and 
lowering the swivel-shuttle beam rests at its 
lower end upon a spring G, the tension of 
which tends to holditin elevated adjustment, 
and hence the swivel-shuttles out of play, 
The rod e has fixed thereon a laterally-ex 
tending stud or bearing-piece e', on which the 
free end of an operating-arm H is adapted to 
bear, the opposite end of said arm H being 
pivoted upon a pintle I, fixed to a portion of 
the main frame. The arm H has a lateral 
movement upon its pintle I against the ten 
sion of a spring i, in the present instance 
shown as a spiral spring surrounding the pin 
tle I. The lateral movement of the arm H on 
its pintle is effected by means of a cord K, 
leading from the arm H around a guide-pull 
ley k, and thence to the Jacquard mechanism. . 
(Not shown.) The said lateral movement of 6o 
the arm H is intended to bring it in position 
to be depressed by an operating-cam L, fixed 
to rotate with the cam-shaft C, and at the 
point where the said arm H engages the cam 
it is provided with an anti-friction roller h. 65 
The camL is sufficiently reduced, or, as shown 
in the present instance, cut away, leaving a 
spacel, at which point in the revolution of 
the cam the arm H. may be moved laterally, 
so as to bring the roller h. in vertical align- 7c 
ment with the cam L, and thereby cause the 
arm H, and hence the rode, to be depressed 
as the Gam is rotated. When the pull upon 
the cord Kis released by the Jacquard mech 
anism, the spring i will throw the arm H in 75 
the direction to release the roller h from the 
cam, and the rode will then be permitted to 
lift under the tension of the spring G and the 
swivel-shuttles will be thrown out of play. 
is represented by M, and has a swivel-joint 
between its pivotal point m, and the point 
where the shoe m' is located. In the present 
instance the joint is formed by means of a 
socket-piece m, in which a rounded portion 85 
m of the treadle loosely fits, the said socket 
piece being provided with a circumferential 
slot im, which receives a stud in fixed to the 
rounded portion m, by which a limited rotary 
movement is permitted to the part of the 9o 
treadle carrying the shoe m'. When in nor 
mal position, the shoe an' is in position to re 
ceive the knockers c carried by the cam-shaft, 
which, through the strap connection f of the 
icker-shaft with the treadle, operate the 95 
picker-staff at the proper intervals. The lim 
ited rocking movement of the part of the 
treadle carrying the shoe m is sufficient to 
throw the shoe off to one side sufficient to 
clear it from engagement with the said knock- ?oo 
ers, and such rocking movementis effected as 
follows: A laterally - extending arm N pro 
jects from the side of the treadle M, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 4, and a lever O, pivoted to the 
The treadle for operating the picker-staff 8o 
35 
40 
45 
2 
467,272 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
main frame, has one of its arms o projecting 
laterally underneath the laterally-extending 
al'm N, and its other arm o' extending for 
Wardly underneath the lateral projection e' 
on the rode. The construction and arrange 
ment are such that when the rode is in ad 
justment and the swivel-shuttles out of play, 
the arm o of the lever O will rest in prox. 
imity to the under side of the projection e', 
and its arm O will rest in proximity to the 
under side of the arm N, with the trea?ille in 
position to bring its shoe into engagement 
with the knockers. When, however, the rod 
e is depressed to bring the swivel-shuttles into 
play, it will rock the lever () in the direction 
to elevate the arm o and thereby lift the arm 
N and rock the treadle M outwardly, so as to 
bring the shoe n' out of position to engage 
the knockers. The treadle will be so held 
Out of position so long as the rode is de 
pressed, and when the latter is elevated the 
treadle will be rocked again into position to 
engage the knockers by the tension of a 
spring in, in the present instance secured at 
One end to the arm N and at the opposite end 
to a projection on the main frame. 
From the above it follows that when, under 
the control of the Jacquard mechanism, the 
Swivel-shuttles are called into play, the same 
movement will throw the treadles out of en 
gagement with the knockers, and hence throw 
the fly-shuttles out of play, and that when the 
Swivel-shuttles are allowed to resume their 
position out of play the fly-shuttles will be 
again called into play. 
It is to be understood that the mechanism 
which I have herein illustrated and described 
is located at one end of the loom, and that a 
similar set of mechanism is located at the op 
posite end of the loom. (Not shown.) 
What I claim is 
I. The combination, with the picker-staff, 
the Swivel-shuttle mechanism, and the knock 
ers, of a treadle in position to be engaged by 
the knockers, that portion of the treadle 
which is subject to be engaged by the knock 
ers having a rocking movement in a plane 
transverse to the longitudinal axis of the 
treadle, means for connecting the treadle with 
the picker-staff, and means for rocking that 
portion of the treadle which engages the 
55 
7 O 
75 
knockers out of the path of the knockers 
when the swivel-shuttle mechanism is called 
into play, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the swivel-shuttle 
mechanism and means for calling it into play, 
of the picker-staff, the swiveled treadle, means 
for connecting the treadle with the picker 
staff, means for operating the treadle to coin 
municate motion to the picker-staff, and a 
connection between the treadle and the mech 
anism for calling the swivel-shuttles in play, 
whereby the rocking movement of the swiv 
eled treadle in a direction transverse to its 
vibratory movement is controlled by the said 
mechanism for calling the swivel-shuttles into 
play, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the rising and 
falling swivel-shuttle beam and a sliding rod 
connected there with, of a vibrating arm hav 
ing also a lateral movement transverse to the 
direction in which it vibrates, a loose connec 
tion between the free end of the arm and the 
rod connected with the swivel-shuttle beam, 
a connection leading from the arm to the 
Jacquard mechanism, a cam for operating the 
vibrating arm, fly-shuttle-operating mechan 
ism, and a lever under the control of the said 
rod, connected with the swivel-shuttle beam, 
for throwing the fly-shuttle mechanism out 
when the swivel-shuttle is brought into play, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. In combination, the swivel-shuttle beam, 
a spring-actuated rod as a support for the 
beam, a cam-actuated arm for moving the rod 
against the tension of the spring, the picker 
staff, the treadle, means for connecting the 
treadle with the picker-staff, knockers for op 
erating the treadle and hence the picker 
staff, the portion of the treadle adapted to 
engage with the knockers having a rocking 
movement in a plane transverse to the longi 
tudinal axis of the treadle out of the path of 
the knockers, and a lever engaged with the 
treadle and the said beam-supporting rod and 
under the control of said rod to throw the 
treadle out of engagement with the knockers, 
substantially as set forth. 
EDWIN BARTON. 
95 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. IIAYNES, 
GEORGE BARRY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467372.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 467,372, 
F. GENDRON. 
GALWANIC BATTERY. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 19, 1892. 
4. S. f V 
By 
 
. 
E) () (c. 35 
24/7zed feaf : 
... 
N 
. 
1 
- 
Invendor: 
7 a. 
a Z727-772 e2/3 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 467,372, 
 
F. GENIDRON, 
GALWANIC BATTERY, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 19, 1892. 
S. 
s 
- 
L 
s 
cts 
s C 
sy 
s 
Z0%ueae/ 
(5x 642z, 
Arzwert/or: 
Z/ anoe 962 
(2zzarze eys. 
(No Model.) 
No. 467,372, 
F. GENDRON. 
GALWANIC BATTERY, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Jan, 19, 1892. 
S 
A. 
3.545 
 
63. 
Witnesses : 
Gz. 642%, 
Inventor : 
% (an A62 
62zzorz 6%. 
The MORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LITHo, washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FERNAND GENDRON, OF BORDEAUX, FRANCE. 
GAVANC BATTERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 467,372, dated January 19, 1892. 
Application filed May 14, 1891, 
Serial No, 392,699, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it. Invictly concern: 
Be it known that I, FERNAND GENDRON, a 
citizen of France, residing at Bordeaux, De 
partment of the Gironde, France, have invent 
ed a new and useful Improvementin Galvanic 
Batteries, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention consists of an improved pri 
mary battery, and is formed by the combina 
tions hereinafter described, by which the out 
put of the battery is regulated automatically 
according to the work demanded of the bat 
tery, whatever this work may be, from the 
smallest amount of work-such, for example, 
as the Supply of a lamp of ten-candle power 
to the greatest amount of work that a battery 
can do. 
The automatic operation of my battery is 
as follows: I will suppose here, to facilitate 
explanations, that my battery is for the sup 
ply of electric-lighting purposes and that it 
can supply at one time fifteen lamps of ten 
candle power. Let us suppose that five lamps 
are lighted first, for example, the electro-mag 
netic arrangements described hereinafter 
bringing into play the numbers of elements 
necessary to actuate the five lamps. The part 
which operates first, therefore, is a regulator 
of the number of elements in operation. The 
lamps continue their service, while two pumps, 
also actuated by electricity, cause the circula 
tion of the liquids in the battery. When in 
consequence of the operation the liquids have 
become too Weak, so that the first Series of 
elements is insufficient for the service of the 
five lamps, the regulator of the number of 
elements operates and a new element is added 
to those which operated at first, the elements 
which were not used at first being added gradu 
ally and according to the weakness of the liq 
uids to the elements which were sufficient for 
the five lamps in the beginning. It will be 
the same if several lamps are added to the 
five. lamps used at first. When during the 
circulation of the liquids in use the regulator 
of which we have just spoken has brought 
into operation for one or the other of these 
two reasons, or for both reasons, all the ele 
ments, the liquids continuing to grow weak, 
the circulating-pumps revive the liquid. A 
continuous operation of the battery is thus 
assured by automatic means. 
I will now describe, with all the instructions 
and details necessary for the execution, the 
arrangements the combination of which gives 
my improved system of battery. 
The annexed drawings represent my im 
provements applied to a battery composed of 
elements of cells with two liquids. 
I call attention to the fact that the nature 
of the elements of cells composing my battery 
has no bearing on the present invention, pro 
vided that the exciting-liquid (acidulated wa 
ter) and the depolarizing-liquid (solution of 
bichromate of soda or potash) be separated 
from one another in the cells. I will limit 
myself, therefore, to the special points in the 
installation of my battery and in the arrange 
ment of the parts which assure the regularity 
of its service. 
Figure 1 is an end perspective view of the 
end of the battery where the regulating appa 
ratus is placed. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal ele 
vation of the same. Fig. 3 is a plan view. 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section on the line A B 
of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 shows in elevation, on an 
enlarged scale, the regulator of the electro 
motive force. Fig. 6 is a partial plan view of 
the same. Figs. 7 and S show in elevation 
and in plan the regulator of the number of 
elements in service. 
For the sake of simplifying the drawings 
the motor and its accessories are not repre 
sented in Figs. 2 and 3. The various cells of 
the battery are arranged in rows in a sort of 
closet, with three or more tiers formed of ver 
tical posts 1 1. I and transverse horizontal 
supports 222, provided with insulating-blocks 
333, on which the receptacles of the cells 
can roll to facilitate their removal. On the 
lowest floor of the closet are placed six wooden 
trays or tanks 4 56789, Figs. 1, 2, and 3. 
Two of these tanks are shown in section in 
Fig. 4. The tank 4 contains fresh acidulated 
water. The tanks 5 and 6 contain acidulated 
water which has already circulated in the cells, 
and the tank 7 a fresh solution of bichromate of 
potash. The tanks S and 9 contain the solu 
tion of bichromate of potash which has al 
ready circulated in the batteries. The two 
upper tiers support the cells, provision being 
made, as shown in the drawings, for twenty 
four cells. Fig. 4 shows this arrangement by 
tiers very clearly. There are shown four of 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
6) 
75 
95 
OO 
467,372 
5 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the elements 1011 12 13, carried by the blocks 
3. Such is the general arrangement of the 
battery. 
I will now describe the arrangement for the 
regulation of the current, referring to Fig. 1. 
The upper tier is prolonged by a shelf 14, on 
Which is fixed a little dynamo-electric motor 
15, Which operates, being constantly fed by 
the current of two or three of the elements of 
the battery. I prefer to take for the opera 
tion of the motor the electric elements which 
are nearest to the motor. The main shaft 16 
of the electric motor causes the rotation of a 
toothed wheel 17 of large diameter by means 
of a chain or other equivalent means of trans 
mission. This wheel 17 will thus turn slower 
than the shaft of the electric motor, and its 
Speed may be slightly increased, so as to be 
able to command the pumps 18 and 18' by 
means of the cranks 19 and 19", joined to the 
extremities of the levers 20 and 20. These 
pumps can be of any construction which have 
been specially arranged for the elevation of 
acid liquids, and constructed, as well as their 
tubing, of a material which is not attacked 
by the liquids. These two pumps, which I do 
not claim in any way, operate under the ac 
tion of an oscillating lever 20 or 20, and they 
are controlled at the same time and in the 
Same manner, the only difference being that 
the pump. 18 serves exclusively for the cir 
culation and renewing of the acidulated wa 
ter, while the pump 18 serves exclusively 
for the circulation and renewing of the solu 
tion of bichromate of soda or potash. It will 
be sufficient, therefore, to explain the opera 
tion of pump 18 and the manner in which it 
is controlled by the regulator, the same nu 
merals of reference indicating the parts which 
have the same functions in the two pumps 
and, their piping, these numbers being pro 
vided with the exponent 1 when they desig 
nate the parts of the pump 18. The suction 
pipe of the pump 18 is bifurcated, and one 
of its branches 21 plunges into the fresh acidu 
lated water. It can be opened or closed by 
the cock 22. The other branch 23 is plunged 
into the tanks 5 and 6, containing acidulated 
water which passes off from the elements of 
the battery. It can be opened by the cock 
24. The levers which control the cocks 22 
and 24 are always connected by the rod 25, so 
that. One cannot be open. Without having the 
other closed. The rod 25 is prolonged so as 
to pass between the two branches 26 and 27 
of-fork. 28, which receives an oscillating move 
ment around the shaft 29 of the crank 19 by 
means of the slotted lever 30. In this place 
the rod 25 carries two little projections 31 and 
32, arranged in an inverse order, as shown in 
Fig. 6, so as to meet one or the other of the 
two branches 26 and 27 of the oscillating fork 
28, according to whether the rod 25 bends. 
slightly toward one or the other. Opposite 
the end of this rod 25 is an electro-magnet 
with two bobbins 33, Fig. 6, which, when the 
current passes through it, attracts the lever 
34, which is movable around the axis 35, 
against the resistance of the spring 36. The 
extremity of the lever 34 is provided with a 
recessed cross-bar 37, embracing the rod 25, at 
the same time permitting it a vertical dis 
placement in the recess. These details of 
construction are seen on an enlarged scale in 
Figs. 5 and 6. The electro-magnet 33 is con 
nected by a conducting-wire (not shown in 
the drawings) with a relay 38, placed below 
the voltmeter 39, and through the bobbins of 
which the current passes. This relay is so 
arranged as to send the current to the electro 
magnet 33, as will be explained hereinafter. 
Finally, 40 and 40' are the commutators, 
one of which permits of interrupting the cur 
rent which passes to the motor, so as to stop 
the latter when desired, and the other is for 
breaking the exterior circuit. 
The regulator of the number of elements in 
use is controlled by an arrangement some 
what similar to that of the pumps. A second 
fork 60 is arranged below the crank 30 near 
to the fork 28, Figs. 1,7, and 8. This fork 60 
embraces a plate 61, which is held by its elas 
ticity in the position of equilibrium, Fig. 8, 
between the two opposite electro-magnets 62 
and . 63. These two magnets are derived 
(shunted) from the batteries, which actuate 
the motor, and the current which passes 
through them is interrupted or closed by the 
play of the relay 38'. When the supply-cur 
rent becomes too feeble, one of these magnets 
62, for example, becomes active and the plate 
61 is moved from its position of equilibrium. 
The fork 60 in itsinterrupted oscillating move 
ment can then abut against one of the teeth 
64, arranged on the side of the plate 61, and 
the latter is drawn toward the left. The fork 
60, which is guided in 65 to its other end, car 
ries to the right a conducting. Spring-key 66, 
connected with a flexible conductor .67. The 
wire 67 terminates at one end of the battery, 
and the fixed metallic keys: 68 are connected 
by the screws 69 with one of the poles of the 
successive elements of the battery. The lat 
eral displacement of the plate 61 carries the 
key, 66 successively over the keys 68, and thus 
causes a variation of the number of elements 
in use. When equilibrium is re-established 
between the exterior resistance and the Sup 
ply from the battery by the addition of one 
or more elements, the electromagnet 62 ceases 
to receive any current, the plate 61 again as 
sumes its position of equilibrium, and the 
fork 60 acts no longer on the teeth of the 
plate 61. Finally it happens that, either in 
consequence of the gradual exhaustion of the 
liquids or by the lighting of new lamps in 
the circuit, all the available elements in the 
circuit have been introduced. Not until then 
can the fork 28 modify the action of the 
pumps by stopping the circulation and Sup 
plying fresh liquids. It is understood that 
the action of the regulator of the number. 
of elements which we have just described 
is reversible. When it is the magnet. 63. 
75 
95 
OC 
Io5. 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
467,372 
LO 
which receives the current, the plate 61 is 
pushed in the other direction by the action of 
the fork 60 on the teeth 70. The number of 
elements in use is diminished until there is 
an equilibrium again between the exterior 
resistance and the supply from the battery. 
In case all the available elements in the cir 
cuit have been introduced, the battery con 
tinuing to operate, the liquids become weak, 
the relay 38' maintains the contact, closing 
the current derived from the magnet, which 
has added to the circuit successively all the 
elements, and the same current passes by the 
magnet 33, which changes the position of the 
cocks 22 and 24. At each change of the key 
of the regulator of the number, the current 
has been directed to the electro-magnet 33, 
but for too short a time to cause a movement 
of the cocks 22 and 24 it is only by the perma 
nent inclination of the relay 38' that the rod 
25 can be actuated by the fork 28. These 
parts acts together as follows: Let us suppose 
the battery in its normal condition, the volt 
meter 39 and the ampre-meter 39' proving 
it. The cocks 22 and 24 22 and 24', and also 
the rods 25 and 25, then occupy the posi 
tions represented by Fig. 1-that is to say, 
the cocks 22 and 22' are closed while the cocks 
24 and 24' are open. Consequently the pumps 
operate, one on the acidulated water, which 
has already been weakened in the tanks 5 and 
6, and the other on the solution of bichromate 
already weakened in the tanks 8 and 9. 
These liquids are driven back by the said 
pumps through the tubes 41 and 41' into the 
funnels 42 and 42', provided with overflow 
tubes 43 and 43'. The liquids thus poured 
into the funnels flow off partly by the tubes 
44 and 44' and the spouts 45 45 45' 45' in the 
cells of the battery which contain them. Half 
of the liquids sent back by the pumps thus 
flows into the elements on the upper shelf. 
The remainder of the liquid, after having 
passed through the entire length of the tubes 
44 and 44, falls into the funnels 46 and 46', 
and passes in the same manner by the tubes 
47 and 47' and the spouts 4S 4848' 48' in the 
cells of the batteries in the middle shelf. As 
fast as the liquids sent back by the pumps 
thus arrive at the upper parts of the cells they 
take the place of the most exhausted liquids, 
which flow off by the little funnel-tubes 49 49 
and 49' 49' into the channels 50 and 50', which 
direct them to their respective tanks, where 
they are ultimately taken up again by the 
pumps to recommence the above - described 
course. This continuous circulation will last 
as long as the electro-motive force does notfall 
below a certainlimit corresponding to the work 
of all the elements of the battery on the resist 
ance of a certain number of lamps. For ex 
ample, let us suppose that the liquids grad 
ually become weak, all the elements will en 
ter successively into circuit, and the service 
continuing the pumps will feed fresh liquid. 
In this case the relays 38 and 38' will begin 
to act to send the current into the electro 
--":" 
--- 
magnets 33 and 33. This is, for example, 
what will result from the circulation of the 
acidulated water. The electro - magnet 33 7 
will attract and hold against its soft-metal 
cores the recessed cross-bar at the end of the 
lever 34, and consequently the rod 25. This 
rod being turned aside by the part 27 of the 
oscillating fork, this part 27 will abut against 75 
the projection 32 of the rod 25, which it will 
draw in the direction of the arrow, Figs. 5 
and 6, thus closing the cock 24 and opening 
the cock 22. For the moment the pump 18, 
instead of drawing in the exhausted acidu- 8o 
lated water by the tube 23, will draw up fresh 
acidulated water by the tube 21 in the tank 4, 
which it will direct to the elements of the 
battery, thus replacing the exhausted acidu 
lated water that the batteries contained. The 85 
acid liquid will thus be revivified and the 
electro-motive force will increase and will 
soon again attain its normal value. From 
that time the relay 3S will again take its nor 
mal position of equilibrium, interrupting the 9o 
current in the electro-magnet 33. The latter 
will cease to attract the rod 35, which Will be 
pushed back by the spring 36, and returned 
to its original position, represented in Fig. 1 
by the part 26 of the oscillating fork, which 95 
will have met in its path the projection 31 of 
the rod 25. From this moment the cock 22 
will be closed, the cock 24 opened, and the 
pump 18 will commence again to cause to cir 
culate in the cell the revivified liquid which Ioo 
is found there and will cease to send in fresh. 
liquid. The pump 18' for the bichromate is 
controlled in the same way by the electro 
magnet 33' receiving the current from the 
relay 38' and operating in the same manner. Io5 
The sensitiveness of the relay 38' compared 
with that of the relay 38 can also be calculated 
so as to cause the operation of the pump 18' 
only after the relay 38 has caused the pump 
18 to begin to operate-that is, if, in spite of IIo 
the renewal of the acidulated water produced 
by the regulating action of the pump 18, the 
electro-motive force of the battery continues 
to diminish the pump 18' will interpose in 
its turn to renew the solution of bichromate II5 
until the normal supply is re-established. 
which it will be useful to mention. 
The system includes several accessory parts 
The tubes 41 and 41' of the pumps 18 and 
18' are connected with the funnels 42 and 42. I2O 
by the tubes 51 and 51", with cocks permit 
ting the suction of the pump before its oper 
ation is begun. 
The tubes are provided with cocks 52 and 
52', by which they can be emptied when the I25 
apparatus is not in use. The tanks also have 
in their lower parts clearing-cocks, such as 53 
and 53. The tanks. for the exhausted liq 
uid 5, 6, 8, and 9 are provided with overflow 
tubes, which carry of the most exhausted liq- I3o 
uids, that are less dense than the fresh liquids. . 
The tanks 5, 6, 8, and 9, which contain, re 
spectively, the liquids of the same nature, are 
connected at their lower parts by connec 
. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
467,372 
tions such as 54-so that the level of the 
liquid Will be the same in both tanks. 
In all of this description I have supposed 
that the batteries have two liquids, sepa 
rated from one another; but it will be un 
derstood that the same arrangement can be 
applied to batteries composed of two liquids 
or of tWo liquids mixed. In that case I will 
employ only one pump and one regulator, op 
erating as already described. 
It Will be seen that my battery is formed in 
three tiers comprising six tanks for liquids 
and twenty-four elements; but it is evident 
that I will not depart from the spirit of my 
invention if I apply the same arrangement to 
a larger number or to a smaller number of 
these tanks and elements, or if I group them 
differently. Therefore I do not limit myself 
to the forms, dimensions, proportions, and ma 
terials mentioned only as examples in this 
description; and 
through the cells, a sliding rod carrying con 
tact-keys to regulate the number of elements 
in use, and magnets arranged in a shunt-cir 
cuit and adapted to move the rod into posi 
tion to be moved by the motor, substantially 
as described. 
3. An electric battery comprising a series 
of cells containing exciting and depolarizing 
liquids, in combination with a series of tanks 
containing fresh liquids, an electric motor 
actuated by a portion of the battery elements, 
pumps operated by the motor and arranged 
to circulate the liquids in the cells and sup 
ply fresh liquids, and an automatic regulator 
for controlling the number of cells in use, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
4. An electric battery comprising a plural 
ity of cells containing exciting and depolariz 
ing liquids, tanks containing fresh liquids, 
cock-controlled pipes connecting the cells and 
connecting the cells with the tanks, a motor 
connected with a portion of the battery ele 
ments, pumps operated by the motor and 
adapted to supply liquid to the pipes, rods 
connected with the pipe-cocks and provided 
with projections, and relay-controlled mag 
nets adapted to swing the rods into position to 
have the shoulders struck by levers operated 
In witness whereof I have signed this speci 
2. An electric battery cpmprising a series fication in the presence of two subscribing 
FERNAND GENDRON. 
I claim as my exclusive property 
1. An electric battery comprising a series 
of cells containing exciting and depolarizing 
liquids, in combination with an electric mo 
tor actuated by a portion of the battery ele 
ments, pumps driven by the motor and adapted 
to produce a circulation through the cells, and 
an automatic regulator of the number of cells by the motor, substantially as described. 
in use, substantially as described. 
of cells containing exciting and depolarizing witnesses. 
liquids, in combination with an electric mo 
tor actuated by a portion of the battery ele 
ments, pumps driven by the motor and ar 
ranged to produce a circulation of liquids 
' Witnesses: 
ROBT. M. IOOPER, 
W. JORY. 
45 
55 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467472.txt	(Model.) 
w 
No. 467,472. 
| M. REDLINGER. 
SPRING HINGE, 
* 
Patented Jan, 19, 1892. 
TNres: A 
i UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL REDLINGER, OF FREEPORT, ILLINOIS. 
SPR | NG H ING. E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 467,472, dated January 19, 1892. 
Application filed February 24, 1891. Serial No, 382,529. (Model.) 
O 
* 
To all whom i nvay Concerry: 
Beit known that I, MICHAEL REDLINGER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Freeport, in the county of Stephenson and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Spring-Hinges: 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This hinge holds the door either shut or 
fully open, reversing its action when the 
door is sofar opened that the line of strain 
between the two leaves crosses the pintle 
line. It is fully shown in the drawings form 
ing a part of this specification and desig 
nated as- 
Figure 1, a plan of the hinge, parts being 
broken away; Fig. 2, a section on the line 2 
2, Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a bottom plan of the hinge; 
Fig. 4, a section on the line 4 4, Fig. 1. 
In the figures, AA'are leaves united in the 
usual way by short pintles B B at Somedis 
tance outside the general plane of the leaves. 
In the middle of the hingelies a coil C, ap 
proximately parallel to the pintle-line, and 
within the coil is an arbor D, whose ends are 
both pivotallymounted in the ears of the 
leaf A and a little to one side of the pintle 
line. One end of the coil is Secured to the 
arbor at C", and the otheris formed into a 
hook C",whichengages a bail orpin E upon 
the opposite leaf. The piwot of this end of 
the arbor is eccentric with reference to the 
coil, the arbor being bent at the end of the 
coil to forma crank-arm D, which, when the 
hinge is closed, is nearly perpendicular to the 
hook C". Both piwot-bearings arewell down 
toward the plane of the leaves, and bothare 
open below and slightly conical for reasons 
that will presently appear. The coil is pref 
erably concealed byashell FF", integral with 
the leaves and for the most partbelonging to 
one of them, the greater partiturning Within 
the less as the hinge opens. When the shell 
is present, it is slotted transversely at F to 
forma passage for the hook C". The hinge 
being closed, the relative position of the 
crank - arm, hook, and hinge-pintle are as 
ilustrated in Fig. 2. 
If the leaf Abe sta 
tionary and the leaf A' be swung about the 
pintle, as in opening the hinge, the bail will 
rise and swing to the left in the arc of a cir 
cle whose centeris the pintle. The hook C/ 
must move with it, but cannot without rais 
ing the end of the arbor to substantially the 
same extent; but as the force thus applied 
acts at right angles to the crank-arm it is all 
exerted to produce rotation upon the crank 
pivot in a direction contrary to that of the 
bail's motion and thus to coil the spring 
through the connection of the latter with the 
opposite end of the arbor. As the bail rises 
far more rapidly at first than when in the 
upper part of its path, the spring is at first 
wound rapidly, and thus, so faras this part 
of the apparatus is concermed, has great clos 
ing powerwhen the dooris onlyslightly open. 
As the bail passes on it at length reaches a 
fixed line passing through the crank-piwot 
and the pintle-axis, where the whole force of 
the spring is exerted upon the pintle and 
Without tending to produce rotation. As 
Soon as this point is passed the bail ap 
proaches the crank-piwot, and this slight ap 
proach allows a rapid uncoiling, for the bail 
being in nearlythe line of the cranka, slight 
approach allows the crank to swing a consid 
erable distance toward its original position. 
The action of the parts in closing is evi 
dently the reverse of that described. 
As the arbor has a crank at one end only, 
it moves in a conical path, and hemce the 
bearings ateachend must be slightlycomical, 
and the shell must be large enough to permit 
such motion. This bodily movement of the 
coil is, howewer, onlyslight, as the ear, crank, 
and spring keepalmost the same relative po 
sition, except at the beginning and end of the 
motion, the hook slipping upon the bail or 
rod as they swing about the pintle. 
If that end of the spring-wire thathas been 
described as engaging the arbor be carried 
out upon the leaf A, as indicated in dotted 
lines, or be otherwise secured to that leaf, 
leaving the arbor free to turn in the coil, the 
hinge is still operative and the description 
still applies, except that torsion depends, as 
in most hinges, directly upon the relative 
movement of the two leaves instead of upon 
20 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
467,472 
|- 
* 
nected hinge-leaves, ofa spring-arbor piwoted 
at both ends in one of them, but with one 15 
end piwot eccentric with reference to the ar 
bor's axis, and a spring coiledabout the arbor 
and provided at the end next the eccentric 
piwot with an arm engaging the opposite leaf. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimonywhereof Iafixmy signaturein 20 
MICHAEL REDLINGER. 
Witnesses: 
G. S. MANSFIELD, 
M. H. WILCOXON. 
the rotation of the arbor by means of the 
crank. Itis evident that the dead-point will 
be varied by warying the location of the ec 
centric piwot or of the bail. So, too, the 
length and location of the cramkarm may be 
changed, and the opening of the closed hinge 
Will be more and more difficult as the Crank 
arm departs from the perpendicular to the 
hook C", this being a change made at the 
Io time of manufacture, umless it be preferred 
to make the crank adjustable. 
What I claim is 
The combination, with two suitably-con 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467572.txt	(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. COCCHI & F. A. ZEITLER, 
MECHANICAL ATTACHMENT FOR MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS. 
 
i 
6. 
 
in 
E??, 
------ 
2222222222222222222222 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSFE==== 
A. 
-% aal- al-Z11%- 
a 27- 3/2- 
He norms reters co-, poro-Lito., washdenoton, to. C 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. COCCHI & F. A. ZEITLER. 
MECHANICAL ATTACHMENT FOR MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS, 
No. 467,572. 
Eatented Jan. 26, l892. 
 
 
A. 
i. 2 
SSNS) % 
N E3 
T2 
 
..., 
52 
  
a. 
G. Bezir 
M 
Zase 
22A a Z2S 
3Na2022/31 
3.27 sail . . 
224 22 
AA 
Sase 
Aa 
22 
s 
 
 
 
  
a 424. H. 
S535 S3 2 
s A 
 
 
 
 
roua prers co. rhoto-rrito...washkoton, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J. COCCHI & F. A. ZEITLER, 
MECHANICAI, ATTACHMENT FOR MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS. 
No. 467,572. 
  
Patented Jan. 26, l892. 
 
NNES, 
s2 
2 
  
  
 
 
 
M 
awawawawawawa Ya, Y. Vay. Waya 
NSNN2 
22- 2 
ZZ 
texE Morris reters Co. rhoto-uTko., was-Kretoo.c 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
J. COC CHI & F. A. ZEITLER, 
MECHANICAL ATTACHMENT FOR MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS. 
No. 467,572, 
 
Z27 /3 
Patented Jan. 26, 1892. 
27ta2277 
Ste-Al24-4 
- - - - - - 
------ 
es 
 
 
 
 
  
 
2 2 2. 
2 
2. 
- 
 
2. 2 % 2. 
A2s2 
2 CA to 
s 
27.447 actezzzzzzzzzzeezz 
2 
2 
% 
2227A2275.222 2 
Electressess SE5a passesses 
 
ZZZZZZ-------------...--.......... 
1 n n n n n 
% % % % % % % % % % % % 
The scans perers co., roto-Litko, Was Noto. D. c. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
J. COCCHI & F. A. ZEITLER, 
MECHANICAL ATTACHMENT FOR MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS. 
NO. 467,572, 
Patented Jan. 26, 1892. 
- Zeri Z4 
24 sease --> 
 
 
 
 
t EAEa 
2222222222222222 
Z 2. % 2 4444 re 
2 222222 
22222222227 
2222222222222222. z2 
2zz% % D 
Ot 2 22 
Z1 3 2 
 
  
 
  
 
w 
  
 
 
 
satist-release 
 
2 2 Y ZZ ZY 22 ZY 22 Z2 22 M Z M Z 2 
-- 
A4 
%2. Z2222222222a222 
2zzzzzzzzzzzzz 2 
2 
2 
sasase mass-AA= 
2 Hu 
2 
a. 
Sea 
424/477/7ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 2 
RD 
ar 
S. 
2 2%22 R v 
V 
2 
22Z. 222 
Ms. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
==Fease 
% 
2 1-77 4- 
27 
% 
%ab%az 2ZZZZZZZHZZZZZZZZZ 2 
A 2z2 
Aes - 
Aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa-Aaa 
  
all all- 
2 Z% %rfar-Z 
f 
2. 
22 Y2YZZY : ZYZZY 2 
2 a aa 1 a 
s 
 
 
 
 
---free 
O 
f 
e 
"Y More reters co, Proto-int Ho., was unatos. o. c. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 6. 
J. COCCHI & F. A. ZEITLER, 
MECHANICAL ATTACHMENT FOR MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS, 
No. 467,572. 
Patented Jan. 26, 1892. 
 
Catasra 
2 Z2 2 
EEE 
raxissayary 
2 N S 2 N 2 2 
WYi Y.VAWAWAYVWW aVWyYV"Yavywayvy'YV" 
t 
. 
. 
, a 
A YY Y Y va k a Y was Yw Ytaw a was swaya six was a Y swiss SS S. 
SSSaxxYSSaaSYaaaaaaySN 
N - - - - - - - - - 
- - -- 3N 
N- - - - - - - - - 4. 
- - - N 
Nasaasaasaasayansky 
. 
X 
  
 
 
  
S 
 
  
 
  
 
--- r - - - - - - - - - - - pa 
ti------------ 
Rasaasades 
Y 
s y Y r X. XY. a. Y 
N y y 
 
 
  
NSS 
N 
NSA as 
W NN 
... -NN NY 
2 4727.727242 
st a. Z a. a. 2. 
it 
A. a. a. 
r 
the Morris PETers ea. roto-it-io, washgaro, o, e. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN COCCIII AND FRIEDRICH AUGUST ZEITLER, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
MECHANCAL ATTACHMENT FoR MUSICAL NSTRUMENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 467,572, dated January 26, 1892. 
Application filed September 9, 1891, Serial No. 405,161 (No model.) Patented in Germany Angust 6, 1889, No. 51,235, and 
January 23, 1890, No. 55, 710; in England April 17, 1890, No. 5,862, and in Spain May 31, 1890, No. 10,872, 
25 the actions. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN COCCHI and 
FRIEDRICH AUGUST ZEITLER, both residents 
of Berlin, Germany, have invented an Im 
5 proved Mechanical Attachment for Musical 
Instruments, (for which we have obtained the 
following patents: in Germany, No. 51,235, 
dated August 6, 1889, and No. 55,710, dated 
January 23, 1890; in England, No. 5,862, dated 
Io April 17, 1890, and in Spain, No. 10,872, dated 
May 31, 1890) of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to an attachment for 
musical instruments-such as pianos, harmo 
15 niums, &c.-by means of which a perforated 
music-sheet is made to operate the keys and 
produce thesound. The music-sheet by means 
of suitable lever connections operates upon 
a set of bellows that by expanding or con 
2 o tracting in turn operate upon the keys, and 
consequently upon the hammers. 
Our attachment is such that it may be ap 
plied to the existing construction of musical 
instruments without requiring alterations of 
In upright pianos and similar instruments 
where the attachment is placed under the key 
board it may be made entirely removable. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
3o a vertical longitudinal section of an upright 
piano provided with our improvement, Fig. 
3, a vertical transverse section with the lid A 
raised; Fig. 3, a longitudinal section of the 
piano; Fig. 4, a vertical transverse section 
35 with the lid A lowered; Figs, 5 and 6, sec 
tional, side, and end views of the mechanism 
operated by the music-sheet, showing lever F 
engaging a perforation of such sheet. Figs. 
7 and Sare similar views with the lever Fout 
4o of line with a perforation. Fig. 9 is a sec 
tion on line R. R., Fig. 7; Fig. 10, a Section 
on line S S, Fig. 7; Fig. 11, a vertical longi 
tudinal section through Fig. 12; Fig. 12, a top 
view of a modified form of the music-sheet; 
45 Fig.13, a vertical transversesection of a piano 
provided with a modification of our inven 
tion; Fig. 14, a front view of part thereof; 
Fig.15, a longitudinal section on line MM, 
Fig. 13; Fig. 16, a section through the bel 
so lows, ports, and valves; Fig. 17, a verticallon 
gitudinal section through Fig. 18; Fig. 18, a 
top view, partly in section, of the mechanism 
beneath the music - sheets; Fig. 19, a longi 
tudinal section through the pedal-operating 
mechanism; Fig. 20, a section on line O' O, 55 
Fig. 19; Fig. 21, a section through the valve 
box; Fig. 22, a modification of the connection 
between the parts b' q shown in Fig. 18; Fig. 
23, a section through a modification of the 
valve-operating mechanism; Fig.24, a section 6o 
through a further modification; Fig. 25, a 
plan of a modification of the pedal-operating 
mechanism; Fig. 26, a section on line U-U, 
Fig. 25. Fig. 27 is a sectional plan of a fur 
ther modification of the actuating mechan 
ism; Fig. 28, a section on line V8 V, Fig.27; 
Fig. 29, a section on line Q Q, Fig. 28; Fig. 
30, a section on line TT, Fig. 29; Fig. 31, a 
longitudinal section through the drawer Q'. 
Figs. 32 and 33 are details of the valve b, to 
showing it, respectively, closed and open; and 
Fig. 34 is a section on line PP, Fig. 32. 
The letter A represents a lid beneath the 
key - board B and turning on trunnions d, 
journaled in the frame of the instrument. 75 
This lid carries on its face the leversa. a', op 
erated by the bellows, and the lever F, acted 
upon by the perforated music-sheet and the 
note-leaf motor E. At its back the lid carries 
the bellows D D, with the posts GH, and the 
bellows J K and connecting-ports e, Fig. 4. 
The levers a. a', which are operated by the 
bellows, in turn operate the keys L. L.' of the 
piano by means of intermediate levers b, Fig. 
2. These levers are pivoted to a rail g, and 85 
at one end are adapted to be engaged by the 
levers a, while at the other end they operate 
pull-downs h, that in turn act upon the keys. 
The bellows D D, leversa, a?, and levers b 
extend horizontally from side to side of the 
piano-case beneath the keys, as will be read 
ily understood. The levers F, however, to 
gether with the music-leaf feed E, extends 
from the front to the rear of the instrument, 
Fig. 2. 
When the mechanism is to be put into ac 
tion, the lid A is swung into its horizontal po 
sition, in which it will be maintained by 
catches k, Fig. 1. These catches may be dis 
engaged (when the lid is to be swung down) roo 
a 
95 
467,572 
 
O 
25 
35 
85 
. 
. . 
is 
; 
c. 90 
nvadly-depe?iding pint, brry: perforation is reached. . 
In Fig. 22 the connection between the parts 
by means of a push-button l, acting upon a 
b' q is shown to be made by a short elbow 
pair of levers in O, connected by a rod n, and 
lever t, which replaces the disk t'. 
in turn acting upon the catches k to spread 
In Fig. 23 the valve-rod v is bent, as at v', 
to engage the rod b' directly. 
- 
the same. 
O represents the perforated music - sheet 
In Fig. 24 the connection between the parts 
that is fed by feed mechanism E, operated by 
b' v is established by means of all intermedi. 
cranki, over the face of the lid A. This sheet 
ate two-armed lever w', which of course 75 
acts in the well-known manner upon the le 
An en 
causes a reverse action of the parts. 
vers F to oscillate the same. When the lever 
gagement of the lever F by the music-sheet 
F is out of line with a perforation, Figs. 7 
will cause rod g to be moved backward and 
and 8, its shaft f is rocked to vibrate an arm 
the spring p' to be compressed until the next 
7, secured to the shaft. This arm in turn 
raises adh 
To permit the piano and forte passages to 
ing a button t. The button it being thus 
be properly played, the music-sheet O is pro 
raised, releases an elbow-levers, acting against 
vided at its edge or edges with notches e'. 
the valve N of a double port H G, that com 
(Shown in Fights.) These notches engage a 
municates, with the bellows DD by valves M. 
frictioniroller at the end-ofsaclever. The 
These bellows are arranged beneath onetar 
lever i? acts upon a lifter fe; that incturn op 
other to economize space, one operating a 
erates a lever f', Figs. 19 and 20. The lever 
black and the other a white key. The valveM 
f operates a valye Nawhich setsiago-action 
will now be free to be closed by spring p. In: 
he pedal-leversk: 
Figid.3, These levers 
closifag, the valve N by pin u will push against 
an also be stoperated by the: foat, A 
-In Figs.125land 26 werhayeshown the pedals. 
a button U on valve-rod & to oper valv Nit 
Through the port or cell'EI atmospherie air, 
dbe:operated by a Reghanisyasimilar to that. 
will now enter either of the collapsed bellows: 
DoED. Thebellows in expanding-will os. which)s operates the keys. In this modifica 
cillate lever g (ora)'tcauseit to recede from' tion, a perforation-ain-the music sheet will 
leverb, Thus the key is freestd swing into pperate the lever F, which in tucoby, the 95 
its position of rest. As soon as the lever, F- parts e.g. it will operate the pedal-lifter f... 
is brought into engagement withofie of the 
The; arrangement, gf the parts;shown in 
perforations of themisc-sheeto Figs 5-and- Figs. 13, to 18 and also in Figs...21s to 24,is 
6, the pint is lowered to lower the button such that the entire mechanical attachment 
upgal the elbow-lever s. The valve' N will may be independently-drawn Qut for the in- roo 
thus be closed and the fod v will be pushed; troduction of a newspasic-sheet,0. Thebeyel, 
back to open valveM-by the 'engagei?hent of geat. TtTV that transmits, the motion from, 
buttong with the pin it: The opening gf the the crank, Fig.18, will also by the shifugibe. 
valve M. will cause the bellows DiP'to be ex-ki readily put into and put of engagement. 
hausted and to collapse. Thus the lever ce. 
of the actuating aeghadaismisshown. The 
will be oscillated to oscillate leyerb, that in 
: levers' Eact, asgias Fig 14 upon the angle 
turn causes the pull-dowmh to act upon the 
levers c. These levers impart motion to rods 
key and to, sound the note. Thus by the use. 
q' carrying the airinlet; Yayes band oper 
of but a single operating-lever F: the verticial 
atting the air-outlety:YalNesbi. In this modi 
valve N, as well as the horizontal valve Mis 
acted upon. . 
- - 
ficationi the: dugfs between: the bellows). 
In Figs. 13.to, E8 we have shown: a modit. and the port G' are placed within reach of 
fication of the mechanism for operatige the the nods.g.: if the valve-lis opened the at 
bellows. The music-sheet-O operates in this mospherie air- i.e., air comparatively under 
modification, the one-armed levers F. Fig. 15: pressure-enters:ballows D and draws plunt 115 
These leyei's act upon angle-levers c, placed gerhbacked his occurs whenevertheleyer 
beneath them, and which, when tilted, revolv Frisbrought out of line with; one of the per 
disks it; by the intermediate rods g.: The forations; of the music sheet, and the note is 
diskst are connected to rods b', that engage notitober sounded... Whea, howeygerthele 
sliding, rods.g., Fig.16, having beat ends o'o 
The bent endo' rests against the end of rod is moved to open vayel and close valval. 
b', while the bent end o' engages: tie valve- This ea uses communication to be established 
rod v, surrounded by the coiled spring' p': between the port G. and bellows J with the 
When the lever F is brofight into'alignment bellows: 
The bellowsR is: thus emptied, 
with one of the perforatiods of music-sheet and the li?ter's secured thereto, will cause 125 
O,the diskt is so revolved as to cause the the key, to spund the note. The valves, op 
rods b to be drawn back to release rodeg. erating-levers, port-G, and bellows:J'are con 
Thus the spring p' is free to push valve-rod 
tained within a drawer Q', that maybe, drawn 
outward to open the outlet-valves: M M and in and out for the: introduction of a new sheet 
close the inlet-valve. "This will cause the bell-O, as indicated in Fig. 31. . . . 
... 
This construction, as well as that shown in 
lows D' to be exhausted by ports. His G, and 
Figs, 13 to 24;is particularly applicable when. 
thus, the cheek d of the bellows will be moved 
the attachment, is:tobesentirely, removable 
upward to operate the key-Isor the hammer; 
from the instrument. 
by means of the lifter h", Fig. 16. 
yer F is eagaged by a perforation theodg 12o 
In Figs: 271 to 341still angthermodification to5 
- - 
- - - - 
- - 
- - 
. . . . 
... f. 
- - 
- 
45 
55 
O 
13o 
467,572 
45 
So 
S5 
Of course the mechanism above described 
may be readily reversed, so that the notes are 
not sounded by contraction, but by expansion 
of the bellows. As the surface of the lid A for 
the entire width of the instrument may be util 
ized for the support of the sheet O, such sheet 
may be made in the form of a band, or it may 
be made endless or sectional. When sectional 
sheets are employed, we prefer to connect the 
sections by the joint shown in Figs. 11 and 12. 
IIere the sections O' O' of the music-sheet 
are connected in such a manner that the mo 
tion of the music-sheet will not have a tend 
ency to injure the joint, but that such motion 
will, on the contrary, have the effect to bind 
the sections more closely together. To this 
effect the sections O' O' are connected by 
strips P in the following manner: The strip 
P is placed below the joint of sections O' O, 
and is then bent upwardly at both ends to 
pass through such sections. The ends are 
then flattened out upon the surface of the Sec 
tions O' O, both flattened ends P'P' extend 
ing in the direction of the motion of the 
sheet. Thus the ends will be kept out of con 
tact and an even feed of the sheet may be had. 
What we claim is 
1. The combination of a musical instru 
ment with a folding lid A, a set of levers se 
cured thereto and adapted to be engaged by 
a music-sheet, a set of bellows acted upon by 
the levers, and a set of lifters operated by the 
bellows and adapted to act upon the keys, 
substantially as specified. 
2. The combination of bellows D D, with 
inlet and outlet valves, valve-rods v., operating 
both of said valves, and a set of levers for op 
erating the valve-rods, substantially as speci 
fied. 
3. The combination of bellows D D, with 
ports G II, valves MN, and with valve-rods', 
having buttons w, that are adapted to engage 
valves M, and levers adapted to operate the 
Valve-rods, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination of bellows D D, with 
inlet and outlet valves, ports GH, a valve-rod 
'', and levers a b and lifter h for operating 
the sound-producing keys, substantially as 
specified. 
5. The combination of levers Fc with rods 
q, disks t, rodsb", valve-rods v., operated there 
by, valves M, operated by the rods, and bel 
lows D D, substantially as specified. 
6. The combination of levers Fc with rods 
q'', valves bb, operated thereby, and the bel 
lows D, substantially as specified. 
7. The combination of bellows DD with 
drawer Q', and the valves b band levers F, 
contained within such drawer, the drawer be 
ing adapted to be partly or completely with 
drawn, substantially as specified. 
8. The combination of lever i with lifter f', 
lever f', valve V, and pedal-levers lc k, sub 
stantially as specified. 
9. The combination of music-sheet O, hav 
ing perforation ac, with levers F" c, rods q, 
disks t', lifters f", levers f', and pedal-levers 
lc' k, substantially as specified. 
10. The combination of a sectional music 
sheet O' O, with connecting-strip P, passing 
through the same and having its ends P. P. 
upset on the same side of the music-sheet, so 
as to extend in the same direction, substan 
tially as specified. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN COCCHI. 
FRIEDRICHAUGUST ZEITIER, 
FRIDOR COHN, 
ALEX. PETNANY. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467672.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 467,672. 
P. KREBs. 
RECEPTACLE FOR BREAD. 
2 SheetsSheet 1. 
Patented Jam, 26, 1892. 
ZZZZ 
SSSSeaaeaalaaaasa 
SSSNaNSNSSNSANASANNASSAANASASAKSASANANNASA 
A% 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M 
VNKvAvXKVXXXVANAvWANXAXXXKNYYNANN 
SNSSASSASSSSS-SSSASSA 
 
S 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
Z7zzvezfoz 
V7zesse.S. 
24 \7i. 
 
2 
467,672 
5 key-hole, the false bottom, and connections hand in presence of two witnesses. 
ments and provided at opposite ends with the bread and aetingto prevent the unlock 
two liids, in combination with the locking-ing of said lid until after the bread has been 
catch for the upper lid, the locking-catches removed. 
for the lowerlid, the plate to cover the upper | 
In witness whereof I have hereuntoset my 
between said plate and false bottom. 
3. A receptacle for bread, &c., provided 
with a lid for the admission of the bread and 
with a lock therefor, in combination with an 
Io internal device movable under the weight of 
PAUI KIREBS. 
- 
Witmesses: 
PAUL FISCHER, 
ALBERT ITZIGSOHIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467773.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
F. B. R.A.E, 
REGULATION OF ELECTRIC CIRCUITS, 
No. 467,773. 
Patented Jan. 26, 1892. 
V) 
aaraava 
Sr. 
Tararayarara 
A. 
Kers 
(1. e2S3, 
3 XN7veyroi 
S is 7%an/Z. 7ae 
 
writyEsses 
- 
F. 
2%-46%.-- 
 
(No Model.) 
F. B. R.A.E. 
REGULATION OF ELECTRIC CIRCUITS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 467,773. 
 
 
W/TWESSES 
2%-4  
-70-CAA 
WWMEWTOR 
77azz/A2 Afa e. 
THE MORRI 
s PETERs co, Phoro-Litho, washington, o, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK B. RAE, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO TIIE DETROIT 
ELECTRICAL WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
REGULATION OF ELECTRIC CIRCUITS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 467,778, dated January 26, 1892. 
'. 
Application filed May 1, 1889, Serial No. 309,300. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK B. RAE, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Detroit, in 
the county of Wayne and State of Michigan, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provementsin Systems of Regulation for Elec 
tric Circuits; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, which will enable oth 
er's skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates in general to a new 
and improved system of regulation for elec 
tric translating and generating devices, but 
more particularly relates to the regulation of 
the strength, quantity, and direction of cur 
rent admitted to the field-magnet circuit of 
an electric motor or motors deriving elec 
trical energy from a dynamo-electric gener 
ator or other source of electricity. 
Heretofore, as is well known to those skilled 
in this art, numerous appliances and methods 
have been suggested for varying the field 
magnet strength of an electric motor, and 
notably among the number may be mentioned 
that of interposing adjustable resistance in 
the field-magnet circuit, reversing the direc 
tion of current through said field-magnet cir 
cuit, and coupling the different windings com 
prising the field-magnets in parallel or series, 
as the case may be, in order to increase or de 
crease the intensity of the magnetic field. . 
In order to render my invention particu 
larly and peculiarly practicable for the pur 
pose for Which I intend to use the same-i.e., 
regulation for electric motors mounted upon 
a traveling vehicle and supplied with current 
from Stationary generators-I have found it 
neceSSary to SO arrange and construct the com 
ponent parts thereof as to provide means for 
either passing the current through the field 
magnet circuit in series, partly in series, and 
partly in parallel, or wholly in parallel, and, 
further, to reverse the direction of current 
when occasion may require. By such provis 
ion I am enabled to obtain a perfect and reli 
able regulation of the field-magnet circuit, so 
that the motor can be readily and conven 
iently controlled in accordance with the de 
Accordingly my invention consists, essen 
tially, of an adjustable circuit-controlling and 
current-regulating switch so devised and con 
structed as to be operated so that the current 
admitted to the field-magnet circuit will pass 
through the field - magnet windings either 
wholly in series, partly in series, and partly 
in parallel, or wholly in parallel. Moreover, 
by means of a peculiar arrangement of my 
improved switch the direction of the current 
can be reversed at will without disturbing the 
relative couplings of the field-magnet wind 
ings, and finally suitable resistance can be 
thrown in the field-magnet circuit when need 
ed. All the electrical connections can be 
made or broken by a single movement of the 
operator through the agency of a lever or han 
dle placed within convenient reach and ma 
nipulation. 
My invention further comprises certain 
other auxiliary details of construction, ar 
rangement, and combination of parts, all of 
which will be particularly described herein 
after, and the specific points of novelty in 
which will be clearly pointed out in the ap 
pended claims. 
Idesireit to be expressly understood that my 
invention as defined and set forth in its scope 
by the annexed claims can be readily adapted 
to purposes other than that illustrated, as will 
appear hereinafter, and, furthermore, I de 
sire to here state that although the several 
features and parts shown in the accompany 
ing drawings are adequate and sufficient for 
Successfully. carrying out my invention in 
practice, I am not limited or restricted to the 
identical features of construction shown, since 
the fundamental principle inherent herein 
permits many changes, variations, and substi 
tutions without in the least deviating from 
the spirit of my invention. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal central vertical sec 
tion showing the switch-drum, the contact 
plates thereon, the bearing-brushes, the dust 
proof casing, and the manner of rotatably 
mounting the switch - drum in its bearings. 
Fig. 2 is an end view of Fig. 1, the exterior 
casing being removed to show the end of the 
switch-drum and the accompanying parts. 
v 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
5o mands of operation. 
 
467,778 
O 
30 
35 
45 
55 
Fig. 3 is an end elevation of Fig. 1, illustrat 
ing the operating-handle of the switch and its 
attached pointer adapted to travel over the 
face of a graduated dial-plate. Fig. 4 is a 
top plan view in detail of one of the brushes 
shown in Fig. 2, together with its adjusting 
mechanism. Fig. 5 is a detail perspective 
view of one of my improved carbon contact 
brushes shown in Figs. 2, 4, and 6, respect 
ively; and Fig. 6 is a diagrammatical view of 
the periphery or outer surface of the switch 
drum, showing the contact-plates relatively 
arranged therearound, the bearing-brushes 
designed to severally bear upon said piates in 
different positions, and the electrical connec 
tions of the plates, the brushes, the generator, 
and the motor. 
Like letters and numbers of reference des 
ignate the same or corresponding parts in the 
several views of the drawings. 
Referring now to the drawings, and more 
particularly to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, A designates 
a solid wooden rollor drum rotatably mounted 
in the end plates CC of the casing Eby means 
of the short studs or arbor-shafts DD, Secured 
at the ends of the drum, respectively, coinci 
dent with the axial line. This roll A is of the 
requisite length and diameter to accommodate 
around its periphery the series of irregularly 
shaped contact-plates shown thereon, and is 
enveloped and protected throughout its en 
tire length by the casing E, consisting of the 
top and bottom plates FG, respectively, and 
the end plates C. C. This casing may be of 
any suitable material or construction to meet 
the requirements of location and operation, 
and is preferably provided with a hinged lid 
or flap in the upper plate F, whereby ready 
access may be gained to the interior of the 
casing. 
-Directly above or underneath the switch 
drum A, as desired, and in the same plane as 
the perpendicular axial plane of the drum, is 
placed a longitudinal slotted plate or beam 
H, secured at each end to one of the plates C 
of the casing and provided throughout its 
length with a series of perforations or slots c, 
a, relatively arranged as shown, and in which 
the brushes II fit snugly and make contact 
with the respective plates on the drum A. 
This construction is clearly shown in Figs. 1 
and 2 of the drawings. 
By reference to Figs. 2, 4, and 5 it will he 
seen that each bearing-brush I is substan 
tially in the shape of a rectangular parallelo 
gram having its bearing - surface provided 
with a slightly-concave recess b, which con 
forms to the curvature of its respective con 
tact-plate, which in turn accords with the 
curved tread or periphery of the drum A. 
In practice I prefer to make each bearing 
brush I either wholly of carbon or a com 
pound of carbon and plumbago, so that the 
friction between the movable contact-plates 
and said brushes will be reduced to a mini 
mum. Owing to the concave recess b in the 
face or end of each brush I, the bearing-sur 
face is increased, thereby insuring a more 
perfect and reliable contact. Since the Sub 
stance of which these brushes 
I are com 
posed lacks resiliency and elasticity, and, fur 
ther, since it is necessary that the contact be 
tween the brushes and the plates must be a 
yielding or elastic one, it becomes obvious 
that it is essential to provide means for pre 
serving a yielding pressure between each 
brush and contact-plate. Accordingly I have 
shown in Figs. 2 and 4 a spring adjustment 
for each brush I, whereby the pressure of the 
latter upon the switch-contacts may be made 
adjustable and elastic. This device consists 
simply of a bifurcated arm J, having the 
curved prongs c c', the former adapted to 
bear upon the lower end of its respective 
brush and the latter attached to one end 
of a helical spring IK, the other extremity of 
which is secured to the adjusting-screw L, 
mounted upon and supported by the brack 
et-arm M. The arm J is pivoted at the point 
d, where the two prongs c c' converge. Thus 
it will be understood that the tension of the 
spring IX is exerted upon the end of the 
prong c', causing the prong c to exert its 
pressure in an upwardly direction against 
the lower end of the brush I, which latter is 
capable of a slight vertical reciprocation in 
the slot Cl, in the plate II. By this construc 
tion the pressure of the brushes upon the 
contact-plates can be adjusted as desired and 
at the same time the pressure is a yielding or 
elastic one, owing to the spring K. The length 
of the plate II is shown in Fig.1, while its width 
is illustrated in Fig. 2, and, as will be noticed 
by an inspection of the latter figure, the un 
der surface of this plate is provided with a 
number of metallic bed-plates N N, secured 
thereto, there being one bed-plate N for each 
brush I, the said bed-plates serving to Sup 
port the arm J, the adjusting-spring Ix, the 
set-screw L, and the binding-postSee. 
O indicates a bushing or rectangular flange 
extending from the body of the bed-plate N 
through each perforation a in the plate H, 
thereby forming a lining for each slot Cl, and 
means for preserving electrical contact with 
each brush I and the bed-plate N, to which 
latter is secured the binding-postsee, through 
which the electrical connections are estab 
lished with the several field-magnet windings 
of the motor. 
As before stated, each brush fitS Snugly in 
its seat in the slot a. and in contact with the 
bushing O, so that perfect electrical continu 
ity is preserved. 
P represents a circularly-arranged grad 
uated scale, formed delineated or otherwise, 
placed on the end of one of the plates C of the 
casing E, and Q indicates a removable crank 
lever keyed rigidly, to the shaft B, and con 
sisting of the operating-handle R and the in 
dex or pointer S, adapted to move around the 
face of the graduated scale relatively in ac 
cordance with the movement of the handle R. 
The indices on the face of this scale corre 
75 
95 
IOC 
IOS 
II d 
II5 
20 
I 25 
 
467,778. 
ch 
25 
35 
40 
45 
spond to the arrangement of the plates on the 
the generator. Now if the switch beturned to 
drum A, so that the operator can ascertain 
the second position the path of the circuit 
from the position of the pointer on the scale 
will be the same, with the exception that the 
the manner in which the connections are then 
resistance 35 will be shunted out of the cir 
established through the switch-that is to say, 
cuit, since the two brushes 38 and 39 will be 
each indicating-mark on the plate corresponds 
then in contact with the plate 37. Thus in the 
to a particular electrical connection made by 
second position of the switch all the field 
the switch in that position. By grasping the 
magnet windings will be in series without the 
handle R and moving the same in any direc 
presence of the resistance 35, whereas in the 
tion the Switch-drum and its Superincumbent 
first position the field-magnets were likewise 
contact-plates are rotated accordingly, and 
in series with the resistance 35 in circuit. 
during such rotation the said contact-plates 
By turning the switch to its third position it 
severally establish electrical connection with 
again makes contact with a different set of 
the series of brushes II, which in turn are in 
contact-plates, which latter are so connected 
circuit with the generator and motor, in a 
together with relation to the circuit already 
traced that field-magnet windings 1 and 2 will 
manner that will be more fully understood 
from the explanation given hereinafter. 
be in multiple arc and the field-magnet wind 
Referring now to the electrical connections 
ings 3 and 4 will be in series. The fourthpo 
in detail of the current-regulating switch, it 
sition of the switch shows field-magnet wind 
is necessary to inspect Fig. 6, wherein. I have 
ing 1, 2, and 3 in multiple arc and the wind 
illustrated the various contact-plates, brushes, 
ing 4 in series, and the fifth position places 
all four field-magnet windings in multiple arc. 
and their connections with the motor, field 
magnet windings, and generator. The posi 
I have not deemed it necessary to trace the 
tion of the brushes II (indicated in full lines 
path of the current in each and every posi 
in Fig. 6) corresponds to the initial position 
tion of the switch, since I have relied upon 
assumed by the switch. This is shown by the 
previous explanation of the circuits with ref 
longitudinal line marked Position No. 1 
erence to the first and second positions to en 
in the drawings. The second position to be 
able any one to follow all succeeding posi 
assumed by the brushes II upon the contact 
tions of the switch. 
plates is shown by the longitudinal line marked 
When it becomes necessary to reverse the 
Position No. 2, and the third, fourth, and 
direction of current through the armature of 
fifth positions of said brushes are similarly 
the motor, it can be readily effected by turn 
indicated by like lines marked, respectively, 
ing the Switch So that all the contact-brushes 
Positions Nos. 3, 4, and 5.' In this particu 
II will bear upon the contact-plates on the 
lar instance there are four separate field-mag 
other side of the diagram Fig. 6. In other 
net windings. (Indicated, respectively, by 
Words, to effect this purpose, the switch must 
the numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4.) The terminals 
be so turned as to bring the brushes 15 and 
of each field-magnet winding, respectively, 
29, respectively, in contact with the plates 25 
and 40, respectively. In such instance the path 
are in circuit with a contact-brush-that is to 
say, each one of the two terminals of each field 
of the current from the H-pole generator 13 
magnet winding is in circuit with brush I by 
will be as follows: 14, 25, 24, 23, 22, 21, 20, 19, 
the binding-posts e. e. (See Fig. 2.) Thus as 
18, 17, 41, 40, 30, 31, 5, 1, 6, 7, 2, 8, 9, 3, 10, 11, 4, 
there are four field-magnet windings with two 
12, 33, 34, and 36 back to the - pole of the 
terminals for each winding and a brush Ifor 
generator, thereby reversing the direction of 
each terminal there are eight field-magnet 
the current through the armature of the 
brushes I, marked, respectively, in Fig. 6 by 
motor. 
Besides the 
the numbers 5 to 12, inclusive. 
It Will be readily understood that the cur 
field-magnet referred to there are others form 
rent can be reversed in the manner described 
ing the terminals of various other electric 
Without changing any set position of the 
circuits from the generator and motor. if 
switch, or the Switch may be changed from one 
the switch be turned to the initial position 
position to another for a dual purpose-viz., 
i. e., the position shown in full lines of Fig. 6 
that of reversing the current through the ar 
and marked Position No. 1'-the current 
mature and changing the electrical connec 
from the -- pole of the generator 13 will pass 
tion of the field-magnet. 
over the outgoing conductor 14 to the brush 
It is manifest that, in order to preclude the 
15, thence to the contact-plate 16, wire 17, 
possibility of the current being reversed 
contact-plate 18, conductor 19, commutator 
through the armature by an accidental dis 
brush 20, through the motor, brush 21, con 
placement or operation of the switch-handle, 
ductor 22 to plate 23, then by wire 24 to plate 
some means should be provided for locking or 
25, from which the circuit extends to the plate 
limiting the position of the switch. Such a 
26 by wire 27, plate 28, brush 29, wire 30, and 
device is shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings, and 
brush 31. Then the path of the circuit will con 
consists simply of the two limiting-pins 42 
tinue from the plate 26 to brush 5 on through 
and 43, which prevents the switch-handle R. 
the several field-magnets 1, 2, 3, and 4, in 
from being turned across the space marked 
series, and will pass from the field-magnets 
X in Figs. 3 and 6, so that the reversing op 
through plate 32, brush 33, conductor 34, rheo 
eration can only be accomplished by retract 
stat 35, return-conductor 36 to the -pole of ling the switch-handle in the direction of the 
55 
65 
 
75 
95 
Ioo 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
... I 30 
4. 
467,773 
O 
arrows shown in Fig. 3. It will be under 
stood that the field-magnet windings 1, 2, 3, 
and 4 are of different gage or cross-section, 
aud, this being the case, it will be understood 
that they are ranged relatively in accordance 
with the manner in which they may be con 
nected up, so that the strength of the current, 
whether regulated by series or multiple arc, 
may not be detrimental to any one winding. 
It is apparent that instead of applying my 
invention for the regulation of field-magnet 
circuit of an electric motor, the same may be 
used in connection with storage-batteries, pri 
mary batteries, dynamo - machines, induc 
tional converters, and for various other pur 
poses. It is also obvious that the number, ar 
rangement, and location of the contact-plates 
and their brushes may be changed, increased, 
or decreased in accordance with the purpose 
for which my invention is adapted without 
departing from the spirit of my invention. 
My improved switch will be found useful in 
all cases where the supply of electricity is 
great and where ally electric circuit or cir 
cuits is to be varied by differentiating the in 
ternal resistance of Said circuit or circuits. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
J. The combination, with the source of elec 
tric energy of an electric motor the field-mag 
net of which is provided with a plurality of 
field - magnet coils, of a circuit - controlling 
switch consisting of a cylinder provided with 
a duplicate set of insulated contact-plates ar 
35 
ranged substantially as described, a series of 
brushes arranged to bear on the contact-plates, 
connections between the contact-plates and 
the terminals of the field-magnet coils, con 
nections between the armature-coil and cur 
rent-reversing plates on the switch, and a 
rheostat and connections between the same 
and plates on the switch, whereby the current 
of the motor can be controlled in the manner 
and for the purposes as hereinbefore set forth. 
2. A current-controlling switch for electric 
motors, consisting of a case inclosing a cylin 
der, a duplicate series of contact-plates ar 
ranged on the cylinder and insulated there 
from and from each other, a single series of 
spring-pressed brushes bearing on said cylin 
der, the brushes consisting of blocks of car 
bon having one edge rounded, Substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination of a case inclosing a 
cylinder having a duplicate series of contact 
plates arranged on its surface, of a plate ar 
ranged adjacent to the cylinder and having a 
series of metallic bushings, each provided 
with a binding-screw, and a spring-pressed 
carbon-brush fitting each of said bushings 
and bearing on the face of the cylinder, Sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 24th day of April, 1889. 
FRANK JB. RAE. 
Witnesses: 
BYRON GREEN, 
WILLIAM. A. JACKSON. 
45 
50 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467873.txt	(No Model.) 
W. W., HUCHES. 
CASTER, 
No. 467,873, 
Patented Jan. 26, 1892, 
721/ 
 
W 
NZ3 Yi 
13- ea Na 
SS 
 
  
 
 
 
77%azz/2/72/zes 
3,4-uc11-bot 
to t11 ct 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. HUGHES, OF URBANA, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO ROWLAND II. 
IIUGHES AND CORNELIA B. HUGHES, OF SAME PLACE. 
CASTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 467,873, dated January 26, 1892. 
Application filed November 12, 1891, Serial No, 4ll,734 (No model.) 
To old, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM W. HUGHES, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Urbana, in the county of Champaign 
and State of Ohio, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Casters; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
ciear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
casters, and relates more especially to that 
class which are provided with two floor 
wheels, secured upon an axle arranged to os 
cillate and adjust itself to the inequalities of 
the floor-surface, this invention being de 
signed more particularly as an improvement 
upon the patent issued to James T. Miller 
June 3, 1884; and the invention consists in 
the construction and combination of the parts, 
as will be hereinafter fully set forth, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a verti 
cal sectional view of a caster constructed in 
accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
perspective view showing the parts of the 
caster separated. 
A refers to the axle-head, which has formed 
integral therewith or attached thereto spin 
dles C. C., upon which the wheels are mounted 
in the usual manner. Centrally the axle is 
provided with an upwardly-projecting por 
tion a', from which projects a spindle B at 
right angles therewith. This spindle is pro 
vided about centrally with a transvere aper 
ture b, through which passes a stop and Se 
curing-pin l'. 
The axle A and spindles C1, Ct. and B may all 
be formed integral with each other, or the 
axle may be made of a suitable block or forg 
ing, and have the spindles secured thereto 
in any suitable manner. It will be observed 
that the projecting portion of the axle is 
formed with parallel sides and rounded end, 
the purpose of which will be hereinafter men 
tioned. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
C refers to a spindle-bearing frame, which 
is longitudinally apertured for the reception 
of the spindle, and is provided on each side 
with openings or slots c c, the aperture in the 55 
spindle B registering therewith, so that when 
the pin b is passed through the apertures 
the ends thereof will contact with the ends of 
the slots c and limit the oscillating movement 
of the spindle-bearing frame upon the spin 
dle. This construction also prevents the 
spindle being removed when the pin is in 
place. 
The spindle-bearing frame C is enlarged 
centrally to provide an upwardly-projecting 
portion, which presents a shoulder d and a 
vertically-projecting pin D beyond, Said pin 
having adjacent to the shoulder a cylindrical 
portion forming a bearing for an anti-fric 
tion wheel or disk E. Above this bearing 
the pin is tapered and provided with a collar 
d', the cylindrical end being adapted to be 
passed through a fastening plate and Secured 
thereto in any suitable manner. The fasten 
ing-plate F may be of any shape desired, so 
as to suit different styles of furniture to 
which the caster may be applied, and has in 
its upper surface a recessf, within which the 
upper end of the pin D and Securing means 
will lie when the parts are assembled, the 
plate beneath the recess being increased in 
thickness to bear upon the collard', as shown. 
The fastening-plate has formed integral 
there with a box or casing G, the lower edge 
of which is preferably reamed out to provide 
a shoulder g, against which the face of the 
wheel or disk E will abut, and, if desired, 
this box or casing may be cut a Way at suit 
able intervals to remove part of the shoulder 
g, so that the disk will not bear all around, 
thereby allowing the same to move more 
freely than if a continuous bearing was pro 
vided. 
The pin D is adapted to have a rotary mo 
tion, and not an OScillating one, as is some 
times provided in this class of casters. 
The box or casing G is provided with a lock 
H, which consists of two plates hinged to each 
other, the upper plate being formed integral 
with the box or attached thereto. The lower 
plate h is bifurcated and adapted, when 
Swung down, to engage with the vertical 
95 
9 O 
75 
CO 
11 
". 
46,873 
35 
45 
55 
mounted, and a locking device secured to the 
box or casing and provided with a bifurcated 
portion, which is adapted to be swung in en 
gagement with the spindle-bearing frame, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a caster, a fastening-plate having a 
box or casing G formed integral therewith, 
said box or casing having an internal shoul 
der, a central aperture in the fastening-plate, 
a spindle-bearing frame having a vertical 
pin with a cylindrical portion, upon which is 
mounted a wheel or disk E, means for con 
necting the pin to the fastening-plate, caster 
wheels mounted on an axle, and a spindle B, 
adapted to enter the spindle-bearing frame 
and be retained therein by a stop-pin b, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In a caster constructed substantially as 
shown, a lock secured to the depending cas 
ing of the fastening-plate, said lock consist 
ing of two plates, one of which is bifurcated, a 
spindle-bearing frame, and an axle construct 
ed substantially as shown, the bifurcated por 
tion of the lock being adapted to be thrown 
in engagement with the spindle-bearing 
frame, for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM W. HUGEIES. 
Witnesses: 
W. E. RING, 
JAMES SWISHER. 
5 
O 
15 
25 
edges of the projections on the spindle-bear 
ing frame C, and thereby lock the parts of 
the caster in rigid engagement with each other. 
I am aware that prior to my invention it 
has been proposed to provide a caster with 
supporting-wheels mounted on an axle, a hori 
Zontal bearing pin or spindle, and a vertical 
pin for permitting the caster to have a hori 
Zontal rotary movement, a wheel also being 
provided for relieving undue strain caused 
by the leverage or distance between the ver 
tical spindle or bearing-pin and the horizon 
tal spindle, as will more fully appear by ref 
erence to the patent previously referred to, 
and I do not claim the construction shown 
therein as my invention; but 
What I do claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a caster, the combination of an axle, 
having spindles a C and B rigidly connected 
thereto, supporting-wheels mounted on the 
spindles C. C., and a spindle-bearing frame 
mounted on the spindle Band having slots c, 
which register with an aperture in the spindle 
through which the securing-pin passes, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a caster, the combination of a fasten 
ing-plate having a depending box or casing, 
a spindle-bearing frame secured thereto, a 
horizontal spindle secured within the spindle 
bearing frame" and rigidly connected with 
the axle upon which the caster-wheels are 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US467973.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 467,973, 
E. G. HASTINGS 
CRIB FOR FEEDING CATTLE, 
Patented Feb. 2, 1892. 
 
4424ZZZZZZ.2.2.2.2.22224222244 
Viwa 
t?Zut 
Q 
% 
? 
???? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN G. HASTINGS, O.F DES MOINES, IOWA. 
CRIB FOR FEED IN G CATTLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 467,973, dated February 2, 1892. 
Application filed April 6, 1891, Serial No. 387,852, (No model.) 
? ? 
25 
To all typhi, ??, i? ??? concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN G. HASTINGs, a 
citizen of the United States of America, and 
a resident of Des Moines, in the county of 
Polk and State of Iowa, have invented an Im 
proved Crib for Feeding Large and Small Ani 
mals, of which the following is a specification. 
My object is to improve the construction 
and operation of a crib adapted for storing 
COrn and other feed therein and to feed the 
Same to large animals from mangers on the 
Outside and shelter, protect, and feed small 
animals from troughs on the inside of the side 
walls and under the bottom of the crib, and 
also under the mangers; and my invention 
consists in certain details of construction and 
operation, as hereinafter set forth, pointed 
Out in my claims, and illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a transverse vertical sectional 
view showing the construction of the frame 
and the arrangement of the mangers, troughs, 
sliding cut-offs, and hinged roof and floor 
Sections relative to the frame. Fig. 2 is a 
perspective view showing a section of the 
roof elevated, as required, to allow corn to be 
thrown in over the inclined floor at the top 
portion of the side wall. Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
detail view through the line acac of Fig. 1, 
showing the construction of the top of the 
manger and the top of a cut-off for closing 
communication between the crib and the 
amanger. 
A are sills rounded at their ends to serve 
as runners for moving the complete structure. 
B are the upright pieces of the frame fixed 
to the sills. 
C are truss-frames composed of pieces con 
nected in crossed position and fixed to the 
upright pieces B at their lower ends, and also 
fixed to the same pieces at their upper por 
tions. The lower portions of the pieces Care 
thus adapted to produce a double-inclined 
floor for the crib and a roof for the chamber 
for small animals, hogs, calves, sheep, &c., un 
der the crib, and the upper portions of the 
same pieces Cserve as a support for inclined 
floors or platforms D, projecting outward 
from the side walls of the crib, and also serve 
So as braces in the complete frame and supports 
for the lower portions of the roof. 
The platforms D are hinged at their outer 
45 
35 
and upper ends in such a manner that they 
can be raised at their lower ends to facilitate 
the filling of the lower portion of the crib with 
corn or other feed, and sections F of the roof 
are hinged at their upper ends so their lower 
ends can be raised to fill the top portion of the 
crib when the platforms D are in their normal 
closed positions. 
G is a door in the end wall and gable of the 
crib, and H is a door in the end and bottom 
for the admission of persons and small ani 
mals. 
J are triangular-shaped blocks fixed to the 
outside and bottom portions of the uprights 
B to support the inclined outer walls J and 
the horizontal bottoms J* of mangers IX, as 
clearly shown in Fig. 1. 
R* are manger-covers hinged to pieces IX, 
fixed to the uprights B. 
L are the floors or feed-troughs, fitted and 
fixed to the lower ends of the uprights B and 
on top of the sills A. 
L* are the side walls of the crib, fixed to the 
inside faces of the uprights B, and Lare 
open spaces at the bottoms of these Walls 
that will allow feed to pass outward and down 
ward from the inclined floor of the crib into 
the mangers and also into the troughs under 
the mangers. 
MI are cut-offs that slide horizontally in . 
bearings fixed to the pieces B and C, as re 
quired, to open and close communication be 
tween the mangers and the troughs under the 
mangers whenever desired. 
N are cut-offs that slide vertically between 
the uprights B and against the walls L', as 
required, to close communication between the 
crib and the mangers whenever desired. 
N are set-screws extended through slots in 
the top portions of the cut-offsN and into the 
wall L* to fasten them at any point of eleva 
tion desired and, as required, to regulate the 
escape of feed from the crib into the mangers 
and troughs. 
Triangular-shaped moldings r are fixed om 
the top edges of the walls and partitions of 
the mangers, as clearly shown in Fig. 3, to 
prevent animals from lifting and dropping 
feed from the mangers. 
To clean the mangers and to convey the ref 
use feed left therein by cattle and other large 
animals to the troughs below, I enter the 
55 
?? 
75 
So 
95 
467,978 
cs 
chamber under the crib and draw the sliding 
cut-offs Minward, while the cut-offs N are 
???????d. as required, to retain the feed in the 
CO. 
To convey feed direct from the crib to the 
troughs under the mangers, I open both the 
horizontally - sliding and vertically-sliding 
cut-offs and allow the feed to escape from the 
crib and to descend through the direct pas 
Sage-Ways leading to the troughs. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a crib for storing feed and feeding 
animals, a frame composed of posts at the cor 
ners and sides and straight pieces fixed to 
gether in crossed position and fixed to said 
posts at their lower ends on one side of the 
frame and to the posts on the other side of 
the frame at their top portions to project out 
Ward and upward, and platform -sections 
hinged at the top portions of said projections, 
arranged and combined to operate in the man 
ner set forth, for the purposes stated. 
2. An improved crib for feeding large and 
SEmall animals, comprising a four-sided frame, 
in which the sides are connected by straight 
pieces fixed together in crossed position at 
their central parts and their upper ends pro 
jected outward and upward to support plat 
form-sections and a roof, platform-sections 
II. ? 
2O 
25 
hinged to the top ends of the said projec 
tions, floors fixed to the lower portions of Said 
crossed pieces, a trough extending along the 
lower ends of the crossed pieces and floor 
thereon and outside of the side walls, open 
ings in the said walls to allow feed to slide 35 
out into the said troughs, vertically-moving . 
slides to close said openings in the wall, 
troughs extending inside of the side walls and 
under the troughs on the outside of the Wall, 
openings between the upper and lower troughs 
to allow feed to fall from the upper into the 
lower troughs, and horizontally-moving slides 
to close the said openings, arranged and com 
bined to operate in the manner set forth, for 
the purposes stated. 
3. In a crib forfeeding large and smallani 
mals, the vertically-sliding cut-off N. and the 
horizontally-sliding cut-off M, in combination 
with a manger above the said cut-off M and 
a trough below the same cut-off, arranged and 
- combined with the inclined floor and the side 
wall, to operate in the manner set forth, for 
the purposes stated. 
EDWIN G. HASTINGs. 
45 
Witnesses: 
J. R.ALPHORWIG, 
THOMAS G. O.RWIG. 
i 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468073.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 468,073, 
A, S, STEBBINS. 
CAKE TIN. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1892. 
ea a fes 6: 
26.7z; 2e2426, . 
427 26%. 
Zzzzere for: 
1%-4-zee?/2/24 
3, 6/37%ze, 6% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AMBROSE S. STEBBINS, OF NEWARK, NEW YORK. 
CAKE-T N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,073, dated February 2, 1892. 
Application filed May 25, 1891, Serial No. 394,032. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may conce77. 
Be it known that i, AMBROSE S. STEBBINs, 
of Newark, in the county of Wayne and State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Cake-Tins, which im 
provement is fully set forth in the following 
Specification and shown in the accompanying 
drawings. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
contractible cake-tin by means of which thin 
circular cakes of different diameters may be 
baked for the purpose of making laminated 
cakes, and also to provide the cake-tin with 
a removable cone center to facilitate the re 
moving of the cake therefrom. 
The inventionishereinafter fully described, 
and more particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
view of the interior of a cake-tin, apart of the 
bottom being broken out and the hoop shown 
in tWO positions by full and dotted lines. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the device with 
a part of the hoop broken out. Fig. 3 shows 
a similar though deeper cake-tin with a re 
movable cone, a part of the hoop being broken 
a Way. Figs. 4 and 5 show different-sized bot 
tom plates for the device. Fig. 6 shows a 
slight modification in which a channel is 
formed for a part of the hoop to slide in. 
Fig. 7, drawn to a larger scale, is a cross-sec 
tion on the dotted line 7 in Fig. 6. 
Referring to the parts shown, A is the hoop 
or band of the cake-tin, divided longitudinally 
at one side with the ends lapping upon each 
other. 
B are bottom plates for the tin, which are 
made in several sizes to correspond to the 
hoop when differently contracted. I prefer 
to make three or more of these bottom plates 
of different diameters for the purpose of bak 
ing layers for pyramidal cakes. 
The upper edge of the hoop is formed with 
a bead a, except as to the part b, which laps 
upon the outside of the other part f of the 
hoop. 
The hoop is formed with an inwardly-turned 
flange c to hold the bottom plates B. These 
bottom plates are circular, each being formed 
with a peripheral projection d, and the hoop 
is formed with horizontal slots e just above 
the flange c, out through which said parts d 
project, as shown in Fig.1, when the parts are 
put together. 
There is but one slot in the inner end f of 
the hoop, but three or more are formed in the 
outer end b, every one of these slots in the 
part b being capable of being brought to COr 
respond with the slot in the part f as the 
hoop is variously contracted. By this means 
the hoop may be contracted to various diame 
ters, a bottom plate being provided for each 
position of the hoop. 
The beada, is preferably formed over a wire 
core 9, Fig. 7, and is left for a distance slightly 
open below the wire, as shown, to form a 
channel h, in which the plain part b of the 
hoop may slide when the latter is contracted 
or expanded. This keeps the part b of the 
hoop snugly against the part fin whatever 
position the hoop may be relating to the mat 
ter of its contraction. 
With the deeper bake-tins (shown in Fig. 
3) a removable cone i is employed, the lower 
end l of which is made cylindrical to fit 
within a circular down turned flange k of the 
bottom plate B. The cone fits the flange 
snugly so as to hold to place by friction; but 
it may be easily pushed downward through 
the bottom plate and removed therefrom, as 
indicated by its position shown in dottedlines. 
The hoop A and bottom plate with the 
cone are preferably made of sheet-tin, like 
other similar devices. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A cake-tin consisting of a hoop or band 
divided at one side, with its endslapping upon 
each other, and a removable bottom plate for 
said hoop, the bottom plate having a periph 
eral projection and the hoop being formed 
with openings through its overlapping ends 
in which to receive said projection of the bot 
tom plate, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. A cake-tin consisting of a contractible 
hoop or band divided at its side, with its endsb 
and foverlapping, saidendfbeingformed with 
a horizontal slot and the end b being formed 
with a series of similar slots, so that when the 
hoop is variously contracted the slots in the 
end b will successively correspond with the 
slot in the end f, and a bottom plate having 
a projection at its edge to enter said slots, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
95 
OO 
EO 
25 
35 
45 
2 
468,078 
3. A cake-tin consisting of a hoop divided having a peripheral projection, and the hoop I5 
at One side, with its ends lapping upon each 
other, and a removable bottom plate for said 
hoop, the bottom plate having a peripheral 
projection and the hoop being formed with 
openings through its overlapping ends in 
which to receive said projection of the bot 
ton plate, the hoop being formed with a bead, 
and a channel therein in which to receive the 
outer overlapping end of the hoop, substan 
tially as described. 
4. A cake-tin consisting of a hoop or band 
divided at one side, with its endslapping upon 
each other, and a removable bottom plate 
o 
being formed with openings through its over 
lapping ends in which to receive said projec 
tion of the bottom plate, the latter being pro 
vided with a removable cone, substantially as 
set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand, this 13th day of May, 1891, in the pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
- 
. 
AMIBROSE S. STEBBINS. 
Witnesses: 
ENOS. B. WHITMORE, 
M. L. MICDERMOTT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468173.txt	(No Model.) 
F. M, GLADISH, 
DROP SCALE FOR MEASURING GRAIN. 
No. 468,173, 
Patented Feb. 2, 1892. 
WZzresses: 
 
77ve72Zor 
oz. 
The Norris Petems co., Phoro-Ho, washigTom, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS M. GLADISH, OF HIGGINS VILLE, MISSOURI. 
DROP-SCALE FOR MEASURING GRAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,173, dated February 2, 1892. 
Application filed March 16, 1891, Serial No. 385,177, (No model.) 
Y. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS M. GLADISH, 
of Higginsville, in the county of Lafayette and 
State of Missouri, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Drop-Scales for 
Measuring Grain; and Idohereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it pertains to 
Io make and use it, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form part of 
this specification. 
Myinvention relates to an improvementin 
automatic drop-scales for measuring grain 
and other substances; and it consists in the 
combination of two scale-beams, a pivoted 
frame connected to each beam, links con 
nected to the frames, a walking-beam for con 
necting the links of the two beams, connect 
ing-rods, beams from which the article being 
weighed is suspended, and a spout that is op 
erated by the Walking-beam for shifting the 
flow from one receptacle to another, as will be 
more fully described hereinafter. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
automatic Scale for measuring grain or other 
substances as it flows into the receptacles into 
which it is to be packed, and which scale auto 
matically shifts the flow of the article from 
one receptacle to the other whenever a pre 
determined weight is reached. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a scale which 
embodies my invention. Fig. 2 is a perspec 
tive of the links and the supporting-frame of 
one of the beams alone, part of the frame be 
ing broken away. 
A represents a suitable inclosing case in 
which the operating mechanism is placed, and 
which is provided with the horizontal parti 
tion B, which extends from one end to the 
other, and the vertical partition C. Through 
this frame are made suitable openings, through 
which the operating parts extend. Mounted 
upon the partition B are the supports D for 
the graduated Scale-beams E, upon which the 
poises F are placed. These poises are mov 
able back and forth upon the beams E in 
the usual manner and are provided with 
clamping-screws for the purpose of holding 
them in any desired position and preventing 
them from becoming accidentally displaced 
while the machine is in operation. The dis 
tances that the free ends of the beams shall 
rise are regulated by the links connected 
thereto, and their downward movements are 
regulated by the stops H, which are also Se 
cured to the partitions B. The wire loops G 
which extend up over the ends of the beams 
serve to keep them from getting out of place. 
Connected loosely to the inner short ends of 6o 
the beams by intermediate loops or links are 
. 
the vertically - moving frames I, which are 
supported at their inner ends from the beams 
E and at their outer ends by the links J, 
loosely pivoted at their outer ends to any suit 
able part K of the frame-work, so as to rise 
andfall. The frames I consist of a horizon 
tal portion and the vertical part, which forms 
the inner end and stands at right angles to 
the horizontal portion, as shown, and this 
frame is but away at its inner edge, SO as to 
allow the arms to freely rise and fall. These 
frames I, being supported at one end by the 
links J, loosely connected to the beams E at 
their inner ends, rise and fall with the beams 
for the purpose of communicating motion to 
the other operating parts. Secured inside of 
each of the frames I is a supportN, to which 
the link O' is pivotally connected and through 
the end of which passes a set-screw P, which 
regulates the distance the links O O' shall 
drop. It is immaterial whether the support 
N is cast as a part of the frame I or made sepa 
rate therefrom. As here shown they are made 
separate and secured rigidly in position. 
O O' are links, which are connected at their 
inner ends by the pivotal pin Q'. The Outer 
end of the link O' is pivoted to the support N 
and the outer end of the link O to the Con 
nected ends of the links SS. The lower end 
of the link S is pivoted to the frame I, and 
the upper end of the link S is loosely, con 
nected to the arms M and the rod T by means 
of the pivotal bolt T. The upper end of the 
rod U is also connected to this pivotal bolt. 
Secured to the pivot Q' and extending up 
ward therefrom is the vertically-slotted link 
Q, the vertical movement of which is limited. 
by the stop R, which extends through the said 
slotted link and which is supported by a de 
pending portion R', secured to the under side 
of the frame B. When the frame I sinks 
35 
45 
25 
3O 
o 
75 
55 
9o 
95 
OO 
468,173 
downward a certain distance, the link Q comes 
in contact with the stop R, which prevents it 
from having any further downward move 
ment, and as the frame I continues to descend 
the inner connected ends of the links O O' 
are thus drawn upward above a horizontal 
line, when immediately the weight supported 
on the links S S' through the medium of the 
rod U forces the said links inward at their 
point of connection, causing the links O O" to 
fold upward and the link Q to rise. The 
links O O" prevent the links S S from ever 
assuming a vertical position, and hence the 
Weight Supported on the last-named links ex 
elts a pressure upon the links O O" all the 
time. The upper links S are pivoted to the 
inner ends of the arms M, which arms are 
pivoted at their outer ends to the horizontal 
portion of the frame I. To the bolt which 
connects the links S and the arms M are also 
connected the rods TU, the former being con 
nected at their upper ends to the walking 
beam V, which operates the shifting grain 
spout. The lower ends of the rods M are 
connected to the ends of the levers X, which 
support the grain being weighed. The up 
per link S has a vertical movement along 
with the rods TU, while the lower link S is 
pivoted at its lower end to the frame I. The 
rods TU are slightly bent inward at their 
pivoted meeting ends, as shown, so that in 
their vertical movement the said ends travel 
in the cut-away portion I' of the frame I, 
which limits the movement of the said rods. 
The operation is as follows: When the grain 
is being filled into a bag or other receptacle, 
the Weighing mechanism occupies the position 
shown in the right-hand side of Fig. 1. The 
grain being Weighed is supported on the lever 
Xby the loop Y. The lever X in this position 
is rigidly connected with the short end of le 
ver E by the 1rod U, links SS', and the frame 
I, the said links being prevented from push 
ing inward at their point of connection by the 
links O O", which then occupy a horizontal 
position. As the grain flows into the recep 
tacle its Weight grows heavier on the lever X, 
and thus gradually draws it down, and with it 
the short end of the beam E, through the me 
dium of the rod U, the rigidly-held links SS, 
and the frame I. The free end of the frame 
is thus lowered, and with it the links O O". 
The link Q, being connected to the links O O' 
at their point of connection, descends with 
them; but the movement of this link is lim 
ited by the bolt or stop R, which passes 
through its opening. The said link having 
reached the limit of its movement and the 
frame I continuing to descend, the tendenc 
is to draw up the connected ends of the links 
O O", allowing the links S S' to push inward, 
and thus breaking the rigid connection exist 
ing between the lever X and beam E. When 
this connection is broken, the weight which 
was before supported by the links S S is 
transferred to the rod T, which, being de 
pressed by the said weight, draws the walk 
ing-beam with it, thereby shifting the graill 
spout to the other side of the weigher. The 
opposite end of the beam V being raised, the 
rod T is drawn upward and the links SS and 
O O' straightened into their respective posi 
tions for another weighing operation. 
It will be understood that the resistance of 
the beam E to the weight of the grain is regul 
lated by the poise F, mounted thereon, and that 
the weight of grain passed into the recepta 
cle is thus regulated at will. 
In order to prevent the scale-beams from 
having any movement, and thus to lock the 
parts in position while the scale is being 
transported, there are pivoted upon the hang 
ers. A the wire rods I3, which have their ill 
ner ends bent at right angles, as shown at C, 
so as to catch over the upper edges of the 
scale-beams, while their outer ends are bent 
so as to form the long and short loops D. E. 
Catching in these loops are the rods G', which 
pass through openings in the partition Band 
which have their upper ends bent at right 
angles, so as to catch over the outer ends of 
the scale-beams E. As one of the beams X 
has its inner end raised while the other one is 
depressed, the two loops D'E' are necessary. 
The lower end of the supporting-rod then 
catches in the longer loop for the beam that 
is raised, while the other supporting rod 
catches in the shorter loop for the beam that 
has its end depressed. By this construction 
the looped rods, which are more or less elas 
tic, are made to bear down upon the upper 
edges of the beams and prevent their having 
any movement. When the spout is fastened 
to the walking-beam and ready for use, it 
is thrown either to one side or the other, 
and the pull it exerts is thrown upon that 
beam which is receiving the weight of the 
grain or other material. The flow of grain, 
whether great or small, through this spout is 
exerted in the same place; but it is much 
greater than it would be if thrown upon the 
lower beam. The effect of this action is to 
counteract the tendency of a running stream 
to overbalance the weight. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a scale, the beams, the poises adjust 
able upon the beams, the vertically-movable 
frames suspended at one end from the beams, 
links pivoted in the frame, the connecting 
rods, the walking-beam, the tilting spout, and 
the lower beams from which the receptacles 
to receive the article being weighed are sus 
pended, combined and arranged substantially 
as shown. 
2. In a Scale, the beams EX, connecting 
rods, and a walking-beam for connecting the 
two parts of the scale together, combined with 
vertically-moving frames suspended from the 
beams Eat one end and by links J at its other 
end, the links pivoted in the frame, and the 
slotted link connected to the lower links, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a scale, the beams EX, a vertically 
35 
45 
55 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
468,173 
3 
the parts being combined substantially as 
specified. 
5. In a scale, the beams EX, the frames 
suspended from the beams E, the two pairs 
of links pivoted in the frames, casting N, 
placed in the frame and provided with a set 
screw P, the connecting-rods, the Walking 
beam, and the pivoted Spout, the parts being 
combined substantially as shown. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signatureins 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRANCIS M. GLADISH. 
25 
Witnesses: 
PETER TORP, 
J. S. UPTON. 
moving frame which is connected at one end 
of the beams E, the two sets of links O O'SS', 
pivoted in the frame, the slotted link Q, con 
nected to the links O O", the arms M, con 
nected to the links S', the connecting-rods U 
T, the walking-beam V, and the spout con 
nected thereto, the parts being combined as 
set forth. 
4. In a scale, the two beams EX, vertically 
moving frames connected to the ends of the 
beams E, two sets of links arranged at right 
angles to each other in the frame, a slotted 
link, a pin or stop which passes through the 
slotted link to limit the downward movement 
of the horizontal links, the connecting-rods, 
the walking-beam, and the pivoted spout, 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468273.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 468,273, 
 
H. R. WENDEL, 
FLY PAPER HOLDER. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1892. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIUGO R. WENDEL, OF HARRISBURG, PENNSYIVANIA. 
FLY PAPER HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,278, dated February 2, 1892. 
Application filed September 30, 1891, Serial No. 407,35l. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HUGO R. WENDEL, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
IIarrisburg, in the county of Dauphin and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Fly-Paper 
Holders; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clea, and exact description of the in 
Vention, Such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
view, and Fig. 2 is a side view with legs or 
Supports. 
This invention has relation to means for 
holding sticky fly-paper; and it consists in the 
novel construction and combination of parts, 
as hereinafter specified. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
designates the stand or holder, which is pref 
erably formed of wire, and comprises a base 
or frame (shown as of rectangular form) sup 
porting at each corner a post B. The upper 
end of each said post is bent or turned hori 
Zontally in a direction parallel with the length 
O 
25 
of the frame and has secured thereto a piv 
oted clamp C, having pivoted clamping-jaWS 
c c. These clamps are designed to hold each 
one corner of a sheet F of fly-paper. 
If desired, the frame or base may be sup 
ported upon legs gg, &c. (Shown in Fig. 2. 
This stand or holder may be given an orna 
mental form or configuration and forms a 
neat and convenient means for the purpose 
for which it is designed. 
Having described this invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The fly-paper holder comprising the base 
or frame supporting a series of posts, each of 
which is provided with a clamping device, 
substantially as specified. 
2. A fly-paper holder comprising a frame or 
base supported upon legs and supporting a 
series of posts carrying each at their upper 
end a clamping device, substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
IUGO R. WENDEL. 
Witnesses: 
OTTO PLACK, 
WM. WOLF. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468373.txt	(No Model.) 
C, N, TODD, 
COTTON HARWESTER 
- 
4. Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 468,373, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
Eggs: reas cc, rotot. THC. WASHINGT), 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 468,373. 
G. N. TODD 
COTTON HARWESTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 468,373, 
G. N. TODD. 
COTTON HARWESTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892, 
(No Model.) 
G. N. TODD, 
COTTON HARWESTER, 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
. 
No. 468,373, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
3 e 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
z 
Q SS 
 
2 Z %) 
  
 
 
 
 
away. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE N. TODD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
COTTON-HARVESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,873, dated February 9, 1892. 
Application filed September 17, 1889, Serial No, 324,176, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
So 
To aid whon, it may concer to: 
Be it known that I, GEORGEN. ToDD, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Cotton-Harvesters, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
Cotton-harvesters in which the picker-stems 
are caused to have simultaneously an indi 
vidual axial rotation and a bodily travel 
about two or more axes or centers of revolu 
tion. 
The prime object of this invention is to im 
part to Said picker-stems so operated an axial 
rotation faster than their bodily travel about 
the axis of their support. 
Another object is to have the picker-stems 
journaled in a horizontally-traveling apron 
and actuated in such manner as to have an 
individual axial rotation faster than their 
bodily travel with said apron and faster than 
is possible where the picker-stems depend 
Solely upon the travel of the apron for their 
axial rotation. 
A further object is to have each of the slats 
of the apron constitute an oil-chamber for 
automatically and continuously oiling the 
bearings of all of the picker-stems journaled 
therein. 
A still further object is to have the frame 
of the machine, upon which the traveling 
apron is supported, adjustable in such man 
ner that the apron may be bodily adjusted 
vertically while in a horizontal position, or 
the ends thereof may be independently ad 
justed, so as to cause the apron to operate in 
an inclined position. These objects are at 
tained by the devices illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
cotton-harvester embodying my invention, 
showing the near drive-wheel removed; Fig. 
2, a similar view taken from the opposite side 
of the machine; Fig. 3, a central longitudinal 
Section through the machine; Fig. 4, a trans 
verse vertical section thereof on the line 4 4 
of Fig. 3; Fig. 5, an enlarged detailed sec 
tion through one end of the apron and its op 
erating mechanism, taken on the same line 
as Fig. 4; Fig. 6, an enlarged side elevation 
of the apron-frame with parts broken away to 
more clearly disclose the construction and 
relative location of the apron-operating mech 
anism, and Fig. 7 an enlarged detailed sec 
tion through one of the apron-slats and the 
picker-stem bearing therein. 
Similar letters and numerals of reference 
indicate the same parts in the several figures 
of the drawings. 
The general features of construction and 
operation of this machine are similar to those 
of another application filed by me of even 
date herewith, Serial No. 324,175, the main 
feature of difference being the construction 
and operation of the cotton-picking devices, 
and for that reason need only have a general 
mention herein. 
Referring by letters and figures to the ac 
companying drawings, A indicates the body 
or main frame of my machine, constituting a 
cotton-receptacle and supported at its forward 
end upon a crank-axle B, as in my aforesaid 
case, upon the crank ends C of which axle are 
mounted the main ground or drive wheels ID, 
by means of which power is imparted to the 
operating mechanism of my machine. 
A vertical adjustment of the forward end 
of the machine, as in the aforementioned 
application, is obtained by means of a gear 
wheel E, mounted upon the ends of the main 
portion of the crank-axle, but secured to the 
angular portions thereof and meshing with 
worms F, secured to the lower end of vertical 
shafts G, journaled in suitable brackets at 
each side of the machine, which shafts are 
provided with beveled gears II on the upper 
ends thereof, and are caused to rotate simul 
taneously by means of a horizontal crank 
shaft I, upon the ends of which are fixed bev 
eled gears J, meshing with the gears H. upon 
the said shaft, one of which is extended above 
said gears and provided with a crank-handle 
IK for imparting a rotary motion thereto. 
Thus whenever the worms are operated 
through said handle the main body portion 
of the crank-axle, and consequently the for 
ward end of the frame of the machine, Will 
be caused to swing about the axis of the crank 
portions of the axle-bearing in the hub of the 
drive-wheel, it being understood that the 
Grank portion of the axle normally lies in the 
same horizontal plane with the body portion 
thereof and that any movement of the body 
9c. 
95 
Od 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
468,873 
portion must cause the frame of the machine 
to move vertically on the arc of a circle to 
ward or away from the ground. The rear end 
of the machine is supported upon caster 
wheels L., which, however, are not vertically 
movable independent of the frame of the ma 
chine, as in the aforesaid application; but 
they are vertically adjustable with relation 
to the body of the machine by means of the 
standard M thereof, having a sliding connec 
tion with a guide N, secured to the end wall 
of the frame, with which standard a vertical 
rod O has a screw-thread connection, Working 
through an eye P upon the frame, but pre 
Vented from having endwise or longitudinal 
movement through said eye by means of col 
lars Q thereon above and below the eye, per 
mitting a free rotation thereof through the 
crank-handle R, which causes the standard 
to slide vertically, and thus permit of a ver 
tical adjustment of the frame relative to the 
ground. By this vertically-adjustable sup 
port of the two ends of the frame of the ma 
chine the latter may be adjusted bodily and 
vertically relative to the ground while in a 
horizontal position, or either end thereof may 
be adjusted independent of the other, so as 
to cause the frame to stand in an inclined 
position, without in the least interfering with 
the operation of the cotton picking and clean 
ing devices supported thereon. 
The picker-stem support in this machine is 
an endless horizontally-traveling apron con 
sisting of a series of tubular slats S, prefer 
ably square in cross-section and connected 
together by means of links T, extending from 
the ends thereof in each direction, the links 
of adjacent slats having a pivotal connection 
with each other. These slats are operated by 
and travel about the axis of two pairs of 
sprocket-wheels U, one pair of which is keyed 
upon a hollow shaft V, sleeved upon the main 
portion of the crank-axle, while the other pair 
is loosely journaled upon a cross-shaft W, 
bearing at its ends in theside walls of the frame 
of the machine, about the center of length 
thereof, and in a horizontal plane with the nor 
mal position of the crank-axle, a rotary motion 
being imparted to said hollow shaft or sleeve 
by Substantially the same mechanism as is 
employed for operating the drum of my afore 
said application, consisting of a sprocket 
wheel C, keyed upon the sleeve at one end 
thereof and driven by a sprocket-chain b, 
working over another sprocket-wheelc, loosely 
mounted upon a sleeved upon a cross-shaft 
e at the top of the machine, between which 
sleeve and wheel there is a spring-actuated 
clutch-coupling f, of the usual construction 
of such devices. This sleeve is driven by a 
sprocket-wheel g upon the outer end thereof, 
around which and around a corresponding 
sprocket-wheel h, upon an axle extension of 
the main body of the Grank-axle Works a 
sprocket-chain i, the sprocket-wheel h. having 
a cog-wheel i cast with or rigidly secured 
thereto, with which meshes an intermediate 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
75 
90 
spur-gear k, driven by a cog-wheell, secured 
to the hub of one of the ground-Wheels. 
Within the links T of the apron is loosely 
journaled a short shaft in, provided With an 
axle-socket on the inner end thereof, into 
which projects a stud-bearing in from the 
tubular slat, said shaft being in turn Sup 
ported upon a roller o, located outside of the 
links and the sprocket-wheels U, rotating 
freely upon said shaft and traveling in a 
groove or guideway formed on the inner face 
of oblong plates p, which have an outline cor 
responding to the travel of the apron-that 
is to say, they are straight along their upper 
and lower surfaces, and formed on the arc of 
a circle struck from the axis of the sleeve W. 
and shaft W, so that when the links are actu 
ated through the medium of the sprocket 
wheel U the apron, the slats of which are in 
dividually supported at each end upon the 
rollero, will be caused to traverse its orbit. 
In each of the slats and projecting at a right 
angle from the outer face thereof is arranged 
a longitudinal series of picker-stems q, the 
picking-surface of which may be of any de 
sirable construction and the journals r of 
which work in suitable bearings S, eXtending 
through the oil-chamber of the slat and 
screwed at its ends into the inner and outer 
walls of the slat, the said bearing being pro 
vided with oil passages or ducts t, leading 
from the oil-chamber to the internal bearing 
surface thereof, so that the journals of the 
picker-stems will be continuously and auto 
matically lubricated. T 
To the inner end of . 
the journal of each of the picker-stems is se 
cured a pinion it, meshing with a correspond 
ing beveled gear v, fixed upon a line-shaft 
at, underlying and traveling with the slat, 
being journaled in depending brackets or 
bearings at at the center and each end of the 
slat and having one of the gears for each 
picker-stem. The line-shaft w is driven by 
means of a cog-wheel y on One end thereof, 
meshing with a corresponding cog-wheel 2, 
cast with or rigidly mounted upon the inner 
end of the short shaft 11, upon the Outer end 
of which, beyond the roller O, is rigidly se 
cured a drive cog-wheel 1, engaging and op 
erated by an oblong cog-rack 2, formed upon 
the oblong guide-plate p, parallel with the 
tracks upon which the rollers O travel, so 
that when the apron is caused to travel a ro 
tary motion at a high rate of speed will be 
imparted to the picker - stems through the 
medium of the gearing intermediate said 
stems and the stationary rack and at a speed 
faster than the bodily travel of the picker 
stems with the apron or than is possible to 
attain where the picker-stem gears are di 
rectly actuated by the oblong cog-racks and 
depend solely upon the travel with the apron 
for their speed of rotation. 
For the purpose of preventing the cotton 
from interfering with the operating mechan 
ism. I provide interlocking shields 3, project 
ing laterally from each side of the slats, with 
II5 
I 25 
468,873 
the ends overlapping, so that the surface of 
the apron as a whole is practically continuous. 
The mechanism for removing the gathered 
cotton from the picker-stem-that is, the 
cleaner device-is identical in construction 
and operation with that of the aforesaid ap 
plication, and consists of a series of disks or 
hubs 5, secured upon a rotatable hollow shaft 
6, sleeved upon a tie-rod 7, from each of 
which disks project a series of radial arms 8, 
the opposing surfaces of which are covered 
with bristles 9 and between each pair of which 
the picker-stems are passed in series during 
their travel. A rotary motion is imparted to 
said shaft by means of a cog-wheel 10, secured 
to one end thereof and meshing with another 
cog-wheel 11, mounted upon the inner endofa, 
short horizontal shaft 12, to the outer end of 
which is secured a pinion 13, driven by a 
larger cog-wheel 14, rigidly mounted upon a 
sleeve 15 on the end of the cross-shaft e, be 
tween which sleeve and shaft there is an or 
dinary clutch-coupling 16 for controlling the 
operation thereof. The shaft e is driven by 
a duplication of the gearing employed for 
driving, the hollow drive-shaft of the pick 
ing mechanism, and the corresponding parts 
are lettered in the drawings g', h', i, j', k', 
and l', the operation of which has been al 
ready described. 
Having described my invention, what. I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
I. In a cotton-harvester, the combination, 
With an endless apron consisting of a series 
of tubular slats constituting oil-chambers and 
linked together, of a series of picker-stems 
journaled in each of said slats, the bearings 
of which are connected with and constantl 
oiled from said chamber, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a cotton-harvester, the combination, 
with an endless traveling apron composed of 
a Series of tubular slats constituting oil-cham 
bers and linked together, of a series of picker 
stems and a corresponding series of bearings 
therefor in each of said slats in which the 
journals of said stems work, said bearings pro 
jecting through the oil-chamber and having 
a communicating passage leading to the bear 
ing-surfacethereof, substantially as described. 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
o 
75 
3. In a cotton-harvester, the combination, 
with a series of tubular picker-stem supports, 
a link connection therebetween, Said tubes 
constituting oil-chambers, a series of rotat 
able picker-stems bearing in and projecting 
through said tubular support, a line-shaft 
journaled upon and lying parallel with each 
of said supports, and a gear connection be 
tween said shaft and the series of picker 
stems, of mechanism for traveling said Sup 
ports about two or more centers and means 
for rotating said line-shaft, substantially as 
described. 
4. In a cotton-harvester, the combination, 
with a series of picker-stem supports, a link 
connection therebetween, a series of rotat 
able picker-stems bearing in and projecting 
through said supports, a line-shaft journaled 
upon and lying parallel with each of said 
supports, and a gear connection between said 
shafts and the series of stems, of guide-plates 
opposing the ends of said supports, having 
guideways therein, a cog-rack formed on one 
of said guide-plates, rollers upon the ends of 
said supports working in the guideways, and 
a gear connection between said cog-rack and 
each of the line-shafts, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
5. In a cotton-harvester, the combination, 
with a series of picker-stem supports having 
a link connection therebetween and provided 
with pivoting-studs on the ends thereof, means 
for traveling said supports about two or more 
axes, short shafts provided with axial sock 
ets for reception of said stud, gear-wheels 
upon each end of said shafts, and a stationary 
oblong cog-rack engaged by and driving one 
of said gears, of a guideway parallel with said 
racks, supporting-rollers loosely journaled on 
said shafts and traveling in said guideways, 
a series of picker-stems journaled in and pro 
jecting through each of said supports, a line 
shaft journaled upon and lying parallel with 
each of said supports, and a gear upon the 
end of said shaftsmeshing with the gear upon 
the inner end of the short shaft, substantially 
as described. 
GEORGE N. TODD. 
95 
Witnesses: 
R. C. OMOHUNDRO, 
W. R. OMOHUNDRO. 
.. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468473.txt	(No Model.) 
M. G. CRANE & F. W. COLE, 
REPEATER FOR ELECTRIC CIRCUITS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 468,473, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
N 
SS 
s 
s H 
 
is 
I 
  
I. HIT 
"E.I Si 
is 
5 
miri 
III 
IIHF 
EEIASse 
sit AIS E. 
 S., Azeezzo...I 
T. 
IIHHHHHHHHH 
III 
H S 
I 
 
 
 
H 
I 
  
 
Moses 6.67 a 7-6 arcaz 
Area erect A Code 
%-4- 
1zz. 
W 
Adzvesses, 
fifty 
e 
u/ 6.2% 
(No Model.) 
M. G. CRANE & F. W. COLE, 
REPEATER FOR ELECTRIC CIRCUITS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 468,473, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
e 
// 6, 
O1 C a' 
a' 
Azy. 2, 
6/ 
T 
. 
C 
a's 
C-6 
c 
c 
c 
3 
d 
2 a. 
da 
w 
. 
(D 
A. 
 
H 
 
| 
} 
Azoses 6,67a 7-6 arzaz 
Azeae 7 vic-7e. A 622e 
27 /2.4%teerza 
74 2. 
the Noras pereas co. PHTo-thic. WASH:NGON, o, e. 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
M. G. CRANE & F. W. COLE. 
REPEATER FOR ELECTRIC CIRCUITs, 
No. 468,473, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
7t? 
/rive.7a, Zo/3. 
Moses 6. Orez-earta, 
Azeezerce A/, 60.2e 
24.6 % is 
ad -61 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 468,473, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
M. G. CRANE & F. W. COLE, 
REPEATER FOR ELECTRIC CIRCUITS, 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Sn 
Q 
NO 
 
SS en 
fi 
Rae 
s 
&n 
ba 
no & 
n 
t-s 
tn 
As 
en 
Matnesses. 
 
Zrzverz-A075, 
Ayases 6 Orarve area 
A rederzea A, 622e 
1.46% 
NITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
& 
(OSES G. CRANE AND FREDERICK W. COLE, OF NEWTON, MASS ACII USETTS, 
REPEATER FOR ELECTRC CIRCUITs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,478, dated February 9, 1892. 
Application filed July 2, 1889, Serial No, 318,332, (No model.) 
15 
25 
35 
C 
To all whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that we, MOSES G. CRANE and 
FREDERICK. W. CoLE, of Newton, county of 
Middlesex, and State of Massachusetts, have 
5 invented an Improvement in Repeaters for 
Electric Cireuits, of which the following de 
scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters 
and figures on the drawings representing like 
parts. 
Cur invention relates to a repeater or in 
strument by which electric signals transmit 
ted over any one of a number of circuits, all 
co-operating with said repeating-instrument, 
are automatically transmitted over the rest 
of the circuits of the set, such instruments 
being commonly employed in connection with 
fire-alarm circuits for the purpose of trans 
nitting or repeating the signals that may be 
received from a signal-box on any one circuit 
over all the circuits of the system. The sig 
mals are usually produced by opening and 
closing the circuits which are commonly nor 
mally closed and with the currents applied 
to them, and the signals generally consist of 
a number of consecutive short closures of the 
circuit separated from one another by definite 
short intervals of time, and the break-wheels 
of the transmitting-boxes are usually So made 
that while a signal is being transmitted the 
time of closure of the circuit is shorter than 
the interval between two consecutive closures, 
during which interval the circuit remains 
Open. 
For convenience the instrument forming 
the subject of this invention will be described 
as if intended to operate for signals of the 
character just referred to, although it is ob 
vious that the repeating-instrument forming 
the subject of this invention might be em 
ployed with signals of other character-as, 
for example, when closures of varying dura 
tion are used to produce signals composed of 
dots and dashes, such as used in the \lorse 
alphabet, or when the signals are given by 
changes in the character or condition of the 
current other than total interruption and re 
establishment of the current. 
it is necessary for a repeating-il strument 
for the purpose above set forth that the in 
strument should be capable of operation by 
any one of the several circuits, and that on 
the moment that one circuit begins to trans 
mit a signal the repeating-instrument should 
be removed from control of all the other cir- 55 
cuits until that signal is completed, so that in 
case a signal should be transmitted in another 
circuit before the first was completed there 
should be no interference between the two 
signals or messages. 
The object of the present invention is to 
produce a repeater capable of operating as 
rapidly as a magnet-armature can respond 
distinctly to anges in a circuit in which it 
is included, so that the message can be re- 65 
ceived on one circuit and repeated over sev 
eral other circuits as quickly as it could be 
received if no such repetition had to be pro- . 
vided for. In order to accomplish this result, 
the repeating-instrument is in accordance 7o 
with this invention provided with a number 
of electro-magnets, one in each circuit, and 
adapted to respond directly to the signals 
originally transmitted in said circuit, the ar 
matures of said magnet each actuating di- 75 
rectly or through the intervention of a relay 
a number of circuit- changers co-operating 
with all the circuits connected with the re. 
peater, so that the movement of any one ar 
mature iminediately produces a break or 8o 
change in all the circuits connected with the 
repeating-instrument. The said armatubes 
are each provided with a lock or detent, all 
of which locks are connected to move simul 
taneously and each of which is normally dis- 85 
engaged from its corresponding armature, 
leaving it free to move; but on the backward 
or retractive novement of any one armature 
all the locks are immediately moved and all 
except the one corresponding to the armature go 
which has moved to operate them are by such 
movement thrown into engagement with and 
lock the corresponding armatures in such po 
sition that they are unaffected by changes in 
their imagnets, while the particular armature 95 
that has moved to operate the locking device 
is itself in such relation to its lock as to be 
left free to respond to its magnet, so that it 
will go on responding to the message that is 
being translnitted in its own circuit, and each roc 
of its movements will produce a correspond 
ing change in all the other circuits; but the 
said change in the other circuits, or, in fact, 
any change made from any point in any of 
2 
468,473 
O 
the said other circuits, is unable to affect the 
armatures of the repeater-magnets therein, 
owing to the effect of the before-mentioned 
lock. It is necessary that the lock should re 
main in engagement with the several arma 
tures during the entire period of time occu 
pied by the message that is being originally 
transmitted, but that the armatures should be 
unlocked as soon as possible after such mes 
sage is finished, so as to leave the repeater in 
condition to respond to the next message which 
may be transmitted in any one of the circuits. 
This resultis effected by means of a mechani 
cal motor or clock-work having a time-move 
ment and being controlled by each of the ar 
matures of the several repeater-magnets in 
such manner that the said motor begins to 
operate at the first backward or opening move 
ment of any one of the armatures, and in its 
operation begins to operate a restorer for the 
armature at each forward or closing move 
ment of said armature, which restorer is so 
arranged that it requires a period of move 
ment of the motor slightly greater than the 
longest closure of the circuit that occurs in 
the transmission of any continuous message 
before it can restore the lock to its original 
position and unlock all of the armatures. 
The magnet that is responding to a message 
throws the lock-restorer back to its original 
starting-point at each break of said message, 
so that as long as the arnature is responding 
to the successive impulses of the message thre 
restorer cannot move far enough to unlock 
the armatures; but shortly after the magnet 
armature comes to rest in normal attracted 
position at the end of a message it completes 
the movement of the restorer which returns 
the locks to their original or normal position 
and releases all of the armatures, leaving the 
repeater ready for the next operation, and 
finally stopstherestoring-motor itself. Means 
are also provided for preventing the derange 
ment of the working parts in case any one or 
more of the main circuits should be perma 
nently broken, grounded, or otherwise de 
ranged, so that its magnet remains in abnor 
mal condition. 
From the previous description it will be un 
derstood that while one of the magnets is de 
magnetized the motor that restores the lock 
ing devices is running, and if the said mag 
net should remain demagnetized for an indefi 
nite period the said motor would run down. 
In order to prevent this, an additional restor 
ing device is employed which will restore the 
repeater, with the exception of the deranged 
circuit, to its normal condition and leave it 
unaffected by the magnet, the circuit of which 
is deranged, so that the remaining circuits 
can operate in the normal manner. 
There are various other features, which con 
tribute to the efficiency of the devices which 
will be hereinafter explained. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a sufficient 
portion of a repeating-instrument to illus 
trate this invention; Fig. 2, a side elevation 
of one of the main circuit-laagnets and a por 
tion of the devices that co-operate directly 
with the armature thereof; Figs. 3 and i, de 
tails representing said devices in different po 
sitions, to be referred to; Figs. 5 and 6, modi 
fications thereof; Fig. 7, a perspective view 
of a portion of the devices that restore the re 
peater to normal condition when one of the 
main lines is deranged; Fig. S, a detail repre 
senting a modification of said devices; Fig. 9, 
a side elevation of the time-motor that re 
stores the armature-locks to their original or 
normal condition after a signal has been 
transmitted and restores the repeater to nor 
mal condition in case one of the main cir 
cuits is deranged; Fig. 10, a detail represent 
ing a portion of the devices shown in Fig. 9 
in different positions; Figs. 11, 12, 13, and 14, 
details of the restoring mechanism that oper 
ates when one of the main lines is deranged, 
and Fig. 15 a diagram representing one ar 
rangement of the circuits that may be em 
ployed. 
One only of the main-line magnets ( is 
shown in Fig. 1; but it is to be understood 
that there will be one of said magnets in 
cluded in each main circuit of the entire set 
of circuits in which the signals are to be re 
peated, and that said magnets will be placed 
side by side in line with one another on a 
suitable base or support B, and that devices 
will co-operate with the armatures of the sev 
eral magnets, which devices are alike for each 
magnet, so that those co-operating with one 
magnet only need be described. . 
As shown in Fig. 1 and in the diagram, Fig. 
15, the message received on any one line is 
repeated over the other main lines through 
the intervention of a relay-magnet R, which 
may be mounted upon the base or support IB 
at the end of the row of main-liile magnets, 
as shown in Fig. 1, and is included in a 
local circuit controlled by contacts a, oper 
ated by the armature-level's a of the main 
circuit magnets a, (see Fig. 2,) the said pairs 
of contacts controlled by the several main 
circuit magnets being in series in the local 
circuit of the relay, so that the opening of 
any one will open the said local circuit, and 
thus cause the relay-magnet R to respond. 
The armature-lever R of said relay-magnet 
R is provided with a pin or projection R*, 
which co-operates with an arm b, connected 
with a shaft b in such manner that each vi 
bration of said magnet causes the said arm 
b to swing and oscillate the shaft b, which is 
a rock-shaft, and is controlled wholly by such 
movement of the armature-lever R', being 
swung in one direction by the retractive move 
ment of said armature and noved back to its 
original position by means of a spring ly". 
when the armature is again attracted. The 
movement of the armature R is in this in 
stance utilized to repeat the signal or message 
on the otlier circuits, the said armature or she 
shaft b moved by it being provided with a 
contact-carrier e, (see Fig. 1) provided with 
. . 
A 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
75 
roo 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
468,473 
5 
IO 
3 5 
4. () 
a, all taber of contacts e, one included in each 
main circuit 2nd co-operating with corre 
sponding stationary contacts e, (see Fig. 15,) 
so that the separation of the contacts e' e 
Ripon the retraction of said armature produces 
the break in the other main circuits wikich 
immediately follows the break in any one cir 
cuit that permitted the armature-lever (l' of 
the corresponding main-circuit magnet to be 
retracted, and tilus open the local circuit, and 
when the relay-ai'nature is again attracted by 
the closure of the local circuit by the main 
circuit magnet that was originally operated 
the resulting forward movement of the said 
relay-armature will again close all the other 
mail circuits. 
Inasmuch as the breaking of the main 
fircuits in which the signal is repeated de 
pends upon and thus follows in time the re 
tractive movement of the armature of the 
magnet that was operated by a break exter 
inal to the repeater, there is a very short in 
terval of time between the retractive in ove 
ament of the armature that is first effected by 
an external change in its circuit and the de 
magnetization of the other main-circuit mag 
nets, which interval is depended upon to ef 
fect the locking or retaining of the ai'natures 
of the other main-circuit. magnets in operat 
ive condition, while the locking device for 
tie armature of the externally-effected main 
circuit magnet is operated in such manner as 
to leave saidarnature in condition to respond 
to furtler changes in the circuit, and thus 
continue to affect the relay, as will now be 
A rock-shaft or lock-actuating bar c is pro 
vided with a lock c* for each armature, (shown 
in Figs. 2, 3, and 4 as consisting of a finger or 
projection hanging from the end of an ai'in 
c, fixed ipon said rock-shaft c,) So that when 
the latter turns a short distance in the direc 
tio of the arrow, Fig. 2, the said projection 
c drops in at the front of a stationary projec 
tion (: at the rear of the al'mature-lever of 
cash magnet that is energized, (see Fig. 3.) 
l;ut, falls at the rear of said projectiol ('coi'- 
3'esponding to any arnature that is retracted 
st tie nonent when or just before the said 
locking deviee fallis. (See Fig. 4.) The said 
logk is pi'ovided with a projection or pin c', 
extending aci'oss the rear of a projection (4 
in the ari nature-lever Cl* of the main-circuit 
aget, so that in case the said locking cle 
vice drops at the front of the projec 
... g., between it aii il the arianature-the said 
rojection of prevents the ariature from 
anaking its retractive movement, as shown in 
Fig. 3; but if it falls at the rear of said pro 
jectic c' or away from the armature it does 
act. iiiterfere 3 Viti the novenient of the ar 
an:tille, wiirii by the engagement of the 
parts ( ; cine'ely swings the lock c* back and 
forth oil its pivot at the end of the arm c. 
The pit c, ii) the downward movement of the 
lock, also co-op 3}'tis with a circuit-closer S, 
the purpose of which will be hereinafter ex 
described. 
- 
 
plained, it separating the contacts of said 
circuit-closer when the lock fails in front of 
the projection, so as to lock the armature 
from retractive movement, but being disen 
gaged from the said circuit-closer and leav 
ing the contacts together in case the arma 
ture is retraeted and noves the lock to the 
rear of the projection c' before the lock drops, 
as is the case with the magnet through which 
the message is being received. As a modifi 
cation of this locking device or ewen in addi 
tion thereto, an aim similar to c' might be 
provided with a locking projection c', that 
co-operates directly with a projection a' on 
the armature-lever, as shown in Figs. 5 and 
G, said projection c' dropping at the rear of 
the projection (t" on the armature in case the 
lock is operated while the magnet is ener 
gized, as shown in Fig. 5, or falling at the 
front of said projection if the armature was 
retracted before the lock fell, as is the case 
with the magnet that is responding to the 
inessage, in which case the parts will come to 
the position show in Fig. 6, the lock permit 
ting the forward movement of the armature, 
and the projection (t" being made somewhat 
yielding or elastie, if need be, so as to permit 
the full forward or attractive in ovement of 
the armature. 
With either construction of the locking de 
vice it may be operated by the following mech 
anism. (Best shown in Figs, 1 and 9.) The 
said rock-shaft c (see Fig. 9) is provided with 
a controlling-arm c, which is normally sup 
ported in position to keep the locking devices 
c raised, as shown in Fig. 2, by means of a 
prop c, provided with a preferably slightly 
yielding finger (i, that rests in the teeth of a 
ratehet c', connected with one of the arma 
tures of a clock-work motor or train of wheel 
work shown as actuated by a mainspring g. 
If the projection c on the prop c is thrown 
Out from the teeth of the ratchet, c', the aria 
t;" will drop, permit the rock-shaft c to turn, 
and lower the locks c' to the position shown 
in Figs, 3 and 4; and if the finger c is again 
throw a ii) to engagement with the teeth of the 
ratchet c' and the train of wheel-work is now 
ing the 8, 'm c' will gradually be carried there 
by back to its normal position, raising the 
locks to their normal position, as best shown 
in iFig. 2. 
The motor is so tined that a novernout of 
greater duration than that of any closure in 
the message is required to move the arm c. 
far enough to disengage the locks from their 
Operative relation to the armature and other 
parts represented in Figs. 3 and 4, and, if de 
sired, the arm c" may be loose on the shaft c 
and engage it by means of projections c, so 
that the rock-shaft will be moved only dur 
ing the last part of tile upward Inovement of 
the prop c'. The arm c is also provided with 
a detent c', that engages with a projection c14 
from the governor or balance of the train of 
wheel-work, or otherwise engages with said 
train. So as to stop its movement as the arm c' 
ion c 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
C. 
2: 
4. 
468,473 
5 
 
in being raised by the ratchet arrives at its 
normal position, and so as to permit the trail 
to start the monent the arm is dropped by 
the disengagement of the finger ci and ratchet 
c, as before mentioned. This engagement 
and disengagement of the finger c and the 
ratchet c' is effected by a projection * on 
an arm t from the rock-shaft b, which is 
itself operated by the arm ', (see Fig. 1) en 
gaged by the projection R on the armature 
lever of the relay-magnet R in stuch manner 
that when said armature is retracted the pro 
jection l throws the projection c out from 
the teeth of the ratchet; but when said arma 
ture is attracted it throws it into engagement 
with the said ratchet c, so that as the shaft b 
responds to the movement of the main-cir 
cuit armature the said finger c' will, during 
the transmission of a message, be retained in 
engagement with the ratchet c' only during 
such periods of time as are occupied by the 
closures of the circuit forming part of the 
message, which periods of time are, as before 
stated, too short to bring the locking parts 
back to their normal position, and at the end 
of each closure the finger c is again disen 
gaged, so that the prop drops to its lowest 
position, and it cannot be moved far enough 
to restore the locks to their normal position 
until it has been held in engagement with the 
ratchet a sufficient time by one continuous 
closure of the circuit, which can only occur 
after the message has been completed. The 
projection b engages with the prop l' by 
means of a slot or guide-groove, as shown in 
Fig. 9, so as to permit of the movement of the 
prop with the ratchet, but at the same time 
to control its position as to engagement with 
the ratchet at all times by the movement of 
the arm b. As the closures during the trans 
mission of a signal are usually of very short 
duration, the time required to restore the locks 
to their normal position after the final closure 
of the circuit at the end of a, in essage may be 
made very short, at the end of which time the 
entire instrument Will be restored to the nor 
mal condition ready to respond to a message 
coming in on any line. 
The parts thus far described are all that is 
necessary for the normal operation when all 
the lines are in working condition, and the 
normal operation will be best understood in 
connection with the diagrain, Fig. 15, which 
represents the main-circuit magnet that is 
receiving the message only. The said main 
circuit hay be traced as follows: From one 
terminal of the magnet C by wire 2 out from 
the main station and to the signal-box or 
break-wheels W, by which the linessages are 
to le transmitted, and back to the main office, 
where it connects with one of the members of 
the circuit-closer e'e', operated by the relay 
magnet R, from the other member of which 
circuit-closer the line is completed, a shown 
at 3 to the other terminal of the light Cl, a 
battery being included at any desired point. 
A branch circuit. 5 around the relay-contacts 
ee includes and is controlled by the switch 
S, that is operated by the armature-lock, as 
before stated, said switch being closed for the 
magnet that is responding to a message, as 
shown in the diagram, but being opened fr}: 
all other main-circuit magliets immediat, if 
after the first break of the magnet that is re 
sponding to a signal in its own circuit. Thus 
the circuit-closer corresponding to ee for all 
other circuits will have complete control of 
these circuits, which may thus, respond to the 
movements of the relay-altimature; bit the 
circuit-closer ee of the one circuit in which 
the message is being originally received will 
have no control of that circuit, as the shunt 
'45 will be closed, thus leaving said circuit 
wholly under control of the external trans 
mitter or break-wheel that may be operating. 
The magnet a, in the main circuit in which 
the message is being originally received con 
trols the relay by its contact a' in the local 
circuit, which may be traced as follows: From 
one terminal pf the relay-magnet R by wire 
6 to one member of the circuit-controller (t 
of the first magnet, and from the other mem 
ber thereof by wire 7 to the circuit-controller 
at of the next magnet, and so on, the second 
member of the last circuit-controller a being 
connected by wire S back to the other termi 
nal of the relay. Any one of the circuit-con 
trollers (t may thus control the local relay 
circuit (; 7 S; but as all but one are locked in 
their closed position immediately after a mes 
sage begins the said local circuit remains un 
till completion of a message under control of 
that, one which is not locked. 
it may happen, owing to some derangement 
of some one of the main circuits, that the cor 
responding magnet would remain demagnet 
ized, and, if so, the contact a would remain 
open and the relay-armature in its retracted 
position, which would leave the lock-propping 
device c disengaged from the ratchetc., keep 
ing all the other armatures locked out of op 
erative position, and, furthermore, leaving the 
restoring-motor running continuously until it 
would run down. To avoid such derange 
ment of the repeater, the parts, with the 
xception of the deranged circuit, may be 
automatically restored to normal condition 
ready to operate with all the circuits that are 
in operative condition externally to the re 
peater by the following mechanism: In order 
to l'e - engage the prop-finger c, with the . 
ratchet c', it will be necessary merely to move 
the shaft b to its normal condition, which may 
be done by closing the local circuit of the re 
lay over that one of the circuit-breakers a 
which happens to be open, and to accom 
plish this result the local-circuit wires 67, 
for example, leading from the two members 
of the said circuit-breakers a, may be con 
nected with two members h h' of a normally 
open switch, which may be mounted directly 
upon the armature-levera of each main-cir 
cuit magnet, it constituting the projection a 
thereon before referred to. The said switch 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
95 
och 
o 
I 15 
T 25 
468,478 
O 
5 
is shown in Figs. 1 and 7 as made in the form 
of an elbow-lever, its movable member it hav 
ing an aria is extending laterally to one side 
of the armature-lever, as best shown in Fig. 
. 7, and when said lever is retracted the said 
arm it stands over an arm (l from a rock 
Shaft d, so that if said rock-shaft is turned 
the said arm (I will turn the Switch l8 in the 
direction to close it, and thus complete the 
local relay-circuit around the open point (i. 
A spring h" (see Fig. 7) tends to throw the 
switch open, when the arm (lis again dropped; 
but wiile the armature remains in its re 
tracted position the switch-lever is retained 
in its closed position by a dog or locki, shown 
as pivoted on a support near the armature 
lever and acted upon by a spring it, that tends 
to throw its shoulder into engagement with 
the switch when the latter is moved by the 
arm d' while resting against the arm i. A 
stop limits the movement of the dog i to 
Ward the magnet, so that in case the magnet 
should be energized by the restoration of the 
circuit to the normal condition it will draw 
the Switch h forward out of engagement with 
the lock i, when the spring it' willi snap the 
switch back to its normal position and the 
magnet will be ready to operate in the nor 
inal Way". The rock-shaft (l, that throws the 
Switch when a magnet remains demagnetized, 
as described, has its own movement controllied 
by the Sane motur that restores the arma 
ture-locking devices in the normal operation, 
as before described, and in such manner that 
the said rock-shaft will be moved upward and 
then released after the motor has been running 
for a period of time greater than the longest 
opening of the circuit forming part of a nor 
mal message, and such upward movement will 
cause tile relay to be energized, which in turn 
will throw the finger c into engagement with 
tile ratei et c', and thus after a short addi 
tional interval will raise the locks and stop 
the motor and thus bring the entire repeater 
to normal operative condition. This move 
inent of the rock-shaft d is produced by a 
swinging yoke k, pivoted loosely on one of the 
arbors g of the motor and acted upon by a 
spring , (see Fig. 11,) tending to turn it in 
the opposite direction to that in which the ar 
borg is turning. The said plate is provided 
with a pivoted finger l', adapted to engage 
an arm cloth the rock-shaft d, so that when 
moved by its spring from the position shown 
in Fig. 10 to that shown in Fig. 9 it will swing 
the arin d quickly upward and then release 
it, such movement being sufficient, through 
the action of the arm (l, to throw the switch 
it of any magnet that may be demagnetized, 
as will be understood from i'igs. 2 and 7. The 
finger c is brought to the position below the 
arm d and the spring k is strained or wound 
up the first time that the motor is set in op 
eration during the transinission of a signal 
by means of a ratchet k, turned by one of the 
wheels, as g, of the notor-train or by said 
shaft (f, as will be understood from Figs, 9 
and 11, the said ratchet engaging a pawl is 
on the yoke k, as shown in Fig. 9. The said 
ratchetk', which is represented in section in 
Fig. 11, in which the other parts are shown, in 
front elevation, will the first time that the re 
peater is operated after the yoke has come 
to the position shown in Fig. 9 carry the said 
yoke to the position shown in Fig. 10, in which 
movement a projection k" from the yoke passes 
a pawl ), that is pivoted on the stationary 
frame-work, and which then supports the said 
yoke against the action of its spring k until 
the pawl n is tripped by means which will be 
hereinafter described. Just after the arm k' 
has passed by the pawl in and the latter has 
snapped back beneath the arm k'a projection 
lf from the pawll' comes against a projection 
n from the stationary frame-work, so that the 
further movement of the ratchet and Swinging 
yoke turns the pawl is out from engagement 
with the ratchetic", (shown in dotted lines in 
Fig. 10,) thus leaving the yoke k disengaged 
from the ratchet and supported wholly by the 
engagement of its arm with the pawl in, the 
piate k then remaining in the position shown 
in Fig. 10 until some one of the main-line cir 
cuits remain broken for a greater length of 
time than occurs in the normal transmission 
of a message, after which the said yoke will 
be released by the disengagement of the pawl 
m and will be swung around by the action of 
its spring, and thus operate the rock-shaft d. 
to effect the restoration of the repeater to nor 
mal condition, as before described. The dis 
engagement of the pawl in after such a period 
of time is effected by the following devices 
controlled by the shaft b, which, as before de 
scribed, responds to changes of conditions of 
the main-line circuit. The said shaft b is pro 
vided with an arm N, having spring-fingers 
from a pawl 
n", pivoted on a plate 7', which is mounted 
loosely on the shaft g between the yoke k 
and the ratchet l', as shown in Figs. 10 and 
11. When the shaft b is in the normal con 
dition, as when the main circuits are all 
closed, the arm N causes a lateral projection 
N of the pawl 7 to be disengaged from a 
ratchet o, (shown in section, Fig. 11, and in 
full lines in Fig. 13,) and when the said shaft b 
is in abnormal position, as when any of the 
main-line circuits is opened, it causes the 
said projection in to engage with the ratchet 
o, as shown in Fig. 13. The said ratchet O is 
also loose on the shaft g' and acted upon by 
a light spring o', tending to rotate the ratehet 
in the same direction that the shaft gis turn 
ing, but yielding and being, as it were, wound 
up in case the said ratchet is restrained from 
turning, as by engagement of the pawl n, 
while the shaft g is turning. The said shaft 
is arranged to have a limited movement only 
with relation to the shaft g', at the end of 
which movement it is positively engaged by 
said shaft or some part moving with it. As 
showi in this instance, the wheel g, to Yilic). 
the ratchet it is attached, is provided with a 
that embrace a projection 
3. 5 
40 
o 
75 
95 
do 
IOS 
o 
II5 
12o. 
I 25 
468,478 
7 O 
75 
recess (f, (see Figs. 11 and 14.) into which a 
projection o' from the ratcheto extends. The 
plate 72, upon which the pawl in is pivoted, has 
a projecting portion 
, that normally rests 
between the stationary projection n and an 
arm n', connected with the pawl n, that sup 
ports the arm it", (see Figs. 10 anu 12,) and 
the said pawl in affords a sufficient resistance 
to the movement of the plate m to overcome 
the strength of the spring o, acting on the 
ratchet O, in case the said ratchet o is en 
gaged by the shoulder n of the pawl in. 
Thus any time that the shaft l is turned upon 
the breaking of one of the main circuits, so as 
to throw the pawl projection in into engage 
lment with the ratelhet, o, the said atchet will 
lmerely be prevented from turning for a time, 
and if after a short interval the shaft b should 
be turned back again, as will happen in the 
2o normal operation, the pawl O will be released 
and its spring o will throw it forward to the 
forward limit of the movement which it ha 
independent of the shaft-that is, until the 
pin o' engages the shoulder at the forward 
25 end of the recess g with relation to the di 
rection in which the parts are moving. (In 
dicated by the arrow, Fig. 14.) If, however, 
the projection in should remain in engage 
ment with the pawl O for a considerable pe 
So riod of time-that is, somewhat greatre than 
the longest break in the circuit forming part 
of the normal message-the pawl O would be 
'estrained from turning, until finally the 
shoulder at the other end of the recesses of 
35 would overtake the projection o', as shown 
in Fig. 14, after which the train of wheel 
work would forcibly move the ratchet O and 
with sufficient power to turn the plate , with 
the shaft, until its arm , by acting on the 
4o arm m', would throw the pawl in from beneath 
the arm of the yoke , which would then 
be moved suddenly by its spring from the 
position shown in Fig. 2 to that shown in Fig. 
9 and in such movement would turia the 
45 rock-shaft (l, and thus effect the restoration 
of the repeater to the normal condition, as 
before described. The said plate has a por 
tion k which at the end of said movement 
engages the pawl n, and thus positively dis 
5o engages it from the latchet o, as otherwise 
the frictional hold between the teeth of the 
ratchet and pawl might be too great for the 
spring-fingers in to overcome. The projec 
tion lic of the pawi is also comes against a 
55 somewhat-yielding projection an on the sta 
tionary frame-work and throws the pawl is 
into engagement with the ratchet ic again 
(see Fig. 9) ready to cause the yoke to be set 
back to the position shown in Fig. 10, with its 
6o Spring I wound, upon the next operation of 
the repeater. 
The distance between the shoulders at the 
end of the recess(f, that determines the amount 
of movement that the ratchet O may have in 
65 dependently of the shaft, is such that the 
time of the motor in moving these shoulders 
through the distances between them is greater 
than the longest normal break in any of the 
circuits, so that in the normal operation the 
ratchet G will never be overtaken and posi 
tively engaged with the wheel-work, but will 
at each impulse of a message be reased and 
moved by its spring o' to its forward position. 
So far as the operation of the devices last 
described is concerned, it nakes no difference 
in what manner the rock-shaft d or part moved 
by the yoke k effects the restoration of the 
repeater to its normal condition, and the in 
vention so far as relates to said devices is not 
limited to that construction in which the said 
rock-shaft d operates a switch, as h, on the 
armature-lever of the magnet in the deranged 
circuit. A modification of the meansby which 
the shaft d effects the restoration is repre 
sented in Fig. 8, in which the said shaft dis 
provided with an arm d', having a pin d', 
that engages an arm d', loose on said shaft d. 
and standing at the rear of the main-circuit 
armature-lever a. In this construction the 
rotation of the shaft d moves the arm d' from 
the full to the dotted line position, and in 
said movement, the said arm pushes back the 
armature to its normal position, as shown in 
dotted lines, thus closing the local circuit of 
the relay at a, in case the relay construction 
is adopted, as shown in Figs. 2 and 15. If the 
circuit of the magnet remains open after its 
armature is restored by the arm d', as just 
described, said armature will remain pressing 
back against the said arm and by the fric 
tional pressure against the end thereof will 
retain said arm in dotted-line position, Fig. S, 
mechanically holding the armature in the 
position to close the local circuit of the relay. 
The armature-restoring arm d' does not, how 
ever, carry the armature quite so far forward 
as it is carried by the attraction of the mag 
net, and consequently, although all the arms 
dare moved up when the restoring mechan 
ism operates, only the one which engages and 
restores the armature will remain held in by 
the friction against sid armature. The other 
almatures, being held by the magnetism, will 
not be touched by the arms di, which will 
fall back immediately after the restoring 
movement-that is, the oscillation of the shaft 
d--has taken place. The loose connection of 
the arms d' with the shaft d. permits any one 
to remain in dotted-line position, holding the 
armature of a magnet the circuit of which is 
broken in position to close the local eircuit 
of the relay. It is not, however, essential to the 
operation of the other parts of the apparatus 
that a relay should be used. Instead of this 
construction, each main-circuit armature-le 
ver a might co-operate with an armb' (see Fig. 
8) on the rock-shaftb, which would control the 
motor, the same as before, and would also be 
provided with the contact-carrier e, corre 
sponding to the one e shown in Fig. 1, said 
contact-carrier controlling the contacts ee 
in the several main circuits, which will thus 
be or ened and glosed directly by each move 
ment of the 1stin-circuit armature a that is 
- 
u 
d 
i 25 
90 
95 
od 
Io5 
I Io 
IS 
468,473 
7 
IO 
5 
5 
responding to a message. The restoratio 
last referred to following an abnormally-pro 
longed break in any main circuit night with 
this construction be effected mechanically, as 
shown in . Fig. 7, by having the arm 
en 
gaged by the upwardly-projecting portion at 
of the Switch h, which no longer need perform 
the functions of an electric switch, but which 
in its normal position would engage with the 
projection is on the artin l', as shown in Fig. 
S, causing the said arm to respond to each 
in ovement of the arnature, but which when 
thrown to abuormal position by the action of 
the arti (l, as shown in Fig. 7, would slip lat 
erally away from the projection l', this re 
leasing the arm l' and permitting the shaft 
to be restored to its normal position by the 
iction of its spring ly, Fig. 1. 
It is also true 
that the lock-restoring mechanism-that is, 
the 'atchet c, pro c, and parts operated 
thereby-does not depend for its operation on 
the specific construction of the lock or the 
- ) it it titat controls the mail-circuit arnature. 
Two lechanical modifications of the said lock 
are represented in Figs. 3 and 4 and 5 and (i, re 
spectively; but it is obvious that other modi 
lications night be inade, it being essential only 
that the parts operated by the ratchet cand 
arin (, under control of the shaft l, should be 
Such that when the said sina ft l is noved the 
imagilet which moved it should be retained 
indel' control of its external circuit, while the 
other magnets should be also out of control of 
their circat its external to the repeater, so that 
sail circuits should be controlled wholly by 
the repeater until the first message was coin 
pleted. 
25 
30 
3 5 
S C 
We clain 
1. The combination of a number of nain 
line electro-nagnets, each in a main circuit ill 
tlependent of the others, with a lock actuating 
lai' and a number of locks connected there 
with, one co-operating with the anature of 
each of Said magnets, the said lock-actuating 
bar being controlled by each of said arma 
itles, as described, the said locks being moved 
3.lpon the retraction of any one of the said 
armatures and retaining all except the arma 
tire which was retracted in normal position 
for a predetermined period of time after said 
movement, at the end of which period said 
lock-actuating bar is moved and unlocks all 
the arimatures, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
3. The comination of a number of natin 
line electro-imagnets, each in a main circuit in 
dependent of the others, with locks for the 
arnatures of Said magnets, connected to oper 
auto Siin ultaneously, a motor and detent the re 
for, and lock support or prop adapted to be 
engaged with and disengaged from said no 
to and when So engaged to restore the locks 
to inorinal condition by its novelinent derived 
from Said motor, and intermediate mechan 
isin between said prop and the armatures, 
whereby Said prop is disengaged from the no 
tor when any arimature moves from its nor 
o 
5 
mal condition and is engaged there with when 
said armature returns to its normal position, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a number of main 
line electro-magnets, each in a main circuit ill 
dependent of the others, with locks for the 
a "matures of the said magnets, connected to 
operate simultaneously, a notor and detent, 
therefor, and lock support or prop adapted to 
be engaged with and disengaged from said mo 
tor and when so engaged to restore the locks. 
to normal condition by its movement derived. 
from said notor, and intermediate mechan 
ism between said prop and the armatures, 
whereby said prop is disengaged from the nor 
tor when any armature moves fron its nor 
inai position and is engaged there with when 
said armature returns to its normal position, 
and a restorer controlled by said niotor and 
ar natures, as described, said restorer being 
called into action only after one of the ai'na 
tures as remained in abnormal position a pre 
determined period of tinae and then operat 
ing to effect the engagement of the lock-il'op 
with the motor, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of a number of inlin 
line electro-magniets, each in a main circuit in 
dependent of the others, and a series of cir 
cuit-breakers, one in each of said main cir 
cuits, and the entire series being controlled 
by the movement of any one of said arma 
tures, with a second circuit-closer in multiple 
are with eitch of said main-line-circuit closer's 
controlled by said armatures, as described, 
being closed in that one only of said main 
circuits in which a signal is being transmitted 
from an external station, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
5. The combination of a number of main 
line magnets and locks co-operating there 
with, as described, with the motor and ratchet 
operated thereby and the projection co-oper 
ating with said ratchet as desc bed, to con 
trol the position of said locks, and being 
itself controlled as to engagement with Said 
ratchet by any one of said magnets, substan 
tially as described. 
6. The combination of a number of main 
line electro-magnets and locks co-operating 
there with with a motor and detent therefor, 
as c, operatively connected with said locks, 
and a prop or support for said detent, as c, 
which when disengaged from said motor re 
leases the detent therefor and throws the 
locks into operation, and intermediate mech 
anism between said prop and the armatures 
of the said imagnets, whereby the said prop 
is disengaged from the motor when any ar 
mature is moved from its normal position and 
is engaged there with when said armature re 
turns to its normal position, substantially as 
described. 
7. The combination of a number of inaiia 
line magnets and several circuit-closers in 
tile several circuits thereof operated by any 
one of said magnets, as described, with the 
spring-actuated yoke land its retaining pawl 
OO 
to5 
I c. 
II 5 
125 
I 30 
468,473 
- 
or slipport 11, the releasilig-arm for said sup- with a rock-shaft c, connected with said locks, 
a motor and arm connected with said rock- 45 
port, and ratehet and pawl for operating the 
shaft, and a prop for said arm operated by 
saine, the said ratchet having a limited movc 
said motor, as described, the engagement of 
ment independently of sail motor, at the end 
the prop with the motor being controlled by 
-Qf which movement it is positively engaged 
5 
any one of said main-circuit magnets, sub 
by Said motor, and the engagement of said 
stantially as described. 
'atchet with its pawl being effected by any of 
12. The eonbination of a number of main 
said a 'matures when in abnormal position, 
line electro-magnets, each in the main circuit 
substantially as described. 
independent of the others, with a lock-actuat 
8. The coubination of the clock-work or 
ing bar and a timber of locks connected the re 
lmotor and spring impelled yokel, and latehet 
with for the armature of said magnets, said 55 
and pawl by which said yoke is novel against 
lock-actuating bar being controlled by each 
the stress of its spring, the holding pawl or 
of said arnatures, as lescribed, operating all 
detent for retaining said yoke, with its in 
the locks simultaneously, and a number of in 
pelling-spring strained, a projection for dis 
dependently-movable armature-restorers, as 
engaging the pawl from the ratchet when the 
l, one corresponding to the armature of each 6o 
yoke is So held, and the trip for disengaging 
of said nagnets, and an actuator common to 
the said detent from said yoke, substantially 
all said armature-restorers, substantially as 
as aid for the purpose described. 
described. 
9. The combination of a number of main 
13. The combination of a number of main 
circuit Inhagnets in independent main circuits, 
circuit magleis and amatures therefor with 65 
with a relay and local circuit therefor, and 
a nutmber of armature-restorers (land acu 
circuit-breakers controlled by the several 
ating rock-shaft d therefor, said restorers be 
inain-circuit ragnets and arranged in series 
ing loosely connected with said shaft and the 
in Said local circuit, as described, and in de 
latter having connected there with parts that: 
le: ident circuit-closers in said local circuit at 
engage said restorers a ind move the same posi- 7o 
teach main-circuit magnet, adapted to be oper 
tively in the direction to engage any armature 
ated to close said local circuit when the ei'- 
that may be retracted and move the salme to 
(lit. breaker controlled by the corresponding 
ward its attracted position, said restorer re 
i}laghet l'emains in abnormal position beyond 
maining in frictional eragagement with the 
a predetermined period of time, substantially 
armature as long as the latter remains unat- 75 
tracted by the magnet, substantially as de 
i0. The combination of a number of main 
circuit magnets with a stationary projection 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
f' at the rear of the several arnature-levers 
names to this specification in the presence of 
tiereof, a rock-shaft, c, and locking device c, 
two subscribing witnesses. 
connected there with and co-operating with 
said arnature-levers and stationary projec 
tions, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
1. The combination of a number of mail 
circuit magnets and aranatures therefor and 
locks co-operating therevith, as described, 
MOSES G. CRANE, 
FREDERCK W. C(), E. 
.JOS. l. IV ERAIORE, 
M. E. ITILL. 
Witnesses: 
:as described. 
- 
. 
- 
- 
40 
TO 
2d 
2 5 
3. C 
3 w 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468573.txt	(No Model.) 
H. D. MILLETT 
SPRING COILING MACHINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 468,573, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
2z/2-esses. 
Zz- 
a & -6-6-22 
 
Za- a? ez-a 2fa 7. 
2% 
-72.2%ay Z-7& Z/e/7 
2a-f 12727-2-ce2/s. 
(No Model.) 
H. D. MILLETT. 
SPRING COILING MACHINE. 
5 sheets-sheet 2. 
No. 468,573, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
 
 
HIH 
Zzzesses. 
& 6-6-2 
2 2 
w 
a 24&zy 
t 
s 
ZS 
27 
Zzz z/ez-z Zer. 
7-a-2 ZZee221 
12 as 12zer?-6%s. 
1val-CS- Viece oe-?c 
hull. 
6-7, 
(No Model.) 
H. D. MILLETT, 
SPRING COILING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 468,573, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
 
%.sy 
/z1724.2%-Z 727 ZZeaz 
- 43r Duala &vat--week 
12 as /zza2-zee-s. 
(No Model.) 
H. D. MILLETT. 
SPRING COILING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 468,573, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
 
 
E 
se 
 
LEI 
E. 
E. es e 
 
s E 
O 
7, 
O 
r 
-2-0tuv Day,64-2-5 video cle 
- Z to a z/e7-z 2/2 2. 
y 9 
1 77-22 22- 2. 7222ezzf 
7 
2zis aa or 27 eras, 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 468,573, 
H. D. MILLETT, 
SPRING COILING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
 
 
SS 2S 
s t 
-- . . 
. m r - - m 
 
 
ze 12 ------- 
T. 
2 Z6 
2 
  
7/z z-resses: 
(2%ls 
2% 
Z722 ez-z Z?a 2 
- zy Wrest (a 4.8 verta -4-ee-4- 
72 2s-102-7 cee-st 
The NORRIS PETERS co., photo-Litho, washinson, i.e. 
H 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
IIUMPHRY D. MILLETT, OF MAYWOOD, ASSIGNOR TO CHARLES II. FERRY, 
. 
OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
SPRING-Co LING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,578, dated February 9, 1892. 
Application filed May 4, 1891, Serial No. 391,513, (No model.) 
Io around a mandrel to form coil-springs. 
To all, Luhon it nucly concern: 
Beit known that I, HUMPHRY D. MILLETT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in 
Maywood, in the county of Cook and State of 
5 Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Spring - Coiling Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
machines for coiling heated bars of metal 
My improved spring-coiling machine is spe 
cially designed for coiling the bars used in the 
manufacture of car-springs. After the hot bar 
is coiled around the forming-mandrel the con 
15 traction of the metal by cooling and the scale 
which is formed tend to cause the coil-spring 
to stick to the mandrel around which it is 
formed, and it has heretofore been a difficult 
and somewhat slow operation to remove the 
2 o spring from the mandrel. Heretofore this 
has usually been done by a Workman with a 
hammer or other instrument striking blows 
against the spring to loosen and remove it. 
As the coils of the spring are usually still at 
25 a red heat and the metal soft or easily bent, 
the coils of the spring are frequently bent 
out of shape or distorted in the act of re 
moving, so that it is necessary to straighten 
the coils up by hand. Heretofore, also, the 
go spring-coiling n)achine has usually left the 
extreme end of the bar projecting out tan 
gentially, and it has been customary to coil 
or bend this projecting end into shape by 
hand after the spring has been removed from 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
spring-coiling machine for operating upon hot 
bars which will be of a simple, efficient, and 
durable construction, which will operate to 
4o remove the coil-spring from the mandrel all 
tomatically and expeditiously and without 
disturbing the relative position of the coils 
or distorting the shape of the spring, and 
whereby the whole bar may be coiled with 
45 out leaving any uncoiled or projecting end, 
and whereby, also, the coils may beformed at 
any desired pitch, and whereby, too, the first 
and last coils of the spring may be formed at 
right angles to the axis of the mandrel, so 
5o that the spring will have square ends or bases 
and rest properly upon its support. 
35 the mandrel of the coiling-machine. 
My invention consists in the combination, 
with a revolving mandrel around which the 
hot bar is coiled, of a clamping-jaw mounted 
upon and revolving with the mandrel for 55 
clamping the end of the bar to the mandrel, 
a movable support for holding the free or 
stationary end of the bar as it is coiled, and 
mechanism for stopping the revolving man 
drel at a certain point, so that the end of the 6o 
bar may be inserted between the clamping 
jaw and the mandrel at the beginning of th 
operation. 
It also consists, in combination with the re 
volving mandrel around which the bar is 65 
coiled, of a pair of opposing rollers arranged 
on opposite sides of the mandrel for support 
ing the free end of the mandrel and coiling 
down upon the mandrel the final end of the 
bar or spring, which otherwise would be left 7o 
projecting tangentially. 
It also consists, in combination with the 
coiling-mandrel, of a pair of extractor-jaws 
for removing the spring from the mandrel, 
having teeth or projections adapted to fit be- 75 
tween the coils of the spring, so as to keep 
the separate coils in place in respect to each 
other during the operation of removing the 
spring from the mandrel. 
revolving mandrel around which the hot bar 
is coiled, of a support for the free end of the 
bar and adjustable mechanism for moving 
this support, so that the pitch of the spring 
may be adjusted at will, and springs having 85 
coils of different pitch formed upon the same 
machine. 
It further consists in the combination of the 
revolving mandrel, the support for the free 
end of the bar, and mechanism whereby the 9o 
movement of this support is caused to begin 
after the first coil or a portion thereof has been 
formed and to cease prior to the formation 
of the last coil, so that the first and last coils 
of the spring may be formed parallel to each 95 
other while the intermediate coils are spiral, 
and in mechanism whereby the relative points 
of stopping and starting the movement of this 
support may be adjusted or varied, as re 
quired, to produce springs of different sizes Ioo 
or forms upon the same machine. 
It further consists, in combination with the 8o 
It further consists in the novel devices and 
- 
O 
, 
. 
468,578 
2 
novel combinations of parts and devices by any suitable mechanism. I prefer, how 
ever, to mount them on a pivot or shaft d. 
herein shown and described, and more par 
The arm D may be secured rigidly to the ro 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
tatable pivot or shaft d, and the stop D' 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
mounted loosely on the pivot dand connected 
a part of this specification and in which simi 
by a spring d with the arm D, so that the 
lar letters of reference indicate like parts, 
movement of the arm D will also move the 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a spring-coiling 
stop device D'. The stop D' may preferably 
machine embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
extend through an opening or notch d in the 
a partial plan view. Fig. 3 is a vertical cross 
pusher D. By thus providing a spring or 
section taken on line 33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 
yielding connection between the pusher D 
is a detail view of a clutch, hereinafter de 
and stop D' the projecting stop D will not 
scribed. Fig. 5 is a detail view of a movable 
prevent or interfere with the proper move 
device for pushing the first end of the spring 
ment of the pusher D in pushing the bar X. 
bar into position and of the clamping-jaw of 
into place against the shoulderb of the man 
the mandrel to insure the proper clamping of 
drel. 
the end of the bar to the mandrel. Fig. 6 is 
E is the movable support or guide by which 
a cross-section on line 6 6 of Fig. 1. Fig. 7 is 
the free end of the bar X is held and guided 
a detail plan view showing the mechanism for 
during the coiling operation and by which this 
stopping the mandrel at a certain point. Fig. 
free end of the bar is moved longitudinally or 
8 is a detail end view of the machine, show 
in the direction of the mandrel to give the 
ing the mechanism for communicating mo 
proper pitch to the intermediate coils of the 
tion to the cam-shaft. Figs. 9 and 10 are de 
spring, as desired. This movable support E 
tail views showing the mechanism for oper 
is preferably furnished with rolls E'E', be 
ating the clamping-jaw, by which the end of 
; the bar is clamped to the revolving mandrel. 
tween which the bar X passes. The movable 
support E is secured to a longitudinal slide F, 
In the drawings, A represents the frame of 
which moves back and forth in suitable guides 
the machine. 
a on the frame of the machine. To diminish 
B is the revolving mandrel around which 
the friction of the slide Fits guides a are pref. 
the bar X is coiled to form the spring. The 
erably furnished with or made in the form of 
mandrel B is journaled in suitable bearings 
friction-rollers a'. In order to readily adjust 
B' on the frame of the machine. 
or vary the movement of the slide F, I com 
C is the movable clamping-jaw, by which 
municate motion to it through a transverse 
the end of the bar is clamped to the mandrel 
slide G, which reciprocates in suitable guides 
during the coiling operation. This jaw C is 
a on the frame of the machine, and which is 
carried by and revolves with the mandrel and 
provided with an adjustable inclined bar or 
has an operating-lever c, which Works in a 
guide g, which impinges against a projection 
slot b in the hollow portion of the mandrel B. 
or friction-roller f on the longitudinal slide F, 
The lever c is pivoted at c' to the projection 
and thus communicates to the slide F and sup 
or lug b' formed upon the mandrel B. The 
port E a greater or less movement, according 
mandrel B is also furnished with a shoulder 
to the particular inclination of the adjustable 
b adjacent to the ciamping-jaw C. This 
guide g. The adjustable guide or barg has 
shoulder or collar b* serves as a guide to po 
a pivoted part g', which may be fixed in po 
sition the end of the bar on the mandrel at 
sition on the guide-holder gparallel to the 
the beginning of the coiling operation and as 
direction of motion of the slide G, so that 
a guide for the first coil of the spring, which 
when the roller f strikes against this parallel 
is or should be formed at right angles to the 
portion of the guide-bar the further movement 
axis of the mandrel. The shoulder band the 
of the slide F will cease, though the slide G 
hollow portion b of the mandrel may prefer 
may continue to move. This is for the pur 
ably be formed in a separate piece from the 
pose of forming the last coil of the spring 
solid portion of the mandrel around which 
without any pitch or at right angles to the 
the spring is coiled. The clamp C, or its le 
axis of the coiling-mandrel. The guide-holder 
verc, is opened and closed through a connect 
g is pivoted at g to the slide G and is fixed 
ing rod or link c, which extends out through 
in position at any desired angle by a clamp 
the hollow portion b of the mandrel. 
screw or botg', which passes through a slotg 
D is a movable device or pusher by which 
in the slide G. The roller fis adjustably fixed 
the end of the bar is pushed snugly against 
to the slide F by a pivot-boltf', which passes 
the shoulder b of the mandrel and under the 
through a slot f in the slide F. The guide or 
clamping-jaw C, and D is a movable stop 
support E for the spring-baris also adjustably 
against which the end of the bar X projects, 
fixed to the slide F by means of the slotif, and 
and by which the position of the bar longi 
the guide-rollers on the support E may like 
tudinally is regulated in respect to the clamp 
Wise be adjusted up or down by means of the 
ing-jaw and mandrel. The pusher D and stop 
sliding blocks E and set-screws E8. 
D' are both made movable, So that they may 
H H are a pair of movable rollers mounted 
be swung or moved out of the Way of the 
spring as it is coiled around the mandrel. upon opposite sides of the mandrel B to sup 
They may be mounted movably in any suit port the free end of the mandrel and to wind 
able manner and moved in and out of position or curve down the final end of spring-bar X 
55. 
63 
3o 
35 
45 
7 O 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
468,573 
IO 
15 
25 
30 p. 
35 
40 
45 
as the coiling-mandrel revolves. These mov 
able rollers HH may preferably be supported 
or mounted upon the arms of movable le 
vers H' H, which are actuated by cams h. h. 
on the cam-shaft K. The lever II* is oper 
ated directly by its cam h, and the lever H' 
is operated indirectly by its cam through the 
intermediate lever hand connecting-linkh. 
The spring, after it is coiled upon the man 
drel, is automatically removed therefrom by 
means of a pair of opening and closing ex 
tracting-jaws M. M., having projecting teeth 
or notches in to fit between the coils of the 
spring, so as to hold the separate coils in po 
sition during the operation of removing the 
spring from the mandrel. These extractor 
jaws M M are preferably mounted upon and 
carried by a slide M', which reciprocates in 
suitable guides M on the frame of the ma 
chine. The extractor-jaws Maremovably con 
nected to the slide M', and preferably in such 
way that they may have a straight or paral 
lel opening and closing movement in respect 
to each other. To effect this I prefer to op 
erate each jaw M by a pair of bent levers m' 
na, so that the means or devices employed for 
communicating motion to the slide M' may 
also serve to open and close the jaws MM at 
the proper time. To effect this I connect the 
airs of levers m' m together by a pivoted 
link n, and connect the operating-lever M8 
with these pivoted links by means of a T 
shaped connecting-link M'. The links mare 
furnished with friction-rollers no to receive 
between them the branches of the T-link M. 
The operating-lever M is pivoted at M to the 
frame of the machine and is actuated by a 
cam M on the cam-shaft K. Motion is com 
municated to the revolving mandrel B from 
the driving-shaft N by means of a gear B 
keyed to the mandrel and a loose gear N' on 
the driving-shaft N which has a clutch-face 
n, and is at proper intervals clutched to the 
driving-shaft by a clutch in thereon actuated 
by the clutch-sleeve in through the connect 
ing-collar n, bent lever n, and cam in on the 
cam-shaft K. Motion is communicated from 
the driving-shaft N to the cam-shaft K, while 
the mandrel is not being revolved, by means 
of a clutch-face on the sleeve in, which en 
gages a corresponding clutch in on the face 
of a loose gear on the driving shaft, which 
meshes with a gear K' on the cam-shaft K, 
and a slow motion is communicated from the 
driving-shaft to the cam-shaft while the man 
drel is being revolved, by means of a spur 
gear in on the driving-shaft N, which meshes 
with a flat or disk faced gear n' on a coun 
ter-shaft n, which is furnished with a worm 
n1, which meshes with teeth in of a partial 
or mutilated gear n' on the cam-shaft K. In 
order to adjust or vary the length of time 
that the mandrel is revolved for the coiling 
of each spring, and thus the number of coils 
or the length of the spring, the flat-faced or 
disk gear no is furnished with a number of 
rows of teeth n, and the gear in is made ad-i end of the mandrel-sleeve U". 
justable on the driving-shaft by means of a 
set-screw m, so that the worm-shaft a may 
revolve at a greater or less speed. 
In order to stop the revolution of the man 
drel B at a fixed point, so that the clamping 
jaw C will be in proper position relative to 
the guide or support E, through which the 
spring-bar X is fed to the mandrel, I provide 
75 
a device or mechanism for arresting the mo-. 
tion of the mandrel and overcoming its mo 
mentum and that of its connecting-gearing 
after it is unclutched from the driving-shaft. 
This motion-arresting device may be of any 
suitable construction known to those skilled 
in the art. That which I prefer to employ 
consists in providing the driving-gear N' with 
a cam or wedge R, which impinges against a 
pivoted lever R', pivoted to an arm R on the 
pivot or rock-shaft R, to which the two arms 
of the clutch-operating lever nare connected. 
This lever R' carries a sliding block R', which 
reciprocates in suitable guides on the frame 
of the machine and has a projection r 
adapted to engage a cam or projection r" on 
the cam-shaft K. As long as the clutch n' is 
engaged with the clutch on the face of the 
mandrel-driving gear N' the cam R. on the 
gear N' will simply cause the lever R' to slide 
the block R. loosely up and down, a spring 
R returning the block and lever to position, 
but the moment the clutch in n' is disengaged 
the rock-shaft R is rocked, throwing up the 
arm R, and the cam or projection risbrought 
under the lip r" on the block R', so that the 
two pivotal points of the lever R' become 
fixed, and as the cam or wedge R engages the 
roller r on the end of the lever R', the motion 
of the gear N' and of the mandrel connected 
there with will be arrested, the momentum of 
the parts being overcome by the wedging ac 
tion of the cam against the lever R'. 
The shaft d, by which the pusher D and 
stop D are operated, is actuated by a cam di 
on the cam-shaft K. 
The transverse slide G, through which mo 
tion is communicated to the movable sup 
port E, is operated from the driving-shaft by 
means of a rack gon said slide, which meshes 
with a pinion g on an upright shaft g', which 
carries a worm-gear 9", that meshes with a 
worm go on the driving-shaft. The worm 
gear g' is clutched to its shaft by means of a 
clutch g, which is operated by an arm gon 
a rock-shaft g', having an arm g, which en 
gages a camg on the cam-shaft K. The 
slide G is retracted by means of a cam git, 
which engages a pivoted arm or leverg, the 
upper end of which is connected by a linkg is 
with a bracket or lugg', secured to the slide 
G. The clamping-jaw C or its operating-rod 
c is actuated by a cam c' on the cam-shaft 
K through a lever c, pivoted to the bracket 
c, and which is connected by a link c' with a 
cam-faced link c, pivoted at c to the rod c, 
and the cam-face of which impinges against 
a roller c, journaled on the collar c0 on the 
95 
II5 
I 25 
OO 
IO 
468,573 
O 
15 
25 
40 
55 
In operation the end of the spring-bar X 
is fed through the guide or support E. So that 
its end projects against the stop D'. The 
swinging movement of the pusher B then 
crowds or pushes the end of the bar against 
the shoulder t of the mandrel and under the 
clamping-jaw C. The clamping-ja W C then 
closes upon the end of the bar and the coil 
ing-mandrel begins to revolve until one coil 
or one partial coil is formed around the man 
drel. At this time the guide-bar g on the 
transverse slide G comes in contact with the 
roller fon the longitudinal slide F, and causes 
this slide to move slowly forward, producing 
the required pitch in the intermediate coils 
of the spring. When the intermediate coils 
have been formed, the longitudinal slide F 
will have moved forward until the roller f 
will strike the straight or parallel portion g 
of the guide-barg. As the mandrel continues 
to revolve, the final coil of the spring will 
thus be wound parallel to the first coil or at 
right angles to the axis of the mandrel. Dur 
ing the final portion of the coiling operation 
the rollers H H are closed upon the spring, 
thus flattening or curving down upon the 
mandrel the projecting end of the bar. In 
the meantime the extractor-jaws advance into 
position to close upon this spring, and when 
the coiling is finished and the rollers H II 
opened or removed the extractor-jaws by the 
receding movement of the slide MI' remove 
the finished spring from the mandrel. 
nation, with the revolving mandrel, of a mov 
able roller for coiling or bending the final end 
of the spring down upon the mandrel, substan 
tially as specified. 
S. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with a revolving mandrel, of a pair of 
opposing roller's H.H and cams and levers for 
operating the same, substantially as specified. 
9. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with a revolving mandrel, of a roller 
for pressing down the final end of the spring, 
means for withdrawing the roller from the 
mandrel after the Spring is coiled, and means 
for extracting the spring from the mandrel, 
substantially as specified. 
10. The combination, in a spring-coiling 
machine, of a revolving mandrel around 
which the spring is coiled, and an extractor 
device consisting of a pair of opening and 
closing jaws furnished with teeth or projec 
tions to fit between the coils of the springs, 
substantially as specified. 
1. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with a revolving mandrel, of a pair of 
spring-extractor jaws having teeth" or projec 
tions adapted to fit between the coils of the 
spring, a reciprocating slide upon which said 
jaws are mounted, a lever for reciprocating 
said slide, and mechanism connecting said 
lever with said opening and closing jaws, so 
that the forward movement of the slide will 
open the jaws and the withdrawing move 
ment of the slide close the jaws, substan 
tially as specified. 
12. In a Spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with the mandrel, of a driving-shaft 
and a cam-shaft, a clutch and gearing for 
connecting the mandrel with the driving 
shaft, a clutch and gearing connecting the 
driving-shaft with the cam-shaft when the 
mandrel is dis?onnected or unclutched, and a 
Worm and gearing connecting the driving 
shaft With the cam-shaft when the mandre is 
also in gear with the driving-shaft, substan 
tially as specified. 
13. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with the mandrel, of a driving-shaft 
and a cam-shaft, a clutch and gearing for 
connecting the mandrel with the driving 
shaft, a clutch and gearing connecting the 
driving-shaft with the cam-shaft when the 
mandrel is disconnected or unclutched, and a 
Worm and gearing connecting the driving 
shaft with the cam-shaft when the mandrel is 
also in gear with the driving-shaft, said lat 
ter gearing being furnished with means for 
increasing or decreasing the relative speed of 
the cam-shaft in respect to the mandrel, sub 
Stantially as specified. 
14. The combination, with the revolving 
mandrel, of a movable support for the free end 
of the spring mounted upon a longitudinal 
slide, and a transverse slide for communicat 
ing motion thereto, having an adjustably in 
clined bar or guide engaging a projection or 
roller on the longitudinal slide, whereby the 
7. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi- movement of the longitudinal slide and the 
I claim 
1. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi-. 
nation, with the revolving mandrel, of an 
opening and closing jaw mounted thereon, 
and a support or guide for holding the free 
end of the bar, substantially as specified. 
2. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with the revolving mandrel, of a mov 
able clamping-jaw for clamping the end of 
the bar to the revolving mandrel, and a stop 
for the end of the bar to project against as it 
is fed between the clamping-jaw and man 
drel, substantially as specified. 
3. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with a revolving mandrel, of a clamp 
ing-jaw and a device for pushing the end of 
the bar into position under the clamping-jaw, 
substantially as specified. 
4. The combination, with a revolving man 
drel, of a clamping-jaw, a movable device for 
pushing the end of the bar under the jaw, and 
a movable stop for the end of the bar to pro 
ject against, substantially as specified. 
5. The combination, with a revolving man 
drel, of a movable clamping-jaw C, a pusher 
D, and a stop D', having a Spring or yielding 
connection with said pusher D and projecting 
through the same, substantially as specified. 
6. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with the revolving mand rel, of a pair 
of movable rollers for rolling down the final 
end of the Spring-bar and Supporting the man 
drel, substantially as specified. 
. 
75 
95 
Iod 
Io5 
IO 
15 . 
I 25 
468,578 
5 
consequent pitch of the spring may be ad 
justed or varied, substantially as specified. 
15. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with the revolving mandrel, of a mov 
able support for the free end of the spring 
and adjustable mechanism for communicat 
ing motion to said support, substantially as 
specified. 
16. In a spring-coiling machine, the combi 
nation, with a revolving mandrel around 
which the spring is coiled, of a clamping-jaw 
for clamping the end of the bar to the revolv 
O 
ing mandrel, a movable support for holding 
the bar as it is coiled around the mandrel, 
and mechanism for stopping the revolving I5 
mandrel at a certain point, so that the bal 
may be inserted between the jaw and the 
mandrel at the beginning of the operation, 
substantially as specified. 
HUMPHRY D. MILLETT. 
Witnesses: 
H. M. MUNDAY, 
EDMUND ADCOCK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468673.txt	(No Model.) 
H. F. MANN, 
RAILROAD WELOCIPEDE, 
No. 468,673, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
 
20 
A. -- 
, 27 
7. 
Ri 
29 3 
golf 39. 
ity 
HESEE. F. 
Cliffs, a lotsFit- (g) 
 
 
 
27.4. 
27 
w 
-2 (741. 
- 341?ue 11to 
III, 74. A 
the 
4, 9.4%a 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY F. MANN, OF AILEGIIENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAILROADVELOCIPEDE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,673, dated February 9, 1892. 
Application filed September 4, 1891, Serial No. 404,763, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY F. MANN, of Al 
legheny, county of Allegheny, and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Railroad-Velocipedes, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
railroad-velocipedes or hand-cars, and has 
reference more particularly to the driving 
Inlechanism for the same. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
driving-gear operated by a hand-lever or by 
equivalent means which will occupy little 
Space, and through the medium of which the 
power exerted may be most advantageously 
applied to propel the car. 
To this end the invention consists of a driv 
ing-gear composed of a stationary internally 
toothed frame, a gear-wheel carried by an arm 
fixed to a rotary shaft connected to the oper 
ating-lever, said gear-wheel meshing with the 
stationary frame and also a pinion fixed to 
the driving-wheel of the car. 
The invention also consists in an improved 
manner of mounting the operating-lever so 
that it may be connected to the driving-gear 
On both sides of the car. 
It further consists in the details of construc 
tion and combinations of parts hereinafter de 
Scribed and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
l'epresents a side elevation of a railroad-ve 
locipede with my invention embodied there 
Fig. 2 is a top plan view of the same, with 
ll. 
portions in section, on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse vertical section of the 
same on the line y if. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents the 
frame of the car, which may be of any form 
adapted to sustain the operative parts herein 
after described. As here represented, the 
frame consists of two horizontal bars 2 and 
13, between which are secured at intervals 
cross-pieces (30. The frame is sustained by 
the front wheel 3 and rear driving-wheel 4, 
mounted in suitable bearings therein, and by 
a guide-wheel 5, journaled in suitable bear 
ings on the outer end of a transverse arm 6, 
having its inner end bolted or otherwise at 
tached to the frame. Over the rear wheel the 
frame is provided with a seat 7, sustained by 
standards 8, bolted to the bars. Rests 9, at 
tached to the outer sides of the frame, are 
provided for the operator's feet. 
The foregoing parts may be of any suitable 
construction and in themselves form no part 
of the present invention, except in so far as 
hereinafter indicated. 
Referring to the driving-gear, 10 represents 
an internally-toothed frame formed with ra 
dial arms 11, extending from a central hub 12. 
This frame is located between the two bars 2 
and 13 at the rear of the car, and is attached 
to the bar 13 by means of bolts 14, extending 
through it and through plates 15 and 16, 
formed on the frame between the radial arms. 
These plates are provided with lateral ears 
17 and 18, between which the bars extend. 
The hub 12 extends outward from the toothed 
frame and forms one bearing for the shaft 19. 
This shaft extends horizontally across the car 
below the bars and is mounted in another 
bearing 20, bolted to the under side of the bar 
2. At its ends the shaft is provided with 
crank-arms 21, to which an operating-lever 22 
is connected, as hereinafter more fully de 
scribed. An arm 23 is connected to the shaft 
19 and carries at its outer end a gear-wheel 
24, mounted loosely on a stud 25 projecting 
from the arm. The gear-wheel 24 is so ar 
ranged that it meshes with the teeth on the 
frame 6, and with a central pinion 26, fixed to 
the hub of the driving-wheel 4. This wheel, 
as shown, is mounted loosely on the shaft 19 
and is provided with the annular laterally 
extending tread 27, which incloses the gear 
ing, as more fully described hereinafter. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that if the shaft 19 is revolved the gear 
wheel carried by arm 23 thereon will be ro 
tated owing to its engagement with the 
toothed frame and Will impart a rotary mo 
tion to the central pinion 26 and the driving 
wheel to which said pinion is attached. Ow 
ing to this arrangement of the gearing the 
driving-wheel will be caused to revolve upon 
the driving-shaft at a speed due to and re 
sulting from the proportionate number of 
teeth in the toothed frame and the central 
pinion attached to the hub of the driving 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
468,673 
75 
wheel, and also one additional revolution of 
the driving-wheel due to each revolution of 
the arm carrying the gear-wheel and attached 
to the driving-shaft. It is to be noted that 
the central crank-shaft not only carries the 
arin on which the gear-wheel for driving the 
central pinion is journaled, but serves in ad 
dition as the axis for the driving-wheel. This 
I deem of importance, inasmuch as it enables 
me to effect a compact and neat arrangement 
of the gearing entirely within the tread of the 
driving-wheel, as plainly shown, thereby per 
mitting the pitmen from the operating-lever 
to be carried all the way back to the axis of 
the driving-wheel, thus avoiding the necessity 
of a train of gearing extending beyond the 
driving-wheel, as has been the practice here 
tofore. 
The operating-lever 22 referred to consists 
of two upright bars 28, connected at their up 
per ends by a cross-piece 29, forming a han 
dle, and bolted at their lower ends to the frame 
30. This frame is provided at its upper end 
with a horizontal shaft 31, seated in bearings 
32, bolted to the upper sides of the bars be 
tween the front and rear wheels. At its lower 
end the frame is provided with outwardly 
projecting studs 33, upon which the forward 
ends of pitmen 34 are loosely mounted, the 
rear ends of which are pivoted upon the crank 
arms 21. The frame 30 is of such form and 
the upright bars are so applied thereto that 
the frame and bars extend between the bars 
2 and 13, as shown in Fig. 3. 
To enable the operator to use his feet to 
assist in the propulsion of the car, I extend 
from the studs 33, pitmen 35, and pivot their 
forward ends to the lower ends of links 36, 
journaled at their upper ends in bearings 37 
on the frame. The links are provided near 
theirlower ends with foot-pieces 38, as shown. 
While I have described the machine as be 
ing operated by the connections extending 
on both sides of the same, it is to be under 
stood that it may be driven by one set of con 
nections only and that the devices for driv 
ing it with the feet may be entirely omitted. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The combination, with the main frame 
of the driving-wheel journaled therein, the 
pinion fixed to said wheel, the internally 
toothed stationary frame, the driving-shaft, 
the arm carried thereby, and the gear-wheel 
carried by the arm, said gear-wheel adapted 
to engage the toothed frame, and the pinion 
on the driving-wheel, substantially as de 
2. The combination, with the main frame, 
of the driving-wheel, the driving-shaft on 
which said wheel is mounted to revolve, the 
central pinion fixed to the wheel, the inter 
nally-toothed frame, the arm mounted on the 
driving-shaft, and the gear-wheel on said arm, 
arranged to engage the toothed frame and 
the central pinion. 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with the main frame 
and the internally-toothed frame fixed thereto 
and provided with a hub, of the driving-shaft 
journaled at one end in said hub and at its 
opposite end in a bearing on the frame. 
4. The combination, with the driving-wheel 
provided with the laterally-extending tread, 
of the driving-gear located within said tread. 
5. The combination, with the driving-shaft, 
of the driving-wheel provided with the hub 
mounted to turn loosely on said shaft, the 
internally-toothed frame fixed to the main 
frame of the car and provided with a hub in 
which the driving-shaft is mounted, the pin 
ion fixed to the hub of the driving-wheel, the 
arm fixed on the driving-shaft between the 
two hubs, and the gear-wheel carried by the 
2. 
6. The combination, with the main frame, 
of the frame 30, journaled at its upper end 
thereon and provided at its lower end with 
studs 33, the upright bars secured to Said 
frame 30, and suitable connections between 
the studs and the operative parts of the ma 
chine. 
7. The combination, in a railroad-veloci 
pede, with the bars 2 and 13, of the interme 
diate frame 30, journaled at its upper end 
thereon and provided at its lower end with 
the laterally-projecting studs, the upright 
bars extending between the bars 2 and 13 
and connected to the sides of the frame, and 
suitable connections between the studs and 
the operative parts of the machine. 
8. In combination with the main frame and 
its front and guide wheels, the rear driving 
wheel provided with the laterally-extending 
tread, the driving-gear located within said 
tread, its crank-shaft, the operating-lever 
mounted on the frame, and suitable connec 
tions between the operating-lever and the 
crank-shaft. 
9. In a railroad-velocipede, the combination . 
of the central cranked driving-shaft, the driv 
ing-wheel mounted loosely thereon and pro 
vided with the laterally-extending tread and 
pinion, the stationary toothed frame, the gear 
wheel carried by the arm secured to the driv 
ing-shaft and meshing with the toothed frame 
and pinion, said parts being located within 
the tread of the driving-wheel, the operating 
lever, and the pitman connecting the lower 
end of the operating-lever with the crank 
shaft. 
10. The combination of the driving-shaft 
and its crank, the driving-wheel mounted 
loosely to revolve on said shaft, the driving 
gear operated by the driving-shaft, the oper 
ating-lever, and the pitman connecting the 
operating-lever with the crank on the driv 
ing-shaft, substantially as described, whereby 
the pitman serves as the sole connection from 
the operating-lever to the axis of the driving 
wheel. 
11. The combination of the internal gear 
rigidly attached to the frame of the car, the 
- 
O 
I5 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
5o 
55 
6o 
65 
90 
95 
O) 
IC5 
IO 
IIS 
120 
25 
 
arm, the gear-wheel loosely journaled on its 
outer end, said arm being rigidly secured to 
the driving-shaft, the crank on the erd of the 
driving-shaft, the operating-lever, and the 
pitmen connecting the lower end of the oper 
ating-lever directly with the crank on the driv 
ing-shaft, as and for the purpose described. 
468,678 
3. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 28th day of August, 1891, in the 
presence of two attesting witnesses. 
HENRY F. MANN. 
Witnesses: 
W. R. KENNEDY, 
FABIUS S. ELMORE. 
k 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468773.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 468,773, 
L. McCARTHY, 
INSULATING COUPLING, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1892. 
 
 
 
0 
2 
 
 
W7Wzzzzz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS McCARTHY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
N SULATING COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,778, dated February 9, 1892, 
Application filed October 19, 1891, Serial No. 409,lli (No model.) 
To Outd, Luhon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, LOUISMCCARTHY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Boston, 
in the county of Suffolk and State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Insulating-Couplings, of 
Which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
It is common to construct insulating-pipe 
Couplings for use in connection with gaso 
liers and the like of two metallic portions, 
which consist of tubes or nipples that are 
properly threaded in order that they may be 
SCrewed onto the ends of the gas-pipes which 
are to be connected, the said tubes each be 
ing provided with a flange. Between the 
proximate faces of the flanges is placed a 
mass or layer of insulating material, the 
whole being held together by bolts, which pass 
through the flanges and through the inter 
posed insulating-layer, or by other securing 
devices. These insulating-couplings or in 
Sulators are objectionable, in that the edges 
of the flanges are liable to be connected elec 
trically in consequence of the deposition of 
moisture on Such edges and the edges of the 
interposed layer of insulating material. It is 
also common in wiring the fixtures to pass 
the conducting-wires over the projecting 
edges of the flanges and then draw the wires 
tightly against the said edges. When this 
has been done, if the covering of the wires 
becomes broken in any way a circuit is im 
mediately established between the two flanges 
of the insulator and its efficiency destroyed. 
My invention has for its object to produce 
an insulating-coupling which shall be free 
from these objections; and it consists of an 
insulator or insulating - coupling, which is 
provided at the joint thereof with an outside 
covering of insulating material, as herein 
after will be described, and as will be pointed 
out in the claims which are appended hereto 
and made a part hereof. 
I have shown my invention embodied in 
the best form now known to me in the ac 
companying drawings, in which drawings 
Figure I is a view in cross-section length 
wise of a coupling having my insulating-cov 
ering applied to the joint thereof. Figs. 2, 3, 
and 4 are views of similar character showing 
o 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
modifications. Fig. 5 is a view in section on 
line acac of Fig. 4. 
The principal metallic portions of the insu 
lating-coupling are two short tubes or nipples 
C, these being properly screw-threaded to re 
ceive the ends of the gas-pipes which are to 
be connected, and being provided with flanges 
b at their proximate ends. Between the 
flanges is interposed a layer or mass h of in 
Sulating material, preferably sheet- mica, 
which has been cut to the proper shape and 
provided with a central hole for the passage 
of the gas, the mica being laid and compressed 
between the flanges b, and the whole being 
tightly clamped and secured together. Any 
Suitable known securing means may be em 
ployed. Thus the parts may be united by 
means of bolts f, which pass through the 
flanges and through holes in the interposed 
layer of insulating material. 
The bolts f : 
may engage with the flange b and be insu 
lated from one or both of the flanges b in any 
well-known manner; but I prefer to have the 
engagement and insulation effected in the 
manner shown. In the drawings the bolts 
are shown disposed in a manner to alternate 
in position-that is, the heads of alternate 
bolts are placed in holes g, which are pro 
vided in each flange b. In order to prevent 
the heads of the bolts from coming in con 
tact with the flanges, each hole g is made con 
siderable larger iri diameter than the bolt 
head placed therein. Each head rests on the 
interposed layer of insulating material, and 
the other end of each bolt is in engagement 
with the other one of the flanges b-as, for 
example, by being riveted thereto-as shown. 
Outside of the joint formed by the flanges b 
and interposed layer of insulating material 
I place a covering or mass of insulating ma 
terial, preferably one of the well-known com 
positions, the composition employed being 
molded around the joint in a plastic state, 
and then allowed to set and harden. The 
precise thickness or extent of the outer cov 
ering k of insulating material is not impor 
tant so long as it is sufficient to thoroughly 
cover the joint and be strong and durable. 
The joint covered in this way is wholly pro 
tected from short-circuiting by sweating or 
moisture or by impaired wires which may 
come in contact with it, is very durable, and 
95 
IOC 
468,773 
35 
45 
50 
55 
limited in its application to any particular 
form of insulator or insulating-coupling, but 
may be applied irrespective of the precise 
form of the metallic portions of the insulator, 
and also irrespective of the means employed 
for securing them together. 
I do not herein separately claim an insulat 
ing-coupling for pipes comprising two flanged 
tubes, a layer of insulating material placed 
between the flanges thereof, and a series of 
securing-bolts alternately set with reference 
to the said flanges and having their heads al 
ternately engaging with the opposite sides of 
the said layer. 
I have claimed this construction in another 
application for United States patent filed on 
the same date here with. 
What I claim is 
An insulating-coupling having the coupling 
portions thereof separated by an interposed 
layer of insulating material, devices whereby 
the whole is secured together, and an Outer 
layer or jacket of insulating material where 
by the joint is covered and whereby, also, the 
space between the outer parts of the coup 
ling portions is prevented from becoming 
electrically bridged, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
LOUIS MCCARTHY. 
Witnesses: 
WM. A. MACLEOD, 
ROBT. WALLACE. 
O 
25 
since the outer covering of insulating ma 
terial may be smooth on the surface the insu 
lating-coupling may be easily cleaned and 
does not so readily retain dust or dirt as would 
a coupling having holes or depressions in its 
Surface or having projecting bolts or nuts. 
I have shown in the drawings several modi 
fications of my invention. 
Figure 2 shows an outer-covering layerk of 
somewhat differentform in cross-section from 
what is shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 shows an insulator in which the 
edges of the flanges b project beyond the in 
terposed layer of insulating material h, one 
Or both of the said projecting edges being pro 
vided with a groove l, which serves to retain 
the insulating-covering lic securely in place, 
the groove or grooves being provided in case 
there are no other inequalities on the surface 
of the flanges b which would serve that purpose, 
or in addition to such other inequalities when 
desired. It is advantageous to have the re 
taining-points near the edge of the projec 
tions, so that in case the outer insulating 
covering becomes cracked or broken it will 
not so readily become detached as otherwise. 
Fig. 4 shows an insulatorin which the outer 
covering k is extended to the ends of the 
nipples or tubes b. If the covering be thus 
extended, it is desirable to make the tubes b 
hexagonal or octagonal in cross-section, so 
that a Wrench may be applied to them outside 
of the covering k. It will be clear that this 
Outer covering k of insulating materialis not 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468873.txt	E. HARDEND ORF. 
ADJUSTABLE FOLDING B OAT SEAT. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 468,873, 
727. Z. 
-Z'zz. 2. 
 
WITNESSES 
6.72 - 4%re?e/ INVENTOR 
(2 -7 7%-ce. 
A( C /oz. 
ATTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EUGENE HARDENDORF, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA. 
ADJUSTABLE FOLDING B OAT SEAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,873, dated February 16, 1892. 
Application filed September 30, 1891. Serial No. 407,271. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
To all whorl, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EUGENE HARDENDORF, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Fort Wayne, in the county of Allen, 
in the State of Indiana, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Adjust 
able Folding Boat-Seats; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
portable seats primarily for use in row-boats 
and the like; and its objects are to provide 
a seat with a folding back-rest which can be 
conveniently carried and readily attached re 
movably to the seat or thwart. I attain these 
objects by the mechanism illustrated in the 
accompanying dra Wings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my device 
with the cushions shown in dotted lines, and 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of my device 
folded up for carrying. 
Similar letters of reference refer to similar 
parts throughout the several views. 
The construction of my device is illustrated 
in the drawings and is as follows: The two 
arms A and B are rigidly attached to each 
other at their upper ends c by the cross-bar 
E, which forms the back for the seat. To 
this bar E, I attach a back-cushion I. The 
parts a, and c of the arms A and B are at 
tached to each other at suitable points above 
the seat by knuckle-joints b, which support 
and permit the back to be folded down upon 
the seat. The lower parts a, of the arms A 
and B are bent at suitable angles to the back 
rest and extend sufficiently to coincide sub 
stantially with the width of the seat-cushion 
II, and are then bent down over the edge of 
the board or seat G, and the ends in are ex 
tended underneath said seat G and are pref 
erably attached integrally to each other, form 
ing a circular cross-bar D, which holds them 
in rigid connection and extends not less than 
one-third the width of the seat underneath 
it, the space between the extended ends in 
and the parts a, being made sufficiently wide 
to permit the easy passage of the board or 
seat G between said parts, and when so in 
 
55 
7 o 
75 
place a cushioned seat H is placed thereon, 
as shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 1. By 
this construction the frame is held firmly but 
removably on the seat or thwart and the 
back-rest E is firmly braced when occupied 
by the user. 
When not in use or it is desired to carry 
the seat with you, the back-rest is turned 
down upon the seat, and the frame,with both 
cushions, is removed therefrom, the frame 
holding the whole together in compact and 
convenient mass for carrying, as illustrated 
o 
in Fig. 2. 
My invention is intended for use princi 
pally upon row and other boats which are 
unprovided with cushioned seats or back 
rests. The space between the parts in and Cl 
is adapted to receive the width of any such 
seats, and if in some cases such space is a 
little wider than necessary the angle at which 
the back-rest is held is not materially affected 
thereby. My seats are also preferably made 
for single persons-that is, for one person 
as the folded seat is then in very convenient 
form and size for carrying under the arm of 
the user. It is obvious that for single seats 
only one knuckle-joint need be used, the two 
arms being combined in one at the points of 
such junction; but I prefer the two arms with 
two joints, as shown in the drawings. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
As an article of manufacture, an adjust 
able folding boat-seat consisting of the arms 
A and B, joined at their upper ends by the 
cross-bar E, adapted to form with a cushion 
attached the back-rest of the seat, knuckle 
joints b, connecting the two parts CL and c of 
said arms, and the lower ends in, joined to 
gether integrally, so as to form the cross-bar 
D, and extending underneath the seat parts a 
distance not less than one-third thereof and 
provided with cushions for the seat and back 
rest, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto subscribe 
my name, in the presence of two witnesses, 
this 26th day of September, 1891. 
EUGENE HARDENDORF. 
95 
Witnesses: 
H. C. HARTMAN, 
J. A. SHOAFF, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US468973.txt	(No Model.) 
C. L. REDFIELD. 
MATRIX MAKING MACHINE 
7. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 468,973, 
Patented Feb. 16, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 468,973, 
 
C. L. REDFIELD. 
MATRIX MAKING MACHINE. 
7 Sheets-Sheet 2. . 
Patented Feb. 16, 1892. 
28). Evlossos 
2(3.25% 2. 
s's 
-za 
33 42, 3, 
22: 
(2/rzela-ee 
e torris pers co-, -ice-rho., Washins to c. c. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
 
  
C. L. REDFIELD. 
MATRIX MAKING MACHINE. 
Sheets--Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1892, 
-G. 2E 
C. L. REDFIELD. 
MATRIXMAKING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 468,973. 
BS 
N N SS 
- 
h 
H 
As La 
ea 
Eaterse 
On 
S as 
in Yas 
S 
. S. 
w 
NS 
28)ibviosos 
76.27a. 
s 
53%2s %: 46. % 
34 vovitov 
THE Morris PETERs co., Photo-Ho. washi NaTor, b. c. 
 
C. L. REDFIELD. 
MATRIX MAKING MACHINE, 
Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 468,973. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
C. L. REDFIELD. 
MATRIX MAKING MACHINE, 
Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 468,973, 
Patented Feb. 16, l892. 
 
66 st E 
 
  
B 
w 
9 
3A 
6.3. 
(32 - 
 
 
  
  
 
"NNY 
7t 
7/ 
 
 
 
-per 
 
 
 
III 
MO 
3-vuovtov 
28itv.csco 
 
-6-4-6-4- 
 
Th. Morris Psters co. Pi-poro-Lito., washxgton, c 
(No Model.) 
C. L. REDFIELD. 
MATRIX MAKING MACHINE. 
7 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
No. 468,973, 
Patented Feb. 16, 1892, 
  
  
/6) 
28i-Evicesco 
3vvuowboz 
6 63 (Maazel, 
36 
7%z's &btowey 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CASPER L. REDFIELD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE CITICAGO 
MIATRIX MACHINE COMPANY. 
MATRIX-MAKING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 468,973, dated February 16, 1892. 
Application filed September 16, 1890, Serial No, 365,176. (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, CASPER T. REDFIELD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
5 nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Matrix-Making Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to machines operating 
to impress type-dies in succession into a ma 
Io trix material from which plates may be cast 
for printing; and the object is the produc 
tion of a rapid and accurately working ma 
chine that employs a separate key for each 
type-die. This object is accomplished by 
I5 means of the mechanism illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the machine; 
Fig. 2, a plan; Fig. 3, a central longitudinal 
section showing certain interior parts in ele 
2O Vation. Fig. 4 is a horizontal section on the 
ZigZag line acac of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a trans 
verse section through the type - carrying 
frame, Some parts being omitted. Fig. 6 is 
an enlarged detail of the type-die and co-op 
25 erating parts; Fig. 7, a detail of the die 
socket attached to the die-carrier. Fig. 8 is 
a plan of the feed-escapement. Fig. 9 is a 
central longitudinal section of the same; and 
Fig. 10, a sectional elevation, enlarged, show 
3o ing the spacing-keys and levers. Fig.11 is a 
plan view of a portion of the lower drum 
head, showing the lower guide-slots for the 
key-levers. Fig. 12, is a plan view of a por 
tion of the upper drum-head, showing the 
35 upper guide-slots and the pivot for the upper 
portion of the key-levers; and Fig. 13 is an 
enlarged view of the pivotal portion of one 
of the die-levers and connections. 
The bed-plate of the machine consists of 
40 an outer shell (designated 1) and an interior. 
removable portion 2. To the bed-plate 1 is 
attached a frame-work 3, having panels 4. In 
the interior part 2 is a longitudinal slot 5, in 
which is a rack 6, attached to the matrix 
45 carriage 7, for moving it horizontally under 
the printing-point of the machine. At the 
extremes of the space in which the carriage 
travels are two pieces S, which support a plate 
9, that is provided with a bushing 10, having 
a countersunk guide-hole 11 at the printing 
point for centering the dies. 
- 
On the plate 9, over the pieces 8, is mounted 
a ring 12, and supported on the latter is a 
drum-like shell 13, having in its lower head 
14 radial slots 15, and in its upper head 1655 
similar but shorter slots 17 in the same ver 
tical planes as the slots 15. These slots are 
for admitting and guiding the die-carrying 
levers. On the upper head 16 is seated a cir 
cular frame 18, having a tubular central part 6o 
19 extending downward through both heads 
of the drum 13 to form a guide for the piston 
20, which carries.the impressing-plunger 21, 
and on the top of the frame 18 is mounted 
another frame 22, having boxes 23 for a shaft 65 
24. The outer end of this shaft is supported 
in a box 25, mounted on the drum-head 16, 
and is driven by means of a combined pulley 
and fly-wheel 26. The shaft carries an ec 
centric 27, which is connected to the piston 7o 
20 by a connecting-rod 28 for reciprocating it 
When the machine is in use, the shaft 24 is 
constantly rotated, so as to keep the piston 
and plunger continuously reciprocating, and 
the die-levers are separately operated to carry 75 
the dies successively to the center to receive 
the thrust of the plunger for making the ma 
trix-impressions. 
The upper head 16 of the drum is recessed 
on top around its central opening to form a 8o 
shelf 29, having an inclined shoulder or back 
ing 30, and on this shelf and in contact with 
the shoulder is a ring 31, of round wire, on 
which are hung the type-carrying levers 32, 
that depend through the slots 15 and 17. The 85 
upper ends of the levers 32 are bent outward 
at acute angles to form arms 33, and the an 
gles between the arms and the lever-bars are 
slotted, as shown at 34, to form bearings for 
the ring 31. By these means the levers hang go 
loose and independent on the ring and can be 
separately lifted off without disturbing re 
maining levers on the ring. To prevent the 
possibility of the levers becoming displaced 
in operation, they are rounded at the bend, 95 
and the part of the frame 18 at which it turns 
into the downward extension 19 is curved, as 
shown at 35, so as to conform to the bend in 
the levers and present smooth bearings for . 
the levers in case they are shifted slightly in- roo 
ward. The lower ends of the levers 32 are 
bent in the same planes, but in direction op 
468,973 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
posite the upper ends and at right angles to 
the straight portions to form arms 36, to which 
are riveted or otherwise connected the die 
carrying sockets 37. In normal position the 
levers 32 have their lower ends resting 
against the ring 12, and they are held to this 
position by means of spiral springs 38. The 
springs may be given any desired tension by 
drawing their outer ends through holes 39 in 
the sides of the drum 13 and securing them 
in their positions of adjustment by means of 
Set-screws 40. 
The tubular piston-guide 19 has a collar 41, 
that fits in a central opening in the lower 
drum head 14, and immediately below this 
collar is a band of leather or other suitable 
material 42, serving as a buffer or cushion for 
receiving the strokes of the die-carrying le 
vers when operated and for stopping them in 
proper position by contact of their shoulders 
43 with the buffer. 
Near the outer ends of the arms 33 are 
holes 44 and slots 45, in which are secured 
the lower ends of rods 46, that extend up 
ward through holes 47 in the frame 18 and 
connect the die-carrying levers 32 with hori 
Zontal levers 48, that have their ends pivoted 
on a shaft 49, that is secured in the frame 3. 
The free ends of the levers 4S are connected 
by wires 50 to the free ends of another set of 
levers 51, that are pivoted on a shaft 52 in the 
lower front portion of the machine. Each of 
these levers 51 is connected by a stem 53, 
which passes through the front cover-plate 
54 to an operating-key 55, suitably marked 
to indicate the character it controls. Each 
lever 51 has an adjustable clip 56 attached to 
it and extending below and directly over one 
of six transverse levers 57. The levers 57 
have their ends 58 bent at right angles and 
pivoted on a shaft 59, that is supported in 
brackets 60, attached to the side panels 61 of 
the machine-case. The levers 57 rest on the 
heads of pins 62, that are supported in a block 
63 by springs 64. 
On the shaft 59 at its center is a sleeve 65, 
to which are fastened two arms 66 and 67, the 
former extending horizontally under the le 
vers 57 and in position to be engaged by them 
when they are depressed, and the latter ex 
tending downward into a slot 68 in a horizon 
talbar 69. The bar 69 effects the operation 
of a variable-feed escapement for the matrix 
carriage, and the levers 57 and the pins 62 
correspond in number to and determine the 
extent of the several feed movements. The 
clips 56 are attached to the respective levers 
51 in position to engage the proper lever 57 
for effecting the feed proportioned to the char 
acter operated by the particular lever 51. 
The levers 51 for all characters requiring like 
space have their clips arranged to co-operate 
with the same lever 57. 
In the mechanism illustrated provision is 
made for six measures of feed movement; 
but obviously the number of measures of 
movement may be either increased or dimin 
ished by the mere addition or omission of de 
vices similar to those described. 
The bar 69 is capable of longitudinal re 
ciprocation when actuated by the arm 67, and 
is guided in its reciprocations by posts 70, 
fitting in slots 71 in the bar, and is prevented 
from rising by nuts 71 on the posts. The 
middle portion of this bar is somewhat ele 
vated and spans a scape-wheel 72, that is fast 
ened to the hub of a gear 73, which meshes 
in the rack 6. The bar 69 carries a free pawl 
74 at one side of the scape-wheel, and to a 
pin 75 in the bar over the center of the scape 
wheel is pivoted a swinging lever 76, having 
retreating steps 77 on its edge and a holding 
pawl 78 pivoted to its under surface diamet 
rically opposite the pawl 74. Thescape-wheel 
72 has an initial tension in the direction of 
the arrow 2, and when the pawl 78 is in en 
gagement with the teeth of the scape-wheel 
the lever 76 is carried around by the wheel 
until it is stopped by contact with an adjust 
able screw 79 on a post S0. 
On the bar 69 is a post 81, to which is at 
tached a spring S2, with a tension to move the 
lever 76 in a direction opposite that in which 
it is moved when engaged by the Scape-wheel, 
so that when the pawl 78 is free from the teeth 
of the scape-wheel the lever 76 will be moved 
away from the screw 79 until its movement is 
arrested by one of the series of stop-pins 62. 
The bar 69 carries another post 83 on its top, 
against which a spring 84, that is secured to a 
post S5, bears and tends to move the bar to 
ward the right, so as to cause disengagement 
of the pawl 74 and engagement of the pawl 78 
with the scape-wheel. The portion of the bar 
69 which is under the block 63 is slotted, as 
shown at 86, so as to permit the pins 62 to pass 
down through it into the path of movement, 
of the lever 76. These pins 62 are arranged 
in a line radial to the Scape-wheel, and as the 
steps 77 on the lever 76 are retreating steps 
the extent of the movement of the lever given 
it by its spring 82 is determined by the par 
ticular stop-pin that has been depressed to 
engage one of the steps 77 and intercept the 
lever movement. When one of the character 
selecting keys 55 is depressed, the appropriate 
lever 57 is likewise depressed, projecting the 
pin 62, which it engages, into the path of the 
stepped lever, and producing a partial rota 
tion of the arms 66 and 67. The movement 
of the latter of these arms moves the bar 69 
toward the left against the tension of its 
spring 84, causing the pawl 74, which there 
tofore was free, to engage the scape-wheel 
and hold it, and releasing the pawl 78, which 
theretofore acted as the holding-pawl. The 
lever 76 is thus free to be swung on its pivot 
by its spring 82 until the depressed stop-pin 
is engaged by the corresponding step on the 
lever. This movement brings the pawl 78 in 
position to re-engage the wheel in rear of its 
former hold a distance of one, two, or more 
teeth, determinable by the location of the par 
ticular stop-pin that has been projected, and 
o 
9o 
95 
OO 
ro5 
O 
II5 
I25 
55 
 
468,98 
3 
75 
IO 
3O 
when the lever 57 is permitted to rise upon 
release of the operating-key the bar 69 is re 
tracted to its initial position, causing the pawl 
7S to enter and the pawl 74 to retreat from 
the scape-wheel teeth, and so permitting the 
wheel to revolve until the lever 76 is restrained 
by its stop 79. The measure of this escape 
ment is governed by the number of teeth in 
tervening between the first and second en 
gagements of the pawl 7S. 
Near the front end of the portion 2 of the 
bed-plate is a post 87, on which is a gear 88, 
that meshes with and moves the rack 6, and 
fastened to the gear 88 is a graduated disk 
89, and above this disk and loose on the same 
post 87 is another gear 90, and a disk 91, in 
which latter is fixed a post 92, to which is at 
tached the end of a coil-spring 93, the other 
end of which is fastened to the hulh of the 
gear 88, which spring serves as the motor for 
the feed-escapement devices. 
In mesh with the gear 90 is a segmental 
gear 94, formed on one arm of a lever 95, 
which is pivoted on a post 96 in the bed 2. 
The outer arm 97 of the lever passes through 
a slot 98 in the panel 61 of the machine-case, 
and the lower edge of the slot has teeth 99, 
that are engaged by a lip 100 on the lower 
face of the lever-arm 97. The object of this 
construction is to permit a change at will of 
the tension of the spring 93, and consequently 
the force with which the carriage 7 is moved 
when released by the escapement. Thus, 
moving the lever-arm 97 toward the front of 
the machine will decrease the tension of the 
spring 93, while moving it in the opposite di 
rection will increase the tension. The outer 
portion 1 of the bed-plate has a projection 
101, the inside of which is cut away to let the 
graduated disk S9 clear the frame, when the 
plates 1 and 2 are separated by lifting off the 
part 1. In this projecting portion 101 is a 
fixed pointer 102, covered by a glass plate 103. 
All the movements of the escapement affect 
the graduated disk 89, and may be read by 
means of the fixed pointer 102, So that at all 
times the sum of the feed movements may be 
ascertained to aid in the justification of the 
line of impressions. 
The middle row of keys shown by the double 
circles 104 in Fig.2 are spacing-keys. These 
are connected to levers 105, pivoted to the 
shaft 52, and in other respects are the same 
and have the same connections as the levers 
55 51, except that they are not connected by 
wires or otherwise to the upper leverS4S, and 
consequently the depression of any one of 
them does not operate a type-lever. To Sup 
port the free ends of these levers 105 a spring 
106 is provided for each lever. This spring 
may connect the lever with the machine 
frame, or it may be a spring placed around 
the stem 53 of the spacing-key, as desired. 
Each of the spacing-levers is provided with 
a spring-pawl 107, co-operating with a ratchet 
wheel 108 on a transverse shaft 109, that car 
ries a wheel 110, having graduations 111 on 
35 
45 
its rim. A slot 112 in the cover-plate 54 en 
ables the graduations to be seen, and a fixed 
pointer 113 indicates the sum of the extra 
spaces thrown by the spacing-levers. 
The graduated disk 89 and the graduated 
wheel 110 are used in conjunction in produc 
ing justified print from prepared copy. This 
conjoint use may be as follows, viz: Assum 
ing each justified line to contain one hundred 
and thirty-two units of space, then when the 
last character of each line has been printed 
the dial S9 should register 132, or if it started 
at 132 and was run backward it should indi 
cate at the finish 0, to show that the lines are 
exactly of the required length; but if the char 
acters in words and the normal space between 
words of any particular line occupy a less 
number of units of space-as, for instance, 
one hundred and twenty-five units-and the 
copy indicates that seven extra units must be 
thrown in between words to produce a line of 
one hundred and thirty-two units in length, 
then the operator, when making the spaces 
between words, instead of striking the spac 
ing-key controlling the normal space strikes 
one that controls one or more units in excess 
of the normal space, and the extra annount of 
space thus thrown in is indicated by the wheel 
110. Upon reaching the last space between 
words in the line, if the wheel 110 does not 
already indicate 7, the operator strikes a spac 
ing-key controlling enough extra space to 
make up the required seven extra units of 
space, and then finishes the line of printing. 
If, upon reaching the last space between words, 
the operator sees by the indication of the 
wheel 110 that the required extra spaces have 
already been thrown, he uses the key control 
ling the normal space. Upon completion of 
the line of printing the indicators 89 and 110 
are examined, and if the former shows the line 
to be finished at the proper point and the lat 
ter that the number of extra units indicated 
by the copy have been added to the normal 
space between words it will be apparent that 
the work is correct and needs no proof-read 
ing or correction. If, on the other hand, the 
indicator 110 shows the properamount of ex 
tra space as being thrown in, but the indi 
cator 89 shows that the line does not termi 
nate at the proper point, but contains more 
or less than the required number of units, the 
operator's attention is thus called to the fact 
that there is an error somewhere in the last 
line of print, and by comparing the work with 
the copy he is enabled to locate and correct 
the error before proceeding further. Thus it 
will be seen that by the conjoint use of the 
indicators S9 and 110, when using prepared 
copy, the operator is enabled not only to jus 
tify the lines of printing, but to accomplish 
the justification without the work of proof 
reading and without loss of time. 
The matrix - carriage 7 has a movement 
lengthwise of the machine only, and is ad 
vanced by the rack to space for the impres 
sions in a line. The matrix-body 114 rests 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
4. 
468,973 
45 
55 
 
O 
25 
35 
upon an anvil 115, that has holes 116 through 
it to lighten it. The matrix material is fed 
to space for lines of impressions by means of 
the toothed wheels 117 on a shaft 118, which 
has motion imparted to it by bevel-gears 119, 
connecting it with a shaft 119. At the outer 
end of the latter shaft is a ratchet-wheel 120, 
actuated by a pawl 121 on a lever 122, and 
the lever is retracted by a spring 123, that is 
attached to a post 123 on a cross-bar of the 
carriage 7. The depression of the lever causes 
the pawl it carries to engage the ratchet 
wheel and cause it to turn the shaft 118, 
thereby causing the toothed wheels to engage 
the matrix-strip at its under side and advance 
it the proper distance to space for a line. 
The piston 20 is made hollow for the sake 
of lightness, and the plunger 21 has an en 
larged body 124, that screws into the piston 
and is held in position by a jam - nut 125. 
The lower end of the plunger has a tapering 
recess 126 and its face surrounding the recess 
is reduced to a narrow edge 127. The stem 
128 of the type-die has its upper end 129 of 
conical form to fit in and be engaged by the 
walls of the plunger-recess 126, so as to bring 
the axes of the plunger and die in line when 
in contact. This construction enables a die 
to be thrown under the impressing device 
while the latter is rapidly reciprocating and 
insures that it, Will either catch in the coun 
tersink 126, and thus be accurately depressed 
at the printing-point, or it will slip outside 
the plunger and be held there until the next 
plunger reciprocation. 
The die-stem 128 has a flange 130 at one 
side, in which is secured a pin 131 parallel to 
the stem, and in the socket-piece 37 is a guide 
hole 132 for the pin. The die is supported in 
its socket by a spring 133, seated on the bot 
tom of the socket and bearing against a col 
lar 134 on the die-stem. The lower end of the 
die is beveled, as shown at 135, to correspond 
with the countersunk guide-hole 11 in the 
plate overlying the matrix material. Adja 
cent to this countersink is a guide-hole 136 
for the pin 131. The die is thus guided at its 
upper end by means of the recess in the plun 
ger and at its lower end by the countersunk 
guide-hole and the pin and its guide-holes in 
the die-socket and plate, So as to insure its 
exact presentation at the printing-point. 
The pieces 8 and the plate 9, the ring 12 
and the drum 13 are all secured to the central 
section 2 of the bed-plate by bolts 137, that 
pass upward through ears on each of said 
parts. In addition to this fastening the drum 
13 has flanges 138, projecting outward at the 
sides, and these are supported on the outside 
section 1 of the bed-plate by the four posts 
139. The object of this construction is to 
enable the parts 1, 8, 9, and 12 to be removed 
without disturbing the drum 13 or the die 
carrying levers 32, and so enabling the dies 
to be removed and repaired when desired. 
In use the operation of the machine is as. 
follows: The plunger 21 being rapidly recip 
- 
rocated, the operator depresses a selected key 
55, which transmits motion to the lever 51 
and by the wire 50 to the correspondingle 
ver 48, thence through the rod 46 to the arm 
33 of the die-carrying lever 32. The latter 
lever is thus swung toward the center until 
its shoulder 43 comes in contact with the buf 
fer 42, and before the die can be withdrawn 
by releasing the key it is caught by the plun 
ger 21 and is forced down through the guide 
hole 11 into the matrix material on the car 
riage 7. Immediately upon the release of the 
key and the rising of the plunger 21 the die 
carrying lever 32 is drawn back against the 
ring 12 by the action of its spring 38. The 
depression of the lever 51 causes its clip 56 
to descend upon the lever 57, over which it is 
located, and depress it. The lever 57 in turn 
engages and depresses the pin 62, on which it 
rests, and forces the lower end of the pin 
down through the slot in the bar 69 and into 
the path of the stepped lever 76, and this de 
pression of the lever 57 causes it to engage 
and depress the arm 66, and thus turn the 
sleeve 65 and with it the arm 67, which serves 
to slide the bar 69 toward the left. Such 
movement of the bar 69 frees the pawl 78 
from engagement and causes the pawl 74 to 
engage the scape-wheel and hold it until the 
operating-key is released and the bar is per 
mitted to be returned toward the right by its 
retracting-spring 84. The release of the pawl 
78 allows the stepped lever 76 to be swung 
around by its spring 82 until the proper step 
77 comes in contact with the particular pin 
62 that has been depressed by the operation 
of the selected character-key. The result of 
this operation is that the escapement appro 
priate for the character selected occurs after 
the impression has been made instead of be 
fore. In manipulating the spacing-keys for 
thrrowing in extra spaces between words or 
letters all of the operations follow that occur 
when a character-key is struck, except that 
a die is not presented to the printing-point, 
and the register-wheel 109 is operated to in 
dicate the sum of the Spaces thrown. 
What I herein claim, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the variable es 
capement mechanism, of the movable stop 
pins, the levers for operating them, an oscil 
lating device, one arm of which is moved by 
said levers to move another arm, and a pawl 
carrier arranged to be reciprocated by the 
movements of the latter arm, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. In a matrix-machine feed-escapement, a 
sliding bar carrying a temporary holding 
pawl at one side of the scape-wheel and a piv 
oted lever having a pawl at the opposite side, 
means whereby the reciprocation of said bar 
will permit variable escapements, a pair of 
rigidly-connected pivoted arms, one of which 
engages Said bar to reciprocate it, and suit 
able connections whereby the other arm is 
moved upon the manipulation of any of the 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
468,973 
O 
operating-keys of the machine, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a scape-wheel un 
der tension, of a bar having a pawl at one 
side of the wheel, a lever pivoted on the bar 
and carrying a pawl opposite the first, an ad 
justable stop for limiting the lever movement 
in the direction of the wheel-tension, a spring 
for moving the lever in opposite direction, 
movable stops for varying the travel in the 
latter direction, a spring for moving the bar 
in one direction, and levers for retracting it 
and for operating the movable stops, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. In a matrix-machine, a feed-escapement 
actuated by a rack and pinion, a motor-spring 
for moving the rack, a gear and connections 
for varying the tension of the spring, and a 
pivoted lever operating a toothed segment for 
turning Such gear, substantially as set forth. 
5. A drum having upper and lower heads 
provided with radial slots and central open 
ings, a tubular guide for a piston in the lat 
ter openings, and swinging type-carrying le 
vers in said slots, substantially as set forth. 
6. A frame having radial slots extending 
from a central opening, a continuous circular 
shaft Surrounding such opening, angular type 
levers in said slots and pivoted on said shaft, 
and a piston-guide located in the opening and 
Serving to prevent unseating of the levers, 
substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination, with the supporting 
frame having the central openings and sup 
porting the die-levers, of the removable pis 
ton-guide pendent therein, substantially as 
set forth. 
8. In combination, the frame for supporting 
the die-levers and providing radial guides 
therefor, the tubular piston-guide hung cen 
trally therein, the piston, and the devices for 
reciprocating it mounted on said tubular 
guide, substantially as set forth. 
9. In a variable-feed escapement for a ma 
trix-machine, movable stop-pins, levers for 
operating them, an oscillating device one arm 
of which is moved by said levers to move an 
other arm, a pawl-carrier arranged to be re 
ciprocated by the movements of the latter 
arm, a series of character-keys co-operating 
with Said levers, and a series of spacing-keys 
also co-operating with said levers, whereby 
letters and words may be suitably-spaced to 
justify lines of impressions, substantially as 
set forth. 
10. A series of independently-movable car 
riers having type-dies adapted to slide there 
in, a continuously-reciprocating impression 
device, and means for moving the carriers to 
present the dies in succession to the impres 
sion device. 
11. A lever pivoted at or near one end, a 
socket at the other end carrying a sliding 
type-die, a guide for the lever between the 
pivot and socket, and a guide for the type 
die at the printing-point, 
12. A series of carriers movable independ 
ently of each other and having type-dies mov 
able axially and independently of their car 
riers, means for moving any carrier toward a 
common printing-point, a guiding device, and 
means for stopping each carrier and its die - 
when adjacent to but slightly removed from 
the guiding device. 
13. A series of carriers, each having a type 
die adapted to slide in its carrier, a corre 
sponding series of hand-keys and connections 
for moving the dies separately to a common 
printing-point, a common stop for all the car 
riers, a rigid guiding device at the printing 
point, and an independently - operated im 
pression device adapted to thrust the dies 
through the guiding device. 
14. A series of type-die carriers laterally 
movable toward a common center, a common 
stop for all of them to present the dies in suc 
cession at the center, and means for causing 
the dies to reciprocate axially in their carriers. 
15. Type-carriers, a reciprocating impres 
sion device, a guide therefor, and means 
thereon for stopping the carriers to present 
the dies at the printing point. 
16. A cylindrical support for the die-levers, 
providing radial slots extending the length 
of the lever movements to guide then, and a 
central tubular guide for an impressing de 
vice, substantially as set forth. 
17. The combinatio, with an unyielding 
device at the printing-point for centering a 
die-head and a reciproeating impression de 
vice adapted-t center the die-stem while 
thrusting it, of a type-die arranged to slide 
in its carrier, and a carrier therefor adapted 
to present the die between the guiding device 
and impression device and to permit it to be 
centered and impressed. 
18. A series of independently-movable car 
riers carrying type-dies adapted to slide 
therein, a reciprocating impression device, a 
guiding device for the dies at the printing 
point, and means for moving the carriers to 
present the dies inasession between the 
impressing and guidi, 
19. In a matrix-mac ke, a series of type 
dies arranged to slide in their carriers, inde 
pendent carriers therefor, operating keys and 
connections for successively presenting the 
dies at a common point and holding their car 
riers in fixed position, a variable-feed mech 
anism controlled by the operating-keys, and 
an independent automatic impression device 
operating at the point of presentation of the 
dies. 
20. An unyielding support providing a 
fixed guiding-aperture at the printing-point, 
an impression device operating opposite such 
point, a series of independent carriers having 
type-dies adapted to engage and be guided 
by the walls of said aperture, and hand-keys 
and connections for actuating said carriers. 
21. In a matrix-machine, a series of die- . 
carriers pivoted to swing separately to a com 
mon center, type-dies carried thereby and ar 
ranged to slide axially in their carriers, means 
evices. 
25 
35 
45 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
I Io 
II5. 
I 25 
130 
55 
 
463,978 
- 
26. Separately-movable levers carrying slid 
ing type-dies, hand-keys and connections for 
throwing the levers to present the dies at a 
common printing-point, a fixed device at such 
point providing a die-centering aperture, an 
automatic impression device, and means for 
stopping the carriers when their dies are be 
tween the impression device and centering 
aperture and are adjacent to but separate 
from the centering device. 
27. A series of spring-supported type-dies 
loosely held in a series of independently-mov 
able carriers, a corresponding series of hand 
keys and connections for presenting the dies 
at a printing-point, an unyielding device at 
the printing-point, adapted to center and 
guide the dies and prevent them from turn 
ing, and an impression device adapted to 
thrust the dies into and through the guiding 
device and to center and guide the reverse 
ends of the dies while making such thrusts. 
28. An independent type-carrier socket, a 
spring-supported type-die loosely held there 
in and adapted to slide in and be loosely 
guided by said socket, an impression device 
adapted to center and guide the upper end of 
the die while thrusting it to cause it to slide 
in said socket, and a rigidly-supported device 
adapted to receive and accurately guide the 
head of the die while being thrust therein by 
the impression device. 
. 
. 
. 
45 
55 
65 
CASPER L. REDFIELD. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK CHASE, 
GRAHAM P. JONES. 
at the printing-point for guiding them, a re 
ciprocating impression device for thrusting 
them when presented, a matrix-carriage, a 
variable-feed mechanism therefor, a bank of 
keys, and operative connections between the 
keys and die-carriers and feed mechanism, 
Substantially as set forth. 
22. In a matrix-machine, an unyielding de 
vice adapted to center the head of a type-die, 
a separate moving device adapted to engage 
and center the stem of the die and to thrust 
it, and separately-movable die-carriers for 
successively interposing the dies between said 
two guiding devices. 
23. An unyielding guiding device at the 
printing-point, and a series of independently 
movable carriers adapted to present the dies 
in proximity to such device, in combination 
with an independent device adapted to thrust 
the dies through the guiding device. 
24. An unyielding device adapted to accu 
rately guide the head of a type-die at the 
printing-point, a series of carriers adapted to 
Successively present and loosely hold dies at 
such point, and an impression device adapted 
to thrust the presented dies through the 
guiding device and to guide the engaged end. 
while making the thrust. 
25. A series of levers and pivotal supports 
therefor, spring-saported type-dies held by 
and adapted to slide in the levers, an unyield 
ing guiding device for he dies at the print 
ing-point, means for operating the levers to 
present selected dies in succession in front of 
the guiding device, and an independently 
operating impression device adapted to en 
gage the dies so presented and thrust them to 
uniform depth through said guiding device. 
O 
- 25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469073.txt	(No Model.) 
A. WAR.TH. 
C, OTH. CUTTING MACHINE, 
No. 469,073, 
Patented Feb. 16, 1892. 
N 
N 
 
  
 
 
as resor-resor-relaxas-X-XXA. 
25S5S2 S 88 
22 2 2. 
2 
2 
22222 
2SS2 
22S 22, & R 
  
ES 
s 
SSS 
SN 
Zas 
w 
s 
ter saES2 
N22Z2S - S 
Sss 2S 
- - - 
setti Sis 
S24s.22%22 
S2% 
sees 
acare 
W17A/ESSES 
a- Zaz 
7%ar-4 
 
a 
- 
m 
The noRRs PereRS co, PHord-Lito. washington, b. c. 
/AVWEA/TOR 
4ZZZZZ, AZZZZZ2. 
4%rz, % 
ATTORNEYS 
 
   
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBIN WARTH, OF STAPLETON, NEW YORK. 
CLOTH- CUTTNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of. Letters Patent No. 469,073, dated February 16, 1892. 
Application filed July 9, 1891, serial No. 398,971. (No model.) 
To all Zwhom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBINWARTH, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Stapleton, in 
the county of Richmond and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Cloth-Cutting Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in cloth-cutting machines of that class in 
which the motor is supported by and moves 
with the standard carrying the knife and the 
cloth-lifting foot-plate. In machines of this 
class it is essential that the knife shall be 
guided so as to follow steadily and without 
fail the contours of the different patterns to 
be cut, and at the same time a very rapid 
motion must be imparted to the knife in or 
der to accomplish the required amount of 
Work, and my experience is that when the 
motor is placed on the top of the standard 
and a rapid motion is imparted to the knife 
below the weight of the motor above has a 
tendency to cause the machine to rock to and 
fro and to render it extremely difficult, if not 
impossible, to guide the knife so that it foll 
lows the contours of the pattern, particularly 
if the same are curved or angular. 
The object of my invention is to steady the 
machine during the operation of cutting, and 
for this purpose I have placed the motor upon 
a circular guide which rises from the foot 
plate and through the interior of which ex 
tends the belt for imparting motion to the 
knife, said circular guide being made to en 
gage an arm which can swing freely round a 
pin, as more fully pointed out in the follow 
ing specification and claim, and illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
cloth-cutting machine embracing my present 
invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical section in the 
plane a ac, Fig. 1, on a larger Scale than the 
previous figure. Fig. 3 is a vertical section 
in the plane / ), Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a horizontal 
Section in the plane & 2, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is a 
vertical Section of a modification. 
In the drawings, the letter A designates the 
cloth-lifting foot-plate, from which rises the 
standard B, which carries the knife G. To 
the standard B is firmly secured the circular 
guide C, which engages an eye c, formed on 
the arm J, which is connected to the arm L. 
O 
35 
4.O 
45 
4. 
On the top of the circular guide is firmly se 
cured a motor M-such, for instance, as an 
electromotor-from which motion is imparted 55 
to the knife G by means of a belt K, which 
extends down through the guide C. 
In the example illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2 
of the drawings a rotary knife is shown; but 
the belt K may be used to impart motion to 
a reciprocating knife carried by the standard 
B, as shown in Fig. 5, in which the pulley R 
is provided with an eccentric groover, which 
engages a pins, projecting from the knife G, 
so that when the pulley revolves a recipro 
cating motion is imparted to the knife. 
The connection between the arms J and L 
may be effected by means of a hanger N and 
rod O, so that the arm J can freely swing 
round on said rod or the two arms may be 
joined in any other suitable manner. The 
arm L is free to swing round on the shaft L'. 
In the example shown in the drawings the 
base-plate of the motor M is provided with a 
plug P, which fits the guide C and which may 
be hollow, so that the belt K can freely pass 
through the same or it may be provided with 
one or more channels for the passage of said 
belt. The guide incloses the belt K, so that 
the eye c can be readily applied to said guide 
and the cloth-lifting foot-plate A, with the 
standard B, the knife G, and motor M, can be 
moved so that the knife will follow the con 
tours of the pattern without danger of inter 
fering with the driving mechanism. At the 
same time the eye c and the arm L serve to 
retain the cutting-machine in an upright po 
sition, and the operative is enabled to guide 
the machine with ease and facility. 
I do not herein broadly claim the combina 
tion, with a standard carrying a cloth-lifting 
foot-plate, a knife, and a pulley, from which 
motion is imparted to said knife, of a casing 
mounted on the standard and an arm con 
structed to swing or swivel in a spindle and 
to engage the casing, said pulley being adapted 
to engage a belt extending down through the 
casing; nor do I herein broadly claim the 
combination, with a standard carrying a cloth 
lifting foot-plate and a bracket, of the tubu 
lar bearing secured to said bracket and the 
shaft mounted in said bearing and carrying 
the pulley and the knife, said pulley being 
adapted to engage the driving-belt, and a lu 
95 
75 
Too 
469,078 
and the knife carried by the standard, of a 
circular guide C, supported by the standard, 
a motor mounted upon the guide and geared 
with the knife through the interior of said 
guide, and a movable arin J, provided with an 
eye which engages the guide between the mo 
tor, and the foot-plate, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
- 
25 
Witnesses: 
AFBN WAR.TH. 
W. HAUFF, 
. 
. 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 
" 
bricating-cup secured to the tubular bearing; 
and, further, I do notherein claim the combi 
nation, with a standard carrying a rotary 
knife, of an oscillating spindle carried by said 
standard and extending in a direction trans 
verse to the plane of the knife and two grind 
ing-disks situated on opposite, sides of the 
knife and free to rotate on the spindle by 
frictional contact with the knife, as such com 
binations constitute the subject-matter of my 
application for Letters Patent filed of even 
date herewith, Serial No. 398,970. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The combination, with the cloth-lifting foot 
plate, the standard rising from the foot-plate, 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469173.txt	W. S. PATTIN, W. M. MORSE & D. P. PATTIN. 
STEAM. ENGINE WALWE. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1892, 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 469,173, 
 
e-E 
s 
See 
TWESSES 
a ". 48tezza 46 
aea/ 
- 
NVENTORSS 
As"22. 
7.2%.222se. 
-4 ZZzzerz. 
ATTORNEYS. 
Lithd., WASHINGTONo. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WINFIELD. S. PATTIN, WILLIAM M. MORSE, AND DOUGLAS P. PATTIN, OF 
MARIETTA, OHIO. 
STEAM-ENGINE WALVE. 
Se:CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 469,178, dated February 16, 1892. 
Application filed November 7, 1891, Serial No, 411.237, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
- 
or secondary piston, having heads of unequal 
To all whom it may concern: 
area and provided with suitable packing 
Be it known that we, WINFIELD. S. PATTIN, 
WILLIAM.M. MORSE, and DOUGLASP.PATTIN, 
rings. 
N is the central plate, (shown in top and bot 
citizens of the United States, residing at Ma 
tom views in Figs. 7 and 6, respectively,) in 
rietta, in the county of Washington and State 
which plate are the main steam-ports SS', the 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Steam-Engine Valves, of 
main exhaust-port E, the exhaust-port Y for 
which the following is a specification. 
auxiliary valve, the auxiliary-valve steam 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
ports CC', leading to ends of piston A, the 
steam-pockets QQ to admit steam under aux 
that class of steam-valves that are employed 
iliary valve, and the cavities U U", through 
on steam-pumps and like engines of recipro 
which the knockers K K project into the 
cating movement where the mainsteam-Valve 
is moved by a secondary steam-piston, which cavities TT in under side of auxiliary valve. 
in turn is noved by an auxiliary valve, said (See Fig. 8.) The central plate N rises into 
auxiliary valve being operated by knockers the steam-chest (see Fig.1) and forms the 
seats of main valve W and also of auxiliary 
moved by the direct action of the mainsteam 
valve X. It further forms a steam-tight joint 
piston. 
between the two knocker-cavities O O", Fig. 
Our invention more particularly relates to 
improvements in the arrangement of steam 
12, and in connection with the auxiliary valve 
X forms a steam-tight joint between the two 
ports, valve-seats, steam-pockets, &c., which 
knocker-cavities O O", so that no steam can 
we secure by a central plate, and to the pecul 
blow, through from one end of cylinder to the 
liar form and arrangement of the auxiliary 
valve and tappets or knockers, as hereinafter 
X is the auxiliary valve, (shown in top and 
fully described. 
bottom views in Figs. 9 and 8, respectively.) 
Figure-1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
in which TT are cavities, into which the 
of a steam-cylinder, valve, and valve-chest, 
knockers K K' project in order to move the 
taken on lines E E, Fig. 4. Fig. 2 is a ver 
tical longitudinal section of a steam-cylinder, 
valve. 
FF' are square openings through the valve, 
main and auxiliary valves, and steam-chest 
through which livesteam is admitted from the 
on line G H, Fig. 5. Fig. 3 is a vertical lon 
gitudinal section of a steam-cylinder, aux 
steam-space L, FigS. 4 and 2, to the ends of 
auxiliary piston through the steam-pockets Q 
iliary valve, steam-chest, and knockers online 
Q in central plate and the steam-pockets R. 
IJ, Fig. 5. Fig. 4 is a vertical cross-section 
R in under side of auxiliary valve, thence 
of a steam-cylinder, valves, and chest online 
(see Fig. 2) through the ports C C, Fig. 6, to 
A?B?, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a vertical cross-sec 
end of piston A, Fig. 1. The pockets R. R' in 
tion of a steam-cylinder, valves, and chest on 
under side of auxiliary valve are both live 
line CD, Figs. 2 and 3. Figs. 6 and 7 are a 
steam and exhaust pockets, since when one 
bottom and top plan, respectively, of the cen 
is a live-steam the other is an exhaust pocket; 
tral plate N. Figs. 8 and 9 are a bottom and 
but the steam-pockets Q Q' in center plate 
top view, respectively, of the auxiliary valve 
are always live-steam pockets. 
X. Figs. 10 and 11 are side views of the two 
knockers or tappets K. K. Fig. 12 is a top 
The knockers KK, Figs, 10 and 11, slide 
in grooves OO in main-cylinder casting, pro 
plan of main-cylinder casting, showing knock 
er-grooves, main steam-ports S S', and ex 
jecting downward into the main cylinder (see 
Fig. 3) so as to be moved by the main steam 
haust-port Y. 
piston P, the heads of main cylinder having 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
suitable recesses into which knockers move, 
out the several views. 
so that by no possibility can they be caught 
P is the main steam-piston, and Z the pis 
and broken by main piston P. The knockers 
ton-rod. 
KK also project upward into cavities in un 
W is the main steam-valve, and A the valye 
other. 
W 
O 
5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
Od 
469,178 
5 
O 
" 
. 
. 
- 
- 
scribed. 
der side of auxiliary valve, as heretofore de 
The exhaust - opening Y under auxiliary 
valve is made very large, as shown, in order 
to insure the seating of said valve when work 
ing in a vertical position, as when applied to 
locomotive air-pumps. 
The knockers KK", being entirely within 
the cylinder-casting and covered by the cen 
tral plate and auxiliary valve, and being two 
solid pieces of Wrought iron or steel, are not 
liable to any injury or to getting out of order, 
as might be the case in hinged tappets or 
connected tappets. 
The method of operation is as follows: Re 
ferring to Fig. 1, the action of the main valve 
V over the two induction-ports SS and the 
intermediate exhaust-port E is the ordinary 
and well-known action of the D-valve-that 
is to say, in the position shown in this view 
steam is entering at the right-hand end of the 
cylinder and is being exhausted from the left 
hand end. To shift the main valve, the piston 
valve A is operated upon by steam through the 
ort CC'as follows: The main piston having 
traveled to the end of its stroke, as shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the knocker K is moved to the 
right, as shown in Fig. 3, carrying with it the 
auxiliary valveX to the position shown in Fig. 
Steam is then admitted from the central 
2. 
cavity of steam-chest L (see Fig. 4) through the 
opening F, Fig. 2, in auxiliary valve, thence 
through steam-pocket Q in central plate, 
thence through steam-pocket R in under side 
of auxiliary valve, through port C in central 
plate, and in steam-chest to right-hand end of 
piston A, thus throwing piston A, carrying 
main valve V, to position shown in Fig. 2. At 
this time steam is admitted through main 
port S to right-hand end of main piston P, 
when conditions are ready to commence re 
turn stroke. Meantime exhaust has taken 
place from left-hand head of valve-piston A, 
through port C and valve-pocket R', to main 
exhaust Y. 
We are aware that various forms of auxil 
iary valves operated by knockers, levers, or 
- 
35 
45 
25 p 
SO 
y 55 
tappets in the cylinder have been heretofore 
provided. Our invention is chiefly distinct 
ive in the separate central plate N, in which 
the various ports or openings are formed and 
through which the knockers operate upon the 
auxiliary valve. This plate entirely sepa 
rates the two knocker-chambers and prevents 
leakage of steam from one to the other b 
making close contact between the lower side 
of the auxiliary valves and the top side of the 
cylinder at a point between the knockers. 
This enables us to cheaply construct an en 
gine of this type with but few parts and with 
no necessity of any nicety of adjustment. 
Furthermore, all the joints are ground joints, 
and all gaskets are done away with. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a steam-cylinder having a piston-actu 
ated slide-valve, the combination of the slid 
ing knockers KK", the auxiliary valve X, en 
gaged by said knockers and moving with 
them, and the intermediate plate N, having 
openings through which its knockers pass in 
connecting with the valve, the said plate 
serving to make a tight connection between 
the lower side of said valve and the uppersur 
face of the cylinder at a point between the 
knockers, whereby the knocker-chambers are 
entirely separated from each other, substan-- 
tially as shown and described. 
2. The central plate N, having the main 
ports ES S', knocker-holes U U", passages C 
C', and recesses Q Q', in combination with 
the auxiliary valve X, with knocker-recesses' 
TT', openings FF', and recesses R. R', and 
the knockers KK, sliding in the cylinder and 
extending through the central plate into the 
recesses TT of the auxiliary valve, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
- 
WINFIELD. S. PATTIN. 
WILLIAM M. MORSE. 
DOUGLAS P. PATTIN. 
Witnesses: 
A. L. SMITH, 
PHIL. BACHMANN. 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469273.txt	(No Model.) 
J. ROBIN SON. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
ELECTRIC. TELEGRAPH APPARATUS, 
w 
No. 469,273, 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892, 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
in N. 
Eugilitius 
III giuluintulu 
EAE 
HEM2O2 
A.' 
 
V 
 
...tif 
s 
A ZZ72 esses. 
af-2-42 
6. A 444-a-7 
- 
- Zy 
 
777-2/ae 7zzov. 
244, 7644 
76ers 42.2772-e/s. 
the Norris pereas co, Photo-LirHo., WASHINGT3:., d. c. 
(No Model.) 
J. ROBINSON, 
ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH APPARATUS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 469,273. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892. 
E. 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
: 
7 ZHZ 
E-162 e 
Ali". In 2 
SiS Ege A. 
I 
litti." Hi? 
al Femme 
Titl|HD 
III 
INHII 
IIHL 
FIHL 
  
 
Himml 
IBLA. 
F. c.7. 
77(7/672Zo7. 
/c2%-cal 
/zz Azzoz-72ey. 
AZZ72assas, 
2-6242 
6, 7-6z-Za-Z 
 
Z27 
The NORRIS FETCRs co., Photo-Litho., washixston, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 469,273, 
J. ROBINSON, 
ELECTRICTELEGRAPH APPARATUS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892. 
Azo. 9. 
() 
d 
O 
O . 
AA 
O 
& 
O 
Aya 
2) 
Ayle 
Ay' 
(2) 
O 
77 Zzzesses." 
a642, 
c3 7 etzatza-al-A 
a2 
Z2/ 
Z722/27zz27: 
azy Azaoyrzezir. 
The Norris Fetea co., Proto-LTHo., was HINoTan, a.c. 
(No Model.) 
J. ROBINSON, 
ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH APPARATUS, 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 469,273, 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892, 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
J O SEP II R O BINS ON, O 
F LONDON, ENGLAN D. 
ELECTRIC-TELEGRAPH APPARATUS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 469,278, dated February 23, 1892. 
Application filed January 21, 1891. Serial No. 378,588, (No model.) 
To all twhom it nvoy conce77. 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH ROBINSON, re 
siding at London, England, have invented an 
Improvement in Electric-Telegraph Appara 
tuS to Transmit Wisible Pointer-Indications 
Corresponding to the Movement of a Trans 
mitting-Handle, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to telegraphic appa 
ratus by Which the movements of a transmit 
ting-handle indicating orders or other com 
munications from the transmitter may visibly 
be reproduced by the duplicate movement of 
a pointer corresponding to that of the trans 
mitting-handle. 
My improvements consist, mainly, in the 
utilization of the movement of the transmit 
ting-handle to automatically unlock the de 
Vice and to produce a mechanical tension in a 
spiral spring, the reaction of the said spring 
causing the revolution of a train of wheels 
and flier and by its motion causing an elec 
trical contact to be formed in one of three 
alternative directions, according to the direc 
tion of movement of the transmitter-handle, 
permitting the passage of a current rendered 
intermittent by a commutator to a receiving 
instrument consisting of three pairs of elec 
tro-magnets provided with spring-armatures, 
the oscillating movement of which is commu 
nicated by a roller at the extremity of each 
armature to a star-wheel operating an indi 
cating-finger by suitable gearing until the ac 
tion of the spring mechanism is Satisfied and 
locked, when the indicator coincides with the 
position of the transmitter-handle. 
In order that my invention may be the bet 
ter understood, now proceed to describe the 
same in relation to the drawings hereunto 
annexed, reference being had to the letters 
marked thereon. 
Tike letters refer to like parts in the vari 
ous figures. 
Eigure 1 is a back elevation of my trans 
mitting mechanism mounted on a dial-plate. 
Fig. 2 is a plan of the same. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation of the same. Fig. 4 is a detached 
enlarged detail of the main-spring and trans 
mitter-handle fingers, with one of the pillars 
supporting mechanism frame on first-motion 
wheel. Figs. 5 and 6 are an enlarged outside 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
elevation and transverse section, respectively, 
of the automatic regulating-flier. Figs. 7 and 
8 are enlarged transverse section and part 
outside elevation, respectively, of the spring 
drum-locking mechanism. Figs. 9 and 10 are 
an outside elevation and plan, respectively, 
of the recording mechanism. Fig.11 is a back 
elevation of the indicator-pointer mechanism. 
Fig. 12 is a diagrammatical view of the elec 
trical circuits between my transmitting and 
recording mechanisms. 
The transmitter-handle A is mounted so as 
to be capable of rotation around a circular 
order-plate B, marked with the necessary or 
ders to be communicated, which may be any 
number required, each position of the trans 
mitter-handle being marked by a hole b, into 
which a spring-pin a falls when the transmit 
ter-handle is placed at rest. This catch, or 
pin a is operated by an auxiliary spring-lever 
C, on the handle of the transmitter-lever A 
and is released by the action of the grip of 
the hand. The axis of the Said transmitter 
handle A, passing through the order-plate B, is 
attached to a disk C, carrying a pinc, (shown 
in detail at Fig. 4.) which presses against 
an arm or finger d, attached to one end and 
coiling up a Spiral Spring D about the axis 
of the said disk. The other end of this spring 
is attached to a similar arm or finger about 
the axis of the first-motion driving-wheel E 
of the train of gearing, by which latter mo 
tion is transmitted to a flier F (shown in 
detail at Fig. 5) and to a commutator G, by 
which the electrical current is transmitted 
to one or other of the three pairs of electro 
magnets on the recorder (see Fig. 9) to pro 
duce their desired successive operations, ro 
tating the recording-indicator pointer. When 
the apparatus is at rest, the finger d of the 
transmitter-lever disk lies between the afore 
said arms or fingers d and d", attached to 
either end of the spiral spring D upon the 
axis of the first-motion driving - wheel and 
pressing in opposite directions upon one of 
the pillars d' (see Fig. 7) of the main driv-- 
ing-wheel. The lever-disk pin c coincides in 
position when the apparatus is at rest with 
this pillar d' of the main driving-wheel, and 
the two arms or fingers d and d at either ex 
tremity of the spiral Spring, thus in normal 
95 
OC 
2 
469,273 
5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
position at rest, press against one another 
with a normal set or tension, which is thus 
satisfied. 
When then the transmitter-handle is oper 
erated, the rotation of the lever-disk C, car 
rying the driving-pin c with it, presses upon 
one of the said arms did at either end of 
the coil-spring, according to the direction in 
which the handle is moved. The other of the 
said arms did, attached to the spring, imme 
diately tends to follow the motion from it of 
the said driving-pin C, and, pressing upon the 
pillar d' of the first-motion wheel, causes the 
said wheel to revolve until the pillar d' once 
more has come back to its normal position co 
incident with the driving-pin c as in the nor 
mal position of the mechanism at rest. If the 
transmitter-handle A be moved sharply, the 
elasticity of the handle-spring and the control 
of the gearing by the flier F (more particularly 
hereinafter described) cause the first-motion 
wheel, the train of gearing, and recording-fin 
ger, by its mechanism, as shown in Figs. 9, 10, 
and 11, (hereinafter to be more fully described.) 
to follow the transmitter-handle with a fairly 
uniform and graduated motion. 
I prefer to use a flier of special construction, 
(shown in detail in Figs. 5 and 6,) which causes 
it to be a better regulator for uniformity than 
the usual flier with fixed vanes. In my im 
proved flier the vanes F are caused by the 
tension of a spring f upon the axis or by 
weights to lie normally close to the spindle, 
as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 6, and the cen 
trifugal force of the flier-vanes, when rotated, 
causes them to gradually extend against the 
reaction of the spiral springfinto a direction 
perpendicular to the axis of rotation as the 
speed of the flier tends to increase, and thus 
causes a greater area offering resistance to the 
rotation of the flier, as well as a larger air 
resistance by an increase of speed. Upon the 
axis of one of the wheels in the flier train of 
gearing I fit a commutator G with three dis 
tinct brush-fingersg'g''g'', making contact 
upon certain conducting-sections of the com 
mutator as it revolves to one or other of the 
three pairs of electro-magnets operating the 
recording-finger, only one metallic contact 
through one brush being made at any one time. 
The commutator is divided in its length into 
four separate rings insulated from their axis of 
support and the rings upon which the brushes 
g'g''g'' rubbeing insulated from one another. 
on their support, but each being connected with 
the ring upon which the brush grubs, which 
has a continuous conducting rubbing-Surface. 
In the machine shown I have divided each ring 
into six equal parts, two parts opposite to one 
another being conducting-surfaces, which are 
connected with the brush g by its ring, and 
the other four parts being non-conducting 
surfaces. The conducting-Surfaces of each 
ring are arranged in a position sixty degrees 
in advance relatively to the ring adjacent to 
it. Thus the surfaces are arranged spirally 
around the commutator. The brushes g g 
g'g' are all insulated from one another and 
from the frame upon which they are fixed. 
The four wires from the binding-screws 
(shown in Fig. 2) of the transmitting-instru 
ment are connected to the four wires of the 
recording-instrument, (shown in Fig. 9,) re 
spectively. 
The general arrangements of the circuits 
are shown diagrammatically in Fig. 12, where 
the electro-magnets II H'H' are shown con 
nected each one respectively to the commuta 
tors g'g''g'', and the corresponding commu 
tator-contacts are thus only temporarily and 
successively closed, thus producing alternate 
and momentary magnetic action upon arma 
tures K' K' K' of the said electro-magnets 
successively in either direction of successive 
action, according to the direction of rotation 
of the said commutator G, which obeys and 
corresponds with the action of the transmit 
ter-lever. The main current from a battery 
L or other suitable source of electric current 
is made through a set-screw in and a spring 
n", which is opened or closed by the move 
ment of the locking-lever M, operated as 
hereinafter described. The three electro 
magnets Il H' H' are connected to a com 
mon return h, which leads back to the bat 
tery. 
The intermittent successive action of 
the electro-magnets H II II' in either di 
rection, according to that of the transmitter 
handle A and the consequent oscillating 
movement of the respective armatures K' K' 
K', operated by the roller-pinsk, attached to 
the said pivoted armatures upon a star-shaped 
-wheel P, produces a step-by-step. rotation of 
that wheelin either direction, according to that 
in which the Successive action of the electro 
magnets takes place. The relative placing of 
the electro-magnets and the pinsk of their os 
cillating armatures K' K'K' with regard to 
the number of points of the star-wheeland to 
their respective position to one another is im 
portant and is Such that when one armature 
is drawn down and the roller-pin and arma 
ture are accordingly depressed, to the bottom 
of the gap between two points of the star 
wheel the other two roller-points of the other 
tWO armatures are not depressed, but come ex 
actly each on opposite sides of two spokes of 
the star-Wheel, SO that when called into action 
by the Successive depression of their arma 
tures the Star-wheel P will be rotated in one 
direction or the other, according to which of 
these two armatures is first depressed. One 
convenient and correct disposition of this 
gear I find to be, when two armatures are ar 
ranged to act. On opposite sides of the star 
Wheel, are parallel to one another, and the 
third at right angles to the other two, there 
being in such case seven points to the star 
Wheel. Upon the axis of the said star-wheelP, 
Which by multiple gearing Q, Fig. 11, operates. 
the recording-finger R, (see Fig. 11) I place 
another triangularly-toothed wheel q, upon 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
IT 5 
I 25 
469,273 
3 
O 
which rests a spring-pressed roller q', so as to 
form a spring-pressed brake when lying ex 
actly between two triangular points, so as to 
hold the said axis in any position until me 
chanically moved out of its position by the 
aforesaid mechanism. In conjunction with 
the train of wheels as aforesaid I fit a Spring 
pressedlocking-lever M, pressed by the Spring 
n, which also forms the metallic conductor 
for the main circuit When pressed up against 
the set-screw n. When the transmitter-han 
dle A has been accurately placed in any par 
ticular predetermined position to define an 
order, this lever locks the mechanism and 
stops the aforesaid flier F by two pivoted 
jaws N, allowing a pawl in to enter between 
them, but to be locked there until the locking 
lever is released by a fresh movement of the 
transmitter-handle. 
The mechanism is as follows: Under the 
transmitter-handle disk C, Figs. 7 and S, is 
placed a bell-crank lever S, which when the 
apparatus is at rest normally engages in a re 
cess S in the ring e, Supported by pillars d' 
upon the first-motion driving-wheel E. The 
other end of the lever, provided with a pin S', 
is thus depressed, as shown in Fig. 7. When 
the transmitter-handle and disk Care moved, 
the end of the bell-crank lever S, engaged 
in the recess or niche of the ring e, attached 
to the first-motion wheel E, is carried out 
of the said niche or recess, SO as to bear upon 
the inside face of the ring e, and thus the 
pin end S is caused to raise the end of the 
jointed lever T from the face of the disk, and 
pivoted at t upon the frame. The end of this 
ever where it comes into contact with the 
locking-lever M is provided with a wedge 
face bearing against a pin. On the said lock 
ing-lever M, thus forcing up the end of the 
lever M, on which the spring m is lying, thus 
making electrical contact with the set-screw 
m, releasing a detent from the wheelt on the 
commutator and releasing the flier - pawl in 
from the detaining-ja. WSN at the other end. 
The train of wheels is thus free to revolve 
both the commutator and the flier mechan 
ism until by this rotation the first-motion 
driving-wheel E has brought back the niche 
or recess S in exact juxtaposition to the end 
of the bell-crank S, wherever that may have 
been placed by the operation of the transmit 
ter-handle. The bell-crank S thus falls back 
into its normal position, as shown in Fig. 7, 
and allows the pivoted lever to fallback onto 
the face of the disk- wheel and thus once 
more to lock and engage both the commuta 
tor notched wheelt" and the flier-pawl n. 
I may, if desired, use an auxiliary lock 
upon the receiving or recording part of the 
instrument-say upon the disk fitted to the 
star-wheel axis. The engaging-bolt may be 
the core of a solenoid engaging by gravity 
and lifted out of locking by the action of the 
current fed to the electro-magnets H H 'H' 
being first passed round the said solenoid. 
I will now describe the path of the currents 
when the machine is operated in reference to 
Fig. 12. When the transmitter-handle A is 
operated in one or other direction, the lock 
ing-lever M is moved and presses the spring 
contact at m, joining the circuit, at the same 
time unlocking the transmitting mechanism. 
It will be seen that current can now travel 
round through the electro-magnet H', oper 
ating its armature, because the brush g is in 
contact with a conducting-section of its ring, 
which latter is in contact with the brush g 
through its continuous ring. The mechanism 
starts, however, immediately it is unlocked, 
and as the brush g leaves its conducting-sec 
tion, breaking the circuit to electro-magnet 
H', the brush g' enters upon one on its ring 
and completes the circuit of electro-magnet 
H', and similarly with electro-magnet H'. 
This rotative action continues until the level 
M falls back into normal position by reason 
of the following mechanism having followed 
the transmitting-handle and arrived at its nor 
mal stationary position in relation to it, when 
the gear controlling the lever M permits it to 
break the circuit and lock the mechanism and 
thus stop the rotation of the commutator. 
The successive Order of operation of the three 
electro-magnets depends upon the direction 
in which the transmitting-handle is moved, 
thus, whether the order of making the con 
tacts by the commutator is g'g''g'' or g' 
g'g'', one being effected by the opposite ro 
tation of the mechanism to the other. 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
sire to secure...by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an electric-telegraph transmitting and 
indicating apparatus, the combination of 
mechanism consisting of a transmitter hand 
lever rotating rollind the center of an order 
plate, a spiral Spring about the axis of rotation, 
both ends of which meet with special set ten 
sion upon the frame of a first-motion wheel 
and also upon the driving-pin of the said hand 
lever, a train of wheels with controlling-flier 
and a triple-drum commutator driven by said 
first-motion driving-Wheel, a constant-current 
closing device and locking-lever, three electro 
magnets With pivoted armatures on a record 
ing-plate fed Successively with intermittent 
currents from a constant current by the said 
rotated commutator and brushes rubbing 
thereon, a step-by-step recording mechanism 
consisting of a Star-Wheel rotated in either 
direction by Successive intermittent action of 
Said pivoted armatures, and pins attached 
thereto to operate a recording-pointer in a 
similar direction to and to the same extent as 
the motion of the order-transmitting hand 
lever. 
2. In an electric-telegraph transmitter, a 
train of Wheels operated by a first-motion 
Wheel following by a Spring-tension a transmit 
ter-handle, in combination with a controlling 
flier constructed with vanes pivoted near the 
axis of the said flier, a spiral spring on the 
Said axis, and a notched collar in the heels 
of said vanes folding them normally toward 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
4. 
469,273 
5 
the axis, but permitting them to extend radi 
ally outward against the spring reaction un 
der the centrifugal force developed by the 
speed of the flier, substantially as described. 
3. In an electric-telegraph transmitter, a 
bell-crank lever and a transmitter-lever disk, 
in combination with a fixed pivoted lever op 
erated by the bell-cranklever and a locking 
lever released by said pivoted lever when the 
Io apparatus is in movement and adapted to 
normally lock the flier and commutator when 
the record is finished and the apparatus comes 
to rest, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Ihave signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two sub- I5 
Scribing witnesses. 
JOSEPH ROBINSON. 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD A. HOFFMANN, 
CHARLES H. CARTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469373.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 469,373. 
J. J. LOWDEN. 
STEAM PRESSURE REGULATOR. 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892. 
 
 
 
$22,2,2,2,2) 
2:2 
?<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< 
 
 
 
 
 
SSSSSSSN ? 
2>&zzzzzzzzzza 
SNS 
S 
the Norris Peters Co., PHOTO-tito, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
J. J. LOWDEN. 
STEAM PRESSURE REGULATOR, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 2, 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 469,373. 
 
 
 
as to 
anmm 3 lamka 
QNews. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES J. LOWDEN, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
STEAM - PRESSURE REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 469,373, dated February 28, 1892. 
Application filed March 14, 1890, 
Serial No. 343,866 (No model.) 
55 
To all tuflon, it nagy concern. 
IBe it known that i, JAMES J. LOWEDEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of Mas 
Sachusetts, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Steam-Pressure Regul 
lators, of which the following, taken in con 
nection. With the accompanying drawings, is 
a specification. 
My invention refers to that class of regula 
tors known as steam-pressure' or damper 
regulators for maintaining an even pressure 
in Steam-pipes or for regulating the dampers 
of boiler-furnaces by the pressure of steam in 
the boiler; and the invention consists of cer 
tain details of construction hereinafter fully 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a steam 
pressure or damper regulator embodying my 
invention supported by a wall-bracket. Fig. 
2 is a vertical longitudinal section through 
the same. Fig. 3 is a vertical longitudinal 
section of a modification. Fig. 4 is a vertical 
longitudinal section through the valve and 
union. Fig. 5 shows the regulator supported 
by a bracket and applied as a steam-pressure 
regulator. Fig. 6 is a similar view showing 
the regulator as applied to a damper-regul 
lator. 
A represents a casing or cylinder with the 
bottom or lower end castin one therewith and 
its upper end closed by a cover B, having a 
sleeve B'. In this cylinder A is fitted a pis 
ton C, to which is secured a piston-rod D, the 
upper end of which is provided with an eye 
d, to which the cord or chain for operating 
the valve or damper is attached. The lower 
end of the cylinder A is provided with a noz 
zle, to which one end of a cock or valve E is 
secured, and to the other end of the cock is 
Secured a condenser F, which may be a sur 
face-condenser, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, or 
a spray-condenser might be employed. G is 
a pipe for admitting cold water to the con 
denser, and His an exit-pipe. To the lower 
end of the condenser is connected a petcock 
I for carrying off the products of condensa 
tion from the regulator. 
J is a valve-box cast with five openings 1 
2345, each of which is screw-threaded. (See 
Figs, 2 and 4.) Over the opening 1 is placed 
a frame IX, having two arms k l', to one of 
which lc is fulcrumed a lever I, that carries 
a weight or weights M, and the lever passes 
through a slot in the arm c'. The frame K 
is held in place (after it has been adjusted to 
the required position) by a nut N, screwed 
into the opening 1 and having a collar Or pro 
jecting flange that clamps the frame IS in 
place. The nut is also provided with a hole 
in its center, through which passes a loose 
stem p, the lower end of which rests on the 
valve P. The valve-box J is connected to the 
cylinder D by a pipe Q, that can be screwed 
into either of the openings 3 or 5, the other 
being closed by a plug. 7, and it is connected 
to the main steam-pipe by a pipe R, that can 
be screwed into either of the openings 2 or 4, 
and the other is closed by a screw-plug 6. 
The piston C is provided in its bottom with 
one or more small holes c, through which the 
steam that enters the cylinder A and the pro 
ducts of condensation pass to the condenser F, 
where the steam is condensed and the pro 
ducts carried off by the petcock I. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown the steam admitted 
to the cylinder A on the under side of the pis 
ton C and the upper end of the cylinder con 
nected to a condenser F by a pipe S. In this 
case I have shown a spray-condenser; but 
either a spray or surface condenser may be 
employed, and to the cylinder-cover B is se 
cured a small bent pipe T, fitted with a stop 
cock i. This pipe is to admit the required 
amount of air to the cylinder as the piston C 
falls, which in this case is lowered by means 
of weights U, placed upon the upper end of 
the piston-rod D, which is extended to receive 
Sale. 
In Fig. 5 I have shown the regulator em 
ployed as a steam-pressure regulator, the pis 
ton-rod D being attached to one end of a le 
wer of valve V on the main steam-pipe W. 
by means of a cord or chain X, that passes 
over pulleys Y Y. 
In Fig. 6 I have shown the regulator as ap 
plied to a damper, in which case the cord or 
chain X is connected to the lever 2 of the 
damper Z. 
In both Figs, 5 and 6 I have shown the cyl 
inder A and condenser Fas being in the boiler 
room and the regulating - valve in the en 
gine-room or office. It will be seen that while 
75 
90 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
469,378 
5 
O 
the pressure is controlled by the regulator in 
the boiler-room the regulating-valve can be 
arranged in another room away from the same. 
In the drawings I have shown the cylinder 
A Supported by a bracket A*. 
The operation is as follows: When applied 
as a steam-pressure regulator, as shown in 
Fig. 5, the steam passes in the direction of 
the arrow 8 through the valve V in the steam 
pipe W, and the regulator is connected to said 
Steam-pipe by a small pipe R on the low-press 
lure side of the valve V, and the steam pass 
ing up the pipe R enters the regulator through 
the valve J onto the top of the piston C, which 
as the pressure increases is forced down, 
and the piston-rod, being connected to the 
weighted lever v of the valve V by means of 
the cord X, draws up the lever, thus closing 
the valve. The steam in the cylinder escapes 
through the small openings c in the bottom of 
the piston C, thus allowing the piston to be 
raised by the weighted lever 4, the valve V 
being opened accordingly. The steam passing 
under the piston C forms a cushion and causes 
the piston to move steadily and prevents it 
from being operated too rapidly or by jerks. 
The steam that passes through the openings 
C passes down into the condenser F, where it 
is condensed, and the products of condensa 
tion are carried off by the petcock. When 
applied as a damper-regulator, as shown in 
Fig. 6, the action is exactly the same, only the 
steam may be taken directly from the steam 
generator by the pipe R', and the piston-rod 
D is connected to the lever 2 of the damper Z. 
It will be seen that by this construction steam 
can be admitted to the valve-box J by either 
of the openings 2 or 4 and pass to the cylin 
der A through either of the openings 3 or 5, 
25 
35 
the other openings being closed by Screw- 4o 
plugs 6 and 7. It will also be seen that the 
regulator can be placed in the boiler-room and 
the regulating-valve belocated in any desired 
place or apartment away from the regulator, 
so that the pressure can be adjusted and be 
under the control of the superintendent or 
engineer. 
45 
55 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A steam-pressure or damper regulator 
consisting of a cylinder having a piston-head 
provided with one or more small openings, a 
valve for regulating the admission of steam, a 
pipe connecting said valve and cylinder, and 
a condenser attached to said cylinder, Sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. A steam-pressure or damper regulator 
consisting of a cylinder A, piston C, having 
small holes c, piston-rod D, valve-box J, and 
valve Pfor regulating the admission of steam 
to the cylinder, in combination with a con 
denser F for condensing the steam as it passes 
from the cylinder A, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a steam-pressure or damper regulator, 
the combination of a cylinder, a piston pro 
vided with one or more small holes, a piston 
rod, weights mounted upon said rod, and all 
air-pipe with a condenser, and a valve for con 
trolling the admission of steam to the cylin 
der, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof. I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 8th day of 
March, A. D. 1890. 
JAMES J. LOWDEN. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. STEERE, 
EDWIN PLANTA, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469473.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 469,473, 
 
 
 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892. 
A. HAY. 
LOOM FOR WEAVING CANE, &c. 
Es 
ai .. al C 
f 
al 
C 
3. 
33 
Sigif ea. s' S42 
Sg S.S. 
SS SS 
 
ERS 
e 
(No Model.) 
No. 469,473. 
A. HAY, 
L00M FOR WEAVING CANE, &c. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892. 
  
 
 
  
s 
2. 
e 
5 
a 
 
At 
Sia 
s i.e., H N 
S S. hET 
39S 
 
A 
A. HAY. 
L00M FOR WEAVING CANE, &c. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 469,473, 
23 
 
 
6. 
THE MORRIS FETERS co, PHOTo-LTHo, washington, o, c. 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 469,473. 
A, HAY. 
L00M FOR WEAVING CANE, &c. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARCHIBALD HAY, OF WOODSTOCK, CANADA. 
LOOM FOR WEAVING CANE, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 469,473, dated February 23, 1892. 
Application filed December 5, 1889, Renewed December 7, 1891, Serial No. 414,283, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
. Beit known that I, ARCHIBALDHAY, manu 
facturer, of the town of Woodstock, in the 
county of Oxford, in the Province of Ontario, 
Canada, have invented a certain new and Im 
proved Loom for Weaving Cane, &c., of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
machine for Weaving cane for chair-bottoms 
or for weaving matting in such a manner that 
the pattern of the came or other material 
worked can be readily changed, and where 
by the warp-strands may be fed forward 
and weft-strands laid in place automatically; 
and it consists, essentially, of a pattern-drum 
with rows of removable pins which actuate 
treadles, to which the spindles for raising or 
lowering the Warp-strands are attached; sec 
only, of means for effecting the rotation of 
the pattern-drum; thirdly, of a rod deriving 
a transverse motion from the swinging of the 
batten and carrying at One end thereof nip 
pers which automatically clutch the end of 
the weft-cane and draw it through the shed; 
fourthly, of a feed-roller so operated as to 
feed the warp-strands forward automatically 
a suitable distance, as hereinafter described, 
and, fifthly, of means for regulating the ten 
sion of the warp-strands. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the ma 
chine. Fig.2 is alongitudinal section through 
the machine. Fig. 3 is a plan view with pat 
tern-drum and other parts. removed. Fig. 4 
is a detail of the nippers. Fig. 5 is a detail 
of the mechanism for operating the feeding 
roller. Fig. 6 is a detail view showing one of 
the spring-actuated spindles. Fig. 7 is a de 
tail view showing the weft-strand holder. 
In the drawings like letters and numerals 
of reference indicate similar parts in the dif 
erent figures. 
In Fig. 1, A is the pattern-drum, and B a 
ratchet-disk whereby the drum is moved. Ct. 
Ct. are removable pins or cams, a few only of 
which are shown in position on the periphery 
of the drum. b b are a series of pivoted 
treadles pivotally attached to each of the 
upright spindles c, which raise or lower the 
strands of the warp, as the removable pins a 
come in contact with or release the treadies, 
as the pattern - drum A rotates. (Vide also 
. 
Fig. 2.) The pattern - drum A is journaled 
on standards C, forming part of the frame 
of the machine. Spring - actuated spindles 
e are arranged in alternating rows in the 
spindle-frame D, so that each strand d of 
the warp while passing between two of the 
spindles is pressed down on the base 35 of 
the frame D by the end of one of the spring 
actuated spindles e. By the arrangement 
of the spindles in alternate rows, as shown, 
more room is allowed for each spindle and 
its attachments. By means of nuts 31, work 
ing in threads on the tension-spindle e, (vide 
Fig. 6, also Figs. 1, 2, and 3,) the force of 
expansion-Springs 33, and consequent press 
ure of heads 34 of the extension-spindlese 
on the Warp-strands d, may be increased or 
decreased at pleasure. Between the base 35 
and stay-frame 36 are guide-wires 32, two in 
front of each head 34, between which wires 
the warp-strands dpass from under the heads 
34 to the upright spindles c. Each strandid 
of the warp after passing from the spring-actu 
ated spindles e is threaded through an eyelet 
in the upright spindle c, then through a com 
partment " of the reed I, and thence to the 
feed-rollers E and F, between which it is 
passed. The ends of the cane or other mate 
rial which form the warp-strands are joined 
together, so as to form a long continuous 
strand. E is the upper feed-roller and F the 
lower one, which last is mounted in adjust 
able blocks F, having slots through which 
pass bolts f', by means of which the said 
blocks are secured to the frame of the loom. 
Bearing against the under side of each block 
is a set-screw f, by turning which in one di 
rection the block F can be raised, or it can be 
lowered by turning the screw f in the other 
direction if the nutsf' on the outer ends of 
the bolts f' are not screwed up too tight, and 
thus the space between the rollers may be 
regulated. If preferred, after the adjustment 
has been made, the nutsf' on the bolts f' 
may be Screwed up tight and the adjustment 
thus made fixed. 30 is a hand-wheel on the 
upper feed-roller E, so that when a cane bot 
tom has been woven by the machine the warp 
Strands and Woven material may be moved 
forward by hand and a gate may be left where 
there are no weft-strands at the place where 
O 
35 
45 
90 
95 
ICCd 
2 
- 
469,473 
O 
the cane bottoms are to be severed from each 
other. G is the beam on which the Woven 
material is wound and is operated by the end 
less belt g on the drums g h". His the bat 
ten-frame pivoted on the base of the frame 
at lc, as shown in Fig. 2, and carrying the 
reed I, which packs the weft in place, the bat 
ten deriving its swinging motion from the piv 
oted arms J, pivoted to the rims of wheels K, 
fixed on the ends of the shaft K' and to the up 
perpart of the batten-frame II. 
L. is the Weft 
frame attached to the batten-frame Hand mov 
ing along with it. M is the nipper-rod, which 
has a cross-headh attached to it. This croSS 
head h is attached to the forked rod N by the 
rods i, which are pivotally attached to the 
prongsion each side of the weft-frame L. The 
lower end of the forked rod N is pivoted at k to 
the bracket O, which is bolted to theside of the 
batten H. P is the pivoted arm which gives 
the transverse throw to the nipper-rod M and 
is pivoted at l to the batten, and its lower end 
is pivoted at n to the link 2, which is attached 
to the pivoted arm N at n and is adjustable 
as to length to vary the throw by removing 
the bolts in said link, lengthening the link by 
putting the bolts into other holes m in said 
link and screwing up the same. R is a fixed 
inclined plane (vide also Fig. 3) formed on 
the frame of the machine, against which the 
head o of the rod P is adapted to move as the 
batten swings to and fro, and S is a strong 
spring which draws the forked rod N back 
into the position shown in the drawings, car 
rying the nipper-rod M across the machine 
to clutch a strand of the weft p. The motion 
of the batten-frame H to the front draws the 
head of the rod P in and throws the adjust 
able link Q, as well as the arm N, outward 
from the frame, causing the hipper-rod to 
draw a strand of the weft p through the shed 
formed by the separated strands d of the warp. 
S' is a ratchet-wheel for operating the feed 
roller F, more particularly shown in Fig. 5. 
It will be understood that, only a small num 
ber of treadles b and upright spindles c are 
shown in the drawings; but the series extends 
across the whole width of the pattern-drum A, 
the upright spindles c being alternately raised 
and depressed, as hereinafter explained. 
In Fig. 2 is seen more particularly the means 
of raising and lowering the strands d of the 
warp, thus forming the shed through which 
the weft-strand p is drawn, and of causing 
the batten-frame H to Swing, by means of the 
pivoted arm J, on the wheel K. Tisa balance 
lever pivoted on the spindle a' of the pattern 
drum A and counterweighted at q to balance 
the bent arm U, notched at r". This bent arm 
U passes through the spring-actuated guide 
s, which holds the arm t in its normal po 
sition. The upper end of the bent notched 
arm U is pivoted at all to the balance-lever T. 
The spring-actuated dog t is shown engaged 
in a tooth before the bent arm. U is raised. 
The spring-actuated dog i passes through the 
lugs on the balance-lever T and is provided 
with a handle t', pivoted at the end to the le 
vert to draw the dog out of the teeth of the 
ratchet-disk B, and a spring t to force it back 
into its normal position against the tooth of 
the disk B when the pattern-drum A is want 
On the wheel K there is a lug 
ed to rotate. 
'u', which as the wheel revolves engages with 
the notch r on the bent arm U and raises the 
bent arm up, causing the pattern-drum A to 
rotate one notch. Through the balance-lever 
T passes the spindle v, which is pivoted at 
its lower end to the bent arm U and carries 
near its upper end a collar v', to which one 
end of a spiral expansion-spring v is at 
tached, whose other end is firmly secured to 
the balance-lever T, and is so arranged and 
connected to these parts that as the arm U is 
raised, and carries with it the balance-lever 
T, the latter as it rises expands the spring 
ac, because the rod v rises faster than that 
part of the lever T, through which it passes, 
and said spring v, being expanded, thus tends 
to force the spindle down through the bal 
ance-lever T, and carry downward the bent 
arm U, so that when the lug u? becomes dis 
engaged from the notch in the bent arm U 
the expansion-spring U contracts and said 
arm U is forced down by said expansion 
spring and away from the lever T, so that the 
spring-actuated dog t may be in position to 
engage with the next notched tocth on the 
ratchet-disk B prior to the next raising of the 
bent arm U by the lug at', on the rotating 
wheel K. The removable pins a on the pat 
tern-drum A are arranged according to the 
pattern desired to be woven. The series of 
pins come successively in contact with the 
series of treadies b, two of which are shown 
in Fig. 2, one in its normal position raised up 
by the expansion-spring a on the upright 
spindle c, carrying a strand d of the warp, 
which passes through an eyelet in the said 
spindle and thence to the feeding-rollers E 
and F, and the other treadle is depressed by 
one of the removable pins a coming in con 
tact with it and pushing down the upright 
spindle c, through which another strand d of 
the Warp is threaded. In this manner the 
series of strands d forming the warp may be 
raised or depressed, as required, according to 
the position of the removable pins a on the 
pattern - drum which come in contact with 
the treadles, and a shed is formed between 
the strands d of the warp, through which 
the strands p of the weft are drawn and 
packed into place by the reed I. V are 
hooked tension-rods which hook on each of 
the strands d of the warp, so as to increase 
the tension of the strands, as may be desired. 
W are scissors placed on the side of the frame 
for the purpose of cutting the strands p of the 
Weft, When not already cut, to the proper width 
of the material to be woven, the warp-frame 
L striking an arm of the scissors and bring 
ing the cutting-edges onto the weft-strand to 
be cut, when the weft-strand is pushed into 
place by the reed I on the batten-frame II, 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
fo 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
I o5 
IO 
I 15 
I 25 
- 
- all 
75 
469,473 
25 - 
25 is a string attached to the scissors W and 
weft-frame L to pull the scissors open on the 
back swing of the batten H. 2 is a strand 
holder for holding the end of the weft-strand 
5 p so as to be gripped by the nippers on the 
end of the nipper-rod M. This strand-holder 
comprises a base-piece 37, grooved at 38. 39 
is a standard on which a thumb-piece 40 is 
pivoted at 41. 42 is a pressure-rod pivoted near 
Io the end of the thumb-piece 40 and having a 
head 43 resting on the weft-strand and pressed 
thereon by means of contracting spring 44, 
attached to the end of thumb-piece 40 and 
frame 45. When it is desired to release the 
I5 strand p from the strand-holder 2, the finger 
is pressed on the end 46 of the thumb-piece, 
thus raising the head 43 from the surface of 
the weft-strand p. 47 is a guide for the press 
ure-rod. In its normal condition the strand 
2O p is pressed on by the head 43 by virtue of 
the spring 44. X is the expansion-spring for 
throwing up the end of the lever-arm 20, which 
operates the ratchet-wheel S' on the spindle 
of the lower feed-roller F, as shown in Fig. 5. 
Fig. 3 illustrates more particularly the 
transverse motion of the nipper-rod M and 
the mode of gripping the end of the weft 
strandp,which is fed into the machine through 
the strand-holder 2. The jaws of the nippers 
3o YY', formed on the end of the nipper-rod M, 
are shown in detail in Fig. 4. In the position 
shown in Fig. 3 the jaws of the nippers have 
just been opened to grip the end of the weft 
strand p. The head o of the pivoted arm P 
35 is shown in the same position against the in 
clined plane R, as in Fig. 1, the batten H hav 
ing just been moved back, as indicated, and 
the nipper-arm M extending transversely 
across the machine. When the batten-frame 
4o. His moved forward by the arms J to the 
full extent of its throw, the nipper-rod M, 
carrying the weft-strand p, is drawn back 
by the prongsi on the forked rod N, so as 
to clear the warp-strands d and permit the 
45 reed I to pack or push the weft-strand p into 
place. Z is a dog pivoted on fixed spindle 2', 
and l is a spring for holding the dog in po 
sition to engage with the lever 2, which is 
pivoted at 3 on the cross-head h and at 21 to 
5o the rod 4. The spring 5 is attached to the le 
wer 2 and rod 4, so that when the lever 2 is 
moved in Wardly up against the pivoted dog Z. 
the rod 4 is drawn back and the jaws Y Y 
are opened, as shown in Fig. 4. When the 
55 lever 2 has freed itself from the pivoted dog 
Z, the spring 5 throws the rod 4 back to its 
normal position and closes the jaws. When 
the nipper-rod M is on its reverse movement, 
the dog Z is allowed by the spring l to yield, 
6o and thus allow the lever 2 to slip past it, after 
which said spring l' returns the dog Z to its 
normal position to engage With and operate 
said lever 2. 
Fig. 4 is the detail of the nipper. 6 is a 
65 guide for rod 4, and at the end of said rod is 
rigidly fixed a pin 7, which passes through a 
diagonal slot 8 in the lower jaw Y', which is 
3 
pivoted on the nipper-rod M, which pin also 
passes through a slot 9, formed in the reduced 
end of rod M, and which slot 9 is parallel to 
the axis of said rod. The pin also passes 
into another diagonal slot 10, formed in the 
upper jaw Y, which is also pivoted to the nip 
per-rod on the same pivot-pin 30 as jaw Y'. 
In the upper jaw Y the direction of the slot 
10 is the reverse of that of slot 8 in the lower 
jaw Y', as indicated, the pressure of the pin 
on the sides of the diagonal slots opening and 
closing the jaws as the rod 4 moves to and 
fro. When the jaws are to be opened for the 
purpose of gripping the weft-strandp, the rod 
4 moves in the direction indicated by the ar 
row, and the reverse motion of the rod 4 closes 
the jaw. After the weft-strand p has been 
drawn through the shed, and frame L, by the 
forward motion of the batten H, has been 
moved forward to the bracket 11, the cross 
head h, carrying the lever 2, is in such posi 
tion that the end of the lever 2 engages with 
the adjustable dog 12 on the bracket 11, draws 
back the bar 4, and reopens the jaws Y Y', 
thus releasing the weft-strand p, and the jaws 
close when the lever 2 is released from the 
adjustable dog 12, and the spring 5 throws 
the rod 4 back to its normal position. 13 13 
are two strings on each side of the warp 
strands, so as to form an even edge. They 
are threaded through the upright spindles C 
and compartments i' in the reed I in the same 
manner as the strands d of the warp, the 
strings passing from boxes 14 through ten 
sion-regulating devices 15, where the string 
is pressed between a washer 16, acted upon 
by the spring 17, and the head of the spin 
dle 18. 
Fig. 5 shows the mechanism for taking up 
the fabric as it is woven. X is an expansion 
spring, one end bearing on the bracket 19, 
which is attached to the loom-frame, and the 
other bearing under the end of the lever 20, 
which is pivoted on the spindle 21 of the 
ratchet-wheel S'. A spring-actuated dog 22, 
working through guides formed in the lever 
20, engages with the successive teeth in the 
ratchet-wheel S as it is caused to rotate. 
When the batten H, carrying the weft-frame 
L., Swings to the front, the frame L engages 
with the lever 20, pressing it down and caus 
ing the spring-actuated dog 22 to move the 
ratchet-wheel S. When the frame L again 
moves back, so as to free the lever-arm 20, 
the expansion-Spring X throws the lever-arm 
20 up again to its normal position, the spring 
actuated dog 22 engaging with another tooth 
on the ratchet-wheel. Each forward motion 
of the frame L, caused by the swinging of 
the batten H, depresses the lever-arm 20 and 
rotates the ratchet-wheel S, which, being on 
the same spindle 21 as the lower feed-roller 
F, causes the latter to rotate and pulls the 
Strands of the Warp forward, as well as the 
woven material, between the feed-rollers E 
and F, the Woven material being wound upon 
the beam G. 23 is a handle attached to a rod 
CO 
I to 
II5 
I 25 
469,478 
O 
25 
35 
4.d 
45 
So 
25 for disengaging the Spring-actuated dog 22 
from the teeth on the ratchet-wheel S when 
it is desired to stop the feeding forward of 
the warp-strands d, its end being pivotally 
attached to the end of the spring-actuated 
dog 22, and working through a guide 24, 
formed on the lever 20. This rod 25 is fur 
nished with an expansion-spring 26 to throw 
it back to the normal position after having been 
pushed in so as to disengage the spring-actu 
ated dog 22 from the ratchet-teeth. When the 
width of the fabric to be woven is determined 
on, the requisite number of warp-strands 
is drawn through the spindles in the frame D. 
Each strand is then threaded through the 
eyelet in its upright spindle c, then through 
the compartments i' in the reed I, and be 
tween the feed-rollers E and F. The hooked 
tension-rods V may then be hung on the 
warp-strands d and the removable pins C, ar 
ranged on the pattern-drum A, according to 
the pattern desired in the woven material. 
When the machine is started and the pat 
tern-drum rotates, the treadlesb are depressed 
as they come in contact with the pins a 
on the pattern-drum A and a shed is formed. 
A weft-strand p is inserted into the strand 
holder 2 ready to be gripped by the nippers 
on the nipper-rod M, when it is moved trans 
versely across the machine through the shed 
formed by the warp-strands d, and is drawn 
through and pushed into place by the reed 
I; a weft-strand p being inserted each time 
the nippers come forward to meet it, drawn 
through the shed and pushed into place, as 
before. The material thus woven is wound 
automatically on the beam G. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a loom, the combination of a pattern 
drum with removable pins, a series of treadles 
pivotally attached to a series of upright 
spindles with eyelets through which the 
warp-strands are threaded, and expansion 
springs for keeping the upright spindles nor 
mally raised, substantially as described and 
specified. 
2. In a loom, the combination of a pattern 
drum with removable pins, a ratchet-disk, a 
counterweighted balance-lever pivoted on the 
spindle of the pattern-drum, a Spring-actuated 
dog adapted to engage with the teeth of the 
ratchet-disk, a notched bent arm, a spring 
actuated guide, a wheel having a lug adapted 
to engage with a notch on the bent arm, and 
a spindle connected with the balance-lever 
and pivoted to the upper part of the bent 
arm and provided with an expansion-spring 
bearing on the upper side of the balance-le 
ver, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose specified. 
3. In a loom, a Weft-frame, a nipper-rod 
mounted thereon and provided with nippers 
adapted to open and clutch the weft-strand 
at the end of the transverse throw of the rod 
and draw the weft-strand through the shed, a 
forked rod pivotally connected with a cross 
head on the nipper-rod, a batten-frame, a 
bracket to which the forked rod is pivoted 
attached to said batten-frame, a contracting 
spring connected with the bracket and forked 
rod, an inclined plane on the frame of the 
machine, an arm pivoted to the batten-frame 
and having a head adapted to move on said 
inclined plane, an extensible link pivoted to 
the pivoted arm as well as to the forked rod, 
a driving-wheel, and a pivoted arm or pitman 
attached to said driving-wheel and to the up 
per part of the batten-frame for operating 
the same, substantially as described, and in 
the manner specified. 
4. The weft-frame L and the reciprocating 
rod M, mounted on said weft-frame and having 
slotted nipper-jaws YY, in combination with 
rod 4, provided with a pin 7, engaging in the 
slots in said jaws to open and close the same, 
substantially as described. 
5. The weft-frame E. and reciprocating nip 
per-rod M, mounted on said weft-frame and 
having slotted nipper-jaws YY, in combina 
tion with rod 4, provided with a pin 7, engag 
ing in the slots in said jaws to open and close 
the same, and the spring-actuated dog Z, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. The weft-frame L and the reciprocating 
nipper-rod M, mounted on said frame and 
having slotted nipper-jaws. YY, in combina 
tion with rod 4, provided with pin 7, engaging 
in the slots in said jaws to open and close the 
Same, the spring-actuated dog Z, pivoted lever 
2, spring 5, swinging batten-frame H, bracket 
11, and dog 12, substantially as specified. 
7. The combination, with the reciprocating 
nipper-rod M, having a longitudinal slot, and 
the diagonally-slotted jaws Y Y', pivoted to 
said nipper-rod, of the rod 4, mounted on said 
nipper-rod and provided with the pin 7, con 
structed to reciprocate in the slots in the nip 
per-rod and jaws, to open and close said jaws, 
substantially as described. 
8. The combination of the pattern-drum A, 
means for imparting an intermittent motion 
to said drum, the removable pins a, the piv 
oted treadlesb, the upright spindles c, through 
which the warp-strands d are threaded, and 
the expansion - springs ac, substantially as 
specified. 
9. The combination, with the bent arm U, 
notched at r, of the lug l', driving-wheel K, 
the balance-lever T, counterweighted at Q, 
spring-actuated dog i, ratchet-disk B, expan 
Sion-Spring 20, spindle v, and pattern-drum A, 
substantially as specified. 
10. The combination of the batten-frame II, 
adapted to swing on pivot K', the arm P, head 
0, inclined plane R, extensible link Q, spring 
S, bracket O, forked arm N, and the nipper 
rod M, pivoted to the arm N, whereby the 
nipper-rod is given a transverse throw at each 
movement of the batten-frame, substantially 
as specified. 
11. The combination, in a loom, of an in 
termittently-revolving pattern-drum, a swing 
ing batten-frame, a nipper-rod carrying nip 
perS moving on said batten-frame, removable 
9o 
95 
IOO 
ITO 
15 
469,473 
5 
pins on the pattern-drum, a series of treadles 
operated by the said pins, upright spindles 
pivoted to the treadles and having eyes for 
the Warp-strands, springs acting on the spin 
dles, a reed on the batten-frame to press into 
place the weft-strands, an automatic mechan 
ism for faking up the woven material at each 
movement of the pattern-drum, and means 
for regulating the tension of the warp-strands 
and for giving motion to the pattern-drum and 
nipper-rod, substantially as described. 
12. The combination, with the spindle-frame 
O 
D, of the adjustable springs 33, means for ad 
justing said springs, and the tension-spindles 
e, arranged in alternating rows and having 
heads 34 adapted to adjustably press on the 
warp-strands on the base of the spindle-frame, 
substantially as described. 
Woodstock, October 22, 1889. 
ARCHIBALD HAY. 
In presence of 
ALFRED S. BALL, 
II. WESTCOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469573.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 469,573, 
 
G. W. KELLEY. 
CARPET SWEEPER, 
Patented Feb. 23, 1892. 
28iticssos 
(644- 2 
2.5 se 53 bi 
2. 
 
3v Uevlbot 
9tary W. Katey 
6. UOwdar ovu, 
elttov ve 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. KELLEY, OF GOSHEN, INDIANA. 
CAR PET SWEEPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 469,578, dated February 23, 1892. 
Application filed September 30, 1889, Serial No,325,537, (No model.) 
To atti whon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. KELLEY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Goshen, in the county of Elkhart and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Carpet-Sweepers; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a representation 
of this invention in perspective. Fig. 2 is a 
partiallongitudinal section. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse section. Fig. 4 is a detail view in per 
spective. 
This invention has relation to carpet-sweep 
ers; and it consists in the novel construction 
and combination of the parts, as hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
indicates the sweeper-case, and B the handle, 
journaled at each end thereof. 
Inside the sweeper-case, near one end, is 
provided a transverse slide or partition C, 
having a central vertical open slot cl, through 
which passes the shaft of a brush E, the lat 
ter being vertically immovable in its bearings. 
Said partition separates drive-wheels F and 
the pulley-wheel G. from the brush-chamber 
and has a vertical motion in ways or guides c 
in the sides H H of said case, a stud b being 
rovided at each end to engage slots 
in 
said sides to limit its vertical motion, which 
is communicated by a spring L. This spring 
is secured to the partition C centrally above 
its vertical central slot, d. The arms of the 
25 J 
35 ) 
45 
5 5 
spring extend laterally toward either side, 
bearing at their ends against the interior sur 
face of the top portion of the sweeper-case. 
The driving-wheels are mounted on studs riv 
eted to vertical-shaped hangers M, and the 
latter are pivoted at their upper ends to the 
partition C, one on each side of the slot d. 
Their lower ends, which are slotted at r, pro 
ject back at right angles to engage by means 
of said slots the pins or screws son the lower 
edge of said partition. The object of the piv 
oted slotted hangers is to permit lateral ad 
justment of the driving-wheels, and also to 
communicate upward vertical motion to the 
partition C when the wheels are subjected to 
pressure from above. The object of this con 
struction is to allow the brush to be brought 
in closer relation with the floor through the 
downward pressure of the handle upon the 
sweeper while the latter is in motion. When 
the floor is bare or covered with oil-cloth, this 
increased pressure causes the wheels to rise, 
and the brush has a firmer hold, thus enabling 
it to search out the dust hidden in the in 
equalities of the surface. 
What I claim as my invention is 
In a carpet-sweeper, the combination, with 
the driving-wheels mounted upon laterally 
adjustable hangers and the vertically-mov 
able spring-actuated slotted partition, of the 
self - adjusting removable brush and the 
sweeper-case, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE W. KELLEY. 
Witnesses: 
E. E. MUMMERT, 
G. L. LAMB. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469673.txt	(No Model.) 
S. W. BECKWITH, 
HAND FOR TIMEPIECES, 
No. 469,673. 
Patented Mar, l l892, 
Z727.5 
1 -e 
& 2- a 
132, f 
TWAZWASSAS 
2%r a zC. 
S22722zez), Z5ec/ezzzzz, 
Aziz Oze 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL V. BECKWITH, OF WINSTED, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE WM. 
L. GILBERT CLOCK COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
HAND FOR TIME-PIECEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 469,673, dated March 1, 1892. 
Application filed November 4, 1890, Serial No. 370,267, (No model.) 
2O claims. 
15 gral spindle-grasping arms. 
To all, whon it inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL V. BECKWITH, 
of Winsted, in the county of Litchfield and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
5 new and useful Improvements in Hands for 
Time-Pieces, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, whereby any one 
skilled in the art can make and use the same. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
Io comparatively cheap, secure, and durable 
means for attaching hands of clocks and other 
like structures to the spindle; and to this end 
it consists in a hand, pointer, or like part hav 
ing a spindle-socket and provided with inte 
It further consists in details of the several 
parts making up the device as a whole and 
in their combination, as more particularly 
hereinafter described, and pointed out in the 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a de 
tail plan view of a blank for a hand of a clock 
or like time-piece. Fig. 2 is a detail view in 
side elevation of a spindle and in section of 
25 the hand. Fig. 3 is a detail view in section 
of the die and punch, illustrating the method 
of making the fastening-arms on the pointer. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter C. 
indicates a clock-hand or a similar pointer or 
3o index that is in use, secured to a spindleb, 
so that the hand will conform to the move 
ments (usually rotary) of the spindle. 
Prior to my invention the hands of a clock, 
for use on which my invention is particularly 
35 adapted, have been attached by punching a 
square hole in one of the hands to enable it 
to fit upon the squared part of the spindle, 
and the other hand has been provided with a 
cylindrical socket-piece secured to the hand 
4o by clamping the end of the socket-piece in a 
socket in the hand. These devices are usu 
ally fastened by thrusting a pin through a 
hole in the spindle and holding the hands be 
tween the face of the time-piece and the pin. 
In the practice of my invention a peculiar 
punch c, having a pyramidal cutting-point c', 
is used. Immediately back of the cutting 
point the shaping part c of the punch con 
forms in outline in cross-section to the shape 
45 
65 
it is desired to give the hole through the hand, 5o 
and back of the shaping part is a shoulder c. 
By means of this punch and a suitable died, 
having a socket d', the metal of the blank a 
is cut, punched, turned outward, and pressed 
to shape at one and the same operation, form- 55 
ing the integral grasping-arms a'. These arms 
extend substantially at right angles to the 
hand and are arranged about the opening in 
Such manner as to form clamping means for 
holding the hand securely upon the spindle b. 
The point of the punch c is formed with cut 
ting-edges, so that the metal of the hand is 
cut through and the cuts divide that portion 
of the metal which filled the socket into inte 
gral parts. 
By means of the tool substantially as de 
Scribed I am enabled to provide a cheap, 
strong, and Serviceable hand for a time-piece 
or like article, having all the advantages of 
the old hands and possessing the advantage 
of strength, durability, and ready adaptation 
to its intended use. 
The spindle-socketin the hand may be made 
of any desired shape, so as to conform either 
to a spindle having a polygonal outline in 
cross-section or one that is cylindrical inform, 
and in this regard it is immaterial whether 
the spindle be solid or hollow; and the inte 
gral spindle-grasping arms may consist of a 
tubular projection or be divided into several 
parts without departing from my invention. 
I claim as my invention 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a hand or pointer for time-pieces, having a 
spindle-socket and provided with integral 
spring grasping means for attachment to a 
Spindle, arranged about said socket and pro 
jecting outwardly from the pointer, all sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In combination with a spindle, a hand 
for time-pieces, having a spindle-socket and 
provided with spring grasping-arms adapted 
to grasp a spindle and integral with the hand, 
all substantially as described. 
9 O 
75 
SAMUEL W. BECKWITH. 
Witnesses: 
STEPHEN C. WHEELER, 
IUBERTP. WETMORE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469773.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 469,773. 
A COLTON. 
TOY SAWINGS BANK, 
Patented Mar, l, 1892. 
s N SN 
N \ S 
WN 
W 
N 
N 
Y- 
22222222 
R N N N N N 
N 
JFITWESSES 
&C. (2. 'cry 
yozz-6742 
IWWEWTOf 
227. 
rhenoaris perERs co, photo-Lithto. washington, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR COLTON, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
TOY SAVINGS - BANK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 469,778, dated March 1, 1892. 
Application filed October 9, 1891, Serial No. 408,222, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it nay concern: 
Beit known that I, ARTHUR COLTON, of De 
troit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Toy Savings-Bank, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to a toy savings-bank 
intended for the deposition of coins pending 
the collection thereof by the collectors of a 
savings-bank and the entry of the same on 
the deposit-book of such savings-bank to the 
credit of the respective depositors. 
In the annexed drawings, making part of 
this specification, Figure 1 is a vertical cen 
tral section. Fig. 2 is a top view of the base, 
the cap being removed. Fig. 3 is an eleva 
tion, and Fig. 4 is a perspective view showing 
a portion of the cap turned upside down. 
The same letters are employed in all the 
figures in the indication of identical parts. 
A is the base of cast metal, and B the de 
posit-chamber, made up of four sides and top 
plate B. These are made to fit into one an 
other and are held in place by a headed bolt 
screwed through a lug projecting downward 
from the top plate and into a boss on the in 
ner face of one of the side plates. This bolt 
is manipulated by a socket-wrench corre 
sponding to the head of the bolt and inserted 
through a hole B' in the opposite plate. This 
socket-wrench is intended to be retained by 
the collector and to fit all the boxes which 
he may have in charge. 
C is a cap, which in this instance is in the 
similitude of a bee-hive, and is formed with an 
outwardly-projecting flange C, which rests on 
the top plateBand turns freely inside of a cir 
cular molding projecting upward on the face of 
the top plate. This cap C, when fitted to the 
deposit-chamber B, is confined by a threaded 
rodD, extending downward through the crown 
of the cap through apertures tapped into the 
top and bottom plates of the deposit-chamber. 
A nut may be applied to its lower threaded 
end to hold it in place. The cap is formed 
with a lip E, in form a segment of a sphere, 
and made with a slot E, of a size sufficient to 
receive the ordinary coins of circulation. This 
lip is in the flange C", and by turning the cap 
the slot E may be brought into register with 
any one of the slots B in the top plate B, the 
other three slots B being then covered by the 
solid portion of the flange. Inside this lip E 
is formed a series of radial flanges or projec 
tions FGHI, disposed, substantially as shown, 
on opposite sides of the slot E'. In the com 
partments formed by these flanges in the in 
terior of the lip are placed balls K. In the 
case illustratedI have shown five of such balls 
and four flanges; but the number may be va 
ried at discretion. These balls lie in such 
position that they will be pushed aside by any 
coin which is passed down through the slot 
E", some of the balls lying on one side of the 
slot Band some on the other, and all arranged 
so that they extend only slightly beyond the 
slot, so that the coin will strike their inclined 
faces and so part them, respectively, to one side 
and the other; but if an attempt is made to rob 
the bank, when it is turned upside down, the 
balls will roll into the crown of the dome un 
der the slot and prevent the passage down, of 
any of the coins, which, as they lie on their flat 
faces in the chamber, cannot be brought to 
bring pressure on the balls to displace them. 
The deposit-chamber is divided into four 
compartments, (respectively marked 1, 2, 3, 
and 4) each provided with a slot B. The num 
ber is, however, discretionary, as these banks 
may be adapted to a greater or less number 
of depositors by changing the number and ar 
rangement of the compartments to suit. These 
compartments are intended for the use of dif 
ferent members of a family, each depositor 
to be provided with a book, in which the col 
lector Will credit the amount taken from the 
corresponding compartment at each visit. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a toy Savings-bank, in combination 
with the rotary cap C, provided with the slot 
E", the deposit-chamber B, provided with a 
series of compartments B, each having a slot 
B', alternately registering with the slot of the 
cap, substantially as set forth. 
2. The deposit-chamber B of a toy savings 
bank, made up of a base A, four sides, and a 
top plate B, in combination with the threaded 
rod D, by which the parts are confined, a lug 
on the under side of the top plate, a threaded 
o 
25 
35 
45 
95 
OC 
w 
 
2 
469,773 
boss on the interior face of the door-plate, a 
headed bolt B, connecting the two, and an 
opening B' in the opposite side plate, through 
which a socket-wrench may be inserted to un 
lock the door. 
3. In combination with the savings-cham 
ber B, having a series of compartments and 
corresponding slots B, a rotary cap C, with 
flange C and slotted lip E, a series of balls 
Io IX, and internal flanges by which they are re 
spectively confined, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name in the presence of two at 
testing witnesses. 
ARTHUR COLTON. 
Witnesses: 
R. MASON, 
M. A. HONEY. 
- 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469873.txt	(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C. E. SCRIBNER & E. P. WARNER, 
APPARATUS FOR ILLUMINATING CARS OF CABLE ROADS, 
No. 469,873, 
Patented Mar, l, 1892, 
2S 
N 
2 
O 
st 
in 
H. WN 
 
 
 
LE 2.2s 
re, 
77-Z 
Q- Y 
 
C 
Wozzesses. 
Ny 
Z7zvezzrS. 
(2hardeSA, Sc7267aver. 
Arzesz7.20%27aeza 
--- 
the nonris Peters co., Photo-LTHO, was itsar, 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
C. E. SCRIBNER & E. P. WARNER, 
APPARATUS FOR ILLUMINATING CARS OF CABLE ROADS, 
No. 469,873, 
Patented Mar. l. l892. 
 
Gr 
Z7zzvezz-Z75: 
C/ia72es ZSezzazzez 
Z77zesz. AP Zazzez 
22Y (2-2422/62eze-24- A. 
Z(zzesses. 
4. 
76 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
C. E. SCRIBNER & E. P. WARNER. 
APPARATUS FOR LLUMINATING CARS OF CABLE ROADS, 
No. 469,873. 
Patented Mar, l l 892, 
 
Null. 2 
NSN: 222 
  
22 
2. t 2, 2 
0 
S 
QZ\Y 
7. 2, 
 
 
 
2. 
S. 
Tril 
 
ESPN as 
O 
SYIA, 
A. Saga 
Zhis 
3th S. 
ENAE 
SS IN N-7 
Z7zzvezzzo.7s. 
C/ia72e.S. A567.2622e2. 
Z 77zesz AZ02772e). 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIIARLEs E. SCRIBNER AND ERNEST P. WARNER, OF CITICAGO, ILLINOIS, 
ASSIGNORS TO THE WESTERN ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
APPARATUS FOR ILLUMINATING CARS OF CABLE ROADS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 469,873, dated March 1, 1892. 
Application filed October 13, 1891, Serial No. 408,567, (No model.) 
To cold twhOn it hu?tly conce71. 
Be it known that we, CHARLES E. SCRIBNER 
and ERNEST P.WARNER, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Chicago, in the county of 
Cook and State of Illinois, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvement in Ap 
paratus for Illuminating Cars of Cable Roads, 
of which the following is a full, clear, concise, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this specification. 
Our invention relates to apparatus for the 
electric illumination of cars of cable roads. 
Its object is to provide means for keeping a 
dynamo mounted upon a car in constant ro 
tation, whether the car be in motion or not. 
To accomplish this we provide a pulley in 
connection with the car-axle, or with a sepa 
rate wheel rolling upon the track, which pull 
ley, through intermediate gear, serves to com 
municate rotary motion to the dynamo while 
the car is in motion, and a second pulley in 
connection with a wheel bearing upon the 
cable, which serves to give motion to the dy 
namo while the car is at rest. Motion may 
be transmitted to the dynamo either directly, 
by belts from the two pulleys to the dynamo, 
or by means of a special form of gear. In the 
former case the field-magnets and the arma 
ture of the dynamo are both constructed so 
as to be capable of independent rotation. The 
field-magnets are belted to one of the pulleys 
and the armature to the other. The belts are 
arranged so that the field-magnets and arma 
ture shall revolve in opposite directions. It 
is plain that while the car is not in motion the 
pulley which bears upon the cable is kept in 
continuous rotation by the passage of the ca 
ble over it. This motion is communicated to 
the field-magnets of the dynamo. On the 
other hand, while the car is securely gripped 
to the cable there is no rotation of the wheel 
bearing upon the cable, and the field-magnets 
remain stationary. The armature, however, 
is now kept in rotation by the rotation of the 
car-wheels as they roll upon the track. When 
the car is not securely gripped to the cable, 
there may be some relative motion between 
the car and the cable and some relative mo 
tion between the car and the track. In this 
case the field-magnets are revolved in one di 
5 
O 
25 
45 
 
When our special gear is employed to trans- 65 
rection With a Speed depending upon the rela 
tive motion between the car and cable, and 
the armature is revolved in the opposite di 
rection with a speed depending on the rela- 55 
tive motion of the car and track. Obviously 
the dimensions of the driving and driven pull 
leys may be chosen so as to secure a constant 
relative speed of rotation between the arma 
ture and field-magnets of the dynamo, whether 6o 
the car be in motion with the same speed as 
that of the cable or with less, or be standing 
still, and thus a constant electro-motive force 
or current may be maintained. 
mit motion to the dynamo, the latter may be 
of the ordinary construction. This gear con 
sists of two miter gear-wheels secured to sepa 
rate shafts whose axes are in the same straight 
line, and a third ide miter-wheel meshing 7o 
with both the others and secured in a sepa 
rate block adapted to revolve in the same 
plane as the two miter-wheels. In this com 
pound gear, when either of the shafts is re 
volved while the other remains stationary, the 75 
idle-wheel is rolled around upon the miter 
wheel of the stationary shaft, and hence the 
block carrying the idle-wheel is given a rotary 
motion in the Same direction as that of the 
moving shaft. When this device is employed So 
in our invention, one of the shafts is belted 
or geared to the axle of the car and the other 
to the wheel bearing upon the cable. The 
block carrying the idle-gear is belted to the 
dynamo to be driven. 
vice is the Salme as that of the other-to main 
tain the speed of rotation of the dynamo, and 
thus the electro-motive force, constant, what 
ever the speed of the car. 
Our invention is illustrated in the accom- 9o 
panying drawings. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan of a 
dynalmo whose fields and armatures are both 
capable of rotation in connection with our 
mechanism for maintaining constant speed of 95 
rotation. Fig. 2 is a vertical section through 
the axis of the armature. Fig. 3 is a side ele 
vation showing, also, the mechanism of the 
grip and the disposition of our invention in 
connection there with. Fig. 4 is a plan of the Ioo 
compound gear in connection with our mech 
anism and a dynamo. 
Fig. 5 is a vertical sec 
The effect of this de- 85 
2 
469,873 
tion through the axis of the compound gear, 
showing more clearly its construction. Fig. 
6 is a side elevation of the gear belted to a 
dynamo. 
We will designate parts in the drawing by 
letters of reference, like parts being indicated 
by similar letters of reference in the several 
figures. 
Referring to the drawings, a is the cable. 
b is a wheel bearing upon the cable. 
c is a grooved pulley secured to wheel b. 
In Fig. 3 it will be seen that the wheel b is 
journaled upon the frame of the grip mech 
anism d and supports the cable when the lat 
ter is released by the grip. The grip mech 
anism itself we need not describe in detail, as 
it is wholly immaterial in our invention. 
c' is a pulley mounted upon the axle f of 
the car-wheels. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the dynamo 
g consists of the field-magnets h h', which are 
of such form as to be capable of easy revolu 
tion. The fields are provided with lateral 
extensions 
of some non-magnetic nate 
rial, which encircle the ends of the armature. 
The ends of these extensions are shaped into 
thc sleeves le k', which constitute bearings 
upon which the fields are journaled. The 
armature l is of the usual construction. Its 
shaft l' is journaled in the sleeves lik'. Thus 
the fields and armatures are both capable of 
independent rotation. The current from the 
armature is collected by the brushes ll, at 
tached to the frame of the machine, and is de 
livered from the dynamo at the springs ll. 
The armature-shaft carries the pulley m, 
which is connected by a belt passing through 
the slot in the conduit to the wheel C. One 
of the sleeves k of the field-frame carries the 
pulley m', which is belted to the pulley c'. 
When the car is stationary, the fields h. h.' 
also remain stationary, while the wheel b is 
kept in revolution by the passage of the cable 
over it. 
If, however, the car is in motion 
with the cable, the cable is stationary With 
reference to wheel b, while the fields h. h. are 
kept in rotation in the opposite direction by 
the car-wheels rolling upon the track. 
Referring now to Figs. 4, 5, and 6, we will 
proceed to describe the compound gear in de 
tail. O o' are shafts journaled at o' oo of 
and movable independently. Rigidly secured 
to them are the miter-gears pip'. It is pref 
erable that there should be two or more of the 
idle-wheels q q', in order to preserve the bal 
ance of the mechanism. All the gears may 
be of the same diameter. The wheels qqare 
journaled in the block r. This block serves, 
also, to support the shafts O o' and is free to 
revolve upon them. A pulleys upon the shaft 
o is connected by belt to the wheel b and the 
pulleys' upon shaft o' to wheel c', as in the 
apparatus before described. The block r is 
circular, and its periphery is adapted to re 
65 ceive a beltt, by which it is connected to the 
1-- 
 
s 
Patent- 
dynamo it. When now the car is stationary, 
the gear-wheel p' is also stationary, while the 
wheel p is being rotated by the passage of the 
cable over wheel b. Hence through the in 
strumentality of the wheels q q', which roll 
upon the stationary wheel p', the block r is 
caused to rotate in the same direction as 
the shaft and at half the angular velocity of 
shaft O. When the car is firmly gripped to 
the cable, the shaft o becomes stationary, 
while the shaft o' revolves, causing a revolu 
tion of the block r still in the same direction. 
When, however, the car is going slowly-say 
at half the speed of the cable-both shafts o 
and o' are rotating with the same angular ve 
locity, equal to one-half that of either when 
the other was stationary. Hence the wheels 
q' would roll upon neither of the wheels p 
p', and the block a would be carried round 
with the same angular velocity as when the 
car was stationary or at full speed. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
1. The combination, with a moving cable, 
of a rotary wheel fixed to the car and in con 
tact with the cable, adapted to transmit ro 
tary motion to parts of a mechanism, and a sec 
ond wheel journaled to the car and adapted to 
roll upon a rail or plane when the car is in 
motion and to transmit rotary motion to other 
parts of the said mechanism, substantially in 
the manner described. 
2. The combination, with a cable car, of a 
wheel attached to the car and resting upon 
the cable, adapted to communicate rotary mo 
tion to the field-magnets of a dynamo upon 
the car, and a second wheel attached to the 
car and resting upon a stationary plane or 
rail, adapted to communicate rotary motion in 
the opposite direction to the armature of the 
dynamo, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a moving cable 
and a car adapted to be secured thereto, of a 
wheel attached to the car and resting in con 
tact with the cable, adapted to communicate 
rotary motion to one part of a mechanism 
upon the car, another wheel attached to the 
car, resting upon, a stationary plane or rail 
and adapted to communicate rotary motion 
to another part of said mechanism, and inter 
mediate bodies or mechanism adapted to con 
vert the reciprocal rotary motion of the two 
parts of said mechanism into a continuous ro 
tation in a constant direction of a conductor 
in relation to a magnetic field, substantially 
as described. 
In witness whereof we hereunto subscribe. 
our names this 14th day of September, A. D. 
1891. 
CHARLES E. SCRIBNER. 
ERNEST P. WARNER. 
. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK R. McBERTY, 
GEORGE L. CRAGG. 
75 
95 
IOC 
O 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US469973.txt	(No Model.) 
W. MORROW. 
POTATO DIGCER. 
No. 469,973, 
Patented Mar. 1, 1892. 
 
NaRsees SeO 
7.s 
7. 
 
/V<& (esses N 
Z/4 zeeza. 
/2-(Z-a/-(CO7 
&ziz-6-6-4-46. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WESLEY MORROW, OF MILLBROOK, CANADA. 
POTATO-DIGGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 469,978, dated March 1, 1892. 
Application filed June 30, 1891, Serial No. 397,979, (No model.) 
O 
. 
. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WESLEY MORROW, of 
the village of Millbrook, in the county of Dur 
ham, in the Province of Ontario, Canada, 
have invented a certain new and Improved 
Potato-Digger, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of the invention is to devise a ma 
chine which will dig the potatoes, sift the 
earth from them, and deposit them on the 
ground outside of the row; and it consists in 
the peculiar construction, arrangement, and 
combination of parts hereinafter more particu 
larly described, and then definitely claimed. 
The drawing represents a perspective view 
of my improved potato-digger. 
A represents a light frame made of any 
suitable material and provided with guiding 
handles B. A yoke C is fixed to the front of 
the frame A. To this yoke horses are hitched. 
D is a spade-shaped nose extending from 
the bottom E. This nose D is designed to go 
into the ground and dig up the potatoes. 
The rear of the frame A is supported by the 
ground-wheels F, connected to the axle G, 
which is suitably journaled in the frame A. 
The grate H is composed of a series of slats 
connected at each end to an endless belt I. 
Each belt I is supported at the front of the 
machine by a suitably-journaled pulley J, 
and the rear end of each belt is supported by 
a pulley K. The pulleys K are fixed to a 
suitably-journaled axle, which derives motion 
through the gearing M from the axle G. Some 
of the slats at are above the level of the other 
slats, so as to hold the potatoes as they are 
being elevated by the traveling grate. 
N is a kicker fixed to a shaft O, which de 
rives motion from the gearing M. 
A grate Pis flexibly supported on the frame 
A and derives a vibratory movement by the re 
volving of the axle L, to which it is connected 
by a crank-rod Q. 
The front wheels R are journaled on axles 
extending from the frame S. A block T, fixed 
to the frame A, fits into a slot or guide b, 
-formed in the frame S. The lever U is piv 
oted on the frame S and has a pin d, which 
pin is designed to fit into one of the notches 
e, formed in the block T. When the pin d 
fits into one of the notches e, the frame A is 
supported by the wheels R, In order to ad 
just the frame A so that its nose D may pro 
ject the proper depth in the ground, it is 
merely necessary to move the lever U so as 
to withdraw the pin d from the notch e. 
The frame A may be adjusted so that its nose 
D shall project the proper distance into the 
ground. A spring factuates the lever U, so 
as to hold the pin d in finesh with one of the 
notches e. 
V is a scuffler adjustably connected to the 
yoke C. This scuffler is for the purpose of 
pushing away the potato-tops, leaving the 
ground clear for the excavation of the po 
tato by the nose D. As the machine is pulled 
forward by a horse or otherwise, the potatoes 
are raised by the nose D and deposited on 
the bottom E with the earth which may be 
raised with them. As soon as the potatoes 
come in contact with the grate H they are 
elevated by the said grate until they reach 
the rear end of the machine, when they fall 
off the grate H and are deposited onto the 
grate P, which is vibrated, as before de 
scribed. In passing upon the grate H, which 
is kept in constant agitation by the kicker N 
striking its bottom, the earth is shaken from 
the potatoes through the said grate, leaving 
the potatoes comparatively clean when they 
are deposited upon the grate P, from which 
they slide off onto the ground at the side of 
the row of potatoes. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In an improved potato-digger, a vibrat 
ing grate having two of its sides and its up 
per end inclosed, its lower end arranged to 
deposit the potatoes at one side of the ma-. 
chine and connected on a single pivot by a 
forked piece and its upper end connected to 
the frame of the machine at two pivotal points, 
in combination with a revolving shaft L, op 
erated by the ground-wheels and giving mo 
tion to the sieve by means of a crank-rod Q, 
pivotally connected directly to the upper end 
of said sieve, all substantially as shown and 
described. 
2. The frame A, having a nose D extending 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
 
2 
469,973 
A. 
from the bottom E, and the grate H, suitably 
supported in the frame A, the rear portion of 
which is carried by the ground-wheels F, in 
combination with the wheels R, journaled on 
spindles extending from the frame S, and the 
lever U, pivoted on the frame S and having a 
pin d, designed to engage with the notchese, 
made in the block T, connected to the frame A, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
WESLEY MORROW. 
Toronto, June 16, 1891. 
In presence of 
J. EDW.MAYBEE, 
W. G. MCMILLAN. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470073.txt	(No Model.) 
E. OR TELLI. 
ELECTRIC BATTERY. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 470,073. 
Patented Mar. 1, 1892, 
Z 
7 a 
Z g 3 
SNSSSSSSSSSS Ass2 
SSSSSSSSSSNS 
risis 22 
SNSSSSSSSNS 
 
THE MORRIS PETERs co., Photo-Lithto., WASHINGTON, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 470,073. 
E, ORTELLI, 
ELECTRIC BATTERY, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 2, 
Patented Mar. l. l892. 
 
 
_}=ZZZZZZZZZ#ZzZzZzZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzZzzzZzZzZzZzZ 
No.?: N 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZr:ZZZZZZZZZpzzzZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ N N 
the Norris PETERs co, Photo-ITHo., WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERMINIO ORTELLI, OF CADEN ABBIA, ITALY. 
ELECTRIC BATTERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,073, dated March 1, 1892. 
Application filed September 18, 1890, Serial No. 365,392, (No model.) 
Cd 
To all whom it may concern: 
engineer, a subject of the King of Italy, re- or some other insulating substance. 
siding in Cadenabbia, Province of Como, Italy, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Primary Electric Piles; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof. 
The principle upon which my pile or bat 
tery is based resides in the property which the 
metalloids of the first group-viz., bromine, 
chlorine, flourine, and iodine-have of uniting 
with hydrogen and forming therewith at an 
Ordinary temperature strong acids, which are 
very soluble in water and which attack almost 
all metals, thereby producing hydrogen. Any 
one of the four metalloids hereinbefore men 
tioned will answer the purpose equally well. 
For the purpose of the present specification, 
however, I will refer to chlorine and term it collected and employed afresh. 
the gas. 
The objects I have in view by the employ 
ment of my invention are to produce a battery 
which will have an electro-motive force of an 
absolute constancy, which will give a current 
of high intensity, which will have but a weak 
and constant internal resistance, which will 
consume cheaply, which in its chemical ac 
tion will always be proportionate to the work 
performed, and Will consequently give rise to 
no consumption when it is in an open circuit, 
and, finally, which will have but a very small 
dead-weight. 
I will proceed to fully describe the arrange 
ment of the batteryproper, and then the chem 
ical actions which take place. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional eleva 
tion of the battery, partly broken away. Fig. 
2 is a top view of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a plan of 
Fig. 1 in section on the line 1 1. Fig. 4 is a 
vertical section taken through the middle of 
Fig. 1, looking from right to left. 
Referring to Figs. 1 to 4, inclusive, a is an 
Outer casing or vessel made of any suitable 
lmaterial, but which I prefer making of wood, 
compressed Wood pulp, paper-pulp, or like 
light substance rendered impervious by a 
coating of paraffine or other convenient sub 
able manner, as by means of a string or rub 
Be it known that I, ERMINIO ORTELLI, civil ber band coated with or dipped in paraffine 
d is the chamber for receiving a solution of 
hydrochlorate of ammonia. 
e is the depolarizing-chamber for the carbon 
vessel b, which serves at the same time as a 
porous vase and depolarizing-plate. 
h is the inlet for the gas into the chamber 
e. The inleth has two branches h' for leading 
the gas into the depolarizing-chamber e. 
i is the outlet for air and for any excess of 
gas from the chamber e. The said outlet is 
connected to any suitable known device (not 
shown) for absorbing the gas and preventing 
its escape into the open air. 
j is the outlet or discharge for the liquid 
solution, which may permeate through the 
The said solution inay be 
carbon vessel b. 
k is a fork of amalgamated zinc or other 
suitable substance for establishing a contact 
with the carbon vessel b. Said contact is ob 
tained by placing between the forkle and the 
carbon vessel b strips of copper or other Suit 
able springy metal, (shown at l, Fig. 2.) 
The contact-strips can be readily removed 
by hand when cleaning requires to be effected. 
The fork I may be amalgamated in order 
to prevent it from oxidizing too readily in 
case it should become stained with the liquid. 
Operation: The carbon vessel b being 
charged with hydrochlorate of ammonia and 
theadmission of gas being effected through the 
inleth and the negative and positive poles of 
the pile being connected, the following chem 
ical reactions will be produced: The hydrochlo 
rate of ammonia is decomposed into chlorine 
and ammonium. The chlorine attacks the Zinc 
and forms chloride of zinc, which dissolves. 
The hydrogen which evolves from the hydro 
chlorate of ammonium settles on or about the 
inner walls of the carbon vessel b and com 
bines with the gas fed into the batterythrough 
the inlet, h, whereby hydrochloric acid is 
formed. In its turn the hydrochloric acid 
forms with the free ammonia, a fresh chloride 
of ammonium. The latter again attacks the 
zinc, and the hereinbefore-described reaction 
is repeated and continued as long as the 
above-mentioned elements are in presence. 
A chemical cycle is thus created, whereby an 
b is the carbon vessel. 
c is the amalgamated zinc plate, which is 
insulated from the carbon vesselb in any suit 
Stance. 
- 
25 
35 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OC 
45 
 
470,078 
40 
5 o 
Io ever takes place. On the other hand, I ob- vessel b, containing hydrochlorate of ammo- 45 
I5 suitable textile or capillary material with the scribed. 
2 
electrical current is produced which is con- prefer as being cheaper than bromine, flour 
stant. Consequently as fast as the hydrogen ine, and iodine, I were to employ any one of 
gas is formed it is not only absorbed, so to the latter three equivalents, the same result 
speak, instantaneously, but it is utilized in as that above set forth is obtained. 
I claim- 
5 the chemical reaction above set forth. Thus, 
owing to the fact that the hydrogen gas does 
1. A galvanic battery comprising an outer 
not remain any appreciable length of time impervious casing Ct, inclosing a depolarizing 
Tupon or about the carbon plates of b, it follows chamber e, having a gas-inleth, a gas and air 
that no partial insulation of the said plates outlet i, and an outlet i for liquid, a carbon 
tain as a further result a regular and uniform nia and serving as a porous vase and depolar 
consumption of the zinc surface. 
izing-plate, said vessel being placed in the de 
Instead of pouring the hydrochlorate of alm- polarizing-chamber, and a zinc plate C, placed 
monia into the carbon vesselb, I can soak any in said carbon vessel, substantially as de 
2. A galvanic battery composed, essentially, 
Said hylrochlorate and place the so soaked 
material between the walls of the carbon ves- of an outer casing a, made of wood, coin 
sel b. 
pressed Wood pulp, paper-pulp, or like light 
One of the essential novel features of the substance, which is rendered impervious by 
employment of chlorine gas or any of the stance, a carbon vessel b, containing a solu 
equivalents set forth, in combination with hy- tion of hydrochlorate of ammonia, together 
drochlorate of ammonia, as a means for gen- with an insulated Zinc plate c, an inlet h for 
erating a current of electricity. 
the gas, an outlet i for the air and gas, an es 
fact that the carbon vessel b acts simultane- meate through the carbon vessel b, a fork I, 
ously as a depolarizing-plate and porous vase. and contact-strips l, substantially as described 
fact that the space through which the chlorine 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
coal and is absolutely devoid of any filling witnesses. 
whereby the said gas can readily circulate, 
while at the same time the weight of the ele 
ment is reduced. 
If instead of employing chlorine, which I 
Another essential novel feature lies in the and shown. 
2O hereinbefore-described battery consists in the means of paraffine or other suitable sub- 55 
25 
Another essential novel feature lies in the capei for the liquid solution which may per- 6o 
3o gas circulates is not filled with granulated char- my name in the presence of two subscribing 65 
35 
ERMINIO ORTELLI. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. BRANDON, 
A. II. RAPP. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470173.txt	(No Model.) 
, 
G. E. BEAN. 
BARREL, HEAD, 
No. 470,173. 
 
Patented Mar. 8, 1892. 
92.82.voso, 
. 
3v.ucvitov 
a 4-6ee 
864 -ee 5.2%/rbec, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE EMERSON BEAN, OF TAMPA, FLORIDA. 
BARREL HEAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,173, dated March 8, 1892. 
Application filed November 14, 1890, Serial No, 371,429, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, GEORGE EMERSON BEAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Tam 
pa, in the county of Hillsborough and State of 
Florida, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Barrel-Heads and Simi 
lar Packing and Storing Wessels; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to an improved con 
struction of heads for barrels and s 
packing and storing vessels whereby such 
heads are adapted for ready application to 
and removal from barrels and the like with 
out injury, are capable of ready reuse, and 
are rendered adjustable to completely fit and 
cover the ends of the vessel. Succinctly stated, 
my improved head for barrels and the like 
is formed of two sections, the meeting edges 
of which are constructed the one with an in 
Wardly-extending flange on its under side and 
the other with a similar flange on its upper 
side, a screw having at its respective ends 
right and left handed threads serving to con 
nect the respective sections and adjust them 
to Secure the closure of the barrel or other 
opening and lock said sections in closed po 
sition, 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a top plan view of a barrel-head 
constructed according to my invention. Fig. 
2 represents a section on the line a. a. of Fig. 
1, the full lines showing the position of the 
sections of the head when placed in the bar 
rel end to be closed, while the dotted lines 
show the mode of adjustment to secure the 
closure of the barrel. 
Customarily, when it is desired to open a 
barrel, the head is pried off and either de 
stroyed or so injured as to be incapable of 
further use, or, if used again, only at the ex 
penditure of considerable trouble and annoy 
ance. By my improvement the head is formed 
in two sections, the circumferential edges of 
each of which are constructed to fit the chines 
of barrels generally, one section on its top 
face being of a size corresponding or about 
so with the half of the mouth of the barrel, 
while the other section is on its upper face 
about half an inch shorter, so that it may be 
readily sprung or placed in the mouth after 
the first-named section is placed in position. 
Lapping flanges are formed on the inner 55 
edges of the respective sections to cover and 
securely close the jointure of the two sec 
tions, and a screw having right and left 
threaded ends is engaged with the respective 
inner edges of the sections, so that by turn 
ing said screw in one direction said shorter 
section will be forced in position to entirely 
cover the barrel-mouth and also lock the Sec 
tions, while by turning said screw in the re 
verse direction the sections will be unlocked, 
loosened, and their ready removal without in 
jury permitted. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents one 
of the sections of my improved adjustable 
head for barrels and the like. This section 
is provided at its inner edge with a flange 2, 
formed by cutting away a portion of one face, 
as at 3, and has a horizontal threaded hole 4, 
formed in the flange or lip 2, to receive one 
end of the threaded screw to be presently de 
scribed. 
5 represents the other section of my in 
proved barrel-head. This has at its inner or . 
meeting edge a similar lapping flange or lip 
6, formed by recessing or cutting away a por 
tion of the head on the face thereof opposite 
to that on which the similar recess is formed 
in the other section. The barrel or otherhead 
constructed according to my invention is con 
structed somewhat thicker than ordinary 
heads to permit of such recessing and flang 
ing as herein described without Weakening 
the head. 
7 represents a horizontal threaded hole 
formed in the inner edge of the section 5 to 
receive the other end of the adjusting and Se 
curing screw 8. This screw extends about 
five inches into each section to strengthen the 
same, and has on its respective ends right 
and left handed threads 910 and mediately 
thereoftransverse holes or slots 11, with which 
any suitable tool may be engaged to secure 
the rotation of said Screw. 
The operation is as follows: The two sec 
tions, of which one, as 1, is about half an inch 
shorter than the other, are first connected to 
gether by the screw 8, which is about ten 
75 
85 
90 
OO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
470,173 
45 
5 O 
55 
6 5 
75 
a head as I have described is always ready for 
application and can be used indefinitely. 
While I have not illustrated any specific 
application of my improved head, it is mani 
fest that it can be applied to boxes and other 
similar packing and storing vessels beside 
barrels, and I do not limit myself to its appli 
cation to barrels alone. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A closure for barrels and similar storage 
vessels, consisting of a head composed of two 
sections, one section being substantially equal 
in size to one-half of the area of the barrel 
mouth and the othersection somewhat shorter, 
said sections having integral lapping flanges 
at their inner edges, in combination with a 
screw having reversely-threaded ends and ex 
tending horizontally within and through a 
greater portion of the length of the respective 
sections for the purpose of bracing the same, 
adjusting the shorter section in position, and 
securing the respective sections, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A barrel-head consisting of a pair of Sec 
tions having lapping flanges at their inner 
edges, one of said sections being stationary 
and adapted to fit and close about one-half of 
the barrel - mouth, the other section being 
shorter than the rigid section and being ad 
justable toward and from said stationary sec 
tion and the circumference of the barrel, as 
explained, and a screw extending horizontally 
lengthwise within said sections and having 
reversely - threaded ends and central trans 
verse holes, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE EMERSON BEAN. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. DONOVAN, 
J. W. BRYAN. 
inches long and extends about five inches into 
each section to securely connect said sections 
together and strengthen them. In this con 
nected position the head is placed in the 
mouth of the vessel by first placing in posi 
tion therein the larger section and then spring 
ing into position therein the other portion of 
the head. This is readily accomplished by 
reason of the less width of the adjustable se?:- 
tion 1 and the consequent less length at that 
time, as shown in full lines in Fig. 2, of the 
head than the mouth. The screw S is then 
turned to expand the diminished section, as 
I, to the position shown in dotted lines in 
Fig. 2, to thereby force said section 1 out 
ward and close the barrel-mouth and tightly 
Wedge said sections into position to secure 
a perfect closure and also to lock said sections 
in closed position. Any suitable tool may be 
employed for turning the screw-as, for in 
stance, a wrench or a pin or the like inserted 
in the holes or slots 11. By flanging the re 
spective inner edges of the sections, as shown, 
it will be apparent that the sections can read 
ily be adjusted to fit barrels and other recep 
tacles of different degrees of opening with 
out impairing the closing quality of the head, 
as the flanges 26 slide the one over the other 
in the adjustment of the sections and over 
lap each other, as shown, at all times thereby 
entirely closing and sealing the jointure of 
the Sections. By my arrangement the neces 
sity for nailing the head in position or of 
breaking it into parts to secure its removal 
are avoided. When it is desired to remove 
the head, all that is necessary is to turn the 
screw to bring the smaller section toward the 
other section, as shown in full lines, Fig. 2, 
whereupon the head can be readily drawn 
away from the mouth, and the head will then 
be in condition to be placed in position in an 
other barrel-mouth or again in the mouth of 
the barrel from which it was removed. Such 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470273.txt	(No Model.) 
G, B, WEBB, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 470,273, 
Patented Mar. 8, 1892. 
ay 
SNSSSSSSSNYasaaSSaayaasaasaasaasaasa 
tource 
se 
A27. Z, 
ae 
   
I, 
 
2 
 
N 
\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Norris Peters co, Poto-THo., washigion, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
G. B. WEBB, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 470,273, 
Patented Mar. 8, 1892. 
7267. 3. 
3 
critiririrman 
IT 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SaaSaaSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSaaSaaS 
IP 
as 
  
  
a 9C 
64ezcz-9%e/es 
33 his attorney 
 
The Norris PETERs co, PHoTo-Litho, wash.IKOTON, O.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE B. WEBB, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE REMINGTON 
STANDARD TYPE WRITER MANUEFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
TYPE - WRITING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,273, dated March 8, 1892. 
Application filed June 20, 1891, Serial No, 396,90I (No model.) 
Io 
25 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE B. WEBB, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York city, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Type 
Writing Machines, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
My invention has for its main object to 
provide means for shifting the inking-ribbon 
laterally or widthwise at the time the travel 
of the ribbon lengthwise is reversed for the 
purpose of bringing into use a new or fresh 
portion of the ribbon and preventing the 
heedless operator from using any one portion 
or field of the ribbon for an undue length of 
time, to the detriment of the ribbon and the 
quality of the work being done. 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
features of construction and combinations of 
devices hereinafter more fully described, and 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of so much of a type writing 
machine as is necessary to illustrate my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section taken 
at the line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a similar 
section with the parts shifted to cause the 
ribbon to travel in a direction the reverse of 
that it is shown as moving in at Fig. 1, and 
to also cause a different or fresh portion to 
travel across the printing-point. Fig. 4 is an 
enlarged horizontal section taken at the line 
if y of Fig. 1 to more clearly show the con 
struction of some of the new parts, and Fig. 
5 is a vertical Section taken at the line at 2 of 
Fig. 3. 
In the several views the same part will be 
found designated by the same numeral of 
reference. 
The machine illustrated in part in the ac 
companying drawings is that known as the 
Remington' type-writer, to which my im 
provements are especially applicable. In said 
machine the inking-ribbon is wound step by 
step from one spool or bobbin onto the other 
by means of the carriage- driving power, a 
main shaft, two counter-spool-shafts, and 
three sets of bevel-gears, and the construc 
. 
tion is such that when the ribbon has been 
unwound from one spool it may be reversed 
by hand and rewound automatically upon 
said spool by a longitudinal movement of the 
main shaft to disengage one set of the bevel 
gears and throw into engagement another Set 
of said gears. In the said machine the rib 
bon-spools are each connected to a horizontal 
slide, and said slides are connected together, 
so as to move in unison by means of rocker 
arms and a rock-shaft. By this construction 
the ribbon is adapted to be moved by hand 
transversely or in the direction of its Width, 
so that the entire surface of said ribbon may 
from time to time travel in register with the 
printing-point and be utilized, thus preserv 
ing the form and life of the ribbon and con 
ducing to greater uniformity in the character 
of the impressions. Although provision is 
thus made in the Remington machine for 
moving the ribbon widthwise, the fact is that 
many operators pay insufficient attention to 
the means for shifting the ribbon transversely 
and continue an undue length of time to use 
the ribbon along a single line, with the result 
that the ribbon soon loses its shape and be 
comes prematurely worn and useless. 
By my present invention Ihave so connect 
ed together the means for reversing the longi 
tudinal movements of the ribbon with the 
means for shifting the ribbon transversely 
that at every second reversal of the longitudi 
nal travel of the ribbon the ribbon is at the 
same time or by the same movement auto 
matically shifted widthwise to bring into use 
a fresh portion of the surface, and hence the 
necessity for care or attention on the part of 
the operator so far as any shifting of the rib 
bon widthwise is concerned is wholly elimi 
nated. 
1 designates the top plate of the machine, 
and 2 the frame-Work. 
3 is the spring driving drum or disk, to 
which is attached one end of a strap 4, whose 
other end is connected to some part of the 
Axially of 
paper-carriage, as indicated at 5. 
the shaft of the drum is arranged a bevel 
wheel 6, which carries a ratchet-wheel 7, 
adapted to be acted upon by a driving-pawl 
S, pivoted to the drum, the construction be 
55 
75 
95 
co 
 
470,273 
Be- 75 
ing Such, as heretofore, that when the carriage 
travels from right to left the said pawl turns 
said ratchet-wheel and bevel-gear with the 
drum, and when the carriage travels from left 
to right the pawl slips idly or , inoperatively 
Over the ratchet-wheel and the latter and the 
bevel-gear 6 remain stationary. 
The bevel-gear 6 is always in engagement 
With a bevel-gear 9, sleeved on the main shaft 
10, which is adapted to turn in bearings in 
the frame-work. At the right-hand end of said 
shaft is secured a bevel-gear 11, which is adapt 
ed to mesh with a bevel-gear 12 on the right 
hand spool-shaft 13, which is mounted to ro 
tate in bearings in the frame-work. On the 
shaft 10 is secured another bevel-gear 14, which 
is adapted to engage with a bevel-gear 15 on 
the left-hand spool-shaft 16, which is also 
mounted to rotate in bearings in the frame 
Work. A ribbon-spool 17 is splined on the 
Shaft 13, and a similar spool 18 is splined on 
the Shaft 16. A wire frame 19 is bent to em 
brace each spool and to form a guide and sup 
port for the ribbon. The ends of the wire 
framel 9 on the right are riveted to a sliding 
bar 20, and the ends of the wire frame on the 
left are riveted to a sliding bar 21. The said 
bars are formed with slots 22 for the passage 
of Supporting-screw's 23, and said bars are 
connected together to move in unison by a 
transverse rock-shaft 24 and rocker-arms 25, 
One at each end of the rock-shaft. 
The rearmost slot of the sliding bar 21 is 
slightly wider than the others and embraces 
a depending pin 26, fixed to the top plate 
and provided with a shoulder to support said 
bar. On said pin is pivoted a support or 
switch 27, which is held from falling by the 
head of a vertical screw 28, whose shank 
engages a threaded hole in the pin. The 
said support is formed with a lateral pro 
jection 29, to which is attached by a screw 
30 a bifurcated arm 31, which straddles a cir 
Cumferential groove 32, formed in the main 
shaft, and the said support 27 is beveled or 
chamfered to provide a nose or projection 33, 
as shown by dotted lines at Fig. 4, with which 
CO-Operates a flat Spring 34, attached to the 
frame-work at 35 and provided with two cor 
rugations 36 and 37, adapted each to fit over 
said nose and hold the support 27 in either of 
the two positions which it may be moved to. 
Upon said support is pivoted at 3S a duplex 
driving-pawl, one end 39 of which is adapted 
to coact With a rack 40 on the slide 21 and 
the other end 4l of which is adapted to co-op 
erate with another rack 42, also on said slide, 
but with its teeth cut or formed in a direc 
tion the reverse of those of the rack 40. The 
duplex pawl is cut away or notched at its in 
ner edge to form two shoulders 43 and 44, one 
on either side of the pivot or center of mo 
tion of the pawl, and with these shoulders is 
adapted to engage the upwardly-extending 
end 45 of a trip piece or shifter 46, which is 
curved to pass around the pivot-pin 26 on one 
side, and which at its inner end is E-shaped 
or formed with three flat prongs or forks 47, 
4S, and 49, the forks 47 and 49 being fitted 
loosely in under-cuts or grooves 50 and 51 in 7 O 
elevated portions 52 of the support, and the 
middle fork 4S being formed with an up 
turned end 53, against which bears the free 
end of a vertically-arranged flat spring 54, 
secured to the support by a screw 55. 
tween the racks 40 and 42 are formed two 
shoulders 56 and 57, adapted to contact al 
ternately with the projection 45 and assist in 
shifting it from one side of the pivot of the 
duplex pawl to the other to enable the said 8o 
trip-piece to first hold the pawl end 39 in en 
gagement with its rack and then to hold the 
pawl end 41 in engagement with its rack, and 
so on alternately. The support is provided 
with a handle 5S, and the main shaft is also 85 
provided with a handle 59, by either of which 
the longitudinal and transverse movements 
of the ribbon (30 may be effected. Engaging 
with the rack 42 is a spring-check (31 to pre 
vent any overthrow of the slide 21 or any ac- 9o 
cidental movement thereof. 
By the construction described the slide 21, 
which is connected to both ribbon-spools, is 
coupled to the main shaft and in a manner 
such that when said shaft is moved endwise 95 
to reverse the direction of movement of the 
ribbon longitudinally said slide is caused 
to move at right angles to the axis of said 
shaft and through its connections move the 
ribbon widthwise. 
By means of the double pawl and rack, the 
trip-piece, and the vibratory support or switch 
the slide is caused to move back and forth 
and impart a step-by-step reciprocatory move-, 
ment to the ribbon widthwise, the longitudi 
nal movements of the ribbon being effected 
by the gearing employed heretofore. 
From what has been said above the follow 
ing explanation of the mode of operation will 
be readily understood by those skilled in the 
alrt. 
Referring to Fig. 2, the set of miter-gears 
14 and 15 are in engagement, and by the rota 
tion of the main shaft 10 the counter-spool 
shaft 16 is turned, and with it the spool 18, in 
a direction to wind the ribbon thereupon, and 
from right to left. When the ribbon has been 
thus wholly unwound from the spool 17, it 
may be reversed or set to wind back upon 
said spool by an endwise push on said shaft 
10 to cause the gears 14 and 15 to disengage 
and the set of gears 11 and 12 to mesh with 
each other. During the said movement of 
said shaft, the support or switch 27 is vibrated 
by reason of the connecting-arm 31. In this 
view, Fig. 2, the ribbon is shown at the limit 
of its forward transverse throw, and at the 
next end wise movement of the shaft 10 (to 
engage the gears 11 and 12) the pawl 39 is 
withdrawn from its rack 40 and the pawl 41 
moved into engagement with its rack. This 
is accomplished by the spring-actuated trip 
46, which, on account of the contact of the 
stop or shoulder 56 and the projection 45, is 
I 25 
OO 
I o5 
o 
II 5 
55 
65 
25 
35 
45 
 
470,273 
3 
prevented at this time from moving bodily 
with the support or switch 27, and as the lat 
ter is moved in the direction of the arrow the 
pivot of the duplex pawl is carried with it, 
and when the center of said pivot has moved 
past the projection 45 the trip-piece 46 is left 
free to be swung over independently by the 
spring 54, (which moves with the support, as 
indicated,) so that its projection 45 may en 
gage the shoulder 44 of the duplex pawl and 
vibrate the latter about its pivot, so as to throw 
the pawl 39 out of engagement and the pawl 
42 into engagement, as shown at Fig. 3. When 
this has taken place, the ribbon is caused to 
move transversely rearwardly at every second 
reversal of the longitudinal motion of the rib 
bon. In practice I have thus far moved the 
ribbon crosswise step by step four times each 
way; but of course this number may be varied 
to suit the desires of the manufacturer by in 
creasing or diminishing the number of teeth 
of the racks 40 and 42 and the distance apart 
of the stops, as shoulders 56 and 57. 
Referring to Fig. 3, it will be seen that the 
shaft 10 has been moved endwise and that 
the gears 11 and 12 are in engagement to wind 
the ribbon lengthwise from the spool 18 to the 
spool 17, and also that the pawl 41 is in engage 
ment with the rack 42. When the spool17 has 
been filled and it is desired to reverse the di 
rection of movement again of the ribbon, the 
shaft 10 is moved endwise to disconnect the 
gears 11 and 12 and engage the gears 14 and 
15, and at the same time the support or switch 
27 is vibrated in the direction of the arrow and 
the pawl 41 caused to engage another tooth of 
its rack, so that when the main shaft and the 
support or switch are again moved in the re 
verse direction the said pawl carried by the 
latter may push the slide 21 the distance of 
one tooth rearwardly and through the de 
scribed connections move the inking-ribbon 
a like distance in the same direction. The 
slide 21, by means of the rack 42 and pawl 
41, is thus moved rearwardly intermittently 
(say four times) until the stop or shoulder 57 
on said slide contacts with said projection 45, 
when a vibration of the switch 27 in the di 
rection of the arrow at Fig. 3 will carry the 
center of the pawl-pivot past the said projec 
tion and allow the trip-piece 46 to be vibrated 
by its spring to throw the projection 45 against 
the shoulder 43 to disengage the pawl 41 and 
engage the pawl 39 with the outermost or 
front tooth of the rack 40. Then as the shaft 
10 is moved back and forth endwise to re 
verse the ribbon the slide 21 is moved for 
ward step by step and through its connections 
the ribbon is moved in the same direction 
and to the same extent, (say the distance of 
four notches.) When the pawl 39 and rack 
40 are in engagement, the ribbon is moved 
toward the front whenever the main shaft is 
moved toward the left, and when the pawl 41 
and rack 42 are in engagement the ribbon is 
moved toward the real whenever the main 
shaft is moved toward the right. The corru 
- 
invention. 
gation 36 engages the nose 33 when the switch 
is in the position shown at Fig. 2, and the cor 
rugation 37 embraces the nose 33 when the 
switch is in the position shown at Fig. 3, and 
by this construction the switch and its ac 
cessories are properly held against accidental 
movement while the writing is taking place. 
Instead of connecting both spools to travel 
in unison, they may be disconnected and the 
spool 18 only made capable of a sliding move 
ment on its shaft. In this arrangement the 
ribbon, instead of moving bodily forward and 
backward, will have a vibratory motion, and 
the rock-shaft 24, the rocker-arm 25, and the 
slide 20 may be dispensed with. 
In lieu of the duplex rack and duplex pawl, 
a single rack and pawl may be employed 
where it is desired to have the ribbon move 
step by step widthwise in only one direction, 
or where some other means, as a spring, may 
be desired to move it in the opposite direc 
tion, and it will be understood that numerous 
other changes in detail construction may be 
made without departing from the gist of my 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is- 
1. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft, 
two spool-shafts adapted to be alternately 
driven by said main shaft, two ribbon-spools 
capable of turning with their shafts and also 
of sliding endwise of the same, an inking 
ribbon, a pair of slides connected to each other 
and to the ribbon-spools, and connections, Sub 
stantially as described, between one of said 
slides and the main shaft, whereby the end 
wise movements of said shaft may be trans 
mitted to said slide and the ribbon moved 
transversely or in the direction of its width. 
2. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft 
connected thereto and capable of endwise 
movements, two spool-shafts adapted to be 
alternately driven by said main shaft, two 
ribbon-spools capable of turning with their 
shafts and also of sliding end Wise of the Same, 
an inking-ribbon, a pair of slides connected 
to each other and to the ribbon-spools, a rack 
on one of said slides, a pawl for engaging said 
rack, and a switch carrying said pawl and 
connected to the reciprocatory main shaft, 
3. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft, 
two spool-shafts adapted to be alternately 
driven by said main shaft, two ribbon-spools 
capable of turning with their shafts and also 
of sliding endwise of the same, an inking-rib 
bon, a pair of slides connected to each other 
and to the ribbon-spools, a duplex rack on One 
of said slides, a duplex pawl for driving Said 
racks, and a switch carrying said duplex pawl 
and connected to the main shaft. 
4. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft, 
two spool-shafts adapted to be alternately 
driven by said main shaft, two ribbon-spools 
0. 
O 
25 
35 
f 5 
55 
 
s 
95 
Od 
75 
IO 
II 5 
I 25 
45, 
55 
other and to the ribbon-spools, two racks on 
one of said slides, a duplex pawl, a Switch 
having a nose, a spring having two corruga 
tions, and a coupling between said switch and 
the main shaft. 
S. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft, 
two spool-shafts adapted to be alternately 
driven by said main shaft, two ribbon-spools 
capable of turning with their shafts and also 
of sliding endwise of the same, an inking 
ribbon, a pair of slides connected to each 
other and to the ribbon-spools, two racks on 
one of said slides, a spring-check for Said 
slide, a duplex pawl, and a switch connected 
to the main shaft. 
9. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft 
connected thereto and revolved thereby, two 
spool-shafts adapted to be alternately driven 
by said main shaft, two ribbon-spools, an ink 
ing-ribbon, a slide connected to the inking 
ribbon, and means, substantially as described, 
connected to the main shaft for imparting to 
said slide a step-by-step movement upon end 
wise movements of the main shaft. 
10. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft 
connected thereto and capable of endwise 
movements, two spool-shafts adapted to be 
alternately driven by said main shaft, two 
ribbon-spools, an inking-ribbon, a slide con 
nected to the inking-ribbon, a rack on Said 
slide, a pawl for driving said rack, and a 
switch carrying said pawl and connected to 
the endwise-movable main shaft. 
Signed at New York city, in the county of 
New York and State of New York, this 1Sth 
day of June, A. D. 1891. 
GEORGE IB.. WEBB. 
Witnesses: 
H. D. IDONNELLY, 
JACOB FELBEL. 
75 
4 
470,278 
5 
capable of turning with their shafts and also 
of sliding endwise of the same, an inking-rib 
bon, a pair of slides connected to each other 
and to the ribbon-spools, a duplex rack on 
one of said slides, stops or shoulders on said 
slide, a duplex pawl for driving said racks, a 
Switch carrying said duplex pawl and con 
nected to the main shaft, and a spring-actu 
ated shifter for said duplex pawl. 
5. In a type-writing machine, the coni bina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft, 
two spool-shafts adapted to be alternately 
driven by said main shaft, two ribbon-spools 
capable of turning with their shafts and also 
of sliding end wise of the same, an inking 
ribbon, a pair of slides coniaected to each other 
and to the ribbon-spools, two racks on one of 
Said slides, stops or shoulders on said slide, a 
duplex pawl for driving said racks, a switch 
carrying said pawls and connected to the 
main shaft, and means, substantially as de 
scribed, for automatically moving said pawls 
alternately into and out of engagement with 
their ra?ks. 
6. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft, 
two spool-shafts adapted to be alternately 
driven by said main shaft, two ribbon-spools 
capable of turning with their shafts and also 
of sliding end wise of the same, an inking 
ribbon, a pair of slides connected to each 
other and to the ribbon-spools, two racks on 
one of Said slides, stops ol' shoulders on said 
slide, a duplex pawl, and a switch carrying 
said pawls and also a vibratory spring-actu 
ated shifter and connected to said main shaft. 
7. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with the driving-power, of a main shaft, 
two spool-shafts adapted to be alternately 
driven by said main shaft, two ribbon-spools 
capable of turning with their shafts and also 
of sliding end wise of the same, an inking 
ribbon, a pair of slides connected to each { 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470373.txt	(No Model.) 
L. C. DE SLOOWERE. 
FARE REGISTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 470,373, 
Patented Mar. 8, 1892. 
 
SS SS NSN SNSS 
25 
NSNS SNS2 %Saf 
, a NSS 
2 
A. 
y 
N,NyS S SN, 
22d 
2 
N 
  
2 
PS .N 
M 2 
S2. 
 
--- 
(2Y 
SSS 2 222 
S&3 
N 
% 
g 
  
 
 
Zo/z7cesses. C 
o/2-24-2 
al 
be 
 
Zzozvezza77 
zy -roly %-277 (4. 
E cars Perers co, PHore-titko., washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
L., C, DE SLOOWERE, 
FARE REGISTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 470,373, 
Patented Mar. 8, 1892. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
-SA-at-A --S 
lug. TmIt multimTim Trini 
Althy littitt 
M EII, 
St. By 
P 
IIIllin R 
Attupuvirty 
III, it TITILITIETILL 
2 
(GRS is 
 
ELA s 
 
N 
 
N N 
 
 
N 
N 
26/27-Ceeses. 
J-ceed-f 7-413-71 - 
Z7tevezeeep 
Zozoa C. Zetlaozeae 
THE NORRIS PETER3 co., Photo-lirho. WASHINGron, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
L. C. DE SLOOWERE. 
FARE REGISTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 470,373, 
Patented Mar, 8, 1892, 
 
928 itv.css.cs 
O 
St. 
ity 
341.uc-vitov 
Zows, C. Zde 5toove/e/. 
- e.g. try 
eas co., Photo-iro. WashNotch sc 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS C. DE SLOOVERE, OF SALEM, MASSACHUSETTS, 
FARE-REGISTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,873, dated March 8, 1892. 
Application filed July 15, 1891, Serial No. 399,602, (No model.) 
75 
O 
To all tufton it may concern. 
Beit known that I, LOUIS C. DE SLOOVERE, 
of Salem, county of Essex, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvementin Fare 
Registers, of which the following description, 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings, is a specification, like letters and figures 
On the drawings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object to improve 
and simplify the construction of fare-regis 
tel'S Such as shown and described in United 
States Patent No. 454,902, granted to me June 
30, 1891; and it consists in details of con 
struction to be hereinafter pointed out in the 
claims at the end of this specification. 
Figure 1 shows a face view of the fare-reg 
ister embodying this invention, the actuating 
device or pull-bar and also the setting-back 
device being omitted; Fig. 2, a cross-section 
of the fare-register shown herein, taken on the 
dottedline 22, Figs. 1 and 3; Fig. 3, a rear side 
view of the fare-register shown in Fig. 1, the 
.rear plate being cutaway to expose the operat 
ing parts; Fig. 4, a side view of the parts con 
tained within the box or case, the latter be 
ing shown in Section; Figs. 5 and 6, details of 
the Striking apparatus of the audible alarm 
to be referred to. Fig. 7 is a detached view 
of the locking mechanism shown in the up 
per part of Fig. 3, the gear Clbeing removed. 
Fig. S is a detail taken on the line 88, Fig. 2, 
looking down, to show the inner side of the 
actuating-arm and co-operating parts, the 
back plate being omitted. 
The main frame-work comprises a front 
and a rear plate r, joined by suitable pillars. 
The main shaft C" has fixed to it at one end 
a hand Ol' pointer C., and also secured to said 
shaft is a toothed gear C. A sleeve l is 
mounted on the shaft C", which has fixed to 
it a hand or pointer C. and also a toothed 
gear 0'. A second sleeve b is mounted on 
the sleeve b, which has fixed to it, a hand or 
pointer C.' and also a toothed gear b. The 
three toothed gears a b' b are all made of 
the same diameter and have an equal num 
ber of teeth. The driving-shaft a is jour 
malled in the frame-Work and has fixed to it a 
pinion b and has loosely mounted on it a 
pinion l'. The pinion lengages the toothed 
gear b', and the pinion lengages the toothed 
gear a'. A spring in surrounds the shaft C 
and bears firmly against the pinion b and 
against the ratchet-wheel c, (best shown in 
Figs. 2 and 3.) fixed to said shaft, the pur 
pose of said spring being to hold the pin 
ion b' frictionally, so that it shall be turned 
by the shaft a in one direction to drive the 
toothed gear (t', but may be turned in the 
opposite direction independent of and with 
out rotating the shaft. A pawl c', (see Figs. 2 
and 3,) which engages and drives said ratchet 
wheel c, is loosely connected to a pawl-carry 
ing arm c, pivoted to the shaft Ct, and a spring 
c (see dotted lines, Fig. 3) is provided for 
pressing the pawl c' into engagement with the 
ratchet-wheel. The pawl-carrying arm cis 
made quite long and extends diametrically 
across the center of the plate r, being formed 
to pass around and not interfere with the 
main shaft a, as best shown in Fig. 3, the 
free end of said arm being bent out Wardly at 
its extremity and extended through a slot in 
the plate 7, as seen in Fig. 2. A cord, chain, 
or equivalent c0 (see dotted lines, Fig. 3) is 
connected to the said bent portion of the free 
end of said arm c, by which it may be moved 
on its pivotal point (shown in Fig. 2 as the 
downwardly - extended hub of the ratchet 
wheel c) to in turn move the ratchet-wheel for 
ward step by step, the arm clbeing retracted 
by the spring c. A pawl O is pivoted on the 
rear plate r at O' and engages said ratchet 
wheel c, serving as a back-stop therefor to pre 
vent backward rotation, said pawl O having a 
projection o at its rear end, which is acted 
upon by a spring O' to keep Said pawl pressed 
into engagement with the ratchet-wheel. On 
the under side of the toothed gearb' a ratchet 
is formed, (shown in section, Fig. 2, and in 
dotted lines, Fig. 3,) which is engaged by a 
pawl n., (shown in dotted lines, Fig. 3.) con 
nected to the upper side of the toothed gear 
at to prevent any backward rotation of the 
gear l'. Three concentric dials act a' are 
provided for the three hands or pointers ct a 
a', and it is intended that the hand a', with 
its dial Cl", shall register the hundreds, the hand 
as, with its dial Ct, shall register the units and 
tens, and the hand Ci, with its dial Ct, shall 
register units and tens; but the latter hand a 
is adapted to be moved back to Zero when 
9 O 
CO 
25 
35 
45 
50 
2 
470,873 
- 
75 
ever desired--as at the end of a trip, for in 
stance--while the other two hands move for 
Ward only. 
Instead of moving the toothed gear b con 
5 tinuously, yet relatively slower than the 
toothed gear b', as represented in the patent 
referred to, I provide mechanism by which it 
may be moved ahead one tooth just as the 
toothed gearb' completes a rotation, and, as 
Io herein represented, this mechanism consists 
of a pinion p, engaging said toothed gear b, 
and a locking device for holding said pinion 
in fixed position (see Fig. 3 and detached view, 
Fig. 8)-such as a dog p', pivoted at p and 
I 5 held pressed into engagement with said pin 
ion by a spring p", and a releasing device for 
said locking device, consisting of a lever piv 
oted at p, one arm of which, as p", has formed 
on it a projection p", which rests beneath a pro 
2O jection p on the dog p', and the other arm p 
extends down and lies in the path of move 
ment of the pin p' on the upper side of the 
gear b. (See Figs. 3 and 8.) The pinion p is 
made thicker than the gearb, (see Fig. 2.) so 
25 that the teeth on said pinion extend beyond 
the teeth of the gearb, and one of the teeth 
as the Zero-toothp', for instance-of the gear 
b' is made quite high to engage once in each 
revolution of the gear b' the teeth on said 
3o pinion p, as represented in Figs. 2 and 7, the 
said tooth p engaging with the portion of 
the teeth on the pinion p which project be 
yond the gear b, as very clearly shown in 
Fig. 2. It will be seen that just as the gear 
35 b' completes its revolution the pin p' thereon 
moves the lever plp of the releasing device 
and through the projections p and plifts 
the locking device or dog p', and the tooth 
p' engages the teeth of the pinion p and 
4o moves it ahead one tooth, thereby moving 
the gear bahead one tooth. This mechanism 
or its equivalent insures the hand a moving 
by steps, at the end of each step pointing to 
a number and remaining at rest until it is 
45 moved the next step to the succeeding num 
ber, instead of moving slowly, but continu 
ally, over the face of the dial, thereby avoid 
ing any confusion. 
The striking mechanism for the audible 
5o alarm consists of a bell-hammer h, (see Figs. 
3, 5, and 6) pivoted at h' to a plate h, which 
is pivoted at hto a plate h", which is secured 
to the base-plate, as by screws 2 2, and a de 
tent his pivoted at h" to the plate h, the 
55 lower end of which detent lies in the path of 
movement of a pin hon said pawl-carrying 
arm c. When the pawl-carrying arm c is 
moved on its pivotal point to move the ratch 
et-wheel c ahead one tooth, the pin h will 
6o strike the end of the detent h, and it, bear 
ing against a projection hon the rear end of 
the plate h, causes said plate to turn on its 
pivot h, thereby moving the bell-hammer h. 
away from the gong i. This movement will 
65 continue until the pin h passes by the end 
of the detent hand the latter slips over it, 
when the bell-hammer will be returned quickly 
by the spring h, connected to the plate h, 
and will strike the gong. The bell-hammer 
h, being loosely connected to the plate h', 
will recede from the gong after striking it, so 
as not to diminish the sound. A projection 
h9 is formed on the plate h, which serves as 
a back-stop for the bell-hammer h. The de 
tenth, being loosely connected to the plate 
h, as shown, permits the return of the parts 
hand c to their normal position as the pin 
h passes along the curved outer side of and 
turns the free end of the detent h, when the 
arm c is returned to its normal position by 
the spring c. 
On the under side of the toothed gear (' 
a bevel-geard is formed, which is engaged by 
a bevel-gear d", secured to a shaft d. (see 
dotted lines, Fig. 3) and having its bearings 
in a frame d, attached to the plater by suit 
able screws 33. (Shown in section, Fig. 3.) . 
A ratchet-wheel d' (clearly shown in Fig. 4) is 
secured to said shaft d, which is engaged by 
a pawl d, connected to a hub d', turning freely 
on said shaft d. By such connection the 
bevel-gear d' can be turned in one direction 
only, and, as herein represented, it is employed 
to set the toothed gear a back to Zero or start 
ing-point, 
The gear a has on its upper side a pin C''', 
(shown in dotted lines, Fig. 3.) which strikes 
the projecting beveled end of a plate a (see 
dotted lines, Fig. 3) and turns said plate on 
its pivot a until the portion as of said plate 
bears against a pin a', the gear being rotated 
in the direction of the arrow 50, Fig. 3, and 
said pin slips by the end of the plate a. 
When the gear is being brought back to Zero, 
however, the pin acts upon the upper edge of 
plate at and forces it into the position shown 
in Fig. 3, thereby stopping the gear at the Zero 
point. This pivoted plate constitutes a stop 
to stop the retrograde motion of the gear at 
Zero-point. As the conductor takes the fares 
he pulls the cord or chain c', rotating the 
toothed gears at and b' simultaneously step 
by step until he completes a trip. The toothed 
gear at is then set back to zero, or the start 
ing-point, by rotating the hub din the direc 
tion of the arrow 60, Fig. 3 or 4, the toothed 
gearb' at such time remaining at rest by rea 
son of the pawl in on the gear a sliding over 
the teeth of the ratchet-wheel n, fast to the 
gearb', as described. The gearb on the shaft 
a will at such time rotate freely on the shaft 
a', as hereinbefore described. The gear at is 
thus set back to zero on each trip. At the 
the dials at a and the hands a 
end of a trip 
and a will indicate the total number of pas 
sengers, while the diala and hand a will in 
dicate the number of passengers on that par 
ticular trip. 
I claim 
1. In a fare-register, a main shaft having 
fixed to it a gearandpointer or index, a sleeve 
on said shaft, having fixed to it a gear and 
pointer or index, and a second sleeve on said 
first sleeve, having fixed toita gearandpointer 
95 
IOO 
IC 
IIS 
I 25 
I 30 
470,378 
A. 
O 
or index, a shaft provided with driving-pin 
ions, a rotating wheel on said shaft, and an 
actuating-pull, combined with a pinion, as p, 
engaging a gear on the second sleeve, a lock 
ing device for it, a releasing device for said 
locking device, and means for moving said 
pinion forward one tooth at each time the 
locking device is released, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a fare-register, three dials and three 
hands movable one with relation to the other, 
a main shaft or arbor, a toothed gear loose 
thereon, and a ratchet-wheel on said gear, 
a toothed gear fixed to the shaft or arbor 
carrying one of the hands, a pawl carried 
by Said latter gear and in engagement with 
Said ratchet-wheel to move said gears in uni 
son in one direction, a bevel-gear on said lat 
ter toothed gear, a bevel-gear engaging there 
with, its shaft, a rotatable hub, and a pawl 
and-ratchet connection between said hub and 
bevel-gear shaft, whereby the latter may be 
moved in one direction only by said hub and 
bevel-gear, substantially as described. 
3. In a fare-register, a main shaft and gear 
and pointer or index fixed to it, a sleeve on 
Said shaft, having a gear and pointer fixed to 
it, and a second sleeve on said first sleeve, hav 
ing a gear and pointer fixed to it, combined 
With a driving-shaft, a fixed pinion on it, en 
gaging one of Said gears, and a loose pinion 
On Said shaft, engaging another one of the 
aforesaid gears, and a spring for holding said 
loose pinion frictionally to turn with the shaft 
35 in one direction, a ratchet-wheel fixed to said 
25 
shaft, and an actuating-pull for said ratchet 
wheel, substantially as described. 
4. In a fare-register, three dials, and three 
hands movable one with relation to the other, 
and actuating mechanism for said hands, com 
bined with a bell and striking mechanism 
therefor, consisting of a pivoted bell-hammer 
h, pivoted plate h", fixed plate h, to which 
said plate his pivoted, a pivoted detent h. 
on plateh, spring h", normally to control said 
plate h and bellhammer, and pin, as h", on 
the actuating-pull to co-operate with the Said 
detent for operating said striking mechan 
ism, substantially as described. 
5. In a fare-register, three dials and three 
hands movable one with relation to the other, 
as described, a toothed gear fixed to the shaft 
or arbor of one of said hands, means for mov 
ing it forward step by step, and means for 
setting it back to zero, combined with a pin, 
as at, on said gear, and a stopping device Con 
sisting of a pivoted plate ct, having a beV 
eled end, and a stop-pin a for the plate and 
with which plate said pin a co-operates to 
stop the said gear at zero when rotated in a 
backward direction, the pin a passing by the 
beveled end of the plate when the gear is ro 
tated forward, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
LOUIS C. DE SIOOWERE. 
Witnesses: 
BERNICE. J. NOYES, 
EDWARD F. ALLEN. 
45 
55 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470473.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. COLEMAN & W. I. GUYER. 
FISHING ROD, 
No. 470,473. 
Patented Mar. 8, 1892. 
W7assas 
&ye-weeko 
fi/.3 
V. Zs. Colerauca 7-v. 
7, Z. eza/e7. 
(74.77rs 
//r/ely 
the MORRIS PETERS co, PHoTa-Lithio., washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JASPER B, COLEMAN AND WIRGIL I. GUYER, OF MIDWAY., SOUTH CAROLINA. 
FISHING-ROD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,478, dated March 8, 1892. 
Application filed August 8, 1891, Serial No. 401,504 (No model.) 
Io 
r 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JASPER B. CoLEMAN 
and VIRGIL I. GUYER, residing at Midway, in 
the county of Barnwell and State of South 
Carolina, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Fishing-Rods, of which 
the following is a full and complete descrip 
tion, Sufficient to enable others to understand, 
make, and use the same. . 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
Strong and durable jointed rod adapted to be 
easily put together and taken apart, and 
which when put together is not liable to be. 
come disjointed in use. 
To these ends the invention consists in the 
construction shown and described, and spe 
cifically defined in the claims. 
Figure 1 is a view of the tip end of the rod. 
Fig. 2 is a view of the tip and a section of the 
body of the rod separated. Fig. 3 shows the 
tip and rod joined together. Fig. 4 is a view 
of an open ring by which the line is joined 
to the tip, and Fig. 5 is a view of a spoon 
bait adapted to be used in connection with 
our rod. 
A designates the tip of the rod, and E the 
body of the rod, which may be made in sev 
eral sections separably jointed together or in 
a single piece. 
The tip A is made of spring-steel of the 
usual length and of such thickness as to give 
the requisite strength and elasticity. At its 
front or tip end it is provided with a loop a, 
adapted to receive an open ring C, to which 
the line is to be attached, as shown in Fig. 3. 
At the lower or back end the tip A is screw 
threaded, as shown at c, and is provided with 
a tapering nut B, which tapers down toward 
the rear to the size of the tip, but forms a 
square shoulder at the front. 
The rod E or the section or joint thereof 
with which the tip is connected is hollow or 
is provided at its front end with a ferrule or 
socket G, adapted to receive the tapered end 
b of the tip A, which is inserted as far as the 
nut B will permit. When tightly pressed to 
gether, the tapering nut B will tighten the 
joint by a wedging action and prevent the 
easy or accidental separation of the parts. 
. 
3o 
40 
45 
 
55 
To guard more effectually against the sepa 
ration of the tip from the main part of the 
rod and against the separation of the sections 
of a jointed rod, we use a thin strong line F, 
which is attached to the tip A in front of the 
nut B, then wound tightly around the body 
of the rod, and secured thereto toward the 
butt-end. Should the joints then become 
separated, the line F will prevent the loss of 
the detached or separated parts. 
The nut B is adjustable up and down to 
provide for inserting the end of the tip more 
or less into the socket G. 
Having now described our invention, We 
claim 
1. In a jointed rod, the combination, with 
the rod-section thereof provided with a socket 
or ferrule, of a tip-joint adapted to be in 
serted in said socket and provided with a 
tapered nut whereby the parts are tightened 
and secured byfriction, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. In a jointed rod, the combination, with 
the body thereof provided at its front end 
with a socket or ferrule, of a tip-juint adapted 
to be inserted in said socket and a tapered 
adjustable nut on said tip-joint whereby the 
parts are tightened and secured by friction 
and by the adjustment of which the tip is 
adapted to be inserted more or less into its 
socket in the body portion, substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. In a jointed rod, the combination of the 
rod-section socketed at its front end for the 
reception of the end of the tip, a tip-joint 
adapted to enter said socket and having 
thereon a tapered nut for tightening the joint 
by friction, and a line or cord secured to the 
tip in front of said nut and wound upon and 
secured to the body portion toward the butt 
end, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
JASPER B. COLEMAN. 
VIRGIL I. GUYER. 
75 
9o 
Witnesses: 
S. C. WILLIAMS, 
J. T. SEASE, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470573.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 470,573. 
 
J. P. HOWE. 
BEADING MACHINE, 
Patented Mar. 8, 1892. 
WITNESSES 
44 greer 
. 
////ENTOR 
"J/6v Y6 
ATTOREYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES P. HOWE, OF CASS CITY, MICHIGAN. 
BEADING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,578, dated March 8, 1892. 
Application filed October 6, 1891, Serial No. 407,845, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern.' 
Be it known that I, JAMES P. How E, of Cass 
City, in the county of Tuscola, and State of 
Michigan, have invented a new and improved 
Beading-Machine, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of machines which are used for 
making beads on eaves-troughs and similar 
articles; and the object of my invention is to 
produce a cheap and simple machine which 
Will make the beads accurately and rapidly, 
Which may be easily operated, and which is 
constructed in such a way that it will not 
Warp if made of wood and will not easily get 
out of repair. 
To this end my invention consists in certain 
features of construction and combinations of 
parts, Which will be hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the views. 
Figure 1 is a broken perspective view of the 
machine embodying my invention, and Fig. 
2 is a vertical cross-section of the same. 
The machine is provided with fixed and 
movable jaws 10 and 11, the jaws being of 
similar construction, and the fixed jaw 10 is 
Secured to base-pieces 12, and these base 
pieces form the support for the machine. The 
jaws are hinged together at the bottom, as 
shown at 13, and near the top each jaw is pro 
vided with a semi-cylindrical groove 14, the 
two grooves being adapted to register, and 
the upper edge of the fixed jaw 10 is rounded 
slightly, as shown at 15, so that by bending 
the sheet metal forming a trough over the 
edge 15 or the square edge of the jaw 11 the 
metal may be more or less rounded, as de 
sired. A roller 16 extends longitudinally 
through the grooves 14, is provided at one end 
with a crank 16, by means of which it may 
be turned, and is also provided with a longi 
tudinal groove 17, in which one edge of the 
metal to be operated on may be inserted. On 
the back side of the fixed jaw and near the 
upper portion of the jaw is secured a double 
Wedge-shaped brace 18, which, if the jaw is 
made of wood, will prevent it from warping, 
and this brace is connected at the ends With 
the base-pieces 12 by metallic braces 19. Near 
the ends of the fixed jaw 10 are bolt 20, which 
extend through the brace 18, through the fixed 
jaw, and through recesses 22 in the Swinging 
jaw 11, and the bolts are bent downward 
slightly, as shown at 21, so that they will con 
form approximately to the movement of the 
jaw 11. The bolts are secured at the back 
side of the machine by nuts, and the front 
ends of the bolts terminate in heads 23, and 
the bolts are held to move in the longitudinal 
slots 24 of the slide-block 25, which slide-block 
is held to move horizontally on the movable 
jaw li, and in order that the block may slide 
easily beneath the bolt-heads the bolts are 
provided with bearing-washers 26. The slotted 
portions of the slide-block 25 are recessed, SO 
as to form wedges 27, which wedges have the 
same inclination, and the Wedges are adapted . 
to slide beneath the bolt-heads 23, and thus 
force the jaw 11 against the jaw 10. Beneath 
the slide-block 27 is a block 28, which is fixed 
to the jaw 11, and pivoted on a bolt 29 in the 
block 28 is a lever 30, which extends upward 
from the pivot and connects by means of a 
strap 31 with the slide-block 25. It will thus 
be seen that by swinging the lever 30 the jaW 
11 may be forced against the jaw 10 or may 
be separated therefrom. The jaws10 and 11 
are normally pressed apart by a spiral spring 
32, which fits in a recess in the fixed jaw 10 
and presses against the jaw 11. 
To operate the machine, the edge of the 
metal to be beaded is inserted in the groove 
17 of the roller 16, the jaws 11 and 10 are 
clamped together by means of the lever 30 
and the wedge connection above described, 
and the roller 16 is then revolved by means 
of its crank, thus winding the metal upon it 
and providing a bead. 
Having thusfully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A beading-machine comprising a fixed 
and a movable jaw hinged together and hav 
ing registering grooves, a roller provided with 
a longitudinal groove and held to-turn in the 
jaw-grooves, and a block sliding along the 
outer side of the movable jaw and having its 
outer face inclined, and a transverse bolt or 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
75 
OO 
470,578 
bar extending from the fixed jaw into engage 
ment with the said inclined face, substantially 
as described. 
2. A beading-machine comprising a fixed 
and a movable jaw hinged together and pro 
Vided With registering grooves, a brace se 
cured to the back of the fixed jaw, bolts ex 
tending through the fixed jaw and through 
recesses in the swinging jaw, said bolts hav 
ing heads at their front ends, a slotted slide 
block having inclined faces to engage the bolt 
heads, a lever for moving the slide-block, and 
a grooved beading-roller held to turn in the 
jaw-grooves, substantially as described. 
3. A beading-machine comprising a fixed 
jaw having a groove near its upper edge, a 
brace fixed to the back of the fixed jaw and 
o 
connected by braces with the base of the ma 
chine, a swinging jaw hinged to the fixed jaw 
and having a groove near the upper edge to 
register with the groove in the fixed jaw, a 
slide-block held to slide on the movable ja:W 
and having inclined faces thereon, bolts se 
cured to the fixed jaw and extending through 
the swinging jaw and slide-block, a lever piv 
oted on the swinging jaw and having an op 
erative connection with the slide-block, and 
a revoluble beading-roller held to turn in the 
jaw-grooves, substantially as described. 
25 
JAMES P. HOWE. 
Witnesses: 
WILL L. BAKER, 
C. W. MCPHAIL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470673.txt	E. E. HEATH, 
LOCK FOR SHOW CASES, 
Patented Mar. 15, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 470,673. 
2 
2 
N2 
N 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELMER ELLSWORTH HEATH, OF ELDRED, PENNSYLVANIA. 
LOCK FOR SHOW - CAS E.S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,673, dated March 15, 1892. 
Application filed December 20, 1890, Serial No. 375,364. (No model.) 
55 
- 
6. & 
. 
- 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELMER ELLSWORTH 
HEATH, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Eldred, in the county of McKean and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvementsin Show-Cases, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had therein to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
The object of this invention is to automati 
cally lock the door of a show-case whenever a 
sliding drawer is closed by a reciprocating or 
other movement which is in a plane practi 
cally at right angles to the plane of the door. 
As ordinarily constructed, the drawer slides 
horizontally in suitable cleats, while the door 
swings upon hinges, so that the movable edge 
of the door travels in an are of a circle, al 
though practically it moves toward and from 
the attendant when he stands in front of both 
the door and the drawer. Therefore under 
the usual arrangement of parts the locking 
device must have a movement at right an 
gles to the path of the drawer, so as to be 
thrust into the path traveled by the door, 
this movement of the locking device being ef 
fected when the drawer is being closed. 
Prior to the date of my invention a great 
variety of devices-some of them including a 
rock-shaft and locking-spurs-had been em 
ployed for locking drawers and other parts of 
such structures as writing-desks by a single 
movement of one of the parts; but my inven 
tion relates to the locking of the door or doors 
of a show-case by the closing of a drawer 
moving below the show-case, and from the 
fact that a show-case is ordinarily mounted 
upon and supported by a counter or table, 
while the drawer is suspended from the lower 
surface of the counter or table, it is necessary 
to so construct the parts that the presence of 
the counter or table between the show-case 
and door will not interfere with the locking 
operation. 
Having thus indicated the character of my 
invention I will proceed to describe and illus 
trate one way which I have devised for car 
rying it into effect, 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a show 
case and drawer having my invention applied 
thereto. Fig. 2 is a similar view showing a 
modification adapted for use in connection 
with a show-case having but one door. Figs. 
3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are detail views, enlarged, of 
various parts. 
Like reference-letters refer to similar parts 
wherever used. 
A represents, generally, the show-case hav 
ing a number of doors BB, hinged thereto at 
their lower edges and each provided, by pref 
erence, with a thumb-catch at its opposite 
edge to hold the door closed when not locked. 
C is the front, and D one of the sides, of 
an ordinary drawer - say, for instance, a 
money-drawer-supported below the bottom 
of the show-case in suitable cleats or ways 
attached to the under side of the counter or 
other show-case support, so as to slide out 
and in. 
d is a groove or other inclined track formed 
in or attached to the side D of the drawer, 
the front end of the track being nearest the 
upper edge of the drawer. By preference I 
make this track in the form of a groove in 
the drawer side. 
E is a link or bar supported from the show 
case with its lower end entering the groove, 
the linkbeing supported in such manner that 
it is free to rise when the drawer is closed 
and to fall when the drawer is opened. 
F is a rock-shaft supported near the swing 
ing edges of the doors and provided with 
a series of locking-spursff, the arrangement 
of parts being such that when the drawer is 
closed and the other parts in the position 
shown in Fig. 1, the spurs are interposed in 
the paths of the movable edges of the doors, 
so that they cannot be opened. 
It will be readily understood from an ex 
amination of the drawings that when the 
drawer is opened by being moved outward 
the link E will be moved downward, and as 
the upper end of the link is attached to the 
cranked end of the rock-shaft the locking 
spurs will be moved out of the paths of the 
doors, so that they can be opened. 
I prefer to support the lower end of the 
link E against the thrust of the drawer by 
means of a bracket projecting downward 
from the bottom of the counter A' or the 
show-case, substantially as indicated at a, 
Fig. 3. When, however, it is desired to use 
this invention forlocking a single door, some 
of the parts above described may be omitted. 
- 
95 
IOC 
75 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
470,678 
O 
5 
 
Referring to Fig. 2, it will be seen that the 
link E is arranged in a groove or recess a', 
formed for its reception in one of the verti 
cal posts A' of the show-case frame, with its 
upper end e bent inward into the path trav 
ersed by the door. The door has an L-shaped 
recess b, formed in that edge which is adja 
cent to the link, the open end of the recess 
being in such position that when the link is 
drawn downward, as the drawer is opened, 
the bent end of the link offers no obstruction 
to the movement of the door in either direc 
tion; but when the door is closed and the 
drawer afterward closed the bent end of the 
link is thrust up into the upper end of the 
recess, thereby locking the show-case door 
against being opened. When, however, the 
door of the show-case is hinged by its upper 
edge or by one end, so that its lower edge 
swings outward, the locking devices may be 
simplified by omitting the upper end of the 
link, so that it shall consist, simply, of a 
straight bar, as is indicated in Fig. 7, where 
the upper end of the link enters a recess b' in 
the lower part of the door. By preference I 
make this recess in the form of a socket in or 
der that when the door is closed the link shall 
be concealed. Of course the construction of 
locking dvices shown in Fig. 7 may be em 
ployed with a door which ishinged at its lower 
edge, because in such case, when the drawer 
is closed, the door cannot be opened, except by 
bending the link, the rigidity of which will 
undermany circumstances resist the opening 
of the door to a sufficient extent. 
I am aware that a great variety of devices 
have been used for simultaneously locking a 
series of drawers against being opened and 
that in some cases an inclined track has been 
formed in the side wall of a drawer to imparta 
rising-and-falling movement to a vertical bar; 
but I believe myself to be the first to mount 
a rocking device upon a show-case which is 
provided with a hinged door, such locking de 
vice having a vertically-moving bar, with its 
lower end projecting below the base, which 
30 
35 
40 
45 
55 
supports the frame-work and glass of the 
show-case, in combination with a horizontally 
moving drawer engaging with the lower end 
of such bar. 
It is obvious that the show-case may be 
placed upon the table or counter, the lower 
end of the bar projecting below the base of 
the show-case far enough to allow for the in 
terposition of such table or counter between 
the show-case and the drawer, and many other 
modifications will suggest themselves to a 
skilled mechanic without departing from the 
spirit of my invention. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of a show-case having 
a swinging door and provided with a vertical 
opening through the bottom, a support for the 
show-case provided with a vertical opening, 
a door-locking device mounted on the show- 65 
case and having a vertically-moving bar pro 
jecting down through the support and engag 
ing with the wall of the opening, and a hori 
Zontally-sliding drawer mounted below. the 
support and engaging with the projecting end 
of the bar, the Wall of the opening preventing 
sidewise moving of the lower end of the bar, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of a support for a show 
case, a show-case on the support, a locking 
rock-shaft supported near the swinging edge 
of the door and having a series of locking 
spurs which engage with the outer face of 
the door and an arm projecting within the 
show-case, a vertically-moving bar attached 
to the inner end of the arm within the show 
case and projecting below the bottom of the 
show. case, and a horizontally-sliding drawer 
supported below the show-case and engaging 
with the projecting end of the bar to lock the 
door, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ELMER, ELLSWORTH HEATH. 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
FRED F. BROWN, 
G. PETER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470773.txt	A. WURTS, 
CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING DEVICE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar, l5, 1892. 
. 
. 
Fir-2- 
is . 
f 
 
 
  
E2 
e 
3y 74 Attorney 
Af 
prior 
44-41 1. frty. 
(No Model.) 
No. 470,773. 
3. 
 
(No Model.) 
A. WURTS, 
- 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING DEWICE, 
No. 470,773. 
Patented Mar, 15, 1892, 
N 
The Norris Peters co, PHoro-LTHo, waBHNoton, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
A. WURTS. 
CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING DEWICE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 470,773, 
Patented Mar. 15, 1892. 
Fila 
 
 
(O)- 
Ditnesses 
%222 r 
24- 
4.7" 
Sy. 4s Attorney 
441-4s 2- ^z. 
TENRis resis co, rhoro-Ho. WASHINGTON, C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER WURTS, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WESTINGHOUSEELECTRIC AND MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME 
PIACE. 
CIRCUIT- NTERRUPTING DEVICE. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,773, dated March 15, 1892. 
Application filed December 1, 1891, Serial No. 413,749. (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whon, it may concert: 
Beit known that I, ALEXANDER WURTS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Circuit-Interrupting De 
vices, (Case No. 472.) of which the following is 
a Specification. 
The invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the construction and organization of 
apparatus forinterrupting electric-circuit con 
nections and for preventing the maintenance 
of electric arcs where it is desirable that these 
should be extinguished-as, for instance, in 
lightning-arresters, electric fuses, manual and 
automatic Switches, &c. 
It is frequently desirable in operating elec 
tric apparatus that the current be allowed to 
momentarily traverse a given circuit and that 
this circuit or the flow of current therethrough 
should be then automatically interrupted. 
When the flow of currents of high electro-mo 
tive force is thus interrupted, it is very diffi 
Cult to prevent the formation of a destructive 
electric arc, and various different forms of 
arc-rupturing devices have therefore been em 
ployed for protecting such circuits. It has 
been customary to protect electric circuits 
from injury by lightning by providing an in 
terrupted circuit to the earth, the break in 
the continuity of the circuit being formed by 
slightly-separated confronting plates. The 
currents which normally traverse the circuit 
are not of sufficient potential to strike an arc 
across the air-gap between the plates; but in 
the event of lightning striking the circuit or 
inducing in it a charge differing in potential 
from that of the earth the induced electro-mo 
tive force becomes sufficient to strike an arc 
across the air-space, and thus allow the light 
ning or induced charge to escape to the earth. 
The generated current usually employed for 
electric lighting and electric railways is liable 
by reason of its high electro-motive force to 
continue to flow across such an air-gap and 
maintain the arc when it has been thus es 
tablished, and injury may result to the gen 
erating apparatus by reason of the compara 
tively low resistance of the short circuit thus 
formed. For this reason various devices have 
been employed for automatically extinguish 
ing the arc immediately after the lightning 
discharge has taken place. In other instances 
closed circuits are allowed under certain con 
ditions to receive an abnormal current, which 
current then opens some portion of the cir 
cuit, and means have to be provided for ex 
tinguishing the arc which tends to form at 
the point of interruption. For example, in 
the case of an electric fuse employed for all 
tomatically interrupting a circuit when it is 
traversed by an abnormal current it is desir 
able that some means be provided for pre 
venting an arc from being maintained be 
tween the melted ends of the fuse. Again, it 
is frequently desirable to employ a switch for 
interrupting the connections of a circuit nor 
mally carrying currents of high electro-motive 
force, and in such case special means should 
be provided for preventing a destructive arc 
from being formed or maintained between the 
electrodes of the switch. 
My invention is applicable to these several 
uses, and in general it is useful wherever it 
is desirable to prevent the formation or con 
tinuance of a destructive electric arc. 
It should be stated that the invention is 
particularly useful in connection with alter 
nating electric currents of high electro-motive 
force; but it is also useful with currents con 
tinuous in direction. 
My invention consists in employing as elec 
trodes between which the maintenance of an 
arc is to be prevented blocks or electrodes of 
certain metal or metals, as hereinafter par 
ticularly set forth, and presenting proper Sur 
faces to each other and acting to introduce 
such resistance in the intervening air-gap as 
to prevent the continuance of the flow of cur 
rent. These electrodes are arranged and con 
nected in circuit in different manners, ac 
cording to the purpose for which employed. 
I have found that if two cylinders of zinc 
placed side by side and separated by a very 
narrow space are made to form the terminals 
of an electric circuit, and if an electric arc 
be started between the two, the arc will all 
tomatically extinguish itself. Other forms of 
electrodes than cylindrical will also serve the 
purpose; but usually I have found it desir 
95 
ICO 
O 
15 
23 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
- 
470,773 
75 
O 
able to have the electrodes present narrow 
lines of confronting surfaces, and it also 
Seems desirable to have such an amount or 
Surface area of metal as will prevent the body 
of metal from becoming heated to an intense 
degree. I have found, also, that compounds 
of zinc-such, for instance, as brass-may be 
used instead of zinc and other compounds of 
zinc, and also pure antimony and various 
Compounds of antimony. 
The precise manner in which this device 
Operates to extinguish the arc is not clearly 
ascertained; but it is probable that a slight 
amount of the zinc or antimony is volatilized 
by the current, producing an oxide of the 
metal in the form of a vapor, and such a va 
por is a non-conductor of electricity, and this 
non-conducting vapor then becomes a barrier 
to the passage of the current, and thus inter 
rupts its flow. This theory, however, is not 
advanced as being necessarily the correct 
theory, but one which affords a probable ex 
planation of the operation. 
The specification will set forth clearly the 
manner of constructing the apparatus, what 
ever be the true explanation of its mode of 
operation. 
I make use of the invention in various 
Ways. 
For instance, three of these electrodes 
may be placed side by side and the central 
one connected with the earth, while the two 
outer ones are connected with the respective 
sides of an electric circuit. Lightning dis 
charges may then take place across the in 
tervening air-gaps to the earth; but the mo 
ment the line has been relieved of the high 
tension current caused by the lightning the 
arcs between the two outer electrodes and 
the central one, which might otherwise tend 
to cause a short circuit of the machine, are 
automatically interrupted. 
In order to use this device with an electric 
fuse, the electrodes, separated from each other 
in the manner set forth, may be connected in 
a shunt-circuit around the terminals of the 
fuse. When the fuse is melted by the pas 
Sage of an abnormal current, there is usually 
a tendency for the current from the genera 
tor to continue the arc once established be 
tween the melted ends of the fuse, the vapors 
of the metal or alloy forming the fuse serving 
as a conductor. The circuit-interrupter in 
shunt upon the fuse offers a path for the cur 
rent, and an arc will momentarily form across 
the space between its electrodes, thus with 
drawing the current from the melted ends of 
the fuse, and this arc will then automati 
cally extinguish itself. The invention may 
be similarly applied to switches, both manual 
and automatic, and in fact to any electric ap 
- paratus where it is desirable to permit an arc 
to momentarily exist between two electrodes. 
I have found that two electrodes such as 
have been described when separated one 
thirty-second of an inch and connected di 
rectly to the terminals of a one-thousand-volt 
alternator will not maintain an arc under any 
circumstances, and, furthermore, if the are be 
started-as, for example, by placing a piece 
of tin-foil between the electrodes-the inter 
ruption of the are is so instantaneous that the 
electrodes themselves are not injured. 
Different numbers of electrodes may be en 
ployed in different instances to suit the cir 
cumstances and electrodes of other form than 
cylindrical-for instance, hexagonal, beveled, 
spherical, &c.-may be employed. 
In the accompanying drawings I have illus 
trated several different forms and applica 
tions of the circuit-interrupter. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a diagram 
showing the invention applied to a lightning 
arrester, the electrodes being cylindrical in 
form. Fig. 2 is a plan of the lightning-ar 
rester. Fig. 3 is a similar view showing a 
semi-cylindrical form of electrodes. Fig. 4 
illustrates spherical electrodes. Fig. 5 illus 
trates parabolic surfaces. Fig. 6 illustrates 
parabolic surfaces in combination with spheri 
cal electrodes. Fig. 7 illustrates hollow cy 
lindrical electrodes. Fig. 8 illustrates hex 
agonal form of electrodes. Fig. 9 is an eleva 
tion of a fuse equipped with the arc-arresting 
device. Figs. 10 and 11 are respectively an 
end view and plan of the fuse attachment, 
Figs. 12 and 13 illustrate an application of 
the invention to a switch. 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, A represents a 
generator of electricity, and L'L' main-line 
conductors leading therefrom. The main line 
is shown as having its terminals connected 
with a work-circuit-for instance, the primary 
coil p of an alternating-current converter C. 
The secondary coils of this converter sup 
plies translating devices d. Short cylinders 
E E of hard brass or zinc or antimony or 
compounds thereof-such as brass, &c.-are 
connected with the respective conductors L' 
I, and an interposed cylinder E of similar 
material is connected with the earth at G. It 
is evident that if an are be established be 
tween the electrodes E E and likewise be- . 
tween the electrodes E E then the machine 
A will be short-circuited, and therefore it is 
necessary that any arc which might be tem 
porarily formed between either or both of the 
outer electrodes and the central one by the 
passage of a lightning discharge should be 
immediately interrupted, and in practice it is 
found that with a device organized as de 
scribed an arc will not maintain itself, but 
for some reason will automatically extinguish 
itself. In practice I have employed electrodes 
of varying sizes and forms, and while I find 
that the shapes may be modified very much, 
provided the mass of metal is sufficient to . 
prevent the electrodes becoming melted, yet 
it may be desirable to give data regarding 
some of the forms which I have found in prac 
tice to operate successfully. I have used cyl 
inders of brass of about one and a quarter 
inches in length and one inch in diameter 
separated by a space varying from one sixty 
fourth to one-sixteenth of an inch, likewise 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
95 
IOO 
2Cd 
I 25 
 
470,773 
3 
7 O 
75 
Spherical blocks-such as shown in Fig. 4 
brass rods one-half inch long and one-half 
inch in diameter, and have obtained very ex 
cellent results-such, for instance, as inter 
rupting circuits of one-thousand-volt, alter 
nating-current generators. It should also be 
hoticed that with an alternating current bet 
tel' results seem to be obtained by placing 
the electrodes in very close proximity, and 
it Would seem that ordinarily the distance 
which they should be separated should be but 
slightly in excess of that required to prevent 
the normal current upon the circuit to which 
the apparatus is applied from jumping across 
the air-gaps. 
In Fig. 3 I have indicated semi-cylindrical 
electrodes in place of the cylindrical ones 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Such form operates 
Very satisfactorily and gives nearly, if not 
Quite, as good results as the cylindrical form. 
may also be employed with good results and 
also parabolic surfaces, as shown in Fig. 5. 
In this instance the central electrode E is 
shown as constructed with both ends having 
parabolic surfaces, while the blocks e'e' have 
only the ends which confront the electrode e 
constructed with parabolic surfaces. 
In Fig. 6 the electrodes E" E are spherical, 
while the central electrode E is similar in 
shape to that shown in Fig. 5. 
In Fig. 7 the same general structure as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2 is employed, with the 
exception that the electrodes are hollow in 
stead of solid. 
In Fig. Shexagonal forms are employed, an 
gles of the electrodes being presented to each 
other. It will also be understood that any 
suitable material coated with the metal may 
be used. 
In Figs. 9, 10, and 11 the device is illus 
trated as employed in connection with an 
electric fuse F, which may be of any suitable 
form--as, for instance, a safety strip or fuse 
of lead or alloy which will melt at any de 
sired temperature. This fuse is in shunt upon 
the electrodes E' E, and its ends are secured 
in slots E, formed in the electrodes, or they 
may be coupled thereto in any other conven 
ient manner. The entire device is shown as 
connected in a conductor L', leading from the 
generator A, and if a current of abnormal 
strength traverses this conductor it will melt 
the fuse F. Such an interruption of the cir 
cuit is liable to create a tendency for an arc 
to be formed across the air-space between the 
electrodes, and the formation of such an arc 
will withdraw the arc from the melted ends 
of the fuse. The arc between the electrodes 
is then itself immediately interrupted by the 
automatic action of the arc-rupturing device. 
In Figs. 12 and 13 the invention is illus 
trated in connection with a circuit closing and 
opening switch S. When such a switch is 
opened, there is a tendency for an arc to form 
at the separating switch-plates. Such an arc 
may be drawn away from the switch-plates 
by the arc-rupturing device, as in the case of 
the fuse; but it may be desirable in Some in 
stances to have the electrodes E" E rest in 
contact with each other while the switch is 
closed and to provide means for separating 
them immediately after the switch is opened. 
This may be done in different ways-as, for in 
stance, by means of a non-conducting Wedge K 
upon the switch-lever, one of the electrodes E 
being movable with reference to the other E. 
It may be observed that the number of elec 
trodes employed in connection with the fuse 
and the switch may be varied, as it is not 
necessary that there should always be three. 
There may be two or four or a greater num 
ber, according to the circulmstances. 
While I have spoken particularly of Zinc 
and antimony and their compounds, it may 
be added that bismuth, cadmium, mercury, 
and amalgams also appear to possess the 
qualities of extinguishing the arc, and it may 
be possible that other substances may be 
found which will have the required charac 
teristics; but it may be added that I have 
tried copper, carbon, aluminium, Steel, iron, 
and various other substances without obtain 
ing the same satisfactory results as from the 
metals and compounds above mentioned. 
I claim as my invention 
1. An arc-rupturing device consisting of 
two or more electrodes of zinc, antimony, Ol' 
compounds thereof or other materials hav 
ing a non-conducting vaporous oxide, Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. An arc-rupturing device consisting of 
blocks of brass or its substantial equivalent 
of large radiating surface relative to their 
confronting surfaces, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination of two or more elec 
trodes containing zinc or antimony Or equiva 
lent metal placed adjacent to each other and 
having confronting diverging surfaces, said 
electrodes having a large radiating surface 
relative to their confronting surfaces, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. A device for preventing the maintenance 
of an electric arc, consisting of electrodes ad 
jacent to each other, composed of masses of 
metal having curved confronting surfaces, 
and an electric fuse having its terminals in 
electrical connection with the respective 
masses of metal. 
5. A lightning-arrester for electric circuits, 
consisting of electrodes of brass or its equiva 
lent of large mass and diverging surfaces, 
substantially as described. 
6. A lightning-arrester for electric circuits, 
consisting of parallel bars of brass or equival 
lent material placed in close proximity to each 
other and having their confronting surfaces 
diverging, substantially as described. 
7. The combination, with an electric cir 
cuit, of two electrodes constituting terminals 
of the circuit and composed of a metal whose 
oxide is a non-conductor of electricity. 
S. The combination, with an electric cir 
cuit, of two electrodes constituting terminals 
95 
Ido 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 3o 
O 
3O 
45 
50 
55 
 
4 
470,773 
of the circuit and composed of a material arc, which consists in generating by means I5 
yielding a non-conducting vapor under the 
influence of heat. 
9. The combination, with an electric cir 
cuit, of a lightning-arrester consisting of two 
electrodes of zinc,brass, or its equivalent, con 
nected, respectively, with the respective sides 
of Said circuit, and an intermediate similar 
electrode connected with the earth. . 
10. In an electrical apparatus, an arc-rupt 
uring device consisting of electrodes of zinc, 
antimony, or their compounds or equivalents 
placed in close proximity to each other. 
11. The method of interrupting an electric 
of the are a non-conducting vapor within the 
path of the arc and by such vapor increasing 
the resistance offered to the passage of the 
current until the arc is extinguished, Sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 23d day of November, 
A.D. 1891. 
ALEXANDER WURTS. 
2O 
Witnesses: 
R. D. MERSHON, 
J. W. SMITH, 
C 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470873.txt	W. A. CHAPMAN & E. GASH. 
CANE. 
Patented Mar. 15, 1892, 
(No Model.) 
No. 470,873 
 
3-24) 
9 
22 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. CHAPMAN AND EDGAR GASH, OF MACOMB, ILLINOIS. 
CANE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,873, dated March 15, 1892. 
Application filed October 26, 1891, Serial No. 409,784. (No model.) 
rotion. 
Operation: This walking-cane, when in 55 
15 mon use, while on patriotic occasions the at- country he first grasps the capa and draws it 6c 
5 McDonough and State of Illinois, have in- the heads S and i, wherein small eyes e e are 5o 
fitting cap a, which holds the rod d and flag 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM. A. CHAP-I in in place and protects them from becoming 
MAN and EDGAR GASH, citizens of the United soiled. 
The flag in is attached to the rodd between 
States, residing at Macomb, in the county of 
vented a new mode of constructing walking- placed, to which the upper and lower edges 
canes in such a manner that a flag can be of the flag are secured, which prevents the 
concealed in the cane or displayed, as may be flag from slipping on the rod d when being 
desired, of which the following is a specifica- furled on the rod for inserting into the tube B. 
Our invention has for its object the con- common use, to a casual observer would not 
struction of a walking-cane, the lower part of have any attraction whatever; but when the 
which is a tube wherein a flag attachment is cane is carried in a patriotic procession and 
concealed from view when the came is in com- the operator wishes to display the flag of his 
tachment and flag can be drawn out of the off the head i, and then takeshold of the head 
tube and displayed when desired. 
and draws out the rodd, to which the flag is at 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents an ele- tached, until the head S is at the lower end of 
vation of the cane. Fig.2 represents the lower the tube B. (See Fig. 3.) Then any ornament 
of construction. Fig. 3 represents the flag at- flag is then unfurled, the cane then becomes 
tachment drawn out of the cane and the flag a flag-staff, and the cane is held in any posi 
unfurled. 
tion that the operator wishes. 
To change the device into a walking-cane, 
Similar letters refer to like parts in each 
the operator furls the flag tightly around the 7c 
A represents the upper part of the cane. 
rod d, slides it back into the tube B, and then 
B represents a metal tube flush with the places the cap a on the socket h. The cane 
Having thus described our invention, what 
part A and eight or ten inches long. This is then complete as before. 
tube is rigidly attached to the wood part in 
part, making a complete Walking-cane. 
Inside of the tube B is fitted the rod d, . A walking-cane having concealed a flag at 
which has at the ends heads S and i, which tachment, the cane being constructed with a 
have eyes e e. The upper heads is fitted metal tube at the lower end and having fit 
out it will stay at any place that may be de- heads S and i, head having a socket h, be 
sired. The lower end of the tube B is closed tween which heads the flag n is attached and 
in at c sufficiently to keep the head S from held in place by means of the eyes e e, sub 
being drawn out of the tube. The head on stantially as shown and described. 
20 end of the cane in section to show the manner desired can be placed in the socketh. The 65 
3o the cane at J and becomes like an integral we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let- 75 
ters Patent, is 
35 close in the tube B, so that when it is drawn ted in said tube the rod d, which rod has 8o 
25 view of the drawings, in which- 
o the lower end of the rod dis made so as to fit 
4. into the lower end of the tube B. A socketh 
is formed in the head, in which a spear-head 
or other ornament can be placed when the 
rod d is drawn out of the tube B, as shown in 
45 Fig. 3. Over the socket his placed a close- 
Witnesses: 
T. J. PRICE, 
MARTIN PRICE. 
- 
SE,AHAPMAN. 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US470973.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC F. IBISSELL, OF TRENTON, NEW JERSEY. 
N UT : LO C K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 470,973, dated March 15, 1892. 
Application filed September 25, 1890, Serial No. 366, ll6, (No model.) 
55 
. 
To all uv70Tmv it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ISAAC F. BISSELL, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Trenton, 
in the county of Mercer and State of New Jer 
sey, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Nut-Locks; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in nut-locks, the object of the invention being 
to simplify and perfect the construction of 
devices employed for this purpose; and it 
therefore consists in e the construction, ar 
rangement, and combination of parts, sub 
stantially as Will be hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a vertical longi 
tudinal section of my improved lock-nut, rep 
resented as applied in operative position to a 
bolt which is provided with right and left 
hand threads. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
left-hand part of my improved lock-nut. Fig. 
3 is a reverse plan view of the same. Fig. 4 
is a plan view of the right-hand part of the 
lock-nut. Fig. 5 is a vertical section of the 
same. Fig. 6 is a side elevation of the left 
hand part of the nut. Fig. 7 is a vertical sec 
tion of the same. Fig. 8 is a vertical section 
of my improved lock-nut and the right and 
left hand threaded bolt with which it is ap 
plied, the Section being taken upon a diago 
nal line of Figs. 1 and 2, so as to show the pin 
which is used for the purpose of holding the 
two nuts together so as to prevent turning. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts throughout all the different 
figures of the drawings. 
My improved lock-nut is designed for use 
with a bolt having right and lefthand threads. 
This bolt may have its threads intertwining 
or it may have two sections of threads, one 
section being a right-hand thread and the 
other being a left-hand thread. 
C denotes an example of bolt having the 
right-hand-threaded section D and the left 
hand-threaded section E, these two sections 
being of different diameter, the right-hand 
part being the larger. 
The nut-lock consists, essentially, of two 
| nuts, one of which I term the  right-hand nut 
and the other the left-hand nut. 
A denotes the right-hand nut, which is 
adapted to travel upon the right-hand-thread 
edsection or the right-hand threads of the bolt. 
This nutis therefore formed with the internal 
threads a, adapted to engage the right-hand 
threads, as D, of the bolt. The nut A, al 
though being in the main a right-hand nut, is 
provided with the internal threads a', which 
are adapted to engage the left-hand bolt or 
left-huand threads formed externally upon the 
left-hand-threaded projection on the left-hand 
nut, which I shall presently refer to." The 
threads a have a greater diameter than the 
threads a. The length of the internally - 
threaded part a' may be the same as or less 
than the length of the threaded parta. Thus 
it will be seen that the nut A, which I term 
the  right-hand nut, is provided with the 
internally-threaded part adapted to engage 
the right-hand-threaded bolt, and also with 
an internally-threaded part to engage a left 
hand-threaded bolt, the two threaded parts 
being of unequal diameters. 
B denotes the left-hand nut. It is shown 
in elevation in Fig. 6 and in section in Fig.7. 
It is provided with the internal threads b, 
which are adapted to engage the left-hand 
screw-threads on the section E of the bolt C. 
The diameter of the threads b may be equal 
to or less than the diameter of the internal 
threads a within the right-hand nut A. Ob 
viously, when a bolt like the bolt C is em 
ployed, having the right-hand-threaded sec 
tion and the left-hand-threaded section of un 
equal diameters, it will be necessary that the . 
threads a and the threads b shall likewise be 
of unequal diameters; but when the bolt with 
which the lock-nut is used is provided with 
its threaded sections of equal size and di 
ameter and cut upon each other, then the 
threads a and the threads b may be of equal 
diameter. The left-hand nut B is provided 
with a tubular or cylindrical projection hav 
ing left-hand screw-threads b' cut thereon. 
This left-hand-threaded projection is adapted 
to engage the internal threads Ca' within the 
nut A. After the right-hand nut has been 
placed upon the bolt, its internal threads a 
engaging the right-hand threads thereof, the 
left-hand nut may then be screwed upon the 
75 
85 
95 
ICO 
O 
I 5 
35 
45 
 
470,973 
bolt, its internal threads b engaging the left 
lhand threads thereof, and when it is screwed 
up against the right-hand nut the left-hand 
threaded projection b' will engage the left 
hand part ta' of the right-hand nut A, and 
thus the left-hand nut will be serewed into 
the right-hand nut and the two muts may be 
screwed tightly together, as shown in Fig. 1, 
they at the same time engaging, respectively, 
the right and left threaded sections of the 
bolt, whereby is arranged and combined a 
strong and secure lock-nut. 
The right-hand nut A is provided at each 
corner with a longitudinal perforation c, there 
being four of them. Of course there may be 
any number of these perforations, as may be 
desired. There may be less than four or more 
than four. Further, the left-hand nut is pro 
vided in one corner with an opening dl, which 
is preferably made square. As the left-hand 
nut revolves upon the right-lhand nut during 
the operation of screwing the former into the 
latter, the said opening or hole di will register 
successively with the several perforations c 
c, and when the left-hand nut has been screwed 
as tightly against the right-hand nut as it can 
be, taking care to leave the left-hand nut in 
such position that the hole d' therein may 
register with one of the perforations c, and of 
course regulating the tightness of the adjust 
ment of the left-hand nut so as to permit two 
of the holes to be thus located, then a pin, as 
F, will be introduced through the two holes, 
wlhich thus register for the purpose of con 
necting the right and left hand nuts, keeping 3 
them in proper relative position and prevent 
ing them from turning, said pin being pref 
erably square for a certain part of its length 
so as to lie closely within the square hole dl, 
while the rest portion of the pin is arranged to 4 
enter neatly into the perforation c. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
In a nut-lock, the combination, with a bolt 
formed with right and left hand screw-threads, 
of a nut A, having the internal threads a, 
adapted to engage the right-hand threads of 
the bolt, and the internal threads a', adapted 
to engage the left-hand threads on the pro- 5 
jection on the other nuut, said threads a and 
a" being of unequal diameter and said nut 
having the perforation c, and the nut B, hav 
ing tlhe internal threads lo, adapted to engage 
the left-hand threads of the bolt, and the ex- 5. 
ternal left-hand-threaded tubular projection 
b, adapted to engage the threads a' of the 
nut A, said nut B having the opening d, and 
the pin F, adapted to pass through the open 
ing in the nut B and one of the perforations 
in the nut A, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I a?fix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ISAAC F. BISSEILL. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY T. COOK, 
T. L. WORTHINGTON. 
O 
2 O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471073.txt	(No Model.) 
C. & J. CLOSZ, 
GRAIN SCREEN. 
No. 471,073, 
Patented Mar, 15, 1892. 
 
THE Nortats Peteris Co., FHoTo-THo, washincton. 
- UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARIES CLOSZ AND JACOB CLOSZ, OF ST. ANSGAR, IOWA. 
G RAIN-SCREEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,073, dated March 15, 1892. 
Application filed June 25, 1891, Serial No. 397,465. (No model.) 
- 
60 
65 
75 
7o all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CHARLEs CLOSZ and 
JACOB CLOSZ, citizens of the United States, 
residing at St. Ansgar, in the county of Mitch 
5 ell and State of Iowa, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Improvement in Grain 
Sirens, of which the following is a specifica 
10. 
The improvement herein is directed to the 
To production of a sheet-metal-platform screen 
adapted to clean and separate wheat from 
Straws, Weeds, and other kinds of grain, par 
ticularly oats, and is designed forusein thrash 
ing-machines, receiving and milling separa 
15 tors and farming mills, and for either end 
shake or side-shake machines. The surface 
Construction of the screen is such as to ef 
fect the freest possible separation and dis 
charge of the wheat through its openings and 
2O to effect the freest possible passage of such 
grain and foreign substances as ought to be 
carried out over the screen and to prevent 
choking or clogging with large screening ca 
pacity. The particular features of novelty 
25 in this surface construction will be pointed 
Out in the claims concluding this specification, 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 represents in top view so much of 
3o a sheet-metal-platform screen as illustrates 
our improvement, Fig. 2 is a vertical longi 
tudinal section of the same on the linea of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a cross-section on the line.b, 
looking toward the receiving end of the screen. 
35 Fig. 4 is a similar view on the line c, looking 
toward the discharge end of the screen. Fig. 
5 is a detail in section on the line d. Fig. 6 
is a detail in perspective of a portion of the 
Screening-surface. Fig. 7 shows enlarged in 
4o top view two of the lobed openings, and Fig. 
8 a side view of the same. 
The platform is constructed of longitudinal 
parallel corrugations of unequal width and 
preferably of unequal height, the widest, 1, 
45 of which are formed with the separating-open 
ings, and the narrowest, 2, forming surface 
channels or passages 3 for carrying off the 
foreign matter. The sides of the widest cor 
rugations are preferably slightly concave 
So and are formed with openings, which stand 
obliquely upward and forward from the base 
line of the channels. These openings are 
made by a single cut, the curvature of which 
conforms as nearly as possible to the line of 
beauty or cyma. That edge of the line of 
beauty which terminates near the ridge 1 of 
the corrugation is raised and stands forward 
like an ear, the lobe 4 of which rises prefer 
ably slightly above the topline of the corruga 
tion and overhangs that part of the opening. 
That edge of the line of beauty which termi 
nates at the base-line of the channels is de 
pressed and stands backward like an ear, the 
lobe 5 of which underhangs that part of the 
opening. The forward standing lobes 4 form 
concave backs, the inclination of which be 
gins at the base-line of the channels and in 
creases in pitch to the upper end of the lobe, 
while the inclination of the rearward stand 
ing under ears is greatest near the base-line, 
and with the forward standing edge forms a 
crescent-shapedopening, looking with a bird's- 
eye view, which obliquely crosses the channel. 
The under ear-lobes 5 are formed with an ab 
rupt concavity 6, Fig. 7, in their widest surface, 
which terminates in an abrupt knoll 7 just 
under the side edge 8 of the upper forward 
standing lobe, and between this knoll 7 and 
the forward standing lobe 4 the surface is 
slightly concave, and this concavity extends 
down to the base-line and forms a sort of 
basin 9 in the channel between the openings. 
A slight surface ridge 10 is formed obliquely 
across the channel at the line of the bend of 
the under ear-lobe, so as to facilitate the dis 
charge of the grain by forming a sort of di 
viding-line between the under sloping con 
cave surface 6 of the ear-lobe 5 and the up 
per concave surface-basin 9. The openings 
and the lobe-surfaces 4 over them and lead 
ing thereto gives a sidewise discharge of the 
grain through the openings from the concave 
side of the corrugation and a discharge of the 
grain through the openings in the line of its 
movement in the channels, which gives a large 
screening capacity, while the forward Stand 
ing lobes along the upper side of the corru 
gation prevent the lodging or sticking of 
anything in the openings. These openings 
are preferably coincident on the opposite 
sides of the corrugations; but they may be 
placed in alternate order, the essential fea 
95 
OO 
471,073 
O 
3O 
55 
7 o 
75 
ture being the form of the openings, the lobes 
covering their upper forward standing ends 
and terminating in the uncovered ends of 
Said openings obliquely across the channels. 
The imperforate corrugations give strength 
and increase the rigidity of the platform and 
form one side of each channel; but they may 
also be formed with the openings herein de 
scribed, or one side only of each corrugation 
may be imperforate and give good results, 
and the imperforate corrugation may be only 
a shallow ridge. 
In Separating oats from wheat the peculiar 
curved and inclined lobes over the upper 
part Unly of the openings tend to file the oats 
downward into the base track or line, and 
thereby cause their movement lengthwise 
across the openings, which at this point 
freely permit the passage of the shorter 
grains of wheat through them, as at this point 
the concave downward sloping surface in 
creases the width of the opening. The con 
VeX projection or knoll 7 and the oblique 
ridge 10 are advantageous to form a dividing 
line for supporting and for separating the 
oats and the wheat at the exposed part of the 
opening and for preventing the backward 
action of the grain and checking it at the 
base of the opening. These various surface 
parts co-operate to give a free forward move 
ment of Weeds and straws and screen the 
grain therefrom, while the lobes standing for 
Ward near the ridge of the V-shaped corru 
gation serve effectively in agitating and fa 
cilitating the forward movement of the chaff 
and Straw on the ridges of the corrugations 
between the lobes and over their sloping 
backs. The curve of the upper end of the 
opening is preferably shorter than that which 
extends down to the base-line of the channel, 
So as to form comparatively small ear-lobes 
along the corrugated surface near the ridge 
and comparatively large openings along the 
channels, and these lobes may be compara 
tively flat on their upper surface, or they may 
be turned up with a bend and form, in con 
nection with the unbroken surface of the 
ridge, an elevated smooth ridge having open 
ings shielded at the side thereof and exposed 
along the channel, one side of which is 
bounded by the imperforate corrugation. 
When the ridge-lobes are made flat, the con 
cave edge of the opening is depressed to give 
the required width of opening under the lobes. 
The openings are made a suitable distance 
apart and the degree of their forward stand 
ing inclination is such as to give a free move 
ment of the grain and stuff over the raised 
parts along the ridge and along the channel. 
It will be understood that the length of the 
openings will be governed by the degree of 
their inclination in the sides of the corruga 
tions and that by reason of being so pecu 
liarly guarded at their upper ends and ex 
posed at their lower ends along the base 
channel give an increased screening capacity 
to the screen, which is very advantageous 
under a crowded flow over the surface, as the 
grain is thereby caused to discharge along 
the entire opening, while under a light flow 
the discharge is along the base-channels. It 
will also be understood that the openings 
formed and guarded, as stated, may be ar'- 
ranged at right angles to the line of overflow. 
We claim as our improvement-- 
1. A corrugated sheet-metal-platform screen 
having openings of cyma form in the sides of 
the corrugations terminating in the channel 
in under rearward-sloping ear-lobes, for the 
purpose stated. 
2. Acorrugated sheet-metal-platform screen 
having openings of cyma form in the sides of 
the corrugations terminating in the channel 
in under rearward-sloping ear-lobes formed 
with abrupt cavities crossing the line of the 
channel, for the purpose Stated. 
3. A corrugated sheet-metal-platform screen 
having openings of cyma form, the upper con 
vexedges whereofterminate in forward-stand 
ing ear-lobes along the sides of the ridge of the 
corrugation, the lower convex edges of said 
openings terminating in the channel in under 
rearward-sloping ear-lobes along the base-line 
of the corrugation, for the purpose stated. 
4. Acorrugated sheet-metal-platform screen 
having openings of cyma form, the upper con 
vexedges whereof terminate in forward-stand 
ing ear-lobes along the sides of the ridge of 
the corrugation, the lower convex edges of said 
openings terminating in the channel in under 
rearward-sloping ear-lobes joining the base 
line of the corrugation and formed with an 
abrupt concavity, an abrupt convexity, and an 
oblique ridge crossing the channel at the sur 
face thereof, for the purpose Stated. 
5. Acorrugated sheet-metal-platform screen 
having cyma - formed openings obliquely 
standing in the sides of the corrugations, 
shielded at their upper ends along the sides 
of the ridge and having their lower ends ex 
posed in the channels, for the purpose stated. 
6. A sheet-metal-platform screen formed 
with alternating wide and narrow corruga 
tions, the sides of the widest corrugations 
slightly concave and having openings of cyma 
form standing obliquely and formed with con 
cave ear-lobes along and below the channel, 
sloping downward and rearward into the lower 
ends of said openings, for the purpose stated. 
7. A corrugated sheet-metal platform hav 
ing cyma-formed openings supplemented at 
their upper ends by lobes inclining forward 
and upward on the side of the ridge, for the 
purpose stated. 
8. A sheet-metal-platform screen having 
longitudinal parallel ridges rising from the 
base-channels and forming sloping concave 
surfaces having openings standing upward 
therein, Supplemented at their upper ends by 
forward-standing lobes having sloping backs, 
for the purpose stated. 
9. A sheet-metal-platform screen having 
90 
95 
OC 
I (5 
IIC) 
I I5 
I 25 
 
471,073 
3 
longitudinal parallel corrugations provided 
With sidewise-standing openings supplement 
ed at their upper ends with forward-standing 
lobes and terminating in uncovered ends 
5 crossing the base-channels, for the purpose 
Stated. 
10. A sheet-metal-platform screen formed 
with longitudinal parallel corrugations hav 
ing openings standing crosswise in the sides 
Io thereof, supplemented at their upper ends by 
for Ward-standing lobes, their lower ends ex 
posed along the channels bounded on One side 
by an imperforate corrugation, for the pur 
pOSe Stated. 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof we have signed this I5 
CHARLES CLOSZ. 
JACOB CTOSZ. 
Witnesses: 
MARTIN MOE, 
JEFF. TOLLEFSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471174.txt	(No Model.) 
C. B. HEBRON & C. J. EWERSON, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
PROCESS OF CONCENTRATING ORES, 
Patented Mar, 22, 1892. 
N 
N tes=ES N 
FedE. N. 
N 
AN 
N 
N 
N 
HEN 
ses 
s - 
w 
gES 
 
2 
2 
 
N 
I 2. 
H522.2 
s 
5.N. 
EEZ212NZ 
3.11 
% % is 8 
233 
NS SE2 2. 
SSN) 5%BER 
S2EEE S2 
m 
NNNNNNM 
 
s 
q2%2%27aa-ee 
(22e2Z2. 
- Zz/ 
No. 471,174, 
 
N 
 
 
IYN 
SNSS is 
RNE SENN 
N 7D) 
N 
EN2 ) 
2. 
N 
N 
N SEAFNE is 
N 
Fu 
2 - e. 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
N 
c 
Y s 
72%ze-se-; 
2zezefe/22 
C. B. HEBRON & C. J. EVER SON. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
PROCESS OF CONCENTRATING ORES, 
Patented 
g 22, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,174, 
 
asseries-oals 
EEEEN 
IR-R-R re-A 
resourcereason A 
Er 
a 
SaaS R 
. As 3S2 
ESNE Els 
IHI. 
re I 
ill 
I I 
E 
EE E 
ar 
arrehen-Peulanarcera 
SeeSeerase 
ILLILITILLIE 
 
IIIT 
N 
- Z77 we 7ator, 
The Norris PETERs co, Photo-LTHo, washinaroo. 
(No Model.) 
C. B. HEBRON & C. J. EWERSON. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 471.l74, 
PROCESS OF CONCENTRATING ORES 
Patented Mar. 22, 1892. 
SE 
5 
S-4 
k 
SS 
S 
SN 
R 
 
3 
s: 3 
p 
F. 
L 
=E 
s 
is 
s 
i 
--al 
ill 
t s 
H. 
s H SE 
HSHH. I 
Y 
-- a 
f 
N 
72%zesses, 
22ze-Zafaea/ 
%. 673 
Zezesz222s, 
N 
42a2a3Z512222 
ty 
yeT p 
w 
the MORRIS PETERS co, PHOTo-urho, washington, b, c, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES B. HEBRON AND CARRIE J. EVERSON, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
PROCESS OF CONCENTRATING O RES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,174, dated March 22, 1892. 
Application filed September l 1891, Serial No. 404,400, (No model.) 
5 
O 
35 
43 
45 
55 
thousand diameters, and the process embody 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
ing our invention has particular reference to 
lBe it known that we, CHARLES B, HEBRON 
the separation or concentration of such ores. 
and CARRIE J. EVERSON, both residents of 
The form. and structure of the mineral and 
Denver, in the county of Arapahoe and State 
metallic particles adapted when contained in 
of Colorado, have made new and useful Im 
a suitable crystalline rock-matrix to be sepa. 
provements in. Processes for the Concentra 
rated by our process is amply illustrated and 
tion of Certain Ores; and we do declare the 
particularly noticeable in bismuth, silver, cop 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
per carbonate, silver chloride, gray copper, 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
ruby silver, tellurides, copper and silver 
those skilled in the art to which it appertains 
glances, as well as other forms of black sul 
to practice the same. 
phurets, wire silver, nearly all native silver, 
Our invention relates to the concentration 
flake and flour gold, and frequently coarser 
of ores, and has for its object the successful 
and economical separation of the lighter met- particles of free gold, such mineral and metal- 65 
als and minerals from their associate rock, lic particles being irregular inform, with cavi 
many of which have never heretofore been ties or depressions on the surfaces thereof, and 
porous in structure, frequently resembling 
successfully separated by mechanical pro 
in appearance coral or sponge or vegetable 
cesses-that is, processes wherein the relative 
specific gravity of the ore values, the rock-fibers, as sprigs of moss or segments of fronds. 7o 
Further, there is a type of ores made up of an 
matrix of the ore, and the suspensive fluid in 
argentiferous class of minerals associated with 
which the separation has been attempted 
a tough crystalline rock, especially noticeable 
have been relied upon for effecting by means 
in spar-gangue carrying gray copper, in which 
of many different mechanical appliances the 
the mineral does not exist in minute particles 
desired separation of such values from the 
or in intimate dissemination through the rock, 
rock-matrix of the ore. 
but in coarse particles widely separated from 
The failures resulting from the heretofore 
each other and of an extremely rigid though 
known processes may be briefly stated to be 
friable texture, for the concentration of which 
due to the effort of inventors of mechanical 
our process is well adapted. In the operation 
processes and builders of ore-separators to ob 
of pulverizing this ore sufficiently to liberate 
tain the desired concentration with processes 
the mineral contained therein, though only a 
and machines based upon the theory con 
coarse pulverization is required, the mineral 
tained in the statement by text authorities 
becomes reduced to an almost impalpable 
that all metals and minerals are of greater 
slime, the particles thereof being sufficiently 
specific gravity than the rock portion of their 
fine for the requirements of this process. We 
respective ores, such statement being mis 
have also discovered that the buoyancy of the 
leading and untrue because of the porosity of 
above-named minerals and metallic particles 
structure and irregularity of form which ex 
or the tendency of such particles to remain 
ists in metallic and mineral particles con 
suspended in fluid may be so increased by ap 
tained in certain ores whereof the rock-ma 
plying thereto properly-prepared buoyant ma 
trix is crystalline, such rock particles having 
terial in a suitable way and under such press 
smooth and glassy surfaces, as We have dis 
ure as to cause particles thereof to adhere to 
covered by an extended series of microscopi 
the irregular Surfaces and to be contained or 
cal examinations, wherein the Ore examined 
pressed into the cavities or pores of such min 
has been first pulverized to a degree of fine 
eral and metallic particles that they will not 
ness permitting it to pass through the meshes 
only remain suspended in fluid for much 
of a series of Swiss bolting-cloth screens of a 
longer time than would the mineral and me 
mesh varying from one hundred to one hun 
tallic particles when not joined to particles 
dred and eighty meshes per linear inch and 
of buoyant material, but also to float upon 
then examining the mineral, metallic, and 
the Surface of liquid for a sufficient time to 
rock particles of the ore with a microscope 
be separated from the rock-matrix of the ore 
producing an enlargement of at least three 
75 
95 
OO 
471,174 
by such rock-matrix settling through such 
liquid. In practicing this invention such 
properly-prepared buoyant material is evenly 
distributed with the ore particles by means of 
shaking or revolving screens or of equivalent 
mechanical devices, and the mixture so ob 
tained is then submitted to a rubbing move 
ment and pressure, the result being that the 
particles of buoyant material are pressed into 
the cavities and pores, or partially So, of the 
mineral and metallic particles and made to 
adhere to the rough and irregular surfaces 
thereof, and they (the joined mineral and me 
tallic particles of the ore and buoyant mate 
rial) are of less specific gravity for a time than 
the rock particles of such ore. 
We have found ordinary mill-burrs to be 
effective in the operation of attaching the par 
ticles of buoyant material to the metallic and 
mineral particles of disintegrated ore. 
The amount of bouyant material to be 
added to a given quantity of pulverized ore 
must be determined by the bulk of the metal 
or mineral contained in such ore. Experience 
has shown us that if the amount of foreign 
buoyant material added to the disintegrated 
ore be equal to or slightly in excess of the 
bulk of metal or mineral contained in Such 
ore a sufficient buoyancy will thereby be im 
parted to the metal and mineral particles 
after thus joining to admit of their obtaining 
the upper strata when such prepared ore-stock 
is submitted to stratifying agencies. 
The following list comprises a number of 
materials which are typical of the substances 
that may be employed to render metallic and 
mineral particles buoyant: Charcoal, coke, 
lamp-black, plumbago, any of the friable 
vegetable fibers-such as bark, moss, straw, 
cotton, wool-also sulphur, (sublimed,) alu 
minum trihydrate, hydrated lime Sulphate, 
sodium oleate and other cheap Salts of Sodium, 
also the cheap metallic Sulphates and oleates. 
These salts must be dry not only in the ordi 
nary sense, but entirely dehydrated, so as to 
render them amorphous. The carbonaceous 
substances are first named because of their 
cheapness, their positiveness of action, and 
their destructibility in the furnace. Sulphur 
also acts as a fuel and in the free State and 
proper quantity for carrying out the process 
would be unobjectionable to the smelter. 
Lime salts acting as oxidizing fluxes need no 
consideration, nor do the Soluble Salts, as 
they are easily removed from the concentrates 
before smelting. In operating. With Soluble 
salts the water employed in the separator 
tank, hereinafter described, must be saturated 
either with the same Salt or with One which 
will preserve the same conditions-that is, 
remain incapable of dissolving or reacting 
chemically upon the salt mixed with the ore 
and attached to the metallic and mineral par 
ticles thereof. To this l'ule We make certain 
exceptions-to wit, cases where the newly 
formed substance is able to take the place of 
the one destroyed, as in the case of sodium 
oleate reacting to form oleic acid or any other 
oleate or in the case of common alum acting 
to form aluminium hydrate. 
The terms oleic acid' and oleate are 
here used to embrace the mixed fatty acids 
and their salts resulting from the decomposi 
tion of commercial soaps. 
The degree of fineness to which the ore must 
necessarily be pulverized before the buoy 
stock' (as we shall hereinafter term the buoy 
ant material) is joined thereto is determined 
by the character of the ore and the manner in 
which the mineral and metallic particles are 
disseminated in the rock-matrix of the ore. 
While some of the lighter class minerals 
are found sparsely and intimately dissemi 
nated with the rock-matrix of their respective 
ores and the particles of minerals so minute 
as to require a pulverization which is com 
mercially impracticable, yet in nearly all cases 
where the metallic and mineral particles are 
found in a crystalline rock-matrix constitut 
ing an ore otherwise suitable for separation 
by our process We have found that a pull 
verization of from ninety to one hundred 
and sixty mesh, such pulverization being 
eminently practicable, effectually pulverizes 
the ore to a degree of fineness which liberates 
the values from their envelopment. 
In cases where vegetable fiber or any of 
the carbonaceous substances are used as a 
buoy-stock they, together with the disinte 
grated ore, must be dry before the two are 
mixed preparatory to the joining of the me 
tallic and mineral particles to and with the 
buoy-stock. In cases where the chemically 
prepared buoy-stock is used the ore and the 
buoy-stock may be mixed or distributed to 
gether in the presence of moisture; but the 
operation of attaching the buoyant material 
to the metallic and mineral particles of the 
ore must be performed after the entire mass 
thus distributed together has been thoroughly 
dried. 
As our process is only adapted to separate 
the metallic and mineral particles from a 
crystalline rock, (an ore with a rock-matrix 
of crystals, as a pure and translucent quartz, 
or a crystalline spar-gangue being particu 
larly favorable,) no trouble arises in attach 
ing the buoyant material to the metallic and 
mineral particles of the pulverized ore from 
any tendency of the buoyant material to ad 
here to the surface of the rock particles, as 
the faces of the rock particles are smooth and 
glassy and offer no position of lodgement for 
Such buoyant material. 
We do not claim any value for this process 
if it be applied to an ore with a talc or clayey 
galgue, Or, except for the separation of the 
lighter mineral and metallic particles, when 
applied to an ore containing galena or pyrites 
of cubical formation. 
When ores adapted for treatment by this 
process are prepared in the foregoing man 
75 
85 
95 
IOC 
Io5 
O 
I 25 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
471,174 
3 
The liquid contained in the tank, prefer- 7o 
3o particles of the Ore-stock as prepared in the ee in Such nipples. 
ner, a separation may be effected with more Y tending transversely across between the tank 
or less perfection if the thus-prepared stock A and the floor X, on which timbers the tank 
be submitted to any of the standard dry or rests. 
wet concentrators. In case a dry separator 
5 be used the buoyed values of the ore-stock ably Water or brine-that is, water saturated 
will attain the position reached by the gangue with common salt -issupplied theretothrough 
when the conventionally-prepared ore-stock the pipe B at the head end of the tank and is 
is put in the machine, and the rock particles ultimately discharged over the bridge walls 
will be delivered to the position that the or partitions b b' at the tail end of the tank. 75 
Io product is delivered in such cases, and if the Such liquid islettered C. The pipe Bextends 
ore-stock prepared by our method is deliv-, downward to underneath the surface of the 
ered by means of sifting or blowing to the liquid C in the tank and at its lower end is 
surface of the Water contained in or upon connected with a series of horizontal pipes 
wet concentrators the reverse of position to consisting of transverse pipe B", longitudinal 8o 
15 that of the product and waste of the ordina-pipe B, and smaller transverse pipes B. B. 
rily-prepared ore-stock in the use of the ma- bbare perforations on the upper half of 
chine is attained by the product and the each of the transverse pipes BB, through 
waste. Repeated experiments have proven which the liquid Centers the tank, there be 
to us that the standard concentrators in use-ing sufficient head in the pipe B to force the 85. 
2O such as air-jigs, oscillating tables, wet jigs, liquid out of the perforations in a manner to 
frue vanners, or percussion-tables-may be produce a slight effervescing condition in 
adjusted to admit of a fairly good separation; such liquid directly over such perforations. 
D is the ore-stock, properly prepared, con 
but there are mechanical barriers to the per- 
fect separation, or, more particularly, to the tained in the storage Y. 
25 rapid and economical operation of the same. 
d is a pipe having valved therein, extend 
Therefore we submit a description of a de-ing from storage Y to transverse conveyer E. 
vice, the invention of Charles B. Hebron, pe- Conveyer E consists of tube or trough e and 
culiarly suited to the successful operation of conveyer-screw e', nipples e e, extending 
separating the buoyed values from the rock downward from tube or trough e, and valves 95 
hereinbefore-described manner and an illus- 
e' is a driving-pulley on the shaft of the 
tration of such device in the drawings accom- conveyer-screw by which such conveyer-screw 
panying and forming a part of this specifica- is turned. 
tion, in which- 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional view of bratory arms ff, adapted to be rapidly moved 
a liquid-separator on line 11 of Fig. 2, viewed a slight distance backward and forward or 
in the direction indicated by the arrows; Fig. oscillated by the cam-wheel F through con 
2, a plan view; Fig. 3, a horizontal sectional necting-arm f. 
view on line 33 of Fig. 1, viewed in the di- 
4o rection indicated by the arrows, the top of frame F, forming a series of screens through 
the tank of the separator being transparent which the ore-stock D, delivered from the nip 
and so exposing to view the several parts con- ples e e' on the upper one thereof, passes 
tained in the tank; Fig. 4, a vertical cross- just prior to its delivery to the surface of the 
section on line 4 4 of Fig. 1, viewed in the di- liquid C in the tank A. 
The purpose of the Several mechanisms be 
tical cross-section, on an enlarged scale, of a tween the storage Y and the tank A is to in 
portion of the device on line 55 of Fig. 1, sure the taking of the prepared ore-stock D 
viewed in the direction indicated by the ar- from such storage and the delivery of the same 
rows; Fig. 6, a vertical cross-section on line 6 to the surface of the liquid C in the form of a I 15 
5o 6, Fig.1, also viewed in the direction indicated dust-cloud, whereby a thin surface charge of 
by the arrows; and Fig. 7, a detail view of prepared ore-stock shall be obtained on the 
the foraminated plate (illustrated in Fig. 1) liquid C, near the head of the tank A, under 
near the tail end of the tank of the separator, neath the lower one of the screens forming 
and hereinafter termed a perforated table. the series. The ore-stock thus delivered to 12o. 
55 The same letter of reference is used to in- and contained on the surface of the liquid C 
dicate a given part where more than one view in the tank A and consisting of the pulver 
ized and buoyed values and the pulverized 
thereof is shown. 
XX' are floors of the building in which the rock matrix or gangue are separated from 
each other in the tank, the purpose of the sev- I 25 
separator is placed. 
6o Y is the storage for the ore-stock which is eral mechanisms contained in the tank being 
to be run through the separator. 
to So separate the buoyed values in such ore 
A is a tank adapted to hold liquid, con- stock from the gangue thereof and to deliver 
structed of any suitable material, but pref- such buoyed values at or near the tail end of 
erably of wood, and rectangular in shape, with the tank and to deliver the gangue of the ore 13o 
F is an oscillating frame suspended on vi- Ioo 
45 rection indicated by the arrows; Fig. 5, a ver- 
F. F. FF, respectively, are screens in 1os 
65 its greatest length from the head to the tail. stock from the head end of the tank. 
act are timbers resting on the floor X, ex- 
G. G. G. are vertical partitions extending 
35 
9o 
1 Io 
w 
471,174 
IO 
transversely across the tank, the upper edge 
of each partition being a slight distance be 
low the surface of the liquid C and the lower 
edge a short distance above an endless apron 
belt, by which apron-belt the gangue settling 
through the liquid is carried from the tank. 
gg are braces extending between partitions 
GG, respectively. 
His such endless apron-belt having taut 
cleats h. h. h. thereon and longitudinal ropes I 
i, such 
I fastened thereto by the straps 
straps being, preferably, sewed to the belt H. 
Apron-belt H extends longitudinally through 
the tank and out therefrom over the edge of 
the head end thereof, and from thence over 
the drum H', by which drum it is moved. 
The upper and carrying portion of the 
apron-belt H for the greater part of the length 
thereof is substantially horizontal, being held 
in position at the point of junction of the hori 
zontal part extending along in the tank with 
the inclined part extending out of the tank 
over the edge of the head thereof by the 
sprocket - reel H, having projections l'h' 
thereon, and the horizontal position of the re 
mainder of the carrying portion of the belt is 
obtained by such apron-belt extending around 
the roller or drum h' and idlers h hi. The 
lower or ingoing portion of the endless apron 
belt is held in place by the roller or drum H. 
To prevent any possible disturbance of the 
surface of the liquid C by the movement of 
the sprocket-reel II* there is placed over it 
the housing H'. 
J is a spout or trough underneath the drum 
II", adapted to receive the gangue delivered 
from the endless apron-belt II as such belt 
travels around the drum II, and J is a com 
mon screw conveyer by which the Spout or 
trough J is emptied. 
J2 is a horizontal planking forming a cover 
for the endless apron-belt at the tail end of 
the tank and also forming on the upper Sur 
face thereof a horizontal bed by Which, from 
inspection of the settlings thereon, if any, the 
presence of gangue in the liquid about to pass 
over the bridge-wall b can be determined. 
K is a perforated table forming a sieve, 
through which the greater part of the liquid 
passing over the bridge-Wall b can pass into 
chamber 1, such chamber k being formed by 
planking Kand bridge-walls bl. The liquid 
passing over the bridge-wall b, carrying on 
the surface thereof the buoyed mineral and 
metallic particles from the ore-stock, flows 
through the pipe IX into receptacle L. 
l, l are screens in receptacle L, through 
which the liquid passing into Such receptacle 
can pass into receptacle L', thereby leaving 
the buoyed mineral and metallic particles in 
the receptacle L, from which they are taken 
to be afterward treated in any desired man 
le. L? is a pipe extending from receptacle L' to 
and communicating with receptacle M, and l' 
is a valve in pipe L. 
L is a pipe which extends from chamberk 
to pipe Land is joined to pipe L by means of 
a common T-joint, and pipe L extends from 
pipe L, forming a continuation of pipe L. 
l is a valve in pipe L. 
When valve l in pipe L or valvelis open 
and valvel in pipe L is also open, the liquid 
in chamber can pass therefrom through the 
pipe L. The proportion of the liquid pass 
ing over the screen K which is permitted to 
pass through such screen into chamber c, and 
from thence through pipe L, is determined 
by the valvel, and the direction such escap 
ing liquid flows is determined by the valves 
land l, respectively-as, for instance, clos 
ing valve land opening valve guides the 
liquid into a receptacle, from which it is re 
turned, by means hereinafter described, to 
the storage-reservoir, from which the pipe IB 
extends, and opening the valvel permits the 
liquid to flow to waste. 
When it is desired to empty the tank A of 
the liquid contained therein without allow 
ing such liquid to pass over the bridge-walls 
b b', as for cleaning out the tank or flushing 
it, the valvel in pipe L is opened; but ordi 
marily valve l is maintained in a closed con 
.dition. 
17, is a centrifugal pump in receptacle M, 
and n' is a pipe from the centrifugal pump 
in to the tank N. The liquid flowing into re 
ceptacle M through pipe L* is forced by the 
pump in into tank N through pipe m'. 
O is a float-valve in tank N, and O' is the 
stem thereof, adapted to close the pipe P 
(such pipe P extending from a liquid-supply) 
when the liquid contained in the tank N is 
raised a determined amount and to open such 
pipe when less than the determined amount 
of liquid is contained in such tank. By means 
of this valve O the pipe P when the liquid 
returned to the tank N through the pipe m' 
is insufficient to maintain the desired height 
of liquid in tank N the additional liquid re 
quired is automatically supplied through the 
pipe P. 
N' is the liquid-storage tank from which 
the liquid is taken through the pipe B to sup 
ply the tank A, and 7 is a pipe connecting 
the tank N with tank N'. The use of pipe in 
is to prevent any pulsation in tank N' from 
the movement of the centrifugal pump Mor 
the water passing therethrough into tank N. 
In order to supply liquid directly to tank 
A from tank N, as in the case of desiring to 
flush the bottom of the tank A, supply-pipe 
7', having valve ntherein, is connected at its 
upper end with the storage-receptacle N and 
at its lower end with the tank A. 
Q is the cover of the tank A, and Q is a 
slide in cover Q, which can be moved to pro 
duce an opening of any desired size in the 
cover Q. 
Q is a partition extending transversely 
ac'OSS the tank A. from the cover Q to near 
the surface of the liquid C in the tank. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
I I5 
125 
 
471,174 
5 
The slide Q and the partition Q are ad 
justable, the joint functions of the two be 
ing to determine the quantity of air drawn 
through the tank by the fan S and its source 
that is, when the slide Q is near the surface 
of the liquid Cin the tank and the slide Q' is 
opened widely nearly all the air passing 
through the tank will pass through the open 
ing covered by the slide Q', and a smallpor 
tion thereof will be supplied underneath the 
slide or partition Q, while a larger quantity 
of air will pass under the partition Q if 
such partition be raised farther away from 
the liquid C. The partition Q has another 
function-namely, to deflect all, if any, par 
ticles of ore-stock floating above the liquid C 
(in the air between the surface of liquid C 
and cover Q) downward to the surface of such 
liquid as it passes underneath the slide Q. 
R is a chamber extending transversely 
across the tank near the tail end thereof, and 
7' is a perforated screen between the chamber 
R and the tank A. 
RR are a series or pipes extending from 
the chamber R to the transverse pipe or con 
duit R, and r r" are valves in pipes R. R.', 
respectively. 
R is a pipe extending from the transverse 
pipe R* to and communicating with the ex 
haust-fan S. 
S' is the driving-pulley by which the 
haust-fan S is rotated. 
When the exhaust-fan Sisin operation and 
the slide Q' in cover Q is open, a current of 
air will extend from the slide Q'over the sur 
face of the liquid contained in the tank, and 
from thence through the screen into the cham 
ber R, and from thence through the several 
pipes R., R., and R to and through the ex 
haust-fan S. By means of the series of valves 
r' r" and the screen r the amount and direc 
tion of the moving current of air can be defi 
nitely determined, it being understood that 
the opening of the slide Q is properly ad 
justed for the amount of current desired. 
In the operation of this device the liquid 
entering the tank A through the perforations 
b8b in pipes B3 B3 flows over the top of the 
partitions G. G. G. along toward the tail end 
of the tank and over the bridge-wallb, an ef 
fervescing movement being produced, as here 
inbefore described, in the liquid C over the 
perforations bb8b and a wave-like move 
ment being produced the entire length of the 
tank by the partitions G. G. G. The buoyed 
mineral and metallic particles of the ore-stock 
will be found floating in the form of a scum 
upon the surface of the liquid along with such 
liquid toward the tail end of the tank, and 
when the exhaust-fan S is in operation the 
wave-like movement of the surface of the 
liquid is increased and a movement of such 
buoyed mineral and metallic particles along 
upon and over the surface of the liquid Cat 
a rate in excess of the rate of movement of 
the liquid C is obtained, thereby producing a 
95 
75 
frictional movement facilitating the separa 
tion of such buoyed mineral and metallic par 
ticles from the gangue of the ore-stock, where 
by the capacity of the separator is increased. 
Having thus described our invention, What 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The herein - described process for con 
centrating ores, which consists in commingling 
with pulverized ore-stock buoyant material, 
then submitting the commingled pulverized 
ore-stock and buoyant material to movement 
and pressure and so joining the buoyant, ma 
terial to the metallic and mineral particles 
in the pulverized ore, and then applying the 
prepared ore while in a dry state to a strati 
fying apparatus, whereby the buoyed metal 
lic and mineral particles are separated from 
the gangue by the settling of such gangue, 
substantially as described. 
2. The herein - described process for Con 
centrating ores, which consists in first com: 
mingling with pulverized ore-stock buoyant 
material, then submitting the commingled 9o 
pulverized ore-stock and buoyant material 
to movement and pressure ahd so joining the 
buoyant material to the metallic and nin 
eral particles in the pulverized ore, and then 
applying such prepared ore while in a dry 
state to the surface of liquid, whereby the 
buoyed metallic and mineral particles are 
floated on such liquid and separated from the 
gangue, which settles in the liquid, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The process, substantially as described, 
for concentrating ores, which consists in first 
joining the metallic and mineral particles in 
the pulverized ore with a quantity of buoy 
antimaterial and then sifting or blowing the 
prepared ore while in a dry state upon the 
surface of liquid, whereby the buoyed me 
tallic and mineral particles are made to float 
and thus separate from the gangue, which 
4. The herein - described process for con 
centrating ores, which consists in first join 
ing the metallic and mineral particles in the 
pulverized ore with a quantity of buoyant 
material, then sifting or blowing the pre 
pared ore while in a dry state upon the Sur 
face of liquid, and then in obtaining a cur 
rent of air over the liquid, whereby the 
buoyed metallic and mineral particles are 
made to float and to move along on and over 
the surface of such liquid, and thus separate 
from the gangue, which settles. 
5. The herein-described process for con 
centrating ores, which consists in first join 
ing the metallic and mineral particles in the 
pulverized ore with a quantity of buoyant 
material, of obtaining a body of liquid hav 
ing an effervescent condition, and then sifting 
or blowing the prepared ore while in a dry 
state upon the surface of liquid in such ef 
fervescing condition, whereby the buoyed 
metallic and mineral particles are made to 
settles. 
. 
O 
II5 
I 25 
OO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
ICS 
. 
6 
471,174 
6. The herein - described process for con- gangue, which settles. 
float on the surface of such liquid, and thus to move along on and over on the surface 
separate from the gangue, which settles. 
centrating ores, which consists in first join- 
5 ing the metallic and mineral particles in the 
pulverized ore with a quantity of buoyant ma- 
terial, of obtaining a body of liquid having an ron: 
effervescent condition, then sifting or blow- 
ing the prepared ore while in a dry state upon 
Io the surface of liquid in such effervescing con- 
dition, and then in obtaining a current of air son: 
over the liquid, whereby the buoyed metallic 
and mineral particles are made to float and 
Witnesses to signature of Carrie J. Ever 
CHARLEST. BROWN, 
J. L. EVERSON. 
of such liquid, and thus separate from the 15 
CHARTES. B. HEBRON. 
CARRIE J. EVERSON. 
Witnesses to signature of Charles B. IIeb 
E. A. FAY, 
B. CURTIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471274.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 471,274, 
E. J. PAHITZ. 
SCREW PROPULSION OF WESSELS. 
Patented Mar, 22, 1892. 
 
y:55:C:{ 
/... ty2S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNST J. PAHTZ, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SCREW-PROPU LSION OF WESSELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,274, dated March 22, 1892. 
Application filed June 27, 1891. Serial No. 397,720, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ERNST.J. PAHTZ, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, and a 
resident of the city of Boston, in the county 
of Suffolk and State of Massachusetts, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Screw-Propulsion of Wessels, &c., 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
This invention in the propulsion of vessels 
consists, in substance, of the combination, with 
a fixed horizontal and longitudinal passage 
Open at its opposite end portions for water to 
flow therethrough and located on the hull 
below the Water-line of the vessel, and a pro 
peller-screw placed and adapted by its shaft 
and connections thereof, as well known, or 
otherwise suitable to rotate in said water-way, 
So as to force Water through it and out at its 
rear and discharge end, of a nozzle at said 
discharging end and in continuation of said 
Water-Way, and means connected to said pro 
peller-Shaft and adapted to move said nozzle 
independently of and relative to the axis of 
rotation of Said screw, all substantially as 
hereinafter described. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a side elevation of the 
Stern of a Vessel, and showing, in central lon 
gitudinal Section, one form, and Figs. 2, 3, 4, 
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 are views of other forms, 
of construction and arrangement of this in 
vention, all as hereinafter fully appears. 
In the drawings, A represents the stern of 
a hull B of a vessel, having a keel Cand rud 
der D, all as well known and needing no more 
particular mention. 
E is a fixed horizontal and longitudinal Wa 
ter-way located below the water-line of the 
vessel just forward of the rudder D and at 
its opposite end portions open for the passage 
of Water therethrough. 
F is a propeller-screw supported by its 
shaft F within and axially coincident with 
the water-Way E, and all so as to be freely ro 
tated by suitable mechanism (not shown) for 
driving said shaft, as well known or other 
wise suitably. By the rotation of the screw 
F the water is forced through and driven out 
of the rear and discharging end E of said wa 
ter-Way, thereby propelling the vessel for 
ward, the propulsion of the vessel backward 
7o 
55 
being secured by reversing the turn of the 
screw, in which the forward end of Said Wa 
ter-Way becomes its discharge. 
To increase the power exerted by the rota 
tion of the screw in propelling the Vessel for 
ward, the rear and discharging end E of the 
Water-way E has a nozzle G. (Shown of vari 
ous forms and arrangements in the drawings.) 6o 
This nozzle G in all cases is in continuation 
of the water-way E at its rear or discharging 
end, and it is arranged to be moved thereon, 
thereby working in and on the Water Sur 
rounding it and imparting motion to the Water 65 
forced through and out of it by the action of 
the screw, and, as has been described, the 
power and force of propulsion of the vessel 
through the water are increased to a most effi 
cient and marked extent. 
In Fig. 1 the nozzle G is a round tube in 
clined axially to the axis of the screw and War 
ter-passage surrounding it, and itisheld on the 
screw-shaft F, and thereby rotated around 
said axis, passing through the Water in an i5 
annular path, the inner and outer diameters 
of which correspond to the diametrically-op 
posite points of the tube. In Figs, 2 and 3 the 
axial lines of the rotating nozzle and the SCreW 
are coincident and the nozzle at its discharg- 8o 
ing end is flattened. In Figs. 4 and 5 the 
nozzle is tubular, and it is adapted by a calm 
a, secured to the nozzle and at a bearing on 
the face of a crank-arm b of the screw-shaft 
F, to be horizontally moved laterally across 85 
the discharging end of the Water-Way. Figs. 
6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 severally represent in all 
three distinct forms for the discharging end 
of a nozzle G and all obvious from the dra W 
ings and in which each form is shown in end 90 
and side ViewS. 
Using the combination of a screw-propeller 
in action within a water-Way of the vessel 
and a moving nozzle in continuation of Said 
water-Way through which Water is discharged 95 
by the screw, all as has been explained, With 
air under pressure forced either into and 
through the nozzle or into the Water just in 
front of the discharging end of the nozzle, the 
water discharged by the nozzle is spread about Ioo 
and so made to act on a greater surface of the 
water through which the vessel is moving and 
against which said water is discharged, and 
so are obtained increased resistance from the 
25 
35 
45 
2 
471,274 
Water acted on, and a consequent increase of and said shaft, and adapted by the rotation 
Speed propulsion of the vessel. 
of said shaft to move said nozzle relatively to 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat- for the purposes specified. 
Having thus described my invention, what said water-way, substantially as described, I5 
5 ent, is- 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto Set 
The combination, with a propeller-screw my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
ERNST. J. PAHTZ 
and its shaft and driving connections therefor, witnesses. 
of a water-way open at its opposite end por- 
tions and surrounding and axially coincident 
Io with said propeller-screw, a nozzle at the dis- 
charging end and in continuation of said wa- 
ter-Way, and means connecting said nozzle 
y 
s 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT W. BROWN, 
MARION E. BROWN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471374.txt	(No Model.) 
K. BECKER, 
COOKING APPARATUS, 
9 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 471,374, 
Patented Mar. 22, 1892, 
 
  
 
 
  
Z. 
ES L-I-L 3. 
s 
 
i : 
NNL S2, % 
mi 
 
tO 
 
) 
 
 
in 
3. 
 
16/2-2-12-d 
-% 4, 2-zer1.1% 
4-a-Zz-8/6-24 
(No Model.) 
K. BECKER, 
Cooking APPARATUS, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 471,374, 
Patented Mar. 22, 1892, 
 
"...o 
Cz 422/R. 
2- 42c%2. 
72-22-4-2- 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,374, 
 
K. BECKER 
COOKINGAPPARATUS, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Mar. 22, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,374, 
K. BECKER. 
COOKING APPARATUS, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Mar. 22, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,374, 
 
K. BECKER 
COOKING APPARATUS, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Mar. 22, 1892. 
Is PETERs co, PHord-uTHowASHINGTON, r. c 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,374, 
K. BECKER. 
COOKING APPARATUS, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Mar. 22, 1892, 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,374, 
 
K. BECKER 
COOKING APPARATUS, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
Patented Mar. 22, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,374. 
 
K. BECKER 
COOKING APPARATUS, 
9 sheets-Sheet 8. 
Patented Mar, 22, 1892, 
K. BECKER 
000KING APPARATUS, 
9 sheets-Sheet 9. 
Patented Mar, 22, 1892, 
(No Model.) . 
No. 471,374, 
 
V, esses : 
34-4 C-4---- 
C2/2 (2/6(4x 
/2-(2-6- 
-- 
4 4. 2, 
92-722-24A 
is crisis perERs co, ripro-irrho., WASHINGTOM, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
KARL BECKER, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
COO KING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,874, dated March 22, 1892. 
Application filed June 4, 1888, Serial No. 276,057, (No model.) 
O 
O 
To all, whon it nuclty concer'7. 
Be it known that I, KARL BECKER, of Ber 
lin, Germany, have invented an Improved 
Cooking Apparatus, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved cook 
ing apparatus in which the cooking is effected 
by steam or water bath. 
The invention consists in the various fea 
tures of improvement more fully pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
alongitudinal vertical section of my improved 
cooking apparatus on line a 3, Fig. 2; Fig. 2, 
a horizontal plan, partly in section, Online //, 
Fig. 1, but with the right-hand coverg and 
vessels b removed; Fig. 3, a rear View of the 
apparatus. Figs. 4 to 9 are sections through 
the water-controlling cocks, showing them in 
different positions. Figs. 10 to 12 are details 
of the graduated disks u and the cocks. 
The letter h represents a boiler placed cen 
trally in a range and having both a water 
supply and a water-discharge, which are here 
inafter more fully described. The Water-dis 
charge carries the Water to a pair of Water 
boxes g, inclosing ovens and provided on 
top with flanged or plain pot-holes for the re 
ception of the cooking utensils b. To the 
boxes g there are connected by hinges glids 
or weighted covers g., that may be swung 
down upon the vessels b, so as to hold them 
down in the Water. 
From the rear of the apparatus there pro 
jects upwardly at the center of eachlid a hol 
low post f', carrying a pulley?'. Over this 
pulley runs a rope or chain f', that is attached 
at one end to the lid g and carries at its 
other end a weight f", inclosed within hollow 
post f'. The weight f thus constitutes a 
counter-weight for the lid and facilitates the 
raising and lowering of the same. Within 
the boiler h there is inclosed the fire-place c, 
and also an oven e beneath the fire-place. 
At each side of the fire-place c and at the 
back thereof there are placed three (more or 
less) downtakes or flues d. Two of these flues 
are shown in section in Fig. 1, While all the 
flues are indicated by dotted circular lines in 
Fig. 2. The flues denter on top the hot-air 
space beneath the top platea of the stove, 
and thus communicate with the fire-place c. 
At the bottom the flues d communicate with a 
heating-space d", encircling ovene and com 
municating in turn with a fluef, that passes 
through the boiler hand enters the chimney. 
The products of combustion travel from the 
fire-place C first under the top plate C, thence 
down the flues d into the heating-space d' 
to heat oven e, and thence to the exit f into 
the chimney. 
The Water is fed into the boiler h from an 
elevated tank m. Into this tank enter two 
pipes St, the former opening at the bottom 
and the latter near the top of the tank. At 
its lower end the pipe S communicates with 
the socket of a three-way cock n', while the 
pipe t communicates with the socket of a simi 
lar three-way cock O. Vertically above the 
cock n' there is a two-way cock n, while ver 
tically below the cock o is a two-way cock o'. 
The sockets of the two upper cocks communi 
cate by pipes no with the boiler h, and the 
SOckets of the two lower cocks communicate 
With the boiler by similar pipes. (Dottedlines, 
Fig. 1.) Moreover, the sockets of all four 
cocks are coupled to laterally-extending pipes 
k k'll, Fig. 3, that carry the water from the 
boiler to the cooking-boxes. All four cock 
plugs carry cranks p, connected by rods q. 
One of the cocks n is connected to a handle 
10, that projects to the front of the stove and 
by Which all four cocks may be simultane 
ously operated. In order to regulate the po 
sition of the cocks, the handle v carries a 
graduated disk at, co-operating with a fixed 
index-finger on the stove. It will be seen that 
Water is from tank madmitted through cocks 
n' O into the boiler. Here the water is heated 
and passes through all four cocks into the 
cooking-boxes. When, however, by a turn of 
the cocks the Water-boxes g are cut off from 
boiler h, then a circulation of hot water will 
take place through pipes S i, cocks n' O, and 
the elevated tank m. 
The position of the cocks to create the dif 
ferent circulations is shown in Fig. 4 to 9. In 
Fig. 4 the boiler h is connected to the water 
boxes g, but the tank m is cut off. In Fig. 5 
the cock n' is connected to the tank m, but 
the cock O is cut off. In Fig. 6 the cock o is 
Connected to the tank n, but the cock n' is 
cut off. In Fig. 7 the boiler is connected to 
the tank in alone, while the water-boxes are 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
471,374 
with all of said cocks, and a raised tank com 
municating with the pipes, substantially as 
specified. 
2. The combination of boiler h, with the 
Water-boxes g, elevated feed-tank n, pipes St, 
and valves in no o', substantially as specified. 
3. The combination of boiler h, with a pair 
of three-way cocks n' O, pipes St, connected 
thereto, a pair of two-way cocks in O', pipes 
kic'll, connecting with the cocks and with a 
tank n, and water-boxes g, connected to pipes 
St and ic kill, respectively, substantially as 
specified. 
4. The combination of boiler h, with cocks 
in n' O O", cooking-boxes g, raised tank n, com 
municating with the boiler, cranks p and rods 
for connecting the cock-plugs and with a 
handle 24, and a graduated disk u for adjust 
ing said plugs, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
35 
45 
IKARI, BECKER. 
Witnesses: 
B. ROI, 
G. HijLSMANN. 
cut off. In Fig. S the boiler is connected with 
the left-hand cooking-box g, and in Fig. 9 the 
boiler is connected with the right-hand cook 
ing-box. Above the level of the two upper 
most cocks in othere enter into the boxes g a 
pair of overflow-pipes r. When the water in 
the boxes has risen to the top or inlet open 
ings of said pipes, it flows out and prevents 
the apparatus from becoming flooded. 
It is evident that in this apparatus a con 
tinuous circulation may be kept up, owing to 
the heating of the water in the boiler and the 
pressure of the water in the tank. Thus the 
cooking utensils b may be subjected to the 
heat radiated from a continuously-circulating 
body of water. The cocks should be opened 
only sufficiently far to cause the circulation 
to supply evaporation. Thus the water-level 
will remain uniform in the water-boxes and 
flooding will not take place. Should, how 
ever, the cocks be opened too far, the water 
will run out of the overflow, which will be a 
notice to the attendant to shut the cocks. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of boiler h, with cocks 
in no o', pipes St, communicating with a pair 
of said cocks, cooking-boxes communicating 
I 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471474.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 471,474, 
 
H. L. FREEMAN, 
TOBACCO HANGER, 
Patented Mar, 22, 1892. 
WITNESSES; 
624 fastest-e 4 
Alarzya 14- 
INVENTOR: 
7(Z.Z776ez7zez7. 
Br 7, 
4?. 
ATTORNEYS 
is oRRIs PETEs co., Photo-IrHo, WASHINGT08, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE L. FREEMAN, OF LEXINGTON, NORTH CAROLINA. 
TOBACCO, HANGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,474, dated March 22, 1892. 
Application filed August 27, 1891, Serial No, 403,914. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, HORACE L. FREEMAN, 
of Lexington, in the county of Davidson and 
State of North Carolina, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Tobacco-Hang 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in the 
class of such tobacco-hangers as consist of a 
portable supporting - stick and a series of 
arms or needles pivoted thereto and adapted 
to swing in horizontal planes, so as to fold 
against or swing outward from the stick. 
In my invention each arm or needle is pro 
vided with two adjacent eyes and is pivoted 
at such points to two parallel sticks or stick 
sections, which are movable relatively to each 
other to adjust or allow adjustment of said 
arms or needles for opening the latter out 
ward or folding them inward, as required. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a plan view of the hanger, the tobacco-sup 
porting arms or needles being extended as in 
use. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same with 
the arms folded. Fig. 3 is an end view, the 
arms being adjusted as in Fig. 1. 
The tobacco-stick proper is composed of 
two parts or sections at a of like form and 
size and arranged parallel. The tobacco-sup 
porter proper consists of two arms or needles 
bb, which project in opposite directions, but 
lie parallel to the same plane. 
Each pair of 
arms b b is formed of a single wire, whose 
portion intermediate of the arms is coiled to 
form two eyes c c to receive the screws or nails 
d, which pivot the arms to the respective sec 
tions a, a of the stick proper. When the to 
bacco is first hung on the arms or needlest b, 
it is very green and requires correspondingly 
free access of air. Hence the arms b b are 
first placed at an angle of ninety degrees to 
the stick proper, as shown in the drawings. As 
25 
35 
IORACE. T. FREEMAN. 
Witnesses: 
H. T. PHILLIPs, 
R. H. PETTIS. 
45 
so 
the tobacco becomes drier, the arms may be 
moved inward, so as to occupy a lesser angle, 
as shown by dotted lines, Fig. 1, and may 
finally be closed parallel to the stick, Fig. 2, 
so as to take less space in the barn or drying 
house. This change of position of the arms 
b b may be effected by moving one of the 
stick-sections a lengthwise, or by turning or 
adjusting any one of the arms, whereby the 
sections a C will be adjusted both lengthwise 
and laterally, and thus cause all the other 
arms to fold simultaneously parallel to the 
stick. 
A nail or screw e is affixed to each stick 
section near one end for the purpose of se 
curing the free end of the adjacent arm, and 
thereby holding the stick-sections together 
and locking the arms folded. This same locked 
position is the one which best facilitates ship 
ment of the hanger. 
What I claim is 
1. A tobacco-hanger consisting of two stick 
sections arranged parallel side by side, and a 
series of double arms or needles pivoted to 
each of the said sections and having members 
which project in opposite directions, substan- . 
tially as shown and described. 
2. In a tobacco-hanger, the combination, 
with the parallel stick-sections and a series 
of double arms or needles, each double arm 
or needle being pivoted to each of said sec 
tions having oppositely-projecting ends, of a 
fastening applied to one of the sections for 
holding a free end of a double arm and there 
by locking the parts folded, as shown and 
described. 
65. 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471574.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 471,574, 
 
C. RUCHTI. 
FAUCET, 
Patented Mar. 29, 1892. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTIAN RUCHTI, OF LOUISVILLE, OHIO. 
FAUCET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,574, dated March 29, 1892. 
Application filed October 29, 1891, Serial No, 410,163, (No model.) 
, 
- 
- 
ner or upper end of which is provided a notch 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHRISTIAN RUCHTI, a or right-angled slot in. The valve-rod n is se 
citizen of Switzerland, and a resident of Louis- cured to the slide C, as shown in Figs. 2 and 
ville, county of Stark, State of Ohio, have in- 3, having an offset or shoulder portion O. The 
vented a new and usefullmprovementin Fau- rod is passed up into the tube, the bent or 
cets, of which the following is a full, clear, shoulder portion in the slotl, and the valve D 
and exact description, reference being had to secured to the end of the rod, as shown in 
the accompanying drawings, making part of Fig. 3. 
this specification. 
To operate the faucet the hand is placed 
My invention relates to an improvement over the body A with two of the fingers to 
in faucets; and it consists of certain features grasp the flange ac, by which the slide C is 
of construction and combination of parts, as raised to compress the spring and carry with 
will be hereinafter described, and pointed out it the rod n, and thereby raise the valve D 
in the claim. 
from the seat c to allow the liquid to flow 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is through the faucet, and when the fingers re 
a view in perspective, partly sectional, of a lax to release the slide C the energy of the 
faucet illustrating my invention, showing spring h, exerted downward, will move the 
valve closed. Fig. 2 is a similar view.com - slide down, and thereby close the valve D on 
prising the valve, valve-seat, coil-spring, stem, the seat and stop the flow of liquid. When 
and slide; Fig. 3, a side elevation, partly sec- it is desired to have a continuous flow of liq 
tional, showing valve open. 
uid, the valve may be secured in open posi 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre- tion, as shown in Fig. 3, by turning the shoul 
sponding parts in all of the figures of the der O of the valve-rod into the retaining 
drawings. 
Having thus fully described the nature and 
cet, provided with the usual axial aperture a operation of my invention, what I claim as 
and a threaded aperture b to intersect the ap- new, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
erture a at right angles. 
The combination, with the apertured stem 
diameters and provided at one end with a A, of the cylinder portion B, provided at its 
valve-seat c and an annular screw-thread d to upper end portion with a valve-seat c and 
correspond with the thread in the aperture b the screw-thread d and at its lower end por 
and a flange e. From the flange e is pro- tion with a downwardly - extended cylinder 
jected a tube or cylinder portion f and a tube portion f and stem g, having a longitudinal 
or stem portion g of smaller diameter, as slot land notch m, coil-springh, valve D, rod 
shown, about which is placed a coil-springh. n, and slide C, adapted to slide into the cyl 
A tubular slide C is provided, having a plu- inderf and on the stem G to raise the valve, 
rality of diameters, asi k, the former larger substantially, as described, and for the pur 
than the latter and adapted to slide inside of 
the cylinder if and the latter to pass over and 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
slide upon the smaller tube or stem g, as my hand this 10th day of October, A. D. 1891. 
shown in Fig. 3. This portion C is also pro 
vided with a flanged-out portion ac, by which 
the valve is operated, as will be hereinafter 
explained. 
In the stem g is provided a slotl, at the in- 
ls is a tubular portion having a plurality of 
A represents the stem or body of the fau- 
notch m the desired length of time. 
W. K. MILLER, 
CHAS. R. MILLER. 
CHRISTIAN RUCHTI. 
pose set forth. 
is- 
- 
, 
Witnesses: 
. 
. . 
. 
- 
. 
O 
(5 
25 
30 
35 
40 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471674.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
W. S. LOWELAND & E. C. HENN, 
m 
LATHE, 
No. 471,674, 
Paten 
ted Mar, 29, 1892. 
I Y 
HID 
arease IH 
BHH 
I 
I H 
O).lveo- ea: 
'2. 8 
2. 
 
3.32. -64 
ts,2442/?4-222-6-4 
(No Model.) 
-- 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. S. LOWELAND & E. C. HENN. 
IATHE, 
No. 471,674, 
Patented Mar, 29, 1892. 
 
ZEas s: EA IIM 
IE 
L 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
f 
m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER. S. LOVELAND, OF HARTFORD, AND EDWIN C. HENN, OF 
BLOOMFIELD, CONNECTICUT. 
LATH E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,674, dated March 29, 1892. 
Application filed November 10, 1891, Serial No. 411,464. (No model.) 
- 
O 
To all twhom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, WALTERS. LOVELAND, 
residing at Hartford, and EDWIN C.HENN, re 
siding at Bloomfield, in the county of Hart 
ford and State of Connecticut, both citizens 
of the United States, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Lathes, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
specification. 
This invention relates to the class of engine 
or self-acting lathes for turning articles into 
irregular shapes or forms having diameters 
of varying lengths, the object being to pro 
vide a simple lathe of this class in which an 
article may be turned to a regular or irregu 
lar shape by a cutter moving in one direction 
and by other cutters moving in a different di 
rection at the same time be provided with 
grooves, mortises, or finishing cuts which the 
first cutter would be unable to effect, econo 
mizing in time and labor. 
To this end the invention resides in a lathe 
having a cutter that automatically travels 
longitudinally with the axis, or axially, and 
one or more cutters that move radially or tan 
gentially-that is, at an angle with the axis 
of the article being turned-the action of one 
cutter being dependent upon and moving in 
- relation with the movement of the others, 
whereby an article may be turned to a regul 
lar or irregular shape by the axially-moving 
cutter and simultaneously finished by the an 
gularly-moving cutters, or provided with mor 
tises and grooves, which the axially-moving 
cutters guided by a pattern would not be able 
to cut, 
- 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a back-geared 
engine-lathe embodying the improvements. 
Fig. 2 is a plan with the head and tail stocks 
removed. Fig. 3 is an end elevation of the 
same. Fig. 4 is a rear elevation with a por 
tion broken away to show the construction. 
Fig. 5 is a detail plan of the compound car 
riage bearing the axially-moving cutter, show 
ing the pattern-guide. Fig. 6 is a side eleva 
tion of the same. Fig. 7 shows an enlarged 
plan and side view of the axially-moving cut 
ting-tool, and Fig. 8 is a view of an article 
produced by the operation of the lathe shown. 
In the views, where the invention is illus 
trated as applied to a back-geared engine 
lathe having a compound feed, 1 indicates the 
shears or bed, which supports ahead-stock 2, 
bearing the customary driving-gears and 
speed-pulley for rotating the live-spindle to 
which the blank to be turned is secured, any 
ordinary adjustable tail-stock 3 with a dead 
spindle for centering and supporting the 
blank while being turned, and the common 
shafts and screws for feeding and returning 
the carriage 4, which travels longitudinally 
on ways along the bed. On this carriage and 
preferably movable longitudinally toward 
and from the axis of the work on a tenoned 
way 5 is a slide or block 6, holding a cutting 
tool 7. This tool is preferably temporarily 
adjustably clamped in a socket in the block 
and in a mortise in its end has a cutting-disk 
or annular cutter 8, placed on a pivot and 
clamped in the mortise by a screw 9. 
Projecting from the block below the tool is 
an arm 10, bearing a pin or roll 11, adapted 
to run in the guiding-groove-of the pattern 12, 
so that the block is moved toward or from the 
axis of the work on the tenoned way by this 
arm in contact with the pattern as the car 
riage travels along the bed. The guiding 
groove of the pattern, which follows the de 
sired contour, is preferably cut in sections, 
each straight portion of the groove being 
milled in plates in sections of the proper 
length, while each curved section is cut on a 
lathe in a separate plate as a segment of a 
circle. These plates, in which the sections of 
pattern-groove are cut, are Secured to a 
the 
bridge-plate 13, attached to the top of the bed. 
Bolted to this bridge or otherwise secured to 
the bed is a standard 14, supporting a slide 
15. This standard preferably rises vertically 
and has a mortise to receive a dovetailed 
tenon on the back of the slide, to which is se 
cured a rack 16. In mesh with this rack is a 
pinion 17 upon a journal 18, supported by the 
standard. On the end of this journal is an 
arm 19, that is connected by a link 20 with 
the carriage 4. As the carriage 4 travels lon 
gitudinally the link rocks the arm. 19 and os 
cillates the pinion, which, through the rack, 
raises or lowers the slide 15, according to the 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
Go 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
 
2 
471,674 
By making the pattern in sections not only 75 
Go axially-moving cutter be the same as the di- stantially as specified. 
25 The cutters that cut across the axis are posi- 
9o 
direction of movement of the carriage. Ad- Tily sharpened, can be easily inserted in place, 
justably clamped to this slide are tools 21 22, and when dulled turned to present a sharp 
each having a cutting-edge of the required portion of the periphery. The connected, de 
shape to form a mortise or groove as they pendent, and relatively-moving adjustable 7o 
5 move tangentially or radially toward the work cutters may be applied to any common form 
which is being shaped by the cutter S. 
of engine-lathe and will shape and finish at 
In Fig. 8 is illustrated a projectile which once regular or irregular articles, according 
would be formed by a lathe constructed as to the pattern desired. 
above described. A blank of approximately 
Io the required shape is secured upon the live is the expense attached to the milling thereof 
spindle, supported by the dead-center, and greatly reduced, but the sections can readily 
given a rotation. The carriage 4 is fed by the be detached and rearranged and placed in 
common feeding mechanism axially or longi- various relations with each other, thus en 
tudinally with the axis of the work, and the abling the operator to make many changes 8o 
I5 block 6, bearing the cutter S, is drawn toward in the work without the requirement of a 
or pushed from the axis of the work by the large stock of patterns. 
arm in contact with the guide, according to 
We claim as our invention 
the outline of the pattern, while traveling 
1. In combination with an engine-lathe, an 
longitudinally to shape the blank. In the axially-moving carriage bearing a cutting- 85 
2O form shown the pattern draws the cutter to tool and a stationary standard supporting a 
simply point a projectile as the carriage moves slide having a movement at an angle With but 
longitudinally along the bed, and this causes connected to the axially-moving carriage and 
the tool 21 to cut the groove 23 and the tool bearing a cutting-tool, substantially as Speci 
22 to cut the mortise 24 in the projectile 25. fied. 
2. In combination with an engine-lathe, an 
tively connected with the longitudinally-mov- axially-moving carriage supporting a trans 
ing carriage. Therefore the amount of their versely-moving block bearing a cutting-tool 
cutting is relative with the moving-conse- and a stationary standard supporting a slide 
quently cutting-of the axial cutter, so that having a movement at an angle with but con-95 
3o with the construction shown an article may nected to the axially-moving carriage and 
be shaped and simultaneously grooved and bearing a cutting-tool, substantially as Speci 
mortised with a consequent saving of time fied. 
and labor. 
3. In combination with an engine-lathe, an 
35 as desired; but it is impossible to make an au- versely-moving block having an arm in con 
tomatically and axially moving cutter follow a tact with a pattern and bearing a cutting-tool 
pattern inward at right angles to the general and a stationary standard supporting a slide 
axial movement and cut a square shoulder or having a movement at an angle with but con 
sharp angle; but with a lathe provided with nected to the axially-moving carriage and Io5 
4o mechanism as described the axially-moving bearing a cutting-tool, substantially as speci 
cutter may be drawn by the pattern to roughly fied. 
form a round shoulder or sharp taper, and 
4. In combination with an engine-lathe, an 
after it has passed to another part of the work axially-moving carriage bearing a cutting 
the angularly-moving cutter may be adjusted tool, a stationary standard supporting a slide IIo 
45 to feed up and square off the corner forming having a movement at an angle with the axi 
a right-angular shoulder. Of course it is not ally-moving carriage and bearing a cutting 
essential to the invention that the cutter- tool, a rack connected with the slide, a pinion 
slides, which move tangentially or radially meshing with the rack, and a connection at 
toward the work-that is, angularly with the tached to the carriage for oscillating the pin- II 5 
exact connections shown, as a rack could be 
5. In combination with an engine-lathe, an 
secured to the carriage for rotating the pin- axially-moving carriage supporting a trans 
ion, or the slides could be reciprocated by versely-moving block bearing a cutting-tool, 
means of a cam or wedge attached to the car- a stationary standard supporting a slidehav- I2O 
55 riage, which are equivalent mechanisms per-ing a movement at an angle with the axially 
forming the same operations. 
moving carriage and bearing a cutting-tool, a 
In turning projectiles or other articles which rack connected with the slide, a pinion mesh 
are required to be of a high degree of exact- ing with the rack, and a connection attached 
ness it is essential that the diameter of the to the carriage for oscillating the pinion, sub- 125 
ameter of the pin or roller that runs in the 
6. In combination with an engine-lathe, an 
pattern-guide, in order that the periphery of axially-moving carriage supporting a trans 
the cutter shall follow and cut on the same versely-moving block having an arm in con 
circle as the pattern. The rotary cutting- tact with a pattern and bearing a cutting-tool, I 30 
65 disks, which are easily made to comply with a stationary standard supporting a slidehav 
this feature, are cheap in construction, read-ing a movement at an angle with the axially- -, 
The outline of the pattern may be changed axially-moving carriage supporting a trans- Ioo 
5o axis-should be reciprocated by means of the ion, substantially as specified. 
471,674 
 
3. 
a grooved way, formed in detachable sections, 
the sections being divided on the radii of Va 
rious circles forming the curves of the pat 
tern, substantially as set forth. 
9. In combination with an engine-lathe hav 
ing an axially-moving carriage supporting a 
transversely-moving block having an arm in 
contact with a pattern and a tool supported by 
said block, said tool having an annular ro 
tary cutting-blade with a periphery of the 
same contour as the portion of the pin or roller 
that is in contact with the pattern, substan 
tially as specified. 
25 
WALTER. S. LOWELAND. 
EDWIN C. HENN. 
Witnesses: 
H. R. WILLIAMS, 
ARTHURB. JENKINS. 
moving carriage and bearing a cutting-tool, a 
rack connected with the slide, a pinion mesh 
ing with the rack, and a connection attached 
to the carriage for oscillating the pinion, sub 
stantially as specified. 
7. In combination with an engine-lathe hav 
ing an axially-moving carriage supporting a 
transversely-moving block having an arm in 
contact with a pattern and bearing a cutting 
tool and a pattern consisting of a grooved way 
formed in detachable sections, the sections 
being divided on the radii of the various cir 
cles forming the curves of the pattern, sub 
stantially as specified. 
8. The combination, with an engine-lathe 
having an axially-moving carriage supporting 
a transversely-moving block having an arm in 
contact with a pattern and bearing an annular 
rotary cutting-blade, of a pattern consisting of 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471774.txt	ROLAND ROGER SON & ROBERT ROGER SON. 
SMOKE CONSUMER, 
Patented Mar. 29, 1892. 
. 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,774, 
 
S; St 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
y 
ROIAND ROGERSON AND ROBERT ROGERSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
SVOKE CONSUMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,774, dated March 29, 1892. 
Application filed January 26, 1891, Serial No, 379,043, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ROLAND ROGERSON 
and ROBERTROGERSON, citizens of the United 
States, and residents of the city of Chicago, 
County of Cook, and State of Illinois, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Smoke-Consumers, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
Smoke-consumers especially designed for use 
in connection with locomotives, and has for 
its prime object to prevent the escape of the 
smoke and products of combustion throughthe 
Smoke-stack and to consume them by the fire 
Which produced them without detriment to 
the draft or steaming qualities of the engine, 
but, on the contrary, effecting an improve 
ment therein. 
Another object is to maintain a constant 
draft on the fire, whether the engine bestand 
ing or running, whereby will not only the pro 
duction of steam be greatly enhanced, but 
there will be constant consumption of the 
Smoke, which will thereby be prevented es 
caping through the smoke-stack without chok 
ing the draft. 
A further object is to utilize exhaust-steam 
for creating a draft toward the smoke-stack, 
in the usual manner, and at the same time 
for preventing the escape of the smoke and 
products of combustion through the smoke 
stack,and for directing the draft created there 
by back toward the fire-box of the engine. 
These objects are attained by the devices 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of so 
much of a locomotive as co-operates with our 
invention, showing devices applied thereto 
embodying our invention; Fig. 2, a top plan 
view of the same; Fig. 3, a transverse verti 
cal section through the exhaust head and 
stack, and Fig. 4 a detail view of the connec 
tion between the live-steam pipe and the re 
turn draft-pipe. 
Similar letters of reference indicate the same 
parts in the several figures of the drawings. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A indicates a locomotive-boiler of 
ordinary construction; B, the steam - dome 
thereof; C, the exhaust-head or smoke-cham 
ber at the forward end of the boiler; D, the 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
M 
smoke-stack, and E, the saddle, by means of 
which the smoke-stack is attached to the ex 
haust-head. 
Within the smoke-stack and projecting 
down toward the exhaust-head is a deflector 
F, (see Fig. 3,) having the shape of a funnel 
or an inverted truncated cone, with its great 
est diameter at the top equal to that of the 
smoke-stack, so as to fit snugly therein and 
tapering toward the lower end thereof. Ob 
viously, however, when my invention is ap 
plied to smoke-stacks of very large diameter 
filling-rings or any other kind of device may 
be employed for reducing the diameter of the 
Smoke-stack to receive the deflector. Im 
mediately below this deflector and located 
within the exhaust-head is the nozzle or dis 
charge end G of the exhaust-steam pipes H, 
which branch therefrom and lead, respect 
ively, to the steam-chest I of the cylinders. 
The opening at the lower end of the deflector 
should be so located and proportioned with 
relation to the nozzle G that the exhaust 
steam escaping from the nozzle will just fill 
the opening and thus prevent the smoke or 
products of combustion from the flues of the 
boiler entering the smoke-stack through the 
deflector. 
The saddle illustrated in the drawings is 
flaring or tapering from the lower end of the 
smoke-stack to its point of attachment to the 
exhaust-head, and, in conjunction with the 
deflector, which tapers inwardly from above 
the saddle, forms an angular annular space 
or chamber above the mouth of the deflector, 
into which chamber the smoke and other pro 
ducts of combustion under the influence of 
the exhaust-Steam from the nozzle will be 
forced, glancing along the sides of the de 
flector and striking against the saddle, be 
cause the escape of the exhaust-steam from 
the nozzle in a strong jet creates a draft in 
the direction of the jet, and which in the or 
dinarily-constructed locomotive acts in con 
cert with the draft of the smoke-stack to 
draw the smoke and other products of com 
bustion into the smoke-stack; but with my 
invention, While the same draft toward the 
Smoke-stack is Created, the jet of steam en 
tirely fills the only opening to the smoke 
stack-that is, through the deflector-and the 
escape of the products of combustion in that 
9o 
95 
OO 
471,774 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
direction is consequently cut off. To provide 
for the escape of the products of combustion 
from this chamber and the exhaust-head, the 
saddle E or the smoke-stack at a point below 
the attachment of the deflector is connected 
by two or more return draft-pipes J with the 
fire-box of the engine, which pipes open so as 
to discharge the smoke and other products of 
combustion either directly above the fire, as 
illustrated by full lines in Fig. 1, or below the 
fire in the ash-pan, as illustrated by dotted 
Obviously the draft 
lines in the same figure. 
of the fire alone would create considerable 
draft through these pipes, which in some cases 
would be all-sufficient to relieve the exhaust 
head of the smoke and other products of com 
bustion as rapidly as they accumulated there 
in, thus producing what might be termed a 
revolving draft; but if the draft of the fire 
alone is not sufficient it can be so assisted 
as to effectually accomplish the desired end 
by the employment of the short pipes K, 
branching from the nozzle G and opening 
into the stack ends of the return draft-pipes, 
as clearly illustrated in Fig. 3, so as to dis 
charge therein a portion of the exhaust-steam 
and thus create a direct and strong draft in 
the pipes, operating to draw the smoke and 
other products of combustion into these pipes. 
To the same end we provide for the introduc 
tion into the return draft-pipes of live steam 
to be used when the engine is at a standstill 
and there is no exhaust-steam and compara 
tively little draft in the smoke-stack. This 
is accomplished by tapping the steam-dome 
with a valved pipeL, leading into the engine 
cab, as illustrated in Fig. 2, which pipe pref 
erably branches into the two lines MN, con 
nected, respectively, with the return draft 
pipes at any desirable point, either near the 
fire-box or near their point of attachment to 
the saddle or smoke-stack, as illustrated in 
the drawings, a convenient form of such con 
nection being illustrated in detail in Fig. 4, 
which shows the steam-pipe terminating in a 
nozzle O within the pipe J and directing a jet 
of live steam along said pipe in a direction 
leading to the fire-box. Thus when the en 
gine is at a standstill the engineer can open 
the valve in the pipe L and use live steam 
for maintaining a constant draft in the re 
turn-pipe for relieving the exhaust-head of 
the accumulating smoke and other products 
of combustion, and when the engine is run 
ning and while it is under way the supply of 
live steam may be cut off and the exhaust 
steam alone utilized, as before described. 
We do not desire to limit ourselves to the 
construction, location, or arrangement of the 
various elements herein illustrated and de 
scribed, for obviously many different forms 
of pipe and other connections may be em 
ployed for accomplishing the desired result 
without departing from the spirit of our in 
65 
75 
95 
O 
I I5 
vention, and, in fact, numerous modifications 
of the construction herein shown will be nec 
essary to adapt our invention for use in con 
nection with the many different construc 
tions of locomotives now in use, the pipe and 
other connections herein shown being more 
in the nature of diagrammatic illustrations of 
the invention. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a smoke-consumer, the combination, 
With a locomotive boiler, fire-box, and smoke 
stack, of a deflector located in and partially 
closing the lower end of the smoke-stack, an 
exhaust-steam nozzle located immediately be 
low and discharging the exhaust-steam di 
rectly into said deflector, and return draft 
pipes connecting the smoke-stack at a point 
below the attachment of the deflector with 
the fire-box, whereby the smoke and other pro 
ducts of combustion are prevented from en 
tering the smoke-stack and are returned to 
the fire-box, substantially as described. 
2. In a smoke-consumer, the combination, 
with a locomotive boiler, fire-box, smoke stack, 
and saddle, of a deflector located in the lower 
end of the smoke-stack and extending down 
through the saddle, an exhaust-steam nozzle 
immediately below and discharging the ex 
haust-steam directly into said deflector, and 
return draft-pipes connecting the saddle with 
the fire-box, substantially as described. 
3. In a smoke-consumer, the combination, 
with a locomotive boiler, fire-box, smoke 
stack, and saddle, of a deflector attached to 
the lower end of the smoke-stack, an ex 
haust-steam nozzle immediately below and dis 
charging the exhaust-steam directly into said 
deflector, return draft-pipes connecting the 
saddle with the fire-box, and branch pipes 
from the said nozzle opening into the saddle 
ends of the return draft-pipes, substantially 
as described. 
4. In a smoke-consumer, the combination, 
with a locomotive boiler, fire-box, smoke 
stack, and steam-dome, of a deflector located 
in the lower end of the smoke-stack, an ex 
haust-steam nozzle immediately below and dis 
charging the exhaust-steam directly into said 
deflector, return draft-pipes connecting the 
smoke-stack at a point below the attachments 
of the deflector with the fire-box, branches 
from the said nozzle opening into the stack 
ends of the return draft-pipes, and a valve 
pipe connecting the steam-dome with said re 
turn steam-pipes, respectively, at a point be 
tween the smoke-stack and the fire-box, sub 
stantially as described. 
- 
ROLAND ROGERSON. 
ROBERT ROGERSON. 
Witnesses: 
R. C. OMOHUNDRO, 
JAMES R. SCOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471874.txt	(No Model.) 
W. S. MALLARD. 
STATION INDICATOR. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 471,874. 
Patented Mar. 29, 1892. 
- S. 
se 
Cee 
S. 
BY (t. 
ATTORNEYS 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,874, 
 
W. S. MALLARD. 
STATION INDICATOR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar, 29, 1892. 
Ne: 2. 
2. s 
St 
a 
S& 
N 
N N 
a. 
R 
X 
es 
t E. 
A 77OAMEYS 
(No Model.) 
No. 471,874, 
W. S. MALLARD. 
STATION INDICATOR. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Mar, 
29 
1892 
S 
N 
 
Z'67. 1. 
I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
WAAAAAAAAAAAA 
EE 
g 
 
I 
I 27 
INVENTOR: 
77%azazzas Azazzaz 
AT TORNEYS 
HEARRS PERS 
co. Photo-IrHo-Washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. S. MALLARD, OF DARIEN, GEORGIA. 
STATION-INDICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,874, dated March 29, 1892. 
Application filed May 4, 1891, Serial No, 391,578, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM S. MALLARD, 
residing at Darien, McIntosh county, in the 
State of Georgia, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Station-Indica 
tors, of which the following is a specification. 
Myinvention relatestostation-indicators for 
steam and horse railways, as well as other con 
veyances; and the purpose thereofistoprovide 
a simple and novel construction and combi 
nation of parts whereby the separate sign 
cards or slides bearing the names of the dif 
ferent stations or points to be called may be 
successively shifted from one compartment 
to another of a dual casing and then returned 
to the compartment from which they were 
taken in a reverse order of succession. 
One of the objects of my invention is to 
render the mechanism by which this transpo 
sition is effected automatic in action, and to 
provide simple means whereby the passage of 
the final card in either direction shall auto 
matically reverse the transposing devices and 
bring them into proper position to return the 
cards to the compartment from which they 
were originally taken. 
My invention also has for its object to pro 
vide means of a simple character for secur 
ing the sign-slides, successively, into their re 
spective holding-compartments and to always 
bring one of such plates to the sight-opening 
in the casing without undue friction, whereby 
the proper order of stations is preserved and 
the indicator adapted to read in both direc 
tions of movements of the car. 
My invention has, finally, for its object to 
provide an indicator for the purpose described 
which can be produced at a much less cost, 
which is more effective in its use, and easier 
to manipulate than indicators of this charac 
ter now in general use. 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
peculiar combination and novel arrangement 
of the several parts, all of which will herein 
after be fully described in the annexed speci 
fication, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure I is a longitudinal section of my im 
proved indicator, taken on the line 11, Fig. 2, 
all but one of the indicator-slides having been 
moved from the upper.to the lower compart 
ment. Fig. 2 is an end view of the shifting 
and moving devices, showing all of the slides 
as having left the upper compartment and 
the upper follower down to its lowermost 
limit. Fig. 3 illustrates the position of the 
shifting and operating devices when the op 
erating-cord has been pulled down to its limit. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical transverse section of the 
indicator, taken on the line 4 4, Fig. 1, look 
ing in the direction indicated by the arrow, 
the parts being in position to shift from the 
lower to the upper compartment. Fig. 5 is an 
end elevation of the shifting devices, showing 
the same in position for shifting the sign 
slides from the upper to the lower compart 
ment, all but one of the upper slides having 
been moved from the upper to the lower com 
partment. Fig. 6 is a detail sectional view 
of a portion of one of the shifting-wheels, and 
Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the complete 
indicator. 
In the practical construction of my lim 
proved station-indicator I provide a casing 
formed of a vertical rectangular body, cen 
trally of which at one side is the sight or in 
dicator opening, which extends almost en 
tirely across the said side of the casing through 
which the different slides or plates may be 
See 
The general construction of my indicator 
consists of a longitudinal operating-shaft ar 
ranged to be revolved in reverse directions 
by the operating-cord, which cord always op 
erates in One direction, and above and below 
such shaft I arrange compartments adapted 
to receive and hold the several indicator 
slides, which in their movement from the up 
per to the lower, or vice versa, are first fed 
from such compartments to the sight-open 
ing and then to the respective compartment. 
Upon such shaft are loosely mounted wheels. 
or disks, which carry certain automatically 
Operated shifting devices, which serve to en 
gage the Outermost plates in the compart 
ment in which they may be stored and carry 
the same at the first operation to the sight 
opening and at the next operation to the op 
posite compartment, the said shifting devices 
being SO arranged that as the last plate in 
either of the compartments is about to be 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
85 
9o 
95 
OO 
471,874 
O 
75 
3O. 
moved to the sight-opening such devices will 
be automatically shifted, so that at the next 
operation of the indicator the slides will move 
in a reverse direction. 
Referring now more particularly to Figs. 1, 
2, and 3 of the drawings, A indicates the cas 
ing or frame, preferably of the shape shown, 
which is divided into a main chamber A and 
end chambers AA by means of the vertical 
partitions a. a', the central chamber A' being 
divided into a central longitudinal chamber 
B and longitudinal compartments C C, ar 
ranged, respectively, above and below the said 
central chamber B, as shown. 
D indicates a shaft journaled in the partis 
tions a, a centrally of the chamber B, upon 
which are mounted the indicator-plate-carry 
ing wheels E, fixed to turn with said shaft, 
said wheels being formed with broad rims e, 
in which are secured the automatically-oper 
ated gravity-pawls F, which are arranged to 
engage the indicator-slides presently referred 
to and bring them to the sight-opening G in 
the casing in the manner hereinafter ex 
25 plained. Each of the wheels E is provided 
with eight of such pawls arranged in two sets, 
one set of which is arranged to engage the in 
dicator-slides in one direction of movement 
of such wheels and the other to engage such 
slides on the reverse movement thereof. By 
referring to Fig. 4 it will be seen that each of 
such pawls is pivoted upon the inner face of 
the rims of the wheels E, one end thereof be 
ing weighted, as at fand provided with springs 
35 f',which bear against the said rims and serve to 
normally force the hooked ends f out through 
slots e' in the rims e beyond the face of such 
rims, said hooked ends being beveled, as 
shown. 
. As before stated, the different sets of pawls 
are arranged to operate the slides in reverse 
directions. To this end the said sets are ar 
ranged reversely-i.e., the hooked ends of one 
set being projected in a reverse direction to 
the opposite set. Thus should the parts be in 
the position shown in Fig. 4 to operate in the 
direction indicated by the arrow the Outer 
set will be in.position to carry the slides from 
the lower to the upper compartment. The in 
ner set of pawls during this operation will 
engage the slides H with their beveled ends 
and ride over such slides, and when the parts 
are set to carry the slides H from the upper 
to the lower compartment the outer set of 
slides will engage with their beveled ends 
against the slides in the upper compartment 
and pass over them in the same manner. 
In the practical construction of the ma 
chine it is operated by a downward pull upon 
the cord I, which serves to throw the inter 
mediate mechanism between it, and the shaft, 
presently referred to, and give the said shaft 
and wheels E one-fourth of a revolution in 
the direction for which the shifting devices 
have been automatically set. Thus when the 
pawls operate to move the slides in the direc 
tion shown in Fig. 4 it is essential that to ad 
mit of such movement the pawl which moved 
the slide from the sight-opening to the upper 
Compartment be moved from engagement 
with the saidslide, so that it can pass thereun 
der when the next succeeding pawl brings the 
next slide from the sight-opening to the up 
per compartment. To this end I arrange the 
lugs I I, one of which I' projects under the 
upper end of the rim e in the path of the 
weighted curved end of the outer set of pawls 
F, while the other I projects over the lower 
rim of the wheel in the path of the weighted 
ends of the inner set of pawls. 
From Figs. 1. 
and 4 of the drawings the operation of such 
construction will be readily understood. The 
pawl which brings the plate to the respective 
compartments will, after it has done so, be 
tilted on its pivot, so that its hooked end will 
be drawn inside of the rim of the wheel E. It 
Will also be observed that a space Jisformed 
between the rims of the wheels E and the 
walls of the chamber B, in which the plates 
are moved, and that the outer one of the slides 
projects out of its respective compartment, so 
as to be in the path of the particular pawl 
which is to move it, and to provide means for 
forcing such projecting slides Hinto the com-. 
partments during the operation of moving the 95 
last indicator-slide from the sight-opening to . 
the compartments I form the peripheral edge 
of the wheel E with beveled projections E, 
which engage the slides or the followers K 
K' and push them into their respective com 
partments, so that the next slide can be moved 
under or over the same. 
The several indicator - slides H are each 
formed of segmental plates, which are curved 
to fit the rim of the wheels E and extend en 
tirely across the chamber B, as shown in Fig. 
1, the body portion proper of such slides be 
ing reduced in thickness, so as to avoid undue 
friction between the slides, and upon the outer 
face of such plates are printed, painted, or oth 
erwise formed the names of the several sta 
itions or streets. The slides as they are seated 
in the lower compartment are normally forced 
upward by means of the spring-actuated foll 
lower K, while the plates in the upper com 
partment are normally forced downward by 
their own weight and that of the follower K. 
In order to render the mechanism wholly 
automatic, as before stated, I provide the 
means (clearly shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3) for 
shifting the shaft-turning devices, consisting 
of a hub L, fixedly held on the shaft D and 
formed with a flange L', upon which is loosely 
mounted the disk M, formed with a rear 
Wardly-projecting annular flange m, the pe 
riphery of which is grooved and forms a seat 
for the operating-cord I, which at one end is 
- made fast to said flange. 
Fitted upon the face of the hub L and made 
fast thereto is a diskN, formed with four ra 
dial notches n, as shown, with which are ar 
ranged to engage the pulling-pawls O', pivoted 
- 
. 
45 
So 
55 
I 25 
T30 
OO 
IOS 
IIo 
II5 
 
o 
f5 
25 
35 
4. 
45 
471,874 
3 
arms serving when the last plate in each com 
upon the outer face of the disk M, suchpawls 
being spring-actuated and normally forced 
partment is fed out to automatically trip and 
set the shifting devices for the purpose before 
toward the said toothed disk. 
P indicates a discus which fits upon the 
stated. As the plates in the lower compart 
outer face of the disk M and held for a slight 
ment are removed therefrom the follower K' 
free movement thereon and to turn therewith, 
rises up, and as the disk M, with its carrier 
being held locked thereto by means of spring 
pawl, is turned to move the last card away 
actuated locking-pawls Q R, which are ar 
from the sight-opening the follower K will 
tranged to engage locking-lugs S S', which are 
come up and take its place in the lower com 
partment, the arm lefthereof projecting out 
projected outward from segmental projec 
through the slot V in the path of the pawl R, 
tions M' on the disks M. By reference to 
Figs. 2. and 5 it will be seen that the said de 
which, when the parts return to their normal 
vices are so arranged relatively that when the 
position, will strike the said arm k', be tripped 
and pulled from engagement with the lug S, the 
shaft is to be turned in the direction indi 
lugg' of the ring then engaging such armk', 
cated by the arrow in Fig. 2 the lower pawl 
Owill be held in engagement with the notched 
and arrests further movement of the ring P, 
disk N, while the upper pawl will be freed 
the disk M, however, turning back to its limit, 
thereby causing the ring P to become shifted 
therefrom, and the lower locking-pawl R will 
be held locked to the lug S'; but when the 'on said disk from the position shown in 
Fig. 2 to that shown in Fig. 5, the movement 
shaft is to be moved into the position indi 
cated by the arrow, Fig. 5, the upper pawl O 
of the ring on the disk M being limited by 
will be in engagement with the notched disk 
the slot U and pin ac, the movement of such 
N and its locking-pawl Qin engagement with 
ring also serving as a means of throwing the 
lower pawl O' out of engagement with the 
the lug S. 
disk N and the upper pawl into engagement 
When the slides are to be moved from the 
lower to the upper compartment, the operator 
With such disk, such operation being accom 
plished by means of a rocking lever Y, piv. 
pulls down upon the cord I and turns the disk 
Mone-quarter of a revolution, said movement 
oted at , to the disk M and formed with as 
being limited by means of the lug lengag 
long army', which extends over the ring P 
between lugs fly, and with oppositely-pro 
ing the stops ll, and the lower pawl O', be 
jecting arms fly, which are arranged to al 
ing held in engagement with the notched 
ternately engage the upper and lower pawls: 
disk N, turns it and carries it to the position 
O O'in a manner clearly understood from the 
shown in Fig. 3, which figure shows the posi 
drawings. 
tion of the several parts when the cord I has 
When the slides are all located in 
the upper compartment and the parts are in 
been pulled down to its limit. The notched 
the position shown in Fig. 5, the operator in 
disk N, being secured to the hub L, which is 
pulling upon the cord to turn the disk M in 
made fast to the shaft D, serves to turn such 
shaft one-fourth of a revolution at each op 
the direction indicated by arrow 10 causes. 
the upper pawl to lift out of the upper notch. 
eration of the machine, and thereby moves 
- the wheels E and the indicator-shifting slides, 
in the disk N and carries it over to the rear 
as before stated, such shaft at each quarter 
notch, into which such pawl will slip, the 
turn being held to its adjusted positions by 
locking-lever T having been lifted out of en 
means of the automatically-operated stop 
gagement with such last-named notch in the 
manner before stated. Now when the oper. 
lever T, pivoted at t to the main frame and 
formed on its inner face with a lugt, with 
ator releases his hold upon the cord I the 
spring, bringing the disk M back, pulls the 
which engages a cam X. On the face of the 
disk M, such cam being arranged to engage 
disk N and shaft D in a reverse direction, 
the lugt at the beginning of each operation 
and thereby moves one of the slides from the 
upper compartment to the sight - opening. 
of the cord I to move the lever T out of en 
When the last slide in the upper compart 
gagement with the notched diskN and to ad 
mit of its automatically engaging again the 
ment is to be moved therefrom, the pawl Q 
will pass under the arm k of the upper fol 
next succeeding notch in such disk N when 
the disk M resumes its normal position, which 
lower; but as the disk M is returned by the 
is accomplished by means of the spring U, 
spring U the indicator-plate will be moved 
out of the compartment, thereby allowing 
secured at one end to a collar at on the main 
such follower to fall and bring its arm k in 
frame and at its other end to the annular 
the path of the pawl Q, which, engaging such 
flange of the disk M, as shown in Fig. 1. 
t 
arm k, will be thrown out of engagement with 
will be seen by reference to Fig. 2 that the 
lower end of the pawl R projects beyond the 
the lug S. At the same time a pivoted arm 
edge of the ring P, its rear surface q being 
10 on the disk. M, which projects over the 
slightly in advance of the rear edge g of a 
ring P between a pair of lugs 20.20, will with 
luggi on the said ring P. 
its upper end engage said end k and cause 
One end of the upper and lower panelcom 
the ring to be shifted forward, so as to trip . 
partments is slotted, as at W, through which 
the devices and again set them in the posi 
project arms k k' on the followers KK, such 
tion shown in Fig. 2, when the machine will 
75 
Oo 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
471,874 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
55 
again be in position for the operation of mov 
ing the slides from the lower to the upper 
compartment. 
As a convenience I form the front of the 
casing into a hinged portion, which is held 
locked, as shown. 
Having in a general Way outlined the oper 
ation of my invention, a detailed statement of 
the operation is deemed unnecessary, such 
operation and advantages being readily un 
derstood from the above description and the 
drawings. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a station-indicator, the combination 
of the casing formed, with a central longi 
tudinal chamber formed with a sight-open 
ing, slide-carrying chambers C C, located, re 
spectively, above and below said central 
chamber, indicator-slides held in said com 
partments, followers under such slides and 
normally pressed toward the central chamber, 
and shifting devices held within the said cen 
tral chamber, arranged to move the slides suc 
cessively from the lower to the upper compart 
ment and then from the upper to the lower 
compartment, said followers formed with trip 
per-arms arranged, when the last slide is 
moved from the compartments, to engage the 
shifting devices and set them for reverse 
movement, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
2. A station-indicator comprising a casing, 
a central longitudinal chamber formed with a 
sight-opening in one face thereof, longitudi 
nal compartments arranged one above and 
the other below said central chamber and 
opening therein, indicator-slides held in said 
compartments and normally pressed toward 
the central chamber, a shaft journaled in the 
central chamber, arranged to be revolved in 
reverse directions, the wheels E, carrying 
shifting-pawls adapted to engage said slides, 
fixedly secured to said shaft, and an operating 
cord extended to the outside of the casing, ar 
ranged to partially revolve said shaft when 
pulled upon, whereby to carry the slides from 
one compartment to the sight-opening and 
then to the opposite compartment, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination of the case A, formed 
with a circular central chamber B, having a 
sight-opening, the compartments C C, the in 
dicator-slides and followers held therein, the 
shaft D, journaled in the central chamber, 
carrying the wheels EE, provided with a se 
ries of pawls F, arranged in sets, one set to 
operate reversely to the other, each set ar 
ranged to engage the slides in the compart 
ments in one direction of movement and pass 
under them in a reverse direction, and means 
for partially revolving the shaft at each oper 
ation of the machine, whereby to carry one 
slide from one compartment to the sight 
a 
- 
described. 
opening and the preceding indicator-slide to 
the opposite compartment, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
4. The combination, with the casing formed 
with the longitudinal compartments CC, the 
central circular chamber B between such 
compartments and communicating therewith, 
and the indicator-slides and followers held in 
such compartments and normally pressed to 
ward the central chamber, of the operating 
shaft l), the wheels E, formed with flangese, 
secured to the shafts, the shifting-pawls F, 
arranged, as shown, upon said flanges, the 
hub. L., secured upon said shaft, the disk M, 
loosely mounted on said hub L, formed with 
an annular flange, a spring connection be 
tween said disk M and the frame of the cas 
ing for returning such disk to its normal po 
sition, the notched diskN, secured to the hubs 
I, pawls on the disk M, arranged to engage 
said disk N, said disk Marranged for a quar 
ter-revolution about said shaftD, and the op 
erating-cord secured to said disk M, all ar 
ranged substantially as and for the purpose 
5. The combination of the casing having 
a central chamber B, formed with a sight 
opening, the slide-compartments C and C, lo 
cated above and below it, as shown, the indi 
cator-slides held therein, the followers for 
normally forcing such slides toward the cen 
tral chambers, said followers formed with 
projecting arms le k' at one end, the shaft D, 
journaled in the central chamber, the wheels 
E, carrying the shifting-pawls F, arranged in 
sets, each set adapted to work on opposite 
movements of the shaft D, cam projections 
on the wheels arranged to depress the slides 
in the compartment to which it is intended 
to move them, tripping devices arranged to 
depress the pawls F as they carry the slide 
from the sight-opening to such compartment, 
whereby said pawls will pass under the said 
slides, and shifting devices mounted upon the 
outer end of the shaft B, adapted to operate 
to turn the shaft and be engaged by the arms 
le', and be thereby set to turn the shaft in the 
opposite direction, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
6. The combination, with the casing formed 
with a central longitudinal chamber, the 
compartments C C, the slides held therein, 
the followers for forcing them toward the op 
erating-shaft, and the shifting devices carried 
thereby, of the hub L, fixedly secured to the 
shaft, the loose disk M, mounted thereon and 
adapted for a partial revolution thereon, the 
notched disk N, secured to the hub L, the 
pawls O O' on the disk M, arranged to alter 
nately engage the disk, the ring P, secured 
upon disk M and adapted for a limited ro 
tation thereon, the pawls Q and R, the lock 
stops SS, one of such stops and pawls nor 
mally in locked position, the shifting-lever Y, 
secured to the disk M and adapted to be 
75 
85 
cy 
95 
OO 
lo5 
EO 
I 25 
 
471,874 
ating-cord I, secured to the disk M and pro 
jected to the outside of the casing, and means 
for bringing the disk M back to its normal 
position, all arranged substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
WILLIAM. S. MALLARD. 
Witnesses: 
MCD. DUNWODY, 
CHARLESS. WYLLY. 
Swung by the free movement of the ring P to 
release the pawls O O", the automatically 
operated stop-pawl T, the shifting-lever 10, 
pivoted to the disk M and connected with 
the ring P to move said ring when operated, 
the projecting arms k c' on the followers, 
Said arms arranged to alternately engage the 
pawls Q and R to set the device for reverse 
operation, the arm , also adapted to engage 
Io the lever 10 as it engages pawl R, the oper 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US471974.txt	(No Model.) 
wra 
S. M. HEULINGS, Jr. & E. EW ANS, 
MILK C00LER, 
No. 471,974. 
Z5% 
Z3 ( \| 
ZE 
Z7 
ZZ 
(2 
HZ3 
! 
z Z. 
Z-1 
. 
Z7 
2..-- 
2 
H 
f 
: 
 
 
 
7? 
y 
2%, 2. 
a/ (Z/270/466A 
E 
Patented Mar. 29, 1892. 
rez--ze. 
Sazzzzze/76. Zezzz7%3A 
ZZZZzaaaz Z2/272 s. 
67 6. 
da 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
SAMUEL M. HEULINGS, JR, AND ELLWOOD EVANS, OF HADDONFIELD, 
NEWJERSEY. 
M.K. COOLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 471,974, dated March 29, 1892. 
Application filed August 3, 1891, 
Serial No. 401,551 (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, SAMUELM.HEULINGS, 
Jr., and ELLWOOD EVANS, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Haddonfield, in the 
county of Camden, State of New Jersey, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Milk-Coolers, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had therein 
to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention has reference to milk or 
other liquid coolers of that class which com 
prises a corrugated cooling - surface and 
means connected therewith for applying wa 
ter or any other refrigerant, and in detail in 
some respects the invention refers to such 
coolers when adapted for suspension. 
Among the objects of the invention are to 
provide such a construction as will permit of 
a ready access throughout the entire surface 
of the corrugated plates for cleaning pur 
poses and the rotation or semi-rotation of the 
entire apparatus to give access to both sides 
and all parts, thus further facilitating the 
operation of cleansing the same. 
A further object is to provide means for sus 
pension which will not only be pendulous, 
whereby the apparatus will automatically 
assume a perpendicular position, but which 
shall serve at the same time to receive and 
conduct in a desired circuit or direction and 
deliver from the apparatus the refrigerant 
employed. 
It is also an object of the invention to firmly 
unite the two adjacent corrugated cooling 
lates by some means which shall leave the 
ends of said plates free and unobstructed, so 
that the hand or any cleaning device may pass 
completely along the corrugations when clean 
ing the plates. Heretofore such plates have 
terminated against standards or other parts, 
thereby forming at the end and within the 
corrugations recesses or places which were 
more or less difficult to be cleaned. Our im 
provement in this regard obviates this ob 
jection. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will be hereinafter described, and the 
novel features thereof will be particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
side elevation of a cooling apparatus con 
structed in accordance with our invention. 
Fig. 2 is an end elevation with a portion of 
the frame-Work removed. Fig. 3 is a detail 
in perspective illustrating one manner of se 
curing the ends of the corrugated plates. Fig. 
4 is an elevation of one end of an apparatus, 
illustrating a modification of our invention. 
Like letters refer to like parts in all the 
figures. 
A A represelut the cooling-surfaces of the 
apparatus, and each consists of a corrugated 
plate usually of sheet metal. For the pur 
pose of uniting these plates we first place 
between them a filling A, which may be of 
metal, paper, or paper-pulp, plaster-of-paris, 
cement, or any other suitable material. This 
filling conforms to the inner surfaces of each 
of the plates and extends from one to the 
other and is arranged at Such a distance from 
the end as Will leave a pocket or recess ex 
tending from end to end, and into said pocket 
or recess we pour or flow or otherwise place 
Solder or other liquid metal A and allow the 
same to harden. In this manner the twoplates 
are Secured firmly together, and no obstruc 
tion whatever remains within the corrugations 
or along the edges and upon the outer surfaces 
of the plates, SO that every portion of said sur 
faces is readily accessible for cleaning pur 
poses. We also by this method provide a fill 
ing-piece which exactly conforms to any irre 
gularities in the corrugations of the plate, and 
thus produce not only a Water-tight connec 
tion, but provide a support from all points for 
the plates. These results cannot practically 
be secured by cutting and fitting by handa fili 
ing or spacer. When the filling A'is of metal 
we find it necessary only to flow the solder or 
other liquid metal along the lines of juncture 
between said filling and the corrugated plates. 
This method of uniting the parts secures the 
same advantage of preventing any obstruc 
tion upon the Outer Surfaces and within the 
corrugations of the plates, whereby they are 
readily cleaned. 
The upper and lower ends of the cooling 
surfaces are rounded, as shown in Fig.1, as 
is usual, and communicate with a frame-work 
B, which is hollow. In this instanee we have 
illustrated in Fig.1 and by full lines in Fig. 4 
such a frame-Work made up of pipe and pipe 
75 
85 
95 
roo 
IO 
3O 
35 ) 
45 
SO 
 
471,974 
fittings; but we do not limit our invention in 
this regard. At the top we mount or form 
the branches B' and castings B, which con 
form on their inner surfaces to the contour 
of the perforated receiving-trough C, the ends 
of which are soldered or otherwise secured to 
the castings. At the lower end and upon the 
branches or pipes Band we form castings D, 
which upon their inner surfaces conform to 
the contour of the trough E, provided with 
the discharge-pipe E, and said castings may 
or may not, as desired, be provided with feet 
D', upon which the apparatus may rest when 
placed upon the floor. Trunnions F are pro 
vided on the frame-work and serve for the 
pivotal connection with the apparatus of sus 
pension links or hooks G, that are to be con 
nected with brackets H, extending from a 
wall or other support. A ring H', or it may 
be lugs H, only one of which is shown formed 
on the frame-work, is or are provided for the 
purpose of connecting the links with the 
frame at a point above the trunnions, SO as 
to prevent any undue oscillation of the ap 
paratus. The ring is intended to remain in 
connection with the frame-work while the ap 
paratus is suspended and disconnected and 
while it is being rotated or semi-rotated for 
access to opposite sides for cleaning purposes. 
It will be noted that in rotating the appara 
tus the pivotal connection of the links with 
the trunnion permits a movement away from 
the wall sufficient to allow the apparatus to 
turn. This could not take place if the links 
were rigidly connected at the trunnions. The 
ring H' is lifted from the boss or projection 
B4 in order to permit of the turning of the 
apparatus, and when the lugs H are em 
ployed a sidewise movement will release them 
from the link in order to permit the appara 
tus to be turned. The ring connection may 
be preferable as being less rigid than the lugs 
unless the latter are spaced so as to permit of 
a slight oscillation of the apparatus upon the 
trunnions in order that it may seek automati 
cally its perpendicular; but in either case the 
apparatus would find its own perpendicular 
by reason of its suspension upon the brack 
ets being practically pivotal. The trunnions 
F are hollow, as is the frame-work, and in or 
der to secure a passage of the cooling-liquid 
from bottom to top and Within the cooling 
plates a plug I is placed above one of the 
trunnions and below the opposite trunnion, 
so that the liquid takes the course indicated 
by the arrow. 
We do not limit our invention to the exact 
construction of trunnion shown, but illustrate 
one form which is acceptable. This form com 
prises a washer F' and a coupling F, placed 
upon the trunnion in the order named and 
outside of the link G, the coupling being screw 
threaded or otherwise mounted upon the trun 
nion and adapted for connection with or in 
sertion into a hose or other pipe. 
It is evident that any of the well-known 
pipe connections which are employed where 
One part remains stationary and another ro 
tates may be used at the trunnions of our ap 
paratus. 
Instead of employing a frame-work of pip 
ing, and in order to provide trunnions and 
links to apparatus of this class in which there 
are standards at the ends of the corrugated 
plates, we propose to apply trunnions F, 
either solid or hollow, to said standards, as 
illustrated by dotted lines in Fig. 4. These 
trunnions may be placed either at or above 
the middle lengthwise of the standard, if de 
sired, because the excess of weight of the cool 
ing-liquid below the trunnions might facili 
tate the finding of an exact perpendicular 
when the apparatus issuspended. When hol 
low trunnions are provided upon the stand 
ards, they may be hollow and communicate 
either directly with the space between the 
plates or with a hollow chamber F, cast or 
otherwise formed in the standard and extend 
ing down to the bottom of the plates and com 
municating with their interior, as at F. In 
this manner we secure an upward circulation 
of the cooling-liquid. 
In some instances we provide the standards 
with a frame-work B, Fig. 4, communicating 
with the space between the cooling-plates at 
the top or bottom by means of the pipe B 
B*. In this manner the trunnions and links 
and cooling-liquid-supply pipes may be ap 
plied to old forms of standards which have 
no chamber F formed thereon, whereby said 
forms of apparatus are adapted to be rotated 
for cleaning purposes without removing them 
from their brackets. The link-suspension 
and link-and-frame-connecting devices H II 
permit of the use of trunnions for turning the 
apparatus and at the same time retain pendu 
lous support and action of the apparatus. 
It is apparent to persons skilled in the art 
that the unobstructed corrugations may be 
secured without the use of the filling A' in the 
operation of closing up the ends with molten 
metal by placing the plates and maintaining 
them by any desired means at the proper dis 
tance apart and dipping them into molten 
metal or Solder a desired depth to secure the 
desired thickness of the metal filling A*. In 
this operation it is of course understood that 
while the inner Surfaces of the plates are at 
their ends properly fluxed their outer surfaces 
are either oiled or in any other well-known 
manner treated, So as to prevent the adher 
ence of the molten metal thereon. We there 
fore do not limit our invention to a particu 
lar manner or method of forming the unob 
structed corrugated cooling-plates and their 
end fillings. 
What we clain) is 
1. The combination, with a rotatable cool 
ing apparatus, of Suspension-links, substan 
tially as specified. 
2. The combination, with a cooling appa 
ratus having trunnions, of suspension-links 
and removable link-retaining devices, sub 
stantially as specified. 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
TC) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
471,974 
3 
O 
3. The combination, with the cooling-plates, 
of a hollow frame-work provided with hol 
low trunnions and suspension-links loosely 
connected to said trunnions, substantially as 
specified. 
4. The combination, with the cooling-plates, 
of a hollow frame provided with hollow trun 
nions located between the ends of the frame, 
Substantially as specified. 
5. The combination, with the cooling-plates, 
of a hollow frame provided with trunnions 
and means for Supporting the same on said 
trunnions, located between the ends of the 
frame, substantially as specified. 
6. A cooling apparatus comprising plates 
corrugated transversely and supported in op 
erative position by means located between the 
plates, whereby the ends of the corrugations 
on their outer surfaces are left free and un 
obstructed for cleaning purposes, substan 
tially as specified. 
7. The combination of corrugated cooling 
plates and an intermediate filling of metal, 
limited to the space between and simulta 
neously uniting the plates, substantially as 
specified. 
8. The combination, with the cooling-plates, 
of a hollow frame-work having hollow trun 
nions, links pivoted on the trunnions, and 
nozzles connected with the trunnions, sub 
stantially as specified. 
9. The combination, with the cooling-plates, 
of the frame B, having pipes B, the trough 
ends B, fitted to the pipes, and the trough C, 
Substantially as specified. 
10. The combination, with the corrugated 
plates A, of the frame B, having pipe B, the 
trough C, and trough ends for supporting and 
shaping the trough, mounted on the pipes, 
Substantially as Specified. 
11. The combination, with the plates A, of 
the frame B, having the pipes B, the trough 
ends having feet D, and the trough E, sub 
stantially as specified. 
12. The combination, with the cooling 
plates, of a frame-work provided with trun 
nions and suspension-links loosely connected 
to the trunnions between the ends of the 
frame-work, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
SAMUEL M. HEULINGS, JR, 
ELLWOOD EVANS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES M. CASSADY, 
THOMAS B. FENER, 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472074.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS W. PHILLIPS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE CHICAGO 
SASH PULLEY COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SASH = PULLEY 
SPECIFTCATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 472,074, dated April 5, 1892. 
pplication filed December 23, 1889, Serial Mo, 334.663, (N0 m0del.). 
2 O 
25 
3? 
70 d// ??h0m?)  7??dy c07a772; 
Be it knoWn that I, F'RANCIS W. PHILLIPs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
mois, haWe imwented a new and useful Improve 
ment in SaSh:Pulleys, of which the following 
is a Specification. 
In this in Wention my object has been to pr0 
duce a form of SaSh-pulley and its inclosing 
Shell Which can be secured in place in the 
[ O 
| pulley-Stile without the use of Screws or other 
fastening dewices, Such as have heretOfore 
been required. I employ in my improvement 
a, pulley and Shell having laterally-projecting 
St0pSWhich are paSSed through recesses in the 
SideS of the opening cut in the stile to receive 
the Shell and Which, after the shell is in place, 
may be dropped below Said recesses and en 
gage With the inner face of the stile and act 
aS retainers to confine the shell in the open 
ing. For the Sake of cheapmeSS in construc 
tion and alSO for another important object, 
hereimafter to be explained, I form these lat 
eral Stops by extending the pivot of the pulley 
SO that they Will project a Sufficient; distance 
at either Side of the Shell to serve this pur 
p0Se, and in Order that they may be lowered 
into engagement With the uncut-aWay portion 
Of the Stile after the shell has been inserted 
in the Stile I prOwide the shell with vertical 
SlotS, Which Will permit this change of posi 
tion by the piwot. 
In the acc0mpanying draWingsIhave shown 
at H'igureS1 and 2 front and rear elewations, 
respectively, of a pulley-stile provided with 
my inWention, and at Fig. 8 a wertical section 
upon the line 8 8 of Fig. 2. 
In Said draWingS, A represents the stile; B, 
the pulley; C, the pulley-shell; ID, the front 
Surrounding flange of the shell, and E the 
piwot of the pulley, the latter made Sufficiently 
long So that its ends Will project laterally be 
yOmd the Shell, aS Sh0Wm. The stile is pr0 
wided With an Opening corresponding in di 
mension and shape with the dimension and 
Shape of the Shell, the front flange being also 
let into the front of the stile, as indicated. At . 
the SideS of the main opening in the stile are 
receSSeS 0, Which Serwe as paSSages for the 
projecting ends of the piwot When the shell is 
imSerted in the stile. After the shell has been 
inserted the pulley is alloWed to fall by the 
wertical slots 0, formed in the Sides of the 
shell, as shown at Fig. 8. This bringS the 
ends of the pi wot against the rear faceS of the 
stile below the passageS Ct, So that Such ends 
will act as stops to retain the pulley and Shell 
in place in the stile, the fromt flange ID SerW 
ing to prevent the shell from mOwing inwardly. 
It will thus be seen that by meanS of the Side 
stops formed by the pivot ends and Said front 
flange the shell will be very Securely held; 
also, that it can be readily remowed Should 
that be neceSSary. 
In its lower position the pulley preferably 
lies within the outlines of the shell, aS indi 
cated by the broken lines at H'ig.8. My pur 
pose in this is to prewent any lifting of the . 
pulley should the Sash-Weight rise Sufficiently 
high to come in contact With the shell, be" 
cause if alloWed to strike the pulley it might 
have a, tendency to dislodge the shell from the 
stile by first lifting the pulley and bringing 
its pivot in position opposite the paSSageSd; 
but by extending the sides of the Shell, So that 
the Weight Will come in contact With Such 
sides instead of the pulley, I preWent any Such 
~ 
action as that deScribed. 
My invention dispenses With any necessity 
for fastening the shell by ScreWS and renderS 
its insertion a matter of eaSe and but little 
Of course I do not wish to be limited in all 
my claims to the combination, With a shell; 
of retaining-stops formed upon the ends of 
the pulley-pivot, as it is obvious that that fea 
ture is not  absolutely eSSential, although I 
deem it the preferable construction. 
To secure the pulley and Shell in place, it 
will be seen that the projectionS from the Side 
of the case, and Which, it has been Seen, may 
consist of the extension of the piwot itSelf, 
Shall have an imWard and , doWmWard mOWe 
If the pulley-case be slotted, this in 
Iment. 
Ward and downward mowement may be given 
to the projections without mowing the Shell 
doWnWard. If, hoWewer, the Slotted CaSing be 
_not used, then the doWnWard m0Wement of 
the projections must be accompanied by a 
bodily mowement of the entire Shell, and this 
will of course neceSSitate the uSe of a Some 
What larger aperture in the Stile for the inSer 
time. 
~ 
35 
4? 
45 
65 
75 
9? 
95 
5? 
 
2 
472,074 
spect to the shell after the latter has been in 
serted in the stile, Substantially aS Set forth. 
8. The combination of the pulley and Shell, 
the former hawing an axis projecting beyond 
the shell and the latter having wertical SlotS 
t0 allow the pulley to change p0Sition after in 
Sertion in the stile, Substantially aS Set forth. 
4. The combination, with a Sash-cOrd guide, 
of a stop extending laterally beyond the Side 
of the shell and mowable with respect to the 
Same, Substantially aS Set forth. 
E'RANCIS W. TPHIIILIPS. 
2 O 
25 
Witnesses: 
H. M. MUNDAY, 
RMMA HACK. 
5 
[ C) 
tion of the shell and pulley; but this enlarge 
lment in Vertical length of the aperture may be 
COVered by the face of the pulley-shell. 
I claim 
1: The combination of the window-stile, the 
pulley, the Shell, the front fiange upon the 
Shell, and a Stop extending laterally beyond 
theside of the Shell and adapted to be moved 
with respect to the Shell after the latter has 
been inserted in the stile, said stile being suit 
ably cut away for the admission of said pro 
jection, SubStantially as set forth. 
2.. The combination, With the window-stile 
liaWing ape]'ture d, of a Sash-pulley, a shell 
therefor, and a Stop extending beyond the side 
of the Shell and adapted to be mowed with re 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472174.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 472,174. 
I, HUMMEL, 
POCKET BOOK. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1892. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS HUMMEL OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
POCKET-BOOK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No,472,174, dated April 5, 1892. 
Application filed Januaryll, 1892, Serial No. 417,615. (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, LOUIS HUMMEL, a citi 
zen of Germany, and a resident of New York 
city, in the county of New York and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pocket-Books, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
pocket-books; and the object of my invention 
is to provide a pocket-book which is so con 
structed that the change pocket or compart 
ment in the same can be opened from the out 
side without opening the entire pocket-book, 
and can also be reached from the inside when 
the entire pocket-book is opened. 
The invention consists in a pocket-book pro 
vided with a change-pocket having the U 
shaped side piece of a hinged frame secured 
to its edges, a U-shaped piece mounted to 
swing on the pivots of the side pieces, said 
U-shaped pieces being provided with a flap 
adapted to fold over one side of the pocket 
book, and catches for locking one or both of 
the side pieces on the hinged frame to the 
swinging U-shaped piece between them. 
The invention also consists in the construc 
tion and combination of parts and details, 
which will be fully described hereinafter, and 
finally pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a perspective view of my improved pocket 
book, showing the same opened at both sides; 
and Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 5 are end views of the 
same, showing the parts in different positions. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The pocket-book A is constructed in the 
usual manner with a change pocket Or Com 
partment B and one or more compartments 
C for bills, cards, &c. 
Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4 show a pocket-book with 
three compartments C. To the edges of the 
flaps forming the change pocket or compart 
ment B a hinged metal frame D is secured, 
which opens and closes as said pocket or com 
partment is opened or closed and is composed 
of the U-shaped side pieces D. A U-shaped 
or stirrup-shaped metal or other piece E is 
mounted on the pivots D' of the frame D to 
swing between the two hinged side pieces D, 
constituting said frame D, and to said U 
shaped or stirrup-shaped metal piece Ea flap 
F is secured in any suitable manner. In the 
pocket-book shown the flap is so constructed 
as to embrace said U-shaped piece E. The 
flap Ffolds over that side of the pocket-book 
containing the compartment C. As shown in 
Figs. 1 to 4, said flap F is provided on its in 
ner side with the pocket G for bills; or said 
flap can be constructed without the pockets 
and may be provided at its free edge with a 
clasp H, as shown in Fig. 5, for locking it to 
the pocket-book. On said U-shaped piece E 
a fastening-cap Jis provided on each side, 
which catches J J can engage the upper edges 
of the U-shaped pieces D', forming the frame 
D, so as to lock either one or both of said 
pieces D of the frame Dagainst the piece E. 
When the pocket-book is entirely closed, the 
parts are in the position shown in Fig. 5-that 
is to say, both pieces of the frame D are en 
gaged by the catches J J and held against the 
U-shaped piece E. When it is necessary to 
take change only from the pocket-book, the 
coin pocket or compartment B is opened by 
pulling the outer piece D of the frame D 
from the piece E, whereby said compartment 
B is opened, as shown in Fig. 4. To facilitate 
thus opening the coin-pocket, the same is pro 
vided with a leather flap K. When it is de 
sired to take bills and change at the same 
time out of the pocket-book, the outer part of 
the frame D remains held against the piece 
E and the inner part of the frame D is disen 
gaged from its catch J on the piece E and 
moved from said piece E, as shown in Fig. 3, 
which permits of removing the change from 
the change-pocket and at the same time reach 
ing the bill-pockets. 
The pocket-book can 
thus be used in such a manner as to expose 
to view only the change-pocket or the change 
and bill or card pockets at the same time, as 
may be desired. The advantages of a pocket 
book of this kind are that when a person is 
in a car or for any other purpose only requires 
change he need not expose the contents of the 
entire pocket-book, and all compartments, ex 
cept the One from which the coins are to be 
removed, remain closed. When bills or cards 
are required, the pocket-book is opened in 
such a manner as to expose the pockets con 
taining the same, and at the same time the 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
ICO 
472,174 
5 
IC) 
change-pocket can be opened from the inside, 
so as to give access to the same. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a pocket-book, the combination, with 
a coin-pocket, of a frame formed of two U 
shaped hinged pieces and connected with the 
edges of said pocket, a U-shaped piece 
mounted to swing on the pivots of the said 
frame, catches for locking the side pieces of 
the frame to said U-shaped piece, and a flap 
connected with said U-shaped piece, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In a pocket-book, the combination, with 
two or more pockets, of a metal frame com 
posed of two hinged U-shaped pieces, the 
edges of which are attached to the edges of 
one of the pockets, a U-shaped piece mounted 
to swing on the pivots of said frame, two 
catches on said U-shaped piece, adapted to 
engage the side pieces of the frame, and a flap 
secured to said U-shaped piece, which flap 
can be swung over the pockets adjacent to 
the one provided with the frame, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. In a pocket-book frame, the combination, 
with two U-shaped side pieces pivoted to each 
other, of a U-shaped piece mounted on the 
pivots of the side pieces to swing between 
said side pieces and two catches on opposite 
sides of Said U-shaped pieces to engage the 
edges of the side pieces of the frame, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
LOUIS HUMMEL. 
35 
Witnesses: 
OSCAR F. GUNZ, 
CHARLES SCHROEDER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472274.txt	(No Model.) 
S. W. RUSHMORE. 
ELECTRIC ARC LAMP. 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 472,274, 
Patented Apr. 5, 1892. 
68)ilvicoscy 
-Nonne h. lolauk. 
(N.S. Q.--w 
4. 
33 ku. $$... 
year-Su-4- 
 
TKE NORRIS PETEAs co., PHOTo-LITHo...washingtoN, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
S. W. RUSHMORE 
ELECTRICARO LAMP, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
{ 
No. 472,274. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1892. 
 
imula 
s I. 
928). Evicsecs 
row. ...bl.uk 
3.11uc11 tot 
33 k- attacle 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL W. RUSHMORE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
ELECT RC-ARC LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 472,274, dated April 5, 1892. 
Application filed July 27, 1891, Serial No. 400,808, (No model.) 
55 
To aid tuhon, it nagy conce77: 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL W. RUSHMORE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Arc Lamps, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The present invention relates to mechanism 
for advancing the movable carbons of arc 
lamps. 
The main object is to provide a lamp adapted 
for use on a constant-potential circuit-Such 
as the usual incandescent circuits-in which 
the feeding of the carbon shall not depend 
entirely on the strength of a shunt coil or 
magnet, but shall depend, also, on the opera 
tion of a coil or magnet in series with the arc, 
as hereinafter more fully setforth and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective. view of the main parts of an 
arc lamp, showing the improvement applied 
thereto. Fig. 2 shows a side view of the 
clutches and parts connected thereto. 
1 is the movable carbon or the movable rod 
which carries the carbon in the usual man 
ner, and 2 is the lower and preferably station 
ary carbon. 
3 is the positive terminal of the lamp, and 
is connected to the coarse series coil 4, the 
opposite end of which is connected by con 
ductor 5 to the lower carbon. In the lamp as 
constructed this conductor will be one of the 
side rods of the frame. 
6 is the negative terminal of the lamp. 
7 is a high-resistance shunt-coil connected 
between the terminal 6 and the conductor 5. 
Instead of being connected directly to the 
terminal 6 or to the frame of the lamp, the 
shunt-coil is connected to a spring 6', which 
normally rests against the carbon-carrying 
rod, and is thus connected to the frame and 
terminal 6. With this arrangement when the 
carbon is fed down until it is all consumed, 
the upper end of the carbon-rod will leave 
the spring 6' and open the circuit through 
the shunt-coil. Were it not for this the en 
tire potential of the system would be left on 
the shunt-coils, subjecting them to the danger 
of burning out. 
S is the armature of said coil, and is pro 
vided with a spring 9 or other suitable re 
tractor. To the armature is pivoted a link 
10, the lower end of which is pivoted to a Y 
shaped lever 11, the two branches of which 
are pivoted to the two posts 12. Above this 
lever is a clutch plate or ring 13, surrounding 
the carbon or carbon-carrying rod and hav 
ing an extension or arm 14 on one side, at the 
end of Which is a link 15, forming a mechani 
cal connection between the lever 11 and the 
clutch. At the opposite side the clutch plate 
or ring has an arm 16, which stands over a 
post 17 and is adapted to strike said post 
when moved. 
18 is the armature of the series coil, and is 
connected by a link 19 to a Y-shaped lever 
20, also pivoted to the two posts 12. Below 
this lever is a second clutch-plate 21, sur 
rounding the carbon or carbon-carrying rod 
and having an arm 22 connected by link 23 
to the lever 20. The clutch controlled by the 
shunt-coil is so arranged that it grips and 
holds the Carbon when the armature of said 
coilisin its retracted position, while the clutch 
of the series coil is so arranged that it grips 
and holds the carbon when the armature of 
that coil is in its opposite-that is, its attract 
ed-position. 
24 is a dash-pot, Serving to retard the move 
ment of the armature 1S. 
When the circuit is first closed to this lamp, 
the shunt-coil is immediately energized and 
attracts its armature, causing the clutch 13 
to release its grip on the carbon and allow 
ing the carbon to fall until it comes in con 
tact with the lower carbon. This immediately 
short-circuits the shunt-coil, the circuit being 
from the insulated binding-post 3, through 
the Series coil, conductor 5, carbons, to the 
frame of the lamp, and to the binding-post 6, 
in metallie connection with the said frame, 
and the armature S is retracted by the spring 
9 raising the carbon and establishing the arc. 
The circuit when first closed includes the se 
ries coil; but the armature thereof is not in 
fluenced by the Small current passing the 
shunt, but is attracted by the main current 
after the arc is established. When the car 
bon is entirely consumed, the end of the rod 
comes below the Spring 6', thereby opening 
the circuit of the shunt-coil and protecting 
it from injury, as already described. 
When several of the lamps are placed in 
Series on a circuit of constant potential, they 
75 
85 
95 
IOC) 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
472,274 
- 
will burn regularly and practically together, 
thus obviating one of the serious difficulties 
which has existed in operating arc lamps on 
incandescent circuits. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, in an arc lamp, of a 
movable carbon or carbon-carrying rod, a 
shunt-coil, a clutch ring or plate controlled 
thereby, a series coil, and a separate feeding 
device controlled thereby, one of said devices 
acting as a check on the other, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination, in an arc lamp, of car 
bons, means for holding the same apart when 
the lamp is out of use, a shunt-coil and arma 
ture therefor, the latter being connected to 
said means in such manner as to cause the 
movable carbon to advance when the arma 
ture is attracted, a retractor for the armature 
acting against the shunt-coil, a series coil, an 
armature therefor, and means operated there 
by for holding the carbon when the armature 
of the series coil is attracted, substantially as 
described. 
3. The combination, in an arc lamp, of car 
bons, a clutch for holding the same apart when 
the lamp is out of use, a shunt-coil and arma 
ture therefor, the latter being connected to 
said clutch in such manner as to cause the 
movable carbon to advance when the arma 
ture is attracted, a retractor for the armature, 
35 
acting against the shunt-coil, a Series coil, an 
armature therefor, and a clutch operated there 
by for holding the carbon when the armature 
of the series coil is attracted, substantially as 
described. 
4. The combination, in an arc lamp, of a 
movable carbon, feeding mechanism therefor, 
and a shunt-coil to control said mechanism, said 
coil being connected to a contact upon the car 
bon-rod or carbon, whereby the shunt-circuit 
is interrupted when the carbon or carbon-rod 
passes said contact, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, in an arc lamp, of a 
shunt-coil whose armature has a suitable re 
tractor and is connected to a feeding device 
and when the lamp is out of use is retracted 
to hold the carbons apart, a feeding device, 
a series coil whose armature is connected to 
said feeding device and which is normally 5o 
retracted to allow the carbon to approach, 
whereby a current passing through the lamp 
attracts the shunt-coil armature to approach 
the carbons and close the circuit through the 
carbons, substantially as described. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
24th day of July, 1891. 
45 
55 
SAMUEL W. RUSHMORE. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES M. CATILIN, 
J. A. YOUNG. 
IO 
I5. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472374.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 472,374, 
A T LEWIS. 
MAGAZINE TACK HAMMER. 
W 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1892. 
s 
& s 
A. 
 SSGEt2 
St. 
asses 
/gk. 
". (Gr 
ATTORNEYS 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 472,374, 
A, T, LEWIS. 
MAGAZINE TACK HAMMER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1892. 
H 
SSS 
St 
S. 
Yaaaaaas 
s 
a SA a 
INVENTOR 
-Yva 
ATTORNEYS 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW T. LEWIS, OF EAST PORTLAND, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF, AND 
FREMONT O. DOWNING, OF PORTLAND, OREGON. 
MAGAZINE TACK-HAMMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 472,374, dated April 5, 1892. 
Application filed March 11, 1891, Serial No. 384,531 (No model.) 
d 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW T. LEWIS, of 
East Portland, in the county of Multnomah 
and State of Oregon, have invented a new and 
Improved Magazine Tack-Hammer, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
My invention relates to a magazine tack 
hammer, and has for its object to provide a 
hammer with a magazine capable of holding 
a number of tacks, and mechanism for feeding 
the tacks one by one to a striking-face of the 
hammer, and also to provide mechanism for 
releasing the tack the momentitis introduced 
into the surface in which it is to be driven. 
The invention consists in the novel construc 
tion and combination of the several parts, as 
will be hereinafter fully set forth, and pointed 
Out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal section 
through the hammer, the parts being in their 
normal position. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of 
the hammer, partly in section, illustrating a 
tack held in position to be driven. Fig. 3 is 
a bottom plan view of one striking-surface of 
the hammer-head. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the 
hammer, a portion of the cover being broken 
away, and likewise the flanges adapted to sup 
port the tacks in the magazine of the hammer. 
Fig. 5 is a transverse section on the line 5 5 
of Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is a similar section on the 
line 6 6 of Fig. 4. Figs. 7 and 8 are perspec 
tive detail views of the mechanism contained 
in the hammer-head and a portion of the mech 
anism for operating the same. Fig. 9 is a 
plan view of a portion of the magazine-rack. 
Fig. 10 is a partial vertical enlarged section 
of one end of the hammer-head. Fig. 11 is a 
front elevation of the part illustrated in Fig. 
10, and Fig. 12 is a perspective view of one of 
the guide-arms detached. 
A handle A has an attached head B, the 
hammer and its head being essentially T 
shaped. The handle A is provided with a verti 
5o callongitudinal slot 10, which extends through 
from the top to the lower face, and in the 
upper face of the slottled surface of the han 
dle a longitudinal channel 11 is formed at each 
side of the slot by recessing the upper outer 
side surface of the handle, and side plates at- 55 
tached to the handle are bent inward to form 
horizontal flanges 10, as best illustrated in 
Fig. 5. The heads of the tacks to be used are 
adapted to rest upon these flanges, and their 
body portions extend downward into the slot 6o 
10, this portion of the handle being construct 
ed to constitute a tack-magazine, as is best 
illustrated in Fig. 5. The slot 10 of the han 
dle and likewise the channels 11 are preferably 
covered by a cap-plate 12, forming a cover for 65 
the magazine and hinged at one end to the 
solid end of the handle, as shown in Fig. 1, 
which cap is usually provided at its upper 
end with downwardly-curved spaced spring 
extension-plates 12, as illustrated in Fig. 6. 7o 
The slot 10 virtually intersects alongitudinal 
chamber 13, produced in the head of the ham 
mer and extending from a point preferably 
near the center, through one end surface 
thereof, the remaining portion of the ham- 75 
mer-head being solid. 
By producing the channels 11 in the han 
dle two longitudinal shoulders 14 and 15 are 
formed, the shoulder 14 being of greater 
height than the shoulder 15, and upon the 8o 
upper faces of the shoulders racks 16 and 17 
are located, the opposed faces of the said racks 
being provided with a series of teeth a, alter 
nating with a series of recesses a'. As one 
shoulder is higher than the other, one rack ex- 85 
tends over the other, and the inner side sur 
faces of the racks are in engagement, as shown 
in Fig. 5. The rack 16, which is the lower one, 
is stationary-that is, it is incapable of move 
ment longitudinally of the handle. The rack 9o 
17, however, is capable of such movement, 
and this is brought about through a connec 
tion with a lever D, fulcrumed in the lower 
portion of the slot 10 near the solid section 
of the handle, as illustrated in Fig. 1, the con- 95 
nection being effected through the medium 
of an arm 18, curved upward from the lever, 
and a link 19. The lever from its fulcrum is 
carried downward, forming a handle-section 
d, to which the arm 18 is Secured, and the said too 
handle is normally pressed downward by a 
spring 20 bearing against the inner face 
25 
35 
45 
 
472,374 
75 
thereof, the said spring being attached to the 
solid portion of the handle. Both of the racks 
16 and 17 are curved downward at the end of 
the handle, the curved end of the movable 
rack being of spring metal, and the station 
ary rack 16 is of greater length than the mov 
able rack. Ordinarily the difference in length 
between the two racks is that of a tooth, as 
illustrated in Fig. 6. The racks 16 and 17 are 
located beneath the handle-fanges 10. 
In operation when the movable rack is re 
ciprocated at each forward movement thereof 
a tack will by engagement with one of its 
teeth be moved forward the distance of one 
notch in the stationary rack, as the tacks are 
placed, as hereinafter stated, with their heads 
resting upon the flanges 10", and the body por 
tions of the tacks extend downward through 
the recessed portions of the racks into the 
slot 10 of the handle. 
The side of the chamber 13 in the hammer 
head facing the handle is longitudinally slot 
ted, the slot extending the full length of the 
chamber, and within the chamber 13 a fol 
lower-lblock C is located, (illustrated in detail 
in Fig. 7,) which block consists of a back plate 
b and two parallel flanges b', located one at 
each side edge of the racks and extending 
forwardly at a right angle thereto, producing 
thereby a vertical channel U*. In each side 
flange at the top of the follower-block a ver 
tical slot b is produced, and near the lower 
end semicircular transverse slots bareformed, 
the upper slots to being in transverse align 
ment, and also the lower slots b. The lower 
ends of the side flanges lo' are enlarged and 
circular, the circle of the enlargement being 
a continuation of the radius upon which the 
slots bare formed, the enlarged portion of the 
follower commencing at the base-wall of the 
said slots. The circular lower portions l of 
the follower have circular depressions l' pro 
duced in their outer side faces, and in said 
depressed faces aligning vertical slots b, cen 
tral apertures U, and lower apertures b are 
formed. The forward edges of the flanges 
b' of the follower-block are concaved from 
the top down in direction of the semicircular 
slots b. 
The follower-block normally fits neatly into 
the chamber 13 of the hammer-head, which 
is essentially rectangular in cross-section, and 
the enlarged circular portions 
of the fol 
lower project outward through the slot in the 
side wall of the chainber. 
A pin 22 is passed diametrically through 
the chambered portion of the hammer-head, 
which pin when the follower is in its normal 
position within the chamber extends through 
the upper slot b of the follower almost in en 
gagement with the base-wall thereof, and the 
movement of the follower-block in the cham 
ber is limited by passing a pin 23 diametri 
cally through the lower portion of the cham 
bered surface of the hammer - head and 
through the elongated vertical slot U in the 
follower. 
The upper end of a guide-arm 24 is secured 
in the upper forward portion of the channel 
l) of the follower, the contour of the arm cor 
responding to the forward-edge contour of 
the follower, and the lower end of the guide 
arm is secured in the follower-channell' by 
passing a pin through the aperture U of the 
follower and a suitable aperture in the guide 
arm. Thus the guide-arm and the follower 
are rendered integral to all practical pur 
poses. The thickness of the guide-arm is 
preferably slightly less than the width of the 
channell'. A trip-arm 25 is also located in 
the follower-channel, and it practically con 
forms to the shape of the forward edge of the 
follower, the lower end of the arm being piv 
otally attached to the lower portion of the 
follower by passing a pintle through the ap 
ertures l of the latter. The upper end of 
the trip-bar is unattached and rests normally 
against the pin 22. The extreme upper edge 
of the trip-arm is forwardly bent, as illus 
trated at d' in Figs. 1 and 8, and the said arm 
is normally held in engagement with the pin 
22 by a spring 26, located at the upper in 
clined portion and having a bearing against 
the inner edge of the guide-arm. Below the 
spring the trip-arm is further provided with 
a knob or projection 27 upon its outer edge. 
Retaining-arms E are pivoted to the sides 
of the enlarged lower end of the follower. 
The arms consist of angular body portions 
28, which are pivoted upon the outer ends of 
the pintle pivoting the lower end of the trip 
arm 25, and the body-sections are so formed 
that the major portions thereof readily turn 
in the depressions b in the follower. One 
end of the body-sections of the retaining-arms 
is slotted to receive the ends of the pin 23, as 
shown best in Fig. 10, and the body portions 
of the retaining-arms at their opposite ends 
are curved upward and outward, so as to ex 
tend over the circular forward edges of the 
follower, as is best shown in Fig. 11, and to 
the inwardly-extending ends of the body-sec 
tions of the arms downwardly-curved mem 
bers 29 are secured or are made integral there 
with, the said members being concentric with 
the curved edge surfaces of the enlarged lower 
portions of the follower. 
The lever D from its pivotal point extends 
within the slot 10 of the handle almost to the 
outer end thereof, at which point the lever is 
bifurcated and shaped to form two upwardly. 
and outwardly extending members 30 and 31, 
one of which members is located at each side 
of the handle. The members at their upper 
ends are connected by a pin 32, and upon said 
pin two downwardly-extending parallel plates 
33 are secured, preferably of greater width at 
their bottoms than at their tops, the said 
plates being connected at the front and back 
of their bottom surfaces by transverse bars 
34. The connected plates virtually act in the 
capacity of a dog and will be hereinafter de 
Scribed. 
TWO Spring-arms 35 and 36 are located in 
95 
CO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
472,874 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
front of the side slot of the head-chamber 13 
and extend downward one on each side of 
the guide-arm 24, fixed to the follower. The 
spring-arms 35 and 36, however, do not pro 
ject downward as far as the bottom of the 
follower, and their upper ends are secured 
in any suitable or approved manner to the 
curved lower ends of the handle-flanges 10 
or are integral therewith. 
It is necessary that both of the racks 16 
and 17 should have a lateral movement and 
that when pressed upward from each other 
they should be returned to their normal posi 
tion at a given time, and in order to accom 
plish this result the racks are supported in 
spring-cushions, which consist of spring-bars 
37, secured to the walls of the channels 11 of 
the handle at one end, as best shown in Fig. 
4, the free ends of which spring-bars have 
clamps or sockets 38 formed thereon, which 
clamps or sockets embrace the side longitudi 
nal edges of the racks. 
In operation the cover 12 is lifted and 
tacks are placed between the opposed re 
cessed surfaces of the racks 16 and 17, so that 
their points will extend downward, as shown 
in Fig. 1, and their heads will rest upon the 
upper surface of the handle-flanges 10, as 
shown in Fig. 5. When tacks have been 
placed in all of the recessed surfaces, the 
cover 12 may be closed. By pressing down 
the handle-section d of the lever D the bifur 
cated end of the lever is drawn downward, 
and the forward edge of the dog carried by 
the bifurcated end of the lever will engage 
with the head of the last tack, as shown in Fig. 
1, and will press the said tack downward be 
tween the spring-arms 35 and 36 and the 
guide-arms 24, the shank of the tack being 
horizontally located beneath the handle, and 
as the dog is forced downward its opposite 
end engages with the knob 27 upon the trip 
arm and forces the said arm downward until 
its inclined surface d' is brought to an en 
gagement with the pin. 22, whereupon the 
trip-arm is enabled to drop backward out of 
the path of the dog and the dog may con 
tinue its downward movement. As the dog 
is carried farther downward it carries the 
tack with it, and the engagement of the dog 
with the trip-arm will force the follower ver 
tically downward the length of its slot b, 
as shown in Fig. 2, and as the follower moves 
downward by reason of the pin connection 
between the said follower and the retain 
ing-arms the arms are forced downward also 
to the position shown in dotted lines, Fig. 
10. In the meantime the dog engaging with 
the tack will have carried it downward be-, 
low the ends of the springs 35 and 36, and 
as the retaining-arms are forced downward 
the dog carries the tack downward with the 
arms, and when the tack has been forced to 
the extremity of the retaining-arms the pin 
32, to which the dog is attached, will engage 
with the body-surface of the retaining-arms 
and the further movement downward of the 
bifurcated end of the lever will be impossi 
ble. The lever D is then released before any 
stroke is made with the hammer and tack in 
position, and the spring 20 acts to restore the 
lever to its normal position, as in Fig.1. The 
dog is carried back and under the tack which 
has taken the same position the tack at the 
end of the follower had before the downward 
movement of the lever. The dog is enabled 
to sink back at this point when the follower 
is out, as in Fig. 2. When the follower is 
back in normal position, the dog is pressed 
forward by the trip-arm upon pin 22, and is 
in position for pressing tacks out, as before. 
The spring 26 presses the trip-armatits curved 
end against pin 22 and holds the follower 
firmly out, as in Fig. 2, and the spring 26 also 
acts to hold the follower in position, as in Fig. 
1. The tack, as in Fig. 2, is now held in posi 
tion to be driven into the floor, wall, or other 
surface, with the exception that the lever D 
is in position, as in Fig. 1. A hard stroke 
may be made, or a stroke sufficient to drive 
all parts back into position, as in Fig. 1, and 
the moment the tack is thus introduced the 
force of the blow restores the parts in the 
hammer-head to their normal position, thus 
freeing the tack-head from engagement with 
the follower and the retaining-arms. The 
hammer is then used for driving, as an ordi 
nary hammer. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A tack-hammer provided with a maga 
zine, tack-supports and tack-feed racks within 
the magazine, and a mechanism, substantially 
as described, for reciprocating one of the 
racks, as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a tack-hammer, the combination, with 
a handle provided with a magazine and a 
chambered head, of tack-receiving racks lo 
cated in the magazine, one of which is capa 
ble of longitudinal movement, both of the 
racks being curved downward to the chamber 
in the head, as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a tack-hammer, the combination, with 
a handle provided with a magazine and a 
head provided With a chamber communicat 
ing with a magazine, of tack-receiving racks 
located in the magazine and curved down 
Ward at one end in direction of the hammer 
head chamber, Spring-cushions located at the 
sides of the racks, and a lever connected with 
one of the racks, whereby the said rack is 
given a longitudinal movement, as and for 
the purpose specified. 
4. In a tack-hammer, the combination, with 
a handle provided with a magazine, a head 
having a chamber therein communicating 
With the magazine and a follower-block lo 
cated within the head-chamber and having a 
limited downward movement, a guide-arm at 
tached to one edge of the follower, and spring 
arms attached to the handle at each side of 
the guide-arm, of tack-receiving racks located 
within the magazine of the handle, both capa 
75 
95 
IOC 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I25 
472,874 
O 
ble of side movement and having their ends 
curved downward, one of said racks being 
provided with a spring-section at its curved 
end, springs bearing against the edges of the 
racks, and a lever connected with one of the 
racks and adapted to impart thereto end 
movement, as and for the purpose specified. 
5. In a tack-hammer, the combination, with 
a handle provided with a magazine, a head 
having a chamber therein communicating 
with the magazine, a follower-block located in 
the chamber of the head, having a limited 
downward movement, a guide-arm attached 
to the edge of the follower facing the handle, 
spring-arms projected downward from the 
handle in front of the guide-arm, and a trip 
arm having a pivotal connection with the fol 
lower at its lower end and located within the 
follower, of tack-receiving racks located in 
the magazine of the handle, both racks being 
capable of side movement and having one end 
curved downward and one capable of a lon 
gitudinal movement, one of said racks hav 
ing a spring-section at its curved end, Springs 
bearing against the sides of the racks, a 
spring-pressed lever, a connection between 
the lever and one of the racks, whereby the 
said rack is moved lengthwise, and a dog 
connected with the lever, adapted for engage 
ment with the trip-arm and also with the low 
ermost tack located in the rack, as and for 
the purpose specified. 
6. In a tack-hammer, the combination, with 
3O 
a handle provided with a magazine, a headl 
having a chamber therein communicating 35 
with the magazine, a follower-block located in 
the chamber of the head, having a limited 
downward movement, a guide-arm attached 
to the edge of the follower facing the handle, 
spring-arms projected downward from the 4o 
handle in front of the guide-arm, and a trip 
arm having a pivotal connection with the fol 
lower at its lower end and located within the 
follower, of tack-receiving racks located in 
the magazine of the handle, both racks being 45 
capable of side movement and having one 
end curved downward between the spring 
arms and the guide-arm of the follower, 
springs bearing against the sides of the racks, 
a spring-pressed lever, a connection between 5o 
the lever and one of the racks, whereby the 
said rack is moved lengthwise, a dog con 
nected with the lever, adapted for engage 
ment with the trip-arm and also with the low 
ermost tack located in the rack, and Spring 55 
retaining arms pivoted to the lower portion 
of the follower, the said arms being adapted 
upon the downward movement of the follower 
to extend beneath it a slight distance from 
its lower surface, as and for the purpose set 6o 
forth. 
ANDREW T. IEWIS. 
Witnesses: 
F. L. KEENAN, 
R. P. CHAMBERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472474.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 472,474. 
J. R. CUMMINGS. 
STEREOTYPE PLATE AND BASE. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1892. 
 
i? 49.7 
Z 2 
373 , 
 
 
75s 
'94. 
2 
% 
 
 
C 
2-64 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN, R. CUMMINGS, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE AMERICAN 
PRESS ASSOCIATION, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, 
STEREOTYPE PLATE AND BASE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 472,474, dated April 5, 1892. 
Application filed January 4, 1889, Serial No. 295,468, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN R. CUMMINGs, of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Stereotype Plates 
and Bases; of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon. 
My invention relates to that class of stereo 
type plates and bases which are extensively 
used by newspaper-publishers through the 
country in making up the form from which 
their respective papers are printed. The 
plates are only for temporary use; but the 
bases upon which said plates are mounted 
are for more permanent use. It is necessary, 
therefore, that the base be so constructed that 
it can easily lock the plate upon it when in 
the form and at the same time be light and 
strong; and it is also necessary that the 
plates be simple in construction and easy of 
manufacture. I accomplish all of these re 
Quirements by the plate and base hereinafter 
fully described, and illustrated in the draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a cross-section of my improved 
plate and base. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of a 
modification of the same, showing slightly 
different means for connecting the two parts 
of the base. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
plate, having on its upper surface the usual 
type formations and having longitudinal rab 
bets cut in its under surface next to its lon 
gitudinal side edges, the inner walls or shoul 
ders a. a. of which are inversely beveled, as 
shown. 
B represents the base, of a width corre 
sponding to the width of the plate less the 
width of a dog C, which is used in conjunc 
tion with said base, and of which more will be 
said hereinafter. The base has a plain upper 
surface and is provided with a ledge b along 
side and parallel with one side edge, the in 
ner wall of which is inversely beveled at an 
angle corresponding to that of wall a of the 
plate. The height of the ledge b is preferably 
a little less than the depth of the rabbets of 
5o the plate, and the width of its upper surface 
35 
45 
55 
75 
corresponds to the distance from the side edge 
of the plate to the vertex of the inner angle of 
the inversely-beveled walls a of said rabbets. 
The dog C below the plane of the upper sur 
face of the plate A is of a width correspond 
ing to the difference between the width of 
base Band plate A, or, which is the same thing, 
to the distance between the vertical plane of 
the vertex of the outer angle of the inversely 
beveled Wall C, and the adjacent side edge of 
the plate. Above the plane of the upper sur 
face of the base the top of said dog is provided 
with an offset on that side next to the adja 
cent side edge of base B, the inner side of 
which is inversely beveled from the upper sur 
face of the dog to the side thereof intersected 
by the horizontal plane of the upper surface 
of Said base at an angle corresponding to the 
inverse angle of wall a, which it opposes, form. 
ing, as it Were, a beak c, 
The operation of the plate and base as thus 
described is as follows: The plate A is placed 
upon the base so that its under surface rests 
on the upper surface of the base, and it is then 
moved laterally, so that the inversely-beveled 
wall a nearest thereto will bear against and 
interlock with the inversely-beveled inner side 
of the ledge b by the base. The dog C, which 
is of a length corresponding to that of the 
base, is then placed flat against that side of 
the base farthest from ledge b, so that the 
beak c thereof opposes and interlocks with 
the inversely-beveled Walla of the plate ad 
jacent thereto. The plate and base are then 
locked in a form, which effectually prevents 
the release of the plate while in the printing 
preSS. 
The dog C can be used as hereinbefore de 
scribed but I prefer to have it connected to 
the base in such way that its upper end can 
oscillate outward from the base, so as to per 
mit the plate to be placed on the same. This 
I accomplish by means of a flexible metallic 
strip or feather D, which is set in a longitudi 
nal groove cut downward into the side of 
the base contiguous to said dog at an angle 
of about forty-five degrees, so that about one 
half its width projects therefrom. This pro 
jecting part of the feather enters a suitable 
groove made in register therewith in the in 
95 
IOO 
2 
472,474 
35 
45 
ner surface of said dog C. When it is de 
sired to oscillate said dog, as hereinbefore al 
luded to, it is lifted in a laterally-upward di 
rection away from the base and then oscil 
lated so as to bend the flexible feather D. 
This lifting may be done by the raising of 
the plate A in a direction necessary to lifting 
the dog, as specified, or by hand. In either 
event the result is the same. 
strip d to the under surface of said dog and 
the contiguous leg of the base B. This mode 
of connecting is not as desirable as that 
shown in Fig. 1, because of the difficulty of 
so securing it that it would not raise that side 
of the stereotyped matter under which it is 
placed. 
against the opposite side of said base, hav 
ing a beak c, as described, the under Surface 
of which is beveled at an angle correspond 
ing to the bevel of the inner wall of the rab 
bet in the plate which it opposes, and a flexi 
ble strip for connecting said dog to said base, 
as set forth. 
2. Astereotype-plate having corresponding 
longitudinal rabbets in its under Surface ad 
In Fig. 2 I secure a flexible sheet-metal jacent and parallel to its longitudinal side 
edges, the inner walls of which are inversely 
beveled, in combination with a base having 
a longitudinal ledge alongside one side edge 
thereof, the inner side of which is inversely 
beveled, a dog having a beak c, as described, 
and a sheet-metal strip or flexible strip for 
connecting said dog to said base and seated 
in corresponding angular grooves in longi 
tudinal and transverse register with each 
other in the meeting surfaces of said dog and 
base, respectively, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
What I claim as new is 
1. A stereotype-plate having corresponding 
longitudinal rabbets in its under surface ad 
jacent and parallel to its longitudinal side 
edges and the inner walls of which are in 
versely beveled, in combination with a base 
having a longitudinal ledge alongside one 
side thereof, the inner side of which is in 
versely beveled, a dog placed longitudinally 
Witnesses: 
FRANK D. THOMASON, 
LOUIS S. THOMASON. 
JOHN R. CUMMINGS. 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472574.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 472,574, 
 
L. S. GARDNER 
RAILWAY SURFACE STOCK GUARD. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 12, 1892, 
L. S. GARDNER 
RAILWAY SURFACE STOCK GUARD. 
Patented Apr. 12, 1892. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
(No Model.) 
No. 472,574, 
 
The Norris PETES Co., Photo-LTHo, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
--- 
LE VI S. GARD NER, OF DETROIT, MICH IGAN. 
RAILWAY SURFACE STOCK-GUARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 472,574, dated April 12, 1892. 
Application filed July 2, 1891, Serial No. 398,213, (No model.) 
d 
To all whom i Invally concern. 
Be it known that I, LEVI S. GARDNER, of 
Detroit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Railway Surface Stock-Guards, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to railroad surface 
stock-guards; and it consists in the improve 
ments hereinafter described and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a stock-guard 
embodying my invention with the ends cut 
away to show its construction more distinctly. 
Fig. 2 is a bottom plan view of one of the sec 
tions of which said stock-guard is composed. 
Fig. 3 is a detail view in elevation showing 
the method of Securing the guard to the rail. 
Fig. 4 is an end elevation of one of the sec 
tions, showing a modified form of construction. 
Fig. 5 is a detail view showing the construc 
tion of the device when corrugated sheet 
metal is used. Fig. 6 is an isometric view 
illustrating the method of forming and secur 
ing the ends. Fig. 7 is a section on the line 
ac ac, Fig. 6; and Fig. 8 is a detail view illus 
trating an alternative method of securing the 
parts together. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
A B is a strip of sheet metal about nine feet 
long, bent so that its cross-section has the 
general form of the letter L. The flange A, 
forming the longer leg of the letter 
in 
cross-section, and the flange B, forming the 
shorter leg, extend at right angles to each 
other, and a flange b is turned up at the end 
of the flange B to extend in a direction par 
allel to the flange A. The flanges A B are 
united by a portion C, extending in a direc 
tion which forms an angle of about thirty 
degrees with the flange A and about sixty 
degrees with the flange B. To form the guard 
a number of these strips are united togeth 
er, their lengths extending in parallel direc 
tions. The flange A of one strip is placed 
upon the flange b of the next strip, so as to 
overlap and extend a short distance beyond 
the flange b, and is riveted in this position 
either by rivets in the ordinary way or by 
striking lugs out of one flange, extending them 
through holes in the other flange, and clinch 
ing them, as shown in Fig. 8, 
When it is desired to form the portion of 
the guard which lies between the rails FF of 
one piece, the middle strip C is formed so that 
in cross-section it has the form of two letters 
L., the longer legs of which are united at their 
ends, so as to extend in directions which form 
an angle of about one hundred and twenty 
degrees with each other, as shown in Fig. i. 
I prefer, however, for convenience in hand 
ling, to form the guard in seetions having a 
width equal to about one-half the distance be 
tween the rails, so that the entire space to be 
guarded will be occupied by one section placed 
upon each side of the track and two sections 
between the rails. When thus constructed 
in sections, that one of the sheet-metal strips 
of Which the guard is composed, which is at 
that side of the section at which the flange A 
comes upon the outside, has said flange ex 
tended and bent downward into a vertical po 
sition, as shown in Fig. 1, in the sections out 
side the rails. That side of the sections at 
which the flange B comes at the outside should 
be placed next to the rails. 
D is a metal rod passing under the strips A 
B C, b, of which the guard is composed, turned 
up at the ends, and bolted to the outside 
flanges of the guard and riveted between the 
ends to the portions a of said strips. 
II are metal rods similar to the metal rods 
D and similarly fastened, except that the 
ends which come toward the rails when the 
guard is in position are not bent up or bolted 
to the guard. Holes are formed through the 
portions C of the strips of which the guard is 
composed to allow rainwater to escape. 
In order that brake-chains, hooks, or other 
things depending from a passing train ma 
not catch upon the guard, the ends of the 
strips A B C, b are turned down, as shown in 
Fig. 6, so as to present a surface sloping in 
the direction of the length of said strips, 
The corner of the flange B is turned down 
along the line h i. The corner of the adja 
cent flange A is then turned down along the 
line i k upon the turned-down corner of the 
flange B and riveted thereto. 
The ends of the sections of the guard may 
be secured in place by driving spikes MM 
through the portions a of the strips A Bab 
into the ties. 
I secure the sections of the guard to the 
3O 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
y 90 
95 
OO 
2 
472,574. 
from a passing train and that shall permit the 
draft caused by a passing train to sweep out 
leaves or other matter which would otherwise 
accumulate between the ridges and render 
the guard useless. 
A surface stock-guard constructed as above 
described has the above-named advantages. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A railway surface stock-guard consist 
ing of sheet metal bent into ridges So that the 
upper corner of one ridge shall overhang the 
lower part of the adjacent side of the next 
ridge and having the general shape in cross 
section shown and the rods securing the lower 
portions of said ridges together, substantially 
as shown and (lescribed. 
2. A railway surface stock-guard consist 
ing of a number of strips of sheet metal AIB 
C. l bent so that their cross-section has the 
general form shown, a flange A of one of Said 
strips being secured to a flange B of the ad 
jacent strip, and a rod uniting the ridges thus 
formed, substantially as shown and described. 
3. A railway surface stock-guard consist 
ing of a number of strips of sheet metal A 3 
at t bent so that their cross-section shall have 
the general form shown, a flange A of one of 
said strips being secured to a flange IB of the 
adjacent strip so that the edge of one of said 
flanges shall extend beyond the edge of the 
other of said strips, and a rod passing beneath 
and uniting the lower portions of the ridges 
thus formed, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
IEWI S. GARDNEIR. 
Witnesses: 
ALONZO EATON, 
ELLIOTT. J. STODDARD. 
45 
5: 
75 
S 
O 
I 5 
25 
35 
rails by placing the unsecured ends of the 
metal rods II above the lower flanges of the 
rails and uniting the end of a rod Hupon the 
outside section of the guard, with the end of 
the corresponding rod upon the inside sec 
tion, by a rod N, which passes under the rail 
and is riveted to each of said rods II H, as 
shown in Fig. 3. 
In localities where the stock-guard will be 
subjected to very hard usage I form my im 
proved guard of corrugated sheet metal. In 
this case the strips AB at b will have the same 
general form as that above described, but will 
be bent into curved lines, as shown in Fig. 4, 
So that its cross-section will have rather the 
form of a letter J than of a letter L, and the 
flange B will extend beyond the flange A of 
the adjacent strip. When corrugated metal 
is used, the upper surface of the rods D II 
will be curved in cross-section to fit into the 
corrugations of the strips, as shown in Fig. 5. 
The operation of the above-described device 
is as follows: Should an animal attempt to cross 
the guard it would place its hoof upon the in 
clined flange A and the inclination of the 
flange would cause the animal's hoof to slide 
downward, thus bringing its leg forcibly 
against the narrow projecting edge of the ad 
jacent flange A, or, where the form shown in 
Fig. 4 is used, against the edge of the flange 
IB, thus causing the animal to draw back. 
I am aWare that surface Stock-guards have 
been proposed in which inclined surfaces have 
been employed, and I therefore do not claim 
such construction broadly; but I am not aware 
that a structure has hitherto been devised 
which may be made of sheet metal and yet 
form a light, rigid, and durable apparatus 
that shall present no obstruction that may be 
caught by a chain or other thing depending 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472674.txt	(No Model.) 
M. G., LEWIS. 
BENCH WISE, 
No. 472,674. 
Patented Apr. 12, 1892. 
 
   
 
  
y N 
st 3 
N Z 
Y 
EEE 
r 
s 
s 
East a 
e2/ 
EIHT. III 
 
Z 
(D-7 
2. 
\ N. 
 N 
Av 
yZ 
 
2 
 
 
 
E, 
Gaza 22 
- INVENTOR 
ATORNEY 
TERS Co., PHOTO-Litho, wASHINGToN. D. 
sissile 
2. 
i. 
y 
. 
WITNESS - 
st 26 (94-A 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MORTIMER. G. LEWIS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BEN CH - VSE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 472,674, dated April 12, 1892. 
Application filed December 15, 1891, Serial No. 415,151 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, MORTIMER. G. LEWIS, of 
New York city, county and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Bench-Vises, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon. 
My invention relates to bench-vises, and 
has for its principal object the provision of a 
simple, cheap, and efficient form of slide-bar 
which will, with a lighter weight of metal, be 
stronger in both a horizontal and a vertical 
direction than the ordinary forms of slide-bars 
for vises, which will afford complete protec 
tion for the screw against the falling thereon 
of clippings or filings, &c., and against any 
accumulation of such matters beneath the 
screw, and which will be cheap and easy to 
apply, requiring less cutting and fitting than 
ordinary forms. 
A subordinate object is the provision and 
application of a peculiar form of nut which 
may be removed and replaced when worn, 
and which will possess ample bearing in its 
seat, while it permits a close approach of the 
two sections of the slide-bar to the top and 
bottom of the screw without weakening the 
Structure. 
To accomplish these objects and to secure 
other and further advantages in the matters 
of construction, operation, and use, my im 
provements involve certain new and useful 
arrangements or combinations of parts and 
peculiar features of invention, all of which 
will be herein first fully described, and then 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view partly 
in section and partly in elevation, showing a 
bench-vise constructed with my improved 
form of slide-bar and indicating the general 
manner of mounting and holding the same. 
Fig. 2 represents in end elevation the relative 
position of the top and bottom sections of the 
slide-bar and their disposition with respect 
to the operating-screw. Fig. 3 is a rear ele 
Vation of the back jaw of a wise prepared not 
only to receive my improved slide-bar, but 
also a peculiar form of nut which maybe (but 
is not necessarily) used with said bar. Fig. 
4 is a sectional elevation of the back jaw of 
'- 
a wise with my improved form of nut mounted 
therein. Fig. 5 is a detail view showing the 
nut in plan and the ends thereof in elevation. 
Like letters of reference wherever they oc 
cur indicate corresponding parts in all the 
figures. 
A is the front jaw or head of the wise, which 
is movable toward or from the rear jaw B or 
stationary part. 
C is the operating-screw by which the move 
ments and the necessary clamping of the work 
are effected. 
The slide-bar upon which the head is sus 
tained is, according to my invention, made in 
two independent parts D and E, both said 
parts being of substantially-rectangular sec 
tion, of thickness less than the diameter of 
the screw, and of width considerably greater 
than that diameter. These parts are prefer 
ably made of rolled metal, as steel or iron, 
which can be obtained at a low price and 
which is abundantly accurate of finish. One 
of these parts D is located above the screw, 
its flat face being turned toward the screw, 
and the other E at right angles to the first 
and its edge toward the screw. The two thus 
located form a T, the width of the upper 
member being opposed to any horizontal 
strain which may be brought upon the Vise 
jaws and the other member opposed to all 
vertical strains. In either direction each 
member is reinforced or aided in resisting 
any strain by the thickness of the other mem 
ber. The upper part is wide enough to ef 
fectually protect the screw against accident 
by Workfalling upon it and against clippings 
and filings dropping upon it, and the lower 
part having only its edge turned toward the 
screw will permit matters or substances which 
may be projected upon it to fall down and 
out of the way before they can reach the 
screw, and thus the screw is as well pro 
tected as in the common forms of bars. The 
two sections of the bar are secured in the 
head by casting the latter upon them, they 
being provided with indentations or notches, 
as a d, so that the cast metal will unite With 
them very firmly. Of course they might be 
secured in the head in any other way. The 
rear or stationary portion of the vise is chan 
neled, as at FG, to receive the sections of 
the bar and permit them to move freely. 
IO 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
5.o. 
55 
Go 
75 
95 
OO 
 
w 
2 
472,6 4. 
35 
45 
nut is preferably made of malleable metal, 
and it may be easily driven back and Out 
when worn and another put in its place. 
The improvements as thus described will 
be found to answer all the purposes or objects 
of the invention previously set forth. 
IIaving now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new herein, and desire to Se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a bench-vise, the combination, with 
the wise-heads and the operating-Screw, of the 
slide-bar composed of two flat metal Sections, 
one located above with its flat face turned 
toward the screw and extending beyond the 
Salme and the other arranged at right angles 
with the first below the screw, presenting its 
edge to the screw, substantially as and for 
the purposes explained. 
2. In a bench - wise, the combination, with 
the stationary part or head recessed as ex 
plaimed, of the nut for the operating-screw, 
said nut being composed of the barrel and 
side fins inclined as explained, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand in the presence of 
two witnesses. 
MORTIMER. G. LEWIS. 
55 
Witnesses: 
W. J. MIORGAN, 
WORTH OSGOOD. 
The improved bar being of wrought metal is 
lore elastic than one of cast metal, and there 
fore not so liable to breakage, and being ?in 
ished when applied does not require plan 
ing Ol' dressing, as do the cast-metal bars. 
The forcible clamping of any work brings a 
Vertical Strain upon the bar, and if the work 
be placed at one side of the jaws then a hori 
ZOntal Strain is produced, which should be 
Withstood with equal rigidity as the first. The 
improved construction of bar is well calcu 
lated for this effect. The screw located bo 
tWeen the two sections may enter any form 
of nut, as at II, Fig. 1. A peculiar form of 
lut advantageous for use with this particu 
lar bar (though not of necessity to be used 
With it) is shown in Fig. 5, wherein H is the 
barrel of the nut made as light as practicable, 
So as to Occupy but little space between the 
Sections of the bar. Upon the sides of this 
nut are pins I I, which contribute to the nut 
all the strength that is required. They are 
slightly inclined, as indicated. The back jaw 
is recessed, as at IS, and into this recess from 
the back the nut is introduced. It may be 
driven in, if desired. It brings up at the front 
against a shoulder in the body of the wise. 
The inclined fins effectually prevent the nut 
from being drawn forward by the operating 
screw, and the nut is thus made abundantly 
Secure, While it does not occupy an undue 
space between the sections of the lar. The 
O 
2 C. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472774.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
 
 
 
H 
I 
 
 
 
  
   
G, J, TORRANCE, 
BALLING MACHINE, 
. 
Patented Apr. 12, 1892, 
N 
s: 
fi 
A.97 SIS 
Rs7 SCAN 
SYNA 
1Y 
s: St. EAN-E. 
& Ne/ASH: 
PSS 2. 
6 it: 
I 
t 
S. 
 
  
70 
 
-- & H 
it 
it 
 
 
 
 
an 
 
EH 
ta 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE JAMES TORRANCE, OF HARRISON, NEW JERSEY. 
BANG a MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 472,774, dated April 12, 1892. 
Application filed December 5, 1890, Serial No, 373,697, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
RANCE, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Harrison, in the county of Hudson and 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Balling-Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
Companying drawings, and to letters and fig 
tures of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in that class of balling-machines illus 
trated in my prior patents, No.370,574, of Sep 
tember 27, 1887, and No. 430,900, of June 24, 
1890, the objects of which improvements are 
to reduce the noise of the machine when the 
same is in operation; to secure an easier move 
ment, and thus reduce the wear on the ma 
chine, and to secure other advantages and re 
sults, some of which will be hereinafter set 
forth in connection with the description of 
the Working parts. 
The invention consists in the improved ball 
ing or spooling machine and in the arrange 
ments and combinations of parts thereof, sub 
stantially as will be hereinafter set forth, and 
finally embodied in the clauses of the claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
in which like letters and numerals indicate 
corresponding parts in each of the figures, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the improved 
machine, and Fig. 2 is a detail more fully 
showing the construction of a certain cam. 
In said drawings, Cl, indicates the frame of 
the machine, of which a' is one of the side 
plates, bis the drum, and c the flanges. (Shown 
in dotted outline.) d indicates the spindle, 
adapted to be operated to move longitudi 
nally to allow the spools to be forced, when 
full, from between the flanges. All said parts 
and their co-operating mechanisms for driv 
ing them have been fully shown and described 
heretofore, and further description is deemed 
to be unnecessary. 
To reduce the noise of working the machine 
and at the same time Secure greater durability, 
I have arranged in connection with the recip 
rocating breakera spring-controlled cush 
Be it known that I, GEORGE JAMES TOR- ion adapted to break the force of the blow of 
said breaker in its return movement after Sev 
ering the sliver in the ordinary manner. Here 
tofore the force of the return movement has 
been broken by a rubber or leather cushion. 
In practice this has been found to be objec 
tionable to some extent because of the effect 
of oil thereon and because of its lack, after 
considerable use, in ability to cushion the 
blow and prevent objectionable jarring. 
To secure a more efficient cushion for the 
breaker is the especial object of the invention. 
On the driving-shaft e, which carries and 
gives motion to the drum b, is arranged the 
ordinary camf, (shown in detail in Fig. 2.) 
which said cam operates the leverg to give 
lateral or longitudinal movement to the spin 
dled to withdraw the same from engagment 
with the spool. Said cam, however, differs 
from those heretofore commonly employed in 
that one of the parts thereof is provided with 
peripheral gear-teeth or cogs h, which mesh 
with and impart rotary motion to a gear-wheel 
i, arranged on a stud or shafti, having its bear 
ings on one of the side plates of the machine 
frame. On the opposite or inner side of said 
frame-plate on said shaft is a sprocket-wheel 
he, and to co-operate therewith is a chain-belt 
land sprocket-wheel m, arranged above the 
body of the machine on a shaft n, carried by 
a bracket in', the said belt connecting the two 
said sprocket-wheels, so that rotary move 
ment is imparted to the upper one. The belt 
is guided in its course by guide wheels or roll 
ers n, which hold the said chain from the 
spool. The bat or pusher is fixed to the shaft 
in, and is thus given a rotary movement in the 
direction indicated by the arrow, and thus is 
enabled to force the filled spool from between 
the flanges. By this construction at the mo 
ment when the spool is completely filled with 
sliver and the ordinary ratchet-and-pawl 
mechanisms of the cam are brought into play 
to start the said cam and operate the leverg 
and spindled the cog-wheeled portion of the 
cam is revolved, together with the wheels i, k, 
and m, and the bat is turned by an easy and 
comparatively slow movement, the return of 
the bat to its initial position not being be 
tween the flanges and across the line of the 
75 
95 
Ocd 
O 
20 
25 
35 
40 
45 
472,774 
- 
necting the other end of the cushioning-lever 
to the frame. 
2. In a spooling or balling machine, the 
combination, with the breaker-lever and the 
sliver-spooling apparatus, of a cushioning-le 
ver arranged to receive and cushion the re 
turn movement of said breaker-lever, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a spooling or balling machine, the 
combination, with mechanism for spooling 
the sliver and a breaking-lever, of a cushion 
ing-lever having the inclined surface 9, a stop 
projection 11, and a spring bearing against 
said lever, whereby the latter is held into fric 
tional contact with the breaking-lever, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In a spooling machine, the combination, 
with the spooling mechanisms and a break 
ing-lever, of a cushioning-lever having the 
inclined surface to receive the break-lever, a 
lug 12 to limit the movement of the cushion 
ing-lever, a stop projection to limit the move 
ment of the break-lever, and a spring bear 
ing against said cushioning-lever, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 24th day of 
November, 1890. 
35 
5 5 
GEORGE JAMES TORRANCE. 
Witnesses: 
OSCAR A. MICHEL, 
R. E. POWELL. 
spindle. The bato is provided with a weight 
p to counterbalance the same. 
The mechanisms employed for cushioning 
the return of the breaker are shown in out 
line With sufficient clearness to illustrate the 
Construction. The breaker-lever 6 is extend 
ed, as at 7, to engage a pivoted lever 8, ar 
ranged on the side plate of the machine. The 
engaging-surface 9 of the pivoted lever is in 
clined, so that the extension 7 engages the 
same by a sheering movement and is retarded 
by a frictional contact, as will be understood. 
This causes the pivoted lever to turn on its 
Center against the power exerted by a spring 
10. The friction thus induced retards the 
movement of the breaker-lever, so that when 
it finally engages the stop projection 11 of the 
pivoted lever it does so with little or no noise. 
The movement of the breaker-lever is limited 
by a stop-lug 12 at the forward end of the 
cushioning-lever, which lies in the opening 13 
of the side plate and at the proper limit of 
movement engages said side plate. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. In a spooling or balling machine, the 
combination, with the sliver-spooling appa 
ratus and the breaker-lever, of a pivoted cush 
ioning-lever secured to the frame below the 
breaker-lever, one arm of said cushioning-le 
ver being in a position to be engaged by the 
lower end of said breaker-lever to cause a 
gradual stopping thereof, and a spring con 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472874.txt	(No Model.) 
H. J. GRISWOLD. 
DEVICE FOR TRANSFERRING KNITTED FABRICS, 
No. 472,874. 
Patented Apr. 12, 1892. 
 
iii. 
I I 
  
a 
Ii 
 
 
 
 
 
Fry) a 
al f af 
s 
s 
at PH N 
3N 
3N 
% 
% 
SE, 
S 
% 
3. 
 
 
  
2Zilli Illi); 
WITWESSES 
y 
Iyrextor 
: Attorneys 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY J. G. R. Is WOLD, OF MAD IS ON, CONNECTICUT, 
DEVICE FOR TRANSFERRING KNITTED FABRICS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 472,874, dated April 12, 1892. 
Application filed July 15, 1890. Serial No. 358,793, (No model.) Patented in England April 5, 1886, No. 4,712, 
55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY J. GRISWOLD, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Madi 
son, Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and usefullmprovements int)evices for Trans 
ferring Knitted Fabrics, (for which a patent 
was granted in Great Britain, No. 4,712, dated 
April 5, 1886,) of which the following is a 
specification. 
For the purpose of transferring the ribbed 
tops or cuffs of articles of wearing-apparel to 
the needles of the circular-knitting machines 
by which the web constituting the bodies of 
the articles is formed it has been common 
heretofore to make use of a transferring de 
vice consisting of a short hollow cylinder pro 
vided with a series of parallel quills at one 
end adapted to be placed upon the needles of 
the machine in such manner. that each quill 
COWers the hook of one of the needles, so that 
the loops may be all run simultaneously from 
all the quills onto the needles covered there 
by. In the device thus constructed the quills 
are all fixed in relation to each other, and in 
using the same it is necessary to elevate all 
of the needles to the same extent, so that all 
of the loops may be simultaneously trans 
ferred from the device to the needles. This 
elevation of all of the needles to the same ex 
tent necessitates a peculiar and complicated 
construction of the machine. 
In order to avoid the necessity of using a 
machine of special construction or of altering 
the same or the use of special attachments, 
and in order to transfer ribbed or other knitted 
work to machines of ordinary construction, I 
make use of the transferring device herein 
after described and illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved 
transferring device, showing the same in posi 
tion above the circular portion of a knitting 
machine. Fig. 2 is a plan of the transfer de 
vice. Fig. 3 is a central sectional view, half 
of the transferrer having been removed and 
its Stitches transferred to the machine-nee 
dles. Fig. 4 is a plan of the transferrer as ap 
plied to a dial knitting-machine or one in 
which the needle-bed is a flat ring with the 
grooves cut radially in its top; and Fig. 5 is 
a central vertical sectional view of the Salme, 
one-half of the transferrer having been re 
moved. 
As my device is intended to be used with 
circular-knitting machines constructed in the 
usual manner and provided with the usual or 
any suitable arrangement of cams for throw 
ing the needles up and down in succession, it 
is not necessary to illustrate said machines 
other than to show the arrangement of nee 
dles therein in order that the manner of ap 
plying the improved transferrer thereto may 
be understood. 
The said device consists of two or more seg 
mental blocks or sections a, adapted to be held 
or clamped together side by side, which sec 
tions together form a cylinder and support a 
series of quills b, equal in number to the num 
ber of needles in the machine to which the 
work is to be transferred. The quills b are 
constructed in the ordinary manner to receive 
and hold the loops of the knit work and to re 
ceive the hook end of the needles onto which 
the loops are to be transferred, and any suit 
able means may be employed for connecting 
the sections together, so that the quills there 
of will be parallel to each other with their 
points upon the same plane. Thus, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2, which illustrate the device 
for use in connection with a circular-knitting 
machine, the sections a are segments which 
together constitute a hollow cylinder, and 
these segments are temporarily held together 
by two rings e. 
The process by which a ribbed top or cuff 
is transferred to the knitter is as follows: The 
parts of the transfer device having been 
clamped together, the ribbed top already knit 
ted upon another machine is placed upon the 
quills of the transferring device in the usual 
manner. All of the needles of the knitting 
machine being brought to a position in one 
plane, except those which are depressed be 
low the top of the cylinder by the usual cams, 
the transferrer with the work thereon is 
brought above the needles of the machine in 
the position shown in Fig. 1, and is then 
moved downward until the hook of each nee 
dle above the top of the cylinder orinside the 
ring of the dial is covered by a quill, the nee 
75 
90 
95 
Cup 
IC 
20 
35 
45 
472,874 
struction and arrangement of parts shown, I 
dles which have been withdrawn all occupy 
ing a position within the limits of one of the 
claim 
1. A transferring device for use in connec 
Sections or segments. The loops of the work 
tion with knitting-machines, consisting of a 
are then pushed from the transferrer onto 
series of separable segmental blocks or sec 
those needles which are actually covered by 
tions carrying a series of parallel quills and 
the quills, and the clamping-ring is removed, 
means for clamping the same detachably to 
and the sections from which the work has 
gether, substantially as set forth. 
been transferred are also removed, while the 
2. The combination, in a transferring de 
Section above the withdrawn needles is re 
vice for knitting-machines, of a series of Seg 
tained in place, still holding a portion of the 
ments a, constituting a hollow cylinder, and 
loops of Work upon the quills. The operating 
carrying a series of quills and means for 
cams of the knitting-machine are then moved 
clamping the segments together, substantially. 
to project the needles, which were withdrawn 
into position again, so that they may all be 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
covered by the quills of the remaining sec 
tion of the transfer device and the remaining name to this specification in the presence of 
loops of the work transferred to these needles. two subscribing witnesses. 
The remaining segment is then removed, leav 
ing the ribbed top or cuff transferred to the 
needles of the machine in position to be knit 
ted to the plain web thereafter formed. 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
MARY FIELD MUNSON, 
HENRY B. WILCOX. . 
HENRY J. GRISWOLD. 
25 
35 
I5 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US472974.txt	(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
T. E., AWERY, 
MACHINE FOR CURLING HAT BRIMs. 
No. 472,974, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892. 
ARN 
i 
E2. 
s. l 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
N Y S. 
N 
S 
 
' 
S SL 
ITIS 
his I. Sg 
S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
:-- 
Engi i 
 
 
 
  
 
 
E 
i. 
E 
PSPP s 
s 
Sl 
E E. 
EEEI 
Up Je? s 
E 2 a. SEF 
ra 
VN 
EEE E 
SF 
 
E 
Eric 
E. 
5 
 
N 
ill 
TIASIISE 
$3. S 
EA 
Impulming ty 
s s S S S N is 
s Yi 
E. 
t 
Sy 
sy 
, 
 
WITWESSES 
i 
IWVEWTOR 
 
(No Model.) 
T. E., AWERY. 
MACHINE FOR, CURLING HAT BRIMS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 472,974, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892, 
OO 
  
E 
WITWESSES 
6%ama- 
IWWEWTOR 
3. &ze 
(No Model.) 
T. E. AVERY. 
MACHINE FOR, CURLING HAT BRIMS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 472,974, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
NEH Vy 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
%22%-e-, 
5-y 
(No Model.) 
No. 472,974. 
T. E. AVERY. 
MACHINE FOR OURLING HAT BRIMS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
3.n 
 
  
Aviv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
I) 
 
 
3. 
SAU 
 
 
S. 
%  g uu 
E% y 
S25.7% 
Af S. % 3. 
N S N 
N. 
5S2N 
SYS, 
2 
A. 
N2 
SS 
1. 
sa. 
 
 
 
 
 
7 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
T. E., AWERY. 
MACHINE FOR, CURLING HAT BRIMS. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 472,974, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
 
O 
2ETA 
S 
 
 
s 
s N 
W %KS 
SE 
REE|SKNII 
""SILS". NN's 
o IS 
REL22, 
site 
S 
th N S 
N 
m 
 
 
 
 
SS 
 
 
 
6d 
S. 
S. 
N 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 472,974, 
T. E. AVERY. 
MACHINE FOR, CURLING BAT BRIMS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
WITWESSES 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892, 
||||||||||T 
(TIIII|||||' 
.<?< 
22,, !|- 
 6.) 
?: # 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
e 
THOMAS E. AVERY, OF DAN BURY, CONNECTICUT. 
MACHINE FOR CURLING HAT BRMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 472,974, dated April 19, 1892. 
Application filed August 21, 1891, Serial No. 403,290, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS E. AVERY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Dan 
bury, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Hat - Curling Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention has for its object to produce 
a machine requiring the attendance of but a 
single operator, which will readily and uni 
formly curl the brims of all sizes and styles 
of hats, the special purpose in view being to 
produce a machine that will curl hats of nor 
mal shape-i. e., hats having the shape of an 
egg oval in cross-section. Heretofore, so far 
as I am aware, no curling-machine has been 
produced that could curl a hat in which the 
oval was not alike at both ends. It is of 
course well understood that the shape of the 
average human head in horizontal section is 
a more or less elongated egg oval, the longer 
transverse diameter being at the back, and 
that hats to be salable must be formed to this 
general shape. It has been necessary, there 
fore, with all machine-curled hats to help the 
hat back to its original shape by hand or a 
setting-machine after the operation of curl 
ing has been performed. This plan is seri 
ously objectionable, however, as the hats will 
not retain the egg-oval shape, but tend to as 
sume the form of a true Oval, which was the 
shape to which they were curled by the ma 
chine. Mypresent machinetakesa hatblocked 
to the shape of an egg oval and curls it in 
that shape, so that the hat must under all cir 
cumstances retain its egg-oval shape in hori 
Zontal section. I am enabled to accomplish 
this result owing to the fact that each side of 
the machine is independent of the other side. 
This construction permits the forming and 
curling rollers to follow one shape at one end 
of the oval and any other shape at the other 
end. I also provide adjustments for varying 
the shape of the oval without departing from 
the egg-oval principle and for changing the 
various ovals to slight or extreme egg ovals, 
which are so simple as to require but a mo 
ment's time and to be within the skill of any 
ordinary workman. 
My invention is also equally applicable to 
the curling of any of the irregular forms com 
mon in ladies felt hats. 
With these ends in view have devised the 
novel machine of which the following descrip 
tion, in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, is a specification, numerals and let 
ters being used to designate the several parts. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation; Fig. 2, a plan 
view; Fig. 3, a side elevation as seen from the 
right in Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a vertical central sec 
tion looking toward the left in Fig. 1; Fig. 5, 
an enlarged sectional view on a plane at right. 
angles to the plane of Fig. 4; Fig. 6, an en 
larged inverted plan view of the double com 
pound calm, the position corresponding with 
Fig. 3; Fig. 7, an enlarged sectional view sub 
stantially on the line denoted by y y in Fig. 
2, looking toward the left; Fig. 8, an enlarged 
sectional view on the line denoted by 2 in 
Fig. 2, looking toward the front; Fig. 9, an 
enlarged detail view of one of the slides which 
carry the forming-rollers; and Fig. 10 is an 
enlarged detail view of one of the slides, which 
will be specifically referred to by a reference 
number. 
1 denotes the frame of the machine, the ex 
act style and arrangement of which are not of 
the essence of my invention. Power is ap 
plied to all portions of the machine, except 
the curling-rollers, by a belt (not shown) run 
ning over a pulley 2 on a shaft 3, provided 
with a bevel-gear 4. This gear meshes with 
a bevel-gear 5 on a vertical shaft 6, the lower 
end of which is stepped in the frame-work, 
the upper end thereof being journaled in a 
bracket 7, bolted to the frame. At the upper 
end of shaft 6 is a gear 8, which meshes with 
a gear 9 on a hollow vertical spindle 10, jour 
naled in boxes 11, bolted to the frame. 
12 denotes an oval plate carried by the spin 
dle, upon which the hat-brim rests during the 
operation of curling. I have shown gear 9 
and plate 12 as secured together by means of 
pins 13 (one only being shown) and the plate 
as secured to the spindle by means of screws 
14. The special manner in which the parts 
are secured together is of course not of the 
essence of my invention. 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
9o 
95 
OO 
e' 
 
472,974 
15 denotes a double compound cam consist 
ing of two independent sections, each section 
consisting of a number of different ovals, all 
of which in practice are egg ovals. In the 
drawings I have shown the sections as con 
sisting of five ovals each, this number being 
sufficient in connection with other adjust 
ments, which I shall presently describe, to 
produce all the ovals that will ordinarily be 
required in the manufacture of hats. It will 
be noticed in Figs. 1, 3, and 4 that the sev 
eral ovals of the compound cam are of uni 
form width at the sides and of uniform length 
at the ends, the variations in the ovals being 
at the quarters only and not being specifically 
shown in the drawings. The ovals of the 
upper sections are denoted by 15* and the 
ovals of the lower section by 15. The re 
spective ovals in the two sections correspond 
exactly with each other in outline, as will 
presently be more fully described. Cam 15 
is held against rotation on the spindle by 
means of a spline 16, and is adjustably Secured 
thereto by a nut 17, which is externally screw 
threaded to engage and internal screw-thread 
The nut, 
in a central recess l8 in the cam. 
is provided with a flange 19, which rests upon 
a nut 20, engaging a corresponding thread 
upon the spindle. When it is desired to raise 
or lower the cam on the spindle, a rod is in 
serted in one of the holes 21 in flange 19 and 
said nut is rotated on the spindle, thereby 
raising the cam up or down, as may be re 
quired, said cam sliding freely on the spindle 
and the spline. Below nut 20 on the spindle 
is a gear 22, the purpose of which will pres 
ently be explained. 
- 
23 is a nut under gear 22, which is threaded 
to engage a corresponding screw-thread on 
the spindle, the thread for nut 20 being of 
less diameter than the thread for nut 17, so as 
to permit the parts to be readily assembled. 
Gear 22 is shown as clamped between nuts 20 
and 23, and is additionally locked to the spin 
dle by a set-screw 24. Below the lower box 
11 of the spindle is another gear 25, the pur 
pose of which will presently be explained. 
This gear is clamped between nuts 26 and 27, 
and is additionally locked to the spindle by a 
set-screw 28. Nuts 26 and 27 are of different 
diameters for the same reason as the other 
nuts on the spindle. In the base of the spin 
dle is a socket 29, which receives an enlarge 
ment 30 at the lower end of a rod 31, which 
is adapted to slide freely in the spindle. At 
the upper end of rod 31 is a cone 32, the pur 
pose of which will presently be explained. 
The lower end of rod 31 is provided with a 
threaded portion 33, which may be made in 
tegral therewith or be made separately, as 
shown in the drawings. I have shown the 
threaded portion as provided with a flange or 
head 34, lying in a socket at the lower end of 
enlargement 30 andlocked therein by a nut 35. 
36 denotes a gear-wheel, the hub of which 
is internally threaded to engage thread 33, 
and is provided with an annular groove 37, 
which is in turn engaged by an angle-piece 
38, secured to the frame of the machine. 
This angle-piece holds gear-wheel 36 in posi 
tion, but permits it to be rotated freely when 
it is desired to raise or lower rod 31. Gear 
wheel 36 meshes with similar gear-wheels 39 
on oppositesides thereof, the purpose of which 
will presently be explained. Gear-wheel 36 
and the two gear-wheels 39 are operated si 
multaneously by means of a pinion 40 at the 
lower end of a shaft 41, which is journaled in 
brackets 41 and 41, secured to the frame, and 
is provided at its upper end with a hand 
wheel 42 for convenience in operation. Cone 
32 at the top of rod 31 lies in a central recess 
43 in oval plate 12 and extends above the top 
of said plate. The hat to be acted upon is 
placed upon a suitable holder, which as a 
whole I have designated by A. (See Figs. 2, 
4, and 5.) 
The construction of the holder shown in the 
drawings is as follows: 
44 denotes an oval plate, which passes with 
in the crown of the hat, said plate correspond 
ing in shape and size with said crown-open 
ing and also with the general oval of the 
compound cam-that is to say, corresponding 
at the ends and sides with the oval of the cam. 
45 denotes a longitudinal opening in the 
plate which must always bear a certain defi 
nite relation to the size of the hat that the 
holder is made to fit, the length of the open 
ing increasing in regular proportion to the 
length of the plate, the latter dimension cor 
responding, of course, to the regular size of 
the hat. 
50 denotes blocks formed integral with 
slides 51. The slides lie in a recess 52 in the 
top of plate 12 and the blocks extend upward 
into opening 45. The blocks are made just 
large enough to pass freely into opening 45. 
They have no lateral movement in said open 
ing, but are free to move longitudinally there 
in. The holder is thus accurately centered 
without adjustment by simply placing it in . 
position on the block. The inner ends of the 
slides are preferably beveled, as at 53, (see Fig. 
4) to correspond with the bevel of cone 32. 
The slides are rabbeted at their sides and are 
held in place by plates 51, which are secured 
to plate 12. 
When the holder with the hat upon it has 
been placed in position upon the blocks, rod 
31 is raised in the manner already described, 
which forces the cone upward and moves the 
blocks outward until they are stopped by 
contact with the ends of opening 45. This 
automatic stoppage of the upward movement 
of the cone and the outward movement of 
the slides enables me to curl hats of any size 
without the slightest change of adjustment, 
placing precisely the same curl upon each 
hat. For instance, a five and one-half hat 
may be followed by a seven and one-half hat, 
and vice versa, and each will have the proper 
curl imparted to it, owing to the fact that the 
opening 45 in the holder for each hat bears 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
O 
IT 5 
I 25 
 
472,974 
3 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5.o. 
55 
such a relation to the size of the hat as to ad 
just the curling mechanism automatically, 
all of which will presently be more fully ex 
plained. In order to insure that the hat shall 
not slip on the holderunder any circumstances, 
I provide pins 47, having collars 48 lying in 
openings 46 in plate 44. 
49 denotes springs lying in the openings 
and surrounding the pins, the ends of which 
bear, respectively, against the collars and the 
outer end walls of said openings, so as to hold 
the pins normally retracted. The inner ends 
of the pins pass through openings in the 
walls between recesses 45 and 46 and rest 
against blocks 50 on slides 51, and the inner 
ends of said pins pass through the walls at 
the outer ends of recesses 46. It will thus 
be seen that when said slides and blocks are 
moved outward the pins are moved outward 
also and engage the hat, retaining it securely 
in position on the holder. 
Turning now to Figs. 7, 8, 9, and 10 I will 
describe the curling mechanism, which is 
shown clearly in Fig. S, in which view the 
parts are shown in operative position. The 
brim is curled by curling-rollers 54 over form 
ing-rollers 55. As the two sides of the ma 
chine are exact duplicates and as the entire 
operation of curling could be performed by 
one set of rollers, although two sets are pref 
erably used, I will confine the description to 
one side of the machine. 
The forming-roller is carried by a spindle 
56, which slides in a guide 57 on a slide 58, 
which in turn slides in a bracket 59, extend 
ing upward from a slide 61. In practice the 
forming-roller may or may not be heated. I 
have shown no means of heating it in this in 
stance. The curling-roller, however, should 
be heated in any suitable manner. I have 
shown the curling-roller as made hollow and 
open at the top, and have shown a flexible 
gas-pipe 122 as extending into the opening. 
A suitable burner 123 is placed at the end of 
the pipe within the opening, said pipe and 
burner being secured in place in any suitable 
or preferred manner. It will be seen that the 
brim is not bent to place and ironed there, 
but that it is rolled to shape by being passed 
between rollers, one or both of which are 
heated. Slide 5S is simply for the purpose of 
adjustment and is locked in bracket 59 by a 
bolt or set-screw 63. There are three other 
slides, however, one within the other, which 
perform important functions in the act of 
curling. These slides are clearly shown in 
section in Fig. 7. The lower slide, which I 
have designated by 60, moves in ways 64 in 
the frame. Within this slide is an interme 
diate slide, which I designate as 61, and within 
slide 61 is an upper slide, which I designate 
as 62. Slide 60 is provided with longitudinal 
slots 65, and slide 61 is provided with down 
wardly - extending plates 66, which pass 
through said slots and are free to move therein, 
as will presently be fully explained. 
The inner ends of plates 66 are connected 
by a cross-piece 67, and between said plates 
is mounted a pinion 68, which engages a rack 
69 on the under side of plate 60, and also a 
vertical rack 70, which is held in place by the 
cross-piece, the function of which will pres 
ently be explained. In assembling slide 61 is 
dropped down to place in slide 60 and is held 
in position therein by plates 71, which are 
screwed to plate 60 and engage flanges 72 on 
plate 61, serving as ways therefor. Slide 62 
engages dovetail ways 73 in plate 61. 
74 denotes a segment-plate, which is rigidly 
secured to plate 61. 
75 denotes a lever fulcrumed on a stud 76, 
projecting from the segment-plate, the lower 
end of which is reduced, as at 75, and passes 
through a rotary plug 77 in a hub 77, ex 
tending upward from plate 62, so that oscilla 
tion of the lever will move said plate inward 
or outward, as may be desired. 
7S denotes a bracket extending inward from 
plate 62, in the end of which is journaled a 
vertical shaft 79, which carries the curling 
roller. At the upper end of this shaft is a 
bevel-gear 80, which meshes with a bevel-gear 
81 on a shaft 82, mounted in boxes 82 on a 
bracket 84, extending upward from plate 62. 
At the other end of shaft 82 is a bevel-gear 
83, which engages bevel-gear 85 on a shaft 86. 
This shaft is mounted in boxes 87 on the two 
brackets 84, which extend from the two slides 
62 on the opposite sides of the machine, as is 
clearly shown in Fig.2. Gears 85 are keyed to 
the shaft, so as to rotate therewith, but also 
to slide longitudinally thereon, said gears be 
ing held in position by the boxes 87 on one side 
and the bevel-gears 83 on the other, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 2. The keys (not shown) in 
bevel-gears 85 engage a groove 88 in the shaft. 
Shaft 86 is supported centrally by a bracket 
89, which is secured to and extends upward 
from bracket 7. The upper end of this bracket 
is branched, and between the branches is a 
belt-pulley 90, rigidly secured to the shaft, 
through which motion is imparted to the curl 
ing-rollers in the manner just described, the 
belt being omitted from the drawings for con 
venience in illustration. 
The forming-roller 55 is normally held out 
of operative position by a spring 91, surround 
ing the spindle, the ends of which bear re 
spectively against guide 57 and a hand-piece 
92, placed at the upper end of the spindle for 
convenience in operation. After being placed 
in operative position the forming-roller is held 
thereby means of a spring-actuated pawl 93, 
which engages a notch (not shown) in the 
spindle. Lever 75 is locked in any desired 
position by means of a spring-actuated pawl 
94, which engages notches in the periphery of 
segment-plate 74. 
95 denotes an arm extending downward 
from plate 60, and preferably formed integral 
therewith, as shown in the drawings. This 
arm is provided with ears 96, between which 
is mounted in the horizontal plane a roller 97, 
which is adapted to engage either one of the 
o 
75 
95 
ICO 
IOS 
IO 
II.5 
2O 
I 25 
4 
472,974 
25 
O 
ovals 15 of the upper section of the double 
compound cam 15. 
98 is a bracket-plate secured to the frame, 
in which slides a rack 99, having at its inner 
ends ears 100, between which is journaled in 
the horizontal plane a roller 101, which is 
adapted to engage either of the ovals 15 of 
the lower section of double compound cam 15. 
102 denotes a rack at the lower end of arm 95. 
103 is a pinion journaled to the frame and 
engaging racks 99 and 102, SO that the two 
racks must move simultaneously, but in op 
posite directions. 
As has already been Stated, the Several ovals 
in the two sections of the compound cam have 
a definite relation to each other-that is to 
say, the first oval of the upper section corre 
sponds with the first oval of the lower section, 
the second oval of the upper section with the 
second oval on the lower section, &c. It will 
thus be seen that the lower Section acts as the 
complement to the upper section and holds 
roller 97 at all times in engagement with the 
oval which has been adjusted to operate in con 
nection therewith. At the lower end of rack 
70 are rollers 104, which lie in a groove 105 in 
a slide 106, which moves in a suitable guide 
107. The lower end of this slide is provided 
with a recess 108 and lies in a socket 109 at 
the upper end of a slide 110. It will be noticed 
(see Fig. 7) that these rollers are pivoted in 
: different horizontal planes and in such posi 
tion that one will engage the upper side of 
the groove and the other the lower side, thus 
preventing lost motion under any circum 
stances. The pin 104, upon which these roll 
ers are pivoted, is specially provided with an 
eccentric shoulder, upon which one of the roll 
ers is pivoted. 
(See dotted lines, Fig. 7.) 
Socket 109 is provided with inwardly-extend 
ing arms 111, between which is pivoted a cam 
gear 112. It will be seen from Fig. 1 that, 
while the arbor of this cam-gear is in the ver 
tical plane, the gear itselflies in a plane at an 
acute angle to the horizontal plane. The edge 
of this gear engages recess 108 in slide 106. 
The effect, therefore, of rotation of the cam 
gear will necessarily be to steadily raise slide 
106 during half a revolution of the cam-gear 
and then steadily lower it during the other 
half-revolution of said cam-gear. As cam 
gear 112 is just half the size of gear 22 by 
which it is driven, it follows that the cam 
gear must make two full revolutions during 
each revolution of the central spindle, all of 
which will presently be fully explained. The 
inner edge of the cam-gear meshes with gear 
22 on the central spindle 10. When the spe 
cial effect of cam-gear 112 is not required, 
gear 22 is loosened on spindle 10 by loosening 
nut 23 and turning set-screw 24 backward, 
and is locked against the possibility of rota 
tion by a catch 113, one arm of which is placed 
between two teeth of the gear and locked in 
that position by means of a pin 114, which en 
gages the frame, said pin being shown in Fig. 
1 as holding the catch out of operative posi 
35 
40 
45 
55 
W 
tion instead of in operative position. Slide 
110 is retained in operative position by a guide 
115. The lower end of this slide is provided 
with a recess 116 and lies in a Socket. 117. 
118 is a threaded rod rigidly secured to and 
extending downward from the socket. This 
threaded rod passes through a correspond 
ingly-threaded opening in the hub of gear 
wheel 39. The hub of this gear-wheel is pro 
vided with an annular groove 37, similar to 
the groove in the hub of gear-wheel 36, said 
groove being engaged by an angle-piece (not 
shown) similar to the angle-piece 38, (see Figs. 
3 and 4) which engages the groove 37 in said 
gear-wheel36. It will be noticed (see Fig. 1) 
that the thread of rod 118 is a right-hand 
thread and thread 33 on rod 31 is a left-hand, 
so that when rod 31 is moved downward rod 
118 and the parts carried thereby will be 
moved upward, as will be more fully explained. 
Socket 117 is provided with inwardly-extend 
ing arms 119, between which is pivoted a cam 
gear 120. This cam-gear meshes with gear 
25 on central spindle 10, and the outer edge 
thereof engages recess 116 in slide 110. It 
will be noticed that this cam-gear is piv 
oted in the horizontal plane and that the 
operative face thereof is curved laterally, as 
at 120. (See Fig. 1.) As a matter of fact 
there are two of these lateral curvatures 120 
on cam-gear 120, the other curvature not be 
ing shown in the drawings, which are distant 
from each other just one-fourth the circum 
ference of the cam-gear. As this cam-gear 
and gear 25, by which it is driven, are of 
equal size, it follows that the central spindle 
and the cam-gear will complete - their rota 
tions simultaneously. It is obvious that the 
effect of these lateral curvatures will be to 
raise slide 110 and the parts above it quickly 
and then lower it again twice during each 
revolution of the. cam-gear, and, furthermore, 
that said movements will take place at two 
successive quarters of the hat instead of at 
alternate quarters. The adjustment in prac 
tice is such that the two movements take place 
when the quarters at the large end of the 
oval are being operated upon by the curling 
mechanism, as will be more fully explained. 
When it is not desired to use this cam-gear, 
gear 25 on the central spindle, by which it is 
driven, is loosened on the central spindle by 
loosening nut 27 and turning set-screw 28 
outward. In order to avoid the possibility of 
movement, the gear is preferably locked 
against rotation with the spindle in any suit 
able manner, as by a catch 113, such as is 
shown in connection with gear-wheel 22, or. 
by a pin 121, (see dotted lines in Fig. 1,) which 
passes through the rim of the wheel or be 
tween two of the gear-teeth and engages the 
frame of the machine. 
The ordinary operation of the machine is 
as follows: Let us suppose that it is desired 
to curl hats of an ordinary egg. Oval corre 
sponding to any of the ovals of the compound 
cam. The cam is adjusted by means of nut 
75 
95 
too 
O 5 
O 
II.5 
I 25 
472,974. 
17 to place the required ovals in operative 
position relative to rollers 97 and 101. The 
holders used for the hats of course correspond 
With the general oval of the cam. As eam 
gea's 112 and 120 are not required, gears 22 
and 25 on the central spindle, by which said 
Calm-gears are driven, are loosened in the man 
ner described and are locked against rotation 
With the spindle in any suitable manner, as 
described. For the sake of clearness, let us 
Suppose a hat to be in position on the machine 
and the act of curling to have been finished, 
the Operator disengages pawl 94 from the 
teeth of the segment-plate and moves lever 
75 inward from the position shown in Figs. 1 
and 8. As slide 61 and the segment-plate 
carried thereby are locked in position by pin 
ion 68, racks 69 and 70, the slides, cam-gears, 
&C., as already described, it follows that slide 
62, carrying the curling-roller, will be carried 
out of Operative position by means of lever 
75. The operator then disengages spring-act 
lated pawl 93 from the notch (not shown) 
in spindle 56, which permits spring 91 to raise 
the forming-roller 55 out of operative posi 
tion. Hand-wheel 42 is then operated, and 
by means of pinion 40, gear-wheels 36 and 39, 
and the connections already described moves 
threaded rod 118 upward, this movement car 
Tying the sockets, slides, cam-gears, and rack 
70 upward also, the teeth of the cam-gears 
sliding freely over the teeth of gears 22 and 
25 when the upward movement takes place. 
The upward movement of rack 70 imparts 
movement to pinion 68, which is also in en 
gagement with rack 69 on the under side of 
slide 60, the effect of which is to carry slides 
61 and 62, and with them the forming and 
curling rollers, inward toward the center, it 
being understood that the curling-roller has 
been previously moved backward by means 
of lever 75 far enough to permit the forming 
ing-roller to be released from the curled brim 
and moved upward out of the way by the 
spring which controls it. 
It will be apparent 
that slides 61 and 62 must move together, ow 
ing to the fact that lever 75 is pivotally con 
nected to slide 62 and is fulcrumed upon and 
locked to slide 61, the latter slide also carry 
ing pinion 68, which engages the rack on slide 
60. This movement of the hand-wheel also 
acts by means of pinion 40, gear-wheel 36, and 
the connections already described at length 
to move rod 31 and cone 32 downward, which 
loosens blocks 50 in opening 45, so that the 
holder, with the hat upon it, may be readily 
removed from the machine. Springs 49 also 
act to move pins 47 inward, withdrawing them 
from the hat and permitting the latter to be 
readily removed from the holder. Another 
holder with a hat-body thereon is then placed 
in position on the blocks. The inner ends of 
the pins rest at all times against the blocks, 
the latter acting to center the holder and hat, 
rendering it impossible for the holder to be 
placed on the oval plate in any position ex 
cept the correct one. As soon as the hat, and 
75 
holder are in position hand-wheel 42 is turned 
in the opposite direction, which raises rod 31 
and the cone, thereby forcing blocks 50 out 
Ward until they are stopped by engagement 
with the ends of opening 45, and also causing 
the pins to engage the hat-body, as already 
described. It will thus be seen that this up 
Ward movement of the rod and cone Secures 
the hat firmly upon the holder and secures 
the holder firmly in position on the machine. 
I have not shown rod 31 and the cone in the 
raised position, as the changes in position of 
the cone and blocks caused by the operation 
of the hand-wheel will be obvious from Figs. 
2 and 5. In addition to the operations al 
ready described this movement of the hand 
wheel through the engagement of gear-wheel 
36 with gear-wheel 39 acts to move slides 106 
and 110, together with rack 70, downward to 
the position shown in Fig. 8, the effect of 
which is to move slides 61 and 62 outward, 
slide 61 being moved to the position shown in 
Fig. 8, slide 62, however, being still further 
retracted through the former movement of le 
ver 75, as already described. 
This movement 
places forming-roller 55 in just the position 
required to form the desired curl upon the . 
brim, it being understood that set-screw 63, 
95 
which locks slide 58 in position, is never 
touched except when changing from one 
width of hat-brim to another. The operator 
next presses the forming-roller down to Op 
erative position against the power of spring 
91, and then locks it there by means of pawl 
93 and the notch (not shown) in the spindle. 
The next movement is to disengage pawl 94 
from the segment-gear and swing lever 75 in 
ward to the position shown in Figs. 1 and 8. 
This places curling-roller 54 in operative po- . 
sition, as clearly shown in Fig. 8, and the 
curling operation takes place in less time 
than it has taken to describe the preliminary 
movements. As has already been fully ex 
plained, the opening 45 in the holder bears 
such a relation to the size of the holder itself 
(the size of the holder of course correspond 
ing with the size of the hat) that when the 
operative parts have been moved into posi 
tion by hand-wheel 42, as already described, 
and the outward movement of block 50 has 
been stopped by the ends of opening 45, the 
forming-roller will be in the exact position 
required to curl the brim of the special size 
of hat upon the holder. Suppose a small-sized 
hat to be followed by a large-sized hat. The 
opening in the holder will be larger, and it 
follows, necessarily, that the cone will be 
moved upward farther and will move blocks 
50 outward farther before said blocks will be 
stopped by engagement with the end walls of 
opening 45, and as the outward movement of 
slides 61 and 62, carrying the forming-rollers, 
is proportionate to the upward movement of 
the cone the forming-roller will be moved out 
ward from the body of the hat the same distance 
that it was moved when the smaller-sized hat 
was on the machine. The operation of the 
I25 
IOO 
to 5 
IO 
II5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
472,974 
S. 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
55 
forming-roller when once adjusted to a certain 
width of hat-brim is therefore wholly auto 
matic without regard to thesize of the hat and 
only requires to be adjusted when the width of 
the curl is changed. The movement of the 
several parts in the operation of curling will 
be clearly understood by Fig. 1 in connection 
with Fig. 8. 
It will be seen that the two sides of the ma 
chine are exactly alike. I have used the sin 
gular form in describing the parts, for the 
reason that the machine is operative with 
only one side. In practice, however, both 
sides are preferably used. It makes no dif 
ference which of the five Ovals of the two 
parts of the compound cam are adjusted to 
operate in connection with rollers 97 and 101. 
The movement that is to be imparted to the 
slides is communicated through the upper 
Section of the cam and rollers 97 and rollers 
101, the racks and pinions 103 simply serv 
ing to hold the rollers 97 at all times in close 
contact with the upper section of the com 
pound calm, SO that there can be no lost 
motion. The rotation of the compound cam 
through the engagement of rollers 97 there 
with imparts reciprocatory movement to arms 
95 and slides 60. This movement of slides 60 
is communicated to slides 61 and 62, owing to 
the fact that slides 61 and 62 are locked to 
gether by the segment-plate and lever 75, as 
fully described, and slides 61 are locked to 
slides 60 by means of pinions 68, racks 70, 
slides 106 and 110, and the parts operating in 
connection there with, it being understood, of 
course, that slides 70 are held constantly in 
engagement with pinions 68 by means of cross 
pieces 67, which connect the downwardly-ex 
tending plates 66, forming part of, or rigidly 
secured to, slides 61. During this operation 
slides 106 and 110, the cam-gears, &c., have 
no movement, but simply act to hold racks 70 
against vertical movement, it being under 
stood that as the three slides are moved back 
ward and forward by the compound cam roll 
ers 104 will travel in grooves 105. It will be 
apparent, therefore, that the special oval of 
the compound cam that is in operative posi 
tion will cause the forming and curling roll 
ers in curling each brim to impart thereto 
the precise oval of the cam itself. It has been 
already fully explained that the five ovals of 
the compound cam cover all of the various 
ovals that are ordinarily required in the manu 
facture of hats. These ovals, as stated, vary 
from each other only at the quarters, the ends 
and the sides being the same. It sometimes 
happens, however, that hats of an oval differ 
ing materially from any of the ovals of the 
compound cam are required. Itherefore pro 
vide adjustments for varying the shape of the 
oval which enables me to curl a hat of any 
odd or irregular shape or size that can possi 
bly be required, either in men's or women's 
hats. In the drawings I have shown rollers 
97 and 101 as engaged with the upper ovals 
of the two sections of the compound cam. In 
practice these ovals are numbered and are 
known by their respective numbers, the mid 
dle oval being No. 1, the one below it No. 2, 
the bottom oval No. 3, the top oval No. 5, and 
the one below that No.4, No. 5 being shown as 
in use. Suppose now that it is required to pro 
duce an oval fuller at the quarters than any of 
the ovals of the compoundcam. The compound 
cam is used as before; but in addition to this 
gear-wheel 22 is disconnected from the frame, 
catch 113 being thrown to the position shown 
in Fig. 1 and locked there, and said gear is 
locked to the central spindle in the manner 
described, it being understood, of course, that 
gears 22 and 25 and cam-gears l12 and 120 
are suitably marked, so as to insure their being 
accurately set when they are placed in use, it 
being obvious that the timing of the machine 
must be quite correct, The operation of gears 
112 through the engagement of said gears 
with recesses 108 in slides 106 is to raise slides 
106 and racks 70 steadily upward during half 
the revolution of said cam-gears and then 
steadily lower them during the other half-revo 
lution. The cam-gears are set so as to just 
complete an entire revolution while the central 
spindle carrying the oval plate and the hat is 
making half a revolution, the effect being to 
move slides 61 and 62 outward while the Oval 
plate and hat are making a quarter-revolution, 
the object being to widen the oval at the sides 
of the hat more than at the ends thereof. Cam 
gears 112 will act in the manner just described 
to move slides 61 and 62, and with them the 
forming and curling rollers, outward steadily 
until the side of the hat is reached, and will 
then move them steadily in again until the 
end of the hat is reached, which completes a 
half-revolution of the oval plate, and conse 
quently, one side of the hat and an entire 
revolution of the cam-gear, the Second revo 
lution of the cam-gear acting to move the 
slides and forming and curling rollers outward 
in the same manner to widen the curl on the 
opposite side of the hat. Should it be re 
quired to narrow the oval at the side-that is, 
to produce an oval narrower than any of the 
ovals of the compound cam-this result would 
be produced by taking cam-gears 112 out from 
the arms 111 in which they are held, turning 
them over, and replacing them the other side 
up. This would produce just the contrary 
effect from that just described. Instead of 
moving slides 106 and racks 70 upward and 
moving the slides carrying the forming and 
curling rollers outward, the effect would be to 
move slides 106 and racks 70 downward and 
to move the slides carrying the forming and 
curling rollers inward, thus producing a nar 
Suppose 
rower curl at the sides of the hat. 
now that it were required to curl hats the ovals 
of which were very much wider at the rear 
quartersthan any of the ovals of the compound 
cam. This result would be accomplished by 
the use of cam-gears 120, having lateral curv 
atures 120. When these cam-gears are used, 
gear 25 is unlocked from the fraine and locked 
75 
95 
Oo 
I I5 
I 25 
 
472,974 
tightly to the central spindle in the manner these two slides being locked together by the 
already described. The effect of the lateral 
segment-plate, lever 75, &c. Slots 65 in plates 
curvatures 120 through the engagement of 
6? are amply long to permit all the movement 
Said cam-gears with recesses 116 in slides 110 
of plates 66 that can be required. RackS 70 
is to raise slides 110 and 106 and racks 70 up 
are always held in engagement with pinions 
Ward quickly and to then lower them, the cam 
68 by cross-pieces 67. 
gears being set so as to produce this move 
Having thus described my invention, I 
ment when the quarters of the hat are being 
claim 
curled. The effect, therefore, is to move the 
1. The combination, with a rotary spindle 
forming and curling rollers outward from the 
carrying a compound cam and provided with 
side of the hat to the quarter, that being the 
means for retaining a hat in place, of slides 
highest point of the curvature and the point 
carrying forming and curling rollers, substan 
at which the curling and forming rollers are 
tially as described and shown, suitable means 
moved farthest outward, and then to move 
for locking said slides together, an arm con 
the curling and forming rollers inward from 
nected to one of said slides and carrying a 
the quarter to the end, there being two lateral 
roller engaging one section of the compound 
curvatures, as already explained, although 
cam, a roller carried by a slide and engaging 
Only one is shown in the drawings, so that this 
the other section of the compound cam, said 
Operation can be repeated for the two rear 
slide and arm having racks, and a pinion en 
quarters of the hat. As the two lateral curv 
gig said racks, as and for the purpose set 
atures are in one half of the cam-gear, it fol 
Orth. 
lows that while the other half is in engagement 
2. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
with gear 25 no inward or outward movement 
vice, mechanism for acting upon the hat, and 
Will be imparted to the slides, curling and 
a compound cam consisting of two sections, 
forming rollers, &c., this being the half-revo 
each section consisting of a series of ovals 
lution during which the front half of the hat 
and each oval corresponding in outline with 
is being acted upon by the curling and form 
the oval on the other section occupying the 
ing rollers. 
same relative position, of an arm carrying a 
As stated at the beginning of this specifi 
roller engaging one section of the compound 
cation, this machine is built with the express 
cam, connections between said arm and the 
purpose in view of curling the brims of hats 
mechanism which acts upon the hat, a slide 
blocked to egg-oval shape without disturbing 
carrying a roller engaging the other section 
the shape of the hat in the slightest and with 
of the compound cam, said slide and arm hav 
Out requiring additional operations to get the 
ing racks, and a pinion engaging said racks, 
hat back to its egg-oval shape after curling. 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
It might happen, however, that it was re 
3. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
quired to block hats of a true oval, or if not 
vice, mechanism for acting upon the hat, and 
a true oval of an egg oval of lesser width at 
the compound cam, of slides 60, 61, and 62, 
the rear quarters than any of the ovals of the 
suitable means for locking said slides togeth 
compound cam. This result would be accom 
er, a roller carried by an arm extending from 
plished by taking cam-gears 120 out from 
one of said slides which engages one section 
arms 119 in which they are journaled, turn 
of the compound cam, said arm being provided 
ing them over, and replacing them the other 
with a rack, a roller carried by a rack which 
side up. Their action would then be, instead 
engages the other section of the compound 
of raising slides 110 and 106 and racks 70 and 
cam, and a pinion engaging said racks, Sub 
moving the slides carrying the forming and 
stantially as described. 
curling rollers outward at the quarters of the 
4. The combination, with suitable curling 
hats, to move slides 110 and 106 and racks 70 
mechanism and means for retaining a hat 
downward, and consequently to move the 
while it is being operated upon, the compound 
slides carrying the forming and curling roll 
cam, rollers 97 and 101, and intermediate 
ers inward at the quarters. It will be appar 
connections, substantially as described and 
ent that when slides 10 and 106 and racks 
shown, of slide 60, by which roller 97 is car 
70 are moved upward and pinions 68 are ro 
ried, slide 61, moving in slide 60, slide 62, 
tated no movement can be imparted to slide 
moving in slide 61, and suitable means, Sub 
60, owing to the fact that racks 99 and 102 
stantially as described, for locking said slides 
together. 
and pinions 103 act to hold rollers 97 and 101 
constantly in engagement with the two sec 
5. The combination, with the compound 
tions of the compound cam, so that it is in 
cam, rollers 97 and 101, and intermediate 
possible for slide 60 to move except as it is 
connections, substantially as described and 
moved by the compound cam. When slide 
shown, of a hat-holding device, mechanism for 
60 is moved by the compound cam, it is locked 
acting upon the hat, slide 60, by which roller 
to slide 61 by racks 69 and 70 and pinions 68; 
97 is carried and which is provided with slots 
but when rack 70 is moved upward by means 
65 and a rack 69, slide 61, moving in slide 60 
of the cam-gears and slides or through the ro 
and having plates 66 extending through said 
tation of the hand-wheel movement is only 
slots, rack 70, means for actuating said rack, 
imparted to slides 61 and 62, carrying, re 
pinion 68, journaled between the plates and 
spectively, the forming and curling rollers, 
engaging racks 69 and 70, slide 62, moving in 
25 
35 
45 
50 
7 o 
75 
95 
Od 
lo5 
O 
II5 
I25 
55 
 
r8 
472,974 
75 
9c. 
95 
ICC 
fo5 
IIO 
slide 61, and means for locking slides 61 and 
62 together. 
6. The combination, with plate 12, means 
for retaining a hat thereon, and the adjust 
able curling-roller, of forming-roller 55, car 
lied by spindle 56, slide 58, having guide 57, 
in which the spindle slides, spring 91 for 
raising the spindle and roller out of operative 
position, and a pawl 93 for locking the roller 
in operative position against the power of the 
Spring. 
7. The combination, with plate 12 and means 
for retaining a hat thereon, of slide 61, carry 
ing forming-roller 55 and having notched seg 
ment-plate 74, slide 62, carrying curling-roller 
54 and having hub 77, with perforated turn 
ing plug 77", and lever 75, pivoted to the seg 
ment-plate and reduced at its lower end to en 
gage the turning-plug and provided at its 
Outer end with a pawl engaging the segment 
plate, whereby slide 62 may be moved in or 
Out relatively to slide 61 or said slides may 
be locked together. 
8. The combination, with plate 12, means for 
retaining a hat thereon, slide 62, and the curl 
ing-roller carried thereby, of slide 61, hav 
ing notched segment-plate 74 and the form 
ing-roller, and lever 75, pivoted to the seg 
ment-plate and engaging slide 62, the outer 
end of said lever having a pawl which en 
gages the notches on the segment-plate, where 
by the curling-roller may be moved outward 
away from the forming-roller and the latter 
may be raised out of operative position when 
it is desired to put on or remove a hat. 
9. The combination, with plate 12, means 
for retaining a hat thereon, slide 61, carry 
ing the forming-roller, slide 62, carrying the 
Curling-roller, and suitable means for locking 
Said plates together, of slide 60, having arm 
95, carrying roller 97, and having a rack 102, 
the compound cam, roller 101 and interme 
diate connections, and suitable means for 
locking slide 60 to slides 61 and 62. 
10. The combination, with plate 12, means 
for retaining a hat thereon, slide 62, carrying 
the curling-roller, slide 61, carrying the form 
ing-roller and having downwardly-extending 
plates 66, and suitable means for locking said 
slides together, of the compound calm, roll 
ers 97 and 101, and intermediate connections 
whereby roller 97 is kept in contact with said 
cam, slide 60, having slots 65, through which 
plates 66 pass, racks 69 and 70, pinion 68, 
journaled between plates 66 and engaging 
said racks, and means for actuating rack 70, 
said pinion acting to lock slides 60 and 61 to 
ther, except when rack 70 is moved verti 
Cally. . 
11. The hat-holding device, mechanism for 
acting upon the hat, the compound cam, slide 
61, having downwardly-extending plates 66, 
slide 62, and slide 60, having slots 65, rack 69, 
and intermediate connections between slide 60 
and the compound cam, in combination with 
rack 70, pinion 68, journaled between plates 
66 and engaging racks 69 and 70, a slidehav 
ing a threaded rod at its lower end, a gear 39, 
internally threaded to engage the rod, and 
means for holding said gear against Vertical 
movement, so that rotation of said gear will 
move the rod up or down and will move slides 
61 and 62 in or out, as may be required. 
12. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
vice, mechanism for acting upon the hat, the 
compound cam, slide 61, having downwardly 
extending plates 66, slide 62, and slide 60, 
having slots 65 and rack 69, and intermedi 
ate connections between slide 60 and the colm 
pound cam, of racks 70, pinion 68, journaled 
between plates 66 and engaging racks 69 and 
70, slide 106, having recess 108, spindle 10, 
having gear 22, and cam-gear 112, construct 
ed as described, which engages said gear and 
the recess in the slide, whereby slide 106 and 
rack 70 may be raised and slides 61 and 62 
moved outward, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
13. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
vice, mechanism for acting upon the hat, the 
compound cam, and slide 60, having slots 65, 
rack 69, and roller97, engaging one section of 
the compound cam, roller 101, engaging the 
other section of the compound calm, and a 
rack-and-pinion connection between said roll 
ers, of slide 61, having plates 66 extending 
through slots 65, cross-piece 67, connecting 
said plates, rack 70, having rollers 104, pin 
ion 68, journaled between said plates and en 
gaging racks 69 and 70, slide 106, having a 
groove in which said roller slides, and means 
for actuating said slide, whereby when rack 
70 is held against vertical movement slides 
60 and 61 are moved inward and outward to 
gether by the compound cam and when rack 
70 is moved vertically slide 61 is moved in 
and out independently of slide 60. 
14. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
vice, mechanism for acting upon the hat, 
spindle 10, the compound cam, and gear 22, 
detachably secured thereto, of slide 106, hav 
ing recess 108, cam-gear 112, engaging said 
recess and gear 22, slide 60, having slots 65, 
rack 69, and roller97, engaging one section of 
the compound cam, roller 101, engaging the 
other section of the compound cam, a rack 
and-pinion connection between said rollers, 
slide 61, having plates extending through said 
slots, rack 70, engaging slide 106, and pinion 
68, journaled between said plates and engag 
ing racks 69 and 70. 
15. The combination, with the forming and 
curling rollers, means for holding a hat, and 
slides by which said forming and curling roll 
ers are carried, of the compound cam, rollers 
97 and 101, engaging said cam, one of said 
rollers being connected with the slides, and a 
rack-and-pinion connection between said 
rollers. 
16. The combination, with the forming and 
curling rollers, means for holding a hat, slides 
61 and 62, by which said rollers are carried, 
means for locking said slides together, slide 
60, having rack 69, rack 70, and pinion 68, en 
I 25. 
IC 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
472,974 
w 
. 
gaging said racks, of the compound cam, roll 
Spindle, having at its upper end a cone engag 
ers 97 and 101, engaging said cam, one of said 
ing the slides, whereby the latter are moved 
rollers being connected with the slides, a rack 
outward and caused to engage the end walls 
and-pinion connection between said rollers, 
of opening 45 to lock the holder in position on 
so that said slides and the forming and curl 
plate 12. 
ing rollers will all be moved inward and out 
22. Hat-holder A, consisting of an oval plate 
Ward by the compound cam, slide 106, engag 
corresponding with the crown-opening of a hat 
ing rack 70 and having a recess 108, and cam 
and provided with a central opening 45, bear 
gear 112, engaging Said recess, so that when 
ing a definite relation to the size of the plate, 75 
said cam-gear is rotated the slide and rack 70 
and openings 46, in line with opening 45, con- . 
will be moved upward and slides 61 and 62, 
taining spring-actuated pins the ends of which 
carrying the forming and curling rollers, will 
project into opening 45 in the retracted posi 
be moved independently of slide 60. 
tion and in the thrown position project be 
17. The hat-holding device, mechanism for 
yond the edge of the plate and engage the hat, 
acting upon the hat, the compound cam, roll 
and sliding blocks by which the pins are 
ers 97 and 101, engaging said cam, a rack-and 
moved outward. 
pinion connection between said rollers, and 
23. The combination, with plate 12, having 
slide 60, by which one of said rollers is car 
recess 52, and movable rod 31, having cone 32, 
ried and which is provided with a rack 69, in 
of plate 44, having central opening 45 and 
combination with rack 70, slide 61, carrying 
spring-actuated pins 47, and slides 51, carry 
a pinion 68, engaging said racks, slide 62, and 
ing blocks 50, which are engaged by the cone 
means for locking said slides together. 
and moved outward against the walls of open 
18. The hat-holding device, mechanism for 
ing 45 to lock the plate in position and also 
acting upon the hat, the compound calm, roll 
to move the pins outward to engage the hat. 
ers 97 and 101, engaging said cam, a rack-and 
24. The combination, with the hat-holder, 
pinion connection between said rollers, and 
rod 31, and cone 32, of slides 60, 61, and 62, 
slide 60, by which one of said rollers is car 
the forming and curling rollers, the compound 
ried and which is provided with a rack 69, in 
cam, rollers 97 and 101, engaging said cam, a 
combination with rack 70, slide 61, carrying 
rack-and-pinion connection between said roll 
a pinion 68, engaging said racks, slide 62, and 
ers, gear-wheels 36 and 39, and intermediate 
means for moving rack 70, so that slide 61 
connections, substantially as described and 
may be moved independently of slide 60. 
shown, whereby when gear-wheel36 is rotated 
19. The hat-holding device, mechanism for 
rod 31 and the cone are moved upward to lock 
acting upon the hat, the compound cam, roll 
the holder in position and the slides carrying 
erS 97 and 101, engaging Said cam, a rack-and 
the forming and curling rollers are moved into 
operative position. 
pinion connection between said rollers, and 
slide 60, by which one of said rollers is car 
25. The combination, with the compound 
ried and which is provided with a rack 69, in 
cam, plate 12, and the hat-holder, of slides 60 
combination with rack 70, carrying rollers 
on opposite sides of the machine, intermedi 
104, slide 61, carrying a pinion 68, engaging 
ate connections, substantially as described 
said racks, vertical slide 106, having a groove 
and shown, between said slides and the com 
engaged by rollers 104 and a recess 108, slide 
pound cam, slides 61, recessed in slides 60 and 
110, and a socket 109, which receives slide 106 
having brackets 59, carrying forming-rollers, 
and carries a cam-gear engaging recess 108, 
slides 62, recessed in slides 61 and having 
whereby rack 70 and the intermediate parts 
brackets 84 provided with boxes 87, and brack 
may be moved vertically, for the purpose set 
ets 78, carrying curling-rollers, shaft 86, car 
forth. 
ried by the bracket 89, bevel-gears 85, keyed 
20. The hat-holding device, mechanism for 
to said shaft, but adapted to slide thereon, and 
acting upon the hat, the compound cam, roll 
intermediate connections, substantially as de 
ers 97 and 101, engaging Said cam, a rack-and 
scribed and shown, by which the curling-roll 
pinion connection between said rollers, and 
ers are driven. 
slide 60, by which one of said rollers is carried 
26. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
and which is provided with a rack 69, in com 
vice, the compound cam, rollers 97 and 101, 
bination with rack 70, slide 61, carrying a pin 
engaging said cam, and a connection between 
ion 68, engaging said racks, vertical slide 106, 
said rollers, which causes them to move toward 
engaging rack 70 and having a recess 108, cam 
and from the compound cam, of an adjustable 
gear 112, engaging said recess, the spindle 10, 
forming-roller carried by a slide 61, a curling 
a gear 22 on said spindle, means for locking 
roller carried by a slide 62, a slide 60, carry 
said gear to the spindle, and means for lock 
ing roller '97, and suitable means for lock 
ing said gear independent of the spindle when 
ing said slides together and also for moving 
it is not required to use the cam-gear. 
the curling-roller independently of the other 
21. The combination, with spindle 10 and 
plate 12, having recess 52, of hat-holder A, 
27. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
having opening 45, slides 51, lying in recess 
vice, the compound cam, a central spindle by 
52 and having blocks extending upward into which it is carried, suitable means for adjust 
opening 45, and a movable rod 31 within the ling said cam on the spindle, rollers 97 and 101, 
slides. 
95 
- 
I 25 
9o 
ICC 
O 
II5 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
10 
472,974 
7o 
75 
- 
. 
M 
others. 
engaging said cam, and a connection between 
said rollers to move them toward and from the 
compound cam, of the forming and curling 
rollers, independent slides by which they are 
carried, a slide carrying roller 97, and suit 
able means for locking said slides together. 
and for moving the slide carrying the curl 
ing-roller independently of the others. 
28. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
vice, the compound cam, rollers 97 and 101, 
engaging said cam, and a connection between 
said rollers to move them toward and from the 
compound cam, of the forming and curling 
rollers, suitable means for heating the curling 
roller, independent slides by which said roll 
ers are carried, a slide carrying roller 97, and 
suitable means for locking said slides together 
and for moving one slide independently of the 
29. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
vice, the compound cam, rollers engaging said 
cam, and a connection between said rollers to 
move them toward and from the compound 
cam, of slides 60, 61, and 62, a forming-roller 
carried by slide 61, a curling-roller carried 
by slide 62, suitable means for locking said 
slides together and for moving slide 62 inde 
pendently of the others, and suitable means 
for moving slides 6 and 62 independently of 
Slide 60. 
30. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
vice, mechanism for acting upon the hat, the 
compound cam, rollers engaging said cam, and 
a connection between said rollers to move 
them toward and from the compound cam, 
of slides 60, 61, and 62, suitable means for 
connecting slides 61 and 62 and for moving 
slide 62 independently of slide 61, means for 
connecting slide 61 to slide 60, and means 
for moving slides 61 and 62 independently of 
slide 60. 
31. The combination, with a hat-holding de 
yice, mechanism for acting upon the hat, 
slides 60, 61, and 62, the compound cam, a 
roller carried by slide 60, engaging one sec 
tion of the cam, a roller engaging the other 
section of the cam, and a connection between 
said rollers acting to move them toward and 
from the compound cam, of gear 22, cam-gear 
112, meshing there with, and intermediate con 
nections between said cam-gear and the slides, 
whereby slides 61 and 62 may be moved in 
dependently of slide 60. 
32. The hat-holding device, mechanism for 
acting upon the hat, slide 60, having slots 65, 
rack 69, and rollers 97 and 101 and interme 
diate connections, slide 61, having plates ex 
tending through said slots, a cross-piece 67 
between said plates, and a pinion journaled 
in said plates and engaging the rack, in com 
bination with the compound cam engaged by 
said roller, rack 70, which is held by the cross 
piece and engages the pinion, and suitable 
means for moving rack 70, so that when said 
rack is held against Vertical movement the 
slides will be moved together by the com 
pound cam and when vertical movement is 
imparted to the rack slide 61 will be moved 
independently of slide 60. 
33. The hat-holding device, mechanism for. 
acting upon the hat, slide 60, having slots 65, 
rack 69, and rollers 97 and 101 and interme 
diate connections, slide 61, having plates ex 
tending through said slots, a cross-piece 67 
befween said plates, and a pinion journaled 
in said plates and engaging the rack, in com 
bination with the compound cam engaged by 
said roller, rack 70, engaging said pinion and 
having at its lower end rollers 104, slide 106, 
having a groove engaged by said rollers and 
a recess 108, and a cam-gear engaging said 
recess and acting when rotated to lift slide 
106 and rack 70 and to move slide 61 inde 
pendently of slide 60. 
34. The hat-holding device, mechanism for 
acting upon the hat, slide 60, having slots 65, 
rack 69, and rollers 97 and 101 and interme 
diate connections, slide 61, having plates ex 
tending through said slots, and a pinion jour 
naled in said plates and engaging the rack, 
in combination with the compound cam en 
gaged by said roller, rack 70, engaging said 
pinion and having at its lower end rollers 104, 
slide 106, having a groove engaged by said 
rollers and a recess 108, a cam-gear engaging 
said recess and acting when rotated to lift 
slide 106 and rack 70 and to move slide 61 in 
dependently of slide 60, gear 22, engaging the 
cam-gear, a spindle by which said gear is car 
ried, and means for locking said gear to the 
spindle and also for locking it against rota 
tion when disconnected from the spindle. 
35. The hat-holding device, mechanism for 
acting upon the hat, the compound cam, roll 
ers 97 and 101, connections between said roll 
ers, slide 60, having slots 65 and rack 69, slide 
61, having plates extending through said slots, 
and a pinion journaled in said plates, in com 
bination with rack 70, engaging said pinion, 
slides 106 and 110 and intermediate connec 
tions, threaded rod 118, gear-wheel 39, engag 
ing the threaded rod and having an annular 
groove 37, angle-piece 38, engaging said groover 
hold the gear-wheel in position, and suit 
able means for rotating said gear-wheel to 
raise and lower the threaded rod and the . . 
slides, as and for the purpose set forth. 
36. The combination, with slide 61, having 
bracket 59, the segment-plate, and lever 75, 
and slide 62, having bracket 78, hub 77, and 
turning plug 77, engaged by lever 75, of the 
forming-roller carried by bracket 59, the curl 
ing-roller carried by bracket 78, and suitable 
rotation to the curling 
means for imparting 
roller. 
37. The combination, with slide 61, having 
bracket 59, the segment-plate, and lever 75, 
and slide 62, having bracket 78, hub 77, and 
turning plug, 77, engaged by lever 75, of the 
forming-roller having a spindle 56, a slide 58, 
engaging bracket 59 and having a guide 
through which the spindle passes, a spring 
' 
55 
65 
25 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
O 
II 5 
2C) 
I25 
EC 
 
472,974 
1 
O 
acting to hold the spindle and roller at the 
raised position, a pawl for locking said roller 
in operative position, the curling-roller car 
ried by bracket 78, and pawl 94 for locking 
the lever to the segment-plate. 
38. The combination, with slides 62 on op 
posite sides of the machine, each of said slides 
having boxes 82, carrying shafts 82, and boxes 
87, and curling-rollers journaled in said slides, 
of shaft 86, journaled in boxes 87, bevel-gears 
85, keyed to said shaft, but adapted to slide 
thereon, and bevel-gears on shaft 82, whereby 
motion is imparted to the curling-rollers. . 
39. The curling-rollers, shafts by which they 
are carried, bevel-gears 80 on said shafts, and 
slides 62, in which said shafts are journaled 
and which are provided with boxes 87, in com 
bination with shafts 82, bevel-gears at both 
ends of said shafts, shaft 86, and bevel-gears 
85, keyed to said shaft, but free to slide 
thereon, said gears being held by boxes 87 in 
engagement with gears on shafts 82. 
40. The combination, with the hat-holder, 
the rod and cone by which it is operated, the 
forming and curling rollers, slides 60, 61, and 
62, the compound cam, and connections, sub 
stantially as described and shown, between 
said slides and the cam, of gear-wheels 36 and 
39, threaded rods 33 and 118, engaged by said 
gear-wheels, angle-pieces 38, holding said 
gear-wheels in position, and intermediate con 
nections between threaded rod 118 and the 
slides, so that when said gear-wheels are ro 
tated the cone is moved upward to lock the 
hat-holder in position and the forming and 
curling rollers are simultaneously moved into 
operative position. 
41. The combination, with a compound cam 
consisting of two sections, each section con 
sisting of a series of ovals, and each oval cor 
responding in outline with the oval on the 
other section occupying the same relative po 
sition, slides 60, 61, and 62, and intermediate 
connections, substantially as described and 
shown, between said slides and the cam, of , 
forming and curling rollers carried by said 
35 
40 
45 
55 
slides, suitable means for connecting said 
slides together, so that all are moved by the 
cam, and suitable means for moving slides 61 
and 62 independent of slide 60, as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
- 
42. The combination, with the hat-holder, 
cone and rod 31, by which it is operated, the 
forming and curling rollers, and slides 60, 61, 
and 62, of slides 106 and 110, and intermediate 
connections whereby the movements of said 
slides are imparted to slides 61 and 62 inde 
pendently of slide 60, threaded rods 33 and 
118, and gears 36 and 39, engaging said rods, 
whereby the cone and slides are actuated si- 6 
multaneously to lock the hat-holder and to 
place the forming and curling rollers in oper 
ative position. 
43. The combination, with the hat-holder, 
of forming-roller 55, having shank 56, slide 
58, having guide 57, spring 91 for throwing 
the forming-roller out of operative position, 
and pawl 93 for locking it in operative posi 
tion, the curling-roller, slides 61 and 62, hav 
ing brackets 59 and 78, by which said rollers 
are carried, and connections between said 
slides which permit slide 62 and the curling 
roller to be moved backward, so that the form 
ing-roller may be raised out of operative po 
sition. 
44. The combination, with plate 12 and the 
hat-holder, of slide 61, having bracket 59, 
slide 58, engaging said bracket and having a 
guide 57, spindle 56 in said guide, the form 
ing-roller carried by said spindle, spring 91, 
adapted to lift the forming-roller out of oper 
ative position, slide 62, the curling-roller car 
ried thereby, hub 77, having turning plug 77, 
the segment-plate, and lever 75, engaging the 
turning plug and having a pawl engaging the 
Segment-plate. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS E. AVERY. 
Witnesses: 
- 
75 
L. H. HOYT, 
F. W. RANDALL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473074.txt	(No Model.) 
G. A. MASTERS. 
SCHOOL DESK, 
No. 473,074, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892. 
a 
p 
 
 
 
Zf 
- 7%. M i? Jabi 
e St. AE 
IT A. A 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. MASTERS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
SCHOOL-DESK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 473,074, dated April 19, 1892, 
Application filed April 13, 1891, Serial No. 388,645. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE A. MASTERS, 
of Chicago, in the State of Illinois, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in School-Desks, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to adjustable school 
desks; and the object of my improvements is 
to provide means for conveniently adjusting 
such desks to different heights in order to 
make them better subserve the purposes for 
which they are designed. I have attained 
this object by the means illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of a school 
desk containing my invention. Fig. 2 is an 
enlarged fragmentary vertical section taken 
on the line 22 of Fig. 1, looking toward the 
left, and representing a cross-section of a por 
tion of one of the end frames and a longitudi 
nal section of a portion of the shelf and top 
of such desk. Fig. 3 is a detail showing a 
plan or top edge view of a part of one of the 
end frames of Such desk. 
In the drawings, A designates the seat, A 
A* the back pieces, B the top, and B the 
shelf, which are all of ordinary construction, 
and they are connected to the end frames in 
the ordinary manner. 
The means which I have provided for ad 
justing the desk to different heights consists 
in making the end frames in separate Sec 
tions a. a' and connecting them by screw-rods 
b. There are four of Said screw-rods-two at 
each end of the desk. In the center said rods 
are each provided with an enlarged part b', 
fixed firmly thereto, so that said rods may be 
rotated thereby with the hand or by means 
of a wrench applied thereto. Said rods pass 
through openings c in the parts a, a?, which 
openings are either made oblong, as shown, 
or considerably larger than said rods, so as to 
afford sufficient play to avoid the binding of 
said rods or racking the desk by any throw 
ing of the parts out of Square or normal po 
sition in the operation of adjusting, as by 
raising or lowering the ends of the desk sepa 
The parts a d' have transverse open 
rately. 
ings c' in the line of the openings c, which 
are adapted to receive and hold each a nute, 
which is put in place before the rod b is en 
. 
tered, the transverse openings holding the 
nut from turning, so that the rotation of the 
rod will cause the threads of the screw to op 
erate and raise or lower the part a? of the end 
frame. Said nuts e have a sufficient vertical 
play in the openings c' to be variable from 
their horizontal plane, in order to prevent any 
binding of the rods therein during the ad 
justing of the desk for the reason before men 
tioned. The parts of said rods opposite to 
the part b' have their threads run in opposite 
directions, so that the rotation of said rods 
will cause the nuts e ethereon to move in op 
posite directions, in order to expedite the op 
eration of adjustment, 
For the purpose of fixing the desk in any 
desired adjustment two jam-nuts e' are pro 
vided on each of said rods, one to bear against 
the part C. and another to bear against the 
parta', whereby said rods may be fixed rig 
idly in said parts a, a'. 
In the illustrations the desk is shown as set 
in its lowest adjustment. By turning the 
rods b to the right the jam-nuts will turn with 
the same, permitting the nutse to move apart 
and elevate the top parta'. When the proper 
height is reached, the jam-nuts above the part 
b' should be set up against the part a? and 
the one below it down against the part a. 
It is essential that the top part of the desk 
should be supported on at least three points 
of Support-that is to say, there should be at 
least three of the rods b connected with the 
end frames, substantially in the manner 
shown, in order to properly support the top 
and permit it to be adjusted in the manner 
described; but four of said rods b are con 
templated, two in each of the end frames, as 
constituting the best embodiment of my said 
invention. 
The rods b as here shown are adapted to 
the minimum of standard height of school 
desks and designed to permit of an elevation 
from that to the maximum standard height 
of the same. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a School-desk, and in combination, the 
end frames made in separate sections, as a a', 
screw-rods b b, having swivel flexible connec 
CO 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
 
478,074 
b, having the parts b' near their center and 
provided with threads running in opposite 
direction on each side of said parts b, and 
nuts e, in connection with said rods and both 
of said sections a d", as and for the purpose 
specified. 
4. In a school-desk, and in combination, the 
end frames made in separate sections at a', 
having intersecting openings c c', screw-rods 
b, provided with the parts b'near the center 
and right and left hand threads at their op 
posite ends, screw-nutse, and jam-nutse, all 
connected and adapted to operate as and for 
the purpose specified. 
GEORGE A. MASTERS. 
25 
Witnesses: 
WM. R. GRISWOLD, Jr., 
ROBERT WAN SANDS. 
tion with said sections, adapted to secure them 
to one another and allow flection between 
them, and screw-thread connection adapted 
to adjust said sections toward and from one 
another, and the parts b'b' for revolving said 
rods, substantially as Specified. 
2. In a school-desk, and in combination, the 
end frames made in separate Sections and 
provided with openings c and transverse open 
ings c', intersecting each other, screw-rods fit 
ting loosely in the openings c, nutse, fitting 
in said transverse openings and having slight 
vertical play therein, and the parts b', fixed 
to said screw-rods, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
3. In a school-desk, and in combination, the 
end frames made in separate Sections C. C. and 
provided with intersecting openings c c', rods 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473174.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 473,174, 
 
bes 
rooflermos 
110// 
: 
s 
s 
So 2. EMECS 
Sisypii S. 
7,NGHS 
73 i 
vity s 
4. 
%. i 
2. 
- 
-n 
- 
-weathfrks 
... . 
s 
. 
* . 
s 
w 
; ; - 
ii., 
:: 
i. 
i. 
H. J. HAIGHT. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
ELECTRIC INDICATING SYSTEM AND INSTRUMENT, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892. 
Eig. 7. 
- 
i 
3. 
36 II, 
sy 
.12 
72 
T 2: . 
| S/2: 
NDAY %- K2. 
: 8aS 
QS 
-oia 
sS 
i 
As 
6 
so. 
io ity 
locatioscore.So 3x ES" 
6% S 7, NGHTS's 
ATY.. 
i 
\"/ 
it 
3 
wing 
's 
y 
y Ali 
r 
Ea '% 
2. the AS-7 
412; sitSYg 
7, 73's SE 
E oscoraq 
- 
s 
f 
O 
i 
; 
% 
& -r- 
e 
s an 
WEAt Ersil 
s 
: 
t 
SH 
bs, 
LoCALITY, | 
E. 
E. 
E. 
i 
311-uc-1-1 to 
Hervy J. Arvigit 
-4 gtovic 
(No Model.) 
H, J, HAIGHT 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
ELECTRIC INDICATING SYSTEM AND INSTRUMENT, 
No. 473,174, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892. 
Sitness.ca. 
 
P 
2 
3. GE/WA 
M w 
usag 
9 
9 
Ap 
T 
3.11uc14 bot 
: Aenry J. Haza/4 
a -- 2 2 
... 
2113 I6 
- 
4 entozie 
(No Model.) 
No. 473,174, 
 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892, 
& Lue 11 tot 
Azergy/. Ace/27 
4. & Etotic 
(No Model.) 
m 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
H. J. HAIGHT. 
ELECTRIC INDICATING SYSTEM. AND INSTRUMENT, 
No. 473,174. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892. 
 
N 
t 
 
 
N 
28iticssos. 
46.3 
- 
Jaucitor 
s 
Aerary J.Haza/?. 
242. a total e 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY JANSEN HAIGHT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRIC INDICATING SYSTEM AND INSTRUMENT. 
sPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 473,174, dated April 19, 1892. 
Application. filed December 15, 1891, Serial No. 415,134 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that, HENRY JANSENHAIGHT, 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Electric Indicating Systems 
and the Instruments Therefor, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
system for the intertransmission between a 
plurality of stations by electrical means of in 
formation which is capable of being rendered 
intelligible through the movements of the in 
dices of electric indicating-instruments. 
The present invention consists in improve 
ments on the systems and instruments set 
forth in Letters Patent of the United States 
Nos. 442,880 and 442,882, granted to me De 
cember 16, 1890; No. 454,867, granted to me 
June 30, 1891, and in application for Letters 
Patent of the United States, Serial No. 330,612, 
filed by me February 7, 1891. 
The new system comprising a portion of the 
present improvements is especially designed 
for the purpose of enabling a variety of data, 
concerning each of several subjects to be 
transmitted. For example, the system Inay 
be applied to the transmission of the meteor 
ological data of a number of localities, and 
for convenience of illustration and descrip 
tion the improved system will be so described. 
The invention consists, also, in improve 
ments upon the electric indicating - instru 
ments employed and in improvements upon 
the multiple-circuit closers employed. 
The present improvements are illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is an exterior view of a casing 
equipped with a number of the indicating 
instruments and two of the multiple-circuit 
closers. Fig. 2 is a diagram of the electric 
circuits at one station. Fig. 3 is a diagram 
showing the electrical connections between 
two stations. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are views in 
detail of the indicating-instrument. 
I will first describe the improvements in 
the indicating and multiple-circuit-closer in-f 
struments, and will then describe the im 
provements in the system. 
Electric indicating instrument.--This in 
strument is in most respects substantially 
similar to the indicating-instrument described 
in my application Serial No. 380,612, or in 
Letters Patent of Great Britain, No. 20,522, 
granted to me December 16, 1890. The fea 
tures of improvement consist principally in 55 
the construction of the instrument whereby a 
number of the parts heretofore employed (par 
ticularly the pawl-lifting mechanism) are dis 
pensed with. 
The instrument comprises as its primary 
features a properly-graduated dial or reading 
scale A, an index B, capable of a step-by-step 
movement in either direction, two actuating 
electro-magnets CC, and mechanism inter 
mediate between said magnets and said in- 6 
dex. The excitation of magnet C causes the 
movement of the indexin one direction, while 
the excitation of the other magnet C causes 
its movement in the opposite direction. The 
scale, index-magnets, and actuating mechan 
ism are all supported on a suitable supporting 
plate D of insulating material-such as wood 
and to the rear of this plate D is rigidly secured 
a metallic plate E. On opposite sides of this 
plate E are rigidly mounted two metallic 
brackets FF, which support the magnets C 
C, respectively. Also rigidly mounted on the 
plate E are three perpendicular metallic posts 
G. G. A T-shaped bridge His rigidly secured 
to the outer ends of the posts G by screws a 
a, so that said bridge is held parallel with the 
plate E and in rigid and immovable connec 
tion there with. On this rigidly mounted and 
secured bridge Hand the plate E are mounted 
all the actuating mechanism intermediate be 
tween the magnets C C and the index B. Con 
sequently the rigid support of the bridge His 
of the highest importance. The index Bisse 
cured to a shaft or spindle c, (so as to rotate 
therewith,) which is journaled in bearings 
formed by the plate E and by the bridge H. 
This shaft or spindle c carries at its rear end, 
between the plate Eand the bridge H, a pinion 
d, which meshes with a pinion e, carried by a 
shaft.fjournaled at opposite ends on the metal 
plate E and bridge H, the shaft f being paral 
lel with the shaft or spindlec. The shafts c 
are held in any position in which they may 
be left by a springg, which bears frictionally 
against the shaft.f. By rotating pinion e al 
ternately in opposite directions the pinion d. 
(and with it the shaft c and index B) will be 
rotated alternately in opposite directions. To 
enable the pinion e to be rotated in one di 
95 
75 
Oo 
IC) 
3o 
35 
45 
473,174 
o 
75 
2 
3o 
35 
O 
5 
e e 
rection the magnet C is provided. The arma 
ture h of this magnet is carried by a vibrat 
ing armature-lever J, which is carried by a 
rock-shafti, which is journaled at opposite 
5 ends by suitable provisions in the bridge H. 
and metal plate E. This armature-lever is vi 
brated in one direction when the armature h 
is attracted to the magnet C on the excitation 
of the same by the passage of an electric cur 
rent and in the opposite direction by a spring. 
ic. The upper arm of the armature-lever J 
carries a pawl n, pivotally mounted thereon. 
This pawl engages with a ratchet-wheelo, (or, 
more properly speaking, a star-wheel) fixed 
to the shaftf 
The location of the pawl n, relative to the 
ratchet or star wheel O and its method of co 
operation therewith constitute one of the es 
... sential features of the present invention. The 
extent of the movement of the Stely 
J should be always uniform and exact. 
O 
sequently provisions are provided for limiting 
its movement in both directions. In the con 
struction shown the magnet Climits the move 
ment of the pawl in toward the ratchet or star 
wheel o, while one of the posts G limits its 
movement in the opposite direction, the lever 
being normally held in contact with the post 
by the spring k. The pawl n is also in the 
normal position of the armature-lever main 
tained in a definitenormal position. The pawl 
has a tail end q, which is normally held in con 
tact with a fixed stop-pin r (carried by the ar 
mature-lever) by a springs. When the arma 
-ture-lever and its pawls are in their normal po 
sition, the pawl is entirely out of contact with 
the ratchet or star wheel and entirely out of 
Consequently the 
the path of its teeth. 
ratchet, or star wheel is free to be rotated, the 
resence of the pawl offering no obstruction 
whatever; but when the armature-lever swings 
on its pivot the pawl swings in such an are 
that it is brought in contact with one of the 
teeth of the ratchet or star wheel, and the ex 
tent of the movement of the pawl is such that 
in each movement of the armature-lever the 
pawl turns the ratchet-wheel (and conse 
quently the index B) through a certain defi 
When the armature-lever swings 
nite arc. 
backwardly, the pivotal connection there 
with of the pawl permits the latter to ride. 
back idly over the teeth of the ratchet or star 
wheel, the spring g preventing backward 
rotation of the ratchet. Since the pawl in 
when inactive and idle is entirely out of 
contact with the ratchet or star wheel o, no 
pawl-lifter, such as has heretofore been 
employed by me, is necessary to enable the 
ratchet or star wheel to be rotated in the op 
posite direction. In an exactly similar man 
her the magnet C controls the movement of 
an armature-lever J, carrying its armature h. 
Lever...J is located on the side of the shafts c 
f, opposite to that on which the lever J is lo 
65 cated, and it has a pawl n, (held in normal 
position by stop-pin r and springs,) which is 
normally out of contact with the ratchet or 
star wheel o, and which co-operates with said 
ratchet or star wheel o (on the opposite side 
from the pawl n) to rotate the index B in the 
opposite direction. The relation of the air 
mature-lever J and its pawl into the ratchet 
or star wheel ois.exactly the same as that of 
the lever J and pawl n, except that they are 
on the opposite side of the ratchet or star 
wheel. Consequently said pawl min its nor 
mal position offers no obstruction to the free 
rotation of the ratchet or star wheel, and no 
pawl-lifter for it is necessary. 
The extent of movement of the armatures 
of the magnets in connection with the rela 
tive lengths of the two arms of the armature 
levers, the number of teeth of the ratchet or 
star wheel and the proportionate sizes of the 
pinions d e determine the distance or step 
which the index B moves. The dial or scale 
A is graduated in accordance with the length ; 
of the step, and each graduation is deter- / 
mined by the particular unit of measurement 
which may be desired for the instrument. If, 
for example, it is a temperature-indicating 
instrument, this unit would be appropriately 
a degree of temperature. By successively 
magnetizing and demagnetizing one of the 
magnets, as C, the index may be moved any 
desired number of steps or degrees in one 
direction, and by successively magnetizing 
and demagnetizing the other magnet C the 
index may be moved any desired number of 
steps or degrees in the opposite direction. 
To enable the magnets C C to be actuated, 
they are included in proper electric circuits. . 
1 is a circuit-wire leading to magnet C. 2 is 
a wire leading to magnet C, and 11 is a return 
wire common to them both. Suitable bind 
ing-posts are shown for the connection of the 
circuit-wires. 
Multiple-circuit-closer instrument.--Two of 
these instruments are used at each station, 
and with a single exception both of the cir 
cuit-closing instruments are (or maybe) iden 
tical in construction with the multiple-circuit 
closer set forth in my United States Patent, 
No. 442,882, above referred to. Consequently 
the multiple-circuit closer is shown in the ac 
companying drawings diagrammatically only, 
reference being made to said patent for fur 
ther disclosure of its construction. The ob 
ject of the multiple-circuit closer is to bring 
a number of branch circuit-wires, as 12, suc 
cessively into communication with one pole 
of an electric generator. 
To this end it is 
provided with a circuit-closing arm L, which 
is in constant communication with an electric 
generator. This circuit- closing arm I, is 
given a step-by-step movement in a single di 
rection, so that it may be brought into contact 
with the several fixed electrodes v, with which 
the multiple-circuit,closer is provided. When 
ever the circuit-closing arm L is at rest, one 
of the branch wires, as 1, is in circuit. The 
step-by-step movement of the circuit-closing 
arm L is effected by means of an electro-mag 
net M and suitable intervening mechanism of 
 
S 5 
6o 
45 
So 
I25 
90. 
95 
OC 
Ios 
o 
II5 
478,174 
any well-known character. The magnet M is 
located in a local circuit which is controlled 
by means hereinafter specified. 
The arrangement of the multiple-circuit 
closers and the indicating - instruments is 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. In Fig. 1 are illus 
trated the instruments for a single station. 
It is assumed, for the sake of illustration and 
description, that the system is adapted for 
the transmission and indication of meteoro 
logical data. The number of indicating-in 
struments for each station will therefore de 
pend upon the variety of meteorological data 
which it is desired to transmit and indicate 
and the number of localities to which the data, 
refers. Assuming then that thermometric, 
wind, weather, and time indications are to be 
indicated for each of four separate localities 
(such as New York, Philadelphia, Baltimore, 
and Washington,) each station would be 
equipped with sixteen indicating-instruments, 
four for each locality. Fig. 1 is designed to 
illustrate such a system, showing, as it does, 
sixteen indicators, eachinstrument as a whole 
being lettered I", I, I, or I. There are also 
at each station. two multiple-circuit closers, 
(lettered as a whole MC and MC', respect 
ively) one of which MC is a locality-deter 
mining multiple-circuit closer, and the other 
MC is a data-determining multiple-circuit 
closer. 
The connections of the multiple-circuit clos 
ers MC MC with each other and with the in 
dicating-instruments are illustrated in the 
diagram, Fig. 2. Of the mechanism of each 
of the indicating-instruments there is shown 
in this figure only the index B and the actu 
ating electro-magnets C. C. The sixteen in 
dicating-instruments are arranged in four 
groups (one group for each locality) contain 
ing four instruments for each locality, one in 
strument I' being for thermometric indica 
tions, one I for time, one I for wind, and the 
other I for weather. These four instruments 
in each group having eight actuating electro 
magnets. C C, there are consequently eight 
equally-spaced electrodes v in the data multi 
ple-circuit closer, and there are eight wires 
1, 2, 3,4,5,6,7, and 8, connecting the respect 
ive electrodes with the magnets C C of all 
sixteen instruments. 
The wire connections are as follows: The 
odd-numbered wires 1357 are connected with 
the sixteen magnets C, while the even-num 
bered wires 2468 are connected with the six 
teen magnets C. The wire 1 is connected in 
multiple (by branch wires) with the magnets 
C of all four corresponding instruments' in 
each of the four groups, Wire 2 is connected 
in multiple (by branch wires) with the mag 
nets C of all four corresponding instruments 
I' in each of the four groups. Wire 3 is con 
nected in multiple (by branch wires) with the 
magnets C of all four corresponding instru 
ments I in each of the four groups. Wire4 
is connected in multiple (by branch wires) 
with the magnets Cof all four corresponding 
75 
instruments 
in each of the four groups. 
Wire 5 is connected in multiple (by branch 
wires) with the magnets C of all four corre 
sponding instruments I in each of the four 
groups. Wire 6 is connected in multiple (by 
branch wires) with the magnets C of all four 
corresponding instruments I in each of the 
four groups. Wire 7 is connected in multiple 
(by branch wires) with the magnets C of all 
four corresponding instruments I in each of 
the four groups, and wire 8 is connected in 
multiple (by branch wires) with the magnets 
C of all four corresponding instruments I in 
each of the four groups. The data multiple 
circuit closer MC accordingly has as m 
electrodes v as there are actuating-mag 
Cin each group of instruments. 
The circuit-closing arm L of the dat 
tiple-circuit closer MC is connected by 
9 with one pole of an electric generator N 
Consequently the position of the circuit-clos 
ing arm L with reference to the several elec 
trodes v determines which of the wires 1,2,3, 
90. 
4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 is in circuit with the generator, ... 
and consequently determines which magnet. 
C or C of which of the instruments I I Is I4 
is in circuit. The multiple-circuit closer MC 
is thus appropriately termed a  data multi 
ple - circuit closer, since it selects or deter. 
mines the character of the instrument which 
is in circuit and the particular magnet of that 
instrument. It does not, however, determine 
which of the groups of instruments is in cir roo 
cuit, since each electrode is in electrical con?. 
... 
nection (by its wire and the branches thereof) 
with all four of the corresponding instruments 
I, I, I, and I of each of the several groups. . . 
Since each group of instruments relates to 
a given locality, other means are necessary 
to determine the locality, and therefore the , . 
locality multiple-circuit closer MC is em- . 
. 
. 
ployed. The circuit-closing arm Lof this, 
multiple-circuit closer is connected by wire 
10 with the opposite pole of the generator N, 
and it has as many electrodes (which are let 
tered v' to distinguish them from the elec 
trodes of the data multiple-circuit closer. 
MC) as there are groups of instruments, and 
dr I5 
. 
consequently as many electrodes as there are ... 
localities. It is therefore appropriately termed 
a "locality' multiple-circuit closer. As there 
are four localities provided for in the illus. 
trated system, and consequently four groups 
of instruments, there are four electrodes' 
in the locality multiple-circuit closer MC. 
Four return-wires. 11, 12, 13, 14 connect the 
electrodes v' respectively with the several 
groups of indicators. The eight magnets C 
C of the four indicators I I I I4 of the first 
group (upper left-hand group, as shown in 
Fig. 2) are all corinected in multiple (by 
branch wires) with the return-wire 11, and in 
a similar manner the eight magnets of each 
of the other groups are connected in multi 
ple, by their return-wire 12, 13, or 14, with one . 
of the electrodes v' of the locality multiple 
circuit closer MC. Consequently in order 
I2O 
. 
. 
. 
. 
11 Io. 
20 
30 
35 
40 
45 
50. 
65 
 
478,174 
3O 
35 
O 
4. 
that any particular magnet of any particular 
one of the several indicating-instruments may 
be in circuit with generator N, the conjoint 
action of the circuit-closing arms. L L of the 
two multiple-circuit, closers MC and MC is 
necessary. 
With the position of the circuit clasing 
arms L I shown in Fig. 2 the circuit is, as 
follows: from battery, N, through wire 9, to 
arm L of multiple - circuit closer MC, elec 
trode v, wire 1, magnet C of instrument. I' of 
the upper left-hand group, wire 11, to elec 
trode 'v' of multiple-circuit closer MC, arm 
L thereof, and wire 10, back to the opposite 
pole of the battery N. It is therefore, evident 
that locality multiple-circuit closer:MC must 
have as many electrodes' as there are locali 
ties, that data multiple - circuit closer MC' 
must have as many electrodes v as there are 
magnets in the several; indicators, for each 
locality, and that consequently the product 
of the number of electrodes v' multiplied by 
the number of electrodes v must equal the 
total number of the magnets C C of all the 
indicators at the station. Thus if there were 
twenty-four localities to be reported, and six 
characters of indications for each locality 
there would be two hundred and eighty-eight 
of the magnets CC. Under the system shown 
in my patent, No. 442,882, hereinbefore re 
ferred to, this would have necessitated two 
hundred and eighty-eight electrodes in the 
single multiple-circuit closer there employed, 
and (since the multiple-circuit closing arm can 
move only in one direction) it might have re 
quired in the most extreme cases a makigand 
oreaking of the: circuit which controls the 
movement of the circuit,closing arm two hun 
dred and eighty-seven times in order to bring 
By using 
the desired electrode into circuit. 
the two multiple-circuit closers MC and MC, 
however, in the supposed instance the lo 
cality multiple-circuit closer MC would have 
twenty-four electrodes v', and the data mul 
tiple-circuit closer MC would have twelve 
electrodes v, and under the most disadvanta 
geous circumstances it would only require 
making and breaking a circuit thirty-four 
times (twenty-three plus eleven) to bring the 
desired magnet C or Cinto circuit -that is, if 
independent means were provided for oper 
ating the two multiple-circuit closers. Fig. 2. 
also shows electrical means for controlling the 
movements of the circuit-closing arms I, I, of 
55 the two multiple-circuit closers MC and MC, 
and also for moving in the proper direction 
the index df the particular indicating-instru 
ment which is brought into circuit by means 
of the conjoint action of the two multiple-cir 
cuit closers. 
The controlling-magnet M of multiple-cir 
cuit closer MC is in a local circuit 15, having 
generator LB, said local circuit having a 
break controlled by a relay-magnet RM'. 
Relay-magnet RM' is a circuit having line 
- wire 16 and a wire 17 leading to a main bat 
tery MB. A break in wire 17 is controlled by 
45. 
a switch or key O. By manipulating switch 
or key O the arm L of multiple-circuit closer 
MC is given a step-by-step, movement, which 
brings it successively in contact with the sev 
eral electrodes v. By including a plurality 
of relay-magnets RM' in series in the line 16 
it is evident that a plurality of multiple-cir 
cuit closers MC at a plurality of stations can 
be operated in unison. 
The controlling-magnet M of multiple-cir 
cuit closer MCis in a local circuit 18, having 
generator LB, said local circuit having a 
break controlled by a relay-magnet RM. 
Relay-magnet RM is in a circuit having line 
wire 19 and a wire 20 leading to the main 
battery MB. A break in wire 20 is controlled 
by a switch or key P. By manipulating switch 
or key P the arm L. of multiple-circuit closer 
MC is given a step-by-step movement, which 
brings it successively in contact with the sev 
eral electrodes v. By including a plurality of 
relay-magnets RM in series in the line 19 it 
is evident that a plurality of multiple-circuit 
closers MC at a plurality of stations can be 
operated in unison. 
The local circuit, which includes the battery 
N, wires 9 10, arms. L L of the two multiple 
circuit closers, and one magnet of one of the 
indicating-instruments, has a break either in 
wire 9 or in wire 10, (it being shown in wire 
10,) which is controlled by a relay-magnet 
Relay-magnet RM is in a circuit hav. 
RM8. 
ing a line-wire 21 and a wire 22 leading to the 
battery MB. A break in wire 22 is controlled 
by a switch or key Q. By manipulating key 
or switch Q the index B of the particularin 
dicating-instrument in circuit is given a step 
by-step motion forward or back, depending 
upon whether magnet C or C is in circuit. 
By including a plurality of the magnets RM 
in series in the line 21 it is evident that a 
plurality of corresponding indicating-instru. 
ments at a plurality of stations can be oper 
ated in unison. 
The system as thus far disclosed is distin 
guished from my prior patents only in that 
two multiple-circuit closers having special 
relation to each other are employed. In Fig. 
3, however, an arrangement of multiple-cir 
cuit closers at two stations X and Y is shown 
which dispenses with one of the three line 
wires 16 1921, one of the three local batteries 
LB LB N, and one of the switches or keys 
OPQ. This is done by dispensing with my 
special means for operating one of the multi 
ple-circuit closers, as MC. In Fig. 3 it is also 
indicated how the relay-magnets can be ar 
ranged in series in order to operate the in 
struments at two or more stations in unison. 
In this figure, for convenience in illustration, 
only one indicating-instrument at each of the 
stations X and Y is shown. The circuit-wires 
of the other.indicating-instruments are, how 
ever, indicated. The arrangement of the cir 
cuits in this figure is the same as in Fig. 2, 
except as follows: Line-wire 16, relay-magnet 
RM, wire 17, and switch C (which control 
{ 
... 
. 
75 
95 
OC) 
I o5 
O 
IS 
25 
the locality multiple-circuit closer MC) are 
omitted. Wire 15, leading from the control 
ling-magnet M of multiple-circuit closer MC, 
is joined to wire 10, and a wire 23 leads to 
said magnet Mfrom an additional intercalated 
fixed electrode won the data multiple-circuit 
closer MC. Consequently magnet M of lo 
cality multiple-circuit closer MC is in a local 
circuit, including wires 9 23 15 10, arm L of 
data multiple-circuit closer MC, electrode v, 
and the local battery N, which effects the 
movements of the indicating-instruments. 
When the arm L of multiple-circuit closer 
MC makes the step from the two adjacent 
electrodes 2 v on either side of the interca 
lated electrode v, the arm L, in passing over 
said electrode av, makes and breaks the cir 
cuit, including the magnet M of the multiple 
circuit closer MC, and consequently the arm 
L thereof is moved one step at each complete 
rotation of the arm L of the multiple-circuit 
closer MC. 
It may be here noted that the only differ 
ence in construction between the multiple 
circuit closer here employed and that set forth 
in my patent, No. 442,882, consists in the in 
tercalated electrode it, on which the circuit 
closing arm I does not dwell. 
As a convenient and preferred construction, 
all the instruments at a station are mounted 
in one casing, as indicated in Fig. 1, the op 
erating mechanisms of each group of indicat 
ing-instruments IIII being mounted on a 
single metallic plate E. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A ratchet or star wheel capable of rota 
tion in opposite directions, the rotary shaft or 
spindle carrying said star - wheel, and the 
Spring g, bearing on said shaft or spindle, in 
combination with two oppositely-swingingle 
vers on opposite sides of said ratchet or star 
wheel, each of said levers swinging through a 
definite and determined arc, a pivoted pawl 
pivoted to each of said levers, and a stop r 
and Spring S on each lever, which co-operate 
to maintain said pivoted pawl in its normal 
position resting against said stop, each of 
said pawls in its normal position and in the 
normal position of its lever being entirely out 
of contact and interference with said ratchet 
or star wheel, but each of said pawls being 
brought into contact with one of the teeth of 
said ratchet or star wheel when its said lever 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
50 
473,174 
5 
is swung toward the same, thereby rotating 
said ratchet or star wheel, substantially as set 55 
s 
forth. 
2. A multiple-circuit closer MC, having a 
plurality of equally-spaced electrodes, a cir 
cuit-closing arm having a step-by-step move 
ment which is brought successively into con 
tact with and dwells upon each of said elec 
trodes, and an additional electrode it, located 
in the path of said circuit-closing arm and 
between two of said equally-spaced electrodes, 
in combination with a second multiple-cir 
cuit closer MC, having a plurality of equally 
spaced electrodes, a circuit-closing arm hay 
ing a step-by-step movement, whereby it is 
brought successively into contact with and 
dwells upon each of said electrodes, and an 
actuating-magnet M, an electric generator N. 
an electric conductor connecting one pole of 
said generator with the circuit-closing arm of 
said multiple-circuit closer MC', an electric 
conductor 23, connecting said electrode 20 With 
said actuating-magnet M, and an electric Con 
ductor connecting said magnet M with the Op 
posite pole of said generator, substantially as 
set forth. 
. . 
3. A plurality of groups of electric indicat 
ing-instruments, each group of indicating-in 
struments having a plurality of said instru 
ments, the indicating-instruments in one 
group corresponding with the instruments in 
the other group or groups, in combination 
with two multiple-circuit closers MC and MC, 
each having a plurality of electrodes, and a 
circuit-closing arm capable of a step-by-step 
movement, whereby it is brought successively 
into contact with and dwells upon each of 
the electrodes, each of the electrodes of one 
of said multiple-circuit closers, as MC, being 
connected in multiple with the corresponding 
electric indicating-instrument in each of said 
groups, and each of the electrodes of the other 
multiple-circuit closer MC being connected 
in multiple with all of the indicating-instru 
ments in one of said groups, substantially as 
set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
. . 
4. 
. 
. 
HENRY JANSEN HAIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR S. BROWNE, 
CARLETON E. SNELL. 
o 
75 
OCs 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473274.txt	(No Model.) 
H. J. WOGEL. 
BREAST OR TOP FOR METALLIC WESSELs, 
No. 473,274, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892, 
-zzz-z- 
zzz- - 
 
S. 
S. 
S3 
SS 
A. 
s 
v 
 
 
scies 
%. a3a/4. 
/ 626-eeee-e- 
vy 2 7a-2 c6, 
6, 2 & 1244c. 
elitovie 
THE ORRIS PETERs co, hoto-uTHo, washington, D.c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
| 
HENRY J. VOGET OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM 
WOGEL & BROTHERS, OF SAME PLACE. 
BREAST OR TOP FOR METALLIC VESSELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,274, dated April 19, 1892. 
Application filed November 27, 1891. Serial No. 413,236. (No model.) 
. 
ill 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY J. VOGEL, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Brooklyn, in the State of New York, have 
invented a new and useful Breast or Top for 
Containing-Vessels, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
breasts and tops for vessels within which 
liquids may be stored and packed and the 
contents Sealed against escape, and especially 
pertains to improvements of the top or breast 
to which the seal or closure is applied. 
My invention consists in the details of con 
struction hereinafter specified, and particu 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
I have fully and clearly illustrated my in 
vention in the accompanying drawings, where 
Figure 1 is a view of the invention having 
a plain circular flange to receive a cap or lid 
and adapted to be applied to a surface of 
any part of a metallic vessel. 
Fig. 2 is a 
view showing the vertical flange made with 
threads in the outer wall of the flange and 
the inner wall left plain. 
Fig. 3 is a view 
wherein the flange has both walls screw 
threaded and to which either an outside or 
inside fitting cap may be applied, and Fig. 
4 is a view showing the invention applied 
to a portion of the can or vessel other than 
the top, 
A designates the top or breast of a can or 
other vessel having my invention applied 
thereto, the plate and flange being formed in 
one piece integral, the flange being crimped 
This cap-flange 
or otherwise formed therein. 
1 consists of a circular vertical flange adapted 
to receive and hold a cover and may be plain 
and smooth, as seen in Fig. 1 of the drawings, 
or it may have the inner wall plain and the 
outer wall screw-threaded, as seen in Fig. 2 
of the drawings, or the flange may be formed 
with threads in both walls, as seen in Fig. 3 
of the drawings at 2. 
The purpose of the invention is to provide 
a breast or top piece adapted to be attached 
over an opening in the vessel, as a sheet-metal 
can or the cans or vessels of other material 
used for shipping and containing fluids. 
The invention consists, as stated hereto 
fore, in a single piece of material formed with 
an integral vertical flange composed of two 
thicknesses of metal compressed into adja 
cent supporting positions, so that the flange 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
will be reinforced or strengthened, and the 
metal within the flange constituting the 
floor or base may be cut out and the flange 
left standing, without detriment to the se 
curity and safety of the seal of the closure 
applied thereto. It will be perceived that 
when the metal within the flange is cut out 
the flange will still be standing strong and 
stiff and not nearly so liable to be bent or 
kinked by the usages to which it may be 
subjected, and the cap or lid have a firm and 
staple connection to the flange. This because 
of the double wall of metal of which the 
flange is made up. 
The floor of metal within 
the flange may be made continuous, or it may 
have a filling-hole made in it. In the latter 
instance a cap may be secured to the flange 
or plate by solder, or it may be provided with 
a valve to close the hole. These matters of 
closures are mentioned here to show the man 
ner of practicing my invention to completion. 
They do not form part of my present inven 
tion and are not slown, as they are Well kilow;n 
in the trade. 
It is apparent that my invention may be 
applied to other parts of a vessel than the 
top, and may be fixed and secured to any 
vessels adapted to contain a liquid, as the 
outer extending portions or flanges of the 
metal afford means for either soldering or oth 
erwise connecting the plate to the vessel. 
Having thus legally specified and described 
my invention, what I claim, and desire to Se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A top or breast for a vessel, made of a 
single piece of metal and formed with an in 
tegral vertical cap-flange composed of two 
thicknesses of the metal, and a floor at the 
base of the inner wall of the vertical flange 
integral there with, substantially as described. 
2. A top or breast for a vessel, made of a 
single piece of metal formed with an integral 
vertical cap-flange composed of two thick 
nesses of the metal and provided with screw 
threads, and an integral floor at the base of 
the inner wall of the vertical flange, substan 
tially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereto set my 
hand in the presence of two attesting wit 
neSSeS. 
HENRY J. WOGEL. 
Attest: . 
HARRY J. WALENTINE, 
O. C. PATTERSON. 
75 
90 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473374.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 473,374, 
J. T. BALDWIN, 
PROPELER 
2 Sheets-Sheet I. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
fire NORRIS PEERs co, PHofo-Litto, washington, D. c. 
 
J. T. BALDWIN, 
PROPELLER 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 473,374, 
 
NITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. BALDWIN, OF PETALUMA, CALIFORNIA. 
- 
PROPELLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 473,374, dated April 19, 1892. 
Application filed July 25, 1891, Serial No. 400,758, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all Zwhom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Peta 
luma, Sonoma county, State of California, 
have invented an Improvement in Propellers; 
and I hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to the class of propel 
le's for vessels; and it consists in an endless 
belt mounted upon end drums at the bow and 
stern of the vessel, said belt extending and 
traveling longitudinally of the vessel under 
its bottom and carrying a series of paddles. 
It also consists in certain novel details of 
construction and arrangement which will be 
hereinafter-fully described, and specifically 
pointed out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and effective propeller, especially 
adapted for use with comparatively flat-bot 
tomed vessels. 
Particular advantages of my propeller will 
be hereinafter set forth in connection with 
the description thereof. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
for a more complete explanation of my inven 
tion, Figure 1 is a side elevation of a vessel, 
showing my propeller. Fig. 2 is a top view of 
same. Fig. 3 is a perspective detail of the 
propeller. Fig. 4 is a cross-section of one of 
the paddles. 
A represents a vessel, and l3 is the water in 
which it floats. 
C is a drum at the bow of the vessel, suit 
ably housed and protected. This drum is 
driven in any suitable manner, as by the 
side engines D, connecting-rods d, and cranks 
c of the drum-shaft. 
This is but one form of 
driving mechanism, and I do not confinemy 
self to it, as many other forms may be used. 
At the stern of the vessel is another drum E, 
suitably mounted and protected. Over these 
drums passes and travels my endless-belt 
propeller. This is constructed of wires For 
other suitable bands, belts, or cables, to which 
are secured the series of paddles G. This 
endless-paddle propeller extends longitudi 
nally of the vessel and travels in the direction 
of the arrows-that is to say, forwardly over 
the forward drum C and under said drum 
taking the water on a backward course, thence 
passing in the water under the longitudinal 
center of the vessel to the rear drum, up and 
Be it known that I, JOHN T. BALDWIN, a around which it passes over the top of the ves 
sel to the point of beginning. This endless 
paddle propeller may be made in various Ways, 
the principle feature being its location in the 
middle length of the vessel from end to end 
thereof. I prefer, however, to make it, as here 
shown, of a number of parallel wires or cables, 
to which are secured transversely the paddles, 
each consisting of two parts grooved to the 
wires or cables and held thereto by hook-bolts 
h and by long rivets h, as shown, so that said 
paddles are double ones, extending on each 
side of the wires. This construction enables 
them to be readily secured to the wires and 
easily removed for the purpose of substitut 
ing others when needed. The ends of the 
belt are joined by passing the ends of the 
wires through the end paddles and bringing 
them back and twisting said ends upon them 
selves, as shown at I, and further by joining the 
two end paddles by bolts J. This renders the 
entire belt an adjustable one, so that its length 
may be varied as may be desired. The belt 
is a wide one, extending pretty nearly the en 
tire width of the hull of the vessel. The pad 
dles are placed near together, being separated 
by a distance about equal to their width. 
The propeller is specially adapted for flat or 
nearly straight bottomed vessels of uniform 
width of hull. The end drums, over which the 
propeller passes, are flanged and are housed, SO 
as to be practically water-tight, and said drums 
are the full width of the vessel's hull. Their 
diameters should be about six times the draft 
of the loaded vessel. The endless-paddle pro 
peller sweeps the whole bottom of the vessel 
and is kept in place by its own buoyancy and 
by suitable guides on each side of the vessel's 
bottom. The upper part of the propeller 
swings clear between the two end drums above 
the upper deck, and by being adjustable as 
to length its friction on the drums may be 
regulated to use the whole power of the en 
Ordinary vessels when running in rivers at 
good speed are pushed by their propelling de 
vices against the water, causing the latter to 
rise several hundred feet ahead of them, to 
fall nearly a foot abreast of them, and to pile 
up behind them in large waves, giving mo 
tion to a large weight of water constantly. 
16S. 
w 
90 
95 
OO 
IO 
25 . 
35 
45 
 
2 
473,374 
formed of two parts bolted together and hav 
ing the wires or cables passing through them, 
and the bolts h, passing into the paddle-sec 
tions and having hooked inner ends embrac 
ing the wires or cables, substantially as here 
in described. 
2. A propeller consisting of drums at the 
bow and stern of the vessel, an endless belt 
located in the middle length of the vessel 
from end to end thereof and passing around 
the drum and above and below the vessel, Said 
belt consisting of parallel wires or cables and 
the two-part paddle-sections, through the cen 
tral portions of which the wires or cables 
pass, whereby the paddles extend each side 
thereof and form double paddles, and means 
for securing the paddle-sections, substan 
tially as herein described. 
3. A propeller for vessels, consisting of 
drums at the bow and stern of the vessel, the 
series of endless parallel wires or cables pass 
ing over said drums and longitudinally under 
and above the middle length of the vessel, 
and the transverse two-part paddles secured 
together and grooved at their meeting sur 
faces to receive the wires or cables, said wires 
or cables having their ends passed through 
the paddles and thence returned and twisted 
upon themselves, whereby an adjustable con 
nection is formed, substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
In witness whereof I have here unto set my 
- 
hand. 
45 
55 
65 
JOHN T. BALD WIN. 
Witnesses: 
S. II. NOURSE, 
J. A. BAYLESS. 
In the ocean the same effect is produced, 
though not so apparent, as is seen by the long 
Widening side waves, the bulge in front, and 
the large waves behind, and the strong mo 
tion of the wake of the vessel requiring a 
good portion of the power to give motion to 
SO much water. 
By the use of my propeller the water is 
beaten down in front by the paddles as fast 
as the vessel comes to it. The paddles take 
a good grip on the water the whole length and 
width of the vessel and in the deepest and 
best place. 
In practice at a moderate speed and in still 
Water there is no forward or side motion and 
but little back motion in the wake, thus econo 
nizing power in a great degree and attaining 
higher speed. 
I am aware of endless belts provided with 
paddles and mounted on each side of the ves 
sel similarly to ordinary side paddle-wheels, 
differing only in being elongated or elliptical 
instead of circular; but this is not my in 
vention, as the effect produced by these side 
propellers is not the same as that produced 
by my propeller, which beats down the water 
in front and avoids the necessity of the ves 
Sel pushing so much water in front of it, these 
advantages not being present with the side 
propeller's referred to. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
I. A propeller for vessels, consisting of 
drums at the bow and stern of the vessel, the 
Series of endless parallel wires or cables pass 
ing over said drums and longitudinally under 
and above the vessel, the transverse paddles 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473474.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. PEPPER, 
KNIT FABRIC, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 473,474, 
Patented Apr. 26, 1892, 
 
ZAN 
W 
ZAMANAMWAMAMA 
AMAM 
& 
A 
NAS 
s 
MAMAMAMA 
XAVA 
ARAN 
MAMWAMAWA 
M 
RWA 
AWANAMAMWAMWAMAMAYA 
AWSW 
2. 
WSSS 
NA 
MAMAMAMAN 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
MAMM 
AVMAN 
S. 
MAMAM 
GAMAWA 
YAMAYA 
WAWAXAMAWANVAMMAM 
KAMAW 
&aaaaaaaa 
?C 
??????????. 
oasis rereas co, Photo-Litho, wast'", 
(No Model.) 
No. 473,474, 
W. H. PEPPER, 
KNIT FABRIC. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 26, 1892. 
 
|?TH 
?T?, ?T; 
??6 Q 2 7 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HENRY PEPPER, OF LAKE VILLAGE, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
KNIT FAB R || C. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 473,474, dated April 26, 1892. 
Application filed September 24, 1891, Serial No. 406,766, (No model.) 
? ? 
2 ? 
To a?, ??fu??, ? ??? ??7nce7"?: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM HENRY PEP 
PER, of Lake Village, in the county of Belknap 
and State of New Hampshire, have invented 
a new and Improved Knit Fabric, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The improved knit fabric which constitutes 
this invention is composed of alternate body 
portions and stripes or Welts. Each body por 
tion is composed of a single thread and of rib 
stitches, while each welt or stripe is composed 
of an independent thread and of plainstitches. 
Each welt or stripe is backed by a backing 
which is composed of the same thread as the 
body portions and is of plainstitches. Each 
Welt or stripe and its backing are joined to 
gether only where both join with and merge 
into the ribbed body portions. The improved 
fabric may be knit by hand, but is preferably 
knit upon a circular independent-needle knit 
ting-machine having cylinder-needles and 
dial-needles, a proper machine for this pur 
pose being set forth in Letters Patent of the 
United States granted October 20, 1891, No. 
461,508, to myself, Albert T. L. Davis, and 
George A. Sanders. 
The improved fabric is illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a view diagrammatic in charac 
ter of the improved fabric. Fig. 2 is a cross 
section thereof. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sec 
tion of a portion of the fabric. Fig. 4 is a de 
tail view, on an enlarged scale, showing the 
- 
formation and character of the stitches. 
The main body portions A of the fabric are 
of the well-known rib stitch and contain 
in themselves no feature of novelty. These 
ribbed body portions of the fabric are con 
veniently knit upon a circular independent 
needle knitting-machine having cylinder and 
dial needles, such machines (as is well known) 
producing a ribbed tubular web or fabric; or 
such body portions may be knit by hand by 
the method of hand-knitting commonly known 
as purling. 
Certain features, however, of 
the well-known method of knitting the ribbed 
portions of the fabric and certain features of 
the ribbed portions themselves will be referred 
to, as they should be borne in mind in con 
sidering the novel and characteristic features 
of the improved fabric. The ribbed body 
portions of the fabric are knit with a single 
yarn or thread, so that each ribbed portion 
is of a uniform color throughout. The ordi 
nary circular independent-needle knitting 
machine having cylinder and dial needles 
(such machines being, for convenience, here 
inafter called  dial knitting-machines) for 
knitting a plain ribbed circular web are organ 
ized to knit with a single thread. This single 
thread is operated upon by both the cylinder 
and the dial needles, the dial-needles being 
disposed between the cylinder-needles at 
proper intervals. In making a plain ribbed 
fabric of one-and-one stitches the dial 
needles alternate with the cylinder-needles. 
The formation of the stitches in a one-and 
one ribbed fabric is indicated at the top and 
bottom portions of Fig. 4. Each of the ribbed 
portions of the fabric is composed of vertical 
rows of loops aca, which alternate with verti 
cal rows of loops y J. The loopsac differ from 
the loops gy in that each loop ac in any hori 
zontal row, as 11, passes first in front of and 
then behind the two strands of the loop ac in 
the horizontal row 2 2 immediately above, 
whereas each loop jy in the horizontal row 1 1 
passes first behind and then in front of the 
two strands of the loop / in the horizontal 
row 2 2 immediately above. The thread or 
yarn, however, of which the loops / ) are 
formed is, it will be observed, a continuation 
of the same thread or yarn as that of which 
the loops ac ac are formed. When such a 
ribbed fabric as this is formed on a dial knit 
ting-machine, the loops acac are formed by the 
cylinder-needles and the loops, y are formed 
by the dial-needles, (assuming that the fab 
ric is viewed as it comes from the machine.) 
A tubular ribbed web or fabric thus formed 
is old and well known in the art. 
The main characteristic and novel feature 
of the presentinvention consists in the stripes 
or welts' B B, which appear in the com 
..pleted fabric at suitably-disposed intervals, 
as indicated in Fig. 1. The formation of 
these stripes or welts will be best understood 
by referring to Fig. 4. In this figure the 
stitches constituting the stripe or welt are 
distinguished from the stitches which consti 
tute the body of the fabric by being shaded. 
Fig. 4 shows a portion of one of the stripes 
or welts. The stripe or welt is formed by a 
separate thread or yarn distinct from the 
55 
?? 
75 
90 
I OO 
35 
45 
 
2 
478,474 
75 
thread or yarn of which the body of the Web 
or fabric is formed. 
In case the fabric is made on a dial knit 
ting-machine-such as is set forth in said 
Letters PatentNo. 461,50S-the knitting-cams, 
which actuate the dial-needles SO as to cause 
them to co-operate with the cylinder-nee 
dles in knitting the ribbed portions AA, are 
thrown out of action, so that the dial-needles 
cease to knit upon the main thread or yarn 
simultaneously with the cylinder - needles. 
The knitting-cams which actuate the cylin 
der-needles, however, are not thrown out of 
action, sothat the cylinder-needles still con 
tinue to knit with the main thread or yarn. 
Simultaneously with the throwing out of ac 
tion of the knitting-cams, which cause the 
dial-needles to co-operate with the cylinder 
needles in knitting the ribbed portions A A, 
a second set of knitting-cams is thrown into 
action, which causes the dial-needles to knit 
upon a second or welt thread or yarn that is 
fed to the dial-needles at a different point 
from where the main thread is fed to the cyl 
inder-needles. This second thread forms the 
welt stitches or loops & &, which are distin 
guished by shading in Fig. 4. 
The dial-nee 
dles commence to knit with the Welt-thread 
at the same time that they cease to knit with 
the main thread, so that the last row of loops 
or stitches which the dial-needles have taken 
from the main thread are still upon the dial 
needles when they commence to take the Welt 
thread. Consequently the first row of the 
Welt-stitches a 2 are interlocked with the last 
row of the stitches / J. The effect of this op 
eration is clearly indicated in Fig. 4. The 
horizontal row 5 5 of the stitches ac and / is 
the last row of the lower ribbed portion A. 
The stitches y y in this row 55 are the loops 
of the main thread left on the dial-needles 
when they cease to take the main thread, and 
the stitches or loops 2 2 in the horizontal row 
6 6 next above the row 55 are the first line 
of stitches which the dial-needles take from 
the welt thread and they are interlocked with 
the stitches / ) in the row 55. As the knit 
ting then progresses the dial-needles continue 
to knit with the Welt-thread, each succeeding 
row or round of the welt-thread loops or 
stitches being interlocked with the preceding 
row or round of the welt-stitches. None of 
the rows or rounds of the Welt-stitches 2 & 
above the first row 6 6 (except as hereinafter 
stated) are interlocked with the loops if y, 
formed by the dial-needles with the main 
thread, and none of the Welt-stitches are in 
any manner interlocked with the loops or 
stitches aca, (or U. v.) formed by the cylinder 
needles. In other words, the welt IB is com 
posed of stitches 2 2, which are knit entirely 
Consequently the welt 
by the dial-needles. 
B is composed of plain stitches and not of 
ribbed stitches, since, as is well known, when 
a single set of knitting-needles knits with a 
single thread or yarn a plain web is produced. 
In the meanwhile, while the welt-stitches are 
3o 
35 
4O 
45 
5o 
55 
?? 
being knit by the dial-needles, the cylinder 
needles continue to knit with the main thread. 
While thus knitting alone with the main 
thread the cylinder-needles form the loops at 
inv, which in the first row 6 6 above the ribbed 
work in terlock with the stitches Or loOpS 0 C. 
The loops u v are just like the loops aga, ex 
cept that they are joined with each other in 
the same row or round instead of alternating 
with the dial-stitches y y or 2 2. Thus the cyl 
inder-needles, while knitting independently 
of the dial-needles, knit a plain Web, which is 
entirely distinct and separate from the Welt 
knit by the dial-needles, except where both 
are joined to and merged into the ribbed Web. 
When a welt or stripe of sufficient width has 
been knit, the separate knitting of the plain 
stitch welt or stripe and of the plain-stitch 
backing is stopped, the welt or stripe and its 
backingarejoined together, the separate Welt 
thread is broken off, and the knitting of a 
ribbed body portion A of the fabric is re 
sumed with the main thread alone. 
In case the fabric is made on a dial knit 
ting-machine such as is set forth in said Let 
ters Patent No. 461,508, these results are ac 
complished as follows: The knitting - cams 
which actuate the dial-needles So as to cause 
them to knit with the welt-thread and SO form 
the welt-stitches 2 g are thrown out of action, 
and at the same time the welt-thread is broken 
off by a suitable thread-breaker. Simultane 
ously the other set of knitting-cams, which 
actuate the dial-needles and cause them to co 
operate with the cylinder-needles, are thrown 
into action, so that both sets of needles knit 
with the main thread and form a ribbed fab 
ric, the dial-needles again knitting the loops 
or stitches y 21, alternating with the loops or 
stitches ac ar, formed by the cylinder-needles. 
When the shifting of the dial knitting-calms 
takes place, the dial-needles carry a row or 
round of the welt-loops a 2, as shown at roW 
99 in Fig. 4, and the dial-stitches y y in the 
first row or round 10 10 of the upper Section 
of the ribbed fabric are consequently inter 
locked with the stitches & &, so that the Welt 
is joined without seaming or interruption 
with the ribbed web at its upper as Well as at 
its lower edge. 
The drawings show in Fig. 4 the Web as it 
comes from the machine, the outside being 
the wrong side of the web and the welt con 
sequently being inside. When the webis 
turned right side out the welt shows on the 
outside. If the main thread and Welt-thread 
are of different colors-asa, white main thread 
and a redwelt-thread-afabric will beformed 
in which the body portions will be a solid 
white color and of rib-stitches and it will 
have a horizontal welt or stripe of a Solid red 
color and of plain stitches. The red welt en 
tirely conceals the white backing fabric be 
neath, none of the white stitches showing 
through. The fabric is thus distinguished 
and characterized by having ribbed body por 
tions of one solid color and plain-stitch trans 
9o 
1 ?? 
IO 
II 5 
I 25 
? ? 
p 
473,474 
3 
verse Welts or stripes of a contrasting solid 
color. The welts, it will be observed, are dis 
tinguished from the body both by the char 
acter of stitches and by the color of the 
thread. The welt is also thus formed without 
breaking the main thread or discontinuing 
knitting with it, so that the fabric where the 
welt is formed is as thick and close as the 
ribbed portions of the fabric. In fact, a lit 
tle more thread is required to form the welt 
and its backing than would be required to 
form an equal width of ribbed web, as will 
be evident from an inspection of Fig. 4. The 
separation between the welt and its backing 
is clearly indicated in Figs. 2 and 3. 
The improved fabric has been described as 
being made on a dial knitting-machine such 
as is set forth in Letters Patent No. 461,508. 
Since that patent describes a circular-knit 
ting machine, the fabric made thereon would 
be tubular, with peripheral stripes or welts. 
The fabric need not, however, be tubular, and 
is not dependent for its construction upon 
any particular machine, since it can be knit 
by hand with ordinary knitting-needles. If 
knit by hand with ordinary knitting-needles, 
the body portion would be knit with one set 
of needles and with a single thread by pur 
ling, and the welt and its backing would be 
knit separately by two sets of needles. 
In Fig. 1 a knit web is illustrated having a 
succession of ribbed body portions A and 
welts or stripes B. As shown in this figure, 
the upper part is the first part knit and the 
lower part is the last partknit, Abroad welt 
B is at the top, then a narrow ribbed part A, 
then a narrow welt B', then a broad ribbed 
part A', and then a repetition of the same 
parts. Loose courses C C of stitches may be 
formed in the web at desired intervals, as 
shown, to cut off by and to pick on by. 
The sections of the fabric shown, each 
comprising the bands and welts BABA", are 
suitable for stocking-tops, shirt-cuffs, and 
drawers-bottoms. For this purpose a cutting- 45 
off slack course C is run in just preceding 
the broad welt B, so that the welt is at the 
terminal end. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A knit fabric having a body portion, a 5o 
55 
welt or stripe, and a backing to said welt or 
stripe, the body portion being formed of rib 
stitches and of a single main thread, the Welt 
or stripe being formed of plain stitches and 
of a welt-thread separate from said main 
thread, and the backing being formed of plain 
stitches and of a single thread, which is the 
main thread and is continuous therewith, said 
welt or stripe being interknit only at its mar 
ginal edges with said body portion of the fab 
ric and the thread of which the Welt is Com 
posed not entering into or forming part of the 
body portion, substantially as set forth. 
2. A knit fabric having a body portion, a 
welt or stripe, and a backing to said welt or 
stripe, said body portion and backing being 
composed of the same continuous thread and 
said welt or stripe being composed of a sepa 
rate and independent thread and being lo 
cated over said backing and interknit with 7o 
said body portion and backing only at its mar 
gins, the thread of which said welt is composed 
terminating and being discontinued at the 
margins of the Welt, substantially as set forth. 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 75 
WILLIAM HENRY PEPPER. 
Witnesses: 
LEROY M. GOULD, 
JULIAA. BROWN. 
I. ? 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473574.txt	(No Model.) 
0. C. HARRIS. 
CAR COUPLING. 
No. 473,574. 
- 
Patented Apr. 26, 1892. 
-Ses 
a 
 
 
is = 
 
 
IL. E. l 
 
- - z 
. 
e 
w 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ORRIN C. HARRIS, OF LITTLE FALLS, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO CHARLES L. PETREE, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 473,574, dated April 26, 1892. 
Application filed August 17, 1891. Serial No. 402,887, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To adt, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ORRIN C. HARRIs, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Little 
Falls, in the county of Herkimer and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Car-Couplings; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to car-couplers and is 
in the nature of an improvement on the coup 
ling for which Letters Patent were granted me 
On the 7th day of April, 1891, No. 450,015. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide improved means for operating the 
coupling to couple or uncouple the cars; and 
it consists in the novel construction herein 
after fully described, and afterward pointed 
out in the claims, due reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this specification, wherein 
Figure is a front view of my improved 
coupling; Fig. 2, a similar view, showing the 
coupling in an uncoupled position; Fig. 3, a 
bottom plan view, and Fig. 4 a transverse sec 
Ol. 
Referring to said drawings, the letter A 
indicates the draw-bar, which is arranged be 
neath the car, the rear end of said bar being 
arranged in a bracket C, secured to the under 
side of the car and provided with springs cc. 
The forward end of the draw-bar rests in a 
bracket D, Secured to the under side of the 
car, and Said bracket at one side is provided 
With a vertical depression d. The draw-bar 
at One side thereof is provided with a verti 
cally-depending flangea, which rests in the 
depression d, and upon said flange the draw 
bar rocks or oscillates in the act of coupling 
or uncoupling. The depression d in a bracket 
D and the depending flangea, of the draw-bar 
are so arranged that the center upon which 
the dra W-bar and draw-head rock is to one 
side of the longitudinal center line of said 
draw-bar. The draw-head E, which is pref 
erably formed in one piece with the draw-bar, 
consists of a hooked portion e and a buffer 
portion F, formed integral with the hooked 
portion at its juncture with the draw-bar A. 
The nose of the hook is beveled both forwardly 
and downwardly, as ate", and is provided with 
a horizontal slot e and perforations e, by 
means of which and a coupling-pin the coup 
ling can be used with a car furnished with 
the ordinary pin -and-link coupling. The 
coupling, as above described, is substantially 
the coupling shown and described in my Let 
ters Patent before named. The upper side 
of the draw-head is provided with two ears 
G G, between which is pivoted one of a lever 
H. Said lever is depressed or curved down 
wardly, as ath, in order to permit the lever 
to pass under the bumper or dead-block i, 
secured to the platform, and said bumperor 
dead-block is preferably recessed upon its un 
der side to afford additional room for the lever 
when it is lifted to uncouple the cars, and at 
its free end said lever is bent upwardly, form 
ing an incline h', and is thence curved down 
wardly to form a handleh. The end of the 
lever rests in a bracketJ, which supports Said 
lever in a substantially horizontal position, and 
when in this position the inclined parth of 
the lever will rest against the bracket and the 
lever will by gravity operate to throw the 
draw-head in a position to couple and main 
tain said coupling in a coupled position. By 
removing the lever from the bracket J and 
allowing it to drop the weight of the lever will 
operate to uncouple the coupling, and in order 
to prevent the lever when in this position 
from swinging back and forth I form a recess 
K in one side of the draw-head, in which the 
lever drops when removed from the bracket 
J. The coupling may also be operated to un 
couple by taking hold of the handle and draw 
ing the said lever out from the car, as shown 
in dotted lines, Fig. 2. 
If desired, the chain L. may be attached to 
the lever H and extend to the top of the car, 
and a similar chain M, attached to the buffer 
F, by means of which the coupling can be op 
erated from top of said car or platform. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The combination, with the draw-bar hav 
ing at one side a depending flange located at 
one side of the longitudinal center of said 
draw-bar and resting in a depression formed 
in a bracket secured to the car and carrying 
a hook-shaped draw-head, of a lever pivoted 
90 
95 
IOC 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
473,574 
to said draw-head and at its free end inclined 
upwardly and resting in a bracket secured to 
the end of the car, all constructed, arranged, 
and operating substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
2. The combination, with the draw-bar car 
rying the hook-shaped rocking draw - head, 
of a lever pivoted thereto and having its free 
end resting in a bracket secured to the end of 
the car, said lever when released from the 
bracket dropping by gravity and uncoupling 
the draw-head, all constructed, arranged, and 
operating substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with the draw-bar car 
rying the hook-shaped rocking draw-head, of 
the gravitating lever pivoted to said draw 
head and having its free end resting in a 
bracket secured to the end of the car, all con 
Structed, arranged, and operating substan 
tially as shown and described, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with the hook-shaped 
rocking draw-head E, of the lever H, pivoted 
thereto and bent downwardly, as at h, and 
upwardly inclined at its free end, as at h", 
resting in a bracket secured to the end of the 
car, substantially as shown and described. 
5. The combination, with the hook-shaped 
rocking draw-head E, of the lever H. pivoted 
thereto and bent downwardly, as ath, saidle 
ver at its free end being upwardly inclined, 
as at h", and bent to form a handle h, and a 
bracket J, secured to the end of the car and 
engaged by the inclined end of the lever, Serv 
ing to support the same in a horizontal posi 
tion, substantially as shown and described, 
and for the purpose specified. 
6. The combination, with the hook-shaped 
rocking draw-head E, of the lever H, pivoted 
at one end to said draw-head and having its 
other end upwardly inclined and resting 
within a bracket secured to the end of the 
car, the said draw-head at one side being re 
cessed, as at K, substantially as shown and 
described, as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ORRIN C. HARRIS. 
Witnesses: 
E. J. COFFIN, 
CHARLES L. PETREE. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473674.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 473,674, 
S. H. SHORT, 
ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE. 
Patented Apr. 26, 1892. 
ris 
- 
32.-- 
is perERs co, PHoro-Litho, washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIDNEY H. SHORT, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
ELECTRIC O COMOTIVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 473,674, dated April 26, 1892. 
Application filed May 26, 1891, Serial No. 394,163, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SIDNEY H. SHORT, of 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvementsin Electric Locomotives; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
This invention relates to electric-motor cars 
in which the armature of a propelling-motor 
is mounted axially with reference to a driv 
ing-axle and is directly connected with the 
driving wheel or wheels, so as to make one 
revolution to each revolution of the driving 
wheels. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
simple and efficient construction of motor 
which may be directly applied to the driving 
axle of an electric car and connected there 
with in such a manner that it shall be pro 
tected against any sudden shocks or jars and, 
further, shall be insulated from the car-frame 
and driving-axle. 
With these ends in view the invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of an electric motor connected 
With the driving-axle of an electric car, por 
tions of the motor being represented in trans 
verse. Section. Fig. 2 is a view in side eleva 
tion of one of the insulating driving - disks, 
and Fig. 3 is a detached view of one of the 
Spring-fastenings. 
A represents the driving-axle of an electric 
motor car, and B B are the driving-wheels rig 
idly secured to the axle. Encircling the driv 
ing-axle is a long sleeve C, the inner diameter 
of which is considerably greater than the diam 
eter of the axle, so as to insure an annular 
Space D between the sleeve and the axle 
through which air may pass freely from one 
end of the sleeve to the other. Upon the 
sleeve is rigidly secured the armature E and 
Commutator F. Field-magnets G. G. are se 
cured to the field-magnet frames H. H', each 
of which is provided with a bearinga, within 
which is supported the sleeve C, which freely 
rotates therein. Sleeve Cisscrew-threaded at 
b b for the reception of locking-nuts c c, each 
of which is provided with a series of holese, 
for the reception of a fastening-screw f, while 
the sleeve C is provided at points adjacent to 
the locking-nuts with a screw-threaded hole 
g. By rotating the locking-nuts, so as to dis 
engage them from the bearings a, the sleeve C 
may be adjusted longitudinally, and thereby 
impart a lateral adjustment to the armature, 
and when the latter has been moved to the 
proper point the locking-sleeves are screwed 
snugly against the bearings C, and retained in 
position by the fastening-screws referred to. 
To the field-magnet frame are secured the 
four supporting-brackets I, each of which is 
provided at its outer end with an inverted 
cup-shaped socket, which receives the upper 
end of a rubber cushion J, the lower ends 
of which are supported in correspondingly 
shaped metal sockets fastened to the channel 
bars KK, the opposite ends of the latter be 
ing secured to axle-box extensions h. h. 
From the foregoing it will be observed that 
the field-magnets are supported in a yielding 
manner on frame-work connected with the 
axle-boxes, and hence are retained thereby 
against rotation, while the rubber springs 
serve to cushion the field-magnets against 
sudden shocks or jars and further to insulate 
them from the frame-work of the car. 
To the opposite ends of sleeve C are se 
cured the driving-disks LL, each of which is 
constructed as follows: l is a metallic hub 
rigidly secured in any desired manner to the 
end of the sleeve. Encircling this hub is a 
Wooden webi, which is secured to the hub by 
bolts k, passing through the web and the 
flanges in m', the flange in being formed in 
tegral with the hub and the flange m inde 
pendently thereof and fastened in place by 
the bolts referred to. To the periphery of the 
wooden and insulating web is secured a me 
tallic rim in, from which projects, laterally, a 
wrist-pin o. To the driving-wheels B B are 
secured in any desired manner the wrist-pins 
p p, the Wrist-pin on one driving-wheel being 
located at one side of the axle and that on the 
other driving-wheel being located on the op 
posite side for a purpose I will presently ex 
plain. 
MMare closely-wound spiral springs, which 
are preferably square in cross-section for the 
25 
35 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
478,674 
, 
- 
Y 
purpose of economizing space. Within the 
Opposite ends of each of the springs is fast 
ened by screwing therein a metallic end piece 
q, which is constructed with an eye r. One 
end of the spring is connected by the eye 
piece to the Wrist-pin on the driving-disk by 
means of a pin passed through the latter, 
While its opposite end is connected in a simi 
lar manner with the wrist-pin on the driving 
Thus it will be observed that the op 
Wheel. 
posite ends of the driving-sleeve C are yield 
ingly connected with the driving-wheels in 
Such a manner that power is transmitted from 
the driving-sleeve to one wheel through the 
compression of one spring and to the other 
driving-wheel through the expansion of the 
Other Spring, and vice versa. 
By means of the connecting mechanism 
above described the power is equably trans 
mitted to both driving-wheels through the 
yielding and elastic connections interposed 
between the armature-sleeve and driving 
Wheels, and by reason of such connections the 
armature and its connected parts are relieved 
from Sudden shocks and undue strains. 
Again, the spring-driving connections will 
allow of the vertical and lateral and endwise 
noyement of the axle without danger of in 
juring or disturbing the operation of the mo 
tor. The driving-disks, by means of their non 
conducting Webs, prevent any leakage of the 
Current through the driving-wheels. 
- 
It is evident that I may dispense with the 
driving-disk and spring connection atone end 
of the driving-sleeve without departing from 
my invention, and it is further evident that 
many changes in the construction and relative 
arrangement of parts might be resorted to 
which would still involve the spirit, and es 
Sence of the invention, and hence I do not re 
strict myself to the particular construction 
and arrangement of parts hereinbefore de 
scribed; but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an electric locomotive, the combina 
55 
tion, with a driving-axle and a field-magnet 
frame yieldingly supported on the truck 
frame and independently of the car-body, of 5o 
an armature-sleeve encircling the axle and 
journaled in the field-magnet frame, a driv 
ing-disk secured to each end of the armature 
sleeve, and springs connecting said driving 
disks and driving-wheels, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. In an electric locomotive, the combina 
tion, with a driving-axle, an armature-Sup 
porting sleeve encircling the axle and mount 
ed on bearings independent thereof, of a spi 
ral spring connected at one end with the ar 
mature-sleeve and insulated therefrom and 
at the other end with the driving-wheel, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In an electric locomotive, the combina 
tion, with a driving-axle and field-magnets en 
circling the axle, of an armature-sleeve mount 
ed in bearings formed in or connected with 
the field-magnet frame and means for adjust 
ing the sleeve longitudinally within its bear 
ings, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
4. In an electric locomotive, the combina 
tion, with a driving-axle and an armature 
sleeve encircling the axle, of an insulated 
driving-disk fastened to the armature-sleeve 
and a spring connecting the driving-disk and 
one of the driving-wheels, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
5. In an electric locomotive, the combina 
tion, with a driving-axle and an armature 
sleeve encircling the axle, of a driving-disk 
secured to each end of the armature-sleeve, 
the periphery of each disk being insulated 
from the sleeve, and springs connecting said 
disks with the driving-wheels, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
SIDNEY H. SHORT. 
65 
75 
S. G. NOTTINGHAM, 
GEORGE E. DOWNING. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473774.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 473,774. 
F. NICKERSON, Jr. 
TAIL, BOARD SPRING. 
Patented Apr. 26, 1892, 
. 
. . 
-(easegree() -Zo 
BY J6s. 76 
A TTORAVEYS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREEMAN NICKERSON, JR, OF FALL RIVER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR 
TO HIMSELF AND HENRY MCCLUSKY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TAL BOARD SPRNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 473,774, dated April 26, 1892. 
Application filed January 15, 1892, Serial No,418,170. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREEMAN NICKERSON, 
Jr., of Fall River, in the county of Bristol 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Tail-Board 
Vehicle Springs, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention is applicable to all kinds of 
Wagons or vehicles provided with tail-boards 
of different kinds. Its purpose is the same 
as that of other tail-board springs-namely, 
for keeping the tail-board of the vehicle closed 
When shut and of readily admitting of the 
opening or dropping of the tail-board when 
required to load or unload the vehicle. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction of such a spring, substantially as 
hereinafter described, and more particularly 
pointed out in the claim; and the object of 
it is to produce a simple spring of this de 
Scription which shall be cheaper and stronger 
Where the same is liable to break than the 
ordinary tail-board spring in use. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
Corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
tail-board wagon in part with my improved 
Spring applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a side view, 
upon a larger scale, of said spring detached; 
Fig. 3, a top view thereof, and Fig. 4 a view 
in perspective of the catch portion of the 
spring detached from the main body thereof. 
A indicates the body of a tail-board wagon 
in part, and B its tail-board hinged below, as 
at b, to open and close, as required. 
Applied to either or both sides of the 
Wagon-body at the top are the springs, one of 
which only is here shown, for holding the tail 
board closed and for admitting of it being 
let down or opened when needed. The spring 
Ordinarily used for this purpose is made of 
One piece of metal and constructed at its free 
end to engage with the opening or upper por 
tion of the tail-board. Thus making the main 
body and catching portion of the spring of 
one piece of metal is very expensive and the 
spring is very liable to break where its great 
Strain comes. 
My improved spring is made of two parts 
or pieces-namely, of a body C and an inde 
25 
35 
pendent catch D. The body C is cut from 
sheet-steel and preferably strengthened by 
giving it an increased thickness at its One or 
fulcrum end f, where it may be provided with 
holes c for the passage of screws to secure it 
to the wagon-body. The catch D is made of 
malleable iron, riveted, cast, or otherwise 
firmly secured to the steel body Cof the spring. 
It can be chilled or hardened, as desired, and 
is constructed of strap form, with a long up 
per leaf d, made to reinforce the outer Sur 
face of the free portion of the body C of the 
spring for a considerable portion of its length, 
and with a lipe beneath, forming, in connec 
tion with the leaf part d, a notch S to receive 
within or between them the extreme free end 
of the body C of the spring. The lip e Con 
stitutes the locking part of the catch over the 
opening and closing upper portion of the tail 
board B. The catch. D is made very solid or 
strong where it projects beyond the free end 
of the spring-body C and is of a roll or hook 
shape above, as at g, to form a ready handle 
for lifting the spring when required to dis 
engage it from the tail-board D. 
Such a combined spring and catch con 
structed of two pieces of metal can not only 
be made very much cheaper than the ordi 
mary tail-board spring of One and the same 
piece of metal, but the construction of the 
catch part as described stiffens the spring and 
prevents it breaking where most exposed to 
Strain. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A spring for the tail-boards of vehicles, con 
sisting of the body part C, formed of one 
piece of spring metal, and the catch part D, 
composed of another piece of metal firmly 
secured to the body part and constructed with 
an elongated outer or upper leaf d and with 
a lipe, forming, with the leaf, a notch S to re 
ceive the outer end of the spring-body, said 
lip also forming the locking part of the Spring 
for the tail-board of the vehicle, essentially 
as shown and described. 
FREEMAN NICKERSON, JR. 
Witnesses: 
SANDY IIARRISON, 
HENRY MCCLUSKY. 
55 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473874.txt	(No Model. ) 
No. 473,874, 
M. T. HARRIGAN & J. L. PACKARD. 
ROTARY TRIMMER, 
Patented Apr. 26, 1892. 
I-T 
H. H. M 
Zee, cess eas, 
12 cove/67:s 
data/ (%-4, 
- 
2222/ee Z, Z2ee Zazz-ro, 
The Nof Rs. PETERs co, PHoro-LTHC., washiiGT-N, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL T. HARRIGAN, OF WOLLASTON, AND JEROME L. PACKARD, OF 
BOSTON, ASSIGNORS TO JAMES W. BROOKS, TRUSTEE, OF CAMBRIDGE, 
MASSACHUSETTS. 
ROTARY TRW MER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 473,874, dated April 26, 1892. 
Application filed December 7, 1891, Serial No. 414,295, (No model.) 
------- 
To all, Zuhan, it may concern: 
Beit known that we, MICHAELT.HARRIGAN, 
of Wollaston, county of Norfolk, and JEROME 
L. PACKARD, of Boston, county of Suffolk, 
State of Massachusetts, have invented an Im 
provement in Rotary Trimmers, of which the 
following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters and figure on the drawings repre 
senting like parts. 
In the use of rotary trimmers in trimming 
heels and sole-edges it is at times necessary 
to be able to bring or present any part to be 
trimmed in just the proper position with rela 
tion to the edge of the rotary cutter. During 
the time that the trimmer acts the material 
being trimmed to shape is supported on a 
Suitable rest or work-support, and it is chiefly 
to this Work-Support or rest that this our in 
vention is directed. To afford the greatest 
range of adjustment, we have mounted the 
rest so that it may tip about a center of mo 
tion Substantially in a plane tangent to the 
circle in which travels the periphery of the 
Cutter, and with the tipping rest we have con 
nected an actuating-rod joined, it may be, to 
a treadle on the floor or adapted to be engaged 
and moved by hand. The rest has combined 
with it a locking device to hold it firmly in 
either of its two extreme positions. 
Figure 1 in front elevation shows a trimmer 
cutter with our improved rest or work-sup 
port added; Fig. 2, a top or plan view of the 
parts shown in Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 a right-hand 
side elevation of the parts shown in Fig.1. 
In the drawings, let A represent a rigid part 
of the frame-work of suitable shape for the 
Working parts, the part Ahaving a bearing B 
for the rotating shaft C, on which is secured 
the rotary trimmer D, having any usual rand 
guard E. 
The hub IB has an arm b, provided with a 
bearing b' and a nearb, and, as herein shown, 
said ear has connected to it a locking device 
b', shown as a spring, having a projection 
adapted to enter one of a series of like notches, 
as 2, in a collar c, suitably secured by a pin or 
otherwise to the inner end of a short shaft d, 
extended from the rest or support d", the lat 
ter being, preferably, an arm extended at right 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
angles to the short shaft d, the said shaft hav 
ing rigidly attached thereto the crank-arm Ct. 
(Best shown in Fig. 2.) The rest extends for 
ward from this crank-arm and is somewhat 
convex at its upper surface, the said pivot 
having its axis parallel to the shaft of the 
cutter and in a plane which is substantially 
tangent to the periphery or path of the act 
ing edge of the cutter, so that if said pivot 
were prolonged it would just contact with the 
cutter D. The rest has attached to its Outer 
end, as shown, a rod or operating device, e, 
which in practice may be attached by link f 
to a suitable treadlet, (partially shown in Fig. 
2,) or the said rod e may be engaged and 
moved by hand. The path of movement of 
the rest intersects the cutting-edge of the cut 
ter, the plane of such path being at right 
angles to the axis d of the rest. The treadle 
is preferable, as the operator's hands are thus 
both left free. 
The drawings show the rest in the position 
it will occupy when the rear part or side of a 
heel is being trimmed; but should the breast 
corners of a heel be set or formed close to a 
curved shank then to enable that part of the 
heel to be properly acted upon by the Cutter 
the rest will be tipped, so that its upper sur 
face will be elevated, and the spring-catch 
will enter the upper notch shown in the col 
lar c in Fig. 1. The end of the treadle with 
which the rod f is connected will preferably 
be spring-Supported. 
It is not intended to limit this invention to 
the exact shape for the rest or of its locking 
device. 
Having described our invention, what We 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a trimmer mechanism, a rotary cuttel' 
combined with a pivoted tipping rest, the pivot 
or axis of motion of said rest being parallel 
to the actuating-shaft of the cutter and in a 
plane substantially tangent to the periphery 
of the cutter, and a crank-arm rigidly con 
necting said pivot and rest, the path of move 
ment of the rest intersecting the cutting-edge 
of the cutter, substantially as described. 
2. A rotary trimmer-cutter combined with 
a pivoted rest and with an automatic locking IOO 
95 
75 
473,874 
5 
. 
2 
device, substantially as described, to posi-) pivot to tip toward or away from the face of 
tively engage and restrain said rest from the cutter, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed Our 
noVement in its extreme positions, substan- 
tially as described. 
names to this specification in the presence of 
rest, the pivot thereof being parallel to and in 
Substantially the same horizontal plane with 
the cutter-axis, and a crank-arm rigidly con- 
necting said pivot and rest, combined with a 
Io rod connected to said rest to move it on its 
3. A rotary trimmer-cutter and a pivoted two subscribing witnesses. 
MICHAEL. T. HARRIGAN. 
JEROME II. PACKARD. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. GREGORY, 
FREDERICK II. EMERY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US473974.txt	(No Mode 
l.). M. B. STAFFORD & R. W. MORG AN, 
ANTI-FRICTION JOURNAL, BOX, 
No. 473,974, 
Patented May 3, 1892. 
 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARSHALL B. STAFFORD AND ROBERT WEBB MORGAN, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
ANTI - FR CT | O N J O U RNAL  BOX 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,974, dated May 8, 1892. 
Application filed September 2, 1891. Serial No. 404,510, (No model.) 
7? 
6 
The shell A is closed at its ends by means 5 
the circular walls of the shell A, and interme 
diate said sleeve and said walls is arranged 
the series of rollers F, extending parallel with 55 
and encircling the shaft C and sleeve D and 
being equidistant from each other, as illus 
trated more clearly in Fig. 2. The rollers F 
bear against the interior walls of the shell. A 
and exterior surface of the sleeve D, and said 6o 
rollers are provided on their ends with the 
pinions G, which mesh with the externally 
toothed gear-wheels E E and the internally 
toothed rims H, secured at opposite ends of 
the shell A. 
of caps B, which have proper apertures to re 
ceive the shaft Cand on their inner faces are 
provided With the annular rounded shoulders 
J, which form bearings for the annular round 
ed shoulders L on the ends of the rollers F, as 
shown enlarged in Fig. 4, in which it will be 
observed that the curved surfaces of the 
shoulders J L correspond with and are opposed 
to each other and that the contact of said sur- 75 
faces is on the pitch-line, or line of bearing 
between said rollers E and shell A. 
In the employment of the invention, the 
shell Abeing stationary and the shaft C, with 
its sleeve D and gear-wheels EE, rotating, the 8o 
pinions G and gearing H, coacting with the 
Wheels E, preserve the parallelism of the roll 
ers E with each other and with the shaft C 
and the proper separation of said rollers, and 
also prevent any slipping or rubbing motion 85 
between Said rollers and the sleeve D or shell 
A. During the use of the invention the op 
posing bearing surfaces or shoulders J L pre 
vent the lateral or end motion of the rollers E 
With the minimum amount of friction. 
While in some instances we shall prefer to 
make use. of the sleeve D, it is obvious that 
there will be other instances in which it will 
be convenient to discard the said sleeve, and 
in such event the gearing EE will be secured 95 
to or formed directly on the shaft C, and the 
rollers F will be brought into contact with the 
exterior surface of the shaft C and interior 
walls of the shell A. The omission of the 
sleeve D will result in the shell being smaller too 
and better adapted for some pieces of ma 
chinery. 
plac 
ing of the bearing-shoulders J on the caps B, 
We do not limit the invention to the 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, MARSHALL I3. STAF 
FORD and ROBERT WEBBMORGAN, citizens of 
the United States, and residents of New York, 
in the county of New York and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Anti - Friction Journal 
Boxes, of which the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
anti-friction journal-boxes; and it consists, es 
sentially, of a shaft extending into or through 
the shell and provided with gear - wheels 
which engage a series of pinions secured 
upon the ends of rollers located in the line 
of a circle intermediate said shaft and shell, 
the latter also being furnished with gearing to 
engage said pinions and with caps having an 
nular bearing-points for contact with reverse 
ly-curved annular bearings on the ends of said 
rollerS. 
The essential feature of novelty in the con 
struction consists in the reversely - curved 
bearing-shoulders to prevent end motion in 
the rollers surrounding the shaft, said bear 
ing-shoulders being in contact with each other 
on the pitch-line of the rollers. 
The invention will be more fully understood 
from the detailed description hereinafter pre 
sented, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central vertical longitudinal 
section of an anti-friction journal-box con 
structed in accordance with the invention, said 
section being on the dotted line 11 of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 2 is a central vertical transverse section 
of same on the dotted line 22 of Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a vertical transverse Section of same on 
the dotted line 33 of Fig. 1; and Fig. 4 is an 
enlarged detached sectional view showing the 
relative position of the end of the rollers, with 
the annular bearing provided in the cap at 
the end of the shell. 
In the drawings, A designates the shell, 
having at each end a cap Band receiving cen 
trally through it the shaft or axle C. The 
shaft C is closely encompassed within the 
shell Aby a sleeve D, rotating with said shaft 
and provided at its ends with the externally 
toothed gear-wheels EE, which are secured 
by means of screws to and rotate with said 
sleeve D. The sleeve D is circular in cross 
section and is concentrically arranged within 
4-5 
 
478,974 
? ? 
since if the shoulders L were located at the 
inner side of the pinions G said shoulders J 
would have to be placed on the shell proper. 
For some kinds of shafting, also, the shoulders 
J will be placed directly on the shaft instead 
of in the shell, and at such time the bearing 
point will be on the pitch-line, or line of con 
tact between the shaft and rollers. This lat 
ter arrangementis specially applicable where 
the sleeve D is omitted and the rollers E 
brought close against the shaft. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an anti-friction journal-box, the shaft 
and the series of rollers encompassing said 
shaft and having the curved annular bearing 
shoulders, combined with the inclosing shell 
having the reversely-curved annular bearing 
shoulders for contact with the shoulders on the 
rollers, the contact-point of said shoulders be 
ing on the pitch-line of the rollers, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In an anti-friction journal-box, the shaft 
and the series of rollers encompassing said 
shaft and having the pinions and the curved 
annular bearing-shoulders, combined with the 
inclosing shell having the reversely-curved 
annular bearing-shoulders for contact with 
the shoulders on the rollers, the gearing on 
Said shaft to engage said pinions, and the gear 
ing on the shell also to engage said pinions, the 
 
3. In an anti-friction journal-box, the shaft, 35 
contact-point of said shoulders being om the 
pitch-line of the rollers, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
the sleeve and gearing on said shaft, and the 
series of rollers having the pinions and the 
curved annular bearing-shoulders, combined 
with the inclosing shell having the reversely 
curved annular bearing-shoulders for contact 
with the shoulders on the rollers, and the gear 
ing on the shell to engage said pinions, the 
contact-point of said shoulders being on the 
pitch-line of the rollers, substantially as 
shown and described. 
4. In an anti-friction journal-box, the shaft 
and the inclosing shell, combined with the se 
ries of rollers intermediate said shaft and shell 
and having the curved annular bearing-shoul 
ders, and the reversely-curved annular bear- 5o 
ing-shoulders in contact with the first-men 
tioned shoulders on the pitch-line of said roll 
ers, substantially as set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 29th day 55 
of August, A. D. 1891. 
40 
45 
MARSHAILL B. STAEFEFORD. 
ROBERT WEBB MORGAN. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. C. GILL, 
ED. D. MILLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474074.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 474,074, 
A M, YOUNG. 
DRESS FACING AND PROTECTOR. 
Patented May 3, 1892. 
Y?gitati 
Gazeez. 
NMENTOR: 
1,4-ry 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANNIE. M. YOUNG, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
DRESS FAC NG AND PROTECTOR, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,074, dated May 3, 1892. 
Application filed November 16, 1891, Serial No. 412,001. (No specimens.) 
O 
To all, whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, ANNIEM, YOUNG, of 
Providence, in the county of Providence and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in a Combined 
Dress-Facing and Dress-Protector, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention, having reference to the 
dress-making art, has for its object the pro 
vision, as a separate article of manufacture, 
of a dress-facing having an attached pro 
tector of rubber, leather, or other durable ma 
terial and a sheet of suitably-arranged cem 
ent, which combined dress-facing and skirt 
protector may be prepared and sold as a sepa 
rate article of trade and be capable, as sold, 
of being readily applied to a dress and dress 
lining, saving a very considerable amount of 
time, avoiding much expense in finishing the 
skirt of a dress or gown, so far as binding, 
protecting the inner lower surface, and fac 
ing the same is concerned, as well as to ren 
der the same much more durable than here 
tofore. 
The invention consists, broadly, of a dress 
facing and skirt-protector combined ready 
for application to the skirt of a dress and ca 
pable of sale as a complete article of manu 
facture, the same comprising in its construc 
tion a facing of canvas or other suitable fab 
ric or material, a sheet of cement connected 
with one side thereof, and a protector con 
nected at one of its edges to the facing, so as 
that in use the dress fabric may be cemented 
to the facing and the protector turned up on 
the inner side of the facing and cemented or 
otherwise connected thereto, and so form a 
binding for the bottom of the skirt and a pro 
tector to the inner lower face thereof. 
Reference is to be had to the annexed draw 
ings, and to the letters marked thereon, form 
ing a part of this specification, the same let 
ters designating the same parts or features, as 
the case may be, wherever they occur. 
In the said drawings, Figure 1 designates a 
face view of a piece of dress facing and pro 
tector combined constructed in accordance 
with my invention, a corner of the dress-fac 
ing being turned down from the sheet of cem 
ent to show the relationship of the parts. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional view taken on the line 2 
2 of Fig. 1, Fig. 3 is a sectional view show 
ing the manner of connecting a dress-skirt 
with the facing and a way in which the pro 
tector may be turned up so as to form a bind 
ing to the bottom of the skirt and a guard to 
the inner lower surface thereof. 
In carrying out my invention I take a strip 
of canvas, buckram, or other material C adapt 
ed for forming the facing to the skirt of a 
dress and connect thereWith in any suitable 
way on one side a sheet of rubber or other 
suitable cement and cement or otherwise at 
tach to the lower edge of the canvas one edge 
of a strip of rubber, kid, leather, or other du 
rable material c in such manner that the free 
edge of the strip of rubber will extend a con 
siderable distance below the lower edge of the 
material C. In this condition the invention 
is placed upon the market and sold, and the 
buyer is enabled to use it by placing the 
dress goods upon the facing, with the sheet of 
cement b between the dress goods and facing, 
as indicated by the full and dotted lines in 
Fig. 2, employing a hot iron or other device 
for ironing down and cementing the dress 
goods to the facing. Finally the free edge of 
the protector c is carried over to the inside of 
the lower edge of the dress-skirt and ironed 
down and cemented to the facing a, as indi 
cated in Fig. 3. I make protector c suffi 
ciently wide to have it extend up on the in 
side of the facing to a considerable extent, so 
as to form a binding for the lower edge of the 
skirt and to take the place of velvet, braid, 
and the like at present employed as a pro 
tector for the lower inner face of the dress 
skirt. The protector c may be turned up on 
the inside of the facing and stitched or ce 
mented thereto prior to placing the article 
upon the market for sale, though I prefer in 
most cases to leave it with but one edge ce 
mented to the protector, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2, so that the user may exercise her own 
taste or convenience in the matter of con 
necting the free edge of the protector to the 
facing. In cases where a lining is employed 
the same may be connected with the facing, 
as has been described with reference to the 
dress goods, and the latter stitched or other 
Wise connected with the lining and facing in 
any suitable Way. 
The saving to dress-makers and others both 
in time and money by the employment of my 
-- 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
Oo 
474,074 
IO 
said improvement is very considerable, the 
skirt-facing being procured with the service 
able protector connected therewith and the 
facing ready to be at once applied, while at 
the same time the appearance of the dress 
when cement is employed is greatly improved 
by reason of the absence of lines of stitches. 
It is obvious that changes other than those 
described may be made in the form and ar 
rangement of parts comprising the invention 
without departing from the nature or spirit 
thereof. 
Having thus described the nature of my in 
vention and explained a way of constructing 
and using the Same, though without attempt 
ing to set forth all of the forms in which it 
may be made or all of the modes of its em 
ployment, I declare that what I claim is 
As an article of man facture, a dress-facing 
2O and skirt-protector combined, consisting of a 
sheet of suitable facing material Cl, having a 
sheet of cement connected with one face there 
of, and a protector connected at one of its 
edges to one edge of the facing material and 
extending a considerable distance beyond the 
said edge, whereby after the facing is attached 
to the dress goods the protector maybe turned 
up on the inside of the facing and be cemented 
thereto, and so form a means for preserving 
the lower edge and inner lower face of the 
skirt againt undue wear, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 12th day of 
November, A. D. 1891. 
25 
ANNIE. M. YOUNG. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES H. PAGE, 
GEORGEN. BLISS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474175.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. LANNER.T. & W. R., JEAWONS 
---- 
WAPOR BURNER. 
No. 474,175, 
  
 
 
    
 
 
I 
H s 
H 
3. 
RSHA 
'SS' D 
 
 
 
Its. 
R 
I 
is 
Patented May 3, 1892, 
- F. 
fit 5 
do so c 
o og 
co o 
  
 
 
2 
W 
2 
 
 
I 
 
C) 
do OY 
SS 
3. HS gilliX. 
99. 
SC 
e 
I 
  
if 
IE 
 
  
  
 
 
: 
 
  
 
 
A. 
III. 
IEC 
SSS 
 
 
 
  
 
 
   
    
d d 
i. R 
R 
II. ID 
O 2 
g 
"o III SS: 
2 
O'O 
O 
Y 
F. 
Hit test. 
(P (6?ct/ae/-. 
In veritors. 
fit. -de-lez-Z 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN A. LANNERT AND WILLIAM R. JEAVONS, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
WAPOR BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,175, dated May 3, 1892. 
Application filed November 9, 1891, Serial No. 411,269, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all twhom it may concern: 
modification with a central depression in the 
Beit known that we, JOHN A. LANNERT and 
bottom of the combustion-chamber and partly 
WILLIAM R. JEAVONS, citizens of the United 
inclined walls, with which the perforated 
States, residing at Cleveland, in the county of 
tubes are connected. 
Cuyahoga and State of Ohio, have invented 
In all the foregoing views the diffusing 
certain new and useful Improvements in Va 
channel or channels are of greater depth than 
por-Burners; and we do hereby declare that 
width, and also in all these views there are 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
one or more walls of the vapor-diffusing chan 
tion of the invention, which will enable others 
nel which stand inward from one of the per 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
forated walls of the combustion-chamber in 
make and use the same. 
vertical plane and in such relation to said 
This invention relates to vapor-burners of 
plane that there is a space between the verti 
the variety having a combustion - chamber 
cal planes of the said parts, and the said chan 
formed by perforated walls and a vapor-dif 
nels are in all cases open at their top and be 
fusing channel in the bottom of said chamber. 
tween the planes of the combustion-walls. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
In all the views A represents the bottom of 
burner in which the vapor is diffused evenly 
the burner, and B and C are the perforated 
to all parts thereof and the burner is adapted 
tubes forming the walls of the combustion 
to be brought to a vaporizing condition in the 
chamber, which is between said walls from 
shortest possible time, all substantially as 
bottom to top. 
shown and described, and particularly pointed 
In Fig. 1 the vapor-diffusing channel is 
out in the claim. 
formed, preferably, by a separate trough D, 
Figure 1 is a vertical central section of a 
having walls d, and the said trough is midway 
burner constructed on the principle of this in 
between the perforated walls B C. In this 
vention and provided in the bottom of the 
construction the said trough and the vapor 
combustion-chamber with a vapor diffusing 
therein is heated in part by the jets of flame 
or distributing channel of greater height than 
at the base of the burner, which send their 
width and entirely separate from the perfo 
heat largely against the walls d, and the va 
rated walls. Fig. 2 is a modification of the 
por as it overflows the said channel supplies 
construction shown in Fig. 1, in which the in 
combustion in the extreme bottom of the 
ner perforated wall forms a continuation of 
burner or what is termed the bottom of the 
one of the walls of the vapor-diffusing chan 
combustion-chamber. 
nel. Fig. 3 is a modificationin which the con 
In Fig. 2 the inner perforated wall Ciscon 
struction is substantially similar to that shown 
centric with the inner wall d of the vapor 
in Fig. 1, excepting that the vapor-distribut 
channel and extends upward therefrom, the 
ing channel or trough is set a slight distance 
other wall d being apart from perforated 
above the bottom of the combustion-chamber. 
wall B. 
In Fig. 4 is shown a modification having three 
In Fig. 3 the vapor-channel trough D is 
concentric vapor-distributing channels on the 
raised somewhat above the bottom of the 
bottom of the burner and separate or apart 
burner and is midway between the two com 
from the perforated walls. Fig. 5 is a modi 
bustion-walls B C. 
cation in which there are four concentric va 
In Fig. 4 a Series of three concentric chan 
por distributing or diffusing channels, the two 
nels is formed by concentric subdividing 
outer channels having walls with which the 
rings, bands, or walls d, but yet having a 
perforated tubes are directly connected. In 
space between the outer wall dom each side 
this figure and in Fig. 4 the inner bands or 
and the corresponding perforated wall of the 
rings forming the subdivisions of the chan 
combustion-chamber, 
nels are preferably made separate. Fig. 6 is 
In Fig. 5 the trough D has its outer walls 
a modification showing the bottom of the com 
concentric with the walls B C, which are con 
bustion-chamber with a depression at its in 
nected with said walls d, and within the said 
ner side, which depression forms a vapor-dis 
outer walls d are three inner subdivision-walls 
tributing channel, and in Fig. 7 there is a d, and all said walls together forming four 
- 
5 
 
90 
95 
OC 
474,175 
Io 
- 
scribed. 
diffusing-channels separated as shown and de 
In Fig. 6 the trough D has a depressed chan 
nel formed therein at one side with walls did, 
as in the other constructions, and serving as 
a vapor-diffusing channel, the same as in the 
others. 
In Fig. 7 the vapor-diffusing channel is cen 
tral in the trough D, and at its top the sides 
of the trough extend outward and upward 
from said channel and have the tubes B C at 
tached thereto. 
One or more vapor - channels of greater 
height than width are thus shown in the sev 
eral views, and the number of modifications 
might be extended to further illustrate the in 
vention; but the foregoing are deemed suffi 
cient to show the scope and nature thereof. 
It is understood in regard to this art that 
vapor of oils whenever shielded from air will 
gravitate or diffuse. Thus the vapor in 
trough or bowl D gravitates or distributes 
equally to all parts around the same, and 
when full it flows over equally all around on 
one or both sides. The burner being lighted, 
the flame burning about the tube E and the 
- 
 
side of the channel quickly generates enough 
vapor to fill the channel, and the vapor es 
caping at all points and burning about the 
walls of channel quickly heats it to its maxi 
mum. When the burner is fully heated, 
nearly all the vapor is generated in the Sup 
ply-pipe. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
A vapor-burner provided with perforated 
combustion-walls, and an air-tight bottom be 
tween the lower ends of said walls, and an oil 
and vapor distributing channel having greater 
depth than width and one or both of its sides 
out of line with the said perforated walls, said 
channel open about its top, Substantially as 
Witness our hands to the foregoing specifi 
cation this 6th day of November, 1891. 
JOHN A. LANNERT. 
WILLIAM R. JEAVONS. 
described. 
- 
Witnesses: 
H. T. FISHER, 
NELLIE L. MCLANE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474275.txt	J. WELLER, 
THRASHING MACHINE, 
Patented May 3, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 474,275. 
 
INVENTOR 
72272-7222Y 
* /u. G. 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN WELLER, OF FUNKSTOWN, MARYLAND. 
THRASHING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,275, dated May 8, 1892. 
Application filed November 9, 1891, Serial No. 4ll,893, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN WELLER, of 
Funkstown, in the county of Washington and 
State of Maryland, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Thrashing-Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in thrash 
ing-machines, and particularly in the con 
struction and arrangement of the stop-board 
or shutter, the shoes, and the blasts and parts 
connected there with; and the invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
novel combinations of parts, as will be here 
inafter described, and then pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical lon 
gitudinal section of a machine constructed 
according to my invention. Fig. 2 is a detail 
transverse section showing the lever for op 
erating the fan-chute, and Fig. 3 is a side ele 
Vation of a part of the machine. 
The machine, as shown, includes, in con 
nection with the necessary framing, the cyl 
inder 1, concave 2, rakes 3, return-board 4, 
slotted apron or carrier 5, and bottom board 
6 for such apron, which parts operate in a 
well-known manner and need no special de 
scription herein. In the head or cap cham 
ber A, which is located directly in rear of the 
cylinder and concave, I arrange a swinging 
shutter or stop-board B, which forms, practi 
cally, the rear or back wall of the cap-cham 
ber. This shutter or stop-board is hinged at 
its upper edge at b transversely of the cap, so 
it may swing back and forth to permit the 
masses of straw to pass under it, and at the 
same time such board operates to prevent the 
thrashed grain from being thrown on the 
straw in rear of the head or cap chamber. 
In practice the grain, &c., is carried up the 
board 6 by the slotted apron and is discharged 
at its upper rear end onto the screen C of the 
upper shoe C", and passes from such shoe to 
the screen D of shoe D', and thence to the 
screen E of the shoe E, the said shoes being 
arranged one above the other, as shown. 
These shoes are supported and operated in 
the manner more fully described hereinafter, 
and by their arrangement, as shown, I secure 
a screening of the grain for a distance equal 
the combined lengths of the three screens. 
At the same time I arrange the shoes com 
SC'eel S. 
pactly and Secure a fall of the grain, &c., onto 
each of the screens. The tailings from the 
Screens C and D discharge to a conveyer F, 
and they are carried back to the feed-board 
or to the concave in any suitable manner and 
again run through the machine. The screen 
ings from the screen E are discharged to a 
conveyer. H and the cleaned grain to a con 
veyer G. 
The shoe C' is supported on hangers C, be 
ing pivotally connected with the lower end of 
Such hangers, the upper ends of the hangers 
being pivoted to the frame of the machine. 
The shoe D'' is supported on the upper ends 
of the supporting-bars D, while the shoe E.' 
is supported on the upper ends of rods E?, 
Which rods are pivoted at their lower ends to 
the framing of the machine and at their up 
per ends to the shoe E. By supporting the 
middle and lower shoes in the manner de 
scribed such shoes are given a different move 
ment from the upper shoe and for such reason 
the grain is subjected to a somewhat differ 
ent influence on the said middle and lower 
The upper shoe C' is oscillated by rods C9, 
connecting it with cranks on a shaft C. The 
middle shoe D is oscillated by rods D8, con 
necting it With straps or eccentrics on the 
fan-shaft D, and the lower shoe E' is oscil 
lated by means of levers E, which are pivoted 
at e and have their short arms e' connected 
by rods or bars E with the shoe E' and their 
long arms econnected with the shoe C. By 
this construction the upper and lower shoes 
are operated reciprocally, the former with a 
long and the latter with a short movement 
and the former rising as it is moved toward 
either end and the latter descending as it is 
moved from its normal position in one or the 
other direction. 
The machine is provided with two fans F.' 
and G', which for convenience of reference I 
term, respectively, the front and rear' fans. 
These fans may both be controlled by side 
doors or shutters, and the discharge-chute f 
of the front fan is arranged to direct a blast 
into the upper shoe. The rear fan G' has its 
discharge-chute g adjustable, said chute hav 
ing its boards g ghinged at their inner or 
frontends, so their rear ends may be ad 
justed up or down, and such boards g g are 
- 
25 
35 
45 
55 
fo 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOC 
 
474,275 
connected by a link g, so that they will move 
alike and so that the movement of One will 
move the other. To operate the chute, I pro 
vide the lever G', pivoted at G' and having 
one arm G' arranged to engage the board g 
and its other arm G to serve as a handle, the 
pivot-bolt of such lever being drawn suffi 
ciently tight to secure the lever in any posi 
tion to which it may be adjusted. It Will be 
seen that the lever may be operated to Set the 
adjustable chute up or down and to force a 
blast of air to the upper shoe to Supplement 
the front fan blast or to deliver the blast of 
the rear fan to the middle or lower shoe or 
artly to each, as may be desired. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new is 
1. In an apparatus substantially as de 
scribed, the combination of the shoes C, D, 
and E, arranged one above the other, as de 
scribed, of the fan F, having a fixed chute 
arranged to direct a blast to the upper shoe 
C, and the fan G', having its discharge-chute 
adjustable and arranged to be set to direct a 
blast to any one of the shoes, whereby it may 
be caused to direct a blast to the middle Or 
lower shoe or to supplement the blast of the 
fan F" to the upper shoe. 
2. In an apparatus substantially as de 
scribed, the combination of the shoes CD E 
and the hangers and bars supporting the same, 
said shoes being arranged one below the other 
and each to discharge to the next lower one, 
the levers E, arranged alongside the shoes 
and pivoted between their ends to the fram 
ing and connected at their upper ends with 
the shoes. C, links. E", connecting the lower 
ends of said levers with the lower shoe E, rods 
C, connecting said levers E with moving 
parts of the machine, and rods D, connecting 
45 
50 
55 
the shoe D with moving parts of the machine, 
all substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
3. In a machine substantially as described, 
the combination of the framing, the upper, 
lower, and middle shoes, the hangers Support 
ing the upper shoe, the bars supporting the 
middle shoe, the rods or bars supporting the 
lower shoe, said rods being pivoted at their 
lower ends to the framing and at their upper 
ends to the lower shoe, and operating mech 
anism, all substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
4. The combination, substantially as herein 
described, of the framing, the upper and mid 
dle shoes and their hangers and Supporting 
bars, the lower shoe and its supporting rods 
or bars, the levers connecting the upper and 
lower shoes, and operating mechanism for OS 
cillating the upper and middle shoes, substan. 
tially as set forth. 
5. In an apparatus. Substantially as de 
scribed, the combination of the shoe C, the 
hangers C, supporting the shoe C, the shoe 
D, arranged below the shoe C and in position 
to receive the discharge from said shoe, the 
rods or bars supporting the shoe D, the shoe 
E, arranged below and in position to receive 
the discharge from the shoe D, rods support 
ing the shoe E, the levers E, arranged along 
side the shoes C, D, and E and connected at 
their upper ends to the shoe C and at their 
lower ends with the shoe E, and mechanism 
for reciprocating the shoes C and D, substan 
tially as set forth. 
JOHN WELLER, 
Witnesses: 
J. IRVIN BITNER, 
C. B. WAGNER. 
O 
15 O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474375.txt	(No Model.) 
O. F. EW ANS. 
TROLLEY WIRE SUPPORT, 
No. 474,375, 
Patented May 10, 1892. 
WITNESSES: 
a 41.4/ky 
/47/hceola 
INVENTOR 
(20ez A. Aiazs 
By 
ATTORNEYS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OWEN F. EVANS, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-FOURTH TO 
HANNAH. J. BIDDLECOME, OF SAME PLACE. 
TROLLEY-WIRE SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,875, dated May 10, 1892. 
Application filed January 24, 1891, Serial No. 378,971 (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whon, it inctly concer'72: 
Be it known that I, OWEN F. EVANS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Colum 
bus, in the county of Franklin and State of 
Ohio, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Trolley-Wire Supports for 
Electric Railways, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relafes to trolley or track 
wire supports for electric railways; and its 
objects are to provide a superior support of 
this class the arrangement of which will ad 
mit of the employment of a comparatively 
small number of poles placed at compara 
tively long distances apart, thus doing away 
to a great extent with a well-known objec 
tionable feature in electric railways. 
A further object of my invention consists 
in employing the electric conducting-wire as 
a support for the trolley-wire, and thus ar 
range said wires in a neat and compact 
Yale. 
These objects I accomplish in the manner 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective of an elec 
tric-railway line showing my improved wire 
support. Fig. 2 is a side elevation showing 
the upper portion of two poles and my im 
proved wire-support, and Fig. 3 is a transverse 
view at right angles with that shown in Fig. 2. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
C, represents the poles, which, as shown, are 
of the ordinary telegraph -pole form, and 
which for convenience of use with my im 
provements are somewhat taller than the 
poles ordinarily used. Between the upper 
end portion of each pair of poles is stretched 
a transverse wire or cable b, which may be in 
sulated from the poles at the points of con 
nection there with or by insulation in the 
cross-wires, as shown at C. To the centers of 
these cross-wires b is secured an electric con 
ducting and supporting wire d, which, as 
shown, is allowed to sag slightly between its 
points of suspension d' to form between each 
of said points a truss-wire. The suspension 
or truss wire d is preferably broken at itslow 
5o points between the cross-wires, and the ends 
35 
45 
thereof connected by any desirable form of 
turnbucklef. 
g represents the trolley or track wire, 
against which the trolley i of the car runs in 
the usual manner. This trolliey-wire is sus 
pended horizontally from the wired by short 
vertical suspension hanger-wiresg', which de 
pend from the upper wired at intervals, and 
which are of such varying lengths as to support 
the trolley-wire in the desired horizontal po 
sition. The upper wire d is also utilized as 
an electric supply-wire, the current being 
supplied to the trolley-wire through the hang 
ers g. By this arrangement it will be seen 
that the use of double lines of wires ordinarily 
Occasioned by the employment of a supply 
wire at one side of the roadway is obviated. 
It is well known that a sagging suspension 
wire suspended between two points is capable 
of Supporting a comparatively great weight, 
and by thus supporting the trolley-wire it 
will be seen that I am enabled to not only 
suspend the trolley or track wire in the de 
sired horizontal position, but that this may 
be accomplished by making the attaching 
points of the suspension and supply wire at 
long intervals. It will thus be seen that this 
mode of suspending the trolley-wire will re 
sult in doing away with a large number of 
the poles ordinarily employed in the construc 
tion of electric railways, and that this omis 
sion of poles will go far toward overcoming a 
well-known objection of electric-car lines in 
cities. 
The sagging of the suspension-wire may be 
taken up or let out, as desired, by turning the 
turnbucklef and drawing the connecting ends 
of the wire inward or letting them out in the 
well-known manner. 
It will be observed that the compact ar 
rangement of the trolley and supply wires and 
the comparatively Small number of polesar 
ranged long distances apart cannot but greatly 
add to the appearance of electric - railway 
lines and lessen the obstruction of the street 
thereby. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In a wiring for electric railways, the com 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 
474,875 
2 
bination, with the polesarranged in pairs, pole- by conducting and supporting wires g of 
connecting wires b, and suspension-wire d, varying lengths, substantially as and for the 
charged with electricity and connecting wires purpose specified. 
b by sagging spans, each of said spans being 
provided with an intervening turnbuckle, as 
described, of the horizontal trolley-wire sus- 
pended from said suspension and supply wire 
C. C. SHEPHERD, 
BARTON GRIFFITH. 
In presence of 
OWEN F. EVANS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474475.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
T. S. LEWIS. 
ICE CREAM FREEZER. 
No. 474,475, 
Patented May 10, 1892. 
-ay- -Z- 
 
 
s 
B 
 
 
 
 
 
SITE22&2Az II Z22 
W 
G) 
WA O 
722 
NYH. s 
EN 9. 
S 
safis2 s R 
X- -S 
See 
SES 
S 
 
HS 
928tvosses 
Aafa-424.2% 
d (6.0-2/ 
C46 
6%-?36,4- 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS S. LEWIS, OF WILMINGTON, DELAWARE. 
CE - CREAM FREEZE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,475, dated May 10, 1892. 
Application filed July 23, 1891, Serial No. 400,422, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To att, whon, it may concern: 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wilming 
ton, in the county of New Castle and State of 
5 Delaware, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Ice-Cream Freezers; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
Io which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to ice-cream freezers, 
but more particularly to the dasher thereof. 
It consists of a dasher having a standard or 
axis of any desirable shape in cross-section, 
I5 but preferably rectangular, having cast on 
opposite sides two or more paddles or blades. 
The other sides of the standard or axis are 
each provided with lugs or ribs integrally 
cast, one of which is slightly longer than the 
2O other. Working on these ribs or lugs are 
plates having castintegrally a series of blades 
or paddles, the uppermost of which have 
Small apertures or eyes, which are engaged by 
Spring-arms or their equivalent, said arms be 
25 ing secured to the standard near the top of 
the cream-receptacle. 
Heretofore great difficulty has been expe 
rienced by manufacturers of ice-cream from 
the fact that all of the paddles of the dasher 
3o are rigidly cast with the standard. Conse 
quently when the dasher is revolved at a high 
rate of Speed, as they are in ice-cream facto 
ries, the cream is frequently churned into a 
solid lump of butter, and if this is not the 
35 case it will be found, as it has been in actual 
experience, that small lumps of butter will be 
distributed throughout the ice-cream, all of 
which is very objectionable to the consumer 
and detrimental to the manufacturer. Fur 
4o ther, by having all of the paddles constantly 
agitating the cream prevents it from freezing 
rapidly. 
The object of my invention is to obviate the 
above objections by casting ribs on the stand 
45 ard of the dasher and providing plates adapt 
ed to slide thereon, said sliding plates having 
paddles cast integrally therewith. I also se 
cure spring-arms or their equivalent to the 
standard near the top of the cream-recepta 
5o cle, which engage the paddles of the sliding 
plates and hold them up out of the cream. The 
scraper, which travels around the sides of the 
cream-receptacle, scrapes the frozen cream 
Beit known that I, THOMAS S. LEWIS, a citi- from the sides, and as soon as the cream has 
been frozen to a certain degree of solidity I 
drop a pin through an aperture in the COver 
of the cream-receptacle. The dasher continu 
ing to revolve, the spring-arms strike against 
the said pin, and are thus released from the 
sliding plates, which upon being released fall 
of their own weight down into the partly 
frozen cream. When ice-cream is thus made, 
it will be found that it is free from the objec 
tionable lumps of butter, and, further, it Will 
be finer. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical Cen 
tral section through an ice-cream freezer With 
my invention attached. Fig.2 is a detail view 
of my improved dasher. Fig. 3 is a top plan 
view of the cream-receptacle and dasher. Fig. 
4 is a detail view. 
A is the ice-receiving tub, and B the cream 
receptacle. Working in the cream-receptacle 
is the stand B', having integrally-cast pad 
diles b b. 
bb are ribs integrally cast with the stand 
ard, one of which is longer than the other. 
These ribs may be of any desired shape in 
cross-section. 
CC are plates provided with paddles C. C. 
The two upper paddles c care provided with 
perforated lugs c' c'. These plates C are 
formed to fit and slide on the ribs b, as best 
seen in Fig. 4. 
D is a scraping bar or paddle pivoted in the 
usual manner. 
E is the cover for the cream-receptacle, pro 
vided with apertures, into which, when nec 
essary, may be inserted the pine, which ex 
tends into the cream-receptacle. I also pro 
vide the cover with two ventilating-tubes G. 
and H, the tube H just extending through 
said cover and the tube G extending some 
distance below the same, in order to create a 
circulation, thus permitting the escape of 
odors arising from the use of poor cream, and 
to break the air-cushion that is at the top of 
freezers in general use, thereby permitting the 
cream to be more thoroughly worked, thus 
producing a superior cream. It is obvious 
that the pine may be inserted either in the 
tube or the aperture. Consequently one or 
the other may be used, or both, as found most 
desirable. 
95 
OO 
474,475 
35 
45 
Secured to the standard and near the top cast thereon, and movable paddles adapted to 
of the cream-receptacle are spring-arms ee, 
slide on said ribs, substantially as described. 
provided with hooks on their respective outer 
3. A dasher having an axis, ribs integrally 
ends, Said hooks engaging when desired the 
cast thereon, movable paddles mounted there 
perforated lugs c' c'. 
on, and means for holding said movable pad 
bib are ribs on the ends of the lugs b b. 
dles up out of position, substantially as de 
The Operation is as follows: Before placing 
scribed. 
the dasher in the can I raise the sliding plates 
4. A dasher having an axis, movable pad 
CC and fasten the hooks of the armse into 
dles, means for holding said paddles out of 
the perforated lugs c' c'. I then place the 
position, and a pin adapted to disengage said 
dasher in the can and start the machine. The 
means from the paddles, thereby permitting 
Scraper D Scrapes the cream from the sides of 
them to drop into position, substantially as 
the can as it freezes, and aside from the 
described. 
Scraper the cream is not agitated at all. Con 
5. In an ice-cream freezer, the combination, 
Sequently it freezes much quicker than it oth 
with a dasher having movable paddles and 
erwise would. As soon the crean is frozen to 
means for holding said paddles out of posi 
a certain degree of solidity I drop the pine 
tion, of a cover or lid having an opening and 
through the aperture in the cover E. The 
a pin adapted to pass through said opening, 
machine, continuing to revolve, carries the 
substantially as described. 
pin around, and it strikes against the arms e 
6. A dasher having an axis, ribs integrally 
and disengages them from the sliding plates, 
cast thereon, movable paddles adapted to en 
which upon being released drop down to their 
gage said lugs, and means for holding said 
respective places at the bottom of the dasher paddles out of position, and the pins b for 
against the pins lib. 
limiting the downward movement of said pad 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
dles, substantially as described. 
ters Patent, is 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
l. In a receptacle, a dasher having mov 
presence of two witnesses. 
able paddles adapted to be thrown into and 
out of position without being removed from 
the receptacle. 
2. A dasher having an axis, ribs integrally 
IIARRY E. BUCHER, 
HARRY C. GRIFFITH. 
THOMAS S. LEWIS. 
Witnesses: - 
O 
3O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474575.txt	(No Model.) 
F, E, BUTTS, 
MEASURING FUNNEL, 
No. 474575, 
Patented May 10, 1892. 
E- a 
6 -f 
g. 
s 
L 
  
  
A 8 
zetata 
s 
simalN 
List 
 
  
 
 
The North's PETERs co, Photo-Litho, washington, p. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK E. BUTTS, OF WINCHESTER, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
ISAIAH P. WATTS, OF SAME PLACE. 
MEASURING-FUNNEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,575, dated May 10, 1892, 
Application filed January 22, 1892, Serial No, 418,878, (No model.) 
To all livhon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FRANK E. BUTTS, of 
Winchester, county of Randolph, and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Bottle-Fillers; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which like letters refer to like parts. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the construction of devices for filling bottles 
and other similar vessels, and will be under 
stood from the following description. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation of 
my device. Fig. 2 is a central longitudinal 
section through the same. Fig. 3 is a top view 
with the cover removed, and Fig. 4 is a sec 
tional view of the base upon which the filler 
rests when not in use. 
In detail, I represents a cylindrical vessel 
having a handle 2 and provided with a fun 
nel-shaped bottom 3, and at its end is an ex 
tension provided with threads upon which the 
tapered end piece or tip 4 is screwed, a stop 5 
being provided on the outside of this tip, 
which limits its insertion in the bottle which 
is to be filed. 
6 are guides secured to the inside of tile ves 
sel 1 and on opposite sides of the same, and 
between these the side pieces 7 of the remov 
able frame-work fit, the cross-pieces 8 of this 
frame-work each having a central perforation 
through which passes the valve-stem 9, pro 
vided at its lower end with a valve 10, which 
is adapted to close the opening in the inner 
end of the tip 4, its upper end being connected 
to one end of the lever 11, which is pivoted at 
12 to a bracket 13, attached to the upper cross 
piece S of the frame-work, the outer end of 
the lever 11 being turned up and provided 
with a thumb-piece 15. Around the valve 
stem between the two cross-pieces of the frame 
work is coiled the spring 16, a nut 17 being 
secured on the stem below the same for ad 
justing its tension. 
18 is the vessel- cover, and 19 is a hollow 
sheet-metal base having a central opening in 
its top and upon which the bottle-filler is 
adapted to rest when not in use. 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
The vessel being filled with liquid, the tip or 
end 4 is inserted in the bottle, and at the same 
time the end of the lever 11 is depressed, lift 
ing up the valve-stem and opening the valve 
10 at the bottom of the vessel, allowing the 
liquid to flow from the same into the bottle 
or receptacle that is being filled. When the 
same is filled to the desired height, the lever 
11 is released and the coiled spring 16 forces 
the valve back into position, closing the open 
ing through the tip 4, and this operation is 
repeated whenever a bottle is filled. The 
frame - work which fits between the guide 
Strips 6 is removable, so that it may be taken 
out for cleaning at any time after use or when 
a different liquid is to be used in the filler. 
It will also be seen that the tip or end on the 
bottom of the filler is also removable, and these 
are made in different sizes to accommodate 
corresponding bottles. 
Another use to which my device may be put 
is in filling stone bottles or jugs, where as the 
liquid is run in it cannot be seen from the 
outside, and the filler may be marked off and 
the desired quantity be turned in the same 
and from it into the bottle without danger of 
Overflow and Waste. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is the following: 
1. Abottle-filler composed of a cylinder 1, 
having the spout 4 at its lower end, and a re 
movable frame-Work 8 therein, a valve-rod 9, 
journaled therein, provided with a valve 10, 
adapted to close the opening of the tip 4, a 
spring 16, coiled on the valve-rod for holding 
the valve normally closed, and a lever for lift 
ing the valve, hinged to the top of the valve 
rod and provided with a suitable thumb-piece 
for operating the same, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. A bottle-filling device comprising a cyl 
inder 1, having a removable tip or spout 4 at 
its lower end for inserting into the neck of 
the bottle to be filled, a gaging-stop 5 at one 
side, a removable partition or frame-work 8 
inside the cylinder, a spring-controlled valve 
rod passing through the same and provided 
with a valve on its lower end closing the open 
ing in the tip, and a lever connected to the 
valve-rod for lifting the valve against the ten 
sion of the spring, all combined substantially 
as shown and described. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
474,575 
3. A bottle-filling device comprising a cyl 
inder 1, having a removable tip or spout 4 at 
its lower end for inserting in the neck of the 
bottle to be filled, a gaging-stop 5 at one side, 
a removable partition or frame-work 8 inside 
the cylinder, a spring- controlled valve-rod 
passing through the same and provided with 
a valve on its lower end closing the opening 
in the tip, and a lever connected to the valve 
rod for lifting the valve against the tension to 
of the spring, in combination with a rest for 
holding the filler when not in use. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 18th day of January, 1892. 
FRANK E. BUTTS. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN W. NEWTON, 
EDMUND ENGLE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474675.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MILNE. 
ROPE HOOK, 
No. 474,675, 
- 
Patented May 10, 1892. 
28itvacoscs 
 
the Norris Peters co. Photo-lito, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES MILNE, OF SCOTCH GROVE, IOWA, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO 
JOSEPH J. MILNE, OF SAME PLACE. 
RO PE - HOOK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,675, dated May 10, 1892. 
Application filed March 3, 1892, Serial No. 423,660, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
provide the hook with a curved portion, which 
Be it known that I, JAMES MILNE, a citizen 
is adapted to embrace an intermediate por 
of the United States of America, residing at 
tion of the rope or cable. It will be observed 
Scotch Grove, in the county of Jones and State 
by the peculiar bends which the metalis given 
of Iowa, have invented certain new and use 
that this hook has the greatest strength with 
ful Improvements in Rope-Hooks; and I do 
the smallest amount of material and weight 
hereby declare the following to be a full, 
and that the edges are turned back, So that 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
at no time can they come in contact with the 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
rope or cable and cut it; also, that the Webs 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
formed thereon will reinforce and strengthen 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
the hook. The shape of the part of the hook 
ing drawings, and to letters of reference 
which bears upon the cable is such that it 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
will not abruptly bend or cut the same, and 
specification. 
the enlarged eye a with its reinforcing-bar 
The invention relates to improvements in 
affords a maximum amount of bearing for the 
rope-hooks. 
rope at the point of attachment. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
Though I have shown the device as made 
hook to which a rope may be securely fastened 
from forged metal it is obvious that the same 
and when looped and caused to engage there 
device can be cast, and when made of cast 
with will not present an abrupt bend, the same 
metal the bar may be inserted or this part of 
being especially adapted to be applied to wire 
the hook made solid. It will be noted that 
rope, where it is desired to connect one end 
the eye a is located below the plane of th 
of the rope to an intermediate portion there 
hook d. 
of; and the invention consists in the particu 
Having thus described my invention, I 
lar construction of the hook, as will be here 
claim 
inafter fully set forth, and specifically point 
A rope-hook constructed substantially as 
ed out in the claim. 
shown and consisting of a body portion hav 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
ing sides which diverge from the eye and are 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
bent or curled to form a circular portion ad 
spective view showing the application of my jacent to the eye and continued therefrom to 
improvement. Fig. 2 is a plan view. Fig. 3 
the ends, the end of said hook opposite the 
is a sectional view taken through the line at a 
eye being bent to have a convex bearing-sur 
of Fig. 2, and Fig. 4 is an inverted plan view. 
face, substantially as shown, whereby round 
ed bearing-surfaces at the point of engage 
The hook may be formed from flat metal or 
casting in any suitable manner. This hook 
ment with the rope and at the eye are pro 
A is provided at one end with an eye a, the 
vided, for the purpose set forth. 
rear wall of which is rounded and reinforced 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
by a bar of metal b. The sides of the hook 
presence of two witnesses. 
diverge from the eye and are curved or curled 
inward to present a rounded outer edge. The 
front edge of the hook is slightly concave lon 
gitudinally, as shown at c, and is bent over 
and extended toward the eye, as shown, to 
ROBT. M. THOMAS, 
E. H. MOATS, 
JAMES MILNE. 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474776.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 474,776. 
J. W. HENSON, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
BILL AND LETTER, FILE, 
s 
Patented May 10, 1892. 
 
E 
Osia. 
f 
Z 2 r a 7/2 a 27.67 
777 Zezerre Jr. 
areasco, poro-Ho. washingtoN, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 474,776. 
J. W. HENSON. 
BILL AND LETTER, FILE, 
O 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 10, 1892. 
 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
J. W. HENSON, 
BILL AND LETTER, FILE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 474,776. 
Patented May 10, l892. 
 
 
 
 
 
y--- YSN 
77 E. e 
7. 
4 speeragi. 
A. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. W. HENSON, OF LA GRANGE, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
NAHUM EDWARD JENNISON, OF SAME PLACE. 
B L AND LETTER FLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,776, dated May 10, 1892. 
Application filed November 25, 1890, Serial No, 372,605, No model.) 
So 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whon, it inctly conce7n. 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. W. IIENSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at La 
Grange, in the county of Cook and State of 
5 Illinois, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Bill and Letter Files, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to bill and letter files 
of that class which comprise a couple of par 
Io allel transfer-wires and a couple of parallel 
receiving - wires located the sane distance 
apart as said receiving-wires and movable to 
ward and away from the latter, whereby said 
transfer and receiving wires can be joined or 
15 separated to permit papers to be placed 
thereon and removed therefrom. 
The object of my improvement is to pro 
vide a device of this description comprising a 
minimum number of parts, combining dura 
20 bility and compactness of construction and 
arrangement with simplicity and efficiency of 
operation. 
The invention consists in the features of 
construction and combination of parts here 
25 inafter fully described, and pointed out in the 
appended claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a plan view of a 
file constructed in accordance with my in 
3o vention. In this and in the other views only 
a portion of the base-board is shown for con 
venience of illustration. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation. In this figure the receiving - wires 
and parts connected there with are shown in 
35 dotted lines in the position they will assume 
when separated from the transfer-wires. Fig. 
3 is a plan view of the apparatus with the 
spring-plate removed. Fig. 4 is a detail view 
of the operating-bar. Fig. 5 is a transverse 
4o section of the same on line 55. Fig. 6 is a 
plan view of a modified form of construction 
embodying my invention. Fig. 7 is a view, 
partly in vertical section, on line 77 in Fig. 
6. Fig. S is a detail view of a modified form of 
45 construction of the upright support of the op 
erating-bar. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, A indi 
cates a base-board upon which the operative 
parts of the device are supported. As before 
- 
stated, a file constructed in accordance with 
my invention embraces two stationary trans 
fer-wires and two movable receiving-wires 
capable of being moved toward said trans 
fer-wires, so as to be joined thereto in the 
usual manner, so that papers can be passed 
from one of Said pairs of wires to the other 
pair and also capable of being separated, so 
that papers can be placed upon and removed 
from said receiving-wires. The construction 
employed for joining the wires consists of a 
recess in the end of one that receives the 
end portion of the other wire, so that they 
have interfitting end portions. The transfer 
wires B are secured to the base-board and have 
upright portions b and overhanging arched 
portions b', whose lower ends are recessed, as 
shown at b, to receive the pointed or sharp 
ened ends of the upright movable receiving 
wires C. In accordance with the broad idea 
of my improvement the said receiving-wires 
are arranged so that they are capable of a 
downward movement to separate their ends 
from the ends of the transfer-wires and then 
a movement away from or to one side of the 
ends of said transfer-wires to permit the pa 
pers to be easily placed upon the said receiv 
ing-wires. The above-described movement. 
part of the receiving - wires discon 
on the 
nects them from the transfer - wires, and to 
connect them a movement that is the reverse 
of the above-described movement is imparted 
to said receiving-wires. 
The manner of using a bill and letter file of 
this kind is substantially the same as that of 
the ordinary file, and consists merely in bring 
ing the receiving-wires forward, as shown in 
dotted lines in Fig. 2, when it is desired to 
place papers thereon, and then throwing said 
receiving-wires back to connect them with 
the transfer-wires in a familiar manner. In 
said FigS. 1 to 3 the said transfer-wires are 
made in one piece and the rectangular-shaped 
base portion formed by bending the part of 
the wire connecting the upright portions to 
the desired shape and Securing said bent base 
portion in a suitably-formed groove or cut 
away portion of the base-board. The mov 
able receiving-wires are also conveniently 
95 
2 
474,776 
O 
formed from a continuous piece and comprises 
the upright portions c, connected by the base 
portion c'. The receiving-wires are carried 
and supported upon a spring-plate D, which 
5 rests upon the base-board at its ends, but rises 
therefrom between said ends. Suitable per 
forations or apertures are formed in said 
spring-plate D, through which the upright 
portions c of the receiving-wires project, and 
the base portion c' is soldered or otherwise 
secured to the under side of said spring-plate 
D. The combined downward and forward 
movement of the receiving-wires is accom 
plished by pressing downwardly the upwardly 
curved portion of the sliding spring-plate, and 
at the same time causing said spring-plate to 
move forwardly, it being understood that the 
downward movement of the receiving-wires 
first occurs until the sharpened ends of the re 
ceiving - wires are withdrawn from the re 
cessed ends of the transfer-wires, whereupon 
the former can be moved forwardly without 
interference. The width of the spring-plate 
is greater than the distance between the re 
25 ceiving and transfer wires, and said plate in 
its rear portion is cut away, as at d d, to pro 
vide a rearwardly, extending portion, which 
can pass between the upright portions of the 
transfer-wires. In the forward end portions 
3o of said spring-plate a longitudinal slot d is 
cut, and a pin or projection dupon the base 
board passes therethrough and serves, in con 
nection with its narrow extended rear portion 
d, which fits between the transfer-wires, to 
35 form suitable guides for said sliding spring 
plate. 
E E are upright supports for the operating 
bar F, which serves to give the desired move 
ment to the spring-plate. Said operating-bar 
4o turns in bearings formed in said upright sup 
ports E, and is provided upon one of its edges 
with overhanging lugs or fingers f, which en 
gage perforations or openings d' in said slid 
ing plate. In Fig. 2 the said operating-bar is 
45 shown in full lines in the position it will as 
sume when the transfer-wires and receiving 
wires are joined and also in dotted lines when 
said wires are disconnected. Said operating 
bar conveniently consists of a flat piece having 
5o reduced endportions f', which engage the bear 
ing-apertures e in the supports E. The said 
bearing-aperturee embraces three sides e'ee, 
the side e' being curved inwardly, while the 
sides eande are curved outwardly. The out 
55 wardly-curved side e forms a segment of a 
circle whose center is located at the junction 
of the sides e' and e, and the curve of the side 
e forms a segment of a circle whose center is 
located at the junction of the sides e' and e, 
6o the radius of these outwardly-curved sides 
being approximately the same as the width of 
the reduced end portions of the operating-bar. 
The curve of the inwardly-curved side of this 
bearing-aperture is about the same as the 
65 other sides, while at its junction with the out 
wardly-curved sides it is cut out slightly, as 
- 
at e, to receive the edges of the reduced por 
tions f' of the operating-bar. When the wires 
are joined, the operating-bar is in a substan 
tially horizontal position, with the edges of 
its reduced portions located, respectively, at 
the junction of the outwardly-curved side e 
of the bearing portions with the other curved 
sides e' and e, the parts being so constructed 
that when in this position the flat side of said 
operating-bar will rest against the upper sur 
face of the upwardly-bent spring-plate, with 
the lugs fengaging the said apertures of said 
plate. When, however, it is desired to dis 
connect the receiving and transfer wires, the 
handle F of the operating-bar is thrown up 
wardly and rearwardly, and during the first 
part of the throw of this operating-bar it will 
turn upon its edge, located at the junction of 
the sides e' and e of the bearing-aperture, as 
a center, and its other edge will traverse the 
curved side e until the flat portion of the bar 
riding over said curved side e' will draw the 
said edge away from its center and throw the 
opposite edge to the junction of the curved 
sides e' and e, whereupon it will turn upon 
this latter point as a center until it comes 
in contact with the lower end of the side e, 
as shown in dotted lines in said Fig. 2. This 
will have the effect of bringing the receiving 
wires to the position also shown in dotted 
lines in said figure. During the first part of 
the throw of said operating-bar the spring 
plate will be compressed and the downward 
movement of said fingers f will be such that 
the pointed ends of said receiving-wires will 
be drawn from engagement with the transfer 
before said fingers move forwardly during the 
latter part of the throw of said operating-bar. 
At the end of the throw of the bar the spring 
plate rises slightly, which movement is hardly 
perceptible and does not form an essential 
feature of its operation. In said Fig. 2 the 
Spring-plate is also shown in dotted lines in 
the position it will assume at the ends of the 
forward throw of the receiving-wires. Papers 
can now be removed and placed upon said re 
ceiving-wires in the usual manner, and by a 
reverse movement of the operating-bar the 
said receiving-wires can be thrown back and 
into engagement with the transfer-wires, it 
being observed that until the wires are joined 
the spring-plate exerts an upward, pressure, 
SO that it rises automatically during its rear 
Ward movement under the influence of the 
operating-bar. 
The construction of the operating-bar and 
bearing-apertures shown in the foregoing fig 
ures presents a preferred form of construc 
tion, although it will be understood that wa 
rious other devices and arrangements can be 
resorted to to accomplish this movement with 
out departing from the spirit of my invention, 
and except in the claims for the specific forms 
of Construction I do not wish to be limited to 
any particular device for causing the forward 
throw of the receiving-wires. 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
474,776 
O 
25 
40 
45 
50 
In the form of construction shown in Figs. 
6 and 7 I have illustrated the device in which 
the receiving-wires, instead of being carried 
and supported upon the sliding spring-plate, 
are carried by the sliding plate, which is sub 
ject to the action of springs. The construc 
tion and arrangement of the transfer-wires is 
the same as heretofore described, while the 
plate G for supporting the receiving-wires is 
preferably partially covered with sheet metal, 
to which are secured the said receiving-wires. 
The rear portion of said plate G. fits between 
the upright portions of the stationary trans 
fer-wires and is guided thereby, while the 
upright supports E for the operating-bar are 
arranged between the pairs of wires and pass 
upwardly through slots g, formed in said plate 
G, which also serve to guide the movement of 
said plate. The said operating-bar acts in 
the same manner, as described, and when the 
wires are joined the forward edge of said 
sliding plate is elevated by a couple of plate 
springs A", which are secured to the base 
board beneath and near the forward edge of 
said sliding plate. The metallic cover G' 
upon said spring-plate is provided with ap 
ertures g' to receive the fingers f of the oper 
ating-bar. 
The operation of this form of de 
vice will be readily seen, for under the influ 
ence of the operating-bar the plate will be 
depressed against the action of the springs 
A' and will then be moved forwardly in an 
obvious manner, while during the reverse 
movement of said metal bar the said springs 
will serve to elevate the sliding plate and 
bring the receiving-wires into engagement 
with the transfer-wires. 
The bent base portion of the stationary 
wires is secured in the grooved portion of the 
base-board by means of the bases E of the 
upright supports, which latter are secured to 
In Figs. 1 and 
said base-board by screws e. 
3 the said bases E of the upright supports 
are shown with their adjacent edges in con 
tact with each other, which forms a guide for 
their position. In Fig. 7 the spring A' is 
shown as being secured to the base-board by 
having its rear end located beneath the base 
portion E of the upright E and secured by 
one of the screws that hold said upright in 
position. 
It will be understood for the broad idea of 
- my invention I contemplate accomplishing 
the throw of the receiving-wires by any suit 
able means, and do not intend to limit myself 
to the devices herein shown, except in the 
claims for the specific construction therefor, 
as various means could be Substituted. It 
will further be understood that the particu 
lar spring-support for the receiving-wires can 
also be variously modified without departing 
from my invention. In Fig. 8, however, I - 
have shown a modified form of construction 
for accomplishing the throw of the receiving 
wires, which consists in making the curved 
sides of the bearing - apertures of greater 
length and enlarging the operating-bar cor 
respondingly. By the employment of this 
construction it requires a throw on the part 
of the operating-handle E' equal to about 
one-quarter of a revolution, whereas when in 
connection with device shown in Fig. 2 it re 
quires a throw equal to about one-third of a 
revolution. While it is understood that I 
am entitled to all changes in dimensions, 
yet in the form of upright shown in Fig. 
8 the lower curved side e does not meet 
the lower end of the outwardly-curved side 
e. In said figure the curved side e of the 
bearing-aperture is the same length as the 
curved side e of the aperture shown in Fig. 
2, and at its forward end is provided with an 
abutment or shoulder e, which serves to limit 
the forward movement of the lower edge of 
the operating-bar and performs the same 
function as the lower end of the curved side 
e' of the bearing-aperture shown in Fig. 2. 
It is manifest that any pivotal connection 
between the operating-bar and sliding sup 
port for the receiving-Wires can be substi 
tuted for the connection herein shown and 
described. The separable hinge-joint shown 
is a convenient construction; but an ordinary 
hinge connecting said parts will answer the 
purpose, in which case it would not be nec 
essary to have the pin and slot guiding mech 
anism at the front end of the spring-plate. It 
is further obvious that the ends of the trans 
fer-wires can be sharpened and the receiv 
ing-wires recessed, although the construction 
shown is preferable. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires engaging the 
ends of Said transfer-wires, and a movable 
support for said receiving-wires, having acom 
pound movement for moving the receiving 
wires to first separate their ends from the 
ends of the transfer-wires and then for mov 
ing said receiving-wires to one side of the 
ends of said transfer-wires. 
2. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer and receiving wires having interfit 
ting end portions, said receiving-wires being 
mounted upon a movable support having a 
compound movement for moving the receiv 
ing-wires to first separate their ends from the 
ends of the transfer-wires and then for mov 
ing said receiving-wires to one side of the 
ends of said tran?fer-wires. 
3. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, and movable receiving-wires 
mounted upon a flexible support. 
4. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, and movable receiving-wires 
mounted upon a resilient support. 
5. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, and receiving-wires mounted 
upon a movable and flexible support. 
6. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, and receiving-wires mounted 
upon a movable and resilient support. 
 
75 
95 
OO 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
474,776 
O 
f5 
2 
25 
3. C 
35 
45 
7. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires mounted upon 
a movable and flexible support, and an oper 
ating device for moving and operating said 
Support. 
8. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires mounted upon 
a movable and resilient Support, and an op 
erating device for moving and operating said 
Support. 
9. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires engaging the 
ends of said transfer-wires, a movable sup 
port for said receiving-wires, having a com 
pound movement for moving the receiving 
wires to first separate their ends from the 
ends of the transfer-wires and then for mov 
ing said receiving-wires to one side of the 
ends of said transfer-wires, and an operating 
device for moving said movable support. 
10. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
upon which all the operative parts of the 
device are mounted, said base-board having 
grooves or recesses, transfer-wires having their 
base portions secured in said grooves or re 
cesses, and movable receiving-wires. 
11. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
upon which all the operative parts of the 
device are mounted, said base-board having 
grooves or recesses, transfer-wires formed 
from one continuous piece bent to form a base 
portion and needles and having said base 
portion secured within said grooves or re 
cesses, and movable receiving-Wires. 
12. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
stationary transfer-wires, and movable re 
ceiving-wires constructed from a continuous 
piece bent to provide upright needles and a 
base portion connecting the same, said base 
portion being Secured to a movable spring 
support. 
13. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer wires, and receiving-wires carried by 
a sliding spring-support movable toward and 
away from said base-board. 
14. A paper-file comprising a base-board, a 
plurality of upright stationary transfer-wires, 
and receiving-wires carried by a sliding sup 
port having a rearwardly-extending portion 
fitting between said transfer-wires, whereby 
said sliding support is guided. 
15. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer - wires, receiving - wires, a sliding 
spring-support for said receiving-wires, and 
devices arranged to depress and slide said 
spring-support and receiving-wires. 
16. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving - wires, a sliding 
spring-support for said receiving-wires, mov 
able toward and away from Said base-board, 
and an operating-bar Supported in bearings 
on said base-board and engaging said spring 
Support. 
17. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving - wires, a sliding 
spring-support therefor, and a revolving oper 
ating-bar supported in bearings on said base 
board and engaging said Spring-Support. 
18. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires, a sliding sup 
port for said receiving-wires, and an operat 
ing-bar supported in bearings on said base 
board and pivoted to said sliding support. 
19. A paper-file comprising a baseboard, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires, a sliding sup 
port for said receiving-wires, and an operat 
ing bar or lever engaging said sliding support, 
said bar or lever being supported in bearings 
on said base-board and having a shifting full 
crum-point. 
20. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires, a sliding sup 
port for said receiving-wires, an operating bar 
or lever engaging said sliding support, and 
uprights E on said base-board, said uprights 
being formed with bearing-apertures e, in 
which the end portions of the operating bar 
or lever are supported, said bearing-apertures 
being provided with a plurality of fulcrum 
points for said operating bar or lever. 
21. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires, a sliding sup 
port for said receiving-wires, an operating bar 
or lever engaging said sliding support, and 
uprights E on said base-board, said uprights 
being formed with bearing-apertures e, hav 
ing inwardly-curved sides e' and outwardly 
curved sides e and e, the fulcrum-points of 
said operating bar or lever being located at 
the points of junction of said side e' with said 
sides e and e. 
22. A paper-file comprising a base -board, 
transfer-wires, and receiving-wires carried by 
a sliding Spring-plate movable toward and 
away from said base-board. 
23. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer - wires, receiving - wires, a sliding 
spring-plate upon which said receiving-wires 
are supported, resting at its end portions upon 
said base-board and having an uprising inter 
mediate portion. 
24. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, and receiving-wires carried by 
a sliding plate possessing inherent elasticity. 
25. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires carried by a 
sliding support, and a revolving operating-bar 
provided with fingers engaging with apertures 
in said sliding support. 
26. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer wires, receiving - wires, a sliding 
spring-plate upon which said receiving-wires 
are supported, and a revolving operating-bar 
provided with fingers engaging with apertures 
in said spring-plate. 
27. A paper-file comprising a base-board, 
transfer-wires, receiving-wires carried by a 
sliding spring-plate, said spring-plate resting 
at its end portions upon the base-board and 
provided at one end with a slot, and a pin 
passing through said slot and secured to said 
base-board. 
- 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
55 
 
474,776 
5 
28. A paper-file comprising a base-board, base portions located between the base pop 
receiving-wires carried by a sliding support, tions of said uprights and the said base-board. 
an operating-bar for moving said support, 
bearing-uprights for said operating-bar, said 
JOSEPH W. HENSON. 
5 uprights having base portions adapted to be 
Secured to said base-board, and transfer-wires 
secured to said base-board by having their 
HARRY COBB KENNEDY, 
R. WAGNER. 
- 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474876.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 474,876. 
W. TALBOTT, 
FIRE ESCAPE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented May 17, 1892. 
Wilbesses 
I92epfar, 
WZZZ272,272 ZZZ 
ERS Co., photo-Ho, washinra, c. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. TALBOTT, 
FIRE ESCAPE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 474,876, 
Patented May 17, 1892, 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
23. 
SNES. 
-- 
- 
s 
fy 72 24/Affarpeys, 
Ipepir 
Wzz/z Zzzaz, 
THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHO., washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILIARD TALBOTT, OF OAKSDALE, WASHINGTON. 
FIRE - ESCAPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,876, dated May 17, 1892. 
Application filed September 16, 1891, Serial No. 405,904, (No model.) 
d 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLARD TALBOTT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Oaks 
dale, in the county of Whitman and State of 
Washington, have invented a new and useful 
Fire-Escape, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
fire-escapes. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide a simple, strong, and durable fire-es 
Cape which will be portable, adapted to be 
readily put in position, and capable of rap 
idly and safely transferring persons and prop 
erty from high parts of buildings to the 
ground. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claim hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a tower fire-escape constructed in ac 
Cordance with this invention and shown in 
Operative position. Fig. 2 is a similar view, 
the upper section being lowered. Fig. 3 is a 
vertical sectional view, the parts being in the 
position shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a reverse 
plan view. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 1 
and 2 designate sections of a tower adapted 
to be arranged and extended as illustrated in 
Fig.1 of the accompanying drawings and to be 
lowered or folded, as shown in Fig. 2, and 
each consisting of four pairs of uprights 3 and 
4, sliding on each other and arranged in the 
form of a rectangle, one pair of uprights of 
each section being arranged at each side. 
The lower section 2 has a base 5, which is 
rectangular and is mounted upon wheels 6, 
and the upper section is provided at the top 
with a platform 7, which has a central open 
ing to receive an elevator-car 8, adapted to be 
raised and lowered to transfer persons and 
articles from the top of the car to the base, 
the tower forming a shaft for the elevator 
car. The tower is slightly tapering, and the 
sections are provided with keepers or guides 
9, arranged at the lower ends of the uprights 
3 of the upper section 1 and at the upper ends 
of the uprights 4 of the lower section 2, and 
which securely fasten the contiguous uprights 
. 
together and permit the same to slide freely. 
The upper section 1 is elevated by cables 10, 
which each have one end wound around a 
supplemental windlass 11 and its other end 
secured to a cross-bar 12, connecting the lower 
ends of the uprights 3 of the upper section, 
and they pass over pulleys 13, depending 
from cross-bars 14, connecting the upper ends 
of the uprights 4 of the lower section 2. The 
cables are guided to the supplemental Wind 
lass by pulleys 13, arranged on the base. The 
supplemental windlass 11 is arranged on the 
lower face of the base and is journaled in 
suitable bearings, and it has one end extend 
ed beyond the base and carrying a pinion 15, 
meshing with a cog-wheel 16, arranged on a 
shaft 17 and receiving motion from a master 
wheel 18 of the shaft 19 of a main windlass 20. 
The elevator-car S is raised by cables 25, 
each having one end secured to the elevator 
car and its other end wound around the main 
windlass 20, and they extend from the ele 
vator-car 8 to the platform 7 of the tower and 
pass over suitable pulley's 21 and extend there 
from to the base 5 of the tower, where they 
pass under pulleys 22 and through openings 
23 of the base 5 and under the shaft 17 before 
being wound around the main windlass 20, 
and those portions of the cables extending 
from the base to the platform serve as guides 
to steady the elevator-car and are arranged 
at the corners of the same and pass through 
suitable openings 24 therein. 
The platform of the tower has a suitable 
railing 26, and is designed to be adjusted ver 
tically to a position opposite a window or roof 
of a building, and in practice the platform 
will be provided with a hinged gangway or 
plank to span the space or distance between 
the tower and a building, whereby people are 
enabled to readily Walk out to the tower, 
whence they may be quickly and safely trans 
ferred by the elevator-car to the base of the 
tower. 
The gear-wheel 18 at the end of the wind 
lass may be shifted on the shaft 19 so that it 
will not mesh with the cog-wheel 16, whereby 
the windlass may be operated without impart 
ing motion to the mechanism for raising and 
lowering the upper section of the tower. 
The tower is especially advantageous in 
saving life and property, but maybe employed 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
474,876 
for other purposes-for instance, by fire-com 
panies to take the place of extension-ladders 
and it will be seen that the device is strong 
and durable, may be readily conveyed to and 
from a fire, and is capable of being readily put 
in operative position. 
From the foregoing description and the ac 
Companying drawings the construction, oper 
ation, and advantages of the invention will 
be readily understood. 
What I claim is 
In a fire-escape, the combination of a tower 
provided with a base and having a platform 
and composed of sections sliding on each other 
and forming an elevator-shaft, a windlass, a 
car arranged in the elevator-shaft and pro 
vided at each corner with an opening, pulleys 
IO 
depending from the platform, and cables 25, 
each having one end secured to the elevator 
car and its other end wound arounda Windlass, 2 
said cables extending from the elevator-car 
to the platform and passing over said pulleys 
and through the openings of the car to the 
: base, the portions of the cables extending from 
the platform to the base serving as guides to 
steady the car, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLARD TAL BOTT. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. A. BROWN, 
JAS. A. BYRNS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US474977.txt	(No Model.) 
F., THOMAS. 
- 
CUPPING GLAss WITH ELECTRICAL ATTACHMENT, 
Patented May 17, 1892, 
No. 474,977. 
 
w 
a 
SA 
As 
RS 
s 
7 
E 
sista?, SY 
N 
A 
W 
Will Will Wil Wl 
s 
MS 
S. 
S. 
Will 
s 
terror 
A. 
W 
SA 
2. 
Se 
es 
* 
, 24 2. 
RS 
M &y 1. 
Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
le 
Ot 
. 
s 
y 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS THOMAS, OF SAN 
FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
CUPPING - GLASS WITH ELECTRICAL ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 474,977, dated May 17, 1892. 
Application filed September 9, 1891, Serial No, 405,222, (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all whom, it invay concern: 
the pump is secured. The plunger is brought . 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS THOMAS, a citi 
down through the medium of a treadle or 
Zen of the United States, residing at San Fran 
pedal J, connected to one end of the beam, 
cisco, in the county of San Francisco and State 
and is returned by springs K, secured to the 
of California, have invented certain new and 
A table or platform IL is 
other end thereof. 
useful Improvements in Surgical Instruments; 
usually provided for the pump and its actu 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
ating mechanism. 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
MM are insulated flexible wires connect 
ing an electric or galvanic battery (not shown) 
such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
with posts m 'm' on the ends of the cup and 
reference being had to the accompanying 
adapted to transmit an electric current to the 
drawings, and to the letters of reference 
metallic parts-that is, the rim B and tip B'- 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
and through the medium of a wire M, a plate 
specification. 
N, and a spiral spring O to a second plate P, 
My invention relates to the external treat 
located in the fore part of the cup and covered 
ment of local diseases by cupping and by elec 
with a moist sponge Q. This sponge comes 
trization; and it consists of an instrument 
in contact with the diseased part of the body 
whereby one may secure and, if desired, sub 
which it is desired to treat, and through it is 
ject himself to the combined action and influ 
effected the electrolysis while the cupping is 
taking place. 
ence of the cupping-glass and the galvanic 
Below the rim B and beyond the larger end 
battery. 
The object of my improvements is to facili 
of the cup, Fig. 1, is a concave disk or plate 
tate the joint application of the two modes of 
R, formed of a segment of a hollow sphere. 
This plate is used for holding and electrify 
treatment above named. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a lon 
ing the scrotum when treating the lower parts 
gitudinal section of my improved cupping 
of the body, but then only. By preference 
glass and electrical connections. Fig. 2 is a 
the disk R is made of brass. It is held in po 
plan of a holder shown at the lower part of 
sition by a flat handle r, adapted to pass 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of an air 
through a suitable slit and longitudinally ad- . 
pump specially adapted for use in connection 
justable in a supporting-block S, glued on or 
with the cupping-glass, and Fig. 4 is a top 
otherwise secured to the body of the cupping 
view of the same. 
glass. A wire M transmits the current from 
Similar letters of reference are used to indi 
the battery to the handle and disk. 
The operation is obvious and as follows: 
cate similar parts in the four views. 
A represents a cup, which is preferably made 
The large open end of the cup being applied 
of glass, with a metallic rim B and a metallic 
to the skin in the neighborhood of the tumor 
tip B' cemented thereto. This cup is elongated 
or part to be healed, the surgeon or, if pre 
in form, somewhat like the body of a syringe. 
ferred, the patient himself bears upon the 
C is a nipple communicating with the inte 
treadle or pedal and works the air-pump until 
rior of the cup and provided with a stop-cock 
a partial vacuum has been produced within the 
c. These parts constitute the cupping-glass 
glass and the skin fairly bulges therein. This 
causes the blood to rush into the subcutaneous 
proper. 
To produce the necessary vacuum in the cup 
tissues under the SWelled skin, and conse 
and cause that part of the skin to which it 
quently withdraws it from the inflamed part. 
may be applied to SWell into it, I use an 
It is then time to turn on the electric current, 
air-pump D, which I connect by means of a 
which is derived in the usual way from a bat 
rubber tube E to the nipple C. This pump 
tery close at hand and is conveyed directly to 
is hung on trunnions F within a frame G, and 
the affected region through the central elec 
is adapted to swing at right angles and to 
trode, the other electrodes serving for the elec 
gether with a working beam H, which is 
trization of other parts of the body more or 
mounted upon a shaft I at the upper end of less intimately connected with the cupped 
the frame G, and to which the plunger d of part. Thus I make it possible for a patient 
- 
. 
- O 
n 
25 
35 
45 
5o 
55 
75 
95 
OC) 
 
474,977 
2 
to follow two treatments at once- i.e., cup 
ping and electrization-each of which has long 
since been acknowledged by scientists as of 
great value for the cure of inflammatory af 
fections. The combination of these two nat 
ural agencies affords a much more potent and 
effective remedy than either can presentalone 
or than can be supplied even by both applied 
separately. The effects of the cupping are 
increased by the healthful stimulation of the 
blood withdrawn from the congested part, as 
the electrolysis of the congested part is fa 
vored by the cupping. My improved instru 
ment therefore produces results which could 
not well be accomplished by other means, and 
in this respect represents an advance both in 
the science of stargery and that of electro-thera 
peutics. 
Without confining myself to the exact forms 
and precise details of construction herein 
shown and described, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States, is 
1. A surgical instrument consisting of a 
cupping device having means to electrify the 
parts to which it is applied, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. In a surgical instrument, the combina 
tion of a cupping-glass provided with a me 
O 
15 
25 
30 
35 
tallic rim and means to convey an electric 
current to said rim, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a surgical instrument, the combina 
tion of a cupping-glass, a spring therein, said 
spring terminating by an electrode, and means 
to convey an electric current therethrough, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. In a surgical instrument, the combina 
tion of a cupping-glass, a slitted block there 
under, a concave disk, said disk provided with 
a handle held by and longitudinally adjust 
able in said block, and means to convey an 
electric current to said handle and disk, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
5. A surgical instrument composed of a syr 
inge-like cupping device and means to charge 
said device with electricity, substantially as 
set forth. 
6. Asturgical instrument composed of a cup 
ping device and means for the application of 
electricity in connection with a partial vac-5o 
uum, substantially as set forth. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
45 
FRANCIS THOMAS. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
R. R. STRAIN, 
A. M. WENTWORTH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475079.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 475,079. 
 
 
 
 
L. M. DE WORE, 
DAMPER, 
Patented May 17, 1892, 
 
S1 7 
toyzvesses: 
-772 tea Zont 
2/2 
. (24- 
2-e 
2 
-2-e-2- 
/774/s. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEVI. M. DEVORE, OF FREEPORT, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
MITCHELL H. WILCOXON, OF SAME PLACE. 
DAMPER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,079, dated May 17, 1892. 
Application filed September 19, 1891, Serial No. 406,219, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, LEVI. M. DEVORE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Freeport, 
in the county of Stephenson and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Dampers; and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
In this damper the detachable spindle is se 
cured to the plate by movement in a direction 
parallel to the plane of the plate. A spring 
coiled about the spindle near its end forces 
a washer against the exterior of the pipe, thus 
preventing accidental turning of the damper, 
and the arrangement is such that the same 
spring maintains the engagement of the spin 
dle and plate. The object is to lessen the cost 
of manufacture, to secure greater convenience, 
and to provide forms such that even very ap 
preciable warping of the parts by long-con 
tinued heat shall not materially affect the 
working of the devices. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan of the 
damper complete. Fig. 2 is a section on the 
line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a section on the line 
33, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a plan of the washer 
above mentioned. Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are 
illustrations of modifications, hereinafter ex 
plained. 
Both the spindle and the plate are provided 
with catches that are thrown into mutual en 
gagement by sliding the spindle longitudi 
nally into a channel provided for it and press 
ing it with force sufficient to overcome the 
force of a spring coiled about its outer end 
and then swinging it in a direction parallel to 
the plane of the plate until the catches pass. 
It is then released, when the recoil of the 
spring completes the engagement of the 
catches. 
In the drawings, to which reference is had 
by letters, A A' are the two parts of a plane 
damper-plate having the usual central open 
ing. These parts are connected by integrally 
formed bridges B B', arranged upon opposite 
sides of the plane of the plate in such man 
ner as to span the space between the segments 
A A' and with the edges of the segments to 
form a way for the spindle D. The spindle 
is non-circular in cross-section and the way is 
so formed that rotation of the spindle with 
reference to the plate is impossible. 
B' is a 
somewhat similar bridge provided upon its in 
ner face with a groove C and a catch or notch 
C", the latter being preferably diminished in 
depth in passing toward the center of the 
plate. One end of the spindle is pointed and 
rounded in the usual way and at the other end 
is an eye D', through which passes a handle 
bar E, preferably of wood. The edges and 
outer face of the eye are grooved to receive a 
staple K, which is driven into the handle-bar 
to secure it against withdrawal in case of its 
shrinking. The edge of the plate has the or 
dinary boss F to bear against the inner face 
of the pipe and opposed to the boss is a washer 
G, that slides without rotating upon the non 
cylindrical spindle. A spring H is coiled 
about the spindle between the washer and the 
eye D'' and this exerts a constant pressure 
upon the Washer when the spindle is so con 
nected with the plate that it cannot be with 
drawn by the spring's action. Near the op 
posite end of the spindle is a projecting catch 
or lug I, that when the spindle is inserted 
slides through grooves C in the bridges a lit 
tle at one side of the plate's diameter. When 
it has been pushed beyond the last bridge, the 
spindle is swung to a diametrical position and 
the recoil of the spring causes the catch to en 
gage the catch C of the bridge. The washer 
G has its outer face spiral to receive the end 
of the coil and is provided with a shoulder G' 
to prevent the coil's rotation. The spindleit 
self is enlarged near the eye D'' and spirally 
grooved to receive the last turns of the coil, 
which is screwed into position and which may 
be partially unscrewed if it be desired to in 
crease the tension. 
Fig. 5 shows an overhanging lug instead of 
a complete bridge B'. 
Fig. 6 shows a projecting catch upon the 
bridge B', engaging a catch formed upon the 
spindle by recessing it. 
Fig. 7 illustrates the modification of placing 
opposite the bridge B'a duplicate bridge and 
providing catches upon both sides of the spin 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
95 
IOO 
2 
475, 
engagement. 
3. The combination, with the non-cylindri 
cal spindle and the damper-plate having a 
spindle - way adapted to hold the spindle 
against motion away from the plane of the 
plate while permitting its lateral movement 
parallel to that plane, of catches upon both 
plate and spindle and a spring coiled about 
the outer end of the spindle to draw the same 
longitudinally, and thus hold the catches in 
35 
4. The combination, with a damper-plater 
provided with a spindle-way, of a spindle slid 
ing in said way and having near its outer end 
a spiral groove to receive the end turns of a 
coil, a spring coiled about the spindle and 
screwing into said groove, and a washer slid 
ing but not rotating upon the spindle and pro 
vided with a shoulder to receive the end of 
the coil-wire and prevent the coil's rotation. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
45 
- 
- 
LEVI. M. DEVORE. 
Witnesses: 
LEONARD STOSKOPF, 
MICHAEL STOSKOPF. 
. 
die, the figure being also a section on the line 
33 of Fig. 1 after the additional bridge has 
been added to the damper therein shown. 
When both catches are employed, there is less 
reason for making the spindle non-cylindri 
cal, since the two lugs or catches are sufficient 
to resist any ordinary strain. 
What I claim is- 
1. The combination, with a damper-plate 
having a spindle-way formed by integral op 
posite bridges in planes whose separation is 
substantially equal to the thickness of the 
spindle, of a spindle narrower than the span 
of the bridges and adapted to slide between 
them and means for detachably securing the 
spindle to the plate to prevent its motion be 
tween the bridges, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the plate consist 
ing of segments connected by integrally 
formed opposite bridges, of the non-revoluble 
spindle sliding closely between the bridges 
and having a width less than the span of the 
latter, both said plate and spindle being pro 
vided with suitable catches to mutually en 
gage when the spindle is swung laterally in 
the proper direction, substantially asset forth. 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475179.txt	(No Model.) 
G. D. BURTON. 
DISTRIBUTING APPARATUS FOR HEATING CURRENTS, 
No. 475,179, 
Patented May 17, 1892, 
witnesses 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE D. BURTON, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
ELECTRICAL FORGING COMPANY, OF MAINE. 
D STRIBUTING APPARATUS FOR HEATING - CURRENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,179, dated May 17, 1892. 
Application filed May 14, 1891, Serial No. 392,705, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE DEXTER BUR 
TON, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk, in the State 
of Massachusetts, United States of America, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Systems of Electrical Distri 
bution of Heating-Currents, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to distribute 
heating- currents of electricity of different 
volumes for heating metals for forging or 
other purposes. 
The drawing represents a plan of an appa 
ratus embodying this improved system of elec 
trical distribution. 
This apparatus embraces a primary cur 
rent-converter and a secondary current-con 
Verter. Each of these converters, as shown 
in this apparatus, consists of an annular core 
composed of different lengths of uninsulated 
or partially-insulated wire, said lengths being 
arranged side by side and breaking joints at 
various intervals in the core, primary circuit 
coils composed of comparatively fine wire and 
Surrounding the said core at intervals, sec 
ondary coils composed of sheets or plates of 
copper surrounding said core between the pri 
mary coils and insulated therefrom, two ex 
terior copper rings disposed around the struct 
ure, the positive terminals of all the second 
ary coils being connected to one of said rings 
and the negative terminals of said secondary 
coils being all connected to the other of said 
rings, said rings thus constituting the positive 
and negative terminals of the converter, as 
hereinafter described. The primary coils are 
arranged in pairs, the coils of each pair being 
in series with each other and in parallel with 
every pair. The secondary coils are con 
nected to the rings in parallel or multiple arc. 
The positive ring 10 and negative ring 11 
of the primary converter are disposed in dif 
ferent planes, one above the other. This con 
verter is connected in any suitable manner 
with a suitable source of electricity-such as 
an alternating-current dynamo-from which 
it receives the current to be converted. These 
rings are composed of copper, or other suit 
able conductive material and provided with 
O 
25 
35 
 
55 
7 o 
bosses 12 and 13, to which screw-threaded 
sockets 14 and 15, also composed of conduct 
ive material, are attached by bolts 16 or other 
means. Conductors, preferably in the form 
of rods 20 and 21, composed of copper or other 
Suitable conductive material, are connected 
at their inner ends with these sockets and at 
their outer ends with the terminals of a sec 
ondary converter 30. 
The primary converter reduces the intensity 
and increases the volume of the current, and 
the secondary converter still further reduces 
its intensity and increases its volume. 
The secondary converter is connected by 
means of flexible cables 40 and 4 or other 
Suitable conductors with an electric-heater 50. 
The rods 20 and 21 are provided with slid 
ing clamps 22 and 23, and conductors 24 and 
25 are connected at their inner ends to said 
clamps and at their outer ends to any suitable 
electric metal-working apparatus, the appa 
ratus illustrated in the drawings being simi 
lar to that shown in my patent, No. 435,110, 
dated August 26, 1890. 
In the use of this apparatus, currents ma 
be taken off at different points and supplied 
at the same time to the different machines in 
the volumes required by each. 
If desired, rheostats 60 and 61 may be in 
terposed in the branch circuits. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an apparatus for distributing electric 
Currents for heating purposes, the combina 
tion of a current-converter provided with ex 
terior rings constituting the positive and nega 
tive poles, a secondary current-converter pro 
vided with exterior rings constituting the 
positive and negative poles, conductors con 
necting the primary With the secondary con 
Verter, an electric heater, and conductors con 
necting the rings of the secondary converter 
with said heater. 
2. In an apparatus for distributing electric 
Currents for heating purposes, the combina 
tion of a current-converter provided with ex 
terior rings constituting the positive and nega 
tive poles, a Secondary current-converter pro 
vided with exterior rings constituting the 
positive and negative poles, conductors con 
necting the primary with the secondary con IOO 
y 75 
9o 
95 
475,179 
currents for heating purposes, the combina 
tion of a current-converter provided with ex 
terior rings constituting the positive and nega 
tive poles, a secondary current-converter pro 
vided with exterior rings constituting the posi 
tive and negative poles, conductors connecting 
the primary with the Secondary converter, an 
electric heater, clamps adjustable on said con 
ductors, a second electric heater, and con 
ductors connecting said heaters with said 
clamps. 
GEO. D. BURTON. 
25 
Witnesses: 
CHESTER MARR, 
E. F. PHILIPSON. 
verter, an electric heater, and flexible con 
ductors connecting the rings of the secondary 
converter with said heater. 
3. In an apparatus for distributing electric 
currents for heating purposes, the combina 
nation of a current-converter provided with 
exterior rings constituting the positive and 
negative poles, a secondary current-converter 
provided with exterior rings constituting the 
positive and negative poles, conductors con 
necting the primary and secondary convert 
ers, clamps adjustable on said conductors, an 
electric heater, and conductors connecting 
said heater with said clamps. 
4. In an apparatus for distributing electric 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475279.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 475,279, 
 
W. HOLMQVIST, 
EXTENSION ADDER, 
Patented May 17, 1892. 
e/44%. . 
. 
4. A 4%.424.- 
INVENTOR: 
Azczor A oz-722 vesz, 
62%244. 
4 azorre e/. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
VICTOR HOLMQVIST, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
EXTENS ON - LADDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,279, dated May 17, 1892. 
Application filed November 8, 1890, Serial No. 370,803, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, VICTOR HOLMQVIST, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Extension-Ladders; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sae. 
This invention relates to that type of hold 
ing devices for extension-ladders that forms 
the subject - matter of Letters Patent No. 
427,992, issued to me May 13, 1890, for im 
provement in extension - ladders; and the 
present improvement has for its objects to pro 
vide a cheap and effective arrangement of 
the holding-hooks embodying the features of 
the housing of the hooks, so as to avoid the 
accidental bending of the same in use, a 
strong and durable pivotal attachment of said 
hooks to the side bars or stiles of the adjust 
able ladder-section, and simple and conven 
ient means for operating said hooks. I at 
tain such objects by the construction and ar 
rangement of parts illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is detail vertical section of an ex 
tension-ladder illustrating my present inven 
tion; Fig. 2, a detail vertical section through 
the side bar or stile of the movable ladder 
section; Fig. 3, a cross-section of the same at 
line acac. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in the several views. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents the 
side bar or stile of the lower or main adder 
section, 2 one of the cross rods or rounds of 
the same, and 3 the side bar of the upper or 
movable ladder-section. 
In the present invention the hook 4, that 
engages the cross-rounds 2, is pivoted within 
a vertical recess 5 in the side bar of the mov 
able ladder-section by means of a cross-rod or 
trunnion 6, that has bearing in the walls of 
the recess 5, the straight shank of the hook 
being screw-threaded, as shown, and screw. 
ing into said trunnion 6, as shown, so as to 
form an attachment. Other means of attach 
ment may be substituted without departing 
from the spirit of my invention. 
-- 
- 
, 
invention. 
The end of the trunnion 6 projects from the 
inside of the stile 3 and is provided with a 
thumb-projection 7, by which the holding 
hook is manipulated, 8 being a spring attached 
to the inside of the stile or side bar 3, with its 
free end engaging in a suitable socket in the 
trunnion 6, so as to cause the holding-hook 
in its normal condition to lay wholly within 
the recess 5 free from any injury during 
transportation, &c. In use suitable bushings 
may be inserted in the side bars 3 to form 
bearings for the trunnion 6, if deemed neces 
sary, without departing from the spirit of my 
The vertical recess 5 is preferably of a seg 
mental shape, as shown, so as to be capable of 
ready formation by means of a circular Saw, 
and in the present invention it is very mate 
rial that the recess does not extend clear 
through the ladder-stile, so that a closed-top 
recess will be formed to prevent the ready en 
trance of moisture, dust, &c., to the holding 
hook, and at the same time leave the stile at 
the recess-point of ample strength to resist 
strain in use. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion, what I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
J. The combination, in an extension-ladder, 
of the adjustable ladder-section provided 
with a vertical closed-top recess in its side bar 
or stile and a holding-hook located in said re 
cess and having a cross-rod or trunnion by 
which it is pivoted in said side bar or stile, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, in an extension-ladder, 
of the adjustable ladder-section provided with 
a vertical recess in its side bar or stile, a hold 
ing-hook pivotally arranged in said recess, a 
pivotal cross-rod or trunnion to which the 
shank of the holding-hook is secured, and a 
spring attached to the side of the ladder-stile, 
with its free end engaging a socket in the 
trunnion, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
VICTOR HOLMQVIST. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT BURNS, 
GEO. H. ARTHUR. 
55 
75 
95 
O 
35 
40 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475379.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 475,379. 
 
 
 
 
 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
W. H. BAKER, 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT, 
Patented May 24, 1892, 
 
2e2 22e3m A. t7 
S. E. 7: 
E7 Asses seas o 
2. 
as 2 
Ea 
A. 
 
-2 
 
 
 
 
A.I. 
- TER - - 
5S, E, 
 
O. 
c. 
c 
G 
5 2 
2 (To 
. 
(2H A 
7%ave (, (32/24, 
7... 
THE N. 
ters co, Photo-Litho, was 
 
 
(No Model. ) 
No. 475,379, 
47 
W. H. BAKER 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 24, 1892. 
 
 
evzy. 1 
 
 
     
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM. H. BAKER, OF DES MOINES, IOWA, ASSIGNOR TO THE PIONEER 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MECHANICAL MOVEMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,379, dated May 24, 1892. 
Application filed July 30, 1891. Serial No. 401,115, (No model.) 
To al., whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM H. BAKER, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Des Moines, in the county of Polk 
and State of Iowa, have invented a Mechani 
cal Movement for Wind-Wheels, &c., of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to convert 
the rotary motion of a wind-wheel into recip 
rocating rectilinear motion and to make a 
quicker motion in one direction than the 
other as required to lift a pump rod and pis 
ton in a force-pump in less time than is taken 
for forcing it downward, or in passing a pump 
rod downward in a lift-pump with a quick 
motion and lifting the plunger or bucket 
slowly; and I accomplish such results by the 
novel mechanism hereinafter set forth, point 
ed out in the claims, and illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure l is a side view of my device ap 
plied to a wind-wheel as required for practi 
cal use. Fig. 2 is a detail view, looking down 
from the line acac of Fig. 1, showing an arm 
extending horizontally from the pivoted end 
of the vane. Fig. 3 is a view looking from 
the line 22 in Fig. 1 toward the face of the 
Wind-Wheel. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section 
of the grooved cylinder fixed to the shaft that 
is rotated by the wind-wheel. 
A represents a frame pivotally connected 
With a suitable support to rotate horizontally. 
A is a rotating shaft in bearings formed in 
or fixed to the top of the frame A, and A8 is 
a wind-wheel fixed to the projecting end of 
the shaft A. 
B is a cylinder fixed to the shaft A* by 
means of a bolt or rivet or in any suitable way 
so that it will be concentric with the shaft and 
rotate there with. It is a spiral groove No. 1 in 
One end portion of its surface, that surrounds 
the cylinder only one time, and a spiral groove 
No. 2, that extends in the other portion and 
Surrounds the cylinder two times. Both 
grooves extend the same distance relative to 
the length of the cylinder and in opposite di 
rections from the central portion of the cyl 
inder. 
C is an auxiliary frame fixed to the frame 
A and in a right-angled position thereto, SO 
that the free top ends thereof will be on Op 
posite sides of the cylinder B. 
C are elbow-shaped levers pivoted to the 
top ends of the frame C. 
D is a curved bar pivoted to the top ends 
of the levers C, and D is a straight bar that 
has its extremities inclined upward, fixed to 
the center of the curved bar D, and in a right 
angled position there with. 
fare studs, preferably spherical, fixed to 
the ends of the bar D to project downward, 
and adapted in size and position to enter and 
traverse the spiral groove in the cylinder B. 
The bars D and D* are carried by the elbow 
shaped levers C, and when the upper ends of 
said levers pass a perpendicular line relative 
to their centers of motion the stud f at one 
end of the bar D* will escape from the groove 
it traversed in the cylinder and will be ele 
wated as it comes out of the groove to the Sur 
face of the cylinder, and by such elevation 
of the stud the bar D is vibrated and the 
stud fat its other end lowered, as required, to 
enter the groove in the cylinder, coinciding 
with the position of the said stud as it is low 
ered. 
H is a pump-rod connected with the free 
ends of the horizontal portions of the elbow 
shaped levers C by means of a yoke H. 
In the practical operation of my invention 
the cylinder B is rotated by the action of the 
wind-wheel, and the studs f on the end of the 
bar D* will alternately enter and traverse the 
grooves in the cylinder, The stud in the No. 
1 groove will pass in and out of the groove 
while the cylinder makes one revolution, and 
the stud in the groove No. 2 will remain therein 
while the cylinder makes two revolutions, and 
as the studs alternately traverse their respect 
ive grooves the bars D and D* and the elbow 
shaped levers C are vibrated, as required, to 
accommodate themselves to the movements 
of the studs in the grooves Nos. 1 and 2, and 
also as required to convert the rotary motion 
of the wind-wheel and cylinder B to impart 
a reciprocating rectilinear motion to the pump 
rod H, connected with the elbow-shaped levers 
C; and as one of the studs fengage the cyl 
3 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
75 
90 
475,379 
2. 
the grooves in the cylinder, in the manner set 
forth. 
2. A rotating shaft having a fixed cylinder 
B, grooves Nos. 1 and 2 in the surface of the 
cylinder and extending in reverse ways from 
the central portion thereof, a frame having 
bearings to support the cylinder,elbow-shaped 
levers C, pivotally connected with said frame 
to vibrate vertically on the opposite sides of 
the cylinder, across-barD, pivotally connected 
with the arms of the levers extending verti 
cally, a bar D, fixed across the top and center 
of the bar D, and studs.f, extending down 
ward therefrom to enter and traverse the 
grooves in the cylinder, and a rod pivotally 
connected with the ends of the elbow-shaped 40 
levers that extend horizontally, all arranged 
and combined to operate in the manner set 
forth, for the purposes stated. 
WILLIAM II. BAKER. 
35 
Witnesses: 
R. H. ORWIG, 
THOMAS G. ORWIG. 
O 
inder B only during the time of one revolu 
tion of the cylinder and the other stud dur 
ing tWO revolutions it is obvious that the ver 
tical vibrations of the horizontal arms of the 
levers C* will be quick in one direction and 
slow in the other direction, as required, to op 
erate the pump, in the manner and for the 
purpose hereinbefore stated. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A mechanical movement for converting 
rotary motion into reciprocating rectilinear 
motion, and that motion quickerin one direc 
tion than the other, comprising a rotating cyl 
inder having spiral groovesin its surface dif 
fering in length and extending in reverse 
ways from the central portion of the cylinder 
toward the ends, a frame adapted to support 
the cylinder, elbow-shaped levers pivoted to 
the frame to vibrate vertically on the oppo 
site sides of the cylinder, a cross-bar pivoted 
to the tops of the elbow-shaped levers, a bar. 
fixed across the center of said cross-bar and at 
right angles thereto, and studs projecting 
downward at its ends to alternately traverse: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475479.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 475,479. 
 
H. ABEL, 
IOW PRESSURE STEAM BOILER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 24, 1892, 
- sity gy. y 
ty: 2, RS 
W 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 475,479, 
H. ABEL, 
IOW PRESSURE STEAM BOIEER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 24, 1892. 
 
 
 
   
    
   
 
mae: 
. 
. 
. . -l N 
praec:::::::::::::::::::: 
| 
 
|**************************** 
-Z?esz 2.. 
(2-4%zz, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY ABEL, OF CARLSTADT, NEW JERSEY. 
LOW-PRESSURE STEAM-Boile R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,479, dated May 24, 1892. 
Application filed March 19, 1891, Serial No. 385,614, (No model.) 
To aid whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, HENRY ABEL, of Carl 
stadt, in the county of Bergen and State of 
New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Low-Pressure Steam 
Boilers for Heating Purposes; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full and ex 
act description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, making 
a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
low-pressure boilers especially adapted for 
heating conservatories by steam. 
It has for its object to provide a boiler 
Which with the least possible height shall 
furnish a large volume of steam, which may 
be made to circulate through the heating 
pipes of a conservatory at a low pressure. 
It consists in the novel combination and 
arrangement of the several parts of the boiler 
to attain this end, substantially as is herein 
after described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of my improved boiler with 
the doors of the central fire-box removed and 
With tWO automatic damper-regulators in sec 
tion, the one on the right being shown as in 
action to close the dampers and that on the 
left to open them. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
Section in the line acac of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a trans 
verse section in the line if y of Fig. 2. 
My boiler is constructed of an outer me 
tallic casing AA, of properly - riveted steel 
plates and which may be made of small trans 
verse dimensions, or may be widened, as rep 
resented in the drawings, to admit of divis 
ion into a series of fire-boxes extending from 
front to rear. It is provided laterally with 
Water spaces or legs C C, formed in the outer 
casing to inclose the furnace, which may be 
partitioned into longitudinal fire-boxes BBB 
by means of a series of vertical tubes or wa 
ter-legs D D, all communicating with the 
body or main water-box E of the boiler, which 
is made to extend over and above the fire 
boxes. The casing for the boiler is made 
comparatively very low in height. Its upper 
end is divided by horizontal partitions into 
two chambers F and G, the lower end F next 
to the Water-box being designed to serve as a 
combustion-chamber and the upper one as a 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
55 
75 
steam-chest. These partitions, together with 
the top plate of the boiler, are supported by 
a Series of vertical tubes, of which one set 
(designated by the letters a, a) extends from 
the crown-sheet of the furnace or fire-box up 
through the water-space and opens into the 
Combustion-chamber F, and the other (desig 
nated as bb b) extends from the top of the wa 
ter-space through the combustion-chamber F 
and opens into the steam-chest G. 
The hot-air tubes a. a. are of special con 
struction, being contracted midway of their 
length, so as to be very much larger in their 
lower than in their upper ends, (see Figs. 2 
and 3,) thereby increasing the radiating-sur 
face therein and rendering the same much 
more effective than is possible with the use 
of parallel-sided tubes. 
The water-legs C C of the casing and wa 
ter-tubes D D in the furnace-partitions are 
all connected at their lower ends on a com 
mon level with a transverse pipe or manifold 
FI (see Fig. 2) at the rear of the furnace, 
which communicates with a vertical feed and 
circulating pipe H', to which are connected 
the return-pipes H H H of the circulating 
System, and also a feed-water-supply pipe H. 
The Steam-chest G connects with the same 
system by means of the delivery-pipes G' G'. 
The combustion-chamber F communicates 
with the chimney of the furnace by means of 
a smoke-flue F, which extends up centrally 
through the steam-chest. This smoke-flue is 
governed by a damper F, which consists of a 
disk secured within the combustion-chamber 
under the mouth of the flue upon a vertical 
rod c, moving freely in suitable bearings, so 
that the disk may be carried up into the mouth 
of the flue to close it, or be allowed to drop 
aWay therefrom to open it. Its movement is 
produced automatically by means of the press 
ure of the steam in the boiler, which is left 
free to act against a piston I, fitted in a cyl 
inder I, mounted in the top of the water 
ter-chamber and properly packed and se 
cured in all its joints to prevent an escape of 
steam thereat. This piston I is connected di 
rectly to the valve-rod c, so that when the 
pressure in the water-space of the boiler be 
comes abnormal it will operate to lift the pis 
ton I, and thereby close the damper F in the 
smoke-flue, the valve being so weighted as to 
95 
CO 
 
 
 
475,479 
so 
- 
normal. 
drop when the pressure under the piston I is 
The furnace is fitted with a revolving grate, 
which is constructed of two or more rotary 
bars J, each angular in cross-section, extend 
ing the length of the fire-box and mounted in 
suitable bearings at each end to permit of its 
free rotation. Upon each bar are strung a 
series of independent duplicate sector-shaped 
plates or sections KK, enlarged in thickness 
at their narrow ends and serrated on their 
curved edges. Each toothed grate-plate is 
formed with an angular aperture to receive 
the angular bar and be thereby made to re 
Wolve with it, and may be secured by means 
of a set-screw i, engaging the bar. 
To produce movement of the grate-bars the 
outer end of each at the front of the furnace 
is fitted with a pinion L, (see Fig.1) meshing 
with a counterpart pinion on the adjacent 
bar, so that by rocking or rotating any one of 
the bars by means of a crank L', applied there 
to, they will all be made to move in unison. 
When it is desired to dump the grate, the 
bars are caused to make a complete revolu 
tion. 
To increase the efficiency and utility of my 
boiler each furnace-door is provided with a 
set of dampers MMM, pivoted to swing upon 
horizontal-axes. These dampers are connect 
ed together by a chain M, which also extends 
to the lower end of a water-bellows (or an 
equivalent piston) N, fitted in a suitable case 
or cylinder placed at the front of the boiler 
(see Fig. 1) and which communicates with 
the water-space in the boiler. The chain M' 
is made to pass over a differentially-grooved 
pulley P, whereby as the pressure in the boiler 
increases beyond the normal point and the 
bellows are thereby expanded the dampers 
will be allowed to close by their gravity, while 
the contraction of the bellows under the stress 
of a spring P', operating against them, will 
as the pressure is reduced cause the dampers 
to open. These dampers M M in the doors of 
the furnace will thus operate in harmony with 
the action of the damper Fin the smoke-flue 
F' to regulate the degree of combustion in 
the furnace by controlling the admission of 
oxygen thereto, and will thus determine auto 
matically the pressure of steam in the appa 
ratus so long as the furnace is properly sup 
plied with fuel. 
The boiler thus constructed admits of be 
ing placed for usein connection with conserv 
atories, graperies, and other structures which 
are of low altitude and without the need of 
altering the general arrangement of such as 
are already erected and in use; and it will 
produce a large volume of steam at low press 
ure with great economy of fuel, and conse 
quently a uniform heat, without the need of 
the constant care or supervision of an attend 
ant. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination, in a low-down low-press 
ure boiler, with its fire box or furnace and 
its outer walls, of a water-box having lateral 
water-legs inclosing the fire-box and inter 
mediate tubular water-legs dividing the fire 
box from front to rear into sections, a com 
bustion-chamber above the water-box, verti 
cal flues enlarged at their lower ends and con 
tracted at their upper ends, extending through 
the water-box from the fire-box to the com 
bustion - chamber, a steam-chest above the 
combustion-chamber, vertical flues extending 
through the combustion-chamber and con 
necting the water-box with the steam-chest, a 
smoke-flue extending through the steam-chest 
and communicating with the combustion 
chamber, a manifold pipe at the rear of the 
furnace communicating with the lower ends 
of the several water-legs, and a system of cir 
culating-pipes connected with said manifold 
and with the steam-chest, all substantially in 
the manner and for the purpose herein set 
fortl. 
In testimony whereofI have signed my name 
to this specification in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses. 
HENRY ABEL. 
Witnesses: 
A. N. JESBERA, 
J. M. CAREW. 
75 
go 
5 
O 
25 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475579.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 475,579. 
W. M. LETTS, 
SPARKARRESTER AND DRAFT REGULATOR, 
Patented May 24, 1892. 
a 
R 
Y 
 
 
 
 
E a. 2 
Aa2AAAAYAAzazzzzzzzzzaaaaaaaZZZZZ.A.A.A.AraaaaaaaaaaaZZZZZAZZZZZZZZer 
E. 
 
WITNESSES: 
(2T2. 
INVENTOR 
BY -/(ove v6 
ATTORNEY5. 
THE corris Peters Co. Photo-lirho, washington, p. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER M. LETTS, OF SEDALIA, MISSOURI. 
SPARK-ARRESTER AND DRAFT-REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,579, dated May 24, 1892. 
Application filed September 10, 1891, Serial No. 405,280, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER M. LETTS, of 
Sedalia, in the county of Pettis and State of 
Missouri, have invented a new and Improved 
Spark-Arrester and Draft-Regulator, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
draft-regulating and spark-arresting attach 
ments for locomotives; and the object of my 
invention is to produce a device by means of 
which the locomotive may be given any nec 
essary amount of draft, and also to construct 
and arrange these attachments in such a way 
that the sparks and cinders will be retained 
in the Smoke-box of the locomotive. 
To this end my invention consists in certain 
features of construction and combinations of 
parts, which will be hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a broken vertical section of a 
locomotive-boiler and Smoke-bOX provided 
with my attachments. Fig. 2 is a broken sec 
tional plan of the same on the line 22 in Fig. 
1, and Fig. 3 is a vertical cross-section on the 
line 33 in Fig. 1. 
The boiler-shell 10 is prolonged beyond the 
flues in the usual Way and has at its front 
end the smoke-box 11, from the top of which 
the smoke passes out through the stack 12 in 
the usual way. Bolted or otherwise secured 
to the shell near the top and in front of the 
smoke-stack is a partition 13, which fits air 
tight in the upper portion of the shell and 
which extends downward into the smoke-box 
and is curved rearward at its lower end, so 
that the lower portion of the partition will be 
in a nearly horizontal position, as shown at 
14 in Fig. 1. This horizontal portion of the 
partition fits snugly around the steam-nozzle 
15, which is arranged beneath the smoke-stack 
and connects with the exhaust and direct 
steam-pipes, as shown in dotted lines at 16, 
in the usual manner, and this nozzle projects 
a little above the horizontal portion of the 
partition. That part of the partition 13 which 
is in front of the smoke-stack should be far 
enough forward so that if necessary a com 
mon form of petticoat-pipe may be placed 
above the nozzle. The horizontal portion 14 of . 
the partition 13 also fits snugly around the 
branches 18 of the steam-pipe 17, which pipe 
projects forward into the smoke-box and con 
nects with the branch pipes by means of a T 
19. The branch pipes project forward and 
downward and connect with the cylinders in 
the usual Way. 
The vertical portions of the branch pipes 
18 and the nozzle 15 are made of a substan 
tially triangular shape, with edges toward the 
flues, as best shown at 20 in Fig. 2, and this 
construction prevents the cinders from strik 
ing the pipes and being forced backward 
against the flues. A little above the flues in 
the boiler is a transverse angle-iron 21, which 
is secured to the flue-sheet 22, and a deflector 
plate 23 is secured to the angle-iron and to 
the sides of the boiler-shell, said deflector 
plate extending forward and a little down 
Ward into the Smoke-box, and a damper-plate 
24 is Secured to the front portion of the de 
flector-plate 23, and in order that the damper 
plate may be adjusted the plate 23 is pro 
vided with slots 25, through which extend bolts 
26, by means of which the damper-plate is 
clamped to the deflector-plate, and it will be 
seen that the damper-plate may be pushed 
back and forth upon the deflector-plate and 
held in any desired position. 
The side edges of the damper-plate may be 
secured to angle-irons and adapted to slide in 
the same manner. The front edge of the 
damper-plate is preferably arranged so as to 
be a little below the rear edge of the hori 
Zontal portion 14 of the partition 13, and the 
draft from the flues and smoke-box is up 
through the opening between the damper 
plate and partition and out through the smoke 
stack. Secured to the bottom portion of the 
boiler-Shell at the foot of the flue-sheet 22 is 
a shield 27, which extends forward into the 
smoke-box and is upwardly inclined, said 
shield being fitted snugly around the nozzle 
15 and the branch pipes 18, and this shield 
prevents the cinders from falling backin front 
of the flues and interfering with the draft. 
Any sized nozzle may be used in connec 
tion with the apparatus, and it will be under 
OC) 
475,579 
2. The combination, with the smoke-box of 
a locomotive, of a rearwardly curved and im 
perforate partition secured to the upper por 
tion of the smoke-box in front of the stack, 
a steam - draft nozzle extending upwardly 
through the partition, and an adjustable de 
flector-plate secured to the flue-sheet of the 
boiler and extending forward into the smoke 
box, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the smoke-box of 
a locomotive having deflector-plates in its up 
per portion beneath the stack, of the steam 
pipes and exhaust-nozzle arranged within the 
box, said pipes and exhaust-nozzle being of 
angular cross-section, substantially as de 
scribed. 
WALTER M. LETTS. 
35 
Witnesses: 
W.J. LETTS, 
T. L. LICKLIDER, 
O 
stood that the attachments may be secured to 
any common form of locomotive. By letting 
the steam into the nozzle 15 it rushes up 
through the smoke-stack, thus creating a 
strong draft, and the arrangement of the de 
flector-plate and the partition prevents the 
sparks and cinders from being carried up 
through the stack, and they will be deposited 
in the front end of the smoke-box. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with the smoke-box of 
a locomotive inaving a steam-draft nozzle 
therein, of an imperforate partition arranged 
in the upper portion of the smoke-box and 
embracing the nozzle, and a deflector secured 
to the flue-sheet of the boiler and extending 
forward above the flues to a point adjacent 
to the partition, substantially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475680.txt	(No Model,) 
- 
C. H. DUNHAM, Deo'd. 
D. T. DUNHAM, Administratrix. 
SLIDING CAR DOOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 475,680. 
Patented May 24, 1892. 
 
(No Model.) 
C, H, DUNHAM, Dec'd. 
D. T. DUNHAM, Administratrix, 
SLIDING CAR DOOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 475,680, 
Patented May 24, 1892. 
   
222 Z%/4. 
tail, a 7%. 3 
S6 
Z2x2 
ev 
  
 
2 
- - - 
2 % 
3 
A. 
 
  
l 
7. 
 
N &S  6 
Nazi 
7. 
 
A 
% 
S 
y py 
21 M 
 
   
SS - Zzar. 
2E 
Ses 
  
Zez.9. SS 
e1 
  
 
a WN 7 
Z 
O O W 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. DUNHAM, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS; DOROTHY T. DUNHAM, AD 
MINISTRATRIX OF SAID CHARLES H. DUNHAM, DECEASED, ASSIGNOR TO 
IRWIN WEEDER, TRUSTEE, OF SAME PLACE. 
- 
SDN G CARDO O. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,680, dated May 24, 1892. 
Application filed July 25, 1890, 
Io warehouses, and the like. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES H. DUNHAM, 
of Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
5 ful Improvements in Sliding Car-Doors, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to sliding doors for 
freight and other cars, and in some of its fea 
tures is applicable to sliding doors of barns, 
Myinvention has for its object the provision 
of a durable, easily-running, and tight car 
door, which shall be easily handled and shall 
not be liable to derangement either by wear 
15 of the parts or by choking with snow or ice 
and which shall give protection to the con 
tents of the car from sparks and dust, 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of the door and a part of the 
2O sheathing of the car, the track from which 
the dooris Suspended being broken away par 
tially to show the construction of the hanger. 
Fig. 2 is a view showing the track and hanger 
as seen from above, and also a portion of the 
25 car-side. Fig. 3 is a cross-section, on a larger 
scale, of the upper portion of the door, the 
track and hanger, and a portion of the car 
body. Fig. 3 is a cross-section of a modifi 
cation of the track and hanger. Figs. 4 to 10, 
3o inclusive, are detail views of various parts, 
which will be described hereinafter. 
A, Figs, 1 and 2, designates the side of the 
car, to which is attached the track B. The 
track B consists of a curved trough of sheet 
35 or cast metal-preferably sheet metal-a sec 
tion of which is shown in Fig. 3. In its pre 
ferred shape, as shown in full lines, it has a 
flange b along its upper edge by which it is 
attached to the side of the car, bolts C being 
4o used for that purpose. It curves outward, 
downward, and inward, so that its bottom por 
tion forms a trackway c, and its lower edge 
is bent upward to form a flanged for the pur 
pose of guiding the roller D of the hanger E, 
45 the latter being attached to the car-door F. 
The proportion of the track B is such as to 
leave a space between the side of the car and 
lower part of the track sufficient to permit the 
hanger to pass between the lower edge of the 
5o track and the side of the car. The shape of 
 
Serial No. 359,855, (No model.) 
the track Way is that of a trough or semi-tube, 
the only opening through which dirt can have 
access being the slot or space between the in 
ner edge of the trackway and the car-side, 
and said space being as sheltered as possible. 55 
The shape of the brackete of the hanger E 
is apparent from the section in Fig. 3 and 
from Figs. 5 and 10, Fig. 5 being a side 
elevation and Fig. 10 a perspective view of 
the bracket. The lower part of the bracket 6c 
is secured to the outer side of the door. 
The middle portion extends across the top 
edge of the door and the upperportion extends 
above, flush with the inner face of the door. 
The bearing edges ff of the bracket, which 
rests upon the ends of the axle of the roller 
D, are straight and the tread of the roller D 
is broad and flat, therein differing from those 
shown in the patent previously granted to me 
February 28, 1888, No. 378,579. Instead of 
bringing the upper edge of the track inward 
to the sheathing of the car-body, as shown in 
Fig. 3, I contemplate also putting a timber or 
other filling-piece G beneath the eaves of the 
roof and making the upper edge of the track 
way straight, as shown in Fig. 3, securing it 
to the outer face of the timber G. 
To stiffen the sheet or plate metal of the 
trackway, I place at intervals stirrups H, 
which are curved to conform to the outer side 
of the trackway. 
The trackway is of substantially the same 
Section throughout, but is offset in the direc 
tion of its length, as seen in Fig. 2, the outer 
portion of the track, or that away from the 
doorway, being set farther from the car-body 
than that immediately over the doorway. 
The Offset may be made in the track in the 
course of manufacture, or it may be suffi 
ciently sprung When it is attached to the car 
by placing filling pieces or Washersg between 
the side of the car and the trackway, where 
the bolts pass through the track and the side 
of the car. It is of course to be understood 
that the space between the trackway and the 
side of the car made by the insertion of the 
Washers g may and should be filled up by 
strips of Wood or other suitable pieces, so as 
to prevent the entrance of dirt or anything 
liable to clog the track. It is further to be roo 
95 
75 
2 
475,680 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
understood that Washers and filling-strips 
could be dispensed with by forming the offset 
in the trackway in the process of its manu 
facture, forming at the same time the upper 
edge in a straight line; but such a process is 
not preferable, as it would be more expensive. 
The purpose of offsetting the track in this 
manner is to make the door a tight fit against 
the side of the car when shut and to carry it 
away from the side of the car when opening 
it, so as to secure greater freedom of motion 
and prevent wear of the door and car sheath 
ing, and especially to preserve the rubber 
battens, hereinafter described. 
To more thoroughly prevent the accumula 
tion of snow or ice within the trackway or the 
admission of sparks, I employ at each end of 
the trackway a cap I, Figs. 1 and 2, formed, 
preferably, of steel, one end of which is shaped 
to conform to the curvature of the trackway 
and the body of which tapers toward the other 
end, the latter being flattened and bolted to 
the car-side. 
To hold the door shut, in addition to the or 
dinary locking devices, any of which may be 
employed, but which are not herein shown, I 
employ a spring-catch J, Fig. 4, the end of 
which engages in a Socket IK, and a similar 
spring-catch J' is also secured to the car-body 
for holding the door when opened, (vide Fig. 
1,) a socket K being provided on the other 
edge of the door. The spring-catches J J' 
automatically engage with the door when the 
same is fully opened or shut and keep it from 
moving back and forth, when the car is sud 
denly started or stopped, thereby preventing 
much wear and possible breakage. I thus re 
move a serious objection to the hanging of 
car-doors upon anti-friction hangers, for, as 
ordinarily constructed, unless special care is 
exercised in securing the door its sliding back 
and forth when the car is subjected to shocks 
entails more wear than the legitimate use of 
the door. 
A stop L is secured to the car-side for mak 
ing a tight joint against the forward edge of 
the door in the usual manner. For making 
a tight joint at the rear edge of the door I 
employ the devices shown in Fig. 9, in which 
M represents a piece of rubber or other flexi 
ble material, secured to the edge of the door 
way so as to project slightly beyond the side 
of the car. N is a piece of rubber secured to 
the inner face of the door, and O is a spring 
attached to the lower rear corner of the door, 
one end being attached to the outer face and 
the other to the rear edge thereof and having 
a wedged or inclined face, which co-operates 
with the guide P, secured to the car, in forc 
ing the door against the car-side, thereby 
compressing the rubbers M and N and mak 
ing a tight spark and dust proof joint. The 
use of a spring O instead of a wedge pro 
duces a yielding pressure, which compensates 
for inaccuracies of workmanship and of wear, 
so as to maintain the tightness of the joint. 
Instead of a wedge at the lower front corneir 
of the door I employ a straight-faced casting 
or forging R, which coacts with the guide S, 
the latter being similar to the guide P. The 
object of making the guide R straight-faced 
is to allow the door to be opened a few inches, 
if desirable, without allowing it to hang loose, 
it being necessary to have the door opened 
slightly in some cases in order to ventilate the 
contents of the car. In addition to the spring 
catches J J', before described, I contemplate 
the using of the ordinary stops and Wedges T 
U. (Vide Figs. 1 and 6.) 
The trackway, as above described, forms a 
close housing for the hangers. 
The slot or 
opening for the passage of the hangers is in 
the most sheltered position possible and no 
part of the suspending devices need project. 
beyond the thickness of the door itself, as 
would be the case if the hanger extended up 
from the outside of the door and the slot were 
correspondingly above the outer face of the 
door instead of the inner face. The latter is 
an advantageous feature, in that the track 
way and hanger is less liable to damage if it 
does not project beyond the door of the roof, 
and this is especially true in the case of ex 
tra-sized cars for carrying bulky objects 
such as furniture-the cars being often of 
the extreme dimensions, which, by reason of 
tunnels, bridges, or other limited passages, is 
permissible. 
The construction of hanger herein de 
scribed, having a bracket which is secured to 
the outer side of the door and which extends 
upward flush with the inner side, secures the 
advantage of a sheltered position for the slot 
between the track and the car through which 
the hanger plays, at the same time that the 
easy removal of the hanger in case repairs are 
needed is permitted by reason of the fasten 
ing of the hanger being on the outside of the 
door. 
I am aware that a trackway formed of an 
angle-iron, one flange of which projects hori 
Zontally inward and forms the bearing-surface 
for the balls upon which the door is supported, 
has been devised, such a trackway being shown 
in the patent to Cloes, No. 285,575, dated Sep 
tember 25, 1883. I do not claim such as my 
invention. 
By the use of rollers having a broad and 
unbroken face provided with an axle upon 
which the hanger-bracket rests Isecure the 
well-known advantage of a diminished travel 
of the roller relative to the door as compared 
with the use of balls, and by the use of a flat 
faced roller in contradistinction to the com 
mon grooved roller running on a track-rail I 
diminish the evil experienced with both balls 
and grooved rollers--namely, the flattening 
of the periphery by sliding, which interferes 
with the proper working of the hanger. The 
chipping of the flanges, often experienced with 
grooved rollers, is likewise prevented. These 
difficulties are specially met with in car-doors, 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
If 5 
I25 
475,680 
35 
45 
l 
the doorway, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. The combination, with a sliding door and 
its suspending-hangers, of a supporting struct 
ure comprising, in combination, a semi-tubul 
lar trackway B, made of plate metal, stirrups 
or braces H, conforming to the exterior there 
of,and sheet-metal cap-pieces at the end of said 
semi-tubular trackway formed at one end to 
the trackway and tapered toward the other 
end to meet the side of the car, substantially 
as shown and described. 
4. The combination, with a sliding door, of 
battens MN, formed of rubber or other flexi 
ble material and attached, respectively, to the 
inner edge of the door-opening and to the in 
ner face of the door at its rear edge, in com 
bination with devices adapted to wedge the 
door against the car-side, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. The combination, with a sliding door, of 
a spring-wedge, as O, attached to the outer 
face and rear edge thereof, and a guide P, co 
acting with said wedge, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
CHARIES II, DUNHAM. 
Witnesses: 
IRWIN WEEDER, 
TODD MASON, 
where the total width of the roller and hanger 
is limited by the space over the edge of the 
door and under the narrow eaves of the roof, 
such width being, therefore, necessarily small. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a sliding door, of 
suspending-hangers the brackets of which are 
secured at their lower ends to the outside of 
the door, extending across its top and upward 
flush with the inner face of said door, and a 
semi-tubular trackway attached at its upper 
edge to the car and extending outside and be 
neath the rollers of said hangers and leaving 
a slot or space between the lower edge of said 
trackway and the side of the car for the pas 
sage of the hanger-bracket, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination, with a car-door and its 
Supporting-hangers, said hangers being Se 
cured at their lower ends to the outside of the 
door, extending across its top and upward 
flush with the inner face of said door, of a 
semi-tubular trackway attached at its upper 
edge to the car-body and extending outside of 
and beneath the rollers of said hangers and 
offset in the direction of its length, so that its 
rear or outer end is farther removed from the 
car-body than the front end or portion over 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475780.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 475,780. 
W. E. KING & W. R. WALPOLE, 
COMBINATION TOOL FOR; BICYCLISTS 
S No.. 
Chill 
(CI) 
CK) 
AKIMI 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. KING AND WILLIAM R. WALPOLE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
COMBINATION-TOOL FOR BICYCLSTs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,780, dated May 31, 1892. 
Application filed February 23, 1892, Serial No. 422,408, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM E. KING and 
WILLIAM R. WALPOLE, citizens of the United 
States, both residing at Chicago, in the county 
of Cook and State of Illinois, have invented a 
new and useful Combination-Tool for Bicy 
clists, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section upon 
line 1 1 of Fig. 3. Fig. 2 is a side elevation 
with the spoke-wrench in position gripping a 
spoke of the wheel, and Fig. 3 is a rear eleva 
tion showing the open-work upon the back of 
the handle. 
Our invention relates to improvements in a 
combination-tool for bicyclists; and its object 
is to provide a tool which can be used as a 
monkey-wrench, spoke-wrench for tightening 
or loosening the spokes, and a screw-driver, 
and which is light and compact in form and 
can easily be carried in the pocket of the rider. 
We accomplish these ends by means of the 
devices shown in the accompanying drawings 
and hereinafter described. 
That which we regard as new will be pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the drawings, A represents the handle of 
the monkey-wrench, carrying the lower jaw 
A' of the wrench. The handle A, which is of 
about the size and shape shown, is formed 
with two compartments C, and C.", separated 
by the partition a'. 
B indicates a shank carried in the compart 
ment Cl, and bearing at its upper end the jaws 
B' and B'. The shank B is provided at its 
lower end with a screw-thread b. 
Cindicates a milled nut carried in a suit 
able opening of the handle A and working 
upon the screw-thread of the shankB for the 
purpose of adjusting the upper jaw B' of the 
monkey-wrench. 
D indicates a flat bar of steel or other suit 
able metal shaped at one end into the form 
of a screw-driver. The other end is provided 
with a groove or notch d, which extends trans 
versely across the bar D, giving it a hook-like 
shape at the end. The bar D is provided with 
two holes d' and d'. 
E indicates a lever placed within the com 
partment (t, and carried upon a suitable pivot 
F. The lever E carries upon its upper and 
C 
inner arm a pin e, adapted to pass through a 
suitable hole g in the partition a' and to en 
gage with the holes d' and d' in the bar D. 
G indicates a spring placed between the up 
per end of the lever E and the opposite inner 
wall of the compartment Ct. and held in place 
by pins h h' or other suitable means. The 
spring G operates to hold the upper arm of 6 
the lever against the partition a' and to keep 
the pine in position in the compartment a'. 
The end B' of the upper jaw of the mon 
key-wrench is provided with an angular 
groove or recess H. upon its under side, of 
about the size and shape shown and extend 
ing transversely across the under surface of 
the jaw, thereby forming a shoulder I. The 
outer edge of the shoulder I is beveled off to 
form an edge i, extending across from side to 
side. 
Kindicates a rigid pin projecting upward 
and outward from the top of the handle A 
upon the side that comes under the recess H. 
The pin K is of such size as to engage with 
the hole d' in the bar D. 
When not in use, the jaws of the monkey 
Wrench are screwed together. The lower end 
of the lever E is pressed toward the partition 
a', thereby withdrawing the pine from the 
compartment a'. The bar D is then pushed, 
notched end first, into the compartment a' un 
til it is entirely within the same, at which 
position the hole d' will come opposite the 
hole g. The lower end of the lever is then 
released and the pine engages with the hole 
d', holding the bar D in position. When it 
is desired to use the screw-driver, the lever E 
is pressed, so as to disengage the pine, and 
the flat bar D is allowed to drop down until 
the hole d' is opposite the holeg, as indicated 
by dotted lines in Fig.1. The lever Eis then 
released, and the pin e, engaging with the 
hole d', holds the bar D in place, so that it 
can be used as a screw-driver. 
When it is desired to use the tool as a 
spoke-Wrench the bar D is entirely removed 
from the handle and hung by means of the 
hole d' upon the pin K, the notch d being 
outward and facing the shoulder I, the upper 
jaw B' of the monkey-wrench being raised to 
a suitable position. The spoke I of the wheel 
is grasped between the notch d and the edge 
i of the shoulder I and held firmly by grasp 
75 
9 O 
95 
?. ? ? 
O 
2 ? 
30 
35 
45 
475,780 
ing the bar D and the handle A in the hand 
together. The spoke is then twisted in the 
desired direction by turning the tool. When 
the twist is made as far as the tool will turn, 
the grasp upon the bar D is relaxed, freeing 
the spoke from the grip. The tool is then 
turned back in an opposite direction, the 
spoke again gripped and twisted as before, 
the operation being repeated as often as may 
be necessary to sufficiently tighten or loosen 
the spoke. We prefer to make the back of 
the handle A open, as shown in Fig. 3, as 
thereby the tool is made lighter and the bar 
D is accessible in case it sticks in the colm 
partment. 
We have described our device as being par 
ticularly adapted for use by riders of bicy 
cles; but it is obvious that by enlarging the 
tool it may be used as a spoke-Wrench for 
larger spokes, as a pipe-wrench, or for other 
similar uses. 
That which we claim as our invention, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
l. The combination, with a longitudinally 
movable jaw, said jaw being provided upon 
the under surface with an angular recess form 
ing a shoulder, a handle carrying said longi 
tudinally-movable jaw, and devices for mov 
ing said jaw longitudinally, of a bar adapted 
to be removably pivoted upon said handle and 
with said shoulder to form a Wrench, Substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, with a longitudinally 
movable jaw; said jaw being provided upon 
its under surface with an angular recess form 
ing a transversely-edged shoulder, a handle 
carrying said jaw, and devices for moving said 
jaw longitudinally, said handle being provided 
with a rigid pin opposite said angular recess, 
of a bar adapted to be removably hung upon 
said pin and provided with a transverse notch 
at its upper end, adapted with said shoulder 
to form a wrench, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a longitudinally 
movable shank B, carrying at its outer end a 
jaw B' and jaw B' and provided upon its 
lower end with a screw-thread b, said jaw B' 
being provided upon its under side with an 
angular recess H, forming a transversely 
edged shoulder I, a handle A, carrying said 
shank B and provided with a jaw A' opposite 
said jaw B', said handle being provided with 
a rigid pin K, extending upward and outward 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
under said recess H, and a milled nut C, car 
ried by said handle A and adapted to engage 
with said screw-threaded end b, of a bar D, 
adapted to be removably hung upon said pin 
IK, said bar being provided with a transverse 
notch d, adapted with said shoulder I to form 
a Wrench, substantially as described. 
4. The combination, with a longitudinally 
movable shank B, carrying at its outer end 
a jaw B' and jaw B' and provided upon its 
lower end with a screw-thread b, said jaw B' 
being provided upon its under side with an 
angular recess II, forming a transversely 
edged shoulder I, a handle A, carrying said 
shank B and provided with a jaw A' opposite 
said jaw B', said handle being provided with 
a rigid pin K, extending upward and outward 
under said recess II, and a milled nut C, car 
ried by said handle A and adapted to engage 
with said screw-threaded end b, of a bar D, 
provided with a transverse notch d at one end 
and with a hole d' near said notched end, said 
hole d' being adapted to fit over said pin K, 
said bar D being adapted with said shoulder 
I to form a Wrench. 
5. The combination, with a handle A, di 
vided by a partition a' into two longitudinal 
compartments a C., a longitudinally-movable 
shank B, carrying at its outer end a jaw lis' 
and adapted to be carried in said compart 
ment a, and devices for moving said jaw lon 
gitudinally, of a flat bar D, shaped at one end 
to form a screw-driver and adapted to loosely 
fit into said compartment a', said bar being 
provided with two holes d' d'", a lever E, piv 
oted within the lower portion of said compart 
ment a, and bearing at its inner end a pine, 
adapted to pass through a suitable opening 
in said partition cl and engage with said 
holes d'd' in said bar D, and a spring G, 
adapted to hold the inner end of said lever 
against said partition, whereby said bar D 
may be removably secured wholly within said 
compartment a' or held with its screw-driver 
end extending outside of said compartment 
to form a screw-driver, substantially as de 
scribed. 
WILLIAM E. KING, 
WILLIAM R. WALPOLE. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN L. JACKSON, 
CHARLES E. PICKARD. 
55 
?? 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475880.txt	(No Model.) 
A, T, MATTHEWS. 
SHEET METAL, KNOB, 
No. 475,880, 
Patented May 31, 1892. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AMBROSE T. MATTHEWS, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SHEET METAL KNOB. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,880, dated May 31, 1892. 
Application filed December 23, 1891, Serial No. 415,978, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AMBROSE. T. MAT 
THEWS, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Worcester, in the county of Worcester 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Sheet-Metal 
Knobs, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The aim of this invention is to produce a 
new and improved sheet-metal knob; and to 
this end the invention consists of the device 
described and claimed in this specification, 
and illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of my improved 
knob. Fig.2 is a central sectional view of the 
Same. Fig. 8 is a plan of the base-section. 
Fig. 4 is a view of one form of disk used in 
the base-section. Fig. 5 is a similar view of 
a modified form of disk; and Fig. 6 is a view, 
on a slightly-reduced scale relatively to the 
other figures, of a strip of metal, showing the 
Way in which the blanks for the base-sections 
may be cut out. 
My invention relates, primarily, to the base 
Sections of the ordinary sheet-metal knobs 
and to a new and improved way of making 
the same. The base-sections of sheet-metal 
knobs have been made before with two leaves 
and with four leaves. The four-leaved blank 
has the advantage that the die will not slip 
On the blank in shaping or striking the same 
up, as when the die commences to act on the 
blank the same will beguided from four points, 
and hence cannot slip away from the center 
of the blank; but the four-leaved blank can 
not be economically cut from the metal. The 
two-leaved blank can be economically cut 
from the metal; but the same is very apt to 
slip in the dies and break laterally at the 
corner where the most strain comes. 
My invention, therefore, aims to produce a 
blank for the base-sections which will com 
bine the advantages of both the two-leaved and 
the four-leaved blank. To this end I form 
the blank with a number of whole leaves, pref 
erably two, and a partial leaf or projection 
between each whole leaf. I may also, if de 
sired, place a disk or ring in the top of the 
base-section, so that when the cap or cover is 
closed over the same the edge of 
the base-Sec 
tion will resist pressure. 
Referring now to the drawings and in de 
tail, A represents the base-section of a knob 
embodying my invention, and B the cap or 
cover of the same. The base-section. A may 
be pricked in or tapped in the bottom in the 
usual manner to receive the ordinary screw (t, 
having washer b. The base-section is struck 
up from a blank, as C. This blank has the 
two leaves E. and F, which are made convex 
at their ends, as shown, to form the top edge 
of the section, and between these leaves E and 
Fare formed the projections or partial leaves 
G. and H. When the base-section is struck up, 
a sort of half-moon-shaped hole will be left in 
the section between each of the leaves, the 
bottom of the holes being formed by the edge 
of the partial leaves, which preferably are 
curved, as shown, and, further, the partial 
leaves or projections will act to keep the 
blank in the center of the dies during this 
operation. This will give a base-section of 
very handsome contour or shape. The blanks 
for the base-sections may be economically cut 
out, as shown in Fig. 6, by lapping the sides 
of the leaves of one row of blanks into or be 
tween the leaves and the partial leaves of the 
next row, and this will of course cheapen the 
manufacture. I preferably do not bring the 
edges or sides of the leaves together at the top 
to form a continuous edge; but I form the Sec 
tions in the dies with a sort of rim or annular 
portion d at the top of the same, and into this 
rim I drop a disk or ring. This disk may be 
solid, as R, in the form of a washer, as W, or 
a wire ring. When the cap is closed over the 
base-section containing the disk or ring, the 
edge of the section will resist the pressure 
and will prevent the cap from Springing the 
leaves of the base-section. I find that this is 
a superior construction over the base-section 
with the leaves butted together to form a con 
tinuous edge, as the latter is difficult to make, 
requiring exact dies, and also when the cap 
is applied to the latter with any more than 
the usual pressure the leaves are apt to snap 
past one another and thus of course defeat 
the very object of the continuous edge. 
I am aware that it is not new to place a disk 
O 
35 
45 
go 
95 
CO 
475,880 
O 
between the base-section and the cap for the 
purpose of reinforcing the fastening device; 
but so far as I am informed it is broadly new 
to place a disk inside of and within the base 
section and to close the edge of the cap over 
the edge of the base-section, whereby the base 
section will be strengthened or reinforced to 
resist the pressure due to the closing over of 
the cap. 
An economical construction with my device 
is to use a washer on the larger size knobs 
and the center cut out of the washer as the 
disk for the smaller sections. 
So far as the broad idea of my invention is 
concerned the blank may have any desired 
number of whole leaves with partial leaves 
formed between the same. 
With my improved construction, as before 
described, I am able to make knobs of very 
thin stock, and I contemplate using the disk 
Or ring in all forms of base-sections to which 
a cap is to be applied, no matter whether the 
section is leaved or solid. 
Modifications of the construction herein 
shown may be made by a skilled mechanic 25 
without departing from the scope of my in 
Vention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A sheet-metal knob consisting of a base 
section and a cap, said base-section formed 
from a blank having leaves and partial leaves 
or projections formed between the whole 
leaves, substantially as described. 
2. A sheet-metal knob consisting of a base 
section and a cap, said base-section formed 
from a blank having two leaves convex on 
their ends and projections or partial leaves 
formed between each of said whole leaves, 4o 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
AMBROSE. T. MATTHEWS. 
30 
35 
Witnesses: 
JAMES J. RAFFERTY, 
LOUIS W. SOUTHGATE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US475981.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
F. S. KETCHUM, 
RAILROAD TIE, 
No. 475,981. 
Patented May 31, 1892. 
722 
et?, co, ozso? 2 g 
t'. Sel. 
21ziorney 
77 
: 
 
F. S. KETCHUM 
SAILROAD TIE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 31, 1892, 
s 
(No Model.) 
No. 475,981, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N C2 
 
  
W 
$3. 
eN2 
QSS3 
NZ 
r. 
 
 
 
S 
272 WASSA's 
AW/AWZO2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- FRANK S. KETCHUM, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
RA ROAD . 
. 
specIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 475,981, dated May 31, 1892. 
Application filed January 15, 1892, Serial No. 418,193, (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
. 
. 
25. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK. S. KETCHUM, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Railroad-Ties; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
to it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. . 
15 - My present invention has relation to metal 
...lic railroad-ties; and the object is to produce 
a tie capable of being cheaply made and ex 
peditiously ballasted, in combination with de 
vices which will form a track-fastener for the 
2O rails; and to these ends the novelty consists 
in the construction and comination of the 
several parts of the same, as will be hereinaf 
ter more fully described, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings the same 
letters of reference indicate the same parts 
of the invention. 
Figure 1 is a perspective vicw. of nyim 
proved ballasted metallic tie with the rail on 
3o the left hand locked in position on the tie 
and the position of the right-hand rail shown 
in dotted lines and the locking - wedges re 
moved and shown in perspective a short dis 
tance albove. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal contral 
35 section of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a view in perspec 
tive of the tie with its integral parts. . Fig. 4 
is a cross-section on the linea: ac of lig. 2, and 
Fig. 5 is a perspective view of one end of the 
tie inverted and in position for filling in the 
A is the tie proper, and cousists of a single 
piece of rolled, stamped, or cast metal, and is 
very clearly shown by itself in Fig. 3. 
3 is a longitudinal central ril provided 
45 with recesses at a, which form the seats for 
the rails C C, and it will be observed that the 
shoulder's formed by the rib is on each side 
of the recesses (t (t, effectually prevent the 
east possible tendency to the lateral displace 
5o alient of the rails, a incl this is a very impor 
tant feature of my invention, especially when 
4o ballasting material. 
there is a possibility to spread the rails on a 
straight track, or, as in the case of curves, 
when the centrifugal force of the train is 
thrown wholly on the outer rail, and thus 
widen the distance between it, and its fellow. 
The rib B is provided with slots to l l l, and 
at the end of each is a knee C, bent tip from 
the metal of the rib proper, and each knee 
has a vertically-oblong hole d for the recep 
tio of the bolt I). 
E is a wedge-shaped key having an angular 
head e, shoulder's e', a bolt-hole e', and the 
forward end e', inclined or levelod from be 
low forwardly, as shown in the detached views 
in Fig. 1. One of these keys E is inserted in 
the one of till slots: li so that its boveled (and 
elaps over the lange c' of the rail'C and tie. 
bolt D placed through the holes eith the head 
c. and (l in the knee c, and the nut (l' is then 
held in position, its lower side engaging the 
flat surface of the top face of the rib 13, which 
prevents the nut from turning, and the bolt 
is then screwed home. The same operation is 
then carried out with the rest of the keys and 
the slots, and the result is a position lock be 
tween the rail and the tie, and it will be ob 
served by reference to the left-hand portion 
of Fig.1 that this is accomplished and great 
strength secured by the leverage of the wedge 
shaped end of the key, where it bears upon 
the rail-flalage, locing supported by the shoul 
ders of the head of the key on the side flanges 
of thi? slots ly, so that the whole strain colos 
where the metal is the strongest to bear it, 
and the office of the bolt I) is simply to hold 
thic Wedge-key in place, and by reason of the 
hole ( in the kee (; being oblong no lateral 
strain whatever, comes on the bolt, itself. 
Each end of the tie is provided with an in 
tegral downwardly-projecting car F, which 
extends beyond the line of the base of the 
side flanges G. G. and whet the tie is in 
O 
sition these cars extend into the ground Na 
provent end notion of the ties. 
Referring to lig. 5, the tie is show in 
verted. The inside of the rib i3, over the 
openings, is covered by a piece of sheet metal 
S, having downwardly-belt ends s, which ex 
tend into the channel formed by the rib 3. 
The tie being in this position and the plate 
S in place to protect the wedge-retaining re 
95 
od 
'5,38. 
. 
isit'; 
cesses, any concretc, cement, slag aass, Stone, 
or any other stiible tailasting I is filled in, 
and when about to set tha ears g of the side 
fianges G are bent in, as si?) win in iFig. 4, anti 
serve to hold the ballast in 
osition while 
the ties are being laid. It will thus be seen 
that a ballasted tie is produce, and at tie 
same time the rough saiface of the ballasting 
mass takes a firin hold on the ground sinci 
very largely assist3 in reveiliing tie (iisplace 
ment of tie ties. 
Having titlis filly 
what I claia, and { 
Patent, is-- 
}: i-tii: ; wing a raised 
1. A sheat-i et: rail 
gy-depressel 
upper side and a correspondi 
inder surface and having said tilder surface 
filled with a staitable tallasting laterial pre 
vious to the laying of tie tie in 
sitioi, as 
and for the 
2. A sheet-taotal ailroad tie having (le 
pending endi cars, as at if, and having the 
spee between said ea's fillel with a lallast 
ing mass previous to the tying of the tie, as 
and for t ( ): "osc set forth. 
3. A sincet-metal railroad-tie having a cein 
tral longitudinal rib, angular side life 
and angril:It it is, the whole formed of 
rose set fort. 
 
15 
2 
25 
s 
one piece of metal, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
4. A sheet-metal railroad-tie having a cen 
tral longitudinal rib, recesses which form the 
rail-seat, and slots formed in the face of said 
ri and having integral knees formed of the 
metal punched from said slots, in combinar 
tion with an angular wedge-shaped key adapt 
ted to eater said slots and be secured there in 
coinection with the ears above mentioned, as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
5. A matallic railroad-tie having a central 
iii) provided with rail-seat recesses and slots, 
at the ands of which are upwardly-retaining 
eati's, in combination with a railroad-rail and 
a locking wedge-shaped key adapted to be se 
cured in said slot and lock the rail to the tie, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination, with the tie constructed 
as described and having the slot b, of the key 
E, bearing bevelcd portion e' and one or more 
shoulderse', as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence f. two witnesses. 
FRANK S. KETCUM. 
35 
40 
45 
Witnesses: 
if. J. ENESIS. 
D. W. GL(SSLE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476081.txt	(No Model.) 
W. SCHIRMER, 
WINDOW, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 476,081. 
Patented May 31, 1892. 
2zzzzzzzzzzz (E (NSS 
a. 
(e. (e. 
- 20, m 
-6. egree() 
 
zT 
"7 C) 
AITORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
W. SCHIRMER, 
WINDOW, 
3. sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 476,08l. 
 
Patented May 31, 1892. 
/AT.1,2 
2. 's 
S. - 
73 rero 
'a AITORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 476,081. 
W. SCHIRMER. 
WINDOW. 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 3. 
Patented May 31, 1892. 
 
 
 
','LL? 
2 
ITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEYS. 
is PETEfs Co., Photo-urtho, was 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALENTINE SCHIRMER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
WNDOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 476,081, dated May 31, 1892. 
Application filed September 22, 1891, Serial No, 406,455, (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
To all tuhon, it 772,011 CO7 cert: 
Be it known that I, WALENTINE SCHIRMER, 
of New York city, in the county and State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Windows, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention has for its object to provide a 
window having the ordinary counterbalanced 
sashes with improved means to facilitate the 
cleaning of said sashes on their outer and in 
ner surfaces in a safe and expeditious man 
ner; and it consists in the construction and 
combination of parts, as is hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is an inside elevation of a window 
casement and sash therein embodying a part 
of the improvement, the upper sash being low 
ered and the lower Sash closed and broken 
away to show the top sash, the side of the 
casement also being broken away to expose 
the sash-support. Fig. 2 is an inside eleva 
tion of a window casement and sash, the latter 
being adjusted to Swing in Wardly on a sup 
porting-bracket frame that is part of the im 
provement. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional 
elevation of the window frame and sash, 
showing the upper sash in lowered adjust 
ment and both sashes broken away on the 
edge to expose other parts. Fig. 4 is a trans 
verse sectional elevation of the Window-frame 
and both sashes, supported to Swing in Wardly 
on the bracket-frame shown in Fig. 2, the 
lower portion of the upper sash being broken 
away on the broken line 4 4 in said figure, 
showing the hooked connection of the sashes. 
Fig. 5 is a transverse sectional elevation of 
the window-casement, showing both sashes 
supported by the bracket-frame, that is rep 
resented by dotted lines, and swung in Wardly 
to permit free access to the outer side of the 
upper sash and the inner surface of the lower 
sash. Fig. 6 is a sectional plan of the win 
dow-casement, sash, and bracket-frame taken 
on the line 6 6 in Fig. 2. Fig. 7 represents 
the parts shown in Fig.6 in opened condition, 
and Fig. S. is a view of the lower edge of the 
upper sash and attachments thereon. 
The window frame or casement A is pro 
vided with the usual boxes wherein weights 
that Counterbalance the sashes slide verti 
cally, and, as shown in Figs. 6 and 7, the stiles 
C. are shouldered at b, so as to widen the space 
between the portions of the stiles that are 
loosely engaged by the lower sash B. 
The usual outer bead-strips c are secured 
externally to retain the upper sash C from 
Outward displacement, and between the sashes 
parting-strips d are embedded in the faces of 
the stiles C, which strips extend a short dis 
tance below the top face of the meeting-raile 
of the lower sash B when the latter is fully 
lowered, as indicated in Figs. 2 and 3, and 
thereby affords an abutment at each side of 
the Window-frame for the rail e to impinge 
upon. The inner bead-strips g are each cut 
into two pieces near their longitudinal cen 
ters and have their lower sectionshinged to 
the casement A, so as to fold toward or from 
the lower sash B, and the upper parts of these 
strips retain the lower sash in place when it 
is slit toward the top of the same. 
On the sub-sill A' of the casement A a clos 
ing-strip h is hinged at the edge, so as to fold 
toward and loosely engage the inner face of 
the lower cross-rail of the lower sash when 
the latter is fully depressed, as shown in 
Fig. 3. 
The sashes B C are preferably rigged with 
cords i, that engage with one end the edges 
of the sash and thence are extended to rest 
on the loose sheaves i', (shown in Fig. 1) 
said sheaves being pivoted in bracket-frames 
, that each have a limb extended inwardly 
across the channel or box of the frame A, so 
that the other ends of the cords, if secured to 
these limbs, will afford bights wherein the 
pulleys i will rest, and thus sustain the 
weights suspended, said pulleys being piv 
otally secured on the upper ends of the said 
Weights, as shown in Fig. 1. It will be seen 
that the upper sash C is provided with two 
pockets k, Fig. 8, that are located in its lower 
cross-rail at a proper distance from each side 
edge, said cavities being designed to receive 
the free ends of the hooks in, that are at 
tached to the lower rail of the lower sash 
B, and when the connection is effected, as 
shown in Fig. 4, the sashes are adapted to 
90 
95 
do 
IO 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
476,081 
75 
slide upwardly together, the Weight of the 
upper sash being supported by a transverse 
stay-plate m', that is affixed upon the inner 
face of the lower cross-rail of the upper sash. 
As it is desirable that the upper and lower 
sashes B C should be afforded hinge-joints at 
one edge, so that they may be swung into the 
apartment when they are to be cleaned, and 
thus enable such work to be done safely, 
avoiding exposure, a bracket-frame D is pro 
The con 
vided, which will be described. 
struction of the bracket D is indicated in 
Figs. 2, 5, and 7, consisting of a light skele 
ton metal frame having a base cross-bar 12, 
joining a vertical side bar n' and a diagonal 
The side bar and brace, converging 
brace n. 
above, are united by a head-piece m, stiffen 
ing-braces in extending between the bars 
named, thereby affording a light strong frame. 
There is a locking-bar o, loosely secured by 
one end to the upper edge of the head-piece 
m of the bracket-frame. Said bar has one 
end bent into a close loop o', that is loosely 
engaged with a cross-bar o', which is formed 
on the upper edge of the head-piece by slot 
ting the latter transversely a short distance 
from the top edge to produce a cross-bar, 
which is then rounded in the body, so as to 
permit the locking-bar to rock on it. 
For 
about one-half of its length the cross-slot in 
the head-piece n is made of increased width 
as compared to the remaining portion of said 
slot, thus affording clearance for the hook o', 
that is formed on the locking-bar O below and 
near the loop O'. 
The bracket-frame D is furnished with a 
depending pintle p, which projects from its 
lower edge in alignment with the vertical side 
bar in', which pintle loosely engages a brack 
et-plate p', that is secured upon a handle-bar 
D', the latter-named piece being made to en 
ter a transverse channel cut in the sub-sill A' 
near one of the frame-stiles Ci. From the top 
of the side bar n' a pintle p' is projected, 
which is axially coincident with the pintle p 
and has a loose engagement with the looped 
head of an eyebolt p, into which it may be 
inserted when the frame D is to be used, and 
it will be seen that when the frame is in po 
sition, as described, it will be free to swing 
on its pintles. The frame of the upper sash 
C is made of less height than the frame of 
the lower sash by giving the lower cross-bar 
of the latter increased breadth, So that when 
the sash C is lowered and is in hooked en 
gagement with the sash B, as before explained, 
the upper edge of the upper sash will be 
slightly below the lower terminals of the part 
ing-strips d. 
There are two bracket-hooks r secured on 
the inner face of the lower cross-bar of the 
sash B at a proper distance from each side 
edge of the sash, which hooks are shaped to 
engage the upper-edge portion of the bracket 
frame cross-bar n, as shown in Figs. 2 and 4, 
such a connection of parts being effected when 
the sashes are to be cleaned. The hooked 
connection of the upper sash C with the lower 
Sash B and the similar connection of the lat 
ter with the bracket-frame D transfers the 
weight of both sashes upon the bracket-frame. 
When the sashes are to be cleaned, the lower 
Sections of the bead-strips g are swung away 
from the lower sash and the closing-strip h. 
similarly adjusted, as shown in Fig. 4, the sash 
being connected with the lower cross-bar of 
the bracket-frame D, as before explained, and 
for convenience in manipulation the upper 
edges of the sashes are locked together by an 
adjustment of the baro, which is formed with 
an offset at S and a hooks' on its outer end. 
The shoulder or offset S on the bar o engages 
with the outer edge of the lower sash B when 
the locking-bar is folded outwardly, and the 
hooks' bears upon the outer face of the top 
cross-bar of the upper sash C at the same 
time, and to secure the bar in locked condi 
tion it is slid toward the vertical side bar in 
of the bracket-frame D, which will cause the 
hook o' to interlock with the edge portion of 
the slot in the head-piece . When the in 
ner surface of the lower sash B has been 
cleaned, the connected sashes are swung in 
wardly, as shown in Fig. 5, which will expose 
the exterior surface of the upper sash C for 
a similar treatment. In order to allow the 
sashes B C to be swung inwardly, as stated, 
the counterbalance-weights on the side of 
the frame A from which the sashes are to be 
moved are elevated to near the top of the 
boxes in which they travel and are there held 
by belaying the cords on a fixture , so as to 
afford proper slackness to said cords, which 
will permit the SWinging of the sashes. After 
the exterior surface of the upper sash C has 
been cleaned the next step in the operation 
is to separate the Sashes and expose their ad 
jacent surfaces. To this end the sash-weight 
of the upper sash is released, so that the lat 
ter may be adapted to slide upwardly when 
swung close to the casement. The upper sash 
C is now elevated slightly, so as to disengage 
it from the hooks in, and as the lower sash B 
is still in hooked engagement with the brack 
et-frame D said sash may be readily swung, 
With the frame, away from the upper sash, and 
So allow free access to be had to the inner 
Surface of the upper sash and the outer sur 
face of the lower sash for cleansing purposes. 
When the sashes have been renovated, the 
bracket-frame D may be quickly removed and 
the window closed in an obvious manner, 
the replacement of the bead-strip sections of 
and closing-strip h stopping all the crevices 
around the sashes. After the cleaning of the 
Window-sashes has been completed the pock 
etsk in the lower edge of the upper sash C 
are preferably closed by the pivoted plates le", 
that may be rotatably moved to cover the 
pockets, SO that a lowered adjustment of the 
upper sash when the pockets are thus cov 
ered Will cause the plates lc to impinge upon 
the free ends of the hooks n and support the 
sash C, aligning its upper edge with the up 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
95 
IOO 
O 
IT 5 
I 25 
476,081 
per edge of the lower sash B, as represented 
in Fig. 3. 
To avoid any rattling of the sashes together, 
two spacing-blocks are affixed upon the in 
ner surface of the side rails of the upper sash 
at their lower ends, which blocks will have 
contact with the side rails of the lower sash 
at any point of vertical adjustment, and thus 
obviate vibratory movement of either sash. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A window comprising a frame, counter 
balanced sash therein, parting-strips on the 
stiles, extending from above half the height 
of the frame within, sectional bead-strips 
hinged below to the stiles, and a removable 
device adapted to engage both sashes when 
they are opposite each other below and hold 
them upon it and swing them together later 
ally when manipulated, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, with a window-frame 
and sliding sashes therein, provided with cords 
and weights, of a removable bracket-frame 
pivoted to swing laterally on the window 
frame and having engagement with the sashes 
to support them in Swinging adjustment, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a window-frame, 
counterbalanced sashes in the frame, adapted 
for hooked connection near their lower edges, 
sectional bead-strips having their lower sec 
tionshinged to the window-frame, and a hinged 
closing-strip on the sill of the frame, of a re 
movable bracket-frame pivoted on a handle 
bar below the lower sash and provided with a 
pintle above the handle-bar pivot, adapted to 
enter an eyebolt on the window-frame, and 
45 
55 
means for detachably connecting the window 
sashes with the pivoted bracket-frame, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination, with a window-frame 
and counterbalanced sashes therein, adapted 
for hook-and-socket connection at their lower 
edges, of a removable bracket-frame pivoted 
on a handle-bar below the lower sash and 
upon the window-frame above said lower sash 
and engaged by hooks on the lower sash be 
low said bracket and provided with a folding 
securable locking-bar at its upper edge adapt 
ed to engage both sashes, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. In a window, the combination, with a 
frame having parting-strips extending down 
about half the length of the stiles within the 
frame, of a counterbalanced upper sash hav 
ing pockets in its lower rail, movable covers 
for said pockets, and hooks on the lower rail 
of the lower sash, adapted to enter said pock 
ets when uncovered and the upper sash is 
lowered, substantially as described. 
6. A swing-bracket for supporting window 
sashes in their casement, consisting of a 
skeleton frame pivoted at its lower edge near 
one side in a handle-bar below the lower sash 
and at its upper edge on an aligning pintle 
entering an eyebolt on the window-casement, 
and a bar mounted to swing and slide on a 
cross-bar at the upper edge of said bracket, 
provided with hooks at its ends and adapted 
to lock the window-sashes together, substan 
tially as described. 
VALENTINE SCHIRMER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. P. PATTON, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
O 
25 
30 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476181.txt	(No Model.). 
J. BAIRD, Dec'd, 
J. S. & A. W. BAIRD &. J. E. PARSONS, Executors. 
STEAM BOIER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 476, l8l. 
Patented May 31, 1892. 
 
 
O. 
s 
7 Of 7 
Yeo 7 2 
OOOOOOOC5OOOOOOO 
O-O-O-O-O-O-O-O-O OOOOOOOOC 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOC 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO A. 
Q9SSSSSSSSSSSSSSP 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
OOOOOOOOOOOOO 
CSCCSCCSCC887 
OOOOOOOOOOO 
NS&SSSSS 
OO (7 OO 
Z7zvezzaor 
u-2// 44/azo 
A/ /zzas addoryzes 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
E. 
C OOOOOOO 
R QEG 
RHR 
ARIGR 
| 
3. 
1 
usuluiyua 
Z) 
||| 
|| 
: 
ZZ - 
is -- 
ZEz7(esses 
Af 
w 
g 2 z 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BAIRD, OF NEW YORK, N.Y.; JOHN S. BAIRD, ADDISON W. BAIRD, AND 
JOHN E. PARSONS EXECUTORS OF SAID JOHN BAIRD, DECEASED. 
STEAM-BOLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 476,181, dated May 31, 1892. 
Application filed May 4, 1891, Renewed May 7, 1892, Serial No. 432,138, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JOHN BAIRD, mechanical 
engineer, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at No. 324 Lexington avenue, in the city, 
5 county, and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Steam-Boilers, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My present invention more especially re 
Io lates to steam-boilers of the locomotive type 
provided with upright arched tubes consti 
tuting or contained within the fire-box and 
substantially horizontal flues or tubes in the 
boiler-shell. Boilers of such a type are ex 
15 emplified in United States Letters Patent 
granted to me as follows, viz: No. 402,127, 
dated April 30, 1889; No. 434,973, dated August 
26, 1890, and No. 435,386, dated September 2, 
1890; also in application, Serial No. 384,736, 
2o filed March 12, 1891, and Serial No. 388,656, 
filed April 13, 1891. 
The object of my invention is to secure a 
compact and efficient boiler adapted to gen 
erate ample high-pressure steam in a com 
25 paratively small space, which end I attain by 
certain novel organizations of instrumentali 
ties hereinafter Specified. 
The accompanying drawings show so much 
apparatus only as is necessary to illustrate 
3o the subject-matter claimed. Unless other 
wise indicated the parts are of usual approved 
construction and ordinary operation. Short 
unfeathered darts indicate the direction in 
which the sections are shown, dotted arrows 
35 the course of the water-circulation, and solid 
arrows that of the products of combustion. 
The fire-box end of the boiler I term the 
front and the opposite the back or rear' 
end. That side on the right of a person fac 
4o ing the fire-box I term the right, the oppo 
site side the left. 
Figure 1 is a plan with the smoke-stack and 
portions of the casing removed; Fig. 2, a Ver 
tical longitudinal central section on the line 
45 22 of Fig. 1, looking to the left; Fig. 3, a front 
elevation; Fig. 4, a back elevation with a part 
of the casing removed. Fig. 5 is a vertical 
transverse section on the line 55 of FigS. 1 
and 2, looking backward; and Fig. 6, a similar 
5o section on the correspondingly-numberedline. 
A combustion-chamber or fire-box A, pro 
vided with grate-bars a, and a bridge-wall B, 
lies between a front head C and a back head 
D, consisting of parallel plates with water 
Spaces between them. Thesides and top of the 55 
fire-box consist of a series of transverse arched 
Water-tubes E, placed close together side by 
side between the front and back head, their 
lower ends being united by longitudinal wa 
ter-tubes H, connecting the front head with 6o 
the lower shell G. A series of longitudinal 
Water-tubes F are arranged centrally in the 
fire-box, their front ends being connected 
With the upper portion of the front head. 
These tubes extend backward through the 65 
upper portion of the fire-box to a point near 
its rear end, where they are bent downward 
and connected by a cross-pipe H with the 
Water-tubes H and by a series of small pipes 
h' with the back head or Water-leg at the bot- to 
tom of the tube-sheet of the lower shell G. 
This shell is constructed in the form of a flat 
ended cylinder of comparatively large diame 
ter in proportion to its length, about the 
lower two-thirds of which is filled with a large 75 
number of fire-tubes g of comparatively small 
diameter-say two and a halfinches. The top 
row g of these tubes, which comes just about 
the normal Water-line of the boiler, is made of 
larger diameter-say five inches. The upper 8o 
portion of the boiler-shell likewise contains 
still larger flues A A', connected by rear 
hoods a? and by front hoods A. The diam 
eter of the lower shell, it will be observed, is 
nearly as great as the width of the fire-box, 85 
and its entire steam-space or about one-third 
of its height extends above the level of the 
top of the fire-box. 
An upper shell K of comparatively small 
diameter-say about one-third that of the 9o 
main shell-extends forward from the upper 
front portion of that shell over the fire-box, 
and rests upon the front head with its bottom 
just about the normal Water-line of the boiler. 
This shell contains return-flues A* and direct 95 
flues A, connected by a front hood A, and 
constituting continuations of the correspond 
ing central flues of the main shell. The cor 
responding side flues of the main shell come 
outside of the upper shell, as shown in Fig. 3, Ioo 
 
476,181. 
O 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
The front head is connected with the upper 
shell by a steam-pipe c', and each of the arched 
fire-box tubes E is connected with the bottom 
of this shell by a short vertical pipe e. This 
upper shell, with the upper portion of the main 
shell, constitutes a steam-space, where the 
steam is dried and superheated. A perforated 
steam - exit pipe I extends longitudinally 
through the upper portion of both shells from 
a point near the back connection through the 
front head of the upper shell. The steam 
pipe being thus so far above the water-line, 
the steam isthoroughly dried and superheated 
and the tendency to priming diminished. A 
bolt J, extending longitudinally through the 
heads of the shell, strengthens them against 
longitudinal strains. 
The feed-water is shown as ?lowing through 
a pipe L on the left-hand side of the boiler 
provided with a suitable check-valve land 
extending backward, preferably, inside the 
boiler - casing to a water-box M, extending 
across the rear end of the back connection 
about the level of the top of the boiler, and 
consequently some distance above its normal 
water-level. A series of pendent open-ended 
tubes m, arranged around this box in an an 
nular or ovoid form, is connected with a simi 
lar box M' below it by means of larger tubes 
n' inclosing the others. The lower box M 
is in turn connected with the bottom of the 
lower or main boiler-shell by a pipe N, pro 
vided with a check-valve m. These check 
valves l n enable the flow of the feed-water 
to be regulated at either end of the boiler. 
The water-boxes, it will be seen, are of an 
ovoid or flattened ring shape, the side next 
the main shell being provided with a double 
row of tubes, while the front one has a single 
row only. The hot gases are thus enabled to 
pass both around and through the central 
opening in the Water-boxes. 
The products of combustion traverse two 
different paths from the combustion-cham 
ber or fire-box. One portion goes through the 
lower fire-tubes g into the back connection 
A", where it circulates around and among the 
pendent feed-water-circulating pipes and im 
pinges against the lower water-box, around 
the sides of which and of the upper box it 
escapes through the chimney. Another por 
tion passes through the large upper flues g' 
and back hoods a? and through the lower or 
return flues A, both of the main and upper 
shells, to the front hoods A, thence through 
the upper or direct flues A" of both shells to 
the back connection, where it impinges against 
the feed-water boxes, and thence passes up the 
chimney A. The entire length of both shells 
is thus twice traversed by this portion of the 
hot gases, and the main shell is traversed by 
them three times, thus thoroughly drying aud 
superheating the steam. 
The top of the fire-box is shown as covered 
with brick-work B', as well as its sides, and 
other necessary portions of the boiler are to 
 
be jacketed or protected with asbestus or 
other heat-resisting material wherever re 
quired. 
The boiler is of course to be supplied with 
the most approved appliances, including Safe 
ty-valves, water, steam, and air passages, and 
valves for filling, emptying, or working the 
boiler, as well as the usual manholes and fire 
doors. 
Many of the details of my improved boiler 
are illustrated in the applications and pat 
ents above mentioned, and such details are 
accordingly of course not claimed herein. 
Both the applications abovementioned show 
pendent tubes in the back connection, the or 
ganization, however, being different from 
that herein shown, and another application, 
Serial No. 391,735, filed May 6, 1891, shows 
horizontal feed-water heater-tubes also in the 
back connection, and I therefore limit my 
claims herein accordingly. 
I claim herein as new and as of my own in 
vention 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of a fire-box or combus 
tion-chamber, a back connection, an inter 
posed boiler-shell of large diameter extending 
above the fire-box, an upper shell extending 
over the fire-box, and a series of direct and 
return flues in both shells, through which hot 
gases pass to dry and Superheat the steam. 
2. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of a front head, a back 
head, a fire-box or combustion-chamber, par 
allel upright transverse arched water-tubes 
inclosing its top and sides, a back connec 
tion, a main or lower shell of large diameter 
between the fire-box and back connection, 
pipes connecting the front head, back head, 
arched tubes, and main shell, an upper shell 
Over the fire-box, and direct and return ?lues 
in the main shell and upper shell, through 
which a portion of the products of combus 
tion pass. 
3. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of a front head, a back 
head, a fire-box or combustion-chamber, par 
allel upright transverse arched water-tubes 
inclosing its top and sides, a back connec 
tion, an interposed lower or main shell of a 
diameter equal to the width of the fire-box, 
but extending above it, an upper shell of 
smaller diameter overlying the fire-box in 
front of the main shell, steam-pipes connect 
ing the front head and arched tubes with 
the upper shell, direct and return flues in 
both shells, and a steam-pipe extending from 
the back of the main shell forward through 
the upper shell to dry and superheat the 
Steam. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name. 
JOHN BARD. 
Witnesses: 
A. J. BAIRD, 
ADDISON W. BATRD. 
75 
IOC 
I o5 
Id 
IIS 
125 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476281.txt	(No Model. 
No. 476,281. 
D. A. LISK & T. D. BROWN. 
WENT FOR SHIPPING CANS, 
Patented June 7, 1892, 
 
 
S 
III.32 
F-2 
 
E. W 
Zoova?AA,zy/c. 
77-strona7273rown. 
 
rtenorris. PETERs co, photo-ITHO., WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID A. LISK AND TRISTRAM. D. BROWN, OF CLIFTON SPRINGS, NEW YORK. 
s 
VENT FOR SHIPPING - CANS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 476,281, dated June 7, 1892. 
Application filed January 7, 1892, Serial No. 417.286, (No model.) 
I5 specification. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, DAVID A. LISK and 
TRISTRAM. D. BROWN, citizens of the United 
States of America, residing at Clifton Springs, 
5 in the county of Ontario and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Vents for Shipping-Cans; 
and we do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
Io tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
This invention relates to improvements in 
vent-closures for shipping-cans. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
shipping-can with a cheap and effective de 
2O vice forming a vent which will be automati 
cally closed when the can is swung within the 
case and opened when the can is swung be 
yond the case in pouring the contents there 
of; and the invention consists in providing a 
25 can having a vent-tube with an upwardly 
projecting portion with a flexible tube, which 
is Secured to said upwardly-projecting por 
tion and adapted to contact with the case and 
close the vent-tube, as will be hereinafter 
3o fully set forth, and particularly pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming. 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view, partly broken away to better 
35 show the construction of the vent-closing de 
vice. Fig. 2 is a sectional view. Fig. 3 is a 
detail view showing the flexible connection 
in a different position on the end of the vent 
tube. 
A designates the packing-case, which is of 
ordinary construction, and B the can, which 
is pivotally secured therein, b being the dis 
charge-spout. 
C designates the vent-tube, which is secured 
45 to the can and follows the shape or contour 
of the body thereof, one end c of said vent 
tube leading into the can, while the other end 
d projects upward therefrom at a point nearly 
on a line with the pivots by which said can 
5o is secured to the packing-case. To this up 
wardly-bent end of the vent-tube C is secured 
a section or piece of rubber tubing e, which 
projects a sufficient distance beyond the end 
 
Witnesses: 
T. J. LISK, 
JOHN S. ANDREWS. 
55 
d of the vent-tube to contact with the top of 
the packing-case when the can is turned upon 
its pivot, so as to locate the spout therein, and 
by contacting with the top of the casing, the 
vent-tubee being soft, pliable, and compressi 
ble, it will make a tight joint and prevent 
leak or escape of gas from the interior of the 
can. If a comparatively short tube is used, 
the upper end will only be slightly bent and 
compressed, while if a long tube is used, as 
shown in Fig. 3, said tube will be bent over 
so that the ends will be compressed to close 
the same. This method of closing the vent 
of the can is extremely simple, and it will be 
readily observed that as soon as the can is 
swung to withdraw the contents the closure 
will be automatically opened and air per 
mitted to pass into the can. Another advan 
tage of such construction is that should at 
any time gas accumulate in the can and reach 
a high pressure, said pressure will be sufficient 
to open the vent. Thus the construction 
forms not only a closure for the vent, but also 
a safety-valve. 
The vent-tube C is curved to conform to the 
shape of the can, preferably being in part the 
segment of a circle, so that its inwardly-pro 
jecting end will be at the top of the can when 
the spout is lowered. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim 
1. In combination with a packing or ship 
ping case A, a receptacle pivotally secured 
therein, said receptacle having a vent-tube 
with an upwardly-projecting end, to which a 
rubber tube or hose is secured so as to abut 
against the packing-case and form a closure 
for the vent-tube, substantially as shown. 
2. In a packing or shipping case, a casing 
A, inclosing a receptacle B, a tube C, secured 
to the receptacle and provided with an in 
Wardly-projecting end and an upwardly-pro 
jecting end, and a flexible tube secured to the 
upwardly-projecting end so as to abut against 
the top of the casing A. and be bent by such 
contact, substantially as shown. 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
DAVID A. LISK. 
TRISTRAM. D. BROWN. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa- Ioo 
75 
9o 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476381.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 476,381, 
S, R, HAWTHORNE. 
ROOF, 
Patented June 7, 1892. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL R. HAWTHORNE, OF MIDDLEBURY, WERMONT. 
RO OF 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 476,381, dated June 7, 1892, 
Application filed June 7, 1890, Serial No, 354,659, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whom, it inctly CO7 cert: 
Beit known that I, SAMUELR. HAWTHORNE, 
of Middlebury, in the county of Addison and 
State of Vermont, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Roofs, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, whereby any one skilled in the art can 
make and use the Same. 
The object of my invention is to provide de 
vices that may be so arranged as to enable a 
slater to cover more surface With a given num 
ber of slates by the practice of my invention 
than is possible with any prior method or fas 
tening; and a further object is to provide de 
vices for better protecting the slated roof from 
stress of weather and against injury and wear. 
Myinvention consists in the novel construc 
tion of parts and their combination, as will be 
hereinafter fully described, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a de 
tail perspective view of a part of a roof, illus 
trating the manner of laying the slates and 
securing them. Fig. 2 is a detail edge view 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail perspective 
view of a bib. Fig. 4 is a detail perspective 
view of a part of the edge of a roof, showing 
the eaves-protector. Fig. 5 is a detail view 
of the crest-rail fastening. Fig. 6 is a detail 
end view of the same. Fig. 7 is a detail plan 
view illustrating a modified form of employ 
ing the fastening-hooks. Fig. 8 is a view 
showing the arrangement of the under laps 
O eaWeS COSe, 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter Cl. 
denotes a portion of a roof; b, the roof-covering, 
usually of boards nailed onto the rafters, and c 
the slates. 
In the practice of one feature of my inven 
tion I first lay the under lap or eaves course 
c of short slate, and then lay on a bib cl, that 
is placed in such a position that it extends 
beyond the upper edge c' of the eaves course, 
as indicated at c, in dotted outline in Fig. 1 
of the drawings. This bib is made of a thin 
sheet of metal with an upturned edge d', and 
having a shoulder d' at Some distance from 
the lower edge of the bib, this shoulder being 
formed by turning down the edge of the thin 
metal of which the bib may be formed, or be 
ing otherwise made. There is preferably 
formed in the upturned edge d' a socket or 
opening cl, in which the shank of a fastener 
e lies, as illustrated in the drawings. This 
bib may be formed of any convenient metal, 
as lead, copper, or Zinc, and is preferably made 
from thin sheet metal, with the downturned 
flange extending a portion of the way along 
both edges, as illustrated in Fig. 3. 
The object of the bib is to form a stop for 
the upper edge of the slate, to pack the joint 
between the slates, and also to support the 
slate where it extends from its bearing at its 
lap on One course to its bearing on the roof 
near the upper edge of the slate. 
The fastener e is formed of metal, prefer 
ably a Wire, although its shape in cross-sec 
tion is immaterial. The Shank e of the fas 
tener terminates at one end with a down 
turned sharpened point e' and at the other 
in a hooke, the fastener being secured to the 
roof by driving the sharpened end into the 
board in Stlch manner that the Shank lies 
along the roof and the hook projects up in 
such position that the lower edge of a slate 
can be thrust into it and held. 
The bib d, that serves the purpose of a 
lining-Strip and gage for locating the slate, is 
held from sidewise movement by the contact 
of the shoulder d' with the upper edge of a 
course of Slate and also with the fastener that 
extends over the upper edge of the bib, and 
lies in Such position that its hooked end pro 
jects up between two adjacent slates in the 
joint between them, and care is taken that 
the hooked ends of the fasteners terminate on 
a line parallel With the upper edge of the 
Course of Slates. The next course of slates is 
then laid, after the bibs and the next row of 
hooks are secured in place, by thrusting the 
lower edge of the slate into engagement with 
the hooked end of the fastener and arranging 
the Upper edge so as to bear on the flanged 
at the upper edge of the bib. When slates 
are SO laid, One of them can be removed readil 
by driving slightly upward and lifting its 
lower edge out of engagement with the hook, 
the fastener being made, preferably, of some 
what resilient wire or metallic strip, so that 
the tendency of the fastener is to hold a slate 
close down upon the underlying course, which 
its lower end overlaps. 
Instead of providing the bib with down 
turned flanges a wedge-shaped backing-strip 
y 95 
IOC 
O 
25 
35 
40 
 
476,381 
2 
p 
piece '', but turned in the opposite direction 
to form the tubular part that embraces the 
rod. In such a clamping device the rod h is 
Securely held in position as soon as the brack 
ets are fastened to the roof. 
The hooked end of the fastener may have 
an upturned part, forming of itself a species 
of snow-guard to prevent the snow and ice 
from sliding downward on the roof, or this 
upturned extension of the hook may form the 
direct support for a separate guard that is 
slipped upon it. 
It will be perceived that by the use of the 
fastening - hook, as shown in Fig. 8 of the 
drawings, each slate is secured on at least 
three sides by the hook, the shank lying be 
tween or just below the level of the slates with 
the hooked end rising between the slates in 
any given course in proper position to engage 
the lower edge of the slate of the next course 
above that breaks joint With the lower course. 
The slates are securely held, so that neither 
one of them can be removed, the upper course 
of slates abutting at their upper edge against 
the edge of the ridge-pole or crest-board. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with a roof-covering com 
posed of boarding and slate, the improved bib 
made of thin metal with one end having an 
upturned flange and provided at its sides with 
downturned flanges terminating in a shoulder, 
all substantially as described. 
2. In a roofing, in combination with the 
slate-fastening devices and slates, the two 
part bracket i, having the interlocking tubu 
lar arms forming the rail socket and fastening, 
all substantially as described. 
SAMUEL R. HAWTIORNE. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. L. BURDETT, 
ARTHUR. B. JENKINS. 
45 
7 O 
75 
of wood may be placed underneath it and 
serve the purpose of a support when the bib 
is made of extremely-thin metal. 
It is of advantage in some cases to have the 
boarding of the roof laid in strips b' at an in 
terval less than the length of a slate, so that 
the latter may be laid and rest upon two ad 
jacent strips. The hook is driven in one of 
the strips, and the bib extends over that strip 
across the open space between the strips onto 
the next one below, where it overlaps the next 
previous row of slates, as described. The ob 
ject of providing open intervals between the 
strips is to so ventilate the roof as to keep the 
slates cooler than is possible where they are 
laid on a tight board covering. The object of 
this is to prevent the melting of snow and ice 
by reason of any heat communicating from 
the room immediately below the roof. 
In order to prevent the storms from driving 
in under the edges of the slates, I provide a 
protectorg, that is made, preferably, of metal, 
as copper, with one edge inserted under the 
edges of the slate and extending along the 
edge of the roof. The protector is bent down 
ward and then upward and back again, so as 
to overlie the edge of the slates, in which po 
sition it is fastened, as by driving nails through 
and through the material into the roofing. A 
channelg' is thus formed along the edge, and 
its lower end may be connected with the con 
ductor or eaves-trough, into which any water 
which accumulates in the protector may flow. 
At the ridge a' the roof is provided with a 
crest-rod h, held on a bracket or support i, 
that is made of two pieces of metali'i'. The 
piece i has a central part i, bent to form a 
tubular socket to embrace the crest-rod h, and 
the piece i' is provided with two strips or ex 
tensions at its upper edge arranged to lie on 
opposite sides of the projection from the 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476481.txt	(No Model.) 
H. H. NEW COMB 
APPARATUS FOR TRIMMING PHOTOGRAPHIC PRINTS, 
No. 476,481, 
Patented June 7, 1892. 
%2S422 
W s 
y's 
C/ 
*/ A1 tea-e-4, 
, a year-ty 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
HARRY H. NEW COMB, OF 
BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
APPARATUS FOR TRM M N G PHOTOGRAPHC PRNTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 476,481, dated June 7, 1892. 
Application filed February 23, 1892, Serial No. 422,362. (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
35 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRY H. NEW COMB, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Trimming Photographic Prints, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a simple and convenient device whereby pho 
tographic prints may be trimmed in rectan 
gular form and to any desired size; and it 
consists in the improvements which I will 
now proceed to describe. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a perspective view of my improved trimming 
apparatus. Fig. 2 represents a top plan view 
of the same. Fig. 3 represents a section on 
line 33, Fig. 2. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in all the figures. 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
Supporting base or bed a of rectangular form, 
which is provided with a series of guiding 
lines or marks b bb, extending parallel with 
one of its sides, and a similar series of marks 
b'b' b', extending parallel with another of its 
sides, the marks b and b' forming right an 
gles, as shown in Fig. 2. 
I prefer to form the 
marks b b' upon a surface which is cov 
ered by a transparent plate c, of glass, the 
marks being formed on the material of which 
the supporting-base is composed, said mate 
rial being preferably of wood. The glass 
plate C protects the base and the marks 
thereon and acts as a cutting-bed to adapt it 
to co-operate with a hardened steel rotary 
knife, such as is commonly used in trimming 
photographs. The bed C, is provided upon 
two of its sides with raised flanges act, said 
flanges forming a right angle. 
d represents a rectangular plate, preferably 
of glass, of smaller size than the base a, and 
SO proportioned that when two of its edges 
bear against the flanges C.' at its other two 
edges will co-operate with the lines b b' in 
forming a rectangle of given dimensions, 
which dimensions are preferably marked upon 
the base C in suitable proximity to the lines. 
In other words, the edges 23 of the plated 
co-operate with one set of lines b b' in form 
ing a rectangle of the size for which said lines 
were intended, one side of said rectangle be 
ing, for example, three and one-fourth inches 
long and the other one and three-fourths 
inches long. The next set of lines b b' co 
operate with said edges in forming a rectan 
gle, which may be five inches long in one di 
rection and four inches long in another, and SO 
on, the edges of the plated co-operating with 
as many sets of lines b b' as may be formed 
upon the base. 
The operation is as follows: A print e to be 
trimmed is placed upon a glass plate c, and 
the plate d is placed upon it and held down 
with sufficient firmness to retain the print in 
place while the operator trims its projecting 
edges by means of a suitable tool guided by 
the edges 23 of the plate d. The operator 
then turns the print around, so that its 
trimmed edges will coincide with the lines b 
t' of the desired size, and then trims the other 
two edges in the same manner, the result be 
ing that the print is cut in an exactly rectan 
gular form and of the exact size of the rect 
angle described by the edges 23 of the plate 
d and the lines b b' on the bed. 
It will be seen that this improved device 
enables the operator to quickly and accu 
rately trim photographic prints without lia 
bility of cutting the prints out of true by their 
slipping while being cut. 
The device is particularly intended for the 
use of amateur photographers, although it 
may obviously be used for trimming paper or 
like material for any other purpose or pur 
pOSes. 
I claim 
1. A paper-trimming device comprising in 
its construction a bed provided at two of its 
edges with raised stops or flanges a' a' and 
on its face with lines b b', all relatively ar 
ranged, as shown, and a plate or guide d, 
formed to bear at two of its edges against the 
stops a? Ct and to bear on the bed, two of the 
edges of said plate constituting guides for a 
trimming-tool, as set forth. 
2. A paper-trimming device comprising in 
its construction, first, a bed having raised 
stops a' Ct at two of its edges, lines b b' on its 
face, and a transparent plate C, covering said 
lines and constituting a cutting-bed, and, sec 
45 
 
5, 5 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
- 
476,481 
ondly, a transparent plate or guided, formed two subscribing Witnesses, this 18th day of 
to bear at two of its edges against the stops February, A. D. 1S92. 
a? a and to bear on the bed, two of the edges 
HARRY H. NEW COMB. 
of said plate constituting guides for a trim 
In testimony whereof I have signed liny 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
C. F. BROWN, 
A. D. HARRISON. 
5 ming-tool, as set forth. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476582.txt	(No Model.) 
C., WOGT, 
MICROPHONE. 
No. 476,582, 
Patented June 7, 1892. 
result: Ell 
s 
w 
. 
. 
. SR is 
WITNESSES: 
66 (72.42%, 
7/1% 
 
IWWEWTOR 
%2. 2/ 
" 44%. 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CAESAR VOGT, OF POSEN, GERMANY. 
MCRO PHONE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters eatent No. 476,582, dated June 7, 1893. 
Application filed May 27, 1891, Serial No. 394,319, (No model.) 
55 
70 
75 
which the screws t t can be set fast in Screw 
ing them against the inner side of the top of 
the casing. By turning the screws it in the 
said top to the left or to the right the mag 
nets man' can be distanced or approached to 
the diaphragm. The poles of the magnets, be 
ing of course arranged so that the positive 
branches come together and that the negative 
branches touch each other, are provided with 
pole-shoes pp, one of which is consequently 
strongly positive and the other negative. 
It is obvious from the description that the 
carbon cylinders in the working position of the 
microphone are not supported in their bear 
ings with their full weight, but that by means 
of the magnetic attraction they are lifted more 
or less out of the lowest part of their bearings, 
according to the smaller or greater proximity 
of the poles p p of the magnets, as clearly 
shown by Fig. 2. Thus the carbon cylindel's 
are lifted more or less in their bearings with 
out being touched and not in any Way imped 
ing the most easy and free vibration of the 
diaphragm. The result is a clear reproduc 
tion of every sound, hard or soft, of the same 
character and shade, no matter if it be whis 
pered or shouted into the apparatus. 
Having described my invention, what I de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent is 
In a microphone, the combination of the 
diaphragm having two recessed contact-blocks 
insulated from each other with carbon cylin 
ders bridging these contacts, provided with 
magnetic sleeves, and a magnet or magnets 
in inductive proximity to the sleeve of mag 
netic material for maintaining the operative 
relation between the cylinders and contacts, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
CAESAR WOGT. 
Witnesses: 
ERNST BURG, 
ERNST SCHMEDICKE. . 
Secretary. 
O 
To all whom it invuly concern. 
Be it known that I, CAESAR WOGT, a subject 
of the King of Prussia, German Emperor, re 
siding at Posen, in the German Empire, have 
invented a Coal-Roller Microphone, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to microphones 
Wherein means are provided to lift up the 
carbon contacts in their bearings, thereby pre 
venting the disturbing noise which is pro 
duced in the ordinary microphones. Efforts 
have been made to lift up the carbon contacts 
or to reduce their weight in the carbon bear 
ings in order to overcome the formation of 
coal-dust in the bearings, which seems to be 
the cause of strange noises in the microphone 
which nearly prevent the practical use of the 
Sale. 
I have constructed a microphone wherein 
the contacts are maintained in operative re 
lation by magnetic attraction; and to this 
end I provide the carbon cylinders with a 
sleeve of soft iron, nickel, or other magnetic 
material, and I place an adjustable magnet 
in more or less close proximity to the same, 
thus more or less attracting the carbon con 
tacts out of their bearings. 
In the accompanying drawings a micro 
phone embodying my invention is shown. 
Figure 1 a sectional view from behind. Fig. 
2 is a side elevation partly in section; and 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section through one of the 
carbon cylinders, showing the surrounding 
magnetic sleeve. 
The ordinary diaphragm, of wood, metal, or 
any of the known materials, supports the or 
dinary contact-blocks, insulated in the usual 
way when the diaphragm is not of wood or 
insulating material. Cylindrical bridging 
contacts k r, lodged in the said blocks in holes 
or recesses, are provided with a magnetic lin 
ing consisting in a sleeve of iron, nickel, or 
other magnetic material. m. mare two horse 
shoe magnets provided with screw-tapped 
lugs aca, wherein screw-bolts it can be turned, 
which are inserted in the top of the casing. 
SS are nuts with roughened rims, by means of 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476682.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 476,682, 
R. M. PANCOAST, 
WENTILATOR, OR, CHIMNEY COWL. . 
Patented June 7, 1892. 
Waitresses 
6-acre &eave?. 
272-77 vez7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD M. PANCOAST, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY. 
WENT AOR OR CH M N EY COWL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 476,682, dated June 7, 1892, 
Application filed June 22, 1891, Serial No. 397,030. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may conce7": 
Be it known that I, RICHARD M. PANCOAST, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Camden, Camden county, New Jersey, have 
invented certain Improvements in Ventilators 
or Chimney-Cowls, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The object of my invention is to furnish a 
cowl for chimneys, ventilating-flues, &c., that 
will be absolutely storm-proof and that will 
furnish free egress for the Smoke, &c., when 
the outside air is calm, and which will in 
crease the draft by any motion of the outside 
air. This object I attain in the following 
manner, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view of my 
improved exhaust-cowl. Fig. 2 is a plan view. 
Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are diagram views. Figs. 6, 
7, and S are views illustrating modifications 
of my invention. 
A is a neck of the cowl, Which can be se 
cured to the chimney or ventilating-fille in any 
suitable manner. 
B is the head, having a conical or tapered 
crown b, as shown in Fig. 1, and its based is in 
the form of an inverted cone, which tends to 
guide the smoke or the air from the chimney 
in an easy course without causing any back 
pressure, due to the backing of the Smoke un 
der the head. 
The upper end of the neck A is preferably 
flared, as shown, for the purpose described 
hereinafter. 
The inverted cone d is connected to the 
crown b by a vertical or nearly vertical flange 
d', having an annular space e between the 
projecting edge b' of the crown and the flange. 
The object of this construction is to prevent 
water that may seek the edge b' of the crown 
from dripping onto and flowing down the cone 
dinto theneck A, this break causing the water 
to stop at the edge of the crown and drop off 
clear of the chimney-opening. At the same 
time this break does not interfere with the 
free flow of Smoke or air out of the stack, as 
the edge ly' of the crown is higher than and 
stops short of the rim of the base or cone d, 
as clearly shown by dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
In order to prevent any downdraft what 
ever in the flue and to aid the updraft. When 
the outside air is in motion, I provide a de 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
flector D, having, preferably, two inwardly-in 
clined surfaces fg, one extending above and 
the other below the center line acac. The sur 
face f extends up to a point sufficient to pre 
vent air or rain from beating down in an ob 
lique line into the stack, and the surfaceg 
extends to a point sufficiently below the upper 
edge C. of the neck A as to prevent wind or 
rain from blowing in under the edge of the 
deflector and into the body of the cowl. 
In Fig. l I have shown by arrows the exit 
of the smoke or air from the body of a cowl 
during a calm. In Fig. 3 I have shown by 
arrows the action of an updraft from the out 
side. In Fig. 4 I have shown the action of a 
downdraft. In Fig. 5 I have shown the action 
of a side draft. 
The flaring mouth Cl, of the neck. A direct 
the air, when an upward current, through the 
annular flue, formed between the head B and 
the deflector D. 
In Fig. 6 I have shown the walls of the base 
d of the head B concaved, and in Fig. 7 I 
have shown the crown of the head rounded on 
top, and in Fig. 8 I have shown an extreme 
taper or elongation of the inverted cone d of 
the head, where it is necessary to provide as 
straight a draft as possible for the exhaust of 
heavy smoke, which would be retarded more 
by a flatter deflecting cone. 
Thus it will be seen that I make a chimney 
cowl that is simple in construction and that 
is absolutely proof against rain and down 
drafts, and which will readily allow smoke and 
air to escape during a calm and will help the 
exhaust when the outside air is in motion. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, in a chimney-cowl, of 
the chimney-opening, with a deflector above 
said opening, said deflector having a bottom 
in the shape of an inverted cone or pyramid, 
so that the Smoke or air passing from the cowl 
will be deflected outward and upward thereby, 
an inclined crown, and a flange connecting 
the inverted conical bottom of the deflector 
with the crown of the same, the edge of said 
crown extending beyond the flange, but not 
beyond a line extended in the plane of the 
defiector bottom, thereby forming an annular 
space between the bottom and the edge of the 
crown to prevent water from flowing down 
the bottom from said edge of the crown with 
55 
65 
S 7 O 
75 
95 
I O 
2 
476,682 
out interfering with the free egress of smoke 
or air from the cowl, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, in a chimney-cowl, of 
the neck, with the deflector situated above 
the neck, said deflector having an inverted 
conical or pyramidal bottom, an inclined. 
crown, and a flange connecting the crown with 
the bottom and forming an annular space be 
tween the bottom and the edge of the crown, 
the said edge extending beyond the flange, 
but not beyond a line extended in the plane 
O 
of the deflector bottom, and with an annular 
deflector D opposite the cowl-opening and 
having upper and lower tapered portions, sub- 15 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
RICITARD M. PAN COAST. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. D. CONNER, 
HENRY HOWSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476782.txt	l. 
(No Model.) 
No. 476,782, 
Patented June 14, l892. 
W. E. BROCK. 
IMPLEMENT FOR WENEERING LUMBER. 
 
o 27. 
JNomu Y 
el.%.e. 
ATTORNEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. BROCK, OF PILAINFIELD, NEW JERSEY. 
MPLE MENT FOR WEN E E R NG LUMBER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 476,782, dated June 14, 1892. 
Application filed April 24, 1891, Serial No, 390,248, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. BROCK, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Plainfield, in the county of Somerset and State 
of New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Implements for Ve 
neering Lumber, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention is an implement for veneer 
ing lumber, as hereinafter fully described, 
whereby I am enabled to apply a sheet of 
veneer to a surface of plain lumber, molding, 
or the like having a tongue-and-groove, rab 
bet, lap, or other similar joint. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a top view of an implement em 
bodying my invention ready to be applied to 
use. Fig. 2 represents a bottom view thereof. 
Fig. 3 represents a side elevation thereof. 
Figs. 4 and 5 each represent a cross-section 
of a piece of lumber having the veneer ap 
plied thereto. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The letter A indicates two rods, which are 
of cylindrical form, but have their upper and 
lower central portions flattened to form a 
suitable bearing-surface for the nuts B of 
screw-bolts passing through the rods, together 
with formers D. The rods A are of the same 
length and the bolts are at similar distances 
from the ends thereof, while they turn loosely 
in their sockets. The bolts passing through 
the formers D are secured on their under sur 
faces by their heads E. The formers D strad 
dle from one to the other rod A and are flat, 
except at the ends of their upper surfaces, 
where they have an upward projection, as more 
clearly shown in Fig. 3, to prevent the sheet 
of veneer from being injured while it is being 
applied to the lumber. The outer edges of 
the formers D are straight, while the inner 
edges C thereof have an outline or configura 
tion to correspond with the edges of the piece 
of lumber, molding, or the like to which the 
veneer is to be applied. In this example the 
inner edges Cof the formers have central longi 
tudinal grooves or recesses d, extending ap 
O 
25 
35 
45 
proximately the entire length thereof, with 
overlapping upper and lower portionse, which 
coincide with the edges of the lumber to be 
veneered. (See Figs. 4 and 5.) The ends of 
the formers D are made to taper or curve up 
ward and outward from the bottom to the top 
thereof, like a plowshare, terminating in the 
upward projections already referred to. Both 
ends of the formers D are substantially simi 
lar in construction, so they can be moved 
freely forward and backward over the sur 
face of the veneer when applied to the edges 
of the lumber, thus forming double-enders. 
In order to facilitate adjustment of the 
formers D on the edges of the piece of lum 
ber to be veneered, I provide a handle J, which 
by its proper manipulation opens or closes 
the rods A, and thereby contracts or expands 
the formers on the edge of the surface to . 
which the veneer is applied. 
Referring to Figs. 4 and 5, P indicates a 
piece of lumber, and T the veneer which has 
been applied thereto by my implement. 
In some cases the formers D may be firmly 
secured to a rod or rods and brought in en 
gagement with the edges of the dressed arti 
cle by bringing the rod from a transverse to 
an inclined position in relation to the article. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. An implement for veneering lumber, 
molding, or the like, consisting of rods A, 
connected with formers D by means of bolts, 
said formers having their inner edges adapted 
to fit the edges of the lumber or other article, 
Substantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. An implement for veneering lumber, 
molding, or the like, consisting of rods A, 
connected with formers D by means of bolts, 
said formers having their inner edges adapted 
to fit the edges of the board or other article 
and the whole provided with a handle for 
manipulating the same, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. . 
WILLIAM E. BROCK. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS C. Bow EN, 
CHAS. WAHLERS. 
55 
75 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476882.txt	(No Model.) 
F. KARR. 
PILOW SHAM. HOLDER. 
No. 476,882, 
 
Patented June 14, 1892, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS KARR, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PLLOWSHAM HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 476,882, dated June 14, 1892. 
Application filed December 2, 1890, Serial No. 373,319, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
40 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS KARR, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city of Chicago, county of Cook, and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Pillow-Sham Holders, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
pillow-sham holders, which have heretofore 
been provided with catch devices for main 
taining the holder in an elevated position, 
separate from the sham-holding frame, and of 
such character as to either require manual 
manipulation thereof in order to release the 
holder in changing its position or else involv 
ing objectionable features of construction, 
which not only increase the cost of manufac 
ture, but which also subject it to consider 
able Wear in operation, besides in many cases 
being bulky and unsightly in appearance. 
Furthermore, in most of the prior forms of 
pillow-sham holders no special provision is: 
made for attaching the sham to the holding 
frame other than those which may suggest 
themselves to the ingenuity of the user, 
while in some a cord or tape is provided, ex 
tending between the two side pieces of the 
holder, which device is objectionable, because: 
of the unequal support it affords the shams 
and the consequent sagging thereof at the 
center. 
The prime object of this invention is to 
have the catch device or retaining-spring for 
the holder formed integrally with the sham 
holder frame, whereby the number of parts 
of the holder is reduced to the minimum and 
the economy, effectiveness, and durability. 
thereof is promoted to the maximum degree. 
Another object is to have the retaining de 
vice of such a character that while it will ef 
fectually lock the holder in its elevated posi 
tion the position of the holder may be readily 
and quickly changed without manualor other 
manipulation of the retaining device, whereby 
it is only necessary to grasp the holder and 
swing it up or down, the retaining device 
catching and releasing automatically, thus 
enabling the most ignorant person to operate 
the sham-holder without danger or injury 
thereto. 
A further object is to provide novel means 
for attaching the shamsto the holder whereby 
the shams will be supported equally through 
out their length and at all times, notwith 
standing the horizontal or vertical adjustment 
of the holder. 
These objects are attained by the devices 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure I represents a perspective view of a 
bed, showing a sham-holder applied thereto 
embodying my invention; Fig. 2, a perspec 
tive view of the sham-holder detached and in 
an elevated position; Fig. 3, a front elevation 
of the same in a lowered position; Fig. 4, an 
enlarged side elevation of one end of the 
holder and the bracket supporting the same; 
Fig. 5, a front elevation thereof. 
Similar letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in the several figures of the draw 
lings. 
The holder is extensible, so that it may be 
readily and instantly adjusted to any width 
of bed, and the frame thereof is composed of 
two sections, formed wholly of bent wire, alike 
in all material respects, and so connected 
with each other as to be inseparable, but at 
the same time capable of independent move 
ment or adjustment relative to each other. 
Each section of the frame is of a general rect 
angular form having two side bars A A' and 
B B' and two end bars C C and D D, and 
each is composed of a single piece of wire 
bent into the desired form, as Will now be ex 
plained. Each section of the frame at the 
corners thereof, formed by the conjunction of 
the end bars C and C with the side bars, is 
bent or formed into eyes E and E, through 
which freely work the side bars of the re 
spective frames, the bars of one frame Work 
ing through the eyes of the other, so that the 
two sets of eyes subserve the double purpose 
of binding or uniting the frames together, 
and of guiding them in their longitudinal 
movement upon each other. This construc 
tion gives to the frame an adjustment which 
permits its attachment to beds varying in 
width from the length of one section of the 
frame to nearly the length of both frames 
combined without substantially reducing the 
rigidity of the frame as a whole or discon 
necting the sections thereof from each other. 
The ends of the wire forming each section 
terminate at the same corner thereof, one end 
45 
 
55 
75 
90 
95 
co 
476,882 
 
constituting a pivot for the frame by enter 
ing the bracket F, as shown at G in Fig. 4, 
the bracket being secured to the head of the 
bed in any suitable manner, and constituting 
with the twin bracket at the opposite side of 
the bed the support for the holder as a 
whole. The other end of the section is bent 
around the pivoting end G, and then extends 
back a short distance parallel with the end 
bar D or D', around which it is bent to form 
a guide-loop H, through which works the ex 
treme end I of the section, the wire being 
bent into a coil J between the end bar and 
the end I, so as to convert the latter into a 
Spring. This spring is utilized as a retain 
ing device for maintaining the holder in an 
elevated position by working upon a cam-sur 
face formed upon the end of the bracket 
either upon the upper edges K thereof, as 
illustrated in the drawings, or, if preferred, 
upon the inner face thereof, the location of 
the cams being immaterial, so long as it is en 
gaged by the spring-retaining device. 
It will 
be observed that this retaining device, while 
it serves to effectually hold the frame in its ele 
vated position, is not such a lock as requires 
manual manipulation in order to release it, 
for it is only necessary to seize hold of the 
frame and Swing it either up or down upon 
its pivots, when the tension of the retaining 
spring Will be overcome, and it will ride over 
the cam either in engaging or releasing into 
proper position without any manual manipu 
lation Whatever. It will also be observed 
that by the construction herein shown and de 
scribed this retaining device is formed of the 
same wire which composes the frame or body 
of the holder and engages the bracket by 
which the holder is supported, thereby dis 
pensing with the employment of any extra or 
separate parts for accomplishing the desired 
object, and thus reducing the cost of construc 
tion to the minimum and at the same time 
rendering the operation of the device so simple 
that any person, however ignorant, may ma 
nipulate it without injury thereto, besides 
which, by avoiding the necessity for releasing 
these retaining devices by hand, I am enabled 
to employ a retaining device at each side of 
the bed with no more inconvenience or danger 
than if no such device were employed. 
Another important feature of my invention 
is the means provided for attaching the sham 
to the holder, which consists of tapes MN or 
equivalent flexible material wound spirally 
about the bars B and B, respectively, of the 
two sections, the ends of the tapes being se 
cured to their respective sections near the 
ends of the bars, so that they will move in and 
out with the bars, working through the guide 
eyes and not changing their position upon 
the bars. By this means the tape is practi 
cally attached to the bar at intervals through 
out its length, and the pillow-sham can be se 
cured thereto at any point in the same man 
ner as if the tape was simply stretched from 
side to side of the frame; but this important 
difference exists between the two modes of 
securing the tape to the frame that With it 
spirally wound, as herein described, the sham 
is supported equally throughout its length 
and will not sag, as would be the case if the 
tape was simply stretched between the ends 
of the frame. 
In conclusion I may state that while the 
bracket F is shown as provided with one cam 
K, which alone is necessary, for gravity will 
hold the frame when down upon the pillows, 
still if a locking device is desired when the 
holder is in a lowered position another cam 
may be provided on the under side of the 
bracket. The manner of using my pillow 
sham holder is clearly illustrated in Fig. 1, in 
which the upper edge of the sham, when in 
position covering the pillows, is attached to 
the side bars B and B of the holder, which 
constitute the pivots thereof, so that when the 
holder is swung up and locked in an elevated 
position the lower free end of the sham will 
fold down over and conceal the holder from 
We W. 
A pillow-sham holder constructed in accord 
ance with my invention possesses numerous 
advantages over the prior forms of holders, 
chief among which is the cheapness and du 
rability thereof and the extreme simplicity of 
its construction, it being composed entirely 
of two parts aside from the supporting-brack 
ets, the minimum possible in an extensible 
pillow-sham holder. 
On March 3, 1890, I filed an application for 
Letters Patent for an improvement in pillow 
sham holders embodying but not claiming 
the present invention, which application bears 
Serial No. 342,330, and was patented January 
20, 1891, No. 444,981. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
In a pillow-sham holder, the combination, 
with the sham-holding frame, composed en 
tirely of wire and consisting of two sections 
rectangular in form and each composed of a 
single piece of wire which is bent to form the 
side bars A A' and B and B, the end bars C, 
C, D, and D', the guide-eyes E and E, through 
which the side bars work, the loop H, the 
spring ends I, constituting the retaining de 
vices, and the coils J, of the brackets, in 
which are respectively one end of each section 
and which are provided with cams engaged 
by the spring ends I, substantially as de 
scribed. 
FRANCIS KARR. 
Witnesses: 
W. R. OMOHUNDRO, 
R. C. OMOHUNDRO. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
go 
95 
IO 
IO 
I 
2 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US476984.txt	(No Model.) 
T. A. EDISON, 
EXPANSIBLE, PULLEY. 
No. 476,984, 
Patented June 14, 1892. 
 
282 by coca 
soya-s ... (-leuk 
&vvuovlbot 
% - 2.32 I. 
S3 Ze- &etov vior 16 st 
THE NORRIS PETERs co., Phoro-LTHo., washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS A. EDISON, OF LLEWELLYN PARK, NEW JERSEY. 
EXPANSIBLE PULEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 476,984, dated June 14, 1892. 
Original application filed June 10, 1890, Serial No, 854,946. Divided and this application filed August 28, 1890. Serial No. 
368,255, (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS A. EDISON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing a Llew 
ellyn Park, in the county of Essex and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Expansible Pul 
leys, (Case No. 872.) of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention relates to power-transmit 
ting pulleys, and the main objects are to pro 
vide a simple and efficient pulley the work 
ing circumference of which may be varied as 
required; and the invention consists in the 
Several features and combinations hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part hereof, Figures 1 and 2 are perspective 
views of a simple form of my expansible pull 
ley, and Figs. 3 and 4 are elevations of a coin 
pound eXpanding pulley constructed upon 
the same principle. 
S is a disk fixed against sliding movement, 
and T is a sliding disk adapted to be moved 
by the arm R. These disks are provided near 
their periphery with smooth holes, through 
which is threaded a rope U the ends of which 
are suitably fastened. As the sliding disk T 
is moved toward the fixed disk S the strain 
of the endless belt will take up the slack in 
the pulley-rope U and cause the pulley to act 
as if of a definitely-smaller size, as shown in 
Fig. 2. If a pulley adapted to carry two ropes 
or belts is required, the same construction can 
be employed, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4, in 
which an additional fixed disk S' is used, 
placed between the disks S and Tand having 
holes through which the rope U passes. 
As 
the sliding disk T is moved toward the mid 
dle fixed disk S' the pulley-rope will be drawn 
through the holes in this disk S'by the strain 
of the driving-belt and the contracted pulley 
will appear as in Fig. 4. It is evident that 
the same result could be obtained by other 
relative movements of the disks such as by 
rotating the disk T instead of sliding it. The 
sliding disk T in both the simple and com 
35 
45 
pound pulley is provided with a grooved col 
lar i, by means of which this disk can be 
moved, as will be readily understood. 
I am aware that the heads of expansible 
pulleys have been joined together by loose or 
jointed rods; but my invention is confined to 
the use of connections of flexible material, such 
as rope. This furnishes a cheap device and 
one whose construction and operation are ex 
ceedingly simple and which is not likely to 
get out of order. By the phrase one of which 
(disks) is movable relative to the other it is 
not intended to convey the idea that the Sec 
ond disk must necessarily be stationary, but 
the movement must be such as to change the 
relative location of the disks. 
The terms . 
ropes' and cords obviously include other 
flexible strands or bodies which can be used 
in the manner above described, such as 
leather straps, chains, &c., (as distinguished 
from rigid rods or other rigid bodies.) 
This application is a division required by 
the Patent Office of a prior application filed 
June 10, 1890, on which a patent has been is 
sued, No. 436,970, dated September 23, 1890. 
What I claim is 
1. An expansible pulley having heads or 
disks, one of which is movable relative to the 
other, and a rope connection between the 
disks, upon which the belt travels and the 
working circumference of which is made 
smaller or larger, as desired, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. An expansible pulley having heads or 
disks, one of which is movable relative to the 
other, and a connection between the same by 
means of flexible ropes or cords threaded 
through holes in the disks, substantially as 
set forth. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
9th day of August, 1890. 
55 
75 
THIOS. A. EDSON. 
Witnesses: 
RICHD. N. DYER, 
W. PELZER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477084.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 477,084, 
 
F. A. & G THORN, 
DECOY 
Patented June 14, l892, 
WITNESSES- 
26.2% 
C2/c2,2724/ 
INVENTORS 
9. 
?t 
<ia-Sirr-24 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK A. THORN AND GEORGETHORN, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 
TERRITORY. 
DECOY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters. Patent No. 477,084, dated June 14, 1892. 
Application filed February 25, 1892, Serial No. 422,764 (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, FREDERICKA. THORN 
and GEORGE THORN, of Salt Lake City, in the 
county of Salt Lake and Territory of Utah, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Decoys; and we do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it per 
tains to make and use it, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
decoys; and it consists of the body of the 
same formed of two parts and a band or other 
Securing device for holding them together, all 
of which will be fully described hereinafter, 
and more particularly referred to in the claims. 
The object of our invention is to construct 
a decoy of very light weight, which may be 
transported very easily on account of its be 
ing made in sections, whereby a great number. 
may be packed in a very small space, as the 
Sections are made to fit within each other, as 
SO many pans. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a bottom perspective view of the 
decoy. Fig. 2 is a sectional view, the parts 
of the decoy being separated. Fig. 3 is a rear 
WeW. 
A B represent the pan-shaped sides of the 
decoy, which are formed on their upper edges 
with the flanges C. Upon the bottom and 
ends of the part A is formed the enlarged 
flange D, provided with the outward bulge E, 
and formed on the section IB is a correspond 
ing flange, having the inwardly - extending 
bulge F, which fits the bulge E, and in this man 
ner a tight joint is formed when the sections 
of the decoy are placed together. For hold 
ing the said sides together, as shown in Fig. 1, 
we provide an elastic band G, which is formed 
with the loop H in one end, which encircles 
the neck of the decoy, and, passing around 
the body of the same, it fits over the interlock 
ing flanges E F and is secured by means of a 
slit I, which catches over the projection J at 
the terminus of the flanges E F on the rear 
end of the decoy. By means of this band the 
connecting joint of the sections is effectually 
sealed, making it impossible for water to gain 
admission to the interior of the decoy. The 
sections are stamped from sheet-tin or other 
metal, and in consequence are very light and 
can be carried from place to place with ease. 
When it is desired to carry a number, the right 
and left sections are packed together, respect 
ively, thus forming a very compact and con 
venient package. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim 
1. The combination, with the decoy-sections 
having registering flanges on their edges, of 
a band for holding the sections together and 
which is adapted to lap over the Said flanges, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. A decoy formed of vertical longitudinal 
sections, projections at the front and rear 
ends of the decoy in line with the adjacent 
edges of the sections, and an elastic band 
which is normally of a length shorter than the 
distance between the said projections, but 
which is adapted to be expanded and con 
nected there to at its respective ends covering 
the longitudinal joint between the projections, 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with the flanged decoy 
sections and a projection on the rear end 
thereof, of a band having a loop formed in 
one end which fits over the decoy's neck and 
a slit in its opposite end which fits over the 
said projection on the rear end, substantially 
as shown and described. 
4. A decoy formed of vertical longitudinal 
sections having curved lower sides, outward 
ly-projecting flanges on the meeting edges of 
the sections, projections on the front and rear 
ends of the decoy in line with the said flanges, 
and an elastic band normally of a length 
shorter than the distance between the projec 
tions, but which is adapted to be secured there 
to at its respective ends, extending around 
and over the flanges between the said projec 
tions, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
F. A. THORN. 
- 
GEORGE THORN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. GALLAGHER, 
J. L. ROBERTS. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477185.txt	(No Model.) 
M. M. CUL WER. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MACHINE FOR SP00LING AND UNSPOOLING BARBED FENCE WIRE, 
No. 477,185. 
Patented June 14, 1892. 
Aiz2. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
ELIII ITT 
l EE 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
.3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR SPOOLING AND UN SP00LING BARBED FENCE WIRE, 
No. 477,185. 
Patented June 14, 1892, 
M. M. CULWER, 
is a 
2. 
aw 2z 13 
site2 
2. 
2 Te 
E. a 3-le 
2 
2%a z2 
 
 
 
Xit-lossae 
Z's a 2. 
 
3v.u.c. v.o. 
Moses.M.Oulver. 
stria atter AA54A 
e Moris Peters co, Picro-triho.washtrofa. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
M. M. CULWER, 
MACHINE FOR SPOOLING AND UNSPOOLING BARBED FENGE WIRE, 
Patented June 14, 1892, 
No. 477, 185. 
 
sinces 
311-uovoz 
Moses M. Culver. 
ETERS Co., PHOTO-LIrHo., washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MOSES M. CULVER, OF GLIDDEN, IOWA. 
MACHINE FOR SPOOLING AND UNSPOOLNG BARBED FENCE-WIRE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 477,185, dated June 14, 1892. 
Application filed May 5, 1890, 
Serial No. 350,636 (No model.) 
nary kind. The spur-wheel D is secured to 
To all tufton, if notif concer. 
the axle B and revolves the spur-pinion E 
Be it known that I, MOSES M. CULVER, a 
when intermeshing therewith. The pinion E 
citizen of the United States, residing at Glid 
den, in the county of Carroll and State of 
revolves upon the shaft F, which is eccentri 
Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
cally mounted at both ends in blocks F. In 
Improvements in Machines for Spooling, Un 
order that this pinion may be thrown into and 
spooling, and Stretching Smooth or Barbed 
out of engagement with wheel D, shaft F has 
Wire, of which the following is a specifica 
Secured to it the lever G, which, being thrown 
forward or backward, causes the eccentric 
tion. 
This invention pertains to improvements 
gudgeons F to revolve in blocks F, thus car 
in wire gathering, disbursing, and fence-mak 
rying the shaft Fforward or backward. That 
ing machines, and, while applicable to any, is: 
the lever, and through it the shaft, may be 
more particularly applied to the machine pat 
locked in position the lever is preferably 
ented to Myron W. Beach and myself Octo 
made as a thin elastic bar of metel. 
ber 14, 1884, No. 306,677, and has for its ob 
Secured to the frame of the machine paral 
ject the gathering of loose or unwound Wire 
lel with and nearly in the path of the lever is 
a quadrant having the outsetting ledges g, 
as it is taken from fence-posts and Winding 
of the same upon Spools, the distributing of 
which stand directly in the path of the lever 
the wire from the spools in the construction of 
and lock it in its position at each extreme, 
a fence, and the stretching and holding of the 
and to pass which the lever must be forcibly 
same so that it can be nailed tautly upon the 
sprung aside. Integral with or fastened to 
the pinion E is a pulley H. 
posts; and it consists in the detailed combi 
nation and arrangement of the parts, sub 
To the rear end of the frame A of the ma . 
stantially as hereinafter more fully set forth, 
chine is secured a long rotary shaft I, extend 
and pointed out in the claims. 
ing beyond the wheels on both sides a sufi 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
cient distance to hold a spool of wire and jour 
naled upon or passing through bearings in the 
Figure 1 is a top view of the machine con 
structed in accordance with my invention. 
frame-work A. Fixedly secured to the shaft 
Fig.2 is a sectional side view on the line 11 
I is the pulley J, in line with the pulley II and 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a Sectional side view on 
frictionally connected thereto by the belt K. 
The tightness of this belt is regulated by the 
the line 33 of Fig. 1 of the gear, friction 
wheels, belt, and belt-tightening devices, to 
driver with his foot upon the lever L, which 
gether with the frictional holding mechanism 
by means of the rods land l', acting upon the 
levers M and M', pivoted to the frame of the 
in the rear. Fig. 4 is a sectional detail view 
through the friction-wheel and spur-pinion, 
machine, presses the traveling wheels O and 
showing the eccentric mounting of their shaft. 
O', which are mounted, respectively, on the le 
vers M and M', upon the belt IK with the force 
Fig. 5 is a perspective view of a modified 
form of a spool-holding device. Fig. G is a 
desired. 
view of the friction-roller upon Which the 
Secured to the shaft I near both its extremi 
wire-controlling bar is moved; and Fig. 7 is a 
ties are clamps N, fitted with Set-screws in to 
view on the line 1 1 of Fig. 1 (looking in the 
hold the spool upon the ends of shaft I. 
opposite direction from Fig.2) of the eccen 
In front of the wheels is the bar Q, extend 
tically-mounted brake-wheel and its encom 
ing across the frame-work A of the machine 
passing brake-strap, together with the con 
and held in position by guides q, fastened to 
the frame-work A. Loosely mounted upon 
trolling-lever and connections. 
the ends of the bar Q are feathering sprocket 
In the drawings like letters refer to similar 
pulleys P, over which the wire passes as it is 
parts. 
being taken upon the spools, the bar Q being 
A is the frame-work of the machine, hav 
moved by the driver back and forth upon the 
ing about at the center thereof an axle IB, 
frame to make an evenly-filled spool. In or 
which is turned in suitable bearings by the 
wheels C, secured thereto by fixed ratchet 
der to facilitate the easy movement of the bar 
plates and pawl connections C" of the ordi-Q, it rests upon friction-rolls Q', which are 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
 
3O 
477,185 
2 
mounted in the guides q. (See Fig. 6.) Pins 
near the axle B and extending rearward and 
fitted at their outer ends with the hooks t, 
q' limit the movement of the bar Q to the 
which are pressed firmly into the ground. 
width of the spool. 
During the spooling and unspooling opera 
The parts of the machine thus far described 
5 are used in spooling. The wire as it is taken 
tions these anchors are carried on hooks t 
from the fence-posts drops upon the ground 
upon the frame-work A. As the boards form 
ing the ends of spools of wire are not always 
along the line of the fence. A spool is se 
of the same width, it becomes necessary to 
cured on the outer end of the shaft I and the 
make the clamp N and set-screw n of consid 
wire attached thereto and placed over the 
erable length. 
to sprocket - wheel P. The machine is then 
In the modification shown in Fig. 5 I have 
drawn toward the line of wire, the shaft Ibe 
made a handy clamping device by securing 
ing revolved with sufficient rapidity to tightly 
block V on the shaft I and pivoting outwardly 
wind the wire upon the spool. As the spool 
extending arms v in the extremities thereof, 
increases in diameter the driver regulates the 
that are provided with hooks upon their 
tightness of the frictional belt IX so that the 
outer ends for engaging one of the arms of 
strain on the wire and machine is only suffi 
the spool X. Near the spool to guide and 
cient to keep the wire tightly spooled. In un 
spooling one end of the Wire is attached to a 
sustain the arms - I Secure to the shaft I the 
rectangular piece W. To hold the arms 
post or held in any way, the Spur-pinion 
upon the spool X, I connect them with a rod 
2 o thrown out of engagement with the Spur 
W, curved about the shaft I, and upon one 
wheel, and the machine drawn along the line 
end of the rod, which is bent at right angles 
of the fence. To prevent the shaft I from 
to its general direction, I eccentrically mount 
spinning around too rapidly, and thus allow 
ing the wire to drop upon the ground and the 
a small wheel W, the periphery of which is 
serrated and the revolution of which tightens 
barbs to become tangled in the grass, from 
the clamp V upon the spool. 
which it is very hard to draw them, I fixedly 
secure to the shaft I a small wheel R. near 
The details of the construction could be 
somewhat varied throughout the machine 
one of the sills of the machine. This wheel 
R is slightly eccentrically mounted on the 
without departing from my invention. 
shaft I and is encompassed by a strip of 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Lets 
ters Patent, is 
steel R", which is fastened at one end to the 
1. In a wire gathering and disbursing ma 
frame A and at the other is connected by a 
: chine, the combination of an eccentric shaft 
pitman r to the lever S, also mounted on the 
frame. A convenient to the driver's hand. In mounted in bearings on the frame of the ma 
35 unspooling the driver, with his hand upon 
chine, a lever attached thereto, a combined 
spur-wheel and pulley mounted on the eccen 
this lever or his foot upon a Suitable foot con 
tric shaft, means for rotating the spur-wheel 
nection with the same, keeps the Wire stretched 
along the fence at a proper degree of taut and pulley when the eccentric shaft is thrown 
ness. In practice I have found it very diffi 
to one extreme of its movement by the lever, 
and a belt connecting the pulley on the ec 
cult to tighten the Wire if it runs off from the 
spool too easily and rapidly during any part 
centric shaft with a pulley on the spool-shaft, 
of the unspooling. When sufficient wire has 
which is mounted on the franae of the ma 
been drawn off for the desired length of 
chine in the rear of the eccentric shaft, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
fence, the hook r" is employed to lock the le 
2. In a Wire gathering and disbursing ma 
ver S so tightly that the shaft I is prevented 
from rotation. Any other form of a locking 
chine, the combination of the driving-wheel 
C, axle B, spur-wheel D, spur-wheel E, pulley 
device for the lever S-Such as a pawl and 
ratchet-Would answer the purpose of the 
II, attached thereto, shaft I, pulley J, carried 
locking-rod ' and the Serrations in the edge 
by it, and belt K with rollers O and O', 
mounted on levers M and M, and means 
of the lever. The brace-rod U, attached to 
whereby the rollers can be pressed upon the 
the forward end of the frame A, is placed over 
belt with a varying force, substantially as 
one of the arms of the Spool to prevent the 
springing of the shaft I and a too-great strain 
shown. 
3. In a wire disbursing and stretching ma 
on the clamp N, and the machine is moved 
forward, drawing the Wire up taut. The ec 
chine, the combination of a revolving shaft 
centricity of the wheel R is necessary to as 
extending transversely across the machine, 
sist in locking the shaft I from rotation when 
upon which the Spool is mounted, an eccen 
trically-mounted friction and locking wheel 
the wire is to be stretched. At that time the 
full draft of the team is upon the wire. and 
thereon, and an encompassing band attached 
tending to revolve shaft I. The band R is 
to a lever pivoted to the machine and adapted 
to be pressed upon the wheel with varying 
tautly drawn when the part of the wheel ad 
force, Substantially as shown. 
jacent to the shorter radius is in contact with 
The longer radius cannot, there 
4. In a machine to be drawn over the ground 
the band. 
fore, again pass around. To prevent the run 
to disburse and stretch wire in fence-making, 
ning back of the machine and consequent 
the combination of a shaft extending trans. 
loosening of the Wire, I provide anchors T, 
versely across the machine, upon which the 
spool is fixedly mounted, an eccentrically 
pivoted to both sides of the frame-work A 
45 
55 
7 O 
90 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
477,185 
3 
6. In a wire gathering, disbursing, and 20 
on, of a brace-rod pivoted to the front of the 
machine to be attached to one of the arms of 
the spool, Substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
stretching machine, the combination to form a 
spool-clamp of a block secured to the shaft 
and arms pivoted thereon, connected by a 
rod, upon one end of which is an eccentrically 
mounted wheel, substantially as and for the 25 
purpose specified. 
MOSES M. CULVER. 
Witnesses: 
II. M. GABRIEL, 
D. E. WALDRON. 
mounted brake-wheel thereon, means where 
by friction is thrown upon this wheel to keep 
the wire stretched while unreeling and to lock 
the spool and shaft against rotation when the 
desired amount of wire has been disbursed, 
and anchors pivoted to the frame of the ma 
chine and adapted to be pressed into the 
ground when the wire has been stretched 
taut, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
5. In a wire disbursing and stretching ma 
chine, the combination, with the shaft extend 
ing transversely acroSS and beyond the ma 
chine and mechanisms thereon to prevent ro 
tation of the shaft and to lock the spool there 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477285.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C, L, TRAWIS 
MACHINE FOR REMOVING SUPERFLUOUS MATERIAL FROM THREAD. 
Patented June 21, 1892. 
No. 477,285. 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
9. 22.2 Carlezzo 
logo*-tt 
 
(No Model.) 
 
MACHINE FOR REMOWING SUPERFLU0 US MATERIAL FROM THREAD 
Patented June 21, 1892. 
No. 477,285. 
C. L., TRAWS, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
el. 
O 
s 9eze- 
Czzazzes' Z, Zzzazes. 
wH HORRis-PETEAs co, Photo-Litho, washingroN, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
C. L. TRAWIS. 
MACHINE FOR REMOWING SUPERFLUOUS MATERIAL FROM THREAD. 
Patented June 21, 1892, 
No. 477,285. 
 
 
  
ga?fix. 
26NXN a 
% 
 
Z%7. 
1-6 (as 
 
3 
 
  
 
29 7%%2 
SK. 
30 
3% 
2 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
Z7zzezzz7. 
CVeazes I. Zazzas. 
73 
4. As/ 
(Rule 
4ttozzeas, 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES LESLIE TRAVIS, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA. 
MACHINE FOR REMOVING SUPERFLUOUS MATERIAL FROM THREAD, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 477,285, dated June 21, 1892. 
45 
So 
 
O 
25 
35 
Application filed July 6, 1891, 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, CHARLESLESLIE TRAVIs, 
of Minneapolis, in the county of Hennepin and 
State of Minnesota, have invented certain Im 
provements in Machines for Removing Super 
fluous Material from Thread, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
In the manufacture of crash and twine it. 
is customary to use thread that is spun from 
What is generally known as tow stock. 
This stock contains more or less shive or 
WOOdy fiber, considerable portions of which 
are inevitably spun into the thread. There 
are also on the thread lumps of short fiber 
forming bunches thereon, and many of these 
lumps are in the form of rings extending 
around the thread and forming what are 
known as spins. Preparatory to using this 
thread for the manufacture of crash or twine 
or for other purposes it has heretofore been 
Customary to subject it to a brushing action, 
which is designed to remove the adhering 
lumps or bunches and the shive or woody 
fiber, and afterward to starch the thread for 
the purpose of starching down any of such 
lumps that may remain and causing them to 
be closely compacted against the body of the 
thread. This process does not, however, re 
move any of the spins or lumps and but a 
small portion of the shives or woody fiber, 
and many of the adhering lumps and portions 
of the shives or woody fiber are not compacted 
closely enough against the body of the thread 
to cause them to pass through the harness and 
reeds of the loom in weaving. When one of 
these lumps on the thread catches in passing 
through the loom, it often causes the thread to 
break, necessitating the stoppage of the loom 
and the tying of a knot in the thread. If the 
lump on the thread and the projecting portions 
of shive or woody fiber pass through the loom 
Without causing a breakage in the thread, they 
are still plainly to be seen in the finished fab 
ric when calendered, causing it to be of an 
inferior quality. If the thread is used for the 
manufacture of twine, which usually consists 
of several threads twisted together, the lumps 
and projecting shives or woody fiber are 
equally objectionable, especially as it often 
occurs that several lumps in the different 
threads will come opposite each other at the 
Same place, thus forming a large lump in the 
55 
75 
Serial No. 398,488, (No model.) 
twine. The brushing process fails to remove 
all of the shives or woody fiber, and practically 
does not remove any of the spins or lumps 
that are formed in the shape of rings extend 
ing around the thread, as these rings when 
the thread is subjected to a brushing process 
will simply slide along on the thread without 
being removed therefrom. It also frequently 
occurs in spinning thread from this stock that 
the feed-rolls will at times feed through too 
much stock. This will make a place in thread 
of larger diameter than the main body of the 
thread, and when this occurs the parts of the 
thread for a short distance on each side of 
these portions of larger diameter will be twist 
ed harder or more closely than the main por 
tions of the thread, while these larger portions 
will not be twisted as closely as the main por 
tions of the thread. This leaves places in the 
thread that are of larger diameter than the 
average and of a looser twist. These larger 
and more loosely twisted parts of the thread 
are apparent in the woven fabric, forming 
what are termed swells and causing the 
fabric to have an uneven and defective ap 
pearance. 
One object of the invention is to remove 
these lunps of fiber and also the shives or 
woody fiber from the thread, thus leaving the 
thread fiber perfectly clean and smooth, ca 
pable of being passed through the loom with 
outcatching, and forming a fabric when woven 
that is entirely free from lumps and bunches 
and from shives or woody fiber. 
Another object of my invention is to trim 
or dress down the larger and more-loosely 
twisted portions of the thread. I find by 
actual experience that when these more 
loosely-twisted parts of the thread are re 
duced to the same diameter as the other parts 
of the thread the twists in the more-closely 
twisted portions on each side of these loosely 
twisted portions will distribute themselves 
across the loosely-twisted places, thus making 
the parts that were before twisted closer than 
the average and those that were twisted less 
closely than the average all of the average 
To these ends my invention consists in sub 
jecting the thread to the action of knives or 
cutters that cut longitudinally of the thread, 
thereby splitting or opening the spins on 
twist. 
95 
- 
OC 
2 
477,285 
7 o 
75 
the outside of the thread fiber and also re- guide and gage plate or disk 13 is arranged 
to project for a short distance between the 
moving any material that adheres to the out 
cutters. This plate is preferably made in the 
side of the thread and the projecting shives 
shape of a disk having a groove 15 in its edge 
or Woody fiber without injuring the body of 
and may be mounted loosely on a stud 17, as 
the thread or cutting any of the fibers form 
shown in Figs. 2 and 3, so as to be capable of 
ing the thread and also reducing the larger 
turning freely thereon. This plate may, how 
and loosely-twisted portions, so as to make 
ever, be stationary and the groove beformed 
them of the same size as the main portions of 
only in the edge of the portion that projects 
the thread, brushing the thread after it is sub 
jected to the cutters for the purpose of remov 
between the cutters. 
The machine may be provided with any 
ing the shives and portions of fiber that have 
suitable means for holding the spools of thread 
been cut loose by the cutters, but which may 
and moving the thread past the cutters. I 
still be clinging to the thread. 
have shown the machine provided with spool 
My invention further consists in giving to 
supports 19, upon which the spools of thread 
the thread a rolling motion while it is being 
to be treated are placed. A 
A suitable friction 
subjected to the action of the brushes, there 
device 21 prevents the spool from turning too 
by causing the loose material to be brushed 
fast. After the thread passes the cutters it 
off from the thread instead of being brushed 
is wound upon a suitable spool 23, and this 
along on the thread. 
spool may be the means of drawing the thread 
My invention further consists in the con 
from the other spool and causing it to travel 
Struction and combination hereinafter de 
past the cutters. As here shown, the spool 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
23 is mounted on a shaft 25, that is driven by 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
a belt 27 from the shaft 3. Any suitable de 
vice may be used to properly distribute the 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is an end 
thread over the spools. A brush 29 is prefer 
elevation of one form of mechanism that I 
ably mounted on a shaft 31 and located in 
have designed for carrying out my improved 
the path of the thread after it passes the cut 
process. Fig. 2 is a detail plan of the cutters 
ters. The brush is driven by any suitable 
shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse ver 
means. I have here shown it driven by a 
tical section on line acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a 
belt 33 from the shaft 3. Suitable guides 35 
plan of a portion of a machine shown in Fig. 
are also arranged so as to properly guide the 
1. Fig. 5 is a detail end elevation, and Fig. 
thread to the cutters and to the brush. The 
6 is a detail section, of another mechanism for 
thread is preferably guided so as to pass at 
carrying out the same process. Fig. 7 is a de 
an angle, across the edge of the brush, as 
tail end elevation, and Fig. 8 is a detail sec 
shown in Fig. 1, thereby giving to the thread 
tion, showing a modified arrangement of the 
a rolling or twisting motion while it is being 
cutters and modified construction of cutters. 
subjected to the action of the brush. 
Figs. 9 and 10 are details showing another 
Instead of using the disk-shaped cutters, I 
construction and arrangement of cutters. 
may use cutters of other forms. In Figs. 5 
Figs. I and 12 are details of another form of 
and 6 I have shown vibrating cutters 4 and 6, 
cutters. 
secured upon a lever 30 and arranged to be 
In the drawings, 2 represents the frame of 
operated by an eccentric 32 and link 34. In 
the machine, which may be of any suitable 
Figs. 7 and 8 I have shown rotating cutters 4 
form and construction. 
and 6, each provided with a series of radial 
In the form of apparatus shown in Figs. 1 
cutting-blades 36. 
In Figs. 9 and 10 I have 
and 4 I have shown a pair of rotating cutters 
shown reciprocating cutters 4 and 6, having 
arranged to act on each thread. These cut 
their ends connected to links 37 and oper 
ters are mounted on a shaft 3, that is mounted 
ated by an eccentric 39 and connecting-rod 41. 
in suitable bearings in the frame of the ma 
In Figs. 11 and 12 I have shown rotary cut 
chine and is driven by any suitable means. 
ters having inclined cutting-teeth 45 on their 
I preferably arrange a series of pairs of cut 
edges. 
In connection with the cutters shown 
ters in each in a chain and drive all of the 
in Figs. 5 to 12 I prefer to use a stationary 
shafts 3 before a common counter-shaft 5, 
guide-plate 13, having a groove 15 in its up 
that is mounted in the frame 2 and provided 
per edge along which the thread 
1 passes. 
with a series of pulleys 7, from which belts or 
While I have shown these various forms of 
bands 9 extend to pulleys 11 on the shafts 3. 
cutters, I do not wish to be understood as lim 
The cutters 4 and 6 are mounted on the shaft 
iting myself to the use of the forms shown, as 
3. The cutter 4 is preferably fixed on the 
it will be obvious that many other forms of 
shaft by any suitable means, as the set-screw 
cutters may be used to secure the same re 
8, while the cutter 6 is fixed to turn with the 
sult. In all instances the cutters are prefer 
shaft, but is free to slide thereon. This cut 
ably beveled on the outside, so that their cut 
ter is preferably provided with a groove 10, 
ting-edges are close to the sides of the guide 
and a pin 12 on the shaft projects into this 
and gage plate, and they therefore cut close 
groove. A spring 14 engages a fixed collar 16 
to this plate on each side. 
on the shaft and bears on the top of the cut 
In carrying out my invention I pass the 
ter 6 and presses it toward the cutter 4. A 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II 5 
I 25 
EC 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 
477,285 
o 
75 
thread over the guide 13, which, as before 
stated, is preferably grooved and between 
the cutters. 
As the thread advances the cut 
ters shear close to the gage-plate and open 
all the spins or rings of fiber surrounding 
the thread. They also cut off all the project 
ing shives or pieces of woody fiber, and they 
reduce the thread to a uniform diameter. In 
case the main portion of any lump or projec 
tion is in a position where it would naturally 
pass between the cutters, it is found that there 
Will always be some small projecting fibers 
that will come into the plane of one or the 
other of the cutters and the thread will in 
variably turn toward this cutter, thereby 
bringing the entire lump into position to be 
sheared off by the cutter. Most of the lumps 
on the thread, however, are in the form of 
rings of fiber extending around the thread, 
and it is only necessary to cut open these 
rings for them to be afterward completely re 
moved. The cutters also reduce the swells 
or loosely-twisted and larger portions of the 
thread to uniform diameter with the other por 
tions, and asthese loosely-twisted portions usu 
ally alternate with portions that are twisted 
more closely than the average as soon as they 
are reduced by the cutters to the average di 
ameter of the thread the twists distribute them 
selves across the loosely - twisted portions, 
making both parts of the average twist. Af 
ter the thread leaves the cutters it is brought, 
preferably, in an inclined direction across one 
edge of the brush. This brush thus strikes 
the thread at an angle and gives it a slight 
rolling motion, thus enabling the brush to 
completely remove any of the particles of 
material that have been loosened by the cut 
teS. 
While I have described my invention as 
particularly applicable to linen thread made 
from tow stock, it will be understood that it 
may be used to advantage where there is oc 
casion for the removal of superfluous mate 
rial from any kind of thread. 
It will be seen that the cutter 6, as shown 
in Fig. 1, may be readily removed, and where 
it is desired to operate upon a thread of dif 
ferent size it is only necessary to remove one 
of the cutters and replace the guide disk or 
plate 13 by a similar plate of different thick 
ness. Then the removable cutter, being put 
back in place, will automatically adjust itself 
to the plate and the machine be again in con 
dition for operation. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
- 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters . 
Patent 
1. The combination, with the grooved guide 
and gage plate, of the cutters arranged upon 
opposite sides thereof and means for moving 
the thread or fiber along said grooved plate 
and between said cutters. 
2. The combination, with means for moving 
the thread, of the gage and guide plate and 
the cutters arranged to cut close to said guide 
plate on opposite sides thereof. 
3. The combination, with means for moving 
the thread, of the circular cutters and the 
grooved plate projecting between said cutters. 
4. The combination, with means for moving 
the thread, of the circular cutters, means for 
rotating said cutters, and the grooved disk 
projecting between said cutters. 
5. The combination, with the gage and guide 
plate, of the cutters and a spring-tension de 
vice for holding one of said cutters, substan 
tially as described. 
6. The combination, with the removable 
gage and guide plate 13, of the cutter 4, the 
removable cutter 6, said cutters being ar 
ranged on opposite sides of said guide-plate, 
and a tension device for holding said cutter 
6 in contact with said guide-plate, substan 
tially as described. 
7. The combination, with the guide and gage 
plate, of the cutters arranged on oppositesides 
thereof, means for moving the thread or fiber 
over said guide and between said cutters, and 
means for giving a rolling or turning motion 
to said thread or fiber. 
8. The combination, with the guide and gage 
plate, of the cutters arranged on opposite sides 
thereof, means for moving the thread or fiber 
over said guide and between said cutters, and 
the brush for engaging said thread after it. 
leaves said cutters. 
9. The combination, with the guide and gage 
plate, of the cutters arranged on opposite sides 
thereof, means for moving the thread or fiber 
over said guide and between said cutters, a 
rotating brush, and means for bringing the 
thread or fiber after it leaves the cutters in 
an inclined direction across the edge of said 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 1st day of July, 1891. 
brush. 
- 
- 
CHARLES LESLIE TRAVIS, 
In presence of 
A. C. PAUL, 
FRED S. LYON, 
95 
OO 
IO 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477385.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. SAGE, OF PLYMOUTH, MICHIGAN. 
SPRNG A R G UN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 477,385, dated June 21, 1892. 
Application filed April 23, 1891, Serial No. 390,196, (No model.) 
25 
V 
To all, Luhon, it inctly concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. SAGE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Plym 
outh, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Spring Air - Guns, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
improvements in spring air-guns; and it con 
sists in the peculiar construction of the load 
ing apparatus, whereby the projectile is car 
ried from the magazine-chamber to the true 
barrel of the gun and whereby the connec 
tion between the true barrel and magazine 
barrel does not interfere with the action of 
the compressed air in forcing the projectile. 
The invention further consists in the pecu 
liar construction of the spring-compressing 
mechanism, whereby the loading mechanism 
is actuated each time the spring is compressed, 
and, further, in the peculiar arrangement, 
construction, and combination of the various 
parts, as hereinafter described and shown. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of my improved gun, showing the spring 
compressing lever in its normal position. Fig. 
2 is a vertical central longitudinal section 
through the gun, showing the lever in the po 
sition when the spring is compressed. Fig. 3 
is a cross-section on line acac in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 
is an enlarged detail section of the loading 
mechanism, showing the parts in a different 
position from that shown in Fig. 2. 
A is the false barrel, and B is the stock, pref 
erably of Wood and made in one piece. 
C is the true barrel. 
D is the air-compressing chamber, and E is 
the spring-compressing chamber. 
F is a breech-block secured in the rear end 
of the spring-compressing chamber. G is the 
head thereof, against which the spring H is 
compressed. 
- 
I is the piston. 
J is a rod connected to the piston and hav 
ing formed at its rear end the hook", adapted 
to engage with the detent K, operated by the 
trigger K'. 
L is the spring-compressing lever, pivoted to 
the fore-arm of the barrel and having secured 
thereto alinkL',which extends into thespring 
o 
compressing chamber E in front of the hook. 
To compress the spring, the operator moves 
the lever (which is held normally parallelby 
means of the spring-catch M) to the position 
shown in Fig. 2, moving backward the cross 
head M' of the link L, which carries with it 
the piston and piston-head, and compressing 
the spring. As soon as the hook I is engaged 
with the detent K the lever is returned to its 
normal position. The operator, pulling on the 
trigger, releases the hook. The expansion of 
the spring causes the piston to compress the 
air in the air-compressing chamber and forge 
out the projectile, which has been seated in 
the tapering or conical seat N in the rear end 
of the barrel. 
The parts thus described I do not claim as 
my invention; but my invention is especially 
adapted to be applied to a gun of this, con 
struction, and consists of the magazine-cham 
ber a, arranged in the false barrel Aparallel 
with the true barrel and extending from the 
muzzle to a point located intermediate the 
ends of the true barrel, where it is connected 
by means of a transverse passageb, which is 
located some distance away from the breech 
or seat N of the true barrel. 
In the prior state of the art magazine-guns 
have been constructed in which the true bar 
rel and the magazine-barrel have been ar 
ranged side by side and having a connecting 
passage and means for transferring the pro 
jectile from the magazine to the true barrel; 
but in all such constructions the connecting 
passage has been arranged directly at the 
breech of the true barrel. Now in such con 
structions as the compressed air comes from 
the air-compressing chamber into the true bar 
rel a good deal of it will pass into the maga 
zine-chamber, because it has been found im 
possible to construct a closure for this con 
necting-passage which would prevent leakage, 
and thus the efficiency of the gun is greatly 
The connecting-passage b shown in my 
construction is located so far in advance of 
the seat N at the end of the true barrel that 
the force of the compressed air has largely 
been communicated to the projectile before 
it reaches the passageb, and it is therefore of 
little importance what kind of a closure is ar 
ranged for this passage or the magazine, so 
decreased. 
- 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
OC 
2 
477,885 
long as the projectiles are prevented from 
passing into the true barrel. 
In the drawings I have shown a transverse 
plug C slidingly secured in the passage b and 
normally closing the magazine and extending 
in proximity to the true barrel. This plug is 
held normally in the position shown in Fig. 1 
by means of the spring d. 
In order to make the operation of my gun 
as nearly automatic as possible, I have at 
tached to the plug c a U-shaped spring e, 
arranged in the path of the lever L, but of a 
size smaller than said lever, all so arranged 
that when the lever is in the position shown 
in Fig. 1 it will be tightly clasped by said 
Spring, as plainly shown in Fig. 3. 
To load the gun, the operator holds it in a 
vertical position, taking hold of the lever L. 
and turning it into the position shown in Fig. 
2. In withdrawing it from the spring-catch 
M the spring e will retain its hold on the le 
ver until the plug is withdrawn, as shown in 
Fig. 4, a sufficient distance to allow the bul 
let or other projectile to fall in front of it into 
the passage b. The further movement of the 
lever releases the spring e, owing to the ten 
sion of the spring d, which will return to its 
position and carry the projectile into the true 
barrel, down which it will run to the seat N, 
25 
35 
which is conical, and will hold the projectile 
in position until it is forced out by the com 
pressed air. It is thus seen that each time 
the spring is compressed a projectile will be 
fed from the magazine to the true barrel ready 
for the next shot. . 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a spring air-gun, the combination, with 
the air-compressing cylinder and means for 
compressing the air, of a true barrel having a 
seat for the projectile formed at its rear end 
adjacent to the cylinder, a magazine having 
communication with the true barrelata point 
in advance of the seat and between the seat 
and muzzle, and means for closing the Com 
munication, substantially as described. 
2. In a spring air-gun, the cofmbination of 
the true barrel, the magazine-chamber, con 
necting-passage b, the plug c, the actuating 
spring d, the spring-clamp e, and the Spring 
compressing lever L, adapted to be engaged 
by said clamp, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE W. SAGE. 
Witnesses: 
M. B. O'DoGHERTY, 
N. L. LINDOP. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477485.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
ATTACHMENT AND COUPLING FOR WATER CLOSETs, 
J. D., ABRAHAM, 
No. 477,485, 
Patented June 2l l892. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
d. 
c-fia,6 
As 
 
a 
2SysX, 2. 
S3 a SS 
y2 
agaaaaage 
2SS ySSSSSSS 
xN O. 
  
 
r a , TIANSK. 
C. 3. 
NVENTOR 
*tie Norris refers cd, photo-Litho, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. ABRAHAM, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
ATTACHMENT AND coupling FoR WATER-CLOSETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 477,485, dated June 21, 1892. 
Application filed January 2, 1892, Serial No. 416,848, (No model.) 
v 
So 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all lefton it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN D. ABRAHAM, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cin 
cinnati, in the county of Hamilton and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Attachments and Couplings 
for Water-Closets; and Idohereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to joints and coup 
lings, and has principal reference to connec 
tions made to water-closet bowls, but is equally 
adaptable for application to analogous devices 
where pipes are united to earthenware or fri 
able vessels into which vapor or liquid is led 
from a main supply. 
My invention consists in a novel way of 
uniting Sections of an elastic or yielding pipe, 
also in connecting such material to metallic 
or other rigid pipe, and in means by which the 
conjoined sections are adjustable to diverse 
distances, whereby the length of the conduit 
pipe and its connections may be regulated as 
required, all as hereinafter described, illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, and 
specifically pointed out in the claims. 
My invention is principally adapted for ap 
plication to connections with water-closet 
bowls, urinals, basins, and vessels made of 
earthenware or any friable material liable to 
be broken by strain or tension. The exten 
sion from members of such devices, herein 
called a horn,' is liable to be broken, and 
the whole structure is thereby rendered use 
less. However skilled the workman may be, 
it is well known that such accidents are fre 
quent while connections are being made be 
tween ordinary earthenware and metallic 
members or any portions composed of mate 
rials of diverse density or rigidity. Especially 
is this the case where rigid elbows are em 
ployed in combination with earthenware ves 
sels, and although the coupling may at first 
be apparently correct the slightest imperfec 
tion, either in workmanship or material, re 
sults subsequently in the defects pointed out, 
Buildings, especially new ones, frequently 
settle, whereby the normal lines of pipes and 
couplings are distorted and disarranged, caus 
ing rupture and leakage. My invention over 
comes these defects by provision of an exten 
sible elbow adjustable telescopically within 
bearings, as illustrated and described. 
I do not claim, broadly, an elastic elbow, as 
I am aware that it has been used before; but 
previous to my improved coupling devices it 
has been necessary to have the horn and 
other parts of the bowl, elbow, and pipe pe 
culiarly conformed. For each form now in 
use a separate construction is required My 
invention can, however, be applied to any 
style of bowls and basins in common use, is 
inexpensive, and easily adjusted by a novice 
or any person unskilled in the art to which it 
relates, and will be appreciated by mechanics 
employed in adjusting the devices to which 
it relates, and is not liable to get out of order, 
as is the case with the complicated devices 
now employed for similar purposes. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
wherein like letters of reference point out 
similar parts on each figure, Figure 1 repre 
sents a tubular elastic elbow, a section there 
of intermediate of its length provided with 
threads molded thereon and integral with the 
material of which the elbow is composed. Fig. 
2 is a detail view of a threaded sleeve adapted 
to intermesh with the threads on the elbow, 
having short smooth extension at one end, 
terminating with an overturned peripheral 
flange, also showing an interiorly-screw 
threaded nut at the flanged end of the sleeve. 
Fig. 3 represents portions of a closet-bowl 
with outwardly-extending horn and attached 
spud, having connected thereto an elastic 
elbow, showing the position of the several 
parts when coupled according to my inven 
tion. Fig. 4 is a detailed view of an elastic 
elbow provided with sleeve and nut for con 
necting to spud, the opposite end of the elbow 
being threaded for connection with supply 
pipe. Fig. 5 represents an elbow outwardly 
threaded at each end. Fig.6 represents an 
elastic elbow provided with threads tapering 
from apex to base. 
To fully illustrate the invention, portions of 
ws 
90 
95 
O 
15 
3o 
35 
45 
 
477,485 
5 
O 
the several figures are broken away and parts 
shown in section. 
A is an elbow made of rubber or any suit 
able yielding material; c, threads molded 
thereon and integral there with intermediate 
of its length. a' represents similar threads 
at its free end, for a purpose presently set 
forth. The outward dimensions of threads 
need not be of uniform size. For some pur 
poses they increase diametrically from apex 
to base spirally, as shown in Fig. 6, whereby 
as the sleeve is screwed thereon considerable 
compression will result and a tight joint be 
secured, thus increasing protection against 
leakage. The yielding threads may taper in 
the manner set forth at any degree of ob 
liquity; but no such divergence is necessary 
or contemplated in conformation of the rigid 
threads within the surrounding sleeve. This 
feature may be applied to the elbow at either 
end or at any point of its length. 
B is a bowl provided with outwardly-ex 
tending horn b of the usual form, having ad 
justed therein and outwardly reaching there 
from a threaded spud b', as common in analo 
gous devices; C, threaded tubular open-ended 
sleeve having short smooth extension c, fur 
nished with an outwardly-overturned periph 
eral flange c' D, nut having a smooth bore 
d, which freely turns upon the extension c of 
the sleeve C. The lower end of said nut is 
hollowed and is of greater diameter than the 
bored. The interior circumferential surface 
of this nut is screw-threaded, as shown at d", 
which thread in practice intermeshes with 
the screw-threaded spud b', as plainly shown 
in the drawings. The overturned upper end 
of this nut from the bored to its outward edge 
thus constitutes a flat circumferential plate or 
abutment d, which in practice takes against 
and overlies the flange c'. These two juxta 
posing members when the nut is screwed 
home on the spud b' will be interlocked and 
a complete coupling effected without risk of 
fracture or strain on any of the connections, 
the opposite end of the sleeve C surrounding 
the threaded section of the elastic elbow, as 
hereinbefore set forth. 
In Fig. 5 an elbow is shown with threads at 
each end, whereby it may be permanently 
connected to a rigid pipe at either end by at 
tachment thereon of a threaded sleeve C. In 
said figure a short section of metal pipe is 
represented at the upper end of the elbow in 
serted within extension of the sleeve screwed 
onto the threaded end of elbow. Such pipe 
can be permanently connected to the sleeve 
by soldering, riveting, or in any suitable man 
mer. The opposite end of the elbow shown in 
Fig. 5 is illustrated without any sleeve or 
other attachments. 
Fig. 3 illustrates a closet-bowl having an 
elastic elbow connected thereto according to 
my invention. It will be seen that the educ 
tion end of said elbow extends lengthwise 
within the horn, whereby it will discharge 
direct into the bowl, and there will be no risk 
of leakage at any joint or member of the 
coupling. I deem this an important feature 
of my invention. 
In all devices of analogous character the 
end of the elbow terminates at the spud and 
does not enter the horn, whereby the Smallest 
tension, blow, or pressure is liable to make a 
fissure, and leakage will consequently occur. 
By insertion of a length of the discharge end 
of the elbow within the horn, as shown, if 
from any cause it should move, no such ob 
jectionable result will follow. The portion 
within the horn is not cemented or otherwise 
rigidly connected thereto. It is, as before set 
forth, composed of elastic material and Will 
yield to strain or pressure either laterally or 
vertically. Moreover, said discharge end lies 
loosely within the horn, and any motion im 
parted to said end will not be transmitted to 
the horn. 
Experience has demonstrated that the de 
scribed location of the eduction end of the 
elbow is an improvement that will be appre 
ciated by all interested in the device illus 
trated, as it overcomes mischief and serious 
defects for which a remedy has long been 
sought. 
From the foregoing description, in connec 
tion with the drawings, the nature and object 
of my invention and its practice and Opera 
tion will be readily understood by all skilled 
in the art to which it is allied. 
IIaving thus fully described my invention 
and the manner of its operation, what I claim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the 
United States of America, is 
1. The within-described elastic elbow, hav 
ing molded thereon and integral therewith 
threads a, and threaded sleeves C with short 
smooth extension c and peripheral outwardly 
inclined flange c', in combination with nut D, 
having upper smooth apertured and hollowed 
lower portion of increased diameter interiorly 
screw-threaded, said threaded end adapted to 
intermesh with threaded spud connected to 
the horn of a closet-bowl, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. An elastic elbow having outward threads 
molded upon and integral with the material 
of which the elbow is composed, said threads 
increasing in diameter spirally from apex to 
base, in combination with a metallic sleeve in 
teriorly threaded, said threads being of uni 
form diameter the full length of said sleeve, 
substantially as described. 
3. In water-closet attachments, an elastic 
elbow coupled at one end to flush-pipe by in 
sertion of their juxtaposing ends within tubu 
lar sleeve T, adjustable telescopically therein 
at required distances apart, the outflow end 
of the elbow being inserted within horn of the 
bowl and adapted to be moved thereinto any 
point of their respective lengths, in combina 
tion with flanged sleeve surrounding the el 
bow end and interiorly-threaded nut, the up 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
IOO 
IEC) 
II5 
I 25 
477,485 
- 
3 
per end of which nut surrounds the flange of 
In testimony that I claim the invention 
said sleeve, its threaded portion being screwed above set forth I affix my signature in pres 
home upon spud b', whereby the several mem- ence of two witnesses. 
bers are permanently connected and protected 
5 by elastic covered joints that will yield to 
pressure and strain from any direction, sub- 
stantially as described. 
JOHN D. ABRAHAM. 
SAML. C. BAILEY, 
FREDK. SARGRO, Jr. 
-... 
. 
-- 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477585.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 477,585. 
Patented June 21, 1892. 
W. J. WILSON. 
MACHINE FOR CUTTING GLASS PLATES, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
-Z2a zve reo 7 
-6. 6 
62/202a2 6% 
th. Noah's PTERs co, Proto-Itto, Ashkgro, c. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
W. J. WILSON, 
MACHINE FOR OUTTING GLASS PLATES, 
No. 477,585. 
Patented June 2l l892. 
(Z72 esses 
64%-, 
 
(No Model.) 
W. J. WILSON. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING CLASS PLATES 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 477,585, 
Patented June 21, 1892. 
W7722 esser 
Z7a zvezzeo 72 
46 4ozzeeger 
aw 76 
He oars Peters co, photo-Tho, WASHINGToN, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
W. J. WILSON. 
MACHINE FOR. CUTTING GLASS PLATES. 
No. 477,585, 
Patented June 21 l892, 
NN N NN 
s 
s 
  
SNS 
 
 
 
E 
To 
6/6%r 
Zever zor 
%2. 
62zzo 7-ze e2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM JOHN WILSON, OF WAT FORD, ENGLAN D. 
MACHINE FOR CUTTING GLASS PLATEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 477,585, dated June 21, 1892. 
Application filed December 23, 1891, Serial No. 415,951, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM JOHN WILSON, 
chemist, of 6 Malden Road, Watford, in the 
county of Herts, England, have invented a 
new and useful Machine for Cutting Glass 
Plates, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
My invention has for its object the cutting 
of glass plates by machinery, (particularly 
photographic plates which have been coated 
with sensitive emulsion,) whereby the opera 
tion of dividing the plates after they have 
been coated into smaller plates of any of the 
various standard sizes sold is performed with 
greater rapidity and precision than can be 
done by hand, as hitherto. 
The invention consists, essentially, of mech 
anism whereby the plates are held and pre 
sented in succession, and in proper position 
to the cutting tool or tools, which are me 
chanically applied to and removed from the 
plate at the proper times and wherein the 
cutting is effected by a relative motion of the 
plate and cutter, produced either by the move 
ment of the cutter over the plate or by the 
movement of the plate past the cutter, as will 
be hereinafter more fully described. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
wherein 
Figures 1 to 6 illustrate a machine adapted 
to cut each plate into four by two cross-cuts 
at right angles to one another, Figs. 1 and 1 
being, respectively, side elevations of the up 
per and lower portions of the machine, and 
Fig.2 a part plan of the machine, while the 
other figures show details drawn to a larger 
scale, Fig. 3 being a vertical section taken on 
line 11, Fig. 2, and on line 22, Fig. 4, illus 
trating one of the cutter-operating mechan 
isms, Fig. 4 being an end elevation of the 
same, Fig. 5 being an elevation of one of the 
plate-holders in position beneath the cutter 
operating mechanism shown in Fig. 3, and 
Fig. 6 being a detail plan of its gripper-oper 
ating mechanism. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
Salme parts in all the figures. 
In this machine the glass plates to be cut 
are carried by an intermittently-rotating ta 
ble, by which they are presented in succession 
to the action of the cutter, which is traversed 
across the plate while the latter is at rest, 
each plate, if it is to be cut across in two di 
rections at right angles to one another, being 
presented to the action of two cutters in suc 
cession, the plate being brought by the par 
tial revolution of its carrier-table in the in 
terval between the action of the first and sec 
ond cutters to the proper position for the di 
rection of the second cut. 
A is the carrier-table fixed on a vertical 
shaft A' and receiving intermittent rotary, 
motion through successive portions of a revo 
lution with intervening periods of rest. 
B'B' B B are the frames of the four plate 
holders carried by table A. They are all alike 
and are similarly operated, each comprising 
four jaws b, by which the four edges of the 
plate Z are gripped. Three plates are shown 
in position in Fig. 2, one of which has been 
just placed in its holder B', another of which 
(contained in holder B) is about to receive 
its first cut, (indicated by the dotted line 2".) 
and the third of which (contained in holder 
B8) is about to receive its second cut (indi 
cated by dotted line 2') at right angles to the 
cut 2', which was made at the previous stroke 
of the machine. The holder l is vacant, the 
plate having been removed therefrom after 
having been cut, as described. 
C C are the two cutters receiving recipro 
cating motion on parallel lines, both being 
mounted on a horizontally-sliding bar C in 
position to operate on the plates which for 
the time being occupy the positions B and 
B in Fig. 2, the plate in passing from the one 
position to the other being carried by the ro 
tation of table A in the direction of the arrow 
through an arc of ninety degrees, so that al 
though the cutters work on parallel lines 
their cuts will be at right angles to one an 
other on the plate, as denoted by the lines 2' 
2. 
It will thus be seen that at the next quar 
ter-revolution of the table A the plate in 
holder B' will be brought into position to be 
cut by cutter C, while the plate in holder B' 
will be brought into position to be cut by cut 
ter C, and the plate in B will be brought into 
position to be removed, the vacant holder B' 
being at same time brought into position to 
receive a fresh plate, and so on continuously. 
Having explained the general operation of 
the machine, I will now describe it in detail, 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 
OO 
477,585 
5 
O 
(5 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
The table-shaft A' is driven by a ratchet 
propelment from a crank-pin A', said propel 
inent consisting of a ratchet-disk Cl, keyed on 
A', a lever-arm a', carrying a spring-pressed 
pawl Cl, engaging with C, the arm Cl? being 
loose on A and connected by rod C with 
crank-pin A, which is carried by tooth-wheel 
D, gearing with a pinion on the driving-shaft 
E. The table A is held stationary during the 
action of the cutters by a notched disk F, 
keyed on shaft A, whose notches f corre 
spond to the several plate-holders and in One 
of which engages a rib g on a locking-lever 
G, pivoted at g' to the frame and actuated by 
a cam G' on the shaft d of wheel D through 
a leverg and rod g, the locking-lever G be 
ing engaged with disk F by a spring g and 
disengaged by the cam G'. In order that the 
table shall not overrun the pawl a as it ap 
proaches its position of rest, a brake ct is pro 
vided, the said brake gripping a pulley on the 
shaft, so as to prevent it from rotating too 
freely. 
Each plate-holder comprises four gripper 
jaws b, carried by slide-blocks b', working in 
radial slots b of the plate-holder frame and 
connected by links b with arms upon a cen 
tral axis h, the links to having rows of holes, 
through any one of which the joint-pins l' 
may be passed to adapt the jaws to plates of 
different sizes. 
Referring to Fig. 6, it will be seen that the 
links l) of two opposite jaws are connected to 
the opposite ends of a lever l', fast on the ver 
tical axis h, while the other two links are 
connected to the ends of a lever h, loose on 
said axis, but connected to h' through the 
medium of pins and of springs h", which are 
fixed to the boss of h and bearing against 
said pins l', fixed to l', the object of this ar 
rangement being to equalize the pressure of 
all four gripping-jaws, which are simultane 
ously operated in the one direction by a spring 
h', attached to a fixed point of table A and to 
an arm h, fast on axis h, and operated in the 
other direction by a stationary cam-plate II, 
against which bears a friction-roller carried 
by the arm h. h is a stop for the lever h. 
This camplate II is a disk of the form shown 
in Fig. 2, . So as to allow the springs h to 
cause the jaws to grip the plate Z when the 
plate-holder is in the position of B and B, 
the cam-plate acting on the arms I of the 
holders in the other two positions B B', so 
as to force the jaws outward to release the 
plate which has been cut and permit the in 
Sertion of a fresh one. The acting part of 
each gripper-jaw which comes in contact with 
the edge of the plate is formed of two rollers 
b, (preferably ivory,) and the part of the jaw 
on which rests the coated face of the plate 
(which is placed face downward) is formed of 
a strip of steel b, fixed to the slide-block D' 
and inclined, as shown in Fig. 5, so that only 
the extreme edges of the plate rest upon these 
Supports b. 
The cutters C'C' are both carried by bar 
C, and being similarly operated it will be suf 
ficient to describe the operation of C, which 
is shown in Figs. 3 and 4. The cutter is a dia 
mond mounted in a holder adjustably pivoted 
to the end of a lever c, fixed on a rock-shaft c. 
pivoted between centers in a bracket-arm c, 
To the shaft c' is 
fixed to the slide-bar C. 
fixed another arm c, opposite to c, to which is 
connected a spring c", whose tension is regul 
lated by a nut and screw c for adjusting the 
pressure of the diamond on the glass plate: 
To the lever c} is also connected a thrust-rod 
i, which terminates in a friction-roller i' and 
is acted on near the opposite ends of the 
stroke of the cutter by stationary cams I and 
I?. The thrust-rod isguided in its vertical no 
tion by a radius-linki, jointed to it and pivoted 
at 3 to the bracket-arm c, said link having a 
tail-piece i, adapted to engage with a catch-le. 
veri, pivoted at to the bracket cand pressed 
by a spring jinto engagement With ', as 
shown. The cams II* are carried by a sta 
tionary bar I, forming part of the frame and 
indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 3, and to this 
bar is also fixed a bracket J, carrying a tap 
peti, against which the tail end of the catch 
iever, strikes, as shown in Fig. 3, just before 
the diamond-cutter carrier reaches the ex 
tremity of its return stroke. Thus the con 
tinued motion of the carrier toward the left 
in Fig. 3 causes the catch i to release the cut 
ter mechanism, which during said return 
stroke has been held out of operative posi 
tion. On the commencement of the forward 
stroke the roller i' runs on the straight part 
of cam I, which prevents the cutter coming 
down on the plate; but on the roller reaching 
the inclined part of the cam the cutter comes 
slowly down upon the upper surface of the 
plate, the parts being so adjusted that the 
cutting action shall begin at a short distance 
from the edge of the plate, so as to avoid the 
cutter catching the edge of the plate and 
splintering it. By the traverse of the cuttel' 
mechanism toward the right of Fig. 3 during 
this forward stroke the thrust-rod comes be 
neath the other cam I, by which the diamond 
is lifted off the plate just before it reaches 
the extreme edge of the plate. This cam I 
is set rather lower than the cam I, SO as to 
allow the catch-lever i to engage the tail-piece 
5 and hold the cutter in its raised position 
during the return motion of the cutting mech 
anism toward the left of Fig. 3. The other 
cutter C" being similarly operated and the 
parts being indicated by the same reference 
letters, the same description applies. The bar 
C is mounted to run between pairs of grooved 
guide-rollers k, mounted in brackets On the 
frame, and it receives reciprocating motion 
through a link l, lever L, and link n, from a 
crank-pin M on a disk M', keyed on the shaft 
d. It must, however, be understood that al 
though the arrangement above described is 
preferred my invention is not limited there 
to, and that the relative rectilineal motion of 
the plates and of the cutters might, although 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
II5 
I 25 
477,585 
less conveniently, be produced by making the 
cutters stationary and imparting to the ro 
tary plate-holder table and its appurtenances, 
and also to the cams and tappets for put 
ting the cutters in and out of operation, a 
rectilineal to-and-fromotion of translation in 
the direction of the motion above described 
in respect of the cutters, such alteration in 
the Working of the machine involving no 
change of principle, but only structural alter 
ations, which need no special description. 
It will also be understood that, if desired, 
each cutter mechanism might have two or 
more cutter-levers c, placed at proper dis 
tance apart on shaft c', the two cutters acting 
simultaneously and making parallel cuts at 
equal distances from each other and from the 
edges of the plate Z, which would in that 
case be divided into nine parts, or into six 
parts if only one of the cutter mechanisms 
has two cutters. It will also be understood 
that the second cutter C* may be put out of 
action if it is desired to cut the plates in one 
direction only. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. A machine for cutting glass plates, 
wherein the plates are held and presented in 
succession to one or more cutters mechani 
cally applied to and removed from the plates 
at the proper times and wherein the cutting 
is effected in two directions at right angles to 
one another by a relative motion of the plate 
and cutter produced either by the movement 
of the cutter or of the plate, substantially as 
herein specified. 
2. In a machine for cutting glass plates in 
two directions at right angles to one another, 
the combination, with an intermittently-ro 
tating series of plate-holders, of cutter mech 
anisms receiving reciprocating rectilinear mo 
tion, and mechanism whereby the cutters are 
- 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
brought during their motion in one direction 
(and during the period of rest of the plate 
holders) into operative contact with the plates 
and during their motion in the other direc 
tion out of contact with the plates, as de 
scribed. 
3. In the herein-described machine for cut 
ting glass plates in two directions at right an 
gles, the combination, with the rotating plate 
holders B'B'B'B', of the locking mechanism, 
consisting of the notched disk F on the plate 
holder shaft A, the lugg, and lever G, and 
the cam G', actuating said lever G at the 
proper times for holding the plate-holders 
stationary during the cutting operation, as 
specified. 
4. In the herein-described machine for cut 
ting glass plates in two directions at right an 
gles, the plate-holders, each consisting of a 
set of radially-movable gripper-jaws operated 
from a common center by a spring h", and a 
stationary cam H, about which the holder re 
volves, as and for the purpose specified. 
5. In the herein-described machine for cut 
ting glass plates, the combination, with the 
reciprocating cutter bar or carriage C, and 
with mechanism consisting of the spring-act 
uated cutter-lever c and its catch mechanism, 
of the stationary cams I' I, and tappetti for 
putting the cutter into operative contact with 
the plate during its forwardstroke and out of 
contact therewith during its return stroke, 
substantially as described. 
: The foregoing specification of my machine 
for cutting glass plates signed by me this 2d 
day of December, 1891. 
WILLIAM JOHN WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
T. N. KENNARD, 
JOSEPH LAKE, 
53 Chancery Lane, London, Clerk. 
17 Gracechurch Street, London, Notary's 
Clerk. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477686.txt	(No Model.) 
A. J. MOXHAM, 
SWITCH PIECE FOR RAILROAD TRACKS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 477,686, 
Patented June 28, 1892, 
 
 
w 
WITNESSES: 
Z/373.a4 ( ) 
INVENTOR 
By a 42-226 
w 
- 
the NoRRS PErers cc. Photo-LTC. WASH3TC):N. C. c. 
TTORNEY 
(No Model.) 
A. J. MOXHAM, 
SWITCH PIECE FOR RAILROAD TRACKS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 477,686, 
Patented June 28, 1892, 
WITNESSES 
 
-14 22. 
P42-22-6 
a 
p 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR J. MOXHAM, OF JOHNSTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SWITCH-PIECE FOR RAILROAD-TRAcks. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 477,686, dated June 28, 1892, 
Application filed September 22, 1891, Serial No. 406,488 (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR J. MOXHAM, of 
Johnstown, in the county of Cambria and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Switch-Piece for Railroad-Tracks, which 
invention is fully set forth and illustrated in 
the following specification and accompanying 
drawings. 
The object of this invention is to make a 
SWitch-piece having the parts of which it is 
composed welded together. 
The invention will first be described in 
detail, and then particularly set forth in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
shows the switch-piece in plan. Figs. 2 and 
3 are views in plan of the two rails forming 
the switch-piece, showing their appearance 
before being united, as hereinafter described. 
Fig. 4 shows the complete switch-piece in side 
elevation. Fig. 5 is a cross-section taken 
through Fig. 1 at the line a. a. Fig. 6 is a 
View similar to Fig. 5, showing the parts be 
fore being united, as hereinafter described. 
Fig. 7 is a cross-section taken through Fig. 1 
at the line ee. Fig. 8 is a view similar to Fig. 
7, showing the parts before being united, as 
hereinafter described. Fig. 9 shows in cross 
Section, enlarged, one of the rails composing 
the Switch-piece with its supporting-chair sep 
arate therefrom. Fig. 10 is a view in plan 
showing the double-web chair or support, 
marked B in Fig. 8, detached. Fig.11 is a 
view in plan showing the single-web chair or 
Support, marked A in Fig. 6, detached. Fig. 
12 is a bottom plan of the switch-piece, the 
Supporting-chairs for the rail being omitted. 
Fig. 13 shows in plan a modified form of 
switch-piece. Figs. 14, 15, and 16 are views 
in plan of the pieces of rail forming the 
switch-piece illustrated in Fig. 13, showing 
their appearance before being united, as here 
in after described. Fig. 17 is a side elevation 
of Fig. 13. 
In said figures the several parts are respect 
ively indicated by reference-letters, as follows: 
Referring first to Figs, 1 to 12, inclusive, 
the letters R. Eindicate the two rails compos 
ing the switch-piece; H, their heads; G, the 
super-elevated guards; W, their webs, and 
f, the grooves formed between the heads and 
guards. The rail R, as shown in Fig. 2, has 
a portion of its head h cut away between the 
pointsii to a level with the floor of the groove 
f. Its guard portion G is bent or offset, as 
shown at the point g, and opposite said bend 
a portion of the head H is also cut away, as 
shown. The other rail E is curved, as shown 
in Fig. 3, and has its guard portion G cut 
away to a level with the floor of the groove f 
between the points le k', and from the point 
k' to the end h of the rail said guard and a 
portion of the floor of the groove fare cut 
away, tapering the floor to the end h. Said 
end his bent, as shown in said figure, the dot 
ted linesh' indicating the end of the rail be 
fore being so bent. By cutting and bending 
the rails, as above described, a clear and level 
floor for the operation of the movable tongue 
T is provided, when the rails are united and 
also suitable abutting surfaces for such union. 
When the rails have been formed in the man 
ner above described, the bent end h of the 
rail E is abutted to the rail R at the point d, 
and the two rails are then welded together at 
this point by any suitable method, process, 
means, or act of welding. A chock F, of any 
suitable form, is then inserted in the diverg 
ent ends of the two rails and said rails tied 
together by means of the bolts in, passing 
through their webs and through said chock. 
(See Figs. 1 and 12.) Said chock is provided 
with a hole p, which acts as a bearing for the 
pin of movable tongue T. Said chock may 
be omitted, if desired; but by its presence a 
convenient bearing for the pin of the tongue 
Tis provided. The letter cindicates upraised 
corrugations or ribson the tongue T, which are 
continued on the chock F. Stiffening-strips 
may be inserted, as shown in FigS. 1 and 12, 
between the rails ER, and welded to either or 
both of said rails. If desired, however, said 
strips may be omitted. The upper portion of 
the switch-piece is now a complete structure 
in itself, with the exception of the movable 
tongue T. A supporting-chair A, Figs. 4, 5, and 
6, is then welded to the web of the switch . 
piece at the single end, Fig. 1, Figs. 5 and 6 
showing, respectively, the appearance of the 
parts after and before welding, the letter a 
indicating the point of the weld. A portion 
of the upper surface of said chair is cut away, 
95 
ICO 
25 
35 
45 
 
477,686 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
suitable method or process-such as rolling, 
as shown at , and the points of welding are 
forging, casting, or otherwise-provided they 
at the points b b only, thereby avoiding the 
are adapted to be welded to the Web of the 
welding together of long surfaces. If desired, 
rail. The bulbs or beads shown on the rails 
instead of cutting away part of the chair's a 
portion of the web of the rail might be re-l 
and chairs at the points Ob may be omitted, 
if desired; but their presence contributes to 
moved instead. I do not herein cialim said 
an easier and more perfect Weld. I do not 
feature, but reserve the same as the subject 
herein claim such bulbs or beads, reserving 
of another application for Letters Patent. At 
the same as the subject of another applical 
the divergent end of the switch-piece, at the 
right-hand side of Fig.1, a double-web chair 
tion for Letters Patent. 
It is obvious that the invention hereinde 
IB is welded to the webs of the rails ER, as 
scribed is applicable to either a plain Switch 
clearly shown in Figs. 7 and S, the latter fig 
or to a switch having a movable tongue. 
ure showing the rails and chair before being 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
welded and the former after welding, the let 
ter C' indicating the point of the weld. The 
tion, I claim 
1. A railroad switch-piece having its coll 
tWO WebS of said chair are welded to the two 
ponent parts formed of two or more rails 
corresponding webs of the rails R. E., thus 
welded together at a common point of union. 
making two welds. In the case, however, of 
2. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
the chair A, used at the other end of the 
welded together and to a connecting-piece at 
switch-piece, the single web of the chair is 
their divergent ends. 
welded to the single web of the rail R, and, if 
3. A railroad switch-piece provided with 
prolonged, as shown in Fig. 11, the web of the 
transverse stiffening - pieces between the 
rear end of the chair is welded to the webs of 
switch-rails thereof welded to one or both of 
the rails R E at the junction of the same at 
the point (d. The chairs having been attached, 
said rails. 
4. A railroad switch-piece formed of three 
as above described, the switch-piece is com 
rails welded together to form a common point 
plete, and the tongue T may be then put in 
place for use. 
of juncture. 
5. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
Referring now to Figs. 13 to 17, inclusive, 
welded together and provided with stiffening 
which show a modified construction, the let 
pieces between said rails welded to one or 
ters L, M N indicate three pieces of rail com 
posing the switch-piece; H, their heads; G, 
both of said rails. 
6. A railroad - switch piece composed of 
their super-elevated guards; W, their webs, 
girder-rail pieces having the Web of one of the 
and f the grooves formed between the heads 
and guards. The rail L, as shown in Fig. 14, 
rail-pieces bent over at one end at or near a 
right angle for making a short abutting con 
has a portion of its head H and floor f cut 
tact at said point with another rail-piece. 
away between the points l l. The rail M 
7. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails, 
is curved, as shown in Fig. 16 and has its 
head and guard cut away between the points 
the web at the end of one of said rails being 
bent over and welded to form a short Weld at 
m m. When the rails have been so formed, 
their ends u, u' are welded by a butt-weld to 
said point to another rail. 
S. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
the end u of the rail N, (shown detached 
welded together at their point of juncture, 
in Fig. lis,) or either one of said rails may be 
one of said rails extending beyond said junct 
welded to the rail N. Said rails L. M. in ad 
ure, and a support welded to said rail beyond 
dition to being welded to the rail N may also 
be Welded together at their contiguous por 
the point of juncture. 
9. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
tions, if desired. Chairs or supports A'B', 
welded together, one of said rails extending 
similar in form to the chairs AB, shown in 
beyond their point of juncture, and a single: 
Figs. 1 to 12, are welded at each end to the 
switch-piece. 
webbed chair or support welded to said rail 
By the invention herein described a light, 
beyond said juncture. 
strong, and durable switch-piece is provided 
10. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
welded together, one of said rails extending 
ready to be secured through the medium of 
beyond the point of juncture, and a single 
its chairs integral there with, directly to cross 
ties set deeply, below the surface, thus mak 
webbed chair or support welded to said rail 
ing a SWitch-piece suitable for securing in 
beyond said juncture and to the Webs at Said 
track with deep-webbed girder-rails, such as 
juncture. 
11. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
it is desirable to use for street-railroads. 
The rails shown in the drawings are known 
welded together and a support welded to each 
to the trade as girder guard-rails; but I do 
of said rails at their divergent ends. 
not confine myself to the use of any particular 
12. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
welded together and a double-webbed chair 
form of rail in the construction of the switch 
piece, as any suitable shape of rail having the 
or support welded to said rails at their di 
Web or girder form may be used. The chairs 
vergent ends. 
also may be varied in form without departing 
13. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
from this invention, and may be made by any welded together, one of said rails extending 
- 
75 
95 
OO 
IId 
II5 
I 25 
477,686 
3 
ure, and a double-webbed chair or support 
welded to said rails at their divergent ends. 
16. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
welded together, one of said rails extending 
beyond their point of juncture, a single 
webbed support or chair welded to said rail 
beyond said juncture and to the rails at their 
point of juncture, and a double-webbed chair 
or support welded to said rails at their di 
vergent ends. 
ARTHUR J. MOXHAM. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT S. MURPHY, 
A. J. BRYAN. 
beyond their point of juncture, a support or 
chair welded to said rail beyond said junct 
tlre, and a support or supports welded to said 
rails at their divergent ends. 
14. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
Welded together, one of said rails extending 
beyond their point of juncture, a single 
webbed support or chair welded to said rail 
beyond said juncture and to the rails at their 
juncture, and supports or chairs welded to 
said rails at their divergent ends. 
15. A railroad switch-piece formed of rails 
Welded together, one of said rails extending 
beyond their point of juncture, a support or 
chair welded to said rail beyond said junct 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477786.txt	E. L. SMITH & G, C, H, FOSTER 
S00KET FOR INCANDESCENT LAMPS, 
(No Model.) 
No. 477,786, 
Zez 7. 
Patented June 28, 1892. 
 
 
e-A7 
 
 
 
 
SS 
WITNESSES: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EVELYN L. SMITH AND GEORGE C. H. FOSTER, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTI 
CUT, ASSIGNORS TO THE CROWN ELECTRIC MANUFACTURING COMPANY, 
OF SAME PLACE. 
- 
SocKET FOR INCANDESCENT LAMPs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 477,786, dated June 28, 1892. 
Application filed September 7, 1891, Serial No. 405,006, (No model.) 
25 nated by the claims. 
20 independent axial rotation. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, EVELYN L. SMITH and 
GEORGE C. H. FOSTER, both citizens of the 
United States, residing at Bridgeport, in the 
5 county of Fairfield and State of Connecticut, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Sockets for Incandescent 
Lamps; and we do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
Io of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in sockets for incandes 
I5 cent lamps, and has for its objects to simplify 
and cheapen the construction of such devices, 
to reduce to a minimum the resistance which 
the device itself offers to the electric current, 
and to secure the socket-screw as against any 
With these ends in view our invention con 
sists in the details of construction and com 
bination of elements such as will be herein 
after fully set forth, and specifically desig 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of our improvement; Fig. 2, 
a section at the line ac ac of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a 
section taken at a right angle to the section 
3o shown at Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a section similar to 
Fig. 3, but showing the socket-screw, upper 
contact - spring, and securing-nut discon 
nected, the lower spring-terminal and the 
stem and parts carried thereby being omitted; 
35 and Fig. 5 a section at the line / y of Fig. 3. 
Similar numbers denote like parts in the sev 
eral figures. 
12 are the upper and lower insulating 
disks, respectively. 
34 are the upper and lower terminals, se 
cured to the disks 1 2, respectively, and to 
which are secured the conducting-wires in 
the usual manner. 
5 is a yoke secured to the disk 2 by screws 
45 6 and extending through openings 8 in the 
disk 1, the bridge 7 of said yoke being coun 
tersunk within the disk 1, so that the latter 
is rigidly held as against rotary movement. 
9 is a slot in said bridge, and 10 is the socket 
5o screw, which is cut away, as shown at Fig. 5, 
- 
- 
65 
so as to fit snugly within said slot, whereby 
said screw can have no independent axial ro 
tation. 
11 is the upper contact-spring, secured di 
rectly to the bottom of the screw 10 by the 55 
nut 12, the latter also serving to secure the 
Screw in position, as shown at Fig. 3. 
13 is the lower contact-spring, secured to 
the binding-post 4. 
14 is a stem journaled within the yoke 5, 6 
and 15 a suitable key rigid with said stem, 
whereby the latter may be conveniently ma 
nipulated. On this stem are secured the 
Switch-cam 16 and rectangular controlling 
block 17. 
18 is a flat spring secured to the disk 2 and 
bearing against the block 17, the function of 
said spring being (as is usual in such in 
stances) to prevent the overthrow of the stem 
at the end of each quarter-revolution thereof. to 
The switch-cam 16 comprises a skeleton 
frame 19, Secured to a body 20, which latter 
is rigid on the stem 14. This frame is made 
from thin highly-tempered metal and by its 
resiliency affords a contact with the springs 75 
ll 13 far superior to the contact between a 
Solid cam and Springs. The yoke 5 is not in 
the electrical circuit, the body 20 being made 
from any non-conducting material, and the 
Current flows directly from the lower contact 
spring to the socket-screw, to which latter the 
upper contact-spring is secured. In the ma 
jority of devices of this character the yoke 
(or "pillars, as termed) is in the circuit, and 
for this reason the resistance offered by the 85 
Socket itself to the electro-motive force is so 
great that the light is materially lessened 
thereby. In our improvement the yoke is not 
in circuit, but the current flows directly from 
the lower terminal to the socket-screw with. 
out any deviation, and to these facts we at- 9 
tribute the superior results effected by our 
improvement. Again, in all prior devices of 
this description the socket-screw has caused 
a most yexatious trouble, owing to the fact 95 
that it has been imperfectly secured. It is 
absolutely necessary that said screw should 
have no independent axial rotation, and by 
utilizing a yoke in our improvement, as herd. 
in before set forth, We are enabled to secure roo 
O 
this screw firmly and immovably within the 
bridge of said yoke. 
cured together and to said disk, substantially 
as shown and described. 
3. The combination of the upper insulat 
ing - disk having openings therein, as de 
scribed, theyoke extending through said open 
ings and having a bridge which is counter 
sunk within said disk, the socket-screw ex 
tending through said yoke and disk, and the 
nut on the lower end of said screw, whereby 
said disk is secured between said bridge and 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
We claim 
1. In a Socket for incandescent lamps, the 
combination of the upper and lower insulat 
ing-disks having secured thereto, respect 
ively, the usual terminals, the yoke to which 
said disks are secured, the Socket-screw Se 
cured to the bridge of said yoke, the contact 
springs secured, respectively, to said screw 
and the lower terminal, the rotatory stem jour- nut, substantially as shown and described. 
malled in said yoke, and the cam carried by . 
said stem, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the upper insulat 
ing-disk, the yoke-bridge having a slot there 
in, the socket-screwshank fitted closely with 
in said slot, the upper contact-spring, and the 
nut whereby said screw and spring are se 
EVELYN L. SMITH. 
GEORGE C. H. FOSTER. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
2. 
2. 
3. 
Witnesses: 
F. W. SMITH, Jr., 
J. S. FINCH, 
5 
O 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477887.txt	(No Model.) 
W. R. COLE, 
STAMP AND ENVELOPE GUM MOISTENER, 
No. 477,887. 
Patented June 28, 1892, 
727. / 
J27. 2 
 
 
 
WZZ/aesses. 
4%. A16%ravertfor: 
20-64l------ 
 
The Norris pereas co, Photo-urtho, wasHINGTON, D.C. 
' 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. COLE, OF POTTSVILLE, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
STAMP AND ENVELOPE GUM MoISTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 477,887, dated June 28, 1892. 
Application filed October 28, 1891, Serial No. 410,120, (No model.) 
. 
To all tshon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM R. COLE, of 
Pottsville, in the county of Schuylkill and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
Improvements in Machines for Moistening 
the Gum or Mucilage on Stamps, Envelopes, 
or other Gummed Paper, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention consists of certain improve 
ments in the moistening-pad and the ma 
chinery for its more convenient adjustment, 
in connection with a stationary cup, whereby 
a strip of porous material-such as felt or 
cloth-may be readily secured and suspended 
over the moistening fluid, into which it may 
be directly immersed, as will be more readily 
described hereinafter. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal elevation of my 
improved stamp and envelope gum - moist 
ener, showing the same as it will appear from 
a side view ready for operation. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal elevation of the same, showing a 
front view. 
A is a supporting-stand having its base ex 
tended outward and terminating in a cup b 
and its upper part provided with an arma, 
which is perforated longitudinally, so as to 
form a collar for the plunger to pass easily up 
or down it, as required. 
B is a hollow cylindrical plunger having its 
head provided with a cap or hand piece D, 
and also provided with a narrow longitudi 
nal slot on one side, and terminating at the 
bottom in a flat plate E, projected slightly 
beyond, but on a line with the cylindrical 
part of the plunger. A screw-eye is pierced 
in the center, of this plate. 
C represents a movable plate exactly the 
size of the stationary plate E, and also pierced 
with a screw-eye similar to that in the sta 
tionary plate. 
F is a screw, which acting upon the screw 
eyes of the plates draws them together, clasp 
ing and holding securely the pad of felt or 
-- 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
J. H. FISTER, 
FRANK LITTLE, 
other porous material G. The stationary 
plate E is made detachable from the cylinder 
of the plunger by means of screw-threads, so 
as to admit of a spiral spring being placed 
inside the cylinder. The projecting arm of 
the stand is further pierced with a horizontal 
screw-eye for the reception of the Screw e. 
When the plate is detached from the plunger 
and the spiral spring is placed in the cylin 
der, the cylinder is passed by its lower part 
through the collar-opening. The screwe is in 
serted in the eye and is of sufficient length to 
pass through it into the collar, forming a re 
sistant to the spring, which is made to rest upon 
it. The plate is then screwed on and the end of 
the screw, working freely in the perpendicu 
lar slot of the plunger, forms a guide for it 
and admits of the plunger being depressed by 
pressure on its head, and when the pressure 
is released rises again to its former position 
by the expansion of the spring. By thus de 
pressing the plunger the moistening-pad is 
plunged into the water and thoroughly Sat 
urated, and the pressure being released it is 
raised to a position above the cup ready for 
use. The gummed paper is then gently passed 
over the under projecting surface of the 
moistening-pad, and receives sufficient moist 
ure from the pad to soften the gum and pre 
pare it for immediate use. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
stamp and envelope gum moistener having a 
receptacle for moistening pads, adapted to be 
screwed into the lower end of a spring-plun 
ger and consisting of the shaft and plate E 
and the movable plate C, secured to each other 
by the screw F, in combination with the strip 
of felt or cloth G, attached to a plunger sus 
pended by an arm of a stand over a stationary 
water-cup, substantially as herein shown and 
described, and for the purposes set forth. 
S. 
WILLIAM R. COLE. 
Witnesses: 
- 
55 
75 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US477987.txt	(No Model.) 
A., BRAND ON. 
BAR, FIXTURE, 
No. 477,987, 
Patented June 28, 1892. 
R N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 
N yaye 
1. 
a2 
42 
a2 Z242 
a. 
 
 
WTWESSES 
4.4% 
-dryer() 
| 'NNs 
22 
 
The Norris Peters Co., PHOTO-Litho. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER BRANDON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BAR-FIXTURE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 477,987, dated June 28, 1892. 
Application filed March 17, 1892, 
Serial No. 425,317. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALEXANDER BRANDON, 
of New York city, in the county and State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Bar-Fixtures, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
bar-fixtures, and has for its object to provide 
receptacles adapted to contain sugar or other 
articles, the receptacles being two or more in 
number and connected in such a manner as 
to admit of their being jointly pivoted to the 
bar or other support. 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
vide receptacles adapted to contain, for in 
stance, one loaf Sugar and the other powdered 
sugar, said receptacles being oppositely ar 
ranged and connected with the bar or similar 
support by means of a single pivot-pin, and 
in such a manner as to enable a receptacle 
when not in use to be concealed beneath the 
bar, and also whereby either one may be easily 
brought outward in a position for use, the 
other in the meanwhile being concealed, and 
to provide a means whereby the receptacles 
may be provided with covers, and also to pro 
vide the receptacles with keepers for the ac 
commodation of spoons. 
Another object of the invention is to con 
struct receptacles of the character above de 
scribed in such a manner that they will be 
exceedingly economic and durable as well as 
convenient, and whereby the receptacles may 
be expeditiously and conveniently removed 
from their supports for the purpose of cleans 
ing them, and to so construct the attaching 
medium between the supports and the recep 
tacles that if one or if both of the receptacles 
should become broken they may be readily 
removed and perfect ones substituted. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
tacles and a portion of the supporting-frame 
of both, the other receptacle and a portion 
of the supporting-frame being in horizontal 
section. Fig. 2 is a vertical section through 
a portion of a bar and the attaching medium 
between the bar and the fixture, the fixture 
being partly in side elevation and partly in 
section; and Fig. 3 is a vertical section through 
a slightly-modified form of receptacle, the 
supporting-frame and pivot of said receptacle 
being in side elevation. 
The frame of the fixture preferably con 
sists of a central sleeve 10, from opposite 
sides of which arms 12 are made to radiate, 
and the upper faces of the arms are prefer 
ably straight or flat, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2. In order that the frame may be made as 
light as possible consistent with strength, 
openings 13 are formed therein at each side 
of the sleeve, which openings may partake of 
any design that fancy may dictate; but the 
outer edges of the arms are solid, with the 
exception that at one or two points therein 
apertures are formed for the passage of bolts 
14, and when the form of arms is employed 
shown in Fig. 2 each arm at or near its up 
per edge upon one side has a lug 15 pro 
duced thereon, for a purpose to be hereinafter 
described. 
The frame may be made with as many arms 
as may be found desirable; but ordinarily but 
two arms are employed. These arms are then 
adapted as supports for two receptacles A 
and B. These receptacles may be of any 
shape in cross-section and may be made from 
any material. Each receptacle, however, has 
formed integral with one side or attached 
thereto a vertically - disposed lug 16. The 
lugs of the receptacles are adapted for en 
gagement with the sides of the arms 12 at the 
outer ends thereof, and in placing the recep 
tacles upon the arms they are located ordi 
narily at opposite sides, as shown also in Fig. 
1. The lugs of the receptacles are provided 
with openings to receive the bolts 14, and 
after the bolts have been passed through the 
openings in the arms above referred to and 
the registering openings in the lugs 16 of the 
receptacles, locking-nuts 17 are screwed upon 
projecting ends of the bolts, which locking 
Figure 1 is a plan view of one of the recep- nuts are preferably of the winged type. 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
o 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
477,98? 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
- 
width of the arm. 
- 
Patent- 
In order that the entire weight of the re-receptacles are of a length equal only to the 
It is obvious that when a bar is provided 
with a fixture constructed as above described 
the receptacles may be completely hidden be 
neath the bar when not in use, and either one 
of them may be conveniently and expedi 
tiously brought out from beneath the bar 
within convenient reach of the party behind 
the bar, and, further, that each receptacle 
may be removed from the frame and thor 
oughly cleaned and replaced with but little 
trouble, and that while the device is exceed 
ingly durable it is also simple and economic 
and may be readily attached to any bar and 
constitute an ornament thereto. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
1. A bar-fixture comprising an attaching 
device for the under side of the bar, a bolt or 
rod depending therefrom, a frame turning 
upon the bolt or rod, and receptacles having 
vertically - extended flanges on their outer 
sides removably bolted to the outer verti 
cally-extending edges of the frame, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. A bar-fixture comprising a pivot-pin 
adapted for attachment to a bar or other sup 
port, a frame provided with a sleeve interme 
diate of its ends and adapted to turn upon the 
pivot-pin, the said frame being provided with 
outwardly-projecting feetatitslower portions, 
and receptacles removably attached to the 
frame and resting upon the feet thereof, the 
said receptacles being provided with lugs 
formed upon the lower portions thereof, as and 
for the purpose specified. 
3. A bar-fixture consisting of a pivot-pin 
adapted for attachment to a bar or other sup 
port, a frame having a sleeve intermediate of 
its ends and adapted to turn upon the pivot 
pin, which sleeve is removable from said pin, 
receptacles provided with exterior lugs, bolts 
removably connecting the lugs of the recep 
tacles with the frame at its extremities, and 
feet carried by the frame and engaging with 
the under Surface of the receptacles, as and 
for the purpose specified. 
4. A bar-fixture consisting of a pivot-pin 
adapted for secure attachment to a bar or 
other support, a frame having a sleeve inter 
mediate of its ends, adapted to receive the 
pivot-pin and removably held thereon, recep 
tacles provided with lugs, which lugs are re 
movably connected with the frame at its ends, 
feet projecting outward from the under por. 
tion of the frame at its ends and engaging 
With the lower portions of the receptacles, the 
Said receptacles being provided with remov 
able lids, and a keeper for the reception of a 
spoon, said keeper being exteriorly located, 
as and for the purpose specified. 
5. A bar-fixture consisting of a pivot-pin 
adapted for attachment to a bar or other sup 
port, a frame provided with a sleeve interme 
ceptacles A and B shall not be sustained by 
the bolts 14, each arm 12 at its lower end is 
provided with a foot 18, which extends suffi 
ciently beyond the ends of the arms to engage 
with and form a rest for the under Surfaces 
of the receptacles, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. 
Each receptacle is further provided with a 
cover 19. This cover may be capable of be 
ing lifted up from the receptacles, as shown 
in Fig. 3. In that case the cover is perfectly 
independent of the body of the receptacle; 
or, as shown in Fig. 2, the cover may be 
hinged to the arm 12, supporting the recep 
tacle which the cover is adapted to close; or 
the cover may be hinged to the body of the 
receptacle in any suitable or approved man 
ner. Ordinarily and preferably the hinge 
connection is effected between the frame and 
the covers of the receptacles by passing 
screws 20 through offsets 21, formed at the 
periphery of the covers, and into the lugs 15, 
produced upon the frame and above referred 
to. It is evident that when the hinged or piv 
oted covers are employed, when said covers are 
opened they will be carried back over the top 
of one of the arms, which arm will serve as a 
rest or support for the cover, thereby remov 
ing undue strain from the pivot of the cover. 
Each receptacle is also preferably provided 
upon its under face or bottom with a lug 22. 
This is to be grasped by the operator when one 
of the receptacles is to be carried out from be 
neath the counter for use. Each receptacle is 
also provided upon its outerface with a keeper 
23, preferably countersunk, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. This keeper is adapted as a support for 
a spoon 24 when the latter is not in use, and 
preferably the upper end of the handle of the 
spoon is curved, so as to pass over the keeper, 
as shown in Fig. 2. The frame of the fixture 
is to be pivotally attached to the under sur 
face of a bar D or other equivalent support, 
and this attachment is ordinarily effected 
through the medium of a plate 25, adapted to 
be screwed or otherwise secured to the sup 
port, which plate is provided with a hub 26, 
and the hub and body of the plate have 
formed therein a bore 27, the wall of which 
is threaded. A rod 28 is used in connection 
with the plate 25 and hub 26, and this rod at 
both extremities is threaded, its upper end 
being adapted to be screwed into the threaded 
bore 27 of the hub 26, and after the sleeve 10 
of the frame has received the body portion 
of the rod 28 a lock-nut 29 is screwed upon 
the lower extremity of the rod. Washers 30 
are also used, one being located between the 
upper end of the sleeve and the lower end of 
the hub and the other between the lower end 
of the sleeve and the lock-nut 29. When the 
lid 19 of a receptacle is to be lifted entirely 
therefrom, as shown in Fig. 3, the arms 12, 
supporting the receptacle, may be curved 
downward, so as to render them much nar 
rower, in which event the lugs 16 upon the 
o 
75 
95 
OC 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
i 
477,98? 
3 
diate of its ends, adapted to receive the pivot 
pin, receptacles provided with exterior lugs, 
locking-bolts removably connecting the lugs 
of the receptacles with the end portions of the 
frame, feet carried by the frame and support 
ing the lower portions of the receptacles, the 
upper portion of the frame being essentially 
straight, hinged covers adapted to slide over 
the receptacles and also over the straight up 
per portions of the frame, and keepers exte- Io 
riorly located upon the receptacles and adapt 
ed to receive and hold a spoon, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
ALEXANDER BRANDON. 
Witnesses: 
J. FRED. ACKER, 
EDGARTATE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478087.txt	(No Model.) 
E. M. BUTLER, 
CAR COUPLING, 
No. 478,087. 
Patented July 5, 1892. L 
 
2WZZAVASSAS 
67& 2-zee-e6 
Ma 
AFL 
ZWVAW'702 
Zeerzz.7%, a e? 
the Noras Perers co, Photo-ITHo, WASHINGTON, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN MILES BUTLER, OF VIRDEN, ILLINOIS. 
CAR-coupling. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,087, dated July 5, 1892. 
Application filed September 28, 1891, Serial No. 407,021, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, EDWIN MILESBUTLER, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Virden, in the county of Macoupin and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Car-Couplings; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
Companying drawings, which form a part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
automatic car-couplers, the object being to 
provide an improved construction of same, 
whereby superior advantages are obtained 
with respect to simplicity and economy in 
Construction and efficiency in operation. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of parts hereinaf 
ter fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a side elevation of portions of two 
Fig. 2 is a 
cars provided with my invention. 
plan view of the same. 
. My invention is adapted to be applied to 
cars now in use provided with the ordinary 
bumpers, thus obviating the necessity of re 
moving the same, although it can be employed 
with equal advantage to new cars without any 
bumpers. 
In the drawings I have shown the inven 
tion in connection with the old-style bump 
ers, and in said drawings the reference-nu 
meral 1 designates the cars, and 2 the bump 
ers thereof. 
The coupling devices are placed on each 
side of the bumpers, and as they are identi 
cal in construction a description of one will 
suffice for both. 
The numeral 3 denotes the coupling-head, 
secured to the car in any desirable manner 
and having bifurcated end consisting of the 
parallel arms 4, between which the coupling 
link passes and is located when the cars are 
coupled. This coupling-link is formed sub 
stantially like the ordinary link, except that 
it has a rearwardly-projecting rod 5, working 
in bearings 6, secured to the under side of the 
A coiled spring 7 embraces this rod, so 
Ca 
as to take up the shock in coupling and pre 
venting a dead-pull in starting. 
The coup- - 
ling-head may also be provided with a simi 
lar rod and spring, if desired, and the arms 
4 are provided with aligned holes to receive 
the coupling-pin 8, which has laterally-pro 
jecting arms or lugs 9, with headed ends 10. 
These arms work in vertical guides 12, Se 
cured to the coupling-pin, consisting of me 
tallic rods bent upon themselves at the cen 
ters and the ends attached to the coupling 
head at each side of the upper arm. Con 
nected with the coupling-pin is a cord or 
chain 13, which passes over a pulley 10 in an 
arm 14, secured to the car, and from thence 
said cord passes to a pulley 15, secured to 
the top of the car, where it is divided and 
passes, respectively, through pulleys 16 on 
each side of the car. 
The numeral 17 denotes a pin-holder, con 
sisting of a metallic bar or rod passing around 
and secured to the bumper and having one 
end bent upwardly and transversely and then 
horizontally outward, forming an arm 18, so 
as to lie between the guides near the upper 
ends thereof. As before stated, these coup 
ling devices are identical in construction; but 
they are arranged reversely to each other 
that is to say, the coupling-head on One car 
is so located as to engage with the link on the 
opposite car, as is clearly shown. 
The operation is as follows: Supposing the 
cars to be coupled, and it is desired to un 
couple the same, the cars are made to approach 
each other, when the bumpers 2 will strike 
each other, forcing them inwardly and caus 
ing the arms 18 to be carried back out of the 
path of the lateral arms of the coupling-pins. 
The latter can now be raised by means of the 
cords 13 and the cars uncoupled, and the 
pressure on the bumpers being relieved the 
arms 18 will spring forward and pass under 
said transverse arms and hold the pins at 
their elevated position. When the cars are 
to be again coupled, the links will enter be 
tween the bifurcated arms of the coupling 
head, and the bumpers coming together will 
force back the arms 18 and allow the pins to 
drop and couple the cars. 
From the above it will be seen that the 
cars automatically couple themselves, thus 
45 
 
55 
75 
So 
95 
CO 
2 
478,087 
O 
25 
rendering it unnecessary for a brakeman or same, of the vertical guides consisting of the 
other person to pass between the cars for that 
metallic rods or bars bent over upon them 
purpose. 
selves and their ends secured to the coupling 
Having thus described my invention, what 
head, the bumpers having the rods secured 
I claim is 
thereto with the ends bent upwardly and 
1. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
transversely and then horizontally outward, 
the coupling-head having a bifurcated end 
the coupling-pins having lateral headed lugs 
with aligned holes and the coupling-link, of 
or arms, and the operating-cords, substan 
the Vertical guides, the bumpers having pin 
tially as described. 
holding arms, the coupling-pin having lateral 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
lugs or arms, and the operating cords or 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
chains, substantially as described. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
2. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
the coupling-head having bifurcated end 
with aligned holes, the coupling-link having 
rearwardly-projecting rod, the bearings for 
said rod, and the coiled spring encircling the 
EDWIN MILES BUTLER. 
ALVA ROSS, 
HENRY M. GOTTHELF. 
Witnesses: 
w 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478187.txt	(No Model.) 
W. C. DAWIS. 
BICYCLE, 
No. 478,187, 
Patented July 5, 1892. 
 
 
Fig 62 
WFTNESSES 
c526.4% 
INVENTOR 
94. a. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WHITNEY C. DAVIS, OF WATERLOO, NEW YORK. 
BICYCLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,187, dated July 5, 1892. 
Application filed August 28, 1891, Serial No, 403,966, (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
of the machine. It will also be perceived that 
: Be it known that I, WHITNEY C. DAVIS, a 
by clamping the said springs in a more or less 
vertical position they will be comparatively 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Waterloo, in the county of Seneca and State 
stiff or not, as may be desirable or necessary, 
according to the weight of the rider. 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
These 
useful Improvements in Bicycles, of which 
springs constitute the principal characteris 
the following is a specification. 
tics of my invention. 
E is a yoke firmly clamping or connecting 
My invention relates to that class of vehi 
cles commonly known as bicycles. Iaim to 
the upper parts or portions of the springs D 
simplify the construction, to diminish the 
D to each other, thereby causing them to act 
number of Working joints, to prevent or di 
together and preventing or diminishing tor 
minish the tendency to rattle, to improve the 
sional movement or strain. 
spring action, and to render the spring-ten 
F is the mud-guard, and G is the brake-shoe. 
sion variable. These objects I accomplish by 
His the brake-rod. 
means substantially such as are hereinafter 
I secure the mud-guard to the yoke E in 
fully described, and shown in the accompany 
any suitable or well-known way. 
ing drawings, in which 
The brake-shoe has on it an eye e, which, 
Figure l is a side elevation of so much of 
when inserted into the forked or split end of 
a bicycle as need be shown in order to illus 
the brake-rod, enables me to joint the parts 
trate my invention. Fig. 2 is a front eleva 
to each other by means of bolts and nuts, 
tion of the parts shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
(not shown,) and I deem it preferable to split 
detail enlarged and showing the principal 
the lower end of the said rod, as shown ate', to 
produce a spring-tension for preventing rat 
features of construction embraced in my in 
vention. Fig. 4 is a section in the plane of 
tling and unnecessary Wear. I joint the inner 
the line acac of Fig. 3, viewed in the direction 
end of the brake to the yoke E in like man 
indicated by the arrow there shown; and Figs. 
ner; but these details of construction are not 
5 and 6 are details showing, mainly, the form 
essential to the main features of my invention. 
of the joints of the brake. 
It will now be perceived from the foregoing 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts. 
description and on reference to the drawings 
A represents the forward wheel, and a its 
that the head C constitutes a part of the frame 
of the bicycle and that the rods DD are ad 
justable on the axes of their convolutions, so 
B is the frame. 
as to be capable of being arranged in a more 
C is the head, to which the frame is pivoted 
or less vertical position, thereby altering their 
or swiveled, as usual, or in any Well-known or 
spring-tension according to the weight of the 
suitable manner. The head has lateral ex 
tensions b b, screw-headed on their ends to 
rider. 
receive nuts c c, and having collars or shoul 
Having thus described my invention, what 
ders c' c' thereon, as is clearly shown in Fig. 4. 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Washers did are arranged between the said 
Patent, is 
nuts and collars. 
l. The combination, with the frame and 
DD are spring-rods in volute or convolute 
wheels of a bicycle, of the separate or twin 
form at their upper ends, and the inner rolls 
spring-rods D D, convoluted at one end and 
or ends of these convolute parts are tightly 
there secured to the frame adjustably on the 
clamped to the extension bb by means of the 
axes of the said convolutions and also fas 
nutsc c. The lower ends of the said springs 
tened at their other ends to one of the wheel 
are applied to the wheel-axle. It will now be 
axles, substantially as and for the purposes 
perceived that the springs DD support the 
specified. 
head or stock C and also the frame, and, as 
2. The combination, in a bicycle, of the two 
separate independent or twin spring-rods D 
will be observed on reference to the drawings, 
the volutes of these springs are sufficiently D, secured at their lower ends to the steering 
apart or open to take off or diminish the jar wheel axle and having volute upper ends 
axle. 
- 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
75 
Sch 
90 
95 
OO 
478,187 
clamped adjustably on the axes of the said 
volutes to the steering-head, substantially as 
and for the purposes specified. 
3. In a bicycle, the springs D D, having 
volute ends clamped adjustably to lateral ex 
tensions on the head, and said springs being 
also secured to the axle, Substantially as and 
for the purposes specified. 
4. The combination, in a bicycle, of a head 
having lateral extensions b b, the volute 
spring-rods DD, having their volutes clamped 
adjustably to said extensions, the yoke E, con 
necting said rods near their upper ends, and 
the wheel-axle connecting the lower ends of 
the said rods, substantially as shown and de 
scribed, and for the purposes specified. 
O 
15 
5. The combination, in a bicycle, of a head 
having lateral extensions on its lower end, 
the volute springs attached to said head and 
to the axle, a yoke connecting said springs, 
the brake-rod or plunger, and the brake 
shoe jointed or hinged to said rod and to the 
said yoke, substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
Signed at Waterloo, in the county of Seneca, 
and State of New York, this 26th day of Au 
gust, A. D. 1891. 
WHITNEY C. DAWS. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS E. HOLLERAN, 
CHAS. D. BECKER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478287.txt	(No Model.) 
A. A. MINOR, 
WEHICLE HUB, 
Patented July 5, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED AUGUSTUS MINOR, OF EGG HARBOR, WISCONSIN. 
VEHICLE-HUB. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,287, dated July 5, 1892. 
Application filed November 16, 1891, Serial No, 412,078, (No model.) 
IO 
15 
2 ? 
25 
. 
5 
To all ?ph???, it ??? ???????r?: 
Be it known that I, ALFREDAUGUSTUS MI 
NOR, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Egg Harbor, in the county of Door and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Vehicle-Wheel 
Hubs; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in vehicle-hubs; and it 
relates more particularly to that class of ve 
hicle-hubs in which a series of frictional roll 
ers are arranged within the hub. 
The invention has for its object to render 
more efficient in operation this class of ve 
hicle-hubs. In this class of vehicle-hubs I 
am aware that it is common to arrange the 
friction-rollers within an axle-box which has 
been inserted within a hub. 
Myinvention has for its further object to 
provide an anti-friction vehicle-hub which 
may be used in connection with the vehicle 
axles that are in common use without necessi 
tating any change whatever in their construc 
tion. I dispense entirely with the axle-box 
heretofore used, arranging the rollers within 
the hub proper. The various parts are so 
arranged as to reduce to a minimum the fric 
tion, and to more effectually prevent the end 
wise movement of the rollers. 
I design this as an improvement on my anti 
friction hub for which I was granted Letters 
Patent, dated October 13, 1891, No. 461,033. 
In my improvement I use a hub and rollers 
constructed similarly to that shown in my 
former patent, except that Imake a change in 
the bearing-surface of the rollers. 
- 
To these ends and to such others as the in 
vention may pertain, the same consists in the 
peculiar construction and in the novel combi 
nation, arrangement, and adaptation of the 
parts, all as more fully hereinafter described, 
shown in the accompanying drawings, and 
specifically defined in the appended claim. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, like letters of reference 
indicating like parts throughout the several 
views, and in which drawings 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a vehicle 
hub constructed in accordance with my in 
vention, the same being shown as in place 
upon the axle and partially broken away 
in order to better illustrate the arrangement 
of the rollers. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudi 
nal view of the same in section. Fig. 3 is a 
detailed view in perspective of one of the anti 
friction plates which support the rollers. Fig. 
4 is also a detailed perspective of a second 
plate, which serves to protect the inner plate 
and rollers from shock of the hub. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A represents the body of the 
hub, which resembles in its exterior appear 
ance hubs as commonly constructed. 
The interior of the hub is provided with 
an annular chamberB, open at the end of the 
hub and of the same diameter throughout 
the entire length, excepting near the extreme 
ends, where it widens out to form two shoul 
ders fand i. The rollers Dare provided at 
points adjacent to their ends with enlarged 
portions D', and the several rollers are ar 
ranged around the interior of the chamberB, 
and together form a direct bearing-surface 
for the axle. The distance between the roll 
ers should be as slight as possible without 
being in actual contact. The body portion 
of each of the rollers is somewhat depressed, 
or of less diameter than the enlarged por 
tion D. 
C is a plate having the roller-supports c, 
which are short pins or rods, which are in 
serted into the holes d of the rollers D and 
form a journal-bearing for same. 
e e are holes through which rods EE pass, 
which serve to hold the rollers in place. The 
plate C bears against the shoulder f, thus pre 
venting any endwise movement of the rollers, 
and the second plate H, which rests against 
the shoulder h, is provided to protect the in 
ner plate against any shock of the hub. 
Plates H H are fastened together by rods l, 
which pass through the body of the hub. 
I have provided, for convenience, oil-holes 
K, which may be provided with any form of 
covers adapted to the purpose. 
V- 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
478,287 
an annular chamber enlarged at the ends to 
form two shoulders fand h, of plates having 
projecting pins on their inner surfaces adapt 
ed to form bearings for rollers, rods connect 
ing the said plates, longitudinal rollers piv 
oted on said projecting pins, the plates H. H., 
bearing against the shoulders h. h. and the 
outer surface of the plates C, and rods con 
necting said outer plates, all substantially as 
shown and described. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ALEFRIED AUGUSTUS MINOR. 
25 
Witnesses: 
T. W. McCULLOUGH, 
FRANK MCCULLOUGH. 
It will be seen that the rollers and plates C 
will turn independently of the rest of the 
hub, thus reducing to a minimum the friction 
between the parts, at the same time produc 
ing a vehicle-hub which shall be strong and 
durable. 
It is my purpose to manufacture, the body 
of the hub and the several parts of the same 
of metal, and I prefer the use of metal in this 
connection, though other material may be 
used, if preferred. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim to be new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
In a vehicle-hub, the combination, with the 
body of the hub provided on its interior with 
I. ? 
IS 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478387.txt	- 
G. W. WRIGHT, 
DOOR, SPRING 
. 
Patented July 5, 1892. 
. 
. 
. 
 
 
C. 
7% -3 
 
K2. 
42H12226 
I 
A 
(No Model.) 
No. 478,387, 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GRAN VILLE W. WRIGHT, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE SARGENT & COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
DOOR- SPRING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,38?, dated July 5, 1892. . 
Application filed January 6, 1892, Serial No, 417,144 (No model.) 
. . 
Io 
. 
. 
. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GRAN VILLEW.WRIGHT, 
of New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new 
Improvement in Door-Springs; and I do here 
by declare the following, when taken in con 
nection with accompanying drawings and the 
letters of reference marked thereon, to be a 
full, blear, and exact description of the same, 
and which said drawings constitute part of 
this specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a broken plan view of a door 
spring constructed in accordance with my in 
vention; Fig. 2, a view thereof in side eleva 
tion with the lever broken away; and Fig. 3, 
a view partly in side elevation and partly in 
section on line acac of Fig. 1 to show the stop 
key in one of its operative positions. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
door-springs, the object being to produce a 
device having simple, strong, effective, and 
conveniently-operated means for adjusting 
the tension of its spring. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in a device having certain details of con 
struction and combinations of parts, as will 
be hereinafter described, and recited in the 
claim. 
As herein shown, the box or case A, which 
may be of any desired construction, is fur 
nished with a foot or flange A' for securing 
it in place. 
A coiled spring located within 
the box is connected at its outer end there 
with, as shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings, and 
at its inner end with the spring-shaft C. This 
spring is reversible within the box or case to 
adapt the device to be used for doors swing 
ing in either direction. When reversed, its 
hooked outer end is engaged with the oppo 
site edge of the case, as shown by broken lines 
in the right-hand side of Fig. 1 of the draw 
ings. A clutch-collar ID, having a circular 
series of peripheral notches D' formed in it, 
is rigidly attached to a projecting end of the 
said spring-shaft. A lever E, loosely con 
nected with the said shaft by means of a 
screw F and at its inner end bearing upon 
the outer face of the collar D, is furnished 
with a double clutch G, hung on a depending 
stud G' and constructed with two correspond 
ing clutch-fingers g g, adapted to be entered 
- 
65 
into the retaining-notches D' of the collar D 
by-manually swinging the said clutch on its 
stud in one direction or the other, according 
to the way in which it is desired to rotate the 55 
collar and shaft, that depending on the way 
in which the spring is to be wound. I do 
not, however, limit myself to this particular 
construction of clutch for co-operation with 
the collar D, as other forms of clutches may 6o 
be used in its place. 
My present invention relates particularly 
to the stop-key H, employed for locking the 
clutch-collar D, and hence the shaft C, against 
rotation under the action of the spring B 
when in adjusting the tension of the spring 
the clutch G is uncoupled from the collar. 
The said stop-key H is mounted for limited 
axial rotation upon the adjacent face of the 
case in a horizontally-perforatedluga, formed 
thereupon, the inner end of the pin extend 
ing radially under the collar and being flat 
tened, as plainly shown by Fig. 3 of the draw 
ings, while its outer end projects beyond the 
periphery of the case and is flattened or 
otherwise constructed for convenient manual 
engagement. The key is prevented from end 
Wise movement by a pin h, extending trans 
versely through it and engaging with the in 
ner face of the lug, and by two longitudinal 
ribs h'h', located opposite each other, formed 
upon its outer end, and at their inner ends 
: engaging with the outer face of the said lug. 
These ribs limit the axial rotation of the key. 
Normally the key stands with the plane of its 
flattened inner end parallel with the plane of 
the collar. When, however, the key is rotated 
in either direction, one of its inner edges will 
be lifted, as indicated by Fig. 3 of the draw 
ings, into the path in which the collar rotates 
and into position to enter one of the notches 
D and obstruct the rotation of the clutch 
collar D, the key being turned in one direc 
tion or the other, according to the way in 
which the spring is wound. If, for instance, 
it is desired to wind the spring one of the fin 
gers g of the clutch G is manually thrown 
into one of the notches D' of the collar D. 
The lever is then moved to rotate the collar 
and Wind the spring as far as it is convenient 
to move the lever. The notch nearest the 
inner end of the key is then brought into 
95 
75 
25 
35 
45 
2 
478,88? 
case, a coiled spring, and a spring-shaft, of a 
alignment there with and the key turned by 
clutch-collar rigidly attached to one end of 
the other hand into one of its operative po 
the shaft and provided with a circular series 
sitions. The clutch G is now engaged with 
of peripheral notches, a lever loosely connect 
another notch in the collar and the same ro 
ed with the shaft and bearing upon the outer 
tated in the same direction again, the key 
face of the said collar, a clutch carried by the 
being automatically turned back to its nor 
lever for engagement with the notches of the 
mal position by the engagement with its flat 
said collar, and a stop-key mounted for lim 
upper face of the opposite wall of the same 
ited axial rotation upon the adjacent face of 
notch into which it was turned. 
the case and having its inner end extended 
The operation of the device will be the same radially under the collar and flattened and its 
for winding the spring in the opposite direc 
outer end constructed for manual engage 
tion, and also for letting down the spring 
ment, substantially as set forth, and whereby 
when wound in either direction. 
when the key is turned in either direction 
I would have it understood that I do not 
: one of the edges of its inner end will be lifted 
limit myself to the exact construction herein 
into the path in which the collar rotates. 
shown and described, but hold myself at lib 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
erty to make such changes, and alterations 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
therein as fairly fall within the spirit and 
ing witnesses. 
scope of my invention. 
Having fully described my invention, what I 
Witnesses: 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In a door-spring, the combination, with a 
GRAN WILLE W. W. REGIIT. 
WM. S. CoOKE, 
C. P. BEEBE. 
25 
35 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478488.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. WE THER ILL. 
WHITE LEAD CORRODING PIT, 
 
AT TORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HENRY WETHERILI, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WHITE-LEAD CORRODING - PIT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,488, dated July 5, 1892. 
Application filed March l, 1892, Serial No, 423,385, (No model.) 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM HENRY WETH- erected upon the walls C. 
To alZ whom it may concern: 
ERILL, of Philadelphia, in the county of Phila 
delphia and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented a new and Improved White-Lead Cor 
roding-Pit, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the annexed 
drawings, forming a part thereof, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical transverse section of 
my improved white-lead corroding-pit, taken 
on the line acac in Fig. 2; and Fig. 2 is a hori 
Zontal section taken on line if y in Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in both views. 
My invention is an improvement in that 
class of structures which are used for effect 
ing the corrosion of lead, and to this end are 
provided with side openings and a central 
vertical tube or chimney to facilitate the cir 
culation of air, upon which the rapidity of the 
corrosion in a great measure depends. 
In carrying out my invention I dig a pit A 
in the earth and provide a suitable floor B 
and line the pit with walls C of masonry. As 
the walls are carried up blocks of wood are 
laid with the masonry, which are afterward 
driven out, leaving the ventilating-holes a. a', 
and with these holes I connect pipes b, lead 
ing to the surface of the ground, one pipe to 
each set of ventilating-holes a a'. In the 
center of the pit Ierect a perforated ventilat 
ing-shaft D, which extends above the surface 
of the ground and above the top of the su 
O 
2 
25 
perstructure E. The said superstructure is 
The lead is placed in the pit in layers, alter 
nating with layers of wet fibrous material in 
the usual manner. As the corrosion proceeds 
heat is generated and a column of heated air 
is carried up the ventilating-shaft D, thus 
causing fresh air to enter through the pipes 
b, creating a rapid circulation through the 
layers of fibrous material between the layers 
of lead, thus hastening the process, 
A pit is superior to the wooden corroding 
house usually built above ground in point of 
strength, durability, and economy, as well as 
the conservation of heat. The tubes b are 
necessary parts or features of such pit, since 
they enable air to enter freely and prevent 
obstruction of the openings a, which would 
otherwise occur. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
The combination, with the pit-walls C, hav 
ing the ventilating-holes a a, of a series of 
pipes b, open at the top, embedded in the sur 
rounding earth, arranged around the Walls 
exteriorly, and leading upward from said 
holes, as shown and described, for the purpose 
specified. 
- 
WILLIAM HENRY WETHERIII. 
35 
40 
45 
55 
?? 
Witnesses: 
C. H. WATSON, 
J. A. DOWDE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478588.txt	(No Model.) 
E. R. G. A.L.E. 
ORE GRUSHER. 
No. 478,588, 
Patented July 12, l892. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
SSS SEZ. 
S-24 SN 
er 
 
f 
2c 
% 32sa: 
  
 
 
 
 
z 
eSs. EE EE 
as E. 
AN 2 
25 AI N 
N2 EE/WE 
12.. 
"S 
i. 
H 
 
 
 
5,7- 
Zarenzori 
22e 
the MORR's PETERS co, Phloro-LTHo, washington, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD R. GALE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ORE CRUSHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,588, dated July 12, 1892. 
Application filed December 12, 1891, Serial No. 414,786 (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it nually conce77. 
Be it known that I, EDWARD R. G-ALE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
provements in Ore-Crushers, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of my present invention is to 
provide means for preventing the rolls of ore 
crushers from heating; and to this end said 
invention consists in certain features of nov 
elty, that are particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which are 
made a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a 
view of an ore-crusher embodying my inven 
tion, Some of the parts being shown in plan and 
others in horizontal section on the line 1 1, 
Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is an elevation of said machine. 
A represents the frame of the machine; B 
B, the crushing-rolls; C C, the shafts to which 
they are secured; D D, the boxes in which the 
shafts are journaled, and E E the pulleys on 
Said shafts by which they are driven, prefer 
ably at different speeds. The rolls shown in 
the drawings are of conical shape, the angles 
of their working surfaces being such that they 
are in effect a pair of overlapping disks. 
I desire to have it understood that in its 
generic sense my invention is not limited to 
rolls of this or any other particular form. 
The term roll as used in this specifica 
tion is intended to comprehend any grinding 
or crushing device, whatever may be its con 
struction or position, which revolves while in 
operation. 
F is an extension of the frame, having at its 
outer end a two-part box f, in which is jour 
malled a reduced portion c of one of the shafts. 
A cylindrical block of rubber G, surrounding 
the shaft between the said box and a shoulder 
c', holds the rolls in working position and at 
the same time permits them to separate to re 
lieve chokes. The object of the reduced por 
tion c is to form a shoulder c, which comes 
against the Outer end of the frame extension 
F and limits the approach of the rolls. Each 
roll consists of a steel face-plate b, having an 
annular flangeb', which embraces the periph 
ery of a heavy disk B', which is fixed to the 
shaft C. The non-circular end C of the shaft 
fits a corresponding socket in the under side 
of the face-plate, so as to support the crown 
of said plate and at the same time prevent it 
from turning relatively to the shaft, this turn 
ing being further prevented by heavy bolts 
B, by which the face-plate and disk are bolted 
together. At intermediate points the face 
plate is supported by posts or struts b, which 
bear against the disk. 
It will be seen that the roll thus constructed 
has an internal chamber H, to which water or 
other cooling-fluid may be admitted through 
a bore I, formed longitudinally through the 
shaft C, and lateral openings i. The fluid ad 
mitted to the chamber escapes through open 
ings h, which are situated, preferably, near 
the periphery of the roll. In order to prevent 
the water escaping from these openings from 
being thrown off by centrifugal force and 
sprinkled over everything in the vicinity of 
the machine, I prefer to provide each of the 
openingsh. With a discharge-tube J, which pro 
jects through an annular opening in the side 
of an annular shield K, which catches the wa 
ter and delivers it to a pipe L, by which it 
may be carried to any desired place. Where 
Water is plentiful, it may be supplied by in 
Serting the end of a hose in the bore of the 
shaft C and the water passing through the 
pipe L. may go to waste; but where econ 
omy is necessary the same water may be used 
over and over again by catching it in a tank 
M, from which it can be drawn into the cham 
ber H by centrifugal force by simply connect 
ing the hollow shaft with the tank. This may 
be done by inserting in the end of the shaft 
the branch in of a pipe N, the lower end of 
Which communicates with the tank, while the 
upper end is provided with a funnel N' for a 
purpose that will appear presently. Two 
valves O and Pare placed in the pipe N-one 
above and the other below the branch m. 
In order to start the machine so as to cause 
a flow of Water upward through the pipe N, 
thence through branch n into bore I, thence 
through openings i into chamber H, thence 
through outlets h J into shield K, and thence 
through pipe L back to tankM, the rolls are put 
in revolution, the valve P closed, the valve O 
opened, and water poured into the funnel N' 
until the chamber His filled. The valve O is 
then closed and the valve Popened,after which 
the centrifugal force of the waterpassing from 
2Cd 
25 
45 
95 
OC 
w 
478,588 
centrifugal impulse imparted by the rotation 
of the roll draws the water from the tank into 
the roll and discharges it again, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. In an ore-crusher, the combination of a 
hollow roll having a water-outlet located some 
distance from its center, a tank located below 
the level of the roll, and an air-tight conduit 
connecting the tank with the interior of the 
roll, substantially as set forth. 
4. In an ore-crusher, the combination, with 
the roll and a hollow shaft opening inside 
thereof, of the tank M, the pipe N, having 
branch n, communicating with the bore of the 
shaft, and the valves O and P, located in said 
pipe above and below the branch n, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. In an ore-crusher, the combination of a 
hollow roll, a hollow shaft, said shaft and roll 
having internal communication, a tank situ 
ated at a lower level than said roll, a pipe 
communicating there with and with the bore 
of the shaft, an air-tight joint between said 
shaft and pipe, an outlet for water situated 
some distance from the center of the roll, 
an annular shield for catching water dis 
charged from said outlet, and a pipe for con 
veying the water from said shield back to the 
tank, substantially as set forth. 
EDWARD R. GAILE. 
35 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
N. C. GRIDLEY, 
L. M. HOPKINS. 
O 
20 
the center of motion of the roll will create 
sufficient suction to draw the water up through 
the pipe N and through the hollow shaft into 
the challmber, it being understood that the 
branch n and shaft Care packed so as to make 
a water-tight joint. 
Instead of a solid disk B', an open spider or 
straddle may be used, in which case the wa 
ter Will be thrown from the openings i, strike 
against the under side of the face-plate, and 
escape through the openings of the spider, the 
shield K being arranged to overlap the margin 
of the roll, if need be. 
If the roll is cylindrical, one or both of its 
ends may be left open save for a spider such 
as last described; or they may be closed by a 
disk, such as IB, having suitable discharge 
Openings, such as h, with or without the tubes 
J and shield K. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by TLetters Patent, is 
1. In an ore-crusher, the combination, with 
a hollow horizontal roll having a water-outlet, 
of a horizontal shaft having an internal con 
duit communicating with the interior of the 
roll, a water-supply pipe, and an air-tight slip 
joint between said pipe and shaft, permitting 
the latter to revolve, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an ore-crusher, the combination, with 
a hollow roll having a water-outlet located 
Some distance from its center and a water 
tank, of an air-tight conduit connecting the 
tank with the center of the roll, whereby the 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478688.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 478,688. 
W. S. CLARK, 
RANGE BOILER ATTACHMENT, 
Patented July 12, 1892. 
SS reis 
H. 
s 
WITNESSES : 
62%-2 
INVENTOR 
/4t 22/- 
44%. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. S. CLARK, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RANGE-BOLER ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,688, dated July 12, 1892. 
Application filed April 18, 1890, Serial No. 348,476. (No model.) 
------------a 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. S. CLARK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Range 
Boiler Attachments; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a sufficiently full, clear, 
and exact description thereof as to enable 
others skilled in the art to make and use the 
said invention. 
This invention relates to the hot-water ap 
pliances connected with culinary stoves and 
ranges, and has for its object the avoidance 
of annoyance of excessive temperature and 
steam generation in the boilers attached to 
ranges. 
It consists in a chamber, through which the 
hot water circulates from the water-back of a 
range or stove in its passage to the reservoir 
or boiler, and in this chamber an inclosed ves 
sel containing air and provided with an ex 
pansible diaphragm which is inflated when 
the air inclosed rises in temperature and again 
collapses when the temperature is reduced. 
Connected to this diaphragm and operated by 
it is a valve arranged to open a discharge ap 
erture or tube from the upper part of the 
boiler and permit hot water to escape when 
the temperature rises to an undesirable degree. 
The invention is shown in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which Figure 1 represents a 
range-boiler with this applian e connected 
thereto, and Fig. 2 a sectional view of the ap 
paratus for working the valve. 
A is the water-back of the stove; B, the 
boiler; C, a tube leading from the bottom of 
the Water-back to the bottom of the chamber 
D; E, a tube leading from the top of the cham 
ber D to the bottom of the boiler B; F, a tube 
leading from the side of the boiler B to the 
upper part of the water-back A. 
G is a copper bowl fitted and secured fluid 
tight in the chamber D; H, a diaphragm se 
cured fluid-tight to the mouth of said bowl by 
means of the flange J, having centrally at 
tached thereto a guide K and a yoke L, by 
means of which a valve-body M is secured to 
the vessel D. 
55 
N is a plunger resting against a diaphragm 
Hand having a stem with a regulating-screw 
bearing against the stem of the valve P in the 
valve-body M. A spiral spring Qin the valve 
body M serves to close the valve P upon its 
seat. A pipe R, leads from the top of the 
boiler B to the upper branch M' of the valve 
body M, and the waste-pipe S leads from the 
lower branch of the valve-body M. When 
the temperature of the air rises in the bowl 
G in consequence of the high temperature 
of the water in the vessel D, the air ex 
pands, acting on the diaphragm H and forc 
ing it outwardly and pressing the screw O 
against the valve-stem P and opening the 
valve, permitting an escape of hot water 6 
from the upper part of the boiler B through 
the pipe R, downwardly through the valve 
body M, and out through the waste-pipe S. 
The water so escaping is replaced by colder 
water from the pipe F, and the temperature 
then becoming reduced cools, the air in the 
bowl G, and the contraction of the air therein 
inclosed permits the diaphragm H to collapse, 
and the reaction of the spring Q and the 
pressure of the water on the valve P closes 
said valve until the temperature again rises 
sufficiently to again expand the air in the 
bowl Gand reopen it, thus venting or emptying 
the hot water from the boiler B and avoiding 
the formation of steam therein with the usual 
annoyance of the crackling sounds in the con 
nected pipes, due to the consequent condensa 
tion of steam therein, and protecting the con 
nected pipes from the hammering effect of 
water columns moved by the steam-pressure 
and the reaction from condensation thereof. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
The combination, with the boiler Band its 
connecting-tubes E, F, and R, of the water 
back A, the vessel D, the bowl G, the dia 
phragm H, the plunger N, and the connected 
valve P, all arranged substantially as shown 
and described, and for the purpose set forth. 
WILLIAM. S. CLARK. 
75 
Witnesses: 
J. DANIEL EBY, 
A. WAN WYCKBUDD, 
v 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478788.txt	W. L. DENIO, 
ELECTRICAL THERMOSTAT, 
Patented July 12, 1892, 
(No Model.) 
No. 478,788, 
 
 
28itvacoscy 
7%a. e 344 uc14 tot 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM L. DENIO, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
STANDARD ELECTRIC SIGNAL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRICAL THERMO STAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,788, dated July 12, 1892. 
Application filed December 8, 1891, Serial No. 44,370, (No model.) 
55 
ing material. When the outer thimble is 
thrown off, the shoulder gstrikes the conduct 
ing-spring f, presses it out, and momentarily 
breaks the circuit; but when the thimble is 
thrown off clear from the other thimble the 
spring f springs back and comes in contact 
With the inner thimble and re-establishes the 
circuit again. The break is only momentary. 
The sliding of the outer thimble over the in 
ner one cleans the surface of the latter, so 
that the contact of the spring is always cer 
tain. 
This thermostat is applicable to various 
uses, but specially to fire-alarm systems, and 
I have illustrated its application to one pur 
pose in my application for patent on elec 
tric signaling apparatus filed contemporane 
ously with this, in which the momentary 
break of the current by the thermostat sets 
in motion the signaling apparatus and the 
instantaneous re-establishment of the circuit 
renders the latter capable of receiving back a 
signal that the alarin has been sent into the 
fire department. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The thermostatherein described, consisting 
of the insulator a, the electrodes to b, the thim 
bles c c', attached to one of the electrodes 
and secured together by solder fusible at a 
given temperature, the spring d between the 
thimbles, which tends to throw the outer 
thimble off, the shoulder g on the outer thim 
ble, and the spring f, attached to an elec- 8o 
trode and bearing against the outer thimble, 
as shown and described, and for the purpose 
specified. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
75 
Witnesses: 
R. F. OSGOOD, 
P. A. COSTICH. 
W. L. DENIO. 
O 
To all whom it invaly CO7 cert: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM L. DENIO, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Electrical Ther 
mostats; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the draw 
ings accompanying this specification. 
My improvement relates to electric ther 
mostats designed to open and then close the 
circuit automatically by the fusing of the Sol 
der that holds the parts together, all as here 
in after described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of the thermostat located in an electric 
circuit. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical Sec 
tion of the Salme. 
a, indicates the body of the thermostat, Con 
sisting of a block of rubber or other insulat 
ing material. 
bly are the two electrodes, consisting of me 
tallic pieces attached to the insulator, simple 
screws being shown in the drawings. The 
wires h h, composing the circuit, are attached 
to these electrodes in any suitable manner, 
that shown being by means of the nuts that 
turn on the ends of the ScreWS. 
c is an inner thimble attached permanently 
to one of the electrodes, and can outer thim 
ble that slips loosely over the other and is se 
cured thereto by solder that Will fuse at a 
given temperature-say 180 Fahrenheit. A 
spring d is interposed between the thimble, 
which tends to throw the outer thimble off. 
In case of fire the solder is fused at the given 
temperature and the outer thimble is thrown 
off by the spring. 
f is a conducting-spring attached to the 
other electrode, its lower end bearing against 
the outer thimble c'. By this means the cir 
cuit is made from one wire to the other through 
the thermoStat. 
g is a shoulder formed on the outer thimble, 
preferably made of rubber or other insulat 
o 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478888.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 478,888, 
F. W. R. O.E. 
CALENDAR FOR WATCH CEIARMS. 
Patented July 12, 1892. 
a2 
 
  
 
  
  
se II. 
E. 
i 
4 5 
- a st 
es. 7 
8 9 oil 22 34. 
5678 E. 
222324252627-28 
293o 31 
-- WAZWASSAS 
2 <1, 62-2-2-26, 
-9e 4. (2. Zoeee-6- 
5th: 
anomes. 
44 
 
& 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FAYETTE WASHINGTON ROE, OF OMAHA, NEBRASKA. 
CALEN DAR FOR WATCH-CHARMs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,888, dated July 12, 1892. 
Application filed May 17, 1892, Serial No. 433,333, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FAYETTE WASHINGTON 
ROE, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Omaha, in the county of Douglas and State of 
Nebraska, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Calendars for Watch 
Charms; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to perpetual calendars 
for use on watch-charms; and it consists of 
certain novel features hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
Reference is had to the accompanying dra W 
ings, wherein the same parts are indicated by 
the same letters throughout the several views. 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
watch-charm in the form of an acorn, composed 
of two parts detachably or revolubly attached 
and adapted for use as a perpetual calendar. 
Fig.2 represents a central vertical section of 
the cup or cap of the same detached, and Fig. 
3 represents a central vertical section of the 
acorn detached. Fig. 4 represents another 
form of the device and illustrates One method 
of attaching the cap to the body of the acorn. 
Fig. 5 represents a perspective view of a cal 
endar in the form of a strawberry, composed 
of two revolubly-attached parts and adapted 
Fig. 6 rep 
for use as a perpetual calendar. 
resents an interior view of the cap or upper 
portion of the strawberry, looking upward, as 
in Fig. 5. Fig. 7 represents a side elevation, 
partly in section, of the strawberry and cap 
and illustrates another method of holding the 
cap against turning on the berry. Fig. 8 rep 
resents a side elevation, parts being broken 
away, of an acorn marked with the days of 
the month and a revoluble ring mounted there 
on, showing the days of the Week. Fig. 9 rep 
resents a perspective view of the revoluble 
ring detached, and Fig. 10 represents a dia 
grammatic view of the calendar as rolled out. 
The calendar consists, essentially, of two 
parts, the one bearing seven groups of figures 
corresponding to the similar week-days of each 
month and the other carrying the signs of the 
days of the week, these parts being free to re 
volve the one relative to the other. For con 
venience I prefer to put the signs of the days 
of the week on the cap or upper portion of the 
watch-charm and the days of the month on 
the lower or larger portion of the watch-charm. 
The device shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 con 
sists of an acorn having a cap A, adapted to 
revolve upon the body. B of the acorn. 
This 
body may be hollow, as shown in Figs. 2 and 
3, and thus may combine a locket with a watch 
charm and a calendar. 
In the device shown in Fig. 4 the upper por 
tion of the acorn B has a grooveb, into which 
the tongue a of the cap A is sprung. In order 
that the cap may be slipped on, so that the 
tongue may engage in the groove, the said cap 
is cut at one or more places a'. 
In the device shown in Figs. 5 and 6 the 
strawberry B' is represented as having a cap 
A", with seven leaves fitting snugly upon the 
surface of the strawberry and each leaf being 
marked with the sign of one of the days of 
the week. This cap is mounted revolubly 
upon the strawberry and the leaves are made 
of resilient metal, so as to grasp the strawberry 
closely and prevent the cap from slipping 
around by any ordinary or accidental press 
ure. In order to hold the cap more firmly on 
the strawberry, corrugations a may be pro 
vided on the under side of the leaves, as shown 
in Fig. 6, or the said under side may be rough 
ened in any convenient Way. A preferable 
method of preventing the cap from turning on 
the berry is shown in Fig. 7, where one of the 
leaves is provided with a projection a on the 
under side and the strawberryisprovided with 
an indentation adapted to receive this projec 
tion over each column of figures. This pro 
jection may be raised clear of the indentation 
with the finger-nail, a knife-blade, or in any 
other convenient Way and the cap revolved 
until the days of the week are in the proper 
position over the days of the month, when the 
said projection may be allowed to spring back 
into the corresponding indentation and the 
cap will be firmly locked. 
It will be seen that but one projection will 
be needed and that the leaves of the cap will 
cover the six indentations not in use, hiding 
them from sight and preventing them from 
becoming clogged with dust or other foreign 
matter. 
In Figs. 8 and 9 the strawberryisrepresented 
as integral with the cap and a ring B, bearing 
- 
O 
I5. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
478,888 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States, is 
A combined watch - charm and perpetual 
calendar formed of two parts, the one adapted 
to move relative to the other, the upper part 
provided with seven symbols corresponding 
to the days of the week and having a tongue 
or projection on the underside thereof adapted 
to engage the lower part and the said lower 
part provided with seven equidistant groups 
of figures corresponding to the days of the 
month in the order of weeks, with an indenta 
tion adapted to receive the said tongue or 
projection on the said upper part, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FAYETTE WASHINGTON ROE. 
Witnesses: 
D. D. WILLIAMS, 
EDW. J. DAVIS. 
25 
35 
O 
the days of the week, is slipped on over the 
point of the acorn. This ring may be held in 
position by friction; but I prefer a holding 
device similar to that shown in Fig. 7, and for 
this purpose I provide seven indentations b 
in the acorn, one at the head of each column 
of figures, and a number of prongs on the ring 
to cover said indentations, the said prongs 
also serving as a surface for the signs of the 
days of the week. On one of said prongs I 
provide a tonguel, adapted to engage in any 
one of said indentations, and thus to lock the 
ring at anyone of the Seven positions. It will 
be seen that this ring may be moved and set 
in a similar way to that described with refer 
ence to the device shown in Fig. 7. 
In Fig. 10 the calendar is rolled out and the 
upper portion B of the calendar is free to 
move along the upper edge of the lower por 
tion A of the calendar, and thus the days of 
the week may be changed relative to the cor 
responding days of the month. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US478988.txt	(No Model. 
) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1 
No. 478,988. 
 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING AND MARKING GARMENTS, . 
S. A. COOKE, 
Patented July 19, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 478,988. 
Patented July 19, 1892. 
S. A. COOKE. 
MACHINE FOR OUTTING AND MARKING GARMENTs. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MO 
s s It." 
f 
- 7-O-O-O-O-OO 
s 
s 
s 
al 
57 
Wizzees 62.S. RRRP-R-R-O-R-CRO 
M4. 822-267e 
salaxy love 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 478,988. 
S. A. COOKE, 
MACHINE FOR OUTTING AND MARKING GARMENTs. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented July 19, 1892, 
728- b 
72/ 
SN 
 NONE 
S. 
2>S2 
SSSSSSS A? 
-- 
. 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
. . 
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
15 is 
 
 
V S 7 
 
  
- 
 
 
 
 
 
St. 
 
S. A. COOKE, 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING AND MARKING GARMENTS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 478,988, 
Patented July 19, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
% A2 
525 
 
H. 
S. 
l 
HA H. 
  
 
222227aaZaaaaazzazzazzazza2222222a 
Wyly 
 
 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
% 
s 
thE. 
miR ZHZ 
% -2 
n 
2 
SNSSNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNYS 
THE NORRIs PETERs co, PHOTo-LTHo., WASHINGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SARAH ANNE COOKE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MACHINE FOR CUTTING AND MARKING GARMENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 478,988, dated July 19, 1892. 
Application filed October 28, 1891, Serial No. 410,146, (No model.) Patented in England November 4, 1887, No. 15,021, 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, SARAH ANNE COOKE, a 
subject of the Queen of England, residing at 
Chicago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Stamping and Cutting Ma 
chines for Garments and Patterns, which are 
fully set forth in the following specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part thereof. 
Certain parts of said invention have been 
patented to me in the Kingdom of Great Brit 
ain by Letters PatentNo. 15,021, dated Novem 
ber 4, 1887. 
The purpose of this invention is to provide 
a machine or appliance by means of which 
the several parts of garments or patterns for 
garments may be perforated, marked, or 
stamped preparatory to cutting, the machine 
being adjusted to produce the desired out 
lines of the several parts according to any Sys 
tem of measurements which the Operator may 
choose to follow. 
I have illustrated the invention as applied 
to dress-cutting according to a system of my 
own; but it is applicable to the cutting of all 
garments and by any system of measurement. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
of my invention in position for receiving the 
goods to be marked or cut. Fig. 2 is a front 
elevation of the same with the frame which 
has the cutting and marking blades upright, 
which is the position occupied when the op 
erator is adjusting the same. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation corresponding to Fig. 2, on a re 
duced scale. Fig. 4 is a side elevation Corre 
sponding to Fig. 1, also on a reduced scale. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional elevation of a swiveled 
device for supporting and adjusting the cut 
ting and marking blades, the bar in which it 
is adjustably secured being shown in trans 
verse section and a detail portion of the side 
bar of the frame being shown in side eleva 
tion. Fig.6 is a detailside elevation, on an en 
larged scale, of the immediate support for the 
cutting-blades detached from the remainder of 
the swiveled device shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a 
sectional detail showing a modified form of the 
said swiveled device adapted for use when the 
blades are to be adjusted from the upper Or 
operating side only, the frame-bar and part 
of the clamp which holds said device being 
shown in section transverse to the length of 
the bar and axially with respect to the swiv 
el-stem. Fig. 8 is a longitudinal section 
through one of the movable bars in which 
the swiveled blade - supports are adjusted, 
the section extending across the rigid side 
bar of the frame and showing in elevation 
the shaft and pinion thereon which is jour 
naled in said movable bar. 
Fig. 9 is a simi 
lar section of a portion at one end of one of 
said movable bars which is adapted to be 
adjusted obliquely, showing a telescoping ex 
tension, which has the bearing for the pin 
ion, with which it makes a ball-and-socket 
joint. Fig. 10 is a section at the line 10 10 
on Eig. 9. Fig. 11 is a section at the line 11 
11 on Fig. 8, showing the shaft and pinion in 
plan. Fig. 12 is a section at the line 12 12 
on Fig.11. Fig.13 is an elevation of the swiv 
eled blade-carrying device of the form which 
is shown in Fig. 5 modified for the purpose 
of carrying two blades side by side. Fig. 14 
is a detail side elevation of lapped portions 
of two blades, such as are represented in sec 
tion in Fig. 13. Fig. 15 is a detail elevation 
of a device for adjusting the position of a 
swiveled blade-guide when it is necessary to 
adjustably hold such blade at a point re 
moved from any bar, the bar to which such 
device is secured being shown in transverse 
section, as in Fig. 5. Fig.16 is a bottom plan, 
and Fig. 17 a side elevation of a stool which 
is adjustable on and removable from the sev 
eral bars and is designed to afford means for 
securing cloth or paper by pins or tacks at all 
necessary points. Fig. 18 is a side elevation 
of one of the blades shown as especially 
adapted for perforating or marking. Fig. 19 
is a sectional elevation of the swiveled blade 
holding device, such as is seen in Fig. 5, with 
a measuring-tape appended to its stem. Fig. 
20 is a sectional elevation of the device for 
forcing the material to be cut or marked onto 
the cutting or marking blades, section being 
made at the line 2020 on Fig. 3 through the 
axis of the roller which pertains to said de 
vice and through the frame in which it oper 
ates, the handle and middle portion of the 
entire device being broken away. Fig. 21 is 
a section at the line 21 21 on Fig. 20, the han 
dle being partly broken away, the middle por 
tion of the roller and its shaft and portions 
95 
do 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
W 
478,988 
o 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
intermediate the ends and the yoke being 
broken away to condense the figure. 
Fundamentally my invention consists in 
flexible blades with edges suitable for mark 
ing or for perforating or for cutting, as de 
sired, and supports for such blades by which 
they are held edgewise with their operating 
edges at the same plane, and a frame or base 
in which such supports are adjustable to vary 
the contour of the blades and adapted to be 
secured. The particular form of the supports 
and the construction of the frame by means 
of which they are made adjustably securable 
therein are preferred but not indispensable 
features; but from the description of the spe 
cific preferred form it will be obvious how the 
principle of my invention may be applied in 
other forms. 
A is a rigid rectangular frame, of which in 
the principal figures two are shown, which are 
rigidly united and are designed the one to 
contain the device for cutting or marking the 
front and side portions and the other to con 
tain the devices for cutting or marking the 
back portions of a dress. It will be under 
stood that these two are not necessarily united 
in one machine, and it will be necessary to 
describe only one of them and the parts which 
it contains, and I have applied the letters of 
reference to the one which I will describe-to 
wit, the larger of the two frames shown in 
the drawings, which contains the front and 
side cutting or marking appliances. This 
rigid frame A is preferably made of channel 
bar, with the open sides inward, and the two 
side bars A' A' each contain on the lower 
flange a rack (t. 
B, C, and E are transverse bars extending 
between the sides A' A' of the rigid frame 
and having extending longitudinally through 
them, respectively, shafts F, having journal 
bearings at the ends of the transverse bars, 
respectively, and having pinions IF F, rigid 
with them, at their opposite ends outside their 
bearings, said pinions being adapted to mesh 
with the racks a? in the side bars A' of the 
rigid frame. The pinions being equal and the 
racks being similar, it will be understood that 
if the transverse bar is first placed in the 
frame in position at right angles to the side 
bars A, with its pinions meshed with their 
corresponding racks, respectively, any move 
ment which such transverse bar may receive 
at either end tending to cause the pinion at 
that end to roll in the rack will be immedi 
ately communicated to the other end of the 
bar by the shaft F, causing the pinion at the 
opposite end to roll in engagement with its 
rack, and thereby carry its bearing and that 
end of the bar an equal distance. Thus all 
positions of the transverse bars which have 
these shafts F extending throughout their 
length and carrying rigid pinions must nec 
essarily be parallel, and in adjusting any such 
bar pressure may be applied at either end of 
it to push it the desired distance, and it is 
not necessary in order to keep the bar at 
right angles to the side bars of the frame to 
apply the pressure at both ends or at more 
than one point. 
For certain purposes in the system to which 
I have applied this machine the bar D, which 
corresponds to the waist measure, (the bar B 
corresponding to the chest measure, the bar 
C to bust measure, and the bar E to hip meas 
ure,) should be adjusted differently at oppo 
site ends, and its various positions are not, 
therefore, necessarily parallel with each other, 
and I therefore provide this bar with inde 
pendent pinions at its opposite ends-that is, 
pinions not rigid on the same shaft-and I 
mount said pinions by means of stud-axles f 
in bearing-pieces, which telescope a short dis 
tance in the ends of the bar ID, so that the 
pinions will remain in engagement with the 
racks at the opposite sides, respectively, of the 
frame when the bar D is shifted from direct 
transverse to oblique position to accommo 
date varying relations of front and side length 
measurements. The stud-axlesf make ball 
and-socket joints with their bearings, so that 
the pinions may remainin mesh with the racks, 
notwithstanding the varying obliquity of the 
bar D, and to retain said pinions in the racks 
the upper flange of the channel-bar which 
constitutes the side A' has a downwardly-pro 
jecting lip, preventing the withdrawal of the 
pinion which is introduced in the original as 
sembling of the machine at some point-be 
yond the normal range of the pinion on the 
side bar, where the lip at is cut away to ad 
mit the pinion. 
M. M. M., &c., are flexible metal blades, which 
are provided with the cutting, perforating, or 
marking edges by which the desired outlines 
of the pattern or garment are indicated or 
produced. These blades may be modified 
according to the use, whether cutting, perfo 
rating, or marking, although one form of 
edge may to a degree serve all three pur 
poses. 
A plain cutting-edge, such as is represented 
in the principal figures, if it be not sharp 
enough to cut, will mark a pattern, the usual 
device of interposing a carbon-sheet facing 
the goods to be marked being employed, and 
the serrated blade shown in Fig. 18 answers 
equally well for perforating if the serrations 
are acute, or for marking in clotted line if 
they are somewhat blunt or if less pressure 
is employed, or with sufficient pressure may 
serve for cutting certain classes of goods. 
The character of the edge of the blade in no 
way affects the mode of operation of the de 
vice, and one set of blades may be removed 
and another set with a different edge sub 
stituted, according to the work to be done. 
These metal strips are designed to be held 
at certain controlling-points or the lines of 
measurement of the figure, and by their flexi 
bility and elasticity to shape themselves in 
flowing curves or direct lines, as the circum 
stances may require, between such points, and 
thus outline the several parts of the gar 
75 
95 
IOO 
IC 
II5 
I 25 
478,988 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ment. If they are to be used for marking or 
for perforating patterns or stencils from which 
patterns are to be made, the controlling-points 
for these edges will be located so that the 
blades will correspond in position to the 
seam-lines; but if the strips are provided 
with cutting-edges their controlling-points 
will be located seam-widths outward from the 
seam-lines, respectively. The transverse 
bars B, C, D, and E being set in the rigid 
frame at positions corresponding to the chest 
line, bust-line, waist-line, and hip-line, as de 
termined by the measurements of the form 
to be fitted, the blades M M M must be set 
and fixed at proper points on these several 
bars in order that they may produce the 
proper outlines for the garment or pattern, 
and for this purpose I provide the blade-sup 
ports, which I will now describe. 
N is a short spindle of a disk N', from the 
upper side of which project two posts N and 
N. The spindle N passes through a longi 
tudinal slot in the transverse bars B, C, D, or 
E, while the disk N' rests above said bar. 
The space between the posts N and N is 
adapted to receive the blades M, and in some 
instances, when these blades slide by each 
other in a manner similar to telescoping, the 
space between the posts N and N is suffi 
cient to admit a double thickness of the 
blades M. Said blades are provided with a 
bead and furrow m m', and the posts N N 
are preferably provided, respectively, with a 
bead and groove in n, corresponding to said 
bead and furrow on the blade, and the en 
gagement of said bead and furrow with the 
bead and groove on the posts retains the blade 
in position, while permitting it to slide freely 
longitudinally. Any two consecutive blade 
supportspertaining to a particular blade being 
adjusted to their relative positions on their 
corresponding transverse bars, the blade Sup 
ported by them would naturally tend to fall 
in a directline between them, and the SWiveled 
post would adjust itself on its swivel-axis to 
that line; but if a third guide for the strip, 
when properly adjusted on its bar, is out of 
that line the blade will naturally assume a 
curved position through the three points and 
each swivel will adjust itself on its axis with 
the two posts N and Nin the radius of curva 
ture of said curve at the point at which such 
support stands. 
For the purpose of Securing the blade-sup 
ports in adjusted position on their respective 
transverse bars and at the same time permit 
ting the immediate seat of the blade to swivel 
freely, the spindles N are swiveled in the 
yoke N, which is located within the trans 
verse bar and has a central aperture in for 
the shaft F and at the back or under side 
bears upon the inner surface of that side of 
the transverse bar and has the threaded stem 
N40 extending out through the slot in that 
side of the bar. A thumb clamp-nut N is 
applied to this stem and might be made to 
bind directly against the outer surface of the 
- 
bar; but since the bar is slotted at both sides, 
and therefore liable to spread, I prefer to in 
terpose on the stem N', outside the bar and 
between said bar and the clamp-nut N, the 
clasp N, whose flanges N N embrace the 
bar and prevent it from spreading. This 
clasp, considered with respect to the clamp 
nut and the threaded stem N, is of the na 
ture of a Washer. 
In every system of measurement the va 
rious dimensions are laid out from certain Se 
lected points, and my machine is adapted to 
have scales mounted or marked upon it in 
position to facilitate the adjusting of the bars 
in the first instance and afterward of the 
blade-supports at the proper distances from 
each other and from whatever fixed points of 
measurement are necessary in the particular 
system employed. I have shown such scales 
located at the positions in which they are 
most convenient for use in the system in con 
nection with which I have used this machine, 
and it will be obvious to any one familiar 
with the art in what manner the position of 
these Scales should be changed to adapt them 
to any other system. In my said system the 
end of the shoulder-bar X is one of these 
fixed points of measurement, and a scale is 
laid off on said shoulder-bar for the pur 
pose of adjusting the support which carries 
the upper end of the armhole-blade, and from 
the end of said shoulder-bar a scale X' ex 
tends downward, lying back of the bars B 
and C, to facilitate the adjustment of the bar 
B, and in some systems it might be used to 
adjust, also, the bar C; but in my system I use 
as a fixed point from which to adjust the 
blade-support K the blade-support K', which 
is fixed on the upper side bar of the frame 
A, and when that blade-support K is adjusted 
and fixed according to the proper measure 
ment taken on the figure I adjust from it as 
a fixed point certain other points-as, for ex 
ample, the blade-support K. In order to fa 
cilitate making such adjustments as these, 
which either are not made along any one of 
the straight bars or are not made by meas 
urement from a point which is permanently 
fixed on the frame, I mount on that blade 
support from which the measurement is to be 
made a Spring-tape L, the center of its case 
L' being fixed at the point at which the meas 
urement starts, the scale on such tape being 
made to read correctly from the end, but be 
ing provided with a special mark at a dis 
tance from the end equal to the radius of the 
tape-case, so that the tape being drawn out 
until the measurement desired is visible at 
the mouth of the case the blade-support to 
be adjusted to that measurement will be cor 
rectly located by being set at its special mark, 
or the scale being made to read as much 
more than the distance from its end as the ra 
dius of the case L'. I prefer the first method, 
because the tape is then available for ordinary 
measurements without correction. 
A convenient mode of mounting the 
75 
95 
OC 
O 
II5 
I 25 
478,988 
75 
spring-tape on the blade-support is shown in 
the drawings, Fig. 19, an interiorly-threaded 
hub being formed at the center of the tape 
case L', and the case being thereby screwed 
onto the threaded end of the stem N of 
the yoke, said stem being made long enough 
for that purpose. When the tape-case is to 
be connected at a blade-support which is a 
fixed post, as IX, a fixed threaded stud set on 
the frame at the back side answers as a means 
for securing it. 
The side bars A' A' may have scales 
marked upon them by which such of the bars 
B, C, D, and E as require adjustment from 
the fixed point on the frame may be adjusted, 
and in lieu of the scale X, which extends 
from the point of the shoulder-bar, a scale 
may be laid off on one of the side bar's A' A', 
commencing at a point in transverse line 
with the point of the shoulder-bar. In my 
system none of the other bars except B are 
designed to be adjusted according to a fixed 
scale on the side bars; but in other systems 
such scales may be useful on a machine. 
The blades M, which denote the dart-lines, 
are adjusted on the guide-posts at their Sup 
ports on the bar D by reference to scales W. 
W, which are laid off in units proportional to 
certain other measurements of the figure ac 
cording to a certain system, which need not 
be herein explained, and may be used differ 
ently by different operators, said scales W. 
being therefore made according to the system 
employed. The scales measure the amount 
which is cut out between the dart-lines, and 
they are graduated, therefore, in each instance 
from one dart-line to the opposite dart-line 
and will be set on the bar D with the unit of 
the scale at the dart-line from which the meas 
urement commences after the position of that 
dart-line has been determined and its adjust 
able support set on the bar D. The advan 
tage of securing these scales W permanently 
to the machine is that, since they are special 
scales which are worked out to correspond 
to the system of measurement which the op 
erator employs and are not made upon any 
accepted standard of lineal measurement, 
their misplacement or loss would embarass 
the operator and necessitate a complicated 
calculation based upon the various measure 
ments in order to set the dart-lines without 
such scale. 
The blade for the front edge of the front of 
the garment is preferably carried in supports 
which run in the slotted bar G, Secured on the 
outer side of the side bar A' of the rigid 
frame rather than upon any of the transverse 
bars. Two supports on said bar G primarily 
hold this blade, one IK being located at the 
upper end and the other K being designed 
to be adjusted at the waist-line. Between 
these two supports there is mounted on the 
bar G a blade-support II, of the form herein 
above described, except that instead of the 
swiveled seat for the blade it has a lever-arm 
H', on the free end of which there is mounted 
25 
35 
45 
SC 
55 
a support for the blade, having the swiveled 
seat for the blade, as already described. This 
support II is designed to be adjusted longi 
tudinally on the bar G and circularly about 
its swivel-axis at that bar to bring the swiv 
eled seat for the blade at the free end of the 
arm II' in proper position, the said arm II' 
being swung outward from the bar G as far 
as necessary to give the proper swell to the 
garment to correspond to the measurement 
of the figure at the bust-line. A similar de 
vice may be employed at the lower end of the 
front-line blade to give the necessary swell at 
or below the hip portion, as seen in Fig. 1. 
The same device may be employed in other 
situations and is employed in other parts of 
the garment; but these two instances will be 
sufficient to indicate its mode of use. 
In order to avoid having the blades M pro 
trude beyond the margin of the part which 
they are to cut or mark, as will be especially 
undesirable when they are provided with cut 
ting-edges, because, as will be apparent from 
the Subsequent description, they would then 
cut into the cloth beyond the limits of the 
garment and thereby waste the material, I 
prefer to make them each in two or more 
pieces which lap by each other, both passing 
through any swiveled seat which is located at 
Such lapping portion, the amount of the lap 
being sufficient to allow for all variations of 
length of each blade-that is, instead of slid 
ing through the seats on the supports nearest 
their ends they may be fixed in those seats, 
which are nevertheless swiveled, and slide only 
through the intermediate seats and both lap 
ping parts slide through the same intermedi 
ate Seat. In the principal figures I have not 
thus represented them, the scale being too 
small to make this detail clear in those fig 
ures; but this modification is shown in Fig. 9. 
Fig. 13 also represents the two lapping sec 
tions of the blade engaged in the swiveled 
Seat. 
The rigid frame, with the adjustable parts 
and cutting-edges already described, may be 
used without other appliances, the paper or 
cloth to be cut or marked being laid upon the 
perforating or cutting edges of the blades 
after they are adjusted and secured in posi 
tion, and the cutting or marking be effected 
by pressing the cloth or paper down onto such 
edges by any convenient means, and in case 
of marking or perforating it is entirely prac 
ticable to complete the process by following 
each marking-edge with the finger or soft 
roller on the upper side of the cloth or paper 
to print or perforate it; but for greater con 
venience I prefer to mount this rigid frame 
on the table or stand O, this stand compris 
ing, necessarily, supports and a top O', which 
is cut away at one side, forming a recess O1, 
and the frame A is hinged by its lower edge 
at the opposite side of the table in the bear 
ings OO, so that said frame may be set up 
right, as seen in Fig. 3, and supported in that 
position by any suitable checkstrap or brace 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
15 
I 25 
478,988 
75 
90 
95 
od 
d 
II5 
I 25 
o 
O'. The recess O' is deep enough to permit standing edges of the blades M and cause 
the operator to stand in it close enough to the 
Said edges to mark, perforate, or cut the ma 
terial and complete the pattern or cutting of 
upstanding frame to adjust its blades and se 
the garment. For heavy work requiring more 
Cure them. It will be observed that in this 
position the operator is at the back side of the 
pressure than can be conveniently put upon 
frame and that the clamp-nuts N are located 
the roller by the hand of the operator Such 
at the back side, so that while making the 
roller may be provided with guides in the 
proper adjustments all danger of cutting or 
side of the frame P. The best construction 
scratching the hands upon the cutting or per 
for this purpose I consider to be that shown 
in the drawings, particularly in Fig. 20, 
forating edges is avoided. . The scales for ad 
justing the various blades are upon this side of 
Wherein are shown at the lateral edges of the 
the frame; but they may be also upon the other 
frame P, on the back or upper side, overhang 
ing flanges PP, provided with racks p, fac 
side, as it will often be convenient to make a 
slight correction or readjustment after the 
ing toward the plane of the fabric P', and on 
frame is folded down to horizontal position, 
the ends of the roller-shaft pinions SS, 
adapted to mesh with the racks p', respect 
and for this purpose to refer to the scales. 
ively, said pinions being rigid with the roller 
When the adjustment has been made with the 
frame in the upright position, it will be turned 
shaft, but the roller being loose on its shaft. 
down to horizontal position and rest firmly 
When the frame P has been turned down 
upon the table-top O', and the cloth or paper 
upon the cloth, as above described, the pin 
will be laid upon its now upwardly-projecting 
ions S S will be introduced under the over 
cutting or marking edges. 
hanging flanges at their ends, care being 
For convenience of securing the material 
taken that the roller-shaft is at right angles 
against accidental displacement and also to 
to the racks at starting, and if this is done 
prevent it from being crowded out of position 
the shaft will remain at right angles to the 
in the subsequent process of cutting or mark 
racks while the roller is pushed across the 
ing I provide the stools Q, which comprise a 
frame. Hooks RR will be provided by which 
metal base Q', to which is secured a top Q, 
the frame P will be locked down to the table, 
and the proportion of the parts-to wit, the 
of cork or other suitable material easily per 
roller and pinions-with respect to the dis 
forated and not easily damaged by perfora 
tion, the metal base adapted in any conven 
tance of the racks from the plane of the cut 
ting-edges of the blades M when the frame 
ient manner to be secured to the bars of the 
frame and the upper surface of the top Qbe 
is thus locked down to the table is such that 
the roller in traversing the frame above the 
ing at the level of the upper edges of the 
blades M when said stools are thus secured 
fabric P will force the under surface of the 
latter fully down to the plane of the cutting 
to the frame. A convenient form for adapt 
edges, and thereby perfectly cut the paper or 
ing them for fastening to the frame is that 
cloth intervening. If the material P is suit 
indicated in the drawings, the base having a 
ably tough, the adjustment of the frames 
T-shaped stem provided with a cross q, which 
when thus locked together may be such that 
may be inserted through the slot in the bar 
the cutting or perforating edges may pene 
and then turned across the bar, whereby it 
will be temporarily bound at any position at 
trate slightly above the under surface of said 
sheet P', so that the latter may be slightly in 
which it will thus be inserted and turned. 
dented in the process for the purpose of more 
As many of these stools may be employed as 
perfectly insuring the complete cutting or per 
desired, and thumb tacks or pins being in 
forating of the fabric being operated upon. 
serted through the paper or cloth into them 
will give the material sufficient fixedness on 
I have heretofore used this machine in the 
the machine to Secure accuracy in marking 
form in which it is shown in a certain British 
patent granted to me November 4, 1887, No. 
or cutting. A thin fabric may be stretched 
15,021, in which the clamping-nuts for the 
on the frame or stools to give more complete 
blade-supports are at the forward side instead 
support to the goods when the machine is 
of at the rear side of the frame. In that case 
used for marking or perforating. 
For convenience and rapidity in cutting or 
the structure which is illustrated in Fig. 7 
may be employed for the blade-support, the 
marking I provide the frame P, onto which is 
seat for the hilade being swiveled to a clamp 
stretched a sheet P of leather, rubber, or 
which consists of a tubular stem N, protrud 
similar flexible substance sufficiently tough 
ing out through the slot in the bar from a 
or elastic not to be too easily cut by contact 
clamp-disk or flange N, which binds against 
with the blades. This frame P is also hinged 
to the table O at the bearings p and nor 
the inner surface of the slotted side of the 
bar, such stem being threaded and the nut N 
mally hangs down at the rear side of the 
being screwed onto its protruding end back 
table, but will now be SWung Over to hori 
Zontal position, so that the leather or rubber 
of the blade-seat. 
or other fabric P will rest upon the frame A. 
I claim 
1. In a cutting and marking machine, in 
A roller S, journaled in a suitable yoke or 
combination with the outline-frame and the 
forked handle S, being rolled back and forth 
flexible blades projecting edgewise from the 
above the fabric P will cause the latter to 
press the cloth or paper down onto the up- plane of said frame, bars extending trans 
w 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
478,988 
the blades secured thereto, the stools Q, re 
movably secured to the frame and having 
their upper surfaces at the plane of the op 
erating edges of the blades, substantially as 
set forth. 
8. In a cutting and marking machine, in 
combination with the outline-frame compris 
ing side bars having longitudinal racks (t, 
the bar D, extending transversely between 
said side bars and having telescoping end 
pieces, and the pinions having ball-and-socket 
joint bearing on said end pieces, said pinions 
being adapted to engage the racks, the side 
bar having a guard-lip behind which the pin 
ions are retained, substantially as set forth. 
9. In a cutting and marking machine, a base 
frame and the flexible blades and their sup 
ports adjustable with respect to said frame, 
combined with a stand, to one edge of which 
such base-frame is hinged, such hinge being 
adapted to permit the frame to swing from a 
horizontal position on the table to an up 
standing position above the hinge, such stand 
being recessed at the side opposite the hinge, 
whereby the operator may approach the up 
standing frame to operate it from the side 
which is downward when the frame is hori 
Zontal on the stand, substantially as set forth. 
10. In combination with the stand, a frame 
having the cutting-blades secured to it, hinged 
to the stand, and adapted to be set upright or 9 
laid horizontal at will, and a frame having the 
flexible fabric P also hinged to the stand and 
adapted to fold down over the blade-carrying 
frame, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
11. In combination with the stand, the 
blade - carrying frame hinged thereto and 
adapted to be folded down thereupon, the 
frame P, having the flexible fabric P', also 
hinged to the stand and adapted to be folded 
down upon the blade-carrying frame, said 
frame Phaving rigid with its side bars racks 
overhanging the plane of the fabric P', and 
the roller S, having equal pinions S, rigid with 
its shaft, at its opposite ends and adapted to 
engage the racks, respectively, and the forked 
handle having bearings for the roller-shaft 
between the roller and the pinions, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand, in the presence of two witnesses, at 
Chicago, Illinois, this 19th day of October, 
1891. 
SARAH ANNE COOKE. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. S. BURTON, 
JEAN ELLIOTT. 
75 
95 
do 
IO 
.C. 
5 
5 
2 
3 5 
45 
versely across the outline-frame, shafts ex 
tending longitudinally through said bars and 
journaled therein, and pinions fixed on the 
opposite ends of said shafts, the side bars of 
the outline-frame having racks in which said 
pinions engage and travel, and the blade-sup 
ports adjustable longitudinally with respect 
to said bars, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a cutting and marking machine, in 
combination with a base-frame comprising a 
plufality of bars, the flexible blades and sup 
ports for suchblades, mounted and adjustable 
longitudinally and adapted to be secured in 
adjusted position on such bars, said blade 
supports having the immediate seat for the 
blades adapted to permit the blade to slide 
longitudinally therethrough and swiveled to 
the secured portion of the support, whereby 
the blades are permitted to assume flowing 
outlines controlled by the position of the sup 
port on the frame, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a cutting and marking machine, a 
slotted bar, in combination with a blade-sup 
port, which consists of the yoke N within the 
bar, having a stem projecting through the slot 
at one side of the bar and a clamp-nut on said 
stem outside the bar, and the immediate seat 
for the blade, located at the opposite side of 
the bar and provided with a stem projecting 
through the slot at that side and swiveled to 
the yoke, said yoke having an aperture n', 
Substantially as set forth. 
4. In a cutting and marking machine, in 
combination with a bar slotted longitudinally 
through from side to side, the blade-support 
adapted to slide longitudially in such slot, con 
sisting of the yoke N4 within the bar and hav 
ing a stem projecting out through the slot at 
one side, and the immediate seat for the blade, 
having a stem projecting in through the slot 
from the opposite side and swiveled to the 
yoke, the clasp N on the protruding stem of 
the yoke and having flanges which embrace 
the bar, and the clamp-nut on the stem out 
side the clasp, substantially as set forth. 
5. In combination with the frame compris 
ing a longitudinally-slotted bar, the blade-sup 
port adapted to be adjusted and secured in 
said bar, having an arm adjustably secured 
to it provided with a swiveled seat for the 
blade at one end, substantially as set forth. 
6. In combination with the frame compris 
ing a longitudinally-slotted bar, and the blade 
support adapted to be adjusted and secured 
in such bar and having an arm swiveled to 
it, said arm being provided at the free end 
with a swiveled seat for the blade, substan 
tially as set forth. 
7.In combination with the base-frame and 
5 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479088.txt	(No Model.) 
T. J. FREDERICKS, 
DRAFT EQUALIZER, 
No. 479,088, 
 
Patented July 19, 1892. 
STS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS J. FREDERICKS, OF AUDUBON, IOWA. 
DRAFT-EQUALIZER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,088, dated July 19, 1892. 
Application filed January 9, 1892, Serial No. 417,587, (No model.) 
It is strengthened 55 
. 
- 
25 
To all ??h???, i? ??? concer?: 
formed of two parts, divided along the dotted 
line F, thereby forming the separate part F. 
Beit known that I, THOMAs J. FREDERICKs, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
H represents a wagon-tongue secured to the 
siding at Audubon, in the county of Audubon 
outer side of the part F. 
5 and State of Iowa, have invented a new and 
in this position by means of the brace H, 
useful Three - Horse Draft-Equalizer and 
which is secured to the tongue and one of the 
Wagon-Tongue, of which the following is a 
hounds of the wagon by means of bolts, one 
of which Hextends, also, through the tongue, 
Specification. 
My object is to produce a device adapted 
the part F, the tongue-hounds C C, and the 
Io to be quickly and conveniently connected with 
part D serving to retain them in their rela 
the hounds of a wagon to replace an ordinary 
tive positions, as clearly shown in Fig. 2, and 
Wagon-tongue, the said device being complete 
the other bolt C, hereinbefore described, se 
in itself and provided with means whereby 
cures the rear end of the said brace to the 
One draft-animal may be attached on one side 
hounds. This part D, it will be seen, is cen 
I5 of the tongue and two on the other side with 
trally located relative to the wheels of the 
out producing any side draft when advancing 
running-gear, and as the equalizer J is piv 
oted directly to the forward end thereof all 
the wagon. 
side draft will thereby be prevented. This 
My invention consists in the construction 
of the complete device in adapting it to re 
equalizer or trebletree J has its arms of un 
2O place an ordinary wagon-tongue and in the 
equal length, a doubletree J being pivoted 
disposition of various parts relative to each 
to the shorter end and a singletree J to its 
Other, as hereinafter set forth, pointed out in 
longer end. 
my claims, and illustrated in the accompany 
K K are singletrees connected with the 
ing drawings, in which 
doubletree J, the one on one side of the tongue 
Figure 1 is a top view of a sufficient portion 
H and the other on the opposite side thereof. 
of the forward part of the running-gear of a 
This arrangement provides for one draft-ani 
Wagon to show the relative position of the 
mal on one side of the tongue and two on the 
various parts and my improved equalizer and 
other side. 
Any ordinary three-horse equalizer or 
tongue connected there with as required in 
3o practical use. Fig. 2 is a transverse sectional 
trebletree may be substituted for the one 
view through the line acac of Fig. 1. 
shown and described, that forming no part of 
The reference-letter A, used throughout the 
my present invention. 
drawings, designates the front axle of the 
The function of the tongue H is Substan 
running-gear of a wagon, and B B are hounds 
tially the same as of other tongues, and fur 
ther description thereof is deemed unneces 
CC are tongue-hounds pivotally connected 
sary to an understanding of the invention 
between the hounds B B by means of the bolt 
when addressed to those familiarized with 
C'. As ordinarily constructed the wagon 
this class of devices. 
tongue is inserted between these tongue 
Having thus described my invention, What 
4o hounds C C and extended straight forward 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
therefrom; but in my construction the por 
Patent, is 
tion D, corresponding to the rear end of the 
1. A three-horse draft-equalizer and Wagon 
tongue comprising tongue-hounds pivoted be 
tongue, is cut off immediately forward of the 
tongue-hounds, and the forward end of one of 
tween the hounds of a wagon, a short tongue 
45 the said tongue-hounds is enlarged longitudi 
section secured between the said tongue 
nally, as required, to extend some consider 
hounds, a block secured to one side of the 
said tongue-hounds and tongue - Section, a 
able distance to one side. This I prefer to 
accomplish by forming the said tongue-hound 
wagon-tongue secured to the side of the said 
from a wide piece of timber, as required, to 
block, a trebletree secured to the forward end 
of the said tongue-section, having arms of un 
5o be made complete in one piece; but where 
this is found to be unpractical it may be equal length, a doubletree pivoted to the 
35 fixed thereto. 
& 
CO 
479,088 
r 
the said section, a trebletree pivoted to the 
forward end of the said section, comprising a 15 
bar having arms of unequal lengths, a double 
tree pivoted to the shorter arm and a single 
tree pivoted to the longer end, the singletree 
of the said doubletree being on opposite sides 
of the tongue, substantially as shown and de- 20 
Scribed, to operate in the manner set forth. 
r 
THOMAS J. FREDERICKS. 
Witnesses: 
??**? 
????? 
T. J. STAFFORD, 
G. H. JONES. 
shorter arm, having its ends on opposite sides 
of the wagon-tongue, and a singletree pivoted 
to the longer arm, substantially as set forth. 
2. A three-horse draft-equalizer and wagon 
5 tongue comprising tongue-hounds pivoted be 
tween the hounds of the running-gear of a 
wagoni, a section fixed between the said 
tongue-hounds, a laterally-extending portion 
On one side of the tongue-hounds, a tongue 
Io fixed to one side of ?? lateralyestem?ng 
portion, a brace fixed to the tongue and to the 
hounds of the running-gear, a bolt extended 
through the tongue, the tongue-hounds, and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479188.txt	(No Model.) 
C. KAESTNER, 
MEANS FOR PREVENTING EXPLOSIONS IN MILLS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 479,188. 
Patented July 19, l892. 
ID N 
2a 
 
  
 
s 
tFl H 
WA 
I H | 
 
A. 
N 
W 
 
 
 
  
SS 
 
 
 
 
 
Essee Ees al 
OD 
ANS 
S. N 
----- it 
\\ NTN 
Catz II 2t2 
list 
N 
t2S fast SS N 
NS 
 
NAN 
NN R 
 
  
 
 
 
 
7Foresses m 
22%a. | 
 
y 
II 2%4a 
(No Model.) 
2 sheets-sheet 2. 
MEANS FOR PREVENTING EXPLOSIONS IN MILLS, 
C. KAESTNER, 
No. 479,188. 
r 
Patented July 19, 1892, 
 
N 
ass 
sp 
E. 
SW4- NL 
N 2 
 
Sa . 
2. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES IKAESTNER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MEANS FOR PREVENTNG EXPOSIONS IN M L S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,188, dated July 19, 1892. 
Application filed May 13, 1889, Serial No. 310,576, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES KAESTNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Means for Prevent 
ing Explosions in Mills, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Explosions in mills have been quite frequent 
heretofore, the chief cause assigned therefor 
being the passage to the rollers of foreign sub 
stances-such as nails, stones, and the like 
with the unground grain, and which sub 
stances coming in contact with the grinding 
rolls revolving at a high rate of speed sparks 
are generated by the contact, and from these 
sparks the dust, which is highly explosive, is 
ignited, thus producing a flame, which as 
mills have been constructed heretofore had 
free communication through the discharge 
chamber, conveyer-trough, and elevator-spout 
into the bins, and thus the explosion and con 
flagration became general, and loss of life and 
property from this cause has been consider 
able. It has been attempted to prevent ex 
plosions by separating the foreign substances 
from the grain passing to the grinding-rolls; 
but hitherto no sufficient means have been 
discovered for this purpose. I have therefore 
provided against the communication of sparks 
from the surface of the rolls to the discharge 
passages and the mill, and this I do by inter 
posing a valve between the rolls and the dis 
charge-opening, which valve is adapted to 
close the passage at all times against the 
Sparks, but is so constructed as to discharge 
the ground grain in separated quantities; and 
my invention consists particularly in a means 
Such as above indicated. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
an elevation, partly in section, of a roller-mill 
containing the preferred form of construction 
of my improvements. Fig. 2 is an end eleva 
tion thereof. Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional 
elevation. 
In the drawings, 55 represent the grinding 
rolls, which are journaled to rotate within a 
suitable casing 6, having a discharge-opening 
below the opposing faces of the rolls. 
7 is the hopper, and 8 a chamber into which 
the grain is discharged. The walls 99 of said 
chamber are preferably hinged and adapted 
to swing outwardly, as clearly shown by the 
dotted lines in Fig. 3. Said walls may be pro 
vided with the counterbalancing-Weights 10 
10, which sustain them in position to inclose 
the chamber; but should an explosion occur 
from sparks within said chamber the force 
thereof will swing the walls outwardly on 
their hinges, overcoming the resistance of the 
weight, and the explosion will waste its force 
in the vicinity of its occurrence and without 
communicating flame to the bins. Springs 
may be employed in place of the weights. 
Said hinged portions also serve to permit the 
attendant to insert his hand to examine the 
product. Below the chamber 8 I locate in 
the outlet-passage 11 a valve of suitable con 
struction and adapted in operation to pass 
the ground material through it, but adapted 
at all times to close the passage against Sparks. 
In the construction shown in Figs. 1 to 3, 
inclusive, the valve consists of a central hub 
12, having blades 13 radiating therefron and 
adapted to operate close to the walls of the 
passage, which at this point are curved on the 
sides, as clearly shown in the drawings at 6". 
This valve is secured on a rotatable shaft 14, 
journaled in the end walls of the casing 6, 
and will be adapted by its rotation to bring 
the different compartments 15, formed by the 
radiating blades of the valve, into position to 
receive the falling grain from the chamber 8 
and to discharge the same from the compart 
ments as they are brought successively by 
the revolution of the valve over the opening 
to the conveyer or other discharge apparatus. 
16 is the screw conveyer, operating, as usual, 
in a closed box, to deliver the grain to the 
elevator-boot, from which it is taken up by 
the buckets 17 on the belt 18 and conveyed to 
the storage-bins or other receptacles. I pre 
fer to gear the shaft 14 to rotate in unison 
with the grinding-rolls, and this may be con 
veniently done by means of a belt 19, which 
is carried from the pulley on the roller-shaft 
5 over a band-pulley 20 on a short shaft 21, 
mounted in a bracket 22 and having a bev 
eled gear 23 enmeshed with a similar gear 24 
on the end of a worm-shaft 25, the teeth of 
which turn a worm-gear 26, secured on the 
end of shaft 14. The gearing will be so pro 
portioned as to rotate the valve at the proper 
speed to receive and discharge the ground 
grain without permitting it to accumulate in 
30 
35 
45 
 
95 
IOO 
2 
479,188 
applied to discharge the dust from dust-col 
lectors in separated quantities; also that such 
valves have been applied to grain cleaning 
and drying machinery for the discharge of 
foreign substances, and that reciprocating 
and rocking valves for feeding the material 
in separated quantities have been applied in 
grinding-mills, and therefore I do not claim 
the form of valve. 
I claim 
In means for preventing explosions in mills, 
the combination, with the grinding mechan 
ism, of a discharge-passage for the ground 
material, having hinged wall-sections, and a 
valve located in the discharge-passage below 
Said movable wall-sections and adapted to 
discharge the grain therethrough in separated 
quantities, substantially as described. 
CHARLES KAESTNER. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
C. C. LIN THICUM, 
F. D. BUTLER, 
O 
chamber 8, and preferably so that the com 
partments shall be filled as successively pre 
sented. The walls of the casing within which 
the valve operates are of such configuration 
as to closely encircle the said valve, and I pre 
fer to have the interior of said walls or casing 
finished by grinding or otherwise and the 
valve-blades so fitted thereto as to render the 
various compartments between said blades, 
and casing practically air-tight. 
The machine may be provided with the 
pipes 27, which communicate with the roll 
chamber, so as to allow a free circulation of 
air around the rolls to serve as relief-open 
ings in case of explosion, and I prefer to pro 
vide relief-openings 9 in the curved wall-sec 
tion 6, which openings are provided with 
wire-cloth, so that should an explosion occur 
which is communicated to the valve-compart 
ments it may vent its force through the re 
lief-openings. 
I am aware that rotary valves have been 
20 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479288.txt	(No Model.) 
J. R. LUT GEN, 
BOITER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 479,288. 
Patented July 19, 1892, 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
S. ZaaN. S) 
2 
WITNESSES: 
-6 &e/&evi 
INVENTOR: 
B 
f 
AITORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
J. R. LUT GEN. 
BOILER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 479,288, 
Patented July 19, 1892. 
 
WITNESSES: 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES R. LUTGEN, OF WINLOCK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO CHARLES A. 
STURM, OF CASTLE ROCK, WASHINGTON. 
BOLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,288, dated July 19, 1892. 
Application filed February 9, 1892, Serial No. 420,897, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JAMES R. LUTGEN, of 
Winlock, in the county of Lewis and State of 
Washington, have invented a new and Im 
proved Boiler, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
The invention relates to sectional boilers, 
such as shown and described in the Letters 
Patent of the United States No. 416,412, 
granted to me on the date of December 3, 1889. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide a new and improved boiler which is 
simple and durable in construction, not liable 
to get out of order, and arranged to quickly 
R Safely generate steam without waste of 
0. 
The invention consists of certain combina 
tions of the parts, as will be hereinafter de 
Scribed, and then pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in Which similar letters of reference indicate 
Corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the improve 
ment. Fig. 2 is a sectional front view of the 
Same on the line 22 of Fig. 4. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tional plan view of the same on the line 33 
of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a similar view of the same 
on the line 44 of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a like view 
of the same on the line 55 of Fig. 2, and Fig. 
6 is a plan view of the base with the grate in 
place. 
The improved boiler is provided with a cir 
cular base A, having a bottom B, forming an 
ash-pit C, access to which is had by means of 
a door D, arranged on one side of the base A. 
The latter is formed with an outwardly-ex 
tending curved flange E, forming a trough to 
catch any dripping water, oil, &c., from the 
upper parts of the boiler. 
On the top of the base A is set a ring F, 
fastened by bolts G. to the bottom B, and on 
the outside of this ring F is riveted or other 
wise fastened the exterior circular shell H, 
rovided at its upper end with a cone-shaped 
cap H, supporting the smoke-stack I. On the 
lower part of the exterior shell H, directly 
above the ash-pit door D, is arranged a door 
J, through which the fuelisintroduced into the 
fire-box of the boiler. The ring F supports a 
circular grate Kof any approved construction, 
and on the upper surface of the ring are 
formed lugs E, supporting the circular pipe 
L, connected by a series of vertically-arranged 
pipes N with a second circular pipe O, formed 
with a concentric pipe O', connected with the 
outer pipe O by radially-extending pipe-arms 
O, as plainly shown in Fig. 5. The space be 
tween the grate K and the pipes O, O', and O' 
forms the fire-box, into which leads the door 
J. A sufficient number of pipes N are omit 
ted to allow space for the casing of the door 
J, as plainly shown in the said Fig. 5. 
From the pipes O, O', and O extend up 
wardly the pipes P, supporting at their upper 
ends and connected with the pipes Q, Q', and 
Q, of which the pipe Q is circular. The pipe 
Q, concentric to the same, and the pipes Q. 
are in the shape of radial arms, as plainly 
shown in Fig. 4. The concentric pipe Q is 
formed with a diametrically-arranged pipe 
Q, from the center of which extends a short 
branch pipe R, connecting with a spherical 
shaped steam-dome S, located in the cap H 
of the exterior shell H. A steam-pipe T leads 
from the top of the dome S to carry the gen 
erated steam to the machine to be driven. 
The steam-dome S also carries a gage U of 
any approved construction for indicating the 
pressure of the steam within the said dome. 
A water-gage V is connected with one of the 
vertical pipes P to indicate the level of the 
Water within the said pipes. 
It will be seen by reference to the drawings 
that the pipes P, connecting the circular pipes 
O and Q with each other, are really continu 
ations of the pipes N, extending between the 
circular pipes O and L. The other pipes P, 
connecting the concentric circular pipes O' 
and Q and the arms O and Q with each 
other, do not extend between the circular 
pipes O and L, so that the fire-box is unob 
structed and sufficient space is given for burn 
ing the fuel on the grate K. 
In order to have ready access to the several 
vertical pipes, plugs W are screwed in the top 
of the pipes Q, Q', and Qopposite the en 
trance of the pipes P, and similar plugs W. 
also Screw in the under side of the circular 
pipe L, opposite the entrance of the pipes N. 
Thus by removing the several plugs W the 
various vertical pipes P and N can be readily 
25 
35 
45 p. 
95 
IOO 
479.288 
cleaned whenever necessary. Hand-holes W.' 
are arranged in the circular pipes O and L 
and corresponding doors Ware formed in the 
shell H to conveniently clean said pipes. 
It is understood that the circular pipes L. 
and O, the concentric pipes O', the arms O', the 
vertical pipes N, and part of the vertical pipes 
Pare filled with water, while the top pipes Q, 
Q', and Q and the tipper part of the vertical 
pipes P fill with steam generated from the 
Water in the pipes mentioned, the steam 
finally passing from the concentric pipe Q' to 
the arm Q and from the latter to the branch 
pipe R, to the steam-dome S. The level of the 
water in the vertical pipes P is always indi 
cated on the gage V. 
It will be seen that the fuel burning on the 
grate K heats the water in the circular pipes 
L, O, and O', as well as in the lower pipes 
and the branch pipes O', and then the heat 
in rising from the fire-box above the circular 
pipes O and O' passes among the large num 
ber of pipes P, thus heating the water therein. 
It will thus be seen that the lower pipes O, N, 
and L are subjected to the greatest heat ema 
nating from the burning of the fuel on the 
grate K, so that the water in these pipes will 
be heated to a higher degree, and will con 
O 
25 
sequently readily circulate in the entire sys 
tem of pipes except the top pipes. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a boiler, a sectional water-pipe com 
prising a circular base-pipe, vertical pipes ex 
tending from the said base-pipe, a second cir 
cular pipe arranged above the base-pipe and 
connected with the said vertical pipes, and a 
concentric circular pipe arranged within the 
said second circular pipe, and a series of hol 
low radial arms which connect with two cir 
cular pipes, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. In a boiler, a sectional water-pipe com 
prising a circular base-pipe, concentric pipes 
arranged above the said base-pipe and con 
nected with each other, upright pipes set in 
the said concentric pipes, top concentric pipes 
connected with the said upright pipes, and 
short vertical pipes connecting the said base 
pipe with the first set of concentric pipes, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
JAMES R. LUTGEN. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
J. R. BUXTON, 
W. H. KENOYER. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479388.txt	(No Model.) 
F. C. BOYD & R MARTIN 
FARE REGISTER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 479,388, 
Patented July 19, 1892, 
.. 
1. 
E. 
e 
s 
3. 
THIS RECISTERS 
YOUR FARE 
OO 873 
75-ooo 
6 W 22e cer cer 
ra 
\d e y 7-du-le? 
The Norris PEERs co., Photo-?ho., WASHINGTON, D. c. 
E. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 479,388, 
F. C. BOYD & R MARTIN 
FARE REGISTER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 19, 1892, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SSal S 
E. 
Y. 
A. 2 
t 
sei 
els-A A. 
 
EE7 
 
 
 
 
w 
24 e 
|- 
O 2o 
OR 
 
 
WITNESSES 
62.22-core--, 
7% (673-4-2 
Inventors 
 
(No Model.) 
F. C. BOYD & R. MARTIN 
FARE REGISTER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 479,388, 
Patented July 19, 1892. 
 
E t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
\{NA 
if, S. 538 
w 
WITNESSES 
6. 27, 22-concer- 
 
%zec. ga 
Ta tiaras fears co., Photo-itho. was Hicro-, ... c. 
 
No. 479,388, 
Patented July 19, 1892. 
S 
f 
N 222 
 22 
2. 
SN S 
ZA 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
^~ ** ** 
 
S; 
5 
A1 fill 
2. 
WITNESSES 
NVENTO 
r 
VC: 
d 
w 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheet S-Sheet 5. 
F. C. BOYD & R MARTIN 
FARE REGISTER, 
No. 479,388, 
Patented July 19, 1892. 
 
 
E E7 72 
3.W N 
 
 
  
 
e S 
s 
  
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
F. C. BOYD & R. MARTIN, 
FARE REGISTER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 6. 
No. 479,388, 
Patented July 19, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
  
ro 
1, 
EeR a N1 
N a 
WITNESSES: . 
a/722a-221, 
trave e INVENTORS 
, ?etro 
BY 
ATTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK C. BOYD AND RICHARD MARTIN, OF NEW HAVEN, 
CONNECTICUT, 
FARE-REGISTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,888, dated July 19, 1892. 
Application filed December 14, 1891, Serial No. 414,910 (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, FREDERICK C. BOYD 
and RICHARD MARTIN, citizens of the United 
States, residing at New Haven, in the county 
of New Haven and State of Connecticut, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Fare-Registers; and we do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable other's skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to certain novel and 
useful improvements in fare-registers for use 
in Street-cars, omnibuses, and other public 
conveyances, and has for its objects to provide 
a register that shall indicate the fares taken 
as the same are collected by means of mech 
anism which may readily be turned back to 
Zero at the end of each trip; to provide, also, 
a register by which the fares received are 
constantly totalized regardless of the trips; 
to provide, also, a trip-register, and also mech 
anism interposed between said trip-register 
and the fare-indicator, whereby the return of 
the latter to Zero cannot be effected without 
first operating the trip-register. 
With the ends hereinbefore recited in view 
our invention consists in the construction 
and combination of elements hereinbefore, 
fully and in detail explained and then recited 
in the claims. 
In order that those skilled in the art to 
which our invention appertains may fully 
understand its construction and means for 
operation, we will describe the same in detail, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
tion, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation; Fig. 2, a front 
elevation with the case removed; Fig. 3, an 
end elevation of the mechanism within the 
case, the latter being sectioned; Fig. 4, a 
section on the line 4 4 of IFig. 2; Fig. 5, a de 
tail plan view showing the parts which are 
mounted directly against the back of the 
case; Fig. 6, a plan view of the trip-register 
With the numerals omitted and the gearing 
shown in dotted lines; Fig. 7, an edge view 
looking in the direction of the small arrow 
on lig. 6; Fig. S, a side elevation of one 
of the indicating-wheels, showing the small 
cam and the plunger which co-operates With 
said cam; Fig. 9, a central section through 
the indicating-wheels; Fig. 10, a similar Sec 
tion through the registering-train; Fig. 11, 
a perspective of the triple pawl whereby 
the indicating-wheels are operated; Fig. 12, a 
detail end elevation showing the shaft 13 as 
unlocked and the wheels 14 ready to be turned 
backward, and Fig. 13 a detached front ele 
vation of the zero-register and the lever 
whereby it is operated. 
The same numerals and letters denote the 
same parts in each of the figures. 
The several parts of our machine are 
mounted upon a base or back 1 and inclosed 
by means of a case 2, the face of the latter 
being provided with openings A, B, and C, 
through which the registering characters may 
be read. The case is locked in position by 
means of a lock 3. 
Referring now more particularly to Figs. 3 
and 4, 4 denotes a plate Secured to the base 
in any desired manner, and projecting out 
ward from this plate at either side thereofare 
brackets 5, which support certain of the mov 
ing parts. A slide 6 constitutes the prime 
mover of the register, and this slidelies against 
the plate 4 and has a movement vertical there 
of, whose limit is indicated by the length of 
a slot S in the plate, in which slot runs a stud 
7 on the slide. A spring 9 normally holds the 
slide in the position shown at Fig. 4, and the 
movement of the slide in opposition to the 
spring is effected by means of the pull-cord 
10, which we prefer to arrange by passing a 
bight to said cord through a loop 11 on the 
slide, the branches of the cord extending up 
ward and then outward over pulleys 12,whence 
they run along the vehicle within easy reach 
of the conductor. In bearings in the brackets 
5 is journaled a shaft 13, upon which are 
loosely mounted three indicator-wheels 14, 
each independent of the other and each hav 
ing secured thereon a ten-toothed ratchet 
wheel, which we number, respectively, 15, 16, 
and 17. (See Fig. 9.) 
The indicator-wheels 14 are visible through 
the face-plate, as shown at Fig. 1, and show 
the number of passengers carried on each 
trip, each fare being indicated thereon as col 
lected. They constitute what is commonly 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
95 
IOC 
2 
t 
479,388 
25 in its engaged position. 
called the trip - register.' These ratchet 
wheels are similar in the number of their 
teeth, but differ in their contour-that is to 
say, the wheel 17 has ten teeth of equal depth 
5 and each of the general shape as those shown 
on the wheels 15 and 16 at Figs. 3 and 4. The 
wheel 16 (see Fig. 4) has one space between 
two of the teeth slightly deeper than the other 
nine spaces. The wheel 15 has its teeth of the 
Io ordinary type; but it has one space deeper than 
the deep space on the wheel 16. These three 
ratchet-wheels are engaged by detent-springs 
1S, whereby their free rotation is limited. A 
yoke 19 has the ends of its arms journaled on 
I5 the shaft 13 upon each side of the wheels 14. 
At its rear end and near the center thereof 
this yoke is connected with the slide 6 by 
means of the link 20. Inside the yoke a triple 
toothed pawl 21 is journaled upon a suitable 
20 pin. The teeth on this pawl we denote by 22, 
23, and 24, since they differ in length. The 
tooth 22 engages with the ratchet-wheel 15, 
the tooth 23 with 16, and the tooth 24 with 17. 
A helical spring 25 holds the pawl normally 
The operation of this portion of our inven 
tion is as follows: When the cord is pulled 
and the slide raised against the action of spring 
9, the yoke 19 is rocked upon its fulcrum lS 
3o and the pawl 21 raised so as to engage through 
its tooth 22a tooth upon the ratchet-wheel li, 
which it moves one step as the slide is returned 
to its position by the Spring when the cord is re 
leased. Normally the tooth 22 is the only one 
35 of the three teeth engaging either of the ratch 
et-wheels; but when said pawl 22 drops into 
the deep space on the ratchet-wheel 15 it per 
mits the pawl 23 to engage with one of the 
teeth on the ratchet-wheel 16, thus turning the 
4o latter one step at each revolution of the ratch 
et-wheel 15. When the two deep spaces on 15 
and 16 are in conjunction so that the pawls 22 
and 23 drop into them, the pawl 24 is thereby 
permitted to engage a tooth on the ratchet 
45 wheel17, SO as to turn the latter one step. The 
next movement will of course carry the deep 
Spaces Out of conjunction, and therefore the 
engagement of the tooth 24 and its operation 
of the ratchet-wheel 17 occurs once only at 
5o each ten steps of the wheel 16, or ten revolu 
tions of the wheel 15. This does away with 
other transfer mechanism between the indi 
cating-wheels. 
The shaft 13 carries three snail-cams 25, 
55 fast thereon and with their perpendicular faces 
26 all in the same vertical plane. Each of the 
ratchet-wheels bears upon its side a small 
spring-actuated plunger 27 (see Fig. 8) whose 
nose is in constant engagement with the pe 
6o riphery of Said cam 25. The wheels 14 all 
revolve in the direction shown by the arrow 
on Fig. 8, the shaft normally standing still. 
This permits the said wheels to revolve freely, 
each plunger riding upon its can from the 
65 lowest point to the highest point thereof and 
dropping over the face as it passes the high 
point. When, however, it is desired to turn the 
several indicating-wheels 14 back to zero, the 
shaft 13 is revolved by means of the knob 28, 
which projects outside the case in such direc 
tion that the shoulders on the cams engage 
against the ends of the plungers 27 one after 
the other, so as to turn them all to Zero. The 
stop which arrests the wheels 14, consisting of a 
square tooth taking into a notched disk on the 
shaft, will be presently referred to and its op 
eration explained. Thus it appears that the 
indicating-wheels 14 are operated by the slide 
so as to indicate each fare as it is collected by 
means of figures at the openings A, and at the 
end of each trip the indicating-train may be 
turned back to Zero. 
Above the aforesaid indicating-train is the 
zero-register. (Shown in position at the open 
ing B, Figs. 2, 3, and 4, and in detailin Figs. 6 
and 7.) Said register denotes the number of 
times the trip-register has been turned back 
to Zero. It is mounted upon a plate 30, secured 
to the outer ends of the bracketS 5. Said Zero 
register consists of a units-disk 31, provided 
with numerals, as shown at Fig. 2, and having 
secured at its rear side a ten-toothed ratchet 
wheel 32. A detent-spring 33 engages the 
ratchet-teeth. 
Co-operating with the disk 31 is a tens-disk 
34, whose periphery slightly overlaps the pe 
riphery of the disk 31. This disk also (see 
Fig. 2) bears numerals, and at its rear side 
has secured thereon a Star-wheel 35 having ten 
teeth. Against the periphery of this star 
wheel a detent-spring 36 engages. The disk 
31 bears upon its edge a pin 37, which at each 
revolution of said disk will engage one of the 
teeth of the star-wheel and turn the latter 
one step, thereby making of these two disks 
a train capable of registering up to 99. 
The principal indicating-train consisting 
of the wheels 14 is connected to the zero-reg 
ister 31 and 34 in such manner that normally 
the shaft 13 is locked against the operation 
of turning back the wheels 14 of said indi 
cating-train to Zero; but it may be unlocked 
by the operation of Operating the Zero-regis 
ter one step, as Will now be explained. Near 
its outer end the shaft 13 bears a disk38, hav 
ing therein a square seat or notch 68, as shown 
in the end elevation, Fig. 3. 
Pivoted above the shaft 13 is an angular le 
ver 39, having on its lower extremity a square 
ended tooth 40, which is normally seated in 
the notch of the disk 3S. 
41 is a lever, one extremity of which is full 
crumed on the axis of the disk. 31. (See Figs. 6 
and 7.) The body of this lever extends ob 
liquely outward and terminates in a knob or 
handle 42, which projects through the side of 
the case, as shown at Fig.1. Near its fulcrum 
point this lever bears a pawl 43, engaging the 
ratchet-wheel32. IBy raising this lever it is 
apparent from Fig. 6 that the disk 31 will be 
operated one step by the pawl 43. At about 
its upward limit of movement said lever 41 
engages the extension of the lever 39 and 
turns it about its pivotal point sufficiently to 
o 
75 
So 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
479,388 
3 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
withdraw its nose out of engagement with the 
disk 38, thereby freeing said disk. The oper 
ator may then operate the shaft 13 in the 
manner previously described to return the 
indicating-wheels 14 to zero. When released, 
the lever 41 is returned by means of a spring 
44 and the nose or tooth 40 by a small spring 
(not shown) is caused to seat and lock the 
disk 3S after the latter has made one revolu 
tion. It is therefore necessary, in order to 
turn back the indicating-wheels 14, to first in 
dicate a trip on the disks 31 and 34, and this 
is designed to serve as a check upon the con 
ductor. 
The total number of fares received, irre 
spective of the separate trips, is registered by 
means of a train of gears now to be described 
and whose wheels appear through the open 
ings C at the front of the case. The five in 
dicating-wheels 45 are independently jour 
naled upon a shaft 46, hung in bearings 
in the brackets 5. One of the wheels 45 
the units-wheel, which appears at the right 
of Fig. 2-has secured upon its face a ten 
toothed ratchet-wheel 47. This ratchet-wheel 
is actuated one tooth at each upward move 
ment of the slide 6 by means of a lever 48, 
whose outer end is fulcrumed about the 
shaft 46 and carries a pawl 49, and whose 
other end is connected by means of a link 50 
to the vibratory yoke 19, which, as before 
stated, is actuated from the slide. The units 
wheel, whose operation by the lever has just 
been explained, carries on the face away from 
the ratchet-wheel a pin 51, which rotates in 
the same vertical plane as a star-wheel 52, 
which is loosely journaled on a shaft 53 be 
low shaft 46. This star-wheel has ten teeth, 
and at each revolution of the units-wheel is 
moved one tooth. Secured upon said star 
wheel and moving With it is a gear 54, which 
meshes with a gear 55, Secured to the tens 
wheel 45, so that, as will be readily under 
stood, each full revolution of the units-wheel 
will effect one-tenth of a revolution of the 
tens-wheel through the star-wheel 52 and the 
gears 54 and 55. By repetitions of this mech 
anism the hundreds, thousands, and tens-of 
thousands wheels are operated at proper in 
tervals to register correctly the whole num 
ber of fares received. 
For the purpose of ringing a suitable bell 
56 as each fare is registered, we provide the 
slide 6 with a pawl 57, pivoted to the face of 
the slide and normally engaging a stop 5S 
thereon. (See Fig. 5.) The pawl may move 
away from said stop for a purpose presently 
to be explained; but said movement is made 
against the action of a spring 59, which con 
stantly engages the pawl. Alongside the slide 
is pivoted a lever 60, having a recess 61 in its 
edge and bearing a bell-hammer 62. From 
the recess toward the bell-hammer the inner 
face of said lever is oblique. A spring 63 
constantly impels said lever toward the bell. 
When the slide is raised by the pull of the 
cord to its full limit of movement, the pawl 
by acting against the edge of the lever forces 
it outward against the action of the Spring 63 
until said pawl falls into the recess 61, when 
the pressure of the pawl being removed the 
hammer strikes the bell. It will be observed 
that the bell does not ring until the slide has 
been moved through its whole throw when the 
registry of a fare on the totalizing-register 45 
is complete and its indication on the wheels 
14 assured upon the return motion of the 
slide. As the slide returns the pawl 57 rises 
against its spring and passes idly over the 
oblique face of the lever 60. 
For the purpose of compelling the conduct 
or to impart at each pull of the cord a full 
length movement of the slide we provide the 
edge of the latter with teeth 64, whose points 
project beyond the line of the body of the 
slide and the bottoms of the teeth are also 
slightly outside said line, as will clearly ap. 
pearby reference to Fig. 5. With this toothed 
portion of the slide a pawl 65 is arranged to 
co-operate. This pawl will swing in both di 
rections about its pivotal point, but is nor 
mally held at right angles to the line of move 
ment of the side by means of a spring 66. 
In order that the slide may pass the pawl, 
the latter turns slightly upon its pivotal point 
and will drag over the teeth, permitting the 
slide to pass; but if the slide be moved through 
only a part of its traverse and is then released 
the pawl will lock between the teeth and pre 
vent the return of the slide. Whenever all 
the teeth have passed the pawl, as is the case 
when the slide has received its full throw, the 
pawl will return to its normal position and 
upon the reverse movement of the slide will 
drag freely over the teeth in the opposite di 
rection. 
To briefly recapitulate, the operation of 
our machine when organized as heretofore 
described is as follows: A pull upon the op 
erating cord or strap of sufficient force to 
move the slide throughout its full throw will 
raise the yoke 19 about its fulcrum to permit 
of the engagement of the triple pawl 21 with 
the ratchet-wheels 15, 16, and 17 on the pri 
mary indicating-wheels. This upward move 
ment of the yoke through the parts 50, 48, 
and 49 registers upon the totalizing-register 
wheels 45, whose sum total may be Seen 
through the openings Cin the case. The bell 
rings at the moment when the slide reaches 
the top of its throw. The return of the slide, 
which is effected by the spring 9, permits the 
triple pawl 21 to turn the ratchet-wheels 15, 
16, and 17, and so indicate the fare received 
upon the wheels 14. 
At the end of each trip the number of fares 
appearing upon the indicating-wheels 14 is 
taken off by the proper official. Having noted 
this number, he depresses the lever 41, thereby 
registering the trip and at the same time un 
locking the shaft 13, so as to enable him to 
turn the indicating-wheels 14 back to Zero in 
the manner hereinbefore described. 
The trip-register wheels 31 and 34 are turned 
75 
So 
c 
Io5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
479,388 
S. 
55 
ter by rotation of the former, a locking-lever 
normally engaging the shaft of the indicat 
ing-wheels and preventing the rotation there 
of in either direction, a Zero-register contigul 
ous to the indicating-train, and an actuating 
lever for said Zero-register, said lever adapted 
to release the locking-lever when the Zero-reg 
ister is operated, substantially as described. 
4. In a machine of the character specified, 
a vertically - movable slide constituting the 
prime mover and a triple-toothed actuating 
pawl operated by said slide, in combination 
with the shaft 13, a series of indicating-wheels 
independently journaled on said shaft and 
constituting the trip-register and provided 
each with a ratchet-wheelin position to be en 
gaged by the triple pawl, the means for con 
nection between said shaft and wheels, con 
sisting of the snail-cams on the shaft and the 
spring-actuated plungers on the wheels, the 
Zero-registering train adjacent to the indicat 
ing-wheels, an operating-lever for the Zero 
registering train, and a locking-lever normally 
engaging and holding the notched disk on the 
shaft l8, but adapted to be engaged and 
thrown out of its locked position by the op 
erating-lever of the Zero-register, Substan 
tially as described. 
5. The prime mover consisting of the slide 
and theyoke and the pivoted triple pawl actu 
ated by said prime mover, in combination with 
the shaft 13, the wheels 14 upon said shaft, 
the ratchet-wheels borne upon said wheels 14 
in the field of operation of the triple pawl, the 
cams and plungers interposed between the 
wheels 14 and the shaft, the locking-lever hav 
ing normal engagement with said shaft 13, the 
zero-register, and a lever 41 for the operation 
of said register and adapted, also, at each reg 
istering movement to release the shaft 13 by 
disengaging the locking-lever there from, the 
whole arranged and adapted to operate as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
FREDERICK C. BOYD. 
RICHARD MARTIN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN C. GALLAGHER, 
LIVINGSTON W. CLEAVELAND. 
75 
So 
85 
O 
backward only at stated intervals and the 
totalizing-register wheels 45 are probably at 
the same intervals. This return of the wheels 
to Zero requires no special mechanism, but 
may be accomplished by rotating the wheels 
by hand one at a time, the case having been 
opened for that purpose. 
The state of the totalizing-register serves 
as a check for comparison with the totals re 
ceived from the several trips when added to 
gether and the number of said trips may be 
obtained from the trip-register. 
We claim 
I. In a machine of the character described, 
the shaft 13, bearing the independently-jour 
naled indicating-wheels constituting the trip 
register and having means for engaging and 
restoring said wheels to zero, as described, of 
the Zero-register, an operating-lever for actu 
ating said Zero-register, and a locking-lever 
normally holding the shaft 13 as against ro 
tation, but adapted to be engaged and with 
drawn by the upward movement of the actu 
ating-lever of the Zero-register, whereby prior 
to the return of the indicating-wheels the op 
eration of the zero-register is essential, sub 
Stantially as specified. 
2. In a machine as described, the combina 
tion, with the vertically-movable cord-oper 
ated slide, of the triple-toothed pawl and 
means of connection between it and the slide, 
the trip-register consisting of the wheels 14, 
independently journaled upon the shaft 13 
side by side, means, as described, interposed 
between said shaft and each of the wheels for 
turning the latter back to Zero by the rotation 
of the former, a Zero-register having a lever 
for its actuation step by step, and a locking 
lever normally holding the shaft 13 as against 
rotation and lying in the path of the actuat 
ing-lever of the Zero-register, the whole adapt 
ed to operate substantially as described. 
3. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination, with a set of indicating 
wheels constituting a trip-register for the in 
dication of the separate fares, a shaft where 
on said wheels are independently journaled, 
a snail-cam and Spring-actuated plunger in 
terposed between said shaft and each of the 
wheels for engaging and turning back the lat 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479488.txt	(No Model.) 
Z. T. CHAMBERS 
WASHING MACHINE, 
No. 479,488, 
Patented July 26, 1892. 
 
2 St. SS 
A 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ZACHARIAH. T. CHAMBERS, OF CALIFORNIA, MISSOURI. 
WASHING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,488, dated July 26, 1892. 
Application filed February 26, 1892, Serial No. 422,869, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all Zwhom, it may concern: 
Be it known that 1, ZACHARIAH. T. CHAM 
BERS, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
California, in the county of Moniteau and State 
of Missouri, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Washing-Machines; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in washing-machines, 
and it relates more particularly to that class 
of Washing-machines in which the Washing is 
performed by passing the clothes between 
rollers held to their work by spring-power. 
The object of the invention is to generally 
improve upon the construction and to render 
more efficient in operation this class of Wash 
ing-machines. 
Another and more immediate object of the 
present invention consists in journaling the 
main roller in the upper section of the ma 
chine, which section is hinged at one of its 
ends to the body of the washer and at its 
other end is provided with a series of spiral 
springs, which springs serve to detachably 
connect the upper section with the body por 
tion of the washer and at the same time serve 
to regulate the pressure between the rollers. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear. 
To these ends and to such others as the in 
vention may pertain, the same consists in the 
peculiar construction and in the novel com 
bination, arrangement, and adaptation of 
parti: all as more fully hereinafter described, 
shown in the accompanying drawings, and 
then specifically defined in the appended 
claim. 
The invention is fully illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, which, with the letters 
of reference marked thereon, form a part of 
this specification, like letters of reference in 
dicating the same parts throughout the sev 
eral views, and in which drawings 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a wash 
ing-machine embodying my improvements. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical section of the 
same. Fig. 3 is an enlarged detailin section, 
which will be more particularly hereinafter 
referred to. 
Reference now being had to the details of 
the drawings by letter, A designates the body 
portion of the machine, which is preferably 
rectangular in form, open at the top, and pro 
vided at one of its ends with outlet a. 
B is a corrugated roller which extends trans 
versely across the machine near its bottom, 
at substantially the longitudinal center of the 
body portion of the machine. 
C is a cylinder the periphery of which is com 
posed of a series of slats cc, having between 
the slats open spaces c', and the said slats 
are each provided with corrugations c, which 
extend longitudinally of the slats and are 
adapted to mesh with the corrugations upon 
the face of the roller B. 
The cylinder C, it will be observed, is jour 
naled at its ends within the side bars D' of 
the frame D, a short distance to one side of 
the longitudinal center of the said frame D, 
so that the face of the cylinder is brought 
into contact with the roller B at one side in 
stead of directly above the roller. The shaft 
E of the roller or cylinder C is extended 
through the side bar of the frame D and is 
bent to form an operating crank or handle F. 
The frame D, it will be observed, is at one 
of its ends hinged to the body portion of the 
washer, as shown at d. The sides and bot 
tom of the body portion of the washer at the 
end opposite to that at which the frame D is 
hinged are extended for a short distance be 
yond the end G, and secured at their lower 
ends to the said end G of the machine by 
means of hooks H' are spiral springs H, the 
opposite or upper ends of which springs are 
attached to the under face of the overlapping 
end strip D of the frame D. It will thus be 
seen that the hinged section D, in which the 
cylinder is journaled, may be at any time 
readily raised by detaching the hooks H', thus 
permitting the said frame, with its cylinder, 
to be raised from the washer. The springs H, 
Seated, as described, within the recess at the 
end of the body portion of the machine, will 
be out of the way and not likely to interfere 
With or catch upon adjacent objects, and 
95 
IOO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
V 
479,488 
the said springs will serve to at all times in 
sure the necessary pressure between the cyl 
inder and roller. 
In operation the clothing is placed within 
the body portion of the machine and the 
hinged frame D secured in place by means 
of the hooks H'. By causing the cylinder to 
rotate first on one and then in the opposite 
direction the clothing will be carried back 
ward and forward between the cylinder and 
roller and will be thoroughly cleaned. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim to be new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
The herein-described washing-machine, the 
same comprising, in combination, the body 
portion of the machine, the corrugated roller 
journaled therein at substantially the longi 
O 
tudinal center of the body portion near its 
bottom, the frame D', hinged at one of its 
ends to the body portion, the cylinder C, jour 
naled in said frame and having corrugated 
periphery and radial openings provided with 
an operating-crank, and the spiral springs H, 
secured at their upper ends to the under side 
of the end strip of the frame and at their lower 
ends having hooks, as described, whereby 
the said springs may be detachably connected 
with the body portion of the machine, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ZACHARIAH. T. CHAMBERS. 
25 
Witnesses: 
FRANK B. LYON, 
L. D. SPRAGUE. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479588.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 479,588. 
 
J. I. FLANAGEN. 
HANDLE FOR WASH BOILERS. 
Patented July 26, 1892. 
s 
2 
BY 
WITNESSES 
O2 z. c.476). 
-- 
/NVENTOR 
J 
stree 
TTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JAMES I. FLANAGEN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
HANDLE FOR WASH-Boile Rs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,588, dated July 26, 1892. 
Application filed March 5, 1892, Serial No. 423,854, (No model.) 
45 
So 
55 
ears, or vice versa; but in consequence of the 
Be it known that I, JAMES I. FLANAGEN, a limbs E the connection of the rod with the 
ears is braced and said limbs, owing to their 
angular form, cannot be drawn through the 
sockets, and thus the handle A and ears are 
held together in a firm and durable manner 
and remain intact. By having the limbs E 
extending along the ear, as shown, a sufficient 
area of the same is furnished for securely and 
reliably securing them to the said ear, while 
by bending them against the ears, so as to 
firmly embrace the latter, additional firmness 
is given to the connection of said rod and ears, 
and the limbs may be secured to the ears in 
stead of terminating on the ears adjacent to 
the ends of the wooden handle. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A handle for a wash-boiler, consisting of 
ears with sockets at their ends and adapted 
to be secured to said boiler, a grip with its 
ends fitting in said sockets, and a rod extend 
ing through openings in the said grip and 
sockets and having angular limbs at its ends 
outside of said sockets extending over the 
ears and embracing the same and are fixed 
thereto, substantially as described. 
2. A handle for a boiler, consisting of me 
tallic ears formed of open sides having sockets 
at their ends, a hollow wooden grip with its 
ends fitting in said sockets, and a rod passing 
through said grip and Sockets and having 
limbs at its ends extending along the open 
sides and rigidly secured thereto, said parts 
being combined substantially as described. 
JAMES I. FLANAGEN. 
To all whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Handles for Wash-Boilers, &c., 
which improvement is fully set forth in the 
following specification and accompanying 
drawings. 
Myinvention consists of a handle formed of 
a non-heat-conducting grip-such as wood 
which is connected to supporting - ears by 
means of a rod passed through the handle and 
ears and having its ends bent over and em 
bracing said ears and fixed thereto. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
handle embodying my invention. Fig. 2 rep 
resents a longitudinal section thereof on line 
ac ac, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in both the figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
Wooden handle or grip, whose ends are fitted 
in sockets C of metallic ears B, the latter be 
ing adapted to be riveted or otherwise firmly 
secured to a wash-boiler, &c. 
In the socket C and the handle A are open 
ings, through which is passed the rod D, whose 
ends extend outside of said sockets and are 
bent down or upon the sides of the ears, as 
limbs E, which embrace the exterior of the 
sockets, and along the sides of the ears and 
adjacent portions of the ears and are soldered 
thereto, thereby acting as a reinforce for the 
said sides of the ears when made of open-work 
or of lightness in weight. 
It is well known that handles of wash-boil 
ers and similar vessels are subjected to harsh 
usage and severe strain, whereby the handle 
A proper is liable to be wrenched from the 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
A. P. JENNINGS. 
Witnesses: 
to 
75 
O 
25 
35 
M 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479688.txt	(No Model.) 
G. A. WELLER. 
WENDING MACHINE, 
No. 479,688. 
Patented July 26, 1892. 
s: 
 
 
  
N N 
 
 
 
 
 
- - - - - - - 
P 
F 
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 
2 
in v2 2 
25 t W al 
- 
- 
- 
 
 
sey 
WITNESSES 
ES 
/NVENTOR 
6. A z2. 
... ' 
ATTORMEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAVUS A. WELLER, OF LASALLE, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CHARLES L. DIESTERWEG, OF SAME PLACE. 
VENDING - MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,688, dated July 26, 1892. 
Application filed May 24, 1892, Serial No. 434,162, (No model.) 
IO 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GUSTAVUSA. WELLER, 
of La Salle, in the county of La Salle and 
State of Illinois, have invented a new and Im 
proved Vending-Machine, of which the follow 
ing is a. full, clear, and exact description. 
The invention relates to coin-operated vend 
ing-machines; and its object is to provide a 
new and improved machine which is simple 
and durable in construction, very accurate 
and automatic in operation, and more espe 
cially designed for selling envelopes, postage 
Stamps, and the like. 
The invention consists of a spring-pressed 
bar carrying the coin-holding lever and alock 
ing-arm pivotally connected with the said le 
Ver and adapted to lock the said bar in place. 
The invention also consists of certain parts 
and details and combinations of the same, as 
will be hereinafter described, and then pointed 
out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a transverse section of the im 
provement on the line 1 1 of Fig. 2, and Fig. 
2 is a sectional front view of the same on the 
line 22 of Fig. 1. 
The improved vending-machine is provided 
With a suitably-constructed casing A,in which 
is fitted to slide transversely a bar B, extend 
ing beyond the front of the casing A and car 
rying at its outer end a button C for conven 
iently pushing the bar. The inner end of the 
latter is fitted to slide in a bracket D, at 
tached to the back of the casing A, and on 
this bracket is arranged a spring E, pressing 
against the end of the bar B, so as to hold the 
latter normally in an outermost position, the 
outward movement of the bar being limited 
by a stop-pin B, adapted to rest against the 
inner surface of the front of the casing A. 
On one side of the bar B within the casing 
A is fulcrumed a lever F, formed at its front 
end with a spoon F, adapted to receive the 
coin introduced through a chute G, held in 
the front of the casing A and leading to the 
said spoon F. The rear end of the lever F is 
5o pivotally connected with an arm H, fulcrumed 
35 
45 
3O 
 
at H' on the bracket D, the said arm being 
adapted to abut against a lug B", formed on 
top of the rear end of the bar B. 
When the arm H is in a normal position, as 
shown in Fig. 1, then the said arm is inclined 55 
downwardly to bring its pivot H' slightly 
above the pivot connecting the lever F with 
the arm H. When the latter is in this posi 
tion, it securely locks the bar B, so as to pre 
vent the latter from being pushed inward un 
til a coin is introduced, as hereinafter more 
fully described. 
On the bar B is fulcrumed a pawl I, adapted 
to engage a ratchet-wheel J, secured on one 
side of a wheel K., journaled in suitable bear 
ings arranged within the casing A. The rim 
of the wheel K is preferably faced with rub 
ber or other flexible material, the bottom of 
the wheel extending through a slotL', formed 
in a plate L, held within the casing A. The 
under side of this plate L is flush with a slot 
N, formed in the front of the casing and 
through which the envelopes are passed one 
at a time from within the casing A when the 
machine is operated, as hereinafter more fully 
described. 
The envelopes O or other articles to be sold 
are placed one on top of the other and are 
supported on a plate P, pressed on the under 
side by a spring Q, resting on the bottom or 
base of the casing A. The envelopes or other 
articles to be sold are thus held between the 
two plates L and P in such a manner that the 
top envelope is always engaged by the rim of 
the wheel K, so that when the latter is rotated 
in the direction of the arrow a' (see Fig. 1) the 
top envelope or article is pushed forward and 
out through the slotN in the front of the cas 
ing A to be taken hold of by the operator and 
pulled entirely out of the casing. 
The operation is as follows: When the sev 
eral parts are in a normal position, as shown in 
Fig.1, then the spoon F of the lever F is in 
close proximity to the inner end of the chute 
G, so that when a coin is introduced in the 
latter it passes onto the spoon F, thereby 
overbalancing the rear end of the lever F, so 
that the front end of the latter swings down 
ward and the rear end upward, carrying along 
the arm H until the parts mentioned are in 
85 
95 
9o 
75 
65 
OO 
2 
479,688 
the position shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1 
that is, the locking-arm H is moved away from 
the lug B of the bar B, so as to free the lat 
ter. The operator now pushes on the button 
C to move the bar B inward, whereby the jerk 
given to the bar B causes the displacement of 
the coin on the downwardly-extending spoon 
F' of the lever F, so that the coin falls off the 
Spoon and the lever F is free to swing back. 
At the inward movement of the bar B the 
pawl I causes the ratchet-wheel J and the 
Wheel K to rotate in the direction of the arrow 
a', whereby the upper most envelope or other 
article is pushed forward to extend partly 
through the slot N, the outer end of the en 
velope or article being then taken hold of by 
the operator for final removal from the cas 
ing A. As soon as the operator releases the 
pressure on the bar B the spring E forces the 
latter back to its normal position. At the 
same time the arm H swings down to its nor 
mal position behind the lug B, thus locking 
the lever B in place. The latter cannot then 
be pushed in Ward until a new coin is intro 
duced through the slot G to disengage the 
arin H from the lug B, as above described. 
It will be seen that but a few parts comprise 
the entire apparatus, which is thus not liable 
to get easily out of order. It will further be 
seen that on the return movement of the bar 
B the free end of the pawl I glides over the 
teeth of the ratchet-wheel J, so that the latter 
remains at a standstill during the return move 
ment of the said bar. 
The entire apparatus is very simple and 
durable in construction and positive in its 
movementS. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A vending-machine comprising a spring 
pressed bar, a coin-holding lever fulcrumed 
on the said bar, and a locking-arm pivotally 
connected with the said lever and adapted to 
engage the said bar to lock the latter in place, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. A vending-machine comprising a spring 
pressed bar, a coin-holding lever fulcrumed 
on the said bar, a locking-arm pivotally con 
nected with the said lever and adapted to en 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
gage the said bar to lock the latter in place, 
and a coin-chute opening on the spoon end of 
the said lever, so that when the coin passes 
on the latter the arm H disengages the said 
bar to unlock the latter, substantially as shown 
and described. 
3. In a vending-machine, the combination, 
with a wheel mounted to revolve and adapted 
to engage the article to be sold, of a spring 
pressed bar mounted to slide and carrying a 
pawl engaging a ratchet-wheel on the said 
wheel, a coin-holding lever fulcrumed on the 
said bar and formed at its front end with a 
spoon adapted to receive the coin, and a lock 
ing-arm pivotally connected with the rear end 
of the said lever and adapted to engage the 
said bar to lock the latter in place, Substan 
tially as shown and described. 
4. In a vending-machine, the combination, 
with a wheel mounted to revolve and adapted 
to engage the article to be sold, of a spring 
pressed bar mounted to slide and carrying a 
pawl engaging a ratchet-wheel on the said 
wheel, a coin-holding lever fulcrumed on the 
said bar and formed at its front end with a 
spoon adapted to receive the coin, a locking 
arm pivotally connected with the rear end of 
the said lever and adaped to engage the said 
bar to lock the latter in place, and a spring 
pressed plate carrying the articles to be sold 
and forcing the uppermost article in contact 
with the periphery of the said wheel, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a vending-machine, the combination 
of a spring-pressed bar provided With a lug 
and fitted to slide transversely, a pivoted arm 
adapted to engage the said lug to lock the bar 
in place, a coin-holding lever fulcrumed on the 
said bar and pivotally connected at its rear 
end with the said arm, a fork arranged at the 
front end of the said lever to receive the coin, 
a pawl fulcrumed on the said bar, a ratchet 
wheel engaged by the said pawl, and a wheel 
carrying the said ratchet-wheel and adapted 
to engage with its rim the article to be sold, 
substantially as shown and described. 
GUSTAWUS A. WELLER. 
- 
Witnesses: 
WM. KAPFER, 
P. H. KOHL. 
9o 
95 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479788.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 479,788, 
E. G. COOK & H. H. EYMAN. 
B00K RACK. 
- 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 2, 1892. 
Wiiposses, 
1. 
Nf 
y2ezro/Affrgeys, 
 
Igleplars, 
Aa2zzzzz/6. Coo/, as 
27 
Zezzzz Z.Z2722-222, 
27 
(No Model.) 
No. 479,788, 
E. G., COOK & H. H. EYMAN, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 2, 
BOOK RACK 
7 
Patented Aug 
2 
1892. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
sizes 
(SA & 
f 
s 
3's Zeps 
cs 
s 
s2.s 
S 
s 
s 
e 
--S 
es 
s 
e 
H 
S. S 
S. 
Azzee/ 6. Cooz, it 
72, 
2/272/A 
27 
THE MORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-ITHo, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN G. COOK AND HENRY H. EYMAN, OF FULLERTON, NEBRASKA 
BOOKRACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,788, dated August 2, 1892. 
Application filed December 4, 1891, Serial No. 414,025. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, EDWIN G. COOK and 
HENRY H. EYMAN, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Fullerton, in the county of 
Nance and State of Nebraska, have invented 
a new and useful Book-Rack, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
book cases or racks, and to that particular 
class thereof designed for the storage of pub 
lic books or records that are constantly han 
dled during the day and must be carefully 
stored in a safe place at night. 
The objects of our invention are to provide 
a rack So constructed as to be portable to and 
fron the vault or storage-place, and to pro 
vide a convenient counter, into which the 
rack may thus be run and over which per 
Sons may reach for the purpose of withdraw 
ing books for examining the same upon the 
Counter; and, furthermore, to so construct the 
rack as to economize space and to obviate in 
a great measure the wear and tear to which 
the books are usually exposed in withdraw 
ing and replacing the same from and into the 
rack. 
With the above objects in view the inven 
tion consists in certain features of construe 
tion hereinafter specified, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
diagrammatic view of a rack, the same being 
in position in the counter. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective of the rack and counter. Fig. 3 is a 
front elevation of the rack. Fig. 4 is an end 
view. Fig. 5 is a vertical cross-section. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
In constructing the rack or case we employ 
opposite side sills 1, and upon stub-shafts se 
cured to the opposite sides of the same near 
its ends mount wheels 2, the peripheries of 
which are preferably L-shaped or flanged and 
adapted to move over a track. The side sills 
1 are connected by transverse sills 3, and up 
on the four sills rests a bottom 4. From the 
ends of the side sills rise vertical posts 5, 
which support upper bars 6, upon which is 
mounted the roof 7. Intermediate bars 8 and 
9 also connect the posts at the sides and ends 
thereof, and intermediate vertical bars 10 con 
nect the horizontal side and end bars 8 and 
O 
25 
35 
45 
9 between the posts 5. The transversely-op 
posite intermediate vertical bars 10 are Con 
nected by transverse partitions 11, which ex 
tend from the sills 1 to the roof 7, and each 
of the bars 10 is connected to its adjacent 
post 5 by a side wall 12. Cleats 13 have their 
front edges notched to receive the bars 8 and 
9 at the sides and ends of the frames thus 
constructed, and those at the sides of the 
rack have their inner ends connected with 
a longitudinal central partition 14, which ex 
tends from the cross-sills 3 to the roof and 
from the transverse partition at one side to 
that at the other. The end series of cleats 
13 also have their outer ends notched, While 
their inner ends are secured to the tranSVerse 
partitions 11. These cleats are secured in po 
sition preferably by screws 15, passed through 
the horizontal bars S and 9, and are located a 
distance apart slightly greater than the width 
of the books, between which cleats said books 
are to slide. The roof is provided upon its un 
der side with corresponding though slightly 
narrower cleats 16. Through each series of 
cleats there are passed in this instance three 
transversely-disposed metal shafts, and in the 
faces of the cleats concentric with the shafts 
countersunk annular recesses 17 are formed. 
Between the cleats upon the shaft loose roll 
ers 18 are mounted, the ends of the rollers 
taking in the recesses of the cleats. The roll 
ers are all plain or cylindrical, with the ex 
ception of those at the rear of the cleats, each 
of these being provided at its center with an 
annular enlargement 19. 
20 designates a counter or stand somewhat 
of U shape-that is, consisting of opposite 
longitudinal sides and a connecting cross-sec 
tion at one end, the remaining end being Open, 
as shown. The top of the counter is about 
even with the lower transverse bars 9, so that. 
the rack, being located within and embraced 
by the counter, which is proportioned with 
relation to the rack, will give ready access to 
its contents, and the books may be drawn 
down from their respective positions and ex 
amined upon the counter and replaced. By 
reason of the loose rollers it will be seen that 
the friction and rubbing that usually take 
place between the edges of the books and the 
shelves are almost entirely overcome, and in 
this manner the records can be all the better 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
479,788 
mounted upon wheels fitting the track, the 
width of said rack approximating that of the 
opening in the counter, substantially as speci 
fied. 
2. In a book-rack, the combination, with the 
opposite sides, a front horizontal connecting 
bar, and an inner partition, of a series of 
cleats connected at their ends to the CrOSS-bar 
and partition and arranged parallel to each 
other, a series of shafts extending through the 
partition, and series of loose rolls mounted on 
the shafts between the partitions, the inner 
or rear series of rolls being provided with Con 
vexed bosses at their centers, substantially as 
specified. 
3. In a book-rack, the combination, with the 
opposite sills, the transverse connecting-sills 
located some distance from the ends of the 
first sills, the pair of vertical transverse parti 
tions, the four posts rising from the ends of the 
first sills, and the intermediate posts located 
at the edges of the partitions and rising from 
the first-mentioned sills, of the series of hori 
Zontal post-connecting strips, the top, the cen 
tral longitudinal partition connecting the 
transverse partitions, the series of cleats hav 
ing their outer ends recessed to receive the 
cross-bars and their inner ends connected to 
the partitions and extending above and be 
low the cross-bars, the series of loose rolls 
mounted between the cleats, and the upper 
series of cleats depending from the roof and 
corresponding with thoseheretofore described, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signa 
tures in the presence of two Witnesses. 
EDWIN G. COOK. 
HENRY H. EYMAN. 
Witnesses: 
CLARENCE E. BRADY, 
CYRUS H. GILMORE. 
45 
55 
75 
preserved and the cost of maintaining them 
in condition greatly reduced. The counter 
is preferably located at some point near a 
Convenient vault or storage-chamber, where 
5 it is the custom to deposit the books during 
the night. Such vault we have indicated 
by the numeral 22, and from the vault to a 
point within the counter runs the track 23. 
By this arrangement we avoid the necessity 
Io of removing all the books from the rack or 
their depositories during the day and placing 
them in the vault or storage-chamber, and, 
furthermore, we avoid the necessity of re 
moving the books from the storage-chamber 
I5 in the morning and replacing them upon the 
rack, whereby an assistant for this purpose is 
obviated. By our invention in the morning 
the rack is run out from the vault upon the 
track and between or within the counter, the 
2O Same being accomplished readily by one man, 
and the books all simultaneously moved with 
out any wear whatever. When in position in 
the counter, the rack resembles a huge case 
Surrounded and formed in part with the coun 
At night, when it is necessary to replace 
the books, the rack is simply pushed from its 
position in the counter over the track and 
back to the vault. 
By increasing the diameter of the rear roll 
3o ers 18, as indicated at 19, the same are made to 
take between the backs of the books and sup- - 
port the edges of the leaves. Such support 
adds greatly to the durability of the books, 
as the tendency the heavy leaves have to sag 
35 ging after long standing of the books is well 
known and quite objectionable. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim is 
1. The combination, with the counter hav 
4o ing the opening, the vault or storage-chamber, 
and the track leading from the vault to the 
opening in the counter, of the book - rack 
25 ter. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479890.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 479,890. 
 
J. LYE. 
GLOWE FASTENING, 
Patented Aug. 2, 1892, 
A722/e 7z Zt a 7 
a-4. 5 ye 
f 
7%as a 22ro7-7-e 27s, 
TENORS 
PETERS co, PHoro-Litho, washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN LYE, OF GLASGOW, SCOTLAND. 
GOVE - FASTENING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,890, dated August 2, 1892. 
Application filed February 20, 1892, Serial No. 422,329, (No model.) Patented in England May 13, 1891, No. 8,188, 
55 
knotted together at their ends, the knot I be- 45 
Be it known that I, JOHNLYE, a citizen of ing, if desired, covered with a metallic or 
other ornament. To the ring, sleeve, or disk 
II are attached the ends of two or more cords 
or laces ii, which are passed through the eye 
lets f f at the upper edges of the glove, and 
are thence carried, with the fastening-laces c, 
through the ring or sleeve II and tied or knot 
ted at I with these laces. By this arrange 
ment when the glove is on the hand and the 
knotted ends of the laces drawn the eyeleted 
edges of the glove are drawn tightly together, 
and the pull upon the cords or laces attached 
to the ring or sleeve causes the latter to slide 
down upon the laces toward the glove. 
By turning over a cam-lever h, which bears 
on a spring-plate h' within the sleeve H, the 
laces are firmly grasped between said plate 
and an under plate h, unfastening of the 
glove being thereby prevented, while by rais 
ing the lever h and sliding back the ring or 65 
sleeve H by hand the lacing of the glove may 
be freely loosened. 
Having now described the invention, what 
I desire to claim, and secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
In combination with a glove, a plurality of 
laces connected there with, a clamp arranged 
to slide on the said laces, and the means for 
automatically operating the said clamp to 
ward the glove as the laces are drawn upon, 
consisting of the cords ji, attached at one end 
to the clamp, passing thence through a pair 
of eyelets on the glove, the free ends of said 
cords being attached to the laces, substan 
tially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal this 1st day of February, 1892. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
the United Kingdom of Great Britain and 
Ireland, residing at Sanchiehall Street, Glas 
gOW, in the county of Lanark, Scotland, have 
invented new and useful Improvements in 
Glove-Fastenings, (which have not been pat 
ented in any country except Great Britain, ly 
Letters Patent dated the 13th day of May, 
1891, No. 8, 188;) and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, which will enable 
others skilled in the art or manufacture to 
which it relates to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to fastenings for 
gloves; and it has for its object to permit of 
the glove to which the improved device is ap 
plied being drawn tight upon the wrist and 
alm by a simple pull upon the end of a num 
ber of cords or laces which replace the usual 
buttons or other fastenings. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate the invention, Figure 1 is a view of a 
glove, showing the improved fastening ap 
plied. Fig. 2 is a similar view showing the 
glove unfastened, and Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 are 
detailed views of part of the fastening. 
A single button or other metallic fastening 
composed, for example, of a stud a on one 
side entering a catch b on the other side of 
the glove is applied at the Wrist, and above 
that point on each side of the glove G, ex 
tending upward on the arm, cords or laces c 
are fastened, preferably, to eyelets d, fixed in 
the glove-leather, the alternate cords or laces 
or alternate pairs being fastened to opposite 
sides. The cords or laces pass from the one 
side to and through eyelets d' on the opposite 
side, and thence loosely within a lining at e 
inside the glove and out through eyelets fif 
at the upper edges. Thence the cords or laces 
are passed through a ring or sleeve H, which 
may be made in the form of a disk or sphere 
or of other ornamental form, and they are 
JOHN LYE. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
C. E., Chartered Patent Agent, Glasgow. 
WALLACE FAIRWEATHER, 
JNO. ARMSTRONG, Sr., 
Clerk, Glasgow. 
75 
o 
3o 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US479990.txt	(No Model.) 
J. P. ROLLINS. 
CAR COUPLING. 
No. 479,990. 
Patented Aug. 2, 1892. 
  
 
 
 
-zf 
ZA 
gast 79 
  
 
 
 
 
24 
r 
 
 
 
 
 
Yy 
ly - 
 
: 
a 
see 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
- Z. 
It eplr 
ZZ772 ozzzzs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN P. ROLLINS, OF CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
GEORGE O. ROLLINS, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 479,990, dated August 2, 1892. 
Application filed March 11, 1892, Serial No. 424,573. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN P. ROLLINS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cedar 
Rapids, in the county of Linn and State of 
Iowa, have invented a new and useful Car 
Coupling, of which the following is a specifi 
(ation. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
car-couplings. 
The object of the present invention is to 
simplify and improve the construction of 
twin-jaw couplings and to enable the knuckles 
to be operated from the side of the car. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claims hereto appended, 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation 
of a car-coupling constructed in accordance 
with this invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical lon 
gitudinal sectional view. Fig. 3 is a horizon 
tal sectional view. 
Like numerals of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lingS. 
1 designates a draw-head, to which is piv 
oted by a knuckle-pin 2 a knuckle 3, and 
which is provided with a longitudinal open 
ing 4, and having arranged therein a sliding 
latch-block 5, arranged to engage a shoulder 
6 of the knuckle, to hold the latter in engage 
ment with a knuckle of a twin coupling. The 
latch-block 5 is slightly curved throughout 
its length and is arranged on inclined ways 
7, which are curved to conform to the config 
uration of the latch-block, and the latter is 
withdrawn from the knuckle to allow the lat 
ter to be opened for uncoupling by a rock 
shaft 8, mounted on a car 9 and having an 
arm 10, which is connected with the latch 
block by a chain 11 and a bar 12. The bar 
12 is pivoted in a bifurcation of the latch 
block and extends through a slot 13 of a cas 
ing 14, arranged on the draw-head and re 
ceiving the upper end of the latch-block and 
adapted to protect the same when withdrawn 
from engagement with the knuckle. The up 
per end of the bar 12 is connected by the chain 
11 with the arm 10 of the rock-shaft, and the 
outer end of the latterisprovided with a han 
dle 15, which is arranged at one side of the 
55 
65 
75 
car to enable cars to be uncoupled without 
going between them. 
The knuckle is moved outward in position 
for coupling and to make the uncoupling 
positive by a sliding bar 16, arranged on the 
bottom of the draw-head and having its front 
end disposed between a shoulder or boss 17. 
and the adjacent flange or web, which forms 
one of the ways for the latch-block. The front 
end of the sliding bar 16 is arranged to en 
gage the knuckles and adapted to open the 
same. The sliding bar 16 is operated by a 
rock-shaft 18, having an angle-arm 19, which 
is connected with an eyebolt or stem 20 of the 
sliding bar by a link 21. The eyebolt or stem 
of the sliding bar is arranged in a slot 22 of 
the draw-head, and a sliding bar is guided at. 
this point by a keeper 24. The outer end of 
the rock-shaft is provided with a handle 25, 
by means of which the sliding bar is recipro 
cated. The knuckle is provided with the 
usual coupling-pin opening 26 and a link-re 
cess 27 to enable the draw-head to be coupled 
with an ordinary pin and link. 
It will be seen that the knuckle may be 
readily controlled from the side of a car with 
out necessitating persons going between the 
C.S. 
- 
What I clain is- 
1. In a car-coupling, the combination of a 
draw-head having a longitudinal opening and 
provided with slightly-curved inclined ways, 
a knuckle hinged to the draw-head, a curved 
latch-block arranged on the Ways and adapted 
to engage the knuckle, a bar pivotally secured 
to the latch-block, and a rock-shaft connected 
with the bar, substantially as described. 
2. In a car-coupling, the combination of a 
draw-head having a longitudinal opening and 
provided with a slot, a knuckle hinged to the 
draw-head, a sliding bar arranged to engage 
the knuckle and having a stem projecting 
through the slot, and a rock-shaft connected 
with the stem, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN P. ROLLINS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES H. ROTHROCK, Jr., 
I. N. WHITTAM, 
IO 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480090.txt	(No Model.) 
J. M. GILMOUR. 
FAUCET. 
No. 480,090, 
Patented Aug. 2, 1892. 
 
 
 
   
&SSS 
SN N Fr.S. 
. 
S. 
& 
S. 
 
 
N 
N 
N 
S 
N. N. 
W 
WITNESSES 
(64. (2% 
 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. GILMOUR, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY. 
FAU CET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,090, dated August 2, 1892. 
Application filed January 7, 1892, Serial No. 417,242. (No model.) 
O 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES M. GILMOUR, of 
East Orange, in the county of Essex and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and Im 
proved Faucet, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved faucet which is simple 
and durable in construction, designed for use 
with Water service, and arranged to readily 
open or close by turning the discharge-spout, 
the valve seating itself within the line of 
pressure of the water service. 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
details and combinations of the same, as will 
be fully described hereinafter, and then point 
ed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional side elevation of the 
improvement, showing the valve in a closed 
position. Fig. 2 is a transverse section of 
the same with the valve open. Fig. 3 is a 
sectional side elevation of the discharge-spout. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the valve-stem. 
Fig. 5 is a plan view of the same, and Fig. 6 
is a sectional plan view of the same on the 
line 6 6 of Fig. 4. 
The improved faucet is provided with a 
body A, formed with a base B for conven 
ient attachment to any desired place, and 
from the base extends an inlet-pipe C, con 
nected with the water service. 
On the upper end of the body A screws the 
head D, formed in its lower end with a valve 
seat E, extending into the enlarged opening 
A? of the body A, in which opening is held 
the valve F, adapted to be seated on the seat 
E of the head I). The valve F is preferably 
made of rubber or other suitable material and 
is held on the reduced end G' of the valve 
stem G by means of washers and nuts G, 
screwing on the lower threaded end of the 
said reduced part G' against the under side 
of the valve F. The valve-stem G is fitted 
loosely into the cylindrical stem II of the 
outlet-spout I, the said stem II extending 
through a cap D", held on the upper end of 
the head D. The discharge-spout I is of the 
usual design and construction and is arranged 
to be readily turned by the operator, so as to 
open or close the valve F, as hereinafter more 
fully described. On that part of the valve-stem 
G extending in the stem. His secured a pin J, 
passing through a vertical slot H', arranged in 
the stem II, the outer end of the said pin Jen 
gaging a V-shaped groove K', formed in a 
sleeve K, screwed or otherwise secured in the 
head D. When the pinJ engages the apex or 
lower end of the V-shaped groove K, then 
the valve F is unseated from the seat E and 
water can flow through the inlet-pipe C, the 
enlarged opening A', past the valve-seat E, 
through the openings G, onto the valve-stem 
G, and from the latter into the stem. H and 
discharge-spout I. When the pin J, however, 
is in either upper end of the V-shaped groove 
K', then the valve F is seated on the seat E, 
and the water-supply to the discharge-spout 
I is cut off. On the lower end of the sleeve 
K is formed an inwardly-extending annular 
flange K?, on which rests the lower end of a 
coil-spring L, coiled within the sleeve K and 
around the stem II to press with its upper 
end on the pin J, as is plainly shown in Fig.1. 
The operation is as follows: In its normal 
position the spout I is disconnected from the 
inlet or supply pipe C, the pin J then stand 
ing in either upper end of the V-shaped groove 
K. In this position the valve F is securely 
seated on the seat E, with the pressure of the 
water of the water service holding the valve 
to its seat. Now when it is desired to con 
nect the pipe C with the spout I the operator 
turns the latter so that its stem H carries 
along the pin J and valve-stem G, the said 
pin traveling downward in one leg of the V 
shaped groove K', so that the valve-stem G is 
forced downward and the valve F is unseated 
from the seat E, the parts then having the 
position shown in Fig. 2. Water can noW 
flow from the pipe C, opening A', past the 
open seat E, into the stem G, and from the 
latter through the stem I to the spout I. 
Water will flow through the spout I as long 
as the valve F is open. The spout is held in 
the position to hold the pin J in the apex of 
the V-shaped groove. As soon as the oper 
ator releases the spout I or moves the same 
to the right or left the pin J travels up the 
respective leg of the V-shaped groove IK", so 
that the stem G is caused to slide upward, 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
 
2 
480,090 
thereby moving the valve F onto its seat E, 
the movement of the valve F being in line 
with the water-pressure, so that the valve is 
readily seated and held in its seat by the 
pressure of the water service. It will be un 
derstood that while the closing or seating of 
the valve F is facilitated or rendered auto 
matic by the employment of the spring L, 
which, as soon as the operator releases the 
discharge-spout I, presses on the pin J and 
forces it upward in one or the other leg of the 
groove K', said spring may be dispensed with 
without impairing the efficiency of the fau 
cet, as in such event the valve will be closed 
or seated by the upward travel of the pin J 
in the groove IX' when the operator returns 
the discharge-spout I to its normal position. It 
will be seen that by this construction the spout 
I is turned without its stem having a vertical 
sliding motion, a vertical movement, however, 
being given to the valve-stem G and the valve 
IF by turning the said spout in the manner 
above described. The pin J readily travels 
up and down in the groove H of the stem H, 
So that a vertical movement of the latter does 
not take place; but a vertical movement of 
the stem G in the stem II must take place, as 
the pin J is rigidly connected with the said 
stem G and is moved up and down in the legs 
of the groove IX'. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A faucet comprising a body provided 
with a valve-seat, a valve adapted to be seated 
on the said valve-seat and arranged to close 
in line with the pressure of the water service, 
a discharge-spout loosely engaging the stem 
of the said valve and formed with a slot, the 
said spout being mounted to turn in the said 
valve-body, and a pin projecting from the 
valve-stem and passing through the slot in 
the spout to engage a groove on the said body, 
So that on turning the spout the pin moves 
in the groove to actuate the valve and at the 
same time the pin slides in the slot of the 
spout, substantially as shown and described. 
2. A faucet comprising a body having a head 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
65 
and a seat formed thereon, a valve adapted to 
be seated on the said seat and arranged to 
close with the pressure of the water service, 
a valve-stem carrying the said valve and con 
nected with the discharge-spout, and a pin 
held on the said stem and engaging a V-shaped 
groove on the said head, substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. A faucet comprising a body having a head 
and a seat formed thereon, a valve adapted to 
be seated on the said seat and arranged to 
close with the pressure of the water service, 
a valve-stem carrying the Said valve and con 
nected with the discharge-spout, a pin held 
on the said stem and engaging a V-shaped 
groove on the Said head, and a spring press 
ing on the said pin for automatically closing 
the valve, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
4. A faucet comprising a body, a head held 
thereon and formed with a valve-seat, a sleeve 
held on the said head and formed with a V 
shaped groove, a valve adapted to be seated 
on the said valve-seat, a valve-stem carrying 
the said valve, a discharge-spout formed with 
a stem engaging the Said valve-stem, and a 
pin projecting from the said valve-stem and 
75 
passing through a vertical slot in the said 
spout to engage with its outer end the said V 
shaped groove, substantially as shown and 
described. 
5. A faucet comprising a body, a head held 
thereon and formed with a valve-seat, a sleeve 
held on the said head and formed with a V 
shaped groove, a valve adapted to be seated 
on the said valve-seat, a valve-stem carrying 
the said valve, a discharge-spout formed with 
a stem engaging the said valve-stem, a pin 
projecting from the said valve-stem and pass 
ing through a vertical slot in the said spout 
to engage with its outer end the said V-shaped 
groove, and a spring held in the said sleeve 
and pressing against the said pin, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
85 
9o 
JAMES M. GIIMOUR. 
Witnesses: 
F. W. HANAFORD, 
EDGAR, TATE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480190.txt	(No Model.) 
A. L. GILLEN, 
BED LOUNCE, 
No. 480,190. 
Patented Aug. 2, 1892. 
-------- 
s 
- - - - - - -27s 
-- - - - - - - - - - - ------ary 
A. 
7 
M. 
2-fi - - 
f 
s 
- 
- 
- 
is 
77 
f 
M 
- 
- 
as 
Zezeeves 
?erve 2? rea24-ty 
a4-6-2 co- 
Zveze/22 
2 
370Zew Zesze (%2. 
Bus cs%22% 
The Norris Peters co., Photo-litHo, WASHING fo, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT LESLIE GILLEN, OF BRADFORD, MASSACHUSETTS, 
BED LO UN GE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,190, dated August 2, 1892. 
Application filed February 5, 1892, Serial No. 420,412. (No model.) 
To all Luhon, it inclity Concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERTILESLIE GILLEN, 
of Bradford, in the county of Essex, State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new Construc 
tion in Bed-Lounges, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to dis 
pense with intermediate rails of the mattress 
frame of a bed-lounge; second, to construct 
the framework that the intermediate framing 
rail can be raised and lowered automatically 
when the lounge is opened or closed; third, the 
means to be applied to ordinary lounge Con 
struction. 
Thus my invention consists, essentially, in 
sustaining a mattress for a bed-lounge upon 
a right-angled mattress-frame having its in 
termediate framing rail or rails designed to 
vertically move from their primary position 
when the lounge is being unfolded to permit 
of the mattress extending from side to side 
and end to end of the entire mattress-frame 
without having any mechanism in Contact 
there with other than what is required to Sup 
port the mattress, as with ordinary beds. 
These objects I attain by the construction 
illustrated in the accompanying dra Wings, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
bed-lounge having the upbolstery partially 
broken away and drawn in accordance With 
my invention. Fig. 2 denotes a transverse 
section on line acac, Fig. 1, showing the Seat 
partially raised in full lines and fully un 
folded in dotted lines. Fig. 3 is a detail per 
spective drawing of the construction of my 
invention. 
In the drawings, C' represents the entire 
mattress-frame, that consists of tWO hinged 
sections joined by the hinges c, a Stationary 
section C, provided with a suitable back and 
head rest, and upholstery A and A and legs 
A4 and the traveling rail A, and an Opening 
or swinging section C, carrying ordinary 
swinging legs II and connected by hinges d 
to the rectangular or seat frame D. Web: 
bing is secured to the rail c of the section C 
and to the rail cof the other Section C of the 
entire mattress-frame C''', also to the respect 
ive cross-rails c' longitudinally. At the in 
tersections of the Webbing suitable Springs 
are secured to make an efficient mattreSS 3. 
O 
25 
35 
35 
SO 
 
o 
75 
65 
The section C of the right-angled mattress 
frame C' has two projections A, to which 
are secured the legs A, the chalks or stops G, 
and the respective ends of the toggle-joints 
E, and is beveled, as shown at 1 and 2 in Fig. 
1, to prevent the traveling rail A going far 
ther than required, which has similar inclined 
walls a and C at its extremities a, and a' to 6o 
engage with the other Walls Ct and a on the 
projections A. This traveling rail makes 
complete the folding action of the mattress, 
for as the mattress-frame is being folded the 
traveling rail is also rising, which comes in 
contact With the folded end of the mattress 
and causes the same to glide into the space 
of the frame-section C. When the traveling 
rail has been brought into its primary posi 
tion by the links E, loosely connected to the 
said rail and to the rail d' of the seat-frame 
D, which carries seat-upholstery thereon, it is 
brought to bear against the inclined walls on 
the projections A Vertically, also against the 
chalks or stops G. laterally through the flexi 
ble straps F, which are connected to the rail 
c of the section C and to the side of the 
traveling rail, thus causing the said rail to be 
rigidly held in position and to finish the outer 
appearance of the lounge, for it can carry 
suitable decoration thereon. 
The links E are designed to admit of free 
action of the traveling rail and of the seat 
frame D in their peculiar movements when 
brought into action through the manipulator. 
They have an elliptic loop e, loosely engaging 
with the staple d', secured to the rail d' of the 
seat-frame, and an Ordinary round eye e', 
loosely encircling the periphery of the staple 
a', secured to the traveling rail, thus readily 
permitting the rail and frame Working free 
with each other, yet the links are prevented 
from prying up the staples secured to the 
traveling rail. These links E transmit the 
movement of the Section C and of the seat 
frame D to the traveling rail, which is con 
nected to the projections A' by the jointed 
means B, that permit the said rails being 
Vertically raised and lowered in coincidence 
with the respective frames, 
The straps F prevent the rail going out 
ward from the side of the lounge. Thus they 
govern the action of the means used to ver 
tically raise or lower the said rail A. They 
95 
55 
CC 
2 
480,190 
25 
3d 
35 
tionary and of a folding section hinged to 
gether, the front rail of the stationary section 
being suitably severed and engaged with the 
same by toggle-joints, as described, and lat 
erally governed by suitable chalks and straps, 
and links connecting the folding section with 
the front rail, whereby said rail is 'vertically 
raised or lowered through the movement of the 
folding section, substantially as described. 
3. In a sofa-bed, a stationary Section hav 
ing its front rail designed to be vertically 
raised and lowered, a folding section hinged 
to the stationary section, and links connecting 
the folding section with the front rail of the 
stationary section, whereby the said front rail 
is vertically raised and lowered by the move 
ment of the folding section, substantially as 
described. 
ALBERT ESLIE GILLEN. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS W. IIOBDAY, 
JAMES W. LINDSAY. 
o 
can be designed in various ways to perform 
their function. In the drawings they consist 
of a strap of leather or any other suitable 
strap having a spring connected thereto to 
admit of it being flexible." 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. A sofa-bed consisting of a stationary 
frame and a folding section hinged together 
to sustain a suitable mattress, the stationary 
frame provided with a suitable head-rest, back 
rest, and vertical sustaining-legs and with 
suitable stops, guide-pieces on said stops, a 
vertically-movable traveling rail connected 
by toggle-joints with said stops, straps con 
necting said traveling rail with the stationary 
frame, and the folding section provided with 
swinging legs, a rectangular Seat-frame hinged 
to said folding section, and links connecting 
said seat-frame to the traveling rail, whereby 
said traveling rail is vertically raised and low 
ered by the movement of the folding section, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a sofa-bed, the combination of a sta 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480290.txt	C. H. SHEPARD 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
Patented Aug. 9, 1892. 
d 
2 
T 
(No Model.) 
No. 480,290, 
77 
2 
s 
 
  
 
 
 
  
S 
S 
o 
6.2.4% 
C 
642 
N. Af 
%a 3. 2 
It AgNYS 
an TS SAS 
S 
S. 
i. 
PNS / 
as a 
SS 
72 
3. 
2 
20 
Z27.3, 
22 A 
if s/frf r 
267344,336 gs 
22 
a?s=FAS 
6. 
e 
S3' bicy &lt;botvic 564 W4. 
if 
57% As/262- 
is fift? 
: 
iW). 3.11ue vitov 
2 
36a 39 
2 2s2 
. 
6 H. 
E-S, 
isirls' 
; 
EAS co, Photo-LTHo, washington, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES H. SHEPARD, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO THE REMINGTON 
STANDARD TYPE WRITER MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF NEW 
YORK, N. Y. 
TYPE - WRITING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,290, dated August 9, 1892. 
Application filed January 28, 1892, Serial No. 419,552, (No model.) 
To cult, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs H. SHEPARD, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Type-Writing Ma 
lies, of which the following is a specifica 
O). 
In the Remington machine the shifting 
platen-carrier is provided with two pairs of 
beveled yoke-blocks, which straddle a shift 
rail having a lever connection to an actuating 
shift-key at the keyboard. These yoke-blocks 
slide in contact with said rail during the feed 
of the paper-carriage and offer unnecessary 
friction or resistance to the movements of 
Said carriage. Moreover, in time when wear 
takes place and the carriage can skew the 
yoke-blocks are apt to bind or cramp and cut 
a groove in or abrade the Surface of the shift 
rail and affect the alignment of the printing. 
My invention has for its main object to 
Overcome these objections by rolling friction 
and by automatically taking up the wear; 
and to these ends it consists in the features 
of construction and the combinations of de 
vices hereinafter more fully described, and 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of the Remington paper-carriage 
With the guide and shift rails added and em 
bodying my improvements. Fig. 2 is a verti 
cal section taken at the line acac of Fig. 1 and 
including the shift-rail, its operating means, 
and the spacing-dogs, the latter being shown 
in dotted lines. Fig. 3 is a front elevation, 
detached, of the rollers, the yoke-blocks, and 
their frames or supports. Fig. 4 is a vertical 
Section taken at the line if y of Fig. 1. 
In the several views the same part will be 
found designated by the same numeral of ref 
een Ce. 
1 represents the lmain carriage, provided 
with grooved wheels 2 at its rear side to run. 
on a guide-rail 3, which is supported on the 
framework of the machine. To the carriage 
is hinged a frame 4, provided with a rack 5 
to co-operate with the spacing-dogs 6 to ef 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
fect a step-by-step feed of the carriage, as 
usual. 
7 designates a platen, which at its ends is 
mounted to turn in bearings in a supple 
mental carriage or carrier consisting, essen 
tially, of slides 88, connected together by a 
rod 9, adapted to move back and forth on rolls 
10 10 on the main carriage to carry the platen 
and the paper thereon from lower-case to up 
per-case position, all as in the Remington 
machine. In said platen-carrier is also mount 
ed a feed-roller 11, provided with pulleys 12, 
around which and around pulleys 13 on the 
rod 9 pass paper-carrying bands 14. 
15 15 are two similar plates or arms, which 
are secured at their ends by screws 16 16 to 
the rod 9 and at equal distance from the ends 
of said rod. The outer end of each of said 
arms is formed with a slot 17, in which fit tWO 
small lugs or projections 18 on the upper end 
of a yoke-block 19, which is beveled outwardly 
at its lower ends. These yoke-blocks are se 
cured to their respective arms by means of 
screws 2020, the points of which engage with 
threaded holes in the blocks and the heads of 
which bear upon a connecting bar or plate 21 
formed at its ends with slots 22 for the pas 
sage downwardly of said screws. 
Between the ends of each arm 15 is pro 
vided with a slot 23, in which is secured by a 
nut 24, a pivot-pin 25, and beneath Said arm a 
roller 26, having both a cylindrical and a rear 
wardly - beveled periphery, designated, re 
spectively, 27 and 28. 
The connecting bar or plate 21 is provided 
with a front inclined portion 29, to which is 
attached by Screws or rivets 30a Spring 3132, 
preferably made in one piece and attached 
between its ends, as shown. The free end of 
each spring thus formed is constructed to pro 
vide bearings for a pivot-pin 33, upon which 
is mounted a roller 34, preferably provided 
with a beveled or tapering surface 35 at one 
end, a similar surface 36 at its opposite end, 
and with an intermediate cylindrical surface 
37. The said rollers 34 protrude through per 
forations or openings 38 in the inclined Sup 
porting portion 29 and are arranged so that 
their beveled or conical ends 35 roll in con 
75 
 
480,290 
A. 
shift-rail. 
tact with the outer side of the shift-rail 39. rearwardly the platen-carrier if for any reason 
it should be in a forward position and the shift 
The rollers 26 are arranged so that their cy 
railin a rearward position atthe time of turning 
lindrical faces roll in contact with the rear 
down the carriage after inspection of the work, 
side of said shift-rail. The working faces of 
the rollers are arranged in parallel planes and 
&c. The tapering lower ends 36 of the frontroll 
ers are provided to Wedge or force outwardly 
engage diametrically-opposife sides of the 
slightly the said rollers, in order to permit the 
carriage to be properly lowered and said roll 
The shift-rail may be actuated by the means 
heretofore employed, consisting, usually, of a 
ers to accommodate themselves to the shift 
rocking lever or levers 40, a connecting-rod 
rail. If the said rollers were made entirely 
cylindrical, they would be apt to catch on the 
41, and a key-lever, (not shown,) a Spring 42 
top of the shift-rail and prevent the carriage 
being used to return the parts to normal posi 
tion against a stop 43. The wedge-pieces 
from descending to its proper level. 
Although I prefer to use two front rollers, 
when used are arranged to strike the shift-rail 
in advance of the lower tapering ends of the 
I do not wish to be confined thereto, as I 
have carried my invention out in practice 
front rollers, and thus relieve said rollers and 
their springs from any undue shock. The 
with only one such roller, in which case said 
roller was arranged in the support 29 about 
wedge pieces or blocks 19 do not touch the rail 
when the carriage is down in working posi 
centrally or midway of the back rollers. 
tion and are provided, mainly, to return the 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
platen-carrier to its normal position on low 
by Letters Patent, is 
ering the carriage after inspecting the work, 
J. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with a shifting platen-carrier and a shift 
it being understood that on raising the car 
riage the platen-carrier slides rearwardly by 
rail, of rollers engaging diametrically-oppo 
gravity. If the machine be provided with 
site sides of said rail and having their work 
ing faces arranged in parallel planes. 
means for preventing this rearward movement 
of the platen-carrier upon lifting the carriage 
2. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with a shifting platen-carrier, a shift-rail, 
for examination of the print, these wedge 
and means for moving the same, of a rigidly 
pieces or blocks may be onlitted. Means for 
thus locking the platen-carrier may be seen 
mounted roller engaging the back of said rail 
and an elastically-mounted roller engaging 
in the patent to P. T. Dodge, No. 322,810, 
granted July 21, 1885. Owing to the inclina 
the front of said rail. 
tion of the support 29, the tapering ends 35 of 
3. In a type. Writing machine, the combina 
tion, with a sihifting platen-carrier, a shift-rail, 
the rollers 34 roll in contact with that part of 
the rod 29 diametrically opposite the point of 
and means for moving the same, of a pair of 
rigidly-mounted rollers engaging the back of 
contact of the cylindrical surfaces of the larger 
rollers 26. When the shift-key is actuated, 
said rail and a pair of spring-mounted roll 
the shift-rail is vibrated rearwardly, and by 
ers engaging the front of said rail. 
4. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
reason of its contact with the rollers 26 the 
platen-carrier is forced rearwardly to upper 
tion, with a shifting platen-carrier, a shift-rail, 
case position. Upon release of the shift-key 
and means for shifting the same, of wedge 
pieces and a set of rollers engaging opposite 
the spring 42 will return the shift-rail, and by 
sides of said rail, one of said rollers being 
reason of its contact with the front rollers 34 
the platen-carrier will be restored to normal 
elastically mounted. 
position, the front rollers 34 bearing always 
5. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion, with a shifting platen-carrier, a shift-rail, 
against the front side of the shift-rail with a 
gentle pressure, their springs being compara 
and means for moving the same, of a pair of 
wedge-pieces, a pair of rigidly-mounted roll 
tively light or weak. 
By the employment of the rollers 26 and 34 
ers for engaging the back of Said rail, and a 
and the dispensing of the sliding yoke-blocks 
pair of spring-mounted rollers for engaging 
the feed of the carriage is easier and better 
the front of said rail. 
and there is no liability of cramping or bind 
6. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
ing of parts or of the shift-rail getting cut or 
tion, with a shifting platen-carrier, a shift-rail, 
abraded. Besides this, any slight wear due 
and means for moving the same, of means for 
to the rolling friction is automatically taken 
engaging the back of said rail and elastically 
up by the elastically-mounted front rollers. 
mounted roller's for engaging the front of said 
If considerable wear should occur, the front 
rail. 
rollers may be moved rearwardly by moving 
7. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
back their supports or plates 21, which are slot 
tion, with a shifting platen-carrier and a shift 
ted at 22 for lateral adjustment. The rearroll 
rail, of a back roller having a cylindrical face 
ers 26 are adjustably mounted in the slots 23 
to engage said rail and a front elastically 
to enable the platen to be set in the first in 
mounted roller having tapering ends. 
stance at its proper place. When once ad 
8. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
justed, these rollers need not be disturbed. The 
tion, with a shifting platen-carrier and a shift 
tapering lower ends 28 of the rollers 26 are pro 
rail, of the back rollers, their supporting-arms 
vided to enable said rollers to wedge or force 
attached to the platen-carrier, a connecting 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
o 
75 
95 
do 
Io5 
O 
II5 
25 
 
480,290 
8 
said bar, and an elastically-mounted roller Io 
attached thereto. 
Signed at New York city, in the county of 
New York and State of New York, this 25th 
day of January, A.D. 1892. 
CHARLES H. SHEPARD. 
Witnesses: 
JACOB FELBEL, 
IDAMACDONALD. 
bar attached to said arms, and an elastically 
mounted roller connected to said bar. 
9. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion, with a shifting platen-carrier and a shift 
rail, of the backrollers, their supporting-arms 
attached to the platen-carrier and slotted at 
their forward ends, a bar connected to said 
arms and provided with slots, attaching 
screws, an inclined support depending from 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480391.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 480,391, 
Patented Aug. , 1892. 
J. B. & J. E. SOLT, 
SLAT AND WIRE FENCING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
2-2. 
-6 27 
 
till 
AwyAW2 2. 
Soo. 
(No Model.) 
No. 480,391, 
J. B. & J. E. SOLT. 
SLAT AND WIRE FENCING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 9, 1892. 
S 
S 
wra 
i s 
b 
3 
ZWWZM/ZO2S, 
s 
Y. It 
N 's 
N H 
  
 
. 
 
7W/2. WASSAS 
-6 -? deny? 
66 tes------- 
24?orney 
& 8...Q. 
The No88is perers co. FHord-Lithd., WAShield. c. 
a 
(No Model.) 
J. B. & J. E. SOLT. 
SLAT AND WIRE FENCING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 480,39. 
Patented Aug. 9, 1892, 
 
434 eC2-Ca-FC 
4 
37 
-3s 
37 
343. 
se:Eastereigs 
(e-- rt - 
'AO 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
A?) 
    
 
o 1N 
4. 
(ON 
ala 
z 
E. t 
-Y 
E.g., 
r 
r 
24- Slate . 7 
7se: S. iE. 
It is 4. 
21. 
te 
SA 
E.; Q 7tar/ 
57 
40 
S. 
ESEise 
- 
exe?: 
Ery to 
& 
32 
Rs. 
- 
A 
A. 
67 
2. 
- 
t 2S 
E. 2 
WZZ WASSAS 
ZWVAW'7025. 
-% 2. osier. 
6 
y 
aizorney 
The Norris Peters co, PHoro-LTHo, washiaro, c. c. 
(No Model.) 
J. B. & J. E. SOLT. 
SAT AND WIRE FENCING MACHINE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
No. 480,391, 
Patented Aug. 9, 1892, 
 
 
 
 
WAZWASSAS 
-24-6-4----. 
662tus. Time 
(No Model.) 
No. 480,391, 
 
Patented Aug. 9, 1892. 
J. B. & J. E. SOLT. 
SLAT AND WIRE FENCING MACHINE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
 
 
G) 
-6, -7 
24zzoreaev 
... WASHINGTON, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
J. B. & J. E. SOLT, 
SLAT AND WIRE FENCING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6 
No. 480,39l. 
Patented Aug. 9, 1892. 
 
WZZ WASSA's S- r 
-2 af-govel-4. A 
3 
s 
2-2-2C 
, - . 
- 
/ 
. 
V 
\ 
W 
W 
\ 
- 
\, 
v 
, ) 
47 
V 
V 
N 
w 
N 
f 
f 
l 
f 
l 
f 
THE MORRIS PETERs co, Photo-Litho, washington, p. c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB B. SOLT AND JAMES E. SOLT, 
OF NORTHBROOK, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SAT AND - WRE - FENCNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,391, dated August 9, 1892. 
Application filed August 26, 1891, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JACOB B. SOLT and 
JAMES E. SOLT, of Northbrook, in the county 
of Chester and State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Fence-Making Machines; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
fence-making machines; and it consists in cer 
tain novel features of construction and com 
binations of parts, as will be hereinafter de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in perspective of the frame. Fig. 2 is 
a plan view. Fig. 3 is a right-side elevation 
in Section. Fig. 4 is a left-side elevation in 
section. Fig. 5 is a view in front elevation. 
Fig. 6 is an enlarged view of a portion of the 
machine. Fig. 7 is an enlarged view of one 
of the twisters. Fig. 8 is an enlarged view in 
elevation of the table and table-operating 
mechanism. Fig. 9 is a view of the gearing 
regulating the twists of wire between the slats. 
Fig. 10 is a view of the mechanism for throw 
ing the table back into place. Figs. 11 and 
12 are detail views of the reeling mechanism; 
and Figs. 13, 14, and 15 are views of the ten 
sion device. 
A represents the frame of the machine, upon 
which the various parts of the machine are 
supported. A series of wire-twisters i.1 extend 
transversely across the longitudinal beams 2 
2, they being revolubly supported in boxes 3 
3. One of these wire-twisters is shown in de 
tail in Fig. 7, and it consists in a hollow tubu 
lar piece of metal, preferably cutaway through 
the middle in order that the wires may be ob 
Served from the outside, and it terminates at 
one end in a pair of converging fingers 4 4, 
through which the wire passes and by means 
of which they are twisted together in the usual 
manner. The several twisters are provided 
with gear-wheels 5 5, intermeshed with one 
another, whereby motion is communicated 
from one to another. These twisters are ro 
tated periodically by a large rotary gear-wheel 
6. The latter is provided with a continuous 
series of teeth on its periphery, and about 
one-third of these teeth are wider than the re 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
Serial No. 403,826, (No model.) 
maining two-thirds, and the widened parts of 
these teeth are in the same vertical plane with 
a gear-Wheel 7 on one of the twister-shafts 
and are adapted to rotate the twisters to twist 
the wires together between the slats. Provis 
ion is made, which will now be described, for 
regulating the number of twists between the 
slats, accordingly as the spaces are to be wide 
or narrow. Small and large gear-wheels 8 and 
9, respectively, are secured on one of the twist 
ers. A wheel10, corresponding in size to wheel 
S, is located on a shaft 11 to one side, and this 
wheel is adapted to be meshed with wheel 8, 
the size of these two wheels 8 and 10 being 
Such that they make just three revolutions 
while the large rotary gear-wheel 6 makes a 
third of a revolution. This results from the 
fact that there are three times as many wide 
teeth on wheel 6 as there are teeth on wheel 
7. In other words, when the wheels 8 and 10 
are in engagement with each other three twists 
are given to the wires between each two slats 
of the fencing. There is also a small gear 
wheel 12 on shaft 11, adapted to be thrown 
into engagement with wheel 9 when it is de 
sired to make only two twists in the wires be 
tween the Slats. So the gear-wheels 10 and 
12 may be arranged to slide on the shaft 11 
When desired to increase or decrease the width 
of the spaces between slats, and it will be 
noticed that when either wheel 10 or 12 is 
meshed with its fellow on the twister the other 
one is out of engagement. 
In order that the twisters may be stopped 
at exactly the right position, a pivoted spring 
actuated catch 14 is provided. This catch is 
located in position to drop automatically into 
a notch 15 in the periphery of the wheel 16 on 
shaft 11. When the notch is opposite the catch. 
This catch locks the shaft while in this en 
gagement, and the catch is removed by a pin 
17 on the Wheel 6, striking the lower end of 
the catch just prior to the engagement of the 
Wide teeth on said wheel with the teeth of 
wheel 7, and to prevent the catch from drop 
ping into the notch 15 again before shaft 11 
has made the required number of revolutions 
another pin 18 is provided to control the 
catch. Motion is communicated to the large 
gear-wheel 6 through a small gear-wheel 19 
on the shaft 20, and motion is imparted to the 
latter shaft by a small gear-wheel 21 on drive 
95 
IOO 
 
480,391 
o 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
shaft 22, meshing with a large gear-wheel 23 
on shaft 20. Shaft 22 is driven in the usual 
way by a power-belt passed around pulley 24. 
The slats are fed into the machine in the 
following manner: They are caught one at a 
time by a lower feed-arm 23", which latter is 
connected by a rocking lever 24, and the lat 
ter is vibrated at the required intervals by 
the pitman 25, and this pitman is operated by 
a bell-crank lever 45, to be described. The 
arm 23 simply carries the slats forward far 
enough to force one end between the feed 
rollers 2626. These rollers are provided with 
long gear-teeth, which are intermeshed for 
the purpose of communicating motion from 
one to the other, and in order that the feed 
wheels may separate slightly to allow for slats 
of different thicknesses one of them is Sup 
ported on the outer end of a yielding arm 27, 
the length of the teeth being sufficient to allow 
of this movement without stopping the mo 
tion. The feed-wheels are driven by an end 
less chain. 28, extending from a Sprocket 
wheel on the shaft 22 to a similar wheel29 on 
the hub of one of the feed-wheels. A similar 
chain 30, also extends from the hub of this 
wheel to the hub of the central feed-wheel31. 
In addition to the feed mechanism described 
there is a table 32, arranged to receive each 
slat preparatory to its being woven between 
the wires and adapted to carry it outward as 
fast as necessary to supply a new slat in the 
construction of the fence. This table is pro 
vided on its inner edge with a flange 33, and 
slots 34 34 are formed in this flange to allow 
the wires to pass through and to receive the 
ends of the twisters when the table moves 
inward. This table moves inward and out 
ward automatically on the rods 36 36 in the 
following manner: A rock-shaft 34" is sup 
ported in suitable boxes at a point below the 
table. Said shaft has affixed thereon a num 
ber of arms 35 35, and the latter are con 
nected by links 37 37 with a toggle-joint 38, 
and the outer ends of the latter are con 
nected, respectively, to the table and the frame. 
The toggle-joint is so constructed that it may 
be shortened or lengthened at any time to 
increase or decrease the throw of the table, 
accordingly as the distance between slats is 
narrow or wide. 
It will be noticed from the description and 
from the drawings, especially Fig. S, that the 
toggle-joint will hold the table outward rig 
idly locked and against accidental displace 
ment until the lock is broken by means pro 
vided for this purpose, and which will be de 
scribed hereinafter. When in this outward 
position, the slat is forced outward tight 
against the twisted wires and held in this 
position while the wires are being twisted 
back of it. 
The means for sliding the table outward is 
as follows: A lever 40 is pivoted at one end 
to the frame of the machine, and its free end 
is curved, as shown in Fig. 3, and lies in po 
sition to be struck by a pin 41 on the wheel 6 
just previous to the engagement of the wide 
teeth with the teeth of wheel 7. This lever 
40 is connected by a rod 42 with an arm 43 
on shaft 34. By this means when the lever 
is raised the shaft is rocked, and the table by 
virtue of its connection there with, as de 
scribed, is forced outward. To provide for 
regulating the throw of the shaft the rod 42 
may be connected at different points with 
the lever. The rock-shaft 34 is returned to 
its normal position to bring the table back 
by the following mechanism: An arm 44 is 
secured on the rock-shaft and provided with 
a link 45. A bell-crank lever 46 is pivoted 
on the frame and one end is pivotally con 
nected with the link, while the other end is 
in position to be struck by a button 47 on the 
gear-wheel 6 to force the bell-crank lever 
into the position indicated in dotted lines in 
Fig. 10. This rocks the shaft back into po 
sition. To arrange for the proper throw of 
this shaft, the link is provided with an elon 
gated slot, by means of which the point of 
connection between the lever and link is 
regulated, a set-screw or other device being 
employed for this purpose; also, in case any 
of the parts should bind by means of this 
connection after a certain amount of press 
ure is applied, rather than break this joint 
will slip and thus furnish relief. 
The wire is supplied from the spools 50.50, 
and these spools are located on the spindles 
51, 51. The latter may be round or square, 
and when round they are square at their in 
ner ends and fitted in corresponding holes in 
in the hubs of the gear-wheels 52 52. These 
several wheels are intermeshed, and the speed 
of all is alike. Motion is communicated to 
these spindles by means of a sprocket-chain 
53, which passes over a sprocket-wheel 54 on 
the shaft which carries gear-wheel 6 and a 
similar wheel 54 on the hub of one of the 
wheels 52. From this arrangement it will 
be observed that the rotation of the spin 
dles is constant and uniform, whereas the 
motion of the twisters is necessarily periodi 
cal. Consequently the parts are so geared 
that the speed of the twisters is enough 
greater than that of the spindles to catch up 
to them each time, and thus straighten the 
wires at every rotation which become twisted 
inside of the twisters owing to the constant 
rotation of the spindles, so that notwithstand 
ing the periodical motion of the twisters and 
the constant rotation of the spindles their 
ultimate travel is the same, and hence the 
wires are kept in condition to feed freely 
through the twisters as fast as required. 
When the revolution of the twisters is 
changed, another sprocket-wheel smaller than 
the one on the hub of wheel 6 is employed in 
E. thereof to lessen the speed of the spin 
The wires in feeding from the spools pass 
through tension devices 55 55, located on the 
inner ends of the spindles 51 51. These ten 
sion devices consist of bracket-arms having 
S. 
75 
95 
O 
1 I5 
I 25 
480,391 
75 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
flanges on their edges, the spring-plates 5656, 
which span the spindles and bear at their 
ends between the flanges of the brackets, and 
the set-screws 5757, by which the tension is 
increased or decreased. The wires pass 
through holes in the flanges and between the 
brackets and the ends of the springs, as 
shown. By means of a tension device of this 
character the tension on each wire is the same 
at all times, whether one spool be full, or 
nearly so, and the other nearly empty. 
The completed fencing is would on a reel 
60 as fast as it is made, in the following man 
ner: A piece of piping 61 is carried on a shaft 
62. The latter passes through the piping and 
through the hubs of the toothed wheels 6363 
at each end of reel. The fencing is wound 
on this piping, and to remove the reel the 
shaft is pulled out and the entire reel may 
then be removed and the piping be taken out. 
The reel is turned periodically by means of 
levers 64 64. The latter swing from the axle 
of the reel as a center, and they are each pro 
vided with a pair of pawls 65, one of which 
is provided with a hook at the end, the ad 
vantage of this construction being that if one 
of the pawls misses a tooth the other will 
strike one at the proper time, so that with 
each swing of the levers 64 64 the reel is 
turned far enough to wind the fencing which 
has been constructed. 
The reel is turned at the required intervals 
in the following manner: Rocking levers 66 
66 are fulcrumed on the frame at points 67, 
and one end, preferably their lower ends, are 
connected by pitmen 6868 to the outer end 
of the crank-arms 69 69 on the ends of shaft 
34, so that each time the shaft 34" rocks in 
order to move the table the levers 66 66 are 
swung, and as the latter are connected at 
their opposite ends with the levers 64 64 the 
reel is turned a notch. The pitmen 68 68 
which connect these levers are connected in 
the following manner: The levers 6464arehol 
low and provided in one side, preferably the 
inner side, with a slot 69, extending the length 
of the lever. In these hollow levers sliding 
heads 7070 are placed. To these heads the pit 
men 68 are pivotally attached at one end. At 
the opposite ends these pitmen are adjustably 
connected to the rocking levers 6666. To this 
end said levers are provided With elongated 
slots 7171, so as to admit of the pitmen being 
connected to them at different points, the ob 
ject being to allow for the difference of swing 
required for the levers 64 64 in reeling, for 
the reason that less Swing is required as the 
reel increases in size. To compensate for this 
the ends of the pitmen joined to the rocking 
levers are set toward the pivot of the lever. 
When a greater swing is required, these ends 
are of course set farther out from the center. 
In a large measure the extent of Swing of the 
levers 64 64 is automatically regulated, and 
this is done by means of the sliding heads, 
they being constructed to move outward to 
ward the free ends of the levers 64 64 as fast 
as the fencing is reeled or as fast as the size 
of the reel increases. This sliding is effected 
by a rod 73, which connects the heads, and 
this rod is provided with rollers 7474, adapted 
to bear on the fencing over the reel and thus 
be forced outward as fast as required. In 
this way it only becomes necessary to set the 
pitmen at the slots 71 71 about once during 
the formation of a reel. The reel thus con 
structed and operated does not pull the fenc 
ing to any great extent, but simply Winds it 
and carries it out of the Way as fast as the 
table forces it outward in the formation of 
the fence. 
It is evident that slight changes might be 
resorted to in the form and arrangement of 
the several parts described without departing 
from the spirit and scope of our invention, 
and hence we do not wish to limit ourselves 
to the exact construction herein set forth; 
but, 
Having fully described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with wire-twisters, one 
of which is provided with different-sized gear 
wheels, of a shaft in proximity to said twister 
having different-sized gear-wheels thereon, 
said wheels adapted to be shifted, whereby to 
change the speed and number of rotations of 
the twisters, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with twisters, one of 
which is provided with gear-wheels of differ 
ent sizes, of a shaft having different-sized 
gear-wheels adapted to be shifted to change 
the speed of the twisters, and means for lock 
ing the twisters temporarily when they have 
made the requisite number of revolutions, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with twisters and means 
for regulating the number of their revolutions, 
of a pawl for automatically locking the twist 
ers when they have made the required num 
ber of revolutions, and means for automati 
cally unlocking the twisters, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. The combination, with a series of twist 
ers, of a constantly-rotating gear-wheel hav 
ing a portion of its teeth. Widened, and a gear 
wheel arranged to communicate motion to the 
twisters, said wheel located in position to be 
operated periodically by the Widened teeth of 
the large gear-wheel, substantially asset forth. 
5. The combination, with the main frame 
and a sliding table, of a rocking shaft having 
crank-arm thereon, a toggle-joint extending 
from the main frame to the sliding table, and 
a link extending from the crank-arm to the 
toggle-joint, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with a frame and table 
constructed to slide thereon, of a rocking shaft 
having arms thereon, means for rocking the 
shaft, toggle-joints connecting the sliding ta 
ble and the frame, and links extending from 
the toggle-joints to the arms on the rocking 
shaft, substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination, with a sliding table and 
9o 
95 
OO 
IO5. 
O 
IT5 
I 25 
4. 
480,391 
gearing, of a rocking shaft connected with 
the table and adapted to slide the latter, a le 
wer connected with the shaft, and means on 
the gearing for swinging the lever whereby 
the shaft is rocked, substantially asset forth. 
8. The combination, with a sliding table 
and means for sliding it outward and locking 
it, of independent lever mechanism for Swing 
ing the shaft in the opposite direction at a 
predetermined interval, whereby the table is 
returned to its normal position, substantially 
as set forth. 
9. The combination, with a sliding table, 
means for sliding Salme outward, of a rocking 
shaft, a bell-cranklever connected therewith, 
and independent lever mechanism for Swing 
ing the latter, whereby the shaft is rocked to 
its normal position, substantially as set forth. 
10. In a fence-making machine, a tension 
device consisting of a support, a plate secured 
thereto and provided with outwardly-project 
ing ends, said ends having upturned flanges at 
Witnesses: 
WM. BUTLER, Jr., 
WILLIAM S. WINDLE. 
heir edges, a spring-plate having ends adapt 
ed to lie between the upturned flanges of the 
ends, and a screw swiveled in the support and 
passing through a threaded hole in the spring 
plate, substantially as set forth. 
11. The combination, with a reel, levers, 
pitmen having sliding connection with the le 
vers, and a shaft for automatically sliding the 
pitmen with the increased size of the roll, 
said shaft having rollers thereon, of rocking 
levers with which the pitmen are adjustably 
connected, a rocking shaft, and pitmen con 
necting the latter with the rocking levers, 
Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
JACOB B. SOLT. 
JAMES E. SOLT. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480491.txt	(No Model.) 
E. B. CUTTEN. 
ELECTROLYTIC CELL, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 480,491, 
Patented Aug. 9, 1892. 
EastES 
YS 
sissSSSSSS 
s Sas 
WWWWWWNWW's 
SSSSSSSSSS SS 
W 
SW 
  
  
ar 
s 
SS LS. 
l 
N. 
3/ 
7N2 
E. 
2 
2. 
s E 
N SSSSSSSSSSSSS SSSN 
SSSSSSSSSS SSSSSSSS 
SSSSSSSSS 
SNN 
SSSNSSSSSSSSSS 
83 
3, 
SE23 
322 
SSSSSSSRSNSN 
SSSSS SSS 
eS 
NNNN 
18 
WYY 
S. 
i 
X. 
XYY4. WW 
S 
w 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
s 
WITNESSES: 
7.7227 %r 
4re 64. 
w 
& 64-e 2: 24. 
Ay his 4ttorneys, 
SVET2: 
(Rutka (s.3/teles? rs 
rtis Noas persRs co, Photo-Litha, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
(No Mode.) 
No. 480,491. 
E. B. CUTTEN, 
ELECTROLYTIC CEL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 9, 1892, 
 
  
  
 
 
sts SSSSy 
R 
Y 
N SSSSSS 
SSSSSSS 
SNNNNNNRSSNN 
S. 
NXNNN 
m 
f 
. 
: 
 
NS 
 
 
RS 
N SS NN SS SS ows 
SS SSNS 
 
& 
S Sass SaSYSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
N. : SSSSSSSSSS 
S. 
GRSE 
SSSS  NNNN 
 
 
  
 
 
t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
R s 
R 
R 
S 
S 
  
WITNESSES: SS 
-e/4 
. 
Ni 
the Norts refers co, Photo-liro. wastimata, d. c. 
 
INVENTOR 
FC 64842.%24, 
c suitca (S,Sree a? rss 
Ay his 4ttorneys, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELISHA. B. CUTTEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGN. 
MENTS, TO THE UNION CHEMICAL COMPANY, OF NEW JERSEY. 
ELECTROLYT C CEL L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,491, dated August 9, 1892. 
Application filed August 19, 1891, Serial No. 403,080, (No model.) 
55 
y 75 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELISHA. B. CUTTEN, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Electrolytic Cells, of which the fol. 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention consists in an apparatus in 
tended for use in the electrolysis of solutions 
of metallic salts, and more particularly for the 
electrolysis of a solution of sodium chloride 
and the production therefrom of chlorine and 
caustic soda. 
In another application for Letters Patent, 
Serial No. 416,562, filed by me December 30, 
1891, I have fully described and claimed my 
new process for the electrolytic production of 
chlorine and soda, by means of which I have 
overcome the practical obstacles now in the 
way of such production, and in still another 
application for Letters Patent, Serial No. 
416,563, filed by meDecember 30, 1891, I have 
described a simple and typical form of appa 
ratus wherein said process may be carried 
into useful effect. 
My present application relates, specifically, 
to another and larger form of apparatus for 
the same purpose, which, however, is intend 
ed for the practical employment of my said 
process on a large or commercial Scale. 
The principle on which my said process and 
also the present apparatus depends is to cause 
that part of the solution which, as the elec 
trolytic process proceeds, becomes heavily 
charged with soda to become separated from 
the remaining or salt-chlorine part of the SO 
lution, preferably by its own gravity, and 
then to drawit off, and to reduce the affinity of 
the salt-chlorine solution for the Salt-soda, So 
lution by reducing the quantity of chlorine 
present by mechanically removing said chlo 
rine from the solution. By this means I ob 
tain a very dense salt-soda solution, which 
may be drawn off and subsequently evapo 
rated to obtain the soda therefrom, and I also 
separate the chlorine in gaseous form and 
may afterward subject it to other processes 
looking to its utilization. 
My present invention consists in the me 
chanical construction and arrangement of 
the apparatus, as hereinafter more particu 
larly set forth, and as pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section, Fig. 2 is an end elevation, 
Fig. 3 is a longitudinal vertical section, and 
Fig. 4 a plan, partly in horizontal section, of 
my improved electrolytic cell. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts. 
The outer vessel A is of iron, stiffened at 
the top by an angle-iron frame l and by the 
bottom bars 7 and having transverse struts 
On these struts the glass plate L is sup 
ported, being kept in place at its sides by 
Washers p". On this plate is placed a glass or 
earthenware trough T, within which extends 
the carbon bar F with an intervening coating 
of insulation b, surrounding the bar. The 
bar F is of molded carbon and extends nearly 
the entire length of the tank, its insulation 
being protected from the action of the soda 
Solution by the trough T. The anode consists 
of carbon rods CC, Screwed or driven into 
holes in the bar F and projecting upwardly 
to a suitable height. Near the rear end of 
the tank the bar is kept in position laterall 
by guiding-rods q q., while at the front end of 
the tank it passes through the wall thereof, a 
stuffing-box r being provided to prevent leak 
age around it. The carbon bar F projects 
beyond its insulating-trough T, and electrical 
connection is made with it through a metal 
clamps, to Which is attached a copper or other 
metal bart, leading from the cathode connec 
tion of the next tank in the series. Such 
cathode connection is shown at n', consisting 
of a metal bracket riveted to the end of the 
tank A and having fastened to it the cop 
per . 
conducting-bart, which leads to the anode 
connection of the next tank beyond. Thus 
the electrical connections are convenientl 
made at the front ends of the tanks, which 
are arranged side by side in a row or gang. 
In case any tank requires repairing or clean 
ing it may be easily cut out of circuit by 
bridging over and breaking its connections. 
The inner vesselor bell J is made in one piece, 
95 
35 
45 
 
 
480,491 
75 
go 
95 
25 
O 
preferably of molded glass formed with an 
internal rib h", resting on supporting-brack 
ets h h, applied within the tank at intervals. 
To enable salt to be readily introduced into 
the inner vessel to supply the place of that 
consumed by the electrolysis, I provide the 
top of the bell with one or more covered open 
ings J. Salt can be readily filled in by first 
closing a valve in the chlorine-outlet, then re 
moving the cover J, and immediately bring 
ing over it a traveling hopper orbin contain 
ing the salt, which can be made to fit tightly 
over the opening and caused to discharge as 
much salt as is required, the amount being 
determined by looking through the transpar 
ent top of the glass bell, after which the hop 
per will be removed and replaced and a tight 
joint made by running paraffine around the 
top of the cover in a groove m'. 
The chlorine-outlet opening u is preferably 
at the rear end of the bell and is joined by an 
elbow u', of glass, porcelain, or lead, to a branch 
pipe u, containing a stop-cock or chlorine 
outlet valve u. The branch pipes from the 
several tanks lead into the main suction-pipe 
E, which communicates with the suction 
pump. In case it is necessary to introduce 
salt to any tank its valve u is first closed, or 
in case its bell J is to be removed this valve 
is first closed and then the elbow u discon 
nected, whereupon the bell may be lifted out. 
In this tank provision is made for collectin 
and removing the hydrogen which bubbles up 
in the outer vessel. To this end a hood U, 
which may be made of sheet metal, is provided 
to fit into the space between the outer and 
inner vessels, its flanges dipping beneath the 
liquid-level to sealit. The hydrogenis caught 
in this hood and is drawn off therefrom 
through a pipe and valve v' into a main hy 
drogen-pipe V, leading to the exhaust-blower 
or other suction-pump or pumping device, by 
which the hydrogen gas is either fed to the 
furnaces or is utilized in any suitable manner. 
This arrangement not only saves and utilizes 
the hydrogen, which is of some value, but also 
avoids risk of explosion by the formation of 
an explosive mixture of hydrogen and air in 
the tank-house. In case it is necessary to dis 
connect or remove any tank or to take of its 
hood U the hydrogen-valve should be first 
closed and the communicating pipe v discon 
nected. 
Beneath the glass plate L the tank slopes 
to a gutter w for leading off the strongest soda 
solution, which passes through the space be 
tween the edge of plate I, and the tank and is 
drawn equally from all parts of the length of 
the tank by having to pass first through a 
6, p late U', which is perforated at intervals with 
fine holes. From the gutter U at the front 
end of the tank the pipei leads to the dis 
charge-fauceti before described, which drips 
or trickles the resulting stream of soda solu 
tion into the tank-pipe k, from which it runs 
off through the soda-main c'. The supply of 
strong salt solution to the tank is admitted 
from a main g by a cock g and perforated 
nozzle, from which it drips into the tank or 
hopper K', and runs through a pipe IX, which 
communicates with the end of the carbon bar 
F, which is bored or molded with a duct, ex 
tending through it longitudinally and hav 
ing branch ducts ty', formed in it vertically 
between the successive carbon rods C C, as 
clearly shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3. The 
liquid passes up in jets from these branches 
and flows upward between the anode rods. 
This construction is advantageous because it 
insures a thorough distribution of the liquid, 
introducing it at the points where it is most 
effective. 
Although my apparatus is especially de 
signed for the electrolysis of a sodium-chlo 
ride solution for the production both of chlo 
rine and caustic soda, yet it is applicable for 
the electrolysis of other analogous solutions 
for the production of either or both the pro 
ducts named or other products electrolyti 
cally analogous to them. For example, I may 
by the electrolysis of a solution of chloride of 
calcium or of magnesium produce chloride of 
calcium or of magnesia. 
The tank A is covered with an insulating 
coating of varnish f from its top down to a 
short distance above the level of the lower 
edge of the bell J. The production of soda, 
is thus limited to the portion of the iron sur 
g face below this insulating-coating, the object 
of which is to leave the upper portion of the 
salt solution as free as possible from soda. 
Common salt is preferably packed in the 
vessel A and around the carbon rods, as 
shown by the dotted lines and at if 
''. This 
salt operates to renew the strength of the so 
lution and also to prevent diffusion of soda 
through it. 
I claim as my invention the following de 
fined improvements in the process and appa 
ratus for the electrolytic production of caus 
tic soda and chlorine, substantially as herein 
before specified, namely: 
1. The combination of an outer tank and 
an anode therein, consisting of carbon pen 
cils projecting vertically from a carbonbar, 
the bar extending horizontally within said 
tank and passing out through the wall there 
of and insulated therefrom to constitute one 
of the electric terminals of the tank. 
2. The combination of an outer tank, an 
anode therein, consisting of carbon pencils 
projecting from a carbon bar and a protect 
ing-trough inclosing said bar. 
3. The combination of an outer tank, an 
anode therein, consisting of carbon pencils, 
a horizontal carbon bar, to which said pencils 
are fixed, formed with a longitudinal duct 
through it, and branch discharge-ducts lead 
ing therefrom to the exterior of the bar and 
discharging adjacent to the carbon pencils, 
and a liquid-inlet pipe communicating with 
the duct in said carbon bar. 
4. The combination, with an electrolytic 
cell, of means for discharging a liquid there. 
V 
55 
35 
40 
45 
OO 
Io 
II5 
I 25 
 
480,491 
3 
from, consisting of an outlet constructed to my name in the presence of two subscribing 
cause the liquid to fall in drops instead of a witnesses. 
continuous stream, and a discharge-pipe to 
convey away the liquid, whereby the short- 
5 circuiting of the electric current through the 
discharge-pipe is prevented. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
FRED WHITE, 
GEORGEH, FRASER. 
Witnesses: 
ELISHA. B. CUTTEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480591.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH E. KESELING AND CHARLES FUCHS, JR, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ASSIGNORS TO THE PYROLITH COMPANY, OF NEWJERSEY. 
COMPOSITION OF MATTER FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF ARTIFICIAL STONE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,591, dated August 9, 1892. 
Application filed April 39, 1892, Serial No. 431,340, (No specimens.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we JosEPH. E. KESELING, 
a subject of the Emperor of Germany, and 
9RARLESFUCHS, Jr., a citizen of the United 
States, residing atNewYork, county and state 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in a Composition of Mat 
terfor the Manufacture of Artificial Stone, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to artificial-stone con 
positions; and its object is to provide a com 
position of comparatively cheap materials, 
easily prepared, and when converted into 
stone of great density and durability. 
More particularly is it an object to provide 
an artificial stone that will withstand sudden 
and extreme changes of temperature. 
Many artificial stones have been used for 
ornamental-work which, if exposed to the hu 
.20.midity of the atmosphere, absorb-moisture 
and then disintegrate. The composition here 
inafter described may after it becomes set be 
immersed in boiling water for hours and then 
plunged into ice-cold water without affecting 
it in any manner. To attain these objects, 
we take a certain quantity of oxide of mag 
nesium and chloride of magnesium and stir 
together until the resultant cement forms a 
plastic paste. The oxide of magnesium or 
caleined magnesia, we obtain by burning pure 
magnesite in kilns, or preferably in iron or 
clay retorts, at such a temperature and length, 
of time as will expel all carbonic acid from 
the crude material. Magnesia containing a 
noticeable quantity of lime should not be used. 
The calcined magnesia thus obtained is then 
ground to an impalpable powder. . 
To obtain chloride of magnesium contain 
ing no sulphuric-acid salts and free acids, we 
take hydrochloric acid of 1.16 specific gravity 
and gradually add such an amount of calcined 
magnesium that the resulting chloride of 
magnesium will be perfectly neutral, as indi 
cated by a litmus-paper test. It is then a yel 
low oily liquid of 34 Baumnican be stored 
in iron drums. This, it will be noted, is very 
different from the magnesium-chloride salt of 
commerce, which is generally dissolved in wa 
ter for the production of acement. The com 
mercial magnesium-chloride salt contains sui 
35 
. 
. 
55 
phuric-acid salts and free acids, which, as is 
well known, do not resist the influence of the 
elements, and as they also absorb carbonic 
acid from the air such salts render the pro 
duced stone material liable to cracks and final 
disintegration. 
To obtain a perfectly-basic cement, we add 
the neutral magnesium chloride, obtained as 
above described, to a certain quantity of cal 
cined magnesia and stir the mixture until 
the cement is plastic. 
For one hundred 
pounds of calcined magnesia, we take seven 
to nine gallons magnesium chloride. This 
cement is dense and waterproof in itself, but 
is not sufficiently elastic and tenacious to 
withstand extreme changes of temperature. 
Therefore to obtain the required elasticity 
and tenacity we gradually add to the cement 
a certain proportion of pure sand (or anal 
ogous filling material) and aspinaitum (one 
tenth per cent, to five-tenths per cent.asphal 
tum, by weight) treated with a suitable vola 
tile solvent. Instead of sand, ground slate, 
sandstone, or flint-powder may be used as the 
filling material, according to the application 
desired. The heat generated by the crystal 
lizing process of the oxychloride drives off 
the asphaltum solvent and leaves the stone 
perfectly and uniformly impregnated with the 
asphaltum. The amount of asphaltum used 
will be a minimum in tiles, slabs, &c., and 
will reach the maximum in such articles as 
are subjected to extreme changes of tempera 
ture, such as wash-tubs and bath-tubs. The 
asphaltum, in combination with the sand fill 
ing material, renders the whole mass so tena 
cious and heat-conducting that it will permit 
a considerable expansion and contraction 
without affecting the integrity of the mater 
rial. The cement will bind twenty parts of 
dry sand without losing its semi-liquid state, 
so that the mixture can be readily poured 
into molds of any shape. It may also be ob 
tained sufficiently thin to flow from a brush, 
and thus form a paint, or it may be made stiff 
enough for troweling, such as plaster-work. 
Suitable mineral colors may also be intro 
duced. The elimination of the chloride of 
magnesium takes place gradually and imper 
ceptibly when exposed to the atmosphere, and Ioo 
90 
95 
75 
40 
45 
So 
480,591. 
2 
we eventually obtain a basic stone consisting 
of pure magnesium hydrate, sand, and as 
phaltum. 
Stones such as tiles, &c., are dried in a room 
s of ordinary temperattire. It is sometimes ex 
pedient for articles exposed to the atmosphere 
to have the magnesium chloride eliminated 
rapidly. This we do by taking- the stone 
after it is set and well dried out and subject 
it to a hot-water bath and then dry it again. : of the chloride. 
o Articles made under-pressure-such as stand 
ard-size bricks--we subject to a steam bath. 
under eight to ten atinosphere pressures. 
This very quickly eliminates the chloride, and 
15 the bricks are dried again in the ordinary 
temperature. 
Having thusiescribed our invention, what 
1 Acomposition of matterfor the manufac: 
we claim is- 
sture of artificial stone, which consists of a .20 
basic cement of oxide of magnesium and neur 
tral chloride of... magnesium, asphaltun, and 
, 
sand or analogous material. 
2. The process of manufacturing artificial 
stone, which consists in first obtaining a basic 25 
cement of oxide and neutralehloride of mag 
nesium, then adding sand, and asphaltun, 
thendrying the resultant stone, and then sub-. 
jecting such stone to a hot-water bath to drive 
. .30. 
In testimony whereof we have hereuntost 
our hands and seals this 27th day of April, . . 
In testimo 
. . . . 
. . 
1892. . 
JOSEPHEKESELING.I.s.l... . 
. . . . . . . . . 
. CHARLESFTCHS, JR is . 
In presenee of . . . 
...CHAs, A. RILEY, . 
WILLIAM MoLLoy. 
7 : . . . . . 
. 
. . . . 
. " . . . 
. . 
. . 
- - - - 
. 
- 
. . 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480691.txt	(No Model.) 
T. R. CAPWELL & W. C. FULLER. 
WEHICLE GEAR 
No. 480,691. 
Patented Aug. 9, 1892. 
 
S Kaza 
NHN 
 
2. 3. 
ii/ WAAFSSAS 
v Tcar. 
4 4-624-e 
WWWAAV 7OARS 
. 
assacas R. We we\\ 
NN\\\\sava S. W\\\\". 
Q/ue? riaso 
21 ORWAYS 
As Y 
THE No.3RIS PETERs co., Photo-IrHo, washington, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS R. CAPWEIL AND WILLIAM C 
. FULLER, OF DUNKIRK, NEW YORK. 
VEHICLE GEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,691, dated August 9, 1892. 
Application filed January 15, 1892, Serial No. 418,179. (No model.) 
O 
5 
25 
To all whom it Tudy concern: 
Be it known that we, THOMAS R. CAPWELL 
and WILLIAMI C. FULLER, of Dunkirk, in the 
county of Chautauqua, in the State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Vehicle-Gears, of which the follow 
ing, taken in connection with the accompa 
nying drawings, is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription. 
Our invention relates to vehicles, and par 
ticularly to that class in which the turning or 
cramping of the front axle and wheels will si 
multaneously and in like degree cramp or 
turn the rear ones, so that the front and rear 
wheels will always track even when turned, 
as in turning a corner or making a short turn. 
Our object is to produce such a vehicle, in 
which a solid reach connects the axle and is 
pivotally connected to both, so that it takes 
the longitudinal strain, and in which a sec 
tional false reach is connected to the axles, 
said sections being pivotally connected to 
each other, so that the front section exerts a 
lateral force upon the rear one whenever the 
front axle is turned upon the king-bolt. It 
is constructed as follows, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan of the vehicle, partly 
cramped, the dotted lines indicating the box. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal vertical sectional ele 
vation of the vehicle without the box. Fig. 
3 is a vertical sectional elevation of the false 
reach and the hounds, illustrating the con 
nections of the reach-sections to each other, 
of one of them to the hounds, and of the con 
struction of the circle which constitutes the 
rear cross-bar of the hounds. 
A is the front axle portion of the gear, com 
prising an axle a, wheels b, dead-block c, fifth 
wheeld, bolster e upon the fifth-Wheel, and 
king-bolt h. 
B is the rear axle part of the gear, compris 
ing an axle a', wheels b', head-blockc', fifth 
wheel d', bolster e', and king-bolt h". The 
side rails I of the hounds are secured to the 
front axle, and the pole (not shown) is se 
cured between their front ends, while their 
rear ends are connected by the curved cross 
bar 2, consisting of two metallic strips held 
5o apart by the side rails between them. The 
35 
45 
reach 3 is pivotally connected to the king 
bolts at each end. The false reach consists 
of the sections in and in. One end of the sec 
tion in fits into a mortise in the front head 
block and is secured by the king-bolt. It 
passes through under the hound-bar 2 and is 
secured thereto by the bolt r, a washer r'be 
ing inserted between the sections comprising 
this bar. The reach-sections are pivotally 
connected by a bolt m'. The rear end of the 
reach-section n is provided with a slot m', 
passes loosely through a mortise in the rear 
head-block, and the king-bolt passes through 
said slot. A slides fits loosely over the reach 
section in and is adapted to slide thereon and 
is connected to the rear axle by the lateral 
braces s', which are secured thereto by clips 
in the usual manner. 
The front end of the 
reach-section in is extended, so that it fits 
loosely between the hound-bars 2, which bars 
are curved concentric with the pivot-bolt m'. 
When the front axle is cramped in either di 
rection, the reach-section m exerts a lateral 
force upon the section in, forcing it outward, 
and this, through the slide S and braces s', 
turns the rear axle and wheels correspond 
ingly, the slide S traversing the reach-section 
and the reach-section also sliding forwardly 
upon the rear king-bolt, all so that the front 
and rear Wheels will track, while the bolsters 
remain stationary, as also the box thereon. It 
will be observed that the front and rear wheels 
will track when the false reaches are pivoted 
Substantially centrally between the two axles. 
What We claim as our invention, and desire 
to Secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a vehicle-gear, the combination, with 
the axles and hounds, the reach connecting 
them, one of said reaches consisting of sec 
tions pivotally connected together, the for 
Ward section being secured to the axle and 
to the rear bars of the hounds, and the other 
section being provided with a slot, through 
Which the king-bolt passes and having its 
frontendextended forward and engaging with 
said hound-bars. 
2. In a vehicle-gear, the combination, with 
the axles and hounds, the reach connecting 
them, one of Said reaches consisting of sec 
tions pivotally connected together, the for 
55 
7 o 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
480,691. 
ward section being secured to the forward 
axle and the rear bar of the hound, said our hands this 31st day of December, 1891. 
hound-bar having a groove in its rear edge, 
THOMAS R. CAPWELL, 
and the other section being provided with a 
WILLIAM. C. FULLER. 
5 slot, through which the rear king-bolt passes 
and having its frontendextended forward and 
engage with the groove in said hound-bar. 
A. J.LUNT, 
ALEXR, WILLIAMS. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto set 
In presence of 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480791.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 480,791, 
J. A. TRAUT. 
CAST OFF BUCKLE, 
Patented Aug. 16, l892. 
(262.277esses 
 
Z772 eze 6 or 
weae & 6%, 
461 66er 
THE NORRIs Peters co., PHOTO-lTito., WASHINGTON, O.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JUSTUSA. TRAUT, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT. 
CAST OFF BUCKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,791, dated August 16, 1892. 
Application filed May 17, 1892, Serial No. 433,330. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JUSTUSA. TRAUT, of 
New Britain, in the county of Hartford and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Cast-Off 
Buckles; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this 
Specification, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
Suspender-buckles, the objects being to pro 
vide an improved cast-off mechanism by 
means of which the ends may be quickly and 
easily released, and when united will permit 
of a lateral Swinging movement to accommo 
date the movement of the wearer or theirregu 
lar position of the buttons. 
The invention consists in certain novel de 
tails of construction and combinations and 
arrangements of parts, all as will be now de 
Scribed, and pointed out particularly in the 
appended claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a buckle constructed in accord 
ance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a similar 
view with the parts detached. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tion longitudinally of the buckle. Fig. 4 is 
a similar view with the parts detached. 
Like letters of reference in the several fig 
lures indicate the same parts. 
The buckle proper- i.e., the portion em 
bracing and engaging the web-in itself forms 
no part of my present invention, and for con 
Venience I have shown one of that class in 
which a band Aencircles the web and on one 
side is provided with a slota, in which is piv 
oted a locking-lever B, held in place by lateral 
extensions or enlargements on the outside 
and inside of the band, respectively. The 
end of the lever inside the band is toothed 
and clamps the web against the back of the 
band when the lever is turned down into 
locked position. A little lip or downward 
projection b may beformed at the lower edge 
of the band to protect the teeth or prevent 
the web catching thereon while the buckle is 
being shifted. At the outer end the locking 
lever B is tubular or formed into a socket or 
flat tubular portion b', as shown in section in 
Figs. 3 and 4 and in top plan in Figs. 1 and 
2, for the reception of the detachable slide E, 
having the loop e for the suspender end. The 
tube or socket is relatively thin and Wide to 
lie close to the web and not interfere with 
overlying garments, and the detachable slide 
is of course correspondingly shaped. 
The main objection to cast-off buckles lies 
in their extreme rigidity, making a portion of 
the suspender solid as it were and lacking in 
that element of flexibility or capability to 
adapt itself to all conditions of application 
and flexures of the body of the Wearer. With 
a view to overcoming these objections I have 
in this instance made the connection between 
the locking-lever and detachable slide a 
hinged one, the two parts being capable of a 
lateral swinging movement with relation to 
each other. This Iaccomplish by forming an 
inwardly-extending flange F on the Socket or 
tube circular or segmental in the direction of 
its length and struck on a radius less than 
one-half the width of the socket. As shown, 
this flange is formed by the inwardly-turned 
edge of a semicircular opening in the front 
lower edge of the socket, and the detachable 
slide has a similarly-shaped opening adapted 
to engage the circular flange when the parts 
are brought together. 
The slide may be of sheet metal bent to 
form a V-shaped spring, to one (preferably 
the rear) leg of which the loop e is secured, 
while the other leg has the opening f therein 
and a finger or thumb portion below the 
socket roughened or having ornamental pro 
jections g, which, being at or above the level 
of the surface of the socket, are more readily 
pressed upon to disengage the slide, as Will 
be at once understood. A tongue h may oc 
cupy the center of the opening f to preserve 
the neat and symmetrical appearance of the 
buckle, and by having a raised center or pro 
jection will serve as an extension of the fin 
ger-piece to assistin releasing the slide. The 
upper portion of the slide is tapered or nar 
rowed to prevent striking the sides of the 
socket and holding the slide rigidly. 
The construction is neat and simple, and, 
while the advantages of a cast-off buckle of 
this character is secured, it is without their 
disadvantages. 
The circular form of the flange gives it 
great strength and an extended bearing to 
95 
CO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
5 
O 
resist wear, besides which its location around 
a recess at the lower edge gives a more ex 
tended finger-piece to facilitate disengage 
ment of the slide. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. The combination, with the web-engaging 
members, of the socket and detachable spring 
slide having the semicircular flange and semi 
circular opening, respectively, co-operating to 
unite the socket and slide, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination, with the web-engaging 
members, of the socket having the inwardly 
curved semicircular flange at the lower edge 
and the spring-slide narrowed toward the up 
per end and having a semicircular opening 
for the reception of the flange, the projecting 
20 
finger-piece, and the loop for the attachment 
of the co-operating end of the web, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The combination, with the web-engaging 
members, of the socket having the semicir 
cular concavity in the lower edge of the in 
wardly-curved flange around said concavity 
and the spring-slide having a semicircular 
opening thereinfor the reception of the flange, 
the tongue projecting into the said concavity 
in the socket and having the raised portion 
thereon, and the finger-piece, substantially as 
described. 
JUSTUS A TRAUT. 
Witnesses: 
- 
CHAS. B. STANLEY, 
II. S. WALTER. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480891.txt	(No Model.) 
E. WESTON. 
TEMPERATURE REGULATING DEVICE FOR ELECTRICAI, CIRCUITS, 
No. 480,891, 
Patented Aug. 16, 1892, 
 
WITIESSES; 
$222 6P 
INVENTOR 
&vala, Y/2-076 C 
BY 
?ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD WESTON, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
TEMPERATURE-REGULATING DEVICE FOR ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,891, dated August 16, 1892. 
Application filed June 4, 1891, Serial No. 395,135. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD WESTON, of 
Newark, Essex county, New Jersey, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvementin Tem 
perature-Regulating Devices for Electrical 
Circuits, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to a device for main 
taining constant electrical resistance in a cir 
cuit despite changes in temperature occurring 
in said circuit and due to thermometric Varia 
tions in the surrounding atmosphere; and my 
invention consists in the combination, With a 
coil producing a field of force in an electrical 
measuring - instrument, the said coil being 
formed of an electrical conductor the resist 
ance of which increases with augmented tem 
perature, of a conductor connected in series 
with said coil, the resistance of which de 
creases with augmented temperature, the said 
coil and circuit connections and the said last 
named conductor being relatively propor 
tioned and arranged to render their combined 
resistance substantially constant despite ten 
perature changes. 
. 
The accompanying drawing shows a plan 
view of an electrical instrument to which my 
temperature-regulating device is applied. 
In Letterspatent No. 440,290, granted to me 
November 11, 1890, I have fully described and 
claimed the instrument here shown, to which 
my present invention is applied, and also the 
articular means of maintaining constant 
electrical resistance in the circuit of the in 
strument despite changes of temperature oc 
curring in said circuit, said changes being 
principally those due to the heating effect of 
the current upon its conductor. I will there 
fore describe said instrument here only 
briefly, referring to my aforesaid patent for 
the complete details of its construction and 
Se. 
a is the base-board, which carries the fixed 
coil b of insulated wire. Within this coil 
there is a pivoted coil, (not shown,) the pivot 
shaft c of which carries a disk d, which sup 
ports the index or pointer e. The bar, f is a 
tightening-bar for aspiral Spring, (not shown,) 
which surrounds the coil-pivot. One end of 
the said barf is connected to the circuit-wire 
g, which leads to the binding-posth. The cir 
cuit in the instrument proceeds from the bind 
ing-post h to bar f to the coiled spring, to 
which said bar is connected, thence to the in 
ner pivoted coil, (not shown,) thence to a sec 
ond coiled spring and to the fixed coil b, and 
thence by wire i to the binding-posti. 
k is a scale-plate, over which the index is 
moved. The coil b and movable coil therein 
are electrically connected, and when a current 
traverses them the pivoted coil assumes a po 
sition dependent upon the difference of po 
tential between the terminals of the instru 
ment, and the index is thus moved over the 
suitably-marked scale. 
n is a thermometer-bulb curved and fast 
ened upon the exterior of the coil b by a strap 
in. By means of the thermometer-tube dis 
posed upon the Scale-plate, as shown, the tem 
perature of the coil is shown. 
At p' p' p', &c., is a series of resistances, 
over which moves the contact-arm q, and this 
device is interposed (in wires) in the circuit 
of the fixed coil b. The contact-plates oo, &c., 
are marked to correspond to the thermometer 
scale. . When the arm q is placed on the con 
tact-plate O, it will be evident that the current 
in the instrument then passes through all the 
resistances p' pp, &c. Let it be supposed, 
merely for purposes of illustration, that this 
is the starting-point of temperatures. Now 
suppose the heat of the coil augments, so that 
the thermometer shows a temperature of 65. 
In order to compensate for the consequentin 
crease of resistance in the coil, the switch-arm 
q is moved around to meet the plate o. 
(Marked 65.) Seven resistances p' p', &c., 
will thus be thrown out of the circuit, and as 
each resistance Corresponds to the increase of 
resistance in the coil, due to the elevation of 
five degrees of temperature, it follows that by 
throwing out seven of these resistances we 
have exactly compensated for the increased re 
sistance of the coil, due to its augmented heat, 
So that it is simply necessary With this device 
to note the indication of the thermometer and 
place the arm q on the contact-plate marked 
correspondingly to that indication to keep the 
resistance of the circuit in the instrument uni 
form. 
The foregoing device I find in practice to 
answer Well for maintaining a constant re 
sistance in the circuit, despite changes of 
temperature in the latter, due to the heating 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
So 
95 
OO 
coil and circuit connections and the said car 
bon being relatively proportioned and ar 
ranged to render their combined resistance 
constant despite temperature changes. 
3. In an electrical measuring-instrument, 
a metallic coil producing a field of force in 
said instrument and in series connection 
there with, an electrical conductor the resist 
ance of which decreases with augmented tem 
perature, the said conductor being freely ex 
posed to the atmosphere and the said coil and 
circuit connections and conductor being rela 
tively proportioned and arranged to render 
their combined resistance constant despite 
changes in atmospheric temperature. 
4. In combination with an electrical meas 
uring-instrument containing in circuit a fixed 
coil and a movable coil moving in the field of 
said fixed coil, both of said coils being made 
of an electrical conductor the resistance of 
which increases with augmented tempera 
ture, an electrical, conductor the resistance of 
which decreases with augmented tempera 
ture connected in series with said coils, the 
said coils and circuit connections and the said 
last-named conductor being relatively pro 
portioned and arranged to render their com 
bined resistance substantially constant de 
spite temperature changes. 
5. In-an electrical measuring-instrument, a 
means of indicating changes in temperature 
occurring in the instrument-circuit and con 
nected in said circuit, a resistance, and a 
means of varying the same conformably to 
the indications of said heat-indicating appa 
ratus, in combination with an electrical con 
ductor interposed in said circuit, the electri 
cal resistance of which conductor decreases 
with augmented temperature, whereby the re 
sistance of the whole circuit may be main 
tained constant despite both internal and ex 
ternal temperature variations. 
6. In an electrical measuring-instrument, a 
coil, a means of indicating variations in the 
temperature of said coil and in circuit with 
said coil, a variable resistance, and an electrical 
conductor the resistance of which decreases 
with augmented temperature. 
EDWARD WESTON. 
75 
95 
Witnesses: 
M. BosCH, 
J. E. GREER. 
480,891 
55 
O 
5 in the surrounding atmosphere. 
effect of the current. It is desirable, how 
ever, to compensate not merely for these 
changes, but also for changes occurring in the 
circuit by reason of thermometric variations 
To this end 
I interpose in the circuit of the fixed coil b a 
body A of carbon or other material which 
possesses the property of offering a dimin 
ished resistance on being increased in tem 
perature. This body of carbon I proportion 
or arrange so that for a given thermometric 
variation in the atmosphere it will vary in re 
sistance inversely to the change produced by 
the same cause in the remainder of the in 
strument-circuit; or, in other words, if the re 
sistance in the rest of the circuit increases 
the resistance in the body of carbon A de 
creases, and vice versa. In practice I prefer to 
use a thin filament of carbon, which, by means 
of copper electro - deposition or in various 
other known ways, can easily be connected 
directly in the instrument-circuit. 
It will be obvious that the introduction of 
this body of carbon A, if properly propor 
tioned, while compensating for variations in 
resistance of the circuit, due to changes in 
temperature in the surrounding atmosphere, 
does not interfere practically with the oper 
ation of the thermometer and resistance-coils 
applied to the instrument and which serves 
as means for compensating for changes in re 
sistance, due to variations in the heating effect 
of the current. 
2 
I claim 
1. In an electrical measuring-instrument, a 
coil producing a field of force in said instru 
ment and formed of an electrical conductor 
the resistance of which increases with aug 
mented temperature and connected in series 
with said coil, a conductor the resistance of 
which decreases with augmented tempera 
ture, the said coil and circuit connections 
and the said last-named conductor being rela 
tively proportioned and arranged to render 
their combined resistance substantially con 
stant despite temperature changes. 
2. In an electrical measuring-instrument, a 
coil producing a field of force in said instru 
ment and formed of an electrical conductor 
the resistance of which increases with aug 
mented temperature, and a strip of carbon 
connected in series with said coil, the said 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US480991.txt	(No Model.) 
A BOETTCHER 
WINDOW CHAIR, 
No. 480,991. 
Patented Aug. 16, 1892. 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
6%ezae 
-/(on. 6 
BY 
ATTORNES 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOILPH BOETTCHER, OF SOUTH STILLWATER, MINNESOTA. 
WINDOW. CHAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 480,991, dated August 16, 1892. 
Application filed September 12, 1891, Serial No, 405,471. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
- 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ADOLPHBOETTCHER, of 
South Stillwater, in the county of Washington 
and State of Minnesota, have invented a new 
and Improved Window Scaffold or Chair, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Window chairs or scaffolds, and has for its ob 
ject to provide a light, durable, and strong 
structure capable of being expeditiously fas 
tened in a window to extend outward beyond 
the same, and which may also be conveniently 
removed from the window and carried to an 
other when occasion may demand. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a chair or scaffold adapted for household 
use in the cleaning of windows, admitting of 
their being cleaned upon the outside without 
danger to the person performing the work. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
dra Wings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the chair or 
scaffold in position in a window. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation thereof, the portion of the build 
ing surrounding the window being shown in 
Section; and Fig. 3 is a section taken horizon 
tally on the line 33 of Fig. 2, illustrating the 
chair in plan view. 
The scaffold or chair is constructed in two 
side sections A and A', adjustably connected 
by a connecting-bar B. Each side section is 
of like construction and comprises a base of 
triangular shape and a sliding clamp mem 
ber supported by the base. The base of each 
section consists of an upright 10, a horizontal 
top beam 11, crossing the vertical beam or 
upright 10, and a diagonal beam 12, uniting 
the lower portion of the vertical beam with 
the outer portion of the horizontal beam. In 
making this connection the vertical beam at 
its upper end is provided with an attached 
strap 13, through which strap the horizontal 
beam 11 is passed and projects some distance 
. 
. 
to the rear of the strap. A second strap 14 
is rigidly secured to the upper end of the di 
agonal beam 12, and the horizontal beam 11 
passes through this strap also. The horizon 
tal beam is rigidly secured to each of these 
straps through the medium of bolts 15 or the 
equivalents thereof. The straps extenda suf 
ficient distance above the horizontal beam 
Il to receive the upper clamping-beam, above 
referred to, and which is designated in the 
drawings by the reference-figure 16, The 
clamping-beam 16 extends beyond both ends 
of the upper horizontal beam of the base, 
but much further beyond the rear than the 
forward end, and the rear or inner end of 
the clamping-beam has secured to its outer 
side a block 17, carrying a pad or cushion. 
This block is adapted to engage with the in 
ner face of the window-frame D, as shown 
in Fig. 3. The sliding beam when in posi 
tion upon the base is prevented from having 
movement thereon bypassing a pin 18 through 
the beam in front of the strap 13. The inner 
face of the lower portion of the base is pro 
vided with a pad 19 to prevent the base-frame 
from marring the paint on the outside of the 
building, as this portion of the chair or scaf 
fold bears directly upon the outer wall of the 
building below the window, as shown in Figs, 
I and 2, and the inner end of the upper hori 
Zontal member of the base-frame has secured 
upon its under face a pad 20, also adapted to 
rest upon the window-sill 21. If the window 
sill is level, this pad has a straight under 
face; but if the upper portion of the sill is 
chamfered or beveled, the under contacting 
face of the pad is similarly shaped, as shown 
in Fig. 2. 
Upon the outer face of the upper horizon 
tall member II of the base-frame two sockets 
22 are secured, adapted to receive a guard, to 
be hereinafter described. 
The connecting-bar B, above referred to as 
uniting the sections A and A', is connected 
with the section A-for instance, back of the 
strap 13-by a bolt 23 or like device, which 
will constitute a pivot or may be readily re 
moved. The opposite end of the connecting 
bar is provided with a number of apertures 
24, and through one of these apertures a bolt 
or pin 25 is passed downward into the sec 
95 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
480,991 
tion A, also back of the strap 13, as shown in 
Fig. 3. The connecting-bar B is made amply 
long to admit of the sections being carried a 
sufficient distance apart to enable the chair 
or scaffold to fit the widest window, and 
braces 26 are employed, removably connected 
by bolts or otherwise with the sliding clamp 
bars 16 of the chair near their inner ends 
and with the connecting-bar B, the attach 
ment with the latter being effected, prefer 
ably, at each side of its center. Pins are 
preferably used to connect the braces 26 with 
the sliding clamp-bars, so that when the parts 
of the chair or scaffold are disconnected the 
braces may be carried over parallel with and 
upon the connecting-bar. 
A guard-rail E is preferably used in con 
nection with the chair or scaffold, and is made 
in three sections, two side sections 27 and a 
front section 28. The uprights of the side 
sections are entered into the sockets 22 and 
are maintained in the sockets by hooks 29 or 
their equivalents attached to the side sections 
and engaging with eyes or staples upon the 
outer side faces of the clamp-beam. The end 
of the front section of the guard-rail is con 
nected with the side sections by dowels or in 
any approved manner, and a suitable floor 30 
is laid across the clamp-beams 16, covering 
that portion of the bars inclosed by the guard 
rail. 
It is evident that such a chair or scaffold is 
of very simple yet strong construction and 
that it may be expeditiously and conveniently 
set up for use in a window and compactly 
disposed of when not in use. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A window chair or scaffold consisting of 
two essentially triangular base-sections, straps 
projected upward from the base - sections 
above the upper edge thereof, beams passed 
2. In a window chair or scaffold, the com- 5o 
through said straps and provided with clamp 
ing-blocks at their inner ends, a cross-bar ad- 45 
justably connecting the clamp-beams of the 
two sections, and brace-beams uniting the 
connecting-bar and base-sections, as and for 
the purpose specified. 
bination, with base-frames essentially trian 
gular in general contour, straps projected be 
yond the tops of the base-frames, and beams 
engaging with the tops of the said base-frames, 
passed through the straps thereof, and pro- 55 
vided with stop-pins, of blocks secured to the 
inner ends of the upper beams, adapted for 
engagement with the inner face of a window 
frame, a connecting-bar adjustably uniting 
the base-frames, and a flooring and guard- 6o 
rail removably secured upon the frames, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a window chair or scaffold, the com 
bination, with two essentially triangular base 
frames provided with sockets upon their side 65 
faces and straps projected upward near the 
ends beyond the upper edge of said base 
frames, of beams passed through the straps, 
stop-pins carried by said beams, clamping 
blocks attached to the inner ends of the beams to 
and adapted for engageinent with the inner 
face of the window-frame, and a connecting 
bar adjustably uniting the clamping-beams, 
braces connected with the clamping-bar and 
the connecting-bar, a sectional guard-rail 75 
fitted in the sockets of the base-frames, lock 
ing devices locking the guard-rail and the 
clamp-beams, and a removable flooring cross 
ing the clamping-beams within the space Sur 
rounded by the guard-rails, as and for the 8o 
purpose specified. 
ADOLPH BOETTCHER. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES E. G.OWEN, 
H. L. HAGERMAN. 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481091.txt	(No Model.) 
J, ANDERSON. 
WINDOW FRAME AND SASH, 
No. 481,091, 
 
Patented Aug. 16, 1892. 
G/6%.4 
by -6, 76 
ATTORMEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN ANDERSON, OF HICKSON, NORTH DAKOTA. 
WINDOW FRAME AND SASH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 481,091, dated August 16, 1892. 
Application filed February 1, 1892, Serial No. 419,920, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN ANDERSON, of 
Hickson, in the county of Cass and State of 
North Dakota, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Window Frames and 
Sashes, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
Window frames and sashes, and has for its 
object to so construct the frames and fit the 
Sashes therein that the latter may be swung 
OutWard to stand at a right angle to the frame, 
So that both sides of the glass may be con 
veniently and effectually cleaned. 
Another object of the invention is to ac 
complish this result in a simple and economic 
manner and without much alteration in the 
present form of frame and no alteration what 
ever in the present form of sashes. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several parts, 
as will be hereinafter fully set forth, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
WeWS. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a window 
frame constructed in accordance with my in 
Vention, a portion of the frame being in ver 
tical Section, the upper sash being in its nor 
mal position and the lower sash opened at a 
right angle to the frame. Fig. 2 is an end 
view of the window-frame, with the cover of 
its boxing removed; and Fig. 3 is a transverse 
section taken, practically, on the line 33 of 
Fig. 1. 
The window-frame A is of the ordinary con 
struction, except that upon one side from a 
slight distance above the center to the lower 
sill the inner bead 10 and the parting-bead 
11 are made in tWo sections, an upper rigid 
Section (t, attached to the frame in the usual 
manner, and a lower movable section C, the 
latter Section being adapted to have lateral 
movement to and from the opposite side of 
the frame, and to provide for such movement 
of the sections a? of the beads vertical slots 
12 and 13 are produced in the side of the 
frame at which the sectional beads are lo 
cated. These slots 12 and 13 are adapted one 
to receive the movable section of the parting 
bead and the other the corresponding section 
of the inner bead, and these bead-sections 
have free movement in the said slots, as is best 
shown in Fig. 3. The outer bead 14 upon 
that side of the frame containing the sectional 
bead is preferably made in the usual man 
ner-that is, in one piece-and all of the beads 
upon the opposite side of the window-frame 
are likewise made in the usual manner. 
The upper sash B and the lower sash B' 
slide in the usual sashways between the beads. 
At one side of the frame a boxing 16 is lo 
cated or constructed, and upon the inner wall 
of this boxing two crank-shafts 17 and 18 are 
journaled, as is best shown in Figs. 1 and 2, 
one crank-shaft being below the other, and 
Said shafts are so located that one of the 
shafts is placed near the upper end of the 
movable sections of the beads 10 and 11, and 
the other shaft near the lower ends of said 
sections. The upper crank-shaft, however, ex 
tends outwardin front of the frame, and is pro 
vided with a button 19 or otherform of handle, 
whereby the shaft may be manipulated. 
Each crank-shaft 17 and 18 is connected with 
the movable sections of the beads 10 and 11, 
ordinarily, through the medium of links 20, 
and the two crank-shafts are connected in 
their turn by a link 21, as is best shown in Fig. 
2. The connecting rod or link 21 uniting the 
crank-shafts is normally pressed by a spring 
22, likewise shown in Fig. 2, for a purpose to 
be hereinafter specified. 
At the side of the frame containing the or 
dinary form of beads two hooks or brackets 
23 and 24 are located, preferably, in the same 
horizontal plane, one being secured to the in 
ner bead and the other to the parting-bead, 
as shown in Fig. 3, and the upper and lower 
sash are respectively provided with an eye 25, 
So located that the eye of the lower sash will 
receive the bracket upon the inner bead when 
Said Sash is in its lower or closed position and 
the eye upon the upper sash will receive the 
bracket 24 on the parting-bead when the up 
per Sash is in its lowermost position. Each 
Sash at that side carrying the eye has pro 
duced in its under face a socket 26, and when 
the Sashes are brought down to an engage 
ment With the lower sill of the window-frame 
pins 27, located in said sills, enter said sock 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
481,091 
of the parting-rails is greatly facilitated by 
ets. T3y this means when the sashes are low 
the pressure of the spring 22 upon the con 
ered each sash at one side will have a hinged 
necting-link 21, uniting the two shafts. 
connection with the frame. 
It will be observed that this attachment 
In operation, when it is desired to clean the 
may be conveniently added to any window 
window the button 19 is manipulated to carry 
frame and that the sashes need not be con 
the crank-arms of the crank-shafts outward, 
structed in a different manner than at pres 
and thus carry the sections a? of the sectional 
ent, and it is apparent that great economy of 
beads 10 and 11 substantially into the boxing, 
time in the cleaning of windows will be at 
leaving the lower portion of the frame at that 
tained by the employment of the improve 
side without any projections upon its inner 
face below its center and providing for the 
ment. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
free movement of each sash when carried 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
down to an engagement with the lower sill 
outward at a right angle to the frame. The 
Patent 
1. A window-frame having one of its part 
sections a' of the beads having thus been 
ing-beads and one of its inner beads provided 
carried out of the way of the sashes the lower 
with a movable section, connected crank 
sash, after the innerface of the sash is cleaned, 
is swung out at a right angle to the frame upon 
shafts mounted in the frame and connected 
with the said movable beads to move them to 
its hinges, as shown in Fig. 1, and the outer 
and from the sashes to permit the sashes to 
face of the pane may then be conveniently 
swing outward, and means for operating said 
operated upon. This sash is then removed 
crank-shafts, substantially as set forth. 
from its hinged connection with the frame. 
2. A window-frame provided with vertical 
The upper sash is lowered, cleaned upon its 
slots in one face and having one of its part 
inner face, and swung out upon its hinges, as 
ing-beads and one of its inner beads provided 
was the lower sash, in order that the outer 
with a movable section mounted in Said slots 
face of the panelmay be cleaned and polished. 
to move toward and from the sashes, connect 
When the upper sash has been cleaned, it is 
restored to its position within the frame and ed spring-pressed crank-shafts connected with 
is carried upward to its normal position. The said movable sections, and means for operat 
ing said shafts, substantially as shown and 
lower sash is then placed in its normal posi 
described. 
tion in the frame and the button 19 of the 
upper crank-shaft is manipulated to throw 
the lower sections of the sectional beads in 
ward, locking the Sashes in their proper posi 
tion. This inward movement of the Sections 
GEO. JACOBSON, 
P. E. QUALEY. 
JOIIN ANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
45 
55 
65 
IC) 
25 
35 
- 's 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481191.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
No. 48,191, 
C. A. A. RAND. 
HARWESTER REEL SUPPORT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Aug. 23, 1892. 
d2S 
isfrass 
if N 
72 t 
C-1224 
- - 
A - 
\, 's 
/ R 
Ss 
M 
Hir 
the ORIS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHo, washNaron.o. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. A. A. RAND. 
HARWESTER REEL SUPPORT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 481,191. 
Patented Aug. 23, l892, 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
r 
&S Wy 
S. 
O s 
SASY U. 
as-commons an exacercastitt 
SEDITIII 
DP 
 
2 2 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
% 
s 
Er 
 
 
 
The Norris Peteras co. PHoro-LTHO. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
ar; it f R 
s 
Set 
l 
title 
(No Model.) 
C. A. A. RAND. 
HARWESTER REEL SUPPORT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 48l. 191, 
Patented Aug. 23, 1892, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
rSN 
 
Sy? 2/ 
 
s 
t 
2SERENE. 
SE waRIA ADIXIII: 
Sa 
gi SNS 
Eess 
  
 
  
 
e 
22.222s 2 
14ss 2 
2s K22S 
The Norris Peters Co., Pitots-Ho, washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. ANDERSON RAND, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WILLIAM DEERING & COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
HARVESTER - R EEL SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 481,191, dated August 23, 1892. 
Application filed March 14, 1892, Serial No. 424,762, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLESA. ANDERSON 
RAND, of Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Harvester-Reel 
Supports, of which the following is a full de 
scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings. 
Myinvention relates to that class of reels in 
which adjustment is made in two directions 
viz., fore and aft and up and down-and has 
for its object ease and simplicity of adjust 
ment, as hereinafter pointed out. 
In the drawings, Figure l is a side eleva 
tion of my device, showing enough of a har 
vester-frame to illustrate the invention. Fig. 
2 is a plan view with certain parts broken 
away and certain other parts shown in the 
position to accomplish fore-and-aft adjust 
ment of the reel. Fig. 3 is a view of certain 
parts and a diagram showing other parts by 
which the fore-and-aft adjustment is made. 
Fig. 4 is a front elevation of the lower joint 
of the reel-standard and universal joint con 
necting the driving-shafts. Fig. 5 is a plan 
view similar to Fig. 2, showing certain of the 
same parts in the position to effect a vertical 
adjustment of the reel. Fig. 6 is a vertical 
section on the line 6 6 of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 is a 
perspective view of the upper end of the ra 
dius-bar. Fig. 8 is a perspective view of the 
quadrant depended upon to control vertical 
adjustments. Fig. 9 is a vertical section on 
the line 9 9 of Fig. 5. Fig. 10 is a vertical 
section on the line 10 10 of Fig. 4. 
A is the base-support, Suitably Secured to 
or forming part of the frame B of a harvester 
and affords bearing for the shaft A. It is 
bifurcated at its upper end in order to pro 
vide supports for the reel-standard C. The 
latter is preferably made hollow in order to 
provide bearing for the shaft C", and has at its 
lower end arms c c, SO constructed as to make 
a joint with the bifurcated end of the base 
support, upon which the reel-standard rocks. 
At the upper end of the standard arms c' and 
care provided, to which is pivoted the reel 
bracket D, having arms d and d', so con 
structed as to make a pivotal joint with the 
said arms c' and c of the standard. The reel 
spider E is secured to the shaft F in the usual 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
manner, the said shaft having bearing in the 
sleeve D of the bracket D. 
Rotation may be imparted to the reel in the 
direction shown by the arrow from the ele 
Vator-drum A through the instrumentality 
of the bevel-gears A, the shaft A', the uni 
Versal joint G, (hereinafter more particularly 
described,) the shaft C, the bevel-gears C 
and D', (the latter secured to a shaft d, hav 
ing bearings in the joints formed by the arms 
c' and c and d and d",) and over the sprocket 
wheels H and H is thrown the chain H2. 
The universal joint G consists of three 
parts, two of which g and g are secured to 
the shafts A and C, respectively. These 
parts have ears g g and gg, which are piv 
otally secured to the third part of the joint 
G, which is a ring, so as to form the two 
axes of said joint. The ring G' is secured to 
one of the parts-as, for instance, g-by means 
of a bolt or pin passing through said ring and 
the ears gg, which forms one axis. The other 
axis is formed by the ears g, pivoted in re 
cesses in the ring, cut somewhat deep and so 
made that when it is desired to remove the 
reel-standard from the base-support the parts 
g and G' may be carried with it on the shaft 
C, leaving the part 9 on the shaft A with 
out setting free any other parts. 
I is the hand-lever, and I' is a sleeve sur 
rounding the same, the said sleeve having a 
stud i, which may be integral there with and 
which is supported in a boss d" of the exten 
sion-arm d of the arm d". The said studex 
tends far enough through the boss d" to take 
a spring i", the purpose of which will soon be 
made cleal'. 
C is a quadrant, preferably made integral 
with the arm cof the reel-standard. 
J is a radius-bar pivoted at its lower end 
to any fixed portion of the harvester-as, for 
instance, the base-support at a point a con 
venient distance in front of the lower joint of 
the reel-standard and terminating in a piece 
J', (shown in Fig. 7,) which carries a part of 
each locking device. The said piece has two 
lugsi and j', the latter having a boss formed 
thereon which is adapted to slide in the quad 
rant C. The lugs.j and f' carry the latch K, 
which engages any of the series of holesk in 
the quadrant C, thereby holding the reel 
m 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
481,191 
standard in any desired fore-and-aft position. 
The latch-piece R takes the end of the lever 
I, and may be secured thereto at a point be 
tween the lugsi and f' by means of a shoul 
der and pin or by any well-known means. 
The rearward extension-arm d terminates a 
short distance rearward of the boss d, and 
there affords a fulcrum d for the lever. 
When it is desired to disengage the latch K 
from the quadrant C, stress is applied in 
the direction indicated by an arrow in Fig. 2, 
and it will be seen that when the said latch 
is disengaged the spring will be compressed, 
thus obtaining the necessary prompt return 
to place of said latch when the stress is re 
moved from the lever. 
By referring to Fig. 3 it will be seen that 
the pivotal centers of the standard C and ra 
dius-bar Jbeing some distance apart the latch 
piece K will be carried by the upper end of 
said bar opposite each of the holes k in the 
quadrant C as the standard is moved fore 
and aft, and that said movement is limited by 
the bossi' coming in contact with the ends of 
the slot in said quadrant. 
L is a quadrant shown in Figs. 1, 6, and 
8 and held in a socket l on the piece J. Guide 
ways l are formed on the bracket D, which 
hold the said quadrant in place. This quad 
rant has a series of holes l, with which the 
latch M engages through the aperture m in 
the bracket D. The said latch is pivoted to 
the arm d' and extends rearward to the Stud 
i, and may be held thereon by any well-known 
means, preferably, as shown, by a nut and 
washer. A projection n on the latch M acts 
as a stop against the extension d to limit the 
movement of said latch. When it is desired 
to disengage the latch M from the quadrant 
L, stress is applied to the lever I in the direc 
tion indicated by the arrow in Fig. 5, the lug 
f' being the fulcrum. It will be seen that the 
spring ' acts to keep both latches in engage 
ment with their respective quadrants. A 
coiled spring N is secured at d to the exten 
sion-arm d of the bracket D at its upper end 
and to the base support A at its lower end 
and acts to counterbalance the weight of the 
reel carried on the forward end of the bracket 
D. It will be seen that the upper end of the 
radius-bar could be adapted to carry either 
both latches or both quadrants without de 
parting from the principles of my invention 
as demonstrated in the drawings. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with the reel-standard 
carrying a quadrant, of a reel - supporting 
bracket pivoted to said standard at its upper 
end, a hand-lever, a latch controlled by said 
lever, and a radius-bar pivoted a convenient 
distance from the lower end of Said standard 
and terminating at its upper end in a piece 
which carries said latch and slides in said 
quadrant, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
2. The combination, with the reel-standard 
carrying a quadrant, of a reel-supporting 
bracket pivoted to said standard, a hand-le 
ver supported in said bracket, a latch con 
trolled by said lever and adapted to engage 
said quadrant, and a radius-rod having its 
upper end adapted to carry said latch and to 
slide in said quadrant, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
3. The combination, with a reel-Standard 
and bracket, of the quadrants C9 and L, the 
latches IK and M, a hand-lever controlling 
said bracket and latches, and a radius-bar 
having its upper end adapted to sustain both 
latching devices, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
4. The combination, with the reel-standard 
having the quadrant C and the reel-bracket 
carrying the latch M jointed together, of the 
radius-bar J, carrying a bracket adapted to 
support and guide the latch-pin k, that by en 
gaging the quadrant on the reel-standard 
controls the fore-and-aft adjustment of the 
said standard, and to Sustain a second quad 
rant that engaged by the latch M controls the 
position of vertical adjustment of the reel 
bracket, and suitable means for controlling 
the said latches, all combined substantially 
as described. 
5. The combination of the reel-standard 
having the quadrant C and the reel-bracket 
jointed thereto and having the latch M with 
the radius-bar J, having the bracket J, 
adapted to sustain and guide the latch that 
engages the quadrant C and to sustain the 
quadrant L that is engaged by the latch M, 
and a lever pivoted to Said bracket J in such 
a manner as to slide the latch that engages 
the said quadrant C and supported in the 
slide-bolt that controls the latch M, whereby 
the movement of the lever sidewise in one 
direction releases the latch from the quadrant 
C and in the other direction releases the 
latch M, Substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with a reel-standard 
carrying the quadrant C, of a reel-bracket, a 
radius-bar carrying the latch K, that engages 
Said quadrant and the quadrant L, the latch 
M, that engages the Said quadrant T., and the 
hand-lever I, substantially as and for the pur 
ose described. 
7. The combination, with a reel-standard 
carrying a quadrant and a reel-bracket, of the 
radius-bar J, carrying the piece J', the latches 
IK and M, the quadrant L, and the lever I, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
8. The combination, with a reel-standard 
carrying a quadrant and a reel-bracket, of a 
radius-bar J, carrying the piece J', the latches 
K and M, the quadrant L, the lever I, and the 
Spring - controlled sleeve I, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
w 
CHARIES A. ANDERSON RANI), 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR JOHNSON, 
ELISE. M. HALVERSON. 
75 
85 
95 
Od 
Io5 
d 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481291.txt	(No Model.) 
T. A.HEARN. 
ELECTRIC WATER HEATER, 
No. 481,291, 
 
Patented Aug. 23, 1892. 
Sir esses : 
7%a-zee-ey. 
6-7 a. 
C4-24 
 - 
O t-evv^-e-11 
it use 1 at 
&tistic i. 
"ENORRIS PETERs co, photo-uto, WASHINgron, D., c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS AHEARN, OF OTTAWA, CANADA. 
ELECTRC WATER HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 481,291, dated August 23, 1892. 
Application filed April 9, 1892, Serial No. 428,425, (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
35 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS AHEARN, of the 
city of Ottawa, in the Province of Ontario, and 
in the Dominion of Canada, have invented 
certain new and usefullmprovementsin Elec 
tric Water-Heaters; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
hereof. 
My invention, which will be hereinafter 
fully set forth and claimed, relates to devices 
for heating Water by means of an electric cur 
ent. Figure l is an elevation of my improved 
Water-heater. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of 
the same on line at ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a hori 
Zontal section on line y ly, Figs. 1 and 2. 
A is an open vessel, preferably metallic and 
a good conductor of heat-such as copper, 
tin, or thin cast-iron-adapted to hold water. 
Upon this are placed strips of insulating ma 
terial B, such as asbestus. Upon this insula 
tion is wound a coil of wire or strip C of re 
fractory material having a high electric re 
sistance-such as German silver-and the ter 
minals connected with leads c c' of an elec 
tric circuit. The vessel thus insulated, coiled, 
and connected is placed in a larger vessel or 
container D, large enough to leave an annular 
space all round the inner vessel A and also a 
space between the two bottoms. The latter 
space is packed with a good non-conductor of 
heat and electricity E-such as asbestus-and 
the annular space is filled with powdered 
whiting, fire-clay, or other refractory material 
F, which is also a non-conductor of elec 
tricity. The interior of the vessel D is also 
lined with asbestus or other non-conductor of 
heatE. The top of the annular space is made 
up with a ring cover G, provided with insula 
tors g g, through which the leads c c' are 
passed. The inner vessel A is provided with 
a removable hollow cover II, tine interior of 
which is packed with a good non-conductor 
of heat, such as asbestush. An opening his 
provided in said cover convenient for filling 
the vessel. 
To the interior of the cover II may be at 
tached a closed water-tight vessel H of such 
a size as to reduce the water-space in the ves 
sel A and form an annular space around said 
vessel II' and a space between its bottom and 
that of the vessel A. 
I is the draw-off pipe, preferably secured 
in the bottom of the vessel A and passing 
through the bottom of the container D and 
provided with a suitable faucet i. To said 
pipe I may be attached a branch I', provided 
with an elbow i, in which a gage-glass I' is 
Secured. The outer vessel or container D 
may be further packed externally with a non 
conductor of heat and suitably lagged with 
Wood or other material, if desired. The ves 
sel A is filled with water, the level of which 
may be readily observed in the gage-glass I'. 
A switch being provided in the leads c c' at 
a suitable point, the current may be turned 
on or off when desired. The coil C is of such 
a sectional area that it is heated by the pas 
Sage of a current without being fused. The 
heat thus created in the coil is conducted by 
the filling is to the vessel A and by it com 
municated to the Water in said vessel. The 
water-level in the vessel A may be maintained 
uniformly by any well-known automatic regu 
lating device suitably connected with said 
Wessel. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an electric water-heater, the combina 
tion of an insulated open water-tight vessel 
A, a coil of refractory wire or strip C, of low 
electric conductivity, having its terminals 
connected by leads passing through insula 
tors, a containing-vessel D, lined internally 
With a layer of non-heat-conducting material 
and large enough to form an annular space 
around said inner vessel and affording space 
for a thick layer of non-conducting material 
at the bottom, a covering G on the annular 
space containing insulato's to pass the leads 
of the circuit, a removable hollow cover II, a 
draw-off pipe I, with faucet, and a filling of 
powdered whiting, fire-clay, or other refrac 
tory material in the space between the inner 
and outer vessel and in the cover, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In an electric Water-heater, the combina 
tion of an open Water-tight Wessel A, insulat 
ing-strips B, laid upon the exterior of said 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
ICO 
 
& 
481,291 
vessel, a coil C, Wound upon said insulating- I' on said pipe, and a gage-glass I'', secured 
strips and connected with a circuit, a hollow to said branch, substantially as set forth. 
cover H, filled with non-conductors of heat 
In testimony whereof I have signed in the 
and provided with an opening h", a water- presence of the undersigned witnesses. 
5 tight vessel H, connected to the bottom of 
Said cover and smaller than the vessel A, a 
draw-off pipe I, secured in the bottom of the 
vessel A and provided with faucet, a branch 
A. HARVEY, 
A. TROWSE. 
Witnesses: 
T. AHEARN. 
D 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481391.txt	(No Riodel.) 
J. P. ENGLE. 
RECOWERING WASTE PRODUCTS OF PETROLEUM, 
No. 481391. 
Patented Aug. 23, 1892. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB P. ENGLE, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
A 
RECOVERING WASTE PRODUCTS OF PETROLEUM. 
SECIFICATION forming part pf Letters Patent No. 481,391, dated August 28, 1892. 
Application filed Decemberll, 1891, Seria) No. 414,740. (No specimens.) . 
O 
25 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JACOB P. ENGLE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
and county of San Francisco, State of Cali 
fornia, have invented an Improvement in Re 
covering Waste Products of Petroleum; and 
I hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to means for recover 
ing the waste products of petroleum arising 
from the manufacture of gas, which will be 
more fully explained by reference to the ac 
companying drawing, in which 
The figure represents one form of appara 
tus adapted for this purpose. 
The object of my invention is to recover the 
Waste products of petroleum which are found 
in conjunction with water and have a specific 
gravity So nearly the same that it is impossi 
ble to separate them by ordinary means. 
In the manufacture of gas from petroleum 
a part of the waste product which arises there 
from is unlike coal-tar from the fact that it 
is so nearly the same specific gravity of the 
water that it will not separate by gravitation. 
Furthermore, the constituents of this petro 
leum-oil are tough and elastic and cover the 
globules of water, so that the necessary heat 
required to convert the water into steam, and 
thus evaporate it, only serves to create a foam, 
which on cooling again leaves the original 
constituents the same as before boiling. 
In order to make a complete separation of 
the water from the heavy oil, I employ any 
waste-absorbent material, such as sawdust, 
shavings, cotton and woolen waste, rice-husks, 
bran, or other suitable absorbent material. . 
In carrying out my invention I employ any 
simple apparatus. In the present case I have 
shown a reservoir A, which is situated suffi 
ciently high to allow the combined water and 
heavy oil or products to flow from it by gravi 
tation. This liquid is led into the tank A if 
the source of supply is above the tank. Oth 
erwise it may be pumped into the tank, from 
which it is allowed to flow through the pipe 
C and a controlling-cock D and fall into a 
second tank B, which I call the mixer. 
Within this tank I place the dry material 
above described, and after a sufficient quan 
tity is within the tank I allow the liquid to 
flow in upon it, the whole mass being turned 
over and intimately mixed with a shovel or 
by other suitable means. It will be manifest 
that if the work is carried on on a large scale 
any mechanical mixer may be employed for 
this purpose. When the mass is thoroughly 
mixed, the flow is shut off, and a cock in the 
pipe E, which leads from the bottom of the 
tank B, is opened, thus allowing the remain 
ing liquid to flow off into the settler F. The 
peculiar quality of this petroleum compound 
is such that the lighter portion is more read 
ily and rapidly absorbed by the dry material. 
above described than the water. The conse 
quence is that the oil and spirit will be ab 
sorbed first and the water will remain unab 
sorbed and will flow out through the pipe E 
into the settler F, carrying with it a small 
quantity of heavy oil or residue, which now, 
being freed and separated from the former 
product and water, will readily sink to the 
bottom of the settler F, leaving the water 
upon the surface, This water is drawn off 
by a pipe G and carried away to any point, 
leaving the heavier product at the bottom of 
the settler F. If it is desired to use the mix 
ture which is made in the tank B for a fuel, 
it is placed in a proper receptacle and allowed 
to drain. It will then be found to produce a 
fuel equal in heat and endurance with the 
usual run of steam-coal. 
If the valuable ingredients contained in 
the oil are desired for other purposes than 
fuel, it may be separated from this material 
by means of a press, in which the material 
may be treated in the usual manner of oper 
ating such presses, and the residue or pomace 
which is left will still be valuable as a fuel. 
The efficiency of the operation can be in 
creased by means of a jet of steam, which is 
introduced through the pipe or casing H. 
which surrounds the pipe C, leading from 
the tank A to the tank B, the heat assisting 
in some manner the separation of the petro 
leum product from the water. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The process of separating waste petroleum 
. 
35 
40 
45 
o 
55 
75 
Bo 
90 
95 
IOO 
| 
 
2 
481,391 
products in which the water globules are cov- water from the heavy oil or residue, substan 
ered with petroleum-oil, consisting in mixing tially as herein described. 
and agitating with such combined products a 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
dry material which breaks up the globules by hand. 
5 absorbing the lighter oil and spirit, then dis- 
charging the heavy oil or residue and water 
into a tank to enable the said heavy oil or 
residue to settle, and finally separating the 
S. H NoURSE, 
H. F. ASCHECK. 
Witnesses: 
JACOB P. ENGLE. 
O 
1. 
s 
A 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481491.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER DANIEL HAWK, OF ROCK ISLAND, AND OELL SPROUT FRENCE, OF 
MONMOUTH, ILLINOIS. 
END GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 481,491, dated August 23, 1892. 
Application filed March 4, 1892, Serial No, 423 759 (No model.) 
d 
To all whom it may concern: 
HAWK, of Rock Island, county of Rock Island, 
and OELL SPROUT FRENCH, of Monmouth, 
Warren county, in the State of Illinois, citi 
Zens of the United States, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in End 
Gates; and we do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention relates to means for attach 
ing and supporting a scoop-board to the rear 
end of a vehicle-body, whereby the said scoop 
board can be adjusted to any angle and can 
be applied to any vehicle-body and have posi 
tive connection therewith. 
The improvement consists of the novel fea 
tures and the peculiar construction and com 
bination of the parts, which will be herein 
after more fully described and claimed, and 
Which are shown in the annexed drawings, in 
Which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the rear 
end of a Vehicle-body, showing the invention 
applied, part of the scoop-board being broken 
aWay to show the connections between it and 
the Said vehicle-body. Fig. 2 is a side view 
showing the operation of the invention by dot 
ted lines. Fig. 3 is a detail view of the scoop 
board-connecting devices detached. 
The Vehicle-body A is of ordinary construc 
tion, comprising the side pieces a. a, the end 
gate I, which is adapted to slide between 
cleats , provided on the side pieces a, and the 
bottom J. The side pieces are projected some 
distance in the rear of the end-gate I and the 
bottom J, as shown at a'. The scoop-board 
C has positive connection with the vehicle 
bottom Jby means of the right-angled bracket 
B, which is secured to the said bottom or a 
CrOSS-bar attached thereto, and the hooked 
plate D that is secured to the scoop-board. 
To facilitate the adjustment of the right 
angled bracket B to the vehicle-bottom, it is 
slotted or open, one member receiving the 
fastening-bolt the other the hooked end of 
the plate D, as most clearly shown in Fig. 1. 
5o By this means the scoop-board has positive 
means of connection with the vehicle-body, 
Be it known that we, WALTER DANIEL and can be readily detached therefrom and 
adjusted to any angle. There will be as 
many of these brackets B and hooked plates 
Das necessary, ordinarily two will suffice, one 55 
being located near each end of the SCOOp 
board. 
The strap-iron E, having ring eat one end, 
is secured to the scoop-board, and the ap 
proximately right-angled bracketF, secured to 6o 
the extended side a of the vehicle-body, has a 
vertical extension f, which is constructed to 
enter the ring e when the scoop-board is at 
its highest position, so that the rod G, which 
is attached to the said bracket F, may extend 65 
in a nearly horizontal position. The rear or 
free end of rod G is notched or provided 
With a series of hooked projections g, which 
are constructed to engage with the ringe and 
support the scoop-board at the required posi- 7 O 
tion. 
The angle-plate H, which is secured to the 
side of the scoop-board near the inner end 
thereof, is provided with hooks h, at different 
levels, which are engaged by the free end of 75 
rod G to support the scoop-board in an ele 
Wated or horizontal position. It will be un 
derstood that both sides of the scoop-board 
and vehicle-body will be similarly equipped. 
We claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination, with a vehicle-body 
having an end-gate and having the sides pro 
jected a short distance in the rear of said end- 85 
gate and the vehicle-body and a scoop-board 
adapted to be supported at its inner end by a 
hinged joint to the vehicle-body aboutin line 
With the rear end of the vehicle-bottom, of a 
rod having connection at one end with the pro- 9o 
jected ends of said side pieces of the vehicle 
body, and adapted to engage with a lateral 
projection on the side of and near the outer 
end of the scoop-board, and a plate Hinear the 
inner end of said scoop-board having projec-95 
tions at different levels to engage with the 
Other end of said rod, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. The combination, with a vehicle-body 
having its sides projected in the rear of the Ioo 
Having thus described our invention, what 8o 
25 
35 
45 
 
 
2 
481,491 
and the hook-plates b to pivotally connect the 
scoop-board with the vehicle-bottom, of a strap 
iron secured to the scoop-board and having 
ringe, a bracket secured to the vehiclebody 25 
and having a vertical extension f, which is 
adapted to project into the said ring e, a 
notched rod connected with the said vertical 
extension f, and a plate H, attached to the in 
ner end of the scoop-board and having lateral 3o 
extensions at different levels, substantially as 
described, for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WALTER, DANIEL HAWK. 
OEL, SPROUT FRENCH. 
Witnesses to the signature of W. D. Hawk: 
Witnesses to the signature of O. S. French: 
W. JAS, HAWK, 
FRED MCMILLAN. 
W. F. WARREN, 
FRED MCMILLAN. 
end-gate and the bottom of said vehicle-bot 
tom and a scoop-board adapted to be sup 
ported at its inner end by a hinged joint to 
the vehicle-body about in line with the rear 
5 end of the vehicle-bottom, of a rod having a 
Series of projections at one end and connected 
at the other end with the side of the vehicle 
body, a ring e, secured to the scoop-board and 
constructed to have the said rod pass there 
Io through and engage with one of the series of 
projections on said rod to support the scoop 
board in the required position, and a plateH, 
secured to the said scoop-board near its inner 
ends, and having projections at different lev 
I5 els to be engaged by the said rod to support 
the scoop-board in a horizontal position, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a vehicle-body 
having its sides projected in the rear of the 
20 end-gate and the bottom thereof, a scoop 
board, and the slotted right-angled brackets d 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481592.txt	(No Model.) 
 
 
No. 481,592, 
A2Z. 
E. SCHILL 0. 
MINING CAGE OR CAR. 
Patented Aug. 30, 1892, 
A. 
S82. Presses 
3% War 2A 
2. 
e-2(2-6-Clo-C1? 
A. 
8-v-uov to 
6%re/4 )26 des, 
-tz-.24-26-op 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNEST SCHILLO, OF MCDONALD, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MNING CAGE OR CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Fatent No. 481,592, dated August 30, 1892. 
Application filed May 17, 1892, Serial No. 433,301 (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
go 
95 
TOO 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ERNEST SCHILLO, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at McDon 
ald, in the county of Washington and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Mining Cages and 
Cars; and I do declare the following to be a full 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to elevators and cars. 
The objects of my improvements are, first, 
to provide an elevator-cage adapted to receive 
a car So that it will automatically lock the car 
thereon when the cage is elevated; second, to 
provide an automatically-acting coal-chute 
Which will be thrown forward when the car is 
dumped and withdrawn when the cage de 
Scends; third, to provide an automatically-act 
ing lever which will unlock the swinging end 
gate of the car at a predetermined point in 
the movement of the cage; fourth, to provide 
a SWinging frame within the elevator-frame 
proper, which is adapted to swing and dump 
the car by means of certain connections with 
the side of the shaft or framework when the 
car arrives at the mouth of the mine or shaft, 
and, fifth, certain hereinafter-described de 
tails of construction. 
To attain these objects my invention con 
sists in the following construction and combi 
nation of parts, which will first be fully set 
forth and described in detail and the features 
of novelty then set forth in the claims. 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation, partly 
broken away in section, of a device to which 
I have applied my improvements. Fig. 2 is a 
similar end elevation of the same. 
In the drawings, A represents the frame 
work of a mining-shaft or elevator-well. 
B represents the opposite side guide-stand 
ards for the cage. 
C represents the cage, which moves up and 
down within the shaft. The platform of the 
cage is provided with the usual railsD, which 
are in line with the rails in the bottom of the 
mine or gallery thereof when the cage is down. 
The central portion of the platform and the 
short rails Ethereon are fastened to the lon 
gitudinal girders F, the whole being Sup 
ported when the car is in motion by a series 
of metal straps G. The construction is such 
that when the cage is at the bottom of the 
shaft the central portion of the platform rests 
upon the bars H, which forces up the central 
rails E, attached thereto, so that they are in 
line with the rails D, when the car I can be 
rolled on and off, as shown in Fig. 1. When, 
however, the cage moves upward, the rails E 
and the bars F attached thereto drop down 
wardly onto the bottom of the straps G, there 
by depressing the rails E and forming an ef 
fective forward and back stop to lock the car 
against displacement. 
J is the frame of the elevator, provided with 
the usual hoisting rope or ropes K and safety 
catch mechanism L under control of the rope 
or cord M, attached to the main rope K. 
N is a shaft at the bottom of the frame J, - 
extending across the frame and journaled 
therein. 
O is a supplementary framework, which, is 
pivotally supported upon the shaftN, the up 
per end of which is supported and guided by 
oppositely-journaled sheaves or pulleys P, 
which traverse guideways Q upon opposite 
sides of the shaft throughout its length. 
The platform C and the car thereon are 
rigidly secured thereto and are carried by 
this supplementary frame O. As the cage 
ascends the shaft or well the platform pre 
serves a horizontal position, owing to the 
sheaves P traversing the vertical guideways 
Q until said sheaves reach the inclined or 
oblique portion R of the guideways, when the 
sheaves P are deflected obliquely to one side, 
causing an oscillation of the Supplementary 
frame O upon the shaft N, and the conse 
quent tilting of the platform C with the car 
thereon, as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 1, for 
At the op 
the purpose of dumping the car. 
posite end of the inclined guideway R is a 
further vertical extension S thereof, so that 
any undue upward movement of the car Will 
not cause the platform to be tilted over any 
farther, but will cause the car to assume the 
same angle until it again descends. 
T is a pivoted latch-operating lever, which 
is carried upon a standard U, rigidly attached 
to the platform of the car. 
 
481,592 
ment-stops for the car-wheels when the cage 
is elevated, a frame carrying the sectional 
track, having a limited movement up and 
down with respect to the platform, and a sup 
port at the bottom of the shaft for arresting 
the downward movement of the sectional track, 
whereby the latter is thrown into alignment 
with the track on the platform when the cage 
is at the bottom of the shaft. 
2. The mining-cage provided with a plat 
form having a coal-chute arranged beneath 
and within the area of the same, so as not to 
interfere with the sides of the shaft, and a 
link mechanism connected to the car and to 
the chute for reciprocating the latter out 
wardly at the top of the shaft and for with 
drawing the same upon the descent of the 
platform. 
3. The combination of a shaft, a stationary 
piece arranged alongside thereof, a cage adapt 
ed to travel in the shaft, and a standard Se 
ctured to the platform, provided with a pivotal 
lever having oppositely-projecting arms, one 
of which is adapted to come in contact with 
said piece on the side of the shaft and cause 
an upward movement of the opposite arm of 
the lever, thereby unlatching the gate of the 
car on the platform at a predetermined point. 
4. The combination of a mining-cage, a plat 
form, a sectional track upon the platform, 
adapted to be depressed with respect thereto 
when the cage is elevated, a chute beneath 
and within the platform, a link mechanism 
connected to the chute and to the cage for 
projecting and withdrawing the same, a Sup 
plementary frame pivotally connected to the 
cage, having a guide pulley or pulleys there 
on, and a guide way or ways upon the sides 
of the shaft for guiding and deflecting the 
supplementary frame. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
ERNEST SCHILIO. 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
W. F. Do YLE, 
P, RICHARD. 
O 
25 
35 
W is the pivoted latch, which secures the 
end-gate W of the car I in place. 
When the car arrives at the mouth of the 
mine and is ready to be dumped, the outer 
end of the lever T comes in contact with the 
board or plate X on the side of the shaft, 
which depresses the lever and causes its in 
ner end to be thrown upward into contact 
With the latch D, as shown in Fig. 2, thereby 
unlocking the latch. The plate X is of the 
shape shown, having a considerable contact 
Surface, which enables the latch-operatingle 
Ver T to slide along it in continuous contact 
thereWith during the oscillatory movement 
of the supplementary frame O. 
Y represents the coal-chute. This chute is 
normally withdrawn within the limits of the 
platform C, except when the car is ready to 
be dumped, when itis projected forwardly, as 
shown in dotted lines, Fig.1, which prevents 
the coal from falling back into the mine 
shaft and the consequent injury or death of 
the operatives below. 
Zis a crank-shaft journaled in a platform 
at the point 2. 
3 is a link-rod pivotally connected to the 
lower end of the plank Z at one end and to 
the framework J of the elevator at the other. 
4 is a short link pivotally connected to the 
coal-chute I at one end and to the crank-le 
ver Z at the other. 
The operation is such that when the sup 
plementary frame O is vertical the coal-chute 
Y is withdrawn within the platform C, as 
shown in full lines, Fig.1; but when the frame 
O is tilted the platform to which the crank 
lever Z is journaled is carried away or to one 
side of the main frame J, which causes, the 
link-rod 3 to pull upon lever Z, and thereby 
throw the coal-chute outwardly and forwardly, 
as shown in dotted lines in the same figure. 
I claim 
1. A mining-cage provided with a platform 
having an intermediate sectional track, tracks 
upon both sides of said sectional track in line 
therewith, the inner ends of which form abut 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481692.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. EASTMAN 
ELECTRIC CGAR LIGHTING LAMP, 
No. 481,692. 
Patented Aug. 30, 1892. 
 
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa...are 
as sea 
YES 
24/7ZWZSSAS 
2 
(27% 
72 
67 
AW/AWZO2 
262s 
21zzoreep, 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM JOSEPH EASTMAN, OF WATERVILLE, NEW YORK. 
ELECTRC CGAR LIGHTING LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 481,692, dated August 30, 1892. 
Application filed February 8, 1892, Serial No. 420,745, (No model.) 
55 
 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM JOSEPHEAST 
MAN, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Waterville, in the county of Oneida and 
State of New York, have invented a certain 
new and useful Improvement in Electric 
Cigar-Lighting Lamps, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The main object of this invention is to pro 
vide a cigar-lighter for use on the counters 
of cigar-stores, which will afford a light only 
as required, thereby Saving the expense of a 
constantly-burning flame. 
In my invention I provide a lighter in which 
the flame is produced in and by the act of 
moving the torch from its sheath or holder, 
and the flame is extinguished in and by the 
act of returning the torch to its sheath or 
holder, Substantially as I will proceed now 
more particularly to set forth and finally 
claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, in the several figures of which 
like parts are similarly designated, Figure 1 
is a side elevation showing the lighter out of 
use; Fig. 2, a similar view of the other side, 
showing the lighter in use. Fig. 3 is an end 
elevation with the torch removed. Fig. 4 is a 
longitudinal section of the torch disassembled. 
Fig. 5 is a plan view of the parts shown in 
Fig. 3, and Fig. 6 is a top view of the torch 
assembled. 
The base ct, of material that is a non-con 
ductor of electricity, is adapted to be secured 
to a counter or other Stand and supports the 
sheath or holder. This sheath or holder is 
made as an open-ended tube slotted longi 
tudinally, and preferably is composed of com 
plementally-curved or otherwise-shaped sec 
tions b of electrically-conductive material, 
having flanges c, by which they may be se 
cured to the base C. A passage-way d is left 
between the adjacent free ends of the Sec 
tions b. I prefer to make the upper end of 
the base a, inclined and to incline the sections 
b correspondingly. The sections b and the 
base form when assembled a longitudinally 
slotted tube, and this is What I herein term a 
sheath or holder.' One end of the sheath 
or holder is closed or partly closed by a strip 
or piece of metal e, secured to the base and 
having a lip f overhanging the passage-Way 
d, and the other end has the edges of the sec 
tions next the passage-way cut away, prefer 
ably on curved lines, as shown in Fig. 5, to 
facilitate the insertion of the torch. 
The torch or lamp g is a tube corresponding 
in cross-section with the interior of the sheath 
or holder and having one end h permanently 
closed and the other provided with a remov 
able stopper i. This stopper may be screw 
threaded to engage an internal screw-thread 
in the tube, and it is provided with a ringi 
or other device, which will afford a conven 
ient handle for using the torch. A wick-tube 
k leads out of the tube g, and the tube g is 
filled with suitable wicking or other absorb 
ent matter to receive and hold an inflamma 
ble substance, part of the wicking being ex 
posed through the wick-tube. One end l of 
this wick-tube is curved inwardly toward the 
wick and is made with a projecting lip m. 
A plate n is secured to the base and is made 
adjustable thereon by means of a slot O and 
fastening p, and to this plate is secured an 
arm q, of conducting material, which said arm 
extends up over the sheath and has applied 
to it a contact-spring r, which overhangs the 
passage-way d, and so is in the line of travel 
of the Wick-tube. Connections S and t are 
made between the arm q and sheath and a 
battery u or other source of electricity, sub 
stantially as indicated, the circuit being nor 
mally open. The plate n is made adjustable 
in order to set properly the arm g with rela 
tion to the wick-tube, although this adjust 
ment of this arm might be effected in many 
other ways. If now the parts be as in Fig. 1 
and it be desired to obtain a flame, the torch 
is pulled out of its sheath, the wick-tube trav 
eling in the passage-way d. As the wick 
tube's projection m. comes against the con 
tact-spring r the electric circuit is closed, and 
When Said projection passes or is released 
from contact with the spring r the circuit is 
broken. With a spark, which ignites the wick, 
The curving of the wick-tube at l insures the 
production of the spark over the center of the 
Wick and above the wick and so assures a 
light. The projection in lifts the contact 
Spring Out of contact with the wick. After 
the light has been used the torch is returned 
to its sheath, the curved ends of the passage 
Way co-operating with the wick-tube to guide 
75 
9o 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
481,692 
it, and the wick-tube is shoved home beneath 
the lipf, thereby extinguishing the flame, and 
as said lip is springy it may be made to fit 
the wick-tube so closely as to prevent undue 
evaporation of the inflammable fluid with 
which the wick is charged. The parts are 
inclined so as to assist in or facilitate re 
placing the torch. 
I have thus described the best mode in 
which I have contemplated applying the prin 
ciple of my invention; but I wish to be un 
derstood as not limiting my invention to the 
exact details of construction set forth, as these 
may be varied largely. My invention may be 
applied, also, to other self-lighting and self 
extinguishing lamps. 
What I claim is 
1. A self-lighting and self-extinguishing 
lamp consisting, essentially, of a stationary 
sheath or holder, electrodes of an electric cir 
cuit applied thereto, and a torch adapted to 
be removed from said sheath to close the cir 
cuit, and thereby ignite the torch, and to be 
inserted in said sheath, and thereby extin 
guish the torch, Substantially as described. 
2. A self-lighting and self-extinguishing 
lamp comprising a base, a sheath or holder 
constructed as an open-ended longitudinally 
slotted tube mounted thereon, electric spark 
producing means, an extinguisher overhang 
ing one end of the sheath or holder, and a 
torch fitted to slide in said sheath or holder 
and having a projecting wick-tube which 
travels in the slot, substantially as described. 
3. A lamp having a base, a sheath or socket 
composed of sections secured to said base and 
separated by a passage-way, and light produc 
45 
55 
ing and extinguishing means combined with 
a torch adapted to be moved into and out of 
said sheath and having a wick-tube travel 
ing in said passage-way, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination, with the tubular slotted 
sheath and its igniting and extinguishing de 
vices, of a torch having a wick-tube fitted to 
said slotted sheath, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with the tubular slotted 
sheath and its electric igniting devices, com 
prising a spring-contact overhanging the slot 
in the sheath, of a torch having a wick-tube 
traveling in said slot and curved transversely, 
so as to insure engagement with the spring 
contact centrally over its wick, substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination, with the sheath, of a 
torch having a wick-tube, which torch is 
adapted to be slid longitudinally in said 
sheath, and a stationary end strip having a 
terminal overhanging the sheath in the line 
of movement of the wick-tube and serving 
as an extinguisher for the torch, Substantially 
as described. 
7. A torch open at one end, and thereby 
adapted to be filled at such end, and a screw 
plug for closing such end and terminating in 
a handle for the torch, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this list day of February, A.D. 1892. 
WILLIAM JOSEPH EASTMAN. 
Witnesses: 
HARRY N. CANDEE, 
I. P. FUESS. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481793.txt	(No Model.) 
P. J., JOHNSON & J. H. HAMILL, 
CALENDAR, ATTACHMENT FOR TIMEPIECES, 
No. 481,793, 
Patented Aug. 30, 1892, 
 
Z6&NX 
YYYYYaavaaaaaayaaaaaaaS AvvvyAtav 
2. 
elera 
2 
WITNESSES: 
T6 sea- 
res to 
IVENTORS. 
BY 44%.722 
72. 
ATIORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL J. JOHNSON AND JOSEPH. H. HAMILL OF GLOBE, ARIZONA TERRITORY. 
CALEN DAR ATTACHMENT FOR TIME PIECES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 481,793, dated August 30, 1892. 
Application filed November 16, 1891, Serial No,412,10l., (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Beit known that we, PAUL J. JOHNSON and 
JOSEPH. H. HAMILL, of Globe, in the county of 
Gila and Territory of Arizona, have invented 
a new and Improved Calendar Attachment for 
Watches and Clocks, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had to the 
annexed drawings, forming a part thereof, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a watch to 
which our improvement has been applied. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged detail view of the calen 
dar attachment. Fig. 3 is a diametrical sec 
tion taken on line 33 in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is an 
enlarged detail view of the plate which sup 
ports the calendar disk. Fig. 5 is a front ele 
vation of the spring-washer. Fig. 6 is a trans 
verse section taken on line 5 5 in Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 is an enlarged front elevation of the 
hour-hand, showing the operation of the cal 
endar-operating finger; and Fig. 8 is a detail 
view of the calendar-operating finger. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the views. 
The object of our invention is to construct 
a simple and efficient calendar attachment for 
watches and clocks which may be readily ap 
plied to timepieces already in use. 
Our invention consists in a metallic disk 
furnished with a pointer extending from the 
edge thereof and provided with a central boss, 
a graduated disk mounted on the boss and 
furnished with divisions corresponding with 
the days of the month and having a notched 
periphery, and a finger provided with curved 
spring-arms mounted on the boss of the hour 
hand and adapted to engage the notched pe 
riphery of the disk, all as will be hereinafter 
more fully described. 
The disk A, forming the fixed portion of 
our attachment, is made of metal or other suit 
able material, with a pointed arm B extending 
from the edge thereof and bent over or re 
turned parallel with itself, with the point of 
the arm extending within the periphery of 
the disk. The center of the disk is furnished 
with a boss C for receiving the disk C, which 
is held in place on the boss by a spring 
washer b, secured to the boss by the Screw c, 
passing through the Washer and entering the 
center of the boSS. 
The disk C is made of material Such as will 
harmonize with the watch or clock dial 
such, for example, as enameled metal, ivory, 
or celluloid. 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
The disk C is provided on its face near its 
periphery with thirty-one equidistant radial 
lines, which are numbered from 1 to 31,rep 
resenting the days of the month, and the pe 
riphery of the disk is provided with sixty-two 
notches d. 
On the boss of the hour-hand D is placed a 
curved spring E, provided with a finger e. 
The disk A is secured to the dial F of the 
timepiece by means of any suitable cement in 
Such a position relative to the hour-hand boss 
as to enable the fingere, carried by the hour 
hand, to enter the notches of the disk C and 
carry it forward one notch for each revolu 
tion, so that when the hour-hand moves the 
calendar-disk C two notches it carries the 
disk forward a distance representing one day 
and brings a new figure opposite the pointed 
end of the arm B. The disk C can be set at 
any time when the finger e is not in engage 
ment with its notched periphery. If the 
timepiece runs regularly, the said disk re 
(uires setting only once a month. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A calendar attachment for watches and 
clocks, consisting of a base-plate provided 
with a pointer and adapted to be secured to 
a dial, a notched and graduated disk mounted 
to turn on the base - plate, and a spring 
adapted to be secured to the boss of the hour 
hand and provided with a finger to engage 
the notched disk, substantially as described. 
2. In a calendar attachment for watches and 
clocks, the combination, with a base-plate 
adapted to be secured to a dial and provided 
with a central boss and an inwardly-projecting 
finger, of a graduated disk having a central 
aperture to receive the said boss and a 
notched periphery, a screw and washer for 
holding the graduated disk on the boss of the 
base-plate, and a curved spring adapted to 
be secured to the boss of the hour-hand and 
provided with a finger to engage the notches 
of the graduated disk, substantially as herein 
shown and described. 
o 
75 
85 
95 
IOC 
PAUL J. JOHNSON. 
JOSEP II. IAMIILI, 
Witnesses: 
AL. SIEBER, 
CHAS. T. MARTIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481893.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
^ 
J. BRYCE & A. KNOX. 
PANTOGRAPH TRACING AND ENGRAVING MACHINE, 
No. 481893, 
Patented Aug. 30, 1892. 
F G. I. 
A. 
'------ - - 
----4------------- 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
7 
W 
74777zesses 
%2- 
 
O 
: 
Z7zz/ezzorr 
3. m 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, Photo-Ha, washington, D. c. 
J., BRYCE & A. KNOX, 
PANTOGRAPR TRACING AND ENGRAVING MACHINE, 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 48,893, 
  
   
 
A. 
ZzZ2%S SSS 
Ea 
s 
sia 
2 s i 
SS 
Y. 
THE MORRIS PErERs co, PHoro-LTHo, washington, p. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J. BRYCE & A. KNOX. 
PANTOGRAPH TRACING AND ENGRAWING MACHINE. 
No. 481893. 
Patented Aug. 30, l892. 
E. 
Wt 
: 
W;A. 
w aS.3.S 
S.t 
E. 
 
  
 
 
th 
re-in 
-- - - 
; : I. : 
ii 
i 
: 
----- 
clic 
an 
B 
- -r- 
- 
- - - - - - - 
- - - - - - 
- 
- 
- - - - - - - - - 
h22nesses 
 
 
O 
 
Besses 
76 
Selectiid 
E. 
Eg2.. 
s 
- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
A 
g 
Z77-27 Zory 
ts 
Z32-72.73 
thout 
you ta 
The norris Peters co., Photo-Litho, Washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
J. BRYCE & A. KNOX. 
PANTOGRAPR TRACING AND ENGRAWING MACHINE, 
No. 48l,893, 
Patented Aug. 30, 1892. 
A7 
% 
att Oil 
SE 
Rw 
N 
N 
iS 
s 
E. 
al E4 
as A. A. 
L 
(7% 
K 
an 
 
 
A. 2/ezzry - 2. Ze 72 
a. 
resorts perers co., Phoro-liro. Washingto: 
y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BRYCE AND ADAM KNOX, OF GLASGOW, SCOTLAND, ASSIGNORSTO 
THE GLASS AND METAL ENGRAVING COMPANY, LIMITED, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
PANTOGRAPH TRACING AND ENGRAVING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 481,893, dated August 30, 1892. 
Application filed June 17, 1891, Serial No,396,569, (No model.) Patented in England September 12, 1888, No. 13,173, 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that we, JOHN BRYCE, engraver, 
and ADAM KNOX, engineer, both of Glasgow, 
in the county of Lanark, Scotland, subjects 
of the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, 
have invented Improvements in and Relating 
to Pantograph Tracing and Engraving Ma 
chines, (for which we have obtained Letters 
Patentin England, dated September 12, 1888, 
No. 13,173,) of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
Our invention has reference to the con 
struction of pantograph tracing and engrav 
ing machines for the tracing or engraving of 
ornamental designs on the Surface of gas 
moons or globes, tumblers, glasses, vases, and 
other circular or cylindrical objects, such as 
copper rollers or conoidal or polygonal ob 
jects, whether made of glass, metal, or other 
material, and comprises a novel combination 
of mechanism and mechanical motions to be 
applied to and actuated by the ordinary me 
chanical pantographic motions of the tracing 
and engraving machines heretofore in use. 
The main improvement and departure of 
this invention from Ordinary pantographic 
tracing and engraving machines consists in 
fixing and mounting the objects on a station 
airy frame and bracketed arms, already in 
axial line when round or cylindrical objects 
are used within a rotating open cylindrical 
cage, with longitudinal vertical bars outside, 
on which the finger-levers of the tracing points 
or diamonds are secured in any desired num 
ber to suit the design or number of patterns 
to be treated round the circular objects. By 
these improvements a large number of ob 
jects can be operated on in the machine at 
one time, while more elaborate and superior 
designs and repeats of the patterns can be 
traced or engraved on the objects in less 
time and at Smaller COSt. than has heretofore 
been done. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which our invention relates to understand 
how it may be carried into effect or practice, 
we have hereunto appended four explana 
tory sheets of drawings, in which the same 
reference-letters are used to indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures where shown. 
Figure J is a back end elevation of a pan 
tograph tracing or engraving machine as fit 
ted with our improvements, showing the fixed 
frame carrying the objects and the balanced 
raising and lowering frame and lateral travers 
ing frame, with the rotating cylindrical cages 
carrying the diamonds or tracing-points. 
Fig. 2 is a side sectional elevation as taken 
at right angles to and near the vertical line 11 
of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view correspond 
ing to Figs. 1 and 2 and as taken on the line 
22 of these figures. Fig. 4 is an enlarged 
back Sectional elevation broken away, corre 
sponding to Fig. 1, to show particularly the 
mode of securing the clips and levers carry 
ing the diamonds or points to the vertical 
rotating cage-bar; and Fig. 5 is an edge view 
showing this at right angles to the position 
shown in Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 is a sectional eleva 
tion and a plan, respectively, of the disk 
plate or chuck on which the circular objects 
are secured and carried. Fig. 7 is a detailed 
elevation of part of the machine as looking 
from the front, and Fig. 8 a corresponding 
side sectional elevation aS modified to suit 
for engraving flat objects. 
Referring to the drawings, the machine con 
sists, as usual, of two strong stationary open 
side or end frames A A, strongly bound to 
gether by suitable fixed stay cross bars or 
rails A' A' A', which make the whole a rig 
idly-strong frame for carrying all the Working 
parts, free from vibration, and secured by 
broad-flanged feet to the floor or other foun 
dation at 2. 
The pantograph mechanism of the machine 
is of the ordinary flat-table class, with the ta 
ble B B' secured rigidly and horizontally in 
front of the two said frames AA, and cross 
rails A' A' A' for laying the paper with the 
outlined design on, or the tracing or the en 
graved or Scored pattern-plates at a conven 
ient height for the operator tracing with and 
guiding the point C of the pantograph C. to a. 
Over the part B of the table BB' the hand 
arm Ct', with its tracing-point C of the lower 
pantograph horizontal, traversing parallel act 
ing bars a' a' and C. C., or other equivalent 
frame, is made to traverse, as usual, on the 
fixed center bracket a, secured to the partB' 
ar 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
481,893 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
of the stationary frame or table B by the ac 
tion of this proportional pantograph-frame d' 
to a to traverse the frame b laterally on the 
lower frame b by the action of the moving 
arm center bracket a, secured to this upper 
frame b, which also by its roller-pulleys b 
and rails to traverse the frame b below it lon 
gitudinally to and fro from front to back, and 
vice versa, on pulleys band rails b between 
them on the table part B, so as to actuate or 
traverse the engraving or tracing points e. 
The lower frame b'is thus moved parallelly to 
and fro longitudinally on the rollers b on the 
rails ty' of the table part 13, and from which 
ordinary pantograph traversing compound 
frame a to a and b to ball the new mechani 
cal motions of the tracing-points e and ma 
chines are taken. 
A long vertical frame CC'C', preferably of 
a strong light construction of cast-iron with 
strong vertical side rails C C and transverse 
upper and lower rails C'C', is made to trav 
erse on plain guides c and pulleys at c' near 
the upper and lower parts of the side rails C 
C, the pulley's c' being carried in adjustable 
screw-brackets c, secured to the upper and 
lower parts of the main stationary frames A 
A. This frame C C C is thus mounted and 
guided between the stationary end frames A 
A of the machine, and behind the transverse 
and longitudinal horizontal traversing frames 
b to bi of the pantograph mechanism to recip 
rocate freely up and down on the antifriction 
wheels c' on the guides c when the horizontal 
traversing frame b' is moved to and fro for 
ward and backward from the vertical recipro 
cating frame CC'C'. This vertical reciprocat 
ing frame CC'C' is shown carried, preferably, 
by a chain c', attached by a stud at c' to the 
center of the top rail C, passed over the seg 
mental end of the longer arm of a lever CC, 
fulcrumed on a steelyard bearing at C on 
the top of one of the side frames A, and has a 
chain C passing down over the short segmen 
tal arm C of this lever CC, mounted with a 
rod, and weights C C to counterbalance or 
rather more than counterbalance the weight 
of the frame C C C and the transverse trav 
ersing frame E E E carried on it and all the 
cylindrical rotating cages D to D and trac 
ing points or diamond mechanism carried on 
these frames. 
A horizontal spindle d is mounted laterally 
across the front of the inachine above the 
horizontal pantograph traversing frames lib', 
its ends being carried in adjustable center 
screw-pins d', carried in brackets d, attached 
to the fixed frame A A of the machine, or it 
might be in antifriction-roller bearings in the 
end frame of the machine. Stepped pulleys 
or cones dare mounted near the ends of this 
spindled, and steel bands did are turned 
or coiled round these pulleys d' and have 
their one ends attached to top and bottom at 
dids, respectively, of the vertically-movable 
frame C C C, and have their other ends at 
tached to adjustable screw-brackets at did 
on the forward and backward ends of the lon 
gitudinal pantograph traversing frame b b' in 
such a manner that when the pantograph 
frame is drawn longitudinally toward the 
front of the machine it pulls down the bal 
ance-frame C C C, and when pushed back 
from the front of the machine it raises this 
frame, or it might be vice versa, or the weight 
might be made to assist the raising of the 
frame in the upward direction. 
The balanced raising and lowering vertical 
frames C C C carry one, two, or more open 
barred vertical cylinders or cages D to D, 
with end driving-cones D mounted in anti 
friction adjustable screw centers or bearings 
at C' in them, secured to the upper and lower 
rails C C, along the lateral width of the 
machine or frame, which move vertically with 
and rotate or oscillate on these centers C" on 
the cone-pulleys D D of the frame D to D' 
within the vertical frame C C C. 
The vertical bars or tubes D are secured 
at their upper ends by brackets D to the up 
per driving-band cone D and at their lower 
ends by a transverse frame D', carrying the 
lower driving-band cone D. To these verti 
cal bars D' of the frame D to D diamonds or 
points e are mounted by light spring bell 
crank leverse', and securing clip-brackets e 
e', mounted on ring-frames e'e', actuated by 
the turning of the frame D to D, as herein 
after described, the springs gy of the leverse' 
keeping each diamond or tracing pointe into 
action to trace or engrave the design on the 
globes or objects Z, (indicated by sharp lines 
in Figs. 1 and 2 and by dotted lines in Fig. 4.) 
and which are held vertically and stationary 
over each other in fixed brackets F by grip 
ping chuck-holders f tof, one form of which 
is shown in section and plan in Fig. 6, car 
ried on a center screw-securing-spindle f', one 
for each object Z, to be engraved within the 
center of each rotating cage D to D, and at 
tached by the adjustable brackets F to a 
main standard F at the back of the station 
alry framing of the machine, preferably with 
T-slotted vertical guides F, for securing 
brackets F by screws in these slots at any 
desired height within the cages D to D, as 
will hereinafter be described. The vertical 
motion of the balance-frame CC' C7 and cyl 
inders or cages D to D with the diamonds 
or points e produce the lines in the vertical 
direction on the objects Z, while the lines in 
the circular direction are produced by the ro 
tation of the open-barred cylinder or cages ID 
to D, with the diamonds or points and their 
leverse e' secured on the vertical bars D' of 
these cages D to D. 
The circular or oscillatory motion of the 
cylindrical cages D to D is given as follows: 
by another vertical wheeled frame E E E7 
with one central feather-rail E and an upper 
and a lower transverse rail E. E", traversing 
by rollers E on the two latter horizontally, 
and laterally on guides at E8 within or on the 
horizontal bars C C of the vertical balance 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
I o5 
I I5 
I 25 
 
481,893 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
frame C C C, carrying the cylinders and 
cages D to D, so as to traverse with it verti 
cally. To this horizontal traversing frame E 
E" E are attached one or more bands E8 by 
their ends with tightening-screws to brackets 
at E, secured to the upper and lower hori 
Zontal frames E E on each side of each end 
cone or pulley D of the rotating cages D to D, 
and round which cones each band E8 is passed 
to turn the cages D to D, so that on this hori 
Zontal frame E E E being transverse in one 
direction in the cages C C C the one end of 
the bands E turns the cylindrical cages D to 
Dround in the corresponding direction, while 
the traversing of the horizontal frame EE 
E in the other direction causes the bands E 
to turn the cylindrical cages D to D in the 
opposite direction, and thus the points or dia 
monds e trace the circular lines in either di 
rection on the objects Z to the extent or size 
of the motion of this frame D to D, and pro 
portionate to the motions given to it by the 
pantograph, this horizontal moving frame E 
E Ef being moved by the upper horizontal 
lateral traversing frame b b of the panto 
graph by an arm E, secured on it, working 
on a long vertical slot E in the vertical frame 
E of the frame E. E. E. 
The action so far of the mechanism is as 
follows: When the horizontal traversing 
frame b b or b' b' of the pantograph is moved 
laterally or longitudinally by moving the 
hand-tracing arm a a? above the outlined de 
sign or sprig laid on the stationary front ta 
ble B of the machine, corresponding parallel 
oscillating or rotating motions are transmitted 
to the cylindrical cages D D, carried on the 
vertical movable frame C C C, through the 
lateral motions of the frame E E E, and the 
tracing diamonds or points e on the bars of 
these cages D to D would by these parallel 
motions trace or engrave the design on the 
surface of the circular or cylindrical object 
Z, secured, as hereinbefore described, to the 
stationary frame of the machine. Thus when 
the tracer-arm a of the pantograph and hori 
zontal traversing frame b b are moved to the 
right or left laterally across the machine a 
corresponding circular motion is transmitted 
to the rotating cylindrical cages D to Dand 
tracing or engraving points e, and when the 
tracing-arma, and traversing frame b'b' of the 
pantograph are moved horizontally and lon 
gitudinally forward or backward a raising 
and lowering parallel motion is given to the 
vertical balanced frame C C C and cylin 
drical cages D to D, and a vertical parallel 
motion is thus transmitted to the diamond or 
tracing points e and produce the vertical lines 
on the objects Z. The short bell-cranklevers 
or arms e' for holding each tracing or engrav 
ing diamond or point e are hinged or jointed 
at theirinner lower ends to the adjusting-Screw 
clamping or bracket part ele, the latter of 
which clamps is secured to the ring-framee, 
bolted by clamp-bracketse to the rigid vertical 
bars D.' D'at any height desired of the hollow 
open rotating cylindrical cages D to D, so as 
to enable the levers E and pointse to be swiv 
eled and set to any angle tangentially to the 
surface of the parts of the particular globu 
lar, conical, or circular Work being engraved, 
one levere' and pointer e being used for each 
flower or repeat division of the pattern on the 
object being engraved. Each rigid bar or 
tube D D' of the frame D to D, carrying these 
bell-crank arms e', with the diamonds e, is 
further fitted with a vertical reciprocating 
bar - frame G. G' and bar G, working and 
mounted parallel to the bars. D in guide 
clamps G, secured to these bars D'. The 
lower cross-bar G' of each of these vertical 
reciprocating frames G G is pulled upward 
by springs G secured at their upper ends to 
the guide-clamps G, when the attendant puts 
his foot on a treadle mechanism, and pulled 
downward by the automatic action of the 
weighted levers H to H of the treadle mech 
anism. An upper bow or ring moving frame 
g is secured by the clamps g to the vertical 
sliding bars G of the frame G. G', so as to rise 
and fall with this frame by the action of the 
before-mentioned Springs and treadle mech 
anism, and a light screw-clip g is secured on 
the ringg just over the horizontal arm of 
each bell-cranke', so that the lower end of 
each clip g comes in contact with the hori 
Zontal arm when this frame is brought down 
by the automatic working of the treadle mech 
anism against the power of the spring G to 
take all the tracing-points e of the vertical 
arms of the bell-cranks e' out of action, and 
a small india-rubber or other spring c is at 
tached to the screw or other part of the clip 
g and to the horizontal arm of the levere', 
the strength of which might be regulated by 
a screw to keep the tracing-points e of this 
lever in action when the attendant puts his 
foot on the tread-board of the treadle mech 
anism and allows the spring G to draw up 
the frame G. G', so that the stop-arms of the 
clip g are clear of the horizontal arm of the 
tracing bell-crank lever e', and also allows 
the bell-crank lever e' freedom to act, so that 
the pointe would trace over an irregular sur 
face object Z only with the slight pressure of 
the spring g. 
The treadle mechanism consists as follows: 
Acounterweighted lever-spindle His mounted 
in bearing-brackets in the lower part of the 
side frames A. A below the table B, with a 
tread-board H in front, where the attendant 
sits, and counterweighted levers H behind, 
which automatically raise the tread-board H' 
when not pressed down by the foot of the at 
tendant. A vertical lever His mounted at 
one end of the spindle H, connected by a rod 
H and differential lever H to the vertical 
spindle I, carried in brackets I, secured to 
the back part of the side frames AA, so as to 
swivel it slightly, and also a lever I on it, 
carrying a long vertical stud I. This stud I 
acts on a roller at Ion one end of the recip 
rocating bar I, carried on the lower ends of 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
55 
 
4. 
481,893 
o 
75 
the vertical bell-crank levers i i", fulcrumed 
on brackets i, secured at 8 to the vertical re 
ciprocating frame C C'C'. Thus it will be 
seen that the horizontal arm i? of these bell 
cranks i' acts on the lower bar G' of the 
frame - G G' to pull this frame G. G' down 
against the power of the spring Gautomati 
cally, as before described, and remove the 
tracing-pointse from the object by the weight 
ed evers H of the treadle mechanism, while 
the pressing down of the tread-board H raises 
these levers and allows the spring G to pull 
up the frame G. G' and cause the tracing 
pointse to act as described. 
Referring to Figs. 4 and 6, for securing 
each globe or other circular object Z to be en 
graved concentrically and stationary within 
the cages D to D the rigid lateral arms F pro 
ject from a fixed slide-guide vertical bar F. 
F, secured to the center of the upper and 
lower transverse rails AA of the main frame 
AA at the back, as seen in Fig.1. The outer 
end of each arm F carries on a vertical cen 
ter stud f' in the axial line of the eye of the 
chuck ff' an arrangement of three horizontal 
slide-gripping pawls or clips f, working in 
radial dovetailed slots or slide-arms f, analo 
gous to a differential gripping - chuck, the 
pawlsif being moved in their slide-guide sta 
tionary arms f out and in by a loose scroll 
grooved or equivalent disk f, mounted on 
the center stud f' below the fixed gripping 
chuck and pawls f f, a pin or stem on each 
pawl if projecting down and working into 
the scroll-groove f in the loose disk f', all so 
that the turning of the scroll-disk fin one 
direction traverses the clip f equally and ra 
dially inward to grip the base of the globes Z. 
concentrically on the chuck in the center of 
the vertical cage D to D, and vice versa, and 
turning the scroll-disk f in the opposite direc 
tion loosens them for the insertion of new 
globes. 
Although this machine in its more full and 
complete construction, as described, is mainly 
designed for engraving glasses and other ir 
regular circular work or objects Z, secured on 
separate chucks f to f and arms Fon a fixed 
frame F", it is to be understood that it 
might also trace or engrave patterns on cop 
per rollers or long cylindrical objects, onese 
cured stationary in like manner within each 
frame D to D on the fixed frame FF' with 
out chucks f to f". 
Referring to Figs. 7 and S this shows an ar 
rangement suitable for making the same ma 
chines trace or engrave flat surfaces or polyg 
onal objects with flat surfaces secured on a 
suitable fixed part of the frame. (Indicated 
by dotted lines Z' in these figures.) The ob 
jects would be secured by adjustable shift 
ing screw-clips F, secured to horizontal bars 
F, screwed or otherwise adjustably fixed to 
the stationary vertical back frame F, Secured 
to the upper and lower transverse stays AA* 
of the main framing A to A', to suit the size 
of objects to be clamped. In this case it is 
preferred to remove the oscillating or rotat 
ing frames or cages D to D from the machine 
and fix the vertical bar D' D' direct by 
brackets at D to the lower and upper arms 
E' E of the horizontal moving frame E E" Ef 
within the frame C C C and secure to these 
rods D'D' straight bars e, instead of the 
ring-barse, described in the previous figures, 
and carry on these, the tracing bell-cranks e' 
in an equivalent manner to that described in 
reference to the former figures, so as to trav 
erse laterally and act on the flat stationary 
surface Z with the motion of the frame EE/ 
E", instead of in a circular manner, as before 
described, and then mounta moving straight 
frame or barg on the reciprocating bars G, 
instead of the ring g of the former figures, to 
carry the stop clips and springs g g at the 
side of each tracing-levere e' to act on the 
horizontal arm of these tracing-levers to take 
these out of action or put them into action by 
the treadle mechanism H to H and I to I, 
all substantially as described and lettered to 
correspond in reference to the former figures. 
The extreme vertical motion of the frame C 
CC is stopped in the upward and down ward 
direction, respectively, by the brackets A' A', 
secured over and under it to one fixed side 
frame A of the machine, and the extreme 
transverse motion of the frame E E E is 
stopped by the ends of its moving frame b b 
coming against the stops bb, secured to the 
longitudinal frame b' b, traversing with and 
under this frame b b, all as seen more particu 
larly in Figs. 1 and 2. 
What we claim is 
1. A pantograph-machine for tracing and 
engraving objects, comprising a stationary 
frame on which the objects are mounted, in 
combination with cylindrical cages carried 
and rotated in a balanced frame moved ver 
tically, said cages being turned by a laterally 
moving frame within the balanced frame, 
these frames being moved in their respective 
directions by and proportionally to the mo 
tion of the ordinary pantograph pointer and 
mechanism, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a pantograph tracing and engraving 
machine, the combination comprising a sta 
tionary fraine and bracketed arms carrying 
the objects, with open cylindrical cages ro 
tated and moved vertically and carrying ver 
tical and hoop bars outside, and tracing points 
or diamonds secured on said bars to engrave 
the designs in both directions on the station 
alry objects, Substantially as and in the man 
ner set forth. 
3. In a pantograph tracing and engraving 
machine, a vertically-moving balanced frame, 
in combination with rotating open-barred en 
graving-cages mounted on said frame, sub 
Stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. In a pantograph tracing and engraving 
machine, the combination comprising a bal 
anced raising and lowering vertical frame 
With open-barred vertical rotating cylindri 
cal cages, and spring-clip shifting and setting 
95 
OO 
Io5 
SIO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
481,893 
ing cylindrical cages with a clutch having 
rigid lateral arms and gripping-pawl clips 
and a scroll-grooved disk for securing the ob 
jects to be treated, substantially as and in 
the manner set forth. 
8. In a pantograph tracing and engraying 
machine, the combination comprising a fixed 
frame and vertical and transverse moving bal 
anced frames having flat surfaces or objects 
secured to the fixed frame and parallel to the 
moving frames, with adjustable lateral arms 
carrying the levers of tracing points or dial 
monds on the lateral traversing frame, Sub 
stantially as and in the manner set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed out 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
35 
JOHN BRYCE. 
ADAM KNOX. 
Witnesses: 
W. R. M. THOMSON, 
JOHN SIME, 
Both of 96 Buchanan Street, Glasgow, Scot 
land. 
levers with tracing points or diamonds at 
tached to said bars, the frame and cages be 
ing actuated by and proportional to the mo 
tion of the ordinary pantograph pointer and 
5 mechanism, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
5. In a pantograph tracing and engraving 
machine, the combination comprising rotat 
ing cylindrical cages carrying tracing points or 
Io diamonds, a vertically moving balanced frame 
on Which said cages are mounted, and a ver 
tical wheeled frame traversing horizontally 
and laterally on the vertical balanced frame 
and having bands and pulleys, to rotate the 
I5 cages, Substantially as and in the manner set 
forth. 
6. In a pantograph tracing and engraving 
machine, the combination comprising rotat 
ing cage-bars and vertical shifting ring-bars, 
levers with tracing points or diamonds, and 
reciprocating frame for putting the points 
and levers into or out of action, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
7. In a pantograph tracing and engraving 
25 machine, the combination comprising rotat 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US481993.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
W. T., WOOD, 
DEVICE FOR COLLECTING, REGISTERING AND RECORDING FARES. 
Patented Sept. 6, 1892, 
No. 48l. 993, 
QSibu. Jex, 
72t/ 22. ) is a cuvvi's. Swed a 
97,424 - " - 
his Clt-totyle. 
if 
Juve1-vtot, 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. T. WOOD, 
m 
DEVICE FOR COLLECTING, REGISTERING, AND RECORDING FARES, 
Patented Sept. 6, 1892. 
No. 481,993, 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
W. T. WOOD, 
DEVICE FOR COLLECTING, REGISTERING, AND RECORDING FARES. 
No. 48l. 993. 
Patented Sept. 6, 1892, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM THOMAS WOOD, OF NASLIVILLE, TENNESSEE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO S. O. MERRILL AND JAMES T. DICKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
DEVICE FOR COLLECTING, REGISTERING, AND RECORDING FARES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 481,993, dated September 6, 1892. 
Application filed June 22, 1891, Serial No. 397,061 (No model, 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Nash 
ville, in the county of Davidson and State of 
Tennessee, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in a Combined Fare Re 
ceiver and Register; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
Others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to a combined fare 
receiver and register. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
combined fare box and register, whereby safe 
and convenient means for collecting, register 
ing, and recording the receipt of fares on cars, 
boats, and the like will be furnished. 
The object of the invention is, furthermore, 
to produce a combined fare-box and register 
comprising a receptacle for the fares and a 
register operated by the opening of the re 
ceptacle in removing the fares to print a rec 
ord of the number of fares previously depos 
ited in the receptacle. 
The object of the invention is, furthermore, 
to produce a combined fare box and register 
furnishing a receptacle for the fares and a 
printing-register by which a record of the 
number of fares is printed as the receptacle 
is opened to remove the fares and in which 
the catch and lock by which the portion of 
the receptacle displaced in order to remove 
the fares is covered by a piece or strip of pa 
per or some other material so arranged as to 
be destroyed or punctured in releasing the 
catch or lock, whereby removal of the con 
tents of the receptacle without detection is 
rendered impossible. 
The object of the invention is, furthermore, 
to produce a fare receptacle and register so 
constructed that the coin to be received and 
the receipt whereof is to be recorded is ex 
posed to view after being introduced and 
wherein the movement necessary to allow the 
entrance of the coin into the receptacle also 
serves to make a record of the receipt of the 
coin. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in the combined fare receptacle and 
register comprising a receptacle for the fares, 
provided with a movable portion permitting 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM THOMAS WOOD, removal of the fares, and a register arranged 
adjacent to the receptacle, the register being 
provided with printing-faces, a surface upon 
which the printing is to be done, and a con 
nection between the movable portion of the 
receptacle and the register, whereby when 
the movable portion is displaced the record 
is printed. 
The invention consists, furthermore, in a 
combined fare-receptacle and register com 
prising a fare receptacle having a movable 
portion permitting displacement to allow re 
moval of the fares, a way or passage leading 
to the receptacle, a lever provided with a pro 
jection or projections extending into the Way 
or passage and serving to regulate the intro 
duction of fares, a register connected with the 
lever in such manner as to be operated by it, 
the register being movable, and a connection 
between the movable portion of the recepta 
cle and the register, whereby the latter is 
moved as the movable portion is displaced to 
permit removal of the fares. 
The invention consists, furthermore, in a 
combined fare - receptacle provided with a 
movable portion permitting the removal of 
the fares, a register placed adjacent to the 
movable portion and capable of slight move 
ment, a connection between the movable por 
tion of the receptacle and the register, where 
by the register is moved as the movable por 
tion of the receptacle is displaced, a printing 
surface consisting of a strip of paper or the 
like, a locking device for securing the mov 
able portion, and a strip of paper or the like 
interposed between the parts of the locking 
device, so arranged that the strip of paper or 
the like is torn or injured in the act of re 
leasing the locking device, and the displac 
ing of the movable portion of the receptacle 
presses the register against the strip of paper 
or the like. 
The invention consists, furthermore, in vari 
ous novel details of construction, whereby the 
objects of the invention are attained. 
One form of embodiment of the invention 
is illustrated in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the im 
proved fare receptacle and register. Fig. 2 is 
9o 
95 
IOO 
o 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
 
481,993 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
a central vertical cross-section. Fig. 3 is a 
front view with a portion of the casing re 
moved to display the interior disposition of 
the parts. Fig. 4 is a perspective view show 
ing the removable portion of the fare-recep 
tacle, a portion of the locking device, a strip 
of paper or the like upon which the printing 
is to be done by the register, and also showing 
the implement or key by which the locking 
device is released. Fig. 5 is a detail view show 
ing a portion of the locking device. Fig. 6 is 
a side elevation of the register, showing the 
manner Of Sustaining the same in the casing 
of the device. Fig. 7 is a detail view showing 
the bell and hammer, and Fig. S is a sectional 
view showing the connection between the le 
Ver by which the admission of the fares into 
the receptacle is effected and the ringing and 
registering device. 
In the drawings, A represents the shell or 
case of the device, which in the present em 
bodiment of the invention is shown as adapt 
ed to be carried in the hand of the conductor 
or other person collecting the fares, and for 
purposes of convenience in handling or at 
tachment to the clothing is provided with a 
handle C and a hook a '. It will of course be 
understood that I do not wish to limit my 
Self to the form of frame herein shown, as the 
Salient and important features of the inven 
tion may with facility be embodied in a cas 
ing or shell designed to be permanently at 
tached to the wall of a car or the like. 
The upper portion of the casing is provided 
With a hopper B, terminating at its lower end 
in a passage b, extending into the casing A. 
The passage l is provided in its walls with 
Openings b and 0, and the side of the casing 
A, forming the outside of the passage, has a 
grating band is provided with suitable open 
ings through which the coin or the like is visi 
ble in its passage to the interior of the re 
ceptacle. Projecting through the openingsb' 
and l are the arms c and c' of the lever C, 
which is pivoted to lugs on the outside of the 
Casing A. The lever C is so arranged that 
When the arm C is projected into the opening 
the arm c' is withdrawn from the opening 
U, and vice versa, and the spring c' serves to 
keep the upper arm c in that position nor 
mally, SO that when a coin is introduced into 
the hopper it falls upon the arm c' and re 
mains there exposed to view through the 
Opening bin the side of the casing until the 
Outer end of the lever C is depressed, which 
motion will withdraw the arm c and introduce 
the arm c'. When the lever C is relieved 
from pressure, the spring returns to its normal 
position, allowing the coin or the like to fall 
into the interior of the receptacle. 
Attached to an inward-projecting arm cof 
the lever C is a depending operating-pawl C, 
provided with a hook or toe c', which latter is 
held in its proper operative position by means 
of spring metal c, secured by a guard c to 
the inner face of the casing A. The hook ch 
is designed to engage and impart movement 
to the register D at each movement of the le 
ver C, by which a coin or the like is permitted 
to pass through the passageb. 
The register consists of two wheels D'D', 
arranged adjacent to each other, the wheel 
D bearing upon its face numbers beginning 
with 5, each successive number increased 
by five, and terminating with 100, and the 
wheel D is provided with numbers 1 to 
20, consecutively. The edge of the wheel 
D' is provided with ratchet - teeth d, with 
which the hook c' engages, and the wheel D' 
is so arranged in connection with the wheel 
D' as to be moved one step at each revolution 
of the wheel D' by means of a long tooth on 
said wheel and a carrying-wheel, in the 
usual manner in devices of this kind. The 
register is supported upon a pivot d, to which 
the frame D of the register is attached, and 
the register is retained in its normal position 
by means of a spring d, pivoted on Said frame 
D3 and bearing upon a portion of the casing 
of the device. The frame D is provided at 
its lower end with a projecting arm d, hav 
ing a nib or hook dextending downward in 
such manner as to enter an indentation C.", 
formed in a circular shell Cl. 
The lower portion of the casing A is pref 
erably cylindrical in form and has an Open 
end and is provided in its bottom. With an 
opening Ct. One end of the cylindrical por 
tion and the opening in the bottom are closed 
by a removable portion A, consisting of a cir 
cular end part a' and a curved portion Cl", the 
portion a being for closing the opening in the 
end of the circular portion and the curved 
portion C. being for closing the opening Ci in 
the bottom of the receptacle. Arranged within 
the removable portion A is a circular shell (t, 
designed to contain a roll of paper Cl*, the end 
of which C.", Fig. 4, is shown as projecting 
from the circular shell Ct. 
The locking device by which the removable 
portion is retained in position consists, essen 
tially, of the Spring-arms E, arranged on the 
inside of the casing and an arrow - shaped 
projection e, attached to a pivoted lever e', 
fastened to the removable portion A. When 
the removable portion A is in proper position 
to close the openings in the bottom of the 
casing, the arrow-shaped projection will be in 
position to enter between the spring-arms E 
and Will be retained by the same, the remov 
able portion being held in position until the 
arms are separated. 
In placing the parts in position the end Cl." 
of the strip of paper or the like a*, contained 
in the circular casing, is drawn up between 
the removable portion A and the outside of 
the casing, and is there confined by a corru 
gated or other Suitable plate II. 
In locking the receiver the arrow-shaped 
projection e is forced through the strip of 
paper, the shell and casing being provided 
With suitable openings e, through which the 
projection e passes. 
In order to unlock the device, it is neces 
o 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
TIO 
II5 
I 25 
481,993 
55 
7 o 
75 
the printing-faces of the register are brought 
against the surface designed to receive an im 
pression, substantially as described. 
2. A combined fare receptacle and register 
comprising a fare-receptacle having a remov 
able portion permitting displacement to al 
low of the removal of the fares, a way or pas 
sage leading to the receptacle, a lever pro 
vided with a projection or projections extend 
ing into the way or passage and serving to 
regulate the introduction of fares, a register 
connected with the lever in such manner 
as to be operated by the lever, the register 
being movable, and a connection between the 
removable portion of the receptacle and the 
register, substantially as described. 
3. A combined fare receptacle and register 
comprising a fare-receptacle provided With a 
removable portion permitting the removal of 
the fares, a register placed adjacent to the re 
ceptacle, a connection between the removable 
portion and the register, a printing-surface 
consisting of a strip of paper or the like, and 
a locking device for the removable portion, be 
tween the parts of which the strip of paper is 
introduced, the parts being so arranged that 
the strip of paper or the like is injured in 
the act of releasing the locking device, Sub 
stantially as described. 
4. A combined fare receptacle and register 
comprising a fare. receptacle having a remov 
able portion permitting displacement to al 
low of the removal of the fares, a Way Or pas 
Sage leading to the receptacle, a lever pro 
vided with a projection or projections extend 
ing into the way or passage and serving to 
regulate the introduction of fares, a bell, and 
a projection from the lever engaging the ham 
mer of the bell, and a register connected with 
the lever, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM THOMAS WOOD. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. KLINE, 
C. L. CHASE. 
sary to separate the spring-arms E, and as 
the strip of paper a* is between the spring 
arms E and the pivoted levere' it will also be 
necessary to pass the instrument through the 
paper. For the purpose of separating the 
arms E and by so doing unlocking the de 
vice I provide a key F, Fig. 4, provided 
With a Wedge-shaped projection f, which is 
forced through a strip of paper or the like 
and between the spring-arms E. After the 
Spring-arms have been separated the arrow 
shaped projection e may be withdrawn and 
the removable portion. A displaced, permit 
ting access to the interior of the receptacle. 
The cylindrical shell as of the casing A is 
provided at a point which is opposite the 
nib or hook d with an indentation a1, into 
which when the parts are in a closed position 
the hook d projects, so that as the removable 
part A* is turned to withdraw the curved por 
tion a from the opening a the register, the 
numbers on the face of which are supplied 
with ink from a suitable reservoir G as they 
pass beneath it, is drawn forward by the pro 
jecting arm d(the frame D8 being pivoted 
as at d) against the strip of paper which 
bears on the inside of the plate II, and is 
thereby held in place to receive the impression. 
A bell I, provided with a suitable hammer 
i, is arranged adjacent to the lever C, the 
lower arm c' of which engages a nib c', formed 
On the lower part of the hammer i, and causes 
the same to strike the bell at each movement 
of the lever C. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A fare receptacle and register compris 
ing a receptacle for the fares, provided with 
a removable portion, and a movable register 
arranged adjacent to the receptacle, the reg 
ister being provided with printing-faces, a sur 
face upon which the printing is to be done, 
and a connection between the removable por 
tion of the receptacle and the register, where 
by when the removable portion is displaced 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482093.txt	H. W. LAWRENCE. 
RHEOSTAT. 
Patented Sept. 6, 1892, 
(No Model.) 
No. 482,093. 
resel 
H-III, II, 
2. JRL N 
Si STSiliili 
EastEstestesis 
seatsir 
2. 
R 
...) 
 
WIMESSES 
2 
W A. Wi 
1 1/ 
VENTOR 
BY 
f 2. 
w 
17 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY W. LAWRENCE, OF DENVER, COLORADO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-ALF 
TO. IIENRY II. METCALF, OF SAME PLACE. 
RhEosTAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,093, dated September 6, 1892. 
Application filed April 25, 1891, Renewed January 23, 1892, Serial No. 418,997, (No model.) 
o 
20 
15 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HARRY W. LAWRENCE, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Denver, in the county of Arapahoe 
and State of Colorado, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Rheostats; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to an improved rheo 
stat or means for controlling incandescent 
lamps. 
The device is located within the circuit of 
the lamps designed to be controlled thereby 
and is capable of such adjustment that the 
billiancy of the lamps may be regulated at 
W1. 
The improved device consists of the mech 
anism illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the device; 
Fig. 2, atop or plan view thereof; Fig. 3, a bot 
tom or underneath view; Fig. 4, a section on 
the line a ac, Fig. 1; and Fig. 5, an enlarged 
detail of an adjustable clamp for securing the 
resistance material in place. 
In the viewslet the reference-numerall (les 
ignate a block composed of insulating mate 
rial, through the center of which passes a 
metal stem 2, provided with an insulating but 
35 
ton or knob. 3. At the bottom of plate 1 siem 
: 2 is passed through a stationary metal arm 4 
and secured in place by a nut 5 and is de 
signed to be rotated by taking hold of button 
3. To a screw 6, passing through arm 4, is at 
tached one of the circuit-wires 7. Secured to 
stem 2 and adapted to engage the upper sur 
face of block 1 is an arm 8. The outer ex 
tremity of thisarm engages smail metal blocks 
or plates 9, secured to block 1 by screws 10, 
passing through the block, the heads being 
located underneath. Plates 9 are distinct and 
separate from one another and form either a 
circle or an arc of a circle around stem 2. 
Supported upon plate 1 and extending 
40 
55 
go 
75 
around the stem 2 on the outside of plates 9 
and forming either a circle or arc thereof, as 
may be desired, is a section 12, of carbon or 
other suitable resistance material, preferably 
circular in cross-section. The carbon 12 is 
connected with screws 10, and therefore with 
plates 9, by wires 13, extending from the head 
of the screws up through the block1 to clanlps 
14, surrounding the carbon, and secured at 
the top by screws 25. It will thus be seen. 
that these clamps may be adjusted to corre 
spond with the condition of the carbon with 
reference to the change produced therein by 
a difference in temperature producing ex 
palusion and contraction. Each Wire 13 is 
distinct and separate from every other wire 13. 
As before stated, one circuit-wire 7 leads to 
or is connected with arm 4, secured to stelli 2. 
The other circuit-wire 15 is connected with 
the heal of a screw 10, located at one extrelia 
ity of the arc in which the screws are al 
ranged. Now it will be seen that the circuit 
in which the lamp to be controlled lies is com 
pleted from wire 7 through arm 4 stem 2, an 
S, plate 9, and screw 10 to the other wire 15, 
provided the lamp is turned clear on and the 
current does not have to pass through any 
portion of the carbon 12, which is the case 
when the outer extremity of arm 4 is directly 
above the screw 10, with which wire 15 is elec 
trically connected. When, however, it is de 
sired to turn down the lamp or regulate the 
brilliancy, stem 2 is turned to the left over 
plates :) or away from the screw 10, with which 
wire 15 is connected, thus compelling the cur 
rent to travel through a greater or less resist 
ance, according to the strength of light re 
quired. It will thus be seen that the light 
may be nicely regulated and controlled by my 
improved device. The last plate 9 to the left, 
or the one farthest from the one with which 
wire 15 is connected, should not be connected 
with the carbon. Hence when arm 8 reaches 
this plate the light is extinguished. 
The device is provided with two plates 10 
and 17, one secured to the base or plate 1 and 
the other connected with stem 2 and both 
connected with wire-cloth 18, thus forming a 
shield for the parts and at the same time per 
mitting free circulation of the air for the pur 
95 
OC 
2 
482,098 
pose of keeping the mechanism at a sufi 
ciently-low temperature. 
iiaving thus described my invention, what 
claim is 
i. A rheostat consisting of an insulating 
block. I, provided with a series of plates 9, in 
sulated from each other, metal screws 10, pass 
ing up through the block into said plates, a 
carbon resistance supported upon block 1 and 
provided with clamps 14, surrounding the car 
boia, and secured by adjusting-screws25, a wire 
connecting each screw 10 with screw 25, a ro 
tating metal stem 2, secured to plate 1 and 
provided with a metal arm adapted to engage 
plates 9, and a circuit the wires of which are 
electrically connected, respectively, with stem 
2 and the plate 9 at one extremity of the se 
ries of plates, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. A rheostat consisting of an insulating 
O 
block 1, provided with a series of metal plates 
9, insulated from one another, netal screws 
10, passing up through block into Said plates, 
a carbon resistance provided with adjustable 
clamps, wires connecting said clamps with 
screws 10, a rotating metal stem 2, passing 
through block and provided with a metal 
arm adapted to engage plates 9, a circuit the 
wires of which are electrically connected, re 
spectively, with stem 2 and the plate 9 at one 
extremity of the series, and a casing inclos 
ing the mechanism and provided with forami 
nated sides, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
Intestimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HARRY W. AWRENCE. 
Witnesses: 
WM. MCCONNELL, 
G. J. ROLLANDET, . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482194.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
FEEDING MECHANISM FOR MACHINERY FOR OPENING AND PREPARING 
J. C. POTTER. 
COTTON, 
No. 482,194, 
Patented Sept. 6, 1892. 
 
 
21 La. 
xy &ySYSNSS 
. 
(28)itvlooscs 
 
34uovtoz 
2 CA/4, 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2 
FEEDING MECHANISM FOR MACHINERY FOR OPENING AND PREPARING 
J. C. POTTER, 
COTTON, 
No. 482,194, 
Patented Sept. 6, 1892 
 
 
 
 
the Norris peters co., Photo-Litho., WASHINGTON, d. c. 
(2-4/4, 
7, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES C. POTTER, OF PAWTUCKET, RHODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
POTTER & ATHERTON MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FEEDING MECHANISM FOR MACHINERY FOR OPENING AND PREPARING COTTON, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,194, dated September 6, 1892. 
Application filed June 29, 1892, Serial No. 438,445, (No model.) 
To old, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES C. POTTER, of 
Pawtucket, in the State of Rhode Island, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
5 ments in Feeding Mechanism for Machinery 
for Opening and Preparing Cotton or other 
Fibrous Material, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention is more particularly intended 
Io for feeding or delivering cotton to cotton 
Openers and cleaners. 
The object I have in view is in delivering 
Cotton to the Ordinary opener-apron, to free 
it from a great portion of its dirt and trash, 
15 to render it less lumpy and uneven, and to 
deliver it to the opener in sheet form. I em 
ploy for this purpose, in connection with the 
usual lifting-apron or spiked apron, a strip 
per, Or, as it may more properly be called, a 
20 beater-clearer, a revolving cage, and a pair 
of stripper-rolls. The beater-clearer takes the 
cotton from the lifting-apron, and at the same 
time beats and lightens it up, shaking from 
it sand and dirt, which fall, while the cotton 
25 itself, lightened up by the operation, is car 
ried forward to the revolving cage, on which 
it gathers, and is thence taken off by the 
stripper-rolls, which deliver it to the opener. 
With the cage I make use of a fan connected 
3o to its interior by air-trunks in the usual way, 
this fan serving to take of the light dist pro 
duced by the action of the beater-clearer and 
to carry forward the cotton taken by that de 
vice from the lifting-apron and to assemble it 
35 on the cage. This interposition of a revolv 
ing cage between the lifting-apron and the 
opening mechanism proper, which insures 
the delivery of the cotton in sheet form to 
the opener, I believe to be new with me. 
The nature of my invention and the man 
ner in which it may be carried into effect can 
be easily understood by reference to the ac 
companying drawings, the two figures of 
which represent in sectional side elevation so 
45 much of the machinery as is needed for the 
purposes of the invention. Figure 2 repre 
sents on a larger scale than in Fig. 1 the 
combination of devices in which my invention 
is more particularly comprised. 
Ois typical of any suitable opener or beater, 
of which N is the apron. 
So 
55 
D is a spiked apron or lifting-apron of any 
suitable construction, located, as usual, at 
the end of a hopper A, on the bottom of which 
is the horizontal carrying-apron B. 
At the upper end of the hopper, adjoining 
the lifting-apron, is a device C, which is in 
tended to regulate the quantity of cotton de 
livered by the apron, which device I term 
an equalizing-doffer. This device is of my 6o 
invention, but forms no part of the present 
application, having been made by me the Sub 
ject of another application, bearing Serial No. 
438,444, of even date here with. It is repre 
sented in the drawings as merely typical of 65 
the usual comb or equivalent device for re 
moving the surplus stock from the lifting 
apron. 
On the other side of the lifting-apron from 
the device C is the beater-clearer E, which re- 7o 
volves in the direction of the arrow thereon 
and has a drum, which carries upon it longi 
tudinal webs ac, preferably of leather, (or I 
may use metal spikes or teeth instead,) which 
wipe against the teeth of the lifting-apron or 75 
very nearly wipe against them and strip 
from the apron the cotton held thereon, strik 
ing the cotton at the same time with some 
force, particularly if it be lumpy, opening it 
up and shaking out from it the heavy trash, 8o 
sand, dirt, &c. The beater-clearer revolves 
in a sort of case closed at the top and having 
a curved bottom, in which are transverse grid 
bars y, and it terminates at its front end in a 
passage which leads into another case con- 85 
taining the cage M. Beneath the grid-bars ly 
is the dirt-receptacle T, into which the heavy 
refuse separated from the cotton falls. The 
beater-clearer E revolves rapidly, and by its 
action, as well as by that of the cage-fan L, 9o 
hereinafter referred to, the cotton is carried 
along the passage at the front of the beat 
er-clearer into the case in which the cage M 
is located, where it gathers upon the cage, 
is stripped from the latter by the stripper- 95 
rolls H, and from them passes to the opener. 
apron N. 
The cage M may be made in any Suitable 
or customary way, either of wire or of perfo 
rated metal. It is mounted in Suitable bear- I op 
ings in its case, so as to revolve, and is power 
driven. With each of its ends communicates, 
2 
482,194 
Having described my improvements, what 35 
and described I am enabled to drive the 
beater-clearer E at a very high rate of speed, 
so that it acts not merely as a stripper and 3o 
conveyer, but also to some extent as an 
opener, which puts the cotton in condition to 
be most effectively acted upon by the opening 
mechanism subsequently. 
I claim herein as new and of my own invention 
is as follows: 
1. The combination of the lifting-apron, 
the beater-clearer, the revolving cage, and 
the stripper-rolls, substantially as herein set 4o 
forth. 
2. The combination, with the cotton-opener 
and lifting-apron from which cotton is deliv 
ered to the opener, of an intermediate re 
volving cage and means whereby the cotton 45 
is delivered from the lifting-apronto the cage 
and from the cage to the opener, substantially 
as herein set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES C. POTTER. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
EWELL A. DICK, 
L. C. HILLS. 
as usual, an air and dust trunkP, (only one of 
them being shown,) leading to the exhaust 
fan L, the case of which opens into the ex 
haust-trunk F, through which the dust, &c., 
5 are discharged, as customary where wire 
cages are employed in cotton machinery. 
The stripper-rolls H are power-driven. The 
upper one is to be arranged so that it can rise 
or fall in its bearings, so as to pass cotton of 
Io varying thickness, and a flap w is put at the 
front end of the case or cage Mover the strip 
per-roll H to exclude air from entering above 
the roll as the latter rises and falls. 
The parts E M H L, and also D, B, and C, 
I5 are each and all power-driven, the movement 
being taken from the shaft of the beater, O, 
as customary in similar cases. I have not 
deemed it necessary, however, to illustrate 
any such driving mechanism. The direction 
of movement of the several parts is indicated 
by the arrows placed upon them, respectively, 
and the manner of arranging the driving 
gearing for the purpose will be understood 
by the skilled mechanic without further ex 
I remark that by reason of the organization 
and arrangement of parts herein illustrated 
25 planation. 
, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482294.txt	(No. Model.) 
No. 482,294, 
A. C. BURKE. 
FRUIT, SIZER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Sept. 6, 1892, 
727. 3. 
ae 
7 Z. 
Zas a2 
2 Zaf 
 
-2. 
--FR 
N. 25 
Z2 
32 
2. 
-Z2 
th 
as 
a. 
Zs 
I Y) 
2 
aZ 
zz, 
Z 
2 
as/20ez CZizz22e. 
Ipilepiar, 
(No Model.) 
A. C. BUR KE, 
FRUIT SIZER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 482,294, 
 
Patented Sept. 6, 1892, 
A Zaz 3. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ASHBEL C. BURIKE, OF GYPSUM, ASSIGNOR TO D. A. SCOTT, OF CATAWBA 
ISLAND, OHIO. 
FRUIT, SIZE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,294, dated September 6, 1892. 
Application filed March 19, 1891, 
Serial No. 385,707, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ASHBEL C. BURKE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Gyp 
Sum, in the county of Ottawa and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Fruit 
Sizing Machine, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
fruit-sizing machines, the objects in view be 
ing to provide a machine of cheap and sim 
ple construction into which small fruits may 
be promiscuously introduced and which will 
automatically and without any injury what 
ever size or separate the same in accordance 
With their respective sizes. 
Other objects and advantages of the in 
vention will hereinafter appear, and the novel 
features thereof will be particularly pointed 
out in the claims, 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of a fruit-sizing machine 
constructed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section thereof. Fig. 
3 is a detail and plan of thesizing-table. Fig. 
4 is a sectional view of the feed-belt and its 
pulleys. Fig. 5 is a plan view of the blank 
from which the canvas discharge-spouts are 
Ilike numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
In practicing my invention I employ a 
framework which may be any desired con 
struction adapted for the purpose in view, 
and the same comprises a series of four ver 
tical posts 1, which are connected near their 
bottoms by suitable tie-bars 2 and near their 
upper ends by front and rear cross-bars 4 and 
5, respectively. The front and rear posts are 
connected by side bars 6, and in these near 
their rear ends there is journaled in suitable 
bearings formed on the under side of the 
bars 6 a transverse shaft 8, one end of which 
is provided with a crank-handle 9, whereby 
the shaft may be operated. Below the bars 
6 in the front pair of posts 1 bearings 10 are 
formed, and in these bearings a second shaft 
11 is journaled. Both the shafts 8 and 11 
have mounted thereon two pulleys 12, which 
pulleys are connected by a pair of longitudi 
So nally-disposed belts 13. These belts are con 
formed. 
45 
35 
- 
55 
nected at intervals by transverse slats or 
cleats 14, and each slat is provided with a se 
ries of inverted-U-shaped resilient fingers 15, 
preferably formed of strips of rubber bent in 
the U form or shape and having their ends 
secured to the front and rear edges of the 
cleats. The several series of resilient fingers 
are in alignment with each other, for the pur 
pose hereinafter described. 
16 designates the distributing-table, and 
the same consists of a rear cross-bar 17, from 
the front edge of which projects a series of 
tines 18. These times pass under the front 
cross-bar 4, while the rear end of the dis 
tributing-table rests upon the rear cross-bar 
5, so that, as will be seen, the table declines 
from the rear to front. These series of tines 
decrease in width from their rear ends, and 
inasmuch as they are spaced apart they form 
slots or passages. These slots or passages, 
designated as 19, are by the reduction of the 
times smaller at their rear ends than at their 
centers, and smaller at their centers than at 
their front ends, whereby a fruit started at 
the upper end of the slot or track, if too large 
to drop through the rear portion of track, will 
pass to the central portion, and if still too 
large will pass on to the front portion, and if 
still too large for this portion will pass over 
the front ends of the times. A pair of side 
bars 20 are bolted to the inner sides of the 
longitudinally - opposite posts 1, and these 
side bars project beyond the ends of the times 
of the distributing-table and have secured 
thereto a canvas chute or mouth 21, into 
which the fruit may fall when too large to 
pass between the times. 
22 designates a series of transverse bars, 
which are located between the pulleys 13 and 
the upper and lower side of the endless feed 
belts. These cleats are located below the be 
ginning of each reduced portion of the tines. 
23 designates a blank of canvas, one edge of 
which is provided with the three scallops 24. 
This blank of canvasis mounted over the se 
ries of bars 22 and between the bars sags, so 
as to form chutes 25, 26, and 27, the first be 
ing under the nearest portion of the tracks 
between the tines, the Second being under the 
middle portion of the tracks, and the third 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
 
482,294 
... 
" 
tracks. 
being under the end or front portion of said 
This completes the construction of the ma 
chine, whose operation is as follows: The 
fruit is introduced, preferably, by means of 
an inclined tray 26, located at the rear end of 
the machine upon the upper end of the dis 
tributing-table, and passing upon the latter 
distributes itself over the several tracks, down 
which it rolls or is carried by means of the 
resilient fingers that extend up between the 
tines or through the tracks. These fingers pre 
Yent the fruit from rolling too fast or bumping 
from side to side and becoming injured, and 
to the contrary, conduct the fruit quietly 
without injury along the tracks until each 
fruit arrives opposite that portion of the 
tracks which is sufficiently large to permitit 
fall through, which it does, and being caught 
by its proper canvas chute arranged under 
the tracks is discharged by the chute into 
a basket or other receptacle that may be 
placed at the end of the chute for its recep 
tion. All fruit thatistoolarge to pass through 
the tracks passes on to the end chute 21 and 
is deposited by the latter into a receptacle 
placed thereon. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that I have provided a machine of great 
simplicity and adapted to divide or classify 
the several grades of fruit, and that I ac 
complish this without any injury or bruising 
of the fruit whatever, which is principally 
caused by the fact that the fingers are resili 
ent, and being slightly bent by the fruit the 
latter, in a manner as will be obvious, lies 
upon the fingers and is supported thereby, so 
that the bumping and tumbling from side to 
side of the tracks by the fruit is obviated, and 
the same is conducted gently down the in 
clined tracks, where it is caught by canvas 
chutes, which will not bruise it, and subse 
quently deposited in its proper receptacle. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a fruit-sizer, the combination, with a 
framework, a front and a rear shaft, pulleys 
mounted on the shafts, endless belts connect 
ing the pulleys, a series of cleats connecting 
the belts, resilient fingers extending upward 
from the cleats in line with each other, and 
chutes formed of canvas and arranged under 
and transverse to the belt, of a superimposed 
distributing-table having a series of slots 
graduated in width and increasing in size 
over each successive chute, the fingers of the 
belt extending through the slots, and a chute 
at the end of the table, substantially as speci 
fied. 
2. In a fruit-sizer, the combination, with 
the framework and a distributing-table hav 
ing a series of slots, of an endless belt located 
under the table and having a series of fingers 
extending through the slots, and transverse 
troughs arranged under said slots, which slots 
increase in width from rear to front above 
the troughs, substantially as specified. 
3. In a fruit-sizer, the combination, with 
the distributing-table having a series of lon 
gitudinally-disposed slots increasing in size 
at intervals from rear to front, side bars lo 
cated at the sides of the table and having 
their ends extending beyond the front end of 
the table and connected by a canvas chute, 
of a front and rear shaft, one of which is pro 
vided with a crank, a pair of pulleys mounted 
on each shaft, endless belts passing around 
the pulleys, cleats connecting the belts, ill 
verted-U-shaped resilient fingers secured to 
the front and rear edges of the cleats and 
projecting through the slots of the table, the 
transverse series of bars located between the 
upper and lower sides of the belt and at the 
beginning of each increase of width in the 
slots, and the canvas blank mounted on the 
bars and sagging between the same, the end 
of the blank between the bars being scal 
loped, substantially as specified. 
ASHBEL C. BURKE. 
In presence of 
JOHN DETLESS, 
THEODORE LINDEMANN. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482394.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 482,394, 
J. D. STORIE. 
CORE SETTER. 
Patented Sept. 13, 1892, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES DOUGLAS STORIE, OF OSHAWA, CANADA. 
CORE SETTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,894, dated September 13, 1892. 
Application filed July 18, 1891, Serial No, 399,968, (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 O 
hold of the setter A at both ends, as indicated 
in Fig. 1, I can pass it beneath the cores lying 
in alignment in the bins, and thereby simul 
taneously lift them and transfer them ex 
actly into the core-prints simply by tilting 
the setter, as indicated in this figure. 
In Fig. 2 I show an alternative form, in 
which I form the cross-section of the setter in 
angular form and provide handles C, as shown. 
In Fig. 3 I show a form with handles Ct, Se 
cured on the ends of the setter A, formed as 
shown in Fig. 1, and a chute or hopper C, the 
said chute having sleeves or ferrules 3, in 
which the handles C are journaled. I do not 
show any guide for the cores by but it will be 
understood that such may be provided and 
that the chute may be supported by the hands 
of the Workman, so as to support a number of 
cores thereon, and thereby further facilitate 
rapidly setting the cores b in the core-prints. 
It will also be seen in this figure that upon 
tilting the setter to place the cores in the 
prints the back of the setter will form a stop 
to prevent any cores from falling out onto 
the mold. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination, in a core-setter, of a 
bin or bins constructed to contain two or 
more series of cores in alignment and an 
elongated receptacle adapted for insertion in 
said bin or bins to receive a core from each 
series, substantially as described. 
2. The herein-described method of molding, 
consisting in arranging two or more series of 
cores in alignment and at distances apart 
corresponding to the distance between the 
respective core-prints they are intended to 
fill and moving a core from each series at One 
operation and depositing these cores in the 
core-prints, the relative positions of the cores 
being maintained throughout the operation, 
substantially as described. 
JAMES DOUGLAS STORIE. 
Witnesses: 
C. A. JONES, 
F. E. DINGLE, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES DOUGLAS STORIE, 
inventor, of the town of Oshawa, in the county 
of Ontario, in the Province of Ontario, Canada, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Core-Setters, of which the foll 
iOWing is a specification. 
The object of the invention is to design an 
apparatus by which the cores may be placed 
in the core-prints rapidly and accurately. 
Figure I is a perspective view showing my 
Core-setter and the method of placing my 
COres. Fig. 2 is a view of an alternative form. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view showing a corre 
sponding form to Fig. 1 with feeding-chute 
attached. Fig. 4 is a sectional view on line 
XX of Fig. 3. 
In the drawings like letters and figures of 
reference indicate corresponding parts in each 
figure. 
Heretofore cores have commonly been set 
by holding two or three, one above the other, 
between the forefinger and thumb and then 
dropping them one by one down into a core 
print. In this method, however, the upper 
cores, being farther away from the core-print 
than the lower, would frequently not be 
dropped into the core-print at all, and conse 
quently when Setting a number of cores a 
great many Would have to be replaced. It is 
with the object of relmedying this, and there 
by economizing time in core-setting, that my 
invention is chiefly designed. In the draw 
ings I show the molds for three chain-links 
and the method of lifting and depositing the 
core therein; but it will be understood that 
my device may be used for any article of 
manufacture in which cores are used for cast 
ing it. 
A is my core-setter, which I make of any 
desired length. I form it in cross-section, 
preferably in the arc of a circle, as shown in 
Fig. 1. 
B are bins, in which I place the cores band 
which I place at suitable distances apart to 
Suit the positions of the core-print. By taking 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482494.txt	(No Model.) 
0. ANDERSON. 
THRASHING MACHINE 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 482,494, 
Patented Sept. 13, l892. 
 
SA ASA 
A. 
i Y 
 
S 
III/Sit 
f 
A 
i 
is a 
A HSAs 
ENS 21 
U. 
AS 
Y 
 
h f 
SANIE 
4-line- 
s \,XS. 
4. 
SS 
eli 
ty-seei. 
SS 
Re-R is 
Y 
s 
Du g 
w 
w 
SS & 
747, 
(No Model.) 
No. 482,494. 
O ANDERSON. 
THRASHING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 13, 1892. 
 
25 
 
 
 
NS 
- A N V 
N. W 
A 
A gly YN 
----------SS 
S 2 
R 
Oliver Artdersov 
(No Model.) 
No. 482,494, 
0. ANDERSON. 
THRASHING MACHINE, 
Patented Sept 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
13 
1892 
 
 
 
 
 
ava: 
Asakas 
ki 
sk 
arissal:Arsas 
Asia 
the Norris Peters co, Photo-Litho, was HINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIVER ANDERSON, OF RACINE, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
HENRY F. HERRICK, OF SAME PLACE. 
THRASHING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,494, dated September 18, 1892. 
Application filed April 17, 1890, Serial No. 348,361 (No model.) 
55 
70 
To all, who1, it half conce77. 
Be it known that I, OLIVER ANDERSON, of 
Racine, in the county of Racine and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Thrashing-Machines; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description thereof, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ing, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
thrashing-machines, and more especially to 
thrashing-machines which embrace a straw 
carrier and bundle-feeder forming part of the 
same structure with the thrashing-machine. 
The invention consists in the matters here 
inafter described, and pointed Out in the ap 
pended claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a side elevation of 
a thrashing-machine embodying the same. 
Fig. 2 is a central longitudinal section there 
of, taken upon line 22 of Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a 
plan section taken upon line 33 of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is another plan section taken upon line 
44 of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is an enlarged detail sec 
tion through the concave surrounding the 
thrashing-cylinder. 
Fig. 6 is a detail sec 
tional elevation of the concave, taken upon 
line 6 6 of Fig. 5. 
As shown in said drawings, A is a thrash 
ing-cylinder, and B the concave surrounding 
the same. 
C is the bundle-feeder and band-cutter lo 
cated centrally at the top of the machine and 
supplying the grain to the upwardly-moving 
side of the thrashing-cylinder, and D is a 
straw-carrier located beneath the bundle 
feeder with its end adjacent to the lower part 
of the thrashing-cylinder in position to receive 
the straw from the latter. The concave B ex 
tends from a point adjacent to the discharge 
end of the bundle-feeder around the thrash 
ing-cylinder to a point near the receiving end 
of the straw-conveyer, said concave thus cov 
ering a greater part of the circumference of 
the thrashing-cylinder. 
E is an inclined board placed beneath the 
lower part of the concave B and discharging 
at its lower end upon the straw-conveyer, 
F is a vibrating shoe located in the lower 
part of the machine and provided with screens 
fff, upon which the grain from the straw 
carrier is delivered in the usual manner. 
G is an exhaust fan or blower operating in 
connection with the shoe to clean the grain, 
said exhaust-fan being provided with a regu 
lating-valve g at its exit-opening in a man 
ner heretofore common. 
His a horizontally-arranged spiral conveyer 
located in a trough H', which receives the tail 
ings from the several screens fff of the shoe. 
Said conveyer delivers the tailings to an end 
less-belt elevator I, which delivers the tail 
ings to a spout , discharging into the bun 
dle-carrier at the receiving end of the latter. 
J is a horizontal spiral conveyer operating 
in a trough J', which receives the cleaned 
grain from the sloping bottom F of the shoe 
F. Said conveyer J delivers the grain at one 
end of the trough to an inclined endless-belt 
elevator K, which extends upwardly to a point 
near the front end of the machine and dis 
charges into a hopper K'. Said hopper termi 
nates at its lower end in a spout k", having a 
valve k, through which grain is delivered at 
the front end of the machine. 
L is an auxiliary horizontal straw-carrier of 
the usual construction attached to the rear end 
of the machine and adapted to receive the 
straw from the rear end of the straw-conveyer 
D and from the screens fff of the shoe, the 
rearmost of said screens being provided with 
prongs f', extending over the trough H to 
carry the straw to said auxiliary straw-carrier 
in a familiar manner. 
The thrashing-cylinder A is of familiar con 
struction, consisting of an open frame pro 
vided with teeth C. C. C., the same being mount 
ed on a shaft A', which is provided with a 
belt-pulley a', over which is placed the belt 
which transmits motion to the machine. The 
concave B, which extends around the greater 
part of the circumference of the thrashing 
cylinder, as hereinbefore described, prefer. 
ably consists of two parts or sections B B. 
The part B' is located over the thrashing-cyl 
inder, is apertured for the passage of the 
grain, and contains a series of thrashing-teeth 
b b, which operate in connection with the 
teeth C. C. On the thrashing-cylinder. Said 
95 
CO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
482,494 
O 
concave section B' preferably consists of a D. Below the bottom D' is placed the re 
plurality of separate grates b'b', held at their 
ceiving-board D to receive the grain which 
ends in segmental castings bb', which cast 
is shaken from the straw resting upon the 
ings are adjustably secured to the opposite 
strips and passes through the perforated bot 
inner faces of the side walls M M of the ma-. 
tom, said board D'being provided with trans 
chine - housing. As a convenient means of 
verse inclined ridges did, by means of which 
affording such adjustable connection, the seg 
the grain is carried rearwardly on the board 
mental plates b b are pivoted at their inner 
through the medium of the longitudinal re 
ends to a horizontal pivot-rod b, Figs. 5 and 
ciprocation of the conveyer. The inclined 
6, and at their ends adjacent to the bundle 
receiving-board E discharges upon the for 
feeder are held in place by bolts b, passing 
ward end of the board D', and at its rear end 
through curved slots b in said plates, which 
said board D terminates over the uppermost 
slots are concentric with the pivotal rod b. 
screen f of the shoe F. 
The section B of the concave is located at 
The straw-carrier is supported and given 
the side of the thrashing-cylinder remote from 
motion by the means as follows: N N are 
the bundle-feeder and will commonly be made 
swinging arms, which are pivoted at their up 
without teeth, but may be provided with one 
per ends by pivots in n' to the machine-frame 
or more rows, if found desirable, the one 
and at their lower ends by pivots n n to the 
shown in the drawings having a single row of 
sides of the straw-conveyer. Said arms NN' 
teeth b located near its lower margin. The 
sustain the weight of the conveyer while en 
section B is perforated or slotted to allow the 
abling the same to be moved or shifted end 
escape through it of grain thrown outwardly 
wise. One of the arms N' is extended down 
by the action of the thrashing-cylinder, said 
wardly past the pivot n, and at its lower end 
section consisting, preferably, of a series of 
is connected by means of a pitman n with a 
separate grates bib', which are held at their 
crank-shaft N, said crank-shaft being located 
lower ends in segmental plates bb, which are 
near the lower part of the machine-frame and 
secured to the side walls m of the housing. 
driven by means of the belt-pulley N, over 
The slots in the grates b b are preferably in 
which passes a belt N', which is trained over 
clined or ranged tangentially with reference 
a pulley a' on the cylinder-shaft A'. 
to the surface of the thrashing-cylinder to 
Above the straw-conveyer D and beneath 
facilitate the passage through the grates of 
the bundle-feeder is located a top wall M", 
the grain thrown outward and downward by 
which is attached to the top edges of the side 
the cylinder. The said segmental plates bib 
walls of the housing and serves to confine 
are conveniently supported by being pivoted 
the straw in its passage over the straw-con 
at their upper ends on the pivot-rod b, and 
veyer. At the end of said top wall M", adja 
secured at their lower ends to the side walls 
cent to the thrashing-cylinder, is located an 
of the housings by means of bolts b passing 
adjustable metal plate m, adapted to be 
through curved slots bin the plates, in the 
shifted toward or from the thrashing-cylin 
same manner as before described in connec 
der, said plate serving to separate the outgo 
tion with the top section B' of the concave. 
ing and incoming straw and to deflect the 
By loosening the bolts bib' the two parts or 
straw downwardly upon the conveyer as it is 
sections of the concave may be shifted toward 
sues from between the thrashing-cylinder and 
or from the thrashing-cylinder, as may be 
the concave. 
found necessary or desirable for the perfect 
The bundle-feeder and band-cutter illus 
operation of the parts. 
trated is generally similar to that described 
Grain thrown outwardly through the per 
in a prior application for patent, Serial No. 
forations in the concave is confined by the top 
310,096, filed May 29, 1889, the same consist 
and end walls m and m' of the housing, the 
ing in its main features of a longitudinally 
walls n' preferably being hinged to form a 
reciprocating table C, having transverse ser 
door by which access may be had to the con 
rations c C on its top surface and vertical 
cave and thrashing-cylinder. The grain thus 
side boards C'C', and which operates in con 
passing through the concave finally falls upon 
nection with oscillating band-cutters C3 C3, 
the inclined board E, by which it is delivered 
Supported upon a rock-shaft c', which is sus 
to the straw - conveyer. Said conveyer is 
tained over the table in vertically-adjustable 
shaken or reciprocated endwise for the pur 
bearings c, mounted on brackets c c, at 
pose of separating from the straw any grain 
tached to the upper part of the main frame o 
contained therein, in a manner heretofore 
the machine. 
common, and the board Eis preferably hinged 
C is a dividing-board arranged longitudi 
at its upper end to the sides of the housing 
nally at the middle of the reciprocating table 
by means of pivots e e, and at its lower end 
and sustained immovably from the machine 
is pivoted to the said conveyer by means of 
frame conveniently by means of bars c' cat 
pivots e'e', so that the lower end of said board 
its opposite ends, the bar c being attached 
E moves with the straw-conveyer as the latter 
to the cross-piece of the main frame at the 
is vibrated. Said straw-carrier is made in a 
rear end of the same and the bar c to a hori 
familiar manner with a perforated bottom D', 
Zontal transverse rod c', attached at its ends 
which extends its entire length and has upon 
to the brackets c'. The band-cutters are 
its upper surface longitudinal serrated strips 
shown as provided with cutter-plates cc, at 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
H 
482,494 
3 
O 
35 
45 
55 
- 
s 
tached to the same in the same manner as 
shown in said prior application. 
C C are feed-regulating rods, which are 
ivoted on the cross-piece c' and are engaged 
near their free ends With a transverse crank 
shaft C, the eccentric part of which passes 
through loops upon said fingers, said crank 
shaft being provided with a hand-lever c, by 
which the same may be placed at a desired 
angle. Said crank-shaft C is herein shown 
as sustained upon standards C C, attached 
to the upper part of the main frame of the 
machine. The said feed-regulating fingers 
operate in the same manner as those shown 
in Said prior application. 
The feed-table C of the bundle-feeding de 
vice is sustained upon arms O O", which arms 
are rigidly attached to the arms N,N', by 
which the grain-conveyer D is supported and 
actuated. As herein shown, transverse rods 
O o' are attached to the upper ends of the 
arms O O", and the table C' is provided 
with bearings O'O', which engage with said 
rods O O". It follows from this construction 
that the said reciprocating table of the bun 
dle-feeder is reciprocated by the same mech 
anism which actuates the grain-conveyer D, 
the parts being SO arranged that the grain 
conveyer moves backwardly, while the table 
C moves forwardly during each reciproca 
tion of the parts. This particular construc 
tion has the advantage of lessening or pre 
venting the jarring or shaking of the machine, 
inasmuch as the movement of one part in one 
direction is opposed to the movement of the 
other part in the opposite direction. 
Vibratory motion is given to the band-cut 
ters C by means of an arm c' on the rock 
shaft d', which arm is connected by means of 
a pitman o' with an arm O', which is rigidly 
attached to one of the arms OO, which sus 
tain the rear end of the reciprocating table of 
the bundle-feeder. 
The bundle-feeder and band-cutter con 
structed as above described operates in the 
same manner as that illustrated in said prior 
application for patent, the bundles being 
thrown upon the table C and being carried 
endwise thereon in the reciprocatory motion 
of the table by the inclined teeth or serra 
tions c c thereon, which engage the bundle in 
their forward movement, but slide under the 
same as they move backward. Said tables 
carry the bundles beneath the vibrating band 
cutters, by which the band is cut, after which 
the grain is carried to and discharged from 
the end of the table, the grain in the machine 
herein shown passing from the table of the 
bundle-feeder directly to the thrashing-cyl 
inder. 
P is a rock-shaft mounted in the upperpart 
of the thrasher-frame and provided with 
toothed segments P' P, which extend up 
wardly through longitudinal slots in the table 
C of the bundle-carrier and are arranged be 
neath and opposite the band-cutters C. C. 
The rock-shaft P is actuated to give an oscil 
latory movement to the toothed segmentsPP 
by means of an armp on the rock-shaft, which 
is connected by means of a pitman p' with 
the arm O, by which the band-cutters are 
actuated. The oscillating toothed segments 
P P', arranged and actuated as described, 
aid the feeding of the bundles by carrying 
the same forward in their advance movement, 
and thereby preventing the band-cutters from 
carrying the upper part of the bundle back 
ward as said band-cutters move rearwardly 
in their back-stroke. The table C of the 
band - cutter and feeder is inclined down 
Wardly and forwardly toward the thrashing 
cylinder to facilitate the feeding of the grain 
in the same manner as the similar table 
shown in said prior application is arranged. 
The spout , by which the tailings elevated by 
the endless-belt elevator I are discharged, ex 
tends over the rear or receiving end of the 
table C', so that such tailings are delivered 
to said table and pass downwardly over the 
same to be delivered with the straw to the 
thrashing-cylinder to be again thrashed. In 
order to properly confine the tailings, the 
said table C' is provided with a transverse 
end board Cat its receiving end. 
The Several conveyers and elevators, as 
well as the blower G may be actuated by any 
suitable belt connection from the shaft A'; 
but as herein shown said parts are actuated 
as follows: Upon the crank-shaft N, which is 
driven from the shaft A' by the belt N', as 
hereinbefore described, is placed a pulley N., 
and over said pulley is trained a belt g', 
which passes over a pulley G* on the fan 
shaft G'. The shaft h of the conveyer H at 
the rear end of the machine is provided with 
a belt-pulley h", over which is trained a belt 
H, which also passes over the pulley N, above 
mentioned. The shaft L' of the auxiliary 
straw - carrier L is driven by means of a 
crossed beltL, passing over a pulleylon said 
shaft and over another pulley h on the shaft 
h. The shafti of the conveyer J is actuated 
by means of the chain belt K' of the grain 
elevator K, said belt being actuated from the 
upper shaft of the elevator, which shaft is 
driven by means of a pulley ic, over which is 
trained a crossed belt K, passing over a pull 
ley a on the shaft A'. 
As an improved construction in the frame 
of a thrashing-machine, I provide at each side 
thereof main longitudinal frame-pieces Q Q, 
Which extend obliquely from the forward axle 
upwardly and rearwardly to the upper rear 
corner of the frame, combining with the same 
suitable uprights g g g g g and longitudinal 
frame-pieces g g g as are necessary for suit 
ably sustaining the parts of the housing and 
the operative parts of the machine. The 
lower longitudinal frame pieces or sills gat 
the rear part of the machine terminate at 
some distance from the front axle, where they 
are connected with an upright g', thereby 
leaving a space through which thefront wheels 
may pass in turning the machine. 
By this 
75 
95 
OC 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
4 
482,494 
O 
(5 
construction I am enabled to provide. Such 
space by a simple construction in the frame 
and one which is less expensive than that 
heretofore employed for this purpose. 
The employment of a band-cutter and feed 
er, combined with a thrashing-cylinder of the 
machine and arranged as hereinbefore Set 
forth, is of great advantage for several rea 
sons. One advantage is that the entire ma 
chine, including the band-cutter and feeder, 
may be constructed at a cost not materially 
greater than that required for building a 
thrashing-machine alone as heretofore made, 
inasmuch as the band-cutter and feeder are 
actuated by the same parts which operate the 
moving parts of the thrasher. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a thrashing-machine, the combination, 
with a thrashing-cylinder and concave, of a 
straw-conveyer, a bundle-feeder embracing a 
reciprocating table, rigidly-connected pivoted 
arms supporting both the straw-conveyer and 
the said table, and means for actuating said 
conveyer and table, substantially as described. 
2. In a thrashing-machine, the combination, 
with a thrashing-cylinder and concave, of a 
straw-conveyer, a bundle-feeder and band 
cutter comprising a reciprocating table and 
an oscillating band-cutter, rigidly-connected 
ivoted arms supporting both the straw-con 
veyer and the said table, means connected 
with one of said arms and giving vibratory 
motion thereto, and connections between said 
band-cutter and one of said arms by which 
oscillatory motion is given to the band-cut 
ter, substantially as described. 
3. In a thrashing-machine, the combination, 
with a thrashing-cylinder and concave, of a 
straw-conveyer, a feederand band-cutter com 
prising a reciprocating table, oscillating band 
cutter, and an oscillating toothed segment 
opposed to the cutter, rigidly-connected piv 
oted arms sustaining both the straw-conveyer 
and the said table, means connecting one of 
3o p 
35 
45 
55 
said arms with the oscillating band-cutter for 
actuating the latter, means connecting said 
toothed segment with one of said arms for act 
uating said segment, and means giving vibra" 
tory motion to said arms, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. The combination, with a thrashing-cyl 
inder and a concave extending over the down 
wardly-movable side of the cylinder, of a 
straw-conveyer and an inclined board located 
beneath the concave pivotally connected with 
the frame of the machine at its upper end and 
with the straw-conveyer at its lower end and 
forming a continuation of the straw-conveyer, 
substantially as described. 
5. In a thrashing-machine frame, the com 
bination, with the supporting - wheels and 
front and rear axles, of inclined longitudinal 
frame-pieces extending from the front axle 
upwardly and rearwardly the entire length of 
the machine, lower longitudinal frame-pieces 
extending forwardly from the rear axle and 
terminating in the rear of the front axle, and 
vertical frame-pieces crossing the inclined 
frame-pieces at a point at the rear of the front 
axle and attached to the front ends of the 
lower longitudinal frame-pieces, forming a 
space for the forward wheels, substantially as 
described. 
6. In a thrashing-machine, the combination, 
with a thrashing-cylinder and a concave ex 
tending over the downwardly-moving side of 
the cylinder, of abundle-feeder delivering the 
grain to the upwardly-moving side of the cyl 
inder and discharge devices located at the said 
upwardly-moving side of the cylinder, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I affix my signature in presence 
of two witnesses. 
OLIVER ANDERSON. 
75 
Witnesses; 
J. E. DODGE, 
C. L. LUKES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482595.txt	(No Model.) 
G. N. SPENCER, 
P0W FENDER, 
No, 482,595, 
Patented Sept. 13, 1892. 
 
27 CZ1, 
4 rze-KU` 
11 
y 
: 
ir  
"-/%ni V6 
A TTOFAWEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GASTON N. SPENCER, OF OUACHITA CITY, LOUISIANA, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF 
AND WIILILIE EDWIN HOPKINS, OEF SAME PLACE. 
PO W. FE N D E R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,595, dated September 13, 1892. 
Application filed November 9, 1891. Serial No. 411268, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To Cvill UwhvoTnu, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GASTON N. SPENCER, of 
Ouachita City, in the parish of Union and 
State of Louisiana, have invented a new and 
Improved Plow-Fender, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
fenders for plows or similar devices; and the 
object of my invention is to produce a simple, 
durable, and efficient fender which may be 
easily applied to any ordinary plow or other 
device which is used to plow or cultivate be 
tween rows of growing plants and which will 
prevent the plow or cultivator from throwing 
heavy clods or other articles upon the plants, 
but will cause the dirt to be partially sifted, 
so that only the fine dirt and the requisite 
quantity of it shall be thrown around the roots 
of the plants. 
To this end my invention consists in a plow 
fender the construction of which will be here 
inafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming apart of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the fender 
as applied to a plow. Fig.2 is a cross-section 
on the line 2 2 in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail 
side elevation of one side piece of the clamp, 
and Fig.4 is a detail side elevation of the op 
posite side piece. 
The plow 10 is of a common form and may 
be of any approved construction, it having 
the usual plow-beam 11 and the shovel-point 
12, although any kind of a point may be used. 
The device embodying my invention is pro- || 
vided with a clamp 13, by means of which it 
is secured to the plow-beam, which clamp con 
sists of the two side pieces 14 and 15 and the 
bolts 16, which connect the side pieces and 
pass above and below the plow-beam 11, the 
said bolts having prolonged squared heads 17. 
The side pieces have holes 18 at their up 
per and lower ends to receive the bolts, and 
the holes are screw-threaded, so that the bolts 
16 may be inserted from either side and will 
clamp the side pieces firmly upon the plow 
beam. The side piece 15 has a projection 19 
on one edge, in which is a series of holes 20, 
which are adapted to receiye a thumb-screw 
21, and which, being at different heights, pr9 
vide for the adjustment of the fender 22. This 
fender 22 is adapted to extend rearward to a 
point above the plow proper or point 12,Where 
it terminates in a series of spring-fingerS22**, 
three fingers being preferably employed; but 
it may have any desired number. 
The fender is provided near its upper end 
with a recess or socket 23, which is adapted 
to fit upon the bolt-heads 17, and consequently 
the fender serves as a wrench by means of 
which the bolts may be quickly and easily 
tightened. In the extreme upper end of the 
fender is a slot 24, through which the thumb- { 
screw 21 passes, and the thumb-screw has a 
head wide enough to extend across the slot, So 
that when adjusted it will prevent the fender 
from swinging. It will be seen that by re 
moving the thumb - screw and placing the 
fender in a desired position and then insert 
ing the thumb-screw in the slot 24 and in one 
of the holes 20 the fender may be held at 
the exact height desired, so that it will ex 
tend between the dirt thrown up by the plow 
12 and the plants, and this adjustability of 
the fender enables it to be applied to a ploW 
having either a high or low beam. If desired, 
a wedge may be inserted between one of the 
side pieces of the clamp and the plow-beam, So 
as to bring the fender the desired distancellat 
erally from the plow, and by passing the bolts 
through the clamp in the direction opposite 
to that shown in the drawings and then turn 
ing the fender half over and applying it to 
the other side of the plow-beam the fender 
may be adapted to said other side of the plow. 
When the device is to be used, the fender 
is adjusted on the lowerbolt-head, and the op 
eration of the fender is as follows: The plow 
is run along between the rows of plants, so as 
to throw up the dirt around them, and the 
spring-fingers of the fender will catch the 
heavy clods and other large articles which are 
liable to injure the plants, but will permit the 
fine dirt to pass between them and around 
the roots of the plants. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with a clamp having 
a series of holes and provided with bolts hav 
O 
23 O 
25 
35 
45 
9o 
95 
IOO 
482,595 
ing projecting heads, of a fender having 
Spring-fingers at one end, a socket at the other  
end to receive one of the bolt-heads, and an. 
opening at one side of the socket, through 
which and into one of the holes of the clamp 
a thumb-screw is adapted to be passed, sub 
Stantially as described. 
2. A device of the character described, com 
prising a clamp consisting of two side pieces, 
one of which is widened and provided with a 
Series of holes, and bolts having squared heads 
v 
O 
connecting the side pieces, and a fender hav 
ing spring-fingers at one end, a socket to fit 
the.bolt-heads, and a slotted end and thumb 
screw to facilitate its attachment to the 
widened side piece of the clamp, substantially 
as described. 
I 5 
GASTON N. SPENCER. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES T. SPENCER, 
FRANCIS W. PUILLEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482695.txt	(No Model.) 
J. & R. ROBINSON, 
SUPPORT FOR WHIRLS OF SPINDLE BOBBINS, 
No. 482,695. 
Patented Sept. 13, 1892, 
 
a/2.2. 
A722/at 7a-ZoZs. 
Zy C 2T4al i 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOE ROBINSON AND RICHARD ROBINSON, OF DUDLEY HILL NEAR BRAD 
FORD, ENGLAND, ASSIGNORS OF ONE-HALF TO OLIVER BROOK LISTER, 
OF SAMIE PLACE. 
SUPPORT FOR WHIRLS OF SPIND LE-BOBBNS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,695, dated September 13, 1892, 
Application filed January 8, 1892, Serial No. 417,396, (No model.) Patented in England March 26, 1891, No. 5,375, 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOE ROBINSON and 
RICHARD ROBINSON, subjects of the Queen of 
Great Britain and Ireland, residing at Dud 
ley Hill, near Bradford, in the county of York, 
England, have invented certain Improve 
ments in Supports for Whirls of Spindle-Bob 
bins, (for which we have obtained Letters 
Patentin England, No. 5,375, dated March 26, 
1891) of which the following is a specification. 
This invention has for its object the mount 
ing of spinning and twisting bobbins or tubes 
on the machine-spindles in such a manner as 
to reduce the friction, and thereby to rotate 
the same with a less expenditure of power 
than is the case when mounted on the spin 
dles in the manner as hitherto; and it consists 
in mounting each bobbin or tube and whirl 
upon a washer, the latter being supported by 
a number of balls placed in a grooved cup 
surrounding the spindle. 
In describing our invention in detail refer 
ence is made to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 represents an elevation of a fixed 
or non-rotating spindle used on cap spinning 
and twisting frames, the tube and some of the 
other parts being in section. Fig. 2 is a simi 
lar view showing our improvement applied to 
ring spinning and twisting frames. Figs. 3, 
4, and 5 are enlarged details. 
The fixed or non-rotating spindle A is se 
cured to the rail B, and the bar C, commonly 
called the lifter-plate,' is moved vertically 
up and down the fixed or non-rotating spin 
dle A in the usual manner. Upon the lifter 
plate C, surrounding each fixed or non-rotat 
ing spindle A, we place a cup D, the section 
of which is more clearly shown in detail, Fig. 
4, and is grooved for the reception of a num 
ber of balls E. E., upon which is placed a 
washer F, incased by a cap G, the top plate of 
which is clear of the washer F in order that 
the same may rotate freely. 
25 
35 
 
45 
55 
75 
- 
The bobbins or tubes H and driving-whirls 
J are constructed as hitherto; but instead of 
mounting the same on spindles with the base 
of the tube H and whirl resting upon a sta 
tionary plate or washer each tube and whirl 
rests upon the washer F, supported by the 
balls E. E., as before described, so that on the 
rotation of the tube H and whirl T the fric 
tional contact between the latter and washer 
F is such that the washer rotates also; but by 
the Same resting on the balls E E the washer 
Frolls thereon, thereby converting the motion 
of the parts in frictional contact from that of 
rubbing into one of rolling, thus reducing the 
friction, and therefore the power required to 
drive the same. 
When applying our invention to ring spin 
ning or twisting frames, the ring-rail and ring 
R are constructed and operated as hitherto, 
but the cup D, in which the balls E are placed, 
is secured to the fixed or non-rotating spindle 
A, the other portions of the cup D being con 
structed for the reception of the base of tube 
Hand whirl J upon the washer F in the man 
ner as before described. 
What we claim is 
In a spinning and twisting machine, the 
combination of the non-rotating integral spin 
dle A, the grooved cup D, encircling the spin 
dle A, the balls E E, the rotating washer F, 
the cap for retaining the said washer in posi 
tion, the tube H, and driving-whirl J, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
the subscribing witnesses, 
JOE ROBINSON, 
RICHARD ROBINSON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. PREST, 
E. H. BODEN, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482795.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 482,795, 
H. L. KENT, 
ROCK CRUSHER 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 20, 1892. 
e 
A 
Fi 2 --- 
A 
  
(i. A7 
As 
 
 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2> 
2Y S 
 
  
 
s 
Ea 
W)AEa 
W2 
W a W 
 
 
VV2 
 
24 4 4 1. 
A 
Fig-3. 
 
 
WITNESSES 
2622-6%--- 
3-4 2-4 
BY 
 
INV 
zT 4 
62.1% 
ATTORMY. 
4 
(No Model.) 
No. 482,795, 
- 
H. L. KENT, 
ROCK CRUSHER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 20, 1892, 
2 
W 2 
N 
4- ASA 
Esia ASV, 
R--A-I-PP 
I-A 
 
  
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
2.276-44 
INVENT DR 
74.4% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HORACE L. KENT, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
ROCK- CRUSHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,795, dated September 20, 1892. 
Application filed September 7, 1891, Serial No, 404,975, (No model.) 
To al., whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, HoRACE. L. KENT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Rock-Crushing Machine, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
a simple and powerful machine for crushing 
rock, Ores, and similar substances. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of the machine of my invention, partly 
broken away to show the interior construc 
tion. Fig. 2 is a front elevation with the 
rim cut away. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section, 
line 83, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a transverse verti. 
cal section, partly in elevation, line 44, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
Out the several views. 
In the drawings, A is the main or driving 
shaft of the machine and turns in bearings 
B. B. Said bearings have cast upon them 
the cylindrical slides C C, fitting in recesses 
DD in the frame E. Spiral springs FF bear 
against the ends of the slides CC and are 
adjusted by means of set-screws H H and 
plates G. G. The set-screws II in frame E 
act as adjustable stops for the sliding bear 
ings B. B. The shaft A is driven by a pulley 
J and has keyed or fastened to it the roll K, 
Which turns in space L between the two sides 
of the frame E. Surrounding the roll K is 
a ring or hollow cylinder M. The roll K. 
bears against the inner surface or periphery 
of the ring M, and against the outer surface 
of said ring are placed friction-rolls N N N, 
fixed to shafts OOO, turning in bearings 
on frame E, said bearings being provided 
With packingff to keep out the dust, which 
in machines of this class is excessive, and 
without this packing said dust would pass 
Out of the space L between the frames and 
into the bearings of the shafts, clogging and 
Wearing the latter to a great extent, and thus 
lessening the life of the machine. The mate 
rial to be ground is introduced through the 
Opening P in the frame E. The roll Kturns 
in the direction indicated by the arrow, and 
the material is thus carried forward until it 
is caught between the roll K and the ring M, 
causing the ring to revolve around the roll 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
K, as indicated by the arrow. The rolls NN 
N form a bearing for the ring M to turn upon. 
It is evident that by the combined rotation 
of the roll K and the ring M the material to 
be operated upon will be gripped between the 
two with much greater force than if the ring 
were fixed. After the rock has been ground 
between the roll and ring it falls over the 
sides of the ring into the recesses SS, formed 
in the sides of the frame E, and out at the 
opening T, as indicated by the arrows, Fig. 4. 
It is evident by this arrangement of the exit 
openings SS, immediately adjacent to the 
revolving ring M, that the rock which has 
been crushed falls over the sides of the ring 
immediately into said openings without dan 
ger of clogging the machine, and, further 
more, by this relative arrangement of the 
exit-openings to the ring the necessity of dis 
tributing-fans and the power necessary to 
drive them is done away with. The two sides 
of the frame E are connected by stay-bolts. 
The space L between the frames is inclosed 
by a rim or cover U. By this arrangement 
the frame forms a guide to prevent lateral 
play of the ring M and, in combination With 
the rim or cover U, completely incloses the 
chamber or space L, so that the dust is kept 
confined in the machine. 
It is evident that if any foreign substance 
such as iron-should be introduced between 
the roll and ring the former will be pushed 
back and by the yielding of the springs the 
machine will not be broken. 
By adjusting the screws I in one direction 
or the other the space between the roll Kand 
ring M may be increased or diminished, and 
hence the material in passing through may 
be ground coarse or fine, as desired. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
In a rock-crusher, the combination of the 
roll K, supported in sliding bearings, the re 
volving ring M, and friction-rolls N with the 
frame E, provided with recesses S and the 
cover U, substantially as described, for the 
purposes specified. 
HORACE L. KENT, 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. L. GOODING, 
THOMAS H. SEELY. 
75 
9o 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482896.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 482,896. 
Patented Sept. 20, 
1892, 
E. S. FRAZIER, 
BALL BEARING FOR, VEHICLE WHEELS, 
&z 
SS 2 
SNS N SS 
222222222222222 
al 
SSS S s 3 2 2 e 2 
 
 
 
| | | ! | 
%-26 
- 4%tega 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD S. FRAZIER, OF AURORA, ILLINOIs. 
BALL-BEARING FOR VEHICLE-WHEELs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,896, dated September 20, 1892. 
Application filed March 19, 1892. Serial No. 425,634. (No model.) 
To all whom it inctly c07 C170. 
Be it known that I, EDWARDS, FRAZIER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Au 
rora, in the county of Kane and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Bearings, of which the follow 
ing is a specification, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure i is a central vertical section of a 
whilel-hub, the spindle being inserted in the 
hill); and Fig. 2 is a similar view, the spindle 
being removed. 
Myinvention relates to bearings for wheeled 
vehicles, and more particularly to that class 
known as ball-bearings. 
In ball-bearings as heretofore made it has 
been necessary to remove the balls or to in 
terfere with the adjustment of the bearings 
whenever the hub was remove from the 
spindle, necessitating a frequent adjustment 
of the balls. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
an improved ball-bearing, which shall be spe 
cially adapted for use on sulkies, buggies, 
and other similar wheeled vehicles in which 
the hub may be removed from the spindle 
without exposing the balls of the bearing and 
in which the necessity of readjusting the 
balls at each removal of the spindle will be 
avoided. I accomplish this object as herein 
after specified and as illustrated is the draw 
ings. 
will be pointed 
That which I regard as new 
out in the claims. 
In the drawings, a indicates a hub of a 
wheel, and b an ordinary spindle. 
c indicates the axle-tree, which carries the 
spindle. 
c indicates an axle-collar; which is provided 
at suitable points on its inner surface with 
Yus or nore recesses c', as best shown in Fig.1. 
(; indicates an ordinary nut, for securing 
ti, espithdle in place; in the hub. 
2 indicates a sleeve, which is fitted into the 
l: ; b a, as best shown in Fig. 1, and is pro 
. led with screw - threaded ends to adapt 
to receive larlened steel bushes ff, as 
t; in the lirawings. Tie bushes if f are 
7 roi; it with angular hearing-stir 
}, twin, at the ength oth sieve 
. 
 
70 
55 
e is such that the bushes ff' will be incased 
in the hub. 
g indicates a sleeve, which is of sufficient 
size to receive the spindle b and to fit into the 
sleevee. The sleeve g is about of the same 
length as the spindleb, and is screw-threaded 
at its ends to receive collars l, h", as shown, 
The collarsh h' are of hardened steel, and are 
provided with beveled or conical bearing-sur 
faces i i", as shown. 
j indicates a number of hardened steel 
balls, which are placed in the space between 
y bearings ii' and the respective bushes 
kindicates one or more lugs or pins, which 
project from the outer surface of the collars 
l', and are adapted to fit into the recesses c' 
in the axle-collarc", as shown in Fig.1. By 
screwing the collarsh h' upon the sleeve 
they may be set up to take up wear, or they 
may be removed, when desired, to gain access 
to the balls i. 
It is evident that it is immaterial whether 
the lugs k are formed on the collarh and the 
recesses c' in the axle-collar, or vice versa, as 
the operation will be the same in either case. 
When the wheel revolves, the collar g will 
be held stationary by the engagement of the 
in tile recesses c', and the hub will 
lugs 
turn upon the balls.j. When it is desired to 
remove the wheel from the spindle, by un 
screwing the nut d the spindle may be with 
drawn from the sleeveg, which will be held in 
place in the hub by means of the collarsh, J. 
By this construction the sleeveg will always 
retain its place in the hub unless one or both 
collarshl' are removed and the adjustmeat, 
of the balls will always remain the same un 
less the collars h h' are moved upon the 
sleevey. 
Insteal of balls i suitable rollers may be 
used. 
That which I claim as my invention, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a hub, of busies 95 
fif', a sleeve g, having collars li l', and balls 
interposed between the collars i l ind to 
bushes if', substantially as described. 
2. he coinlination, with a vil: eel-lui, of a 
in oil-ri tary cylindrical sleeve ( ; which tie : 
75 
9.) 
{ 
O 
3O 
3 s 
45 
s s 
 
2 . . 
482,896 
hub revolves, ball-bearings located at oppo 
site ends of the sleeve, and collars secured to 
the ends of the sleeve and adjustable there 
upon for the purpose of retaining the sleeve 
5 in position and preventing its displacement 
when the hub is removed from the axle-spin 
.dle, substantially as described. 
3. The combination, with a hub having a 
sleeve e and bushes ff, of a sleeve g, having 
collars, h. h. adjustably secured thereon, and IO 
balls interposed between said collars and the 
bushes.ff', substantially as described. 
EDWARD S, FRAZIER, 
Witnesses: - 
s 
JoHNL. JACKSON, 
RALPH WAN DYKE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US482996.txt	m (No Model.) 
R. H. DACUS 
STIRR UP. 
No. 482,996, 
Patented Sept. 20, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
if 
 
A 
 
WITNESSES : 
247C2724.4% 
w 
f WVENTOR 
7 1. 4a e-o-1 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ROBERT H. DACUS, OF DARDANELLE, ARKANSAS, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF 
AND REUBEN E. COLE, OF SAME PLACE. 
st RRUP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 482,996, dated September 20, 1892. 
Application filed May 21, 1892, Serial No. 433,827, (No model.) 
To all whom it may conce77: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT H. DACUS, of 
Dardanelle, in the county of Yell and State of 
Arkansas, have invented a new and useful 
5 Improvement in Wooden Stirrups for Riding 
Saddles, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
This invention consists in an improvement 
in that portion of a Wooden stirrup for riding 
Io saddles which includes the bar that receives 
under or around it the leather strap by which 
the stirrup is suspended from the side of the 
saddle, substantially as hereinafter described, 
and more specifically pointed out in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a view in perspective 
20 of a wooden stirrup for riding-saddles em 
bodying my invention; Fig. 2, a top or plan 
view of the same, and Fig. 3 a vertical sec 
tion of the upper portion of the stirrup upon 
the irregular line 33 in Fig. 2. 
A indicates the main portion or body of the 
wooden stirrup. Iarrange the Suspension-bar 
B, under or around which the leather strap C, 
that connects it with the side of the saddle, 
passes, to run parallel with and intermediately 
3o of the sides of the stirrup or in line with the 
opening in orthrough the stirrup for the entry 
of the foot, so that the suspension-strap C in 
passing from the saddle down to the stirrup 
does not require to be twisted, but lies 
35 smoothly by the horse's side. Said strap will 
25 
4O 
45 
also press evenly upon the barB from one end 
of it to the other, thereby causing both the 
leather strap and the bar to wear evenly. 
Furthermore, the suspension-bar B is made or 
provided with transverse end or head pieces 
B' B', arranged between and bracing the op 
posite cheeks or sides of the stirrup at its top, 
and through which two boltsDD, one through 
each endorhead piece, pass to firmly unite or 
tie Said head-pieces and connect suspension 
bar to the sides of the stirrup, and a strip E 
of metal passes from one bolt to the other on 
each side of the stirrup, which makes it al 
most or wholly impossible for the cheeks of 
the stirrup or the suspension-bar to split, 5o 
The suspension-bar B and transverse head 
pieces B B may be made either of wood or 
metal and preferably integral with one an 
other, or all in one piece. 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A stirrup A, provided within its upper end 
With the suspension-bar B, parallel with its 
sides, and having cross-bars B'B' at its ends 
and spacing the sides of the stirrup a proper 
distance apart, and securing bolts or rods D, 
extending through thesides of the stirrup and 
longitudinally through the said cross-bars B', 
Substantially as set forth. 
Having thus described my invention, what 55 
ROBERT H. DACUS. 
Witnesses: 
H. BERNARD, 
T. J. BOYCE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483096.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 483,096, 
 
F. BLAUSS. 
BLIND STOP, 
Patented Sept. 20, 1892. 
WITNESSES 
C-4400- 
/66. e-A. e6-gs 
Y 
NVENTOR 
-4; an/ 47%e243 
(%22&? 24 ATTORNEY 
BY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FERDINAND BLAUSS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BLIND STOP, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 483,096, dated September 20, 1892. 
Application filed March 29, 1892, Serial No. 426,978, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
The legs DD will reach the opposite side 
Be it known that I, FERDINAND BLAUSS, a 
when the spring A, with its curve on the end 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
of slat C, will force the toes E E down the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
side of frame B, as shown in Fig. 2, at the 
vented what I term a Self-Supporting Adjust 
same time holding the slat as may be desired. 
able Blind-Stop, of which the following is a 
Having described my invention, what I 
full, clear, and exact description. 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Reference is to be had to the accompany 
Patent, is 
ing drawings and specification. 
A blind-stop formed from a single plate of 
Figures 1 and 2 show the inside and outside metal, curved as at XY, for the purpose de 
of the shutter. Fig. 3 shows the blind-stop, 
scribed, and provided with recess F to receive 
A being the spring and main body. 
the pivot of the slat, legs D D to extend to 
XY give the approximate curve, and G. G. 
the opposite edge of the shutter, and toes E 
show the points at the entrance of the recess 
E to take over said edge of the shutter, sub 
F turned under, so as not to interfere with 
stantially as described. 
the slat C when passing the opening at F. 
Fig. 1 will show the stop A passed in be 
tween the frame B and the end of slat C in 
such a manner that the recess F, Fig. 3, will 
straddle the pivot at the end of the slat C. 
FRANK BALLER, 
THOMAS GRIMM. 
25 
IO 
Witnesses: 
FERDIN AND BLAUSS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483197.txt	(No Model.) 
A. ZALUD. 
REFLECTOR. 
 
No. 483,197. 
Patented Sept. 27, 1892, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ww. 
ALBERT ZALUD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO ANDREW 
J. ERHART, OF SAME PLACE. 
REFLECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 483,197, dated September 27, 1892. 
Application filed August 31, 189l, Serial No. 404,30l., (No model.) 
A recess h is made in the top of the reflec- 4o 
Io to make and use the Salme. 
I5 which will greatly increase the quantity of 
varied in many ways that might suggest them- 55 
5 invented certain new and useful Improve- 
To old, whom, it noty CO720ern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERTZALUD, a citizen tor to allow hot air to escape from the interior 
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in for the purpose of overcoming danger of break 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have age from expansion of heated air. 
With my device thus constructed and ap 
ments in Reflectors; and I do hereby declare plied to a double burner it will be seen that 45 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de- lateral rays of light from each flame are tan 
scription of the invention, such as will enable gentially reflected away from the reflector, as 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains denoted by lines, and the quantity of light 
greatly augmented. It will also be seen that 
. This invention is intended for gas-brackets, in addition to having the rays reflected lat- 5o 
and more particularly to double gas-burners. erally a portion of them are reflected down 
The object to be accomplished is to provide wardly and upwardly, thereby more perfectly 
a simple, cheap, and convenient arrangement diffusing and increasing the light. 
It is evident that my invention could be 
lateral rays of light. 
With this object in view my invention con- to a skilled mechanic. Therefore I do not limit 
sists in the peculiar features and combina- myself to the exact construction herein shown, 
tions of parts more fully described hereinaf- but consider myself entitled to allisuch varia 
tions as come within the spirit and scope of 
represents an end elevation of my invention; 
Having thus described my invention, what 
Fig. 2, a vertical section on line XX, Fig. 1; I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Fig. 3, a transverse section. 
The combination of a pair of gas-burners 
bracket or burner, such as C. Midway be- located in close proximity to each other, an 65 
upwardly-projecting pin between the burners, 
tween the burner-tips b is located a pin c. 
The reflector consists of a hollow circular and a vertical reflecting-disk provided with a 
disk having concavo-concave reflecting sides transverse recess to fit over the burner-pipe, 
go d and a flat periphery e, all made of an in- and a vertical socket to receive the pin, as 
tegral piece of glass. The inside of the disk set forth. 
is silvered, and the lower partis provided with 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
a transverse recess f for the reception of the presence of two witnesses. 
burner-bracket a and a vertical recessf' for 
35 the reception of the pin c, by which means 
the reflector is securely held onto the bracket 
and in the proper equidistant position be 
tween the gas-jets, as more clearly shown in 
Fig. 3. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 my invention. 
25 My device is applicable to any double gas 
Witnesses: 
WACLAF OPELKA, 
JOSEF KAMDLIK. 
2o ter, and pointed out in the claim. 
Patent, is 
6c 
o 
ALBERT ZALUD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483297.txt	 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 483,297. 
J. BOOTH 
SPINNING RING, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1892. 
VVTNESSES: 
49. Are?v 
252.2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BOOTII, OF CENTRAI, FALLS, RHODE ISLAND. 
SPN N N G, RNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 483,297, dated September 27, 1892. 
Application filed April 8, 1892, Serial No. 428,297, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN BooTH, of Cen 
tral Falls, in the county of Providence and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Spinning 
Egs, of whichr the following is a specifica 
O. 
My invention has relation to rings and 
trayelers employed in ring-spinning frames; 
and it has for its object the provision of im 
provements which will greatly lessen the 
amount of wastage in the breaking down of 
ends, resulting from worn-out travelers slip 
ping off the rings, greatly enhance the dura 
bility or life of the traveler, lessen the neces 
Sary Weight of the traveler, avoid the break 
age of rings, and enable the traveler to be 
more readily and quickly applied to the ring 
than the same can be done with rings as com 
monly constructed. . 
In the practice of the art of ring-spinning 
prior to my invention the traveler has gener. 
ally been applied to the ring by springing it 
Over the flange of the latter, and in the case 
of large rings and heavy travelers it neces 
sitated a blow of a mallet or other instrument 
upon the traveler in order to spring it over 
the flange. This mode of applying the trav 
eler to the ring rendered it necessary that the 
Steel out of which the traveler was made 
should be quite soft, so that it should have 
high resilient properties, as otherwise it 
could not be sprung and given the desired 
bearing upon the flange of the ring. The 
necessarily soft character of the traveler ren 
dered it susceptible of rapid wear and made it 
short-lived, so that in use it soon became so 
Worn as to be pulled or slip from the flange 
of the ring, with the result of breaking down 
ends and causing serious wastage. In cases 
where the traveler was sprung upon the ring 
by the blow of a mallet it not infrequently 
happened that the ring was broken. 
In cases where it has been proposed to-con 
struct the ring on the traveler so that the lat 
ter might be easily applied to the ring it has 
been found to invariably pull off with greater 
frequency than where sprung upon the ring, 
thus aggravating the mischief or damage re 
sulting from travelers leaving their rings, 
ly my improvement the objections men 
tioned are entirely overcome and several in 
55 
65 
portant advantages are gained, the said im 
provement consisting in cutting away or re 
ducing the ring at a suitable point in the cir 
cumference of the ring, either in the neck or 
vertical wall of the ring or in the edge or base 
of the flange, just sufficient to allow the trav 
eler to be placed upon the ring at such point 
without appreciably spreading the traveler 
and to become locked upon the ring after 
passing in either direction beyond such point, 
all as will more fully appear hereinafter. 
Reference is to be had to the annexed draw 
ings, and to the letters marked thereon, form 
ing a part of this specifiation, the same let 
ters designating the same parts or features, 
as the case may be, wherever they occur. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a spinning-ring and traveler, showing 
my improvement, Fig. 2 is a vertical central 
sectional view of a reversible ring held in a 
ring-holder, illustrating the mode of applying 
a traveler to a ring constructed in accordance 
with my invention. Fig. 3 is a sectional view 
through a ring, showing the position of the 
traveler with respect to the ring in the oper 
ation of spinning. Fig. 4 is a plan view of a 
modified form of the invention. 
In the drawings, a designates a spinning 
ring provided with the usual flanges or lipsb. 
c is the traveler, which may be of the ordi 
nary loop form, the ends d projecting inward 
on a substantially straightline, so as to afford 
a bearing of sufficient extent on the under 
surface of the lips b. 
e designates a point where the ring is re 
duced or cut away to an extent sufficient to 
permit the traveler to be placed over the 
flange of the ring without springing or spread 90 
ing the ends apart, as is indicated in Fig. 1 
and at the left in Fig. 2. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 the reduced point is shown 
as a groove made in the neck of the ring di 
rectly below the outside lip, while in Fig. 4 it 
is shown as formed by cutting away a portion 
of the outer lip. Either of these forms or any 
other suited to the purpose will fall within 
the scope of my invention, the essential fea 
ture of which is the reduction of the ring at a 
suitable point where it will not interfere with 
the operation of the traveler, so that the lat 
ter may be applied to the ring without spread 
ing or opening the same or springing it there 
75 
95 
Od 
. -1 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
 
So 
 
2 
483,297 
IO 
over, and so that after the traveler passes this 
reduced point in either direction it will be 
come locked upon the ring and cannot be re 
moved without being considerably spread. 
By this means I am enabled to make travel 
ers of the greatest hardness, so as to be capa 
ble to a maximum extent of resisting wear 
and without any liability of breaking, them 
or the ring in their application to the latter. 
By enhancing the wearing properties of the 
traveler I am enabled to effect a substantial 
saving not only in rings and travelers them 
selves, but in wastage resulting from the 
breaking down of ends by reason of worn 
out travelers slipping from their rings. I am 
furthermore enabled to make travelers of 
other material than metal-such, for exam 
ple, as glass and other vitreous and very hard 
substances-reducing the friction and wear 
of both the traveler and the ring. 
It will be understood that my invention 
contemplates the reduction or cutting away 
of the ring at a point in its circumference, so 
as to permit the traveler to be applied at such 
point, the ring being enlarged in its circum 
ference beyond such point, so that the trav 
eler becomes locked after it passes in either 
direction beyond such point. With this con 
35 
structioti, in addition to what has already 
been said, the full strength of the ring is prer 3 
served and there is no liability of the trav 
eler pulling off or leaving the ring, as would 
be the case if the ring were reduced through 
out its circumference. 
Having thus described my invention and 
explained a way of constructing and using 
the same, though without attempting to set 
forth all of the forms in which it may be made 
or all of the modes of its employment, I de 
clare that what I claim is 
A spinning-ring having a point in its cir 
cumference at which it is reduced orcutaway 
to permit the traveler to be applied without 
spreading, the ring beyond such reduced or 
cut-away point being of normal or enlarged 45 
size, whereby the traveler may become locked 
on the ring after passing the reduced point, 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 2d day of 
April, A.D. 1892. 
40 
JOIN BOOTII. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR W. CROSSLEY, 
A. D. IARRISON. 
ri 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483397.txt	(No Model.) 
APPARATUS FOR COOLING WATER IN THE MANUFACTURE OF ICE, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1892. 
No. 483,397, 
A, SMITH, 
 
m 
III 
it 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
WITNESSES 
& ss/c/ 
-64 esse ( ) 
 
RS 
INVENTOR: 
BY 43.4% 
-46s. f6 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT SMITH, OF COLORADO SPRINGS, COLORADO. 
APPARATUS FOR cooling WATER IN THE MANUFACTURE OF ICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 483,897, dated September 27, 1892. 
Application filed March 10, 1892, Serial No. 424,407, (No model.) 
To all whom it may conce7n 
Beit known that I, ALBERT SMITH, of Colo 
rado Springs, in the county of El Paso and 
State of Colorado, have invented certain new 
and useful. Improvements in Apparatus for 
Cooling Water in the Manufacture of Ice, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The invention relates to a means for cooling 
and filtering the water from which ice is to 
be made preliminary to delivering the water 
to the freezing-cans. 
The invention consists in the novel features 
hereinafter particularly described, and de 
fined in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawing, forming a part of this specification, 
in which the figure represents in elevation 
that portion of an ice-making apparatus to 
which the invention relates, parts being shown 
in vertical section. 
The storage-tank A receives its supply of 
water from any suitable source, as from the 
delivery-pipe B of a pump C, and in this tank 
A, I precipitate by suitable chemicals any 
solid or foreign matter that may be in the 
water, a pipe b being provided at the bottom 
for allowing the settled dirt, &c., to escape 
when desired. 
From the tank A a pipe D leads to a cool 
ing-tank E, a filter D' of any suitable con 
struction being arranged in connection with 
pipe D between the tanks A and E, and from 
the tank E the water is delivered by a pipe 
F to the usual cans (not shown) in the freez 
ing-tank, a filter F being arranged in con 
nection with said pipe F. The cooling-tank 
E has a coil G, which is supplied with brine 
from the freezing-tank G' by a pump (not 
shown) or other means for cooling the water 
surrounding such coil. A vertical shaft H is 
55 
also arranged in tank E and carries radial 
agitating-blades H, preferably in the form of 
propeller-blades, the same being so disposed 
as to cause an upward current of the Water. 45 
This agitator-shaft may be driven and Sup 
ported in any suitable manner, the arrange 
ment shown being merely for the purpose of 
showing the application of the invention. 
The top E' of the cooling-tank is closed air- 5o 
tight, and at its upper end is a stuffing-box e 
for the shaft H. The arrangement is such 
that as the agitator is slowly revolved the 
water will be gently agitated, so as to more 
thoroughly subject it to the action of the 
cooling-coil G and also better enable it to give 
off its air, the air-bubbles disengaging them 
selves as the water is successively moved up 
ward. From the upper end of the tank E a 
pipe Eleads to a vacuum-pump I, of any ap 
proved form, which exhausts the air from 
above the water in the tank, whereby the wa 
ter will be practically freed from air before 
passing to the cans. By this means, also, the 
water will be freed from impurities and will 
have its temperature reduced preparatory to 
being delivered to the cans. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
In an ice-making apparatus, the combina 
tion, with the water-cooling tank E, of the 
agitator consisting of the vertical rotatable 
shaft H, having radial blades H', the brine 
conducting coil G, surrounding said agitator, 75 
and the vacuum-pump connected with the top 
of the cooling-tank, as shown and described. 
ALBERT SMITH. 
65 
Witnesses: 
ELLIS L, SPACKMAN, 
EUSTACE SUMNER, 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483498.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MULLALY & L. L. BULL00K. 
SURFACE PRINTING PLATE. 
No. 483,498, 
Patented Sept. 27, 1892. 
YSsss, 
e44a.s.o. 
NSWNNs, 
a 27.4 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN MULLALY AND IOTIIROP L. BULLOCK, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
SURFACE PRINTNG PLATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 483,498, dated September 27, 1892. 
Application filed February 20, 1892, Serial No. 422,308, (No model.) 
Io 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN MULLALY and 
LOTHROP L. BULLOCK, citizens of the United 
States, residing in the city, county, and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Surface - Printing 
Plates, of which the following is a description 
sufficient to enable others skilled in the art 
to which the invention appertains to make 
and use the same. 
Our invention relates to what is known in 
the art as surface-printing, in which the 
design is imposed on a flat surface, and is an 
improvement upon the invention set forth in 
our concurrent application, Serial No. 352,341, 
filed May 19, 1890, in which we claim a print 
ing-plate having a surface of substantially 
pure aluminium, upon which a design is 
placed. 
The object of our present invention is to ren 
der our aluminium printing-plate more close 
and uniform in structure when desirable, 
since, owing to the absorbent qualities of the 
substantially - pure aluminium, inequalities 
and variations in structure and density some 
times occur in the plates which render the 
surface less uniform than is desirable in cer 
tain classes of work. Our design is to im 
prove the aluminium printing-plate in this re 
spect without interfering objectionably with 
the porosity of the aluminium surface, the 
utilization of which renders our metallic plate 
practically available for use in the art of sur 
face-printing. 
We have fully demonstrated that a print 
ing-surface of substantially-pure aluminium, 
When uniform and continuous in structure, is 
entirely practicable and successful, possess 
ing many advantages over other printing 
plates and surfaces heretofore used, the only 
difficulty experienced being in the production 
of plates of uniform texture throughout, and 
it is the main object of our present invention 
to overcome this objection. This we accom 
plish by and our invention consists in com 
bining with the aluminium a small propor 
tion of denser metal-such as silver, copper, 
tin, or other suitable metal-which will form 
an alloy with the aluminium and by increas 
ing its density reduce its porosity within cer 
tain limits. For instance, we have found 
that a small percentage of silver added to the 
aluminium used in the preparation of the 
plate improves its character and insures a 
more perfect continuity of structure and sur- 55 
face, better adapted to the finer grades of sur 
face-printing. 
An incidental feature of our invention is 
the fact that the plate by our present inven 
tion may be graded or regulated in porosity 6o 
with relation to the character of the design 
to be imposed thereon, a finer grade of plate 
being available for the more delicate designs, 
while plates of coarser texture are adapted to 
coarser designs. The percentage of the other 65 
metal added to the aluminium is very small 
in any case, the aluminium predominating. 
One or two per cent, of silver or other metal 
of greater density than the aluminium is suf 
ficient to perceptibly affect and lessen the 7c. 
porosity of the plate, and a very slight per 
centage over and above that which is sufficient 
to produce the desired degree of density and 
porosity is sufficient to destroy the usefulness 
of the plate for surface-printing. 
The drawing represents a flat-surface-print 
ing plate A, made according to our invention, 
and having a design a -imposed upon it by 
the usual means resorted to in the art of Sur 
face-printing. 
The treatment and manipulation of the 
plates with the design imposed thereon may 
be substantially the same as set forth in our 
prior application for patent, hereinbefore re 
ferred to. 
We do not seek to cover, broadly, a surface 
printing plate formed of an alloy of alumini 
um and denser metal, as We are aware that 
a comparatively-small percentage of alumini 
um has been added to larger quantities of 9o 
other metals for the purpose of producing a 
surface that would meet the requirements of 
surface-printing. In such cases the propor 
tion of aluminium has been so small that the 
absorbent qualities of the aluminium itself 95 
were not utilized, and it was simply used to 
improve the homogeneity of a compound plate, 
in which other metals largely predominated. 
It is obvious that instead of a single metal 
Small percentages of more than one other Ioo 
metal may be added to the aluminium, if de 
sired, provided the aggregate of such metals 
8c 
75 
85 
- 
2O 
25 
so 
as 
40 
45 
 
2 
483,498 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
I5 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
is insufficient to destroy the porosity of the 
aluminium. 
The herein-described plate for use in sur 
In our improved plate the aluminium pre- 
dominates so largely that the plate is to all face - printing, consisting of not less than 
5 intents and purposes one of aluminium in ninety per cent. of aluminium alloyed with 
which the porosity and density are modified by denser metal and having any suitable design 
so small a proportion of other metal that the imposed upon its surface, substantially as de- 20 
physical or chemical qualities of the latter scribed. 
are practically destroyed or neutralized. 
Io Our improved plate contains at least ninety 
per cent. of aluminium, and we do not herein 
seek to cover an alloy containing less than 
that amount. 
JOHN MULLALY. 
LOTHROP. L. BULLOCK. 
GEORGE WILLIAM MIATT, 
D. W. GARDNER. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483598.txt	(No Model.) 
M. N. BRAY & E. M. POPE, 
RIVET SETTING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 483,598, 
Patented 00t. 4, 1892, 
f 
O 
p TA 
/ 
y 
Sh 
2 
2 
N. 
n 
a 
s 
W N // % ZS 
2 
a 
a. 
Sa 
N SW, 
R 
m 
N 
A SS 
n 
s 
AS D 
SS W 
7 
 
 S  
. 
N 
R R 
H 
H 
YNNE 
I 
s 
III. 
r 
H 
a 
Sa 
SV 
 
 
 
EH 
 
Witnesses: 
lUallah, ). Jean land. 
ce-et-e 
'77 
 
len W. Bray, 
Eacentors: 
fift, 
uy2,2A4 
Aitorney. 
(No Model.) 
No. 483,598. 
M. N. BRAY & E. M. POPE. 
RIVET SETTING MACHINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 4, 1892. 
  
  
2 
SN 
S. S 
 
 
IHIH 
 
Witnesses: 
Wallat. Sowland 
C4 a-lace s de/e-22 elev- 
inventors 
El 
userett M.Pope, 
by '''TA. 
-- -/ittorney. 
 
M. N. BRAY & E. M. POPE." 
RIVET SETTING MACHINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Oot. 4, 1892, 
(No Model.) 
No. 483,598, 
 
  
DH 
 
 
 
Sis 
Witnesses: 
Uatal (i. d 
CA-6ee 8. le? 7-1/ 
d 
--- 
 
len W. 
Anaenitors: 
y 
X: 
/ittorney. 
b J%r? - o/- 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
48 
MELLEN N. BRAY, OF BROOKLINE, AND EVERETT M. POPE, OF QUINCY, 
MASSACHUSETTS; SAID POPE ASSIGNOR TO SAID BRAY. 
RIVET. SETTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 483,598, dated October 4, 1892, 
Application filed December 7, 1891, Serial No. 414,230, (No model.) 
Tool, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, MELLEN N. BRAY, of 
Brookline, and EVERETTM. POPE, of Quincy, 
in the county of Norfolk and State of Mas. 
sachusetts, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Rivet-Setting Machines, 
of Which the following, taken in connection 
With the accompanying drawings, is a specifi 
cation. 
Our invention relates to rivet-setting ma 
chines, and is an improvement upon the ma 
chine described in the Letters Patent No. 
441,388, granted to ourselves and Albert H. 
Taber November 25, 1890; and it consists in 
certain novel features of construction, ar 
rangement, and combination of parts, which 
will be readily understood by reference to the 
description of the drawings, and to the claims 
hereinafter given, and in which our invention 
is clearly pointed out. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a side elevation 
of a machine embodying our invention. Fig. 
2 is a sectional elevation of the same, the cut 
ting plane being on line 11 on Fig. 1 and 
Viewed in a direction at right angles to the 
upper portion of said line. Fig. 3 is a plan 
of the hopper and the chute, with the cover 
of the hopper removed and said hopper placed 
in a horizontal position. Fig. 4 is a section 
of a portion of the hopper-bottom on line 22 
On Fig. 8. Fig. 5 is a vertical section through 
the hopper-supporting stand, the hopper-op 
erating shaft, and the bolt for attaching the 
chute to the goose-neck, and showing the 
gOOSe-neck, the setting-spindle, the operating 
lever, and the cam and crank for oscillating 
the hopper-operating shaftin elevation. Fig. 
6 is a central vertical section of the anvil, the 
pocket-carrying sleeve, and a small portion 
of the nose of the goose-neck, and showing 
one jaw of the rivet-receiving pocket in inside 
Fig. 7 is a sectional plan of the 
elevation. 
pocket. Fig. 8 is an inverted plan of the 
Same. Fig. 9 is an inside elevation of the 
pocket-jaw opposite to that shown in Fig. 6. 
Fig. 10 is a sectional plan of the same de 
tached from its opposing jaw. 
In the drawings, A is the base-plate of the 
machine-head, fitted to be mounted upon a 
column or a bench, as may be preferred, and 
having formed in one piece therewith the 
goose-neck A", in the front end of which is 
fitted so as to be movable vertically therein 
the setting-plunger B, connected by the link 
or stirrup C to the frontend of the operating 
lever D, pivoted to ears A, projecting up 
ward from the goose-neck A', and having 
pivoted to its rear end one end of the rod E, 
the opposite end of which is connected to a 
treadle, (not shown in the drawings, but 
mounted upon the base of the supporting 
column or a stand secured to the floor) all in 
a well-known manner. 
F is the clinching-anvil, set in the front 
end of the base-plate A and adjustable there 
in in a well-known manner, 
Gis a stand secured to theside of the goose 
neck A" and having bolted to its outer end 
the hopper-supporting wheel-like stand H, in 
clined toward the setting-anvil and provided 
with the downwardly-projecting arms Hand 
H, in bearings in which is mounted the hori 
zontal shaft I, upon which are firmly secured 
the two collars a, and b and the crank J, all 
as shown in Fig. 2. 
The crank J has set in its movable end the 
stud or crank pin c, upon which is mounted 
so as to be revoluble thereon the truck c', 
which fits into and is acted upon by the path 
d in the cam-plate K, said plate K being firmly 
secured to or formed in one piece with the 
plunger-operating lever D and movable about 
the fulcrum of said lever therewith. The 
path d is made of such a form that a single 
complete upward or downward movement of 
the lever D and said cam will cause a move 
ment of the shaft I and its crank Jin two op 
posite directions. 
The shaft I has mounted loosely thereon 
between the collars a, and b the bevel gear 
wheel L, the hub of which is surrounded by 
a band or hoop of leather or other suitable 
frictional material e, around which is placed 
the flexible metal strap L', the two ends of 
which are connected together and to the ear 
a', projecting from the collar a, by the clamp 
ing-screw a, by means of which any desired 
degree of friction may be obtained between 
said shaft I and the gear-wheel L. Disks of 
leathere'e' are placedon said shaft I between 
the ends of the hub of said gear-wheel Land . 
the collars a, and b, as shown in Fig. 2. 
O 
20 
25 
35 
49 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
ICO . 
483,598 
 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
IIo 
II5 
I25 
O 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
M is the hopper, in which the rivets to be 
set are placed in bulk, said hopper being in 
the form of a shallow circular receptacle hav 
ing a flat bottom and fitted to a bearing in 
the circular rim of the stand H, so that it may 
be intermittently rotated therein by means of 
the short shaft N and the beveled gear-wheel 
O, the teeth of which engage with the teeth of 
the gear-wheel L, said hopper being coupled 
to the upper end of said shaft N by means of 
a spline-groove and a key, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The shaft N is made in the form of a tube 
and has fitted to its bore the spindle f, which 
has formed upon or secured to it the collarif' 
to rest upon the upper end of said shaft N 
and the central portion of the hopper-bottom, 
and also has formed thereon or secured there 
to above said collar the radial arms g g, said 
spindle, collar, and radial arms being held in 
a fixed position, while the hopper, its shaft, 
and the gear O are intermittently revolved 
by means of the pin h, which passes through 
the arm H and the lower end of said spindle, 
all as shown in Fig. 2. 
in the patent before cited was shown a hop 
per having the same general form as above 
described, in the bottom of which was formed 
a series of radial slots to receive the shanks 
of the rivets, and from which they were dis 
charged into the chute to be conveyed to the 
pocket beneath the setting-plunger. 
We have found by actual test that the riv 
ets can be more certainly and readily ar 
ranged in rows in quantities to more surely 
supply the demand by forming a series of 
such slots i in the bottom M' of the hopper, 
arranged tangentially to a circle concentric 
to the axis of said hopper, and beveling a sec 
tion of the hopper-bottom contiguous to each 
of said slots, upon the side thereof toward 
which the hopper intermittently rotates, as 
shown at in Figs. 3 and 4. 
The hopper M has formed upon its exterior 
a series of ratchet-teeth j, with which the 
stop-pawl k engages to prevent backward 
rotation of said hopper, except to the extent 
of the amount of excess of forward move 
ment that may be imparted thereto at each 
oscillation of the shaft I, said pawl being 
pressed into contact with the toothed por 
tion of said hopper by the spring l, all as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 3. 
Pis an inclined chute or raceway connected 
at its upper end to the hopper-supporting 
stand H and at m to the goose-neck A, its 
lower end being constructed and arranged 
relative to the pocket and the pocket-carry 
ing sleeve, substantially as shown and de 
scribed in said before-cited Letters Patent. 
The two jaws of the rivet-receiving pocket 
R are each provided with nearly one-half of 
a cylindrical chamber n, connected at its up 
per part with a vertical surface o, oblique to 
the line of division between said jaws, sub 
stantially as shown and described in said be 
fore-cited patent; but in order to adapt the 
machine to setting rivets having two prongs 
- 
- 
' 
' 
- 
such, for instance, as are shown and described 
in the Letters Patent Nos. 428,824 and 428,825, 
granted to William C. Bray May 27, 1890 -We 
form below said oblique surfaces an inclined 
abutment or guiding-surface o' at right an 
gles to the line of separation between said 
two jaws, as shown in Fig. 9, and we form a 
throat or outlet p' in the lower end of said 
pocket, that is rectangular in plan and having 
its longest sides parallel to the line of sepa 
ration between the two halves of said pocket, 
as shown in Fig. 8. The upper end of each 
jaw of the pocket R has formed thereon the 
raised segmental rib r in front of the rivet-re 
ceiving chamber, which serves as a stop to ar: 
- rest the outward movement of the outer rivet 
as it is delivered from the chute and compel 
it to drop into the pocket in a perpendicular 
position. The two jaws or halves of the 
pocket R are suspended from the sleeve. S 
by the springs'ss, which are reinforced by 
the springss's', the upper ends of all of which 
springs are clamped to said sleeve by the bolt 
it and the nutt'. 
The sleeve Sismounted loosely on the lower 
end of the setting-plunger B, so as to be mov 
table thereon, is prevented from falling there 
from by the pin u, set in said plunger and 
projecting into the slot u', formed in said 
sleeve, and is made to move with said plun 
ger in either direction during a portion of 
the movement of said plunger by friction 
caused by the pin v, set in said sleeve, with 
its inner end in contact with the plunger, 
against which it is pressed by the spring v', 
substantially as described in the Letters Pat 
ent first herein cited. 
In the operation of our invention when the 
operator places his foot upon the treadle and 
by depressing it raises the rear end of the 
lever D the first part of the upward move 
ment of said lever and the cam-plate K causes 
the crank-lever J to be moved from the posi 
tion shown in full lines to the position shown 
in dotted lines in Fig. 5; but such move 
ment would tend to move the hopper about 
its axis in a direction opposite to that indi 
cated by the arrow on Fig. 3, which move 
ment of the hopper is opposed by the pawl le. 
engaging with a shoulder of one of the ratchet 
teethi, and as a consequence the shaft I will 
be partially rotated in the hub of the gear L 
in spite of the friction of the stop Land the 
interposed hoop of frictional materiale. A 
continuation of the upward movement of the 
lever D above the position indicated by the 
dotted lines in Fig. 5 will cause the crankJ 
and the shaft I to be moved in the opposite 
direction, and as the pawl k then presents no 
resistance sufficient to overcome the friction 
on the hub of the gear I, the hopper M will 
be moved about its axis in the direction in 
dicated by the arrow on Fig. 3 a distance 
equal to the distance between two of the 
ratchet-teethi. The downward movement of 
the lever D repeats these operations-that is, 
the first part of the movement, while it causes 
483,598 
a movement of the crankJ and shaft I about 
the axis of said shaft, no movement of the 
hopper takes place, except to move one of the 
teeth, into contact with the pawl k if the hop 
per in its previous movement has moved more 
than the required angular distance; but dur 
ing the last part of the downward movement 
of said lever the hopper will be moved by fric 
tion an angular distance equal to or slightly 
exceeding the distance between two contigu 
Ous teethi, thus causing a movement of said 
hopper about its axis a certain distance at 
each upward and each downward stroke of 
the lever D, and thereby greatly increasing 
the chances of an ample supply of rivets to 
the chute and the certainty of a rivet always 
being supplied to the pocket for setting when 
required. This desirable end is accomplished 
by the peculiarly-shaped cam-plates K. The 
tangential positions of the series of slots in 
the bottom of the hopper and the beveling of 
the advance or forward sides of said slots 
greatly facilitates the gathering of the rivets 
into said slots, and the inclined abutment or 
guiding-surface o' and the oblong rectangu 
lar outlet p' of the pocket R insure the proper 
presentation and delivery of the rivet to the 
material. 
We claim 
1. In a rivet-setting machine, the combina 
tion, with the setting-plunger and tool and a 
vibrating lever for operating the same, of a 
circular hopper mounted upon an inclined 
shaft, a horizontal shaft provided with a crank 
or lever at one end, suitable gears connecting 
said inclined and horizontal shafts, a cam 
plate connected to and movable with said vi 
brating lever and provided with a cam-slot 
to engage said crank, the upper and lower 
portions of which are inclined in opposite di 
rections, and a friction device interposed be 
tween said crank-lever and said hopper, 
whereby an intermittent movement of said 
hopper about its axis is obtained at each up 
ward and each downward movement of said 
plunger-operating lever. 
2. In a rivet-setting machine, the combina 
tion of the lever D for operating the setting 
plunger, the cam-plate K, connected to and 
movable with said lever and provided with 
the path d, portions of which are inclined in 
two opposite directions, the shaft I, the crank 
J, the collars a, and b, secured on said shaft I, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
the gear-wheel L, mounted loosely on said 
shaft between the collars a, and b, the strap 
L', surrounding the hub of said gear I, the 
band of frictional material e, interposed be 
tween said strap and hub, the ear a',project 
ing from the collara, the bolt a for clamping 
said strap upon said frictional material and 
the hub of the gear L, the gear O, shaft N, 
the hopper M, provided with the ratchet-teeth. 
i, and the pawl k, all constructed, arranged, 
and operating substantially as described. 
3. In a rivet-setting machine, the hopper M, 
provided with the series of tangentially-ar 
ranged slots i, cut through its bottom or that 
portion of the casing which is at right angles 
to its axis of rotation, and a portion of the 
upper surface of the hopper-bottom contigul 
ous to each slot on its forward or advance 
side beveled or inclined toward said slots, as 
at i', the opposite side walls of said slots be: 
ing perpendicular to the inner face of said 
bottom for its entire thickness. 
4. In a rivet-setting machine, a rivet-receiv 
ing pocket composed of two spring-pressed 
jaws, each having formed in its inner face the 
half of a rivet-holding socket with an oblong 
rectangular opening at its bottom and a lat 
erally-inclined surface at the rear of the up 
perpart of said socketanda vertically-inclined 
surface at right angles to the inner faces of 
or the line of separation between said jaws. 
5. In a rivet-setting machine, the combina 
tion, with the anvil and setting-plunger and 
tool of a rivet-setting machine, of the rivet 
receiving pocket R, composed of two Spring 
pressed jaws, each having formed in its in 
ner face the half of a rivet-receiving socket 
in and the oblique surface O and upon its up 
per end the upwardly-projecting segmental 
lip or rib r, and the inclined guiding-surface 
o', arranged at right angles to the inner faces 
of said jaws and abutting against said oblique 
surface o, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 30th day of 
November, A. D. 1891. 
- 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
MELLEN N. BRAY. 
EVERETT M. POPE. 
Witnesses: 
N. C. LOMBARD, 
WALTER. E. LOMBARD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483698.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD F. ROBERTS, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE ROBERTS 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR - H E ATING APPARAT U S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,698, dated October 4, 1892. 
Application filed February 24, 1892, Serial No. 422,720, (No model.) 
I. ? 
??? ?5 
2 ? 
25 
To a ZZ uvhon it nay concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD F. ROBERTS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Co 
lumbus, in the county of Franklin and State 
of Ohio, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Car-Heating Apparatus; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to the heating of cars 
by steam; and its object is the production of 
a simple, cheap, and effective apparatus for 
the complete transfer of the heat of the steam 
Supplied from the train-pipe to the interior 
of the car and the proper ventilation of said 
interior. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
the heater, parts being broken away, and a 
portion of the car-body being shown in sec 
tion. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of one 
of the hollow castings forming the main part 
Fig. 3 is an end view of the 
of the heater. 
heater, showing its arrangement in the car, 
Fig. 4 is a section on line 4 4 of Fig. 1. 
My invention is essentially an improved 
construction to carry out the principle of 
heating described in my pending application, 
Serial No. 419,850. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 is the car-body. 
2 are a number of hollow metal sections, 
preferably of an approximately oval cross 
Section. These I propose to cast, as they can 
be most cheaply produced in that manner. 3 
3 are openings in the ends of these castings, 
tapped out to receive the threaded nipples or 
short connecting-pipes 4, which connect the 
castings together in a series of steam-cham 
bers forming a continuous heater, as shown 
in Fig. 1. For convenience the pipe connec 
tions 4 should be equipped with right and 
left hand threads. The row of castings is 
placed near the floor and near the side of the 
car-body, leaving a space 16 between the in 
ner walls of the castings and the side of the 
car. The space is roofed over by the hori 
Zontal partition 5, so as to form an air-cham 
ber. This partition may be a shelf built out 
from the side of the car, or it may be com 
posed of a number of plates resting on the 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
top of the castings. The drip connection 
10 leads from the lowest point of the heater 
to the drip. (Not shown.) The steam-pipe 
7 is filled with steam from the train-pipe (not 
shown) by the connection 8. This pipe runs 
through the air-chamber 16, helping to heat 
the same, and is connected by the elbows 99 
to the casting at either end of the row. As 
the connections 4 between the various cast 
ings 2 are of much smaller cross-section than 
the said castings, large openings 6 are left 
between the adjacent ends of said castings, 
forming outlets from the air-chamber 16. 
The ends of said chamber are also preferably 
left open, as shown in Fig. 3. 
The fresh air is supplied through openings 
15 in the bottom of the car or through the 
branches 14 of the cold-air pipe 13, which is 
supplied through pipe 12 with air collected 
by hood 11 when the car is in motion. 
The mode of operation of my invention is 
clear from the above description. The steam 
coming through pipe 8 passes along through 
the pipe 7, giving up a portion of its heat to 
the air in the chamber 16. It then works its 
way back through the castings 2, whose outer 
walls will radiate heat directly to the interior 
of the car, while their inner walls will help 
to heat the air passing through chamber 16. 
The water of condensation collects at the 
lowest point of the system and passes off 
through connection 10 to the drip. If desir 
able, pipe 7 could be led back and forth sev 
eral times in the chamber 16, so as to give up 
more of the heat of the steam before it en 
ters the radiator proper. The fresh cold air 
enters the air-chamber 16 through the open 
ings 15 or through the pipes 14, and after be 
ing heated escapes through openings 6 or at 
the ends of the chamber into the car. 
The advantages of the construction are its 
simplicity and cheapness. The simple cored 
out castings 2 is the only thing that requires 
a special pattern. The pipe connections can 
all be made of standard sizes of piping, and 
the partition 5 can be made of a piece of 
sheet-iron. 
Having therefore described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to protect by roo 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a car-heating apparatus, the combina 
95 
75 
- 
 
? 
488,698 
tion of the car-body, two or more hollow cast 
ings arranged near the floor and near the 
side of Said car-body so as to have Open spaces 
between the adjacent ends of said castings, 
Steam connections between said hollow cast 
ings, and connections to the train pipe and 
drip, together with the horizontal partition 
extending from the side of the car-body to 
the top of the hollow castings, whereby a hot 
air chamber is formed behind said castings, 
and a number of fresh-airinlets to said cham 
ber, substantially as described. 
2. In a car-heating apparatus, the combina 
tion of the car-body, a number of hollow cast 
ings arranged in rows near the floor and near 
either side of said car-body so as to leave 
Spaces between the adjacent ends of said 
castings, Steam-tight connections between 
O 
said hollow castings, of much smaller cross 
Section than the castings, a steam-supply pipe 
which runs between the hollow castings and 
the side of the car-body and connects with 
the casting at either end of the row, the out 
let from the center of the row to the drip, and 
the horizontal partition extending from the 
side of the car-body to the top of the row of 
hollow castings, whereby a hot-air chamber 
is formed behind said castings, substantially 
as described. 
Intestimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
EDWARD i F. ROBERTS. 
Witnesses: 
A. L. R.ALSTON, 
C. D. WILLIAMSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483798.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 483,798, 
M. THOENI. 
BAIL EAR FOR BUCKETS, 
Patented 00t, 4, 1892, 
s: 
se 
e 
w 
SS 
Eel 
fYY EE21 
e 
SY2 
in 
, 2 
s 
S 
O 
- 
A. 
l 
W 
l 
N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN THOENI, OF MONTICELLO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TOJAMES MILNE, 
OF SCOTCH GROVE, IOWA. 
BALEAR FOR BUCKETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,798, dated October 4, 1892. 
Application filed March 11, 1892, Serial No. 424,579, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, MARTIN THOENI, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Monti 
cello, in the county of Jones, State of Iowa, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Bail-Ears for Buckets, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
IngS. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in bail-ears for buckets, 
pails, and other vessels, and is designed, pri 
marily, for dairy-pails, where strict cleanliness 
is an essential. 
It has for its objects, among others, to pro 
vide a construction which shall be cheaper, 
stronger, and less liable to breakage, that will 
admit of the employment of different kinds 
of bails to suit the manufacturers, and in which 
there will be no projecting portion to catch a 
cloth, thus rendering it much easier to clean. 
The common ears are objectionable in that 
they project over or above the top of the ves 
sel enough to afford in themselves a strong 
leverage for breaking them off if pushed 
against or subjected to rough usage. Further, 
they are difficult to keep clean, as they are in 
the way of the person cleaning them and apt 
to catch the cloth. My construction avoids 
these objections. Having a broad base with 
upper edge shaped to conform to the shape 
of the vessel makes the latter much stiffer 
and stronger, especially when placed over the 
joint in the wire with which such vessels are 
usually provided. The plate is provided with 
a lateral projection forming a pivot on which 
the bail may turn, the projection being formed 
with a shoulder against which a nut or washer 
may be held without interfering with the easy 
movement of the bail. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear, and the novel fea 
tures thereof will be specifically defined by 
the appended claim. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a portion of 
a vessel with my improvement applied. Figs, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
59 
2, 3, and 4 are perspective views of the parts 
comprising my invention shown separated 
but in their relative positions. Fig. 2 shows 
the plate with its projection; Fig. 3, the ear 
end of the bail, and Fig. 4 the washer, Fig. 55 
5 is a vertical section on the line 55 of Fig. 1. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the several views. 
Referring now to the details of the drawa 
ings by letter, A designates a base or plate, 6o 
the inner face of which is shaped to conform 
to the curvature of the vessel upon which it 
is to be used and is provided with perfora 
tions a for the reception of rivets or other 
means a' employed in securing it to the ves- 65 
sel B. This plate is provided with a raised 
portion A, of sufficient thickness so that when 
the bail is applied, as shown in Fig. 5, the lat 
ter will move in a plane outside the rim B' of 
the vessel. The plate is further formed with 7o 
a boss a beyond the raised portion, and upon 
this boss the loop of the bail C is designed to 
be loosely sleeved. Beyond the shoulder a, 
formed at the outer end of this boss, there is 
a reduced portion a for the reception of a 75 
nut or washer. The distance between this 
shoulder and the outer face of the raised por 
tion should be somewhat greater than the 
thickness of the loop c of the bail, so that 
when the nut or washer is securely affixed in 8o 
position it will bind against the said shoulder 
and not upon the loop of the bail, and thus 
the latter is left free to readily turn on its 
bearing. 
D designates the washer or nut. 
The plate, its raised portion, boss, and re 
duced portion are all formed of one integral 
piece, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The plate is applied, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
5, with its upper edge against the under side 9o 
of the rim of the vessel, the bail applied, and 
then the nut or washer set up. The loop of 
the bail is preferably flattened, as seen in 
Fig. 3, but not necessarily so. 
terial and of any desired size and will serve 
with any required kind of bail. 
The plates may be made of any suitable ma- 95 
85 
What I claim is 
A bail-ear comprising a base-plate adapted 
to fit the body of a vessel and the under sur. Ioo 
3 
488,798 
face of its top, rim, or body and for attach 
ment to said body and provided with a raised 
portion for retaining the bail outside of the 
body of the vessel, a projection forming a 
5 pivot for a bail, and a projection for receiving 
a Washer and serving the function of a rivet, 
the whole constructed of a single piece, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
MARTIN THOENI. 
Witnesses: 
B. M. GAYLOR1), 
FRED KEENAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483898.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 483,898, 
J. H. CAMPBELL. 
RAIL JOINT AND CHAIR, 
Patented 00t. 4, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
2& NS 
 
WITNESSES 
e MoRRis 
N 
INVENTOR, 
BY 
. u/6v. y(6. 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. H. CAMPBELL OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
RAL J O N T AND CHAIR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 483,898, dated October 4, 1892. 
Application filed April 15, 1892. Serial No. 429,283, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOSEPH. H. CAMPBELL, 
of Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented a new and useful 
Rail Joint and Chair, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
rail-joints, and particularly to such as are em 
ployed to join the ends of railroad-track rails, 
the object being to provide a simple, strong, 
and durable joint and chair for rails which 
Will be composed of the fewest number of 
parts possible and be adapted to sustain 
joined rails where united, so as to prevent 
vertical or lateral displacement of the rail 
ends. 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
construction and combination of parts, as is 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side view of two rails broken 
away at one end of each and joined by the 
improved rail connection. Fig. 2 is a side 
view of parts shown in Fig.1 detached. Fig. 
3 is a cross-section on the line 33 in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a cross-section of the device adapted 
to sustain a flat rail, and Fig. 5 is a modified 
form of the chair adapted to sustain another 
style of the flat rail. 
The rails to be joined for the formation of 
a continuous track may be of any suitable 
pattern and weight, either a T or a flat rail. 
At one end b of a rail A an integral shoe or 
chair B is formed by any suitable method, 
which shoe comprises a base-flange a, that is 
projected in advance of the rail end b, the up 
per surface of the base-flange coinciding with 
the plane of the lower face of the rail-base, as 
indicated by a dotted line in Fig. 2. The side 
edge portions of the base-flange C. are return 
bent, so as to produce lip-flanges c, which are 
adapted to permit the sliding introduction of 
the base of another rail end d between them 
and have a close bearing thereon, as repre 
sented in Fig. 3. The form of the lip-flanges 
may also be modified, so as to give a square 
shoulder, if desirable, as at c' in Fig. 5, or the 
base-flange may be left level on the top sur 
face or rabbeted on the edge, as shown at c 
in Fig. 4, to suit the two styles of flat rails A" 
A shown in said figures. Upon the lower 
surface of the base-flange a, near its trans 
verse center, a depending rib e is integrally 
formed, there being coved fillets e' produced 
at the junction - corners, which serve to 
strengthen the parts. 
The rib e is preferably shaped as shown in 
Fig. 2-that is, having greatest depth at a 
point near the end of the rail whereon it is 
formed and extending below the base of said 
rail to insure a proper bond between the base 
flange and rail end from which the flange pro 
jects, the return-bent lip-flanges c or square 
shoulders commencing at the end b of the rail 
A, so that another rail end d not provided 
with the base-flange a may be caused to im 
pinge upon the rail end b, as shown in Fig.1. 
The rail C, which is designed to engage its 
end with the base-flange a, is preferably fur 
nished with an integral fish-plate g, that is 
projected in advance of the rail end d and 
adapted to loosely bear with its adjacent side 
upon the web of the rail. A when the two rails 
are joined. Both holes h are formed in the 
fish-plate g and rail A, which align and form 
continuous passages for bolts that are prefer 
ably employed to preventalongitudinal creep 
ing movement of individual rails. Said bolt 
holes may also be made oblong, if desired or 
when it is not desired to retain the rails in 
rigid connection with each other. 
It will be understood that the ends of track 
rails will be constructed one as shown on rail 
A and the other as represented on rail C, which 
will enable a continuous track to be laid with 
rails having the improvement. 
It is claimed for this invention that the pro 
vision of an integral shoe or chair on one end 
of a track-rail and an integral fish-plate on 
the other end of the rail effects a reduction 
of wearing-joints by lessening their number, 
greater strength being afforded with the same 
weight of metal. Furthermore, the peculiar 
construction of the shoe or chair permits the 
use of a minimum weight of metal to obtain 
the maximum of strength, which is afforded at 
a point where the greatest strain is imposed. 
If desired, integral fish-plates may be placed 
at each end of the rail; but ordinarily this 
will be unnecessary, owing to the peculiar 
construction of this joint connection for rails. 
35 
45 
75 
95 
OC) 
2 
483,898 
35 
erally-formed fish-plate on the other end of 3o 
said rail, substantially as described. 
3. A rail having an integral shoe projected 
longitudinally from one end and comprising 
a base-flange, a rib depending from the base 
flange, and return-bent lip-flanges or Square 
shoulders on the side edges of the base-flange, 
substantially as described. 
4. A rail having an integral shoe projected 
longitudinally from one end and comprising 
a base-flange aligning at its top face with the 
bottom of the track-rail, a rib depending from 
the base-flange and cove-filleted where it joins 
the base-flange, and return-bent lip-flanges or 
square shoulders on the side edges of the base 
flange, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with a track-rail hav 
ing an integral shoe or chair thereon at one 
end adapted to interlock with the base of an 
other track-rail, of a track-rail having an in 
tegral fish-plate thereon at one or both ends 
and adapted to bear on the Web of the end 
of the first-named rail, substantially as de 
scribed. 
40 
45 
JOS. H. CAMPBELL, 
Witnesses: 
C. I. HUMPHREY, 
W. S. BURLING. 
- 
The securing-bolts applied to the fish-plate 
are not subjected to lateral strain, as the lip 
flanges on the integral shoe resistilateral move 
ment of the joint, while the rib on said shoe 
reinforces its base-flange to sustain a heavy 
load; or the fish-plates may be dispensed with, 
if necessary, to accommodate rails of other 
shapes and the shoe only used, or the shoe 
may be dispensed with and the fish-plates 
only used. 
When the improvement is applied to flat 
rails, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5, the integral 
chair B alone is supplied, whereon the end of 
an adjacent rail is imposed and secured with 
screw-bolts a', provided with suitable nuts, as 
shown. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A rail having an integral shoe or chair 
formed longitudinally on one end and project 
ing therefrom to engage the end of another 
rail, the side edges of the shoe base-flange be 
ing return-bent and forming lip-flanges or 
square shoulders which envelop the base 
flanges of said latter-named rail, substantially 
as described. 
2. A rail having an integral return-bent 
flanged shoe on one end and an integral lat 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US483998.txt	(No Model.) 
E. FISCHER. 
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF SAWING MACHINE. 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 483,998, 
Patented 00t, ll, 1892. 
 
 
EA Sea iSa 
t 
33% 
Z722 ezz%: 
-82. Al 
s/2%21st 
(No Model.) 
A. 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
E. FISCHER. 
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF SAWING MACHINE 
No. 483,998, 
 
Patented Oct. 11, 1892, 
- - - 
: 
- - - 
!-----. 
t 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- - 
- 
- 
- 
s 
sea 
. 
-- 
- 
. 
m 
- 
w 
RN 
E. 
m 
Co-C-Oce 
s 
a 
C 
C 
- 
- 
. 
MN 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Z722-e-2229 
. . 
2 %ise4e4/. 
s 
- . 
3. 
s 
W 
O 
- ---- 
a 
; 
; : I' 
.Z.42'22esse-S 
22 912 
2. 2. 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
E. FISCHER. 
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF SAWING MACHINE, 
Patented Oct. 11, 1892. 
 
  
 
 
 
is 
2 CA 
a ASS 
22.SS-Star E 
No. 483,998. 
 
  
 
 
 
in 
SE 
-is is 
 
is Eo Et 
Eps 
storials 
S 
H 
is 
N s 
NM 
n & 
   
 
 
S 
S2 
 
W 
S. 
Z722-ye7224 op-,' 
2 %.se/.e4/, 
(No Model.) 
No. 483,998, 
Patented Oot. 11, 1892. 
E. FISCHER, 
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF SAWING MACHINE, 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
milm. 
III 
  
  
 
 
EEE 
 
a De 
Fl 
: 
I |H 
EEIHEI 
IE 
|HE 
III 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ENGELBERT FISCHER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINois, 
AUTOMATIC CUT OFF SAWING-MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 483,998, dated October 11 1892, 
Application filed March 7, 1891, 
To all vhom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ENGELBERT FISCHER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Automatic Cut-Off Sawing 
Machines, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, that will enable 
others to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
that class of machines used for cutting up 
lumber into any required lengths, and more 
especially light boards or stuff in box-manu 
factories; and the Same consists of certain 
novel features in the construction, arrange 
ment, and operation, whereby the work is 
greatly facilitated, as will be hereinafter set 
forth. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of a machine embodying my improved 
features; Fig. 2, a plan; Fig. 3, a vertical trans 
verse section online33, Fig.1, looking in the 
direction indicated by the arrow, the upper 
part of the main frame and feed-table being 
omitted; Figs. 4 and 5, detached details; Fig. 
6, an enlarged broken-away vertical section 
on line 6, Fig. 2, looking in the direction indi 
cated by the arrow; Fig. 7, a broken-away ele 
vation of the front end; Fig. 8, a broken-away 
rear elevation; and Fig. 9, a Vertical section 
on line 9, Fig. 8. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents 
the different parts of the main frame; A', the 
feed-table; A, the main driving-shaft; A, the 
band-pulley mounted on the end of the driv 
ing-shaft at the left side of the machine. 
The swinging or OScillating Saw-frame con 
sists of the two members B B', connected by 
the cross-bars B* B. The lower ends of the 
members B B are provided with trunnion 
bearings on the stationary sleeves C C, which 
in turn provide suitable journal-bearings for 
the main driving-shaft, as shown in the sec 
tional parts of Fig. 3. The respective ends 
of the saw-arbor C are journaled in the up 
per ends of the swinging members B B', the 
saw C8 being mounted on the outer end of 
said arbor on the right side of the machine. 
Motionistransmitted to the Sawby the belted 
connection C between the pulley C on the 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
o 
75 
Serial No. 384,102 (No model.) 
driving-shaft and the corresponding pulley 
C, mounted on the saw-arbor, Fig. 3, the dot 
tedlines representing the belt. The longi 
tudinal slot C in the feed-table (see Fig.2) 
is the pathway of the saw when in motion. 
The tWO members comprising the automati 
gally-swinging saw-frame have each two pro 
jecting lugs D and D' formed on the front 
side, (see Figs. 1 and 3) which are perforated 
in their outer ends and form bearings for the 
Companion rods D* D, having an endwise 
movement therein. The respective ends of 
the angular track-bars D4D are secured to 
the main framework and present the irregul 
lar tracking-surface a to the wheels a'a', Figs. 
1 and 3, loosely mounted on the stub-axles a 
C, rigidly secured on the rods D2D9. This 
arrangement With the irregular track-surface 
regulates the travel or endwise movement of 
the rods DD with reference to the oscilla 
tion of the Saw-frame. The upper ends of 
these companion rods terminate in the en 
larged heads ca, Fig. 3. These head ends 
are perforated to receive the transverse rod 
D, which is rigidly secured therein by means 
of the set-screws a'. A number of fingers D7 
are loosely mounted on the rod D6 and nor 
mally stand in the position illustrated in 
Figs. 8 and 5 and project up through the se 
lies of slots D in the feed-table, as shown 
in FigS. l and 2. These fingers have a rock 
ing movement on their bearing-rod and are 
provided on their lower ends with a counter 
Weight a, which automatically returns the 
fingers to the position shown in Fig. 1--that 
is, projecting above the feed-table. The col 
lars O', which prevent a longitudinal move 
ment of the series of fingers D, are cut a Way 
at one end and side, as shown in Fig. 4. 
When the fingers are in their normal position, 
the lower corresponding surface af of the 
counter-Weight a will rest against the lower 
shoulder edge a of the cut-away part of the 
Collar, and When rocked on the rod D0 in de 
pressing the fingers below the surface of the . 
feed-table the upper corresponding part a' of 
the counter-Weight will stop against the up 
per shoulder edge a' of the collars, thus con 
fining the movement of the series of fingers 
Within proper Working limits. The series of 
collars a' are adjustably secured on the rod 
D" by the set-screws a, which permits of the 
95 
. 
. 
OO 
483,998 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
55 
same being set in proper relative position 
with reference to the fingers. The purpose 
of these fingers is to remove the cut material 
and push it along until it finally drops off 
from the rear end of the feed-table. 
The sawed stuff is shown in dotted lines in 
Figs. 1 and 2. 
The transverse bar E is bolted to the feed 
table at a point near the front end and is pro 
vided longitudinally on the upper side with 
the groove b, in which is inserted the corre 
sponding part b of the gage-stop E'. This 
provides for the movement of the gage-stop 
along the track-surface of the bar E, and it is 
locked at any point by the hand-screw b. 
To the front side of the gage-stop is pivoted 
or hinged, as at b, the upper edge of the gage 
plate b", as shown in Figs. 1 and 6. This 
gage-plate extends downwardly from its piv 
otal joint and rests loosely against the front 
side of the bar E and stops short of the Sur 
face of the feed-table. This gage-stop gages 
the length of the cut. 
The bar E is provided with a number of re 
cesses or pockets b, (see Fig. 6,) opening 
from the front side. These recesses are in 
the pathway of the different push-fingers, as 
shown in Fig. 2. When the fingers are on 
their backward or return movement and come 
in contact with the piece of lumber being cut 
off, they are depressed in a curved line by 
means of the arrangement described and pass 
underneath the same and the hinged gage 
plate into the recesses in the bar E, where 
they have room to straighten up, and on the 
outward or forward movement clear the gage 
plate by throwing the same upwardly on its 
hinged joint, and, coming in contact with 
the sawed stuff push it away and make room 
for the insertion of the board for the next 
cut. The push-fingers are rigid on their for 
ward movement, but are SO nicely balanced. 
on their carrying-rod that the least obstruc 
tion in their pathway will depress them on 
the back movement. By this construction 
and arrangement the push-fingers have a 
movement coincident with that of the SaW 
and automatically keep the table clear, so that 
the work is done with greater facility than is 
ossible under the Ordinary arrangement. 
The operation of the machine being en 
tirely automatic leaves both hands of the op 
erator free to handle the lumber. 
The mechanism for imparting the auto 
matic swinging movement to the Saw-frame 
and means for controlling the operation of 
the same will now be described. 
The crank-shaft F is located at the rear end 
of the machine, one end being journaled in 
one of the corner-posts of the main frame and 
the other projecting end in the angular 
bracket F. The crank-arm Fis mounted on 
the inner projecting end of the crank-shaft, 
as shown in Figs. 1 and S, the corner-post of 
the main frame being broken away in Fig. 1 
to show the relative arrangement. The rear 
end of the connecting-rod Fis Secured to the 
crank-arm by the pin d. The opposite end 
of this connecting-rod is secured to one of the 
swinging-saw-frame members by the pins d', 
Figs. 1 and 3. The gear-wheel E is mounted 
on the crank-shaft and engages with the pin 
ion d, mounted on the counter-shaft F, lo 
cated below the crankshaft and provided 
with suitable journal-bearings in the main 
frame and the bracket-post F. The friction 
pulley F is also mounted on the counter-shaft 
E, Fig. 8, and is adapted to have frictional 
contact with the smaller companion pulley d, 
mounted on the counter-shaft G. The inner 
end of the counter-shaft G is journaled in the 
adjustable journal-box d', having a vertical 
movement in the inverted-U-shaped bracket. 
d', rigidly bolted to the lower cross-bar of the 
main frame at the rear of the machine. The 
outer end of the shaft G is journaled in the 
corner-post of the main frame on that side 
and has the band-pulley G' mounted on the 
projecting end, as shown in Figs. I and 8. 
The belt d connects the pulley. G' with the 
smaller pulley d", Figs. 1 and 3, mounted on 
the driving-shaft A. By this arrangement 
the required motion is transmitted to the 
Swinging saw - frame and parts, connected 
thereto. 
The vertical lever H is located at the front 
end of the machine and on the right side, 
as shown in Eigs. 1 and 7. This lever is con-. 
nected to the frame by the pivot-bolte. The 
horizontal lever H' along the end of the frame, 
Fig. 7, at right angles to the lever H, is se 
cured to the frame by the pivot-bolte'. One 
end of this lever projects past the lower end 
of the lever H and is adapted to engage with 
the shoulder if, formed thereon. The coun 
ter-weight f on the lever H holds the lower 
end against the horizontal projecting end of 
the lever H, SO as to automatically engage 
with the upper edge when the same is de 
pressed. The opposite end of the lever H is 
connected to the lower end of the vertical 
part of the angle-lever H. The horizontal 
part of the lever Hruns back and has its 
terminal end pivoted to the upper end of the 
link g, the lower end of which is in turn se 
cured to the adjustable journal-box d", as 
shown in Figs. 8 and 9.. g' is the fulcrum 
post for the lever H. The weight his mount 
ed on the lever H at the junction of the ver 
tical and horizontal parts, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 7. By this system of levers the swing 
ing Saw-frame and push-fingers can be in 
stantly stopped or started and are under com 
plete control of the operator. When neces 
sary to stop the Swinging saw-frame, the op 
erator presses with his foot on the step h, 
Figs. I and 8, fastened to the projecting end 
of the lever H', and forces the same down, 
when the lower shouldered end of the vertical 
starting-lever Hautomatically engages with it 
by reason of the counter-weightf' and locks 
the same in its depressed position. This 
movement in turn raises up the vertical end 
of the lever Hand depresses the terminal 
7 o 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
483,998 
55 
65 
75 
4. In a cut-off SaWing-machine, the combi 
nation, with a Swinging saw-frame, of two 
companion endwise-moving rods located on 
opposite sides of said frame, a transverse car 
rying-rod connecting the upper ends of the 
companion rods, a number of push-fingers 
pivotally mounted on the carrying-rod and 
having a forward-and-back movement coinci 
dent with the saw-frame, the feed-table pro 
vided longitudinally with a number of slots 
up through which said fingers project, and the 
transverse bar bolted to the upper side of said 
table, said fingers being rigid on the forward 
movement, but depressed on their return 
movement by coming in contact with said bar 
or other object lying in their pathway, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a cut-off sawing-machine, the combi 
nation of the swinging frame, the curved 
track-rails, the companion endwise-moving 
rods located at each side of said frame, the 
transverse carrying-rod connecting the up-- 
per ends of said companion rods, a unmber of: 
push-fingers having counter-weights on their 
lower ends and loosely mounted on said car 
rying-rod, and a number of collars having 
one end and side cut away, whereby said fin 
gers have a pivotal or rocking movement on 
their bearings, substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with the transverse 
bar provided with a number of recesses or 
pockets, of the gage-stop having a gage-plate 
hinged or pivoted thereto and the push-fin 
gers, substantially as described. 
7. In a cut-off sawing-machine, the combi 
nation, With a Swinging saw-frame, of a num 
ber of push-fingers pivotally connected there 
to and having a coincident movement there 
With, a feed-table provided with a number of 
slots up through which said fingers project, 
a transverse bar provided with a number of 
pockets or recesses, a gage-stop, and a gage 
plate hinged or pivoted thereto, substantially 
as described. 
ENGELBERT FISCHER. 
85 
Witnesses: 
L. M. FREEMAN, 
J. B. DONALSON. 
O 
25 
35 
horizontal end and throws the small friction 
pulley down out of contact with the larger 
companion pulley and instantly stops the 
movement of the swinging saw-frame. This 
mechanism is started by moving the upper 
end of the vertical lever H toward the front 
of the machine, which throws the same out 
of engagement with the end of the horizontal 
lever H', the weight H automatically tilting 
the lever Hand bringing the friction-pulleys 
together. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a cut-off sawing-machine, the combi 
nation of the swinging saw-frame having pro 
jecting lugs formed thereon, the companion 
rods having an endwise movement in said 
lugs and parallel to the swinging frame, the 
track-bars having an irregular tracking-sur 
face, the wheels secured to the companion 
rods and moving on the track-bars, the trans 
verse rod connecting the upper ends of said 
companion rods, and the push-fingers loosely 
mounted on said transverse rod and project 
ing up through slots in the feed-table and 
adapted to have a movement coincident with 
that of the saw-frame, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a cut-off sawing-machine, the combi 
nation, with a swinging saw-frame, of a num 
ber of push-fingers pivotally connected with 
relation thereto and having a movement co 
incident therewith, whereby the sawed-offma 
terial is pushed out of the way on the forward 
movement of the saw, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a cut-off sawing-machine, the combi 
nation, with a swinging Saw-frame, of a Lum 
ber of push-fingers connected to and moving 
there with, the feed-table provided longitudi 
nally with a number of slots in which said 
fingers move, and the transverse bar E, said 
fingers being rigid on their forward move 
ment, but are depressed below the surface of 
the table on their return by coming in con 
tact with said transverse bar, substantially as 
described. 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US484099.txt	(No Model.) 
H. S. JEWELL, 
APPARATUS FOR STEAMING GRAIN 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 484,099. 
Patented Oct, ll, l892, 
 
- al bia 
N ( 
 
A. 
D e 
e 
asures researxist 
x 
22 
ov-76.1.x 
 
(No Model.) 
H. S. JEWELL, 
APPARATUS FOR STEAMING GRAIN, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 484,099. 
Patented Oct. 11, 1892. 
V 
\ 
al 
his 
SN e." 
- 
 
S. U 
 
&O 
--- 
///) 
-- 2 
s 
& 
WITNESSES : 22 
Attorney. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERBERT S. JEWELL OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
APPARATUS FOR STEAMING GRAIN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,099, dated October 11, 1892, 
Application filed October 27, 1891. Serial No. 409,994 (No model.) 
IO 
3o 
35 
45 
To all whom it nay concert: 
Beit known that I, HERBERT S. JEWELL, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, Kings county, New York, have in 
vented certain Improvements in Apparatuses 
for Steaming Grain, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to means employed 
for steaming wheat in order to toughen the 
bran before the wheat is ground. Such de 
vices or apparatuses have been and are now 
employed; but these, so far as I am now 
aware, have defects which I seek to remedy. 
The difficulties encountered insteaming grain 
arises mainly from the excess of moisture 
created by condensation of the steam, which 
tends to moisten or soak the wheat too much. 
The Water of condensation also mixes with 
the dust from the grain, thus forming a slime 
which fouls the grain and coats the inner 
surfaces of the apparatus. 
The object of my invention is to avoid ex 
cessive condensation of the steam and to re 
move the dust from the inflowing wheat be 
fore it becomes moistened by the steam; and 
to this end I employ the apparatus I will now 
describe, with reference to the accompanying 
drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of an ap 
paratus embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a front elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
horizontal section of the same in the plane of 
the line acac in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is an enlarged 
detail view of the steam-nozzle. Fig. 5 is a 
perspective view of the automatically-oper 
ating outlet-valve for the grain. Fig. 6 is a 
sectional elevation of the apparatus as it ap 
pears when the rotary air-exhauster is not 
employed. 
1 is an upright conduit, which may, for con 
venience, be mounted on a suitable frame or 
support 2. 
3 is the grain-inlet chute at the upper part 
of the conduit. At its lower extremity the 
conduit is provided with an automatically-op 
erating outlet-valve, from which the steamed 
grain may fall into a hopper 4 or into any 
form of chute or receptacle. 
The outlet-valve, which is seen detached in 
Fig. 5, is composed of two inclined flaps 5, 
hinged at their upper edges and forming, 
with sides 6 of some flexible material, as rub 
ber or leather, a sort of variable hopper. The 
flexibility of the sides 6 permits thishopperto 
75 
open or close to a limited extentatits lower or 55 
discharging end by the movement of the free 
lower edges of the flaps 5 away from or toward 
each other. Normally the flaps would stand as 
far apartas the flexible sides would permit; but 
I provide each flap with a rod 7, preferably 
screw-threaded, and a weight 7", preferably 
screw-threaded, so as to screw onto said rod. 
These weights tend to press the flaps inward 
or toward each other, so as to close the valve, 
the weights acting with a leverage due to their 
positions on the respective rods. When the 
grainfalls into this hopper-like valve, it tends 
by its weight to force the flaps 5 apart, and 
thus provide an opening for its escape at the 
bottom, and by carefully adjusting the weights 
7' in or out on their respective rods the 
valve may be made to hold just the desired 
quantity of grain to form a seal, the quantity 
held being augmented from above in exact 
proportion to its escape below. This valve is 
very sensitive and is capable of very nice 
regulation. 
8 is the steaming-nozzle, arranged by pref 
erence in the axis of the conduit 1 and con 
nected to the steam-pipe 9. 
Fig. 4 shows the preferred mode of con 
structing the steaming-nozzle, which is in the 
nature of a cap, with lateral perforations 
screwed onto the upturned end of the steam 
pipes. 
In order to dry the incoming steam or at 
least to remove the water carried over by it 
from the boiler, I prefer to provide a drying 
apparatus consisting of a drum 10, into which 
steam is led from the boiler by a pipe 11 and 
from the upper part of which the steam is 
taken by the pipe 9. The water which col 
lects in the drum 10 is drawn off through a 
trapped pipe 12. The object is to introduce 
Steam into the conduit with as little water as 
possible, for this water after issuing from the 
steaming-nozzle would fall by gravity into 
the outlet-valve below and soak or moisten 
the grain unduly. 
In order to remove the surplus steam, as 
well as the dust arising from the dry grain as 
it flows from the inlet-chute 3 into the con 
duit, I prefer to employ some means of creat 
ing an air-current flowing out from the upper 
end of the conduit, and a convenient means 
for effecting this object is to connect the up 
per end of the conduit 1 with a trunk 13, lead 
ing to an air-exhausting blower 14, as clearly 
95 
90. 
ICO 
Io5 
- 
484,099 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2. However, the 
trunk 13 might lead to a chimney-?lue with 
good results, provided said flue has sufficient 
draft; but I believe a blower or air-fan is best, 
as its work is more positive and reliable. 
Fig. 6 shows the apparatus without the fan 
or air-exhauster. 
In order to regulate the force of the draft 
produced in the trunk 13, I provide a valve 
13' in said trunk, adapted for adjustment. 
This valve may be of any kind suited to the 
purpose. 
In order to insure the removal of the dust 
from the grain as soon as the latter leaves the 
chute 3, I prefer to provide an air-inlet 16, 
formed in the wall of the conduit below said 
chute, whereat a broad sheet of air may en 
ter, pass through the falling grain, and then 
pass on to the air-exhauster. This air-inlet 
should be provided with some sort of register 
or valve 16, so that the volume of air enter 
ing at it may be regulated. I find this air 
inlet 16 especially useful where the grain con 
tains more than the usual amount of dust. 
The operation of my apparatus is simple. 
The grain and steam are turned on and the 
fan set in motion. The fan draws of the Sur 
plus steam and the dust, and the graininfall 
ing through the length of the conduit will be 
sufficiently moistened to effect the object 
sought. As the grain falls into the outlet 
valve below, it will accumulate in the valve 
to an extent governed by the position of the 
weights which tend to close the same, when it 
will open and the grain will flow out at the 
bottom of the valve as rapidly as it enters 
from above. 
In order to avoid as far as possible any con 
densation of steam on the inner face of the 
conduit 1, I prefer to make this conduit of 
some material that Will not conduct heat well 
or readily, preferring to employ Wood, and to 
make its walls quite thick. A convenient mode 
of constructing the conduit is to take a Square 
timber and bore it through from end to end 
to form the conduit. It may, however, be 
made up of several pieces. I find a cylindrical 
bore in the conduit produces better results 
than one having an angular cross-section. 
In order to scatter the grain as it falls 
through the conduit, rods or bars 15 (seen in 
Figs. 1 and 3) may be placed diametrically 
across the same at different levels. Where 
the conduit is Small a device for Scattering 
the grain is not required; but for conduits of 
considerable size I prefer to employ the bars 
or rods 15, arranged as shown or in some 
equivalent manner. 
I do not broadly claim the use of steam in 
connection with an air-exhauster in an appa 
ratus for treating grain. The use of Super 
heated steam in a grain-cleaning apparatus is 
not new; but I do not employ Superheated 
steam, as my object is to moisten the grain, 
and in such an apparatus the greatest care 
must be taken to get rid of the Surplus moist 
steam as well as the dust from the grain or 
75 
95 
Od 
IOS 
O 
II5 
the apparatus, and the grain treated as Well 
will soon become foul. I so arrange the ex 
haust with respect to the grain-inlet that at 
the moment the grain passes into the upper 
end of the conduit, down which it falls by 
gravity, the dust is drawn therefrom along 
with the steam which has risen to this point. 
The prompt removal of the steam and dust 
prevents the formation of slime in the appa 
ratus. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. A grain-steaming apparatus having 
means, substantially as described, for carrying 
off the surplus steam and the dust from the 
entering grain, arranged at the upper part of 
the apparatus where the grain enters, where 
by the formation of slime in the apparatus is 
prevented. 
2. A grain-steaming apparatus comprising 
an upright conduit having a grain-inlet at its 
upper part, a valve - controlled outlet at its 
lower part, a steam-nozzle within the conduit, 
and an air-exhausting mechanism connected 
With the upper part of said conduit for re 
moving the surplus steam and the dust from 
the grain. 
3. A grain-steaming apparatus having an 
automatically-regulated outlet-valve for the 
grain, said valve consisting of the hinged 
flaps 5, the sides 6, of flexible material, secured 
to and connecting the flaps 5, and adjustable 
Weights on said flaps which tend to close the 
valve. 
4. A grain-steaming apparatus comprising 
a conduit of Wood or like non-heat-conduct 
ing material having an inlet for grain at its 
upper part and an outlet for the same at its 
lower part, a steam-nozzle arranged within 
said conduit, and means for drawing of the 
surplus steam and the dust at the upper part 
of Said conduit. 
5. A grain-steaming apparatus comprising 
a conduit having a grain-inlet at its upper 
part and a grain-Outlet at its lower part, a 
Steam-nozzlein said conduit, an air-exhauster, 
a trunk connecting said air-exhauster with 
the upper part of Said conduit, and means for 
regulating the force of the draft through said 
trunk. 
6. A grain-steaming apparatus comprising 
a conduit having a grain-inlet at its upper 
part, a grain-Outlet at its lower part, and an 
air-inlet 16, arranged below the grain-inlet, a 
Steam-nozzle arranged within said conduit, an 
air-exhauster, and a trunk connecting said 
air-exhauster with the upper part of said con 
duit, whereby the air entering at the inlet 16 
is compelled to pass through the inflowing 
grain on its Way to the air-exhauster. 
In Witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
HERBERT S. JEWELL. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY CONNETT, 
HERBERT BLOSSOM. 
i 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US484199.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 484, 199, 
H. 
 
 
 
 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 1, 
J. A. HAYES, 
ELECTRIC ARC LAMP, 
Patented 00t, ll, l892, 
SSN 
NNNYay 
?ZZZZZZZZZZZZZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz--> N 
ZZZ'e 7zzo 7 
c/6A / A. AA7 YAS 
As Y A/AS A7 V 7 OA v A Y 
ThE. Non Ris reTERs co, PHoro-Litho. WASHINGTom, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. A. HAYES, 
ELECTRIC ARC LAMP. 
 
 
Patented Oct, ll, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
co., PHoro-LTH 
Q. WASH 
Z72 Zvez Zor 
c/0AA A/. A//71AS 
a Y A/or 77 roawa Y 
(No Model.) 
J. A. HAYES, 
ELECTRIC ARC LAMP. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 484, 199, 
Patented 00t, ll, 1892. 
 
(azz eye ey 
Z6762-22-4 
 
7&4 e^24, 
Azz 67zzar 
JOAA. A. A/A YAS 
a Y A//s at 77 oa way 
6%12-4- 
the Norris rete is co., Piotro-LTHo, washinaron, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOEL A. HAYES, OF CARSON CITY, NEVADA. 
ELECT RC-ARC LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,199, dated October 11, 1892. 
Application filed June 27, 1891, Serial No. 397,720%, (No model.) 
5 
O 
is M' and the shunt-coil M'. On opposite 
Be it known that I, JOEL A. HAYES, a citi-sides of the lower end of the core M are slot 
ted projections c, across slots of which are 
pins c', which pass through slots c' in links 
L. The links hang toward and carry by pivot 
joints semi-ring friction-clutches A', which 
are linked together by links L. 
The projections c, as seen in Fig. 7, are each 
about midway between those lettered G and 
C'. The clutches A' are pivoted to the 
links L' by pins c'. The clutches tighten 
upon the carbon when the former are entirely 
or partially lifted from the seat formed by 
the nut. N' and bushing N'. 
The upperor positive carbone passes through 
the hollow core M, the upper end of the carbon 
being mechanically and flexibly connected to 
the lower end of the lower or negative carbon 
by a flat link chain, which is separated electri 
cally into two sections ff' by the interposition 
of the insulating-cord I'. The chains fif' are 
substantially equal in length; but the upper 
one is considerably heavier than the lower. 
It is made nearly twice as wide, as noticed in 
Fig. 2, where the provision is made of having 
the lower pulleys (', '', and w' nar 
rower than the pulleys av', u', and v'. The 
former pulleys serve to guide the lower chain 
from a downward motion to an upward mO 
tion, while the latter produce the reverse ef 
fect upon the upper chain. The exact rela 
tive weights of the two chains cannot be stated 
for all cases, as they depend upon the size of 
carbons. The consumption of the positive 
carbon being nearly double that of the nega 
tive carbon, the relative weights of the chains 
should be such that the carbons are Substan 
tially balanced at any stage of the operation 
of the lamp. If the chains were equal in 
weight, like a single chain having uniform 
weight throughout its length, there would be 
no compensation made for the extra loss of 
the positive carbon over that of the lower. 
When the carbons are of maximum length or 
new, the preponderance in Weight of the 
upper carbon would be much too great, and 
when nearly consumed too small; but with 
two chains, as described, the carbons are Sub 
stantially balanced, taking but a small force 
to feed them. Taking the highest point of 
the chain f before it turns over the highest 
pulley c', and the upper chain f having an 
To all whom it may concern: 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Carson City, county of Ormsby, and State of 
Nevada, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Electric - Arc Lamps, 
(Case No. 3.) of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to that class of arc 
lamps in which mechanism is provided for 
the automatic feed of both carbons. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
such improved mechanical construction that 
may be as commercially 
this class of lamp 
Valuable as that in which only one carbon is 
fed, the advantage of the former class being 
that it serves not only for ordinary uses, but 
also for locomotive or magic-lantern or simi 
lar lamps where the light is to be focused. 
The details are set forth in the accompany 
ing drawings. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of the lamp 
With Some unessential parts broken out. 
Fig. 2 is similar to Fig. 1, except that only 
parts of the lamp are in section. Figs. 3, 4, 
5, 6, and 7 are exterior views of certain de 
tails. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are different views of 
the pair of pulleys and their bearings at the 
upper portion of the lamp, the pulleys being 
omitted in Fig. 4. Fig. 8 is a view, looking 
up, of the conical casing which closes up the 
lower end of the cylindrical casing around 
the operating-solenoid. Fig. 9 is an elevation 
of the said conical casing and the framework 
of the lower-carbon holder connected there 
with. Fig. 10 is a detail view of the cut-out 
device, and Fig. 11 is one of the details of 
said device. 
M' is a differentially-wound electro-mag 
net of the solenoid type, having pole-pieces p, 
magnetically joined together by iron uprights 
M', exterior to the solenoid. The interior of 
the Solenoid is lined with a tube n, of dia 
magnetic substance, screwed at opposite ends 
into the pole-pieces p. 
M is a hollow iron core fitting loosely in the 
solenoid and provided on the lower end with 
a projection G at right angles to the core. 
g is a guide-rod which is suspended from 
So the lowerpole-piece and passes loosely through 
a projection C''' on the core M opposite the 
projection G. The main coil of the solenoid 
45 
35 
7 o 
75 
95 
IOO 
25 
. 3O 
 
484,199 
O 
m 
excess in weight over that of the lower chain 
f' equal to the excess of weight of the two 
carbons, it is evident that the two carbons at 
the beginning should be about as one to two, 
by Weight, and that the chains should be about 
as one to two, by weight, in favor of the posi 
tive carbon and chain f. This chain termi 
nates in a clamp d, which grasps the upper 
end of the upper carbon. 
T is a tubular support passing through and 
fastened to the upper pole-piece p and hav 
ing its longitudinal axis coincident with that 
of the solenoid M' and having at its upper 
end bearings T. 
T' is the arbor of the pulley c'. After the 
chain leaves the tube Tit passes over this pull 
ley v' and then underpulley v' and over pull 
ley ty', both of which are carried upon bear 
ings t', which rise up from the small base 
plate D', properly insulated from and sup 
ported upon the upper pole-piece.p. The bear 
ingst' lean over from the vertical toward the 
axis of the solenoid, so that the chain f may be 
fed from the upward central motion to the 
downward motion outside the solenoid M'. 
The heavy black in each case represents insu 
lation for the purpose of preventing leakage, 
short circuits, &c., of the electric current. 
II' is an inverted conical shell closing the 
casing II and has openings provided with 
sliding doors, which are a portion of an inner 
sliding conical shutter H'. One's hands can 
be inserted through the openings for the pur 
pose of attending to adjustment, cleaning, re 
newing carbons, &c. The cone II is inte. 
gral with the tube F, which forms a passage 
for the chains fif' and supports the lower-car 
bon framework. 
The tube F is bent at right angles at the 
lower end to the projection of the axis of the 
Solenoid M' and then upward, so as to form 
a tube in for the passage of the lower carbon 
e'. The lower portion of the shell II' carries 
a bushing N', separated from the shell by 
insulation. The upper carbon passes through 
this bushing, which is held to the shell by 
the nut N'. The tube connecting the lower 
end of tube F with tube n is lettered ' and 
carries two guide-pulleys ty' ('', the chain 
f' passing under one and over the other, so 
as to be guided. lt then passes under and 
supports a pulley U' and terminates by 
being fixed to the side of the tube m'. The 
axis of the pulley v' is perpendicular to 
that of the lower carbon and the bearing W, 
carrying the lower-carbon holder d, the same 
being a clamp which is attached to said bear 
ing, d' are thumb-screws for tightening and 
loosening the clamps d and d. 
The means for automatically cutting out 
the lamp is described thus: The projection G 
is tapered, the narrower portion being at the 
lower edge. The tapered sides when the lamp 
is ready for use or just after it has been cut 
out are in contact with terminal brushes b, 
which connect, respectively, with the termi 
nals of the resistance-coil b'. 
The cut-out device is operated by the pro 
jection G, fixed to the lower end of the plun 
ger M. The two contact-springs b are se 
cured to, but insulated from, the body of the 
lamp. One spring is connected to the bind 
ing-post P and the other to the resistance l'. 
The other end of the resistance is connected 
to the outer end of the coil M'. The plug 
for the springs is the wedge-shaped projec 
tion C, which extends from the lower end of 
the core. When the current is first turned 
on, the wedge-shaped projection, resting be 
tween the two springs, is elevated before the 
separating of the carbons, because the cur 
rent passes through the coil M', owing to the 
greater resistance of the cut-out device. The 
plunger M. rises until the arc is established, 
when it falls under the control of the other coil 
M', rising and falling with a movement 
almost imperceptible until the carbons are 
consumed. The arc then increases in length 
and the plunger falls, pressing the Wedge 
shaped projection C between the springs b, 
thus cutting out the lamp without opening 
the circuit. 
It is unnecessary to go into a description of 
the electric circuits and electrical connec 
tions of the lamp, as my invention relates to 
the mechanical construction, the circuits and 
electrical connections being substantially as 
in other lamps. 
Referring particularly to Fig. 11, the con 
tact brushes b are not only insulated from 
each other but from the body F of the lamp 
by insulation F'. Fig. 12 shows a round in 
sulating-bushing ac inserted in the edge of 
the lower head of the magnet and Serving to 
insulate the binding-post P. It also insul 
lates the two wires leading to the contact 
brushes, one brush being in contact with and 
connected to the binding - post P and the 
other brush to the other end of the resistance 
coil b', the upper end of which is connected 
to the outer end of the helix M'. 
The operation is described as follows: The 
lamp should be in a vertical position, as shown 
in the drawings, made so by suspending the 
same from a cord. The current being switched 
on, the core, with its V-shaped projection G. 
resting between the two contact-springs l, 
rises clear of the same before separating the 
carbons, for the greater current passes through 
the main coil of the solenoid, owing to the 
greater resistance of the coil b', which is in 
circuit with the brushes. The core rises until 
the arc is established, when it falls again 
under the influence of the Solenoid. When 
the carbons are consumed, the arc lengthens 
so much as to cease, thereby cutting off the 
current of the solenoid. The core Mfalls and 
the lamp is cut out. The upper and lower 
carbons become lighter in weight. More and 
more of the wider upper chain f passes over 
the pulley v', making up for the loss of weight 
of the upper carbon. The lower chain f' 
between the pulleys v' and v' becomes 
at the same time lighter and lighter, because 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
O) 
II) 
II5 
I 25 
 
484,199 
75 
ley a little to one side of the second and 
lower, but all three pulleys being located 
above the said solenoid, a lower carbon, a pull 
ley below the same, two otherpulleys-namely, 
the fifth and sixth--whose axes are in a hori 
Zontal plane and are nearer the lower than 
the upper carbon, a clamp for the upper car 
bon, a chain connected to the clamp and pass 
ing over the top of the first pulley, under the 
second, and on top of the third, an insulating 
cord connecting the free end to a second chain 
heavier than the first, passing under the sixth, 
over the fifth, and under the fourth, and 
then to a fixed point, and a frame carrying 
both the lower carbon and the fourth pulley. 
4. In an arc lamp, the combination, with a 
casing surrounding the solenoid, of a conical 
casing terminating the same, Surrounding the 
upper carbon, and provided with holes cov 
ered by an inner sliding conical shutter, for 
the purpose described. 
5. In an arc lamp, the combination, with a 
casing surrounding the solenoid, of the conical 
casing terminating the same, surrounding the 
upper carbon, and provided with holes cov 
ered by an inner sliding conical shutter, for 
the purpose described, and a tube projecting 
downward from the said conical casing and 
supporting the lower-carbon holder. 
6. In an arc lamp, the combination of a 
Solenoid, a core therefor, a V-shaped projec 
tion on the lower end thereof between tWO 
electric terminals, a second projection on the 
Said end of the core opposite the first projec 
tion and provided with a hole, and a guide 
rod extending downward from said solenoid 
and passing through said hole, and additional 
projections c upon said core, to which are piv 
oted links, and Semicircular friction-clutches 
Suspended upon Said links, pressing upon the 
carbon of the lamp, and linked together by 
links L. 
7. In an arc lamp, the combination of a 
solenoid, a core therefor, to which are pivoted 
links, and semicircular friction-clutches sus 
pended upon Said links, pressing upon the 
carbon of the lamp, and linked together by 
links L'. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 15th day of June, 
S9. 
J. A. IAYES. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK HELM, 
CLARLES CLAYTON. 
9 O 
95 
CO 
IO5 
less and less of the heavy chain f exists there 
and more and more of the light chain f'. The 
motions of the carbons are imperceptible and 
the arc of exceedingly-constant brilliancy, the 
regulation of the movements of the carbons 
by fluctuations of the current being effected 
by the clutch above described. This clutch, 
although different in construction from the or 
dinary clutch, acts upon the same principle 
of variation of friction between the same and 
the carbon. 
I claim as my invention 
1. An arc lamp consisting of the combina 
tion of upper and lower carbon holders or car 
bons, upper and lower friction and guiding pull 
leys, a ligature connecting said carbons and 
passing upon said pulleys, a hollow core car 
rying a Wedge-shaped projection and inclos 
ing and surrounding a portion of the upper 
carbon and forming the passage-way therefor, 
Springs b, lying in the path of said projection 
and normally touching the same, two coils for 
the said core of different resistances and a 
resistance-coil b' in circuit with said springs 
and in shunt with the coil of higher resist 
ance, the coil of higher resistance being in 
shunt to the carbons of the lamp. 
2. An arc lamp consisting of the combina 
tion of a solenoid, a core therefor, a carbon 
balanced in said core, which is hollow, lugs 
projecting from the lower end of the core, a 
clutch for the carbon and suspended from 
the lugs through the medium of links L, pro 
vided with slots, through which pass pins car 
ried on the lugs, a projection C, also on the 
lower end of the core, springs () in the path 
of the projection and forming the terminals 
of an electric circuit, a lug projecting from 
the base of Said solenoid and carrying said 
Springs, which are insulated from said lug, 
a guide-rod extending downward from the 
Said base and passing through a projection 
On the lower part of said core, the said clutch 
consisting of semicircular rings having slots 
in their ends and lugs on their outer sides, 
the links L being pivoted to said lugs, and 
links T', connecting the semicircular rings 
and fitting and pivoted in said slots. 
3. An arc lamp consisting of the combina 
tion of a Solenoid and hollow core therefor, an 
upper carbon movable in said core, a pulley 
at the top of the solenoid, having its periph 
ery as to one point lying in the axis of said 
Core, a Second pulley, one point in whose pe. 
riphery lies in a tangent to the first pulley 
and located below the other in such a man 
ner that said tangent is vertical, a third pull 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US484299.txt	(No Model.) 
S. L. CLEMENTS, 
FLOORING AND CEILING TONGS, 
No. 484,299. 
Patented 00t, ll l892. 
s 
as 
 
 
 
AIR 
sa 
a. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
3vvue-vibot. 
sazzzzz-Z. (267zezza2. 
... 
-, -, - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL L. CLEMENTS, OF EAST EAGLE, KENTUCKY. 
FLOORING AND CELING TONGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,299, dated October 11, 1892. 
Application filed November 4, 1890. Serial No. 370,360. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL L. CLEMENTs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at East 
Eagle, in the county of Owen and State of Ken 
tucky, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Flooring and Ceiling Tongs; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
theon, Which form a part of this specifica 
10, 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in floor and ceiling 
tongs; and it has for its objects, among others, 
to provide a simple, cheap, and efficient de 
Vice of this character which can be easily 
manipulated, adjustable to accommodate 
boards with tongues of varying thicknesses, 
and which may be operated by one hand 
while the other is left free to nail the board 
when it is forced to the desired position. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear, and the novel fea 
tures thereof will be specifically defined by 
the appended claim. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view illustrating 
my improvement as in operation. Fig. 2 is a 
Sectional detail showing the clamp and its 
manner of connection with the levers. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in both views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates one lever and B 
another, pivotally connected together by a 
suitable pivot a, passed through the two le 
vers at their point of intersection, each lever 
being provided with a sharpened jaw A' and 
B', respectively, as seen in Fig. 1, the two 
jaws being designed to embrace and clamp a 
floor or ceiling joist C, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The levers may be of any desired length, and 
to one of them, at any suitable distance from 
the end, is pivoted, as at b, one end of a bi 
furcated notched segment D, between the par 
allel portions of which the other lever works, 
as shown in Fig. 1. The lever B is provided 
with a pin c to engage the teeth of the seg 
ment to hold the upper ends of the levers in 
their adjusted position. 
To the rear faces of the levers A and B are 
pivotally held the bars E, the free ends of 
which are sharpened, and these bars are de 
signed to take a hold on the upper face of 
the joist, as seen in Fig. 1, and to be moved 
up as it may be desired to take a fresh hold 
to further force the board up. Pivotally held 
to the levers at their point of intersection, 
and preferably by a pivot d passed through 
the bifurcated end of the arm and through 
the head of the pivot a, is an arm F, the other 
end of which carries the block G, which is 
designed to receive the tongue on the board 
being operated upon. This block consists of 
two parts adjustably held together, as seen 
in Fig. 2, readily to vary the groove f therein 
to suit the thickness of the tongue of the 
board. This adjustment consists of the bolt 
g, which connects the two parts of the block, 
working in a vertical slot k in one part and 
provided with a nut m. 
The manner of use is clearly illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, Fig. 1. The 
board is placed in position upon the joists, and 
the upper ends of the levers separated, so that 
the jaws will embrace the joist C. Then the 
upper ends of the levers are brought toward 
each other until the device is clamped to the 
joist, being held in this position by the 
notched segment engaging the pin C. The 
arms E are engaged with the upper face of 
the joist, as shown, and the arm F and its 
block arranged horizontally, as shown, the 
groove of the block receiving the tongue of 
the board. The levers are then forced toward 
the board, in the direction of the arrow in 
Fig. 1, when the board will be pressed up 
against the next board, and then it may be 
mailed by one hand, while the other hand 
still holds the block against the board. The 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
2 
484,299 
arms Eare moved up as greater leverage is re- gether to vary the size of a groove in its act- Io 
quired. 
ing edge to receive the tongue of a board, sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
5 together at their point of intersection and presence of two witnesses. 
SAMUEL L. CILEMENTS. 
What I claim as new is- 
The combination, with the levers pivoted 
provided with jaws to clamp a joist, of an 
arm pivoted to the levers at their intersec- 
tion, and a block carried by the said arm and 
consisting of two parts adjustably held to- 
Witnesses: 
W. D. HARDIN, 
JOEL. S. HEAD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US484399.txt	(No Model.) , 
No. 484,399. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. BOLTON 
DRESS GUARD AND DRIVING WHEEL SUPPORT. 
 
 
 
tre NicRRIs peTERs co., PHoro-LITHO. WASHINGTON, D. C. 
No. 484,399, 
DRESS GUARD AND DRIVING WHEEL SUPPORT. 
Patented Oct. 18, 1892, 
 
 
 
the NORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LirHo, washina 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES BOLTON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
D RESS- G UARD AN O DRIVING -VV H E EL. SU PPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,399, dated October 18, 1892. 
Application filed February 29, 1892, Serial No. 423,142. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all typh???, i? ??? ???,?????: 
Be it known that I, JAMES BOLTON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Dress-Guards and Driving 
Wheel Supports for Sewing-Machines, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
a convenient dress-guard and support for the 
driving-wheel of a sewing-machine-treadle 
mechanism of such construction that it may 
readily be applied either to an ordinary iron 
side frame of a sewing-machine stand or to 
the side of a sewing-machine cabinet, the 
bearing of the driving or fly wheel being of 
Such construction that any wear may be read 
ily compensated for, while the said bearing 
will be of such lateral dimensions as to sup 
port the driving-wheel in a strong and posi 
tive manner. To this end I provide a frame, 
which is preferably of skeleton construction 
and which is of circular form, said frame be 
ing provided with ears by which it may be 
attached to the side frame of a sewing-ma 
chine stand. The said frame has on its inner 
side suitable arms to form a dress-guard and 
a central hub in which the driving-wheel is 
journaled. The rim of said frame surrounds 
or incloses the rim of the driving-wheel, and 
thus prevents contact of the dress of the op 
erator with the said wheel-rim, while the arms 
of the said frame keep the operator's dress 
away from the spokes of the driving or fly 
wheel. The driving or fly wheel is provided 
with a conical hub fitting in a conical seat in 
the hub of the dress-guard and support, and 
into said conical hub of the driving or fly 
wheel is tapped a screw having a conical head, 
which has a corresponding bearing in the 
Outer portion of the dress-guard and support. 
As the screw may be adjusted in the conical 
hub of the driving-wheel, any wear may be 
readily compensated for, while the screw and 
head together form a lateral bearing of suit 
able extension, so as to steadily support the 
driving-wheel. The screw is fixed to the hub 
of the driving-wheel, so as to rotate therewith, 
and thus practically forms a part of the jour 
nal of said wheel. The pitman connecting 
the driving-wheel to the treadle is arranged 
inside of said wheel and between the latter 
and the side frame of the stand, the lateral 
dimensions of the dress-guard and wheel-Sup 
port being such as to permit of this arrange 
ment of the pitman. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents my invention as applied to a seW 
ing-machine stand, the latter, with the sew 
ing-machine thereon, being indicated by dot 
ted lines. Fig. 2 is a detail face view of my 
dress-guard and wheel-support, with the wheel 
journaled therein. Fig. 3 is a sectional view, 
and Fig. 4 a side view, of the dress-guard and 
wheel-support, the driving-wheel being shown 
in section in Fig. 3. 
A denotes the side frame of a sewing-ma 
chine stand, and B my improved dress-guard 
and driving-wheel support secured thereto in 
any suitable manner, as by screw-bolts b, pass 
ing through or tapped into ears b' of the dress 
guard and support. This dress-guard and 
support is preferably made in skeleton form, 
as more clearly shown in Fig. 2, with arms a 
extending from the central hub b thereof to 
the periphery of the support. Any suitable 
number of arms a may be employed. Three 
are shown in Fig. 2. The sectional view shown 
in Fig. 3 denotes that four such arms may be 
employed. 
C denotes the driving-wheel, provided with 
a conical hub c, fitting in a corresponding 
opening in the hub b of the dress-guard 
and support B. A screw d, provided with a 
conical head d", is secured to the hub of the 
driving-wheel, so as to rotate therewith, and 
the said conical hub has a suitable bearing in 
the hub b of the dress-guard and wheel-Sup 
port. It will be observed that the conical 
journals afforded by the hub of the driving 
wheel and the head of the screw are oppo 
sitely arranged or with their apexes toward 
each other. This construction affords a strong 
and solid bearing for the driving-wheel, and 
by adjusting the screw in the hub of the 
wheel any wear may be readily compensated 
for. 
E denotes a treadle, which may be of any 
suitable construction and which is suitably 
mounted on supports in the sewing-machine 
stand, the said treadle having an arme, con 
nected by a pitman F with a crank-pincon the 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
95 
TIO CO 
484,399 
2 
driving-wheel C. The wheel-supportanddress- conical portions being adjustable to compen 
guard are preferably of such lateral depth | sate for wear, substantially as set forth. 
as to afford room for the pitman F between 
2. A dress-guard and driving-wheelsupport 
the driving-wheel C and the side frame A of 
for a sewing-machine stand, consisting of a 
the sewing-machine stand, so that the said 
skeleton frame constructed to surround the 
pitman, as well as the driving-wheel, is thus 
driving-wheel and formed separate from but 
housed within the dress-guard and support, 
adapted to be attached to a side frame of a 
the latter being provided with openings b for 
sewing-machine stand and having a central 
the passage of the belt extending from the 
hub or bearing portion, combined with a 
driving-wheel C upward to the driving-pulley 
driving-wheel journaled in said hub or bear 
on the sewing-machine mounted upon the 
ing portion and having a journal consisting 
Stand or table. 
of two oppositely-arranged conical parts, with 
It will be understood from the foregoing 
their apexes toward each other, a treadle, 
that my improved dress-guard and driving 
and a pitman connecting said driving-wheel 
wheel support is entirely separate from the 
with the said treadle, said pitman being ar 
side frame of the stand, and may therefore, 
ranged on the inner face of said driving-wheel 
With the driving-wheel mounted therein, be 
and between the latter and the side frame of 
applied to any form of stand, being thus 
the stand. 
equally applicable to iron stands or to cab 
3. The combination, with the side fraine of 
inets having side frames, which are of wood. 
a sewing-machine stand, of a dress-guard and 
Having thus described my invention, I 
driving-wheel support formed separate there 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
from, but adapted to be secured thereto, and 
1. A dress-guard and driving-wheel support 
constructed to surround the driving-wheel, 
for a sewing-machine stand, consisting of a 
which latter is suitably journaled in said 
suitable frame constructed to surround the 
dress-guard and wheel-support, a treadle, and 
driving-wheel and formed separate from but 
a pitman connecting said treadle with said 
adapted to be attached to a side frame of a 
driving-wheel. 
sewing-machine stand, combined with a driv 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
ing-wheel journaled in the hub of said dress 
presence of two witnesses. 
guard and wheel-support, the said driving 
Wheel having a journal consisting of two 
Oppositely - arranged conical portions with 
their apexes toward each other, one of said 
T. M. CoNPROPST, 
F. S. FOUSE. 
JAMES BOLTON. 
Witnesses: 
II. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US484499.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 484,499, 
 
H. B. HEWITT, 
MAIL POUCH RELEASING DEWICE, 
Patented Oct, 18, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
| | 
| . 
928), Evossos 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE B. HEWITT, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
MAL POUCH - RELEASING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,499, dated October 18, 1892. 
Application filed November 20, 1891, Serial No. 412,543, (No model.) 
55 
Be it known that I, HORACE B. HEWITT, a 
curately fit the eyes 2 of the sustaining-link 
To all, whom it may concern: 
3 and to pivot thereon. The sustaining-link 3 
citizen of the United States, residing at In- is preferably made or cast with a hollow or rect 
dianapolis, in the county of Marion and State angular section to secure lightness, and has 
of Indiana, have invented new and useful Im- its catch-supporting end bifurcated, between 
provements in Mail-Pouch-Releasing Devices, which bifurcations or jaws 4 and 5 the auto 
of which the following is a specification. 
matic engaging and releasing catch or hook 6 
My invention relates to a new and improved 
is pivotally secured by the bolt 7. The catch 
device for automatically releasing mail 
or hook 6 I designate as a continuous engag- 5 
ing and releasing hook for the reason that one 
pouches to transfer them to a moving train; 
of the series of its radially-curved arms is at 
and it consists in a simple device of novel 
all times in position to engage the sustaining 
Construction, hereinafter more fully set forth. 
ring of the mail-pouch and to release the same 
The object of my invention is to provide 
when the requisite amount of force of con 
means whereby the mail sack or pouch will 
cussion is applied thereto when engaged by 
be instantaneously released when gripped or 
the grip of the moving train. The arms 8 are 
engaged by the pouch-catcher of the moving 
preferably formed integral on the catch 6, 
train; also, to provide a catch or hook that 
with the concavity of their curves in the same 
Will automatically adjust or reset itself to en 
gage or release the pouch when required; 
direction to contact with the free end of the 
retaining-spring 9 and to be gradually re 
also, to provide means whereby the sustain 
leased therefrom. The spring 9 is preferably 
ing-link Will partially rotate or swing in line 
made of spring-steel or other equally-resilient 
With the direction of the force due to the in 
material and has its fixed end rigidly Secured 
ertia of the moving train and that of the pouch 
to the face of the sustaining-link 3 by the 
Sustained on said catch, and thereby relieve 
rivet 10 or other suitable securing device. 
the Sustaining rings and straps attached there 
Referring particularly to Figs. I and 2, it 
to and to the mail-pouch of any undue stress. 
will be seen that the top and bottom ends of 
I attain these objects by means of the device 
the mail-pouch 11 are held in position by the 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
hook or catch 6, which retains the pouch in 
which 
position till caught by the catching device on 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the sustain 
the moving train. 
ing-arms of a mail-catcher, showing a mail 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
pouch suspended thereon. Fig. 2 is a side 
The top and bottom arms of the mail-catcher 
elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
are first placed in their relative positions, as 
Sectional elevation of the sustaining - link, 
showing the automatically-adjusting hook 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2, with the top sustain 
ing-link projecting downwardly and the bot 
pivotally secured on the bifurcated end there 
tom or under one projecting upwardly, the 
of. Fig. 4 is a front elevation of the same, 
catch or hook 6 being in the position shown 
and Fig. 5 is a side elevation of the sustain 
ing-link and releasing and retaining hook in 
in Fig. 3, with its curved or hooked arm 8 
projecting outwardly and whereon the top 
position when about to release the mail-pouch 
and bottom suspending and retaining rings of 
and to disengage its next consecutive curved 
the mail-pouch are hooked. The elastic and 
engaging-arm from its retaining-spring. 
retaining spring 9 must be sufficiently strong 
Similar numbers of reference designate like 
or stiff to retain the catch or hook 6 in its en 
parts throughout the several views. 
gaging position, as shown in Fig. 3, when the 
Referring to the drawings, the upper and 
weight of the pouch and the attachments 
the lower sustaining-arms 1 are pivotally se 
thereof are being sustained; but When a 
cured to a rigidly-held vertical mast in direct 
slightly-additional force is applied to the 
vertical alignment and at a suitable distance 
pouch the spring must permit the said catch 
apart to permit a mail-pouch to be suspended 
to rotate freely and to release said pouch, as 
The ends of 
shown in Fig. 5. 
It is obvious that the in 
the arms 1 are reduced to receive and to ac 
75 
5o and retained between them. 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
 
95 
IOC 
 
 
484,499 
45 
50 
55 
bifurcated end of said link and in the rear of 
said spring, said hook being provided with a 
series of curved radial arms, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. In an automatic mail-pouch-releasing 
device, the combination, with a suitable sus 
taining-link having a pivotal and a bifur 
cated end, of a rotative retaining and releas 
ing hook pivoted in said link and having its 
axis transverse to the axis of said link, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In an automatic mail-pouch-releasing 
device, the combination, with a sustaining 
link having a pivotal and a bifurcated end 
and a suitable spring secured on the face of 
said link, of a rotative retaining and releas 
ing hook pivoted in said bifurcated end of 
the link in the rear of said end of spring, 
said hook having its axis transverse to the 
axis of said sustaining hook-link, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. In an automatic mail-pouch-releasing 
device, the combination, with a sustaining 
link having a pivotal and a bifurcated end, 
of a spring secured on the face of said link, a 
rotative releasing and engaging hook having 
a series of curved radial arms pivoted in said 
bifurcated end of the link and in the rear of 
said spring with its axis transverse to the 
pivotal axis of said link, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
HORACE B. HEWITT. 
Witnesses: 
THOMPSON R. BELL, 
JOHN ST. GEO, THURTLE. 
O 
stant the pouch is released a rotative motion 
in the direction of the arrow (see Figs. 3 and 
5) is transmitted to the catch 6, which move 
ment alternately presents one of the series of 
the engaging-arms 8 into engaging position, as 
shown particularly in Fig. 3. 
It is clear that any number of arms or 
hooks may be applied to a rotative hook of 
the character described; but I prefer to use 
four such radial arms or hooks, as shown in 
the drawings, for the reason that this number 
produces nuch better results in actual prac 
tice. It will also be observed that the sus 
taining-links 3, owing to the fact of their be 
ing pivotally secured on the ends of their sus 
taining-arms, are permitted to readily adjust 
themselves or to swing with their centers in 
line with the natural lines of the component 
forces of the resultant force applied to and 
concentrated in the mail-pouch, and thereby 
reduce the stress on the mail-pouch attach 
ments to a minimum. 
Having thus fully described the construc 
tion and operation of my invention, what I 
claim as new and useful, and desire to cover 
by Letters Patent of the United States there 
for, is 
1. In an automatic mail-pouch-releasing 
device, the combination, with a sustaining 
link having a bifurcated end and a suitable 
spring Secured on the face thereof, of a rota 
tive releasing-hook pivoted in said bifurcated 
end of the link and in the rear of said spring, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In an automatic mailpouch-releasing 
device, the combination, with a sustaining. 
link having a bifurcated end and a suitable 
Spring secured on the face thereof, of a suit 
able releasing rotative hook pivoted in said 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US484600.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 484,600, 
. 
 
T. E. MARTIN 
FURNACE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 18, 1892. 
NNN 
NNNNN 
2. 
NY 
NNY 
Wasia y 
\wew or , (2%aza. 6, 7%a-zi v 
292/. -2 2. 
THE NORRES PETERs co., PHOTO-LTHo., WASHINGTON, D. c. 
d 
(No Model.) 
No. 484,600, 
T. E. MARTIN 
FURNACE, 
2 sheet-sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 18, 1892, 
eZzz. 5 
X. 
N 
M 
is woul. 
N NYNNNNNN 
NYNY 
NYNNYNY 
NNNNNNNN 
NNNNNNNNNN 
 
 
CNNNNNNNNNNNNN 
&NSN 
NIITSN 
NWUIN 
Nazis N 
 
S Jerstay 
 
N.G.75-N 
NN 
NYNN 
NYYY IN 
NYNY 
TT TNN 
ENNYN 
NYNY 
. N 
 
 
  
 
 
THE Morris reTERs co, photo-ITHo, washinaro, c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS E. MARTIN, OF DES MOINES, IOWA. 
FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,600, dated October 18, 1892. 
Application filed February 12, 1892, Serial No. 421,333, (No model.) 
r 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS E. MARTIN, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Des Moines, in the county of Polk 
and State of Iowa, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Furnaces, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My object is to prevent the waste of valu 
able products of combustion in a furnace and 
the annoyances incident to the escape of 
gases, black smoke, and soot, and to utilize 
within a furnace to generate heat all the val 
uable products of combustion liberated from 
fuel by means of fire. 
Heretofore air-conveying tubes and super 
heating chambers, grates, bridge-walls, and 
deflectors have been constructed, arranged, 
and combined within a furnace in various 
Way's to promote combustion. A chamber for 
the reception of clinkers and a deflector over 
the top of such a chamber have been located 
between the rear end of a grate and a bridge 
Wall and arranged and combined in such a 
manner that the products of combustion pass 
ing rearward from the grate were deflected 
down Ward below the level of the fuel into the 
top of the chamber in rear of the grate and 
from thence upward against the bottom of 
the boiler before passing rearward over the 
bridge-Wall. 
To avoid the expense and use of air-con 
veying tubes and Superheating chambers and 
the necessity of a chamber for clinkers and 
a direct upward direction of the products of 
combustion against the bottom of a boiler to 
damage it by concentrating heat thereon at 
a given point, and to increase the maximum 
of heat obtainable from a given quantity of 
coal, I have invented an improved furnace, 
in which the novelty consists in the arrange 
ment and combination of a grate, a fire-pot, 
a bridge-wall, and a deflector, as hereinafter 
Set forth, in such a manner that a continuous 
line of fuel and fire can be maintained on a 
level plane extending over the grate and also 
over the fire-pot, and in which the unconsumed 
gases generated by the burning fuel upon the 
grate, after having been oxygenated in the 
mixing-chamber between the front wall of 
the furnace and the deflector, are then de 
flected by the upper bridge-wall and thrown 
- 
down upon the coked fuel in the firepot and 
are there consumed, thus utilizing all that is 
valuable therein to produce heat, and the pro 
ducts of combustion passed out over the lower 
bridge-wall free from smoke and soot. 
Figure 1 is a vertical and longitudinal Sec 
tional view of a boiler-furnace, showing the 
construction and relative positions of the 
different parts. Fig. 2 is a transverse sec 
tional view of Fig. 1, obtained by looking 
rearward from the line acac in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
is a modification of Fig. 1, showing a roof 
extending forward over the combustion-cham 
ber and grate in place of a boiler. Fig. 4 is 
a transverse sectional view through the line 
22 of Fig. 3. 
A represents the front wall of a four-sided 
furnace; B and B, the parallel side walls, and 
C the rear wall. 
D is a grate extending rearward from the 
front wall to a fuel-chamber or fire-pot F, lo 
cated in the rear of the grate and in front of 
the bride-wall H. The bridge-wall has a wide 
top surface, that is preferably higher at its 
rear edge than its front edge and above the 
horizontal plane of the grate, so that the fire 
pot may be filled above the level of the grate. 
The bridge-wall H, in combination with the 
side walls B and B and a wall D" under the 
rear end of the grate, produces the fire-pot F. 
The wall D consists of a metal plate, that 
has a flange at its bottom and rear edge 
adapted to support a fire-brick lining on its 
rear side. The ends of the plate extend into 
and are supported by the parallel side Walls 
B and B. A hinged door D at the lower 
edge of the wall D* allows communication 
with the bottom of the fire-pot, as required, to 
admit air to the fuel and remove ashes when 
ever desired. The fire-pot thus constructed 
has no grate therein, but a closed bottom. 
By this construction a fire-pot having a closed 
bottom is produced in rear of the grate in 
such a manner that fuel in the fire-pot will 
be subjected to the action of the products of 
combustion that pass rearward over the top 
of the fire-pot, as hereinafter set forth. 
J is an inverted bridge-wall extending over 
the fire-pot and bridge-wall H, preferably 
made of fire-brick and arched in such a man 
ner as to produce, in combination with the 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OC 
 
484,600 
so 
55 
 
of combustion immediately over the burning 
fuel and within the combustion chamber or 
space in front of the bridge - wall H. until 
they are totally consumed, as required to aid 
in generating heat and preventing the escape 
of black smoke and soot and the waste of such 
valuable products of combustion. This re 
sult is due to the fire-pot having a closed bot 
tom and its position relative to the grate and 
bridge-wall and the upper bridge-wall or de 
flector in the fire-box above the fire-pot. By 
means of the fire-pot the grate-surface is 
shortened and the draft upward through the 
fuel is thrown forward and increased in the 
front of the fire, thereby causing more rapid 
distillation of gases in the front part of the 
fire-box. When the door in the front wall of 
the fire-pot is closed and the draft through it 
checked, a large body of live glowing coals is 
steadily maintained in the fire-pot, (without 
producing clinkers) upon and over the sur 
face of which the unconsumed gases from the 
fuel on the grate in front of the fire-pot are 
deflected and compressed by the inverted 
bridge-wall J, and the process of combustion 
is complete. 
top of the bridge-wall H, a contracted throat 
and passage-way for the products of combus 
tion that pass rearward from the fire on the 
grate and in the fuel-chamber or fire-pot F. 
The combustion-chamber over the grate is 
closed at its top and rear end by means 
of the boiler and the inverted bridge-wall 
J, as shown in Fig. 1, or as shown in Fig. 3, 
in such a manner that the products of com 
bustion generated by burning fuel on the 
grate must pass rearward over the fire-pot F, 
and through the contracted passage or throat 
that extends over the top of the bridge-wall 
H and into a chamber in rear of the bridge 
Wall toward an escape flue or chimney. A 
door in the front wall allows fuel to be placed 
on the grate and into the fuel-chamber or 
fire-pot in the rear of the grate. 
It is obvious that by my novelarrangement 
and combination of a fire-pot having a closed 
bottom with a grate, a bridge-wall, and a de 
flector fuel placed on the grate and filled 
in the fire-pot can have a level top surface 
extending over the grate and fire-pot to the 
bridge-Wall in rear of the fire-pot, as required 
to produce a continuous line of fire from the 
front of the grate to the bridge-wall, and thus 
I claim as my invention 
Secure better results in obtaining head from 
In a furnace, a grate extending rearward 
a given quantity of fuel, in that there will be 
from the front wall between the side walls, a 
lmore complete combustion and no black 
wall extending downward at the rear end of 
Smoke or soot; but all particles of carbon or 
the grate and provided with a door at its bot 
tom portion, a floor extending rearward from 
carbonaceous gases liberated from the fuel 
Will be consumed and utilized to produce heat. 
said wall at the rear of the grate, adapted to 
In the practical operation of my invention 
serve as the closed bottom of a fire-pot, and a 
when fuelisplaced in the fuel-chamber or fire 
bridge-wall at the rear of said closed bottom, 
pot F and on the grate and fire started in both 
and an inverted bridge-wall or deflector above 
places the products of combustion rising from 
the two transverse walls, all constructed and 
the burning fuel will expand in the space 
arranged and combined and adapted to main 
above the fuel, and air admitted through the 
tain a continuous fire extending in a horizon 
door or openings in the front wall will mingle 
tal plane below the deflector and also below 
with the gases to promote combustion of all 
the top of the bridge-wall to the bridge-wall, 
the gases and particles of carbon liberated in the mannerset forth, for the purposes stated. 
from the fuel, and the narrow passage or 
throat that allows communication between 
THOMAS E. MARTIN. 
the space in front of the bridge-wall and an 
escape flue or chimney will aid in retaining 
the particles of carbon and valuable products 
J. M. SHUCK, 
THOMAS G. ORWIG. 
Witnesses: 
75 
85 
IC 
2d 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US484700.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. BURR. & M, MALONY. 
MACHINE FOR, NAPPING CLOTH, . 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 484,700, 
 
Patented Ot. 18, 1892. 
wn m 
O 
64%-6, 
Bru?/614 V6 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
(No Model.) 
G. W. BURR. & M, MALONY. 
MACHINE FOR, NAPPING CLOTH, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 484,700, 
Patented Oct. 18, 1892. 
WITNESSES 
&za, 
SY- 
SS : 
s 
57(2/6eez/ 
C/2e2% ozey 
ATTORNEYS, 
THE MORRIS PETERS co, Photo-Litho., washington, i.e. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. BURR, AND MICHAEL MALONY, OF WEBSTER, MASSACHUSETTS. 
MACHINE FOR NAPPING CLOTH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,700, dated October 18, 1892. 
Application filed February 1, 1892, Serial No. 419,917, (No model.) 
To att, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, GEORGE W. BURR and 
MICHAEL MALONY, both of Webster, in the 
County of Worcester and State of Massachu 
setts, have invented a new and Improved Ma 
chine for Napping Cloth, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
machines for finishing or raising the map on 
Woolen or Worsted goods, and is especially in 
tended to be used in connection with the or 
dinary shearing-machine. 
The object of our invention is to produce a 
simple attachment for a shearing-machine 
having oppositely-rotating napping-cylinders, 
With their needles arranged so as to raise the 
nap of the cloth both ways at the same time, 
and also to produce a tension device by means 
of which the pressure of the cloth upon the 
cylinders may be easily and accurately reg 
ulated. 
Our invention further consists in the pe 
culiar construction of the cylinder-needles; 
and With the above ends in view it consists 
in certain features of construction and com 
binations of parts, as will be hereinafter de 
Scribed and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
Corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the machine 
provided with our improved attachment. Fig. 
2 is a vertical longitudinal section of the same 
on the line 22 in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a broken 
side elevation showing our improved attach 
ment. Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail sectional 
view of one of the napping-cylinders with a 
portion of the exterior surface removed. Fig. 
5 is a broken plan view of one of the napping 
cylinders with the needles removed, and Fig. 
6 is a detail view of a modified mechanisin 
for driving the cylinders. 
The machine has the usual frame 10, like 
the Ordinary shear and gigging machine, and 
beneath the main portion of the frame is the 
customary form of curved bed 11, having a 
shelf i1 at one end. On the top of the frame 
are brackets 12, which support the common 
form of rotary shearing-cylinder 13, and oppo 
site the shear are the rests or guide-bars 14, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
5 3 
75 
over which the cloth runs and which serve to 
hold the cloth against the shearing-cylinder. 
The machine has, also, the usual brush 15, ar 
ranged centrally and transversely therein and 
mounted on the shaft 16, which has pulley 17 
at one end and is driven by a suitable driv 
ing-belt 18. 
The above construction is common to ma 
chines of this class and forms no part of our 
invention. At the opposite end of the shaft 
16 is a pulley 19, which connects by means of 
a belt 20 with a pulley on a shaft 21, which 
shaft extends transversely across one end of 
the machine, as shown in Figs. I and 2, and 
carries the upper napping-cylinder 22. There 
are two napping-cylinders 22 and 23, placed 
one above the other, and these are of exactly 
similar construction and are held to turn in 
opposite directions. Each cylinder comprises 
a core 24, a backing 25 for the cylinder-nee 
dles, which backing is composed of suitable 
firm material and is wrapped spirally about 
the core, the yielding substance 26 in the form 
of a fabric, which is wrapped exteriorly and 
spirally upon the backing 25, and the needles 
27, which are held in the material 26 and the 
inner ends of which rest upon the backing 25. 
The needles 27 are features of our inven 
tion and are of common carding-wire, but are 
bent back slightly at the point where they 
leave the material 26, and the ends of them 
are ground forward-that is, in the direction 
in which the cylinder rotates-so as to pro 
duce short sharp hooks, as shown in Fig. 4, 
which hooks serve to raise the nap of the cloth. 
The napping-cylinders are geared together at 
one end, being connected by the gear-wheels 
28, which causes them to rotate in opposite 
directions, the said short sharp hooks of both 
cylinders projecting in the direction of rota 
tion thereof, thus raising a nap both Ways on 
the cloth. The napping-cylinders may, how 
ever, be driven by any suitable mechanism, 
and another form of driving mechanism is 
shown in Fig. 6, where the upper cylinder is 
provided with a pulley 29, the lower one with 
a pulley 29, and a pair of pulleys 30 are 
mounted in a bracket 31, their shafts being 
held to slide in the slots 32 in the bracket and 
being secured in place by suitable nuts 324. 
The pulleys 30 are arranged below the nap 
90 
95 
Od 
484,700 
55 
may be turned, and by turning the shaft 53 
the shaft 50 may be also turned, so as to cause 
the pinions 49 to act on the rack-bars 47 and 5o 
either advance or retract the tension-roller 
41, so as to regulate exactly the pressure of 
cloth on the napping-cylinders. 
The cloth 56 is fed to the shearing-cylinder 
13 in the usual way, and from thence passes 
downward over the roller 37, beneath the 
brush 15, being operated on by the brush, 
thence beneath the parallel guide-rollers 38, 
over the guide-roller 39, beneath the guide 
roller 40, thence upward in front of the nap 
ping-cylinders and in contact with the tension 
roller 41, thence in front of the roller 42, up 
over the roller 43, beneath the roller 44, and 
over the roller 45 to the shelf 11 of the bed 11. 
The cloth is fed through the machine in 
the usual way; but the feeding mechanism is 
not illustrated, as it forms no part of our in 
vention. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
we claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent 
1. A napping-cylinder tooth having a rear 
ward-projecting outer end and a burr or hook 
ground on the end thereof and projecting for 
wardly at an angle from said outer end, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination, with the two parallel nap 
ping-cylinders having needles inclined in a 
direction opposite to their direction of rota 
tion and terminating in burrs or points 
ground on the ends thereof and projecting 
at an angle therefrom in the direction of ro 
tation of said cylinders, of mechanism for 
rotating the cylinders in opposite directions, 
and suitable guides for holding the fabric in 
proper relation to said cylinders to be acted 
upon by said burrs or points, substantially as 
set forth. 
75 
85 
GEORGE W. BURR. 
MICHAEL MATONY. 
Witnesses: 
C. L. DEWEY, 
R. A. DUNNING. 
ping-cylinders, and a continuous belt 33 runs 
over the pulleys 29 and 29 and beneath the 
pulleys 30. 
The machine has at the end opposite the 
napping-cylinders the usual guide-roller 34, 
with the small guide-bars35 at each side there 
of, a guide-roller 36 near the upper end of the 
machine and above the guide-roller 34, the 
guide-roller 37, arranged near the top of the 
machine and between the shearing-cylinders 
13 and the brush 15, so as to hold the cloth to 
the brush, guide-rollers 38, arranged parallel 
with each other and beneath the brush 15, so 
as to enable the cloth to properly pass the 
brush, a guide-roiler 39 in advance of the 
rollers 38 and a little above the same, a guide 
roller 40, arranged beneath the lower cylin 
der 23, and a tension-roller 41, arranged be 
tween the planes of the cylinders 22 and 23 
and a little in advance of them, this roller 
forming part of our invention. 
A guide-roller 42 is mounted above the up 
per cylinder, a guide-roller 43 on the top of 
the frame and in the rear of the roller 42, a 
guide-roller 44 in advance of and a little be 
low the roller 43, a guide-roller 45 above and 
in advance of the roller 44, and the usual 
swinging guide-frame 46. These guide-roll 
ers are arranged substantially as in the ordi 
nary machines of this class and form no part 
of our invention; but the tension-roller 41 is 
an important feature of the invention, as by 
it the pressure of cloth upon the napping 
cylinders maybe nicely adjusted. This roller 
41 has its ends journaled in rack-bars 47, 
which bars are held to slide horizontally in 
keepers 48, secured on the inner sides of the 
main frame, and the inner ends of the rack 
bars engage pinions 49 on a transverse shaft 
50, which shaft is journaled in suitable sup 
ports on the main frame and carries at one 
end a bevel gear-wheel 51, which meshes with 
a bevel-pinion 52 on the end of a shaft 53, 
the latter being mounted in keepers 54 and 
extending longitudinally along one side of 
the machine, the shaft terminating at one 
end in a hand-wheel 55, by means of which it 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US484800.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
N KUNS, . 
RUBBER DAM CLAMP, 
No. 484,800, 
w 
Patented Oot, 25, 1892, 
Z22's 
A- 
Ipop?r 
A%2/72azzaez Azz72s 
3y 22 S. Affarpeys, 
2z 2-562. 
liftesses 
: 2, 221 
.6%. 2.32e, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NATHANIEL KUNS, OF FAIRBURY, NEBRASKA. 
RUBBER. DAM CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,800, dated October 25, 1892. 
Application filed April 11, 1892, Serial No. 428,740, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, NATHANIELKUNs, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
of Fairbury, Jefferson county, and State of 
Nebraska, have invented certain new and use 
ful.Improvements in Rubber-Dam Clamps, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in rubber-dam clamps; 
and it consists of the construction and ar. 
rangement of the parts thereof, as will be 
hereinafter more fully described and claimed. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
an instrument of the character set forth to 
aid in the operation of filling teeth in that 
difficult and troublesome class of cases where 
the cavity to be filled extends high up on the 
labial or buccal surface of the root of the 
tooth, so that the gum overlaps or covers the 
cavity and obstructs operation, the parts of 
the device being simple and effective, strong 
and durable, easily and readily applied, and 
Comparatively inexpensive in manufacture 
and Sale. , 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the improved device. Fig. 2 is a top 
plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is a side ele 
vation thereof. Figs. 4 and 5 are detail views 
Of parts of the mechanism. 
Similar numerals of reference are employed 
to indicate corresponding parts in the several 
figures. 
Referring to the drawings, the numeral 1 
designates the main frame-bar, having a slot 
2 extending therethrough and a clamping 
Screw 3 extending centrally inward from one 
edge thereof and the inner end of the same 
projecting into said slot, and in the slot 2 is 
adjustably mounted a clamping-bar 4, which 
is held in position by a screw 3 and has the 
lower end thereof bent inward, as at 5, and 
the center struck up, as at 6, to form an in 
dentation adapted to bear against the tooth 
to be treated and force the gum away from 
the same. The ends of the frame-bar 1 are 
formed with screw-openings 7, in which are 
fitted the screw-threaded ends 8 of adjusting 
or clamping bars 9, arranged as a pair and 
having a central square surface 10, with an 
eye 11 therein adapted to receive the point 
of a suitable tool for turning the same. The 
opposite ends of the said adjusting or clamp 
ing bars 9 are also screw-threaded, as at 12, 
and in a reverse direction from the Screw 
threading of the end 8 of the same, and en 
gage screw-openings 13, formed in support 
ing-bars 14. By this means the frame-bar 1 
and the supporting-bars 14 may be adjusted 
to and from each other and carry the parts 
mounted in connection thereWith in similar 
directions. The opposite screw-threaded ends 
of the adjusting or clamping bars 9 are ar 
ranged in a right and left manner to engage 
correspondingly-formed Screw - openings in 
the frame-bar and the supporting-bars. The 
lower ends of the supporting-bars 14 at their 
inner opposing sides are concaved, as at 15, 
and have screw-openings 16 formed therein, 
which are engaged by the right and left screw 
stems 17 and 18, arranged in the central lon 
gitudinal axis of an elliptical loop or ring 19. 
The said loop or ring is adapted to be ad 
justed while held by the supporting-bars 14 
by operating the adjusting or clamping bars 
9 to and from the clamping-bar 4. The ring 
or loop 19 is easily fastened in position and 
adapted to be so arranged that both the edges 
thereof may have an equal bearing on the 
tooth against which it is pushed. In the up 
er and lower edges of the ring or loop in 
p 
dented lips 20 are formed, projecting from 
the inner edges thereof adjacent to the end 5 
of the clamping-bar 4 and corresponding with 
the struck-up or indented portion 6 of said 
bar, and by this means the tooth to be oper 
ated upon is held both by the indented clamp 
ing-bar 4 and the upper and lower indented 
lips 20, thereby providing three distinct bear 
ings against the tooth, all of which have 
smooth indented surfaces, and reducing the 
inconvenience of the use of such form of de 
vice to a minimum. The slight rotation of the 
loop or ring 19 is exceptionally valuable in 
instruments of this class, as by this means it 
can be made to fit teeth of any size or shape 
and secure in every case an even bearing of 
every point of contact between the instru 
ment and the tooth to which it is applied. 
The device entire is simple and advanta 
geous in its use, and many advantages will ap 
pear from time to time to those using the same. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
In a device of the character set forth, the 
TO 
3o 
35 
45 
So 
90 
95 
CO 
2 
484,800 
ring or loop held between the lower ends of 
said supporting-bars and formed with in Io 
dented lips at the upper and lower portions of 
the same, substantially as described. 
NATHANIEL KUNS. 
Witnesses: 
W. W. WATSON, 
BENJ. L. PURDY. 
combination of a main frame-bar, adjusting 
bars adjustably connected at right angles to 
said frame-bar and having right and leftscrew 
threads on opposite ends thereof, a clamping 
bar vertically adjustable in said frame-bar 
and having the lower end thereof bent inward 
and struck up, supporting-bars connected to 
the outer ends of said adjusting-bars, and a 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US484900.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 484,900. 
 
H. & B, OAKES, 
CAR COUPLING, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 25, 1892, 
Ayze. Z. 
ETS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
difrosses j 
a. 4. 
--K 
"r r 
1, 
y Zezz' Affarpeys, 
Ipilepfars 
Zez227 (2e24/2 
22:22, 
 
(No Model.) 
H. & B, OAKES, 
CAR COUPLING, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 484,900, 
Patented Oct. 25, 1892. 
  
 
 
 
a. 
:* i 
f A 
e / is 32 
- 
Z772 (r. 
A. Y. 
ba, 
i Ea?t 
SEEI 
se 
33 
I 
. 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
Gillia T. 
Synty 
2 
tilitresses 
%. 
. 
a 
yzeez Affarpeys, 
Ipilepiars 
ZezYaazed/ae 
Zez (2e2Zeas, 
r 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY OAKES, OF SILVER CITY, TERRITORY OF NEW MEXICO, AND BEN 
OAKES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 484,900, dated October 25, 1892. 
Application filed October 27, 1891, Serial No. 409,993, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To Q2.2 Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, HENRY OAKES, resid 
ing at Silver City, in the county of Grant and 
Territory of New Mexico, and BEN OAKES, 
residing at Chicago, in the county Cook and 
State of Illinois, citizens of the United States, 
have invented a new and useful Car-Coup 
ling, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to car-couplings, and 
more especially to the classes thereof known 
as twin-jaw and rotary-head; and the 
object of the same is to effect certain im 
provements in devices of this character. 
To this end the invention consists in a car 
coupling embodying a construction substan 
tially as hereinafter more fully described and 
claimed, and as illustrated on the two sheets 
of drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the end of 
a car With our improved coupling attached, 
showing the jaw in its normal position and 
viewing the whole slightly from the under 
side. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the draw-bar, 
draw-head, and jaw. Fig. 3 is a front eleva 
tion of the draw-head with the jaw removed. 
Fig. 4 is a bottom plan view of Fig. 2, show 
ing the dog in dotted lines as engaging the 
jaw to hold the latter in uncoupled position, 
and omitting the ear. Fig. 5 is a bottom plan 
view of two draw-heads in the act of coup 
ling. Fig. 6 is a central horizontal section 
through two draw-heads coupled. 
Referring to the said drawings, 1 is the car 
body, beneath which is the block 2. 3 is the 
dra W-bar passing through this block and hav 
ing an open mouth 4 with a rounded front 
end 5 and a vertical pin-opening 6. 7 is a 
vertical bolt passing through this draw-bar 
in rear of its mouth 4, and S is a plate on top 
of the draw-bar under the nut of this bolt, 
said plate moving in a slot 9 in the block 2, 
whereby the draw-bar has a slight vertical 
movement in addition to the longitudinal mo 
tion which is permitted by its buffer-springs, 
(not shown,) as well understood. The open 
ing of the block 2 is extended laterally at its 
upper end to receive lateral projections of 
the plate, which projections extend beyond 
the sides of the draw-bar. 
The draw-head has on its exterior an annu 
lar groove 10, around which turns the ring 
shaped body II of the jaw. Such jaw is dou 
ble-that is to say, arms 12 project forward 
and outward from diametrically - opposite 
sides of the ring, and carry at their front 
ends the jaws proper 13, which are oppositely 
beveled on their front faces, as shown at 14. 
When the jaws of two couplings of this char 
acter come together, the four faces 14 strike 
and slide over each other and the ringS 11 
(one or both) turn in the grooves 10, so as to 
permit the jaws to rotate relatively to a suffi 
cient degree to permit their beveled faces to 
pass each other, as seen in Fig. 5. The lower 
jaw 13 of each coupling is weighted, as at 15, 
so that after the jaws pass each other the 
weights turn them to their normally-vertical 
position, and the rear faces 16 of the heads 
are in contact. Said faces are slightly dished, 
as at 17, Fig. 2, which prevents the jaws dis 
engaging easily when under tension, and at 
this time the rounded ends 5 of the dra W 
heads permit the two couplings to have a 
slight lateral swinging movement, as will be 
obvious from an inspection of Fig. 6. This 
figure also shows how an ordinary link can 
be coupled into the mouth 4 of the draw-head 
when this coupling is connected with one of 
the conventional pin-and-link type. 
For the purpose of uncoupling the cars, we 
provide the following devices: 20 is a bracket 
depending from the car-body and having a 
slot 21, and 22 is a rod passing through this 
slot, having a handle 23 at its outer end and 
having a block with notched ends 24 (or a 
pair of stops) on its under side. The inner end 
of this rod passes through a slot 25 in an ear 
26, which is bolted or riveted to the lower 
jaw 14, the end of the rod having a T-head 
or cross-bar 27 for preventing its pulling 
through said slot, and at the other side of the 
ear an expansive spring 28 is coiled on the rod 
between a stop 29 thereon and the back of the 
ear. Thus when it is desired to uncouple the 
cars the handle 23 is grasped, the rod 22 is 
raised so as to disengage the outer end of the 
block 24 from the slot 21, and the handle is 
drawn out, whereby the head 27 of the rod 
will draw on the ear and turn the ring 11 
around the draw-head. If it is desired to 
lkeep the coupling in uncoupled position, the 
rod is then lowered, so that the inner end of 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
 
2 
484,900 
O 
3O 
35 
I5 
2O 
25 
the block 24 engages outside of the bracket 
20. In the first position, if the draw-head 
Were to be automatically coupled with an 
other the spring would permit it to rotate 
Without necessarily moving the rod, as will be 
clear. 
30 is a plate of inverted-U shape, which is 
Secured to the lower side of the draw-bar 3 
by the head of the bolt 7 and stands behind 
the lower arm 12 of the jaw, and this plate 
has at one side a tongue 31, which projects 
forward and serves as a stop to prevent the 
Weight 15 from turning the jaw beyond its 
proper vertical position. 
32 is a rod passing through an eye in the 
bracket 20 and having a handle 33 at its 
puter end, the inner end of this rod being 
journaled through the downturned portions 
of said plate 30 and prevented from displace 
ment by any means, as a split pin 37. On the 
rod within the plate is keyed or otherwise se 
cured a dog 39, whose tip is adapted to be 
turned forward and upward into a notch 35 
in the lower arm 12. With this construction 
the rod may be turned so as to cause the tip 
of the dog to stand in the notch 35 when the 
jaw. is in vertical position, thus locking it 
against an automatic uncoupling, and the 
friction of the rod in the eye of the bracket 
20 will prevent the dog falling; or, after the 
jaW has been swung to uncouple, the dog may 
be turned forward behind a lug. 35' on the 
body 11 to hold it in this position, as seen in 
dotted lines in Fig. 4. These devices are 
preferably auxiliary to those above described 
for operating the device. Still either set of 
devices could be used for this purpose. 
A car-coupling of this character possesses 
great strength and durability, is automatic in 
its action, is positive when locked, and is yet 
easy to uncouple or to lock in uncoupled po 
sition. If the cars do not stand exactly in 
the same horizontal plane, the couplings will 
work nearly if not quite as well, and should 
one draw-bar become detached from its sup 
port it cannot fall to the ground, and thus 
perhaps derail a car, because the upper jaw 
would strike on the front end of the draw 
head before the two jaws above said head be 
came disconnected. When two cars cometo 
gether and the jaws are deflected from a ver 
-- ---tical line, the faces of the draw-heads strike 
each other and act as buffers, thereby taking 
all the strain off the jaws at this time and 
allowing the Weights 15 to cause the jaws to 
turn to a vertical position and interlock. 
We do not confine ourselves to the exact 
details of construction, as considerable change 
may be made therein without departing from 
the spirit of our invention. Neither do we 
limit ourselves to the use in a single device 
of all the elements and features above de 
scribed, as some of them might be used alone 
or in other connections to great advantage. 
The sizes, shapes, and materials of parts are 
matters of no moment with respect to the 
45 
40 
s 
 
75 
novelty of the invention, and are hence not 
elaborated herein. 
What is claimed as new is 
1. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar having at its front end a draw 
head whose front face is slightly curved trans 
versely, said draw-head being provided with 
a mouth intersected by a pin-opening and ex 
teriorly with a groove, of a ring turning in 
said groove, arms projecting forward and 
outward from said ring, and jaws at the outer 
ends of said arms, having oppositely-beveled 
faces. 
2. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
the car-body, a block on the end thereof, hav 
ing a slot extended laterally at the uppe 
end, and a draw-bar extending through said 
slot and having a draw-head, of a vertical 
bolt through said bar and a plate secured 
upon the bar by the -bolt and projecting lat 
erally from the draw-bar and moving in the 
extensions of the slot. 
3. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar having a draw-head and a plate 
secured beneath said bar and having a for 
wardly - projecting tongue, of a rotary jaw 
mounted on said head and resting normally 
against said tongue. 
4. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar and a plate secured beneath the 
same and having a forwardly-projecting 
tongue, of a rotary jaw connected with said 
bar and resting normally against said tongue, 
this jaw having a beveled face at its front 
end, and means for drawing the jaw away 
from said tongue. 
5. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar, a plate of inverted-U shapese 
cured beneath the same and having a for 
wardly-projecting tongue at one side, a rod 
journaled horizontally through said plate and 
having a handle, and a dog fast on the rodbe 
tween the sides of the plate, of a rotary jaw 
connected with said bar and resting normally 
against the tongue, said jaw having a notch 
in normal alignment with the dog, and means 
for drawing the jaw away from said tongue. 
6. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar, a vertical bolt passing there 
through, a bearing held by said bolt beneath 
the bar, a rod journaled in said bearing and 
having a handle, and a dog fast on said rod, 
of a rotary jaw connected with said bar for 
ward of the bearing and having a notch in 
normal alignment with the dog and means 
for turning the jaw. 
7. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar and a stop beneath the same, of a 
rotary jaw mounted on said bar and having 
a beveled face, a weight bearing the jaw nor 
mally against said stop, and means for turn 
ing the jaw in the opposite direction. 
8. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar having a stop, a rotary jaw on said 
bar having a beveled front face, and a weight 
holding the jaw normally against said stop, of 
90 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
20 
I 25 
484,900 
45 
So 
55 
passes, and a block on the rod of a size to pass 
through the slot, as and for the purpose Set 
forth. 
13. In a car-coupling, the combination, With 
a draw-bar having a stop, a rotary jaw on Said 
bar, and a weight holding it normally against 
the stop, of a slotted bracket on the car-body, 
a rod passing through the slot therein, a block 
depending from the rod and of a size to pass 
through said slot, and a yielding connection, 
substantially as described, between the rod 
and the jaw permitting the latter to moye 
from said stop, but limiting its movement in 
the other direction. 
14. In a car-coupling, the combination, With 
a draw-bar having a stop, a rotary jaW mount 
ed thereon and having a notch, and a Weight 
holding the jaw normally against the stop, of 
a bearing beneath the bar, an oscillating rod 
journaled therein, a dog fast on the rod and 6 
adapted to engage said notch, a second rod 
connected with said jaw, and a bracket on the 
car-body through which said rods extend. 
15. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar having a bearing, a rotary ja:W 
mounted on the bar and having a notch, an 
oscillating rod turning in said bearing, and a 
dog fast thereon and adapted to engage said 
notch, of a second rod connected with saidjaW 
and a bracket on the car-body through which 
both rods extend. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
o 
HENRY OAKES, 
BEN OAKES. 
Witnesses: 
E. COSGROVE, 
H. G. HAYES.. 
a slotted ear depending from the jaw and a 
rod passing through the slot, having a head 
beyond the same extending to the side of the 
car and having a handle. 
9. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar having a stop, a rotary jaw on said 
bar, and means for holding it normally against 
the stop, of a bracket on the car-body, having 
a slot, a rod connected with the jaw and pass 
ing through the slot, and a block depending 
from the rod, as and for the purpose set forth. 
10. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar having a stop, a rotary jaw on said 
bar, and means for holding it normally against 
the stop, of a slotted ear depending from the 
jaW, a rod passing through said slot, having 
a head beyond the same and extending to the 
side of the car, a stop on said rod at the back 
of the ear, and an expansive spring between 
the ear and stop. 
ll. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar having a stop, a rotary jaw on said 
bar, and means for holding it normally against 
the stop, of a slotted ear depending from the 
jaw, a rod passing through said slot, having 
a head beyond the ear and extending to the 
side of the car, a stop on the rod at the back 
of the ear, an expansive spring between the 
ear and stop, and means for locking said rod 
at the side of the car in one of two positions. 
12. In a car-coupling, the combination, with 
a draw-bar having a stop, a rotary jaw on said 
bar, and a Weight holding it normally against 
the stop, of a perforated ear depending from 
the jaw, a rod passing through the ear, hav 
ing a head beyond it and extending to the 
Side of the car, a stop on the rod at the back 
of the ear, an expansive spring between the 
stop and ear, a slotted bracket supported 
by the car and through whose slot the rod 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485000.txt	No Model.) 
C. CURTIS & N. M. JONES. 
PAPER. PULP DIGESTER, 
No. 485,000. 
 
Patented Oct. 25, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
: *NN 
ff(esses 
DJ LLLrrrLL 
LLL0L LSSYLLLLLLLSEJLLCCS ELYLLLLLLL0LS LLS S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES CURTIS, OF NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS, AND NATHANIEL M. 
JONES, OF BANGOR, MAINE. 
PAPER PUP DG ESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,000, dated October 25, 1892. 
v 
Application filed April 18, 1892, Serial No. 429,525, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all ?ph???, it ??? ???????*?: 
Be it known that we, CHARLES CURTIs, of 
Newton, in the county of Middlesex and State 
of Massachusetts, and NATHANIEL M. JoNES, 
of Bangor, in the county of Penobscot and 
State of Maine, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Paper-Pulp Di 
gesters, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to digesters for cook 
ing or disintegrating Wood chips for the manu 
facture of paper-pulp, and particularly to that 
class of digesters for said purpose in which 
the digester is provided with a lining of a 
metal adapted to resist the acid solution or 
liquor employed in disintegrating the wood, 
lead being the metal usually employed. Much 
difficulty has been experienced in keeping 
the lead linings of digesters in proper condi 
tion, owing to the fact that the lead lining 
has been made practically continuous or of 
large sheets joined to constitute a practically 
continuous lining, which rests upon the metal 
shell or body of the digester. The expansion 
of the shell and lead lining causes constant 
liability of the lining to separate from the 
the shell and to hang loosely and in many 
cases to crack or break, thus permitting the 
access of the acid liquor to the iron shell, the 
liquor attacking the shell and rapidly eating 
or corroding the same. 
Our invention has for its object to provide 
a digester having a lining of lead or other 
acid-resisting metal in which the difficulties 
existing heretofore shall be obviated and the 
lining rendered durable and economical. 
To this end the invention consists as a 
whole in a digester comprising an external 
metal shell, a lining composed of blocks or 
sections of artificial stone, and an inner lin 
ing composed of sheets of lead or other acid 
resisting material placed upon the inner faces 
of the artificial-stone sections and suitably Se 
cured to the latter, the lining being composed 
of sections, each of which is secured inde 
pendently of the others, so that the innerlin 
ing as a whole is secured to its Support along 
a number of lines extending both horizontally 
and vertically, the liability of injurious sepa 
ration of the inner lining from its Support be 
ing thus prevented. 
The invention also consists in certain im 
provements in the details of construction, all 
of which we will now proceed to describe. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure represents 
a horizontal section of a cylindrical digester 
Constructed in accordance with our inven 
tion. Fig. 2 represents a vertical section on 
line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents sectional 
views of the ends of two adjacent blocks or 
sections composing the intermediate lining, 
which supports the inner lining 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
Same parts in all the figures. 
In the drawings, a represents a metal shell, 
which may be of iron or steel and constructed 
in the usual or any suitable way, said shell 
being, if desired, of the construction common 
in digesters composed of an external shell and 
a lining of lead. 
In carrying out our invention we line the 
shell Ci in the following manner: We take a 
Series of slabs or sections b of artificial stone 
composed, preferably, of cement and pow 
dered quartz treated with silicate of soda or 
water-glass. Said sections are formed pre 
viously to their application to the shell, and 
they are molded so as to conform to the curva 
ture of the inner surface of the shell in case 
the latter is cylindrical. The sections b are 
preferably provided with rabbeted edges b', 
the rabbet of the edge of each plate overlap 
ping that of the adjacent plate both in the 
horizontal and vertical sections of the diges 
ter, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Each of these 
sections b is preferably formed with the rab 
bets of two of its edges on the inner face of 
said Section and with the rabbets of the other 
two edges on the outer face of the section, as 
indicated in the drawings. To the inner sur 
faces of the sectionsb weapply sheets or plates 
c, of lead or other suitable acid - resisting 
metal, said sheets entirely covering the inner 
surfaces of the sections b and being prefer 
ably formed to be turned over upon the edges 
of Said sections, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the 
turned-over portions constituting flanges c', 
interposed between the adjacent edges of the 
Sections b. Said flanges may be engaged with 
the sections b in any suitable way to prevent 
them from being withdrawn, a suitable means 
II. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
50 
95 
OO 
485,000 
?? 
75 
means here shown for securing the lining 
plates c, and may secure the same in any other 
suitable manner. 
We prefer to interpose a layer e of any 
suitable cement between the shell a and the 
blocks b, said layer being applied in a plastic 
state while the blocks b are being placed in 
position and serving to hold said blocks in 
place. 
Strips g of any suitable acid-resisting metal 
may be soldered or otherwise secured to the 
innerlining in position to cover the joints 
between the plates c thereof. 
We claim 
1. A digester comprising in its construction 
an external metal shell, a lining of blocks or 
sections of artificial stone, and an inner lin 
ing composed of independent plates or sheets 
of acid-resisting material, each of said plates 
or sheets being engaged independently with 
one of the said blocks or sections, as set forth. 
2. A digester composed of an external metal 
shell, a lining of blocks or sections of artifi 
cial stone, and an inner lining composed of 
plates or sheets c, having their edges bent to 
form flanges which are interposed between 
the said blocks or sections, as set forth. 
3. A digester comprising in its construction 
an external metal shell, a lining of blocks or 
sections of artificial stome, and an inner lin 
ing composed of independent plates or sheets 
of acid-resisting material, each of said lining 
plates or sheets being engaged at its margin 
with the margin of one of said blocks, as set 
forth. 
4. The combination, in a digester, of the 
blocks or sections of artificial stone having 
grooves b in their abutting edges and the 
lining plates or sheets having beaded flanges 
the beads of which are engaged with said 
grooves, as set forth. 
5. A digester comprising an external shell, 
a lining composed of blocks or sections of ar 
tificial stone, acid-resisting lining-plates 
placed on the inner surfaces of said blocks, 
and strips of acid-resisting material covering 
the joints between said plates. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 8th day of 
April, A. D. 1892. 
y 
CHARLES CURTIS. 
NATHANIEL M. JONES. 
Witnesses: 
C. F. BROWN, 
A. D. HARRISON. 
90 
95 
I OO 
of engagement being beads or enlargements 
c, formed on the inner edges of the flanges, 
and grooves b, formed in the sections b, as 
shown in Fig. 3, to receive said beads, and 
thus lock the flanges c' between the sections 
b. We prefer to pack the joints between the 
flanges of the plates C by means of a suitable 
acid-resisting filling or packing d, which may 
be of cement or any other suitable material. 
The object of protecting, as by leadsheets, 
the exposed faces of the sections, which are 
in themselves almost practically acid-proof, 
is to provide against the possibility of the 
cracking of the section or block, and also to 
provide against the possibility of the corrosion 
of the section, or block, because cement is 
sometimes liable to become corroded, owing 
to the presence of free lime or carbonates. 
It will be seen that the sections band the lin 
ing-plates c, secured to the inner surfaces of 
said sections, constitute a sectional lining of 
which the sections b constitute the rigid or 
supporting portion and the plates c the acid 
resisting or acting portion, the inner lining 
being composed of a large number of com 
paratively-small sheets or sections, which are 
secured to their supportindependently of the 
other section, so that the inner lining as a 
whole is secured at a large number of points 
or lines to its rigid support. Hence there is 
no possibility of any extended separation of 
the inner lining from its support in conse 
quence of the expansion of the material of 
the inner lining, the comparatively-small size 
of the plates C preventing any material dis 
placement of the material of the lining by ex 
pansion. Since the drawings illustrate only 
parts of the digester and do not include the 
manholes thereof, it will be readily under 
stood that the construction and arrangement 
of the parts at such manholes may be of any 
preferred mechanical construction. 
By the employment of an intermediate lin 
ing or rigid support composed of blocks of 
artificial stone as a means for holding the in 
ner lining We reduce to the minimum the ex 
pansion and contraction of the support for 
the lining, the artificial stone having a much 
smaller coefficient of expansion and contrac 
tion than the shell Ct. Moreover, the sections 
b, being of considerable thickness, prevent 
the heat from the interior of the digester from 
materially affecting the shell a. 
We do not limit ourselves to the employ. 
ment of lead as the lining, and may use any 
other suitable acid-resisting metal. 
We do not limit ourselves to the particular 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485100.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. GALLOWAY. 
QUILTING ATTACHMENT FOR SEWING MACHINES, 
No. 485, l00. 
 
Patented Oct. 25, 1892. 
2 
s --msmiliesteer. 
Ipepfar 
h 
H ift 2ssas 
% & (27te-e-, 
6%. 1% T 22-4--a 
y 4- Affarpeys, 
J. C. 6aaZozeay 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. GALLOWAY, OF BALLINGER, TEXAS. 
QUILTING ATTACHMENT FOR SEWING-MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,100, dated October 25, 1892. 
Application filed May 24, 1892, Serial No. 434,121 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN C. GALLOWAY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bal 
linger, in the county of Runnels and State of 
Texas, have invented a new and useful Quilt 
ing-Frame, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to quilting-frames of 
that class designed for use in connection with 
sewing-machines; and it consists of the con 
struction and arrangement of the several 
parts, as will be more fully hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
device of the character set forth adapted to 
be adjusted in any manner desired over the 
leaf, table, or arm of a sewing-machine, the 
parts being simple and effective in their con 
struction and operation. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the improved device. Fig. 2 is a cen 
tral transverse vertical section. Fig. 3 is an 
end elevation of the quilting-frame proper. 
Fig. 4 is a detail elevation of a part of the 
frame. 
Similar numerals of reference are employed 
to indicate corresponding parts in the several 
views. 
Referring to the drawings, the numeral I 
designates apost or standard which is mounted 
on a suitable base 2 of sufficient size and 
weight to hold the device entire in equilib 
rium. From the top portion of one side of 
the said post or standard projects an arm 3, 
which has its inner end 4 shouldered and 
dovetailed to fit a dovetail recess 5 in the top 
of the post and supplied with an under sup 
porting-bracket 6. The front or free end of 
the arm 3 is beveled and has a bevel-sided 
projection 7, fitting a corresponding recess S 
in the central portion of a track-bar 9, which 
is secured against the end of said arm. The 
upper edge of the bar 9 is beveled on oppo 
site sides to form a V-shaped edge 10, having 
projections 11 extending upward from oppo 
site ends. The track-bar 9 is adapted to re 
ceive a grooved wheel 12, carried by a hanger 
13, which is closed on one side and open on 
the opposite side, so that the wheel 12 may 
be placed in engagement with and disengaged 
from the track-bar 9 at will, and the Said 
wheel is adapted to be limited in its endwise 
3O 
35 
45 
 
65 
75 
movement by the projections 11, which pre 
vent the same from rolling off the ends of the 
bar 9. The lower end of the hanger 13 is 
swiveled centrally to a bar 14 by a bolt 13, 
passing through said parts, said bar being at 
tached at its opposite ends to the upper cen 
tral portions of end yokes or curved arms 15, 
Supporting the quilting-rollers 16, 17, and 18 
and comprising the quilting-frame proper. 
The ends 19 of the bar 14 are formed into 
journals and extend through openings 20 in 
said yokes and are separably held in con 
nection with said yokes by pins 21, passing 
transversely through the said ends 19 and 
bearing against the outer surfaces of the said 
yokes or arms 15. By means of the construc 
tion described the quilting-frame may be 
turned in a circular line horizontally or os 
cillated transversely or laterally to thereby 
adjust the same to proper position for differ 
ent kinds of work in sewing the quilt. The 
rollers 16 and 18 are removably fitted to their 
supporting-arms and the roller 17 journaled 
as shown. Each of the rollers are supplied 
with ratchet-wheels 22 at their opposite ends, 
adapted to be engaged by pawls 23, situated 
adjacent thereto and by means of which the 
adjustment of the several rollers may be 
readily sustained. The intention and use of 
these rollers are readily understood by those 
skilled in the art. 
It will be observed that the end yokes or 
arms 15 are not connected by braces or ties 
of any form other than the parts shown to 
avoid obstruction of the passage through and 
between said yokes or arms, and said parts 
are thereby so arranged as to form a clear open 
ing at opposite ends of the quilting-frame 
proper, said openings being in the form of 
arches, making it convenient to swing or turn 
the said quilting-frame without striking or 
interfering with the frame or leaf of the ma 
chine, and, also, said quilting-frame is caused 
to straddle the arm of the machine, for fancy 
stitching or other manipulation. By means 
of the pivotal mounting of the arms or yokes 
15, as hereinbefore-set forth, the quilt can al 
ways be kept at a level on the sewing-ma 
chine and avoid raising or tilting one side of 
quilt higher than the other, and when nearing 
completion of the quilt there will be more 
weight on one roller than on the other two 
- 
95 
OO 
 
485,100 
O 
- 
dent. 
rollers, and the tendency of the quilt to tilt 
is not so great as would be the case were 
cross braces and ties employed, as will be evi 
As before referred to, the base 2 may be 
sustained in position by its size and weight; 
but as an additional means of sustaining the 
same in proper position screws24 are adapted 
to be inserted through openings in said base, 
which may be readily secured to the floor or 
other place of securement. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. In a quilting-frame, the combination of 
a standard supporting a track-bar, a hanger 
carrying a wheel movably mounted on said 
track-bar, a bar swiveled to said hanger and 
having end journals, and curved end yokes 
or arms movably connected to said end jour 
nals of the latter bar and supporting-rolliers, 
said curved end yokes or arms having the 
said bar connected to the central part of the 
upper portions of the same and open at their 
lower ends to form an unobstructed passage 
way, substantially as described. 
2. In a quilting-frame, the combination of 
a standard supporting a track-bar and a 
quilting-frame proper having a hanger carry 
ing a grooved wheel engaging said track-bar 
and curved end yokes or arms with upper 
connecting-arches and depending legs with a 
clear space between the same, said legs being 
parallel and unconnected at the bottom 
thereof, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses, 
- 
JOHN C. GALLOWAY. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
J. M. BADGER, 
W. E. SHARP, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485200.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 485,200, 
Z'g. 7. 
W. R. KNIGHT & W. R. OWNBY. 
CAR COUPLING, 
Patented Nov. 1, 1892. 
 
 
  
 
  
E. If 2 
2 2 2 
 
 
 
 
3yaeer Affa rpeys, 
Wanighit. 
WIRowzzy. 
6%-56 al 
The NORRIS perfeRS 
co, PHOTo-LITHo, washingtoN. D. c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. KNIGHT AND WILLIAM R. OWNBY, OF RECTOR, ARKANSAS, 
ASSIGNORS OF ONE-THIRD TO DANIEL W. MCPHERSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR COUPNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,200, dated November 1, 1892. 
Application filed June 24, 1892, Serial No. 437,852, (No model.) 
5 
O 
5 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM R. KNIGHT 
and WILLIAM R. OWNBY, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Rector, in the 
county of Clay and State of Arkansas, have 
invented a new and useful Car-Coupling, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
car-couplings. 
The object of the present invention is to 
simplify and improve the construction of car 
couplings and to provide means whereby a 
coupling-link may be readily held at the de 
sired elevation to direct it into the draw-head 
of a car without necessitating a person going 
between cars. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claim hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a car-coupling constructed in accord 
ance with this invention. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal sectional view. Fig. 3 is a detail per 
spective view of the link-lifting plate. 
designates a draw-head having the usual 
longitudinal link opening or cavity and pro 
vided with coupling-pin perforations, in which 
is arranged a coupling-pin 2. Journaled in 
the bottom of the draw-head is a rock-shaft 
3, which carries a link-lifting plate 4, adapted 
to raise a link 5 to the desired elevation, so 
that the link will enter the cavity or opening 
of another draw-head. The link-lifting plate 
is rectangular and is adapted to fit upon the 
bottom of the draw-head, and is provided with 
a longitudinal slot 6 to receive the coupling 
pin and to permit it to work independently 
of the same, and is provided in its upper face 
with grooves 7, adapted to receive the sides 
of a link to permit the latter to obtain a hold 
upon the link-lifting plate to prevent lateral 
movement. The rock-shaft 3 is provided at 
one end with a crank-handle 8, formed inte 
gral with it, and connected to an arm 9 of a 
rock-shaft 10 by a link 11. The rock-shaft 10 
is journaled in suitable bearings of a car and 
35 
45 
 
So 
55 
75 
is provided at its ends with handles arranged 
at the sides of the car to enable the link-lift 
ing plate to be operated at the sides of the 
car to avoid going between the cars being 
coupled. The end 12 of the link is provided 
with an eye to receive the horizontal arm of 
the crank-handle and is secured to the same 
by keys 13, passing through perforations of 
the crank-handle and the other end of the 
link is bifurcated and is pivoted to the arm 
9 of the rock-shaft 10. The rock-shaft 3 is 
provided at its other end with a detachable 
crank-handle 14, which may be turned by hand 
or connected with the top of the car or else 
where, if desired. 
It will be seen that the car-coupling is sim 
ple and comparatively inexpensive in con 
struction and that the coupling-link may be 
readily held at the desired elevation, coupling 
without necessitating a person going between 
CS, . 
What we claim is 
In a car-coupling, the combination of a draw 
head, a coupling-pin, a rock-shaft journaled 
in the bottom of the draw-head and provided 
at one end with a crank-handle having perfo 
rations in its horizontal arm, said rock-shaft 
being arranged in rear of the coupling-pin, a 
link-lifting plate arranged on the bottom of 
the draw-head and provided in its upper face 
with grooves and having a longitudinal coup 
ling-pin slot and secured at its rear end to the 
rock-shaft, a rock-shaft 10, provided with an 
arm 9, a link pivoted to the arm 9 and pro 
vided with an eye receiving the horizontal arm 
of the crank-handle, keys arranged in the per 
forations of said crank-handle and securing 
the link to the Salme, and a detachable crank 
handle secured to the other end of the rock 
shaft 3, substantially as described. 
In testimony that We claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM R. KNIGHT. 
WILLIAM R. OWN BY. 
Witnesses: 
J. M. COPELAND, 
FRANKNEELY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485300.txt	(No Model.) 
P. C. H., RUDD, 
ROTARY OWEN, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 485,300. 
Patented Nov. l. l892, 
s it. 
T s 
WHL 
SSS 
KaNNNN 
Na I 
 Sitti 
SIZH 
UE 
S. 
S 
H"7-2 H 
HA-21 s 
N 
N 
SS 
6-1SSSSS HR 
| litiFiS 
illllSSNs 
Isliitiiii SS 
::iii Hilti 
till SS 
;AttilitiS 
-- 
S. H 
SSSSSSS 
tilt SSNNS 
SSSSSS 
The Norris Peters Co., Photo-ITHo washington, D. c. 
 
P. C. H. R, UDD, 
ROTARY OWEN, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 1, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
No. 485,300. 
 
  
  
SN 
N 
NNN \ SN SN 
  
 
 
 
S S. 
N N 
7,664. It 
6 NH 
H-Z, 1. 
NNNNNNNNNN 
N v 
WIN.III 
III 
| 
| 
i 
7 
Z27 
Z 
Z 
Zizard. 
267.2. 
Z\ 
a SNS El 
e 
Zazzasses. ELL I-7 inven/or 
Z222767/76eeze 
S\ S.N.Sw- 
 
 
 
e 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER. C. H. RUDD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ROTARY OVEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,300, dated November 1, 1892. 
Application filed July 6, 1891, Serial No. 398,447, (No model.) 
O 
15 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER C. H. RUDD, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Rotary 
Oven, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
rotary Ovens; and the objects of my inven 
tion are, first, to provide a circular rotary 
plate having a substantially-air-tight passage 
Way for the passage of the heat and products 
of Combustion from the furnace beneath the 
Whole circuit of the under surface of said 
plate to the smoke-stack; second, to provide 
a means for pricking or perforating the dough 
to be baked as the said upper plate rotates. 
I attain these objects by the mechanism illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a top view of my said rotating 
Oven. With the roof or cover thereof removed 
and the upper plate partially broken away, 
showing the lower plate, furnace, and passage 
beneath the whole circuit of the under sur 
face of the upper circular plate to the smoke 
stack. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of my oven 
On the line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a horizontal 
section of my device on the line 33, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a circular section on the circular line 
44, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a sectional view of the up 
per circular plate and lower plate or frame, 
showing the flanges on the upper plate and 
grooves or troughs on the lower plate or frame. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
AA is a solid circular base of brick or other 
B is the furnace having grate b, ash-pit b', 
and fire-box b. 
Upon the circular base AA is placed a cir 
cular plate C, having at its outer and inner 
edges circular grooves or troughs D and D', 
formed by upright double flanges on said 
plate, which troughs contain sand or other 
suitable material. Instead of this under 
plate C may be used, for purposes of econ 
omy, a metallic framework supporting said 
troughs, closely fitted to the base Aby means 
of mortar and cement. An upper circular 
plate E E is placed above the lower plate or 
framework C. Said upper plate E E may be 
of one piece of metal or of several pieces riv 
Suitable material. 
eted together and have at each of its edges a 
single flange e and e', fitting into the troughs 
or grooves D and D'. The troughs or grooves 55 
D and D'being filled with sand, the flanges e 
and e' form in said groove a substantially 
air-tight closure, making a passage-way Sub 
stantially air-tight beneath the whole circuit 
of the upper plate. This upper plate E E is 6o 
connected by the arms or braces f to a collar 
f'. Said collar fits closely to and rotates with 
a vertical shaft G, to which said collar is fas 
tened by means of a set-screw g or in any 
other suitable manner. Diagonal braces f 65 
extend from a lower collarh, which collar en 
braces said upright shaft G, and is also rig 
idly attached to said shaft by a set-screw or 
other suitable means to the inside edge of said 
circular plate. Said diagonal braces are riv-io 
eted to lugs on said plate. Said vertical shaft 
may be pointed at its lower extremity to fa 
cilitate its rotation on the basei. This up 
right shaft may be rotated by hand or by 
steam power in any suitable manner, and when 75 
rotated the upper plate E E will be rotated 
with it. Between the fire-box of the furnace 
and the aperture G, communicating With the 
smoke-stack, is a wall or partition k, which is 
of sufficient height to fit closely against the 8o 
lower side of the upper plate EE. This wall 
lc prevents the heat and gases from the fur 
nace from passing into the aperture G di 
rectly from the furnace, and the heat and 
gases are therefore compelled, in order to reach 85 
the vent G, to pass the whole circuit beneath 
the plate E. E. A valve or door l, pivoted at 
its lower extremity, opens and closes a pas 
sage-way between the furnace and the aper 
ture G. 
L is a smoke-stack communicating at its 
lower extremity with the aperture G. A ta 
pering roller is removably pivoted at each 
end in the stationary bent arm in and has 
on it projections or prickers to perforate or 95 
prick the dough as it is baked in said oven. 
Said circular plates may, if desired, be cov 
ered by a removable wire-gauze covering N, 
which wire-gauze covering is also covered by 
an asbestus roofing material for the reten- Ioo 
tion of the heat. In said wire roofing or cow 
ering is a door N, pivoted at its lower end, 
which may be opened to afford communica 
tion with the interior of said covering. Said 
90 
25 
35 
45 
 
48580) 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a rotary oven, the combination, with 
a rotary plate or platform provided with de 
pending sealing-flanges and grooves or troughs 
beneath, said plate or platform, into which 
said flanges extend, of a furnace or fire-box 
located at one side of the said rotary plate 
or platform, a draft-flue or vent adjacent to 
said furnace or fire-box, and a circular flue 
beneath said rotary plate or platform extend 
ing from said furnace or fire-box to said draft 
flue or vent, whereby the products of combus 
tion will be confined in place and will be 
caused to travel entirely around beneath said 
rotary plate or platform. 
2. The combination, with the circular ro 
tary plate or platform E, having the depend 
ing flanges ele', of the stationary circular 
plate C, having the circular grooves or troughs 
D D', into which said flanges extend and 
which are adapted to hold a sealing material, 
assand, to confine the heatin the circular flue 
or passage between: said plates. 
3. In a "rotary oven, a rotating roller sup 
ported above a revolving plate for the pur 
pose of pricking or perforating the dough or 
other substance thereon, substantially as 'de 
scribed. 
PETER. C. H. RUDED. 
35 
40 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
G. E. LANAGHEN, 
JEANIE MCADAM. 
Wire-gauze covering and roofing are supported 
by any sort of proper framework braced by a 
rod n and may be entirely removed, if de 
sired. 
In operation, fire being kindled in the fire 
box of the furnace, the door l may be opened 
for the purpose of giving a greater direct 
draft for the starting of said fire; but after 
Said fire is thoroughly started the said door l 
is closed, and the heat and gases of combus 
tion are then compelled to pass through the 
passage-way formed between the upper and 
lower plates C and E E until they reach the 
aperture G, when they pass out through the 
Smoke-stack. The upper plate is caused to 
rotate by the rotation of the vertical shaft G. 
All parts of the upper plate EE are thus com 
pelled to pass over the furnace and are thor 
oughly heated in this manner. The heat 
from the furnace passing through said pas 
sage-Way between the upper and lower plates, 
throughout their whole circuit, keeps all parts 
of the upper plate warm during its rotation. 
The dough or material to be baked is placed 
upon this upper plate EE, and is thus: thor 
oughly heated and baked. The rollerm, com 
ing in contact with the dough, is rotated by 
the motion of the plate EE and pricks or per 
forates the dough, thus permitting the vapor 
which generates in the dough when being 
baked to escape, and prevents the formation 
- 
of bubbles and blisters thereon. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
O 
2C) 
25 
30 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485400.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
. 
W. D. WATSON. 
MACHINE FOR RAISING THE PILE OF WOWEN FABRICS, 
No. 485,400, 
Patented Nov. 1, 1892. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 485,400, 
W. D. WATSON. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR RAISING THE PIE OF WOWEN FABRICS, 
Patented Nov. 1, 1892. 
EE 
N 
HEIHEIT III 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. WATSON, OF ROCHDALE, ENGLAND. 
MACHINE FOR RAISING THE PILE of woven FABRics. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,400, dated November 1, 1892, 
Application filed June 17, 1891, Serial No. 396,559, (No model.) Patented in England August 22, 1890, No. 13,192, 
55 
75 
- To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMDOBSON WAT 
SON, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain 
and Ireland, residing at Rochdale, in the 
county of Lancaster, England, have invented 
an Improved Machine for Raising the Pile of 
Woven Fabrics, (for which I have applied for 
lBritish Patent, No. 13,192, dated August 22, 
1890) of which the following is a specification. 
This invention is intended principally for 
batting or raising the pile of a fabric known 
as imitation seal-skin;' but it may also be 
used with advantage for raising the pile of 
other fabrics of a like nature which are Woven 
double face to face and then split or cut asun 
der, so as to form two pieces having an erect 
pile. 
The object of this invention is to stretch or 
distend the fabric widthwise and to raise the 
pile by batting or beating the surface with 
sticks while stretched to its fullest extent. 
The nature of my said invention and the 
manner in which the same is to be performed 
or carried into practical effect will be readily 
understood on reference to the two sheets of 
drawings hereunto annexed and the follow 
ing explanation thereof. 
Figure 1, Sheet 1, of the drawings repre 
sents a vertical section, and Fig. 2, Sheet 2, a 
horizontal section, of the improved combined 
stretching and batting machine which forms 
the subject of my invention. 
The improved apparatus consists, essen 
tially, of a frame a, carrying an axle b, sup 
orting two disks or wheels c, with pins or 
tenter-hooks around their circumference. 
The bosses c' of these wheels c run in circu 
lar grooves or otherwise revolve around two 
blocks or slides d, which are mounted upon 
the central shaft or axle b, upon which is cut 
or formed a right and left hand screw-thread 
e, and the blocks or slides d are bored and 
screwed to fit it, They are not, however, bored 
at right angles to the face of the same, but in 
a slightly-diagonal direction, as shown at the 
left hand of the machine on Sheet 2, So that 
the blocks d are inclined instead of being 
parallel to each other, or instead of boring 
out blocks in a diagonal direction they may 
be made larger, as shown at the right hand 
on Sheet 2, and have a rectangular opening 
made at right angles. Inside this opening is 
a Square nut?, which is bored out and screw 
threaded to fit the axle b, and the block d is 
fixed thereon at the required inclination by 
means of reversed wedges g. 
Whichever 
method may be adopted, the blocks d are 
canted outward from each other, and the 
wheels or disks c, running thereon, are thus 
inclined in opposite directions, and it will be 
evident that as they revolve in the outside of 
the said blocks any two opposite points on 
their circumference will gradually approach 
to and recede from each other alternately. 
The blocks or slides d do not revolve, but 
they are mounted in or on slides, and they can 
be set nearer to or farther from each other, ac 
cording to the width of the fabric, by turning 
the right and left hand screw-threaded shaft 
or axleb by means of the hand-wheel h, pro 
vided for that purpose. The two wheels or 
disks c are furnished on the outer side, near 
the circumference, with a circle of pins or pegs 
l, gearing into two spur-pinions k, keyed upon 
a revolving shaftl, whereby a slow revolving 
motion is given to the said wheels or disks. 
A feeding-roller m (see Fig. 1) is provided 
for guiding the cloth onto the apparatus, and 
also a drawing or delivering roller n, (see also 
Fig. 1.) which is covered with pins. Any re 
quisite amount of drag or longitudinal stretch 
may be put upon the cloth previously to feed 
ing into the machine by rollers o or by ten 
sion-bars or other known contrivances. The 
fabric is fed onto the tenter hooks or points 
at that part of the circumference of the two 
Wheels or disks C which are nearest to each 
Other, and it Will be evident that as the 
Wheels or disks revolve the selvages will be 
drawn gradually farther and farther apart 
until the fullest amount of lateral stretch has 
been obtained. At this point, which is about 
opposite to the feed-roller m, I arrange a se 
ries of sticks p, which are so mounted and 
acted upon by tappets or cams that they are al 
ternately raised up or drawn back and caused 
to strike sharply upon the face of the material 
as it passes slowly along in a distended con 
dition. The sticks p are preferably placed in 
a slightly-diagonal position, half the number 
being pivoted at the Selvage and the other 
half at or about the center-some to the right 
95 
OO 
O 
15 
2 
25 
35 0 
45 
 
485,400 
without departing from the distinctive fea 
tures of my invention. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an apparatus for raising the pile of 
woven fabrics, the combination of two di 
verging rotary disks of large diameter, hav 
ing hooks or pins upon their peripheries, with 
transverse overlapping batting-sticks to act 
upon the whole surface of the cloth and 
means for operating the batting-sticks, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. In an apparatus for raising the pile of 
woven fabrics, the combination of two di 
verging disks having hooks or pins upon their 
peripheries with transverse batting-sticks, 
and means for operating the same, and sup 
porting-bars between the disks to support 
the material while it is being batted, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM ID. WATSON. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE DAVIES, 
CHARLES A. DAVIES. 
and some to the left-and so that their ends 
overlap in order that every part of the sur 
face shall be equally batted and no stick 
marks shall be apparent. Each Stick has con 
nected to its pivoted end a quadrant q, to 
which is attached a short strap , the other 
end of which is connected to a levers, vibrat 
ing on a fixed center at t (see Fig. 1) and pro 
vided with a bowl u, which is acted upon by 
a tappet v, mounted on a shaft v, to which 
a rapid revolving movement is transmitted 
by suitable gearing. The cams or tappets v 
are so formed as to give a rapid and smart 
blow, and the sticks are then drawn back by 
the coiled springs ac. The fabric is supported 
while being batted by two bars of or other 
similar device, which may be heated, if nec 
essary. 
The amount of lateral or transverse stretch 
given to the material will depend upon the 
diameter of the wheels or disks c and the an 
gle of inclination which is given to the slid 
ing blocks d, round which they revolve. 
I may here remark that I do not wish to 
confine myself to the exact arrangement 
shown and described for actuating the sticks 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485500.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 485,500. 
J. M. KEO GH, 
CAR COUPLING. 
Patented Nov. 1, 1892. 
 
/ 
 
S 
N 
INE 
-- 
A 
M/ 
N 
Psex42 2N. 
2 s 
SSA 
A. ,570 
sy AAAA 
N 
me 270-% 
%Wy 
SSWSWS 
www.www.www.www.www.wywww.www. 
NSSSSSSS 
N 
NS 
Eirit 
 
 
 
 
 
THE NORRIS PETERsco. Photo-uTHo, washington, c. c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN MARTIN KEOGH, OF DULUTH, 
MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO BYRON GEORGE SEGOG, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,500, dated November 1, i892. 
Application filed April 26, 1892, 
Serial No. 430,736, (No model) 
55 
75 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN MARTIN KEOGH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Du 
luth, in the county of St. Louis and State of 
5 Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Car-Couplings, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention is directed to improvements 
for coupling railway-cars, in which provision 
Io is made for the lifting, directing, and hold 
ing of the link in position for coupling the 
cars as they are moved together, and thereby 
avoid the danger of having the hands of the 
brakeman crushed, which would be liable in 
15 having to hold the link between the draw 
heads in placing it for coupling, or to which 
danger the attendant would be liable in go 
ing between the cars for that purpose. 
The particular matter of my invention con 
20 sists of the combination and relative arrange 
ment of a link permanently pivoted to the 
draw-head, a link-lifter permanently pivoted 
to the draw-head, and a construction of the 
draw-head which provides longitudinal bot 
tom openings open at the front, the pivoting 
of the link and its lifter back of the coupling 
pin, and the provision of a central longitudi 
mal tongue at the bottom of the draw-head, 
within which the lower pin-opening is formed. 
3o This combination, construction, and relative 
arrangement of parts gives important ad 
vantages, which I will state and at the con 
clusion of the specification will specifically 
point out in the claims the matters and things 
which constitute my invention. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate in 
Figure 1 so much of one end of a railroad 
car as shows the application to the draw 
head thereof of my improved coupling. Fig. 
4o 2 is a vertical longitudinal section of the draw 
heads and their coupling devices. Fig. 3 is a 
front view. Fig. 4 is a bottom view of one of 
the draw-heads, and Fig. 5 is the link, and 
Fig. 6 is the link-lifter. 
Referring to the drawings, it will be seen 
that the draw-head is constructed with a link 
2, permanently pivoted thereto, that the link 
is pivoted by a strong pivot-pin 3 within the 
draw-head at about its longitudinal and Ver 
5o tical center, and that the bottom of the draw 
head is constructed with alongitudinal tongue 
45 
35 
4 and an opening 5 on each side thereof, ex 
tending from the coupling end to a point 
back of the link pivot-pin and open at the 
coupling end of the draw-head, for the pur 
pose of allowing the coupling-link to hang in 
a vertical position back of the coupling-pin 
when the cars are uncoupled. This construc 
tion gives the advantage of placing the open 
ings 6 in the draw-head to receive the coup 
ling-pin very near the open end of the former, 
and it also gives the advantage of placing the 
pivot of the link back out of the way of be 
ing accidentally struck by the lifted link of 
the car moving to be coupled with the car 
having its link in hanging position. This 
construction also gives the advantage of 
raising, lowering, and directing the link into 
draw-heads of different heights without in 
terfering with their links. This construction 
also gives the important advantage of caus 
ing the link and its lifter of one draw-head 
to hang out of the way when the link of the 
other draw-head is raised and is being coup 
led with the draw-head whose link is in hang 
ing position, so that there is no danger of the 
raised link of one draw - head striking the 
hanging link of the other draw-head in coup 
ling the cars. 
The tongue of the draw-head I prefer to 
make as a part of the latter, and it extends to 
the front thereof and has the lower opening 
for the coupling-pin. Below this tongue, at 
about the middle of the length of the draw 
head, I fit and key a cross-rod 7 in bearings in 
the latter and secure thereon two arms 8, so 
that they may rise and fall in the longitudi 
nal bottom Openings in the draw-head on each 
side of the tongue and in vertical planes with 
the sides or arms of the link. This cross-rod 
projects beyond one or both of the sides of 
the draw-head to the sides of the car and has 
a crank-arm on one or both ends by which 
the attendant can raise the arms to lift and 
hold the link in position to enter the draw 
head of the car to be coupled, and this crank 
arm may be so operated from the ground, the 
platform, or the top of the car. The normal 
position of the arms, however, is hanging free 
below and at about the middle of the length 
of the draw-head and in position behind the 
link which hangs at that point when uncoup 
9o 
95 
OO 
 
2 
485,500 
draw-head may be secured to the car in any 
Suitable manner. 
It will be understood that in coupling cars 
the link of one car will be raised in position 
to enter the draw-head of the other car and 
that the coupling-link of the latter will hang 
down out of the way of the coupling-link a 
considerable distance behind the open end of 
the draw-head, leaving a clear way therein 
for the entering link. 
I claim as my improvement 
1. In a car-coupling, the combination of a 
draw - head having a longitudinal bottom 
tongue and bottom openings on each side 
thereof open at the coupling end of the draw 
head and extending back of the coupling 
and a coupling-pin with a link pivoted in the 
draw-head back of said coupling-pin and a 
link-lifter pivoted in said draw-head back of 
said coupling-pin, Substantially as described. 
2. In a car-coupling, the combination of a 
draw - head having a longitudinal bottom 
tongue and bottom openings on each side 
thereof open at the coupling end of the draw 
head and extending back of the coupling and 
a coupling-pin with a link pivoted in the 
draw-head back of Said coupling-pin, a link 
lifter pivoted in the draw-head back of said 
coupling-pin, and a spring-sustained slide 
rising from said tongue to form a support for 
said pin, substantially as described. 
3. In a car-coupling, a draw-head having a 
longitudinal central bottom tongue and open 
ings on each side thereof open at the coup 
ling end of the draw-head, in combination 
with a coupling-pin, a coupling-link pivoted 
in the draw-head back of said coupling-pin, 
and suitable means for lifting and holding 
said link in position for coupling, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In a car-coupling, the coupling-link piv 
oted in the draw-head and a link-lifter piv 
oted to the bottom of the draw - head and 
formed of two arms corresponding in position 
to the sides of the link, in combination with 
a draw-head having bottom openings corre 
sponding to the arms of said link, as shown 
and described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
to this specification in the presence of wit 
neSSeS. 
JOHN MARTIN KEOGH. 
Witnesses: 
B. G. SEGOG, 
B. W. SOMMERS. 
75 
95 
OO 
To5 
O 
led, so that the arms will act at once against 
the link and rise with it above and over the 
front end of the tongue in coupling the link. 
This construction renders the lifting-arms in 
dependent of the link, so that they hang out 
of the way and free of the link when the lat 
ter is coupled, and therefore neither tend to 
raise or depress it. 
In co-operative relation with a link perma 
nently pivoted to the draw-head and an in 
dependently-pivoted link-lifter I provide a 
spring-sustained slide 10 within the draw 
head for supporting and automatically drop 
ping the coupling-pin down when said slide 
is struck and pushed back by the entering 
link. This slide rests upon the tongue and 
is held in position between guides 11 on the 
upper wall of the hollow draw-head. At its 
upper end this slide has a front projection 12, 
which extends beneath the upper pin-open 
ing in the draw-head, and in such normal po 
sition it forms the support for the coupling 
pin and holds it up out of the cavity of the 
draw-head, so that the link entering it will 
strike and push the slide back and let the pin 
fall into the link. This slide has two guide 
rods 13 extending back and passing through 
holes in the partition or solid rear end of the 
draw-head and are encircled by coil-springs 
14, which bear against the rear side of the 
slide and the partition of the draw-head and 
constantly tend to push the slide out, the 
limit of which outward movement is con 
trolled by stops 15 on the inner ends of the 
rods. 
The pin is raised to uncouple the cars by 
means of a lever-arm 16, one end of which is 
connected by a chain to the pin-head and the 
other end of Said lever-arm being secured to 
a cross-rod 17, mounted in suitable bearings 
on the end of the car and having a handle 18 
at one or both ends, by raising or turning 
which the attendant can raise the pin to un 
couple the link and to raise the pin above the 
slide, which being constantly pressed forward 
under the pin supports it in position to be 
dropped when the slide is again pushed back 
by the link in coupling the cars. The upper 
pin-hole in the draw-head is in a thick por 
tion of the latter and serves as a guide to di 
rect the pin straight into the hole in the 
tongue and which is made slightly flaring up 
ward larger than the pin and oblong. 
The pin can be removed and renewed at 
pleasure, and it will be understood that the 
2C) 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485600.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 485,600. 
 
F. F. ATKINSON. 
ADJUSTABLE FEED BAG, . 
Patented Nov. 8, 1892. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS F. ATKINSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ADJUSTABLE FEEDBAG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,600, dated November 8, 1892. 
Application filed October 29, 1891, Serial No. 410,184 (No model.) 
are thrown into the position shown in Fig. 1 
and the hooks I are caught into the rings J. 
The chains or cords G G are then slipped over 
the upper portion of the hame, as shown in 
Fig. 1. By varying the length of the arms 
E E the feed-bag A is moved forward or back, 
and by varying the length of cords G. G. the 
feed-bag is raised or lowered. In this man 
ner the feed-bag may be placed in any de 
sirable. position under the horse's head. 
When the bag is not in use, the arms EE may 
be telescoped and swung around on the pivots 
F F to a position directly under the feed-bag 
frame B, as shown in Fig.2 by the dottedlines. 
These arms E E may be retained in this posi 
tion by a spring-clip K of ordinary construc 
tion. The arms E E may be bent in the man 
ner shown in Fig. 2, so that when in the closed 
position they will entirely close the bag A, as 
shown by the dotted line in Fig. 2. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A feed-bag provided with supporting 
chains or cords G G and the bent arms EE, 
pivoted to the bag-frame and adapted to hori 
Zontally swing and close the mouth of the 
feed-bag under the frame, substantially as 
described. 
2. A feed-bag A, provided with supporting 
chains or cords G G and the telescopic arms 
E E, bent as described and pivoted to the bag 
frame and adapted to swing horizontally and 
close the mouth of the feed-bag, as described. 
3. A feed-bag A, provided with supporting 
chains or cords G G and the pivoted tele 
scopic arms E E and the spring-clips KK, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
FRANCIS F, ATKINSON. 
45 
55 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
R. C. MITCHELL, 
FRED SCHLESINGER, 
IO 
3O 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS F. ATKINSON, 
a citizen of Great Britain, and a resident of 
New York city, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Adjust 
able Feed-Bags for Horses, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved feed 
bag for horses. 
The object of my invention is to so con 
struct a feed-bag that it is possible for the 
horse to which it is attached to readily reach 
the entire contents of the feed-bag and also 
to enable the bag when not in use to be com 
pressed into a small compass. To accomplish 
this object, I make use of the mechanism 
illustrated by the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective side view of myim 
proved feed-bag as attached to a horse; and 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of my improved feed 
bag, showing in the solid lines its appearance 
when ready for adjusting and in the dotted 
lines the appearance of the device when out 
of use and folded. 
Similar letters refer to similar partsin both 
figures. 
A is the feed-bag proper, supported by a 
ring-shaped frame B. From one side of this 
frame projects a lug D. From this lug the 
arms EE, pivoted at FF, extend. At suit 
able points on the upper part of the frame B 
are fastened the chains or cords G. G. The 
arms E E are preferably adjustable in their 
length. This may be accomplished by making 
the said arms telescopic and using a thumb 
screw H. Any suitable means, however, may 
be used to vary the length of these arms. At 
the outer end of these arms E E a suitable 
hook I is formed to engage with the rings J, 
Fig. 1, on the hame portion of the horse-collar. 
In operating my invention the arms EE 
w 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485700.txt	(No Mode.) 
No. 485,700. 
n H. W. KIR CHNER, 
ELEVATED RAILWAY. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1892. 
SS 
I 
II.I.III/7 
s 
Wife esses: 
/367 (2/ 
ah 
Ull 
/722e2/27 
4.513 A 
6/42-2 /326-ece 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY W. KIRCHINER, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
ELEVATED RAILWAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,700, dated November 8, 1892. 
Application filed May 4, 1891, Serial No,391,5ll. (No model.) 
 
55 
SIOI. 
To all, whom it may concern. . 
Beit known that I, HENRY W. KIRCHNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
gity of Denver, in the county of Arapahoe and 
State of Colorado, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Means for Trans 
portation, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to means for transpor 
tation in which the roadway is elevated above 
the ground and in which the weight of the 
cars and occupants is wholly or partially sup 
ported in transit by being attached to a 
Weight-compensating device and the roadway 
intended more as a guide than a support. 
More particularly my invention relates to 
improvements in the devices for which United 
States Letters Patent No. 441,672 were granted 
to myself and George N. Chase on December 
2, 1890. It consists in an improved form of 
device for supporting the weight of the car, 
&c., and in an improved form of device for 
automatically keeping the supporting paral 
lel cables normally stretched at an equal ten 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
like letters of reference denote like parts in 
the several figures, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of my improved car and roadway. Fig. 
2 is a horizontal section taken on the line 22 
in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a vertical section taken 
On the line 33 in Fig.1; and Figs. 4 and 5 are 
respectively a front and a side elevation of 
the supporting-posts for the roadway, show 
ing in enlarged detail the device for stretch 
ing the cables. 
A is the body of the car, practically similar 
in details of construction to that shown and 
described in the patent already referred to. 
B and C are respectively the upper and 
lower Supporting and guiding roadway-cables, 
Which are secured to and supported by the 
posts D, which are connected and braced to 
gether on either side of the roadway by the 
spanners E and struts F. (See Figs. 2 and 3.) 
G. and H are respectively the upper and 
lower supporting and guiding pulleys, which 
On the same side of the car A are adjustably 
Secured together by the connecting-bars I, as 
described in the patent referred to. To the 
journal-shaft K of one of the upper sets of 
wheels is secured the operative part of some 
motor L for giving motion to the car A. 
To the body of the car A is secured the su 
perstructure M, made of some light strong 
material, preferably aluminum, from which 
the air can be withdrawn, forming a Vacuum 
chamber. 
N is one of the several spiral braces piaced 
within the chamber Mat convenient intervals 
in the length of the same for reinforcing the 
walls of the vacuum-chamber Magainst Out 
side pressure. 
O (see Figs. 4 and 5) is my improved cable 
supporting bracket-piece, which is secured to 
the posts Datintervals in the line of the road 
way where it is found desirable to place 
stretching devices. The bracket-pieces O are 
formed with a band portion P, formed to em 
brace the posts D, conforming to the outline 
thereof and to be secured thereto. The Over 
hanging or projecting portion R is formed 
with two curved holes S of a size to corre 
spond with the cables B and C, which lead 
from opposite directions in a line parallel to 
the line of the roadway-cables, converging to 
ward each other until they meet in a line at 
right angles to the line of cables. The inter 
mediate space between the holes is occupied 
by the material of the bracket, forming a 
bridge across from one portion of the cable 
to the other when it is looped through the 
bracket, as shown in Fig. 4. 
My improved stretching device, as illus 
trated in Figs, 4 and 5, consists in two flat 
bars T, one end of which is formed or bent at 
right angles (see Fig. 5) and a perforation 
formed in the outer end thereof to accommo 
date the other bar when they are secured to 
gether, as shown in Fig. 5, forming a loop or 
double stirrup, into which is fitted the com 
pression-spring U. To the extending ends of 
the bars T are secured the hooks V, adapted 
to be hooked into the loop of the cable when 
threaded through the bracket-block, as shown 
in Fig. 4. Into the loop are fitted the thimbles 
W for preventing the kinking of the cable 
and the wearing of the same by the hooks V. 
The tendency of the spring U is to expand, 
carrying with it the overlapped ends of the 
bars T, bringing together the hooks W, and 
thereby stretching the cables B and C to com 
95 
IOO 
 
 
35 
45 
485,700 
roadway are kept at the proper tension, Said 
pensate for the varying lengths of the cables 
stretching device consisting of two parallel 
due to changes in temperature. 
bars secured together with their ends respect 
In practice it is intended to exhaust the air 
from the vacuum-chamber Mand have it take ively overlapping the other bar and loosely 
secured thereto, forming a sliding double 
the place of the gas-receiver, as described in 
stirrup loop, in which is secured a compres 
the aforementioned patent, to support the 
sion-spring, the tendency of which is to sepa 
car A. 
rate said overlapping ends longitudinally, 
combined and operating substantially as de 
scribed, and for the purposes specified. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature, in presence of two witnesses, this 13th 
day of April, 1891. 
I claim 
In an elevated railway, a roadway consist 
ing of an upper and a lower cable on each 
side of said roadway, said cables being sup 
ported in upper and lower brackets secured to 
supporting-posts, said brackets being formed 
at intervals in said roadway with two oppo 
sitely - extending holes, through which the 
cable is threaded, forming a loop which en 
gages with hooks secured to either end of a 
stretching device, whereby the cables in said 
H. W. KIRCHINER, 
Witnesses: 
JOS. A. GROVES, 
JOS. H. FLOWER. 
25 
aul 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485800.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 485,800, 
  
J. KLAHR, 
WOOD BENDING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1892. 
wa (SichCl 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 485,800. 
J., KLAHR. 
WOOD BENDING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1892. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH KLAHR, OF HAMBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WOOD-BENDING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,800, dated November 8, 1892. 
Application filed February 8, 1892, Serial No. 420,684. (No model.) 
To all, whom it invay Concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH KLAHR, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Hamburg, 
in the county of Berks, State of Pennsylva 
hia, have invented certain Improvements in 
Wood-Bending Machines, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
! My invention relates more particularly to 
a wood-bending machine adapted to form in a 
satisfactory and economical manner such ar 
ticles as plow-handles, carriage-shafts, &c. 
Heretofore different forming devices have 
been employed by means of which the pre 
viously-steamed wood has been bent to de 
sired curvatures, and a number of machines 
have also been devised in which to hold the 
wood and apply the bending pressure. 
The object of my invention is to furnish a 
simple and economical apparatus which will 
be capable of performing a variety of work 
in a perfectly-satisfactory manner and with a 
minimum expenditure of time and in which 
different bends may be readily made and held 
until set with but a single steaming of the 
wood. 
The invention consists in certain novel de 
tails of construction and combinations of 
parts, which are fully described in connection 
with the accompanying drawings and are 
specifically pointed out in the claims. 
Figure i is a longitudinal elevation of my 
improved machine, showing the manner of 
using the same for bending the end Curve, as 
for a plow-handle. Fig.2 shows the bend 
completed and firmly maintained by the form 
ing mechanism after removal from the ma 
chine. Fig. 3 shows the manner of using the 
machine to form a longer intermediate Curve 
and also gives another view of the forming 
mechanism of the end curve. Fig. 4 is a plan 
view. Fig. 5 is a detail view of the link. 
Fig.6 shows a slightly-modified forming mech 
anism. 
The frame A, which is represented as Sup 
orted upon legs A", is formed near one end 
with a bending-recess C, in its upper Surface, 
extending longitudinally between blocks or 
lugs a? arida. Midway between these blocks 
is a yoke or bracket B", with overhanging head 
B, through which passes a screw brepresent 
ed as provided with a hand-wheelb', by means 
of which it may be operated as a Screw-press. 
3o 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
At the opposite end of the frame is a side off 
set a, extending above the level of the frame 
and corresponding in transverse position with 
the yoke B', in connection with which it thus 
serves to support a length of steamed Wood 
while subjecting the same to bending press 
ure by means of an intermediate screw-press 
C, operating at about right angles to the press 
B. A lever E, pivoted at one end to a point 
a' of the frame, is provided at its opposite end 
with a spring-hooke, pivoted to the lever at 
e', which automatically engages a recess a in 
the end of the frame when the lever is raised 
to its normal position. This lever is also pro 
vided with a longitudinal slot e, in which is 
secured an adjustable trunnion - piece G', 
which is engaged by the hooked ends g of a 
link G, which spans the frame and is provided 
at its upper end with a roller g', adapted to 
bear upon a former H in the operation of 
bending, as will be more fully described here 
inafter. This link is preferably made adjust 
able in length by forming it in two parts con 
nected by means of bolts g, passing through 
slots g, as shown. A weight F is pivoted to 
the lever at a pointe, so located as to produce 
a sufficient downward pressure upon the link 
rollerg'. 
The forming mechanism which I employ in 
connection with the link and weighted lever 
above described resembles in its general fea 
tures devices heretofore used for bending 
wood, but differs from them in some impor 
tant matters of detail, as Well as in the man 
ner of using it. The former H is curved to 
the desired shape of the bend and is grooved 
to receive the rounded end portion 
of the 
wood. It is provided with a tapering shank 
h, and the pointh' of its butt-end is adapted 
to be engaged by the hooked portion of an 
end piece K, which is secured to the usual 
flexible strap L at right angles thereto. The 
opposite end of this strap is attached to a U 
shaped clamp IL, which is clamped to the wood 
considerably beyond the beginning of the 
curve to be formed by means of a wedge l, 
which is pressed against the side of the wood, 
with its opposite face bearing against a pin 
or roller l, as shown. 
In bending the end of a stick, so as to form 
a plow-handle, the straight stick is laid upon 
the strap L', with the end butted against the 
CO 
2 
485,800 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
end piece K, the former H is placed upon it 
with its shank h in vertical position and its 
butt-end against the end piece Kand engaged 
by the hooked portion k' of the latter, and the 
clamp L is tightened upon the wood by means 
of the wedgel, all as indicated in Fig. 1. 
The link G. is then placed in position with the 
roller resting upon the inner curve of the 
former H and its lower end hooked over the 
trunnion-piece G'. The sprink-hook eat the 
end of the lever is then released, thus produc 
ing a downward pressure upon the link-roller 
g'. A lever M, adapted to engage projections 
k on the end piece Knear the strap, is used 
to effect the bending, the heel m of the lever 
pressing against the outer portion of the end 
piece and the roller g' pressing the former 
uniformly against the wood during the oper 
ation. When the shank h of the former. has 
been brought in contact with the straight 
surface of the wood, the bend is completed and 
is so held by means of a clamp J, which engages 
the tapering shankh. During the bending 
process the outer portion of the bent wood is 
subjected to a tensile strain, which somewhat 
extends it, while the inner portion is consid 
erably compressed. The band L', being in 
contact with the outer surface, is kept in ten 
sion, thus maintaining an end pressure upon 
the wood, the clamp I slipping, however, so 
as to prevent this strain becoming excessive. 
The weighted lever E, which has moved freely 
to correspond with the different positions of 
the link-roller g, is locked in its normal po 
sition by the spring-catch eat the end of the 
operation, and the link G. is unhooked and re 
moved, leaving the stick I free. This opera 
tion requires but a very short time, and other 
bends may be made in succession on the same 
stick, as desired. For instance, Fig. 3 repre 
sents a side bend being given to the same 
stick by means of the screw-press B, which 
forces the intermediate wood down in the re 
cess a by means of a former N, while support 
ing the stick upon the blocks a? a, the bend 
thus made being retained after the pressure 
is removed by means of bands in and the stick 
being laid aside in this condition and allowed 
time to set. 
In the plan view, Fig. 4, the manner of using 
the transverse screw-press C is shown, the op 
eration being similar to that illustrated in 
Fig. 3, but the distance between the supports 
B' and a being considerably greater, so as to 
rovide for such bends as are required for 
carriage-shafts, &c. 
The slightly-modified former shown in Fig. 
6 is adapted for making a bend which does 
not extend to the end of the Stick-such as is 
required, for instance, for carriage - shafts. 
Obviously a great variety of other formers 
may be devised to suit different requirements 
and be used in connection with my machine. 
I do not limit myself to the exact construc 
tion shown and described; but 
What I claim is 
1. In a wood-bending machine, the frame 
provided with a bending - recess between 
blocks a? a, an intermediate yoke and screw 
press B, a side offset a, corresponding with 
said yoke, and an intermediate screw-press 
C, operating at an angle to the press B, all 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a wood-bending machine, the combi 
nation, with the frame and the weightedle 
ver E, pivoted thereto, of the link G, carried 
by said lever and spanning the frame, and 
the former H, upon which said link bears, all 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a wood-bending machine, the combi 
nation, with the frame and the weighted le 
ver pivoted thereto, of the adjustable link G, 
adjustably pivoted to said lever, substantially 
as described, and spanning the frame, and the 
former H, upon which said link bears, sub 
stantially, as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a wood-bending machine, the combi 
nation, with the frame and the weighted le 
ver E, pivoted thereto, of the link G, carried 
by said lever and spanning the frame, and the 
former H, upon which said link bears, saidle 
ver being provided with a catche, adapted to 
lock it fast to the frame, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. In a wood-bending machine, the combi 
nation, with the frame, of the weighted lever 
E, pivoted thereto and provided with a longi 
tudinal slot e, the trunnion-piece adjustably 
secured in said slot, the link G, spanning the 
frame and having hooked ends engaging the 
trunnion-piece, and the former H, upon which 
said link bears, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a wood-bending machine, the combi 
nation, with the frame and the weighted le 
ver pivoted thereto, of the link G, spanning 
the frame and provided with a roller g on 
the cross-bar and hooked ends to engage the 
lever, and the former H, upon which said 
roller bears, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a wood-bending machine, the curved 
former H, in combination with the strap L', 
having an end piece K, trunnions lic for at 
taching an operating-lever, and hooked end 
k' to engage the end of the former, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presenge of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH KLAHR. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. HUBER, 
GEO. F. POTTEIGER. 
65 
75 
95 
do 
II5 
55 p. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US485901.txt	(No Model.) 
J. THORN TON, 
SPARK ARRESTER, 
No. 485,90l. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1892, 
azz esses 
23%-4----Cl 
76el al-J. 6.4.24 
-Zz 2eza Z?a r 
c/o/, w Va?o in to av 
2. 
Sir A/s (27 ZZz64. 
the Norris Peters co. Photo-lho, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN THORNTON, OF MELBOURNE, VICTORIA. 
SPARKARRESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 485,901, dated November 8, 1892. 
Application filed October 13, 1891. Serial No. 408,582, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN THORNTON, con 
tractor, a subject of Her Majesty the Queen 
of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and 
Ireland, and a resident of Oxford Chambers, 
Bourke Street, Melbourne, in the British Col 
ony of Victoria, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Spark-Arresters, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
means for arresting sparks in a locomotive; 
and its object is to obtain improved construc 
tion as to mechanical details. 
To arrest sparks and prevent them leaving 
the smoke-box of a locomotive or a portable 
engine boiler, I arrange a cylindrical or a 
conical cage, made, preferably, of ring or link 
wire-netting, to inclose or surround the space 
between the bottom of funnel and top of ex 
haust-pipe, the meshes between the links or 
rings of the netting being as fine as it is pos 
sible to have them without retarding the 
draft. Consequently no sparks or cinders of 
a size large enough to do damage can pass 
out of the funnel, any small ones that may 
pass through the netting being extinguished 
by the exhaust-steam. The top edge or ring 
of the cage I support from a flange or bolt or 
secure it under the crown-plate of smoke-box, 
while the bottom ring or edge of cage Isecure 
to a flange upon exhaust or blast pipe. The 
side of netting Ileave somewhat slack, so that 
at each puff or exhaust of the steam the net 
ting of cage is vibrated; or, in other words, 
the netting is kept in a state of tremor while 
the engine is working, and thus no sparks or 
cinders can remain in the meshes or links of 
the netting. When so desired, I may use two 
layers of netting for the cage. 
In order that my invention may be fully 
understood, I attach a sheet of drawings, 
which illustrate the several forms that the 
cage may take when employed in the smoke 
box of a locomotive or a portable engine boiler. 
In Figure 1 the cage A is of cylindrical form, 
- 
25 
35 
45 
 
In Fig. 2 the cage A is shown of a conical 55 
its top edge or ring being secured to the flange 
B under crown-plate of smoke-box and around 
bottom of funnel C by hook-bolts B'. The 
bottom edge or ring of cage passes some dis 
tance below top of exhaust-pipe D and is then So 
secured or bolted to a flange D'. When the 
cage is of a much larger diameter than the 
exhaust-pipe, its bottom flange end may be 
perforated. 
form with its lower ring or end secured to 
flange D around blast-pipe D. 
In Fig. 3 the cage A is again shown inclos 
ing the space between the top of exhaust-pipe 
D and bottom of funnel C; but the cage is 6o 
neither cylindrical nor conical, as its sides 
stretch to and terminate upon face of tube 
plate. 
In Fig. 4 the cage A is conical and sus 
pended around bottom end of funnel C and 65 
above exhaust-pipe D, while in Fig. 5 I show 
full-size pattern of the ring netting that I pre 
fer for the cages. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 7o 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
1. A spark-arrester consisting of a cylin 
drical or a conical shaped cage formed of rings 
linked together, forming a netting, which is 75 
left slack and so located as to surround the 
space between the opening leading to the 
funnel and top of exhaust-pipe. 
2. In combination with the funnel of a loco 
motive, a vibratory netting formed of rings 8o 
linked loosely together and forming a parti 
tion between the funnel and the smoke-box. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres. 
ence of two witnesses, this 31st day of Au- 85 
gust, 1891. 
JOHN THORNTON. 
Witnesses: 
BEDDINGTON BODEYARDs, 
FRED CHAMBERLAIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486001.txt	(No Model.) 
R. W. TIN SLEY. 
COUPLING FOR PNEU MATIC CAR BRAKES, 
No. 486,00l., 
Patented Nov. 8, 1892, 
 
  
  
 N\, 
a less 
a Cas 
3. 
2 32 S 
22 SSN 
4 
Iks 
O 
WITNESSES 
ofe2 (seezez- 
4-----22-7%-2-7- 
 
fAVWEAWTOR 
Zacazes Y. Zezreze 
Br (e. 
A TTORMEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUF US W. TIN SLEY, OF UNION, SOUTH CAROLINA. 
COUPLING FOR PNEU MATIC CAR-BRAKES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 486,001, dated November 8, 1892. 
Application filed January 13, 1892, Serial No. 417,996, (No model.) 
o 
To all whom it nay concern: 
naling-valve is connected in each car for use 
Be it known that I, RUFUs W. T.INSLEY, a 
in signaling the engineer. I do not show the 
citizen of the United States, residing at Union, 
connections of this signaling apparatus, since 
in the county of Union and State of South 
it is well-known. Nor shall I make further 
Carolina, have invented an Improved Coup 
reference to the lower valve d', since it is a 
ling for Pneumatic Car-Brakes, of which the 
counterpart of the upper one d in form, ar 
following is a specification. 
rangement, and operation. It will be seen, 
My invention is an improvement in the class 
Figs. 1. and 3, that a flexible hose D leads off 
of couplings for the air-pipes of car-brake sys 
from the upper valved and a similar hose D' 
tems which are adapted to engage and disen 
from the lower valve d'. These will in prac 
gage automatically. 
W 
tice connect, respectively, with the train or 
I have devised certain novel constructions 
brake pipe and the pipe of the signaling ap 
and combinations of parts, as hereinafter set 
paratus, neither of which appears in the 
forth. 
drawings. In order to provide space for at 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
tachment of the spiral spring B to a coup 
a plan view of the coupling engaged. Fig. 2 
ling-head a, the hose D D, are attached to 
is a side view of one-half of the coupling. 
laterally-divergent nipples, Fig. 1, which con 
Fig. 3 is a face view of one of the coupling 
stituta integral portions of screw-threaded 
heads. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section of a 
heads b', that close the rear ends of the cy 
portion 
O 
of one of the coupling-heads. Fig. 5 
lindrical portions of the coupling-heads (t, 
is a perspective view of one of the screw 
wherein the valves d dare contained and re 
threaded heads that close the rear end of a 
ciprocate. The disk-valve d, Fig. 4, Works in 
valve-chamber, and Fig. 6 is a perspective 
a horizontal cylindrical chamber of the head 
view of one of the brackets that support the 
a, and seats against the circular flange that 
coupling-heads. 
forms the edge of the opening in the front 
The couplingsproper AA, Fig.1, one of which 
end of said chamber. The head of the valve 
is attached to each end of a car, are supported 
projects through this opening and beyond the 
in due position by means of spiral springs B, 
face of the head a, as shown, Figs. 2 and 4. 
which are in turn fastened adjustably to the 
The valved has an elastic packing and is 
pendent arm of a right-angular bracket C, 
held and guided in vertical position by means 
that is bolted to the under side of a draw 
of parallel arms or rods d', that project from 
head of a car. 
its rear side and slide (when the valve d 
Each of the couplings. A consists, princi 
moves either way) in the contracted bore of 
pally, of a head containing a valved and 
the threaded head b', which closes the rear 
having a flat vertical front or face, from one 
end of the valve-chamber and is provided 
side of which a pin b projects horizontally for 
with the curved nipple before described. 
ward, while a pin-receiving tube or socket b' 
The inner end of such head b' is provided 
projects rearward from the other side of the 
with notches, as shown in Fig. 5, for admit 
head. A coupling being attached to each end 
ting air to pass the valve when the latter is 
of a car, when such cars meet the pin of each 
seated back against the head b'. 
head C enters the opposite and correspond 
It will be seen that when two cars pro 
ing socket b of the head on the opposite car, 
vided with my coupling-heads a a approach 
Fig. 1. It will be noted that the socket b' is 
closely the pin b of one head will enter the 
tapered internally, the front end being the 
socket b' of the other, and the flat fronts or 
wider to enable the pin b to readily enter the 
faces of said heads will then abut, as shown 
Socket when the heads C, a closely approach 
in Fig. 1. The draw-heads being coupled at 
each other. Each head a is shown provided 
the same time, either automatically or manu 
with two like valves did, Fig. 2. The upper one 
ally, as the case may be, the heads a, a will 
d controls the air-passage to the train or brake 
be held in contact with a yielding pressure 
ipe and the lower one d' is the whistle 
by means of the springs B. B. When the 
valve, which controls admission of com 
heads at a thus meet, the valves are forced 
pressed air to a line of pipe with which a sig- back off their seats and against the notched 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 
 
486,001 
O 
ends of the parts b', (see dotted lines, Fig. 
4.) which allows air to pass around then and 
through the notches of the rear seat into the 
hose D and connecting train - pipes. (Not 
shown.) On the other hand, when the coup 
ling-heads C, a separate, the air-pressure in 
stantly forces the valves dback to their front 
seats, so that further escape or leakage is pre 
vented while the cars remain uncoupled. 
Thus the coupling and uncoupling of the air 
pipes is effected automatically, and the pres 
ence, assistance, or attention of a train-hand 
is unnecessary. In the coupling operation 
the pins b b and tapering sockets c c serve as 
guides which insure the valve-heads coming 
in contact, as required to open the passage 
way from one hose D to the other on the op 
posite car, and they also hold the valved open 
ings in the coupling-heads C. a. in registratio 
after the coupling is effected. 
The spring B is of spiral form; but other 
forms may be employed, since the sole func 
tion of the spring is to support the heads a in 
due position for coupling and to keep them 
pressed tightly together while the cars are 
connected, and it is obvious the springs will 
do this despite the contraction and widening 
of the space between adjacent cars, as well 
as their lateral oscillation while running. 
Since different cars may vary in height, it 
will sometimes be necessary to adjust one of 
the two opposite coupling-heads a higher or 
lower to bring it on the same level with the 
other. To this end I attach the spring B ad 
justably to the vertical pendent slotted arm 
of the right-angular bracket C, and I prefer 
25 
35 
ably employ screw-bolts and nuts for clamp 
ing these parts together. These bolts have 
hooked ends for clasping the Springs and 
pass through vertical slots in the bracket C, 4o 
the nuts being applied on their rear ends. 
It may also be necessary in some instances to 
adjust the bracket longitudinally of the car 
in order that the spring B may alway's hold 
the couplings a a slightly in advance of the 45 
car-couplings, so as to insure prior contact of . 
the latter and due pressure between them. 
I therefore provide the horizontal arm of the 
brackets C with lengthwise slots, Figs. 1 and 
2, to receive screws that secure the brackets 
to the draw-head. The operation whereby 
the brackets are adjusted is obvious. 
The nipples to which the hose D D' are at 
tached might be applied to the sides of the 
cylindricalor chambered portions of the head 
counlings, instead of their rear ends. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
In a pipe - coupling for pneumatic car 
brakes, the combination, with a coupling-head 
having valves and a bracket attached to the 
car-frame and a vertical slot, of the spring at 
tached to and supporting said head and 
means for securing it to the slotted bracket, 65 
and also adjusting it higher or lower, as speci 
fied. 
RUFUs W. T.INSLEY. 
55 
Witnesses: 
JAMES MUNRO, 
HARRY. M. GRIMBALL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486101.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 486, 101, 
G. M. GITHENS, 
ROCK DRILLING AND SPLITTING, 
Patented Nov. 15, 1892. 
N 
he morris Pere?ts ce. Hofo-kyo. wastigion, c. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE. M. GITHENS, OF BROOKILYN, NEW YORK. 
ROCK D R LING AND SPTTING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Iletters Patent No. 486,101, dated November 15, 1892. 
Application filed July 7, 1892, Serial No. 439,229, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern; 
Be it known that I, GEORGE. M. GITHENs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented an improvement in Rock 
Drilling and Splitting, of which the following 
is a specification. 
In Letters Patent No. 395,105, granted De 
cember 25, 1888, to J. W. Wyckoff, a rock-drill 
is represented for drilling elliptical holes with 
V-shaped ends, and in Patents Nos. 257,727, 
granted to F.A. Lane May 9, 1882, and 257,730, 
granted to E. P. Lynch May 9, 1882, devices 
are represented for forming a channel or chan 
nels at the sides of a round hole, and in Pat 
ents Nos. 291,606, granted to J. L. L. Knox 
January 8, 1883, and 475,647, granted to G. L. 
Weller May 24, 1892, devices are represented 
for forming holes in rocks with straight sides 
and V-shaped ends, and in Letters Patent 
No. 371,679, granted to me October 18, 1887, a 
method of and tools for drilling rock are set 
forth, in which the drill is adapted to make 
an elliptical hole or a half-elliptical hole with 
a flat side. 
The present improvements are made for the 
purpose of overcoming difficulties heretofore 
experienced in the use of either one or more 
of the before-mentioned devices. Where the 
hole that is being drilled is a flat or narrow 
ellipse with sharp or V-shaped ends there is 
difficulty in keeping the tool from breaking, 
as the edges of the tool for channeling the 
rock are liable to wear away with rapidity or 
to chip because they are thin. In cases where 
a tool is made with flat sides and V-shaped 
ends the angles of the drill score the rock, 
leaving channels or angles at the junctions of 
the sides with the V-shaped ends, as well as 
the V-shaped angles at the opposite ends or 
edges of the drill. In consequence of these 
channels in the rock when an explosion takes 
place the force of the explosion is exerted 
equally, or nearly so, in all six of the scores 
or channels that are left in the rock by the 
toul. The consequence is that the splitting 
operation is liable to commence in either one 
of the angles or scores, and thus the face of 
the stone is injured by cracks in the surface 
thereof, and the line of cleavage through the 
opposite or end scores in the rock is only the 
result of the superior pressure upon the com 
paratively-flat surfaces of the hole. 
In my present improvement I make the tool 
with flat or nearly-flat sides and with round 
ing or semicylindrical ends, so that the drill 
ing operation performed upon the rock may 
resuit in a hole that is as narrow in width as 
possible and as long in the other direction as 
consistent with the convenience in the manu 
facture of the tools and in the handling of the 
same, and the vertical ends of the hole are 
semicircular. Hence when the explosion takes 
place there are two flat or nearly-flat surfaces 
for the pressure to act upon, and the extent 
of surface is sufficiently great to prevent the 
disintegration of the rock itself where the ex 
plosion acts upon the same, and such explo 
sion simply tends to crack and open the rock in 
the line of the greatest diameter of the holes, 
and there are no scores or angles between the 
flat sides of the hole and the rounding ends, 
and for this reason there is nothing that Will 
produce a false or imperfect line of cleavage. 
It is advantageous in making use of the 
present improvements to introduce Water into 
the hole and to have the end of the drill 
square or flat, so that the drilling operation 
may be performed in the manner set forth in 
Patent No. 371,679. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view 
showing a row of holes, and Fig. 2 is a ver 
tical section representing some of the holes as 
bored and another hole as containing the drill. 
Fig. 3 is a side view, and Fig. 4 is an inverted 
plan, of a drill with beveled edges to the face; 
and Figs. 5 and 6 are similar views with all 
the edges of the face slightly beveled. 
The shank or handle of the drill is a bar A, 
preferably oblong in cross-section and as thin 
as consistent with the proper strength, and 
the width of this bar will depend upon the 
strength required and the measurement of 
the hole to be drilled. 
The head B of the drill is oblong with flat 
sides and rounded ends and of the proper 
length to provide for the required extent of 
wear, and it is welded or otherwise perma 
nently secured to the shank A, and the lower 
end of the drill-head is a flat face, So that the 
drilling action is effected by the concussion 
of the face against the rock; and this is most 
75 
85 
95 
IOC 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
486,101 
So 
55 
75 
- 
dotted lines in Fig. 1. Under most circum 
stances this is not necessary, because the force 
of the explosion in acting upon the flat sides 
of the hole will separate the rock in a regular 
plane of cleavage without injury from cracks 
that are almost sure to commence in angles 
that may be formed in the hole. 
By my improvement there are no angles to 
produce false cracks and injuries to the face 
of the stone and the use of grooving-tools is 
rendered unnecessary; but when preferred 
grooves or channels can be made in the Well 
known manner. 
efficacious when water is introduced into the 
hole and the drilling operation is carried on 
in the manner set forth in my aforesaid pat 
ent, No. 371,679, in order that the water may 
Serve to Wash out the fine disintegrated rock 
that results from the concussion of the drill 
head against the same. 
It will now be observed that the flat sides 
23 of the drill-head present a much larger 
surface in guiding the drill in the drilling op 
erations than the rounded ends 4 of the drill. 
Hence there is very little risk of the hole that 
is drilled becoming much wider than the 
thickness of the drill-head; but the hole may 
I claim as my invention 
become longer in the other direction, and this 
1. A rock-drill having a shank and a head 
is advantageous, because the extent of sur 
that is comparatively thin, with flat sides and 
face upon which the pressure resulting from 
rounded ends, whereby the hole as drilled is 
the explosion acts is thereby increased, and 
much longer in one direction than the other 
under all circumstances the drill will main 
and has flat or nearly-flat sides and round 
tain its original size and shape, or nearly so, 
ends, substantially as set forth. 
with the exception of the Wear upon the op 
2. The method herein specified of drilling 
erative face shortening the length of the drill 
and splitting rock, consisting in drilling into 
head, and this is especially the case where 
the rock a range of holes, each hole being 
Water is provided in the drill-hole, so that the 
much wider in the line of cleavage than in 
Water intervenes all around the drill-head be 
the opposite direction and with flat sides and 
tween the same and the stone. 
rounded ends to such hole, and introducing 
After the desired number of holes have been 
into such holes powder and exploding the 
drilled in line with each other powder is in 
same, so that the powder may act between the 
troduced and the charges are fired as nearly 
nearly-flat opposite surfaces to pry the stone 
simultaneously as possible, and in conse 
apart in the line of cleavage and in a plane 
9tence of the peculiar shape of the holes here 
passing through the longest diameter of the 
tofore described there is no tendency to break 
holes, whereby false cracks and injury to the 
or injure the surface of the stone; but the ac 
surface of the stone are avoided, substan 
tion is simply to split the stone between one 
tially as set forth. 
hole, and the next in a plane passing through 
3. A rock-drill having a shank and a head 
the holes in the direction of their longest di 
that is comparatively thin, with flat sides and 
ameters, or nearly so, and by my improvement 
rounded ends, and a face that is flat and bev 
the drillis rendered much more durable and 
eled on two or more of its edges, whereby the 
the drilling operation much more simplethan 
hole as drilled is much longer in one direc 
in the devices heretofore referred to. 
tion than the other and has flat or nearly-flat 
- - 
In some kinds of rock the edges of the face sides and round ends, substantially as set 
at the rounding ends of the drill may beliable 
forth. 
to break. To avoid this risk, the edges of the 
drill-face may be beveled, as indicated in 
Figs 3 and 4, or all the edges of the face may 
be slightly beveled, as shown in Figs. 5 and 
6. If desired, the end portions of the hole 
may be V-shaped or channeled, as shown by 
Signed by me this 2d day of July, 1892. 
GEO. M. GITHENS. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
WILLIAM G. MOTT. 
- 
O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486201.txt	(No Model.) 
D. L. TOWER. 
CHANGE MAKING AND DELIVERING DEVICE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 486,201, 
Patented Nov. 15, 1892. 
2. 
6 
 
  
2 
ge 
 
 
 
 
D. L. TOWER 
CHANGE MAKING AND DELIVERING DEVICE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 486,201, 
Patented Nov. 15, 1892, 
ra. 
 
SSSSSSSSSSS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL L. TOWER, OF BROOKILYN, NEW YORK. 
CHANGE MAKING AND DELIVERING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 486,201, dated November 15, 1892. 
Application filed January 8, 1892, Serial No. 417,405. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL L. TOWER, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Change Making and 
Delivering Devices; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, making a part of 
this specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved change making and delivering de 
vice which can be operated readily, can be 
easily and quickly charged with coin and as 
easily be relieved of all the coin therein con 
tained, and which can be readily locked, when 
so desired, to prevent operation and access to 
the coin-holders. 
In the accompanying drawings, wherein I 
have illustrated my improvements, Figure 1. 
is a rear elevation of the improved device, the 
lower portion being shown in section on the 
line acac of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 2 is a horizontal sec 
tion on the line y y of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a ver 
tical section on the line 22 of Fig. 1, and Fig. 
4 is a detail of a modification to be referred to. 
Upon a suitable box or casing A are erected 
any desired number of coin-tubes B, of differ 
ent diameters, according to the coins to be de 
livered. The upper portions of said tubes may 
be inclined or vertical, as shown, and are 
formed with open-ended slots b b to permit 
the ends of the operator's fingers to remain 
in contact with a column of coins with which 
he may be charging the machine. The lower 
ends b' of the tubes are preferably inclined 
somewhat, as represented, so that the press 
ure of a column of coins upon the lowermost 
coins and upon the delivery-slides may be 
somewhat relieved. 
The open lower ends of the tubes are closed 
by a delivery-slide, as hereinafter described, 
and are adapted to discharge the coins over 
a common delivery-chute C, which terminates 
in a gate D, adapted to be operated by the 
person receiving the change. In order that 
such person may open the gate with the hand 
in which he receives the coins, I have provided 
...the gate, which is movable over the mouth of 
the chute, with a projecting bail or handle E, 
which stands in position to be struck and 
moved by the hand as it is presented to re 
ceive the coins. In the present case the bail 
or handle is secured to the gate, as at d, and 
its ends are extended upward to enter and 
slide in guides ee, which are fixed to the cas 
ing A. The extremities of the bail are headed, 
as at e'e', to limit the downward movement 
of the gate. 
The delivery-slide F consists of a platef, 
having a hole f', of a diameter equal to the 
diameter of the coin to be delivered, and 
guided in suitable Ways to slide in close con 
tact with the end of the tube. The plate is 
provided with a stem f* and a finger-piece f, 
the stem being surrounded by a spiral spring 
f, which operates to hold the plate in the po 
sition represented in Figs. 1 and 3. Beneath 
the plate f and in close contact therewith is 
fixed another plate f, which has in its end a 
notch f of a width equal to the diameter of 
the coin and which partly overlaps the hole 
in the plate f. The latter is of a thickness 
equal to the thickness of the coin, and con 
Sequently a single coin drops into the hole 
therein when the plate assumes its normal 
position and is thrust forward as the plate is 
pushed against the stress of the spring f', the 
coin dropping into the delivery-chute from 
the plate f as soon as the inner or upper edge 
of the hole therein registers with the inner or 
upper edge of the notch in the plate f. 
For convenience in removing all the coins 
from the tubes I prefer to support the plates 
if and f by arms G, which are secured to the 
plate fand are pivoted to the main casing, as 
at g. A spring or springsg' serves to hold the 
plates normally against the ends of the tubes; 
but by pressing the stems f above the line of 
the pivots g toward the tubes both plates fand 
f will be swung away from the tubes and all 
the coins therein will be delivered into the 
chute. I have shown all the plates as adapt 
ed to Swing together; but it is obvious that 
they might be arranged to swing independ 
ently of one another. The coin-tubes may be 
protected by a cover H and the delivery 
slides F may be held from accidental or im 
proper movement by a locking bar or plate I, 
which is adapted to engage with a notch i in 
each stem f*. For convenience I prefer to 
attach the bar or plate Imovably to the cover 
H, as by hinges i, and in this case I affix to 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
486,201 
the rear edge of the plate I a hook K, which 
passes through a notch k in the top of the 
casing A and engages with the under side 
thereof. In this manner I am enabled to se 
cure both cover H and locking-plate I by a 
single lock, as M, and yet permit the delivery. 
slides F to be released for operation without 
uncovering the coin-tubes. In order that the 
person in charge may conveniently add coins 
to the tubes from time to time without re 
moving the cover, I provide a slith. (see Fig. 
3) in the top of the cover over each tube. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown a modification of 
the delivery-slides by which more than one 
coin of a given denomination may be deliv 
ered at one operation, if desired. The notched 
plate f and one slide-plate fare as before de 
scribed, save that the stem f is slightly off 
set to one side. A second slide-plate f issu 
perimposed upon the first and its stem or a 
projection on the plate overlaps the edge of 
the plate f. The operation of the plate if 
causes the delivery of a single coin; but the 
operation of the second plate f" causes the 
operation of the plate falso and the delivery 
of two coins. Other plates might be added, 
if desired, to cause the delivery of three or 
more coins; but I have deemed it best not to 
obscure the drawing by further illustration. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a change making and delivering ap 
paratus, the combination of a delivery-chute 
having an inclined bottom, vertical ways, a 
gate sliding vertically on said ways and adapt 
ed to close the mouth of Said chute when in 
its lowest position, and a bail extended below 
said gate in the line of its movement and par 
allel with the plane in which the coins fall 
from the chute, whereby the hand is always 
in position to receive coins while opening the 
gate, substantially as shown and described. 
2. In a change making and delivering ap 
25 
35 
45 
55 
paratus, the combination of a cylindrical coin 
tube having its upper portion vertical and its 
lower portion inclined from the vertical and 
a delivery-slide closing the lower end of said 
tube, substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a change making and delivering ap 
paratus, the combination of a coin-tube, a de 
livery-slide closing the lower end thereof, 
movable supports for said slide, and means 
to retain said support and slide against the 
end of said tube, substantially as shown and 
described. 
4. In a change making and delivering ap 
paratus, the combination of a coin-tube, a de 
livery-slide closing the lower end of said tube, 
pivoted arms upon which said slide may 
move, and a spring to retain said slide against 
the end of said tube, substantially as shown 
and described. 
5. In a change making and delivering ap 
paratus, the combination of a coin-tube, a de 
livery-slide closing the lower end thereof, a 
pivoted support for said tube, and a spring 
to swing said support and slide against the 
end of said tube, substantially as shown and 
described. 
6. In a change making and delivering ap 
paratus, the combination of a coin-tube, a de 
livery-slide closing the lower end of said tube, 
a main casing, a cover for said tube, a bar or 
plate connected to said cover and adapted to 
engage said slide, and a locking device to se 
cure said cover and plate to said casing, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
DANIEL L. TOWER. 
7 o 
75 
Witnesses: 
A. N. JESBERA, 
A. WIDDER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486301.txt	(No Model.) 
WALWE APPARATUS FOR GAS OR PETROLEUM MOTOR ENGINEs. 
No. 486,30l. 
Patented Nov. 15, 1892, 
- - - 
H SCHUMM. 
w 
 
N z Ex A 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
'Sz 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMANN SCHUMM, OF COLOGNE, 
GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO THE GAS 
MOTOREN-FABRIK-DEUTZ, OF SAME PLACE. 
VALVE APPARATUS FoR GAs oR PETRO LEU M MOTOR ENG NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 486,801, dated November 15, 1892. 
Application filed December 11, 1891, Serial No. 414,724 (Nom odel.) Patented in Germany March 29, 1891, No. 59,793; in Eng 
land October 16, 1891, No. 17,724 and in Italy January 28, 1892, LXI, 51. 
O 
5 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, HERMANN SCHUMM, a 
citizen of Switzerland, residing at Cologne 
Deutz, in the Empire of Germany, have in 
vented new and useful Improvements in 
Walve Apparatus for Gas or Petroleum Mo 
tor Engines, (for which a patent has been ob 
tained in Germany, dated the 29th day of 
March, 1891, No. 59,793; in Great Britain, 
dated October 16, 1891, No. 17,724, and in 
Italy, dated January 28, 1892, LXI, 51,) of 
Which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to a construction of 
rotary-valve apparatus for gas and petroleum 
engines for establishing the communication 
between the explosion-chamber and the ig 
initing device, wherein the valve is made to 
receive a longitudinal sliding motion in ad 
dition to its reciprocating rotary motion, 
such longitudinal motion being effected by 
the agency of the variations of pressure oc 
curring in the explosion-chamber or engine 
cylinder, the object being to effect by means 
of the combined rotary and longitudinal mo 
tion the removal of any solid deposits that 
may occur between the working faces of the 
Valve and its seat. The construction of the 
apparatus for this purpose is hereinafter de 
Scribed and claimed, reference being made to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 shows a horizontal section; Fig. 2, 
a part elevation; Fig. 3, a modified arrange. 
ment of the driving-gear; Fig. 4, a cross-sec 
tion of the valve, showing the position of the 
Valve-passage for firing the charge; and Fig. 
5, the position of the same for the compress 
ing Stroke. 
The mode of operating with the arrange 
ment shown at Figs. 1, 2, and 3 is as follows: 
The cylindrical rotary slide-valve a, having a 
transverse passage m, receives a rotary recip 
rocating motion, of which Figs. 4 and 5 show 
the tWO opposite limits, by means of the rod 
d, actuated by a crank, eccentric, or cam in 
the engine shaft or Way-shaft, and connected 
either to a sleeve k, the motion of which is 
Communicated to the valve-stem b by the slid 
ing connection c, or the rodd maybe connected 
directly to an arm c' on the valve-stem, the 
connection being such as to permit of a slight 50 
longitudinal motion of the valve-stem. The 
rotary slide-valve a has also a longitudinal 
passage i, which serves to connect the cylin 
der-passage f with the space h at the inner 
end of the valve, which serves as receptacle 55 
for combustion residues. By this arrange 
ment it will be seen that during the whole of 
the rotary motion of the valve the pressures 
in the space h will coincide with those in the 
engine-cylinder, as the passage m is always 6o 
open to the passage?, as shown at Figs. 4 and 5". 
When a partial vacuum is produced in the 
engine-cylinder during the suction or charging 
stroke, the outward-directed pressure acting 
on the inner surfaces of the valve Will be 65 
less than theinward-directed pressure exerted 
by the atmosphere, causing the valve to be 
moved longitudinally inward to an extent 
limited by the stop afforded by the outer end 
of the valve-seating piece e, with which the 7o 
head c comes in contact. When, on the other 
hand, the pressure in the cylinder rises above 
that of the atmosphere during the compres 
sion strokes, the excess of pressure acting On 
the inner end of the valve will force this back 75 
again until its coned end bears against the 
coned seat of e, forming a gas-tight closure, 
so that at the moment of ignition and explo 
sion of the charge the slide will be in the po 
sition shown, with the passage an establish- 8o 
ing a communication between the cylinder 
charge and the heated igniting-tube g. 
When the space h is not required to act as 
a receptacle for combustion residues, as is 
the case when other igniting devices than the 85 
igniting-tube g are used, the passage i can be 
dispensed with and in lieu thereof a passage 
O can be made to establish a communication 
between space h and the cylinder, or the 
space h can form part of the explosion-cham- 9o 
ber of the cylinder. 
With the arrangement shown at Figs. 1 and 
2, the arms c, fixed on the stem b, can slide 
in notches in the flange of the sleeve k, as 
the valve and stem move inward and out- 95 
ward. In the arrangement at Fig. 3, the 
connecting-rod d is assumed to be sufficiently 
elastic to allow of such motion. 
25 
35 
45 
 
486,301 
Having thus described the nature of my in 
Vention and the best means I know for car 
rying the same into practical effect, I claim 
In a gas or petroleum motor engine, a cy 
lindrical rotary valved, with passage m, es 
tablishing a communication between the ex 
plosion-chamber and the igniting device g 
and having freedom to move longitudinally, 
in combination with a chamber h and a port 
Or passage connecting the latter with the cyl 
inder, whereby the inner end of the valve is 
subjected to the varying pressures in the cyl 
inder, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 9th day of 
November, A. D. 1891. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 15 
HERMANN SCHUMM. 
Witnesses: 
IBILLALANG, 
II. A. MAXWELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486402.txt	(No Model.) 
B. W. GRIST. 
ADJUSTABLE SHEAVE SUPPORT. 
No. 486,402, 
W 
Patented Nov. 15, 1892. 
l 
3v-vov to 
4. 2.27% re-141 7% -%224 
2, 2.4/624% 
&ltovo. 
928itv.cocs 
7% 73./es.itle 44 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN W. GRIST, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
PENNSYLVANIA IRON WORKS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ADJUSTABLE SHEAVE SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 486,402, dated November 15, 1892. 
Application filed August 11, 1892, Serial No. 442,778, (No model.) 
25 tion and the other in side elevation. 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN W. GRIST, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Adjustable 
Sheave-Supports; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
Io others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
- 
My present invention relates to means for 
supporting a revoluble sheave for general use; 
but in this instance I have shown it applied 
I5 to cable-railway machinery and located in a 
Vault for the purpose of Supporting the sheave 
used to direct the cable from the power-drum 
to the cable-conduit in a roadway. 
The invention will be fully disclosed in the 
20 following specification and claims. 
The accompanying drawing, which forms 
part of this specification, represents a verti 
cal section of a cable-vault, showing one of 
the sheaves and its supporting-shaft in sec 
Reference being had to the drawing and 
the letters thereon, A indicates a shaft, stud, 
or spindle having a journal C at its upper 
end, upon which is revolubly supported a 
3o sheave B, which is secured upon the shaft by 
a disk b, through which extends a bolt c. from 
the end of the shaft and a nut d. The jour 
nal a is surrounded by a sleeve bearing or 
bushing e of antifriction metal, preferably 
35 phosphor-bronze, and at the lower end of the 
bushing e is an annular bearing-plate f of the 
same material, which is interposed between 
the lower end of the hub g of the sheave and 
the collar h on the shaft A, which supports 
4o the sheave. A similar plate i is interposed 
between the upper end of the hub g and the 
disk b, the sleeve-bearing e and the plates 
fand serving to take or sustain the wear of 
the revolving sheave. The journal a is sup 
45 plied with lubricant from cup a through 
tube b. 
The lower section ic of the shaft A is pref 
erably tapered and is supported in a semi 
spherical bearing C, which is provided with 
5o a central conical borel to receive the tapered 
section k of the shaft A, and the shaft is fix 
 
edly secured in the borel by a nut m, engag 
ing a screw-bolt in and resting upon a washer 
O in a recess p in the lower end of the bear 
ing. The shaft may be provided with a spline 55 
q to prevent the possibility of its turning. 
At the upper end of the bearing C is a con 
centric seat r, upon which a clamping-plate S 
is supported, and said plate is provided with 
eyebolts i, the eyes being on the under side 6o 
of the plate. 
D indicates the base in which the bearing 
C is supported, and is provided with a semi 
spherical cavity or seat it in its upper end, 
which corresponds with the contour of the 65 
outer surface of the bearing C, and with a 
flange v, having holes w for the reception of 
eyebolts y, and concave seats on the under 
side of the flange for the convex washers 2, 
upon which the nuts 2' rest. 
To set the sheave B at the angle of inclina 
tion required to give the proper lead to the 
cable, the bolts y are loosened by unscrewing 
the nuts 2' and the sheave adjusted on the 
bearing C and its base D until the sheave has 75 
assumed the proper position, when the bolts 
are again tightened by drawing up the nuts 
2' and the bearing C, secured, which will hold 
the shaft A and the sheave in fixed relation 
to the cable-drum and the sheave E in the 8o 
cable-conduit F in the road-bed. 
7o 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. The combination of a base having a con 
cave bearing-seat in its upper end, a sheave- 85 
support having a semispherical bearing adapt 
ed to and adjustable in said seat and pro 
vided with a concentric seat to receive a 
clamping-plate, an annular clamping-plate 
engaging said concentric seat, and a sheave go 
revoluble on said support, 
2. The combination of a shaft having a cy 
lindrical and conical section, a sheave revo 
lubly mounted on said cylindrical section, a 
semispherical bearing having a conical bore 95 
in which the conical section of the shaft is 
rigidly secured, a base having a semispheri 
cal seat, and means for adjustably securing 
the bearing in the seat. 
journal at one end, a sheave revolubly sup 
ported on said journal, a bearing separate 
3. The combination of a shaft having a ico 
2 
486,402 
from the shaft and to which the lower end of 
the shaft is rigidly secured, a concentric seat presence of two witnesses. 
at the upper end of said bearing, a clamping 
plate on said seat, a base having a seat for 
5 said bearing and provided with a surround- 
ing flange, and bolts for connecting the clamp- 
ing-plate to said flange. 
JAMES E. GRIST, 
EMANUEL NAGL. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
Witnesses: 
B. W. GRIST. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486502.txt	(No Model.) , 
No. 486,502, 
J. POLKOWSKI. 
FEATHERING PADDLE WHEEL. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1892. 
--SAT-- 
2 
2 EH 2zzzzzzzzzz 
ZZ2 
d 
ZZZ Z27 
= st Ela El 
5EE(RSAFEN: O 
Z per 
O S-22 
Sreene 
Ap A. 
A 
D 
2 
Bur 
Ellis 
NSTLE T 
Afrik 
- - 
 
WITNESSES: 
J%-ol. JoJu 
A 6'6.4/k 
 
/WVENTOR 
% aza/2. 
By 44.2%% 
(7-a--a < u-e- 
ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
J. POLKOWSKI. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 486,502, 
FEATHERING PADDLE WHEEL. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1892. 
WITNESSES: . 
Jo-oh, Jokuuld 
of66 2^6. 
r 
1NWEWTOR 
46%. 3% 
BY 
ATTORWEY, 
THENORS PETERS co, PHOTO-LITHo, washington, p.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN POLKOW SKI, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FEATHE RING PADD LE WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 486,502, dated November 22, 1892. 
Application filed April 8, 1892, Serial No. 428,382, (No model.) 
55 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN POLKOWSKI, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Feathering 
Paddle-Wheels, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to that class of pad 
dle-wheels in which the floats or paddles are 
on radial spindles, each rotating on its own 
axis, as well as the axis of the wheel, for 
bringing the paddles to reversepositions when 
entering and leaving the water. 
The novel features of my paddle-wheel are 
hereinafter fully described, with reference to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I is a side view, partly in section, 
thereof, showing the mechanism for auto 
matically reversing the paddles. Fig. II is a 
horizontal section thereof. Fig. III is a side 
view of a portion thereof, showing mechan 
ism for automatically changing the point of 
reversal of the paddles, according to the di 
rection of motion of the wheel. Fig. III is 
an edge view of an adjusting-lever and con 
comitants. Fig. IV is a plan view of parts 
illustrating the operation of the paddle-re 
versing mechanism. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts. 
The letter A indicates a shaft, which is 
mounted in bearings of a suitable frame and 
on which in turn is mounted the paddle 
wheel. The body of this wheel is composed 
of three concentric rings B B B and of 
spokes B, uniting said rings, the inner ring 
B forming the wheel-hub and being fastened 
to the wheel-shaft A, as by a set-screw B', 
thus causing the wheel to turn with the shaft. 
In practice motion is imparted to the shaft A, 
as by a crank B, from a proper source of 
power. 
The letter C indicates a series of radial 
spindles supporting the paddles C of the 
wheel. Each of these spindles C is mounted 
in the concentric rings B B'B', so as to be 
capable of rotating axially, and at a point 
within the inner ring Beach of the spin 
diles has a cam D firmly mounted thereon, to 
the inner face of each of which cams are se 
cured in eccentric position two radial guide 
pins ID'. The cams Dare formed, respectively, 
of a plate with two hooks D, Fig. IV, on the pe 
riphery thereof for adapting the cams to en 
gage with each of two trip-pins e, as herein 
after explained, and at a point next to the 
cams, within the inner ring B, is a concentric 
disk F, with a hole for the wheel-shaft A, it 
being stationary thereon, while the wheel 
turns around the disk. This stationary disk 
Fis constructed with a circumferential groove 
F, which in practice receives in it one or 
the other of said guide-pins D', according to 
the position of the cams, and the edges of 
which are cut away at points in fixed rela 
tion to each of the trip-pins e, so as to form 
passages F for the cam guide-pins to and 
from the disk-groove. The trip-pins e are 
at opposite sides of the stationary disk in 
the path of the spindle-cams D, and each of 
said pins is firmly connected to a suitable 
part of the disk, so as to lie in a radial posi 
tion. The angles of the trip-pins e, how 
ever, are of different degrees, being in this 
example of thirty degrees and sixty degrees, 
respectively, and by this arrangement the 
operation of Said trip-pins is as follows: As 
suming that the paddle-wheel shall revolve 
in the direction of the arrow in Fig. I, in the 
circulation of the series of cams D around the 
stationary disk F by the motion of the wheel 
each of the trip-pins e engages with said 
cams, so as to alternately reverse the posi 
tions thereof, together with the radial spindles 
C and paddles C, and by the action of the trip 
pin lying at the angle of sixty degrees each of 
the paddles is brought into a plane transverse 
to the wheel when it reaches a horizontal po 
sition, while by the action of the trip-pin ly 
ing at the angle of thirty degrees each of the 
paddles is brought into a plane parallel to 
the wheel when it reaches a position inter 
mediate of the vertical and horizontal, the re 
sult being to produce the desired feathering 
of the paddles. In the reversal of the cams 
D one of the guide-pins D' enters and the 
other of said pins leaves the circumferential 
75 
90 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
486,502 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
disk-groove F by way of the passages F, and 
hence either of said pins is always contained 
in said groove, with the effect of controlling 
the positions of the cams, &c. In order to in 
crease said effect of the cam guide-pins D', 
the inner ends of the radial spindles C are 
extended into the disk-groove F; but, if de 
sired, the said spindles may be terminated in 
the cams. When the motion of the paddle 
wheel is in an opposite direction to that of 
the arrow in Fig. I, the two radial trip-pins e 
should be transposed as to their angles, as 
indicated by dotted lines in Fig. I, this con 
dition being necessary to produce the desired 
feathering of the paddles in Such motion of 
the wheel, and to fulfill this condition I make 
use of the automatic adjusting mechanism 
next described. 
The stationary disk F, being mounted 
loosely on the wheel-shaft A, is capable of 
motion thereon, and to said disk are firmly 
connected two pins G. G', forming gages, and 
a third pin G', forming, together with a lever 
I, an adjusting device. Each of the pins G. 
G' G is parallel to the axis of the stationary 
disk F and projects from the latter through 
a concentric slot J of a plate J, which is suit 
ably fastened to the wheel-supporting frame. 
The gage-pins G. G' are equidistant from the 
adjusting-pin G', as more clearly shown in 
Fig. III. The letter O indicates two pawls, 
which are suitably pivoted to the plate J, and 
at one end of each of which is formed a hook 
O', whereby it is adapted to engage one of 
the gage-pins G. G', so as to lock this pin, to 
gether with the stationary disk F, while the 
other or tail end of each of said locking-pawls 
is arranged in the path of a spur I of the 
adjusting-lever I. On the intermediate ring 
B' of the paddle-wheel is a concentric row or 
series of tappets S, and the adjusting-lever I 
is pivoted to the plate J in such a manner 
that its one end lies in the path of said con 
centric-wheel tappets, while the other end of 
the adjusting-lever is formed with a fork I, 
or otherwise adapted to engage with the disk 
adjusting pin G'. When the wheel revolves 
in the direction of the arrow, the gage-pin G 
is in engagement with the proper locking 
pawl O, and the stationary disk F is held in 
one of its two predetermined positions; but 
when the wheel revolves in a direction oppo 
site to the arrow one of the tappets S comes 
in contact with the adjusting-lever I, and, dis 
placing the same, causes its spur I to engage 
with the disk-locking pawls O, so as to re 
tract the latter, thereby releasing the disk 
gage-pin G, the forked end I of the adjust 
ing-lever at the same time engaging with the 
adjusting-pin G', so as to displace the same, 
together with the disk, bringing the disk into 
The locking-pawls 
the other of its positions. 
O having meanwhile been set free, the gage 
pin G' is brought in engagement with the 
proper pawl with the effect of re-securing the 
parts. When the fork I of the adjusting 
lever is used, a stop-pin may be located at 
each side of the adjusting-pin G', and, if de 
sired, the several pins G. G'G' may be joined, 
as shown in Fig. II. In order to insure a 
proper action of the locking-pawls O, a spring 
O' may be combined with each of the pawls. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a paddle-wheel, the combination of a 
series of radial axially-rotating spindles sup 
porting the paddles, a cam on each of the said 
spindles, having two radial eccentric guide 
pins, a stationary concentric disk on the pad 
die-wheel shaft, with a circumferential groove 
receiving alternately each of said cam guide 
pins for controlling the positions of the cams, 
and two radial trip-pins at opposite sides of 
the stationary disk, connected thereto, with 
different degrees of angle for engaging with 
the spindle-cams to alternately reverse the po 
sitions thereof, together with the spindles and 
paddles, the edges of said circumferential 
disk-groove being cut away at points in fixed 
relation to each of said trip-pins to form pas 
sages for the cam guide-pins to and from the 
groove, substantially as and for the purpose 
herein described. 
2. In a paddle-wheel, the combination of ra 
dial axially-rotating spindles supporting the 
paddles, a reversing mechanism for said spin 
dles, comprising the stationary concentric disk 
mounted loosely on the paddle-wheel shaft, 
two gage-pins connected to the stationary disk 
for determining the positions thereof on the 
shaft, two locking pawls, each alternately en 
gaging one of Said disk gage-pins, an adjust 
ing-pin connected to the stationary disk, a 
concentric Series of tappets at one side of the 
wheel, mounted thereon, an adjusting-lever 
for engaging at one end with said disk-adjust 
ing pin and at the other end with the concen 
tric wheel-tappets, and a spur on said adjust 
ing-lever for engaging with the disk-locking 
pawls to retract the latter, whereby the sta 
tionary disk is automatically set to different 
positions, according to the direction of motion 
of the wheel, substantially as and for the pur 
pose herein described. 
3. In a paddle-wheel, the combination of ra. 
dial axially-rotating spindles supporting the 
paddles, a cam on each of the said spindles, 
having two radial eccentric guide-pins, a sta. 
tionary concentric disk mounted loosely on 
the paddle-wheel shaft and constructed with 
a circumferential groove receiving alternately 
each of Said cam guide-pins, two radial trip 
pins at opposite sides of the stationary disk, 
connected thereto, with different degrees of 
an angle, the edges of said circumferential 
disk-groove having passages for the camguide 
pins to and from it at points in fixed relation 
to Said trip-pins, two gage-pins connected to 
the stationary disk in fixed relation to the 
trip-pins, two locking-pawls, each alternately 
engaging. One of Said disk gage-pins, an ad 
justing-pin connected to the stationary disk, 
75 
95 
CO 
lo5 
o 
IIS 
I 25 
 
486,502 
3 
a concentric series of tappets at one side of stantially as and for the purpose herein de 
the wheel, mounted thereon, an adjusting-le- scribed. 
ver for engaging at one end with said disk 
adjusting pins and at the other end with the 
5 concentric wheel-tappets, and a spur on said 
adjusting-lever for engaging with the disk- 
locking pawls to retract the latter, all sub- 
CHAS. WAHLERS, 
FRANK POLKOSKI. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN POLKOWSKI. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486602.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 486,602, 
A. R. P. MORTON. 
SEWING OR EMBROIDERY TABLE, 
Patented Nov. 22, 1892. 
7. 
al 
(77-7%.e., 
Z722-ye 7-z-Zov. 
Zy 
&e 4, 24----eled 
7zer-42/or 7-zey 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALICE R. P. MOR TON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SEWING OR EMBRODERY TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 486,602, dated November 22, 1892. 
Application filed May 17, 1892, Serial No. 433,371 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALICE R. P. MORTON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented an Improvement in Sewing or Em 
broidery Tables, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part thereof. 
My table is constructed as follows: I use 
four suitably-shaped legs or standards joined 
in pairs by rungs, one at the top and one near 
the feet of the standards. Each pairso joined 
constitutes a frame, two of which are pivoted 
together about the center of the standards. 
This brings the two top rungsparallel to each 
other, and to retain them in proper position 
their ends are connected by lateral rods 
jointed at the middle and pivoted at their 
ends to the ends of the parallel rungs. One 
of these rungs is pivoted at its ends to the 
tops of the corresponding standards, the other 
rung being fixed to the opposite standards. 
This arrangement, forming a quadrangular 
framework, to which is secured the mouth or 
open end of a sack or pocket made of any 
material, preferably silk, suitable for holding 
such articles as are common to a sewing or 
embroidery table. Upon this frame rests a 
two-part hinged table, one edge of which is 
fixed to the pivoted rung, the other edge ca 
pable of extending to and resting upon the 
opposite rung. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a closed 
table infolding a sack or pocket, a portion of 
which is seen at B, and shows the table-top 
A and its hinged leaf A', as appears when the 
table is not in use. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view showing the table-leaf A' raised and 
resting upon the rung D' (seen in Fig. 3) in 
position as a card-table and affording a gen 
eral view of the sack or pocket B. Fig. 3 is 
a perspective view of the table when all its 
parts are brought into requisition, showing 
the table-top A tilted and fixed to the pivoted 
rung D, A' being elevated to afford access to 
the mouth of the pocket B, also shows the 
hook and staple Kk (see Figs, 3 and 5) for 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
securing the table-leaf A when extended to 
the rung D'. Fig. 4 is a sectional view show 
ing part A of the table attached to the rung 
D, the table-leaf A' being held in position 
when raised by the pivoted bail-shaped Sup 
port E. E., stop G, and angular brace F. Fig. 
5 is a plan view showing the under side of 
the hinged table with the stop G to receive 
the bail-shaped support E. E., showing, also, 
the adjustable angular brace F if, which, to 
gether with the support E. E., maintains the 
position of the table-top, as shown in Figs. 3 
and 4, showing, also, the adjustable brace H 
for securing the extended position of the 
table-leaf A', as shown in Fig. 2. 
To operate the table, Fig. 1 being its nor 
mal position, tilt the entire table-top back 
ward, adjusting the brace H to the screw 
head h'. Then let the table-leaf A' rest upon 
the front rung D', to which it may be secured 
by the hook and staple Kik, as seen in Figs. 
3 and 5. A change to third position is ef 
fected by relieving the hook K, tilting the ta 
ble-top backward, relieving the brace H, and 
adjusting the brace F to permit the table-top 
to assume the proper angle, as shown in Figs. 
3 and 4, and adjusting the pivoted support 
E E to the stop G. 
I am aware that sewing and embroidery ta 
bles are not new; but, 
Having fully described my invention, I do 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, as follows: 
As an article of manufacture, a sewing or 
embroidery table comprising the legs, the 
frame supported thereby, the bag depending 
from Said frame, the two-part hinged top, the 
pivoted rung D, connected to one part, the 
bail-shaped support E, the stop G to receive 
the support, and the angle-brace F, said rung, 
Support, stop, and brace co-operating to re 
tain the two-part top when it is elevated and 
adjusted above the bag. 
ALICE R. P. MORTON. 
a. 
Witnesses: 
E. C. TowNSEND, 
H. HITCHCOCK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486702.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. DECROW. 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
SUCCESSIWE NON-INTERFERENCE SIGNA BOX, 
 
No. 486,702, 
Patented Nov. 22, 1892. 
(No Model.) 
W. E. DECROW, 
SUCCESSIWE NON-INTERFERENCE SIGNAL BOX. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 486,702, 
 
Patented Nov. 22, 1892, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. DE CROW, OF BOST ON, MASS ACHUSETTS. 
SUCCESSIVE NON-INTERFERENCE SIGNAL BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 486,702, dated November 22, 1892. 
Application filed July 25, 1890, Serial No. 359,949, (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To aid, whom it nually concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. DECRow, 
of Boston, county of Suffolk, Commonwealth 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Successive Non 
Interference Signal Boxes, of which the fol 
lowing description, together with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification. 
My invention relates to electric signal 
boxes which by mechanically making and 
breaking an electric circuit transmit a signal. 
My invention consists of devices by means 
of which if one or more boxes are released 
While another box or boxes in the same elec 
tric circuit are liberated there will be no con 
fusion and the boxes liberated will send in 
their signals successively. 
In general the invention consists of a me 
chanical disabling device for rendering the 
apparatus inoperative and certain detents for 
holding this disabling device, so that the ap 
paratus Will be in operative condition at all 
times except when the box is pulled when an 
interfering-signal is on the line, while by the 
Same arrangement I provide that the box will 
be automatically restored to its operative con 
dition and its own signal sent on the termi 
nation of the interfering-signal. I accomplish 
this result by devices so constructed and so 
placed in relation to the circuit-breaking 
Wheel and certain detents that breaking the 
circuit at a distant point and starting the 
train Will remove the circuit-key from the 
path of the circuit-breaking wheel, detaining 
it outside the path until by the continued 
movement of the train the circuit-key is re 
stored or reset to the path of the circuit 
breaking wheel by a part attached to the 
train, when if the circuit is no longer being 
broken from a distant point the number of 
the box will come in. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the mech 
anism of a box embodying my invention. 
Figs. 2 and 3 are respectively side and end 
elevations of the same. Fig. 4 is a plan view, 
and Figs. 5, 6, and 7 illustrate details. 
The same letters of reference designate the 
Same parts in all of the figures. 
To the frame X of a fire-alarm signal-box 
of ordinary construction and carrying a train 
of wheels t, actuated by a spring T, I pivot at 
p a rocking lever or arm B, to which are at 
tached the springs S and S', forming a key 
break of familiarform, and to which, by means 
of the angle-piece a and the stud or shaft b, 
I attach an arm A, provided with the incline 
plane C and the trip-cam E, held in position 
by its spring F, all parts being properly in 
sulated. The rocking lever B, carrying the 
springs S and 'S', and the arm A, rigidly at 
tached to it by the angle-piece a and the stud 
or shaft b, form one acting part, which is con 
structed, as shown, to present convenient 
points of engagement with the detents D' 
and D. 
To the armature H of an electro-magnet I 
in the circuit I attach arm or detent D', piv 
oted at p", capable of engaging and disengag 
ing with the arm A, its position being gov 
erned by the presence or absence of current 
in the magnet I, which overcomes the pull of 
the Spring J. 
To the wheel W in the train I attach the 
pin K, capable of engaging with a notch in 
the lever L when the same is in its path, and 
also the detent D, capable of being brought 
into engagement both with the incline C and 
the trip - cam E by the revolution of the 
wheel W. 
I provide the stop-lever L (pivoted at p' 
and impelled by its spring M to engage With 
the pin R) with the flange N, with which the 
trip-cam E engages whenever the said cam is 
itself engaged and lifted by the detent D'. 
Spring P (shown in Figs. 2 and 5) tends to 
move the rocking lever Band attached springs 
S and S' out of the path of the circuit-break 
ing wheel R when not prevented by the en 
gagement with the rocking lever B and the 
parts attached thereto of one or more of the 
detents D', D, and D. The flanged detent 
D is attached to the frame X in a position 
to engage with the projection V on the spring 
S when the same rides up on the teeth of the 
circuit-wheel R. of ordinary construction. 
The action of my machine is as follows 
when it is placed in an electric circuit: First, 
if the circuit is broken from a distant point 
and the train is not liberated the magnet I is 
de-energized and armature-detent D is dis 
engaged from arm. A by the action of spring.J; 
but the engagement of detent D* with the in 
cline C detains the rocking lever B and holds 
the springs SS' in the path of the circuit 
95 
IOC 
d 
25 
35 
45 
 
486,702 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
breaking wheel R; second, if the train is lib 
erated in the usual manner when the circuit 
is closed-i. e., when my improved box is 
pulled and the line is free-detent D, moving 
with the wheel W, passes off the incline C; 
but detent D' is still in engagement with the 
arm A until by the revolution of the circuit 
breaking wheel R a tooth thereon raises the 
spring S from the spring S', breaks the cir 
cuit, and detent D' is disengaged from the 
arm. A by the action of spring J; but the pro 
jection V on the spring S has now moved un 
der the detent D8. Thus spring S is held in 
the path of the circuit-wheel R. during the 
disengagement of detent D' consequent upon 
breaking the circuit. When the spring S 
falls from the tooth of the circuit-breaking 
Wheel R, it closes the circuit by contact with 
Spring S', and the detentlD' re-engages arm A 
by the action of the magnet on its armature, 
overcoming the action of spring J before the 
projection V has moved out of engagement 
with detent D'; third, if the train is liberated 
(my box is pulled) while the circuit is being 
broken at a distant point (another box is op 
erating) detent D becomes disengaged from 
incline C by the movement of the train to which 
it is attached and detent D' moves out of en 
gagement with arm. A by the action of spring 
J, as above described. Because of the break in 
the circuit detent D' cannot engage projec 
tion V, because the teeth of the circuit-break 
ing wheel R have not lifted spring S into a 
position of possible engagement, as the break 
in the circuit must occur before a tooth reaches 
the spring S. Spring P therefore is free to 
act and forces the spring S, carried by the 
rocking lever B, out of the path of the cir 
cuit-breaking wheel R. 
It is evident that with the circuit-key, com 
posed of the springs S and S', removed from 
the path of the circuit-breaking wheel R the 
box is electrically inoperative. To enable it 
to Send a signal after the current is restored 
two things are necessary-first, a restoration 
of the circuit-key to the path of the circuit 
breaking wheel R, and, second, a continued 
movement of the train for the time necessary 
to give the signal after the circuit is restored. 
I provide arm A with an incline C, with a 
height equal to its arc of movement. With 
this incline C the detent D engages as the 
wheel W revolves and restores rocking lever 
B to the path of the circuit-breaking wheel. 
To secure a continued movement of the train, 
I form detent D to engage with trip-cam E 
if the circuit-key is out of the path of the cir 
cuit-breaking wheel, but not otherwise, and 
to force it against the action of spring F to 
engage with flange N, and so move stop-lever 
L out of the path of pin K. To restore the 
stop-lever L, I provide it with the incline 
plane O, with which pin K subsequently en 
gages as the wheel W revolves and lifts the 
flange N from the trigger E, which will then 
be restored by its spring F, and stop-lever L 
will be restored by its spring M to a position 
of possible engagement with pin K when the 
wheel W has completed its revolution. 
It is obvious that the form of my machine 
can be much altered without changing the 
principle of its operation. The construction 
of the nechanism composed of the lever B, 
pivoted at p and bearing the spring-key Com 
posed of two springs S and S', and also bear 
ing the arm A, attached thereto by the angle 
piece a and the post b, was only adopted to 
enable it to be readily applied to a familiar 
form of signal-boxes now in use. It thus ap 
pears that the mechanism described illus 
trates my general invention, the mechanical 
disabling device consisting of the circuit-key 
adapted to be thrown into and out of the po 
sition where it will be engaged and actuated 
by the break-wheel, while the detents for said 
disabling device-three in number-are, first, 
the armature-lever D', controlled by the non 
interference magnet I; second, the stops D', 
controlled by the train, and third, the bracket 
D', so placed that the circuit-key engages 
there with when operated by the break-wheel. 
It is also clear that the apparatus is auto 
matically brought into operative condition 
and a signal sent upon the termination of an 
interfering-signal, or, in other words, is made 
a succession-box by means of the auto 
matic resetter for arm A and automatic re 
leaser for the train, consisting, respectively, 
of the cam projection C and the trigger E, 
both of which are engaged by the stop or pro 
jection D on the train, whereby the disabling 
device is automatically reset and the train 
automatically started on a second round after 
the interfering-signal has been completed and 
the line is clear. It will be readily perceived 
by one skilled in the art that various equiva 
lents for these elements may be employed. 
It will be noted that in my apparatus the 
device is, as Itermit, mechanically disabled' 
in order that it may not send an interfering 
signal. I intend this term to distinguish my 
apparatus from others in which the device is, 
it may be said, electrically disabled  In 
the one case some part of the mechanism is 
displaced, (in my device it is the circuit-break 
ing key,) so that the normal mechanical op 
eration cannot take place. In the other case, 
however, the mechanism is left in its normal 
condition and a short circuit is closed around 
the signaling contact, so that while the de 
vice will operate mechanically it will be dis 
abled electrically. 
I claim 
1. In a signal apparatus, the combination, 
with a break-wheel and train, of a mechani 
cal disabling device and three detents there 
for, one controlled by a non-interference mag 
net, one by the train, and the third by the 
action of the apparatus in sending a signal. 
2. In a signal apparatus, the combination, 
with a mechanical disabling device therefor, 
of a spring tending to throw said device into 
a position to disable the apparatus, a detent 
holding said device against the action of said 
75 
95 
CO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
486,702 
Spring and controlled by a non-interference 
magnet, whereby the apparatus will be dis 
abled if an interfering-signal is being sent, 
a Second detent for said device controlled by 
the train, whereby if the train is started the 
device will be released, provided no interfer 
ing-signal is being sent, and a third detent 
for said device controlled by the apparatus 
when in operation, whereby it will not be dis 
abled by its own interruption of the circuit. 
3. In a signal apparatus, the combination 
of a break-wheel, a circuit-key operated by 
Said Wheel, but adapted to be spring-pressed 
Out of Operative position to disable the appa 
ratus, and three detents for said key, one con 
trolled by a non-interference magnet, one con 
trolled by the train, and the third placed to 
engage the key when it is operated by the 
break-wheel. 
4. In a signal apparatus, the combination, 
With the train, of a break-wheel adapted to 
come into action at a certain period after the 
train is started, a mechanical disabling device 
for interrupting the mechanical continuity of 
the mechanism, and a detent therefor con 
trolled by a non-interference magnet, whereby 
if the train is started while an interfering 
signalisbeing sent the detent will be removed 
and the apparatus disabled before the break 
Wheel comes into action. 
5. In a signal apparatus, the combination, 
with a signal-wheel, its train, a mechanical 
disabling device, and three detents for said 
device, as described, of a resetter for said de 
vice and a releaser for the train, both oper 
ated by the train in running, whereby if the 
box is started while an interfering-signal is 
being sent it will be temporarily disabled, but 
Will be automatically restored and a signal 
sent upon the termination of the interfering 
signal. 
6. In a signal apparatus, the combination, 
With a train and break-wheel, of a manual 
Starting device for the train, a non-interfer 
ence magnet, mechanical disabling device 
therefor acting to interrupt the mechanical 
continuity of the mechanism, and detents for 
said device, controlled by the train and said 
magnet, respectively, whereby neither alone 
can disable the apparatus. 
7. In a signal apparatus, the combination, 
with a circuit-key, of a break-wheel therefor, 
a spring for throwing said key out of its op 
erative position, three detents for said key, 
controlled, respectively, by the non-interfer 
ence magnet, the train, and the break-wheel, 
an automatic resetter for said key, and an au 
tomatic releaser for said train. 
8. In a signal apparatus, the combination, 
with a train and break-wheel, of a manual 
starting device for the train, a non-interfer 
to 
ence magnet, means for mechanically dis. 
abling the apparatus, so that the mechanical 
continuity of the mechanism is interrupted, 
in order that the break-wheel shall not act to 
interrupt the circuit, and detents therefor 
controlled by the said magnet and train, re 
spectively. 
9. In a signal apparatus, the combination, 
with a train and break-wheel, of a manual 
starting device therefor, a non-interference 
magnet, means for mechanically disabling 
the apparatus, so that the mechanical con 
tinuity of the mechanism is interrupted, in 
order that the break-wheel shall not act to 
interrupt the circuit, and detents therefor 
controlled by the said magnet and train, re 
spectively, with a device for preventing the 
disabling of the apparatus by its own mag 
net in sending a signal. 
10. In a signal apparatus, a break-wheel 
and train therefor, a non-interference mag 
net, and contacts in the main line, adapted to 
be actuated by said wheel and so placed rela 
tively 
to the wheel as to be mechanically 
engaged by the wheel or not, according to the 
position of detents controlled by the train and 
magnet, respectively. 
11. In a signal apparatus, a break-wheel 
and train therefor, a non-interference mag 
net, and contacts in the mainline, adapted to 
be actuated by the said wheel and so placed 
relatively to the wheel as to be mechanically 
engaged by the wheel or not, according to the 
position of the detents controlled by the train 
and magnet, respectively, means being also 
provided for preventing the disabling of the 
apparatus by its own magnet in sending a 
signal. 
12. In a signal apparatus, a break-wheel 
and train therefor, a non-interference mag 
net, contacts in the main line, adapted to be 
actuated by the said wheel, and two detents 
determining the mechanical engagement of 
said contacts by the wheel, one detent being 
controlled definitely by the train and the 
other controlled by the said magnet, 
13. In a signal apparatus, a break-Wheel 
and train therefor, a non-interference mag 
net, contacts in the main line, adapted to be 
actuated by the said wheel, and two detents 
determining the mechanical engagement of 
said contacts by the wheel, one detent being 
controlled definitely by the train and the 
other controlled by the said. Imagnet, means 
being also provided for preventing the dis 
abling of the apparatus by its own magnet 
in sending a signal. 
WILLIAM. E. DECROW. 
Witnesses : 
GEORGE D. AYERS, 
SETH. T. EARNSWORTH. 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC) 
IC5 
O 
II5 
IO 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486803.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 486,803. 
 
A. WIL, KINSON, 
SLIDING GATE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1892. 
 
2% 
y 2 as Affarpeys, 
cszzzzy A2/A272 so-2- 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 486,803. 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
A WILKINSON, 
SLIDING GATE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1892. 
  
 
 
 
Sl 
s 
2 1 hull 
N-L-L-N 
SN 
 
 
e 
Ipilepiar 
Casazzaz Azzz/2-so-2- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ASBURY WILKINSON, OF LAKE CHARLES, LOUISIANA. 
SLIDING GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 486,803, dated November 22, 1892. 
Application filed May 9, 1892, Serial No. 432,290, (No model.) 
d 
25 
To all willon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ASBURY WILKINSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lake 
Charles, in the parish of Calcasieu and State 
of Louisiana, have invented a new and useful 
Sliding Gate, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
sliding gates. 
The object of the present invention is to 
simplify and improve the construction of slid 
ing gates and to increase their ease of oper 
ation. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
Out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a sliding gate constructed in accord 
ance with this invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
sectional view taken longitudinally of the 
gates. Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view. 
Fig. 4 is a detail sectional view taken hori 
ZOntally of the supplemental frame. 
Like numerals of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw. 
lingS. 
1 1 designate sliding gates which are sus 
pended from a horizontal track-bar 2 of a sup 
porting-frame 3, forming a gateway and hav 
ing mounted upon it a transversely-disposed 
rectangular frame 4, in the sides 5 of which 
are fulcrumed operating-levers 6, connected 
with and adapted to open and close the gates 
1 and extending from opposite sides of 
the same a sufficient distance from the gate 
way to enable them to be readily operated 
from on horseback or from a vehicle approach 
ing and leaving the gateway. The operating 
levers have their inner ends connected by 
links 7 with a vertically - sliding weighted 
block 8, which is arranged in vertical guides 9 
and which is connected by link-plates 10 with 
inwardly-extending arms 11 of gate-levers 12, 
and the latter are fulcrumed at their upper 
ends on the supporting-frame and have their 
lower ends pivoted to links 13, which are also 
pivoted to the sliding gates 1, whereby when 
5o the block is raised by depressing the outer 
35 
45 
ends of the operating-levers the gates 1 will 
be closed and by lowering the block they will 
be opened. The vertical guides 9 are diago 
nally disposed at opposite corners of the ver 
tically movable block 8 and are recessed to 55 
receive the edges of the block and they en 
able the block to move freely. The weighted 
block is provided at its upper and lower ends 
with openings or bifurcations 14 and 15, which 
are disposed at right angles to each other. 
The inwardly-extending arms 11 are approxi 
mately horizontal and make bell-crank levers 
of the gate-levers. The weighted block, which 
is constructed of metal, serves to counterbal 
ance the levers and to enable the parts to move 65 
freely, and it greatly facilitates the operation 
of the sliding gates. The link-plates 7 and 10 
are pivoted in the openings or bifurcations of 
the weighted block. 
It will be seen that the means for operat 
ing the sliding gates are simple and compara 
tively inexpensive in construction and that 
the parts are counterbalanced to enable them 
to move freely. 
75 
What I claim is- 
1. The combination of a supporting-frame 
having a track-bar and provided with a trans 
versely-disposed supplemental frame, sliding 
gates suspended from the track-bar, gate 
levers fulcrumed on the supporting-frame 
and connected with the sliding gates and hav 
ing inwardly - extending arms, a vertically 
sliding weighted block mounted on the sup 
plemental frame and having its lower end 
connected with the arms of the gate-levers, 
and operating-levers fulcrumed on the sup 
plemental frame and connected with the up 
per end of the sliding block, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination of a supporting-frame 
having a track-bar, a transversely disposed 
supplemental frame mounted on the main 
frame and provided with vertically-arranged 
diagonally-disposed guides, the vertically 
movable weighted block arranged in the 
guides and having openings at its upper and 
lower ends arranged at angles to each other, 
the operating-levers fulcrumed on the supple 
mental frame, the upper links pivoted in the 
upper opening of the block and to the oper- Ioo 
9o 
 
2 
486,803 
ating-levers, sliding gates suspended from 
the track-bar, gate-levers fulcrumed on the my own I have hereto affixed my signature in Io 
supporting-frame and having their lower ends the presence of two witnesses. 
connected with the sliding gates and provided 
5 at their upper ends withinwardly extending 
arms, and the links arranged in the lower 
openings of the block and connecting the same 
with the arms, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
ASBURY WILKINSON. 
Witnesses: 
A. C. WILLIAMSON, 
FRANK ROBERTS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US486903.txt	(No Model.) 
C. A. SMITH, 
HAME FASTENER, 
 
   
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTOPHER A. SMITH, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
HAMEu FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 486,903, dated November 29, 1892. 
Application filed April 20, 1892, Serial No,429,910, (No model.) 
IO 
2 ? 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that II, CHRISTOPHER A. SMITH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
5 and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Hame 
Fasteners, of which the following is a specifi 
cation, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
hame-fasteners; and it consists in certain novel 
features hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a front 
elevation of a hame provided with my im 
proved fastener. Fig. 2 is an enlarged detail 
view. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal vertical section 
of the upper end of the fastening-lever; and 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of the end of the fas 
tening-lever, looking at the inner side of the 
Sale. 
The hame A is of the ordinary construction 
and is composed of two members, as usual, 
one of which is provided with a hook B and 
to the other one of which is pivoted the fas 
tening-lever C. The fastening-lever carries 
a loop or ring D, to which a chain E is at 
tached, said chain being adapted to be en 
gaged over the hook B when the hame is fas 
tened. The hame is provided with a recess 
F in one side, which is covered by a keeper 
plate G, having a slot H registering with the 
recess. The upper end of the fastening-le 
ver is reduced and the locking-hook I rests 
against and works-that is, slides vertically 
on the reduced portion, the hook being pre 
vented from falling laterally away from the 
lever by studs J, which engage a central lon 
gitudinal groove K in the inner side of the 
lever at the upper end of the same. The 
locking-hook consists of a flat plate provided 
with a lateral hookL at its upper end adapted 
to pass through the slot H and drop into en 
gagement with the lower wall of the same, 
thereby holding the lever against the hame. 
45 The movement of the locking-hook is con 
25 
35 
55 
trolled by a cam M, which works in a notch 
N in the plate and is pivotally mounted on 
the end of the lever. The cam is provided 
with a handle O, which bears against the hook 
and thereby aids in holding it in position. 5o 
The cam may be made to act on the edge of 
the hook; but I prefer to pass the pivot of the 
cam through the hook and provide the hook 
with an opening P to clear the said pivot. 
In practice the chain E is engaged over the 
hook B and the lever is swung toward the 
hame, thereby tightening the chain and draw 
ing the lower ends of the hame together. 
When the lever is swung up, the cam is turned 
so as to raise the locking-hook, and thereby 
enable it to pass through the slot H. The 
cam is then released and the hook drops by 
gravity into engagement with the plate G, 
thereby securely locking the hame. 
It will be readily seen from the foregoing 
that I have provided a hame-fastener which 
is very simple and efficient and in which the 
??w?"al parts cannot become detached and 
OSt. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
l. In a hame-fastener of the character de 
scribed, the combination, with the lever, of a 
sliding locking-hook mounted on the end of 
the lever and a cam also mounted on the end of 
the lever and engaging the hook to actuate 
the same. 
2. The combination, in a hame-fastener, of 
a lever provided with a groove in its end, a 
locking-hook having an internal notch and 
provided with studs engaging said groove, 
and a cam mounted on the end of the lever 
and engaging the notch in the hook. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
75 
CHRISTOPHER, A, SMITH, 
Witnesses: 
W. W. Dou GLAs, 
J. H. WARD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487003.txt	 
 UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS DOOTAN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
FEED =''TRO U G H , 
SPECTFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent, No. 487,008, dated November 29, 1892. 
pplication filed August 15, 1890, Serial M0, 362,107, (M0 m0dl.) 
58 
6? 
65 
75 
Space I am enabled greatly to reduce the size 
Be it knoWm that I, THOMAS DOOLAN, of ! of the manger Without decreasing its hay 
holding capacity.  The free end of the frame 
is made to rest upon the front edge of the 
manger, and is thereby prewented from press 
ing doWn upon the hay and obwiating the 
jerking and pulling at the hay necessary to 
extract it when the frame or rack is allowed 
tO Swing down into and preSS upon the ma 
terial within the manger. 
In Fig. 2 I have shoWn the construction of 
the frame Or Sa.wer intended to be used in 
COnnection With a corner manger. It will be 
noticed that in thiS form the side bars of the 
frame are prOwided With an outWard semi 
circular bend P at their hinge' ends. This 
bend, as Will readily be understood, imparts 
a degree Of flexibility and elasticity to the 
frame at that point, Sufficient to permit, it to 
be raised With Only a slight resistance, Which 
Would be considerable Without the bend when 
the hinge-eyeS are placed upon Walls at an 
angle to each other, OWing to the tendency of 
the pintleS to bind in their bearings. In pro 
widing the Side bars with this bend a spe 
cially-constructed form of buttS to receive the 
pintles in the Same line When placed upon 
the Walls of a corner Will be unnecessary, thus 
economizing in the cost of this form of the 
dewice. 
It is deemed important that the hay-sa.wer' 
be hinged abowe the manger instead of below 
the Same, So that if the animal should pull 
the Same away from the Wall in withdrawing 
his head it will automatically fall back to its 
normal pOSition. Importance is also attached 
to the fact that it is made of a single piece of 
rOund Spring material, With its ends bent to 
form pintleS, whereby it haS freer m0wement, 
iS cheaper, Will yield to Slight mowement, . or 
preSSure, and Can  be readily inserted or re 
mowed from its bearings. 
Chicago, Cook county, Illinois, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Hay-Sawers, 
of Which the following is a Specification. 
My in wention relates to improvements in 
that claSS of dewiceS for preventing the Waste 
of material from mangers Or troughs for feed 
ing horses or other cattle in which the waste  
is prevented by means of an open raGk or 
frame extending, Substantially, acr'OSS the top 
of the manger. 
Heretofore it has been the practice to em 
ploy pivoted racks, designed to rest upon the 
hay or upon the top of the manger Substan 
tially horizontal, the hay being pulled through 
betWeen the bars of the rack by the horse, 
and then there is nothing to hinder the ami 
mal from scattering the hay all Ower the stall. 
My hay-Sawer is arranged in an inclined p0 
sition relatively to the manger, is not de 
signed to tOuch the hay unleSS the Space be 
himd the Sa.wer be filled up, and the inclined 
parallel portions are of Such a distance apart 
as to permit a horSe's head between them, So 
that while getting at and eating the hay his 
|head is between the Said parallel portions 
and prevented thereby from lateral mowe 
ment, So that he cannot Scatter the hay while 
eating. In this resides the gist of my imwen 
tion. 
In the accompanying draWingS, B'igure 1 
represents a perspective wieW of my improwed 
arrangement of parts, and H'ig. 2 illustrates 
* the form of the Sa.wer-frame intended to be 
used in connectiom With a corner manger. 
Referring to the drawingS, A is the manger; 
B, the Sa.wer-frame, constructed, preferably, of 
a single piece of metal rod formed into a three 
sided rectangular frame With its ends bent 
outwardly to form the pintles of a hinge, and 
C C the hinge buttS or eyeS to receiwe the 
pintles of the Sawer-frame and adapted to be 
Secured to the Wall of a Stall. 
Instead of attaching the frame to the edge 
of the manger or on a line thereWith I hinge 
it to the Wall against which the manger is 
placed at a point considerably aboWe the top 
edge of the manger, So that a large angular 
space between the wall and the frame is left 
to be occupied by hay. It Will thus be read 
ily seen that by prowiding this additional 
What I Claim iS 
1. The Combination, With a manger, of a, 
three-Sided hay-Sawer constructed from a sin 
gle piece of Spring material formed with its 
ends bent to constitute pintles, and the par 
allel Side portions, said portions being dis 
connected, So that their pintle ends may be 
ImOwed to and from each other, and the Said 
portionS also being a Sufficient distance apart 
to permit the horSe's head between them, but 
' 
 
9? 
95 
OO 
2 
487,003 
not to alloW its lateral mowement' therein, the { circular bends * near each  end, the parallel 
Sawer being remowably hinged at a consider- || side portions, and the Gross-bar at the lower 
able distance above the tOp of the manger || end, the Sawer being hinged at a considerable r5 
and arranged to lie at an angle theretO with { distance above the manger and arranged to 
5 its front portion Supported by the front edge || lie at an angle to the top of the manger with 
of the manger, Substantially' as shown - and { the cross-bar resting on the front edge of the 
| manger, Substantially as shown and described. 
described. 
2. The Combination, With a manger, of a 
three-sided hay-Sawer constructed from a sin- 
. THOMAS DOOLAN. 
I? gle piece of Spring material and formed with 
its ends bent to constitute pintles by which 
the Sawer is hinged with the outward  Semi- || . 
THOMAS A. BANNING, 
SAMUEL, E. HIBBEN. 
Witnesses: 
` 
~ 
h 
f 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487103.txt	(No Model.) 
W. STUBBLEBINE. 
FURN ACE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet. . 
No. 487,103, 
Patented Now, 29, 1892. 
3v-uov to 
42-44.2. 
22-24, 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
W. STUBBLEBINE. 
FUR, NACE 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 487,103, 
Patented Nov. 29, 1892. 
  
 
  
 
 
 
SA as 
 
 
Eli. 
SL 
 
(No Model.) 
W. STUBBLEBINE. 
FUR, NACE 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 487,103, 
Patented Now, 29, 1892. 
Z2,726S565, 
P 2z-z-r 
Zze, e/2Zo 
Y 3. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM STUBBLEBINE, OF BETHLEHEM, ASSIGNOR TO THE STUBBLEBINE 
FURNACE COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 487,103, dated November 29, 1892, 
Application filed December 19, 1891, Serial No. 415,628, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMSTUBBLEBINE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Beth 
lehem, in the county of Northampton and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Furnaces; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sae. 
My present invention relates to improve 
ments in furnaces constructed with especial 
reference for consuming hydrocarbon fuel in 
liquid or gaseous form, such as oil, oil-gas, 
coal-gas, natural gas, or other desirable fluids, 
such improved furnace being capable of use 
in the puddling of iron, smelting of different 
kinds of ores, for heating purposes generally, 
or as a glass-furnace, or an open-hearth fur 
nace, or for any purpose for which furnaces 
are used. 
In a prior patent issued to me on the 28th 
day of July, 1891, No. 456,663, I have shown 
and described a reverberatory furnace with 
heating-chambers on opposite sides of the up 
take and communicating by intermediate pas 
sages with the puddling-chamber, combined 
with mixing-flues which extend longitudinally 
of the furnace, one end of each mixing-flue 
connected to its heating-chamber and the other 
end of said mixing-flue having a discharge 
port which discharges commingled air and 
gases above the bridge-wall, and blast-pipes 
located in said heating-chambers and dis 
charging into the mixing-flues. In the pres 
ent invention I employ the heating-chambers, 
mixing-flues, and blast-pipes in somewhat 
similar form as in my prior patent, and com 
bine with said parts certain elements or de 
vices which adapt the furnace for burning 
either liquid or gaseous fuel, the object in 
view being to consume fuel of the character 
specified in an economic and advantageous 
manner and to commingle the gases and heat 
arising from the combustion of said fuel with 
the current of commingled air and gases from 
the mixing-flues, said currents from the mix 
ing-flues and the liquid or gaseous fuel meet 
ing over the bridge-wall, being commingled 
at this point and entering the working or 
puddling chamber in their combined form. 
With the foregoing ends in view the inven 
tion consists in the combination, with the mix 
ing-flues and a bridge-wall, of a perforated 
arch forming a chamber above the bridge 
wall and which chamber receives the com 
mingled air and gas from the mixing-flues, 
checker-work in front of said bridge-wall and 
below the perforated arch, a blast-pipe below 
the working-chamber arranged to discharge 
into the checker-work, and a fuel-supply pipe 
having a series of individual outlets or 
branches which discharge into the checker 
work. 
The invention further consists in the combi 
nation, construction,and arrangement of parts, 
which will be fully pointed out and described, 
and particularly specified in the claims here 
in after. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical longitudinal sectional view through 
my furnace on the plane indicated by the dot 
ted line acac of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a horizontal sec 
tional view on the plane indicated by the dot 
ted line by y of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is a vertical 
transverse section through the furnace on the 
plane indicated by the dotted line ZZ of Fig. 
2. Fig. 4 is a vertical transverse section on 
the line in 17 of Fig. 2. Figs. 5 and 6 are de 
tail views in plan and transverse section, re 
spectively, of the metallic diaphragm or drip 
plate in the checker-work designed to catch 
the drippings of oil or liquid from the branches 
of the fuel-Supply pipe. Fig. 7 is a vertical 
transverse sectional view on the plane indi 
cated by the dotted line XX of Fig. 2. 
Like letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
Ings. 
Aindicates the working chamber of the fur 
nace; a, the door in one side of the same; b, 
the chills in the bed of the working chamber; 
B, the uptake; B, the neck leading from the 
rear end of the working chamber to the up 
take; and C, the bridge-wall at the front end 
of the working chamber. 
D E are the heating-chambers formed or 
built in the masonry of the furnace, and said 
chambers are located at the rear end of the 
o 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
IOO 
3o 
35 
45 
 
487,103 
d 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
working chamber A, and on opposite sides of 
the uptake B and neck B' of the furnace. 
F F and G. G' are the mixing flues or pipes, 
two of which are on the right-hand side of the 
furnace and the other two on the left-hand 
side thereof. These mixing flues or pipes 
communicate at their rear ends directly with 
the heating-chambers DE, and the front ends 
of said mixing flues or pipes discharge into a 
chamber at the front end of the furnace, 
which will be presently referred to. 
In each of the heating-chambers DE is a 
blast-box H, preferably located at or near the 
bottom of said heating-chamber, and each 
blast-box is divided into two compartments h. 
h' by an intermediate vertical partition h'. 
The two compartments h h' of each blast-box 
Hare connected by an elbow-shaped circulat 
ing-pipe I, arranged in a vertical position in 
the heating - chamber and having one end 
opening into one compartment h. and the other 
end opening into the other compartment h of 
said blast-box. The blast-pipe J enters the 
heating-chamber and discharges into the com 
partment h of the blast-box H, and from this 
compartment h. the current of air or steam 
passes through the vertical air-pipe I to the 
other compartment h of said blast-box, and 
from this latter compartment the air or steam 
is conducted by jet-pipes it to the mixing flues 
or pipes. As the heating-chambers DE are in 
direct communication with the working cham 
ber A by means of the passages die, a portion of 
the heat and gases from the Working chamber 
passes into said heating-chambers and circu 
lates around the blast-box and the circulat 
ing-pipe I, whereby the blast of steam or air 
passing through the blast - box, the circulat 
is heated be 
ing-pipe, and the jet-pipes 
fore the air or steam is discharged into the 
mixing-?lues. The jet-pipes 
terminate in 
the mixing pipes or flues at points a short 
distance in advance of the connection be 
tween the mixing-flues and heating-cham 
bers, and as the rapidly-moving currents of 
air or steam from the jet-pipes are injected 
under pressure into the mixing-flues a part 
of the gases in the heating-chambers will be 
drawn into the mixing flues or pipes and thus 
insure the commingling of Said heat and 
gases from the working and heating cham 
bers with the air or steam blast while said 
currents are conveyed through the mixing 
flues or pipes to the front of the furnace. 
In the front of the furnace is the combus 
tion-chamber K between the bridge-wall and 
the front wall of the furnace, and in this 
chamber is the checker-work L, built of brick 
in the usual form. 
Above the checker - work L in the top of 
the furnace and in front of the bridge-wall is 
an overhanging arch M, which is so arranged 
and constructed that it forms between the 
roof and front of the furnace a chamber N, 
which chamber extends transversely across 
the furnace in the upper front part thereof, 
so that the four mixing flues or pipes F. F. G. 
G' will open and discharge into said chamber 
the currents of commingled air or steam and 
gases. The rear wall of this chamber N is 
inclined or curved, as at m, so that it faces 
the heat passage or way over the bridge-Wall, 
and this inclined or curved wall of said cham 
ber N is perforated at in to permit the cur 
rents of commingled air or Steam and gases 
to pass from said chamber into the Working 
chamber A. 
O is the fuel-supply pipe, arranged horizon 
tally on the front wall of the furnace, said 
supply - pipe being supported either a short 
distance from the face of the front wall, as 
shown, or embedded in said front wall, as 
most desired. This pipe O is supplied with 
either liquid or gaseous fuel from any conven 
ient source; but I prefer to first raise the tem 
perature of said liquid Orgaseous fuel by pass 
ing said fuel through heating-coils PP, located 
in the heating-chambers DE, said heating-coils 
connected by pipes pp to the supply-pipe O. 
From this supply-pipe extends a series of 
branch or outlet pipes O, which lead through 
the front Wall of the furnace, so as to discharge 
the fuel into the checker-work L, and said 
branches or outlets o are provided with regu 
lating cocks or valves O'. The said branches 
or outlets are of less diameter than the supply 
pipe to cause the liquid or gaseous fuel to en 
ter the checker-work slowly and regularly and 
thus insure the proper combustion of the fuel. 
The branch or outlet pipes from the supply 
pipe are all arranged in substantially the 
same horizontal plane, and below this plane 
of said branches or outlets is a horizontal dia 
phragm or drip-plate Q, which is arranged in 
the checker-work L and is designed to catch 
the drippings of oil or liquid fuel from the 
branches of the supply-pipe, whereby the liq 
uid is prevented from dripping through the 
checker - work into the ash-pit. This dia 
phragm or drip-plate is provided with a mul 
tiplicity of nipples q, each having a trans 
verse passage q' for the heat and blast, and 
these nipples extend above the level of the 
diaphragm or drip-plate and are so spaced or 
arranged that the liquid fuel will be retained 
on the diaphragm or plate. As the nipples 
extend above the plate and as they are per 
forated, the heat and blast can pass freely 
through the diaphragm, while the liquid fuel 
cannot escape through said perforated nip 
ples, and as the diaphragm is heated to about 
the same temperature as the checker-work 
the liquid on the diaphragm is vaporized and 
the heat and gas thereby generated are util 
ized in the working chamber. 
R is the blast pipe or flue to the combus 
tion-chamber, which extends through or un 
derneath the bed of the furnace, and this 
blast-pipe discharges into the checker-work 
below the horizontal diaphragm or drip-plate. 
The operation of my furnace may be briefly 
Summarized, as follows: The checker-work is 
heated in any convenient way, and the heat 
and gases from the Working chamber pass 
75 
95 
Io. 
II. 
2 
2 
 
487,103 
25 
through the passages de to heat the chambers 
DE, the coils, and pipes therein. The blasts 
having been started in the pipes J R, the 
gases in the heating-chambers are drawn into 
the mixing flues or pipes by the jets of steam 
or air, and Said steam or air and gases pass 
through the mixing-flues into the chamber N. 
The fuel fed to the checker-work by the sup 
ply-pipe is vaporized and commingles with 
the blast from the pipe R, and the two cur 
rents of gases and air-the one from the cham 
ber N and the other current from the checker 
Work-are commingled as they pass over the 
bridge-wall into the working chamber A, as 
will be readily understood. 
I alm aware that changes in the form and 
proportion of parts and details of construc 
tion may be made without departing from the 
Spirit or sacrificing the advantages of my in 
vention, and I therefore reserve the right to 
make such changes as fairly fall within the 
Scope of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a furnace substantially as described, 
the combination, with a working chamber, a 
combustion-chamber, a bridge-wall, and heat 
ing-chambers arranged to receive from the 
rear part of said working chamber, of a cham 
ber N, arranged above the combustion-cham 
ber and having outlets to discharge its con 
tents over the bridge-wall, and the longitudi 
nal flues adapted to convey heat, &c., from 
the heating-chambers to said elevated cham 
ber N, as and for the purpose described. 
2. In a furnace substantially as described, 
the combination, with a Working chamber, a 
combustion-chamber, and a bridge-wall, of a 
transverse elevated chamber N, arranged over 
the combustion-chamber and having the out 
lets in, arranged to discharge the contents over 
said bridge-wall, the checker-Work situated 
in said combustion-chamber below the ele 
vated chamber, a fuel-supply pipe O, having 
outlets discharging into said checker-work, 
and means for supplying heat to said elevated 
chamber, whereby the currents from the 
checker-work and the elevated chamber are 
combined at or over the bridge-wall, as and 
for the purpose described. 
3. In a furnace substantially as herein 
shown and described, the combination, with 
a Working chamber, a combustion-chamber, a 
bridge - wall, and the heating-chambers ar 
ranged to receive from the rear part of said 
working chamber, of the transverse elevated 
chamber N, situated over the combustion 
chamber and having at its rear end the out 
let-ports in, which discharge over the bridge 
Wall, the mixing - flues arranged longitudi 
nally of the furnace and connected to said 
heating and elevated chambers, the checker 
work in said combustion-chamber below the 
elevated chamber N, and the fuel-supply pipe 
O, discharging into the checker-work, as and 
for the purpose described. 
30 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
4. In a furnace substantially as described, 
the combination, with a working chamber, the 
bridge-wall, heating-chambers, and flues, of 
an arch forming a chamber in the upper front 
part of the furnace which receives from the 
flues, said arch having the rear part thereof 
perforated for the escape of the currents over 
the bridge-wall, the checker-work, a supply 
pipe, and a blast-pipe, as and for the purpose 
described. 
5. In a furnace substantially as described, 
the combination, With a Working chamber, the 
bridge-wall, heating-chambers, and flues, of 
the arch arranged to form the receiving-cham 
ber N in the upper front part of the furnace, 
having the perforated inclined or curved rear 
wall moverhanging the bridge-wall, the check 
er-Work, the supply-pipe, and the blast-pipe, 
as and for the purpose specified. 
6. In a furnace, the combination, with a 
working chamber, a combustion-chamber, and 
a bridge-wall, of the checker-work L, situated 
in said combustion-chamber, the supply-pipe 
O, having a series of branches which dis 
charge into saidchecker-work, and a blast-pipe . 
R, discharging into said combustion-chamber 
below the checker-work therein, whereby the 
blast is commingled with the fuel as the cur 
rents pass through the checker-work, as and 
for the purpose described. 
7. In a furnace substantially as described, 
the combination, with a working chamber and 
the bridge-wall thereto, of the checker-work, 
the supply-pipe which discharges into said 
checker-work, a perforated diaphragm or drip 
plate in the checker-work, and a blast-pipe 
arranged below the Working chamber and hav 
ing its discharge end below the diaphragm or 
drip-plate, as and for the purpose described. 
8. In a furnace Substantially as described, 
the combination, with a working chamber and 
a bridge-wall, of the checker-work, a supply 
pipe arranged to discharge fuel into said 
checker-work, a diaphragm or drip-plate in 
the checker-work below the discharge-open 
ings of the supply-pipe and having the per 
forated raised nipples on its upper side, and 
a blast-pipe arranged below the working 
chamber and having its discharge end below 
the diaphragm or drip-plate, as and for the 
purpose described. 
9. In a furnace substantially as described, 
the combination, with a working chamber, 
combustion-chamber, bridge-wall, and heat 
ing-chambers, of the checker-work in said 
combustion-chamber, a fuel-supply pipe O, 
located outside of the furnace and having 
branches which discharge into the checker 
work, the heating-coils P, situated in the heat 
ing - chambers, and the connecting - pipes 
extending longitudinally of the furnace and 
Connecting the heating-coils and supply-pipe, 
as and for the purpose described. 
10. In a furnace substantially as described, 
the combination, with a working chamber, the 
heating-chambers, and longitudinal flues or 
pipes, of a divided blast-boxin each heating 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
487,103 
vided blast-boxes each having its compart 
ments connected by circulating-pipes, the 
blast-pipes connected to the blast-boxes, and 
an individual jet-pipe leading from the blast 
box to each longitudinal flue or pipe, as and 
for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM STUBBLEBINE. 
Witnesses: 
JACOB W. LUCKENBACH, 
HORTENSIA. W. KRAUSE. 
chamber having its compartments connected 
by a circulating-pipe, a blast-pipe connected 
to one of said compartments, and a jet-pipe 
leading from the other compartment to the 
5 longitudinal flues or pipes, as and for the pur 
pose described. 
11. In a furnace substantially as described, 
the combination, with a working chamber and 
the heating-chambers, of a single receiving 
Io chamber N at the front of the furnace, the 
longitudinal flues or pipes extending from the 
heating-chambers to said chamber N, the di 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487203.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. WALLACE AND JOHN W. STEMM, OF GALION, OHIO, ASSIGNORS OF ONE 
HALF TO CHARLES A. ALLEN AND ARTHUR. W. BALL, OF SAME PLACE. 
ANTIFRCTION LUBRICATING COMPOUND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No.487,203, dated November 29, 1892. 
Application filed June 29, 1892, Serial No. 438,427. (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN B. WALLACE 
and JOHN W. STEMM, both residents of Galion, 
in the county of Crawford and State of Ohio, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Antifriction Lubricating Com 
pounds; and we do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, which will enable others 
Io skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to an improved com 
pound or composition for shafts, journals, and 
other moving parts of machinery for the 
I5 purpose of reducing friction and preventing 
heating. 
The invention consists in a compound or 
composition composed of slaked lime, cal 
cined magnesia, pulverized soapstone, (or 
2 o French chalk,) chloride of lime, water, and 
oil, compounded in the manner and in the pro 
portions substantially as hereinafter set forth. 
In carrying our invention into effect we take 
thirty-two pounds of quicklime with suffi 
25 cient Water to slake the same and while slak 
ing we add sixteen ounces of calcined mag 
nesia, sixteen ounces of pulverized soapstone, 
(or French chalk,) and four ounces of chloride 
of lime and mix the same thoroughly. We 
3o then add thirty-two gallons of water, stir 
 
again, and allow the mass to settle, after which 
a sufficient quantity of any suitable lubricat 
ing-oil is added to give it the proper consist 
ency. 
The compound thus produced is applicable 35 
for use in connection with machinery of all 
kinds and is applied in any suitable manner, 
and by reason of the peculiar proportions of 
the several ingredients friction between the 
moving parts is greatly reduced and heating 
of the same prevented. 
The functions of the chloride of lime are to 
prevent gumming of the compound and to de 
stroy impurities in the water used. 
Having thus described our invention, what 45 
We claim is 
The herein-described antifriction lubricat 
ing composition, consisting of slaked lime, 
calcined magnesia, pulverized soapstone, chlo 
ride of lime, Water, and oil, compounded in 5o 
the manner and in about the proportions sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereunto affixed our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
- 
JOHN B. WALLACE, 
JOHN W. STEMM. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. COULTER, 
A. M. METEEANY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487303.txt	(No Model.) 
L., TIGHE. 
DEWICE FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF POWER 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 487,303, 
Patented Dec. 6, 1892, 
(No Model.) 
L TIGHE 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
No. 487,303, 
DEVICE FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF POWER, 
Patented Deo. 6, 1892, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS TIGHE, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
DEVICE FOR THE TRANS Mission OF POWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 487,308, dated December 6, 1892. 
Application filed September 26, 1891, Serial No. 406,919, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all, Luhon, it tactly concern: 
Be it known that I, LEWIS TIGHE, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Detroit, in 
the county of Wayne and State of Michigan, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Devices for the Transmission 
of Power; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
This invention relates to a device for the 
transmission of power; and it consists in a 
certain construction and arrangement of 
parts, as hereinafter fully set forth, the es 
sential features of which being pointed out 
particularly in the claims. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
means for transmitting power and maintain 
ing momentum or motive force. This object 
is attained by the mechanism illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the device, 
a portion of the base being broken away to 
show the location of parts. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal section through the Supporting-frame, 
the mechanism appearing in elevation. 
Referring to the letters of reference, Ades 
ignates the supporting-frame, which is mount 
ed on a suitable base B, having a central open 
ing therethrough. Journaled on said base is 
a shaft C, having on its outer end a crank E. 
or other suitable means for applying power 
thereto, the inner end of said shaft carrying 
a crank-arm F, the free end of which is cou 
pled to the adjacent ends of the connecting 
bars G. G', the opposite end of the bar G'be 
ing pivotally coupled to the lower end of the 
lever H', that is fulcrumed on the pin a', 
mounted in the supports b'. Also fulcrumed 
on said pin a' is an auxiliary lever I, to which 
is attached one end of a cord c', that passes 
over a pulley h" and is attached at the outer 
end to a weight J. The outer end of the bar 
G is pivotally coupled to the lower end of the 
lever H, fulcrumed on the pin C, mounted in 
the supports b. 
I designates an auxiliary lever, also full 
crumed on the pin a, and to the end of which 
is attached one end of the cord c, that passes 
over the pulley h, and is attached at its outer 
end to the weight K. 
L. designates a vertical lever fulcrumed in 
the hangers f, depending from the frame. The 
lower end of said lever L is coupled by means 
of the link in to the upper end of the lever H, 
and the upper end of Said vertical lever is 
pivotally attached to the horizontal connect 
ing-rod M, coupled to the pitman N, connected 
to a crank on the shaft O, that is journaled in 
the frame A, and on which is mounted the 
Wheel P. 
R, designates the pendulum or main lever 
of the mechanism, which is fulcrumed at e in 
the frame and is pivoted at its upper end on 
the pin n, that couples the meeting ends of 
the connecting-rod M and pitman N, the lower 
end of the pendulum being adapted to vibrate 
between the free ends of the auxiliary levers 
II. The office of said pendulum or vibrat 
ing lever is to receive and transmit the power 
supplied by the weight-actuated levers II' 
and impart it to the wheel P through the me 
dium of the pitman N and crank-shaft O. 
The coupling of the pendulum to the lever FI 
by means of the connecting-rod M, lever I, 
and link n is to insure a concerted and uni 
form action between said pendulum and the 
driving-crank E, by the operation of which 
the weights J K are consecutively raised and 
lowered, causing a reciprocation of the pend 
ulum R. and imparting a rotary motion to the 
wheel P through the pitman N and crank 
shaft O, which operation is as follows: Mo 
tion being imparted to the shaft C, the crank 
arm F, through the bars G. G', actuates the 
levers H H to cause their free ends to alter 
nately rise and fall. On the upper ends of 
the auxiliary levers II' are catchess, that as 
the free ends of the levers H H dip down en 
gage thereWith, whereby as the free ends of 
said levers again rise the corresponding ends 
of the auxiliary levers are successively car 
ried upward, thus raising their respective 
weights J K, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 
2, the arrangement of parts being such that 
when said levers are in this position the 
pendulum will have reached the limit of its 
throw and Will bear against the inner face of 
the auxiliary lever, as shown in Fig. 1, at 
which time the lever I will be unlocked from 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
OCs 
 
487,303 
the lever H' by means of the inclined stop v, 
mounted on the support b', that raises said 
catch and disengages it from the lever H', 
when the weight J by force of gravity will 
fall, actuating the lever I' to throw the pend 
ulum R. The power exerted by the falling 
weight is transmitted through the lever I' 
and pendulum R and conveyed in momentum 
to the wheel P through the pitman and crank 
shaft. The force applied to the pendulum 
by the lever I will cause it to swing to the 
same elevation at the opposite side, at which 
time the lever I, which has been raised by the 
engagement of the catch S with the lever H, 
will be unlocked by said catch engaging the 
inclined stop v, as before described, and said 
lever I, actuated by the force of the weight 
K, will in like manner propel the pendulum 
in the opposite direction, when the lever I' will 
be in position to return it, the vibration of the 
pendulum being in this manner continued by 
the force exerted by the alternate falling of 
the weights J. K. The force applied to the 
crank E is required to be sufficient only to 
successively raise the weights through the 
operation of the levers II H. 
Having thus fully set forth my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a device for the purpose set forth, the 
combination of the driving-shaft carrying a 
crank-arm, a pair of levers fulcrumed in suit 
able supports, the connecting-bars coupling 
one end of said levers with the crank-arm, 
the opposite end of said levers being unat 
tached, whereby the rotation of said shaft im 
parts a simultaneous and alternating recip 
rocation to said levers, and the pendulum 
adapted to vibrate between the unattached 
ends of said levers, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the driving - shaft 
carrying a crank-arm, the levers H II", con 
nected with said crank-arm, and the levers II, 
each having a weight attached at one end and 
at the opposite end means for engagement 
with and disengagement from the levers cou 
pled with the crank - arm, substantially as 
specified. 
3. The combination of the driving-shaft 
carrying a crank-arm, the levers H H', con 
nected with said crank-arm, the auxiliaryle 
vers having the weights attached thereto, the 
pendulum adapted to vibrate between the free 
ends of the auxiliary levers, and the pitman 
coupling the upper end of the vibrating pend 
ulum with the crank-shaft having a wheel 
mounted thereon, as specified. 
4. The combination of the frame, the driv 
ing-shaft carrying a crank-arm journaled in 
said frame, the lever connected with said 
crank-arm, the connecting-rod and the pit 
man coupled to the crank-shaft carrying a 
wheel, the vertical lever L, and horizontal 
link coupling the connecting-rod with the up 
per end of the lever coupled to the crank-arm 
of the driving-shaft, and the vibrating lever 
fulcruined in the frame and coupled at its up 
per end to the connecting-rod and pittman, sub 
stantially as specified. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
LEWIS TIGHE. 
Witnesses: 
B. F. WHEELER, 
E. S. WHEELER. 
5 
SO 
55 
65 
O 
3o 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487403.txt	(No Model.) 
PITMAN CONNECTION FOR MOWING MACHINES, 
T, CLARK, 
No. 487,403. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1892, 
 
 
  
 
 
 
W T N ESSES 
p 
INY ENT OR 
9/eco-avo?. -v 
c42ee/222a4%-24. 
by 
... 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
T ROW A R D C LARK, OF EASTRY, NEAR D OVER, ENGLAND. 
PT MAN CONNECTION FOR MOWING-MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 487,403, dated December 6, 1892. 
Application filed June 14, 1892, 
Serial No,436,687, (No model.) 
55 
75 
O 
To all whon, it nagy concern: 
Be it known that I, TROWARD CLARK, of 
Eastry, near Dover, in the county of Kent, 
England, have invented an Improvement in 
Pitman Connections for Mowing-Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to pitman connec 
tions for mowing-machines of the class in 
which a set of knives secured to a knife-bar 
is reciprocated between a set of projecting 
fingers secured to a finger-bar, and has ref 
erence to an improvement in the connection 
of the knife-bar with the connecting-rod by 
which it is reciprocated, the special object of 
the improvement being to connect these parts 
in such a manner as to prevent them from 
working loose and becoming disconnected 
when in operation and to facilitate their dis 
connection when they are desired to be dis 
connected. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents in perspective view part of the 
knife-bar of a mowing-machine of the class 
aforesaid and the improved means of connect 
ing the same and the connecting-rod, show 
ing the parts in connection and in position 
for work. Fig. 2 represents a side elevation 
of the same, showing in dotted lines the parts 
in position for disconnection. Fig. 3 repre 
sents a plan view. 
4 represents the knife-bar, which may be of 
any ordinary formation and may work in con 
nection with a finger-bar, also of any ordi 
nary formation. 
5 represents the connecting-rod, which may 
be operated in any ordinary manner. As the 
invention only has reference to the improve 
ment in the connection of the knife-bar and 
connecting-rod, it has not been deemed nec 
essary to illustrate the finger-bar or the means 
of operating the connecting-rod, both of which 
may, as aforesaid, be of any ordinary arrange 
ment. 
In accordance with the said improvement 
I rivet or otherwise Secure, as at 6, to the 
knife-bar 4 a knife-eye 7, adapted for pivotal 
connection with the connecting-rod and made 
integral with a boss 8 on the side thereof ad 
jacent to the connecting-rod and extending 
for part of the width of the knife-eye. Imake 
the knife-bar end of the connecting-rod 5, 
adapted for pivotal connection with the knife 
eye, integral with an extending arm 9 of a 
3O 
35 
5 
 
I length corresponding with the width of the 
boss 8 and formed with a rectangular exten 
sion 10 at its extremity and adapted to abut 
against the outer side of the boss of the knife 
eye when the parts occupy the relative posi 
tions represented in Fig. 1, so that the knife 
eye is normally maintained between oppos 
ing parts of the connecting-rod and the knife 
bar end of the connecting-rod will be prop 
erly located and the parts will not be liable 
to work loose or to become disconnected. 
When it is desired to disconnect the parts, 
the knife-bar is turned up about its pivotal 
connection 11 to the connecting-rod until 
(vide the dotted lines in Fig. 2) the extension 
10 of the rod 5 is in a position to override the 
boss S, when the connecting-rod 5 can be dis 
connected by sliding its pin 11 laterally out 
of the knife-eye in the direction of the arrow 
C. By such means I avoid the disadvantages 
of the usual latches or like adjustable parts 
ordinarily arranged on the inner side of the 
connecting-rod and adapted to keep it in 
connection with the knife - bar, which parts 
are liable to be speedily worn away by the 
excessive friction against them of the recip 
rocating parts, in consequence of which the 
connecting-rod is liable to work loose and to 
become disconnected from the knife-bar, and 
I provide coacting parts which will not be lia 
ble to get loose from each other and will at 
all times reciprocate together. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination, with the knife-bar, of the 
knife - eye secured to the bar and having 
formed integrally thereWith at its side next 
to the connecting-rod a boss extending part 
of the width of the knife-eye, so as to leave 
a space at the outer side of the knife-eye, and 
the connecting-rod having a pivot to fit in 
the knife-eye and an arm extending laterally 
from said rod and formed integral with a rect 
angular extension to lie in the space at the 
outer side of the knife-eye and against the 
outer side of its boss, substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
TROWARD CLARK. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED CLARK, 
EDWIN JOHN CLARK, 
90 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487503.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 487,503, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
A. WICKEY. 
BALING PRESS, 
Patented Dec. 6, 1892, 
 
 
 
 
 
Es 
(No Model.) 
No. 487,503. 
A. 
A. WICKEY. 
BALING PRESS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1892. 
 
S==e 
le 
70% else S. 
-6-46 
Zaven/or 
(2-42. Zoze/ec/ 
12: 2, Zetc. 44. 7(au 
\ " . 
2 
t 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW WICKEY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
BALN G. PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 487,503, dated December 6, 1892. 
Application filed February 26, 1892, Serial No. 422,887, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
W 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ANDREW WICKEY, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resid 
ing at Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Baling-Presses, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a baling-press de 
signed for the purpose of baling scraps of tin, 
sheet brass, copper, or similar materials, for 
the baling of which the ordinary forms of 
presses used for hay, cotton, or the like are 
not adapted. Materials of this sort may, if 
properly compressed, be formed into bales 
which will retain their shape and hold together 
without the use of ties such as are necessary 
upon bales of almost any other material; and 
it is my object, besides adapting the press to 
the baling of said articles, to also enable it to 
compress them in Such a way and form bales 
or blocks so bound together that they will hold 
without the addition of any other means for 
retaining them in shape. 
To such end my invention consists in cer 
tain changes in the form, arrangement, and 
mode of operation of the press, which consti 
tute important improvements in a press de 
signed for use as stated above. 
The preferred form in which my invention 
has been embodied is illustrated in the draw 
ings by means of five figures, of which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the same; 
Fig. 2, a front view of a section taken in line 
22 of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a detail view of the plun 
ger or beater; Fig. 4, a perspective of the di 
vision-block, and Fig. 5 a section in line 55 of 
Fig. 4. 
The press as thus shown is supported upon 
a solid frame A, provided with suitable driv 
ing-gear BBB. The gear here shown is of 
a well-known form, and of course could be re 
placed by any other driving mechanism that 
might be desired. At the left in Fig. 1 and 
supported by the same frame is the bale 
chamber C, constructed after the fashion of 
what are known as perpetualbale-chambers, 
and are almost universally employed at the 
present day in baling-presses. In these bale 
chambers, it is hardly necessary to State, the 
resistance which enables the plunger to com 
press the materialis furnished by the friction 
between the sides of the chamber and the 
bale, and said chambers usually converge 
slightly toward the end from which the bales 
are continuously ejected. The sides of the 
bale-chamber shown here are held together 
by means of springs c to enable them to yield 
slightly in case of unusual strain. This bale 
chamber at its upper end terminates in a hop 
per D, into which the scrap-tin or other ma 
terial is thrown by the operator. Above this 
hopper is seen the plunger or beater E, which 
is preferably a massive iron or steel block 
having a downwardly - convex face e and 
guided in a vertical line by means of a rod 
D', upon which slides an eye e, formed in a 
projection upon the plunger. The rod D is 
strengthened by means of a brace d. While 
this method of guiding the plunger is thought 
to be the best, there are of course many others 
which might be substituted. 
Pivoted to the wheel or wheels B by means 
of a pin f is a pitman F, pivoted at its oppo 
site end by means of a pin f' to a walking 
beam G. Said beam is itself fulcrumed upon 
a pin h, Supported by an Oscillating standard 
H, pivoted to the frame of the press at h. 
The Walking-beam is also pivoted to the plun 
gerate'. This method of supporting the full 
crum h of the walking-beam allows it to ac 
commodate itself to the vertical motion of the 
plunger E. As the tin is fed into the press, 
the plunger E, traveling up and down, forces 
it downward into the bale-chamber, and said 
plunger is, as before stated, rounded upon its 
under surface, and is also considerably smaller 
than the cross-section of the bale-chamber. 
This causes it to pound the central portion of 
the tin down, and as the scraps are usually of 
considerable length the ends will be left stick 
ing upward about the plunger. When enough 
tin is in the press to form a bale, a division 
block K is placed upon it. This division 
block has a downwardly-concave surface, the 
edges thereof extending downward in the form 
of flanges, and as these flanges are placed 
upon the ends of the tin which have been left 
sticking upward about the plunger and the 
plunger then brought down upon the divis 
ion-block, said ends are forced together in a 
tangled mass and firmly bind the bale with 
sufficient strength to retain it in shape with 
out the addition of ties or other means for 
holding it together. 
O 
30 
35 
45 
9o 
95 
IOP 
487,503 
of the compression-chamber and a division 
block concave upon its forward surface, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination, with the frame of a 
baling-press, of a plunger having a convex 
face smaller than the cross-section of the com 
pression-chamber and a division-block having 
forwardly-projecting flanges about its edges 
and a hole in its back adapted to receive the 
rounded plunger, substantially as described. 
ANDREW WICKEY. 
Witnesses: 
H. BITNER, 
C. P. SMITH. 
I prefer to make the division-block with a 
central opening, as shown in the drawings, as 
the same enablesitto be made muchlighter and 
also makes it more Satisfactory in operation. 
I claim as new and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent 
1. The combination, with the frame of a 
baling-press and Suitable driving mechanism, 
of a plunger having a convex face and a di 
vision-block having a coincave forward sur 
face, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with the frame and 
driving mechanism of a baling-press, of a 
plunger having a cross-section less than that 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487603.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 487,603. 
A. D. CABLE, 
SIGN OR GUIDE BOARD, 
Patented Dec. 6, 1892. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
AUSTIN DEMMON CABLE, 
OF MONTREAL, CANADA. 
SIGN OR GUIDE BOARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 487,603, dated December 6, 1892. 
Application filed April 27, 1892, Serial No. 430,816, (No model.) 
To all tufton, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, AUSTIN DEMMON CABLE, 
a citizen of the Dominion of Canada, resid 
ing at the city of Montreal, in the District of 
Montreal and Province of Quebec, Canada, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Sign or Guide Boards; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention has reference to advertising 
boards which could be placed on street or 
road intersections or at every mile along 
roads, these boards to act, also, as distance 
directories and guide-boards; and it specially 
consists in the way I join the advertising 
plates to the board, they being metallic sheets 
on which the advertisements are painted or 
stuck on, and are in turn joined to the board 
by means of a special washer, which allows 
the securing of four contiguous corners by 
means of one screw, as hereinafter shown. 
The object of these advertising-boards for 
street or road intersections and also for mile 
boards is to always show travelers where they 
are and also at What distance they are from 
any particular point they are going to, ad 
vertisers also benefiting by having their ad 
vertisements repeatedly before the gaze of 
the same parties, thus obliging them to take 
notice of them. 
Of course distance-directories on road in 
tersections, as Well as mile-posts, are not new; 
but advertising-boards having on them a dis 
tance-directory and serving the above pur 
pose, also having the advertising-spaces con 
sisting of metallic sheets fastened by means 
of steel washers with claWS Secured by one 
Screw, are. 
Referring to the drawings, similar letters 
refer to similar parts throughout the several 
views. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a section on line A B of Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 is a view of my special washer to 
fasten on the metallic plates as it comes 
from the die. Fig. 4 is a plan view of same 
after the V projections are bent down verti 
cally. Fig. 5 is a side view of same. Fig. 6 
is a view of same as it comes from the die, 
but only has two V projections. Fig. 7 is a 
plan view of the latter with V projections 
bent down vertically, and Fig. 8 is a side ele 
Vation of same. 
C is a board made out of several Smaller 
ones, secured to a suitable frame, terminating 
with any suitable number of posts D, which 
are sunk into the ground to keep the whole 
in a vertical position. This board C may be 
flat and composed of only one surface, as 
shown in the drawings, or may be polygonal 
or curved, or, in fact, assume any suitable 
shape. The face of this board C, I divide up 
into several Spaces K, reserving the one F 
for putting on the distances and names of 
places to where the roads lead, also the di 
rections and, in fact, all information con 
nected with a distance-directory and guide 
board, or else simply the number of miles 
traveled from one point and the number there 
is to the next one, just as shown on the draw 
ings hereto annexed. The remaining ones are 
used for advertising, the one E containing 
the name and address of the company or per 
son putting them up. 
Now to facilitate the working of this ad 
vertising medium I make use of metallic 
sheets J, having exactly the size of a section 
K, onto which is painted the advertisement, 
So that in case any subscriber would like to 
change the WOrding of his advertisement all 
that is necessary to do is to take out the sheet 
J having it on and insert another one in its 
place, Which can be made any distance from 
the board C, and if he abandons it a new one 
for another firm can likewise replace it. To 
secure these sheets J to the board C, I make 
use of a special Washer, made as shown in 
Figs. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8, it being cut out of 
thin steel sheets by a special die, after which 
they present the appearance shown in Figs. 
3 and 6. This being done, the V projections 
or claWS h and g are bent down, as shown in 
Figs. 4, 5, 7, and 8, SO that all there is to do to 
secure on the metallic sheets J is to drive 
home one of the washers H, where four 
corners come together, or the ones G, where 
there are only two, as on the sides, for in 
stance, or between any tWO consecutive ones 
H, and then Screw in the Screw I. This makes 
a neat and substantial mode of attaching 
25 
35 
45 
55 
70 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
487,603 
the signs or metallic plates J, and, moreover, tion of the metallic sheets J, washers G and H, ro 
permits the easy removing of same, and, as and screws I with the board C, substantially 
can be seen, one single screw I firmly secures as described, and for the purposes set forth. 
four corners. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
is- 
In an advertising-board for street and road 
intersections or for mile-boards, the combina- 
Having described my invention, what I presence of two witnesses. 
AUSTIN DEMMON CABLE. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES LAURIN, 
M. H. LADOUCEUR. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487705.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 487,705. 
B. BENNETT. 
RAILROAD SWITCH, 
Patented DeC. l3, 1892. 
 
WITNESSES 7.4% 
B. BENNETT, 
RAILROAD SWITCH 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 13, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
- I 
Sess 
issT 
e 
INVENTOR 
BY 
4- 6 C 
- 
(No Model.) 
No. 487,705. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
the inside rail must cross one of the main- 65 
On the outside of the main-track rail and 75 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN BENNETT, OF SCRANTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAILROAD - SWITCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 487,705, dated December 18, 1892. 
Application filed March 4, 1892, Serial No. 423,755. (No model.) 
| right-hand point lies close to the right-hand 55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN BENNETT, of rail, or vice versa, if the siding be on the left 
Scranton, in the county of Lackawanna and hand side, and when the switch is open the 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain left-hand point lies close to the left-hand rail 
new and useful Improvements in Railroad- in position to catch the flanges of the advanc 
Switches; and I do hereby declare the follow-ing wheels. From the switch-points both sid- 6o 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description ing-track rails are gradually elevated above 
of the same, reference being had to the accom- the level of the main-track rails, preferably, 
panying drawings, forming a part of this speci- by means of chairs or track-plates d, of gradu 
fication, and to the letters of reference marked ated height, until a point is reached where 
thereon. 
This invention relates to improvements in track rails. From this point the inside rail 
switches for railroads, and has for its object (lettered B) runs substantially parallel with 
to provide a switch which shall preserve, as the main-track rail for a short distance, then 
far as possible, the continuity of the main- curves away from said rail and is brought 
track rails, and at the same time one which down to its original level, thereby overcom- 7o 
shall act with certainty, be automatically ing an objection heretofore urged against the 
thrown shut by the approach of a train from upwardly-projecting rail-points because of 
the rear, and consist of simple mechanism their liability to catch in depending parts of 
not easily destroyed or rendered inoperative a passing car or train. 
by changes in temperature or rough usage. 
The invention consists in certain novel de- pivoted similar to a switch-point is the cross 
tails of construction and combinations and ing rail C, having a strengthened end reduced 
arrangements of parts, all as will be now de- on the under side and adapted to be swung 
scribed, and pointed out particularly in the over the main-track rail, as shown in Fig. 2, . 
appended claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is as to form a long lap-joint with the center rail 
a perspective view of a switch constructed in B', which, so far as operativeness is concerned, 
accordance with my invention with the switch is unaffected by changes in temperature or 
closed. Fig.2 is a detail top plan of the cross- change in the length of rails within reason 
ing rail and adjacent parts with the switch able limits through any cause. The crossing 85 
open. Fig. 3 is a transverse section on the or movable rail takes a bearing on the top of 
line acac, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a section taken lon- the main-track rail, and to more effectually 
gitudinally of the tracks and showing the rail support and brace the end of the said crossing 
between the main tracks in elevation. Fig. rail the center rail B' is provided along the 
5 is a longitudinal section through one of the side with a bearing B", upon which the end of 9o 
joints for the movable rails. Fig. 6 is a de- the crossing rail rests when closed. 
tail perspective of the same. 
On the outside of the main-track rail a sub 
Like letters of reference in the several fig- stantially-horizontal bearing D' is provided, 
ures denote the same parts. 
upon which the crossiLug rail slides when 
In the main the present invention relates opened, and at the end of this bearing a pro- 95 
to that form of switch in which one of the tecting-rail D'' is provided, against which the 
switch-rails is elevated and crosses or is moved end of the crossing rail rests and by which 
over the main-line rail when the switch is it is protected, and all danger of catching in 
Open. 
passing objects prevented. To more effectu 
track rails, B the siding-rails, and C a mov- protecting-rail are bent down or the upper 
able rail adapted to swing over one of the main- surface curved to deflect any object striking 
track rails and complete the siding-tracks. 
the same, as will be readily understood from 
tion, both located between the main-track 
rails and one or the other adapted to be in 
operative position under all circumstances. 
For instance, when the switch is closed the 
side of the main-track rail on chairs or track 
plates c, of sufficient length to form bearings 
for said rail throughout its entire movement, 
Thus in the drawings A indicates the main- ally accomplish this object, the ends of the too 
its extreme end being cut at a sharp angle, so 8o 
D are switch-points of ordinary construc- the drawings. 
m 
The crossing rail is supported on the out- I c5 
 
2 
487,705 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
and one or more of said plates preferably nation, with the main-track rails and switch 
provided with an undercut projection c', be 
points, of the siding-rail between the main 
neath which one edge of the rail fits when 
track rails elevated at a point in proximity 
closed and by which the rail is held firmly 
to one of the main-track rails, a bearing 
down to its place. Both the switch-points, 
formed on one side thereof at the elevated 
crossing rail, and safety guard-rail (to be pres 
point, and the movable crossing rail adapted 
ently described) are operated simultaneously 
to move across the main-track rail and rest 
by means of a crank-shaft H, journaled in 
on the said bearing at the elevated point of 
bearings h, lying substantially parallel to the 
the center rail, substantially as described. 
main track, and having two cranks 
pro 
2. In a switch, such as described, the combi 
jecting at substantially the same angle and 
nation, with the main-track rails and switch 
connected the one to the switch-points by 
points, of the siding-rail between the main 
link i' and the other to the crossing-rail by 
track rails elevated at an intermediate point 
link . The cranks are of such length as that 
and having its ends bent down to the level of 
when the rail or points have been given their 
the main-track rails, a bearing at the ele 
full movement they (the cranks) are on their 
wated point of the side rail, and the movable 
dead - centers, so to speak, or, in other 
crossing rail having its end cut at an angle 
words, the center of the crank is in line with 
and adapted to cross the main-track rail and 
the shaft center and bearing-point on the rail. 
rest on said bearing, substantially as de 
Hence the rails are locked and exert no tend 
scribed. 
ency to turn the shaft. The shaft may be 
3. In a switch such as described, the combi 
operated by a weighted handle I, as usual. 
nation, with the main-track rails, switch-point 
between said rails, the siding - rail leading 
Pivoted within the main-track rails at a con 
venient point in rear of the switch is what I 
from said switch-point to the opposite main 
term a safety guard-rail K, one end of which 
track rail, at which point it is elevated above 
is connected to a crank k on the crank-shaft 
the level of the main-track rails, and the long 
H by a link IX', and the opposite end of which 
bearing formed on the side of said siding-rail 
is adapted to lie in proximity to the main 
at its highest point, of the crossing rail piv 
track rail when the switch is open and the 
oted outside the main tracks and having the 
crossing rail closed, in which position it will 
end reduced on the under side and cut off at 
be engaged by the flange of a wheel approach 
a sharp angle, adapted to swing across the 
ing from the rear and be moved away from 
main-track rail and take its seat on the long 
bearing on the elevated point of the siding 
the main-track rail. The crank c is set at 
such an angle on the shaft as that any move 
rail, substantially as described. 
ment of the guard-rail will rotate the shaft. 
4. In a switch such as described, the combi 
Hence as said rail is moved by the flange of 
nation, with the stationary and movable rails, 
the wheel the shaft is rotated and the cross 
of the joint between the same formed by the 
ing rail and switch-points moved to allow the 
plates secured to said rails and having the 
car or train to pass. 
forwardly-projecting semicircular ends each 
The joints for the movable rail form an im 
projecting beneath the opposite rail end and 
portant part of the present invention, and by 
joined together by a central pintle, substan 
referring to Figs. 5 and 6 it will be seen that 
tially as described. 
two plates M M are employed, each having a 
5. In a switch such as described, the combi 
a semicircular end projection n, jointed by a 
nation, with the stationary and movable rails, 
central pintle to the opposite plate. The 
of the joint between the same formed by the 
plates are secured to the under surface of 
plates Secured to the under side of the re 
ordinary rails by screws or otherwise, with 
spective rails and each having the forwardly 
the ends of the rails at substantially the cen 
projecting reduced semicircular end project. 
ter of the pintle, just sufficient space being 
ing beneath the end of the opposite rail and 
connected to the plate thereon by a pintle, 
left between said ends to allow of the neces 
sary movement. The rail ends, it will be 
substantially as described. 
seen, overlie the joints and prevent the entry 
6. In a switch such as described, the combi 
of dirt, and, further, prevent the separation of 
nation, with the main-track rails, siding-rails, 
the plates, forming a joint which cannot be 
and the crossing rail forming part of said 
come separated and one which may be lo 
siding-rails and adapted to swing over the 
cated in any position without injury and 
main-track rail, of the chair on which said 
which will be practically as strong as the rails 
crossing rail moves, having the undercut pro 
themselves. 
jection thereon co-operating with the bottom 
As a whole it will be seen that the switch 
of Said rail when closed, and the crank-shaft 
is simple and effective, presenting advantages 
and link for moving said crossing rail, where 
not easily secured by other switches in that 
by it is held down when in closed position, 
the main - track rails are practically un 
substantially as described. 
broken, there being thus little or no danger 
in passing a closed SWitch. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
1. In a switch such as described, the combi 
G. M. GREEN, 
J. H. FRUTCHEY. 
BENJAMIN BENNETT. 
Witnesses: 
75 
95 
IOO 
I O 
I I5 
I25 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487806.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 487,806, 
C. A. WEED, 
HEATER FOR STOCK TANKS. 
Patented Dec. l3 1892. 
Sea 22 
Va. 26 
26 2 222s A. 
2 222 
2 
 
 
- 
. 
 
AW/AWZ02. 
a &zz/6 
24Zzowieu, 
 
The Norris Peters co, PHoro-LTHo, WASHtNation. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLINTON A. WEED, OF RACINE, WISCONSIN. 
HEATER FOR STOCK-TANKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 487,806, dated December 13, 1892. 
Application filed February 20, 1892, Serial No. 422,240, (No model.) 
two longitudinal edges or ribs 9, upon which 
rests and is supported the removable grate 
10, consisting of a rectangular plate with ap 
ertures therein for the passage of the ashes 
and the other unconsumed products of Com 
bustion and having its rear or inner end 
formed or provided with a downwardly-de 
pending semicircular flange or wing 12, cor 
responding with the lower part of the cylinder. 
The numeral 13 denotes the door, consist 
ing of an annular plate hinged to the flange 
6 and provided at its lower portion with a 
sliding damper 14, by means of which the 
draft may be regulated. It will be noted that 
the grate is not connected or fixed to the cyl 
der, but simply rests upon the ledges or ribs 
9, so that it can be readily drawn out, and by 
means of the flange or wing on the inner end 
thereof the accumulated ashes will be drawn 
out with it, thus dispensing with the use of 
rakes, shovels, or other implements for clean 
ing the cylinder. 
The heater is intended to be made of steel 
or wrought-iron, whereby cracking of the 
same is prevented when water is pumped into 
the tank. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
The combination, with the tank, of the 
heater located therein and provided with a 
smoke-flue and having a flange at its outer 
end, the bolts for securing the flange to the 
tank, the hinged door, the longitudinal ribs 
or ledges upon the interior of the cylinder, 
and the sliding grate having the downwardly 
depending wing or flange, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
I claim is- 
- 
CLINTON A. WEED. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED McK. WEED, 
JACOBANDERSON. 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CLINTON A. WEED, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Racine, in the county of Racine and State of 
Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Heaters for Stock 
Tanks; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
stoves or heaters for warming water in wooden 
and other tanks for the use of live stock in 
cold weather, the object being to provide im 
proved means for accomplishing the above 
purpose in a very efficient manner. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of parts herein 
after fully described, and specifically pointed 
out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional view of a tank, showing my im 
proved heater applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a 
croSS-Section of the stove or heater. 
In the said drawings the reference-numeral 
1 designates a wooden or other tank for con 
taining the water to be heated. The wall of 
this tank is provided with an aperture for 
the passage of the heater or stove, which con 
sists of a steel or other metal cylinder 2, hav 
ing the inner head 3 secured thereto by means 
of bolts or rivets, so as to render it water 
tight, and provided with a smoke-flue 4, sup 
ported by a bracket 5, resting upon the bot 
tom of the tank, and its upper end passing 
through a central aperture in the top thereof. 
The outer end of the cylinder is provided 
with a flange 6, by means of which it is se 
cured to the tank by bolts 7, passing there 
through, and intermediate of the flange and 
tank is an elastic gasket or packing-ring 8. 
The interior of the cylinder is provided with 
2Cd 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US487906.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
. 
E. C. STOWER. 
FLUSHING TANK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 487,906, 
Patented Dec. 13, 1892. 
(ZZZesz, w gig 
loMo. 
edy, 
z 
 
  
& 
?ix 
Azz 2 
 
 
Z72 zveza Zoz: 
24. 4.1% 
3%. 224A 
4. a 4-r, 
Norris PETERs co., PHOTO-Lithd. WASHINGTON. to, C. 
 
E. C. STOVER. 
FLUSHING TANK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Deo, 13, 1892, 
(No Model.) 
No. 487,906. 
 
() 
 
 
2 
% 
60ZZesz, 
(2. M 
ZZzzveza Zoz; 
%-22-444 
 
the Norris perers co. Photo-lit-id. WASHNgtoN.d.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD C. STOVER, OF TRENTON, NEW JERSEY. 
FLUSH N G - TANK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 487,906, dated December 13, 1892. 
Application filed June 16, l891, Serial No, 396,437, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD C. STOVER, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city of Trenton, in the county of Mercer 
and State of New Jersey, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Flush 
ing-Tanks, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
flushing-tank provided with pipes, siphons, 
valves, and other devices as may be necessary 
to enable the tank to receive and discharge a 
proper supply of Water and so constructed 
that all the parts which lie below the water 
line are made integral with the body of the 
tank, the whole being a solid piece of earth 
enware, glass, cement, or similar substance, 
thus rendering the tank absolutely non-cor 
This tank is provided with a supply 
rosive. 
pipe and a discharge-pipe, both entering the 
bottom of the tank, which terminates, prefer 
ably, in a drip-saucer surrounding the said 
two pipes where they enter the tank and pref 
erably cast solid with the tank. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents the interior of the tank as provided 
with a form of siphon which I prefer to em 
ploy-namely, one in which the siphon is 
started simply by the rise of the water in the 
tank. Fig. 2 is a top view of the same. Fig. 
3 shows my improved tank as provided with 
a siphon which is started by an upjet from 
the supply-pipe. Fig. 4 shows my improved 
tank supplied with a siphon which is started 
by means of a down-jet from the Supply-pipe. 
Fig. 5 is a detail view of the supply-valve, 
showing the same open. In all these forms 
the supply-pipe and the siphon are made in 
tegral with the body of the tank, as before 
Stated. 
The same letters indicate similar parts in 
the different figures. 
A is a body of the tank, which is preferably 
curved toward the front, but with a straight 
back, as shown in Fig. 2, so that the same may 
restfiat against the wall of the room, although 
this flattening of the back is not an essential 
of the tank, but simply a matter of conven 
ience in supporting the tank. The tank may 
be supported from the wall by suitable lugs 
a or brackets or other contrivances, as desired, 
and if the lugs are employed it is preferable to 
have them form part of the tank and cast with 
it, as such construction not only supports the 
tank better, but enables the tank structure to 
be stiffened at that point in the casting, thus 
rendering the tank itself stronger. 
As earthenware and glass vessels contains 
ing cold water are apt to condense the moist 
ure of the surrounding atmosphere on the 
outer surface of the vessel, the drip-saucer B 
is provided near the center of the bottom of 
the tank, and preferably cast integral there 
with, as such construction strengthens the 
tank at the point where the supply-pipe and 
the discharge-pipe enter the same; but, if de 
sired, a separate drip-saucer maybe employed, 
the bottom of the tank being simply tapered, 
so that the products of condensation above 
referred to will flow into said saucer and be 
there retained and prevented from following 
the pipes down to the closet and discoloring 
the same or discoloring the adjacent Wall. 
The siphon C is made of earthenware, be 
ing a suitably-shaped bent tube cast integral 
with the body of the tank, preferably forming 
a part of the back of said tank, as shown in 
Fig. 2, and the bend or bridge rising slightly 
above the water-line in the tank. The longer 
leg of the siphon is connected by a suitable 
coupling c to the bowl cf the water-closet or 
other device to be flushed, and is preferably 
bent, as shown in Fig. 1 at b, where the siphon 
is designed to start itself, as by reason of said 
bend the air is more likely to be driven out of 
the longer leg, or said leg is primed,' as it 
is termed, by the water rising above the water 
line and falling over from the shorter leg of 
the siphon. Such bend is not necessary When 
the priming is accomplished by an upward or 
downward jet, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. The 
shorter leg of the siphon is open near the bot 
tom of the tank. The siphon is broken at 
any desired point automatically by means of 
the valve D, mounted upon the lug d on the 
top of the siphon and opened by a device car- . 
ried on the arm of the float, as hereinafter 
described, striking the stope at the outer end 
of the lever f. Of course as soon as the valve 
D is opened the rushing of air into the siphon 
through said valve prevents any further action 
of said siphon and allows the tank to fill up 
again. 
The time of opening the Valve may be 
automatically set, as hereinafter explained, so 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
50 
75 
95 
CO 
 
that it takes place when the tankishalf empty 
or two-thirds empty or at such other time, as 
may be found desirable. The supply-pipe E 
is connected by a suitable couplingg with a 
suitable source of supply-such as the main 
pipe from the street--and discharges the wa 
ter into the tank near the bottom ath, the 
bend of the pipe at the upper part of the fank 
being closed and controlled by what is known 
as a "ball-valve'f, so constructed and con 
trolled by means of the ball G that when the 
Valve is closed no water can enter the tank 
through the pipe E, and when the valve is 
opened or raised the water coming up in the 
longer leg of the supply-pipe is turned back 
from the valve down into the tank through 
the shorter leg, except in the device in Fig. 4, 
wherein an added function is attributed to 
this Valve, as hereinafter described. When 
the tank is full, the ball-valve F is kept closed 
by reason of the float or ball G, to which it is 
Connected by the arm H, being supported by 
the Water under it, the said arm H being piv 
oted at Some point between F and G, as usual. 
As the Water is drawn out of the tank the fall 
ing of the float Graises the ball-valve F and per 
nits the Water to again enter the tank through 
the Supply-pipe E. The arm or lever H car 
ries a projecting rod i, on which a pin or fin 
ger) is adjustably mounted in line with the 
stop e at the outer end of the lever f, so that 
When the ball G has fallen to a predetermined 
point-in other words, when the water in the 
tank has been exhausted by the siphon G to 
the extent desired-the siphon is broken by 
the Opening of the valve D and the water 
ceases to flow out through the siphon, while 
at the same time by reason of the opening of 
the ball-valve F Water comes in to supply the 
tankthrough the supply-pipe. The ball-valve 
Gis also adapted to be opened independently 
of the float by means of a chain l, which passes 
Over the pulleys m and n, and is provided with 
a pull-knob O. The connection between the 
ball-valve F and the lever H is made by the 
toggle-joint k, which not only permits the 
ball-Valve to be raised without disturbing the 
position of the ball G, but also enables the 
falling of the ball G to raise the valve F in a 
Straight line, so that it does not bind on the 
sides of the supply-pipe in which it is set. 
The rising of the ball G when lifted up by 
the Water in the tank always closes the valve 
F, no matter how the same was opened. 
When it is desired to flush the closet, the 
pull-knobo is pulled in the ordinary way, and 
the valve F is thereby raised, thus re-estab 
lishing communication between the two legs 
of the Supply-pipe, and the water passing 
through the said supply-pipe into the tank 
gradually raises the water-line both in the 
tank and in the siphon C, until the longer leg 
of the siphon is primed, when the flushing at 
once takes place and continues until the wa 
ter in the tankhas been reduced to the prede 
termined amount, when the siphon is broken, 
as before explained. It will thus be seen that 
the first effect of opening the valve F by means 
of a pull-knob o is to tend to overflow the tank 
instead of to empty it, as is generally the 
case in flushing-tanks. In fact were it not 
for the siphon the tank would undoubtedly 
overflow, and it will thus be seen that in the 
arrangement shown in Fig. 1 the longer leg 
of the siphon becomes primed as the result 
of the attempt of the water entering by means 
of the supply-pipe, seeking an avenue of es 
cape, situated somewhat below the top of the 
tank, the entrance of water being no longer 
shut out by the ball G, which is temporarily 
rendered inoperative on the valve F. The 
same thing is true of the modifications shown 
in Figs. 3 and 4. In which cases, also, the 
priming of the siphon is quickened and aided 
by turning the incoming water from the Sup 
ply-pipe directly into the siphon by means of 
the pipe, either up into the shorter leg, as 
shown in Fig. 3, or down in the longer leg, as 
The valve F, once opened 
shown in Fig. 4. 
by means of the pull-knob o, which, as be 
fore stated, deprives the float or ball G of its 
control of the valve F, remains open until the 
ball G, by falling below the predetermined 
point and opening the siphon, as before ex 
plained, again takes control of the valve F 
and shuts it in rising in the manner usual to 
ball-valves. 
Instead of a double-legged supply-pipe 
made of earthenware and rising to a consid 
erable distance inside the flushing-tank, some 
other usual form supplying the tank with 
water may be adopted, if desired, without de 
parting from that part of my invention, which 
consists in forming the body of the tank and 
the siphon in one solid piece; but the tank 
will be more nearly an approach to what is 
known as a noiseless tank, if an earthen 
ware supply-pipe of the form shown in the 
drawings is used to admit the Water near the 
bottom of the tank. An aperture S is pro 
vided for after flowing the closet or other ar 
ticle to be flushed. 
I do not herein claim the structure involv 
ing the downward jet of Water, as Ihave made 
the same the Subject-matter of another appli 
cation now filed. 
1. A flushing-tank for water-closet bowls 
and similar articles, which consists of a tank 
body and siphon made of One solid piece of 
earthenware or similar Substance and in 
which all the parts below the water-line are 
of non-corrodible material, and in which the 
valves and other metallic parts are set above 
the water-line, substantially as shown, and 
for the purposes specified. 
2. A flushing-tank for water-closet bowls 
and similar articles, which consists of a tank 
body, Supply-pipe, and a siphon, all made of 
One Solid piece of earthenware or similar sub 
stance and in which all the parts below the 
water-line are of non-corrodible material, and 
claim 
5 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
o 
75 
95. 
OO 
To5 
II5 
I25 
 
487,906 
3. 
the tank is filled, a suitable siphon connected 
with the flushing-pipe, and a valve engaged 
by the float-arm, whereby the siphonis broken 
when the water allows the float to drop to a 
predetermined level, and with an upwardly 
projecting pipe which sends an upward jet 
of water into the shorter leg of the siphon 
from the supply-pipe, substantially as shown 
and described. 
5. A flushing-tank for water-closet bowls, 
which consists of a tank-body, a siphoned 
flushing-pipe, a supply-pipe, and a drip-Saucer 
for receiving and holding the products of at 
mospheric condensation on the outside of the 
tank, all formed in one solid piece of earthen 
ware and provided with suitable devices for 
supplying the tank and flushing the bowl, sub- 4o 
stantially as shown and described. 
35 
EDWARD C. STOVER. 
O 
in which the valves and other metallic parts 
are set above the Water-line, substantially as 
shown, and for the purposes specified. 
3. A flushing-tank provided with a suitable 
supply-pipe, which is cut off by the filling of 
the tank in the usual manner, a supply-valve 
which opens and closes said supply-pipe, a 
pull-cord by which the supply-valve is me 
chanically forced up and the supply-pipe 
opened against the action of the float after the 
tank is filled, a suitable siphon connected with 
the flushing-pipe, and a valve engaged by the 
float-arm, whereby the siphon is broken when 
the water allows the float to drop to a pre 
determined level, substantially as shown and 
described. 
4. A flushing-tank provided with a suitable 
supply-pipe, which is cut off by the filling of 
the tank in the usual manner, a supply-valve 
which opens and closes said supply-pipe, a 
pull-cord by which the supply-valve is me 
chanically forced up and the supply-pipe 
opened against the action of the float after 
Witnesses: 
DANIEL H. FREAS, 
E. W. TAYLOR. 
2K) 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488006.txt	(No Model.) 
F. H.A.R.T. 
PAPER FEEDING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 488,006, 
Patented Dec. 13, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
 
IIII 
7227 esses 
722. Y 2. 
34-6 26 24----. 
Z77-eaezzcze 7zzzzz-Zrzczvezziza7 - 
P 
Z, Z2 
y 
24aeal-o- 1722-2-2-le-2- 
/ 
M-73. 
/7zzarzzeys. 
THE NORRIS PEERs co., PHOTo-LTHo, washtNation, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. H.A.R.T. 
PAPER FEEDING MACHINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 488,006. 
M 
Patented Dec. 13 l892. 
ZEz 2 
M SS 
72272 esses, 
as sea-, 
62.26 74- 2 22 
- 7% rarer'ez /<re-reer -o 
Za 2424 ee--- -3e-2-cee 
1 
-7 &oyvesys. 
The Norris Petersco. PhotoLITHo, Washington. Bes 
 
(No Model.) 
F. H.A.R.T. 
PAPER FEEDING MACHINE. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 488,006, 
Patented Dec. 13, 1892, 
7. 
 
 
 
 
2 
 
  
 
 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
M 
3. 
7th E Zia . 
sa 
I al 
Z A1 Af 
f 2 22z. 
& Z 
2 
SN 
t 
s 
Ee 
se 
N 
aZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZYZZZYZZaaaaaaaZ222222222222222%2a2 
EN's 
 
Z 3re are Zac Z2. 7zaz 2" at Zzzczzo, 
1 
172 Zorea. eys. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK HART, OF POUGHKEEPSIE, ASSIGNOR TO D. H. BURRELL & CO., 
OF LITTLE FALLS, NEW YORK. 
PAPER-FEEDING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,006, dated December 13, 1892. 
Application filed September 14, 1891, Serial No. 405,571 (No model.) 
I5 in correct register. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FREDERICKHART, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at Poughkeepsie, in the county of Dutchess 
5 and State of New York, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Paper-Feeding 
Machines, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to a side-registering 
Io mechanism which is designed, principally, for 
use in connection with an automatic paper 
feeder which feeds sheets of paper success 
ively from a pile to a printing-press or other 
machine in which it is desired to place sheets 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
registering device which is simple in con 
struction and which is operated from the 
printing-press or other machine to which the 
2O sheets are fed, thereby enabling trial-sheets 
to be operated upon although the paper 
feeder is not in motion. 
In the accompanying drawings, consisting 
of three sheets, Figure 1 is a fragmentary lon 
25 gitudinal section showing my improved side 
registering device applied to a paper-feeder 
and printing-press. Fig. 2 is a vertical trans 
verse section thereof in line ac ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a longitudinal sectional elevation of the 
3o side-registering gripper and connecting parts, 
on an enlarged scale. Figs. 4 and 5 are hori 
Zontal sections in line if f and 22, Fig. 3. Fig. 
6 is a vertical transverse section in line U U, 
Fig. 3, showing the gripper in its normal re 
35 tracted position. Fig. 7 is a similar view 
showing the gripper moved inwardly and 
gripping the sheet. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the several figures. 
A represents the side frames of a paper 
feeder and printing-press, and B the hori 
Zontal table which supports the pile of paper 
and is moved upwardly between the side 
frames as the sheets of paper are fed from 
b represents the pushing-out fingers where 
by the sheets are fed from the pile upon de 
livery-tapes C. The latter are arranged 
lengthwise in rear of the pile of paper and 
5o pass, with their receiving, portions around a 
45 the top. 
 
d represents a transverse feed-board con- 6o 
receiving-roller c, arranged contiguous to the 
top of the pile of paper, while the delivery 
portions of the tapes pass around a delivery 
roller c'. The receiving and delivery rollers 
are both arranged transversely and journaled 55 
with their ends in bearings formed in longi 
tudinal side bars D D, pivoted at their front 
ends to the side frames of the paper-feeder 
concentric with the receiving-roller. 
necting the rear portions of the side bars D. 
and extending from the delivery-roller c' to 
the printing press cylinder E. The sheet is 
carried over the feed-board by the delivery 
tapes until its front edge Strikes against the 65 
drop-guides e, arranged above the cylinder E 
of the printing-press in the usual manner. 
F represents a supporting-rod arranged 
transversely over the feed-board and secured 
with its ends to upwardly-projecting armsf, 7o 
formed at the rear ends of the side bars D D. 
G represents a transversely-movable sleeve 
which supports the side-registering mechan 
ism and is mounted upon the supporting-rod 
F. The side-registering mechanism can be 7. 
adjusted transversely of the machine by slid 
ing said sleeve lengthwise upon the support 
ing-rod Faind is held in position after adjust 
ment by means of a clamping-screw g, ar 
ranged in the supporting-sleeve and bearing 8o 
against a feather g', arranged in a groove in 
the supporting-rod. 
H represents an arbor, which carries the 
gripper mechanism whereby the side of the 
sheet is registered. This arbor is arranged 85 
lengthwise over the feed-board and is rigidly 
secured with its rear end in a boss h, formed 
on the upper front side of the supporting 
sleeve. 
surrounding the arbor and arranged between 
the boss h of the Supporting-sleeve and a col 
lar i, secured to the front end of the arbor by 
a pin . The front portion of the arbor is 
contracted Somewhat, so as to form a shoul-, 95 
der , and the bore of the carrier-sleeve con 
tiguous to the front portion of the arbor is 
similarly contracted, so as to bear against said 
shoulder. 
I represents an Oscillating carrier-sleeve 9o 
J represents a depending gripper-arm pro- Ioo 
488,006 
- 
. 
. 
. 
vided at its upper end with an eyei, which 
is hung loosely on the carrier-sleeve. This 
gripper-arm is provided at its lower end with 
a fixed gripper-jaw f', arranged at right an 
gles, or nearly so, to fhe gripper-arm and ex 
tending inwardly there from. 
f represents the movable jaw of the grip 
per, which is arranged above the fixed jaw 
and capable of moving toward and from the 
fixed jaw, whereby the sheets of paper are 
clamped between said jaws. 
K represents a movable plate arranged on 
the inner side of the gripper-arm and support 
ing the movable gripper-jaw. This support 
ing-plate is secured to the gripper-arm by 
screws c', passing through slots k, formed 
lengthwise in the gripper-arm, thereby guid 
ing the plate and permitting a limited up-and 
down movement of the plate and the upper 
gripper-jaw upon the gripper-arm. 
L represents an upright guide-rod secured 
with its lower end to the upper jaw and ar 
ranged to slide with its upper portion in per 
forated ears ll, formed at opposite ends of 
the Supporting-plate. A yielding connection 
is formed between the movable jaw and its 
supporting-plate by a tension-spring l, which 
surrounds the guide-rod I, and bears with its 
upper end against the upper earl, while its 
lower end bears against a thumb-nut l, ar 
ranged on the lower screw-threaded portion 
l of the guide-rod. By turning the thumb 
screw the pressure which the spring exerts 
upon the movable jaw is regulated. 
l represents a screw-nut arranged on the 
screw-threaded portion l of the guide-rod be 
tween the nut land bearing against the up 
per side of the lower earl of the supporting 
plate, whereby the distance between the jaws 
of the gripper is regulated and the movable 
jaw is compelled to follow the upward move 
ment of the supporting-plate. 
M represents a friction-disk formed at the 
rear end of the eye of the gripper-arm and 
bearing against a cam-plate N, formed at the 
rear end of the carrier-sleeve surrounding 
the arbor. A Washer n, of leather or simi 
lar material, is preferably interposed between 
the friction-disk and the cam-plate for the 
purpose of increasing the friction between 
the same. The friction-disk is firmly held in 
contact with the cam-plate by a spiral spring n, 
surrounding the front portion of the carrier 
sleeve and bearing with its ends against the 
eye of the gripper-arm and a screw-nut in', ar 
ranged on the screw-threaded frontend of the 
A washer n, held against ro 
carrier-sleeve. 
tation on the carrier-sleeve by a feather en 
gaging in a longitudinal groove in the carrier 
sleeve, is preferably interposed between the 
eye of the gripper-arm and the spring in, so as 
to prevent the rocking of the eye from turning 
the screw-nut in. Upon turning the latter in 
the proper direction the friction between the 
cam-plate N and the friction-disk M can be in 
creased or decreased, as desired. 
O represents a rock-shaft whereby an oscil 
lating movement is imparted to the cam-plate 
and the gripper-arm, frictionally connected 
there with. This rock-shaft is journaled with 
its ends in bearings formed in the arms at 
the rear ends of the side bars. Only one of 
these bearings o' and one of the arms fare 
shown in the drawings. The rock-shaft is ar 
ranged between its ends in a bearingo, formed 
on the upper side of the supporting-sleeve. 
P represents a bevel-gear segment mounted 
on the rock-shaft and meshing with a similar 
gear-segment P, formed on the upper portion 
of the cam-plate, whereby the latter and the 
gripper frictionally connected there with are 
actuated. The gear-segment P is secured to 
the rock-shaft and to the bearing o' on the 
supporting-sleeve by a stepped key p, Fig. 4, 
whereby the gear-segment P is compelled to 
turn with the rock-shaft, but is capable of 
moving lengthwise thereon with the support 
ing-sleeve. 
p' p represent stop-arms whereby the os 
cillating movement of the gripper-arm carry 
ing the gripper-jaws is limited. These stop 
arms depend from the lower side of the sup 
porting-sleeve and extend forwardly across 
the curvilinear path of the gripper on the in 
ner and outer sides of the gripper-arm, as rep 
resented in Figs. 4 and 6. The stop-arms are 
provided with adjustable stop-screws pp 
and the gripper-arm is provided with a rear 
wardly - extending ear p, adapted to alter 
nately strike against the adjusting-screws of 
the stop-arms, thereby limiting the oscillat 
ing movement of the gripper. 
Q represents a cam-slot formed in the lower 
portion of the cam-plate and receiving a pin 
or roller q, secured to the rear side of the plate 
supporting the upper jaw. Upon oscillating 
the cam-plate the cam-slot in the latter, en- . 
gaging with the roller q of the supporting 
plate, moves the upper jaw toward and from 
the lower jaw. At opposite ends of the cam 
slot the cam-plate is provided with concentric 
slots q' q, into which the roller of the upper 
jaw-plate passes and permits the cam-plate to 
move independent of the gripper a variable 
distance after the movement of the gripper 
has been arrested and its jaws have been 
opened or closed. 
R represents a rock-lever whereby motion 
is transmitted from the printing-press to the 
side-registering mechanism. This rock-lever 
is pivoted near its middle to the side frame 
and provided with a bifurcated upper end r. 
S represents a depending rock-arm secured 
to the rock-shaft and provided at its lower 
end with a pin or roller s', which engages 
with the bifurcated upper end of the rock 
lever, thereby forming a detachable connec 
tion between the rock-lever and the rock 
arm S. 
s' represents a cam secured to the revolv 
ing shafts of the printing-press cylinder and 
adapted to engage against a roller or pins 
on the lower end of the rock-lever. When 
the cams engages against the roller of the 
- 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
c 
II5 
I 25 
 
488,006 
25 
O 
rock-lever, the side-registering gripper con 
nected therewith by intermediate connecting 
mechanism is moved inwardly or forwardly. 
s' represents a spring whereby the gripper 
is moved backwardly or outwardly and re 
turned to its normal position. This spring is 
secured with its ends to the side frame and the 
upper end of the rock-lever, so that it tends 
to draw the latter in a direction opposite to 
that in which it is moved by the cams. 
- The inner upright face t, Fig. 6, of the grip 
per-arm adjacent to the lower gripper-jaW 
serves as the side-registering stop or guide, 
against which the side of the sheet of paper 
is registered. The cams' moves the gripper 
inwardly with the jaws open, so that the side 
registering stop strikes the lateral edge of the 
sheet and the spring s returns the closed 
gripper carrying the sheet to its outer or reg 
istering position, thereby imparting a trans 
versely-oscillating movement to the gripper. 
it represent wings formed on the outer 
side of the upper jaw on the front and rear 
sides of the gripper-arm and extending out 
wardly beyond the upright facet of the grip 
per-arm. These wings prevent the edge of 
the sheet from curling and creeping upwardly 
into the crevices between the gripper-arm 
and the upper jaw when the face it strikes the 
edge of the sheet during the forward move 
ment of the gripper. If the edge of the sheet 
were permitted to pass up between the grip 
per-arm and the upper jaw, the sheet could 
not be correctly registered. 
ti, Figs. 1 and 2, represent adjusting-screws 
arranged vertically in the side bars of the de 
livery-tapes and side-registering mechanism 
and bearing upon the side frames of the print 
ing - press. Upon turning these adjusting 
screws the delivery and registering mechan 
ism can be adjusted vertically with reference 
to the printing-press cylinder. 
Upon raising the rear ends of the side bars 
the roller of the rock-arm S becomes disen 
gaged from the bifurcated upper end of the 
rock-lever R. This permits the delivery 
tapes and registering mechanism to be swung 
upwardly on the pivots at the front ends of 
the side bars, thereby clearing the space 
above the press-cylinder for making ready.' 
Upon lowering the tape mechanism the roller 
of the rock-arm S is again engaged with the 
upper end of the rock-lever. These parts 
form a very simple detachable connection of 
55 the side register with the shaft of the press 
cylinder from which it derives its motion. 
- The operation of side-registering a sheet of 
paper is as follows: After feeding the sheet 
by the pushing-out fingers from the pile upon 
the delivery-tapes the latter carry the sheet 
forward so that its lateral edge passes be 
tween the jaws of the gripper, the entrance 
between them being facilitated by the flaring 
form of the reeeiving portion of the jaws, as 
shown in the drawings. After the sheet has 
been fed by the tapes squarely against the 
drop-guides e of the printing-press the cam 
s of the press-shaft strikes the rollers of the 
rock-lever, which causes the cam-plate to 
move inwardly. The cam-plate, owing to its 
frictional connection with the gripper-arm, 
carries the latter forward with it, and in so 
doing the registering guide or face t strikes 
the lateral edge of the sheet and buckles the 
same slightly. The cam-plate and the grip 
per move forward in unison until the gripper 
arm strikes the inner stop-screw p. This 
arrests the forward movement of the gripper; 
but the cam-plate continues in its course. 
As the cam-plate continues its movement its 
cam-slot forces the roller and the supporting 
plate downward until the upper jaw attached 
thereto bears firmly on the sheet resting on 
the lower jaw. The upper jaw now ceases its 
downward movement; but its supporting 
plate still continues to move downwardly, 
which causes the upper ear of the support 
ing-plate to compress the tension-spring sur 
rounding the guide-rod, thereby increasing 
the pressure of the upper jaw on the sheet of 
paper. The final portion of the forward 
movement of the cam-plate causes the roller 
of the supporting-plate to enter the concen 
tric slot q at the outer end of the cam-slot, 
thereby holding the gripper in its closed po 
sition, as represented in Fig. 7. After the 
rotating cam s releases the rock-lever the 
springs draws the rock-lever and the grip 
per holding the sheet backward, together with 
the cam-plate, until the gripper-arm strikes 
the outer stop-screw p. This arrests the 
further backward movement of the gripper; 
but the Spring continues to draw the cam 
plate outwardly and causes its cam-slot to 
raise the plate supporting the upper jaw, 
thereby releasing the sheet of paper. The 
springs continues to draw the cam-plate out 
wardly until the roller of the supporting-plate 
engages in the inner concentric slot q', there 
by holding the jaws of the gripper in an open 
position, as represented in Fig. 6. The next 
instant the drop-guides rise and the sheet is 
carried away by the nippers of the printing 
press in correct front and side register. The 
extent of the inward or forward movement 
of the gripper is such as to bring the lateral 
edges of the sheets in contact with the side 
registering guide under the usual variations 
with which sheets are fed from the pile. The 
variously-placed sheets are all seized firmly 
and drawn laterally by the gripper into reg 
ister with a definite line. The oscillation of 
the gripper can be easily adjusted while the 
machine is in operation by turning the stop 
screws p?p. 
By mounting the delivery-tapes and regis 
tering mechanism on a pivoted frame and 
providing a simple detachable connection be 
tween the moving parts of the printing-press 
and the side-register the latter can be easily 
removed from the press without disturbing 
any of the adjustments. By operating the 
- 
, 
45 
35 
75 
95 
CO 
O 
II5 
12O 
I25 
 
4. 
488,006 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
side-register from the shaft of the press-cyl 
inder trial-sheets can be registered while the 
paper-feeder is not in operation. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination, with a gripper, of a 
movable plate having a frictional connection 
with the gripper, a stop by which the gripper 
is arrested while the plate continues its move 
ment, and a cam which moves with the plate 
and by which the gripper-jaws are opened 
and closed after the movement of the grip. 
per has been arrested, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination, with an oscillating 
gripper, of an oscillating cam-plate having a 
frictional connection with the gripper, a stop 
by which the gripper is arrested while the 
cam-plate continues its oscillating movement, 
and a cam formed in said cam-plate and op 
erating to open or close the movable gripper 
jaw during this continual movement of the 
cam-plate, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with the gripper, of an 
oscillating plate having a frictional connec 
tion with the gripper, a cam which moves 
with the plate and by which the gripper-jaws 
are opened and closed, and adjustable stops 
arranged on opposite sides of the gripper, 
whereby the movement of the gripper is regu 
lated, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination, with the gripper pro 
vided with a movable jaw, of an oscillating 
plate having a frictional connection with the 
gripper, a stop whereby the gripper is ar 
rested, while the plate continues its move 
ment, a cam which moves with the plate and 
whereby the movable gripper-jaw is opened 
and closed, a spring bearing upon the mov 
able jaw, and a spring-support which is acted 
upon by the cam, thereby applying a yield 
ing pressure to the movable jaw, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. The combination, with an oscillating 
gripper-arm and a fixed jaw secured to the 
lower end of said arm, of a movable jaw ar 
ranged contiguous to said fixed jaw, a mov 
able supporting-plate mounted on said arm, 
and a yielding connection between said mov 
able plate and the movable jaw, substantially 
as set forth. 
6. The combination, with the oscillating 
gripper-arm provided with a fixed jaw at its 
lower end and with slots, and a movable jaw 
arranged above said fixed jaw and having a 
movement toward and from said fixed jaw, 
of a movable supporting-plate arranged upon 
the gripper-arm, guide-screws secured to said 
supporting-plate and arranged in said slots 
of the gripper-arm, and a yielding connection 
between said movable plate and the movable 
jaw, substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination, with the oscillating 
arm having a fixed gripper-jaw at its lower 
end, of a movable jaw arranged above said 
fixed jaw, a movable Supporting-plate mount 
ed on said arm and provided with a perfo 
rated ear, a screw-threaded guide-rod ar 
ranged in the perforated ear of the support 
ing-plate and secured with its lower end to 
the movable jaw, a thumb-nut mounted on 
said guide-rod, and a spring surrounding said 
guide-rod and interposed between said thumb 
nut and ear, substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination, with the oscillating 
gripper-arm having a fixed jaw at its lower 
end, of a movable supporting-plate mounted 
on said gripper-arm and provided with an 
upper and a lower perforated ear, a guide 
rod secured with its lower end to the movable 
jaw and arranged to slide with its upper end 
in the ears of said supporting-plate, a tension 
nut mounted on said rod, a spring surround 
ing said rod and interposed between said 
tension-nut and the upper ear, and a regul 
lating-nut arranged on said rod and bearing 
on the upper side of the lower ear, substan 
tially as set forth. 
9. The combination, with the oscillating 
carrier-sleeve, of a gripper-arm frictionally 
connected with said sleeve and having a fixed 
jaw at its lower end, a movable jaw arranged 
above the fixed jaw and adapted to move to 
Ward and from the same, and a movable sup 
porting-plate mounted on said arm and sup 
porting the movable jaw, substantially as set 
forth. 
10. The combination, with the oscillating 
carrier-sleeve, of a gripper-arm frictionally 
connected there with and having a fixed jaw 
at its lower end, a movable jaw arranged 
above the fixed jaw and capable of moving 
toward and from the same, a movable plate 
mounted on said arm, and a yielding connec 
tion between said movable plate and the mov 
able jaw, substantially as set forth. 
11. The combination, with the oscillating 
carrier-sleeve provided with a cam-plate, of 
an oscillating arm provided with gripper-jaws 
and mounted loosely on said sleeve, a spring 
whereby the arm is pressed against the cam 
plate, thereby establishing a frictional con 
nection between the gripper-arm and the 
cam-plate, and a cam which moves with said 
plate, and whereby the gripper-jaws are 
opened and closed, substantially as set forth. 
12. The combination, with the oscillating 
carrier-sleeve provided with a cam-plate, of a 
gripper-arm loosely supported on said sleeve 
and having a fixed gripper-jaw at its lower 
end, a movable plate mounted on said arm 
and supporting a movable jaw, a spring press 
ing said gripper-arm against the cam-plate, a 
cam which is formed on said plate and en 
gages with said movable plate, and stops 
which limit the oscillating movement of the 
gripper, Substantially as set forth. 
13. The combination, with the arbor and a 
sleeve surrounding said arbor and provided 
at one end with a cam-plate, of a gripper-arm 
hung upon said sleeve and provided with a 
disk bearing against Said cam-plate, a screw 
nut arranged upon the opposite end of said 
75 
9o 
95 
O 
O 
I 
II 
2 
 
488,006 
S 
35 
40 
45 
55 
cam, stops whereby the oscillating movement 
of the gripper-arm is arrested, and a rock-shaft 
provided with a gear-segment which meshes 
with the gear-segment of the carrier-sleeve, 
substantially as set forth. 
17. The combination, with the main frame 
and the side bars pivoted to the main frame, 
of a gripper mechanism mounted upon the 
free ends of the side bars and provided with 
a rock-arm, a rock-lever detachably connected 
at one end With the rock-arm, and a cam en 
gaging with the opposite end of the rock-lever 
and actuating the latter, substantially as Set 
forth. 
18. The combination, with the main frame, 
of side bars pivoted thereto, a tape-roller ar 
ranged concentric with the pivots of the side 
bars, a tape-roller supported on the side bars 
near their free ends, tapes running around 
said rollers, a gripper mechanism mounted 
upon the free ends of the side bars and pro 
vided with a rock-arm, a rock-lever having a 
bifurcated end with which the rock-arm is 
detachably connected, and an actuating-cam 
which moves said rock-lever, substantially as 
set forth. 
Witness my hand this 3d day of August, 6o 
891. 
FREDERICK HART. 
Witnesses: 
J. S. WAN CLEEF, 
WILLIAM J. KENNEDY. 
o 
sleeve, a spring interposed between the screw 
nut and the gripper-arm, a fixed jaw secured 
to the lower end of the gripper-arm, a mov 
ableja Warranged above the fixed jaw, a mov 
able plate arranged upon the gripper-arm and 
Supporting the movable jaw, and a cam formed 
On Said movable plate, whereby the movable 
jaw is actuated, substantially as set forth. 
14. The combination, with the oscillating 
gripper-arm provided with a fixed jaw, of a 
movable jaw arranged to move toward and 
from the fixed jaw, a movable plate support 
ing said movable jaw and provided with a pin 
or roller, and an oscillating plate provided 
with a slot which receives the pin, said slot 
being composed of a cam portion and a con 
centric portion at each end of the cam portion 
and stops whereby the oscillating movement 
of the gripper-arm is limited, substantially as 
Set forth. 
15. The combination, with the oscillating 
gripper-arm provided with a registering-face 
on its inner side and a fixed jaw at its lower 
end, of a movable jaw adapted to move toward 
and from the fixed jaw and provided with 
wings which extend across the registering 
face, substantially as set forth. 
16. The combination, with the carrier-sleeve 
provided with a friction-plate having a cam 
and with a gear-segment, of an oscillating 
gripper-arm frictionally connected with said 
plate and provided with a fixed jaw, a mov 
able gripper-jaw which is connected with said 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488106.txt	(No Model, 
No. 488,106. 
S. P. BABCOCK. 
BRICK MACHINE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Deo, 13, 1892. 
arrowser 
 
  
3.SS 
S. ss 
Gd 
S O 
t 
G) 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 488, 106, 
 
 
S. P. BABCOCK. 
BRICK MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 13, 1892, 
 
s 
III is 
is III 
s 25S 
S 
2. 
As 
S. 
 
 
 
skull ?s of cock 
--Ceet, 
 
(No Model.). 
No. 488,106. 
 
S. P. BABCOCK, 
BRICK MACHINE. 
5 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 13, 1892. 
Zae 
wae 
??. 
NetS3 
O-9Sa 
SSK// 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
S 
42 2-azazz 7 
at f/3 a 6coe?. 
ly 
1) 
(No Model.) 
S. P. BABCOCK, 
BRICK MACHINE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 488,106. 
Patented Dec. 13, 1892. 
  
  
st N is 
$32 
|ev33|| 
Sry 
R 
a 
R 
S 
s 
SS 
 
His 
- S - S 
2-27. 
&aluf (3 a 6cc4 
5 & overths, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 488,106. 
S. P. BABCOCK, 
BRICK MACHINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Dec. 13, 1892, 
Aasr 
? fo 
2 
20 
// Zo 
/ / / 
/48 
lz 2-azz zazr 
Slustu? (3a Sec4. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SYLVESTER P. BABCOCK, OF ADRIAN, MICHIGAN. 
w 
BRCK, MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,106, dated December 13, 1892. 
Application filed February 29, 1892, Serial No. 423,178, (No model.) 
d 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SYLVESTER P. BABCOCK, 
of Adrian, in the county of Lenawee and State 
of Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Brick-Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention consists in certain improve 
ments in brick-machines, hereinafter fully 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a machine embody 
ing my invention. Fig. 2 is a side elevation 
of the same. Fig. 2 is a detail section taken 
upon the line Z, Z, Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation of the ratchet-wheel by which the 
belt-carrier is operated. Fig. 3 is a detail 
plan view of one of the push-pins and the lug 
by which said pin is actuated. Fig. 4 is a 
section in elevation of a portion of the ma 
chine, taken upon the line Y Y, Fig. 1. Fig. 
4 is a detail view, partly in section, of the 
end of one of the rods which extend from the 
legs of the follower-plates and the set-screw 
extending into said rod. Fig. 5 is a detail 
view of the re-pressing mechanism, partly in 
section. Fig. 5 is a detail plan view of a 
pair of the pull-bolts and pair of the lugs 
upon the guide-arms of the re-pressing-plun 
ger. Fig. 6 is a section of the mouthpiece of 
the mixing-barrel, taken on the line XX, Fig. 
4. Fig. 7 is a detail view, partly in section, 
illustrating the manner of attaching the 
winged arms to their shaft. Fig. 8 is a detail 
plan view of one of the pull-hooks and the 
pull-bolts with which said hook engages. 
Fig. 9 is a plan view of one of the pull-hooks, 
showing the side of said hook which is toward 
the center of the machine when the hook is 
in place. Fig. 10 is a section on the line W 
W, Fig. 2, the mold-wheel and part of the 
frame of the machine being removed. Fig. 
II is a transverse central section of one of 
the suspending arms or pitmen of the re 
press-plunger. Fig. 12 is a longitudinal sec 
tion of the belt-carrier. Fig. 13 is a plan 
view of a portion of the mold-wheel. Fig. 14 
is an elevation of a portion of one of the 
mold-wheel disks, showing the side which is 
toward the center of the machine when said 
disk is in position. Fig. 15 is an isometric 
view of one of the end plates of the mold. 
Fig. 16 is a section of one of the mold-wheel 
disks, taken through one of the spokes; and 
Fig. 17 is an isometric view of a portion of 
one of the wedge-shaped steel posts by which 
the mold-wheel disks are connected. 
2 is the frame of the machine. 
3 is the frame of the mold-wheel. The 
frame 3 rests upon one end of the frame 2, 
but is not directly secured thereto except by 
adhesion. 
79 is a hopper through which the clay is 
fed to the mixing-barrel. 
4 is the mixing-barrel. The mixing-barrel 
4 is secured to the frame 2 at 5 and at 7 by a 
standard 6, Fig. 2. 
8 is the mouthpiece of the mixing-barrel. 
Said mouthpiece is secured to the end of said 
barrel by bolts 99, Fig. 4. The end of the 
mouthpiece 8 which is farthest from the mix 
ing-barrel is formed in the arc of a circle 
having about the same radius as the mold 
Wheel. The frame 3 is connected to the 
mouthpiece by a draw-bolt 10, Fig. 2A, pass 
ing through a standard of said frame and 
through a flange 13 of said mouthpiece. By 
said draw-bolt the frame 3 may be drawn to 
Ward the mouthpiece 8 until the mold-wheel 
is at its proper position relative to said mouth 
piece. . 
ll is a set-screw passing through a flange 
Of the mouthpiece 8 and impinging against a 
lug 13 upon the frame 3. A set-screw 11 is 
located upon each side of the mouthpiece 8, 
near the dra W-bolts 10. Said set-screws act 
to prevent the frame 3 from being drawn too 
close to the mouthpiece 8. 
12 is the mold-wheel keyed to a shaft 14, 
which shaft rests in bearings upon the frame 
3. In the periphery of the wheel 12 are a 
number of brick-molds 15, and upon each side 
of said wheel, near the periphery, are pull 
bolts 17, extending at right angles to the 
faces of said wheel. One of the pull-bolts 17 
is, located midway between each pair of adja 
cent molds 15. 
16 are follower-plates adapted to fit close 
and reciprocate radially to the wheel 12 in 
said molds. 
1818 are legs extending from each end of 
the follower-plates 16, radially to the wheel 12, 
and 19 are steel rods extending from the in 
- 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
488, h06 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
ner ends of the leg 18 in the same direction 
as said legs and passing through armatures 
formed through the annular shoulder 20. 
21 are push-pins extending from the legs 18 
at right angles. 
22 is a cam-plate secured to the frame 3 at 
23, and 25 is a similar cam-plate Secured to 
said frame at 24. The cam-plate 22 is adapt 
ed to act upon the push-pins 21 to move the 
follower-plates 16 toward the center of the 
mold-wheel 12 as each mold l3 enters the 
mouth of the mixing-barrel 4, and the cam 
plate 25 is adapted to have a similar effect 
when the molds leave the mouth of the mix 
ing-barrel 4 when the machine is running 
without any clay in said barrel. Said cam 
plates prevent the follower-plate from acci 
dentally coming into contact with the mouth 
piece 8 and stopping or breaking the machine 
or removing the oil from the surface of said 
plates. 
Above the wheel 12, directly over its cen 
ter, is a re-pressing mechanism consisting of 
a plunger 26, operated by suspending arms or 
pitmen 27 27 and by means of two cranks 28 
28 upon a shaft 29. 
In the position in which the machine is 
shown in the drawings, just to the left of the 
re-pressing mechanism is an oiler 30, consist 
ing of a body of cloth stretched over a plate, 
or a roller may be substituted. The oiler 30 
is secured to the ends of rods 31 31, which 
rods are constrained to reciprocate in a hori 
zontal direction by guides 32 32, secured to 
the frame 3. 
33 is a bell-cranklever consisting of arms 34 
34 and 3535, secured to a rock-shaft 36, which 
shaft is pivoted in bearings 37 37, secured to 
the frame 3. 
38 38 are tension-springs secured to the 
frame 3 and to the arms 34 and adapted to 
draw said arms toward the left. 
3939 are lugs upon the rods 31 31, against 
which lugs the arms 34 strike to reciprocate 
the rods 3131. 
71 is an arm upon the shaft 29, adapted to 
strike against the arms 3535 and oscillate the 
rock-shaft 36. 
40 is a scraper-plate secured to the frame 3 
upon one side and upon the other side resting 
upon the periphery of the mold-wheel 12. 
41 is a belt-carrier for conveying the brick 
from the machine when discharged from the 
molds 15. Said carrier consists of endless 
belts passing over rollers 42 42, Fig. 12, and 
is actuated through a ratchet-wheel 43, Figs. 
2 and 2, upon the shaft of one of said rollers. 
73, Figs. 4 and 10, is a plate-spring secured 
at 74 to the frame 3. Said spring extends un 
der the periphery of the mold-wheel 12 be 
neath the center of said wheel. 
75 is a vessel for containing oil, upon the 
end of the plate-spring 73. 
76 is a roller pivoted with its axis parallel 
to that of the wheel 12 in the vessel 75. The 
roller 76 is pressed by the resilience of the 
- 
spring 73 against the periphery of the mold 
wheel 12. 
44, Fig. 10, is a sliding cross-head adapted 
to reciprocate in ways 45 45 upon the frame 
2 of the machine. Upon each end of said 
cross-head is secured a horizontal push-bar 
46. Said bars extend beyond the mold-wheel 
12, are united at their ends by a cross-bar 47, 
and pass through steady-boxes 4848 upon an 
upright of the frame 3. 
49, Fig. 2, is a push-arm rigidly secured to 
and rising from each of the push-bars 46 to a 
level with the center of the wheel 12. 
50, Fig. 3, is a lug extending laterally from 
the upper end of the push-arm 49 and adapted 
to engage with the push-pins 2 upon the legs 
18 of the follower-plates 16. 
51, Fig. 2, is a Swinging arm pivoted at 52 
to the frame 3. 
5353, Fig. 10, are pins extending from the 
push-bars 46 46 and engaging with the lower 
ends of the swinging arms 51 51. 
54, Fig. 2, is a pawl pivoted at one end to 
the swinging arm 51 and engaging at the other 
end with the ratchet-wheel 43. 
8080 are pull-hooks consisting of the plates 
81, from the inside of which extend the flanges 
85 and hooks 82. (See Figs. 8 and 9.) The 
pull-hooks 8080 are secured to the sliding 
cross-head 44 by eyebolts 83, passing through 
pures in the ends of said sliding cross 
ead. 
84 84 are nuts upon the eyebolts 83, one 
upon each side of the cross-head 44 upon one 
of said eyebolts. By the nuts 84.84 the dis 
tance of the hooks 82 from the cross-head 44 
may be adjusted. 
55 55, Figs. 1 and 2, is a shaft pivoted at 56 
56 upon the frame 2 of the machine and ex 
tending axially nearly through the mixing 
barrel 4. 
57 57 are winged arms secured to the shaft 
55 inside of the mixing-barrel 4, so that their 
wings shall form acute angles with the axis 
of said shaft. 
58 is a shaft pivoted in bearings 5959 upon 
one side of the frame 2, parallel with the 
shaft 55. 
60 is a pulley upon the shaft 58. 
61 is a gear-wheel upon the shaft 58, and 
62 is a larger gear-wheel upon the shaft 55. 
64 is a vertically-extending shaft pivoted 
in bearings secured to the frame 2 of the ma 
chine. 
65 is a bevel gear-wheel upon the shaft 64. 
66 is a crank upon the shaft 64, and 67 is a 
pitman connecting the shaft 66 with the slid 
ing cross-head 44. 
68, Fig. 1, is a shaft pivoted in bearings 70 
70, secured to the frame 2 of the machine and 
extending at right angles to the shaft 55. 
69 is a bevel gear-wheel upon the shaft 68. 
The teeth of the bevel gear-wheels 65 and 69 
mesh with the teeth of the bevel gear-wheel 63. 
72 is a sprocket-wheel upon the shaft 68, 
and 77 is a sprocket-wheel upon the shaft 29. 
75 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
 
488,106 
3 
78is a chain passing over and engaging with 
the teeth of the sprocket-wheels 72 and 77. 
The operation of the above-described ma 
chine is as follows: The pulley 60 is revolved 
by a belt from the source of power and com 
municates its motion to the shaft 58. The 
shaft 58 revolves the shaft 55 by means of the 
gear-wheels 61 and 62. The bevel gear-wheel 
63 revolves with the shaft55 and communicates 
its motion to the bevel gear-wheels 65 and 69, 
and consequently to the shafts 64 and 68. The 
revolving of the shaft 64 reciprocates the slid 
ing cross-head 44 by means of the crank 66 
and pitman 67. The reciprocation of the cross 
head 44 moves the pull-hooks 8080 backward 
and forward. As said pull-hooks move for 
ward they are supported and slightly raised 
by the flange 85, resting upon one of the pull 
bolts 17, Fig. 8. When said pull - hooks are 
near the end of their forward movement, the 
flange 85 passes from over that one of the pull 
bolts 17 upon which it has been resting, and 
the hook 82 engages with the next one of the 
pull-bolts 17. As the pull-hooks 8080 are 
drawn backward they draw upon the pull 
bolts with which they are engaged and re 
volve the mold-wheel 12 a distance equal to 
the space between the centers of adjacent 
molds 15, and thus bring another of said molds 
within the mouth of the mixing-barrel 4. The 
revolving of the shaft 55 drives the clay, by 
means of the Winged arms 57, with consider 
able force into the molds 15, that are opposite 
the mouth of the barrel 4, thus pressing the 
follower-plates 16 backward toward the cen 
ter of the wheel 12 and filling said molds with 
clay. The follower-plates 16 are moved a 
short distance inward by the cam-plates 22 
and 24 engaging with the push-pins 21 upon 
the legs of said plates, so that said plates shall 
not be in such a position that their outer sur. 
faces shall protrude from the periphery of the 
mold-wheel 12 and catch upon the mouthpiece 
8 of the mixing-barrel 4, and so that the oil 
which has been placed upon said surface by 
the roller 76 shall not be wiped off when the 
molds enter the mixing-barrel. The revolu 
tion of the bevel gear-wheel 63 revolves the 
bevel gear-wheel 69, shaft 68, and sprocket 
wheel 72. The sprocket-wheel 77, and conse 
Yquently the shaft 29, are revolved by means of 
the sprocket-wheel 72 and chain 78. As each 
of the molds 15 which has previously been 
filled with clay from the barrel 4 comes be 
neath the plunger 26 said plunger is driven 
downward against the clay in said mold by 
means of the suspending arms or pitmen 27 
27 and presses the clay into an accurate form. 
When the plunger 26 is nearly at its highest 
position, the arm 71 strikes against the arms 
3535, oscillating the bell-crank lever 33 and 
forcing the repress-oiler 30 forward and 
against the under surface of the plunger 26. 
When the arm 71 has passed by the arms 35 
35, the bell-crank lever 33 is drawn back to 
its former position by the springs 3838. The 
scraper 40 removes any clay that may have 
95 
been left upon the outside of the periphery of 
the mold-wheel 12. The push-bars 46 46 are 
drawn backward by the sliding cross-head 44, 
carrying with them the push-arms 4949. By 
the revolution of the mold-wheel12 a push-pin 
21 is brought in line with the upper end of 
each of the push-arms 49. As said push-arms 
move forward, the lugs 50 come in contact 
with the push-pins 21, driving said pins for 75 
ward, and consequently forcing the outer sur 
face of the follower-plates 16 to and slightly 
beyond the periphery of the mold-wheel 12, 
thus dropping the molded clay in the form of 
a brick upon the carrier 41. The reciprocat 
ing of the push-bars 46 46 oscillates the 
swinging arm 51 and reciprocates the pawl 
54, thus turning one of the drums 42 of the 
carrier by means of the ratchet-wheel 43. As 
the mold-wheel 12 revolves, the outer sur 
faces of the follower-plates are oiled by com 
ing in contact with the roller 76, thus guard 
ing against the sticking of the clay in the 
molds. The shaft 55 within the mixing-bar 
rel 4 is square in cross-section. Holes are 
bored through said shaft within the barrel 4 
on alternate sides, and from three to five 
inches apart. 
The peculiar construction of the winged 
arms 57 and the manner of attaching them 
to the shaft 55 make them cheap, durable, and 
easy to adjust, 
The base of each of said 
winged arms is circular and flat, rising cone 
shaped to the winged free end. A screw 
threaded aperture is formed in this base 
axially with the arm. A bolt with both ends 
threaded is screwed tightly into said aper 
ture, and the free end of said bolt is passed 
through an aperture in the shaft 55 and the 
wing set at its proper angle to the shaft 55. 
Then another winged arm is screwed upon 
the protruding end of said bolt until firmly 
set to the shaft. The Wings should be set at 
the same angle upon opposite sides of the 
shaft 55, and this is accomplished by insert 
ing washers 121, Fig. 7, between the base of 
the arm last adjusted and the shaft. The 
mixing-barrel 4 is slightly contracted from 
the hopper 79 toward the mold-wheel 12. 
The mouthpiece 8 is of the same size and 
shape as the end of the barrel to which it is 
attached at that side of said mouthpiece which 
comes next to said barrel, but is contracted 
at the sides toward the mold-wheel 12 to a 
width equal to the length of the molds 15, Fig. 
6, so that the shape of the opening toward 
said mold-wheel is that of a rectangle that is 
two or more times as long as wide. From 
the upper and lower sides of the mouthpiece 
8 next to the mold-wheel 12 extend lips 8686. 
The outer sides of said lips form a continuation 
of theside of said mouthpiece which is toward 
the wheel12. The lowerlip 86 covers the molds 
15 until they are fully within the mouthpiece, 
and the upper lip S6 covers said molds until 
they are fully without the mouthpiece. 
Said 
lips prevent the clay from being forced out of 
the machine. A hardened steel plate 89, Figs. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
CO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
5 
d 
 
l 
488,106 
O 
25 
35 
45. 
55 
- - 
- 
ened. 
1 and 4, is passed through a slot at the base of 
the use of the above-described repressing de 
vice, if the follower-plates 16 are true with 
the upper lip 86 in a direction that forms an 
the plunger 88 the repressed clay will have 
acute angle with the periphery of the wheel 12. 
The lower edge of said plate is beveled to fit 
true and parallel sides. The carrier 41 con 
the periphery of said wheel and extends a 
sists of two rollers 42 42, Fig. 12, mounted in 
short distance into the opening of the mouth 
a suitable frame. One end of said frame is 
piece 8, and acts as a cut-off to separate the 
held close to the mold-wheel 12. Around the 
clay in the mold from the clay in the barrel 4. 
rollers 42.42 is stretched a heavy endless belt 
Said plate may be easily replaced when worn 
104. Over this is placed a light fiexible belt 
out, and may be easily removed to be sharp 
105. A deflector 106, with its corners nearly 
square, is placed close to the wheel 12, above 
The repress-plunger 26 consists of a frame 
the belt 104, and secured at its ends in the 
or box 87, surrounding a plunger 88 upon the 
frame of the carrier. The belt 105 passes 
loosely over the belt 104, except on the line 
sides and ends. 90.90 are metal strips ex 
tending laterally above the plunger 88 and se 
of its upper surface, where it passes over the 
91.91 are stay-bails 
deflector 106. By this device almost a right 
cured to the frame 87. 
angled corner can be used. The brick are de 
secured to the frame 87 and extending over 
posited directly from the mold-wheel 12 and 
the strips 90. 92 92 are rods extending ver 
tically upward from the plunger 88, through 
set on their edges on a flat smooth movable 
apertures, and through the strips 90 90 and 
belt, delivering the bricks resting on their 
edges ready for hacking. The ratchet-wheel 
93 is a coil pressure-Spring 
stay-bails 91.91. 
43 has teeth of unequal length, alternating one 
surrounding the rods 92.92 and resting at their 
long and one short tooth. (See Fig. 28.) As 
lower ends upon the strips 9090. 
94 94 are 
nuts upon the rods 92, by which the pressure 
each brick is delivered the belts 104 05 are 
moved along a distance proportional to the 
of the springs 93 93 upon the strips 9090 may 
be adjusted. The suspending arms or pit 
length of the tooth of the ratchet-wheel 43, 
men 27 27 are pivoted directly to the plunger 
with which the ratchet 54 is at that time en 
gaged. By constructing said ratchet-wheel 
88. Each of said suspending arms is adapted 
to be adjusted in the direction of its length 
with alternate long and short teeth the bricks 
are run out in pairs, two close together and 
in the manner illustrated in Fig. 11, in which 
then a longer distance intervening. 
95 is a rod adapted to be secured to the cranks 
. 2828 by straps in the usual Way. 9696 are 
The mold-wheel 12 is constructed as follows: 
slip-arms secured upon opposite sides of the 
Two disks 107 107 of the same form are con 
rod 95, by slip-bolts 97 97, passing through 
structed with a solid rim 108 and a solid center 
slots 98.98 in said rod. The slip-arms 96 96. 
109, said rim and center being connected by 
may be adjusted to different positions along 
spokes 110. The solid center 109 consists of 
the rod 95 by loosening the nuts. 99.99 upon 
the hub 111 and an annular shoulder 20, con 
the bolts 97. The lower ends of the Suspend 
centric with said hub, united by a solid web 
ing arms or pitmen 27 27 are secured by piv 
L12. The outside face of the Web 112 is set 
oting the lower ends of the slip-arms 9696 to 
back a short distance from the face of the 
the plunger. 88. A greater or less pressure 
disk. Radially through the annular shoulder 
may be brought upon the clay in one of the 
20 are bored apertures through which the rods 
molds 15 by adjusting the length of the arms 
19 pass. Around the inside face of the disk 
107, near its periphery and between adjacent 
27 27. A pair of guide-arms. 100 100 are se 
spokes 110, are recesses 113, placed across the 
cured at each end of the plunger 88 and pass 
rim 108 to a depth of about one-eight of an 
downward one of said guide-arms upon each 
inch in regular and equal Spaces and of just 
side of the shaft 14 of the mold-wheel 12 and 
close against said shaft. The upper end of 
the width of the desired mold. The sides of 
said guide-arms slide in Way's 101. 101, Fig. 
said recesses are parallel With each other and 
extend in such a direction that a line midway 
2, secured to the frame 3. 102 102 and 103 
103, Fig. 5, are lugs extending inward from 
between them and parallel to them would pass 
through the center of the disk 107. In the 
the guide-arms 100. The lugs 102 102 are 
recesses 113 are placed steel plates 114, which 
continually in contact with the rim of the 
are about three-eighths of an inch thick, about 
wheel 12 and serve to steady the plunger 88 
as wide as said recesses, and a quarter of an 
in a lateral direction with reference to the ma 
inch longer than said recesses. Said plates 
chine. The lugs 103 103 rise above the pe 
are gained out for an eigth of an inch at each 
riphery of the wheel 12 when the plunger 88 
end and on both sides to form the tongues 115 
is at the upper portion of its stroke, and at the 
115, Fig. 15. Said tongues rest upon the 
lower portion of the stroke of said plunger 
raised portion 116 of the disk 107. When the 
said lugs pass snugly between a pair of ad 
plates l14 are placed in position, the upper 
jacent pull-bolts 17 and serve to center said 
shoulders next to the tongues of adjacentends 
plunger accurately over the mold 15 in a lon 
of adjacent plates form tapered recesses 
gitudinal direction with reference to the ma 
whose center lines pass through the center of 
chine. (See Fig. 5^.) The frame 87 sur 
the disks 107. 117 are wedge-shaped steel 
rounds a mold 15 and prevents the clay from 
posts having a cross-section that is the same 
being forced out of said mold when acted upon 
by the plunger 88. It will be seen that by size and shape as said last-mentioned recesses 
75 
go 
95 
Ioo 
To5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
488,106 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
and of about the length of the required molds. 
In the ends of said posts are formed screw 
threaded apertures 118, To form the mold 
wheel 12, two disks 107.107 are united with 
their centers in line by steel posts 117, the 
ends of which posts rest upon the tongues 115 
and fit Snugly against the upper shoulders of 
the plates 114. Said posts are secured in place 
and the disks are secured to said posts by the 
pull-bolts 17, the screw-threaded shanks of 
Which pass through apertures in the rims of 
said disks and are tightly screwed into aper 
tures 118 in the ends of said posts. (See Fig. 
13.) Opposite plates 114 form the ends and 
adjacent posts form the sides of the molds 115. 
The follower-plates 16 are placed in the molds 
15, with their legs 18 extending toward the cen 
ter of the wheel 12 and the rods 19 passing 
through the radial apertures in the annular 
shoulder 20. The push-pins 21 are secured in 
place upon the legs 18 in such a position that 
they shall strike against the inner edge of the 
rim 108 when the outer surfaces of the follower 
plates 16 are a little beyond the periphery of 
the mold-wheel 12. 119, Fig. 4, is a set-screw 
which is tapped axially into the free ends of 
the rod 19. The inward travel of the follow 
er-plates 16 is limited by the set-screws l19 
striking against the hub 111. The inward 
travel of said follower-plates can be adjusted 
by screwing the set-screws 119 in or out of the 
rods 19. The dished form of the disks 107 be 
tween the hub 111 and the shoulder 20 per 
mits access to the set-screws 119 from the out 
side, and the web 112 and shoulder 20 protect 
said rods from any clay that may be forced 
between the follower-plates 16 and molds 15. 
It will be seen that the steel pull-bolts 17 set 
the posts 117 firmly on the plates 114 in such 
a manner that neither plates nor posts require 
any other fastening, while all may be removed 
quickly and either posts or plates reversed 
for new wear. To renew the wearing-surfaces 
easily is important, as the action of the clay. 
and sand is very severe on all surfaces with 
which it comes in contact. The wheel 12 re 
volving always one way when working, one 
side of each post and the outside of each plate 
114 is worn much the fastest. Consequently 
the reversing adds much to the durability of 
the parts. The steel pull-bolts 17 not only hold 
the disks 107 together and secure posts and 
plates in place, but also serve as lugs to move 
the wheel 12 by the action of the pull-hooks 
80 80, and also serve as guides to the repress 
plunger 26 and 88. As the posts 117 are set 
at equal distances apart, and as the pull-bolts 
17 are at equal distances apart and are all 
alike and motion is given to the mold-wheel 
only through said bolts, it may be readily seen 
that the whole wheel may be reversed in its 
bearings or on its axle and the unworn edges 
of the molds be made to move the other way 
and take first action with the steel cut-off 89. 
Either method of reversing the wearing parts 
saves much time and expense. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
- 
s 
Scribed. 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a brick-machine, the combination of 
the mold-wheel 12, pull-bolts 17 on said mold 
wheel, followers 16, adapted to reciprocate in 
said mold-wheel, push-pins 21 upon said fol 
lowers, a sliding cross-head 44, pull-hooks 80, 
secured to said cross-head and adapted to en 
gage with said pull-bolts, push-arms 49, se 
cured to said cross-head and adapted to en 
gage the push-pins 21, and mechanism for re 
ciprocating said cross-head, substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. In a brick-machine, the combination of 
a mold-wheel 12, a re-pressing plunger 26, 
means for reciprocating said plunger, guide 
arms 100, secured to said plunger, and lugs 
102, extending from said guide-arms and bear 
ing against opposite faces of said mold-wheel, 
substantially as and for the purpose de 
3. In a brick-machine, the mold-wheel 12, 
pull-bolts 17, extending from the faces of said 
mold-wheel, a re-pressing plunger, guide-arms 
100, secured to said plunger, lugs 103, extend 
ing from said guide-arms and adapted to fit 
closely against the sides of pull-bolts 17 when 
said plunger is near said wheel and to per 
mit the passage of said pull-bolts when said 
plunger is farther away from said wheel, sub 
stantially as shown, and for the purpose de 
Scribed. 
4. In a brick-machine, the combination of 
a re-pressing plunger 26, a shaft 29, adapted to 
reciprocate said plunger, a bell-crank lever 
33, an oiler 30, adapted to be reciprocated in 
ways by the oscillation of said bell-crank le 
ver, an arm 71 upon the shaft 29, adapted to 
strike against an arm of and to oscillate said 
bell-crank lever, and means for retracting 
said bell-crank lever, substantially as shown 
and described. 
5. A double belt-carrier for brick-machines, 
consisting of rollers 42 42, mounted in a suit 
able frame, a belt 104, passing around said 
rollers, a deflector 106, mounted in the frame 
of said carrier above the belt 104 and above 
one of said rollers, and a belt l05, passing 
over the belt 104 and over said deflector, Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
6. In a brick-machine, the combination, 
with a carrier consisting of one or more belts 
passing over rollers 42, of a ratchet-wheel 43, 
mounted on the shaft of one of said rollers, 
said ratchet-wheel being provided with teeth 
of unequal length, alternately one short and 
one long tooth, and a pawl engaging with the 
teeth of said ratchet-wheel, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
7. In a brick-machine, a mouthpiece 8 for 
the mixing-barrel 4, a slot formed in said 
mouthpiece in a plane that forms an angle 
with the periphery of said mold-wheel, said 
slot extending into the mouth of said mixing 
barrel, and a cut-off plate 89 in said slot, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
8. In a brick-machine, a mold-wheel 12, con 
75 
95 
OO 
EO 
II5 
I 25 
 
488,106 
30 
35 
10. A carrier for brick-machines, consisting 
of an endless belt passing over two rolls and 
driven by one of said rolls, an outer endless 
belt, and a support for the inner end of said 
outer belt, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
11. In a brick-machine, the combination of 
a mold-wheel 12, a re-pressing plunger 26, said 
re-pressing plunger consisting of a plunger 88, 
a frame 87, surrounding the plunger 88 at the 
sides and end of plunger 88, the lower edge of 
said frame extending normally below the lower 
surface of the plunger 88, strips 90 90 and 
stay-bails 9191 upon said frame, rods 92 92, 
extending from plunger 88 through the strips 
90 90 and stay-bails 91. 91, nuts 94.94 upon 
said rods, coil-springs 93.93, pressing against 
said nuts and said strips, and means for recip 
rocating the plunger 26, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
45 
SYLVESTER P. BABCOCK. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR E. BABCOCK, 
H. W. KING, . 
TO 
sisting of disks 107107, provided with recesses 
113 upon the inner sides of said disks near 
their peripheries, plates 114, provided with 
shoulders 115 at their ends, said plates being 
adapted to fit into said recesses with said 
shoulders extending beyond said recesses, 
Wedge-shaped posts 117, adapted to fit against 
the end edges of said plates, the ends of said 
posts resting upon said shoulders, and means 
for securing the ends of said posts to said 
disks, substantially as shown and described. 
9. In a brick-machine, a mold-wheel 12, con 
sisting of disks 107 107, provided with recesses 
113 upon the inner sides of said disks near 
their peripheries, plates 114, provided with 
shoulders 115 at their ends, said plates being 
adapted to fit into said recesses with said 
shoulders extending beyond said recesses, 
Wedge-shaped posts 117, adapted to fit snugly 
against the end edges of said plates, the ends 
of Said posts resting upon said shoulders, and 
pull-bolts 17, provided with screw-threaded 
Shanks, said shanks passing through apertures 
in said disks and screwing into apertures 118 
in the ends of said posts to bind said posts 
and said disks together, substantially as shown 
and described. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488207.txt	P. KUNTZE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING AMMONIA, 
(No Model.) 
No. 488,207. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1892. 
? TEfffffffffffffffffffffffffff 
||||||||||| 
 
Washing to 
ver 
& acid scrubber. 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
P. KUNTZE. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING AMMONIA. 
No. 488,207. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1892. 
. 
1. 
P. E. 
all P 22:32, 
%22%22zz22z2272. 
Y-N-Z -- - ------4--- - - - - - - - - -1 
it f--...--AS4A---- 
M 
A ty 26, 
 
ZXZ. A 
2. 
2 
2 % 
s 
% 2 2 % 2 2 3 
2 
2. % 
% 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N - - 
--- 
I 
it 
IERHEI 
IHI. 
EEEI 
: 
Sew ley" 
W 
t 
 
 
22222222222 
(No Model.) 
P. KUNTZE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING AMMONIA. 
No. 488,207. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1892. 
A 7A, 7 
 
4 in F-PSF2 
ZT 
7T 
: 
1 
&M 
Ala-Fer-R FSFZS 
P N TY 
(T 
T 
21 2 / 
Y2Y lysy 
V N 
 
2o 
 
WWESSES 
%a--- / 76------- 
C72.3a 
/WWEWTOR 
i? V6.1% 
By 4a ATIowey 47%.e. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 488,207, 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING AMMONIA. 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ&zzzzzzz!<[Zzzz,ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ, 
? 
A 74,2- 
 
A. 
W/77WASSAS 
P. KUNTZE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1892, 
22 
w 
$ 
}} 
4. A7/O/PW, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL KUNTZE, OF ASCHERSLEBEN, GERMANY. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR VI AK NG AVM ON A. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,207, dated December 20, 1892. 
Application filed December 3, 1891, Serial No. 413,939, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PAUL.KUNTZE, a subject 
of the King of Prussia and German Emperor, 
residing at Aschersleben, in the Kingdom of 
Prussia and German Empire, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in the 
Process of Manufacture of Ammonia and 
Tar from Nitrogenous Organic Substances 
and in Apparatus Relating Thereto; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
The present invention relates to the manu 
facture of ammonia and tar from nitrogenous 
Organic Substances such as peat. 
I have ascertained by means of many ex 
periments that the nitrogen in organic sub 
stances and principally that contained in 
peat on charring is for the greatest part left 
behind in the coke. This is the case all the 
more, if the temperature of charring is kept 
as low as possible and if after driving off the 
tar, the raising of the temperature is avoided. 
The same effect is attained by preventing the 
aqueous vapors which are given off on char 
ring the peat from acting on the hot organic 
substance in the furnace. The other portion 
of the original nitrogen escapes on charring 
in the shape of nitrites, organic bases of the 
pyrrol and pyridine-group, amines &c. The 
quantity of the organic nitrogen compounds 
formed increases with the progress of the dry 
distillation, and at the end of the latter, when 
after driving off the tar the temperature rises, 
nitrogen in the shape of cyanide of ammo 
nium appears in considerable quantities. 
This compound is the product of the action 
of ammonia on carbon or carbonic oxide re 
spectively, which is formed in this stage of 
the charring process in increasing quantities 
according to the following equation: 
o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
At the same time ammonia escapes along with 
the tarry vapors during the progress of the 
dry distillation, although only in a relatively 
small quantity. The greater portion of the 
nitrogen is on charring left behind in the 
coke as fixed nitrogen, as previously men 
tioned. 
By the present invention and the process de 
So 
 
scribed therein it becomes possible to convert 
into ammonia not only that portion of the to 
tal nitrogen which is left behind in the coke 
as fixed mitrogen but also that other portion 
which escapes during the charring process 
in the form of organic nitrogen compounds. 
The ash of the coke forms a very suitable sub 
stance for manure purposes, owing to its high 
percentage of lime and phosphoric acid and 
is incomparably more valuable than the ash 
of coal or brown-coal. 
By keeping within the conditions previous 
ly mentioned the inventor succeeded in fixing 
the greater portion of the nitrogen of the peat 
in the coke during the charring process, 
whereby a separation of the nitrogen which 
is not recoverable as ammonia by dry distil 
lation simply, from the tarry vapors is like 
wise brought about. The fixed nitrogen 
which remains after the charring in the coke 
can be converted into ammonia by gasifying 
the coke by means of air and steam, and this 
is the case all the more easy the lower the 
temperature of the peat was kept, during the 
charring process. The amount of steam re 
quired which is mixed with the air and 
serves along with the air for gasifying the 
coke must be nearly double the weight of the 
colke, so that the gasification of the coke 
takes place at the lowest temperature possi 
ble, which is yet sufficient to turn the coke 
into gas. The coke on burning yielding only 
permanent gases which are free from tar, the 
present process allows of the hot producer 
gases being deprived of their ammonia by 
acids, sulphuric acid for instance, a fact 
which technically is of the greatest impor 
tance, inasmuch as extensive and costly cool 
ing towers for the large quantity of gases are 
not required. All that is necessary is a sim 
ple contrivance for mixing the hot gases with 
a fine spray of Water for the purpose of cool 
ing them down to 100 centigrade and freeing 
them from flue-dust, in order to deprive the 
gases of their ammonia in the acid scrubber, 
while on the other hand pure solutions of am 
monium sulphate are recovered which be 
come saturated by allowing them to run down 
the tower repeatedly. Whereas, as previously 
mentioned, the fixed nitrogen is only con 
verted into ammonia in the presence of air 
and steam the conversion of the nitrogen 
5 
75 
IOO 
488,207 
O 
which escapes during the charring in the shape 
of organic compounds into ammonia, takes 
place in the absence of air by an igniting 
process in the presence of steam and large 
surfaces of hot, porous, fire-proof substances, 
which support the pyrogene reaction all the 
more efficiently the more calcareous they are. 
Both kinds of recovering the ammonia agree 
in this that hydrogen in statu nascendi and 
steam in excess must always be present. The 
former combines with the nitrogen, which has 
become disengaged from the organic com 
pounds, the latter serves for the protection 
of the ammonia formed. As a source of hy 
drogen during the process of gasifying the 
coke, on the one hand the hydrogen which is 
contained in the coke is available, while on 
the other hand hydrogen is formed by the 
action of steam on colke or carbonic oxide re 
spectively according to the following equa 
tions: 
C-2HO = CO--El 
C-I-HO = CO--II 
CO-HO = CO.--H 
3O 
35 
45 
Carbonic acid not being reduced by hydro 
gen, a considerable excess of hydrogen is in 
sured, so that the generator gas which results 
in the process of gasification contains as 
much as 20-30 per cent, in volume, of hydro 
gen, and as the formation of hydrogen is con 
nected with a considerable absorption of heat 
it becomes possible to keep the generator at a 
relatively low temperature, whereby not only 
the dissociation of ammonia is prevented, but 
also the excess of heat which is developed on 
gasifying the coke can be profitably applied 
for keeping up the process of charring. These 
are now the theoretical principles on which 
the new process depends. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tical section through the carbonizer. Fig. 2 
and 2' are a sectional side view of the entire 
apparatus, shown in two parts to display it on 
a single sheet. Fig. 3 is a detail sectional 
side view of some of the overlapping rings of 
the carbonizer. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the 
same. Fig. 5 is a detail sectional side view of 
the retort C; and Fig. 6 is a cross-section 
through the same. 
It now becomes the inventor to state the 
method of carrying out the process in prac 
tice. The first step is the air-drying of the 
substance of moors or the turf respectively. 
If unfavorable local circumstances prevent 
the draining of the peat-bogs, peat-presses 
are employed for removing the excess of 
moisture. The peat-mass is then freed from 
the vegetable matter lying above and worked 
by means of plows and harrows into a homo 
geneous mass, which under the influence of 
sun and Wind loses its adhering moisture 
within two-three hours up to nearly thirty 
forty per cent. As soon as the upper layer 
is dry, it is scraped together by means of a 
machine and brought from the moor on to 
the platform of the charring furnace. The 
 
layer of peat which lies below that layer which 
has just been removed, is subjected to the 
same treatment and the winning of the raw 
material thus proceeds horizontally in a regul 
lar manner. The drying of the peat to pow 
der in the air and sun allows of great quanti 
ties of peat being quickly and cheaply Worked 
and consequently of an extensive production. 
The powdery shape of the peaty substance 
promotes the charring and the gasifying pro 
cess inasmuch, as the small particles of the 
coke offer sufficient points of attack to the air 
and favor the combination of nitrogen and 
hydrogen in statu nascendi. If the nitrogen 
ous raw material has the property to bake in 
the heat, it is preferable to mix it with coal 
dust or slack. The air-dry peatis then emptied 
for its treatment proper into an apparatus of 
which Fig. 1 in the accompanying drawings 
represents the furnace serving for the dry dis 
tillation and the gasification, whereas Fig. 2 . 
shows an example of a total plant, as it can be 
used in the practical carrying out of the pro 
cess. The air-dry peat is placed in the char 
ring portion A of the furnace. In this portion 
of the furnace the peat is subjected to drying 
at a high temperature. The portion A of the 
furnace which serves for charring is similar 
in construction to the apparatus used in the 
distillation of brown-coal. The shell of the 
furnace is surrounded by ?lues lic k for the 
admission of the heating gases, while in the 
inside of the furnace a central space or re 
ceptacle W is formed by means of a series of 
superposed conical or bell-shaped rings g one 
put on the top of the other. The object of 
the space V thus created is to allow of the 
escape of the vapors formed, while the ma 
terial to be dried cannot find an entrance 
into the inside of this empty space W. In the 
upper portion of the space a horizontal par 
tition a, is fixed, which, as it were, separates 
the drying zone from the charring Zone lying 
below. The rings g are supported by a cen 
The rings 
tral rod 20 secured in the furnace. 
g are kept at the desired distance apart by 
the lugs 21, and certain of the rings have 
arms 22 connected to the lugs 21, and to bosses 
23 which are secured to the said rod 20 at 
different parts of its length so that the weight 
of all the rings does not come upon the lowest 
rings. The aqueous vapors developed in the 
drying Zone pass through openings above the 
partition a, into the empty space and are then 
aspirated through a pipe S in order to be em 
ployed in another stage of the same process. 
The vapors of the charring zone on the other 
hand, are aspirated through a pipe B at the 
bottom of the charring furnace. The object 
of the partition a inside the empty space is 
therefore the separation of the aqueous vapors 
of the peat from the mixture of tarry and 
nitrogenous vapors which are given off dur 
ing the process of charring. The dried peat 
after passing the drying Zone proceeds ver 
tically downward into the charring zone, 
where it is subjected to a dry distillation and 
75 
9o 
95 
dO 
IC 5 
IIC 
II5 
I 25 
488,20? 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
then passing down the conical neck W of the 
furnace, reaches the generator G which lies 
below the charring furnace. 
As seen from the total plant represented in 
Fig. 2, the tarry and nitrogenous vapors from 
the charring furnace, which are aspirated 
through a pipe B at the bottom of the char 
ring furnace, first pass into a retort C, which 
is filled with calcareous porous tar-coke and 
which is heated to a light red state by means 
of heating gases, which are produced in the 
process itself. The vapors which reach this 
hot retort C, are decomposed by means of the 
heat and the contact with the hightly heated 
porous substances. The products of decom 
position obtained mainly consist of tar, am 
monia and permanent combustible gases. 
These pass first through a hydraulic main D, 
where the tar is deposited, then through a 
Water-scrubber E for separating tarry mat 
ters which have been driven along with the 
current of gas and for removing fixed ammo 
nia compounds, then through an acid-scub 
ber E' for absorbing volatile ammonia, and 
lastly through an oil-scrubber F of approved 
construction. The resulting gases are blown 
by Way of a pipe X into the fire place of the 
retort C. The coke which passes from the 
charring Zone into the generator Gyields, and 
gasifying with air and steam, gases which are 
rich in ammonia and are carried away through 
a pipe H from the generator G. These gases, 
which are hot and serve for heating the air 
surrounding the pipes II in the chamber L, 
first pass through the pipes II and then travel 
into a base K which is partially filled with 
Water and where by means of any approved 
agitating or spraying devices the gases and 
the Water are brought into intimate contact. 
The gases thereby cool down to 100 centi 
grade. The aqueous solution is run off from 
time to time and the ammonia recovered from 
it by means of distillation with lime. The 
gases thus cooled down to 100 centigrade 
then pass through an acid-scrubber Q where 
all the ammonia is absorbed by being com 
bined with sulphuric acid. The addition of 
sulphuric acid is so regulated that the gases 
only cool down by a few degrees so that only 
a small quantity of steam condenses to wa 
ter. In order to render these gases, which 
are saturated with moisture, suitable for heat 
ing purposes, they are after being freed from 
ammonia, dried by cooling. This is done in 
this way, that they are made to pass a second 
scrubber R, which is fed with water, whereby 
the water cools down to 30 centigrade. The 
cooled gases are aspirated through a pipe O 
and blown by means of a fan Y into the fire 
place of the charring cylinder. The cooling 
water which runs off from the scrubber R is 
pumped on the top of another scrubber T, 
where as it runs down, meets a current of air 
produced by a fan Z and which rises upward 
in the opposite direction. The air is thereby 
warmed to from 70-80 centigrade and sat 
urated with moisture at this temperature. 
The water thus cooled down is again used in 
the scrubber R. The warm and moist current 
of air escaping from the scrubber T through 
the pipe M is heated by a regenerative sys 
tem to 200-300 centigrade and after be 
ing mixed with superheated steam, is finally 
blown under the step grate N of the generator. 
The aqueous vapors which escape from the 
generator through the pipe S are also dis 
charged under the step-grate N, and prefer 
ably through the same opening as the hot air 
escaping through the pipe M. The removing 
of the ashes from the generator is done by 
means of a worm U withoutinterruption and 
is regulated according as the coke is gasified. 
The angle of inclination of the step-grate N 
is so chosen that the coke from the charring 
cylinder sinks downward as uniformly as 
possible, so that the peat, which lies between 
the walls of the charring furnace and the 
space V in the inside of the furnace can also 
find its way downward with uniformity, 
whereby the process becomes a continuous 
one; the time for charring the peat and gasi 
fying the coke being so regulated that they 
conform to each other. The process as de 
scribed and the apparatus as used in con 
junction with the process is not only suitable 
for the utilization of nitrogen in peat or turf 
substances, but can also find application for 
all nitrogenous organic substances. It is spe 
cially characterized by the facts, that the va 
pors and volatile nitrogenous compounds 
which escape on drying and charring, are 
carried away and treated separately, whereas 
the residue of the charring process is gasified 
by means of heated air and steam in order 
to convert the nitrogen into ammonia, which 
ammonia is carried away and absorbed sep 
arately in order to recover the ammonia in a 
pure state. 
What I claim is 
1. The process of making ammonia, and tar, 
which consists in drying and calcining nitrog 
enous material-such as peat, to drive off 
separately the aqueous and tarry vapors, pass 
ing the tarry vapors through incandescent 
material, thereby forming tar, ammonia and 
combustible gas, the said incandescent mate 
rial being heated by the said combustible gas; 
and simultaneously treating the calcined ma 
terial with heated air and the said aqueous 
Vapor to form ammonia and heating gases, 
the said heating gases being utilized for heat 
ing the said air and calcining the said nitro 
genous material, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with the calcining fur 
nace provided with a central receptacle con 
sisting of a series of overlapping rings g hav 
ing the partition C. and pipes at its upper and 
lower ends for the collection and removal of 
vapors, of a generator provided with an in 
clined grate arranged directly beneath the 
said furnace, and an inlet for moist heated air 
below the said grate, whereby the calcined 
materialis fed from the furnace in a uniform. 
stream to the generator by gravity, and is 
45 
 
4. 
488,207 
action begins, the central supporting rod se 
cured to the said bosses, and pipes connected to 
the upper and lower ends of the said receptacle 
for the escape of the aqueous and tarry va 
pors respectively, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
15 
PAUL KUNTZE, 
Witnesses: 
WERNER VON DER LEHE, 
SIEGFRIED HAMBURGER. 
gasified upon the said grate, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. The combination, with the shell of the 
Calcining furnace, of a central receptacle 
formed of a series of overlapping rings each 
provided with lugs 21 and certain of the 
rings having also the arms 22 and bosses 23 
and the said receptacle being divided into 
two parts by the horizontal partition a, ar 
ranged at that part of the furnace where the 
drying of thematerial ceases and the calcining 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488308.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 488,308. 
 
 
 
 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
W. J. BROWN. 
STAPLE INSERTING DEVICE. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1892, 
2 is Z-2 
.. 52 
A. 
1. SN 
S SMU: 
iS 6 A/? 
256. 
2 
  
 
 
 
 
W. J. BROWN. 
STAPLE INSERTING DEVICE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
i 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 488,308, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
2nd a 7-4 is a 
i? 24, 2,125, 
2. 2. 2Z 2-24 
 
 
WILLIAM J. BROWN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
STAPEs NSERT N G DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,308, dated December 20, 1892. 
Application filed February 27, 1892, Serial No. 422,955, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM J. BROWN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Devices for Inserting and 
Clinching Metallic Staples, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to desk tool devices 
for inserting and clinching metallic staples, 
and consists of tWo Separable tools or devices 
intended to be used together, one for insert 
ing the staple in the underlying papers, and 
the other for clinching the same, but each 
capable of being used separately in the per 
formance of its specific function with some 
other appropriate tool to perform the other 
of the said functions respectively. 
In a former application now pending, Serial 
No. 417783, filed January 12, 1892, I described 
and claimed separately therein a detached 
staple driving or inserting device, and my 
present application therefore will be confined 
to the staple driver guiding and staple clinch 
ing device, and to the combination thereof 
with an appropriate detachable staple insert 
ing tool. 
The principal part of my present invention 
is the production of a staple-driver guiding 
and staple clinching device in the form of a 
small hand tool of novel construction, appro 
priate for desk use, and Which may be made 
of such form that it will be useful as a paper 
Weight and paper clip, and be capable of con 
taining more than one staple-driver guiding 
recess to adapt it to the reception of different 
sizes and styles of staple drivers and to the 
clinching of different sizes and forms of me 
tallic staples. 
In the accompanying drawings illustrating 
my present invention Figure 1 is a plan view, 
and Fig. 2 a vertical sectional view of my 
staple-driver guiding and staple clinching 
tool. Fig. 3 is a modification thereof, and 
Fig. 4 a. plan view of the stationary base of 
Fig. 3, the top guiding cover and the operat 
ing screw being removed. Fig. 5 is an eleva 
tion intended to illustrate a form of detached 
staple driver adapted to be used with the 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
clinching devices shown in the several figures. 
Figs. 6 and 7 are perspective and vertical 
cross Sectional views respectively of a further 
modification of the device shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. FigS. 8, 9 and 10 show another modifi 
cation of the same tool; Fig. S being a plan 
view of the stationary base with the top por 
tions removed, of Figs. 9 and 10; Fig. 9 being 
a Vertical cross Section on the line 1-2 of 
Fig. 8, and Fig. 10 being a vertical cross sec 
tion on the line 3-4 of Fig. 8, the latter show 
ing an outside actuating spring in dotted 
lines. 
The essential underlying principle of con 
struction in each form shown of this device, 
is the combination with a stationary base 
plate provided with one or more clinching re 
cesses thereon, of an overhanging plate hav 
ing staple-driver guiding recesses therein, 
With vertically sliding sleeve-like mechanism 
between said parts whereby the guide plate 
may be reciprocated with relation to the 
clinching base in a perpendicular plane, and 
my invention consists broadly of such a com 
bination. It also consists of the combination 
With Said elements, of mechanism to so re 
ciprocate said guide plate consisting of a ver 
tical Operating rod with a lifting cam screw 
between said base and the guide plate or with 
a downwardly acting or an upwardly acting 
Spring, as the case may be substituted there 
for. The lifting cam shown in Fig. 10 being 
the mechanical equivalent for this purpose 
of the cam-screw shown in Fig. 3. 
My invention further consists of minor de 
tails of construction and minor combinations 
hereinafter more particularly described, and 
pointed out in the appended claims. 
As shown in the Several figures of the draw 
ings, the staple driver guiding and staple 
clinching tool consists of the base plate A 
which is intended to rest solid upon the desk 
or other flat surface, and which may be made 
comparatively heavy to serve as a paper 
Weight, and be of annular form, for the pur 
pose of ornamentation, as shown in perspec 
tive in Fig. 6, but may be in the form of a cen 
tral body With arms proceeding therefrom as 
shown in Fig. 1. Said base plate is provided 
With clinching recesses C of any well known 
form. Above this base plate is provided an 
9o 
95 
OO 
3. 
488,308 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
over-hanging guide plate IB of peripheral con 
formation to cover the clinching recesses in 
the face of the base plate A, and preferably 
to cover the whole of the face of the base 
plate. Said over-hanging plate B is provided 
with slots or openings dimmediately over the 
clinching recesses in the base plate A. For 
ordinary purposes, these slots or recesses may 
be made in the form of an ordinary slot as at 
d, Figs. 1 and 6, or to adapt them to suspen 
sion ring staples they may be in the form 
shown at d', Fig. 1. Rising from the center 
of the base plate A is a vertical pillar or shaft 
T (see Fig. 2) vertically grooved on its exterior 
at a'. The over-hanging guide plate B is pro 
vided with a central hollow sleeve D adapted 
to slide vertically upon the pillar or shaft T 
of the base plate A, and said sleeve is pro 
vided with splines or feathers a moving in 
the vertical grooves a' to prevent rotation of 
the sleeve D upon the shaft T. It is obvious, 
however, that the same result may be ob 
tained by making the sliding sleeve and shaft 
square or polygonal in form. A knob K is 
screwed upon or otherwise fitted to the hol 
low shaft D. A rod R is inserted through a 
vertical recess in the shaft T and is fastened 
to the sleeve D by passing upward into the 
knob K. A spiral spring L is placed upon 
the rod R, between the lower end of the re 
cess in the shaft T and the nut in on the end 
of said rod. By this construction it will be 
observed that on lifting the guide plate B by 
means of the knob K, its hollow sleeve will 
slide in a perpendicular plane upon the up 
right shaft T, and by means of the guiding 
devices C, C, the driver guiding recesses d 
will always be kept in register with the clinch 
ing recesses C. The form of detachable sta 
ple driver adapted to be used with this form 
of clinching tool is shown in Fig. 5. Several 
other well known forms of staple-drivers may 
be used instead thereof, but I prefer the form 
shown. 
The mouth or the extreme lower end of the 
staple driver is provided with the ordinary 
staple, the plunger of the driver being first 
withdrawn, and the mouth or end of the 
driver is then inserted through the recess d 
upon the underlying papers which have been 
placed in the clinching tool. A blow upon the 
impact, head L will then drive the staple 
through the papers, when it will be clinched, 
or its legs bent inward by contact with the 
grooved sides of the clinching recess C. The 
driving tool is used by holding the outer case 
M in the hand, while the operation of driving 
the staple is performed. The lower end on 
one side of the staple case M may be grooved as 
at d to enable a suspension ring staple to be 
inserted therein and driven through the sus 
pension ring recess d' in the clinching tool. 
(See Fig. 1.) 
A modification of the clinching tool of Fig. 
2 is shown in Fig. 3, in which latter a cam 
screw is used to reciprocate the overhanging 
guide plate B. In Fig. 3 the guides, consist 
ing of the vertical grooves C. and splines or 
feathers a' of Fig. 2, are supplied by their 
equivalents, which in this construction are 
guide pins T screwed into recessses at r in 
the overhanging guide plate B, which guide 
pins pass downward through recesses p and 
through a boss n in the base plate A. In said 
Fig. 3 the rod R* combines in itself the shaft 
T and the rod R of Fig. 2; and the hollow 
sleeve D slides in a perpendicular plane and 
upon its rod R of Fig. 3 precisely as it does 
upon the shaft T of Fig. 2. 
In lieu of the pull spring in Fig.2 to retract 
the guide plate B, I provide in the machine 
shown in Fig. 3, a spiral Screw thread S, and 
supply a screw cam projection t on the inte 
rior face of the sleeve D to fit said screw 
thread. The lower end of the rod or shaft R. 
which passes through the base plate A is pre 
vented from rising out of the recess U therein 
by means of a nut m fastened thereto. In 
stead of pulling up the base plate B by means 
of the knob K and permitting it to retract by 
means of a pull spring as shown in Fig. 2, I 
give a slight turn to the knob K of Fig. 3, 
which causes the rod or shaft R* to rotate and 
the cam t to move upward in the Screw thread 
S and hence raises the guide plate B. A re 
verse movement of the rod or shaft R by 
means of the knob IK causes the plate B to 
descend upon the underlying papers placed 
upon the base plate A. If desired, the screw 
thread may be transferred from the upper 
part of the shaft R* and from the sleeve D of 
the guide plate to the lower end of the shaft 
R* and to the recess w in the base plate, so 
that the shaft R will then pass downward 
through the latter and keep the rim of the 
knob Kalways flush with the top of the sleeve 
D, the guide plate being carried by the shaft 
R which is retained by suitable means from 
passing through the sleeve D though free to 
rotate therein. In both of these cases it will 
be observed that the pull spring as well as 
the cam screw, impart the function of a pa 
per clip to the tool. 
In the modification of the tool shown in 
Figs. 6, and 7, it will be observed as seen in 
Fig. 6, that the tool is capable of being made 
ornamental as to Serve as a paper weight, as 
well as a paper clip. In Fig. 7 the equivalent 
of the hollow sleeve D is supplied by the an 
nular series of vertical recesses S and which 
are thus practically a skeleton sleeve; and 
the upright shaft T is supplied by the annu 
lar series of vertical posts Tadapted to fit 
these recesses S; said posts being the equiv 
alent of the post or shaft T, and being prac 
tically a skeleton shaft. The advantage of 
making this shaft in skeleton form and the 
sliding sleeve in skeleton form as described, 
is that the grooves and splines a, a', or the 
guide pins T may be dispensed with, as they 
are then combined in the one element. 
In the modification shown in Figs, 8, 9 and 
10, a reverse action of the spring of Fig. 2 is 
provided; that is to say, instead of lifting up 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
488,308 
45 
55 
75 
the knob K to raise the guide plate B, the re 
lation of the hollow sleeve and its shaft is re 
versed so that by pressing down the knob K, 
the said guide plate B is raised. This action 
is effected by the following means; viz: the 
spring L' has its lower end, instead of its top 
end, bearing against the base plate A, so that 
its effect is to bring the guide plate B into 
contact with the base plate A, in both cases. 
The normal relative position of the base plate 
A and guide plate B, is closed, in every form 
shown, of the device. In Fig. 9 is shown the 
spring L' within the sliding sleeve and shaft, 
and in Fig. 10 the same spring marked Lis 
placed outside of the shaft R, but the latter 
may be used in addition to the former, if de 
sired. In this form of the device, shown in 
Figs, 8, 9 and 10, the vertical guiding pins T' 
arise from the face of the base plate A, and 
pass up into recesses p on the under side of 
the guide plate B, as in the form shown in 
Fig. 7; but in lieu of the form of cam screw 
shown in Fig. 3, I provide a loose cam Wrest 
ing in a socket V in the base plate A, one 
prong of the cam being acted on by the end 
of shaft D when depressed, causing the other 
prong of the cam to move the guide plate B 
in an upward direction, the spring L' or L* 
depressing it in turn when the knob K is re 
leased by the hand. 
Guides for the proper location of the sta 
ples in the papers to be stapled are provided 
in and by means of the guide pins p', Tand 
T, respectively, which thus perform a double 
function. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent is, 
1. In a tool for clinching metallic staples by 
means of a detachable staple driver, the com 
bination with a stationary base plate provided 
with one or more clinching recesses thereon, 
- 
O 
25 
35 
3. 
of an overhanging guide plate having staple 
driver-guiding recesses therein; and vertically 
sliding sleeve-like mechanism between said 
parts whereby the guide plate may be recip 
rocated with relation to the clinching base in 
a perpendicular plane; substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. A staple driver-guiding and staple clinch 
ing device, consisting of the combination with 
a stationary base plate provided with one or 
more clinching recesses, an overhanging guide 
plate suitably recessed to register with said 
clinching recesses and receive and guide the 
open end of the staple driver; vertically slid 
ing sleeve-like mechanism between said base 
and guide plate whereby the latter may be re 
ciprocated with relation to the clinching base 
in a perpendicular plane; and means to re 
turn said guide plate to its normal position 
when a staple is to be driven, substantially as 
described. 
3. A staple driver-guiding and staple clinch 
ing device, consisting of the combination with 
a stationary base plate provided with one or 
more clinching recesses, an overhanging guide 
plate suitably recessed to register with said 
clinching recesses and receive and guide the 
open end of the staple driver; a vertically 
sliding sleeve like mechanism between said 
base and guide plate whereby the latter may 
be reciprocated with relation to the clinching 
base in a perpendicular plane; and guiding 
devices to prevent rotation of said guide plate 
during its reciprocation; substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto af 
fixed my signature this 17th day of February, 
A. D. 1892. 
WILLIAM J. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN R. NOLAN, 
H. T. EENTON, 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488408.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 488,408, 
J. WOM.HOFE 
FISHING REEL, 
Patented Dec. 20, 1892. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS WOM HOFE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FISH N GREEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,408, dated Dacember 20, 1892. 
Application filed July 20, 1892, Serial No, 440,666, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JULIUS WOM HOFE, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Fishing-Reels, of 
Which the following is a specification. 
In fishing reels as usually constructed, the 
Wearing parts can only be exposed for clean 
ing and lubrication, or repair, by the removal 
of a number of screws and the separation of 
the reel into its component parts. This op 
eration is SO troublesome, and so altogether 
beyond the mechanical skill of most of the 
users of such articles, that it is seldom at 
tempted. The reel is used as a general thing 
till it either Works so imperfectly as to be an 
inconvenience or until it breaks down alto 
gether. It is then sent to the manufacturer 
for repairs; which repairs, though they re 
store the reel to operative condition, may and 
often do not make altogether good the per 
manent injury the reel has received from the 
neglect which it has experienced. 
My invention consists of a fishing reel of 
the ordinary external appearance, but so con 
Structed that in a few seconds of time and 
Without the use of any tool whatever the spool 
may be removed from, or replaced in opera 
tive position and condition in, the frame of 
the reel. Thus all the wearing parts of the 
reel may be conveniently exposed for clean 
ing and lubrication at any moment, whereby 
not only is the useful life of the reel greatly 
prolonged but its operative condition is al 
Ways at its best. 
In the drawingsforming part of this speci 
fication. Figure 1. represents the external 
appearance of a reel to which my invention 
is applied. Fig. 2. is a sectional elevation on 
the line X-X of Fig. 1. Fig. 3. is the spool 
of the reel; Fig. 4. is an exterior side plate of 
Said reel; and Fig. 5. is the spindle upon 
which said spool revolves, together with its 
nut. 
In the drawings A, represents the frame of 
the reel of any ordinary construction. 
B, is a detachable plate (see Fig. 4.) perfo 
rated at its center to admit the spindle C, 
upon which the spool revolves. 
C, is a spindle substantially of the form 
shown in Fig. 5. having an integral milled 
5 
O 
15 
35 
45 
50 
head at one end and a screw thread at the 
other. 
ID, is a nut fitting the screw on the small 
end of the spindle C. 
The spool E of my reel is perforated through 
out the length of its axis in such a way as to 
admit the spindle C, upon which the Spool re 
volves. 
The side plate of the frame of the reel on 
the handle side is of the ordinary construc 
tion; but that forming the opposite side of 
the reel (marked F, in the drawings) is an 
nular, being so bored out that the spool of 
the reel may be withdrawn through its annu 
lar opening. The detachable plate B, covers 
and closes this annular opening, and should 
be counter-sunk in the side plate F so that 
its surface would be flush with said plate F 
when the parts of the reel are assembled, 
thereby giving to the screw end of the spin 
dile C a steady bearing. 
My invention operates as follows: Assum 
ing the reel to be ready for use, as shown in 
Fig. 1. it is thus taken apart for cleaning and 
lubrication &c.; The nut D, on the small end 
of the spindle C, is unscrewed, and the spin 
dle C, is withdrawn. By pushing the spool 
in the direction away from the handle side of 
the reel, the detachable plate B, is forced out, 
thus uncovering the annular opening in the 
side plate F, through which the spool is with 
drawn and all the wearing parts of the reel 
are exposed. 
To assemble the reel, the spool is pushed 
into place through the annular opening in the 
side plate F, the detachable plate B, is placed 
so as to cover and close said annular opening. 
The spindle C, is thrust successively through 
a central hole in the side plate on the handle 
side (A) of the reel, through the axial hole in 
the spool and through the central hole in the 
detachable plate B, and the nut D, is screwed 
on to the end of the spindle C, &c. (all as 
shown in Fig. 2) and the reel is ready for use. 
Thus it will be seen that the whole opera 
tion of taking part and reassembling the reel 
is practically reduced to removing and re 
placing the nut D, with the thumb and finger 
and that the frame of the reel need never be 
taken apart. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and desire to patent is:- 
55 
75 
90 
95 
CC 
: 
488,408 
A fishing reel frame having a side opening, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
a detachable plate located within the frame my invention I have signed my name, in pres- Io 
and covering said opening, in combination ence of two witnesses, this 15th day of July, 
With an axially perforated spool, and a remov. 1892. 
5 able headed spindle passing axially through 
JULIUS WOM IIOFE. 
said spool and detachable plate and provided 
with a screw and nut, substantially as shown 
and described. 
Witnesses: 
COLENDFERT HART, 
HENRY P. WELLS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488508.txt	(No Model.) 
A. C. SPENCER. 
TENSION DEVICE FOR SEWING MACHINEs. 
- 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 488,508. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1892, 
 
 
 
iii. HH 
 
(No Model.) 
A. C. SPENCER. 
TENSION DEWICE FOR, SEWING MACHINES. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 488,508. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1892. 
2,6 
Z. 
(2- 
 
Z. 
Z 
a2% 
----- 
----- 
evo27tesses. 
N V-224-f64-66/ 
2C-212-2-22- 
Zeeve-O-222 
62co//07teracer 
ey 6.74% r^2, 
eters co. Photo-Litho., WASH NGTON. (d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALVAH. C. SPENCER, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE GOOD 
YEAR SHOE MACHINERY COMPANY, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
TENS ON DEVICE FOR SEWN G. MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,508, dated December 20, 1892. 
Application filed July 23, 1892, Serial No. 441,006, (No model.) 
On the head A' on a studd. I have mounted 55 
justable as to its effective strength by a nut 
b held in place by a check nut b. I shall 
preferably place felt or equivalent friction 
washers, as 2, at each side the tension wheel. 
a locking device shown as a lever d' having a 
finger or plated to engage the locking wheel 
c, the finger or plate as shown being shaped 
to enter the notches in the said wheel c as 
shown by full lines Fig.1 and restrain it from 6o 
rotation so long as the main shaft is being 
turned in its forward direction indicated by 
the arrow near the wheel A in Fig. 1, the ro 
tation of the tension wheel being then re 
strained frictionally by a force due to the 65 
spring and its adjustment. The short arm of 
the lever d' has a lug. 3, and a pivot 4; and on 
the pivot is mounted a levere shown in Figs. 
1 and 5, the latter figure showing the saidle 
ver much enlarged. The levere is forked at to 
its lower end to leave two lugs 5, 6, which co 
operate with the lug 3 and prevent too great 
movement of said lever. The upper end of 
the lever e is also shown as forked to receive 
a pin 7 constituting a center of motion or full- 75 
crum of a brake blocke' preferably having a 
concaved face covered with leather as e' or 
with some other usual friction surface. The 
lever d has a lug 8through which is extended 
or to which is jointed a rod h connected 8o 
loosely but in an adjustable manner with an 
elbow lever h' pivoted at h in ears 10, of the 
stand b. 
The lower end of the elbow lever h. 
is joined by link h with an ear of the jawa', 
the construction being such that the raising 85 
of lever d' will open the clamping jaws and 
leave the dry thread free to rend through them. 
When the levere occupies its full line posi 
tion Fig. 1 which is its position when the cam 
wheel A is being rotated in its forward direc- 9o 
tion the pin 7 is out of center with relation to 
the center of the shaft A and the pivot 4 of 
the levere, and in this condition the finger or 
plated enters a notch in and holds wheel c, 
and the rotation of the tension wheel is re- 95 
strained to thus give tension to the Waxed 
thread, and the clamping jaws are kept closed 
on the dry thread. 
When the stitching of a shoe has been com 
pleted, the machine is stopped with the usual Ioo 
25 view of the lever e. 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ALVAH. C. SPENCER, of 
Boston, county of Suffolk, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvement in Sew 
5 ing-Machines, of which the following descrip 
tion, in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, is a specification, likeletters and fig 
ures on the drawings representing like parts. 
This improvement in sewing machines re 
Io lates more especially to that class of machine 
using waxed thread and employed for stitch 
ing leather, the particular part of the machine 
improved by me being that for controlling the 
delivery of the thread to the needle. 
Figure 1, in side elevation represents a suf 
ficient portion of a sewing machine with my 
improvements added to enable my invention 
to be understood. Fig. 2, is a detail looking 
at the machine shown in Fig. 1 from the left 
20 chiefly to show the devices employed to open 
the clamping jaws. Fig. 3, is a view of the 
clamping jaws looking down below the line ac, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 4, is a much enlarged section in 
the line ac, Fig. 1, and Fig. 5, an enlarged 
The column A, the head frame A' thereon; 
the main cam shaft A and the cam A', are 
and may be all as common in United States 
Patent No. 412,704, dated October 8, 1889. 
3o The column has an attached bracket B which 
Supports a wax pot B of usual construction 
heated in usual manner by or through the 
pipes B, B. The wax pot has erected upon 
it a post B, on which are mounted the clamp 
35 ing jaWS composed of two members a, a', one 
being pivoted on the other at a, a spring a 
acting normally to keep the jaws closed on 
the thread t, in its dry state and on its way 
into the Wax pot from some suitable spool, 
40 cop, or bobbin. The dry thread is led into 
the Wax pot, under a roll therein, not shown, 
and thence out through a scraper and the hol 
low screw a' all as usual. The waxed thread 
goes from the screw a directly to and about 
45 a rolling tension wheel b, mounted on a stud 
b' supported in the stand b. The studb' has 
mounted on it loosely a locking-wheelc shown 
as toothed at its periphery. Surrounding a 
squared part of the stud b'is a friction plate 
5o bacted upon by a spiral spring b made ad 
- 
I5 
 
488,508 
needle out of the shoe and at this time it is on said brake block and, move the said levers 
in a direction to release the locking Wheel, 
desired to release the thread from tension so 
substantially as described. 
that as the shoe is removed the thread con 
2. In a wax thread sewing machine, a ten 
nected to it at the last stitch may be pulled 
sion wheel, a locking wheel against which it 
freely from the machine. To effect this the 
is held frictionally, and the levers d' and e, 
operator just after the machine has been 
combined with the wheel A adapted only in 
stopped will reverse the shaft A* and wheel 
its reverse rotation to move the said levers in 
A for a slight distance, he having his hand 
a direction to release the locking wheel, clamp 
on the usual hand-wheel, thus turning the 
ing jaws for the thread on its Way to the Wax 
wheel A in a direction opposite the arrow 12, 
pot, and connections between said jaws and 
such movement of the wheel A acting on the 
the said lever d' whereby the tension wheel 
brake blocke' and moving it to the left view 
and clamping jaws are made to release the 
ing Fig. 1 into its dotted line position, and 
thread simultaneously, substantially as de 
putting the pivot 7 in line with the center of 
shaft A, and pivot 4, thus turning the lever 
Scribed. 
3. The tension wheel, the locking wheel 
d' into its dotted line position which results 
notched at its periphery, the lever d having 
in removing the finger or plate d' from the 
the plated and the lever epivoted on the le 
wheel c and in opening, as stated, the clamp 
ing jaws. 
ver d, and the wheel A, combined with a 
brake mounted upon the said lever e and 
I do not broadly claim releasing the tension 
adapted to be acted upon to move the lever d' 
by reversing the shaft A, nor do I broadly 
and effect the release of the locking wheel 
claim releasing both the tension wheel and 
jaws simultaneously, but I have produced a 
only upon the reverse rotation of the said 
wheel A, substantially as described. 
novel and simple mechanism for effecting the 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
release of the thread at the proper time. 
name to this specification in the presence of 
Having described my invention what I claim 
two subscribing witnesses. 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent is:- 
1. In a wax thread sewing machine, a ten 
sion wheel, a locking wheel against which it 
is held frictionally, and the levers d' and e, 
combined with a brake block, and the wheel 
A adapted only in its reverse rotation to act 
GEO. W. GREGORY, 
FRANCES M. NOBLE. 
ALWAH. C. SPENCER, 
Witnesses: 
35 
O 
55 
O 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488608.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. HOTCHKISS, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONN ECTICUT, ASSIGNOR, O EF ONE 
HALF TO HIARRY C. IRES, OF SAMIE PLACE. 
LA M P - BRACKET FOR PANOS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,608, dated December 27, 1892. 
Application filed August 15, 1892, Serial No, 448,128. (No model.) 
N 
IO 
To all avho7m, it may co7ncern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLESA. FLOTCHKISS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Bridgeport, in the county of Fairfield and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Lamp-Brackets for 
Pianos; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
a lamp bracket adapted for general use but 
more especially adapted for use upon pianos 
and other musical instruments, which shall 
be simple and inexpensive to produce, may 
be readily attached or removed, will not in 
jure the instrument, will be strong enough to 
hold the heaviest lamps and which will place 
the light wholly out of the way but where it 
will shine directly upon the music and the key 
board. 
With these ends in view I have devised the 
simple and novel construction which I will 
now describe referring by numbers to the ac 
companying drawings forming part of this 
specification in which: 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a portion of 
an upright piano showing my novel bracket 
attached thereto. Fig. 2 a side elevation of 
the bracket th case of the piano being in sec 
tion, and Fig. 3 is a section on the line ac ac in 
Fig. 2 looking up. 
N 
1 denotes the front of a piano case and 2 
the cover. In practice either the top of the 
front or the cover is usually provided with 
rubber pads, not shown in the drawings, which 
prevent the cover from fitting closely down 
to the top. 
3 denotes the standard of the bracket which 
is provided at the bottom with a screw 4 to 
which is swiveled a padded head 5 which is 
adapted to bear against the front of the in 
strument but cannot possibly mar the finest 
45 finish. At the top of the standard is a boss 
6 rigidly secured thereto from which there ex 
tends inward a plate 7 having a step 8 the in 
ner face of which bears against the front of 
the piano near the top, this step being placed 
at a sufficient distance from the boss to re 
35 
55 
tain the latter clear of any ornamental ribs 
that may be, and in fact usually are, placed 
on the fronts of pianos near the top. Plate 
7 is made wide as clearly shown in Fig. 3 so 
as to give a wide, strong bearing upon the top 
of the case. The top and underside of the 
plate as well as the front of the step are cov 
ered with felt, indicated by 9, which prevents 
the possibility of marring the case. At the 
ends of the plate, on the underside, are eyes 
10 threaded to receive screws 11. The inner 
ends of these screws pass through and turn 
freely in a clamping plate 12 which is adapted 
to bear upon the inner side of the front as 
clearly shown in Fig. 2. The clamping plate 
is shown in the drawings as corrugated to in 
sure its engaging the inner side of the top 
firmly. 
13 denotes the lamp stand which turns freely 
at the outer end of an arm 14, the inner end 
of said arm being provided with a sleeve 15 
through which the standard passes, the sleeve 
turning freely on the standard. 
16 denotes a collar on the standard which 
is locked in position by a set screw 17, the 
side of the standard being shown as flattened 
as at 18 so that the point of the set screw will 
engage firmly to lock the collar rigidly in po 
sition and prevent it from turning when the 
screw is loosened. The top of the collar is 
cut away as shown so as to form shoulders 19. 
These shoulders are adapted to be engaged by 
a lug 20 on sleeve 15 to limit the oscillation 
of the arm so as to render it impossible for 
the lamp stand or the lamp to be swung into 
contact with the instrument. 
To raise orlower the lamp stand it is simply 
necessary to loosen set screw 17 and move the 
collar and with it the sleeve and lamp stand 
up or down on the standard. To remove the 
bracket it is simply necessary to raise the 
cover and loosen screws 11 when the entire 
bracket may be removed. Im adjusting the 
bracket, screw 4 is turned in or out as may be 
required to place the standard in a vertical 
position, and the bracket is locked in place 
by turning screws 11 and forcing the clamp 
ing plate against the inner side of the front. 
In practice the wide bearing of plate 7 upon 
the top of the front renders the bracket just Ioo 
95 
- - 25 
 
488,608 
and adjustable vertically along said standard, 
substantially as described. 
2. A bracket, comprising a single plate and 
a single standard arranged at right angles to 
each other, the said standard being fixed cen 
trally of the plate to depend therefrom and the 
plate havinga step 8, and an extended portion 
with eyes10, andsetscrews 11, at the endsthere 
of, the screw 4, at the lower end of the central 
standard, the collar 16 adjustable vertically 
on the standard, the arm 14, swiveled above 
the collar 16, and about the standard, the lat 
ter being free throughout its extent between 
the right angular upper plate and the lower 
screw for the vertical adjustment of the col 
lar and arm, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
35 
presence of two witnesses. 
- - - 
v 
CHARLES A. HOTCHKISS. 
- - 
- - - - - 
- 
k 
Witnesses: 
A. M. WooSTER, 
PEARL M. REYNOLDS. 
claim: 
as firm as the instrument itself. When the 
cover is shut down plate 7 lies between the 
cover and the top of the front, or if the rub 
ber pads referred to above are not used the 
cover will rest upon the top of the plate, which 
as already stated is covered with felt so that 
the cover can under no circumstances be 
marred. 
Having thus described my invention I 
1. A lamp bracket for pianos and the like 
comprising a single upper plate 7, having a 
step 8 adapted to bear along the upper outer 
edge of the piano casing said plate having an 
extended portion to reach over the said upper 
edge and provided with a set screw to bear 
on the inner side of the casing, a single rod 
depending centrally from the front part of 
the plate, the adjusting screw 4, at the lower | 
end of said single standard and the bracket 
arm swiveled to the standard intermediate of 
the top plate and the lower adjusting screw 
- 
I o 
I 5 
 
:: 
[SEAL. 
Y 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 10th day of January, A. D. 1893. 
granted December 27, 1892, upon the application of Charles A. Hotchkiss, of Bridge - . 
port, Conn., for an improvement in Lamp Brackets for Pianos, was erroneously 
written and printed Harry C. Ires, whereas said name should have been written and 
printed Harry C. Ives ; and that said Luetters Patent should be read with this correction 
therein that the same may conform to the record of the case in the Patent Office. 
| It is hereby certified that the name of the assignee in Letters Patent No. 488,608,  
CYRUS BUSSEY, 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 
Countersigned : 
N. L. FROTHINGEHAM, 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488708.txt	(No Model.) 
T. CRANEY. 
ELECTROLYTIC APPARATUS, 
No. 488,708. 
Patented Deo, 27, 1892. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
A. 
/ 
/ 
/ 
/ 
M 
/ 
/ 
(1 
 
ZEZZZ 
El ZEZZ . 
77% Az-esses 
(c. 10 t/a-6-4-(e. y4 w 
Z72.2/2Zor 
 
Z%orces Creovey 
Tenorris Peters co, PHote-Trio. WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS CRANEY, OF BAY CITY, MICHIGAN. 
ELECTROLYTIC APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,708, dated December 27, 1892. 
Application filed April 7, 1892, Serial No. 428,222, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
40 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS CRANEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bay 
City, in the county of Bay and State of Michi 
gan, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Electrolytic Apparatus, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
improvements in electrolytic apparatus for 
the decomposition of metallic salts, such as 
chloride of sodium, used in the manufacture 
of commercial sodic hydrate. In this class of 
apparatus when there is a number of electro 
lytic cells connected in series through which 
the liquid to be decomposed is passed from 
one to the other so as to be gradually decom 
posed, the resistance to the passage of the cur 
rent gradually increases as the liquid becomes 
more and more decomposed, and it is at its 
maximum height at or near the limit of de 
composition. In using for such an apparatusa, 
single dynamo generator it becomes obviously 
necessary to take the different resistances in 
the cells into consideration, in arranging a 
system of distribution of the currentin which 
each cell shall receive a proper amount of 
current necessary to produce a proportionate 
decomposition through the whole series until 
the desired limit of decomposition is obtained, 
when the liquid flows off from the last cell. 
To this end I have devised in connection with 
such electrolytic apparatus, a system of dis 
tribution, by means of which the amount of 
current passing through each cell is in pro 
portion to the requirements for producing a 
corresponding gradual decomposition in each 
cell of the series, all as more fully hereinaf 
ter described and shown in the drawings, in 
Which 
Figure 1 shows a diagram plan of an elec 
trolytic apparatus containing a plurality of 
cells connected in series for the decomposi 
tion of a solution of a metallic salt, such as 
chloride of sodium and to which my system 
of distribution is applied. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal section through the cells in which the 
liquid is circulated from the inlet in the first 
cell to the outlet from the last cell. Fig. 3 is 
a cross section of the apparatus. Fig. 4 is a 
detail of a resistance which may be used. 
A represents a hermetically closed tank 
having cover B and divided by partition 
B' into a separate anode compartment Band 
cathode compartments B, each provided with 
suitable anodes and cathodes connected by 
feeders C C in multiple with the main con 
ductors D D' of the dynamo, and electrolyti 
cally communicating with each other through 
a porous medium E. Such as sand, asbestus or 
any other suitable material on the bottom of 
the tank. The anodes may be of any suitable 
construction preferably as shown, wherein a is 
a tubular support containing a body of car 
bon into which the terminal of a circuit is con 
nected. The lower end of the tube projects 
into a cup c which is also filled with carbon 
d having a surface exposure with the liquid 
in the cell. . 
The compartments B which contain the 
cathodes Bare arranged and connected in se 
ries in any suitable manner, preferably by 
arranging the cathodes which serve also 
as partitions in such a manner as to alter 
nately conduct the solution over and under 
the partition from one cell to the other, the 
solution being supposed to be supplied by the 
valve-controlled supply pipe F and carried 
off after the electric decomposition has taken 
place through the valved outlet E, whereby 
a continuous flow from one end of the tank 
to the other is obtained in series through all 
the cells. 
The specific construction of apparatus 
herein shown is one which I have more spe 
cifically described and shown in connection 
with another pending application Serial No. 
428,221. and for which I do not make any claim 
herein. 
Myinvention consists in placing in the feed 
ers the graduated resistances G, G, G &c., 
one for each feeder, and which resistances are 
so graduated that they about equalize the re 
spective resistances formed by the cells in 
their normal condition of operation, there 
fore, the greatest resistance is provided for 
the first cell of the series, gradually lesser re 
sistances for the succeeding cells, and a mini 
mum resistance for the last cell. 
The pipe I, shown in Fig. 3, is connected 
into the tank by branch J, and serves as an 
escape for the chlorine gas generated in the 
anode chamber. 
45 
 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
ICC 
488,708 
ratus comprising a plurality of electrolytic 
cells connected to permit the solution to pass 
successively from one to the other for the frac 
tional decomposition of the solution passing 
from one into the other, of an electric genera 
tor, anodes and cathodes connected in multi 
ple arc in the circuit of said generator and a 
graduated resistance in the circuit of each 
electrolytic cell, substantially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 25 
THOMAS CRANEY. 
Witnesses: 
M. B. O'DoGHERTY, 
N. L. LINDOP. 
I do not confine myself to any specific con 
struction of resistances, but may avail myself 
of any of the constructions in present use and 
which may have movable contacts for adjust 
ing each resistance. A simple resistance for 
the purpose is shown in Fig. 4 and is com 
posed merely of a number of carbon plates. 
H clamped together. In such resistance I 
can easily proportion the number of carbon 
plates required and by the variation of the 
clamping force I get an adjustment within 
suitable limits. Of course the arrangement 
and location of the resistance may be varied. 
What I claim as my invention is: 
The combination with an electrolytic appa 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488808.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. & C. E. HART, 
DRIVE CHAIN, 
No. 488,808, 
Patented Dec. 27, 1892. 
A 
 
 
9, 1. 
/ 
II 
 
 
7 H. 
y 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. HARTAND CHARLESE. HART, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT, 
ASSIGNORS TO THE STANLEY WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
DRIVECHAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,808, dated December 27, 1892. 
Application filed August 8, 1892, 
Serial No. 442,392, (No model.) 
5 
O 
I5 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM H. HART 
and CHARLESE. HART, citizens of the United 
States, residing at New Britain, in the county 
of Hartford and State of Connecticut, have 
invented a certain new Improvement in 
Drive-Chains, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
drive chains as formed of sheet metal, and 
the principle object of our improvement is 
economy in stock and general simplicity and 
economy in construction by which we produce 
a superior article. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a single link of our drive 
chain. Fig. 2 is an edge view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view of the blank from which 
We form our link together with the contour 
of part of another blank, illustrating the man 
ner of cutting the same without waste of 
stock. Fig. 4 is a transverse section of the 
pintle portion of our link on the line acac of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a sectional view of the same 
25 on the line y y of Fig. 1, and Fig. 6 is a like 
view with a modified form of pintle. 
The general form of our link is old and the 
chain is of the class where the links are de 
signed to be placed together by slipping the 
pintle portion into the hook or knuckle por 
tion, when two links are brought into a cer 
tain position with reference to each other, 
as is well known by those familiar with this 
class of links. We make the blanks with a 
tongue 7 for forming the hook or knuckle 
portion and extending therefrom are the side 
bar blanks 88 with their disconnected ends 
opposite the knuckle blank. They are made 
a little longer than the side bars 9 of the 
completed link so that the ends of these 
blanks 8 may be rolled over or coiled into 
pintle eyes 10 as best shown in Figs. 1 and 
2. This permits us to cut the knuckle blank 
for another link and the rectangular pintle 
blank 12 from between the ends of the side 
bar blanks 88 as illustrated by the broken 
line contour at 11 in Fig. 3. The knuckle 
blank may be rolled or coiled into the knuckle 
B in any Ordinary manner and the free ends 
5o of the blanks 88 as before described are 
rolled into the pintle eyes 10. The rectan 
gular blank which is cut from Fig. 3 at 12, 
is also rolled or coiled into the pintle portion 
14, and placing it between eyes 10 10, it is 
45 
35 
3o 
 
- 
ends. 
secured therein by means of the pin 15 that 55 
extends through both of said eyes and the 
pintle portion 14, by riveting or heading its 
While we prefer to form the pintle 14 from 
a blank cut out as at 12 so as to economize 6o 
in stock, we may sometimes form the same 
of a solid tube or We may form a pintle por 
tion 144 with trunnions 155 all in one piece 
of metal and secure it in position with the 
trunnions in the eyes 10 of the pintle portion 
as shown in Fig. 6. 
By our improvement we make a link of sheet 
metal with substantially no waste of stock. 
We are also enabled to bring the seam of 
the pintle portion, when it has a seam, at a 
point one side of the bearing line where it is 
subjected to the most wear in use. In other 
words, the seam of the pintle is not in the 
line of the draft on the chain. We are also 
enabled to make the pintle of either a large 75 
or small diameter as may be desired. 
While we have a chain link with the side 
bars and knuckle portion formed of a single 
thickness only, it is evident that our im 
provement is also applicable to links where 
said parts are formed in two thicknesses or 
to a link in which the side bars are formed 
in a single thickness and the hook or knuckle 
portion is formed of two thicknesses. 
We claim as our invention, 
The herein described drive chain link con 
sisting of a hook like knuckle portion and in 
tegral flattened side bars with the ends there 
of which are farthest from said hook like 
knuckle portion rolled or coiled into eyes 10 
the exterior diameter of which eyes corre 
spond with the inner diameter of said hook 
like knuckle portion, and a separately formed 
pintle piece the end portions of which are 
fitted to and secured within said eyes while 
the portion of said pintle which lies between 
them is of a diameter equal to the exterior 
diameter of said eyes, substantially as de 
scribed and for the purpose specified. 
WM. H. HART. 
CHARLES E. HART. 
85 
95 
Witnesses for Wm. H. Hart: 
Witnesses for Chas. E. Hart: 
EDWARD H. HART, 
WALTER H. HART. 
G. S. REYNOLDs, 
F. H. MARSH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US488908.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 488,908. 
D. W. T. ANNER 
THILL COUPLING, 
27, 1892, 
 
 
 
 
22 pass 
NSN/TSs 
 
   
  
 
  
   
S. Agif 
"..."E. 
it is 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
26, 
Loepfar 
Zaza. W. Ziznner: 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID WILMER TANNER, OF MARLIN, 
TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALFTO 
S. P. RICE, OF SAME PLACE, AND LOUIS T. FULLER, OF CALVERT, TEXAS. 
TH. L. COUPNG 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 488,908, dated December 27, 1892. 
Application filed May 27, 1892, Serial No. 434,551 (No model.) 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DAVID WILMERTANNER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Mar 
lin, in the county of Falls and State of Texas, 
5 have invented a new and useful Thill-Coup 
ling, of which the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
thill couplings. 
The object of the present invention is to 
?o provide a simple and inexpensive combined 
thill coupling and anti-rattler, in which thills 
may be readily coupled and uncoupled. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
I5 parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings and pointed 
out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings-Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a thill coupling constructed in accord 
2O ance with this invention, the cap being raised. 
Fig.2 is a central longitudinal sectional view, 
the cap being closed. Fig. 3 is a detail per 
spective view of the spring. Fig. 4 is a re 
verse plan view of the thill coupling. 
Like numerals of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lings. 
1 designates a clip plate which is secured 
to an axle 2 by an axle clip 3, and which is 
3o provided with forwardly projecting ears 4 
having bearing recesses 5 in their inner op 
posed faces adapted for the reception of a 
coupling pin or bolt 6, for securing a thill iron 
to the clip plate. The bolt or coupling pin 6 
35 has its ends reduced to form journals and it 
is secured in the bearing recesses by a hinged 
cap piece 7 having forwardly projecting ex 
tensions 8 adapted to fit over the tops of the 
bearing recesses and provided with depend 
4o ing lugs 9 adapted to enter the bearing re 
cesses to secure the coupling bolt and having 
curved edges 10 conforming to the configura 
tion of the bolt. The depending lugs 9 are 
arranged back of the bolt, and their front 
45 edges fit against the rear side of the bolt. 
The cap is locked to secure the bolt against ac 
cidental displacement by a spring having a 
securing portion 11 and an anti-rattling por 
tion 12, each of which consists of parallel 
So sides 13 and 14, and are secured together and 
 
are clamped to the lower face of the clip plate 
by bolts 15 of the axle clip, and each of the 
portions extend upward and are interposed 
between the coupling bolt and the back of 
the cap. The securing portion is provided 55 
With upward extensions 16 which are connect 
ed by an integral horizontally disposed spiral 
Spring 17 arranged between the extensions of 
the cap piece and adapted to engage the latter 
between the extensions to hold the same closed. 6o 
The anti-rattler portion is provided with a 
Vertical loop 18 and has coils 19 arranged at 
the angles formed by the parallel sides, and 
the sides of the loop, and the latter is adapted 
to bear against the eye of the thill iron to 65 
press the same forward to prevent noise and 
rattling, and a thill iron supports the spring 
and enables it to securely clamp the cap 
piece by preventing the spring becoming bent 
too far forward. 
It Will be seen that the anti-rattler and 
thill coupling is simple and comparatively in 
expensive in construction, that it enables 
thills to be readily coupled and uncoupled 
and will prevent noise and rattling. 
The clip plate is provided on its lower face 
With depending lugs or bosses 20 which have 
Straight inner edges and are adapted to form 
a way for the sides 13 and 14 of the portions 
of the springs and to prevent the sides spread- 8o 
ing and becoming disengaged from the nuts 
of the axle clip. 
75 
7o 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of a clip plate adapted 
to be secured to an axle by an axle clip and 85 
provided With forwardly projecting ears and 
having bearing recesses opening at the top of 
the ears, a coupling bolt arranged in the re 
cesses, a hinged cap adapted to close the bear 
ing recesses and a combined anti-rattler and go 
Securing spring extending vertically in ad 
Vance. Of the cap and having two arms one be 
ing adapted to bear against an eye of the thill 
iron and being arranged to engage the upper 
front edge of the cap piece to lock the latter 95 
When closed, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a clip plate provided 
with forwardly projecting ears and having 
bearing recesses, a coupling bolt arranged in 
the recesses, a cap hinged to the clip plate roo 
488,908 
extensions and closing the recesses, and a 
spring having parallel sides secured to the 
lower face of the clip plate by said nuts, said 
spring having a spring loop adapted to engage 
a thill iron and being provided with vertical 
extensions, and a horizontal coil adapted to 
engage the cap, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
DAVID WILMER, TANNER, 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS H. DUNNE, 
JOHN MCCARTNEY. 
and provided with forward extensions and 
having depending lugs arranged in the re 
cesses, and a spring arranged between the 
coupling bolt and the clip plate and having 
a vertically disposed spring loop adapted to 
engage the eye of the thill iron and provided 
with a horizontal coil engaging the cap and 
locking the same, substantially as described. 
3. In a thill coupling, the combination of an 
axle clip having nuts, a clip plate provided on 
its lower face with bosses and having for 
wardly projecting ears provided with bearing 
recesses, a coupling bolt arranged in the lat 
ter, a hinged cap piece provided with forward 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489008.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 489,008. 
D. JACOBS, 
SNOW PLOW, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 3, 1893. 
N 
in 
s 
 
?ays ( 4.6 
Z7zzezza, 
Zazz/e/ /2cods 
(2/ /2zs azoyzza7s 
6.4-lao.7% 
(No Model.) 
No. 489,008, 
D, JACOBS, 
SNOW PLOW, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W 
Patented Jan, 3, 1893, 
f 
 
(S 
 
ZZAvess es 
gei?z. 
211 
A-74-6 ace. 
Z7ezverza7 
4/7/e/ /acoAs 
& 7zzo &Zor?zeys 
N R 
64. 
D. JACOBS. 
SNOW, PLOW, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Jan. 3, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 489,008, 
 
% 
, 
s3 3 
 
727(esses 
af 
?ay-4-6 
Z7zzvezzor 
A7/e/ /acods 
m 
&/ /zs 2Zorveys 
(6.4 
SPEERs co, PHero-Trio...washington. pc. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL JACOBS, OF GRIGSBY, KANSAS. 
SNOW-PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,008, dated January 8, 1898. 
Application filed February 25, 1892. Serial No. 422,753, (No model.) 
55 
65 
o 
75 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL JACOBS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Grigsby, 
in the county of Scott and State of Kansas, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Snow-Plows, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of snow 
plows or excavators which are especially de 
signed for removing large masses of snow from 
railway tracks. 
The object of my invention is to increase 
the strength, durability and efficiency of ex 
cavators of this kind. 
In carrying out my invention I employ two 
fan wheels, each carrying a series of knives 
or cutters adapted to rotate with the wheels 
and to cut from a Snow bank masses of snow 
which are caught by the fan wheels and hurled 
from the track with a strong current of air 
through chutes beneath which the fan wheels 
are arranged. 
My invention involves certain improve 
ments in the general Organization of the plow 
or excavator and in its details of construction 
which will be hereinafter fully described. 
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1 is 
a plan view of my improved excavator. Fig. 
2-is a front elevation. Fig. 3-is a vertical 
transverse section on the line 3, 3, of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4-is a vertical longitudinal section on 
the line 4, 4, of Figs. 1, and 2. Fig. 5-is a 
detail view on an enlarged scale of the de 
vices for holding the knives in their adjusted 
ositions and Fig. 6-is a detail view on an 
enlarged scale of one of the knives showing 
particularly how it is secured to the fan blade. 
The main frame or body A is supported on 
a truck B of any suitable construction adapt 
ed to travel on the track in front of a locomo 
tive in the usual way. As shown the body is 
constructed as follows: The Sill beams a are 
connected by crossbeams a? a and side beams 
a are supported by standards at a short dis 
tance above the sills C. Cross beams a con 
nect the side beams near their front ends. 
I employ two fan wheels X and Y mounted 
on shafts ac and y respectively and said shafts 
by means of pinions ac' and y' are connected 
to a large gear wheel Z, carried by a shaft 2, 
which may be rotated by an engine mounted 
on the truck body, or in other suitable Way. 
The shaft y is mounted in bearings on the 
beam a', and the shaft ac is mounted in bear 
ings carried by the cross beams a. As it is 
Sometimes desirable to drive the lower wheel 
Y without driving the upper front wheel X. I 
provide means for making and breaking the 
connection between the shafts ac and 2, this 
may be done as shown by means of a clutch 
W of well known construction for connecting 
and disconnecting the pinion ac' with the shaft 
ac. The fan wheels are mounted in an upright 
casing at the front end of the truck. The 
rear end of the casing is closed by a solid 
back wall c and the bottom c' and sides c, c, 
are preferably formed of sheet metal the front 
and the top remaining open. The bottom c' 
is curved and is arranged close to the track; 
the sides c', c, are inclined from their lower 
ends upwardly and outwardly sidewise and 
their edges are inclined, as shown in Fig. 4, 
from their lower ends upwardly and forwardly. 
A partition D is arranged over the shaft ac, 
It extends from one side piece to the other 
being connected there with about midway be 
tween their front and rear ends. A chute E 
is thus formed over the fan wheel Y through 
which snow is carried by the blast generated 
by said wheel. 
The snow handled by the fan X is deliv 
ered upwardly through the open top of the 
casing between the sides c, c, and in front 
of the partition D. Inclined guides F are 
formed in each corner of the bottom of the 
casing to prevent the snow from being packed 
there, and similar guides G for a similar pur 
pose are arranged in the corners of the cas 
ing above the beams a. Small inclined guides 
g, are arranged immediately below the beams. 
In order to direct the course of the snow after 
it leaves the fan wheels and to prevent down 
drafts, -I employ deflectors in front and rear 
of the partition D. 
The deflector H in front of the partition is 
shown as consisting of a curved inclined plate 
h, having a straight back piece h' to which is 
secured an arm h, pivoted at h, to the par 
tition midway between the sides c, c. Braces 
h' secured to the back piece h', near its ends 
and to the arm h, intermediate its ends serve 
to make the connection between the deflector 
plate and the arm firm, strong and rigid. The 
deflector is free to be moved on the pivot h, 
25 
35 ) 
45 
95 
OO 
...::::::::: 
s 
489,008 
fo 
25 
35 
as a center and may be shifted from one side 
of the casing to the other to be in proper work 
ing position corresponding to the direction of 
rotation of the wheel X. The deflector I in 
rear of the partition in the chute E, is some 
what differently constructed. It is made in 
two parts connected by rods i. Both parts are 
of the same shape, size and construction. Each 
is preferably formed of a sheet metal plate 
the width of which is nearly equal to the dis 
tance between the partition D and the back 
wall c. The plates extend from the top of 
the chute downwardly to near the top of the 
wheel Y and they are pivoted at at the op 
posite sides of the chute. The plates are bent 
at their pivots, those portions below the piv 
ots being shown as slightly longer than those 
above though this is not important. As shown 
in Fig. 3-the plate at the left side has its 
lower portion about parallel with the side 
wall of the chute, the upper portion being in 
clined upwardly and inwardly while the plate 
on the opposite side has the upper portion 
parallel with the side of the chute and the 
lower portion is inclined downwardly and in 
wardly. When the deflectors are arranged 
as shown in Fig. 3-and the fan Wheel rotat 
ing as indicated by the arrow the snow is car 
ried by the current of air upwardly, out 
wardly and to the right as shown in the draw 
ings, the deflectors guiding the current and 
preventing down drafts. When the wheel is 
rotated in the opposite direction the deflect 
ors are reversed and operate in a similar Way. 
The fan wheels X and Y are similar in con 
struction, but the lower one Y is preferably 
of a slightly greater diameter. I will describe 
the wheel X, it being understood that as far 
as the construction is concerned, the descrip 
tion applies equally to the wheel Y. A series 
of fan blades m (six being shown) radiate 
from the shaft and are tied together and 
strengthened at their outer ends by rods m'. 
Angle irons m, are secured to the front and 
rear edges of the blades to give them strength 
and rigidity. The blades at their inner ends 
are secured to a spider or hub m to which is 
also fitted a conical shield M which extends 
in between the blades and also projects out 
wardly in front of the shaft. By this means 
I prevent the snow from packing in the an 
gles between the blades, cover the joints at 
the front of the shaft and shield the knife 
adjusting mechanism as will be hereinafter 
explained. To the front edge of each fan 
blade is attached a knife N. The length of 
the knife is about equal to the length of the 
blade and it is centrally pivoted thereto. As 
shown in Fig. 6-the knife has a vertical cen 
tral recess in to receive the pivot rod which 
is held in the recess by straps n. Straps n, 
secured to the edges of the blades extend 
through slots in in the knives and attach their 
pivot rods to the fan wheel. The arrange 
ment is such that the knives may be adjusted 
on their pivots to cut in either of two directions 
45 
50 
55 
75 
according to the direction of rotation of the 
wheel. Each blade is provided on opposite 
sides with inclined brackets O against which 
the knives rest when at work and by which 
they are held at the proper inclination for 
cutting effectively. In order that the knives 
may all be adjusted simultaneously and held 
in place when adjusted I prolong the pivot 
rods n', toward the shaft and give them right 
anglebends in which extend between the arms 
p of a shifter P. The hub p' of which is mount 
ed on the shaft and is free to turn thereon. The 
hub may be turned in either direction and 
clamped to the shaft by a set screw P', and thus 
the knives may be simultaneously set and 
locked in proper position. The screw P' ex 
tends through a slot, as shown in Fig. 5, and by 
moving the screw back and forth in the slot 
and clamping it to the shaft, the knives may 
be set at the desired inclination. As before 
stated the wheel Y, is the same in construc 
tion as the wheel X. It is a little larger than 
X, and is arranged below and in rear thereof. 
In operation the plow, as it is moved for 
ward, cuts its way through the snow bank, 
masses of snow are severed by the revolving 
knives and these masses are caught by the 
fans and hurled up and out, away from the 
track. 
I claim as my invention,-- 
1. The combination, substantially as here 
inbefore set forth, of the front casing having 
a partition between its sides, a lower rear fan 
wheel carrying knives and arranged below 
a chute in rear of the partition, an upper 
front fan wheel carrying knives and arranged 
in advance of the partition and between the 
sides of the casing, and means for revolving 
both knife-carrying fan wheels. 
2. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of a casing closed at rear 
and at both sides and bottom and open at 
front and top, inclined guides F and G, for 
the corners of the casing, a partition extend 
ing from one side piece to the other, a knife 
carrying fan wheel arranged in front of the 
partition, and a knife-carrying fan wheel ar 
ranged in rear of and below the partition. 
3. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, with the lower rear knife 
carrying fan wheel, of the deflectors in a 
chute above the fan wheel, each consisting of 
a blade pivoted at the sides of the chute bent 
at its pivot, extending in opposite directions 
therefrom and having a rod connecting their 
upper ends, whereby they may be simultane 
ously operated. 
4. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, with a fan wheel, having 
radial blades of the pivoted knives, the brack 
ets on opposite sides of each blade against 
which the knives rest, and means for adjust 
ing the knives. 
5. A fan wheel having its blades strength 
ened with angle iron and tied together by 
rods as described, in combination with knives 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
489,008 
3 
pivoted to the front edges of the blades, 
brackets against which the blades rest, and 
the shifter mounted on the shaft of the fan 
wheel. 
6. The combination, substantially as here 
in before set forth, of the fan wheel, the knives, 
the pivot rods for the knives, means for at 
taching the knives to the blades, a hub car 
rying arms between which the lower bent 
ends of the pivot rods are arranged, and Io 
means for adjusting the hub on the shaft. 
scribed my name. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
DANIEI, JACOBS, 
Witnesses: 
LLOYD B. WIGHT, 
SIDNEY. P. HOLLINGSWORTH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489108.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 489, 108, 
 
A. STUART, Jr. 
TOBACCO CUTTER, 
Patented Jan. 3, 1893. 
El 
ONHatar 
T 
O-TRIC 
Real 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER STUART, JR., OF IIAMILTON, CANADA. 
TOBACCO - CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,108, dated January 3, 1893. 
Application filed March 25, 1892, Serial No, 426,451 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER STUART, 
Jr., a citizen of the Dominion of Canada, re 
siding at the city of Hamilton, in the county 
of Wentworth, Province of Ontario, Canada, 
have in Vented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Tobacco-Cutters; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description of the construction and 
operation of the same, reference being made 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1, is a plan of the machine embody 
ing my invention. Fig. 2, is a side elevation 
of the same. Fig. 3, is a top view of cylinder 
detached, showing saw teeth. Fig. 4, is an 
end view of the same. 
My invention relates to a very handy and 
convenient tobacco cutter that will possess 
many advantages, among which may be men 
tioned, the great ease of cutting a large quan 
tity in a very short time, all ready for the 
pipe without the necessity of rolling it be 
tween the hands, as is usual with the tobacco 
cutters at present in use. It is simple and 
durable, and will cut any size of plug tobacco 
very evenly which causes it to be more pleas 
ant in Simoking. 
The device consists in a rectangular shaped 
box, having a recess cut out for a receptacle 
for tobacco, a cylinder is journaled on the top 
of the box, and provided with a series of teeth 
which may be set separate, in rows, with a space 
between each or a set of continuous teeth like 
a circular saw-a crank handle is affixed to 
the cylinder spindle to revolve the cylinder 
against the end of a plug of tohacco laid on 
the top of the box, the tobacco as it is cut falls 
into the inner recess where it may lie until 
ready for use. 
In the drawings, A represents the rectan 
gular box which may be cut out of one piece 
of wood, cast in metal, or any other conven 
ient manner, but wood is preferable. 
B, is the inner chamber, having two open 
ings, viz. C, the top where the cut tobacco falls 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
from the cylinder into the inner chamber B, 
and the end opening D, from which the cut 
tobacco is removed from the said chamber B. 
E, E, are metal standards screwed to the 
sides of the box A, through which the square so 
Spindle F passes-and circular metal disks 
attached to each end of the cylinder. 
H, is the cylinderpreferably of wood through 
which the spindle F passes. 
Cl are the teeth Set in diagonal rows a short 
distance apart (as shown in Fig. 1), formed 
With Sharp cutting edges or in circular saw 
form, with the teeth b set very wide, and an 
annular collar or ring d between each, as in 
Fig. 3. 
I, is a crank handle, with a collar d' inter 
posed between it and the bearing plate E, and 
a pin e passing through the spindle on the 
outside of the handle to hold it on. 
J, is a cover to fit in the end of the inner 
chamber B, and provided with a ring or other 
device C for convenience in opening and clos 
ing the mouth of the chamber B which it fits. 
In the operation of the device, a plug of to 
bacco is placed on the top of the box, repre 
Sented by the dotted lines ac, ac, and held there 
to be fed to the teeth of the roller as it is ro 
tated by the handle I, the teeth tear or cut 
the tobacco in slender strips ready for the 
pipe, without any further manipulation, and 
making it just right for the smoker's conven 
ience and pleasure. 
Having thus described my device and its ad 
vantages, -what I claim as my invention and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
In a tobacco cutter, the combination of the 
box A, with recess B, cover J, cylinder H, hav 
ing saw teeth b, standards E, spindle F, and 
handle I, all constructed substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
65 
75 
- 
ALEXANDER STUART, JR. 
In presence of - 
T. HAMPSON, 
WM. BRUCE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489208.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. TILDEN. 
DISK WATER METER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 489,208. 
Patented Jan, 3, 1893, 
a. Z32 
 
 
 
 
mornia 
E 
-- 
- 
T - - - 
- 
O 
N 
- 
W 
W 
o 
A. 
DD 
EC 
 
 
2 
NS 
5 
2 
(No Model.) 
No. 489,208, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. A. TILDEN. 
DISK WATER METER, 
Patented Jan. 3, 1893. 
Ezhilugu 
O 2 SS N 
ex 
ItfulirullHINI 
I 
I i 
II. 
Hitti TITI, 
s' S sex 
: 
et as 
 
))7tresses 
72 62.--ee--- 
1777. 
 
w 
Ijawe (O7 
assee 4. t244-4- 
{ 
23.-- 
ar 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A. TILDEN, OF HYDE PARK, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
HERSEY MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
DSK WATER - METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,208, dated January 3, 1898. 
Application filed July 5, 1892. Serial No. 438,892, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it kuown that I, JAMES A. TILDEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hyde 
Park, in the county of Norfolk, State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Water-Meters, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in explaining its nature. 
The invention relates to the class of meters 
known as disk meters, and comprises vari 
ous details of construction and organization, 
whereby a meter of great efficiency, accuracy 
and durability is obtained, while at the same 
time the mechanical parts are simplified in 
arrangement and reduced in cost. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a view in ver 
tical central section of the meter: Fig. 2 is a 
view in vertical section and elevation of a 
portion of the inner case, illustrating in part 
the construction of the case and the arrange 
ment of the ports: Fig. 3 is a view in eleva 
tion of the complete inner case removed from 
the outer case: Fig. 4 is a view in plan 
thereof. 
The outer case A, is made in two parts a 
a', the part a forming the base, and the part 
a' the cap which is secured to the base by 
bolts. The two parts together form without 
the inner case a large chamber B (see Fig. 1) 
which is divided into two parts by the inner 
case C, and its laterally extending flange c. 
This flange furnishes the means by which the 
inner case is held in the chamber B, being 
made sufficiently large to drop into the re 
cess a on the inner side of the top of the base 
a, the flange resting upon the shoulder formed 
by the recess and the cap alapping upon the 
upper surface of the flange. This construc 
tion provides for the easy removal of the in 
ner case from the outer case, as it is simply 
necessary to unbolt and lift the cap a from 
the base a to expose the inner case and per 
mit it to be taken out. The outer case A, has 
the water passage a' in the one side connect 
ing with the upper part b of the chamber B, 
and on the opposite side the passage a con 
necting with the lower part b' of the cham 
ber B. Either of these passages may be used 
for the inlet or outlet respectively. In Fig. 
w 
1 I have represented the passage a' as the in 
let and the passage a as the outlet. The cap 
a' is made of sufficient height to provide 
space for a section of the reducing train of 
the registering mechanism. 
The inner case C contains the disk cham 
ber c', which preferably has the flat lower 
surface or bottom c, the spherically curved 
side wall c, and the downwardly extending 
conical top c'. The spherically curved side 
Wall is a true section of about two thirds of a 
hemisphere, the greater diameter being at the 
base and the smaller at the top. The case 
is constructed of three parts, namely, first, 6 
the base plate c which has a central down 
wardly rounded depression c', forming a disk 
bearing, and the horizontalextension con each 
side ending in a depressed flange c. second, 
the side wall c, which has the flange c, the 
enlargement c' upon the lower side of the 
flange, and the enlargement c' upon the up 
per side of the flange, see Fig. 3, providing 
respectively a portion of the inlet port D, and 
of the outlet port D, the inlet port including 
the large opening d in the wall c' below the 
flange c, as Well as the portion of the opening 
afforded by the enlargement c, the entrance 
to which extends through the flange, and is 
at a right angle to the entranced the outlet 
port including the large opening d through 
the wall c, and the increased opening through 
the flange c, provided by the enlargement c, 
see Figs. 3 and 4, and the outer wall c which 
has an outwardly extending foot or flange ci 
about its lower edge to fit into the depression 
in the lower plate formed by the depressed 
flange c. The upper edge c is squared. It 
will be understood of course that this wall is 
hollow and has a cylindrical opening below 
and above the lower opening having the larg 
est diameter. It will be also understood that 
the lower opening is closed by the bottom 
plate c. The upper opening is closed by the 
top plate E. This upper plate forms the 
third part of the case and has the cylindrical 
flange e, which rests upon the upper surface 
of the wall c', the short cylindrical section e', 
which fits into the cavity immediately below 
upper cylindrical opening, and forms a joint 
with the squared upper edge of the wall c 
and the downwardly-extending conical sec 
75 
85 
95 
O3) 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
489,208 
25 p 
O 
5 
tion e?, the inner surface of which forms the 
top of the disk chamber, and which ends about 
the upwardly curved central section e, the 
center of which is removed to form an open 
inge. The section e of the upper plate and 
the depression cof the lowerplate form spheri 
cal bearings for the ball fof the disk F. The 
disk comprises the ballf and the thin conical 
plate or section f', extending conically from 
the ball. The disk chamber c' upon the port 
side is divided by the partition or abutment 
g, which extends from the wall c' between the 
ports to the ball of the disk: and the disk 
plate f' is provided with a radial recess 
through which the partition extends. At the 
lower end of the lower bearing c there is 
formed in the bottom plate the inclined circu 
lar track h (see Fig. 1) into which extends the 
axis h of the diskball, the opposite end of the 
axis extending through the hole e' in the up 
per plate E, and bearing against a short lever 
m. on the lower end of the spindle m', connected 
with the reducing mechanism of the register 
ing train. Preferably the diameter of that 
art of the axis h in the track h is somewhat 
less than the width of the track, so that the 
axis may not cramp as it traverses the grooves. 
The object of this axis and track is to main 
tain the diskin mechanically controlled rela 
tion to the case and to the ports and wall of 
the case, so that it is compelled to travel or 
move in a given track, which is the track in 
which it should move to properly and accu 
rately co-act with the ports and wall in its 
measuring function. The disk thus mechani 
cally held, guided and controlled in the disk 
chamber cannot be dislodged by a shock, and 
reduces friction and Wear to a minimum. 
There may be extended across the lower 
section of the chamber B, the perforated dia 
phragm in, if desired, to intercept the passage 
of foreign matter. 
In operation the water enters the section b' 
of the chamber, passes into the inlet D, trav 
; erses the disk chamber c', actuating the disk 
and leaving it through the outlet port D', en 
tering section b of the chamber B, from which 
it flows through the passage a. 
It will be seen that the disk case is con 
tained or held in a large chamber, and that it 
and its laterally extending flange effect a di 
vision of the chamber into two parts, one of 
which receives water from the inlet and con 
nects with the inlet port of the disk chamber, 
and the other of which connects with the es 
cape passage and receives Water from the 
disk chamber: It will also be observed that 
the construction of the tWO cases is such that 
the inner case is readily placed in the outer 
case, securely held and easily removed. It 
will further be seen that the construction of 
the disk chamber or case is such that each of 
the three parts can be accurately shaped, 
made and duplicated by ordinary machine 
tools and methods, and that they and the disk 
are so constructed and put together that the 
disk can be easily placed and removed from 
3O 
35 
40 
50 
55 
 
2 
s 
the case. It will also be observed that the 
bearings which wear, being in the upper and 
lower plates, can be easily renewed by simply 
substituting new upper and lower plates for 
the old ones, while the same side wall and 
disk can be used almost indefinitely. 
I prefer to make the disk of hard rubber. 
The water pressure against the upper surface 
of the disk wall acting through the opening 
e' in the upper plate may be balanced by a Wa 
ter pressure in the space O below the lower 
bearing by means of water introduced to said 
space through a hole o' in the axis h", con 
O 
necting the water chamber b with said space O. 
It will be understood, of course, that the 
lower plate of the inner disk case and the up 
per plate of said case are secured to the in 
termediate flanged wall by screws o' which 
extend through holes in said plate into the wall 
and furnish means by which the two plates 
are made easily detachable from the wall c. 
Having thus fully described my invention 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States: 
1. A disk meter having a case forming the 
measuring chamber and a measuring disk con 
tained therein, the said case having the flange 
c, the enlargement c below the flange upon 
one side of the partition g, which opens 
through the flange and connects with and 
forms a part of the port opening d, and the 
enlargement c' above the flange c, which 
opens down Ward through the flange and con 
nects with and forms a part of the port d and 
is arranged upon the other side of the abut 
ment or partition g as and for the purposes 
described. 
2. The combination in a disk meter of the 
outer case A, comprising the base a, and the 
cap a? 
its passages a d", and the inner disk 
case having a flange c which included with 
the case Separates the cavity of the outer case 
into two distinct parts or sections, one of which 
parts or sections is an inlet chamber, and the 
other an outlet chamber; an inlet port in the 
inner case connecting the inlet chamber of 
the outer case with the measuring cavity of 
the inner or disk case, and the outlet port in 
said inner or disk case connecting its meas 
uring cavity with the outlet chamber of said 
outer case, as and for the purposes described. 
3. The combination in a disk meter of the 
outer case A, comprising the base a, the cap 
a forming a large open chamber B, and the 
passage a' a' and the removable inner disk 
case having the flange c, the edge of which is 
confined between the cap a' and the base a, 
and-which, with the inner case, divides said 
chamber B into two sections, whereby the in 
ner case is made easily removable from the 
outer case, as and for the purposes described. 
4. The combination in a disk meter of the 
disk case formed of the detachable lower flat 
plate chaving the ball bearing c', the sepa 
rate spherical curved wall c', having an open 
ing at each end, the lower opening of which 
is closed by the plate c and the detachable 
75. 
9o 
95 
EOC) 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
489,208 
i 
3 
upper plate c' closing the upper opening said 
plates being formed with a downward coni 
cally shaped section having a hole e' and the 
ball bearing e, as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
i5. The combination of the disk case made 
of three detachable plates or pieces c', cand 
call shaped substantially as indicated and 
united together to form a disk chamber of the 
shape specified, and having ports of the char 
acter described with the conical disk con 
tained in said chamber, having a ball fand 
f' extending from the 
the conical disk plate 
ballf slotted upon one side, and the abutment 
or partitiong which extends through said slot, 
and divides one side of the disk chamber from 
the ball to the wall, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of the disk chamber 
having the opening eat its top and the space 
o O at its bottom, the ball bearing, and the disk 
having a ball to fit the bearing, and a hole 
25 
through the ball connecting the water cham 
ber above it with the space o below it, as and 
for the purposes described. 
7. In a disk meter the inner case, the lower 
plate c of which has the depressed support c 
for receiving the foot of the side wall, the said 
Wall having a flange, inlet and outlet ports, 
and squared at the upper corner as specified, 
and the upper plate having an outwardly ex 
tending ledge to rest upon the squared upper 
surface of the side wall, and a downwardly 
extending conical section, which intersects at 
its upper outer edge the curved surface of the 
inner wall, the lower and upper plates being 35 
secured to the intermediate flanged wall by 
screws, as and for the purposes described. 
JAMES A. TILDEN. 
Witnesses: 
F. F. RAYMOND, 2d, 
J. M. DOLAN. 
g4. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489308.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. HUNT, 
WELOCIPEDE SADDLE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 489,308, 
Patented Jan, 3, 1893. 
628)itv.cscs 
16, 47 
s 
3v-uo vitot. 
Jonathan 0.3Cwrt-1-1 
w 
TE Norris is ce. Histo.Ltd, WASN'Tom, i.e. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 489,308, 
J. A. HUNT. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
WELOCIPEDE SADD,E, 
- 
Patented Jan. 3, 1893, 
841 uellto 
Jonathan (9. 3Covt, 
33 /hala) 
&ltto vict 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JONATHAN A. HUNT, OF WESTBOROUGH, MASSACHUSETTS, 
VELOC PE DE-SADD LE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,308, dated January 3, 1893. 
Application filed April ll, 1892, Serial No. 428,609, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JONATHAN A. HUNT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at West 
borough, in the county of Worcester and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Velocipede-Sad 
dles; and I do hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description there 
of, which, in connection with the drawings 
making a part of this specification, will en 
able others skilled in the art to which my in 
vention belongs to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to saddles for veloci 
pedes, or bicycles, and more particularly to 
pneumatic saddles, of the class described in 
the Letters Patent of the United States, No. 
471,685, dated March 29, 1892, and the object 
of my invention is to provide a pneumatic 
saddle seat in which the leather covering of 
the rubber bag, or air cushion, may be readily 
and quickly removed, and replaced, in case 
it is desired to get at the rubber bag for any 
purpose. 
In the use of the pneumatic saddle described 
in my said patent, by reason of accidental 
punctures through the leather covering and 
the rubberbag by pieces of glass, sharpstones, 
&c., the rubber bag is liable to leak and al 
low the air to escape, and in order to get at 
the rubber bag to remove it, and replace it 
with a new one, or to repair the leaks thus 
made, it is necessary to rip out the stitching 
which unites the upper and lower leather cov 
erings of the rubber bag, and then to stitch 
the leather coverings together again, after re 
placing the rubber bag; this operation con 
Sumes considerable time, and requires the em 
ployment of a machine for sewing the leather, 
and a skillful attendant to operate it. 
In my present invention I use only an up 
per covering of leather, which extends over 
the top and sides or edges of the rubber bag, 
and I do away entirely with the stitching of 
the leather covering, and provide means for 
Securing said covering in place, so that it can 
be quickly and readily removed to get at the 
rubber bag, and then replaced. 
My invention also relates to the spring sup 
port for the saddle seat, and the object of my 
invention is to provide a simple and efficient 
spring support, consisting preferably of a flat 
metal spring, and a coil wire spring, adjust 
ably clamped together, to be combined with 
any ordinary saddle seat. 
My invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction of a pneumatic saddle, 
and a supporting spring, as will be hereinaf 
terfully described, and the nature thereof in 
dicated by the claims. 
Referring to the drawings:-Figure 1 is a 
plan view of a pneumatic saddle, embodying 
my improvements. Fig. 2 is a central longi 
tudinal section, on line 22, Fig. 1, looking in 
the direction of arrow a, Fig. 1, showing the 
spring support clamped to the saddle support. 
Fig. 3 is a bottom view of the saddle, with the 
spring removed. Fig. 4 is a side view of the 
saddle and spring, looking in the direction of 
arrow a, Fig. 1, and, Fig. 5 is a cross section, 
on an enlarged scale, on line 5, 5, Fig. 4. 
I have shown in the drawings a pneumatic 
saddle of substantially the same shape as the 
pneumatic saddle shown in my said patent, 
and the inflatable rubber bag used in the sad 
dle shown is preferably of the same construc 
tion as the rubber bag shown, in said patent, 
and is provided with a valve for inflating the 
same in the same manner as described in said 
patent, to which reference is hereby made for 
adetail description of the same. 
In the accompanying drawings, 1 is the sad 
dle proper, or seat, preferably made pear 
shape, as shown in Fig. 1, and having an open 
ing 2 through the central part thereof for the 
purpose of ventilation. The saddle 1 has a 
sheet metal bottom 3, with a central ventilat 
ing opening 4 therein; and the bottom 3 is 
preferably provided with corrugations or 
ridges 4'upon its under side, extending length 
wise, as shown in Fig. 3, to strengthen the 
same. The shape of the botton 3 conforms to 
the shape of the finished saddle, but it is 
larger than the Saddle proper, to allow of the 
outer edges 3' being turned up and bent over, 
as shown in Fig. 2. 
The rear end of the metal bottom 3 is pro 
vided upon its underside with the rib or sup 
port 5, made integral there with, or secured 
thereto by rivets 5'. The support 5 carries 
the cantle, or spring holder 6, to which the 
end of the spring is attached, and which is 
preferably made integral with the support 5. 
95 
OO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
489,308 
IO 
(5 
2 O. 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
The front end of the bottom 3 is provided 
with a hook 7, to which is attached the spring 
at the front end of the saddle. The hook 7, 
shown in the drawings, is of the same con 
struction and operation as the hook shown 
and described in the Letters Patent of the 
United States, No. 483,559, dated October 4, 
1892, and therefore it is not necessary to de 
scribe the same in this application. 
Upon the metal bottom 3 rests the inflat 
able india rubber bag, or air cushion 8, as 
shown in Fig. 2; said rubber bag is of sub 
stantially the same shape and construction as 
the rubber bag shown in the Patent No. 
471,685 above referred to, and is provided with 
a valve in the same way, the stem of which 
extends through the bottom 3, as shown at 8, 
Figs. 3 and 4. The rubber bag 8 has a central 
ventilating hole through the same, correspond 
ing to the hole 4 in the bottom 3, and the 
opening 2 in the saddle 1. The covering 9, 
preferably made of leather, extends over the 
upper side, and over the edges of the rubber 
bag 8, and incloses the rubber bag 8 between 
the metal bottom 3, and said covering 9. The 
covering 9 has a central ventilating opening 
therein, corresponding to the opening in the 
bottom 3 and the opening in the rubber bag S, 
and said covering is pressed or molded into the 
shape desired, and to conform to the general 
shape of the rubber bag 8, when the same is in 
flated. After the leather covering 9 has been 
pressed or molded into the proper shape, and 
placed over the rubber bag S, the outer edges 9' 
of said covering are secured to the outer edges 
3' of the metal bottom 3, by bending upwardly 
and inwardly, the edges 3 of the bottom 3, 
and binding the outer edges 9 of the leather 
covering 9 within the folded edges 3' of the 
bottom 3, thus forming a lap joint and secur 
ing the leather covering 9 to the metal bot 
tom 3 all around the outer edge of the saddle. 
The edges 3' around the central opening in 
the metal bottom 3 are also bent upwardly 
and inwardly, to bind the edges 9' around 
the central opening in the leather covering 9, 
and hold the same firmly in the folded edges 
3' around the central opening of the metal 
bottom, as clearly shown in Fig. 2, thus form 
ing a lap joint and securing the edges 9' 
around the central opening in the leather cov 
ering, to the metal bottom, and forning the 
central opening 2 in the saddle seat. 
It will be understood that the leather cow 
ering 9 is attached to the metal bottom 3, as 
above described, after the rubber bag 8 has 
been placed between them, but before the 
same has been inflated, and the inflating of 
the rubber bag S will tend to expand the 
leather covering, and force the outer edges 9' 
thereof tightly between the turned up edges 
of the metal bottom 3, and also force the edges 
9' of the leather covering 9 around the cen 
tral opening in the covering tightly between 
the turned up edges of the central opening 
in the metal bottom, see Fig. 2. By this man 
ner of combining the leather covering 9 with 
the metal bottom 3, and securing the leather 
covering to the metal bottom, to hold the rub 
ber bag 8 in place, it will be seen, that to re 
move the leather covering to get at the rub 
ber bag, it is only necessary to bend outwardly 
the turned over edges of the metal bottom to 
release the edges of the leather covering, and 
this operation can be quickly and readily per 
formed by the user of the saddle, with a pair 
of ordinary pliers. The leather covering is 
again secured to the metal bottom, by bend 
ing or folding over the edges of the metal 
bottom, as above described. The turned over 
or folded edges of the metal bottom 3 form a 
neat beading extending entirely around the 
lower edge of the saddle, as shown in Fig. 4, 
and also entirely around the central opening 
in the saddle, as shown in Fig. 2, and presents 
a pleasing appearance. 
I will now describe the spring shown in 
the drawings, adapted to be combined with 
the pneumatic saddle seat above described 
or with any ordinary saddle seat. The spring 
consists of a coil spring 10, and a flat spring 
11. The coil spring 10 is located at the 
front end of the saddle, and is of the ordi 
nary shape, and attached to the front end 
of the saddle by means of the hook 7 in the 
ordinary way. The rear ends 10' of the coil 
spring 10 are clamped to the front end of the 
flat spring Il, preferably in the manner shown 
in Fig. 5. The spring 11 forms the lower part 
of the clamp, and a cap piece 12 the upper 
part. The cap piece 12 has two rounded 
grooves or depressions 12' in the under sur 
face thereof, to receive the ends 10' of the 
coil spring 10, and the sides 12' of the cap 
piece 12 extend down so as to inclose the edges 
of the flat spring 11. A bolt or set screw 13 
passes loosely through a hole 11 in the spring 
11, and screws into a threaded hole 12' in the 
cap piece 12. The turning out of the bolt 13 
releases the ends 10' of the coil spring 10, and 
also the end 11' of the flat spring 11, and al 
lows the springs to be adjusted relatively to 
each other, and the turning in of the bolt 13 
clamps and binds together the ends 10' of the 
spring 10, and the end 11' of the spring 11. 
The rear end 11' of the spring 11 is secured 
to the rear end of the saddle, preferably in the 
manner shown in the drawings. 
The cantle or holder 6 is provided with a 
slot or opening 6' therein, and the bolts or set 
screws 6', and the rear end 11' of the spring 
11 extends through the slot 6', and is adjust 
ably held therein by the set screws (3'. By 
this construction of the cantle 6 I obtain an 
adjustment between the rear end of the spring 
11, and the rear end of the saddle, back of 
the point where the saddle spring is attached 
to the saddle support. 
The Spring 11 is adjustably attached, at 
about its central point, to the saddle support 
14, by a clamp 15, provided with a set screw 
16, and of any ordinary construction, but 
which I prefer to make as shown in the draw 
ings, and as fully described in Letters Patent 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
489,308 
No. 483,559 before referred to, and to which 
reference is hereby made for a detail descrip 
tion of the construction of said clamp 15. 
It will be understood, that the details of 
construction of the pneumatic saddle seat and 
supporting spring shown in the drawings, may 
be varied some from what is shown and de 
scribed, if desired. 
Instead of the hook 7, for attaching the 
spring at the front end of the saddle, and the 
cantle 6 for adjustably attaching the spring 
at the rear end of the saddle, the ordinary form 
of hook, and cantle may be used. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent is: 
1. In a velocipede saddle, the combination 
with a sheet metal bottom, provided with a 
central ventilating opening therein, and lon 
gitudinal corrugations or ridges upon its un 
der side, and a hook at one end, and a cantle 
at the other end, for attaching the supporting 
spring, and a rubber bag or air cushion sup 
ported upon the metal bottom, and having a 
central ventilating opening therein, of a 
leather covering extending only over the top 
and edges of the rubber bag, and the edges 
of the leather covering secured to the edges 
of the metal bottom by bending or folding over 
both edges to form a lap joint, for the purpose 
stated, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a Velocipede Saddle seat, the combi 
nation with a sheet metal bottom, provided 
with a central ventilating opening therein, 
and a hook at one end, and a cantle at the 
other end for attaching the supporting spring, 
and a rubber bag or air cushion supported 
upon the metal bottom, and having a central 
ventilating opening therein, of a leather cov 
ering extending only over the top and edges 
of the rubber bag, with the edges of the leather 
covering secured to the edges of the metal 
bottom by bending or folding over both edges 
to form a lap joint, for the purpose stated, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a Velocipede saddle seat, the combi 
nation. With a sheet metal bottom, having a 
central ventilating opening therein, and pro 
vided with a hook and cantle on its under 
side, for attaching the supporting spring 
thereto, and a leather covering forming the 
top and edges of the saddle seat, and having 
a ventilating opening therein, and secured to 
the metal bottom by a lap joint extending 
around the saddle seat, and around the ven 
tilating opening therein, of a rubber bag or 
air cushion provided with a ventilating open 
ing, and inclosed between the metal bottom 
and the leather covering, substantially as 
shown and described. 
4. In a Velocipede saddle, the combination 
with the saddle seat, consisting of a sheet 
metal bottom provided with a hook at one 
end, and a cantle at the other end, for attach 
ing the supporting Spring, and a leather cov 
ering with its edges secured to the metal bot 
tom by a lap joint, and a rubber bag or air 
cushion inclosed between the leather cover. 
ing and the metal bottom, and a ventilating 
opening extending through the saddle seat, 
of a supporting spring, consisting of a flat 
metal spring and a coil spring, the flat metal 
spring adapted to be clamped to the saddle 
support, with one end secured to the saddle 
seat, and the other end adjustably clamped 
to one end of the coil spring, the other end of 
said coil spring secured to the saddle seat, 
substantially as shown and described. 
5. In a velocipede Saddle, the combination 
with the saddle seat, consisting of a sheet 
metal bottom, provided with a hook at one 
end and a cantle at the other end, for attach 
ing the supporting spring, and a leather cov 
ering forming the top and edges of the seat, 
and secured to the metal bottom by a lap 
joint, and a rubber bag or air cushion inclosed 
between the leather covering and the metal 
bottom, and a ventilating opening extending 
through the saddle Seat, of a supporting 
spring consisting of a flat metal Spring, and a 
coil spring, one end of the flat metal spring at 
tached to the saddle seat, and the other end 
adjustably clamped to one end of the coil 
spring, by means of a bolt extending through 
a hole in the flat spring, With its outer end 
bearing on the flat spring, and its inner end 
screwed into a cap piece provided with 
grooves or depressions into which the ends of 
the coil spring extend, which are clamped 
upon the flat spring, and the other end of the 
coil spring attached to the saddle seat, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
6. The combination with a saddle seat, of a 
spring support, consisting of a flat metal 
spring, and a coil spring, one end of the flat 
metal spring attached to the saddle seat, and 
one end of the coil spring attached to the sad 
dle seat, the other ends of the flat metal 
spring and coil spring adjustably clamped to 
gether by a bolt extending through a hole in 
the flat metal spring, with its outer end bear 
ing on the lower surface of the flat metal 
spring, and its inner end Screwed into a cap 
piece provided with grooves or depressions 
into which the ends of the coil spring extend, 
and are inclosed within the downwardly ex 
tending sides of the cap piece, and clamped 
between the flat spring and the cap piece, 
substantially as shown and described. 
7. The combination with the saddle seat, 
having a hook attachment at one end, and a 
cantle or spring holder at the other end pro 
vided with an oblong slot or opening therein, 
into which one end of the supporting spring 
extends, and is secured by one or more set 
screws, of a spring support, consisting of a flat 
metal spring, and a coil spring, one end of the 
flat metal spring and one end of the coil 
spring attached to the saddle seat, and the 
other ends of the flat metal spring and the 
coil spring adjustably clamped together by 
means of a bolt extending through a hole in 
the flat metal spring, and a cap piece pro 
vided with grooves into which the ends of the 
O 
15 
25 
45 
55 
55 
 
75 
95 
CO 
IC) 
II5 
I 25 
4 
489,808 
5 
coil spring extend, said cap piece secured to forming the upper part of the clamp, and a 
the flat metal spring, to clamp the coil spring screw extending loosely through a hole in the 
and flat metal spring together, by said bolt, flat spring, and screwed into the cap piece to 
substantially as shown and described. 
8. In a saddle spring, the combination with spring together, substantially as shown and 
a coil spring, and a flat spring, of a clamp for described. 
adjustably securing together the flat spring 
and the coil spring, the flat spring forming 
the lower part of the clamp, and a cap piece 
Io provided with grooves or depressions into 
which the ends of the coil spring extend, 
Nr. 
JONATIHAN A. HUNT. 
IKATIE FARRELL, 
JOHN C. DEWEY. 
clamp the flat spring and the ends of coil 15 
Air 
ANT 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489408.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 489,408. 
L. M. BERRY. 
SPRINKLER, 
- 
Patented Jan. 3, l893. 
 
 
3v-uovuto 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS M. BERRY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SPRINKLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,408, dated January 3, 1893. 
Application filed July 21, 1892, Serial No. 440,716. (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS M. BERRY, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Sprinklers; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in sprinklers and has 
for its object the production of a cheap, sim 
ple and highly efficient portable sprinkler in 
which a maximum amount of Water can be 
held in suspension ready for use. 
The invention comprises a sprinkler having 
a vessel provided with a foraminous bottom 
and an absorbent of unwoven and unspun 
animal wool which will by capillary attraction 
absorb and hold a maximum amount of Water 
in suspension ready for sprinkling by shak 
ing the vessel, which latter is provided with 
a vent opening above the foraminous bottom 
to permit the water to escape and to vary the 
amount thereof, substantially as hereinafter 
fully set forth and particularly pointed outin 
the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figure lis 
a view in perspective of my improved sprink 
ler. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal Sectional 
view thereof. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
circular, or other shaped, box or body having 
a lower foraminous bottom a which is prefer 
ably slightly curved. To the top or one side 
of this box or body is secured a lateral pro 
jecting handle a' by which the operator holds 
or grasps the sprinkler. From the center of 
the top projects a threaded nipple or collar b 
with which engages a screw cap b' having a 
central vent opening b which may be made 
of various sizes to regulate the amount of es 
cape water held in suspension. 
B is an absorbent composed of unwoven and 
unspun animal wool located within and filling 
box or body A, it being supplied through the 
top thereof. The absorbent fills or occupies 
nearly the entire space within the box or body 
A and by employing animal Wool in its raw 
state I procure an absorbent of a Superior na 
ture. In this condition the wool is springy' 
In practice the box or body containing the 6o 
and will not becomesodden, thus preserving 
the fibers in an extended condition so that 
they will, by capillary attraction, absorb and 55 
hold or retain water in suspension throughout 
their entire length. Thus the fibers form al 
most innumerable capillary holders for the 
Water. 
wool filling is placed in a vessel or body of 
water so that the wool will absorb the water 
and hold it in suspension, all air being per 
mitted to escape through the vent opening. 
This opening likewise permits the absorbent 65 
to give forth the full quantity of water when 
the Sprinkler is shaken by the operator in 
Rinkling clothes, carpets, flowers and the 
ike. 
The advantages of my invention are appar-7o 
ent. In the first place a sprinkler thus con 
structed is extremely simple and inexpensive. 
By employing animal wool unwoven and un 
spun a Springy absorbent is secured and all 
the fibers will retain water throughout their 75 
entire length and likewise when the sprinkler 
is shaken or operated they will give forth 
every particle of water held in suspension. 
I am aware that it is not new to provide a 
sprinkler with a reservoir having a lower per-8o 
forated ball-like chamber in which a sponge 
is located to control the outflow of water and 
to absorb all water left in said chamber after 
sprinkling; and also that a sprinkler having 
screen covered ends and a sliding or movable 85 
absorbent pad has heretofore been employed. 
Also that it is old in the art to provide a 
clothes sprinkler with a circular piece of wire 
gauze and a pad of hair designed to hold 
water, which is ejected therefrom upon the 9o 
pad being struck against said screen; and 
also that a clothes sprinkler has been made 
by securing by threads a mass of tufts of 
Woolen yarn. My invention is designed as an 
improvement over all of these forms of inven- 95 
- tion. The animal wool employed by me is 
unspun and unwoven and is not formed into 
yarn tufts, nor is it attached by threads or 
any other means. It is placed in its natural 
State Within a reservoir having a foraminous Ioo 
bottom. The fibers of the wool will absorb 
and hold Water throughout their entirelength, 
and in this Way a maximum amount of Water 
is held in suspension and can be readily ejected 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
489,408 
in spray forms by merely shaking the sprink-posed of animal wool in its springy state un 
ler. A sprinkler thus constructed is ex-woven and unspun, substantially as set forth. 
tremely simple and inexpensive, and by 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
means thereof a highly efficient and service- specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
LOUIS M. BERRY. 
5 able device is secured. 
I claim as my invention:- 
The herein-described improved sprinkler, 
comprising the box or body having a forami- 
nous bottom and a vent or opening in its top, 
Io and an absorbent in said box or body com- 
Witnesses: 
MICHAEL WILLIAM BRICK, 
LEWIS W. HOWES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489508.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 489,508; 
M. M. SUPPES. 
BRACE CHAIR FOR GIRDER RAILS, 
Patented Jan. 10, 1893. 
 
 
2% Zi % 
A. 
  
 
  
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR. 
A TTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAX M. SUPPES, OF JOHNSTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
JOHNSON COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BRACE CHAIR FOR GRDERRA LS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,508, dated January 10, 1893. 
Yx 
Application filed February 20, 1890, Serial No. 341,173, (No model.) 
end of Said blank turned over so as to form a 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MAX M. SUPPES, of retaining clip for the lower flange of the rail. 
K, indicates a key which holds the rail down 
Johnstown, in the county of Cambria and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new to its seat when driven home. 
The dotted lines in Fig. 4 show the shape 
and useful Brace-Chair for Girder-Rails, 
which invention is fully set forth and illus- of the upper portion of the piece of metal, 
trated in the following specification and ac- before the same is bent to form a side brace 
and retaining clip as herein described. 
Companying drawings. 
It will be observed that the even-sided 
The object of this invention is sufficiently 
indicated by its title. 
girder of the shape such as is ordinarily in 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
the market, can be utilized for making this 
chair, by shearing off the portion of the same 
shows the chair in end-elevation with a rail, 
shown in cross-section, in place. Fig. 2, is a 
indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 5, between 
side-elevation of Fig.1, looking to the left. Fig. 
the letters c and J, though it is evident that 
this waste of material could be saved by spe 
3 shows the chair in plan, and Fig. 4, the chair 
cially rolling a piece of metal to the shape 
in perspective, the rail being omitted in both 
figures. Fig. 5 is a sectional view of the shape 
shown in section in Fig. 5, for the manufac 
or blank of metal out of which the chair is 
ture of the chair. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
made. Fig. 6 is a view in perspective of the 
key used to hold the rail in its seat. 
A rail-chair constructed out of a girder 
In said figures the several parts are re- 
spectively indicated by letters of reference as shape of metal by bending one of its longi 
tudinal side-flanges so as to form a retaining 
follows:- 
The letter A, indicates the vertical web of clip for the lower portion of the rail, and 
the chair; d, a, the lower flanges of the same, bending the other longitudinal side-flange so 
forming the feet of the chair; and b, b, a por 
as to form an outside brace, said clip and 
brace being parallel to the web of the chair. 
tion of the upper flanges of the same, form 
ing the rail-seat. 
The letter B indicates that portion of the 
upper flange of the blank of metal used, bent 
over to form a brace for the rail; and c, one 
DANIEL COOLIDGE, 
W. MCILAIN. 
MAX M. SUPPES. 
tion, I claim:- 
Witnesses: 
35 
40 
45 
55 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489608.txt	(No Model.) 
B. F. KLINE. 
RIVETING TOOL 
No. 489,608, 
Patented Jan. 10, 1893. 
 
Aitpasses 
W6, of 
y has 
Alfrpeys, 
Ipepir 
A.A.A.Z tree. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BRUCE F. KLINE, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO SMITH & BOULLEMET, OF SAME PLACE. 
RIVETING-TOOL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,608, dated January 10, 1893, 
Application filed August 16, 1892, Serial No. 443,276, (No model.) 
w 
zo scribed and claimed. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BRUCEF. KLINE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at New Or 
leans, in the parish of Orleans and State of 
5 Louisiana, have invented a new and useful 
Tool for Riveting, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to tools for riveting, 
especially applicable for use in making or Se 
to curing the parts of box loops of harness, and 
has for its object to provide an attachment 
for application to any form of riveting ma 
chine and whereby the rivets may be inserted 
into and properly upset without injuring the 
15 loop or defacing the surface thereof and at 
the same time provide a secure fastening, 
and with this object in view the invention 
consists of the construction and arrangement 
of parts as will be more fully hereinafter de 
In the drawings:-Figure 1, is a perspec 
tive view of a box loop showing the improved 
device in connection there with and in opera 
tive position. Fig. 2 is a similar view of the 
25 device detached. Fig. 3 is a similar view of 
a slight modification in the construction in 
the device. 
Similar numerals of reference are employed 
to indicate corresponding parts in the several 
Referring to the drawings, the numeral 1, 
designates the tool or device entire which is 
constructed of two parallel flat bars of any 
desired length or width and can be of inte 
35 gral formation as shown by Figs. 1, and 2, or 
of two separate bars fastened together at one 
end as shown by Fig. 3. On the bottom end 
portion of one of the bars is formed an anvil 
post 2, adapted to be fitted into a socket of 
4o any preferred form of riveting machine to 
hold the device in proper position and on the 
uppermost end portion of the opposite bar is 
an anvil tip 3, which prevents the rivet from 
going through portions of the loop not re 
45 quired and upsets or clinches the opposite 
side of said rivet. The opening between the 
bars extends through one end of the tool in 
order to allow the latter to have one of its 
bars inserted in the box loop which is to be 
so riveted, and in positioning the rivets on the 
loop the flat heads thereof are located upper 
most and on the outside it being understood 
that the riveting machines drive the rivets 
through the portion of the box loop to be fas 
3o figures. 
75 
tened against the anvil tip 3. The form of 55 
fastening for a box loop as herein specified 
provides a strong and durable means of se 
curing the parts and avoids the employment 
of Stitching and thereby save labor, time and 
expense. Furthermore, the operation of fas- 6o 
tening in the manner set forth may be more 
speedily accomplished with a resulting neat 
ness of appearance. 
The tool or device set forth may be made 
in any size and the bars themselves of any 
preferred thickness to suit different purposes 
or sizes of box loops. It will be understood 
that the tool or device will be formed of suit 
able material and that the nature of the riv 
eting machine With which the same is used 
may be of any of the well known forms now 
commonly employed and embodying a socket 
in which the anvil post 2, may be removably 
fitted. The bars are connected to each other, 
or Solid, at One end, as shown, and in each 
instance leaving a lateral opening or space 
between the same, and the bars at their open 
ends are normally in proximity to each other 
and diverging there from to provide a close 
contact when in engagement with the box 
loops, thereby adapting a single device of the 
character set forth for use in connection with 
box loops constructed of various thicknesses 
of material. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is:- 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
riveting tool or device for use in connection 
with box loops, consisting of a pair of bars 
connected to each other, at one end leaving go 
a lateral opening or space between the same, 
and said bars being normally in proximity 
at the open ends thereof and diverging there. 
from to provide a close contact when in en 
gagement With the box loops, and one of said 
bars being adapted to be inserted in the box 
loops and having an anvil tip on the upper 
most portion of one end thereof, the opposite 
bar being provided with an anvil post located 
on the under side of the free end thereof, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
95 
BRUCE. F. KLINE. 
IOO 
Witnesses: 
W. A. WENCK, 
WM. KENAUDIN, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489708.txt	E. A. COX. 
CULTIVATOR, 
Patented Jan. 10, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 489,708. 
 
m 
ZA Coas. 
Aftero, jy M2 z's Jilterseys, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELZA ALLISON COX, OF RUTLEDGE, MISSOURI. 
CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,708, dated January 10, 1893. 
Application filed September 27, 1892, Serial No. 447,034 (No model.) 
O 
To all wron, it may concern: 
14 designates a convoluted spring, whose in 
Be it known that I, ELZA ALLISON COX, a ner terminal is bent around a stud 15 project 
citizen of the United States, residing at Rut-ing from that lever farthest from the link, the 
ledge, in the county of Scotland and State of stud being eccentrically arranged with rela 
Missouri, have invented a new and useful Cull-tion to the pivot bolt 7 at the front ends of 
tivator, of which the following is a specifica- said levers. The remaining terminal of the 
tion. 
convoluted spring extends forward under the 
My invention relates to improvements in beam and is bent to engage the same, as indi 
cultivators, and the objects in view are to pro- cated at 16. 
vide a cultivator so constructed and arranged 
This completes the construction of the cul 
as to adapt the tooth thereof to readily ride tivator, and the operation of the same will at 
Over obstructions, such as stumps, bowlders, once be obvious, but may be briefly stated as 
&c., that may be encountered in the field dur. follows: By setting the set bolt, the link is 
ing plowing, and which would be calculated forced downward as are also the rear ends of 
to impair the tooth by such contact if the the levers so that the three points of pivot in 
Same were unyielding. 
dicated as 5, 7, and 10 are out of alignment 
With this main object in view, the inven- with each other. The tendency of the spring, 
tion consists in certain features of construc- it will be observed, is to elevate the outer 
tion hereinafter specified, and particularly ends of the Jevers, and thus force the shovel 
pointed out in the claims. 
to the front. The shovel, however, coming in 
Referring to the drawings-Figure 1 is a contact with any obstruction, such as a stump 
perspective view of a cultivator constructed or bowlder, is swung to the rear, and through 
in accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is the medium of the link draws upon the rear 
a reverse side elevation thereof. 
ends of the levers, consequently embracing 
Like numerals of reference indicate like the spring, and as soon as said shovel is re 
parts in all the figures of the drawings, 
lieved of the obstruction, the spring will re 
I designates an ordinary goose-neck stand- act to return the parts to their normal posi 
ard, whose lower or standard end is embraced tions. 
By my invention, I obviate the use of the 
by the terminals of a U-shaped foot 2, to 
which the plow-point or shovel 3 is attached troublesome break-pins, which after breakage 
in the usual adjustable manner by means of must be replaced before the cultivator can 
the heel-bolt 4. A pivot bolt 5 serves to piv- again be operated, and while all the advan 
Otally connect the foot of the standard near tages of break-pins are secured yet I provide 
the lower end of the latter, and the said stand- for an automatic return of the parts to their 
ard is provided at its front upper corner with normal or working positions. At the same 
a pair of forwardly-disposed perforated lugs time the means employed are simple, are not 
6, through which a bolt 7 is passed. A pair of liable to become impaired by use, and are 
levers 8 are located at opposite sides of and durable. 
embrace the standard a short distance above 
Having described my invention, what I 
the foot, and such levers are pivotally con- claim is:- 
nected at their front ends to the aforesaid 
1. The combination with the beam, having 
standard by means of a transverse pivot bolt 9. the goose-neck standard, and the U-shaped 
The outer ends of the levers are connected by shovel-carrying foot pivoted intermediate its 
means of a transverse bolt 10, and to one end ends to the lower end of the standard, of the 
of the same outside of the levers, is pivoted pair of levers pivoted to the standard above 
a link 11, whose front end is likewise pivoted the foot, a link pivoted to the upper front cor 
to the before-mentioned bolt 5. From the up- ners of the foot in advance of the standard 
per edge of that lever adjacent to the link 
and at its rear end pivotally connected to the 
there projects a flange 12, having a threaded 
rear ends of the levers, a stop for limiting the 
perforation, through which extends a set screw 
upward movement of the link and preventing 
13 whose lower end is designed to contact 
the points of pivot of the link and levers from 
with and form a stop for the link. 
aligning, and a convoluted spring secured at 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
Idd 
 
2 
489,708 
its inner end to one of the levers eccentrically 
with relation to the pivot of the same and at 
its outer end to the beam, substantially as 
specified. 
2. The combination with the beam and the 
shovel-carrying foot pivoted intermediate its 
ends to the lower end of the standard, of the 
pair of levers pivoted to the standard above 
the foot, a link pivoted to the upper front cor 
Io ners of the foot in advance of the standard 
and at its rear end pivotally connected to the 
rear ends of the levers, an adjustable stop for 
limiting the upward movement of the link and 
 
preventing the points of pivot of the link and 
levers from aligning, and a convoluted Spring I5 
secured to one of the levers eccentrically with 
relation to the pivot of the same and to the 
beam, substantially as Specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 25 
the presence of two witnesses. 
ELZA ALLISON COX. 
Witnesses: 
M. L. SMITH, 
J. N. MATLICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489808.txt	2. sheets-Sheet 1. 
  
 
  
  
 
2 
s 2 
% 
 
SS 
 
3-vuovo 
enorris PETERS co, picto-tho. washington.o. 
(No Model.) 
R. S. HIG GINS. 
FEED TROUGH, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 489,808. 
Patented Jan. 10, 1893, 
 
 
3v-uovo 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ROZANDER. S. HIGGINS, OF NEOGA, ILLINOIS. 
FEED TROUGH 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,808, dated January 10, 1893. 
Application filed August ll, l892, Serial No. 442,74l, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all uphon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROZANDER. S. HIGGINs, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Neoga, in the county of Cumberland 
and State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Feed-Troughs; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
feed troughs, the object of which is to provide 
a feed trough which will be simple in construc 
tion, and by means of which the trough proper 
can be readily emptied or cut off from the pen 
When desired; and the invention consists in 
the construction and combination of the parts, 
as will be hereinafter fully set forth and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification: Figure 1 is a per 
spective view showing the trough in a posi 
tion for filling. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional 
view. Fig. 3 is a front elevation, and Fig. 4 
an end view. 
A designates the base of the trough, which 
is provided with vertical supports B B, to the 
upper ends of which is hung a swinging frame 
Chaving vertical pieces which taper upwardly, 
and to said vertical pieces are attached cross 
strips c c' and c, as shown in the drawings. 
The lower strip, c, which lies adjacent to the 
trough is of greater width than the other cross 
Strips, and to the same is pivoted a lever hav 
ing locking bars d and d', which pass through 
Suitable guides or loops and are adapted to 
engage either with recesses in one side of the 
Supports B to hold the swinging frame beyond 
the trough, or with blocks upon the opposite 
side of said supports to retain the frame im 
mediately above the trough. When the swing 
ing frame is located above the trough it will 
partition the same off and will keep the hogs 
or other animals feeding out of the trough 
Separated; and the lower edges of the vertical 
pieces C of this swinging frame will contact 
with the upper edge of the trough and pre 
vent the same being tilted. 
E designates a board which is secured near 
the lower ends of the supports B so as to pre 
vent the animals rooting under the trough or 
in any other manner upsetting the same. 
To the rear ends of the uprights or supports 
B is secured a board E, which is inclined in 
two directions, and is provided with an up 
wardly projecting end piece e and a vertical 
strip e' to which is hinged a suitable cover. 
When the trough Tistilted the contents there 
of may be deposited upon the board, and When 
the cover is folded over to rest upon the board 
E it forms a convenient platform, upon which 
the person filling the trough may stand. By 
providing this inclined board and cover the 
trough when emptied will not leave the usual 
puddle, and the attendanthas a clean platform 
to stand on. An ordinary draining trench 
may lead from the inclined board. The trough 
Tis pivoted to the inner sides of the uprights, 
and one of the sides thereof is of greater 
width than the other. 
In use, when it is desired to fill the trough 
the swinging frame is swung inwardly or to 
ward the pen and secured in such position by 
the levers and bars carried thereby, and the 
wide cross-strip c to which the lever is piv 
oted in connection with the board E will cut 
off all communication between the pen and 
trough. When the trough has been filled the 
bars are released and the swinging frame will 
assume a vertical position, the lower edges 
thereof contacting with the upper edges of 
the inclined boards forming the trough will 
thus prevent the trough being tilted, the press 
ure of the partition pieces also forcing the 
narrower board of the trough against the up 
per edge of the board E. It will be noted 
that to accomplish this result the wide ends 
of the vertical pieces of the swinging frame 
are cut at right angles with the rear edge which 
carries the cross strip c, and that the lower 
edge of this cross strip is beveled for engage 
ment with the wider board of the trough which 
projects above the end pieces thereof. The 
trough is hung by trunnions as shown, so that 
it may be removed from the frame when de 
sired. 
I am aware that prior to my invention it has 
been proposed to provide an animal trough 
with a swinging frame with partitions to sep 
arate the animals from each other, and means 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
CO 
2 
489,808 
for holding the swinging frame in such posi 
tions that it may be placed, and I therefore 
do not claim such construction broadly; but 
What I do claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters-Patent, is: 
1. In an animal trough or stock feeder, the 
combination of uprights supporting a swing 
ing frame and a trough, said trough being 
made up of end pieces and longitudinal in 
clined boards one of which is extended up 
Ward to contact with the swinging frame, and 
a receptacle located to one side of the trough, 
Substantially as shown, and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
2. In combination with a pivoted trough, a 
receptacle adjacent thereto, said receptacle 
Consisting of an inclined bottom board and a 
Io 
vertical side board to which a cover is hinged, 
said cover being adapted to fold over the re 
ceptacle, for the purpose set forth. 
3. In an animal trough or stock feeder, the 
combination of a pivoted trough One of the 
sides of which is of greater width than the 
other, an inclined receptacle E secured ad 
jacent to the wider side of the trough, and a 
cover for said receptacle, substantially as 
shown. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
ROZANDER. S. HIGGINS. 
Witnesses: 
M. A. EWING, 
N. CROOKSHANK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US489908.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 489,908. 
F. U. ADAMS. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
VENTILATING APPARATUS FOR RAILWAY CARS IN TRAINs. 
Patented Jan, 17, 1893. 
E 
  
-- 
---m- 
-- 
- 
 
M--- -- 
 
 
 
 
Z22a-c). Zaee-27s. 
24%- 
u-ze 
(No Model.) 
8. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
F, U. ADAMS, 
VENTILATING APPARATUS FOR RAILWAY CARS IN TRAINs. 
No, 489,998. 
SE 
Vs 
' 
Patented Jan. 17, 1893. 
W 
727zesses. 
A.6 .6-6 ed 
N 
2e2/(.7%7%ze, 
 
Z27zz722, 
Szz. 2T 
2u, afe-a-726-221 
-Z2/Cze/2u,0 
u-22-s, 
(No Model.) 
No. 489,908, 
F. U, ADAMS, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
WENTILATING APPARATUS FOR RAILWAY CARS IN TRAINS, 
Patented Jan. 17, 1893, 
1. 
| 
Z/2247 yes, 
A- '6'ode 
P 
Z2.27% 
3. 2 (7-22227s. 
r 2-6-4-Y72-1-1---- 
 
\ \ 
 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
VENTILATING APPARATUS FOR RAILWAY CARs IN TRAINS, 
F. U. ADAMS, 
No. 489,908. 
Patented Jan, 17, 1893. 
s 
ym 
7%zza2.Jey. 
A 6 '64 ?ee - 
(224.1%. 
Z22-222/? 
- Z22627-ca Zo (627-73, 
2% 
N12222s 
- 
 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
WENTILATING APPARATUS FOR RAILWAY CARS IN TRAINS, 
F, U. ADAMS, 
No. 489,908. 
 
Patented Jan, 17, 1893, 
 
 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
NS 
: 
 
 
 
s 
Ns 
 
 
 
 
s 
--- PRP s 
S. 
- 
Se 
SS 
727zvely. 
/664. S. 
Zeaere & Z. 67-72s, 
 
(No Model.) 
F. U, ADAMS, 
8. Sheets-Sheet 6. 
WENTILATING APPARATUS FOR RAILWAY CARS IN TRAINS, 
No. 489,908. 
Patented Jan, ll, 1893, 
  
72a2zecayey, 
/66 e 
Z22-2-12227 
Zvozzi. (2-4-3- 
12e2-2%. ZZ (7-0-2227s. 
the NORRIS PeTERS Co., Photo-ITHo, WASHINGTON, D. c. 
 
VENTILATINGAPPARATUS FOR RAILWAY CARS IN TRAINS. 
F. U. ADAMS, 
8 Sheets-Sheet, 7. 
(No Model.) 
No. 489,908, 
Patented Jan, 17, 1893. 
 
| 
|||||||||||||||| 
Z2-az-ace Za 62-727s. 
(No Model.) 
8 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
F, U. ADAMS. 
WENTILATING APPARATUS FOR RAILWAY CARS IN TRAINS, 
No. 489,908, 
Patented Jan, 17, 1893. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N SS 
N 
N. 
NeseseSeSee 
SSSaySSSYaySSSSSSassassina SSSSSS NanaYan N 
N. N. 
-N 
N. 
N. 
 
 
 
 
 
M6 6.--& 
272.2% 
Zezel-22 z zves. 
 
- 
JZZeat. 
The NORRIS PETERS co, ProTo-Ho. WASHINGto... c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK U. ADAMS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
ROBERT S. McCORMICK, OF SAME PLACE. 
WENT LATING APPARATUS FOR RALWAY. CARS IN TRANS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 489,908, dated January 17, 1893. 
Application filed November 24, 1891, Serial No. 412,924 (No model) 
O 
25 
35 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICKU. ADAMS, 
of Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Air-Supplying Appara 
tus for Railway - Cars in Trains; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention has reference to the supply 
of fresh air to the interior of railway trains 
and to its distribution to different parts of 
each car. 
In the accompanying drawings the inven 
tion is illustrated in connection with a pas 
senger train having some other improvements 
not herein described. 
Figure 1 is a plan or top view of a railway 
train provided with my improvement and also 
illustrating a construction of the exterior of 
the train which is not claimed in this specifi 
cation. Fig. 2 is a side view of the part of 
the train seen in top view in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
is a side view illustrating a modification of 
the construction shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 
4 is a top view of the construction shown in 
Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a central, vertical, longitudi 
nal section of portions of two adjacent cars 
of a train containing my improvement. Fig. 
6 is a vertical, transverse section in the line 
6-6 of Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is an end view of the up 
per portion of a car containing my improve 
ment and having the main air duct of said im 
provement located at the top of the car. Fig. 
8 is a horizontal section in the line 8-8 of 
Fig. 6. Fig. 9 is an enlarged side view of the 
upper and adjacent end portions of two con 
nected cars of a train, a portion of the side 
of one of the cars being broken away. Fig. 
10, is a horizontal, longitudinal section in the 
line 10-10 of Fig. 5 of the proposed main air 
duct showing branches leading therefrom and 
adjustable deflectors for directing a portion 
of the air flowing in the main duct into said 
branches. Fig. 11 is a central, vertical, lon 
gitudinal section of main air duct in the line 
11-11 of Fig. 10. Fig. 12 is a front view 
partly in transverse vertical section of the 
mouth or air-receiving end of the main air 
duct. Fig. 13 is a vertical, longitudinal sec 
tion of the mouth of the main air duct in the 
line 13-13 of Fig. 12. Fig. 14 is an enlarged, 
vertical, longitudinal section of the support 
ing device for one of the extensible and flexi 
ble extremities of the section of the main air 
duct which belongs to an individual car. Fig. 
15 is a top view of the construction shown in 
Fig. 14. Fig. 15, is a fragmentary elevation 
and partial section of the device of Figs. 14 
and 15. Fig. 16 is a vertical, longitudinal sec 
tion of a portion of a service car for a 
train containing my improvement. Fig.17 is 
a horizontal section in the line 17-17 of Fig. 
16. Fig. 18 is a transverse vertical section of 
a car of ordinary form provided with my im 
provement. Fig. 19 is a fragmentary verti 
cal, longitudinal section in the line 19-19 of 
Fig. 18. 
A represents a railway passenger car pro 
vided (as seen in Fig. 5), with seats a car 
ranged transversely to the car in the usual 
Way. 
Bis a main air duct passing the entirelength 
of the car, either in the overhead position 
shown or in any other position that may be 
preferred. B' B' are also longitudinal air 
ducts arranged one at each side of the car at 
either the top or the bottom and connected 
with the main duct by transverse branches 
B3 B3. 
B B, are vertical ducts in the side of the 
car leading from the longitudinal ducts B'B', 
as indicated, and provided with openings bb 
at any desired elevation and in any desired 
position with respect to the seats a, a. 
CC are suitable flexible or flexible and ex 
tensible couplings by which the main duct B 
of one car may be joined and made continu 
ous with that of another car. . The air will be 
admitted to the main duct at some conven 
ient or desirable point at the head of the train, 
and as it passes backwardly through the duct, 
it is directed by Suitable mechanism into the 
branches and is finally delivered into the car 
interior through the openings b b. 
Deflecting devices adapted to regulate the 
amount of air sent from the main duct B into 
a branch B", and thence through the open 
ings b b into the car, are shown at B Figs. 8, 
10, and 11. Of these deflector devices b' is a 
95 
IOO 
489,908 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
long plate arranged vertically on its edge 
metal frame c attached to the outer end of the 
flexible part c, provided with means for at 
within the duct B, and desirably extending 
tachment to the similar frame belonging to an 
from the bottom to the top wall of the duct, 
adjacent car, and a vibratory support or Sup 
being pivoted at one end upon a vertical pivot 
ports c'. The first of these, to-wit, the flexible 
b', located opposite the middle of the inlet 
and extensible prolongation c of the duct B, is 
opening to the branch B. One of these piv 
shown as being of the accordion form, being 
oted plates b', extends lengthwise of the duct 
of any material suitable for flexure in thatform. 
in each direction and from the same or an 
The second part or the hollow end frame c', 
adjacent pivot a shorter plate () extends to or 
has a flat end face adapted to make close con 
into the mouth of the said branch B. The 
tact with the similar end frame of the next 
two plates to may be made integral, if de 
car, and is provided with lugs c, which pro 
sired. Suitable means, operable from the out 
ject forwardly on all sides So as to embrace its 
side of the duct, will be employed to shift the 
fellow, whereby the two meeting end frames 
position of either plate b', such means being 
of adjacent duct sections hold each other lat 
shown as an external knobb', having a shank 
erally in place. The supports care metal 
which extends through a curved slotb, in the 
rods pivoted or universally jointed at their 
lower wall of the duct into connection with 
outer ends to central points of the end frames 
the deflector plate. The deflector plate be 
c" and having both vibratory and lengthwise 
ing given any desired inclination to the ad 
1movement with respect to the end of the car. 
jacent side wall of the duct B, and having its 
This construction is indicated more clearly in 
outwardly projecting end toward the head of 
the enlarged views shown in Figs. 14, 15, 
the train, a corresponding quantity of air 
and 15. 
will be led from the main duct into the branch. 
As above stated, the main duct may bear 
The pressure of the air against the short plate 
ranged to take fresh air from any chosen 
b may, if said plate be properly mounted, be 
point at or near the head of the train. Two 
relied on to push it against the rear side of 
such arrangements are herein shown, one in 
the branch opening. 
Providing two plates b', one projecting to 
Figs. 1 and 2, in which the mouth of said 
duct is at the front end of the car next the 
ward each end of the car, adapts the device 
tender, and the other in Figs, 3 and 4, in 
for operation when the car is running in either 
which the duct is branched, the branches ex 
direction and by providing such deflectors in 
tending for Wardly at opposite sides of the 
each car of a train, the air supply for each car 
tender. In either of these positions it will 
may be independently regulated with a refer 
take pure air Only, since the emanations from 
ence to the consumption of its predecessors in 
the smoke stack will pass above it. 
the train. The opposite deflectors may be 
in Figs. 12 and 13 an automatic valve is 
adapted to meet each other, as indicated, by 
shown applied to the mouth of the main air 
dotted lines in Fig. 10, so that they may close 
duct by which it is proposed to secure a regu 
the duct of the rear car, and thus compel the 
lar supply of air to the cars notwithstanding 
distribution through the train of all air ad 
variations in the speed of the train. Here E 
mitted to the duct. 
is a vane or flap hinged to a margin of the 
Any suitable air outlet or outlets from the 
mouth of the duct B, and normally hanging 
car being provided, as, for example, indicated 
or standing in a plane transverse to the car 
at D in Figs. 6,7, and 9, the induction and dis 
or duct. F is a valve adapted to narrow the 
tribution devices described will afford supply 
duct inlet or passage being shown as a slide 
of fresh air in determinable quantities to all 
entering the duct through a slot f in the bot 
parts of the car. With such provisions more 
tom, to which bottom the flap Eis also hinged. 
over, it is manifest that the windows of the 
Between the flap and the valve are suitable 
car need never be opened and that perfect air 
connections through which a backward move 
supply and ventilation may therefore be ob. 
ment of the flap on its hinge will produce an 
tained without admission of dust or the pro 
in Ward thrust of the valve and a correspond 
duction of offensive air currents. It may be 
ing contraction of the duct passage. These 
assumed that the windows shown are inca 
connections, as shown, comprise a curved arm 
pable of being opened and this feature, in com 
e, attached to the flap E, and a linke' pivot 
bination with distributing ducts and air out 
ally connected with both the arm and the 
let devices, is made the subject of one of the 
valve. The link is shown as having a slot e? 
hereto appended claims. 
The discharge openings b b, are shown pro 
to receive the pivot bolt et, by which it is 
connected to the arm e to permit adjustment. 
vided with screen coverings to arrest, the dust 
and they may also, if desired, be provided 
The point of connection between the link and 
the Valve is supported by a guide f' and a 
with individual registers of any preferred con 
spring f is arranged to normally open the 
struction. 
Valve. As indicated in Fig. 12, a set of like 
The coupling C for uniting sections of the 
connections is applied to each end of the 
main duct may be of any desired construction 
valve, the latter being of considerable length. 
So far as it concerns other parts of the inven 
It is manifest that the greater the wind 
tion. The form of such coupling shown com 
preSSure upon the flap E, the more it will be 
prises a hollow flexible and extensible portion 
c, attached to the end of each duct, a hollow inclined backwardly from its normal plane 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
- 
N 
489,908 
55 
5. In apparatus for supplying air to the in- 6o 
brought together, or practically so, for the 
purpose of closing the main duct to the es 
cape of air at its rear end. 
4. The combination. With an air ductB, ap 
plied to a railway train, of a movable vane E, 
arranged to present its face to the air press 
ure encountered by the train, a movable valve 
F, applied to the duct, a link connection be 
tween the vane and the valve arranged to pro 
duce a closing movement of the valve by a 
rearward movement of the vane and a spring 
or springs arranged to produce an opening 
movement of the valve. 
terior of railway cars, the combination, with 
a rigid portion of a main air supply duct con 
nected with a car body, of a flexible and ex 
tensible prolongation of said duct exterior to 
the end of the car, a rigid, hollow frame ap 
plied to the outer end of the flexible portion, 
a laterally and vertically yielding support for 
said frame, and a spring or springs arranged 
to press the end frame outwardly, the whole 
being adapted to join with a similar prolon 
gation upon the end of an adjacent car to 
form a flexible joint in a duct continuous 
from car to car. 
6. In apparatus for Supplying air to the in 
terior of railway cars, the combination, with 
a flexible and extensible prolongation, exte 
rior to the end of the car, of an air duct con 
nected with the body of the car and deliver 
ing into its interior, of a rigid, hollow frame 
at the outer end of said extensible prolonga 
tion of the duct, a supporting bar or rod uni 
versally jointed to said terminal frame of the 
duct and having a sliding and vibrating con 
nection with the car, and a spring arranged 
to press the frame outwardly from the car. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I affix my signature in presence 
of two witnesses. 
FREDERICK U. ADAMS. 
75 
Witnesses: 
M. E. DAYTON, 
C. CLARENCE POOLE. 
S 
O 
25 
40 
and the farther the valve F will be thrustin 
ward and the entrance of air to the duct B 
restricted. But with this greater air pressure 
there will be a correspondingly greater ve 
locity of air within the duct, so that notwith 
standing the contraction of the passage a re 
quired current of air will reach the interior 
of the car. 
In Fig. 12 the mouth of the main air duct 
is covered with a screen G, which may be used 
or not as found desirable. 
Figs. 16 and 17 show a service' car con 
taining a fan blower H which delivers into 
the main duct B, through a supply branch 
H', said blower being intended for use when 
the train is standing or when for any reason 
a sufficient current is not induced through 
the open mouth of said duct. The blower 
will be driven by a motor H located on the 
car, as shown. 
I claim as my invention. 
1. In a railway car, the combination of a 
longitudinally arranged main air-supply duct, 
longitudinal ducts at the sides of the car con 
nected with the main duct and vertical ducts 
leading from the said side ducts and discharg 
ing into the car interior. 
2. In a railway car, the combination with a 
main air-supply duct having a branch lead 
ing therefrom for the delivery of air to the 
car interior, of two oppositely directed de 
flecting plates within the main air duct hinged 
at a point opposite the opening into the 
branch, and at a distance therefrom, and an 
additional pivoted plate projecting from the 
junction of the two oppositely directed plates 
toward the branch opening. 
3. In a railway car the combination, with a 
main air supply duct having opposite branches 
leading therefrom for the delivery of air to 
the car interior at opposite sides of the car, 
two deflecting plates arranged within the 
main air duct on opposite sides thereof and 
hinged or pivoted on vertical axes in position 
to deflect air from the main duct into said 
branches and adapted to have their free ends 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490008.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 490,008, 
R. E. WOODWARD 
INHALER 
Patented Jan. 17, 1893, 
stress 2. 
Witnesses 
Czect? (2/26%44 
 
Inventor 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROLAND EDGAR WOODWARD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
NHALER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,008, dated January 17, 1898. 
Application filed December 28, 1891, Serial No, 416,398, (No model.) 
C 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ROLAND EDGAR WOOD 
WARD, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Chicago, in the county of Cook, State 
5 of Illinois, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in an Apparatus for 
Medicating Atmospheric Air, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
what is known as an inhaler' used for 
medicating atmospheric air, with remedies 
used in the treatment of disease of the hu 
man System especially of the air passages, 
throat and lungs. 
My objects are first, to provide means by 
which the inhaler may be reduced in size, 
and have its efficiency and convenience in 
creased. Second, to provide a means by 
which medicaments may be more easily 
placed in the jar and cup designed for their 
reception, and third to provide a more con 
venient inhaling pipe, with a means of pre 
venting the evaporation and loss of medi 
caments placed in the cup and jar. I attain 
these objects by means illustrated in the ac 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of the 
apparatus, showing all parts in position; Fig. 
2 is a plan section on the line ac-ac showing 
the shape and relation of the casings or drums 
and the position of the cup. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tion of the cup 13 detached with attachments 
thereto taken out. Fig. 4 is a plan view of 
the ball seat of the cup 13. 
Similar figures refer to similar parts through 
out the various views. 
In the drawings 7 represents the drying 
chamber, 8 represents the heat retaining cas 
ing, while 9 is the outer casing. Connected 
with the drying chamber by the pipe 6 is the 
circular jar 1, said pipe 6 extending down 
ward into the jar a short distance. In the 
side of the jar is the opening 2, which is cov 
ered by the perforated plate 3, said plate be 
ing placed in a rim so that it may be easily 
removed. In the bottom of the jar is an 
opening 5, which is covered by the perforated 
plate 4, this opening permits the air to pass 
up into the jar through the medicaments 
5c which may be placed upon the perforated 
plate 4. Connected with the plate 24 is a cir 
45 
25 
35 
cular opening surrounded by the plate 21 
which is pressed into screw form. Into this 
opening a gas burner 20 is screwed, or it may 
be a lamp, by which means heat is applied 
to the drying chamber 6. An opening 22 is 
placed in the outside casing to enable air to 
pass into the apparatus. 
At the top of the apparatus is placed the 
medicating cup 13 connected with the drying 
chamber 7 by means of the pipe 12, which is 
inserted into the chamber through an inclos 
ing pipe 25, as shown in Fig. 1 of the draw 
ings, and below the cup is the bracket 23 
upon which the cup rests. In removing the 
cup the pipe 12 is drawn out of the inclosing 
pipe 25 and the cup slid off the bracket. In 
the bottom of the cup is the asbestus wafer 
17, made of that material to withstand the 
heat. At the top of the cup is the ball socket 
plate 15 made to fit into the cup and having 
a socket into which the ball 16 exactly fits. 
This ball should be made of aluminum or 
other very light substance, to enable the least 
possible resistance rising when the air is 
drawn up. Below said plate 15 is a perfo 
rated plate 14, which rests on an indenture in 
the cup 13, and thus it is prevented from fall 
ing below. Connected with the top of the 
cup 13 is the inhaling tube 18, having at its 
extremity the mouth piece 19, through which 
tube the air is drawn. 
Passing through the top of the heat retain 
ing casing 8 and the drying chamber 7 is the 
tube 11, having in its lower end an asbestus 
wafer. Into this tube is inserted a ther 
mometer, which passes out through the cover 
10, and thus enables the person using it to 
know the degree of heat in the apparatus. 
In using the apparatus the burner 20 is 
lighted and the flame passes upward against 
the drying chamber 6, the heatretaining cas 
ing 8 catching the heat, and passing it up 
along the sides of the drying chamber. Into 
the jar 1 are placed medicaments as is also 
done in the cup 13, and when the proper tem 
perature is indicated the mouth is placed 
upon the mouth piece 19 and upon drawing 
in the breath, the air passes into the jar 1 
through the openings 2 and 5, then up through 
the pipe 6 into the drying chamber; from 
there it is drawn through the pipe 12 into the 
55 
75 
Iod 
2 
490,008 
...O 
25 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
aperture all substantially, as and for the use 
set forth. . 
2. In an inhaler, the combination of the dry 
ing chamber 7 and the circular casings 8 and 
9 with the removable cup 13 for holding medi 
caments, the pipe connecting said cup with 
the drying chamber, the asbestus wafer in 
the bottom of said cup, the perforated plate 
14, the ball seat 15 and the ball 16, said seat 
being so formed as to prevent escape of va 
pors when the ball is in place and the in 
haling tube 18 provided with a mouth piece 
and attached to the cup all substantially as 
shown, and for the use set forth. 
. 
ROLAND EDGAR W()ODWARD. . 
. 
. 
E.R. WADSWORTH, 
L. C. WALTERS. 
Witnesses: 
: 
; 
. 
. 
. 
 
cup thence upward through the perforated 
plate, and lifting the ball 16 it passes through 
the inhaling tube into the lungs, having been 
heated to a high degree of temperature, and 
having had medicaments introduced. 
Having thus described my improvements 
what I desire to claim as my invention, and 
to secure by Letters Patent is; 
1. In an inhaler the combination of the dry 
ing chamber 7 and the circular casings 8 and 
9, with the circular jar, the connection pipe, 
6 connecting said jar with the drying cham 
ber 7, the plate 2 attached to the side of the 
jar and forming a circular opening in it, the 
perforated plate covering said opening, the 
plate 5 at the bottom of said jar so cut as to 
form a circular aperture for the admission of 
air, and the perforated plate 4 covering said 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490108.txt	(No Model.) 
NO, 499,108. 
H. GOESE. 
WINDOW. FRAME. 
Patented Jan, 17, 1893, 
 
% 
&^% 
aS SNS) % 2 
:S 
 
 
 
   
97% 72. 2 SN2 
2S32 
/6. (Alf 
, 
5 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMANN GOESE, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN. 
WINDow-FRAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,108, dated January 17, 1893. 
Application filed August 22, 1892, Serial No. 443,701. (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
To all Zwhon, it navy concern 
Beit known that I, HERMANN GOESE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee, and 
in the State of Wisconsin, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Win 
dow-Frames; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
My invention has for its object to improve 
the mechanism set forth in my patent No. 
472,757, issued April 12, 1892; and it consists 
in certain peculiarities of construction and 
combination of parts hereinafter described 
with reference to the accompanying drawings 
and subsequently claimed. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 represents an 
elevation of a portion of a window-frame em 
bodying my invention, Figs. 2, 3, 4 and 5 sec 
tions respectively taken on lines 2-2, 3-3, 
4-4 and 5-5 of the preceding figure, and 
Fig. 6, a detail rear elevation illustrating a 
brace-mechanism that constitutes part of the 
present invention. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, A rep 
resents a pulley-piece of a window-frame pro 
vided with an opening that is normally closed 
by a retractible and removable section B, simi 
lar to the one set forth in my prior patent. 
The pulley-piece is also provided with a part 
ing rail C and guide-rails D, the pulley-piece 
section B and a portion of the parting-rail 
integral there with (or fast thereon) being of 
a length equal to or greater than that of a 
sash, not shown. In my prior patent the re 
tractible and removable section B of the pull 
ley-piece was shown as being made flush with 
that portion of the parting-rail C thereon, 
but I now make a rabbet b at the parting-rail 
edge of said section, as clearly illustrated in 
Figs. 1 and 5. 
Like in my former patent, castings H, I, fit 
ted to the stationary portion of the pulley 
piece, engage with other castings on the re 
movable section of said pulley-piece, but I 
have not considered it necessary to illustrate 
the latter castings, or to show the ones H, I, 
in detail further than is essential to my pres 
ent improvements. 
As set forth in said former patent, a latch 
mechanism, operates to hold the pulley-piece 
section B in either a normal or retracted po 
sition, but I have not considered it necessary 
to illustrate any more than the finger-piece c 
of the latch-mechanism engaged with a guide 
d in said pulley-piece section, inasmuch as 
the details of said latch-mechanism are no 
part of the present invention. 
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, I prefer to form 
the lower casting I with an extension C of 
the parting-rail C, this being a matter of ad 
vantage and convenience in the carrying out 
of my invention, but not absolutely neces 
sary, as a wooden portion of said parting 
rail may overlie said casting, as is shown in 
connection with the upper casting. 
In order to secure accuracy of fit and set 
ting of the castings H, I, it has been found 
desirable to connect the same by means of a 
metallic bar J, bolted or otherwise rigidly se 
cured thereto, this bar being preferably of 
right-angle form, or what is generally termed 
T iron, and bolted at its ends to longitudi 
nally inwardly extended flanges f on said cast 
ings, as best illustrated in Fig. 4. 
In practice the connecting bar J, between 
the castings H, I, is fitted in the pulley piece 
so as to have its face flush there with, and the 
inner angle of this connecting bar also forms 
a rabbet g for engagement with the one b per 
taining to the pulley-piece section B, whereby 
I am enabled to leave enough space in the lat 
ter rabbet to compensate for possible swelling 
of the wood and avoid binding, while at the 
same time the engaging rabbets are a cut-off 
for outside air. 
I prefer to provide the inwardly extending 
ortion of the angular connecting bar J with 
an inclined notch h for engagement with a lug 
i forming part of a plate K fast on the rear 
side of the pulley-piece section B, asbest illus 
trated in Fig. 6, this construction and engage 
ment of parts operating to brace said pulley 
piece section against any tendency to warp. 
The general operation of the pulley-piece 
section is the same as that set forth in my 
prior patent, and to facilitate handling of the 
same it may be provided with one or more 
finger-sockets i on its outer side. 
Having thus fully described my invention 
what I claim as new and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent is: 
1. In a window-frame pulley-piece having 
an opening and closure therefor provided 
95 
Od 
d 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
490,108 
tion of a parting-rail thereon adjacent to the 
abbet, and an angle-bar fitted to said pulley 
piece, this angle-bar constituting a rabbet for 
the reception of the one pertaining to said 
closure, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a window-frame pulley-piece having 
an opening and closure therefor provided 
with engaging castings, a portion of a part 
ing-rail on the closure, and a continuation of 
the parting-rail forming part of one of the 
castings fitted to the pulley-piece, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand, at Milwaukee, in 
the county of Milwaukee and State of Wis 
consin, in the presence of two witnesses. 
IHERMANN GOESE. 
SS 
Witnesses: 
N. E. OLIPHANT, 
H. G. UNDERWOOD. 
D 
with engaging castings, a bar uniting those of 
the castings that are fitted to the pulley-piece, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a window-frame pulley-piece having 
5 an opening and a retractible removable clos 
ure for the same provided with engaging cast 
ings, a bar uniting those of the castings that 
are fitted to the pulley-piece, substantially as 
Set forth. 
3. In a window-frame pulley-piece having 
an opening and closure therefor provided 
with engaging castings, an angle-bar joining 
those of the castings that are fitted to the pull 
ley-piece, the inwardly extended portion of 
the bar provided with an inclined notch, and 
a lug on said closure that engages the notch, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. A window-frame pulley-piece provided 
with an opening, a retractible removable rab 
2O beted closure for the opening having a por 
I5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490208.txt	(Model.) 
A. MILLER 
WASH BOILER, 
No. 490,208, 
Patented Jan. 17, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
f 
H 
1 
: 
8 
E. 
' 
t 
Alic oceses 
is 
- 
a secrecce 
-- 
6 
s 
F - 
  
I s 
  
Hist a?sif s 
A. SS E-1H 
ACSA OH t 
 
E 
I 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST MILLER, OF BURLINGTON, IOW.A. 
WASH-BOLER. 
SPECIFICATIOff forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,208, dated January 17, 1893. 
Application filed June 2, 1892. 
Serial No. 435,291 (Model.) 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, AUGUST MILLER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Bur 
lington, in the county of Des Moines and State 
of Iowa, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Wash-Boilers; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Ste. 
My invention relates to an improved wash 
boiler, and it has for its object to provide for 
returning the overflow water to the boiler, ef 
fecting a continuous re-using of the same wa 
ter, preventing the spilling of the water upon 
the stove and floor and economizing the use 
of the Water, and to these ends, the invention 
consists in the novel combination and ar 
rangement of parts substantially as herein 
after more fully disclosed and pointed out in 
the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal section of my improved wash 
boiler. Fig. 2 is a plan view thereof. Fig. 3 
is a detached perspective view of a part of 
the false bottom or steamer. Fig. 4, is a de 
tail view of the invention, and Fig. 5, is a 
modification of the same. 
In the organization of my invention I em 
ploy the preferably rectangular, handled re 
ceptacle or boiler A, and within this dispose 
the false bottom or steamer B adapted to fit 
tight against the sides of the boiler to prevent 
upward escape of the steam thereat. The 
steamer or false bottom B, open at its bottom, 
has its top inclined in the direction of its 
length, and diagonally inward from its sides 
at the middle, downward toward its ends, as 
at b, the intermediate portions thereof being 
in the same common plane, thus providing 
the steamer with inverted cone-like portions 
b' tapering toward their ends, from which rise 
communicating vertical pipes C, said pipes 
being backed by drain or waste water pipes 
C, preferably rectangular in cross-section. 
The inclined surfaces b of the false bottom 
or steamer provide for passing the water 
from the boiler above the steamer and under 
said steamer or false bottom. 
Slotted or grate-like frames D, or perforated 
plates or wire cloth are suitably hinged to 
vertical plates or wings D' hinged to the 
pipes C, and said frames rest over the inclined 
or sloping surfaces b of the steamer B to pre 
vent the clothes or articles placed in the boiler 
from interfering with the free fall and pas 
sage of the water down said inclined surfaces, 
back under the steamer or false bottom. 
E is the cover having therein a continuous 
trough or gutter c to receive the waste or over 
flow water and suds, and discharging into the 
pipes C, C, whose upper ends project into or 
embrace the open ends of said trough, to re 
turn said waste water and suds to the boiler, 
below the steamer, thus providing for the con 
tinuous re-using of the water, &c. in the 
cleansing operation. The cover E is adapted 
to be held against upward displacement un 
der the action of the boiling water by means 
of suitable fastenings d provided at the top 
edges of the cover, and adapted to engage the 
outer flanged edges of the receptacle A. 
Upon the under side of the cover E and 
within a flange around its edges, as at e', is 
held by means of fixed rings or projections 
e, and turn-buttons e' swiveled thereto a 
foraminous, upwardly-flanged plate E' form 
ing a chamber e thereunder and for spray 
ing the agitated or boiling water upon the 
clothes or fabrics while being cleansed, above 
which plate or sprayer the boiling water is 
projected or spouted by the pipes C, having 
their upper ends connecting with nozzled 
openings c in said sprayer or plate, and in 
communication with the chamber e' of the 
Thus, the boiling water and suds con 
COWei. 
ducted by the pipes C from under the steam 
or false bottom B up into the chamber e of 
the cover E and sprayed through the forami 
nous plate E' upon the clothes or fabrics, 
and passing down through and between the 
latter, and back by way of the inclined sur 
faces b under the false bottom, a continuous 
circulation of the water, &c. is produced, thus 
subjecting the fabrics or clothes to the cleans 
ing action of a constantly changing or re 
newed supply of Water. 
Preparatory to the washing operation, the 
steamer or false bottom being properly in 
place in the receptacle or boiler A, the clothes 
or fabrics are placed in the boiler or recepta 
O 
I5 
2O 
25 
3o 
is 
40 
45 
55 
65 
90 
95 
ICO 
490,208 
O 
s C 
S 5 
65 
O 
cle. A quantity of soap is shaved off upon 
and mixed with the clothes or fabrics, and 
water placed therein sufficiently to fill the 
space beneath the false-bottom or steamer 
and to saturate the clothes in the boiler or re 
ceptacle, and the cover then put on the boiler 
or receptacle. The water, when ebullition has 
fairly begun, rises through the pipes C and, 
entering the chamber e in the cover E, is 
sprayed through the perforated plate E' upon 
the clothes or fabrics, and passes, as before 
stated, vid, the inclined ways b, back un 
der the false bottom or steamer, setting up 
the required circulation of water, and ends 
to effect the cleansing of the clothes or fab 
rics, the waste or overflow water entering the 
gutter in the cover, returning through the 
pipes C to the space under the false-bottom 
or steamer for re-use. Of course, it will be 
understood that, while usually the frame of 
perforated plates is suitably hinged to the 
vertical wings, it is not the purpose to have 
it always so, but the wings and the plates 
may be separate, and the plates simply placed 
Over the sloping ways without any connec 
tion with the side wings, as shown in Fig. 5. 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent: 
1. In a Washboiler, the steamer or false 
bottom, having at its sides inclined ways 
sloping downward toward its ends for pass 
ing the water thereunder from its containing 
receptacle, and with pipes for passing the 
water from under said steamer, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. In a washboiler, the steamer or false 
bottom having the overflow, and boiling wa 
ter pipes, the boiling water pipes communi 
cating with the chamber in the cover of the 
containing receptacle, and the overflow wa 
ter pipes communicating with a gutter or 
trough in said cover, Substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a Washboiler, the combination, with 
the steamer or false-bottom having the boil 
ing water pipes, of the boiler cover having a 
chamber communicating with said pipes and 
the bottom of which is adapted to serve as a 
sprayer, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a washboiler, the steamer having the 
two series of pipes, of the containing recep 
tacle and its cover having a gutter or trough 
in its upper side and upon its under side a 
chamber provided with a foraminous bottom, 
one series of said pipes communicating with 
said gutter and the other series of pipes com 
municating with said chamber, substantially 
as Set forth. 
5. In a washboiler, the steamer having its 
top provided at its sides with inclined ways 
to conduct the Water to the under side of said 
steamer, and the hinged grates or supports 
resting across said inclined way, substantially 
as set forth. 
6. In a washboiler, the steamer or false 
bottom having its top provided with inclined 
water ways and intermediately thereof with 
pipes, and the grates or supports adapted to 
rest over said water Ways and hinged to plates 
themselves hinged to said pipes, substantially 
as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
AUGUST MILLER. 
Witnesses: 
CHR. REICHERT, 
H. S. STAHL. 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490308.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 490,308. 
D. PITCEATHLY, 
REVERSING GEAR. 
5 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 24, 1893, 
(No Model.) 
No. 490,308. 
D. PITCEATHLY. 
REVERSING GEAR. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 24, 1893. 
2. 2s. 
e - 
Pl 
i 
- 
|| 
71zz/vesses. 
4-6-772 
n . 
. ayed 
A 767. 2. 
/72//e/ZZ77. 
10a-2-C (2/c22-77,47 
2-6-6- 
47 (2. 
-ts-zza 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 490,308. 
  
  
 
  
 
D. PITCEATHLY. 
REWER SING GEAR, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Jan, 24, 1893, 
H. H. 
H 
THIH 
iHH 
III 
ITH N 
11tf72esses. 
C.442-4-ro. 
"r saved 
A.Zeze/azor 
/Oz--2C (2/22-ee, 
verse 
 
ofs Peters co. PHoTo-liro, washington, 
c 
(No Model.) 
D. PITCEATHLY. 
REWERSING GEAR 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 490,308. 
Patented Jan. 24, 1893. 
  
 
 
i 
 
 
 
assence TH 
HIH 
 
f 
7/ZZ724.55es 
A 27. 4. 
AV/e777. 
77t, e. 62-724- 
4-6-4-7-66. 
-64267 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 490,308, 
D. PITCEATHLY. 
REWERSING GEAR, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Jan, 24, 1893, 
fizzeesses. 
64-4-2-4/7-zea 
A727/e/ZZ07. 
M-2c (62%-744, 
-, 2-cat 
ERR1S SERS Co. p-Ho. washigi, i. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID PITCEATHLY, OF FENELON FALLS, CANADA. 
REVERSING GEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,308, dated January 24, 1893. 
Application filed June 4, 1892, Serial No. 435,572, (No model.) 
IS 
To add whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID PITCEATHLY, of 
Fenelon Falls, in the county of Victoria, and 
Province of Ontario, Canada, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Re 
versing-Gear for Steam-Engines; and I hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same. 
This invention relates to a reversing gear 
for steam engines and more particularly to a 
reversing gear for that style of steam engine 
employed in the smaller class of steam boats; 
and the object of this invention is to so con 
struct the reversing gear that the backward 
and forward movement of the engine is en 
tirely under the control of a single eccentric 
rod; and the invention consists essentially of 
connecting to the valve rod of the engine an 
eccentric rod rotating about the shaft of the 
engine and providing this eccentric rod with 
a traveler which travels in the groove of a cam 
pivoted to the frame work of the engine, said 
can having connected to its upper end a 
rocker shaft connected to the reach rod or re 
versing lever, the whole device being con 
structed as hereinafter more fully set forth 
in the specification and more particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings:-Figure 1 represents the 
steam chest of the engine, the slide valve, the 
valve rod, the eccentric rod connected to the 
valve rod, the main shaft and the cam, the ar 
rangement of these parts being ready for the 
forward motion of the engine. Fig. 2 shows 
the same parts in the forward motion of the 
engine and showing the valve having com 
pleted one-half of its stroke. Fig. 3 is a view 
of the same parts with the engine about to 
commence the reverse motion. Fig. 4 is a 
view of the engine on its reverse motion and 
the valve having completed about one-half of 
its travel. Fig. 5 is a side elevation of the ec 
centric rod. Fig. 6 is a perspective view of 
the cam. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the 
eccentric wheel. 
Like numerals of reference refer to like parts 
throughout the specification and drawings. 
The reversing gear consists of an eccentric 
rod i, connected at its upper end 1", to the 
So valve rod 2, and having its lower end 1 bifur 
cated to partially inclose the eccentric wheel 
3o 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
o 
3 mounted upon and rigidly fixed to the main 
shaft 4. On the inner face of the eccentric 
rod l is a traveler 5 which works in the cam 
grooves 6 of the cam 7. The cam 7 is pivoted 
to the frame work of the engine by means of 
a rocker bolt 7 and connected to the upper 
end of the can 7 is one end of a rocker shaft 
8, while the other end of the said rocker shaft 
is connected to the reach rod or reversingle 
wer 9. The valve rod 2 is connected to and 
moves the valve 10 to close the ports respect 
ively ii and 12. If the engine be moved off 
the dead center in the way indicated by ar 
rows in Figs.1 and 2 and the cam is permitted 
to remain in the same position as indicated 
in the same figures the eccentrie rod will de 
scend and open the upper steam port1l, which 
will remain open until after the engine has 
passed the middle of its stroke when the valve 
10 will shut off the upper steam port 11 and 
The engine 
open the lower steam port 12. 
while the cam is in this position is supposed 
to be running with a forward motion and will 
continue this forward motion as long as the 
cam remains in this position. If, however, it 
is desired to reverse the engine the cam 7 is 
thrown into the opposite oblique position 
shown in Figs. 3 and 4 of the drawings. 
Fig. 3 shows the engine in the same position 
as in Fig. 1 with the exception that the cam 
is set on the opposite diagonal with the result 
that the lower steam port 12 will be opened 
during the commencement of the downward 
stroke and after the engine has passed the 
middle of its stroke the lower steam port 12 
will be closed by the valve 10 and the upper 
steam port II will be opened. The engine 
while the cam is in the position shown in Figs. 
3 and 4 of the drawings is supposed to be run 
ning in the reverse direction and will con 
tinue to run in this direction as long as the 
cam remains in this position. As the cam 7 
is connected to one end of the rocker shaft 8, 
which rocker shaft is connected to the reach 
rod or reversing lever 9 the said cam is wholly 
under the control of the engineer in charge. 
The calm 7 rocks on the rocker bolt 7 which 
is made fast to the frame work of the engine 
and during the movement of the cam into 
either of the indicated oblique positions the 
eccentric rod is moved to give the engine re 
9o 
95 
IOO 
the frame work of the engine, a traveler se 
cured to the eccentric rod said traveler work 
ing in said cam said cam adapted to reverse 
the stroke of the eccentric rod, substantially 
as described. 
2. A reversing gear for steam engines con 
sisting of the combination of a steam chest, 
steam ports from said steam chest into the 
Working cylinder, a valve to close said ports, 
a valve rod connected to said valve, an eccen 
tric rod connected to the valve rod, a bifur 
cated end to said eccentric rod, an eccentric 
wheel engaging with the bifurcated end, the 
frame work of the engine, a rocker bolt se 
cured to the framework of the engine, a cam 
mounted upon the rocker bolt, a traveler se 
cured to the inner side of the eccentric rod, 
said traveler working in said cam, means for 
altering the position of said cam, said cam 
and traveler adapted to reverse the stroke of 
the eccentric rod, substantially as described. 
Fenelon Falls, May 6, 1892. 
In presence of - 
DAVID PITCEATELY. 
30 
35 
45 
JAMES JACKSON, 
W. L. ROBSON. 
490,308 
spectively either a forward or reverse motion. 
The more horizontally the calm 7 is the less 
will be the throw that the valve 10 will have 
and consequently the less the speed of the en 
gine. As before stated the movement of the 
cam 7 is wholly under the control of the en 
gineer in charge and by his moving the reach 
rod or reversing lever 9 the cam 7 is shifted 
into any desired position and the engine 
started on its forward or reverse movement at 
will, and the stroke of the valve and the speed 
of the engine are controlled by the engineer 
manipulating the said reach rod or reversing 
lever 9. 
Having thus fully described my invention 
what I claim as new and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent is:- 
J. A reversing gear for steam engines con 
sisting of the combination of a steam chest, 
steam ports from said steam chest into the 
working cylinder, a valve to close said ports, 
a valve rod Connected to Said valve, an ec 
centric rod connected to the valve rod having 
a bifurcated end which encircles the eccen 
tric wheel the main shaft, an eccentric wheel 
mounted on the main shaft, a cam secured to 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490408.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT HERRMANN, OF HOCHST-ON-THE-MAIN, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
FARBWERKE, VORMALS MEISTER, LUCIUS & BRUNING, OF SAME PLACE. 
ND GO - BLUE DYE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,408, dated January 24, 1893. 
Application filed February 9, 1892, Serial No. 420,880, (Specimens.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERTHERRMANN, doc 
tor of philosophy, a citizen of the Empire of 
Germany, residing at Hchst-on-the-Main, in 
the Empire of Germany, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in the Pro 
duction of Indigo-Blue Coloring-Matter; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the Same. 
The sulphonic acids of the meta-oxy- and 
meta-amido-tetralkyldiamidotriphenylcarbi 
nols, on being oxidized furnish blue coloring 
matter of great value; especially the products 
obtained from the sulphonic acids of meta 
oxy-tetra-methyl-diamido-triphenylcarbinol, 
meta-oxy-tetra-ethyl-diamido-triphenylcarbi 
nol, meta-oxy-dimethyl-dibenzyl-diamido-tri 
phenylcarbinol, meta-oxy- diethyl-dibenzyl 
diamido-triphenylcarbinol, meta-amido-tetra 
methyl-diamido-triphenylcarbinol, meta-ami 
do - tetra - ethyl- diamido- triphenylcarbinol, 
meta-amido-dimethyl-dibenzyl-diamido-tri 
phenylcarbinol, meta-amido-diethyl-dibenzyl 
diamido-triphenylcarbinol, and from the Sul 
phonic acids of the products prepared by 
benzylizing these amido-tetrakyl-diamidotri 
phenylcarbinols. These products dye animal 
fiber very uniform and solid blue tints. The 
oxidation of the sulphonic acid mentioned 
above may be effected by treating them with 
fuming sulphuric acid, but in this case the 
oxidation is not very complete. These sul 
phonic acids are gently and evenly converted 
into the novel coloring matter by oxidizing 
them in aqueous solution and preferably in 
presence of salts of iron or of chromic acid. 
The process may be understood from the 
following examples: 
A. Sulplate of iron as Oacidia'ing agent. 
Oacidation of the sulphonic acid of meta-oacy 
tetra -methyldiamidotriphenylcarb in ol.- 
Twenty parts by weight of the mono calcium 
salt of the disulphonic acid of meta-oxy-tetra 
methyl-diamidotriphenyl-carbinol are dis 
solved in about two thousand parts by weight 
of water, the solution is heated to boiling and 
slowly mixed with a solution of sixty parts by 
weight of sulphate of iron in about one thou 
sand parts by Weight of water. The liquid is 
kept at boiling temperature for three or four 
hours, then has added to it Spanish white, and 
the boiling is continued until a sample filtered 
off, on the addition of ammonia remains clear, 55 
indicating that it is entirely free from iron 
salts. The blue solution of the coloring mat 
ter is then filtered off and evaporated to dry 
eSS. B. Chromic acid as Oacidi2ing agent.--The 6o 
results obtained by oxidizing above with 
chromic acid are much more satisfactory. 
Either an aqueous solution of chromic acid 
can be used or the Solution of a chromate. 
mixed with a quantity of mineral acid neces- 65 
sary to form free chromic acid. 
Oacidation of the sulphonic acid 3. meta 
Oacy-tetra-ethyl-diamido-triphenylcarbinol 
24.6 parts by Weight of the mono calcium salt 
of the disulphonic acid of meta-oxy-tetra- 7o 
ethyl-diamidotriphenylcarbinol are dissolved 
in from two hundred to three hundred parts 
by weight of water, the solution is heated to 
boiling and very slowly mixed with a solution 
of eight parts by Weight of CrO in water. 75 
The oxidation is complete after about two 
hours, this being ascertained by finding a 
sample of the Solution free from chromic acid. 
The solution of the coloring matter is filtered 
off from the precipitate chromic hydrate and 8o 
is evaporated to dryness. 
Among the new blue coloring matter pro 
duced in this Way, with suitable variation of 
the quantities of the bodies submitted to re 
action in accordance with their molecular 85 
Weights, may be mentioned as examples the 
coloring matter produced from the sulphonic 
acids of meta-oxy-tetra-methyl-diamido-tri 
phenylcarbinol, meta-oxy-tetra-ethyl-diami 
do-triphenylcarbinol, meta-oxy-dimethyl-di- go 
benzyl-diamido-triphenylcarbinol, meta-oxy 
diethyl-dibenzyl-diamido-triphenylcarbinol, 
meta-amido-tetra-methyl-diamido- triphenyl. 
carbinol, meta-amido-tetra-ethyl-diamido-tri 
phenylcarbinol, meta-amido-dimethyl-di- 95 
benzyl-diamido-triphenylcarbinol, meta-ami 
do-diethyl-dibenzyl-diamido-triphenylcarbi 
nol, and from the sulphonic acids of the pro 
ducts prepared by benzylizing these amido 
tetralkyl-diamido- triphenylcarbinols. The Ioo 
coloring matter may be produced also by oxi 
dizing the Sulphonic acids of the correspond 
45 
 
Having thus described my invention and 
in what manner it can be performed, that what 
I claim as new and my invention is: 
1. The process for the production of blue 
coloring matter, which is an oxidation pro 
duct of the sulphonic acids of meta sub 
stituted tetralkyldiamidotriphenylcarbinols, 
which consists in oxidizing the sulphonic acids 
of meta-oxy-, meta-amido-, or alkalized meta 
amido - tetralkyldiamido- triphenylcarbinols 
With salts of iron or chromic acid, substan 
tially as described. 
2. As a new article of manufacture blue 
coloring matter, derived from tetralkyl-di 
amido-triphenylcarbinols, a copper red pow 
der with metallic luster, soluble in water 
showing intense indigo blue coloration, in 
soluble in alcohol aud benzine, dyeing wooland 
silk in acid bath very uniform blue shades. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ALBERT HERRMANN. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
JOSEF REVERDY, 
HEINRICH HAHN. 
490,408 
O 
2 
ing meta-oxy- and meta-amido-triphenyl-me 
thans by treatment with the necessary quan 
tity of the oxidizing agents named, but it is 
more advantageous to convert first the leuco 
sulphonic acids of the group of dyes referred 
to into coloring matter, and then to oxidize 
the coloring matter thus prepared in the man 
ner hereinbefore set forth. 
The novel coloring matter is the oxidation 
product of the sulphonic acids of meta-sub 
stituted tetralkyldiamido triphenylcarbinols; 
it presents itself in form of a powder of cop 
per red color with metallic luster, easily solu 
ble in water showing intense blue coloration. 
When boiled with ammonia, or soda solu 
tion the aqueous solution of the coloring mat 
ter does not undergo any perceptible change, 
when mixed with an excess of mineral acid it 
assumes a green color. 
In an acid bath the coloring matter dyes 
wool and silk with very uniform blue shades, 
which excel by their great resistance to ac 
tion of soap, light and air surpassing in this 
respect the products now known that are 
used for dyeing in acid bath. 
23 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490508.txt	(No Model.) 
T. SHAW. 
APPARATUS FOR PURIFYING WATER FROM AIR IN THE PROCESS 
Patented Jan. 24, 1893. 
No. 490,508, 
OF FREEZING, 
WITNESSES 
- 
INVENTOR 
The corris perers co, Photo-Litho. WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS SHAW, OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
APPARATUS FOR PURFYING WATER FROM AR IN THE PROCESS OF FREEZING, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,508, dated January 24, 1893. 
Application filed May 24, 1892, Serial No. 434,181, (No model.) 
s 
2O turing of ice. 
To all, Luhon, it noty CO7 cer. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS SHAW, of the 
city and county of Philadelphia, Pennsyl 
vania, have invented a new and Improved 
5 Mode of Purifying Water from Air and Gases 
in the Process of Manufacturing Ice; and I 
hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
Io ing, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon. 
My invention consists in the employment 
of air under pressure and in the employment 
of a flexible tube. All operating in the man 
I5 ner and for the purpose hereinafter described. 
The object of the invention is to cause the 
production of transparent ice, and is to be 
operated in connection with the ordinary ma 
chinery and apparatus used in the manufac 
In order to enable others to use and prac 
tice my invention, I will proceed to describe 
its construction and operation: 
On reference to the accempanying draw 
25 ing, which forms part of the specification, the 
drawing represents an ordinary metal can Cl, 
into which the water is to be placed to Supply 
the material necessary for the formation of ice. 
b, is a rubber tube of about one-fourth inch 
go bore, terminating in a rubber tube of about 
three-sixteenth inch bore of greater flexibil 
ity. The upper end of said tube b, is con 
nected by ordinary iron pipes to any source 
of air pressure (three pounds per Square inch 
It is well known that in the manufacture 
of ice the air and gases exuding from the 
water, form air globules in the ice which 
give the ice a white and snow-like app, 
The 
purpose of my invention is to remove the said 
gases in the manner hereinafter explained. 
The invention is put in operation this wise 
The can or tank a, with its supply of fresh 
45 water is immersed in the usual freezing mix 
tures of brine &c., and when the water in the 
can has arrived at the freezing point, air un 
der pressure is caused to pass down through 
tube b, and pass out of flexible end c. The 
4o ance and injure its commercial value. 
35 is sufficient). 
 
55 
65 
75 
effect of the ejection of air under pressure 
from the end of flexible tube c, is to cause 
the said tube to vibrate on the end from side 
to side that may be likened unto a whipping 
action, which releases the air from the water, 
while large globules of air absorb the small 
globules that exude from the water on account 
of the greater affinity which air, has for air, 
over which it has for water. The addition 
of air causes the smaller globules of air to 
coalesce increasing the diameter sufficient to 
have the necessary buoyancy to float to top 
Surface of Water, and escape to the outer air. 
Thus performing the seeming paradoxical 
work of removing air from Water by pumping 
air into Water. The mechanical action of 
large globules of air floating through the wa 
ter so agitates the water as to wipe of small 
air globules that adhere to the surface of the 
ice, while the Whipping action of the flexi 
ble tube has a similar effect. The rubber 
tube can be. Withdrawn from time to time as 
the process of freezing is nearly completed. 
The motion of the tube induced by the out 
flowing air will prevent the tube freezing into 
the ice, and this motion can be augmented 
whenever desired by ordinary mechanical ap 
pliance arranged to cause vibrations at the 
upper end of said tube. The introduction of 
air alone under pressure gives a good result, 
but it is necessary to have a means of distrib 
uting the air to the Several sides of said can 
a. The flexible tube c, is sufficient to pro 
duce a good result, but various mechanical 
appliances can be substituted therefor to give 
increased motion if desired with slight modi 
fication in the result. 
It will be evident that the said device can 
be variously modified without any alteration 
in the result. I therefore do not wish to con 
fine myself to the exact configuration and lo 
cation herein set forth. 
What I claim and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent is 
1. In an ice making apparatus, the combi 
nation of the water containing tank or can, 
a flexible tube extending into the tank near to 
its bottom, and means for forcing air through 
Such tube under pressure, whereby the flexi 
90 
95 
2 
49C,508 
ble tube is caused to vibrate in the body of forcing air through such tube under pressure, 
the liquid contained in the can substantially substantially as set forth. 
as set forth. 
THOMAS SHAW. 
2. In an ice making apparatus, the combi- 
5 nation of the water containing freezing tank 
or can, the tube b which enters the can pro- 
vided with the flexible end c, and means for 
Witnesses: 
JosEPH. R. WILSON, 
L. SHUGARD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490608.txt	(No Model.) 
I, R. HUTCHINSON, 
WRAPPING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 490,608, 
Patented Jan. 24, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
  
  
77 Rer. 
S 
 
 
si -- 
 
 
 
 
HIHFIH II 
hi 
is Peters co, PHoro-LTHo, washington. 
 
(No Model.) 
I, R. HUTCHINSON, 
WRAPPING MACHINE, 
4. sheets-sheet 2. 
No. 490,608, 
- 
Patented Jan. 24, 1893, 
THE McRRs Peters co. Phoro-LTHo Washington, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
I. R. HUTCHINSON, 
WRAPPING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 490,608. 
Patented Jan, 24, 1893. 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 490,608, 
I, R. HUTCHINSON, 
WRAPPING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Jan, 24, 1893. 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IRA R. HUTCHINSON, OF FRESNO, CALIFORNIA. 
WRAPPING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,608, dated Januairy 24, 1893. 
Application filed February 12, 1892, Serial No. 421,305, (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, IRA. R. HUTCHINSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Fres 
no, Fresno county, State of California, have 
invented an Improvement in Wrapping-Ma 
chines; and I hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
Sae. 
My invention relates to that class of ma 
chines for wrapping articles of merchandise 
in which swinging flaps are employed to lay 
the folds of the paper in place about the ar 
ticle. 
Myinvention consists in the novel construc 
tion and arrangement of the Several flaps, the 
reciprocating plunger, the means for feeding 
the articles, and the mechanisms for Oper 
ating the several parts as I shall hereinafter 
fully describe and specifically point out in 
the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple, effective and rapidly operating ma 
chine for wrapping all kinds of articles of mer 
chandise, but specially adapted for the Wrap 
ping of caramels. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
for a more complete explanation of my inven 
tion,-Figure 1 is an end elevation of my 
wrapper, the end wall of the Wrapping chain 
ber being broken away. Fig 2 is a front ele 
vation, the wrapping chamber being in sec 
tion. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of plunger 
C showing it in the act of folding down the 
upper portions of the ends of the paper on 
the ends of the caramel. Fig. 4 is a perSpec 
tive detail of one of the holder plates h on 
the feed carrier. Fig. 5 is a view showing 
the several wrappings of the paper. No. 1 
showing the caramel when first forced into the 
folding chamber. No. 2 with one side of top 
folded over by flap D. No. 3 with the other 
top folded over by flap E. No. 4 with top ends 
pressed down by socketed plunger C, also 
shown in main Fig. 3. No. 5 with one side of 
ends pressed inwardly by flaps F. No. 6 with 
other side of ends pressed inwardly by flaps G. 
No. 7 with remaining folds pressed upwardly 
by being forced downwardly through the open 
bottom of the folding chamber. 
A is the frame of the machine. On top of 
this is located a casing B in Which is formed 
the vertical wrapping or folding chamber b 
which has in its bottom a discharge aperture 
b' with which a suitable delivery chute may 
be connected. Rising from the frame B are 
guide standards b upon which is mounted 
and adapted to be reciprocated vertically a 
plunger C formed with a central socket or re 
cess c. This plunger is in the vertical plane 
of the Wrapping or folding chamber and is 
adapted to descend therein and to rise there 
from. 
Pivoted horizontally on one side of the 
frame B and of the folding or wrapping cham 
ber is one of the top flaps D, and pivoted on 
the other side in a corresponding position is 
the other top flap E. Pivoted horizontally 
on the first side of the frame B and of the 
folding or Wrapping chamber, and at a point 
below the top flap Dare the end flaps F which 
consist of plates separated from each other, 
and lying on each side of the ends of the dis 
charge aperture of the Wrapping chamber. 
These two plates are connected and operate 
simultaneously by means of a pivoted bailif 75 
which carries them. Pivoted in a correspond 
ing position on the other side of the wrapping 
or folding chamber are the other end flaps G. 
connected and operating simultaneously by 
means of a pivoted bail g. These parts con 
stitute the folding mechanism, and it will be 
well at this point to describe their operation. 
Suppose the article, such as a caramel, to 
be Wrapped, be placed under the plunger, and 
above the folding chamber with the paper in 
which it is to be wrapped directly under, but 
not folded about it. The downward move 
ment of the plunger forces the caramel and 
under-lying paper down into the folding or 
Wrapping chamber so that it lies directly over 
the discharge aperture b', but does not pass 
through it, because the aperture is very little 
larger than the caramel, and the unfolded 
paper prevents it from slipping through. In 
this downward movement of the caramel, the 
Walls of the chamber cause the sides of the 
paper to be pressed upward vertically about 
the sides of the caramel. The plunger there 
upon rises and immediately the top flap D. 
SWings in Wardly and carries the side of the 
paper with it down over the top of the cara 
mel, and said flap immediately rises. Then 
the other top flap Eswings inwardly and folds 
the other side of the paper down upon the 
95 
od, 
5 
15 
35 
SO 
 
490,608 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
top of the caramel which is now encircled by 
the paper, and flap E then rises. Thereupon 
the plunger descends once more and fitting 
its central recess or socket cover the caramel, 
the sides of the plunger on each side of said 
recess or socket press downwardly and in 
wardly the top portions of the ends of the 
paper upon the ends of the caramel. The 
plunger then rises, and thereupon the end 
flaps F swing inwardly, and press in the sides 
of the ends of the paper upon the ends of the 
caramel, and immediately following, the op 
posing end flaps G operate similarly upon the 
other sides of the ends of the paper, thus 
leaving the caramel fully Wrapped with the 
exception of the lower folds of the ends which 
still project outwardly over the ends of the 
discharge aperture. A fresh caramel having 
been fed to the machine, is pressed down 
upon the top of the preceding caramel, there 
by forcing said last named caramel down 
through the discharge aperture, and as it 
passes through said aperture, the lower end 
folds of the paper are pressed upwardly about 
the ends of the caramel, thus completing the 
Wrapping. 
To provide for different thicknesses of cara 
mels, if such provision be necessary, the top 
flaps D and E are made of a springy or yield 
ing nature by constructing them of separate 
plates, as shown, united and controlled by 
springs S. By this construction the flaps will 
act upon the caramel whether thick or thin, 
with a pressure sufficient to firmly fold the 
paper down upon its top. 
The means for feeding the caramels and 
holding them in position temporarily to be 
acted upon by the plunger are as follows:- 
Extending outwardly from the front of the 
machine is a framed in the ends of which are 
journaled the drums a? upon which is mount 
ed a traveling carrier H of any suitable con 
struction. Upon this carrier are located at 
equi-distant points the holders I consisting 
of transverse plates pivoted so as to swing 
from a vertical to a horizontal position and 
each controlled by a spring h' whereby they 
are returned to and held in a vertical posi 
tion. In front of these holders, the caramels 
are placed either directly upon the carrier or 
preferably upon platform platesh. The nor 
mal position of the holder-plate is vertical, 
though it may swing to either side of it. The 
paper P is laid in front of it with one side 
turned up against it, and the caramel Q is 
laid upon the paper on edge and rests against 
the vertical holder-plate. Now, when the car 
rier is rotated it moves the caramel and pa 
per to a position directly over the folding 
chamber and under the plunger, and they are 
held temporarily in this position. The cara 
mel now lies flat by reason of having turned 
The plunger then comes 
over the end drum. 
down upon it to force it down into the cham 
ber. As the plunger meets it and forces it 
downwardly, the holder-plateh being pivoted, 
yields before it, and allows the caramel to slip 
from it and the plunger to pass it. There 
upon the holder-plate springs back to its nor 
mal position. The holdier-plate has in its 
edge a slot h to enable it to fit over the plun 
ger rod and allow the latter to play in it, and 
as the plunger rises the holder-plate yields 
upwardly or backwardly before it and then 
returns to Lormal position. 
The mechanism for operating these several 
parts will now be described:-In the frame A 
is mounted the main power shaft I, which is 
driven by any suitable source of power, pref 
erably by a treadle, unnecessary to show, 
which is connected by a belt with the pulley 
i on the shaft, said shaft also carrying a fly 
wheel i7. Upon the inner end of shaft I is a 
beveled gear or wheel J which meshes with a 
horizontal bevel gear K mounted upon a ver 
tical shaft L. This bevel gear K has also 
straight teeth k which mesh with a gear M, 
said gear having also beveled teeth n, which 
mesh with the beveled pinion O on a counter 
shaft O, the other end of which carries a crank 
disk o'. From this crank wheel extends up 
wardly a connecting rod O, the upper end of 
which is connected with the crank o' of a rock 
shaft of mounted in a standard Orising from 
the frame, said shaft having a crank armo, 
the other end of which is connected with the 
vertical rod c' of the plunger C. The several 
gears in this power transmitting connection 
are so proportioned as to effect the timely op 
eration of the plunger. 
The feeding carrier is operated by the foll 
lowing mechanism:-Upon the top of the ver 
tical shaft Lisa beveled pinion l which meshes 
with a beveled gearl on a short counter-shaft 
l, said gear having straight teeth which 
mesh with a pinion l on the shaft of one of 
the driving drums of the carrier. The straight 
teeth I do not extend entirely around the 
gear, but as far as these teeth are concerned, 
said gear is a mutilated one so that the en 
gagement with the pinion of the driving drum 
is not continuous, but periodical, thereby pro 
viding for the periodical movement of the car 
rier to advance its holders successively and 
at proper times into position and keep them 
there temporarily until the plunger can re 
move the caramel from them. 
The top flap D is operated by the following 
mechanism: Upon the flange or face of the 
Wheel gear J is Secured a short toothed or rack 
segment d. This meshes with a pinion d' on 
a shaft d having a crank d. Secured to the 
back of the flap D is a crank arm d", the end 
Of which is connected with a crank d by a 
rod di. 
The opposing top flap E is operated as fol 
lows:-Upon the main shaft I is a wheel J 
which carries a toothed or rack segment e 
Which meshes With a pinion e' on a shaftehav 
ing a cranke. Secured to the back of the flap 
E is a crank arm e' which is connected with 
the cranke by a rode. The relative posi 
tions of the toothed or rack segments dande 
are such that the flap D shall be swung in 
75 
do 
Jo5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
55 
 
490,608 
O 
wardly and withdrawn, immediately preced 
ing the movements of the flap E, and the po 
sition of these segments with relation to the 
general power transmitting mechanism is such 
as to effect the timely movements of these 
flaps with respect to the movements of the 
other parts of the apparatus. 
The end flaps F are operated as follows:- 
Upon the wheel J is secured a toothed or rack 
segment f which engages with a pinion f on 
a shaft f having a crankf, and this crankis 
connected by a rod f with the bailf of the 
end flaps F. 
The end flaps G are operated by means of 
a toothed or rack segment g carried by the 
wheel J which said segment engages with a 
pinion g on a shaftghaving a crankg which 
is connected by a rod g with the bail g of the 
end flaps G. The relative position of these 
toothed or rack segments is such that the op 
eration of the end flaps F shall immediately 
precede the operation of the end flaps G, and 
their position in the general arrangement is 
such as to effect their timely movement with 
respect to the other parts of the machine. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patentis 
1. In a wrapping machine having a folding 
or wrapping chamber, the combination of a 
vertically reciprocating plunger for advanc 
ing the article to be wrapped into the cham 
ber and opposing horizontal top flaps on each 
side of and swinging inwardly over the top 
of the chamber, to fold the sides of the paper 
down upon the top of the article, said flaps 
being made of separated plates connected and 
controlled by springs whereby they adjust 
themselves to different thicknesses of articles 
to be wrapped, substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
2. In a Wrapping machine having a folding 
or wrapping chamber, a vertically reciprocat 
ing plunger having a central recessor Socket 
adapted to fit over the article to be wrapped 
whereby the ends of said plunger pass over 
the ends of said article, and press down the 
upper portion of the ends of the paper there 
on, substantially as herein described. 
3. In a Wrapping machine having a wrap 
ping or folding chamber, the combination of 
opposing horizontal top flaps on each side of 
and swinging inwardly over the top of the 
chamber for folding the sides of the paper 
down upon the top of the article to be 
Wrapped, and a reciprocating plunger having 
a central recess or socket fitting over the ar 
ticle whereby its ends pass over the ends 
of said article, and press down the upper por 
tion of the ends of the paper thereon, substan 
tially as herein described. 
4. In a Wrapping machine having a folding 
or Wrapping chamber, the combination of op 
posing horizontal top flaps on each side of 
and swinging inwardly over the top of the 
chamber to fold the sides of the paper upon 
the top of the article to be wrapped, the re 
ciprocating plunger having the central recess 
or socket fitting over said article whereby its 
ends pass over the ends thereof and fold the 
upper portion of the ends of the paper upon 
the ends of said article, and the swinging end 
flaps each consisting of separated connected 
plates mounted to swing inwardly from each 
side by the ends of said article and to fold 
the sides of the ends of the paper in upon the 
ends of said article, substantially as herein 
described. 
5. In a Wrapping machine having a folding 
or wrapping chamber with a bottom discharge 
aperture in which the final folds of the paper 
are made, the combination of the opposing 
top flaps on each side of and swinging in 
wardly of the top of the chamber to fold the 
sides of the paper upon the top of the article 
to be wrapped, the reciprocating plunger hav 
ing the central recess or socket fitting the ar 
ticle whereby its ends pass over the ends 
thereof and fold the upper portion of the ends 
of the paper upon the ends of said article, 
and the swinging end flaps, each consisting 
of separated connected plates mounted to 
swing inwardly from each side by the ends of 
the article and to fold the sides of the ends 
of the paper in upon the ends of said article, 
substantially as herein described. 
6. In a wrapping machine having a folding 
chamber, the combination of the endless trav 
eling carrier having a holder upon which the 
paper and article to be wrapped therewith are 
laid, and by which they are advanced to a po 
sition over the chamber, and a reciprocating 
plunger adapted to force the article and its 
wrapping paper from the holder down into the 
chamber, substantially as herein described. 
7. In a Wrapping machine having a folding 
or wrapping chamber, the periodically trav 
eling endless carrier having a holder upon 
which the wrapping paper and article are laid 
and by which they are advanced to a position 
over the chamber and held there temporarily, 
and a reciprocating plunger to force the ar 
ticle and paper from the holder down into the 
chamber, substantially as herein described. 
8. In a wrapping machine having a folding 
or wrapping chamber, the combination of the 
endless traveling carrier, the swinging spring 
controlled holder-plate upon said carrier for 
receiving the Wrapping paper and article and 
advancing it to and over the chamber, and a 
reciprocating plunger to force said article 
from the swinging holder-plate down into the 
chamber, substantially as herein described. 
9. In a Wrapping machine, the swinging op 
posing top flaps D and E, in combination with 
the mechanism for operating them, consisting 
of the main power shaft I having the wheels 
J and J', the toothed or rack segments car 
ried by said wheels, the crank arms of the 
flaps, and power transmitting connections be 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
95 
OO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
25 
490,605 
tween said crank arms and the toothed or rack ments and the bails of the end flaps, substan- Io 
segments, substantially as herein described. tially as herein described. 
10. In a wrapping machine, the end flaps F 
and G each having the connecting bail, in com- hand. 
5 bination with the means for operating said 
flaps, consisting of the main shaft I having 
the wheels J and J', the toothed or rack seg- 
lments carried by said wheels, and power 
transmitting connections between said seg- 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
F. W. BOWEN, 
WM. F. BOOTH. 
IRA. R. HUTCIIINSON. 
triNT 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490708.txt	(No Model.) 
G. N. EINSELE. 
BALANCE STAFF PROTECTOR FOR WATCHES, 
No. 490,708 
 
Patented Jan. 31, 1893, 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE N. EINSELE, OF CRETE, ILLINOIS. 
BALANCE-STAFF PROTECTOR FOR WATCHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,708, dated January 31, 1898. 
Application filed June 20, 1892, Serial No. 437,252, (No model,) 
55 
65 
7 O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE N. EINSELE, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Crete, in the county of Will and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Balance-Staff 
Protectors for Watches, of which the follow 
ing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings and 
the letters of reference thereon, forming a 
part of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of an ordinary watch 
on its side having the balance wheel, a por 
tion of the cock plate being broken away to 
expose to view the end of the balance shaft 
and its pivot. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of 
the balance staff protector before being ap 
plied to a Watch, and on an enlarged scale to 
make its construction plain. Fig. 3 is a side 
view of Fig. 2, the upper lever being in sec 
tion, and Fig. 4, is an enlarged vertical sec 
tion through the upper end of the balance 
staff and through the loop surrounding the 
upper end of the balance staff. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in balance staff protectors for watches, 
the object being to prevent breaking or injury 
to the balance staff or its pivot in case, the 
watch should fall and strike some hard object. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents 
the watch plate. 
e is an arm designed to be located between 
the two plates of the watch, and has a weight 
tly secured to its outer end. Its inner end is 
connected with the inner end of arm a located 
above plate A through the medium of a short 
shaft having square ends and passing through 
the bushing k. Secured in said plate, the said 
arms being secured on said short shaft by 
means of screws J. J. The arm a has pivoted 
to it near its outer end at O. and across said 
arm, the lever C having a loop r on its inner 
end for surrounding the balance staff ac, but 
out of contact with it as shown in Fig. 1. The 
outer end of lever c is formed so as to turn 
downward through plate A, and has secured 
to its outer end the Weight v. The arm a has 
formed on its upper side the offset or shoul 
der adjacent to, but out of contact with the 
side of lever c, for the purpose of permitting 
only a slight oscillation of said lever on its 
pivot, by arresting it as it may turn in either 
direction the distance permitted by said shoul 
der. A bow spring S is placed against the 
Opposite side of said lever from said shoulder 
i. and is held in contact with said lever by 
means of a thumb screw P passing through a 
post on the outer end of arm a and bearing 
against Said spring, so that more or less press 
ure may be given said spring and thereby hold 
said lever in the position shown in Fig. 1, so 
that its loop r may not be in contact with the 
balance staff to interfere with the movement 
of the Watch. The inner end of Said thumb 
Screw is intended to enter a recess in the said 
Spring, or pass through it as shown in Fig. 3 
for preventing displacement of said spring. 
n is a plate secured to the upper side of the 
watch. A by means of a screw in passing 
through its outer end. The inner end of said 
plate is turned up at nearly rightangles with 
the plate A and forms a spring 2 for bearing 
against the inner flattened end of arm a and 
holding it in proper position so as to prevent 
the loop r on arm C from standing in contact 
with the balance staff and interfere with the 
movement of the Watch. 
Should the watch fall to the floor from the 
position shown in Fig. 1. the momentum of 
weight v will overcome spring S and bring the 
loop r on the opposite end of said lever in 
contact with the balance staff ac and thus ar 
rest the momentum of the balance staff and 
the balance wheel attached to it, and thus 
prevent the balance staff or its pivot from be 
ing broken off. If the watch should be in 
verted from the position shown and then fall 
the same protection would be afforded the 
balance staff. In case it should fall on its 
stem or opposite its stem then the weight v 
will operate to over come spring 2 and through 
the medium of arms e. and C and lever c bring 
the loop r in contact with the balance staff 
so as to arrest its momentum and Save it from 
injury the same as in the other case. The 
weight U is intended to be heavier than 
weight v and lever c combined so as to over 
balance them in case of a fall and permit said 
loop to be brought in contact with the bal 
ance staff as stated. 
With this device applied to a watch it mat 
ters not on which edge the Watch may fall or 
be struck, one or the other of the weights will 
prevent injury to the balance staff as stated, 
85 
95. 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
490,708 
an arm or lever having a loop on one end for 
surrounding the balance staff, and having a 
weight on its outer end, and fulcrumed be 
tween its loop and weight substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a balance staff protector for watches, 
an arm or lever having a loop on one end for 
surrounding the balance staff, and a weight 
at its opposite end, and pivotally attached be 
tween its ends to the Watch, and the means for 
maintaining said loop out of contact with the 
balance staff, and for permitting such contact 
in case the Watch falls substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
GEORGE N. EINSELE. 
25 
Witnesses: 
THOS. II. HUTCHINs, 
IK. C. HUTCHINS. 
5 Patent is as follows to wit 
and the device may be applied to almost any 
Sort of a watch. 
Having thus described my invention what 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
1. The combination of the watch plate A, 
lever c having weight v on its outer end and 
loop on its inner end for surrounding the 
balance staff, arm e having weight U on its 
Io outer end, arm a pivotally connected near its 
outer end to lever c and connected at its in 
ner end with arm e through the medium of a 
short shaft passing through said plate, and 
having the shoulder i adjacent to lever c, bow 
I5 spring S, thumb screw P and spring plate m. 
2. all arranged to operate substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a balance staff protector for watches 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490808.txt	(No Model.) 
C. H. KELLEY. 
HEEL AND SHANK FINISHING MACHINE, 
No. 490,808. 
Patented Jan, 31, 1893. 
C 
Egg E. 
earaes stres 
-PP- - - - - 
- 
 
 
A. 
7% 
fg. 
7. w 
Wrwzzle. 
-624, 25 27%e2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. KELLEY, OF REVERE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
HEEL AND SHANK FIN SHING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,808, dated January 31, 1893. 
Application filed October 8, 1891, 
Serial No. 408,126 (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all uhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES H. KELLEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Re 
vere, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Heel and Shank 
Finishing Machines, of which the following 
is a specification, reference being had therein 
to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention has for its object an improve 
ment in machines for finishing the heels and 
shanks of boots and shoes. In finishing a 
heel the edge and bottom and usually a por 
tion of the shank of the shoe are covered with 
an ink or preparation for blacking the parts 
and after this has dried, wax is applied by 
means of a revolving brush and the wax is 
then rubbed in and polished by holding the 
parts against a band of rubber or other pol 
ishing surface which is flexible and will fit 
the curvatures of the heel and shank. For 
this purpose a tubular belt or band of rubber 
is employed which is first inflated so as to give 
it some rigidity or resistance. Such a belt, 
however, does not possess rigidity enough to 
properly rub the wax into the heeland polish it 
and if there be any slight imperfections or 
cracks in the heel these are not filled up and 
covered as they should be. The machines 
also, as at present constructed so far as known 
to me, are slow of operation and inconven 
ient for the operator to use in that they re 
quire him to move from one point to another 
in finishing a heel. My improved machine is 
designed to overcome these objections and it 
consists in the construction and arrangement 
of mechanism hereinafter more fully set forth 
and in the employment there with of a tubu 
lar flexible belt having within it a spiral wire 
or spring or equivalent device which renders 
it sufficiently rigid to effectually polish the 
parts and to rub in the wax, yet permits it to 
accommodate itself to the curves of the heel, 
all as hereinafter set forth. The novel fea 
tures of my invention are pointed out in the 
claims which are appended hereto and made 
a part hereof. 
In the drawings Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of my machine showing two sets of 
brushes and two polishing belts. Fig. 2 is a 
sectional view from line 2-2, Fig. 1 showing 
a polishing belt with a heel applied thereto. 
Fig. 3 is a detail view illustrating a modifica 
tion in the polishing belt. 
A is the standard of the machine which 
may be of any suitable shape. On the top of 
the standard is an upright B, which is forked 
at its upper end and is provided with bear 
ings for the shaft d. A belt pulley fis se 
cured on the shaft d between the bearings 
and by this means power is applied thereto. 
The shaft d projects on either side of the bear 
ings permitting the machine to be made in 
duplicate and adapted for two operators. At 
one side of the bearings, shaft d is lessened 
in diameter forming a shoulder which abuts 
against the bearing. 
On the shaft d. at either. 
side of the bearings is secured a grooved pull 
ley h, and at each of the outer ends of the 
shaft a circular brushi, is secured. Below the 
shaft d is set a stationary shaft or rod g, 
which passes through a vertical slot in the 
upright B to permit of the adjustment of the 
rod g vertically when it is desired to tighten 
or slacken the polishing belts k. The stud or 
rod g is provided with a shoulder at one side 
of the upright and at the other with a nut l, 
so that it may be securely clamped in a given 
position in the upright. 
When it is desired to adjust the rod g the 
nut l is loosened and the set screw m, turned. 
By unscrewing the set screw the rod is al 
lowed to rise and the belts k to slacken, and 
by setting in the screw the rod is lowered and 
the belt is tightened. This form of construc 
tion to permit of adjustment is common and 
will require no more detailed description. 
On the rod g at either end thereof is placed a 
sleeve p, to which is secured a grooved pulley 
h', and another circular brushi'. A polish 
ing belt k is provided for each pair of grooved 
pulleys. These belts are of the construction 
shown Fig. 2. They consist of a rubber tube, 
inside which is placed a spiral wire spring m'. 
This Wire spring operates as a weighted stiff 
ener for the belt to hold the rubber out 
against the article to be polished and at the 
same time does not interfere with the neces 
sary flexibility of the belt but permits it to 
yield in all directions and thus to fit the curva 
tures of the heel or shank, as shown. By the 
arrangement shown an easily constructed, 
compact machine is produced at which two 
operators can work. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
95 
ICC 
490,808 
25 
35 
the said upright and provided with pulleysh 
and polishing brushes i, of rotary sleeves or 
shafts p carrying pulleys h' and brushes f' 
and elastic polishing belts k connecting said 
pulleys, each of said belts being provided with 
an interior flexible and weighted stiffener, 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination with the standard A 
and the upright B of the shaft djournaled in 
the said upright and provided with pulleysh 
and polishing brushes i, of rotary sleeves or 
shafts p carrying pulleys h' and brushes i' 
and elastic polishing belts k connecting said 
pulleys, each of said belts being provided 
with an interior flexible and weighted stiff 
ener consisting of a spiral wire spring, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES H. KELLEY. 
Witnesses: 
WM. A. MACLEOD, 
A. H. MORRISON. 
O 
Instead of the springs m'inside of the hol 
low polishing belts k I may insert any other 
equivalent device to give sufficient rigidity to 
the belts and to stiffen them so that they will 
offer a proper resistance and will closely ac 
commodate themselves to the curved or un 
even surfaces of the heels or other parts of 
the boots and shoes which are to be polished, 
and for this purpose I may use strands of 
chain inside of the belts, as shown in Fig. 3 
which will properly weight and stiffen the 
latter. 
I claim:- 
1. The combination with the standard A. 
and the upright B of the shaft djournaled in 
the said upright and provided with a pulley h 
and polishing brush i, of a rotary sleeve or 
shaft p carrying a pulley hand brushi' and 
an elastic belt k connecting the said pulleys, 
and forming a combined polishing and driv 
ing belt, and means for operating the shaft d 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination with the standard A 
and the upright B of the shaft journaled in 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US490908.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. JONES. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FOR OPERATING GLASS MOLDs. 
No. 490,908, 
Patented Jan. 31, 1893. 
. 
. 
 
 
 
 
I 
S W 
W. H. JONES. 
APPARATUS FOR OPERATING GLASS MOLDS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 490,908, 
Patented Jan. 31, 1893. 
 
2.24 47 
--z. 27. 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ge 
AT TORNEY. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. JONES, OF GLASSBOROUGH, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WHITNEY GLASS WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
APPARATUS FOR OPERATING GLASS-M O LOS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 490,908, dated January 31, 1898. 
Application filed April 18, 1892, Serial No. 429,638, (No model) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. JONES, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Glass 
borough, in the county of Gloucester and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Apparatus for Operating 
Glass-Molds, which improvement is fully set 
forth in the following specification and ac 
companying drawings. 
My invention consists of means substan 
tially as hereinafter described, for automati 
cally opening the sections of a mold. 
It further consists of mechanism substan 
tially as hereinafter described, for uniformly 
closing said sections. 
It further consists of mechanism substan 
tially as hereinafter described for closing one 
of the sections independently of the other. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
an apparatus embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 represents a side view of a ratchet wheel 
employed in the invention. Fig. 3 represents 
a sectional view on line ac, ac, Fig. 2. Figs. 4 
and 5 represent side and edge views respect 
ively of a cam wheel employed in the inven 
tion. Fig.6 represents a partial edge and par 
tial sectional view of the parts shown in Figs, 
2 and 4, in operative position. Fig. 7 repre 
sents a sectional view of a detached portion 
of the apparatus on an enlarged scale. Fig. 
8 represents a side view of the same parts the 
pawls thereof being in a different position 
from that shown in Fig. 7. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corree 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings: A designates the 
frame of the apparatus, and B a flooring or 
platform on which the glass blower stands, a 
portion of said flooring being removed, and 
shown in dotted lines, for clearness of the 
other parts. 
C designates a mold for forming glass arti 
cles of any desired construction, being formed 
in sections D, D' which are hinged on the pin 
tle C, so that each section is adapted to be 
swung outwardly or from the other, by means 
of the handles or rods E connected there with. 
Attached to each section of the mold are the 
cords F, which are passed over the pulleys G, 
and have the Weights Hattached to their ends, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
whereby the sections are adapted to be swung 
outwardly or opened. 
J designates a rotary shaft having the 
sprocket wheel K thereon, whereby it receives 
motion by means of the sprocket chain L. from 
any suitable motor. The shaft J is mounted 
on the frame A, and has a ratchet wheel M 
secured thereon, so as to rotate there with, and 
a cam wheel N, which latter is loosely mount 
ed thereon. The said ratchet wheel M has its 
teeth formed on the inner face of the periph 
eral rim of the disk P, which is mounted on 
the shaft J, and is connected with the cam 
wheel so as to rotate there with. A pawl Q 
movable in a recess in the disk P, is forced 
by a spring R into engagement with the 
ratchet teeth, so as to couple the ratchet 
Wheel and cam, and thereby cause the rota 
tion of the shaft J to rotate said cam. The 
said pawl is connected with the disk P b 
means of a stem S, which moves freely in a 
Wall T in the disk, and has a pin U in its end 
preventing its displacement. 
V designates a rock shaft journaled in the 
frame A, having the fixed arms W thereon, 
the latter bearing against the rods E, so as to 
normally keep the sections of the mold closed. 
Secured to the rock shaft W is a toggle lever 
formed of the limbs X and Y, the limb Y hav 
ing a recess or slot Z therein, through which 
passes the shaft J. On the free end of the le 
ver Y, is a pin or stud A' projecting laterally 
therefrom, and bearing against the periphery 
of the cam N. It Will be seen that the rota 
tion of the cam N, which is of suitable form 
to provide for the different movements re 
quired, will cause the toggle levers Y and X 
to rock the shaft V, and thereby the arms W, 
So as to move the same either to or from the 
rods E, and thereby either close partially or 
wholly the sections of the mold, or else to per 
mit the Weighted cords F to open the same. 
To disengage the pawl and ratchet so as to 
stop the rotation of the cam, and thereby per 
mit the mold to remain open a lever Bis ena 
ployed, the same being pivoted to the frame 
A, and having a spring C attached to it and 
the frame A, causing it to bear against a por 
tion of the underface of the pawl Q, and 
thereby remove the said pawl from contact 
55 
y 7o 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
490,908 
with the ratchet teeth of the wheel M, said 
lever B being provided with a treadle D so 
as to be readily operated by means of the foot 
of the workman thereon. 
To close one of the 
sections of the mold in advance of the other, 
I employ an arm E which bears against one 
of the rods E, and is loosely mounted on the 
shaft V, it being also connected with a toggle 
lever, one of the members E of which is piv 
oted to the frame A, and the other G is pro 
vided with a foot piece or treadle H. The 
treadles D* and H are in close proximity to 
each other, so as to permit their operation by 
the same Workman at slight intervals of time. 
The manner of operating the apparatus is 
as follows: The parts being in position, as 
shown in Fig. 1, and it is desired to close the 
mold, the workman presses the treadle D, 
whereby the lever B is depressed, so that it 
bears no longer against the pawl Q. As the 
latter is released it is forced outward by the 
spring R, so as to engage the ratchet wheel 
M, and thereby act as a clutch to connect the 
said cam to the shaft J. The rotation of the 
camNagainst which the pin. A rests, operates 
the toggle lever Y and X, the limb Y of which, 
owing to the slot Z being guided on the shaft 
J, so that the shaft Wis rocked, and the arms 
W thereon, which bear against the rods E, 
cause said rods to move each section D, D' of 
the mold in the direction of the arrows 1 and 
2, Fig. 1, thus closing the mold. The cam N, 
as shown, is so formed that the mold is but 
partially opened at first, and then closed, af 
ter which it is entirely opened. When the 
depression or recess A* in the camN, reaches 
the pin A' in the lever Y, the spring actuated 
pawl Q in the disk P, bears against the lever 
B, as shown in Figs. 4 and 8, thereby disen 
gaging said pawl from the teeth of the ratchet 
wheel M, and thus stopping the rotation of 
the cam N. The pin A' and pawl Q being in 
the position just described will cause the mold 
to remain open until the treadle D is again 
depressed. 
When it is desired to close the section D of 
the mold, in advance of the other section, the 
workman presses upon the treadle H, thus 
operating the toggle lever G, E, and as the 
arm E connected with the member G* is 
loosely fitted on the shaft W, it is forced 
against the rod E of the section D, thereby 
moving the same, without actuating the shaft 
V. The weight of said levers F, G, and the 
position of said arm E relative to the rod E, 
is such that at all times the said arm E is in 
contact with the said rod. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
O 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
1. An apparatus for the purpose set forth 
having a hinged sectional mold provided with 
arms, mechanism substantially as described 
connected with said arms for opening the said 
sections, and mechanism having arms bear 
ing against said arms on the mold for closing 
said sections, said parts being combined sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In an apparatus for the purpose set forth, 
mechanism connected with the sections of a 
mold for automatically opening the same, a 
rock shaft with arms rigidly connected there 
with and bearing against said sections so as 
to close the same, a toggle lever having one 
of its members rigidly attached to said shaft, 
and the other member having a recess or slot 
therein, and a shaft or supporton which said 
slotted member moves, said parts being com 
bined substantially as described. 
3. In an apparatus for the purpose set forth, 
mechanism connected with the Sections of a 
mold for opening the same, a rock shaft with 
arms bearing against said sections, a rotary 
shaft, a toggle lever having one of its mem 
bers connected with said rock shaft and its 
other member supported and guided on said 
rotary shaft, and a cam loosely mounted on 
the rotary shaft for connecting the said cam 
and shaft, said parts being combined sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In an apparatus for the purpose set forth, 
mechanism bearing against and closing the 
Sections of a mold, a cam loosely mounted on 
a shaft, clutch mechanism secured to said 
shaft for connecting the said shaft and cam, 
and a treadle operating said clutch mechan 
ism, said parts being combined substantially 
as described. 
5. In an apparatus for the purpose setforth, 
mechanism connected with the sections of a 
mold for automatically opening the same, a 
rock shaft with an arm loosely mounted 
thereon and in contact with one of the sec 
tions of the mold, a toggle lever pivoted to 
said arm and to a suitable support, and a foot 
piece connected with said toggle lever, said 
parts being combined substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. In an apparatus for the purpose set forth, 
the combination of a rotary shaft, with a 
wheel secured thereto, a cam wheel loosely 
mounted on said shaft, a disk secured to said 
cam, a Spring pawl movable in said disk and 
normally engaging in said ratchet wheel, and 
a Spring-actuated lever bearing against said 
pawl, Substantially as described. 
WILLIAM. H. JONES. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
WM. C. WIEDERSHEIM. 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491008.txt	(No Model.) 
P. M. BURNS, 
FLOUR SIFTER WITH REVERSIBLE CLOSED BOTTOM AND COVER, 
No. 491,008, 
Patented Jan, 31, 1893. 
N8% 
(2%s Z2.62% e. 
Z2-eeeezze.-/ZZ222-23. 
 
the NdRRs peteRs co, Photo-LiTHo. washtNGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PRISCILLA. M. BURNS, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
FLO UR-S FTER with REVERS BLE CLOSED BOTTOM AND COVER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,008, dated January 31, 1893. 
Application filed February 9, 1892, Serial No. 420,854. (No model.) 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PRISCILLA. M. BURNS, 
of the city of St. Louis, in the State of Mis 
souri, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvementin Flour-Sifters with Reversible 
Closed Bottom and Cover, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification. 
This invention relates to a rotary flour 
sifter, that has an alternating, semi-spheric 
tight bottom and cover, which in its bottom 
capacity, when not sifting securely retains 
the flour from escape, and which when said 
bottom is reversed in its elevatod position 
when sifting, prevents the scattering of the 
flour by the sifter over the top of the sifter 
Cal. 
Figure I is a perspective view of the can, 
and shows the sifter crank, and the rotatable 
arm with its hand knob, by which the semi 
spheric alternating tight bottom and cover is 
inverted. Fig. II is a vertical section, taken 
on line II-II, Fig. III, and shows in full lines 
the semi-spheric, alternating tight bottom and 
cover, adjusted into its lower position, for pre 
venting the escape of the flour at the bottom 
of the apparatus previous to sifting, it also 
shows in broken lines, the said semi-spheric 
elementin its elevated positionin which it pre 
vents the upward escape of the flour, while 
sifting; and Fig. III is a vertical section, 
partly in elevation, the section taken on line 
III-III, Fig. II and shows the semi-spheric 
alternating bottom and cover in its elevated 
position as a cover to prevent the upward es 
cape of flour, while sifting. 
Referring to the drawings:-1 represents 
the flour-can, which is of convenient form for 
scooping up the flour from the barrel or sack, 
when it is desired to replenish the same. 2 
is the handle of said can. 
3 represents a semi-spheric wire woven 
screen, whose upper peripheral edge 4 is 
seated within a circumferential groove 5 
around the inside of said can, and is there se 
cured by solder or otherwise. The bulge 6 
of said semi-spheric screen lacks sufficiently 
from reaching on line with the bottom of the 
can, to prevent its coming in contact with the 
table, or any other flat object on which the 
sifter can is placed when at rest. 
7 represents a crank-axle whose of journal 
8 works in the perforate bearing 9 in the far 
side of the can, and its nigh journal 10, has 
its tube bearing 11, in the sleeve 12, which 
sleeve has its perforate bearing 13, in the nigh 
side of the machine. 14 represents semi-cir 
cular beating wires, whose ends are fast seated 
in the sockets 15 in the collar hubs 16, which 
hubs are themselves fast seated on said crank 
axle 7, within close Working distance inside 
said semi-spheric screen 3. 17 represents the 
crank on said axle 7, and 18 is the knob-han 
dle by which said crank axle and the semi 
spheric beaters are turned to agitate the flour, 
while sifting. 
I now come to important elements of my 
device, which, in conjunction with the said 
sleeve 12, prevent the escape of the flour from 
the can when not sifting and which also by an 
alternating change of position prevents the up 
Ward escape of the agitated cloud dust of flour 
from the top of the can while sifting. 
19 represents a semi-spheric, preferably 
metal cup, which has perforate projecting 
lugs 20 on each of its journal attached sides. 
The off side lug has a loose bearing 21 on near 
the offend of the axle 7, and the nigh side lug 
has a tight bearing 22 on said sleeve 12. 
23 represents a crank handle arm, which is 
fast mounted on the sleevel2, to which sleeve it 
is rigidly secured by the key pin 24, which pin 
is seated in the key-hole 25 in said crank arm 
and sleeve, and thus locks them together. 26 
represents a counter extension arm, integral 
with Said crank arm 23, and which extends in 
the reverse direction to said crank handle 
end. The said combined crank handle and 
counter extension arm, is made of a concavo 
convex form, its concave side 27 facing to 
ward the flour-can, and the said facing side, 
at its ends has convex runner crooks 28, 
that as said arm attains its vertical position, 
exert a slight hold against the side of the can 
and hold it there. 29 is the knob handle on 
the operative end of said crank-arm 23, by 
which it is turned. 
The operations of the especial devices in 
this apparatus that prevent the illegitimate 
escape of flour, when and where it is not re 
quired to be deposited in sifting, as an attach 
ment to rotary flour sifters, are as follows:- 
The metal semi-spherical cup 19 having, by 
75 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
491,008 
hemispherical cup 19, free to oscillate back 
and forth and conforming to the interior of the 
can and the crank arm 23, by which said cup 
is alternated to effect respectively a tight bot 
tom and cover; substantially as described.-- 
2. In a flour sifter, the combination of the 
semi-spheric cup 19, the can 1, within which 
Said cup is axially mounted, the combined 
crank arm 23 and counter extension 26, hav 
ing the friction runner crooks 28, the said 
crank arm arranged to transpose said eup 
into its alternate positions to effect respect 
ively a tight bottom and top, and said run 
ner crooks 28, friction-locking said cup in said 
respective operating positions; substantially 
as described. 
3. In a flour sifter, the combination of the 
flour can, the crank axle 7, the wire screen, 
the rotary beaters fast mounted on said axle, 
the sleeve 12 loosely mounted on said axle, 
the alternating cup 19 loosely mounted on 
said axle and fast mounted on said sleeve, 
and the crank arm 23 fast mounted on said 
sleeve; substantially as described. 
4. In a flour sifter, the combination of the 
can 1, the crank axle 7, having its crank 17, 
the wire screen 3, the rotating beaters, 14, the 
sleeve 12 loosely mounted on said axle, the 
Semi-spheric cup i9, loosely mounted on said 
axle and fast mounted on said sleeve, the 
Crank arm 23, having the counter extension 
26, the key pin 24 that locks said crank arm 
to said sleeve 12, and the runner crooks 28 on 
Said crank arm, and its extension, that fric 
tion-lock Said cup in its respective bottom and 
cover positions; Substantially as described. 
EPRISCILLA. M. BURNS. 
In presence of 
BENJN. A. KNIGHT, 
SAML. KNIGHT. 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
means of one of its perforate lugsaloose bear 
ing on the crank-axle 7, and its other perfo 
rate lug having a flat bearing on the sleeve 
12 which sleeve has a loose bearing in said 
crank axle, and as the crank arm 23 is fast 
mounted and keyed on said sleeve 12, it fol 
lows that said crank arm is enabled to control 
the alternation in position of said semi-spheric 
cup from that of a tight bottom, to prevent 
the escape of the flour, to the screen or sieve 
and from that its escape from the can, as 
shown in full lines in Fig. II, previous to start 
ing the rotary sifter, on the one hand, to that 
of a tight cover, as shown in full lines in Fig. 
III, and in broken lines in Fig. II, to prevent 
the discharge of fine particles of the flour 
from the top, consequent on the agitation of 
sifting. The peripheral rim of said semi 
spheric Cup, approximately fits inside the 
flour-can, so that although it has free action in 
alternating, yet it substantially presents an 
effective stay against the illegitimate escape 
of the flour. It will further be seen, that when 
said crank arm 23 is turning said semi-spheric 
cup, to alternate it from a tight bottom to a 
tight cover, and vice versa, the convex runner 
crooks 28 of said arm and of its counter ex 
tension, do not come in contact with the flour 
can, until said cup reaches either its location 
as a tight bottom, (see Fig.II) or on the other 
hand, its position as a tight cover, (see Fig. 
III,) at which time said convex crooks come 
in contact with the can and friction-lock the 
cup in either of its alternate locations. 
The sleeve 12 may be square seated in the 
crank arm 23, and tightened thereon when so 
required. 
I claim as my invention:- 
1. In a flour sifter, the combination of the 
can, the adjustable axially mounted revoluble 
IC 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491108.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 491,108, 
 
 
 
3 sheet-sheet 1. 
T. HOLL AND 
MANTEL HOT WATER HEATER, 
22% 
Patented Feb. 7, 1893, 
14 
7/1, 
 
 
FiOS, OS 
 
 
a/ | 
 
 
 
 
 
T. HOLLAND. 
MANTEL, HOT WATER HEATER, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 491,108, 
N) 
Y 
V 
Ra 
s 
ecos 
S 
w 
a 
&S s 
es 
te 
is 
Sla 
E. 
e 
Y X 
S2 
2 
3. 
22 St. yLY 
% 
3a is 
2 
N N 
2) 
%2. 
a NYYYAAAAAYS 
a 
P 
s 
4NN O 
NASYMAXVVVA 
 
2 
N 
se s 
(s Sc 
s 
Saaaaaaaayaaayaa 
B S 
36 
5 
T. HOLLAND. 
MANTEL, HOT WATER HEATER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 491,108. 
sizL. 
21 
Patented Feb. 7, 1893. 
awaayaaaayaaaaya SSSSSSSSSSSAAAAAYAN 
IEEE 
NNaxNSNNSNSSSSSSSSSSSSSSYSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS SN 
N 
N 
N 
SN | L: 
 
 
N 
real are are states are NaNS 
fill Ni 
Narrarry Strataraswarrayarakasawraa NASAKryway 
N N N 
R 
N N 
N N N 
N N N 
 
 
 
 
E. 
i. 
r 
The ngrisis Peters co. Photo-LTHo. WASHINGTON, o, c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TIMOTHY HOLLAND, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MANTEL Hot-WATER HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,108, dated February 7, 1893. 
Application filed April 23, 1892, Serial No. 430,292. (No model.) 
- 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, TIMOTHY HOLLAND, of 
Chicago, in the State of Illinois, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Man 
tel Hot-Water Heaters, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to warming apparatus 
for residences; and the object of my improve 
ments is to adapt a hot water heater to a fire 
place in conjunction with a pair of loop radi 
ators Serving as the jambs thereto and as a 
Support for the mantel piece, the whole con 
stituting an ornamental, convenient and eco 
nomic Warming apparatus. I attain this ob 
ject by the means illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of an appa 
ratus of the class named, embodying my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is an enlarged vertical sec 
tion taken on the line 2-2 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is 
an enlarged horizontal section taken on the 
line 3-3, of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a detail show 
ing an enlarged horizontal section taken on 
the line 4-4 of Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a front ele 
Vation of the water back with the fire grate 
and front wall removed, the hood or cover 
Over the fire place being in vertical section. 
Fig. 6 is a vertical section through the ?lues, 
it being taken on the line 6-6 of Fig. 3. 
In the drawings, A designates the water 
back, which is surmounted by a water dome. 
orhood, B. Said back and hood are hollow, 
and preferably cast separately and connected 
by nipples C (shown in dotted lines, Fig. 4), 
so that the Water can freely circulate from 
the back to and through the hood. 
The interior face-side of the water back is 
concave, and provided with a flange a', or 
equivalent device for supporting the fire bas 
ket A', and grate A* in connection therewith, 
as seen in Fig. 2; and the front which forms 
the complement to the water back, and in 
closes the fire basket A', is provided with 
doors b b for introducing the fuel, doors or 
Openings b'b' for affording access to clean 
and shake the grate, and sliding dampers b? 
b' for regulating the draft, the doors being 
provided with mica panels and being similar 
in construction and general appearance to 
the corresponding parts of a base burner heat 
ing stove. 
The rear of the hood is provided with a ?lue 
opening B' at one side, which communicates 
with a down-?lue B and the latter connects 
through an opening Bat the bottom, with an 
up-flue B which enters the chimney. The 
fear part of the hood and water back contain 
ing the flues, is adapted to be set back in the 
fire place and under the shelf of a mantel 
with the up-flue B corresponding in position 
with the chimney leaving the front of the 
hood and the part inclosing the fire basket 
and doors for introducing fuel to project Out 
into the room to be warmed, so that the radi 
ation from the front will be out in the room 
somewhat more than the heat from a fire 
place. 
At the sides of the water back A, next to 
the wall of the room and in place of the jambs. 
of a fire place, I arrange two loop radiators 
C, composed of a series of loops, which are 
connected with one another and with the Wa 
ter back at the bottom, by nipples c, so that 
water from the supply pipe c' can enter the 
loops and water back. The top of the radi 
ator loops is similarly connected one with the 
other by nipples c and with the hood B by 
means of a pipe C". The heated water rises 
to the hood and thence through pipe C to the 
top of the radiator loops, causing a circula 
tion of the cooler water from the bottom or . 
lower part upward, and away through circu 
lating pipes C to other radiators (not shown) 
which are to be located in other rooms of the 
same building and connected in the ordinary 
manner so as to include them with radiators 
C in one connected system for warming the 
different rooms. 
The radiator loops are provided with verti 
cal fins D cast on the rear side of the loops; 
and the water back also has a similar fin D' 
on each side. Said fins come together when 
the parts are connected and form vertical 
flues d at the back of the radiators through 
which the air is drawn from the floor and de 
flected outward by the mantel shelf E, made 
of a marble slab, which is placed on the top 
of the radiator. By providing an opening e 
in the wall of the building, a supply of fresh 
air may be admitted from the outside just 
under the radiators so that it will be warmed 
and discharged into the room, thus introduc 
ing a fresh supply of warm air for ventilation. 
The front part of the water back projects in 
: 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
ico 
2. 
491,108 
side of the line of the wall, against which the 
fins D come when the apparatus is in place, 
and the space intermediate this part of the 
Water back and the radiator loops can give 
off radiation of heat in the same manner that 
an ordinary stove would if placed close to the 
wall; so that the warmth produced from this 
part of the apparatus is comparatively greater 
than that which could be produced from the 
consumption of a given amount of fuel in a 
fire place. By deflecting the products of com 
bustion through the down flueB and through 
the up-flue B, which are surrounded by the 
Water space A, a further saving of heat is ef 
fected without in the least interfering with the 
draft, which will be required to be checked by 
closing the dampers b as soon as the appara 
tus has become warm. The heat thus saved 
is utilized by means of the radiator loops and 
goes to augment that which would be saved 
and used for warming the room by the heater 
alone. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a mantel hot water heater, the com 
bination with an inclosed fire pot, of a con 
cave water back, a hollow water hood over 
the water back, a down flue in the waterback 
communicating through the hood with the 
fire pot, an up-flue in the water back commu 
nicating with the down-flue at the bottom, 
nipples connecting the Water back and hood, 
a loop radiator on each side of the water back, 
connected by nipples with the bottom portion 
of the Water back and by nipples and a pipe 
with the top of the hood, and a mantel shelf 
Supported on the top of said loop radiators 
substantially as specified. 
2. In a mantel hot water heater, the com 
bination with an inclosed fire pot provided in 
front with a door and draft regulator and in 
the rear with a concave water back, of a wa 
ter hood over the fire pot and connected by 
55 
nipples with the water back, a down flue and 45 
an up flue in the water back communicating 
with one another at the bottom and With the 
fire pot under the hood at the top of the up 
flue, a loop radiator on each side of the Wa 
ter back, connected therewith at the bottom 
and with the hood at the top, for causing a 
circulation of water through said loops, Water 
back and hood, substantially as specified. 
3. In a mantel hot water heater, the com 
bination with an inclosed fire pot, of a Water 
back, a water hood over the fire pot, a loop 
radiator on each side of the Water back, and 
a mantel shelf surmounting the same, the 
loops of said radiators being connected with 
said water back and water hood so as to af 
ford a circulation of water therein, substan 
tially as specified. 
4. In a mantel hot water heater, and in Com 
bination, an inclosed fire pot, a Water hood 
over said fire pot, flues communicating With 
said fire pot, and having a meandering course 
through said water back, a radiator composed 
of a series of separate vertical loops on each 
side of said water back, extending above the 
said hood and surmounted by a mantel shelf, 
said radiator loops, water back, and hood, be 
ing connected so as to afford a circulation 
through the same, substantially as specified. 
5. In a mantel hot water heater of the class 
described, the water back provided with a fin 
on each side, a series of separate radiator 
loops at each side provided with fins adapted 
to be used in conjunction with one another 
and the fins on the water back to form air 
flues behind said loops, and a mantel shelf 
mounted on said radiator loops and adapted 
to deflect the heat from said air flues outward 
from the walls, as specified. 
75 
TIMOTHY HOLLAND. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN WALTON, 
GEO. E. SWARTZ. 
O 
3o 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491208.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. EDMUNDS. 
INSULATOR CLIP, 
No. 491,208, 
Patented Feb. 7, 1893. 
 
Aez. 7 
28)itv.cscs 
3v-uov to 
/7cecarv. A. tautas 
%2%-24 
w 
bis elttories 
The Norris Peters co, PHOTO-Litho, WASHINTEM. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM II. EDMUNDS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
NS ULATOR CLP 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,208, dated February 7, 1893. 
Application filed August 9, 1892, Serial No. 442,588, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
OC 
O 
25 
30 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. EDMUNDs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
tlSeful Improvements in Attachments for Se 
curing Electrical Conducting-Wires to Insu 
lators; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, Such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the Same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
This invention has reference to improve. 
ments in attachments for securing electrical 
conducting wires to insulators, and has for 
its object to provide an attachment which 
shall be inexpensive in its manufacture, easy 
to apply, and efficient in operation, and which 
will overcome the difficulties attending the 
use of such devices heretofore employed. 
The invention consists in an attachment 
constructed of malleable cast iron or other 
material, having a loop which partially em 
braces the insulator, and which terminates in 
two wedge-shaped slots for receiving the wire, 
and in short projections or teats which are 
adapted to be bent over to close the slot after 
the wire is inserted. 
The construction and operation of my im 
proved attachment will more fully appear 
from the following description taken in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings 
which form a part of this specification, and 
in which 
Figure 1 illustrates in perspective view my 
improved attachment; Fig. 2, a central sec 
tion of the same; Fig. 3, a section through an 
insulator showing the attachment in position, 
and Fig. 4, is a view in elevation showing the 
wire inserted, and the teats bent downward 
to close the slot. 
Ilike letters of reference denote like parts 
in the several figures of the drawings, 
The reference letter A denotes the attach 
ment. 
B is the insulator, and C the conducting 
The attachment A which is preferably made 
W10. 
from malleable cast iron, is formed with the 
loop d which is convex on its inner surface 
to conform to the shape of the groove in the 
insulator, and the outer surface is formed 
with double concave faces which meet to form 
a bead e to produce the requisite rigidity. 
At the ends of said loop are two lugs ff which 
extend upward and over the loop for a suffi 
cient distance to form slots g g for receiving 
the wire. These slots are wedge-shaped or 
tapering as shown in Figs. 2 and 4 for the 
purpose of securely holding the wire when 
inserted against displacement, as it will be 
evident that the pull on the wire will tend to 
force the same toward the inner end of the 
slots and be tightly wedged thereby. The 
inner ends of the loop and the lugs are Sub 
stantially rectangular in cross section to pre 
sent flat surfaces to the wire in order that no 
injury to the latter may ensue. At the Outer 
end of the lugs are formed teats h h, which 
are adapted to be bent over to close the slot 
when the wire is inserted to hold the latter 
permanently in place. 
In operation the attachment is placed in 
position around one side of the insulator with 
loop seated in the groove, and the Wire is 
then placed in one of the slots and passed 
around the other side of the insulator and in 
the opposite slot, the pull on the wire tend 
ing to force it to the inner end of the slot, to 
bind it in position. The teats are then bent 
downward by pliers or other means to close 
the slots and preventiaccidental disconnection. 
While I prefer to employ cast malleable 
iron in the construction of my improved at 
tachments it is evident that other metal may 
be advantageously employed, as for instance 
drop-forged iron, sheet iron and steel, or their 
equivalents; and if necessary the attachment 
may be covered with a suitable insulating ma 
terial, or these attachments may be con 
structed entirely from insulating material. 
The attachments when constructed in ac 
cordance with the above description are very 
effective in operation, and may be easily and 
quickly placed in position. By reason of the 
simplicity of construction they may be very 
cheaply made, and the liability to become 
broken or displaced is reduced to minimum, 
claim 
35 
45 
 
An attachment for securing electrical con 
ducting wires to insulators, comprising in com 
bination with a loop, lugs ff extending up 
Ward and over to ends of said loop to form 
tapering slots for receiving the wire, and 
teats h harranged on the ends of the lugs and 
adapted to be bent over to close the slots, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM H. EDMUNDS. 
Witnesses: 
WILL T. NORTON, 
ARTHUR BROWNING. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491308.txt	F. A. GUTH, 
PIANO ACTION 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1893. 
No Model.) 
No. 491,308. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 491,308, 
F. A. G.U.TH. 
PIANO. ACTION, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1893, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK A. GUTH, OF WAVERLY, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
GUSTAV H. OHLSTROM, OF SHIELTON, CONNECTICUT. 
PANO ACT ON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,808, dated February 7, 1893. 
Application filed August 30, 1892, Serial No. 444,499. (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FREDERICKA. GUTH, of 
Waverly, in the county of Pike and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new Improvement in 
Piano-Actions; and I do hereby declare the 
following, when taken in connection with ac 
companying drawings and the letters of ref 
erence marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, and which said 
drawings constitute part of this specification, 
and represent, in 
Figure 1, a view partly in section and partly 
in elevation, of a piano-action constructed in 
accordance with my invention: Fig. 2, a 
broken view in side elevation, showing the 
position of the hammer, and the two flies, 
when the key is fully down, or at the limit of 
its depression. Fig. 2", a similar though less 
comprehensive view, showing the change in 
the positions of the flies consequent upon the 
first movement of the key toward recovery, 
the secondary fly being brought into position 
to do its work. Fig. 2, a view similar to Fig. 
2, showing a very little further movement of 
the key toward recovery, permitting the main 
fly to fall into position to actuate the hammer 
again without any full recovery of the key. 
Fig. 3 a detached perspective view of the main 
fly. Fig. 4, a similar view of the secondary fly. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
actions for upright pianos, the object being 
to improve the tonal brilliancy of this class 
of instruments by a very simple and inexpen 
sive construction. 
With these ends in view, my invention con 
sists in the combination with a hammer-butt 
constructed at its lower end with an upper 
and a lower shoulder, of a fly located below 
the said butt, in position to co-act with the 
said lower shoulder in throwing the hammer, 
a secondary fly co-acting with the upper 
shoulder, and a rocker having the lower ends 
of the said flies pivoted to it on opposite sides 
of its fulcrum. 
Myinvention further consists in certain de 
tails of construction and combinations of 
parts as will be hereinafter described and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings I have shown 
a view partly in section and partly in eleva 
35 
45 
tion, of an action of approved construction, 
for an upright piano. Inasmuch, however, as 
this action is well known, and will be readily 
understood by those familiar with this art, I 
will not describe it further than is necessary 55 
in the disclosure of my present invention. 
Under my invention the hammer-butt, A, 
is constructed at its lower end with a shoulder 
C, which is old, and with an upper shoulder 
(', the said shoulders being separated by a 6o 
beveled or inclined surface a, which merges 
into the lower shoulder a. A fly B, co-acting 
With the lower shoulder a, in the usual man 
ner, for giving the hammer C the impulse by 
which it is thrown against the string D, is piv. 65 
oted at its lower end to the outer end of the 
rooker E, which is of the usual construction. 
The upper end of this fly is bifurcated to form 
an open slot B", which receives the narrow up 
perend of an auxiliary or secondary fly F, which to 
plays through the said slot, and co-acts with 
the upper shoulder a? of the hammer-butt, in 
momentarily sustaining the hammer in an in 
termediate position, giving the main fly B, an 
opportunity of resuming its place under the 75 
lower shoulder C, as will be described later on. 
The said auxiliary fly F, is pivoted at its lower 
end to the inner end of the rocker E, at a point 
on the Opposite side of the fulcrum E' there 
of, from the pivotal connection of the main 8o 
fly B, with the said rocker. As herein shown, 
the action-rail G, is provided with an inclined 
transverse opening G, for the said auxiliary 
fly to play through. I do not, however, limit 
myself to constructing the action-rail in this 85 
manner for securing a passage for the sec 
Ondary fly, for it might be made in some other 
Way, as for instance, in longitudinal braced 
Sections; or the parts might be constructed 
and arranged so that the secondary fly would go 
not be obliged to be passed through the ac 
tion-rail. 
The Secondary fly is brought into play for 
Securing greater tonal brilliancy for the piano, 
particularly when the keys are struck so rap. 95 
idly that they do not have time to fully re 
turn to their normal positions, as for instance 
in the action of trilling. 
The Operation of my improved construction 
will be understood by reference to Figs, 2, 28 roo 
 
O 
and 2 of the drawings. Fig.2 represents the 
positions of the hammer and flies after the 
key has been struck, and while it is still in 
in its lowest or depressed position, the ham 
mer being caught on its rebound by the back 
check H. Now when the key is relieved of 
pressure, and allowed to rise a little, or begin 
its recovery, the consequent movement of the 
rocker will cause the main fly and the back 
check to move downward, and the hammer 
which is thus relieved of support, will move 
slightly outward, as shown by the broken 
lines to the right of the full lines in the said 
figure of the drawings. When, however the 
fly and back-check are being moved down 
ward by the depression of the outer end of 
the rocker, the elevation of the inner end 
thereof is moving the secondary fly upward, 
and its upper end is soon engaged with the 
upper shoulder of the hammer-butt, as shown 
by Fig. 2, which also shows a slight forward 
movement of the main fly. The described 
movement of the rocker continuing, the Sec 
ondary fly moves the hammer slightly for 
ward into the position in which it is shown 
by the broken lines at the right of the full 
lines in Fig. 2 of the drawings. This for 
ward movement of the hammer permits the 
main fly to fall inward under the lower shoul 
der of the hammer, as shown by the broken 
lines in Fig. 2 of the drawings, whereby the 
said main fly is in position to effectively op 
erate the hammer again, although the ham 
mer has not, since its last operation, com 
pleted a full movement, and although the key 
has not been allowed to fully recover. If, 
now, the key is depressed again from its par 
tially recovered position, a clear note may be 
sounded on the String, and this may be re 
peated any number of times Without ever al 
lowing the key to fully recover. 
In upright pianos as ordinarily constructed, 
trilling and other rapid movements cannot be 
executed with rapidity without a loss of tonal 
brilliancy, on account of the fact that to Se 
cure a distinct quality of tone time enough 
must be allowed between every impact of the 
hammers on the strings for the former to fall 
fully back into their normal positions as 
shown by Fig. 1 of the drawings. My sec 
ondary fly as above described, provides for 
catching the hammer in an intermediate po 
sition, and holding it there while the main 
fly resumes its position under the lower shoul 
der of the hammer, which it will do even if 
the key is not allowed to fully recover. 
It will be readily understood, then, that by 
providing for a proper and rapid action of 
the hammer when the key is not allowed to 
fully recover, I am enabled to secure an up 
right piano on which compositions requiring 
great rapidity of execution may be performed 
without a loss of brilliancy and clearness. 
I would have it understood that I do not 
limit myself to the exact construction as 
herein shown and described, but hold myself 
at liberty to make such changes and altera 
tions as fairly fall within the spirit and scope 
of my invention. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is:- 
1. In a piano-action, the combination. With 
a hammer-butt constructed at its lower end 
with an upper and a lower shoulder, of a fly 
located below the said butt in position to co 
act with the lower shoulder thereof, a second 
ary fly co-acting with the said upper shoul 
der, and a rocker having the lower ends of 
the flies pivoted to it on opposite sides of its 
fulcrum, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a piano-action, the combination with 
a hammer-butt constructed at its lower end 
with an upper and a lower shoulder, of a fly 
located below the said butt, co-acting with 
the lower shoulder thereof, and having its up 
per end bifurcated; a secondary fly extend 
ing at its upper end through the bifurcated 
upper end of the main fly to co-act with the 
upper shoulder of the butt, and a rocker hav 
ing the lower ends of the said flies pivoted to 
it on opposite sides of its fulcrum, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. In a piano-action, the combination with 
a hammer-butt constructed at its lower end 
with an upper and a lower shoulder, of a fly 
located below the said butt in a position to 
co-act with the said lower shoulder, a sec 
ondary fly co-acting with the said upper shoul 
der, a rocker having the lower ends of the 
flies pivoted to it on opposite sides of its full 
crum, and an action-rail constructed to per 
mit the secondary fly to play through it, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In a piano-action, the combination with 
a hammer-butt constructed at its lower end 
with an upper and a lower shoulder, of a fly 
located below the said butt, in a position to co 
act with the said lower shoulder, a secondary 
fly co-acting with the said upper shoulder, a 
rocker having the lower ends of the flies pivot 
ed to it on opposite sides of its fulcrum, and 
an action-rail having a transverse opening 
formed in it to permit the secondary fly to 
play through it, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK A. GUTII. 
DAVID LORBACH, 
FREDERICK GUTH. 
75 
IOO 
IIO 
1 I5 
2 
491,808 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491408.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 491,408, 
C. B. DAWIS 
CUI, WERT, 
Patented Feb. 7, 1893. 
Z2/1 
a\\ 
. 
C 
N 
N EEE Y 
% 2. 6%% 
Nizilia Essist Efe E23. 
Esfirefleft| 3, 
% 22,W 
E. % 
N S2 (Y 
es 
AY 
SNYA 
- - - 
s 
D 
Sy 
w? 
M S SAS SS NYS 
SS 
2 7 If 
22 
I LEW2 
Will III:/W 
WZZ 
W 
2 
7. 
 
Assa 
ma-ww.m-wn 
www.mmmon-as 
unpurpom-wwariam 
--wramorpommendoms 
WITNESSES: 
 
?t27. 3. A 
: 
(2 
y 
P ?a 
2-64 
" (6 
AT TORNEYS. 
  
  
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES B. DAVIS, OF SAVONA, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND 
DAVID A. CRAND ALL OF SAME PLACE. 
C UWERT 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,408, dated February 7, 1898. 
Application filed November 5, 1892, Serial No. 451,028, (No model.) 
45 
of the culvert to be built. The plates A are 
formed at their ends with inwardly bent 
flanges D, and corresponding flanges E are 
formed on the outer plates B and extend in 
an opposite direction, that is outwardly, to 
the flanges D, as will be readily understood 
by reference to Fig. 1. The flanges D and 
E form a foot for the arch composed of the 
metallic plates, and rest on a suitable foun 
dation F built in the banks of the culvert. 50 
Stones or other suitable materials are placed 
on top of the metallic arch to build the cul 
vert in the usual manner. As shown in the 
drawings a stone facing is set on the ends of 
the metallic arch, and the space between the 
facings is filled in with earth or other mate 
rial to the desired height. A culvert built in 
this manner is very durable, and the arch can 
be quickly set up and the facings and fillings 
put in position without requiring much skill. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent;- 
1. A culvert provided with a metallic arch 
composed of curved plates placed one on top 
of the other to break joints, and riveted to 
gether, substantially as shown and described. 
2. A culvert provided with a metallic arch 
comprising two sets or series of metallic plates 
placed one on top of the other to break joints, 
rivets for fastening the two series of plates 
together, and flanges formed on the ends of 
the said sets of plates and bent on opposite 
directions to form a foot for the arch, sub 
Stantially as shown and described. 
65 
55 
CHARLES B. DAWIS. 
Witnesses: 
J. C. MALLORY, 
WM. B. MALLORY. 
d 
20 
To a 24 who, it inctly concert: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES B. DAVIS, of 
Savona, in the county of Steuben and State 
of New York, have invented a new and Im 
5 proved Culvert, of which the following is a 
fuli, clear, and exact description. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved culvert, which is simple 
and durable in construction, readily set up 
in place, and cheaply manufactured. 
The invention consists of two series of 
curved metallic plates placed one on top of 
the other to break joints, and riveted together 
to form a double-Walled arch. 
The invention also consists of certain parts 
and details, and combinations of the same, as 
will be fully described hereinafter and then 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which silmilar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the improve 
ment as applied; Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec 
tion of the same; and Fig. 3 
is a sectional. 
plan view showing the plates riveted together 
and breaking joints. 
The improved culvert is provided with two 
series of metallic piates A and B, curved to 
correspond to the shape of the arch to be 
built, the said series of plates A and B being 
placed one upon the other and the several 
plates being arranged so as to break joints, 
as will be readily understood by reference to 
Figs. 2 and 3. The series of plates A and 
B are fastened together by means of suitable 
rivets C or other devices, and a desired num 
ber of plates are joined in the manner de 
Scribed so as to form an arch of the desired 
4o length; that is, corresponding to the width 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491508.txt	(No Model.) 
A. P. G. ROLLET, Deo'd. 
P. MAUR0, Administrator. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FOR THE PURIFICATION OF CAST IRON, 
No. 491,508. 
Patented Feb. 7, 1893. 
 
Fi gl 
 
  
 
 
 
  
S 
1. 2. 
2 
2 
 
N N 
 s N. His 
% I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Ret 
 
 
 
 
VVitozesses. 
22. 
31 ... 
Azavezzo 
4-4-1 le?z-4 6-24-22.2 24 
 
A. P. G. ROLLET, Dec'd, 
P. MAURO, Administrator, 
APPARATUS FOR THE PURIFICATION OF CAST IRON, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 491,508, 
Patentid Feb. 7, 1893. 
B 
I 
. 
Ali 
HTTT 
III: I AIEEgy 
HIHTTHRH 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZ222222222222 
Witnesses. 
2%ee 
r 
X Azzezzo7. 
47 4-4-2 see 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
A. P. G. ROLLET, Deo'd. 
P. MAURO, Administrator. 
APPARATUS FOR THE PURIFICATION OF CAST IRON, 
No. 491,508, 
Patented Feb. 7, 1893. 
Fig. 3. 
 
 
 
NaN 
HN S S 
x2 
is S 
a 
gig 
2r. 
WTNESSES 
2" 
inventor 
4-cez-z-z (2 % (2-4-4- 
21- 4. Z22-22-4-2/< 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTOINE PIERRE GUILLAUME ROLLET, OF ST. ETIENNE, FRANCE; PHILIP 
MAURO, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, ADMINISTRATOR 
OF SAID ROLLET, DECEASED. 
APPARATUS FOR THE PURIFICATION OF CAST. RON. 
-- 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,508, dated February 7, 1893. 
Application filed August 28, 1889. Serial No. 322,199. (No model, Patented in France May 10, 1884, No. 162,003; in England 
0ctober 28, 1884, No, l4,264 and in Germany May 20, 1885, No. 33,386, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ANTOINE PIERRE GUIL 
LAUME ROLLET, a citizen of France, residing 
at St. Etienne, (Loire.) France, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Ap 
paratus for the Purification of Cast-Iron, (for 
which I have received Letters Patent in 
France, No. 162,003, dated May 10, 1884; in 
England, No. 14,264, dated October 28, 1884, 
and in Germany, No. 33,386, dated May 20, 
1885;) and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
Suitable apparatus for practicing a process of 
purification of cast iron, described in another 
application Serial No. 322,200 for Letters Pat 
ent filed here with, said process involving the 
treatmentata high temperature, with the aid of 
carbonaceous fuel and a hot blast, of pig iron 
with or without the addition of wrought iron 
Scrap, in a neutral medium resulting from the 
combined action of hot blast, fuel, pig-iron 
and iron ore in convenient proportions and 
in the presence of an extra-basic containing 
but little iron-oxide slag, consisting mainly of 
lime and fluorspar. 
Myinvention consists in a special construc 
tion of a cupola furnace, which is fully rep 
resented in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section on the line ac-ac 
of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a front elevation partly 
in section on the line -y of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
is an enlarged vertical section similar to Fig. 
1, showing the details of the slag outlet and 
metal trough. 
Like symbols of reference indicate like parts 
in each figure. 
In the drawings, A is the cupola, the general 
construction of which is after the usual pat 
tern. 
Bindicates the position of the elevated stage 
from which the charge is introduced into the 
opening G. 
C is the chimney supported on four or more 
columns C C C, &c. 
His an annular perforated water pipe, sur 
rounding the cupola at a point above the Zone 
of greatest heat, the purpose of which is to pre 
vent the burning of the sheet metal exterior 
casing of the furnace. The water which is 
not evaporated is caught and carried away 
by an annular gutter I at the base of the cu 
pola. 
F FF are tuyeres for the introduction of 
hot blast in the usual Way, and are Water 
cooled by the ordinary devices for that pur 
pose. These tuyeres are located above the 
hearth of the furnace in three or more sepa 
rate tiers, and with any suitable number in 
each tier as is usual, but their arrangement is 
peculiar in that the tiers are placed at a greater 
vertical distance apart than in the ordinary 
practice, the purpose of which is to extend the 
depth of the Zone of greatest heat on account 
of the larger proportion of lime and fluorspar 
to the ton of metal, which is used in my pro 
cess, so as more effectually to fuse and bring 
into contact these ingredients which are de 
signed to react on each other, and on the metal 
under treatment; and another peculiarity of 
arrangement is that the tuyeres composing 
the lowest tier have a distinct dip or down 
ward inclination the purpose of which is to 
prolong the action of the blast on the iron, 
slag and fuel, until the iron which has been 
fused and refined together with its slag has 
been removed from the furnace. Thisarrange 
ment also avoids too high a carburization of 
the iron, which otherwise might result from 
the high temperature employed and the extra 
basic nature of the slag. The cupola, itself is 
lined in the Zone of greatest heat with a thin 
coating of usual refractory material, which 
wears away very little, if at all. But after 
twenty or thirty hours' running, this Zone be 
comes coated with a lining of metallic iron, 
obviating the necessity of having that portion 
55 
yo 
75 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
- 
 
49,508 
O 
of the furnace lined with basic material, the 
nature of the first coating being thus of no 
further consequence. 
In front of the furnace, at a lower level than 
5 the bottom of the hearth of the furnace, is a 
detached fore - hearth D, constructed of or 
lined with refractory material. This fore 
hearth may be heated in any convenient man 
ner, and is designed to receive and store up 
the melted metal, which may from time to 
time be tapped from it. A trough Econnects 
the hearth of the cupola with the fore-hearth, 
as Will be presently described. At the bot 
tom of the hearth of the furnace and below 
the lowest tier of tuyeres, is the tap-hole K, 
forming a common exit for the metal and slag, 
which pass off substantially at the same time, 
the slag floating on the surface of the metal. 
Thence the metal free from slag passing by 
the aperture Lascends in the conduit E, along 
which it runs into the fore-hearth D. The 
shape of the passage-way for the metal through 
the conduit E where it connects with the fur 
nace is shown in Fig. 2. This conduit pro 
jecting from the body of the furnace is lined 
With refractory material, and water-cooled on 
the Outside by pipes R. Above the level at 
which the metal runs off is a passage O lead 
ing off the slag over the dam M outward to the 
slag trough as shown in Figs. 1 and 3. This 
dam M is built up of brick cemented with 
coal tar. Around the opening O, through 
which the slag discharges, is coiled a pipe Q, 
through which a current of cold water, from 
any suitable source, constantly flows. At any 
Suitable point the connections by which this 
Coil is supplied may be flexible, to admit of 
slight vertical adjustment of the coil in the 
Slag-opening, so that when desirable, the level 
at which the slag discharges may be varied. 
This is merely a matter of convenience, and 
not a part of the invention. The dam M is 
Supported by a movable plate P, which is 
drawn aside when the dam has to be removed, 
45 for putting the cupola out of work. The pur 
pose of all these arrangements is to separate 
35 
25 
40 
55 
o 
75 
the metal from the slag as soon as it reaches 
the bottom of the furnace and gets beyond 
the reach of the blast. The refined metal 
flows on one side by a steady continuous run 
to the fore-hearth D, and the slag flows On 
the other side, through the hole left inwardly 
by the coil of the water pipe, in the slag 
trough. The tapping of the separate fore 
hearth D does not interfere at all With the 
run of the apparatus, and the continuation of 
the process, which consists of the melting of 
the pig-iron with or without scrap, its passage 
through a highly heated neutral medium, re 
sulting from convenient proportions of reduc 
ing material like fuel and pig and of oxidiz 
ing materials like blast and iron ore, if neces 
rary, in presence of a highly basic slag, com 
posed of lime and fluorspar or equivalent 
substances, with which the silicon, Sulphur 
and phosphorus unite by chemical reaction 
resulting in the purification of the metal. 
I claim as my invention:- 
1. An apparatus for refining and purifying 
melted pig metal, consisting of a substantially 
cylindrical receptacle with two or more rows 
of tuyeres located above the hearth, the low 
est row of tuyeres having a dip or inclination 
inward and downward, while the tuyeres of 
the other rows are substantially horizontal, 
and a tap-hole arranged to keep the level of 
the molten metal below the tuyeres; Substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
2. A cupola furnace, provided with two or 
more rows of tuyeres located above the hearth, 
the lowest row of tuyeres being inclined in 
wardly and downwardly, and a single tap 
hole arranged to keep the level of the molten 
metal below the tuyeres; substantially as and 
for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ANTONE PERRE GUIIAUME ROLET, 
Witnesses: 
G. DE MESTRAL, 
R. J. PRESTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491608.txt	(No Model.) 
J. STEPHENSON, 
TRAM CAR. 
No. 491,608, 
Patented Feb, 14, 1893, 
 
 
 
i SyxxxyxsaxxSNSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSRSSNSSSSSSSSSNSSSSSSSSSS 
O 
% 
ser 
sessierrestress 
areas 
4. 
O $ S 
S SS 
SSSSSSSS %2S 
SSSSSS 
Z3 
se 
22. 2 
S. S3 BS 2 
  
Eaa El 
%383: 
-T-7- 
332; 
- 33x2 
2 
6 
2. 
the ORRIS PETERS co, PHorelitic. washtigton. p. c. 
(littoric to 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
i. 
JOHN STEPHENSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TRAM, CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,608, dated February 14, 1893. 
Application filed September 5, 1892, Serial No. 445,119, (No model.) 
IS 
25 
O 
To att, whon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, JOHN STEPHENSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Tram-Cars, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to tram cars and con 
sists in certain improvements hereinafter set 
forth and illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which:- 
Figure 1, is a transverse section of a tram 
car illustrating my improvements. Fig. 2, is 
a plan view of the door sill plate. Fig. 3, is 
a vertical section through one of the door 
hangers and sheaves upon which the door is 
Supported. 
Ill train cars employing sliding doors sus 
pended from above an objection is often found 
resulting from the end sill being forced down 
by the platform and the weight of the passen 
gers thereon, thereby disarranging the rela 
tionship of the door sill plate and causing 
the door to become stuck or operate badly. 
My invention is adapted to be used in con 
nection with tram car doors of the character 
described and claimed in my application Serial 
No. 370,776, filed November 8, 1890, although it 
is adapted to be used in connection with doors 
of other kinds. Such doors as are shown in 
the application are of more than usual weight 
and when open to their farthest extent their 
rear edges are at or near the joint of the end 
sill with the side sill of the car. It therefore 
follows that if the door sill plate be support 
ed and carried by the end sill alone and if 
the latter sill be forced downward away from 
the side sill, by reason of the load upon the 
platform, the door will not be supported at its 
lower edge by the flanges of the door sill plate 
and that it is therefore liable to work unsatis 
factorily. 
My invention consists in improvements in 
the construction of the car whereby the door 
sill plate is supported at its outer end upon 
the side sill so that it is always held in proper 
relationship to the door, even when the plat 
form is heavily loaded and caused to sag 
thereby. 
In the drawings A, designates the car door 
which is supported upon the rails 2 and 3, by 
the sheaves 4 and 5. The door shown is rep 
resented as having a vertically sliding sash 
Cl, which when lowered moves between the 
45 
35 
6. 
outer and inner faces of the door. As the 55 
door A, may be of more than ordinary Weight, 
particularly when constructed as above de 
scribed, the carrying sheaves are made strong 
and provided with improved means for lubri 
cating their axles 6, which are made of large 
diameter and are carried by the brackets 7. 
The axle 6, is hollow, as shown in Fig. 3, and 
is provided with a tube 8, communicating 
with the interior of the axle and discharging 
at the exterior lower side thereof. 
9, represents the end sill of the car and 10, 
10, the side sills thereof. 
11, represents the door sill plate provided 
with flanges 12, between which the lower edge 
of the door runs and by which it is guided. 
The door sill plate 11, may be of one or more 
parts, with the outer end of the plate resting 
on the side sill 10, and the plate 11, otherwise 
supported by the end sill to which it is secured 
and through which plate bolts pass down 
through the plate and sill to carry the plat 
form. . This combination secures the end sill 
and its plate from being depressed by the 
loaded platform, and preserves the proper re 
lationship of those parts with the door. 
6 5 
75 
. 
What I claim is . 
1. A tram car with its door bottom sliding 
between rising flanges on the door sill plate 
with its end resting on the side sill of the car 
body, substantially as described. 
2. A tram car with its door hung on sheaves, 
the axle of the sheave being hollow and pro 
vided with a tube communicating with the 
interior of the axle and discharging to the 
exterior of the lower side thereof, substan 
tially as described. 
3. A tram car with its door hung at or near 
its top by sheaves having enlarged axles pro 
vided with oil chambers within the journals 
and tubes for dripping the oil on the sheave 
axle journals, and the door bottom sliding be 
tween rising flanges of the door sill plate with 
its end resting on the side sill of the car body, 
the plate carrying the platform bearer bolts 
which hold up the car platform with its load, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN STEPHENSON. 
Witnesses: 
S. A. STEPHENSON, 
WM. J. WALKER, 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491708.txt	(No Model.) , 
C. W. JEFFERSON. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR AND DYNAMO MICA INSULATOR, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 491708, 
Patented Feb, 14, 1893. 
 
E-2 - 
 
 
I 
y% 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-S heet 2. 
C. W. JEFFERSON. 
ELECTRIC M0T0R AND DYNAM0 MICA INSULAT0R. 
No. 49 l708. 
Patented Feb. 14, 1893, 
   
E? E 
 
(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
ELECTRIG M0T0R AND DYNAM0 MICA INSULAT0R, 
No. 491708, 
Fila, 
- 
Patented Feb. 14, 1893, 
Fig.14. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. JEFFERSON, OF SCHENECTADY, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO 
EUGENE MUNSELL & CO., OF NEW YORK, N.Y., AND ELIZABETH, NEW 
JERSEY. 
ELECTRIC ???OR AND DY NAMO MCA INSULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,708, dated February 14, 1893. 
Application filed June 1, 1892, Serial No. 435,171. (No model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
To all ution, it nail, concern, 
Be it known that I, CHARLESW.JEFFERSON, 
a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, and 
a resident of Schenectady, in the county of 
Schenectady and State of New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Electric Motor and Dynamo Mica Insula 
tors, (Case No. 3) of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to the end pieces or 
heads and other insulating wrappers for ar 
matures, dynamos or electric motors. 
The object of the invention is to thoroughly 
equip the armature with insulation which is 
practically entirely formed of mica, which is 
known to be among the very best electrical 
insulators. 
In order that my invention may be under 
stood as applied to any of the ordinary types, 
I have shown the same, in detail as regards 
the Gramme, the Siemens, and the Pacinotti, 
by means of the accompanying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a Gramme 
or ring armature, provided with mica insula 
tors in accordance with my invention. Some 
of the insulators are omitted and parts are 
broken away, and only some of the grooves are 
indicated in the drawings. Fig. 2 is a section 
of a portion of the armature shown in Fig. 1, 
indicating particularly the iron laminae and 
pulley for holding the same. Fig. 3 is one of 
the insulators to be inserted in the grooves 
shown in Fig. 1, whereto such insulators are 
applied. The insulator in Fig. 3 is shown in 
perspective. Fig. 4 is the mica insulator ap 
plicable to the interior of the ring. Fig. 5 is 
a perspective view of the flanged annular 
mica disk employed as a head piece to the ring 
armature. Fig. 6 shows in plan the mechani 
cal construction of the head piece represented 
in Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of a 
drum armature with parts broken away for 
the purpose of showing that to which the mica 
insulators are applied. Fig. 8 is a perspective 
view of the cylindrical mica insulator shown 
partly also in Fig. 7. Fig. 9 is a perspective 
view of the mica, insulating head. Fig. 10 is 
a similar view of the insulating tubing for 
the armature shaft. Fig. 11 is a sectional 
view showing the application of the elements 
in Figs. 8, 9, 10. Fig. 12 is a plan of the head 
before it is flanged, showing the mechanical 
construction thereof. Fig. 13 is a perspective 
of a ring armature having end projections to 
form notches to hold the conductors. Only a 
part of the armature is shown. Fig.14 is a 
section of a portion of the armature shown in 
Fig. 13. Fig. 15 is a plan of the mica head 
piece seen in Fig. 13. Fig. 16 is an insulator 
for the projections seen in Fig. 13. Fig. 17 is 
a plan of a portion of the iron ribbon form 
ing the core shown in Fig. 14. 
The head a has the following construction: 
Radial mica scales b are fastened together 
with overlapping edgesto forma ring; a con 
centric ring is likewise formed of scales b', 
the two rings not overlapping each other in 
the construction shown in Fig. 6. 
c represents mica scales overlapping each 
other and forming a ring connecting the first 
two named rings which are lettered d and e. 
The scales coverlap the scales b, b' several 
rings a are made in like manner and piled on 
top of each other, cemented with varnish, Com 
pressed; and before drying are molded by 
pressure into substantially the form shown in 
Figs. 1 and 5. During the process of bending 
in the mold, the radial and overlapping mical 
scales b, b and c slide to accommodate the 
bending, so that, if the varnish is dried while 
in the mold, the ring a will take up a perma 
nent set which will exhibit the form shown in 
Figs. 5 and 1. The slotted insulator in Fig. 3 
is also constructed of aminae made of artifi 
cial mica, sheets, constructed in a manner simi 
lar to that named in 1reference to the ring 
shown in Fig. 6. It is of such a form as to 
slide into the dove-tailed grooves g in the ar 
mature f. The ends of the slotted insulators 
h shown in Fig. 3, project beyond the grooves 
g. Between the spokes i, are curved insula 
torsi which are cylindrical with a given cyl 
inder, except near the ends, which are ab 
ruptly bent inwardly against the spokes. The 
sheet of which the insulator i is constructed 
is built up of mica scales having cemented 
overlapping joints. 
The head in shown in Figs, 7, 9, 11, and 12 
consists of concentric overlapping rings made 
of overlapping mica scales n, n', n", n", ce 
90 
95 
OCO 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
t 
91,703 
mented together and piled on top of one an 
other as to the concentric rings considered to 
gether as their disk. While the varnish is 
still Wet the flange n' is turned up and thus 
held during the process of drying the varnish, 
after which the head remains as a flanged in 
Sulator. The split cylinder O is also built up 
of laminated unica sheets each consisting of 
Scales of mica overlapping. The said cylin 
der is wrapped upon the drum almature as in 
Fig. 7. The head n is applied to the end of 
the armature in such a manner that the flange 
77' Overlaps the end of the cylinder O. The 
nica insulating tube p is applied to the shaft 
q which it fits snugly. 
The head r is an annular disk, with its in 
mer and Outer edges flanged and provided 
With trapezoidal perforations s, through which 
paSS iron projections t of the armature core, 
Which is made of a ribbon al Wound in con 
Volutions and having wider portions l' to 
form the said projections t. In Fig. 17 the 
Strip is magnified in length and diminished 
in width for the purpose of illustrating better 
that the strip at has an enlarged portion. 
Upon the trapezoidal projections i are slipped 
and held trapezoidal tubes , so that when 
Wire is Wound in the usual manner, it will be 
held effectually away from the metallic part 
of the armature. On the interior of the ar 
mature are pieces of mica insulating sheets 
i exactly like that shown in Fig. 4. 
The trapezoidal tubes 2, and the circular 
tube p may be held to the heads by shellac or 
Warnish. Also varnish may be applied be. 
tween the heads (i, n and ) and the insulat 
ing covering of armature shown in Fig. 13. 
I claim as my invention: 
1. An annular disk for insulating armature 
head, consisting of laminae of annular disks 
each of which consists of the combination of 
concentric rings formed of mica, with their 
edges overlapping and cemented together and 
a ring of mica scales overlapping and ce 
mented to one another and to Said first named 
rings. 
2. A disk for insulating armature heads, 
consisting of concentric rings of mica Scales, 
radiating from the center, overlapping alld 
cemented together at their edges. 
3. A disk for insulating armature heads, 
consisting of concentric rings of mical Scales, 
radiating from the center, overlapping and 
cemented together at their edges, and a flange 
formed at the periphery of Said disk. 
4. An armature consisting of the combina 
tion of a ring core supported upon radial 
spokes, a flanged annular mica disk, applied 
to each end of said ring, the flanges passing 
to the interior and exterior of said ring, curved 
mica sheets applied to the interior of said ring, 
between the spokes, slotted mica insulators 
l, applied in grooves which are provided on 
the exterior of said armature, and projecting 
from said grooves at the ends. 
5. An armature consisting of the combina 
tion of a ring core supported upon radial 
spokes, a fianged annular mica disk, applied 
to each end of said ring, the flanges passing 
to the interior and exterior of Said ring, Cllrved 
mica sheets applied to the interior of Said ring, 
between the spokes, slotted mica insulators li, 
applied in grooves which are provided on the 
exterior of said armature and projecting from 
said grooves at the ends, each of the Said mical 
insulators being formed of mica scales ce 
mented together with overlapping edges ce 
mented together. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 28th day of May, 
1S92. 
CILARLES W. JEFFERSON. 
Witnesses: 
A. II. JACKSON, 
S. WW. JACKSON. 
45 
7 O 
75 
So 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491808.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 491,808, 
S, OPPENHEIMER. 
BOARD FOR WINDING VEILs, 
Patented Feb. 14, 1893. 
 
WWwssts:- 
Sysis 
(302. QN 
4- -N 
\WAYor, al 
s: S.*Oppenheim or, - 
C24- 27, 24 
. 
Wu Wvs \\ovvely, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMON OPPENHEIMER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BOARD FOR WIND IN G VELS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,808, dated February 14, 1893. 
Application filed November 8, 1892, Serial No. 451,308, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SIMON OPPENHEIMER, of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Boards for Winding 
Weils; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
said invention, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawing, and to the letters of ref 
erence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to boards for support 
ing veils or veiling wound thereon in the form 
of a bolt; and the object of my invention is 
produce a device of this character particu 
larly adapted for supporting a strip of bor 
dered veiling Wound thereon in such manner 
that the completed bolt will have a substan 
tially uniform thickness from end to end, 
while at the same time providing a light and 
strong board for this purpose. 
When along Strip, as twelve yards or more, 
of ladies' veiling having tufted or beaded bor 
ders is wound on a board or equivalent sup 
port, there is a tendency of the complete bolt 
to be thicker at those portions where the bor 
ders of the veiling are wound than at the in 
termediate portions; and in order that a series 
of such bolts of veiling may be properly piled 
one upon another if desired, and in order that 
a single bolt may have a better appearance, I 
have provided a board which shall be thicker 
at its center than at its ends. 
My invention consists in the board as here 
inafter described and claimed. 
In the drawing which accompanies and 
forms part of this specification, C, a represent 
two pieces of thin material, as pasteboard, 
permanently united together at their ends a', 
as by cloth or paper passed over said ends 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
and glued, cemented or otherwise fastened 
thereto. At about the center of the two pieces 
C. a. is a brace b which may be of paste-board 
or other suitable material having its opposite 
edges glued, cemented or otherwise fastened 45 
to the two pieces a. a. and preferably I pro 
vide two more braces l'b' of slightly less 
width than the brace b, located intermediate 
between the brace b and the ends a, and Se 
cured in manner similar to that of the braceb. 5o 
It will be readily understood that upon 
winding a number of yards of bordered veil 
ing upon the completed board, said winding 
being in the direction of the arrow 1, or in a 
direction reverse thereto, the thinness of the 55 
board at its ends will compensate for the in 
creased thickness of the material wound ow 
ing to the quantity of beads or tufts at either 
edge of the strip. 
Obviously, modifications may be made in 
the proportions and relative arrangement of 
the parts shown; and it will be understood 
also that the pieces ct a may be formed by 
bending or folding a single strip of material 
at a sharp angle and uniting the two ends to 
gether in manner such as described. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim is: 
Aboard for winding veils, consisting of two 
pieces or strips of suitable material fastened 
together at their ends and having separating 
braces secured between the central portions 
of said pieces, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
65 
SIMON OPPENHEIMER. 
Witnesses: 
ARNO R. THURM, 
HERMAN ATTSTAEDRY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US491908.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 491,908, 
C. STARZ, 
NUT DOCK, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CORNELIUS STARZ, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO ALBERT STARZ, OF SAME PLACE. 
NUT-LOCK. 
SPECIFlCATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 491,908, dated February 14, 1893. 
Application filed June 29, 1892, Serial No. 438,360, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CORNELIUS STARZ, of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Nut-Locks, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the ac 
Companying drawings, forming part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan view of my improved 
nut lock as applied to a wooden structure; 
and Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional view on the 
line II-II of Fig. 1. 
My invention relates to that class of nut 
locking devices wherein a spring engages the 
base of the nut and prevents the loosening 
thereof, and it consists in a plate. having a 
spring cut therefrom and bent upwardly into 
a curved form, in combination with a nut hav 
ing a series of recesses in its base with which 
the curved leaf spring engages with sufficient 
force to prevent the turning of the nut by the 
rattling or shaking to which the bolt is ex 
posed. 
In the drawings, 2 indicates a rectangular 
plate having depressed portions 3 struck 
downwardly therefrom, so as to hold the plate 
firmly in position by their entering the wooden 
piece through which the bolt passes. A curved 
spring 4 of the contour illustrated in Fig. 2, 
is cut from this plate and bent upwardly, its 
central portion having the convex form shown. 
The nut 5 is provided at its corners on the 
base thereof with a series of curved recesses 
with which the curved portion of the spring 
successively engages as the nut is turned to 
place. The spring is of sufficient strength to 
prevent the turning of the nut by the rattling 
of ordinary use, but is not so powerful as to 
The advantages of the device result from 5o 
prevent the nut being turned by the ordinary 4o 
devices used therefor. The cuts for the 
spring-strip may diverge toward the base if 
desired, to give more strength to the spring. 
The method of using the device is obvious. 
The perforated plate 2 is slipped over the 45 
bolt and the nut forcibly screwed home, the 
spring successively engaging the recesses in 
the nut until the desired point is reached, 
when the spring is left in one of the recesses. 
its easy application and removal, while it ef 
fe?tually prevents any turning of the nut, 
The device is simple, strong and easy of 
manufacture and may be applied to iron or 
other structures or to railroad rails by a slight 55 
change in the plate, which changes I regard 
as coming within the scope of my invention. 
I claim:- 
1. A nut lock comprising a plate having a 
strip cut from the body thereof and bent into 6o 
an outwardly convex curved spring, said 
Spring being supported at one end, and a nut 
aving a recess at each corner of its base; sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
2. A nut lock comprising a plate, having an 65 
outwardly convex spring struck up from the 
body thereof, depressed portions struck down 
Wardly from the body of the plate to hold the 
same in place, and a nut having a series of 
recesses which the spring is arranged to en- 7c 
ter; substantially as described. 
my hand this 23d day of June, A. D. 1892. 
CORNELIUS STARZ. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
Witnesses: 
W. B. CORWIN, 
C. BYRNES. 
O . 
IS 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492010.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
. 
. 
No. 492,010, 
A. J. GREELEY. 
FLOOR CLAMP, 
Patented Feb. 21, 1893, 
 
 
 
1. s 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW J. GREELEY, OF HILLSBOROUGH, WISCONSIN. 
FLOOR- CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,010, dated February 21, 1893. 
Application filed August 6, 1891, Serial No. 40l,833. (No model,) 
IO 
To all who, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ANDREW J. GREELEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hills 
borough, in the county of Vernon and State 
of Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Floor-Clamps; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to floor clamps, and 
has for its object to provide a device that will 
be strong, durable and convenient, and it con 
sists in the construction and combination of 
parts of the same as will be hereinafter more 
fully set forth. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings in 
which the same reference letters indicate cor 
responding parts throughout the different 
views:-Figure 1.--is a perspective view of my 
improved clamp in position for use. Fig. 2.-- 
is a vertical sectional view of the same. Fig. 
3.--is a transverse sectional view on the line 
acac of Figs. I and 2. Fig. 4.--is a detailed 
view of another form of the clamping block. 
Referring particularly to the drawings, A 
indicates the main portion or the body of the 
device, the upper end of which is adapted to 
be used as a handle, and the lower portion as 
a support for the separate pieces. 
B, B, are two arms which are pivotally con 
nected to the lower end by means of a rod C, 
which passes through a hole or perforation in 
the lug or projection Dupon the lower por 
tion of the body A. Although these arms 
can be connected in any convenient manner, 
I have shown them each provided with a rect 
angular opening E, the upper and lower walls 
of which F, F, are inclined from both sides, 
which fit upon the outer ends of the rod C, 
which are also rectangular, and each end is 
rovided with a screw G against which the 
arms will bear. The lower end of each of 
these arms is provided with an inwardly pro 
jecting stud H which points slightly upward 
and is adapted to engage with sides of the 
joist, the inner portion of the arms above the 
studs being hollowed out as shown at I to pre 
35 
40 
45 ) 
55 
vent the arms from engaging with the upper 
edge of the joist, and thus preventing the 
Studs from entering the sides of the joist lower 
down. The sides of the projection D are 
made slightly beveled see Fig. 3 or inclined 
toward each other, so that the ends of the 
arms B which project above the sides, can be 
forced together and thus release the studs 
from the joist to move the clamp. Just above 
the projection D and upon the same side of 
the body A, projects a post J the outer end 
of which is bifurcated and provided with a 
pivot L. A brace M is pivotally secured with 
in the bifurcation of the post J, and has a stud 
or pin N in its lower end to engage with the 
top of the joist. The upper end of the brace 
M is curved and projects a slight distance 
above the post and is preferably provided 
with a head or flattened portion to assist in 
manipulating the brace. A spring O is con 
nected at One end to the body A between the 
projection D and post J and at its opposite 
end to the inner side of the brace M just be 
low the pivotal point. 
The extreme lower end of the body A is 
provided with a longitudinal slot P, through 
which passes the pin Q, to the outer end of 
which is detachably secured the clamping 
block R, the opposite end of the pin being 
provided with a head or block S which pre 
vents its passing through the slot. The length 
of the pin Q is greater than the thickness of 
the body A so that after the block has been 
forced up against the flooring as firmly as 
possible by means of the brace or fulcrumM, 
and held there by the pressure of the oper. 
ator's hand upon the upper end of the han 
dle a Wedge T can be driven down between 
the block and the lower end of the body, which 
will force the block tighter against the floor. 9o 
As the lower end of the body is pointed and 
rests against the top of the joist in an inclined 
position, the back thrust of the wedge is taken 
up by the body of the clamp, and the board 
is driven in the opposite direction until it is 
firmly held against the last board that was 
laid. The wedge T has its lower end slotted 
to pass over the pin Q, and is movably se 
cured to the body by means of a dovetailed 
projection U, which fits in a corresponding 
dovetailed groove V in the body A. Its in 
95 
75 
CO 
O 
492,010 
2 
ner face is also preferably provided with a be strong and durable. The main parts of it 
lip or projection W, which engages with teeth will be of steel, except the upper part or hall. 
dle of the body A, which will preferably be of 
or serrations X upon that side of the body. 
wood something in the shape of a chisel han 
In operation the implement is taken in the 
dle. The separate pieces will be secured to 
right hand with the index or forefinger on the 
the body by means of nuts and bolts. 
upper end of the brace M, and the left hand 
Having thus described my invention, I 
holding the upper ends of the arms B, B. 
The block R is then placed against the floor 
claim 
1. In a floor clamp, the combination with 
ing board which is to be driven up against 
the body having a perforated projection near 
its companions, and the lower portions of 
its lower end, the sides of which are inclined 
the arms B, B, are made to straddle the joist, 
toward each other, of a rod through the pro 
and the brace MI is released. The studs at 
jection, the ends of which are rectangular in 
the lower ends of the arms B, B, are then 
cross section, an arm on each end of the rod 
made to engage with the sides of the joist, 
having a rectangular opening, the upper and 
and the stud or pin N in the end of the brace 
lower walls of which opening are inclined 
is made to engage with the top of the joist. 
from both sides, a bolt or retaining device 
Now by forcing the upper end of the handle 
through each end of the rod beyond each arm, 
Over toward the brace the lower end of it will 
the upper ends of the arms projecting above 
be crowded over in the opposite direction, 
the inclined portion of the projection, and the 
which will of course carry the clamping block 
opposite ends each being provided with an 
and the board with it. By exerting sufficient 
inwardly projecting stud or pin, a block on 
force upon the handle the board can be usu 
the lower end of the body, and a rearwardly 
ally driven up against the adjoining board 
projecting brace pivotally connected with the 
where it can be nailed in the usual manner. 
body above the projection, substantially as 
But if it stick or otherwise can not be driven 
up tight enough by operating the handle, the 
described. 
2. ln a floor clamp, the combination with 
wedge can be driven down by striking the 
the body, of the block R. loosely connected 
upper end which is preferably slightly en 
larged for that purpose. As the points of the 
with the lower end thereof and having a lim 
ited movement, the adjusting wedge Isliding 
teeth or serrations project downward, the 
between the body A and block R and operat 
wedge can be driven down, but will not slip 
ing on said block as specified, and the rear 
back until after the clamp has been removed 
Wardly projecting brace pivotally connected 
from the joist, when the lower end of the 
to the opposite side of the body; substantially 
wedge can be forced out from the portion A 
sufficiently to let the projection slip over the 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a floor clamp, the combination with 
serrations, and the wedge can be raised to its 
original position. If the clamp is to be used 
the body, the lower end of which is slotted 
and provided with a lengthened dovetailed 
on lined flooring in which the joists are cov 
groove, a headed pin through the slot, a clamp 
ered up, the arms B, B, must be removed or 
ing block detachably secured to the end of 
turned up so that their lower ends will not, in 
the pin, a wedge between the body and the 
terfere with or strike against the floor and 
thus prevent the block and fulcrum from en 
block, the lower end of which is slotted, and 
gaging with their respective parts. 
the rear face is provided with a dovetailed 
rib or projection to fit the groove, and a rear 
In using the implement for ceiling, the 
wardly projecting brace pivotally connected 
clamping block R should be removed and the 
with the opposite side of the body, substan 
one K, shown in Fig. 4 should be substituted 
tially as described. 
in its place. Each of the blocks has a lip or 
lips Y upon its upper edge to engage with the 
4. In a floor clamp, the combination with 
the body, the lower end of which upon one 
upper side of the board or floor, while the 
side is provided with teeth or serrations, a 
upper and lower faces of the block K are re 
block loosely connected with that side of the 
cessed or hollowed out as shown at Z to per 
body, the upper and lower faces of which are 
mit of the nail being driven in to hold the 
cut away or recessed, a wedge between the 
board while the block is still in position. 
In laying flooring the operator stands at 
body and the block, the inner face of which 
is provided with a projection, a rearwardly 
one side or the other of the clamp and conse 
projecting brace pivotally connected with the 
quently the best results are secured by lo 
opposite side of the body, and a spring one 
cating the recesses at each end of the block, 
end of which is connected with the body and 
but in ceilings, the operator stands below the 
the opposite end is connected with the brace 
clamp which causes the blow of the hammer 
below it substantially as described. 
to fall more in a line with the handle or cen 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
tral portion of the clamp and therefore, the 
presence of two witnesses. 
recess is more preferably located at the cen 
ANDREW J. GREELEY. 
ter of the block, as shown in Fig. 4. 
From the above description it will be evi 
dent that my clamp can be used for flooring, 
ceiling, siding, or wain Scoting and that it will 
ROGER WILLIAMS, 
J. A. COSGROVE. 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
IOC 
O 
I I5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492110.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 492,110, 
 
AUTOMATIC INDIVIDUAL TELEPHONE CALL APPARATUS, 
J. SACK. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
. Patented Feb. 21, 1893, 
Ep 
2. 
Z2 1. 
Lament. A 
N 
NaNaNaNass 
s 
a 
- 
- - - - 
V 
It 
8 
WS 
 
a\ 
2 EA 
 
 
 
-- 
o 
1% h; 
AE,72 
772) inlint'? 
Figri.; / in 
OE-Seefit 
2. 
AAR 
6tse 
Eise 
III || || ||||Ints 
IT oral 
24. 
3:2 
beat-34Zzalo 
the Norris Petersco. Phero-LTHO. WASHINGTON, DC 
H 
(No Model.) 
J. SACK, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
AUTOMATIC INDIVIDUAL TELEPHONE CALL APPARATUS, 
No. 492, 110, 
Patented Feb. 21, 1893. 
 
last 
C2 
NYN pre-R 
s AT 
A 
7 
  
 
  
s 
 
 
 
2 i 
w 
s 
N N SN N N 
N N. 
a 
 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, Photo-LTHo, washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 492,110, 
AUTOMATIC INDIVIDUAL TELEPHONE CALL APPARATUS, 
J. SACK. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3: 
Patented Feb. 21, 1893. 
 
NRRS FTERs co, PH-liho, WAShinTOM. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 492,110, 
AUTOMATIC INDIVIDUAL TELEPHONE CALL APPARATUs, 
J. SACK. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. . 
Patented Feb. 21, 1893, 
the Norris PETERs co. Hoto-liro. Washiaron. D. C. 
 
AUTOMATIC INDIVIDUAL TELEPHONE CALL APPARATUS, 
J. SACK. 
(No Model.) 
No. 492,110, 
6. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Feb. 21, 1893. 
 
to Model.) 
J. SACK 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
AUTOMATIC INDIVIDUAL TELEPHONE CALL APPARATUS, 
No. 492, 110, 
Patented Feb. 21, 1893. 
 
the worris pent Rs co. Photo-uTrio, WASkiNGTON, O'C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH SACK, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
AUTOMATIC INDIVIDUAL TELEPHONE - CALL APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,110, dated February 21, 1893. 
Application filed September 18, 1891, Serial No. 406,062, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
w 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH SACK, a subject 
Of the German Emperor, residing at Berlin, 
Germany, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Automatic Individual 
Telephone-Call Apparatus, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to a telephone call 
apparatus by means of which the called up 
Station may be readily connected with the 
transmitting station, while the other stations 
in the circuit are entirely disconnected, so that 
the latter cannot interrupt or intercept the 
COnVersation. 
The invention consists in the various fea 
tures of improvement more fully pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
alongitudinal section through the apparatus. 
Fig.2 a plan Fig. 3 a cross section. Fig. 4 a. 
longitudinal section with the parts in a differ 
ent position. Fig. 5 an elevation of part of 
the apparatus. Fig.6 a further elevation with 
the parts in a different position. Fig. 7 an end 
View of spring m. Figs. 8 and 9 are still fur 
ther elevations of the apparatus. Figs. 10, 11 
and 12 are details of the toothed segment g 
and Spring b. Figs. 13 to 16 are further de 
tails of the disk h, and co-operating parts 
and Figs. 17, 18, 18, 18, 19, 19, 19, 20, 209, 
and 21 show the circuits. 
The letter C. represents the key having wedge 
shaped plug C, which on depression of the 
key bears against armatured, and the contact 
Spring b, to push the latter away from pin c 
and against pin c' (Fig.11). The current then 
passes (Fig.19) from the battery over connec 
tion B, contact c'spring b, contact pino, spring 
n, lever m, connection Land thence through 
the other instruments in the circuit and back 
Or to the earth. In those apparati within the 
circuit, in which spring b, remains in contact 
With pin C, the current runs over connection 
L', lever m, spring m', pino, spring b, pin c', 
and thence through the electro-magnets di, 
connected therewith, to connection L, and 
to the earth or farther on through the con 
ducting wires. The electro-magnets d, at 
each station Will become active and attract 
their armatures d. The armatured, is free to 
turn on pivots d, and is normally drawn away 
from the electro-magnet by a spring f, (Figs, 
9, 10 and 11.) 
The armature is provided with pin d", mov 
able within the toothed slotted segment g. 
This segment g, is moved by spring f, to the 
left for the distance of one tooth, during each 
motion of the armature. If at any one sta 
tion, the key is depressed three times, to three 
times close the circuit, the armatures will be 
attracted and released three times and the seg 
ments g, will be moved forward three teeth at 
each Station. 
Upon the shaft of the segment there is set 
a disk h, having contact pinh. This pin, as 
will be described further below, comes into 
contact with contact spring m, during one 
particular position only of disk h. The 
pins h", are differently arranged upon the 
disks, at the different stations. Thus if the 
key is depressed once, the pin h", of say the 
first station, makes contact with spring in, 
while by a double depression of the key, the 
pin h, of the second station makes contact 
with its spring &c. (see Fig. 20). 
The apparatus is provided with a clock 
work which is immediately disconnected upon 
a motion of segment g, and disk h. The 
clockworks of all the stations within the cir 
cuit will be simultaneously set in motion, if 
at any one Station contact is made, by a de 
pression of the key, because the magnets will 
attract the armatures of all the stations and 
thus the segments g, and disks h, will all be 
moved forward. At the transmitting station 
also the clockwork is disconnected, because 
by a pressure upon the key C, the plug C, is 
pressed against armature d, and thus the 
pin d', liberates the segment g, for the dis 
tance of one or more teeth. The segment g, 
falls under the action of its spring and takes 
the disk h, with it. The clockwork is now dis 
connected by the disk h. This disk is pro 
vided with a notch, which is engaged by a 
tooth k', of lever k (Figs. 1, 4, 6, 13 to 16). 
The lever turns on shaft k, carrying lever 
armic, having pawl le". The pawl k", is placed 
over the clock escapement, having stop k, 
and permits such stop to turn in one, but not 
in the other direction. When the stop k, 
rests against the pawl, the spring of the es 
capement remains under tension. Thus, as 
Io 
5 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
492,110 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
soon as the leverk, is depressed and the lever 
arm k', is raised, the escapement is at once 
set into action by its spring. This occurs on 
the turning of disk h, because the tooth k', 
will then be pressed out of its notch and the 
leverle, and arm lic, will be set in motion (Figs. 
15 and 16). 
The clockwork will cause primarily a mo 
tion of the contact lever n. This takes effect 
because after a few seconds (during which 
the key has been depressed one or more times) 
the tooth l, of disk l turning a shaft l', will 
leave the nose n, of lever m, and the latter is 
by spring p, moved toward the contact pin O, 
(Figs. 1, 5, 6 and S). 
At the stations that are not to be called up, 
the lever n will with spring n, lie against 
pin o', whereby these apparati are all discon 
nected and a direct communication is estab 
lished through the conducting wires that are 
attached to the connection L and L. The 
current will travel over connection L', lever 
na, spring in', pin o', to connection L", and to 
the conducting wires or the earth. At the 
transmitting and receiving stations however, 
the telephone or the call is brought into the 
circuit (Fig.18). At the transmitting station 
the depression of key d, will cause simulta 
neously the depression of a lever q, placed be 
neath plug a'. The lever q, will be held down 
by pawl q', against the action of a spring q. 
When the tooth l, of disk l, leaves the nose 
in, of lever m, the latter will with its projec 
tion n, bear against lever q. Thus lever m, 
is held in a position, that it can neither go 
with spring na', to contact O, nor with spring 
m, to contact o' (Fig. 5). The current will 
therefore travel over lever m, lever q, con 
nected with connection T, (Fig. 20) and over 
the telephone or call to the ground or back. 
At the receiving station the making of the 
contact will, as has been stated, cause the pin 
h', to come into such a position, that the 
spring m, on lever m, will strike against the 
pin. Thus the lever m, is also put into a po 
sition, that it will, with springs m, n, touch 
neither pin O, nor pin o'. As the disk h, is 
connected with connection T, the current can 
travel over lever n, spring n, pin h", disk h, 
connection T, &c. to the receiving instrument 
or call. The contact between lever n, and 
lever q, or spring m, and pin h", takes place 
only after a short motion of the clockwork. 
The current for the call station is now closed 
as follows: from the key over connection T, 
lever q, projection m', lever m, connection L", 
to the conducting wires and to the called 
station, thence over connection L', lever n, 
spring in, nose h', disk h, connection T, to 
the instrument T', and thence to the call or 
through the instrument to connection L, and 
thence back or to the earth. The segment (1, 
and disk h, are moved back by nose t', (Figs. 
1, 13 to 16) after one revolution of disk t, 
mounted on shaft l'. This nose moves back 
ward the levers, having noses', and held by 
springs. Thus the lever 2, is simultaneously 
moved in the same direction, in as much as it 
is connected with lever S, by arm y'. The 
lever, carries at its upper end a pin v', which 
strikes against nose g', of the segment and 
thus the latter is turned slowly out of the 
position shown in Fig. 15. The pin d, of 
the armature, does not offer any resistance to 
this motion, because the teeth of the segment 
are inclined in that direction (Figs. 2, 10 and 
11). After the segment has turned back, the 
clockwork is again simultaneously stopped. 
Together with the segment, the disk h, placed 
on the same shaft, comes back into its primary 
position, so that the tooth k', of lever k, can 
fall into the notch. This causes the lever k, 
with its pawl k", to drop and stop the escape 
ment. In order to prevent the clockwork from 
being stopped before the nose t', of disk i, can 
resume its primary position (Figs. 1, 4 and 13) 
and can pass the noses', of lever S, an addi 
tional lever arm u', terminating in hook w', is 
secured to shaft l'. This hook engages the 
pin v', of lever v, as soon as the latteris moved 
out of its normal position by noset' (Figs. 4, 
15 and 16) so that the lever w, is held and the 
lever armic', remains raised, even if the notch 
in disk h, would permit an engagement with 
the tooth c'. As soon as the noset, leaves 
the lever and the latter is drawn back by 
springs, the lever v, will resume its normal 
position and the pin c, will leave lever v', so 
that the lever arm lic, can fall down by grav 
ity. Immediately before the segment g, or 
simultaneously therewith, the lever q, comes 
back into its normal position, because the nose 
mi, on shaft l', (Figs. 4 to 6 and 8) will strike 
against nose ', of pawl q', before the disk has 
completed its rotation. The nose n*, will thus 
draw the pawl back from pin q, so that the 
spring q', can push the lever q, back into its 
normal position. 
If the call of the receiving station is not to 
be acted upon directly by the battery or the 
induction current, but by a local current, a 
special contact system having a local battery 
is used. This consists of spring u, with iso 
lated nose u', and contact screw u, (Figs. 1, 
3, 4, 6 and 8.) The disk l, carries a pin 2, 
Which presses the Spring it, against contact 
disk it, after the apparatus has run a short 
time. This closes the call circuit for about 
ten seconds. The local current now runs as 
follows (Fig. 18): from battery to connection 
W., spring it, contact screw u', connection L", 
lever m, spring m, nose h', disk h, connection 
T, to the call and back to battery. 
The circuits are indicated in Figs. 17 to 21. 
Upon the depression of the key, the current 
travels as follows (Fig. 20): from the battery 
over connection B, contact c, spring b, pino, 
spring n., lever n, connection L', and thence 
through the following apparati and back 
through the ground. In those apparati within 
the circuit in which the spring b, remains in 
contact with pin c, (Fig.20") the current trav 
els as follows: from connection L", lever m, 
Spring 77', pin O, spring b, pin c, electromag 
75 
95 
too 
I o5 
IO 
I 25 
 
492,110 
3. 
O 
25 
. 
At the stations which are not desired to 
netd, connection L, and thence to the ground 
or to the continuation of the circuit, 
At the transmitting apparatus, in which 
the key is depressed at the telephone or the 
inductor is revolved (Fig. 198) the current 
travels as follows: over connection T, disk h, 
lever q, projection m, lever m, connection L", 
through the wires to the receiving station and 
there over projection L', lever m, spring m, 
nose h", disk h, connection.T, to the telephone. 
The current passes either over the telephone 
lever to the alarm, or if the telephone is in 
use, through the telephone to connection I 
and thence back or to the ground. 
. 
be 
connected (Fig. 19) the lever m, makes con 
tact by spring m, with pin o'. This discon 
nects the several apparati and causes a di 
rect connection of the wires secured to the 
connections L', and L, because the current 
travels over connection L', lever m spring m, 
contact pin o', to the connection L", and to 
the continuation of the circuit or to the 
ground. 
At the receiving station (Fig. 19) in which 
the lever m, with its projection m, makes 
contact with pin h, of disk h, the current 
travels as follows: over connection L', lever 
m, spring m, pin h", disk h, connection T, and 
to the telephone or to the alarm. 
The local current travels as follows: from 
the battery to connection W, spring u, con 
tact it, connection L', lever m, spring n, nose 
h', disk h, connection T, to the alarm or back 
to battery. 
An indicator may be employed which shows 
when the clockwork of an apparatus has run 
Witnesses: 
AUGUST BUTTNER, 
PAUL SHOPPE. 
45 
55 
down and which simultaneously euts of the 
apparatus, so that the current can continue 
over the circuit, or with the last apparatus, 
can return or go to the ground. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of lever m, with the 
pins 0, o', disks h, having nose h', and lever 
q, with which the lever m, is adapted to make 
contact, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination of key a, having plug 
a', with lever q, adapted to be depressed by 
the plug, pawl q', adapted to engage the lever 
and with contact spring b, contacts c', c, and 
segment g, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination of spring u, with screw 
pin u, disk l, having pin 2, and nose l, and 
with lever m, spring m', and contact o, sub 
stantially as specified. 
4. The combination of lever g with shaft l' 
having nose n, disk l having tooth l, lever 
m having nose in and projection m and with 
pawl q' having nose n', substantially as speci 
5. The combination of segment g, having 
noseg', with shaft l', disk i, having nose t, 
levers s, v, w, pin , notched disk h, lever k, 
having nose k", and pawl k", and with an es 
capement adapted to be engaged by the pawl, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses, 
fied. 
- 
-- 
JOSEPH SACK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492210.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 492,210, 
F. C. KIMBALL. 
HARNESs, . 
s 
Patented Feb. 21, 1893. 
(Oz/7zesses 
22, 4 
z-aror 
4-ca. 646clo?e 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDDIE C. KIMBALL, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO HELEN ELIZA 
KIMBALL AND ANNIE IRENE WHITNEY, OF SAME PLACE. 
HARN ESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,210, dated February 21, 1893. 
Application filed June 2, 1892, Serial No. 436,244 (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDDIE C. KIMBALL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Harnesses; and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
Myinvention has relation to improvements 
in harness, and it has for its general object to 
provide a breeching, a breast collar or other 
piece of harness in which folds are used, of 
Such construction that the face strap or part 
of the piece which is designed to bear against 
the body of the animal, will be perfectly 
Smooth so as not to chafe or rub the animal. 
With the foregoing end in view the novelty 
of the invention will be fully understood 
from the following description and claims 
When taken in connection with the annexed 
drawings, in which:- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view, partly in 
transverse section, of a breast collar con 
structed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view illustrating the 
manner of connecting the outer layer or strap 
to the burr or foundation pieces. 
Fig. 3 is a 
transverse section showing the relative posi 
tions of the face strap and the burr or foun 
dation pieces when the same are connected 
together; and, Fig. 4 is a similar view show 
ing the burr or foundation pieces partly 
turned up into their proper positions. . 
In the said drawings, similar letters desig 
nate corresponding parts throughout the sev 
eral views, referring to which: 
A indicates the burr or foundation pieces 
of my improved breast collar which are pref 
erably formed from two strips of heavy 
leather; and B indicates the face strap which 
is designed to bear against the body of the 
animal bearing the harness. This face strap 
is preferably connected by stitches c or oth 
erwise to the upper sides of the burr or foun 
dation pieces A, while the parts are in the 
relative positions shown in Fig. 3; so that 
when the said burr or foundation pieces are 
carried upward and inward and are laid edge 
w 
to edge within the face strap, as better shown 
in Fig. 2, of the drawings, the rolls b, will be 
formed to cover and protect the stitches c. 
After the burror foundation pieces have been 
laid within the rolled edges of the face strap, 
the contiguous edges of the said pieces are 
connected by suitable stitches as cl, which 
preferably do not extendentirely through the 
pieces. 
C indicates the outer layer or strap of my 
improved breast collar. This strap lies be 
tween the rolling edges b of the face strap B, 
and against the foundation pieces A. It is 
laced or stitched to said foundation pieces, in 
substantially the manner shown in Fig. 2, 5 
whereby the stitches c', do not pass into or 
through the face strap and therefore said face 
strap is left entirely smooth on its outside. 
In order to prevent any of the stitches c' from 
showing on the outside of the strap C, I pre 
fer to slit the edges of said strap and to so 
form the stitches that they will lie within the 
said slits, substantially as shown in Figs, 1 
and 2. 
When the parts forming my breast collar 
are connected together, as shown in Fig. 1 of 
the drawings, it will be seen that the edges 
of the upper walls of the slits in the outer 
layer or strap C will impinge against the roll 
ing edges of the face strap B and will inclose 
and protect the stitches c' from the action of 
the weather whereby the usefulness of the 
breast collar will be prolonged. 
By my improved construction it will be seen 
that not only are all the connecting stitches 
protected from the weather, from frictional 
wear and from perspiration, but the face 
strap which bears against the skin of the ani 
mal is smooth from stitches or other slight 
projections calculated to chafe and rub the 
skin. 
Although I have specifically described the 
construction and relative arrangement of the 
several elements of my improved breast col 
lar so as to enable others skilled in the art to 
thoroughly understand and appreciate the 
same, I do not desire to be confined to such 
construction and relative arrangements, as 
such changes or modifications may be made 
as fairly fall within the scope of my invention. 
75 
9.) 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
492,310 
that covered by the face strap, substantially 
as specified, 
2. A breast collar or other part of a harness, 
Substantially as described, comprising the 
face strap, the burr or foundation pieces con 
nected to the face strap and having their con 
tiguous edges connected together, an outer 
layer or strap having its longitudinal edges 
slitted, and stitches taking through the inner 
Wall of the slits and into the burr or founda 
tion pieces, substantially as specified. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FREDDIE C. KIMBALL. 
25 
Witnesses: 
EDM. M. WHITNEY, 
E. L THURSTON, 
- 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A breast collar or other part of a harness, 
Substantially as specified, consisting essen 
tially of the burr or foundation pieces, a face 
strap covering one side of the burr or foun 
dation pieces and having its edges rolled at 
b, and resting upon the opposite side of the 
burr or foundation pieces, the stitches c, con 
necting the edges of the face strap to the 
burr or foundation pieces and arranged so as 
to be covered and protected by the rolls b, 
Stitches connecting the contiguous edges of 
the burr or foundation pieces, and an outer 
layer or strap connected to the burr or foun 
dation pieces above on the opposite side to 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492310.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 492,310, 
J. H. STEEN. 
SURFACE CUTTING T00, 
Patented Feb. 21, 1893. 
77(672&sses 
2%-2, 
172%72a27 
9%Zees Z.5%ieze, 
1. 
7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. STEEN, OF CANTON, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JAMES W. COLE, 
OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
SURFACE CUTTING TO O. L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,310, dated February 21, 1893. 
Application filed April 21, 1892, Serial No. 430,043, (No model.) 
55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES H. STEEN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Canton, 
in the county of Stark and State of Ohio, have 
invented new and useful Improvements in 
Surface-Cutting Tools, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a new and improved cutting tool particularly 
designed for employment in lathes to turn me 
tallic objects, but useful in other machines or 
wherever metal surfaced cutting is required. 
The invention also has for its object to pro 
vide a novel spirally grooved turning tool of 
uniform diameter which can be readily and 
economically sharpened by grinding only, 
without the necessity of re-dressing, and 
whereby the spiral groove preserves an in 
clined plane back of the cutting edge for the 
purpose of enabling the latter to properly bite 
or cut into the surface of the metal at the best 
angle for removing the surface of the latter. 
To accomplish these objects my invention 
consists in a lathe turning tool having a sin 
gle spiral groove and provided at one extrem 
ity with oppositely beveled portions, a spiral 
cutting edge, and a longitudinally beveled up 
per clearance surface for permitting lateral 
movement of the turnings. 
The invention is illustrated by the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1, is a perspective view of my im 
proved cutting tool arranged in a suitable tool 
holder and in the act of turning the shaft. 
Fig. 2, is a broken perspective view of the 
cutting tool. Fig. 3, is a plan view of the tool 
looking at the under side thereof, and Fig. 4, 
is a detail view on an enlarged scale of the 
cutting end portion of the tool. 
In order to enable those skilled in the art 
to make and use my invention I will now de 
scribe the same in detail, referring to the draw 
ings wherein 
The numeral 1 indicates the tool which is 
of uniform diameter from end to end so that 
it can be fitted into and be properly clamped 
by a tool holder 2 of any suitable construc 
tion. The tool is constructed with a single 
spiral groove 3, which as here shown, com 
mences at the point 4 remote from the end 5 
to leave this end portion of the tool in the 
form of a solid cylinder; but this is not indis 
pensable. The spiral groove extends from the 
point 4 to the outer extremity of the tool and 
terminates in a point 6. The upper extrem 
ity is ground or dressed off to form two oppo 
sitely beveled portions or surfaces 7 and 8, 
and the outer end portion of the tool is also 
constructed with a beveled upper side 9, 
which extends longitudinally or in the direc 
tion of the length of the tool to permit lateral 
passage or movement of the turnings. The 
outer end of the spiral groove serves to pro 
vide an inclined plane, or a curved incline 10, 
back from the cutting edge 12, so that the tool 
is rendered susceptible of properly biting or 
cutting into the surface of the metal at the 
very best possible angle for removing the sur 
face thereof. The cutting edge 12 extends in 
a spiral or curved line from the point 6 to the 
outer end portion 13 of the cutting edge, as 
will be best understood by reference to the 
enlarged detail view Fig. 4. This spiral form 
of the cutting edge 12 renders it possible to 
provide a very sharp edge while there is suf 
ficient metal immediately back of such edge 
to secure the requisite strength and radiation 
of heat, so that the tool can be employed at a 
maximum speed in a lathe or planer without 
injury resulting from undue heating. 
The cutting tool is cylindrical and of uni 
form diameter from end to end and conse 
quently when the cutting edge becomes worn 
away, the tool can be slightly rotated axially 
in its holder, before using, to bring the cut 
ting edge to its original position and thus pre 
sent such cutting edge at the same angles to 
the surfaces of the metal which is to be re 
The cutting tool should be rigidly held in 
a solid manner to prevent it from revolving 
or turning when operating to remove the sur-. 
faces of metal objects. 
The holder is preferably constructed as de 
scribed and claimed in the Letters Patent No. 
463,394 issued to me November 17, 1891. 
By my invention the spirally grooved and 
beveled construction produces a tool which is 
substantially different from an ordinary twist 
drill, in that I am enabled to practically use roo 
moved. 
9o 
95 
75 
25 
35 
45 
 
- 
2 
492,310 
o 
the device for turning cylindrical metal ob 
jects or removing the surface from objects of 
other form. 
A substantial difference between my im 
proved cutting tool and an ordinary drill re 
sides in the fact that a drill requires to be 
ground with a clearance back from the edge 
of the spiral the entire length of the groove, 
for otherwise the drill would heat, expand and 
choke or break in the hole being bored. 
My improved tool is of uniform diameter so 
that it can be gripped solidly, and the cutting 
edge operates to cleave or remove the surface 
from a metal object revolving in a lathe. 
Although, I have particularly mentioned 
the cutting tool as employed in a lathe, it will 
be obvious that it can be employed in a plan 
ing or shaping machine or wherever the sur 
face of a metallic object is to be removed. 
In the use of a cutting tool in a lathe, the 
longitudinally beveled upper side 9 serves to 
direct the spiral cuttings in a lateral direc 
tion. 
25 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A metal cutting tool provided with a sin 
gle spiral groove terminating at one end in a 
cutting edge, said tool having a beveled clear 
ance surface 9 for permitting lateral passage 
or movement of the cuttings, substantially as 
described. 
2. A lathe turning or metal cutting tool 
having a single spiral groove 3 and provided 
at one extremity with oppositely beveled por 
tions 7 and 8, a spiral cutting edge 12, and a 
longitudinally beveled upper clearance sur 
face 9 for permitting lateral passage or move 
ment of the turnings, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
my hand and affixed my seal in presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 4C 
35 
JAMES H. STEEN. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
A. J. TSCHANTZ, 
F. W. BOND. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492410.txt	(No Model.) 
A. P. MERRILL, 
ALARM BELL. 
No. 492,410, 
Patented Feb. 28, 1893. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANSON PARKER MERRILL OF FALL RIVER, MASS ACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR, BY 
DIRECT AND MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO HIMSELF AND CHARLES A. 
HICKS, OF SAME PLACE, AND WALTER J. HARRISON AND EBEN L. 
HARRISON, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
ALARM - BE LL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,410, dated February 28, 1893. 
Application filed April 25, 1892, Serial No. 430,543, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, ANSON PARKERMERRILL, 
of Fall River, in the county of Bristol and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and usefullmprovements in Alarm-Bells; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form part 
of this specification. 
This invetion relates to certain improve 
ments in bicycle alarm bells. 
The object of the invention is to provide an 
improved alarm bell exceedingly cheap, sim 
ple and durable in construction and composed 
of a minimum number of parts, and wherein 
a depression of the lever or handle will cause 
the clapper to strike twice by a very simple 
contrivance. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction and in combinations of 
parts more fully described hereinafter and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
Figure 1, is a bottom plan of the bell. Fig. 2, 
is a plan view with the gong or bell proper 
removed. Fig. 3, is a central vertical section. 
In the drawings the reference letter a, indi 
cates the base of the bell provided with the 
large perforations or openings as shown. This 
base is also provided with suitable means b, 
not here fully shown for attaching the alarm 
to the handle bar or other part of a bicycle or 
tricycle. 
c, indicates a central post rigid with and ex 
tending up from the base which fits into a cen 
tral aperture in the bell proper or gong d, the 
post having a shoulder on which the gong 
rests and a screw threaded socket into which 
clamping screw f, screws to clamp the gong 
securely to the post as is usual in this kind of 
article. The outer edge of the base is prefer 
ably although not necessarily turned up as 
shown and is slotted or recessed for a suitable 
distance to permit the swing of the finger le 
yer or handleg, having a sleeve at its inner 
- 
. 
- 
endembracing and turning on the inner end of 
the post and from thence extending outwardly 
through said slot to the exterior of the article 
and there provided with a suitable fingerpiece 
or knob h, or other suitable means to be en 
gaged by the hand or finger to swing the lever. 
i., indicates a spring of any suitable and de 
sirable construction yieldingly holding the op 
erating lever or handleg, against one end of 
said slot. This spring is shown as twisted 
from a piece of stiff spring wire and coiled 
around the post with one end engaging the le 
verg, and the other end fitting or hooked in 
perforated lug lic. 
l, indicates the clapper here shown in the 
form of an elbow or right-angled lever at the 
elbow fulcrumed at m, to the base and hav 
ing one end bent up and formed at n, to strike 
and sound the gong; the other, preferably 
short end, extends along the base toward Said 
leverg, and is provided with the upwardly 
projecting studio, on which an anti-friction 
roller p, is preferably mounted 
q, indicates a coil (preferably) spring at one 
end secured to lug k, and at the other end Se 
cured to the clapper and holding portion n, of 
the same against the bell, and the roller p, 
against the tripping mechanism carried by the 
operating or finger lever. 
The operating lever is provided with a suit 
able tripping mechanism for throwing the 
clapper against the gong preferably consist 
ing of a tripping cam r, usually formed ap 
proximately triangular in shape and pivoted 
ats, at or about its central portion to the un 
der side of the operating lever to swing trans 
versely. 
t, t, indicate opposite stop lugsintegral with 
and extending laterally from the operatingle 
ver over the tripping cam. 
u, indicates a shoulder on the underside of / 
the operating lever which limits the swing of 
the tripping cam, and the under side of the Op 
erating lever is recessed or formed so that the 
operating lever can swing back and forth 
over the studo. The inclined edge 2, of the 
tripping cam adjacent to the roller p, is pro 
vided with a depression which strikes the 
roller p, as the operating lever is pressed or 
. 
So 
55 
75 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
492,410 
O 
moved against the tension of the spring, there 
by swinging the cam in the opposite direction 
and forcing the striking end of the clapper 
away from the bell, the roller p, then rides 
over the point or abrupt end 3, of the cam 
which then springs back and the clapper is 
suddenly drawn back to its normal position by 
its spring thereby striking and sounding the 
gong. The stiffspring i, immediately moves 
the operating lever back to its normal posi 
tion thereby riding the roller p, up the inclined 
edge 4, of the cam which swings laterally and 
throws the roller over the point or shoulder 
thereof suddenly against a stoplug it, thereby 
again sounding the gong. It will thus be ob 
served that the gong is sounded twice in rapid 
Succession by a single depression of the oper 
ating lever. When the roller slips over the 
point of the cam the studo, drops on the stop 
lug i, on that side. It will be observed that 
the cam swings a limited amount to throw the 
roller over its point and allow it to drop sud 
denly. 
The construction is very simple, and is yet 
very durable and reliable, and cheap. The 
perforated base is also a point of advantage as 
it permits free exit of sound. 
It is evident that various slight changes 
might be made in the form construction and 
arrangement of the parts described without 
departing from the spirit and scope of my in 
vention hence I do not wish to limit myself to 
the exact construction herein set forth. 
What I claim is 
1. In an alarm bell, a base, a gong, a clap 
per provided with a spring, and the finger le 
ver separate therefrom and provided with a 
5 
25 
35 
 
45 
spring, and the tripping mechanism pivoted 
on said lever to engage aud swing the clap 
per and suddenly release the same, as and for 4o 
the purposes set forth. 
2. An alarm bell provided with the clapper 
and the finger lever, said lever having a swing 
camprovided with a point and edges arranged 
to engage a portion of Said clapper and throW 
the same over the point, as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
3. In an alarm bell, a swing spring clapper 
having a projection, the finger lever having a 
spring and a Swinging cam having edges on 5o 
its opposite sides leading to a point so that 
when said projection strikes and moves up 
either of said edges it will be thrown over the 
point and thereby cause the clapper to sound 
the bell, substantially as described. 
4. In combination, a base having a post, a 
gong on said base, an angle clapper having a 
spring and a lateral stud carrying a roller, the 
finger lever at its inner end mounted on said 
post and provided with a spring, the lever be 
ing formed so that it can swing over said stud 
and provided with the swinging tripping cam 
having the inclined bearing edges, to engage 
Said roller and throw the same over the meet 
ing point, and the stops against which said 
stud strikes when dropping from said cam. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
ANSON PARKER MERRILL. 
5 5 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. A. HICKS, 
E. HAYWARD FERRY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492510.txt	H. GREGORY, 
SHOE FOR CYCLE WHEELS, 
Patented Feb. 28, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 492,510, 
 
W/TWESSES; 
/WWEMTOR 
very 
. . " 
BY 
4. AITORNEY. 
the MORRIS PEFERs co, PHOTO-TKO, WASNsor, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
HERBERT GREGORY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SHOE FOR CYCLE-WHEELs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,510, dated February 28, 1898. 
Application filed October 26, 1892, Serial No. 450,006, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom, it nay concern: 
Be it known that I, HERBERT GREGORY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Cycle-Traction, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
covering or shoe for bicycle-tires, for the pur 
pose of better or more perfect traction or to 
prevent slipping on wet or icy pavements or 
tracks or on ice. 
Iattain the object of my invention by means 
of a strip or belt, composed of two or more 
layers of strong canvas, rubber cloth, or some 
similar substance, in which are fastened short 
spikes, and which is, attached to the tire sub 
stantially as illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, which are made a part of this speci 
fication, and in which 
Figure 1, shows a section of such a belt or 
strip and means of lacing or fastening it to . 
gether and to the tire of the wheel. Fig. 2, 
gives a cross-section view of a bicycle tire, and 
the spiked shoe, and a means of fastening 
them together. Fig. 3, gives a view of a bi 
cycle wheel, with a section of such a spiked 
shoe or belt attached thereto, showing how it 
may be attached, and its general appearance 
when in place and ready for use. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
Out. 
Again referring to Fig. 1, B. indicates, the 
completed shoe or belt. A, the short spike 
with its flat disk or shoulder C. to hold it 
steady. C. and L. represent two thicknesses 
of canvas fastened together by means of flexi 
ble cement (preferably rubber cement) and 
stitched along the edges as indicated by F. 
The disk or shoulder a, of spike A, is shown 
as placed between the two layers or thick 
nesses of the belt with the spike protruding 
through the outer layer. E. indicates eyelet 
holes for the lacings. D. indicates a fine lac 
ing, fastening the ends of the belt together, 
S. aheavier lacing, (preferably of lace leather) 
by which the shoe or belt is to be fastened to 
the tire of the wheel. A shows part of shoul 
der C. cut-away on some of the spikes, to 
make room for the eyelets. 
The cross-section of the tire and shoe shown 
in Fig. 2. more fully shows the shape and rela 
tive position of the different parts to each 
other, T. indicating a pneumatic tire. A shows 
more fully the shape of the spike with its 
shoulder or disk (a. placed between the layers 
of the belt, and slightly sprung to conform to 
the shape of the tire. C,L, the layers of can 
was forming the belt. S, the lacing fastening 
the belt to the tire, and Z, a section of a wheel 
spoke. 
Fig. 3, gives the general appearance of the 
belt or shoe B. fastened to tire T. by means of 
straps S, but I do not limit myself to this 
means of fastening the shoe to the tire, as any 
well known means or style of lacing that 
would hold the shoe to the tire may be used 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
Now, having described my invention and 
how to make and use it, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by ILetters Patent, is 
1. A belt composed of canvas or similar 
substance, having short spikes embedded be 
tween the layers of said belt, and said belt ar 
ranged to be laced to the tire of a wheel, in 
combination with the tire and felly of a wheel, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a flexible ice shoe or belt, arranged to 
inclose a bicycle tire, the combination of the 
flexible belt with the short spikes, said spikes 
embedded between the layers of said belt and 
arranged to prevent the wheel from slipping 
all substantially as set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this Sth day of 
August, A. D. 1892. 
HERBERT GREGORY. 
Witnesses: 
FERDINAND W. GREGORY, 
CAROLINE ORMSBEE GREGORY. 
55 
75 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492610.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 492,610, 
T. L. McKEEN. 
CAR COUPLING, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 28, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z71 - 
s 
2 WAZW.A.S.S.A.S. 
t 
24 
zs4a. 
Zozras2,2.92. e22- . 
2ze- ?t 52. 
attornes 
Toto washNiN., 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 492,610, 
T. L. McKEEN, 
CAR COUPLINC, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
2. 
2. 
Z 
Z. 
23 
1 r 
arzz.wa;SSAs. 
67. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS L. McKEEN, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., ASSIGNOR TO ISAAC G. JOHNSON & 
CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR-coupling. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,610, dated February 28, 1898, 
Application filed September 26, 1892, Serial No. 446,984, (No model.) 
- 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMASL. McKEEN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of New York, in the county of New York and 
5 State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Car-Coup 
lings; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, which will enable others skilled 
Io in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
Companying drawings, which form a part of 
this specification, and in which 
Figure l is a perspective view of my im 
15 proved coupler. Fig. 2 is a perspective de 
tail view of the knuckle, removed from the 
drawhead. Fig. 3 is a plan or top view of 
the coupler, the hood or top part having been 
removed. Fig. 4 is a sectional view on the 
2O vertical plane denoted by the broken line 
marked ac-ac in Fig. 3, showing the location 
and arrangement of the pivotedlocking-latch 
in relation to the drawhead and knuckle. Fig. 
5 is a side view of the pivoted locking-latch, 
25 removed from the drawhead and as arranged 
for freight couplers. Fig. 6 is a top view of 
the same. Fig. 7 is a side view of the piv 
oted locking-latch, removed from the draw 
head and as arranged for passenger couplers; 
3o and Fig. 8 is a detail view of the locking-latch 
pin and its cotter. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in all the figures. 
This invention relates to car couplings of 
35 the type known as twin-jaw couplers, and 
has for its object to render more certain the 
instantaneous and automatic operation of 
couplers of that class. 
Another object accomplished by my im 
40 proved construction is the simplification of 
the coupler as a whole, resulting in increased 
strength and durability, as well as decreased 
cost of manufacture. 
With these objects in view, my invention 
45 consists in the improved construction and ar 
rangement of the knuckle and the device for 
locking and unlocking the same, as will be 
hereinafter more fully described and particu 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter Ades 
So 
ignates the shank and B the drawhead of a 
standard twin-jaw coupler, the latter hav 
ing the usual rigid jaw or guard-arm C. The 
metal body of the drawhead B is cast with a 
chamber or recess, D, for the insertion of the 55 
inner arm or tail E of the knuckle F, the 
curved and projecting outer end of which 
forms the movable coupling jaw G, which is 
preferably bifurcated and provided with two 
Vertical holes, H H, in alignment with each 6o 
other, so that it may be used with an ordi 
nary pin-and-link coupling in a manner Well 
understood. The knuckle F also has a ver 
tical hole, I, for the insertion of the knuckle 
pin J, whereby it is pivoted in the drawhead, 65 
so as to have a free swinging motion. 
By reference to the detail view Fig. 2, it 
will be seen that the tail E of the knuckle is 
provided at its inner end with a recess, K, 
having an interior step or offset, L, and also 7o 
an aperture, M, in its bottom, which said ap 
erture, when the knuckle is in its closed or 
locked position, will coincide with an aperture 
N in the bottom or underside of the knuckle 
chamber D in the drawhead (see Fig. 4). If 75 
any dirt, snow or water should find its Way 
into the knuckle recess K, it will escape 
through the registering openings M and N, so 
as not to choke up the recess and thereby in 
terfere with the operation of the locking-latch, 8o 
shown at O. This latch is a curved bar Or 
arm of metal, having at its inner end, where 
pivoted in chamber D, an oblong hole, 
it is 
P, for the insertion of the pin Q upon which 
the latch is hinged. The inner end of the 85 
latch has also a squared shoulder, S, which, 
by abutting against the squared inner corner 
d, of the recess D, (Fig. 4) will form a bear- . 
ing or support for the latch when the knuckle 
is swung open, and thus support the latch in 9o 
an approximately horizontal position and pre 
vent its free end from dropping down against 
the bottom of the recess. This inner shoul 
der d, in conjunction with the shoulder or 
abutment S of the latch, also, by taking up 95 
lateral strain or pressure on the latch, re 
lieves the pivot pin Q of all strain; this be 
ing the object in making the latch-aperture 
P, through which pin Q is inserted, oval or 
elongated instead of round. The free end of IOC 
 
492,610 
O 
15 
the latch is recessed on its under side so as to 
form a nose, T, of such a size and shape that 
it will fit upon shoulder L within the knuckle 
receSS K. The width of the latch at that end 
is also such that it will fit into and impinge 
against the sides of the knuckle - recess K 
When dropped into it for the purpose of lock 
ing the latch after the coupling has been e? 
fected. The latch may be lifted, to release 
the knuckle and uncouple the cars, by means 
of a rod attached to its free end and passing 
up through an aperture in the top of... the 
draw-head, where it is connected to a chain 
(not shown) passing to the platform or roof 
of the car, as usual. 
In order to accommodate the latch and give 
it sufficient vertical room to play in, I provide 
a chamber, U, in the top of the drawhead, 
which is covered by a hood or housing, V, 
through which the aperture W is made for 
the insertion of the coupling-rod X. In draw 
heads intended for use on freight cars, this 
rod X consists of a flat plate, the lower end 
of Which is inserted into a recess Y in the 
free end of latch O, and pivoted therein by a 
pin Z, the ends of which play loosely in ob 
long and rearwardly inclined slots, a, in the 
bifurcated end of the latch, as shown in Fig. 
5. The lower end of this plate X has a nose 
b, which, when the latch is locked, as indi 
cated in full-lines in Fig. 4, will bear against 
the underside of a beveled drop or projection, 
c within the latch-recess, D, on the side op 
posite to the squared shoulder d of said re 
Cess. By the latch-nose b thus engaging the 
pendant or projection c, it, and with it the 
free end of the latch, is effectually locked in 
place, so that the latch cannot be jarred out 
of the recess K in the knuckle; while, at the 
same time, if the rod or plate X is lifted, 
when it is desired to unlock the latch and un 
couple the cars, the incline of the oblong slot 
d will cause plate X, at the same time that it 
is being lifted by the brakeman, to slide back, 
in the direction of its length, a sufficient 
distance to withdraw the nose to from under 
its Overlapping catch or projection c, thus 
releasing it therefrom, so that it, with the 
free end of the latch, may be lifted up high 
enough to disengage it from its locking-recess 
K in the knuckle and thereby unlock the lat 
ter. So that its jaw G may swing open and the 
cars become uncoupled. 
This backward mo 
tion of the latch is permitted by the oblong 
shape of the hole P through which the latch 
pin is inserted, for if it were round, fitting 
pin Q closely, it is obvious that it would not 
be possible to move the latch in the direction 
of its length upon the pin. 
While the same construction and arrange 
ment may, of course, be applied to couplers 
for passenger cars, I prefer to slightly modify 
the arrangement for that purpose, as illus 
trated in Fig. 7. 
Instead of using a flat plate with a locking 
nose or catch at its lower end, I use a round 
rod X', the lower end of which is bent to form 
an eye around the pin Z, which, in this case, 
is made rigid within the recess Y. In order 
to keep the free end of the latch normally in 
its down' or locked position, I employ a 
spring, e, coiled around the lower end of rod 
X' and bearing with its upper end against a 
stop or button, f, upon said rod, and with its 
lower end against the latch. Thus it will be 
seen that the spring e will operate to depress 
the free end of the latch so as to keep it within 
the locking-recess, K, in the knuckle, and pre 
I may 
vent it from jarring out accidentally. 
also provide either one or both forms of latches 
with a projection, g, at its inner (pivoted) end 
and above the hinge-pin Q, to which said pro 
jection a link, h, may be attached. A short 
rod or chain i, fastened to the free end of this 
link, passes out through an aperture, i (Fig. 
4) in the hood or housing V, and extends to 
the side of the car, so that the latch may be 
lifted, to uncouple the cars, by pulling on this 
rod or chain from the side of the car, as well 
as by lifting rod X (or X) from the roof or 
platform of the car. If it is desired to so ad 
just the knuckle that its jaw G shall be par 
tially open, to facilitate ingress of the coup 
ling-jaw appertaining to the coupler of an ad 
jacent car (as for example, when cars are to 
be coupled on sharp curves), this may be ef 
fected by dropping the latch O into the recess 
K so that its nose T will rest upon the top of 
the recess, or at the point marked l in Figs. 2 
and 4, instead of upon the shoulder L within 
the recess. When cars with twin-jaw coup 
lers are to be coupled on sharp curves, it will 
be advisable to adjust the latch and knuckle 
relatively in this position, and the moment 
the twin-jaw of the adjacent car has entered 
the drawhead, the tail of the knuckle will be 
pushed back so as to allow the latch to drop 
into the bottom of the recess, thus interlock 
ing with the knuckle and completing the 
coupling. 
From the foregoing specification, taken in 
connection with the drawings, it will be ob 
served that the latch O operates by gravity; 
the spring e, when used, being simply to pre 
vent it from accidentally jarring out. 
The lock formed by the recessed free end 
of the latch and the shouldered recess K in 
the knuckle is direct and positive, and by 
providing the knuckle recess with an outlet 
M, coinciding, as we have seen, with a corre 
sponding aperture in the bottom of the draw 
head, I provide against the accumulation of 
matter in the locking recess, so that the latch 
will always drop clear to the bottom and thus 
make a complete and effective lock. 
By the construction of the latch with its 
shoulder S, operating in conjunction with the 
inside shoulder or abutment d, the latch-pin 
or pivot Q is relieved of all strain, all lateral 
strain in turning curves coming upon the 
solid metal of the drawhead which forms this 
shoulder d. Thus it will be seen that all the 
parts of my improved coupler are strong and 
simple, so that the liability of breakage is re 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
Od 
IIC 
IIS 
I 25 
I 3. 
 
492,610 
O 
duced to a minimum and the operation of 
coupling and uncoupling rendered positive, 
certain, and expeditious. 
Having thus described my invention, I. 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. In a twin-jaw car-coupler, the combi 
nation of the recessed drawhead, the pivoted 
knuckle having a shouldered recess at its in 
ner end, and the hinged latch shaped at its free 
end to fit into and interlock with the shoul 
dered recess in the knuckle, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a twin-jaw car-coupler, the combi 
nation of the recessed drawhead having an 
opening in the bottom of its recess, and the 
pivoted knuckle provided with a shouldered 
locking recess at its inner end, having an ap 
erture coinciding with the opening in the bot 
tom of the drawhead recess when the knuckle 
is closed or locked; substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
3. In a twin-jaw car-coupler, the combi 
nation of the recessed drawhead, the pivoted 
knuckle having a shouldered locking recess 
at its inner end, and the latch hinged loosely 
at one end upon a pin so as to give it free 
play in the direction of its length, and hav 
ing a nose or offset at its free end adapted to 
3o fit into and interlock with the shouldered re 
25 
Witnesses: 
W. C. JOHNSON, 
J. FREDERICK KAPP. 
8 
cess in the knuckle; substantially as and for 
p 
the purpose set forth. 
4. In a twin-jaw' car-coupler, the combi 
nation of the recessed drawhead having beV 
eled projection c, the pivoted and recessed 
knuckle, the hinged latch working loosely on 
its hinge-pin, and the lifting-plate having a 
projecting nose impinging against the under 
side of the projection c; substantially as and 
for the purpose shown and set forth. 
5. In a twin-jaw car-coupler, the combi 
nation of the recessed drawhead provided with 
the housing V having apertures Wandi, the 
spivoted knuckle having a shouldered locking 
recess at its inner end, the hinged latch hav 
ing projectiong, the lifting plate or rodhinged 
to the free end of the latch and passing up 
through the top aperture W, and the link h 
and chain i fastened in the latch projection 
g and inserted through the aperture i in the 
housing, substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS L. McKEEN. 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492710.txt	R. C. CARPENTER. 
STEAM CALORIMETER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 28, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 492,710, 
{ 
Acy.z 
X 
7 
2. 
f 
| 
| 
2. 
E. 
alla CCaraenzer 
A. 2e2ZYac %2. 
BY 
/NVENTOR; 
ATTORAVEYS. 
6-O-N-- 
t 
R 
WITNESSES: 
7%-4 
c2%-7- 62. 
R. C. CARPENTER. 
STEAM CALORIMETER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 28, 1893, 
(No Model.) 
No. 492,710, 
 
M 
? 
Ex 
N. 
? 
Tara Yer 
7/YASA 
Z/ZH 
C/ALMAAAAA% 
AIBMAZ 
12.7 
11|| 
7 
1 
272 
/ 
Miscassal 
WITNESSES 
7%4a/-48 
cea--- 27.62% 
- 
/ NVENTOP, 
talla CCaraenzer 
BY 
 
ATTORAWEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ROLLA CLINTON CARPENTER, OF ITHACA, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO 
SCHAEFFER & BUDENBERG, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., AND BUCKAU 
MAGDEBURG, GERMANY. 
STEAM - CALORMETER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,710, dated February 28, 1893. 
Application filed November 10, 1892. Serial No. 451,580. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROLLA, CLINTON CAR 
PENTER, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Ithaca, in the county of Tompkins and 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Steam-Calorimeters, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to a steam calo 
rimeter or apparatus for determining the 
amount of water carried in suspension in a 
current of steam. 
It is very important in various industrial 
pursuits employing steam, to be able to de 
termine by a simple process the weight of 
Water mechanically carried by the steam, 
first, since this water is an inert substance 
So far as ability of doing work is concerned, 
and secondly, it is liable by its presence in 
large quantities to damage or destroy steam 
engines which are operated by the steam con 
taining the water. Knowledge of the pres 
ence of this water will generally permit the 
adoption of some means to prevent the dam 
age that would otherwise occur and thus pre 
vent the damage that might be caused should 
it pass into the engine operated by the steam 
containing it. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple but accurate calorimeter which is ar 
ranged so that a sample of the steam from the 
Steam pipe, shall pass through the calorimeter 
and thence into the air whence it may be 
Wasted, or drawn into a sewer. The amount 
of moisture in the steam is determined by a 
simple calculation, based on the reading of 
a thermometer inserted in the instrument. 
The instrument belongs to the class of calo 
rimeters, known as throttling calorimeters and 
described by Professor C. H. Peabody in the 
Journal of the Franklin Institute August, 
888. 
My apparatus is illustrated in the annexed 
drawings in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional side elevation of the 
calorimeter. Fig. 2 is a diagram or chart used 
in connection with the instrument. 
In the drawings the letter Findicates a pipe 
nipple of for example one-half inch pipe pro 
vided with holes Sandscrewed some distance 
into the main steam pipe R. Two lock nuts 
I, L will insure a steam tight joint. The valve 
G is used for admitting or shutting off steam. 
On opening valve G to its fullest extent steam 
blows through the conical or converging pas 
sage or mouth A by which operation it is re 
duced in pressure or to use a technical term 
is throttled. This steam of lower pressure 
fills the body B of the calorimeter and sur 
rounds the cup K. The body or vessel B is 
closed at the top as seen. 
By placing into cup K some cylinder oil or 
mercury and a thermometer X the true tem 
perature of the steam in the calorimeter can 
be noted. The excess of steam and the Water 
of condensation pass downward and Out 
through the orifice or tube E. A valve T may 
be applied at the outlet to produce back press 
ure in the calorimeter. 
The actual pressure in the calorimeter can 
be measured by a gage or manometer O Con 
nected by a hose or rubber tube N to the cock 
D leading from the manometer. This cock 
will be termed manometer cock. Any suitable 
pressure gage will answer. For low pressure 
I intend using a mercury manometer. 
The general method of computing the moist 
ure in the steam depends upon the fact, that the 
heat existing in confined steam of high press 
ure, will be utilized if the pressure be sud 
denly reduced without doing work, in evapo 
rating water that may be mechanically car 
ried in suspension in the steam. The Con 
plete evaporation of this water will be indi 
cated by a rise of temperature in the calorim 
eter, above that due to normal or Saturated 
steam of the given pressure existing in the 
calorimeter. The amount of Water so evapo 
rated will depend upon the steam pressure, 
but at usual pressure of sixty to eighty 
pounds per square inch by gage will not ex 
ceed three per cent. of the total weight of 
Water and steam. 
This method is not however new, and I do 
not claim it as my invention. By simply 
reading the thermometer X immersed in oil 
and situated in the cup K and knowing the 
pressure of the steam before and after enter 
ing the calorimeter the moisture in the steam 
can be ascertained by simple inspection of a 
diagram. The instruments heretofore con 
25 
35 
45 
 
8. 
75 
55 
65 
OO 
492,710 
75 
in the vessel B of the calorimeter. Any moist 
structed, reduced the pressure of the steam 
by partially opening a valve or by imposing 
ure which is in the steam at the entrance of 
in the steam pipe a diaphragm at right an 
the tube is guided by the form of this con 
vergent nozzle and finally discharged into the 
gles to the pipe in which was a small hole. 
calorimeter without a possibility of being re 
That is the steam is reduced in pressure by 
turned to the main steam pipe by any eddies 
passing through the minute crack in a par 
tially open valve or by passing through a 
or returning currents of steam. Although in 
the use of the instrument a valve is placed 
small hole in a diaphragm. I found that both 
these methods of reducing the pressure lead 
between the main steam pipe and the Con 
vergent nozzle, such valve is in no wise a part 
to erroneous determinations. I found that 
of the instrument and when the instrument 
even if the amount of moisture in the main 
is in use the valve is to be opened to its full 
steam pipe was varied to a considerable ex 
est extent, so as to afford no impediment to 
tent, the calorimeter would not give indica 
tions showing such variations. . I found that 
the passage of steam and water. 
Another source of error of other calorime 
such error was caused by the fact that the 
ters opposite in character, but uncertain in 
Water mechanically carried by the steam is 
amount and not in any wise balancing the 
in great part deposited or thrown down by 
first error spoken of, is overcome to a great 
meeting any obstacle in its passage; this fact 
is no doubt largely due to its great weight 
extent by my invention, and that is radiation 
loss. I observed that a thermometer in calo 
as compared with steam, the result being that 
rimeters of the other form placed in the cup in 
the Water in the steam, was thrown out by 
the obstacle interposed to its passage by the 
the calorimeters read lower even when the 
perforated diaphragm or globe valve but 
calorimeter was thoroughly wrapped, if ex 
posed to the air than if exposed to a fluid of 
slightly opened, and trickled down on the 
the same temperature as the steam in the 
side of the pipe and returned to the main 
calorimeter. This form. I find obviates that 
Steam pipe by eddies and back currents thus 
loss of heat to a great extent since by this 
not entering the calorimeter at all. This had 
the effect of making the sample of steam sup 
construction steam of high pressure and tem 
perature is in close contact with the calorim 
plied to the calorimeter carry a less percent 
eter. The converging tube being a part of 
age of moisture than that in the mainsteam 
pipe, and thus tending to mislead any who 
the walls of the calorimeter or in metallic Con 
depended on its accuracy. To overcome this 
tact with these walls receives the heat from 
the steam of high pressure and conducts this 
serious objection, I invented the form shown 
to nearly every portion of the calorimeter sur 
in the drawings and this I found by actual 
face, thus neutralizing to a great extent all 
trial to be free from the errors of the other 
loss from radiation. This has no perceptible 
classes of instruments. 
The main body or calorimeter portion of 
effect on the steam in the calorimeter except 
to protect its exterior from the chilling effect 
this instrument is constructed as shown in 
the drawings and consists of a tube with con 
of the air. . 
The form of the instrument as shown is 
Vergent mouth or nozzle A, which is an in 
tegral part of the walls of the calorimeter or 
such as to form a small reservoir of Steam, 
surrounding the thermometer cup, and dis 
vessel Boris screwed in place as may be con 
charging more or less freely at the opening 
Yenient. Through this mouth the steam passes 
from the pipe R to the calorimeter or body B. 
in the lower portion of the calorimeter. 
In the process of using the instrument, 
The cup K in which a thermometer may be 
place or made an in- steam of known pressure is admitted by open 
placed is screwed into 
tegral part of the walls of the calorimeter. ing the valve to its fullest extent, the manom 
The cock D as already stated gives communi-eter pressure above atmosphere is observed. 
cation to a manometer or pressure gage. The 
The excess of temperature in the calorimeter 
above 212 is noted and this is diminished by 
Steam passes out of the calorimeter at the 
three-fourths times the calorimeter pressure 
passage E, which may be connected to a pipe 
above atmosphere. By using the first quan 
for leading the steam passing through the in 
tity that is the absolute pressure of the steam. 
strument to any convenient point. 
In place of the cup for supporting a ther 
before it enters the calorimeter as ordinate 
the second as abscissa in the accompanying 
mometer as shown, a simple hole may be left at 
diagram, the percentage of moisture is shown 
the top of the vessel B and the thermometer 
directly. Thus for example if the steam 
supported by use of perforated rubber cork 
pressure by gage is eighty pounds correspond 
or netting, which surrounds the thermometer 
ing to 94.7 pounds absolute, the pressure in 
and prevents the escape of steam above, but 
the calorimeter is eight pounds above atmos 
it will in general be preferable to use the cup 
phere and the temperature shown by the 
as shown. 
In this instrument the full pressure of the 
thermometer 274.2. We have 274.2 less two 
hundred and twelve equal 62.2 and this less 
steam is received in the large end of the con 
three-fourths times eight which is six, equals 
vergent mouth or nozzle A and the pressire 
56.2. Now in the chart pass along the line 
is reduced by the steam flowing through the 
corresponding to 94.7 pounds until over 56 
convergent mouth A and suddenly expanding 
95 
Od 
Io5 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
1 O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
492,710 
3 
and the nearest curve shows the percentage of entry into the vessel, substantially as de 
of moisture in the steam to be 0.92. 
scribed. 
In the diagram or chart the spaces between 
3. The combination with the vessel or body 
abscissa, 80 and 90 and between ordinates 40 
B provided with a pressure gage and with a 
and 50 are shown provided with divisional or 
thermometer cup or holder fixed to said ves 
intermediatelines. Such divisional lines can 
sel, of an entering pipe fixed to the vessel 
of course be extended over the whole chart or 
and provided with a mouth or nozzle made 
omitted altogether as deemed sufficient for 
convergent at the place of entry into the ves 
the requisite accuracy in result. 
sel, substantially as described. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
4. The combination with the vessel or body 
by Letters Patent, is 
B provided with a thermometer cup and with 
1. The combination with the vesselor body 
a manometer and manometer cock, of an en 
B provided with athermometer and a pressure 
tering pipe leading into the vessel and pro 
gage, of an entering pipe leading into the 
vided with a mouth or nozzle made converg 
vessel and provided with a mouth or nozzle 
ent at the place of entry into the vessel, sub 
made convergent at the place of entry into 
stantially as described. 
the vessel, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with the vessel or body 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
B having a closed top and an opening bottom 
witnesses. 
and provided with a thermometer and a 
pressure gage, of an entering pipe formed or 
secured on the vessel and provided with a 
mouth or nozzle made convergent at the place 
ROLLA, CLINTON CARPENTER. 
W. HAUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 4o 
O 
 
35 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492810.txt	A. & F. F. KING, 
SHEARS AND SCISSORS SHARPENER, 
Patented Mar. 7, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 492,810, 
 
 
  
  
J 
P 
a 
N 
w 
m 
 
  
 
  
3 
s & 
& Au * 
: 7 
, 
ge. 
2- a 
"3 
?ell 
(3/4, 727 yfaz, 
E. 
e4/Ce4.7, 
tre-la 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ALEXANDER, KING, OF PAINESVILLE, AND FRANK F. KING, OF CLEVELAND, 
OHIO. 
SHEARS AND SCIS SORS SHARPENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,810, dated March 7, 1893. 
Application filed June 30, 1892, Serial No. 438,541. (No model.) 
In sharpening a blade of a shears or scis- 5o 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that we, ALEXANDER, KING, re 
siding at Painesville, Lake county, and FRANK 
F. KING, residing at Cleveland, in the county 
5 of Cuyahoga, State of Ohio, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Shears 
and Scissors Sharpeners; and we do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
Io enable others skilled in the art to which it per 
tains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
shears and scissors-sharpeners, and more es 
pecially to the means employed for holding 
15 the blades of the shears or scissors against 
lateral slipping or displacement in sharpen 
ing the same, and whereby the edge of the 
blades to be sharpened may always be ground 
to the same bevel; and it consists in certain 
2O features of construction and in combination 
of parts hereinafter described and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in perspective of a shears and scissors 
25 sharpener embodying our invention. Fig. 2 
is a longitudinal section of the same, showing 
a blade of a pair of shears in position. Fig. 
3 is an end elevation looking in the direction 
of the arrow, Fig. 1. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
block, preferably of wood. Block A is re 
cessed at the top, as at Cl, with the recess ex 
tending lengthwise from end to end of the 
block, as shown, and open at the ends, as at 
35 a. The blade-holder is composed of a plate 
B of Spring metal, the plate being bent cen 
trally and transversely, as at b, forming two 
members, B' B, with the ends, b b of the 
plate terminating a trifle above block A so 
4c that recess C in the block is adapted to re 
ceive a file C of such thickness that the cut 
ting surface C of the file will be located in a 
plane slightly above the top of the side-walls 
of said recess. Member B' of the plate, at 
45 each side of block A, has lateral members, b 
extending in a direction away from member 
B and being enlarged downwardly outside of 
block A, as at b, and rigidly secured to the 
latter. 
30 
 
55 
75 
sors, the same is interposed between members 
B' B of the blade-holder, and then drawn 
back and forth across the cutting surface of 
the file. Member B of the blade-holder con 
stitutes a spring that is adapted to act in the 
direction against the adjacent side of the 
blade to be sharpened and firmly hold the 
blade against member B', with the edge to be 
ground in proper position upon the cutting 
surface of the file. The blade-holder is set 
at the desired angle to the supporting-block 
whereby the blade to be sharpened is held at 
a corresponding angle to the cutting surface 
of the file; hence the edge of the blade is 
ground to the desired bevel and it will be ob 
served that by our improved device the blade 
is always ground to the same bevel, a feature 
of no incolnsiderable importance. 
What we claim is 
1. The combination with a block grooved or 
recessed on one face to receive a file, of a blade 
holder spanning the groove or recess, said 
holder comprising a rigid member and a spring 
adapted to hold the blade to be sharpened 
against the rigid member when drawn through 
it, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with a block, A, recessed 
at the top, a, with the recess extending length 
wise of the block and open at the ends, and 
adapted to receive a file, of a blade-holderse 
cured to the aforesaid block and comprising 
a rigid member, B', and a spring, as at B, in 
tegral with said rigid member and adapted to 
hold the blade to be sharpened against said 
rigid member of the blade-holder, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we sign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of witnesses, this 11th 
day of June, 1892. 
ALEXANDER, KING. 
FRANK F. KING. 
Witnesses to signature of Alexander King: 
CORA. B. HARPER, 
HOMER HARPER. 
Witnesses to signature of Frank F. King: 
CHAs. H. DORER, 
WARD HOOVER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US492910.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 492,910, 
 
N. ALL GIEAR 
MACHINE FOR EDGING RAZORs, &c. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
4 
Patented Mar. 7, 1893. 
gi 
WITNESSES: 
 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
No. 492,910, 
N, ALLGIEAR. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
MACHINE FOR EDGING RAZORs, &c. 
- 
Patented Mar. 7, 1893, 
SL. H. H. H. 
SS 
SS SS S 
Strmis 
s s 
SS S 
S 
it ris s S 
S 9 F 
S 
2 
 
% % 
% 
% 
 
 
 
HHS is 
 
WITNESSES: 
272 
INVENTOR 
1% TTORNEY3. 
 
 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo, washingtoN, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
N. ALL GIEAR, 
MACHINE FOR EDGING RAZORS, &c., 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 492,910, 
Patented Mar. 7, 1893, 
FR 
 
s N 
WITNESSES; 
 
INVENTOR 
Arror NEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
N ELS ON ALL GIE AR, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK. 
MACHINE FOR EDGING RAzors, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 492,910, dated March 7, 1898. 
Application filed January 18, 1892, Serial No. 418,358, (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
9o 
OO 
d 
25 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, NELSON ALLGIEAR, of 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
States of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Edging 
Razors and Similar Articles, of which the fol. 
lowing, taken in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
edging machines particularly applicable for 
raZOrS and similar articles, and has for its ob 
ject the production of a simple, effective, and 
practical construction, which is easily oper 
ated and is durable and efficient in use: to 
this end the invention consists, essentially, in 
a grinding wheel, a carriage movable recti 
linearly across the face of the grinding wheel, 
a hinged carriage section movable toward and 
a Way from the grinding wheel, a stop for lim 
iting the movement of the carriage, a clamp 
for Securing the razor to the carriage, a heart 
shaped cam for moving the carriage, and in 
the detail construction and arrangement of 
the parts, all as hereinafter more particularly 
described and pointed out in the claims. 
In describing this invention, reference is 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, in which, like letters 
indicate corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figures 1 and 2 are respectively top plan 
and front elevation of my improved invention, 
the razor carriage being shown in its extreme 
inWard position in both views. Fig. 3 is alon 
gitudinal Sectional view, taken online-3- 
3-, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a transverse sectional 
view, taken on line-4-4-, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is 
a sectional view similar to Fig. 4 representing 
the hinged section of the razor carriage as 
SWung backwardly from the grinding wheel. 
Fig. 6 is a detached view of the razorcarriage 
and its hinged section, and Fig. 7 is an isomet 
ric perspective of the revoluble carriage actu 
ating cam and the gear for operating the same. 
- A- represents the frame of my machine, 
Which consists preferably of a pair of upright 
standards -a-d'- mounted on any suitable 
construction of table -d- and formed with 
journal bearings and supports for the various 
parts of my invention. 
The grinding wheel-B- is journaled on a 
shaft -b-supported in the bearing-a- of 
the upright -d- and provided with a gear 
-B'-. I preferably use a series of wheels 
-B-, only one of which is illustrated having 
their surfaces of varying density or roughness 
so that the razor edge may be brought to the 
required keenness in the usual manner; first 
by a rough surface, then by one somewhat 
finer, and lastly by a leather face. These 
wheels are formed with journal openings 
-b'-, which loosely encircle the outwardly 
projecting end of the spindle -b-, and are 
firmly secured thereto by set screws or other 
suitable clamps -b-. ..., 
--C- represents the main driving gear 
journaled on a shaft-c- mounted in the 
bearing -a - of the upright-a'-, a suit 
able crank-C- is secured to this gear, and 
a small pinion -D-mounted on one end of 
a shaft -d- meshes with the gear -C-. 
The shaft -d- is journaled in the bearings 
-d'-and-d-mounted respectively upon 
the uprights-a-and-a-, and at its other 
end is a gear -D'- which meshes with the 
gear-B-, whereby, when the crank-C'- 
is revolved, the grinding wheel-B- is also 
revolved. These gears -C-D-D- and 
-B'- are so relatively proportioned and ar 
ranged that the operator may, with compara 
tive ease, revolve the grinding wheel-B- 
from fifteen hundred to two thousand revolu 
tions per minute, thus enabling the wheel to 
act practically and effectively upon the razor. 
The carriage -E- consists of the main 
section -E- and the hinged section -E-, 
both of which are movable rectilinearly along 
a guide -e- fixed in a bearing -e'- of the 
upright -d- and having its opposite ex 
tremities passed through eyes -e'-e- and 
-e'- upon the movable and main carriage 
sections. The main carriage Section isformed 
with the arm-e-provided with a slot-e-, 
which registers with a pin -e- directly 
above the axis of a heart shaped cam-F- 
for reciprocating said carriage and serves an 
additional guide for the carriage. The hinged 
carriage section is formed at its opposite ex 
tremities with the heads -e-e'-provided 
with the open slots -e- for receiving the 
razorblade -g- and with set screws or clamps 
-g- for firmly securing the razor blade in 
position as shown at Figs. 1 and 2. 
It will be readily understood that the eyes 
35 
45 
 
492,910 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
-e- and -e- of the hinged carriage sec 
tion are loosely mounted on the guide -e-, 
which serves as a pivotal pin therefor in order 
that the said carriage may be swung toward 
and away from the face of the grinding wheel, 
and, when in its backward position, the car 
riage is stopped from further movement by 
any suitable stop -H- upon the upright 
-a-, and, when in its forward position, the 
blade is sufficiently in advance of the guide 
-e- so that the weight of the blade and the 
heads-e-et-serve to hold the razor blade 
firmly upon the grinding wheel, although the 
hinged carriage section may be readily swung 
backward as previously described. 
In order that the loosely hinged carriage 
section may be forced backward and forward 
along the guide its eye -e- is disposed in 
the opening -E8- in the eye-el-upon the 
main carriage section. 
The actuating cam-F-for forcing the car 
riage backward and forward is, as previously 
stated, heart shaped as this contour is par 
ticularly applicable for transforming a rotary 
to a reciprocating movement. As preferably 
constructed, however, the cam -F- is actu 
ated by an underlying gear -I- to which it 
is suitably secured as by bolts - f-, the gear 
-I- being mounted upon a spindle -I'- 
journaled in the bearing-I-upon the later 
ally extending arm - A- of the upright 
-a-'. The gear-I- is driven by a pinion 
-- mounted on the shaft-c- of the driv 
ing wheel-C- in order that when the crank 
-C'- is operated to rotate the grinding 
wheel -B- the cam -F- may be rotated 
simultaneously. 
In order to transfer motion from the cam 
-F- to the carriage -E- the main section 
of said carriage is provided with the depend 
ing anti friction rollers -J- and -J.-, 
which bear upon opposite points of said cam 
and force the carriage backward and forward 
as the cam is revolved. 
As there is more or less liability of that por 
tion of the carriage interposed between the pin 
-e- and the bearing -e'- being sprung 
by the strain to which the same is subjected 
in the operation of my machine I provide at 
said central portion the depending lug or 
roller-K-, which is movable in a gear or 
guide -k- formed in a laterally projecting 
arm-A*-upon the upright-a-. It is evi 
dent that the return movement of the car 
riage is readily effected by the engagement 
of the cam -F- with the rear anti friction 
roller -J*-, but as a further means of af 
fecting the return movement of the carriage. 
I provide a spring --L-- having one end se 
cured at-l- to the arm-A- and the other 
provided with an eye-l-, which is engaged 
by the eye -e- of the hinged carriage sec 
tion as the same is forced backwardly. 
The operation of my invention will be read 
ily perceived from the foregoing description 
and upon reference to the drawings, and, as 
clearly shown and described, the component 
parts are simple, effective and durable, the 
razor is moved across the face of the grind 
ing wheel during the revolution of said Wheel, 
may be readily swung backwardly out of Con 
tact with the grinding wheel, may be readily 
withdrawn when properly finished and re 
placed by another razor, and, owing to the 
uniformity of the movement of the rectilin 
ear movement of the razor carriage, the edge 
of the razor is of uniform thickness. It is 
evident, however, that the detail construction 
and arrangement of the parts of my inven 
tion may be somewhat varied from that shown 
or described without departing from the Spirit 
of my invention, hence I do not herein wish 
to limit myself to such precise detail con 
struction and arrangement. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In an edging machine for razors and simi 
lar articles, the combination of a revoluble 
grinding wheel, a carriage movable rectiline 
arly across the face of the grinding wheel, 
and provided with a pair of separated heads 
for alternately supporting the razor and pre 
senting its opposite sides to the grinding 
wheel, and clamps movable in said heads for 
securing the razor or similar article to the 
carriage, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. In an edging machine for razors and simi 
lar articles, the combination of a revoluble 
grinding wheel, a carriage movable across the 
face of the grinding wheel, clamps for secur 
ing the razor or similar article to the carriage, 
and an endless heart shaped cam for moving 
the carriage transversely across the face of 
the grinding wheel, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
3. In an edging machine for razors and simi 
lar articles, the combination of a revoluble 
grinding wheel, a carriage movable across the 
face of the grinding wheel, a hinged carriage 
section movable toward and away from the 
grinding wheel, and provided with a pair of 
separated heads for alternately supporting 
the razor and presenting its opposite sides to 
the grinding wheel, and clamps movable in 
said heads for securing the razor to said 
hinged carriage section, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
4. In an edging machine for razors and simi 
lar articles, the combination of a revoluble 
grinding wheel and gearing for driving the 
grinding wheel; of a carriage movable recti 
linearly across the face of the grinding wheel, 
clamps for securing the razor to the carriage, 
a heart shaped cam for moving the carriage 
rectilinearly, and connecting gearing between 
said cam and grinding wheel, whereby both 
operate simultaneously, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
5. In an edging machine for razors and simi 
lar articles, the combination of a revoluble 
75 
ICO 
Iob 
I IO 
II5 
12d 
r 25 
492,910 
- 
3 
retracting said carriage, substantially as de 
scribed. 
9. In an edging machine for razors and simi 
lar articles, the combination of a revoluble 
grinding wheel, a carriage movable rectilin- 40 
early across the face of the grinding wheel, a 
guide in proximity to the carriage, a lug on 
the carriage movable in said guide, a hinged 
carriage section movable toward and away 
from the grinding wheel, a clamp for Securing 45 
the razor to said carriage, and a revoluble 
cam for moving the carriage, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
10. In a machine for edging razors and 
similar articles, the combination with a frame, 5o 
a movable grinder journaled on the frame, a 
carriage movable across the face of the grind 
er, a hinged carriage section movable toward 
and away from the grinder, a stop for pre 
venting the backward movement of the grind- 55 
er, a movable clamp for securing the razor to 
said carriage, a revoluble cam for moving the 
carriage, and connected gearing between the 
movable grinder and cam, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
Intestimony whereofIhave hereunto signed 
my name, in the presence of two attesting Wit 
nesses, at Syracuse, in the county of Onon 
daga, in the State of New York, this 12th day 
of December, 1891. 
6o . 
NELSON ALLGIEAR. 
Witnesses: 
CLARK H. NORTON, 
E. A. WEISBURG. 
grinding wheel, a carriage movable rectiline 
arly across the face of the grinding wheel, 
a hinged carriage section movable toward and 
away from the grinding wheel, anti friction 
5 rollers upon the carriage, and a revoluble cam 
for engaging said rollers and operating the 
carriage, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
6. In an edging machine for razors and simi 
Io lar articles, the combination of a revoluble 
grinding wheel, a carriage movable rectilin 
early across the face of the grinding wheel, 
an anti friction roller on the carriage con 
nected, substantially as described, to the car 
I5 riage, a revoluble cam for engaging said roller 
and operating the carriage, and a spring for 
retracting the carriage, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
7. In an edging machine for razors and simi 
2 o lar articles, the combination of a revoluble 
grinding Wheel, a carriage movable rectilin 
early across the face of the grinding wheel, a 
guide in proximity to the carriage, a lug con 
nected, substantially as described, to the car 
25 riage and a revoluble cam for forcing the 
carriage backward and forward, substantially 
as and for the purpose specified. 
8. In an edging machine for razors and simi 
lar articles, the combination of a revoluble 
3o grinding wheel, a carriage movable rectilin 
early across the face of the grinding wheel, a 
guide in proximity to the carriage, a lug con 
nected, substantially as described, to the car 
riage, a revoluble cam for forcing the car 
35 riage backward and forward, and a spring for 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493010.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 493,010, 
G. BEEKMAN, 
COTTON HARVESTING DEVICE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 7, 1893, 
WITNESSES: 
%9%eves 
INVENTOR 
vetea 24man 
AITORNEY 
 
THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHOTO-LITHo, was HINGTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 493,010 
G. BEEKMAN, 
COTTON HARVESTING DEVICE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar, 7, 1893. 
WTNESSES 
INVENTOR 
BY 
- 4 AT TORNEY 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
G E R A R D B E E KMAN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
coTTON-HARVESTING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 493,010, dated March 7, 1893. 
Application filed May 25, 1892, Serial No. 434,359, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GERARD BEEKMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Cotton-Harvesting Devices, of which the 
following is a specification. 
Rotary pickers used heretofore have been 
characterized by two distinctions among oth 
ers; one class in which the revolving picking 
stems are of such diameter as to present but 
one side of the revolving part to any portion 
of Cotton in the plant at a time, the extrac 
tion being effected by means of barbs or other 
suitable roughened surface of such revolving 
part; the fiber being practically hooked out 
of the boll of the plant. The other class in 
which the revolving stem is of such small 
diameter, that whether the surface be rough 
ened or not, it shall obtain its purchase on 
the cotton by winding the fiber around the 
entire circumference of the revolving part, 
immediately after initial contact and be 
fore the extraction begins; the attachment 
being formed by the wrapping of the cotton 
fibers around the stem and the extraction be 
ing effected by the roping of the fibers to 
gether beyond the end of the picker, or be 
yond the initial point of its contact, as the 
machine progresses. On the principle of the 
latter class, my present invention is intended 
to operate, departing, however, in certain re 
spects, namely; first, in depending for its op 
eration, not upon form, but upon structure; 
and second, engaging with the cotton in the 
plant by the initial contact of any portion of 
a maximum volume of material composing 
the picker, thereby proportionately extend 
ing the range of search. A torsional connec 
tion with the growing cotton is produced out 
of the material of the picker at any point, 
which is indeterminate until initial contact 
shall have taken place. 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
employment of a revolving mass of cotton or 
other fiber in its native or non-Woven state 
in the manner hereinafter fully described. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings: 
Figure 1, illustrates a side elevation of one 
picking device; Fig. 2, a similar view illus 
trating the operation of the same; Fig. 3, a 
detail view of a rotary stem suitably con 
structed for the convenient reception of the 
picking material; Fig. 4, a sectional side ele 
Vation showing several picking devices assem 
bled upon a suitable device for supporting 
the same; and Fig. 5, a horizontal section of 
Fig. 4, taken on the line ac, ac. 
A, represents a suitable revolving stem or 
shaft of flexible or of rigid character, as may 
be desired. 
B, is a tubular flexible supporting arm for 
the revolving stem or shaft A; and C, the 
frame or oscillatory support hereinafter de 
Scribed. 
D, represents the fibrous material. This 
may be composed of the cotton fiber itself in 
its native state, or of any other suitable 
fibrous material having a similar structural 
character employed in a non-woven state; 
that is to say, composed of flexible finely at 
tenuated adhesive fibers, irregularly com 
bined in a mass, leaving interstices between 
them; and thus distinguished from a fibrous 
body such as cord or cloth or other artificial 
structure in which the fibers are entwined or 
interlaced into a textile fabric and united by 
close connection or intermixture into a per 
manently organized relation. The fibrous 
material D, is attached to the shaft A, in any 
suitable manner, either permanently or tem 
porarily. I have illustrated, for example, the 
attachment of the fiber to the shaft A; by 
means of a tie formed by winding the free 
ends of a string a, about the fibrous mass, and 
knotting it together. 
The stem A, is illustrated as projecting into 
the mass of cotton or other fiber at a suitable 
distance, in order to form functionally a sup 
porting core that shall hold the mass through 
out the length of the same as nearly concen 
tric as possible to the axis on which the ex 
tremity of the stem A, revolves. 
In Fig. 3, Iillustrate barbs b, on the stem A, 
which are so adapted that a mass of native 
cotton taken in the hand may be thrust over 
the barbs and remain retained thereon until 
it is seen fit to remove the mass, or cause its 
removal. 
Any suitable form of actuating mechanism 
may be employed in connection with my im 
proved means of picking. I have illustrated 
one suitable form in Figs. 4 and 5. This con 
sists in a mechanism which is similar in its 
O 
15 
35 
45 
75 
95 
CCy 
 
2 
493,010 
O 
general features to that described and claimed 
in my patent application Serial No. 389,932, 
filed April 22, 1891, in which there are sev 
eral picker cases or groups of pickers as shown 
herein in Fig. 4, attached to a rotary support 
whereby each group of picker's is revolved 
backward in an orbitat substantially the same 
rate of speed as the motion of the harvester 
over the ground. Thus a retrograde move 
ment of the pickers is obtained, whereby they 
advance and retract among the branches of 
the bush, traveling with the same, and search 
for every ripe portion of cotton that may be 
exposed. 
The mechanism in Figs. 4 and 5, consists in 
a driving shaft E, bearing toothed geal's F, 
upon which the gears G, are kept in gearing 
by idle spindles II, having suitable bearings 
in the case C. Each bobbin G, bears two flexi 
ble shafts or stems A, projecting in each di 
rection from its axis, supporting the holder 
for the fiber to be rotated. The case C, is 
provided with flexible arms B, composed of 
coiled wire or other material which will yield 
when in contact with the branches of the 
plant. 
The shafts A, rotate freely in the 
tubular arms B. 
Any other suitable form of operating mech 
anism than that herein illustrated may be 
used in connection with my present invention; 
for example, that illustrated in my Letters 
Patent No. 427,218, granted May 6, 1890, or 
in my Letters Patent No. 436,770, granted 
September 23, 1890. 
The operation of my invention is illustrated 
in Fig. 2, which is as follows: The fibrous pick 
ing material D, rapidly rotated while moved 
through the plant will at the initial contact 
of any part of its exterior with the native 
fiber J, on a boll of the plant, immediately 
form a torsional connection c, between the 
two by the operation of spinning, which will 
cause the fibers of the picker and of the boll 
to adhere at the axis of rotation. As the 
spinning continues the torsional connection 
c, tends to form a cord or rope, and before 
the revolving mass D, has moved far enough 
through the plant by the progress of the ma 
chine to have parted from the native mass J, 
the two will have become connected together 
by means of the cord or rope with sufficient 
firmness to break the natural attachment of 
the cotton J with the bottom of the boll of 
the plant and thus extract the growing cot 
ton. The picked cotton is then suspended by 
the connection c, until the stripping device of 
the machine removes the same in any suitable 
or well known manner. A torsional connec 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
tion between the revolving mass of fiber in its 
native state and the growing fiberis thus pro 
duced out of the material of which the picker 
is formed, at a point which is indeterminate 
until the initial contact takes place. An axis 
of rotation is then determined at whatever 
part of the exterior surface of the revolving 
mass such initial contact occurs, and during 
successive operations the torsional formations 
of the material occur at different parts, and 
as the picked cotton is separated from the ro 
tating mass between each period of its pas 
Sage through the plants, the connection is 
broken at a variety of places, tending to equal 
ize the disturbance of the rotary mass and 
avoid undue distortion of the same repeatedly 
at any particular part. 
The herein-described picker possesses the 
following advantages: First, of extending the 
range of search through the plants to the maxi 
mum; second, of affording such a delicate 
means of searching the branches as shall avoid 
knocking off and wasting any ripe portions of 
the growing cotton, or injuring those portions 
that are partially ripe, or damaging the plant; 
third, of providing a picker that may admit 
of the separation therefrom of the cotton that 
has been removed from the plant, between 
each periodical passage of the picker through 
the branches without requiring the stoppage 
of the revolution of the picking device upon 
its own axis, thus reducing complication of 
gearing and friction; and fourth, of easily 
renewing the picker when composed of the 
native cotton itself, from the material in the 
field without expense. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A device for picking cotton, consisting 
in a revoluble mass of cotton or other fiber of 
similar structural character, and suitable 
mechanism for rotating the mass upon its own 
axis; the fibers of the said mass being exposed 
in their native or non-woven state, and adapted 
to engage with and extract the growing cot 
ton, substantially as described. 
2. The combination in a cotton picking de 
vice, of a mass of cotton or other fiber of simi 
lar structural character in its native or non 
woven state, and a rotary supporting stem 
extending into the center of the mass and se 
cured thereto, forming a core substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
GERAIRD BEEKMAN. 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
IO5 
I IO 
Witnesses: 
EUGENE LUCAS, 
II. E. PARKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493110.txt	(No Model.) 
G, H, ORTHWEIN. 
SPADE ATTACHMENT, 
No. 493,ll0, 
Patented Mar. 7, 1893. 
2 22 2 S 
CI 2S 
2S 
ZD 3. 
2WZZWASSAS 
R . 
 
AWAV222. 
- 
eezevi?O2.zzeeze 
22e2-MC-2 
zY ZZones 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. ORTHWEIN, OF BROKEN SWORD, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO JEREMIAH. F. ORTHWEIN, OF SAME PLACE. 
SPADE ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 493,110, dated March 7, 1893. 
Application filed October 3, 1892, 
Serial No, 447,670, CNo model) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. ORTHWEIN, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Broken Sword, in the county of Crawford 
and State of Ohio, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Spade Attach 
ments; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a spade 
equipped with my improved attachment. Fig. 
2 is a perspective view of the attachment, re 
moved from the spade. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of the two parts or sections of the attach 
ment, showing the same separated from each 
other. Fig. 4 is a side view of the attach 
ment; and Fig. 5 is a cross section on linea-3: 
in Fig. 4. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in all the figures. 
This invention relates to digging or ditch 
ing attachments to spades; that is to say: a 
device adapted to be fastened to the handle 
of the spade, just above the blade, and in such 
position that the operator, when digging or 
ditching, can place his foot upon it so as to 
bring the weight and heft of his body to bear 
upon the blade when this is being forced into 
the ground during the operation, for example, 
of digging tile drains; and my improvement 
consist in the combination with a spade of 
the specific attachment or device which will 
be hereinafter more fully described. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter Ades 
ignates the handle, and B the blade of a 
spade suitable for digging and ditching. 
My attachment is composed of two parts, 
made, preferably, of malleable iron or Wrought 
iron, and forming, when placed together, a 
ring-shaped socket, C, for the insertion of the 
handle, A. The two parts or sections of this 
socket are clamped firmly upon and around 
the handle, A, by means of nutted bolts, D 
and D', which are inserted, respectively, 
through the ears, E, and laterally projecting 
brackets, F. Each bracket has a laterally pro 
jecting flange or top part, So that the tWO, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
GEORGE H. ORTHWEIN. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. NOBLET, 
WILLIAM ULMER. 
when placed together, will form a flat bearing, 
H, of such length and width that the operator 
can easily place his foot upon it. The inner 
sides of the brackets, F, are extended down 55 
below the socket, C, so as to form abutments, 
f, which bear against the handle, thereby brac 
ing the brackets and the bearing, H, so that 
the same cannot easily be bent. On one side, 
the socket, C, is provided with a laterally ex- 6o 
tending slightly curved plate, I, which over 
laps the upper side of the blade, B, on one 
side. This projection, I, serves the two-fold 
purpose of forming an additional support or 
rest for the device, if the socket, C, should 65 
slip, and it also forms a bearing or support 
upon which the operator may place his foot 
in forcing down the blade into the ground. 
In some positions it may be inconvenient for 
the operator to place his foot upon the sup- 7o 
port, H, in which case he can avail himself of 
the bearing, I, which is of sufficient width to 
give a firm bearing for the foot so as not to 
cut the sole of the boot or shoe. 
simple and inexpensive in construction, and 
that it can be readily applied to any spade in 
a few moments. When so applied, it greatly 
facilitates the operation of cutting ditches, 
because the operator has the choice of two 8o 
footholds by which to force the spade blade 
into the ground. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to Secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
The combination with a spade of the device 
herein described, cast in two parts, and com 
prising, when placed together, the socket, C, 
ears, E, brackets, F, having downward exten 
isions, f, and top flanges forming the bearing, go 
H, and laterally projecting plate, I, adapted 
to overlap the spade blade on one side; sub 
stantially as and for the purpose herein shown 
and described. 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 95 
It will be observed that this device is very 75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493210.txt	(No Model.) 
D. C., FUNCHEON. 
BARBED WIRE, 
No. 493,210, 
Patented Mar. 7, 1893. 
YS 
 
 
 
 
 
The NRRS PEFEs co, PTC-Lithto ww.shingtoN, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL C. FUNCHEON, OF WALVERDE, COLORADO, ASSIGNOR OF Two THIRDs 
TO GEORGE FUNCHEON AND CHARLES E. OLSEN, OF SAME PLACE. 
BARBED WIRE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 493,210, dated March 7, 1893. 
Application filed July 25, 1892, Serial No. 440,184, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern; 
Be it known that I, DANIEL C. FUNCHEON, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Valverde, in the county of Arapahoe 
5 and State of Colorado, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Barbed Wire; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
Io to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
I5 My invention relates to improvements in 
barbed wire for fence use and the object of 
the invention is to provide a wire with ro 
tating barbs and its special feature is the 
barb holder which consists of a button or 
2O small block suitably attached to the wire and 
apertured to receive the axis of the barb, the 
prongs of both of which are formed at the 
extremities of the axis and bent at a suitable 
angle to retain them in place, the barb being 
It is believed that the advantages of the 
rotating barb over the rigid barb for fence 
use, are now generally recognized, since while 
answering all the requirements in a fence 
3o it is not so harsh as the rigid barb and often 
prevents disastrous results to stock. The 
reason is plain since if an animal is running 
lengthwise of the fence and comes in con 
tact there with, if the barb is movable or can 
35 rotate, it turns and draws out of the ani 
mals flesh, while in case of a rigid barb a 
long cut is made therein. Hence a further 
object of the invention is to provide a fence 
wire of the class stated which shall be simple 
4o in construction, economical in cost, reliable, 
durable, efficient and practicable in use. 
To these ends the improvement consists of 
- 
the features hereinafter described and claimed 
and will be fully understood by reference to 
45 the accompanying drawings in which is illus 
trated an embodiment of the invention. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows a wire pro 
vided with my improvement. Fig. 2 is a frag 
mentary top view on a larger scale showing 
25 adapted to rotate freely within the holder. 
the barb holder with the barb in place. Fig. 
3 is a side or edge view of the same. Fig. 4 
illustrates the barb holder in detail perspec 
tive. Fig. 5 is a similar view of the rotating 
barb. 
Similar reference characters indicate cor 
responding parts or elements of the mechan 
ism in the several views. 
Let the numeral 5 designate the barb hold 
er which as shown in the drawings is pro 
vided with an aperture 6 for the reception 
of the barb 7. This holder is further pro 
vided with a circumferential groove 8 en 
gaged by the wires 9 which as shown in the 
drawings are two in number and form the 
strands which when twisted together around 
the barb holders form the complete fence wire 
10, the barbs being supported by the holders 
the axis of the one engaging the aperture 6 of 
the other. As shown in the drawings the 
barb holder is elliptical in shape and pro 
vided with a peripheral edge groove 8 and 
central aperture 6. The barb holder may, 
however, be of any other desired shape or con 
tour, and may be fastened to the wire strands 
composing the fence wire in any suitable man 
ner other than that shown in the drawings. 
The barb as shown herein consists of a 
shank or axis engaging the aperture 6, its ex 
tremities being split and bent at right angles 
on both sides of the holder to form the prongs 
or projections. The barb may be composed 
of two strands centrally twisted to form the 
axis, their extremities being bent in opposite 
directions to form the barbs. Any other de 
sired form of rotating barb, may however, be 
employed in connection with my improved 
holder as a support, 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A barbed fence wire composed of small 
buttons or blocks suitably supported upon 
the wire strands and carrying rotating barbs, 
the extremities of which are bent to form an 
angle with the axes substantially as described. 
2. In a barbed fence wire the combination 
with the wire strands, of apertured buttons or 
blocks supported thereon and carrying rotat 
ing barbs the axes of which are located in the 
95 
So 
75 
9o 
498,210 
the barb holders and their extremities bent to Io 
form the desired angle with the axes, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
DANIEL C. FUNCIEON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. MCCONNELL, 
G, II. STOWER, 
apertures of the buttons, and their extremi 
ties bent to form an angle with the axes sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a barbed fence wire the combination 
with the wire strands, of the apertured holder 
provided with the peripheral groove engaged 
by the strands which are twisted to secure 
the barb holder in place, and rotating barbs 
having their axes engaging the apertures in 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493310.txt	(No Model.) 
J. R. STORIE 
HARROW ATTACHMENT, 
No. 493,310, 
Patented Mar. 14, 1893, 
 
Wiesses 
2,2 J727 47 
e 
r 
y 4-Alterseys, 
Iglepiar 
J. A. Sforze. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSHUA RAYMAN STORIE, OF TRAVISVILLE, TENNESSEE. 
HARROW ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 493,310, dated March 14, 1898. 
Application filed July 26, 1892, Serial No. 441,286, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it invay concern: 
Beitknown that I, JOSHUARAYMAN STORIE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Travisville, in the county of Pickett and State 
of Tennessee, have invented a new and useful 
Harrow Attachment, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to harrows, and more 
particularly to a new and improved harrow 
attachment designed to regulate and facilitate 
the use of the harrow on uplands and inclina 
tions. 
My improvement comprises a self-adjusting 
gravitating Weight, arranged to swing in a 
prescribed arc of a circle on top of the har 
row-frame, and supported by a rod oscillating 
from a fixed center at Some suitable point on 
top of the harrow-frame, whereby the neces 
sary weight for embedding the teeth of the 
harrow in the soil is directed and adjusted to 
the proper point according to the gravity. 
My invention consists further in certain de 
tails of construction, arrangement and com 
bination of parts, all of which will be more 
fully described hereinafter, and the specific 
points of novelty in which will be particularly 
designated in the appended claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings: 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing my im 
provement attached to an ordinary harrow. 
Fig. 2 is a top plan view. Fig. 3 is a detail 
view of the swinging weight and its support 
ing and adjusting means. 
Like letters of reference indicate like or cor 
responding parts in the several views of the 
drawings. 
A indicates a harrow of any ordinary or ap 
proved construction, provided, as usual, with 
the harrow-teeth a C and the clevis B. In this 
particular instance the harrow is shown as 
made in two sections, C C, suitably hinged 
together, and to a certain extent independent 
in operation. 
The object of this construction 
being for the usual purpose of permitting 
either section to be uplifted to free the teeth 
from any clinging foreign matter, without dis 
turbing the position of the other section. 
D ID' D*, respectively designate the longi 
tudinal supporting-beams, which, together 
with the transverse braces EE, constitute the 
At a suitable point on top of 
harrow-frame. 
the harrow, such as near the forward extrem 
ity of the beam D', I locate an angle-iron F, 
Consisting of the vertical portion b and the 
horizontal rectangular projecting arm c, hav 
ing a central circular orificed, located there 
in to receive and permit the oscillation of the 
Swinging arm G, having at its forward end 
the downwardly-extending finger e, provided 
With a liniting shoulder f, and screw-thread 
ed at its extremity to receive and hold the 
correspondingly-screw-threaded retaining 
nut H, which prevents the removal of the 
arm G from its pivotal support, while the lim 
iting shoulder fprevents the fingere from de 
scending too far in the orifice of the support. 
On the rear extremity of this arm G is loosely 
mounted the cylindrically - shaped roll or 
weight I, made of some cheap heavy metal, 
and longitudinally and centrally perforated, 
whereby it is loosely and rotatably mounted 
on the arm G, being limited from longitudi 
nal displacement thereon in either direction, 
forward or backward, by the stop-nuts g g, 
running on screw-threads formed on the ex 
terior of the rod or arm G. The said weight 
I is designed to swing in an arc of a circle on 
suitable guide-Ways or supports over both sec 
tions of the harrow, the center of the arc be 
ing the angle-iron E, as clearly shown in Fig. 
1. To this end, J designates a curved guide 
rod or bracket placed in a higher horizontal 
plane than the top of the harrow and held in 
such position by means of its bent down 
Wardly - projecting extremities, respectively 
bolted to the beams D D'; said guides being 
bent to conform to the curvature of the arc 
of the circle in which the weight I is designed 
to swing; and the curvature and continuity 
of this are is preserved, on the other section 
of the harrow by a similar guide J of like 
construction, and secured in the same man 
ner as the guide J to the respective beams of 
the other section. The break or space be 
tween the adjacent ends of the guides J J' is 
spanned by a yoke-rod K, having at each ex 
tremity an eye h, loosely embracing a guide 
Jor J', as the case may be, and its body-por 
tion preserving the alignment and shape of 
the continuous guideway, thus forming a 
bridge between the two sections and preserv 
ing the continuity of the arc-shaped guide 
Way, extending unbrokenly over both sections 
of the harrow. By means of the loosely-em 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
493,310 
IC) 
bracing eyes h, the yoke K is permitted to 
move in a corresponding manner to the hinges 
when it is necessary or desirable to uplift one 
of the harrow-sections. Respectively at each 
extremity of the guideway is located an up 
wardly-projecting guard or stop L, for the ob 
vious purpose of preventing the weight from 
rolling off at either end of said guideway. 
It will be noticed by inspection of Fig. 1 
that from each extremity the guideway slopes 
downwardly or converges toward the center 
thereof, which center is intermediate of the 
two harrow-sections. Thus it will be seen 
that the normal tendency of the gravitating 
weight I, on level ground, is to occupy the 
position shown in Fig. 1; but, on the other 
hand, it will be understood that when either 
section occupies a higher plane than the 
other, -as would occur where the same was 
2d being used on a hillside,- the weight I will 
roll along the guideway under the influence, 
of gravity, descending to a set position bear 
ing upon the lowermost section, and serving 
to embed the teeth of the same firmly in the 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a harrow, the combination with the 
frame thereof, of an oscillating arm pivotally 
supported thereon and provided at its rear 
extremity with a gravitating weight arranged 
to shift in the arc of a circle and bear upon 
the said frame in accordance with the influ 
ence of gravity, substantially as described. 
2. In a rectangular harrow, the combina 
tion with a harrow-frame and a superimposed 
track formed on the arc of a circle and ex 
tending diagonally across the frame, said 
track declining from opposite ends toward its 
center, of a movable superposed weight ar 
ranged to shift its position in accordance with 
the influence of gravity, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a harrow, the combination with a har 
row-frame, of an oscillating arm fixed on said 
Soil. 
25 
35 
y 
 
45 
frame and arranged to swing in the arc of a 
circle, the gravitating weight carried at the 
free end of said arm and rotatably mounted 
thereon, and suitable supports or guides for 
said weight arranged in an arc of a circle on 
top of the harrow-frame, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a harrow, the combination with a har 
row-frame, of an oscillating arm fixed on said 
frame and arranged to Swing in the arc of a 
circle, the adjustable gravitating weight car 
ried at the free end of said arm and rotatably 
mounted thereon, and suitable supports or 
guides for said weight arranged in an arc of 
a circle on top of the harrow-frame substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a harrow, the combination with a har 
row-frame, of an oscillatory arm pivotally sup 
ported above said frame and arranged to swing 
in the arc of a circle, the adjustable gravitat 
ing weight carried at the free end of said arm 
and rotatably mounted thereon, and a suit 
able support or guideway for said weight also 
arranged in an arc of a circle above the top 
of the harrow-frame, and sloping or converg 
ing from both extremities to its center in a 
downward direction, as set forth. 
6. In a harrow, the combination with a har 
row-frame, of an oscillatory arm fixed on said 
frame and arranged to swing in the arc of a 
circle, an adjustable gravitating weight car 
ried at the free end of said arm and rotatably 
mounted thereon, an arc-shaped guideway or 
support for said weight permitting its free ro 
tation thereupon, and limiting agencies re 
spectively at the ends of said guide-way, sub 
stantially as described." 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
JOSHUA RAYMAN STORIE. 
55 
65 
70 
75 
Witnesses: 
BEN MOODY, 
W. B. THOMAS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493410.txt	(No Model.) 
P. J. WANDERLINIDA, 
REFRIGERATOR, 
No. 493,410, 
Patented Mar. 14, 1893. 
WITNESSES 
NVENTOR 
&2222a-e, -62426/ae/. 
2. zZ2 
are 2.41 
 
A 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER J. VANDERLINDA, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
REFRIGERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 493,410, dated March 14, 1893. 
Application filed December 22, 1892, Serial No. 456,10l., (No model.) 
45 
C' back F. and bottom slats D. D. upon which 4o 
the tray E. rests. 
The stock to be cooled is placed upon the 
trays E. These trays are then set upon the 
slats D.D. and the frame is moved in its Ways 
to its position at rest in the casing. The inte 
rior front piece G. filling the space or opening 
in the walls of the casing, acts as a stopper in 
preventing the escape of cold air from the 
chamber when the drawer is closed. When 
the stock is cooled, the frame is drawn for 
ward until the back F. rests at the point for 
merly occupied by piece G. in the opening in 
the walls of the chamber, and being placed 
at some distance forward of the ends of pieces 
C' leaving projecting portions C'.C.'. These 
projecting portions C'C' remain in the ways, 
to the rear of back F. and thus hold the drawer 
in a horizontal position while the trays are 
being changed, and the back F. stops the cold 
air from escaping while the drawer is open. 
I claim 
The combination with the casing A. contain 
ing a cold air chamber, of a series of tray 
frames, arranged to slide horizontally therein, 
having a front portion C. an interior front por 
tion G. side pieces C. C. and having a back 
F. arranged at some distance forward of the 
ends of pieces C leaving projecting portions 
C'. C'. at the rear of said back and having 
bottom slats D. D. arranged substantially as 
described and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
55 
o 
PETER J. WANDERLINDA. 
Witnesses: 
DENNISL. ROGERs, 
H. M. DICKINSON, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PETER J. VANDERLINDA, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Grand Rapids, in the county of Kent and 
State of Michigan, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvementsin Refrigeratory Ap 
paratus; and Idohereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to a refrigeratory ap 
paratus and is designed more especially for 
Cooling chocolate coated candies after they 
have received their coating of melted choco 
late and consists in the construction combi 
nation and arrangement of the various parts 
hereinafter described and more particularly 
pointed out in the claim reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings wherein 
Figure 1. represents a perspective of a de 
vice embodying my invention, and Fig. 2. a 
detail of a tray frame and tray detached. 
A. represents a casing which is divided hori 
Zontally into an ice chamber for storing ice, 
having a door B. and a cold air chamber for 
Storing the material to be cooled arranged un 
derneath the ice chamber, and provided with 
a series of tray frames Carranged horizon 
tally and sliding in suitable ways, like a se 
ries of drawers in a case. Upon these tray 
frames, rest the trays containing the stock 
to be cooled as shown in Fig. 1. These tray 
frames are so constructed as to retain the cold 
air in the chamber, and yet to permit a free 
circulation thereof, having the front portion 
or piece C. and the interior front portion or 
piece G. which is of the same thickness as the 
walls of the cold air chamber, the side pieces 
35 
 
CS vemy r cy 
C 
r 
CS 
2. 
Hill 
C 
Old 
e 
As 
A 
dvd 
- 
Cld 
a 
and 
Cld 
- 
S 
O 
C9 
Old 
- 
S 
Cd 
Q-P 
 
It is hereby certified that Letters Patent, No. 493,410, granted March 14, 1893, 
upon the application of Peter J. Vanderlinda, of Grand Rapids, Michigan, for an im 
provement in Refrigerators, were erroneously issued to said Vanderlinda as sole 
owner of the invention; that said Letters Patent should have been issued to said Peter 
J. Vanderlinda and Herbert M. Dickinson, jointly, each being owner of one-half interest, 
as shown by the record of assignments in this office; and that said Letters Patent 
should be read with this correction therein that the same may conform to the record of 
the case in the Patent Office. 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 18th day of April, A. D. 1893. 
SEAL. 
Countersigned: 
JoHN S. SEYMOUR, 
Commissioner of Patents. 
JOHN M. REYNOLDS, 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493510.txt	(No Model.) 
F. MERT SHEIMER. 
EXHAUST NOZZLE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
 
No. 493,510, 
Patented Mar. 14, l893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 493,510, 
F. MERTSHEIMER. 
. 
EXHAUST NOZZLE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Mar. 14, 1893, 
SC 
  
 
 
 
S. 
R SS 
 
 
 
 
i 
 
 
A zoo. 
 
N 
S 
2 
Azo. 8. 
2: , Cro?e(ze 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK MERTSHEIMER, OF CHEYENNE, WYOMING. 
EXHAUST NOZZLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 493,510, dated March 14, 1893. 
Application filed July 22, 1892, 
Serial No, 440,905, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, FREDERICK MERTSHEIM 
ER, of Cheyenne, county of Laramie, and State 
of Wyoming, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Exhaust-Nozzles, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to that class of exhaust 
nozzles used more particularly in locomotive 
engines for the purpose of increasing the draft. 
The present invention relates to improve 
ments upon the variable nozzle, for which Let 
ters Patent of the United States were granted 
to me on the 15th day of July, 1890, numbered 
432,422. 
The essential feature of my nozzle as set 
forth in the original patent, consists in a series 
of in Wardly projecting fingers. In the nozzle 
proper, combined with a series of correspond 
ing fingers on a rotary ring, the fingers serve 
to break up and distribute the out-going blast 
of steam. 
Present improvements consist in reducing 
the width of the fingers toward their under 
sides, so that they present sharp edges toward 
the ascending steam. In this form they pre 
sent less resistance and act more efficiently 
than those having flat under surfaces as in 
the original patent. 
Another improvement consists in giving the 
fingers with the sharp under edges an inclina 
tion on one side and a vertical or substan 
tially vertical face on the other, whereby they 
are adapted to give the outgoing steam a 
rolling or gyratory motion, as it ascends 
through the stack. 
Another improvement consists in provid 
ing the base ring or nozzle proper with an in 
ternal flange, to confine the steam to its proper 
central course. 
In the drawings Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of a boiler containing my nozzle, the front 
end being removed. Fig. 2 is a top plan view 
of the same, with the smoke box shown in 
section. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical cross-section 
through the improved nozzle. Fig. 4 is a top 
plan view of the same. Fig. 5 is an end of 
one of the fingers or teeth. Fig. 6 is a verti 
cal cross-section through the same. Figs. 7 
and 8 are vertical cross-sections through the 
O 
35 
45 
stationary tip or ring on a larger Scale, to 
show the form of the fingers. 
The nozzle consists of a base ring or nozzle 
proper, A, through which the exhaust steam 
is delivered from the engine cylinders as 
usual. 
B represents a tip or ring, fixed in the up 
per end of the base ring and provided with a 
series of inwardly projecting fingers, b. 
C is a rotatable ring or cap situated over 
and around the tip B and provided with a se 
ries of inwardly projecting fingers, overlying 
those of the tip, so that by a rotary movement 
the teeth of the cap may be caused to regis 
ter with those of the tip, in order to leave un 
obstructed vertical openings between them, 
or turned so that the upper fingers cover, to a 
greater or less extent, the space between the 
lower fingers, thus reducing the area of the 
opening through which the steam may escape. 
In its general construction and mode of op 
eration so far as described, the nozzle strongly 
resembles that in my previous patent. 
In carrying my present invention into ef 
fect, I now bevel or taper the fingers of the 
tip in a downward direction, bringing them 
to a sharp edge, or nearly so, at the lower 
side, so that they present in cross-section a 
tri-angular form. The fingers with the thin 
edges at the under side offer far less resist 
ance to the ascending steam than those con 
structed with flat under surfaces, and they 
permit the steam to ascend freely, and with 
out production of the reactionary currents, 
which result from the impact of the steam 
against the under sides of the flat teeth. 
As shown in Figs. 7 and 8, the teeth may 
be sloped inward on both sides. In some 
cases it is found advisable, however, to con 
struct the teeth as shown in Fig. 8, with one 
side in a substantially vertical position, and 
the other side inclined upward from the lower 
edge. As all the teeth are inclined upon the 
same side or in the same direction, they act 
jointly to impart a whirling motion to the 
steam as it passes between them. The rotary 
cap Cisprovided with an annular flange which 
extends downward and around the upper edge 
of the tip, and having a surrounding flange 
75 
9o 
95 
 
493,510 
on the base ring, the tip being provided with 
fingers or flanges projected into a peripheral 
groove in the tip, whereby the cap or ring is 
held down in place. The tip is secured by a 
fastening bolt D or other equivalent device. 
It will be observed that the base ring is pro 
vided with an internal flange or shoulder fit 
ting beneath the lower edge of the tip and ly 
ing flush with its inner wall. This arrange 
ment causes the nozzle to present a smooth 
inner surface to the ascending steam so that 
it has little or no tendency to pass outward 
and escape between the base ring and the in 
ner ring B. 
By forming the teeth with parallel sides, as 
shown in my former patent referred to, the 
steam passes through the interstices in a 
straight forward direction, and in a compact 
volume. For obvious reasons it is desirable 
to spread or scatter the blast in order to dis 
tribute it over a larger surface, and this is 
effectually accomplished by giving the teeth 
the wedge shape herein shown and described. 
By forming the teeth as represented in Figs. 
3, 5 and 7, the steam is divided and deflected 
laterally in oblique directions by the opposite 
inclined sides. The volume passing between 
two adjacent teeth is deflected in two direc 
tions or planes crossing each other in front of 
the teeth, creating in effect two volumes or 
jets which, by impinging upon each other are 
deflected and broken up and scattered or 
sprayed. Practically the same effect is pro 
duced by the teeth shown in Fig. 8. The 
steam passing along the straight or vertical 
side of one tooth, is met by the deflected cur 
O 
25 
35 
45 
rent passing along the inclined face of the 
adjacent tooth, whereby, in addition to break 
ing up and scattering the volume, a spiral 
direction is given to the whole. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. An exhaust nozzle having a series of in 
wardly projecting teeth brought to an edge 
at the under side. 
2. An exhaust nozzle having a series of in 
wardly projecting teeth each presenting a ver 
tical and an inclined side wall, whereby the 
outgoing steam is given a whirling motion. 
3. An exhaust nozzle consisting of a tip or 
nozzle proper, provided with inwardly pro 
jecting fingers brought to an edge at the un 
der side and a rotary ring or cap also provided 
with a series of inwardly projecting fingers. 
of inwardly projecting fingers, each brought 
to an edge at the under side, said edge hav 
ing an upward inclination from the outer to 
Ward the inner end. 
5. In an exhaust nozzle the combination of 
the rotatable cap or ring with fingers therein, 
the tip provided with fingers and the base 
ring having the internal flange or shoulder 
substantially as described and shown. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 12th day of April, 1892, in the pres 
ence of two attesting witnesses. 
4. An exhaust nozzle provided with a series 55 
6) 
FREDERICK MERTSHEIMER, 
Witnesses: 
N. F. MILBURN, 
JOHN E. THOMAS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493613.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ENOSA. BRONSON, OF LINCOLN, NEBRASIKA. 
COMPOUND FOR RETARDING THE SETTING OF C EMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 493,613, dated March 14, 1893. 
Application filed December 15, 1892. 
Serial No. 455,219. (No specimens.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ENOSA. BRONSON, a citi 
zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Lincoln, in the county of Lancaster and 
State of Nebraska, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Compounds for 
Retarding the Setting of Cements, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
IngS. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
compounds for retarding the setting of plas 
ter- of- paris and other analogous cements; 
and it consists in combining the ingredients 
in the proportions and in the manner follow 
ing:-I take of unslaked lime, say, seventy 
pounds, and simply dampen it with a small 
quantity of water, which, with the air, will 
slake it, the heat generated in the slaking 
process tending to evaporate the water, leav 
ing the lime in the form of a dry powder. To 
this I add, say, thirty pounds of pulverized 
glue, ten pounds of flax-seed or oil-cake, and 
25. 
35 
ten pounds of china clay. I then put the 
mass into an iron kettle and subject it for 
about three hours to an intense heat, and 
thoroughly stir it while so heated. By the 
action of the heat and the agitation of the 
mass the adhesive and cohesive properties of 
the ingredients are fully developed and the 
strength retained, resulting in a product in 
every way admirably adapted for the purposes 
intended. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The composition of matter above described, 
composed of air-slaked lime, glue, flax-seed or 
oil-cake, and china clay, combined in the pro 
portions and in the manner set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ENOS A BRONSON. 
Witnesses: 
J. L. CALDWELL, 
J. S. EDWARDS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493713.txt	(No Model.) M. H. HATHAWAY & J. KELLEHER. 
A. L., HATHAWAY, Administratrix of M. H. HATHAWAY, Deceased. 
INSULATOR FOR TROLLEY WIRES, 
No. 493,713, 
Patented Mar, 21, 1893, 
(fitnesses 
Jam-et-, 2/72. 
3-(4-411- 
ya 
2, ?: lor's 
%. '. 
W 
fiel 2& Caswi; (0/iforneys. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MERRILL H. HATHAWAY, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, AND JOHN 
KELLEHER, OF MANCHESTER, NEW HAMPSHIRE; ADELE L. HATHAWAY 
ADMINISTRATRIX OF SAID MERRILL H. HATHAWAY, DECEASED. 
NSU LATOR FOR TROLLEY-wiRES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 493,713, dated March 21, 1893. 
Application filed April 2, 1892, 
Serial No,427,464 (No model.) 
15 and other cars by electricity. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, MERRILL H. HATHA 
WAY, of Springfield, in the county of Hamp 
den and State of Massachusetts, and JoHN 
5 KELLEHER, of Manchester, in the county of 
Hillsborough and State of New Hampshire, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Insulating-Hangers for Trolley-Wires, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
to ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part thereof. 
Our invention relates to devices for support 
ing overhead trolley wires in what are known 
as overhead systems of propulsion of street 
The objects of our invention are to provide 
a hanger for this purpose which, while afford 
ing perfect insulation to the wire, wiil pos 
SeSS great strength and durability; which can 
2O not be broken by the contacts of the trolley 
wheel there with; which will be entirely pro 
tected from moisture; and, the parts of which 
can be locked together by a simple upward 
movement of one part within the other. 
To these ends our invention consists in the 
hanger constructed and operating as herein 
after fully described and particularly point 
ed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like 
3o parts are designated by like letters in the sev 
eral figures, Figure 1 is a side elevation of a 
hanger embodying our invention. Fig. 2 is a 
Vertical Section thereof. Fig. 3 is a cross-sec 
tion taken upon linea-ac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a 
35 detail view of one of the wedge blocks. Fig.5 
is a vertical section of the insulating bushing. 
The letter a designates the yoke, having 
the depending arms a', which is adapted at 
its upper end to be rigidly secured to a 
4o bracket-arm or span wire as the case may be, 
and forms the support for the other parts of 
the hanger, said yoke being preferably com 
posed of iron or other metal. At their lower 
end the arms a' of said yoke have their ad 
45 jacent faces concaved transversely and ta 
pered vertically, to adapt them to serve as a 
seat for the shell or casing b, which is prefer 
ably composed of metal, and which is substan 
tially cup-shaped or tapers gradually from its 
25 
upper end toward its lower end where it ter- 5o 
minates in the depending, bell-shaped flange 
b'. Said shell or casing is thus adapted to be 
rigidly supported between the arms of the 
yoke, and, at the same time, to be readily re 
moved therefrom by raising it from its seat 55 
and withdrawing it laterally from between 
the arms. Near its lower end the shell b is 
provided with the internal, annular flangel, 
upon which rests a bushing c composed of 
any insulating material, preferably hard rub- 6o 
ber or other fibrous material, which bushing is 
bored to receive a tubed, preferably of metal, 
which projects upwardly within the shell and 
has its upper end flared outwardly as shown. 
The bushing c projects downwardly between 65 
the face of the flange band said tube thus 
perfectly insulating the latter at its lower end, 
while, surrounding said tube above said bush 
ing, is a lining or block of insulating material 
e, which perfectly insulates the upper portion 7 O. 
of the tube and affords vertical support there 
to by reason of the flaring upper end thereof. 
Said lining or block e can be previously 
molded to the desired form from any suitable 
insulating material and then be inserted with 
in the shell, in which case the tube d is after 
ward inserted by passing it downwardly 
through the lining and bushing c, or the tube 
can be first inserted and the material of which 
the lining is composed poured into the shell 8o 
in plastic form and allowed to harden about 
the tube, as may be most convenient, and the 
bushing c and lininge can be formed integral 
with each other if desired, it being essential 
merely that the tube d shall be entirely insu- 85 
lated from the shell and yet be retained with 
in the latter in such manner as to be capable 
of supporting a considerable weight. The 
shell b is provided with a removable cap or 
cover b, preferably of metal, the inner side 9o 
of which is provided with a lining l' of insu 
lating material, which cap closely fits upon 
the shell in such manner as to exclude all 
moisture from the latter. Any suitable means 
for locking the cap in position upon the shell 95 
can be employed, the means shown by us con 
sisting of a screw b entering a tapped hole in 
yoke a and adapted to be lowered upon the 
75 
 
493,713 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
cap, said Screw being provided with a squared 
lower end or with a spanner-hole as shown, 
to enable it to be readily raised and lowered. 
The letter f designates the usual metallic 
ear, which is soldered or otherwise rigidly 
connected to the trolley wire g, said car hav 
ing the metallic stem f' formed integral there. 
With or secured thereto in any suitable man 
ner, which stem preferably has its upper end 
slightly tapered as shown, and is provided 
just below said tapered end with the annular 
shoulder f. To engage said shoulder on the 
stem and afford vertical support to the latter 
Within tube d, we provide wedge-blocks h, 
tapered to correspond with the taper of the 
upper end of the tube and having a flat upper 
As shown said blocks have the form 
surface. 
of two half-cones, each of which contains one 
half of a central orifice h', which preferably 
decreases in diameter from the bottom toward 
the upper side of said blocks, and, at said up 
per side, is of substantially the diameter of 
stem f' below shoulder f. Said blocks being 
placed loosely within the flaring upper end 
of the tube d, are adapted to be raised by 
the end of said stem, as the latter is thrust 
upwardly within the tube, sufficiently to per 
mit the stem to pass between them, until 
shoulder f' passes said blocks, whereupon 
they drop to the position shown in Fig. 2, be 
neath said shoulder, and securely lock the 
Stem against downward movement. Said 
Wedge-blocks are preferably made of metal 
and, in connection with the metallic tube d 
and stem f', afford a very strong and durable 
support for the trolley wire, which is, at the 
Same time, perfectly insulated. 
In stringing a trolley wire, the yokes c are 
properly secured to the bracket arms, span 
wires or other supports provided for the wire, 
and the shells b are dropped into their seats 
in said yokes, with the wedge-blocks h rest 
ing loosely in the flaring upper end of the 
tubes d, and the caps or covers b removed. 
The trolley wire, having the earf and its stem 
f' soldered thereto, is raised to a position be 
neath one of the shells b and said stem is 
thrust upwardly within the tube d until its 
shoulder f*passes the upper end of the wedge 
blocks as before described, whereupon the 
latter drop beneath said shoulder and lock 
the stem within the tube. Cover b is then 
applied to the shell and screw b is lowered 
thereon, and the linemen pass on to the next 
Support, and so on until the entire wire has 
been strung. 
It will thus be seen that the operation of 
stringing a wire is very greatly expedited as 
compared with the time consumed in such op 
eration in connection with the forms of insul 
lators heretofore employed. It will be ob 
served, furthermore, that the wire, when so 
strung, is held, in the plane of each of its sup 
ports, against movement in any direction, the 
cover band blocks h preventing movement 
thereof vertically and the long bearing of 
stem f within tube dpreventing lateral move 
ment thereof. Again, it will be noted, We pro 
vide a metallic bearing for the upper end of 
stem f' and thereby gain a strength and dul 
rability for said bearing which cannot be se 
cured by making it from insulating material 
as heretofore, and which has to be renewed 
frequently in order to retain the stem within 
the shell. If for any reason it is desired to 
from the shell it can be 
remove the stem if 
readily done by removing cover b, slightly 
raising the stem, and removing the Wedge 
blocks, which permits the stem to be with 
drawn from the tube d. Another important 
advantage gained by our construction is the 
perfect protection from moisture afforded to 
the interior of the shell, the cover bafford 
ing such protection to the upper end of the 
shell, and the flangeb', at the lower end there 
of, the latter forming a perfect Water-shed. 
The screw b5 not only securely holds the 
cover upon the shell but also holds the latter 
against vertical movement within the arms of 
the yoke, but it will be understood that other 
means for securing the latter result can be 
employed, or that the casing can be rigidly 
and permanently secured to the arms of the 
yoke if desired. We prefer the construction 
shown, however, because it enables us to in 
sert a strip of insulating material between 
the ends of the yoke-arms and the shell and 
thereby prevent all possibility of a ground 
ing of the circuit should the trolley wheel, by 
any means, be moved into contact with the 
shell and the wire at the same time. 
As before stated, we prefer to make the 
shell of metal for the purpose of Securing 
great strength and durability and enabling 
it to withstand the violent blows from the trol 
ley wheel to which they are frequently sub 
jected, but wood and other materials possess 
ing rigidity and strength can be used there 
for within the spirit of our invention. The 
particular form of the yoke a can of course 
be varied as may be desired. By adapting 
the stem f' to be connected to the shell by an 
upward movement simply, we are enabled to 
make said stem and the ear f integral with 
each other and thereby greatly facilitate the 
operation of soldering the latter to the wire 
as well as the operation of stringing the wire 
as before described. 
While we have devised ourimproved hanger 
with especial reference to the support of trol 
ley wires as described, it is obvious that it is 
adapted to be utilized as an insulating sup 
port for conductors of electricity generally, 
and we design to so apply it. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- 
1. An insulating hanger for trolley wires 
consisting of a substantially cup-shaped shell 
having means whereby it can be suspended 
from a bracket-arm or other support and hav 
ing an opening in the bottom thereof, a me 
tallic tube extending upwardly within said 
shell, a lining of insulating material entirely 
u 
75 
95 
OO 
IO5 
IIO 
IIS 
I 25 
 
493,713 
3 
IC) 
surrounding said tube within the shell, a me 
tallic stem adapted to enter said tube and 
having at its lower end means whereby it can 
be rigidly secured to a trolley wire, and means 
substantially as described for securing said 
stem in position within said tube, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. An insulating hanger for trolley wires 
consisting of a substantially cup-shaped shell 
having an opening in the bottom thereof and 
having located within said opening a bushing 
of insulating material, a metallic tube extend 
ing upwardly through said bushing into Said 
shell and having its upper end flared out 
Wardly, a lining of insulating material sur 
rounding said tube within the shell, a stem 
adapted to be thrust upwardly within said 
tube and having at its lower end means 
whereby it can be secured to a trolley wire, 
said stem being provided with a shoulder at 
or near its upper end, suitable wedge-blocks 
adapted to enter the flaring portion of said 
tube and by their engagement with the shoul 
der on said stem retain the latter within the 
tube, and means, as a yoke, for suspending 
said shell from a suitable support, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. An insulating hanger for trolley wires, 
consisting of a metallic shell having an open 
ing in the bottom thereof and provided with 
a removable cap or cover lined with insulat 
ing material, a metallic tube extending up 
wardly within said shell, a lining of insulat 
ing material surrounding said tube within the 
shell, a metallic stem adapted to be thrust up 
wardly within said tube and having means at 
its lower end whereby it can be secured to a 
trolley wire, locking means for retaining said 
stem within the tube, and a yoke for suspend 
ing said shell from a bracket-arm or other sup 
port, substantially as set forth. 
4. In an insulating hanger for trolley wires, 
a yoke adapted to be secured to a bracket 
arm or other support and having depending 
therefrom two arms, a substantially cup 
shaped shell adapted to be inserted between 
and supported by the arms of said yoke, said 
shell having an opening in the bottom thereof 
and a removable cap or cover at its upper end, 
a vertically movable screw entering a tapped 
hole in said yoke and adapted to be lowered 
upon said cap or cover to retain the latter 
35 
45 
SO 
 
55 
upon the shell and to retain the shell between 
the yoke-arms, a stem adapted to be thrust 
upwardly through the opening in the bottom 
of said shell and carrying at its lower end an 
ear for securing the same to a trolley Wire, a 
lining of insulating material surrounding said 
stem within the shell, and means for locking 
the upper end of said stem within the shell, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. In an insulating hanger for trolley wires, 
a Supporting yoke, a shell adapted to be sus 
pended from said yoke, said shell being of a 
greater diameter at the top than at the bottom 
thereof and having depending from said bot 
tom an annular bell-shaped flange, a tube ex 
tending upwardly through the bottom of said 
shell, which tube is entirely surrounded by a 
lining of insulating material, a stem adapted 
to be thrust upwardly within said tube and 
having at its lower end means for securing it 
to a trolley wire, said stem having a shoulder 
near the upper end thereof, and means at the 
upper end of said tube for engaging the shoul 
der on said stem and retaining the latter with 
in the tube, substantially as set forth. 
6. The insulating hanger for trolley wires 
herein described, consisting of a supporting 
yoke, a metallic shell adapted to be suspended 
from said support, said shell having an open 
ing in the bottom thereof and having a remov 
able cover lined with insulating material, a 
bushing of insulating material located within 
the opening in the bottom of said shell, a me 
tallic tube passing upwardly through said 
bushing into the shell and having a flaring 
upper end, a lining of insulating material Sur 
rounding said tube within the shell, a metal 
lic stem adapted to be thrust upwardly within 
said tube, said stem carrying at its lower end 
an ear for securing the same to a trolley wire 
and having near the upper end thereof a trans 
verse shoulder, and a plurality of metallic 
wedge-blocks adapted to occupy the flaring 
upper end of said tube and to project beneath 
the shoulder on said stem for retaining the 
latter within the tube, substantially as set 
forth. 
MERRILL H. HATIAWAY. 
JOHN KELLEHER, . 
75 
9o 
95 
Witnesses: 
ADOLPH DOCTOR, 
SAMUEL DOCTOR 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493813.txt	(No Model.) 
A. F. BER TRAM, 
SHOE, 
No. 493,813, 
Patented Mar. 21, 1893. 
 
 
Miss S s-S 
st-16 rs242-1-4 
91 rs1- or, 
( 7 /e-6-222 
A --> 
The NORRS Pefers co, PHOTO-ltro, wash NGiON. D. C., 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST F. BERTRAM, 
OF WELLSVILLE, OHIO. 
SHOE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 493,813, dated March 21, 1898. 
Application filed April 25, 1892, Serial No. 430,592, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, AUGUST F. BERTRAM, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wells 
ville, in the county of Columbiana and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Shoes; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able other's skilled in the art to which it 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in shoes and particularly in that class 
of shoes wherein a vent is provided at the 
front of the shoe, along the edges of which 
are set eyelets or other lace holding devices 
and the object of my invention is to provide 
an improved tab for the front of such shoes 
whereby the putting on of the same is greatly 
facilitated. 
In order that my improvements may be the 
better understood, I have illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings a shoe made accord 
ing to my invention, in which drawings 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the upper 
portion or upper of the shoe and Fig. 2 is 
a horizontal sectional view of the same. 
In these views 1 represents the vamp of the 
ordinary form, to which is stitched the upper, 
comprising the pieces 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, com 
posed alternately of elastic cloth Webbing and 
leather. Thus it will be seen that there are 
two elastic gores, 2, and 3, in each side of the 
upper, which gores are joined together at ad 
jacent edges by narrow leather strips 4, 4, two 
of such strips being used, one on the outside 
and one on the inside of the shoe. 
The two v. 
rear gores 3, 3, are in like manner joined to 
gether by narrow strips 5, 5, of leather in 
every way similar to the strips 4, 4. 
In order to facilitate the putting on of the 
shoe, I have provided tabs 7, 8, at the front 
and back of the shoe, respectively, that at 
the back being of the ordinary well known 
form. The tab 7, at the front of the shoe, 
consists of a narrow band of leather or other 
sufficiently strong and flexible material joined 
at its ends to the upper ends of the facings 6, 
6, on each side of the vent and forming a con 
nection between them, whereby the shoe may 
be more readily put on, this form of tab be 
ing much more readily seized by the ?ingers 
than is the ordinary form seen at 8. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
In a shoe having a vent at the front and 
lacing strips at each side thereof, the combi 
nation with such strips of a continuous strip 
secured at its ends to the upper ends of said 
lacing strips and extending across said vent, 
said continuous strip forming a tab for con 
venience in putting on the shoe, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
hereunto affix my signature this 16th day of 
March, A. D. 1892. 
AUGUST F. BERTRAM. 
In presence of - 
CHARLES LARGE, 
M. E. HARRISON. 
L. S. 
40 
45 
55 
O 
(5 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US493913.txt	(No Model.) 
H. R. DORE. 
CAR COUPLING, 
No. 493,913, 
Patented Mar, 21, 1893, 
 
 
S 
 
n 
 
NZ 7. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMAN R. DORE, OF MOULTON VILLE, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,918, dated March 21, 1898. 
Application filed December 15, 1892, Serial No. 455,282, (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
is pivoted at its inner lower end in lugs e 
Be it known that I, HERMAN R. DORE, of 
which extend below the plane of the lower 
Moultonville, in the county of Carroll and 
surface of the drawbar so that in case of ne 
State of New Hampshire, have invented cer 
cessity the pivot bolt f may readily be with 
tain new and useful Improvements in Car 
drawn to remove the hook, without disturb 
Couplings, of which the following is a speci 
ing other parts of the device. 
fication. 
g designates a spring arranged within the 
This invention has relation to that class of 
chamber d and bearing upon the hook to keep 
car couplings in which a spring-pressed or 
it from being accidentally thrown up and so 
gravitating hook is used in place of a pin for 
uncoupling the cars. The upper outer end of 
coupling with a link. 
the hook is provided with a hood h which ex 
It is the object of the invention to provide 
tends across the opening to the chamber d 
Such improvements in the manner of pivot 
and so keeps the latter closed against the en 
ing the shank of the hook in the drawhead as 
trance of dirt, snow, and ice to the said cham 
Will enable the hook to be readily detached 
ber. By the means described, the spring g is 
or disconnected from the drawhead in case 
not only protected against means, which 
of repair or for other reasons. 
might prevent its free operation, but it is put 
It is also the object of the invention to pro 
out of the way and protected against acci 
vide such improvements as will maintain the 
dental breakage or damage by contact with 
hook in engagement with the link with greater 
By pivoting the hook at a point 
other things. 
Security than heretofore, and protect the 
considerably below the line of draft, as I do, 
spring which bears upon the hook against the 
the draft on the hook is made to assist in 
Weather and against accidental damage. 
keeping it down in engagement with the link 
It is also the object of the invention to pro 
i. The forward face of the hook proper may 
wide means for the manipulation of the hook 
be inclined, as shown, so that when the same 
in coupling and uncoupling cars which shall 
is struck by the end of a link, as when two 
be more ready of manipulation and more effi 
cars come together, it may be raised and the 
cient than heretofore. 
cars coupled automatically. The upper and 
Reference is to be had to the annexed draw 
outer surface of the hook and drawhead may 
ings and to the letters marked thereon, form 
be rounded or inclined so as to assist in the 
ing a part of this specification, the same let 
shedding of water therefrom. 
ters designating the same parts or features, 
i designates a chain connected at one end 
as the case may be, wherever they occur. 
to the hook c, as at k, and at its other end to 
In the drawings-Figure 1, is a perspective 
a leverl which is pivoted to the car body, and 
view of the end of a car, and a drawbar, 
extends up so that it may be manipulated by 
equipped with my improvements. Fig. 2, is 
a person on the running-board l'. By raising 
a longitudinal sectional view of the drawbar 
the lever l the hook d may be raised, and by 
provided with my improvements drawn to an 
lowering the same, the hook may be allowed 
enlarged Scale. Fig. 3, is a top plan view of 
to fall or be pressed down by the spring g. 
the means for holding the lever, which is de 
To provide for maintaining the hook in 
signed to be manipulated from the top of the 
raised position when manipulated through the 
car in raised position. 
medium of the lever l, as when it is wanted 
In the drawings C, designates the car body, 
to set off a car and prevent another car from 
b is the drawbar which may be of usual con 
becoming automatically coupled thereto, I pro 
struction, excepting as it may be modified to 
vide the guideway in with a bowed spring n, 
suit it to my improvements which are de 
which, when the lever is raised will engage 
signed to be employed with a link of common 
the latter as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 3, 
form to couple or shackle cars. 
and maintain it in raised position. 
c designates the hook, the shank of which 
o designates a rock rod extending from side 
extends downward and inward through an in 
to side of the car, which rod is supported in 
clined chamber d formed in the drawbar, and bearings p secured to the car, and provided at 
- 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
& 93,913 
each end with angular or crank portions q. 
At a central point on the rock rodo is an arm 
r, to the outer end of which is connected one 
end of a chain S, the other end being con 
nected with the hook C. With this means of 
taking hold of the angular or crank ends q of 
the rod O, and turning the latter, the hook c 
may be raised in substantially the same man 
ner as by raising the lever l. 
t designates a clip secured to the end of the 
car so that when the crank or angular ends 
of the rod O are raised by sliding the rod lon 
gitudinally, said crank ends may be carried 
behind the clip t, and so maintain the hook 
in raised position, when it is desired to set 
off a car or prevent another car from being 
automatically coupled with the one in which 
the hook is raised in the drawbar. 
a designates a chain, the upper end of which 
is connected with the leverl, and the lower 
end is attached to the car body at any con 
Venient point to keep it in place, this provis 
ion being made for the purpose of enabling a 
person who may be upon the ground to take 
hold of the said chain and by drawing on it 
move the lever l from raised to lowered po 
sition in order to bring the hook into coup 
ling position. In this way cars may be cou 
pled and uncoupled without the necessity of 
going between the same, or without the neces 
ity of an attendant upon the running board 
getting down therefrom. 
Having thus explained the nature of the in 
vention and described a way of constructing 
and using the same, though without attempt 
ing to set forth all of the forms in which it 
may be made or all of the modes of its use, it 
is declared that what is claimed is 
1. A car coupling comprising in its construc 
tion a drawbar provided with an inclined 
chamber d and lugs e extending below the 
plane of the lower surface of the drawbar, and 
the hook a provided with a shank extended 
through the said inclined chamber and piv 
oted in said lugs, whereby in case it is desired 
to remove the hook, the same can be done 
without removing the drawbar, as set forth. 
2. In a car coupling, a drawbar provided 
with the inclined chamber d, the hook c hav 
ing its shank extended through the said cham 
ber and pivoted at its lowerinner end, a spring 
in the said chamber bearing upon the Said 
shank, and a hood connected with the hook 
and covering the opening to the chamber, as 
set forth. 
3. The combination, with the coupling hook, 
of the lever l, the chaini connecting the lever 
with the coupling hook, and the bowed fric 
tion spring in the guideway of the lever, as 
set forth. 
4. The combination, with the coupling hook, 
of the lever l, the chain j connecting the lat 
ter with the coupling hook, the chain a for 
drawing the leverl down, the rock rod o pro 
vided with the crank or angular ends q, arm 
r, connecting chain s, and retaining clipt, as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 5th day of De 
cember, A. D. 1892. 
HERMAN R. DOERE. 
45 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
ALMON F. ABBOTT, 
FRANK WEEKS. 
IO 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494013.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 494,013, 
H. C. McCLEAVE. 
H00F TRIMMER, 
Patented Mar. 21, 1893. 
S-62. 
0-6-ee, 
1. 
77%2-2 
INVENTOR 
m 
y 
BY 
C/(p. 6 
ATTORMEYS. 
the NoRRs perERs co, PHOTO-Litho. washington.D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. McCLEAVE, OF TRIMBLE, ILLINOIS. 
HO OF-TRIMMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No.494,018, dated March 21, 1893. 
Application filed August 2, 1892, Serial No. 441,921. (No model.) 
45 
So 
55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
hoof. The thumb of the hand which holds 
the foot of the animal is placed on the outside 
Beit known that I, HENRY C.MCCLEAVE, of 
Trimble, in the county of Crawford and State 
of the fulcrum piece or bar B to hold it in po 
of Illinois, have invented a new and useful 
sition, while the handle b of the knife A piv 
Improvement in Hoof-Trimmers, of which the 
oted to said fulcrum bar is held by the other 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. 
hand to vibrate the knife A to cut the hoof 
as required, the knife working on the under 
This invention relates to devices for trim 
ming the hoofs of horses or other animals 
side of the fulcrum bar or piece B. The knife 
preparatory to shoeing them, and it consists 
A is of reversely beveled or arched form 
transversely on its back as shown in Fig. 4, 
in a tool of novel construction for this pur 
to give it two or double cutting edges so that 
pose, Substantially as hereinafter described 
and more particularly pointed out in the 
it will cut in both strokes of its vibration and 
claim, and whereby the trimming may be 
may be worked to the right or left, thus sav 
ing time, and it is curved or arched longitudi 
done in much less time and with greater ease 
nally on its face f as shown in Fig. 3 to facili 
or less muscular exertion than is usually re 
quired for such work. 
tate shaping the hoof for the fit of the shoe. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
The fulcrum piece B by means of its series 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
of holes d is made adjustable by transposing 
the pivote of the knife to any one of said holes 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
to adapt the tool to different sized hoofs. 
Figure 1 represents a view in perspective 
It is not necessary that the pivote should be 
a separate piece as it might be an integral 
of a horse's leg in part, with my improved 
trimming device applied to trimming the 
part of the knife by turning the end of the 
latter down and fashioning it to form a pivot. 
hoof thereof. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal back 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
or outside face view of the knife portion of 
the tool, in part. Fig. 3 is a side or edge 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
view of said knife portion of the tool; and 
In a tool for trimming the hoofs of horses 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section thereof through 
the blade portion of the knife. 
and other animals, the combination of a vi 
The implement consists of two leading parts 
brating double edged knife, with an adjust 
or elements, namely, a knife part. A having 
able fulcrum piece or bar provided with an 
an attached handleb, and an adjustable full 
upturned hook or lip at its outer end and 
crum part or bar B having an upturned hook 
having a series of holes in and along it, and a 
pivot uniting the one end of said knife with 
or lip cat its outer end and any number of 
holes d in and along it for attachment of the said fulcrum piece through any one of said 
holes as required, essentially as set forth. 
inner end of the knife by a pivote to it. The 
fulcrum part or bar B is engaged by the hook 
or lip c with the underside of the hoof C of 
the animal, at the toe thereof or any other 
part of the bottom of the hoof, to set the knife 
in position to cut any required part of the 
JAMES GOOD, 
THOMAS HARBISON. 
HENRY C. MCCLEAVE. 
Witnesses: 
Patent- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
75 
o 
2 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494113.txt	(No Model.) 
s. ELLIOTT. 
SULKY, 
 
No. 494,113, 
Patented Mar. 21, 1893, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STERILING ELLIOTT, OF NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SULKY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 494,113, dated March 21, 1893. 
Application filed October 14, 1892, 
Seria. No, 448,802, (No model.) 
o 
25 
35 
40 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STERLING ELLIOTT, of 
Newton, county of Middlesex, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Sulkies, of which the following description, in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
is a specification, like letters on the drawings 
representing like parts. 
In trotting sulkies as now commonly made 
the wheels are large in diameter, generally 
about fifty-six inches, and it has heretofore 
been considered essential to use wheels of such 
large diameter with the view of reducing the 
friction upon the axle. The use of such large 
wheels is attended with many objections, as 
they necessitate the employment of numerous 
spokes, which must be of such size that those 
spokes which are between the hubs and the 
ground shall be sufficient to support not only 
the direct weight of the seat and frame of the 
vehicle and of the rider, but also to resist the 
lateralstrainto which the wheels are subjected. 
It is of course desirable to reduce in every 
possible way the weight of the sulky and there 
fore the large size of the wheels is a serious 
objection, and efforts have been made for many 
years to reduce the weight of the wheel by re 
ducing the thickness of the spokes, but this is 
attended with the disadvantage, growing from 
the insufficient support afforded, that any in 
creased lightness in the wheel is obtained at 
the expense of lateral vibration resulting from 
the thinness of the spokes, which lateral vi 
bration is objectionable as it results in the 
wheels momentarily leaving the track, in un 
equalizing the bearing pressure of the hub 
upon the axle, causing it to bind and thereby 
increasing the friction upon said axle, while 
the resistance of the air is materially in 
creased, and a disturbing effect produced 
upon the horse. Further, the reduction in the 
thickness of the spokes, for the purpose of se 
curing light weight impairs the strength of 
the wheel, so that when the vehicle swings 
laterally in turning corners the strain tends 
to throw the rim to one side beneath the hub 
and causes the breaking of the wheel. For 
these reasons the weight cannot be decreased 
to anything like the extent desired. It has 
of course been known that by reducing the 
size of the wheels the weight could be reduced, 
but it has heretofore been supposed that any 
material reduction in size would result in such 
increased resistance to the movements of the 
wheels on the road as would more than offset 
any advantage from decreasing the weight. 
One of the most serious obstacles to the per 
fect action of the horse in trotting with sul 
kies has been the tendency of the vehicle to 
slew or slide sidewise from the direct line 
of motion in turning corners or traveling 
around curves of the track, and when the 
wheels are light and liable to collapse from 
such lateral action the restraining influence 
upon the driver and the necessity of holding 
in the horse at such times acts upon both 
horse and driver to limit their efficiency. 
These facts have been Well known and yet for 
many years no appreciable improvement has 
been devised that would overcome the various 
objections to the ordinary sulky above set 
forth. 
I have discovered that, while a certain reduc 
tion in thesize of the wheels for the purpose of 
reducing weight will not secure any advan 
tage in view of the increased resistance to the 
movements of the wheel upon the track, but 
if the diameters of the wheels are reduced to 
a much greater extent than has ever before 
been proposed, the great reduction in weight 
thereby secured will far more than compen 
sate for such increased resistance as conse 
quentially results. While the diameter of 
the wheels may vary to some extent they 
should not under any circumstances be any 
higher than the distance between the shafts 
and the ground and in most instance a di 
ameter equal to about three-fourths to two 
thirds of the said distance will be found to 
be most effective, and with wheels of such 
size I am able to secure a very great reduc 
tion in Weight without impairing the requisite 
rigidity and without producing any lateral 
vibrations, so that the vehicle will keep in 
the track; and with such wheels there is little 
resistance from the air and little disturbance 
attracting the attention of the animal. While 
the Wheels of such greatly reduced size will 
thus overcome some of the serious objections 
to the ordinary construction of sulkies there 
is still the tendency, even with the use of such 
wheels, to slew in turning curves, which ten 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
45 
 
2 
494,113 
O 
O 
3o 
dency I have discovered may be whollyover 
come by placing elastic tires upon the wheels, 
preferably of such form that they will yield 
slightly laterally to the movements of the ve 
hicle without any sliding action of the parts 
of the tires that bear directly upon the road. 
And I have discovered that if such elastic 
tires be used in the form of pneumatic tires 
a very great advantage can be obtained in 
this respect, while, further, the movements of 
the vehicle are so softened and reduced as to 
practically exert no disturbing influence upon 
the horse, and the driver is relieved of the 
necessity of being upon his guard and of re 
straining the action of the horse in any way 
in turning curves and consequently the full 
powers of both the driver and the animal may 
be exerted throughout the races. The result 
has been such that with a vehicle provided 
with wheels as above set forth it is possible 
to obtain a speed never heretofore secured 
upon racing tracks, and this is so fully recog 
nized that in the few weeks that have elapsed 
since the first introduction of my improved 
sulky the old forms of trotting sulkies have 
practically become obsolete and discarded. 
The improved sulkies may of course be 
made with frames, seats, shafts or poles and 
wheels of different constructions. 
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1, is 
the side view of one form of sulky embodying 
my improvements. Fig. 2, is a rear end ele 
vation thereof. Fig. 3, is a side elevation of 
another form. Fig. 4, is a rear end elevation 
of the sulky shown in Fig. 3, and Fig. 5, a plan 
view of the construction shown in Figs. 3 
and 4. 
The shafts b, are preferably carried at the 
usual elevation, and constructed and braced 
in any usual manner, and the seat c is sup 
ported at its proper elevation, about the same 
as heretofore, and a cross pole may support 
the journals of suitable construction, or may 
be in the form of an arched axle a, as shown 
in Fig. 2, or may serve as a means of connect 
ing bars or frames d, that support the jour 
nals as shown in Figs. 3 and 5. In any case 
the journals s, are adapted to receive the hubs 
of the wheels e, the diameters of which, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2, are about equal to 
two-thirds the distance between the shaft and 
the ground, the wheels being somewhat larger 
in diameter in Figs. 3 and 5, but the outside 
limit of size should be less than the distance 
between the shaft and the ground. 
As shown the wheels are provided with or 
dinary pneumatic tires t, which may be se 
cured in any suitable way and may be of any 
suitable construction, and the rims, spokes 
' and hubs of the wheels may also be of any 
suitable construction and material. 
I am aware that it has been proposed to put 
elastic tires upon the wheels of sulkies when 
such wheels are of the usual size, but no ad 
vantage whatever has resulted, because the 
addition of such tires with such wheels sim 
ply results in an increase in the weight, and 
the wheels must be made with spokes so thin 
that they are seriously lacking in rigidity, and 
the tendency to slew, even if overcome by the 
friction of the tire upon the track, results in 
breaking the wheel, and the added weight of 
the elastic tire at the upper portions of the 
sufficiently light wheels results in increasing 
the lateral vibrations of this portion of the 
wheel, so that practically the use of elastic 
tires in such cases is of no benefit but the re 
WeSe. 
I do not here claim the construction and 
arrangement of the frame and axle or sup 
ports for the journals as shown in the draw 
ings, as these features constitute the subjects 
of separate applications for Letters Patent 
Serial Nos. 436,758 and 436,759. 
Without limiting myself to any specific 
form of frame or wheel or to the proportions 
shown, I claim as my invention 
1. The combination in a trotting sulky of a 
frame, shafts or pole and seat, and wheels less 
in diameter than the distance between the 
shafts and the ground, and provided with elas 
tic tires, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with the frame, shafts 
and seat of a sulky, of wheels less in diame. 
ter than the distance between the shafts and 
the ground, and provided with pneumatic 
tires, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
STERLING, ELLIOTT. 
Witnesses: 
BERNICE.J. NOYES, 
LUCY F. GRAVES. 
55 
75 
C O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494213.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MARTIN 
FAN ATTACHMENT FOR, ROCKING CHAIRS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB MARTIN, OF MUSCATINE, IOWA. 
FAN ATTACHMENT FOR RocKING-CHAIRs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 494,213, dated March 28, 1893. 
... 
Application filed June 4, 1892, Serial No. 435,515, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
To all ?ph???, i? ??? ??? ????: 
Be it known that I, JACOB MARTIN, of Mus 
catine, in the county of Muscatine and State 
of Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Fan Attachments for Rock 
ing-Chairs; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a rocking 
chair having my improved fan actuating at 
tachments applied. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
vertical central section through the same. 
Fig. 3 is a detail. 
This invention is an improved fan attach. 
ment for rocking chairs and it consists in a 
novel combination of devices whereby rotary 
movements are imparted to a shaft from the 
oscillating chair seat, and in other novel de 
vices whereby the rotary fan is adjustably 
mounted above the seat and driven from a ro 
tary shaft all of which will be hereinafter 
clearly described and claimed. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, - A 
designates a supporting frame for the chair 
such as is employed in patent rocking chairs 
having side pieces a, a, upon which rest and 
oscillate the rockers B, B, of the chair seat as 
indicated in the drawings. 
C, C, designate a pair of U-shaped springs 
each one of which is attached by one leg to a 
side piece C and by its upper leg to an adjoin 
ing rocker B as shown, so as to confine the 
rockers in place on pieces a but allow them to 
oscillate thereon. 
D designates a shaft lying transversely of 
and centrally below the seat, as shown being 
journaled in rockers B and projecting at one 
end beyond the side of the chair and carry 
ing a pulley d on such end. The center of the 
shaft is cranked as at e and on this cranked 
portion is journaled one end of a short up 
standing pitman E the upper end of which is 
pivotally connected to a curved lever F the 
front end of which projects forward and down 
ward to near the front of and below the seat 
and is there pivoted to an upstanding stud G 
secured on one of the cross pieces a? of frame 
A. The lever F projects rearwardly a short 
distance beyond pitman E and is pivotally 
- 
- 
connected by a link f with the inner end of 
an oscillating lever H which is centrally full 
crumed on an upstanding stud h mounted on 
the rear cross piece a of the frame A. The 
rear end of rod His pivotally connected by a 
link I with an eye i attached to the rear end 
of the chair seat. 
J designates a coiled spring attached about 
centrally to pitman Eatone end and to lever F 
in front of said pitman by its other end; and i 
is a similar spring attached to the rear side of 
pitman E and to link f as shown. These 
springs tend to draw the pitman to an upright 
position and prevent dead centering thereof. 
As the chair is rocked backward the rod H 
is oscillated and through its connections the 
inner end of lever F is raised, thereby lifting 
the pitman and turningshaft D ap?rtial revo 
lution, and as the seat is rocked forward a re 
verse motion is given rod. H. and lever F, the 
pitman is thereby depressed and the revolu 
tion of the shaft D is completed; or if the os 
cillation of the seat be only partial, -e-not 
to its full extent backward and forward, the 
pitman being alternately raised and lowered 
will impart a rotatory or partial alternate ro 
tary movements to the shaft. 
K designates uprights or rods pivoted at 
their lower ends to the sides of the seat, or as 
shown to hangers L attached to the sides of 
the seat, and on the upper ends of said rods 
are sleeves k in which is journaled the shaft 
l of a rotary fan L' of any desired construc 
tion, and on the end of shaftl above pulley d 
is a pulley in which is connected by a belt M 
with pulley d whereby rotary movement is 
imparted to the fan from shaft D. 
N designates a notched segment attached 
to or formed on the upper end of one or both 
hangers L, and n is a spring rod attached to 
the adjoining upright k and adapted to en 
gage the segment to hold the uprights in any 
position in relation thereto to which they are 
adjusted. 
From the foregoing it is obvious that as the 
occupant of the chair rocks the same, motion 
will be imparted to shaft D, thence to the fan, 
and that he can also adjust the position of 
the latter forward or backward to suit his 
pleasure. 
If the chair is to have a fixed position frame 
A might be dispensed with and the stud G be 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
95 
I OO 
494,213 
35 
45 
so 
55 
the cranked shaft to the fan shaft, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of the uprights pivot 
ally connected at their lower ends to a rock 
ing chair seat, the segment and spring for ad 
justing and securing said uprights, the fan 
shaft journaled in the upper ends thereof and 
the fan and pulley thereon; with the means 
substantially as described for imparting mo 
tion to said fan shaft, all substantially as 
specified. 
5. The combination of the base frame, the 
rocking chair mounted thereon, the cranked 
shaft journaled in rockers, the pitman at 
tached thereto, the lever pivotally connected 
to said pitman near one end and to a stud on 
the frame at the other, the oscillating rod 
mounted om Said frame and linked at one end 
to the free end of the lever and linked by the 
other end to a chair seat; with the uprights 
connected to the seat, the fan shaft journaled 
in the upper end thereof, the fan thereon, and 
the belt and pulleys for driving said fan shaft 
from the cranked shaft, substantially as speci 
fied, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of two 
witnesses. 
JACOB MARTIN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN MARKMANN, 
JOHN NICKLAS. 
fixed to the floor; and it is obvious that shaft 
D and the means for imparting rotary move 
ment thereto could be employed for other use 
ful purposes besides that of driving the fan 
shaft as described. Therefore 
What I claim as new is 
1. The combination of the cranked shaft, 
the pitman attached thereto, the lever as F 
pivotally connected to said pitman near one 
end and to a fixed point at the other, the os 
cillating lever as H linked at one end to the 
free end of the lever F and the devices for 
Oscillating said lever H, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination of the crank shaft, the 
pitman connected thereto, the lever pivoted 
at one end to a fixed stud and pivotally con 
nected near its free end to the pitman, an os 
cillating lever, a link connecting one end of 
Said oscillating lever to the free end of the 
first lever, and the springs connecting the 
pitman to the link and lever, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination of the cranked shaft, 
the lever pivoted at one end to a fixed point, 
the pitman connecting the free end of said 
lever to the shaft, and the oscillating lever 
having a link connection with the first lever 
at one end; with the rocking chair, the link 
connecting the seat thereof to the free end of 
said oscillating lever, the uprights, the fan 
shaft journaled on the uprights above the seat, 
and the devices for transmitting motion from 
O 
2 ? 
25 
30 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494313.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 494,313, 
N Patented Mar. 28, 1893. 
REMOVABLE FASTENING FOR NON-CONDUCTING COWERINGs. 
T. WILLIAMS, 
 
 
N 
s 
s 
 
R 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS WILLIAMS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
REMOVABLE FASTENING FOR NON-co NDUCTING cover NGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 494,313, dated March 28, 1893. 
Application filed February 15, 1892, Renewed February 16, 1893, Serial No. 462,617, (No model.) 
55 
3) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS WILLIAMS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Removable Fastenings for 
Non-Conducting Coverings; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in fastenings for the 
non-conducting coverings for filters, boiling 
apparatus and the like; and it consists sub 
stantially in such features of construction, 
arrangement and combinations of parts as 
will hereinafter be more particularly de 
scribed. 
The invention has reference more particu 
larly to clamps or fastenings for holding the 
non-conducting coverings of large boiling ket 
tles or similar vessels in their proper posi 
tions around the vessels, so that no portion 
of the said vessel shall become uncovered or 
exposed in use due to the sagging or acci 
dental displacement of such covering. 
The invention has for its principal object 
to enable the non-conducting coverings for 
the vessels to be readily secured in place, and 
also to permit of the quick and ready removal 
thereof, substantially as will hereinafter more 
fully appear when taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings in which 
Figure 1 represents an elevation of a ket 
tle, boiler or tank when constructed of three 
or more superimposed sections and having a 
non-conducting covering, envelope or wrap 
per secured in place by my improved fasten 
ing. Fig. 2 is an enlarged sectional elevation 
of the contiguous portion of two kettle sec 
tions when covered and united by means of 
my improved fastening. Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
view in detail, and representing more clearly 
the arrangement of the hangers or hooks in 
termediate of the clamps or fastenings. Fig. 
4 is a detail perspective of the hook or hanger. 
In carrying my invention into effect I pro 
vide the usual non-conducting covering of 
felt or similar material which is inclosed in 
the ordinary canvas or similar wrapper or 
covering, the said wrapper or covering being 
secured around the felt in any suitable man 
ner, preferably by rivets (not shown). To the 
upper edge of said non-conducting covering 
a metal ring is secured by means of a series 
or number of hooks or hangers of peculiar 
construction, as will hereinafter be more par 
ticularly described; and then at suitable dis 
tances apart the securing clamps are fitted 
into place, the clamps and the hooks or hang 
ers combining between them to hold the cov 
ering properly in place around the vessel or 
kettle on which the same may be used. In 
instances of very large and high boiling ket 
tles, such for instance as are used in sugar re 
fineries and similar places, it is common or 
usual to construct the Wessel or kettle of sev 
eral sections Superimposed one. above the 
other; and, for insuring the proper fitting of 
the sections upon each other it is usual to 
provide annular flanges on the edges thereof 
so as to form a seat or even connection be 
tween the sections. 
My invention is especially adapted for this 
class of vessels or kettles as will more fully 
appear on reference to the accompanying 
drawings by the letters of reference marked 
thereon. 
A represents a kettle or boiling vessel when 
constructed of three or more superimposed 
sections and covered by a non-conducting 
covering B of felt and canvas or other suit 
able material. 
C represents the felt material, and D its 
wrapper or envelope of canvas, the latter be 
ing fastened to the former by means of rivets 
C. arranged in any suitable number and at 
proper distances apart, 
E represents an iron or other metal ring 
which surrounds the vessel or kettle and 
which is fastened or secured to the upper edge 
of the non-conducting covering by means of 
a series or number of hooks or hangers Far 
ranged at suitable distances apart and form 
ing a means of suspension of such covering 
from the ring. These hooks or hangers are 
constructed of two legs or depending members 
b,b', which "straddle' or embrace the two 
sides of the non-conducting covering at its 
- 
25 
35 
40 
45. 
 
go 
OG 
2 
494,313 
35 
45 
55 
- 
ted into place and again removed whenever 
desired. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a non-conducting covering for boiling 
kettles or vessels a removable fastening con 
sisting of an encircling ring or band, a clamp 
embracing said ring or band on the under side, 
and a hook or hanger suspended on said ring 
or band and united at its lower ends by means 
of a fastening pin or the like, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a non-conducting covering for boiling 
kettles or vessels, a removable fastening con 
sisting of an encircling ring or band, a sus 
pending hook or hanger, and a securing clamp, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a non-conducting covering for boiling 
kettles or vessels constructed of a number of 
superimposed flanged sections, the combina 
tion of a ring or band encircling said sections 
and a non-conducting covering, hooks or hang 
ers from which the covering is suspended, 
and a securing clamp embracing the flanges 
of the vessel and the encircling band, sub. 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS WILLIAMS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES S. CASE, 
HERMAN H. TORBERG. 
O 
upper edge, as shown, and, if desired, the ends 
of these legs or members may be bent or 
turned over so as to enter the covering and 
be thereby more firmly secured in place. Or, 
in lieu of entering the covering a rivet may 
be passed through the covering at the places 
where the hooks are arranged, and thereby 
serve to hold them in place see Fig. 4. For 
all practical purposes however I have found 
that by giving the outer leg or member b a 
diagonal turn or direction, and forming the 
point of interSection of the legs with a loop as 
is shown at c, a substantial fastening is de 
rived, and answering all the purposes for . 
which intended. 
The several sections of the kettle or vessel 
being flanged as shown at d, the covering is 
placed around the same so that its lower edge 
will rest upon the flange as seen in Fig. 2, 
while the upper edge of the covering is main 
tained snugly in place beneath the flange of 
the next succeeding lower section by means 
of metal clamps G which fit or embrace the 
flanges of the united Sections substantially as 
is illustrated in the drawings. These clamps 
are preferably of malleable iron, and the end 
of the under portion e thereof is so bent, 
curved or turned at f as to receive the iron or 
metal ring E, see Fig. 2. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that a 
simple and effective mode of fastening is at 
tained, and also that by the use thereof the 
non-conducting coverings can be quickly fit 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494413.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 494,413. 
C. A. COTTER. 
PLUMBER's FERRULE. 
Patented Mar, 28, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR ?? 
????" 
?? 
?????? 
???? 
?? 
????? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. COTTER, OF WATERBURY, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR, TO 
RANDOLPH & CLOWES, OF SAME PLACE. 
P U MI BERS FERRU LE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 494413, dated March 28, 1893. 
Application filed Novemberll, 1892, Serial No. 451,596, (No model.) 
55 
iron pipe by what is termed a packed joint. 5? 
The ferrule is placed in the socket, the flange 
of the ferrule resting upon the shoulder at 
the base of the socket, oakum denoted in the 
drawing by 4 is packed in tightly upon the 
top of the flange of the ferrule and then mol 
ten lead denoted by 5 is poured in upon the 
top of the oakum to complete the joint. 
The lead pipe is in practice connected to 
the ferrule by what is termed a wiped joint. 
I have shown the ferrule as provided with 
an offset 8 at the base of which is a shoulder 
The end of the piece of lead pipe is sim 
9. 
ply placed within the offset, resting upon 
shoulder 9, and a wiped joint formed in the 
usual manner covering the point of joinder 
of the lead pipe to the ferrule. For conven 
ience in making the wiped joints, that is, so 
that they will always be ready for immediate 
use, the upper ends of the ferrules are tinned 
as at 10, the lower edge of the tinned portion 
being indicated in the drawing by a line and 
the tinned portion above the line being indi 
cated by lighter shading. 
Ferrules made in this manner are very 
much lighter than any other style of ferrule 
known to the trade, making them much more 
convenient to ship and to handle, they are 
very much stronger for the reason that all 
tubing of the class from which these ferrules 
are made is tested to 500 pounds pressure be 
fore being shipped, and another and very im 
portant advantage is that there is no loss 
from breakage in dropping, cast metal fer 
rules being very apt to crack if dropped. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
In combination, with the iron pipe B, the 
flanged ferrule secured thereto by a packed 
joint, an offset 8, formed at the opposite end 
of the ferrule, a lead pipe fitting within the 
same, and a wiped joint securing the ferrule 
thereto, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES A. COTTER. 
- 
Witnesses: 
75 
G. W. BLACHINALL, Jr., 
W. S. PECK, 
o 
2 ? 
25 
35 
(To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs A. COTTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Water 
bury, in the county of New Haven and State. 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Plumbers Ferrules; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
wention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention has for its object to produce 
a novel article of the class known as plumb 
ers ferrules, i. e. a ferrule used by plumbers 
in making a connection between a lead pipe 
and an iron pipe, it being of course under 
stood that it is impossible to form either a 
wiped or a packed joint between lead pipe 
and iron pipe without the interposition of a 
ferrule made of some metal to which solder 
will adhere in making a wiped joint and 
which will not be affected by the pouring of 
molten lead in making a packed joint. Wari 
ous styles of ferrules have been used hereto 
fore for this purpose, the ferrule most com 
monly used however being one made of cast 
brass. 
My novel ferrule is especially adapted to 
take the place of cast brass ferrules, it being 
very much stronger, much lighter, non-por 
ous, and very much cheaper to produce. 
In the accompanying drawing forming part 
of this specification the figure is a sectional 
view illustrating the manner in which a sec 
tion of lead pipe is joined to a section of iron 
pipe by the use of my novel ferrule. , 
A denotes a section of lead pipe, B a sec 
tion of iron pipe which is provided with the 
usual socket 1 at its end, said socket termi 
nating in a shoulder 2, and C represents my 
novel ferrule which is a drawn, seamless, 
brass or copper tube having at its lower end a 
flange 3 which rests upon shoulder 2 in the 
socket in the iron pipe. In joining a lead 
ipe to an iron pipe it is necessary that two 
perfect joints be made, for the reason that it 
is impossible to pour molten lead againsta 
lead pipe without melting it. 
The ferrule is in practice connected to the 
45 p. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494513.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 494,513, 
W. STANLEY, Jr. 
ALTERNATING CURRENT METER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 28, 1893. 
I 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEKs; 
THE MORRIS PETERS co, PHOTcLTHo. washing To... 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 494,513, 
W. STANLEY, Jr. 
ALTERNATING CURRENT METER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 28, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
3. J 
Se2 A 
w 
INVENTOR 
WITNESSES: 
/6-4-fs/.2% 4.--C 
i? Zize C3 ATTORNEYs 
/teau %, 
NoRRs Peters co, Photo-Litho, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM STANLEY, JR, OF PITTSFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ALTERNATING - CURRENT METER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 494,513, dated March 28, 1893. 
Application filed August ll 1892, Serial No. 442,843, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM STANLEY, Jr., 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Pittsfield, in the county of Berkshire and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Electrical Me 
ters, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had to the drawings accom 
panying and forming a part of the same. 
My invention, in the best and most practi 
cable form of which I am at present aware, is 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the instru 
ment complete; Fig. 2 a horizontal section on 
the line a-ac of Fig.1, and Fig. 3 is a diagram 
illustrating the manner in which the instru 
ment is connected with the circuit in which 
the current is to be measured. 
This instrument I have designed and used 
as an alternating current Watt meter, for in 
dicating or recording the power conveyed 
through a circuit by the passing of any alter 
nating current at any pressure, or the rate at 
which energy is expended or work done by 
Such current. 
The constructive details of the instrument, 
from an understanding of which the nature 
of the invention and its principle or mode of 
Operation will be more readily comprehended, 
will be described by reference to the draw. 
lingS. 
Supported on a suitable base or stand is a 
coil or coils D which should have a high self 
induction, for which purpose it may be pro 
vided with a laminated iron core A, in order 
that the lag of the current in the coil when, 
as in practice, it is connected in a shunt to 
the circuit in which the current is to be meas 
lured, shall be as nearly as possible ninety de 
grees behind the electro-motive force. 
Between the poles of the core A there is a 
Copper cylinder E in which a number of lon 
gitudinal slots are formed. This cylinder 
projects out on one side beyond the polar faces 
of the core A and is supported on pivotal 
bearings so as to turn freely. The projecting 
portion of the cylinder E is inclosed by cir 
cular coils C, C, placed on opposite sides of 
the same and so that their magnetic axes 
pass through the cylinder at right angles to 
that of the coils D and core A. The spindle 
G upon which the copper cylinder is mounted 
is in gear with suitable registering or count 
ing train and dials H, and is loaded in the 55 
usual manner by a fan K or like device. 
The principle of construction and operation 
of the motive part of the instrument is simi 
lar to that of the induction motor invented 
by me and described in my application Serial 6o 
No. 428,950, filed April 13, 1892, in the follow 
ing essential particulars: The coils D and C 
constitute two independent field-producing 
circuits the currents in which differ by ap 
proximately a quarter phase or what is com- 55 
monly known as ninety degrees, so that at 
that instant of time when one field exhibits 
its maximum magnetic effect the other will 
be minimum. The longitudinal bars of the 
cylinder Econstitute the conductors of closed 7o 
circuits within the influence of both fields 
and, by reason of the displacement of the two 
fields when any bar is in the position of maxi 
mum inductive effect with reference to one 
field it is in the position of maximum torque 75 
in the other, and these conditions alternate 
with the result of maintaining the cylinder 
in rotation. 
In using this instrument as a meter the 
coils C are included in the circuit B in which 8o 
the current is to be measured, and the coils 
D, as above stated, in a shunt B, to the same. 
The lag in the coil Cowing to the absence of 
self-induction will be dependent mainly on 
the self-induction of the translating devices 85 
in circuit therewith. The velocity of rotation 
of the cylinder Ewill depend upon the strength 
of the current in the circuit of the coils D; 
upon that in the coils C, and on the differ 
ence in phase between the currents in the 9o 
two. If the electro-motive force in the Cir 
cuit is constant, the instrument Will therefore 
act as a Coulomb meter, and indicate the 
quantity of force or ampres delivered in a 
given time, while if the electro-motive force 95 
is variable it will, by reason of the fact that 
the strength of the current in coil D varies, 
act as a Joule meter, and indicate the work 
done by the current in a given time. As the 
velocity of rotation is dependent in part upon Ioo 
the difference of phase between the currents 
in the two coils or sets of coils C and D, the 
instrument will register only the effective 
coulombs or joules, and not merely apparent 
M 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
494,513 
current or energy. It may be stated that the 
instrument in order to work properly should 
be SO constructed or adjusted that the speed 
of rotation should always be well below that 
of synchronism. 
In confining the description of the inven 
tion herein to a particular form of apparatus, 
I do not wish to be understood as limiting 
myself to such form. In explanation it may 
be said that for the armature exemplified by 
the slotted cylinder E, I may use any other 
form with longitudinal conductors, and also 
that in lieu of the special disposition of field 
coils I may use any of the equivalent arrange 
ments now well known for securing the same 
relative displacement of the fields and arma 
ture coils. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In an alternating current meter, the com 
bination with two field-producing circuits of 
different self-induction, one adapted for con 
nection with the circuit in which the current 
is to be measured, the other in a shunt to said 
circuit, of rotating conductors forming cir 
cuits within the influence of both fields but 
Occupying different relative positions with re 
Spect to each, and registering devices con 
nected with said conductors, as set forth. 
2. In an alternating current meter, the com 
bination with two field-producing circuits of 
different self-induction, adapted respectively 
for connection in series with and in shunt to 
- 
o 
25 
35 
45 
the translating devices in the circuit in which 
the current is to be measured, of rotating or 
armature conductors forming closed circuits 
common to both fields but in relatively differ 
ent inductive positions in each, and a train 
of registering wheels and dials in gear with 
and operated by the said rotating conductors, 
as set forth. 
3. In an alternating current meter, the Com 
bination with a rotary spindle or shaft, a reg 
istering device operated thereby, and con 
ductors carried by the spindle and forming 
closed circuits with paths parallel to the axis 
of the spindle, of independent field coils or 
circuits of different self-induction acting on 
different portions of the said conductors, and 
having their magnetic axes at an angle, as 
set forth. 
4. The combination with the rotary spindle, 
the registering train in gear there with, and 
the bars or conductors E carried thereby and 
forming closed circuits, of the coil D and a 
core A presented to one end of the bars, and 
the circular coils C inclosing the other end 
and placed so that the magnetic axes of the 
two fields produced by the coils shall be at 
right angles. 
WILLIAM STANLEY, JR. 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. F. GAYLORD, 
PARKER. W. PAGE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494613.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 494,613, 
E. F. WILLIAMS, 
FASTENING FORDRESS SHIELDs, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Apr. 4, 1893. 
zz7. -4- 
 
4246; 
7-424, 
Z722'eza Zoz. 
Zsy 
-Z77 m.a. Z724/i7tars. 
W. ZZPezzzzzs 
Zigzzczzaz /Zzzo 7zey 
-/2sso. /2zzo77. ey. 
 
No Model.) 
No. 494,613 
E. F. WILLIAMS. 
FASTENING FOR DRESS SHIELDS, . 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 4, 1893. 
424. 
4.-6. 64-4 
. 
. . . 
Z77z77za Z27/2ZZzazzas, 
Zzzreze zor: 
th: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EMMA. F. WILLIAMS, OF RICHMOND, INDIANA. 
FASTENING FOR DRESS. SHIELDS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 494,613, dated April 4, 1898. 
Application filed April 27, 1892. Serial No. 430,846. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Rich 
mond, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Fastenings for Dress 
Shields; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention has relation to that class of 
fastenings used to connect garments or parts 
of garments temporarily, and its object is to 
provide an extremely simple device especially 
adapted removably to secure dress shields to 
dresses. 
To this end the invention consists in the 
novel form of the device substantially as here 
inafter described and particularly pointed out 
in the subjoined claim. 
In the drawings Figure 1 is a plan view of 
my improved device, showing in full lines the 
curved pin locked and in dotted lines the 
same unlocked. Fig. 2 is an end view in 
cross section showing the teeth or claws. Fig. 
3 is a view similar to Fig.1 of the under side 
of the device. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of 
my improved device. Fig. 5 is an enlarged 
vertical section. Fig. 6 is a plan view of a 
dress shield provided with my improved fas 
teners, the halves or flaps of said shield be 
ing separated and laid side by side, and Fig. 
7 is an inverted plan view of a portion of a 
dress shield with a fastener attached thereto. 
The body of my improved fastener consists 
of a single flatplate A formed at one end with 
three teeth or claws a a and b, said teeth C. a. 
extending outward from the side of plate A 
at an angle thereto, and said tooth b extend 
ing from the extreme end of said plate. 
Each of these teeth are curved from base to 
point. At the other end of the plate A, at 
one side thereof, is a keeper C, which maybe 
formed integral with said plate A, or may be 
suitably fastened thereto, and consists of a 
curved lip or plate, which preferably projects 
over the side of the plate A and has an open 
ing through it to receive the free end of the 
hook or pin B, the opposite end of which end 
Be it known that I, EMMA. F. WILLIAMS, a or pin is permanently secured to the plate A, 
aS Seen at n. 
A prime object, as above stated, of my in 
vention, is to cheapen the cost of fasteners, 
and therefore instead of having the hook or 
pin B extending slightly beyond the end of 
the body of the fastening, then coiled and ex 
tending laterally, which necessitates forming 
the keeper on an arm extending beyond the 
body of the keeper a distance corresponding 
with the amount of projection of the hook be 
yond the body with its opening parallel with 
the upper edge of the body, I so arrange the 
hook that its sides will be parallel with the 
lateral edges of the plate A, as shown, where 
by the opening through the keeper will bein 
the direction of the length of said body and 
the necessity for forming the same on an arm 
extending from the body, is thereby obviated. 
My novel fastener is permanently fastened 
to the dress shield D by inserting the claws 
a, a and b into the semi-circular edge of the 
half or flap d thereof and then bending them 
down against the same, the plate thereby en 
gaging but one side of said flap or half and 
the bent portion of the claws or teeth engag 
ing the opposite side thereof, and the dress 
shield provided with my improved device is 
secured to the dress by inserting the curved 
pins B in the dress sleeve one on each side of 
the arm and one under the arm immediately 
between them. By this device, three or more 
of which will be effective for each shield, the 
shield may be readily detached from one 
sleeve and attached to another sleeve, with 
much less trouble than with the common way 
of sewing them fast to the dress and one pair 
of shields is made to do service with several 
dresses instead of each dress requiring shields 
for itself. 
As will be readily seen I have provided a 
fastener which can be quickly and cheaply 
manufactured and is of extreme simplicity of 
construction. 
Having now described my invention, I 
claim 
The herein described fastener, consisting 
of a body part made of a single imperforate 
9o 
95 
O 
25 
45 
 
494,613 
flat plate A, formed at one end with curved said keeper, all substantially as shown and Io 
teeth C, C, and b, adapted to be inserted described. 
through and bent into engagement with the 
article to be fastened, and having at its other presence of two witnesses. 
5 end a keeper C projecting slightly over its 
side and having its opening extending in the 
direction of the length of said body, and a 
pin B having one end secured to said plate 
A and its opposite end adapted to engage 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
EMMA. F. WILLIAMS. 
Witnesses: 
W. I. LENNIS, 
TILLIAN R. CRAWFORD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494713.txt	(No Model.) 
C. EHLEN. 
SHIPPING WRAPPER FOR, WEHICLES, 
No. 494713, 
Patented Apr, 4, 1893. 
 
 
U A. 
 
A 22-a ZAZ777 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES EHLEN, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
NICHOLAS BIEDINGER, OF SAME PLACE. 
SHIPPING-WRAPPER FOR VEHICLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 494,713, dated April 4, 1893. 
Application filed December 12, 1892, Serial No. 454,896. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES EHLEN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Cincin 
nati, in the county of Hamilton and State of 
Ohio, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Shipping-Wrapper for Vehicles; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
The Subject of this invention is a device to 
Cover buggies and similar vehicles for the 
purpose of protecting them against dust, rain, 
or defacement during transit when they are 
sent, or shipped from the factories. Inas 
much as the useful life of such coversis very 
short and they are needed in great numbers, 
it is essential that they should be made cheap 
as to material and manner of construction, 
Without permitting however such reduced 
cost to detract from their practical value. At 
the present time such covers are made of mus 
lin or so-called 'cheese-cloth, pieces of which 
are cut to the proper shape, fitted over the 
vehicle and sewed together. Outside of the 
cost of this material, its cutting, fitting and 
sewing consumes time which is really of no 
value and adds nothing toward the finishing 
or completion of the manufactured article and 
may therefore be regarded as a loss of time 
and money by Such factories. To obviate all 
this, I have decided to construct a cover out 
of cheaper material and have selected paper, 
preferably Water-proof and of sufficient 
strength. It is cut out, shaped and connected 
in a manner which fits the vehicle and when 
put on, covers at once the larger part of the 
same, so that very little extra work is re 
quired to completely envelop the charge. 
These wrappers are made in differentsizes to 
fit different kinds of vehicles and sold and 
shipped folded and flatwise, whereby they 
take up very little room and when kept on 
hand form a very useful adjunct to carriage 
and similar manufacturing - establishments. 
In the following specification is found a full 
description of my invention, the same being 
also particularly pointed out in the claims at 
the end thereof and its construction illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which: 
Figure 1, shows the condition of the vehicle 55 
and the position of its parts when made ready 
for packing and shipment. Fig. 2, is a per 
spective view of the wrapper distented and 
ready to be put in position. Fig. 3, is a per 
spective view of a vehicle completely envel 
oped by a wrapper and the whole packed 
within a crate and ready for shipment. Fig. 
4, is a perspective view of the wrapper show 
ing its parts in the first stages when made 
ready for folding it down flat-wise. Fig. 5, 
shows in a similar view the wrapper com 
pletely folded down flat-wise, in which posi 
tion it is however susceptible of further re 
duction by being doubled up. 
At the outset, it is necessary to mention 
that buggies and similar vehicles, when ready 
for shipment, are collapsed in a manner to re 
duce their bulk and make them as compact 
as possible. For such purpose the wheels are 
taken off, (see Fig. 1,) the top 7, where the 
bows 8, of it connect to the so-called goose 
neck 9, at the sides of the seat is discon 
nected at this point and the whole swung 
down and forward so that the top rests be 
tween the back of the seat and the dashboard. 
In this position the parts are firmly held by a 
wooden crate 10, which surrounds the whole 
vehicle, the two being held in position and to 
each other by the ends of the axles 11, which 
pass through a part of the crate. The top is 
supported by a board 12, passing transversely 
across the crate and on which board the bows 
of the top rest. The parts (boards) of these 
crates are as a rule not so close together as to 
preclude rain and dust, or to protect the 
often finely finished surfaces from becoming 
scratched or otherwise defaced. This part of 
the protection is furnished by my improved 
paper shipping wrapper 13, which takes the 
place of the muslin-covers already spoken of 
and completely envelops the vehicle. When 
open as shown in Fig. 2, and ready to be used, 
it has a shape resembling somewhat a cube. 
One side is open to permit it to pass over the 
95 
90 
75 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
 
IOd 
2 
494,713 
with the present means for the same purpose 
and by being always on hand and furnished 
complete, forms a great convenience and ac 
commodation to manufacturers. Its dust-ex 
cluding capacity is better than if muslin were 
used, which latter however does not exclude 
rain and moisture like my wrapper when 
made of water-proof paper. 
Having described my invention, I claim as 
he W 
1. A shipping wrapper for vehicles when 
made of water-proof paper, being substan 
tially of cubical shape when distended and 
provided with the flaps 15, all as substantially 
shown and described. 
2. A shipping-wrapper for vehicles made of 
paper and of a shape substantially cubical 
when distended, flaps 15, provided on opposite 
sides and straps 17, with eye-lets secured to 
these flaps, all as substantially shown and de 
Scribed. 
3. A shipping wrapper for vehicles made of 
paper and of a shape substantially cubical 
when distended, flaps 15, on opposite sides, 
straps 17, slits 18, in said flaps through which 
straps 17, are passed, an enlarged part 19, of 
'said straps which remains inside of slit 18, to 
prevent the straps from slipping out and fur 
nishing sufficient surface for a glue-joint, all 
as substantially shown and described. 
4. A shipping wrapper for vehicles made of 
paper and of a shape substantially cubical 
when distended, flaps 15, provided on oppo 
site sides, straps 17, on these flaps and creases 
20, 21, on opposite sides as shown, to permit 
the whole wrapper to be collapsed and con 
veniently folded down flat-wise, all as sub 
stantially shown and described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
55 
65 
75 
CIARLES EIILEN. 
Witnesses: 
C. SPENGEL, 
ALFRED M. DAVIES, 
vehicle and its dimensions are such that it 
may be readily slipped down over the same. 
Two of the sides 14, are longer and form flaps 
15, which when turned inwardly, close the 
Only open part of the wrapper and complete 
the entire inclosure of the vehicle as it ap 
pears most plainly in Fig. 3. These flaps are 
held in such closed position by strings 16, 
passing through the eye-lets of straps 17, 
which are affixed to the flaps. These straps 
are best made of extra-strong paper, prefer 
ably tag-paper and stuck from the inside 
through slits 1S, cut into the flaps 15. That 
part of Straps 17, which remains on the inside 
of slits 18, is broadened as shown at 19, which 
prevents them from being pulled through the 
slit and also furnishes more body, strength 
and surface for the purpose of securing them 
to the flaps, which is best done with glue, 
which is applied to the broader part 19. 
For convenient storage and shipping these 
wrappers are collapsed and folded flatwise 
to a thickness equal only to the thickness 
of a layer of several sheets of paper. For 
this purpose the two sides between sides 
14, and opposite each other are provided 
with creases 20, 21, which permit these sides 
to bulge outwardly when sides 14, are folded 
inwardly. This will be more clearly under 
stood when consulting Fig. 4, where one of 
the sides 14, has been folded in already and 
the other partly so. Flaps 15, are simply 
folded down or doubled each upon its re 
spective side 14. This causes the sides with 
the creases in them to assume a triangular 
shape as shown at 22, in Fig. 5, and by dotted 
lines in Fig. 4. These triangular pieces are 
next folded in and down upon the previously 
folded parts as shown at 23, of Fig. 5, where 
upon the whole assumes a rectangular shape. 
From this the folded wrapper may be still 
further reduced by doubling the same up, 
upon itself as many times as is suitable and 
convenient. 
This wrapper is very cheap as compared 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494813.txt	(No Model,) 
No. 494,813, 
 
G. W. KING. 
LOADING OR, UNLOADING MACHINE, 
Sheets-Sheet . 
Patented Apr. 4, 1893. 
 
 
 
Witvesses; 
77 aeza Zoz 
(No Model.) 
G. W. KING, 
L0ADING OR UNLOADING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 494,813, 
Patented Apr. 4, 1893. 
es 
y - 
s 
 
 
 
W22zzesses A2%u. 
 
. 
S 
S 
R 
A722/67 for 
(No Model.). 
No. 494,813, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
G. W. KING, 
L0ADING OR UNLOADING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 4, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
 
. It 
 
 
Hill 
S.E. 
3 E 
assa 
2.) 
 
EE 
 
S SS 
(No Model.) 
G. W. KING, 
OADING OR, UNLOADING MACHINE. 
Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 494,813, 
Patented Apr. 4, 1893. 
R 
The massis pe"ERs co, Piratho, was HNitro.o. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 494,813, 
G. W. KING. 
L0ADING OR, UNLOADING MACHINE, 
Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
Patented Apr. 4, l893. 
: ia :- la 
ti-ij-i IF 
6 22 
Z72ezzzoz. 
% 4, 27. 
77ZZeas. 
s 
 
Eorris Peters co, Phloro-LTHo. washristc. 
(No Model.) 
G. W. KING, 
0ADING OR UNLOADING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 494,813, 
Patented Apr. 4, 1893. 
were seases 22, 
WSita 
s 
VVzeesses. 
a 
 
fire roaris firefs corkyo. aths, wishiker. . . 
(No Model.) 
No. 494,813. 
G. W. KING. 
I,0ADING OR, UNLOADING MACHINE, 
Sheets-Sheet 7. 
Patented Apr. 4, 1893. 
I Airl 
ii. Titia 
 
W227cesses. 
'-?hrou7. 
Z722/e72Zoz 
6-C7704-face /7Zzys. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. KING, OF MARION, OHIO. 
LOADING O R UNLOADNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 494,813, dated April 4, 1893. 
Application filed September 16, 1892, Serial No. 446,087, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. KING, a 
resident of Marion, in the county of Marion 
and State of Ohio, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Loading or Un 
loading Machines; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
loading or unloading machines-and more 
particularly to machines for loading heavy 
logs or other heavy articles on cars or unload 
ing them therefrom,-the object of the inven 
tion being to provide effectual mechanism 
whereby to swing the machine during the op 
eration of loading or unloading. 
A further object is to improve the construc 
tion and arrangement of loading or unloading 
machines. 
A further object is to provide a machine 
for loading or unloading logs, with simple 
and effectual devices whereby the grappling 
hooks which grasp the log or other heavy ar 
ticle, shall be lowered to the proper point for 
receiving said logs or other heavy article. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion and combinations and arrangements of 
parts as hereinafter set forth and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of the complete machine. 
Fig. 2 is a side view partly in section. Fig. 
3 is an end view partly in section. Fig. 4 is 
a plan view. Fig. 5 is a plan view of the 
truck and turntable. Fig. 6 is a sectional view 
on the line ac-ac of Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a plan 
view of a portion of the boom and the friction 
devices located thereon for feeding the hoist 
ing chain and the grappling devices carried 
thereby. Fig. 8 is a sectional view on the 
line -y of Fig. 10. Fig. 9 is a side eleva 
tion of the boom showing the feed devices for 
hoisting chain. Fig. 10 is an end view illus 
trating the frictional feeding devices for the 
hoisting chain, shown in Figs. 7, 8 and 9. 
A represents a truck frame, provided with 
a number of wheels a adapted to run on rails 
a',-which latter are located in proximity to 
the railroad track on which the flat cars to be 
loaded or unloaded, are located. On the truck 
frame A is a circular track b having a pe 
ripheral groove b' for the reception of the 
swinging' chain, as hereinafter explained, 
said groove being made rough by means of pro 
jections or teeth b', whereby to prevent said 
chain from slipping. Located and adapted 
to run on this circular track is a series of roll 
ers or wheels c, each having a flange c' to pro 
ject parallel with the inner face of the track,-- 
said rollers or wheels c being mounted in and 
supported by a circular frame c as shown 
most clearly in Figs. 1, 3 and 6. Located on 
the circular series of rollers or wheels C, is a 
ring don which the car B is supported, said 
car being adapted to carry the operating mech 
anism. A bracket d' is located on the truck 
frame A, preferably at or near its center, and 
projecting upwardly from this bracket is a 
pivot post d, which enters the bottom of the 
cab B. Thus it will be seen that the bottom 
of the car B and the ring d, together with the 
wheels or rollers c, and the circular track b 
constitute a turntable. 
Within the car B a steam engine C or 
other suitable motor, is located, and means 
for supplping power or motive force for said 
engine or motor are located within the car or 
. The engine C is adapted to drive a 
shaft e, on which a pinion e' is secured, said 
pinion being adapted to mesh with a gear 
wheel e carried by a shaft C, which latter 
preferably extends from one side of the cab 
to the other. The shaft C is driven in one di 
rection only. Mounted loosely on the shaft 
C preferably in proximity to its ends, are 
sprocket wheels E, E, and adjacent to said 
sprocket wheels, clutches F, F are located, 
whereby to cause the sprocket wheels to ro 
tate with the shaft C when desired. A bracket 
g is located in advance of the shaft C and in 
line with the sprocket wheel E, in which 
bracket a sprocket wheell, is located, as shown 
in Figs. 3 and 4. Beneath the sprocket wheel 
l, a sprocket wheel 2 is mounted in suitable 
brackets g depending from the bottom of the 
car or turntable. A sprocket wheel 3 is 
mounted is a bracket g located in advance of 
the sprocket wheel E', and beneath the 
sprocket wheel3 asprocket wheel 4 is mounted 
go 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
 
494,88 
hoisting chain, grappling hooks on tongs I are 
in brackets g, depending from the bottom 
attached, said grappling hooks or tongs being 
of the car or turntable. The brackets g are 
adapted to grasp a heavy log or other heavy 
each provided with ears g? between which 
Sprocket wheels 5, 6, are mounted. A bracket 
article. 
h is also mounted on a timber h projecting 
In the timbers i,j' comprising the boom G, 
forwardly from the car, as shown in Figs. 1 
at a point between the ends of said boom, a 
shaft k is located, on which a pulley k' is 
and 4, and in this bracket a sprocket wheel 7 
loosely mounted, said pulley having a deep 
is mounted. The bracket his adapted to 
groove kin its periphery. The pulley k' may 
have a sliding movement in ways hin the 
timber hand is yieldingly forced forward by 
be made in two parts m, n, as shown in Fig. 
a Spring I located behind it as shown in Fig. 
8, and the two parts bolted together. Mounted 
4. Over the sprocket wheels above men 
to rotate with the shaft k and have a sliding 
movement thereon, is a band or belt wheell 
tioned and about the circular track b, an end 
adapted to make frictional engagement with 
less chain E passes, as follows: From the 
Sprocket wheel E, the chain F passes over 
the pulley lc. The band wheel l carries a 
the wheel l, thence downwardly about the 
collaro having a cam face o', which is adapted 
to be engaged by the cam face o' of a clutch 
wheel 2, thence about the circular track b in 
the groove b' thereof.-thence about the 
collar o' mounted on the shaft le. A rod p is 
Sprocket wheel 4, thence upwardly over the 
connected at one end with a clutch collar o' 
Sprocket wheel 3, thence over the sprocket 
and at the other end to a lever p", which lat 
wheel E", thence over the sprocket wheel 5, 
ter is connected by a suitable rod with an 
thence over the sprocket wheel 7, thence over 
operating lever q in the car or cab. 
the sprocket wheel 6 and finally back to the 
A shaft r is mounted in suitable brackets 
r' on the boom G and has pivotally connected 
Sprocket wheel E. Thus it will be seen that 
When it is desired to swing the car B and the 
to it, the bifurcated end of a lever J, which is 
machinery which it carries, in one direction, 
maintained in proper position on the shaft r 
by means of adjustable collars S. Mounted 
the wheel E will be made to rotate with the 
shaft C by means of the adjacent clutch F, 
in the bifurcated lever J is a pulley Khaving 
and that when it is desired to swing it in the 
a narrow concave periphery adapted to enter 
the groove k of the pulley k', as shown in 
other direction the sprocket wheel E will be 
made to rotate with the shaft C by means of 
Fig. 10. The free end of the lever J is perfo 
the clutch F. When the machine is thus op 
rated for the accommodation of a rod L, which 
passes through it, said rod being supported 
erated, the necessary slack and freedom of 
action will be imparted to the swinging chain 
by means of a bracket L' secured to one of . 
F', by the yielding of the wheel 7. 
the timbers of the boom G. A spring Men 
By the construction and arrangement of 
circles the rod L and at its lower end bears 
parts as above described, very simple and ef 
against the lever J. The other end of the 
ficient devices are provided for swinging the 
spring Mbears against a washert retained on 
the rod L by means of a nutt. By the em 
car and the machinery which it carries in 
either direction, such swinging being accom 
ployment of the devices last above described, 
plished by power from the engine on said car, 
the pulley Kwill be normally retained within 
by simply manipulating the clutches F, F, to 
the groove of the pulley k', and will be made 
to bear with a yielding pressure upon the 
throw the sprocket wheels E, or E' into gear. 
hoisting chain Hpassing between the pulleys 
On the shaft Ca drum C' is loosely mounted 
k' K. The hoisting chain is wound upon the 
and carries a ratchet wheelf adapted to be 
engaged by a dogf', whereby to prevent retro 
drum u mounted loosely on the shaft C and 
passes forwardly between the pulleys K, k' 
grade movement of said drum. The drum C' 
and then over the pulley G' at the forward 
is operated by means of a cone friction C 
which locks the drum to the shaft and a spiral 
end of the boom and has secured to its free 
end, the tongs I as above explained. Motion 
clutch C8 working on the shaft crowds the 
will be imparted to the band wheel by means 
drum . on the friction. From this drum a 
chain or cable C is run through a sheave C, 
of a suitable strap which derives its motion 
from whence it passes through a sheave C, 
from a band wheel carried by the engine 
thence through a sheave C, thence down 
shaft. From this construction and arrange 
wardly through the center casting or pivot 
ment of parts it will be seen that the band 
post dand thence forwardly between pulleys 
wheell runs continuously. When it is desired 
to pull the cable or hoisting chain Hoff of the 
C, and at its end is made fast to any suitable 
drum it, the clutch collar o' will be operated, 
object. From this construction and arrange 
through the medium of the operating lever p' 
ment of parts it will be seen that when the 
drum C' is thrown into action and through 
and connecting rods, and made to move the 
clutch o, so as to crowd the band wheel l 
the medium of the chain or cable C, the ma 
against the pulley k", causing said pulley to 
chine will be moved endwise along the track. 
rotate, thus causing the hoisting chain or 
A boom G projects forwardly from the car, 
being properly braced by means of rods and 
cable H to be payed out or pulled off of the 
provided at its forward end with a depending 
drum L. When it is desired to wind the hoist 
pulley G, over which the hoisting chain. His ling chain on the drum u to elevate the tongs 
adapted to pass, and to the free end of the II, and the load carried thereby, the lever p' 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
 
494,813 
will be operated to move clutch collar o' away 
from the clutch collaro to stop the rotation 
of the pulley k'. The drum u is then made to 
rotate with the shaft C by means of a clutch C9. 
The machine is designed to travel length 
wise over a train of flat cars or logging cars 
and is passed from one car to another, always 
loading or unloading the car next to it, and in 
this way, operations can be continued until 
the entire train is loaded with logs or other 
articles, or the logs or other devices unloaded 
therefrom. In the meantime the train is 
moved back and forth, so as to keep the loader 
or unloader at the most convenient point along 
the track. 
The machine is very easy to manipulate, 
and is effectual in the performance of its 
functions. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination with a truck, a circular 
track located thereon and having a peripheral 
groove and a platform or turntable adapted 
to turn on said circular track, of a shaft mount 
led on the platform or turntable, a motor for 
driving said shaft, two sprocket wheels mount 
ed loosely on said shaft, a clutch for each 
sprocket wheel whereby to cause it to rotate 
with the shaft, a series of sprocket wheels 
mounted on the platform or turntable, one of 
said series of sprocket wheels being mounted 
in yielding bearings, and an endless chain 
passing over all of said sprocket wheels and 
through the peripheral groove of the circular 
track, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with a truck, a circular 
tracklocated thereon and having a peripheral 
groove and a platform or turntable adapted 
to run on said circular track, of a shaft mount 
ed on the platform or turntable, a motor for 
driving said shaft, two sprocket wheels mount 
ed loosely on said shaft, a clutch for each 
sprocket wheel whereby to cause it to rotate 
with the shaft at will, a pair of vertical 
sprocket wheels carried by the platform or 
turntable in advance of each sprocket wheel 
on the shaft, a series of horizontal sprocket 
wheels, and an endless cable adapted to pass 
over all of said sprocket wheels and through 
the peripheral groove of the circular track, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a hoisting machine the combination 
with a boom or traveling crane, a drum and 
means for rotating the same, of a hoisting 
chain adapted to be wound on said drum, and 
extending over a pulley at the forward end of 
the boom, hoisting chain, friction pulleys car 
ried by the boom and means for actuating said 
friction pulleys to cause them to feed the 
hoisting chain forward, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a platform a boom carried thereby, a 
drum and means for rotating the same, of a 
hoisting chain adapted to be wound on said 
drum, and extending over a pulley at the for 
15 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 
ward end of the boom, grappling hooks car 
ried by the forward end of said hoisting 
chain, two friction pulleyscarried by the boom, 
between which the hoisting chain passes, One 
of said pulleys having a deep groove into 
which the periphery of the other pulley en 
ters, and means for causing said pulleys to 
feed the hoisting chain forward, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a platform, a boom carried thereby, a 
hoisting chain, a drum for the reception of 
said hoisting chain, and an engine for driv 
ing said drum, of friction pulleys carried by 
said boom, between which the hoisting chain 
is adapted to pass and means for causing said 
friction pulleys to act positively on the hoist 
ing chain, whereby they will be caused to feed 
the hoisting chain forward, substantially as 
set forth. 
6. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a platform, a boom, a hoisting chain, a 
drum for the reception of said hoisting chain 
and an engine for driving said drum, of a 
grooved pulley mounted on the boom, means 
for throwing said pulley into and out of ac 
tion, and a friction wheel or pulley construct 
ed and arranged to bear on the hoisting chain 
with a yielding pressure, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a boom and a hoisting chain, of a grooved 
pulley carried by the boom, means for actuat 
ing said pulley, a lever carried by said boom 
in proximity to the grooved pulley, a friction 
wheel or pulley carried by said lever, and 
means connected with the lever to cause the 
friction wheel to bear on the hoisting chain 
with a yielding pressure, substantially as set 
forth. 
8. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a platform, a boom supported thereby, 
a hoisting chain and a drum for the reception 
of the hoisting chain and an engine for driv 
ing said drum, of a grooved pulley carried by 
said boom, means for driving said grooved 
pulley, a lever pivotally connected to the boom 
in proximity to said grooved pulley, a fric 
tion wheel or pulley carried by said lever, a 
rod supported in proximity to the free end of 
the lever and passing through the same and 
a spring encircling said rod to cause the fric 
tion wheel or pulley to bear on the hoisting 
chain with a yielding pressure, substantially 
as set forth. 
9. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a platform, a boom supported thereby, 
a hoisting chain and a drum for the reception 
of said hoisting chain and a motor for driv 
ing said drum, of a shaft mounted on the 
boom, a grooved pulley carried by said shaft, 
a band wheel carried by the shaft, a clutch. 
on the shaft adapted to slide said band wheel 
into and out of contact with the pulley, a rod 
connected with said clutch at one end and at 
the other end to a lever pivotally connected 
to the boom in proximity to the platform, all 
75 
95 
CO 
to 
I I5 
120 
I 25 
4. 
494,813 
35 
40 
45 
other rod pivotally connected to the last men 
tioned lever, and an operating lever carried 
by the platform, whereby to operate the clutch 
and a friction wheel or pulley adapted to nor 
mally bear on the hoisting chain which passes 
between said pulleys, substantially as set 
forth. 
10. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
With a platform, a boom supported thereby, a 
hoisting chain, a drum for the reception of 
the hoisting chain, an engine and an engine 
shaft, of friction pulleys carried by the boom, 
between which the hoisting chain is adapted 
to pass, a band wheel carried by the shaft of 
one of said friction pulleys, a band wheel car 
ried by the engine shaft and a band connect 
ing said band wheels, a clutch on the shaft of 
the band wheeland friction pulley on the boom 
and means for operating said clutch to force 
the band wheel in engagement with the pull 
ley, substantially as set forth. 
11. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a shaft, a drum carried thereby, and 
means for causing said drum to rotate with 
the shaft, of a series of sheaves and a cable 
wound upon said drum and passing through 
said sheaves, and adapted to be attached at 
its free end to an object independent of the 
machine, substantially as set forth. 
12. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a shaft, a drum mounted on said shaft, 
means for driving the shaft and means for 
causing the drum to rotate with the shaft, of 
a series of sheaves, a hollow post supporting 
the machine and a cable wound upon Said 
drum and passing through said sheaves and 
hollow post and adapted to be attached to an 
object independent of the machine, substan 
tially as set forth. 
13. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a shaft, a drum mounted on said shaft 
and means for rotating said shaft, of a fric 
tion device, a clutch for forcing said drum 
into engagement with the friction device, a 
Series of sheaves and a cable Wound upon 
said drum and passing through said sheaves, 
said cable being adapted to be attached to all 
object independent of the machine, substan 
tially as set forth. 
14. In a hoisting machine, the combination 
with a shaft, a drum mounted on said shaft, 
means for rotating said shaft, and means for 
causing the drum to rotate with the shaft, of 
a series of sheaves, a hollow post supporting 
the machine, pulleys mounted in proximity 
: to said hollow post and a cable Wound upon 
said drum and extending through said sheaves 
and the hollow post and between said pulleys, 
the free end of said cable being adapted to 
be secured to an object independent of the 
machine, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE W. KING. 
JOHN A. WOLFORD, 
R. W. TILTON, 
O 
5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US494913.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 494,913. 
 
R. W. BOOTH. 
LAWN TENNIS FORK, 
Patented Apr. 4, 1893. 
311-uc44 tot 
Weav/2 . Asooz// 
33 --2) &letovic A. k) 21 
 
The Nortsis reters to Photo-itTK. WASHINGTor. - c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
RALPH. W. BOOTH, OF NEW BRUNSWICK, NEW JERSEY. 
AWNTENNIS FORK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 494,918, dated April 4, 1893. 
Application filed March 28, 1892, Serial No. 426,829, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whon, it naty concern: 
Beit known that I, RALPH. W. BOOTH, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at New 
Brunswick, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Lawn-Ten 
nis Forks; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of this device. 
Fig. 2 is a like view of a modification of it. 
This invention belongs to that class of de 
vices known as tennis forks, the use of which 
is to keep the central part of the net in posi 
tion during the game, and the novelty con 
sists in the structure of the device, and in 
the device as a whole; all as will now be more 
fully described, as well as pointed out in the 
claims. 
Heretofore, devices of the general character 
have been made which consisted of a wire or 
rod so bent that one part was a little longer 
than the other; the longer part being pointed 
and adapted to be thrust into the ground to 
hold it in place. But this kind of fork would 
turn about and get tangled in the net; nor 
was it always easy to keep this kind of a fork 
in the ground so that it should not have a 
tendency to sway or lean to the one side or 
the other. 
My invention has for its object to provide a 
lower end for entering the ground that can be 
easily thrust home to a definite distance; a 
pair of tines that will prevent any side or 
otherwise movement; to so connect the times 
that they shall not flare apart; in a word, to 
produce a tennisfork of such shape and struct 
ure that it should always be adapted to have 
a firm position when in the ground; to be at 
once strong, durable cheap and ornamental 
and adapted for easy handling, all as I will 
now more in detail proceed to explain as well 
as point out in the appended claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, A, denotes 
the lawn tennis fork. The portion that comes 
over the net, which is bent at, b, is of metal, 
which may be of any form in cross section 
but preferably round as a wire rod, one part, 
b', of which is free ended, but the other, b, is 
extended beyond the part, b, and at its end 
is screwed, headed or otherwise securely fixed 
in the center of the arch, c. This arch is of 
metal and preferably flat, but its lower ex 
tended ends or tines, c, are flattened and 
twisted or bent at right angles to the arch, 
and are sharpened at the points for easy in 
sertion into the ground. This shape of arch 
and tine gives a peculiar strength and rigid 
ity to the tines; but to insure their mutual 
relation to each other, I use a brace, d, just 
above the point where the arch ends and the 
tines begin. This brace is a piece of flat or 
other shaped metal of suitable length hori 
Zontally placed and properly secured at its 
ends to the arch, as now illustrated, and this 
is done by bending the ends of the brace and 
fastening them to the arch by headed bolts, e. 
But the attachment can be made in any suit 
able manner or way the mechanic chooses to 
employ. As thus made, the brace will not 
only hold the tines firmly in relative position, 
but will also answer as a guide to regulate the 
distance the tines are to be forced into the 
ground. The arch will not in the least inter 
fere with the lower edge of the net. Prefer 
ably, the tines should be in a plane with por 
tions, b', and, b, or, b, and the bent top, for 
this structure seems to give the best results. 
The method of the application of the net to 
the fork is well known to tennis players and 
need not be dwelt upon. But in the modifi 
cation shown in Fig. 2, the top edge of the net 
can be brought under the short bend, b, of the 
device; and it may be found desirable to make 
this bend a sort of spring to clamp the edge 
of the net between the bend and main body 
of the device. It is also desirable to bend the 
free end of it so as to project in toward and 
then extend away from the longer arm, as by 
forming it into an eye b', which will facilitate 
the entry of the net between it and the longer 
arm when the shorter arm is to be utilized as 
a clamp. 
What I claim is 
1. In a lawn tennis fork, the combination 
with an arched base or support, of a rod se. 
cured thereto, and a flat base secured hori 
Zontally between the ends of the arch above 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
 
2 
494,913 
the points to limit the distance the ends may above the twisted portions of the ends, sub 
penetrate the soil, substantially as set forth. stantially as set forth. 
2. In a lawn tennis fork, the combination 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
with an arched base or support, of a rod rig- presence of two witnesses. 
5 idly secured thereto, the ends of the arch be- 
ing sharpened and twisted to occupy substan- 
tially the same plane as the arch, and a brace 
secured to the inner portions of the arch just 
- 
A. T. LANDMESSER, 
HENRY STEVENS. 
Witnesses: 
RAILPH. W. BOOTH. 
d 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495013.txt	(No Model,) 
N. BRY ANT. 
No. 495,013, 
FEED REGULATOR FOR PAPER MACHINES 
- 
Patented Apr, ll, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
N N 
N N N 
N N Nys 
/2, 2. 
g 
2.2.4 
-z-- (-kuti asses 
7ewt., G. -64 eigl, 
awa, 4%r-f CC, 
see C22- 
sy4. &vkovo -82e24? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NOAH BRYANT, OF OTSEGO, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO JACOB 
EIOEK, OF SAME PLACE, AND GEORGE E. BARDEEN, OF KALAMAZOO, 
MICHIGAN. 
FEED-REGULATOR FOR PAPER-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,013, dated April 11, 1893. 
Application filed April 11, 1892, Serial No. 428,603. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, NOAHBRYANT, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Otsego, coun 
ty of Allegan, State of Michigan, have in 
5 vented a new and useful Feed-Regulator for 
Paper-Machines, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention has for its object to produce 
an automatic stuff' feed regulator for paper 
Io machines, in which the condition of the stuff, 
in connection with a governor, automatically 
regulates the feed of the stuff' to the paper 
machine, so as to produce paper of a uniform 
Weight and thickness; all as more particu 
I5 larly described below. In order to accom 
plish this result, when the stuff is too thin, 
more of it in volume must be fed to the paper 
machine, and consequently when too thick, 
less of the stuff' in volume must be fed; 
20 from the fact that the stuff is composed 
of pulp and water and water will not make 
paper. 
The invention in general consists of a re 
ceiving tank, into which the stuff is pumped 
25 or delivered, said tank being provided with 
a feed-gate, a revoluble wheel, which is re 
volved by the stuff flowing on to it from the 
feed-gate, and a governor operatively con 
nected with said wheeland feed-gate, whereby 
3o the speed at which the wheel revolves con 
trols the distance the gate is open. 
In the drawings forming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a front elevation, looking 
from a point at the right of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is 
35 a section on line 3-3 in Fig. 1, looking from 
a point at the left; and Fig. 3 shows details 
from Fig. 1, hereinafter described. 
Referring to the lettered parts of the draw 
ings, A represents the receiving tank, into 
4o which the stuff' is delivered from the source 
of its production, usually by a pump em 
ployed for the purpose. The means for pro 
ducing the stuff' and the pump for deliv 
ering it into the receiving tank, A, are not 
45 here shown, since they form no part of this 
invention, and since it matters not how the 
stuff is delivered into said tank. 
The receiving tank, A, is provided with a 
 
55 
delivery opening, c, which opening is opened 
and closed by the sliding gate e. At B is an 
inclined spout, leading outward from the gate 
e. At the free end of this spout is a revolu 
ble wheel, D, having buckets to receive the 
flowing stuff, L., Fig. 2, which stuff pro 
pels the wheel, on the principle of a water 
wheel. To the shaft, E, of the wheel, D, is 
gear-connected a ball governor, F, as in Fig. 
1. The gate is provided with a reciprocating 
rod, H, having sliding bearings in the side of 
the receiving tank A. A reciprocating rod, 
J, is connected at one end to the governor, the 
same having a swiveled connection with the 
ends of the governor arms at v, Fig. 3. Con 
nection is made between the rod J, of the 
governor, and the rod H, of the gate, by means 
of a lever, G, pivotally attached at it to said 
rods, said lever being fulcrumed between its 
two ends at S, to the lower end of the pendent 
support, I. 
So far as the particular means here shown 
for operatively connecting the wheel D and 
the gate e with the governor, F, and also the 
construction of the governor, are concerned; 
any other suitable construction and arrange 
ment may be employed which will produce 
the automatic regulation of the gate, as set 
forth in the description of the operation. It 
will, of course, be understood that the stuff, 
L, after leaving the wheel, D, is conveyed to 
the paper machine, said machine and the 
means for conveying the stuff' not being 
here shown. 
In the operation, supposing the receiving 
tank, A, to be filled with stuff' of a given 
thickness or density, and the gate to be open 
sufficiently far to allow such a volume of the 
stuff' to flow on to the wheel D, as will 
make paper of a given heft or thickness. So 
long as this state of affairs exists the paper is 
uniform and no automatic regulation of the 
feed is needed, but the stuff' being deliv 
ered into the receiving tank is not always of 
uniform density, and when it is too thin, that 
is, contains too much water, it will flow faster 
on to the wheel, causing said wheel to revolve 
faster, consequently running the governor 
- 
75 
85 
95 
495,013. 
faster, causing the centrifugal force to raise 
and which I prefer to use, it will of course be 
seen that said spout might be dispensed with 25 
the governor balls, which action would open 
the gate e farther, allowing a greater volume 
and the wheel located beneath said opening. . 
. 
of the stuff to flow on to the wheel; thus 
Having thus described my invention, what 
supplying to the rollers the required amount 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
of pulp, which the thin stuff' did not con 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
tain, to preserve the uniform thickness or 
An automatic stuff' feed regulator, com 
weight of the paper. On the other hand, 
prising a stuff receiving tank having a de 
livery opening and an adjustable gate to said 
when the stuff' in the receiving tank is too 
thick, it will flow through the gate slower, 
opening, a revoluble wheel adapted to be run 
causing the wheel D to run slower, the gov 
by the stuff flowing from said tank, a gov 
ernor balls to fall and the gate to partially kernor, and means for connecting said governor 
close; thus permitting a less volume of the 
with the wheel and gate; whereby said gate 
thick stuff' to be fed through the gate; thus 
will rise when the flowing stuff is toothin 
always automatically controlling the volume 
and will lower when it is too thick; substan 
of stuff' fed through the gate in accordance 
In testimouy to the foregoing I have here 
with its degree of density. This will be more 
readily understood by taking into considera 
unto subscribed my name in-the presence of 
tion the fact that the water merely forms an 
element in the stuff' to make it in a liquid 
form, so that it will flow, and forms no ele 
ment of the manufactured paper. 
While I have shown an inclined spout, B, i. 
leading from the delivery opening of the tank, 
H. H. MARTINDALE, 
W. C. EDSELL. 
is tially as set forth. . 
NOAH BRYANT. 
Witnesses: 
3O 
two witnesses. 
- 
- - 
- 
- 
. 
. 
35 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495113.txt	(No Model.) 
H. J. KELLOGG. 
AWNING FRAME 
No. 49513, 
Patented Apr. 11, 1893. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY J. KELLOGG, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
AWN N G, FRAME. 
SPECIFlCATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,113, dated April 11, 1893. 
Application filed October 15, 1892, 
Serial No. 448,965. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY J. KELLOGG, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new 
Improvement in Awning-Frames; and I do 
hereby declare the following, when taken in 
connection with accompanying drawings and 
the letters of reference marked thereon, to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
and which said drawings constitute part of 
this specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a plan or top view of the frame; 
Fig. 2, a front view of the same; Fig. 3, a plan 
of one side piece A, detached; Fig. 4, a plan of 
the other side piece B, detached; Fig. 5, a plan 
of one part of the front connecting bar de 
tached; Fig. 6, a plan of the other part of the 
front connecting bar detached; Fig. 7, a dia 
gram illustrating the operation of the inven 
tion. Fig. 8, represents the frame folded; 
Fig. 9, a modification of the invention. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in frames for awnings for windows, and in 
which the frame is composed of two sides 
adapted for adjustable attachment to the win 
dow jamb, and extending outward, the two 
sides connected across the front, and so that 
the top of the awning may be secured to the 
front bar, and the sides of the awning to the 
side bars, the object of the invention being 
the construction of such a frame so that it 
may be readily adjusted to window or door 
Openings, of Varying widths, but so that the 
front portion of the frame will always attain 
a central position with relation to its sides, 
that is to say, so that throwing the two sides 
apart, or drawing them together, the move 
ment of the two must necessarily be uniform, 
or, in other Words, so that if oneside be thrown 
outward or drawn inward, the other side must 
be correspondingly thrown out or drawn in 
ward, and the invention consists in the con 
struction as hereinafter described, and par 
ticularly recited in the claims. 
A, represents one side-piece of the frame, 
and B, the other side piece. At their inner 
ends these pieces are constructed with an eye 
C, by which the sides may be supported upon 
the usual vertical rods, and so as to be ad 
justable thereon, or with any suitable con 
nection whereby they may be secured to the 
jambs of the opening to which the awning is 
to be applied, and so that the side-pieces may 
be raised into a vertical position when the 
awning is drawn upward, or turned down in 
a horizontal position for the dropping of the 
awning, and as usual in this class of awning 
frames. The front bar of the awning is com 
posed of two parts D and E, see Figs. 5 and 6. 
These parts are preferably curved at one end, 
as shown, and the side pieces at their Outer 
end are curved accordingly. The side-piece 
A, is jointed by one end to the extreme end 
of the part ID, of the front bar, as at F, but 
this joint is distant from the extreme end of 
the side piece. The other end of the part D, 
is jointed to the extreme end of the other side 
piece B, as at G. The other part E, of the 
front bar is jointed by one end to the side 
piece B, as at H, but at a point distant from 
the extreme end of the side piece B, the same 
as the connection between the part D, and the 
side-piece A, and the other end of the part E, 
is jointed to the other side piece A, at its ex 
treme end, as at I, the parts D and E being 
arranged the one above the other, and prefer 
ably with the side-pieces between them, as 
shown. 
The method shown and described of hing 
ing the two parts D, and E of the front bar 
to the side pieces, causes them to serve as 
connections between the two side-pieces, so 
that the movement of one of the side-pieces 
will be, through the said parts of the front 
bar, communicated to the other side piece, 
but in opposite directions. 
An illustration of this operation is repre 
sented in the diagram Fig. 7, in which the 
same letters indicate corresponding parts, 
but the parts D and E, are there represented 
as in straight lines crossing each other, the 
points of connection or hinging between the 
parts being the same. As represented in 
solid lines in this diagram Fig. 7, the side 
pieces AB, are parallel with each other, and as 
seen in Fig.1. Now if one of the side pieces 
A, be thrown outward, as represented in 
broken lines, the parts D and E of the con 
necting or front bar through their hinged 
connections, communicate the movement of 
the side pieces A, to the opposite side piece 
B, causing that to be thrown outward in like 
manner. A reverse movement of one of the 
side pieces will produce a like reverse move 
8. 
95 
O 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
495,113 
one part hinged by one end to one side piece 
at the extreme end of that side piece, and to 
the other side piece at a point distant from 
its end, and the other part of the front bar 
hinged by one end to the one side piece dis 
tant from its end, and to the extreme end of 
the other side piece. 
I claim 
1. The herein described awning-frame, con 
sisting of two side-pieces A B, adapted at 
their inner ends for attachment to the jambs 
of the opening, the other ends connected by 
a bar formed in two parts DE, the one part 
D, hinged by one end to the extreme outer 
end of the side B, and the other end of the said 
part D, hinged to the other side A, at a point 
distant from its extreme outer end, and the 
other part E, hinged by one end to the side 
B, at a point distant from its extreme outer 
end, and hinged by its other end to the ex 
treme outer end of the side A, the points of 
connection for the two parts with the respect 
ive sides being equidistant, substantially as 
described. 
2. An awning-frame consisting of two sides 
A B, adapted at their inner ends for attach 
ment to the jambs of the opening, their outer 
ends curved toward each other, combined 
with a connecting bar at their outer ends, the 
said bar constructed in two parts D E, the 
said part D, curved at One end and hinged 
by that curved end to the side piece A, at a 
point distant from the extreme end of the 
said side piece, A, and hinged by its other 
end to the extreme end of the other side piece 
B, and the other part E curved at one end 
and hinged by that curved end to the side B, 
at a point distant from the extreme end of 
the said side piece B, and by its other end 
hinged to the extreme end of the other side 
piece A, the points of connection of the said 
two parts with the said two side-pieces being 
equidistant, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
HENRY J. KELLOGG. 
Witnesses: 
FRED C. EARLE, 
LILLIAN D. KELSEY. 
75 
95 
ment of the other. The result of this is that 
the two side pieces will always stand in the 
Same relation to the front bar. The two 
parts of the front bar arranged so that their 
lines of force cross each other as represented 
in the diagram Fig. 7, causes them to operate 
as braces between the two side bars, to pre 
Vent lateral Swinging movement of the frame, 
which would not be the case if they were 
both hinged at a single joint to the same con 
necting bar at the front. The frame is there 
fore substantially as strong, so far as lateral 
Strain upon the frame is concerned, as if it 
Were made in a continuous piece, and the 
front bar of a width corresponding to the 
Width of the opening, and as in the more 
general construction of this class of awning 
frames where the side pieces and the front 
bar are made integral. The ends of the side 
pieces and connecting ends of the parts of 
the front bar are curved, so as to bring them 
Cne substantially over the other, that they 
may Occupy the same pocket in the awning, 
Or less Space than would be required were 
they straight, as represented in the diagram 
Fig. 7. This construction permits the frame 
to be folded, as seen in Fig. 8, convenient for 
Storage or transportation, and the construc 
tion permits the production of the awning 
frames as an article of manufacture, irre 
Spective of the width of the opening to 
Which they are to be applied, the frames be 
ing readily adjustable to various widths of 
Opening. 
While preferring to make the connection 
by the two parts as described, and curving 
the ends so as to cause the two bars to lie the 
One OVer the other, the connections between 
the two sides may be straight, as represented 
in the diagram Fig. 7, with a telescopic rod 
connecting the extreme ends of the side 
pieces, as seen in Fig. 9. The result of this 
construction will be the same as that first de 
scribed, so far as the equal or like adjust 
ment of the two sides with relation to the 
front bar is concerned, or the parts of the front 
bar may be straight without such telescopic 
bar connection across the front, and accom 
plish a good result, the essential feature of 
the invention being the hinging of the two 
parts of the front bar to the side pieces, the 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495214.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 495,214, 
F. ARMSTRONG. 
DIE STOCK, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 11, 1893. 
no is 32. 
U HHH 
run, 
NAVA-2 
- 
 
  
 
 
  
(No Model.) 
No. 495,214. 
 
F. ARMSTRONG. 
DIE STOCK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 11, 1893. 
INVENTOR 
day, Au?4ad 
A 21-27- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK ARMSTRONG, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
D. E. STOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,214, dated April 11, 1893. 
Application filed March 2l 1892, Serial No. 425,730. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern. 
die stock, which may be of any ordinary con 
Be it known that I, FRANK ARMSTRONG, a 
struction and adapted to contain dies of any 
citizen of the United States, residing atBridge 
usual form, consists of the base or body por- 55 
port, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
tion 1 having handle sockets 2 in its ends for 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
the reception of the usual handles which are 
useful Improvements in Die-Stocks; and I do 
shown at Fig. 5 as denoted by 3. The center 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
of the die stock is open for the reception of 
and exact description of the invention, such 
the pipe and is provided with a tubular ex- 6o 
tension or sleeve 4 whereby the pipe is guided 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
toward the threading dies 5 which appear at 
This invention relates to certain novel and 
Figs.1 and 5. Upon the base of the die stock 
useful improvements in die stocks, but more 
are formed opposing shoulders 6, and upon 
particularly to an attachment for use in con 
the tubular extension 4 are cast a pair of lugs 65 
nection with die stocks and the like whereby 7 for the purpose presently to be explained. 
their ease of operation in certain situations is 
The screws 8 and 9, which appear at the bot 
enhanced. The die stock as ordinarily made 
tom of Fig. 2, are designed to adjust and se 
is provided with two or more outwardly ex 
cure the dies, but, as heretofore stated, this 
tended handles by means of which the stock 
construction is immaterial and forms no part 7o 
is turned around the pipe to be threaded, and 
of my present invention. 
where space permits, this is the simplest and 
The ratchet attachment which is adapted 
most satisfactory means for operating the tool. 
to fit upon and co-operate with the stock just 
It sometimes happens, however, that the pipe 
described, consists primarily of a ring or sleeve 
10 provided on its lower edge with two pairs 75 
to be threaded is so situated that space for 
the free sweep of the handles cannot be had. 
of legs 11, which legs seat against the shoulder 
6 when the ring is in position. This ring is 
In such a case as this a ratchet stock is usu 
ally employed when it is obtainable. 
also provided upon its periphery with ratchet 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
teeth 12, and it is also provided with lugs 13 
for use in connection with ordinary die stocks, 
which are intended to co-operate with the ex- 8o 
a ratchet handle of novel construction, which 
ternal lugs 7 upon the tubular extension to 
can be readily attached to or disconnected 
hold the sleeve 10 in firm engagement with 
from the stock, thereby to all intents and pur 
said extension. To prevent the sleeve 10 from 
poses making each stock answer the purpose 
rising upon the tubular extension, I provide 
a locking device which preferably consists of 85 
of two different tools; and with these ends in 
view my invention consists and resides in the 
a set Screw 14 insertible into a threaded seat 
construction and the several combinations 
in one of the lugs 7. It will be understood 
of co-operating elements presently to be de 
from the foregoing description that when in 
position, the sleeve 10 to all intents and pur 
scribed and then recited in the claims. 
poses becomes a part of the tubular extension 
In order that those skilled in the art to which 
myinvention appertains mayfully understand 
on the stock. 
its construction and method of operation I 
For the purpose of turning the sleeve and 
stock I provide a ring 14 made in two sec 
will describe the same in detail, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings which 
tions fastened together by pins or rivets 15, 
form a part of this specification, and in which, 
which surrounds the sleeve 10 and incloses 
Figure 1, is a plan view of a die stock hav 
and is guided upon the teeth 12, which, latter, 
ing attached thereto the ratchet handle; Fig. 
as shown by the dotted lines at Fig. 4, project 
2, a side elevation; Fig. 3, a detail side eleva 
beyond the inside line of the ring. To this 
ring is attached, or it may be formed integral 
tion of the ratchet ring; Fig. 4, a horizontal 
section upon the line -y of Fig. 2, the die 
therewith, a shank 16 provided with a socket 
stock being omitted; Fig. 5, a plan view of the 
17 for the insertion of a handle. Within this 
shank is pivoted a double-faced pawl 18, the 
die stock with the ratchet attachment re 
face of which behind the pivot is angular, and 
moved. 
As shown more particularly in Fig. 5 the 
is engaged by an oblique-faced spring-actu 
95 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
495,214 
connected toandadapted to operate the sleeve, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination with the stock having 
a tubular extension and provided with op 
posed pairs of abutment shoulders, of the 
sleeve 10 having legs 11 and ratchet teeth 12, 
the two-part ring 14 surrounding the ratchet 
teeth, the pivoted double-faced pawl adapted 
to co-operate with the ratchetteeth, and a suit 
able handle for the operation of ring 14. 
3. The combination with the stock having 
a tubular extension provided with external 
lugs 7, of the sleeve 10 having lugs 13 and 
teeth 12, the two-part ring 14 surrounding the 
sleeve and ratchet teeth, a double-faced pawl 
carried by the ring, a spring plunger for en 
gagement with the pawl, and a suitable han 
dle, all arranged substantially as described. 
4. The combination with the stock having 
a tubular extension provided with lugs 7, of 
the sleeve 10 having legs 11, ratchet teeth 12, 
and projecting lugs 13, the two-part ring 14 
surrounding the sleeve and inclosing the 
teeth, the double-faced spring-actuated pawl 
18, and a suitable handle, the parts being com 
bined and adapted to operate substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
. 
FRANK ARMSTRONG. 
35 
40 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
S. H. HuBBARD, 
A. J. TANNER. 
O 
ated stud 19, whereby either face of the pawl, 
as may be required, is held against the ratchet 
teeth 12 upon the sleeve. To shift this pawl 
it is only necessary to depress the outwardly 
extending-end which projects, as at a, beyond 
the exterior of the ring, until the angular face 
of the pawl passes the face 19, when said stud 
will act on the pawl in the reverse direction 
and the ratchet will be changed from a right 
hand to a left hand, or the reverse, as the case 
may be. 
When a ratchet stock is required to be used 
the handles are detached from the ordinary 
stock and the ratchet sleeve slipped over the 
tubular extension and there secured by means 
of the set screw 14. As heretofore stated, the 
engagement of the legs 11 against the shoul 
ders 6 supplemented by the engagement of 
the lugs 13 with the lugs 7 securely hold the 
two co-operating parts in position. Then, by 
a vibratory movement of the handle on the 
ratchet ring, the sleeve and stock may be 
turned intermittently until the threading of 
the pipe is complete. Then by reversing the 
position of the pawl the stock may be in th 
same manner removed from the pipe. 
I claim 
1. The combination with the stock having 
thereon the tubular extension and having also 
abutment shoulders, of the sleeve provided 
with ratchet teeth and having legs for abut 
ment against the shoulders, and the ratchet 
ring provided with a handle and with a pawl 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495314.txt	(No. Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
F. DOELLBOR. 
MACHINE FOR TURNING PEARL OR OTHER BUTTONs, 
No. 495,314, 
Patened Apr. 11, 1893. 
III 
is 
E 
4 
A. A. 
C A. 7. 7. s Yes 
Z E 
 
 
II NIH slas 
 
 
 
 
  
  
I 
six-cy. 
Talable 
ATTORNEY. 
if 
t 
IIHs E 
WITNESSES: NSE 
-6-0-2424. 
s 
N s 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINE FOR TURNING PEARL, OR OTHER BUTTONS, 
F. DOELLBOR, 
No. 495,314, 
Patented Apr. 11, 1893. 
S  
 
 
H 1.ms 
HI13 II 
I. S. I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK DOELL BOR, OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
MACHINE FOR TURNING PEARL OR OTHER BUTTONS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,814, dated April 11, 1893. 
Application filed March 3, 1892, Serial No. 423,591, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FREDERICK DOELLBOR, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Machines for Turning Pearl or 
other Buttons, which improvement is fully 
set forth in the following specification and 
accompanying drawings. 
Myinvention consists of a machine for turn 
ing pearl or other buttons, the same embody 
ing a novel chuck for holding the blank, means 
for opening the chuck and releasing the but 
ton. 
It also consists of a tool or cutter of novel 
construction and adjustment, and other fea 
tures as will be hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
machine for turning pearl and other buttons, 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 represents 
a longitudinal section thereof. Fig. 3 repre 
sents side and end views of one member of a 
chuck employed. Fig. 4 represents a side 
elevation of the tool or cutter employed. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings: A designates 
the frame of the machine on which is mount 
ed the hollow mandrel B, the latter having 
loose and fixed pulleys C for evident purposes. 
Within the mandrel is the sliding tubular 
stem D, the forward end of which carries the 
split or expansible and contractible head E, 
which is inclosed by the head F attached to 
the corresponding end of the mandrel B, said 
heads E and F constituting a chuck. The 
outer face of the head E and the inner face 
of the head F are angular, so that they may 
rotate together when so required, and said 
faces are also made conical or tapering, so that 
when the head E recedes from the head F, 
the former is free from contact with the lat 
ter, and so is permitted to expand in order to 
release the button or button head previously 
held by the chuck, as will be hereinafter more 
fully explained, it being noticed that the for 
ward end of the head E has a recess G there 
in to receive the blank from which the button 
or button head is formed. 
Within the stem D is a stationary spindle 
or throw-off H, the same also passing through 
the head Eso as to approach the recess G, 
and thus strike the back of the button head 
when so required The spindle H is held at 
the end opposite to the recess G by means of 
an arm J on the frame A, and nuts K on the 
spindle on opposite sides of said arm, thus 
also providing means for setting or adjusting 
the spindle relatively to the recess G. 
To the end of the stem D, adjacent to the 
arm J is screwed or otherwise firmly attached 
a circular rack L, with which engages the 
toothed segment M, the latter being mounted 
on the arm N of the frame A, said arm hav 
ing a ratchet P for engagement with a pawl 
Q on the handle or lever R of the head M by 
which provision the stem D may be moved 
in opposite directions and locked when re 
quired. 
S designates the carrier or rest of the tool 
or cutter T, opposite to the chuck, said car 
riar being connected with the lever U, whose 
axis is on the carriage V, the latter support 
ing said carrier S, and said carriage being 
adapted to move in longitudinal and trans 
verse directions by means of the screws W 
and X, whereby the cutter may be adjusted 
relatively to the adjacent end of the chuck. 
Mounted on the under side of the carrier S 
is a screw Y which is arranged horizontally 
and adapted to abut against the adjacent side 
of the carriage V, whereby the advance of 
the cutter against the blank may be limited 
and adjusted with the greatest nicety rela 
tively to said blank. 
The face of the cutter is of the contour of 
that of the button head to be formed, and it 
is of a dimension about one-half that of the 
diameter of said head, it being also slanting 
so that the cutting is gradual, beginning from 
center to circumference. 
The operation is as follows:-The stem is 
withdrawn by the action of the lever R, where 
by the head E expands. A blank is then 
placed in the recess G, and the lever R again 
operated to advance the stem, whereby the 
head E, moves against the head F, and is 
thereby contracted or the chuck closed, so that 
the blank is firmly held or clamped by the 
head E, and it rotates with the chuck owing 
to power being applied to the mandrel B, it 
being noticed that the spindle H remains sta 
tionary. The tool is now advanced against 
the blank by the operation of the handle U, 
O 
20 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
9o 
95 
OO 
495,814 
O 
whereby it turns the blank and converts it 
into a button head, see Fig. 4, the extent of 
cutting or turning of the tool being limited by 
the bolt or screw Y, as has been stated. The 
stem D is now drawn back, and the head E 
as it leaves the head F, expands, and the 
blank strikes the spindle H, whereby it is 
thrown out, and may be suitably collected. 
The tool is also withdrawn, and a new blank 
may be inserted into the expanded head E, 
after which the latter is again advanced, and 
said head closed on the blank, the subsequent 
operations being similar to those hereinbefore 
stated. The recess G is conical in its nature 
the narrowest end being in front so that when 
the head E is closed, the wall of said recess 
grasps the blank and holds it tightly while 
being subjected to the turning operation. 
As the carrier S may be set nearer to or far 
ther from the chuck by means of the screw 
W, and said carrier is attached to the lever U, 
the tool T may be presented to the blank at 
different angles, and thus cut deep or shallow 
grooves into the blank as required. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A button turning machine having a 
frame, a rotatable hollow mandrel journaled 
thereon, having a detachable head, a sliding 
3o 
tubular stem having an expansible head in 
closed by said detachablehead of the mandrel, 
and an adjustable spindle within said tube, 
said stem and mandrel heads having angu 
lar contact faces, substantially as described. 
2. A button turning machine consisting of 
a frame, a rotatable hollow mandrel journaled 
thereon, and having a detachable head, a tu 
bular stem with an expansible head inclosed 
by said mandrel head, and having a recess in 
its forward end, an adjustable spindle in said 
tube, mechanism connected with said frame 
for operating said tube, and a tool holder se 
cured on said frame, said parts being com 
bined substantially as described. 
3. A frame, a hollow mandrel journaled 
thereon, and having an inclosing head at one 
end, a tubular stem within said mandrel hav 
ing an expansible head at one end within said 
inclosing head, an adjustable spindle within 
said tubular stem and expansible head, and 
means substantially as described for sliding 
said tubular stem and expansible head, said 
parts being combined substantially as de 
scribed. 
35 
45 
FREDERICK DOELLBOR. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
R. H. GRAESER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495414.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. W. HUGHES & C, R, TAYLOR, 
FEEDING MECHANISM FOR ENVELOPES, 
No. 495,414, 
Patented Apr. ll, l893. 
 
J. W. HUGHES & C. R. TAYLOR, 
FEEDING MECHANISM FOR, ENVELOPES, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 495,414, 
Patented Apr. ll, l893. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. HUGHES AND CASPER. R. TAYLOR, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT 
OF COLUMBIA. 
FEED ING MECHANISM FOR ENVELOPES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,414, dated April 11, 1893. 
Application filed August 16, 1892, Serial No. 443,233, (No model.) 
55 
- 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that we, JAMESW. Hu GHES and 
CASPER. R. TAYLOR, citizens of the United 
States of America, residing at Washington, in 
the District of Columbia, have invented cer 
tain new and usefullmprovements in Feeding 
Mechanisms for Envelopes, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
Our invention relates particularly to im 
proved feeding mechanism designed for use 
in envelope addressing machines, for feeding 
the envelopes automatically to the printing 
cylinders. 
It is our object to provide a mechanism of 
the simplest and most effective character and 
one in which no further work is required of 
the attendant than to keep the feedboard sup 
plied with envelopes arranged in a pile, the 
mechanism being adapted to engage the lower 
envelope of the pile and feed it to the cylin 
ders. 
The invention includes a reciprocating feed 
ing plate, which is combined with mechanism 
for giving it a compound movement, that is, 
a vertical movement at the end of each lon 
gitudinal movement so as to recede or drop 
below the plane of the feed board to be free 
from the envelopes after the completion of its 
forward feeding movement, and during its re 
turn to normal position, and an upward move 
ment at the end of its return or rearward 
movement, in order to engage the next envel 
ope at the bottom of the pile for feeding it 
forward. 
The mechanism for carrying out our inven 
tion includes a rocking frame or arm With an 
eccentric for imparting movement thereto, 
said arm being arranged to have movement 
vertically and means for controlling the ver 
tical movement of the arm as it oscillates back 
and forth. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 represents a cen 
tral vertical section through the feed board, 
feeding mechanism and printing cylinder. 
Fig. 2 is a rear view of the same. 
The feedboard 1, upon which the envelopes 
or other blanks are placed is supported in in 
clined position in rear of the cylinders, in the 
usual manner upon a frame 2. An opening 
is formed in it, and around this opening is se 
cured the reservoir for holding the envelopes 
which lie in a pile over the opening with the 
side edges extending beyond the opening and 
resting on the feedboard within the reservoir. 
The opening extends far enough to the rear 
to permit the feeding bar 3 to rise and engage 
the rear edge of the lowermost envelope. The 
feed plate or bar has a bearing edge or rib 4, 
to engage the envelope throughout the width 
of the opening. 
The plate is inclined to con 
form substantially to the incline of the feed 
board and is carried by the standard 5,5, ex 
tending upwardly from the cross bar 6, of the 
rocking frame, which further consists of the 
depending arms 7, the lower ends of which 
are bifurcated and embrace the ends of the 
transverse cam shaft 8. This arrangement 
permits the frame to oscillate toward and from 
the cylinders and at the same time it may 
have vertical movement toward and from the 
pile of envelopes. The first mentioned move 
ment toward and from the cylinder is given 
from an eccentric 10, on a transverse shaft 11 
to which the movementistransmitted through 
the gears 12, 13 from the cam shaft 8. The 
eccentric rod is connected to the frame by 
means of a collar 14, adjustably secured to the 
depending arm 15 of the frame, the said col 
lar and eccentric rod being pivoted to each 
other. 
The movement which we give to the feed 
bar is such that as Said bar moves forward to 
push the lowermost envelope or blank to the 
printing cylinders it will follow the incline of 
the feed board in order to make the move 
ment certain and accurate, having completed 
the forward movement the bar drops or moves 
down from the envelopes and then rearwardly 
for engaging the next blank, which has now 
fallen into place by reason of its own weight, 
and the Weight of the pile. During this rear. 
ward movement the feed bar is entirely below 
and out of contact With the envelope and there 
is thus no tendency to drag or displace the 
blanks or envelopes. At the completion of 
the rearward movement the bar rises to en 
gage the next blank, the rib moving up directly 
back of the rear edge of the blank, and the 
parts are then in position for another action. 
These movements are given by the combined 
action of the eccentric before mentioned, and 
9o 
95 
IOC 
y 7o 
75 
Io 
is 
30 
35 
45 
So 
2 
495,414 
O 
5 
of the cams 16, on the camshaft 8 secured ad 
jacent to the forked ends of the arms 7 to en 
gage the anti-friction rollers 7* thereon. 
Referring to Fig.1 in which the bar will be 
seen ready to move forward for the feeding 
action, it will be noticed that the arms 7 are 
held up to the highest point by the cams, the 
highest parts of which are now engaging the 
friction rollers. As the arms move forward 
under the action of the eccentric, the cams re 
volve in the direction of the arrow, and thus 
the lower parts of the cams are brought to 
bear on the friction roller, which permits the 
arms to fall gradually so that the feed bar 
--...-15-moves along in the same plane with the in 
cline of the feed board until the lowest limit 
is reached and then the low parts 19, are be 
low the rollers. Further movement brings the 
drops 20 of the cams below the rollers and 
the arms and feed bar now fall directly down 
and away from the envelopes. The cams have 
low concentric parts, which now act upon the 
rollers of the arms 7 as the eccentric is mov 
ing the rocking frame backward for a new 
action, the frame and the feedbar thus being 
maintained entirely below the envelopes. At 
the end of the rearward stroke the sharp rises 
20 of the cams throw the feed bar up into 
proper position and when the highest parts of 
the cams come into action the bar is in posi 
tion for a new feed. Any suitable form of 
delivery means may be used as also any de 
sired form of driving mechanism for the va 
rious parts. 
All the parts may be adjustable to suit dif 
ferent requirements as desired. 
We claim 
1. In combination, the feedboard, the feed 
bar, the support and carrier therefor depend 
4o ing therefrom, pivotally supported at its lower 
end, and capable of having movement verti 
cally, in addition to its pivotal movement the 
means for oscillating the depending support 
laterally on its lower pivot bearing and the 
25 
35 
5o 
55 
means for moving the said support vertically 45 
as it is oscillated, substantially as described. 
2. In combination, the feedboard, the feed 
bar the support and carrier therefor depend 
ing from said bar, pivotally supported at its 
lower end and capable of having movement 
vertically, in addition to its pivotal movement 
the means for oscillating the depending sup 
port laterally on its lower pivot and the cam 
arranged adjacent to the lower pivot bearing 
of the depending support for operating the 
same vertically, substantially as described. 
3. In combination, the feed board, the feed 
bar, the depending support therefor having 
the bifurcated lower end, the shaft extending 
through the same, the cam on the shaft en 
gaging the support to move the same verti 
cally and the means for oscillating the depend 
ing support on the shaft, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In combination, the inclined feedboard, 
the feed bar, the support depending from said 
feedbar, pivoted at its lower end and capable 
of moving vertically independently of the piv 
otal movement the means for oscillating the 
support laterally on its pivot bearings and the 
means for moving the support vertically con 
sisting of the cam having the high part, and 
eccentric portion extending therefrom grad 
ually nearer the center, a drop or shoulder at 
the end of said eccentric part, a low part fol 
lowing said drop and a rise extending to the 
high part, whereby the feed bar will follow 
the incline of the feed board on its forward 
feeding movement and will return to normal 
position below said board, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
: 
75 
JAMES W. HUGIES. 
CASPER R, TAYLOR. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY E. COOPER, 
WALTER DONALDSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495515.txt	G. A. PROCHAZKA & W. SCHARRINGHAUSEN, 
ULTRAMARINE FURN ACE. 
Patented Apr. 18, 1893. 
SS 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 495,515, 
 
   
S* 
+ 
0 
 
SA ASSA 
| N | 
WITNESSES 
-62-62 24% 
ATTORNEYS. 
The Norris PE 
ters co, Photo-THO. WASHiGTON. p. C. 
(No Model.) 
G. A. PROCHAZKA & W. S.CHARRINGHAUSEN. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 495,515, 
ULTRAMARINE FURN ACE, 
Patented Apr. 18, l893. 
| 
_)=========----|No. 
an 
2 
saaSSassassinasas | 2. , | |- a s 
N | |- | || } 
N 
2 
2.7% N 
T 
/24e 
ATTORNEYS 
| N 
E-4 o 
%zov 24v. 
re. NRR3 Per 
(No Model.) 
G. A. PROCHAZKA & W S CHARRINGHAUSEN. 
ULTRAMARINE FUR, NACE, 
s 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
 
WITNESSES: 
-62-6- 
2. 
BY 
WTORS 
4. 
%fszeel 
AT TORNEYS. 
THE Norris Perers ce. Proto-LTHo. wash boron, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. PROCHAZKA AND WILLIAM SCHARRINGHAUSEN, OF NEWARK, 
NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNORS TO THE HELLER & MERZ COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
ULTRAMARINE - FURNAC E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,515, dated April 18, 1893. 
Application filed July 26, 1892, Serial No. 441314 (No model.). 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, GEORGEA. PROCHAZKA 
and WILLIAM SCHARRINGHAUSEN, citizens of 
the United States, residing at Newark, in the 
county of Essex and State of New Jersey, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Ultramarine - Furnaces, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved fur 
nace for making ultramarine, and especially 
to the devices for regulating and controlling 
the draft. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a vertical transverse sectional view of our im 
proved ultramarine furnace. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a vertical longitudi 
nal sectional view of the upper part of the 
Same, and Fig. 4 is a sectional plan-view, on 
the line 4 4, of Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The furnace is constructed with a hearth A 
and a fire-place B and ash-pits C at each end 
of the furnace, said fire-places being of con 
siderable less width than the hearth, and be 
ing built in recesses or openings of said hearth. 
In each side-wall of the furnace a series of 
vertical flues D is built, the lower ends of 
which terminate on the plane of the hearth 
and have openings communicating with the 
bottom part of the furnace, and the upper ends 
of the several flues D are in communication 
with converging flues E arranged in the roof 
of the furnace and leading into the outer 
sides of two compartments F separated by a 
partition F" and provided at the top with an 
inwardly-projecting ledge G. running along 
the sides and adapted to serve as a support 
for a removable covering plate H. The flues 
E lead into said compartments below the 
ledge G, as shown in Fig. 3. 
Below the ledge G. of each compartment F 
a sliding damper G' is arranged, which can 
be manipulated by means of a rod G extend 
ing to the side of the furnace or in any other 
Suitable manner. 
Above the two compartments F a chamber 
I is formed and is provided with a removable 
cover-plate J to a smoke-channel L. built on 
versely to the longitudinal axis of the same 
and leading to a suitable stack. A damper 
or gate M. passes through a slot in the top of 
the Smoke-channel L and serves to close the 
end of the duct K so as to interrupt the com 
munication between the duct K and smoke 
channel L. Said damper or gate M is pivoted 
to the inner end of a lever N suitably pivoted 
On a standard O of the furnace, which lever 
N can be manipulated by any suitable de 
vices, such as a lever, cord and weight. 
Ordinarily the covers H are removed, the 
gate M is raised and the cover-plate J is in 
place. The products of combustion pass from 
the fire-places around the pots P placed in 
the furnace, and on bricks T on the hearth 
said pots containing the material to be treated, 
and with the fumes and vapors generated by 
the heating of the contents of the pots, pass 
through the flues D and the flues E into the 
compartments F, then into the upper parts of 
the compartments F and through the duct K 
to the smoke-channel L. The draft can easily 
be regulated by adjusting the fire-doors and 
by raising the gate M more or less. When 
it is found that the pots on one side of the 
furnace are being heated more than the pots 
On the other, or if for any other reason it is 
desired to have less heat at one side of the 
furnace, the corresponding damper G' is 
closed more or less, so as to interrupt more or 
less the communication of the flues E on that 
side of the furnace with the duct K. When 
the contents of the pots have been burned for 
a sufficient length of time, it is desirable that 
all communication between the smoke-chan 
nel L and the furnace should be interrupted 
absolutely. To accomplish this, the two plates 
Hare placed upon the compartments F and 
the gate M is closed: but as the draft in the 
stack is very great the same still draws air 
through the furnace and through the crewices 
between the edges of the plates Handledge G. 
and creates more or less suction or draft in 
the furnace. To obviate such suction or draft 
entirely, the cover-plate J is removed, the 
gate M remaining closed. Whatever draft is 
created does not affect the furnace, as the 
said draft would draw in air through the duct 
5o top of the furnace at the front end trans- I K into the smoke-channel L. The operator 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
CO 
 
495,515 
can thus easily regulate the draft of the fur 
nace and is provided with means for cutting 
off one side of the furnace at will, and can 
prevent all draft whatever in the furnace 
when this becomes necessary. 
The charges for the pots form no part of 
this invention and are Well known. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A furnace for making ultramarine, con 
structed with flues in the side-walls, two com 
partments on the top of the furnace, of which 
compartments one is in communication with 
the flues in one side-wall and the other with 
the flues in the other side-wall of the furnace, 
a plate for closing each compartment and a 
duct leading from the two compartments to a 
stack, substantially as set forth. 
2. A furnace for making ultramarine, con 
structed with flues in the side-walls having 
their upper ends connected by a series of flues 
in the roof of the furnace with two compart 
ments, removable plates for closing the tops 
of said compartments, a chamber formed 
above the compartments, which chamber is 
connected by a duct with a smoke-flue, and a 
plate for closing the top of said chamber, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. A furnace for making ultramarine, con 
O 
(5 
25 
structed with flues in the side-walls having 
their upper ends connected by flues in the 
top of the furnace with two compartments, 
each provided with a plate for closing it, a 
chamber formed above said compartments, a 
plate for closing the top of said chamber, a 
duct leading from said chamber to a smoke 
channel and a gate for closing that end of 
the duct leading into the smoke-channel, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. A furnace for making ultramarine, con 
structed with flues in the side-walls having 
their upper ends connected by a series of flues 
in the roof of the furnace with two compart 
ments, dampers for closing said compart 
ments, removable plates for closing the tops 
of said compartments, a chamber formed 
above the compartments which chamber is 
connected by a duct with the smoke flue, and 
a plate for closing the top of said chamber, 
Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our invention we have signed our names in 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
35 
40 
45 
GEORGE A. PROCHAZRA. 
WILLIAMSCHARRINGHAUSEN. 
Witnesses: 
J. W.M. McKELVEY, 
HENRY MERZ. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495615.txt	(No Model.) 
CROSS-OWER SWITCH FOR ELECTRIC RAILWAYS, 
F. B. RAE, 
No. 495,615, 
 
Patented Apr. 18, 1893. 
WITWESSES 
IJWWEWTOR 
--- 
Attorney a 
orals perers co, PHOTO-LTHO, washit", 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK B. RAE, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THE DETROIT 
ELECTRICAL WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
CROSS-OVER SWITCH, FOR ELECTRIC RAILWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,615, dated April 18, 1893. 
Application filed April ll, 1891, Serial No. 388,467, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK B. RAE, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Detroit, in the 
county of Wayne and State of Michigan, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Cross-Over Switches for Electric Rail 
ways, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to cross overs for trol 
ley lines for electric railways by means of 
which the trolleys of either one of two inde 
pendent electric railways may pass or cross 
the trolley lines of the other without inter 
fering therewith, or causing a disturbance in 
the electric circuit, and my invention con 
sists in a cross over having the general fea 
tures of construction and arrangement here 
in after more particularly pointed out. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1, is a side view showing more par 
ticularly the arrangement of the under trol 
ley line. Fig. 2, is a side view showing the 
arrangement of devices connected with the 
upper of the two crossing trolley wires. Fig. 
3, is a plan view of the same; and Figs. 4 and 
5 are details on an enlarged scale. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
trolley wire of one of the railroad tracks which 
in this instance is supported at an elevation 
slightly above the trolley wire B of the other 
railroad track, and these wires may be sup 
ported in any of the usual ways, as by means 
of the hangers H attached to suitable guys. 
The trolley wires are shown as crossing each 
other at right angles, although it will be evi 
dent from the description that they may cross 
each other at any angle, as indicated by dot 
ted lines Fig. 3, by simply turning and ad 
justing the parts to the angle desired. 
The trolley wire B is provided with the 
track pieces D. tapering toward their outer 
extremities, and secured to the wire by any 
suitable means, as the clips d, and these track 
pieces are connected to the plate C, which 
forms a connecting link between the track 
pieces D, and offers a bearing surface upon 
which the flanges of a trolley wheel Will run 
in its passage between the adjacent end of 
the track pieces. This plate is provided with 
a knob or projection E, at its center, which 
will extend into the groove of the trolley 
wheel, and prevent its accidental displace 
ment, when passing between the track pieces. 
Mounted on this plate C, is another plate F, 
which may be of the construction shown in 
Fig. 4, and secured to the plate C by a screw 
passing through the opening f, and which 
Screw may serve as a means for adjusting the 
shafts of the two plates to each other. Mounted 
upon this plate F, are the standards g, sup 
porting the bell-shaped insulators G. The 
conductor A, which may or may not be con 
tinuous as desired, is also provided with track 
pieces H, tapering toward their outer ends, 
and secured to the trolley wire by clipsh, and 
these track pieces are provided at their in 
ner ends with a cross arm H' formed at its 
Outer ends to embrace the neck of the bell 
shaped insulators G, and to be secured to 
gether around the neck by screws or bolts 
passing through the openingsh'. These track 
pieces H are considerably longer and wider 
than the corresponding track pieces D of the 
other trolley wire in order that the trolley on 
the trolley wire A may be carried below the 
trolley conductor B, and so that in passing 
the trolley conductor B, the flanges of the 
trolley wheel may bear upon the under side 
of the plate C. 
In order to prevent any arcing between the 
two circuits, as the trolley passes over the 
track pieces H, their inner ends are provided 
with pieces I of insulating material, suitably 
secured to the track pieces as by the lugs i, 
and thus it will be seen that before the trol 
ley wheel reaches the cross over, the circuit 
of the car to which it is connected is auto 
matically broken assoon as the trolley reaches 
the insulating material, and the danger of 
sparking or arcing is avoided. 
It will thus be seen that by an exceedingly 
simple arrangement, I provide a cross over in 
which the two crossing lines are rigidly main 
tained at the proper distances apart, and are 
completely and thoroughly insulated from 
each other, the bell-shaped insulator prevent 
ing all danger of leakage through moisture 
collecting on the insulators, and by simply. 
loosening the screw connecting the two plates 
C and F, the parts may be adjusted to ac 
commodate the cross over to tracks at any 
35 
45 
55 
95 
Ioo 
 
 
2 
495,615 
angle to each other. Moreover, the parts of 
the cross over are light and simple of con 
struction, making an exceedingly cheap, as 
well as effective cross over. 
What I claim is 
1. In a crossover, tile combination of a plate 
to which the track pieces of one of the con 
ductors are connected, of a second plate ad 
justably connected therewith and carrying 
the insulators to which the track pieces of 
the other conductor are connected, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a cross over, the combination with a 
plate to which the track pieces of one con 
ductor are connected, of a second plate ad 
justably connected there with, and having 
standards supporting bell-shaped insulators, 
O 
and track pieces having cross arms attached 
to the necks of the bell-shaped insulators, 
substantially as descrihed. 
3. In a cross over, a plate having track 
pieces connected therewith, and provided with 
a central extension, a second plate adjust 
ably connected to the first, insulators mounted 
on said plate, and track pieces having insul 
lating portions near their ends mounted on 
the insulators, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
FRANK B. RAE. 
25 
Witnesses: 
W. H. PERRETT, 
CHARLES J. STUBBS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495715.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL R. WHITALL, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH TERRITORY. 
PROCESS OF XVIATING O RES 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,715, dated April 18, 1898. 
Application filed August 25, 1892, Serial No. 444,116, (No specimens.) 
55 
75 
To all, Luhon, it HaCity CO7 cer'7. 
Be it known that I, SAMUELR, WHITALL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Salt 
Lake City, in the county of Salt Lake and 
Territory of Utah, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in the Process of 
Lixiviating Ores; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
lmake and use the same. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in the processes of treating auriferous and 
argentiferous Ores, containing besides the pre 
cious metal, copper, iron and other impuri 
ties, the ores existing as natural chlorides, sul 
phides, or arsenides and compounds of base 
metals generally. 
The invention consists in subjecting the 
Ores to the action of a solution containing a 
cyanide, preferably potassium cyanide, in 
combination with a hyposulphite solution, 
preferably Sodium hyposulphite, in such quan 
tities as maybe necessary for the thorough re 
covery of the precious metals. 
The invention further consists in subject 
ing the ores to such treatment as above noted, 
with the additional step of precipitating the 
metals from their solution by means of zinc 
Or by electrolysis of the solution; and in such 
details of operation as will be hereinafter fully 
described, and set forth, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
The nature of the ore may require for its 
treatment certain preliminary operations. In 
all cases the ore is first crushed to pass through 
a sixteen to forty mesh screen and if of a 
highly silicious nature is roasted to oxidize 
the baser metals. I then mix with the ore a 
proper preparation of caustic soda or potash 
and treat the whole in a closed tank with steam, 
heated to such a temperature and under suf 
ficient pressure to form a soluble silicate (wa 
terglass), thereby freeing the precious metals 
from their combinations with base metals and 
rendering the ore peculiarly adapted for the 
Subsequent operation. If the ore is a sul 
phide it is given a chlorinating roast with salt, 
in any suitable form of roasting furnaces and 
after roasting is lixiviated with Water. The 
Washwateris drawn off into the precipitating 
tanks and any copper or lead contained there 
in as chlorides is precipitated by Well known 
means. After having treated the ore as above 
indicated, according to the special require 
ments of the case, or if the ore is a natural 
chloride, I proceed to subject it to the follow 
ing treatment, which constitutes the essential 
features of my invention. The ore is placed 
dry in a tank made of or lined with any inert 
material as slate, cement, brick, or any other 
material not appreciably acted on by the Solu 
tion. A solution composed of from one-half 
to one and one-half per cent. of potassium 
cyanide with about one third this quantity of 
sodium hyposulphite, to quantity of ore used, 
or in greater proportions if necessary, is 
poured over the ore and allowed to percolate 
through the same. Water in quantity suffi 
cient to cover the ore to a depth of one foot 
or more is then added and the whole allowed 
to remain for a length of time to insure the 
solution of the precious metals. When this 
is determined the cyanide and hypoSulphite 
solution containing the gold and silver, is 
drawn off to the precipitating tanks and made 
to pass over zinc shavings, where the precious 
metals are precipitated from the solution and 
retained in the shavings. The gold and sil 
ver precipitated from the solution may be re. 
moved from the zinc by well known methods. 
This course may be adapted and followed but 
my preferred method of precipitating the 
metals in the combined cyanide and hyposul 
phite solutions is by electrolysis. For this 
purpose I employ a platinum or carbon anode 
and a cathode of wires or strips of suitable 
metal, preferably iron arranged in parallel 
lines on copper wires projecting into the Solu 
tion. The gold and silver combined will be 
deposited on the wires in the form of a finely 
divided powder, which is collected, dried and 
melted into bars. 
I have stated in the above description that 
potassium cyanide is used, but any cyanide 
soluble in Water as barium, calcium or Sodium 
cyanide may be employed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The process of separating gold and silver 
from their ores which consists in subjecting 
the ore to the action of a solution of potassium 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
495,715 
scribed. 
2. The process of separating gold and silver 
5 from their ores which consists first in roast- from silicious ores, which consists in subject- 20 
cyanide and sodium hyposulphite and subse- precipitating the dissolved metals by elec 
quently precipitating the dissolved metal, sub-trolysis of the solution, substantially as de 
stantially as described. 
4. The process of separating gold and silver 
ing the ore to oxidize the base metals and sec-ing the ore admixed with caustic soda and 
Ondly, in Subjecting the roasted ore to the potash, to the action of a solution of potas 
action of a solution of potassium cyanide and isium cyanide and sodium hyposulphite, sub 
Sodium hypoSulphite, and subsequently pre-stantially as described. . 
Io cipitating the dissolved metals, substantially 
presence of two witnesses. 
as described. 
3. The process of separating gold and silver 
from their ores which consists in subjecting 
the ore to the action of a solution of potas- 
I5 sium cyanide and sodium hyposulphite and 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 25 
SAMUEL R. WHITALL. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM W. R. WHITALL, 
ROBERT WENDT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495815.txt	(No Model.) 
STEAM PRESSURE AND WATER LEWEL RECORDER FOR BOLERS 
No. 495,815, 
Batented Apr. 18, 
W. M. LEWIS 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZ) 
D 
 
WITNESSES : 
ATTORAWEYS, 
he Norris Peters co. Hotchd. was noton.c. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM: MORGAN DILEWIS, OF THURIBER, TEX AS. 
STEAM-PRESSURE AND WATER-LEVEL RECORDER FOR BOLERS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,815, dated April 18, 1893. 
Original application filed September 3, 1891, Serial No. 404,658. Divided and this application filed May 3, 1892, Serial No, 
431,627, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all av?voTmv it Finally concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM MORGAN 
LEWIS, of Thurber, in the county of Erath and 
State of Texas, have invented a new and Im 
proved Steam - Pressure Recorder for Boil 
ers, of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description. 
This application forms a division of the 
original application for Letters Patent, Serial 
No. 404,658, filed by me September 3, 1891, and 
the device for recording the water level of 
the boiler hereinafter referred to, forms the 
subject matter of the said original application. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved steam pressure recorder 
for boilers, which is simple and durable in 
construction, very effective in operation, and 
arranged to automatically record the pressure 
of the steam in the boiler for a given period. 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
details, and combinations of the same, as will 
be hereinafter described and then pointed 
out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which the same letters of reference indi 
cate the same or corresponding parts in all the 
figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional side elevation of the 
improvement. Fig. 2 is a sectional plan view 
of the same on the line 2-2 of Fig. 1 the 
springs being removed to show the pencils; 
and Fig. 3 is a sectional side elevation of part 
of the improvement on the line 3-3 of Fig. 2. 
My improved steam pressure recorder for 
boilers is provided with a closed vessel A, con 
nected near its upper end by a pipe B, with 
the steam compartment of the boiler, and at 
its lower end by a pipe C, with the water com 
partment of the boiler. The vessel A is so 
arranged relative to the boiler that the water 
level in the vessel A corresponds with the level 
of the water in the boiler, the vessel prefer 
ably extending throughout the height of the 
boiler and forming part of the same or placed 
a suitable distance therefrom at a convenient 
point, 
On the top of the vessel A is arranged a 
cylinder D, extending upWardly and in which 
is fitted to slide a piston E, provided with a 
- 
piston rod F, extending through a suitable 
stuffing box in the top of the cylinder D. The 
upper end of the piston rod extends into a 
casing G, Supported on a suitable platform A', 
held on a framework arranged on top of the 
vessel A. The extreme upper end of the pis 
ton rod F is formed with an enlargement F, 
connected with one end of a spring H, coiled 
in the lower part of the casing G, said spring 
being attached to the bottom of the casing. 
From the front part of the enlargement F' 
of the piston rod F extends a pointer F, in 
dicating steam pressure on the graduation G', 
fixed on the casing G, From the rear part of 
the enlargement F extends transversely, a 5 
spring pressed pencil I, see Fig. 2, passing 
through a vertical slot J, formed in a trans 
parent cover J, of a clock-work K, of any ap 
proved construction. The hour shaft K, of 
the clock-work K carries a dial L, arranged 
to make one full rotation either during twelve 
or twenty-four hours, the said dial being cor 
respondingly divided into twelve or twenty 
four equal sector parts L', and with a double 
graduation Land L, distinguished from one 
another by Roman and Arabic numerals and 
both indicating hours of the sector parts L, as 
hereinafter more fully described. When the 
clock-work Kis wound up, the dial L revolves 
in the direction of the arrow a' (on Fig. 1). 
A pointer K, fixed on the casing of the clock 
work Kindicates the correct hour of the day 
on the graduation L, of the said dial. Thus, 
as shown in Fig. 1, the hour of the day is one 
o'clock. The pressure of the steam in the 
vessel A exerts its influence on the piston E 
so that the latter is moved upward so that the 
pointer Findicates the pressure in pounds 
on the graduation G'. At the same time, the 
pencil I marks a line on the dial I, which lat 
ter, on account of its revolving according to 
time, notes the pressure at the proper time. 
The dial L is preferably made of slate, so that 
the markings can be Wiped off whenever de 
sired. The spring H insures a return move 
ment of the piston E and connected parts 
according to the diminishing pressure of the 
steam in the vessel A. Within the vessel. A 
is also arranged a float N, adapted to rise and 
fall with the level of the water in the vessel 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
495,815 
95 
? ? ? 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
7? 
75 
A, the said float being guided on suitable 
guide rods N', arranged within the vessel A. 
The float N is provided with an upwardly-ex 
tending rod N, passing through a suitable 
stuffing box in the top of the vessel A, the up 
per end of the said rod being connected with 
the end of a band or belt O, passing over the 
rim of a wheel P, and fastened thereto, the 
said wheel being secured on a shaft P and 
mounted to turn in suitable bearings on the 
platform A. 
A spiral spring Q, is fastened with one end 
to the wheel P and with its other end on the 
platform A', (see Fig. 1) the said spring serv 
ing to rotate the wheel P when the water rises 
in the vessel A and the float N moves up 
ward. The spring uncoils when the water 
falls, by the weight of the float N descending 
with the falling water. On the shaft P' is 
secured also a gear wheel R, meshing into a 
rack S', supported from a horizontally-ar 
ranged slide S, mounted to slide in suitable 
bearings arranged in the casing U, supported 
by the casing G, as will be readily understood 
by reference to Fig. 2. 
On the front of the slide S is arranged a 
pointer S, indicating the height of the water 
in the boileron a graduation U", formed on the 
casing U. On the rear end of the slide S is 
supported a spring pressed pencil T, extend 
ing through a horizontally arranged slot J, 
formed in the cover J. The inner end of the 
pencial T is adapted to indicate on the dial 
L, and travels in a horizontal line standing 
at right angles to the vertical line in which 
travels the pencil I previously mentioned. 
On the shaft K' of the clock-work Kishung 
loosely an indicator V, made in the shape of 
a sector corresponding in size to one of the 
arts L. of the dial L. The indicator V is 
provided with two sets of graduations V and 
V, corresponding to the graduations G' and 
U, respectively, of which the former indi 
cates the boiler pressure and the other the 
height of the water level in feet and subdi 
visions of feet in the boiler and vessel A. On 
the indicator W is arranged a graduation V, 
indicating the subdivisions of five minute 
spaces of one hour. 
It is understood that the graduation V on 
the indicator W indicates a boiler pressure 
corresponding to that of graduation G', and 
is used to read off the boiler pressure marked 
by the pencil I on dial L at any of the sector 
parts L' so marked by the said pencil. In a 
like manner, the graduation V* indicates 
height of water level in feet and subdivisions 
of feet corresponding to that of the gradua 
tion U", and is used to read off the height of 
the water level on any of the sector parts L' 
of the dial IL in case the latter is already 
marked by the pencil T. The graduation L. 
is used in connection with the graduation V 
of the indicator V to read off the hour of the 
day during which the pencil T marks the cor 
responding sector part L', and the gradua 
tion Lindicates in a like manner, the hour 
of the day during which the pencil I made 
its mark on the corresponding sector part. 
As shown in Fig. 1, the Roman numerals on 
the indicator V and denoted by V represent 
the height of the water level in feet in the 
boiler, while the Arabic numerals indicate 
the pressure of the steam in pounds and are 
denoted by V', see Fig. 1. 
The operation is as follows: When the 
boiler is in use and the clock-work IXis wound 
up and set going, then the dial L. rotates and 
the piston E and the float N move up and 
down, according to the increased or dimin 
ished pressure of steam and increased or 
diminished supply of water in the boiler. 
The movement of the piston E is indicated 
by the pencil I on the dial L, and the move 
ment of the float N is also indicated on the 
said dial by the pencil T. At the same time 
the pressure of the steam in the boiler can be 
read on the graduation G' at the pointer F, 
and the height of the water in the boiler can 
be read on the graduation U' at the pointer 
S. Now, when it is desired to read the time 
of a certain boiler pressure indicated by the 
pencil I on the dial L, then the operator shifts 
the indicator V so that its right hand edge 
intersects the desired point of time on the 
graduation section Land the amount of boiler 
pressure can be read on the graduation Was 
the latter corresponds with the graduation 
G' indicating boiler pressure, as above ex 
plained. At the same time the center radial 
line of the indicator indicates the hour of the 
dial L and subdivisions of the hour are indi 
cated by the graduation V. In a like man 
ner, the height of the water in the boiler at 
a certain time can be read by the indicator 
W on the dial L by shifting the said indicator 
so that the left hand edge intersects the de 
sired point of the line made by the pencil T, 
the graduation V* indicating the height of 
the water in feet and also the graduation V8 
indicates the time of the dial I. Thus, it 
will be seen that no single steam gage or wa 
ter gage is required for the boiler, as the de 
vice indicates at sight the steam pressure 
and the height of the Water in the boiler, and 
it further furnishes indicator diagrams of the 
steam pressure and the height of the water in 
the boiler. 
By this device the owner of a boiler can at 
any time find whether proper attendance has 
been given to the boiler in furnishing the 
Same With the necessary amount of water, and 
whether the attendants keep the fires under 
the boiler in proper order to hold a sufficient 
and constant Steam supply. The pencils I 
and T are preferably of different colors, say 
red, and blue respectively, to readily trace 
their markings on the slate dial, thered color 
line representing the steam and the blue line 
the Water in the boiler. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a device of the class described, the 
I. ? 
15 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
495,815 
combination with a dial and a clock-workfor 
driving the said dial, of an indicating pencil 
adapted to indicate on the said dial means 
for operating the pencil from the boiler and 
a graduated indicator hung loosely on the said 
dial and adapted to indicate the time of the 
markings by the said pencil on the said dial, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. In a device of the class described, the 
columbination with an indicating pencil con 
trolled by the steam pressure in the boiler, of 
a revoluble dial on which the said pencil is 
arranged to mark, a clock-work for driving 
the said dial, and a Spring retracted piston, 
substantially as described, for imparting mo 
tion to the said pencil by the increasing or 
diminishing pressure of the steam in the 
boiler, substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a vessel connected with the 
boiler, of a cylinder opening into the said ves 
Sel and containing a piston, and a spring 
pressed piston rod, of a pencil held on the said 
spring pressed piston rod, a revoluble dial on 
which the said pencil is arranged to mark, and 
a graduated indicator to indicate the time of 
the markings by the pencil on the dial and 
a clock-work for driving the said dial, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
4. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a vessel connected with the 
boiler, of a cylinder opening into the said ves 
- Sel and Containing a piston, and a Spring 
pressed piston rod carrying a pointer, of a 
pencil held on the said spring-pressed piston 
rod, a revoluble dial on which the said pencil 
is arranged to mark, and a clock-Work for 
driving the said dial, and a graduated indi 
cator hung loosely on the said dial and adapt 
ed to indicate the time of the markings by 
the said pencil on the said dial, substantially 
as shown and described. 
5. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a spring-pressed piston con 
trolled by the steam pressure in the boiler, of 
a pointer held on the outer side of the upper 
end of the piston rod of the said piston, a 
fixed casing having a vertical transversely 
graduated surface on which the said pointer 
indicates, a pencil Supported on the inner 
side of the upper end of said piston rod, a 
dial mounted to turn and on which the said 
pencil is arranged to mark, and a clock-Work 
for driving the said dial, substantially as 
shown and described. 
6. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a spring-pressed piston con 
trolled by the steam pressure in the boiler, of 
a pointer held on the piston rod of the said 
piston, a fixed casing having a graduation on 
which the said pointer indicates, a pencil Sup 
ported on the said piston rod, a dial mounted 
to turn and on which the said pencil is ar 
ranged to mark, a clock-work for driving the 
said dial, and a graduated indicator hung 
loosely on the said dial and adapted to indi 
cate the time for the indicating line marked 
1. ? 
2 ? 
35 
40 
45 
55 
?? 
 
by the said pencil on the said dial, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
7. The combination with the clock-Work the 
graduated dial rotated thereby and the steam 
pressure and water level pencils working on 
the face thereof and operated from the steam 
and water space of the boiler respectively, of 
the indicator hung loosely on the axis of the 
dial and having two sets of graduations, one 
for each pencil, Substantially as set forth. 
S. The combination with the clock work the 
graduated dial rotated thereby and the steam 
pressure and water level indicating pencils 
movable on the face of the dial in planes at 
right angles to each other and controlled re 
spectively from the steam and water space of 
the boiler, of the indicator hung loosely and 
provided with two sets of graduations, one for 
each pencil, Substantially as set forth. 
9. The combination with the clock work, its 
casing having a pointer K and the dial on 
the hour shaft provided with radial gradua 
tions and two sets of numerals, the outer set 
of which is read in connection with the said 
pointer, of the two pencils working on the face 
of the dial and operated respectively from the 
steam and water space of the boiler, and the 
loosely hung indicator having three sets of 
graduations reading as described, substan 
tially as set forth. 
10. A steam pressure and water level re 
corder for boilers, comprising a vessel con 
nected at its upper and lower ends with the 
upper and lower portions of the boiler and 
provided with a steam cylinder communicat 
ing with its upper portion above the water 
level, a framework above the vessel, a clock 
Work having a vertically rotating graduated 
dial, a piston in said steam cylinder provided 
with an upwardly extending rod provided with 
a pencil to Work on the dial, a horizontally slid 
ing pencil also marking on the dial, and a float 
in the Water space of said vessel and connect 
ed with the horizontally working pencil; 
whereby the steam pressure and water level 
will be simultaneously recorded on the dial, 
Substantially as set forth. 
11. The combination with the dial, and its 
clockwork, of two graduated surfaces project 
ing vertically and horizontally across the dial 
from its axis, and two pencil carriers each 
sliding parallel to said surfaces and provided 
with pointers working thereon and with pen 
cils marking on the dial, operative connec 
tions between the said pencils and the steam 
and water spaces respectively of the boiler, 
and the loosely hung indicator; whereby the 
steam pressure and water level may be read 
from the pointers and graduated surfaces and 
the times of the pencil markings be Read in 
connection with the indicator, substantially 
as set forth. 
WWIILLIAM MORGAN ILE WWIS, 
Witnesses: 
Mi. LE WIS, 
THOMAS PARKER. 
7? 
75 
95 
?. ? ? 
?? 5 
EO 
II5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US495915.txt	r 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 495,915, 
 
F. SPALDING, 
MICROMETER GAGE, 
Patented Apr. 18, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
 
WI7 NEA. 
%ry 29.4 
(673-76 (6.2% A 
azzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz2 
ty 7 73 
a NY Y 
N if E. 
 
 
 
WENTTA77. 
-7aa k 5% aeae. 
a 4, 
-6, s-pr Q-4. 6 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK SPALDING, OF PROVIDENCE, REIODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
BROWN & SHARPE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MC ROMETER GAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 495,915, dated April 18, 1898. 
Application filed December 5, 1892, Serial No. 454,072, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern, 
Be it known that I, FRANK SPALDING, of 
the city of Providence, in the county of Provi 
dence and State of Rhode Island, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Gages; and I hereby declare that the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description of 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication. 
This invention has reference to improve 
ments in gages which are particularly adapt 
ed to those of the caliper order. 
The object of this invention is to increase 
the measuring capacity of gages for making 
delicate measurements without increasing the 
traverse of the measuring mechanism. 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
duce a gage in which an adjustable measur 
ing-post is carried by a traversing-indicator. 
Still another object of the invention is to in 
crease the measuring capacity of a caliper 
gage without obstructing the anvil end of 
the frame. 
The invention consists in the combination 
with the traverse-screw of an adjustable meas 
uring-post. 
The invention further consists in the pecu 
liar construction of the traverse-screw having 
means for securing a measuring-post thereto, 
together with such other peculiar features 
of construction and combination of parts as 
Will hereinafter be more fully described and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Figure 1 represents a side view of the pre 
ferred form of the improved gage. Fig.2 rep 
resents a similar view of the same partly in 
section to show the internal construction of 
the traversing - screw and its Outer sleeve 
which is divided into two parts by longitudi 
nal slits, the edges of one-half being shown 
in full in this figure. 
Similar numbers of reference designate cor 
responding parts throughout. 
The measuring capacity of gages, con 
structed in the ordinary manner and adapted 
for making delicate measurements, is limited 
by the length of the traverse-screw which it 
is not practical to make in lengths equal to the 
thickness or diameter of large objects which 
it sometimes becomes necessary to measure. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
The variations between the extreme limits of 
measurement has therefore been very much 
restricted; to obviate this defect I have pro 
duced my present invention. 
In the drawings 5 represents a frame hav. 
ing the curved-arms 6 and 7. In the end of the 
arm 6 is adjustably mounted the anvil 8 the 
adjustment of which is controlled by the 
screw 9. The end of the arm 7 is perforated 
in axial alignment with the anvil 8, and ex 
tending from this arm, in an outward direc 
tion, is the sleeve 10 screw-threaded on its 
interior surface and furnished with suitably 
graduated scales on its outer surface, the bore 
of this sleeve being of greater diameter than 
the perforation in the arm 7 and extending 
Somewhat into the end of this arm. 
The traversing-screw is formed by a sleeve 
11 screw - threaded on its exterior surface to 
engage the Screw-thread on the interior sur 
face of the sleeve 10 and having a bore gen 
erally of a diameter equal to that of the per 
foration through the arm 7. The outer end of 
the sleeve 11 is formed in part with the base 
12 from beyond which extends the collar 13 
having the perforations 1, 2, and 3, while the 
casing 14, formed in part with or secured to 
the base 12, extends outside of the sleeves 
10 and 11 and has a beveled-end 15 suitably 
graduated. At the base of this casing is a 
knurled or roughened portion 16 by which 
the casing and the sleeve 11 may be rotated 
to traverse the same back and forth by the en 
gagement of the screw-thread on this sleeve 
with that on the sleeve 10. 
The measuring-post 17 is preferably made 
solid and is of a diameter slightly less than 
that of the perforation in the arm 7, so that 
this post may easily slide through the same; 
this post has a knurled end 18 by the assist 
ance of which it may be turned and adjusted 
to bring the transverse-perforations 1, 2, and 
3, in the post 17, opposite those of the collar 
13, so that the tapering-pin 19 passed through 
one of the holes in the collar may extend 
through the corresponding perforation in the 
post and secure the same. 
It is obvious that in place of securing the 
post 17 to the traversing-sleeve 11, by means 
of the collar 13 and the pin 19, the sleeve 11 
or the base 12 may be furnished with a clamp 
55 
75 
95 
OC 
2 
495,915 
scribed. 
- 
having its outer surface graduated, an inte 
rior sleeve having a screw-thread engaging 35 
with the thread of the first mentioned sleeve, 
and an indicator carried by the interior sleeve 
and traversable over the graduations of the 
exterior sleeve, of an adjustable measuring 
post carried by said interior sleeve, as de- 4o 
3. In a gage the combination with a frame 
having the arm 7 perforated at the end, the 
sleeve 10 extending from the arm having an 
interior screw-thread, the traversing - sleeve 45 
11 screw - threaded on its exterior surface to 
engage with the sleeve 10, and the base 12, 
casing 14 and collar 13 formed in part with 
said sleeve 11, of the adjustable post 17, and 
means for securing the same to the collar 13, so 
as described. 
4. The combination with the frame 5 hav 
ing the arms 6 and 7, and the traversing 
sleeve 11 contained within the sleeve 10 and 
having the base 12, the perforated collar 1355 
and casing 14, of the post 17 having trans 
verse perforations and the pin 19 for secur 
ing the post to the collar 13, as and for the 
purpose described. 
hand. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my Go 
FRANK SPALDING. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY J. MILLER, 
M. F. BLIGH. 
5 ly-tapering pin 19 as being more precise. 
ing-device or other securing means which will 
rigidly and securely grasp the post 17 at any 
point designated thereon. I prefer, however, 
to use the perforated-collar 13 and the slight 
The drawings show the improved gage in 
position to start from a diameter of one inch. 
As the perforations in the post 17 are shown 
to be one inch apart, the measuring post may 
Ic now be traversed back and forth for the length 
of the sleeve ill by the rotation of the casing 
14. Where it is desired to gage a diameter of 
less than one inch the post 17 is secured by 
the pin 19, being inserted through the perfo 
15 rations 1 of the collar and post, while if a di 
ameter greater than two inches is to begaged 
the pin is passed through the similar perfo 
rations 3. By this construction the anvil end 
of the frame is not obstructed by an addi 
2O,tional post and can be inserted through a 
smaller space when it becomes necessary to 
measure a stationary article. 
Having thus described inly invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
1. In a measuring - gage the combination 
with a traversing - indicator having a trans 
verse perforation, of an adjustable measur 
ing-post having a series of transverse perfo 
- 3o rations, and a pin for securing the post to 
said indicator. 
2. In a gage, the combination with a sleeve 
screw-threaded on its interior surface and 
25 Patent 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496015.txt	H. W. STONE, Jr. 
DUST COLLECTOR. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 25, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 496.015, 
? 
??- - 
t.****>','No.=========>>>>>>>>>>zzzzzz 
222:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2 
aeru: 
 
 
  
vaarayaaaaaya 
evX u S euS, 
- Zz/ 
The Norris reters co, PHOTO-litto, wash INGTON. C. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEMAN WARD STONE, JR, OF MORRIS, MINNESOTA. 
DUST CO 
LLECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed May 2, 1892, 
Patent No. 496,015, dated April 25, 1893. 
Serial No, 431,409, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HEMAN WARD STONE, 
Jr., of Morris, Stevens county, Minnesota, 
have invented certain Improvements in Dust 
Collectors, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
dust collecting devices adapted to be arranged 
as part of a purifier or separator, and consists 
in certain improved features of construction 
hereinafter more particularly described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a verti 
cal, longitudinal section of my improved col 
lector constructed as part of a purifier. Fig. 
2 is a similar view of the dust collector alone; 
taken on the line Z-Z of Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a 
cross section of the same taken on line X-X 
of Fig. 2, and Fig. 4 is a sectional detail of a 
modified construction of the auxiliary col 
lector. 
In the drawings A represents the separator 
or purifier, above, and as a part of which, is 
arranged the dust collector C, having connec 
tions establishing a circulating air system 
through both, The dust collector has a hori 
Zontal cylindrical case, through the axis of 
which extends the driving shaft 3, connected 
to a suitable source of power, and upon which, 
within the ends of the case, are mounted the 
fans 4 and 5. Air is admitted to the case 
through the circular opening 6in the end Wall 
8 around the shaft to the fan chamber 2, in 
which is arranged the fan 4, the Wings 7 of 
which rotate close to the inner Surface of the 
end wall but do not extend to the cylindrical 
wall 9. The circular wall or partition 10, ap 
proximately equal in diameter to the fan, is 
arranged parallel with the end wall 8, and 
concentric therewith, forming a fan chamber 
between, and leaving an annular space 11 
between its edge and the cylindrical Wall 9. 
Similarly at the other end of the case, and con 
stituting with the end wall 51 a fan chamber 
52 for the fan 5, is arranged the annular Wall 
53 having a circular, central opening 12 Some 
what larger than the opening 6. The Wings 
13 of the fan 5 are of larger Superficial area 
than the wings 7, and extend close to the cy 
lindrical wall 9. Arranged in the space be 
tween the Walls 10 and 53, with its ends Se 
cured thereto and concentric therewith, is the 
open end air cylinder D, provided with series 
of circumferential openings 14. The lips 15 of 
these openings are outturned, and the lips 16 
are inturned, so as to form air passages or in 
lets inclined in the direction of the rotation 
of the fans 4 and 5 in the wall 53, and its open 
end being closely connected therewith, its in 
terior has free communication with the fan 
chamber 52, as Well as by means of the open 
ingS 14, With the interior of the case. Near 
the bottom of the case, and running length 
wise thereof, between the walls 10 and 53, is 
arranged the slot 17, having its upper edge 
or lip 18 in turned so as to form an outlet 
from the case inclined in the direction of the 
rotation of the fans. This slot opens into 
the dust receiving chamber 19, which is pref 
erably a cylindrical case extending the length 
of the slot 17, and provided with the conveyer 
20. At one end of the receiving chamber 19, 
is arranged the outlet 21, the size of which is 
regulated by the sliding gate or valve 25, of 
the same form as the slot 17, but inclined in 
an opposite direction, so as to form a conven 
ient outlet for the dust laden air rotating in 
the chamber. This Outlet opens into an aux 
iliary dust collector or chamber 22, substan 
tially cylindrical in form, with the end walls 
of the lower part 23 constructed, as shown in 
Fig. 2, and with an outlet 24 at the bottom, 
inclined in the direction of the rotation of the 
air entering from the receiving chamber. Ar 
ranged parallel with the receiving chamber 
19, and With its open end at the axis of the 
chamber 22, is the pipe 26, leading to the 
chamber 27 at the end of the dust collector 
case, which is connected by the opening 6 
with the fan chamber 2. The inlet opening 
to the pipe 26 is controlled by means of the 
sliding gate or valve 28. In the opposite or 
outer Wall of the chamber 22, is arranged an 
air outlet 29 controlled by the sliding gate or 
valve 30. 
In Some cases I prefer to dispense with the 
conveyer 20 in the receiving chamber 19, and 
employ the modified construction shown in 
detail Fig. 4. Instead of the pipe 26, shown 
in Fig. 2, I provide the pipe 33, arranged co 
axially in the receiving chamber 19, and com 
municating with the chamber 27. The end 
next to the chamber 22 is fitted with a funnel 
25 
35 
45 
50 
OO 
2 
shaped inlet pipe 34 telescoping with it, and 
which is moved to and fro in it to enlarge or 
constrict the passage 35 between it and the 
walls of the chamber 19, thus controlling the 
outlet from the chamber to the auxiliary col 
lector. At the opposite end of the pipe 33, is 
a sliding gate 50, for controlling the amount 
of air passing through it. When this gate is 
partially or wholly closed, the gate 30 may be 
opened to provide for a suitable discharge of 
air at that point. 
Operation: The shaft 3 being rotated by 
the application of suitable power in the direc 
tion indicated by the arrows in Fig. 3, the fan 
4 draws the air from the chamber 27 through 
the opening 6, into the fan chamber 2, thence 
forcing it through the annular opening 11 
into the interior of the case. It rotates there 
in circumferentially at a high speed, the cen 
trifugal force carrying the dust particles of 
greater specific gravity than the air, outward 
through the slot17 into the receiving chamber 
19. This operation is assisted by the fan 5, 
which having greater power than the fan 4, 
serves to exhaust the air from the case and 
create a partial vacuum therein, thus increas 
ing the difference between the specific grav 
ity of the air and that of the dust particles, 
whereby they are more efficiently separated 
from it, than is the case when the air is of nor 
malgravity, orcompressed. Theairexhaust 
ed from the case passes through the openings 
14 in the wall of the cylinder D, thence out 
ward through the open end and the outlet 12, 
to the fan chamber 52, and thence through 
the outlet pipe 32, as shown in Fig. 3, or into 
the purifier as shown in Fig. 1. The dust 
laden air, as it passes into the chamber 19, has 
a rotating motion, and the outlet of the cham 
ber being at one end, when the conveyer is 
not used, this motion is transformed into a 
spiral motion, thus carrying the dust along 
the chamber, to its outlet. This is inclined 
in the direction of the whirling or rotating 
motion of the air, So as to give it the freest 
passage, while the funnel, in the construction 
shown in Fig. 4, tends to deflect it still more. 
The dust is thus carried into the auxiliary col 
lector with the same whirling or rotating mo 
tion, and discharged through the inclined out 
let. The partially purified air is taken from 
the center of the auxiliary collector and con 
veyed back to the chamber 27 and thence 
again through the main collector, or the gate 
28 may be closed and the purified air dis 
charged through the opening 29, or the air 
may be allowed to escape in both directions. 
Where the collector is used as shown in Fig. 1, 
in connection with a purifier, the air is caused 
to circulate from the purifier up through its 
screen 31, and thence to the dust collector, the 
purified air being conveyed downward from 
the collector, and into the purifier again. 
I claim 
1. In a dust collector, the combination with 
the cylindrical case, of a cylindrical chamber 
at each end thereof, a perforate cylinder ar 
2 ? 
35 
40 
45 
55 
496,015 
ranged co-axially in said case and extending 
from one of said chambers to the other, one 
of said chambers having an air inlet and an 
outlet communicating with said case outside 
of said perforate cylinder, and the other cham 
ber communicating with the interior of said 
perforate cylinder and having a suitable out 
let, a forcing fan in the first chamber and an 
exhaust fan of greater power in the second 
chamber, substantially as described. 
2. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with the cylindrical case, of the 
fan chamber in each end thereof, a central 
air inlet to one chamber through the end of 
the case, and an air outlet from the other 
chamber, an annular opening from the first 
fan chamber to the interior of the case next 
its cylindrical wall, the perforate cylinder 
fixed between the fan chamber with its open 
end communicating with the second fan 
chamber, and a fan in each of said chambers, 
the one in the second chamber being of greater 
power than the other, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a device of the class described; the 
combination with the cylindrical case having 
an inclined, slotted dust outlet near its bot 
tom and longitudinal thereof, the fan cham 
ber in each end thereof, the forcing fan in 
one chamber, communicating openings be 
tween said chambers and the intermediate 
portion of the case, and the exhaust fan in 
the other chamber of greater power than the 
forcing fan, both adapted to carry the air 
through the case with high rotative velocity, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with the cylindrical case having 
a fan chamber at each end communicating 
there with, of the fan in one chamber adapted 
to force the air into said case, and cause it to 
rotate circumferentially therein with a high 
velocity, the longitudinal slot in said case 
having the edges bent so as to form a pas 
sage therethrough inclined in the direction of 
the rotation of said air, the hollow cylinder 
fixed co-axially in said case, the openings 
through the walls thereof inclined in the di. 
rection of the rotation of said air, and the ex 
haust fan in the other chamber of greater 
power than said first fan, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. In a dust collector, the combination of 
the perforate cylinder, the inclosing case 
therefor, the fan chamber in one end having 
an outlet into said case outside said cylinder, 
the fan chamber at the other end communi 
cating with the interior of said cylinder, and 
a fan in each of said chambers, substantially 
as described. 
6. In a dust collector, the combination with 
the cylindrical case, of a fan chamber in each 
end thereof, the air inlet, in the center of one 
end of the case communicating with the ad 
jacent chamber, the annular outlet from said 
chamber adjacent to the side wall of the case, 
the perforate cylinder fixed co-axially in said 
75 
go 
95 
00 
?? 5 
IO 
If 5 
20 
I 25 
I30 
 
496,0i5 
3 
ing a peripheral dust outlet, and an axial air 35 
outlet, substantially as described. 
10. The combination with the cylindrical 
dust collector having a slotted dustoutlet lon 
gitudinal thereof, of a cylindrical receiving 
chamber parallel and communicating there 
With by means of said slot, an auxiliary col 
lector at one end of said receiving chamber 
having a peripheral dust outlet, and an axial 
air outlet, and a pipe connecting said outlet 
with the inlet to the main collector, substan- 45 
tially as described. 
11. The combination with the cylindrical 
dust collector having a longitudinally slotted 
dust outlet, of the receiving chamber parallel 
with said collector and communicating there- 5o 
with by means of said outlet, the auxiliary 
dust collector at one end of said receiving 
chamber, but of greater diameter, having a 
peripheral dust outlet, the air outlet pipe 
arranged axially in said receiving chamber 
and communicating with said auxiliary dust 
collector, and leading to the inlet to the main 
collector, and means for regulating the size 
of the opening between said receiving cham 
ber and said auxiliary dust collector, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
55 
?? 
O 
2 ? 
25 
ease between said chambers, and communi 
cating with the second chamber, the air out 
let from said second chamber, the forcing fan 
in the first chamber and the more powerful 
exhaust fan in said second chamber, substan 
tially as described. 
7. In a dust collector, the combination with 
the cylindrical case, of means for forcing the 
air into said case with a high rotative velocity, 
a longitudinal slot in said case, having its 
edges bent to form an outlet inclined in the 
direction of the rotation of the airin the case, 
the dust receiving chamber communicating . 
with said opening and provided with a valve 
Controlled outlet, an auxiliary dust collector 
communicating with said outlet, and an air 
pipe communicating with said auxiliary col 
lector, and with the inlet to said case, sub 
stantially as described. 
8. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with the main dust collector and 
a dust receiving chamber connected there 
with, of the auxiliary dust collector having 
Valve controlled communication with said 
dust receiving chamber, a peripheral dust 
outlet, and an air outlet pipe connecting said 
auxiliary collector with said main collector, 
substantially as described. 
9. The combination with the cylindrical 
dust collector having a slotted dust outlet lon 
gitudinal thereof, of the cylindrical dust re 
ceiving chamber parallel and communicating 
there with by means of said dust outlet, and 
an auxiliary collector at one end thereof hav 
HEMAN WARD STONE, JR. 
In presence of 
L. F. STONE, 
O. W. FINNEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496115.txt	(No Model,) 
No. 496,ll 5, 
J. S. FOX. 
RAILROAD TIE PLATE, 
Patented Apr. 25, 1893. 
62 
 
As 
 
 
 
 
THE Morris Peters co, photo-liro, Washington, a.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES S. FOX, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
RAILROAD TE PLATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 496,115, dated April 25, 1898. 
Application filed October 13, 1892, Serial No,448,744 (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES S. FOX, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Detroit, 
county of Wayne, State of Michigan, have in 
vented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Railroad-Tie Plates; and I declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in a railroad tie plate, 
and it consists of the device hereinafter speci 
fied and claimed, and illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of plate in perspec 
tive; Fig. 2 an inverted view in perspective. 
Fig. 3 is a similar view of a modification. Fig. 
4 shows the engagement of the plate upon the 
tie, beneath the rail in plan, and Fig. 5 is a 
vertical cross section on the line ac-ac Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 is a modification of the device shown 
in Fig. 1. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
railroad tie plate of improved construction, 
which shall possess greater simplicity, econ 
ofhy and efficiency than those heretofore em 
ployed. 
To these ends Icarry out my invention as foll 
A represents my improved tie plate. B a 
railway tie, on which the same is located, and 
C denotes a railway rail located upon said 
plate. The plate is constructed with ribs a, 
preferably two in number, struck from the 
body of the plate and bent downwardly there 
from, leaving the edges of the plate intact and 
in a flat condition. The striking out said ribs 
is effected by cutting down the plate on three 
sides intermediate the edges of said plate, and 
turning downward the rib so cut, along the 
edge left integral with the plate, leaving an 
orifice ct' in the formation of each rib. 
These orifices may be of angular or other de 
sired form. By striking out an angularshaped 
rib, there is formed an entering point thereon, 
as at a, and in entering the tie, the flange 
has a shear cut. But I do not limit myself to 
any particular form of the pb or correspond 
ing orifice. The plate may e made of metal, 
lows: 
- 
either forged, stamped or cut or otherwise, as 
I do not limit myself to any particular man 
ner of manufacturing the same. 
My invention contemplates the formation 
of the ribs at such parts of the plate, that the 
rail when secured thereupon will cover said 
orifices entirely with the exception of a small 
portion at the outward extremities thereof 
sufficient to receive a spike D, which when 
driven home, fills and covers said orifices at 
the outer extremities thereof, so that the said 
orifices are completely covered by the rail 
and the head of the spikes. 
Another great advantage in said tie plate 
consists in the obvious fact that the ribs which 
are driven into the wood are in such a position 
that the grain of the wood where the ribs en 
ter is covered and protected from the weather 
by the plate and the rails and spike head, so 
that the wood where the ribs enter is not ex 
posed to damage and decay as where the wood 
is not so protected. 
If desired additional holes 'a' for addi 
tional spikes may be struck out of the plate 
as shown in Fig. 3. In striking out the plate 
for said spike holes a, the metal may be 
cut so as to be pressed upward to form two up 
wardly projecting flanges, as shown in dotted 
lines at a, a in Fig. 2. These flanges 
a', a, it will be seen, will extend upward 
against the sides of the under flange of the 
rail, and act as a brace to hold the rail more 
firmly in place. 
As shown in Fig.1, I contemplate as coming 
within the scope of my invention, if desired, 
to strike out from the plate ears a or a, 
the ears a, a being slight modifications 
one of another. The ear 'a' as shown is cut 
out on a circle and bent upward and inward, 
suitably to overlap the adjacent edge of the 
lower flange of the rail. The eara is simi 
lar, but is cut out and bent of a little differ 
ent shape. The plate provided with said ears 
may be applied under a rail by turning the 
plate at an acute angle to the rail until the 
edges of the flange of the rail are engaged un 
der tie ears, when the plate may be turned at 
right angles to the rail, or in required position. 
As shown in Fig. 6, I prefer to provide the 
plate with angular shaped ears a made 
three-sided, the edges e, e of opposite ears 
being parallel one with the other and the ears 
...-- 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
 
496,115 
''f''f'' of opposite ears also being parallel. 
This construction will obviously facilitate the 
application of the plates underneath the rails. 
Instead of the ears being three sided, they 
might be made V-shaped, as indicated in 
dotted lines Fig. 6. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A tie plate provided with downwardly 
projecting ribs struck therefrom, forming ori 
fices a' in the body of the plate, said ori 
fices arranged to receive a spike at the outer 
extremity of each, and to be covered through 
out their remaining portion by the railway 
rail, substantially as set forth. 
2. A tie plate provided with downwardly 
O 
15 
projecting ribs struck therefrom, forming 
elongated orifices a' in the body of the 
plate, and with an ear projecting upward from 
the plate to engage the edge of the lower 
flange of the rail, said plate kerfed and struck 
upward outside said kerf to form said ear, 
said kerf formed at the inner edge of said 
ear, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES S, FOX. 
Witnesses: 
N. S. WRIGHT, 
IEE BURT. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496215.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 496,215, 
W. H. ADAMS. 
CAR, ATTACHER 
Patented Apr. 25, 1893. 
 
4 
N 
. C3 
E. 
sist 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. ADAMS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
CARATTACHE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 496,215, dated April 25, 1893. 
Application filed February 13, 1891, Serial No. 381,403, (No model.} 
: 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM H. ADAMS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Chicago, county of Cook, and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful De 
vice for the Purpose of Attaching a Car or Cars 
to a Moving Train, of which the following is a 
specification and explanation. 
The object of this invention is to enable a 
train running either on elevated surface or 
other roads, to take on or let of passengers 
or freight or both at any station, where it may 
be placed, without the necessity of stopping, 
said train, thus effecting a great saving in the 
running time of such train. Iaccomplish this 
result in the following manner with the mech 
anism shown in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a top view of the machine show 
ing its relation to the main track, and to the 
switch or siding at the station where it is de 
sired to, take on and let off, cars. Fig. 2 
shows a vertical section of the device together 
with an end view of the main track showing 
the position of the machine in regard to it. 
In the following description like letters re 
fer to like parts of the device. 
In the drawings S represents the siding on 
which is the car to be attached to the rear of 
a train moving toward the observer on the 
main track T. The exchange of cars is made 
in the following manner: The car to be left 
at the station, is uncoupled from the train, 
before it reaches the switch h over which it 
runs onto the siding S, its speed being regu 
lated with a brake by the man in charge. As 
the remainder of the train passes along the 
main track, a suitable catch placed under the 
rear car, comes in contact with the stop-block 
d, attached to the endless chain c which passes 
along the center of the track between the 
guide rails (i. i. Fig. 2) and over the pulleys 
b and c, thus imparting the motion of the 
train through the pulley b, and the shaft f to 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
the conical drum a, to the smaller end of 
which the ropeg is fastened, the other end of 
g being attached to the car on the siding S. 
Now, the diameter of the smaller end of the 
drum a, being much less than the diameter 
of the pulley b it follows that the motion first 
imparted to the car on siding S will be much 
less than that of the train on T but, as the 
rope g is wound up toward the larger end of 
the drum a, the speed will rapidly increase 
until it reaches a point where the diameter of 
a exceeds the diameter of b when the speed 
of the car on S will be greater than the speed 
of the train on T. By a proper adjustment 
of the ropeg and the stop-block d the car on 
S will pass in behind the train on Tand over 
the switch connecting thesiding with the main 
track at i and overtake the train on the main 
track, when it can be attached to the train by 
the ordinary automatic couplers now in use. 
The shock at connecting, being caused by the 
greater speed of the car, will be slight and 
easily regulated. The stop-block d in pass 
ing over the pulley b will disengage itself 
from the train and be returned to its former 
position by a counter-balance attached to the 
rope g. The proper coiling of the rope g on 
the drum a is secured by the spiral flange or 
groove shown on the drum a, Automatic 
switches will connect both ends of the siding 
S with the main track T but they form no 
part of this invention. 
I claim 
The machine herein-before described com 
prising the conical drum as shown at a re 
volved by means of an endless chain con 
nected with the moving train by means of a 
stop-block and catch all substantially as de 
scribed and illustrated here with. 
Chicago, December 20, 1890. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. H. ADAMS. 
ALICE D. ADAMS, 
M. J. ADAMS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496315.txt	(No Model, 
No. 496,315, 
 
 
 
 
83 
P. H. MACK, 
- 
SWIVEL BAR FOR TEMPER SOREWS, 
Patented Apr. 25, 1893. 
 
(S 
Ozze444- 
As 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PATRICK H. MACK, OF BRADFORD, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SWIVE BAR FOR TEMPERS CREWS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 496,815, dated April 25, 1893. 
Application filed March 31, 1890, Serial No. 346,132, (No model.) 
45 
o 
75 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PATRICK H. MACK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brad 
ford, in the county of McKean and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Temper-Screws for 
Drilling Oil and Artesian Wells, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to obviate 
the necessity of cutting and welding the links 
used to connect the rope clamp to the swivel 
bar ordinarily used, and also to obviate the 
necessity of taking the temper screw apart 
when it is necessary to repair or replace the 
links or swivel bar which becomes worn by 
the constant jar of the drilling tools, and my 
invention consists in forming slots or re 
cesses in the upper edge of the swivel bar, in 
providing said slots with metal or other bush 
ings which can be easily removed when they 
have become worn, and in holding the bush 
ings in place by means of cap plates secured 
to the swivel bar. 
Referring to the drawings:-Figure I is a 
view of a temper screw showing my inven 
tion applied thereto. Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
view of the swivel bar. Fig. 3 is a top view 
of the same with the cap plate removed. 
Figs. 4, 5 and 6 are detail views. 
1 represents the frame of a temper screw 
provided with the usual eye 2 for suspending 
the screw. The frame is bifurcated at 3inor 
der that the screw may be raised or lowered by 
the arms 4, and 5 is a yoke for clamping the 
screw in its raised or lowered position. Di 
rectly beneath the arms 4 is the swivel bar 6 
to which is secured by means of the links 7 
the rope clamp 8. The swivel bar 6 is pro 
vided with a slot or recess 9 in each of its 
wings 6 which are adapted to receive and 
form a seat for a bushing 10. The bushing 
10 which may be of steel or other suitable 
material, is provided with a groove 11, of the 
same width as the edge of the swivel bar, and 
also the flanges 12, the object of which is to 
prevent the bushing from being displaced 
laterally from its seat in the swivel bar. 
13 represents a cap plate which is secured 
to the swivel bar by means of the bolts or 
screws 14 and is used to hold the bushing se 
curely on to its seat and to prevent the links 
7 from becoming disengaged from the swivel 
bar. 
It will be seen from the above description 
that my improved swivel bar overcomes all 
"of the difficulties arising from the use of the 
ordinary swivel bar. After the bushings or 
links have become worn they can be quickly 
and easily replaced, thus saving a great dea 
of time and expense. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is-. 
1. In a temper screw for drilling wells the 
combination of the frame, the screw supported 
in said frame, and the swivel bar for sup 
porting the links of the rope clamp, said 
swivel bar being provided with the slotted or 
recessed wings and the detachable cap plate 
whereby the rope clamp links may be readily 
detached substantially as set forth. 
2. In a temper screw for drilling wells, the 
combination of the frame, the screw supported 
in said frame, and the swivel bar for support 
ing the links of the rope clamp, said swivel 
bar being provided with the recessed or 
slotted wings, bushings formed with the 
groove 11 and flanges 12 fitting in said re 
cesses or slots, and a cap plate for securely 
holding the bushings in place, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
PATRICK H. MACK. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES C. BOYCE, 
HENRY WEISKETTLE. 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496415.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. JARMIN. 
CHECK ROW CORN PLANTER ATTACHMENT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 496,415, 
Patented May 2, 1893. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 496,415. 
Patented May 2, 1893. 
J. B. JARMIN. 
CHECK ROW CORN PLANTER ATTACHMENT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES B. JARMIN, OF OSCEOLA, NEBRASKA. 
CHECK-ROW CORN PLAN TER ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 496,415, dated May 2, 1893, 
Application filed December 3, 1892, Serial No. 453,994, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JAMESB. JARMIN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Osceola, 
in the county of Polk and State of Nebraska, 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
provements in Check-Row Corn-Planter At 
tachments; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention has relation to check-row at 
tachments for corn planters, and among the 
objects in view is to provide an attachment of 
the class described that is extremely simple 
in construction, inexpensive to manufacture, 
adapted to work successfully over rough 
ground, and that may be readily attached to 
any ordinary planter. 
A further object of the invention is to dis 
pense with the use of the ordinary check-row 
Wire, and with the described and other objects 
in view, the invention consists in the construc 
tion, arrangement and combination of parts, 
all as hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the appended claims. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a plan view of 
my improved check-row attachment and so 
much of an ordinary planter as is necessary 
to illustrate the application of my invention 
Fig. 2 is a vertical section thereof 
thereto. 
on the line ac-ac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a side ele 
vation of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a detail view on an 
enlarged scale of part of the mechanism for 
actuating the slide-plate. 
Referring to said drawings, A indicates a 
sled frame of an ordinary corn planter pro 
vided with the usual runners B. Upon the 
frame A at the desired distance apart are 
adapted to be mounted suitable seed boxes 
(not shown). 
D indicates the ordinary slide-plate which 
extends transversely of the machine and is 
adapted to control the dropping of the seed 
in the usual manner, the ends of the slide 
plate being adapted to slide between the seed 
plates Cand the bottoms Cof the seed-boxes. 
If desired the lower plates C might in prac 
O 
25 
35 
45 
tice, be made to constitute the dropping plates, 
and the upper plates C, the bottoms of the . 
seed boxes. In fact, any construction and 
55 
arrangement of seed-boxes and dropping 
plates may be employed, provided the drop 
ping of the corn can be controlled by the slide 
plate as usual in this class of planters. 
E are the seed tubes which communicate at 
their upper ends with the openings in th 
seed plates. 
For the purpose of actuating the slide-plate 
at determined intervals during the progress 
of the planter across the field and simulta 
neously marking the hills that have been 
dropped, I employ the following mechanism, 
constituting my improved attachment:-Ex 
tending transversely of the planter frame and 
projecting some distance beyond the sides of 
the latter is a shaft F said shaft being pro 
vided toward its outer ends with bearing 
blocks G, which are mounted in curved guides 
H secured to the frame A of the attachment 
secured to the planter frame, and which 
blocks are adapted to freely move within 
the guides for a purpose presently apparent. 
Rigidly secured upon the shaft at the outer 
ends thereof are the spider wheels II, which 
are adapted to serve as marker wheels for 
marking the hills that have been dropped, 
and for this purpose each of said wheels is 
provided with four marker plates or spurs K, 
secured to the alternate arms of said wheels. 
The marker wheels are made of suitable size 
to adapt them to travel upon the ground and, 
by means of the markers to mark the ground 
at points adjacent to the hills that have been 
dropped. Secured upon the shaft Finterme 
diate the guides, is a sprocket wheel L which 
is geared by a sprocket chain M to a sprocket 
wheel N mounted upon one end of a short 
shaft Ojournaled in bearing arms Psecured 
to the frame. Secured to the shaft Obetween 
the arms P are crank arms Q. Q integral 
with each other, and arranged diametrically 
opposite to each other as shown. The outer 
end of each arm. Q and Q is provided with a 
triangular shaped head or spur R the inclined 
bearing face r, of each of which is adapted to 
actuate in the manner presently described, a 
U-shaped rock arm or lever Spivotally Sup 
ported in the upper end of a short standard 
T secured to the frame A. The branch s, of 
95 
Ioo 
 
496,415 
O 
arm S enters a perforation in the slide plate 
D, and the other branch S' of said arm S is 
bent rearwardly to form a crank arm V which 
is provided with an antifriction roller W. 
The relative positions of the crank arm V and 
roller W with respect to the arms Q Q' is 
Such that when the latter arms are turned 
in the direction of the arrow, the bearing 
face r of arm Q will strike against roller W. 
and swing the lever S in one direction and 
with it simultaneously the slide plate D until 
the bearing face of arm. Q clears the roller W. 
The bearing face of arm Q' next strikes the 
roller W and swings the lever S and with it 
the slide plate in the opposite direction. This 
operation of reciprocating the slide plate con 
tinues during the progress of the planter 
across the field, two hills of corn being simul 
taneously dropped at each sliding movement 
of the plate-one from each of the seed 
boxes. 
The actuating mechanism for the slide plate 
and the markers on the marker wheels are 
So arranged relatively to each other that at 
the moment the hills are dropped a marker 
of each wheel will be on the ground and mark 
the same adjacent to said hills. 
The marker wheels are mounted upon the 
shaft F at such a distance beyond the sides 
of the frame that they will be half way be 
tween the row that is planted and the next 
row, So that one of said marker wheels trav 
els back in the track made by the other wheel 
When the planter is traveling in the opposite 
direction across the field, whereby the corn 
will be dropped straight both ways. 
By reason of the bearing blocks G being 
loosely seated in the guides H the shaft F 
will be permitted to rise and fall owing to in 
equalities in the ground, without interfering 
with the dropping operation. For the pur 
pose of maintaining the marker wheels in 
contact with the ground, I employ coiled 
SpringS X adjacent to the guides, one end of 
each of said springs being secured to the 
frame A and the opposite end to sleeves Y 
mounted upon the shaft F. 
The sprocket wheel L is twice the diameter 
of the like wheel N, so that the shaft O will 
be revolved twice during each revolution of 
the main shaft F. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
25 
35 
65 
1. In a check row attachment for corn plant 
ers, the combination of a marker wheelshaft, 55 
marker wheels mounted upon said shaft, bear 
ing blocks on said shaft, curved guides ar 
ranged near opposite ends of the shaft and in 
which guides said blocks are slidingly mount 
ed, coiled springs arranged near the ends of 
the shaft and acting upon the same to nor 
mally maintain it in allowered position, a rock 
arm or lever, a revoluble shaft having arms 
adapted to successively actuate the rock arm 
in opposite directions, a sprocket wheel upon 
said shaft, a second sprocket wheel upon the 
marker wheel shaft, and a chain gearing said 
sprocket wheels together. 
2. In a check-row attachment for corn plant 
ers, the combination with a marker wheel 
shaft, marker wheels mounted upon said shaft, 
guides in which said marker wheel shaft is 
slidingly mounted, coiled springs secured to 
the attachment frame, alud adapted to main 
tain the marker wheels upon the ground, a 
rock-arm or lever, a shaft provided with arms 
adapted to actuate said rock arm in opposite 
directions, a sprocket-wheel upon said shaft, 
a second sprocket-wheel upon the marker 
wheel shaft, and a chain gearing said sprocket 
wheels together, for the purpose specified. 
3. In a check-row attachment for corn plant 
ers, the combination of the frame, the up 
wardly-extending guides, the marker wheel 
shaft, slidingly mounted in said guides, 
marker wheels mounted upon said shaft, 
sleeves upon said shaft, coiled springs Secured 
at one end to the said sleeves and at the op 
posite end to the frame, rearwardly-extend 
ing arms secured to said frame, a shaft mount 
ed in said arms, arms mounted upon the lat 
ter shaft and provided each with an inclined 
bearing face a standard on the frame, a rock 
arm or lever mounted on said standard and 
adapted to be operated by the bearing faces 
in the manner described, a sprocket-wheel 
mounted upon the shaft carrying the said op 
erating arms, a Sprocket wheel on the marker 
wheel shaft, and a chain gearing said sprocket 
wheels together, for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
85 
95 
OO 
75 
JAMES B. JARMIN. 
Witnesses: 
EUGENE A. WALROTH, 
J. A. SHEESKY. 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496515.txt	J. A. G-LEIXNER & P. SCHAFF, 
SEED SOWER. 
Patented May 2, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 496,515. 
SSAS 2 
1. Ma 
M 
M 
11/72% 
M/// / / 
// / / / / 77 
/a" , 7%9.3 
ETHE SEs. 
AIEH re. 
R 
h 
2. 
2. 
v. Ea 
a 2 
5. 
NI 
s 
S-24 
: 
R8 
 
he NORRIS Peters co, PHoro-LTHo washingro... c. 
O 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. A. GLEIXNER, OF FAIR HAVEN, AND PETERSCHAFF, OF BALDWIN, 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
SEED -SOWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 496,515, dated May 2, 1893. 
Application filed July 28, 1892, Serial No. 441482, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that we, JOSEPHA. GLETXNER, 
of Fair Haven, and PETER SCHAFF, of Bald 
win township, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Seed-Sowers; and 
We do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof. 
Our invention relates to seed sowers, being 
more especially adapted for use in the sowing 
of garden and like seeds by hand, though, of 
Course, certain improvements may be em 
ployed for power operated sowers. 
. It has for its object to provide for the sow. 
ing of different rows of seeds of different 
kinds from the same hopper and close to each 
other, and the regulation of distances be 
tween the seed sown, the marking of the course 
of the Sower so as to guide the operator in 
Sowing the seed along the same line, and cer 
tain other improvements which will be here 
inafter more particularly set forth. 
The Special points of invention desired to 
be covered will be hereinafter set forth and 
claimed. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use our invention, we will describe the 
Same referring to the accompanying draw 
ings in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of our improved 
Seed Sower. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section 
through the hopper. Fig. 3 is a top or plan 
view, the hopper being removed. Fig. 4 is a 
section on the line 4-4, Fig.1 looking toward 
the rear. Fig. 5 is a detail section on the line 
5-5, Fig. 3. Figs, 6 and 7 are end views of 
the hopper looking at the front and rear ends 
respectively, and Fig. 8 is a view of the seg 
mental bearing. 
Like letters of reference indicate-like parts 
in each of the figures of the drawings. 
The seed Sower has the frame A on which 
the hopper B is supported, said hopper Bhav. 
ing the lid B' which can be locked by the 
spring lock B, the frame having at the for 
Ward end the wheel C and at the rear end the 
roller D, while depending from the frame are 
the drills to which the seed is fed from the 
hopper and by which it is sown. 
We will first describe the method of sup 
porting the machine so as to regulate the 
depth of the drilling operation or to raise the 
drills out of the ground. For this purpose at 
the forward end of the frame A is the seg 
mental bearing a through which the shaft or 
axle c passes, this segmental bearing being Se 
cured to the arm extending out or forming part 
of the frame by means of a suitable SOcket 
or connection, and having one of its faces 
a serrated or roughened so as to engage With 
the box c' through which the axle C passes, 
such box having lips c' extending along the 
opposite side of the outer rim a of the Seg 
mental bearing so as to guide the movement 
of the box within the segmental bearing, while 
the box c' has also seats c' in the inner face 
which travels opposite to the serrated face a', 
and the box can be locked at any point along 
the segmental bearing by pins or like devices 
entering the depressions in the serrated face 
a' and the seats c of the box c', so locking 
and holding the axle at any particular point 
vertically with relation to the body of the 
frame. 
The segmental bearing a is preferably made 
on or on a line from a radius from the shaft 
of the feeding roll within the hopper herein 
after referred to, but as the movement could 
not be large, and a chain connection is neces 
sarily employed, the bearing may be simply 
a vertically slotted bearing to permit of the 
vertical adjustment between the frame and 
the driving wheel C. 
For the adjustment of the machine at the 
opposite end, the roller D is mounted in a ver 
tically moving frame d which moves in the 
guide-ways d' in the frame A and is adjusted 
vertically as desired by means of the screw 
bar d? which is turned by the hand wheel di 
and passes through the threaded portion d' 
which forms part of the main frame, or is se 
cured thereto. By these means the body of 
the frame may be adjusted vertically so as to 
cause the drills to enter the ground to any de 
sired extent according as it is desired to SOW 
the seed to any particular depth, or when the 
machine is being transported from place to 
place by the vertical adjustment of the driv 
ing wheel and the roller the drills can belifted 
entirely out of the ground and supported SO 
that they do not interfere with the movement 
of the Sower. It will be noticed that the roller 
35 
45 
 
 
75 
55 
90 
95 
OO 
496,515 
O 
D is directly back of the seed drills. This 
roller is made of the full width of the furrows 
or course of the drills, and its purpose is to 
roll over the ground traversed by the drills 
and cover the seed and sufficiently compact 
the ground to insure the proper inclosing of 
the seed therein. 
For the purpose of sowing the seed, we em 
ploy in the hopper B a pocket roll E, which 
roll has several rows of pockets e extending 
around the same, the number of rows of pock 
ets corresponding to the number of seed drills, 
being five in the machine illustrated, and the 
shaft e' on said roll extends out at one side 
of the machine through the bearings formed 
therefor on the machine frame and carries 
the Sprocket wheels fff of different diame 
ters, which sprocket wheels are connected by 
the Sprocket chain F to the sprocket wheels 
9 g g which may be operated in any suitable 
Way SO as to connect the driving wheel and 
Sprocket and through the chain F drive the 
pocket roll in the hopper. 
The clutch memberg is shown as operated 
by means of a lever h which extends down 
from the upper end of the handles H and is 
connected by means of a link h to the clutch 
memberg so that by turning the lever h the 
clutch can be operated either to connect or 
disconnect the shaft c with the clutch g on 
the driving wheel c as may be desired. The 
lever, h may, of course, belocked at h in the 
position desired so as to hold the wheel in or 
Out of engagement. The pocket roll E fits 
snugly within the semi-circular seat b form 
ing the base of the hopper and on one side of 
Said seat opposite to the pockets in the pocket 
roll are the grooves b' which lead down to the 
discharge openings b which communicate 
with the seed drillsk, said seed drills beingse 
cured to a plate k' adapted to be secured to 
the base of the machine and having inlets 
adapted to coincide with the outlet openings 
b of the hopper, the seed being directed from 
these openings either vertically down through 
the drills or forward or back, as desired. The 
drills can, of course, be made of suitable 
metal, and have at the lower ends the plowsk 
to enable them properly to enter the ground. 
In order to divide the hopper into a series 
of chambers corresponding with the number 
of rows of pockets in the pocket roll, and also 
to arrange S0 that the machine may feed the 
Same Seed through two or more of the rows 
of pockets, we provide the hopper with the 
removable partitions i which enter longitudi 
nal grooves or seats i' formed for their recep 
tion, and SO divide the hopper into a series of 
compartments corresponding to the number 
of rows of pockets in the pocket roll. 
For the proper operation of the drill as it is 
necessary to provide for the quick discharge 
of the seed from any one of these compart 
ments, we have arranged the spring operated 
shutterl, a series of such shutters correspond 
ing to the number of compartments within 
the hopper being formed along the one side 
thereof so that in case it is desired to dis 
charge the seed from the hopper or from any 
compartment thereof, such shutter may be 
raised and let the seed pass from the same 
over the inclined face l' below which it may 
be received into any suitable receptacle. 
The construction of the shutters is more 
clearly shown in the longitudinal section, 
Fig. 4, the shutters being mounted on the pin 
or bearing 72 while the springs l are mounted 
around the shaft land press on the real' or 
outer face of the shutters to hold them in con 
tact with the wheel. 
In order to prevent any seeds from passing 
down from the hopper, except those which 
have entered within the pockets of the pocket 
roll, we provide the flexible apron p Which 
bears upon the surface of the pocket roll and 
sweeps over the same in such way as to pre 
vent any seed from passing from the hopper 
to the grooves b'. And in order to regulate 
he pressure of said flexible apron 2), accord 
ing to the size of the seed sown, so as to bear 
more or less firmly upon the pocket, Wese 
cule the apron p in an apron carrier p and 
which is mounted on the inner face of the 
hopper and which has the nut p" extending 
outwardly therefrom, the nut engaging with 
a screw bar p8 which is turned by a hand wheel 
p', by means of which the apron carrier may 
be raised and lowered. 
In the operation of these seed Sowers it is 
desirable to mark in some way the course of 
movement of the machine so that as the ma 
chine next passes along the course the Oper 
ator can guide it parallel with the last course 
traveled, and for this purpose we employ the 
markers in mounted on the shaft m'. On the 
frame A, which markers extend out some 
what beyond the machine and are adapted to 
scrape on the surface of the soil and so mark 
the course of the machine. The markers are 
rigidly secured to the shaft n' and that shaft 
has a seat a shown in the longitudinal Sec 
tion (Fig. 5), which engages with a spring 
pawl in so as to hold one of the markers in a 
downward position when in use, but upon 
freeing the spring pawl from the seat in, the 
shaft ma' with its markers may be turned up 
out of the way, as is shown in Fig. 3. 
In the operation of the machine the seeds 
are fed to the hopper which may be divided 
into several compartments by removable par 
titions i, and in transporting the machine to 
the place where it is to be used, the wheel C 
may be adjusted in the segmental or slot bear 
ings a, and the roller D may be lowered by 
the hand wheel p so as to raise the drills ?c 
above the ground and provide for the easy 
transportation of the Sower. 
The machine may be adjusted by means of 
different sizes of sprocket wheels so as to give 
the feeding pocket any desired movement with 
relation to the length of movement of the ma 
chine feeding the seeds at any distance apart, 
say, from one-half inch upward, this being ac 
complished by the adjustment of the sprocket 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
496,515 . 
chain upon any desired sprocket wheels, such 
as the wheels ff'f'' and g g g. In locking, 
however, according to the seed which is to be 
sown, the pocket roll may be changed, pro 
viding one with deep pockets, shallow pock 
ets, pockets close or far from each other, as 
may be found desirable, this being easily ac 
complished by lifting the upper part of the 
hopper from the frame and inserting the roll 
and securing the hopper again in position. 
By raising the roller D and the driving 
wheel C in their frame or bearing, the ma 
chine is adjusted to cause the drills to enter 
the ground to any desired distance, and as the 
machine is pushed forward by means of the 
handles H, when the operator desires to sow 
the seed he throws the clutch g into engage 
ment with the driving wheel C, in which case 
through the sprocket chain the pocket roll is 
turned and the seeds are carried by the pock 
ets past the flexible apron pand down through 
the feeding grooves b to the discharge open 
ings b of the hopper, the seed then entering 
into the seed drills and passing through the 
Same into the ground, and as the roller D 
passes over the same course as the seed drills, 
it will press the earth together sufficiently to 
properly cover the seed. During the move 
ment of the machine, one of the scrapers is 
turned downwardly and acts to scrape or mark 
the course of the machine, so that in again 
passing along the machine will be guided in 
its movements. 
In case it is desired to empty any particu 
lar compartment of the hopper, such as where 
it is desired to change the seed quickly, this 
can be easily done by raising the particular 
shutter land permitting the seed to pass from 
such compartment, which can again be filled 
with other seeds. In the same way the num 
ber of rows that may be sown by the machine. 
may be varied, such, for example, as where 
only every other compartment is filled with 
seed, the space between the rows being thus 
varied. The machine thus gives opportunity 
for the sowing of any of the smaller seeds ac 
cording to the desired depth to which they 
are to be sown, a variation in distance at 
which the seeds are sown and the spaces be 
tween the furrows, while at the same time the 
seeds are properly covered after the sowing 
operation. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In seed sowers, the combination of a frame 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
having a series of drills and having slotted Or. 
segmental bearings at the forward end, and a 
driving wheel having boxes moving in Said 
bearings, and locking means for holding the 
same, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
2. In seed sowers, the combination of a frame 
having a series of drills and having slotted or 
segmental bearings at the forward end, said 
bearings having one face thereof serrated or 
roughened, and a driving wheel mounted in 
the boxes within said slotted bearings, and 
keys engaging with the boxes and such Ser 
rated faces, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
3. In seed sowers, the combination of a frame 
carrying the drills, and a shaft mounted in 
said frame carrying marker arms, said shaft 
having a seat thereon and a spring pawl en 
gaging with said seat, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
4. In seed sowers, the combination of a frame 
having a hopperandseed drills below the same, 
of a roll having a series of rows of pockets 
therein, said hopper having spring operated 
discharge shutters corresponding to the num 
ber of rows of pockets in the roll, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
5. In seed sowers, the combination of a frame 
having a hopper and seed drills below the same, 
of a roll (said pockets opening above the roll) 
having a series of rows of pockets therein, 
said hopper having spring operated discharge 
shutters corresponding to the number of roWS 
of pockets in the roll, and partitions in Said 
hopper to divide the same into a series of com 
partments, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
6. In seed sowers, the combination of a frame, 
a hopper having a measuring roll provided 
with a series of pockets mounted therein, a 
series of drills below the hopper, and a flexi 
ble apron within the hopper adapted to press 
upon the measuring roll, said apron being Se 
cured to a vertically adjustable apron car 
rier, substantially as and for the purposes Set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof we, the said JOSEPH 
A. GLEIXNER and PETER SCHAFF, have here 
unto set our hands. 
JOSEPH A, GLEIXNER, 
PETER SCHAFF, 
Witnesses: 
J. N. COOKE, 
TD. L. DORSEY. 
75 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496615.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
M. M. MONS ANT0, Dec'd. 
E. M. MoNSANT0, Administratrix. 
APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF SALT, 
No. 496,615, 
Patented May 2, 1893. 
as t 
- Vf S- 7. 
2 
2 
NS 
S 
S 
2 
2 
s u 
 
 
/mventor . 
u762careezo 10, 1Consanzo, 
by 
Azs 4ttorney. 
roaris perens co, photo-Litho. wastina'', 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
M. M. MONS ANTO, Deo'd. 
E. M. MoNSANT0, Administratrix. 
APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF SALT, 
No. 496,615, 
Patented May 2, 1893, 
M/ifinaesses. 
 
d 
Azazepator . 
u?taurzozo M. Monsanto, 
?ferazaaf 
Aids Attorney. 
... 
I 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PMorg-Litho, wash:NGTON, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAURICIO M. MONSANTO, OF NEW YORK, N.Y.; EMMA. M. MONSANTO 
ADMINISTRATRIX OF SAID MAURICIO M. MONSANTO, DECEASED. 
APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF SALT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 496,615, dated May 2, 1893. 
Application filed December 22, 1886, Serial No. 222,299 (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MAURICIOM.MONSANTO, 
a citizen of the United States of Colombia, re 
siding at New York city, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Ap 
paratus for the Manufacture of Salt; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
It is well known, that the methods now in 
Common use for the manufacture of salt from 
the brine, in open pans or kettles by means 
of direct heat, or in grainers or pans, by means 
of steam, are very deficient in economy of 
fuel and labor, and yield but a very imper 
fect and impure product; that the peculiar 
nature of salt, which rusts iron with which it 
comes in contact, thereby discolors the salt, 
and yields an inferior product; that the salt 
crystallizes or separates from the mother-liq 
uor immediately upon the brine being evap 
orated or vaporized beyond its point of satu 
ration, and adheres to the sides of the vessel, 
or to the heating surface thereof; and that all 
salt brines contain salts other than that of 
chloride of sodium, which also separate upon 
concentration, and which subside and adhere 
to the heating surface of the boiling appara 
tus, forming scale, which impairs its efficiency 
and prevents the conduction of heat, requir 
ing time and labor for its removal, and that 
closed apparatus, steam or vacuum, have not 
been found as advantageous in the salt, as in 
the sugar and other industries. 
In Warm climates, salt is made from sea wa 
ter by natural or solar vaporization in suit 
able ponds, where, by means of the steady 
trade winds, absorbing the vapors of the brine 
which has been heated by the sun, the latter 
becomes concentrated until the contained salt 
crystallizes. In other localities various kinds 
of apparatus for Solar evaporation have been 
introduced, of which some consist of brine 
tanks covered by movable roofs, which are 
rolled from the tanks upon rails or otherwise, 
exposing the brine in the tanks to the Solar 
5.o. rays in good weather, and covering them when 
desirable; and it is well known that the salt 
35 
25 
AO 
45 
made by solar evaporation is the purest and 
the best. 
The object of my invention, in imitation of 
the natural or Solar vaporization, is an appa 
ratus in which previously heated brine or 
brine not heated is pumped to a vaporizing 
tower, with closed sides, and allowed to fall 
upon inclined trays or troughs, placed there 
in, which overflow upon each other in zig-zag 
?course, forming thereby showers of heated 
brine in thin sheets, or in a very subdivided 
condition, nearly the full height of the tower; 
while air is admitted at the bottom of the 
trays, either with natural draft, or preferably 
by means of forced draft with previously 
heated air, because it will absorb proportion 
ately more moisture, going upward and in Con 
trary direction to that of the brine, and, com 
ing in consecutive contact with the showers 
of brine from tray to tray, becomes thereby 
saturated with the vapors of the brine, the 
brine becoming vaporized and concentrated, 
while the salt separates and crystallizes in said 
trays and is raked out to dry or to be for 
Warded to centrifugal machines. 
It will be understood that great economy of 
fuel will result from artificially abstracting 
the vapors of the heated brine by means of 
air, and more so by means of heated air, while 
the air can be heated without cost of fuel by 
piping placed in a spent heat conduit of stealm 
boilers or other furnaces, before entering the 
chimney. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure I 
represents a broken cross Section of the va 
porizing tower with a suitable building at 
tached, and Fig. II represents a broken hori 
Zontal section of the same. Fig. III is a detail 
view of a corrugated lip, such as would be 
used when it is desired to cause the brine to 
fall in small streams. Fig. IV is a detail view 
of a distributing device. 
Similarletters indicate corresponding parts. 
A designates the tower, rising from the 
ground floor or foundation, or otherwise, and 
made preferably of wooden frame-work, or of 
any suitable building material boarded or in 
closed all around at a.' 
A are beams carrying the flooring M, and 
M' preferably inclined toward the tower, A, 
for the drainage of the salt, and having the 
55 
75 
Od 
ge 
496,815 
- 
O 
drip-pipes b, which return any brine which 
may separate from the raked salt. To the 
tower are secured doors a' to allow of the rak 
ing of the trays B and B without destroying 
5 the draft of air rising within the tower; in 
stead of hinged doors, sliding doors with pull 
leys, chains and weights may be employed, as 
shown at a. 
Band B are trays or troughs, preferably 
made of wood, and preferably lined with com 
position or other metal or material that is not 
attacked by the salt, extending the width of 
the tower, and extending lengthwise to about, 
or more than, double its width and being held 
in suitable position by fixed or detachable sup 
ports S and S', the latter resting on the floor 
ing M, M' and to which the troughs B and B' 
may be suitably made fast; and having one 
end, that outside of the tower, from which 
the salt, if desired, may be raked out. Thus 
the trays may be placed at the most conven 
ient angle for raking out the salt, as well as 
for its drainage on the highest part of the 
trays, beyond the level line of the brine, as 
shown. 
b and b' are lips at the overflow line of the 
inclined trays B and B', a little below the rim 
of the trays, which are made to contract some 
what the width of the overflow sheet, to pre 
Went Spattering sidewise, as the brine falls 
Successively, and in a zig-zag course, from one 
tray to the other. These lips are made, either 
to allow the overflow to fall in a thin sheet of 
brine, or corrugated, so as to make the over 
flow fall in small streams or in the form of 
al 
C and C are steam brine heaters, which I 
would prefer to use in a new plant, with cop 
per pipes connected to a trunnioned steam 
trunk, so that the heating pipes may be raised 
for a thorough and easy cleaning; but the 
brine heaters may be of any suitable system, 
operated by fire or steam, and in existing 
plants, the Salt pans, kettles or grainers may 
serve as brine heaters. The heaters are con 
nected to a pump (shown in Fig. I of the 
drawings) which elevates the heated brine to 
a distributing pipe D, or to a tank which feeds 
the distributing pipe, placed above the high 
est tray, which pipe may be perforated or slot 
ted in a suitable manner, or may be attached 
to a separate distributing device such for in 
stance as that shown in Fig. IV of the draw 
ings, so that the heated brine may fall upon 
the highest tray in a subdivided form, and 
thus mayoffer, as in the subsequent falls from 
tray to tray, a large area of contact for vapor 
ization to the ascending air. 
His the inlet of air into the tower, enter 
ing into the compartment below the lowest 
tray, which may be inducted by the natural 
draft of the tower, or, preferably, by forced 
draft by means of a suitable mechanism; the 
air being preferably heated in a spent heat 
65 conduit, or otherwise, before arriving at the 
tower. The air need not be heated artificially, 
but forced draft of ordinary air may be used, 
So 
55 
45 
35 
 
if desired, and, as will be seen in Fig.1, from 
the arrows representing the course of the air, 
it ascends in zig-zag direction in a contrary 
direction to that of the descending brine, and 
coming thereby in contact with the latter, es 
pecially at the falls, h, becomes saturated with 
its vapors, and ultimately leaves the tower at 
its upper ventilating portion A' by means of 
shutters, movable skylights, or other known 
ea S. 
O is a manhole which permits of entering 
the lowest compartment for cleaning or tak 
ing out any salt which may have been retained 
by the wire screen P, or otherwise. When the 
trays B and B' are to be emptied, the plugsb 
are withdrawn and the brine contained in the 
trays will drain from the upper to the lower 
tray, and will arrive at the lowest compart 
ment of the tower, and pass through the strain 
er P, and will finally be discharged through 
the pipes E and E, which return the brine to 
the heater or to a reservoir, from which it can 
be conveyed again to the upper part of the 
tower for further vaporization. 
A series of towers to any desired number 
may be placed and thus be contained in a sin 
gle building, and in such case the air from 
one tower may by forced draft and suitable 
connections be made to pass through a second 
tower, and so on, thus availing of the original 
heat and that absorbed in passing through the 
heated brine through which it first passed. 
The operation of raking salt may be per 
formed by hand, but may also be performed 
by known automatic, or other mechanical 
The salt, as it is raked out, may be 
ea.S. 
allowed to stand for some time at the high 
part of the trays, beyond the level line of the 
brine, as shown at b, until drained, or it can 
be raked onto the inclined flooring M, M' 
where the water, which may separate from the 
green salt, may drain back into the tower by 
means of the drip-pipes b after which oper 
ation it may be spread on the flooring to dry, 
and further disposed of by a system of chutes, 
as shown at Kand K", by conveyers, or other 
mechanical means; or it can be conveyed, as 
soon as raked, to a mixer and centrifugals, 
where it can be washed with saturated brine, 
of adhering foreign matter, and dried by cen 
trifugal force, ready for barreling. 
Some other advantages of my system and 
apparatus for manufacturing salt by vapori 
zation are inexpensive works, great economy 
in fuel and in labor, superiority of product; 
cleanliness of manufacture; exemption from 
the employment of iron; repairs reduced to a 
minimum; no stopping to chip outpan scale 
nor on account of burned out salt pans, nor 
for resetting of the same; the Work can be 
conducted by day only, if so desired,(as any 
steam boiler) instead of day and night, as is 
indispensable in the present systems; the salt 
cannot be burned as in salt pans. 
I do not desire to confine myself to the pre 
cise construction of parts described, for these 
constructions may be varied in many ways to 
', 
... 
75 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
ITC) 
IIS 
I 25 
496,615 
s 
. 
- 
produce like results, without departing from 
the spirit of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. The combination with the vaporizing 
tower, of the inclined trays, the floorings, and 
the conveyers or chutes, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In an apparatus for manufacturing salt, 
the vaporizing tower having the airinlet and 
Outlet openings and the feed pipe, in combi 
nation with the trays having their inner ends 
extending into the tower and their outer ends 
Supported on the flooring outside of the said 
tower, substantially as described. 
3. In an apparatus for manufacturing salt, 
the Vaporizing tower, the supply pipe, and 
the inclined trays having their outer ends 
open to permit access to the said trays for the 
purpose of removing the salt, in combination 
with the chutes for delivering the same, for 
the purpose set forth, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination with the vaporizing 
tower, of the inclined trays having their in 
ner ends arranged therein and their outer 
ends Supported outside of the same, the con 
Weyers or chutes situated near the said outer 
ends of the inclined trays, and the inclined 
O 
25 
flooring having drip pipes substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
5. The combination with the vaporizing 
tower having means for supplying brine there 
to, of the inclined trays having their inner 
ends extending into the tower, and their outer 
ends supported outside of the same, substan 
tially as described. 
6. The combination with the vaporizing 
tower provided with means for supplying 
brine thereto, of the inclined trays arranged 
therein and supported outside of said tower, 
to receive the brine, and means for conveying 
the brine from the tower, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
7. The combination with the vaporizing 
tower A, composed of a frame having covered 
sides, a bottom a and the upper ventilating 
portion. A for the outlet of the saturated air, 
of the inclined trays B and B', resting on the 
supports S and S', and provided with the lips 
b and b', and plug holes and plugs at their 
lower ends, and the inclined flooring having 
drip-pipes, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
MAURICIO M. MONSANTO. 
35 
40 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
JNO. C. TEN EYCK, 
WILLM, SMITH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496715.txt	(No Model.) 
B. BARTELMES. 
SWITCH OPERATING DEVICE. 
No. 496,715, 
Patented May 2, 1893. 
; 1 TTT III 
2 
-ZO 
2%as 
 
 
: 
 
 
22 
tes Eac 
s/ e3, t 
7. zSS s 
 
la 
Z 
4? 
is . 
K2 N 
NS 
R 
2. 3 2 (NVENTOR 
6.WSavezza read 
% $ee-lee 
 
A7 TORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN BARTELMES, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
SWITCH. OPERATING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 496,715, dated May 2, 1893. 
Application filed November 29, 1892. Serial No. 453,457, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN BARTELMEs, 
of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Switch-Operating Devices, 
of Which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in a class of appliances on street railway cars, 
Which are adapted to effect an adjustment of 
an Open switch on the railway, so as to align 
its working tongue with the track on which 
the car is moving toward the switch. 
It has for its object to provide a device of 
the kind mentioned, which is of a simple, 
novel construction, which can be set manu 
ally, and when so adjusted, correctly move 
the parts of an approached switch and align 
Said parts with the track occupied by the 
moving car whereon the device is placed, said 
switch being of a kind provided with two par 
allel tables or platforms which are adapted to 
move the tongue of the frog that is a part of 
the switch, so as to change its position with 
regard to the intersecting railway tracks that 
the switch guards. 
To this end, my invention consists in the 
construction, and combination of parts, as is 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
Corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional side view of a car in 
part, on the line 1-1 in Fig. 2, showing the 
improvement thereon, and part of a switch 
engaged by the latter. Fig. 2 is a transverse 
sectional view of the platform switch shown 
in Fig. 1, taken on the line 2-2 in Fig. 1, also 
showing a cable railway track and a cable con 
duit in cross section, with the improvement on 
a car front in part and engaging one of the 
platforms or tables of the switch. Fig. 3 is a 
plan view detached, of an important detail of 
construction, that is part of the invention; 
and Fig. 4 is a plan view detached, of a por 
tion of the Switch mechanism, opposite the 
arrow 4 in Fig. 2. 
This improved switch operating device, is 
especially adapted for use on cars of cable 
railways, when said railways are used as part 
of a system comprising other intersecting 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
55 
lines of street railways whereon cars are drawn 
by horses, which horse-drawn cars are switched 
onto and from the cable road, and frequently 
leave open switches from the cable road to a 
divergent side track. 
In the drawings A, A, represent two paral 
lel, spaced platforms of equal dimensions, 
which are located above a pit B, and are 
adapted to vibrate in it a limited distance, by 
their common support. 
The parts that sus 
tain the platforms A, and allow them to al 
ternately rock down and up in the pit B, con 
sist of a base block a, two parallel upright 
posts b on the block, and a transverse beam 
c, pivoted at its center between the upper 
ends of the posts, which beam has its ends 
pivotally connected with the similar depend 
ing arms d, the upper ends of which are se 
cured to the lower sides of the tables near the 
centers of the latter. 
The frog body e, is located on the tracks 
over the pit, and has its body and pointed 
part of its tongue g projected between the 
platforms A. The tongue g, is pivoted near 
its heel between the side rails of the frog, so 
that its front pointed end may swing toward 
either side, and align its edges with either a 
main track railway rail or a side track rail, 
as occasion may require. 
The swinging movement of the frog tongue 
g, is effected by its pivotal connection at g', 
with a posth, that projects upwardly from the 
beam c, as shown in Fig. 2, said point of con 
nection being provided near the free end of 
the tongue, so that the alternate depression 
of the tables A, will vibrate the tongue asbe 
fore mentioned. It will be seen that should 
the horse attached to an ordinary street car 
step on one of the platforms when guided to 
do so by the driver on said car, the tongue g, 
will be vibrated so as to align the cable track 
with a diverging side track, if the horse car 
is to pass from the cable road. Such a move 95 
ment of the frog tongue will leave the cable . 
road open at the switch, and is liable to cause 
a derailment of the cable car, if the switch is 
not closed in advance of the moving car. 
To effect a closure of the switch as stated, 
the improvement is provided, consisting of a 
heavy presser bar C, pivoted at one end i, 
upon the lower side of the car D, preferably 
at the rear of the platform D', of the car D, 
75 
OO 
496,715 
as indicated in Fig. 1. The presser bar C is 
of Such a length as will locate its front end 
near, but not beyond the front edge of the car 
platform D', there being two depending spaced 
and furcated bracket arms m, formed on or 
secured to the lower side of the presser bar 
at its front end, having their nearest trans 
verse faces parallel, and each adapted to re 
ceive a journal box . A presser wheel E, is 
pivoted between the bracket arms m, said 
wheel being mounted upon and secured to a 
Central shaft O, that has a loose engagement 
with the boxes in. The pair of furcated bracket 
arms in, are each closed at the lower termi 
nals of their parallel limbs, after the boxes n, 
are inserted between said limbs, so as to pre 
vent a displacement of the boxes. Above each 
bOX 7, a strong metal or gum spring p, is in 
troduced, and secured against lateral dis 
placement by any suitable means, these 
Springs permitting a proper reciprocation of 
the boxes between the bracket limbs which 
Support them. 
An adjusting screw shaft F, is furnished, to 
afford means for vibrating the presser bar C, 
and retaining it at any desired point. Said 
shaft is vertically and loosely supported on 
the front wall of the platform D', by the 
bracket boxes r, which project from the front 
Wall or dasher D', on its side next to the plat 
form. 
There is a coarse threaded screw S, cut on 
the shaft F, near its lower end, which screw 
engages a nuts', secured in a perforation in 
the car platform so as to permit the screw to 
be manipulated by a crank F, on the upper 
end of the shaft, and give a progressive mo 
tion to the body of said shaft, so that its lower 
end may be projected from, or be drawn to 
Ward the lower surface of the platform. 
Below the screws, the body of the shaft F, 
is reduced, and two bevel faced collars are lo 
cated on said reduced portion, the lower collar 
being secured in place on the terminal end of 
the shaft after it has been inserted through a 
longitudinally elongated perforation in the 
presser bar C, which will loosely connect the 
bar with the shaft that is thus adapted by its 
rotation to vibrate the bar and retain it where 
adjusted. 
In use, the gripman of a cable car, will be 
enabled to close an open switch in advance 
of said car, by adjusting the screw shaft F, so 
as to vibrate the presser bar C, downwardly, 
and cause the presser wheel E, to bear forcibly 
upon a platform A, that is in the path of the 
wheel, which will push the platform down and 
set the tongue g, properly, so as to close the 
switch and render the cable road intact for 
the free and safe travel of the cable car. 
It will be seen that the provision of spring 
supports for the wheel E, will allow it to rise 
when the car has moved the wheel beyond the 
platform, so that there will be no obstruction 
produced when the wheel strikes the solid road 
bed; thus giving sufficient time for the grip 
man to rotate the screw shaft in an opposite 
direction, and raise the presser bar sufficiently 
to remove the presser wheel from the road bed. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a switch adjuster, the combination, 
with a car, of a vibratable presser bar on the 
under side of the car platform, a rotatable 
presser wheel on the outer end of said bar, 
and an uprightshaft on the platform threaded 
at the lower end and adapted to rotate and 
hold the presser bar by its loose engagement 
there with, and with a nut on the car plat 
form, substantially as described. 
2. In a switch adjuster, the combination 
with a car, of a presser bar pivoted by one end 
on the under side of the car platform, an up 
right rotatable screw shaft on the car plat 
form, a nut thereon engaged by the shaft, 
and a rotatable spring-pressed wheel on the 
forward end of the presser bar, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a switch adjuster, the combination 
with a car, the platform thereon, and the 
dasher on the platform, of a presser bar piv 
oted by one end on the under side of the plat 
form, and projecting forwardly, depending 
furcated bracket arms on the front of the 
presser bar, journal boxes therefor, springs 
above said boxes, a presser wheel fast on a 
shaft journaled in the boxes, a nut fast on the 
platform, a loosely supported shaft upright 
on the dasher and engaging the nut, and 
loosely secured at its lower end in an elon 
gated hole in the presser bar, substantially 
as described. 
BENJAMIN BARTELMES. 
L. S. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES SCHER, 
ANDREW HABERKAMM. 
75 
95 
Ot 
O 
25 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496815.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 496,815, 
F. L. CLARK. 
CAR BRAKE MECHANISM, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
. 
Patented May 2, 1893, 
 
WTNESSES 
67%22a- 
) 
222e. 
Att'y. 
(No Model.) 
No. 496,815, 
F. L. CLARK, 
CAR BRAKE MECHANISM, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 2, 1893. 
O 
O 
OYi 
s 
S 
O f 
 
SN fry. ly 
Q 
- 
N 
N 
YN 
ls O 
O 
s i 
Sir 
Q 
... 1 
1. S 
- N 
SN 
N 
R. | 
NSF 
S 
O 
i. 
() f 
d 
f 
f Y 
l g 
s 
S. 
Q 
wiTNESSES: . 
NVENTOR, 
Atty. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS L. CLARK, OF WILKINSBURG, ASSIGNOR TO THE WESTINGHOUSE 
AIR BRAKE COMPANY, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CAR-BRAKE MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 496,815, dated May 2, 1898. 
Application filed November 29, 1892, Serial No. 453,498, (No model.) 
25 inders. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANCIS L. CLARK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wil 
kinsburg, in the county of Allegheny and State 
5 of Pennsylvania, have invented or discovered 
a certain new and useful Improvement in 
Brake Mechanism, of which improvement the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
Io mechanism for use in a multiple cylinder 
brake system, whereby the force of one or 
more of the brake pistons may be exerted at 
will on the brakes; and to this end it consists 
of mechanism in connection with and oper 
I5 ative by the pistons of the brake cylinders of 
a multiple cylinderbrake system, whereby the 
brakes may be applied by pressure acting in 
one of the cylinders only or in more than one 
of them at the same time, as required, and 
2c whereby the force of the application may be 
lessened when the force acting on one of the 
brake pistons is reduced or removed, without 
interfering with or affecting the force due to 
the pressure in the remaining cylinder or cyl 
The improvement claimed is hereinafter 
fully set forth. 
My invention is specially applicable to a 
multiple cylinder brake system in which a 
3o single cylinder is employed to produce mod 
erate or service application of the brakes, and 
in which two or more cylinders are employed 
to produce a full or emergency application. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure l is 
35 a diagram of a brake mechanism illustrating 
an application of my improvementin connec 
tion with the hand operated devices, truckle 
vers, and brake cylinders; and Fig. 2, a plan 
view, on a large scale, showing my improve 
4o ment in connection with the brake cylinders. 
My improvement is not limited in its em 
ployment to any particular fluid pressure sys 
tem, but may be employed with either director 
automatic systems. Therefore the reservoirs 
45 1, 2, branch pipes 3, 4, triple valve 5, branch 
pipe 6, and train pipe 7 and their connections 
which, in and of themselves, form no part of 
my invention, need not be described. My in 
vention is, however, specially applicable to a 
5o system employing two or more brake cylin 
ders, in which a moderate or graduated appli 
| cation of the brakes is made by admitting 
fluid under pressure to one cylinder, and a 
full or emergency application is made by ad 
mitting fluid under pressure both to the first 
cylinder and also to one or more additional 
cylinders which are automatically brought 
into operation. 
In the drawings I have shown a cylinder 8 
to which fluid pressure is admitted in all ap 
plications of the brake and which is the only 
cylinder employed in making graduated or 
service applications. The piston rod 9 of the 
cylinder 8 is pivoted to a lever 10, which is 
connected by means of a rod 11 to another le 
ver 12, which is pivoted at one end to a lug. 
13, on the head of the cylinder 8; and the le 
vers 10 and 12 are connected by means of rods 
14 and 15 to levers 16 and 17 and through 
them to the truck levers at opposite ends of 
the car. The cylinder 18 is supplied with 
fluid under pressure only when it is desirable 
to apply the brakes with a greater force than 
it is possible to exert by the means of a sin 
gle cylinder; and the cylinder 18 will, there 
fore, usually be employed only in making 
emergency applications of the brakes. The 
lever 10, which is operated by the piston rod 
9, has an extension 23, to which is connected 
a rod 19, which passes through a slot or open 
ing, 24, in a lever 20, to which the piston rod 
21 of the cylinder 18 is connected. The 
brake cylinder lever 20 has at one end a sta 
tionary pivot, 22, which forms a fulcrum on 
which the lever may be moved by the move 
ment of the piston rod 21, in such manner 
that the slotted end of the lever bears against 
the shoulder 25 when the brakes are being 
applied with the assistance of the cylinder 18; 
and when the pressure is released from the 
cylinder 18, while the brakes are still on, the 
slotted end of the lever 20 moves back from 
the shoulder 25 along the rod 19. 
In making an application of the brakes by 
means of the cylinder 8 alone, the piston rod 
9 moves outwardly, and with it the lever 10, 
which operates to apply the brakes, through 
the connections 14 and 16, to the wheels at 
one end of the car, and, through the parts 11, 
12, 15, and 17, to the Wheels at the other end. 
At the same time, the rod 19 which is con 
nected to the extension 23 of the lever 10, 
55 
75 
95 
ICO 
496,815 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
moves outwardly and slides through the slot 
24 in the lever 20; the lever 20 and piston rod 
21 remaining stationary because no pressure 
has been admitted to the cylinder 18. When 
the fluid under pressure is released from the 
cylinder 8, the piston 9 is returned by the 
spring within the brake cylinder, and the 
brakes are released. The rod 19 then moves 
back to its normal position, which is such that 
a shoulder 25, formed on the rod 19, then 
bears lightly on one side of the lever 20. 
When fluid under pressure is admitted simul 
taneously to both cylinders, both of the piston 
rods 9 and 21 and the levers 10 and 20 are 
The piston rod 9 operates, 
moved outwardly. 
as before, through the lever 10 and its con 
nections, to apply the brakes; and the lever 
20 bears against the shoulder 25, and through 
the rod 19, adds the force of the fluid press 
ure within the cylinder 18 to that exerted on 
the lever 10 through the piston rod 9. The 
brakes will then be applied with a force due 
to the sum of the pressures acting on the pis 
tons of the cylinders 8 and 18. 
My invention is specially adapted for ap 
plication with a fluid pressure system in which 
more than one cylinder is brought into action 
when the train is running at its highest speed, 
and in which the fluid pressure is reduced in, 
or released from, one or more of the cylinders 
as the speed of the train slackens and the 
wheels turn more slowly. Such a reduction 
of the pressure is made for the purpose of 
preventing the sliding of the wheels which 
would occur if the full pressure, which could 
be safely applied when the wheels are turn 
ing rapidly, continued to act when the mo 
mentum of the train had been reduced and 
the wheels were turning more slowly. 
In a brake system with my improvement 
applied, the force of the application may be 
reduced, after both cylinders have been 
brought into action, by releasing the pressure 
from the cylinder 18, when the spring within 
the brake cylinder will return the piston rod 
21 and lever 20 to their normal positions, 
without interfering with the application of 
the brakes by the fluid pressure acting with 
in the cylinder 8. When the pressure is re 
moved from the cylinder 18 the slotted end of 
the lever 20 moves away from the shoulder 
25 on the rod 19, and the rod 19 remains in 
position until the pressure has been removed 
from the cylinder 8, when it moves back to 
its normal position in which the shoulder 25 
bears against the side of the lever 20. The 
rod 19 may be pivoted to the lever 20, and 
pass through a slot in the lever 10; or it may 
be pivoted to either of the levers 10 or 20 at 
one end and be provided with a slot through 
which the lever at the other end passes, or 
through which a pin secured to the lever at 
the other end passes. Or, the connection 19 
may be a flexible connection between the le 
vers 10 and 20, which permits the independ 
ent movement of either one toward the other. 
While I have herein shown but two cylin 
ders, it is obvious that more than two may be 
used. For example by connecting the piston 
rod of another cylinder either directly to le 
ver 20, or by means of another lever similar 
to lever 20 and another rod like rod 19 an 
other cylinder may be connected to lever 10. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent 
1. In a multiple cylinder brake mechanism, 
the combination with two or more brake cyl 
inders, and their pistons, of levers connected 
to the piston rods, connection between the le 
vers whereby one of them may move inde 
pendently of the other, and connections from 
each lever to the truck levers at both ends of 
the car by which the movement of either pis 
tOn may apply the brakes at both ends of the 
car, Substantially as set forth. 
2. In a multiple cylinder brake mechanism, 
the combination, with two brake cylinders 
and their pistons, of a lever pivoted to each 
piston rod, connections from one of the levers 
to the brake shoes, and a connection between 
the levers, by which the application of the 
brakes may be effected by the movement of 
One of the pistons independently of the other, 
or by the movement of both of the pistons, 
Substantially as set forth. 
3. In a brake mechanism, the combination, 
with two brake cylinders and their pistons, of 
a lever pivoted to one of the pistons, and 
having a fixed fulcrum at one end, and a loose 
connection at its other end with a lever which 
is pivoted to the other piston rod and con 
nected to the truck levers at both ends of the 
car, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have here unto set 
my hand. 
FRANCIS E. CLARK, 
Witnesses: 
W. B. CORWIN, 
F. E. GAITHER, 
3O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US496915.txt	(No Model.) 
I. C. SMITH, 
FOLDING BED, 
No. 496,915, 
Patented May 9, 1893, 
-- 4 
-- 
- - 
F. 
- - - - 7 Nic 
SA 
- 
A. 
r 
C.' 
A. 
Z f 6. 3. 
/ 
w 
Z7 
2. 
l 
e-2 
A. 
27 
Q 
? 
W 
 
- 
i 
Y 
 
E. 
fis2 
. 
? 
s ! 
t 
t 
"...is 
I 
it 
tly g 
. 2. 
, 
h 
NY IN VI, 
NEF El NL, Ni 
i? 
t 
- E. 
| N. Y. 
\ N - 
E 
h YN 
IFN N N E 
|| ARY - NE 
Z' 
N A 
-- 
Y 
r 
-- 
N 
| | 
| 
l, 
e 
- 
: 
E 
| 
| 
| I'll 
--- Tim l, 
" " | 
|. 
| F el Eel T. s. 
| F 
- RE2 ANR -1. 
EF's 
E 
= 
F. 
 
3. 
W 
B 
% 
-v 
ar 
 
WITNESSES; 
&2%ae. 
N. 
A 3 F.G. . 
F. : 
/ 6 a 
E- 
1. 
-- als 
rael 
Israel C. Smif 
ATTORNEY. 
The Norris Peters co, Photo-LITHo, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISRAEL C. SMITH, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
FOLDING B E.D. 
SPECIFICATION forming, part of Letters Patent No. 496,915, dated May 9, 1898. 
Application filed October 20, 1892, Serial No. 449,433, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ISRAEL C. SMITH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Grand 
Rapids, in the county of Kent and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Folding Beds; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improved fold 
ing bed, and its object is to provide the same 
With certain new and useful features, herein 
after more fully described and particularly 
pointed out in the claims, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a device 
embodying my invention as it appears when 
closed; Fig. 2, a vertical section of the same 
On the line 2-2 of Fig. 1; and Fig. 3, the same 
showing the position of the parts when the 
bed is open. 
Like letters refer to like parts in all of the 
figures. 
A is a box shaped case or frame to contain 
the bedding, which has the usual sides and 
ends, and has two fixed bottom strips A' A' 
at each side, the balance being open except 
as closed by the movable front D (which may 
be provided with the mirror D') and the up 
per section C. Said upper section is hinged 
to the front end of the case A, at L, and at 
each end is provided with legs C, to engage 
the floor and support the foot of the case A, 
the opposite end of which case is provided 
with rockers B, upon which said case turns, 
from the vertical to horizontal position, and 
which support the head end of the same. 
The movable front D is hinged at the top 
to the upper section C, at K, and at the bot 
tom to the rear edge of the board F, of sub 
stantially the same width as the section C: 
said board is pivoted at its front angles to the 
rockers at M, and is arranged to turn on these 
pivots between said rockers. E is a box or 
receptacle attached to the front D and mov 
able therewith between the rockers. A con 
tractile spring I is attached at its respective 
ends to the front D and the case A, and serves 
to balance the Weight of said front as it swings 
down to place. 
H represents a series of weights attached 
to the head of the case to balance the same 
upon the rockers B, as a fulcrum. 
The rear casters G' are attached to the up 
per part of the end of the case A, and the 
front casters G are attached to the board F. 
N is a catch to hold the section C and legs 
C against the bottom of the case A, when the 
bed is closed; when thus held the section C 
and front D operate as a prophaving a knuckle 
joint at K, and force the rear of the board F. 
down, bringing it to a horizontal position. The 
casters G then engage the floor and lift the 
rockers B free from the same, and sustain 
the case in a vertical position on all four 
casters. By releasing the catch N, and swing 
ing the legs C outward, the rear of the board 
rises, thus lowering the rockers B in contact 
with the floor, and inclining the bed forward. 
It will now stand in this position with an open 
ing at each side of the movable front D, for 
ventilation, or it can be easily turned upon 
the rockers B to a horizontal position; the 
various parts automatically assuming the po 
sition shown in Fig. 3; the legs C coming to 
a vertical position and being held and locked 
in place by the movable front D, and the 
board F, which now are in the same horizon 
tal plane, and thus form a rigid prop between 
the pivots M and hinges K. When the bed 
is again turned to the vertical position upon 
the rockers, the spring I serves to aid the va 
rious parts in automatically returning to the 
position shown in Fig. 2. 
What I claim is 
1. In a folding bed in combination with a 
case to contain the bed, having pivoted legs 
near One end, and rockers near the other end, 
a board pivoted to said rockers at one side, 
and a movable front pivoted to said board 
and to said legs at its respective ends, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a folding bed a case to contain the bed, 
and arranged to be turned to a vertical posi 
tion, legs pivoted to the elevated end of the 
same, a board pivoted near the opposite end 
of the same, and a front closing the bottom 
of said case, and pivoted to saidlegs and board 
at its respective ends, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a folding bed a case to contain the bed, 
rockers on said case, legs pivoted near one 
end of the same, a board pivoted to said rock 
O 
s 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
lco 
2 
496,915 
and legs at the respective ends, and a spring Io 
attached to said front and case at its respect 
ive ends, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ISRAEL C. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
LOIS MOULTON, 
LUTHER W. MOULTON. 
5 
ers at its forward side, casters on said board 
and on said case, and a front pivoted at its 
respective ends to said board and legs, sub 
stantially as described. 
4...In a folding bed a case to contain the bed, 
weights attached to one end of said case, rock 
ers near the same, legs pivoted to the opposite 
end of said case, a board pivoted at one side 
to said rockers, a front pivoted to said board 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497015.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL L. CONDE, OF ROCKFORD, ILLINOIS. 
CLAMP FOR TYPE - WRITERS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,015, dated May 9, 1893, 
Application filed September 19, 1892, Serial No. 446,242, (No model.) 
To all who?, i? ??? ?????????, 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL L. CONDE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Rock 
ford, in the county of Winnebago and Stato of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Clamps for Securing 
Type-Writers in Position, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to construct 
a clamp which is secured to the base board or 
support for the typewriter, said clamp pro 
vided with a vertical Screw carrying an arm 
which engages the frame work of the machine 
and by turning the screw the arm is brought 
in contact with the frame, thereby holding the 
machine in position and by turning the screw. 
in the opposite direction the armis raised un 
til it is free of the frame and it may beswung 
in the lengthwise direction of the frame, per 
mitting the removal of the typewriter. 
In the accompanying dra Wings--Figure 1 is 
an isometrical representation of my improved 
clamp. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the 
Sale. 
My improved clamp is employed to secure 
the typewriter to its base and is especially 
useful in cabinets where the typewriter is 
swung downward within a receptacle, when 
the machine is not in use. 
My improved clamp consists of a base 1, 
having an upward standard 2 and an over 
hanging arm 3. The overhanging arm and 
base portion are provided with vertical holes 
which receive a vertical screw 4. This screw 
is passed down through the overhanging arm 
and its enlarged head 5 prevents its farther 
descent. The base portion 1 is provided with 
a recess 6 in its base. A Washer 7 is placed 
over the lower end of the Screw 4 and its ex 
treme lower end is riveted which prevents the 
removal of the screw. The upper end of the 
screw is made in thumb-button form. An arm 
provided with a shanks, has a vertical screw 
threaded perforation through which passes 
the screw 4, before it is riveted in position. 
This arm is provided with an overhanging 
portion 9, having a recess10 on its under face 
which receives an elastic cushion 11. The 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
o 
75 
upper end of this elastic cushion is provided 
with a stud 12, which enters the hole in the 
overhanging arm. Two holes, 13, are formed 
in the base through which screws are passed, 
to secure the clamp to the woodwork. Two 
of these clamps are secured to the woodwork, 
one on each side of the typewriter, and in 
such relation thereto that the cushion in the 
overhanging arm, when the parts are in the 
position shown in the drawings, will rest upon 
the lengthwise bar of the frame of the type 
Writer, and by means of the thumb nut the 
Screw 4 is turned, which will move the over 
hanging arm down Ward, bringing the elastic 
cushion in contact with the lengthwise bars 
of the typeWriter frame, firmly clamping the 
frame to the Woodwork. In order to remove 
the typewriter from the wooden base the 
screw 4 is turned in the opposite direction, 
which will raise the overhanging arm suffi 
ciently to allow the overhanging arm to be 
swung upon the vertical shaft in the length 
wise direction of the lengthwise bars of the 
typewriter, When the typewriter can be read 
ily removed. The screw 4 is of sufficient 
length to adapt it to the various makes of 
typewriters. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A clamp for type-writers consisting of a 
base, a verticalarm and an over hanging arm, 
the overhanging arm and base provided with 
vertical holes, a screw threaded shaft located 
in the holes, and an outwardly extending arm 
having an engagement With the shaft, capa 
ble of a vertical and lateral movement. 
2. A clamp for type-writers consisting of a 
base, a vertical arm and an overhanging arm, 
the overhanging arm and base provided with 
vertical holes, a screw threaded shaft located 
in the holes, and an outwardly extending arm 
having an engagement with the shaft, capa 
ble of a vertical and lateral movement, and 
having a recess in its outer end within which 
is seated a yielding cushion. 
??? 
SAM, L, CONDE, 
Witnesses: 
A. O. BEHEL, 
B. BILINN, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497115.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 497,115, 
 
R BROCKMAN, 
BED FOR POLISHING PE, ATE CLASS, 
Patented May 9, 1893. 
  
  
  
 
N.F 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT BROCKMAN, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
JOHN H. STOTSENBURG, OF NEW ALBANY, INDIANA. 
BED FOR POLISHING PLATE- GLASS 
- 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,115, dated May 9, 1893. 
Application filed December 16, 1892, Serial No. 455,390, (No model.) 
to 
2O parts in each of the figures. 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ROBERT BROCKMAN, of 
St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
5 in Beds for Polishing Plate-Glass; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a fuli, 
clear, and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved bedding with plates of glass thereon; 
Fig. 2, a plan view with the glass and the bed 
ding fabric removed; Fig. 3, a like view of 
the metal frame alone; Fig. 4, a transverse 
15 section of the entire device with glass upon it 
as shown in Fig. 1, and Fig. 5, a detail per 
spective view of a portion of the rubber sheet 
used as a bedding. 
Letters of like name and kind refer to like 
The design of my invention is to provide 
an improved bedding for holding plate glass 
while the same is being polished, and to this 
end said invention consists in the device and 
25 the parts thereof, constructed and arranged 
Substantially as hereinafter specified. 
In polishing plate glass the plates of glass 
resting upon a bed are placed upon an iron 
bench, and there subjected to the action of 
3o the polishing machinery. Such bed has con 
sisted of wet plaster of paris and a wooden 
frame for the same and also a wooden frame 
having a soft textile fabric covering, the lat 
ter construction being such an one as is set 
35 forth in my patent No. 178,403, of June 6, 
1876. In practice the wooden frame has been 
found seriously objectionable, especially for 
large plates, since it has to be of such size 
as to be heavy even when dry, while when 
sodden with the water used in the polishing 
operation, there is a material addition to its 
weight. A further objection to the wooden 
frame is its liability to warp and lose its 
shape which, of course, is great, owing to its 
45 swelling from its saturation with water, and 
which may occasion the breakage of the glass. 
These defects, I have had in view in devising 
my present invention, and in the same they 
will be found to have been avoided and a bed 
5o ding produced possessing the features of light 
ness, strength and security from warping. 
40 
O 
The foundation of my bedding consists of 
an open, or skeleton, rectangular frame of 
bars of angle iron A and bars of L-iron B, 
and made oblong in shape, the angle iron bars 55 
being used to form the four sides, and the L 
iron bars being extended between said sides. 
Three bars B extend from one side bar to the 
other, parallel with each other, and the shorter 
bars Aso as to divide the space between the 6o 
latter equally, and one bar B is extended mid 
way the longer side bars A, and parallel 
there with, from the two outer of the three 
bars. Other bars B extend diagonally from 
each of the corners of the frame to the inter- 65 
section of the middle of said three bars with 
the two longer side bars A. The whole space 
within the frame is thus divided into a num 
ber of triangular sections and the resulting 
structure is both very strong and quite light. 
The bars can be united in any desired way, 
but preferably by riveting, and their lower 
faces must lie in the same plane to insure a 
smooth bottom for the bedding. The loca 
tion of the transverse bars B is made to cor- 75 
respond with the position of the rollers on the 
polishing bench which are provided to facili 
tate the placing on and removal of the bed 
ding and glass from said bench. 
described arrangement of iron bars, are filled 
in with blocks or pieces of wood C which rest 
on the horizontal flanges of said bars and 
have their upper faces flush with the upper 
edges of the webs or vertical members of the 85. 
bars. Upon this structure of wood and iron, 
I place a covering that comprises a rectangul 
lar frame of wood D conforming to the rect 
angular shape and size of the iron frame and 
a filling of strips of wood dextending in di- go 
agonal lines from side to side of the frame, 
and united to each other by tongues and 
grooves. This coveringis held to the structure 
beneath by dowel pins, and is made remov 
able therefrom for its replacement when nec- 95 
essary. Upon such covering of wood is laid 
a piece of fabric E of soft, water proof mate 
rial, as rubber, to receive the plates of glass; 
but I do not limit myself to rubber, nor to a 
water proof fabric, since, canton flannel, can 
vas, or the like material may be used. Rub 
ber, however is preferable because serving by 
All of the triangular spaces formed by the 8o 
OO 
497,115 
its Softness to properly cushion the glass and 
by its water proof character to protect the 
Wood beneath from water. A rubber sheet 
ribbed or corrugated on one side, as shown, is 
best adapted for the purpose. 
For holding the plates of glass on the bed 
ding thus constructed, I employ wedges and 
clamps, as in my patent before referred to, 
the wedges F being similar to those shown in 
Saidpatent while the clamps G are 1-shaped 
or angle irons secured by their vertical mem 
bers to the side bars A of the metal frame 
and having their horizontal members over 
lapping the bedding in position to be engaged 
by the edges of the plates of glass. 
Said 
clamps G are located at suitable intervals 
apart-in practice from eighteen to twenty 
four inches-and are removably held in place 
by set screws fpassing through openings in 
their vertical members into threaded open 
ings in the frame bars A. 
To prevent injury to the glass the clamps 
G. are covered with rubber or other soft, cush 
ioning, material. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a bed for holding plate glass while be 
ing polished, the combination with a metal 
frame, of a filling of wood, and a soft water 
proof covering therefor, as a sheet of rubber, 
to protect the wood from water and to cushion 
his substantially as and for the purpose 
SOW. 
O 
25 
2. In a bed for holding plate glass while be 
ing polished, the combination of a metal 
frame, a filling of wood therein, a covering of 
Wood on these two, and a cushion for the glass 
upon the latter, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. In a bed for holding plate glass while be 
ing polished, the combination of a frame of 
metal comprising side bars, and bars extend 
ing between the same, a filling of Wood be 
tween said bars, a removable covering of 
wood upon the frame and filling, and a cush 
ion upon said covering for the glass, substan 
tially as and for the pnrpose specified. 
4. In a bed for holding plate glass while be 
ing polished, the combination of a frame of 
metal comprising side bars of angle iron and 
inner bars of l-iron extending between said 
side bars, a filling of wood, a covering for the 
latter, the clamps of angle iron secured by 
their vertical members to the side bars, and 
having their horizontal members in position 
for engagement by the plates of glass, and 
suitable means to hold said plates against 
such clamps, substantially as and for the pur 
pose shown. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 30th day of 
November, 1892. 
ROBERT BROCKMAN. 
35 
40 
45 
So 
5 5 
Witnesses: 
D. C. HANSON, 
G. W. LEEAK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497215.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 497,215. 
M. ROBSON. 
ARTIFICIAL LEG FOR THEATRICAL PURPOSEs, 
Patented May 9, 1893. 
 
the 
RRii Peters co. Photo-latc., washraforces. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAY ROBSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO AUGUSTUS H. BROWN, 
OF SAME PLACE, 
ARTIFICIAL EG FOR THEATRICAL PURPOSES 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,215, dated May 9, 1898. 
Application filed March 23, 1893, Serial No,467,248, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MAY ROBSON, of New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Artificial 
Leg for Theatrical Purposes; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full and 
exact description thereof, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, making 
a part of this specification. 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
device by means of which burlesques of the 
popular skirt dancing can be produced with 
novel and startling effects. 
To this end the invention consists in the 
provision of an artificial leg which is loosely 
attached to the person of the dancer and can 
he manipulated at the will of the dancer to 
produce as desired thesemblance of extrava 
gant and exaggerated poses, while ordinarily 
it hangs freely without inconveniencing the 
wearer and is concealed by the dress of the 
Weae. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a view of the 
device ready for attachment to the body of 
the wearer. Fig. 2 is an outline view to illus 
trate the application of the device and the 
proper arrangement of the clothing. 
The device comprises a representation A 
of the lower portion of a human leg, which 
may be made of any suitable material but 
preferably is a hollow form of wood, cork or 
papier mach for the sake of lightness. 
To the leg A are secured the means for 
loosely supporting it from the person of the 
wearer. The simplest and most effective 
means for this purpose consist of a rod B fixed 
to the leg and a band or belt C which may be 
tied or otherwise fastened about the thigh or 
the body of the wearer. The rod is connected 
to the belt or band by a simple loop c or such 
other means as will permit the leg to be 
moved freely in any direction. The rod af 
fords a convenient means of attachment for 
the leg as it occupies very little space within 
the clothing and at the same time may be 
grasped by the hand of the dancer to throw 
the false leg into any desired position. 
It will be found desirable to extend strong 
elastic bands D, D, from different points on 
the waist-belt C to the rod B, or to the top of 
the false leg A, or to the top of the stocking 
E with which the false leg may be clad. If 
- 
these elastic bands are sufficiently strong they 
will of themselves raise the leg to an elevated 
position as soon as it has been started by the 
hand of the dancer from its normal position. 
In the use of the device it is preferred that 
the dancer should be clothed with the usual 
dancing skirts surrounding both of the lower 
limbs and that the false leg should be clothed 
with independent skirts. 
The limbs of the 
dancer and the false leg with their skirts are 
then surrounded by an outer skirt. The result 
of this arrangement is that the false leg does 
not interfere in the least with the free move 
ments of the limbs of the dancer while the 
fact that the danceris actually standing upon 
both feet when manipulating the artificial 
leg is concealed, and furthermore, that the 
movements of the false leg become apparently 
more natural. 
Many arrangements of cords, elastic bands, 
&c., might be employed for supporting and 
effecting the movements of the false leg, but 
the arrangement described has been found to 
be sufficient for all practical purposes. 
I claim as my invention 
1. As a theatrical appliance for use in bur 
lesque dancing, a false leg provided with cords 
or other suitable devices for supporting it 
loosely on the person so that it can move in 
any direction, and means whereby it can be 
moved at the will of the wearer; substantially 
as specified. 
2. As a theatrical appliance for use in bur 
lesque dancing a false leg, a rod secured there 
to, and a belt or band to be secured about the 
person of the dancer, the rod being connected 
loosely to said belt or band, substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. As a theatrical appliance for use in bur 
lesque dancing a false leg, a rod secured there 
to, a belt or band to be secured about the per 
Son of the Wearer, the rod being loosely con 
nected to said belt or band, and elastic bands 
attached to the belt and connected to the false 
leg, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, 
MAY ROBSON. 
Witnesses: 
A. N. JESBERA, 
A. WIDDER. 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497315.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
THICKENING THREAD MECHANISM FOR KNITTING MACHINEs. 
G, E, FRINK, 
No. 497,315, 
Patented May 16, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
 
W77nesses. 
%26, 24.4a2. 
43.74 
as pers cor-do-IT-o., WASINTON, d. c. 
Zuver (or 
& 271 
s 
 
(No Model.) 
, 
. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
THICKENING THREAD MECHANISM FOR KNITTING MACHINEs. 
G. E, FRINK. 
No. 497,315. 
Patented May 16, 1893. 
Witnesses. 
/uventor. 
-6-2 & 2, 3 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE E. FRINK, OF PAWTUCKET, RHODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
E. JENCKES MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
THICKENING-THREAD MECHANISM For KNITTING-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,815, dated May 16, 1893. 
Application filed March 9, 1892, Serial No. 424,341. (No model.) 
c 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE E. FRINK, of 
Pawtucket, in the county of Providence and 
State of Rhode Island, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Thickening 
Thread Mechanism for Knitting-Machines; 
and I do hereby declare the following speci 
fication, taken in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of the same, 
to be a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof. 
My invention relates to mechanism to be 
applied to a knitting machine for inserting 
and removing an extra or reinforcing thread 
at proper intervals in the operation of the 
machine, as for instance in knitting the heel 
and toe of a stocking, and my invention con 
sists in the combinations and arrangements 
of parts hereinafter described. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
Sents a top or plan view of my invention. Fig. 
2 is a front elevation of the same. Figs, 3 
and 4 are opposite end elevations; and Figs. 
5 and 6 are detailed views in section showing 
the thread gripping devices in different posi 
tions. 
A represents the head of a knitting ma 
chine, which is to be supported upon a suit 
able frame, upon which frame the other parts 
are likewise to be mounted. 
In the drawings my invention is shown as 
applied to that type of knitting machine which 
is adapted for knitting an entire stocking, 
which consequently knits at times round and 
round as in forming the leg and foot, and at 
other times knits forward and backward, as 
in forming the heel and toe. Machines of 
this character are provided with mechanism 
for imparting the necessary rotary and recip 
rocating motions when desired, and With a 
clutch for shifting from one motion to the 
other. This mechanism it will not be neces 
sary to describe in this connection, and only 
a portion thereof is shown in the drawings, 
in which a represents the shaft which trans 
imits the necessary motions to the knitting 
head. 
b,b' are two pinions loose upon the shaft 
a, one of which pinions, b, is to be continu 
ously revolved by a suitable gearing, and to 
the other of which pinions, b', an oscillating 
or reciprocating motion is to be imparted by 
the rack b, or in any other suitable manner. 
c is a movable clutch connected to the shaft 
a by a groove and spline connection and adapt 
ed to be moved by a suitable lever so as to 
engage either the pinion b or the pinion b' as 
may be desired. The shifting of the clutch 
may be effected automatically at the proper 
times to change the machine from rotary to 
reciprocating motion, or vice versa, or said 
clutch may be shifted by hand, it being en 
tirely immaterial, so far as the present inven 
tion is concerned, how said clutch is operated. 
In the drawings the clutch is shown as oper 
ated by the lever d, the fork of which lever 
engages a groove in the clutch in the usual 
manner. 
e represents a sliding bar or rod supported 
and arranged to slide in the frame-work, and 
provided near its opposite ends with two pro 
jecting pins or studse', e. The stude' is 
preferably provided at its end with a friction 
roll which rides in the groove of the clutch c, 
as shown in Fig. 1. The other stude is ar 
ranged to be embraced by the fork of a rock 
arm f secured to a sleeve mounted upon a 
stud f' secured to the frame of the machine. 
Secured to this sleeve is another rock-armf 
to the free end of which is connected one end 
of a connecting rod g. The other end of said 
rod is connected to the lower end of a lever 
h, pivoted at h", which said lever is provided 
at its upper end with a segmental gear h, as 
shown in Fig. 3. 
Mounted in a bracket B is a shaft which 
is provided at one end with a pinioni, ar 
ranged to be engaged and operated by the 
segmental gear h. Secured to the opposite 
end of said shaft i is a roll or roller k which 
is provided with a groove ic' extending en 
tirely around the periphery of the same. At 
one point in the periphery of said roll the 
groove k' is deepened as at lc for the purpose 
hereinafter described. Co-operating with the 
roll k is another roll l, preferably of smaller 
diameter, journaled in two arms pivoted to 
an extension of the bracket B, the arrange 
ment being such that the roll l will be free 
under the action of gravity to rest against the 
roll c, as shown in the drawings. Surround 
ing the periphery of the roll is an annular 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
497,315 
projection or raised portion l adapted to en 
ter the groove lic' in the roller lic, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 1. 
in represents a tube or guide through which 
both the main thread , and the extra or re 
inforcing thread in pass on their way to the 
knitting-head. The extra thread 
is led 
through the thread eye o, and thence through 
a ring or eye o' secured in the groove fe' of 
the roller k, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6, thence 
along said groove ic', and between the roll k 
and the roll l, to the tube in, said thread be 
ing held in the groove ic' by the projection 
on the roll l. 
The operation of the parts above described 
is as follows: Assume that the machine is 
knitting a stocking and has just completed 
the leg portion thereof, the only thread em 
ployed for such leg portion being the thread 
in. At this time the roll 
will be in the po 
sition shown in Fig. 5, and the extra thread 
a' will be gripped between the projection 
on the roll and the bottom of the groove : 
in the roll i, the end of said thread in hang 
ing in the guide n, but being prevented from 
being taken up and carried along by the main 
thread in by reason of the fact that said thread 
n is so gripped between the rollsk and l. At 
the commencement of the heel it is desired 
that the extra thread shall be inserted to re 
inforce the heel. Upon the shifting of the 
clutch c to change the machine from rotary 
to reciprocating motion, that is, from left to 
right in Fig. 1, the sliding-bar e will by the 
movement of said clutch be likewise moved 
to the right by reason of the engagement of 
the stude' with the groove of the sliding 
clutch-member. This movement of the bare 
will cause a rocking of the shaft f' and 
through the connecting rod g a Swinging of 
the lever h upon its pivot. The swinging of 
the lever h, will through the segmental gear 
hand the pinioni cause a turning of the shaft 
i and a corresponding movement of the roll 
k, that is, a movement from right to left in 
Fig. 5. The depression or deep place 
in 
the groove on the roll k is so located, as shown 
in Fig. 5, that said roll will have to be moved 
a considerable distance before such depres 
sion ic will be brought opposite the roll l. 
Consequently the effect of so moving the roll 
it will be positively to feed along the extra 
thread in for a certain distance and until the 
depression his brought opposite the roll land 
into the position shown in Fig. 6, when the 
grip of the rolls upon the thread n' will be 
released, and said thread will then be free to 
be taken up and carried along with the main 
thread into the machine. The parts remain 
in this position during the knitting of the 
heel, at the end of which it is desired to with 
draw the extra thread. When now the clutch 
c is shifted back to change the machine from 
reciprocating to rotary knitting, the roll k 
will, by means of the connections above de 
scribed, be returned from the position shown 
in Fig. 6 to the position shown in Fig. 5. 
The first movement of the roll K will remove 
the depression ic from opposite the roll, and 
consequently cause the extra thread in to be 
gripped between the projection on the roll 
land the bottom of the groove lic'. This grip 
ping of the thread ' will cause said thread 
to be broken off somewhere between the grip 
ping rolls and the knitting-head, said thread 
usually breaking close to the knitting-head. 
If the loose end of the thread ', when SO 
broken off, were left hanging below the end 
of the tube in, it would be very liable to be 
come so twisted about the main thread in as 
to cause a portion of the end of the thread to 
be broken off and carried along with the main 
thread and thereby form a bunch or imper 
This difficulty is obvi 
fection in the work. 
ated by the mechanism above described for 
the movement of the roll k is continued for a 
considerable distance after the thread in has 
been gripped and broken, and sufficiently far 
to draw the loose end of said thread into the 
guide n, and so prevent its being twisted about 
the main thread. By the mechanism above 
described, it will be seen that the extra thread 
may be inserted and withdrawn at the proper 
times with no other manipulation than that 
of simply shifting the clutch in changing the 
machine from rotary to reciprocating knitting 
and vice versa, and that if said clutch is ar 
ranged to be shifted automatically the extra 
thread mechanism will likewise be entirely 
automatic. It will further be seen that the 
extra thread is not only gripped to cause it to 
be broken, but is positively withdrawn for a 
distance after it has been broken, and is like 
wise positively fed forward for a distance 
when it is to be inserted, whereby it will be 
certain to be taken up and carried along by 
the main thread. 
Warious means may be employed for pro 
ducing the desired movements of the roll lic at 
the proper times, and I do not wish to limit 
myself to the particular means shown and 
described. I prefer, however, to actuate the 
roll k from the shifting clutch as the most 
convenient means, especially when Said clutch 
is arranged to be operated automatically. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. An extra thread mechanism for knitting 
machines comprising two rolls arranged to 
grip the extra thread, one of said rolls being 
positively operated and provided with a de 
pression, whereby when said depression is 
brought opposite to the other roll said thread 
will be released, substantially as described. 
2. An extra thread mechanism comprising 
two rolls arranged to grip the extra thread, 
one of said rolls being provided with a de 
pression, whereby when said depression is 
brought opposite to the other roll said thread 
will be released and be free to be taken up 
by the main thread, and means for moving 
the roll containing said depression to release 
Or to grip Said extra thread, substantially as 
described. 
O 
25 
3. 
35 
45 
55 
65 
70 
75 
95 
Oc 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
 
497,315 
rection or the other said extra thread will be 
gripped or be released as may be desired, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination, with the shifting clutch 
of a knitting machine, of mechanism con 
nected with and operated by said shifting 
clutch for inserting or withdrawing an extra, 
or reinforcing thread, whereby as said clutch 
is shifted in one direction said extra thread 
will be inserted, and as said clutch is shifted 
in the opposite direction said extra thread 
will be withdrawn, substantially as described. 
25 
GEORGE E. ERINK. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. THURSTON, 
S. J. MURPHY, 
3. An extra thread mechanism comprising 
two rolls arranged to grip the extra thread, 
One of said rolls being provided with a de 
pression, and means for moving the roll con 
taining said depression to release or to grip 
said extra thread and to withdraw the loose 
end of said extra thread when broken of into 
the main thread guides, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. An extra thread mechanism comprising 
two rolls for controlling the insertion and 
withdrawal of said extra thread, one of said 
rolls being provided with a groove upon its 
periphery, and the other with a correspond 
ing projection upon its periphery, and one of 
said rolls having a depression therein, where 
by as said last named roll is moved in one di 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497415.txt	(No Model.) 
A. C. SCHUTZ. 
CIG AR BUNCHING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 497,415. 
Patented May 16, 1893. 
g WTWESSES: , 
Zazeefa.1764 
373 - 
f/WWEAVTOR; 
(2-4% C of 4-3, 
"/3. J7%a-7 
Zee ATTORNEYS, 
Presco, Photo-Litho, washioro. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 497,415. 
A, C. SCHUTZ, 
CICAR BUNCHING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 16, 1893. 
SSA 
75 
-it SIC is, 
SSISgs 
 
W/TWESSES 
/WWEAWTOR: 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 497,415. 
A, C, SCHUTZ, 
CIGAR BUNCHING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented May 16, 1893. 
. 
e N 
s 
- 
a 
a 
e 
H---- a 
I 
| WVENTOR; 
BY 
c/ 
4-arrowers. 
 
WITNESSES 
"THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHOTo-LTHo. washington, D.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
. 
. 
A, C, SCHUTZ, 
CICAR BUNCHING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 497,415, 
Patented May 16, 1893. 
 
  
 
o 
A Y22% 
 
Se2 22 -S 
 
 
vs. . 
-R's, 
ON) 
 
 
 
S. 
N V 
E 
 
74-e AITORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPH. C. SCHUTZ, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND 
NICHOLAS H. BORGFELDT, OF SAME PLACE. 
CIGAR-BUNCHING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,415, dated May 16, 1893. 
Application filed November 1, 1892, Serial No. 450,683, (No model.) 
5 5 
75 
- 
apron to the desired taper. At the same time 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ADOLPH. C. ScHUTZ, re 
the roller is forced to move the bunch over 
siding in Brooklyn, Kings county, and State 
the convex surface of the rolling-board, where 
by I gain the advantage that with a given 
of New York, have invented an Improvement 
length of rolling-board I obtain a more thor 
in Cigar-Bunching Machines, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
ough rolling of the bunch, or, in other Words, 
to the accompanying drawings, wherein 
an actually increased rolling surface for the 
Figure 1 is a frontelevation of my improved 
bunch. 
The invention also consists in peculiar 
cigar bunching machine. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
mechanism hereinafter described for moving 
Vation of the same, partly in section, the line 
2-2 Fig. 1 indicating the plane of section. 
the roller, and in other details of improve 
ment that will be hereinafter more clearly 
- Fig. 3 is a plan or top view of the same with 
part of the table broken away. Fig. 4 is an 
ointed out. 
In the accompanying drawings, the letter A 
enlarged vertical cross-section on the line 4-4 
represents the frame of my machine. The 
Fig. 8. Fig. 5 is an enlarged section across 
upper part of this frame supports a table B, 
the treadle, the line 5-5 in Fig. 6 indicating 
the plane of section. Fig. 6 is an enlarged de 
which at the sides and back is by preference 
embraced by ledges a. At its front portion 
tail vertical section on the line 6-6, Fig. 5, 
showing the lower pivotal connection of the 
the table B is cut away to make room for the 
rolling-board C; yet this rolling-board may, 
roller-carrying-frame. Fig. 7 is a similar ver 
tical section on the line 7-7 Fig. 8, showing 
if desired, be secured upon the surface of the 
the upper pivotal connection of said roller 
table, in which case slots would be formed in 
the table alongside of the rolling-board to 
carrying-frame; and Fig. 8 is a detail horizon 
make room for the roller-carrying-arms and 
tal section on the line 8-8 Fig. 7. 
their movement. The rolling-board C is, as 
The object of this invention is to produce 
apparatus for conveniently forming tapering 
has already been stated, of isosceles trape 
Zoidal form when inspected from the top, as 
long-filler cigar bunches, and the invention 
clearly appears from Fig. 3, the converging 
consists principally in the employment of a 
sides of said trapezoid being the front and 
rolling-board having a convex curved upper 
back edges of said table, as shown. The said 
surface, the curve extending from front to 
rolling-board when looked at sidewise as in 
back of said rolling-board so that the surface 
Fig.2 and in section as in Fig. 4, shows a con 
of Said rolling-board is lower in front and 
vex surface, it being lower at the front and at 
lower at the back than in the middle. Said 
the back and highest in the middle. 
rolling-board also is, when seen from above, 
D is the roller for carrying the loop of the 
of isosceles trapezoidal form, the two parallel 
apron Ethat contains the bunch to beformed 
lines of which border the sides of the rolling 
over the rolling-board. This roller D is hung 
board, while the two converging sides of said 
in armsb of a roller-carrying-frame F, which 
trapezoid constitute the front and back edges. 
frame F is pivoted in the main supporting 
With this rolling-board I am enabled to em 
ploy a tapering roller which is adapted when 
frame A. An examination of Fig.1 will show 
that one leg d of the roller-carrying-frame F 
rolled over the surface of the board (in an 
is longer than the other lege of said frame, 
apron of course) to keep its axis always di 
but the pivots fg by which these arms are 
rected to the point of convergence of the front 
respectively connected to the frame A stand 
and back edges of the rolling-board, while at 
inclined toward one other, as very clearly ap 
the same time said roller travels up and then 
pears from Figs. 6 and 7, and so that a line 
down over the curved surface of the rolling 
drawn from one pivot to the other, as the 
board. By having the roller during its rota 
dotted line h in Fig. 1 indicates, will pass 
tion describe an arc of a circle of which the 
through the axes of said two pivots; conse 
point of convergence of the front and back 
edges of the table would be the center, I am quently the frame F when SWung to bring 
enabled to roll the bunch of tobacco in the the roller D backward and forward over the 
25 
35 
45 
 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
497,415 
IC 
25 
surface of the rolling-board C moves on the 
pivotal lineh which is not parallel with the 
surface of the table B, but, on the contrary, 
is inclined to said surface. It is very clear, 
therefore, that the roller - carrying - frame F 
swinging on the inclined line h, describes an 
are of a circle of which the line is the cen 
ter, and that consequently the roller D is 
moved in the same arc of the circle. Inas 
much, however, as the roller hangs in bear 
ings in the roller-carrying-frame so as to Oc 
cupy a substantially horizontal position, 
which is at an angle to the inclined pivotal 
line h, the narrow end of the roller which is 
nearest the pivot g moves on a sharper arc 
than does the broader end of the roller which 
is nearest the lower pivotif. On the curva 
ture thus produced by the swinging of the 
horizontally located roller on the inclined 
pivotal line h the convex surface of the roll 
ing-board C is constructed. Thus I have 
shown how a curvilinear motion is obtained 
for the roller D by the vibration of the roller 
carrying-fame F. At the same time, however, 
the roller by frictional contact with the apron 
on the rolling-board, revolves on its own axis. 
It will be observed from Fig. 3 that in the ini 
tial position the roller is paralled with the 
inclined front edge of the rolling-board, and 
being a tapering roller, it retains as it moves 
toward the back of the rolling-board a direc 
tion which points to the line of convergence of 
the front and back edges of said rolling-board. 
Thus a tapering roller such as is shown and 
Such as is used in this machine will have a 
rotation around its own axis, a displacement 
from one inclination to another inclination 
corresponding to the two inclined edges of 
the rolling-board, and a curvilinear motion 
which depends upon the inclination of th 
pivotal line h. 
- 
In Fig. 1 of the drawings the highest pivot 
g is shown about midway between the top and 
bottom of the frame A; but it is evident that 
the said pivot g may be elevated more or less, 
in which case the line of inclination h, will be 
correspondingly varied and the difference be 
tween the curves described at the opposite 
ends of the roller correspondingly modified. 
Thus I am able to produce with the assistance 
of a proper apron E, which is fastened at both 
ends, a bunch having the desired taper, and 
to roll this bunch Over an elongated surface 
of the convex rolling-board, until it may be 
received at the back end of said rolling-board 
by a suitable bunch-receiver G of ordinary 
construction. The apron E is secured at its 
back end to the back end of the rolling-board 
in any Suitable manner, but its front end is 
fastened in a clamp H, which at i is pivoted 
to the rolling-board, or an extension thereof, 
or to the table B, or other part of the framing. 
This pivoted clamp II is provided underneath 
the rolling-board with an inwardly or rear 
Wardly projecting armi having a step or down 
Ward extension ic, as shown in Fig. 2. The 
roller-carrying-frame F is provided with a 
45 
55 
 
frictional - roller l or analogous projection 
which, when said frame Fis swung backward, 
moves under the lower face of the arm i until 
it strikes the step or set-off k, when, the frame 
F continuing in its backward motion, said 
roller l lifts the armi, and thereby moves the 
clamp II forward i. e. outward, thus stretch 
ing the apron E and tightening it on the bunch, 
which at that time is already enveloped by 
the apron and on the convex portion of the 
rolling-board. Motion may be imparted to the 
frame F either by means of handles n, with 
which it is provided, or by means of a treadle 
I, or by both handles and treadle. The treadle 
I is shown pivoted to the frame A and con 
nected by a link in with the long leg d of the 
frame F. In swinging the treadle on its pivot, 
it will by this link n, cause the long leg d of 
the roller-carrying-frame F to be swung, and 
thereby, in fact, the whole frame F to be 
swung. The connections between the link in 
and the treadle and the leg dare by prefer 
ence either or both slightly slotted, or the 
holes for the connecting pins are slightly en 
larged so as to avoid any strain which other 
wise would becaused by the horizontal vibrat 
ing treadle engaging with the roller-frame 
that swings on the inclined line h. This en 
largementis indicated by dottedlines in Fig. 5. 
Although I have described the roller-board 
C as having the isosceles trapezoidal form 
when examined from the top, it is neverthe 
less clear that if the parallel sides of the trap 
ezoid be made slightly curved, the same final 
result would be obtained, and I therefore wish 
to have it understood that the expression 
isosceles trapezoidal form' when applied to 
this rolling-board would include the modifica 
tion just mentioned. 
It is quite clear that a bunch O, Fig. 2, when 
enveloped in the fold of the apron by means 
of the advancing roller D, will find itself em 
braced in a tapering loop of the apron, and 
will continue in said tapering loop until it is 
finally delivered properly rolled in the bunch 
receiver G. It is clear also that the apron E 
of this machine when inspected from above 
has the isosceles trapezoidal form already 
specified as the form of the rolling-board, or 
substantially the same, allowing, of course, 
for the difference in length between the apron 
and the rolling-board. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
1. The combination of the rolling-board C 
having convex upper surface and substan 
tially isosceles trapezoidal form, with an 
apron E, and with a tapering roller ID, and 
means substantially as described for moving 
said roller, all as specified. 
2. The combination of the isosceles trape 
Zoidal rolling-board C, having convex upper 
surface, with the isosceles trapezoidal apron 
E, roller D, and means substantially as de 
Scribed for moving said roller in the embrace 
of said apron, as set forth. 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOC 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
20 
I 25 
3. In a bunching machine, the roller-carry 
ing-frame F combined with a supporting 
frame A and inclined connecting pivots fg, 
all arranged so that the swinging line h or 
5 center of motion for the vibrating roller-frame 
F shall be inclined to the plane of the axis 
of the roller, as and for the purpose specified. 
4. The rolling-board Chaving convex up. 
per surface, combined with a tapering roller 
Io D, the roller carrying-frame F, the main sup 
porting frame A, and the connecting pivots 
fg between the roller-carrying-frame F and 
the supporting-frame A, said connecting piv 
ots being placed at different elevations, so 
I5 that the line h of motion of the roller-car 
rying-frame shall be inclined to the surface 
Witnesses: 
HARRY M. TURK, 
MAURICE BLOCK. 
497,415 
, 
- 
3 
of the rolling-board, as and for the purpose 
specified. 
5. The combination of the rolling-board C, 
the rolling-apron E and roller D with the roll- 20 
er-carrying-frame F having projection l, and 
with the pivoted clamp H engaging one end 
of the apron, said clamp H having stepped 
projectioni, all arranged so that the roller 
frame when advanced shall cause the clamp 25 
H to be moved in the opposite direction by 
the contact of the projection l with the stepped 
projectioni of the clamp, as set forth. 
ADOLPH. C. SCHUTZ. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497515.txt	(No Model.) 
T. H. BR, ADY, 
INSULATOR, 
No. 497,515. 
Patented May 16, 1893, 
  
 
PS is 77 
 
Z 
size 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
ZWitnesses. 
644& 9424.2/ 
2r 2-6--a 
/nventor 
d24-au-62.c4 
ay fond htface 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS H. BRADY, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT, 
NSULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,515, dated May 16, 1893. 
Application filed January 16, 1893, Serial No. 458,547, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS H. BRADY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Britain, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Insulator Knobs 
and Clips, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to improvements in in 
sulator knobs and clips, and the chief objects 
of my improvement are to provide a conven 
ient insulator with an attached clip for hold 
ing a wire therein, the same being especially 
useful for interior work. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of one form of my knob and 
clip. Fig. 2 is an end view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a partial side elevation and sectional view 
of my clip as applied to a different form of 
insulator. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the 
same together with a portion of wire as held 
in the clip upon the rear side of said insulator. 
Fig. 5 is a side elevation of one of my clips 
as applied to the end of an insulator knob, 
and Fig. 6 is an end view of said knob and 
clip. 
A designates the insulator which may be of 
any desired form and provided with means 
for securing the same in place, as for instance, 
the fastening screw 7. These insulators are 
formed of porcelain or equivalent insulating 
material. 
Instead of a groove wholly encircling the 
insulator, I employ side recesses or grooves S 
which extend directly across the sides of the 
insulator block in which they are placed so 
that a straight wire may be extended through 
them. At one side of said groove or recess, I 
form a hole in the insulator block and fill the 
same with metal which is cast therein to form 
3O 
35 
45 
an internally threaded socket as shown at 9, 
Fig. 3, and as indicated by broken lines in 
Fig. 4, the exterior of said socket being formed 
with lateral wings or projections 10 extending 
into the body of the insulating material to 
hold said socket in place. To these sockets 
in the insulators Isecure the clips 11 by means 
of screws 12 extending into said threaded 
sockets, one end of each clip extending over 
the groove or wire recess S, as shown. Said 
clips are preferably made in a curved form 
at One end so that when they are placed with 
the convex side outwardly as shown at the 
left hand end, Fig. 1, a clip will hold a larger 
wire in place, while by turning it over with 
the convex side toward the groove or recess 
S, as shown at the right hand end of Fig. 1, it 
Will hold a smaller wire. A sectional view of 
the wire 13 as held by one of the clips is shown 
in Fig. 3, while a side elevation of said wire 
as held by the clip at the rear of the insulator 
is shown in Fig. 4. 
From the various illustrations it will be 
seen that the insulator blocks may vary in 
form and that the clips can be applied upon 
the different sides or ends of the same as may 
be desired. 
I claim as my invention 
The herein described insulator and clip, 
consisting of the insulating block A, having 
a wire recess or groove S therein, the clip 11 
with one end adapted to cover said groove 
and the screw and socket for holding said clip 
in place, Substantially as described and for 
the purpose specified. 
TIOMAS H. BRADY. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD W. BUSH, 
JAMES SHEPARD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497615.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 497,615. 
G. H. TENCH. 
WASHER, DRIER, AND SEPARATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 16, 1893. 
as ISI 
deves 
r S 
WITNESSES; 
d:tri 
 
 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 497,615. 
G, H, TENCH, 
WASHER, DRIER, AND SEPARATOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 16, 1893. 
1WWENTOR 
u/cut. '6 
AT TORNEYS. 
The NCRRS PETERS co. Photo-lyrkowshington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. TENCH, OF POTTSVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WASHER, DRIER, AND SEPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,61 5, dated May 16, 1893. 
Application filed November 18, 1892, Serial No, 452,447, (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. TENCH, of 
Pottsville, in the county of Schuylkill and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and Improved Washer, Drier, and Separator, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of machines which are adapted for 
use in Washing, drying and separating coal, 
culm, pebble phosphates, ore, and similar ma 
terial, and the object of my invention is to 
produce a machine which will thoroughly 
Wash, dry and separate any of the saidma 
terials, which will do the work rapidly and 
automatically, which is comparatively cheap, 
and which is adapted to do the screening un 
der Water so as to avoid creating a dust... . 
To this end, my invention consists in cer 
tain features of construction and combina 
tions of parts, which will be hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a broken side elevation, partly 
in vertical section, of the entire apparatus. 
Fig. 2 is a cross section on the line 2-2 in Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 is a cross section on the line 3-3 
in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a cross section on the line 
4-4 in Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a cross section through 
one of the scoops, on the line 5-5 in Fig. 3; 
and Fig. 6 is a cross section through another 
scoop, on the line 6-6 in Fig. 2., 
The apparatus is provided with an open 
ended tapering drum 10, which is arranged 
in a nearly horizontal position and is carried 
by a shaft 11, the latter being supported in 
suitable bearings (not shown in the draw 
ings) and the drum is strengthened by spokes 
12, the end spokes connecting with the drum 
and shaft, and the middle spokes extending 
from the shaft to the cylindrical screen which 
is arranged within the drum and which will 
be described later. On the smaller end pref. 
erably, and on the exterior of the drum 10, is 
a cog wheel 13, which meshes with a gear 
wheel 14 on the driving shaft 15, and by this 
5o means the drum is rotated. The smaller end 
45 
3o 
35 
40 
of the drum is provided with an inwardly 
inclined ring 16, into which extends a supply 
chute 17, from which the material to be 
screened is delivered into the drum. The 
lower portion of the drum turns in water 55 
which is held in an inclined tank 18, the tank 
18 being supplied by a pipe 19, which is con 
trolled by a valve 20, and which delivers into 
the small end of the drum, although it may 
deliver directly into the tank 18, if desired. 
From the lower end of the tank 18, extends 
a pipe 21, which is controlled by a valve 22, 
and through this pipe the dirty water may be 
withdrawn. 
Arranged longitudinally in the drum 10, is 
a cylindrical screen 23, the lower portion of 
which is adapted to be submerged in water, 
and this screen is carried on the outer ends 
of the middle spokes 12, while on its outer 
side are short spokes 24, extending from it to 
the drum 10. The screen 23 is slightly in 
clined, as shown in Fig.1, and at its lower end 
is a circular transverse partition 25, having a 
central hole to connect with the supplemental 
screen or strainer which will be hereinafter 75 
described, and on the inner face of this par 
tition is a circular elevator comprising a se 
ries of nearly radial scoops 26, which extend 
inward from the screen 23 and deliver through 
the central opening in the partition 25. The 
scoops 26 are secured to the partition 25 by 
means of angle irons 27, and the outer edges 
of the scoops are curved inward, as shown at 
28, so as to deliver through the central open 
ing of the partition 25, and into the tapering 
supplemental screen or strainer 29. This 
strainer is of circular cross section and at its 
smaller end is secured to the partition 25, 
while its larger end projects outward through 
the end of the drum and is supported by 
spokes 30 carried by the shaft 11. It will be 
seen that the rotation of the drum and cylin 
drical screen will cause the screened material 
to be raised by the scoops or buckets 26 and 
delivered into and through the strainer 29, 
while the water and any fine material which 
may be elevated will fall outward and down 
ward through the meshes of the strainer, back 
into the drum. The end wall of the larger 
end of the drum 10 is of perforated or screen- Ioo 
95 
 
497,615 
7 o 
75 
95 
Od 
ro5 
o 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ing material, as shown at 31, to admit the water 
and yet prevent solid matter from passing 
into the tank, and the middle portion of the 
drum end is open, being provided with a ring 
32 which is inclined outwardly, that is, it 
tapers, and the smaller end of the ring is se 
cured to the drum. 
Between the end of the drum 10 and the 
partition 25, is a second series of scoops or 
buckets 33, which extend from the wall of the 
drum 10 and deliver through the ring 32, 
these buckets being adapted to raise the dirt 
or other fine material which has passed 
through the screens 23, and the buckets 33 
are made of perforated or screening material 
and have their free edges turned upward, as 
shown at 33 in Fig. 6. Thebuckets or scoops 
33 are secured to the wall 31 by triangular 
brackets 33, and their upper ends are curved, 
as shown at 34, so as to deliver into and 
through the ring 32. The perforations in the 
buckets 33 allow the waterlifter with the coal 
or culm to run back into the tank but are too 
small for the passage of solid matter. 
Beneath the ring 32, and at one end of the 
tank 18, is a dirt pocket 35, which also ex 
tends beneath the strainer 29, and this pocket 
has an inclined bottom at the lower end of 
which is a door 36, which may be raised so as 
to permit the dirt to be taken from the pocket. 
The coal or other material which is dis 
charged through the strainer 29 is delivered 
into a cylindrical drier and separator 37, this 
Separator being mounted on the shaft 11, and 
of the usual kind, except that it is inclosed 
near its front end by a steam jacket 38, which 
has side flanges 39 resting on supports 40 (see 
Fig. 4) and the jacket is supplied with steam 
supply and exhaust pipes 41 and 42. 
It will be seen that by connecting the drier 
and separator with the washing and screen 
ing mechanism as described, the entire oper 
ation of Washing, screening, drying and sep 
arating is carried on continuously and there 
fore rapidly. 
The operation of the apparatus is as fol 
lows: The water is turned on so as to fill the 
tank 18, and it may be renewed as often as 
necessary. The drum 10 and its containing 
Screen and elevators are set in motion, and 
the material to be washed, separated and , 
dried is fed into the small end of the drum, 
from the chute 17. As the drum revolves the 
mass of material is caused to gravitate to 
ward the lower end of the screen 23, and the 
finer particles and dirt will pass outward and 
downward through the screen and into the 
lower portion of the drum. This screening 
takes place in the water and consequently no 
dust is raised. When the screened material 
reaches the scoops 26, it is lifted by the scoops 
and delivered into the strainer 29, and the 
water and whatever fine particles may be left 
drop through the wall of the strainer, while 
the screened material passes onward into the 
separator 37, where it is dried by the action 
of steam in the jacket 38, and separated in 
the usual way. The dirt in the drum 10 grav 
itates to the lower portion of the drum and is 
lifted by the scoops 33 and delivered through 
the ring 32 into the dirt pocket 35, from 
which it may be taken as often as is necessary. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination with two concentric 
cylinders, the inner one of which is of less 
length than the outer and formed of inter 
sticed or foraminated material, of concentric 
tubular outlets in the adjacent ends of the 
two cylinders and delivering independently, 
a circularly arranged elevator in each of said 
cylinders and delivering into the respective 
outlets; whereby the cleaned material within 
the inner cylinder will be discharged through 
the inner outlet and the screenings contained 
within the outer cylinder will be discharged 
through the outer outlet, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. An apparatus of the character described, 
comprising a tapering drum held to turn in 
water, a revoluble cylindrical screen inclined 
slightly and arranged within the drum, a 
strainer extending through the larger end of 
the drum, a discharge ring or spout arranged 
around the strainer, a circular elevator adapt 
ed to lift material from the screen and dis 
charge it into the strainer, and a second cir 
cular elevator arranged at the larger end of 
the drum and adapted to discharge the screen 
ings through the circular ring or spout, Sub 
stantially as described. 
3. An apparatus of the character described, 
comprising a tapering drum held to turn in a 
nearly horizontal position and having its 
lower portion submerged in water, a cylindri 
cal screen arranged within the drum and in 
clined slightly toward the large end of the 
drum, a drier and separator arranged oppo 
site the large end of the drum, a circular ring 
or spout projecting from the larger end of the 
drum, a strainer extending through the ring 
and adapted to deliver into the drier and 
separator, a series of curved scoops arranged 
at the opposite end of the screen and adapted 
to deliver into the strainer, and a second se 
ries of scoops arranged at the larger end of 
the drum and adapted to deliver into and 
through the circular ring or spout, substan 
tially as described. 
4. An apparatus of the character described, 
comprising an inclined tank, an inclined dirt 
pocket arranged at one end of the tank, a rev 
oluble drum held to turn in the tank and 
having at one end a circular spout or ring 
adapted to deliver into the dirt pocket, a cy 
lindrical screen arranged within the drum, a 
strainer leading through the ring or spout of 
the drum and adapted to deliver into a drier 
and separator, an elevator arranged to dis 
65 
 
497,615 
3 
charge from the screen into the strainer, and at the end of the drum, and a heating jacket 
a second elevator arranged to discharge from embracing the separator, substantially as de 
the drum through the ring and into the dirt scribed. 
GEORGE H. TENCH. 
pocket, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with a washing drum 
having screening and discharging mechanism 
therein, of the revoluble separator arranged 
GAETANO FERRARO, 
WM. A. COCHRAN. 
Witnesses: 
5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497715.txt	S. B. ESHLEMAN. 
MACHINE FOR POLISHING BUTTONS, 
Patented May 16, 1893, 
 
d 
42 
22 
th AH AA 7. 
22.2, 
N 
 
 
 
S. 
$84. 
A. 2 
7 - 
A.O.A.T. 
YA 
zz C. 
ing 
NYC 
N/2\, 
s 
A ge 
7/ 
4 77OA WAE J. 
(No Model,) 
No. 497,715. 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
p 
f 
3 ca, a 
M/AAAWASSAS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL B. ESFILEMAN, OF ROCFIESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE M. B. 
SHANTZ COMPANY, OF SAME PIACE. 
MACHINE FOR POLISHING BUTTONS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,715, dated May 16, 1898. 
Application filed January 9, 1893, Serial No. 457,803, (No. model) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL B.ESHLEMAN, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at Rochester, in the county of Monroe and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Machines for Pol 
ishing Buttons; and I do declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, Such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the Same, reference being had to the ac 
Companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in that class of ma 
chines which are designed for polishing but 
tons, and it has for its object, among others, 
to provide a machine which will polish the con 
cave surface and also a portion of the under 
surface adjacent to the rims of the buttons. 
The invention has for a further object to 
provide a machine of the character mentioned, 
with a buffing-wheel which will be automati 
cally adjusted so that at the will of the oper 
ator any desired degree of friction or press 
lure may be applied at all times without spe 
cial adjustment. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon form a part 
of this specification, like letters of reference 
indicating the same parts throughout the sev 
eral views, and in which 
Figure I, is a side view partly in section, 
of a machine constructed in accordance with 
my invention. Fig. 2, is a top plan view of 
the machine. Fig. 3, is a sectional view of 
the button holding and releasing devices. 
Fig. 4, is a side view of the holder proper. 
Reference now being had to the details of 
the drawings by letter, A designates the buff 
ing-wheel which is of the usual construction 
journaled between two arms of an open frame 
B, and receiving motion from the pulley A. 
The frame B is pivoted upon a horizontal 
shaft or rod D that is journaled or supported 
by the upturned end of a block or bar cad 
justably supported by a bracket c' bolted or 
otherwise attached to a standard C. The bar 
c provides for the adjustment of the wheel 
in a horizontal direction toward or from the 
button - holders, to be described. This ad 
justment is effected in any well known way. 
For effecting the automatic, vertical adjust 
ment hereinafter referred to, I employ an arm 
or bar d that rests or fulcrums between its 
ends upon the journal of the shaft D and has 
its inner end engaging the under side of a 
cross-bar b of the frame B and carries upon 
its outer end an adjustable weight d'. The 
weight thus acts as a counterbalance to the 
buffing-wheel and by its adjustment along the 
bar or lever d, enables the wheel to rest with 
varying pressure upon the buttons being pol 
ished. A set-screw is preferably provided to 
hold the Weight at the point to which it is 
adjusted. To regulate the descent of the 
wheel B, a screw E is tapped through a cross 
barb' of the frame whose lower end is adapted 
to strike the upper side of the slide c. 
The adjustment of the buffing-wheel avoids 
undesirable rapidity, and its pressure upon 
the buttons will always be at least that due 
to the weight of the wheel and its frame, but 
the latter varying of course according to the 
location of the counterbalance. 
F designates an ordinary revolving table 
mounted on a vertical shaft G passing through 
its center, and journaled above and below the 
same by horizontal arms or projections from 
the standard C. The revolution of the shaft 
and table is effected by means of gearing com 
prising a bevel-wheel g on the shaft, and a 
bevel pinion g on a horizontal shafth. The 
pinion is adapted to be disengaged from the 
wheel to stop the revolution of the table, by 
an ordinary clutch lever h. The latter how 
ever is normally held by a spring h, in posi 
tion to cause said wheel and pinion to mesh. 
The shaft h is rotated by a worm-gear H. 
Extending around the table F, near its pe 
riphery, is a series of circular obliquely ex 
tending holes, in each of which is placed a 
tube or sleeve I which is there held by a set 
screw i. In each sleeve is a spindle J whose 
lower end is journaled on the hardened coni 
cal end of a screw K in the lower end of the 
sleeve, and whose upper end is enlarged and 
made to stand above and outside of the up 
per end of the sleeve. The upper end of the 
spindle is to receive the button to be polished, 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
 
497,715 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
and for holding said button thereon I provide 
two pins l which project above the face there 
of to enter the holes provided in the buttons 
for sewing the same in place. The set-screw 
he enables the spindle or holder to be adjusted 
vertically, while to prevent said spindle from 
being thrown out of the sleeve, a set-screw in 
is tapped through the latter to engage shoul 
ders formed on the spindleby reducing its di 
ameter for a portion of its length. The ob 
liquity of direction of the holes receiving the 
sleeves, causes the holders to stand with their 
axes inclined with reference to the axis of the 
buffing-wheel, and this relation causes the 
latter when engaging the upper end of the 
spindle, or button thereon, to rotate said spin 
dle and thus produce the necessary rotation 
of the button that is being polished. 
Surrounding the upper reduced end of the 
sleeve I, and movable longitudinally thereon, 
is a short tube or collar , which by its up 
ward movement is adapted to dislodge a but 
ton from the upper end of the spindle. To 
move said tube to perform this function, I 
employ a rod O for each tube engaging a sock 
eted lug on the side thereof at one end and 
pivoted or fulcrumed between its ends upon 
an annular flange fupon the upper side of 
the revolving table F. Said flange has in its 
upper face a circular recess and a radial notch 
for each lever, the circular recess being de 
signed to receive the ends of short pins on 
each side of each lever, to retain the latter in 
position. 
By O I designate a circular disk supported 
by an arm p that depends from the upper 
horizontally projecting arm of the standard 
C, and supports said disk at such distance 
above the revolving table F, that as the latter 
revolves the inner end of each lever O will 
strike and be depressed thereby, and thus 
raise its outer collar engaging end, and with 
it the collar n. 
To assist in placing the button upon its 
holder, I provide a rubber strip or table Q 
with its inner edge cut to an arc correspond 
ing with that of the table F and with its sur 
face even with the enlarged upper end of the 
spindle and pressing against the periphery of 
such enlargement. The friction of the rub 
ber strip Q against the latter, causes the spin 
dle and the pins on the same to revolve as 
they pass the operator, and guided and stead 
ied by the rubber strip as a support for the 
hand, the button can be held against the re 
volving pins until they find the holes in the 
button. 
In operating the machine, the buttons, after 
the holes have been drilled, are Successively 
placed upon the spindles as they pass, through 
the aid of the elastic table Q furnishing a sup 
port to the hand of the operator in the act of 
placing the buttons upon the pins. 
The drawings show pins of one size, but 
they may be of any desired size correspond 
ing to the distance apart of the holes drilled 
through the button, and I thus provide for 
using my machine with buttons of different 
sizes, by simply substituting a single part, 
viz., the spindle corresponding to the distance 
apart of the holes in the button. 
The revolving-table may be constructed of 
any desired size, and corresponding to the 
number of holders which it may be required 
to carry. 
After the button has passed beneath the 
buffer and been subjected to its action, by the 
revolution of the table F, the lever O is tilted 
as already indicated, and thus the button re 
leasing tube is raised, dislodging the button; 
but in case the button should remain in po 
sition on the top of the holder or tube, after 
being removed from the holder by the action 
of the tube, it may be removed therefrom by 
the brush S. The obliquity of the holders be 
sides causing the same to rotate. when the 
button is engaged by the buffing wheel, also 
by presenting the edge of the button to the 
latter enables the under surface adjacent to 
the rim to be polished. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim to be new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In combination with a buffing-wheel, of 
the revolving table carried by a vertical shaft 
and a rotary holder having pins to engage the 
button Openings a sleeve, and a Set-screw on 
which the holder rests, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In combination with a buffing-wheel, of 
the revolving table carried by a vertical shaft 
and the rotary holder comprising a spindle 
having pins on its upper end and having its 
axis inclined relatively to that of the wheel 
and a tube with a vertically adjustable set 
screw on which said spindle rests. 
3. In combination with a buffing-wheel, of 
the revolving table, the sleeves carried there 
by and a spindle in each sleeve having pins 
on its upper end, the tubes and set-screws in 
said tubes on which the spindles rest said 
sleeves being arranged at an incline relative 
to the axis of the wheel, and the friction strip 
substantially as shown and described. 
4. In combination with a buffing-wheel, the 
rotary spindle having pins on its upper end 
carried by the latter, and the arc-shaped piece 
to engage said Spindle to rotate the same for 
the placing of the button on its pins, substan 
tially as described and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
5. In combination with a button holder, a 
reciprocable sleeve thereon, a pivoted lever 
engaging the latter, the rotary table support 
ing said parts, and the stationary part to en 
gage said lever to rock it as the table revolves. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
SAMUEL B. ESHLEMAN. 
Witnesses: 
- 
H. K. ELSTON, 
M. T. BLY. 
75 
95 
IOC 
IO5 
ics 
II.5 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497815.txt	(No Model.) 
G. B. PORTER, 
PITMAN, 
 
 
 
 
C-thic, wishop. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE B. PORTER, OF COVENTRY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO J. IRVING 
BARR AND FRED BARR, OF AFTON, NEW YORK. 
PIT MAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,815, dated May 23, 1893. 
Application filed May 20, 1891, Serial No. 393,494 (No model.) 
a medial position between the two branches 
Be it known that I, GEORGE. B. PORTER, a a. a. and in line with the main stem of the 
pitman, by means of a spring or springs, the 
springs C D being shown in the drawings for 
this purpose. The spring C is shown as 
formed from the same piece of metal as one 
of the journal plates c, from whence it ex 
tends upward or forward and enters an eye 
or slotted projection at the end of the pivoted 
member B. The tendency of the spring C is 
to restore the pivoted member to its central 
position when it is pressed to either side. 
The spring D is placed within the branches 
a, a of the pitman stem, passing between the 
inner end of the pivoted member B and the 
crotch of the fork and extending up on each 
side of the pivoted member, as shown, the 
two ends of the spring D pressing against 
opposite sides of the pivoted member, and so 
having the same effect as the spring C, namely, 
to maintain the pivoted member B in its cen 
tral or intermediate position. 
The particular forms of spring shown are 
not essential to the invention, since any ar 
rangement of springs may be adopted which 
will conveniently accomplish the desired re 
sult. While the springs acting upon the pivoted 
member B give the two portions of the pit 
man sufficient relative firmness to insure the 
proper working of the pitman, they at the 
same time provide a flexible joint which has 
the effect of greatly facilitating the opera 
During the working of the pitman, the 
tion. 
pivoted member B vibrates or oscillates be 
tween the branches a C of the fork, as indi 
cated by the dotted lines in Fig. 1 of the draw 
ings. If, for example, the pitman is arranged 
horizontally on the machine, the pivoted mem 
ber B is pressed toward the branch a above 
it at each forward stroke of the pitman, and 
then toward the branch a below it on the re 
turn or backward stroke; and at the turning 
point between the two strokes, that is at the 
instant when the dead center' is supposed 
to occur, the springs C D act to carry the 
parts past the dead center, thus insuring the 
easy running of the machine. The outer end 
o' of the section A' of the pitman stem is 
adapted to connect with the source of power, 
To all ??h???, it may concer?: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cov 
entry, county of Chenango, and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Pitmen, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to pitmen or con 
necting-rods, such as are used for example in 
Sewing-machines, and is designed to over 
come the dead center so that the machine will 
run more easily and start more readily than 
with the pitmen in ordinary use. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, wherein Figure 1, is a side 
view of the improved pitman, and Fig. 2, is a 
Central longitudinal section of the same. 
The pitman is composed of a main stem A 
A', and a pivoted member B at the working 
end of the pitman. The main stem of the 
pitman is preferably formed in two sections 
A, A, slidable one upon the other so as to 
make the length of the pitman adjustable, the 
adjustment being controlled by a set-screw ac, 
At its upper or forward end the mainstem of 
the pitman, that is, the section. A thereof, is 
formed with two forking branches a da. 
Across both branches a. a, near their point of 
origin and on opposite sides thereof, are se 
cured plates c c forming journal bearings for 
the pivotb of the pivoted member Bof the pit 
man. The inner end of the pivoted member 
Brests in the crotch of the fork at a, and the 
pivoted member B is capable of a lateral 
vibration or oscillation between the two 
branches of the fork, the ends of the branches 
C, a serving as stops to limit the extent of the 
vibratory or oscillatory movement of the piv 
oted member. Plates did may be secured 
across the outer ends of the branches a, a to 
prevent any possible edgewise displacement 
of the pivoted member. The ends of the 
branches a C are beveled on the inside, and 
the adjacent portions of the pivoted member 
B are shaped correspondingly with the said 
beveled ends, so that the sides of the pivoted 
member will seat smoothly against the ends 
of the branches, thus diminishing friction and 
wear at the points of contact. 
The pivoted member B is normally held in 
75 
9o 
95 
00 
TIO 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
497,815 
nation with stops for limiting the extent of 
vibration of said pivoted member, and a spring 
or springs acting upon said pivoted member, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The pitman stem A adapted at one end 
to connect with a source of power and having 
the other end forked, a pivoted member B 
pivoted between the branchesa, a of the forked 
end of the stem and capable of vibration be 
tween the said branches a, a, and a spring or 
springs which normally hold said pivoted 
member in a central position between said 
branches a. a, said pivoted member B being 
adapted to connect with the wrist of a crank, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. The pitman stem A adapted at one end 
to connect with a source of power and having 
the other end forked, plates c. c secured across 
said forked end of the pitman stem on oppo 
site sides thereof, and a pivoted member B 
journaled in and between said plates c c, the 
inner end of said pivoted member seating in 
the crotch of the fork and its outer end being 
adapted to connect with the wrist of a crank, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. The pitman stem. A forked at its forward 
end, the plates c c secured across and on op 
posite sides of said pitman stem, and the piv 
oted member B journaled in said plates c c, 
in combination with the spring C formed in 
tegral with one of said journal plates and act 
ing upon the pivoted member B at its ex 
tremity, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGE B. PORTER, 
Witnesses: 
FRED E. BARR, 
IRVING BARR. 
45 
55 
65 
75 
d 
and the outer end O of the pivoted member B 
is adapted to connect with the crank to which 
power is to be applied. 
When the length of the pitman stem has 
been properly adjusted, and the two sections 
A. A secured together by the set-screw ac or 
its equivalent, the two sections practically 
Constitute a simple integral stem. 
The adjustability of the pitman constitutes 
no part of the present invention, and gener 
ally Speaking the pitman may be said to con 
sist of two parts or members, namely, the 
entire pitman stem (designated A in the 
claims) and the pivoted member B. 
It will of course be understood that the vi 
bration of the pivoted member B is in the 
plane of movement of the pitman, and that 
the effect of the flexible joint between the 
two members of the pitman is a constant one 
While the machine is in operation, the effect 
of the joint being analogous to that of the 
Wrist-joint between the hand and arm of a 
person manually rotating a crank, the fore 
arm being considered the equivalent of the 
pitman-stem, and the hand the equivalent of 
the pivoted member. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A pitman comprising two members AB, 
adapted to connect respectively with a source 
of power and a crank to be driven, and piv 
oted together to permit flexure in the plane of 
movement of the pitman, and restoring means, 
as a Spring or springs, tending to counteract 
such flexure, substantially as set forth. 
2. A pitman having a pivoted member B 
constituting one of the ends thereof and 
adapted to connect with a crank to which 
power is to be applied, said pivoted member 
being capable of a vibratory movement in the 
plane of movement of the pitman, in combi. 
3O 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US497916.txt	(No Model.) 
C. W. G.A.Y. 
FIXTURE FOR TOILET PAPER 
 
No. 497,916, 
Patented May 23, 1893. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHAUNCEY W. GAY, OF WEST SPRINGFIELD, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
SAMUEL C. HALL OF SPRING FIELD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
FIXTURE FOR TOLE PAPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 497,916, dated May 28, 1898. 
Application filed December 1, 1892, Serial No, 453,731 (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHAUNCHY W. GAY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at West 
Springfield, in the county of Hampden and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Fixtures for 
Toilet-Paper; and I do declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
My invention is an improved fixture or de 
vice for holding rolls of toilet paper and it 
consists in certain novel features hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
The objects of my invention are to pro 
vide a device by which a portion of the roll 
or strip of paper will be automatically de 
tached when required for use, and to so con 
struct and arrange the device that the length 
of paper detached will be uniform. These 
objects I attain by the use of the mechanism 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved fixture arranged for use. Fig. 2 is an 
end elevation with a part broken away show 
ling the position of the roll when at rest. Fig. 
3 is a transverse section showing the position 
When a portion of the paper is being detached, 
and Fig. 4 is a view of the frame. 
In carrying out my invention, I employ a 
frame A which may be of metal or any other 
material and is provided with the back plates 
B and the side plates or arms C. The said 
arms C are provided near their front edges 
with the vertical slots D and the rack bars 
E, in advance of the said slots. These slots 
receive the trunnions F at the ends of the 
paper holding roller G and thereby guide the 
said roller in its movements and prevent its 
dropping from the frame. At the bases of 
the said trunnions, I provide the pinions H 
which mesh with the rack bars E for a pur 
pose presently set forth. 
In order that the roller and roll of paper 
carried thereby may be easily placed in posi 
tion, I prefer to construct the back plate of 
the frame in two parts connected by a hinge 
joint I, as clearly shown. When it becomes 
necessary to replenish the roll, one member 
of the frame is swung downward thus carry 
ing the side arm away from the roller to per 
mit the removal of the same. After a fresh 
roll of paper has been fitted on the roller, the 
roller is held in its position relative to the 
fixed member of the frame while the Swing 
ing member thereof is turned back so as to 
support the same. The two members will be 
prevented from falling apart accidentially by 
the screws, hooks or pins which support the 
fixture. 
A knife J extends between the side arms 
just over the upper ends of the slots Etherein 
and is adapted to sever the paper into strips 
in the operation of the device. One end of 
this knife is secured rigidly to the stationary 
member of the frame while the opposite end 
is provided with a pin or stud Kadapted to 
engage a socket L in the swinging member of 
the frame and be thereby supported. 
It is thought the operation of the device 
will be readily understood. When it is de 
sired to use the paper, the free end of the 
same is grasped and a slight pull exerted 
thereon; the roll will thus be caused to ro 
tate and the pinions at the ends thereof will 
thereupon ride upon the rack bars. The roll 
of paper will thus be brought up against the 
knife and a part detached as will be readily 
understood upon reference to Fig. 3. The 
roll will fall to the lower ends of the slots by 
gravity. 
It will be noticed that my device is extremely 
simple in its construction and that the length 
of paper detached will be uniform. When 
the roll is large, it will be quickly brought to 
the knife but as the bulk of the roll decreases 
the time required to bring it to the knife in 
creases so that the length of paper drawn re 
mains the same. 
I do not confine myself to the exact con 
struction illustrated as changes may be made 
in the minor details without departing from 
the invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination of the frame having the 
55 
7 o 
75 
85 
25 
35 
45 
se 
 
95 
CO 
2 
497,916 
5 with REE SEgg 
side arms provided with slots and rack bars, side arms and its opposite end provided with 
a knife extending between the side arms above a pin adapted to engage a socket in the op 
the slots, and a paper-carrying roller having posite side arm. 
trunnions playing in said slots and provided 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
e connbination of the frame compose 
of two parts hinged together, and EPE p 
ing a slotted side arm, a paper-carrying roller 
playing in the said slotted side arms, and a 
Io knife having one end secured to one of the 
FRANK E. ALBOR, 
SAMUEL C. HALL. 
bars. 
d presence of two witnesses. 
2. 
Witnesses: 
CHAUNCEY W. GAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498017.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 498,017. 
J. N. MOULTON. 
CHANNEL MOLDING MACHINE. 
3 sheets-sheet i. 
Patented May 23, 1893. 
 
... 
; 
in 
rebars perers co, photo-liro. washington. P. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 498,017. 
 
J. N. MOULTON. 
CHANNEL MOLDING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 23, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
|| ||||||||||||||||||||| 
No.T 
The 
is pers c. Post 
c. was-Nestone. 
(No Model.) 
J. N. MOULTON. 
CHANNEL MOLDING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
. 
 
No. 498,017. 
Patented May 23, 1893. 
S 
2 
N 
t 
N 
Y N S. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES N. MOULTON, OF HAVERHILL MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
EPPLER, WELT MACHINE COMPANY. 
CHANNEL MOLDING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,017, dated May 23, 1893. 
Application filed May 28, 1892, Serial No. 434,740, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES N. MoULTON, of 
Haverhill, in the county of Essex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Channel-Mold 
ing Machines, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to machines for treat 
ing inner soles of boots and shoes, and par 
ticularly of boots and shoes in which the in 
ner Sole has a channel formed in its outer 
face to receive stitches that connect the inner 
Sole, the upper and a Welt, the edge of the sole 
being slit or channeled to permit a portion of 
the edge to be turned back and form a lip, to 
which the inner edge of the welt is attached. 
The material of the inner sole between the 
bottom of the channel in the face of the sole 
and the slit or channel in the edge of the sole 
is known as the between-substance, and the 
stitches that connect the Welt, upper and in 
ner Sole pass through the between-substance, 
their inner portions being laid in the bottom 
of the channel in the face of the sole, and 
their outer portions on the outer surface of 
the Welt. 
My invention has for its object chiefly to 
provide a machine adapted to compress the 
between-substance, and thus clearly define 
the bottoms of the channel in the face of the 
sole, and the slit in the edge of the sole, re 
ducing the thickness of the between-substance 
to the minimum, and enabling the stitches to 
have a firm bearing on the bottom of the chan 
nel and the upper to have a firm bearing on 
the bottom of the slit in the edge of the sole, 
without subjecting the thread which consti 
tutes the stitches and the mechanism which 
forms the Stitches to unnecessary strain in 
bringing said Stitches and upper to a firm bear 
ing on the bottoms of the channel and slit, 
The invention consists, mainly, in the com 
bination of a pair of rolls, one having a thin 
edged periphery, adapted to enter the channel 
in the face of the sole, and the other having 
a cylindrical periphery to co-operate with the 
thin-edged roll in compacting or compressing 
the between-substance and a beveled flange 
to turn back the lip at one side of the slit in 
the edge of the sole. 
The invention also consists in the combina 
tion with said rolls of certain auxiliary de 
vices, all of which I will now proceed to de 
scribe and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification: Figure 1 represents 
a front elevation of my improved channel 
molding machine. Fig. 2 represents a rear 
elevation of the same. Fig. 3 represents a 
partial end elevation. Fig. 4 represents a top 
plan view. Fig. 5 represents a section on line 
5-5, Fig. 1. Fig. 6 represents a perspective 
view of a portion of the machine. Fig. 7 rep 
resents a section on line 7-7, Fig. 2. Fig. 8 
represents a front elevation of the channel 
molding rolls. Fig. 9 represents a sectional 
view of a portion of the inner sole before it 
is subjected to the action of the machine. 
Fig. 10 represents a sectional view of a por 
tion of a welted boot or shoe, the inner sole 
of which has been treated by my improved 
machine. 
The same letters and numerals of reference 
indicate the same parts in all the figures. 
In the drawings: a represents the support 
ing-frame of the machine. 
b represents the roll which enters the chan 
nel c (Fig. 9) in the face of an inner sole c'; 
and d represents the roll which turns back 
the lip cat one side of the slit c (Fig. 9) 
which is cut in the edge of the inner sole. 
The roll b is formed with a thin-edged pe 
riphery, adapted to enter the channel c and 
bear closely upon the bottom thereof, as in 
dicated in Fig. 8, said roll being affixed to a 
shaft b', which is journaled in bearings in the 
Supporting-frame. 
The roll d has a substantially cylindrical 
periphery 2, which is preferably milled, and 
is provided at one end with a beveled flange 
3, which is formed to bend back the lip c, 
the other end of the periphery 2 of the roll d 
at the same time bearing upon the bottom of 
the slit c, and co-operating with the roll b in 
compressing the between-substance. The roll 
d is also preferably provided with a frusto 
conical portion 4, at the end of the periphery 
2 opposite the flange 3, said portion being also 
milled, as shown in Fig. 8, I do not limit 
myself to the employment of the portion 4, 
25 
35 
40 
55 
75 
95 
Od 
45 
 
498,017 
O 
25 
35 
75 
 
however, and may make the end of the roll d. 
flat instead of frusto-conical. The roll d is 
affixed to a shaft d', which is journaled in 
bearings in an arm or framed, which is piv 
oted at d to the supporting-frame, and is 
adapted to rise and fall, to permit the roll d 
to approach and recede from the lower roll b. 
The upper roll d is pressed downwardly 
upon the material interposed between it and 
the lower roll b by means of a spring e, which 
is connected at one end with a lever e', piv 
oted at e (Figs. 3 and 6) to the supporting 
frame, the other end of said spring being con 
nected to a fixed ear e on the supporting 
frame. The lever e' is connected near one 
end by a rode with the frame d', and at its 
other end with a downwardly-extending rod 
e', the lower end of which may be connected 
with a treadle. The depression of said rod 
e by the treadle will cause the lever e' to 
raise the rode and the frame d, thus raising 
the upper roll d, this being done when the 
Work is to be inserted and removed. When 
the treadle is released, the spring e, acting 
through the lever e' and rode", depresses the 
frame d' and upper roll d, causing the latter 
to bear with a yielding pressure upon the 
work. The extent of the downward move 
ment of the framed and upper roll d may be 
determined by an adjustable stop or bearing, 
on which is preferably a screw di (Figs. 1 and 
5), arranged to act as a stop for the bearing 
of the swinging end of the frame d, and thus 
limit the downward movement of said frame. 
The shafts d' and b' are connected by gears 
gg, which cause said shafts and rolls to ro 
tate simultaneously in opposite directions. 
Motion may be imparted to said shafts by 
means of a gear h, affixed to a crank h, adapt 
ed to be rotated by the operator, and a smaller 
gear or pinion h, meshing with the gear h, 
and affixed to the shaft d. 
i represents a finger or gage, which is ar 
ranged to enter the slit c in advance of the 
roll d, and partially displace or turn over the 
lip c, so as to prepare the latter for the roll 
d. Said gage is formed on a shank-piece i, 
which is attached by screws i 
to the frame 
d. The screw i passes through a slot i in 
said shank, said slot permitting the gage i to 
be adjusted vertically to a slight extent, as 
will be seen by reference to Fig. 1. 
i represents a horizontally-arranged roll, 
which is located so that its periphery will 
bear upon the side of the sole opposite the 
side in which the channel c is formed, and at 
a point opposite the between-substance be-, 
tween the rolls b and d, as best shown in Figs. 
1 and 8, the office of the rolli being to hold 
the channeled side of the sole closely against 
the roll b and prevent the sole from moving 
sidewise So as to disengage the channel from 
said roll. 
The rolli may be supported in any suitable 
way. I have here shown as the support of said 
roll a shanki, which is affixed to a U-shaped 
elastic arm i, one end of which is connected 
by a bolti to a horizontal platej', adapted to 
slide lengthwise on the upper surface of the 
swinging frame d, said sliding plate i being 
movable in the direction required to move the 
rolli horizontally toward and from the space 
between the rolls b and d. Means are pro 
vided whereby the operator may move the 
sliding plate j in the direction required to 
move the rolli away from the rolls b and d. 
said means, as here shown, including the le 
wer e', the rode connecting said lever with 
the pivoted frame d', and a bell-crank lever 
f, pivoted at j (Fig.2) to the supporting-frame, 
and at it to the connecting-rode'. One arm of 
said bell-crank lever bears against a lug or 
earfs (Figs. 2 and 4) on the sliding plated, the 
arrangement being such that, when the lever 
e' is depressed by the operator to raise the 
upper roll d, as above described, the bell 
crank lever j will be moved in such direction 
as to cause it to bear on the lug or ear f, and 
through said lug move the sliding plate f* and 
the rolli in the direction required to move the 
rolli away from the rolls band d. It will be 
seen, therefore, that the act of the operator 
which separates the roll d from the rollb, also 
displaces the roll i. When the lever e' is re 
leased to permit the springe to depress the 
upper roll d, the spring at the same time re 
tracts the bell-crank lever i and permits a 
spring j9 to force the slide j in the direction 
required to move the rolli toward the rolls b 
and d, thus causing the roll i to co-operate 
with the rolls b and d. 
The rolli may be adjusted to the thickness 
of the sole by means of an adjusting screw or 
rod k, one end of which is screw-threaded and 
engaged with a socket in the swinging end of 
the framed, its other end bearing against the 
inner side of the U-shaped arm?. When the 
rod k is turned to move it outwardly, it bears 
upon the U-shaped arm j and forces the lat 
ter outwardly from its normal position, thus 
giving any desired lateral adjustment to the 
rolli. The armi may be adjusted by means 
of a screw lic', engaged by a screw-thread with 
one of the sides of the arm, and having a 
head k, bearing on the other side of the arm. 
The shank i', which directly supports the 
rolli, may be adjusted vertically by means of 
a slot it, formed in it, as shown in Fig. 6, and 
receiving the screwsii, which attach said 
shank to the arm. 
The rolli may be mounted to rotate loosely 
on a studi', affixed to the shankf', as shown 
in Fig. 8; or, if desired, said rolli may be 
positively rotated by means of gears if, 
connecting it with the shaft d, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2. 
I do not limit myself in all cases to the em 
ployment of the rolli, as the work may be 
kept in proper relation to the rolls d and b by 
any other suitable means; or without the em 
ployment of any special device for this pur 
pose, sufficient care being exercised by the 
operator. I prefer to use the rolli, however, 
because it furnishes an anti-friction bearing 
45 
50 
55 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
498,017 
O 
for the outer surface of the sole, holding the 
latter in its operative relation to the channel 
molding rolls and permitting the movement 
of the sole without friction or resistance. 
I do not limit myself to the described de 
tails of mechanism here shown. 
The essen 
tial feature of my invention is the combina 
tion of the rolls b and d, the former adapted 
to enter the channel and the latter adapted 
to turn back the lip c and to co-operate with 
the roll b in compressing the between-sub 
stance. Hence these features may be used 
with any other suitable means for making 
them operative, without departing from the 
spirit of my invention. 
I claim 
1. In a sole-channel-molding machine the 
combination of two rollers arranged in juxta 
position, one having a thin-edged periphery 
formed to enter the channel, and the other a 
cylindrical periphery to co-operate with the 
thin-edged roll in compacting or compressing 
the between-substance, and a beveled flange 
to turn the lip at one side of the channel on 
an angle to the between-substance. 
2. In a sole-channel-molding machine, the 
combination of the upper roller having a lip 
turning flange and a pressing periphery, the 
lower roll having a thin-edged periphery, and 
the gage arranged to bend the edge lip at a 
point in advance of the pressing periphery of 
the upper roll, as set forth. 
3. In a sole-channel-molding machine, the 
combination of the thin-edged lower roll jour 
naled in fixed bearings, the upper roll having 
the edge-lip-bending flange and pressing pe 
riphery arranged opposite the thin-edged pe 
riphery of the lower roll, a swinging frame in 
which the shaft of the upper roll is journaled, 
the guide-roll arranged to hold the work 
against the lower roll, a horizontally movable 
holder supporting said guide-roll, a lever and 
connecting-rod for raising and depressing the 
Swinging frame and the upper roll, and a le 
verconnected with the fixed supporting-frame 
and with the connecting-rod, and engaged 
with the horizontally movable holder, where 
by said holder and roll are displaced horizon 
tally when the upper roll is displaced verti 
cally, as set forth. 
4. In a sole-channel-molding machine, the 
combination of a thin-edged lower roll jour 
naled in fixed bearings, an upper roll having 
an edge-lip-bending flange and a cylindrical 
pressing periphery opposite the thin-edged 
periphery of the lower roll, a movable frame 
in which the shaft of the upper roll is jour 
naled, a guide roll arranged to hold the work 
against the pressing rolls, a horizontally slid 
ing plate supporting the said guide roll, a le 
ver-and-rod connection for raising the mov 
able frame supporting the upper roll, and a 
lever pivoted to the fixed frame of the ma 
chine, and jointed to the connecting rod, said 
lever having a projecting end which engages 
the sliding plate supporting the guide roll, 
whereby the said plate and roll are displaced 
horizontally when the upper roll is displaced 
vertically, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 28th day of 
April, A. D. 1892. 
JAMES N. MOULTON. 
Witnesses: 
ANDREW EPPLER, 
A. D. HARRISON. 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
o 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498117.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 498,117. 
N. J. HOPKINS, 
CAR COUPLING, 
Patented May 23, 1893. 
WITNESSES; 
. . 
73 
INVENTOR 
B Cu/(wit 
AITORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NICHOLAS J. HOPKINS, OF OWEN SOUND, CANADA. 
CAR COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,117, dated May 23, 1893. 
Application filed January 26, 1893, Serial No. 459,839, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
go 
95 
CO 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NICHOLAS.J. HoPKINS, 
of Owen Sound, in the county of Grey, Prov 
ince of Ontario, and Dominion of Canada, have 
invented a new and Improved Car-Coupling, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
?car couplings, such as are adapted to couple 
automatically; and the object of my inven 
tion is to produce an extremely cheap, sim 
ple, and strong coupling of this kind which 
is positive in its operation, and which may be 
quickly and easily uncoupled from either the 
top or sides of the car. 
To this end my invention consists in certain 
features of construction and combinations of 
parts, as will be hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
Corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a broken perspective view, partly 
in section, showing one coupling in position 
upon a car and an opposing coupling in po 
sition to couple with the coupling on the car. 
Fig.2 is a broken perspective view of a slightly 
modified form of the coupling; and Fig. 3 is 
a detail perspective view of a modified form 
of coupling link, bent as required for coupling 
cars of unequal height. 
The drawhead 10 is hollow and has a flaring 
mouth 11. The drawhead is secured to the 
Car bottom in the usual way so as to project 
forward slightly from the car, and its width is 
preferably somewhat greater than its height. 
The coupling is provided with a flat link 12, 
the end portions 13 of which slope in oppo 
site directions, one extending slightly to the 
right and the other to the left, and the link 
terminates at its ends in notches 14 which are 
adapted to engage the coupling pin 16, and 
the extreme end portions of the link are 
pointed, as shown at 15, thus giving each end 
of the link a wedge shape to the end that the 
link may pass readily inward beyond the 
coupling pin, as hereinafter described. The 
link may be bent vertically in the center as 
shown in Fig. 3 to enable cars of different 
heights to be conveniently coupled. 
The drawhead 10 is provided with a coup 
ling pin 16 which slides nearly transversely 
in slots 16 in the top and bottom of the draw 
head, but these slots extend at a slight angle 
to the sides of the drawhead, so that the coup 
ling pin may swing freely in them. The coup 
ling pin is carried in the ends of a bail or 
clasp 17 which has its opposite members ar 
ranged on the upper and lower portions of the 
drawhead, and the outer end of the bail 
merges in a shank 18 which is pivotally con 
nected by a link 19 with a crank 20 on the 
lower end of a vertical rod 21, which rod 
turns in suitable keepers 22 on the end of the 
car 22, and the upper end of the rod termi 
nates in the customary hand wheel 23 by 
which the rod may be turned from the car 
top, while near the lower end of the rod is a 
lever or handle 23 which may be reached 
from the side of the car and which thus en 
ables the car coupling to be uncoupled from 
the side, as described presently. The arms 
of the bail 17 are provided with outwardly 
extending lugs 24 against which press the 
free ends of the springs 25 which are secured 
to the upper and lower sides of the drawhead, 
as shown at 26 in Fig. 1, and the pressure of 
the springs throws the bail and coupling pin 
16 inward or toward one side of the drawhead 
so as to hold the pin in position to engage the 
notch of the coupling link. 
On the opposite side of the drawhead from 
the bail 17, is a U-shaped clasp 27, the ends 
of which are turned up to form keepers 28, 
and these embrace the springs 25 near the 
central portion of the springs, thus serving as 
fulcrums for the springs. In the outer por 
tion of the clasp 27 is a thumb screw 29, the 
inner end of which abuts with the side of the 
drawhead, and by adjusting this screw the 
tension of the Springs 25 may be regulated So 
as to cause the springs to press with the nec 
essary force upon the bail 17 and couplingpin 
16. Instead, however, of having two springs 
as described above, a single spring 30, (see 
Fig. 2) may be employed to press the coupling 
pin into place, and this spring has one end 
fixed to the side of the drawhead, as shown 
at 31 in Fig. 2, while its free end presses 
against a cross bar 32 with which the bail 17 
is provided. 
25 
35 
45 
 
498,117 
2. A car coupling, comprising a hollow draw 
head, having transverse slots therein, a bail 
held to slide on one side of the drawhead, a 
coupling pin secured to the inner end of the 
bail and held to move in the slots, springs Se 
cured to the drawhead and held to press the 
bail and coupling pin inward, a coupling link 
having terminal notches to engage the pin, 
and a revoluble crank rod mounted vertically 
on the car and operatively connected with the 
bail, substantially as described. 
3. In a car coupling, the combination with 
the transversely slotted drawhead, the coup 
ling pin held to move in the slots of the draw 
head, and the springs secured to the draw 
head and arranged to press the coupling pin 
in place, of a screw mechanism for adjusting 
the tension of the springs, substantially as 
described. 
4. The combination with the transversely 
slotted drawhead, a coupling pin held to move 
in the slots of the drawhead, and the springs 
secured to the drawhead and arranged to 
press the coupling pin in place, of a clasp se 
cured to the springs and embracing one side 
of the drawhead, and an adjusting screw ex 
tending through the clasp and impinging on 
the drawhead, substantially as described. 
NICHOLAS J. HOPKINS, 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
LILLIAN WALLACE, 
Stenographer, Owen Sound, Province of On 
tario, Canada. 
CHRISTR. EATON, 
Brever, Owen Sound, Province of Ontario, 
Canada. 
o 
The drawhead is provided, near its front 
end, with a hole 33 in which the ordinary 
coupling pin may be inserted to connect the 
coupling with an old-fashioned link and pin 
coupling. 
In using the coupling one end of the link is 
held fast in the coupling by the pin 16, and 
When the opposite end of the link enters an 
opposing coupling the wedge shaped end of 
the link as it enters the drawhead of said coup 
ling, crowds the pin 16 to one side against the 
pressure of the springs 25 or 30, as the case 
may be, and after the notch 14 passes the pin, 
the Springs return the pin to its normal posi 
tion so that it engages the hook and the latter 
cannot be accidentally withdrawn. The 
pressure of the springs is constant, so that the 
pin is always in place, and to uncouple the 
coupling it is only necessary to turn the rod 
21 by means of the hand wheel 23 or lever 23, 
as this causes the bail 17 to be drawn outward 
So as to pull the pin 16 out of the path of the 
hook 14, after which the link may be with 
drawn. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A car coupling comprising a hollow draw 
head provided in its top and bottom walls with 
slot 16, a pin 16 extending through said draw 
head and slots, a freely swinging and sliding 
yoke 17 embracing the exterior of the draw 
head (but having no positive connection there 
with) and secured to the ends of the pin, and a 
plate or bar spring secured at one end to the 
exterior of the draw head and at its free end 
engaging the yoke and pressing it inwardly, 
Substantially as set forth. 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498218.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 498,218, 
L. C. ABBOTT, 
CATCH FOR SUPPORTING STOCKINGS, 
Patented May 23, 1893. 
Q 
s 
- 
s 
NS) 
Q & 
2-y 
- 
N 
es 
-- 
 
- 
P 
NS 
R 
 
es 
N 
SN 
s 
v 's 's 
A-N) 
-8 
8 S 
"Cele6eesses. 
.4%. 
Z7tevereo?: 
.276-1, 17 
The Norris PETERs co, Photo-THow Ash McTom, d, c. 
al 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEONARD G. ABBOTT, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF THREE 
FIFTHS TO WILLIAM W. GUILFORD, OF WEST MEDFORD, AND RUFUS 
E. PERKINS, OF SALEM, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CATCH FOR SUPPORTING STOCKINGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,218, dated May 28, 1893. 
Application filed October 10, 1892, Serial No. 448,353, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LRONARD G. ABBOTT, 
of Syracuse, county of Onondaga, State of 
New York, have invented an Improvement 
in Catches for Supporting Stockings, &c., of 
which the following description, in connec 
tion with the accompanying drawings, is a 
specification, like letters and numerals on the 
drawings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object to improve 
and simplify that class of catch wherein the 
stud and loop grasp and hold between them a 
portion of the garment or fabric to be sup 
ported. 
In accordance with my invention a plate 
having a stud has co-operating with it a suit 
able loop, said loop being connected loosely 
with and so as to slide in a bight of a piece of 
woven Web, the latter being so arranged, sub 
stantially as will be described, that the greater 
the strain on the web in keeping the stocking 
or other garment in place the more powerful 
the hold of the loop and stud upon the fabric. 
Figure 1 shows a catch embodying my inven 
tion, the loop being represented as removed 
from the stud or in its inoperative position. 
Fig. 2, is alike view, with the loop in operative 
position or supposed to be understrain through 
the web. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section in 
the dotted line ac, Fig. 1; and Fig. 4, is a lon 
gitudinal section on the dotted line ac, Fig. 2. 
The base of the catch consists of a metallic 
plate a, and preferably it will have its longer 
edges a? overturned to not only finish the 
base, but also to stiffen the same longitudi 
nally. The plate a has connected to it a stud 
a, preferably headed, on and about which 
will be laid the fabric which may be part of 
a stocking or other wearing apparel which is 
to be caught and held firmly by the catch. 
The plate a also has a suitable web-guide or 
eye a for the webb, which latter may be of 
any usual material, preferably, however, of 
non-elastic material, or a Web Without rubber, 
although a rubber web might be used with 
out departing froll my invention, the non 
elastic fabric being in some instances prefer 
able because of the liability of rubber to rot 
in wear. The plate a is slotted at or near that 
45 
s 
- 
?o 
55 
end provided with the stud to leave a cross 
bar 2 about which is bent one end of the web 
b, the said web being thereafter secured to the 
main body of the web preferably by stitches 
as at 3. The web b is led along the back of 
the plate a so as to cover the back as in Fig. 
3, and at the opposite end of the plate there 
is a slot through which is passed a folded por 
tion of the web, the fold being entered by a 
suitable pin c', thus confining the web to the 
upper end of the plate. 
From the upper end of the plate a the web 
is led through the guide-eye a' and through a 
sort of eyeb made at the upper end of the 
loop e which is to co-operate with the stud a 
and thence the web is led back through the 
guide-eye a', the portion of the web embraced 
by the loop and located between it and the 
guide-eye constituting what I call a bight or 
fold or loose loop upon which the eye slides 
and rises, the web after it is passed through 
the guide-eye going up and being attached to 
other well known portions of the stocking 
Supporter. 
It will be readily seen by inspection of the 
drawings Figs. 1 and 3, where the loop e is 
shown as drawn down, that the bight in the 
web is lengthened. 
To use the catch, the loop e will be drawn 
down substantially as in Figs. 1 and 3, and 
the fabric, stocking, or whatever it may be, 8o 
having had a portion thereof laid upon the 
stud a, the user of the catch by a thumb 
piece or projection f will draw the loop from 
its position Figs. 1 and 3, into the position 
Figs. 2 and 4, in which position it will be un 
derstood the garment or stocking will be 
grasped between the loop and the stud. The 
loop will be retained in its operative position 
Figs, 2 and 4, by the strain put upon the web 
b at or from the usual belt surrounding the 
waist, and in use the bight in the web will be 
drawn up short, as best represented in Figs. 2 
and 4, and it will be observed that the greater 
the strain upon the web b, the more firmly 
and securely the loop will hold the fabric in 
contact with the stud. 
In another application, Serial No. 448,352, 
filed October 10, 1892, I have shown a catch 
75 
95 
: 
85 
i 
2 
498,218 
scribed, in an expansible bight of the web 
through the guide-eye. 
2. A stocking Supporting catch, composed 
of a metallic back plate having a stud, and a 
web guide-eye at its front side; and a me 
tallic loop adapted to hang between said stud 
and guide-eye on the expansible bight or loop 
of a web extended through the guide-eye and 
to co-operate with said stud, substantially as 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
described. 
- 
25 
LEONARD G. ABBOTT. 
Witnesses: 
G. W. GREGORY, 
M. J. SHERIDAN. 
composed of two plates, one having a stud 
and the other a loop, one being movable on 
or with relation to the other, but in that ap 
plication the web is not connected with the 
loop by a bight in the web, the length of which 
is changed during the use of the catch. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A catch for stocking supporters and the 
like, consisting of a metallic back plate hav 
ing a stud, and a web guide-eye therein; a 
web; and a loop adapted to co-operate with 
the said stud, said loop hanging below the 
said web guide-eye, the strain on the web 
measuring the extent of the holding capacity 
of the loop and stud, substantially as de 
o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498318.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 498,318. 
W. C. STEERS. 
EXTENSION TABLE, 
Patented May 30, 1893, 
E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
S2SS2% SS2 
S2 
S2 
2 % 
4. 
S2, 
2 
% 2. 
2 zz/ 
S2% SN22 
27 
2 
W2% 
Fio.3. 
Ty3. 
IniEnfor 
Nukul, Sists, 
is owk Osky, aaays. 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, Photo-LITHo., washingtoN. c. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELM. C. STEERS, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
EXTENSION-TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,818, dated May 30, 1898. 
Application filed August 15, 1892, Serial No. 443,095. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILHELM. C. STEERs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of 
California, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Kitchen-Tables, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates mainly to an exten 
sion-top for kitchen tables and means for op 
erating the same, and it consists of a peculiar 
and novel construction of parts as will be 
hereinafter fully explained by reference to 
the accompanying drawings forming part of 
this specification in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my table 
with parts broken away. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal sectional view of the same with leaves 
extended. Fig. 3 is a cross-section taken 
through the line acac Fig. 2. - 
The top A of the table rests normally upon 
a bar B, placed midway of and transversely 
across the frame. 
B* B are two screws with heads downward 
or in reverse position and which heads rest 
loosely in notches Q in the longitudinal bars 
of the table frame. . The ends of these screws 
extend up and loosely through holes in the 
bar B and enter the table top A to hold it 
loosely in place on the cross-bar so that either 
end may be raised to admit the extension 
leaves. 
The extension leaves C and D are of the 
same thickness as the transverse-bar B and 
are suitably attached to the inclined brack 
ets EE, the latter being capable of extension 
in mortises F, F, F, F made in each of the 
four legs of the table and when the support 
ing brackets are drawn outward or extended 
the leaves C, D, may take the position shown 
in Fig. 2 and form close connection with the 
top of the table and be placed in a position 
flush with its surface. 
Suitable clips G G* are attached to and 
project below the lower edges of the brackets 
and slide along the opposite outer faces of 
the ways H H* which are supported by the 
table body and cross each other midway, as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2; and these clips pre 
vent the entire withdrawing of the brackets 
when they come against the inner faces of 
the table legs. By this means the brackets 
are prevented from binding and from lat 
eral movement and all the parts Will run 
smoothly. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
In order to close the extension leaves the 
ends of the center leaf or top of the table are 
slightly raised alternately sufficient play be 
ing had around the screw to permit; when the 
brackets carrying the extensions are pushed 
backward until the inner ends of the exten 
sion leaves strike the cross-bar B and the top 
and leaves will assume the position shown in 
elevation in Fig. 1 and a continuous and fixed 
table-top proper is had. When it is desired 
to adjust the parts, the top is raised a little 
and the screws are turned by hand (which 
movement the notches Q permit) until their 
tips are passed upward into or drawn out of 
the top A, whereby the wear of parts can be 
taken up. 
Under the rail I, and at each side of the 
middle standard U is placed a sliding, knead 
ing and cutting-board K K*, both of which 
can be drawn outward as occasion requires, 
aud beneath these are the drawers LL* and 
flour and meal bins N N* separated by the 
rail M. 
As thus constructed a kitchen table is had 
of great convenience and at a small cost. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire 
to secure by Letters Pat 
... k. 
ent, is- 
In a table, a frame, two opposite bars of 
which have notches, a cross bar connecting 
said opposite bars and having holes register 
ing with said notches, inverted screws whose 
heads rest in said notches and whose shanks 
pass upward through said holes, and a top 
piece resting centrally upon said cross bars 
and into which the tips of the screws take: 
combined with oppositely-inclined ways with 
in the table frame, brackets passing through 
mortises in the legs of the frame and at right 
angles to said cross-bar and sliding upon said 
ways, clips secured to the brackets and en 
gaging the opposite outer edges of the ways, 
and extension leaves mounted upon said 
brackets and adapted when housed to abut 
against the opposite edges of said cross-bar, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand and seal. 
WILHELM. C. STEERS. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
C. W. M. SMITH, 
CHAS. E. KELLY. 
go 
95 
TOO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498418.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 498,48, 
 
2 
 
D 
E. 
R 
 
 
TAKE-UP MECHANISM FOR LOOMS, 
H. WYMAN. 
- 
Patented May 30, 1893. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
as It 
 
Q. 
N 
|| || 
& 2 
ss 
 
G 
, 
H 
S 
N R NHR 
|| & s II. ! --& 
5) Hy 
T 
Artis's & El 
rhd 
N SNS A. 
s"TAgios 
N SyS, 
SYS HN. N. 
V. all 
inct 
 
St. 
Witness as . 
Irive Enr, 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
P 
No. 498,418. 
H. WYMAN. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
TAKE-UP MECHANISM FOR ,00MS. 
Patented May 30, 1893, 
Z 
e 
22 
 
 
22 
 
 
  
%3 S. Nt?ia. 
3%H2, 
o-  S IZ 
  
 
 
 
N. 
as areaseraecole 
Wittress = s. 
&valeA. 
of-124 (-2-4-6-4 
Irverkor. 
eyro; rout. 
Zoezee ( 
Risperers co, photo-li-ko. WASHING Fox 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE WYMAN, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
CROMPTON LOOM WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
TAKE UP MECHANISM FOR LOOMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,418, dated May 30, 1893. 
Application filed February 10, 1892, Serial No. 421,042, (No model.) 
W 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HORACE WYMAN, of 
Worcester, county of Worcester, State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Take-Up Mechanism for Looms, of which the 
following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, like 
letters and numerals on the drawings repre 
Senting like parts. 
This invention has for its object the pro 
duction of an improved take-up mechanism 
wherein the step-by-step movement of the 
winding roll is effected through a friction de 
vice consisting of a pulley or wheel, and a dog 
or clutch. The pulley and dog or clutch are 
of peculiar construction, the dog or clutch 
embracing the entire periphery or flange of 
the pulley or wheel. 
In my improved take-up I have shown two 
rolls, one a feeding or driving roll to feed or 
draw the cloth or material over the breast 
beam, and the other a winding or receiving 
roll; and these two rolls are arranged to be 
rotated by Worms on one and the same shaft 
engaging Worm-toothed pinions on the rolls, 
as will be described, the said shaft deriving 
its motion from a friction feed device. 
The particular feature in which my inven 
tion consists will be hereinafter described in 
the specification and pointed out in the claims 
at the end thereof. 
Figure 1 is a partial front elevation, broken 
out centrally, of a sufficient portion of a loom 
with my improvements herein to be claimed 
added to enable my invention to be under 
stood. Fig. 2 is a left-hand elevation of the 
parts shown in Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a sectional de 
tail below.the line ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tion of the friction or clutch pulley in the 
line ac', Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is a section of the fric 
tion or clutch pulley in the line ac, Fig. 4; 
Fig. 6, a like section in the line ac, Fig. 4. 
Figs. 7 and 8 are sectional details of a fric 
tion check applied to one of the gears of one 
of the take-up rolls or beams. 
The loom frame A; breast-beam B; and lay 
C, partially shown, are and may be of any 
usual shape, the frame having suitable bear 
ings to sustain the working parts to be de 
scribed. The roll D, mounted in bearings D', 
has fast on it a worm-toothed pinion D. The 
roll E, having bearings E", has loosely mount 
ed on its shaft at one end a Worm-toothed 
pinion E, provided at one side with a flange 
E, which is acted upon by a drag or friction 
block 20, having co-operating with it an ad 
justing screw 21, carried by an arm 22 of a 
hub 23, fast on the roll E. This friction block 
serves to connect the roll E and pinion E 
frictionally so that the pinion can slip on the 
roll, as is necessary as the diameter of the 
mass of cloth wound upon the roll Eincreases. 
The stand a has a suitable bearing for a 
Worm shaft C., having near its opposite ends 
respectively worms d and e, which engage re 
spectively the pinions D, E, and rotate the 
beams D and E. The roll E is of Smaller di 
ameter than the roll D, but this, although pref 
erable, is not essential. 
The Worm shaft a? Occupies an inclined po 
sition, as shown, or is so placed as to engage 
the Worm-toothed pinions, one on its under 
and the other on its upper side; and to en 
able both beams to be rotated in opposite di 
rections Ihave inclined the teeth of the worm 
toothed pinions respectively in the same di 
rection. 
The shaft a has a bevel gear a, which is 
engaged by a bevel gear Cl, fast on shaft a', 
adapted, as shown, to be rotated by hand 
through a hand-wheel a fast thereon, or 
through afriction or clutch pulleybnormally 
loose on the said shaft. The shaft a has 
fast on it, at one side the friction pulley, a 
locking plate c having one or more notches 
or projections, and loose on the said shaft at 
the other side of the said friction pulley is a 
hub c', having an annular groove 2, and pro 
vided with one or more locking pins c, which 
are guided in and by the webs or spokes of 
the friction pulley, the pins being adapted to 
be projected through the said pulley and to 
engage the locking plate C when the take-up 
is to be operated automatically, the said lock 
ing pins being withdrawn from engagement 
with the locking plate When for any reason 
the take-up is to be operated by hand. The 
annular groove 2 receives in it a roller or other 
stud 3 of a suitable lever f, mounted on a 
stud 4, the said lever being under the control 
of the operator. 
The friction pulley b has a T-shaped rim or 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
o 
75 
85 
95 
498,418 
7 o 
75 
95 
IOC) 
3O ther movement of the dog g. 
periphery, see Figs. 5 and 6, which is embraced 
and gripped by a friction dog or clutch g, the 
shape of which is best shown in the sectional 
views Figs. 4 and 5. The inner end of the dog 
5 embraces the periphery of the pulley from side 
to side and engages both the outer and inner 
surfaces of the T-shaped periphery and hangs 
thereon. The outer end of the doggisjointed 
at g to an actuating device, shown as a link 
g", shown as extended loosely through a hole 
in a studg, made adjustable preferably in a 
slot of an arm g, moving in unison with the 
lay, the extent of movement of the pulleybby 
the dog, being controlled by adjusting the 
The rod g has a 
said stud in the said slot. 
collar 80, below which is a spiral spring 81 
which rests on the studg, the lower end of 
the rod below the stud having a collar 82. 
By the introduction of the spring in the man 
ner shown, the armg may be moved or rocked 
upwardly and compress the spring somewhat 
without at the same instant and to the same 
extent moving the cam g. 
Above the upper end of the link and dogg 
is placed a stud 84 containing a regulating 
screw 85 which, at the backward movement of 
the layor upward movement of the arm g, car 
ries through the spring the link until it comes 
in contact with the regulating screw and ar 
rests the upward motion and prevents fur 
A detenth, made like the dogg, embraces. 
the flanged periphery of the pulley b and pre 
vents retrograde motion thereof. 
The dogg, as shown, has a friction spring 
g, and the detenth a friction spring h". As 
the lay is moved forward or toward the breast 
beam, the dog g is moved downward in the 
direction of the arrow, Fig. 4, and at such 
times bites and moves the friction pulley b, 
but when the lay is being moved from the 
breast-beam, the dog slips over and does not 
rotate the pulley b, and during this latter 
movement the detent h, prevents any rotation 
of the pulley b in a backward direction. The 
detent is mounted loosely on a stud h, and 
is free to tip thereon to a limited extent. 
The detent is so constructed and applied 
to the pulley as to bite the flange in the same 
manner as the dogg, which permits the pull 
ley to move in a forward direction but pre 
vents it from moving in a reverse direction. 
The dogg is of pecular construction, i.e., it 
is composed of two arms 7, 8, shown best in 
Figs. 6 and 7, said arms being rigidly con 
nected together by a bolt 6. Each arm is cut 
away at its inner face, as best represented in 
Fig. 4, to leave a space to embrace the pro 
jecting flange of the pulley and also present 
two V-shaped edges, one a little out of line 
with the other so as to contact with the oppo 
site sides of the flange of the pulley, said 
edges moving in unison and when the dog is 
turned, as will be described, firmly biting the 
flange. 
The cloth is supposed to take the following 
course from the breast-beam, see Fig. 2,- 
55 
35 
45 
 
viz.:-It descends as shown by dotted lines n, 
passes under the roll D from the right up 
about the rear side of said roll, between it and 
the guide roll n, over said guide roll to the 
left and down to the roll E, on which it is 
wound. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination with the rolls D and E 
both located at the cloth-making end of the 
loom, and a worm - wheel on each roll, of a 
worm shaft located between the said worm 
wheels and engaging the under side of one 
worm-wheel and the upper side of the other 
worm-wheel, a friction clutch mechanism in 
cluding a pulley having a T-shaped flange, 
an actuating dog composed of two arms rig 
idly bolted together and having V-shaped 
edges located out of line, said edges engaging 
the inner and outer edges of the flange of the 
pulley, the arm g, and the rod g having a 
spring interposed between a fixture on itself 
and a fixed portion of the said arm, and con 
nections between the clutch mechanism and 
the worm shaft, substantially as described. 
2. Atake-up roll provided with worm toothed 
pinions; a shaft provided with a worm to en 
gage said pinions, and a bevel gear; a shaft as 
a provided with a bevel gear, a locking plate, 
and a hand wheel fast on said shaft a, com 
bined with a hub loose on the said shaft and 
having a locking pin; and a pulley or wheel 
b normally loose on said shaft a' intermedi 
ate the said hub andlocking plate, to operate, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a take-up mechanism, a friction pull 
ley having a T-shaped-flange; a rigid actuat 
ing dog embracing the T-shaped flange of the 
pulley from edge to edge and contacting with 
said flange by a tooth both within and with 
out, and hanging at one end on said flange; 
and a friction spring co-operating with said 
dog and bearing upon the interior of said 
flange; combined with a link to which the 
other end of Said dog is joined to move the 
arm g to which said link is connected, and 
an adjustable stop to control the upward 
movement of the arm g, to operate, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The combination with the rolls D and E, 
and worm-toothed pinions, one for each roll, 
of a shaft located between the said toothed 
pinions and provided with two worms, one 
Worm engaging the under side of one of the 
said pinions and the other worm the upper 
side of the other pinion, actuating devices for 
said Worm shaft, and a friction device to con 
nect the pinion of the roll E to it, substan 
tially as described. 
5. The combination in a loom of the follow 
ing instrumentalities, viz.:-the rolls D and E, 
having worm toothed pinions, one for each 
roll, a shaft located between said pinions and 
provided with two Worms, one worm engaging 
the under side of one of the said pinions, and 
the other worm the upper side of the other of 
- 
ch 
II5 
I 25 
498,418 
3 
said pinions; a friction clutch device, and an 
intermediate gear to rotate the said worm 
shaft; and a friction device connecting the 
roll Eand its pinion, to operate, substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination with the rolls D and E, 
and worm toothed pinions, one for each roll, 
of a shaft located between the said toothed 
pinions and provided with two worms, one 
worm engaging the under side of one of the 
said pinions, a friction clutch device, and in 
termediate gearing to rotate the said worm 
shaft, and a friction device to connect the 
pinion of the roll E to it, substantially as de 
scribed. - 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
HORACE WYMAN. 
I5 
Witnesses: 
JUSTINA. WARE, 
SAMUEL B. SCHOFIELD. 
W 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498519.txt	(No Model.) 
A. D. LEWIS & S. WITHERELL. 
ELECTRIC PERFORATING PEN, 
No. 498,519. 
Patented May 30, 1893, 
 
if pesses 
a? 
v W. 3.2%zzy 
(C/2- 
22 
3y zzezz/lifppeys, 
I9 epirs 
JZez70277-Zezzav 
ASzeeza/7tayeetsaz 
The on Rus perERs co., Photo-Litho. WASHINGTON, E.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AARON D. LEWIS, OF CANTON, MISSOURI, AND SILAS WITHERELL, OF FORT 
MADISON, IOWA; SAID WITHERELL ASSIGNOR TO SAID LEWIS. 
ELECTRIC PERFORANG PEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,519, dated May 30, 1893. 
Application filed April 23, 1892, Serial No. 430,384, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it 7ay concert: 
Be it known that we, AARON ID. T.EWIS, re 
siding at Canton, in the county of Lewis and 
State of Missouri, and SILAS WITHERELL, re 
5 siding at Fort Madison, in the county of Lee 
and State of Iowa, citizens of the United States, 
have invented a new and useful Electric Per 
forating-Pen, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to electric perforat 
ing pens; and it has for its object to provide 
a device adapted to be used in connection 
With an ordinary pen, which being electrically 
controlled, provides means for perforating 
T5 and indenting the writing material which is 
being Written upon, and to this end is designed 
to make Such perforations or indentations 
regularly upon the Writing itself or adjacent 
to the lines thereof, so that no alterations, 
2O erasures or changes whatever made in the 
Writing can be successfully made without de 
tection. This use particularly adapts the de 
vice for Writing checks, drafts, and all com 
mercial paper and legal instruments in which 
25 it is essential that such alterations, erasures 
and changes be not made. 
With these and many other objects in view 
which will readily appear as the nature of the 
invention is better understood, the same con 
3o sists in the novel construction, combination 
and arrangement of parts which will herein 
after more fully be described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figure 1 
is a perspective view of an electric perforat 
35 ing pen constructed in accordance with this 
invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal 
sectional view of the same. Fig. 3 is a verti 
cal transverse Sectional view of the same. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings:- 
4o A represents a metallic or other suitable pen 
handle constructed in a shape so as to be 
readily grasped between the thumb and fore 
finger of a person, to write in the ordinary 
manner. The said pen handle is connected 
45 or provided at one end with the pen holder 
B, carrying the ordinary writing pen C, 
which is written with in the ordinary man 
ner. Directly back of the pen holder B the 
handle A is further provided with the de 
5o pending pocket portion D, which receives the 
electro magnet E, Secured at its lower end to 
the base of said pocket and the handle, while 
the core F of the magnet projects slightly 
above the top plane of the handle, which may 
be further provided with the inclined rest 55 
portion G extending from the rear side of 
said pocket to a point near one end of the 
handle. Secured to the depressed portion of 
the handle A and embracing one side of the 
magnet is the bracket H, provided at its up- 60 
per end with a bracket arm h, projecting over 
the top of the magnet and provided With the 
threaded perforation h. The said threaded 
perforation h", receives the adjustable Con 
tact screw I working therethrough and lying 65 
directly over the core of the magnet, and also 
receives the binding nut J clamping between 
the same and the insulation washer j, one end 
of one of the conducting wires K which is con 
nected with one end of said contact screw, While 7 c. 
the other wire IX is connected with the helix of 
the magnet, so that when the said wires are 
connected with an ordinary battery the core of 
the magnet is magnetized and causes the ar 
mature reed L to laterally vibrate between 75 
the core of the magnet and said contact screw, 
said lateral vibration being to and away from 
the pen as distinguished from a longitudinal 
movement or reciprocation in a line With the 
pen. The said spring armature reed L is con 
nected at one end to the handle of the pen 
and is normally out of contact with the mag 
net core and said magnet, and is assisted 
in its vibrations by the auxiliary leaf contact 
spring M secured to the top thereof and con 
tacting with the contact screw so that when 
the current is passed through the wires, the 
armature reed is rapidly vibrated and the vi 
brations regulated, as can be readily seen by 
adjusting the contact screw. The extreme 
outer end of the armature reed is provided 
with a threaded perforation l which adjust 
ably receives the perforating or indenting 
screw N, working therethrough and provided 
with a perforating point or points in which 
are designed to perforate or indent the paper 
in the lines forming the Writing or alongside 
of the lines according to the position of the 
outer end of the reed. As illustrated the per 
forating point strikes directly in front of the 
point of the pen so that the perforations or 
indentations are in the writing itself, and 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
 
498,519 
thus renders erasure or alteration impossible. 
But it will be readily seen that the outer end 
of the reed can be bent or so shaped as to in 
dent or perforate parallel with the writing, at 
an angle, or at one side, and by employing a 
Set of perforating points in the screw N, the 
paper may be perforated on each side of the 
writing. 
Various changes similar to those noted will 
readily suggest themselves to the manufac 
turer without in any way departing from the 
Spirit of this invention. 
It may be further observed that the perfo 
rator herein described may be advantageously 
used in connection with any writing instru 
ment using a fluid or in connection with a 
pencil for Writing purposes generally. 
It will be readily seen that the perforator 
used in connection with such writing instru 
ment may be adapted to strike in various po 
sitions, so that the same will puncture or per 
forate in front of the pen or pencil point, at 
the side or sides, behind and parallel there 
with, the perforator being adapted to strike 
Vertically and also directly in rear of the in 
strument point if found desirable. The per 
forator being thus arranged makes the perfo 
rations in or through the paper directly be 
hind an upstroke of the pen or pencil and im 
mediately in front of the downward stroke 
thereof, and in all of which positions before 
noted, the electrically controlled perforator 
being mounted in any suitable manner upon 
the instrument, and carrying the perforating 
point at any suitable point according to the 
location with respect to the instrument point 
where it is desired to strike. 
The perforator following and leading the 
pen, so cuts, pierces or punctures the paper 
with small holes, that the ink where a pen is 
employed, runs through the paper along the 
line of Writing so that no alterations whatever 
can be made without leaving a prominent in 
dication or trace thereof. 
It is thought that the many adaptations of 
the herein described electrically controlled 
perforator will readily suggest themselves to 
those skilled in the art. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
l. In a perforating pen, the combination of 
an Ordinary pen handle, an electro magnet 
mounted upon said handle, and a laterally 
Vibrating perforating armature reed mounted 
xteriorly of and longitudinally on said han 
dle and controlled by said magnet, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In an electric perforating ordinary pen, 
the pen handle carrying the holder and pen 
at one end, an electric magnet mounted upon 
said handle, and a laterally vibrating perfo 
rating armature reed mounted exteriorly of 
and longitudinally on said handle and con 
trolled by said magnet, said reed having a 
perforating or indenting point or points ad 
jacent to the point of the pen, Substantially 
as set forth. 
3. In an electric perforating ordinary pen, 
the pen handle carrying the holder and pen 
at one end, an electro magnet mounted upon 
said handle, a laterally vibrating armature 
reed mounted exteriorly of and longitudinally 
on said handle and provided with the thread 
ed perforation at the other end, and an ad 
justable screw working in said perforated end 
and provided with a projecting perforating 
or indenting point adjacent to the point of 
the pen, substantially as set forth. 
4. In an electric perforating pen, the com 
bination with an ordinary pen handle and the 
pen at one end thereof, of an electrically con 
trolled laterally vibrating perforating reed, 
mounted exteriorly of and longitudinally on 
the pen handle and provided with a point at 
one end striking adjacent to the point of the 
pen, substantially as set forth. 
5. In an electric perforating pen, the pen 
handle provided with a depending pocket por 
tion, an electro magnet mounted within said 
pocket portion, a vibrating perforating arma 
ture reed secured at one end to said handle 
and playing over the magnet, a bracket se 
cured to said handle and extending over the 
top of the magnet, and an adjustable contact 
screw Working through said bracket above 
the magnet and said armature reed, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. In an electric perforating pen, the pen 
handle carrying the holder and pen at one 
end and provided with a depending pocket, 
an electromagnet mounted within said pocket, 
the vibrating perforating reed connected with 
said handle and provided with a perforating 
point or points striking adjacent to the point 
of the pen, an auxiliary leaf contact spring 
secured to the top of the reed above the mag 
net, a bracket secured to the handle and pro 
jecting over the top of the magnet, and a con. 
tact screw adjustably mounted in said bracket 
and contacting with Said auxiliary spring, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
AARON D. LEWIS. 
SILAS WITIERELL. 
Witnesses: 
B. H. SMITH, 
JAS. E. OLDHAM. 
75 
So 
85 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
I O 
O 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498619.txt	(No Model.) , 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
M. W. BRESNAHAN & J. J. HEYS. 
SOLE LEVELING MACHINE, 
No. 498,619. 
Patented May 30, 1893. 
S. S. E. fell 
NESA, 
2E 2 
SN/ \- 
ES A2 
SES 
s 
2 3. 5 
2 
SS 
 
 
D' f 
- 
P 
H 
f 
f 
E. 
NS N 
2: 3 
He NORRIS PETERS co, Photo-Lirio, washanarco. 
 
M. W. BRESNAHAN & J. J. HEYS. 
SOLE LEVELING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2, 
(No Model.) 
No. 498,619. 
Patented May 30, 1893. 
AS SR 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAURICE. W. BRESNAHAN AND JOHN J. HEYS, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, 
sole-LEVE LING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,619, dated May 30, 1898. 
Application filed November 1, 1892, Serial No. 450,693. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, who, it may concern. 
Be it known that we, MAURICE. W. BRESNA 
HAN, a citizen of the United States, and JOHN 
J. HEYS, a subject of the Queen of Great 
Britain, and residents of Lynn, in the county 
of Essex and State of Massachusetts, have 
jointly invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Sole Shaping or Leveling Machines 
for Boots and Shoes, of which the following, 
taken in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, is a specification. 
- 
This invention relates to improvements in 
Sole shaping or leveling machines for boots 
and shoes, and it consists in the construction 
and arrangement of parts by which the ma 
chine is rendered automatic, very simple, 
strong and durable as well as easily operated 
as will hereinafter be more fully shown and 
described, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of the 
improved machine partly shown in section. 
Fig. 2 represents a vertical section on the line 
2-2 shown in Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 represents a 
rear view of the lower portion of the machine. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts wher 
ever they occur on the different parts of the 
drawings. 
The machine is of the duplex form-that 
is, it comprises a pair of shoe-holding and 
pressure devices automatically connected for 
operation, SO as to permit the operator to re 
move a leveled shoe from one of the lasts and 
replace it with another while the leveling is 
being done on the other last and so on alter 
nately during the running of the machine. 
In the drawings A, A, represent the upright 
frames or sides of the machine, and B, B, B', 
are the vertical rods or posts as usual. 
D is the head of the machine secured in an 
adjustable manner to the rods B, B, B'. 
D, D, represent the usual sole formers se 
cured to the under side of the yielding spring 
pressed plates D', D', which are guided on 
the rods B, B, B', as is common in machines 
of this kind. 
E is the rotary driving shaft to which is se 
cured the pinion e, the teeth of which mesh 
in the teeth of the spur gear if that is secured 
to the crankshaft F, which latter is provided 
with two diametrically opposite arranged 
cranks F, F, in the usual manner. 
G is the foot treadle lever for starting the 
machine which lever is pivoted at g and pro 
vided with a brake shoe G' adapted to be nor 
mally held against a pulley E' on the driving 
shaft E by the influence of a spring G'. 
E' is a pulley loose on the driving shaft E, 
and said pulley is set in a constant rotary 
motion by belt power applied to it as usual 
and it is provided with any suitable or Well 
known friction or other clutch mechanism 
connected to and actuated by the treadle GSO 
as to cause a rotary motion to be imparted to 
the driving shaft E when the treadle G is de 
pressed. 
As such starting mechanism does not form 
a part of our present invention and as it is 
well known in the art to which this machine 
relates, it is not shown in detail in the draw 
lingS. 
H and I are the respective lower and upper 
toggle levers which are pivoted at has shown 
in Fig. 2; there are two sets of said toggle 
levers, each set being connected to one of the 
cranks F., by means of a link K, the forward 
end of which is pivoted directly to the pink', 
that connects the lower and upper toggle le 
vers H and I as fully shown in Fig. 2. The 
lower end of each of the levers His pivoted 
at h, to the lower portion of the frame of the 
machine as shown in the drawings. 
L is the last block pivoted to the upper end 
of the lever I, and M is the last supported on 
the last block and adapted to receive the 
shoe N, the sole of which is to be shaped and 
leveled. 
O is an adjustable connection between the 
pivoted last block Land lower toggle lever 
H for the purpose of holding the last block 
at a rightangle, or any other desired angle, to 
the perpendicular during the vertical motion 
of the said last block. The toggle levers H 
and I are provided on their sides, back of the 
joint h, with the respective lugs hand, 
which serve to carry the upper lever I with 
the lower lever H during the forward rock 
ing motion of the lower toggle lever H, and 
until said upper lever I reaches its loWest 
vertical position shown in Fig. 2. By this 
arrangement the toggle levers H, I, are posi 
tively moved forward as if they were one sin. 
gle lever. Each last block L. is provided at 
its sides with lateral projections or pin and 
90 
95 
Co 
25 
35 
45 
 
498,619 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
O 
55 
. 
rolls l, l, adapted to enter and to be guided in 
Vertical grooves p during the vertical motion 
of the last block, its shoe or last. Said grooves 
p are made in the brace P, secured to the 
vertical posts B, B, B', as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. 
On the brace P, or other stationary part of 
the machine are secured a pair of forwardly 
projecting segmental curved bars P, P', one 
for each of the sections of the machine. Each 
such curved bar P' has the lower toggle pivot 
h' for its center and during the lateral or 
SWinging motion of said toggle levers H, I, 
the last block rollers l, l, are caused to roll 
and bear against the under side of said curved 
bars P as shown in Fig. 2 by which arrange 
ment the upper toggle lever and last block are 
held down rigidly in position for the pur 
pose of enabling the operator to work on the 
shoe. The lugs h, i, on the back of the tog 
gle levers H, I, prevent the toggles from de 
Scending beyond the desired point during the 
Operation of our machine, and thus causing 
the last block to be moved out and in, in a 
true circular path having the lower fulcrum 
h' as a center, and by this arrangement a 
lock is produced between the last block and 
the curved arm so as to hold the last block 
down rigidly in position at all times during 
its forward and back movement and while 
the operator takes off a shaped shoe and 
replaces it with another to be molded and 
SO. O. 
In connection with the main treadle G and 
lower pivoted toggle lever H, we use an auto 
matic stop device Q pivoted at q to a clamp 
preferably secured to the middle post B or 
other stationary part of the machine; said 
lever being preferably provided with a roller 
g' in its lower end which is normally held by 
means of a suitable spring q' against the face 
of an upwardly projecting tooth G8 on the 
main treadle G as shown in Fig. 2. The up 
per end of the lever Q is sufficiently wide to 
have its side extension come opposite to the 
two lower toggles H, H, and is provided at 
such upper ends with adjustable set screws 
q, q, against which the rear side of either of 
the lower toggle levers H come in contact 
when any one of such levers reaches its ver 
tical position. 
The operation of this mechanism is as foll 
lows: By depressing the treadle G the ma 
chine is started at the same time as the lever 
Q is tripped by the influence of the spring 
q' causing the roller q' on such lever to butt 
against the upper side of the tooth G8 on the 
treadle G, thus causing the machine to be 
held in motion as long as the treadle G is 
held depressed by the lever Q. When the tog 
gle H (which for the time being is moving to 
ward the center of the machine) comes to its 
vertical position, it strikes the upper end of 
the lever Q causing it to be tripped and its 
lower end moved in front of the treadle pro 
jection G when the treadle G is automati 
cally moved to its normal position shown in 
Fig. 2 by the influence of the spring G' caus: 
ing the machine to be stopped while the boot 
or shoe sole is under pressure, and the other 
last block is in its forward position for the 
operator to work upon the shoe. After hav 
ing started the machine by the depression of 
the treadle G, and if it should be desired to 
stop it for any reason before any one of the 
toggles H reaches its vertical position, this 
may be done by an auxiliary treadle R piv 
oted at r and having an adjustable set Screw 
r' in its upper end adapted to come in Con 
tact with the rear lower end of the lever Q 
when the auxiliary treadle R is depressed, 
thus causing the treadle projection G to be 
released from the lever Q, by which release 
the treadle lever G is returned to its normal 
position by the influence of the spring G', 
shown in Fig. 2, and causing the machine to 
be stopped. The auxiliary treadle R is nor 
mally held out of contact with the lever Q 
by the influence of a suitable spring r' as 
shown in Fig. 2. If both treadles are de 
pressed at the same time, the machine will 
stop immediately upon removing the foot from 
said treadles. 
Having thus fully described the nature, 
construction, and operation of our invention, 
we wish to secure by Letters Patent and 
claim 
1. In a machine for automatically leveling 
the soles of boots and shoes, the combination 
of a sole former, a last block, a pair of toggle 
levers, carrying the last block, a link connec 
tion between the crank shaft and the toggle 
lever joint and stationary segmental or curved 
arm for positively guiding the last block to 
and from the operator, substantially and for 
the purpose set forth, 
2. In a machine for automatically leveling 
the soles of boots and shoes, the combination 
of a sole former a last block, a pair of pivoted 
toggle levers carrying the last block hav 
ing rearwardly projecting lugs, a crankshaft, 
and a link connecting the crank shaft with 
the toggle joint and stationary segmental or 
curved arm for positively guiding the last 
block to and from the operator, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a machine for automatically leveling 
the soles of boots and shoes the combination 
with a crank shaft of a pair of toggle levers 
for carrying the last, a link connection be 
tween the crank shaft and the toggle lever 
joint, lugs on the toggle levers at the joint for 
limiting the withdrawal movement of the last 
and a guide arm for guiding the last block 
substantially as described. 
4. In a machine for automatically leveling 
the soles of boots and shoes, the combination 
of a sole former, a last block mounted upon 
the upper end of a pair of pivoted toggle le 
vers, a crank and link for actuating said tog 
gle levers, and a starting treadle having a 
locking projection and a pivoted lockingle 
ver adapted to hold the said treadle depressed 
until the toggle lever in reaching its vertical 
o 
75 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
2. 
498,619 
8 
position comes in contact with said locking 
lever and releases the treadle automatically 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. In a machine for automatically leveling 
the soles of boots and shoes, a last block 
mounted upon a pair of toggle levers and act 
uated by a crank and connection and a piv 
oted locking lever combined with a main 
starting treadle adapted when depressed to 
be held by said locking lever, and an auxil 
iary treadle adapted to trip the said locking 
lever to release the main treadle at the will 
O 
 
In testimony whereof we have signed our I5 
of the operator, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
names to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 24th day of 
October, A. D. 1892. 
MAURICE. W. BRESNAHAN. 
JOHN J. HEYS. 
Witnesses: 
p 
ALBAN ANDREN, 
PATRICK F. BRESNAHAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498719.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 498,719. 
 
F. M. LEWIS. 
SPOKE HOLDER. 
Patented May 30, 1893. 
v 
- 
, 
Wit1ES59: 
22.6% 
*** 
inventor, 
Frank M. Lewis 
Playa. 
Ath's 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK M. LEWIS, OF NORTH LANSING, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM B. VETTER 
AND GEORGE F. VETTER, OF LANSING, MICHIGAN. 
SPOKE-HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,719, dated May 30, 1898. 
Application filed October 3, 1892, Serial No. 447,709, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANKM.LEWIS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at North 
Lansing, in the county of Ingham and State 
5 of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Spoke-Holders, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
improvements in spoke holders, and the in 
vention consists in the peculiar construction 
of a flanged holder adapted to receive the end 
of a spoke having means for securing the 
holder to the felly in repairing the spoke, all 
as more fully hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my improved socket detached. Fig. 
2 is a side elevation thereof showing it ap 
plied to the spoke. Fig. 3 is a section through 
the felly showing the spoke in elevation illus 
trating the manner of applying my device. 
Fig. 4 is a section on line acac in Fig. 2. 
When spokes become loose in a wheel it is 
desirable to repair it without removing the 
tire. To repair it, employing my spoke holder 
the tenon at the end of the spoke is with 
drawn from the mortise in the felly and that 
which is left of the tenon is cut off and a good 
A cen 
tral aperture is then bored in the end of the 
spoke and the socket A of the spoke holder is 
engaged over the spoke, the pin B extending 
centrally in the socket engaged in the aperture 
formed in the end of the spoke, and the plate 
Cslipped beneath the felly. In order that this 
plate may be engaged beneath the felly with 
out difficulty one of the side lips D is made flat, 
3o round smooth end left on the spoke. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
while the other side lip E is curved or bent 
up preferably to conform to the shape of the 
side of the felly. The parts are now in the 
position shown in Fig. 3 in full lines. The 
operator then bends up the lip D on opposite 
sides of the felly, as shown in Fig. 4 and places 
screws or nails through the apertures F in the 
plate C, which enter the felly and secure the 
device firmly in position... The socket A is 
tapering and this together with the tapering 
pin B entering the aperture in the end of the 
spoke will prevent any possibility of rattling 
of the spoke in the holder, while the two 
side flanges D and E being turned up tightly 
against the sides of the felly together with 
the screws passing through the apertures F 
will hold the socket to the felly against any 
possibility of displacement in use. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a spoke holder, the combination of a 
plate a socket depending therefrom adapted 
to engage the end of the spoke an outwardly 
extending pin within the socket and means 
for securing the plate to the inner face of the 
felly, substantially as described. 
2. In a spoke holder, the combination of 
the plate C having the side lips D and E as 
set forth, and the central tapering socket A 
with the pin B, centrally arranged therein, 
the parts arranged and adapted to be used, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRANK M. LEWIS. 
Witnesses: 
H. H. DARBY, 
WM. B. VETTER, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498819.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMILE SCHLOESING AND EMILE HENRI SCHLOESING, OF MARSEILLES, 
FRANCE. 
NSECTIC DE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,819, dated June 6, 1893. 
Application filed December 21, 1892, Serial No. 455,922, (No specimens.) 
. 
. 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that we, EMILE SCHLOESING 
and EMILE HENRI SOHLOESING, citizens of 
France, residing at Marseilles, have invented 
a certain new and useful Improvement in In 
secticides and Anti-Cryptogamic Treatment 
of Plants; and we do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
Our invention has relation to the produc 
tion of a compound for use as an insecticide 
and anticryptogamic specific, for the treat 
ment of plants. 
The principal objects of our invention are 
first, to provide a comparatively inexpensive 
and effective specific or compound in a dry 
state or condition for preserving plants 
against the destroying influence or tenden 
cies of insects and cryptogamic diseases; and 
second, to provide a compound for use as an 
insecticide or anticryptogamic specific 
for 
the treatment of plants. 
Our invention consists of a compound for 
use as an insecticide and anticryptogamic 
specific for the treatment of plants composed 
of purifying matter from gas works, freed 
from cyanides, with the addition or admix. 
ture therewith of sulphate of copper and to 
bacco in a liquid or dry state or condition. 
Our invention further consists of a com 
pound for use as an insecticide and anticryp 
togamic specific composed of the purifying 
matters of gas works, freed from cyanides, 
with the addition or admixture of tobacco in 
a liquid state or condition. 
Our invention further consists of a specific 
or compound produced in substantially the 
manner hereinafter described and claimed. 
The nature, general features and scope of 
our invention will be more fully understood 
from the following description thereof. 
In carrying our invention into practice use 
is made of the purifying matter from gas 
works known as spent oxide or Laming 
(Lamy's) mixture and consisting of the fol 
lowing ingredients: first, free sulphur in a 
precipitate state; second, sulphate and car 
bonate of lime; third, oxide of iron; fourth, 
sulphocyanide of ammonia; fifth, ferro-cy. purpose. 
anide of iron (Prussian blue). However, be 
fore using this spent oxide the cyanides are 
removed and collected by washing the mass 
with water, and the Prussian blue is taken 
up by washing the mass with a solution of 
alkaline lyes. 
Use is also made of sulphate 
of copper, which is a very strong anticrypto 
gamic. However, sulphate of iron may be em 
ployed in lieu thereof, and use is also made 
of the liquid or juice which has been em 
ployed as a bath in which to dip tobacco 
leaves before 
the same are manufactured into 
cigars. 
For the production of a batch of the com 
pound or specific a certain quantity of the 
said purifying matters of gas works, freed 
from cyanides as set forth with or without, ac 
cording to circumstances, sulphate of copper 
or a sulphate of iron is taken, and there is 
mixed or added thereto tobacco in preferably 
a liquid state or condition as described, in the 
proportions of one to five per cent, more- or 
less, according to its degree of concentration 
in the admixture with the purifying matters 
from the gas works, forming the base of the 
compound or specific, freed from cyanides. 
The mass or admixture is then after being 
thoroughly mixed or compounded, dried at 
preferably a low heat and triturated so as to 
bring the same to a very fine state for use or 
it may be reduced to a pulverized mass or 
condition for the uses as explained. The to 
bacco in a powdered instead of a liquid state or 
condition may be used with the other ingre 
dients with good results, but preference is 
given to the use thereof in a liquid form with 
the other substance or materials, because the 
same admits of greater division and more in 
timate action on the plants subjected to a 
treatment therewith. In either case the pow 
dered or triturated mass is applied by means 
of a blast to the plants to be preserved or 
freed from insects. 
Hitherto, the purifying matters of gas works 
have been suggested, as being adapted for 
use as an insecticide and as an anticrypto 
gamic specific for the treatment of plants, but 
as far as we are aware tobacco in either a liq 
uid or powdered state has not been used in 
connection with such matters for any such 
IO 
I5. 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
So 
9o 
95 
IOO 
498,819 
5 
In this connection in the extended practice 
of our invention we have found that the to 
bacco appreciably enhances the effective ac 
tion of the compound or specific on plants and 
gives results which it was not thought possi 
ble could be obtained. 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of our invention, what we claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A compound for use as an insecticide and 
anticryptogamic specific composed of the pu 
rifying matter of gas works designated spent 
oxide or Laming mixture freed from cya 
nides, with the addition thereto of sulphate of 
copper and tobacco, substantially as and for 15 
the purposes set forth. 
2. A compound for use as an insecticide and 
anticryptogamic specific composed of spent 
oxide or Laming mixture freed from cya 
nides, and tobacco, substantially as and for 20 
the purposes set forth. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
EMILE SCHILOESENG. 
EMILE HENRI SCHILOESING, 
Witnesses: 
D. GENORDEAL, 
J. THORNTON RICKMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US498919.txt	(Model.) 
B. PICKERING, 
TELEPHONE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 498,919, 
Patented June 6, 1893. 
772, / 
G2Xs 
 
 
 
(NS 
3 
- O 
o 
MUrves ses. 
3A257 
 
Irver tor 
&4 see 
(Model.) 
B. PICKERING. 
TELEPHONE 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 498,919. 
Patented June 6, 1893, 
 
ED, III 
h 
B 
. 
2 
25 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BARTON PICKERING, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
TELEPHONE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 498,919, dated June 6, 1898. 
Application filed October 4, 1880, Serial No. 18,302. (Model.) 
55 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BARTON PICKERING, of 
Dayton, in the county of Montgomery and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and use 
5 ful Magneto-Electric Telephone, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My improvements relate to the class of tele 
phones using a permanent magnet. 
My invention consists in the combination 
and construction of parts, as hereinafter de 
Scribed and claimed, whereby the magnetic 
force may be regulated and adapted to the 
electro-magnetic force, without adjustment of 
the electro-magnetic core in its relation to the 
diaphragm. 
Figure 1 is across-section on the line acac of 
Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the in 
strument. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section of 
the same. 
The case consists of two parts, A, the mouth 
or ear piece, and B the part to which the per 
manent magnetis attached, the induction coil 
and binding screws. The diaphragm is held 
between the parts of the case, and when placed 
together, they are secured by screws entering 
from the side. 
The permanent magnet C is made of a flat 
bar of steel of uniform thickness, bent flat 
Wise near its center, with poles arranged par 
allel; near the ends, and directly opposite, are 
orifices provided with threads to receive the 
electro-magnet, and the adjusting or regulat 
ing Screw. There is a curved extension with 
orifice G, beyond the dotted lines, s', which is 
not essential to the instrument, but as a part 
is convenient as a means of suspending the 
instrument on a hook or button. The part of 
magnet projecting from the case is admirably 
adapted for a handle for the instrument. 
A. 
plane bar magnet, -such as if the magnet 
were separated at the dotted line v,-would 
answer an excellent purpose, combined with 
the case and other parts as herein set forth. 
The magnetis attached to the case by one pole 
being placed in a mortise of the part B; and 
is there secured by wood screws entering the 
back part. 
The electro-magnet O, is made hollow from 
the end next the diaphragm, to near the outer 
end. On this end is a thread to enter the ori 
fice of the magnet, and is also slotted for a 
screw-driver, by which its adjustment, with 
reference to the diaphragm, is effected. 
By enlarging and making the magnet hol 
low there is greater diffusion of the magnetic 
force, and likewise greater susceptibility; and 
the orifice being closed at the back end; thus 
is arrested the sound undulations, that other 
wise would escape. This electro-magnet is 
screwed into the permanent magnet; is cen 
trally situated in the case, and is surrounded 
by the inductive coil m. On the free end of 
the magnet, is the adjusting or regulating 
screw F, opposite the electro-magnet, which 
maybe either solid or hollow. When screwed 
against the electro-magnet it acts as an arma 
ture, to preserve unimpaired the power of the 
magnet, and thereby diminishes the inductive 
force of the magnet; and the withdrawal 
leaves with the magnet its amplitude of force, 
diminishing as the withdrawal proceeds, 
until its neutralizing power is quite destroyed. 
The rear part of the case is recessed, and 
into this recess the binding screws enter from 
the back. Through this part holes are 
pierced, through which terminals of the in 
ductive coil enter the recess to be connected 
to the binding screws D. To these are at 
tached the conducting wires, which convey 
sounds by electrical undulations induced by 
sound-waves resulting in diaphragmatic vi 
brations. 
The instrument may be used both as a trans 
mitter and receiver, but is best adapted to use 
as a receiver in microphone transmission, and 
the adjustment is with a view to such use. 
Telephones are adjustable with screws 
changing the relative position of the pole to 
the diaphragm, but in this manner of adjust 
ment, the screw soon becomes loose, and this 
renders the instrument irregular in its action. 
In the operation of telephones, the best re 
sults are produced by a very close adjustment 
of the magnet or electro-magnet to the dia 
phragm; and when thus adjusted, with a pow 
erful voltaic current the diaphragm is caught 
or drawn against the pole, thus impairing the 
action, which is obviated by using the adjust 
ing or regulating screw, in combination with 
other parts as herein set forth. 
The hollow electro-magnetic core O, pos 
sesses an advantage over the solid core by pro 
. 
90 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
498,919 
manent magnet with parallel poles capable of 
being brought in contact with the inter-polar 
end of the electro-magnet held in the oppo 
site pole for the purpose of preserving said 
magnet from impairment, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In an electric telephone, the permanent 
magnet C, with screw threads through both 
poles, respectively for the adjusting screw and 
electro-magnet O, in combination with case 
A, B, diaphragm E, and helix n, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. In a magnetic telephone the hollow elec 
tro-magnet with outer end closed to serve as a 
resonator, and to give increased magnetic sus 
ceptibility, in combination with the perma 
nent magnet, inductive coil, and diaphragm, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. In combination with the magnet having 
parallel poles and suitably formed for the ap 
plication of the ear or mouth in telephonic 
communication, substantially as shown and 
described. 
BARTON PICKERING. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. W. SWAVELY, 
W. C. NELSON. 
35 
40 
45 
O 
ducing a smoother and less metallic sound of 
the diaphragm. 
I am aware that the relation of the perma 
nent magnet, electro-magnet, helix and dia 
phragm have been used substantially as in 
this instrument; but the form of the magnet C 
and its relation to the case, the construction 
of the case, the adjusting or regulating screw 
F, and the hollow electro-magnet O, are fea 
tures I regard as my invention. The free end 
of the permanent magnet is brought magneti 
cally in proximity to the attached pole, and 
said free end vibrates responsively to the in 
ductive electric wave, and thus adding in 
tensity to the electro-motor force and thereby 
amplifying the Sound. 
Having described my invention, what I de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent is 
1. In an electric telephone provided with 
a permanent magnet having parallel poles an 
adjusting or regulating screw inserted in and 
near one terminal of a permanent magnet of 
a single piece of metal and antagonizing an 
electro-magnet in the opposite pole, to modify 
the magnetic force exerted on the inductive 
coil and diaphragm, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an electric telephone an adjustable 
screw inserted in and near one end of a per 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499019.txt	(Model.) 
S. GARWOOD, 
ROLLER BEARING 
No. 499,019. 
Patented June 6, 1893. 
- 
Z- M 
2%N 
a- N 
 
 
 
%5% SN NS 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
... 
d 
e. 
 
3S 
a NN -6-2f 
SS 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
-24- 4% - 1 al-e-C 
-62-74.6A 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SPENCER GARWOOD, OF MILFORD CENTRE, OHIO. 
ROLLER BEARNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,019, dated June 6, 1893, 
Application filed Februaryll, 1892, Serial No. 421,220, (Model) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern; 
Be it known that I, SPENCER GARWOOD, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mil 
ford Centre, in the county of Union and State 
of Ohio, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Roller-Bearings, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the improvement 
of roller bearings of that class in which the 
bearing rollers are mounted between a shaft 
and suitable boxing and the objects of my in 
vention are to provide an improvement in the 
manner of journaling said rollers within said 
boxing; to provide a uniform bearing con 
tact of the rollers on the periphery of the 
shaft and to otherwise produce an improved 
roller bearing in which the friction is taken 
up uniformly, and to produce other improve 
ments which will be more specifically pointed 
out hereinafter. These objects I accomplish 
in the manner illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an end view of my improved 
bearing and boxing therefor showing the 
shaft in cross section, and showing in full and 
dotted lines the relative positions of two sets 
of rollers. Fig. 2 is a view in perspective of 
one of the roller bearing rings. Fig. 3 is a 
perspective view of a portion of the central 
division bearing rings. Fig. 4 is a plan view 
of the bearing rollers and their bearing rings 
and showing the casing in sectional view. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional view on line a ac of Fig. 
4 and Fig. 6 is a view in perspective of two 
rollers having common or integral shafts, 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
a represents the cylindrical casing or box 
ing provided with suitable end caps a'. 
Through these end caps passes loosely and 
centrally a spindle b. 
crepresents double rollers or pairs of rollers 
which as shown in the drawings consist of two 
ordinary bearing rollers which are connected 
by central stems or shafts d formed integral 
there with. The inner one of each of said 
rollers c is provided with a central end bear 
ing shaft or gudgeon d' which projects in 
wardly in the line of the axis of said rollers. 
if and f indicate bearing rings the inner 
surface of which has formed at equidistant 
points therein radial bearing recesses or 
seats f'. 
g represents a division ring which sepa 
rates two sets of bearing rollers. 
This ring 
g is as shown in the drawings provided with 
a circular series of oblong bearing openings 
g', the number of said openings being double 
the number of bearing recesses in the rings 
if and f. In arranging the roller bearings 
and parts thereof within the boxing, I cause 
the central stems d of the rollers c to be in 
f' of the rings if 
Serted within the recesses 
andf. The set of rollers thus formed and 
mounted is duplicated and said roller sets so 
manipulated as to cause an insertion of the 
end gudgeons d of one set of rollers c into 
alternate openings g' of the ring g. The gud 
geons of the remaining set of rollers c which 
are arranged on the oppositeside of said ring 
C are caused to be inserted in the remaining 
openings g of said ring. The sets of bear 
ing rollers thus connected are made to sur 
round the shaft b with the periphery of which 
said rollers are in bearing contact. The bear 
ing rollers and rings connected as above de 
Scribed are inclosed in the usual manner 
Within the cylindrical boxing a and between 
the end caps a'. 
From the construction and arrangement of 
parts herein shown and described it will read 
ily be seen that the arrangement of the roll 
ers of one set out of alignment with those of 
the other set results in a bearing of the roll 
ers of one set upon the shaft opposite points 
which are midway between the bearing points 
of the other set. It will thus be seen that a 
complete and uniform bearing of the rollers 
is distributed over the periphery of the shaft 
and the friction will be taken up uniformly. 
It will also be observed that in the construc 
tion of my improved roller bearing, I pro 
vide bearing recesses in the inner sides of 
the rings finstead of in the peripheriesthereof, 
as is ordinarily done. By this arrangement 
of bearing recesses it will be seen that any 
tendency of the rollers to drop from place 
when a set is removed from the boxing is ob 
viated. 
It is evident that I might employ in place 
of the two sets of roller bearings herein de 
scribed any number of said sets to accord 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
IOO 
499,019 
with the length or character of the bearing 
or boxing. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a roller bearing the combination with 
two sets of bearing rollers, of a central divis 
ion ring between said sets, having bearing 
openings in said division ring in which the 
gudgeons of the bearing rollers of said roller 
sets bear alternately as described, a central 
shaft about which said rollers bear and ro 
tate and a casing about said rollers substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. In a roller bearing the combination of 
two sets of rollers, each roller of each set hav 
ing a central connecting stem and a gudgeon 
at one side, bearing rings f having radial re 
cesses f' in their inner sides which receive 
the connecting stems of said rollers as de 
scribed, a dividing bearing ring between said 
roller sets, having bearing openings in said 
dividing ring in which the gudgeons of the 
respective roller sets bear alternately as de 
scribed, a central shaft about which said roll 
er's rotate and a casing inclosing said rollers 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
SPENCER GARWOOD. 
In presence of - 
T. W. BUFFINGTON, 
C. B. HATTON. 
20 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499119.txt	(No Model,) 
No. 499,119, 
 
J. H. JONES. 
WASHING MACHINE. 
Patented June 6, 1893. 
19 
y 
26 
-- 
Z7 
2 
725 
C 
star 
w 24 
7. 
27 
Z. 
yo ce. 
Yo 
zo 
/2- 
| --- 
2 
7O 
17o 
262 
-2 
s 
27- 
- 
== 
Z9Es 
WITNESSES: 
C2 
2. 
/WWENTOR 
w 
%. 14. 
"62-3rre?t 
--- 
rise Norris PETERs co, PKoTo-LTHC. WASHING fon, D.C 
22. 
2 
By 
ye7-4) 
c -76.us v6 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. JONES, OF FILOYD, TEXAS. 
WASHING - MACHINE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,119, dated June 6, 1893. 
Application filed September 7, 1892, Serial No. 445,246. (No model.) 
O 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES H. JoNES, of 
Floyd, in the county of Hunt and State of 
Texas, have invented a new and Improved 
Washing-Machine, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvementin 
Washing machines, and has for its object to 
provide a machine which will be exceedingly 
simple, durable and economic in construction, 
and wherein clothes may be washed expedi 
tiously and conveniently and without injury 
thereto. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several parts, 
as will be hereinafter fully set forth and point 
ed out in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer. 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section 
taken practically on the line 1-1 of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 2 is a transverse vertical section taken 
essentially on the line 2-2 of Fig. 1. 
The casing or body of the machine com 
prises a bottom section A and a cover section 
B. The bottom section A, and likewise the 
cover, are preferably made of metal, although 
wood may be employed. The bottom section 
is ordinarily made rectangular in general 
contour, and its upper edge is surrounded by 
an outwardly extending flange 10, comprising 
a horizontal member 10 and a vertical mem 
ber 10 at the outer extremity of the horizon 
tal member, as shown in both Figs. 1 and 2. 
At the ends of the bottom section of the cas 
ing handles 11, are located, by means of which 
the casing may be readily transported. The 
cover Section B of the casing is made practi 
cally semi-circular in general contour, but the 
upper central portion of the cover section is 
flattened, as shown at a, in Fig. 1, and at each 
end of this flattened portion a handle 12, is 
located exteriorily upon the casing. The 
lower edge of the casing is provided with two 
flanges, an outwardly-extending horizontal 
flange 13 and an inwardly and downwardly 
extending flange 14; and when the coversec 
tion is placed upon the bottom section the 
horizontal flange fits down practically upon 
the horizontal member of the bottom flange, 
while the vertical flange of the cover extends 
downward within the bottom section, and b 
this means the escape of steam and of water 
while the machine is in operation is effect 
ively prevented. 
By constructing the cover with the flattened 
portion a, and the handles 12 at each side of 
said portion, the cover may be inverted and 
used as a rinsing tub, as it will sit Squarely 
upon the flat parta, and the handles will pre 
vent it from tipping over endwise. Both the 
bottom and the cover sections are provided at 
opposite sides with slots. 
The slot in the bot 
tom section is produced in its flange, or 
slightly below the flange, and is designated in 
the drawings as 15, being best shown in Fig. 
2; and the slot in the cover Section is made in 
the vertical portion of its flange 14, and is des 
ignated in the same figure as 16. These two 
slots are adapted to be brought into registry, 
and in the slots the trunnions 17 of the wash 
ing cylinder C, are journaled. One of the 
trunnions is made much longer than the other, 
and has secured to it a crank arm 18, by means 
of which the cylinder is revolved. 
- 
The cylinder C, is circular, and comprises 
two solid end plates or boards 19, which plates 
or boards are provided with inwardly-extend 
ing marginal flanges 20, and a ring 21, is lo 
cated in contact with the inner faces of the 
end flanges 20, as shown best in Figs. 1 and 
2. The rings 21, have a series of pockets 22 
produced therein, the pockets extending in 
ward; and the pockets of both rings are in 
diametrical alignment. These pockets are 
semi-circular in general contour, and each 
two diametrically aligning pockets are adapt 
ed to receive, clamp and hold the ends of a 
rib 23. These ribs are preferably constructed 
of wood, although they may be made of metal, 
and are semi-circular in cross section, their 
cylindrical faces being inward. Their outer 
faces, however, are given a slight curve in 
order to conform to the radius of the cylinder. 
These ribs, or slats as they may be termed, 
arearranged at predetermined intervals apart, 
usually quite close together, as shown in the 
drawings, in which it will be observed a slight 
distance is preserved between the opposing 
25 
35 
45 
y 55 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
 
499,119 
slats. These slats correspond to the ribs of 
a wash board, and therefore the interior of 
the cylinder may be said to constitute a cir 
cular wash board. The slats or ribs and the 
cylinder are provided with devices to agitate 
the water in which the cylinder is to be re 
volved, and also to dislodge the clothes which 
otherwise would have a tendency to cling to 
the slats. 
The preferred form of the device consists 
in providing the rods with a series of buck 
ets 24, as shown in Figs, l and 2. These 
buckets are made essentially V-shape in ver 
tical or longitudinal section, and are tapered, 
the top or mouth being the widest part, and 
further in the formation of the buckets their 
rear faces are made flat and their inner faces 
convexed or cylindrical, as when so shaped 
the buckets are exceedingly effective in oper 
ation and do not present sharp edges to cut 
or injure the clothes. The buckets are ar 
ranged at predetermined intervals apart, and 
their arrangement on the slats is a staggered 
one; that is to say, the buckets are alter 
nately placed circumferentially, as shown best 
in Fig. 2. 
The cylinder is made in two sections, an 
upper section C, and a lower section C, the 
lower section being much larger than the up 
per one; and these two sections have a hinge 
connection at one end of the cylinder, the 
hinge being designated as 26 in the drawings; 
and the top section is locked upon the lower 
section by means of a latch 27, located at the 
opposite end of the cylinder to that carrying 
the hinge, as shown in Fig.2. Where the sepa 
ration is made between the two sections of 
the cylinder a wide inwardly-extending mar 
ginal flange. 28, is provided for each section, 
as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
In the operation of this machine, the water, 
soap, and other washing material to be em 
ployed are placed in the bottom section A of 
the casing; the cylinder is then fitted to place 
in the bottom section, the top of the cylinder 
is opened, the clothes to be washed are intro 
duced into the cylinder, its top section is then 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
closed and locked, and the cover section B of 
the casing is placed in position over the cyl 
inder. The clothes are thoroughly, expedi 
tiously, and conveniently washed by simply 
revolving the cylinder through the medium 
of the crank arm 18, and the buckets 24 serve 
to carry up water as the cylinder revolves and 
empty it upon the clothes; the buckets fur 
ther serve to dislodge the clothes from be 
tween the slats of the cylinder should they 
become fastened at those points, and further 
more the buckets tend to keep the water or 
Washing compound in a state of agitation and 
tumble the clothes about in the compound. 
When the clothes are to be removed from the 
cylinder the top of the casing is removed, 
placed in an inverted position and filled with 
clear water; into this cover, which now serves 
as a tub, the clothes may be placed and rinsed 
as they are taken from the washing machine. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
In a washing machine, a cylinder, the same 
consisting of two heads constructed in hinged 
sections and provided with semi-circular 
pockets formed adjacent to the heads, ribs 
semi-circular in cross Section, having their 
ends secured in the pockets with their cylin 
drical faces extending inward, the ribs and 
pockets being placed at intervals apart, and 
buckets secured upon the inner or cylindrical 
surface of the ribs, extending at intervals 
apart around the entire inner face of the cyl 
inder, the arrangement being an alternated 
one, the said buckets being of essentially V 
shape in longitudinal section, having a flat 
outer face engaging with the ribs and a cylin 
drical or convexed inner face, whereby the 
buckets will act constantly to pour water upon 
the clothes, agitate the water, and agitate the 
mass of clothes without injury to the latter, 
as described. 
JAMES H. JONES. 
Witnesses: 
J. S. STIDHAM, 
J. H. ARMSTRONG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499219.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 499,219, 
- 
A, S, FISHER 
CUFF HOLDER, 
Patented June 13, 1893. 
- Z 22. Z 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW S. FISHER, OF BEDFORD, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JAMES C. 
HOUSER, OF MILROY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CUFF-HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,219, dated June 13, 1893. 
Application filed March 10, 1893, Serial No. 465,374, (No model.) 
O 
t 
25 
35 
40 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW S. FISHER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bed 
ford, in the county of Bedford and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Cuff-Holders, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
device for use in adjusting shirt sleeves and 
cuffs to a proper position with relation to the 
hand, the device being also applicable to the 
adjustment of stockings and other articles; 
but for convenience of designation I have en 
titled my invention an improvement in cuff 
holders, and While using that term herein I 
mean to include therein all uses to which the 
device may be applied. 
The invention consists of a hook combined 
with a lever grip constructed and arranged 
substantially in the manner hereinafter more 
particularly described and adapted for use in 
adjusting the length of a sleeve and the con 
sequent position of a cuff with relation to the 
hand, while at the same time securing the said 
cuff and permitting of its ready removal and 
replacement, as desired, without disturbing 
the adjustment of the sleeve and of the device 
on the sleeve. 
In the accompanying drawings illustrating 
my invention, in the several figures of which 
like parts are similarly designated, Figure 1 
is a perspective view illustrating one applica 
tion of my invention. Fig.2 is a front eleva 
tion with the parts in the position they will 
occupy when in use. Fig. 3 is an elevation 
with the lever extended at right angles to the 
body of the device. Fig. 4 is a side elevation 
of the parts in the position shown in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 5 is a side elevation with the parts in the 
position shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is an end 
view; and Fig. 7 is a section taken in the plane 
of line ac-ac, Fig. 2. 
The body a of the device may be made of 
sheet metal, having one of its ends made or 
provided with a loop b and terminating at 
that end in an underturned hook c. The 
other end of the body is extended laterally at 
both sides to form wings d, and these wings 
have their upper edges bent over at right an 
45 
 
55 
65 
to 
gles, or substantially so, to form the flange e 
and the halff of a hinge. Near its lower end 
the body is provided with a knob g standing 
out therefrom substantially at right angles 
and this knob may be formed integral with 
the body or secured thereto in any suitable 
fmanner. 
h is a lever provided with the other half 
of the hinge, the said hinge portion of the le 
ver being connected with the hinge portion f 6o 
of the body by means of a pintle or otherwise, 
as may be desired. The lever h has its upper 
portion extended laterally into wingsi, which 
are substantially in alignment with the wings 
d on the body, and the upper edge of the said 
wings is turned over substantially at right 
angles to the main portion of the lever to form 
a flange k, and at its opposite ends this flange 
is provided with projections l which overlap 
the edges of the lateral wings d of the body. 
The lever is provided with a hole m whereby 
it may engage with the knob g. 
When my device is used as a sleeve adjuster 
and cuff holder, the hook c is passed through 
the buttonholes of the wristband, as shown in 
dotted lines in Fig.1, thereby taking the place 
and serving the function of a button, and the 
knob g is passed through the buttonholes of 
the cuff. It having been determined at what 
distance the Wristband shall be from the hand, 
and, if necessary, a fold, as n, Fig. 1, having 
been made in the shirt sleeve, the lever his 
extended upwardly from the body of the de 
vice, say as in Fig. 5, and then one or both 
projecting Wings of the body having been ap 
plied to the edges of the sleeve vent, the said 
lever h is moved down into substantial par 
allelism with the body and its hole m snapped 
Over the knob g, it being understood that said 
knob g has more or less resilience or spring. 
Thus the wristband will be buttoned, the 
sleeve adjusted at its proper length and the 
cuff secured in position by one device. If it 
be desired to remove the cuff, the lever h will 
be released from the knob and the cuff slipped 
off of the said knob and then the lever h may 
re-engage with the said knob. Instead of 
using a hook c as a button for uniting the 
meeting ends of the cuff, the said hook may 
be engaged with the edge of the cuff. 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
2 
499,219 
45 
55 
Obviously, the device might be used for 
thus adjusting the sleeve of any kind of gar 
ment, and so also it might be used for sup 
porting stockings, and for other purposes. 
The projections l serve to prevent lateral 
displacement or disengagement of the grip 
ping device. 
It will be observed that the material is 
gripped between the flangese and k and con 
sequently a very firm hold is taken, so that 
there is no danger of slipping. Moreover, by 
this manner of engaging the device with a 
garment, there is no necessity for the use of 
Serrations and such like toothed devices as 
have been employed in many forms of simi 
lar devices heretofore employed, and hence 
the liability of defacing the garment is re 
moved. 
As I have already intimated, the device is 
capable of use upon various garments and in 
various connections therewith as an adjust 
ing and holding device, and hence in order 
to include its various purposes and uses in a 
single term I employ the designation gar 
ment holder. 
the hand by shortening the sleeve, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a garment holder, a body part having 
a hook at one end and a laterally extended 
flange at the other end and an intermediate 
knob projecting therefrom between the ends, 
combined with a lever having a correspond 
ingly laterally flanged end at which itishinged 
to the body part to form an eccentric grip, and 
adapted at the other end to engage the knob, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a garment holder, a body part having 
a hook at one end and a laterally extended 
flange at the other end and an intermediate 
knob projecting therefrom between the ends, 
combined with a lever pivoted at the flanged 
end of the body portion and provided with a 
flanged end having laterally projecting ears 
adapted to overlap the laterally extended part 
of the body portion and having its lower end 
provided with means to engage the knob, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a garment holder, a body member hav 
ing a hook at one end and having at the other 
end laterally extended wings and a flange sub 
stantially at right angles to such body mem 
What I claim is 
ber and an intermediate knob projecting 
1. In a garment holder, a body portion hav 
therefrom between the ends, combined with 
ing a hooked end and one member of a grip 
a lever hinged to said body and having simi 
ping device and an intermediate knob pro 
larly laterally extended ends and a reversely 
jecting therefrom between the ends, combined 
turned flange which laps the body flange, said 
with a lever constituting the other member 
of the gripping device and adapted to be lever flange when the device is closed bearing 
against the body and thereby adapting the 
engaged at its free end with the knob of 
device to grip a fabric, substantially as de 
the body portion, substantially as described, 
scribed. 
whereby the hooked end may engage with the 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
edge or button holes of a wristband, the knob 
my hand this 7th day of March, A. D. 1893. 
pass through the button holes of the cuff, and 
ANDREW S. FISHER. 
the gripping device engage with the vent or 
other part of a sleeve to hold the wristband 
. 
and cuff in proper relation with each other 
and to adjust their position with relation to 
Witnesses: 
JAMES Z. FRAZIER, 
FRANK FLETCHER. 
o 
75 
O 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499319.txt	(No Model.) 
B. B. D'ALESS ANDRO, 
APPARATUS FOR CALMING THE WAVES OF THE SEA. 
No. 499,319, 
Patented June 13, 1893. 
THE MORRIS PETERs co, PHOto-LTR), wasHINGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BEN VENUTO BENEDETTO D'AILESS ANDRO, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
APPARATUS FOR CALMING THE WAVES OF THE SEA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,819, dated June 18, 1893. 
Application filed November 7, 1891, Serial No. 411,228, (No model.) Patented in Belgium May 12, 1891, No. 94,867 in France 
May 14, 1891, No. 213,474, and in England June 24, 1891, No. 10,742, 
To all whom it may concern 
Beit known that, BENVENUTO BENEDETTO 
DALESSANDRO, a subject of the King of Italy, 
residing at 5 Rue Picot, Paris, France, have 
invented an Improved Apparatus for Calming 
the Waves of the Sea, (for which I have ob 
tained a patent in Belgium, No. 94,867, dated 
May 12, 1891; in France, No. 213,474, dated 
May 14, 1891, and in England, No. 10,742, 
dated June 24, 1891) of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to the means for calm 
ing the waves of the sea covering a certain 
extent of sea water with a thin yet strong 
floating body. I obtain this object by spread 
ing out on the surface of the water a floating 
body composed of strips or bands varying in 
size and texture according to requirements. 
The materials for forming this apparatus 
are various but however made the application 
and the effect are the same, and the description 
therefor of one will suffice. This is composed 
of a networkillustrated in the accompanying 
drawings in which 
Figure 1 represents the invention used in 
connection with the land, to break the sea, 
disposed to facilitate the entry of a ship in 
port. Fig. 2. represents a plan view of a ves 
sel surrounded by the sea - calming device. 
Fig. 3, represents a perspective view of a ves 
sel, surrounded by the calming apparatus. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
The net-work D Fig. 1 is of twisted hemp 
thread, the size and meshes of which vary ac 
cording to the use for which it may be applied. 
The texture of the said net-work is strength 
ened and rendered buoyant, by a composi 
with finely 
tion of india rubber liquid mixed 
ground cork-dust. 
When the apparatus D, is used to preserve 
a ship N Figs. 2 and 3, battling with contrary 
winds it should be of sufficient length with a 
proportional width to surround the same, the 
strength and size of which should vary ac 
cording to the kind of ship. Figs, 2 and 3, 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
show the apparatus, D, as it should always 
be adjusted in such a case, that is stretched 
out in its full width on the surface of the wa 
ter and in a position which will render it im 
possible for it to double on itself or be cut by 
the screw or be taken by the rudder. The 
means of attaching the apparatus to the ship 
N, Figs. 2 and 3, is effected by fixing thick 
wooden or iron rods E. E. E. at equal distances 
all round the same. Each rod being bent at 
a right angle, the part placed horizontally is 
joined to the shipboard. The partfalling ver 
tically runs through an immovable ring R tied 
on the apparatus or network's border, B. B. 
Consequently the apparatus is not disturbed 
by the movement of the ship. 
- If this apparatus D. Fig.1 be used to facili 
tate the entry of a ship in port or its disem 
barkment on land or the execution of hy 
draulic or other necessary works of a difficult 
construction it should be anchored adjacent 
to, or around the portion of the water desired 
to be calmed and so be fitted to impede the 
formation of breakers. For this purpose it 
should be fixed with anchors, O. O. O, strong 
ropes and blocks. . Signals are added to give 
notice to the ships when they are in the vi 
cinity of the sea calmer. Whether for coast 
work or on the open sea the apparatus should 
be kept in readiness, so that it may be im 
mediately applied in case of emergency. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
A device for calming waves, consisting of 
strip, band or net-work of buoyant material 
adapted to float upon or near the surface of 
the water and adjacent to the object to be 
protected and means for securing and holding 
said strip, band or net-Work in position, sub 
stantially as described. 
B. B. D'ALESSANDRO. 
Witnesses: 
JEAN CHEVALIER, 
PIERRE WERDIE, 
Rue Picot, 5. 
Rue Picot, No. 6, 
. 
65. 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499419.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 499,419, 
F, FATHERS. 
OVERGAITER, 
Patented June 13, 1893. 
J//TWASSES 
-6 a. 
IW/AWT01. 
a 16-26 -2-42 
21iorney's. 
THE MORRIS PETERS Co. PHOTO-LTHO, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED FATHERS, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
OVER GATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,419, dated June 13, 1898. 
Application filed January 9, 1893. Serial No. 457,847. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRED FATHERS, of De 
troit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Overgaiters, of which the 
following is a specification. 
In the annexed drawings making part of 
this specification Figure 1- is a bottom view 
of the shoe with gaiter used thereon. Fig. 
2- is a plan view of the buckle, showing the 
mode of attaching the same to the strap. 
Fig. 3- is a plan view of the buckle frame. 
Fig. 4- is a similar view of the tightener. 
Fig. 5- is a longitudinal section showing the 
Fig. 
buckle and strap in normal position. 
6- is a similar section, showing the parts as 
arranged when the tightener has been turned. 
Fig. 7-is a longitudinal section of the frame 
on the line Y Y of Fig. 3. 
The same letters are employed in all the 
figures in the indication of identical parts. 
E, is the over gaiter. 
A, is the strap. B, the buckle frame. 
C, 
the tightener. 
The strap A is elastic, being made of india. 
rubber, and fastened at the two ends to the 
edges of the upper of the gaiter or leggin, 
thus dispensing with the usual buckle at 
tached to one edge of the upper to receive the 
end of the strap. 
The buckle frame Bisa quadri-lateral frame 
With bars, the side ones of which are solid, 
and the end ones of which are slotted to per 
mit the strap to pass through and fold the 
edge over, as clearly shown in Fig. 7. On the 
side bars are lugs, B', perforated to receive 
the ends of the spindle, C, of the tightener C. 
This tightener is formed of the spindle with 
ends rounded where they pass through the 
lugs B, and with lateral arms C and wings 
C. These wings are slightly less in length 
than the width of the space between the side 
bars of the buckle, so that they can pass be 
tween the same when desired. They are, how 
ever, normally pressed to one side by the ten 
sion of the spiral spring D coiled around the 
Spindle C, and bearing against the lugs B'at 
one end. The longitudinal play of the spin 
dle is such that one end of the wings shall 
engage the side bars, and so prevent the tight 
ener from being turned while the parts re 
main in this normal position. This precisel the purpose described. 
form is, however, not essential, as the frame 
may be oval, or round, if preferred. 
The strap is attached to the tightener, in 
the case as illustrated, by punching a hole in 
the middle of the strap and drawing it over 
the wings onto the arms C, in which position 
it is held. Other means may be adopted for 
fastening the strap to the tightener. The 
strap is passed through the slots in the ends 
of the buckle. When it is desired to adjust 
the length of the strap held in the position 
shown in Fig. 5, by pressing against the knob 
C, the wings C will be carried out of engage 
ment with the side bars of the buckle, and 
the tightener be free to turn. By turning it a 
half revolution it will be brought into the po 
sition shown in Fig. 6, thereby changing the 
length of the strap to the extent of twice the 
distance between the outside faces of the two 
wings C. When the knob is released the 
spring D will throw the wings back into their 
normal position of engagement with the side 
bars. 
Under the general term over gaiters' I 
include the longer forms of the same article 
commonly designated as leggins, the length of 
the article having no importance in connec 
tion with my invention, the purpose of which 
is to hold the same snugly against the foot by 
an elastic strain, and also to give adjustabil 
ity to the same, in order to suit the wearer. 
When the gaiter is put on sale, I prefer that 
the buckle shall have the strap wound half 
around the tightener, as shown in Fig. 6, so 
that in fitting it to the foot the strap may be 
elongated by turning the tightener into the 
position shown in Fig. 5, or shortened by tak 
ing another half turn of the tightener. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the upper of a gaiter, 
an elastic strap adapted to reach under the 
ball of the shoe and a tightener engaging with 
the elastic strap underneath the sole of the 
shoe, said tightener consisting of a framework 
adapted to engage the strap a rotatable cross 
bar, provided with means for securing the 
strap thereto and adapted to rotate within the 
framework, and a spring adapted to force the 
tightener endwise, into locking engagement 
with the framework, substantially as and for 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
t 
499,419 
2. A tightener for the straps of over-gaiters 
consisting of a framework and means for hold 
ing the strap therein, a rotating cross piece, 
and means for securing the strap thereto, wings 
projecting from said cross piece, and a hold 
ing spring adapted to force the cross piece 
and Wings into locking engagement with the 
framework, and a projecting handle by means 
of which the cross piece can be pushed against 
the spring, out of its locking engagement 
with the frame work, substantially as and for, 
the purpose specified. 
3. In combination with an over-gaiter and 
the strap thereto, a frame provided with per 
forated side lugs, a rotary winged spindle 
O 
adapted to move endwise of its axis, notches 
in its wings adapted to engage the side bar 
of the frame, and means for forcing the spin 
dle endwise of its axis, and bringing the 
notched wings into engagement with the side 
bars, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name in the presence of two at 
testing witnesses. 
FRED FATHERS. 
Witnesses: 
R. MASON, 
M. A. HoNEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499519.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C. L., COFFIN 
APPARATUS FOR PUNCHING METAL, 
No. 499,519, 
Patented June 13, 1893, 
WITWESSES 
lice fica'-Saw 
atfied 
f 
 
IW/EWT01. 
4-4. 4. 66%- 
al 
(No Model.) 
C. L. COFFIN 
APPARATUS FOR PUNCHING METAL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 499,519. 
Patented June 13, l893, 
ITWASSAS 
 
IW)/EWTOf 
... z-4, C6%. 
THE NORRIS PETERS Co., Photo-ITHO., was NGTON, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARIES L. COF FIN, OF DETROIT, MICH IGAN. 
APPARATUS FOR PUNCH ING METAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,519, dated June 13, 1893. 
Application filed February 28, 1893, Serial No. 464,132, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Detroit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Apparatus for Punching 
Metal, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention consists in an improved meth 
od of and apparatus for punching metal, here 
inafter fully described and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a perspective of the machine, 
and Fig. 1" is an elevation of the heating and 
punching mechanism proper with the machine 
shown behind in dotted lines. Fig. 2 is an 
enlarged central view of the movable carbon 
holder, and carbon partly insection as applied 
to heating by incandescence. Figs. 2, 3, and 
4 are diagrammatic views of the different 
stages of the operation where the arc is used 
for heating. 
The principle of my invention consists in 
electrically heating the next point in the 
metal where a hole is to be punched, while 
the punch is performing its work. This heat 
ing may be done either by applying an arc to 
the point to be heated, or by passing a heat 
ing current through said point, the apparatus 
shown in Figs. 1 and 1 being intended for 
passing a heating current through the point 
to be punched, while the apparatus and dia 
grams of the other figure refer to heating by 
forming a Voltaic arc at the point to be heated. 
A represents the frame of a machine con 
sisting of suitable legs and a table to support 
the material to be punched and a female die 
for punching; and a gooseneck to carry the ec 
centric or toggle-joint mechanism for operat 
ing the punch, all of which are so well known 
that I do not deem detail descriptions thereof 
necessary. 
B represents a driving pulley mounted on 
a shaft journaled in the upper part of frame 
A, and carrying a crank or eccentric B, by 
which punch holder Cand male punch Care 
operated, the punch holder running through 
a suitable guide as indicated in the draw 
ings. On the end of the same shaft which 
operates the punch holder C, I fix an eccen 
tric D, the motions of which vary in accord 
ance with that of the two methods of heating 
above named which is proposed to be adopted. 
As shown in Figs. 1 and 18, the eccentric D 
has on it an ordinary eccentric strap, to which 
Be it known that I, CHARLES L. COFFIN, of is pivoted the upper end of a pitman D'. 
The lower end of this pitman is secured in 
any suitable way, as by a set screw, to a block 
of insulating material I, to which is also se 
cured a carbon holder E. For heating with 
out the arc the carbon E is slipped loosely 
into carbon holder E, and is pressed down by 
a light spring K, whose tension may be regu 
lated by a block J' provided with a screw 
threaded bolt and nut J. 
L represents a clamp secured to the upper 
end of carbon E' and projecting through a 
slot in carbon holder E, and to this clamp is 
attached one end of a conductor ac, by which 
the carbon E is connected by one terminal 
of a generator of electricity. 
G represents a clamp secured to the frame 
A of the machine through the medium of a 
block of insulating material I, and provided 
with a set screw G', by which a carbon F may 
be held in said clamp at any desired height, 
and this clamp G is connected by conductor 
y with the other terminal of a generator of 
electricity. 
II represents the material to be punched, 
lying on the bed of the machine, and as 
shown in Fig. 1, it is fed from left to right, 
the punch C" being at the right of the car 
bon E'. 
The operation of this part of my invention 
is as follows: A current being admitted to the 
conductors ac and y and the pulley B being set 
in motion, the rotation of its shaft by means 
of the eccentric or other mechanism B', forces 
punch C down into the female die adapted 
to receive it, and in doing which the punch 
passes through the material H, if that be in 
position. As the punch descends the eccen 
tric D also forces carbon holder E downward 
until carbon E comes in contact with mate 
rial II, and then as carbon holder E descends 
the carbon E rises therein against the re 
sistance of spring IX, if such spring be used, 
thus maintaining contact between carbon E." 
and the material H. This establishes a cir 
cuit through conductor ac, carbon E, material 
H, carbon F which is in contact with the un 
der side of material H, clamp G and conductor 
y back to the generator, thus heating that 
point of material H with which carbon E is 
in contact through the passing of a heating 
w 
55 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
35 
45 
| 
 
499,519 
45 
current therethrough. As the punch Crises, little wear on the punch, and obtain the Very 4o 
the carbon E' will eventually be raised off great advantage that the strength of the metal 
around the hole punched is not reduced nearly 
from material H, thus breaking the circuit. 
as much as it is when the metal is punched 
The material His now fed to the right the 
cold, the strength approximating very closely 
proper distance to bring the point just heated 
to the strength of drilled holes. 
by carbon E beneath the punch C when the 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
next stroke of the machine will punch a hole 
at Said heated spot and simultaneously heat 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The herein described mode of punching 
another spot in the manner just described. 
and heating metal consisting in simultane 
If it be desired to use the arc for heating in 
ously punching a hole and electrically heat 
stead of a heating current, the arrangement 
ing the point at which the next hole is to be 
is Substantially the same with the single ex 
punched. 
Ception that the eccentric D is so arranged as 
2. In an apparatus for punching metal the 
to first bring the carbon E' into contact with 
combination with a press and punch carried 
the material II and then complete a circuit, 
thereby, of a carbon adapted to make contact 
then slightly lift said carbon from the mate 
with the under side of the material, a carbon 
rial to establish an arc, as shown in Figs. 2 
above the material actuated by the punching 
and 3, and finally withdraw said carbon to 
mechanism, to and from the material to be 
break the arc when the punch C rises. This 
punched and connections between said car 
may be done in a number of ways known to 
skilled mechanics, the one which I have illus 
bons and the terminals of a source of electric 
energy, substantially as shown and described. 
trated being to cause the eccentric D to act 
against a pin D* set in pitman D'and so form 
3. In combination with a punching preSS a 
carbon carried on said press and flush with 
Said eccentric or cam D that it will first lower 
the bed thereof, a connection between said 
carbon E into contact with material II as the 
punch C'descends, as shown in Fig. 2, and will 
carbon and one terminal of a generator of 
electricity, another carbon carried on the 
then raise it slightly to form the arc as shown 
in Fig. 3, while the punch C continues to de 
mechanism which actuates the punch, and 
Scend and finally will raise the carbon away 
connected with the other terminal of Said elec 
tric generator and means substantially such 
from the material as shown in Fig. 4, when the 
as described for giving said upper carbon a 
punch C is lifted. It is evident that the cam 
eccentric D may be so proportioned in either 
motion to and from the material to be punched 
Case as to give a comparatively long period of 
coextensive with but varying from the motion 
of the punch, substantially as shown and de 
contact of such proximity as to form the arc 
between the carbon and the material and then 
Scribed. 
retract the carbon with a quick motion when 
the punch C is nearly at the upper end of its 
stroke. By this method Iain enabled to punch 
metal with comparatively littlepower and with 
GEO. H. LOTHROP, 
GERTRUDE H. ANDERSON. 
Witlesses: 
CARIES L. COE FIN. 
7 O 
O 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499619.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED WEED, OF TARRYTOWN, NEW YORK. 
RASP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,619, dated June 13, 1898. 
Application filed July 18, 1891, Serial No. 399,965. (No model.) 
I. ? 
To a?? ??ho?,  ??? ???cern: 
Be it known that I, ALFRED WEED, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Tarry 
town, in the county of Westchester and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in the Manufacture of 
Rasps, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in rasps and consists in providing the 
same with teeth of a peculiar form, as set 
forth hereinafter and as illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which:- 
Figure l is a plan view showing, greatly 
magnified, a tooth of a rasp of ordinary form. 
Fig. 2 is a section on the line 2-2, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a plan showing the form of the tooth 
in my improved rasp. Fig. 4 is a section on 
the line 4-4, Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a view showing 
the method of cutting the ordinary tooth. 
Fig. 6 is a view illustrating the method of cut 
ting a tooth in accordance with my improve 
In the manufacture of rasps it has hereto 
fore been usual in most instances to cut or 
form the teeth by means of a chisel a, which 
is applied to the file blank X, in an inclined 
position as illustrated in Fig. 5, and the chisel 
is then forced forward in the direction of its 
length indicated by the arrow 5, and as it 
reaches the termination of its movementitis 
swung outward as indicated by the arrow 6. 
As the result of this operation the tooth b, 
that is thus formed is rounded upon its back 
surface, as illustrated in Fig. 1, and the up 
per forward edges approximate very closely 
to a straight line Y, Fig. 1, extending trans 
versely of the file plate while the forward 
face 7, is in a plane U, Fig. 2, which is very 
nearly vertical and the point S, turns back 
ward slightly, as illustrated in Fig. 2. 
In making my improved rasps the chisel A, 
is at an angle to the blank its cutting edge for 
ward but instead of being driven into the 
blank Fig. 6, in a direction longitudinal to 
ment. 
- 
25 
35 
45 
 
so 
the chisel is forced downward in the direction 
of the arrow 9, at right angles to the face of 
the blank and is also simultaneously swung 
to carry the heel or upper end of the chisel 
downward in the direction of the arrow 10, in 
stead of upward in the direction of the arrow 
6, Fig. 5, as in ordinary cutting. As a conse 
quence of this method of operation each tooth 
is formed from a piece forced up from a V 
shaped recess having a straight inclined bot 
55 
tom O, and the tooth C, Figs. 3 and 4 which 
is produced differs very materially from the 
ordinary tooth both in its construction and 
operation. Thus, the upper face of the tooth 
instead of being rounded like the tooth b, 
more nearly approximates the shape of a sec 
tion of a cone, and the forward upper edges 
12, 12, coincide with converging lines u, u, 
that meet at a comparatively sharp angle and 
the inner face 14, coincides very nearly with 
a flat plane, while the point 13, instead of be 
ing turned back projects forward. The rasp 
having teeth of this shape has a much greater 
cutting capacity than an ordinary rasp and 
the wearing of the edges in use does not have 
the same degree of effect in dulling the point 
as is the case with ordinary teeth so that the 
teeth remain sharp for a longer time and the 
durability of the rasp is greatly increased. 
- 
I claim- 
As a new article of manufacture a rasp, 
provided with teeth having inclined forward 
faces 14 and upper forward edges 12, 12, co 
inciding with lines converging to a sharp 
point and approximating a conical form at 
the back, and with V-shaped recesses having 
straight inclined bottoms o, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
ALFRED WEED. 
- 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
JNO. R. WEEKS, 
L. D. JERMAN. 
* 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499719.txt	 
  
 
  
 
 
 
O, P, DABNEY. 
Patented June 20, 1893, 
3. 
 
3. N 
7 
RA 
 
gyetetetellulellulas SSSaaS 
if sea 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OWEN PERRY DABNEY, OF SALEM, OREGON, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
EDWARD H. JACKSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAN E-S TO OL, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,719, dated June 20, 1893. 
Application filed March 1, 1893, Serial No. 464,232, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OWEN PERRY DABNEY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Sa. 
lem, in the county of Marion and State of Ore 
gon, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Convertible Chairs and 
Canes; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in combined canes and 
stools, and it has for its object to provide a 
simple, and cheaply constructed and at the 
Salme time Serviceable device of this charac 
ter which may be quickly and easily con 
verted into a stool or chair, or into a cane, or 
bundle convenient for transportation. 
To these ends and to such others as the in 
Vention may pertain the same consists in the 
peculiar construction and in the novel combi 
nation, arrangement and adaptation of parts, 
all as more fully hereinafter described and 
claimed, and shown in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the parts 
of my device separated, the stool or chair be 
ing shown as arranged for use. Fig. 2, is a 
like yiew of the same with the chair closed 
Within the tube, the latter being shown in 
Section. Fig. 3, is a perspective view when 
arranged as a cane. Fig. 4, is a detail verti 
cal Section of the chair when opened for use. 
Reference now being had to the details 
of the drawings by letter, Adesignates a cy 
lindrical piece or block to which at its upper 
end is attached a folding seat, and to whose 
lower end folding legs are attached, said piece 
thus constituting the connection between the 
parts named. The seat comprises a piece of 
flexible fabric B attached to the outer ends 
of a number of metal, elastic arms or strips 
C Whose inner ends are pivoted by eyes 
formed upon them to a ring c inclosing a re 
duced portion of the block A at its upper 
end. A short radial lug a projects outward 
between each pair of arms C to partly act to 
guide and keep them out of contact with each 
other, while to complete such separation, and 
limit the downward swing of said arms a 
sleeve D is placed around the block that has 
in its upper edge a rectangular shaped notch 
d for each arm to move in, the width of the 
notch being just sufficient to receive the arm. 
The solid portions of the sleeve between the 
notches cover or house the pivot ring c, and 
they abut against the lugsa. When the arms 
are opened out to place the seat in position 
for use, they are stopped by engaging the bot 
toms of the notches. 
To the lower end of the block A are piv 
oted on radial lines, four legs E, each of which 
is a quarter section of a tube, so that when 
closed together they will present, externally, 
a cylindrical shape. Their diameter when 
folded is that of the block A, and so less than 
the sleeve D. These legs are normally pressed 
outward, so as to assume an open, supporting 
position, when not restrained by means of 
two U shaped springs F, F, each of which at 
its upper free end engages and is attached to 
two diametrically opposite legs near their piv 
ots. One spring is placed slightly higher than 
the other between whose legs it extends so that 
there will be no interference between them. 
G designates a tube whose upper end is 
closed, which operates, in connection with a 
second, much shorter tube FI, either to com 
pletely inclose the chair, just described, when 
the same is folded, or to make there with a 
cane. In the side of the tube G is a straight 
groove g running from its upper end toward 
its center, that terminates at the latter point 
in a short lateral extensiong' while just above 
its beginning point at the open end of the 
tube, is a like off-set or extension g. These 
extensions may open through the side of the 
tube. Said extensions constitute means for 
locking the closed chair in the tube, and are 
designed to engage two lugs or pins h, h', the 
former being on the outside of the tube D, 
and the latter on the outside of one of the 
legs E. The groove g is simply to lead or 
guide the lugs to the extensions. The tube 
His also constructed to co-operate with the 
lug h, having for the purpose an inverted 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
t 
4. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
T shaped sloth acting like the groove g and 
extensionsg'. The slot is shaped thus so that 
when the tube Gis turned to disengage the pins 
h and h' from the off-sets g', said slot h will 
not be disengaged from the lower pin h, and 
thus enables the chair to be withdrawn from 
the tube G., by pulling upon the tube H. 
With the chair opened as shown at Fig. 1, 
when it is desired to discontinue its use, the 
arms C are turned upward and inward, to. 
Ward each other, and the projecting portions 
of the seat fabric twisted around them. These 
parts will then be within the compass of the 
tube G, and can be inserted therein. If a 
cane is desired, the insertion is simply car 
ried far enough to place the lug h upon the 
sleeve D in engagement with the lower offset 
9, the legs. E being pressed together and the 
short tube H being pressed over their lower 
ends and locked by the slot and pin to hold 
them against the outward pressure of their 
springs. If a cane be not desired, then it is 
simply necessary to disengage the lug h and 
lower offset g' and push the folded chair with 
the tube H still in place, until the lug h can 
engage the upper offsetg', and the lug h the 
lower offset g', the upper end of the tube H 
being carried slightly into the tube G. A 
handle I can be placed upon the tube G. for 
convenient handling of the device when folded 
into the small compass just described. 
My device is simple, strong and capable of 
quick and easy manipulation. The chair is 
strong, and affords an easy seat, by reason of 
the elasticity of the arms C. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim to be new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination with the block of the 
seat-carrying arms pivoted to the upper end 
of said block, the legs pivoted to the other 
end of said block and each being a quarter 
section of a tube, and the V-shaped springs 
arranged at right angles to each other with 
their ends seated in openings in opposite legs, 
499,719 
- 
scribed. 
and adapted to fold within the tube formed 
by said legs, substantially as shown and de 
2. The combination with the block of the 
seat-carrying arms pivoted to the upper end 
of said block, the legs pivoted to the other 
end of said block, and each being a quarter 
section of a tube, and the V-shaped springs 
arranged at right angles to each other with 
their ends seated in openings in opposite legs, 
and adapted to fold within the tube formed 
by said legs, and a two-part inclosing tube 
with locking means, substantially as shown 
and described. 
3. The combination with the block of the 
seat-carrying arms pivoted to the upper end 
of said block, the legs pivoted to the other 
end of said block, and each being a quarter 
section of a tube, and the V-shaped springs 
arranged at right angles to each other with 
their ends seated in openings in opposite legs, 
and adapted to fold within the tube formed by 
said legs and a two-part inclosing tube with 
locking means for holding the two parts to 
gether and to the block and legs substantially 
as shown and described. 
4. The combination with the block of the 
seat-carrying arms pivoted to the upper end 
of said block, the legs pivoted to the other 
end of said block, and each being a quarter 
section of a tube, and the V-shaped springs 
arranged at right angles to each other with 
their ends seated in openings in opposite legs, 
and adapted to fold within the tube formed 
by said legs, and the sleeve around said block 
having notches at its upper end in communica 
tion with an annular groove in the block, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
OWEN PERRY DABNEY. 
Witnesses: 
SETH. R. IIAMMER, 
G. E. DAVIS. 
55 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499819.txt	B. F. BROWN, 
SAFETY CAR. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 20, 1893, 
(No Model.) 
No. 499,819. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
Ys 
Reis S.Z. 
assemesic 
erraces 
2N 24 N. 
res=: As 
Ra. 
He 
722/e7227. 2. aver 
(No Model.) 
No. 499,819. 
 
B. F. BROWN. 
SAFETY CAR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 20, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
B. F. BROWN, 
SAFETY CAR, 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 499,819. 
Patented June 20, 1893. 
 
4. LCSI -- 
s Ri SNES 
Firsa 
s's R= 
/7?vesses:- 
/7evezzar'- 
(No Model.) 
 
B. F. BROWN. 
SAFETY CAR 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN F. BROWN, OF SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH TERRITORY. 
SAFETY CAR. . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,819, dated June 20, 1893. 
Application filed October 25, 1892, Serial No. 449,950, (No model.) 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN F. BROWN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Salt 
Lake City, in the county of Salt Lake and 
Territory of Utah, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Preventing Telescoping of Cars; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, subh 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to devices for prevent 
ing the telescoping of the different cars in a 
railway train when, for any reason, the for 
Ward cars are suddenly stopped, as by a col 
lision, the engine running off the track, or 
even by the too sudden setting of the brakes 
at the forward portion of a long train. The 
momentum of a car in motion is so great that 
When the preceding car is suddenly stopped 
one will slide up over the platform and into 
the other like the two parts of a telescope. 
Even when the ends of the cars are closely 
bound together as with the Miller platform 
and buffer, the energy stored up in a train 
moving at a high rate of speed is so great that 
the cars will rush into one another when a col 
lision occurs. To prevent this it is only nec 
essary to substitute a yielding and gradually 
increasing resistance for the practically un 
yielding resistance of the ordinary car buffer. 
To accomplish this, I provide inclined ways or 
guides upon each end of the car, up which the 
end of the adjacent car will be forced by the 
shock of the collision. The resistance en 
countered while sliding up the ways will be 
sufficient to absorb the momentum of the car 
or at least to so reduce it that an auxiliary. 
buffer at the upper end of the ways can resist 
the unexpended portion of the momentum. 
The preferred form of apparatus for carry 
ing out my invention is illustrated in the 
accompanying four sheets of drawings, in 
Figure 1, is a side elevation of the ends of 
two cars. Fig. 2, is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3, is an end elevation of a car. Figs. 4 
and 5, are diagrams showing different arrange 
ments of the apparatus. 
which- 
. 
. 
. 
TO 
35 
45 
55 
to like parts. 
tion of a train. 
Throughout the drawings like figures refer 5o 
1, 2, and 3, are three cars constitutingapor 
4, 4, &c., are the trucks whose wheels run 
on the rails 5, 5. 
6, 6, are inclined guides or ways built on to 
the left hand ends of the cars. 7,7, are simi 
lar inclined ways on the right hand ends of 
the cars. 
8, 8, &c., are platforms on either side of the 
inclined ways for facilitating entrance to or 
passage between the cars. 
19, 19, are car doors and 9, 9, are the plat 
form steps. 
10, 10, are hand railings along the outer 
edges of the platforms. 
11,11, are the braces for the inclined guides 
or ways 6, and 7. 
The platforms and ways are reinforced by 
the beams 24, 25, which are in line with the 
floor beams of the cars. These beams have 
their end faces 12, and 13, beveled off so that 
the face 13, is parallel to the inclined ways 6, 
and the face 12, to the inclined ways 7. The 
cars are connected by any suitable coupling 
14, and are furnished with the ordinary buf 
fer 15, 15. 
16, 17, are sets of hinged tongue pieces at 
the lower ends of the inclined ways. 
18, 18, are hatches cut in the platforms to 
receive the hinged tongue pieces when they 
are turned back out of operative position, 
and 18, 18", are covers for said hatches. 
20, 21, are guide lugs to prevent either car 
from running off the inclined ways of its 
neighbor while running up them. 
22, 22, are auxiliary buffers at the upper 
end of said inclined ways, held in place by 
tie rods 26, 26, and provided with springs 
23, 23. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
Two cars being coupled together, one set of 
hinged tongue pieces as 17, are turned down 
as shown in Fig. 1, and the other set 16, are 
turned back out of operative position. Then 
in case of a collision severe enough to break 
the couplings and buffers 14, and 15, the end 
of car 2 will slide up the inclined way 7, on 
9o 
95 
75 
ar 
2 
- 
499,819 
car 1. The resistance encountered will be 
the weight of the car end multiplied by the 
tangent of the angle of inclination of the 
ways, plus the friction of the rubbing sur 
faces. This would probably be sufficient to 
overcome the momentum of the car and bring 
it to a gradual stop. If not it will reduce 
the momentum, so that the auxiliary buffer 
22, can overcome the momentum remaining 
by the time the top of the ways is reached. 
The guide lugs, 20, will keep the car, 2, on 
the ways 7. 
It is evident that the car which has its 
hinged tongue pieces turned back will do the 
riding, while the car that has them down will 
The tongue pieces are simply ex 
be ridden. 
tensions of the inclined ways. If those on 
the corresponding ends of each car are turned 
down, that end of each car will remain on the 
track while the other end is lifted as shown 
in Fig. 4. If all the tongue pieces on every 
alternate car are turned down, and those on 
the intermediate cars are left up, the inter 
mediate cars will belifted up bodily as shown 
in Fig. 5. This latter arrangement shown in 
Fig. 5, is the preferred form in which my in 
vention should be used. The intermediate 
cars will then be lifted up two feet and a half 
more or less from the track and the alternate 
cars will be held down on the track by the 
weight of those which are lifted. In this way 
the chances of derailment are less, inasmuch 
as when the cars are drawn or pushed apart 
again, the guide lugs, 20, will cause the inter 
mediate cars to drop back on the rails. The 
mode of operation, in case of a collision, with 
this arrangement would be as follows: The 
front end of the first car will ride up on the in 
clined ways at the back of the tender to a 
height of two and ahalf feet more or less, 
thereby opposing the gradual resistance of its 
lifted weight to the on-coming train. After 
the front end of the first car had struck the 
auxiliary buffer at the top of the inclined 
ways on the tender, the rear end of said car 
would be lifted up by the second car to a 
height of about two and a half feet before 
its rear end struck the auxiliary buffer on 
the tops of the inclined ways of the second 
car. This would give an additional yielding 
effect and great resistance to the forward 
motion of the remaining cars and in this way 
the momentum of the train would be taken 
up by a series of yielding shocks and the train 
would be brought to a standstill, every alter 
nate car having been lifted without destroy 
ing the cars or injuring their occupants. 
Of course my invention can be applied to 
- 
vention. 
all kinds of freight cars as well as to passen 
ger cars, and should be put on the rear of the 
tender and on the front of the engine. 
Various changes could be made in the de 
tails of my apparatus without affecting the 
principles of operation and such modified 
forms I consider within the scope of my in 
Having therefore described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to protect by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination with a series of rail 
road cars of a reinforced platform upon either 
end of each car, and a set of inclined ways 
upon each platform substantially as described. 
2. The combination with a series of rail 
road cars of a reinforced platform upon either 
end of each car, a set of inclined ways upon 
each platform, and a set of hinged tongue 
pieces at the lower end of each set of inclined 
ways, substantially as described. 
3. The combination with a series of rail 
road cars of a reinforced platform upon either 
end of each car, a set of inclined ways upon 
each platform, and a set of hinged tongue 
pieces at the lower end of each set of inclined 
ways, together with an auxiliary buffer at the 
upper end of each inclined way, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination of a series of rail-road 
cars of a reinforced platform upon either end 
of each car, a set of inclined ways upon each 
platform, and a set of hinged tongue pieces 
at the lower end of each set of inclined ways, 
together with an auxiliary buffer at the up 
per end of each inclined way, and a set of 
guide lugs at the lower end thereof, substan 
tially as described. 
5. The combination with a series of rail 
road cars of a reinforced platform upon either 
end of each car, a set of inclined ways upon 
each platform, and a set of hinged tongue 
pieces at the lower end of each set of inclined 
ways, together with a platform on either side 
of each inclined way, and a hatch way in said 
platform, through which the hinged tongue 
pieces may be dropped when not in operative 
position, substantially as described. 
6. A railway car provided at either end with 
a set of inclined ways as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
BENJAMIN F. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD A. TRAPP, 
A. P. SMITH. 
75 
95 
do 
To5 
d 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0400001-0500000/US499919.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. GRIFFIN & E. P. NICHOLS. 
ADJUSTABLE WRENCE, 
No. 499,919, 
Patented June 20, 1893. 
 S 
  
/ 
(Witnesses 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARD H. GRIFFIN AND ELMER P. NICHOLS, OF HENNIKER, NEW 
HAMPSHIRE. 
ADJUSTABLE WREN CH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 499,919, dated June 20, 1893. 
{ 
Application filed March 17, 1893, Serial No. 466,406, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
of a pin C, passing through the said stock and 
through a sleeve D fitting the said stock. 
The jaws B, are expanded normally by means 
of a light spring b', resting within a slot b, 
formed for this purpose in either jaw as 
shown. When expanded, said jaws rest within 
slots d, of the sleeve D which are formed of 
the same width and in alignment with the 
slot a of the stock A. 
The jaws are adjusted each by a wedge 
shaped bar E, fitted to grooves a, formed at 
points diametrically opposite in the sides of 
the stock A, and each in alignment with the 
slot a of said stock. The lower portion of 
each bar E, is provided on the outer edge 
with a thread e, and the reduced diameter of 
the stock A shown below the shoulder a, is 
necessary in order to mount the actuating 
collar F, and its retaining collar G, below the 
sleeve D, as shown; both of which are as 
much smaller in diameter than the stock A, 
as will equal the depth of the threads on the 
adjusting bars E, the actuating collar F, be 
ing threaded to fit the threads of the said bars 
as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 6. The collar G, 
is bored to fit the reduced portion of the stock 
A, and then slotted at points diametrically 
opposite as seen at g, to a depth sufficient to 
represent a diameter within said slots equal 
to that of the upper or largest diameter of said 
stock. This collar may be attached by screws 
or a ping', to said stock, thus Supporting the 
actuating collar F, between the said sleeve 
D, and collar G. 
The actuating collar F, may beformed hex 
agonal, Octagonal, or be milled SO as to be 
easily revolved, and by rotating it in one di 
rection the jaws B, may be closed toward each 
other for fitting a small nut, and vice versa;- 
the adjustment being accomplished by reason 
of the Wedge shaped bars E, and spring b', 
acting upon said jaws B. 
The shanka, may be squared at its outer 
end as shown in Fig. 1, so as to be turned by 
the application of an ordinary key Wrench. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim is 
1. In an adjustable socket-Wrench, a stock 
having a slot in its end, in which is pivoted a 
pair of adjustable jaws, and longitudinal 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
? 
 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, WILLARD H. GRIFFIN 
and ELMERP.NICHOLS, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Henniker, in the county of 
Merrimac and State of New Hampshire, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Adjustable Wrenches; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make nd use the same. 
Our invention relates to the so called sock 
et-Wrench for which it is designed to be sub 
stituted;-the object being to provide a 
wrench which is capable of adjustment to 
nuts of various sizes and still be readily op 
erative in all places where a socket-wrench 
Would be required. 
The invention will be fully set forth in the 
following specification and claims and clearly 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings 
forming a part of same, of which 
Figure 1, is a sectional elevation showing 
the jaws of the Wrench fully extended. Fig. 
2. is a sectional elevation cut through in the 
direction opposite to that shown in Fig. 1. and 
having the adjustable jaws removed. Fig. 3. 
is a plan view of the parts shown in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4. is a cross-section taken through Fig. 
1. iust below the adjustable jaws. Fig. 5. is 
a plan View of one of the retaining sleeves. 
Fig. 6. is a plan view of the threaded adjust 
ing collar, and Fig. 7... is a plan view of the 
Wrench stock as seen in Fig. 1. having all de 
tachable parts removed. 
Similar reference letters indicate like parts 
throughout the various views. 
A, is the Wrench stock, having a shanka. 
The stock A, is formed of uniform diameter 
from its outer end to the shoulder a where 
the diameter is reduced as shown, for a pur 
pose to be hereinafter explained, and the 
outer end is slotted at a, for the reception of 
the adjustable jaws B, and grooved at a, to 
a depth Sufficient to receive that end of any 
ordinary bolt which may project through its 
nut. 
The jaws B, are made substantially in the 
form shown, and are pivotally connected each 
to the other, and both to the stock A, by means 
O 
15 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
2 
499,919 
? 
: 
. * 
25 
grooves, one at each side in alignment with tudinally grooved stock, having a shank with O 
said slot, the said jaws and a suitable spring its outer end squared for carrying a key 
for normally separating the same, a slotted 
wrench, a pair of jaws pivoted within the slot 
in said stock, a spring for normally separat 
sleeve mounted upon said stock, the threaded 
adjusting bars resting within the longitudi 
ing the same, a pair of adjusting bars hav 
nal grooves of said stock, and an actuating 
ing a portion of their outer edge threaded 
and fitting one in either of said longitudinal 
collar threaded to fit said adjusting bars, all 
substantially for the purpose set forth. 
grooves of said stock, a sleeve for retaining 
said adjusting bars in position, a threaded 
2. In an adjustable wrench, the combina 
tion with the pivoted jaws and a spring for 
collar for actuating said bars, and a retain 
pressing them normally apart, and the slotted 
ing collar secured underneath said threaded 
and grooved stock in which said jaws are piv 
collar. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
oted, of a sleeve mounted upon said stock, a 
pair of adjusting bars mounted in the grooves 
of said stock and within said sleeve, and 
means substantially as shown for moving said 
adjusting bars higher or lower upon said jaws 
for setting the wrench to a given nut. 
3. The combination of a slotted and longi 
WITLARD PI. GRIFFIN. 
ELMER. P. NICHOLS. 
J. B. THURSTON, 
CARRIE, E, EVANS. 
Witnesses: 
s 
in presence of two witnesses. 
?h 
o 
IS 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500020.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 500,020, 
F. C. MILLER. 
CIGAR BUNCHING MACHINE. 
5. Sheets-Sheet. i. 
Patented June 20, 1893. 
  
222222222222222222222222222222 e 227 
0.2%tz, 
item." 
seat:57: 
Asa'asasassissil SarswsSeaSSi (, , , ful 
77 
Wiznesses. 
- (424-6-4---- 
7%-42%te? 
Ariver azar. 
- Zvez'22 (2.76 ZaAez, -- 
2 ; 2 
Ay his were V 
 
the Norris PETERS co. Photo-Lito, was crop. 
(No Model.) 
F. C. MILLER, 
CIGAR BUNCHING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 500,020. 
Patented June 20, 1893, 
Witnesses. 
(4241 leaz - - - - , 
a- - - - 
Artverif Zr 
Z7&zzzz (2.76.242: ---. 
2%942(24.4/ Af y Aris Aziz arris/s- 6 
4. 262 
 
No Model. ' 
F. C. MILLER. 
CIGAR BUNCHING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 500,020, 
Patented June 20, l893. 
 
  
 
is -e S St. 
 
 
/7 (0. 
- - - - - 
Alva, Izzar. 
Wiz (72SSES - 
--(42ue&u. 
22-42.42%ter Ay Azis Aziz arrietys s 
-- Zzezzo-e (276.2/e7 -- 
w  2 r 
 
THE Norris Peters co. Photo-uTHC, WASHINGTON. D. c. 
(No Model,) 
F. C. MILLER. 
CIGAR BUNCHING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 500,020, 
Patented June 20, 1893. 
Z7z fa 
Wiznesses. 
- (64%--- 
26.1%a.2422/P 
Arzwarizar. 
--Zzezzaz C2.4%zaez---- 
Ay Ai's Alert, w 6 2 
she worris Perers c, PhorouTHo was iNatc. . 
. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. C. MILLER, 
CICAR BUNCHING MACHINE, 
5 sheets-sheets. 
No. 500,020, 
Patented June 20, 1893. 
28itvesses 
- (4,716. -- 
2%a-e:64-/ 
341.uovtov 
Z7eezzlez 62-462e.7: - - - - 
33 y-luxes attorneys 
 
orris Perers co, PHorc-luth.o. washingto. b.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FREDRICK C. MILLER, OF NEWPORT, KENTUCKY. 
CGAR-B UN CHING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,020, dated June 20, 1893 
Application filed April 28, 1891, Serial No. 390,734. (No model.) 
To all tufton, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDRICKC. MILLER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
port, Campbell county, Kentucky, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Cigar-Bunching Machines, of which the fol 
lowing specification is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form a part 
thereof. 
My invention relates to that class of ma 
chines which employs an apron and Suitable 
rollers for forming the bunch of a cigar, in 
combination with suitable feeding and dis 
tributing mechanism, and relates more par 
ticularly to certain improvements on the ma 
chine covered by Letters Patent No. 416,117, 
granted to me November 26, 1889, the gen 
eral plan of driving mechanism being the 
same in both machines. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
cigar bunching machine in which the fillers 
(of leaf tobacco) forming the cigar bunch are 
formed and cut off at any desired length, and 
the binder automatically wrapped around the 
filler to form the bunch by the operation of 
the machine. And a further object of my 
invention is to provide mechanism for mak 
ing a continuous filler, which is fed automati 
cally by the machine to the bunch forming 
mechanism, which automatically cuts and 
shapes the filler and wraps the binder on. 
In cigar bunching machines hitherto em 
ployed, it has been customary to use scrap 
material for forming the fillerS SO that it may 
be fed automatically into the bunch forming 
mechanism, but with the mechanism herein 
after described an operator forms the con 
tinuous filler, preferably of leaf tobacco, (or 
what is known as long fillers) whereby he is 
enabled to size the bunches uniformly. 
My invention consists of certain novel fea 
tures of construction, all of which will first 
be described with reference to the accompa 
nying drawings and then more particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
In said drawings:-Figure l is a top pla 
view of my improved machine. Fig. 1" is a 
detail sectional view, taken on the line 1-1 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 1 is a broken detail view of 
the arms C and 12 and their shaft 13. Fig.2 
is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is an 
elevation of the reverse side from Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a detail perspective view, on an en 
larged scale, of the feeding and cutting appa 
ratus. Fig. 5 is a sectional view taken on 
line a-ac Fig. 4, some of the parts being shown 
in full lines. Fig. 5* is a bottom plan view 
of the cutting die. Fig. 6 is an enlarged sec 
tional view of the feeding mechanism. Fig. 
7 is a sectional view taken on the line y- i? 
Fig. 6. Fig. 8 is a detail perspective view of 
the guide and filler holding mechanism. Fig. 
9 is a side elevation, partly in section, of the 
filler receiving die. Fig. 10 is a diagram of 
the bearing surface of one of the driving cams. 
Fig. 11 is a side elevation of the same cam. 
Fig. 12 is a detail plan view of the under 
side of the mold supporting slide. Fig. 13 is 
a detail top plan view of the slide with the 
mold clamped in place. Fig. 14 is a side ele 
Vation, partly in section, of the mold support 
ing slide and feeding mechanism. Fig.15 is 
a sectional view taken on the line a-le Fig. 
3. Fig. 16 is a detail plan view of the bunch 
ing rollers inverted. Fig. 17 is an end eleva 
tion of the bunching rollers. Fig. 18 is an in 
side Sectional elevation taken on line t-t 
Fig. 3. Fig. 19 is a detail view of part of the 
mold feeding mechanism. Fig. 20 is a plan 
view of the continuous filler, indicating the 
manner of Cutting the filler sections there 
from. Fig. 21 is a plan view of the completed 
filler section ready for the binder. Fig.22 is a 
perspective view of the apron gatherer. Fig. 
23 is a detail elevation of a portion of the ma 
chine showing the apron gatherer in position 
for use. Fig. 24 is a detail perspective view 
of the Oscillating clutch supporting arm. 
The same letters and figures of reference 
indicate the same parts throughout the sev 
eral views. 
1, 2, represent the posts or standards of 
the machine; 3, the main driving shaft jour 
naled in Said standards; and 4, 5, and 6 driv 
ing cams, all constructed substantially the 
same as the similar parts shown and described 
in my former Patent No. 416,117. 
A represents a cam (see Figs. 2, 3, 10, and 
11) for operating the apron holding arms. 
B is a cam for driving the arms of the 
bunching rollers. 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
500,020 
O 
20 
. 25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
- 
C is a vibratory arm operating pitman D, 
which is situated under the table IK and is 
pivotally connected to the projecting pine' 
of the oscillating clamping arm E. Said 
clamping arm E, which is clearly shown in 
detail in Figs. 4, and 5, has a forward guid 
ing portion e bent at an angle to the main 
body portion, from which projects the oper 
ating pin e' which operates in the slot o, and 
is pivoted to the pitman D. The clamping 
arm is pivotally attached to the upper sur 
face of the table in proper relation to the 
cutting die 22 by means of a pivot pin e 
formed integral with its rear end which is 
seated in a suitable perforation e. 
9, 9, represent vibratory arms to which is 
attached one end of the apron h, said arms 
serving to hold the apron taut. 
38, 38 are vibratory arms which, carry the 
bunching rollers f and g. 
The arms 9, 9, and 38, 38, are operated re 
spectively by the cams A and B, their lower 
ends being provided with anti-friction rollers 
and held into engagement with the working 
faces of said cams by means of spiral springs 
9 and 38 which respectively connect the 
upper ends of the arms 9, 9, and 38,38 with 
the arm C. The spring 9 is attached to a . 
projecting pin 9 on the arm C, and the spring 
38 is attached to a pin 38 projecting from 
the arm C in line with the shaft 13. 
10 is an intermittently revolving filler ring 
rotatably supported upon the table. The ta 
ble is formed of a circular bottom plate K 
suitably supported upon the standards 1, 2, 
and a concentric top circular plate I secured 
to the bottom plate K. The top plate I is as 
much smaller than the bottom plate Kas the 
width of the ring 10, so that the ring 10 can 
be supported upon the plate Knear its outer 
periphery and be confined in position against 
sidewise movement by the plate I, the two 
plates forming a track or way for the ring to 
journal upon. 
11 is a groove formed in the inner periph 
ery of the ring 10, within which groove the 
leaves of tobacco are placed and formed by 
the operator into a cylindrical continuous 
filler, the travel of the ring (in the direction 
indicated by the arrows in Figs. 1, 4 and 5), 
automatically feeding the filler to the cutting 
die. The operator forms the continuous filler 
by rolling or wrapping the leaves together in 
the groove 11 of the ring 10, said ring feed 
ing the filler under the cutting die. The pre 
ferred manner of operating this filler ring is 
to move it intermittently so as to give time 
to wrap the filler that has been cut off, before 
the next filler has been cut. Said ring may 
be intermittently operated by any suitable 
means, but I prefer to operate it by the fol 
lowing device. 
12 is an oscillating arm arranged on the op 
posite side of the machine from, and in jux 
taposition to, the arm C, from which it re 
ceives its motion and with which it operates 
in unison by means of cross-shaft 13, which is 
rigidly connected to both of said arms 12 and 
C, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1 and full 
lines in Fig. 19. 
14 is a pitman pivotally connected to the 
lug 16 formed on or secured to the oscillating 
arm 15 between the ends; on the outer end of 
said arm 15 is formed a clutch box 17 which 
carries a gravitating friction pawl 18, which 
is adapted to intermittently clutch the ring 
10 and move it forward. The arm 15 cairy 
ing the clutch box 17 is pivoted at 15 to the 
under side of the bottom plate IK (as shown 
in dotted lines in Fig. 1) and is adapted to 
be oscillated back and forward by tho cam 6 
operating through arm C, shaft 13, arm 12, 
and pitman 14. For regulating the amount 
of forward movement or feed of the ring 10 
at each stroke, I provide an adjustable trip 
ping plate 19 which is adapted to engage the 
pin d on the pawl 18 and hold the pawl out 
of engagement with the ring during a por- . 
plate 19 may be of 
tion of the stroke. The 
any suitable shape but it is preferably made 
in the form of a sector (as shown in Fig. 1) 
pivoted at its point to the center of the cir 
cular table and having an operating flange 19 
concentric with the ring 10. e' is a curved 
slot in said plate and e is a set screw passing 
through said slot and seated in the table, by 
means of which the plate can be shifted from 
one position to another. 
Referring to Fig. 6, a-c represent the full 
movement of the pin d, and the line of ad 
justment of the tripping flange j9. When 
the flange 19, is in the position shown in Fig. 
6 the distance between its forward edge band 
the point a represents the portion of the 
stroke that the pawl 18 will be in engagement 
with the ring 10 for moving it forward, which 
is, say three inches; this representing the 
length of filler section which will be cut from 
the continuous filler. Now, if it is desired to 
cut a filler section three and one-half inches 
long, then the tripping flange 19 is adjusted 
one-half an inch farther backward in the line 
a-c. The pin d, in the backward movement 
of the clutch box and clutch, will strike said 
flange 19 and ride up on top of the same, hold 
ing the pawl 18 out of engagement with the 
ring 10 to the end of the backward stroke, the 
pawl assuming the position shown in dotted 
lines in Fig. 6 (except that the pin d will be 
in engagement with the flange 19). When 
the clutch returns on its forward stroke, the 
pin d slides on the flange 19 until it reaches 
the point b when it drops off and allows the 
pawl 18 to engage the ring 10 and move it the 
required distance forward. By this mechan 
ism. I am enabled to regulate the forward in 
termittent movement of the ring 10, and con 
sequently the length of feed of the filler to 
the cutting die. 
The filler is formed by the operator prefer 
ably just in front of the curved guide bar 20, . 
which consists of an arm preferably of metal - 
secured to the table at its base in any suit 
able manner, and having an enlarged mouth 
95 
OO 
Lo5 
o 
II5 
T 25 
500,020 
O 
30 
35 
40 
45 
55 
in its forward end to facilitate the passage of 
the continuous filler between it and the groove 
11. 21 is also a guide arm or spring tongue 
secured to and supported by the guide block 
29 in rear of the guide bar 20. The construc 
tion of this guide arm 21 is clearly shown in 
Figs. 4, 5, and S. This guide arm or spring 
tongue projects into the groove 11 to lead 
the continuous filler therefrom inward under 
the cutting die 22. The guide bar 20 and 
guide-arm 21 are arranged concentric with 
each other but slightly eccentric to the groove 
11 in combination with which they operate. 
22 is the cutting die formed with a forward 
V-shaped cutting edge 22, and a rear form 
ing edge 22 on the bottom, and 23 is a shank 
projecting from said cutting die and con 
nected to the vertically sliding rod 24 by an 
arm 23. The sliding rod 24 is reciprocated 
in its guide post or sleeve 25, by means of 
the pitman 26, bell-crank lever 27 and cam 5. 
This cutting die is operated in substantially 
the same manner as the feeding die shown in 
my said former Patent No. 416,117, but it 
performs the additional function of cutting 
off the filler Sections from the continuous filler 
which is fed to it. 
In Fig.20 I have shown the preferred form 
of cutting the filler section from the continu 
ous filler. The forward end of the cutting 
die 22 is pointed so as to make a V-shaped 
cut 28. There are two advantages in cutting 
the filler in this shape, that is, pointed at one 
end and V-shaped at the other:-first the 
pointed end gives the proper shape for the 
head of the cigar, and second, the V-shaped 
end will fold together as illustrated, in Fig. 
21, so as to make the tuck end of the cigar 
contracted or smaller than the body portion. 
In cutting the cigar filler in this manner, it is 
very necessary that the filler should be held 
firmly to the action of the cutting die, and for 
this purpose I have provided the guide-block 
29, having a heel 30 projecting across the rear 
of the cutting die 22 (see Figs. 4, 5 and 8), for 
holding the filler on one side, and the oscil 
lating clamping arm E for holding it on the 
other side. The guide block 29 is secured to 
the table close up to the revoluble ring 10 in 
any suitable manner; said guide-block 29, the 
guide bar 20, and guide-arm 21, and the clamp 
ing arm E all being arranged in proper rela 
tion to each other to operate as described. 
The movement of the clamping arm E is timed 
so that it will move up and securely clamp 
the filler in place just before the cutting-die 
descends and move back to its normal posi 
tion as indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 5, 
when the filler section has been severed. The 
cutting die 22 in addition to cutting the filler 
sections from the continuous fillier feeds the 
filler through the slot 22 onto the binding 
apron over the die, 34, as in my said former 
patent. 
32 is the arm for operating the mold filling 
plunger 33, which is constructed and operated 
in unison with the cutting die 22, in the man 
ner shown in my said former patent. After 
the filler has been cut off, it is forced by the 
cutting die 22 down into the receiving die 34, 
which is preferably mounted upon a sliding 
rod 35 which is journaled in the sleeve 36. The 
rear forming edge 22 of the cutting die 22, is 
converged slightly, so as to close the V-shaped 
end or tuck of the filler into shape as in 
dicated in Fig. 21, when the cutting die 22 
presses the filler down into the receiving die 
34. The lower end of the rod 35 is provided 
with an anti-friction roller 37. When the ec 
centric part S of the cam A comes in contact 
with said friction roller 37, it elevates the die 
34 to receive the filler as it is forced into it 
by the cutting die 22 which compresses the 
filler in the die 34 during the descent of the 
parts. AS. Soon as the cutting-die commences 
to travel back or upward, the apron is carried 
forward to roll the filler into a bunch as clearly 
shown and described in my said former patent. 
It is desirable to form bunches of various 
shapes and to have the same tightly rolled by 
the rollers. For this purpose I provide two 
rollers fg, (shown in Fig. 16, and in my ap 
plication filed April 13, 1891, Serial No.388,729, 
and claimed in that application,) over which 
the apron passes in the manner shown in 
Fig. 17. 
h is the rolling apron which passes around 
rollerg, thence around the the roller if thence 
into the die 34 around the filler i, which is 
rolled out onto the curved table h, the binder 
being placed on the apron and wrapped onto 
the filler to form the bunch. Now by having 
an inequality in the size of the rollerg, the 
apron will be drawn more taut in some por 
tions of its width than in others, thus allow 
ing the apron to conform to a degree to the de 
sired shape of cigar. 
In Fig. 16I have shown the rollerg as being 
small near the center and tapering abruptly 
in one direction and obliquely in the other, 
so that the larger portions of the bunch will 
be opposite the smaller portions of the rollerg. 
Any desired form of bunch can be obtained by 
changing the configuration of the roller g. 
The construction and arrangement of these 
rollers are more fully described and claimed in 
my pending application, Serial No. 388,729, 
filed April 13, 1891. The arms 38 carrying 
the said rollers f and g are operated in the 
manner already set forth, being substantially 
the same as in my former patent. 
In addition to the above arrangement for 
determining the shape of the bunch it is some 
times desirable to contract the apron at the 
edge so as to roll the head of the cigar more 
closely. For this purpose I have provided an 
apron gathering arm 70 which is attached to 
the machine just opposite the tip end of the 
die 34; this arm 70 is provided with a recess 
71 into which the apron and binder are 
preSSSd, as shown in Fig. 23, drawing it close 
together at the head of the bunch. 
In Figs. 12, 13, 14, and 19 I have shown the 
details of the construction for intermittently 
95 
od 
To 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
 
 
5 
O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
 
4. 
500,020 
9o 
moving the cigar mold. In order to move the 
mold in unison with the feeding mechanism, 
motionis communicated to it from the arm 12, 
to the rock-shaft 40 (by means of segmental 
gear) which is journaled in the bracket 41 and 
is provided with a crank 42; said crank 42 be 
ing pivoted to the arm 43 carrying the pawl 
44 which engages with the rack 45 on the mold 
supporting slide 46, and by its reciprocation 
intermittently moves said mold. It is neces 
sary to adjust the position and movement of 
the mold to suit. the position and movement 
of the cutting die so that the matrices of the 
mold will register with the die. This is ac 
complished by forming the arm 43 in sections 
and connecting the sections together by a 
screw-bolt 47 supporting a spiral spring 48 
upon it between the sections. The arm is 
shortened by screwing up the bolt and com 
pressing the spring, and lengthened by the 
reverse movement. 
It is very desirable that the machihe can 
be readily stopped and started by the oper 
ator, and also that it should stop automati 
cally when the mold has been filled with 
bunches, and for these purposes I have de 
vised the following construction. 
49 represents a treadle mounted on the for 
ward end of treadle bar 50, which is attached 
at its other end to the bell-crank arm 52; said 
bell-crank arm being pivoted to the standard 
at 51. The bifurcated upper end of the bell 
crank arm 52 engages with the grooved hub 
53 of the sliding cone 54, which operates the 
clutch 55, in the mannershown in Patent No. 
416,067, granted to me November 26, 1889. 
When the operator wishes to set the machine 
in motion he raises the treadle 49 and causes 
the clutch to engage and sets the machine in 
motion; when he wishes to release the same 
the treadle is depressed. When it is desired 
to have the machine thrown out of operation 
automatically at the end of each revolution 
I employ the tripping lever 56 provided with 
the cam 57, which strikes one of the arms r 
of the clutch and throws the cone 54 out of 
engagement with the clutch arms, as shown 
and described in my Patent No. 416,067. In 
order to stop the machine automatically and 
lock it in its idle position when the mold is 
filled I provide the following instrumentali 
ties: 
58 represents a bell-crank tripping arm piv 
oted to the frame of the machine at 59. 60 
represents a rod engaging with a socket in the 
forward end of the tripping-arm; the weight 
61 holds the arms 60 in contact with the un 
der side of the supporting slide 46. 63 rep 
resents a stud projecting down on one side of 
the treadle shaft 50. A recess 64 is made on 
the under side of the mold-supporting slide 
46 at the appropriate point so that when said 
recess has arrived over the arm 60 and the 
revolution has been completed so as to allow 
the treadle to drop the weight 61 forces it into 
the recess and brings the arm 63 down and 
holds the clutch in disengaged position. 
The machine is operated in the following 
manner: An operator. forms the continuous 
filler in the groove 11 in the ring 10 in front 
of the guide-bar 20; as the filler is formed it 
is carried forward by the rotation of the ring 
under the cutting die; the machine is oper 
ated in time movements in the following mari 
ner: After the filler has been delivered under 
the cutting die, the ring stops and the cutting 
die moves forward by the operation of cam 5, 
see Fig. 3, and cuts the filler section off from 
the continuous filler, and deposits it on the 
rolling apron above the die 34. The die 34 
operated by cam A is lifted up to receive the 
filler which is deposited upon the apron h 
which rests under the filler when it is pressed 
into the die. As soon as the cutting die has 
been retracted the apron rolling arms 9 and 85 . 
38 are moved forward rolling the filler within 
the apron in the same manner as shown in 
my said former Patent No. 416,117, and the 
bunch is delivered by said apron into appro 
priate mechanism, preferably such as shown 
in said patent, which moves the same to the 
cigar mold; the bunchis pressed into the cigar 
mold by means of the arm 32 and die connected 
thereto simultaneously with the cutting of the 
second bunch. 
It is desirable in most cases to have the 
binder wrapped around the filler by the 
apron; this binder is applied by a second op 
erator who lays it on the apron just over the 
die 34 preceding the time when the filler is 
deposited thereon. In order to prevent the 
apron from creasing and to keep it taut I pro 
vide a cam 65 on the arm 38 which strikes 
against the spring lug 66 on the arm 67, which 
arm is pivoted to the machine at 68 and sup 
ports the apron on its forward end 69; so that 
as the lower end of said arm is moved out 
ward by the contact with the cam 65 the up 
per end is drawn inward straightening the 
apron just before the arms 9 and 38 are re 
tracted to draw the apron back for a second 
operation. The spring lug 66 is adjusted to 
the proper position by set screws 76. Thus 
the filler sections are consecutively made and 
rolled into bunches and deposited in the 
mold, and cigars are formed from fillers which 
have been arranged by hand. Cigars formed 
in this manner possess all the superior quali 
ties of hand-made cigars, 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent 
J. In a cigar bunching machine, the combi 
nation of the rotatable ring 10, provided with 
groove 11 for receiving the continuous filler 
therein, and a guide bar and means for sev 
ering filler sections from the continuous filler, 
as herein set forth. 
2. The combination in a cigar bunching 
machine, of the intermittently rotatable ring 
95 
I o5 
(25 
O 
II5 
too 
. 
. 
500,020 
10, provided with groove 11 for receiving the 
continuous filler therein, and a guidebar, and 
means for severing the filler sections in the 
interim between the movements of the ring, 
Substantially as herein set forth. 
3. The rotatable ring 10, provided with a 
groove 11 and a guide bar, in combination 
with a table, a reciprocating cutting die, and 
means for rotating the ring, substantially as 
herein set forth. 
4. In a cigar bunching machine, the combi 
nation with a table, and a reciprocating cut 
ting die 22, of the rotatable ring 10 provided 
With groove 11 and a guide bar, and a guide 
arm 21 for directing the filler under the re 
ciprocating cutting die, substantially as here 
in set forth. 
5. In a cigar bunching machine, the combi 
nation with a table provided with a perfora 
tion 22", of a reciprocating cutting die 22, a 
rotating ring 10 provided with a groove 11 
and a guide bar and means for guiding the 
continuous filler from the groove 11 over the 
perforation 22 aid under the reciprocating 
Cutting-die, whereby the filler sections can be 
severed and fed below the table to any suit 
able mechanism, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a cigar bunching machine, the combi 
nation with a table, and a reciprocating cut 
ting-die 22, of the rotatable ring 10 provided 
with groove 11, guide bar 20 for confining the 
continuous filler in the groove 11, and the 
guide arm 21 for directing the filler under 
the reciprocating cutting die, substantially as 
herein set forth. 
7. In a cigar bunching machine, the combi 
nation with a table having a perforation 22, 
and a reciprocating cutting die operating 
therein, of the rotatable ring 10 provided 
with groove 11, the guide bar 20 and guide 
arm 21, and the guide block 29, substantially 
as herein set forth. 
8. In a cigar bunching machine, the combi 
nation with a suitable table having a perfo 
ration 22", the intermittently reciprocating 
cutting-die 22 supported from the table, the 
stationary guide block 29 mounted on the ta 
ble below the cutting-die 22, and the oscillat 
ing clamping arm E pivoted to the table ad 
jacent to the guide block 29, and adapted to 
hold the filler against the block 29 under the 
cutting-die, substantially as herein set forth. 
9. In a cigar bunching machine, the combi 
nation with a suitable table provided with an 
elongated opening or perforation 22", a sta 
tionary guide block 29 provided with a heel 
30 mounted on the table adjacent to the open 
ing, an oscillating clamping arm E pivoted to 
the table adjacent to the heel of said guide 
block and on the opposite side of the opening, 
and a reciprocating cutting-die 22 supported 
over the perforation 22 and adapted to re 
ciprocate inside of the block 29 and clamping 
arm E for severing a filler section, substan 
tially as set forth. 
10. In a cigar bunching machine, the com 
bination with a suitable table provided with 
a perforation 22 a slot o, and a reciprocating 
cutting die 22, of the stationary guide block 
29, mounted on the table to one side of the 
path of the reciprocating cutting-die, the os 
cillating clamping arm E pivoted to the table 
adjacent to the block 29 and to the opposite side 
of the path of the reciprocating cutting-die, 
said arm E being provided with a pine', work 
ing in the slot 0, and suitable mechanism un 
der the table engaging said pin e' for operat 
ing the arm E, substantially, as herein set 
forth. 
11. In a cigar bunching machine, the com 
bination with a suitable table provided with 
a perforation 22, a rotatable ring 10 mounted 
on said table and provided with a groove 11, 
a guide bar 20 secured to the table adjacent 
to the ring for confining the continuous filler 
in the groove 11, a stationary guide block 29 
mounted on the table adjacent to the ring, a 
guide arm 21 extending from said block 29 
into the groove 11 for directing the filler to 
the guide block, an oscillating clamping arm 
E provided with a forward bent guiding por 
tion e, and pivoted to the table adjacent to 
the block 29, a cutting die and means for op 
erating said clamping arm and for rotating 
the ring 10, substantially as set forth. 
12. In a cigar bunching machine the com 
bination with a suitable table provided with 
a perforation 22, of the block 29 secured to 
the table, an intermittently reciprocating cut 
ting-die 22 supported above the block 29, the 
clamping arm Epivoted to the table adjacent 
to the block 29, and means for moving Said 
arm E forward in advance of the cutting die, 
said means consisting essentially of cam 6, 
arm C and connecting-rod D, substantially as 
set forth. 
13. In a cigar bunching machine, the com 
bination with a suitable table provided with 
a perforation 22", and a cutting mechanism 
for severing filler sections, of the intermit 
tently operating grooved ring for supporting 
and carrying a continuous filler to the cutting 
mechanism, a reciprocating arm, and a gravi 
tating cam carried by said arm and adapted 
to intermittently engage with the grooved 
ring, to give it a step by step forward move 
ment, substantially as set forth. 
14. In a cigar bunching machine, the com 
bination of a table having the rotatable 
grooved ring, the oscillating arm supported 
from the table, a gravitating cam carried by 
said arm and adapted to engage and move the 
ring intermittently, and means for regulating 
the time of engagement of the cam and conse 
quent movement of the ring, substantially as 
herein set forth. 
15. In a cigar bunching machine, the com 
bination of a table having the grooved ring 
10, the oscillating arm 15, carrying the gravi 
tating pawl 18, and the adjustable tripping 
flange 19, on the table for regulating the in 
termittent movement of said ring, substan 
tially as set forth. 
16. In a cigar bunching machine, the com 
75 
9o 
95 
too 
O 
II5 
125 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
6 
500,020 
bination of a table having the grooved ring 
10, the oscillating arm 15, the pivoted gravity 
pawl 18 carried by said arm and provided 
with the tripping pin d, the adjustable trip 
ping flange 19, and means for operating the 
arm 15, whereby the ring 10 is intermittently 
rotated, as herein set forth. 
17. In a cigar bunching machine the com 
bination of a suitable table having a perfora 
tion 22", the grooved ring 10, a reciprocating 
cutting die supported above said table, the 
receiving die 34, supported in the sleeve 36 
below the table, and the camA for operating 
the cutting die 22, and receiving die 36 in 
unison, substantially as herein set forth. 
18. In a cigar bunching machine, the com 
bination with a table provided with a perfora 
tion 22, the grooved ring providing means 
for feeding the filler thereto, and a recipro 
cating cutting-die adapted to feed the filler 
through said perforation, of the receiving die 
34, supported upon the sliding rod 35, which 
is journaled in the sleeve 36, and provided 
with an anti-friction roller 37 on its lower 
end, and a calm A for operating the same in 
..unison with the reciprocating cutting-die, as 
herein set forth. 
19. In a cigar bunching machine, the com 
bination of the arms 9 and 67, the adjustable 
spring lug 66 on the arm 67, and the apron 
supported between the arms, witfi the apron 
- rolling arms 38 provided with a cam 65, the 
lug 66 being adapted to engage with the cam 
65 for drawing the apron taut at the end of 
the movement, substantially as herein set 
20. In a cigar bunching machine, the mold, 
the mold moving mechanism consisting essen 
tially of the supporting slide 46, provided with 
plun 
-rack teeth 45, in combination with the 
ger the sectional rod 43 united by means of 
forth. 
- 
O, 
IS 
25 
35 
55 
21. In a cigar bunching machine, the mold 45 
the bolt and spring and provided with the 
pawl 44, and a driving crank 42, substantially 
as specified. 
moving mechanism consisting essentially of 
the mold supporting slide 46, provided with a 
rack 45, in combination with the rod 43, car 
rying pawl 44, and pivoted to the crank arin 
42 which is secured to a rock shaft 40, which 
is suitably supported in boxing 41, and oper 
ated by segmental gearing with the arm 12, 
all substantially as herein set forth. 
22. In a cigar bunching machine, a locking 
mechanism consisting substantially of the 
mold supporting slide 46 provided with recess 
64, the lock arm 60 connected to a tripping 
arm 63 said tripping arm engaging with the 
treadle rod 50, substantially as described. 
23. In combination with the receiving die 
34 of a cigar bunching machine, the bunch 
rolling apron suitably supported above said 
die, the bunch rollers, and the apron gather 
ing arm 70 located just opposite the tip end 
of the die provided with a 'recess 71, substan 
tially as described. 
24. The combination of a suitable support 
ing frame, the bottom circular plate K sup 
ported upon said frame, the top circular plate 
I of smaller diameter than the plate K and 
supported on said plate concentric with it to 
form a track or way, a ring 10 provided with 
a groove 11, and supported in said track or 
way, means for rotating said ring, and means 
for cutting the filler sections located over 
the ring and means for forming them into 
bunches, located beneath the ring substan 
tially as set forth. 
v 
FREDRICK C. MILLER. 
o 
75 
Witnesses: 
, 
H. C. PETERs, 
WM. H. RIBLET. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500120.txt	(No Model.) 
A. FALLS. 
EVENING MECHANISM FOR DRAWING HEADS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 27, 893. 
N 
-est? 
No. 500,120, 
 
 
 
Witnesses 
NVENT OR 
66.7% Sacca 
The Norris PETERs co., photo-Life washington. . c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 500,120. 
Patented June 27, 1893. 
A. FALLS. 
EVENING MECHANISM FOR DRAWING HEADs. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
 
% 2 
 
 
 
Wii Nesses 
cris: 
INVENTOR 
66eva & a (a. 
The ORRIS FEERs C. PHo-liho. WASHINFO. d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE., 
ALONZO FALLS, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
ALEXANDER. G. CUMNOCK, OF SAME PLACE. 
EVENING MECHANISM FOR DRAWN G. HEADS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,120, dated June 27, 1893. 
Application filed February 6, 1893, Serial No. 46,087, (No model.) 
25 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ALONZO FALLs, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Lowell, in the 
county of Middlesex and State of Massachu 
5 Setts, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Evening Mechanisms for 
Drawing-Heads, of which the following is a 
Specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
to . The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved construction and combination of 
parts Constituting a new and useful improve 
ment in evening mechanisms for drawing 
heads, which shall be simple and compact in 
I5 Construction, durable, and reliable in opera 
tion. 
My invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction and combinations of 
parts, all as fully set forth hereinafter, and 
2O first Will be described with reference to the 
accompanying drawings, and then will be par 
ticularly pointed out and clearly defined in 
the claims at the close of this specification 
which form a part hereof. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
a view in side elevation of part of a draw 
ing head with my invention applied thereto, 
enough of the drawing head being shown to 
make clear the relations and operation of my 
3o improved devices. Fig. 2 is a view of the same 
in elevation from the right in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
is a view of the variable speed devices, show 
ing them in vertical central section on the 
line 3-3 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a view in rear 
35 elevation of the yoke. Fig. 4 is a view in 
end elevation of the yoke. Fig. 5 is a view 
thereof in vertical section online 5-5 of Fig. 
4. Fig. 6 is a face view of one of the meas 
uring rods. Fig. 7 is a view thereof in side 
4o elevation. Fig. 8 is a view thereof in hori 
Zontal section on the line 8-8 in Fig. 7. Fig. 
9 is an enlarged view in plan representing the 
gearing by which the drawing rolls are con 
nected with one another. 
At 70 is shown the table of a drawing head, 
at 78, 78, are shown roll stands supported 
thereby, at F, M, 15 and 12 are shown the lower 
rolls supported by the said stands, at F, M, 
159 and 129 are shown the top rolls resting on 
At F are shown fast and loose pulleys on 
5o the said lower rolls. 
45 
65 
At F is the gearing serving to transmit 55 
the lower front roll F receiving around the 
same the driving band whereby the said roll 
is rotated when the band is on the fast pulley. 
motion to rolls M and 12 from roll 15, the lat 
ter being driven as will be explained herein 
after. 
At 76 is shown a stand for supporting the 
calender rolls, the latter being marked 19, 19. 6o 
At 193, 193 are shown the gears whereby the 
said calender rolls are caused to rotate in 
unison. 
At 191 is shown a spur gear on the rear cal 
ender roll. 
At I is shown a large gear meshing with the 
gear 191 and also with the gear F on the 
lower front roll F and thereby serving for the 
transmission of movement from roll F to the 
calender rolls, and at 302 is shown the trum- 7o 
pet whereby the sliver issuing from between 
the front rolls is condensed and guided be 
tween the calender rolls. 
All of the foregoing parts are or may be 
substantially as usual in drawing heads. 
The roll 15 is provided with driving con 
nections embracing variable-speed devices 
which are combined with controlling or gov 
erning devices that are acted upon by the ma 
terial passing through the machine, the said 8o 
controlling or governing devices operating to 
occasion an increase in the speed of rotation 
of the rolls 15, M and 12 when the slivers av 
erage too small or too thin, and the supply of 
material reaching the rear rolls becomes de- 85 
ficient, and to occasion a decrease in the speed 
of rotation of the said rolls 15, Mand12 when 
the slivers average too large or thick and the 
supply of material reaching the rear rolls be 
comes too great. 
The variable-speed devices which I prefer 
to employ, and the preferred connections of 
such devices with roll 15, are such as those 
which are shown in the drawings. In the 
latter, the outer end of the lower roll 15 is 95 
supported by a stand 781 and carries a bevel 
gear 152 meshing with a bevel gear 131 on a 
spindle 13, supported in an upright position 
by a stand 75 and stepped in a bearing formed 
in a transversely placed horizontal stud 73 Ioo 
which is supported in stands 74,74 depending 
from table 70, the said bearing having a cover 
go 
75 
- 
- 
, 
500,120 
75 
At the ends of 95 
O 
731. The spindle 13 has placed thereon a 
sleeve 53 provided with a spline 531 fitted to 
a lofgitudinal groove l32 formed in the spin 
dle, the said sleeve having affixed thereon a 
disk or wheel 532 with its periphery faced 
with leather or other suitable frictional ma 
terial 5321. Two bevel gear wheels 14, 14 are 
mounted on the stud 73 with capacity to turn. 
freely thereon, the said wheels being located 
on opposite sides of the spindle 13 and hav 
ing their inner sides faced with leather or 
other suitable frictional material 141, 141. 
The disk or wheel 532 occupies a position be 
tween these gear wheels 14, 14, with the fric 
tional material 5321 on its periphery in con 
tact with the frictional material 141 covering 
the inner sides of the said wheels 14, 14. One, 
of the said wheels 14, 14, is pressed against 
the periphery of the disk or wheel 532 by a 
spiral spring 54 which surrounds the hub of 
the said wheel 14 and takes bearing at one. 
end against the wheel and at the other end 
against the adjacent stand 74. The other 
wheel 14 may be similarly pressed if desired. 
The teeth of both of the wheels 14 mesh with 
the teeth of an intermediately placed bevel 
gear 182 mounted on a suitably driven shaft 
18, which in the drawings is shown placed in 
an inclined position and provided at its up 
er end with a bevel gear 181 that meshes. 
with a bevel gear 192 on the rear calender' 
roll 19. Thereby the said wheels 14, 14 are 
driven in opposite directions to each other, 
but at the same rate of speed. By the con 
tact of the frictional material 5321 on the 
periphery of disk or wheel 532 with the fric 
tional material 141 on the sides of wheels 14, 
14, movement of rotation is communicated 
to spindle 13, and such movement is trans 
mitted to rolls 15, M and 12 through the de 
scribed connections. 
The governing or controlling devices con 
nect with the sleeve 53 by means of a loose 
collar 21 which is mounted on the exterior of 
the sleeve between fixed collars 533, 534 on 
the sleeve, the said collar 21 having trun 
nions 211 that enter slots in the arms of the 
fork provided on one end of a lever 114. The 
said lever is moved on its pivot 1141 by the 
governing or controlling devices, and carries 
with it the sleeve, moving the latter length 
Wise of the spindle 13 so as to slide the disk 
or wheel 532 nearer to the axis of rotation of 
the wheels 14, 14 and reduce the speed trans 
mitted through spindle 13 and the described 
connections to the rolls 15, M and 12, or far 
ther from the said axis so as to increase the 
said speed. As the said wheels 14, 14, are 
turned in opposite directions at a fixed rate 
of speed by the driving connections described 
above, they communicate by frictional con 
tact to the disk or wheel 532, rotation at a rate 
of speed which is proportional to the distance 
from their axis of rotation at which the said 
disk or wheel bears against their inner sides, 
The governing or controlling devices which 
move the lever 114 as the material passing to 
the rolls varies in amount are as-follows: At 
71 is a stand secured to table 70 at a slight 
distance to the rear of the position of the real 
roll 12. The cross-piece at the top of this 
stand has a succession of rounded crests 711, 
711 formed thereon at slight distances apart, 
and over this series of crests is extended a 
band or ribbon 50 of flexible, non-extensible 
material such as steel, which at the right-hand 
end thereof in Fig.2 is connected to the stand 
71 and at the left-hand end thereof, after pass 
ing partly around the pulley 10, is connected 
to one arm of lever 114, aforesaid. The pull 
sley 10 is journaled to a lug extending later 
ally from a yoke 72 that is held to stand 71 
by rivets 712, or screws. A series of so-called 
measuring rods 20, 20 is sustained in a posi 
tion closely adjacent.to, the rear roll 12. The 
feet of these, rods rest upon the top of the 
points intermediate the 
: steel ribbon 50 at 
crests 711,711 of the stand 71, the lower ends 
of the said rods being placed between bars 
721,721 cast upon the yoke 72, one of such bars 
standing on each side of the series of rods. 
The said lower ends are spaced apart and held 
in proper position over the spaces intermediate 
the crests 711, 711, by projections 202, 202, 
cast on their opposite edges. 
the series of rods these projections contact 
with the interior vertical faces of the stand, 
but intermediate such faces the projections 
of adjacent rods contact with one another. 
The heads 20, 20 of the rods have vertical slots 
203,203 with tapering passages. 204,204 lead 
ing thereto, and through these passages and 
slots pass the respective slivers on their way 
to the rolls. The distance, from the bight of 
the rear rolls to the slots in the measuring 
rods is made less than the length of the staple 
of the slivers, preferably, in order that the 
slivers may not become pulled apart or drawn 
out. The yoke has its top bar formed with a 
depending lip or flange 722 against which rest 
the forward sides of the upper ends of the 
measuring rods as they are drawn forward by 
the friction of the moving slivers. On the 
said flange are provided guides 723,723, which 
enter the slots 203 in the upper ends of the 
rods 20. In the drawings each measuring rod 
is formed on the forward side thereof with a 
projection extending beneath the flange 722, 
the upper surface of the said projection form 
ing substantially a continuation of the curved 
bottom of the slot in the rod. When the 
slivers are passing through the passages, and 
slots in the measuring rods, and under the 
flange 722, the bulk of the cross-section of each 
sliver depresses the corresponding measuring 
rod so as to cause the foot thereof to bend the 
steel ribbon down into the space between ad 
jacent crests 711, 711. As the ribbon is: thus 
bent by the rods the lever 114 is drawn upon 
so as to hold the disk or wheel 532 in a posi 
tion between the wheels 14, 14 which is de 
pendent upon the extent to which the ribbon 
is drawn upon in consequence of being bent. 
The parts are proportioned and arranged, as 
 
Od 
c 
: II5 
25 
13o 
25 
3o p 
35 
45 
 
  
 
500,120 
75 
will be understood, so as that so long as sliv 
ers of the desired given bulk continue to pass 
to the rolls, the rear rolls 15, M and 12 will be 
driven at a predetermined rate of speed. It 
Will be obvious that when an increase takes 
place in one or more of the slivers so as to oc 
casion an increase in the average bulk thereof, 
the corresponding rod or rods will be de 
pressed to a greater extent by the increased 
Volume of material passing through their slots 
and passages, thereby taking up more of the 
ribbon and drawing upon the lever 114 so as 
to shift the disk or wheel 532 inwardly be 
tWeen the wheels 14, 14, that is toward the 
axis of rotation of the latter, and causing a 
proportionate reduction in the speed of the 
rolls 15, M and 12. When a decrease in one 
or more of the slivers takes place so as to de 
crease the average bulk of the slivers the cor 
responding rod or rods will be permitted to 
rise or yield to the upward pressure of the 
ribbon, and the latter will be permitted to 
straighten somewhat and enable the disk or 
wheel 532 to be moved outwardly from the 
axis of rotation of wheels 14, 14, by the action 
of the spring 1142, thereby causing. a propor 
tionate increase in the speed of the rolls 15, M. 
and 12. 
By preference those parts of the governing 
or controlling devices which contact with the 
material passing through the machine are 
placed as shown in the drawings so as that 
the said material must meet and pass such 
parts before entering between the drawing 
rolls. It is advantageous thus to place the 
evening devices on the back instead of the 
front of the drawing head as formerly usual. 
Formerly, in most instances the trumpet 
through which the sliver passes on its way 
from the drawing rolls to the calender rolls 
was taken as the instrumentality for operat 
ing the evening mechanism. The sliverpass 
ing from the drawing rolls through the trum 
pet moves at about six times as high a rate 
of speed as it does at the point where it en 
ters the drawing rolls, any uneveness in the 
sliver has an opporturnity to pass before the 
evening devices have an opportunity to pre 
vent it, and the sliver is drawn down to such 
an extent that a comparatively great differ 
(ence in it must exist before the evener will 
work. By locating the devices which contact 
with the material in such position as that the 
latter must meet and pass the same before it 
enters between the rolls, the different parts 
of the evening mechanism are afforded oppor 
tunity to perform their office before the un 
even part of the material has passed the draw 
ing rollers, this result being facilitated by the 
slower travel of the material at this point in 
the machine. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination with the rolls of a draw 
ing-head, and roll-actuating mechanism em 
bracing variable speed devices, of governing 
or controlling devices comprising a flexible 
band or ribbon connected with such variable 
speed devices, and operating the latter by be 
ing itself drawn upon in the direction of its 
length in consequence of being flexed and a 
movable sliver guide acting upon the band or 
ribbon to occasion a flexure thereof propor 
tionate to the size of the sliver and operating 
thereby to determine the speed transmitted 
to the rolls, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with the rolls of a draw 
ing-head, and roll-actuating mechanism en 
bracing variable speed devices, of governing 
or controlling devices comprising a flexible 
band or ribbon connected with such variable 
speed devices, and operating the latter by be 
ing itself drawn upon in the direction of its 
length in consequence of being flexed and a . 
series of movable pieces separately acted upon 
by individual slivers and acting upon the 
band or ribbon to produce flexures therein 
and operating thereby to determine the speed 
transmitted to the rolls, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with the variable speed 
devices, of governing or controlling devices 
comprising a flexible band or, ribbon con 
nected with such variable speed devices, a 
stand having a series of crests over which 
said band or ribbon extends, and a series of 
movable pieces separately acted upon by in 
dividual slivers and acting upon the band or 
ribbon at points intermediate the said crests, 
substantially as described. . 
4. The combination, with the variable speed 
devices, of governing or controlling devices 
comprising a flexible band or ribbon con 
nected with such variable speed devices, a 
stand having a series of crests over which 
said band or ribbon extends, a yoke having a 
depending flange, and a series of movable 
pieces separately acted upon by individual 
slivers and having surfaces between which 
and the said flange the said slivers are com 
pressed, the said pieces acting upon the band 
or ribbon at points intermediate the said 
crests, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with variable speed de 
vices, of governing or controlling devices com 
prising a flexible band or ribbon connected 
with such variable speed devices, and operat 
ing the latter by being itself drawn upon in 
the direction of its length in consequence of 
being flexed and a series of movable pieces 
serving as guides for individual slivers and 
acting upon the band or ribbon as changes 
occur in the sizes of the slivers to determine 
the speed transmitted, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. The combination, with variable speed de 
vices, of governing or controlling devices com 
prising a flexible band or ribbon connected 
with such variable-speed devices, a stand hav 
ing a series of crests over which said band or 
ribbon is passed, a yoke having a depending 
flange, and a series of movable pieces serving 
as guides for individual slivers and having 
surfaces between which and the said flange 
the slivers are compressed, the said pieces 
95 
OO 
to 5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
40 
55 
 
500,120 
2. 
acting upon the band or ribbon at points in 
termediate the said crests, substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. The combination, with the rolls of a draw 
ing head, and roll actuating mechanism em 
bracing variable speed devices comprising a 
pair of driving wheels, means for rotating 
them at the same rate of speed but in oppo 
site directions, an intermediate driven disk 
or wheel in frictional contact with the said 
wheels, a spindle in operative connection with 
the rolls, and on which said disk or wheel is 
splined, and a lever operatively connected 
with said disk or wheel for moving it on said 
spindle, of governing or controlling devices 
O 
comprising a band or ribbon connected with 
the said lever, and a series of movable pieces 
serving as guides for the individual slivers, 
the said movable pieces acting upon the band, 
or ribbon as they are moved by changes oc- 20 
curring in the sizes of the slivers to move the 
lever and shift the intermediate disk or wheel 
and thereby vary the speed transmitted to 
the rolls, substantially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 25 
ALONZO FALLS. 
Witnesses: . 
MARY CAVERLY, 
SAML. G. STEPHENS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500220.txt	No Model.) 
No. 500,220. 
C. F. SEARCH. 
TREAD POWER 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
Patented June 27, 1893. 
 
 
| 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 500,220, 
% 3. 
III 
C. F. SEARCH, 
TREAD POWER. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
Patented June 27, 1893, 
 
 
 
IL R 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
UIHATO 
: 
 
 
 
(?) 17 
 
 
C. F. SEARCH, 
TREAD POWER. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented June 27, 1893. 
QUEHHI 
\=# -- 
NA 
SK//// 
PT2. 
V 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 500,220, 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CASPER F. SEARCH, OF APPLETON, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR TO THE APPLETON 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TREAD - POWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,220, dated June 27, 1893. 
Application filed February 6, 1892, Serial No. 420,587, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
To all, whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, CASPER F. SEARCH, of 
Appleton, Wisconsin, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Tread-Pow 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the construction of horse tread pow 
ers, and particularly to certain improvements 
in the construction of the frame so that there 
Will be no sagging of the bed or separation 
of the parts. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide an improved bearing for the main shaft 
for horse tread powers whereby the main 
shaft is prevented from binding, and the 
hanger for this bearing is so constructed as 
to furnish a track or bearing for the travelers 
of the apron. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of the tread power with 
my invention applied thereto. Fig. 2 is an 
enlarged detail showing the posts, the side 
sill of the bed and the ground sill broken 
a Way. Fig. 3 is a view at right angles to the 
view point of Fig. 2, and showing also in per 
spective a detail view of a metal tenon. Fig. 
4 is an enlarged detail showing an elevation 
of the hanger and bearing, part of the frame 
Work, the apron and travelers. Fig. 5 is a 
view looking in the direction of the arrow of 
the parts shown in Fig. 4. Figs. 6 to 9 inclu 
sive are detail views of the bearing and 
hanger. 
In the drawings, A indicates the ground 
sill of the tread power frame; B one of the 
upright posts thereof; C a stub post bolted 
to the post B; D a side sill, and E a transverse 
sill which is channeled on its edges to receive 
the through-bolts F, G which pass through 
the side sill of the bed and the stub post of 
the frame. 
H represents a metal tenon of L-shaped 
form having a bolt aperture h through which 
the through-bolt G passes. The post C is mor 
tised on its inner edge to receive the upright 
member of the L-Shaped tenon and the hori 
Zontal member thereof supports the side sill 
D, the latter being preferably mortised on its 
lower edge to receive the tenon, whereby the 
bed is prevented from endwise movement with 
reference to the posts. The through bolt G 
supports the transverse sill E, and by tight 
ening the nuts of these bolts the several parts 
of the frame are rigidly clamped together. 
The metal tenon, therefore, not only serves 
the purpose of furnishing a vertical support 
for the side sill, but it serves to prevent end 
wise movement of the bed with reference to 
the posts and furnishes a much stronger and 
secure construction than has heretofore been 
attained. By its use also all danger of split 
ting the posts or side sill is avoided. 
In order to secure a tight and reliable joint 
between the upright posts and the side sills, 
I further provide as clearly shown in Fig. 3 a. 
metal thimble I, which is apertured for the 
passage of the bolts F, J and is fitted into 
sockets in the posts C and side timbers D 
and K. 
It is well known that any lateral strain 
tending to separate the parts of two timbers 
which are bolted together soon wears upon 
the wood so that a tight and Secure joint is 
impossible. To obviate this I employ the 
metal thimble or bushing before described. 
Now when the timbers shrink they can be 
drawn tightly together by means of the nuts 
on the bolts and the metal thimble or Washer 
is forced tightly into the wood, the timbers be 
ing drawn up thereon to compensate for Such 
shrinkage. All danger of splitting the parts 
is avoided by the use of this metal thimble. 
It is well known that in the operation of 
horse tread powers, the frames of which are 
made of wood, slight shrinkage of the timbers 
or sagging of the frame will tend to throw the 
main shaft out of line, causing it to bind. To 
obviate this objection, I employ a rocking or 
ball bearing for the main shaft and hang Said 
bearing within a case of peculiar construction, 
said case having a flange which serves as a 
track or upper bearing for the travelers of 
the apron. 
In the drawings, 10 represents the shaft 
which passes through a sleeve 12 having a 
globular, central portion 13 with an oil duct 
14 in its upper part. This sleeve may be 
formed integrally or divided longitudinally 
if desired. Its rounded portion is fitted into 
'a cup or socket formed within a case 17 hav 
ing screw or bolt apertures 17 whereby it is 
secured in a vertical position to the frame of 
95 
IOO 
I. ? 
25 
30 
35 
45 
SO 
 
alignment, notwithstanding any shrinking or 
sagging of the frame timbers, but it also in 
sures the proper engagement of the gear as 
before described. 
I claim 
1. In a horse tread power frame, the com 
bination, with the upright posts and the side 
timbers, of a metal thimble mortised into said 
posts and timbers, respectively, and aper 
tured for the passage of the through-bolts, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a horse tread power, the combination, 
with the driving shaft thereof, of a rocking 
or ball bearing for said shaft, a case wherein 
said bearing is suspended, said case having 
an integral flange to form an upper support 
or track for the apron travelers, substantially 
as described. 
AO 
CASPER F. SEARCH. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
A. B. WHITMAN, 
JACOB CRIDER. 
2 
500,220 
the tread power. I employ the annular clamp 
ing ring 18 which fits within the flange sur 
rounding the opening of the hanger case 17 
and which is secured thereto by the bolts 19. 
The case 17 is provided with an offset angu 
lar flange 17 which forms a track or upper 
support for the travelers. 15 of the apron. 
The shaft 10 has the gear 11 thereon which 
gear enmeshes with the rack sections 16 of the 
apron. It will be observed that the travelers 
bear upon the flange 17 of the case 17 in 
which the shaft bearing is supported. The 
rack teeth, therefore, are held firmly in mesh 
With the pinion on the power shaft, and thus 
the certain engagement of the gears is in 
sured. This feature is. of great importance 
in the practical operation of horse tread pow 
ers, because should the cogs slip or ride upon 
each other the apron is likely to run away 
and injure the animal. This hanger case 
with its ball bearing therefore serves not only 
the purpose of securing the shaft in proper 
2 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500320.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 500,320, 
H. E. DENNIS. 
MOLD PRESS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 27, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
My 
It 
. 
T - T - 
g). El 
S. 
Ng) 
ZY 
e Fease I 
y 
O 
4. 
6. 
1. 
Hi?tosses 
c24- 
-(7%24.2%24, 
Z7 
- 
as A 
y 70s Affrpeys, 
Ae/27%A. Zervas 
Ipepfar 
THE Norris PETERs ca. Photo- 
foN.C, C 
 
(No Model.) 
H. E. DENNIS. 
MOLD PRESS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 500,320. 
Patented June 27, l893, 
A 2.g3. 
A2.2. 
 
 
 
O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
As 
AA 
 
 
 
E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY E. DENNIS, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK. 
MOLD PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,320, dated June 27, 1893. 
Application filed June 20, 1892, Serial No. 437,395, (No model.) 
O. 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
To all, whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Buf 
falo, in the county of Erie and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Mold 
Es of which the following is a specifica 
O. 
This invention relates to mold presses; and 
it has for its object to provide an improved 
mold press by means of which snap-flask or 
bench molding may be accomplished more 
rapidly and with less expenditure of power 
than by means now in common use. 
To this end the main and primary object of 
the invention is to provide an improved press 
by means of which the operator is enabled to 
apply a concentrated pressure to the mold 
and remove the same quickly, which greatly 
facilitates forming molds. 
With these and many other objects in view, 
which will readily appear as the nature of the 
invention is better understood, the same con 
sists in the novel construction, combination 
and arrangement of parts hereinafter more 
fully described, illustrated and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figure 1. 
is a top plan view of a mold press constructed 
in accordance with this invention. Fig. 2 is 
a vertical longitudinal sectional view of the 
same on the line 2-2 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
front elevation, closed. Fig. 4 is a detail sec 
tional view of the top joint. Fig. 5 is a simi 
lar view of the connection with one of the 
sliding collars. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings:- 
AA represent opposite vertical uprights aris 
ing from the opposite bases or sills B, and 
connected at their upper ends by the con 
necting bar C, to complete an upright rect 
angular frame in which are mounted the vari 
ous parts of the press, it being, of course, un 
derstood that the said frame may be con 
structed of connected piping or other suit 
able frame pieces. Pivotally suspended from 
the bar or rod C and working within the rect 
angular frame are the parallel upper lever 
members D, which, where piping is employed, 
may be screwed into the coupling collars d, 
loosely mounted upon said bar C, while the 
lower ends of said lever members D, are 
screwed into the lower coupling collars d, piv 
otally mounted upon the joint or hinge rod 
| E, connecting the lower ends of said lever 
Be it known that I, HENRY E. DENNIS, a members. Loosely mounted upon the joint 
or hinge rod E, are the threaded coupling 
collars F, into which are adjustably screwed 
the upper threaded ends of the lower adjust 
able lever members G. The lower adjustable 
lever members G are reversely threaded at 
their opposite ends as at g, and are adapted 
to have the lower ends thereof adjustably en 
gage the coupling collars g', which collars 
are loosely mounted upon the sliding follower 
bar H. The said follower bar H has the op 
posite ends thereof connected to the opposite 
sliding guides h, embracing and sliding upon 
the opposite frame pieces or standards A, so 
that as the joint or hinge of the lever mem 
bers, which comprise a knee joint, is moved 
in and out, the said follower bar slides up and 
down to carry the follower head I upon and 
above the flask being operated upon. The 
said follower head I is loosely connected to 
said follower bar, and the upper movement 
of the same, or the opening of the press is 
limited by means of the stop collar J, adjust 
ably mounted upon one of the standards A. 
In order to provide for the adjustment of the 
follower for flasks of different heights and 
therefore regulate the movement of the knee 
joint, the lower adjustable lever members G. 
are provided with sprocket wheels K over 
which passes the endless beltic, which provides 
for the simultaneous adjustment of the said 
lower members in their respective coupling 
collars, and therefore the consequent adjust 
ment of the press. 
An operating forked lever L. extends to the 
front of the press and is loosely connected to 
or mounted upon the joint or hinge rod E, and 
has one of the fork arms continued into an 
extension l, projecting to the rear of the frame 
and accommodating an adjustable weightL', 
which, after the follower has been forced 
down upon the flask, breaks the hinge or joint 
and opens the press automatically. The han 
dle portion of the lever L at the front of the 
press is held in any desired elevation by 
means of the front brace bars M, pivotally 
connected to said lever and the opposite ad 
justable clamps in, adjustably secured to the 
opposite upper lever members D. The move 
ments of the several press devices actuating 
the follower head will be readily apparent, 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
 
 
500,320 
- 
Connected to the opposite standards A, a 
slight distance above the sills B, are the op 
posite side pieces N, extending to the front 
of the machine and connected to the short 
front standards or uprights O, which are con 
nected at their upper ends by the front trans 
verse track supporting rod or bed P, upon 
which rest the front ends of the rails Q, form 
ing a track upon which travels the movable 
truck R, upon which the flask r, is placed to 
be moved directly under the follower head, 
and removed when the mold is completed. 
The rear portion of the rails of the track rests 
upon the movable supporting bar S, having 
the ends connected to the opposite sliding 
spring supported collars S, moving uppn the 
opposite standards A, and normally held 
against the supporting lugs T, adjustably 
mounted upon the said opposite standards, 
and provided with the inwardly projecting 
supporting ledgest adapted to project under 
the sides of the truck. Springs U mounted 
over the opposite standards and bearing un 
der said collars s, hold said collars in such 
position, so that when the follower head is 
brought down upon the flask, the truck is 
forced down upon the supporting lugs which 
receive the entire pressure of the press and 
consequently relieves the bed or track of the 
press from undue pressure. 
In operation the flask, or either part there 
of, is placed on the truck R and filled with 
loose sand to be packed as will be readily un 
derstood. The truck is now moved upon the 
track to bring the flask under the follower 
head. The lever L is now lowered, rapidly 
at first, thereby gradually closing the hinge 
or joint, until the angle of the lever members 
is finally reduced and the leverage is com 
pleted, it being readily seen that such a move 
ment provides for a gradually increasing 
leverage to secure aheavy pressure upon the 
mold. As the pressure is received by the 
truck, the track yields and transfers the strain 
to the lugs. T, as already noted, whereby all 
lower parts of the press are relieved from 
pressure and the flask rigidly supported. 
When the pressing is completed, an upward 
motion of the lever releases the follower and 
the weight L' returns it to its highest posi 
tion. The springs U release the truck from 
the lugs, and the truck is then withdrawn. 
Stops W connected to each end of the rod 
E prevent the joint from going beyond the 
standards A, which said stops engage when 
the joint members are straightened out to op 
erate the press, as will be at once apparent. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is- 
1. In a molding machine, a vertical rect 
angular frame, knee jointed levers suspended 
within said frame, means for simultaneously 
adjusting the lowermost of said levers, a ver 
tically movable follower connected with said 
lowermost levers, and a movable bed, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
. 
2. In a mold press, a vertical rectangular 
frame, upper lever members pivotally sus 
pended from the top of said frame, lower le 
ver members pivotally and adjustably con 
nected with the lower ends of said upper mem 
bers, a sliding follower bar pivotally and ad 
justably connected with said lower members, 
a weighted lever connected to the upper le 
ver, members and to the joint of both lever 
members, and a flask bed, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In a mold press, a vertical rectangular 
frame, upper lever members pivotally sus 
pended within said frame, lower lever mem 
bers pivotally and adjustably connected at 
the lower ends of said upper members to form 
a knee joint, a sliding follower bar sliding 
upon said frame and connected with said 
lower members, a vertically moving follower 
connected with said follower bar, a weighted 
lever connected with the joint of said lever 
members, a flask bed, and means for yield 
ingly supporting said bed substantially as 
set forth. 
4. In a mold press, opposite vertical up 
rights connected at their upper ends to form 
a rectangular frame, upper lever members 
pivotally suspended from the top of said 
frame, a joint or hinge rod connecting the 
lower ends of said lever members, a sliding fol 
lower bar moving within said frame, threaded . 
coupling collars loosely connected with said 
joint or hinge rod and said follower bar, lower 
hinge members adjustably engaging said 
coupling collars, means for simultaneously 
adjusting said lower hinge members an oper 
ating lever connected with said hinge rod, 
means for overbalancing said lever, and a flask 
bed, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a mold press, the frame, upper lever 
members pivotally suspended within said 
frame, a hinge rod connecting the lower ends 
of said lever members, opposite guides mov 
ing on the frame, a sliding follower bar con 
nected with said guides, threaded coupling 
collars loosely mounted upon said hinge rod 
and said follower bar, lower lever members 
having reversely threaded ends engaging the 
collars on the hinge rod and follower bar re 
spectively, sprocket wheels mounted on said 
lower lever members, an endless chain pass 
ing over said sprocket wheels, means for mov 
ing said lever members, and a bed, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. In a mold press, a vertical rectangular 
frame, upper lever members pivotally sus 
pended within said frame and connected at 
their lower ends, lower lever members jointed 
with the connected ends of said upper mem 
bers means for simultaneously adjusting said 
lower lever members, sliding guides moving 
on said frame, a transverse follower bar con 
nected with said guides and pivotally with 
the lower ends of the lower lever members, 
an adjustable stop arranged above one of said 
guides, a forked lever pivotally connected 
with the joint of said lever members and 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
95 
Od 
IO 
I 25 
I30 
500,320 
porting bar at thefrontend of said frame, a ver 
tically yielding supporting bar sliding upon 
said opposite standards, supporting springs 
arranged beneath said yielding supporting 
bar, a track resting upon said fixed and yield 
ing supporting bars, supporting lugs adjust 
ably secured to said standard over said yield 
ing supporting bar, a flask truck moving upon 
said track, and the follower, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
25 
HENRY E. DENNIS. 
Witnesses: 
- 
ALEX. SHEPHERD, 
E. W. EULL. 
provided with an extension arm, an adjust 
able Weight mounted upon said arm, brace 
bars pivotally connected with said lever and 
adjustably pivoted on the upper lever mem 
bers, and a flask bed, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. In a mold press, the combination of a 
vertical rectangular frame, the follower mov 
ing in said frame, a yielding track arranged 
within the frame below the follower, support 
ing lugs adjustably secured to the frame 
above said track, and a flask truck moving 
over said track and adapted to rest upon said 
lugs under pressure, substantially asset forth. 
8. In a mold press, the vertical rectangu 
lar frame having the opposite vertical stand 
ards, an extension bed frame connected with 
the lower ends of said standards, a fixed sup 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500420.txt	(No Model.) 
W. B. & S. C. PEOPLES & T. J. COX. 
CAR COUPLING, 
--- 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 500,420. 
 
Patented June 27, 1893. 
  
 
IIT Tigriff 
REEE 
 
s U 
 
 
. . 
. 
: 
|UI -ts 
2See 
Fs se 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
a 6 
 
 
 
  
: 
 
63 
WAZYASSAS 
(24 6-4-4 
E.- : CA 
7:23:52, 
(No Model.) 
W. B. & S. C. PEOPLES & T. J. COX. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 500.420, 
CAR COURLING, 
Patented June 27, 1893. 
ae 
W 
\ S 
s 
Elia 
Z2. 
 
   
 
 
 
 
?) 
NN 
Y 
C.LIHO, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM B. PEOPLES AND SAMUEL C. PEOPLES, OF MILLIGAN, AND THOMAS 
J. COX, OF JOHNSON CITY, TENNESSEE. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,420, dated June 27, 1893. 
Application filed September 22, 1892, Serial No. 446,629, (No model.) 
25 
pin is drawn upward, held and released to ef 
fect the coupling and uncoupling of the cars. 
Referring to the drawings, the numeral 1 
indicates two cars of the ordinary descrip 
tion and 2 the draw heads thereof which 55 
have the usual flaring openings, in front, and 
which are secured to the lower frame work of 
the cars in any convenient manner. The 
said draw heads are hollow, and within the 
rear portion of each is located a block 3 hav- 6o 
ing an angular recess in front, provided at 
its apex with a bearing, for the rear portion of 
a coupling link 4, which swings in such bear 
ing, pivotally. The outer portion or end of 
each link, is beveled as indicated so that 65 
when two opposing links meet as the two cars 
come together, they will automatically ride 
one over the other so as to pass into the 
coupling heads in proper position to operate 
the coupling pin holding devices, and permit 7o 
the coupling pins to drop into the proper en 
gaging position. 
The draw heads are provided with vertical 
extensions 5, which are hollow and slotted 
longitudinally on one side, and at the base 75 
of these extensions and diametrically below 
the same the draw heads are provided with 
apertures for the passage of the coupling pins 
6. These are formed with right angled offsets 
7 at their upper ends, which pass outward 8o 
through the slots in the extensions when the 
pins are in place, permitting the pins to play 
freely up and down in the extensions, with 
out turning. The upper end of each offset is 
provided with an aperture to which is secured 85 
the lower end of a chain 8, the upper end of 
which is attached to the end of a lever arm 
9, integral with or secured to a transverse 
rod 9 mounted in bearings 10 secured to the 
front of the car. The bearing at one side has 9o 
a lateral offset or projection 11 at one side 
and the rod is capable of a slight longitudinal 
movement, transversely across the front of 
the car for the purpose hereinafter explained. 
At each end the said rod is formed or pro- 95 
vided with a lever arm 12, by means of which 
it may be turned to elevate the coupling pins 
through the medium of the connecting chains. 
The offset of each coupling pin, directly be 
low the aperture is shouldered to form an Ioo 
I5 which form a part of this specification. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, WILLIAM B. PEOPLES 
and SAMUEL C. PEOPLES, residing at Milli 
gan, in the county of Carter, and THOMAS J. 
5 COX, residing at Johnson City, Washington 
County, Tennessee, citizens of the United 
States, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Car-Couplings; and we do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
Io exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the figures of reference marked thereon, 
This invention relates to improvements in 
that class of car couplers in which the coup 
ling mechanism is operated, automatically, to 
connect the cars, when two come together, so 
20 as to prevent the necessity of the entrance of 
a person between the cars, when coupling the 
same, and to permit the cars to be uncoupled 
from either side, without such entrance be 
tween them. 
Our invention has for its objects to provide 
improved mechanism to effect such auto 
matic coupling; to provide for holding the 
coupling pins in position to be dropped, auto 
matically, by the action of the coupling links 
3o when two cars meet, and to provide for ad 
justing the height of the coupling links, so as 
to adapt them to cars having their draw 
heads set at different elevations as more fully 
hereinafter specified. These objects we attain 
35 by the means illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of a 
car, showing the mechanism for adjusting 
the coupling link to the proper elevation. 
4o Fig. 2 represents a side elevation showing 
portions of two coupled or connected cars. 
Fig. 3 represents a side elevation of portions 
of two cars showing the coupling mechanism 
in section and in a position about to be coll 
45 pled. Fig. 4 represents a longitudinal verti 
cal sectional view of the coupling mechanism 
detached, with the parts in a connected or 
coupled position, and Fig. 5 a detached per 
spective view showing a portion of the rod 
5o and one of the levers by which the coupling 
 
500,420 
O 
interlocking abutment, which will operate 
with the automatic coupling mechanism to 
hold the pin down, when the cars are coupled 
so as to prevent accidental displacement and 
the consequent uncoupling of the cars. 
The numeral 14 indicates two angle levers, 
one fulcrumed in a recess or slot in each 
draw head, at a point indicated by the nu 
meral li. The said levers near the fulcrum 
bearings, and just in front of the same, are 
provided with short parallel, right angled ex 
tensions 16, 17, the upper one of which is 
shorter than the lower for the purpose here 
inafter explained. The lower angular arms 
of the levers extend backward and are shoul 
dered at 18 and surrounded by spiral springs 
19 which bear against the shoulder, and an 
abutment 20 on the car frame, through which 
the lower arm of each lever passes, so as to hold 
the lever in a normal position and return it 
automatically to the same, in coupling and 
uncoupling. The extension 17 serves as a sup 
port to the lower end of the coupling pin to 
hold it in an elevated position when the cars 
are to be coupled as indicated in Fig. 1 of 
the drawings, and the extension 16 to lock 
against the shoulder on the coupling pin to 
hold it down when dropped and the couplings 
connected. 
The numerals 21 indicate two levers which 
are provided with grooved eccentric heads, 
and which are fulcrumed near each side of 
the end of the car, at about the points indi 
cated by the numerals 22. The heads of these 
levers are peripherally grooved as indicated 
and in the grooves of the opposite levers are 
secured the ends of a chain 23 passing through 
the draw head, and under the link thereof, 
so that when the arm of either lever is turned 
inwardly the chain will be drawn upon so as 
to elevate the link, the other lever remaining 
stationary, as the chain will pull, from a point 
directly back of and in line with the draft of 
the chain, affording no leverage by which to 
move it, thus providing for the elevation of 
the link from either side of the car, so as to 
adjust the link in entering the opposite draw 
head. 
In operation, the pins of the draw heads of 
the respective cars are drawn up, and held as 
shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings. 
When the cars have properly approached 
each other and the draw heads are about 
coming together, the links will meet, pass 
each other, and throw back the angle levers, 
dropping the couplingpins through the links. 
On the forward movements of one of the cars 
the levers, will assume a normal position 
causing their shorter extensions to abut 
against the locking shoulders of the pins and 
lock them against accidental displacement. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
To guide the links in entering the draw heads, 
the eccentrically operated lever at either 
side is employed to regulate the elevation of 
the link without requiring the entrance of a 
person between the cars. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination in a car coupler hav 
ing coupling heads having upright, longitudi 
nally slotted extensions the coupling pins 
having lateral offsets extending through the 
slots thereof the bars mounted in bearings at 
the front of the cars having lever arms con 
nected with the offsets of the coupling pins 
and lever arms at each end, one of which is 
adapted to engage the offset of the bearing 
to hold the coupling pin in an elevated posi 
tion substantially as specified. 
2. The combination with the draw heads 
with the coupling pins having shouldered off 
sets of the angle levers having parallel ex 
tensions at their upper ends, and springs at 
their lower arms, the shorter extensions serv 
ing to hold the pin in position when dropped, 
substantially as specified. 
3. The combination with the draw heads, 
of the angularly recessed blocks, fitted there 
in and the links pivoted in bearings in said 
blocks and having their bearings in said 
blocks and having their forward ends, bev 
eled so as to ride over each other in entering 
the draw heads, substantially as and for the 
purposes specified. 
4. The combination with the draw heads 
and the links pivoted therein of the eccentri 
cally headed levers and the chains secured 
thereto and passing under the links of the 
respective heads whereby the elevation of 
the links may be adjusted substantially as 
specified. 
5. The combination with draw head hav 
ing vertical slotted extensions of the coupling 
pins, the transverse rods and elevating lever 
arms, the angle levers and their supporting 
and locking extensions, and the spiral springs 
whereby they are held and returned to nor 
mal position substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of witnesses. 
WILLIAM B. PEOPLES. 
SAMUEL C. PEOPLES. 
THOMAS J. COX. 
Witnesses to signatures of William B. Peo 
ples and Samuel C. Peoples: 
Witnesses to signature of Thomas J. Cox: 
PIERCE. W. JULIAN, 
JOHN IK. SMITH, 
SHIPLEY BRASHEARs, 
E. G. BRASHEARS. 
75 
95 
OO 
o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500520.txt	(No Model.) 
E. P. WETMORE, 
ELECTRIC HEATER, 
No. 500,520. 
Patented June 27, 1893, 
* 
A / is : i 
s 
armswrw 
f 
i | 
\ a 
e 
A C 
6. 
27 
62 
a 
2 
m 
Azz / 
& 
x 
WITNESSES; 
2.74- 
A41. 
SS 
a 
re. 2. 
NVENTOR 
Zarz A Wedz2tore 
BY 
ORNEY 
fheoris Peters Co. Pors-uric, wastisroc. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EARL P. WETMORE, OF HELENA, MONTANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
SIDNEY Z. MITCHELL OF PORTLAND, OREGON. 
ELECTRIC HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,520, dated June 27, 1893. 
Application filed December 23, 1892, Serial No. 456,123, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EARL P. WETMORE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hel 
ena, in the county of Lewis and Clarke and 
State of Montana, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Electric Heaters, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description. 
This invention relates to electric heaters, 
the primary objects being simplicity and 
cheapness in construction. 
The invention involves the use of an alter 
nating current transformer in which the sec 
ondary coil or circuit is closed upon itself, 
thus being a transformer in which the sec 
ondary coil has but one turn. The invention 
consists of the special construction of the sec 
Ondary. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a side elevation partially in section, 
of my improved heater, and Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse section taken on line acac of Fig. 1. 
This electric heater is a modified form of an 
alternating current transformer. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, a rep 
resents a primary coil through which alter 
nating currents flow. 
b represents a cylindrical bunch of iron 
wire inclosed within and constituting the core 
of the primary coil. Surrounding this core 
and having a coincident axis is a cylinder c, 
preferably made of brass, and somewhat 
larger than the core, so that an annular cham 
ber c' will be formed between the cylinder 
and the core. In this chamber a spiral par 
tition d is formed, so that fluid flowing from 
end to end of the chamber will take a spiral 
course around the core, and thus be a com 
paratively long period in contact with the core 
and cylinder c. This spiral partition is pref 
erably made of a wire wound continuously 
from end to end. The ends of the cylinder 
are closed by heads e, e' which are threaded 
upon the outside of the cylinder as shown. 
These heads are provided with ports f, f', 
through which water, air, gas or other fluid 
may pass to and from the spiral chamber c'. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
A few of the iron wires in the core are made 
to project at the ends, as shown at g in Fig. 
1, to hold the heads of the cylinder a small 
distance away from the core, so that a space 
will be formed in which the fluid from the 
ports may spread to the spiral chamber around 
the core. 
When alternating currents flow in the pri 
mary coil a heavy current is induced in the 
brass cylinder c, which being closed upon it 
self, the current heats to a high temperature. 
This heat is communicated to the Water or 
gas which flows through the spiral chamber 
and when thus heated the said water or gas 
may be used for any purpose. The principal 
value in this construction is in the facility 
with which the apparatus may be made, put 
together or taken apart. It will be seen that 
the parts are slipped one over the other, and 
they may be assembled with great facility. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. In an electric heater, the combination of 
a primary coil through which alternating cur 
rents flow, a metallic: cylinder constituting a 
secondary coil or circuit inside of the primary, 
an iron core inside of said cylinder removable 
heads closing the ends of said cylinder, said 
heads provided with ports, a chamber being 
formed between the core and cylinder for the 
passage of a fluid, for the purpose set forth. 
2. In an electric heater, the combination of 
a primary coil, through which alternating cur 
rents flow, a metallic cylinder constituting a 
secondary coil or circuit inside of the primary, 
an iron core inside of said cylinder removable 
heads closing the ends of the said cylinder, 
said heads provided with ports a chamber 
being formed between the core and cylinder 
for the passage of a fluid, and a spiral parti 
tion in Said chamber for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I subscribe my signa 
ture in presence of two witnesses. 
EARL P. WETMORE. 
Witnesses: 
II. S. HEPNER, 
JOSIAHBOWDEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500620.txt	(No. Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
A. SCHLEGEL & H. MAYER. 
DEWICE FOR PROTECTING UNBURNED BRICK. 
No. 500,620, 
e -- 
, Z. 
/g/. 
Patented July 4, 1893, 
3 
J e 
 
O 
0 is 
e 
------ 
- 
EstigaO 
O 
ge 
. 
SS 
9 s 
Sis 
9 
6 
Sale - e. FEL 777- 
A 2 
... O 
e-is 
- 
. 
f f, e. 
a t 
r 
T-I is 
w it. 
Es|7 
9 
b 
e2, 
 
a - 
te 
(No Model.) 
No. 500,620, 
6 g/ 
 
- 
A. SCHLEGEL & H.MAYER, 
DEVICE FOR PROTECTING UNBURNED BRICK. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
A. 
/g 7 - 
Patented July 4, 1893. 
2 
." 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTUS SCHLEGEL AND HENRY MAYER, OF DECATUR, INDIANA. 
DEVICE FOR PROTECTING UN BURNED BRCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,620, dated July 4, 1893. 
Application filed September 1, 1891, Renewed December 8, 1892, Serial No. 454,447, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To att, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that we, AUGUSTUS SCHLEGEL 
and HENRY MAYER, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Decatur, in the county of 
Adams and State of Indiana, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in De 
Yices for Protecting Unburned Brick; and we 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact descri ption of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to an improved ap 
paratus for protecting unburned bricks from 
rain, its object being to produce a cover or 
protector Which can be shifted from one side 
to the other of the supporting frames so as to 
protect the bricks on either side or on top. 
To this end our invention consists in cer 
tain features of novelty to be hereinafter de 
Scribed and then particularized in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view with the awning shifted. Fig. 2 
is a top view, with the awning removed. Fig. 3 
is a transverse section on line III-III, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a side view of a modification, and Fig. 
5 is a transverse section thereof. Fig. 6 is an 
enlarged detail view of the hook-section. Fig. 
7 is an enlarged sectional view of the weight 
pole showing our method of clamping the pole 
to the awning. 
The floor or base of the apparatus is indi 
cated by C, and the uprights for supporting 
the transversely arranged vertical frames by 
b. The uprights b are placed in line, and 
Spaced at suitable distances apart, 
The vertical frames, one of which is secured 
to each upright, are each composed of vertical 
central bars c, parallel side bars d, cross bars 
d' and d at top and bottom, and inclined top 
bars e, extending upwardly from the upper 
ends of the side bars d, and joining in an an 
gle at the top of the central bar c which ex 
tends above the cross topbard, thus forming a 
reverse V-shaped top to each frame. 
The cen 
tral bars of each frame are provided with ver 
tical slots f, through which pass the screws f' 
that take into the uprights b and adjustably 
support the frames at different heights. These 
frames are connected at their upper corners 
by means of tie-rods g. 
At the tops of the 
frames are opening bearings h in which a lon 
gitudinally extended shaft i journals. Dou 
ble spools i are fixed on the shaft i, contigu 
ous to each frame. The shaft has a squared 
end k, to receive the socket of a crankk', for 
turning the shaft. An awning l is laid over 
the shaft and tie-rods g, so as to hang on 
either or both sides of the frames. The aWn 
ing has a weight-pole m at each end, on each 
side of and extending beyond the ends of the 
frames and which may be made out of any 
suitable material, either round or Square. 
The poles are made in sections, the awning be 
ing clamped and held between them by means 
of set-screws m' which pass therethrough. 
Oppositely wound ropes or cords in, 1.'', are Se 
cured to the respective sections of each dou 
ble spooli, ropes in being secured to one of the 
poles in on one side and ropes in to the other 
pole an on the other side of the awning l, thus 
making the awning shiftable. 
Hook sections composed of plates 0, and hav 
ing upwardly projecting spaced hooks O', and 
provided with transverse slots p are secured 
to the inclined top-barse by means of screws 
p' that pass through slots p and take into the 
bars e. When the hook sections are raised 
they are held up by tightening the screws p", 
and when the latter are loosened the sections 
fall into inoperative position by reason of 
their own weight. Similar hook-sections q are 
secured to the side bars d, by set-screws q'. 
The apparatus is used by placing the hacks 
of unburned bricks under the awning l, and 
when rain, sleet, snow, &c., come from one side 
or the other the awning is lowered on that side 
by shifting it, which is accomplished by turn 
ing the shaft in the proper direction. 
The awning l is held in position by means 
of the proper hooks of the hook section being 
brought into engagement with the projecting 
ends of the poles m, and this is accomplished 
by drawing out and securing the hook sec 
tions to adjusted position. 
In the modification, shown in Figs. 4 and 5, 
there are awnings r, r' on each side of the 
frames, hung from the longitudinal tie-rod S 
under the shaft ac at the top of the frames. 
At each end of the poles S', S' of the awning, 
are pulleyst, t, around which the cords, chains 
or ropes it, it are Wound in one direction, 
whereas the awnings are attached to the poles 
s', S', so as to be wound thereon in the oppo 
site direction. The cords, chains or ropes 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
95 
OO 
 
500,620 
may be so attached to the double top pulleys 
ly as to be wound thereon in either direction, 
depending upon whether the awnings are to 
be let down or rolled up on both sides of the 
frames, or let down only on one side. The 
remaining parts, shown in Figs. 4 and 5, are 
the same as in the other figures. 
The frames can be made of wood or iron, as 
desired, and the awning of any suitable kind 
or material, such as canvas, rubber, oil-cloth, 
&c. The side bars d are hinged to the to 
bars e, to enable the sides to be lifted, so that 
Workmen can readily pass under. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim is 
1. In a device for protecting unburned brick, 
the frames in combination with awnings hav 
ing poles, the ends of which poles engage 
movable hook sections, as specified. 
2. In a device for protecting unburned bricks 
from rain, the combination of the frames, the 
tie-rods, the awning or awnings hanging over 
the same at the sides of the upper ends of the 
frames, the operating shaft, and ropes, chains, 
or cords connected with the awning or awn 
ings and operated by said shaft, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. Inadevice for protecting unburned bricks 
from rain, the combination of the frames hav 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
ing V-shaped tops, the tie-rods, the awning or 
awnings hanging over the same at the sides 
of the V-shaped tops of the frames, the oper 
ating shaft, and ropes, chains or cords con 
nected with the awning or awnings and oper 
ated by said shaft, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a device for protecting unburned brick, 
the combination of the frames, a shaft pro 
vided with double pulleys, awning or a Wn 
ings, and ropes connected to the awnings, and 
winding in opposite directions upon the pull 
leys, whereby the awning is raised upon one 
side of the frame while being lowered on the 
other, in the manner set forth. 
5. In a device for protecting unburned bricks 
from the rain, the combination of the frames, 
the awning having extended poles, a shaft 
rovided with pulleys, movable hook-sections, 
with the hooks of which the extended poles 
engage, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
AUGUSTUS SCHLEGEL. 
HENRY MAYER. 
Witnesses: 
J. E. ELLSWORTH, 
COLLINS BUSHNELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500720.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 500,720, 
A Y 
6-67. 
 
 
 
J. REBSAMEN, 
FLUID COMPRESSOR, 
Patented July 4, 1893, 
al 
EA 7 
- 
7 
1N C /7 
N 
A SSSNSN NS 
SSZI 2. 
SN3 SS 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
& SNSSNEZ 
Y2 K2 
sea 3 NN 
SN 
a 
- 
/ y 
" 
. 
. 
* 
" 
a 
, 
" 
: 
...i 
 
t- 
Ze 2. 
 
... ." 
m" 
- .." 
A see &Z SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
SS 
N 
Z722-erz22. 
C2a2zes 77easarre? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS REBSAMEN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
FLUID-COMPRESSOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,720, dated July 4, 1893. 
Application filed January 15, 1892, Serial No. 418,182, (No model.) 
55 
75 
Be it known that I, JULIUS REBSAMEN, a valves p and outlet-valves p. 
To all whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Fluid-Compressors, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my improvement is to provide 
for avoiding clearance of the pistons in the 
cylinders of compressors of the class to which 
my invention relates, thereby to overcome the 
loss of power incidental to clearance of the 
pistons particularly in air and gas compress 
OS. 
I have especially devised my improvement 
with relation to the compressor of a so-called 
ammonia ice or refrigerating machine, and 
therefore intend the description, hereinafter 
contained, in the main to apply to the use of 
my improvement in that particular connec 
tion, though it will be understood as being 
equally and similarly operative in any con 
nection with which it is adapted to be used, 
and that I do not intend to limit it in respect 
to any particular connection. 
Generally stated, my improvement involves 
a hollow piston in and controllably communi 
cating with its cylinder and containing a sup 
plemental piston, the two pistons being rela 
tively yielding under abnormal resistance, 
and a piston-rod connecting the pistons with 
the driving-medium, whereby when the stroke 
of the hollow piston has carried it to a cylin 
der-head, any excess of the stroke that would 
tend to force it beyond the cylinder-head will 
be taken up by the piston-yield. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a broken longitudinal sectional view of a com 
pressor having the piston itself constructed 
to render it yielding for my purpose; and Fig. 
2 is a sectional view in the nature of a dia 
gram, showing the relation of the piston to 
its driving-medium at the end of a stroke. 
A is the cylinder shown as provided with 
bulging heads B and B, though the heads 
might be flat or of still other form without 
departure from my invention. Inlet-pipes r, 
r", and discharge-pipes q and q for the am 
monia gas to be acted on, are connected with 
the heads, as represented, and are controlled, 
in a usual manner, respectively, by inlet 
The foregoing details belong to the par 
ticular compressor selected for demonstrating 
my improvement, and may be modified or de 
parted from in various ways without affect 
ing my invention. 
Inside the cylinder A is a hollow piston C, 
suitably packed, and the heads n and n' of 
which should conform to those of the cylin 
der, each piston-end containing a safety-valve 
m and a pressure-inlet valve l. Inside the 
piston C is closely fitted and suitably packed 
a supplemental piston C, containing check 
valves and , the one opening into a cham 
ber k, formed between the forward ends of 
the hollow piston C and supplemental piston 
C", and the other opening into a chamber k' 
formed between the rear ends thereof. The 
two chambers k and c' are thus rendered in 
tercommunicating. 
D is the piston-rod connected with the sup 
plemental piston C, passing thence through 
stuffing-boxes h' and h, respectively in the 
heads n' and B, and connected at its rear 
end with a driver E, represented in the pres 
ent instance, in Fig. 2, as a rotary shaft hav 
ing a crank F, with which the rod D is con 
nected by means of a pitmang. The connec 
tion of the supplemental piston with the pis 
ton C, while yielding under abnormal resist 
ance, such as would be presented by impact 
of the piston against a head of a cylinder, is 
adequately stiff to resist yielding under the 
stress of the Work to which the supplemental 
piston C" is applied in driving the piston C. 
The back-stroke of the piston C draws gas 
into the cylinder A at its forward end through 
the valve p, and compresses that previously 
admitted, by the forward stroke of the piston 
into the rear end of the cylinder through the 
valver', out through a valve p' and the for 
ward stroke of the piston obviously draws 
gas behind it into the cylinder and discharges 
that in front of it through a valve p'. The 
valves in and l have their controlling-springs 
set to resist any pressure lower than that at 
which the gas is to be compressed out of the 
cylinder, so that gas at the same pressure is 
admitted into the interior of the piston C as 
90 
95 
CO 
o 
25 
35 
45 
50 
f 
500,720 
2 
into the cylinder A; and the check-valves 
and i? convey the pressure from one of the 
chambers k c' into the other when the sup 
plemental piston comes into play, as herein 
after described. 
Reference to Fig. 2 will show that the pis 
ton C reaches, in its forward stroke, the for 
ward head B of the cylinder A before the 
crank F has reached its dead-center line ac 
with the piston-rod, and that, were the piston 
unyielding, further turning of the crank to the 
point ac would force out the cylinder-head. 
The yielding nature of the piston, however, by 
the movable quality of its supplemental pis 
ton C" against the resistance of the gas under 
pressure in the chamber k, enables it to be 
moved forward against the cushion afforded 
by the gas in that chamber, the pressure 
against which forces it past the check-valve 
i' into the chamber k and that movement 
causes the Supplemental piston to take up, as 
it were, the excess of the forward stroke, 
thereby insuring the avoidance of clearance 
of the piston without damage or even inju 
rious strain to the cylinder. The same con 
ditions present themselves under the back 
stroke of the piston C. 
Other means than those described and illus 
trated may be employed, for effecting my pur 
pose, as within the scope of my general state 
ment of invention herein contained, provided 
such means involve the employment of a hol 
low piston within and communicating with 
the cylinder and any means be provided for 
rendering the hollow piston and the supple 
mental piston contained therein relatively 
yielding under abnormal pressure. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a compressor, the combination with 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
the cylinder and the piston driving-medium, 
of a hollow piston in and controllably com 
municating with the cylinder, a supplemental 
piston confined in the hollow piston, the two. 
pistons being relatively yielding under ab 
normal pressure, and a piston-rod connecting 
the pistons with the driving-medium, where 
by, when the stroke of the hollow piston has 
carried it to a cylinder-head, any excess of 
the stroke that would tend to force it beyond 
the cylinder-head will be taken up by the pis 
ton-yield, substantially as described. 
2. In a compressor, the combination with 
the cylinder and the piston driving-medium, 
of a hollow piston in and controllably com 
municating with the cylinder, a supplemental 
piston yieldingly confined in the hollow pis 
ton, and a piston-rod connecting the supple 
mental piston with the driving-medium and 
adjusted to continue the stroke of the piston 
rod when the hollow piston has reached the 
end of its stroke, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. In a compressor, the combination with 
the piston driving-medium of a cylinder A 
having valve-controlled inlets, r' and outlets 
q, q', a hollow piston C within the cylinder 
and provided with valves in and l, a supple 
mental piston C. yieldingly confined in the 
hollow piston and provided with valves , , 
and a piston-rod D connecting the supple 
mental piston with the driving-medium and 
adjusted to continue the stroke of the supple 
mental piston when the hollow piston has 
reached the end of its stroke, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
JULIUS REBSAMEN. 
75 
55 
65 
In presence of 
M. J. FROST, 
J. N. HANSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500820.txt	(No Model.) 
L. M. SAUNDERS 
NIPPLE CHUCK, 
No. 500,820. 
Patented July 4, l893. 
7%a. 
2 <<NS N 
 
 
 
 
A 
. 
N 
2NZN 7 
 
 
Day/ 
2E 
A' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
: 
25 
WITNESSES; 
M 
C6. /2-/6 
/%-67-6-4 
r 
A 
A1E 7 
XS XXXC 
E: 44.4of241-244. 
INVENTOR 
// 
NY 
BY 
. 
AITORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LESLIE M. SAUNDERS, OF YONIKERS, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO D. SAUNDERS' 
SONS, OF SAME PLACE. 
NPPLE CHUC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,820, dated July 4, 1898, 
Application filed December 2, 1892, 
Serial No. 453,810, (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, LESLIEM. SAUNDERs, o 
Yonkers, in the county of Westchester and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Nipple-Chucks; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a front or end view of an appa 
ratus embracing my said invention. Fig. 2 is 
alongitudinal sectional view of the same taken 
in the line, ac, a, of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a partial 
sectional view of the same the sectional por 
I5 tion taken in the line, ), y, of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 
is a detail view on a larger scale showing the 
the gripping face of a jaw provided with, or 
constructed according to, my said invention. 
This invention relates to that class of ma 
2O chinists' tools which are used for forming 
Screw-threads upon metallic nipples, an opera 
tion which requires that an already threaded 
end of the nipple be gripped and held during 
the formation of a thread upon its opposite 
25 end. As heretofore constructed, implements 
of this class have comprised gripping jaws the 
inner or gripping faces of which are threaded 
to correspond to the thread upon the end to 
be gripped of the nipple; the screw threads of 
3o the one fitting between those of the other and 
by the friction of the intermeshing surfaces 
holding the nipple against the tendency, due 
to the thrust or action of the threading tool 
or dies, to turn within the jaws. It is found 
35 in practice that this merely frictional hold of 
the chuck upon the nipple is insufficient to 
accomplish its purpose, there being a tend 
ency on the part of the nipple to screw in 
Ward into the chuck until it meets with some 
4o resistance to its longitudinal movement. This 
of course tends to disarrange the work. Fur 
ther, as by far the greater number of nipples 
manufactured are made with right - hand 
threads it follows that a corresponding form 
45 and inclination must ordinarily be given to 
the gripping faces of the jaws, with the re 
sult that if it becomes necessary to form a left 
handed thread upon the nipple the reversed 
direction of the thrust upon the latter inform 
5o ing such reversed thread, tends to screw the 
- - 
nipple out of the chuck with consequent dam 
age and disarrangement of the work. 
The object of my invention is to obviate 
these drawbacks to the convenient and effect 
ive use of nipple chucks and to this end it 55 
comprises certain novel combinations of parts 
whereby the threaded end of a nipple is firmly, 
safely and securely held against any turning 
movement within the chuck whether the 
thread be right or left handed, my said in- 6o 
vention being applicable to nipple - chucks 
comprising in construction two or more jaws 
for gripping the nipple in whatsoever man 
ner, or by whatsoever devices, said jaws are 
closed or opened to grasp or release the nipple. 65 
In the apparatus as represented in the draw 
ings A is the face-plate of a nipple chuck. 
Said face plate is fast upon the end of an air 
bor, B, which when the apparatus is in use is 
arranged in suitable bearings and provided to 
with suitable means for its rotation and con 
trol. As the mounting and operation of nip 
ple-chucks in generalis well known in the art 
the mounting and some of the ordinary ad 
juncts of the apparatus are not shown in the 75 
drawings and for the same reason call for no 
special mention here. In the front of the 
face-plate, across the center thereof are pro 
vided opposite guides, or dove-tail grooves, Cl, 
in which are placed the sliding jaws, C. Said 8o 
jaws except as hereinafter set forth may be 
of any suitable kind, character or construc 
tion so long as they are capable of being made 
to approach each other to grasp the nipple to 
be threaded between them with the axis of 85 
said nipple coincident with the axis of rota 
tion of the face-plate. As shown in the draw 
ings said jaws, C, are provided with outwardly 
projecting tongues, G, which lap upon rab 
beted portions, C', of sliding blocks, D, the 90 
lateral edges of which together with the cor 
responding edges of the jaws, fit the guides 
to insure the requisite stability of the said 
parts as they are moved or operated in their 
guides. Pivoted at the back of the face-plate, 95 
one for each jaw, are levers, E, which extend 
through suitable openings in the face-plate 
with their outer arms stepped into recesses 
in the rear sides of the blocks, D, while their 
inner or rearwardly extended arms rest upon roo 
2 
500,820 
the conical end, d, of a sleeve, F, which is 
loose upon the shaft, B. The said inner ends 
of said levers are pressed against said coni 
cal end of said sleeve by springs, e. When 
the conical end of the sleeve is forced forward 
toward the face-plate it spreads the inner 
arms of the lever and consequently forces the 
jaws inward toward each other to grip a nip 
ple duly placed between them. When a re 
Verse movement is given to the sleeve the 
springs bring the rear arms of the levers to 
ward each other in proportion as the reced 
ing of the conical end of the sleeve permits 
the springs, to act. When desired three or 
any other desired number of jaws, C, each ra 
dial to the axis of motion of the face-plate, 
may be employed. Whatever the number of 
jaws, the inner end of each is recessed or hol 
lowed out upon the arc of a circle which 
slhould be suitably proportioned to the diame 
ter of that part of the nipple which is to be 
held by the chuck. 
The parts thus far herein specifically de 
scribed as shown in the drawings do not differ 
materially from what has heretofore been 
known and used and are here described simply 
as constituting a convenient and useful appa 
ratus in which my invention may be advan 
tageously applied to use; but, when desired 
my said invention may be used in any other 
suitable apparatus as, for example, one in 
which the jaws are operated as shown in the 
Letters Patent heretofore granted to Andrew 
Saunders on August 25, 1874, for an invention 
of an improved lever nipple chuck. 
My invention concerns the gripping faces 
of the jaws, in whatsoever the latter may con 
sist So long as they are consistent with the use 
and operation of my said invention, the latter 
relating to the gripping surfaces of the jaws. 
In my said invention instead of providing 
simple screw threads to inter-mesh by a fric 
tional contact with the threads on the nipple 
to be held, I provide in lieu of such thread 
upon the jaws, a Spiral system of acute teeth, 
the inclination and pitch of the spiral line of 
teeth corresponding to the pitch and inclina 
tion of the thread upon the nipple to that ex 
tent that said teeth fit into the grooves be 
tween the threads on the nipple and, upon 
the jaws being made to grip the nipple, bite 
into the surfaces presented by said grooves, 
that is to say into the bottoms of the grooves 
and into the sides of the threads upon the 
nipple and thereby hold the latter against 
turning in either direction within or between 
the jaws. Said teeth may be very conven 
iently formed or provided to the jaws by first 
providing the latter with the ordinary screw 
thread heretofore employed therein and then 
grooving, as shown at, f, across Said screw 
threads in lines substantially parallel in di 
rection. With the axis of rotation of the face 
o 
15 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
plate, A. When the jaws are caused to ap 
proach each other and grip upon the nipple, 
the teeth, f, indent themselves into the metal 
of the nipple and thus differ essentially in 
their operation from that of the mere fric 
tional hold of one screw-thread upon another 
as in the nipple chucks heretofore in use. As 
the teeth bite into or indent themselves in the 
metal of the nipple their hold upon the latter 
is positive in whichever direction the face 
plate, and consequently, the nipple is rotated. 
From this it follows that the tendency to turn 
within or between the jaws which is incident 
to nipple chucks heretofore in use, and all 
the inconveniences resultant from such tend- . 
ency is wholly obviated by my said invention. 
It is of course to be understood that while 
my said invention is especially adapted to the 
holding of nipples as described, it may also be 
advantageously used for holding other arti 
cles having screw-threaded ends and which re 
quire to be chucked during threading, turn 
ing or like operations. 
It will be observed by reference to the draw 
ings, that the teeth do not extend upon the 
jaws to an extent that would bring them upon 
the entire circumference of the nipple where 
the same is gripped. This leaves a gripping 
portion, p, at the side of each jaw devoid of 
teeth but still of such proportions and con 
figuration as to rest against the summit of 
the thread on the nipple. By these means 
the teeth may be readily withdrawn when the 
jaws are opened in opposite directions and, 
when the jaws are closed upon the threaded 
end of the nipple, the naked parts, p, hold 
against the sides of the gripped part of the 
nipple to prevent its bulging laterally in 
directions at right angles to those on which 
the pressure of the toothed surfaces of the 
iaws is exerted. 
s 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination with the gripping jaws 
of a nipple-chuck of a series of biting or in 
denting teeth, f, arranged with a pitch and 
inclination corresponding to the pitch and 
inclination of the grooves between the screw 
threads of the nipple to be held, substantially 
as and for the purpose herein set forth. 
2. The combination with the gripping jaws 
of a nipple-chuck constructed with plain grip 
ping portions, p, of a series of biting or in 
denting teeth, f, arranged between the por 
tions, p, and having a pitch and inclination 
corresponding to the pitch and inclination of 
the grooves between the screw-threads of the 
nipple to be held, substantially as and for the 
purpose herein set forth. 
LESLIE. M. SAUNDERS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES S. FITCH, 
OSCAR BORDEN WARING. 
75 
8c. 
95 
OO 
d 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US500921.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
COMBINED SHIRT COLLAR AND NECKTIE, 
B. LOWENBERG. 
. 
Patented July 4, 1893. 
- 
No. 500,921, 
729.1% 
 
 
72% a 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
B ENJAMIN LOWENBERG, OF NOR F O LK, VIRGIN IA. 
COMBINED SHIRT-COLLAR AND NECKTE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 500,921, dated July 4, 1893. 
Application filed October 13, 1892, Serial No. 448,754, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To add, whon, it may concert: 
Beit known that I, BENJAMIN LOWENBERG, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Nor 
folk, in the county of Norfolk and State of 
Virginia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in a Combined Collar and 
Necktie, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings. 
Figure 1 shows the two blanks or pieces of 
cloth used to make the necktie part of the ar 
ticle. 
Fig 2 shows the blank for the collar. 
Fig. 3 is a section through the collar and neck 
tie. Fig. 4 is a view of the neck tie and co 
lar after they are stitched together. Fig. 5 
is a front view of the upper part of the shirt 
body. Fig. 6 is a front view showing the shirt 
body with the neck tie and collar attached 
thereto, the ends of the neck tie being dis 
united. Fig. 7 is a front view of the same parts 
showing the ends of the neck tie united to 
form a bow knot. Fig. 8 is a similar view 
of the same parts illustrating how the ends 
of the neck tie can be used to form a four 
in-hand bow, 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
tie and collar in such way that, if desired, the 
shirt at the time of its manufacture can have 
them made ready for attachment. 
As shown the necktie and collar are made 
of two plies of fabric, but it will be under 
stood that they may be made of one ply or 
of any suitable number. The tieblanks are 
shown in Fig. 1 at A', A'. They are super 
posed as shown in Figs. 3 and 4, and are 
stitched together along the edges. The col 
lar blank is shown in Fig. 2, at B', it being cut 
from a single piece of the fabric, which piece 
is doubled at its central longitudinal line, 
forming a straight outer edge at b, see Fig. 4, 
a curved inner edge b', and the ends b, b. 
Before the two plies of the necktie are en 
tirely stitched together, they are separated a 
little at the central part of the upper edge, 
and the collar blank is inserted, and secured 
by stitches, as shown at B, Fig. 3. This man 
ner of uniting the two parts together provides 
for reversing the collar so that if it becomes 
Soiled on one side, or for any other reason, it 
can be reversed, and have the other side ex 
posed. 
The ends a, a, of the necktie part of the ar 
ticle are elongated considerably relative to 
the collar B, and at their outer parts they are 
wider than they are at the points designated 
by a , a, where they are narrowed, so as to 
have them capable of being tied in any of 
several bows. The central part of the neck 
tie portion is designated by a ', and the neck 
tie, as a whole, by A. 
The shirt body is shown at D, it being made 
with a neck band D' and a front opening D. 
It is provided with a fastening device at dat 
the center of the back part of the neck, for 
attaching the collar and necktie, and at d 
there is a joining device for securing together 
at the edges the front opening D. Then, at 
points back of this joining device d' there 
are means at d, d, for fastening the front 
parts of the necktie and collar to the shirt, 
these fasteners at d, d, being supplemental 
to that at d, and being situated between the 
central front vertical line of the shirt and the 
central vertical shoulder lines. As shown, the 
fasteners at d, and d, d, are the ordinary 
shirt buttons secured by stitches to the neck 
band. At c the necktie is provided with a 
corresponding fastener, that is, an ordinary 
button hole, for joining it to the shirt and at 
c', c', there are corresponding means for join 
ing the necktie to the parts at d, d. 
But it 
will be understood that the fasteners can be 
of any suitable sort, such as removable but 
tons, studs, or detachable pin catches. 
By examining Figs. 4 and 6, it will be seen 
that the fastening means at c', c', on the neck 
tie are situated between the ends of the col 
lar B and that the turn down portion of the 
collar terminates on each end, at a point ad 
jacent to the said fastening device to which 
it is buttoned or secured. Consequently they 
are concealed, and a neat and finished ap 
pearance is insured at all times. And as a 
result of having the front fastening devices 
of the neck tie and collar situated at points 
back from the front central line of the shirt, 
that is between the fasteners d", and d, I make 
it possible to tie any desired form of bow with 
the ends of the neck tie. 
By following the method of manufacture 
which I have herein shown and above de 
scribed I can provide the market with a neat 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
95 
Iod 
3. 
500,92. 
and tasty shirt and combine the collar and jacent to said fastening devices, and the band 
neck tie there with having capabilities not in-portion being elongated so as to form ends 
cident to the articles heretofore manufac- adapted to be tied in either of several knots, 
tured. 
and said fastening devices being hidden un 
der the folds of the collar, substantially as Set 
What I claim is- 
In combination with a shirt having a neck forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 20 
band formed with a rear fastening device and 
two fastening devices in front, one at each presence of two witnesses. 
Side of the center, a combined turn-down col 
lar and necktie detachable from the shirt and 
provided with fastening devices to engage 
those aforesaid on the shirt, the turn-down 
portion of the collar terminating at points ad- 
Witnesses: 
AARON SPERTNER, 
A. RIES. 
IBENJAMIN LOWENBERG. 
5 
O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501021.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 501,021, 
L. McCARTHY, 
INSULATING COUPLING, 
Patented July 4, 1893, 
 
 
 
  
sI. 
Aescreer 
 
 
 
 
 
r 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
IOUIS McCARTHY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
INSULATING COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,021, dated July 4, 1893. 
Application filed March 7, 1892, Serial No, 423,988, (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS MCCARTHY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Insulating Coup 
lings, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the ac 
Companying drawings. 
Insulating couplings such as are used in 
connection with gasaliers and the like are com 
monly constructed of two short tubes each of 
which is properly threaded in order that the 
coupling may be screwed onto the ends of the 
gas pipes which are to be connected. These 
short tubes are each provided with a flange 
which in the finished coupling are separated 
by an interposed layer of insulating material, 
the parts being firmly secured together by 
bolts which pass through the flanges and 
through the interposed layer of insulating 
material. These bolts require to be insulated 
at one end from the flanges through which 
that end of the bolt passes. To effect this in 
sulation the hole in the flange through which 
the bolt passes is made considerably larger 
in diameter than the bolt and the space be 
tween the bolt and the walls of the hole is 
filled with insulating material. The head of 
the bolt is also commonly insulated from the 
flange by placing underneath the head a 
washer of insulating material. As the parts 
of the coupling require to be very tightly com 
pressed and held together there is a great 
pressure on the bolt heads and any insulat 
ing material known to me is apt to be cracked 
or broken or its insulating quality impaired 
in the process of riveting the parts together. 
Washers of metal have been placed under 
neath the bolt head on top of the washers of 
insulating material but these are at best only 
partially effective in obviating the difficulty. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
an insulating coupling so constructed as to 
obviate this difficulty while at the same time 
producing an effective coupling which may 
be quickly and cheaply constructed by ordi 
nary workmen. 
My invention is fully set forth in the fol 
lowing description and the novel features 
thereof are pointed out in the claims which 
are appended hereto and made a part hereof. 
The accompanying drawings show a coup 
ling embodying my invention. 
Figure 1 of said drawings is a plan view of 
the coupling. Fig.2 is a side elevation. Fig. 
3 is a vertical section on line 3-3 Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a similar section showing a coupling 
with the proximate.faces of the flanges flat 
instead of formed with a depression in one 
and a corresponding projection in the other 
as shown in Fig. 3, 
The principal metallic portions of the coup 
ling are the short tubes or nipples u, each of 
which is properly screw threaded as shown 
to receive the ends of the gas pipes which are 
to be connected: These tubes are provided 
with flanges b at their proximate ends. Be 
tween the flangesis interposed a layer or mass 
h of insulating material which may be sheet 
mica or any other of the well-known mate 
rials used for insulation. The mass or layer 
h has a central aperture coincident with the 
hole in the tube a .to permit the passage of 
the gas. The parts are firmly compressed 
and secured together by means of bolts if 
which pass through the flanges band through 
the interposed layer of insulating material as 
shown. It is necessary that the boltsfshould 
be fully insulated from one of the flanges b. 
To accomplish this, the hole in the flanges 
through which the bolt passes is made con 
siderably larger than the bolt and the space 
around the bolt in the hole is filled with insu 
lating material as shown at k, Figs, 3 and 4. 
It is also necessary to insulate the head of the 
bolt from the flange b and to accomplish this 
the layer of insulating material m is placed 
on the flange and I prefer to make this layer 
m of a width substantially equal to the width 
of the flange as shown. If sheet mica be em. 
ployed as an insulator I form the layer m of 
a series of disks superimposed one upon the 
other and each having central apertures large 
enough to admit the tube a. These disks are 
shaped like washers and are placed around 
the tube a on the flange b. On the top of the 
insulating washers in I place a ring or strip 
p of metal against which the heads of the 
boltsf may rest. The bolts pass through the 
washers of insulating material m and through 
the metallic ring or stripp, The ring p is 
made preferably of a width slightly greater 
than the diameter of the heads of the bolts f. 
- 
 
5 S 
65 
75 
95 
loo 
2 
. 
. 501,021 
5 sulation. 
By this form of construction the parts may 
be firmly compressed and the bolts headed 
down properly and so as to hold the parts 
firmly together without endangering the in 
The employment of a ring or strip p of 
metal instead of small disks or washers of 
metal not only increases the strength of the 
parts but considerably cheapens the cost of 
construction by lessening the number of parts 
and making it possible to do the work more 
quickly and without the aid of other than or 
dinary workmen. 
As will be obvious my invention is appli 
cable to any insulator having metallic por 
tions which require to be bolted together by 
bolts which must be insulated from one or 
both of the said metallie portions. 
What I claim is 
An insulator comprising flanged metallic 
portions, a layer of insulating material inter 
posed between said flanged portions, securing 
O 
20 
25 
bolts passing through said flanged portions 
and said interposed layer of insulating mate 
rial, said bolts being insulated from one of 
said flanged portions by a surrounding layer 
of insulating material, and a metallic strip or 
ring through which the said bolts pass, said. 
strip or ring being located under the heads 
of said bolts and interposed between said 
heads and the insulating material which sur- . 
rounds said bolts, whereby said bolts may be 
headed down without danger of injuring the 
insulating material which surrounds them 
and which insulates them from the adjacent 35 
flanged metallic portion, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
LOUIS McCARTHY. 
Witnesses: 
WM. A. MACLEOD, 
ROBERT WALLACE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501121.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES N. WAITE, OF NEW TON, MAS SACHUSETTS. 
ART OF MANUFACTURING CHLORINE OR CAUSTICALKAL BY ELECTROLYSIS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,121, dated July 11, 1893. 
Application filed December 10, 1891. Serial No. 414,553, (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs N. WAITE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
ton, in the county of Middlesex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in the Art of Manufac 
turing Chlorine or Caustic Alkali by Elec. 
trolysis, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The production of chlorine and caustic al 
kali from brine by subjecting the brine to the 
action of an electric current is well-known. 
It has been found in the practice of this 
method of manufacture that a considerable 
proportion of the electric current is not util 
ized in the production of chlorine and alkali 
and a waste of the current occurs which is un 
desirable. The cause of this loss of the cur 
rent has hitherto, so far as is known to me, 
been unknown. 
The object of my invention is an improve 
ment in the art, by which this loss of current 
may be avoided and the expense of the manu 
facture reduced, and it consists in the method 
hereinafter more fully set forth and which is 
particularly pointed out in the claim which 
is appended hereto and made a part hereof. 
The brine is used in the manufacture of 
chlorine and caustic alkali by electrolysis is 
not chemically pure but contains a small 
quantity of sulphuric acid, the quantity vary 
ing somewhat but being usually only a trace. 
This trace of sulphuric acid I render inert by 
adding to the Solution of commercial alkaline 
chloride an excess of, preferably, barium chlo 
ride which forms with the sulphuric acid an 
insoluble precipitate. This is done before the 
brine is Subjected to the electrical current. 
The precipitate is inert and does not interfere 
With the action of the current on the brine 
and so need not be removed. I have found 
that all commercial alkaline chlorides, as com 
mon Salt, &c., contain as above stated a trace 
of sulphuric acid, either as sulphate of lime, 
magnesia or Soda, and although this amount 
of Sulphate may be but a smallfraction of one 
per cent, it exerts a very injurious influence, 
O 
15 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
75 
so much so that in cases coming under my 
observation in which electrolysis was effected 
by the use of an anode and cathode separated 
by a thin diaphragm and commercial brine 
was used, from one sixth to one-fourth of the 
current efficiency was lost, the amount of cur 
rent lost being not at all in proportion to 
the amount of sulphates and chlorides in the 
brine. By the addition to the brine of an ex 
cess of a soluble barium salt, preferably ba 
rium chloride, and the precipitation thereby 
of the sulphuric acid, all or approximately 
all of the current efficiency was obtained in 
the production of chlorine and caustic. I 
have also found that it is not necessary to 
treat with the precipitant all of the brine em 
ployed but only that portion which is on the 
anode side of the diaphragm and since the 
brine is not usually circulated on the anode 
side but only on the cathode side the treat 
ment of only a small quantity of the whole 
brine used is necessary. For example in the 
type of cell shown in Letters Patent of the 
United States, numbered 450,104, dated April 
7, 1891, granted to E. A. Le Sueur, I should 
only treat the comparatively smallamount of 
brine used inside of the bell. 
As will be obvious I do not desire to restrict 
myself to the use of barium salts in precipi 
tating the trace of Sulphuric acid but may 
use other well-known salts which completely 
precipitate sulphuric acidin an insoluble form. 
I claim as my invention 
The improvement in the art of manufactur 
ing chlorine and caustic alkali from brine by 
electrolysis which consists in first treating the 
brine to convert the sulphuric acid contained 
therein into an insoluble sulphate and then 
subjecting the brine to the action of an elec 
tric current, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES N. WAITE. 
Witnesses: 
WM. A. MACLEOD, 
ROBERT WALLACE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501221.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 501,221. 
H. H. WAGENER, 
CORSET STIFFENER, 
Patented July 11, 1893. 
 
 
W. Avas S 2 ... 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMANN HEINRICH WAGENER, OF CASSEL, GERMANY. 
CORSET STIFFENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,221, dated July 11, 1893. 
Application filed September 10, 1892, Serial No. 445,58l, (No model.) Patented in Germany March 18, 1891, No. 60,478, and in 
England Septemberl 5, 1891, No, 15,663, 
15 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HERMANN HEINRICH 
WAGENER, a subject of the Emperor of Ger 
many, and a resident of the city of Cassel, 
5 Germany, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Corset-Stiffeners, (for 
which I have obtained a patent in Germany, 
No. 60,478, dated March 18, 1891, and in Eng 
land No. 15,663, dated September 15, 1891) of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
corset stiffeners. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows a flattened helical spring which forms 
part of my improved corset-stiffener, the 
curves connecting the loops being to the left 
hand edge of the flattened spring. Fig. 2 is 
a spring of this kind curved on its longitu 
dinal axis. Fig. 3 is a similar flattened spring, 
showing the curves uniting the loops at the 
right hand edge. Fig. 4 shows two such flat 
tened springs before they are engaged. Fig. 
5 shows them engaged. Fig.6 shows two heli 
callsprings of different diameters,one inserted 
into the other before they are flattened. Fig. 
7 shows a mandrel on which two helical 
springs are wound and formed at the same 
time. Fig. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the 
double helical spring shown in Fig. 7, the 
mandrel being removed. Figs. 9 and 10 show 
the same flattened. Fig. 11 shows the rollers 
and the spring partly flattened and partly 
unflattened. Fig. 12 shows a corset-stiffener 
with an additional flat wire inserted for stiff 
Fig. 13 shows the end-pieces at 
ening it. 
tached to the corset-stiffener; and Fig. 14 
shows two corset-stiffeners provided with lock 
ing devices. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
If a steel wire is wound on a spiral-lined 
mandreland then is drawn of the same a heli 
cal spring is formed. If by means of Some 
mechanical construction, for instance, rollers, 
or by means of a hammer this helix is flat 
tened, a flat wire spring A is formed, such as 
shown in Fig. 1, composed of a series of con 
nected loops, which loops are connected along 
one edge of said flat spring. The spring can 
readily be bent laterally, as shown in Fig. 2. 
As shown in Fig. 3, the spring can be so ar 
O sponding parts. 
35 
m 
45 
so. 
 
55 
ranged that the connected parts of the loops 
are at the right-hand edge as well as the left 
hand edge. Such springs have been made 
heretofore and two springs have been so united 
that the sides of the two springs at which the 
loops were connected have been placed adja 
cent to each other and fastened, and such 
springs have been used for corset-stays, but 
better results are obtained if two springs are 
placed side by side and united in such a man 
ner that the free ends of the loops are united 
With each other. To obtain this result the 
helical springs are first compressed but not en 
tirely flattened until their transverse sections 
are elliptical and then one spring is pushed 
into the other so that the central longitudinal 
axes of the two helical springs almost coin 
cide, as it is impossible to push the one heli 
cal spring entirely into another of the same 
size on account of the thickness of the wire. 
Suchtwo flattened helical springs when passed 
into each other are then flattened together as 
much as possible without mashing the wire. 
This pressing together is accomplished in the 
most advantageous manner by means of a pair 
of rollers B, as shown in Fig.11. It is notab 
Solutely necessary to partially flatten the 
springs before pushing them into each other, 
but this method of manufacturing the article 
is much more advantageous. The flat spring 
obtained by compressing two helical springs 
into each other and flattening them together 
is especially adapted as a stiffener for corsets 
and dresses in place of a whalebone. The 
Outer edge of each such corset stiffener is 
formed of a Wire section that unites the sev 
eral loops and the undue flexibility of one 
spring is counteracted by the other and yet 
sufficient elasticity is obtained to cause the 
corset stiffener to fit snugly against the parts 
of the body. 
The advantages of the improved corset stiff. 
ener just described over the flat sheet-metal 
springs used in corsets heretofore are that the 
flat sheet-metal corset stiffener can only be 
bent transversely to the direction of their 
length, but not laterally. The two helices of 
which the stiffener is formed must be wound 
in opposite directions, but as shown in Fig. 6, 
the helices can have different diameters. 
In case the stiffener is formed of two helices 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
2 
501,221 
O 
of the same diameter, one pushed into the 
other, the pitch of both must be the same; but 
if one helix has less diameter the pitch can be 
different in the two helices. Instead of plac 
ing two helices of different diameters into 
each other, the two helices may be formed of 
the same core C, as shown in Fig. 7, which 
double helix is shown in cross-section in Fig. 
8, Fig. 9 showing the same when flattened. 
As shown in Fig. 10, the two helices can be 
placed together in such a manner that the 
united parts of the ribs are not at the outer 
edges, but at the inner edges, and this would 
form a flatspring with a strong central rib, a 
spring of this kind being shown in horizontal 
section in Fig. 10. Before flattening the 
springs, a strip E of sheet metal can be intro 
duced in the same, a shown in Fig. 12. The 
ends of the stiffener can be provided with 
metal clips F, as shown in Fig. 13, and the 
fastening-devices G for corsets, &c., can be 
applied as shown in Fig. 14. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A corset stiffener, comprising two interlock 
ing flattened helical spring wires, the loops 
of the spring wires interlocking with each 
other and the curved part of the spring wires 
uniting the loops forming the side edges of the 
corset stiffener, substantially as shown and 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
25 
HERMANN HENRICH WAGENER, 
Witnesses: 
HUBERT SCHECK, 
PAUL PRINZEL, 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501321.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 501,321, 
 
Z z 
 
J. L. BROWN, 
SPINNING TOP, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July ll 
1893. 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 501321, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. L. BROWN. 
SPINNING TOP, 
Patented July 11, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
2ZZZZZZZZ2 
% 
(No Model.) 
 
J. L. BROWN. 
SPINNING TOP, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented July 11, 1893. 
\/Z7 
Zezee 
(No Model.) 
No. 501321, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
J. L. BROWN 
SPINNING TOP, 
Patented July 11, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 501,321, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
J. L. BROWN, 
SPINNING TOP, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented July 11, 1893. 
  
 
(No Model.) 
J. L., BROWN, 
SPINNING TOP, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6, 
No. 501321, 
Patented July ll, 1893, 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES LOCKHART BROWN, OF GLASGOW, SCOTLAND. 
SPN NING TO P. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,821, dated July 11, 1893. 
Application filed May 21, 1892. Serial No. 433,873, (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all ?ph???, i?, 1 ??? ????????: 
Be it known that I, JAMES LOCKHART 
BROWN, draftsman, of 14 Cathedral Street, 
Glasgow, in the county of Lanark, Scotland, 
have invented Improvements in Spinning 
Tops, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention which relates to improve 
ments in spinning tops has for its chief ob 
ject the production of tops whose special fea 
tures of novelty are that besides being capa 
ble of spinning in one direction with a speed 
continually lessened, as a common top spins, 
they are in addition through the operation 
of my improvements capable of being spun 
so as not only to remain upright instead of 
falling down when that spinning is about to 
cease, and also when it has stopped, but also to 
have their spinning immediately thereafter 
renewed and for some time accelerated in the 
opposite direction to that in which they spun 
previous to the aforesaid stopping. 
In carrying out my said invention I employ 
a fly wheel, or I employ as a fly wheela heavy 
rimmed solid or hollow top, and in the sim 
plest form which my improvements take, I 
combine this fly wheel or heavy rimmed top 
with a light hollow or solid top as hereinafter 
described and illustrated by the drawings an 
nexed, in Such a way that each of the two can 
be left spinning oppositely to the other by 
the pulling off of a cord suitably wound about 
the stem, and can thereafter spin independ 
ently each of the other save for friction. 
In the drawings-Figures 1 to 5 inclusive 
illustrate the simplest way in which I carry 
out my improvements, and of these Figs. 1 
and 2 are sectional elevation and plan re 
spectively showing the combination of the 
fly wheel and light top, and Figs. 3, 4 and 5 
are part elevations showing various meth 
ods of winding the spinning cord. Fig. 6 is 
a sectional elevation of a modification of the 
stem and holder-knob, and Fig. 7 is an ele 
vation of same, showing the method of lead 
ing the cord in winding. Fig. 8 is an eleva 
tion showing a further modification of the 
holder and stem and the winding of the cord. 
Figs. 9 and 10 are sectional elevations show 
ing a modification whereby the fly and its 
spindle are contained entirely within the 
light top, and Fig. 11 is a plan of a detail 
of same. Fig. 12 is a sectional elevation of 
a modification of the arrangement shown in 
Figs. 9 and 10, and Fig. 13 is a plan of the 
fly of Fig. 12. Fig. 14 is a sectional elevation 
showing a modification of the arrangement 
illustrated by Figs. 12 and 13 whereby spin 
ning is more easily accomplished. Fig. 15 
is a part sectional elevation of the stem of 
Fig. 14. Fig. 16 is an elevation of the same 
showing the winding and the position of the 
parts at beginning of the pull of the cord. 
Fig. 17 is a part sectional elevation showing 
a further method of effecting connection and 
disconnection of the fly and light top, and 
Fig. 17 is a sectional elevation of a loose 
pivot. Fig. 18 is a plan of a detail of Fig. 
17. Figs. 19 and 20 are a sectional elevation 
and plan of another method of connection 
and disconnection. Fig. 21 is a part sectional 
elevation of Fig. 19. Figs. 22 and 23 are sec 
tional elevation and plan showing a method 
of connection by hook and loop, and Fig. 24 
is a sectional plan showing a detail thereof. 
Figs. 25 and 26 are part sectional elevation 
and sectional plan showing a modification 
of hook and loop connection. Figs. 27 and 
28 are sectional elevation and part plan show 
ing my improvements applied to a light solid 
top. Fig. 30 is a sectional elevation showing 
a method of connecting the light top and fly 
by pendulum arms and clutch, and Figs. 29, 
29, and 31 and 31, plans of various forms of 
elutch for same. Fig. 32 is a sectional eleva 
tion showing another method of connecting 
and disconnecting the fly and light top. Fig. 
33 is a plan of same with the cover off, and 
Fig. 34 is a sectional plan of a detail. Fig. 
35 is an elevation of the stem of same, show 
ing the winding for one of the methods of 
connection. Figs. 36, 36", and 36 are sec 
tional detail plans elucidating the action of 
the cord when wound as in Fig. 35. Fig. 37 
is a part Sectional elevation of a modification 
whereby reverse winding of the spinning cord 
is dispensed with. Fig. 37 is a sectional edge 
view of the upper part, and Figs. 37 and 37e 
are plans of details of same. Fig. 38 is a sec 
tional elevation showing out of gear another 
arrangement for utilizing ordinary winding. 
Fig. 38 is a part sectional view of same and 
Fig. 3S 
showing the arrangement in gear. 
is a plan of a detail of Fig. 38, and Fig. 39 
is a part sectional elevation illustrating two 
55 
?? 
75 
85 
90 
95 
LOCO 
501,321 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
modifications of the said gearing. Fig. 40 is 
a part sectional elevation of a modification in 
which optical illusions and chromatic effects 
are produced. 
In all the drawings the same reference let 
ters and figures denote the same parts. 
Referring to Figs. 1 to 5 inclusive I employ 
a fly wheel A, and I mount this fly wheel on 
a spindle a having a female or a male center 
at its lower end, and I combine this fly wheel 
with a light hollow top B made in two or more 
parts joined as shown or otherwise. I pro 
vide the said light top B with a pivot b car 
rying a male or female center c and also with 
a tubular winding stem Chaving a drilled and 
flanged plug din its upper end as a bearing 
for spindle a. Onto that end of the fly spin 
dle a which projects beyond d, I mount an 
other winding stem D which I plug at its up 
per end with a drilled plug E. I also provide 
a holder knob or handle e having a pin F 
forced into it, and which works easily in the 
handle e and has a tight collar f formed or 
fixed on its lower end. The fly spindle a 
works in the plug d and on the center c, and 
the whole combination has for its pivot the 
pivot b, so that the fly A and the light top 
B can be spun and can continue to spin inde 
pendently each of the other save for friction. 
In order to set the above described combi 
nation spinning so that the fly. A may sustain 
the light top B when B's spinning has with 
the flys assistance been stopped and there 
after cause it to spin oppositely to its direc 
tion of spinning previous to the said stopping, 
I engage (see Fig. 3), a bead or a knot on the 
end of a cord G with a cord detaining peg g 
fixed in the winding stem of the fly A and 
wind that cord Say to the left as shown. I 
then take hold of the holder or of Band pull 
off the cord G, thus spinning A left handed. 
Immediately thereafter I engage and wind 
the same cord but lettered G' right handed, 
as shown on the stem of B, with the help of 
the pegg', and I then allow the whole arrange 
ment to hang by the holder or stand on the 
pivot b, and steadying it by e I pull of the 
cord G' and so leave the fly A spinning left 
handed within the light top B, and B spin 
ning right handed upon the pivot b, each at 
about the same speed. When the fly A and 
the light top B are thus left spinning oppo 
sitely to each other then the fly A on account 
of its superior weight, and therefore greater 
stored up energy does by means of its pivot 
friction at c, and its axle friction at d, and by 
means of the friction due to the air inclosed 
or passing between itself and the light top 
assist the friction of the pivot b, and the fric 
tion of the air around the light top B in slow 
ing the right handed spinning of the said light 
top B, until that right handed spinning is by 
these means stopped, after which the fly A 
still rapidly spinning left handed does by its 
pivot and axle friction, and by the friction of 
the air between itself and B cause B to begin 
spinning in the same direction as itself, that 
is, for the present description, left handed, 
and does accelerate Bs spinning in that di 
rection for some time, all of which is done 
without any danger of the light top falling 
down, since it is sustained by the spindle a, 
of the fly A which fly is all the while stable 
in the plane of its own continuous rapid spin 
111 I1?. 
In order that optical illusions and chromatic 
effects may be produced while the above de 
scribed performance is proceeding, I cut one 
or more openings h in the upper side of B, 
and I paint any suitable device or arrange 
ment of colors on the upper side of the fly A, 
or I mount thereon a colored card h' which 
may be changed at will. I paint the upper 
surface of B in this case preferably black, 
and I apply the color more widely and deeply 
as I approach the circumference of the card. 
While A and Bare spinning at different speeds 
in the same direction, or at the same or dif 
ferent speeds in opposite directions, then the 
colored device or varied coloring on the fly 
A or on the card h' on the fly A, appears 
through the revolving opening or openingsh 
of the top B in such a way as to produce in 
some cases apparent change of color of the 
top or chromatic effect and in some cases ap 
parent change of device or apparent repeated 
and capricious reversal or standing still of 
the top which is optical illusion. I may also 
place the colored card in the bottom of B so 
that it can appear through one or more open 
ings in the fly A and light top B. Instead 
of winding as hereinbefore described, I may 
wind the cord G' as before mentioned on C 
(see Fig. 3), and another cord G on D con 
trary to the cord G' and spin by pulling both 
cords off at Once. 
Preferably I use one cord alone and wind 
the two parts or ends as in Fig. 3, and spin 
according to the arrows by pulling off that 
cord by the bend or bight, shown in dotted 
lines. 
As a modification of the method of wind 
ing two parts of the same cord in contrary 
directions I may wind as shown in Fig. 4, 
when I fix another pegg (which I call a cord 
reversing peg) in Cas shown. I then engage 
the knot on the cord as shown with pegg' in 
Fig. 4 and wind a part of the cord say right 
handed till I reach pegg'. I then turn the 
cord half Way around g and keeping it tight 
I proceed to wind another part of the cord 
left handed around D neglecting the pegg 
in D thus obtaining an easier method of wind 
ing. When the cord as thus wound is pulled 
per the straight arrow, the former part of it 
coiled about D spins both the fly A and the 
light top B as per the curved arrow, until or 
nearly until the cord reversing peg g is 
reached. Then the cord slips from off that 
said pegg' and the latter part of the cord 
coiled about C spins the light top B alone 
oppositely to the now freely spinning fly A 
so that after the cord is all pulled off, the fly 
A and the light top B, are left spinning op 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
13d 
 
501,821 
I. ? 
15 
35 
4 ? 
45 
55 
positely and independently of each other save 
for friction. 
As another modification than that last de 
scribed I proceed as shown in Fig. 5, so that 
instead of the cord on the stem D of the fly 
A dragging around the light top during the 
former part of the pull off, the cord on the 
stem C of the light top B drags the fly A 
around during that part of the pull off, thus 
making it possible to dispense with a great 
part of the stem D above the pegg as shown 
in Figs. 6 and 7 to be hereinafter described. 
In Fig. 5 the cord is shown engaged with 
the pegg' and a part is wound right handed 
till the peg g is reached. The peg g is then 
brought above the pegg' and the cord is 
strained tight over both pegs as shown, and 
then after being brought down below g, again 
another part is wound left handed over the 
part already wound right handed on C. The 
straining of the cord over the pegs g and g 
effects a temporary connection between the 
fly A and the light top B. When the cord 
thus wound is pulled as per the straight ar 
row, the light top B drags the fly around as 
per the curved arrow, until or nearly until 
the pegg is reached, immediately after which 
the cord slips from both pegs and the remain 
ing and reverse wound part of the cord then 
spins the light top B alone oppositely to the 
spinning of the fly A, so that the fly A and the 
light top B are left spinning as before de 
scribed in opposite directions. It remains to be 
mentioned that in Figs. 1, 3, 4 and 5J is a loose 
slightly projecting washer between D and C to 
prevent the cord from falling or being dragged 
into the gap between D and C. Also in Fig. If 
is a loose washer to minimize the end play of 
the fly spindle a so that if the top be spun 
while hanging from the hand by the holder, 
the joint at J shall not open so as to let the 
cord slip into it. In order to obtain a shorter 
winding stem so that the top may spin more 
steadily I cut down the stem D of Fig. 5 un 
til it remains as a mere collar carrying a peg 
as shown in Figs. 6 and 7, where D is the said 
remaining collar and g is the cord reversing 
peg which it carries. The said collar D is 
telescoped over the end of the stem C to pre 
vent jamming of the cord and flanged above 
to prevent the cord from being dragged into 
the gap between itself and the holder e, 
which is mounted loosely on the projecting 
end of the fly spindle a, and furnished with 
a female center Klet into it and in which 
runs a male center formed on the upper end 
of a, so as to diminish friction on the pin k. 
if the top be held down while the cord is be 
ing pulled. The pink inserted through the 
holder has its point engaged in a groove in 
the spindle a in order that the top may be 
spun while hanging from the hand by the 
holder e. The collar ID is fixed to the spin 
dle a so as to drive it around and the re 
maining parts are substantially the same as 
in Fig. 1. Fig. 7 shows the leading of the 
cord when winding and the method and its 
results are the same as described for Fig. 5. 
In order still more to shorten the winding 
stem with the object before mentioned, I 
may employ the further modifications of 
winding sistem shown in Fig. 8 by adopting 
which I dispense with the pegg and collar 
D of Figs. 6 and 7. The internal parts not 
shown in Fig. 8, are shown in Fig. 9 in this 
modification. I place the spindle a of the 
fly A entirely within the winding stem C 
of the light top B. The upper end of spin 
dle a has a male center formed on it and 
works in a drilled and female centered plun 
ger L, sliding freely inside of C, which is 
plugged at its upper end with a flanged plug 
g having formed on it or fixed to it the holder 
pin F. Between d and L is interposed a 
spiral spring l strong enough to prevent end 
shake of spindle a, without creating such 
friction at the upper and lower centers of a 
as to interfere with the independent contrary 
spinning of A and B after the cord has been 
pulled off. I make the holder pin F project 
through the holder e and allow the holder e 
to rest on the plug d and retain it on the pin 
F by the pink. In Fig. 8, only the pegs g 
and g are required, and one part of the cord 
is wound from g in one direction up to g?. 
It is then turned half around g and another 
part wound oppositely down the stem Cagain 
as shown. Whell the stem is long as shown 
in Fig. 9, then in addition to the pegs g and 
g, I place another peg g near g so that the 
cord knot, may, if preferred, be engaged by 
g' and g. Or the cord may be reversed over 
g' and gas shown. In order that the greatly 
shortened stem obtained by the modification 
shown in Fig. 8 may be used, I provide means 
whereby the light top and the fly can be con 
nected and disconnected at the proper mo 
ment while pulling the cord, and Figs. 9 and 
10 illustrate this said means, in carrying out 
which I make the roof of the light top B to 
be elastic so that it can be deflected by press 
ure on the holder e, as shown in Fig. 10, un 
til the serrated annular face c' at the lower 
end of the light top's spindle C, indents and 
grips an india rubber or other suitable washer 
M made fast to the fly A. When this is done 
and the cord is wound either as per Fig. 8 or 
Fig. 10, and pulled as per straight arrow, then 
pressure on the holder e being maintained, 
the light top B drags around the fly A as per 
curved arrow. This pressure being smartly 
relaxed, as by lifting the top when the cord 
is seen to be near the reversing peg or pegs, 
the result is that the top B is disconnected 
from the fly A and left free to be reversely 
spun independently of it, as per curved ar 
row, by the remaining part of the cord. 
Fig. 11 shows the Washer Min detail hav 
ing arms m and m', which are bent down be 
tween the arms of the fly A as clearly shown 
in FigS. 9 and 10, and thereafter bound to the 
hub of the fly. A below the arms by strong 
thread or thin Wire, in addition to which I 
may use any suitable cement. The remainder 
90 
95 
? ? ? 
O 
O 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
501,821 
7 ? 
75 
80 
9o 
of Figs. 9 and 10 are substantially the same 
as parts already described. Instead of the 
serrated lower end of C and the washer M, I 
may employ a pin clutch or a grooved and 
tongued clutch such as are shown in Fig. 12. 
Figs. 12 and 13 show a modification of the 
method of connecting and disconnecting 
which has for its object to obviate the neces 
sity of making the roof of B, elastic, and so 
diminish the amount of pressure necessary 
om the holder e, thus producing a stiffer and 
stronger light top B in which the winding 
stem C is less likely to be bent out of true by 
use. In carrying out this said modification I 
construct the light top B, with a rigid roof 
and I make the winding stem C tubular, and 
furnish it with the mountings d, e, F, g, g, 
l, I, and l, the same as detailed in describing 
Fig. 9. But instead of fixing C rigidly to B, 
I arrange it to slide under pressure on the 
holder ethrough a short flanged tube m fixed 
to the roof of B, and I utilize the spring l to 
return C when that pressure is relaxed. On 
the lower end of C, I fix a short flanged or 
lugged tubular piece N and in the flange of 
one or both of the lugs of N, I fix a pin or 
pins or a screw in whose head engages with 
the projecting tail of the pin or pins or screw 
q' in the flange of m. Across the lower an 
nular face of the flange piece N, I sink suit 
able recesses or grooves Or a groove as is 
clearly shown in Fig. 12, and on the upper 
face of the hub of the fly A, I form tongues 
or a tongue n to engage with the, aforesaid 
groove. In the stem. C in addition to the peg 
g' I provide another pegg at a suitable dis 
tance from g. The holder e is substantially 
the same as that in Fig. 9. The cord being 
engaged by means of its knot with the pegs 
g and g it is wound as in Fig. 8. Pressure 
being put on e the stem C descends until the 
groove in N is either in gear with the tongue 
or till Ns descent be stopped by the tongue 
m2. The cord being then pulled the piece N 
if not yet engaged with nslips around till its 
recesses engage with the tongue in in the fly 
A, and at the same time the pin 7' being out 
of gear with the pinn, the stem C by its 
clutch N drives around the fly A without the 
light top B being at the same time positively 
dragged around. I may also adopt this ar 
rangement when I desire to apply my im 
provements to a light solid top, by making 
the fly in the form of a heavy rimmed hol 
low top, and placing the light solid top 
within it as hereinafter explained. On See 
ing that the cord has been pulled off to 
within a coil or two of the cord reversing 
pegg the operator smartly relaxes pressure 
or lifts the top while still steadily pulling. 
By this relaxing pressure or lifting he causes 
the clutch N to take up the position in which 
it is shown in Fig. 12, and as Soon as the cord 
has slipped from off ghe, by the remaining 
and contrary coiled part of the cord spins the 
light top B oppositely to A. When after thus 
spinning the holder e is let go, the spring l 
keeps the clutch N as shown in Fig. 12, and A 
and B are thus left spinning oppositely and 
independently save for friction. The other 
parts in Fig. 12 not mentioned are the same 
as parts previously described. In all the ar 
rangements as yet described I would have it 
understood, that the knot on the end of the 
cord may be placed at option at either side 
of the peg g' or in this case g and g, so that 
the light top may be made to reverse either 
from right hand spinning to left hand, or vice 
versa. To obviate the necessity of the skill 
required to relax pressure on the holder at 
the right moment, I modify the arrangement 
just described as per Figs. 14, 15 and 16. In 
this modification the parts d, L, l, m, and m' of 
the modification shown in Fig. 12 are not 
used. The fly spindle projects beyond C and 
the holder runs loose on its projecting end as 
before shown in Fig. 6. The cord knot and 
reversing pegs are located on C inversely to 
those in Fig. 12. C is bushed at its ends as 
shown in Fig. 15 at c'. The clutches N' 
and n are of the ordinary clawed form. A 
pin P in the stem C works in a slot P formed 
in the sleeve n in which C turns freely. In 
winding the cord as shown wound at Fig. 16, 
the top is held in the left hand and when the 
cord is turned over cord g? I utilize the pull 
to turn the pin P toward the position it has 
in Fig. 16, so that on account of the form of 
the slot P', the clutches N' and n are brought 
into or nearly into gear. When the cord is 
pulled to spin the top as in Fig. 16, then the 
clutches are put fully into gear by the pull 
of the cord forcing P to the position shown 
in Fig. 16. Immediately after the cord has 
slipped from the reversing pin as in Fig. 14, 
C and its pin P are dragged around by the 
reverse coiled part of the cord, so that P is 
jerked to the position shown in Fig. 14, and 
on account of the form of the slot P the 
stem C is thereby raised and lifts the clutch 
N' out of gear with n, and B is left free to 
be spun oppositely to A. That the friction 
of the fly spindle running in its bushes c' 
in C may not turn C and the pin P from 
its position in Fig. 14, back to its position 
in Fig. 16, that end of the slot where the 
pin is shown in Fig. 14, droops suitably as 
clearly shown, P being the highest part of 
the leading edge of the slot. The top might 
be damaged by being spun with wrong re 
verse winding of the cord. Therefore I bevel 
the cord reversing peg gas shown in Fig. 
24. And in all cases in which this peg is bev 
eled I preferably locate it on the stem so that 
the knot cannot be engaged with it, as by 
means of the said pegg' and an adjacent 
flange (see Fig. 8) by mistake as this would 
defeat the object of the beveling. I may 
employ a claw formed clutch instead of the 
friction clutch in the top shown in Figs. 9 and 
10 or in that of Fig. 12. 
In any top herein described I may dispense 
with the lower pivot of the hollow outer top 
B, and I illustrate this modification by Fig. 
? ? ? 
?? 5 
I I. ? 
1 I5 
I 25 
IO 
I5. 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
501,821 
5 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
55 
45 
55 
7? 
75 
17. In the modification now under notice I 
employ pressure and release of pressure on 
the holder. The construction of the top in 
Fig. 17, is the same as that in Figs, 9 and 
10, only that the light top B has no lower 
pivot and that instead of employing a central 
clutch and elastic roof, I fix a pin p in the fly 
A and attach a flat spring Q, bent if neces 
Sary as shown in Fig. 17 to the under side of 
B's rigid roof and adopt preferably the short 
stem as in Fig. 8, but with the cord pegs in 
versely located, that is, the peg g' is above 
the peg g. The spindle a of the fly A pro 
jects and Works through a central hole or 
a bearing fixed in B's lower side. Pressure 
being given on the holder e the light top B 
descends until the spring lis fully closed, and 
the spring Q is in a position to engage with 
the pin p, though perhaps deflected at one 
end by p, I make p to be still clear of B's 
roof when l is thus fully closed. On the cord 
now being pulled Q slips off from p, if it has 
been resting thereon and drives round the 
fly. A by p. The location given to the knot 
peg and cord reversing peg in this top I adopt 
preferably in all tops requiring pressure on 
the holder during a former part of the pull 
of the cord While spinning them, and relaxa 
tion of such pressure or lifting of the top im 
mediately previous to the beginning of a lat 
ter part of the said pull, in order that this 
top and such tops may be wound so that the 
cord by its uncoiling can be taken to indi 
cate to the operator that the end of the period 
for downward pressure has arrived. And in 
this top and tops requiring pressure on the 
holder during a former part of the pull of the 
cord while spinning them, and relaxation of 
that pressure previous to the beginning of a 
latter part of the said pull, I wind the cord 
so that it shall on being pulled to spin the 
top uncoil during a former part of the said 
pull downward of the stem, and I adopt this 
method of winding in the case of this top 
and such tops as a means of facilitating the 
suitable lifting up of them or relaxation of 
pressure as before mentioned as follows. I 
employ the cord to be taken to indicate to 
the operator by its near approach to the end 
of its downward uncoiling, that the end of 
the period for downward pressure has arrived, 
so that the operator may the more suddenly 
relax pressure by smartly lifting the top. 
In this case I make the pin glong enough 
to engage in a wide groove in the fly spindle 
a, as indicated in Fig. 17, and so prevent the 
fly. A from falling to the bottom of B, when 
B is lifted. Pressure on the holder e being 
relaxed the light top B is returned by the 
spring l to the position shown and thus left 
free to be spun oppositely to A. I may fit the 
spring Q and the peg p, in the top shown in 
Figs. 9 and 10, as a means of driving A, and 
I may attach Q to the piece N in the top 
shown in Fig. 12, and dispense with the 
grooves in N, and I may also fit pin p to the 
same top's fly A, and dispense with the 
tongue n. In the top shown in Fig. 14, I may 
substitute the same spring and pin for the 
central clutches of that top. 
That I may utilize the weight of the fly in 
connecting B with A, I drill a hole or holes b 
in the bottom of B suitably located for en 
gagement with the pin p' fixed in the under 
In this modification I place 
side of A's rim. 
the knot peg and reversing peg as in Fig. 8, 
and wind as in Fig. 8, and the spring l, and 
plug L. may be dispensed with and spindle C. 
made longer, so as to work in the dotted fe 
male center in plug d. In spinning this top 
the operator lets it hang from his hand by 
the holder e, and I thus utilize the weight of 
the fly in effecting connection of B with A 
since the fly then falls and enables pin p' to 
engage one of the holes b in the lower side of 
B. I adopt the location given to the knot peg 
and cord reversing peg in this top, and which 
may be adopted in all tops requiring to be 
held up during a former part of the pull of 
the cord while spinning them, and to be set 
down previous to the beginning of a latter 
part of said pull, in order that this top and 
such tops may be wound so that the cord by 
its uncoiling can be taken to indicate to the 
operator, that the end of the period for hold 
ing up the top has arrived. I wind the cord 
so that it shall on being pulled to spin the 
top, uncoil during a former part of the said 
pull upward of the stem, and during a latter 
part of said pull downward of the stem, and 
I adopt this method of winding in the case 
of this top and such tops as a means of fa-. 
cilitating the suitable setting down of them, 
as aforementioned as follows. I employ the 
cord as a means for indication to the oper 
ator by its near approach to the end of its 
upward uncoiling, that the end of the period 
for holding up of the top has arrived. I may 
furnish the lower end of spindle a, as shown 
in Fig. 17, with a loose pivot b' retained on 
a. The top can then be lifted by the loose 
pivot b' without stopping the fly A. 
In carrying out my method of effecting 
connection by holding the top up and dis 
connection by setting it down, Ifurther adopt 
the modification shown in Figs. 19 and 20, in 
which the weight of the fly is utilized to assist 
in effecting disconnection when the top is set 
down. I drill or punch a hole or holes bin 
the roof of B, and drive pins or a pin of the 
form shown at p in the rim of A to engage 
with these holes b. When the top is lifted 
by means of the holder e which runs loosely 
on the upper or projecting end of CL, the light 
top B slides down till it stops on the pins or 
pin p, or till it stops on the fly A with p 
engaged in a hole b, as shown in Fig. 20. 
When the top is set down near the end of the 
former part of the pull of the cord, no sooner 
has the pivot of the outer top touched the 
surface, whereon the top is to spin, then the 
weight of the fly A assists the operator in ef 
fecting the disengagement of the pin p' from 
the hole b. In this modification I prefer to 
95 
1 ? ? 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I2 ? 
I 25 
501,821 
6 
fit B with a pivot, the same as shown in Fig. page of B. The hooks then rub past the loop 
17. The pivot shown in Fig. 19 belongs to 
end or strike it in their passage, and thus the 
loop R and hooks r, assist in producing stop 
the next modification. 
Ilocate the knot peg 
as described in connection with the last modi 
ping, reversal and acceleration in that re 
versed direction of the spinning of the light 
fication and for the object there set forth, 
top B. As the loop R, might be damaged by 
also I wind and employ the cord as there de 
the top being spun with the cord wound and 
scribed. 
As a modification I may dispense with any 
reverse wound with the knot at the Wrong 
assistance from the flys weight, and effect 
side of the knot pegg', I bevel away one side 
of the cord reversing pegg, as shown in Fig. 
connection of A with B by pressing the fly A 
24, so that the cord can only be held by g 
downward, as also shown by Figs. 19, 20 and 
when properly wound. The pegg' may also 
21. I fit the pivot b with a sufficiently stiff 
Springl, and a plunger L', and I employ pins or 
be thus beveled, but is not so treated when I 
a pin p' of the form shown but fixed on the un 
desire that the operator may spin the light 
der side of A near or in its rim. I fix the spring 
top B, contrary to the outer arrow in plan, by 
Q to the inner surface of B's lower side. I 
non-reversed winding if he chooses. I may 
make the pin p of such a length that when 
employ two or more loops R, as well as any 
the plunger L is closed against the pivot b, 
number of hooks . 
as shown in Fig. 21, the pin p is clear of the 
As a modification of the method just de 
bottom of B and yet in a position to be driven 
scribed, I may attach the loops R to the fly 
by Q. That the top may be lifted in effecting 
A, instead of to the light top B, as shown 
disconnection of A and B, I may utilize the 
in Figs. 25 and 26, and I may arrange two 
in Ward end of one of the cord pegs by engag 
sets of hooks and loops R, so that it shall 
ing with a groove in a of such width that the 
be immaterial to which side of the knot peg 
fly can not be lifted so as to rub against B's 
g the knot is placed when the cord is to be 
roof. I locate the knot peg and cord revers 
reversely wound. In carrying out this modi 
ing peg described in connection with my first 
fication I make the fly A with a deep rim. In 
description of Fig. 17, and wind and employ 
side of that rim I attach an upper loop or 
that Winding for the purposes there explained. 
loops R', so as to engage with the upper hook 
In order to obtain a means of connection 
or hooks fixed in the drum S carried by 
between A and B wholly internal, and thus 
the light top B and partly situated within 
produce a top externally resembling an ordi 
the rim of A. In this drum S, I further fix a 
nary top, and not requiring the manual skill 
lower hook or hooks r pointing oppositely to 
required to spin tops hereinbefore described, 
the hooks r, as seen clearly in Fig. 26, and 
as having their means of connection within 
in the rim of A, I fix a loop or loops R oppo 
the light top, I adopt the modification shown 
sitely disposed to the loops R, so that the 
in Figs. 22 and 23. In carrying out this modi 
loops R* may engage with the hooks r'. I also 
fication the construction throughout is the 
locate the upper loop or set of loops R, rela 
Same as that shown in Fig. 9, except that I 
tively to the lower loop or set of loops R, on 
fix only one cord reversing peg in the stem C, 
the inner side of the rim of A in such a way 
and that i dispense with any elasticity in the 
that when the loop or set of loops R, is en 
roof of B, the washer M, and the serration of 
gaged with the hook or set of hooks r, as in 
the lower annular face of the stem C. I also 
Fig. 26, then the loop or set of loops R is 
leave more space between the fly wheel pe 
clear of the hook or set of hooks r, and vice 
riphery and the light top so that there is room 
versa. The drum S is fixed to or may be 
left for the necessary movement of a wire loop 
part of the light top B, whose construction is 
R, which I place within the light top as shown, 
otherwise the same as that of the light top B, 
Securing it by reversing its ends through two 
in Fig. 22, except that the winding stem C is, 
or three small holes drilled in the light top, as 
as in Fig. 8. The ends of the wire forming 
indicated at R. In the rim of the fly AI 
the loops are shown in dotted lines, and are 
drive a hook or hooks r, as shown more clearly 
roved through small holes in the rim at R', and 
in the plan Fig. 23. The loop is preferably 
I close the soft metal of the fly upon them, or I 
made of thin piano wire and is so adjusted 
may otherwise attach them. On the light top 
that when at rest it presses lightly on the pe 
B being spun asper arrowl, in Figs. 25 and 26, 
riphery of the fly A. When the former part 
the hook drags the fly Aaround by the loop 
Of the cord is begun to be pulled off, so as to 
R", while centrifugal force lays the loop R? 
spin B as per the outer arrow in the plan, 
against the inner surface of the flys rim as 
then R catches in one of the hooks n' as shown 
shown. When the reverse wound part of the 
and drags A around, and when the cord has 
cord begins to spin B, as per arrow 2, the hook 
slipped from the pegg and the contrary spin 
r is disengaged from the loop R, which then 
ning of B is begun, the loop R is disengaged 
is likewise taken out of the way of the hooks 
from the hook 7 and thrown out against the 
r, and the light top is thus left free to be spun 
light top's side by centrifugal force, thus leav 
oppositely to A. I may make my loop or 
ing B free to be spun contrary to A. As the 
loops of any degree of stiffness, so that they 
speed of B becomes reduced the end of loop 
shall return into the path of the hook or hooks 
R, returns if made sufficiently elastic, into 
earlier or later during the top's performance, 
the path of the hooks r previous to the stop- according as they are made stiffer or less stiff. 
. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
75 
po 
95 
II. ? 
I I5 
I 25 
 
501,821. 
?? 
. ?? 
: I place the hooks r" at a lower level than the 
diametrical line. Through each hole I drop 
loops R, in order that they may never damage 
a loose fitting pin or pendulum arm T, which 
the loops R when the light top B is spun, as 
I restrain from falling out when the top is 
inverted, by grooving it at tand spring a small 
per arrow 2, and the hooks rare at a higher 
wire ring into the said groove. Each pint 
level than the loops R, for a like reason. In 
this modification I may omit either the up 
has a head it as shown, so that it cannot fall 
per or the lower hook and loop arrangement, 
through the hole in which it works. The pin 
in which case I suitably bevel one side of my 
holes are widened outward below to allow the 
knot peg or cord reversing pegg. 
pendulum arms T to swing out to their dot 
ted positions. The pivot b of the top B is 
It is to be understood that in these last 
fixed, in the example shown, directly to the 
modifications I do not limit myself to thus ap 
plying my improvements to solid tops, but that 
body of the top Band on the in ward continu 
I may also thus apply my improvements to 
ation of the pivot wherein the female center 
for the spindle a is formed I fit a clutch N', 
any suitable hollow top, as that in the figure. 
When my improvements are applied to a 
shown in plan in Fig. 31. The fly. A being at 
Solid top I proceed as shown in Figs. 27 and 
rest if the top B be spun as per arrow 1, then 
28, in which B' represents the solid top, be 
the clutch N will engage with the arims. T 
ing merely a disk of metal though it may 
which are then hanging as in full lines, and 
the fly A will be driven around by the top B. 
have any other suitable form. A' is the fly 
When reverse spinning is begun, N will re 
in the form of a heavy rimmed top, made in 
two or more pieces. I plug the hollow spin 
lease the arms which are then instantly flung 
out to their dotted positions by centrifugal 
dle a of the fly A' with a drilled plug E and 
in that plug I fix the holder pin F, which is 
force, thus leaving B free to be spun oppo 
sitely to A. 
furnished with a loose holdere as hereinbe 
Besides the form of clutch shown in Figs. 30 
fore described. In the lower end of FI form 
and 31, I may employ any one of the clutches 
a female center and between that center and 
the female center in the fly pivota, I place 
shown in Figs. 29, 29 and 31. Fig. 31* is a 
one way driving clutch and in using I bevel 
the solid stem C' of the solid top B', on the 
one side of the reversing peg. Fig. 29 is a 
upper side of which I provide a pin p10 which 
is caught by the hook of the springs which 
two way driving clutch and its object is to 
diminish the shock which can be given to the 
is fixed inside of A, as shown, and is pro 
arms by any one jerking the outer top around 
vided with a wire bridge s' to keep it from 
being dragged out of form when A is drag 
backward and forward in trying to guess how 
ging B around by the pin p. 
it is worked, and Fig. 29 is a two way driv 
I paint the upper surface of B in any way 
ing clutch and its object is to assist centrifu 
Suitable to produce optical illusion and chro 
gal force by means of its eccentric back tend 
ing to throw the arms T out of gear should 
matic effect, as for instance, as shown in strips 
there be any danger of their becoming stiff 
whose boundaries are involute curves, and 
whose colors I make, for instance, alternately 
from dust or other cause. 
red and blue. I make the whole as light as 
In order to utilize the strain that is put on 
possible because the fly A' has to be reversely 
the spinning cord as it is coiled around the 
stem C, for the purpose of accomplishing con 
spun, as per arrow 2 on the plan Fig. 28, after 
nection of the top B with the fly A, I adopt 
that it has spun the light solid as per arrow 
1, and when a heavy fly is necessary I may 
the modification shown in Fig. 32, and further 
illustrated by Figs. 33 to 36 inclusive. In 
adopt the means of connection and disconnec 
carrying out this modification I groove the 
tion shown by Figs. 12 and 13, as hereinbe 
fore described. When A' is thus reversely 
plug d' of the stem C, as shown in Fig. 34, 
which is a sectional plan of the stem C in the 
spun, as per arrow 2, then the springs is car 
tied out of the path of pin p10 and kept out 
plane of section coinciding with the axis of 
the screw t'. Down through the groove I pass 
of the way of such until long after B' has been 
a straight wire t to serve as a spring and I 
reversely spun by the friction at the centers 
secure it by the screw t' which is screwed 
of C and the air friction. As the hook of S 
might be damaged by Wrong reverse winding 
through the thimble U, which I use in order 
and spinning I bevel off the proper side of 
to obtain a good hold for the screw thread and 
the cord reversing peg and make the flange 
also because it keeps the mouth of C from 
being bulged by the driving of the plug d', 
of E so small that g cannot be used by mis 
take for a knot peg g. Though this modifi 
and I secure the plug d' still further from 
turning and carrying the groove and wire t 
cation is specially designed to meet the re 
quirements of solid tops, yet I may in the 
away from the point of the screw t' by driv 
same way apply my improvements to any suit 
ing into it the knot pegg'. Idrill and female 
able hollow top. In order to utilize gravita 
center the plug d' and maike to work in it the 
upper end of the fly spindle Ct. 
tion to secure connection by means wholly 
Outside of 
internal in addition to utilizing centrifugal 
the top B, and near the foot of C, before fix 
force as a means of securing sudden discon- ing on the flanged piece ut, I solder om a small 
hub al'. 
I then drill a hole through this hub 
nection, I adopt the modification shown in 
and through C, and after filing away the lower 
Fig. 30, and in which I drill two holes near 
half of the hub, I drive on the flange nu, right | 
the hub of the fly A, one at each end of a 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
?? 
75 
95 
ICC 
? ?? 
II 5 
I 25 
I 30 
501,821 
up against it, thus obtaining a passage for 
the plunger V to slide in without turning. I 
notch the outer end of the plunger V to re 
ceive the winding cord, and I notch the inner 
end of it, as shown in Figs. 36, 36 and 36, to 
Catch hold of one or other of the toothlike 
ridges a formed in the fly spindle a, opposite 
the plunger by filing out between them or 
otherwise. In order that the ridges on fly 
Spindle a may not slip from the grip of the 
notch in V by deflection I fit the lower end of 
the tube C with a bush v' and Islot this bush 
where the wire spring t has to pass, and drill it 
where the plunger has to pass. To secure this 
bush from turning, I drive into it the cord re 
versing peg g and to prevent the plunger W 
from entirely leaving the passage it works in, 
I may drive a small pin u into the flange of C, 
as seen in Fig. 35. The notch in the inner end 
of the pin or plunger W is made deep enough 
not only to grip the fly spindle ridges or teeth, 
but also to accommodate the end of the spring 
t, as shown in Fig. 36. This top may be re 
versely wound either way, and the method of 
Winding is shown in Fig. 35, where the cord is 
shown right handed down C, then half turned 
round the pegg', then strained tight across 
the end of the plunger V, thus forcing it into 
the position shown in Fig. 36, so as to grip 
the fly spindle, and finally the remaining part 
of the cord is wound left hand upward on C. 
When the cord thus wound is pulled then C 
turns, as per arrow 1, in Fig. 36, and the top 
B drags the fly A around with itself. By re 
ferring to Figs. 36 and 36, in connection 
with Fig. 35, it will be seen that the spinning 
cord releases the plunger V, and so discon 
nects A and B, about one half of a turn of C, 
previous to the cord slipping from the revers 
ing peg g, so that if the cord be properly 
Wound, reverse spinning of B cannot be be 
gun by the cord until B is disconnected from 
A. Fig. 36" represents a position about a 
sixth of a turn of Cafter the release of V, and 
Fig. 36, shows the immediately succeedingpo 
sition, when the cord slips from off the revers 
ing pegg' and passes to and pulls from the 
opposite side of C, so as to revolve C as per 
arrow 2, and independently of the fly A, whose 
spindle a is, as shown, free from the grip of 
the plunger, and spinning as per small arrow. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 33 the 
top B and the fly A are constructed and ar 
ranged substantially as shown in Fig. 32 and 
therein I also illustrate a modification where 
by a ratchet wheel X fixed to B drives the fly 
A, by acting on the pawl v', which is mounted 
on a suitable joint pin u screwed or driven 
into the fly A, in the rim of which I drive a 
pin v to prevent the pawl u' from being 
flung so far back as to rack the spring v. 
Into the hub of the pawl w' I drive a pin w' 
which stops against the rim of the fly, as 
shown in the plan, so that the driving point 
of the pawl when the top is being put to 
gether cannot get nearer to the axis of the 
top than the radius at the bottom of the 
ratchet teeth. By these means I secure that 
the upper part of B can quite easily be fitted 
on to the lower part in making the top. The 
ratehet wheel Xhas a drilled hub and is se 
cured to the stem C by the hub being forced 
therein and pinned with the knot pegg', 
which I place at the bottom of C in this case. 
The parts shown in Fig. 32, and not linen 
tioned in this description, are not required 
in carrying out this modification. 
The spindle a passes easily through the 
drilled hub of the ratchet wheel X and works 
above in the plug d, as shown. In this case 
I bevel one side of the cord reversing peg 
which I now place near the upper end of C. 
I make the flange of d so small that g can 
not be used by mistake for a knot peg. In 
order that the simultaneous opposite spin 
ning of A and B obtained by the reverse 
winding of two ends or parts of the spinning 
cord, as described with reference to Figs. 1 to 
5 inclusive, which has the flys spindle a pro 
jecting beyond B's stem may be accomplished, 
without the trouble of such reverse winding, 
I adopt a modification of that top, as illus 
trated in Figs. 37, 37, 37, and 37. Instead 
of winding one end of the cord on a tubular 
stem fixed to the projecting part of the 
spindle of the fly A, I utilize that projecting 
part to carry a straddle or forked bracket a 
turning easily om it and carrying the bevel 
pinions ac' and ac, which run freely on the pins 
Y and Ysecured to the bracket by the screws 
y' and y, passing through holes in the ends 
of the pins Y and Y. In the upper end of 
C I fix a bevel wheel ac, and in the lower end 
a bush ac, as clearly shown, and the spindle 
a runs freely in these, and is restrained from 
end shake by the bush ac and its bearing in 
pivot b. The bevel wheel at is secured first 
on a by the screw y or otherwise. The upper 
end of the bracket ac is plugged with a tapped 
plug Y through which I pass a tight fitting 
milled headed screw Z, having a hardened 
point and a female center therein. The plug 
Y is prevented from slipping out of its place 
by a small pin or screw y, Fig. 37. The up 
per male center on the spindle a works in the 
female center of the screw Z, so that by work 
ing the screw Z through the plug Y, the ad 
justment of the bracket a is effected, so that 
the bevel wheels ac' and a shall not be too 
deep in gear with the bevel wheel ac, and so 
also that when the bevel wheel ac is in easy 
working gear with the bevels ac'anda, it shall 
yet be clear of the bracket ac at Z', as shown. 
When these conditions are fulfilled and the 
screw f is set up tight, then though the top 
be firmly held down to steady it while spin 
ning it, yet the gearing works with the mini 
mum of friction, since all the pressure is sus 
tained by the centers of the spindle and by 
the screw Z, and the pivot b, no downward 
pressure being transmitted to the body of the 
light top B, mor to the gearing. Over the 
stem C I fit a vulcanite or other light sleeve C' 
to increase the diameter of the stem, and I 
II. ? 
5 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
?? 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
I I 5 
H 2 ? 
25 
I 30 
 
50i,821 
9 
restrain C from turning by driving through it 
into the stem C the knot pegg'. As may be 
seen in Fig. 37 I utilize the inward ends of 
the pins Y and Y, whereon the bevels ac' and 
ac' run, to assistin steadying the bracket a, by 
fitting them as bearings on the spindle a. At 
the upper end of the Shank of the bracket ac, 
I fix a light fitting ring y, of light wood or 
other material. I then take a light short tube 
i? closed at the upper end and notched at the 
bottom, SO as to engage with the screw heads 
y' and f', and be by them restrained from de 
scending too low and from slipping around on 
the bracket, I slip this tube ?on the ring ly 
and push it down till its notches engage the 
screw heads aforesaid and utilize it, both as a 
dust cover to the gearing, and as a holder for 
the top, and further as an alternative means 
of spinning the top, and as its behavior is 
a feature of interest while the top is spinning, 
I place a star or other device on its upper 
end that its behavior may be more easily ob 
served. When the top B is spun as per ar 
row 1, the holder i? and bracket a being at 
the same time restrained from turning, by be 
ing held in the hand, them the fly A is simul 
taneously spun opposite to B by the bevel. 
gearing. When the cord has been pulled off 
and the holder let go, then A and B continue 
spinning oppositely. The holderly is at first 
then a feature of interest, as om being let go 
instead of at once being spun around with the 
top B, it is caused by the gearing to begin 
slowly to turn oppositely to B, and has its 
speed increased in that direction as B has its 
speed diminished. 
As a modification I may dispense with the 
screw 1, and inlieuthereof, fix a spline or key 
y in the spindle a and slot a passage, Fig. 37, 
for it in the bevel wheel ac, so as to enable at 
to slide freely om a. I then fix a pin j so 
that its point shall engage with a groove y 
turned in a wide enough to allow the spring 
y which I now place inside the shank of 
bracket a to lift the bracket, and the gearing 
carried by it, out of gear with bevel ac, when 
after pulling off the cord from C the holder 
f is let go. I thus insure that A and B shall 
be connected while the top is being held down 
during the pull of the cord, but entirely dis 
connected, save at their bearings after the 
holder is let go, thus reducing the wear of the 
gearing. When this is done the holder if left 
to itself no longer behaves during the top's 
performance as previously described. Iem 
ploy three screws like that shown at b to hold 
the two parts of B together, but I may adopt 
any other convenient means. 
I may omit one of the pinions ac' or a, as 
ac' leaving its pin Y to assist in steadying 
the bracket ac and thus simplify the gearing. 
I may combine both the modifications just 
described in one top, so as that by pushing 
down the holder if, and setting up the screw 
1, the gearing shall always remain in gear 
and the top be then inverted, while by slack 
ening the screw the gearing shall be out of 
gear except when the holder is pressed down. 
With the object of dispensing with the re 
verse winding of two parts of the cord when 
the fly wheel and its spindle are entirely 
within the top B, and also in order to obtain 
simpler gearing more easy of construction I 
adopt the modification shown in Figs. 38,38 
and 389. In carrying out this modification I 
provide a light stiff sheet metal bridge 7, se 
cured diametrally across the lower part of 
B, as shown, by screws or otherwise. At the 
center of bridge 7, I fix a drilled bearing piece 
8, and arrange the fly spindle a to run there 
in, and also in the center of pivotb. On the 
upper end of a which projects above 8, I fix 
a spur pinion 9 of suitable diameter. 
Through the stem C of the upper part of B, 
I pass a strong, stiff, preferably steel, rod or 
wire F, of a suitable length beyond the stem 
to the outside and to the inside of the top B, 
and having that part of it which projects in 
side B straight but set at an angle with the 
top's axis by bending the said set end of the 
Wire. F carries a pinion 10 working freely on 
it and having a long hub. Over the long hub 
of 10 I force the close coiled part of a spiral 
spring 11 and secure it to the said hub by 
solder or otherwise. That part of the spring 
11 which does not surround the hub is open 
coiled as shown and has at its end an eye 
formed, as seen in Fig. 38, through which I 
pass a small Screw and secure that end of the 
spring to the top as shown. Over the out 
ward or upper end of the wire F Islip a short 
light spring 12, and above the spring an ad 
justable collar 13, and finally I fix the holder 
knob e tightly on to the remaining part of the 
wire F. When the parts described are prop 
erly adjusted, and in the position shown in 
Fig. 38, then A and B are disconnected save 
for their bearings. When pressure is put on 
e to steady the top during the pull of the cord 
then the inward portion of the wire or rod F/ 
descending pushes the pinion 10, as per ar 
row 14, into gear With the pinion 9, as shown 
in Fig. 38', without in so doing appreciably 
extending the spring 11. 
When the pinions. 
have thus been put sufficiently in gear the 
stop collar 13, prevents further descent of the 
holder e and the wire F. On the cord now 
being so as to spin B, as per arrow 15, then 
the wire F being restrained from turning by 
the hand which grasps the holder e, the top 
by means of the spring 11 revolves the pin 
ion 10 about the Wire F, in the same direc 
tion as itself, and therefore the pinion 9 and 
the fly A, are oppositely spun to B. On the 
holder e being let go when the cord has been 
all pulled off, the Spring 12 returns the wire 
Fupward and the pinion 10 is taken out of 
gear in the direction contrary to the arrow 
14, and A and B are disconnected and left 
free to spin oppositely and independently 
save for friction. 
In order to dispense with the spring 12, I 
adopt the modification shown in Fig. 39, and 
in which I drill the hub of pinion 10 only 
2 ? 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
go 
95 
CO 
Io5 
o 
I I5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
O 
501,321 
65 
75 
partly through and form the end of the wire 
on which the pinion 10 works to be a male 
center as seen in dottedlines, and as aforesaid 
I omit the return spring 12 but retain the 
stop collar 13. Pressure on the holder ein 
this case puts the pinion 10 into gear with 
pinion 9, by extending the spring 11 and car 
rying pinion 10 downward, as per arrow 16, 
to its dotted position. When the holder e is 
let go the spring 11 contracts and restores 
pinion 10 to the position shown in full lines. 
As a further modification, Iarrange the part S 
so that the pinions 10 and 9 are at all times 
in gear, and I explain this modification with 
the assistance of Fig. 39 as follows: I groove 
the wire F as shown at H in dotted lines and 
restrain it from sliding through C by engag 
ing the inner point of the knot pegg to Work 
freely in that groove. I fix the collar 13 on 
the wire F, as per dotted lines, so as to main 
tain the point of g in the groove when the 
top is held down, and I adjust the pinion 9 
on the fly wheel spindle, as shown in dotted 
lines, so that when the two parts of the top 
B are put together the pinion 9 is sufficiently 
in gear with the pinion 10. I retain in this 
modification the male center on the end of 
wireF' working in the hub of the pinion 10 
as shown. The behavior of the holder e now 
becomes a feature of interest during the top's 
performance as hereinbefore described. 
As a modification of my hereinbefore de 
scribed method of producing optical illusion 
and chromatic effect, I may proceed as illus 
trated by Fig. 40, which is a part sectional 
elevation of the top, shown in Fig. 12, but in 
Fig. 40, I wish B to be understood not only as 
a light top when Athen will be understood 
as a fly, but also B to be alternatively under 
stood as being a heavy rimmed hollow top or 
fly, when Athen will be a light top. In car 
rying out this modification I cut an opening 
or openings h in B, and I color or paint the 
rim of B any suitable color or colors or black. 
I also paint or color a segment 17, or success 
ive segments of the rim of A black, or with 
any suitable color or colors, alternate or dif 
ferent paints or colors being applied to suc 
cessive segments. When A and B are spin 
ning at different speeds in the same direction 
or at the same or different Speeds in opposite 
directions, then if the rim be viewed optical 
illusions and chromatic effects are produced 
by these means as described. 
claim 
1. A spinning top having two rotatable 
parts, one part having a support adapted to 
sustain the entire top, and the Other part hav 
ing supports in the first said part, in combi 
nation with means substantially as described, 
for rotating the said parts simultaneously in 
opposite directions, as and for the purposes 
described. 
2. A spinning top having two rotatable 
parts or flies, one being relatively heavy, and 
one part having a bearing point whereby the 
entire top is supported and the other part 
or fly having bearings in the first said part 
whereby it can rotate independently thereof, 
in combination with means for rotating the 
said flies simultaneously in opposite direc 
tions, substantially as described. 
3. A spinning top having an exterior rotat 
able shell B, and a heavy fly wheel A within 
the shell, the bearings whereby the shell and 
fly wheel are free to rotate independently of 
each other, in combination with means for 
rotating the said shell and fly wheel simulta 
neously in opposite directions, substantially 
as described. 
4. Aspinning top having two independently 
rotatable parts, a stem for the spinning cord, 
means for connecting the two parts together 
during part of the spinning operation to cause 
them to rotate in the same direction, and the 
reversely wound cords upon the said stem, 
substantially as described. 
5. A spinning top having two independently 
rotatable parts or members, one being rela 
tively heavy, and one having a cord receiving 
stem provided with a cord retaining peg and 
a cord reversing pegg, and means for con 
necting the two members or parts of the top 
during a portion only of the spinuing opera 
tion, and means for rotating the said parts in 
opposite directions simultaneously, substan 
tially as described. 
6. A spinning top having two parts or mem 
bers which are independently rotatable, one 
of them being relatively heavy, and one being 
provided with a stem for the winding cord a 
clutch between the two members adapted to 
unite them during a portion of the spinning 
operation, and the Spinning cord reversely 
wound upon the said stem, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JAMES LOCKHART BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
Glasgouv. 
JAMES YATE: JOHNSON, 
Chartered Patent Agent, 115 St. Vincent Street, 
DUNIDAS PORTEOUS MCKINLAY, 
Draughtsman, 115 St. Vincent Street, Glasgow. 
OC 
O 
2. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501421.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 501,421. 
A. S. HOBART & A. W. ELDREDGE. 
RUBBER ERASER, 
Patented July 11, 1893. 
P 
p 
A 
of- 
Zezezzy 
IN 
27%rcs/222eza 
WV 42zo/YZ%ze2e. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR S. HOBART AND ALONZO W. ELDREDGE, OF BIG RAPIDS, MICHIGAN. 
R U BBER ERASER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,421, dated July 11, 1893. 
Application filed November 14, 1892, Serial No. 451,96l. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ARTHUR. S. HOBART 
and ALONZO W. ELDREDGE, citizens of the 
United States, residing at the city of Big Rap 
ids, in the county of Mecosta and State of 
Michigan, have jointly invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Rubber Erasers, 
of Which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements. in rubber erasers, and 
it has for its object to provide a new and im 
proved holder whereby the rubber eraser can 
be Wholly inclosed and covered when not in 
Se. 
To accomplish this object our invention in 
Volves the features of construction and the 
combination or arrangement of parts here 
inafter described and claimed, reference be 
ing made to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 shows a side elevation of our in 
vention with the eraser extended to one 
groove. Fig. 2 shows also a side elevation 
With the eraser holder opened and the eraser 
proper withdrawn. Fig. 3 shows a side ele 
Vation with the eraser entirely inclosed with 
in the case, and the case closed. Fig. 4 shows 
a plan view of the case. Fig. 5 shows a side 
view of the eraser with grooves for engage 
ment with the eraser holder. Fig. 6 shows a 
front view of the eraser holder closed. Fig. 
7 shows a plan view of the rubber eraser. 
Fig. 8 shows a detached view of the spring 
which is used to close and retain closed the 
holder. Fig. 9 shows a detached view of the 
Spring used in advancing or pushing out the 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
Out the several views. 
A and B represent the two parts of the 
holder which are hinged or pivoted together 
at. 
C represents the rubber eraser which is 
provided with grooves, as shown by D. D. 
The ends of the holders A-B which are pref 
erably made of sheet metal engage with the 
grooves D-D, thereby securing and holding 
the rubber C. in position for use. 
F shows the spring used for closing the 
holder upon the rubber, and also for entirely 
inclosing the rubber within the holder. One 
eaSe. 
- 
or more of these springs may be used in Con-. 
nection with the holder A-B. 
S represents the spring placed within the 
holder and bearing against the end of the 
eraser. The spring S may be attached or Se 
cured within the holder, or may be, if desired, 
attached to the rubber eraser C; its action 
would be the same in either case. When the 
eraser C is used as far as it can conveniently 
be used, on account of the wear, it can read 
ily be removed and a new eraser be inserted 
in its place. . . 
In using our invention, the shorter ends of 
the holders can be pressed together with the 
thumb and finger, thereby opening the longer 
end, allowing the eraser to be extended to the 
first grooveD; the holder A-B then forms suit 
able handle for using the eraser proper, the 
eraserproper which is actually used protruding 
from the front end of the holder, as shown in 
Fig. (1). When the eraser is notin use, the rub 
ber C is pressed back in the case, and the case 
is closed as shown in Fig. (3). By this con 
struction and arrangement of the eraser and 
eraser-holder, the rubber is always kept clean 
and in readiness for use, and the user is not 
compelled to grasp the rubber, but merely 
the handle or holder. The form of the spring 
designed to close the holder upon the rubber 
is immaterial, so long as it is properly placed 
to subserve the purpose. The shorter end of 
the holder A, which we have shown by L, fits 
into the part Mof the holder B, and the longer 
end of . A may fit over projections on the in 
side of B, as shown in Fig. (1). The pivoted 
construction is preferably a hinge, the upper 
art integral with A, and the larger part in 
tegral with B, and a pivot or rivet K uniting 
and securing the whole together. It will be 
understood that the hinge at one side is the 
same as the hinge at the other, although but 
one side is shown in the drawings. 
Having thus described our invention, What 
we claim to have invented, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. An eraser holder composed of the parts 
A-B, suitably pivoted together in combina 
tion with the rubber C, and a spring adapted 
to close the two parts A and B upon the rub 
ber, substantially as described. . 
2. An eraser holder, consisting of a case for 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
Ioo 
501,421. 
4. The combination of the sections A and 
B adapted to inclose and cover a rubber eraser 
and composed of two sections A and B piv 
oted together, the rubber eraser C provided 
with grooves D, with which the edges of the 
sections engage to hold the eraser in a fixed 
position relatively to the said sections, and a 
spring Facting to close the sections together, 
substantially as described. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto Set 
our hands and seals in the presence of two 
witnesses. 
ARTHUR. S. HOBART. 
ALONZO W. ELDREDGE. 
L. S. 
L. S. 
2C) 
25 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD TAGGART, 
M. E. HEANEY. 
wholly inclosing and covering the eraser and 
composed of two sections A and B pivoted 
together intermediate their ends so that by 
pressing on one end the opposite end is opened, 
in combination with the eraser C, and a spring 
Facting to close the sections together, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination of the sections A and 
B adapted to wholly inclose and cover a rub 
ber eraser and pivoted together intermediate 
their ends so that by pressing on one end the 
opposite end is opened, the rubber eraser C 
provided with grooves D with which the edges 
of the sections engage for holding the eraser 
in a fixed position, and a spring F acting to 
close the sections together, substantially as 
described. 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501521.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
No. 501,521, 
C. D. MARSH. 
S.A.W TABLE 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 18, 1893. 
A. 
s 
 
- 
 
 
N 
N) 
WY 
%N N 
% 
N %  ...2.: 
- 
K 
'f 
Es 
A. a. 
676-63--ee- 
 
=- 
3v-uovo 
64-ezzzzzzzz, 
-- etovo 
(No Model.) 
C. D. MARSH. 
S.A.W TABLE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 501,521, 
Patented July 18, 1893. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CALVIN D. MARSH, OF WILLIAMSPORT, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
ROWLEY & HERMANCE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SAW-TABLE. 
JPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,521, dated July 18, 1893. 
Application filed Octoberly 1892, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CALVIND. MARSH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Williams 
port, in the county of Lycoming and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Saw-Tables; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref 
erence being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in saw tables and it has 
for its objects among others to provide a sim 
ple and cheap construction and arrangement 
of parts for raising and lowering the table top. 
It has for a further object to provide such a 
construction as will embody ease and con 
Venience of manipulation, compactness and 
durability, and by which the table is always 
held horizontal or level and in which the top 
will be supported at any desired height with 
out tendency to descend or slip back of its 
own accord. The means employed for raising 
and lowering the top are positive in their ac 
tion and operate upon all four corners of the 
top simultaneously. 
Other objects and advantages of the in 
vention will hereinafter appear and the novel 
features thereof will be specifically defined 
by the appended claim. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which - 
Figure 1 is a central vertical longitudinal 
section through a table constructed in accord 
ance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan with 
the top removed. Fig. 3 is a detail in end 
elevation. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the several views in which they 
appear. 
Referring now to the details of the drawings 
by letter, A designates the support of a table 
and Ba rectangular frame supported thereon. 
In this frame and by hangers depending from 
the same are supported the parts which are 
arranged to raise and lower the table top. 
The table top is designated by the letter C 
and may be of any preferred style, having 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
Serial No, 447,474 (No model.) 
preferably upon its under side near each cor 
nera thickened portion cupon which the cams 
bear, as seen in Fig. 1. 
D are horizontal shafts extending crosswise 
of the table and supported in bearings at the 
ends in the frame or in hangers depending 
therefrom. On each of these shafts is af 
fixed by some adjustable means, as the set 
screws d, a cam El near each end, the set 
screws preferably being held in the collars D' 
on the said cams as seen in Fig. 2. The table 
top rests upon these cams as shown in Fig. 1. 
From the vertical arms D depend two shafts 
F which are connected at their lower ends by 
the connecting link or bar fast seen in Fig. 
1, and fastened by set screwsf'. 
On the front arm F is a sliding sleeve G 
which carries a nut G' connected there with 
by a swivel bolt g or other suitable means, as 
seen best in Fig. 3, the connection being such 
in order to permit the arm F to swing out of 
perpendicular. The cams being adjustably 
mounted permit of their adjustment so that 
the table will rest alike upon all four cams. 
H is a screw rod which passes through and 
engages the nut G' as seen in Figs. 1 and 2 
and this screw rod is supported in suitable 
bearings h supported from the frame Bas 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. It is provided with 
a suitable handle or other means I for turn 
ing it. The end of the screw rod is provided 
with jam nuts i as seen in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The arms F are rigidly secured to the shafts 
D by collars and set screws i as seen in Figs. 
2 and 3. 
J are vertical guide posts depending from 
the table top and passing through holesi' in 
the frame B to guide the table top and keep it 
in place. There is but one screw rod and but 
one nut engaging the same. 
The operation will be readily understood 
from the foregoing description when taken in 
connection with the annexed drawings, and 
a detailed description thereof is not deemed 
necessary, further than to state that the sim 
ple turning of the screw rod operates all four 
of the cams alike and consequently raises or 
lowers the table top evenly and easily and 
holds the same in any and all of its adjusted 
positions. 
Modifications in detail may be resorted to 
95 
Od 
 
2 
501,521 
without departing from the spirit of the in- and a screw rod engaging said nut, as and for 
vention or sacrificing any of its advantages. the purpose specified. 
What I claim as new is- 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
The combination with the movable table hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
5 top and a plurality of cams arranged to sup- of two witnesses. 
port the same, of shafts carrying the cams, 
connections consisting of the vertical arms 
and horizontal connecting link between said 
shafts, a sleeve on one of the said arms, a nut 
ro connected with said sleeve by a swivel bolt, 
CALVIN D. MARSH. 
Witnesses: 
J. CLINTON PHILL, 
A. N. ARMS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501621.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 501,621, 
 
 
C. J., JENCKS, 
SNAP HOOK, . 
Patented July 18, 1893, 
Ipiegfr 
C222/2Zee 2?e Zezzaca, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CALVIN J. JENCKS, OF REEDSBURG, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
J. B. RIGHTER, OF SAME PLACE. 
SNAP HOOK 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,621, dated July 18, 1893. 
Application filed March 31, 1893, Serial No. 468,434, (No model.) 
25 drawings. 
To all uphon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, CALVIN J. JENCKS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Reeds 
burg, in the county of Sauk and State of Wis 
5 consin, have invented a new and useful Snap 
Hook, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
snap-hooks and has for its object to construct 
to such device from a single piece of wire of 
preferable resiliency embodying the advan 
tages of safety, extreme simplicity, cheap 
ness, and one that can be easily manufactured. 
With these and other objects in view, the 
15 invention consists of the construction and ar 
rangement of the parts thereofas will be here 
inafter more fully described and claimed. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a snap-hook embodying the inven 
20 tion, showing a ring in connection there with. 
Fig.2 is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 
is a plan view thereof. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in the several figures of the 
Referring to the drawings, the numeral 1. 
designates the attaching loop, which is ar 
ranged to receive a strap or other attaching 
device, and extends transversely of the hook 
3o at one end. One end of the said loop Iis ex 
tended from the center upwardly and for 
wardly and then returned and terminating 
adjacent to the starting point thereof from 
the said loop, to thereby form a Spring-ja W2, 
35 that is obliquely arranged at an upward angle 
and has its members spaced apart and slightly 
bent or curved to facilitate the guiding of the 
ring 3 into the snap-hook proper. The oppo 
site end of the loop 1 is passed over the afore 
to said end and extended through the tWomen 
bers composing the jaw 2, and bent slightly 
downward and then upward in circular form 
to provide an eye 4 in which the ring 3 or 
other engaging device is located, and termi 
45 nates in a downwardly-bent curved jaw 5, 
that overlaps the upper end of the aforesaid 
jaw and terminates in an upturned end 6 that 
facilitates the entrance of the ring 3, or other 
engaging device, into the eye 4. It Will be 
 
50 
55 
75 
go 
seen that the upper end of the jaw 2, and the 
jaw 5, are normally in contact, and the up 
ward oblique position of the said jaw 2 pre 
vents the accidental disengagement of the 
ring 3 or other engaging device from the 
hook by being suddenly forced backwardly, 
as said movement Would cause the jaw 2 to 
be forced more closely against the jaw 5. The 
entrance to the eye 4, between the jaws 2 and 
5, being at a plane considerably above the 
level of the lower part of the eye 4, also pre 
vents an accidental disengagement of the ring 
or engaging device from the hook. It will be 
seen that the strain upon the hook will be 
equally divided, as all parts are alike affected 
in view of the integral and continuous for 
mation, and will stand a great amount of 
strain without becoming buckled or its effi 
ciency destroyed in any Way. In removing 
the ring, or other engaging device, the jaw 2 
is pressed downward, thereby forming a throat 
or passageway between the jaws 2 and 5 to 
form an easy egress for the said ring or other 
engaging device. 
Having described the invention, what is 
claimed as new is 
The herein described improved snap hook, 
the same constructed of a single piece of wire 
doubled upon itself at each side of its center, 
opposite which point its terminals cross, one 
of said terminals being disposed upward out 
of the plane of the loop thus formed and 
doubled upon itself forming a longitudinal 
loop through which the remaining terminal 
passes, and terminating at the point opposite 
the intersection of the two terminals, and the 
remaining terminal diverging from the longi 
tudinal loop and curved to form the hook, the 
free end of which terminates against the up 
per side of said longitudinal loop substan 
tially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
CALVIN J. JENCKS, 
Witnesses: 
C. C. STEVENS, 
G. C. GRISIM. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501721.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 501,721. 
 
s 
F. A., JOHNSON. 
RAILWAY CROSSING, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 18, 1893, 
  
282 by-e-o-o: 
62% 
6.6 6 
1246/7 
Y 
53 thia. attorneys 
 
8ve4lo 
rederies Sonnsom 
% f 
(No Model.) 
No. 501,721, 
' 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
. 
. 
F. A. JOHNSON, 
RAILWAY CROSSING, 
. 
. 
. 
Patented July 18, 1893. 
 
assSSSSS2anyS4 
2S 
es 
 
  
 
 
 
 
a 
as a 
Z 
gy N3N 2 
: 
at a 5 
 
2. 
 
26/2/2a4-12-1 
vibreece 
 6.45% 
wo 
7%deric-foohnson 
2%as-esz % 
... 
33 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK A. JOHNSON, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
JAMES H. EWANS, OF SAME PLACE. 
RALWAY CROSS N G, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,721, dated July 18, 1893. 
Application filed May 27, 1892, Serial No. 434,559 (No mode.) 
5 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FREDERICKA.JOHNSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Co 
lumbus, in the county of Franklin and State. 
of Ohio, have invented a certain new and use-- 
ful Improvement in Railway - Crossings, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to railway crossings or 
intersections and the objects of my invention 
are, to provide a simple and reliable means 
whereby a substantially continuous rail con 
nection is formed at track crossings or inter 
sections; to obviate the necessity of spacing 
the intersecting rails of a railway; to admit 
of the passage therethrough of the wheel 
flanges and to otherwise produce a substan 
tial and approximately continuous line of 
track rail at the crossings thereof. These ob 
jects I accomplish in the manner illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
crossing mechanism. Fig. 2 is a detail view 
in perspective shown partly in section of the 
side framework and means for locking the 
switch table. Fig. 3 is a central vertical sec 
tion on line acac of Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 is a de 
tail view in perspective, showing partly in 
section a portion of the table base and rack 
bar for moving the switch or crossing table. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
a represents the metallic base-plate or sta 
tionary portion of my improved crossing con 
sisting as shown, of a disk-shaped bottom por 
tion which is provided with an upwardly ex 
tending circumferential flange b, thus form 
ing substantially a cup-shape, as shown. The 
flange b is provided on its inner side with a 
shoulder b' which forms a circular seat there 
in, as shown. With the bottom portion of the 
casting aisformed upon the upper side thereof, 
a central upwardly projecting rounded bear 
ing projection bupon which is pivotally sup 
ported a central pivot block c, the latter hav 
ing formed in its under side a centralrounded 
socket which receives the projection bof the 
casting a, This central pivot block c is as 
shown in the drawings, provided with side 
shoulders or ledges d, upon which rest the in 
ner ends of I-beams or other frame beams e 
which extend horizontally therefrom and have 
- 
W 
their outer ends supported immediately above 
the shoulderb' of the base flangeb. As shown 
in the drawings, these I-beams e are connected 
by cross-beams e' which extend at right-an 55 
gles with the beams e between the latter at 
opposite sides of the central pivot block c. 
At desirable intervals, the frame-work thus 
formed has depending from the under side 
thereof, bearing blocks or boxings if between 
each pair of which is pivoted upon a shaft f, 
a balancing wheelf', said wheels being adapt 
ed to travel upon the base a. 
As shown at g, I provide the upper side of 
the pivot block c with a suitable depression 
or oil receptacle which communicates With 
the surface of the pivot projection b'through 
a suitable oil channelg', formed through the 
center of the block c. This oil depression g 
is normally covered by a suitable plate g. 
The frame-work produced by the connec 
tion and use of the beams e and e' is covered 
as partially shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings 
by suitable planks or sheeting h, thus pro 
ducing the circular platform h, shown. 
i. i* represent track rail sections which are 
supported and secured to the upper side of 
the platform h", said track section extend 
ing on opposite sides of the center of the plat 
form and forming chords of said platform 
circle. As shown in the drawings, the ends 
of these rails and their flanges are cut to 
correspond to the curve of the outer edge of 
the platform h with which they are flush. 
k; k and k' k' represent respectively por 
tions of rails which may be the main track 
rail, the ends of which as shown in the draw 
ings, rest upon the outer side of the flange b, 
the rail portions bearing corresponding ref 
erence letters being opposite or in alignment 
with each other. 
in m and m' m' respectively represent end 
portions of track rails, which extend at an 
angle with the rails lic k' and the ends of 
which rest upon the upper side of the base 
flange b. The inner ends of these rail por 
tions n' and n are cut to conform to the cir 
cle described by the outer edge of the plate 
form hadjacent to which they are supported 
As indicated at l, each of the rails in and m' 
has its flange on its outer side cut away to ad 
mitofthe ends of the railsick'abutting against 
75 
95 
go 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
SC 
501,721 
55 
75 
the sides of the rails m mand thus bringing table in position. It will thus be seen that by 
the surface of said rails adjacent to and flush 
my construction, a crossing or switch table is 
with each other. 
produced by means of which tracks which 
Formed in the base flange b is an elongated 
run at angles with each other may cross each 
slotted opening in. On the inner side of said 
other without the usual separation of the rails 
flange and opposite said slotted opening is ar-, 
at the point of intersection and that a con 
ranged a curved rack-bar o which is prefer 
nection of the rails may be produced which 
ably supported from the under side of the 
will obviate the wear or jolt usually contrib 
uted to cars passing over crossings. 
beams e. With the teeth of the rack bar o 
are adapted to engage the teeth o' of the 
It will be observed that my improved cross 
curved or rounded head o' of a suitable lever 
ing or switch table may be produced at a rea 
o, which may be fulcrumed at a suitable dis 
sonable cost of manufacture and without com 
tance from said crossing. At a point oppo 
plication, and that its construction is such as 
to require but slight power to operate the 
site the rack bar O is secured to the under 
side of the beams e and adjacent to the base 
Sale. 
flange b, a suitable bar p which is provided 
Having now fully described my invention, 
at desirable points with openings p. 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
q represents a stop-pin, passing through as 
Ratent, is 
suitable opening in the base-flange band be 
1. In a railway crossing, the combination 
ing surrounded by a coiled-spring otherein, 
of the basea, having flanged-sides b, a circu 
one end of which is connected with said stop 
lar frame pivoted centrally thereon as de 
pin and its inner, end bearing by the pressure 
scribed, permanent track rail sections i on 
of said spring against the outer side of the 
said frame having their ends cut to conform 
bar p. 
to the circle described by said frame and 
The method of operating and utilizingmy. 
- main or switch track rails having their ends 
improved railway crossing is; as follows: Sup 
cut in the arc of the circle described by said 
posing the crossing table to be in the position. 
frame and supported upon said base flange 
shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings, that is, with 
b, said rails adapted to be brought, as de 
the table rails in connection or in abutment 
scribed, into alignment with either said main 
With the inner ends of the track rails m 'm', 
or switch rails, substantially as specified. 
it will be seen that said table rails will serve. 
2. In a railway crossing, the combination 
to operate to preserve the continuity of said: 
of the base a, side flange b formed there with, 
rails m m'. In case it is desired to connect 
a circular frame pivoted centrally on said 
the rails k and k' and form-substantially a 
base, wheels f*journaled in boxings depend 
continuation of the latter at the crossing, the 
ing from said frame and adapted to bear on 
table h' may be rotated through movement of 
said base, permanent, track rail sections on 
the levero and its engagement with the rack 
said frame having their ends cut to conform 
o, until the ends of the table rails i are in 
to the circle described by said frame and main 
alignment with the ends of the railsk, c'. In 
or switch track rails having their ends cut in 
this manner it will be seen, that the angular: 
the arc of the circle described by said frame 
inner ends or points of the rails m will serve 
said rails i' adapted to be brought into align 
as filling pieces to provide a continuous track 
ment with said main or switch rails, substan 
tially as specified. 
surface from the rails to the rails lic. 
The 
openings p' of the bar pare so located in said: 
bar as to cause the ping to drop into one of: 
said openings when a connection of the rails 
of the above described character is effected, 
said pin thus serving to lock the crossing: 
In presence of - 
O. B. BAKER, 
C. C. SHEPHERD. 
FREDERICK A. JOHNSON. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501821.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 501,821, 
 
J. A. BROWNE. 
SADDIE BACS 
* 2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented July 18, 1893. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
r 
JULIAN AUGUSTUS BROWNE, OF KOSCIUSKO, MISSISSIPPI. 
SADD LE-BAGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,821, dated July 18, 1898. 
Application filed November 18, 1892, Serial No. 452,438, (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, JULIAN AUGUSTUS 
BROWNE, of Kosciusko, in the county of At 
tala and State of Mississippi, have inventedlcer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Saddle 
Bags; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it pertains to make and use 
it, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
saddle bags; and it consists in the novel com 
bination and arrangement of parts which will 
be fully described hereinafter, and more par 
ticularly referred to in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved medicine case which may be used 
either as a saddlebag or a handbag as desired. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my improved 
Fig. 2 is a 
case when used as a saddle bag. 
side elevation of the same when used as a 
hand bag. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of 
one of the bag sections when open. Fig. 4 is 
a detached view of the yoke strap. Fig. 5 is 
a detached view of the upper portion of one 
of the bag sections. 
As the bag sections are alike only One Will 
be referred to in the description thereof. 
A, designates the case having vertical sides 
and back preferably formed of leather se 
cured to a stiff frame of ordinary construc 
tion and which is provided with the out 
wardly turning front B, which is hinged at 
its lower end to the bottom of the case A. 
The leather top C, is secured to the rear up 
per edge of the case and is formed with the 
flap C, which turns down over the pivoted 
front section B, and which is secured to a stud 
D, projecting from the said section by a slid 
ing catch E, carried by said flap. This catch 
is forked vertically as shown at F, and these 
forked portions slide behind a loop F, Se 
cured to the flap. A tongue G, depends from 
the slide between the said forks and enters an 
opening in the stud thus acting as a bolt and 
making the connection of the flap with the 
stud very secure. One or more slidable bot 
tle holding shelves H, are arranged within 
the case while the inner face of the front B, 
is provided with loops H' as shown for hold 
ing small vials of medicine. When the said 
front is turned outward as shown in Fig. 3 
every portion of the case is easily accessible. 
Arranged on the upper ends of the rear walls 
of the respective cases are the horizontalbars 
I, and formed beneath these bars are the 
spaces or slots J, into which depend from the 
said bars the pins or projections K. L, des 
ignates a yoke strap having openings formed 
in its ends through which the said pins K, 
project when the ends of the said strap are 
inserted in the slots J, as shown in Fig.1 when 
the case is to be used as a saddlebag. A very 
secure hold is thus obtained by the strap on 
the sections of the case which is not liable to 
become disengaged from the jolting of the 
horse. 
When the case is used as a hand bag the 
yoke strap is removed from its position above 
described and the upper ends of the sections 
are secured together by the short strap L' pro 
jecting from one section into the slot of the 
other where it engages one of the pins K, as 
shown in Fig. 2. The yoke strap is then 
utilized for binding together the lower ends 
of the bag sections, being secured at its ends 
to the projecting studs D upon which they are 
held behind the catches E on the flaps A. 
Handles M, are secured to the bars I, and be 
ing quite close together may be easily grasped 
by one hand of the person carrying the same. 
Thus it will be seen that a most convenient 
convertible saddle or hand bag is provided 
which may be transformed from one to the 
other in a very short space of time. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of case sections each 
having a horizontal slot formed in its rear 
wall near its upper end, horizontal bars ar 
ranged over said slots, projections depending 
from said bars into said slots, and a yoke 
strap adapted to enter at its ends said slots 
where they are engaged by the said depend 
ing projections, substantially as shown and 
described. 
2. The combination of Saddle bag sections 
having slots in their adjacent Walls, transverse 
revoluble bars above the slots, lateral projec 
tions thereon adapted to be turned down 
across the slots and a yoke adapted to be in 
o 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
95 
OO 
2 
501,821 
serted through the slots and engaged by the 
said projections, substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. In a convertible saddle and hand bag, 
the combination, of two bag sections, a yoke 
strap adapted to pass around beneath the 
sections and upward on their outer sides, and a 
means for securing the strap ends to said outer 
sides, substantially as shown and described, 
4. In a convertible saddle and hand bag, 
the combination, of two bag sections, a means 
for securing together their upper ends, covers 
for the said bags, fastening devices on the 
Io 
outer bag sides for securing the covers when 
closed and a yoke strap adapted to extend 15 
around beneath the bags and upward on their 
outer sides where its ends are secured by said 
fastening devices, substantially as shown and 
described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 20 
JULIAN AUGUSTUS BROWNE. 
Witnesses: 
R. G. MCCOY, 
S. N. GILLILAND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US501922.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MEOHANISM FORTURNING PEARL BUTTONS OR OTHER ARTICLES, 
No. 501,922, 
Patented July 25, 1893. 
J. CLERET. 
S. 
S. 
S. 
  
  
 
  
 
LL 
2 
a 
H 
All 
() N 
 
W () 
| 2 | 
III 
 
(No Model.) 
MECHANISM FORTURNING PEARL BUTTONS OR OTHER ARTICLEs, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULES CLERET, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE J. 
CLERET PEARL BUTTON MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MECHANISM FOR TURNING PEARL BUTTONS OR OTHER ARTICLES, 
SeFCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 501,922, dated July 25, 1898, 
Application filed September 30, 1892, Serial No. 447,408, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JULES CLERET, a citi 
zen of the Republic of France, and a resident 
of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
5 a new and useful Improvementin Mechanism 
for Turning Pearl Buttons or other Articles, 
which is fully set forth in the following speci 
fication. 
This invention has reference to the con 
Io struction of tools and machinery for cutting 
or turning pearl buttons, though, of course, it 
is not limited to such use. 
In turning pearl buttons the tools have to 
act upon a very hard and brittle material, 
I5 and therefore are rapidly worn away by the 
frequent sharpening that is necessary in or 
der to maintain a cutting edge. These tools 
are ordinarily made of long thin bars of steel 
channeled or grooved along one face, so that 
2O a "cross-section of the tool presents on one 
edge the contour of the finished button. Tools 
made in this way can be used so long as 
enough of the stock remains to enable it to be 
secured in the holder. In Letters-Patent No. 
25 450,457, granted to me April 7, 1891, will be 
found a description of a pearl button machine 
in which a tool of this character is used. 
In making these tools it is difficult to cut 
the channels or grooves in a long flat bar of 
3o steel, and to perform the other operations of 
dressing and polishing. According to the 
present invention these operations are ren 
dered much more simple and easy by forming 
the stock of the tool in a ring which can be 
35 mounted on a circular rotating holder and 
readily cut and shaped to the desired pattern. 
When completed, the circular stock is cut 
into sections of convenient length, and one 
end ground off to form the cutting edge. 
4o These curved tools have certain advantages 
in use overstraight tools. For example, when 
held obliquely to the plane of rotation of the 
button blank, the curved tool offers greater 
resistance to the work, and cuts to better ad 
45 vantage than the straight tool. Moreover, it 
occupies less space lengthwise and can be 
more conveniently held and adjusted in its 
holder. 
As described in my former patent the sharp 
5o ening wheel or device was movable into and 
out of contact with the cutting end of the tool 
and the button chuck was supported on a 
movable carriage. According to the present 
invention the tool holder is carried by a slide, 
and the Workman moves the slide forward to 
cut the button and then withdraws it. The 
machine is so constructed that a furthermo 
tion backward will cause the tool holder to 
rotate until the end of the tool is brought into 
contact with the grinder. Thus by a simple 
eciprocating movement the tooi may be 
brought into contact with either the work at 
One end of its travel or the grinder at the 
other end, and a single operating handle gives 
all the necessary movements. 
In order, that the invention may be fully 
understood I will now describe the same in 
detail With the aid of the accompanying draw. 
ings which illustrate one embodiment of the 
invention. 
Figure I, is a plan view of a machine adapt 
ed specially for the turning of pearl buttons, 
and Fig. II is a longitudinal vertical section, 
omitting immaterial portions of the arbor and 
Supports of the grindstone. 
The cutting tool a conforms throughout to 
the arc of a circle, having the grooves, ribs, 
channels, (or other configurations, which are 
to give shape to the button,) on the outer rim 
or face, and extending from end to end of the 
tool, The latter is a section of a ring, as al 
ready stated, which after having been cut to 
proper shape, dressed and polished, is divided 
radially into sections of convenient length. 
A represents the tool carriage adapted to 
slide in suitable ways of the base plate B, be 
ing provided with an operating handle or le 
Ver C, pivoted at b to the base plate, and en 
gaging by a slot with a pin c on the tool car 
riage or slide. By means of this handle the 
Operator moves the tool carriage toward and 
away from the work holding chuck D, which 
may be of any ordinary construction. 
The tool-holder E comprises a chambered. 
block swiveled ate to the carriage. In the 
chamber of this block is a supporting plate F 
having an upturned flange against which rests 
the lower edge of the tool a. Plate F can be 
moved horizontally by an adjusting screw G 
to regulate the position of the cutting tool. 
The latter is clamped in operation by a set 
Screw 9, and further protected by a block H 
M, 
 
95 
OO 
2 
501,922 
O 
which is secured in place by suitable means holding chuck, of a tool-holder movable to 
ward and away from said chuck, and a curved 
which permit of its ready removal. In opera 
tool having its outer face shaped to give the 
tion, the work being rotated in chuckD moves, 
desired contour to the work, and supported 
at the point where the tool acts, in a down 
in said holder so that in operation the plane 
ward direction, and its plane of rotation is 
of rotation of the Work is approximately tan 
tangential to the arc of the tool. The latter 
gential to the curve of the tool, substantially 
therefore offers the greatest possible resist 
as described. 
ance to the work and cuts to the best advan 
2. The combination with the work-holding 
tage. 
chuck, of a curved tool, and a holder com 
The sharpening stone or grinder I is, as 
prising a chambered support, a plate against 
shown, supported directly in line with the 
which the inner end of the tool rests, means 
chuck, and tool carriage. At the rear of the 
for adjusting said plate in a right line, and 
latter is a rack Kadapted to engage with the 
means for clamping the tool in its operative 
segment of a pinion L, on the tool-holder E. 
position, substantially as described. 
So long as the tool is cutting properly the 
3. In a turning machine, provided with a 
workman moves the carriage forward until 
chuck, and a relatively stationary sharpener 
arrested by the adjustable stoph and back 
the combination of a tool carriage adapted to 
ward until the pinion L strikes the rack K. 
slide toward the chuck in one direction, and 
To sharpen the tool, the lever C is moved still 
toward the sharpener in the other, and a tool 
farther to the right, bringing rack Kand pin 
holder pivoted on said carriage and capable 
ion L into engagement, so that as the tool 
of rotation to bring the tool into contact with 
slide approaches the grinding wheel I, tool 
the grinder, substantially as described. 
holder E turns on its pivote until the end of 
4. In a turning machine, provided with a 
the tool a is brought into contact with the 
sharpener, and a work-holding chuck, the 
grinder and the sharpening effected. By this 
arrangement, the grinder being relatively sta 
combination of a tool-carriage, and a tool 
holder pivoted in said carriage and movable 
tionary, the workman does not have to release 
on its pivot to bring the tool in one position 
his operating lever and manipulate a movable 
into operative relation to said chuck, and in 
grinder to sharpen the tool. Moreover, the 
the other into contact with said sharpener, 
mechanism as a whole, besides being more ef 
substantially as described. 
fective, is simpler, more compact, and more 
5. The combination of a movable tool car 
easily constructed than those heretofore de 
riage, a relatively stationary sharpener, a tool 
signed for doing the same work. Preferably 
holder pivoted on said carriage, and gearing 
the relative positions of the tool-holder and 
coming into engagement as said carriage ap 
grinder are such that the latter grinds or 
proaches said sharpener and rotating said 
sharpens the tool in a plane intersecting the 
holder on its pivot, thereby bringing the cut 
outer face of the tool at an acute angle. 
ting edge of said tool into contact with the 
The rack K is supported by a cross bar ic' 
sharpener substantially as described. 
the latter being adjustably fastened to the 
6. In a turning machine provided with a 
base plate by screws ic, so that the rack can 
work-holding chuck, and a relatively station 
be adjusted lengthwise to regulate the angle 
ary sharpener, the combination of a carriage 
at which the grinder acts with reference to 
adapted to reciprocate in a path between the 
the face of the cutting tool. 
two, a tool-holder pivoted on said carriage, and 
The constructions and dispositions of the 
means (such as a rack and pinion) for turn 
several parts of the machine herein described, 
ing said holder on its pivot so as to present 
and shown in the accompanying drawings, 
the end of the tool to the latter, substantially 
present what is deemed the best embodiment 
of the principle of the invention; but it will 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
be obvious that these forms and arrange 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ments admit of much modification, and that 
ing witnesses. 
parts of the invention may be used without 
others. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. In a machine for turning buttons or 
other articles, the combination with a work 
E. L. BUCHEY, 
ALFRED JONHEIMER. 
JULES CLERET. 
Witnesses: 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502022.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 502,022, 
E. THOMSON. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
ELECTRIC MEASURING INSTRUMENT, 
8. 
Patented July 25, 1893, 
 
 
 
S. 
-- 
WitNesses 
NVENT or 
 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
E, THOMSON. 
ELECTRIC MEASURING INSTRUMENT, 
Patented July 25, 1893. 
Fig.-E.- 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 502,022, . 
 
 
WitNesses 
62&c.5%acelerael. 
sub 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIHU THOMSON, OF SWAMPSCOTT, ASSIGNOR TO THE GENERAL ELECTRIC 
COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ELECTRIC MEASURING-INSTRUMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,022, dated July 25, 1893. 
Application filed February 17, 1893, Serial No. 462,795, (No model.) 
55 
s 
fication. 
To all, whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, ELIHU THOMSON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Swamp 
Scott, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Electric Measuring 
Instruments, of which the following is a speci 
My invention relates to an electric measur 
ing instrument, and provides a simple and re 
liable instrument for the measurement of con 
tinuous currents. To this end, I utilize as a 
moving part a permanent magnet, the poles 
of which are closely approximated while be 
tWeen them is situated a stationary plate of 
Copper, or other good conducting material, 
Which is traversed by the current to be meas. 
ured, in a direction transverse to the field 
magnet poles. The plates which convey the 
Current are at the same time adapted to 
'damp' the Oscillations of the magnet, so 
that the instrument becomes thoroughly 
dead-beat. 
In the accompanying drawings hereby re 
ferred to and made part of this specification 
in which like letters of reference indicate like 
parts, I have illustrated an embodiment of 
my invention; and in them Figure 1 is a front 
elevation. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of a de 
tail, and Fig. 3 a side elevation of an instru 
ment embodying my invention. Figs. 4, 5 
and 6 are views of modified forms of the con 
ducting plate affording varied scale readings. 
Fig. 7 is a side view of the parts shown in 
Fig. 6, the scale being omitted. Fig. 8 is a 
front elevation, and Fig. 9 a side elevation of 
a modified form of the instrument, designed 
to measure current and indicate its direction 
at the same time. Figs. 10 and 11 are views 
of the plates used in the modified form, and 
Fig. 12 is a diagram of the course of the cur 
rent in the plates shown in Figs. 10 and 11. 
Mounted on a vertical base plate B by stand 
ards insulated at A A', is a flat plate of cop 
per C, connected to wires TT, whereby a cur 
rent may be caused to traverse the plate C in 
an approximately vertical direction, as indi 
cated by the arrows on the plate. Spanning 
this plate, With poles closely adjacent to its 
sides, is a magnet M of hardened steel, made 
as permanent as possible, the bend of the mag 
These 65 
Attached to the upper edge of the plate, 6o 
net being at the top and the closely spanning 
poles being at the lower part, as shown more 
clearly in Fig. 3, where C is the conducting 
plate, as before, T the lower terminal, and T 
the upper current terminal of the plate. The 
current from T is led by a bridge piece b at the 
back into the two upper corners of the plate 
Cat e,f, Fig. 1. 
preferably, although such attachment may 
be made to any other stationary portion of 
the apparatus, is a bearing D, in Fig. 2, for a 
knife edge E, secured to the magnet between 
its limbs by proper clamps, K. K. 
clamps K K carrying the knife edge E also 
carry the index or pointer J, which, in Fig. 1, 
traverses the scale S from left to right. 
At the center of the knife edge a portion is 
cut away for a small piece F which is at 
tached to the support D and forms a thrust 
bearing, serving to keep the magnet M. clear 
of contact at its poles with the plate C. An 
adjustable counterpoise L. may be provided to 
set the center of gravity of the structure at 7 
5 
the proper distance below the edge of the 
knife edge. It will be seen from the arrange 
ment that the magnet M is free to swing and 
carry the pointer or index J from right to left 
in Fig. 1. 
by being attached to the magnet M, which 
has a field of some intensity and passes adja 
cent to the conductor plate C; thus the mag 
net, when set into vibration as a pendulum, 
at once comes to rest. The counterpoising of 85 
the magnet is such that the center of gravity 
is just below and a little to one side of the 
knife edge, so that in the normal position it 
stands about as in Fig. 1. 
It may, however, 
be so hung that it normally stands vertical, go 
in which case it becomes an indicator not only 
of the strength of the current but also of the 
direction, its movement being to the right or 
to the left in accordance with the direction of 
the current through the conductor plate C. 95 
Instead of relying upon the gravitational ef 
fects, the deflecting action may be, either in 
whole or in part against the power of a spring, 
one end of which is attached to the moving 
structure and the other end to the fixed sup- Ioo 
port, as indicated in Fig. 2 where Z is such 
a spring. In any case the passage of cur 
The pointer is, however, steadied 8o 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
2 
502,022 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
an adjustable weight, W, for adjusting its 
rent by the terminal wires or connections T 
T through the conducting plate C will have 
center of gravity. The supports of the mag 
net are in knife edges, as before, and the field 
the direction which is proper to cause a de 
embraces plate C, which in this case instead 
flection of the magnet M, Fig. 1, such that the 
of being single, is constructed of several lay 
index J traverses the scale from left to right 
in that figure, and to a distance which may 
ers or laminae insulated from each other and 
clamped together to form one structure. The 
be according to the loading, which may be 
blanks from which the part C is made are 
greater or less. If the apparatus be set so as 
shown separately in Fig. 11; several of these 
to be very sensitive, that is, to have its cen 
are coupled up one back of another to form a 
ter of gravity very close to the point of sup 
port, a large deflection for a given current 
continuous circuit in which the current flow 
is practically as represented in Fig. 12. Each 
Will be obtained. If, on the other hand, its 
plate has a trapezoidal body with tongues 
Center of gravity be at some distance below 
extending from it for the terminals; and this 
its point of support, a larger current will be 
is substantially the shape of all the plates 
required to produce any considerable deflec 
herein referred to. The current entering 
tion. The center of gravity may be raised or 
lowered by moving the weight Lup and down from the terminal T, Fig. 8, would pass into 
the first plate or front plate at it shown in 
on its stem. The apparatus thus shown will 
give an approximate, though not an absolute, edge view, Fig. 10. 
It then from t passes 
forward to the left and down through the 
uniformity of deflection for equal increments 
of current, and furnishes a very simple type middle or triangular portion of the plate C, 
as indicated in Fig. 11, and thence upward 
of dead-beat ammeter, not subject to con 
through the portion u, which connects with a 
tinued Oscillations when care has been taken 
tongue or extension of a similar blank re 
in the construction of the magnet M, and the 
; versed, shown in dotted lines displaced down 
"Seasoning thereof has been such as to leave 
it practically unchanging by time. 
ward to more clearly show the construction. 
The particular kind of scale for this instru 
The current from the first plate thus enters 
the second plate and passes between the mag 
ment will depend on the points at which cur 
net poles as before outward and upward 
rent is passed into and out of the plate C. 
through the part it, Fig. 11, which is again 
Thus, in Fig. 4, passage of current from the 
part T to T, if the magnetism of the magnet connected to an entering terminal like the 
be in the right direction, will give a deflection 
first plate; and so the connections are con 
of a magnet and index arranged as in Fig. 1 
tinued until all the plates of the series are 
Over the scale S which will be approximately 
traversed, the current leaving on the last 
tongue of the last plate at t Fig. 10 (shown in 
proportional to current strengths, or nearly 
uniform in its deflection per unit of current 
dotted lines in Fig. 8), connected to the out 
strength. In general the indications for given 
going terminal T. The current in its trav 
erse practically makes a figure 8 and moves 
strengths will be a little closer near the mid 
in an S-shaped direction in each plate, as in 
dle of the Scale than at or aear its ends, it be 
ing assumed that in no case do the poles of 
dicated in Fig. 12 by arrows; entering at the 
the magnet pass off the face of the conduct 
left hand upper corner of the figure on the 
ing plate. With the magnet, index, and a 
solid line, the current passes down on that 
Scale beginning at the left arranged as in Fig. 
line, to the right on the solid line at the bot 
1 applied to a plate C such as is shown in 
tom of the figure, up on the solid line to the 
Fig. 5, if current be passed in at point T and 
left of the center, to the right on the lower 
solid line at the top of the right hand part of 
out at T the deflections for small currents 
will be greater as the magnet moves from left 
the figure, down on the inner solid line at the 
right hand side of the figure, to the left on 
to right than for large currents; and the scale 
divisions will be spaced farther apart at the 
the bottom solid line, up on the left hand 
beginning than at the end of the index-swing. 
dotted line in the center of the figure, then 
This effect would be reversed if the current 
down the dotted lines to the bottom of the 
be passed between Tand T8 with the magnet 
right hand solidline in the center of the figure, 
arranged as before. 
thence passing as finally indicated by the 
In Figs. 6 and 7 another arrangement of 
arrows out again at the left hand upper cor 
the conducting plate C is shown, where it is 
ner of the figure. This multiplies its effect 
offset from the terminals TT on studs, as at 
and allows a number of convolutions to af 
gh, leaving the plate C in a more convenient 
fect the deflection. 
It will further be ob 
position for adjustment of the relations of the 
served that the currents pass in a substan 
moving magnet. 
tially vertical direction through the bodies 
of the plates Cassisting to compound their 
Where it is desired that instead of the sin 
gle passage of current in the plate between 
effect. The plates C on account of their ex 
the poles of the magnet, there shall be a mul 
tent between the poles of the magnet act to 
tiplied effect due to its repeated passage, an 
allow generation of currents on a movement 
of the magnet and give a  damping action, 
arrangement such as is shown in Figs. S to 12, 
inclusive, may be adopted. The magnet Mis 
as obtained in the apparatus illustrated in 
the previous figures. 
mounted as before except that it is provided 
It is manifest that changes may be made 
with a metallic frame carrying a screw and 
75 
90 
OC 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4C) 
55 
 
502,022 
O 
25 
in the arrangements described without vary 
ing from my invention; for instance the mag 
net might be hung at the bottom of the plate 
instead of the top, being suitably counter 
poised; or it might be hung horizontally. 
For any of the arrangements thus shown an 
adjustment of the indexes may be had by 
Varying the course of the current through the 
plate. Taking for illustration Fig. 5 of the 
drawings, the current might be passed, as ex 
plained in this specification, from T to T' giv 
ing an increased value to the scale readings 
on the left, or from T to T8 giving such an 
increase to the scale readings on the right, 
or the terminals TT and T T8 may be con 
nected by bridges when the current will pass 
approximately vertically and the scale parts 
Will have equal value. As this may be made 
an important means of adjusting the instru 
ment to the purpose required, I desire espe 
cially to cover it in this application. 
I am aware of the patent to Madison M. 
Garver, No. 425,069 dated April 8, 1890, where 
in a construction in some respects similar to 
the one I have adopted is used; but the instru 
ment there shown employs the astatic princi 
ple of balanced magnetisms and differs es 
sentially in principle from the one I prefer. 
I do not therefore wish to claim anything 
shown in that patent, but 
What I claim, and desire to protect by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. An electric measuring instrument com 
posed of a single balanced horse-shoe magnet 
With its poles closely approximated and a 
plate interposed between the poles of the 
magnet, the plate conducting the current to 
be measured at an approximate right angle 
to the field of the magnet, substantially as 
described. 
2. An electric measuring instrument com 
posed of a single vertically suspended horse 
shoe magnet with its poles closely approxi 
mated and a plate interposed between them, 
the plate conducting the current to be meas 
ured through the field of the magnet, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. An electric measuring instrument com 
posed of a single oscillating horse-shoe mag 
net having its poles closely approximated, 
and a plate interposed between them; the 
plate conducting the current through the field 
of the magnet, substantially as described. 
4. In an electric measuring instrument, the 
combination of a single oscillating magnet 
having its poles closely approximated and a 
plate interposed between them conducting 
the current to be measured at an approxi 
mate right angle to the field of the magnet; 
the magnet being provided with an adjust 
able counterpoise, whereby its angular dis 
placement may be varied, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. In an electric measuring instrument the 
combination of an oscillating magnet, as de 
scribed, with a plate conducting the current 
to be measured between its poles, as herein 
set out; the magnet provided with a knife 
edged bearing having a thrust-check prevent 
ing its longitudinal movement and the con 
tact of the magnet with the plate, substan 
tially as described. 
6. In an electric measuring instrument a 
conducting and damping plate consisting 
of a trapezoidal body and tongues extending 
therefrom connecting with the circuit termi 
nals, substantially as set forth. 
7. In an electric measuring instrument the 
combination of a single oscillating magnet, as 
described, with a conducting and damping' 
plate placed between its poles and carrying 
he current to be measured; the plate being 
formed with a trapezoidal body and tongues 
extending therefrom connecting with the cir 
cuit terminals, whereby the current is caused 
to flow at an approximate right angle to the 
field of the magnet, substantially as described. 
8. In an electric measuring instrument the 
combination of a single oscillating horse-shoe 
magnet having its poles closely approximate 
and mounted upon an arbor having knife 
edged bearings and a thrust check, and a 
plate interposed between the poles of the mag 
net and formed with a trapezoidal body and 
tongues extending therefrom to the circuit 
terminals, substantially as set forth. 
9. In an electric measuring instrument the 
combination with a base plate, as BB, of a 
plate, as C, carrying the current between suit 
able terminals, as TT, and a vibrating horse 
shoe magnet, as M, provided with an index, 
as I, reciprocating upon a scale, as S.; the mag 
net being counterpoised by suitable means, 
as I, and having its poles closely approxi 
mated to the plate, substantially as described. 
10. In an electric measuring instrument an 
oscillating magnet, as described, in combina 
tion with a plate interposed between its poles 
and carrying the current to be measured; the 
plate composed of laminae in series insulated 
from one another, all carrying current adja 
cent to the magnet poles in substantially the 
same direction, substantially as set forth. 
11. In an electric measuring instrument an 
oscillating magnet, as described, in combina 
tion with a plate formed with a trapezoidal 
body and tongues extended to connect with 
adjacent plates of a similar shape and reversed 
in position, and thereby making connection 
with the circuit terminals, the plates carrying 
the current to be measured and composed of 
laminae in series insulated from one another, 
substantially as described. 
12. In an electric measuring instrument 
composed of an oscillating magnet carrying 
an index and a stationary plate between its 
poles conducting the current to be measured, 
the method of adjusting the index readings 
which consists in varying the course of the 
current through the plate relative to the mag 
netic field, substantially as set forth. 
13. In an electric meter or measuring in 
strument a suspended horseshoe magnet or 
its equivalent with its poles closely approxi 
55 
bo 
 
75 
go 
95 
IOd 
IO 
II5 
I25 
I30 
4. 
502,022 
mated to the opposite sides of a plate or plates 
interposed between said poles, means for pass 
ing current through the plate in a direction 
from or toward the pivot of the suspended 
nagnet, the center of gravity of such magnet 
being arranged with respect to its pivot so as 
to cause the poles of the magnet at rest, and 
Without current flowing in the plate, to lie 
near the edge or side of the conducting and 
damping plate, as described. 
14. The combination in an electric meter or 
measuring instrument of a stationary damp 
ing and conducting disk or plate, traversed 
by the currents to be measured, and which 
currents flow in a direction from or toward a 
pivot for a magnet, a magnet mounted on the 
pivot at or near the edge of the disk or plate, 
and whose poles embrace or pass over in prox 
IO 
-w 
imity to said disk or plate without touching the 
same, and an index actuated by said magnet. 
15. In an electric measuring instrument a 
darimping and conducting plate through which 
the currents to be measured are passed, a 
horseshoe magnet having expanded pole areas 
embracing said plate and pivoted at or near 
the center of gravity of the magnet, whereby 
it is suspended and free to move in planes 
parallel with the plate, and an index or scale 
for indicating the movements. 
In witness whereof I have here unto Set my 
hand this 10th day of February, 1893. 
25 
ELIHU THOMSON. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. GIBBONEY, 
BENJAMIN B. HULL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502122.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1 
W. H. HOWARD. 
COMBINED SKIMMER AND SWEATER. 
No. 502,122, 
 
Patented July 25, 1893. 
W.NTOR 
767,76evevec, N 
AT TORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. H. HOWARD. 
COMBINED SKIMMER AND SWEATER, 
No. 502,122, 
Patented July 25, 1893. 
 
 
s 
e 
.I. 
NI is: 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. HO WARD, OF PU E BLO, COLOR ADO. 
COMBINED S K MMER AND SWEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,122, dated July 25, 1893. 
Application filed January 31, 1893. Serial No. 460,297, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. How ARD, 
of Pueblo, in the county of Pueblo and State 
of Colorado, have invented a new and Im 
proved Combined Skimmer and Sweater, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The invention relates to apparatus used for 
desilverizing lead bullion in the zinc pot. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved combined skimmer and 
SWeater designed for use in zinc pots contain 
ing the molten argentiferous lead and metal 
lic zinc, the device being arranged for con 
veniently skimming the zinc and silver alloy 
rising to the surface, and also for sweating 
out the mechanically combined lead removed 
from the pot with the scum. 
The invention consists of hinged perfo 
rated plates adapted to be passed into the 
Zinc pot in a folded condition, and then 
opened therein and raised to carry off the 
Zinc and silver alloy and to drain off the metal 
lic lead. 
The invention also consists of certain parts 
and details, and combinations of the same, as 
will be hereinafter described and then point 
ed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of the improve 
ment as applied to the zinc pot, the latter be 
ing shown in section. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
side elevation of the same, and Fig. 3 is a 
sectional plan view of the same on the line 
3-3 of Fig. 2. 
The improved device is used in connection 
with the ordinary zinc pot A, containing the 
molten argentiferous lead and the metallic 
zinc added to the same and thoroughly stirred 
therein, SO as to form, when the pot cools, a 
Zinc Scum which carries the silver-and rises 
to the surface to be skimmed off and removed 
from the pot. 
The device is provided with two perforated 
plates B and B, preferably made semi-circu 
lar in shape to conform to the contour of the 
plates being connected with 
pot A, the said 
each other by hinges B at their upper edges 
and are also pivotally-connected at B at the 
center with the lower end of a screw rod C 
screwing in a suitable nut D held on a car 
riage E mounted to travel longitudinally on 
a suitable overhead track F to carry the de 
vice to and from the pot A. 
On the screw rod U is mounted to slide 
loosely a sleeve G provided with arms H, the 
lower ends of which are pivotally-connected 
by links I with brackets J projecting from 
the free ends of the plates B and B', so that 
when the sleeve G is caused to slide upward 
on the rod C the plates B and B' swing up 
wardly through the molten mass in the pot 
A until the plates finally assume a horizontal 
position near the top of the pot A, as indicated 
in dotted lines in Fig.1. 
In order to raise the sleeve G, I connect the 
horizontal parts of the arms H with chainsK, 
winding on drums L both secured on a hori 
Zontally-extending shaft L' mounted to turn 
in suitable bearings secured to the carriage 
E. On the shaft L' is secured a worm wheel 
L* in mesh with a worm L' secured on a shaft 
I also mounted to turn in suitable bearings 
on the carriage E and carrying at one Outer 
end a sprocket wheel L over which passes a 
chain Ladapted to be actuated by the oper 
ator for conveniently turning the said wheelL 
to rotate the shaft L' and the worm L, which 
latter then rotates the worm wheel Land the 
shaft L' so that the drums L wind up the 
chains K to raise the sleeve G to open the 
plates B and B', as before described. When 
the wheel L is turned in the opposite direc 
tion, the drums L,L, are rotated to unwind 
the chains K, so as to lower the sleeve G on 
the screw rod C to close the plates B and B' 
before the latter are inserted into the pot A. 
The nut D previously mentioned carries a 
bevel gear wheel N in mesh with a bevel pin 
ion N' secured on one end of a shaft O jour 
naled in suitable bearings on the carriage E. 
On the outer end of this shaft O is secured a 
sprocket wheel O'over which passes a sprocket 
chain O also adapted to be actuated by the 
operator in charge of the device for turning 
the said wheel O', the shaft O, pinion N and 
gear wheel N to rotate the nut D, so as to 
raise and lower the screw rod C to move the 
apparatus in and out of the pot A. 
The operation is as follows: When the pot 
A is filled with argentiferous lead and on its 
Ed. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
2 
502,122 
O 
surface floats the zinc and silver alloy ready 
to skim off, then the two semi-circular plates 
B and B' are lowered into the pot A in a 
closed position, and then the operator manipu 
lates the chain L' so as to wind up the chains 
K on the drums I, to lift the sleeve G, as pre 
viously described, whereby the plates B and 
B', are opened to finally assume a horizontal 
position near the top of the pot A, and the 
zinc scum floats on the top of the plates B 
and B on the surface of the lead. The de 
vice is then very slowly raised by the opera 
tor manipulating the chain O'so as to revolve 
the nut D to raise the screw rod C and the 
plates B and B' held thereon and extended 
in a horizontal position, as previously de 
scribed. During this operation of slowly rais 
ing the perforated plates B and B', any scum 
near the edges of the pot is moved by a suit 
able tool upon the top of the plates. As soon 
as the latter ale raised until the upper sur 
face on which the zinc scum rests is out of 
the lead, then the apparatus is allowed to re 
main still for a few minutes to permit the 
mechanically combined lead in the zinc scum 
to drain out and back into the pot A over the 
edges and through the perforations of the 
plates B and B'. When this so-called sweat 
ing has gone far enough, the plates B and B' 
are rapidly raised by further raising the screw 
rod C, as previously described, until the plates 
are entirely free of the pot and then the car 
riage E with the apparatus supported thereon 
is pulled along outside of the pot and the 
skimmings on the plates B and B' are dumped 
on the floor by again closing the plates B and 
B' in the manner previously described. 
It will be seen that this apparatus acts both 
as a large skimmer capable of removing the 
whole of the scum in one operation, and also 
utilizes the heat of the molten lead in the pot 
A to perform the process of sweating to re 
move the surplus lead. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The method of skimming molten lead 
which consists in passing a perforated skim 
mer beneath the scum and raising the skim 
mer slowly until its upper surface on which 
the Scum rests is out of the lead, then hold 
ing the skimmer stationary on the surface of 
the lead (where it will be kept hot) until the 
mechanically combined lead in the scum is 
freed therefrom and drains through the skim 
mer, Substantially as shown and described. 
2. A lead skimming apparatus comprising 
a carriage, a skimmer suspended below the 
carriage and adapted to be raised and low 
ered bodily toward and from the carriage; 
said skimmer being pivoted at one edge to its 
suspending medium to permit it to be swung 
down to enter the pot with its lower Cr free 
edge and adjusting mechanism for swinging 
the skimmer on its axis, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. A combined skimmer and Sweater, Com 
prising perforated plates hinged together, a 
screw rod adapted to be raised and lowered 
and pivotally-connected with the said plates, 
and means, substantially as described, for 
opening and closing the said plates, as set 
forth. 
4. A combined skimmer and Sweater, Com 
prising perforated plates hinged together, a 
screw rod adapted to be raised and lowered 
and pivotally-connected with the said plates, 
means, substantially as described, for open 
ing and closing the said plates, and a carriage 
for supporting the said plates, screw rod and 
means for actuating the same, substantially 
as shown and described. 
5. A combined skimmer and sweater, com 
prising a screw rod adapted to be raised and 
lowered, perforated plates hinged on the said 
screw rod, a sleeve fitted to slide on the Said 
screw rod, and links pivotally-connecting the 
said sleeve with the free ends of the said 
plates, substantially as shown and described. 
6. A combined skimmer and SWeater, Com 
prising a screw rod adapted to be raised and 
lowered, perforated plates hinged on the said 
screw rod, a sleeve fitted to slide on the said 
screw rod, links pivotally-connecting the said 
sleeve with the free end of the said plates, 
and means, substantially as described, for 
raising and lowering the said sleeve to open 
and close the plates, as set forth. 
7. A combined skimmer and sweater, com 
prising a screw rod adapted to be raised and 
lowered, perforated plates hinged on the said 
screw rod, a sleeve fitted to slide on the said 
screw rod, links pivotally-connecting the said 
sleeve with the free end of the said plates, 
means, substantially as described, for raising 
and lowering the said sleeve to open and close 
the plates, and means, substantially as de 
scribed, for raising and lowering the said screw 
rod, as set forth. 
WILLIAM II. HOWARD. 
Witnesses: 
E. P. MATHEWSON, 
W. J. HAMILTON. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
Od 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502222.txt	(No Model.) 
W. F. BURNS 
AUTOMATIC WEIGHING AND RECORDIN 
G SCALE 
No. 502,222, 
Patented July 25, 1893, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER FRANCIS BURNS, OF SAN FRANCIS CO, CALIFORNIA. 
AUTOMATC W E G H ING AND RECORD ING SCALE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,222, dated July 25, 1893, 
Application filed February 28, 1893, Serial No. 464,039, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
85 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER FRANCIS 
BURNS, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing in the city and county of San Francisco, 
State of California, have invented an Im 
provement in Automatic Weighing and Re 
cording Scales; and I hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same, 
My invention relates to a weighing appa 
ratus, which is also adapted to record weights, 
and to deliver one card containing the record, 
and retain the other as a check. 
It consists in certain details of construc 
tion which will be more fully explained by 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a rear elevation of a platform 
scale, with section through the casing show 
ing the attachment of my apparatus. Fig. 2 
is a lateral cross section through the casing 
and connections. Fig. 3 represents a card to 
be used in connection. With my Scales. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
Scale. for ordinary Weighing purposes having 
an attachment by which the weight actuates 
a printing-wheel having figures upon its pe 
riphery, and in conjunction there with a re 
ceiver into which cards are introduced; a 
mechanism by which the cards are brought 
into contact with the printing wheels, where 
by the weight is recorded simultaneously 
upon the two parts of the card; a means for 
severing one of these parts, and delivering it 
into a locked receptacle where it is retained 
until removed by the proper officer. 
Aisa platform scale, to which I have shown 
my invention adapted, in the present case 
having a vertical post B through which the 
rod C extends in the usual manner to connect 
the weighing levers in the platform portion 
of the scale with the indicating mechanism 
at the upper end. Upon the upper part of 
the scale is mounted a pair of printing-Wheels 
D having the requisite number of figures 
marked upon the periphery. These wheels 
are journaled upon a horizontal shaft E suit 
ably journaled in standards F supported upon 
the upper part of the Scale frame. Upon this 
shaft is fixed a pinion G, and this is engaged 
by a segmental rack H. pivoted or fulcrumed, 
as shown at I, and having upon the Opposite 
arm another segment J which engages the 
vertically moving rack bar K. This rack bar 
is connected with the rod C so as to partake 
of the vertical movements of the latter when 
the weight is placed upon the scale. 
In the upper part of the casing, into which 
the rack bar IX projects at the top of thema 
chine, is a spring L connected with the up 
per part of the rack bar, and having its ten 
Sion properly adjusted by a screw and nut, 
as shown at M, so that whenever a weight is 
placed upon the scale, it will draw the rack 
bar Kdownward to a point which is regulated 
by the tension of the spring L. The rack bar 
acts to turn the segment J, and through the 
connecting arms between it, the fulcrum I 
and the segment H, the latter is caused to turn, 
and as it engages the pinion G upon the shaft 
of the printing-wheels D, it will be manifest 
that the latter will be rotated in proportion to 
the weight which is placed upon the scale. 
The figures upon the peripheries of these 
wheels are so arranged that those figures 
which indicate the weight upon the scale will 
be presented downward. 
The whole apparatus is inclosed within a 
Suitable case, and through one side of the 
case is made a slotted guide N adapted to re 
ceive tickets which are formed as shown at O, 
and may be of any suitable or desirable form 
Or description for the purpose. These tickets 
When slipped into the slot N pass directly 
beneath the wheels D, as shown plainly in 
Fig. 2, so that one end of the ticket will stand 
beneath one of the wheels, and an interme 
diate portion between it and the other end 
Will standibeneath the other wheel. This card 
support and platen is mounted upon a lever 
P fulcrumed at Q, as shown in Fig. 2, and hav 
ing an upwardly projecting arm P' with a lug 
or stop Pat the upper end. 
R is a lever arm fulcrumed upon the same 
pin Q, and extending alongside of the upright 
P', and beneath the lug P. A spring S re 
tains this lever normally in the position shown 
in Fig. 1, and in this position the slot remains 
open for the introduction of a ticket as pre 
viously described. The lever R is then raised 
and by reason of its contact with the lug P3 
it lifts the lever P, and with it a ticket which 
is brought into contact with the figures upon 
the lower part of the printing-wheels, and 
3o 
35 
45 
 
95 
ICO 
502,222 
these figures are thus impressed upon a card 
at two points as before described. The lever 
R is then pressed downwardly, and it carries 
a cutting blade at the point T just over the 
card which has been introduced. This cut 
ting blade may be attached to or formed upon 
the lower edge of the lever R at this point, 
and when the lever is pressed down it severs 
one end of the card which drops through an 
opening U and falls into a locked receptacle 
W in line beneath the platen upon which the 
cards are placed when being printed. The 
remainder of the card can be withdrawn at 
will and delivered to the one interested. 
In case of luggage which is to be carried by 
railways, it may be required by the rules of 
the company that no one can purchase a ticket 
until he presents a card showing the Weight 
of his luggage. This will be the outer por 
tion of a card printed by the apparatus here 
in described, and the corresponding inner end 
of the card will be retained in the secret re 
ceptacle, and afterward serve as a check 
upon all luggage which has been weighed and 
sent away by the train. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A weighing and recording apparatus, 
consisting of a scale, a vertically moving rod 
connected with the weighing levers of the 
scale, a spring with which the upper end of 
said rod is connected, the tension of which de 
termines the vertical movement of the rod 
caused by any weight placed upon the scale, 
inclosed printing-wheels fixed upon the rotat 
ing shaft, a pinion fixed to said shaft, a double 
segmental rack, one arm of which engages the 
pinion, and the other the vertically moving 
rack-bar, an intermediate fulcrum to which 
the uniting arm of said racks is pivoted, a 
platen or support where cards are introduced 
beneath the printing-wheels, and a lever 
mechanism whereby the cards are raised into 
contact with the back of the printing-wheels, 
substantially as herein described. 
2. A weighing and recording apparatus con 
sisting of a scale, a vertically moving rod ex 
tending upwardly from the weighing levers 
of the scale, a spring fixed above said rod and 
connecting with its upper end, the tension of 
said spring determining the amount of move 
ment of the rod caused by any weight placed 
upon the scale, a pair of wheels fixed to a 
horizontally rotating shaft and having corre 
sponding rows of type upon their peripheries, 
a pinion fixed to the shaft of said printing 
wheels, a double segmental rack fulcrumed 
between the pinion and the vertically moving 
rack, the teeth upon One part of the segment 
engaging those of the pinion, and upon the 
other end engaging those of the rack, whereby 
the movement of the rack-bar caused by a 
weight upon the scale will rotate the printing 
wheels and present corresponding figures 
upon the lower surface of the wheels, a table 
or platen upon which a card is introduced be 
neath the wheels, a lever upon which said 
platen is supported, a second lever fulcrumed 
and engaging a lug upon the first named lever 
whereby the latter is raised and the card 
brought into contact with the printing-wheels 
when the lever is raised, a knife carried by 
the second lever and adapted to sever the 
card into two parts on a line between the two 
sets of figures, and a receptacle into which 
one of said parts falls when severed, substan 
tially as herein described. 
3. A weighing and recording mechanism, 
consisting of a platform scale, printing-wheels 
mounted side by side upon a horizontally ro 
tating shaft, a mechanism interposed between 
the printing-wheels and the vertically mov. 
ing platform of the scale, whereby the move 
ments of the platform are transmitted so as 
to rotate the printing-wheels, an adjustable 
spring connected with said intermediate 
mechanism whereby any weight upon the 
platform will act upon the spring and also 
upon the mechanism by which the printing 
wheels are rotated so as to present figures rep 
resenting said weight at the lower part of the 
wheel, a table or support and a slotted guide 
through which a card is introduced upon said 
table in line beneath the printing-wheels, a 
lever mechanism whereby the card is first 
raised and duplicate imprints made upon it 
by the two wheels, a cutter by which when 
the card is again depressed the inner end con 
taining one of the imprints is severed from 
the outer end, and a locked containing case 
into which said inner end is deposited leav 
ing the outer end free to be removed, substan 
tially as herein described. 
in witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
WALTER FRANCIS BURNS. 
Witnesses: 
S. II. NOURSE, 
GEO. H. STRONG. 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502322.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 502,322. 
P. SCHARF. 
ELEORIO INOANDESOENT LAMP, 
Patented Aug. l. l893, 
A 6, 7 
 
A 29, 2 
Az/.3 
%77zesses: 
3% Za.52427 
3, 2%. (342.2%/ry. 
Azzezz707, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL SCHARF, OF VIENNA, AUSTRIA-HUNGARY. 
ELECTRIC IN CAND ESCENT LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,322, dated August 1, 1898. 
Application filed April 17, 1893, Serial No. 470,701 (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PAUL SCHARF, a subject 
of the Emperor of Austria-Hungary, residing 
at Vienna, in the Province of Lower Austria, 
in the Empire of Austria-Hungary, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Electric Incandescent Lamps; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
This invention has relation to incandescent 
lamps, and particularly to the connections 
between the leading in wires for the carbon 
filament and the glass bulb, and the connec 
tions between said leading in wires and the 
Contact Wires. Generally speaking, the lead 
ing in wires of incandescent lamps have here 
tofore been made of platinum, on the ground 
that no other metal or alloy possesses the same 
qualities as platinum, to Wit: a co-efficient 
of expansion similar or nearly similar to that 
of glass, non-oxidizable, and capable of re 
sisting the temperature required to Seal said 
wires into the neck of the lamp. These prop 
erties or qualities are requisite to the obtain 
ing of a permanently air tight joint between 
said leading in wires and their glass bearings. 
The attempts heretofore made to use base 
metal leading in wires have given more or less 
unsatisfactory results, and my invention has 
for its object the provision of simple means 
whereby such base metal leading in Wires 
may be advantageously employed. I would 
have it understood, however, that my inven 
tion may also be applied with advantage to 
the usual platinum leading in Wires. But 
that my invention may be fully understood, 
I will describe the same in detail, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figures 1, 2 and 3, illustrate by elevations 
the mode of connecting the leading in Wires 
with the carbon filaments, and Figs. 4 and 5 
illustrate by like views the mode of connect 
ing the leading in wires with the neck of the 
lamp bulb and with the contact wires. 
In carrying out my invention the leading 
o 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
in wirect, after embedding or sealing the same 
into the glass neck of the lamp bulb are pref 
erably broken or cut off flush with the outer 
face of their bearings, the exposed surface of 
the wires being then covered or coated with 
a precious metal, as gold, reduced to a thick 
paste by pulverizing and mixing with a thick 
oil, as thick turpentine, soft rosin, Canada or 
copaiva balsam, the coating after becoming 
dry being burned in by exposure to the flame 
of a Bunsen burner, for instance. This coat 
ing of precious metal may then be covered 
over with a soft solder as tin solder, and the 
pole or contact wires, a such as thin Copper 
wires are next connected with the Soft solder 
and precious metal coating in any desired 
manner. This connection may be greatly 
facilitated by laying or stretching a copper 
wire of sufficient length across the metallized 
exposed faces of the leading in wires and then 
covering the parts in contact with a Soft Sol 
der, as shown at c, Figs. 4 and 5, the portion 
of the copper contact wire a between the tWO 
leading in wires a shown in dotted lines in 
Fig. 4 being then cut out. In this manner a 
permanently air tight joint between the lead 
ing in wires and their bearings is obtained. 
If desired the base metal leading in Wires 
may be sealed to the glass bulb in the Same 
manner as is customary with platinum Wires, 
namely by forming thereon a glass bearing b, 
Figs. 1 and 2, and in this case I preferably 
connect the two bearings b by means of CrOSS 
piece or bridge, b', of the same material, as 85 
shown in Fig. 3, whereby the subsequent op 
eration is facilitated. These bearings, b are 
preferably made long enough so that When 
embedded in the neck of the bulb they Will 
project therefrom and can then be enlarged 
or reinforced by addition of glass, as shown 
at b Fig. 4, and if desired the bridge or cross 
piece to may also be melted into the neck of 
the bulb, as shown in dotted lines in the lat 
ter figure. On the other hand, the bearings 
may be embedded in the neck of the bulb by 
compressing, i. e., flattening the neck onto 
the bearings and then reinforcing the lower 
end of said neck by addition of glass or by 
forming the reinforcing bead b on the neck 
beforehand, so as to obtain a more extended 
surface for the coating of precious metal and 
75 
go 
95 
Od 
502,822 
posed wire surface with a precious metal, and 
soldering the contact wires to the precious 
metal by means of soft solder, for the purposes 
Set forth. 
3. The mode of connecting the leading in 
wires of incandescent lamps with the lamp 
bulb and with the contact wires, which con 
sists in embedding the leading in wires in the 
neck of the bulb, cutting said wires flush with 
the outer face of said neck, covering the ex 
posed wire surfaces with a precious metal, 
laying a contact wire across the precious metal 
coverings, soldering said contact wire thereto 
by means of soft solder and cutting out that 
portion of the contact wire between the points 
2. The mode of connecting the leading in I of connection with the precious metal, for the 
purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
for the soft solder c, as shown in Fig. 5, the 
contact wires a' being connected with the 
leading in wires a, as above described. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The mode of connecting the leading in 
wires of incandescent lamps with the lamp 
bulb and the contact wires, which consists in 
embedding said leading in wires in the neck 
of the bulb, cutting the wires flush with the 
outer face of their bearings, covering the ex 
posed wire surface with a precious metal and 
connecting the contact wire with the precious 
metal by soldering, for the purpose set forth. 
wires of incandescent lamps with the lamp 
bulb and with the contact wires, which con 
sists in forming glass bearings on the leading presence of two witnesses. 
in wires, embedding said bearings in the neck 
of the lamp so as to project therefrom, rein 
forcing said bearings by addition of glass, 
cutting the leading in wires flush with the 
lower face of their bearings, covering the ex 
PAUL SCIARE. 
Witnesses: 
II. BELMONT, 
A. SCHTENING. 
25 
35 
3. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502422.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 502,422, 
... . 
 
.84wea-soas 
2 
r 
%226-2 
2-6-4-022- 
r 
W. H. MASON. 
SHOE LACE FASTENER, 
Patented Aug. 1, 1893, 
-------- 
2. 
344-uc-4-ec 
g4/-132//cy 
7. 
? 
ace A 2z/ 
/6, 2 
A226/2: 
%246 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. MASON, OF DEMAREST, NEW JERSEY. 
SHOE. ACE FASTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,422, dated August 1, 1898. 
Application filed July 28, 1892, Serial No. 441,527. (No model.) 
To all, whom, it nay concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. MASON, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Demarest, county of Bergen, and State of New 
Jersey, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Shoe-Lace Holders, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to shoe lace holders, 
the object being to furnish a cheap and dura 
ble holder for the ends of shoe laces, which 
will, by its action hold the same securely, and 
will not cut or damage the lace. 
In carrying the invention into operation, I 
first stamp out an oblong blank of sheet metal 
of such quality and sufficient thickness to 
possess resilience when bent into shape. This 
blank is first flanged or bent at right angles 
along one of its edges, then bent in such shape 
as to produce at its center an eyelet from 
which extend two arms forming the sides of 
an elongated slot. The blank thus bent is in 
serted in a slit in the leather or other mate 
rial and its vertical edge bent over against 
the material by a punch or other means. The 
edges of the slot when in position form a clamp 
in which the end of the lace is held-the re 
silience of the metal being sufficient to press 
the parts together and firmly clamp the end. 
Where the clamp would be called upon to do 
severe work as in heavy pedestrian shoes and 
the like, I may reinforce the spring ends by 
passing a looped steel wire spring over the 
projecting ends previous to the operation of 
clamping the same in position in the material. 
It will be noted that the normal position of 
the clamping jaws is such that their inner 
faces are in contact their entire length-the 
action of the lace when forced between them 
serving to separate them-and the Spring or 
resilience of the jaws serving to hold and Se 
cure the lace. 
In the drawings I have shown in Figure 1 
a blank A preparatory to bending. Fig. 2 
shows the same with its edge a bent or flanged. 
Fig. 3 shows the same bent into shape-form 
ing an eyelet B and projecting spring jaWS b 
b. Fig. 4 shows the bent blank with a steel 
25 
35 
45 
wire spring Capplied to the same to reinforce 
the jaws. Fig. 5 shows the device in position 
in a shoe. Fig. 6, shows a longitudinal sec 
tion illustrating the position of the spring 
when the device is in position. Fig. 7 is a 
slightly modified form of the clamp. 
As will be seen by reference to the draw 
ings, the lace is passed through the eyelet B 
and pulled forward until it passes between 
the jaws.bb where it is firmly held-the spring 
C where used pressing against the outer sides 
of the jaws and forcing the same together, the 
spring preferably lying against the inside sur 
face of the shoe and between that and the 
flanged formed by bending over the vertical 
edge as described. In the modified form the 
metal is bent around so as to form a loop with 
an eyelet at One end, the joining ends of the 
metal being brought by such construction at 
One side instead of at the end of the slot. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A shoe lace holder formed of a continu 
ous metal strip bent in the form of an eyelet 
with elongated spring arms extending there 
from with free ends, and forming a slot whose 
inner sides are neally adjacent, the edges of 
the blank being bent outward to form retain 
ing flanges adapted to retain and hold be 
tween them the edges of the material and 
thereby secure the holder in the shoe. 
2. A shoe lace fastener formed of a continu 
ous metal blank bent and formed into an eye 
let and parallel spring arms whose inner edges 
are in normal contact and a re-inforcing spring 
applied to the outer ends of the arms to in 
crease their effective pressure on the inserted 
lace. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two attesting wit 
SSS. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
WILLIAM. H. MASON, 
Witnesses: 
W. R. KENNEDY, 
RAYMOND F. BARNES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502522.txt	(No Model.) 
J. L. LEVY. 
CAR TRUCK. 
5. Sheets-Sheet. 1. 
NO, 502,522, 
 
Patented Aug. 1, 1893, 
N 
zesz, 
6Zza 76-74-----, 
Zzzz'eyezza 
(No Model.) 
J. L., LEWY. 
CAR TRUCK. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 502,522, 
w 
Patented Aug. 1, 1893, 
. E. 
 
 
  
E. El 
i le Eises = 2 a. 
ressessesseese sessessessessessessessee 
/7 
s. 2. 
   
avy 
57 
(26es 6 
67%zee/6tulic, 
zzer. 
- 
J. L., LEWY, 
CAR TRUCK. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4 
Patented Aug. 1, l893, 
(No Model.) 
No. 502,522, 
 
 
 
N E. 
 
s 
(No Model.) 
No. 502,522, 
- - 
- - 
5 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
Patented Aug. 1, 1893, 
w 
J. L. L.EWY. 
CAR TRUCK. 
W W 2 DA 
 
  
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH L. LEVY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CAR-TRUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,522, dated August 1, 1893. 
Application filed April ll, 1893. Serial No. 469,963, (No model.) 
55 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH L. LEVY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at New York, 
in the county of New York and State of New 
York, have made certain new and useful Im 
provements in Car-Trucks, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention has primary reference to a 
certain class of trucks as illustrated in the 
patent to George M. Brill, No. 478,218, dated 
july 15, 1892, and my invention consists in 
improvements thereon. 
Among the specific improvements embodied 
in the present invention is a nest, or series, 
of springs located between an extension of the 
truck frame and the car body, or a like exten 
sion of the upper chord (if one is used), which 
nest of springs comprises those which are 
adapted to come into play successively as the 
car body sinks down; that is to say, these 
nests of graduated Springs are intended to Sup 
plement the usual car springs which are gen 
erally located about the axle boxes so as to 
permit of a car extending beyond the truck 
frame or overhanging the truck, being used, 
the nest of springs also acting in a measure 
as a buffer to retard the oscillation, or end vi 
bration, of the car upon the truck. 
My invention also includes the location of 
a leaf, or elliptical, spring between the ordi 
nary and usual car springs, which spring pref 
erably is adapted to come into play after the 
car springs (or what I shall hereinafter term 
the axle box springs) have begun to be 
compressed, at which time the elliptical spring 
begins to assist the axle box frames in resist 
ing the downward movement of the car. So 
far as this part of my invention is concerned, 
I do not limit myself to the combination, with 
the elliptical spring between the axle box 
springs and preferably semi-distant between 
the axles, of the nests of graduated springs 
adapted to come into successive operation, lo 
cated beyond the axle box springs, or, in other 
words, outside of the wheel base. The ellip 
tic spring being slower in its action than the 
spiral, or axle box, springs, assists the said 
springs materially in resisting the load and 
the raising of the car body, and softens the 
motion of the same. I, therefore, prefer to 
divide my invention into several important 
parts, to wit: first, the resilient base, or sup 
port, for the car body formed of the axle box 
springs and the nest, or set, of graduated 
springs adapted to come into successive play 
or operation; second, a resilient base, or Sup 
port, for the car body comprising the axle box 
springs and a spring, or elastic medium, differ 
ing in its load carrying capacity or pressure 
resisting characteristic from the axle box 
springs, said springs being located between the 
axles and preferably semi-distant therefrom, 
either when the same is adapted to come into 
operation contemporaneously with the initial 
compression of the axle box springs, or when 
the same is so arranged as to permit of a par 
tial compression of the axle box springs before 
bringing the said resilient element into play; 
third, a resilient base, or support, for a truck 
formed of the axle box springs, the nest or 
Series of graduated springs outside of the 
wheel base adapted to be brought into suc 
cessive Operation, and the resilient element 
located between the axle box springs and pref 
erably semi-distant between the axles, either 
when the intermediate resilient element is 
adapted to come into play at the same time 
With the axle box springs or subsequent there 
to, or when the said intermediate spring is 
adapted to come into operation at the same 
time with that one of the graduated springs 
which comes last into operation, or not; 
fourth, the combination with the graduated 
set of springs of a spring auxiliary to said 
graduated set, or to one of them, which is 
adapted to assist the graduated springs at 
the opposite end of the truck in resisting the 
downward tendency of the truck; that is to 
Say, the auxiliary spring, (as the same shall 
be termed) when the car body is lowered at 
One end, resists the same by assisting the 
Springs compressed at the other end by act 
ing upon the opposite end of the truck, all of 
which will be hereinafter pointed out. 
My invention further consists in the details 
of structure hereinafter set forth and further 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication-Figure l is a side elevation of a 
complete truck showing my improvements 
attached thereto; Fig. 2, an end elevation; 
Fig. 3, a sectional elevation on the line acaci 
Fig. 4, an enlarged side elevation of the end 
of the truck; and Fig. 5, a like view showing 
25 
35 
45 
50 
95 
Od 
2 
502,522 
- 
the auxiliary spring; Fig. 6, a side elevation 
of a complete truck showing my improve 
ments attached thereto, the graduated springs 
at the end being in the reverse order to that 
shown in Fig. 1. 
The same numerals have reference to like 
parts throughout the several views. 
I shall first describe the truck, and then my 
improvements thereon. 
At 1 are shown the wheels; at 2 the axles, 
which have bearings in the axle boxes 3, upon 
which lie the yokes 4 having a resilient sup 
port upon the axle boxes by means of the 
cushion 5, the yokes having ears 6, to which 
are secured between the axles the sections 7 
of the side bars of the axle box frame, and 
without the axles and to the ears 6, the ex 
tensions S of the side bars of the axle box 
frame, the extensions 8 being united laterally 
by a cross bar 9, which is secured to the ex 
tensions in any desirable way, making with 
the sections 7 and 8 of the side bars on both 
sides of the truck, the frame which depends 
from the axle boxes, which frame is known 
in the art as an axle box frame. A short bar 
10 braces the lower portions of the ears 6 in 
the usual way. 
The axle box springs 11 are shown as spiral 
in form, and rest upon the ears 6 of the yokes, 
and surround spring posts 12, which pass 
through the ears, they being united beneath 
the side bars by a pedestal tie bar 13, the 
outer spring posts having a casting 14 which 
can be used for the purpose of supporting a 
diagonal brace extending between the casting 
and the overhanging ends of the superposed 
car body in the usual way. The upper por 
tions of the spring posts are secured to the 
side bars 15 of the upper chord, the side bars 
being united by the cross bars 16 at each end, 
forming a rectangular frame, theside bars hav 
ing extensions 17 (Fig. 2). Instead of the 
spring posts being secured to the upper chord, 
they can be secured to one of the longitudi 
nal sills of the car body on each side of the 
truck, and wherever the upper chord is men 
tioned it is intended to include either that 
or the sill of the car body. Between the side 
bars of the upper chord and the springs 11 lie 
spring plates or risers 18 and washers and 
cushions 19, in the usual Way. 
I have thus far described the truck sub 
stantially silnilar to that shown in the patent 
before cited, and the composition of the truck 
shall be hereinafter known as one involving 
two frames, one substantially stationary, to 
wit, the axle frame, for the reason that it is 
not affected by the play of the car upon either 
of the sets of springs hereinafter described; 
nor does it have the same amplitude of move 
ment as the car supporting Springs; the other 
is the movale frame, which comprises either 
the upper chord or car sill, the spring posts 
and bracing therefor, so that when tie phrase 
stationary frame is used it will be under 
stood to include a frame Supported upon the 
running gear and substantially immovable in 
relation to the motion of the car body and the 
movable frame, which latter is influenced by 
all of the motions of the car body up and down 
upon the car springs. 
It will be noticed by reference to Fig. 1 that 
the upper chord and axle box frame are ex 
tended out beyond the axle, or the wheelbase, 
and upon the extensions 8 of the axle box 
frame I secure an inverted U shaped saddle, 
or yoke, 20 having studs 21. To the extended 
portion (or that part extending beyond the 
axle) of the upper chord I secure a plate 22 
having the downwardly extending lugs, or 
bosses, 23, and between the lugs or bosses on 
the saddle 20 and plate 22 I locate spiral 
springs 23, 24, 25. It will be noticed that the 
outer spring 23 is higher than the spring 24, 
and that the spring 25 is shorter than any one 
of them, none of them while at rest touching 
the upper chord. It will also be noticed that 
the shorter spring is located nearest the axle 
box springs 12. The position that the upper 
chord occupies in Fig. 1 is one where the parts 
are at rest; in other words, the springs are 
only supporting the weight of the upper 
chord, or the normal weight of the car body, 
and have not begun to be compressed by the 
added weightgiven to the carbody while in use, 
nor by the motions of the car body in opera 
tion. During use the car body will sink down 
upon the springs, compressing them, first act 
ing upon the axle box springs, then success 
ively upon each one of the nests of graduated 
springs 23, 24, 25, acting as to the nest of 
springs first upon the outer one, which being 
located near to the outer line of oscillation of 
the end of the car begins to check the oscil 
lation nearer to that point; then the second 
spring 24 begins to act, and then the third 
spring 25, bringing each spring successively 
into operation and checking the oscillation at 
that end by a successive introduction into the 
resilient resistance of each member of the 
nest or series of springs. 
In all of the drawings I have shown the 
Outer spring 23 as being adapted to be brought 
into play subsequent to the commencement 
of the compression of the axle box springs; 
but I do not limit myself to this, as it may be 
found desirable to bring one of the success 
ively acting springs into operation contempo 
raneously with the commencement of the com 
pression of the axle box springs. Nor do I 
limit myself to the inwardly extending gradu 
ation as shown; that is to say, causing the last 
of the series to come into operation last, as 
the shortest of the springs (as 25) can be lo 
cated farthest from the axle box, or nearer to 
the outer line of motion of the car body; or, 
in other words, to the end of the platform, as 
I consider my invention broad enough to in 
clude a nest, or series, of graduated springs 
adapted to come into successive operation, or 
action, or to offer a graduated resistance lo 
cated between a portion of the truck frame 
which lies or extends outside of the wheel 
base, and the car body or upper chord. This 
75 
95 
do 
I o5 
IIC 
II5 
Io 
30 
35 
45 
55 
65 
502,522 
O 
reverse arrangement of the graduated springs 
is shown in Fig. 6, in which the highest spring 
23 is located nearest the axles, and the small 
est 25 farthest away. This change can be ac 
complished without any difficulty whatsoever 
as the parts are so arranged as to be readily 
detachable from both the extensions of the 
side bars and from the upper chord or car 
sill, reversed, and again secured in place, and 
this can be accomplished without removing 
atny of the springs from their original posi 
tions on the yokes and restraining lugs. 
Under certain conditions it may be found 
extremely advantageous to arrange the gradu 
ated Springs as in the manner illustrated in 
Fig. 6, and especially when the truck is used 
upon uneven roads, or when it is subjected 
to heavy and uneven loading. In this case 
the oscillation will be comparatively greater 
than on smooth roads and with ordinary use. 
The inner spring or one closest to the axle 
will come into action the first, the others, af 
ter, or contemporaneously with the initial 
compression of the axle-box springs, leaving 
the outer spring, which is the last to come 
into action, as a reserve of resilient resistance 
at the time when the others have substan 
tially ceased in assisting in resisting the down 
Ward movement of the car, and at which time 
the heaviest load and strain will be pres 
ent, due to the greater speed at the extreme 
end of the car than that nearer to the truck 
center. For these reasons it may be advan 
tageous to use the springs in their reverse 
form, So I do not, as I have before stated, 
limit myself to the order of their graduation. 
A modification of this portion of my inven 
tion may be made by using springs of vary 
ing size, or carrying capacity, and including 
them in a nest, or series, so that the resist 
ance given to the load or movement of the 
car will be gradual, as the Weakest or strong 
est, or quickest or slowest, of such modified 
form can be brought into action first or last, 
and the successive steps in the resilient re 
sistance be accomplished by bringing into 
play the successively stronger or weaker 
springs; and I therefore include such modifi 
cations within my present invention in what 
ever form they may be used. 
As the extended spring base, which the axle 
box frame extension and springs located there 
on are called, is subjected to considerable 
strain, I prefer for the purpose of bracing 
such extension two trusses 26, which lie upon 
lugs 27 on the yokes 5, and extend outwardly 
to the yokes 20 on each side thereof (see Fig. 
2), the ends of the trusses being secured to the 
extensions by means of the pins, or bolts, 27, 
which in turn secure the saddle to the side 
bars. 
By referring to Fig. 3 it will be seen that 
the cross bar 9 enters within a slot 28 formed 
in the inner leg of the yoke 20, which assists 
in keeping the yoke in its place on the side 
bars. 
As to the second portion of my invention, 
the axle box springs 12 are primarily the car 
Supporting springs, but I propose to supple 
ment them in the resistance to the downward 
movements of the car body, and in their lift 
ing the car body during its upward move 
ment, by an intermediate resilient member, 
or spring, which is preferably slower in its 
action than the axle box springs. For this 
form of spring I have selected for use a leaf, 
or elliptical, spring 29, which lies between 
the upper chord of the car body and the side 
bars of the axle box frame. This spring is 
securely fixed, and rests upon the side bars 
7 by means of the saddle 30, the legs 31 of 
which are secured to the side bars. The up 
per portion of the spring is confined in a ver 
tical position by a yoke 32 secured by its ears 
33 to the side bars of the upper chord, or di 
rectly to the car sill, as desired, the inner por 
tion of the yoke 32 lying above the top of the 
Spring, so as to permit of a downward motion 
of the car body on the axle box springs for 
Some distance before the elliptical spring be 
gins to be compressed. It will be seen that 
I have located this spring semi-distant be 
tween the axles, it being designed solely to 
Supplement and assist the axle box springs 
in resisting the normal movements of the car 
body up and down thereon, but not for the 
purpose of assisting the axle box springs in 
resisting the end vibration or oscillation, of 
the car body on the truck. So far as this 
part of my invention is concerned, I do not 
limit myself to the form of intermediate or 
elliptical spring, nor whether it comes into 
compression prior or subsequent to the axle 
box springs, but I prefer the elliptical form 
and that such spring should come into play 
after the axle-box springs have begun to be 
compressed; as I consider myself to be the 
first to have located a resilient element (in 
this class of truck) between the axle-box 
springs, which element or spring differs as 
to the time of action from that of the axle 
box Springs, as the same can be brought into 
action, or in other words, compression, prior 
to the axle-box Springs, or subsequently, with 
out departing from the spirit of my inven 
tion. I, however, prefer to bring the inter 
mediate spring into action subsequently to 
the commencement of the compression of the 
axle box springs, for which purpose it is 
adapted in the present structure. 
The third portion of my invention com 
prises the conjoint use of all of the resilient 
elements shown in Fig. 1, or their equivalents, 
the axle box springs 12 primarily taking the 
load of the car; the nest, or series, of graduated 
Springsforming the extended spring base; and 
the intermediate spring between the axle box 
springs; the series of graduated springs com 
ing into play as before described, and the 
intermediate spring, as 29, coming into play 
at the same time with the beginning of the 
compression of the axle box springs, or com 
ing into play after the beginning of the com 
pression of the axle box springs and be 
35 
50 
55 
65 
75 
OO 
105 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
4. 
502,522 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
fore the last of the graduated set; or com 
ing into play after the compression of the 
axle box springs and contemporaneously with 
the compression of the last of the graduated 
set, or contemporaneously with the compres 
sion of the first of the graduated set when 
said first set begins to be compressed at the 
same time with the axle box springs. It 
will be seen that the variations are numer 
ous, and I consider it unnecessary to detail 
all of the variations as to time of action, and 
as to character or amount of resistance given 
to the motions of the car by each of the se 
ries of springs, or resilient elements herein 
shown. 
The fourth part of my invention includes 
the use of what I call an auxiliary spring, 
such as 34, Fig. 5. In this case a long bolt 36 
passes through the upper chord down through 
one of the bosses 23, which is apertured for 
this purpose; through a like aperture formed 
in the boss 21 and in the top of the yoke 20, 
and through a plate 37 which lies beneath the 
legs of the yoke and bears against the bottom 
thereof, the end of the bolt being provided 
with a nut 38 and movable plate 39, the spring 
34 extending between the plates 37,39, and sur 
rounding the bolt. For the sake of description 
it is assumed that Fig. 5 represents the right 
hand portion of Fig. 1. Now, assuming that 
the left hand portion of the truck has been 
vibrated, moving that portion down and lift 
ing the right hand portion, the resistance 
given to the lift at the right hand portion will 
be by the graduated set of springs at the left 
hand side, and by the compression of the 
spring 34 at the right hand side; so that it 
will be seen that the auxiliary spring 34 comes 
into play at the end opposite to that which is 
compressed, or at the end which is lifted, as 
sisting the graduated springs in resisting the 
oscillation, or end vibration, of the car. 
I have shown the location of the spring 34 
under the spring 24 for the purpose of clear 
ness of illustration only, and so as to avoid 
the nuts or bolts 27, but it is plain that the 
spring 34 can be located beneath the outer or 
springs 23, 25 as well. The apertures made 
for the passage of the bolt 36 should prefer 
ably be a little larger than the diameter of 
the bolt, for the purpose of permitting a lon 
gitudinal movement to a slight extent of the 
car upon the truck. 
As both sides of the truck are constructed 
alike I have referred to but one side herein. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The combination in a truck, of the sta 
tionary and movable frames, and springs for 
resiliently supporting a car comprising a se 
ries adapted to primarily Support the car, and 
an additional series adapted to offer a suc 
cessive resistance to the downward movement 
of the car, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a truckframe having 
an element thereof for supporting the car 
springs, and a resilient or Spring support for 
the car comprising the usual springs about 
or adjacent to the axle boxes, and a set of 
springs independent of the axle box springs 
adapted to be successively compressed, Sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination in a truck, of the mov 
able and stationary frames, the axle box 
springs supporting the movable frame on the 
stationary frame, and a nest of graduated 
springs extending between portions of the 
movable and stationary frames, which por 
tions lie outside of the axles of the truck at 
both ends thereof, substantially as described. 
4. The combination in a car truck, of a sta 
tionary frame and a movable frame or car 
body, and car supporting springs located 
about or adjacent to the axle boxes, and an 
additional set or series of graduated springs 
located between the stationary and movable 
frames and outside of the axles of the truck, 
said additional set of graduated springs being 
adapted to be successively compressed by the 
motion of the car body thereon, substantially 
as described. 
5. The combination in a truck, of the mov 
able and stationary frames, the axle box 
springs supporting the movable frame on the 
stationary frame, and a nest or series of gradu 
ated springs extending between the movable 
and stationary frames and lying outside of the 
axles, the axle box springs being adapted to 
be compressed by the downward movement 
of the car body prior to the compression of 
any one of the said nest of graduated springs, 
each single spring of each series or nest being 
successively compressed by said motion of the 
car body, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of the movable and sta 
tionary frames, of the axle box springs about 
or adjacent to the axle boxes, and an addi 
tional set or series of springs grouped together 
for successive action, each spring of said set 
or series being adapted to offer a varying re 
sistance to the downward movement of the 
car body thereon, Substantially as described. 
7. In a truck, the combination of the mov 
able and stationary frames, axle box springs 
about or adjacent to the axle extending be 
tween the stationary and movable frames, and 
an intermediate spring lying between the axle 
box Springs and extending between the sta 
tionary and movable frames, said spring be 
ing adapted to offer a resistance to the down 
Ward movement of the car body and varying 
as to its time of co-action with the axle box 
Springs, Substantially as described. 
8. The combination in a truck, of the mov 
able and stationary frames, the axle box 
springs located adjacent to or about the axle 
box and extending between the movable and 
stationary frames, and a spring auxiliary to 
said Springs extending between the frames and 
lying between the innermost of said axle box 
Springs, said auxiliary spring being adapted 
to be compressed subsequent to the compres 
sion of the axle box springs, substantially as 
described. 
9. The combination in a truck, of the sta 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
502,522 
tionary and movable frames, the axle box 
Springs extending between said frames, an ad 
ditional springlying between said frames, dif 
fering in character from the axle box springs, 
and a nest of springs adapted to be brought 
into successive compression extending be 
tWeen said movable and stationary frames, 
Substantially as described. 
10. The combination of a truck having a 
movable and stationary frame, of the axle box 
Springs extending between the same, a spring 
intermediate of the axle box springs and ex 
tending between said frames, and a nest or 
series of springs adapted to be brought into 
successive compression extending between the 
movable and stationary frames and lying out 
side of the wheel base of the truck, substan 
tially as described. 
11. The combination in a truck, of the sta 
tionary and movable frames, the axle box 
springs extending between both frames, an 
additional spring intermediate of the axle 
box springs and extending between both 
frames, the said intermediate spring being 
adapted to be compressed subsequent to the 
compression of the axle box springs, and a 
series or nest of springs adapted to be brought 
into successive compression extending be 
tween the extended portions of the stationary 
frame and the movable frame or car body, 
substantially as described. 
12. The combinationin a truck, of the mov 
able and stationary frames, the axle box 
springs, the spring intermediate of the axle 
box spring adapted to be compressed subse 
quent to the compression of the axle box 
springs, and a nest or series of springs extend 
ing between the extended portion of the sta 
tionary frame and the movable frame or car 
body, the said nest of springs being adapted 
to be brought into compression subsequent to 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
5o 
55 
the compression of the axle box springs, the 
compression of all of said nest or series tak 
ing place prior to or contemporaneously with 
the compression of the said intermediate 
springs, substantially as described. 
13. In a truck, the combination of the mov 
able and stationary frames, the axle box 
springs extending between said frames, addi 
tional resilient elements adapted to offer suc 
cessive resistance to the downward movement 
of the car extending between the extended 
portions of the stationary frame and the mov 
able frame or car body, and a resilient ele 
ment, auxiliary to the said iast mentioned 
springs which is adapted to be compressed to 
resist the unequal compression and elevation 
of the car on its supporting springs, substan 
tially as described. 
14. The combination in a truck, of the mov 
able and stationary fra mes, the axle box 
springs, and a nest or series of springs adapt 
ed to be brought into successive compression, 
said nest extending between the movable and 
stationary frames outside of the wheel base 
of the truck, and a spring auxiliary to Said 
nest or series of springs adapted to be com 
pressed by the unequal depression of the mov 
able frame at the opposite end of the truck, 
substantially as described. 
15. In a truck, the combination with the 
car springs, of the additional springs 24, the 
upper chord or car body, the springs 34, and 
an abutment therefor, and means for con 
necting the springs 34 with the upper chord, 
substantially as described. 
Signed at the city, county, and State of 
New York this 5th day of April, 1893. 
JOSEPH L. LEVY. 
Witnesses: 
B. S. WISE, 
H. F. DURBUR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502622.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 502,622, 
A. GOLDSMITH 
LAMP FILLING DEVICE, 
Patented Aug. 1, 1893. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
ALBERT GOLDSMITH, OF 
SALEM, MASSACHUSETTS. 
LAMP. FLNG DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,622, dated August 1, 1898. 
Application filed March 31, 1893, 
Serial No. 468,494 (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT GOLDSMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Salem, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Lamp -Filling Devices, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
lamp filling devices, and it is carried out as 
follows, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
the invention. Fig. 2 represents a cross sec 
tion on the line 2-2 shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
represents a longitudinal section of the de 
vice shown as applied to a lamp while in the 
act of being filled; and Fig. 4 represents a 
side elevation of the invention shown as ap 
plied to a lamp bowl having a side filling ori 
fice. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts wher 
ever they occur on the different parts of the 
drawings. 
The device consists of a tube A, of suitable 
length, open at its lower end and preferably 
closed at the top, and provided with a filling 
orifice B at its side as shown. Below the ori 
fice B is a ledge or stop projection C for the 
purpose of preventing the tube Afrom being 
inserted too far within the lamp opening, as 
will hereinafter be more fully described. To 
one side of the said tube A is attached pref 
erably at or near its upper end a yielding 
spring D, the object of which is to cause the 
tube A to be held properly in position within 
the lamp opening which is apt to vary in size, 
and consequently one and the same filler tube 
may be used for lamps in which the size of 
the lamp opening may vary. 
The inner side of the filling tube A is pro 
vided with a bearing for supporting a longi 
tudinally moveable rod E which projects 
through the upper end of the tube, and is 
provided with a knob or projection e. The 
lower end of the rod is provided with a float 
e' of any desired construction which is adapt 
ed to be raised by the fluid in the lamp bowl 
when it reaches a certain level. By arranging 
the float rod in a bearing on the inner side of 
the filling tube, the rod is placed at one side 
of and away from the filling orifice B, as in 
Fig. 2, to leave the interior of the tube prac 
tically unobstructed, so that the rod will not 
interfere with the proper insertion of an oil 
can nozzle laterally through the filling orifice 
in the tube, in which respect my improved 
construction is advantageous. 
In Fig. 3, F represents a lamp bowl having 
the opening f to which the burner G is at 
tached, and g represents the Wick as usual. 
In using the device for filling the lamp I 
unscrew the burner G from its socket, and 
move it to one side as shown in Fig. 3 or if it 
is a hinged burner, I swing it to one side, after 
which I insert the tube Ain the lamp opening 
f, as shown in Fig. 3, and lower it therein un 
til the ledge or stop projection C comes against 
the edge of the lamp opening. In such posi 
tion the spring D will cause the tube A to be 
held properly in position within the lamp 
opening, and the wick will be moved to one 
side so as not to obstruct the filling of the 
lamp. The nozzle of the oil can H is then 
inserted through the filling orifice B, and the 
oil poured downward through the tube Ainto 
the lamp bowl. When the lamp bowl is nearly 
filled the floate' will rise, causing the spindle 
E and its knob or projection e to move with 
this, thus indicating to the operator that the 
lamp is filled. This is particularly advan 
tageous for lamps having metal or other non 
transparent bowls, although it is of great util 
ity on glass bowl lamps as well. 
The device is equally well adapted for lamp 
bowls of the kind shown in Fig. 4, in which 
a filling opening is arranged at one side of the 
burner, in which case, the tube A is inserted 
through said filling opening whenever it is 
desired to fill the lamp. 
The device is very simple, and cleanly; it is 
adapted for use on lamps of any construction, 
and is a very handy arrangement for filling 
lamps without danger of overflowing, and 
without the need of removing the Wick or 
wicks from the bowl. 
What I wish to secure by Letters Patent 
and claim is 
A lamp-filling device, consisting of a filling 
tube A, provided with a lateral filling orifice 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
90 
95 
IOO 
5O2,622 
B at a point below its upper end, a laterally to support the filling tube therein, substan 
extending supporting projection Cat a point tially as described. 
below the filling orifice and a bearing on the 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
inner side, a longitudinally movable float- name to this specification, in the presence of 15 
5 carrying rod E supported by the bearing at two subscribing witnesses, on this 27th day 
One side of the lateral filling opening to avoid of March, A. D. 1893. 
Obstructing the insertion of an oil can nozzle 
into the latter, and a leaf spring D mounted 
on the exterior of the filling tube to enter an 
Io opening in a lamp fount or bowl and cooper- 
ating with the laterally extending projection 
ALBAN ANDREN, 
JOHN H. CASEY. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT GOLDSMITH. 
r 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502723.txt	(No Model.) 
E. G., JACKSON, 
RUDDER CONNECTION, 
No. 502,723, 
Patented Aug. 8, 1893, 
Massare, 2. 
 
Ayya My72/7.' 
f : 
%2/ 
f 
S 
c /3, (ha-2 4ent-, 
/dozer ?ea. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIOT G. JACKSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
R U DDER CONNECT ON. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,723, dated August 8, 1893, 
Application filed February 9, 1893, 
O 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELIOT G. JACKSON, of 
the city of Philadelphia and State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Rudder Connections 
for Boats; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, forming part of this specifi 
cation. 
Myinvention has relation to rudder connec 
tions for boats, and consists in the novel con 
struction hereinafter particularly described 
and claimed. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
rudder hinge or connection of a construction 
which will enable the rudder to be readilyad 
justed into position upon the boat, especially 
when in the water; a further object is to pro 
vide a construction which will prevent the 
rudder from slipping out of the hinge or con 
nection, as is very apt to occur in other con 
Structions of connections in small row boats 
in rough Water. 
In the accompanying drawings similar let 
ters of reference refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
Figure 1 is an end perspective view of a 
row boat having the rudder connected there 
to through the medium of my improved rud 
der connection. Fig.2 is a side elevation par 
tially in section, slightly modified. Fig. 3 is 
a partially Sectional elevation representing 
in detail the construction shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 represents a modified construction of 
the lower joint. 
A represents the rudder in position upon 
the stern of the boat, B. The two joint con 
nections, C, C, are secured by screws, rivets, 
Or by other Suitable means, upon the stern, 
B, at the desired distance apart on a perpen 
dicular line with each other. The lower joint, 
C, is constructed with an enlarged mouth pref 
erably of a diameter about three times greater 
than the diameter of the securingpin, p, which 
is provided upon the rudder A; the mouth, c, 
gradually decreases in diameter to the bore, 
c', preferably provided for the lower end of 
the pin, p; the interior diameter of the bore, 
c' is preferably only slightly greater than the 
diameter of the end of the pin, p. The interior 
m 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
55 
Serial No. 461,548, (No model.) 
of the base of the bore, c', is preferably slightly 
concaved for the reception of the end of the pin, 
p. The joint, C', is provided with a vertically 
disposed bore for the reception of the pin, p', 
of a diameter only slightly greater than the 
diameter of said pin. 
It is clear from the construction described 
that the pin, p, may be readily inserted into 
the joint, C, to its proper position while the 
boatisin the water. The upper pin, p', being 
out of, or about on the water line, can be read 
ily adjusted into the smaller orifice of the 
joint, C, without difficulty. In inserting the 
lower pin, p, it has only to strike any point 
within the mouth, c, when the inclined angle 
of the walls of the joint, C, will guide it down 
to its proper position in the bore, c'. I also 
preferably provide at the joint C', as illus 
trated in Figs. 1 and 3, a spring pawl, S, ad 
justed in suitable bearings in the stern Wall 
of the boat with a horizontally disposed in 
wardly protruding pin, S, for operating the 
pawl; a small spiral springs'isprovided upon 
the pin, s, within the bearings to keep the 
pawl normally engaged in an inclined groove, 
g, provided in the end of the pin, p', the all 
gle of the groove, g, and of the end of the 
pawl being such, as illustrated in the dra W 
ings, to allow the pin, p', to be automatically 
engaged by the pawl, S, when fully inserted 
in the bore of the joint, C'; the pawl, S, is re 
leased by withdrawing the pin, S. 
The interior diameter of the lower end or 
bore, c', of the connection, C, is preferably, 
as before stated, only slightly greater than 
the diameter of the lower part of the pin, p, 
so that when the rudder is in position the pln, 
p, will not wabble in the connection but Will 
maintain a steady pivotal bearing. The Weight 
of the rudder is preferably sustained by the 
end of the pin, p, bearing upon the base of 
the bore, c', though a portion of the Weight 
may be borne by the shoulder formed in the 
upper connection, C, as in the construction 
shown in Fig.1. It is also clear from the de 
scription that the connection, C, may be cir 
cularly constructed with the interior bore, c', 
centrally located in the diameter of the mouth, 
c, as illustrated in Fig. 4. 
... My improved rudder connection described 
may be used with or without the pawl device 
- 
95 
OO 
2 
502,723 
35 
shown in Figs. 1 and 3, though I preferably the pin, p, adapted to engage therein, and a 3o 
employ the same to secure the rudder in po 
sition. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
5 I claim, and desire to secure by Tetters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In combination with the male pin of a 
hinge joint a joint having an opening or 
lmouth of enlarged diameter, an interior base 
bearing for the end of the male pin, a reduced 
lower interior diameter only slightly greater 
than the diameter of the end of the lower por 
tion of the male pin adapted to engage there 
in, the interior diameter of the said joint 
gradually decreasing from the mouth toward 
Said lower bearing substantially as described. 
2. In a rudder attachment for boats in com 
bination with a hinge-joint, C', and male pins, 
p, p', a joint, C, having an interior base-bear 
2O ing of a diameter about equal to the diameter 
of the lower end of the pin, p, adapted to en 
gage therein, and a mouth of greatly enlarged 
diameter gradually decreasing to the base 
bearing substantially as described. 
3. In a rudder attachment for boats in com 
bination with the hinge-joint, C', and pins, p, 
p', a lower joint, C, having an interior base 
bearing and a lower interior bore, c', of a di 
ameter slightly greater than the diameter of 
mouth, c, of enlarged diameter gradually de 
creasing to the diameter of the bore, c', sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a rudder attachment for boats the 
combination of pin p and lower hinge-joint, 
C, having lower interior bore, c', and enlarged 
mouth, c, gradually decreasing in diameter to 
the bore, c', upper joint, C', having vertical 
orifice provided therein, pin, p", secured to 
the rudder, shouldered groove, g, provided in 
said pin, p', and pawl, S, provided in a guide 
or casing in the stern of the boat, B, pin, S, 
and spiral spring, S', engaging thereon, Sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a rudder attachment for boats a fun 
nel-shaped hinge-joint, C, hinge-joint, C', 
pins, p, p", provided upon the rudder engag 
ing respectively in the joints, C, C, groove, 
g, provided in the pin, p', and pawl connec 
tion adapted to engage in Said groove, g, con 
sisting of a slide-pawl, S, pin, S, and spiral 
spring, s', substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have here unto set my 
hand.this 7th day of February, A. D. 1893. 
ELIOT G. JACKSON. 
Witnesses: 
J. BAYARD HENRY, 
EDWARD J. ALEDS. 
45 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502823.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 502,823. 
W. MARTIN, 
HANGER FOR CURTAIN FIXTURES, 
Patented Aug. 8, 1893, 
 
7. 
 
ESR 
ANN 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
/46/aa-esses 
/ra veze for 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM MARTIN, OF SALEM, MASSACHUSETTS. 
HANGER FOR CURTAN FIXTURES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,823, dated August 8, 1893. 
Application filed November 9, 1892, Serial No. 451462, (No model.) 
O 
25 
S. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM MARTIN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Salem, in 
the county of Essex and State of Massachu 
setts, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Hangers for Curtain-Fix 
tures and the Like, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
The window casings of dwellings, particu 
larly tenement houses, whose tenants are lia 
ble to change frequently, soon become defaced 
or damaged in consequence of the frequent 
changes that are made in the positions of the 
curtain fixtures ordinarily in use. These cur 
tain fixtures are secured to the window cas 
ings by screws or nails, which are driven into 
the Woodwork at different places on the cas 
ings to accommodate shade rollers of differ 
ent lengths, and fixtures of different sizes. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
an improved device by means of which cur 
tain fixtures may be readily secured at the 
properpoints on the window casing, and which 
will permit of the removal, replacement, and 
adjustment of the fixture without defacing or 
damaging the casing. 
The invention consists in the device which 
is hereinafter set forth and the novel features 
of which are pointed out in the claims which 
are appended hereto, 
In the accompanying drawings, I have 
shown my improved device in the best form 
known to me, and in the following descrip 
tion I will refer to the said drawings, using 
like letters of reference to indicate like parts 
throughout the same. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of the said device with a shade roller fix 
ture in place. Fig. 2 is an end view of what 
is shown in Fig.1, and showing the base-plate 
in section. Fig. 3 is a side view of the same 
showing the base-plate partially insection and 
showing the end of a shade roller to indicate 
its position. Fig. 4 is a cross section showing 
a slightly modified form of base-plate. Fig. . 
5 is a perspective of the lower clamp member. 
The device as constructed by me is simple 
and will be readily understood from the fol 
lowing description of its parts. 
A represents a base-plate which is prefer 
ably of metal and of the shape shown in Figs. 
1 and 2, Said plate being preferably wide 
enough to receive a curtain or shade roller 
fixture of ordinary size and being provided 
with holes as shown at a Fig.1, through which 
may be driven the screws or nails by means 
of which it may be secured to the casing. 
The precise width of the base-plate A is not 
important, the essential feature of the plate 
being the lengthwise slot b which permits of 
the horizontal adjustment of the fixture 
hanger to accommodate shade rollers of dif 
ferent lengths. 
It will be clear that the plate A may be nar 
rowed down. So as to be very little wider than 
the slot b, as shown in Fig. 4. In case the de 
vice is to be applied to houses or tenements 
which are being constructed, this narrow form 
will preferably be used and the plate will then 
be let into the casing as shown in said figure 
so that its upper surface will be flush with 
the surface of the casing. The form of plate 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2 is designed to be ap 
plied to houses which are already construct 
ed. At the back of the base-plate is placed 
a clamping piece c. This piece c is the lower 
member of a clamp and consists mainly of a 
flat plate which lies underneath the opening 
b in the base-plate A as shown in Figs. 2 and 
3. It is provided with an upwardly project 
ing portion or neck shown at d, Fig. 3, which 
projects upwardly through the slot b and is 
of less width than the slot so that the clamp 
may be slid from one end to the other of the 
slot. The upper end of the portion d is 
formed with preferably an enlarged part or 
head e which projects across the slot b on the 
upper surface of the plate A. This enlarged 
portion e serves to prevent the neck d from 
dropping out of the slot b and thus prevents 
part c of the clamp from becoming displaced. 
In consequence of projecting above the sur 
face of the plate Ait serves to define the po 
sition of the curtain fixture g, as shown in 
Fig. 3, and prevents the said fixture from 
slipping away from the clamp. 
On the top of the plate AI provide a cross 
piece or upper clamp member f which is de 
signed to rest on the usual foot or feet of the 
curtain fixture g, as shown. A clamp screw 
h passes through the upper clamp member f, 
through the slot b in the plate A, and through 
the lower clamp c, as shown. By loosening 
': 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
35 
45 
 
502,823 
this screw the upper clamp member f may be 
raised and the fixture removed, and to secure 
the fixture in place it is only necessary to 
slip the foot or feet of the fixture underneath 
the clamp member if and between it and the 
face of the base plate A and set the clamp 
ing-screw down. The upwardly projecting 
head e of the under clamp member c also 
serves to keep the fixture in place, as stated 
above, but the enlarged head e is not essen 
tial so long as the neck d projects upwardly 
sufficiently to bear against the outer side of 
the fixture g and thus assist in holding it in 
place. The end of the clamping-screw h. 
which lies within the cavity in the base plate 
A should be slightly headed so as to prevent 
the clamping screw from being removed. 
This prevents any portion of the device or 
hanger from being lost or displaced. 
I do not desire to limit myself to the use of 
my device for hanging shade roller fixtures as 
it may be employed for securing other small 
fixtures the position of which it is desirable 
to change from time to time, as for example 
hooks in closets, rod fixtures on window cas 
ings, and in shop Windows, and other fixtures 
of like character. 
What I claim is 
1. The improved holder or support for cur 
tain fixtures comprising a slotted base-plate 
A, a clamping-member c at the back thereof, 
a clamping-strip f at the front thereof be 
tween which and the surface of the base-plate 
the foot or feet of a curtain-fixture may be 
slipped, and the headed screw h passed 
through the said clamping-strip, through the 
25 
35 
slot in the base-plate, and through the clamp 
ing-member c, substantially as described. 
2. The improved holder or support for cur 
tain-fixtures 3omprising a slotted base-plate 
A, a clamping-member c at the back thereof 
provided with a neck - portion projecting 
through the slot in the base-plate and consti 
tuting a stop for the curtain-fixture, a clamp 
ing-stripfat the front thereof between which 
and the surface of the base-plate the foot or 
feet of a curtain-fixture may be slipped, and 
the headed screw h, passed through the said 
clamping-strip, through the slot in the base 
plate, and through the clamping member c, 
substantially as described. 
3. The improved holder or support for cur 
tain fixtures comprising a slotted base-plate 
A, a clamping-member c at the back thereof 
provided with a neck - portion projecting 
through the slot in the base-plate and having 
an enlarged head, it constituting a stop for 
the curtain-fixture, a clamping-strip f at the 
front thereof between which and the surface 
of the base-plate the foot or feet of a curtain 
fixture may be slipped, and the headed screw 
h, passed through the said clamping - strip, 
through the slot in the base-plate, and through 
the clamping-member c, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
WILLIAM MARTIN. 
Witnesses: 
WM. A. MACLEOD, 
FRANK M. WINN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US502923.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 502,923, 
E. E. CLAUSSEN, 
SCREW MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 8, 1893. 
7ta(2.7 
.- 
s 
 
 
 
...mith: 
37 AS". IHE 
YEEE 
X 
site ega 
Hall 
leaf S& 
g 
f EH lists. A 4229A c 
 
7 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
Wetz72esses: 
772 ver2opr: 
... (No Model.) 
No. 502,923. 
E. E. CLAUSSEN, 
SOREW MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Aug. 8, 1893. 
 
WZZ 72esses: 
Z72ave72Zo: 
 
E. E. CLAUSSEN, 
SOREW MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 8, 1893. 
Z 22, 6 
 
 
C 
s 
77 - 
(No Model.) 
No. 502,923. 
 
Vezzzesses : 
Z722/e72 Zo?: 
(No Model.) 
E. E. CLAUSSEN. 
SCREW MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
No. 502,923, 
 
 
Patented Aug. 8, 1893, 
- Za 9.8 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
36Ni, & SSSas 
ep22> S2S 
Z22 ZZ22N 
Nassas 
2 
56 
36 
is 7 
 
N dra . 
Azee-eee 2'4easer 
(No Model.) 
A. 
No. 502,923. 
  
 
 
 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
E. E. CLAUSSEN. 
SCREW MACHINE, 
Patented Aug. 8, 1893. 
Z22 S2 2 2N 
- 36 
al 
ar 
A2(2 A. 
67 
33-35 
& 
2 
2SN2 
43 
- 
- -------- 
iii., iii.3 --- 
------------------- --- 
- r H--A 
66 
38 -- - 
14. 
3. 
36 . 
 
Wizzesses: 
r 
77zzveza Zer: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD E. CLAUSSEN, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO EMIL F. LINKE AND GEORGE MORTSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
SCREW-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 502,923, dated August 8, 1893. 
Application filed May 19, 1892, Serial No. 433,525. (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
may be drilled or recessed in its reverse end 
by an auxiliary tool while the principal tools 
Be it known that I, EDWARDE. CLAUSSEN, 
are engaged upon the succeeding piece. Fig. 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Hartford, in the county of Hartford and State 
14 is a front view of what is shown in Fig. 13. 
Fig. 15 shows enlarged side and end views of 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Screw-Machines, 
such a piece of work as the devices shown in 
of Which the following is a specification, and 
Figs. 13 and 14 are adapted to produce. Figs. 
Which is illustrated by the accompanying five 
16, 17, and 18 are plan, side, and end views re 
sheets of drawings. 
spectively of a modification of the chuck for 
My invention relates to improvements in 
seizing the screw or other piece of work. 
machines for making screws and similar arti 
I will first describe the construction and 
cles from a coil or indefinite length of wire, 
mode of operation of each section of this ma 
in which the wire is held against rotation and 
chine, and afterward describe their combined 
is presented to the action of revolving tools 
mode of Operation. 
Which shape and finish those articles as may 
The driving mechanism.-The numeral 1 
represents the main bed or frame which sup 
be desired. 
It relates also to improved auxiliary devices 
ports the various mechanisms. The main shaft 
for removing and reversing the screws, and -2 is journaled in the frame and is driven by a 
for performing any desired operation, such 
worm wheel, worm, and pulley in the usual 
as slotting, drilling, or turning, upon the re 
manner; and carries the feed cam 3, the cut 
ting off cam 4, the extractor cam 5, and the 
verse end of the screw or piece of work by 
means of auxiliary spindles, without delaying 
turret slide calm 6. 
or hindering the action of the principal tool 
The feed mechanism is carried on a bracket 
spindles upon the succeeding blank. 
7 bolted to the main frame and consists of the 
Figurel of the drawings is a plan view of my 
straightening rolls 8 which revolve on studs 
improved machine. Figs. 2 and 3 are front 
fixed in the bracket 7; and of the feed rolls 9 
and rear views of the same. Figs. 4 and 5 are 
and 10 fixed on shafts 11 and 12 which are 
views of the left and right hand ends respect 
journaled in the bracket 7. One or both of 
the feeding rollers may be roughened or 
ively of the machine of Fig. 2, the terms left 
grooved, as shown in Fig.13, for the more se 
and right having reference to those direc 
tions as they appear in that figure. Figs. 6 
cure holding of the rod or wire. The shaft 11 
and 7 are respectively end and front views, 
has fixed upon it the ratchet wheel 13 which 
partly in section, of my wire feeding device, 
is advanced by the pawl 14 carried on the side 
the section represented in Fig. 6 being taken 
of the pinion 15 which turns loosely on the 
on the line a-b of Fig. 7, while the section 
outer end of the shaft 11. The pinion 15 en 
gages with the sector 16 which receives a suit 
shown in Fig. 7, is taken on the line C-d of 
Fig. 6. Fig. 8 is a rear view of the thread 
able motion from the cam 3 through the arm 
ing spindle. Fig. 9 is a plan view showing a 
17 and shaft 18, 
section taken on line e-fof Fig. 8. Fig. 10 
The extractor mechanism is mainly carried 
is a view of a section taken on the line g-h. 
on a braket 19, bolted to the bracket 7 and 
consists of a split chuck 20 adapted to the 
of Fig. 9 looking from the left hand in that 
figure. Fig. 11 is a plan view, partly in sec 
size of screw to be held. That chuck is fixed 
tion, of my wire feeding and cutting off de 
in the arm 21, which is pivoted on the shaft 
vices, showing the cutting down spindle and 
22, that shaft being journaled on the bracket 
the slotting attachment in their operative po 
19. The lower end of the shaft 22 has fixed 
upon it the sector pinion 23 which engages 
sitions, and showing also the means by which 
they are actuated. Fig. 12 is a front view 
with the sector 24 journaled on the main frame 
partly in section of what is shown in Fig. 11. 
1, and which receives its required motion from 
Fig. 13 is a plan view of a modification of my 
the cam 5. That motion causes the arm 21 to 
50 auxiliary device, by means of which the work 
make about a half revolution from the posi 
45 
35 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
2 
502,928 
75 
tion in which it appears in Fig. 1, so as to al 
low the chuck 20 to engage the body of the 
blank just before that blank is severed from 
the rod. An extractor pin 25 is held in an ex 
tension of the bracket 19, in such a position 
that it will force the blank out of the chuck 
20 when that chuck is carried toward the pin. 
The cutting off mechanism, bestseen in Figs. 
lland 12 consists of a carrier 28which revolves 
freely on an extension 7" of the bracket 7, and 
has pivoted upon it the oppositely disposed 
cranked arms 26 and 27. That extension 7' 
also carries a bushing through which the wire 
rod is fed, so that the position of the rod is con 
centric with that of the carrier 28, and concen 
tric therewith is also a threaded portion of 
the bracket 7 on which is fitted a face plate 29. 
The periphery of that face plate is provided 
With gear teeth, and it receives its required 
rotary motion from the cam 4 by means of the 
Sector 30 pivoted on the bracket 7, That ro 
tary motion of the face plate advances it on 
its thread against the bearing ends of the 
arms 26 and 27, causing their opposite ends 
which carry the cutting off tools, to move to 
ward the center of the blank for the purpose 
of severing it from the wire rod. The carrier 
28 is driven by means of the belt 31 from the 
pulley 32 on the shaft 32, on the opposite end 
of which is a pulley 32 which is driven from 
any convenient countershaft. The belt 31 is 
guided between the pulley 32 and carrier 28 
by the guide pulleys 33, 34. With this de 
vice I am enabled to begin the operation of 
cutting off before the revolving tool spindles 
have completed their operation upon the 
blank. 
The turret mechanism is carried upon a 
slide 35 which reciprocates in ways on the 
frame 1 as best shown in Fig. 5. This recip 
rocation at suitable times and to the desired 
extent is communicated by the cam 6 to the 
slide 35 by means of an extension 35 of the 
latter, which engages with that cam. Upon 
the slide 35 and with its axis at right angles 
to the motion thereof, is journaled the turret 
or monitor head 36 carrying the principal tool 
spindles 37, 38 and 39. Those spindles are 
journaled in the turret 36 with their axes ra 
dial to the center thereof, and that center, 
which is also coincident with the center of 
the bearing of the turret upon the slide, is es 
tablished in the same horizontal plane with 
the axis of the wire rod when in position to 
be operated upon. The axes of the spindles 
37, 38, and 39, also lie in the same vertical 
plane with the axis of the wire rod. The spin 
dles 37 and 38 are provided at their inner 
ends with bevel gears 40 and 41 which engage 
with the bevel gear 42, fixed on the shaft 43 
which extends through the slide 35 concen 
trically with the bearing of the turret there 
on. This shaft turns freely in the slide and 
has fixed on its front end a cone pulley 44 
which receives motion by means of a belt from 
any convenient shaft. The opposite end of 
the shaft 43 is extended beyond the gear 42 
and has fixed upon it the pulley 45 from 
whence a belt transmits motion to the saw 
spindle 46 which turns freely on a stud 47 
fixed to a projection of the turret 36. The 
position of the saw 48 and its connections is 
so established with relation to the extractor 
chuck 20, as that they shall come into proper 
operative relation for slotting the screw, when 
the extractor arm is in the position shown in 
Fig. 1 and the saw is in the position shown in 
Figs. 11 and 12. 
The spindles 37 and 38 may be adapted to 
hold any tools suitable for the shaping or turn 
ing of the articles to be made. 
The spindle 39 as shown in the drawings is 
adapted to carry a threading tool 49 and is 
provided with means for reversing and re 
tracting the die or tap, without reversing the 
direction of rotation of the shaft 43 from 
which it is driven. The construction of this 
device is best shown in Figs. 9 and 10. Jour 
naled in the turret 36 concentric with the 
spindle 39 are the bevel gears 50 and 51. 
These gears engage with the intermediate gear 
52 also journaled in the turret. The gear 51 
has fixed upon it the gear 53 which engages 
with and is driven by the gear 42. The spin 
dle 39 has upon it the spline 54 which engages 
the clutch 55, while permitting that clutch to 
slide endwise on the shaft 39 in order that it 
may engage with and be driven by either of 
the gears 50 or 51 by means of the teeth on the 
faces thereof. The clutch may also remain 
out of engagement with both gears, in which 
case the spindle 39 remains stationary. The 
clutch is operated by one end of the lever 56 
pivoted on the turret 36. The other end of 
that lever is thrown backward and forward 
by colliding with the stops 57 and 58 adjust 
ably fastened on the frame 1. The gears 50, 
51, 52, and 53 are driven continuously by the 
gear 42. The gear 51 revolves in one direc 
tion while the gear 50 revolves in the oppo 
site direction, so that the spindle 39 will re 
volve in one direction when its clutch en 
gages with the gear 51 and in the opposite 
direction when that clutch engages with the 
gear 50. 
The tool spindles are brought into their op 
erative position by intermittent partial revo 
lutions of the turret 36. As the slide 35 
moves back, or from left to right as seen in 
Fig. 2, one of the index pins 59 comes in con 
tact with the pawl 60 which is pivoted on the 
frame 1 and is held upward against the stop 
61 by the spring 62. As the backward move 
ment of the slide continues, the turret is 
caused to make a partial revolution, bringing 
the next spindle to its forward or operative 
position. The turret is secured in its differ 
ent positions by the bolt 63 in the slide 35, 
which is pressed by the spring 64 into the re 
cesses 65 in the turret 36. As the slide moves 
forward to bring the tools into engagement 
with the work, the turret 36 is also more se 
curely held against lateral movement by the 
projections 60, each of which, when its corre 
90 
95 
IOC 
IoS 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
3 C 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
502,928. 
5 
O 
5 
25 
35 
- 
sponding spindle is in operative position, is 
adapted to engage with and be steadied by 
the guide 67 on the bed 1. 
The combined and consecutive operation of 
the above described mechanisms is as fol 
lows: The end of a coil or length of wire is 
placed in position between the straightening 
and feeding rolls and is fed forward a dis 
tance agreeing with the length of the screw to 
be made. Then the principal toolspindles are 
presented to it in their proper consecutive 
order, and perform their desired operations 
upon the blank, those spindles being revolved 
by their geared connection with the gear 42, 
and being fed forward with the slide 35 by 
the cam 6. If the blank is to be tapped or 
threaded the spindle 39 is provided with a 
suitable tool, and that tool is fed into or upon 
the Work with the clutch 55 in engagement 
With the gear 50. The stop 57 is so adjusted 
that the end of the lever 56 will collide with 
it at the proper moment and cause the clutch 
55 to disengage with the gear 50 and engage 
With the gear 51. At the same moment the slide 
85 stops its forward movement and goes back 
Ward in time with the tap or die as it leaves 
the Work. At the backward end of the stroke 
the lever 56 collides with the stop 58 throw 
ing the clutch forward into engagement with 
the gear 50, ready for the next piece. Before 
the operations on the body of the blank are 
fully completed the cutting off mechanism 
may begin, in the manner previously de 
Scribed, to sever the blank from the rod. 
Meanwhile the extractor arm swings forward 
far enough to allow the chuck 20 to pass upon 
the body of the blank, and when that blank 
is severed from the rod the arm 21 returns to 
the position shown in Fig. 1, carrying the 
screw held in the chuck 20, so that the longi 
tudinal position of the screw is reversed as 
compared with its former position on the rod. 
The arm 21 remains in the position shown in 
Fig. 1, until the slotting saw 48 comes into 
the position shown in Figs. 11 and 12 when 
it advances against the blank and cuts the 
desired slot therein. Then the arm 21 is 
caused by the cam 5 to swing still farther 
back, so that the pin 25 pushes the blank out 
of the chuck 20 whence it falls into a conven 
ient box. 
It will be seen that suitable adaptations of 
these improved devices will produce many 
kinds of objects other than screws. Some 
of these objects, like that shown in Fig. 15, 
are of such a form that it has been difficult 
and expensive to produce them by the hith 
erto existing methods, by which, after one end 
had been finished they were discharged from 
the machine, to be rechucked and finished 
by a separate operation. By means of my 
improved devices both ends of such a piece 
of work may be finished before releasing it. 
Figs. 13 and 14 represent an adaptation for 
recessing the reverse end of a piece similar 
to that shown in Fig. 15, in which a drill spin 
dle 68 is journaled on the turret 36, and has 
fixed upon it the pulley 69, which receives 
motion from the pulley 70 on the shaft 38. 
As the turret advances to bring the tool on 
the spindle 38 into operation upon the rod, 
the auxiliary tool 71 operates upon the blank 
held in the chuck 20. 
Figs. 16, 17 and 18 represent a modification 
of the chuck 20; the end of the arm 21 has 
upon it a recess in the form of a V, into which 
the blank is pressed by the jaw 72 actuated by 
the spring 73. As the arm 21 oscillates into 
the position to grasp the screw the end of the 
arm 21 describes an arc of a circle and there 
fore its path does not exactly coincide with 
the straight lines of the sides of the screw; 
but the yielding jaw 72 springs open suffi 
ciently to allow the screw to enter. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with means for holding a 
rod or wire from rotating, a series of revolv 
ing spindles, and an intermittently rotating 
turret on which those spindles are journaled, 
arranged and operating to present those spin 
dles successively to that rod or wire, all sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In combination with means for holding a . 
rod or wire from rotating, a series of revolv 
ing spindles radially journaled on a turret or 
head which is capable of intermittent rota 
tion, a revolving shaft concentric with the 
axis of that turret, and gears by means of 
which a rotary motion is communicated from 
that shaft to those spindles, substantially as 
described. 
3. In combination with means for holding a 
rod or wire from rotating, a series of revolv 
ing spindles journaled on an intermittently 
rotating turret, and a reciprocating slide on 
which that turret is mounted, arranged and 
operating to advance and retract those spin 
dles to and from the rod as they are Slic 
cessively presented to it substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination of a revolving carrier 
having oppositely disposed cranked tool arms 
pivoted thereon, a threaded face plate adja 
cent to that carrier and mechanism for rotat 
ing that plate face upon its thread whereby 
it is advanced against the bearing ends of 
those arms substantially as described. 
5. In combination with means for holding a 
rod or wire from rotating, a revolving car 
rier having oppositely disposed tool arms piv 
oted thereon, and a threaded face plate adapt 
ed to be rotated and advanced upon its thread 
against the bearing ends of those arms, and 
operating to force their tool carrying ends to 
ward the center of the rod for the purpose set 
forth, all substantially as described. 
6. In combination with means for holding a 
rod or wire from rotating, an oscillating arm 
or carrier 21 provided with a chuck, the pin 
ion gear 23 rigidly connected with that arm, 
the sector gear 24 and the cam 5, all adapt 
ed to swing that chuck into alignment with 
the rod or wire after one end of a blank has 
been operated upon by a series of princi 
95 
do 
I o5 
IO 
II5 
125 
(3O 
55 
 
502,928 
verse or unfinished end to the action of the 
auxiliary spindle, substantially as described. 
8. In combination with means for holding a 
rod or wire from rotating, an intermittently 
rotating turret provided with the spindle 39, 
a slide on which that turret is mounted, gears 
50 and 51 with means for rotating them con 
tinuously in opposite directions, the clutch 
55, lever 56, and stops 57 and 58, whereby the 
spindle 39 is rotated with the gear 50 or with 
the gear 51, all substantially as described and 
for the purpose specified. 
EDWARD E. CLAUSSEN. 
2C) 
25 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. A. LORENZ, 
WILLIAM. H. HONISS, 
pal tools located in the plane of the rod, and 
Operating to seize and reverse that blank and 
to present its reverse or unfinished end to the 
action of auxiliary tools in another plane; 
Substantially as described. 
7. An intermittently rotating turret having 
journaled thereon a series of revolving princi 
pal spindles located in the plane of the blank 
to be Operated upon, and carrying also an 
auxiliary revolving spindle which lies in a 
different plane from that of the principal 
Spindles, an oscillating arm adapted to en 
gage the blank when the principal spindles 
have performed their work thereon and oper 
ating to carry that blank from the plane of 
the principal spindles and to present its re 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503023.txt	(No Model.) . 
C. F. WILLSIE. 
ORE SEPARATOR. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 503,023, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
C. F. WILLSIE. 
ORE SEPARATOR. Patented Aug. 8, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SSN 
N AAN 
Z22 
/) 
's 
 
 
? 
/WVEWTOR 
BY 
ATIORNEYS, 
 
--."? 
?????. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES F. WILLSIE, OF OGDEN, UTAH TERRITORY. 
ORE-SEPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 503,023, dated August 8, 1893. 
Application filed June 13, 1892, Serial No. 436,610, (No model.) 
55 
75 
?? 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs F. WILLSIE, 
of Ogden, in the county of Weber and Terri. 
tory of Utah, have invented a new and Im 
proved Ore-Separator, of which the following . 
is a full clear, and exact description. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved ore separator which is sim 
ple and durable in construction, very effect 
ive in Operation and more especially designed 
for dry placer mining, to conveniently, thor 
oughly and quickly separate the precious met 
als from the sand without the use of water. 
The invention consists of a casing or box 
connected with a suitable blast, and provided 
With a series of pans containing quicksilver, 
and agitators arranged in the said casing and 
extending into the quicksilver to agitate the 
Sale, 
The invention also consists of certain parts 
and details, and combinations of the same, as 
Will be hereinafter described and then pointed 
out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters and figures of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure1 is a sectional side elevation of the 
improvement. Fig. 2 is a rear side elevation 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
of part of the same. 
transverse Section of the same on the line 3-3 
of Fig. 1; and Fig. 4 is a similar view of the 
same on the line 4-4 of Fig. 1. 
The improved ore separator is provided 
with a box or casing A, preferably made in 
two parts of which one is in the shape of a 
trough B, supported on legs C and the other 
forms a cover D, also supported on the said 
legs C and covering the top and sides of the 
trough B, as will be readily understood by 
reference to Figs. 3 and 4. Into one end of 
the box or casing A opens the discharge noz 
zle E of a blower Fof any approvedconstruc 
tion, to force a blast through the said dis 
charge nozzle Einto the box or casing A and 
through the same for the purpose hereinafter 
more fully described. 
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the blower F is 
rovided with the usual fan wheel F secured 
on the shaft F carrying on its outer end a 
pulley FConnected by a belt F with suitable 
machinery to impart a rotary motion to the 
said shaft F and consequently to the fan 
wheel F.' so as to force a blast of air through 
the nozzle E and casing A in the direction of 
- the arrow Cal. 
In the box or casing A in front of the inlet 
of the discharge nozzle Eis arranged a down 
wardly and forwardly extending chute G con 
nected at its upper end with a hopper H, set 
on top of the box or casing A. The sand con 
taining the precious metal is thrown into this 
hopper H and is fed by a notched wheel I 
into the spout G from which it passes down 
ward into the path of the blast and over a 
false bottom B' arranged in the casing A as 
plainly shown in Fig. 1. 
In order to regulate the amount of mate 
rial passing from the hopper Hinto the box 
or casing A, a gate J is provided, held in an 
inclined position and fitted to slide in the 
lower part of the hopper H. directly above the 
feed wheel I. By opening or closing the gate 
J more or less, more or less material is fed 
into the box A. The toothed feed wheel I is 
secured on a transversely-extending shaft I' 
provided at one outer end with a pulley I 
over which passes a belt I connected with 
suitable machinery to impart a rotary motion 
to the said feed wheel in the direction of the 
arrow b'; see Fig. 1. Part of the false bot 
tom B extends horizontally and connects 
with an inclined portion B' leading to the 
front end of the box or casing A below the 
entrance of the spout E as will be readily un 
derstood by reference to Fig. 1. 
Above the inner end of the false bottom B' 
is arranged a deflecting gate K serving to de 
flect the material into a pan L set in the 
trough B and containing quicksilver or other 
amalgamating substance. The upper end of 
the transversely-extending deflecting gate K 
is secured on a transversely-extending shaft 
K' provided on one outer end with a handle 
K*for conveniently setting the deflecting gate 
K at the desired angle, according to the na 
ture and quantity of the material under treat 
ment. The handle Kis adapted to belocked 
in place in any desired position om a toothed 
rack K, fastened to the outside of the casing 
or box A as will be readily understood by ref. 
erence to Fig. 2. 
In the pan L are mounted to revolve agi 
95 
OO 
? ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
503,023 
75 
 
tating wheels N preferably two in number, 
but a single one will answer, the purpose. 
Each agitating wheel N is provided with ra 
dially-extending agitating arms N' set on a 
shaft N mounted to turn in suitable bearings 
in the sides of the cover D of the casing A. 
On one outer end of this shaft N* is secured 
a pulley N8 connected by a belt with suitable 
machinery to impart a rotary motion to the 
said agitating wheel in the direction of the 
arrow c'. The lowermost arms N' of each 
agitating wheel pass into and through the 
quicksilver contained in the pan L, SO as to 
agitate the quicksilver to cause its particles. 
to take up the precious metals passing with 
the material into the pan on top of the quick 
silver, so that the precious metal is taken up 
and retained by the amalgam, while the loose 
sand passes forward by the force of the blast 
onto the next wheel N to be treated in a like 
alle. 
If two wheels N are used in the same pain 
L, a second deflecting gate K is arranged be 
tween the two wheels, as shown in Fig. 1, the 
said gate being adjustable and under the con 
trol of the operator in the manner described 
in reference to the first gate K. The ends of 
the pan L are inclined upwardly and out 
wardly and the forward end of this pan con 
nects with the corresponding rear end of a 
second pan L' which again connects at its 
forward end with a third pan Land in a like 
manner a series of pans L, L may be con 
nected with each other, as described, each pan 
being provided with an agitating wheel or 
wheels and corresponding deflecting gates K 
so that the material moved forwardly by the 
blast passes successively into the several pans, 
comes in contact with the agitated quicksil 
ver which latter takes up all particles of pre 
cious metals and retains the same, while the 
lighter material moves forward until it finally 
passes into the last panL" of the entire series. 
As indicated in Fig. 2, the several agitating 
wheels in the entire series are connected with 
each other by belts O at their pulleys N, so 
that when the first pulley is set in motion all 
the pulleys are rotated simultaneously and 
consequently the entire series of agitating 
wheels Nisrotated for the purpose mentioned. 
As illustrated in Fig. 1, the last pan L con 
tains but one agitating wheel N and in front 
of the latterisarranged an amalgamated roller 
Protated from the last agitating wheel N and 
arranged to catch the floured quicksilver. 
The outer end L of this last pan L extends 
upwardly a considerable distance as shown in 
Fig. 1, and this end L is preferably coated 
with amalgam, to catch the floured quicksilver 
and return it to the quicksilver contained in 
the pan L. 
At the end of the box or casing A is mount 
ed a revoluble wheel Q, the wings of which are 
made of amalgam plate for the purpose of 
catching any quicksilver or flake gold or flour 
that may escape from the box or casing A. 
This wheel Q is revolved by the blast escap 
ing from the casing and passes with its lower 
part into a pan R set on the ground and into 
which the precious metal is discharged that is 
caught by the wheel Q. The rear end of the 
cover D is provided with a hinged top D/ 
adapted to be set at any desired angle so as 
to regulate the outlet of the material onto the 
wheel Q. 
The operation is as follows: When the sev 
eral parts are in the position shown in the 
drawings and motion is given to the blower 
F, and the several agitating wheels N, the 
roller P and the wheel Q and the material 1S 
fed into the hopper H. Then the material 
feeds past the revolving feed wheel I into the 
hopper G and from the latter is forced for 
ward over the false bottom B' by the blast of 
air coming from the blower F. The material 
is forced past in contact with the quicksilver 
held in the first pan L, so that the heavy 
precious metals are taken up by the agitated 
quicksilver while the sand and lighter, pre 
cious metals pass onward to the second pan 
L' to be treated in a like manner, and again 
part of the precious metal is separated from 
the sand taken up and retained by the quick 
- silver contained in the second pan. Thema 
terial forced forward by the blast into the 
next pan is successively treated therein in 
the manner described, so that when the ma: 
terial finally reaches the last pan most all 
the precious metal is separated from the Sand 
and retained in the quicksilver of the various 
pans. Any floured quicksilver carried along 
by the blast will be taken up by the roller P 
or the amalgamated plate Land any flake 
gold or flour that may pass out of the rear 
end of the box or casing A is caught by the 
amalgamated plates of the wheel Q and de 
posited in the pan R. After the process is 
completed the cover D of the box or casing A 
is removed so as to permit of conveniently 
removing the pans L for discharging their 
amalgam which is treated further to separate 
the precious metals from the quicksilver. 
It will be seen that this machine requires 
no water whatever for separating the precious 
metals from the sand or tailings. 
Electricity is applied to the plates and 
pans in order to electrically charge and give 
life to the quicksilver and keep it from flour 
ing, also heat, by lamps arranged under the 
pans or other means to facilitate the separat 
ing of the precious metal from the Sand. 
When electricity is used wires 2 connected 
with a battery or other source of supply, are 
arranged along the bottom of the casing or 
box, one at each side, and from these wires 
branch wires 3 extend up over the edge of 
the pans down into the quicksilver. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. An ore separator, comprising a casing, a 
hopper at one end of the casing, a blast fan 
connected with one end of the said casing, a 
series of connected pans containing quick 
90 
95 
IOO 
I I. ? 
I I5 
I 25 
2 ? 
25 
35 
40 
45 
?? 
65 
503,023 
Scribed. 
ing, a feed hopper discharging into the casing 
in front of the air blast, a series of connected 
pans containing quicksilver, the last pan hav 
ing its outer end extended upwardly and out 
wardly and coated with amalgam, revolving 
agitating wheels, adjustable gates above the 
pans, and a revoluble wheel having amalgam 
ated wings and arranged at the end of the 
casing, substantially as herein shown and de 
5. An ore separator, comprising a Casing 
having a hinged outer end, a blast fan con 
nected with one end of the casing, a forwardly 
inclined chute in the casing, a hopper above 
the chute, a feed wheel in the hopper, a series 
of connected pans on the bottom of the cas 
ing, and containing quicksilver, the last pan 
having its bottom inclined upwardly and out 
Wardly and coated with amalgam, agitating 
wheels in the pans, adjustable gates above 
the pans, an amalgamated roller in the last 
pan, and a wheel having amalgamated Wings 
arranged at the end of the casing, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
.- 
CHAS. F. WILLISIE. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
J. D. MCATEE, 
A. H. MOYES. 
silver arranged on the bottom of the casing, 
agitating wheels mounted to revolve in the 
pans, and a series of hinged gates above the 
pans, substantially as described. 
2. An ore separator, comprising a casing, a 
blast fan connected with one end of the cas 
ing, a series of connected pans on the bottom 
of the casing and containing quicksilver, the 
last pan having its outer end extended up 
Wardly and outwardly and coated with amal 
gam, agitating wheels mounted to revolve in 
the pans, and a series of adjustable gates in 
the upper part of the casing over the pans, 
substantially as described. 
3. An ore separator, comprising a casing, a 
blast fan connected with one end of the cas 
ing, a forwardly inclined discharge chute in 
the casing, a hopper above the chute, a series 
of connected pans on the bottom of the cas 
ing and containing quicksilver, the last pan 
having its outer end inclined upwardly and 
outwardly and coated with amalgam, agitat 
ing wheels mounted to revolve in the pans, a 
series of hinged gates above the pans, and 
means for adjustably holding the gates, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. An Ore-separator, comprising a casing, a 
blast fan connected with one end of the cas. 
1. ? 
15 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503123.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. COLE, 
D0UBLETURNING SEIOWEL AND COLTER, 
No. 503, 12 
3. 
Patented Aug. 15, 1893. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. COLE, OF TYLERTO WN, MISSISSIPPI. 
DOUBLE TURNING SHOVEL AND COLTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 503,123, dated August 15, 1893. 
Application filed October 1, 1892, Serial No. 447,575. (No model.) 
O 
- 
To aid, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN H. CoLE, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Tylertown, 
in the county of Pike and State of Mississippi, 
have invented a new and useful Double Turn 
ing Shovel and Colter, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to a combined double 
turning shoveland colter, united to form a sin 
gle implement, the objects in view being sim 
plicity, compactness, cheapness and strength 
of construction. 
My invention is fully described hereinafter. 
Figure 1, shows a front view of the double 
turning shovel and colter. Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse lateral view of the same in section. 
1. 1. are the wings of the double turning 
shovel which rise above the upper central 
edge of the plow and slope or curve rear 
wardly. 
2 is the central part of the face of the plow 
which is bent or concave from point-3- to 
4, and sloping gradually to sides or edges of 
the plow 5, 5. The point, 3 is diamond shaped, 
the edges of which, 66, are beveled. 
- 
Fig. 2, shows the colter (4) attached, which 
is a circular or crescent shaped blade, the front 
edge of which is sharp or beveled. This colter 
is arranged to be turned to one side to serve 
as a fender, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
I claim 
1. A double shovel plow formed with the 
diamond point 3, the wings 1 rising above the 
central portion, said central portion being 
vertically concave and slightly convex across 
the face of the shovel, said center narrowed 
above the cutting edge, thence expanding into 
the wings, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. The double shovel plow formed as de 
scribed and shown in combination with the 
crescent-shaped colter 4, secured to the plow 
and adapted to be turned to one side to serve 
as a fender, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
35 
40 
JOHN H. COLE, 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. WILLIS, 
WILLIAM SANDIFER, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503223.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 503,223, 
 
A. YOST. 
TRUSS 
Patented Aug. 15, 1893, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW YOST, OF STEELTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
TRUSS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 503,223, dated August 15, 1893. 
Application filed January 19, 1893, Serial No. 458,925, (No model.) 
9 indicates a catch upon the end of the 
spring which is inserted into one of the eye. 
lets 3, and is adapted, when the strap encir 
cles the waist, to hold the truss securely in 
place. The spring is preferably secured to 
the strap altogether by the loops 2. If the 
strap is made of very light leather it is pref 
erably provided with stiffening plates 10 at 
intervals. to prevent the leather from biting 
into the flesh of the wearer. 
The spring may be made of round wire, as 
illustrated in Fig. 3, or of flat spring metal, 
as illustrated in Fig. 4. 
In applying my truss the spring or springs, 
as the case may be, are set in place, the rings 
in their ends serving to afford a broad firm 
bearing for them. The slotted end of the 
spring is then brought opposite the hernia, 
and the pad is properly adjusted. The spring 
is then fastened in place. By the use of my 
strap a great freedom of movement is per 
mitted and danger of displacement avoided. 
What I claim is 
In a truss the combination with a belt pro 
vided with loops, of a superimposed spring 
provided at one end with a ring adapted to 
be passed through one of the loops and at the 
other with a slot, and a pad adjustably Se 
cured within the slot, substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony of all which I have hereunto 
subscribed my name. 
ANDREW YOST. 
45 
So 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
W. S. SEIBERT, 
HARRY WESTBROOK. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ANDREW YOST, of Steel 
ton, county of Dauphin, and State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Trusses, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
an improved truss which will give greater 
comfort to the Wearer and greater ease of 
movement without danger of displacement 
than may be had with those in ordinary use. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front view of my truss; Fig. 2 a top plan 
view thereof. Fig. 3 is a view of one of the 
springs, detached; and Fig. 4 a similar view 
of a modified form thereof. 
Referring to the figures on the drawings, 1. 
indicates a belt of suitable flexible material, 
as for example leather. It is provided with 
loops 2 on one or both sides, depending upon 
whether the truss is to be used for single or 
double hernia. 
3 indicates eyelets in one end of the strap. 
4 indicates a bent spring having in one end 
a ring which enters one of the loops 2, and . 
which affords a broad bearing upon the back 
of a wearer for the spring. At its other end 
it is provided with a longitudinal slot 5, which 
is adapted to movably carry a pad 6 which is 
provided with a flanged button 7 for holding 
it in place, and admitting of its moving freely 
in any direction in the slot. 
8 indicates a supporting pad designed to 
assist the pad 6 in performing its office of 
sustaining single hernia. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503323.txt	(No Model.) 
W. L. KEEPHART & J. C. HACKETT, 
BED BOTTOM 
 
No. 503,323, 
Patented Aug. 15, 1893. 
2 
S. 
a 
7 XV 
ANN 
() O 
2Y XN y^ N N7 X% 
XXX XXX 
X/XYANNXN/Y2. 
Y4%fyNy'KKK 
XXXXXXO 
X 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM L. KEEPHART AND JACOB C. HACKETT, OF WILKES-BARRE, 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
BED-Botto M. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 503,323, dated August 15, 1893. 
Application filed June 12, 1893, 
Serial No. 477,265, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, WILLIAM L. KEEPHART 
and JACOB C.HACKETT, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Wilkes-Barr, in the county 
of Luzerne and State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Bed-Bottoms, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Our invention relates to bed bottoms, and 
more particularly to that class in which a 
woven wire fabric is combined with spiral 
Supporting Springs. 
The invention consists in a novel means 
for caging the rough projecting twisted ends 
of the coils of the fabric, and means for con 
necting said fabric to the spiral springs. 
In the class of bed bottoms to which my in 
vention belongs, the ends of the wire fabric 
which are at right angles to the individual 
coils or wires of which the fabric is composed 
are formed into a transverse series of loops 
by twisting together the ends of adjacent 
coils in successive pairs. These twisted ends 
form ragged projections which would injure 
bed clothing and other articles and it has 
been customary to bend them inward or to 
guard them in some suitable manner. 
Our improved means for guarding the 
rough ends will now be described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of one corner of a bed bottom in 
volving our invention. Fig. 2 is a view of a 
modification. Fig. 3 is a section on the line 
3-3 of Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 is a view of an old 
caging device. 
The woven wire fabric A is composed of 
spiral strands of wire intercoiled together in 
the usual manner. The ends of these strands 
are connected together in pairs by twisting 
them as shown atc. Thus the adjacent strands 
a', a, form one pair which are twisted to 
gether and the strands b', b, form another 
pair. There is thus formed a row of end 
loops d. It has heretofore been proposed to 
cage or guard the twisted ends c by passing 
an additional spiral through the end loops d, 
in which case the twisted ends would lie in 
the axial line of the spiral. By this arrange 
ment, however, the rough twisted ends would 
be exposed between the adjacent coils of the 
spiral as shown in Fig. 4, and a second spiral 
is required to sufficiently protect them. 
In the present invention a straight wire or 
rod D is passed through the end loops d and 
the caging coil E is connected to the wire D 
at points between the loops d and also be 
tween the twisted ends c. One effect of this 
arrangement is that the twisted ends care di 
rectly under and are protected by the outer 
bends e of the coil E, which bends form pro 
tecting arches over the rough ends. Another 
advantage is that the rod T distributes the 
strain which may be applied to any one part 
of it over a number of the loops d and thus 
prevents the untwisting of any of the ends c. 
When it is desired to connect the fabric to 
a series of vertical spirals F as shown in Figs. 
1 and 3 of the drawings, the additional coil G. 
is used, said coil being intercoiled with the 
caging coil E and also at various points with 
the spirals F. As shown in the drawings, 
three or four turns of the outer coil G are 
connected to the upper turn of each spiral F 
and to the opposite turns of the caging coil 
E while the intermediate turns of the Outer 
coil are simply connected to the caging coil. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim is 
1. A section of woven wire fabric having a 
series of parallel coils or wires intercoiled to 
gether and connected in pairs at each end 
by twisting together the free ends of the ad 
jacent successive pairs, thereby forming at 
each end of the fabric a transverse row of 
loops d having rough ends c projecting be 
yond said loops, a rod or wire running through 
the row of transverse loops at each end of 
the fabric, and a caging coil extending across 
at each end of the fabric and united thereto by 
being coiled around said rod between the said 
end loops and twisted ends c, thereby caging 
at each end of the fabric the rough project 
ing twisted ends of the parallel wire coils, 
substantially as described. 
2. A bed bottom consisting of a series of 
vertical spirals connected together, a woven 
wire fabric supported on said spirals and 
composed of a series of parallel wire coils in 
IO 
3o 
35 
45 
95 
2 
508,823 
tercoiled together and connected in pairs at the Supporting spirals, substantially as de- Io 
each end by spirally twisting together the ad- scribed. 
jacentends of parallel coils, thereby forming 
at each, end of the fabric a transverse row of in presence of two witnesses. 
5 loops d, wires or rods ID extending across 
the ends of the fabric through the loops d, 
caging coils E intercoiled with the wires D. Witnesses: 
between the loops d, and connecting coils G 
intercoiled with the caging coils and with 
WILLIAM L. KEEPART. 
JACOB C. HACKETT. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
H. BARRING, 
W. L. RAEDER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503423.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. KIDWELL, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
MANU FACTURE OF GAZED RON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 503,428, dated August 15, 1898. 
Application filed October 18, 1892, Serial No. 449,246. (No specimens.) 
To all whon, it invay concert: 
Be it known that I, JoHN W. KIDWELL, of 
Washington, in the District of Columbia, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in the 
Manufacture of Glazed Iron, which is fully 
set forth in the following specification, 
The object of the present invention is to 
impart to the surface of iron a protective coat 
ing or glaze similar in properties to that of 
Russian sheet-iron. 
The coating or glaze produced according to 
this invention is a layer or film, of greater or 
less thickness, of a titanic compound com 
bined or united with theiron or steel body in 
such manner as to be practically a part there 
of. This layer or coating is usually of a dull 
steel-blue color and is distinguished mainly 
by its resistance to oxidation and corrosion. 
It forms a practically inoxidizable surface to 
the iron or steel body upon which it is ap 
plied or formed. 
I produce the described glaze or coating by 
using, in the manner hereinafter pointed out, 
a mineral paint such as described in an ap 
plication of even date herewith (Serial No. 
449,247) and which is composed of titanic 
compounds mixed with asphalt, or other suit 
able hydrocarbon. 
In preparing the paint or coating which is 
used in carrying out the invention I employ 
the titanic minerals (menaccanite, &c.) found 
in association with certain phosphate ores, 
grind the mineral to an impalpable powder, 
and then mix it with asphalt, or other suit 
able hydrocarbon Such as paraffine, coal tar, 
and the like, and with a suitable liquid me 
dium to impart the desired fluidity. The sur 
face of the iron is covered or coated with this 
mineral paint, which then forms on the iron, 
as on other Substances, a non-oxidizable pro 
tective surface, as specified in the above men 
tioned application. This paint constitutes, 
of course, a mere coating distinct from the 
iron, and which though more adherent than 
most mineral paints, can be Scraped off, ex 
posing the surface of the iron in its original 
condition. 
The glaze or coating which is the special 
object of the present invention, is obtained 
by heating either the paint or the iron or 
both, and thereby producing a chemical or 
molecular change upon the surface of the iron 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
55 
f55 
75 
itself. I have not been able to determine the 
precise nature of the combination that en 
Sues between the iron and the titanic com 
pound; but as before stated, the glaze has the 
properties of Russian iron. It is not affected 
by atmospheric influences, or by strong acids, 
but it is evident from my experiments that 
when the iron and titanic mineral are brought 
into contact and heated, a strong and perma 
nent combination takes place between the 
iron and the mineral, and it appears that the 
presence of carbon assists in bringing about 
this union. When the paint is dried and 
scraped off with a sharp instrument, the glaze 
is exposed, and from every test appears to be 
an integral part of the iron itself, as distin 
guished from a mere coating, such as formed 
by the paint. As a further indication that a 
chemical or strong molecular combination 
takes place between the iron and mineral, it 
may be stated that upon other metallic sur 
faces, as copper, the treatment has no analo 
gous result; but when after similar treatment 
the paint is Scraped off the copper surface is 
exposed, exhibiting no change of condition. 
In applying the paint it will suffice to employ 
a temperature of from 250 to 450 Fahren 
heit and upward. It is preferable to use high 
temperatures, as the reaction takes place 
more rapidly, and the best results are thereby 
obtained. The degree of heat applied and 
the length of time during which the opera 
tion is conducted will determine the thick 
ness of the coating or glaze, that is to say the 
distance from the surface of the iron inward 
to which the titanium will penetrate. 
The process, as detailed above, is that which 
is found most efficient and practical; but it 
Will be obvious to chemists that the desired 
combination of iron and titanium mineral 
may be effected without following precisely 
the mode of procedure herein specified. The 
essential condition is to expose the entire sur 
face to be covered to the action of titanic 
compound when the heat is applied, and the 
use of a paint in which the mineral is uni 
formly mixed is found a convenient and ef 
fective Way of Securing the essential condi 
tion. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The process of forming on iron surfaces 
a titanium glaze, by applying a titanic min 
95 
OO 
2 
503,428 
5 upon the surface of iron bodies an incorrodi- 
2. The described process of forming in or as set forth. 
3. As a new product, an iron sheet or body 
eral compound to the surface of the iron in 
close contact therewith, and heating the same, having on its surface a glaze composed of a 
titanium compound combined with the iron, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
ble coating or glaze, by first forming a paint specification in the presence of two subscrib 
or mixture of pulverized titanic mineral here-ing witnesses. 
in specified and asphalt, and applying the 
same to the surface of the body, and heating. 
Witnesses: 
Io until a union between the iron and titanium 
is effected, substantially as described. 
PHILIP MAURO, 
REEVELEWIS. 
- 
- 
I5 
JOHN W. KIDWELL, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503523.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 503,523, 
 
J. H. BRANSON, 
PUMP 
Patented Aug. 15, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WIWITWESS 
2 % 
???? 
???? 
IWWE, WTOR 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. H. BRANSON, OF BELMONT, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
SAND WICH ENTERPRISE COMPANY, OF SAND WICH, ILLINOIS. 
PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 503,523, dated August 15, 1893. 
Application filed September 7, 1885, Serial No. 176,412, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. H. BRANSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bel 
mont, in the county of Allegany and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pumps, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation partly 
in Section of a pump constructed according to 
my improvement; Fig.2 a vertical central sec 
tion of the upper cylinder and shell; Fig. 3 a. 
similar section of the lower cylinder, and Fig. 
4 a plan of the top of the shell. 
This invention relates to an improvement in 
that class of pumps shown in the Patent No. 
249,885 granted jointly to myself and brother 
and is designed to adapt such pumps for use 
in drilled Wells of small bore and the inven 
tion consists in the peculiar combinations and 
the construction and arrangement of parts 
hereinafter more particularly described and 
claimed. 
Referring now by letter to the details of 
construction as shown in the drawings, Arep 
resents the standard which may be of any de 
sired form, but preferably similar to that 
shown in the Patent No. 249,885 before re 
ferred to, and well known among pump manu 
facturers asthe four poststandard. It con 
sists of four rods or pipes (only two of which 
B and B' are shown in the drawings) con 
nected to castings CD at top and bottom-the 
upper casting C carrying the support E for 
the lever F by which the pump is operated. 
The pipe B, which is screwed into the base 
D and passes through the cap C, has the 
curved discharge spout secured to its top, 
and communicates through a curved pas 
Sage in the base D with the main discharge 
pipe G which is Screwed into the base D, 
and carries at its lower end a shell or casing 
H, into which it is firmly screwed or otherwise 
secured. This shell carries the upper cylin 
der of the pump I, which may be either cast 
therein or formed of seamless tubing and 
Screwed or otherwiseSecured therein. Below 
this is suspended the lower cylinder J by a 
pipe K of any desired length-say from 
? 
twenty-five to one hundred feet-which cyl 
inder may be made in any suitable manner 
and of any convenient material, and should 
be provided with a foot or valve L, and it may 
also have a suction pipe M, although this is 
not necessary as the cylinder J may be sub 
merged. Depending from the lever F is a 
rod or pipe N which passes loosely through 
the cap C, base D and an aperture h in the 
top of the shell H and carries the upper 
piston O, from which piston depends a rod P 
connected to the lower piston Q by any suit 
able coupling. As a further means of Sup 
port for the shell H, I prefer to screw small 
rods into its top as shown at R, which rods are 
secured in any convenient manner to the 
base D. 
In setting my pump into a bored well hav 
ing a bore but little larger than the shell, the 
lower cylinder being connected to the upper 
one by a comparatively small pipe of consid 
erable length, the latter will bend so that the 
lower cylinder will be substantially in line 
with the shell and eccentric to the upper 
pumping cylinder. 
The operation of the pump is as follows:- 
Motion being given to the pistons by the lever 
F, the upward motion thereof causes the Wa 
ter to enter the lower part of the lower cylin 
der J and the down ward movement causes the 
Water below said lower piston to pass through 
it, and thus fill the upper part of said cylin 
der. The next upward movement of the pis 
tons forces a portion of the water above the 
lower piston out through the discharge pump 
and allother portion into the upper cylinder. 
The next downward movement of the piston 
forces the water in the upper cylinder out of 
the same into the shell and discharge pipe 
and a corresponding quantity of the water al 
ready contained therein Inust, of course, pass 
out of the discharge pipe. It will thus be 
seen that a continuous stream of water will 
be discharged from the spout, as the lower 
piston forces out water when going up, the 
upper piston when going down, and the air 
chamber formed by the hollow piston rod 
tends to equalize the stream at the instant 
When the stroke is changing. 
It will be seen that by the construction and 
O 
2: ? 
25 
35. 
40 
45 
So 
? ? 
75 
90 
95 
?. ? ? 
503,523 
arrangement of parts above set forth and 
shown in the drawings, I have provided a 
force pump, double acting in discharge, that 
will readily enter a well of very small bore, 
which is facilitated by setting the upper cyl 
inder eccentric within the shell, andby con 
necting the upper shell and lower cylinder 
With a pipe set in an opening in the bottom 
of the shell substantially in line with the cyl 
inder inside the shell, or eccentric with the 
shell itself and concentric with the lower cyl 
inder. This has the advantage of allowing 
the rod connecting the two pistons, to be at 
tached centrally to both pistons, whereas, if 
the pipe connecting the shell to the lower cyl 
inder were connected concentrically, the rod 
connecting the two pistons would necessarily 
have to be connected to the upper pistonec 
centrically, or on one side, unless an extraordi 
narily large pipe connected the shell and cyl 
inder, which would add much to the cost of 
the pump in such deep wells as my pump is 
designed for. It will also be seen that by the 
use of a connecting pipe of comparatively 
Small bore as compared to the size of the lower 
cylinder and the shell-said pipe will bend or 
spring and allow the lower cylinder to accom 
modate itself to its position so as to work in 
a Well or a bore of substantially the same di 
ameter as said cylinder, which would not be 
the case where the pipe and cylinder are sub 
stantially the same diameter. 
I deem it important that the heads or ends 
of the shell shall be as small in diameter as 
the body thereof, in order that the pump may 
enter Wells of small bore. If the caps or ends 
of the shell and cylinders project beyond the 
outside of the shell or the lower cylinder the 
bore and consequently the capacity of the 
cylinders must be lessened. I also deem it 
important that there shall be independent 
openings for the discharge and the piston rod, 
because the pipe for the discharge may be 
made much smaller than when the piston rod 
passes through it. 
Some of the features of construction herein 
shown and described are not claimed herein, 
as they are claimed in my application, Serial 
55 
?? 
75 
No. 273,643, filed May 11, 1883, as a division 
of this application. 
What I claim as new is 
1. In a pump having two cylinders and pis 
tons, a cylindrical shell of nearly the same 
diameter as the lower cylinder, and having 
an internal eccentric cylinder, a pipe of Com 
paratively small diameter connected to the 
bottom of said shell and to the top of the 
lower cylinder, substantially in line with the 
axis of the eccentric cylinder, whereby the 
piston rod of the lower cylinder may hang 
under the center of the upper piston, or the 
connecting pipe bend to one side, as desired, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a pum) having two cylinders, a cylin 
drical shell of nearly the same diameter as the 
lower cylinder, having a cylinder set eccen 
trically within it, two openings above the dis 
charge pipe and piston rod and an eccentri 
cally-placed opening in its bottom, a pipe of 
smaller diameter than the lower cylinder, run 
ning from said eccentric opening to the lower 
cylinder, a piston ineach cylinder and a con 
nection between said pistons, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a pump having two cylinders, a cylin 
drical shell of nearly the same diameter of 
the lower cylinder, having an internal eccen 
tric cylinder, an opening in each end substan 
tially in line with the eccentric cylinder and 
an opening at one side of the top to receive 
the discharge pipe, a pipe of smaller diame 
ter than the lower cylinder in line with the 
eccentric opening in the bottom of the shell 
and connecting with the lower cylinder, a pis 
ton in each cylinder, and a connection be 
tween the said pistons having its axis in line 
with the axis of the upper piston, substan 
tially as described. 
Intestimony whereofIaffix my signature, in 
presence of two witnesses, this 4th day of 
September, 1885. 
JOSEPH. H. BRANSON. 
Witnesses: 
J. N. HYDE, 
CHAS. STRATTON. 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503623.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 503,623. 
---- 
- 
- 
er" 
--- 
W. H. STARR, 
MOTOR. 
z 2 
Patented Aug. 22, 1893. 
-- AOAO2 
- 
C i. 
Hill iH 
. A IA m 
Y1 t 
to -- 
- 
O 
O 
N 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. STARR, OF LIBERTY, NEBRASKA. 
MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 503,623, dated August 22, 1893. 
Application filed February 9, 1893, Serial No. 461,655, (No model.) 
5 
25 
35 
45 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. STARR, a 
resident of Liberty, in the county of Gage and 
State of Nebraska, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Motors; and I do. 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
motors, the object being to provide a device 
which shall be simple in construction, cheap 
to manufacture and which can readily be 
used for imparting rotary motion to the 
wheels of a vehicle or to machinery. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion and combinations and arrangements of 
parts as hereinafter set forth and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a vehicle embodying my im 
provements. Fig. 2 is a sectional view. Fig. 
3 is a Sectional view of the clutch mechanism. 
Figs. 4 and 5 are detail views. 
While my improved motor is applicable for 
driving various kinds of devices, I will, for 
convenience, describe it herein as applied for 
driving a vehicle. 
A represents a vehicle frame, having front 
wheels a, and rear wheels a'. On the axle b 
of the front wheels, two gear wheels c, c' are 
rigidly secured. 
Secured to and projecting upwardly from 
the frame of the vehicle are two brackets D, 
D', in which a shaft d is mounted, and on said 
shaft d, two gear wheels E, E' are loosely 
mounted,-the gear wheel E being smaller 
than the gear wheel E, and the latter being 
adapted to mesh with the gear wheelc'. 
Secured to the bracket D, is a box or frame 
e, which supports a gear wheel or pinion f 
This pinion is adapted to mesh with the gear 
wheel E, and also with the gear wheel c on 
the front axle. The gear wheels E, E, are 
provided in their inner faces with recesses g 
for the reception of a series of spring actuated 
dogs e' carried by two disks F, F, secured to 
the shaft d. The dogs e' are located loosely 
in recesses in the disks F, F, said dogs being 
adapted to engage in the notches g in the 
driving pinions E, E, when the disks are 
 
55 
65 
75 
oscillated in one direction and to ride over 
said recesses or notches, when the disks are 
oscillated in the reverse direction. An oper 
ating lever G is inserted between the disks 
F, F, and secured thereto in any suitable 
manner, so that said disks will be oscillated 
when the lever G is vibrated. Balance wheels 
h are secured to the shaft d in proximity to 
the driving pinions E, E, and serve to assist 
the operator in manipulating the lever G. 
From this construction and arrangement of 
parts, it will be seen that when the lever G is 
vibrated in one direction, the dogs carried by 
one of the disks will engage the notches or 
recesses g of one of the gear wheels E or E, 
and cause said wheel to make a partial revo 
lution, while the dogs of the other disk will 
ride over the recesses of the other driving 
pinion, without imparting motion to it, and 
vice versa. When the gear wheel E is ro 
tated motion will be imparted to the gear 
wheel c' on the axle b, and thus propel the 
vehicle forward. When the gear wheel E is 
rotated by the reverse vibration of the lever 
G, motion will be imparted to the gear wheel 
or pinion f and from said pinion to the gear 
wheel of pinion c on the axle band thus con 
tinue the forward motion of the vehicle. 
Thus it will be observed that by the forward 
and backward vibration of the lever, a con 
tinuous motion Will be imparted to the wheels 
of the vehicle or other device to be propelled. 
The rear axle of the vehicle is pivotally 
connected with the vehicle frame by means 
of a fifth wheel i. A vertical shaft lc is lo 
cated in proximity to the front end of the ve 
hicle and provided with a crank arm l by 
means of which to operate it. A wheel (pref 
erably a sprocket wheel) in is carried by the 
vertical shaft ic, and over this wheel a chain 
in passes, the ends of said chain being con 
By this means 
nected with the rear axle i. 
the vehicle can be readily guided. 
Slight changes in the details of construc 
tion of my invention might be made without 
departing from the spirit of the invention or 
limiting its Scope, and hence I do not wish to 
limit myself to the precise details of construc 
tion herein set forth; but 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
85 
90 
95 
OC 
508,623 
1. The combination with a shaft, of gear 
wheels mounted loosely on said shaft and 
having recesses in their inner faces, disks se 
cured to said shaft between the gear wheels, 
dogs carried by said disks and adapted to al 
ternately engage the recesses in the gear 
wheels when the disks are moved in one di 
rection and alternately ride over them when 
the disks are moved in the other direction, 
an axle, gear wheels carried by said axle, one 
of said gear wheels being adapted to mesh 
with one of the loosely mounted gear wheels, 
and a pinion located between the other gear 
wheel on the axle and other loosely mounted 
gear wheel, and a lever secured to said disks, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with a shaft, of gear 
wheels mounted loosely on said shaft and E. 
having recesses in their inner faces, balance 
wheels secured to said shaft, disks secured to 
said shaft between the gear wheels, an oper 
atting lever secured to said disks, dogs car 
ried by each of said disks, the dogs of each 
disk being adapted to engage the recesses in 
the respective gear wheels, alternately when 
the disks are moved in one direction and ride 
over them alternately when the disks are 
moved in the other direction, a pinion mesh 
ing with one of said loosely mounted gear 
wheels, an axle carrying a gear wheel with 
which said pinion meshes, and another gear 
wheel on said axle adapted to mesh with the 
other loosely mounted gear wheel, Substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
WILLIAM. H. STARR. 
Witnesses: 
W. T. GoRE, 
D. T. GORE. 
25 
35 
O 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503723.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 503,723. 
C. LONGISTRETH. 
METALLIC ROD PACKING, 
Patented Aug. 22, 1893. 
  
  
  
 
 
 
72% 
  
a is 
7 
2. SKN 
 
assa S. N 
(ZAZ N. 
A Ni 
N 
Y 
7 
2. 
w 
- 
Z 22, 2. 
V 
M6% 
A 
. ME AN" 
AXV 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
ZeeseSat N 27) GN 
AEI 6-S- 
72%, 2 /2 & 72, -2 Z2, 4 
ea 
- 
WITNESSES: 
24&s 
4, 24% 
A. 
2 
e (C) 4% INVENTOR 
464 (as 
, a. 7A277 
a 
- 
ATTORE 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES LONGSTRETH, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE UNITED STATES METALLIC PACKING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
METALLIC ROD-PACKING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 503,723, dated August 22, 1893. 
Application filed March 11, 1893, 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES LONGSTRETH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, in the State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Metallic Rod-Packings, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to packings of that 
class used for making steam, water or vapor 
tight joints around piston rods or valvestems, 
reciprocating or otherwise working in stuffing 
boxes of engines, pumps or other machinery. 
The invention has for its object to improve 
packings of this character in a manner assur 
ing tight joints both around the rod or stem, 
which is allowed lateral play, and at the wall 
of the stuffing-box, irrespective of the planes 
of the end walls of the cylinder and gland be 
tween which the packing is compressed. 
The invention will first be described and 
then will be particularly defined in claims 
hereinafter set forth. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which like numerals indicate similar parts 
in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional eleva 
tion illustrating my invention; an oil cup for 
lubricating the piston rod being also shown. 
Fig. 2 is a similar sectional view showing a 
modification, and Figs. 3 to 10, inclusive, are 
detail face and edge views of the rings, here 
inafter specially referred to. 
In my improved packing, Iemploy two outer 
or end rings 1, 1, of suitable metal, shown de 
tached in Figs. 3 and 4 of the drawings, and 
each having an outside plane face 2 and an 
inside concave face 3. Next the rings 1,1, are 
placed rings 4, 4, each having a convex outer 
face 5 adapted to the face 3 of the adjacent 
ring 1, and also having an inwardly flaring or 
inclined inner face 6, and next the rings 4, 4 
are located two rings 7,7, having substantially 
triangular cross sectional form and disposed 
with their apices at the inside, and between 
said rings 7, 7, is placed a third triangular 
ring 8 having its apex at the outside, all as 
clearly shown in Fig.1 of the drawings. After 
thus assembling the packing rings within the 
stuffing box 9 on the cylinder, valve chest or 
other part 10, and around the piston rod or 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
75 
Serial No. 465,526, (No model.) 
valve stem 11, working therein, the gland 12 
is applied within the box outside the packing 
and is made adjustable to compress the pack 
ing, to maintain a tight joint around the mov 
ing rod or stem, by means of bolts 13 having 
lock nuts 14. A spring 15, or other substan 
tially similar elastic body, cushioning the parts 
against undue shocks, may be interposed at 
one or both ends of the assembled packing 
rings, as shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings. 
The openings in the cylinder or chest and 
in the gland through which the rod 11 moves 
are larger than the rod to give it necessary free 
domfor lateral play to accommodate non-align 
ment of parts of the engine, pump or other ma 
chine to or in which the rod is applied. An 
oil cup 16, shown fastened to the gland 13 in 
Fig. 1 of the drawings, serves to lubricate the 
moving rod 11 and the rings packing the rod 
within the stuffing-box. 
The end rings 1, 1 of the packing, which I 
term compressing rings, are not split or di 
vided, but the other rings 4, 7 and 8 are split 
or divided and it may be angularly or by a 
halved joint or in any other suitable manner 
allowing them to be expanded against oppos 
ing faces of the stuffing box and piston rod or 
valve stem, to effect perfectly tight joints 
thereat by the pressure of the gland. 
It will be noticed that by using packing 
rings 4, 7 and 8 and the plano-concave end 
compressing rings 1,1, and even when the end 
springs or elastic mediums 15, 15 are not in 
terposed, it is immaterial whether the opposite 
end walls of the cylinder 10 and gland 12, 
which act on the rings 1, 1, are strictly paral 
leland at exact rightangles with theside walls 
of the stuffing-box, because should these face 
irregularities exist, the inner convex faces of 
the rings 1, 1, will accommodate themselves 
to the corresponding convex outer faces of the 
rings 44, and the latter by pressure on the op 
posing rings 7, 7 will force them outward more 
closely to the side. Wall of the stuffing-box, 
while said rings 7 force the three rings 4, 4, 8 
more closely to the piston rod or stem 11. The 
effect of the packing in securing permanently 
tight joints at the wall of the stuffing-box and 
next the piston rod will be substantially the 
same when the cushioning springs or elastie 
mediums 15 are used, 
90 
95 
IOO 
508,723 
My packing requires at least three rings 7, 
7, 8 between the rings 4, 4, which are pressed 
by the plano-concave rings 1, 1, but should 
the stuffing-box be relatively longer than is 
shown in the drawings, two or more duplicate 
rings 7, 8 may be used. Insofar as concerns 
spine features of my invention, it is immate 
rial whether the end rings 1,1, have plane. 
outerfaces, which however are preferred in 
practice. . 
I claim 
1. A metallic rod packing, comprising end 
compressing rings having inner concavefaces, : 
rings having outer convex faces fitting the 
inner faces of the end rings and having in 
clined or inwardly diverging inner faces, and 
three or more rings having substantially tri 
angular cross section and disposed with apices 
and bases reversed between the last named 
rings, substantially as described. 
2. A metallic rod packing, comprising un 
Split end compressing rings having inner con 
Cave faces, split rings having outer convex 
s 
. 
faces fitting the inner faces of the end rings 
and having inclined or inwardly diverging 25 
inner faces, and three or more split rings hav 
ing substantially triangular cross section and 
disposed with apices and bases reversed be 
tween the last named rings, substantially as 
described. . . 
3. A metallic rod packing, comprising end 
compressing rings having inner concavefaces, 
rings having outer convex faces fitting the 
inner faces of the end rings and having in 
clined or inwardly diverging inner faces, three 35 
or more rings having substantially triangular 
cross section and disposed with apices and 
bases reversed between the last named rings, 
and springs or elastic cushioning devices out 
side the end rings, substantially as described. 4o 
Intestimony whereofI affix my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
30 
CHARLES: LONG-STERETE. 
'S 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. BENJAMIN, 
EDW. B. HAWKINS. 
o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503823.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 503,823, 
E. H. ADAMs 
FLUE STOPPER, 
Patented Aug. 22, 1898. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDMUND H. ADAMS, OF LAMAR, MISSOURI. 
FLUE-STOPPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,823, dated August 22, 1893. 
Application filed May 23, 1893, Serial No. 475,223. (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDMUND H. ADAMS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at La 
mar, in the county of Barton and State of 
Missouri, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Flue-Stoppers; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention has relation to an improve 
ment in flue stoppers or devices for closing 
the pipe hole in a chimney or flue, and it has 
for its object to provide such a device at a 
minimum expense, which will not get out of 
order, and may be readily adjusted and se 
cured in pipe holes of various sizes. 
The invention will be fully understood from 
the following description and claim when 
taken in connection with the annexed draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1, is a sectional view of a part of a 
flue, showing my improved device therein 
with the cap or closing disk in section, and: 
Fig. 2, is a similar view of the device removed 
from the pipe hole. 
Referring by letter to said drawings: A, 
indicates a ring or band of steel or iron hav 
ing sufficient resiliency to give and expand 
or contract to the action of a thumb screw or 
Wing nut. 
B, indicates a rod. This rod is welded, 
riveted, or otherwise suitably fixed to said 
band at. One end, as shown at a, and extend 
ing diametrically across the band, passes 
through a transverse aperture b, therein, and 
its free end is threaded as shown at c. 
C, indicates a disk or plate of tin or sheet 
metal. This plate or disk may be ornamented 
on its outer side, and is provided in its mid 
dle portion with a bulge D, which conforms 
to the curvature of and receives a part of the 
band, and through the center of this bulged 
portion is an apertured, for the passage of 
the rod B. The disk is of a sufficient diame 
ter to close the pipe hole of a chimney, and 
- 
is held upon the band and rod by means of a 
wing nut E. 
The flue or pipe hole is indicated by F, 
and the band is designed to be made suffi 
ciently large that when expanded it will ad 
just itself to said hole, while when contracted, 
it may be easily withdrawn or inserted in the 
pipe hole. 
By reason of the rod having the threaded 
end, outwardly disposed, and its inner end 
fixed to the band, the parts are not liable to 
become detached or lost, and they are very 
effective for the purposes designed. 
I do not wish to be understood as confining 
myself to any particular design or formation 
of the disk or plate C, as that can be of a 
shape and configuration according to the 
fancy or dictation of the mechanic. It will 
also be observed that when the nut has been 
turned upon the threaded end of the rod in 
one direction, it will spread the band so as to 
cause the points b', b, to press outwardly and 
against the walls of the flue hole, while the 
plate or disk will also be somewhat straight 
ened out so as to press more firmly against 
the face of the chimney. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
As an improved article of manufacture, the 
adjustable flue stopper comprising the yield 
ing band, having a transverse hole as de 
scribed, the plate or disk having a central 
hole, the rod threaded at one end and passing 
through the respective holes and fixed at its 
inner end to the band, at a point opposite the 
hole therein, and the wing nut, arranged on 
the threads of the rod, and adapted to bear 
against the plate and band, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
EDMUND H. ADAMS. 
75 
Witnesses: 
G. D. CRENSHAW, 
B. C. AVERY. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US503923.txt	(No. Model.) 
No. 503,923. 
J. WOLF, Jr. 
CLUTCH, 
. 
Patented Aug. 22, 1893. 
N22 S SN 
  
 
 
is: 
 
 
3. 
% 
s2 
Ez2. 
R 
 
 
 
vs. 
V5 
2 
% 
N 2 
SC N 
S2, 
S 
V 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN WOLF, JR, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JACOB 
BLOCH, OF SAME PLACE. 
CUTCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 503,923, dated August 22, 1893. 
Application filed May 17, 1893, Serial No. 474,576. (No model.) 
O 
5 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHNWOLF, Jr., a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Cincin 
nati, in the county of Hamilton and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Friction-Clutches; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
friction clutches. 
The primary object of the invention is to 
provide means for first frictionally engaging 
and causing a band-wheel or pulley to rotate 
With the driving shaft and then locking the 
same to the shaft so that the pulley shall not 
slip So long as the clutch devices are engaged. 
A further object is to provide a friction 
clutch which shall be simplein construction, 
inexpensive in manufacture and efficient and 
reliable in use. 
The invention will first be described with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, and 
then particularly pointed out in the claims 
at the end of the description. 
Referring to the drawings, in which similar 
letters are used to denote similar parts in the 
different views, Figure 1 represents a longi 
tudinal Sectional elevation of a friction clutch 
embodying my invention, and Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional end elevation on the line II-II of Fig.1. 
The band-wheel or pulley A, is placed 
loosely on the main or driving shaft B, so as 
to revolve freely thereon independently of 
the shaft, and the hub thereof is preferably 
provided with annular recesses in which may 
be fitted Babbitt or other anti-friction metal, 
as indicated at a. The pulley A, is confined 
against endwise movement on the shaft be 
tween a collar B', and the hub of the spider 
C, C, which parts may be secured to the shaft 
So as to rotate there with by means of set 
screws b, c, as shown, or in any proper man 
ner, The pulley A, at the side thereof adja 
cent to the spider is provided or formed with 
a cylindrical flange A', and its hub at the 
same side is provided with curved or arc slots 
a', for a purpose to be described. The spider 
may consist of a hub C, and two (more or less) 
radial arms C, to which are pivoted clutch 
levers D, D, to the shorter arms of which are 
fixed clutch blocks d, of wood or other fibrous 55 
material, which are adapted to impinge upon 
the ring or flange A', so as to compel the pull 
ley to rotate with the shaft. The levers D, 
D, have a toggle-joint connection with links 
E, E, the opposite ends of which are pivoted 6o 
to a sliding collar or sleeve F, which is keyed 
to the driving shaft B, by spline and groove, 
orother suitable connection, so that the collar 
may move longitudinally upon and also rotate 
with the shaft. By this means, as will be 65 
seen, when the collar F is moved toward the 
pulley pressure will be applied through the 
toggle-levers D, E, upon the rim or flange A', 
causing the blocks d, d, to exert an increas 
ing pressure upon the flange so as to friction- 7o 
ally engage and bind the pulley to the spider 
sufficiently to cause the pulley and Spider 
to rotate together with the shaft. For con 
venience of operation the collar F, may be 
grooved, as at f, to receive a strap which may 
be connected with an operating lever in a 
well-known manner for the purpose of sliding 
the collar along the shaft. 
Between the spider hub C, and collar F, is 
placed a second sliding collar or sleeve G, 
from which pins g, g, project through open 
ings in the hub of the spider in position to 
engage the arc slotsa', in the hub of the pull 
ley when the sleeve G, is slid inward or to 
ward the pulley, so as to lock the pulley to 
the spider and compel the two to rotate to 
gether as one and thereby prevent the pulley 
from slipping. The collar G, may be con 
nected with the collar F, by a headed bolt or 
bolts f', projecting from the collar F, with 
the head or heads f', thereof fitting in an 
opening or openings g', extending partially 
through the collar G, so that the bolt f', may 
have a limited movement independent of said 
collar to permit the latter to remain station 
ary until the collar F, has moved inward suf 
ficiently to cause the clutch blocks to engage 
the circular flange A', and start the pulley, 
whereupon the collar F, by contact with the 
collar G, will slide the latter toward the pull- Ioo 
ley and cause the pins g, to engage the arc 
slots a, and thus lock the pulley to the shaft. 
95 
35 
45 
503,923 
O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
Coiled or other suitable springs H, H, may 
connect the long arms of the levers D, with 
the hub of the spider, or other suitable part 
of the clutch mechanism, so as to exert a con 
Stant in Ward pull upon the long arms of the 
clutch levels, tending to disengage the clutch 
blocks and serving to hold the parts disen 
gaged when the operating lever (not shown) 
is released. 
The operation of my invention will be: 
readily understood from the foregoing de 
Scription taken in connection with the accom 
panying drawings. 
When the operating le 
Ver is moved so as to force the collar F, in 
Ward toward the pulley A, the toggle-jointed 
levels will exert a gradually increasing force 
tending to bind the clutch blocks to the cir 
cular flange on the pulley, whereby the latter 
Will be frictionally engaged with the shaft 
and caused to rotate there with, and as the 
in Ward movement of the collar continues the 
collar G, will be slid inward so as to engage 
the locking pins g, with the are slots a, and 
When the pins reach the ends of the arc slots 
the pulley will be firmly locked to the shaft 
So as to prevent slipping. On the reverse, 
movement of the lever, toward the comple 
tion of the outward movement of the collar. 
F, the head of the bolt f', reaching the bot 
ton of the opening or recess in the collar G, 
Will cause the latter to move outward with 
the collar F, and withdraw the locking pins 
simultaneously with the act of disengaging 
the clutch blocks from the circular flange. 
This clutch may also be used for the pur 
pose of coupling the abutting ends of two, 
independent shafts or shaft sections, in which 
case the pulley will be placed upon the end 
of one shaft and the spider, sliding collar and 
intermediate sliding sleeve carrying the lock 
ing pins will be placed on the abutting end 
of the adjacent shaft or shaft section. It may 
also be desirable in some cases to provide 
Countersinks in the openings in the hub of 
the spider through which the locking pins. 
pass, in which may be seated coiled or other 
Suitable springs, as shown in Fig.1 surround 
ing the pins and pressing the sleeve outward 
to prevent the sleeve from moving inward 
until engaged by the sliding collar. 
Other 
equivalent means may also be substituted for 
the sliding pins for the purpose of locking 
the parts together after the speed of the pull 
ley has attained approximately the speed of 
the driving shaft to which it is to be locked. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The band wheel or pulley provided at one 
side with a circular flange or ring and having 
arc slots in the hub thereof, in combination 
with the hub having radial arms, the sleeve 
adjacent to said hub carrying locking pins 
adapted to engage said are slots, the collar 
adjacent to said sleeve, clutch levers piv 
otally supported upon said radial arms and 
 
- 
Scribed. 
adapted to impinge at one end upon said 
flange and having their outer ends pivoted 
to connecting links the opposite ends of which 
are pivoted to said collar, substantially as de 
2. The band wheel or pulley provided at one 
side with a circular flange or ring and having 
are slots in the hub thereof, in combination 
with the hub having radial arms, the sleeve 
adjacent to said hub carrying locking pins 
adapted to engage said arc slots, the collar 
adjacent to said sleeve, clutch levers pivot 
ally supported upon said radial arms and 
adapted to impinge at one end upon said 
flange and having their outer ends pivoted to 
connecting links the opposite ends of which 
are pivoted to said collar, and springstending 
to disengage said clutch levers and locking 
pins, substantially as described. 
3. A friction clutch comprising the pulley 
loose on the main driving shaft, the sliding 
collar keyed on said shaft, the spider, the piv 
oted levers carrying the clutch blocks, the 
links connecting said levers and collar, the 
intermediate sliding collar or sleeve carrying 
the locking pins adapted to engage arc'slots 
in the hub of the pulley, and connections be 
tween said sliding collar and sleeve, whereby 
the pulley will be frictionally geared to the 
driving shaft on the initial movement of the 
clutch operating collar and locked thereto on 
the continuation of this movement by Said 
locking pins, substantially as described. 
4. In combination with the circular flange, 
the spider, the pivoted clutch levers provided 
with the clutch blocks, the sliding collar, the 
links pivotally connecting said levers and 
collar, the springs tending to disengage said 
clutch blocks, the sleeve placed between said 
collar and spider, and means carried by said 
sleeve for locking the pulley to the spider at a 
predetermined point in the movement of the 
clutch levers, whereby the pulley is first fric 
tionally geared to the driving shaft. and then 
locked thereto, substantially as described. 
5. In combination with the loose pulley 
having arc slots in the hub thereof, the clutch 
levers and collar and means for frictionally 
gearing said pulley to the main driving-shaft, 
mechanism adapted to operate at a prede 
termined point in the movement of the fric 
tion gearing and lock the pulley to the shaft, 
comprising a sliding sleeve, carrying locking 
pins for engaging said arc slots in the hub 
of the pulley and connections between said 
sleeve and collar for operating the same, 
whereby on the forward movement of said 
collar said pulley will first befrictionally en 
gaged and caused to turn with the shaft and 
then locked to the shaft, and vice versa, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. In a friction clutch, the combination with 
the pulley loose on the main driving shaft 
and provided with arc slots in the hub thereof 
and with a circular flange or ring, of the slid 
ing collar keyed on said shaft, the pivoted le. 
o 
75 
95 
do 
IOS 
C 
II5 
I 25 
65 
 
503,923 
- 
3. 
vers connected with clutch blocks which are 
adapted to impinge on said flange, the links presence of two witnesses. 
connecting said levers and collar, and the in 
termediate sliding collar or sleeve carrying 
5 locking pins adapted to engage said arc slots 
in the hub of the pulley, substantially as de- 
scribed. 
T. J. COLLINS, 
WM. LAUDWEHR, 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
Witnesses: 
JOHN WOLF, JR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504023.txt	H. J. DAVIS, J. RICE &. J. C. MoDANIEL, 
SAW COTTONGIN, 
Patented Aug. 29, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 504,023, 
rt. 
 
2 
2a2zzazzzzzzzazzazzazzazzzzzzzazzazza 
(No Model.) 
, 
H. J. DAVIS, J. RICE &. J. C. MoDANIEL. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
SAW COTTONGIN, 
- 2 - 
Patented Aug. 29, 1893. 
No. 504,023, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
d 
5 
H is: 
9 to 2-sty go 92 
eye pass get 
less 99.99999 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY J. DAVIS, JOHN RICE, AND JOHN C. McDANIEL, OF IRON CITY, 
ALABAMA. 
SAW coTTON-GIN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 504,028, dated August 29, 1893. 
Application filed April 29, 1893, Serial No. 472,396, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, HENRY J. DAVIS, 
JoHN RICE, and JOHN C. MCDANIEL, citizens 
of the United States, residing at Iron City, in 
the county of Calhoun and State of Alabama, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Saw Cotton-Gins; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
cotton gins, and more particularly to a class 
of gins recognized in the art as saw gins. 
The primary object of the invention is to 
provide a double or triple gin adapted to ef 
fectually take off or strip the cotton from the 
Seed and at the same time separate motes, 
dirt, &c., therefrom, so as to insure a good 
sample or quality of cotton and at the same 
time accomplish a greater amount of workin 
a given time than is possible with gins of the 
ordinary construction. 
A further object is to provide a double gin 
which shall be simple in construction, inex 
pensive in manufacture and efficient and re 
liable in use, and which while possessing all 
the advantages of a rapid gin shall not be 
subject to the objections incident to the use 
of gins of the same general character con 
structed as heretofore proposed. 
The invention will first be described with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, and 
then particularly pointed out in the claims at 
the end of this description. 
Referring to the drawings by letters of ref 
erence, Figure 1 represents a side elevation of 
a machine embodying our invention. Fig. 2 
is a vertical longitudinal sectional elevation 
of the same. Fig. 3 is a diagrammatic side 
elevation illustrating a modification of the in 
vention. Fig. 4 is a detailed sectional view 
of one of the brushes; and Fig. 5 is a section 
taken on the line V-V of Fig. 4. 
It has heretofore been proposed to construct 
a cotton gin having two or more sets of saws 
and brushes, the object being to produce a 
gin which will do a great amount of work in 
a comparatively small period of time; but in 
such gins no provision is made for the escape 
of motes, dirt and other foreign matter which 
is carried along with the lint, thus sacrificing 
quality for quantity. Another serious disad 
vantage in the practical operation of such 
gins results from the method of gearing or 
belting the saw and brush shafts, the belts 
being so arranged as to cause a heavy down 
ward pull on the brush-bearings, and owing 
to the rapidity of motion required such bear 
ings are liable to be set on fire with most dis 
astrous results, it being practically impossi 
ble to prevent total destruction of a gin when 
lint cotton takes fire. To overcome these and 
other defects in previously proposed con 
structions We have devised certain improve 
ments in the general arrangement of parts 
and improved features of construction as will 
now be described. 
The saws A, and A', of the upper and lower 
gins, respectively, may be of the forin shown 
or any suitable construction, the upper saws 
being preferably larger than the lower ones, 
and arranged to rotate in a direction opposite 
to the direction of rotation of the brushes B, 
B', which latter will be hereinafter more par 
ticularly described. The flues C, C, which 
communicate with the upper and lower com 
partments of the frame-work or casing of the 
respective gins, may converge into a main flue 
C, which may discharge into a condenser in 
the ordinary manner, or, if desired, the flues 
C, C, may discharge into separate condensers 
so as to assort the lint into different grades; the 
lint being forced through the flues to the con 
denser by a draft of air caused by the rota 
tion of the brushes. The converging portions 
of the flues which extend beyond the gin 
frame or casing are made separable from the 
portions thereof communicating directly with 
the respective compartments of the gin so as 
to be readily detached for the purpose of stor 
age or packing for transportation and to per 
mit the attachment of separate flues, if de 
sired. 
D, denotes a traveling belt or carrier which 
is interposed between the upper and lower 
compartments and is adapted to catch all 
motes and other foreign matter falling with 
the lint from the upper gin and to discharge 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
95 
IOO 
2 
504,023 
the same into the roll-box of the lower gin. 
The ribs of the upper gin may be separated 
to about the same extent that is usual in gins 
of ordinary construction so that more or less 
of the motes and other objectionable matter 
will pass between such ribs and fall onto the 
mote-carrier D; but the ribs of the lower gin 
are placed nearer together than is usual in 
common gins, so that only very small motes 
can pass between them. 
The mote-carrier 
may consist of three (more or less) belts with 
transverse slats or strips of Wood having a 
V-shaped cross-section secured thereto so as 
to travel with the belts, the slats being sep 
arated very slightly to permit sand, dirt, &c., 
to pass between the same. This carrier is 
placed upon cylinders or rollers D', D', which 
are suitably journaled transversely of the 
frame; the former being arranged near and 
above the mouth of the roll-box A, and the 
latter in rear of the inlet to the flue C, so as 
to adapt the carrier to catch all motes and 
foreign matter to which any lint might ad 
here and discharge the same into Said roll 
box so that such lint could be removed by the 
second set of SaWS. 
A band-wheel or pulley D, on the project 
ing end of the shaftD, is connected by a belt 
O', with a band-wheel or pulley on a counter 
shaft K, which latter is geared to the main 
driving-shaft so as to impart motion to the 
mote-carrier as will be presently described. 
E, E, denote mote-boards one of which is 
placed under each of the flues C, C, and which 
are adapted to be adjusted either forward or 
back so as to vary the size of the discharge 
opening beneath the brushes at will. These 
boards preferably extend across the full width 
of the gin parallel with the brushes and be 
low the same and may be readily adjusted in 
such manner as to regulate the discharge of 
the motes and other objectionable matter fall 
ing from the brushes as may be desired and 
necessary in the operation of the machine. 
F, F, denote whipper-boards one of which 
is arranged under each of the brushes just 
below the saws, and they are adapted to be 
adjusted toward or from the brushes as may 
be desired. These boards are adapted to 
knock the motes, dirt and trash loose from 
the lint cotton so as to cause the former to 
fall through the opening between the whip 
per-board and the mote-board, while the lint 
is forced on through the flues by the current 
of air caused by the revolving brush. The 
whipper-boards extend across the gin-frame 
parallel with the brushes and in proximity 
thereto and are preferably formed with con 
cave faces conforming to the convexity of the 
brush and are each provided on their lower 
depending edges with a flat strip or band of 
sheet iron or other suitable material as at f, 
f', which strips are adjustably secured to the 
lower edges of the boards by suitable fasten 
ings such as set screws passing through slots 
in the strips so that they may be moved to 
ward or from the brushes as occasion may re 
quire. The adjustment of the whipper 
boards may be accomplished by means of Set 
screws f, passing through slotted ears or 
brackets.f, projecting from the lower sides 
of the boards as shown, or in any proper 
hale. 
The gin ribs G, G, may be of the usual or 
any preferred construction, but in order to 
prevent wear each may be provided with a 
steel plate g, having beveled edges and fitted 
in a corresponding dovetailed groove or re 
cess in the upper face of the rib, to which it 
is secured by a set screw So as to be readily 
detached and renewed when worn, thereby 
saving the cost of renewing the entire rib. 
H, H', denote regulating plates or seed 
boards of ordinary construction fitting in the 
respective roll-boxes A, A, and adapted to 
be adjusted and secured in the desired posi 
tion by means of the toothed bars or racks 
h, h', respectively, in the usual manner. 
I, denotes the main driving-shaft which may 
be located beneath the floor on which the gin 
is placed. I, denotes a band-wheel or pulley 
upon said shaft I, and I, a band or belt for 
imparting motion from said shaft to the gin 
saws, brushes and mote-carrier. The belt I, 
passes from the band-wheel I over a similar 
band-wheel K, upon a counter-shaft K, which 
may be mounted in adjustable bearing upon 
the gin frame or casing in any proper man 
ner. From the band-wheel K, the belt passes 
under a small band-wheel or pulley b', on the 
shaft b, of the upper brush B; thence over a 
larger band-wheel a', on the shaft a, of the 
upper set of saws A; thence under a small 
band-wheel or pulley b, on the shaft b, of 
the lower brush B'; thence over a larger band 
wheel a, on the shaft a, of the lower set of 
saws A", back to the band-wheel I. By this 
arrangement motion will be imparted from 
the main driving-shaft to the brushes and 
SaWS So as to cause the same to rotate in 
opposite directions, and at the same time, 
by means of the cross-belt D, motion will 
be imparted to the mote-carrier D. The 
several band-wheels and belts may be and 
are preferably duplicated at the opposite side 
of the machine so as to prevent the shafts 
from being pulled out of true, or line, which 
is liable to occur when only one set of band 
wheels or pulleys and belts is used at the side 
of the machine. It will also be observed that 
by the described arrangement the weight 
upon the brush bearings, (the brushes being 
required to revolve at a much incre rapid 
rate of speed than the saws) is partially 
lifted so as to relieve the bearings and pre 
vent the same from becoming heated so as to 
set the gin on fire, which is a very important 
advantage of this method of belting. 
L, L', denote semi-circular casings which 
are fitted over the respective brushes B, B', 
and partially encircle the same, so as to ex 
clude the air from the brush except at the 
exposed lower portion thereof where it is nec 
essary to create a current ef air to carry the 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
C 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
504,023 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
lint up the flue. By thus housing the brush 
closely within the casing and excluding the 
air therefrom it is enabled to do its Work 
with more ease and in a more perfect man 
ner than if a current of air were allowed to 
be set up past the point of delivery of the 
lint from the brushes into the chute or flue, 
and the forcing of the lint into and up th 
flue is also facilitated. 
The brushes B, B, being required to run 
at a very high rate of speed any lint falling 
upon the shaft will wrap around the same 
and as it accumulates thereon Will become 
heated by the heat from the bearings of the 
brushes and is liable to set the gin on fire. 
We therefore provide lint and dust guards, 
which may be constructed as follows: Re 
ferring particularly to Figs. 4 and 5, at each 
end of the brush is placed a sheet metal or 
other suitable circular plate or disk B, the 
periphery of which projects slightly beyond 
the ends of the bristles or brushes, as shown 
more clearly in Fig. 4. The plate B, is en 
circled by a second circular plate or disk B, 
which may be formed in sections for con 
venience of attachment, and has formed 
there with or secured to a projecting portion 
or rib on the inner face thereof a circular 
sectional flat plate or ring B", which is adapt 
ed to overlap the periphery of the disk B, 
as shown in the last-mentioned figure, So as 
to effectually house the end of the brush and 
prevent lint or dirt from getting access to 
the brush-shaft or bearings. The brushes 
are also made adjustable endwise upon the 
shaft by means of set screws entering the 
sleeves or hubs at the heads thereof to adapt 
the brush to be moved so as to cause all the 
bristles to be worn before re-filling the brush. 
This feature of construction, together with 
the housing on and around the brush-head, 
gives durability and safety in operation by 
protecting the bearings so as to prevent in 
jury to the same or the gin by over-heating, 
and makes it possible to wear the brush en 
tirely out before it is necessary to have the 
same renewed. 
The upper framework or casing supporting 
the upper gin is preferably made separate 
from the lower framing so as to simply rest 
and be secured thereon, for convenience of 
handling, storage and transportation. 
When it is desired to provide three or more 
sets of saws, the same may be accomplished 
by making the connections as illustrated in 
Fig. 3, wherein the belt I, is shown passing 
from the band-wheel or pulley on the main 
driving-shaft successively over the several 
pulleys K, a, aanda, and under the smaller 
band-wheels or pulleys b, band b, of the 
saw and brush shafts, respectively, in a man 
ner similar to that described with reference 
to Fig. 1; an additional crossed belt D, being 
provided for driving an additional mote-car 
rier, as will be readily understood from the 
drawings without further description. 
readily understood from the foregoing de 
scription taken in connection with the ac 
companying drawings. The regulating plate 
or seed-board H, in the upper roll-box being 
properly adjusted and the machine put in 
motion, the raw cotton is fed into said box, 
and the saws therein remove the best and 
longest-fibered lint from the seeds. The lint 
is delivered from the brush B, into the flue 
C, while the partially ginned seed drops into 
the roll-box A8. The finer saws in the latter 
box separate the remaining portion of the 
lint from the seeds, and the same is removed 
by the brush B', and delivered into the flue 
C'. The motes, dirt and other foreign matter 
passing through the grate of the upper gin 
drop onto the mote-carrier D, and are carried 
thereby and dumped into the roll-box A8; the 
finer particles of dirt and sand being per 
mitted to pass between the slats of the car 
rier and fall onto the casing encircling the 
lower brush. The lint from the respective 
brushes may be delivered into the chute or 
flue C, which is common to both compart 
ments of the gin, and thence into a condenser, 
or the lint from the respective compartments 
may be conducted into separate condensers, 
if desired. It will thus be seen that the gin 
while Working more rapidly than gins of or 
dinary construction, also produces a finer 
quality of cotton by separating the motes and 
objectionable matter from the lint; the work 
being accomplished partly in one roll-box and 
the remainder in a lower box or boxes. Each 
box is provided with a grate and saws espe 
cially adapted to the varying conditions of 
the cotton at different stages in the process; 
the coarser grate and saws being above so as 
to deliver the partially ginned seeds into a 
box with saws and grates of finer grade. 
We do not desire to make any broad claim 
to a double or triple gin as the same is not 
broadly new, but 
What we do claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. A cotton-gin comprising a frame-work or 
Casing having two or more compartments 
therein, each provided with a roll-box ar 
ranged so as to adapt one to deliver into the 
other, a flue for each roll-box, grates and saws 
of different sizes or grades for the respective 
boxes, a brush for each set of saws, a mote 
carrier arranged below the upper brush and 
means for rotating said brushes and saws in 
opposite directions and simultaneously im 
parting motion to said mote-carrier, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a cotton-gin, the combination with the 
frame-Work or casing having the upper and 
lower compartments therein and provided 
With a flue for each compartment, of the up 
per and lower roll-boxes one of which is adapt 
ed to deliver into the other, a grate for each 
box, the revolving saws projecting through 
said grates, the oppositely revolving brushes, 
the Whipper-boards arranged below said 
The operation of the invention will be brushes, the mote-boards and means for di 
75 
95 
OO 
d 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
504023 
recting the motes falling from the upper 
board into the lower roll box substantially as 
described. 
3. In a double or triple cotton-gin, the com 
bination with the roll-boxes having the grates 
and regulating boards therein, the revolving 
saws, the oppositely revolving brushes, and 
the traveling mote-carrierinterposed between 
the upper and lower brushes so as to deliver 
into the lower roll-box, and means for impart 
ing motion to said saws, brushes and carrier, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a cotton-gin, the combination with the 
upper and lower roll-boxes, of the revolving 
saws, the oppositely revolving brushes, the 
whipper-boards, the mote-boards, the mote 
carrier below the upper brush, and mechan 
ism for imparting motion to said saws, brushes 
and carrier, substantially as described. 
5. In a double or triple cotton-gin, the com 
bination with the frame-work or casing hav 
ing the upper and lower compartments there 
in provided with a common flue, of a roll-box 
for each compartment, one adapted to deliver 
into the other, grates of different sizes for the 
respective roll-boxes, revolving saws of differ 
ent sizes mounted in said compartments, re 
volving brushes mounted in rear of the saws, 
the adjustable whipper-boards arranged in 
close proximity to said brushes, the adjust 
able mote-boards arranged below the brushes 
and means for discharging the motes falling 
from the upper brushinto the lower roll box, 
substantially as described. 
6. In a double or triple saw-gin, the combi. 
nation with the upper and lower revolving 
brushes and oppositely revolving saws, of the 
intermediate traveling belt or mote-carrier, 
the adjustable whipper-board, and the adjust 
able mote-board arranged and adapted to op 
erate substantially as described. 
7. In a double or triple cotton-gin, the com 
bination with the frame-work or casing hav 
ing two or more compartments therein, each 
provided with a flue, of a roll-box for each 
compartment, one adapted to deliver into the 
other, revolving saws and oppositely revolv 
ing brushes for each roll-box, and an inter 
mediate mote-carrier adapted to deliver into 
the lower roll-box, substantially as described. 
8. In a double or triple cotton-gin, the com 
bination with the frame-work or casing hav 
ing two or more compartments therein pro 
vided with a common flue, of a roll-box for 
each compartment one being adapted to de 
liver into the other, revolving saws and oppo 
sitely revolving brushes for each roll-box, a 
mote-carrier arranged between the upper and 
lower compartments, whipper-boards for the 
brushes, and adjustable mote-boards for regu 
lating the discharge of motes &c., from said 
compartments, substantially as described. 
9. In a cotton-gin, the combination with the 
revolving brush, of the lint and dust guard 
comprising the circular plate or disk revolv 
ing with the brush, and the stationary plate 
or ring encircling said disk and provided with 
a corresponding flat circular plate or ring over 
lapping the periphery of Said disk so as to 
shield and protect the brush-shaft and bear 
ings, substantially as described. 
10. A cotton-gin comprising a frame-work 
or casing having two or more compartments 
therein one arranged above the other and pro 
vided with a common flue, a roll-box for each 
compartment one adapted to deliver into the 
other, and each provided with a grate, revolv 
ing saws of different sizes for the respective 
compartments projecting through said grates 
oppositely revolving brushes arranged in 
proximity to said saws, the adjustable whip 
per-boards having concave faces presented to 
the brushes, the mote-carrier adapted to de 
liver into a lower roll-box, the adjustable 
mote-boards, and means for imparting motion 
to said saws, brushes and carrier, Substan 
tially as described. 
11. In a double or tripple cotton-gin, the 
combination with the upper and lower roll 
boxes, the revolving saws and their oppositely 
revolving brushes, and means for directing 
the motes falling from the upper brush into 
the lower roll box of a main driving-shaft 
having a band wheel thereon, a counter-shaft 
carrying a similar band-wheel, a band-wheel 
on each saw-shaft, smaller band-wheels on the 
brush-shafts, and an endless belt or band pass 
ing from the band-wheel on said main shaft 
over the band-wheel on the counter and saw 
shafts, and under the band-wheels of reduced 
size on the brush-shafts so as to lift and re 
lieve the bearings of the latter shafts, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
IHENRY J. DAVIS. 
JOHN RICE. 
JOHN C. MCDANIEL. 
Witnesses: 
C. PARKER, 
JOHN D, ENGLISH. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
CO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504123.txt	- 
... 
a 
C, E, DEY. 
CIRCUIT SWITCH, 
Patented Aug. 29, 1893. 
22-M 
(No Model.) 
No. 504,123, 
  
Mas 
irrrrrrrr 
IL3SNNNNN,323 SS 
ES 
sys 
ET 
^III IIHF 4 Zeat LIL 
% 
2 
g 
- 
. 
 
 
 
G. 9eg 3 
1 y4. 22 
SNS 
 
 
WITNESSES; 
9 TTT 
&eea-e-c. 
 
 
-- 
INVENT2R 
- 
ATTORNEY, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES. E. DEY, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
CIRCUIT SWITCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 504,123, dated August 29, 1893. 
Application filed December 13, 1892, Serial No. 455,087. (No model.) 
ductor of electricity which it may be deemed 
to all whom it may concern: 
desirable or necessary to employ in the con 
Be it known that I, CHARLESE.DEY, a citi 
zen of the United States of America, residing 
struction shown and described. 
The forked contact plate 6 is provided with 
at Denver, in the county of Arapahoe and 
a projection 6 which passes through an ap 
State of Colorado, have invented certain new 
and usefullmprovementsin Circuit-Switches; 
erture formed in the bottom of the box and 
projects therefrom sufficiently to receive a 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
binding screw 8 for securing in place the ter 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
minal of one of the circuit wires. On each 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
side of the forked plate 6 is secured a metal 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
lic contact plate 10 having a projection 10 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
passing through an aperture in the bottom 
ing drawings, and to the figures of reference 
of the box and projecting therefrom suffi 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
ciently to receive a binding screw. 8 as in the 
specification. 
case of the projection 6 of the forked plate. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
To these projections lead respectively two cir 
switches specially designed for use in electric 
cuit-wire terminals. Between the plate 6 and 
light circuits. The object of the invention is 
each contact 10 is located a pair of springs 
to provide a device of this class which shall 
14 secured to the base of the box and adapted 
be simple in construction, economical in cost, 
to embrace bar 7 and retain the depressed 
and at the same time reliable, durable and ef 
extremity thereof Securely in place on the 
ficient in use. 
corresponding contact plate 10. These pairs 
To these ends the improvement consists of 
of springs 14 should alternately embrace the 
the features, arrangements and combinations 
bar 7, which is wholly or partially released 
hereinafter described and claimed, all of which 
from one pair when it is tightly grasped by the 
will be fully understood by reference to the 
other pair. The pivoted bar 7 is operated by 
accompanying drawings in which is illus 
the push buttons 15 which pass through ap 
trated an embodiment thereof. 
ertures in the top of the box directly above 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
the extremities of the bar. These buttons 
vertical section taken through the box inclos 
are provided with circumferential flanges 15 
ing the mechanism, the latter being shown in 
forming shoulders which engage the flanged 
elevation. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section taken 
collars 16 secured to the top of the box. 
on line ac-ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a section taken 
These push buttons are composed of insulat 
on line y-y, Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 4 is a dia 
ing material and project into the box suffi 
grammatic view illustrating the circuit. Fig. 
ciently to normally engage the raised ex 
5 is a longitudinal section of one of the push 
tremity of the bar 7. These interiorly pro 
buttons. Fig.6 shows another form of con 
jecting extremities of the buttons are sur 
tact plate. 
rounded by coiled springs 17 which engage 
Similar reference characters indicating cor 
the shoulders of the buttons and normally re 
responding partsorelements of the mechanism 
tain them at their outward limit of move 
in the several views let the numeral 5 desig 
nate an insulating box or receptacle prefer 
ment with their outer extremities in the same 
plane with their surrounding collars. The 
ably composed of insulating material except 
bar 7 is provided with a projection 7 at each 
the top which may be composed of metal. To 
extremity. These projections are adapted to 
the bottom of this box is secured a forked me 
enter counterpart apertures formed in the 
tallic contact plate 6. Between the upwardly 
adjacent extremities of the push buttons for 
projecting arms of this fork is pivoted the bar 
which they form guides as the buttons are de 
7 composed of some good conductor of the 
pressed in operating the bar. 
electric current, preferably metal. It may be 
In Fig. 4 two of the switches are shown. 
well to state that the terms metal and metal 
This view is intended to illustrate the circuit 
lic as used in this specification, are not used 
required in controlling a light or lights from 
in a limited sense, but have a broad compre 
hensive meaning, covering any suitable con- two different points, as from different floors 
75 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
504,123 
of the same house, one switch being located 
above and the other below. Let the nu 
merals 19 and 20 designate the wires of the 
main circuit. Now assuming that the bars 
7 are in positions shown in full lines in Fig. 
5, the current may be said to pass from 
wire 19 through wire 9 to contact 6 of the 
lower switch and thence via bar 7, contact 10 
and wire 12 to one contact 10 of the upper 
switch, and thence through the bar 7, con 
tact 6 and wire 22 to the lamp 18 and thence 
through wire 23, to wire 20 of the main cir 
cuit. In this case the circuit is completed 
via the lamp which is therefore lighted. Hav 
ing thus traced the current through the cir 
cuit when the lamp is lighted, it will be read 
ily understood that if the bar 7 of either 
switch be shifted to the dotted-line position 
shown in Fig. 5, the circuit will be broken and 
the lamp extinguished. On the other hand, 
if both bars 7 are simultaneously in the dot 
ted-line position, the lamp will again be light 
ed, since in this case the current may be said 
to pass from wire 19 through wire 9, contact 
6 of the lower switch, bar 7, contact 10, wire 
13 to contact 10 of the upper switch, and thence 
through bar 7, contact 6 and wire 22 to the 
lamp and thence vict wire 23 to wire 20 of the 
main circuit. 
It will thus be observed that any number 
of lamps in the same circuit may in this man 
ner be controlled from any two separate and 
distinct points. The size of the contacts in 
the switch must of course be regulated ac 
cording to the number of lamps to be con 
trolled and the current passing through the 
circuit and necessary to supply the lamps. 
The operation of the switch mechanism is 
very simple, and will be readily understood. 
As either button is pressed the correspond 
ing extremity of the bar 7 is forced to engage 
ment with the adjacent contact 10 while the 
corresponding pair of springs 14 grasps the 
bar and retains it securely in engagement 
with the contact. As soon as the button is 
released from pressure the spring 17 returns 
it to its normal position with its outer ex 
tremity in the same plane with the surround 
ing surface of the box. It will be observed 
that when either extremity of the bar 7 is de 
pressed to engagement with its contact, the 
opposite extremity is raised from engagement 
with its contact and wholly or partially re 
leased from its springs 14. 
My improvement may be used as a single 
pole, switch. In this case only one contact 
10, and two circuit wires would be employed. 
The contacts 10 may be provided with up 
wardly projecting springs 30 engaging the 
depressed extremity of the bar 7 on either 
side for the purpose of making a better con 
tact than could be secured by the flat contact 
plates. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a circuit switch the combination with 
a suitable casing of three contacts secured to 
the bottom plate, to which contacts the cir 
cuit wires respectively lead, a bar pivoted to 
one of these contacts and adapted to alter 
nately engage the other contacts, shouldered 
push buttons having their inner reduced ex 
tremities surrounded by coil springs engag 
ing the shoulders of the button at one extrem 
ity and the bar at the opposite extremity, 
said shoulders engaging the inner surface of 
the top plate of the casing, while the upper 
reduced extremities of the buttons project 
through apertures formed in said plate, the 
buttons affording means for shifting the piv 
oted bar from one contact to the other, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a circuit switch the combination of a 
suitable casing, three contacts secured to the 
base thereof to which the circuit wires re 
spectively lead, a bar pivoted to one of these 
contacts and adapted to alternately engage 
the other contacts, spring actuated push but 
tons for operating the bar and two pairs of 
springs carried by the base plate and insu 
lated from the contacts, said pairs of springs 
being adapted to grasp the respective extrem 
ities of the bar as the latter are depressed and 
retain the same securely in engagement with 
their corresponding contacts, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a circuit switch the combination of a 
suitable casing, a bar pivoted on a contact 
plate secured to the base of the easing to 
which contact one of the circuit wires leads, 
and a contact 10 to which the other wire leads 
and shouldered push buttons for operating 
the bar whereby it is made to alternately en 
gage and disengage contact 10, the lower re 
duced extremities of said buttons being sur 
rounded by coil springs which engage the 
shoulders of the buttons at one extremity and 
are connected with the bar at the opposite 
extremity, said shoulders engaging the inner 
surface of the top plate of the casing, the up 
per reduced extremities of the buttons pro 
jecting through apertures formed therein, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES E, DEY. 
Witnesses: 
WM. MCCoNNELL, 
G. J. ROLLANDET, 
65 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
LO 
3. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504224.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 504,224, 
 
C. H. & A. A. LAPPE. 
MACEHINE FOR COLORING LEATHER. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 29, 1893. 
wiTNEsses' 
inventors. 
64, 
al 
44-ca. 4. 442 
22 
Ye 
(No Model.) 
No. 504,224, 
. 
- . . 
- - , 
C. H. & A. A. LAPPE, 
MACHINE FOR COLORINGLEATHER, 
. 
. 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 29, 1893. 
 
of Hi 
t 
O 
sorrors-SorroMP 
communessparroweverelmo 
concere 
area aro-R-2 
remierer a 
E 
- 
as 
a 
 
 
C W 2 
... 
E. 
VE O 
6. 29 
 
I 
s s - 
E 
E. 
n E 
 
 
  
 
 
 
2S is:s 
a 
 
. 
V 
 
 
INVENTors 
44%.2e26 4. aac 
(No Model.) 
No. 504,224, 
 
MACHINE FOR COLORINGLEATHER, 
Patented Aug 
29, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 504,224, 
C. H. & A. A. LAPPE. 
MACHINE FOR COLORING LEATHER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 29, 1893. 
22:f Zzars 
26. 
7 
E. E. 
As 52%. 
Ez21. 
E-1 
52 /7 
Y. 
Ese 
22 
ENsamyns 
E3 NxS A 2 
1) W 
2 
R 
A. 
al 
NiI2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2. N N 
nassass 
Y% Z 
- A 
--- 
N N 
 
 
 
I a. SSSNs 
a. 
INVENTorst 
2%e2e 42-24%. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. LAPPE AND ALFRED A. LAPPE, OF ALLEGHENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MACHINE FOR COLORING LEATHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 504,224, dated August 29, 1893. 
Application filed February 23, 1893, Serial No. 463,306. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concer. 
Beit known that we, CHARLES H. LAPPE 
and ALFRED A. LAPPE, of Allegheny, in the 
county of Allegheny and State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Machines for Coloring Leather, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of this 
Specification, in which- . 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of our improved 
machine. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section on the line 
III-III of Fig. 2, and Fig. 4 is a cross-section 
on the line IV-IV of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a de 
tail view showing the splash-board in de 
pressed position. 
Like symbols of reference indicate like 
parts in each of the views. 
Our invention relates to the coloring of 
leather, and more especially to the blacking 
of hides after they have been tanned and 
split, and it consists in the improved machine 
therefor, as hereinafter more fully described 
and Set forth in the claims. 
In the drawings,2,2, indicate theside frames 
of the machine upon which is supported the 
table 3. Within the vertical guides 4, secured 
to the frame-work, are carried the bearing 
blocks 5 of three sets of rolls, numbered re 
spectively 66, 77 and 88. Against the up 
per blocks of each set press coiled springs 9, 
whose tension is regulated by means of set 
screws 10. The table is suitably slotted to 
receive the lower rolls, which are substan 
tially flush with its upper surface, and around 
the lower roll 7 is secured a jacketed reser 
voir 11 into which leads a supply-pipe 12. 
This pipe leads from an elevated reservoir 
containing a mordant or sigg composed of log 
Wood, Soda, and Water. Steam is admitted to 
the jacket by a pipe 13, and from the other 
end of the jacket a pipe 14 leads the waste 
steam to the sewer. The roll 7 is covered 
With material forming a brush, and rotating 
in the bath of heated sigg, spreads a thin, 
even coating of the same upon the grain or 
hair-side of the tanned hide. 
To remove the surplus liquid from the 
brush-roller, we provide a scraper 27, which 
3O 
35 
50 
55 
65 
projects from the side of the reservoir and 
may be made adjustable back and forth to 
regulate its pressure upon the roll. 
The rollers 6, 6, are simply feed-rollers, and 
the upper one is preferably corrugated as 
shown, while the upper roller 7 is a plain 
metal one, contact with which rotates the 
wiping-roll 15, which is covered with felt or 
similar substance, and heated by a steam pipe 
16 leading to a cavity in its interior, a Waste 
pipe 17 being provided at its other end. The 
function of this wiping-roll is to remove any 
liquid which may spread upon the upper roll 
7 by the brush roller, on account of the un 
even contour of the hide which does not en 
tirely cover this roll. The heat quickly dries 
the liquid wiped off on the roll 15, and its 
conical shape allows any surplus to run down 
to the end of the roll and drip off. 
In the rear of the set of rollers 7, the table 
is provided with a sieve-portion 18, over which 
is pivoted a splash-board 19, a light counter 
weight 20 being arranged to normally hold 
this board in vertical position and prevent the 
brush 7 from throwing the liquid siggupon 
the rollers 8 and the table. When the hide 
passes through the rolls 7, it strikes the splash 
board and pushes the same down into a hori 
Zontal position, and any surplus liquid upon 
the hide drips down through the sieve into a 
suitable receptacle 21 beneath. The lower 
roll 8 is covered with a felt or brush material 
and revolves in a reservoir 22 containing the 
blacking or other coloring material, while the 
upper roll is plain surfaced. The hide hav 
ing passed the splash-board, is covered with 
the color upon the same side to which the 
mordant was applied, and then passes to the 
inclined portion 23 of the table, which may 
be supplied with an endless conveyer if de 
sired. The end rollers 66 and 88 are geared 
together, and the main shaft 24, to Which 
power is applied by the fast and loose pulleys 
25 and 26, is geared with the various rolls to 
rotate them as indicated by dotted lines in 
Fig. 3, this gearing not being specifically de 
scribed as our invention does not lie therein. 
The action of the device is obvious. The 
hides being split and turned over with the 
grain side down, are fed to the rollers 66. IOO 
90 
95 
75 
504,224 
These rollers feed them to the rolls 77, where 
a coating of mordant is applied to the hide, 
and the surplus applied to the upper roll is 
removed by the wiper. The hide then passes 
over the sieve to the rollers 88, and there the 
color being applied to the hide emerges with 
an even regular coating of color thereon. 
The advantages of our machine will be ap 
parent to those skilled in the art. All hand 
Work is done away with, and a machine which 
requires the attendance only of one or two 
men will do the work which heretofore re 
quired over twelve men, while the hides are 
more evenly and uniformly colored. 
It is evident that the particular material 
covering the lower rolls 7 and 8 may be wa 
ried, and by the term spreading surface in 
the claims we intend to cover any material 
capable of taking up and spreading the liquid. 
The arrangement of the rolls and reservoirs 
may be changed, and many other changes 
may be made in the form and arrangement of 
the parts, since we consider ourselves to be 
the first to devise a practical machine for the 
application of liquids to hides. 
- 
We claim- 
1. In a machine for coloring leather, the 
combination of a spreading or color roller 
adapted to apply a liquid preparation to one 
side of the leather, a platen or roller situate 
above the color roller, devices for feeding the 
leather between the color roller and the platen 
roller, means for feeding a liquid preparation 
to the color roller, and a wiping roller in con 
tact with the platen roller and adapted to re 
move any coloring matter that may be acci 
O 
25 
30 
35 
dentally applied to the platen-roller; substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a machine for coloring leather, the 
combination of a spreading or color roller, a 
platen roller, means for feeding a liquid prep 
aration to the spreading roller, a wiping roller, 
and meansfor heating the same, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a machine for coloring leather, the 
combination with the roller for applying a 
mordant, of a second pair of rollers, one of 
which is arranged to apply a coloring mate 
rial to the leather, and a splash-board be 
tween the sets of rollers; substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a machine for coloring leather, the 
combination with the rollers for applying a 
mordant, of a second pair of rohlers, one of 
which is arranged to apply a coloring mate 
rial to the leather, and a perforated plate be 
tween the sets of rollers; substantially as de 
scribed, 
5. In a machine for coloring leather, the 
combination of feed rollers, rollers arranged 
to apply a mordant, rollers arranged to apply 
a coloring material to the same side of the 
leather, and a pivoted splash-board between 
the mordant and coloring rollers; substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands. 
CHARLES H. LAPPE. 
ALERED A. APPE. 
45 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
W. B. CORWIN, 
H. M. CORWIN, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504324.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARD E. CASE, OF AUBURN, NEW YORK. 
PROCESS OF MAKING ALUMNUM COMPOUNDS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 504,324, dated September 5, 1893. 
Application filed April 9, 1891. Renewed February 6, 1893, Serial No. 459,496. (No specimens.) 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLARD E. CASE, of 
Auburn, Cayuga county, New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Pro 
cesses for the Manufacture of Aluminum 
Compounds, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
an aluminum compound which from its con 
stitution and physical properties is capable 
of many uses in the arts. While I believe 
this compound to be an oxy-fluoride of alu 
minum and sodium, I do not wish to limit 
myself to this view of its constitution, since 
the process by which it is produced is the in 
vention which I wish to secure hereby. 
I produce this aluminum compound by the 
following process: I dissolve aluminium sul 
phate in water and add thereto calcium fluor 
ide, preferably heating the solution to a tem 
perature of 180 Fahrenheit, in order to ex 
pedite the reaction, and preferably maintain 
ing it at this temperature for several hours. 
On account of its cheapness, I prefer to use 
ground fluor-spar for this purpose. The re 
action which takes place may probably be rep 
resented by the following formula:- 
Al(SO)s.--2CaF, - Al,F,(SO)+2CaSO. 
I next separate, by filtration or otherwise, the 
precipitated calcium sulphate, (together with 
such excess of calcium fluoride as remains 
undecomposed.) from the resulting fluo-sul 
phate solution. For the next step I consider 
it advisable, although not essential, that this 
solution should have a specific gravity of 
about 1.040. I next prepare an aqueous solu 
tion of an alkali-carbonate, such as sodium 
carbonate, or soda-ash, and I prefer for this 
purpose to use a saturated solution simply for 
convenience. Now, if iron is present, -and 
if the aluminium sulphate and calcium fluor-, 
ide are of the usual commercial qualities they 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
may either of them contain iron, as an impur 
ity, I proceed to remove such iron by the 
following operation: I add the alkali-carbon 
ate solution to the fluo-sulphate solution, 
(which causes a reddish ferruginous precipi 
tate) until upon removing, filtering, and test 
ing a small sample of this solution with po 
tassium ferrocyanide, it shows itself substan 
tially free from iron in the ferric form; and 
then by filtration, or otherwise, I remove the 
said iron precipitate. The alkali-carbonate 
solution is now added to the fluo-sulphate 
solution until it ceases to bring down a fur 
ther quantity of a white precipitate, and this 
white precipitate I prefer to remove at once 
from said solution by filtration or otherwise. 
This white precipitate is rich in aluminum 
and free from such iron as may have been 
present in a crude aluminum sulphate, if such 
has been used. This product is of particular 
value as a source of aluminum to be extracted 
by electrolysis or otherwise, and its physical 
qualities render it useful for other purposes. 
I claim 
1. The process herein described of making 
an insoluble aluminum compound, which con 
sists in combining aluminum sulphate and 
calcium fluoride to form an aluminum fluo 
sulphate solution, and adding thereto analkali 
Carbonate. 
2. The process herein described of remov 
ing the iron and making an insoluble alumi 
num compound, from an aluminum fluo-sul 
phate Solution, which consists in first treating 
said solution with an alkali-carbonate to pre 
cipitate the iron, removing said iron and then 
treating said solution with a further quantity 
of said alkali-carbonate to cause precipitation 
of said aluminum compound. 
- 
WILLARD E. CASE. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN M. BRAINARD, 
FRANKLIN P.TABER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504424.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 504,424. 
0. DE PEZZER. 
SURGICAL CATHETER, 
Patented Sept. 5, 1893. 
 
WITNESSES: 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OSCAR DE PEZZER, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
SURGICAL CATHETER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 504424, dated September 5, 1898. 
Application filed December 8, 1891. Serial No. 414,389, (No model.) Patented in France April 2, 1891,No. 212,525; in Belgium 
July 28, 1891, No. 95,805, and in England July 28, 1891, No. 12,833, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that, OSCARDEPEZZER, of the 
city of Paris, France, have invented Improve 
ments in Catheters or Flexible Drain-Tubes 
for Surgical Use, (for which I have obtained 
Letters Patent in France, for fifteen years, 
dated April 2, 1891, No. 212,525; in Belgium, 
for fifteen years, dated July 28, 1891, No. 
95,805, and in England, for fourteen years, 
dated July 28, 1891,No. 12,833) of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
surgical instruments of the kind known va 
riously as catheters or drain tubes which are 
intended to be introduced into the natural 
cavities of the body such as the bladder, the 
urethra, the ureters, the kidneys, lungs, &c., or 
into accidental or surgically-made cavities for 
the purpose of evacuating liquid secretions 
which are not expelled in the normal manner, 
and the invention has for its object to provide 
an instrument of the kind which whilepossess 
ing a high degree of flexibility will maintain 
itself permanently in position in the cavity 
into which it may be introduced without any 
extraneous means of attachment or fixation, 
whereas it has heretofore been necessary in 
certain cases requiring a catheter to be per 
manently retained in the bladderforinstance, 
to employ either a rigid instrument or a flexi 
ble one secured in position by a means of at 
tachment which will prevent its expulsion by 
the natural contractions of the organ in ques 
tion, 
To obviate this objection, my invention con 
sists essentially in providing the end of the 
instrument to be introduced into the cavity 
with a flexible self-expanding disk shaped 
bulbous or other shaped enlargement of a 
much greater diameter than that of the stem, 
and which is capable of being extended lon 
gitudinally and contracted in diameter by 
means of a mandrel inserted through the in 
strument, to permit the easy introduction of 
the latter into the cavity of the body, and 
which when so introduced will, on the With 
drawal of the mandrel, automatically re-ex 
pand and by regaining its original form will 
retain the instrument in positions 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
wherein I have represented various examples 
of the improvement as applied in different 
forms to instruments of different sizes or for 
different corporal uses. 
Figure 1 is an external view, and Fig. 2 a. 
longitudinal section, of a catheter with a disk 
shaped bulbous enlargement. Figs, 3 and 4 
show similar views of a modified form of flat 
tened enlargement which permits of this part 
of the instrument applying itself against the 
Walls of the neck of the bladder and of so 
Occupying the minimum of space when this 
organ is empty and contracted. This flat 
tened form of enlargement may be hollow, as 
shown, or Solid and in that case of less thick 
ness. Fig. 5 is a view, drawn to a larger scale 
than Fig. 1, showing the form theinstrumentis 
made to assume while distended by the man 
drellor probe for introduction into a cavity. 
The same letters of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
a is the flexible tubular stem of the instru 
ment terminating in the hollow self-expand 
ing flexible enlargement b generally made of 
the same material as the tube which is pref. 
erably pure caOutchouc such as that known 
commercially in France under the name of 
"feuille Anglaise' or mackintosh.' This en 
largement is pierced with one or more holes 
c communicating With the bore of the stem 
a. The oute end of the stem is also provided 
with an opening or outlet d. 
In order to introduce the instrument into 
the cavity of the body, a probe or mandrelle 
is pushed through the stem until the enlarge 
ment is so far elongated longitudinally and 
contracted in diameter, that it forms tempo 
rarily a prolongation of the same or less di 
ameter as the stem a, as shown in Fig. 5, and 
while maintained in this formit may be easily 
inserted through the urethra, for example. 
When the mandrel e is Subsequently with 
drawn, the enlargement regains its normal 
bulbous form, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3 and 4 
and so prevents the expulsion of the instru 
ment by the contractions of the bladder with 
out the use of any extraneous means of fixa 
tion While permitting its easy withdrawal by 
55 
65 
75 
85 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
95 
OG) 
2 
504,424 
pulling on the outer end of the instrument. 
The instrument may be introduced for exam 
ple after hypogastric or perineal cutting; in 
the case of a female it may be introduced by 
5 the meatus by folding it in a suitable clip. 
I claim 
As a new article of manufacture, an elas 
tic flexible catheter, having a tubular stem 
provided at the end to be inserted into a 
Io cavity with a perforated disk shaped enlarge 
ment whose faces extend at substantially 
scribed. 
right angles to the stem substantially as de 
The foregoing specification of my improve 
ments in catheters or flexible drain-tubes for I5 
surgical use signed by me this 16th day of 
November, 1891. 
- 
- - - 
- 
OSCAR, DE PEZZER. 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. M. HOOPER, 
ALBERT MOREAU. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504524.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 504,524, 
A, G, GLASG-0W. 
OIL HEATER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Sept. 5, 1893, 
 
es. 
MyTim ESSES 
>6. 
S. 
/MyAM707; 
ro- 
w 
As 
w 
(No Model.) 
No. 504,524, 
 
A. G. GLASGOW. 
OIL, HEATER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 5, 1893. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR GRAHAM GLASGOW, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
oil-HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 504,524, dated September 5, 1893. 
Application filed December 6, 1892, Serial No. 454221 (No model.) 
55 
65 
7o 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ARTHUR GRAHAM GLAS 
GOW, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at the city and county of Philadelphia, State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improved Oil-Heater, of which 
the following is a true and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to apparatus for the 
manufacture of water gas, and particularly to 
the construction of the device known as the 
oil heater used in the carburization of the gas. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
oil heating device, at once, simple, efficient 
and durable. 
The nature of my improvements will be 
best understood as described in connection 
with the drawings in which they are illus 
trated, and in which 
Figure 1, is a side elevation, partly in sec 
tion showing a gas manufacturing plant pro 
vided with my improvement. Fig. 2, is a lon 
gitudinal section on the line 1-2 of Fig. 1, 
showing the construction of the oil heater. 
Fig. 3, is a cross section taken on the line 
3-4 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4, is a cross section taken 
on the line 5-6 of Fig. 2; Fig. 5, a central 
cross section through the wash box, and Fig. 
6, an outline plan view of the wash box. 
The gas manufacturing plant to which my 
invention is applied may be of any conven 
ient construction. 
As shown in Fig. 1, A is a Water gas gen 
erator of usual construction; B and C, super 
heaters or fixing chambers, the gas passing 
from the generator through conduit A', to the 
super-heater B. Oilis there sprayed into the 
gas through the oil nozzle M and the water 
gascarrying the oil with it then passes through 
the previously heated checker-Work in cham 
ber B through conduit B to the super-heater 
C, and through the heated checker-work in 
that chamber to the delivery pipe C. This 
pipe is open at the top and provided with a 
valve or lid D, which is open to permit the 
products of combustion to escape while the 
apparatus is being heated up previous to the 
manufacture of water gas. When the appa 
ratus is ready for manufacturing gas, the lid 
D, is closed and the Water gas then passes 
from the conduit C into the conduit E and 
thence into and through conduit F, F, F, the 
lower portion F of which passes into the 
wash box P; from the wash box, the gas is 
passed through conduit P' to the purifier Q, 
thence through conduit Q to the purifier Q' 
and thence to the main R. 
The oil heating device is situated in the 
conduit F, F, F, and consists of a tube G, 
which is supported in the conduit F by a 
spider L., upon which rests lugs K, fixed to the 
pipe G, near its top. This spider also insures 
that the pipe G, shall occupy a central posi 
tion in the gas conduit. A socket Gis welded 
to pipe G near its top and so near the lugs K, 
that the expansion and contraction, with the 
varying temperature, of the distance between 
them is inconsiderable. To this socket is se 
cured the oil delivery pipe M, which should 
be substantially at a right angle with the oil 
heater, and which passes through the open 
ilug N, in the gas conduit and is continued as 
shown at M'M' leading to the oil injector M8; 
m indicates a valve (not essential) in the pipe 
M, by which the delivery of oil can be regu 
lated. 
With the bottom of the oil heating tube G. 
connects the oil feed pipe O, leading from the 
oil supply. The bottom of the tube G, is con 
tracted as shown at G'. The feed pipe O, is 
shown as leading vertically to this contrac 
tion as indicated in Figs. 1, and 5, where the 
pipe O, is shown as leading first vertically 
downward, then turning at right angles and 
passing through an opening N at the side of 
the Wash box. But the main pipe G, may be 
continued down to the horizontal portion of 
the feed pipe O. Now, it will be noticed that 
by the above construction the oil heater is 
supported at, or so near, the line of the socket 
G that the expansion and contraction of the 
heater brings no strain upon the outlet pipe 
M; while the spring of the long horizontal 
portion of the small pipe O, permits of the 
full expansion and contraction of the heater 
without the least injury to any of its parts. 
In order to insure greater efficiency in the 
oil heater I provide an internal rod H, run 
ning through the center of the tube G, sub 
stantially through its entire length butter 
minating as shown a short distance above the 
bottom. The top of this rod H, is preferably 
95 
IOO 
O 
(5 
20 
25 
35 
45 
m 
504,524 
welded to the top G of the tube G, as indi 
cated in Fig. 2, and lugs or spiders, J, keep 
it substantially concentric with the tube G. 
I have referred to this device as a rod, but it 
is preferably constructed as shown in the form 
of a tube with both ends closed. 
It will be noticed that the head G is a solid 
welded head and that the tube His welded to 
this head; by this construction the necessity 
for joints or plugs is done away with and there 
is no danger of any leak at this point. The 
effect of this centrally located rod or tube is, 
first, to cause the oil to pass upward through 
the heater in the form of a hollow cylinder, 
the oil being thus brought into close contact 
with the heated walls of the tube G.; and, sec 
ondly, to reduce the volume of oil left in the 
heater after the end of each run. Any accu 
mulation within the heater tending toward 
stoppage is removed by an occasional current 
of steam introduced as at S, and discharged 
through a waste tap, as at W. It will further 
be noticed that the form above described al 
lows the heater to be of welded construction 
throughout and without separable joints ex 
cept where the inlet and Outlet pipes are con 
nected, and it is so built in practice, avoiding 
entirely the leakage common in devices for 
this purpose. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination with a gas conduit F 
of an oil heating tube G situated in said con 
duit having an oil supply and outlet pipe and 
formed with its closed head G8 integral with 
its sides and an internal centrally located rod 
H secured to head G' by a welded joint and 
extending close to its lower end, all substan 
tially as described, so that the hot gas and oil 
vapor may not intermingle nor escape. 
2. In combination with a gas conduit F of 
an oil heating tube G situated in said con 
duit having an oil supply and outlet pipe and 
formed with its closed head G8 integral with 
its sides, and with a contracted opening in its 
lower end Gandan internal centrally located 
rod H secured to head G8 by a welded joint 
and extending close to its lower end, all sub 
stantially as described, so that the hot gas and 
oil vapor may not intermingle nor escape. 
3. In combination with a gas conduit F of 
o 
3O 
35 
45 
an oil heating tube G situated in said con 
duit having an oil supply and outlet pipe and 
formed with its head Gintegral with its sides, 
an internal centrally located rod H secured 
to head G by a welded joint and extending 
close to its lower end and spacing lugs J se 
cured to rod H, all substantially as described, 
so that the hot gas and oil vapor may not in 
termingle nor escape. 
4. The combination with a gas conduit F 
of an oil heating tube G. located in said con 
duit; an oil delivery pipeM, extending through 
the walls of conduit F and secured to tube G.; 
an oil entrance pipe O, a springy transversely 
extending portion of which is secured to tube 
G; a steam inlet as S into the delivery pipe 
M, and a waste tap as W, leading from the oil 
entrance pipe O, all substantially as specified. 
5. The combination with a gas conduit F 
of an oil heating tube supported at or near 
its upper end in said conduit, an oil delivery 
pipe M extending through the walls of con 
duit F and secured to the oil heating tube 
near its point of support in the conduit Fand 
an oil entrance tube O entering the tube G. 
from below the conduit F and having a trans 
verse extension lying below said conduit to 
permit of Springing. 
6. The combination with a gas conduit F 
having a Spider L of an oil heating tube Glo 
cated in said conduit and supported near its 
upper end on said spider, an oil delivery pipe 
M extending through the walls of conduit F, 
and secured to tube G. near the spider and an 
oil entrance tube O entering tube G. from below 
conduit F and having a transverse extension 
lying below said conduit to permit of spring 
Ing. 
7. The combination with a gas conduit F 
and a wash box into which said conduit ex 
tends, of an oil heating tube G supported in 
said conduit, an oil delivery pipe M secured 
to the tube G. near its upper end and an oil 
entrance pipe O opening into the lower part 
of the tube G and having a transverse exten 
tion in the Wash box below conduit F in the 
Wash box substantially as described. 
ARTHUR GRAHAM GLASGOW. 
Witnesses: 
WM. SKEATE, 
J. L. FEATHERSTONE. 
55 
75 
85 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504624.txt	(No Model.) 
W, T. Y, SCHENCK. 
HOSE CARRIAGE. 
No. 504,624, 
Patented Sept. 5, 1893, 
E 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504724.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A BRAHAM J. GRE IN ER, OF CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS. 
COMPOUND FOR PRESERWING FOOD, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 504,724, dated September 12, 1893. 
Application filed Februaryll, 1893, Serial No, 461,912, (No specimens.) 
in the vessels containing the water which is 
by this time impregnated by the fumes, cover 
the opening of the vessels with any substance . 
such as thin cloth but not air tight. The fish 
or meats after being subjected to the fumes 
the same length of time as for fruits, vege 
tables and the like, should be hung up or 
placed in boxes in a cool dry room. 
The function of the ingredients of the com 
pound are as follows: the charcoal, sulphur, 
Sugar, Saltpeter and Cayenne pepper are used 
as preservatives, but after being treated the 
food very often loses its natural taste and 
favor. To prevent this I use starch and bees 
wax the fumes of which cause the food to re 
tain its natural taste and flavor, thereby add 
ing greatly to its value. The fumes of ginger 
destroy the taste and smell of the Sulphur 
which remains upon the fish and meats after 
being treated. The ginger also prevents in 
sects from molesting the fish and meats. 
I am aware that some of the ingredients 
named herein have been used for similar pur 
poses, but I am not aware that all the ingre 
dients of my composition, in the proportions 
stated have been used together. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
The herein described composition to be used 
for the preservation of food, consisting of 
charcoal, Sulphur, Sugar, corn starch, beeswax, 
Saltpeter, Cayenne pepper and ginger, in the 
proportions as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in the presence of two witnesses. 
ABRAHAM J. GREINER, 
Witnesses: 
WALTER L. WILLEY, 
JOSEPH. H. WILLEY. 
45 
55 
o 
To ad whon, it may concepf: 
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM J. GREINER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Preserving Compositions to be Used for 
the Preservation of Foods, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Iy invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in preserving food, in 
its natural or raw state, with the object in 
view of making a composition which is cheap, 
simple and efficient as a preservative. 
Iy composition consists of the following in 
gredients, combined in the proportions herein 
stated viz: powdered charcoal, six ounces; 
flowers of sulphur, one and one-half pounds; 
Sugar, one-half pound; corn starch, one table 
spoonful; beeswax, one-half ounce. For fish 
and neats add saltpeter, one-half ounce; Cay 
enne pepper, one-half teaspoonful, ginger 
root ground, one-half teaspoonful. 
To use the above composition mix the in 
gredients by agitation; the beeswax should 
be added after the others are ruixed. Place 
the food to be preserved in a room or box 
(which can be closed tightly) upon shelves. 
If fruits or vegetables are to be treated, place 
also in the room or box, vessels filled with wa 
ter in which the fruits or vegetables are to be 
placed after being treated. Now place the 
composition in a pan at the bottom of the 
room or box over a small fire or heated coals, 
until the composition passes off in fumes. 
Use about two and one-half pounds of the 
composition per one hundred pounds of food 
treated. Allow the food to remain in the box 
or room subjected to the fumes for three to 
Place the fruits and vegetables 
four hours. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504824.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 504.824, 
Fis 
 
W. H. COOK. 
FOLDING PAPER BOX 
Patented Sept. 12, 1893. 
Fis l 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. COOK, OF MONTCLAIR, NEW JERSEY. 
FOLDING PAPER BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 504,824, dated September 12, 1893. 
Application filed September 29, 1892, Serial No, 447,248 (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. CoOK, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Mont 
clair, in the county of Essex and State of New 
Jersey, have invented a new and useful Fold 
ing Paper Box, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to folding paper 
boxes; and it has for its object to provide an 
improvement in that class of paper boxes in 
which the same are so constructed as to be 
capable of being arranged in a knocked down 
condition, so that the same can be shipped 
flat. 
To this end the invention primarily con 
templates a construction of folding box spe 
ciallocking devices which provide for holding 
the box securely connected in its various parts, 
as set up. 
With these and many other objects in view 
which will readily appear as the nature of the 
invention is better understood, the same con 
sists in the novel construction, combination 
and arrangement of parts hereinafter more 
fully described, illustrated and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figure 1. 
is a perspective view of the box set up. Fig. 
2 is a vertical longitudinal sectional view of 
the same. Figs. 3 and 4, are detail views 
illustrating the mode of securing the corners 
of the box. Fig. 5 is a plan view of the blank, 
from which the box is cut. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings:- 
A represents the paper blank from which the 
various parts of the herein described box are 
cut and scored. From opposite edges of the 
rectangular bottom B at b, are scored the op 
posite side walls C, and the end walls D, 
while from one of the side walls C at c, is 
scored the inclosing rectangular top E of the 
box. 
From the ends of the opposite side walls C 
at c', are scored the side wall flaps F, at the 
scoring points of which are formed the straight 
corner slots or slits G, which are adapted to 
receive the corner locking tongues H, cut and 
scored from opposite edges of the end walls 
D. The said corner locking tongues H are 
cut from the blank and scored as at h, at a 
5o central point on the opposite edges of the end 
45 
Walls D, and are cut in a curved shape so 
that at the bases or scoring points of the 
tongues, the edges of the end walls form rests 
or shoulders which serve to sustain the ends 
of the box rigid and firm. The said corner 55 
locking tongues H are slit at one end to form 
the Supplemental tongues or locking flaps I, 
which flaps are adapted to be folded back 
upon the body of the tongues so that the 
latter can be readily inserted in the slots or 6o 
slits G at the bases of the side wall flaps F. 
When the said supplemental locking flaps 
are folded back upon the tongues, the said 
tongues are then of a width equal to the slots 
or slits G, so that the same can be readily in- 65 
serted therein, after which the said locking 
flaps are turned up into a line with the body 
of the tongue, so that the tongues will then be 
greater in width than the said slits and there 
fore will firmly lock the corners of the box 7o 
without the possibility of withdrawal until 
the said supplemental tongues or flaps are 
again turned down. It will of course be ob 
served that in Setting up the box the end 
walls D inclose the side wall flaps F, which 75 
are held tightly against such end walls by the 
locking tongues described, and therefore com 
pletes a neatly finished yet securely set up 
box. The rectangular top Escored from one 
of the side walls C, is provided with the side 8o 
and front flaps J and K respectively, which 
flaps overlap the top edges of the box when 
the cover is thrown over the walls, and said 
front flap K is itself provided with an inte 
gral hook-shaped locking tongue L, which is 85 
adapted to be placed into locking engagement 
with the front slit M, formed in the other 
front side wall C of the box. 
For additional security of the box after set 
up, I may employ the tapes or strings O se-go 
cured at one end to the opposite end walls of 
...the box and adapted to be tied over the in 
closing cover as illustrated. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat- 95 
ent, is 
In a folding paper box, the combination of 
the bottom, of the opposite side walls scored 
from the bottom and having side wall flaps, 
and straight corner slots or slits disposed at Ico 
 
2 
504,824 
5 from one end to form folding supplemental the presence of two witnesses. 
the juncture of said side wall flap with the Ition of said curved locking tongues into said 
side walls, and the opposite end walls pro-slots or slits, substantially as set forth. 
vided with curved locking tongues H, scored 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
from opposite edges of the same, and slit in my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
locking flaps adapted to be folded flat onto 
the body of the tongues H to allow for the in- 
sertion thereof into the straight corner slots 
or slits, and adapted to be straightened out 
Io inside of the side wall flaps after the inser- 
WILLIAM H. COOK. 
Witnesses: 
PETER J. STUY VESANT, 
WM. E. MILLARD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US504925.txt	No. 504,925 
 
Patented Sept. 12, 1893, 
 
? 
ZO/zzWzssays: 
????, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
OWEN CORNELIUS JOY CE, OF EDLIL, ARKANSAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO ALONZO W. NOBLES, OF SAME PLACE. 
WHIFFLETREE-HOOK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 504,925, dated September 12, 1893. 
Application filed March 14, 1893. Serial No. 465,893, (No model.) 
- 
tion. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that, OWEN CORNELIUSJOYCE, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Edlil, in the county of Lincoln and State of 
Arkansas, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Whiffletree-Hooks; and I 
do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
My invention relates to improvements in 
whiffletree hooks, the object being to provide 
an improved construction of the same, where 
by a trace may be easily and readily connect 
ed with, and disconnected from the hook. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of parts hereinaf 
ter fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of one end of a whiffletree, 
showing my improved hook applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view of the 
hook detached, showing the same open. Fig. 
3 is a similar view, showing the hook closed. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation. 
In the said drawings, the reference numeral 
1 designates a portion of an ordinary whiffle 
tree, to the ends of which, the hooks are ap 
plied. 
The numeral 2 denotes a metal block hav 
ing a longitudinal bore or opening, forming a 
socket to receive the end of the whiffletree. 
This block is formed with a longitudinal ex 
tension 3, having at its inner end, lugs 4, in 
which is pivoted a shackle 5, the free end of 
which is provided with an eye 6, and is adapt 
ed to engage With an opening, 7, in the exten 
sion 3. This extension is also provided with 
a longitudinal cylindrical recess or bore, in 
??? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
40 
 
which is located a reciprocating rotatable 
bolt 8 adapted to pass through the eye in the 
shackle. Also located in this recess, at the 
inner end thereof, is a coiled spring 9, the 
tendency of which is to throw the bolt out 
ward to engage with the eye in the shackle. 
At one side of the extension 3, is an opening 
10, provided with a central lug 12. Through 
this opening projects a pin 13, secured to the 
bolt. This opening is provided with a hous 
ing 14. When the hook is closed the bolt is 
projected through the eye in the shackle, with 
the pin resting in the outer groove 15, be 
tween the lug and the opening 10. The lug 
holds the pin in place and prevents the bolt 
from being withdrawn. 
To unlock the hook, the pin 13 is thrown 
out of engagement with said groove and slid 
backward in the opening 10, until the oppo 
site groove 16 is reached when it will engage 
therewith. By this means the bolt is disen 
gaged from the shackle. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
In a whiffletree hook the combination with 
the block formed with a socket, an extension 
having a cylindrical bore, an opening to re 
ceive the end of a shackle and a side opening 
provided with a central lug, of the shackle 
pivoted to said extension having an eye at its 
free end, and a spring-actuated slidable and 
rotatable bolt provided with a projecting pin, 
and a housing surrounding the side opening 
in the extension, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
I claim is- 
- 
OWEN CORNELIUS JOY CE. 
Witnesses: 
C. R. HITE, 
H. D. AVERY. 
45 
So 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
75. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505025.txt	(No Model. ) 
No. 505,025, 
G, A, BROWN. 
MAGNETIC CLUTCH OR COUPLING, 
Patented Sept. 12, 1893. 
rVzresses: 
Savus A34 , 
GAOAGA A. AAROM/W, 
/zvez for 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. BROWN, OF MUSKEGON, MICHIGAN. 
MAGNETIC CLUTCH OR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 505,025, dated September 12, 1893. 
Application filed February 11, 1893, Serial No,461,869, (No model.) 
the body or core A of the magnet is made in 
Be it known that I, GEORGEA BROWN, a the form of a conical hub or clutch member, 
grooved to receive the helix or coil D, and 
having one of its polar portions, B, made in 
the form of a ring, separate from the body, 
but shrunk or otherwise securely fastened 
thereon around an intervening band, layer, or 
film C of copper, brass, zinc or the like. A 
pin or key, a, of brass or other non-magnetic 
material may be employed to prevent the ring 
B from turning independently of hub A. 
E indicates an armature, constituting the 
Second clutch member, and recessed to receive 
or fit upon the conical hub A, so that when 
the part A is energized by the passage of an 
electric current through the coil D, the parts 
are drawn together and caused to bind with 
a force due to the wedging action of the conical 
faces, and the attractive force of the magnet. 
The drawing shows the armature or part E. 
of the clutch in the form of a band pulley, 
having a limited movement upon the shaft F, 
toward and from the part A, which latter is 
keyed fast upon the shaft. Obviously, how 
ever, the arrangement may be reversed or 
varied at will. 
The parts A and E may represent parts of 
a brake as well as a clutch, or they may stand 
for any other two parts requiring to be alter 
nately connected and disconnected. 
I do not mean to be understood as claiming 
broadly an electro-magnet with an interrupted 
magnetic circuit, or with pole-shoes insulated 
from the body of the pole or poles, as such 
magnets have been proposed for use in elec 
tric motors. In such motors, however, there 
is no actual contact of the magnet pole pieces 
and the armatures, and there is consequently 
no trouble from residual magnetism; but 
where the parts come into direct contact, the 
effect of residual magnetism is very great; a 
clutch of this description but with uninter 
rupted magnetic circuit, used in hoisting ma 
chinery, requiring a pull of over two hundred 
pounds to effect a separation after de-ener 
gization of the magnet; whereas, with the in 
terrupted magnetic circuit, a clutch otherwise 
the same, is separated with the application of 
very slight force. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. An electro-magnetic clutch, comprising 
To all, whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mus 
kegon, in the county of Muskegon and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Electro-Magnetic 
Clutches or Couplings, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to electro-magnetic 
clutches or couplings wherein connection of 
two parts is effected and maintained through 
the attraction of an armature by an electro 
magnet, and in which actual and immediate 
Contact is necessary; and it consists in the 
combination of an electro-magnetic clutch or 
coupling having an interrupted magnetic cir 
cuit, with an armature adapted and arranged 
to be brought into direct contact with the 
pole or poles of said electro-magnet. 
. The drawing is a sectional view of a clutch 
embodying the said invention. 
It is well understood that if the electric cir 
cuit of an electro-magnet be opened during 
contact of the armature with the pole or poles 
of the magnet, the armature will adhere with 
greater or less tenacity, owing to residual 
magnetism. If, however, the magnetic cir 
cuit be broken or interrupted at any point, 
there will be little or no residual magnetism, 
and consequently the armature will fall away 
or may be withdrawn from the magnet poles 
without difficulty. 
In the application of electro-magnetism to 
brakes, clutches, &c., it is found that residual 
magnetism greatly interferes with the cer 
tainty and efficiency of operation, maintain 
ing a contact when it should be broken; and 
owing to the rubbing or frictional contact it 
is impracticable to maintain in efficient con 
dition the thin facing or coating with which 
magnet poles are sometimes provided to pre 
vent residual magnetism. To render the in 
terrupting layer or body available for such 
uses, and make it applicable generally to elec 
tro-magnetic clutches, I introduce such mate 
rial into the body of the magnet core at any 
suitable point, leaving the exposed face or 
faces in the natural condition, while the in 
terrupting non-magnetic material is protected 
from wear or abrasion. 
In the drawing I have shown a form of clutch 
which I have used with good results. In this, 
75 
90 
95 
IOC) 
d 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
n 
505,025 
an electro-magnet, the magnetic circuit of magnet and the armature being of conical 
which is interrupted by non-magnetic mate. form and adapted and arranged to come into 
rial; and an armature, adapted and arranged direct contact and adhere one to the other, 
to make direct contact with said electro-mag. substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
5 net, Substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand 15 
2. In an electro-magnetic clutch or coup- in the presence of two witnesses. 
ling, the combination with an armature E, of 
an electro-magnet comprising a body A, pole 
piece B, non-magnetic layer C between the 
IO body and the pole-piece, and winding D; the 
Witnesses: 
A. J. SHAW, 
JNO. W. FIERRON. 
GEO. A. BROWN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505125.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL POLLAK, OF FRANKFORT - ON - THE-MAIN, GERMANY. 
PRocess of MANUFACTURING ELECTRODES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 505,125, dated September 19, 1893. 
Application filed April 19, 1893, Serial No. 470,993. (No specimens.) 
IO 
2C) 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARL POLLAK, a sub 
ject of the Emperor of Austria-Hungary re 
siding at Frankfort-on-the-Main, Prussia, 
Germany, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Processes of Manufac 
turing Electrodes, of which the following is a 
specification. 
In order to effect the rapid formation of elec 
trodes of the so called Plant kind, and to 
obtain greater reception power with small 
weight, I use porous compressed lead which 
I obtain by wet process through electrolysis 
in the following manner. Pulverized carbon 
ate of lead is mixed with caustic soda or with 
caustic potash into a hard paste, and this is 
worked into the form of the electrodes to be 
produced. 
To manufacture electrodes in the form of 
plates, sheets or disks of corresponding thick 
ness are cut, which (when plates without cores 
are to be formed) are laid upon metal sheets 
or boards; for plates with cores, the sheets or 
disks are laid on one or both sides of the plates 
serving as cores (with Smooth or roughened 
surfaces with or without projections perfo 
rated or braided) and pressed together, after 
which they are dried. After drying, the plates 
are set in an alkali solution of caustic soda, 
caustic potash, carbonate of Soda or the like. 
Disks that are without metallic core are fas 
tened to good conducting plates and are then 
set in the alkaline Solution; the plates pro 
vided with metallic cores need not be fastened 
to other metallic plates. The reduction takes 
place, either by zinc plates being placed be 
tween the plates to be reduced and electri 
cally connected with the same; or other sepa 
rate suitable metallic plates are placed be 
tween and connected with the positive pole, 
the plates to be reduced with the negative 
pole, of an electric generator. After some 
time the carbonate of lead is reduced to me 
tallic lead. In this condition it is, however, 
too porous for practical purposes; it is there 
35 
40 
45 
 
fore compressed wet, whereupon a solid me 
tallic lead is produced, which is rollable and 
workable under the hammer and shows a per 
fectly metallic brilliant cut. To the plates 
which are made without conducting core or 
with non-conducting core, other conducting 
strips are either soldered or otherwise brought 
into good contact, or smooth metallic plates 
are covered on both sides with plates of the 
porous lead. Pieces of this porous lead can 
also be provided with frames, or several pieces 
can be laid near to each other in a mold, and 
metal poured around them. Such plates are 
then placed in diluted sulphuric acid and 
supplied with the current, and indeed in both 
directions in cases where the maximum car 
pacity is to be quickly reached. The per 
oxide of lead formed from this lead by the 
current does not crumble, it is therefore not 
necessary to mechanically hold fast the same 
by specially constructed grating or lattice 
Work. The color of such positive plates in a 
charged condition is black. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The process of producing electrodes for 
electrical accumulators which consists in mix 
ing pulverized carbonate of lead with caustic 
Soda or caustic potash so as to form a paste, 
then forming the same into suitable shape or 
form, then drying the same, then placing the 
same in an alkaline bath and applying an 
electric current to reduce the carbonate of 
lead to metallic lead, and then compressing 
the same while still in a wet state, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
CARL POLLAK. 
55 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
N. MAPORBACH, 
R. HANACRIKY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505225.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 505,225. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
O. D., MOWRER, 
CORNSTALK SHOCKER. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 19, 1893. 
 
  
S22. er 
 
SY? 
is: - A12 
3. 
42g St. 
4. 
e 
 
Se 
S 
(No Model.). 
No. 506,225. 
0. D. MOWRER. 
CORNSTALK SHOCKER 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
s s 
F 6.7. 
- 
3. 
3y7es offsepys, 
. 
Oscar Z.1%zzrer 
(2226, -6. 
33 
- 
- 
Iglesfr 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OSCAR DOUGLAS MOWRER, OF CLAREMONT, ILLINOIS. 
coRNSTALK-SHOCKER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 505,225, dated September 19, 1893. 
Application filed December 24, 1892, Serial No. 456,264. (No model.) 
 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OSCAR DOUGLAS Mow 
RER, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Claremont, in the county of Richland and 
5 State of Illinois, have invented a new and 
useful Cornstalk-Shocker, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
corn-harvesters; and has particular reference 
Io to a shocking device to be applied thereto and 
used in connection therewith, whereby the 
corn as cut may be conveniently shocked or 
bundled and deposited upon the ground. 
The objects and advantages of the inven 
I5 tion, together with the novel features thereof, 
will hereinafter appear and be particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings: Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of a corn-harvester of the 
2O ordinary pattern provided with a shocker at 
tachment embodying my invention. Fig. 2 
is a similar view, the shocker being in the act 
of discharging its contents or the shock. Fig. 
3 is a transverse section through the rear end 
Fig. 4 is a 
detailin perspective of the cord-carrying box. 
Fig. 5 is a detail of the rope-guiding yoke. 
Fig. 6 is a detail in elevation of the pulley 
block. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
3o rope-terminal supporting sleeve. 
25 of the machine and the shocker. 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
I have herein illustrated my invention as 
applied to one of the ordinary forms or con 
35 structions of corn harvesters, and I desire to 
state that though I have herein shown it thus 
applied it will be obvious that the attach 
ment may be applied to any of the forms of 
harvesters, and I therefore do not limit the 
4o invention to use in connection with the form 
of harvester herein shown. In the presentin 
stance, wherein I have illustrated the shocker 
in connection with an ordinary sled-form of 
harvester, 1 designates the opposite runners 
45 of the sled, which as is usual, are connected 
by the cross-bars 2, and longitudinal beam 3, 
such framework supporting the platform 4, 
from the front of which rises the Seat stand 
ard 5 for the accommodation of the seat 6 
So for the driver. The platform, as is usual, is 
extended at one side forming a wing 7, and 
55 
. 
." 
to its front diagonal edge there is secured the 
cutting-blade 8. 
The platform at the opposite corner at 
which the wing is located is provided with a 
rectangular opening 9, and in the same there 
is fitted a plate or cover 10, the same being 
hinged as at 11 to the outer edge of the plat 
form and provided at its inner free edge with 
a cross cleat 12 securely bolted thereto and 
having its opposite ends overlapping the plat 
form, whereby the said plate is not permitted 
to Swing down out of a horizontal plane with 
the platform 4. 
Opposite the inner edge of the opening 9 
there is located upon the platform 4 short 
bearing-standards 13, and in them is journaled 
a longitudinally - disposed rock-shaft 14. A 
U-shaped bail-lever 15, is secured rigidly be 
tween its terminals to the rock-shaft 14, and 
at its outer end forms a treadle 16, while its 
inner terminals are downwardly-bent nearly 
at a right angle to its remaining portion and 
form feet or levers 17. These feet or levers 
17 normally lie in recesses 18, formed in the 
inner edge of the opening 9. A catch 19, is 
pivoted between the levers 17, and when the 
trap-door is lowered to cover the opening 9, 
said catch engages over the free edge of the 
cleat 12. The catch is formed of spring-metal, 
preferably, and is connected by a link 21 with 
a pin 22 on the rock-shaft 14, so that said rocic 
shaft is normally drawn toward the catch and 
consequently the levers of the bail press into 
the openings provided for their reception, 
while the treadle-portion of said bail is ele 
wated above the platform. 
The plate 10 is provided with a circular 
opening 23, and in it is swiveled a post 24, the 
upper end of which is squared. The lower 
end of the post, which extends below the plate 
is provided with a head 25. A pair of U 
shaped standards 26 are located at opposite 
sides of the squared upper portion of the post, 
and the terminals of these standards are be 
tween their ends connected by a substantially 
horizontal U-shaped brace 27. The two 
standards are connected by a rod 28 passing 
through the post. Curved standards 29 are 
bolted to opposite faces of the squared por 
tions of the post between the U-shaped stand 
ards, and the terminals of the standards 26 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
505,225 
O 
15 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
only at the ends of the rows, and more room 
and standards 29 at each side are connected 
is left for planting than where the shocks are 
by side-bars 30, the said standards and side 
bars forming a cradle in which the shock is 
located at intervals, 
From the foregoing description in connec 
formed and the entire structure being swiv 
eled upon the platform and capable of revolv 
tion with the accompanying drawings it will 
ing in a horizontal plane, and to be tilted by 
be seen that I have provided a simple attach 
a swinging of the trap-door 10. One of the 
ment for corn-harvesters, whereby the opera 
bars 30 is provided in its upper edge near one 
tion of shocking the corn after the same has 
end with a notch 31, and below the same with 
been cut is greatly facilitated and that but 
3, pin 32, while near its middle it is provided 
two men are required to operate the machine, 
with a loose ring or slide 33 having a hook 34. 
one to drive and the other to receive the corn 
The opposite bar has secured to it near its 
as it is cut and deposit it lengthwise in the 
center a cord-box or basket 35 having a hole 
cradle. After the shock has been tied and 
discharged the trap-door is swung to its nor 
36 in its side. The bar is further provided 
with perforations 37 near one end and with a 
mal position upon the platform, the catch 
notch 38 in rear of the perforation. The con 
Snapped over the edge of the platform and 
necting-rod 28 between the two U-shaped 
locking the same, and the cord drawn out 
connecting frames 27, is provided at one end 
from the basket, knotted so as to form the 
double-binder and its loops passed through 
with a transverse bar 39, and to it by means 
of a clip 40 is secured a U-shaped guide-yoke 
the notch 31, and suspended over the pin. 
41, having eyes 42 in its ends. A binding 
Having described my invention, what I 
rope 43 is passed through the clip and guide 
claim is 
eyes of the yoke, and is provided at one end 
1. In a corn harvester, the combination 
with a loop 44 which engages with the eye 45 
With the platform thereof, of a post swiveled 
of a pulley 46, the remaining end of the rope 
therein, U-shaped standards 26 located atop 
passing through the pulley and designed to 
posite sides thereof, and curved standards 29 
operate over the pulley-wheel and having its 
located therebetween and bolted to the post, 
opposite side-bars 30 connecting the upper 
free end connected with either end of a pair 
of spring-cleats or clips 47 with which one 
ends of said standards 26 and 29, oppositely 
disposed U-shaped and substantially hori 
end of said pulley is provided. 
In operation the cord is placed in the cord 
Zontal braces 27 bolted to the opposite sides 
basket, is preferably doubled in that it may 
of the post and connecting the terminals of 
be more easily tied, is passed through the per 
the Outer U-shaped standards 26, and a rod 
passed through the post and through and 
foration 37, where it may be held by a re 
movable peg or pin looped loosely to the bot 
connecting the U-shaped standards 26 and 
tom of the cradle, and passed through the 
the braces 27, the whole combining to form a 
cradle, substantially as specified. 
notch 31, where its loop is connected to the 
pin 32 extending therefrom. The binding 
2. In a corn-harvester, the combination 
rope has its free end loosely suspended or 
With the platform thereof, of a post rising 
carried by the hook 34 of the sliding-clasp. 
therefrom, a U-shaped cradle mounted on 
the post and provided with opposite side-bars, 
The machine being started the corn as it is 
severed is deposited in armfuls by the attend 
One of Said side bars being provided near 
ant standing on the platform into the cradle, 
One end With a notch and below the same 
and when a Sufficient number of stalks to 
With a pin, and the other of said side-bars 
compose a shock have been received by the 
provided with a cord - carrying basket, and 
cradle, the free end of the binding-rope is 
with a perforation for said cord, and adapted 
passed about the bundle and through the pull 
to removably receive a peg mounted in the 
ley, and by being drawn upon it will be seen 
perforation, Substantially as specified. 
that the rope may be tightened and the stalks 
8. In a corn-harvester, the combination 
compressed, after which the end of the rope 
With a U-shaped frame, having a curved wire 
is drawn into any one of the spring-clips or 
guide secured to one end thereof, and termi 
nating in eyes, a binding-rope passed through 
cleats, whereby it is prevented from slipping. 
The operation of tying is then carried on in 
the Wire-guide, a pulley secured to one end 
the usual manner, and requires no specific 
of the rope and provided with a spring cleat 
description. When the shock has been thus 
at its opposite end for engaging the free end 
of the rope, substantially as specified. 
tied, the cradle is given a half rotation and 
the foot of the operator placed upon the trea 
4. The combination in a corn-harvester, of 
a U-shaped frame, a rod passing through the 
dile 16, which is thus depressed, causing the 
frame and extending beyond the same and 
rock-shaft 14 to rock and the feet or levers at 
provided with a cross-pin, a clip having an 
the end of the treadle take under the trap 
eye engaging the pin, a curved rod having 
door and elevate the free end of the same 
eyes and engaging the clip, and a rope passed 
until the weight of the shock causes the plat 
through the eyes of the rod a pulley on one 
form to swing outward and the shock to slide, 
butt-end first, to the ground. In fields of or-. 
end of the rope, and spring-clips on the end 
dinary length the cradle is sufficiently large 
of the pulley. 
to receive all the stalks of an entire row, and 
5. In a corn - harvester, the combination 
thus it will be seen that shocks are located with the platform thereof having an opening, 
3o 
9o 
95 
Od 
Io5 
II5 
I25 
505,225 
posed at an angle thereto, and engaging the 
front edge of the plate, a spring-catch pivoted 
to the edge of the opening, connecting-de 
vices between the catch and the pin on the 
rock-shaft, of a post swiveled in the plate, 
and a cradle, carried by the post, substan 
tially as specified. 
8. In a corn harvester, the combination 
with the platform thereof having an opening, 
the plate hinged therein, a lever fulcrumed 
near the front edge of the plate upon the plat 
form and having its inner end engaging the 
free edge of the plate, of a cradle swiveled on 
the door, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
OSCAR DOUGLAS MOWRER, 
Witnesses: 
J. O. PETTY, 
WM, FRITCHEY. 
25 
35 
and a plate hinged therein, of a cradle car 
ried by the platform, and means for elevating 
said plate, substantially as specified. 
6. In a corn-harvester, the combination 
with the platform thereof having an opening, 
a plate hinged at its outer edge to the open 
ing, a rock-shaft mounted in bearings in front 
of the free end of the platform, a bail mounted 
rigidly on the rock-shaft terminating at its 
outer end in a treadle and having its inner 
ends bent downwardly to form levers for en 
gaging the free edge of the plate, of a cradle 
swiveled in the trap - door, substantially as 
specified. 
7. In a corn-harvester, the combination 
with the platform thereof having an opening, 
a plate hinged at its outer edge to the open 
ing and provided at its free edge with a cross 
cleat for engaging the platform, bearings lo 
cated on the platform, a rock-shaft mounted 
in the bearings, a U-shaped bail secured to 
the rock-shaft and having its terminals dis 
O 
IS 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505325.txt	(No Model.) 
"" R. K. ORTT & M. A. S.HEARER. 
No. 505,324, 
RAILWAY COACH WESTIBULE. 
. 
. 
Patented Sept. 19, 1893. 
 
Zazeesses: 
Z772e2Zars . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROWLEY K. ORTT AND MAHLON A. SHEARER, OF NORRISTOWN, 
PENNSYLVANIA, 
RALWAY COACH WEST BUL.E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters eatent No. 505,324, dated September 19, 1893. 
Application filed March 28, 1893, Serial No. 467,982, (No model). 
ing retained in its position by the peculiar 
formation of the sockets or slip cups as shown 5o 
in this figure, the socket or slip cup f to 
be constructed of sheet steel or other suitable 
material of shape shown in figure, the sides 
being turned up for the purpose of retaining 
steel spring C in its place. The steel spring 55, 
a is made of flat spring steel curved in a 
bow shape, both ends of which are curved or 
turned in order to readily move in the socket 
or slip cup f the steel spring a is to be 
constructed in Such manner as to have suffi- 6o 
cient elasticity to readily adapt itself to the 
motion of the coach in turning curves, &c., 
so that when attached to another coach with 
frame work of like description, covered as 
before indicated, will exclude dust, rain, 65 
wind, &c. 
Fig. 2. is the side view of the frame work 
showing the steel springs a a, a a, 
and the manner in which the same are attached 
to spring block d, which is fastened to 7o 
frame work e, and how the steel spring a.' 
is placed flat in the socket or slip cup f 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out both views. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 75 
to Secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A Vestibule for cars constructed of a se 
ries of supports separated by flat springs, 
substantially as described. 
ries of Supports, adapted to support the cow 
ering and provided with flat, bow-shaped, 
springs between the pairs of the supports, 
whereby elasticity sufficient to provide for 
the motion of a train is produced, substan. 85 
tially as described. 
3. The combination of two or more supports 
for a vestibule for cars, of a flat spring sepa 
rating the supports at the top and a pair of 
flat springs separating them at the sides, sub- go 
stantially as described. 
2. A vestibule for cars constructed of a se- 8o 
ROWLEY K. ORTT. 
MIAHLON A. S.HEARER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. A. EVANs, 
ELLISTON M. DANIELS. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ROWLEY K. ORTT and 
MAHLON A. S.HEARER, citizens of the United 
States, residing in the borough of Norristown, 
5 county of Montgomery, and State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Westibules to be Attached to 
Passenger Railway-Coaches, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
Io to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part thereof. 
Our invention relates to an improvement 
in a vestibule attached to passenger railway 
coaches, and the leading feature of it consists 
I5 of three steel springs placed between two 
wooden frames formed in the shape of an arch, 
which after construction are held together by 
the covering, which may consist of Water-proof 
cloth, rubber cloth or leather or any other ma 
2o terial suitable for the purpose, and so adjusted 
as to allow the ends of the passenger coaches to 
admit of no dirt, dust, rain or wind and the 
springs being of sufficient elasticity to be read 
ily adjustable to the motion of the coaches in 
Figure 1. is a diagonal view showing our 
improvement, without the covering. Fig. 2. 
is a side view of the same, also without the 
covering. 
The diagonal view in Fig.1 shows the frame 
work forming an arch which is intended to be 
attached to a passenger coach over the exten 
sion which forms the passage way to the ad 
joining coach under which the coupler is 
e is the frame work which in the figures 
in the accompanying drawings consists of 
three frames, one of which is to be fastened 
to the coach and for convenience may consist 
ae the fiat 
steel springs formed in the shape of a bow 
fastened to the spring blocks d d d 
d by clamps or bolts i. Each end of the 
45 bow shaped steel spring a rests in Sockets 
or slip cups f which are attached to frame 
e and which readily allows the spring to 
work lengthwise, the steel spring a be 
4o of two or more frames. 
25 turning curves, &c. 
(6) 6. C. 
co (? c 
35 placed. 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505425.txt	(No Model.) 
W. B. LEE. 
PLOW OR CULTIVATOR TOOTH, 
No. 505,425, 
Patented Sept. 19, 1893, 
 
ZZz67 / 
 
Z-9&zz-e ases, 
e 
Zevee zo. 
46%ree 
 
12%avves/s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM B. LEE, OF OZARK, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO DAVID 
WOLFF AND ZACHARIAH. A. JOHNSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
PLOW or cultiVATOR tooth. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 505,425, dated September 19, 1893. 
Application filed June 29, 1893, Serial No, 479,152, (No Imodel.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM B.LEE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Ozark, in 
the county of Christian and State of Missouri, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Plow or Cultivator Teeth; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to the means of se 
curing cultivator and plow points to their 
beams or standards and particularly to that 
class used for cultivating purposes. 
My invention consists in forming in the 
point a tapering, dove-tail slot, or socket, and 
in forming the depending portion of the 
standard in triangular form in cross section, 
and tapering from the beam portion toward 
the toe, whereby the point will be wedged 
and firmly held on the standard against acci 
dental displacement, while being adapted to 
be readily removed for repair or renewal. 
It further consists in so forming the slot, or 
Socket, and the toe of the beam that the point 
Will be held securely in place without the use 
of bolts or other fastening devices whereby 
the Weakening of the parts is prevented, and 
in certain other details in the construction of 
parts, all as hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of the beam, showing the 
point connected therewith. Fig. 2 is a verti 
cal, longitudinal section of the tooth. Fig. 3 
is a transverse section on the line acac Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the beam. Fig. 
5 is a cross Section of the beam point or toe. 
The horizontal portion of the beam, A, may 
be constructed in any usual or preferred man 
ner and SO as to be connected to any form 
of Walking or sulky plow or cultivator. The 
depending, or toe portion of the beam curves 
forward with its front face made flat as shown 
at Cl, and With the rear portion in angle form 
as shown at b, with a rounding face at the 
point of angle, as shown at b', for a purpose 
hereinafter explained, the points of angle 
converging toward each other and meeting at 
the point. The plow point or tooth, B, is 
preferably forged from a single piece of steel 
and the central rear portion is thickened out 
into ribs d, forming a dove-tail slot or groove, 
d'. These ribs are made thick at the top 
of the tooth and taper in curved form to 
ward the point, converging in gradual lines 
into and forming a continuation of the rear 
face of the point, with the slot opening out 
ward. The toe of the beam is made of 
greater thickness than the depth of the groove 
so that its rear curved face b' extends out 
through the slot, and the side faces of the 
ribs are made in concave form so as to form 
gradual curved lines or faces, and in such 
manner that no abrupt angles are presented 
to the ground. By forming the socket up in 
the form of ribs on the rear face of the point 
it will be seen that the same will be greatly 
strengthened without increasing the cost of 
manufacture, and by forming the parts or 
gradual curves, as described, it will be seen 
that no sharp angles are formed to catch in 
roots, stones or other hard substances. It 
will also be seen that by this construction the 
usual bolts or set screws are dispensed. With 
and that the working action of the device 
tends to tighten and hold the parts more 
firmly united. It will thus be seen that by 
my improved construction, instead of the 
parts becoming loose by use, the action of 
such use, as above stated, tends to keep the 
parts always firmly connected. This, in prac 
tice, has been found very desirable, as where 
bolts or other fastening devices are employed 
they soon become loose by wear, and after 
they have been used for a short time they be 
come so rusty that it is impossible to tighten 
them up; or when it was found necessary to 
remove the bolts to substitute new ones, spe 
cial tools were required, it being often found 
necessary to cut off the heads or ends before 
being able to remove the bolts at all. 
By my construction no tools are necessary 
for applying or removing the tooth for any 
purpose and as will be seen the parts are al 
ways firmly connected. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The shovel or point, having the ribs or 
flanges on the rear face made thick at the top 
of the tooth and tapering in curved form to 
ward the point, and converging in gradual 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
505,425 
2 
lines into and forming a continuation of the 
rear face of the point, with a dovetail socket presence of two witnesses. 
Or groove between the ribs, in combination 
With the toe or standard point made in tri- 
5 angular form to fit the socket or groove, and 
forming with the flanges of the tooth a 
strengthening rib, substantially as set forth. 
N. R. JOHNSON, 
GEO. B. GIDEON. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM B. LEE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505525.txt	(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet, i. 
J. L. HASTINGS, 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF GAs. 
No. 505,525, 
Patented Sept. 26, 1893. 
s 
S S 
... n. 
o 
&R 
S. 
. 
sEss-s-s-s-s s rt 
 
- A 
S 
. 
 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
p 
A N. 
At - - - - - - - - \ta- - - - 
. 
w 
w 
w 
y 
\ 
w 
w 
y 
w 
v. 
v. 
v 
\ 
w 
w 
\ 
w 
N 
w 
y 
v 
w 
N v 
v 
v. 
v w 
Y 
v. 
y 
w 
y 
v 
w 
in 
. 
\ 
K 
w 
v 
ESEE 
--- 
t 
F is 
- - 
S. 
s 
S-H----- re-- 
- k3 
- 
SR 
w 
sE-HHessee is 
a 
Y. 
(S 
N 
s 
-. 
s 
 
(No Model.) 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CAS, 
No. 505,525, 
Patented Sept. 26, 1893. 
J. L. HASTINGS. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
s R 
5 s 
 
(No Model.) 
J. L. HASTINGS. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
PR00ESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CAS, 
Patented Sept. 26, 1893, 
No. 505,525. 
s 
S. 
&s 
YS 
 
 
s 
(Sn 
NYNN 
!---S-L-R-S-a- a SR 
- 
Q/ (s 
NSNS 
Sir t 
TSS w 
Sis 
S 
--a 
O 
N 
N 
 
M 
 
NN 
  
n 
N. 
t 
5 
N SNSNN 
N: SNS 
- N - ". 
i N. Y. 
N 
s 
's ty 4 
 
 
. 
N N 
Nt 
s 
Q 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
J. L. HASTINGS. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CAS 
No. 505,525, 
 
Patented Sept. 26, 1893, 
R 
N 
S 
s 3. 
r 
2-1 2/z - 23.72/7 Wis 
- - sely in 
W. 
As 
QS 
 
Y 
 
 
S 
V5 s 
Ny 
 
w 
N 
s 
Sty 
r 
3 
- 
it 
  
  
  
SS 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF GAs, 
Patented Sept. 26, 1893. 
No. 505,525. 
 
J. L. HASTINGS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
RN AN 
N 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
J. L. HASTINGS, 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF GAs, 
No. 505,525, 
Patented-Sept. 26, 1893. 
 
22 (2. 
W 
. 7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES L. HASTINGS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
NATIONAL HEAT AND POWER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PROCESS OF AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF GAs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 505,525, dated September 26, 1893. 
Application filed November 7, 1892, Serial No. 451,166. (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES L. IIASTINGS, 
a resident of Philadelphia, in the county of 
Philadelphia and State of Pennsylvania, have 
5 invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Processes of and Apparatus for the Manufac 
ture of Gas; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
My invention relates to the manufacture of 
gas for illuminating or heating purposes, its 
object being, So far as the manufacture of 
illuminating gas is concerned, to provide for 
the generation of a large body of water gas, 
I5 and the proper carburizing of the same, and 
the fixing of the resultant gas and vapor, as 
well as the reduction of any carbonic acid 
formed, and to provide for the maintaining 
of the heat for fixing the hydrocarbons, so 
2 o' that a longer continuous run in the manufac 
ture of the gas may be carried on, and during 
said run a heat may be maintained that is 
proper for carburizing and fixing, but which 
is not so high as to break up the hydrocar 
25 bons, so that a smaller proportional quantity 
of hydrocarbons is required to form an illu 
minating gas of high candle power, and the 
gas formed shall be of more even quality. 
For the formation of a heating gas I am also 
3o enabled to produce a large quantity of gas of 
high heating power in proportion to the ma 
terials employed, and to manufacture the 
same without the necessity of so frequent a 
heating up of the apparatus. 
To these ends my invention consists, gen 
erally stated, in generating water gas and 
without superheating the gas introducing oil 
or like hydrocarbons into the Water gas gen 
erated in the first part of the run, and carry 
4o ing the combined gas and vapors through the 
body of fixing materials and generating wa 
ter gas in a later part of the run, Superheat 
ing such gas and introducing the oil into 
the superheated water gas, and carrying such 
45 combined gas and vapor through the fixing 
materials; such course being followed during 
a single run, or operation, of gas making, and 
the heated fixing material serving during the 
first part of the run to both vaporize the oil 
5o and fix the gas, while during the later part of 
35 
the run the super-heated gas serves for the 
vaporization of the oil, and, to some extent, 
causes the fixing of the gases formed there 
from, overcoming the chilling effect of oil 
upon the gases and so providing for the con- 55 
tinuation of a run for a longer period than in 
the ordinary operation of gas making, and 
the production of a more even quality of gas. 
My invention also consists in forming the 
water gas and introducing the hydrocarbons Go 
into the heated Water gas and carrying the 
combined heated gas and vapor first down 
wardly through a body of refractory material 
to partially fix the same and thence down 
Wardly through a mass of heated coke to com- 65 
plete the fixing of the gases and vaporize any 
of the oil which has not been vaporized within 
the refractory material, and by bringing the 
combined water gas and vapor into close con 
tact with each other within the body of heated to 
coke to cause the generation of a larger pro 
portional quantity of marsh and heavy hy 
drocarbon gases by the intimate contact of 
the particles of gas and vapor in the presence 
of the coke, a peculiar chemical action being 75 
produced by the same resulting in a reduced 
proportion of carbonic oxide, as well as the 
reduction of any carbonic acid present. 
It also consists in certain other improve 
ments in the steps of the process carried out, 8o 
and in the apparatus employed for carrying 
out such process, as will be hereinafter par 
ticularly set forth. 
To enable others skilled in the art to prac 
tice my invention, I will describe the same 85 
more fully, referring to accompanying draw 
ings in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of the apparatus 
embodying the invention. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view, partly in section. Fig. 3 is a longitudi- 9o 
nal central section thereof. Fig. 4 is a verti 
cal cross section on the line 4-4, Fig. 3. Fig. 
5 is a vertical cross section on the line 5-5, 
Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a vertical cross section on 
the line 6-6, Fig. 3. 
section on the line 7-7 Fig. 2. Fig. 8 is a 
cross section on the line 8-8 Fig. 3. Fig. 9 is 
a cross section on the line 9-9 Fig. 3, and 
Fig. 10 is a longitudinal section of a modifi 
cation of the apparatus. 
Fig. 7 is a longitudinal 95 
IOO. 
 
505,525 
75 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in each of the views. 
The apparatus illustrated in Fig. 1 will be 
most particularly described, as it shows the 
most approved plan of apparatus suitable for 
practicing the invention. The apparatus of 
Fig. 10, being a modification of the same suit 
able for use for smaller plants, will be gener 
ally described hereinafter. 
In the apparatus shown in Fig. 1, I employ 
a vertical furnace A containing a cupola gen 
erator A' in the base and a superheating cham 
ber B in the upper part thereof, and adjoin 
ing the same is a horizontal body portion E 
from which depend the cupola generators C 
D, the body portion E extending from the first 
furnace A to the Second furnace F which con 
tains the coke chamber G in the lower part 
thereof, and the chamber H in the upper part 
thereof containing refractory fixing materials, 
as hereinafter described. For the purpose of 
superheating the steam, I also preferably em 
ploy the steam superheater I. These are the 
parts of the gas making apparatus, and I will 
now describe them in detail. 
The cupola generator A' is in the lower 
part of the first furnace A, and has the grate 
d', the steam entrance C", the air entrance a, 
the feeding door a (with which any suitable 
form of charging apparatus may be employed, 
if desired), and the ash-pit door a for remov 
ing ashes and clinkers. In the upper part of 
the cupola generator A' is also the air en 
trance a. In the upper part of the furnace 
A is formed the gas superheating chamber B 
above referred to, and extending centrally 
and longitudinally acroSS the furnace at the 
base of said chamber is the arch b on which 
are supported the two vertical walls b' which 
form a narrow vertical down-take passage B 
leading centrally from the upper part of the gas 
superheating chamber to the entrance port b 
leading into the horizontal body portionE of 
the gas apparatus. The vertical walls b' termi 
nate a short distance below the top of said gas 
superheating chamber and the spaces B' on 
each side thereof are filled with checker work 
or loose refractory material, which is support 
ed upon the tiles b which extend from said 
arch b over to the Walls of the chamber, as 
shown in Fig. 8. The gas superheating cham 
ber is thus formed of two side chambers B' 
which communicate at the base with the cu 
pola generator A' So that the gases and pro 
ducts may rise from Said generator into said 
chambers, and the down take chamber B 
leading from the upper part of the superheat 
ing chamber to the entrance b to the hori 
zontal body portion E; and in the blowing up 
of the apparatus a large amount of heat can 
be stored in this gas Superheater. The fur 
nace A has also the outlet or relief valve b 
which may be opened in the heating up to 
permit the escape of heated products. By 
forming the central arch b and supporting 
thereon the walls b' extending entirely across 
the furnace and supported by the Walls there 
of, a simple and durable form of up-take and 
down-take chamber is provided, which can be 
constructed at small cost and is much stronger 
and more durable than any tile or cylinder 
construction, which could not be properly 
braced and supported. 
By the construction of the horizoutal body 
portion E within its casing e extending be 
tween the two vertical furnaces and their 
casings a f, about midway in the height of 
the furnaces and the cupola generators CD 
depending from said body portion and in 
closed in their casings c d, I am enabled to 
provide a simple and compact form of cupola. 
generators which will also act as a conduit 
for the gases generated in the furnace A to 
the second furnace F, the construction en 
abling me to properly connect and brace the 
two main furnaces, not simply by a short pipe 
of small sectional area, but by a large metal 
lic cylinder connected to the casings of the 
furnace and of such diameter as to form a 
strong bracing connection between the cas 
ings of the two furnaces, while at the same 
time the large cylindrical body portion pro 
vides a compact means for including other 
cupola generators within the apparatus. It 
will be noticed that while the fire brick lin 
ings of the two furnaces A F are properly 
braced by their casings Clf, there is no proper 
bracing for the portions of such linings oppo 
site the horizontal body portion to receive any 
strain or pressure brought upon that portion 
of the lining. For the purpose of properly 
supporting this portion of the linings of the 
main furnaces A F, I form at the end of the 
horizontal body portion the arched end wallse 
and which are supported from the main fire 
brickliningse' of the horizontal body portion, 
and by their arched construction provide for 
the proper bracing of the walls of the furnace. 
Through these arches e, the ports leading 
from or to the horizontal body portion are 
formed, such, for example, as the port b, lead 
ing from the gas Superheating chamber B, 
and the port E' leading into the second fur 
nace F. It will be noticed that the casings 
c, d, in which the cupola generators C, D, are 
inclosed are connected to the horizontal body 
portion and extend down to and rest on the 
foundation; they are thus braced by the cas 
ing of the horizontal body portion, so that by 
means of the end vertical casings inclosing 
the first and second chambers, the horizontal 
casing in inclosing the horizontal body por 
tion, and the depending casing inclosing the 
cupola generators C, D, a compact and well 
braced furnace in gas apparatus is obtained. 
The cupola generators C, D, have the ordi 
nary provisions for the entrance of air and 
steam, such, for example, as the air entrances 
c', d', and steam entrances c, d, which may 
communicate with the air pipes as shown, 
and are also preferably provided with the 
grates cd and the ash doors c, d, and suit 
95 
IOC 
Ed 
I I5 
I 25 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
 
505,525 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
able feeding doors, c, d, the doors shown in 
the drawings being in the side walls of the 
body portion E. 
It is desirable to have as large a heating 
Surface as practicable within the gas appa 
ratus, and I have therefore found it desir 
able to utilize the horizontal body portion 
as a gas Superheater as far as practicable, 
though I find the apparatus to operate well 
When it simply acts as a portion of the cupola 
generators and as the conduit from one fur 
nace to the other. When employed as a gas 
Superheater, I prefer to construct it as fol 
lows:--Extending over each of the cupola, 
generators are the arches p, which arches 
form supports for the walls p", extending to 
the top of the body portion as shown by the 
cross section Figs. 3 and 6, and having ports 
p', formed at intervals therein to permit the 
passage of gas between such walls. They 
thus provide feeding chutes or chambers C, 
D', to guide the coal or other carbon into 
the cupola generator, and the charging doors 
c, d, extend through the walls of the hori 
zontal body portion and communicate with 
such chutes C, D. Opening from both these 
chutes are relief valves C, D, which can 
be opened when necessary in the heating up 
of the apparatus, and SO provide as even 
a heat as practicable throughout the same. 
The horizontal body portion has between the 
said chutes C, D', the vertical bridge e, by 
which the heated products are directed to 
ward the upper part of the chamber, the ports 
in the walls p', being preferably made at 
points below the top of Said bridge so as to 
cause the heated products and gases to fol 
low a circuitous course through the horizon 
tal body portion. The spaces r, r", r, thus 
provided in the horizontal body portion are 
filled with checker work, the space r contain 
ing no checker work and this checker work 
acts as a heat absorbent and so provides a 
very large body, first, for absorbing the heat 
in blowing up, and, second, for Superheating 
the gases made in the several cupola genera 
torS. 
For the purpose of properly heating and 
blowing up the apparatus, it will be seen that 
Iprovide the air entrarices c, d, at the mouths 
or upper parts of the cupola generators C, D, 
which will provide for the burning of the 
gases formed in the blowing up in order to 
heat the horizontal body portion and the 
checker work therein. 
The second heating furnace F, forms what 
may be termed the fixing portion of the gas 
apparatus, having in the upper part thereof 
the primary fixing chamber H, containing re 
fractory material, and in the lower part there 
of the final fixing chamber G, which contains 
a body of coke. The construction of the fix 
ing chamber H, is substantially the same as 
that of the gas Superheating chamber B, 
though in the gas making operation the gases 
travel in the opposite Way through the same. 
It differs only in a few particulars which will 
 
75 
be pointed out. In the first place, it is pro 
vided with the central longitudinally extend 
ing arch h, from which the Walls h", extend 
upwardly but not to the top of the fixing 
chamber, said walls extending entirely across 
the furnace and being supported at their ends 
by the furnace walls and so forming the up 
take chamber H, and the down-take cham 
bers H. At the bases of the down-take cham 
bers H, are the tiles h, which extend over 
from the arch h, to the side walls and form 
supports for the checker work within the 
chambers H, I also prefer to fill the upper 
part of the chamber H', with checker work, 
and for this purpose provide the tiles h, ex 
tending across the same some distance from 
the base, as shown more particularly in Figs. 
3 and 9. The port E' leading from the hori 
Zontal body portion E communicates with the 
central chamber Hso that the gases and pro 
ducts will pass upwardly through the same and 
then downwardly through the chambers H. 
For the purpose of burning the gases in heat 
ing up this fixing, chamber, I provide the air 
entrance h' which preferably enters the cham 
ber H' opposite to the port E' so as to be 
forced against the heated products and inter 
mingle there with to cause a full combustion 
thereof. The fixing chamber is provided also 
with the relief valve L which can be opened 
as desired for the proper heating of the fur 
nace. In the upper part thereof it has one 
or more oil entrances l with which the oil 
supply pipes communicate, the oil being pref 
erably introduced into the furnace by means 
of a steam jet, employing Superheated steam 
for the purpose. As part of the oil which 
will fall within the vertical chamber H', that 
is, the heavier portions thereof may not be 
entirely vaporized therein, and may descend 
through the checker work, I provide the cham 
ber H with a sand bed h, being a bed of 
porous sand spread over or supported on the 
floor of the chamber to receive such heavy 
hydrocarbons and support the same until they 
are properly gasified and taken up. 
The lower portion of the second furnace F 
contains the coke chamber G and this cham 
ber communicates in turn with the flue lead 
ing to the steam superheater I. The pre 
ferred construction of the coke chamber is as 
follows: -In the lower portion thereof the 
chamber is reduced in diameter so as to pro 
vide room in the walls for the formation of 
the annular spaceg, and communicating with 
that space is the series of ports g through 
which the gases pass into the annular space, 
the annular space communicating with the 
outlet passage leading to the steam super 
heater. Above such contracted portion the 
Walls flare outwardly, as at g, so that the ?ix 
ing chamber shall contain a body of coke 
which is wider or extends out beyond the con 
tracted lower portion in order to insure the 
passage of the gases through the coke. The 
coke chamber is provided with the charging 
doors G' and with the air entrance G', pro 
95 
Od 
IIo 
II5 
I25 
4. 
505,525 
viding for the entrance of air or the utiliz 
ing of the gases formed in the coke chamber 
in part of the blowing up operation, as here 
inafter referred to. In the base of this coke 
chamber are the grate g and the usual ash 
door, and communicating with the chamber 
under the grate is the air entrance g. 
The Steam superheater is contained within 
a separate casing located close to and pref 
erably at the side of the main body of the gas 
apparatus, as shown in the plan view, and it 
communicates at the base with the gas mak 
ing apparatus through the passage i, and at 
the top by means of the eduction pipe le with 
the washer K. It also has the relief valve lic' 
in the upper part above the gas eduction pipe. 
It is a circular chamber having a recess in 
the Walls thereof within which is coiled the 
steam pipe i, as shown in vertical section, a 
large surface for steam superheating being 
provided in this way. It is also filled with 
a body of checker work, or like loose refrac 
tory material, which will act as an absorb 
ent so that the heat from the gases or heated 
products may be stored in the checker work 
and act to impart their heat to or maintain 
the steam within the pipe at a high even tem 
perature, it being found that after the gases 
and products have passed through this cham 
ber their temperature is so reduced that the 
eduction pipe is not raised to any great heat, 
not greater than the hand can bear on its sur 
face, the mass of heat being thus absorbed 
from the gases before they pass into the wash 
box. It may in some cases be desirable to 
add air to support combustion within this 
steam superheater, and for that reason I pro 
vide the air entrance communicating with 
the passage i leading from the fixing cham 
ber into the steam Superheater. 
For supporting the checker work within 
the superheater, I provide the arch which 
may be perforated centrally at or at differ 
ent points to permit the passage of the pro 
ducts of combustion and the gases. 
To provide as compact an apparatus as pos 
sible, both for the manufacture of gas and 
the washing and scrubbing of the same, so as 
to deliver it ready to enter into the storage 
tank, I arrange a washer K and scrubber N, 
as shown in Fig. 2, the same being located 
parallel with the main gas generating appa 
ratus, and the current being in the opposite 
direction through the same to that in the 
main gas generating apparatus. The Washer 
K is placed close to the steam Superheater I, 
and the outlet pipe from the superheater leads 
over above the Washer K, the Washer being 
contained within a suitable vertical cylindri 
cal casing and having at the base of the cas 
ing the overflow pipe m' which acts as a 
water-seal for the main gas inlet pipe in which 
leads directly through the washer from the 
top thereof below the overflow pipe, being 
sealed by the water in the base of the Washer. 
The top or cover m of the washer is remov 
able, and the inlet pipe in removable with it 
being suspended from the cover. It thus pro 
vides for easy access, by disengaging the con 
necting pipe leading from the superheater, 
when the cover and inlet pipe may be raised to 
permit of refilling or repair. Such construc 
tion of the superheater and the washer located 
close to each other, and the carrying of the in 
let pipe to the washer directly downwardly 
through the same, simplifies to a very great 
extent the construction of gas making appa 
ratus, and does away entirely with the neces 
sity of a separate Wash box, while at the same 
time the inlet pipe is exposed to the Water de 
scending through the washer and is cooled 
thereby, and the cooling effect upon the gases 
by the passage through the washer takes place 
immediately after the gases have left the su 
perheater, and while they are descending to 
the Washer seal. The washer has suitable 
water spray pipe or pipes mat its upper end, 
and it is filled with interlacing pieces of wood 
of suitable kind, or like means for imparting 
a circuitous course to the gases as they rise 
through the same, and bringing the gases into 
contact with the descending water so as to 
properly wash the same before the passage of 
the gas from the Washer through the passage. 
an into the scrubber N. The construction of 
the scrubber does not require description, ex 
cept that it is filled with suitable materials 
for scrubbing the gas and is divided into two 
compartments by the vertical partition in of 
the scrubber, and has the outlet pipe in lead 
ing to the wash box. 
It will be noticed that throughout the en 
tire apparatus above described, there are no 
gas cut-off valves which would require to be 
opened or closed during the gas making oper 
ation. The only valves provided in the whole 
apparatus, further than for controlling the en 
trance of air, Steam, and oil, are the relief 
valves or caps on the different relief open 
ings of the first and second furnaces, and the 
horizontal body portion of the steam super 
heater. This is of great advantage in view of 
the fact that such valves are liable to get out 
of order on account of the exposure to high 
and changing temperatures, and generally 
form one of the sources of trouble in gas mak 
ing apparatus; the present apparatus being 
operated in blowing up by the opening of the 
relief valves when no gas is carried to the 
tank, as the gases have free escape through 
such relief valves; and when the relief valves 
are closed, the gas is compelled to pass through 
the steam superheater and into the washer 
and thence to the tank, as no other course is 
open to it. 
In making gas in accordance with the pro 
cess forming the subject matter of this appli 
cation, and by the apparatus above described, 
fire is kindled in the cupola generators A C 
D, and they are gradually filled with coal 
through the regular charging ports or doors, 
while the air in suitable quantities is being 
supplied to them to gradually raise the coal 
to incandescence. Fire is also kindled in the 
25 
35 
45 
7 o 
75 
95 
OO 
ro5 
II5 
I 25 
55 
65 
 
505,525 
5 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Coke chamber or final fixing chamber G, and 
Coke is fed to that chamber. I prefer to use 
coke in this chamber, but anthracite coal or 
other carbon suitable for fixing may be em 
ployed. As these chambers are gradually 
heated up, the several relief valves are opened 
and active combustion of the coal in the three 
generators A CD is obtained, the generator or 
producer gas from these chambers being util 
ized in heating up the several parts of the ap 
paratus; for example, in the first furnace A 
the generator gas rising from the cupolagen 
erator A is met by the current of air in the 
upper part thereof and burned within the 
chambers B, heating the checker work there 
in, and, during the first part of the blowing 
up, escaping through the relief valve at the 
top of the furnace. The same action is ob 
tained over the other two generators, but the 
relief valves for those generators are soon 
closed and the producer gas from the same 
burned within the horizontal body portion to 
heat the checker work contained therein, or 
carried over to the primary fixing chamber 
H, entering the vertical chamber H' and be 
ing burned therein, air for such purpose be 
ing provided with the pipe h', the products 
rising through the vertical chamber H' and 
escaping through the relief valve L of the sec 
Ond furnace. As soon as the two chambers 
B' of the gas superheating chamber B are suf 
ficiently heated for the purpose the relief 
Valve in the first furnace is closed and the 
heated products are caused to pass through 
the down-take passage B and enter the hori 
Zontal body portion and assist the gases from 
the generators CD in heating up the checker 
Workin the horizontal body portion, and pass 
ing also with all such gases into the primary 
fixing chamber to assist in heating up that 
chamber. In the first heating up of the ap 
paratus, a slow combustion may be formed 
at the base of the coke or final fixing cham 
ber G by the entrance of air, and any gases 
formed therein may be burned in the primary 
fixing chamber, air for supporting such com 
bustion entering through the pipe G8. The 
principal heating of such primary fixing cham 
ber is obtained, however, from the three gen 
erators, the relief valve of the second furnace 
being closed and the heated products being 
forced downwardly through the chambers H 
and flowing thence directly through the body 
of coke in the coke chamber G (in which case 
all air is shut off from such chamber) so that 
the coke in this chamber is heated by the di 
rect contact of the hot waste products gener 
ated in the other parts of the furnace, and 
which are caused to flow through the coke in 
Such way as to heat the same without consum 
ing the Coke, the coke being heated by contact 
of these heated products which pass down. 
Wardly through the same and escape through 
the annular chamberg, thence into the pas 
sage i, and rise through the superheater I. 
As some of such heated products may take up 
another portion of carbon in passing through 
 
75 
the body of coke, an air entrance is provided 
at the base of the superheater to cause Com 
bustion of the same and aid in heating up 
the superheater. This is continued until the 
whole apparatus is brought to the desired 
temperature, the object being to heat the gas 
superheater Band the checker work and walls 
within the horizontal body portion Eas highly 
as practicable, and to bring the primary fix 
ing chamber H to a good fixing heat but not 
to such a heat as will cause the breaking up 
of the hydrocarbons and the deposit of car 
bon, and to bring the coke or final fixing 
chamber to but not beyond a red heat. This 
can be accomplished by means of several re 
lief valves which may be operated to throw 
the current in different directions to produce 
this result. The air is then closed off from 
all parts of the apparatus, and it is ready 
for gas making. The operator then admits 
the steam superheated as above described, 
to the generator D, and passing up through 
the incandescent carbon thereinforms Water 
gas. This water gas then passes almost di 
rectly into the fixing chamber H. At the 
same time, oil and superheated steam are in 
troduced at the top of the fixing chamber 
through the pipe or pipes l, the same being 
sprayed over the checker work in the central 
portion. H' of the fixing chamber Hand in the 
side portions H* thereof, and the gas passes 
upwardly through said central portion against 
any un vaporized oil which may pass down 
Wardly through the same. As the oil and 
Water gas are thus brought into contact within 
the heated fixing chamber, they are properly 
intermingled, the mass of the oil being va 
porized, and the primary fixing of the gas be 
ing obtained, and as the gases reach the upper 
part of the fixing chamber they pass down 
wardly through the side portions H, the hy 
drocarbon gas or vapor being thoroughly in 
termingled there with, and the combined gas 
and vapor passing downwardly into the body 
of coke, while any unvaporized portions of the 
oil percolate through the heated refractory 
materials and descend upon and are vapor 
ized by the coke, and the Water gas and hy 
drocarbon gases are brought into intimate 
contact with each other in the presence of 
the red hot coke. Part of the gases are fixed 
in the primary fixing chamber H, and as such 
gases with the Water gas and vapor are com 
mingled in the red hot carbon and are forced 
into intimate contact with each other within 
the pores and interstices thereof, a chemical 
action takes place between the gases and va 
por which causes such a union as to generate 
a large portion of marsh and heavy hydro 
carbon gases, the red hot carbon furnishing 
any necessary carbon for the formation of 
such gases, and the water gas providing the 
hydrogen for such purpose, the result of the 
downward passage of the gases and vapors 
first through the heated refractory material, 
causing such primary fixing, and then down 
Wardly through the red hot coke, being the 
95 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 3G 
505,525 
IO 
15 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
Sale. 
- 
entire vaporization of the oil and the forma 
tion of a gas which is rich in hydrogen, marsh 
gas and illuminants, but contains but com 
paratively little carbonic oxide. Any of the 
oil descending through the central chamber 
H' and which is not vaporized is taken up 
by the gases or upon the checker work, and 
falls upon the surface of sand bed h; and is 
Supported by Such porous surface so that the 
gases may easily vaporize and take up the 
During the time that the water gas is be 
ing generated in the generator D, the heat of 
the primary fixing chamber H is mainly de 
pended upon for the primary fixing of the 
gases, but as the oil will have a chilling ef 
fect upon the same and would beliable to re 
duce it below the proper heat for fixing, I 
provide the necessary heat to assist such 
chamber in the primary fixing by superheat 
ing the Water gas before introducing the oil 
into the same. This I accomplish with the 
gases formed in the cupola generators C and 
A'. For example, where the gas is being 
formed in the cupola generator C, the water 
gas passes up into the horizontal body por 
tion E and through the masses of checker 
work r r' rand the cross walls p'in its course 
to the primary fixing chamber H, and a large 
amount of heat has been Stored in such cham 
ber and Walls, the water gas so generated will 
be superheated and will be carried over into 
the fixing chamber at a sufficient heat to act 
upon the oil introduced into such chamber in 
such way as not only to quickly vaporize the 
same, but to either entirely fix or assist the 
materials in the fixing chamber in the pri 
mary fixing of the gases, and to carry the 
gases down into the body of red hot coke at a 
higher heat than they would naturally enter 
the same, and SO also to assist by means of su 
perheated gases, in maintaining the coke in 
the final fixing chamber G at the proper heat 
for fixing the gases. After this has been con 
tinued for Some time, the steam is also ad 
mitted to the generator A and the water 
gas formed passes upwardly from the same 
through the gas superheater B, traveling up 
wardly through the checker work in the side 
chambers B and down through the central 
chamber B, the gas being still more highly su 
perheated in this part of the apparatus than 
the horizontal body portion, as this is generally 
the last body of gas used, and the superheated 
gases So formed passing through the horizon 
tal body portion to the fixing chamber and act 
ing by their heat in the vaporizing and fixing 
of the gases as above described. During these 
operations the steam through the different 
chambers may, of course, be cut off as found 
desirable, being reduced or cut off in the gen 
erator D when the generator C is brought 
into play, and the same as to the generator 
A'. It is found in practice that this super 
heating of the water gas formed in the later 
part of the run, and the utilization of such 
Superheated gases in vaporizing the oil and 
fixing the gases, is of great value in gas mak 
ing, as an even quality of gas can be pro 
duced, the apparatus being run in such Way 
that an even feeding of oil, according to the 
amount of gas generated, is obtained. For 
example, for making illuminating gas the 
process has been practiced by feeding three 
gallons of oil to one thousand feet of gas, and 
it is found that all of the oil is taken up as 
well by the gas formed in the last part of the 
run as by that formed in the first part of the 
run, and the gas made during the entire run 
is of very even quality. As the gases thus 
provide the necessary heat for fixing, the 
primary fixing chamber H need not be heated 
to such heat as would cause the breaking up 
of the hydrocarbons in the first part of the 
run, while the superheated gases themselves, 
by their intermingling with the oil vapor, act 
to vaporize and fix the same without the 
formation of carbon, a gas of very high illumi 
nating quality being produced in this way 
with the employment of about three gallons 
of oil to the one thousand feet of gas. By 
the employment of the superheating water 
gas in the later part of the run, I am also 
enabled to extend the time of gas making in 
each run much beyond that of the ordinary 
gas making apparatus, and I overcome the 
necessity of the burning of so much fuel for 
heating up purposes. 
After the apparatus has cooled down so 
as to require re-heating, the steam supply is 
cut off and air admitted to the several cupola 
generators, the relief valves being so manipu 
lated as to properly utilize the heated pro 
ducts from the burning of the generator gases 
in the heating up of several bodies of checker 
Work, &c., and the products so utilized are 
finally carried down through the mass of coke 
in the chamber G to heat the coke by direct 
contact and thence into the steam superheater 
and upwardly through the same, this being 
Continued until the coke in the chamber G 
and the refractory material in the fixing 
chamber H are brought to the desired heat, 
the coal in the generators brought to the 
proper State of incandescence, and the re 
mainder of the heat stored in the bodies of fix 
ing material. It is also generally found desir 
able to admit air at the base of the coke cham 
ber G for about a minute before gas making, 
SO as to insure the heating up of the lower 
portion of the body of coke, and when this is 
done all air is closed off from the apparatus, 
and the gas making repeated as above de 
Scribed. 
During all the blowing up and gas mak 
ing operations, the products or gases formed 
are carried upwardly through the superheat 
er, the products being permitted to escape 
through the relief valve thereon, while the 
gases are carried into the washer K and into 
the Water-seal at the base thereof. It is found 
that the superheater absorbs the major por 
tion of the heat from the gases, this being 
indicated by the fact that the upper portion 
75 
IOO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
505,525 
Cd 
25 
35 
45 
thereof is not raised to any high heat, and the 
gases are also immediately subjected to the 
Cooling action within the washer after pass 
ing from the Superheater, as they are required 
to pass downwardly through the pipe m with 
in the Washer, the outer surface of which 
is cooled by the water flowing downwardly 
through the washer. 
In Fig. 10 I have illustrated a simple form 
of apparatus which may be employed to prac 
tice the process in small plants, and in which 
the horizontal body portion E is omitted, the 
two furnaces A F being brought close to each 
Other and the cupola generator A' having a 
port O near the top thereof which communi 
cates directly with the primary fixing cham 
berand which is controlled by the sliding valve 
O' of suitable refractory material. In such 
case, after the heating up of the apparatus, 
and the storing of the heat in the super 
heater B, in making the gas during the first 
part of the run the port O is opened, which 
permits the Water gas formed in the genera 
tor A' to flow directly into the primary fixing 
chamber H and thence through the final ?ix 
ing channber G; and during the later part of 
the run this port O is closed so that the water 
gas formed in the generator A' is forced up 
Wardly through the superheater B and the 
Superheating gases are carried over into the 
primary fixing chamber, acting as above de 
scribed in connection with the other figures 
of the drawings. 
Some of the advantages obtained may be 
briefly stated as follows:--the provisions of 
large bodies of refractory material for the 
storing of heat to be subsequently utilized in 
the superheating of the gases; the utilization 
of such superheated gases to assist in the va 
porizing and fixing of the hydrocarbons in 
troduced; the ease of control of the entire ap 
paratus for the practicing of the process, and 
the directing of the Water gas through the 
different bodies of refractory material by the 
handling simply of suitable steam valves; the 
entire control of the apparatus during the 
blowing up operation by means of simple re 
lief valves whereby the heat may be thrown 
in any direction desired for the proper heat 
ing of the fixing chambers and the high heat 
ing of the superheating chamber, as found de 
sirable; simplicity and strength of construc 
tion, while providing for a long course of the 
gases through the apparatus, such, for exam 
ple, as by the central longitudinal arches and 
walls supported by the same in the upper 
parts of the vertical furnaces, which give a 
specially durable and cheap form of up-take 
and down-take passages; the production of 
an even and high quality of illuminating gas 
from a small proportion of hydrocarbons; the 
utilization of all of the hydrocarbons in the 
making of such gas without the deposit of 
carbon, and the extending of the time of the 
run in the making of gases, without the ne 
cessity of too high heating of the fixing ma 
terial. It is found that there is practically no 
residuum of heavy hydrocarbons from the ap 
paratus, all such materials being utilized in 
the gas making. 
v 
The apparatus above described may be em 
ployed for making a fuel gas in the same Way 
as has been fully described, except that the 
amount of hydrocarbons introduced will be 
reduced, or it may be employed in practicing 
the continuous process, which forms the Sub 
ject matter of another application, Serial No. 
4.17,668, in which a certain portion of the gen 
erator gas is combined with the Water gas 
formed, in which case air may be introduced 
into one or more of the cupola generators at 
the same time that the steam is being intro 
duced into the other cupola generator, the 
combined water and generator gases being 
carried through the apparatus in substan 
tially the way above described, and the oil 
being introduced within the fixing chamber 
or at other suitable point, and the combined 
gases and vapors carried downwardly through 
the mass of coke, or other carbon, in the fiX 
ing chamber G which may be maintained at 
the desired heat by the introduction of a small 
quantity of air at the base of such chamber, 
which will serve to heat the coke within, the 
coke itself being burned to maintain it at the 
necessary heat for fixing the gases. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The herein-described process of making 
gas, consisting in generating water gas, and 
without superheating the gas introducing oil 
or like ..ydrocarbons into the water gas gen 
erated in the first part of the run and carry 
ing the combined gas and vapors through a 
body of fixing materials, and generating Wa 
ter gas in the later part of the run super 
heating the same and introducing the oil into 
the resultant superheated water gas, and car 
rying such combined gas and vapor through 
a body of fixing materials, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
2. The herein-described process of making 
gas, consisting in generating water gas, and 
without superheating the gas introducing oil 
or like hydrocarbons into the water gas gen 
erated, and carrying the combined gas and 
vapors through a body of heated refractory 
fixing material and then through a body of 
heated coke, and, in the later part of the run, 
generating water gas and superheating the 
same, introducing oil into the resultant Super 
heated water gas and carrying such combined 
gas and vapor first through a body of heated 
refractory material and then through a body 
of heated carbon, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
3. The herein-described process of making 
gas, Consisting in generating gas from a mass 
of carbon, superheating the gas so generated, 
introducing hydrocarbons into the superheat 
edgas,and carrying the combined superheated 
gas and vapor, and any fixed gases formed 
thereby, through a body of heated carbon, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth, 
95 
CO 
Ic5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
505,525 
90 
95 
IOO 
IC) 
TT 5 
I 25 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
4. The hereindescribed process of making 
gas, consisting in blowing up two or more 
generators, burning the gases formed to heat 
bodies of refractory material, and then car 
rying the heated products of combustion 
through a mass of carbon and thereby heat 
ing the same, and subsequently introducing 
steam into one of said generators, introduc 
ing hydrocarbons into the water gas formed, 
and carrying the same through the body of 
heated carbon, and, at a laterpart of the run, 
introducing steam into the other generator, 
carrying the water gas formed through a body 
of heated checker work to superheat the same, 
introducing hydrocarbons into such super 
heated water gas, and carrying the same 
through the body of heated carbon, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
5. The herein-described process of making 
gas, consisting in blowing up two or more cu 
pola generators, burning the gas formed to 
heat bodies of checker work, or like loose ma 
terial, and carrying the heated products 
through a fixing chamber containing refrac 
tory material, and then downwardly through 
a mass of carbon to heat the same, then ad 
mitting Steam to one of the cupola genera 
tors, carrying the products through the fixing 
chamber containing refractory material, and 
during their passage introducing hydrocar 
bons into the same and carrying the combined 
gas and vapor through the body of heated car 
bon, and at the laterpart of the run introduc 
ing steam into the other cupola generator, car 
Tying the Water gas formed through the heated 
bodies of checker work and the superheated 
Water gas through the fixing chamber con 
taining refractory material, and during their 
passage introducing hydrocarbons into the 
Same, and the resultant superheated water 
gas and vapor through the heated carbon, 
Substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
6. In apparatus for making gas, the combi 
nation of two vertical furnaces, a horizontal 
body portion connecting the same at a point 
about midway of the height of the furnaces 
and having depending vertical portions, ex 
tending below the body portion and forming 
cupola generators, the same being inclosed 
Within Suitable casings, and the two vertical 
furnaces and cupola generators communicat 
ing with the horizontal body portion, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
7. In apparatus for making gas, the combi 
nation of two vertical furnaces, a horizontal 
body portion connecting the same, the whole 
being inclosed Within suitable casings, and 
the end walls of the horizontal portion being 
formed arch-shaped so as to support the lin 
ing of the vertical furnaces where they com 
municate with the body portion, and having 
ports formed through such arches between 
the body portion and the vertical furnaces, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
8. In gas making apparatus, a vertical fur 
nace having a solid central arch extending 
longitudinally across a portion thereof with 
spaces on each side of said arch and vertical 
walls supported on and extending upwardly 
from said arch toward but not quite to the 
top of the furnace and supported at the sides 
by the walls of the furnace, so forming a Cen 
tral chamber, said chamber having a port at 
the base thereof and communicating with the 
ports of the furnace on each side of Said 
walls over the upper ends of the walls, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth, 
9. In a gas making apparatus, a vertical 
furnace having a central arch extending lon 
gitudinally across a portion thereof with 
spaces on each side of said arch and vertical 
walls supported on and extending upwardly 
from said arch toward the top of the furnace, 
and supported at the sides by the walls of the 
furnace, and a port opening above said arch 
at the base of the vertical chamber formed by 
said vertical walls, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
10. In gas making apparatus, the combi 
nation of a vertical furnace having a coal 
chamber in the base thereof, a central arch 
extending across said chamber and having 
spaces on thesides thereof, vertical walls Sup 
ported on and extending upwardly from said 
arch toward the top of the furnace chamber, 
a port opening above said arch tiles extend 
ing across the chambers on each side of the 
vertical chambers so formed between the 
arch and the side walls of the furnace, and 
checker work supported on such tiles, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
11. In gas making apparatus, the combi 
nation of a vertical furnace having a coal 
chamber in the base thereof, a central arch 
extending across said chamber and having 
spaces on the sides thereof, vertical walls sup 
ported on and extending upwardly from said 
arch toward the top of the furnace chamber, 
a port opening above said arch tiles extend 
ing across the chambers on each side of the 
vertical chambers so formed between the arch 
and the side walls of the furnace, and a re 
lief valve in the top wall of the furnace, Sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
12. A gas making apparatus having a hori 
Zontal body portion, a vertical depending por 
tion forming a cupola generator below the 
body portion, arches extending across above 
such generator, and cross Walls extending 
from said arches to the top of the body por 
tion, said cross walls having ports therein, 
communicating with the spaces on each side 
of the walls, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
13. A gas making apparatus having at one 
end a vertical furnace containing a cupola, 
generator in the lower part, and a gas super 
heater in the upper part, a horizontal body 
portion with which such gas superheater com 
municates, a vertical furnace with which the 
other end of the horizontal body portion com 
municates, said second vertical furnace hav 
ing a fixing chamber containing refractory 
material in the upper part, and a coke cham 
55 
 
505,525 
9 
17. A gas making apparatus having a ver-35 
and an outlet passage leading from the upper 
end of such steam superheater, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
16. A gas making apparatus having a ver 
tical furnace provided with a fixing chamber 3o 
having a bed of sand at the base thereof, and 
having an oil entrance above said bed of 
sand, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
tical steam Superheater, an inlet passage at 
the base leading from the gas generating and 
fixing apparatus, an outlet passage at the 
top, a vertical washer, and a pipe leading from 
the top of the gas superheater down through 4o 
the washer and into a water-seal at the base 
thereof, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof , the said JAMES L. 
HASTINGS, have hereunto set my hand. 
JAMES L. HASTINGS, 
Witnesses: 
JAS. LOUGHRAN, 
WM. J. SHETTSLINE, 
ber in the lower part provided with an out 
let, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth, 
14. A gas making apparatus having at One 
5 end a vertical furnace containing a cupola 
generator in the lower part, and a gas super 
heater in the upper part, a horizontal body 
portion with which such gas superheater com 
municates, a vertical furnace with which the 
Io other end of the horizontal body portion com 
municates, said second vertical furnace hav 
ing a fixing chamber containing refractory 
material in the upper part, and a coke cham 
ber in the lower part provided with an out 
15 let, and one or more depending portions ex 
tending below the horizontal body portion and 
forming cupola generators, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
15. A gas making apparatus having a ver 
20 tical furnace containing a fixing chamber or 
chambers, an outlet passage leading from the 
lower end thereof, a vertical steam super 
heater with which such passage communicates 
at the base, said superheater containing a coil 
25 of steam pipes, and a mass of checker Work, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505625.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 505,625, 
 
J. M. GUILBERT. 
CURIAN RINC. 
Patented Sept. 26, 1893. 
WITNESSES; 
G2 67. e-A94). 
(6/044., 
 
 
Sg 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN MURRAY GUILBERT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR 
OF ONE-HALE TO HENRY HEPBURN BARNUM, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CURTAN-RING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 505,625, dated September 26, 1893. 
Application filed December i6, 1892, Serial No. 455,340, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN MURRAY GUIL 
BERT, a citizen of the United States, residing 
in the city and county of Philadelphia, State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Curtain-Rings, which 
improvement is fully set forth in the follow 
ing specification and accompanying drawings. 
My invention consists of a curtain ring 
which is adapted to be opened so as to be 
readily applied to and removed from a sup 
porting pole, said ring being formed of a 
sheet metal tube with projecting pieces on the 
ends integral therewith, pierced and turned 
radially forming the fastening eyes of the 
TIng. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
curtain ring embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 represents a view of a detached portion 
thereof. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the two figures. 
Referring to the drawings: A designates a 
ring which is divided as at B, whereby it may 
be opened, as shown in dotted lines Fig. 1, so 
as to be fitted upon or removed from the pole 
C, the latter also being shown in dotted lines. 
On the ends of the ring are eyes D through 
which the hook or pin E is passed, whereby 
the ring is prevented from separating, and 
When placed upon a pole it will be found that 
a curtain may be nicely suspended therefrom. 
The ring is formed of a tube of metal or other 
Suitable material, and pieces at the ends of 
the same are turned down and perforated or 
35 
punched out, thus forming the eyes D, as will 
be seen in Figs. 1 and 2. When the hook or 
pin is removed from the eyes, the ring may 
be bent or twisted in such manner that its 
ends separate sufficiently to remove the ring 
from the pole, after which it is bent back to 
its normal position, so that the eyes come to 
gether and the hook or pin may be inserted 
into or connected with the same, whereby the 
ring is held in closed position on the pole, it 
being evident that the pole may remain a fix 
ture, and need not be disturbed for the pur 
pose of applying to or removing therefrom 
one or all of the rings by which the curtain 
is suspended. 
It will be seen that the rings may be han 
dled without presenting shoulders or edges 
between the ends, and they may be packed 
flat side by side. The eyes are strong and 
durable and are connected with the body of 
the ring without the use of solder, rivets or 
other fastening. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
As a new article of manufacture, a tubular 
curtain ring formed of a single piece of sheet 
metal having perforated radial projections on 
its ends, integral therewith, forming the fas 
tening eyes. 
JOHN MURRAY GUILBERT. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
A. P. JENNINGS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505725.txt	(No Model.) 
No, 505,725, 
 
C. SCHNURCH, 
APPARATUS FOR STEAMING SEAG, 
Patented Sept. 26, 1893. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CARL SCHNURCH, OF ALT CHEMNITZ, GERMANY. 
APPARATUS FOR STEAMING SHAG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 505,725, dated September 26, 1893. 
Application filed May 11, 1892, Serial No. 432,588, (No model.) 
TO 
IS p 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARLSCHNRCH, chem 
ist, a subject of the King of Saxony, Ger 
many, residing at 11 Johannes Street, Alt 
Chemnitz, in the Kingdom of Saxony, Ger 
many, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improved Process and Apparatus for Dry 
ing and Steaming Aniline-Black-Colored Cot 
ton Shag; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and-exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention relates to an improved ap 
aratus for steaming and drying cotton shag 
after it has been colored or printed, and it 
consists in the construction and combination 
of devices hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings-Figure 1 
is a side elevation of my improved appa 
ratus. Fig. 2 is a plan view thereof, and Fig. 
3 is a detailed plan and transverse section of 
the endless carrier or chain-belt. 
In the embodiment of my invention, Iem 
ploy a suitably constructed drying room or 
structure i and an oxidation or steaming 
room or closure d arranged contiguously to 
each other. 
lc is an endless carrier or chain-belt, en 
compassing, tortuously upper and lower Se 
ries of alternating cogged or chain wheels 
1 to 24 arranged throughout the drying room 
ti, and two upper wheels 25, 27 and an inter 
mediate lower wheel 26, in the steaming or 
oxidation room d. This carrier or belt also 
encompasses two end rollers 28 and 36, and 
rests upon a series of rollers 29 to 35 arranged 
external of said steaming and drying rooms, 
said carrier passing from under rollers 37, 
over chain or cogged wheels 38 arranged at 
one end of said drying room and movably 
held in their bearings by screws u, to arrest 
the movement of Said latter wheels. 
The cross-bars or slats g of the carrier or 
chain-belt k are armed or furnished through 
out the entire length of the belt with spin 
dles S bearing the bobbins, cops or drums 
c carrying the cotton shag for drying and 
steaming. 
In the lower part of the steaming or oxi 
dation room d is a basin or vessel b having 
screen or sieve cover i and containing water, 
heated to the boiling point to generate the 
requisite steam for the oxidation or steam 
- 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ing of the cotton-shag borne by the carrier or 
belt k, on its way through said room the Waste 
steam escaping at a in the top of the room d. 
The covering plates pp of the steaming or . 
oxidation room d are heated by steam-pipes 
r arranged along the under side thereof and 
extending downward therefrom and connect 
ed to a supply steam-pipe connecting with 
a suitable steam-generator or boiler (not 
shown) conveniently located. 
The water contained in the vessel or basin 
b is heated by a spiral steam pipel arranged 
therein and connected to the steam pipe r", 
while the exhaust steam from the latter pipe 
is conducted to tho water, in the basin or ves 
Selb by pipes h. 
A hot air-blast is forced into the drying 
room or chamber to effect the drying of the 
cotton shag by the action of a blast fan or 
blower O through the pipe o' having a flared 
outer end facing the delivery end of said 
chamber or room. 
Belts 39 arranged alternately upon oppo 
site sides of the drying room and upon one 
side of the steaming room, encompass pull 
leys upon shafts of certain of the upper 
series of wheels, and a pulley upon the shaft 
of the wheels 27, and a shaft having a screw 
and gear connection it with the shaft e, Fig. 
2 carrying the wheels 33, in conjunction with 
a suitable motor-power, communicates move 
ment to said belts, which in turn, drive the 
endless carrier k. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
The combination with a steaming room and 
a drying room, each having alternating Se 
ries of upper and lower wheels or rolls ar 
ranged therein, of an endless carrier or belt 
extended alternately above and below said 
wheels and having cross bars or slats pro 
vided with spindles for carrying the bobbins 
or cops on which the cotton shag is placed, 
and means for driving said belt continuously 
to carry the cotton shag through the steam 
ing room and drying room at one operation, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CARL SCHNURCH, 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
IOC 
Witnesses: 
CARL FR. HEICHETT, 
HERNANDO DE SOTO. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505825.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER GENDRON, OF TOLEDO, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE GENDRON IRON 
WHEEL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BICYCLE-PEDAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 505,825, dated October 3, 1893. 
Application filed March 21, 1893, Serial No, 467,040, (No model.) 
O 
To call whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER GENDRON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Toledo, 
in the county of Lucas and State of Ohio, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Bicycle-Pedals, of which the follow 
ing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to a new and useful 
improvement in bicycle pedals and consists 
in the construction and arrangement of parts 
hereinafter described and definitely pointed 
out in the claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a central, lon 
gitudinal section through my improved pedal. 
Fig. 2 is a detached perspective view of the 
pedal frame, the rubber foot pieces being re 
moved. 
My pedal is designed to be constructed for 
the purpose, first, of getting strength com 
bined with lightness; second, of reducing the 
cost of manufacture and obtaining as nearly 
dust-proof bearings as possible, and, third, of 
getting the best possible bearings for the foot 
of the rider. 
The heads A A' I preferably make of sheet 
metal cutting them out into the desired form, 
substantially as shown and pressing out in the 
center the tubular nipples B with a curved 
portion C of greater diameter than the nip 
ples between the nipples and the end plates. 
The nipples B I provide with interior screw 
threads and the two heads are connected to 
gether by means of a tube D suitably screw 
threaded to engage with the nipples. 
The plate A is provided near its outer end 
with screw thread apertures C. and the plate 
A' is provided near its opposite end with 
apertures bhaving grooves b' extending there 
from in opposite directions. The ends of the 
plates A are connected together by means of 
the bolts E having a head F at one end and 
the short threaded portion G at the other 
end, this screw-threaded portion being pref 
G. The bolts pass through one plate A and 
- 
25 
35 
55 
the screw-threaded portion at their ends is 
screwed into an aperture in the opposite 
plate tightly binding the two together, and 
in this way I dispense with the use of all nuts 5o 
on these bolts, lightening the frame and im 
proving its appearance. 
H are the rubber foot pieces which are 
sleeved upon the bolts E when these bolts are 
put in position. 
The bolts E are provided with laterally ex 
tending wings I which are preferably forced 
into the rubber in sleeving the rubber pieces 
upon the bolt and hold these foot pieces from 
turning upon the bolt, preferably with the 6o 
upper faces in line, so that when the opera 
tor puts his foot upon the pedal, the ball of 
the foot will press down upon the inner lip 
of the pedal rubber and compress that lip 
giving a springy action for the foot, which I 65 
consider preferable to a construction in which 
the rubber pieces are pivoted upon the bolt 
and turned to conform with the shape of the 
foot. By providing the end plate A" with 
the aperturesb having the grooves b' extend- 7o 
ing therefrom I am enabled to quickly assem 
ble the parts by passing the bolts E through 
the apertures b in the plate A' the wings on 
the bolt passing through the grooves b'. 
and having a ball race Kformed at the larger 
end and having the screw-threaded free end 
K' with which the cone nut L engages and 
forms a corresponding bearing on the shaft 
to the ball race C of the frame, suitable balls 8o 
M being employed to form the usual ball 
bearings. A washer and jam nut are used 
to hold the cone L in its position. 
In order to make the pedal as nearly dust 
proof as possible, I use a flange cap O which 85 
I secure to the frame, entirely covering the 
opening in the end plate A and a flange dust 
ring P at the other end projecting some dis 
tance over the head P' on the pedal shaft. 
At Q. I show the crank to which the pedal 9a 
J is the pedal shaft, preferably tapering 75 
What I claim as my invention is 
45 erably just equal to the thickness of the plate shaft is secured. 
  
2 
505,825 
In a bicycle pedal, the combination with on the bolts over the wings, substantially as . 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
end plates, having apertures near their op- described. 
posite outer ends one plate being provided 
with grooves extending out from the aper- presence of two witnesses. 
5 tures of single cylindrical bolts connecting 
the respective ends of the plates, formed with 
oppositely extending wings intermediate their 
ends, and single heads and rubbers sleeved 
PETER GENDERON. 
Witnesses: 
M. B. O'DoGHERTY, 
N. L. LINDOP. 
C 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US505925.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 505,925. 
E. E. RITCHIE, 
SAW SET AND GAGE. 
- 
Patented Oct. 3, 1893. 
Wilpasses 
 
pe gtr 
A noc/- ZZeize?ze : 
By 2-zs Attorneys. 
- Q. 
62622-6. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ENOCH E. RITCHIE, OF HOWARD LAKE, MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO JAMES S. GRAVES, OF SAME PLACE. 
. 
. 
. 
SAW SET AND GAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 505,925, dated October 3, 1893. 
Application filed May 24, 1893, Serial No, 475,327, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, ENOCH. E. RITCHIE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at How 
ard Lake, in the county of Wright and State 
of Minnesota, have invented a new and use 
ful Saw Set and Gage, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved saw 
set and gage, the object in view being to pro 
vide a simple portable tool which combines 
the functions of a gage and a setting device, 
and which is adapted for effecting what is 
known as a spring-set, in which the teeth are 
given the necessary deflection without the 
use of a hammer and anvil, or equivalent de 
WCe. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide means by which the set is gaged simul 
taneously with the operation of setting, thus 
facilitating the operation. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
Yide an improved gage for use in cutting 
drag-teeth or clearers which are employed in 
CrOSS-cut saws. 
Furtherobjects and advantagesofmyinven 
tion Will appear in the following description, 
and the novel features thereof will be par 
ticularly pointed out in the appended claims. 
In the drawings-Figure 1 is a side view of 
a gage embodying my invention applied in 
the operative position to a saw-toothin posi 
tion for setting the same. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional view of the device applied in position 
to gage the set of a tooth. Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view of the tool. Fig. 4 is a rear 
View of the same. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the 
drawings. 
1 designates the body portion or handle of 
the device which is provided with an off-set 
head 2 which is approximately parallel with 
the body portion or handle, and is provided 
adjacent to its extremity with a transverse 
tooth receiving slot 3, the sides of which are 
slightly beveled, as shown clearly in Fig. 2, 
to enable the slot to be fitted over the saw 
tooth while in an inclined position. 
4-4 representlateralears which are turned 
down at their extremities to form bearing 
points 5 which are adapted to bear upon the 
s 
P 
surface of thesawblade, adjacent to the tooth, 
during the operation of setting the latter. 
7 is a gage screw which is threaded in the 
head near its inner end and projects beyond 
the rear surface of the same to regulate the 
interval between the rear end of the head 
and the surface of the saw to bring the front 
end of said head at the desired distance from 
the plane of the saw blade, such distance be 
ing adjusted by means of the gage screw ac 
cording to the set which is desired. 
The gage for regulating the cut of the drag 
teeth comprises the usual ears or flanges 8, 
an intermediate nutch 9, which are of the or 
dinary construction, and an adjustable slot 
ited plate 10 which fits in said notch with its 
slot in position to receive the tooth to be cut. 
This plate is provided with a slotted ear, 11, 
which is engaged by a stationary set screw 12 
whereby the distance of the surface of the 
gage plate below the plane of the ears or 
flanges 8 may be adjusted, as desired, to en 
able the drag-teeth to be cut the preferred 
length. 
The operation of this portion of the device 
is similar to that employed in various other 
tools of this class and hence needs no detail 
description; the only point of improvement 
residing in the adjustability of the gage plate 
whereby the amount to be cut from the tooth 
may be regulated by the position of the plate. 
It will be seen that the relative arrange 
ment of the tooth-receiving slot 3, the lateral 
bearing points and the gage screw, is such as 
to enable a tooth to be bent or set and imme 
diately gaged without changing the position 
of the hand upon the tool, and essentially by 
a continuous movement of said tool. For in 
stance, the slot is engaged with a tooth and 
the free rear end of the handle is depressed 
to a point which is considered sufficient to 
produce the desired deflection of the tooth, 
the head of the device is raised slightly to 
disengage the slot from the tooth and the 
handle is carried down until the bearing 
points and gage screw bear upon the surface 
of the saw blade. In this position it can be 
readily seen at a glance if the tooth, which 
has been operated upon, is deflected suffi 
ciently from the plane of the blade or not. 
If not, the operation may be repeated, and if 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
505,925 
25 
35 
gage plate fitting in said notch and provided 
with a slotted ear and set screw, a head in 
tegral with and off-set from said handle or 
body portion and provided at its free end 
with a tooth - receiving slot a gage screw 
threaded in a perforation in said head, and 
downturned bearing points arranged at the 
terminals of a transverse line interposed be 
tween the slot and the gage-screw substan 
tially as specified. 
3. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a saw set and gage comprising a handle or 
body-portion provided with a fiat head hav 
ing a transverse slot 3, a gage screw 7, and 
opposite lateral bearing-points 5, arranged 
upon a transverse line lying between the said 
slot and gage-screw, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
ENOCH. E. RITCH.I.E. 
Witnesses: 
F. E. LATHUM, 
H. W. SARVER. 
5 
the deflection is too great the tooth may be 
bent back to bring it to its proper place. 
Thus the setting and gaging of the teeth may 
be accomplished alternately in rapid succes 
sion without necessitating any change of po 
sition of the tool in the hand of the operator. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. A saw set and gage having a flat handle 
or body portion, an off-set head arranged in 
a plane approximately parallel with the body 
portion or handle and provided at its front 
end with a transversely disposed tooth-re 
ceiving slot a gage screw threaded in a per 
foration at the rear end of the head and pro 
jecting beyond the rear surface thereof, and 
lateral integral ears arranged midway be 
tween said slot and gage screw and having 
downturned bearing-points substantially as 
specified. 
2. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a saw set and gage comprising a flat handle 
or body portion, provided with integral flanges 
8 and an intermediate notch 9, an adjustable 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506025.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 506,025. 
J. WINTER, Sr, 
PHOTOGRAPHIC POSING CHAIR. 
Patented Oct. 3, 1893. 
WITNESSES: 
88 ?ea- 
e of (3-octave- 
 
f 
... 
. 
. 
. 
. 
NVENTOR 
62, 
73 4. ATTORNEYS. 
^ 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN WINTER, SR, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK. 
PHOTOGRAPHC POSING CHAIR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,025, dated October 3, 1893. 
Application filed February 23, 1893, Serial No. 463,317. (No model.) 
- 
5 scribed and set forth in the claims. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN WINTER, Sr., of 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
5 useful Improvements in Photographic Posing 
Chairs, of which the following, taken in con 
nection with the accompanying drawing, is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to a settee designed 
Io for posing groups of subjects to be photo 
graphed; and the invention consists in a 
novel, simple and inexpensive construction 
of a settee, which is very convenient for the 
aforesaid purpose as hereinafter fully de 
The annexed drawing represents a per 
spective view of a posing settee embodying 
my invention. 
a- a-- represent two seats facing in one 
2 o and the same direction and connected to 
gether and disposed with one at the side of 
and rearward from the other and in a higher 
plane, So that a person can be placed stand 
ing at the side of a person seated on the front 
25 seat-a'- and in front of a person seated 
on the rear seat -a- which latter supports 
its occupant at a sufficient elevation to bring 
the head of said occupant above the head of 
the person standing in front. At the same 
time another person can be placed standing 
at the rear of the front seat -a'- and thus 
present the head of said person above the 
occupant of said front seat. Hence a group 
of persons can be posed in a very convenient 
35 manner. It is obvious that another seat may 
be added and placed at the opposite side of 
the elevated rear seat -a- and in line with 
the front seat-a'- and thus the capacity of 
posing a group can be increased. 
The front seat -a'- is supported on four 
legs -l-l-l-l- the rear legs of which are 
extended above the seat to serve as posts 
-l'-- for supporting the back-b. One 
of these posts Imake to serve the additional 
function of one of the front legs of the ele 
vated rear seat -a-, the other front leg of 
the rear seat being correspondingly length 
ened and arranged in a line extending lat 
30 
45 
The rear seat-a-I prefer to deprive of a 55 
erally from the rear of the front seat and in 
range with the rear legs thereof. The rear 50 
legs of the rear seat are of the same length 
as the front legs of said seat and thus support 
the latter in a higher plane than the front 
seat -a'-. 
back So that said seat may be used as a stand 
When desired. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The improved photographic group-pos 
ing settee consisting of the legs-l-l-l-l-, 
the seat -a/- mounted on said legs, the ex 
tension -- of one of the rear legs of the 
aforesaid seat forming one of the front legs 65 
of the rear seat, a leg disposed in a line ex 
tending laterally from the rear of the seat 
-a'- and in range with the rear legs thereof 
and elongated to correspond to the height 
of the aforesaid extension and constituting 7o 
the companion front leg of the rear seat, cor 
respondingly elongated legs at the rear of the 
aforesaid front legs, and the seat -a- sup 
ported on said elongated legs in a higher 
plane than the front seat substantially as de- 75 
scribed and shown. 
2. A photographic posing settee consisting 
of two seats both facing in the same direc 
tion and mounted upon supports of different 
heights, and disposed with the front support 8o 
of the higher seat extending laterally from 
the rear support of the lower seat, thereby 
affording standing room for a person imme 
diately in front of the higher seat adjacent 
to the side of the lower seat, and standing 85 
room for a person immediately back of the 
lower seat adjacent to the side of the higher 
seat, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name this 18th day of February, go 
1893. 
JOHN WINTER, SR. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
H. M. SEAMANS, 
C. L, BENDIXON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506125.txt	(No Model.) 
--- 
J. W. LEWIS & J. M. IRWIN. 
f 
BOOKBINDING. 
 
No. 506,125, 
Z2-971, 
Patented Oct. 3, 1893. 
u17. 
 
 
 
Zeytzggaz4,4 O 
Azevezeevoz S. 
a 
www- 6% cave. 
r 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. LEWIS AND JAMES M. IRWIN, OF QUINCY, ILLINOIS. 
BOOKBINDING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,125, dated October 3, 1893. 
Application filed May 3, 1893, serial No. 472,924, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, JAMES W. LEWIS and 
JAMES M. IRWIN, of Quincy, in the county of 
Adams and State of Illinois, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Bookbinding; and we do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of 
this specification, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
an improved binding, particularly, though 
not exclusively applicable to blank books, 
ledgers and other books of a heavy character, 
whereby they may be opened out flat without 
Straining or injuring the binding in the least. 
With these objects in view, the invention 
may be said to consist in providing a book 
with the usual stiff covers and spring back 
and connecting the signatures or sections 
which have been previously united, to the said 
stiff covers by wide yielding connecting 
pieces which are joined to the covers some 
distance above the joint between the covers 
and spring back. 
Further, the invention consists in certain 
novel details of construction and combinations 
and arrangements of parts, all as will be now 
described and pointed out particularly in the 
appended claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings: 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a book with 
portions broken away to illustrate the inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a detail perspective illustrating 
the manner of uniting the parts. Fig. 3 is a 
sectional view through the back of a book 
formed in accordance with this invention. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures indicate the same parts. 
In order that the advantages and differences 
between a bookbound in accordance with our 
present invention and those bound in the or 
dinary manner, may be more clearly compre 
hended, we will first describe the completed 
book and then the method of forming and 
uniting the parts. 
Referring now particularly to Fig. 1, it will 
be seen that the usual heavy stiff sides or 
covers A are provided for the book, extend 
ing up close to the backB and united thereto 
by the usual narrow flexible hingeportion C. 
Thus the exterior of the book presents the or 
dinary appearance when opened or closed. 
The body of the book, i. e., the signatures 
or sections of leaves which are united together 
in the ordinary manner, instead of being con 
nected to the covers at the rear edges of the 
latter, as heretofore, are now connected to the 
covers at points some distance from the rear 
edges by means of intermediate yielding 
boards E, which give upward readily when 
the book is opened out as shown in Fig. 1, 
without straining the holding threads, covers 
or bindings in the least. 
The yielding boards E, while they allow the 
body of the book to give upward and open out 
flat, have sufficient strength to prevent the 
sagging of the body of the book when stood 
on edge or held by the covers thereby pre 
serving the shape of the book perfectly. 
In binding books in accordance with this 
invention we first provide and cut the stiff 
heavy covers of proper size. Then on the in 
ner side of each one some distance from the 
rear edge, we form a pocket by raising a flap F. 
Having thus prepared the covers and having 
united the signatures or sections of leaves in 
the ordinary manner, with tapes, or equiva 
lents, projecting from each side, we proceed 
to prepare the yielding boards for uniting the 
two, for which purpose, we select two pieces 
of press board of proper thickness to support 
the weight of the body of the book edgewise 
but still sufficiently flexible to yield readily 
as before described. These pieces of press 
board, lettered E in the drawings are glued or 
otherwise suitably fastened together through 
out their length, and for a portion of their 
width, preferably corresponding to the depth 
of the pocket in the cover. Then the free or 
unglued sides are separated and their adja 
cent faces covered with a piece of muslin or 
equivalent fabric e pasted in place So as to 
form a strong union between the two pieces 
of press-board, at the rear edge of the open 
ing between them, and also to prevent any 
tearing of the same at any point. The thick 
edge of the yielding connecting piece as We 
shall term this part, is now inserted in the 
pocket, and the under side glued fast to the 
body of the cover. Then the cover is applied 
to the book by having the straps uniting and 
holding the signatures or sections, passed 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
506,125 
along the line I, thus insuring the flat open 
ing at every point in the book, with absolutely 
no tendency of the leaves to close. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new is 
1. A book having the stiff covers, spring 
back with a hinge joint between the rear 
edges of the covers and back, the united sig 
natures or leaf sections, and the intermediate 
yielding connecting boards incorporated with 
the stiff covers some distance above their 
hinge edges and having their free edges con 
nected with and supporting the signatures or 
leaf sections, substantially as described. 
2. A book having the stiff covers formed 
with pockets on their inner sides some dis 
tance above their rear edges, the spring back 
united to the rear edges of the covers by hinge 
joints, the united signatures or leaf sections 
and the yielding intermediate connecting 
boards having their forward edges held with 
in the pockets in the covers and their rear 
free edges connected with and supporting the 
signatures or leaf sections; substantially as 
des 3ribed. 
35 
45 
JAMES W. LEWIS. 
JAMES MI. IRWIN. 
Witnesses: 
FANNIE CADOGAN, 
L. E. EMMONS. 
along and secured to the intermediate yield 
ing boards and preferably having the ends 
Secured beneath the flaps forming the pock 
ets in the covers. The ?laps are then pasted 
down and the whole pressed in the usual man 
ner, care being taken to have the intermedi 
ate yielding connecting pieces have their 
edges extending across the joint of the book, 
or up to the edge of the first signature or sec 
tion of the book body. The outside covering 
is now applied, together with the spring back, 
which latter is connected with the edge of the 
Stiff unyielding covers in the ordinary man 
ner, i.e., by means of the outer covering which 
forms the hinge joint between the two. In 
Order to present a finished appearance at top 
and bottom, and secure greater flexibility of 
the yielding connecting boards, the edges of 
the same are slit down at the pocket as shown 
at Hand the edge of the outer cover may pass 
through the slit between the two sections 
Without being cut at all as will be readily un 
derstood from Fig. 1. 
The binding it will be seen is simple, cheap 
and makes a perfect flat opening book, hence 
is particularly applicable to blank books, 
ledgers, &c., adapted to be written in. 
In some instances, especially where heavy 
paper is employed, we find it advantageous 
to crease each leaf of the book back and forth 
o 
5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506225.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 506,225, 
 
E. M. HAMILTON. 
PIANO ACTION, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 10, 1893, 
(No Model.) 
No. 506,225, 
E. M. HAMILTON, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
PIANO ACTION, 
Patented Oct. 10, 1893. 
76esz, 
oNGwww. 
Z72%zzz. 
644%r-47. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMERY M. HAMILTON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PANO ACT ON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,225, dated October 10, 1893. 
Application filed March 7, 1892, Renewed February 28, 1893, Serial No,464,118, (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EMERY M. HAMILTON, 
a citizen of the United States of America, and 
a resident of the city of New York, in the 
county and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Piano-Actions, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of the 
same, in which 
Figure 1, is a side elevation of those parts 
of a piano action embodying my invention, 
at rest. Fig. 2, is a similar view of those parts 
in the position they assume when the stroke 
is partially made. Fig. 3, is a similar view 
of those parts where the stroke has been de 
livered, but before the key has been released. 
Fig. 4, is a similar view of a modified form of 
jack which may be used in place of the one 
shown in the other figures; and Fig. 5, is a 
similar view of a still further modified form 
of jack. 
The requisites of a satisfactory piano ac 
tion are lightness, clearness and quickness. 
Its stroke should belight, -that is-as power 
ful a stroke with the hammer as desired with 
as slight a pressure as possible upon the key 
assuring sensitiveness and ease. This is ap 
proximated by the proper mechanical ar 
rangement of the levers and their connecting 
links, thereby providing a direct and positive 
series; by using as few parts as possible, 
which also makes it easier to render the ac 
tion noiseless, and by making them as light 
as is consistent with due strength and rigid 
It should be clear-that is-Without 
itv. 
isis and with as little friction as possi 
ble and arranged to permit the hammer to 
reach the back check as soon as its blow has 
been delivered and before the key is released, 
thereby preventing any rebounding, and it 
should be quick-that is-capable of causing 
a rapid repetition of the stroke without the 
necessity of waiting till the key assumes the 
position in which it is when normally at rest. 
These conditions have been met With more 
or less success by escapements of more or less 
complication none of which have been en 
tirely satisfactory and all of which I think 
have contained parts which at Some points, 
usually the end of the jack, rubbed against 
the adjacent part, a thing in itself objection 
able. 
My invention consists in the means herein 
described whereby with very simple parts all 
the requirements are met more satisfactorily 
than before and the objections or some of 
them avoided. 
K is the key lever, C the check, B the block 
on which is pivoted the jack J, provided with 
an extension or arm a. S, is the spring and 
S, its support. 
I, is the hammer, h, its shank, 
R, the main rail, f, the hammer flange, and t, 
the trip. Instead of block B, a rocker may be 
there provided, to permit of easy adjustment. 
Its form and arrangement are well known. 
Except the jack, the other parts are of ordi 
nary construction (though the hammer shank 
is preferably notched as shown that the up 
per end of the jack may be securely held from 
misplacement). 
The important novelty in the jack consists 
in the knee joint shown, preferably located 
below the center and arranged so that the 
distance between the extremities of the jack 
may be shortened without moving either ex 
tremity from its bearing, but by the moving 
of each member of the jack forming the knee 
joint out of the line drawn directly from the 
bearing at one extremity to that at the other, 
or in other words, the bending of not merely 
one but both members away from their re 
spective normal position. This joint and the 
pivot by which it is joined to the block B, I 
usually preferably so arrange that when at 
rest (as in Fig. 1) the knee pivot will lie be 
hind (here to the left of) a line drawn from 
the pivot in B, to the then point of contact 
between the head of the jack and the ham 
mer shank, in order that when the key is at 
rest the knee may be straight and furnish a 
substantially rigid leg to force up the ham 
mer when the key is depressed. This end 
might be attained by an unusually strong 
spring being employed but that would ren 
der the action stiff and unpleasant and might 
interfere with the proper reverse movement 
of the hammer toward the back check. At 
the same time the pivot of the knee should 
preferably not be located very far back of the 
line described, for a perfect action requires 
that when the arm a, has reached the tript, 
the pivot at the knee should be just in the 
Jine described in order that the pressure upon 
the key to bend the knee may not need to be 
so great as it would were it required to force 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
35 
45 
 
506,225 
the knee pivot past center, as it were. If the 
jack were jointed or hinged to the hammer 
shank the action would be much less easy and 
at one point a little jerky for the reason, that 
the hammer is intended to go a little farther 
than it would be raised by a very siow move 
ment of the key, and is intended to be car 
ried that farther distance by the momentum 
acquired during the time the jack is rising. 
Now if the jack be hinged or jointed to the 
hammer shank, the shank would necessarily 
have to carry the jack and its connected 
parts while passing through that additional 
space, which would not only interfere with 
the clearness, precision, and power of the 
stroke, but would require a heavier blow, one 
sufficient to throw all the parts the required 
distance, while as now arranged, it only needs 
force enough to throw the hammer and shank 
that distance. I have therefore left the shank 
and jack disconnected, and that feature is a 
material one in the construction of an effi 
cient action. When I Say disconnected, I do 
not mean absolutely, that is, I do not mean 
that it must be absolutely disconnected. A 
slight spring-tonnection which would permit 
the hammer shank to Separate from the head 
of the jack and yet would guide it again to 
its seat and facilitate its return after the blow 
had been delivered, might in Some instances 
be practical, but I do mean that there shall 
be nothing which will prevent the shank 
from separating from the head of the jack 
in passing through the latter portion of its 
movement toward the Wire or String. An 
action could, of course, be arranged in which 
the jack would continue to move upward by 
reason of actual and continued pressure upon 
the key lever throughout the entire move 
ment and would therefore carry the hammer 
the whole distance and not throw it at all, in 
which action the shank and jack might be 
connected, but such an action would not ac 
complish the results desired. It would es 
pecially lack elasticity, which is a necessity 
in a satisfactory action. Again my arrange 
ment of parts, (the jack inclined away from 
the hammer, the trip located on the side to 
Ward which it is inclined, and mounted on 
the rail or the shank itself, and the relative 
locations of the point of contact of the jack 
and shank and the pivots of the jack,) in 
sures that the jack will remain in its proper 
position without any additional check upon 
the left hand side of it, thereby dispensing 
with an additional rail for the Support of 
said cheek, as the ai'ln of the jack almost 
(and sometimes quite) rests against the main 
rail in normal position, but bears away from 
it without rubbing, the instant the key is de 
pressed. 
The operation is manifest. The depression 
of the key level' at the finger end of course 
throws up the other end carrying with it 
the jack with a straight knee and the ham 
mer shank and hammel and the blow is deliv 
ered upon the wire c. Just before the jack 
9 O 
95 
75 
reaches the limit of upward movement its 
arma, comes in contact with the tript, (which 
is here made adjustable by being Screw 7 O 
threaded into the flange f) and can no longer 
rise rigidly straight but (as seen in Fig. 3) 
is bent at the knee by the shortening of 
the distance between its pivot in block Band 
the trip, and when the hammer (which has, 
as stated, been carried against the Wire by 
the impetus of the blow) and its shank fall 
back, the knee yields to permit it to return 
far enough to come in contact with back 
check Cand thus all rebounding is prevented. 
The stress of spring S, however tends con 
tinually to straighten the knee of the jack 
and the instant the finger end of the key 
is released but a little, the knee becomes 
straight and the parts are in position for a 
rapid repetition of the stroke, and this too 
before the key has moved but a short dis 
tance on its return to rest (as seen plainly in 
Fig. 2). 
The simplicity and accuracy of the action 
are apparent. It will be noticed that the head 
of the jack is somewhat elongated in the di 
rection of the length of the hammer shank 
and this accomplishes a further object which 
is to accelerate the Speed of the hammer to 
ward the end of its stroke. At the begin 
ning the shank rests upon the forward part 
of the head as seen in Fig. 1. Its speed is 
of course regulated by the ratio between the 
upward movement of the jack and the dis 
tauce of its then point of contact from the 
pivot of the hammer Shank. As the move 
ment continues the point of contact continu 
ally changes moving always toward the pivot 
of said shank continually shortening the sec 
ond term of the ratio and thereby increasing 
the ratio of the Speed of the hammer. It will 
also be noticed that the movement of the 
head of the jack upon the shank is substan 
tially a rolling motion and that the rubbing 
action. So universal at this or a substantially 
similar point is entirely avoided in this de 
vice. A still further improvement is effected 
by this arrangement. It is by some thought 
desirable that forte' notes should be made 
by as light a touch as possible and the pi 
allo notes by a harder blow and the chang 
ing fulcrum as described, accomplishes this 
end. 
Fig. 4 as specified is a modified form of the 
jack. Its action is substantially the same as 
that already described, the difference being, 
that instead of having the two parts of the 
knee, back of the pivot make contact with 
each other on a substantially horizontal line 
(as seen in Figs. 1 to 3) and thereby forming 
a stop to prevent a reverse bending of the 
knee, I have here arranged them to make 
Contact. On a Vertical line, the lower one be 
ing cut a Way and a portion of the upper one 
extended down below the pivot for that pur 
pose, a mere variation of form. In Fig. 5 I 
exhibit a further variation of the joint and 
also a variation of the trip. The joint is a 
2 
OC 
IC5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
506,225 
3 
O 
25 
mere hinge, but is converted into a knee the stroke and another portion of said head, 
joint-one that will substantially bend in but 
nearer the shank pivot, makes such contact 
one direction-by providing a stop b, limit 
as the stroke progresses; Substantially as set 
ing motion in the other direction, but the 
forth. 
6. The combination in a piano action, of a 
stop in this instance is made part of, or se 
pivoted key lever; a hammer and shank piv 
cured to the block B, as shown, its action 
oted to the main rail; a jack pivoted to the 
however being very similar to that of the 
key lever, divided into two parts pivoted to 
other stops shown. In this figure the arm Ct, 
gether, and provided with a stop and an arm, 
is in the form of a taper lug and the trip ti, 
placed near it and with its face preferably 
but disconnected from the hammer shank 
substantially parallel to the face of the lug. 
substantially as set forth; a spring secured 
As the jack moves upward the face of the lug 
to said jack and to the key lever; and a trip 
comes in contact with the face of the trip, the 
located in the line of movement of Said arm 
of the jack, at a point within the limit of said 
jack is thrown to the left and the knee joint 
movement; all substantially as described. 
bent with the same result heretofore de 
scribed. And I desire to say that many other 
7. The combination of a pivoted piano ham 
mer and shank, a key lever, a jack provided 
variations of form in the arrangement of the 
knee might be adopted, all of which however 
with a knee joint in two parts, one of which 
I believe to be entirely within the spirit of 
is pivoted to the key lever and to the second 
part and the other of which is arranged to 
my invention. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
make contact With the hammershank, an arm 
and a stop as set forth, the point of contact 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a piano action, a lifting part or jack 
and the pivots being arranged as described 
provided with a knee joint substantially as 
whereby at rest the knee pivot will be at the 
set forth and interposed between the hammer 
rear of a line drawn from the point of con 
tact with the shank to the pivot of the jack 
shank and the key lever but disconnected 
On the key lever, but at the moment of con 
from the hammer Shank. 
2. In a piano action, the combination of a 
tact between the arm and stop, said knee 
key lever; a jack pivoted thereto and pro 
pivot will be in or to the front of a line from 
vided with a knee joint, substantially as set 
the key lever pivot to the point of contact, all 
Substantially as set forth. 
forth, a head and an arm; a hammer and 
shank, the latter of which is pivoted to a rail 
8. In a piano action, the combination of the 
key lever K, the jack J, inclined as set forth, 
and in contact with the jack head, but dis 
and provided with an arm C, a hammer H, 
connected therefrom, Substantially as set 
and shank h, a main rail R, and a tript, all 
forth; and a trip SO placed as to make con 
arranged and combined substantially as set 
tact with the arm of the jack before the key 
lever has reached its linuit of movement, Sub 
forth. 
stantially as set forth. 
9. In a piano action, the combination of a 
main rail, key lever, a hammer and hammer 
3. In a piano action, the combination of a 
shank With a knee jointed jack interposed be 
key lever; a jack pivoted thereto and pro 
vided with a knee joint, substantially as set 
tWeen them as set forth, and a spring ar 
ranged as described, whereby said spring not 
forth, a head and an arm; a hammer and 
only tends to hold straight the knee joint, but 
shank, the latter of which is pivoted to a rail 
also tends to hold the head of the jack against 
and in contact with the jack head, but dis 
the rail when said jack is in normal position, 
connected therefrom, Substantially as set 
substantially as set forth. 
forth; a trip so placed as to make contact 
10. The combination of a pivoted piano ham 
with the arm of the jack before the key lever 
mer and shank; a key lever; and a jack inter 
has reached its limit of movement; and a 
posed between, and provided with an elon 
spring secured to the jack so that its stress 
gated head in contact with the said shank, 
shall act to hold the knee Straight, Substan 
but shaped and arranged substantially asset 
tially as set forth. 
4. In a piano action, a lifting part or jack 
forth; Whereby one portion of the head makes 
provided with a knee joint substantially as 
contact with the shank at the beginning of 
the stroke and another portion of said head, 
set forth and interposed between the hammer 
nearer the Shank pivot, makes such contact 
; Shank and the key lever, but disconnected 
S s 
as the stroke progresses; substantially as set 
from the hammer Shank Substantially as set 
forth, and a stop as set forth, to limit its bend 
forth, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
ing to substantially one direction as specified. 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
5. The combination of a pivoted piano ham 
mer and shank a key lever; and a jack inter 
ence of two witnesses, this 4th day of March, 
posed between, and provided with an elon 
1892. 
gated head in contact with the shank, but 
shaped and arranged substantially as Set 
forth; whereby one portion of the head makes 
contact with the shank at the beginning of 
PETER B. VERMILYA, 
A. G. N. VERMILYA, 
E. M. HAMILTON, 
Witnesses: 
35 
45 
50 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
O 
I 15 
I 25 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506325.txt	(No Model.) 
J. MEYER 
PUZZLE LOCK FOR POCKET BOOKS, &c, 
No. 506,325, 
Patented 00t, 10, 1893. 
 
22, 
2-2. 
323s. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHANNES MEYER, OF HAMBURG, ASSIGNOR TO M. GUNZENHAUSER & CO., 
OF FRANKFORT.ON-THE-MAIN, GERMANY. 
PUZZLE-LOCK FOR POCKET-BOOKS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,325, dated October 10, 1893. 
Application filed December 21, 1892, Serial No. 455,887, (No model.) Patented in Belgium September 25, 1892, No. 101,502, 
t 
and in Luxemburg September 26, 1892, No. 1,693. 
When the pocket book is closed, the hook 
c, will enter behind the bolt through notch f, 40 
and by then tilting the pocket book on line 
III IV, Fig. 3, the bolt d, will slide downward 
until its locking edge g, engages the hook c, 
which will lock the pocket book (Fig. 5). 
To open the pocket book, the jaws are 
slightly pressed together at the center to over 
come the action of springs i, and cause the 
hook to liberate the bolt. By now tilting the 
pocket-book on line I, II, Fig. 3, the bolt will 
slide down until the notch f, is opposite the 
hook c, (Fig. 4) when the book will be opened 
by springs i. 
In case the locking edge g, is opposite hook 
(, when the pocket-book is to be closed, the 
jaws need only be pressed together, as the 
hook c, will automatically engage the locking 
edge by its slight spring action. 
45 
55 
What I claim is 
The combination in a pocket book or simi 
lar article of a pair of pivotally connected 
jaws with a bolt loosely secured to one of the 
jaws and adapted to be moved by gravitation 
when the pocket book is tilted and With a 
hook secured to the other jaw and adapted to 
be engaged by said bolt, substantially as 65 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
Io following is a specification. 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JoHANNES MEYER, a 
citizen of Germany, residing at Hamburg, 
Germany, have invented new and useful Im 
5 provements in Puzzle-Locks for Purses, Pock 
et-Books, and Satchels, (for which I have ob 
tained patents in Belgium, No. 101,502, dated 
September 25, 1892, and in Luxemburg, No. 
1,693, dated September 26, 1892) of which the 
This invention relates to a lock for pocket 
b00ks, Satchels, purses and similar articles, 
which is entirely invisible and in which an 
inner concealed locking bolt is operated by 
I5 inclining the pocket-book or other article in 
either direction. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a top view of the lock showing it open and 
applied to a pocket-book frame. Fig. 2 is a 
2 o section on line A, B, Fig. 1; Fig. 3 a side view 
of the frame. Figs. 4 and 5 are sections on 
line C, D, Fig. 3, showing the hook c, respect 
ively disengaged from and engaged by the 
bolt d. 
The letters a,b, represent the two pivotally 
connected jaws of a pocket-book, purse or 
satchel. The jaw a, is provided with an in 
ner hook c. The jaw b, is provided with an 
inner sliding bolt d, moving in bearings h, 
and provided with shoulders d', which when 
coming into contact with the bearings limit 
the motion of the bolt. The bolt d, is also 
provided with a notch f, and with a rear bev 
eled locking edge g, that adjoins the notch. 
To either one of the jaws a, b, springs i, are 
secured that tend to force the jaWS apart and 
prevent a spontaneous displacement of the 
bolt when the pocket book is closed. 
25 
35 
JOHANNES MEYER. 
Witnesses: 
MAX FOUQUET, 
NIC, FABRY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506426.txt	C. 0. ER WIN & F. WINKLER, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
Patented Oct. 10, 1893. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 506,426. 
 
sians 
 
 
  
 
 
fe 2 
I???ls 
 
  
 
 
O 
III. 
Sell 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES O. ERWIN AND FRANK WINKLER, OF KANSAS CITY, KANSAS. 
TYPE. WRITING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,426, dated October 10, 1893. 
Application filed May 15, 1893, Serial No. 474,282, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
o avZ zvhom, z may conce7n: 
Beit known that we,CHARLESO.ERWIN and 
FRANK WINKLER, of Kansas City, Wyandotte 
county, Kansas, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Type-Writers, of 
Which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part hereof. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
spacing attachments for typewriters. 
The object of the invention is to provide an 
attachment applicable as illustrated, to a va 
riety of typewriters in general use, and by 
which the printing cylinder may be held at 
any desired point of rotation. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
Vide an attachment, the operation of which 
to hold the cylinder at any desired point of 
rotation, will automatically disengage the act 
llating andlocking-pawls of the machine from 
the ratchet-wheel, and the operation of which 
to release the cylinder will allow said pawls 
to resume their normal and original positions. 
This invention is designed as an improve 
ment over the application on improvements 
in typewriters, filed March 31, 1893, Serial No. 
468,508, and patented June 20, 1893, No. 499,- 
723, and is designed to cover a construction, 
which with slight modifications in the matter 
of attachment, will be applicable to all of the 
principal typewriters in general use. 
With these objects in view, the invention 
consists in certain peculiar and novel features 
of Construction and combinations of parts, as 
Will be hereinafter described and claimed. 
In order that our invention may be fully 
understood, we will proceed to describe it 
With reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
... Figure 1, is an end view of the upper por 
tion of a typewriter, and showing ourim 
provements applied thereto, and also showing 
the actuating and locking-pawls in engage 
ment with the ratchet-wheel of the printing 
cylinder. Fig. 2, is a similar view, but show 
ing in this instance our attachments in a dif 
ferent operative position, and also showing 
the actuating and locking-pawls held out of 
engagement with the ratchet-wheel of the 
printing-cylinder. Fig. 3, is a front view of 
the printing-cylinder, and showing the trav 
eling-frame broken away, and also showing 
our attachment partially in vertical section. 
Fig. 4, is a perspective view of one end of our 
attachment, and Fig. 5, is a perspective view 
of the other end of our attachment. Fig. 6, 
is a perspective view of one end of the print 
ing-cylinder, and showing the penetrable-disk 
carried thereby, and also showing the line 
indicator. Fig. 7, is a face view of one end of 
a slightly modified form of our attachment; 
this form consisting simply in the reversed 
positions of the levers, and is applicable to a 
particular style of Remington. Fig. 8, is an 
edge view of the same. 
In the drawings, 1 designates the upper 
part of the framework of a typewriter, and 2 
designates the printing-cylinder, which is rev 
olubly journaled between the end-bars 3 of 
the traveling-carriage or frame. Secured to 
the right-hand end of the cylinder is the 
ratchet-wheel 4, and pivotally mounted upon 
the front longitudinal rod 5 of the traveling 
carriage, and adjacent to one end is the hand 
lever 6, which is formed at its pivotal point 
with the upwardly extending arm or projec 
tion 7, which in turn pivotally carries at its 
upper end the actuating-pawl 8, the free end 
of which engages the ratchet-wheel 4. 
Pivotally mounted upon the rear longitudi 
nal rod (not shown) of the traveling-carriage 
in the usual manner, is the locking-pawl 9, 
the depending tooth 10 of which engages the 
ratchet-wheel 4 also. This locking-pawl is 
provided with the forwardly projecting arm 
11, by which it is raised when desiring to ro 
tate the cylinder backward, and also with the 
depending lug 12. A spiral-spring13, is con 
nected at its upper and lower ends to a Screw 
bolt carried by said lug, and to a hook 14 car 
ried upon the adjacent end bar of the travel 
ing-carriage; the tendency of this spring be 
ing to hold the locking-pawl into engagement 
with the ratchet-wheel 4, and therefore pre 
vent the rotation of the cylinder. A cam-le 
wer 15 is pivotally carried at the inner side of 
a vertical extension 16, formed at and pro 
jecting upwardly from the front end of the 
end-bar of the traveling-carriage adjacent to 
the ratchet-wheel; said cam lever being adapt 
? ? 
2 ? 
35 
45 
So 
95 
90 
2 
508,426 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
ed to limit the upward movement of the hand 
lever and therefore the revoluble movement 
of the printing-cylinder. 
The construction described in the forego 
ing is common in the Caligraph typewriter. 
We will now proceed to describe the con 
Struction and operation of our improved at 
tachments. 
A pair of approximately T-shaped frames 
are inverted and have their horizontal por 
tions 17 screw-bolted to the outer side of the 
end-bars 3 of the traveling-frame or carriage, 
and have their vertical portions or arms 18, 
projecting upwardly a suitable distance be 
yond the upper side of the cylinder. Longi 
tudinally aligned holes or apertures 19 are 
formed in the upper ends of said vertical 
arms, and a slide-rod 20 has its opposite ends 
passed through said holes or apertures and 
carries at its right-hand end the head or but 
ton 21. A leaf-spring 22 is secured at its 
lower end to the outer side of the vertical arm 
at the left-hand end of the cylinder, and has 
its upper and free end bearing against the 
adjacent end of the slide-rod; the tendency 
of Said spring being to force the slide rod in 
the direction of the arrow Fig. 3, and to lock 
the printing-cylinder from revoluble move 
ment as hereinafter explained. 
Adjustably secured by means of the set 
Screw 23 upon the slide rod 20 is the hub or 
tubular extension 24 formed at the upper end 
of a vertical bar 25, and formed to extend 
transversely of the lower end of said bar or 
secured thereto, is the horizontal bar 26. 
Projecting inwardly from said bar 26- and 
near its opposite ends are the projections 
27 which carry at their inner ends the ver 
tically arranged and semi-circular plate 28. 
This plate is formed at the middle of its lower 
margin with the semi-circular recess 29, which 
is arranged astride of the axle of the print 
ing-cylinder, and is also formed or provided 
With a series of teeth or points 30 at its inner 
side, the object of which will be presently ex 
plained. To guide this frame in its nuove 
ment toward and from the cylinder as herein 
after referred to, a hole or aperture 31 is 
formed through the horizontal bar 26 and the 
lower end of the bar 25, and engages the 
horizontally arranged guide-pin 32, which 
projects inwardly from the adjacent vertical 
bar 18. 
A penetrable-disk 33 formed in any suit 
able manner and of any suitable material is 
Secured by Screw-bolts 34 or other suitable 
means to the end plate 36 of the cylinder, 
and is also formed with a central hole or ap 
erture 35 which surrounds the tubular exten 
sion or hub-portion 37 of said end plate. 
Secured by means of the set screw 38 upon 
the slide-rod 20, and adjacent to its right 
hand end, is the sleeve or collar 39, and said 
sleeve or collar is formed at one side with the 
outwardly projecting arm or extension 40, the 
Outer or free end of which is beveled at 41 at 
its outer side. 
Formed integral with or secured to the ver 
tical portion 18 at the right hand end of the 
cylinder, is the extension 42, and pivotally 
mounted upon the screw-bolt 43 near the up 
per end of said extension and at its outer 
side is the lever 44; said lever being formed 
with an extension or toe-portion 45 which is 
arranged approximately at right angles to 
the body-portion of the lever and projects 
forwardly, and said lever is also formed at 
its inner side with the longitudinal recess or 
groove 46, and with the beveled surface 47 at 
its rear margin which leads to said longitudi 
nal groove or recess. It will thus be seen 
from the foregoing description, that when the 
lever 44 is in the position shown in Figs. 2, 
4 and 7, the spring 22 bearing at the left 
hand end of the slide-rod 20, holds the lock 
ing-frame into engagement with the pene 
trable-disk and prevents the rotatable move 
ment of the cylinder. Now, by pressing upon 
the button 21, the slide-rod may be moved to 
the position shown in Fig. 3, and the locking 
frame is disengaged from the penetrable 
disk, and by grasping the printing-cylinder 
with the left-hand it may be rotated either 
forward or backward to any point desired, 
and immediately locked in said position by 
releasing the pressure upon the buttoll 21, 
which allows the spring 22 to operate the 
slide - rod and re-engage the locking frame 
with the penetrable-disk. 
Pivotally mounted upon the screw-bolt 48 
which also passes through the extension 42, 
is a lift-lever 49, said lever being provided 
at its rear end with the inwardly projecting 
in or rod 50, which rests against the under 
side of the locking-pawl 9, and in rear of the 
depending lug 12 and tooth 10 thereof. The 
forward end of said lever is provided with 
the upwardly projecting toe or extension 51, 
and is also formed inward of said toe with the 
shoulder 52. The lift-lever 49 is also recessed 
in its front end and lower side to form the 
shoulder 53, which bears upon the outwardly 
projecting end 55 of a lever 54; said lever be 
ing pivotally mounted upon a bolt 56, and 
having its opposite end 57 extending in 
wardly for a suitable distance, and adapted 
to contact when desired with the under side 
of and lift the actuating-pawl 8 out of en 
gagement with the ratchet-wheel 4. When 
the locking attachments are in their nor 
mal position as shown in Figs. 1 and 3, the 
beveled end 41, of the arm or extension 40 
of the sleeve or collar 39 carried upon the 
slide-rod, is in engagement with the longi 
tudinal groove or recess 46 thereof, and the 
lower side of the toe-portion of said lever 
rests upon the upper end of the toe or exten 
sion 51 of the lift-lever 49, and the actuating 
and locking-pawls are in engagement with 
the ratchet-wheel 4, and are adapted when 
the hand-lever 6 is operated to operate in the 
usual manner, to rotate and hold the cyl 
inder, respectively. When the lever 44 is 
pulled forwardly to the position shown in 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
7 C 
75 
95 
od 
IO5 
IO 
I I5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
506,426 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
3 ? 
35 
V 
Figs, 2 and 4, the toe-portion 45 pivotally op 
erates the lift-lever 49 to the position shown, 
and rests upon the shoulder 52 formed in 
Ward of the toe-portion 51 of the lift-lever, 
and the toe-portion 51 of the lift-lever, pro 
jecting upwardly at the outer end of the toe 
portion 45 of the hand lever 44, prevents the 
accidental displacement thereof. The piv 
otal operation of the lift-lever caused by the 
movement of the hand-lever 44 as explained, 
causes the pin 50 to raise the locking-pawl 
from engagement with the ratchet-wheel, 
and at the same time the downward move 
ment of the forward end of the lift-lever 
bearing upon the outwardly projecting end 
55 of the lever 54, pivotally operates said 
lever and causes the inner end 57 thereof to 
raise the actuating-pawl from engagement 
with the ratchet-wheel at the same time that 
the locking-pawl is raised. As soon as the 
hand-lever 44 is operated of course, the spring 
22 moves the locking-frame into engagement 
with the penetrable-disk, and by pressing 
upon the button or head 21 as before ex 
plained, the locking-frame may be disen 
gaged therefrom and the cylinder rotated 
either backward or forwardly to any point 
desired. To move and hold said locking 
frame out of engagement with the locking 
disk, the lever 44 is operated to the position 
shown in Figs. 1 and 3, and the beveled 
Surface 47 coming in contact with the bev 
eled end 41 of the collar or sleeve 39, causes 
Said rod to move and disengage the locking 
frame from the penetrable-disk, and at the 
Same time the actuating and locking-pawls 
resume their normal position into engage 
ment with the ratchet-wheel, and are ready 
for operation in the usual manner. 
With most of typewriters in general use, 
the line of printing is a slight distance from 
the scale bar 58, and to insure that the cylin 
der beingrotated will bestopped at theproper 
point, an indicator-finger 59 is provided; said 
indicator-finger being secured upon one of 
the paper guide-plates 60, and directly in line 
With the point at which the type levers come 
in contact with the ribbon. 
From the above description, it will be seen 
that we have produced attachments for type 
writers, by which the cylinder may be moved 
to and stopped at any desired point of rota 
tion, so that when printed blanks or ruled pa 
per are used therewith, the printing may be 
done directly upon the line thereof or at any 
point desired; also attachments which are 
easily operated and which are simple, strong, 
durable and comparatively inexpensive of 
construction. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a typewriter, the combination with 
the traveling-frame, and a rotatable print 
ing cylinder mounted therein, and having a 
ratchet wheel upon one end and a penetra 
ble disk upon the other end, and a spring 
actuated locking-pawl engaging said ratchet 
wheel, and a lever pivotally carried by the 
frame or carriage, andan actuating-pawl piv 
otally carried by said lever and engaging the 
ratchet-wheel, of a frame carried by the end 
bars of the traveling-carriage, and a slide-rod 
carried in the upper ends of said frame, a 
locking-frame carried by said slide-rod and 
adapted to engage the penetrable-disk, and a 
presser-spring carried by one end of the frame 
and bearing upon the adjacent end of the 
slide-rod to hold this locking-frame into en 
gagement with the penetrable-disk, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In a typewriter, the combination with 
the traveling-frame, and a rotatable print 
ing-cylinder mounted therein, and having a 
penetrable-disk at one end, of a frame carried 
by each end bar of the traveling-frame and 
a spring-actuated slide-rod connecting and 
adapted to operate in the upper ends of said 
frames, and a locking-frame carried by said 
slide-rod engaging the penetrable-disk of the 
printing-cylinder, and a sleeve or collar car 
ried by said slide-rod, and having an arm or 
projection, and a lever pivotally carried by 
one of the frames and adapted to contact 
with the arm or projection of the sleeve or 
collar and move the slide-rod so that the lock 
ing-disk carried thereby, will be disengaged 
from the penetrable-disk, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In a type-writer, the combination with 
the traveling-frame and a rotatable printing 
cylinder having a ratchet-wheel upon one end 
and a penetrable-disk upon the other, and a 
spring-actuated locking-pawl engaging said 
ratchet-wheel, and a lever pivotally carried 
by the traveling-frame and an actuating-pawl 
pivotally carried by said lever and engaging 
the ratchet-wheel also, of a frame carried by 
the end-bars of the traveling-carriage, and a 
slide-rod carried in the upper ends of said 
frame, a locking-frame carried by said slide 
rod and adapted to engage the penetrable 
disk, and a presser-spring carried by the 
frame and bearing against one end of the 
slide-rod, and a sleeve or collar mounted upon 
said slide-rod and having an arm or projec 
tion, and a lever pivotally carried by the 
frame, and having a groove or recess therein, 
and also having a forward extension or toe 
portion at its lower end, and a lift-lever piv 
otally carried upon said frame and having a 
pin or rod bearing against the under side of 
the locking-pawl, and a lever also pivotally 
carried by the frame and having an out 
wardly extending end projecting below the 
lift-lever, and an inwardly extendingend pro 
jecting below the actuating-pawl, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a type-writer, the combination with 
the traveling frame, and a rotatable printing 
cylinder mounted therein, and having a ratch 
et-wheel upon one end, and a spring-actuated 
locking-pawl pivotally carried by said frame 
and engaging the ratchet-wheel, and a hand 
- 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
95 
IOS 
O 
II 5 
I 25 . 
13c 
506,42 
I. ? 
lever, and an actuating-pawl pivotally car 
ried thereby and engaging the ratchet-wheel 
also, of a frame carried by the end-bars of the 
traveling-carriage, and a second hand-lever 
pivotally carried upon one end of said frame, 
and a lift-lever also pivotally carried by said 
frame, and having an arm or rod projecting 
beneath the locking-pawl, and a lever pivot 
ally carried at the front edge of said frame 
and having one end projecting beneath the 
actuating-pawl, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a typewriter, the combination with the 
traveling-frame, and a rotatable printing-cyl 
inder mounted therein, and having a ratchet 
Wheel upon one end, and a spring actuated 
locking-pawl pivotally carried by said frame 
and engaging the ratchet wheel, and a hand 
lever and an actuating-pawl pivotally carried 
thereby and engaging the ratchet wheel also, 
of a frame carried by the end-bars of the trav 
eling-carriage, and a second-hand lever piv 
2 ? 
 
otally carried at one end of said frame and 
having a forward extension or toe-portion, and 
a lift-lever also pivotally carried at the same 
end of the frame, and having an arm or pin 
projecting beneath the spring-actuated lock 
ing-pawl, and having an extension or toe-por 
tion formed at its outer end and a shoulder 
adjacent thereto, and a lever pivotally car 
ried upon the same end of the frame, and 
having one end projecting beneath the for 
ward end of the lift-lever and its opposite 
end projecting beneath the actuating-pawl, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES O. ERWIN. 
FRANK WINKLER. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
MAUD FITZPATRICK, 
G. Y. THORPE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506526.txt	(No Model,) 
No. 506,526, 
 
O. H. MUNTZ, 
BRIDIE BIT, 
Patented Oct. 10, 1893. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIVER H. MUNTZ, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HARRY D. 
SQUIRES, OF SAME PLACE. 
BRD EBIT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,526, dated October 10, 1893. 
Application filed May 20, 1893, serial No. 474,945. (No model.) 
Jo it appertains to make and use the same. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OLIVER H. MUNTZ, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
5 Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Bridle-Bits; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
My invention relates to improvements in 
bridle bits. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and durable bit adapted to be used in 
I5 connection with a chin strap, or the extension 
of a check rein, and as a substitute for the 
ordinary check rein for holding up the horse's 
head. It is illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings in which 
Figure 1, is a front view in elevation of the 
bridle bit showing chin strap in connection 
there with; Fig. 2 a plan view; Figs. 3 and 4 
details of bit ring. 
Referring to the drawings A, is the mouth 
25 piece made of rubber, leather, iron or any 
other suitable material. 
B, is a broken cheek ring having at each of 
its ends a flange D, and from one of its ends a 
slotted arm E. The ends of the cheek ring 
3o are connected by a post C. The mouth piece 
A, has looped ends a', which are attached 
to and swing on the posts C, and are held 
between the flanges D. 
G, is the slot in the pendent arm E. 
H, is a chin strap of the usual kind, being 
Somewhat broader in the middle than at its 
ends, and is provided with metal loops i, or 
other suitable means at its ends, to connect 
with a check rein, not shown. The slots G, of 
4o the arms E, are constructed of such size that 
the chin strap can readily pass through them. 
35 
The arms E, extend out a short distance on 
either side of the animals mouth, the chin 
strap passing up through the arms. This 
causes that strap to be held in the desired 45 
position on the animals chin. The ends of 
the chin strap after passing through the arms 
E, are attached to the check rein. It will be 
seen more particularly by reference to the 
plan view that the slotted arms extend for- 5o 
ward from the cheek rings and at right an 
gles to the bit, and that the slots are open at 
right angles to the posts connecting the cheek 
rings, so that the chinstrapis placed under the 
chin of the animal forward of the bit with its 55 
buckled ends extending up through said slots 
and then connecting with the check reins 
which come down on the front of the horse's 
head between its ears. By this construction 
a substitute for the ordinary check rein is ob 
tained and the horse's head held up with 
greater ease and the pain to the animal at 
tendant upon the use of the ordinary check 
rein, thus obviated. 
I claim is 
Having thus described 
A check device consisting, in combination 
with a bridle bit or mouth piece, of cheek 
rings provided with slotted arms extending 
forward from said rings along the nose of the 
animal and at right angles to the bit and the 
ring posts, and a strap placed under the chin 
of the animal with its ends passed up through 
said slotted arms and adapted to connect with 
the check rein, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
my invention, what 65 
75 
OLIVER H. MUNTZ. 
Witnesses: 
W. G. DOOLITTLE, 
H. W. MITCHELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506626.txt	 
No. 506,626, 
Patented 00t. 10, 1893, 
(No Model.) 
 
A. H. CLARK, 
BICYCLE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. H. CLARK, OFFOND DULAC, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALE TO LOUIE H. CLARK, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
BICYCLE. 
v 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,626, dated October 10, 1898. 
Application filed June 30, 1892, Serial No. 438,528, (No model.) 
V 
To div/4 zvhom, tb may eoneerin: 
Beit known that I, ALEXANDER. H. CLARK, 
of Fond du Lac, inthe county of Fond du Lac 
and State of Wisconsin, have invented cer 
tain new and useful improvements in Bicy 
cles; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
bicycles, the object being to provide simple 
and efficient means whereby to propel a bi 
cycle by hand power. 
A further object is to so construct and ar 
range the propelling devices that they may 
be readily started regardless of their relative 
positions to each other at the time of starting. 
A further object is to construct and ar 
range the propelling mechanism in such man 
ner that the machine can be propelled at va 
rious lengths of strokes of the operating han 
dle bars or levers. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion and combinations and arrangements of 
parts as hereinafter described and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of a bicycle having my improve 
ments applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a detached 
view of the propelling mechanism partly in 
section. Fig. 3 is a plan view illustrating the 
brace which supports the vertical oscillatory 
shaft. Fig. 4 is a detail view of the extensi 
ble handle bars or operating levers. Fig. 5 
is a detail view illustrating the clutch de 
vices of the propelling mechanism. Fig. 6 is 
an end view of the Seat. 
A represents the spines of the machine, 
which carry the rear wheel B at their rear 
ends, and C is the front fork which carries 
the front wheel D. The front fork terminates 
at its top in a shanka, at the base of which 
a shoulder b is made for the Support of a 
sleeve D', which encircles the shanka. To 
- this sleeve the upper, forward ends of the 
spines are secured. 
To the upper end of the shanka an armor 
handle Dis secured, whereby to guide the 
machine, said arm or handle being retained 
" 
... 
in place by means of a nut c and washer c', 
located at the upper extremity of said shank. 
Plates or arms d are located between the 
spines A in proximity to the horizontal por- 55 
tion thereof and supports a journal box E, 
through which the lower end of a vertical 
shaft F passes and in which a number of 
balls e are located and adapted to encircle 
said shaft. The interior wall of the journal 6o 
box Eis screw-threaded for the reception of 
a similarly threaded annular cap E adapted 
to retain the balls e in place in the box. The 
vertical shaft F extends upwardly to a point 
within easy reach of the rider, where it is pro- 65 
vided with handlebars or levers G, the details 
of construction of which will be explained far 
ther on. 
Projecting from the sleeve D'are socketed 
bosses fin which two curved brace arms f' to 
are secured, the other ends of said brace arms 
being inserted in socket bosses f' projecting 
from a journal boxE, through which the ver. 
tical shaft F passes. By this means the up 
per end of the vertical shaft will be supported. 75 
In the box E, antifriction balls e are in 
serted and their escape is prevented by means 
of an annular cape adapted to screw into 
the box Eas shown in Fig. 1. 
A at a point in rear of the vertical shaft F, 
is a cross bar g, to which a depending spin 
dle his secured, and on the spindle ha pull 
ley or wheel his loosely mounted and pro 
vided with groovesi, j. The pulley or wheel 85 
h' is provided in one face with a recess h9, in 
which balls hare located, being retained in 
place by an annular cap h adapted to screw 
into the recess in the pulley. 
wheel or pulley hand adapted to oscillate 
with said wheel or pulley, is a pinion or gear 
wheel k which is supported on the shaft by 
means of a cap ke' which is screwthreaded to 
screw into the recess kin the lower face of 95 
the gear wheel or pinion ke, and beneath the 
latter a nut k is screwed on the spindle-mo 
tion being imparted to said pinion from a 
segment lc carried by the lower end of the 
shaft F, ballski being inserted in the recess k?, roo 
Depending from the spines A at points lo 
cated forwardly from the axle of the rear 
Mounted loosely on the spindleh below the 9o 
Secured to and extending across the spines 8o 
? ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
506,626 
- 
7? 
75 
wheel of the machine, are brackets l which 
support fixed shafts or spindles m. On the 
spindles m, sprocket wheels o are loosely 
mounted and provided with recesses for the 
accommodation of balls o'. The inner faces 
of the sprocket wheels O are made with re 
cesses ofor the reception of disks p, which 
latter are loosely mounted on the spindle n. 
The disks p are made with V-shaped sockets 
p' in which dogs pare loosely inserted, said 
dogs being adapted to have frictional contact 
with the annular walls p of the recesses o' 
when the disks p are oscillated in one direc 
tion and to be free from contact with said 
walls when the disks are oscillated in the re 
verse direction. Thus when the disks p are 
made to turn in One direction the sprogket 
wheels o will be made to rotate in one direc 
tion. 
Loosely mounted on the spindles m, and se 
cured to or made integral with the disks p, 
are pulleys q, each having a spiral groove q', 
in which one end of ropes or chains r, r are 
secured and adapted to work. The ropes or 
chains are passed over the wheel or pulley 
h', and secured and adapted to work in the 
grooves i,j, thereof. To the inner face of 
each pulley q, is a coiled springs which en 
circles the spindle n and at its other end is 
secured to said spindle. When the disks p 
are turned to propel the sprocket wheels o, 
these springs serve to assist in returning 
them to their starting point. The sprocket 
wheels o are adapted to transmit motion to 
sprocket wheels t carried by the rear wheel 
of the machine, through the medium of a 
sprocket chain it. From this construction 
and arrangement of parts it will be seen that 
when the vertical shaft F is oscillated by the 
manipulation of the handle bars or levers G 
the same motion will be imparted to the seg 
ment E, and from it to the pinion k and pull 
ley or wheel h", from which motion is im 
parted to the clutches through the medium 
of the ropes or chains r, r". 
By means of the driving mechanism above 
described the rear or drive wheel will be made 
to revolve rapidly with a comparatively small 
amount of exertion on the part of the rider. 
A seat post 1 projects upwardly in proxim 
ity to the rear wheel of the machine, to the 
upper end of which a hollow goose neck 2 is 
adjustably secured. The horizontal portion 
of the goose neck or support 2 is flattened and 
made with an elongated slot 3. A plate 5 is 
located on the flattened portion of the goose 
neck and adjustably secured thereto by 
means of a bolt 6 passing through the elon 
gated slot 3. Secured at its forward end to 
the plate 5 is a curved spring 7, to the free 
end of which the rear end of the seat 8 is se 
cured. Secured to the plate 5 at a point be 
tween its ends is a semi-elliptical spring 9, 
said spring being held by the bolt 6. To the 
ends of the semi-elliptical spring 9, the lat 
erally projecting portions of the Seat are se 
cured. 
The handle bar or lever G is preferably 
made tubular and is provided in its upper 
portion with elongated slots G', which extend 
from points in proximity to the vertical shaft 
F to the extremities of the handle bars G. 
Within the hollow handlebars G are tubular 
bars G, on the top faces of which notched 
plates G are secured and adapted to project 
into or through the elongated slots G. 
A. 
ferrule G is placed on the outer extremity 
of each handle bar G and provided with a 
recess G 
for the accommodation of the 
notched plates G. 
On the outer ends of the 
bars G, handles G are secured. Secured to 
the vertical shaft F is a spring or springs G", 
having teeth G8 at their outer ends adapted 
to engage the notched plate G. 
By this 
means the handle bars are made extensible, 
and they can be readily made longer or 
shorter by the rider while riding. The bars 
G will be prevented from turning in the 
tubular bars G by the notched plate Gen 
M 
tering the elongated slots G'. 
The machine is very simple in construction, 
easy riding and effectual in the performance 
of all its functions. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a bicycle, the combination with a 
frame, drive wheel having sprocket wheels 
on its axle, loosely mounted spocket wheels, 
chains extending from the latter around the 
wheels On the axle, and clutch mechanism for 
alternately engaging the loosely mounted 
sprocket wheels, of an upwardly projecting 
oscillatory shaft having handles at the upper 
end and a segment at its lower end, a pulley 
or drum, a flexible connection extending from 
the latter to the clutches, and a gear wheel 
connected with the pulley or drum, its teeth 
adapted to be engaged by the teeth of the 
segment, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a bicycle, the combination with the 
spines, of a journal box carried thereby, balls 
located within said journal box, a vertical 
shaft passingthrough Said journal box, a jour 
nal box having balls therein through which 
the upper end of the vertical shaft passes, 
braces connecting the last mentioned journal 
box with the shank of the front fork of the 
machine, and means for transmitting motion 
from said shaft to the rear wheel of the ma 
chine, substantially asset forth. 
3. In a bicycle, the combination with the 
spines and the front fork, of a vertical shaft, 
a journal box for said shaft located near its 
upper end and having balls therein, curved 
brace arms connecting said journal box with 
the shank of the front fork and means for 
transmitting motion from said vertical shaft 
to the rear wheel of the machine, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. In a bicycle, the combination with a shaft 
or upright, of tubular horizontal bar at the 
upper end thereof, said bar having elongated 
slots therein, notched bars located with said 
35 
45 
55 
95 
Co 
Io5 
II. ? 
II 5 
I25 
I30 
5 
2 ? 
 
506,626 
tubular bar, handles secured to said notched 
bars, and a spring secured to the shaft or up 
right and having teeth therein to engage the 
notched bar, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
5. In a bicycle, the combination with a shaft 
or upright, of a tubular handlebar at the up 
per end thereof, said bar having elongated 
slots therein, bars located with said tubular 
bar and adapted to slide therein, handlesse 
cured to the sliding bars, a notched plate se 
cured to said sliding bar and adapted to pro 
ject into the slots in the handle bars, a spring 
O 
 
secured to the shaft or upright and having 
teeth to engage the notched plate, and ferrules I5 
at the ends of the handle bars, said ferrules 
having recesses for the accommodation of the 
notched plates, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib- 20 
ing witnesses. 
ALEXANDER. H. CLARK. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP B. WAHIL, 
B. B. CLAWSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506726.txt	(No Model.) 
J. K. PURINTON. 
DISH CEANER, 
 
No. 506,726, 
Patented Oct. 17, 1893. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JUDSON K. PURINTON, OF DES MOINES, IOWA. 
DISH - CLEAN E. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,726, dated October 17, 1893. 
Application filed January 21, 1893, Serial No. 459,094 (No model) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JUDSON K. PURINTON, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resid 
ing at Des Moines, in the county of Polk and 
State of Iowa, have invented a Dish-Washer, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
cheap, simple and durable device in which 
Soileddishes, &c., may be placed in the proper 
position, and securely held while being man 
ually moved in a vertical plane through a 
vessel containing hot water. 
To this end my invention consists in the con 
struction, arrangement and combination of 
the various parts of the device as hereinafter 
fully set forth, pointed out in my claims and 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view through 
the complete device. Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
tional yiew of the same at right angles to the 
view shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a vertical sec 
tional view of a modified form of the device, 
and Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the dish 
holding device. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings 
the reference letter A is used to designate a 
Water tight vessel approximately square in 
horizontal section and of a comparatively 
great height. 
A designates a rectangular frame open at 
its top and bottom and of a size and shape 
adapted to be moved vertically within the 
vessel A. 
A are bails pivotally attached to the end 
portions of the frame A and adapted to meet 
above the said frame. 
B designates a wire netting or perforated 
bottom permanently fixed in the frame A* to 
form a bottom therefor and to produce a tray 
adapted to retain and carry and drain dishes. 
C designates a cover for the tray A* com 
posed of the two 
pieces C and the metal. 
spring rods C which are secured to said end 
pieces extended straight upwardly therefrom, 
and across the top of the frame, thus forming 
a device which may readily be detached from 
the tray A and so arranged that plates, sau 
O 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
cers, and like dishes may be placed between 
the rods C of the cover C and be held in a 5o 
vertical position so as to be the more readily 
cleaned. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 3 only 
one bail is used which is attached to the cen 
tral portion of the frame. 
In the practical operation of the device, the 
vessel A is first filled with hot water, some of 
the soiled dishes placed in the tray A and the 
spring cover C fixed in it and then such dishes 
as may be slipped between the rods Care 
placed in the vessel A and moved vertically 
therein by means of the bails A, thus caus 
ing the water to come in forcible contact with 
the dishes contained therein. The elasticity 
of the spring rods C allows the cover to ex 
pand and engage the tray. 
Having thus described my invention, What 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States therefor, is 
1. An improved dish washing machine com 
prising a suitable open-topped water-tight 
vessel, a frame or tray open at its top and pro 
vided with a perforated bottom and adapted 
to slide within the vessel in a vertical plane, 
a detachable and vertically adjustable cover 
for the frame composed of spring rods at 
tached to side plates and extending across 
the frame with spaces between them, and 
means whereby the tray may be operated in 
a vertical plane. 
2. An improved dish washing machine com 
prising a suitable water vessel A, a frame A' 
open at its top and bottom and adapted to 
slide within the vessel A in a vertical plane, 
a perforated bottom in said frame, a detach 
able cover C for the frame A composed of 
rods attached to side plates and extending 
across the frame with spaces between them, 
as set forth, and two bails attached to the 
ends of the frame A* to meet above said frane 
for the purposes stated. 
75 
90 
JUDSON K. PURINTON. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. ORWIG, 
THOMAS G. ORWIG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506826.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 506,826, 
J. W. MARTIN 
WIRE AND PICKET FENCE MACHINE, 
Patented Oct. 17, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NS. R N , 
| SAS Ese, / VS 
11 SNS 
r - . 
- 
- - - 
1 
2 
s 
wVw. 
sy 
was Ava Wy NV, W W 
Amity mise 
 
 
 
 
A. S. 
s 
% NS A42. 
A2 
Af 
7A 
t 
. 
727-2772e27-Z222222 
22e222-94 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JEROME W. MARTIN, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI. 
WIRE AND - PICKET-FENCE MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,826, dated October 17, 1893. 
Application filed June 6, 1893, Serial No. 476,780, (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JEROME W. MARTIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Kan 
sas City, in the county of Jackson and State 
of Missouri, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Fence-Machines; and 
Ido hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref. 
erence being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to 
the letters of reference marked thereon. 
The present invention has relation to that 
class of fence machines in which suitable 
means are provided for twisting the strands 
of Wire between which the wooden pickets 
are held, and the object of the invention is 
to improve this class of machines in the sev 
eral details of construction whereby greater 
effectiveness is obtained and a more perfect 
Operation of the machine is secured and con 
Sequently a perfect, strong and durable picket 
fence is expeditiously constructed. These 
several objects are attained by the machine 
Constructed substantially as shown in the 
drawings and herein described and claimed. 
Figure 1 of the drawings represents a per 
spective view of the machine showing the 
Sprocket-chain in dotted lines; Fig. 2 a de 
tail sectional view on an enlarged scale of 
One of the twisting devices and its connec 
tions; Fig. 3 a detail perspective view on an 
enlarged scale of the tension device. 
In the accompanying drawings A and B 
represent two upright posts to which the op 
erating parts of the machine are connected, 
the former having a base or support C, to one 
end of which is suitably connected by bolta, 
and nut b, a link D, through which may be 
driven a stake c into the ground, said stake 
being shown in dotted lines. The stake se 
curely holds the base or support C in position 
on the ground and to form a connection be 
tween it and the post A, a brace rod E is pro 
vided, which rod at its upper end is connected 
to an eye-bolt d and at its lower end to an 
eye-plate e formed with the link D. 
The above described means provides a per 
fect and strong support for the post and also 
holds it firmly in position on the ground, the 
50 Square or rectangular form of the link with 
45 
35 
55 
the correspondingly formed stake preventing 
the base or support from moving laterally. 
To the sides of the post A are suitably se 
cured a plurality of bearing-plates f for sup 
porting the spools F, said spools having at 
one or both ends a flat sided opening or Socket 
g to receive a suitable crank-handle for turn 
ing them. The spools F at one end have 
ratchets h with which engage pawls piv 
oted upon the outer side of the plates f, as 
shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings. The spools 
F have a short wire k suitably connected 
thereto and to the outer ends of the wires are 
secured tension heads G which are provided 
upon their upper sides with buttons l around 
which are looped the wires in between which 
the pickets are held. These wires in extend 
through the twisting cylinders H which cyl 
inders are supported in bearing-rings I, said 
rings being preferably cast with brackets K 
for attaching them to the side of the post B. 
The twisting cylinders H have slots in through 
which the fence - wires extend and also 
sprocket teeth o with which engages a suit 
able sprocket chain, shown in dotted lines, 
Fig. 1. A rim L is connected to the cylinders 
H by means of bolt p so as to provide a cir 
cumferential flange to hold the cylinder in 
engagement with the bearing-ring I. 
In order to operate the several twisting de 
vices through the medium of the sprocket 
chain, a supplemental sprocket-cylinder Mis 
provided which has a suitable crank-handle 
N for turning it and is supported in a suit 
able bracket O secured to the post B. 
Any suitable and well known means may 
be provided for operating the sprocket chain 
and twisting cylinders, and therefore I do not 
wish to confine the invention to any special 
form of mechanism. The bearing rings I as 
will be noticed are scalloped on their edges 
or a portion of their edges cut away so as to 
reduce the frictional surface thereof when 
coming in contact with the twisting cylinders, 
thereby rendering the twisting cylinders more 
easily rotated. The looping of the wires in 
over the buttons l upon the tension heads G, 
holds the wires to a certain tension and when 
the wires are being twisted around the pick 
ets a sufficient slack is left necessary to pro- Ioo 
90 
75 
95 
 
506,826 
and Suitable means for operating the cylin 
ders, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. In a fence machine, the combination with 
suitable wire twisting devices, of a vertically 
movable slotted bar and lever for operating 
it to force the wires together while being 
twisted, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
3. A fence machine, consisting of a suitable 
post, a base or support to which it is con 
nected, a square or rectangular shaped link 
connected to the base or support to receive 
a stake, a brace-rod connecting there with and 
with the post, a plurality of tension devices 
connected to the post and consisting of a 
plurality of spools, pawls and ratchets, and 
tensionheads having buttons thereon, appst, 
a plurality of wire twisting devices connected 
thereto, and a vertical movable slotted bar 
for forcing the wires together while being 
twisted, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
35 
4 O 
45 
55 
JEROME W. MARTIN. 
Witnesses: 
W. F. JACKSON, 
H. S. DOWNEY. 
Cd 
5 
vide for the twist in the wires and which is 
taken up as the wires are twisted. A sliding 
bar P is provided which may be slotted its 
entire length or at intervals to allow the wires 
m to pass through as shown, which bar is 
supported on the post B by suitable hangers 
ir or by any other preferred means that will 
allow the vertical movement of the bar when 
the lever R to which the bar is pivoted, is de 
pressed. The hand-lever R is pivoted to the 
post Band by depressing the lever the slotted 
bar P is raised which brings the narrow por 
tion of the slot in contact with the wires and 
forces them together while the wires are be 
ing twisted, thereby facilitating the proper 
twisting of the wires when the twisting-cyl 
inders are being operated. The collars or 
rings L are detachably connected to the twist 
ing cylinders H by means of the bolts p so 
as to admit the ready removal of the cylin 
ders from the bearing-rings I by first remov 
ing the collars. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a fence machine, a plurality of wire 
twisting devices, consisting of suitable twist 
ing cylinders having slots for the wire to pass, 
removable rings or collars connected to the 
3o cylinders, stationary bearing rings for the 
cylinders, said rings having scaloped edges, 
25 
2 o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US506926.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 506,926, 
 
W. H. & E. G., MONROE. 
MOTOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 17, 1893. 
W. H. & E. G. MONROE. 
MOTOR. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
Patented 00t. 17, 1893. 
f G - al 
: 
(No Model.) 
No. 506,926, 
 
// 
N 
SSS 
 
4- |- 
22:2:2:2:2 
22 
S 
IT-TNo.T 
)) 
   
 
 
 
 
N N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. MONROE AND EDDY G. MONROE, OF SULLIVAN, ILLINOIS. 
MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 506,926, dated October 17, 1893. 
Application filed July 5, 1893, Serial No,479,613, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM. H. MoNROE 
and EDDY G. MONROE, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Sullivan, in the county of 
Moultrie and State of Illinois, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Mo 
tors for Churns; and we do declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
motors for churns and it consists in certain 
novel features hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In the annexed drawings, which fully illus 
trate our invention, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of a churn provided with our improve 
ments. Fig. 2 is a transverse vertical section 
of the same; and Fig. 3 is a detail view of the 
governor and brake for the operating mech 
allS. 
The churn body A may be of any desired 
Size Or material. On one side of the churn 
body, near the top of the same, we secure the 
frame E which consists of two plates F G 
which are secured together and to the churn 
body by suitable bolts and are held at the 
proper distance apart by the distance rods H, 
as shown. These plates provide bearings for 
the several shafts of the operating mechan 
ism and consequently obviate the necessity of 
forming such bearings in the side of the churn 
body which construction would wear away 
the body and permit the same to leak. The 
inner plate F is provided with a depending 
extension I in the lower extremity of which 
We journal a short shaft J having a pinion 
Kon its outer end and provided with an an 
nular socket L in its inner end. The socket 
L is engaged by the angular stub shaft M at 
One end of the dasher and the motion of the 
shaft J is thereby transmitted directly to the 
dasher so as to rotate the same. The oppo 
site end of the dasher is provided with a cy 
lindrical pintle or trunnion N which engages 
a bearing plate O secured on the inner face of 
the side of the churn body, as shown, 
The driving shaft Y is mounted in the 
plates FG and has mounted loosely upon it, 
a gear wheel Z, which meshes with the pinion 
K, as clearly shown. This gear wheel carries 
a pawl a which engages a ratchet wheel or 
disk b secured rigidly on the driving shaft SO 
that when the said shaft is moved in one di 
rection, no motion will be imparted to the 
driving wheel but when the shaft rotates in 
the opposite direction, the said wheel will be 
carried around therewith and the churn op 
erated. The driving shaft is rotated by means 
of a spring c which has one end secured to 
the said shaft and the other end secured to 
the inclosing drum d. When it is desired to 
operate the churn, a crank handle is fitted on 
the outer end of the driving shaft and the 
shaft thereby rotated so as to wind up and 
tighten the said spring. When the crank 
handle is released, of course, the spring un 
winds and rotates the driving shaft. 
In order that the motor may be operated 
with a steady and regular movement, We pro 
vide the governore which consists of a vibra 
tory arm if pivoted on the side of the churn 
body and having a weight g at its upper end 
and provided with an escapement pawl hat 
its lower end which engages an escapement 
wheelimounted within the frame e and driven 
from the driving shaft, as shown and as will 
be readily understood. In order that the 
mechanism may be stopped at any desired 
moment and a loss of energy exerted by the 
driving spring be thereby prevented, we ar 
range a cami adjacent to the lower end of 
the escapement lever and provide the said 
cam with a crank handle k projecting beyond 
the outer face of the frame E, as shown. By 
turning this cam inward so as bind against 
the escapement lever the said lever will be 
forced against the escapement wheel so 
strongly as to prevent the rotation of the 
same and consequently stop the operation of 
the device. 
It is thought the operation and advantages 
of our device will be readily understood from 
the foregoing description. The creamisplaced 
in the churn body and the driving spring 
wound, after which, the brake being removed, 
the dasher will be automatically rotated and 
the churning operation performed. When 
- 
95 
OO 
o 
25 
35 
45 
 
506,926 
the side of the churn body, an escapement 
pawl at the lower end of said arm engaging 
the escapement wheel, a weight secured to 20 
the upper end of the vibratory arm, and a 
cam mounted on the side of the churn body 
within the path of vibration of the vibratory 
arm and adapted to bind against the side of 
said arm, and provided with a handle extend- 25 
ing beyond the plate G. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
WILLIAM. H. MONROE. 
EDDY G. MON ROE. 
Witnesses: 
F. M. HARBOUGH, 
WILLIAM. H. WHITAKER. 
the churning operation is finished, the brake 
cam is turned so as to stop the machine as 
above described, when the dasher and the 
butter can be easily removed. 
By providing means for stopping the opera 
tion of the device at will we overcome the 
necessity of allowing the spring to run down 
and consequently we increase the efficiency 
and prolong the life of the spring. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
The combination with the plates FG se 
cured upon the side of the churn body, and 
the operating gearing mounted between said 
plates and having an escapement wheel i, of 
a vibratory arm pivoted near its lower end on 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507026.txt	(No Model.) 
F. W. MORGAN & R. WRIGHT. 
WALWED PNEUMATIC TIRE, 
No. 507,026, 
Patented Oct. 17, 1893. 
 
 
 
S. 
N N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
l H. 
S. s 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED W. MORGAN AND RUFUS WRIGHT, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
VALVED PNEUMATIC TRE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,026, dated October 17, 1893. 
Application filed October 26, 1892, Serial No. 450,069. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, FRED W.MORGAN and 
RUFUSWRIGHT, both citizens of the United 
States, residing at Chicago, in the county of 
Cook and State of Illinois, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvement in 
Walyed Pneumatic Tires, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Our invention relates to valved attach 
ments adapted to permit the tire to be inflated 
from time to time, as may be needed, and com 
prising means for temporarily connecting the 
inflatable air tube with an air pump, and a 
valve for opening and closing the duct be 
tWeen the air tube and the temporarily ap 
plied pump. 
In accordance with our invention, the in 
flatable tire tube has its inlet and outlet duct 
provided by a small flexible tube which is at 
One end attached to and arranged to project 
from the seating portion of the tire so as to 
project through a suitable opening in the 
Wheel rim and normally stand within the 
plane of the wheel. The valve device or mech 
anism is entirely comprised within a small 
tubular shell or casing which is removably 
fitted within the outer end portion of the 
Small flexible tube, and which is adapted for 
alternate connection with a cap and an air 
pump, the said cap being adapted to close the 
outer end of the shell and being provided 
upon its inner or under side with a stem 
which enters a threaded portion of the shell 
and Which is provided with a short thread 
ed Socket adapted to receive and engage a 
threaded portion of the valve stem. By such 
arrangement no screw threads whatsoever are 
eXposed to the open air when the shell is 
closed by the cap, and hence the cap can at 
any time be readily unscrewed, it being ob 
Served that if any exposure of the threads 
Were permitted, the corrosion or rusting of 
the thread would soon render the device ex 
tremely difficult to work. The length of this 
shell or casing is so proportioned with refer 
ence to its flexible containing tube that when 
the tire is applied to a wheel rim having an 
aperture through which the flexible tube is 
inserted, said tube can be bent at a point 
between the inner side of the wheel rim and 
the point at which the shell or casing termi 
nates within its containing tube; which ar 
rangement permits the outer end portion of 
the said flexible tube to be deflected laterally 
for the purpose of bringing the outer or inlet 
end of the shell or casing within convenient 
reach of the user of an air-pump and out of 
the way of the spokes of the wheel. By said 
arrangement the valve shell or casing which 
provides a valve chamber is not secured to 
the wheel tire but is removably inserted with 
in a flexible tube which latter is secured to 
the tire, and hence in placing the tire upon 
a wheel rim and removing it therefrom, in 
jury to the tire will not occur since the flexi 
ble tube will readily yield to any force tend 
ing to deflect it laterally, and in like man 
ner it can be deflected laterally when inflat 
ing the tire without injuring the latter. The 
shell or casing thus containing the entire 
valve mechanism and requisite for connec 
tion with an air-pump, can be economically 
made, readily applied, and as readily remov 
ed, and hence, in case of accident to the valve 
or its adjuncts, the shell or casing can be re 
moved and repaired or replaced by another, 
without sending the wheel or machine to a 
repair shop or factory, and since the device is 
small, compact, light, and cheap, the rider of 
a pneumatic machine can without inconven 
ience carry in his tool bag an extra shell or 
casing containing such valve mechanism, and 
thus be prepared for emergencies. 
In the accompanying drawings, -Figure 1. 
represents a pneumatic tire understood to 
comprise our invention. Fig. 2 shows on a 
larger scale a longitudinal central section 
through a portion of the flexible tube, and its 
contents, and illustrates the cap applied SO 
as to hold the valve closed, the remaining 
portion of the flexible tube, and a part of the 
tire, being shown in elevation. Fig. 3 shows 
the flexible tube and a portion of the tire in 
elevation. Fig. 4 is a central longitudinal 
section through the shell or casing and valve 
mechanism on a still larger scale, with the 
cap applied as in Fig. 2. Fig. 5 represents in 
elevation, the shell or casing, and the cap de 
tached there from. Fig. 6 is a central longi 
tudinal section through the shell or casing 
and valve mechanism, and illustrates the cap 
applied in a way to permit the valve to be 
opened for the purpose of deflating the tire. 
Fig. 7 is an end view of the shell or casing, 
O 
5 
. 3O 
35 
45 
So 
IOO 
 
507,026 
and further illustrates the provision of lugs ble tube B, it will terminate short of the in 
ner end of the tube as in Fig. 2, by which ar 
or lips at the inner end thereof. 
rangement, the tube portion between the 
The pneumatic tire A may be of any suit 
valve-casing and the tire can be bent so as to 
able or desired construction, and hence its 
permit the tube to be deflected for the con 
internal organization need not be shown. The 
venience of the user of an air pump. Said 
tire is provided with a short flexible air tube 
arrangement also permits the tube B to be 
B suitably attached to the tire and arranged 
united with the inflatable air tube prior to 
to project from the inner or seating portion 
the introduction of the latter within the 
of the tire and applied to admit air within 
sheath, and further permits the valve shellor 
the tire during the operation of blowing up 
casing to be readily introduced within, and 
the same. The small, cylindric shell or cas 
as readily removed from the flexible tube B. 
ing C is adapted for insertion within the outer 
By arranging the valve and spring within a 
end portion of the tube B, and contains a 
comparatively short shell or casing C which 
valve D, (shown in solid black,) a seat E for 
is also adapted both for the cap and for en 
the valve, and a spring F arranged to nor 
gagement with an air pump, the whole can 
mally seat or close the valve. The shell or 
be removed without disturbing the flexible 
casing is also provided at one end with pli 
tube B, and hence, should any accident hap 
able lips G which can be bent, inwardly so as 
pen to the valve, or its efficiency become in 
to form a seat or abutment for one end of the 
anywise impaired, it can be removed by the 
spring and thereby insure the retention of 
both the spring and the valve within the shell 
owner of the machine. 
To insure a close fit and firm retention of 
or casing. The shellis removably held within 
the shell or casing C within the flexible tube 
the tube Band hence after removing the shell 
B, the shell is provided with an annular rib 
from such tube, the pliable lips G can be bent 
of flange portion c' and one or more annular 
back so as to open the inner end of the shell 
grooves or depressions c, so that when the 
and thereby permit the spring and valve to 
shell is introduced within the tube, the latter 
be removed. 
will be stretched by the rib and thereby a 
The valve-stem d is threaded, and in con 
more secure engagement between the two, af 
nection with the shell or casing we provide a 
forded. The grooves c' also permit the tibe 
cap H which is formed with a milled head h 
to be more effectively wrapped or tied with 
and a centrally arranged stem h. The stem 
portion of the cap is adapted to fit within or 
cord or wire, which will depress the material 
of the tube at such points and thereby assist 
enter a short bore or socket c in one end of 
in making a secure and air tight joint. The 
the shell, which latter is provided with a par 
lugs or lips G while serving to hold the spring 
tition or partition-portion c'arranged between 
within the shell or casing, can be bent out as 
said socket and the main or valve chamber c 
in dotted lines, Fig. 4, in case it is found de 
which contains the valve and spring. 
sirable after detaching the shell or casing 
The partition or partition portion c' of the 
from the flexible tube, to remove the spring 
shell or casing is conveniently adapted to 
or spring and valve. The flexible tube can 
provide a seat E for the valve, and it is fur 
be applied to the inflatable air tube of the 
ther adapted to provide an air-passage c 
tire during the construction of the tire, and 
through which the valve-stem is also arranged 
can be equipped with the shell or casing C 
to extend. The neck or stem of the cap is 
containing the said valve devices or mechan 
provided with a short, threaded bore or socket 
ism, so that when applied to a wheel rim, it 
h, adapted to receive one end portion of the 
will simply be necessary to insert the flexible 
threaded valve stem. By such arrangement 
tube through a suitable aperture in said rim. 
the cap can be applied so as to cause the 
The flexible tube will therefore have its in 
threaded valve stem to engage inits threaded 
ner end portion in open communication with 
bore or socket h, and by then properly turn 
the interior of the tire, while its outer end 
ing the cap, the valve stem can be drawn in 
portion will contain a removable shellorcas 
a direction to draw and hold the valve firmly 
ing adapted for temporary connection with 
against its allotted seat (as in Fig. 4), and 
an air-pump and containing a complete valve 
also cause the cap to bind upon the flanged 
end c' of the shell, so as to prevent leakage. 
mechanism substantially as set forth. 
Broadly considered the feature of a check 
The cap can also be used for holding the valve 
open, in order to deflate the tire, and to such 
valve having a threaded stern and a locking 
nut thereon is not new, the same being em 
end the cap can be screwed back upon the 
bodied in Letters Patent of the United States 
valve stem in a direction away from the shell 
No. 276,121, of April 17, 1883, and No. 362,532, 
of casing as in Fig. 6, whereby, by then de 
of May 10, 1887, in each of which the auto 
pressing the cap, the valve will be opened. 
matically closing valve is locked by a nut on 
The bore or socket c of the shell or casing is 
also threaded, so that when the cap is re 
its threaded stem. 
moved as in Fig. 5, the threaded nozzle of an 
air pump can be screwed into said bore or 
socket, The length of the shell or casing C 
is such that when it is fitted within the flexi 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A pneumatic tire provided with a valve 
for the purpose set forth, a shell or casing in 
closing the valve and adapted for connection 
30 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
50,026 
3 
5 
with an airpump, a threaded valve-stem, and bent back to allow the spring to be removed, 
a cap for engaging the valve stem so as to substantially as described. 
hold the valve tight upon its seat, substan 
4. The combination with a pneumatic tire 
tially as described. 
provided with the fiexible tube B, of the shell 
2. The combination with a pneumatic tire 
C having at one end a threaded socket, the 20 
of the shell or casing C containing a valve, 
spring controlled valve confined within the 
and provided with an annular rib c, said 
shell or casing and having a threaded stem, 
and the cap H having a stem portion h' pro 
shell being fitted within a flexible tube B 
which connects with the interior of the tire, 
vided with a threaded socket, substantially 
Io Substantially as and for the purpose described. 
as and for the purpose described. 
3. The shell or casing C containing a valve 
FRED W. MORGAN. 
and Spring for the purpose set forth, and pro 
RUFUS WRIGHT. 
vided at one end with one or more pliablelips 
G which can be bent into position to retain 
I5 the spring within the shellor casing, and also 
W. D. MIDDLETON, 
CHAS. G. PAGE. 
- 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507126.txt	(No Model. 
L. J. HE WES. 
ORE ELEWATOR, 
No. 507,126. 
 
Patented Oct. 24, 1893. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS J. HEWES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE GATES IRON 
WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
ORE, ELEVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,126, dated October 24, 1898. 
Application filed January 25, 1893, Serial No. 459,642, (No model.) 
45 
55 
75 
carrying the load, most of the sagging of the 
belting on the upper side and the weight of 
the load is supported or taken up by means of 
the idlers E. 
It will be seen from the above description 
and an inspection of the drawings that during 
the operation of my improved elevator the 
entire transmission of power is dependent 
upon the main belt, and none of it is required 
of the second belt. Consequently all that the 
elevator proper, or the second belt D, has to 
do, is to carry the load plus its own weight, 
which enables me to use a much lighter belt 
in the elevator, as there is very little stretch 
ing, and the strength required of such a belt 
is only so much as will lift the load, and I 
am thereby enabled to use belting of two, 
three, or four ply. It will be seen also that 
during its operation my improved elevator 
has the benefit of the friction of a little over 
one-half the entire length of the main belt to 
help it in lifting the load, while in the present 
forms of construction it has merely a portion 
of the driving pulley, which causes the loss of 
a large percentage of the power used in oper 
ating the mechanism. 
I claim 
In stone elevators, the combination of a driv 
ing pulley, a supporting or driven pulley, a 
main belt for transmitting power between and 
around these pulleys, a supplementary belt 
having complete buckets secured thereto, 
forming the elevator proper, and supported 
on and driven by the main belt and around 
the same set of pulleys, and a third set of 
idler pulleys to assist in preventing the sag 
ging of the elevator, substantially as de 
scribed. 
LEWIS J. HEWES. 
Witnesses: 
H. W. HoyT, 
GEO. B. VANCE, 
- 
tion. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LEWIS J. HEWEs, of 
Chicago, Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Stone or Ore Ele 
vators, of which the following is a specifica 
The object of my invention is to make a 
stone elevator of such construction that stone 
or ore can be elevated with the least amount 
of belting and the least possible loss of fric 
tion, and it consists in the features, details 
and combinations hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In the drawings Figure 1 is a side elevation 
showing my improvements; Fig. 2, a perspec 
tive view of a portion of the elevator showing 
the bucket and belting used, and Fig. 3 a per 
spective view of a portion of one belt and the 
method of securing the bucket thereto. 
in the present forms of elevators in use, the 
buckets are secured to the main belting by 
means of rivets or bolts, and where the dis 
tance to lift the ore or stone is considerable 
there is more or less weakening of the belt by 
reason of these rivets, of which there are in 
such cases a large number. This permits the 
belting to stretch a great deal. In order to 
overcome this disadvantage the belting is usu 
ally made of from six to eight ply belts, and 
this of course renders it very expensive and 
does not entirely obviate the stretching or 
weakening of the belt, 
In constructing my improved elevator I use 
a main belt, A, which passes around the driv 
ing pulley B and the driven pulley C, and is 
primarily used for the transmission of the 
power between and around these two points, 
Supported and driven by this main belt is a 
second belt D, which for convenience I will 
term a supplemental belt, to which is riveted 
or secured in any other desired manner the 
buckets E, which form the elevator proper. 
During the operation of the elevator while 
O 
2 d 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507227.txt	(No Model.) 
E, JORDAN. 
METHOD OF MAKING BARBED FENCING, 
No. 507,227. 
Patented Oct. 24, 1893. 
22, 2 
97 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
1 
r 
ATTORNEY 
. 
N 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
EDMUND JORDAN, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO 
THOMAS W. ALLIS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
METHOD OF MAKING BARBED FENCNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,227, dated October 24, 1893. 
Application filed June 8, 1888, Serial No. 276,519, (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDMUND JORDAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Methods of Making 
Barbed Fencing, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This improved method of making barbed 
metallic fencing consists of producing two 
barbed strips from one blank strip by slit 
ting a plain flat blank, strip of metal which 
is equal in width to two barbed strips to be 
made plus the breadth of the barbs by inter 
mittent slits which offset in an oblique line 
from one plane to another and so overlap that 
the offset line of each slit crosses from the 
plane of one part of the slit to..that of the 
other between and in close proximity to the 
ends of the next slits each way by which bars 
from which to form barbs are separated along 
their edges from the two strips which are 
also nearly separated by the same means 
from each other but said bars remain con 
nected at the ends to the respective strips 
and are subsequently separated obliquely at 
the middle to point them and effect the com 
plete separation of the strips, and then the 
barbs so formed are bent laterally to the 
strips for causing them to project as re 
quired, thus making one laterally projecting 
barb alternately on each strip, but for mak 
ing two similarly projecting barbs together 
on each strip alternately, which is the pref 
erable way, the said overlapping slits are 
made longer with greater distance between 
the offset lines and the ends of the next slits 
each way, and other slits are made in prolon 
gation of the parallel portions of said slits 
each way across the offset line so that two 
barbs are made thereat beside the two oth 
ers from the bars subsequently separated, 
and thus two barbs are formed together on 
each strip intermediately and they are like 
wise bent for lateral projection as hereinaf 
ter fully described. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 represents face 
views of said slitting and bar cutting dies 
and of one each of two pairs of bending dies 
for bending the barbs. Fig. 2 represents a 
side elevation of the dies for slitting the 
- 
When the barbs are to be in the 7o 
Fig. 3 is a diagram of the blank 5.5 
I take a plain flat strip C, and make interval 65 
blank strip and cutting the bars to make two 
barbs alternately on each strip, together with 
the bending dies and a blank strip between 
the dies. 
strip showing the action of the dies of Figs. 
1 and 2 on it. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of 
the dies for making single barbs on each 
strip alternately. Fig. 5 is a diagram of the 
blank strip showing the action of the dies of 6o 
Figs. 4 and 6 on it. Fig. 6 represents face 
views of the slitting and bar cutting dies, 
and of one each of the bending dies as in 
Fig. 4. 
slits b, c, d, in it, the part c, being an oblique 
offset from b, to d, which are in different par 
allel planes as wide apart as the desired width 
of the barbs, said offset being at the middle 
of the slit. 
single order along the strips, the slits are ad 
vanced along the strip a distance equal to the 
distance the barbs are to be apart on the fin 
ished strips as in Fig. 5, and the length of the 
slits is in this case such that being so ad- 75 
vanced the distance from offset c, of one slit 
to the beginning of the next slit is the length 
of metal left at e, connecting the barbs at the 
base with the strips, which may be more or 
less as preferred, being varied as the slits are 8o 
made longer or shorter, but it is designed to 
have ample metal thereat to form substantial 
connection of the barbs. The length of the 
barbs is governed by the length of the slits, 
the slits being made longer for longer barbs 85 
or shorter for shorter ones; but where two 
barbs are to be formed together on each strip 
intermediately the slits b, c, d, are made longer 
and are also advanced along the strip rela 
tively to each other the length of a barb more 
than in the other case, as represented in Fig. 
3. For making these slits dies f, g, are em 
ployed which are alike in form for both cases 
but differ in length and the strip is to be fed 
the length of two barbs in one case, and of 95 
four in the other. It proceeds in the former 
case to the bar cutting dies h, , by which the 
bars made between parts b, and d, of the 
successive slits are cut apart at q, and barbs 
s, are formed; but in the latter case it is next Ioo 
presented to the parallel edged slitting dies 
j, k, whereby the slits l, are made in prolonga 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
507,227 
tion of lines b, d, across offset line c, making 
two barbs thereat and also to the bar cutters 
h, i, which at the same time cut apart the bar 
made between the slits and form two other 
barbs. From the bar cutters the next feed 
shift presents the barbs ready for bending to 
the bending dies m, n, and O, p, arranged in 
two pairs for bending the barbs laterally to the 
strips and alternately in opposite directions, 
said dies consisting of male and female mem 
bers suitably contrived for so bending the 
barbs as clearly represented in the drawings. 
In the making of four barbs to one feed shift 
as in Figs. , 2, and 3, both pairs of these 
bending dies will operate contemporaneously 
with the rest, but in the other arrangement for 
making only two barbs to one feed shift these 
dies will only act with each alternate opera 
tion of the rest. One pair would be sufficient 
in this case if the barbs were all to be bent 
one way, but two pairs are required to bend 
in opposite directions, and as they together 
bend four barbs, at one operation they must 
rest during one operation of the other dies 
making only two barbs at a time. 
So far as the overlapping interval slitting 
for separating the double blank and cutting 
the barbs from the edges of the strips is con 
cerned it is substantially the same as in the 
method, which is the subject of the patent 
granted to me. March 17, 1885, No. 314,183, 
and is not broadly claimed herein in which 
new method I have, contrived to utilize that 
plan of cutting together with the cutting of 
the bars to separate and point, the barbs and 
with bending devices, which make laterally 
projecting barbs, all operative together with 
the cutting dies to complete the cutting, sep 
arating and bending in one operation. Suit 
able guides will be employed for preventing 
the cut parts of the blank from spreading 
under the influence of the dies, but I reserve 
the apparatus herein described for a separate 
application for a patent. 
What I claim, and desire. to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The method of producing from a double 
blank strip two, barbed strips having barbs 
: 
at intervals along the edge which consists of 
making offset overlapping slits at intervals. 
along the blank, forming bars of which to 
make barbs and partly separating the blank; 
and contemporaneously separating said bars 
and thereby completely separating the blank 
and pointing the barbs, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The method of producing from a double 
blank strip two barbed strips having barbs 
at intervals along the edge and bent laterally 
to the strips which consists of making offset 
overlapping slits at intervals along the blank 
|forming bars of which to make barbs and 
partly separating the blank; and separating 
said bars and thereby completely separating 
the blank and pointing the barbs and finally 
bending the barbs laterally to the strips, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The method of producing from a double 
blank strip, two barbed strips having barbs 
at intervals, along the edge which consists of 
making offset overlapping slits at intervals 
along the blank, forming bars of which to 
make barbs, and partly separating the blank; 
making other slits each way from the offset 
portion of the overlapping slits to form and 
point other, barbs, and separating the bars 
formed by the overlapping slits and thereby 
completely separating the blank and pointing 
the barbs formed by said bars, substantially 
as described. 
4. The method of producing from a double 
blank strip, two barbed strips having barbs 
at intervals, along the edge and bent laterally 
to the strips which consists of making offset 
overlapping slits at intervals along the blank, 
forming bars of which to make barbs and 
partly separating the blank; making other 
slits each way from the offset portion of the 
: overlapping slits, to form, and point, other 
barbs, separating the bars formed by the over 
lapping slits..and thereby completely separat 
ing the blank and pointing the barbs formed 
by said bars, and finally bending the barbs 
laterally to the strips, substantially as de 
scribed, 
Signed at New York city, in the county and 
State of New York, this 7th day of May, A.D. 
1888. 
EDMUND JORDAN. 
Witnesses: 
W. J. MoRGAN, 
GEO. T. JANVRIN: 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507327.txt	(No Model,) 
B. L. PICKARD. 
MOTOR. 
 
 
lifesses 
N. (NY) 
:-- o 
Sist." EAL || 
 
| 
- 
Z. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BIRTRUN L. PICKARD, OF CENTRALIA, WASHINGTON. 
MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,327, dated October 24, 1893. 
Application filed May 1l, 1893, Serial No. 473,785, (No model.) 
O 
25 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BIRTRUN L. PICKARD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Cen 
tralia, in the county of Lewis and State of 
Washington, have invented a new and use 
ful Motor for Pumps, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved mo 
tor for pumps, the objects in view being to 
provide means whereby the back stroke of 
the pump rod may be accomplished rapidly 
in order to economize time; and to provide 
means whereby a weight may be employed as 
the source of power, the same being applied 
in such a manner as to permit of the employ 
ment of speed multiplying means in order 
that a heavy and slow moving weight may 
be used. 
Further objects and advantages of my in 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
In the drawings-Figure 1 is a top perspec 
tive view of a machine embodying my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a vertical central sectional 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a diagrammatic 
view showing the governor arranged in the 
position which it assumes when the wheel is 
momentarily checked. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
The supporting framework of my pumping 
machine may be of any suitable construc 
tion, but preferably consists of the uprights 
1, connected at top and bottom and at inter 
mediate points by the horizontal supporting 
bars 2, and also connected by the inclined 
intersecting braces 3, such a structure being 
suitable for erection over the well in which 
the pump, operated, by my machinery is lo 
cated. 
4 represents a drum upon which is reeled 
the cable or other flexible connections 5, 
which extends over the pulley 6 connected 
to the upper timbers of the framework and 
is connected at its lower end to a weight 7. 
A supplemental pulley 8 is preferably con 
nected to the weight and the end of the cable 
is secured to the framework, as shown in the 
accompanying drawings, whereby a pre 
scribed movement of the weight will produce 
double that movement in the flexible conneca 
tion or cable. The drum 4 is provided with 
a gear 9 which meshes with a pinion 10, 
which is loosely mounted upon the main shaft 
or arbor 11. The pinion 10 is connected to 
said shaft or arbor by means of a clutch 12 of 
the ordinary or any approved construction, 
whereby, when said pinion is rotated in the 
direction in which it is impelled by the un 
winding of the cable from the drum 4, the 
shaft will be locked to said pinion and will 
rotate there with. Winding devices compris 
ing a pinion 13 carried by a shaft 14, having 
a crank arm 15, are employed as means of 
reeling the cable upon the drum. 
The main shaft or arbor 11 carries a pin 
wheel 16 which consists of a body portion 17 
of any approved construction and lateral pins 
18 projecting from the periphery of said body 
portion, and 19 represents a rocking-lever 
which is fulcrumed at an intermediate point 
upon a pivot pin 20, is connected at one end 
by means of a pitman 21 to the upper end of 
the pump rod 22 and is reduced or tapered at 
the other end and projects into the path of 
the lateral pins 18. 
From the above description it will be under 
stood that the rotation of the pin-wheel caused 
by the unreeling of the cable from the drum 
will, by the successive engagement of the pins 
1S with the tapered extremity of the rocking 
lever, produce a vibratory motion of the latter. 
It will be understood, furthermore, that as 
the wheel descends upon that side which is 
adjacent to or in operative relation with the 
rocking-lever, the movement of the lever will 
be irregular-namely, its tapered extremity 
will be depressed slowly thus elevating its 
other extremity and the pump rod connected 
thereto, and when the tapered extremity is 
released it will ascend quickly until checked 
by the succeedingpin, thus allowing the pump 
rod to descend without loss of time. 
Gravity or any preferred mechanical means 
may be utilized to depress the pump rod and 
the contiguous end of the lever 19, it being 
deemed unnecessary to illustrate such well 
known devices. 
In order to present the pins 18 in such po 
sitions as to produce the longest possible stroke 
of the rocking-lever and allow it to return 
after each stroke with the shortest possible 
loss of time I provide means whereby the pin 
wheel is given an intermittent movement, 
- 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
Io5 
507,827 
Such means consist of a governor having a 
balance-wheel 23 attached to a stub-shaft 24 
carrying a transverse bar or cross-head 25, 
which bar is provided with pivot pins 26 upon 
which are mounted the anti-friction rolls 27. 
The stub-shaft is so arranged with relation to 
the pin-wheel that during the rotation of the 
balance - wheel the anti- friction rolls are 
brought successively into the path of the pins 
18 and from said pins derive the impulse by 
which the balance-wheel is driven. Thus, as 
the pin-wheel rotates it elevates one of the 
anti-friction rolls and at the moment that the 
tapered end of the rocking-lever is released 
from the pin by which it has been depressed 
the other anti-friction rollis in the path of the 
Succeeding pin thus momentarily checking 
the rotation of the pin-wheel and holding it 
in such stationary position long enough for 
the released end of the rocking-lever to rise 
and be checked by the pin succeeding that 
one by which it was previously depressed. 
The direction of rotation of the pin-wheel is 
indicated by the arrows in the drawings, 
and as shown by the diagrammatic view, Fig. 
3, the governor checks the rotation of the 
pin-wheel while the former is crossing the 
dead center or during the time that the press 
ure of the pin which is in engagement with 
the lower anti-friction roll is in the direction 
of the arm to which said roll is attached, or 
toward the shaft of the governor. Obvious 
ly, the checking of the pin-wheel is but momen 
tary for the reason that the motion of the 
balance-wheel is continuous, and hence the 
anti-friction roll by which the pin-wheel was 
checked moves forward in the direction of 
rotation of the pin-wheel thus allowing the 
latter to rotate and at the same time receiv 
ing an additional impulse from the pin in con 
tact there with. Therefore, the pin-wheel ro 
tates steadily, governed by the speed of rota 
tion of the balance-wheel during the depres 
sion of the tapered end of the rocking-lever 
or the elevation of the pump rod, and as said 
lever is released from the pin by which it has 
been depressed the pin-wheel is checked a 
sufficient length of time to enable the pump 
rod to descend to the lowermost terminal of 
its stroke before the succeeding up-stroke is 
Commenced. 
Inasmuch as the governor receives its im 
pulse from the pin-wheel its rotation will cor 
respond in speed with that of the pin-wheel 
and the anti-friction roll during its ascent in 
engagement with one of the pins will move 
with the same speed as said pin. But as the 
anti-friction roll reaches the upper part of its 
path it moves out of the path of the pin, and 
at the same time the other roll moves into the 
path of the suceeding pin. When the press 
ure of the previous pin is removed from the 
roll with which it has been in contact the 
governor depends entirely upon momentum 
for its continued rotation until the second 
roll shall have passed out of alignment with 
the shaft of the governor and is in position 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
 
to receive the impulse of the pin wheel through 
the said succeeding pin. It is during the 
time that the said second roll is passing this 
dead center or point of alignment with the 
governor shaft that the pin-wheel is checked, 
inasmuch as the direction of movement of the 
said succeeding pin is in alignment with both 
rolls and the governor shaft. 
It will be understood that various changes 
in the form, proportion, and minor details of 
construction may be resorted to without de 
parting from the spirit of my invention or 
sacrificing any of the advantages thereof. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a rotary drive-wheel provided 
with spaced pins arranged perpendicular to 
its plane, a rocking lever having its axis of 
movement parallel with the axis of the drive 
wheel, with one of its terminals arranged in 
the path of the pins carried by said wheel 
and adapted to be engaged successively there 
by, means for imparting rotary movement to 
the wheel, and a speed controlling device op 
eratively connected to the drive-wheel to de 
rive motion therefrom and having a continu" 
ously rotating member provided with pro 
jections which successively intersect the path 
of the pins carried by the wheel, and adapt 
ed to engage said pins to produce an inter 
mittent movement of the drive-wheel, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a rocking-lever, of a rotary 
drive-wheel provided with spaced pins to en 
gage said lever, means for imparting a rotary 
movement to said wheel, and a speed con 
trolling device having a continuously rotating 
cross-head deriving motion from the drive 
wheel and carrying anti-friction rolls which 
are brought successively into the path of the 
pins upon said drive-wheel whereby the lat 
ter is given an intermittent movement, sub 
stantially as specified. 
3. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a rocking-lever, of a drive 
wheel provided with lateral spaced pins to 
engage said lever, means for imparting a ro 
tary movement to said wheel, and a speed con 
trolling device comprising a balance-wheel, 
a cross-head carried by the shaft of said bal 
ance-wheel, and anti-friction rolls mounted 
upon pins located eccentrically with relation 
to the balance-wheel and adapted to lie suc 
cessively in the path of the pins carried by 
said drive-wheel and to receive therefrom the 
impulse necessary to rotate the balance-wheel, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
iny own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
BIRTRUN. L. PICKARIO, 
Witnesses: 
H. J. MILLER, 
F. H. MILLER. 
75 
95 
Od 
Ec 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507427.txt	J. G. ARRETT. 
HEADER ATTACHMENT. 
- 
Patented Oct. 24, 1893, 
(No Model.) 
No. 507,427. 
 
828)itv.cssco 
Y-ena'. 
ycystivicoid .. 
 
3-vuov to 
cMazraes Gaveat 
yeh vulvaldwuw, 
9 -ki attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES GARRETT, OF VISALIA, CALIFORNIA. 
HEADER ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,427, dated October 24, 1893. 
Application filed November 12, 1892, Serial No. 451,740, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES GARRETT, of Wi 
salia, in the county of Tulare and State of 
California, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Header Attachments; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale, 
My invention is an improvement in attach 
ments for headers, by means of which the 
Wagon may be relieved to a considerable 
amount, of the direct weight of the spout. 
The invention is especially applicable when 
the ground is rough as, by means of my at 
tachment the jar on the wagon caused by the 
oscillations of the spout is greatly lessened. 
My invention more particularly resides in 
the novel combination, construction and ar 
rangement of parts hereinafter fully de 
scribed and set forth in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts, Figure 1 is a perspective view 
of a header spout with my invention attached. 
Fig. 2 is a section of the spring and connec 
A is a header spout of ordinary construc 
tion, the end of which is supported by means 
of the bail B and rope C. The latter, after 
passing over the pulley D is secured to the 
spring Eby means of the rod F. The spring 
E is incased in the cylinder G, which is se 
cured to the header by means of bolts H, or 
tions. 
- 
O 
25 
35 
 
other suitable means. The strength or play 
of the spring is regulated by means of the 
nut I, which engages with threads on the rod F. 
The construction and arrangement of the 
several parts of my invention being thus 
made known, the operation and advantages 
of the same will, it is thought, be readily un 
derstood. I am aware that changes in the 
form and proportion of parts of the device 
herein shown and described as an embodi 
ment of my invention, can be made without 
departing from the spirit or sacrificing the 
advantages thereof, and I therefore reserve 
the right to make such changes and altera 
tions as fairly fall within the scope of my in 
vention. 
Having thus fully described Iny invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination with a header, and a spout 
pivoted thereto, of a casing secured to the 
header, a rod passed therethrough, a spring 
around said rod with one end bearing against 
the end of said casing, a nut on the rod bear 
ing against the other end of said spring, and 
a pivotal connection and cord between the 
outer end of the spout and the said rod, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES GARRETT. 
J. C. BROWN, 
M. C. WOODARD, 
45 
55 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507527.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 507,527, 
W. H. CLEMES, 
MOLASSES GATE, 
Patented 00t, 31, 1893. 
S. FIE2S 
%22222Gs 22 
N 
N- 27 
 
WITNESSESSa 
2. Nu- 
- 
INVENTOR 
1 /64. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. CLEMES, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE TAYLOR & 
BOGGIS FOUNDRY COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MOLASSES GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,527, dated October 31, 1893. 
Application filed March 24, 1891, Serial No. 386,245, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. CLEMES, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, county of Cuyahoga, and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Molasses - Gates, of which the 
following is a specification, the principle of 
the invention being herein explained and the 
best mode in which I have contemplated ap 
plying that principle, so as to distinguish it 
from other inventions. 
The objects of my invention are: to pro 
vide improved means for pivoting a molasses 
gate or similar fluid cut-off, and to provide an 
improved spring for holding the gate-plate 
against the mouth or opening of the nozzle. 
The annexed drawings and the following 
description set forthin detail one mechanical 
form embodying the invention; such detail 
construction being but one of various me 
chanical forms in which the principle of the 
invention may be used. 
In such annexed drawings:-Figure I rep 
resents a side view of my improved molasses 
gate; Fig. II, a section on the line II-II, Fig. 
I; FigS. III, IV and W, respectively, a view of 
the gate-plate, of the spring, and of the han 
dle, and Fig. VI, a perspective detail-view of 
the outer ear. 
In the drawings the letter A indicates the 
tube or barrel of the molasses gate. Said tube 
is of the form usually employed in similar 
devices, having its inner, straight portion 
adapted to be fitted into the tap-hole of a cask 
and having its outer portion or head, A', 
curved or dropped to admit of free, down 
Ward delivery of the molasses or similar sub 
Stance to be tapped. Two ears, a and a, pro 
ject from the sides of the tube and are pref 
erably cast integral with the same. The outer 
ear a has a perforation, a, and a recess, a, 
in its inner face. Said recess is semi-circu 
lar and concentric with the perforation at its 
inner portion, and the outer portion is of the 
Same width as the diameter of the semi-circu 
lar portion, has parallel sides and extends to 
the outer edge of the ear. The inner ear a 
has a circular recess, a, in its outerface, cor 
responding to the perforation a in the outer 
ear. The outer, flat face, a, of the tube has 
an annular recess, a, in which a gasket, B, of 
leather or similar, yielding material is fitte 
and secured. 
A lever or handle, C, is formed with an in 
wardly-bent lip, c, at its inner end, which lip 55 
may play between two shoulders or stops, a, 
upon the edge of the outer ear upon the tube, 
and said handle has a pivot-bolt, C, project 
ing from its inner end, which bolt fits and 
turns in the perforation a in the outer ear 6o 
and has its inner end fitting and turning in 
the recess in the inner ear. A pin, c', is in 
serted through the pivot-bolt and turns in the 
recess a in the inner face of the outer ear, 
preventing the pivot-bolt from slipping out 65 
of its bearings. The handle is furthermore 
formed with a circular disk, C, which regis 
ters with and about corresponds to the mouth 
of the tube. The inner face of this disk C 
is slightly concave and has a recess, c, in its 7o 
Center. 
The circular gate D is formed with an out 
Wardly-projecting flange, d, at its edge, and 
may fit around the circular disk C with said 
flange, having diametrically-opposite, cut-out 75 
portions or notches, d, in the flange for the 
portions of the handle at opposite sides of the 
disk. The inner face or the face of the gate 
opposite the disk is formed with a central 
stud or projection, d, which fits and Inay 8o 
slide in the central recess, c, in the disk of 
the handle. 
A cross-shaped, centrally - bulging spring 
plate, E, having a central opening, e, fits 
with said opening upon the central stud of 85 
the gate and bears with its bulging center 
against the disk of the lever and with the ends 
of its radiating arms against the gate. 
The gate may be swung by the lever or han 
dle to either cover and close the mouth of the 9o 
tube or barrel or open the same for the dis 
charge of the fluid contained in the cask or 
other vessel in which the tube is secured, and 
the swing of the lever is limited at both of its 
extremities (the open and the closed), by the 
inwardly-bent lip upon the inner end of the 
lever and the stops upon the outer lip of the 
tube. The radiating spring-arms will bear 
against the gate at four points, near its pe 
riphery, at right angles to each other, and 
Will, consequently, cause the gate to bear 
equally close at all points of its periphery 
95 
Oc 
IO 
25 
40 
45 
507,527 
O 
against the gasket in the face of the tube. 
In a large gate it may be desirable to have a 
greater number of radiating spring-arms so 
as to obtain a more complete bearing. 
The tube or barrel is cast, and the recess in 
the inner face of the outer ear is formed in 
the casting, the parallel sides of its open por 
tion permitting the ear being withdrawn from 
the sand without obstruction. The opening 
in the outer ear and the registering recess in 
the inner ear are subsequently formed by 
drilling. Besides the advantage obtained in 
the process of casting by forming the outer 
side of the recess in the ear open, another ad 
Vantage is gained thereby in the ease where 
With the lock-pin c' may be inserted through 
the pivot-bolt from the open side of the re 
CeSS. 
Other modes of applying the principle of 
my invention may be employed for the mode 
herein explained. Change may therefore be 
made as regards the mechanism herein in 
: 
volved providing the principles of construc 
tion respectively recited in the following claim 
are employed. 
I therefore particularly point out and dis 
tinctly claim as my invention 
In a molasses - gate, a tube or barrel pro 
vided with a laterally - projecting, outer ear 
formed with a perforation and with a recess 
in its inner face having a semi-circular inner 
side and an open, outer portion having par 
allel sides, and provided with a laterally-pro 
jecting, inner ear formed with a circular re 
cess in its outer face registering with the per 
foration in the outer ear, Substantially as Set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing to 
be my invention I have hereunto set my hand 
this 20th day of March, A. D. 1891. 
W. H. CLEMES. 
Witnesses: 
J. B. FAY, 
HORACE. F. PARKS. 
25 
35 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507627.txt	(No Model.) 
A. N. MONTEER, 
COWERING ATTACHMENT FOR CAR R00FS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 507,627, 
Patented 00t. 31, 1893. 
S. 
S 
  
 
st ax swarasawaa, a 
al-e-2-2-2-2a-a-a-aat a 
ca 
use 
as 
aaaaaaaaaZ 
seeksessesseezza 
 
- Zaze? e 76. 
sez 
47zeaczzae 24/767 feer 
24. ZY/AA / 44-62/A24-271 
ea4- 2/'777. 
 
(No Model.) 
A. N. MONTEER, 
COWERING ATTACHMENT FOR, CAR ROOFS, 
2 Sheets: 
Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 31, 1893. 
 
  
 
 
*  
Z7zezez. 
Monteer. 
zz /4-2-22- 7. 
(7?e carde 2% 
26A1 
Z7. 
AY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. N. MONTEER, OF SPRING FIELD, MISSO URI. 
COVERING ATTACHMENT FOR CAR-Roofs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,627, dated October 31, 1893. 
Application filed May 12, 1893, Serial No. 478,945. (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER N. MON 
TEER, of Springfield, Greene county, Missouri, 
have invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Covering Attachments for Car-Roofs, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part hereof. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
car roof attachments. 
The objects of my invention are to produce 
a car roof covering attachment, which shall 
allow for expansion and contraction in every 
direction; and which shall be so constructed 
as to render the roof absolutely water-proof 
at all times. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
duce car roof attachments which shall be sim 
ple, strong, durable and inexpensive of con 
struction, which shall be applicable to a great 
variety of car roofs, and which shall be se. 
cured thereon without the use of nails or 
rivets. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain peculiar and novel features 
of construction and combinations of the parts, 
as will be hereinafter described and pointed 
Out in the claims. 
In order that my invention may be fully 
understood, I will proceed to describe it with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which- 
Figure 1, is a plan view of a portion of a car 
roof and showing my covering attachments 
applied thereto. Fig. 2, is a vertical sectional 
view taken on the line 2-2 of Fig. 1, and as 
viewed in the direction indicated by arrows. 
Fig. 3, is a top plan view of a portion of the 
car roof, and showing a portion of my car roof 
covering attachments broken away to more 
clearly expose the construction thereof. Fig. 
4, is a vertical sectional view taken on the line 
4-4 of Fig. 1, and is viewed in the direction 
indicated by arrows. Fig. 5, is a perspective 
view showing the manner of connecting the 
top plates of the covering attachment, so as 
to allow for lateral movement. Fig. 6, is a 
top plan of the attachments shown in Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7, is a vertical sectional view taken on 
the line 7-7 of Fig. 1. Fig. 8, is a detail per 
spective view of one of the outer corners of 
the top plates, 
view of the end of one of the telescopic cas 
ings for the cross strips or cleats of the roof, 
and Fig. 10, is a horizontal sectional view 
taken on the line 10-10 of Fig. 2. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates a 
portion of the car which may be of any suit 
able construction for the transportation of the 
more valuable classes of freight, and 2 desig 
nates the roof. Extending transversely of 
the roof at suitable intervals are cross strips 
or cleats 3, which preferably end a slight dis 
tance from the side margins of the roof, and 
from the apex thereof. 
4 and 4" designate a number of top plates 
which are adapted to rest upon the roof and 
between the cleats or cross-strips 3. These 
cleats 3, have their sides inclined downwardly 
and inwardly at 3; the object of which will 
be hereinafter explained. The top plates 4 
are bent vertically at 5 near their upper ends; 
then horizontally at 6 for a suitable distance, 
and are then bent vertically downward to 
form a retaining flange 7; thus forming a 
space 8, extending longitudinally of the roof 
and for the entire width of each top-plate 4, 
Each top plate 4 and 4 is also provided with 
vertical flanges 8 at each side margin; these 
flanges being adapted to rest against the ad 
jacent inclined-sides 3 of each pair of cross 
strips or cleats 3; the outer ends of said ver 
tical flanges 8 terminating a short distance 
from the side margins of the car, and are 
turned outwardly preferably as shown in Figs, 
1 and 8, and are tapered downwardly as at 
8 to the upper side of the top-plate. At the 
outer end of this tapered portion, each top 
plate is adapted to meet a similar portion of 
the adjacent top-plate as shown in Fig. 1; 
thus forming a V-shaped space between each 
pair of top-plates for the reception of the 
pointed end 3 of the cross-strips or cleats, 
and also forming a guide or Way 8 upon each 
side of the strips, by which the water at those 
points will be conveyed to the edge of the 
roof. The outer end of each top plate is also 
bent downward and inward in U-form at 10, 
so as to inclose the outer edges or eaves of 
the roof, and the lower end 11 of each top 
plate is extended downward a short distance 
so as to lie against the upper portion of the 
sides of the car as shown. Each top plate 4 
Fig. 9, is a detail perspectivel is also provided with an extension 9, project 
... 
45 
 
55 
85 
ICO 
507,627 
O 
O 
25 
35 
i 
55 
ing horizontally from and preferably formed 
with the horizontal portion 6 and at each end 
thereof, and about half way the width of the 
cross strips or cleats 3 as shown in Fig. 1. 
The upper or inner end of each top plate 4 
is formed with a vertical and upwardly ex 
tending flange 4 which in its normal posi 
tion, occupies the center of space 8", and 
which is adapted as the car expands or con 
tracts as hereinafter referred to in the opera 
tion, to move laterally in the space 8 formed 
between the vertical portions 5 and 7 and the 
horizontal portion 6 of the plates 4; the body 
portions of said plates 4 passing under the free 
end of the flange 7 as clearly shown in Fig. 
7, and the side flanges 8 of said top-plates 4, 
fitting at opposite ends of Said flange 7, and 
inclosing the same. 
Each of the cross strips or cleats 3 is in 
closed at its top and two sides by an elon 
gated metal casing or cap 12 which is of ap 
proximately inverted U-form in cross-section, 
and which is of such length as to extend frcm 
the outer side of the vertical portions 5 and 
7 of the top plates 4 to within a suitable dis 
tance of the Outer ends of Said cleats or cross 
strips 3. The top of each of these caps or 
casings 12 is of slightly greater width than 
the width of the top of the cleat or strip 3, 
the height of the sides of said casing or caps 
corresponding approximately to the thickness 
of the strips 3, and closely embracing the 
lapped or flanged edges 8 of the top plates 4 
and 4, so as to form a perfectly water-tight 
joint, as shown. The inner end of each ca, 
or casing 13 is preferably formed with an ex 
tension 12, which is adapted to fit upon and 
extend about half way the width of the hori 
Zontal portion 6 of the top plates 4, in such 
nanner that the inner edge of the extension 
13 of each oppositely disposed pair of caps or 
casings 12 is adjacent to each other, or in con 
tact as shown in Fig. 3. Extending verti 
cally through each cap or casing 12 and in 
; closed cross strip or cleat 3, on the roof 2 are 
a number of bolts 14, and the lower ends of 
these bolts are engaged by the retaining nuts 
15, which bear against the under side of the 
roof of the car. The innermost bolt 4 of 
each cleat and casing, is provided with an 
extension 16, which projects through an open 
ing in the cross-piece 17, and their upper 
ends are engaged by retaining nuts 18 which 
rest in recesses 19 in the upper edge of the 
cross pieces 17. The running boards 20 are 
secured longitudinally of the car and upon 
the cross-pieces 17 in the usual manner. It 
will thus be seen that the juncture points of 
the extensions 9 of the top plates 4, and the 
Overlapping extensions 13 of the caps or cas 
ings 12, are covered by the cross-pieces 17, 
which in turn are covered by the running 
boards 20 at the top of the casing; thus pre 
venting any water leaking through the roof 
at those points. The lower or outer ends of 
the cross strips 3, a suitable distance inward 
of the free ends of the caps or casings 12 are 
formed with a recess 3 and inclosing the re 
cessed ends of said cross strips or cleats 3, are 
the movable caps 21; said caps being pro 
vided with side flanges 22 inclosing the adja 
cent side flanges 8 of the top-plates, upon 
each side of the cleats or cross strips, and in 
closed by or within the side flanges of the 
caps or casings 12. These movable casings 
or caps 21, are also formed with the inclined 
ends 23; said inclination being adapted to 
strengthen or stiffen said caps, and also pref 
erably corresponding to the inclination 8 of 
the ends of side flanges 8 of the top plates. 
The movable caps or casings 21 are also pro 
vided with the curved end 24 which is adapt 
ed to inclose the curved end 10 of the top 
plates, and is further formed with a pendent 
Vertical extension 25 which is adapted to rest 
against the outer side of the vertical exten 
sion 11 of the top plates. A horizontally ex 
tending strip 26 is located at each side of the 
car, and each of said strips has its vertical 
face fitting against the outer side of exten 
Sions 25 of the movable caps 21 and has its 
upper horizontal side bearing against the un 
der side of the curved portion 24 thereof; 
these strips 26 being secured to the sides of 
the car by Screws or other suitable means. 
Each of the caps 21 is provided near its in 
ner end and projecting outwardly from the 
outer sides of the flanges 22, with a pin or lug 
26; these pins fitting and adapted to slide in 
the guide grooves 27 formed longitudinally 
in the inner sides of the vertical flanges of 
the Outer caps or casings 12, and near their 
free ends. The edges of the pendent flanges 
7 of the top-plates 6, and also the edges of 
the pendent flanges of the caps or casings 12 
and 21, as shown in Fig. 4, are turned or bent 
OutWardly to stiffen said flanges, and also to 
prevent wear of the adjacent parts of the 
top-plates, by frictional contact, as would be 
the case, were the sharp corners of the mar 
gins of Said flanges to impinge directly upon 
Said top-plates. 
From the above description, it will be seen 
that With any lateral contraction or expan 
sion of the car, the telescopic or movable caps 
21 will slide longitudinally within the free 
ends of the caps or casings 12; the guide pins 
or lugs 26 in the grooves 27 being adapted 
to limit said movement, and at the same time 
the lateral expansion or contraction of the 
car allows the vertical flange 4 of the inner 
end of the top plates 4 to move laterally in 
the space S formed by the vertical portions 
5 and 7 and the horizontal portion 6 of the 
top plates 4. 
The object in making the cross-strips or 
cleats with downwardly and inwardly in 
clined sides is to allow the upper side mar 
gins of Said cross-strips or cleats to fit com 
fortably between the upper margins of the 
adjacent flanges 8 of each pair of top-plates 
4 and 4", so as to prevent any rattling or 
noise When the car is in motion, and at the 
same time to allow sufficient space between 
75 
95 
IOC 
O 
II5 
25 
 
507,627 
3 
75 
go 
95 
O 
Io5 
O 
II5 
25 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
the inner sides of the inclosing caps and the 
sions or continuations of the similar and ad 
jacent top-plates, substantially as set forth. 
said strips or cleats for any slight lateral ex 
pansion or contraction of the top-plates. 
4. In a covering attachment for car-roofs, 
the combination of a number of cross-strips 
From the above description, it will be seen 
extending transversely from the apex or ridge 
that I have produced covering attachments 
for car roofs which are simple, strong, dura 
of the roof transversely toward the eaves, and 
formed with downwardly and inwardly in 
ble and inexpensive of construction, which 
clined sides, and caps or casings fitting over 
will allow for the expansion or contraction of 
said cross-strips, of a number of top-plates 
the car in every direction, which shall be so 
laid upon the roof, and provided with up 
constructed as to render the roof absolutely 
Wardly extending flanges at each side mar 
Water proof at all times, and which can be 
gin, Said flanges Occupying the Space between 
very easily and equally applied to or removed 
the inclined sides of the cross-strips and the 
from the car, and secured without the use of 
depending flanges or sides of the caps or cas 
nails or rivets. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
ings in such manner as to allow for the lat 
eral expansion or contraction of the top-plates, 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
substantially as set forth. 
Patent, is 
5. A covering attachment for car-roofs, com 
1. In a covering attachment for car-roofs, 
prising cross-strips or cleats laid transversely 
the combination with a top-plate laid upon 
of and extending from the apex toward the 
the roof and having its outer end bent to in 
close the eaves of the roof at one side, and 
eaves of the roof, and formed with down 
Wardly and inwardly inclined sides, and top 
formed with a recess in its under side which 
extends longitudinally and is arranged above 
plates laid upon the roof between said cross 
the apex or ridge of the roof, of a second top 
Strips or cleats, and bent at their outer ends 
plate also laid upon the roof and at the oppo 
to inclose the eaves of the roof, and also 
formed with upwardly extending flanges at: 
site side of the apex or ridge thereof, and also 
their side margins fitting against the inclined 
having its outer end bent to inclose the eaves 
or beveled sides of the cross-strips or cleats, 
of the roof at its other side, and having an up 
wardly extending flange normally engaging 
an upwardly extending flange rising from the 
inner ends of certain of these top-plates and 
the center of the recess of the first mentioned 
connecting the inner ends of the side flanges: 
top-plate, and arranged to have lateral and 
thereof, and extending longitudinally of and 
independent movement in said recess as the 
car contracts or expands, substantially as set 
above the apex of the roof, and a recess 
formed in the under side of the remainder of 
forth. 
these top-plates and inclosing the upwardly 
2. In a covering attachment for car-roofs, 
extending flanges of the first mentioned top 
the combination with a top-plate laid upon 
the roof, and having upwardly extending 
plates, and extensions projecting from each 
flanges at each side margin, and also having 
end of the recess and formed integral with 
an upwardly extending flange formed at the 
the last mentioned top-plates to meet the ex 
inner margin of the top-plate and connecting 
tensions of the similar and adjacent top 
plates, and caps or casings fitting over the 
the inner ends of the side marginal flanges, 
cross strips or cleats and overlapping the 
and arranged longitudinally and above the 
side flanges of the top-plates and also over 
apex or ridge of the roof, of a second top-plate 
lapping the extensions at each end of the 
also laid upon the roof at the opposite side of 
the ridge, and having a recess in its under 
recesses formed therein, and a transverse 
bridge piece, fitting upon and covering the 
side, formed by bending said plates, first up 
adjacent inner ends of each cap or casing ad 
wardly, then horizontaily over the flange at 
jacent to the apex or ridge of the roof, sub 
the inner end of the first-named top-plate, and 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
then downwardly between the side marginal 
6. A covering attachment for car-roofs, com 
flanges and at the outer side of the above 
prising a number of transverse cross-strips or 
mentioned longitudinally extending flange of 
cleats, having their sides beveled downwardly 
the first-mentioned top-plate, said top-plates 
being arranged to have lateral and independ 
and in Wardly and formed with a recess in 
their upper sides, top-plates laid upon the 
ent movement toward or from each other as 
the car contracts or expands laterally, sub 
roof and having their lower or outer - ends 
stantially as set forth. 
bent to inclose the eaves of the roof, and hav 
ing side marginal flanges fitting against the 
3. A covering attachment for car - roofs, 
comprising top-plates laid upon the roof and 
adjacent inclined or beveled sides of the cross 
strips or cleats, caps or casings bolted upon 
bent at their outer ends to inclose the eaves 
the upper sides of the cross-strips or cleats 
of the roof, a recess formed in the under sides 
of these top-plates, by bending said top-plates, 
and overlapping the recessed portions there 
longitudinally of the roof, first upwardly, then 
of, and also having pendent side flanges over 
lapping the side flanges of the top-plates, 
horizontally toward the opposite side of the 
and telescopic caps or casings inclosing the 
roof, and then downwardly,and forming a con 
lower ends of the cross-strips or cleats and en 
tinuation or extension at each end of the hori 
zontal portion so as to meet the similar exten- gaging the recessed portions thereof beneath 
55 
 
507,627 
the end of the fixed or stationary caps or cas 
ings, and also overlapping the side flanges of 
the top-plates, and having their outer ends 
bent around the bent outer ends of the top 
plates, substantially as set forth. 
7. A covering attachment for car roofs, com 
prising a number of cleats secured trans 
versely of and upon the roof and having their 
upper sides recessed, top-plates laid upon the 
roof and having their outer ends bent to in 
close the eaves of the roof and also formed 
with side marginal flanges fitting against the 
adjacent sides of the cross-strips or cleats, 
telescopic caps or casings inclosing the re 
cessed portions of said cross-strips or cleats 
and also overlapping the adjacent flanges of 
the top plates, and formed with outstanding 
pins or lugs at their outer sides, and having 
... their outer ends bent around and then ex 
tended vertically downward against the lower 
ends of the top-plates, and a retaining strip 
secured to each side of the car and bearing 
against the outer sides of the vertically de 
pending ends of the telescopic caps or cas 
ings, in combination with stationary caps or 
casings, also inclosing said cross-strips or 
cleats and inclosing the inner ends of the tele 
scopic-caps or casings, and provided with de 
pending flanges overlapping the side flanges 
of the top-plates and the sides of the tele 
scopic-caps or casings, and grooves formed in 
25 
8. A covering attachment for car-roofs, com- 35 
said pendent flanges engaging the pins or lugs 
of the telescopic caps or casings, substantially 
as set forth. 
prising a number of cross-strips or cleats laid 
transversely of and extending from the apex 
toward the eaves of the roof, and having their 
outer ends beveled or tapered to a point, 
and top-plates laid upon the roof, and inter 
posed between the cross-strips or cleats, and 
having their outer ends bent to inclose the 
eaves of the roof, and also having upwardly 
extending flanges at each side margin termi 
nating adjacent to the curved outer end, and 
bent outwardly a suitable distance from their 
points of termination to inclose the pointed 
ends of the cross strips or cleats and to form 
water-ways at their inner sides, and also bev 
eled downwardly or tapered to the upper side 5c 
of the top-plate, in combination with a cap or 
casing inclosing the pointed ends of the cross 
strips or cleats and the turned or bent and 
beveled flanges of the adjacent top-plates, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
55 
4O 
45 
ALEXANDER N. MONTEER. 
Witnesses: 
MAUD EITZPATRICK, 
G. Y. THORPE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507728.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 507,728. 
S. D. FIELD, 
TELEPHONE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented 00t, 31, 1893. 
  
 
2 
 
 
83 Illul.IIIaSl WIFILEIHis S. 
 HIHS FIFAIN 
m 
 
n 
28itv.cscs 
-6af 
/7(0. X44- 
53-bis- &tto vic & 
3-vuovtov 
Step/aerz ZZZZea 
"24/42y 
(No Model.) 
No. 507,728, 
 
S. D. FIELD, 
TELEPHONE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Oct. 31, 1893. 
(s 
th 
S. 
R 
Qe 
c/o 
Hill". H III.". 
N 
s 
S. 
Z. 
8)itv.cscs 
-4 6-64- 
- 
3-vuovo 
53 but& attorne T. ZO. Aze(2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN DUDLEY FIELD, OF STOCKBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
TELEPHONE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,728, dated October 31, 1898. 
Application filed June 30, 1893, Serial No. 479,207, (No model.) 
55 
65 
y 7o 
75 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, STEPHENDUDLEYFIELD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Stockbridge, in the county of Berkshire and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful.Improvements in Telephones, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to telephony, and has 
for its object to increase the induction in a 
magneto telephone, and render such instru 
ment serviceable for the transmission of 
speech over longer distances and to increase 
its loudness and clearness. 
In carrying out my invention I employ a 
plurality of diaphragms, all of which are me 
chanically connected to the same armature, 
and which are so arranged that they will al 
ways vibrate synchronously with the sound 
waves, and, by reason of their number, in 
crease the mechanical effort exerted upon the 
magnetic conductor or armature. I also make 
use of a special device for equalizing the 
strain upon the diaphragm due to the mag 
luetic attraction between the magnet and its 
armature. 
The several features of novelty of my in 
vention will be more particularly described 
hereinafter and will be definitely indicated 
in the claims appended to this specification. 
In the accompanying drawings which illus 
trate my invention, Figure 1 is a view partly 
in section of an apparatus provided with two 
actuating diaphragms embodying my im 
provements. Fig. 2 is a detail sectional view 
of the armature. Fig. 3 is a perspective view 
of an apparatus provided with three control 
ling diaphragms. Fig. 4 is a side elevation 
of a portion of an instrument for equalizing 
the strain upon the diaphragm by the arma 
ture in the several positions of the latter; and 
Fig. 5 is a modification in which an armature 
may be supported upon one end and ren 
dered inharmonious by being placed in a 
horizontal position in the magnetic field. 
Each diaphragm is mechanically connected 
with an armature 1, which is pivotally mount 
ed in a magnetic field upon a suitable sup 
port 7, the two extremities confronting the 
north and south poles of a magnet Or mag 
nets. The pivotal mounting should be as 
near as possible at the center of gravity of 
the armature, since by such a mode of Sup 
port the armature is given a neutral vibra 
tory rate equally responsive to vibrations of 
a composite character, and is rendered in 
harmonious so that it will not impose upon 
the line any electrical vibrations due to a 
rate of its own. As shown in the figure, a 
permanent magnet N, S is used, provided 
with soft iron pole-pieces upon which coils 2, 
3 are mounted, and the armature 1 may be a 
stiff piece of soft iron of the proper cross 
section to conduct the lines of force developed 
by the magnet N, S. The armature is poised 
upon needle points entering sockets at its 
longitudinal center, and will normally 
be 
strongly attracted by the poles of the mag 
net. A suitable mechanical connection is 
provided between one end of the armature 
and the diaphragm or diaphragms, which ma 
be an inelastic cord or wire. I preferably 
use a plurality of diaphragms, and in such 
case each diaphragm will be connected by a 
cord or wire 4, 5, Fig.1, with an equalizing 
bar 6, which in turn is connected with one 
end of the armature. Where more than two 
diaphragms are used the equalizing bar will 
be centrally connected with the armature, 
and the connections with the diaphragms 
Will be made at equal radial distances from 
the center. The mouth-piece will be suit 
ably shaped so as to convey the air waves to 
the several diaphragms, and suitable recesses 
to receive the diaphragms and caps to con 
fine them in place will be provided in any 
convenient manner. The coils 2, 3 may be 
connected in series relation and have their 
free terminals connected directly to line, in 
which case they will be wound with com 
paratively fine wire, so as to admit of a large 
number of turns in a small compass and de 
velop an electro-motive-force of considerable 
tension; or they may be wound with coarser 
wire and be connected in the primary circuit 
of a local induction coil, by which the ten 
sion of the current may be raised. The form 
er method will, however, be preferred for its 
simplicity of construction. 
To guard against actual contact between 
the magnet poles and vibratory armature, 
when Working with great strength of polari 
Zation, I interpose in the connecting medium 
between the armature and the diaphragm a 
heel and toe lever toggle, as indicated at 9 in 
85 
95 
co 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
- 
507,728 
Fig. 4, so that the diaphragms acquire a dred grains, and, assuming that ten grains of 
iron can carry ten lines of force, one hun 
shifting mechanical advantage over the ar 
dred grains will carry ten times as many, and 
mature. The nearer the armature approaches 
as the induced current developed by these 
the magnet the greater the leverage which 
organizations is practically proportional to 
the diaphragm acquires in its control. By 
the variation of resistance of the magnetic 
this means Isecure a uniform strain upon the 
field, it will be seen that a multiplication of 
diaphragm in all positions of the armature. 
the diaphragms will multiply the inductive 
In lieu of the vertical arrangement shown in 
effect. The diaphragms should be so con 
Figs. 2 and 3, the armature may be support 
structed that they will vibrate in perfect uni 
ed horizontally, as shown in Fig. 5, in which 
son, to which end they should be made of 
case it may be pivoted at one end and will 
the same diameter and thickness, so that 
in this condition, being acted upon by gravity, 
when struck by waves of a given power they 
be equally responsive to waves of any pe 
will all respond with equal promptness. If 
riod and will not impose upon line vibra 
of different sizes or different thicknesses, one 
tions due to its own rate. 
will lag more or less behind the others, and 
A marked advantage follows from the use 
an indifferent effect will be realized. Suit 
of the independent armature 1, for the rea 
able means may be provided, as indicated in 
son that such armature can be given Sufi 
the drawings, for adjusting the pole-pieces 
cient cross-section to carry a large number 
With reference to the armature. 
of lines of force, and the lines of force them 
Having thus described my invention, what 
selves will always keep it under stress and 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
in a condition for actuation by the diaphragm 
Patent, is 
or diaphragms to which it is connected. In 
1. A magneto telephone comprising a plu 
a magneto instrument as ordinarily con 
rality of diaphragms mechanically connected 
structed the diaphragm is the only medium 
to an induction generator in such relation 
for varying the intensity of the magnetic 
that the mechanical energy of all the dia 
field, and such diaphragm being necessarily 
phragms will be added together in effecting 
very thin when made of iron, in order to re 
a movement of the generator, the diaphragms 
spond to the sound waves, the resistance of 
being equidistant from a common mouth 
the magnetic field is varied but a little and 
piece. 
the induced currents are comparatively weak. 
2. A magneto telephone provided with a 
When, however, a mechanically connected 
plurality of diaphragms, mechanical connec 
independent armature is used, such armature 
tions between each diaphragm and an induc 
may be made of any desired thickness, and 
tion generator, and means for equalizing the 
any variation of its position in obedience to 
tension upon all of the diaphragms during 
the movements of the diaphragm will very 
the operation of the telephone. 
considerably affect the magnetic conductiv 
3. A magneto telephone comprising a plu 
ity of the magnetic field in which it is located. 
rality of diaphragms of equal size and resil 
The vibrating diaphragms may, of course, be 
iency, mechanical connections between the 
made of any suitable material, whether me 
Several diaphragms and a vibrating armature 
tallic or not. 
supported in a magnetic field, means for 
Another advantage, and one of equal im 
equalizing the tension upon all of the dia 
portance, results from the employment of a 
phragms during the operation of the telephone 
plurality of diaphragms. The energy devel 
and generating coils in inductive relation to 
oped by the voice in speech is transmitted to 
the magnetic field. 
the whole body of air surrounding the speaker 
4. A magneto telephone provided with an 
and is capable of affecting any number of 
armature Supported in a magnetic field, a 
diaphragms which may be brought within 
compensating device for equalizing the strain 
range of the air vibrations, just as the voice 
of said armature upon a diaphragm in all po 
of a speaker may be heard by any number of 
sitions of the armature, and a coil inductively 
hearers within range of his voice. It is evi 
related to the magnetic field. 
dent, therefore, that if a plurality of dia 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
phragms be employed, each diaphragm will 
scribed my name this 28th day of June, A.D. 
utilize part of the energy of the voice. Where 
but a single diaphragm is employed, only a 
1893. 
small portion of the energy is utilized. It 
follows that if a single diaphragm can effect 
ively control an armature weighing ten 
grains, ten such diaphragms, if working in 
unison, can control one weighing one hun 
F. S. AYMAR, Jr., 
THEO. C. BURNETT. 
STEPHEN DUDLEY FIELD. 
Witnesses: 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
O 
IO 5 
IO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507828.txt	 
  
 
 
  
 
  
(No Model.) 
F. E. MONTANUS. 
COOKING UTENSIL, 
No. 507,828, 
Patented Oct. 31, 1893, 
as S 
he 
Y S3s 
 
i. SX% /2 
s 7 
SS 
g --- -- - --- 
e 
s 
N.area 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRIEDRICK ELI MONTANUS, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
COOKING UTENS L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,828, dated October 31, 1893. 
Application filed February 24, 1893, Serial No. 468,566. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FRIEDRICK ELI MON 
TANUS, a citizen of the United States, and a 
resident of Washington, in the District of Co 
lumbia, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Cooking Utensils; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, . 
clear and exact description of the invention, 
which Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
tion, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved cooking utensil, showing the same as 
it appears when folded up and notin use, but 
ready to be put into the pocket or satchel. 
Fig. 2 is a side view of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
transyerse sectional view on line ac-ein Fig. 
2. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal sectional view on 
line fly in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a perspective 
View, showing the apparatus opened up and 
placed in operative position ready for use; 
One of the side-plates being broken away in 
part, to show the interior of the stove or heat 
ing-chamber; and Fig. 6 is a transverse sec 
tional view on a vertical plane through the 
apparatus in its working position. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in all the figures. 
This invention relates to portable devices 
for cooking and culinary purposes, and has 
for its object to provide a portable apparatus 
especially adapted to the wants of travelers, 
tourists and excursionists, for making coffee, 
tea, or boiling water for culinary and other 
purposes, Which is in the nature of a com 
bined coffee-pot or cooking vessel, and stove 
or heater, that can be folded up when not in 
use, so that it may be carried conveniently in 
the pocket, satchel or traveling bag, and can 
be made instantly available and ready for use 
by any person, even a child, when desired. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the letter A denotes the boiler of my appara 
tus, which, unlike an ordinary coffee-pot or 
kettle, is of a flat rectangular shape, having, 
for convenience when carried in the pocket, 
rounded corners, a, and a beveled or rounded 
top rim b. About one third part of the top 
plate or cover B is fastened solid to the flat 
body A, while the other part B, covering 
about two thirds is hinged at b' to the fixed 
part B, forming a lid or cover through which 
the shallow vessel A may be filled with water, 
milk, prepared soup, or anything else, whether 
fluid or solid in its nature, that it is desired 
to boil or heat. By making the hinged cover 
B' large, and hinging it in the manner shown, 
solid or semi-solid articles of food, such as 
oysters, cutlets, eggs, or small fruit and veg 
etables, may be placed into the receptacle A 
for cooking or heating. 
At the closed end of the flat receptacle is a 
short spout C, preferably covered with a cap 
c, attached to the device by a short chain; 
and fastened to the sides by hinges did, are 
two wire bails, D and D', which when opened 
out form handles for holding and manipu 
lating the apparatus when in use. One of 
these bails, D', is slightly larger than the 
other, so that in folding down the handles 
over the flat top, as shown in Figs. 1 to 4, one 
will overlap the other and both bails will lie 
down even and flat across the top or upper side 
of the apparatus. The side hinges d and d 
also serve as hinges for the side plates E and 
E", which are flat plates of tin or other suit 
able sheet metal, cut away at their upper 
corners to form upper air vents, e, one in 
each corner, in addition to which each of the 
plates E E has a row of apertures, e, near 
the lower edge, forming air inlets, the func 
tion of which is to supply the chamber formed 
by the folding sides and ends with air when 
the lamp is burning. At each end of the re 
ceptacle A is also hinged (upon hinges fand 
f') a plate F and F, in all respects similar to 
the side plates E and E', and, like these, pro 
vided with a row of bottom holes, or air in 
lets e', and cut off obliquely at the upper 
corners to form, in conjunction with the sim 
ilarly cut off side plates, the upper air-ducts 
or corner vents e. When in their extended 
or opened-up position, the hinged side and 
end plates are locked together at the corners 
by small wire hooks G, hooked into slots g; 
or any other suitable simple and easily ma 
nipulated fastening device may be substi 
tuted for the hooks and slots. 
I prefer to construct the bail hinges d and 
side-plate hingesh in such a manner that the 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
--- 
95 
IOC 
507,828 
bent ends of the bails will answer the pur 
poses of a pin or pintle for both. To this end, 
the ends of the wire handle-bails D and D'are 
bent at right angles, as shown at H, and in 
serted through the hinge-sleeves d, the bent 
parts or elbows H being sufficiently long to 
project some distance on the other side of 
said sleeves so as to enter the hinge-sleeves 
hh appertaining to the side plates E and E'; 
the hinge-sleeves d being formed in the usual 
way by bending or rolling a small strip of 
sheet-metal into the form of a tube or sleeve 
andfastening it by soldering or riveting its flap 
or leaf upon the sides of the receptacle A, the 
proper distance apart. The hinge-sleeves h. 
appertaining to the side plates (as well as 
those of the end plates) are preferably made 
in one piece or integral with the plates them 
selves by leaving sufficient metal in cutting 
out the same from the flat metal blanks, and 
are then rolled to form sleeves or tubes for 
the insertion of the free ends of the elbows 
H, which thus form the pintles for both hinges 
d and h. 
By spreading apart the sides of the 
bail, the hinge elbows H H may readily be 
withdrawn from the hinges h. h of the side 
plates, so that the latter can be detached from 
the vessel A whenever desired. 
When the side plates and end plates are 
folded down flat against the bottom, and the 
bails or handles folded down upon each other 
across the top, as shown in the first four fig 
ures on the drawings, the whole apparatus 
can be easily carried in the pocket, or in a 
small satchelor traveling bag. Inside of the 
receptacle I place an alcohol or other suitable 
lamp L, a folding cup K, a small flask for oil 
or alcohol, a couple of spoons, and any other 
implements which it may be desired to carry 
along and for which there is room. When 
the apparatus is to be used, these articles are 
taken out, the vessel A is filled with water or 
whatever else it may be desired to boil or heat, 
the handles are spread out, so that the vessel 
can be carried and handled without burning 
the fingers, and the side and end plates are 
folded out at right angles to the bottom and 
hooked together in the corners. The lamp, 
after having had its wick saturated with al 
cohol, is then lighted and placed within the 
heating-chamber or stove J formed by the side 
and end plates; and, if desired, either one of 
the end plates may be unhooked at the cor 
ners and lifted, as indicated in dotted lines in 
Fig. 5, to increase the air supply to the lamp. 
When this is done, the apparatus (if used in 
the open air) should be so placed that its 
closed end will face the wind and the open 
end be on the lee side. In windy or rainy 
weather, it may be necessary or desirable to 
close all the sides; but in that event a suffi 
cient supply of air for combustion will al 
ways enter the stove chamber through the 
bottom apertures e', which encircle the closed 
chamber on all sides, while the products of 
combustion will pass of through the upper 
corner apertures e. By making the lamp 
high enough so as to bring its wick close to 
the flat bottom of the boiler or receptacle A, 
the flame will spread evenly over the entire 
area of the bottom, so that the contents of the 
vessel will soon reach the boiling point. 
The folding side plates E E and the end 
plates F. F., besides forming the sides and 
ends for the stove or heating chamber when 
the apparatus is in use, have another import 
tant function, viz: when folded down flat 
against the bottom, they form a shield of 
guard for the same, covering its soot and 
blackened surface so that it cannot soil the 
pocket or other receptacle in which the appa 
ratus is carried. If desired, the whole device, 
when folded, may be placed within a shallow 
seamless metal box with a flat removable top, 
so that the top and bottom of this outside box 
or case may be used as pans for cooking or 
frying, or as plates to eat from. 
It is desirable that the fixed top part B of 
the flat boiler or vessel. A should extend only 
about one-third the length of the vessel, the 
remaining two thirds being covered by the 
hinged lid B'. This is for the reason that 
this construction will permit of the easy in 
sertion of the fingers and cleaning-cloth S0 as 
to reach all the way to the end of the vessel, 
so that the same may be cleaned out thor 
oughly and effectually after use. If a larger 
part of the vessel were closed with a rigid or 
immovable cover, it would be difficult to get 
access to all of the interior, especially the cor 
ners, which are made rounded for the double 
purpose of facilitating their thorough clean 
ing inside and out, as well as to prevent the 
outside corners from catching into the lining 
of the pocket when the apparatus is carried 
in one. Sharp metal corners would be ob 
jectionable on these grounds, and I always 
construct the vessel A with rounded corners 
a and a rounded or beveled edge b. By cut 
ting off the corners of the folding side and 
end plates at e, there will be no sharp corners 
to protrude beyond the rounded corners a of 
the vessel or receptacle A. 
The convenience of this apparatus speaks 
for itself and does not require further demon 
stration. It may, of course, be made of va 
rious sizes to suit different conditions and re 
quirements; it may be made small enough for 
the wants of a single person only, so that it 
can be readily carried in the pocket (includ 
ing lamp, cup, spoons, and other necessary 
implements); or it may be large enough to 
serve the wants of a whole picnicking party. 
Again, it may be made very plain and ineX 
pensive, from tin or galvanized sheet iron; 
or, if desired, it can be made highly orna 
mental by nickel or silver-plating, engraving, 
and eunbellishments in various ways, SO as to 
answer the purpose of an always welcome gift 
to the sportsman, canoeist or tourist. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
The portable cooking utensil herein shown 
Io 
20 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
yo 
95 
CO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
 
507,828 
3 
and described, comprising the flat body or led and combined substantially as and for the To 
vessel A having hinged top cover B' and purpose herein shown and set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
spout C; hinged and overlapping handle-bails 
D D'; hinged side-plates E and E' having air my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
holes e' and cut off obliquely at their upper in presence of two witnesses. 
corners; and hinged end plates F and F hav- 
FRIEDRICK ELI MONTANUS. 
ing air holes e' and cut off at their upper cor-- 
ners, and provided with hooks for connecting 
them to the hinged side plates; all construct- 
LEWIS BAGGER, 
STEWART SHEA. 
Witnesses: 
- 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US507929.txt	(No Model.) 
W., & R, PRINGLE, 
THREAD CARRIER FOR, KNITTING MACHINES 
No. 507,929, 
Patented 30, 3, 1893. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER PRINGLE AND ROBERT PRINGLE, OF HAWICK, SCOTLAND. 
THREAD-CARRIER FOR KNTT NG-MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 507,929, dated October 31, 1893. 
Application filed August 11, 1893, Serial No. 482,886, (No model.) Patented in England May 7, 1892, No, 8,674, 
15 
2 O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, WALTER PRINGLE and 
ROBERT PRINGLE, subjects of the Queen of 
Great Britain, residing at Hawick, in the 
5 county of Roxburgh, Scotland, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Thread-Carriers for Knitting-Machines, (for 
which we have obtained Letters Patent in 
Great Britain, No. 8,674, dated May 7, 1892;) 
to and we do hereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
Our invention relates to thread carriers or 
guides for straight bar knitting machines 
with movable needles, and the object of our 
improvements is the manufacture of a better 
class of knitted plaited goods or fabrics than 
it is possible to make with any other appli 
ance with which we are acquainted. 
We attain the object of our invention by 
the mechanism illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of our improved 
thread carrier; Fig. 2 a front elevation of the 
same and Fig. 3 a plan of the same. Fig. 4 
is a side elevation of an alternative method 
of constructing our thread carrier; Fig. 5 an 
o elevation of the arrangement of cams used 
for making an article which is fashioned at 
the sides only and Fig. 6 an elevation of the 
arrangement of the cams used for making the 
heel and instep of a stocking. 
5 Our improved carrier is attached to a car 
rier rod a which may be of any of the ordi 
nary Sections, and mounted and actuated by 
the usual mechanisms, the length of the trav 
erse of the same being regulated by stops 
o which are moved by screws as is usual in this 
class of machines. The carrier rod a is pro 
vided with brackets b to which the plate c is 
adjustably attached, this latter carrying the 
thread guided which in our improved carrier 
5 is made with an eyee for the knitting thread, 
and a tube f for the plaiting thread. This 
tube f is fitted to slide in the end of the guide 
(land is connected by a link g to a lever h. 
which is pivoted at k upon the plate c and is 
D acted upon by a spring l which always tends 
to keep the tube fin its lowest position. 
In the arrangement shown in Fig. 4 the tube 
f is connected directly to the lever h, the end 
of which is slotted to allow of its moving 
freely, while the upper end of the tube is 55 
guided by the plate c. 
In the manufacture of knitted plaited work 
it is desirable that the plaiting thread should 
be laid upon the needles in such a position 
that when the loops are knocked over the 
same the plaiting thread shall appear upon 
the face of the fabric, and we do this with 
our carrier. 
When making an article which has to be 
fashioned at the sides only we use to each 
division of the machine the arrangement of 
cams shown at Fig. 5. The cams m at the 
left hand side of each division are all mounted 
upon a rod in which is connected at the end 
of the machine to the fashioning screw nut, 
by which the cams are maintained at the same 
relative position with the selvage of the fab 
ric. The cams o at the right hand side of each 
division of needles are mounted upon a rod 
p, which is connected to, and actuated by a 
screw nut at the end of the machine opposite 
to that carrying the screw for the rod in. 
When the thread carriers start to traverse 
across the needles from left to right, the le 
vers h pass from under the cams m, where- 8o 
upon the springs l force down the tubes f 
which remain in their lowest position until 
the carriers reach the opposite side of the 
fabric, when the levers h, pass under the cams 
o, which raise the tubes f and allow the sink- 85 
ers to come forward and divide the thread 
upon the needles without damaging the car 
riers or sinkers. 
When a knitted plaited stocking is being 
made with our carriers, the leg portion is go 
made in the same way as an article fashioned 
at the sides only. When the heel and instep 
are reached, the stocking is divided, and two 
additional heeling thread carriers brought 
into action, the legging being then used for 95 
the instep. The heel pieces require fashion 
ing at the outside edges and the cams q and r 
Fig. 6 are used, these cams being mounted 
upon rods s and t which are connected to and 
actuated by the fashioning screws. The in- roo 
side edges of the heel and outside edges of the 
instep are made parallel to each other, and 
75 
507,929 
the tubes of the thread carriers when at these 
edges are raised by the cams u and v which 
may be arranged to act upon the instep and 
heeling carriers alternately. The cams u and 
v may be removably attached to a fixed rod 
'u' or each cam may be attached to a separate 
rod capable of being moved endwise clear of 
the carriers when required. After the heel 
is completed the heeling carriers and the 
cams u and y are thrown out of action, and 
the foot and toe of the stocking made by the 
legging carrier, the camsgand r being brought 
into action for this portion of the stocking 
and for the fashionings at the toe. 
We are aware that knitting machine thread 
carriers have been made with one fixed eye, 
and with an eye capable of being moved to 
the right or left of the former, and we lay no 
claim to carriers of this description, nor to 
O 
I5 
the general principle of a thread carrier with 20 
two guide eyes. 
What we do claim, and desiro to secure by 
Letters atent in the United States, is 
A knitting machine thread carrier having 
one fixed eye for the knitting thread, and a 25 
second eye in the form of a tube for the plait 
ing thread, the tube being connected to a le 
ver by which it can be raised and lowered at 
the end and beginning of the traverse of the 
thread carrier by means of cam surfaces 3o 
mounted upon bars capable of being moved 
in and out. 
WALTER PRINGLE. 
ROBERT PRINGLE. 
Witnesses: 
ALEXANDER SCOTT, 
ARCHIBALDDONALDSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508029.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. LIDBACK. 
COMBINATION METAL WORKING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 508,029. 
Patented Now, 7, 1893. 
f/ 
1, I: ls? 
 
 
  
 
 
Pm -CE PE 
| 
 
s 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
spy 
na 
THE NATonAL Larthographing coveanY. 
wASHINGTON, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
J. A. LIDBACK. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
COMBINATION METAL WORKING MACHINE. 
No. 508,029, 
i 
?' 
v 
Patented Now, 7, 1893, 
y2 
A $7.6 
222 22 
This NATIONAL LITHOGRAPHING COMPANY., 
WASINGTON, d. c. 
1G. au 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. LIDBACK, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
coMBINATION METAL-WORKING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,029, dated November 7, 1893. 
Application filed September 6, 1892, Serial No. 445,189, (No model.) 
- 
55 
65 
75 
5 
O 
To all, whom it invazy concern: 
Beit known that, JOHN A. LIDBACK, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Portland, 
in the county of Cumberland and State of 
Maine, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Combination Metal-Work 
ing Machines; and Idohereby declare the foll 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the Same. 
My invention relates to a machine for do 
ing a large variety of work such as is ordi 
narily done in a machine shop. 
The object of the invention is to construct a 
single machine which shall be capable of use. 
in shaping, boring, drilling, planing, screw and 
gear cutting, and many other kinds of work. 
As metal Working machines are now made 
and used in a machine shop, many of them 
My ma 
remain idle a great part of the time. 
chine being adapted for many different kinds 
of work is designed to be always in use on one 
kind or another. 
The principal features of the machine are 
a shaper bar or sliding headstock having a 
spindle mounted therein, a supporting bar 
for the tool stock having an offset for Sup 
porting the outer end of the tool arbor and a 
revolving table which has several faces for 
holding different kinds of work, and which 
also has lateral and vertical feed. 
I illustrate my invention in the accompa 
nying drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a plan of my machine. Fig. 2 
is a part side view and part central vertical 
section with certain parts omitted. Fig. 3 is 
a front view. Fig. 4 is a section on XX of 
Fig. 1 and Y Y of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a section 
on XX of Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is a detail of one of 
the clutches, Fig. 7 is a detail showing clutch, 
Fig. 8 
and lever which operates the same. 
is a section on ZZ of Fig. 3. Fig. 9 is section 
immediately above the gear S showing its 
Fig. 10 is front 
connection with the shaft. 
view of end of the sliding headstock. Fig.11 
is side view of the same. Fig. 12 is a section 
on YY of Fig. 3, showing manner of securing. 
the table to the apron. 
A represents the framework or stand on 
which the machine is mounted. 
. 
s 
B is the bed piece or base of the machine, 
it being secured to the top of the stand A. 
On the bed piece B is the sliding headstock 
C which performs the same functions as the 
shaper bar in a shaping machine when my 
machine is being used as a shaping machine 
and as a headstock when my machine is used 
as a milling machine. The headstock is held 
in guides in such a manner as to be capable 
of sliding on the bed piece. It is held down 
by side plates b' bolted to the top of the bed 
piece, (Fig. 3.) On the sides of the sliding 
headstock I have formed brackets or shelves 
b for convenience in holding tools. Two up 
right bearings 
are formed on the headstock 
and in the lower portion of these bearings is 
journaled the spindle E which is preferably 
made hollow. e e are the bushings in which 
the spindle E turns. 
The spindle E is rotated by means of a 
gear G which is secured to it as here shown 
immediately in the rear of the rear bearing i. 
The gear G has a rearward extending collar 
or hub within which fits loosely the enlarged 
end of the feed screw D. The screw is held 
in place in the hub by a packing ring d. 
The feed screw D is operated by a revolv 
ing nut H' which is journaled in a bearing J 
Secured to the rear of the bed piece and ex 
tending from one side to the other over the 
rear extension of the headstock C. On the 
rear end of the nut His the gear H by which 
it is rotated, these two parts being preferably 
formed in one piece. The inner end of the 
nut extends through the bearing J and the 
nut is held in place by collar h. 
Power is conveyed to the gears G and H 
for rotating the spindle and screw by means 
of the main driving pulleys M which are se 
cured to the end of a shaft L which is jour 
naled in the bearings J and directly above 
the screw D. A pinion k on said shaft drives 
the gear H and a pinion l drives the gear G. 
Both the pinions k and l are normally loose 
on the shaft L and are brought into action by 
the clutchesi and respectively. The clutch 
lis shown as an ordinary forked clutch, a 
particular description of which is not neces 
sary. 
The clutch i is the same except that it 
extends through the box J as shown in Fig. 6. 
The clutches landi are operated by forked 
95 
CO 
25 
45 
 
503,029 
. 
levers land f' which are omitted from Fig. 2 
but are shown in Figs. 1 and 7. 
The gear H when it takes its motion direct 
from the pinion k on the main shaft feeds 
the screw and consequently the headstock, 
with the rapid motion necessary to a shaping 
machine. I have provided for a slow feed of 
the screw for use in screw cutting and other 
like work requiring a slow feed. In obtain 
ing the slow feed I impart motion to the gear 
H from a pinion on the main shaft directly 
in rear of the pinion k by means of a train 
of gears t, t and pinion it such as are com 
monly used on engine lathes. The gear ti 
and pinion it are made in one piece and are 
mounted on the end of an arm t which is 
pivoted to the fixed shaft l' on which the 
gear i is mounted. The gear i engages the 
pinion k', and the pinion t' engages the gear 
t which in turn engages the gear II. When 
the slow feed is not required the arm i is 
swung back and the gear t disengaged from 
the pinion le. 
On the front end of the head 
stock I place a tool block F such as is com 
monly used in shaping machines and which 
needs no particular description. 
F represents the vertical feed screw and f' 
is the tool. 
The tool block is supported from the end 
of a supporting bar I which is journaled in 
the upper part of the bearings i. i. This bar 
is capable of being rotated in its bearings in 
snch a mauner as to swing the tool block en 
tirely away from the spindle against the end 
of which it rests when in its working position. 
The bearings i may be clamped on the bar I 
by suitable bolts so that the bar is held rig 
idly or loosely as required. The tool block is 
fastened to the front end of the headstock by 
means of bolts f (Fig. 11) the heads of which 
enter a dove-tailed slot f', the outer edge be 
ing secured to the lugs f. This groove is con 
centric with the center of rotation of the bar 
I so that if the bolts fare loosened and the 
bar turned the bolts will leave the groove and 
the tool stock will be released from the slid 
ing headstock C. 
On the same end of the bar I as the tool 
stock is the offset or arm i' having a pin or 
pivot used to support the outer end of the 
tool arbor i, when turned down into the po 
sition shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2. 2 rep 
resents the milling tool. 
In the front part of the machine I provide 
a revolving table O preferably made square 
and hollow, the different sides of which are 
adapted for holding different kinds of work. 
As herein shown I make two adjacent sides 
with the ordinary dove-tail grooves running 
at right angles to each other. On the third 
side which is the lower side shown in the 
drawings is a turret P mounted on guides p. 
p is a bracket for supporting the turret to 
give the latter sufficient travel away from the 
headstock. The table O is pivoted to the 
apron Qwhich has a cylindrical projection or 
hub in front which enters the inner end of 
the table (see Fig. 8) and on which it is adapted 
to rotate. The table Ois secured to the apron 
Q by means of bolts O' the inner ends of which 
are turned at right angles and fit into an an 
nular groove O formed around the outside of 
the hub. (See Fig. 12.) 
The apron Q is supported in horizontal 
guide q' in the cross slide R in such a man 
ner that it has a horizontal motion with re 
lation to said cross slide which is itself sup 
ported in vertical guides q on the front of the 
Stand. 
I provide a lateral feed for the apron and 
table by means of the feed screw r which ex 
tends through the apron and is journaled in 
the ends of the cross slide. On each end of the 
feed screw is a normally loose gear '' which 
is capable of being connected or disconnected 
from the screw by means of clutches r. 
The cross slide R is raised and lowered by 
means of a feed screw r" stepped in the base 
of the machine. On the vertical feed screw 
r' is a miter gear which engages two miter 
gears r", one on each side, each being fixed to 
the inner end of a shaft r. The outer end of 
each of the shafts is journaled in the lower 
portion of the cross slide. On the outer ends 
of the shaft rare normally loose gears r 
which are connected with the shaft by means 
of clutches r. Intermediate gears r, ricon 
nect the gears r with the gears r". Hubs r 
are provided on the gears r", r by which the 
screws r and r may be turned by a wrench 
and the table fed by hand. The automatic 
feed of the two feed screws r and r is pro 
vided for by a connection with the drawing 
mechanism at the rear end of the machine. 
A horizontal shaft S is journaled in bearings 
SS on the rear of the cross slide R. On its 
outer end is a gear Swhich engages with the 
intermediate gear r(Fig. 3). On its inner 
end is a miter gear S which engages with a 
miter gear S connected with a vertical shaft 
S by means of a spline working in a groove S' 
so that the gear has a vertical movement on 
the vertical shaft S, (Fig. 9.) A guide S ex 
tends from the bearings Sover the gear Sand 
holds the latter in contact with the gear S. 
On the upper end of the vertical shaft S is 
a miter gear in which engages with a like gear 
on the end of a horizontal shaft N journaled 
in bearings n' and in on the side of the ma 
chine. On the rear end of the shaft N is a 
set of coue pulleys n' which may be connect 
ed by a belt with a set of cone pulley's n, on 
the independent shaft m'. On this shaft m' 
is a gear t which engages the pinion * on 
the main driving shaft. It will thus be seen 
that the gear tacting through the shafts and 
gears and pulleys last described drives the 
feed screw r by which the apron is fed on the 
cross slide and operates also the screw r" 
which feeds the cross slides vertically. Either 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
5 5 
65 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
IoS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
::::::::::::::::::::, . 
508,029: 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
feed screw or both may be discontinued by 
disconnecting the clutches rand r. 
The feed of the sliding headstock C is re 
versed as in ordinary shaping machines. 
On the top of the bed piece B is a guide b 
(Fig. 1) in which slides a barb" on the rear 
end of which is a shipper b. Two stopsbb 
are secured to the bar band an arm bisse 
cured to the headstock between the stops b 
so that it will strike them in turn as the head 
stock reciprocates. Both the stopsband the 
arm are made adjustable as to position so 
that the headstock may have a long or a short. 
motion. 
The cross bar W furnishes a support for 
the rear ends of the shaftsm' and l'. 
Having thus described the construction of 
my machine, its mode of operation will be 
readily understood. When used as a shaper 
the tool stock F is in the position shown in 
Fig. 2, the bart (Fig. 1) and its connecting 
gears are swung back and disconnected from 
the main shaft, the clutch is disconnected, 
the clutchi is connected with pinion k, and 
the clutches rand rare disconnected or con 
nected according to whether a side feed or a 
vertical feed is desired on the table. 
The 
feeding nut H takes its motion from the pin 
ion lc being reversed by the shipper in the 
ordinary manner. 
For milling and boring 
the bar I is turned over after loosening the 
bolts f4 (Fig. 11) bringing the offset i down 
and it is then drawn out sufficiently far to 
allow the tool arbor l to be inserted. One end 
of the tool arbor is inserted in the conical 
end of the hollow spindle E and the other is 
supported by the pivot *. The tool arbor is 
rotated by the pinion l which turns the gear 
G. on the rear end of the spindle E. For 
drilling, a drill chuck is inserted in the ta 
pering hole in the end of the spindle, the tool 
arbor being removed. . 
... In using the machine as a turret lathe, th 
table is revolved so as to bring the turret on 
top. A suitable chuck is secured to the end 
of the spindle and operated by the same feed 
as is used for the shaper. For Screw cutting 
a chuck is fitted in the end of the spindle, and 
the bar on which the screw is to be cut is in 
serted into the hollow spindle projecting out 
over the table. A suitable cutting tool is se 
cured to the table and the spindle and rod are 
turned by the turning of the spindle as de 
scribed and fed by the slow motion imparted 
to the gear H through the train of gears t 
and t and it the arm t being thrown over to 
bring the gear tinto engagement with the 
pinion k (Fig.1). The outer end of the rod 
may be supported by the pivot if desired. 
The clutchi is thrown over and the pinion le. 
is disconnected. The screw being cut may be 
cut off or one section may be cut and the bar. 
being pulled out another section cut and so on. 
There are many other uses to which the ma 
chine can be put which will readily occur to a 
mechanic in operating it. It is obvious that 
the tool stock F may be set at any angle and 
fastened in position by the bolts f". 
The revolving table may be set at any angle 
and the shaping tool or the milling tool may 
be used to cut inclined surfaces. 
I claim 
1. In a metal working machine, the combi 
nation of a bed piece, a reciprocating head 
stock held in guides in said bed-piece, a tool 
block on the forward end of said head stock, 
a spindle journaled in said head-stock, a mill 
ing tool adapted to fit the end of said spindle 
and a table having its surface parallel with 
the axis of said spindle, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a metal working machine, the combi 
nation of a bed-piece, a reciprocating head 
stock moving in guides on said bed-piece, a 
spindle journaled in said head stock, a mill 
ing tool adapted to be secured to the end of 
said spindle, a tool-block secured in guides 
to the forward end of said head-stock in line 
with said spindle and adapted to be drawn 
away from the end of said spindle to permit 
the use of said milling tool, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a metal working machine, the combi 
nation of a bed piece, a reciprocating head 
stock moving in guides on said bed piece, a 
tool block removably secured to the forward 
end of said headstock, a spindle journaled in 
said headstock, a tool arbor adapted to be se 
cured to the end of said spindle and a sup 
port for the outer end of said tool arbor, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a metal Working machine the combi 
nation of a bed piece, a reciprocating head 
stock moving in guides on said bed piece, a 
spindle journaled in the lower part of said 
headstock, bearings or boxes on top of said 
headstock, a milling bar journaled in said 
boxes, a tool block on the forward end of said 
milling bar and extending down in front of 
said headstock, an offset or projection on the 
forward end of said milling bar extending 
laterally in the opposite direction from said: 
tool block and a tool arbor one end of which 
is adapted to engage the forward end of said 
spindle and the other end being adapted to 
be supported by the said offset or projection. 
5. In a metal Working machine, the combi 
nation of a reciprocating head stock, a tool 
block on the forward end of said head stock, 
a spindle journaled in said head stock, a mill 
ing tool adapted to fit the end of said spindle 
and a work table pivoted to the front of the 
machine and having a plurality of faces par 
allel with the axis of said spindle, substan 
tially as described. 
6. In a metal Working machine, the combi 
nation of a milling arbor, an apron held in 
guides below said milling arbor and having 
a vertical and lateral motion, a table pivoted 
to said apron and having its faces. parallel 
75 
95 
Od 
IIo 
II5 
. 
, 
I 25 
 
4. 
508,029 
with said milling arbor and means for fixing spindle pivoted at the end of said head stock, 
said table in any desired position, substan 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
tially as described. 
7. In a metal working machine, the combi 
: JOHN: A LIDBACK. 
5 nation of a reciprocating head stock, a spin 
die journaled in said head stock, a milling 
tool adapted to fit the end of said spindle and 
a tool-block and an arm for supporting said 
substantially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. . 
. 
Witnesses: 
S. W. BATES, 
JAMEST. TODD. 
d 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508129.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 508,129. 
 
 
  
 
S. 
W. P. CAR STARPHEN, Jr. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 7, 1893. 
8:S3 
8.33 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
AIWS 
Sitta 
n W/ W W7. % M7 
2 
10 
ge S. 
Q 
Na 
SNS-a- a 2. 
93 G ese 
SXSS 
SS 
a0-N 1 
7a. 
Z, N. 1s 
Wal- Canara-vu-au 
//WWEAVTOR 
NSTITU 
to H 
2H4/. 
sailH 
37 E. 
WITNE 
beace. 
 
THE NATIONAL LITHparAPHING COMPANY, 
WASHINATON, O, c, 
ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
No. 508,129, 
W, P. CAR STARPHEN, Jr. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Now, 7, 1893, 
3 
5' S 
2. sa-a-i-A2) 
22S: 2 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
INVENTOR 
W. Saw Caias. 
Sk 
By , a V-1 
 
AT TORNEY. 
THE NATIONAL LITHoGRAPHING comPANY., 
WASHINGTON, D, C, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM P. CARSTARPHEN, JR, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
ELECTRIC MotoR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,129, dated November 7, 1893. 
Application filed November 18, 1892, Serial No, 452,459, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all tufton, it may concern. 
Be it, known that I, WILLIAM P. CARSTAR 
PHEN, Jr., a citizen of the United States of 
America, residing at Denver, in the county 
of Arapahoe and State of Colorado, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Electric Motors; and I do declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying dra Wings, and to 
the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
electric motors and the object of the inven 
tion is to provide a device of this class which 
while being of simple, compact and economi 
cal construction, shall be reliable, durable 
and efficient in use. 
To these ends the invention consists of the 
features, arrangements and Combinations 
hereinafter described and claimed, and Will 
be fully understood by reference to the accom 
panying drawings, in which is illustrated an 
embodiment thereof. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation of 
the motor provided with a brush connected 
in operative relations with the armature by 
means of suitable gearing. Fig. 2 is alongi 
tudinal section of the same, the armature, 
however, being shown in elevation. Fig. 3 is 
a transverse section of the motor taken 
through the armature and field magnets. 
Fig. 4 is an inner end view of the rotatable 
cap carrying the brushes through which the 
current from the generator passes. Fig. 5 is 
section taken on the line a-ac, Fig. 4. Fig. 6 
is an end view of the motor with the cap re 
moved. Fig. 7 is a similar view on a larger 
scale. In this view several different positions 
of the brushes are shown in dotted lines Cor 
responding with different positions of the cap. 
Similar reference characters indicating cor 
responding parts or elements of the mechan 
ism in the several views let the numeral 5 
designate a cylindrical iron shell or case in 
closing the pole pieces 6, secured to the shell 
by screws 7.7. These pole pieces are cut 
away longitudinally on two opposite sides 
and wound from end to end in series forming 
the coils 8, the extremities 8 and 8 of which 
are attached respectively to the parts 9 and 
9 of a divided contact plate secured to the 
shell at one end of the pole pieces and insu 
lated from both the shell and said pieces as 
shown at 10. The parts 9 and 9 of the di 
vided contact are insulated from each other 
as shown at B, B. The connection between 
the series-wound field-coils is shown at 12 in 
Fig. 3. 
The armature 13 consists of the elongated 
H-shaped core 14 and the coil 15 wound from 
end to end or longitudinally thereon between 
the extremities 16 and 16. The extremities 
17 and 17 of the coil are respectively con 
nected with the segments 18 and 18 of a two 
part commutator attached to the armature 
but insulated therefrom by a disk 19. The 
armature core is formed integral and its 
extremities are provided with shouldered 
journals 20 and 20, the one passing through 
an aperture formed in the closed end 5 of the 
case and the other entering a recess 21 formed 
in the rotatable cap 22. The armature is 
held in place by this cap which in turnisse 
cured in operative relation to the shell by 
Screws 23 passing through apertures in the 
shell and entering a circumferential groove 
24 formed in rim or flange 25 of the cap which 
enters the shell far enough for the purpose. 
As shown in the drawings the journal 20 is 
provided with a beveled pinion 26 meshing 
with a gear wheel 27 carried by a spindle 28 
to which is secured a removable brush 29. 
This brush is formed in sections and Ireserve 
the right to claim the same in a separate appli 
cation to be subsequently filed. Instead of 
the cogged pinion 26 a friction disk or pulley 
may be employed, the Spindle carrying a cor 
responding friction wheel. This construc 
tion is preferable for some purposes, since 
when the spindle is actuated through a fric 
tional connection with the armature, the 
movement of the motor is practically noise 
less. It will be readily understood that any 
suitable tool designed for rotative operation 
may be attached to this spindle, which is sup 
ported in a sleeve 30 attached to a ring 32 
As shown in the 
made fast to the shell, 5. 
drawings this ring is formed integral with the 
shell extremity or disk 5. The free extremity 
of spindle 28 enters an aperture or recess 
95 
IOC 
Io 
3O 
35 
45 
 
508,129 
75 
90 
95 
do 
formed in a lug on the inner surface of the 
ring. The cap 22 carries the brushes 33, 34 
and 35 which are insulated therefrom and 
held in place by suitable screws 36. These 
brushes may be composed of any suitable ma 
terial forming a good conductor for the elec 
tric current, preferably copper. Brush 35 
has two contact arms 35 and 35, the former 
adapted to engage the contact ring composed 
of parts 9 and 9 heretofore described while 
the latter engages the commutator. Brushes 
33 and 34 are insulated from each other, the 
one engaging the commutator and the other 
the divided contact ring. The current enters 
the motor through one of the brushes 33, 34 
and passes out through the other. For in 
stance, if it enters at 33 it passes out at 34, 
and vice versa. The brushes 33 and 34 are 
connected with the circuit wires 37 and 38 
leading from the electrical source or from the 
main circuit, by wires 39 and 40 leading from 
the respective brushes to a post 46 and a two 
part contact 41 respectively. This postis made 
fast to an insulating base 42 secured to the 
cap 22. One wire 37 is electrically connected 
with this post through the medium of a contact 
washer 43 so connected with the post that the 
latter may turn freely without rotating the 
washer. One part 41 of the divided contact 
41 turns independently of the post, or re 
mains stationary while the latter rotates; the 
other part, 41 of the contact, is made fast to 
the post and turns therewith. The two-part 
contact 41 is insulated from the post. This 
construction gives the current two separate 
paths insulated from each other, through one 
of which it passes to the motor, while it passes 
from the same via the other. It also permits 
the free movement of the cap 22 without dis 
turbing the circuit wires 37 and 38, since the 
parts to which they are connected remainsta 
tionary while the post moves. The movable 
contacts are held in place upon the post 46 
by a nut 44 separated from contact 43 by a 
washer 45. 
If we assume that the current enters the 
motor through wire 37, it may be said to pass 
through contact 43, post 46, conductor 39, 
brush 34 to one part 9 or 9 of the divided 
contact and thence through the coil of the 
pole pieces to the other part of the divided 
contact, thence through brush 35, via arm. 35' 
and out through arm 35 to one segment of 
the commutator, thence through the armature 
coil and out through the other commutator seg 
ment and thence throughbrush 33, conductor 
40, the divided contact 41 and out through 
wire 38 to the other pole of the source. 
This motor, as shown in the drawings, is 
intended to be held in the hands of the user 
and operated from a battery source. Hence 
it is specially advantageous in doing work or 
performing functions heretofore only accom 
plished by muscular effort. Among its uses 
may be mentioned the grooming or cleaning 
of horses, removing dirt or stains from the 
walls of buildings and for polishing purposes 
of all kinds, as in blacking and polishing 
stoves, shoes, &c. 
The motor is fully under the control of the 
user, and may be started, reversed and 
stopped at pleasure by manipulating the mov 
able cap 22 carrying the contact brushes. 
The use of this cap is illustrated in Fig. 7 
where different positions of the brushes are 
illustrated in dotted lines. For instance, 
when the extremities of the brushes are in 
the positions shown at A, brush 34 and one 
arm of brush 35 engage the insulation B sepa 
rating parts 9 and 9 of the divided contact 
ring whereby the circuit is broken. Now to 
start the armature in one direction it is only 
necessary to turn the cap until these brush 
extremities occupy positions shown at D; 
while it may be started in the opposite direc 
tion by giving the cap a partial opposite turn 
when the brush extremities are in the posi 
tions shown at C. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In an electric motor the combination of 
an armature composed of the elongated H 
shaped integral iron core wound from end to 
end and a movable commutator attached to 
one end of the armature to which the termi 
mals of the armature coils lead, the field mag 
nets, and a closed cylindrical iron shell or 
case surrounding the same, and a divided 
contact plate with which the terminals of the 
field coils are connected, and the movable cap 
carrying brushes engaging the arnature and 
the divided contact plate, substantially as 
described. 
2. In an electric motor the combination of 
the armature and fields, a commutator to 
which the terminals of the armature coils 
lead a divided contact plate with which the 
terminals of the field coils are connected, and 
a movable cap carrying brushes engaging the 
armature and the divided contact, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In an electric motor the combination of 
the armature and field magnets, of a movable 
cap carrying a double brush and two single 
brushes, one single brush and one arm of the 
double brush engaging the commutator of 
the armature, the other single brush and the 
other arm of the double brush engaging a 
divided contact connected with the field coils, 
and Suitable connections with the external 
circuit, Substantially as described. 
4. In an electric motor the combination of 
the armature, the field magnets, and a suit 
able case, of a rotatable cap provided with a 
post carrying movable contacts with which 
the terminals of the external circuit are con 
nected and suitable means for connecting the 
field and armature coils with these contacts 
whereby as the cap is turned, the contacts 
Swivel on its post, substantially as described. 
5. An electric motor having the armature 
and field coils inclosed in a suitable case, 
the armature being journaled in the heads of 
the case, one journal projecting from the case 
o 
I I5 
(25. 
I 30 
O. 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
508,129 
3 
In testimony whereofIaffix my signature in 
and carrying a pinion or friction pulley and 
a spindle journaled in a projection attached presence of two witnesses. 
to the case and carrying a gear or friction pull 
ley connected with the friction pulley or pin- 
5 ion of the armature whereby as the latter ro- 
tates the spindle is actuated, substantially as 
described. 
WM. McCoNNELL, 
G. J. ROLLANDET. 
WILLIAM P. CARSTARPHEN, JR, 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508229.txt	
/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508329.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 508,329. 
 
P. A. MALM. 
PAPER, CUTTING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 7, 1893. 
WITNESSES - 
72, 
24ar-4- 
The National lithograpHING coMANY. 
WASHINGTON, d. c. 
Ae Zer 
4./2ZzZarz/ 
//WWEWTOR 
BY 46. 42 
s 
ATTORMEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 508,329. 
 
 
P. A. MALM, 
PAPER, CUTTING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 7, 1893. 
h 
SJ; 
2 
- - - - T - - - - - - -a- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
IZ. 2ziz 
SSS 
s 
2 Safe 
%22ziZ 
WITNESSES 
7% ?e 
THE NAroNAL THoGRAPHING coMPANY. 
WASHINGTON, C. C. 
//W/ENTOR: 
AeAer A. ZZZ272. 
2274. bez, 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER A. MALM, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PAPER - CUTTING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,829, dated November 7, 1893. 
Application filed February 9, 1893, Serial No. 461,642, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER A. MALM, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Paper-Cutting Machines, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in that class of paper cutting machines 
in Which the paper clamp is depressed upon 
the paper with a force commensurate to the 
resistance met by the knife, while cutting 
through the paper. 
The peculiar and novel construction of my 
machine is pointed out in the following speci 
fication and claims and illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings in which 
Figurel, represents a front elevation. Fig. 
2, is a transverse vertical section in the plane 
acac Fig. 1. Fig 3, is a similar section in the 
plane y y Fig. 1. Fig. 4, is a rear elevation. 
Fig. 5, is a horizontal section in the plane 2 
2 Fig. 1. Fig. 6, is a transverse vertical sec 
tion in the plane w w Fig. 1. 
Fig. 7, is a 
transverse section in the plane v v Fig. 1. 
In the drawings the letter. A designates the 
frame which supports the table B and forms 
the guide for the head or stock C which car 
ries the knife D and also for the clamp E. 
Said fralie forms the bearings for the driv 
ing shaft 10, on which are mounted the fly 
wheel 11 and the fast and loose pulleys 12, 
13, and also two cogwheels 14, 15, which turn 
loosely thereon but can be thrown in gear 
with it by means of a clutch sleeve 16. This 
clutch sleeve is feathered to the driving shaft 
10 and it is actuated by a bell crank lever 17, 
18, (Figs, 3 and 4) which has its fulcrum on 
a pin 19 secured in a fixed bracket 20 and 
the vertical arm 17 of which engages a groove 
in the clutch sleeve, while its horizontal arm 
18 connects by a rod 24 with an arm25, which 
extends from a rock shaft 21 mounted in the 
lower portion of the frame and carrying a 
treadle with two steps 22, 23, formed on the 
opposite sides of the rock shaft 21. If the 
step 22 of the treadle is depressed, the clutch 
sleeve 16 is thrown in positive engagement 
with the cog wheel 14 by teeth 26 formed on 
the clutch sleeve and engaging corresponding 
teeth formed on the cogwheel, but if the step 
23 of the treadle is depressed the clutch sleeve 
16 is thrown in engagement with a friction 
cone 27 formed on the cogwheel15. (See Figs. 
4 and 5.) 
The cog-wheel 14 engages a cog-wheel 28 
(Figs. 3 and 5) mounted on or secured to the 
inner end of a sleeve 29 which is mounted on a 
shaft 30 and thrown in engagement with the 
same by a feather key 31 (Fig. 5) and on the 
outer end of the sleeve 29 is secured a cogwheel 
32, which is geared by means of an interme 
diate cogwheel 33 with the cogwheel 15 (see 
Fig.2), so that, when the cogwheel14 is thrown 
in engagement with the driving shaft 10, the 
shaft 30 turns in a direction opposite to that in 
which the driving shaft turns, and if the clutch 
sleeve 16 is thrown in engagement with cog 
wheel 15, the shaft 30 rotates in the same di 
rection as the driving shaft 10. The sleeve 
29 turns loosely in a journal box 34 support 
ed by a fixed bracket 35. On the shaft 30 is 
formed a screw thread 36 which engages a nut 
37 and in the example shown in the drawings 
this screw thread is left handed, so that, if 
the shaft, 30 is turned in the direction of the 
arrow marked on it in Fig. 5, the nut is drawn 
inward and vice versa, but it is obvious that 
a right handed screw thread might be used, 
in which case the revolving motion of the 
shaft 30 would have to be reversed. 
The nut 37 connects by links 38 with arms 
39 which extend from a rock shaft 40 (Figs. 
1, 4 and 7) and this rock shaft connects by 
an arm 41 with a rod 42, the upper end of 
which is pivoted to the arm 43 of a lever pro 
vided with three arms 43, 44, and 45 and full 
crumed on a fixed pin 46. The arm 44 of this 
lever connects by a link 47 with the clamp E 
(best seen in Fig. 4) and the arm 45 of said 
lever connects by a rod 48 with a bell crank 
lever 49, which is connected by means of link 
50 with the clamp E, the link 50 being near 
one and the link 47 near the opposite end of 
the clamp, so that, when the nut 37 is moved 
by the action of the screw thread 36, the 
clamp is uniformly depressed or raised 
throughout its entire length. On the shaft 
30 is also mounted a head 51 which is pre 
vented from moving endwise on said shaft 
by two collars 52, which are firmly secured 
on the shaft and abut against shoulders 53 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
508,829 
25 
35 
formed in the interior of the head. (See Fig. 5.) 
This head connects by links' 54 with a forked 
lever 55 (Figs. 1, 4 and 6) which has its full 
crum on a fixed pin 56 and the lower end of 
which is connected by a pin 57 with two bars 
58, 59, which extend in opposite directions. 
The bar 59 connects by means of an arm 60 
With a rockshaft 61 (Figs. 1, 4, 5 and 7) which 
is journaled in fixed bearings 62 and which 
connects by means of an arm 63 and rod 64 
with the knifestock C. The bar 58 which 
extends from the pin 57 in a direction oppo 
site to the bar 59, connects by means of an 
arm 65 with a rock shaft 66 (Figs. 1, 2, 3 and 
4) which is mounted in fixed bearings 67 and 
connects by an arm 68 and rod 69 with the 
knife stock C. In the bar 59 is secured a pin 
70 from which extends a rope 71 over pulleys 
72, 73,74, to a weight 75 which normally rests 
upon the ground and is heavy enough to bal 
ance the weight of the knife stock and of the 
clamp. 
When the clamp E has been brought in 
Contact With the pile of paper by the action 
of the screw thread 36 upon the nut 37, its 
downward movement is arrested and as the 
Screw shaft 30 continues to rotate, it is caused 
to move in the direction of its axis and con 
sequently the head 51 begins to move in the 
direction of the arrows marked on it in Figs. 
land 4. By this movement the forked lever 
55 is caused to swing in the direction of arrow 
6 (Figs. 1 and 4) and the bar 59 is drawn in 
ward while the bar 58 is, pushed outward and 
by the action of these bars upon the rock 
shafts 61 and 66, the knife stock C. is caused 
to move down, and as the knife when it be 
gins to cut, meets with a resistance, the screw 
36 acts upon the nut 37 and the clamp is 
drawn farther down so as to exert upon the 
paper a pressure commensurate to the resist 
tance which the knife has to overcome in cut 
ting. At the same time as the knife descends, 
the weight 75 is raised up. When the knife 
has cut clear through the paper, the head 51 
strikes a lip76 which projects from a slide77. 
(Best seen in Fig. 4.) This slide connects 
with the vertical arm 78 of a beil crank lever 
which has its fulcrum on a fixed pin 79 and 
the horizontal arm 80 of which connects by 
a rod 81 with the horizontal arm 18 of the 
clutch lever 17, 18, so that when the slide.77 
is caused to move in the direction of arrow 7 
the clutch sleeve 16, which during the oper 
ation of cutting is in gear with the cogwheel 
14 (Fig. 4), will be automatically thrown out 
of gear with said cog wheel 14 and in gear 
with the cog wheel 15 and the direction in 
which the screw shaft turns during the oper 
ation of cutting, is reversed, so that the clamp 
and the knife stock are returned to the posi 
tions shown in Figs.1 and 4, which operation 
is facilitated by the weight 75. During this 
reversing movement the step 23 of the treadie 
must be depressed. 
45 
55 
65 
75 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination with a clamp, and a 
knife stock, of a lengthwise sliding and rotat 
ing shaft having a screw-threaded portion 
and an unthreaded portion, a nut engaging 
the threaded portion and connected with the 
clamp, a non-rotary head held constantly on 
..the anthreaded portion against movement 
along the length of the shaft but moving lon 
gitudinally therewith, and connections be 
tween said head and knifestock, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination with a clamp, and a 
knifestock, of a lengthwise sliding and rotat 
ing shaft having a screw threaded portion 
and an unthreaded portion, a nuti engaging 
the threaded portion of the shaft, and con 
nected, with the clamp, a non-rotary head 
held constantly on the unthreaded portion 
against movement along the length of the 
shaft but moving longitudinally there with, 
connections between said head and the knife 
stock, a reversing mechanism for said, shaft, 
and connections between the non-rotary head 
and the reversing mechanism, substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination with a clamp, and a 
knife stock, of a sliding and rotating shaft 
having a screw threaded portion; and an un 
threaded portion, a nut engaging the screw 
threaded portion of the shaft and connected 
to the clamp, ahead mounted on the unthread 
ed portion of the shaft so as to be compelled 
to partake of its sliding but not of its rotary 
motion, connecting devices between the head 
and: the knife stock, a balance weight sus 
pended from and raised by the connecting 
devices between the head and the knife stock, 
and a reversing gear, substantially, as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination with the claimp. E, rod 
42 and mechanism for imparting motion to 
this rod, of the three armed lever, 43,44, and 
45, the link 47, the rod 48, the bell crankle-, 
ver'49, and the link 50, substantially, as de 
scribed. 
5. The combination with the knifestock, C 
of the lever 55, means for actuating, this, le 
ver, the rods 58, 59, connected to said lever 
and extending in opposite directions, the arm 
60 connected to the rod 59, the rock shaft 61, 
the arm 63 and the rod 64 connected to one 
end of the knife stock, the arm 65 connected 
to the rod 58, the rock shaft 66, the: arm 68, 
and rod 69 connected to the opposite end of 
the knife stock, substantially as described. 
;In testimony, whereof. I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
PETER A. MADM. 
95 
OO 
Io5 
II5 
Witnesses: 
W. C. HAUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER, 
- 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508430.txt	(No Model.) 
J. G. LEYNER, 
DIRECT ACTING ENGINE, 
No. 508,430, 
Patented Nov. 14, 1893. 
  
 
 
SS 
 
N 
s 
 
Is 
 
R 
Y 
 
 
ra 
W 
 
 
S 
X 
N 
 
  
 
SNE 
N& EIA 
N IR NM 
N N 
N 
N& 2 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
 
s 
s N 
H 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN GEORGE LEYNER, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
DIRECT ACT N G ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,430, dated November 14, 1893. 
Application filed December 19, 1892, Serial No. 455,676 (No model) 
55 
75 
w 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN GEORGE LEYNER, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Denver, in the county of Arapahoe 
and State of Colorado, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Direct-Act 
ing Engines; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
direct acting engines generally, and particu 
larly to rock drills in which the valve is op 
erated by pressure applied and relieved alter 
nately to its ends, the opposite ends of the 
valve cylinder being connected directly or 
indirectly with the atmosphere by the recip 
rocating action of the piston. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to 
provide a balanced valve; second, to provide 
a valve that will automatically cushion the 
piston on the back stroke; third, to provide a 
valve that will assure positive action of the 
piston in all positions. I attain these objects 
by the mechanism illustrated and described 
in the aceompanying drawings and specifica 
tion, in which 
Figure 1 represents a longitudinal vertical 
section through the center of a cylinder, valve 
chest, and a piston head and rod, showing my 
improved valve partially in section and par 
tially in elevation, the section being taken 
through the center of Fig. 2 on line A. Fig. 
2 represents a plan of same with valve chest 
removed to show the direction of the ports. 
Fig. 3 represents a bottom view of the valve 
chest. Fig. 4 represents a transverse verti 
cal section through Figs. 1, 2 and 3 on line B. 
Fig. 5 represents a bottom view of the valve. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
Referring to Fig. 1, C designates a cylinder 
which is provided with heads C', rubber buf 
fers C, and washers C, these being part of 
the usual equipment of a rock drill cylinder. 
The cylinder is fitted with a piston D, which 
is provided with the usual packing rings D', 
and a piston rod D, which usually forms a 
part of the piston, and which extends through 
the front head and is adapted to receive the 
drill. On the body of the piston D, I form a 
number of circumferential grooves D, five 
being preferably shown, the central one, D', 
being wider than the others. The said grooves 
naturally form a number of collars D, which 
operate in conjunction with the valve and 
ports in a manner which will be hereinafter 
fully described. 
E, designates a cylindrical valve chest 
formed with a bottom flange E' which is Se 
cured by bolts to a raised flat surface in the 
center of the cylinder C. The exhaust port 
F, is located centrally in the bottom of the 
valve chest and extends directly through into 
the cylinder, and into a circumferential re 
cess G formed in the bore of the same. In 
the bottom of said cylinder this recess is in 
tersected by a recess H, crossing it and eX 
tending along the bottom of the cylinder to a 
oint even with the valve cylinder exhaust 
orts I and J, which like the exhaust port F., 
extend from the chest directly into the cyl 
inder. Two passages, K and L, lead from the 
exhaust port to the atmosphere. They pass 
around the holes I and J to the openingSM, 
either one of which may be used, and the 
other closed, as shown in Fig. 2. 
N, and O, designate the induction ports. 
The induction port N, which is in the front 
end EP, of the valve chest, passes around the 
exhaust port F, see Fig. 2, to the rear end E, 
of the cylinder, while the induction port O, 
which is the rear port of the valve chest, leads 
to the front end of the cylinder. This ar 
rangement of the ports enables me to Secure 
quick and positive action on the rear end of 
the piston before the valve starts, which is of 
great value, especially when drilling upholes. 
It also operates to cushion the piston as the 
ort N, is opened a trifle before the piston 
completes its back stroke. The valve chest 
E, is bored completely through from end to 
end. The ends are slightly counterbored and 
threaded to receive the threaded chest heads 
P, which are provided with a hub adapted to 
receive a wrench to turn the said heads into 
place. A rubber buffer Q, and a metal plate 
R, are secured to the inner end of each head. 
O 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
Y 
 
508,480 
75 
25 
O 
They operate to cushion the valve at each end 
of its stroke. At the top of the valve chest 
an inlet hub S, is arranged transversely to the 
axis of the chest and opens into the top of the 
valve cylinder. The valve T has cylindrical 
flanged ends U, fitting closely the valve chest. 
Through the web of each end is drilled a 
small hole V, forming direct communication 
between the steam space of the valve and the 
ends of the valve chest. The central portion 
of the valve, W, is in the form of a semicir 
cle which coincides with the ports of the 
chest, it being provided centrally in the bot 
tom with an exhaust recess V. Between this 
central portion and the ends U, recesses or 
ports are formed with flanged edges through 
which steam or air passes to the induction 
portsN, and O with which they alternately co 
incide. It will be noticed that the form of 
the central portion of the valve gives a large 
steam space between its ends. A slot X is 
formed in one side of the semicircular por 
tion W, parallel with the axis of the valve. 
In this slot extends the end of a screw Orpin 
Y, which is secured centrally in the side of 
the valve chest. It operates to keep the valve 
in alignment with the ports as it reciprocates 
in the valve chest. 
The operation is as follows: The elastic 
fluid enters the steam chest through the open 
ing Z into the central portion of the valve 
which it surrounds. It then enters the cyl 
inder through the ports N, and O, and leaves 
the cylinder by the way of one of these ports 
35 into the exhaust port V', of the valve, and 
through the exhaust port F, to the atmos 
phere, the operation so far being similar to 
all common engines. The most important 
feature however, of my valve is the fact that 
40. it always occupies the same end of the chest 
as the piston does of the cylinder, as shown 
in Fig. 1, which is accomplished by the novel 
arrangement of ports herein illustrated. 
By reference to Fig. 1 it will be noticed 
that the valve is at the extreme end of its 
back stroke and also that the piston is in the 
same position. The induction port N, which 
is the front port in the chest and which leads 
to the rear end of the cylinder is wide open, 
5o which allows the fluid to act immediately on 
the piston, forcing it forward. Meanwhile 
the said fluid is passing through the little 
holes W of the valve into both ends of the 
valve chest, and as it cannot escape owing 
to both exhaust ports I and J being closed, 
one by the valve itself and the other by the 
piston, the valve is balanced, and conse 
quently stationary, and remains so until the 
piston moves forward and the circumferen 
tial recesses D, and collars D', of the piston 
quickly uncover and close the exhaust port 
J, as they pass it, which operates to relieve 
that end of the valve of pressure gradually, 
until it reaches the central recess D, which 
being larger, completes the exhaust, and 
gives a quick but easy stroke to the valve, 
which is now forced by pressure on its op 
posite end to make its stroke. The expan 
sive fluid which flows through the port I, 
into the said recesses D, of the said piston, 
enters the longitudinal recess H, formed in 
the bottom of the cylinder bore, and flows 
from it through the circumferential recess G 
to the exhaust port F, and thence to the at 
mosphere. It is obvious that the valve al 
ways occupies the same end of the valve 
chest as the piston does that of the cylinder, 
and that the piston moves before the valve, 
and controls the action of the valve, which is 
balanced. This insures positive action of 
the piston in all positions, and prevents any 
possibility of the piston failing to act, eithe 
in an up or down hole, which is a great fault 
in the rock drills and sinking pumps at preS 
ent in use. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A valve having cylindrical flanged ends 
fitting closely a cylindrical valve chest and a 
semicircular flanged central portion adapted 
to coincide with the ports of said chest, and 
provided with an exhaust recess having semi 
circular recesses or ports formed between the 
said central portion and the said ends, ar 
ranged to coincide alternately with said ports 
and having through the web of said flanged 
ends a hole or holes adapted to make fluid 
connection between the center of the valve 
and ends of chest, and having a slot formed 
in the side of the central portion of the valve 
and a pin or screw extending through the 
side of said chest freely into said slot to pre 
serve its alignment, as herein specified. 
2. The combination in a cylindrical valve 
chest provided with threaded heads adapted 
to screw into each end, and buffers operating 
as cushion for the valve, and ports leading to 
the cylinder and atmosphere, a valve chest 
exhaust ports, with a valve having cylindri 
cal flanged ends fitting closely the said chest 
and reciprocating therein on a screw or pin 
attached to the said chest and extending into 
a slot formed in the side of said valve oper 
ating to preserve its alignment in the chest; 
having a hole through each end of the valve 
communicating with the ends of said chest, 
and a semicircular flanged body and recesses 
adapted to coincide with the port of said 
chest, as herein specified. 
3. A cylinder having a circumferential re 
cess in its bore connecting with the exhaust 
port, and a longitudinal recess in the bottom 
intersecting the said circumferential recess, 
as specified. 
4. The combination with a cylinder having 
a circumferential recess in its bore connect 
ing with the exhaust port, and a longitudinal 
recess in the bottom intersecting the said cir 
cumferential recess, a piston having a num 
ber of circumferential grooves and a number 
of collars between said grooves, and exhaust 
ports communicating with the said cylinder 
and the ends of the valve chest, and a valve 
65 
55. 
45 
90 
95 
OO 
Ic5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
arranged to move by pressure acting on its the chest into a slot in the side of said valve, 20 
end, as herein specified. 
5. The combination with a cylinder and 
valve chest, a circumferential recess in the 
bore of the cylinder connecting with the ex 
haust port, and a longitudinal recess in the 
cylinder intersecting the same, and extend 
ing even with exhaust ports connecting the 
cylinder with the valve chest; of induction 
ports having the front port of the valve chest 
lead to the rear end of the cylinder and the 
rear port of said chest lead to the front end 
of the cylinder, of a piston having a number 
of circumferential grooves and collars, of a 
valve having cylindrical flanged ends fitting 
closely a cylindrical valve chest and holes 
through the Webs of said ends, and a semi-cir 
cular central portion adapted to coincide with 
said ports, and a screw projecting through 
all arranged as, and for the purpose specified. 
6. The combination and arrangement of the 
induction ports N, and O, the main exhaust 
port F, and cylinder recesses G, and H, the 
valve chest exhaust ports I and J and the cir 
cumferential grooves D* and collars D', of the 25 
piston D and the valve T, and the chest E, 
the combination operating to positively start 
the piston while the valve is stationary, to 
balance the valve, to operate the valve auto 
matically, and to cushion the piston, as herein 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN GEORGE LEYNER. 
WALTER MERLE MORRIS, 
ARTHUR AUGUSTUS SELLECK. 
O 
5 
508,430 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508530.txt	Yat-ru 
S. REFLER, 
MERCURIAL COMPENSATION PENDULUM, 
Patented Nov. 14, 1893. 
a 
No Model.) 
No. 508,530, 
 
zy 
1 
 
(witza esses 
A 2. 
4.4/3%ae 
/72 are 7z for 
AS7mancz reflez: 
'44/ %-4. 
A fior ey. 
THE NATIONAL TOGRAPHENG COMPANY., 
WAHINGTON, td. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIGMUND RIEFLER, OF MUNICH, GERMANY. 
MERCURIAL COMPENSATION-PENDULUM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,530, dated November 14, 1893. 
Application filed August 28, 1891, Serial No. 404,032, (No model.) 
O 
O 
To all whom it noty concern 
Be it known that I, SIGMUND RIEFLER, en 
gineer and manufacturer, a subject of the 
King of Bavaria, residing at Munich, in the 
Kingdom of Bavaria, Germany, have invent 
ed a new and useful Improvement in Mercu 
rial Compensation-Pendulums, of which the 
following is a clear and exact specification. 
My invention relates to pendulums known 
by the name of mercurial-compensation-pend 
ulums and the object is to increase the com 
pensating effect to the utmost accuracy. This 
object I obtain by collecting the mercury 
merely in the hollow of the pendulum-rod. 
In order to make my invention well under 
stood, I refer to the accompanying drawings 
which represent my pendulum suitable to my 
purpose, of which- 
Figure 1 is a front and Fig. 2 is a side sec 
tional view. 
The rod a is a straight tube made of any 
suitable material preferably of steel. The 
same is filled up with quicksilver. The height 
of the column of mercury is dependent on the 
weight of the pendulum-bobb, on the inner 
width of the tube and also or its weight. The 
effect the mercury takes upon the pendulum 
by the change of temperature is evident. By 
the fall of the same the quicksilver shrinks 
together, thus causing the center of gravity 
to lower, at the same time also the tube shrinks 
in its length, thus raising the pendulum bob 
and with it the center of gravity again. When 
the temperature rises, the effect will be re 
versed to the first, that is to say, the mercury 
expands and thus raises its center of gravity, 
while by the expansion of the tubular rod, the 
center of gravity of the pendulum-bob lowers. 
By these means an exact compensation is ob 
tained. The amount of quicksilver to be used 
for each pendulum, may be carefully calcu 
lated, when the same is to be filled, and since 
the compensating effect not only is depend 
ent of height and weight of the mercury-col 
umn, but also of the weight of the complete 
matter, the latter may be increased or de 
creased for sake of regulation, without alter 
ing the amount of quicksilver employed. 
I will now point out the great advantages 
my new pendulum has in comparison to other 
mercurial-compensation-pendulums. First, 
3o 
35 
45 
the compensation not only will be an exact 
One, when the temperature changes slowly, 
but also will be as true, when sudden varia 
tions of temperature take place. The reason 
thereof is this: the quantity of quicksilver is 
distributed about almost the whole length of 
the rod, and the same having also close con 
tact there with, will partake of the change of 
temperature almost as soon as the rod itself 
does, and therefore the expansion or contrac 
tion of the rod and of the mercury will nearly 
take place at the same time. In other mer 
curial-compensation-pendulums the quicksil 
ver is collected in a vessel at the lower end. 
Secondly, also differences in the temperature 
of the air at different parts of the pendulum 
rod, will not only influence the rod, but also 
the mercury and therefore have no disturb 
ing effect in the compensation. Moreover the 
pendulum may be made of any suitable shape, 
as for instance that of a flat disk with sharp 
edges, or may be slightly curved like a dou 
ble concavelens. Thereby the air is easily cut, 
and little resistance is offered to the same. 
Finally the pendulum will be much cheaper 
than others, since the amount of quicksilver 
required will be only one quarter of that used 
heretofore. 
Having thus fully described the nature of 
my said invention and in what manner the 
same may be carried into effect, I declare that 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
l. In a compensation-pendulum for clocks: 
the pendulum-roda, consisting of a tube closed 
at both ends and partially filled with mercury, 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a compensation-pendulum for clocks: 
the combination of the pendulum-roda, con 
sisting of a tube closed at both ends and par 
tially filled with mercury, with an ordinary 
pendulum-bob b, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
Specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing Witnesses. 
SIGMUND RIEFLER. 
75 
95 
Witnesses: 
R. HERPICH, 
E. SCHULTZE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508630.txt	 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
H. F. PARSHALL & J. W. DARLEY, Jr. 
FLUID PRESSURE DEVICE FOR CONTROLLINGELECTRIC MOTORS, 
No. 508,630, 
Patented Nov. 14, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
H. F. PARSHALL & J. W. DARLEY, Jr. 
FLUID PRESSURE DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING ELECTRIC MOTORS, 
Patented Nov. 14, 1893, 
No. 508,630, 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
HTI E. E. 
lI. LIl 
THE NATIONAL LITHogRAPHING.com PANY., 
's 
I 
NITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE F. PARSHALL OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, AND JOHN W. DARLEY, 
GENERAI, ELECTRIC 
JR., OF BALTIMORE MARYTAND, ASSIGNORS TOTHE 
COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSACIUSETTS, 
FLUID-PRESSURE DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING ELECTRIC MOTORS, 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,630, dated November 14, 1893. 
Application filed May 6, 1893, 
Serial No. 473,323 (No model) 
65 
75 
by all the motors of the train are simultane- 5o 
ously controlled. 
C may represent one of a number of cars 
making up the train, and likewise provided 
with motors for its propulsion. Each car of 
the train may be provided with motors, if de 
sired, all controlled by the mechanism in the 
engineers cab or again, there may be a num 
ber of cars not self-propelling interspersed 
between the motor-cars of the train. In the 
present description reference is made to two 
motors for each car, one applied to the axle 
at each end of the car, but it is to be under 
stood that one motor or a plurality of motors 
may be used and controlled by the mechan 
ism described with the same facility, the two 
motors being shown only to exemplify the 
capabilities of the method of control forming 
the subject of the present invention. 
The current for the motors upon the train 
is shown as taken from an Overhead conduc 
tor by means of trolleys. It might also be 
taken from conductors in an underground 
conduit, or from storage batteries carried 
upon the cars themselves, if desired. Each 
car having a motor or motors may have its 
own trolley or current collecting device, as in 
dicated at T', and in this manner each motor 
car is enabled to run independently. When 
the train is very heavy or is mounting a steep 
grade, so that a large currentis required, Such 
auxiliary trolley's may be placed upon the 
trolley line in multiple with that of the engi 
neer's cab. It is also preferred to connect the 
circuit of the various Sets of motors, C, C, &c., 
by a common conductor b, b, &c., suitable 
couplings being attached at the points b, b, 
b', &c., for connection with the train as made 
up. From the trolley T the current passes 
by the conductor a to the motor M, upon the 
car C, which drives a small air compressor or go 
air pump P, and the air after compression 
passes to a reservoir R. From this reservoir 
the air passes through a pipe p to a controller 
stand S, and thence by pipes p' p' to pistons 
P', P, P, P, in cylinders upon or under the 
cars carrying the motors; the admission of 
air into these cylinders at the will of the en 
gineer, acts to simultaneously control the ac 
85 
95 
To all, whon, it Tivolly concern. 
Be it known that we, HoRACE. F. PARSHALL, 
a resident of Lynn, in the county of Essex and 
State of Massachusetts, and JoHN W. IDAR 
5 LEY, Jr., a resident of Baltimore, in the State 
of Maryland, citizens of the United States, 
have made certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Controlling Electric Motors, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to the control of elec 
tric motors, especially where several such 
motors are employed in the same work and 
are to be controlled or have their speeds va 
ried simultaneously and is illustrated and de 
I5 scribed herein as applied to several motors 
upon a motor car or railway train which it is 
desired to regulate at the same time. 
To obtain the required traction to propela 
long or heavy train, or to drive a train of cars 
2O at eXtremely high speed, it is either neces 
Sary to employ a very heavy engine whose 
Weight gives the requisite adhesion between 
its wheels and the track, or, if it is sought to 
reduce the weight of the train and still be 
25 able to run at a high speed, motive power 
must be applied to the axles of all or several 
of the vehicles comprising the train. In the 
latter case it is necessary that the different 
motors shall be as completely under the con 
3o trol of the driver or engineer as is the single 
engine or motor usually employed; and our 
invention particularly concerns such a sys 
tem of control of a number of electric motors 
Situated om different vehicles of the train as 
In the accompanying drawings, hereby an 
nexed to and made part of this specification, 
Figure 1 represents an engineer's eab and a 
passenger coach fitted with our improved ap 
4o paratus. Fig. 2, represents the controlling 
stand with its valve and piston and the con 
nections to the controller-cylinders. Fig. 3, 
represents the air compressing apparatus. 
Fig. 4, is a section taken upon the line 4-4 of 
45 Fig. 2, and Fig. 5 is a similar section taken 
upon the line 5-5 of the same figure. 
C represents the first car or driver's cab of 
a train of vehicles; this car carries, besides 
its own propelling motors, mechanism where 
35 will fulfill this condition. 
 
2 
508,630 
75 
tion of the electric motors, as will be shown 
hereinafter. 
Each motor car is shown as provided with 
two motors, M-M'; M-M, one for each axle, 
and the connection of these motors, their ar 
mature and field windings, in various combi 
nations, is effected by controller-cylinders K, 
K', under each car. The changes of connec 
tion of the motors in circuit may or may not 
follow the series-parallel system of control, as 
may be desired but it is not necessary to 
minutely describe any system herein as it 
forms no essential part of the invention. The 
terminals from the armature and field-mag 
net Windings may be led to terminal points 
or contact blocks shown at t, t, &c., t', t', &c., 
and these terminals may be connected during 
the rotation of the controller. cylinders K, K' 
in any predetermined and selected order to 
Vary the speed and torque of the motors 
M-M', M -M', &c., for the various condi 
tions of running. The controller-cylinders 
K, K', &c., as many in number as there are 
motor cars in the train, are simultaneously 
operated from the engineer's cab C, through 
the action of compressed air on the pistons 
P'-P, P-P', and counter-acting springs or 
their equivalent. One of the pistons of each 
car, as P', P, is adapted to move the control 
ler-cylinders K, K' in either direction, while 
the other piston, P--P4, determines the di 
rection of rotation of the controller. The con 
troller-cylinders K, K', carry contact-plates 
corresponding to the series or set of connec 
tions established for the motors M., &c., and 
it is therefore essential that the cylinders 
shall move in harmony or unison with one 
another by a  step-by-step  action. The suc 
ceeding figures and description will more 
clearly show how this is accomplished. 
M is a constantly running motor connected 
in circuit from T, and preferably shunt 
Wound. It runs an air-pump P, connected as 
shown, to the reservoir R for compressed air. 
The reservoir R is connected by a pipe p-p 
to the air controller-box or stand S. The ro 
tation of the handle H of this box operates an 
interior drum D, having ports (Figs. 2 and 4), 
so that upon its partial rotation air is admit 
ted to the piston p' and to the pipe p' leading 
to the pistons P, &c., of the other cars, driv 
ing the piston heads outward and operating 
the pawls O, O', through the levers l, l', and 
advancing the controllers, K, K' one step 
through the intermediate gearing G, the po 
sition of the drum D allowing admission of 
air in this manner, as shown in Fig. 4. A 
further partial rotation of the drum D cuts 
off the air from the pistons P-P and allows 
its escape through the cut-away portion d d' 
of the drum and through the outlets or ports 
O O', powerful springs, Z' Z, attached to the 
levers ll, and opposing the action of the com 
pressed air in the cylinders, assisting in the 
expulsion of the air. This operation is car 
ried through at each half-rotation of the drum 
D, thus occurring twice in each revolution. 
The pawls O, O' then retreat until the half 
rotation of the drum D is completed, when 
the action is repeated and so on. In this 
manner the reciprocation of the pawls O, O' 
is effected, being positive in action and re 
peated as rapidly as desired. 
The operation of the handle H, Fig.2, con 
trols a three-way valve located at W, Fig. 5. 
In one position of the valve compressed air is 
admitted to the pistons P', P, &c., from the 
air-box S, and in the other the pistons P', P, 
&c., are put in communication with the exter 
malair. Levers land l are connected with 
the piston-heads P, P and are impelled in 
one direction by the compressed air, and in 
the other direction by the springs Z and Z, 
like the levers l, l' described. They also con 
nect with the pawls O and O' through links 
m, n, n, n, as shown, and when thrown to 
one position by the compressed air the ends 
1, 1 of the pawls O, O' are lowered into ent 
gagement with the ratchet wheels r, r" and 
when retracted to the opposite position, un 
der the influence of the springs Z, Z, the ends 
1, 1 of the pawls are lifted out of engagement 
and the other ends 2, 2 depressed into engage 
ment with the ratchet wheels , r 
in this 
position the reciprocation of the pawls O,O', 
actuated alternately in opposite directions oy 
the compressed air in P' P and the springs 
Z, Z, causes a reversed motion of the con 
trollers K, K'. The pawls O, O are inde 
pendently movable about the pivots p, p". 
The position of the handle H' thus determines 
the direction of rotation of the controllers K, 
K while the operation of the handle H gov 
erns the rate of such rotation in one direc 
tion or the other. 
Fig. 3 shows more fully the construction of 
the air compressor and the reservoir. The 
motor M', of any character, is connected in 
a circuit by the switch X, the other termi 
nal being shown at q. It drives an air com 
pressor P, connected by a tube T, to the reser 
voir R. Control of the air pressure in R. may 
be accomplished in various ways, one only of 
which need be shown. A lever N, pivoted at 
Pis connected through an intermediate le 
ver N, pivoted at P7 to rod r, attached to the 
valve V', adapted to close and open a passage 
way from the interior of the pump P. to the 
external air. The upper end of the reservoir 
R, is provided with a diaphragm D, or a pis 
ton, which raises the lever, N upon the aug 
mentation of pressure in R against the action 
of a spring Z. Such an adjustment of the 
spring Z is made that when a predetermined 
pressure has been reached in R, the valve V 
is opened and the operation of the pump now 
merely causes an inward and outward flow of 
air through W. When the pressure in the 
reservoir R, however, falls to a certain ex 
tent, following the demand for the operation 
of the electrical controllers, &c., the spring 
Z reasserts itself, the valve. W' is closed and 
the compressed air is again forced into R. 
An inwardly opening valve at V* admits air 
90 
95 
CO 
Io5 
d 
I 15 
(25 
? ? 
25 
45 
55 
 
508,630 
75 
W- 
to R from the pipe T, but prevents its return. 
This is only one of a number of arrangements 
which might be used for the same purpose. 
For example, the movements of the lever N 
in response to the varying conditions of press 
ure in the chamber R, might operate a switch 
Controlling the action of the motor M4 to the 
circuit; and many other methods of control 
might be employed. The compressed air 
stored in the reservoir R may be used for 
other purposes than the operation of the con 
troller cylinders K, K', &c., such, for instance, 
as the operation of an air-brake system in the 
ordinary manner. For the operation of the 
controller-cylinders K, KY, &c., on the cars not 
provided with the air pressure or air storage 
When disconnected from a train, the usual 
mechanical control may be effected by con 
troller stands S', S', geared at G and G8 to 
the controller-cylinders, the handle for ac 
complishing such rotation being shown at H, 
H', the handles H, H, operating a reversing 
Switch in the usual manner. 
It is manifest that our improved controlling 
apparatus may be as well applied to dynamos 
as to motors, should that be found advisable; 
and it is equally manifest that other fluids 
than air may be employed where they are con 
veniently accessible, but ordinarily air would 
be the only one practicable. 
What we claim and wish to protect by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a system of controlling electric motors, 
a source of fluid-pressure, a cylinder carrying 
electric contacts and adapted by its rotation 
to vary the speed of an electric motor, and 
means, substantially as described, operated 
by the fluid-pressure and adapted to rotate 
the cylinder. 
2. In a system of controlling electric motors, 
a source of fluid-pressure, a series of cylinders 
carrying electric contacts and each adapted 
by its rotation to vary the speed of an elec 
tric motor, and means, substantially as de 
scribed, operated by the fluid-pressure and 
adapted to effect the simultaneous rotation 
of the cylinders. 
3. In a system of controlling electric motors, 
a source of fluid-pressure, a cylinder carrying 
electric contacts controlling by its rotation 
an electric motor, and a pair of cylinders 
communicating with the source of pressure 
and having pistons actuated thereby, one of 
such pistons rotating the controller-cylinder. 
and the other determining the direction of 
Such rotation. 
4. In a system of controlling electric motors, 
a source of fluid-pressure, a plurality of elec 
 tric controller-cylinders, and a pair of cylin 
ders communicating with the source of press 
ure and containing pistons actuated thereby, 
one of such pistons adapted to effect the si 
multaneous rotation of the controller-cylin 
ders and the other piston adapted to deter 
mine the direction of such rotation. 
5. In a system of controlling electric motors, 
a source of fluid-pressure, a cylinder carrying 
electric contacts controlling by its rotation 
an electric motor, and a pair of cylinders 
communicating with the source of pressure 
and having pistons actuated thereby, one of 
such pistons rotating the controller-cylinder 
and the other determining the direction of 
such rotation and means, substantially as 
described, controlling the admission of the 
fluid pressure to the cylinders. 
6. In a system of controlling electric motors, 
a source of fluid-pressure, a plurality of elec 
tric controller-cylinders, and a pair of cylin 
ders communicating with the source of press 
ure and containing pistons actuated thereby, 
one of such pistons adapted to effect the si 
multaneous rotation of the controller-cylin 
ders and the other piston adapted to deter 
mine the direction of such rotation and means, 
substantially as described, controlling the 
admission of the fluid pressure to the cylinders. 
7. In a system of controlling electric motors, 
a source of fluid-pressure, a cylinder, means 
for admitting pneumatic impulses thereto, a 
piston reciprocating therein connected to a 
lever operating pawls adapted to rotate a 
ratchet - wheel, and a controller - cylinder 
geared to such ratchet-wheel; whereby a step 
by-step rotation is imparted to the controller 
cylinder. 
8. In a system of controlling electric motors 
a source of fluid pressure, a cylinder, means 
for admitting pneumatic impulses thereto, a 
piston reciprocating therein connected to a 
lever operating pawls adapted to rotate a 
ratchet-wheel, a controller-cylinder geared to 
such a ratchet-wheel, in combination with 
means adapted to determine the direction of 
rotation of the ratchet-wheel; whereby a step 
by-step rotation in either direction may be 
imparted to the controller-cylinder. 
9. In a system of controlling electric motors, 
a source of fluid-pressure, a cylinder, means 
for admitting pneumatic impulses thereto, a 
piston therein moving in one direction under 
the pneumatic impulses and driven in the op 
posite direction by a spring and connected to a 
lever operating pawls engaging with a ratchet 
wheel, and a controller-cylinder geared to 
such ratchet-wheel; whereby a step-by-step 
motion is imparted to the controller-cylinder. 
10. In a system of controlling electric mo 
tors, a source of fluid-pressure, a cylinder, 
means for admitting pneumatic impulses 
thereto, a piston therein moving in one direc 
tion under pneumatic impulses and driven in 
the opposite direction by a spring and con 
nected to a lever operating pawls engaging 
with a ratchet-wheel, and a controller-cylin 
der geared to said ratchet wheel, all in com 
bination with means adapted to determine 
the direction of rotation of the ratchet-wheel; 
whereby a step-by-step motion in either di 
rection may be imparted to the controller 
cylinder. 
11. In a system of controlling electric mo 
h- 
95 
ICC 
I O5 
* II. ? 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
? 25 
I. ? 
5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
 
508,630 
tors, a Source of fluid-pressure, a cylinder, 
means for admitting pneumatic impulses 
thereto, a piston therein driven in one direc 
tion by such impulses and in the other direc 
tion by a spring and connected to a lever, 
and means, substantially as described, where 
by the position of the lever determines the 
direction of rotation of a controller-cylinder. 
12. A cylinder, means for admitting pneu 
matic impulses thereto, a piston reciprocating 
therein connected to a lever, a pawl adapted 
to rotate a ratchet-wheel in one direction, a 
Second pawl adapted to rotate such wheel in 
the opposite direction, and links attached to 
a cross-arm upon the lever and to the pawls; 
whereby the motion of the lever raises one 
pawl from the ratchet while bringing the 
other into engagement there with, thus deter 
mining the direction of the rotation thereof. 
13. A cylinder, means for admitting pneu 
matic impulses thereto, a piston reciprocating 
therein connected to a lever, a pawl adapted 
to rotate a ratchet-wheel in one direction, a 
Second pawl adapted to rotate such wheel in 
the opposite direction, and links attached to 
a CrOSS-arin upon the lever and by a slotted 
connection to the pawls; whereby the action 
of the lever raises one pawl from the ratchet 
while bringing the other into engagement 
therewith, the slot upon the link permitting 
free motion of the pawls, thus determining 
the direction of rotation of the ratchet-wheel. 
14. A cylinder, means for admitting pneu 
matic impulses thereto, a piston reciprocat 
ing therein connected to a lever operating 
pawls one of which is adapted to rotate a 
ratchet-wheel in one direction, and the other 
adapted to rotate such wheel in the opposite 
direction, and a controller cylinder geared to 
such ratchet-wheel; in combination with a 
second cylinder, means for admitting pneu 
matic impulses thereto, a piston reciprocat 
ing therein connected to lever adapted to 
raise one of the pawls from the ratchet wheel 
and bring the other pawl into engagement 
there with; whereby a step-by-step rotation in 
either direction may be imparted to the con 
troller-cylinder. 
15. A source of fluid-pressure, a valve box, 
a rotating valve therein provided with ports 
adapted to admit the fluid pressure to a cyl 
inder and to discharge it therefrom, a piston 
in said cylinder driven in one direction by 
Such fluid pressure and in the other direc 
tion by a spring and attached to a lever car 
rying pawls one of which is adapted to ro 
tate the ratchet-wheel in one direction and 
the other in the opposite direction, and a 
1 ? 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
controller-cylinder geared to such ratchet 
wheel. 
16. A source of fluid-pressure, an air-box 
communicating there with, a drum valve 
within such air box adapted by its rotation 
to admit fluid-pressure to a cylinder or re 
lease the pressure therefrom, a piston recip 
rocating in such cylinder and connected to a 
lever carrying pawls engaging in opposite di 
rections with a ratchet - wheel to which is 
geared a controller cylinder; whereby a step 
by-step rotation of the controller cylinder in 
either direction may be effected. 
17. A source of fluid-pressure, an air-box 
communicating there with, a three-way valve 
adapted to admit the pressure in the box into 
a cylinder or exhaust, it there from, a piston 
reciprocating within the cylinder and oper 
ating a lever provided with links engaging 
with two pawls, adapted the one to rotate a 
ratchet wheel in one direction and the other 
to rotate such wheel in the opposite direction; 
whereby the motion of the piston in one i di 
rection causes one of such pawls to engage 
with the ratchet-wheel while it lifts the other 
Out of engagement, and its reversed motion 
causes the second pawl to engage while rais 
ing the first. 
18. A source of fluid-pressure, an air-box 
Communicating there with, a drum-valve with 
in such air-box adapted by its rotation to ad 
mit fluid pressure to a cylinder or release the 
pressure therefrom, a piston reciprocating in 
such cylinder and connected to a lever carry 
ing pawls engaging in opposite directions 
with a ratchet-wheel, and a controller-cylin 
der geared to such ratchet-wheel all in com 
bination with a three-way valve adapted to 
admit pressure from the air-box into a sec 
ond cylinder or exhaust it therefrom, a pis 
ton reciprocating within such second cylin 
der and operating alever provided with links 
engaging with the two pawls; whereby the 
piston in the first, cylinder effects a step-by 
step rotation of the controller-cylinder, and 
the piston in the second cylinder deter 
mines by its position the direction of such ro 
tation. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto set our 
hands this 11th day of April, 1893. 
HORACE F. PARSHALL. 
JOHN W. DARLEY, JR. 
7 ? 
75 
95 
O 
O 
Witnesses for Parshall: 
JOHN W. GIBBONEY, 
BENJAMIN B. HULL. 
M. HOLZMAN, 
A. WAGNER. 
Witnesses for Darley: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508730.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. H. LYNN. 
I, AMP FILLING ATTACHMENT FOR OIL CANS, 
No. 508,730. 
 
Patented Nov. 14, 1893. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. H. LYNN, OF DAN VILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
LAMP-FILLING ATTACHMENT FOR oil-cANs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,780, dated November 14, 1893. 
Application filed June 21, 1893, Serial No. 478,361, (No model.) 
O 
To aid, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN C. H. LYNN, of 
Danville, in the State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Lamp-Filler Attachments for Oil 
Cans; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
lampfiller attachments for oil cans, the object 
being to provide a device which can be quickly 
attached to the mouth of the spout of a can 
Or equivalent receptacle. 
A further object is to so construct the at 
tachment that when the latter is not in use 
as a filler, it can be utilized as a stopper for 
the Spout, thus preventing the escape or evap 
Oration of the contents of the can. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain novel features of construction 
and combinations of parts, as will be herein 
after more fully described and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of my improvement, showing 
the same in its operative position. Fig. 2 is 
a similar view, showing the improvement ap 
plied as a stopper, and Fig. 3 is a detached 
view. 
A represents a funnel-shaped conductor 
preferably constructed of a single piece of 
tin, sheet metal or equivalent material. The 
rear upper wall of said funnel A is cut U 
shaped in form as shown at B, for the recep 
tion of the Spout or that portion of the vessel 
attached to the nozzle, as will be hereinafter 
referred to. 
Pivotally connected within funnel A is a 
nozzle C, which latter is also constructed of 
tin, sheet metal or equivalent material and is 
adapted to snugly fit over the end of spout a 
of can D. This nozzle C is pivotally connect 
ed to the funnel A by means of a rod or pin 
d, which latter is rigidly secured to opposite 
sides of the funnel A, thus forming a pivot 
on which the nozzle C swings. 
The funnel A is provided with a projection 
5o e, which latter is formed by swaging a por 
is adapted to register with and close the dis 
charge end of nozzle C, when the can is in an 
upright position. 
The attachment above described is adapted 
to be supported or carried by the spout C. at 
all times and when not in operation is adapt 
ed to act as a stopper or plug, whereby the 
contents of the can is prevented from escap 
ing either by accident or evaporation. 
When it is desired to fill a lamp the funnel 
is first seated in the filling opening of the 
lamp and then by tilting the can the spout a 
is disengaged from projection e and turned 
to a position at which the oil will run there 
from. If desired the projectione on the fun 
nel can be disengaged from the nozzle before 
the funnel A is placed within the filling open 
ing of the lamp. 
In tilting or elevating the can the latter is 
supported by the pivotal nozzle C and hence 
the can can be tilted with one hand, the noz 
zle effectually holding the can in place, and 
preventing any accidental movement of the 
From the foregoing it will be observed that 
my improvement is simple in construction 
and can be manufactured at a slight expense 
and further the entire operation can be per 
formed with one hand. It will also be seen 
that by making the oil conductor funnel 
shaped, the device can be used in filling any 
lamp, whether the oil inlet be large or small, 
as the funnel-shaped conductor is adapted to 
accommodate itself to the various sizes of oil 
inlets. 
It is evident that changes in the construc 
tion and relative arrangement of the several 
parts might be made without avoiding my in 
Vention and hence I Would have it understood 
that I do not restrict myself to the particular 
construction and arrangements of parts shown 
and described, but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. As an article of manufacture, a lamp 
filling attachment consisting of a nozzle adapt 
ed to be held on a can spout by friction, a 
funnel pivotally connected to the nozzle, the 
outer end of the nozzle of sufficient length to 
tion of the Wall of said funnel inwardly, and reach and be closed by the inner wall of the 
Spout. 
I a 
45 
25 
35 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
 
508,730 
funnel when the funnel is in its normal posi 
tion, substantially as set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, an at 
tachment for oil cans, consisting of a funnel 
shaped conductor, the upper rear wall of 
which is provided with a U-shaped opening 
for the reception of the spout of an oil can, 
and a nozzle pivotally secured within said 
funnel, one end of said nozzle adapted to be 
removably secured to the spout of a can, while 
its opposite end is adapted to engage a pro 
O 
jection located on the interior of the funnel, 
whereby the parts are locked against dis 
placement, substantially as set forth. 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this (5 
JOHN C. H. LYNN. 
Witnesses: 
A. L. RUSSELL, 
F. M. GOTWALDS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508830.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 508,830. 
 
E, NORIEGA, 
ELECTRICTELEPHONE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet. 1. 
Patented Nov. 14, 1893. 
2. 
WITWESSES : 
22z/2-26. 
-6 & 
w 
e6frce (U 
N N N 
N N 
N N N N N 
o 
m 
HE NATIONAL LITHOGRAPHING company, 
ASHINGTON, d, c, 
1N WEWTOR 
6. 7%ry 
u/(ou. f6 
GY 
ATTORNEYS 
E, NORIEGA. 
ELECTRICTELEPHONE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 14, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 508,830. 
 
INVENTOR "Ce 
ATTORNEYS. 
the Arista TerArima ceMPANY., 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELOY NORIEGA, OF MEXICO, MEXICO. 
ELECTRIC TELEPHONE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,880, dated November 14, 1893. 
application filed August 25, 1892, Serial No. 444,042, (No model.) 
y 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELOY NORIEGA, of the 
city of Mexico, Mexico, have invented a new 
and Improved Telephone System, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters and figures of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a side sectional elevation of my 
improved telephone transmitter on the line 
3'-ac in Fig. 3. Fig. 2 is a diametrical sec 
tion of a modified form. Fig. 3 is a rear ele, 
Vation of the telephone transmitter. 
Fig. 4 
is an enlarged detail view of a modified form 
of the transmitting mechanism. Fig. 5 is a 
longitudinal section of one of the carbon cyl 
inders. Fig.6 is a modified form of carbon 
cylinder. Fig. 7 is a transversesection on the 
line y-y in Fig. 6. Fig. 8 is a front eleva 
tion of the complete apparatus. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
telephone transmitter in which the carbon 
electrodes will be held in contact by the ac 
tion of a magnet, thus securing a more deli 
cate adjustment of the carbons and more ef 
fective action of the telephone. 
Myinvention consists in a microphone pro 
vided with a diaphragm carrying two perfo 
rated blocks in which are inserted carbon 
cylinders provided with soft iron armatures 
and a magnet located near the said armatures 
for holding the carbon cylinders in electrical 
contact with the carbon blocks carried by the 
diaphragm. 
In the transmitter shown in Fig.1, the dia 
phragm A is secured to the back of the mouth 
piece B, and to the diaphragm are fastened 
two carbon bars a, by means of bolts b. The 
diaphragm in this case is made of insulating 
material, and the carbon bars a are apertured 
transversely to receive carbon cylinders c. 
The said carbon cylinders fit loosely in the 
apertures and are provided with soft iron ar 
matures d or d'. The soft iron armatures d 
consist of soft iron tubes surrounding the 
carbon cylinders but separated therefrom by 
In the case illustrated in Fig. 5, the arma 
ture d' is inclosed by the carbon cylinder C. 
In the back of the mouthpiece Bare inserted 
screwsf, the outer ends of which are swiveled 
in arms 9 projecting inwardly from ends of 
the permanent magnets C. The said mag 
nets are placed with like poles adjoining each . 
other, with pole pieces h secured to their in 
ner faces. The said pole piecesh project 
toward the carbon cylinders c and act upon 
the armatures connected with the cylinders 
drawing the said carbon cylinders with more 
or less force toward the pole pieces. The 
amount of force exerted by the magnets C 
upon the armatures carried by the carbon 
cylinders is regulated by the distance be 
tween the pole pieces hand the armatures of 
the said carbon cylinders. 
In the form shown in Figs. 2 and 3, the con 
struction is substantially the same. The dia 
phragm A is provided with a binding i of 
soft rubber or analogous material, and the 
said diaphragm is held in a framei. To the 
diaphragm are secured carbon bars a, as in 
the other case, and threaded studs f' pro 
jecting from the framei pass through earsg' 
extending from the inner surfaces of the 
curved ends of the magnets C and nuts k. 
placed on opposite sides of the ears g', serve 
to adjust the magnets toward or away from 
the armatures carried by the carbon cylin 
ders c. In other respects, the construction of 
the microphone shown in Figs. 2 and 3, is the 
same as that already described. 
The telephone transmitter is secured to the 
door J of the casing K and the mouth piece. 
B is formed integrally with the door. The 
cover of the casing K is connected with the 
casing by hinges n,n', n, n, each of which 
serves to form an electrical connection be 
tween the apparatus carried in the cover and 
that contained by the casing. In the casing 
K are placed a magneto-electric machine L. 
and a magneto-bell M, both of which are of 
the usual construction and therefore require 
no special description. In the bottom of the 
casing are inserted binding posts o, o'; in 
the bottom of the cover are inserted binding 
posts p, p', and in the top of the cover are in 
serted binding posts q, q'. The casing K is 
furnished with a switch lever N which is ca 
pable of forming an electrical contact with 
. 
75 
95 
CO 
O 
I5 
30 
40 
45 
5o the insulating tubee. 
 
508,830 
C 
either of the contact buttons r, r', and the 
Quter end of the said lever is bent upward to 
form a hook for supporting the telephone re 
ceiver D. 
When the telephone receiver is in place 
upon the hook, the lever N forms an electri 
cal contact with the button r, and when the 
receiving telephone is removed from the hook, 
the Spring S connected with the inner end of 
the lever and with the studt, draws down 
the inner end of the lever N and brings it into 
electrical contact with the button '. The 
binding post o is connected with a line wire 
O, the binding post o', is connected with the 
ground P, and the binding posts p, p' are con 
nected with opposite poles of the battery Q. 
The electric circuits will be described in con 
nection with the operation of the apparatus. 
When it is desired to calla distant station, 
the magneto-electric machine I is operated, 
2o. thereby sending a current in one direction 
through the magneto-bell M, to the ground P, 
and in the opposite direction through the 
Wire 1, stud t, springs, lever N, button r, wire 
2, to the binding post O, thence over the line 
O to the distant station. When the call is 
answered the telephone receiverD is removed 
from the lever N when the spring s draws 
down the said lever N bringing it into con 
tact with the button r". The current of the 
battery Q now flows through one of the car 
bon bars a, through the carbon cylinders c, 
the other carbon bara, hingen, wire 3, but 
ton r, spring s, stud t, wire 4, hinge n, pri 
mary wire of the induction coil R, binding 
postp, back to the battery. 
When sounds are uttered in the mouth 
piece B, the vibration of the diaphragm. A 
moves the carbon bars a, and by virtue of 
4o the inertia of the carbon cylinders c varies 
the electrical contact between the said cylin 
35. 
25 
. 
Witnesses: 
F. E. TRAINER, 
EMILIO LOPEZ, 
45 
55 
. 
The diaphragm 
ders and the bars a, and the pulsations thus 
produced in the primary circuit of the induc 
tion coil R generate secondary impulses in 
the secondary wire of the said induction coil, 
which pass in one direction through the hinge 
n, wire 5 and binding post o' to the ground 
P, and in the opposite direction through the 
wire 6, binding post q', telephone receiver D, 
binding post q, wire 7, hingen, wire 2, bind 
ing posto to the line and through the distant 
receiver. 
of the transmitter I make 
of pine wood and protect it from humidity by 
coating it with paraffine. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a telephone transmitter provided with 
perforated carbon bars and carbon cylinders 
fitted loosely to the perforations of the bars, 
the combination with the carbon cylinders, 
of soft iron armatures and a magnet Sup 
ported near the armatures and arranged to 
draw the -carbon cylinders into contact with 
the carbon bars, substantially as specified. 
2. In a telephone transmitter, one or more 
carbon cylinders inclosed by iron ferrules 
separated from the carbon by insulating ma 
terial, substantially as specified. 
3. In a telephone transmitter, the combi 
nation with the diaphragm, of contact pieces 
attached to the diaphragm, a series of elec 
trodes provided with armatures, and magnets 
arranged to draw the loose electrodes away 
from the diaphragm and against the contact 
surface carried by the diaphragm, substan 
tially as specified. 
ELOY NORIEGA. 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US508930.txt	(No Model.) 
D. M. FORSYTH, 
CORN PLANTER, 
No. 508,930. 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893, 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ilp355cs, 
2434zal. 
 
I pe pir: 
Zzrezez-Z772ry 27, 
fy/zzSAlrpeys, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL M. FORSYTH, OF FRANKLIN, INDIANA. 
CORN-PLANTER. 
Se:CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 508,930, dated November 21, 1893. 
Application filed June 20, 1893, Serial No. 478,240. (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
rear thereof and at an angle thereto, inasmuch 
Be it known that I, DANIEL M. FoRSYTH, a as they diverge. This wing at its front bent 
citizen of the United States, residing at Frank 
end is provided with a transverse indentation 
lin, in the county of Johnson and State of In 
11 which fits in the crease or countersink 5 of 
diana, have invented a new and useful Corn 
the tube so that it is prevented from being 
Planter, of which the following is a specifi 
vertically displaced when once secured in po 
cation. 
sition, as will hereinafter appear. The rear 
My invention relates to improvements in 
side of the tube is provided with a plurality. 
corn planters; the objects - in view being to 
of grooves 12, and a tie-bolt 13 passes through 
provide a cheap and simple machine adapted 
perforations in the divergent terminals of the 
for this purpose and so constructed as to form 
wing and serves to secure the same together 
a furrow, cut away the sod and any trash in 
so that they embrace the opposite sides of the 
advance thereof and deposit the corn in the 
The tie-bolt is formed in sections and 
tube. 
bottom; and to provide means for covering 
is provided at its center with a turn-buckle 
the corn at any suitable depth regardless of 
or sleeve 14 reversely threaded at its opposite 
the depth of the furrow. 
ends so as engage corresponding threads on 
Further objects and advantages of the in 
the bolt. By a proper adjustment of this 
Vention will appear in the following descrip 
turn-buckle it will be seen that the sections 
tion and the novel features thereof will be 
of the tie-bolt may be spread or contracted 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
and thus the terminals of the wing likewise 
Referring to the drawings-Figure 1 is a 
are spread or contracted. The tie-bolt may 
perspective view of a planter embodying my 
be loosened and the wing moved up or down 
invention, the hopper being removed. Fig. 
so that the said bolt takes into any one of the 
2 is a vertical longitudinal sectional view 
grooves in the rear side of the tube, and like 
through the seed tube. Fig. 3 is a rear ele 
wise the indentation at the front side of the 
Vation thereof. Fig. 4 is a horizontal section 
wing takes into any one of the creases or 
thereof. 
countersinks in the front side of the tube. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
In operation it will be seen that the corn 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
may be planted at any desired depth, and yet 
The beam 1 may be surmounted by any 
by a lateral adjustment of the wing the soil 
suitable hopper (not shown), and in the beam 
displaced by the shovel may be returned in 
there is formed a hole 2 through which the 
any predetermined quantity; that is to say, 
Seed pass into the seed tube 3 which is se 
the corn may be planted at a depth, as for in 
cured to the under side of the beam in line 
stance, ten inches, and yet there be but five 
With the opening. The lower end of the tube 
inches of soil over the corn. Such planting 
is cut away at its rear side and is spread and 
is a great protection to the corn in case of 
otherwise shaped to form a shovel 4, or a 
droughts, as has been demonstrated and often 
shovel may be attached thereto, as may be de 
practiced in certain sections of the country. 
sired. Immediately above the shovel the front 
As the colter proceeds in advance of the shovel 
side of the tube is provided with a transverse 
it cuts the sod, forms an opening into which 
crease or countersink 5. Above this crease 
the shovel may readily wedge itself so that 
an inclined brace 6 is secured to the front 
there is a decrease of draft required and the 
side of the tube and to the under side of the 
corn is dropped directly behind the shovel 
beam 1. A Y-shaped standard 7 is secured 
and colter before any of the dirt rolls back 
to the under side of the beam immediately in 
into the furrow. The wing scrapes all the 
front of the seed tube and is slotted at its 
weeds and other trash out of the way and per 
lower end for the reception of a colter-wheel 
imits only a limited or predetermined amount 
8, through which the axle 9 is passed, the 
same passing into the opposite bifurcations. 
If desired the brace-rod 6 may be connected 
A wing or blade 10 is bent around the front 
to the seed-tube 3 by an ordinary break-pin, 
end of the tube and its terminals extend in 
so that should the tube abut against a stone 
of dirt to return. 
- - 
, 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
508,930 
grooves or countersinks, of a wing bent around 
the tube terminating in rear of and extend 
ing at an angle thereto, said Wing being pro 
vided at its front side with a transverse de- : 
pression for engaging the crease or groove at 
the front side of the tube, and a bolt passing 
through the terminals of the wing in rear of 
the tube and resting in any one of the grooves 
of said tube, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
DANIEL M. FORSYTH. 
25 
Witnesses: 
W. T. PRITCHARD, 
SAML. FEATHERNGILL. 
or other obstruction calculated to injure it, 
the pin will break and thus avoid the injury. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a corn planter, the combination with 
a seed tube terminating at its lower end in a 
shovel, of a wing embracing said tube extend 
ing in rear of and at an angle thereto, and a 
sectional bolt located in the terminals of the 
wing and having right and left hand threaded 
screws, and an adjusting sleeve connected to 
the ends of the bolt, substantially as specified. 
2. In a corn planter, the combination with 
a beam and tube, the latter terminating at its 
lower end in a shovel and having its front 
and rear sides provided with transverse 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509030.txt	ILLUMINATING TILE, 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893. 
No. 509,030. 
 
 
IIIIIIII, 
IT-TITIH!!!??? 
 
TMik NLATikoNAL LrTHoarRAoHKi 
NA C 
WAOHiNGTON, D. c. 
H. HAUSTEIN. 
ILLUMINATING TILE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893, 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,030, 
??R 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY HAUSTEIN, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
ILLUMINATING-TILE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,030, dated November 21, 1893. 
Application filed April 6, 1893, Serial No. 469,308, (No model.) 
65 
7? 
75 
: 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY HAUSTEIN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of 
California, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in and Relating to the Con 
struction of Illuminating-Tiles; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act descriptiun of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the. letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention has for its object improve 
ments) in glazed tiles or covers that are used 
to convey light into vaults, elevator-shafts, 
and various apartments in a building. 
It consists, in the first place, in providing 
a novel mode of construction for this class of 
2 ? 
I devices whereby I am enabled to have both 
faces of the glass flush with the filling on both 
sides of the supporting plate, and to thereby 
produce tile-work that looks better finished 
and transmits more light than is obtainable 
where one face of the glass is partly con 
cealed within the tile-plate or the filling ma 
terial thereon. 
It further consists in providing the tile 
plate, around the openings where the glass. 
lenses are set, with ribs or flanges of peculiar 
construction, which serve to strengthen the. 
plate and form pockets wherein the filling 
material may spread and secure a firm hold 
on said plate and consequently upon the lenses 
therein. 
Referring to the drawings, -Figure 1 is a 
partly-broken sectional elevation of an illu 
minating-tile with single lenses constructed 
according to the principle of my invention. 
Fig. 2 shows two plans of the same, one hav 
ing round lenses and the other square ones. 
Fig. 3 is a broken sectional elevation of an 
illuminating-tile having double lenses and 
ribs projecting from both sides of the tile 
plate. Fig. 4 is a plan of the construction 
shown at Fig. 3, the latter figure being a sec 
tion on the line acac of said Fig. 4. Fig. 5 is 
a broken sectional elevation of an illuminat 
ing-tile provided with double lenses of quad 
rangular shape and flanges surrounding the 
same on both sides of the plate. Fig. 6 is a 
| plan of the tile ilustrated at Fig. 5. Fig. 7 
is an elevation of an illuminating-tile mount 
ed in and arranged to swing within an outer 
frame or casing. Fig. 8 is a plan, partly in 55 
section, of the tile and frame shown at Fig. 7. 
Corresponding parts are indicated by corre 
sponding letters of reference in all the views. 
In the figures, A represents a metallic plate 
or grating provided with light-openings B and 
surrounded at the ends and sides by flanges C 
that project laterally from both faces of said 
plate or gratiug. 
Within or over the openings Bare set blocks 
of glass or lenses D, the outer surfaces of 
which are brought into line with both edges 
of the flanges C and therefore with the bor 
der flange of the tile-plate on both sides. 
One or two lenses may be used to fill or cover 
each opening. Single lenses are preferred for 
the thinner tiles, but double lenses may be 
used for the thicker ones. If single lenses 
are employed they are preferably made as 
shown at Fig. 1, that is provided with a ta 
pering portion forming a groove di between a 
central flange d' and an end flanged. The 
tapering portion allows the lenses to be read 
ily passed through the light-openings in the 
plate, on one side of which the central flanges 
are brough to bear, while the groove is well 
adapted to hold and retain cement filling that 
may be packed upon the end flange on the 
opposite side of said plate. If two lenses are 
used they may be set with their larger sur 
face next to and covering the light-openings 
on both sides of the tile-plate, as represented 
at Figs. 3 and 5. But the lenses may be made 
and applied in other ways as long as the ob 
ject of the invention is accomplished, as afore 
said, by exposing the surface of the glass on 
both sides of the tille. 
Around the light-openings and concentrical 
there with is a series of ribs E that project 
outwardly from both sides of the tile-plate. 
These ribs are cone-shaped in cross-section, 
curved on both sides, and forked at the ends, 
as shown at Fig. 4. They thus constitute on 
each side of the plate, around each opening, 
broken but interconnected flanges that cover 
much of the surface of the plate on both sides 
and at the same time leave empty spaces in 
and about them forming pockets or cavities 
in which the plastic material that enters into 
95 
. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
I OO 
509,030 
the composition of illuminating-tiles may be 
spread, thereby imparting unusual strength 
to the plate and causing the plastic material 
to set in such a way as will secure it a firm 
hold on the plate and the glasses therein. 
E' represents plain unbroken flanges that 
may be used sometimes in place of the ribs E. 
Like these they project outwardly from both 
sides of the tile-plate, and they completely 
surround the light-openings and part of the 
lens or lenses filling or covering the same. 
They may be either round or quadrangular 
in shape, as preferred. 
F is the filling material which I use in 
connection with the plate and the lenses. 
This, in ordinary cases, may be concrete or 
Cement, but where a fire-proof construction 
is desirable I prefer the use of plaster of paris, 
at least on one side of the tile, as atF, Figs. 
7 and 8. Whichever filling is used, it is care 
fully packed in and around the ribs or flanges 
of the plate between the light-openings and 
brought up to a level with the outer surfaces 
of the glass and the ends of the plate on both 
sides. Thus is formed an illuminating-tile 
in which the border of the plate, the filling, 
and the lenses are all in line or on a level on 
both sides, thereby presenting a neatness 
of appearance and affording material advan 
tages that are mot found in other construc 
tions. 
Figs. 7 and 8 illustrate a practical way of 
setting up my improved tile in place, which 
consists in providing it with pivot pins G that 
allow it to swing within an outer frame or 
casing H located at any suitable point in a 
partition or wall I where illuminating-tiles 
are employed. The frame H and the tile 
therein may be of any convenient shape, but 
it is thought the octagonal form shown in the 
drawings will be found generally acceptable. 
Flanges h h' inwardly projecting from oppo 
site sides of the frame afford bearing points 
upon which the edges of the tile may rest and 
prevent it from being swung around indis 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
7 ? 
criminately. The tile may be fastened and 
practically locked from the inside by means 
of a thumb-screw J passing through small 
plates K K' secured one to the edge of the 
tile and the other to the edge of the casing. 
Tiles mounted and arranged in this way may 
be used with as much advantage in sidewalks 
as in the partitions or walls of a building. 
They are invaluable for ventilating purposes 
and afford besides an important and ready 
means of escape in a case of fire. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States, is 
1. An illuminating-tile consisting of a per 
forated plate provided with flanges on both 
sides, oppositely-placed lenses covering the 
openings in said plate on each side and hav 
ing their outer faces in line with the outer 
edges of said flanges, and filling between said 
lenses forming even surfaces on both sides of 
the tille, substantially as set forth. 
2. An illuminating-tile composed of a plate 
provided with light-openings, lenses therein, 
and a series of forked ribs disconnected at 
the forked ends forming cavities in said plate, 
and filling material, substantially as set forth. 
3. An illuminating-tile comprising a plate 
provided with light - openings, curved ribs 
having forked ends concentrical with said 
openings, lenses, and filling, substantially as 
set forth. 
4. An illuminating-tile consisting of a per 
forated plate, oppositely-placed lenses cover 
ing the openings in said plate, a series of in 
ternal flanges or ribs surrounding said lenses, 
and filling material covering said flanges or 
ribs on both sides of the plate, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY HAUSTEIN. 
. 
Witnesses: 
R. R. STRAIN. 
C. H. MARBLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509130.txt	(No Model.) 
t 
J. H. LEWIS & A. WEENINY. 
SLIDING DOOR LOCK, 
No. 509, 130, 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893, 
- 
QO 
2 e 
s 
arr 
N 
S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
H 2, Sea 
H 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
Z4%esses; m 22:/. 2.%3: 
66244 
6742-72 ent 
3%22%2% 
ZY6.2-, 
Z42/s- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. LEWIS AND ALBERT WEENINK, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
S. DNG - DOOR LOC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,180, dated November 21, 1893. 
Application filed December 5, 1892, Serial No. 454,111 (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN H. LEWIS and 
ALBERTWEENINK, both citizens of the United 
States, residing at Chicago, in the county of 
Cook and State of Illinois, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Car 
Door Fasteners, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description, that will en 
able others to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to an improved fas 
tening-device or catch for sliding-doors, and 
is more especially intended for use on freight 
car doors, as will be hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 is a broken-away front elevation; 
Fig. 2, a vertical section on line 2, Fig. 1; Fig. 
3, a plan of the catch part; Fig. 4, the inner or 
reverse side of the catch; Fig. 5, a section on 
line 5, Fig. 1; and Fig. 6, a broken-away detail. 
Referring to the drawings, A may represent 
a sliding-door to which the catch B is at 
tached, and C a door-post to which the lock 
ing-bolt D is attached. 
The back end of the catch is preferably of 
the circular form shown and is pivotally at 
tached to the door by bolt E inserted there 
through and secured on the inside by nut a. 
Between this end of the catch and the sur 
face of the door is a disk-plate F (Figs. 3, 4 
and 5), provided on opposite sides with hold 
ing-pins a' a' which are to be inserted in the 
door to prevent the plate from turning. This 
plate is provided with a socket-shoulder a 
(Fig. 5), having a square aperture a (Fig. 4), 
which fits into the bolt-aperture in the catch. 
The bolt E is provided with squaresides a 
corresponding to the square aperture in the 
plate F and socket-shoulder thereof and also 
with the spherical head a, so that the same 
cannot be removed from the outside. The 
edge of the plate F is cut away at one side, 
as at b (Fig. 4), providing stop-shoulders b'b. 
This leaves the edge of the catch project over 
the cut-away edge of the plate F; the project 
ing edge being provided with the rigid stop 
lugb. This arrangement provides for the 
turning of the catch from a horizontal to a 
vertical position and back again to a horizon 
tal or locking position, as the stop-lug b will 
come alternately in contact with shoulders b' 
- 
b and confine the movement of the catch 
within that limit. The object of this is to 
throw the catch up out of the way when the 
door is opened, as the catch will project be 
yond the edge and be in the way, especially 
on car-doors. When the arrangement is such 
that the catch would not be in the Way, it can 
be secured rigidly to the door in a horizontal 
position, and the adjustable features just de 
scribed be dispensed with in the construction. 
The bar-end of the catch is beveled as at d 
and provided with the locking-shoulder d". 
The bolt-plate G is secured to the door-post 
or frame C, and the locking-bolt D movably 
attached thereto in a vertical position. This 
bolt-plate is provided with guide-straps did 
which loosely retain the bolt in its relative 
position and permits of an endwise movement. 
The bolt d passes through the strap dand 
rigidly fastens the plate G in place, The 
locking-bolt is provided near its longitudinal 
center with the elongated slotg through which 
the bolt d passes, and which limits the up 
and down or endwise movement of the lock 
ing-bolt. The strap d is provided with the 
square aperture g' (Fig. 6), and the bolt d 
with a corresponding square shoulder g' (Fig. 
2), fitting the aperture g' so that the bolt d . 
cannot be turned from the outside. 
The locking-bolt is normally in its down or 
locking position and has the lower end bev 
eled, as at g, so that when the beveled sur 
face d of the catch-bar comes in contact there 
with in closing the door, the locking-bolt is 
forced upwardly until the line of the shoul 
der d' has passed beyond, when the locking 
bolt automatically gravitates into the locked 
position shown in Fig. 1. 
The catch is provided with the projection 
g' (Fig. 3), having an openingh therethrough. 
The lower end of the locking-bolt (Figs. 1 and 
2), is also provided with a projection or nose 
part h' also having an opening hwhich pro 
vides for the attachment of a locking-seal h 
indicated in dotted lines. The upper end of 
bolt D is also provided with an opening hat 
which point another seal can be attached as 
indicated. 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
50 
Having thus described our invention, what Ioo 
55 
75 
95 
509,180 
1. In a door fastener, the combination of a 
securing plate adapted for attachment to the 
door, said plate being provided with a central 
cylindrical hub having an angular bore, and 
being cut away at its edge on one side to pro 
vide stop shoulders, a catch plate loosely piv 
oted upon the hub and having a catch at its 
outer end and a stop lug projecting between 
the shoulders on the securing plate, and a 
bolt passing through the said two plates, said 
bolt having an angular neckportion to fit the 
bore of the hub and prevent the securing 
plate from turning, and a head to overlap the 
end of the hub and hold the securing plate 
to the door and the catch plate to the secur 
ing plate; substantially as described. 
2. In a door fastener of the character de 
scribed, the combination of a vertically ar 
ranged bolt-plate having guide straps, a lock 
ing bolt sliding in said straps, said bolt hav 
ing a central longitudinal slot through which 
O 
20 
the bolt for fastening the plate to the door 
frame passes to guide and limit the movement 
of the sliding lock-bolt; substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a door fastener of the character de 
scribed, the combination of a disk-plate adapt 
ed to be secured to the door, a bevel-ended 
catch pivoted upon a central hub of the plate, 
a vertically anchored bolt-plate adapted to be 
secured to the frame of the door, and a bevel 
ended locking bolt sliding in guide straps on 
said plate, the catch and the locking bolt be 
ing provided with projections g, h, respect 
ively, adapted for the attachment of a seal 
lock; substantially as described. 
35 
JOHN H. LEWIS. 
ALBERT WEENINK. 
Witnesses: 
L. M. FREEMAN, 
J. P. DONALSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509230.txt	(No Model.) 
W. K. LIGGETT, 
CORN HARWESTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 509,230. 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893, 
0) 
R 
ses as 
rs 
28i-ev-coca 
(22-73-4-X4----e 2, 2. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,230. 
W. K. LIGGETT, 
CORN HARWESTER, 
8 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893, 
(Y, 
s 
alo 
eas 
S 
 
  
 
2 
W g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
W. K. LIGCETT, 
CORN HARWESTER 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 509,230, 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893. 
R 
is 
2SY T-I 
1. 
 
 
 
 
 
28)ib-casca 
W.6.J. 
(24-2-2. - 
r 
 
R) \. 
II 
344-uov to 
I 
76&art 2.4%. 
53 elttorney/244A2627 
THE NATIONAL LITHogRAPHING company, 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM K. LIGGETT, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
CORN-HARVESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,280, dated November 21, 1893. 
Application filed December 27, 1892, Serial No. 456,377, (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. K. LIGGETT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Co 
lumbus, in the county of Franklin and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Corn-Harvesters; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
The present invention has for its object to 
simplify the construction of corn harvesters 
that embody a revolving table on which the 
shockis formed in a series of compartments, 
and reduce the size and cost of the machine 
by dispensing with Separate feeding mechan 
ism for moving the stalks from the gathering 
mechanism to the shock forming table. 
A further purpose of the invention is to 
improve the general construction of this class 
of agricultural machines and increase their 
usefulness and efficiency. 
The invention consists of the novel features 
and the peculiar construction and combina 
tion of the parts which will be hereinafter 
more fully described and claimed and which 
are shown in the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a corn har 
vesting machine embodying my invention, 
parts being broken away about on the lineXX 
of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a top plan view of the ma 
chine, the upper portion of the derrick being 
broken away. Fig. 3 is a rear end view of 
the machine, parts being broken away. Fig. 
4 is a detail view of the crankshaft, for actu 
ating the gathering arms. 
The platform A is supported on the caster 
wheel B and wheels C C that are mounted on 
the ends of the axles D. The caster wheel B 
is journaled in the lower end of a frame. E 
which is mounted upon a post F so as to swing 
laterally, and is provided with a clevise to 
which the team is hitched. Guards 1 project 
forward from the sides of the platform and 
form passages G between their inner sides 
and a frame H which projects vertically from 
the said end of the platform. This frame H. 
is approximately cylindrical in form, having 
its rear side flattened to provide a transverse 
passage or chamber Jimmediately in the rear 
of the frame H and directly in front of the 
shock forming table K. 
The gathering arms 2 are pivotally attached 
midway of their ends to vibrating arms 3 and 
are provided with auxiliary tines 4 which sup 
plement the action of the curved ends of the 
said gathering arms. ... 
The crankshaft 5 having double crank arms 
at each end is provided near its lower end, 
preferably between the lower crank arm, with 
a beveled pinion 6 which meshes with a cor 
responding beveled pinion 7 on the outer end 
of a shaft 8, the latter having a beveled pin 
ion 9 on the inner end which is in mesh with 
a beveled pinion 10 on the shaft 11. A bev 
eled pinion 12 on the inner end of the shaft 
11 meshes with a beveled gear wheel 13 on 
the axle D and is driven thereby. There are 
upper and lower gathering arms 2 which are 
provided with bearings to receive the crank 
arms at the ends of the crank shaft 5. 
The knives 14 are located at the inner ends 
of the passages G and extend obliquely across 
the same. 
Curved guards 15 are located at the ends 
of the passage J to give proper direction to the 
stalks as the same are moved onto the plat 
form. A by means of the gathering arms 2. 
A yielding support 16 is provided at the 
rear side or passage J and sustains the stalks 
in an erect position while in and during the 
time they are carried from the passage J to 
the proper shock forming compartment on 
the table K. This yielding support 16 is se 
cured at one end to a standard 17 projected 
vertically from the platform A and the other 
end of the said support 16 is free and adapted 
to yield to permit the stalks to be gathered 
into a shock forming compartment on the 
said table K. 
The shock forming table Kisjournaled on a 
spindle 18 extended vertically from the cast 
ing 19 which is attached to the platform A. 
The beveled gear 20 attached to the table 
K meshes with a pinion 21 on the shaft D 
and is actuated thereby to rotate the table K 
about the spindle 18. 
A series of radial partitions 22 projected 
vertically from the table IK constitutes the 
walls of a series of shock forming compart 
ments. The inner ends of these partitions 22 
connect with a tubular extension 23 which is 
tapered to conform to the shock. 
A series of arms 24 is pivoted at one end 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
509,230 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
to the outer ends of the partitions 22, one for 
each shock forming compartment and have 
their free ends constructed to be projected 
into the said shock forming compartment by 
suitably disposed springs 25. 
Short arms 23 project from the pivoted ends 
of the arms 24 and are adapted to engage 
with and travel upon an inclined track 7 for 
the purpose of projecting the free ends of 
the arms 24 across the passage or chamber J to 
engage with the stalks located therein to sweep 
the same into the shock forming compart 
ment. The forward end of the inclined track 
27 is formed on a gradual curve 28 on which 
the short arm 26 travels to permit the free 
ends of the arms 24 to gradually approach 
the plane in which the table K travels to 
sweep the stalks onto the shock forming com 
partments without interference of the said 
arms 24 with the guards 15 or other portion 
of the machine. The arms 24 are slightly 
curved in their length and have their outer 
ends curved in opposite direction to the main 
portion. The lateral extension 29 provided 
On the inner side of the arms 24 engages with 
the stalks and prevents the same approach 
ing too close to the pivotal supports of the 
arms 24. There will be two sets of these arms 
24 for each partition as shown most clearly in 
Figs.1 and 3 for the purpose of engaging with 
the stalks near their upper and lower ends to 
hold the same in an erect position while being 
swept from the passage or chamber J into the 
shock forming compartment. 
As the machine is drawn over the field the 
table K is rotated by means of gearings 20 
and 21, and the gathering arms 2 are actuated 
by the instrumentalities herein set forth. The 
gathering arms 2 sweep the stalks into the 
passage or chamber J, and the arms 24 sweep 
the said stalks from the passage or chamber J 
into the shock forming compartment. After 
the shock has reached the desired dimensions 
it is temporarily bound and deposited on the 
ground by the following instrumentalities, 
which consist of a swinging derrick 30 having 
a windlass 31 at one side on which is adapted 
to wind ropes or cords 32 and 33 which pass 
over suitable guide pulleys on the cross beam 
30' of the derrick, a spool 35 journaled in the 
bale 36 attached to the lower end of the rope 
or cord 32, a ring 34 attached to the lower end 
of the rope or cord 33, ropes or cords 36 and 
37 adapted to wind upon the spool 35, the rope 
or cord 37 attached to the ring 34 and the rope 
or cord 36 having a ring 38 at its free end 
and a bar 39 pointed at one end and having 
a handle at the opposite end and adapted to 
be thrust through the spool 35 for the purpose 
of rotating the latter and winding up the cords 
36 and 37 upon the spool 35. After the shock 
has been formed upon the table A the cords 
36 and 37 are passed around the shock in op 
posite directions and the rings 34 and 38 over 
lapped and the bar 39 is thrust through the 
shock the point passing through the rings 34 
and 38 thereby holding the same together. 
The bar 39 is rotated to tighten the cords 36 
and 37 about the shock. The shock being 
temporarily bound is elevated by operating 
the windlass 31 and is deposited upon the 
ground by swinging the derrick 30 to the rear 
of the machine, and releasing the windlass 31. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a corn harvester having the cutting 
and gathering mechanism located at its for 
ward end, and having a transverse passage or 
chamber immediately in the rear of the said 
cutting and gathering mechanism, the com 
bination of a rotatable shock forming table, a 
series of arms having yielding connection With 
the said table, and means for throwing the 
free ends of the said arms outward to project 
into the said transverse passage and SWeep 
the stalks therefrom onto the shock forming 
table, substantially as described. 
2. In a corn harvester having a cutting 
and gathering mechanism located at its for 
ward end, and having a transverse passage 
or chamber immediately in the rear of the 
said cutting and gathering mechanism, the 
combination of a rotatable table located in 
the rear of said transverse passage, a series 
of radial partitions constituting the Walls of 
shock forming compartments, and a series of 
arms, one for each compartment, pivotally 
supported at the outer ends of the said par 
titions and constructed to project into the 
said transverse passage and sweep the stalks 
therefrom into the said shock forming COm 
partments, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a corn harvester having a transverse 
passage or chamber J, the combination of a 
rotatable table located in the rear of said 
transverse passage, a series of arms pivoted 
on the said table and adapted to sweep the 
stalks from the said transverse passage onto 
the shock forming table and having short 
arms, springs for actuating the said arms 
and an inclined track to engage with the said 
short arms, substantially as described for the 
purpose set forth. 
4. In a corn harvester having a transverse 
passage, the combination of a rotatable ta. 
ble, and a series of arms pivoted upon and 
carried by said table, and having lateral ex 
tensions on their inner sides, substantially 
as described for the purpose specified. 
5. In a corn harvester having a transverse 
passage, the combination of a series of arms 
pivotally supported upon and carried by a 
rotatable table, and having short arms pro 
jected from their pivotal ends, and an in 
clined track having its forward end gradu 
ally curved for the said short arm to travel 
upon to gradually withdraw the sweeping 
arms from the said transverse passage, sub 
stantially as described for the purpose speci 
fied. 
6. In a corn harvester having a transverse 
passage, and having curved guards at the 
ends of said transverse passage and a yield 
75 
95 
Oc 
O 
II5 
25 
 
509,230 
S 
movements of the sweeping arms when re 
moving the stalks from the said transverse 
passage onto the shock forming table, sub 
stantially in the manner set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
I5 
WILLIAM. K. LIGGETT. 
Witnesses: 
ISOM FINLEY, 
JOHN CROWE. 
ing support in the rear thereof, the combina 
tion of a rotatable table having a series of 
partitions to form compartments, a series of 
curved arms pivoted at one end at the outer 
5 ends of the said partitions, and having short 
arms projected from their pivotal ends, 
springs for projecting the free ends of the 
sweeping arms into and across the said com 
partments, and an inclined track having its 
Io forward end curved, substantially as shown, 
to engage with the short arm and control the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509330.txt	(No Model.) 
C. SCHLARED. 
FLUID PRESSURE BRAKE MECHANISM. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 509,330. 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893. 
 
  
a 
zGZ2 
s -2 
 
 
% (Zz 
2 
 
s N N 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
- - - - - - - m - - - - - - - - - - -m - 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
 
 
W W W W 
S. 
 
. 
 
 
S 
 
 
y S S. 
24%% 
  
\ 
  
NSWily).2% 8 
... NW 
A. x 
N W 
  
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
C. S CHLARED, 
FLUID PRESSURE BRAKE MECHANISM, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
S NM '0 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893, 
NSN24 & 
E. All 
NEA 
2S NZS N NS 
  
 
 
 
 
No. 509,330. 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
NZs -- "WV 
 
N. 
------ NSNS 
seates 
ST 
22% 
7%% NA 
W. 
% 
W. 
NNENAE 
NZ ZZZZZZZZ --/ 
y 
3v-vov to 
26, al-e62- 2e2 
33 ethoveta1 
 
WASHINGTON, o, c. 
(No Model.) 
C, SCHLARED. 
FLUID PRESSURE BRAKE MECHANISM, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
NO, 509,830. 
- 
 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893, 
I-N N 
In% N 
o 
5 Ngala El?NS N \ 
see N 
23N2, 3 Fest 
%2eS&S 
 
 
2 
 
 
y 
% 
  
SY y N 
 
2 
s 
3. 
 
22 s 
 
  
S 
 
 
 
N 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
sis 
E 2 s 
 
 
N N N 
3.11uc41 to 
%2%-ze/24 
 
 
 
y 
N 
% 
% 
% 
TH, NArionAL LITHoaRAPHING coMPANY. 
WASHINGTON, C. C. 
(No Model.) 
C. S CHLARED, 
FLUID PRESSURE BRAKE MECHANISM. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 509,330. 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893. 
 
 
W % s % (i. . 
s 
-- 
---- - to- 
5 
N. 
s N. 
 N 
t 
 
Rise 
A&N 2 
SNff.5% As 
N 
2 27 a  
N 
as a 
& 
N 
%22 SS % S 
2 % 25 Wa re SN 
2ZZ2nor 
S 
his 
t 
---- - 
1 
N- 
1. 
- 1 
% 
i Sz, 
N 
C 
N 
NN 
----- Y - 
s 
y ------Y. 
M 
1. 
Y 
wa. 
Y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
C. S CHLARED. 
FLUID PRESSURE BRAKE MECHANISM. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,330 
Patented NOW. 21, 1893. 
  
S 
N 
 
N 
   
S2x2 EN 
N 
NS 
5 
H E 
% W W 
% % S 
ass . 
N 
re 
3. 
A. 
NS 
% S S 
 
 
 
 
% 
 
N 
s 
7% S 
W 
 
  
 
 
r 
 
S 
--- 
N 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,330. 
Patented Nov. 21, 1893, 
C. S CHLARED, 
FLUID PRESSURE BRAKE MECHANISM, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
 
 
 
 
Y 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEs SCHLARED, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
FLUID-PRESSURE BRAKE MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,880, dated November 21, 1893. 
Application filed March 6, 1898, Serial No, 464,715, (No model.) 
55 
O 
To all whon, it may concern. . 
Fig. 1 is taken. Fig. 3 is a horizontal view 
Be it known that I, CHARLES SCHLARED, a 
taken on the plane J-ty, Fig. 1, looking up 
citizen of the United States, residing at Colum 
ward with the valve proper removed. Fig. 4 
bus, in the county of Franklin and State of 
is a vertical sectional view taken on the plane 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
indicated by line 2-2, Fig. 3, illustrating a 
Improvements in Fluid-Pressure Brake Mech 
pressure regulating or equalizing valve. Fig. 
anisms; and I do hereby declare the following 
5 is a top plan view of the rotary valve re 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
moved. Fig. 6 is a vertical sectional view of 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
the valve shown in Fig. 5 and taken on the 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
line v-v of that figure. 
Fig. 7 is a vertical 
use the same. 
longitudinal sectional view of the triple-valve, 
The automatic compressed air brake mech 
the auxiliary reservoir and the brake-cylin 
anisms at present in common use include the 
der. Fig. 8 is a transverse sectional view of 
following instrumentalities: on the locomo 
the triple-valve taken on the line v-v of Fig. 
tive, a main compressed air reservoir and en 
7 with the end of the auxiliary reservoir and 
gineer's valve by which the engineer controls 
brake cylinder in elevation. 
Fig. 9 is a sec 
the brake operating mechanism; on each car, 
tional view illustrating an automatic cut-off 
a brake cylinder and brake mechanism, an 
between the train pipe and whistle or supple 
auxiliary reservoir and triple-valve; and 
mentary train pipe. Fig.10 is a longitudinal 
train pipes connected with the triple valve 
vertical sectional view of the conductor's 
and from car to car by suitable couplings and 
valve. Fig.11 is a transverse sectional view 
with the main reservoir through the engineer's 
of the conductor's valve taken on the line 
valve. In mechanisms of this kind compressed 
?u-u of Fig. 10. Fig. 12 is a general view 
airis supplied from the main reservoir through 
illustrating how the several parts may be con 
the trainpipes to each of the auxiliary reser 
nected. 
voirs and the brakes are operated by a dis 
In the instance shown, the case or chest of 
charge of air from the train pipe which per 
the engineer's valve is divided into two cham 
mits the compressed air stored in the auxil 
bers 1 and 2 air-tightly separated from each 
iary reservoirs to act on operative devices in 
other; and the train pipe 3 and supplemen 
the triple-valve to establish communication 
tary train pipe 4, or as I have called it whistle 
between said auxiliary reservoir and the brake 
and-feed pipe, are connected with the cham 
cylinder to set up the brakes. The functions 
ber 1, said chamber being supplied with com 
of the parts named in the foregoing statement 
pressed air from the usual main reservoir 
are now so well known that they do not re 
through the pipe 5 having branches 6 that 
uire a detailed description. 
open into the chamber 1 at opposite points 
The object of my invention is to improve 
7. The rotary valve 8 which turns on the seat 
the construction of Some of the parts referred 
101 at the upper end of the chamber has 
to and to add others so as to increase their 
a hollow stem 10 to the upper end of which 
usefulness, to render them more certain and 
is secured a handle 9 by which the valve 
more effective in operation, and more dura 
may be operated by the engineer. The ro 
ble and less liable to derangement in use; and 
tary valve 8 has a large through opening or 
it consists in the construction of parts and 
port 11, a large port 12 that does not extend 
devices herein described and particularly 
through the valve but communicates with 
pointed out in the claims. 
the hollow stem 10, two ports 13 and 14, and 
Referring to the annexed drawings, in which 
a small opening or port 15. The seat 101 
are illustrated embodiments of my improve 
for the rotary valve at the head of the com 
ments, Figure i is a central vertical sectional 
pressed air chamber 1 has a large opening 
view of the engineer's valve taken on the plane 
or port 16 that leads to the train pipe 3, a 
ac-ac of Fig. 2, passing through the train pipe 
small port 17 also leading to the train pipe 
alid what I shall call a '-whistle-and-feed or 
feed ports 18 and 19 that lead through press 
supplementary train pipe. Fig. 2 is a similar - 
ure regulating or equalizing devices to the 
view taken at right angles to that on which train pipe 3 and whistle-and-feed or sup 
- 
- 
90 
95 
OC 
25 
35 C. 
45 
So 
 
2 
509,330 
IO 
2 o 
35 
55 
75 
plementary train pipe 4, respectively, and a 
small opening or port 15' that communicates 
with the atmosphere. 
The pressure or equalizing device employed 
comprises a chest or case in which is sup 
ported a stem 20 that is secured at its upper 
end in a flexible diaphragm 21 and is de 
pressed by the spring 22 arranged between a 
pin 24 in the lower end of the stem and a 
cross-bar 23 fixed in the case. On the stem 
20 is a piston 25 fitted air tightly to move in 
the cylindrical bore of the chamber. The 
flexible diaphragm 21 is air-tightly secured in 
the case and to the stem, and the space be 
tween the said diaphragm 21 and the piston 
25 communicates with the atmosphere through 
an orifice 26. The space above the diaphragm 
is connected with the chamber 1 by a passage 
27 that terminates in the port 18 and the 
space also communicates, with the train pipe 
by the passage 28. The opening to the pas 
sage 27 is immediately above the end of the 
stem 20, the latter serving as a valve to close 
said opening at the propertimes. The space 
above the diaphragm connects with the space 
beneath the piston 25 by a passage 75. 
102 designates a pipe that leads to the gov 
ernor for regulating the pressure of 
the com. 
pressed air in the main reservoir. 
The lower chamber 2 of the engineer's 
valve contains a reciprocating piston 29 hav 
ing a stem 54, the lower end of which is con 
structed to form a valve to close a passage 55 
leading to a whistle of any approved kind. 
The piston 29 is made with openings 31 that 
are closed at their lower ends by a flexible 
flap valve 32, below which is secured a washer 
57 constructed as shown to prevent too great 
a movement of said flap valve. That part of 
the chamber 2 which is above the piston 29 
communicates with the whistle or supple 
mentary train pipe through a passage 33. 
34 designates a triple valve case or chest 
in the bore of which is fitted a cylindric tube 
35 having its inner lower side formed to con 
stitute a seat for the slide valve 36. 
37 designates a cover that fits and is held 
closely on the top of the slide valve 36 by a 
spring 38. A short tube 39 secured or formed 
around an opening 40 in the cover 37 com 
municates with a compressed air chamber 41 
that surrounds the triple valve case or cylin 
der. The cover 37 is also provided with a 
small port 42. The slide valve 36 is made 
with a large port or passage 43, Small ports 
44 and 45 and exhaust port 46 in its lower 
face, and the slide-valve seat 35 is made with 
a large opening or passage 47 and a small 
port 48. 
49 designates the auxiliary reservoir, a 
large opening 5S, in which communicates 
with the slide-valve chamber 34. Formed in 
the upper part of the auxiliary reservoir cas 
ing or chest is a brake cylinder 50. Said 
auxiliary reservoir case also has air passages 
5151 that communicate from an opening 52 
to the brake cylinder. At the opposite end 
of the slide-valve cylinder is a large cham 
ber 59, in which fits a piston 60 that is at 
tached to the slide-valve. The end of the 
slide-valve chamber is closed by a head 61 
having a perforated plate or frame 62 that 
supports opposite the stem 63 of the piston a 
spring actuated stem 64. The chamber 59 
communicates with the train pipe 70 through 
the chamber of the head 61 and passages 65, 
66 and 67. Below the chamber 41 is a drain 
cup chamber 67' an opening between which 
and the chamber 41 is closed by the spring 
actuated check-valve 68. 
A small feed - groove 71 is made in the 
chamber 59 to permit compressed air from 
the train pipe to pass around the slide valve 
piston 60 into the auxiliary reservoir. 
The piston, the piston rod, and the spring 
in the brake cylinder are of the usual or any 
approved construction. 
The whistle-and-feed or supplementary 
train pipe 4 communicates with the slide. 
valve cylinder and thence with the auxiliary 
reservoir through passages 76 73, and 72 
placed in or between which is a spring check 
actuated valve 74. A short pipe 77 connects 
the passage 70 and the passage 76, and in 
this short pipe is located a spring actuated 
valve 78 that is arranged normally to close 
the pipe 77. The valve 78 is held on its seat 
by a spring of considerable strength, but less 
than that of the normal running pressure in 
the train pipe so that if the supplementary 
train pipe becomes ruptured and loses its air 
the compressed air in the train pipe will not 
be wholly liberated, but only sufficient to set 
up the brakes and thus notify the engineer 
of the leak. 
The chest or case 80 of the conductor's valve 
contains a slide valve 81 having a port 82. 
Attached to the right hand end of the slide 
valve 81 (as seen in Fig. 10) is a stem 83 hav 
ing a head 85 that extends into a tube or 
small casing 84 on the end of the chest 80. 
Interposed between a loose ring or washer 86 
abutting against the head 85 and a sleeve 87 
having a shoulder 89 that abuts against the 
head of the case 80, is a coiled spring 88. The 
sleeve 87 passes movably through the head 
of the chest 80. A hollow nut 90 the bore of 
which permits the passage therethrough of 
the head 85 closes the end of the casing 84, 
and the inner end of said nut 90 serves as a 
stop for the loose ring or washer 86. 
Pivoted on a bracket below the chest 80 is 
a lever 91 the upper arm of which passes 
through a slot 92 in the lower side of said 
chest and engages the slide valve 81 so as to 
be capable of moving the same in either di 
rection against the action of the spring 88. 
It will be noted that this spring 88, in con 
nection with the contiguous parts, tends to 
hold the valve 81 in one position and that 
should said valve be moved to the left the 
spring will be compressed and tend to return 
the valve to its normal position; and that 
should the valve be moved from its normal 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
I 25 
75 
509,880 
- 
3. 
. 
. . 
" 
- 
-- 
15 
The tube 95 
position to the right it pushes forward the 
sleeve 87, which compresses the spring 88 
against the washer 86 and the spring again 
tends to restore the valve to its normal posi 
tion. A cover 93 having a port 94 and a tube 
95 formed or secured around said port is held 
down air-tightly on the upper side of the 
slide-valve 81 by the spring 96. 
extends through the upper side of the chest 
80 into a collar 97 to which the whistle or sup 
plementary train pipe is connected. The train 
or brake pipe is attached to a collar 98 on the 
left-hand end of the chest 80. The slot 92 is 
enlarged as shown at 99. 
The conductor's valve is attached at any 
convenient place on the car by 
plate or bracket 100. 
With engineers, stops are of two kinds, 
namely, service and emergency. The 
service stop is made gradually and is such as is 
made under ordinary and normal conditions, 
while the emergency stop is made suddenly, 
- and when there appears to be imminent dan 
ger of accident. 
To make the service stop a 
comparatively small quantity of air is dis 
25 
charged from the train pipe, and to make the 
emergency stop a large quantity is discharged. 
To fill the auxiliary reservoirs and release 
the brakes the handle of the engineer's valve 
is turned so as to bring the port 11 into align 
ment with the port 16, as shown in Fig. 1, 
which freely admits compressed air from the 
chamber 1 into the train pipe, thence through 
passages 70, 67,66,65, chamber 59, and through 
the feed groove 71 into the triple slide valve 
chamber and the auxiliary reservoir. The 
pressure of air on the triple valve piston 60 
forces the attached slide valve inward so that 
the ports 43 and 44 are closed but the exhaust 
port 46 is open and establishes communica 
tion between the brake cylinder and the at 
mosphereby passages, 53,51,52, and 47. The 
outer end of the exhaust port 46 leads to the 
atmosphere through the hole (not shown but 
well understood) in the side of the triple valve 
CaSe, 
When the train pipe is being filled through 
the port 11, the port 13 of the rotary valve 
coincides with the port 19 and air is fed also 
through an equalizer and the whistle-and 
feed or supplementary train pipe, and thence 
through passages 76, 73 and 72 to the triple 
slide valve chamber and auxiliary reservoir. 
A movement of the rotary valve 8 to the right 
will bring the port 11 under the port 18 and 
thereby establish communication between the 
chamber 1 and train pipe through a pressure 
equalizer or regulator designed to maintain a 
particular degree of pressure in the train pipe 
notwithstanding variations of pressure in the 
main reservoir. This position of the valve is 
called running position. 
It may not be inopportune at this point to 
explain the operation of the pressure regu 
lating or equalizing valve or device. The 
elasticity of the spring 22 in said equalizing 
device determines the amount of pressure to 
be maintained in the train pipe. If, for illus 
tration, a pressure of about seventy pounds 
is desired in said train pipe the spring 22 
should be such as to expand with a force of 
about seventy pounds, for so long as the press 
ure in the space or chamber under the piston 
25 (which chamber through passage 75 com: 
municates with and indeed may be said to 
form a part of the train pipe) is less than 
seventy pounds the spring 22 will unseat the 
valve at the upper end of the stem 20 and al 
low air from the chamber 1 to pass through 
passages 27 and 28 into train pipe; and when 
the pressure in the train pipe slightly exceeds 
the expanding force of the spring 22 the pis 
means of a ton 25 will be forced up and the 
passage 27 
from the chamber 1 closed. 
- 
- 
The pressure equalizer or regulator for the. 
whistle-and-feed or supplementary train 
pipe is not shown in detail but it is like that 
illustrated in connection with the train pipe 
and it is thought that a description and draw 
ing of one will suffice for both. 
In running position,' that is, when port. 
11 is under port 18, the port 14 or its groove 
coincides with the port 19 so that compressed 
air from the chamber 1 is also supplied to the 
whistle-and-feed pipe 4. For the service 
stop the handle is given further movement 
or turn to the right so as to bring the port 
12 under the port 17. As this port is small 
the escape of air from the train pipe will 
be comparatively slow and may be discon 
tinued when the pressure has been sufficiently 
reduced to allow a gentle setting up of the 
brakes. The amount discharged may be de 
termined from a gage operated by the press 
ure of air in the train pipe as usual. After 
the service stop, the valve 8 is turned back 
to the left to release the brakes and then to 
the right so that all ports excepting 18 and 
19 are closed. When the proper small quan 
tity of air is discharged from the train pipe, 
as in making the service stop, the pressure in 
the auxiliary reservoir, exceeding that in the 
train pipe, forces the piston 60 outward until 
the port 44 establishes communication be 
tween ports 42 and 48 and allows compressed. 
air to escape from the auxiliary reservoir 
through passages, 79, 52, 51 and 53 into the 
brake cylinder. As the passage 42 is small 
the escape of air from the auxiliary reservoir 
into the brake cylinder is comparatively slow 
and the brakes are gently set up. To make. 
the emergency stop the handle is given a fur 
ther movement to the right so as to bring 
port 12 Squarely under the port 16 which al 
lows a large quantity of air to escape from 
the train pipe so as greatly to reduce the press 
ure in. Said pipe, whereupon the piston 60 
is forced violently outward bringing the port 
43 into alignment with the ports 40 and 47, 
and the port 45 into communication with the 
port 48. As the ports 40, 43 and 47 are large 
the compressed air confined in the chamber 
4l exhausts quickly into the brake cylinder 
so that the pressure in said chamber becomes 
35 
40 
45 
55 
95 
OO 
I o5 
... O 
II.5. 
l25 
I 3o 
 
4 
509,830 
d 
15 
. 
. 
. 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
." . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
* . 
. 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. . . . 
. . . 
. . . 
. . 
ervoir. . 
. . . 
also escaping through these small ports 15 
s discharged through the whistle-and-feed 
quickly less than that in the train pipe, the 
or supplemental train pipe. 
air in which lifts the check valve 68, passes 
hen it becomes necessary for the con 
through the chamber 41, ports 43 and 47 and 
ductor, independently of the engineer, to op 
exerts its force in and fills the brake cylin 
erate the brakes the lower arm of the lever 91 
der. While the port 12 is under the port 16, 
is moved to the left so as to throw the slide 
that is, in the emergency, position of the ro 
valve to the right and uncover the large end 
tary valve 8, the port 11 is under the whis 
99 of the slot, 92. This opening then permits 
tle-and-feed or supplementary train pipe 
air to escape from the main train pipe and 
port 19 and compressed air in the main res 
the brakes are set up as when the engineer 
ervoir is being supplied to the auxiliary res 
with his valve discharges air from a train 
pipe. The service or emergency stop may be 
After either the service or emergency stop, 
made by the conductor with as much cer 
the handle is turned to the left so as to bring 
tainty as by the engineer, it being only nec 
the port 11 under the port 16 when compressed 
essary for him to discharge a small or large 
air from the main reservoir, again filling the 
quantity of air from the train pipe in accord 
train pipe, forces the piston 60 back closing 
ance with the nature of the stop desired; and 
the port 42 or the ports 40 and 48 and open 
the quantity of air discharged is, of course, 
ing the exhaust port 46 which allows the air 
determined by the length of time the open 
to escape from the brake cylinder and the re 
ing 99 is kept uncovered. 
lease of the brakes. 
When the rotary valve is in position to re 
re may be circumstances which render 
mportant that the conductor shall be able 
lease the brakes the small port 15 thereinco 
it i 
incides with the small opening or port. 15 in 
independently, of the engineer to operate the 
brakes, so that in addition to the ordinary the rotary valve seat and while it is filling 
the trainpipe and auxiliary reservoirs it is 
function of the device incommon use known 
as the conductor's valve for signaling the en 
gineer I have provided a construction (shown and 15. The object in allowing air to escape 
through these small ports is to notify the en 
in Figs.10 and 11) that will enable him to 
gineer as to the position of his valve and that 
do so. . 
as soon as his brakes are released he should 
The 'conductor's valve is secured at any 
move his valve to running position;' oth 
point in the car so as to be ready to be reached 
erwise the pressure in the train pipe will 
by the conductor, and as before stated, its 
equal that in the main reservoir when there 
chest is connected by branch pipes from the 
should be a reserve or excess of pressure in 
main train pipe and whistle-and-feed or 
the main reservoir to be used in case of emer 
supplementary train pipe. The longer arm 
gency. 
of the lever 9i is connected to the usual over 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
head rope that runs through the train so that 
a pull thereon will throw the slide valve 81 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a triple valve for fluid pressure brake 
to the left. This will bring the port 82 into 
mechanisms comprising main and auxiliary 
alignment with the port 94 and air from the 
reservoirs, the casing 34 having a service stop 
whistle-and-feed or supplementary train 
port 48, an emergency stop port 47, and a pas 
pipe will escape through the slot,92. Apar 
sage or chamber 41 independent of or non 
tial discharge of the air from the whistle 
communicant with the auxiliary reservoir and 
and-feed or supplemental train pipe re 
constructed to communicate with the main 
45 duces the pressure of the air above the pis 
train or brake pipe and to be normally 
ton 29 in the chamber 2 of the engineer's 
charged with compressed fluid from said pipe, 
valve and the greater pressure below causes 
and the main slide valve 36 having both the 
said piston to rise and with it the valve of 
service stop port 44 and the emergency stop 
the stem 54 that is employed to close the pas 
port43 arranged so that compressed fluid from 
sage 55. As soon as the passage 55 is opened, 
the passage or chamber 41 may be conducted 
air from the chamber 2 being under greater 
through the said 
port 43 and port 47 to the 
pressure than the atmosphere rushes through 
brake cylinder on application of the emer 
the passage 55 and signals the engineer. 
gency stop, all constructed, combined, and 
When the pressure on the under side of the 
operating substantially as described. 
piston 29 has been reduced by the escape of 
2. In a triple valve for fluid pressure brake 
compressed air, said piston returns by the aid 
mechanisms comprising main and auxiliary 
of gravity and the pressure of air on its up 
reservoirs, the casing 34 having a service stop 
per side to close the passage 55, after which 
port 48, an emergency stop port 47, and a 
an equilibrium of pressure in the whistle 
chamber 41 independent of or non-communi 
and-feed or supplementary train pipe and 
cant With the auxiliary reservoir, and con 
on the under side of the piston 29 is estab 
Structed to communicate with the main train 
lished through the openings 31. The flexible 
or brake pipe and to be normally charged 
washer or flap valve 32 permits the easy pas 
with compressed fluid from said pipe, and the 
sage of compressed air downward to estab 
valve 36 having the service stop port 44 and 
lish equilibrium on the upper and lower side 
the emergency stop ports 45 and 43, the port 
of the piston 29 but prevents the passage of 
43 arranged so that compressed fluid from the 
air upward through the opening 31 when air 
55 
35 
75 
95 
I do 
Cl 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
1.3d 
 
509,830 
5 
45 
So 
55 
- 
Io 
20 
passage or chamber 41 may be conducted operative devices in said valve for discharg 
through the said ports 43 and 47 to the brake 
ing air from either the brake pipe or the Sup 
cylinder on application of the emergency stop, 
plementary pipe, substantially as described. 
all constructed, combined, and operating sub 
7. A conductor's valve for the herein de 
stantially as described. 
scribed brake mechanism comprising a casing 
3. An engineer's valve having two cham 
80 having an orifice 98 to be connected with 
bers 1 and 2, a main train or brake pipe 3 and 
the brake pipe 3, an orifice 95 to be connected 
a whistle-and-feed or supplementary train 
with the whistle-and-feed or supplementary 
pipe 4 communicating through a valve with 
train pipe 4, and a discharge orifice or orifices 
the chamber 1, the supplementary pipe also 
92, a valve 81 constructed to close both the 
communicating with the chamber 2, and au 
orifices 98 and 95 when said valveisin a given 
tomatically operative devices in said cham 
position and to open either one of the last 
ber 2 for effecting a signal upon variation of 
mentioned orifices respectively by movements 
pressure in the supplementary pipe, substan 
in reverse directions, and means for auto 
tially as described. 
matically returning and normally to hold the 
4. An engineer's valve having two cham 
valve in said given position. 
bersland 2, a main train or brake pipe 3 and 
8. In a conductor's valve for the herein de 
a supplementary train pipe 4 communicating 
scribed brake mechanism, the casing 80 hav 
through a valve with the chamber 1, the sup 
ing an orifice 98 to be connected with the 
plementary train pipe also communicating 
brake pipe 3, an orifice 95 to be connected 
with the chamber 2, and automatically oper 
with the whistle-and-feed or supplementary 
ative devices in chamber 2 for effecting a sig 
train pipe 4, and a discharge orifice or orifices 
nal upon variation of pressure in the supple 
92, the valve 81 constructed to close both the 
mentary train pipe comprising the movable 
orifices 98 and 95 when said valve is in a given 
diaphragm or piston 29 having a passage and 
position and to open either one of the last 
check valve 32 therefor, the port 55, and the 
mentioned orifices respectively by movements 
valve 54 connected with piston 29 for opening 
in reverse directions, and means for auto 
and closingport 55, substantially as described. 
matically returning and normally to hold the 
5. In a brake mechanism, a main reservoir, 
valve in said given position comprising the 
an engineer's valve, an auxiliary reservoir, 
stem 83 having ahead or abutment 85, a sleeve 
a triple-valve, two independent feed pipes 
87 having a flange or stop 89, loose collar 86, 
controlled by the engineer's valve for supply 
stop 90 for said collar, and a spring interposed 
ing air to the auxiliary reservoir, and a pas 
between the sleeve and collar, constructed 
Sage between said feed pipes having a spring 
and combined substantially as described. . 
actuated valve to close said passage. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
6. In a fluid pressure mechanism of the kind 
presence of two witnesses. 
described, a main train or brake pipe 3 and a 
CHARLES:SCHLARED. 
Whistle-and-feed or supplementary trainpipe 
4, a conductor's valve connected with said 
4o brake pipe and with the supplementary pipe, 
CHAs. E. BEDWELL, 
GEO. M. FINCKEL. . 
Witnesses: 
35 
7 o 
75 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509430.txt	- 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,430. 
R. A. FOWDEN. 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 28, 1893. 
- - m - - - 
- - - - - - - 
- 
- 
a- 
- - - - - - - 
no-- - - - - 
2/4 
-- 
: 
L.-----...- 
s-o 
2.' 
* 
/ 7. / 
! 
Q------------ 
7 
------ ------z- --4------------- 
7 
--- 
i 
S- 
& 
27 
322 
27 
4, 
2 
2/ 
g 
Svowv//www. 
--- 
/2 
- 
2 
2 
w 
Y-4 
: 
O 
7, 2 2 2/ 
-...--- 
a/ e ic 
73 7. 
/ 
in Lil-rival 
---------- a - - - - - a 
--yy 
an ound 
or 
A-a----- 
M//7 nascalat. 
7-4-4-6 
y-4- 
Y. 
------------- *. 
-girl-O 
/M/a/Nv7 a 7a, 
al//.2% 
at A24-22% 
/77-77 
 
"NATIONAL LithograpHINo come. 
WASHNGroN, p. c. 
2/e 
77 
  
; 
; 
; 
3 
Ez 
5th 
i zo: 
i 
fy 
/6 
r- 
V 
73 
Ell 
C 
e'ez II ae/ 
2 
t 
-------- --f. 
--------- men -- - - - - - ---- 
a/ 2. A 21 
A. 
26 
A 2. 
A. 
a 
Ol' O 
OLO 
'A' 
'4' 
to 
w-ravaarwaleem airs-- 
s 
E: i 
-N 
N2/e3 
27. 
22 
-...-. 
-- 
e -- 
e- 
E-2'? 
%27 
2% 
: 
(No Model.) 
R. A. FOWDEN. 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 509,430. 
Patented Nov. 28, 1893. 
y 
| y 
 
 
 
O 
 
-- 
A 
eZICSEI 
2 
I 
E. 
e 
2 
S 
T- 
i 
 
-- 
i.e.--...-7. 
wa 
2 
 
 
  
RNilsnRN's 
s 
SNS NS 2 
setti 
67% 
Siga 32 // 
3 NNH3 
S.2% SHHSees 
cal 
S S 
is 
C 
-- a-- 
2 
s 
a 
f 
2 
? 
2%: 
s 
rved 
aa- 
- 
- 
- - 
2g". 
- - 
- 
- - 
- 
T...-...N 
is a - - 
- - - - 
... 1 
- - - 
W/ 77Mastatalot, 
24, 22-4----e. 
m 
M1/V7 a 7a 7. 
a/-42%le 
/77-7- 
The NANA lisgralia xoMANY 
WASMscM, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,430. 
 
R. A. FOWDEN, 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 28, 1893, 
W/7 Mastefalat, 
ML1a/n/ 7 ava, 
 
(No Model.) 
R. A. FOWDEN, 
PRINTING TELEGRAPH, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. . 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
wasting 
c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT A. FOWDEN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
INTERNATIONAL PRINTING TELEGRAPH. COMPANY, OF CAMDEN, NEW 
JEERSEY. 
PRINTING-TELEGRAPH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,430, dated November 28, 1893. 
Application filed January 31, 1893, Serial No. 460,350, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT A. FOWDEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Philadelphia, in the county of Phila 
5 delphia and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Printing-Telegraphs, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The principal objects of my invention are 
Io first, to provide an efficient, reliable and com 
paratively inexpensive printing telegraphin 
strument; second, to reduce the number of 
parts and to simplify the construction of the 
mechanical and electrical devices employed 
I5 in connection with such instrument; third, to 
increase the efficiency and to lessen the num 
ber of circuits and circuit connections in a 
printing telegraph instrument; fourth, to pro 
vide compact mechanical and electrical cir 
20 cuit controlling devices operating to increase 
the efficiency of a printing telegraph instru 
ment or a series of instruments looped to 
gether and to lessen the number of circuits, 
electro-magnets and relays in such instru 
25 ment or instruments; fifth, to insure perfect 
synchronism in the movement of the type 
wheel shafts of the instruments; sixth, to pro 
vide certain of the electro-magnets with sim 
ple, reliable and durable mechanical appli 
3o ances, whereby double duty is performed by 
them; and seventh, to construct and arrange 
the circuit connections of the line conductor 
or conductors in such manner that accidental 
interruption or cutting out of the same ar 
rests both the receiver and the transmitter, 
whereby the operator at each instrument is 
apprised of the occurrence of any accident or 
of want of synchronism in the movement of 
the instruments in circuit connected with each 
In a printing telegraph system embodying 
features of my invention, use is made of in 
struments connected together by a single line 
conductor and provided with duplicate me 
45 chanical and electrical devices operated syn 
chronously by means of two sets of local cir 
cuits and switches, whereof one set is em 
ployed for transmitting, and the other in re 
ceiving, and by means of two line circuits, of 
4o other. 
35 
55 
75 
ing the type-wheel shafts and the other for ef 
fecting the printing operations and both of 
the said line circuits traversing the single line 
conductor. 
The mechanical and electrical devices at 
each instrument comprise a type-wheel shaft, 
an electric motor operated by the armature 
lever of an electro-magnet and a retracting 
spring and adapted to revolve said shaft, a 
unison latch for stopping said shaft and hold 
ing the retracting spring of the motor in ten 
sion at the unison position to permit of the 
subsequent starting of the instrument under 
the influence of the retracting spring of the 
motor, a circuit interrupter, that is, an auto 
matic circuit maker and breaker adapted to 
break the ordinary or normal line circuit 
through the coils of relay electro-magnets of 
the transmitter and receiver at the unison po 
sition, and also adapted to alternately make 
and break said ordinary line circuit at posi 
tions other than unison in order to operate the 
motors and drive the shafts, a detent, toothed 
wheel and locking electro-magnet for locking 
the shaft at the unison position and in each 
printing position with the circuit interrupter 
in position for preventing the completion of 
the stroke of the motor, whereby the motor is 
adapted to Subsequently complete its stroke 
and proceed in its customary manner; a sun 
flower device, brush, printing keys and dou 
ble contact unison key; a toothed wheel and 
ratchet switch tending to effect an impres 
sion when the type-wheel shaft is arrested at 
any position other than the unison position; 
a three way revoluble switch adapted to break 
the local motor circuit at the unison position 
and to permit the same to be closed at a po 
sition other than the unison position and 
adapted to permit of the actuation of the uni 
son and locking devices by means of the lo 
cal unison circuit in order to permit of the 
starting of the type-wheel shafts under the 
influence of the retracting spring of the mo 
tor, and also adapted to prevent the closing 
of the local unison circuit after the type 
Wheel shaft has been set in motion and until 
it is checked by the ordinary operation of the 
unison latch; and a printing electro-magnet 
5o which one is availed of, for releasing and start- I having an armature lever for effecting im- Ioo 
95 
 
2 
509,430 
pressions, feeding the paper and transferring instruments and of printing are as follows:- 
The double contact unison key is depressed at 
the unison latch from the outermost portion 
of its spiral to the innermost portion thereof. 
the transmitter, thus closing the local unison 
circuit through the coils of the locking electro 
The set of local unison circuits that is em 
magnet and through the coils of the printing 
ployed in connection with the unison line 
and unison electro-magnet, whereby the uni 
circuit and with said electrical and mechani 
son latch is released and the printing pallet 
cal devices will now be described and traced. 
is caused to contact with a blank Space on 
The local unison circuit at the transmitter 
passes from earth through a generator to the 
the type-wheel and the paper fed forward, 
and whereby the locking bar or detent is 
unison contact of the sunflower device, thence 
brought into a position forlocking the shaft. 
to one set of contacts of a normally open 
The depression of the unison key also closes 
double contact unison key, thence through 
the coils of the locking electro-magnet and 
the unison line circuit, thereby energizing the 
through the coils of the unison and printing 
relay electro-magnet at the receiver, The re 
electro-magnet to earth. It may be remarked 
lay electro-magnet at the receiver being thus 
energized pulls up its armature and closes 
that the unison line circuit passes from earth 
through a generator, through the unison con 
the local unison three Way revoluble switch 
circuit through the coils of the locking elec 
tact of the Sunflower device to the other set 
of contacts of the normally open double con 
tro-magnet and through the coils of the print 
ing and unison electro-magnet, whereby the 
tact unison key, and then through a conduc 
tor of high resistance to line, said conductor 
unison latch at the receiver is released and 
of high resistance serving to effect a proper 
the shaft is locked by the locking bar or de 
distribution of the current in the local and 
tent as at the transmitter, so that both shafts 
are locked in position for holding the retract 
line unison circuits. From the line the uni 
son line circuit passes through the coils of a 
ing springs of their motors in unison. The 
relay electro-magnet and through a generator 
unison key at the transmitter is then released, 
thereby breaking the local unison circuit 
to earth at the receiver. The local unison 
through the coils of the locking electro-mag 
circuit of the receiver passes from earth 
through a generator, through the armature 
net and through the coils of the printing 
lever of the relay electro-magnet, thence 
and unison electro-magnet of the transmit 
through the three way revoluble switch and 
ter and also breaking the unison line circuit, 
through the coils of the locking electro-mag 
so that the relay at the receiver is demag 
net and the coils of the printing and unison 
netized and its armature lever falls back 
electro-magnet, to earth. 
and breaks the local unison circuit through 
the coils of the locking electro-magnet and 
The set of local printing and motor cir 
cuits that is employed after the unison line 
through the coils of the printing and unison 
electro-magnets of the receiver. Under these 
circuit has been broken and in connection 
with the normal printing line circuit, and the 
conditions the unison latches at both instru 
ments are permitted to return under the in 
above described mechanical and electrical de 
fluence of their retracting springs to the in 
vices will now be traced and described. 
nermost portions of their spirals and the ten 
At the transmitter the normal line circuit 
passes from earth through a generator and 
sion in the respective retracting springs of the 
through the coils of a relay electro-magnet, 
motors causes the type-wheel shafts of both 
whose armature-lever controls and closes the 
instruments to be slightly rotated under the 
local motor circuit through a generator, the 
influence of the motor springs. This rotation 
coils of the motor magnet and through the 
of the shafts causes the three way switches at 
three way switch. Thence the normal line 
the transmitter and receiver to close the local 
circuit passes through the circuit interrupter 
motor circuits through the coils of the motor 
to line, and thence through the coils of the 
electro-magnets and also causes the circuit 
relay electro-magnet at the receiver and to 
interrupter at the transmitter to make the 
earth through a generator. At the transmit 
normal line circuit through the coils of the re 
ter the local printing circuit is from earth 
lay electro magnets of both instruments and 
through a generator, the sunflower device, 
to subsequently break the same and the re 
contacts of the character keys, and through 
peated makes and breaks in the normal line 
the coils of the locking electro-magnet, and 
circuit due to the operation of the interrupter 
the coils of the printing and unison electro 
at the transmitter will cause the motor cir 
magnet, to earth. At the receiver the local 
cuits to be made and broken at the relay elec 
tro-magnets thereby causing the motors to 
motor circuit is controlled by the armature 
lever of the relay electro-magnet and is closed 
actuate the type-wheel shafts and to insure 
at the three way revoluble switch through the 
perfect synchronism of movement, because 
motor electro-magnet; and the local printing 
each motor is controlled by its relay and both 
circuit passes from earth through a generator 
relays are controlled by the circuit interrupter 
and through the contacts of the ratchet switch 
at each transmitter. The depression of a let 
and thence through the coils of the printing 
ter key causes the local printing circuit to be 
and unison electro-magnet to earth. 
closed through it at the transmitter as soon 
Assuming that the instruments are in the 
as the sunflower brush sweeps onto its corre 
unison position the operation of starting the 
sponding contact, and then through the coils 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
509,430 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
of the locking electro magnet and through 
the coils of the printing and unison electro 
magnet, whereby the former operates to ar 
rest the type-wheel shaft and the latter re 
leases the unison latch, feeds the paper and 
effects an impression of the characters on the 
type-wheel corresponding with the characters 
of a depressed key. The locking electromag 
net at the transmitter, however, arrests its 
type-wheel shaft slightly before the motor has 
completed its stroke, so that upon the release 
of the key the motor will first complete its 
Stroke and then proceed in the same manner 
that it did before the key was depressed. The 
arrest of the type-wheel shaft at the trans 
mitter at a character in the manner above de 
scribed causes its circuit interrupter to come 
to rest in position for causing the normal line 
circuit to bring the relay electro-magnet at 
the receiver into a condition corresponding 
with that of the relay electro-magnet at the 
transmitter. Under these circumstances the 
relay electro-magnet at the receiver acting 
through its armature-lever, arrests the motor 
and the latter arrests the receiver type-wheel 
shaft, whereupon the ratchet switch falls be 
tween the teeth of its toothed wheel, and 
thereby closes the circuit through the coils of 
the printing and unison electro-magnet and 
effects an impression at the receiver. When 
the printing key is released at the receiver, 
the motor completes its stroke so that both 
instruments are automatically set in motion 
and inasmuch as the unison latch is returned 
to its initial position during the printing op 
eration, it follows that other letter keys may 
be depressed, in order to print other charac 
ters. If this is not done both instruments 
run to unison and may be again operated in 
the manner herein before described. 
My invention consists of a printing tele 
graph system provided with relay electro-mag 
nets interposed in the line circuit and adapted 
to control local motor circuits at the trans 
mitter and receiver, whereby synchronism in 
the movement of the type-wheels of both the 
transmitter and the receiver, is insured. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph provided with relay electro-mag 
nets interposed in the line circuit and adapted 
to control local motor circuits at both instru 
ments, and a circuit interrupter located at the 
instrument operating as a transmitter and 
adapted to control the line circuit. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph provided with a transmitter and re 
ceiver respectively having motors responding 
to makes and breaks in a normal line circuit, 
whereby an accidental interruption in the 
line circuit arrests the motor of each instru 
ment in corresponding position. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph provided with motors at each in 
strument responding to makes and breaks in 
line produced by the revolution of the type 
wheel shaft at the transmitter, a local print 
ing circuit and devices for effecting an im 
pression and arresting the type-wheel shaft 
at the transmitter, whereby the motor at the 
receiver is caused to arrest its type-wheel 
shaft, and a local printing circuit and devices 
at the receiver controlled by a ratchet switch 
and adapted to effect an impression upon the 
arrest of the type-wheel shaft of the receiver. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph provided with relay electro-mag 
nets adapted to control local motor circuits 
and motors at each instrument and respond 
ing to makes and breaks in line produced by 
a circuit interrupter at the transmitter, a lo 
cal printing circuit and devices for effecting 
an impression and arresting the type-wheel 
shaft and a circuit interrupter at the trans 
mitter, whereby the motor at the receiver is 
caused to arrest its type-wheel shaft, and a 
local printing circuit and devices at the re 
ceiver controlled by a ratchet switch and 
adapted to effect an impression upon the ar 
rest of the type-wheel shaft of the receiver. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph provided with a receiver and a trans 
mitter normally operated by motors respond 
ing to makes and breaks produced in line by 
the revolution of the type-wheel shaft of the 
transmitter, a local printing circuit and de 
vices operating by the depression of a key at 
the transmitter to effect an impression and 
arrest the type-wheel shaft before the trans 
mitter motor completes its stroke and before 
the line circuit is made or broken, whereby 
the motor at the receiver arrests its type 
wheel shaft and effects an impression through 
the intervention of a local printing circuit 
and devices controlled by the revolution of 
the receiver type-wheel shaft, and whereby 
the motors of both instruments are permitted 
to again start upon the release of the key and 
by the completion of the partial stroke of the 
transmitter motor. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph provided with a receiver and a 
transmitter normally operated by motors and 
local motor circuits controlled by relay elec 
tro-magnets responding to makes and breaks 
produced in line by a circuit interrupter on 
the type-wheel shaft of the transmitter, a lo 
cal printing circuit and devices operating by 
the depression of a key at the transmitter to 
effect an impression and to arrest the type 
wheel shaft before the transmitter motor com 
pletes its stroke and before the circuit in 
terrupter makes or breaks the line circuit, 
whereby the relay electro-magnet at the re 
ceiver acting through its local motor circuit 
- causes the motor to arrest the receiver type 
wheel shaft and whereby the motors of both 
instruments are permitted to again start upon 
the release of the key and by the completion 
of the partial stroke of the transmitter motor. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph provided with a transmitter and 
receiver each having an electric motor adapt 
ed to drive the type-wheel shaft and respond 
ing to makes and breaks in the normal line 
o 
75 
95 
I do 
I o5 
O 
II5 
25 
509,430 
O 
produced by a circuit interrupter at the trans 
mitter, and each having a unison latch adapt 
ed to arrest its type-wheel shaft with the re 
tracting spring of the motor thereof in ten 
sion and with the circuit interrupter in posi 
tion for breaking the normal line circuit, 
whereby the motors may be permitted to start 
under the influence of their retracting springs 
when the shafts are released. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph having a transmitter and a receiver 
respectively provided with a motor respond 
ing to makes and breaks in a normal line cir 
cuit and driving the type-wheel shaft, a uni 
son latch for locking the type-wheel shaft in 
such position that the retracting spring of 
the motor tends to start it, a detent for lock 
ing said shaft, electro-magnets and circuit 
connections for operating said unison latch 
and detent, a revoluble switch actuated by 
the type-wheel shaft and adapted to cut out 
the normal line circuit and include the uni 
son circuits at unison position of the shaft, a 
double contact unison key at the transmitter 
for controlling the local printing circuit and 
devices to release the unison latch and lock 
and unlock the transmitter type-wheel shaft 
and for controlling the unison line circuit to 
release the unison latch and lock and unlock 
the receiver type-wheel shaft through the in 
strumentality of a relay and local circuit. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph having a revoluble wheel provided 
with teeth and a ratchet-switch controlling a 
local printing circuit and riding on said teeth 
as the wheel is rotated and entering a space 
between said teeth upon the arrest of the 
wheel. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraphinstrument provided with a toothed 
wheel actuated by a type-wheelshaft and hav 
ing a wide tooth, and a ratchet switch con 
trolling a local printing circuit and tending 
to enter the spaces between the teeth of said 
wheel upon the arrest of the shaft and re 
strained from such movement at the unison 
position of the shaft by the wide tooth. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph instrument having an armature le 
verprovided with impression and unison latch 
actuating devices and having a magnet for 
actuating said armature lever. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph instrument provided with a sun 
flower device comprising a conducting annu 
lus and an annulus having conducting and 
insulating segments, an insulated brush 
sweeping over each annulus, circuit connec 
tions from earth through a generator to the 
conducting annulus and through the brush 
and conducting segments to character keys 
controlling a local printing circuit and to a 
double contact unison key controlling said 
local printing circuit and also a unison line 
circuit. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph instrument provided with a three 
way revoluble switch moving with the type 
wheel shaft and adapted to interrupt a local 
motor circuit at the unison position and to 
permit of the closing of the same at other po 
sitions, and adapted to permit of the closing 
of a circuit through the coils of a printing 
and unison electro-magnet and through the 
coils of a locking electro-magnet at unison po 
sition and to prevent the closing of the cir 
cuit through said electro-magnets at other po 
sitions. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph instrument provided with a circuit 
interrupter moving with the type-wheel shaft 
and adapted to actuate motors at the respect 
ive instruments, a spur-wheel mounted on 
said shaft, a detent for engaging said spur 
wheel and arresting the circuit interrupter 
just before its contact passes the segment 
over which it is traveling whereby the trans 
mitter motor is arrested before the comple 
tion of its stroke. 
My invention further consists of a printing 
telegraph provided with a type-wheel shaft, 
an electro-motor and its connections for driv 
ing Said shaft, and a unison latch adapted to 
arrest said shaft in position for maintaining 
the retracting spring of the motor in tension; 
and my invention further consists of the im 
provements in printing telegraphs hereinaf 
ter described and claimed. 
The nature and general features of my in 
vention will be more fully understood from 
the following description taken in connection 
With the accompanying drawings, forming 
part hereof; and in which 
Figure 1, is a diagrammatic view illustrat 
ing a printing telegraph instrument embody 
ing features of my invention and arranged 
as a transmitter, and showing also the parts 
of said instrument in the unison position with 
the retracting springs of the motor held in 
tension by the unison latch and the motor. 
Fig. 2, is a similar view of a printing telegraph 
instrument embodying features of my inven 
tion and arranged as a receiver. Fig. 3, is a 
view partly in side elevation and partly in 
section taken from the top of Sheet 1, and 
illustrating the armature-lever of the print 
ing and unison electro-magnet and showing 
also mechanism embodying features of my 
invention operated thereby, and adapted to 
actuate the printing-pallet and unison-latch. 
Fig. 4, is a sectional view taken on the line 
4-4, of Fig. 3, and illustrating details of con 
struction of the printing pallet operating de 
vices. Fig. 5, is an elevational view of the 
right hand end of the armature-lever shown 
in Fig. 3, illustrating the construction of cer 
tain of the parts that actuate the unison-latch. 
Fig. 6, is an elevational view partly in section 
taken from the bottom of Sheet 1, and illus 
trating certain parts of the electric-motor, 
and also showing the means whereby when 
the type-Wheel shaft is arrested the motor is 
likewise arrested. Fig. 7, is a front view of 
the ratchet-switch showing the same provided 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
509,480 
CO-riss-se 
IIO 
I 15 
I 25 
O 
75 
9o 
95 
With a toothed wheel having a wide unison 
described constitutes the subject-matter of an 
tooth and also showing an efficient form of 
application for United States Letters Patent, 
ratchet-switch which is somewhat distorted 
serially numbered 456,142, and filed on the 
in Figs, I and 2, for the purposes of diagram 
23d day of December, 1892, by Job A. Davis 
matic illustration. Fig. 8, is a view of the 
and myself, as joint inventors, and hence is 
Sunflower and brush. Fig. 9, is a diagram 
not specifically claimed herein. 
matic view illustrating portions of a type 
c, is a unison spiral mounted on the type 
Wheel shaft provided with a spur or toothed 
wheel shaft a, and provided with a spring 
Wheel and with a circuit interrupter control 
controlled unison latch c', adapted to engage 
ling the circuit of an electric-motor adapted 
the outer end of the spiral and thus arrest 
to drive the shaft and showing a contact 
the type-wheel shaft a, when the blank Space 
Sweeping over the segments of the circuit 
on the type-wheel a', is in the position here 
in before designated, the printing position, 
maker and breaker, and a detent for locking 
and when the retracting spring b", of the 
the type-wheel shaft before the contact has 
passed off a segment over which it is travel 
motor is in tension. In this connection it 
ing, whereby the motor is arrested before the 
may be remarked that the arrest of the type 
completion of its stroke; and Fig. 10, is a 
wheel shaft a, by the unison latch c', causes 
perspective view showing certain of the parts 
the ratchet-wheel b, to hold the pawl b, and 
thus prevent movement of the barb, whereby 
illustrated in Fig. 9. 
In the drawings a, is a type-wheel shaft 
the retracting-spring b', is held in tension, so 
as to permit of the subsequent starting of the 
afforded freedom of rotary motion in suitable 
bearings, not shown, and provided with a 
motors as will be hereinafter fully described. 
type-wheela', having in the present instance 
d, is a circuit interrupter adapted to pro 
upon its rim thirty nine characters and one 
duce makes and breaks in the coils of the re 
lay electro-magnet, to which the motor elec 
Space, not shown. 
tro-magnet b', responds and is composed of 
b, is an electric-motor adapted to drive the 
type-wheel shaft a, with a uniform step by 
a conducting disk d", insulated from the shaft 
a, and provided with insulating segments cor 
step movement and comprising a ratchet 
Wheel b, and a star or stop-wheel b, secured 
responding in position with divisions on the 
type-wheel a', a second conducting disk d, 
to the shaft a, a barb, provided with spring 
controlled pawls b and b, for rotating the 
insulated from the shaft g, and in electrical 
ratchet-wheel b, and with stops band b, for 
connection with the E. spring 
engaging the star-wheelb, at or near the com 
d8 for the disk d, and an adjustab 
eContact. 
pletion of the stroke of each pawl, an arma 
spring d", for the disk d". 
ture-lever b, and a retracting-spring b9 and 
e, is a type-wheel shaft locking and releas 
ing device comprising a spur-wheele', having 
motor electro-magnetb, for reciprocating the 
spaces corresponding in number and position 
bar b. When the motor electro-magnet b10, is 
with the divisions on the type-wheel a?, and 
energized its armature leverbs, shifts the bar 
b', toward the right in Fig. 6, thus causing the 
a spring controlled armature-lever e, pro 
pawl b, to engage the ratchet-wheel b', and 
vided with a detent adapted to engage the 
spaces between the teeth of the spur-wheel 
rotate the shaft a, in the direction of the ar 
e'. In this connection it may be remarked 
row, until the stop b", meshes with the teeth 
that in use the adjustable contact spring d", 
of the star-wheel b, and arrests the shafta, 
is adjusted in such manner that when the 
in such position that one of the characters on 
the type-wheel a', is in proper position for 
shafta, is arrested by the armature-lever e, 
the spring d", occupies a position at or near 
permitting an impression to be taken from it. 
the edge of the segment of the disk d, upon 
When the motor electro-magnet b, is demag 
netized the retracting-spring b, shifts the bar 
which it is traveling, as shown in Fig. 10, so 
b', toward the left in Fig. 6, thus causing the 
that the armature of the electro-motor b, can 
pawl b, to engage the ratchet-wheel b', and 
not complete its stroke; and moreover, the 
condition of the line is not changed by such 
rotate the shaft in the direction of the arrow 
arrest of the type-wheel shaft. However, 
until the stop b, meshes with the teeth of the 
when the type-wheel shaft a, is arrested by 
star-Wheel b, and arrests the shafta, in such 
the unison latch c', the spring d, rests upon 
position that the next character of the type. 
an insulating segment of the disk d". These 
wheel is in proper position for permitting an 
adjustments or peculiarities of construction 
impression to be taken from it. Subsequent 
magnetization and demagnetization of the 
are productive of several advantageous re 
motor electro-magnet b, cause the bar b, to 
sults, as will be hereinafter more fully ex 
plained. 
be shifted back and forth with the result that 
the pawls band b, and stops b and b, rotate 
f, Fig. 8, is a sunflower device comprising 
a rigidly supported conducting annulus f, 
the type-wheel shaft a, with an intermittent 
an annulus f' composed of insulating and 
motion and in such manner that successive 
conducting segments, and a conducting brush 
characters on the type-wheel a', are brought 
into printing position by the actions of the f, sweeping over the annular parts of the 
sunflower and carried by an insulating arm 
projecting from the type-wheel shaft a. 
f',f and f', are printing-keys correspond 
It may be remarked that the detail construc 
tion of the type of electro-motor hereinbefore 
motor. 
- 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
509,430 
O 
ing with the characters upon the type-wheel 
Ol', and f', is a double contact unison key. 
g, is a three-way revoluble switch insulated 
from the shaft a, and comprising contact 
springs g', g and g, and a hub g' in electri 
cal connection with the contacts of the disks 
g and g. The diskg, is provided with one 
insulating segment and the diskg, is pro 
Vided with one conducting segment and these 
segments are in alignment with each other 
and with the blank space on the type-wheel 
C, and are adapted to contact with the springs 
g' and g, at unison position for purposes to 
be presently described. 
h, is a spring controlled printing and uni 
son magnet armature-lever provided with a 
spring controlled pawl h", adapted to feed the 
rack h, of a paper-carriage, not shown, and 
with a link h, for operating a pivotal detent 
h', that co-operates with a rack h, and thus 
regulates and limits the feed imparted by the 
pawl h, to the paper-carriage. The interme 
diate portion of this armature-lever h, is pro 
vided with a laterally projecting arm h, hav 
ing an enlarged wedge-like extremity h", Fig. 4, 
upon which a rod i, connected with and depend 
ing from a pivotal printing hammer, rides in 
Such manner that when the armature-lever h, 
is pulled up the Wedge-like extremity h, trips 
the rod i, and causes the printing-pallet i, to 
contact with the paper and take an impres 
sion from one of the characters on the type 
wheel a'. The armature-lever h, is provided 
at or near its free extremity and upon its un 
der side with a wedge h, Fig. 5, that engages 
one extremity of a pivotal-lever i, the other 
extremity of which engages one arm f, of a 
bell crank-lever having its other armi, in 
range of the spring controlled unison-latch c', 
so that when the armature-lever h, is pulled 
up the wedge h, operating through the in 
strumentality of the leversi,j and j, causes 
the unison-latch c', to be thrown out of the 
Outer end of its spiral and when the arma 
ture-lever h, falls back under the influence 
of its retracting spring, the unison-latch c', 
is again permitted to move under the influ. 
ence of its Spring into engagement with the 
inner end of its spiral. By these means the 
pulling up of the armature-lever h, effects im 
pressions, feeds the paper, and releases the 
unison-latch. 
q, is a ratchet-switch comprising a wheel q', 
Fig. 7, mounted upon the shaft a, and pro 
vided with teeth disposed in alignment with 
the divisions on the type - wheel a', and a 
ratchet Q, tending to fall into one of the 
spaces between the teeth and close a print 
ing circuit at its free end, when the toothed 
wheel q is at rest, and restrained normally 
from such movement by the rotation of the 
wheel, and at unison position by a wide tooth 
g, upon which it rests. 
The set of local unison circuits that is em 
ployed in connection with the unison line cir 
cuit for starting the instruments from unison 
position will now be described and traced 
with special reference to Figs. 1 and 2, and in 
this connection it may be remarked that each 
instrument is provided with two manual 
switches Ic and c', that are turned into Open 
position as shown in Fig. 1, when the instru 
ment is used as a transmitter and into closed 
position as shown in Fig. 2, when the instru 
ment is used as a receiver. At the transmit 
ter, Fig.1, the local unison circuit passes from 
earth through a generator 1, by the conduc 
tor I, through the outer annulus f', of the sun 
flower device, through the brush f, and the 
unison contact segment of the inner annulus 
f', of the sunflower device f, to the contact 
spring f, of the normally open double con 
tact unison key f', by a conductor 2. When 
the unison key f', is depressed the circuit 
branches. One branch constitutes the unison 
line circuit to be presently described, and 
the other branch passes through one of the 
contacts f', of the unison key, thence by 
conductors 3 and 4 through the coils of the 
locking electro-magnet e, and thence by con 
ductors 5 and 6, to and through the coils of 
the printing and locking electro magnet l', 
and by a conductor 7, to earth. When the 
unison key f', is depressed the branch consti 
tuting the unison line circuit passes from the 
other contactfi, of the normally open double 
contact unison key f', and then through a 
conductor 8, of high resistance to a conductor 
9, to the single line conductor 10, and by the 
manual-switch k', and conductor 11, through 
the coils of the relay-magnet m, Fig. 2, and 
thence by a conductor 12 through a generator 
n, and to earth by a conductor 20, at the re 
ceiver. The local unison circuit of the re 
ceiver, Fig. 2, passes from earth by conduc 
tors 25 and 19 through a generator O, and by 
a conductor 15 through the armature-lever n, 
when the relay electro-magnet m, is energized 
by the line unison circuit. Thence the local 
unison circuit of the receiver passes by a con 
ductor 16, through the contact springs g and 
g', of the three-way revoluble switchg, by a 
conductor 26, to the conductor 4, and thence 
by conductors 5, 6 and 7, through the coils of 
the locking electro-magnet e and the coils of 
the printing and unison electro-magneth', to 
earth. 
The set of local printing and motor circuits 
that is employed in connection with the nor 
mal printing line circuit, i.e., after the unison 
line circuit has been broken, will now betraced 
and set forth. 
At the transmitter, Fig. 1, the normal line 
circuit passes from earth by a conductor 20, 
through the generator n, by a conductor 12, 
through the coils of the relay electro-magnet 
m, and by conductors 11 and 21 to the contact 
spring d, of the circuit interrupter d, thence 
by the contact spring d", conductors 22 and 
9, to the line conductor 10. Thence the nor 
mal line circuit passes by the switch k', of 
the receiver, Fig. 2, and conductors 11, 12 and 
20 through the coils of the relay electro-mag 
net m, and generator n, to earth. The local 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
II5 
I25 
 
s 
509,430 
O 
5 
3o 
45 
55 
65 
75 
printing circuit at the transmitter is from 
earth through the generator 1, the conductor 
I, the sunflower device f, conductors 13, 28 
or 29, contacts of the keys f', forf, con 
ductors 14, 3 and 4 through the coils of the 
locking electro-magnet e, thence by the 
conductors 5 and 6 through the coils of the 
unison and printing electro-magnet h", and 
thence to earth by the conductor 7. At the 
receiver the motor circuit comprises a gen 
erator o, and conductors 15, 16, 17, 18 and 19, 
and is controlled by the armature-lever m', of 
the relay electro-magnet m, and is closed at 
the three-way revoluble switchg, through the 
coils of the motor electro-magnet b1, and 
the local printing circuit passes from earth 
through the generator 1, by the conductor 23, 
SWitch k, and conductor 24, through the con 
tacts g and g, of the ratchet-switch g, and 
thence by conductors 27, 6 and 7, to earth 
through the coils of the printing and unison 
electro-magneth'. However, at unison posi 
tion this circuit is broken by reason of the 
fact that the ratchet-switch q, rests upon the 
Wide tooth q, of the toothed wheel q', and 
Consequently breaks said circuit at the con 
tacts q' and g. 
Assuming that the instruments are in uni 
Son position as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the op 
erations of starting them and of printing are 
as follows:-The double contact unison key 
f", is depressed at the transmitter, thus clos 
ing the local unison circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 
7 through the coils of the locking electro-mag 
net e, and through the coils of the printing 
electro-magnet h", it being understood that 
the springs g and g, of the three-way rev 
oluble switch g, are in electrical connection 
with each other and that the line from the 
Spring g, is broken at the armature-lever n', 
by reason of the fact that the spring d4, of 
the circuit interrupter d, rests upon an insu 
lating segment. The magnetization of the 
locking electro-magnet e, causes its arma 
ture-lever e', to be pulled down into position 
for locking the toothed-wheel e', and type 
wheel shaft C, and the magnetization of the 
printing and unison electro-magneth', causes 
its armature-lever h, to be pulled down with 
the result that the pawls handh', are brought 
into position for feeding the paper-carriage, 
the printing pallet , brings the paper into 
contact with the blank space on the type 
wheel C', and the unison-latch c', is shifted 
out of engagement with the outermost portion 
of its spiral C. The depression of the double 
contact unison key f', also closes the unison 
line circuit 1, 2, 8, 9, 10, k', 11, 12 and 20, thus 
energizing the relay electro-magnet m, at the 
In this connection it may be re 
receiver. 
marked that the conductor 8, of high resist 
ance causes a proper distribution of the cur 
rent from the generator 1, to line and through 
the coils of the locking electro-magnet e, and 
through the coils of the printing and unison 
electro-magneth'. The relay electro-magnet 
m, at the receiver being thus energized pulls 
up its armature lever n', and closes the lo 
cal unison circuit 25, 19, 15, 16, 26, 4, 5, 6 and 
7 through the coils of the locking electro 
magnet e, and through the coils of the print 
ing and unison electro-magnet h", whereby 
the unison-latch c', at the receiver is re 
leased, and the shaft a, is locked by the de 
tent of the armature-lever e, in precisely the 
The 
same manner as at the transmitter. 
double unison contact key f', at the trans 
mitter, is then released, thus breaking the lo 
cal unison circuit 1,2,3,4, 5, 6 and 7, through 
the coils of the locking electromagnet e, and 
through the coils of the printing and unison 
electro-magneth', of the transmitter and also 
breaking the unison line circuit 1, 2, 8, 9, 10, 
k', 11, 12 and 20, so that the relay electro 
magnet m, at the receiver is demagnetized 
and its armature-lever m, is permitted to 
break the local unison circuit 25, 15, 16, 26, 4, 
5, 6 and 7, through the coils of the locking 
electro-magnete, and through the coils of the 
printing and unison electro-magneth', of the 
receiver. Under these circumstances the uni 
son latches at both instruments are permit 
ted to move under the influence of their re 
tracting springs into engagement with the in 
nermost portions of their spirals and the ar 
lnature-leverse, are shifted into position for 
releasing the shaft a', so that the tension in 
the respective retracting springs b, of the 
motors, causes the type-wheel shafts of both 
instruments to be slightly rotated; it being 
understood that the unison-latches c', always 
arrest the type-wheel shafts in such position 
that the retracting-springs b, are in tension 
as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. This rotation of 
the shafts causes the three-way switches g, at 
the transmitter and receiver to close the lo 
cal motor circuit 15, 16, 17, 18 and 19, through 
the motor electro-magnet l', by reason of the 
fact that the contact springs g and g, are in 
electrical connection with each other through 
the disks g and g, and also causes the cir 
cuit interrupter d, at the transmitter to make 
the normal line circuit 20, 12, 11, 21, 22, 9, 
(Fig. 1) 10, k", 11, 12 and 20 (Fig.2), through 
the coils of the relay electro-magnets in, of 
both instruments and to subsequently break 
and again make the same. The repetition of 
these makes and breaks in the normal line 
circuit due to the ordinary operation of the 
circuit interrupter at the transmitter, acting 
through the armature-levers m', of the relay 
electro-magnets m, and in connection With 
the retracting springs b', and motor electro 
magnets b, will cause the motors b, to pro 
pel the type-wheel shafts a, and perfect syn 
chronism of movement is insured, because 
each motor is controlled by its relay and both 
relays are controlled by the circuit inter 
rupter at the transmitter. This is important, 
because accidental breakage in the line con 
ductor 10, would result in a stoppage of the 
transmitter, as well as of the receiver, So that 
the operator at the transmitter would be ap 
prised of the accident and would not attempt 
95 
Od 
IC5 
O 
I I5 
I25 
509,480 
to transmit messages until the necessary re 
pairs had been effected. The depression of 
a letter key, for example, the key f', at the 
transmitter, causes the local printing circuit 
1, 13, 14, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 to be closed through it 
as soon as the sunflower brush f, sweeps onto 
the contact connected with the conductor 13, 
whereupon the locking electro-magnet e, and 
printing and unison electro-magnet h9, are 
energized. Under these circumstances the 
locking electro-magnet e, attracts its arma 
ture and arrests the type-wheel shaft, and the 
printing and unison electro-magnet feeds the 
paper, throws the unison-latch out of action, 
and effects an impression on the character of 
the type-wheel, that corresponds to the char 
acter of the depressed key. The locking 
electro-magnet e, at the transmitter, how 
ever, arrests its type-wheel shaft before the 
spring d, has passed off the segment of the 
disk d, over which it is traveling, as shown 
in Fig. 10, and before the motor has com 
pleted its full stroke, as shown by full lines 
in Fig. 9. Consequently upon the release of 
the key f', the unison-latch will be returned 
to its initial position and then proceed in the 
same manner as it did before the key f', was 
depressed. The arrest of the circuit inter 
rupter at the transmitter in the manner above 
described, i.e., with the contact spring dat 
or near the edge of the segment over which 
it is traveling, causes the normal line circuit 
20, 12, ll, 21, 22, 9, 10, (Fig. 1) c', 11, 12 and 
20, (Fig. 2.) to bring the relay electro-magnet 
at the receiver into a condition correspond 
ing with the condition of the relay electro 
magnet at the transmitter. Under these cir 
cumstances the relay at the receiver acting 
through its armature-lever m', arrests its mo 
tor and the latter arrests the receiver type 
wheelshaft, whereupon the ratchet-switch q8, 
falls between the teeth of the toothed wheel 
g", and thus closes the local printing circuit 1, 
23, k, 24, 27, 6 and 7 through the printing and 
unison electro-magneth', and effects an im 
preSSion at the receiver of the character corre 
sponding to the character of the depressed key, 
and also releases the unison-latch, and feeds 
the paper. When the printing keyf, is re 
leased, the motor at the transmitter completes 
its stroke, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 9, 
the unison latches are permitted to return to 
their initial positions and both instruments 
are again set in motion. Inasmuch as the 
unison latches c', are returned to their initial 
positions every time an impression is taken, 
it follows that another letter key, as f', may 
be depressed at the transmitter before the 
shafts are permitted to run to unison. How 
ever, Whenever it becomes necessary or de 
sirable to bring the instruments to unison, 
this result may be accomplished by releasing 
all the keys, and afterward the instruments 
lmay be again operated in the manner above 
described, or the switches k and k", in Fig. 1, 
may be closed, and those in Fig. 2 opened, 
With the result that the instrument of Fig. 2, 
becomes the transmitter and the instrument 
of Fig. 1 the receiver. 
It will be obvious to those skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains that nodi 
fications may be made in details. For ex 
ample, one generator may be employed at each 
instrument and the respective circuits may be 
derived from it in parallel or use may be made 
of a central station and of a plurality of in 
struments, without departing from the spirit 
of my invention. 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A printing telegraph system, comprising 
relay electro-magnets adapted to control local 
motor circuits at the transmitter and receiver 
and responding to makes and breaks in a line 
circuit, and a revoluble circuit maker and 
breaker interposed in the conductor of said 
line circuit and mounted on the transmitter 
type-wheel shaft, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
2. A printing telegraph system, comprising 
relay electro-magnets interposed in the line 
circuit and adapted to control the local motor 
circuits at the transmitter and receiver, a con 
ducting disk and a disk having peripheral in 
sulations alternating with contacts in elec 
trical connection with the conducting disk 
mounted on the transmitter type-wheel shaft, 
and contact springs bearing on said disks and 
interposed in the line circuit, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
3. A printing telegraph system, comprising 
a transmitter and receiver provided with mo 
tors responding to makes and breaks in a nor 
mal line circuit, a gonducting disk and a 
disk having peripheral insulations alternating 
with contacts in electrical connection with the 
conducting disk mounted on the transmitter 
type-wheel shaft, and contact springs bearing 
on said disks and interposed in the line cir 
cuit, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
4. A printing telegraph system, comprising 
motors at the transmitter and receiver instru 
ments responding to makes and breaks in line, 
a circuit maker and breaker interposed in the 
line circuit and mounted on the type-wheel 
shaft at the transmitter, relay electro-magnets 
interposed in the line circuit and adapted to 
control the local motor circuit of the trans 
mitter and receiver instruments, a printing 
circuit and devices at the transmitter inde 
pendent of the line circuit for effecting an 
impression and arresting the type-wheel shaft 
thereof, a printing circuit at the receiver and 
a ratchet switch and said circuit controlled 
by said switch and adapted to effect an im 
pression upon the arrest of the type-wheel 
shaft thereof, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
5. A printing telegraph system comprising 
a receiver and transmitter normally operated 
by motors responding to makes and breaks 
produced in line by the revolution of the type 
25 
35 
45 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
d 
IT 5 
I 25 
55 
 
509,480 
O 
25 
35 
45 
wheel shaft of the transmitter, a local print 
ing circuit and devices operating by the de 
pression of a key at the transmitter to effect 
an impression and arrest the type-wheel shaft 
before the completion of the stroke of the 
transmitter motor and before the line circuit 
is made or broken, whereby the motor at the 
receiver arrests its type-wheel shaft and ef 
fects an impression through the intervention 
of a local printing circuit controlled by the 
revolution of the receiver type-wheel shaft 
and whereby the motors of both instruments 
are permitted to again start upon the release 
of the key and by the completion of the par 
tial stroke of the transmitter motor, Substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. A printing telegraph system comprising 
a receiver and a transmitter normally oper 
ated by motors and local motor circuits con 
trolled by relay electro-magnets responding 
to makes and breaks produced in line by a 
circuit interrupter on the type-wheel shaft of 
the transmitter, a local printing circuit and 
devices operating by the depression of a key 
at the transmitter to effect an impression and 
arrest the type-wheel shaft before the com 
pletion of the stroke of the transmitter motor 
and before the circuit interrupter makes and 
breaks the line circuit, whereby the relay elec 
tro-magnet at the receiver acting through its 
local motor circuit causes the motor to arrest 
the receiver type-wheel shaft, and whereby 
the motors of both instruments are permitted 
to again start upon the release of the key and 
by the completion of the partial stroke of the 
transmitter motor, substantially as set forth. 
7. A printing telegraph system comprising 
a receiver and a transmitter normally oper 
ated by motors responding to makes and 
breaks produced in line by a circuit inter 
rupter on the type-wheel shaft of the trans 
mitter, a local printing circuit and devices 
operating by the depression of a key at the 
transmitter to effect an impression and al 
rest the type-wheel shaft before the comple 
tion of the stroke of the transmitter motor 
and before the circuit interrupter makes or 
breaks the line circuit, whereby the motor at 
the transmitter is arrested and arrests its 
type-wheel shaft, and whereby the motors of 
both instruments are permitted to again start 
upon the release of the key and by the com 
pietion of the partial stroke of the transmit 
ter motor, substantially as set forth. 
8. A printing telegraph system comprising 
a transmitter and a receiver each having an 
electro-motor adapted to drive a type-Wheel 
shaft and responding to makes and breaks 
in the normal line circuit produced by a cir 
cuit interrupter at the transmitter and each 
having a unison latch adapted to arrest its 
type-wheel shaft with the retracting spring 
of the motor thereof in tension and with the 
circuit interrupter in position for breaking 
the normal line circuit, whereby the motors 
are adapted to start under the influence of 
their retracting springs and by the release 
te type-wheel shafts, substantially as set 
Orth. 
9. A printing telegraph system comprising 
a transmitter and a receiver each having a 
relay electro-magnet responding to makes 
and breaks in the normal line circuit pro 
duced by an interrupter on the type-wheel 
shaft of the transmitter, a motor operating 
the driving shaft and controlled by the ar 
mature-lever of said relay electro-magnet 
through circuit connections, and a unison 
latch adapted to arrest its type-wheel shaft 
With the retracting-spring of the motor in 
tension and with the circuit interrupter in 
position for breaking the normal line circuit, 
whereby the motors are permitted to start 
under the influence of their retracting springs 
and by the release of the type-wheel shafts, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
10. A printing telegraph system comprising 
a transmitter and a receiver and each pro 
vided with a motor responding to makes and 
breaks in a line circuit and adapted to drive 
the type-wheel shaft, a unison - device for 
locking the type-wheel shaft in such position 
that the retracting spring of the motor tends 
to start it, a detent for locking said shaft, 
magnets for operating said unison-latch and 
detent, a revoluble switch actuated by the 
type-wheel shaft and adapted to cut out the 
line circuit and include the local unison cir 
cuit at the unison position of the shaft, a 
double contact unison key at the transmitter 
for controlling the local printing circuit to 
release said unison-device and lock and un 
lock the transmitter type-Wheel shaft and for 
controlling the unison line circuit to release 
said unison device and lock and unlock the 
receiver type-wheel shaft through the inter 
vention of a relay electro-magnet and a local 
circuit, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
11. In a printing telegraph system compris 
ing a single line conductor adapted to be in 
cluded in a line circuit, and in a unison line 
circuit, a transmitter and a receiver normally 
operated by motors responding to makes and 
breaks in the line circuit and provided with 
means for automatically closing the unison 
line circuit through said conductor at the 
unison position and for closing the line cir 
cuit through said conductor at other positions, 
local motor circuits at each instrument and a 
local printing circuit and devices controlled 
by a key at the transmitter and a local print 
ing circuit and devices controlled by the 
type-wheel shaft at the receiver and a local 
unison circuit and devices controlled by a 
unison-key at the transmitter and a local uni 
son circuit and devices controlled by a relay 
and armature lever and an automatic switch 
on the type-wheel shaft at the receiver, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
12. In a printing telegraph system, a single 
line conductor adapted to be included in a 
line circuit and in a unison line circuit, com 
bined transmitters and receivers normally 
7o 
75 
go 
95 
IOC 
I o5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
0 
509,430 
IO 
operated through relay electro-magnets con 
trolling the local circuits of motors and re 
sponding to makes and breaks in said line 
circuit and provided respectively with two 
sets of local unison and printing circuits and 
devices, automatic switches mounted on the 
type-wheel shafts and adapted to include One 
set of local circuits at unison position and 
the other set at other positions, and manual 
switches for changing the circuits to cause 
the instruments to operate as transmitters 
and receivers, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
13. A printing telegraph system comprising 
a receiver and a transmitter having unison 
and locking electro-magnets and devices, a 
relay electro-magnet at the receiver adapted 
to control a local unison circuit through its 
armature-lever and through the coils of the 
unison and the locking electro-magnets at the 
receiver, a double contact unison key adapted 
to close a local unison circuit through the 
coils of the unison and locking electro-mag 
nets of the transmitter and to close a unison 
line circuit through the coils of the relay 
electro-magnet at the receiver, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
14. Aprinting telegraph system comprising 
a receiver and a transmitter having unison 
and locking electro-magnets and devices, a 
relay electro-magnet at the receiver adapted 
to control a local unison circuit through its 
armature-lever and through the coils of the 
unison and of the locking electro-magnets at 
the receiver, a double contact unison key 
adapted to close one branch of the circuit 
through the coils of the unison and locking 
electro-magnets of the transmitter and to 
close the other branch through a resistance 
and through the coils of the relay electro 
magnet at the receiver, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
15. In a printing telegraph system, a trans 
mitter provided with a line circuit maker and 
breaker mounted on its type-Wheel shaft and 
with a locking electro-magnet and its devices 
for arresting the type-wheel shaft and its line 
circuit maker and breaker, a local circuit 
through the coils of said electro-magnet, and 
a unison key and character keys and their 
accessories adapted to make and break said 
local circuit to stop and release the type 
wheel shaft and cause the circuit maker and 
breaker to suspend the makes and breaks in 
line, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
16. In a printing telegraph system, a re 
ceiver provided with a locking and a unison 
electro-magnet, a local circuit through the 
coils of said magnets and adapted to be made 
and broken by the armature-lever of a relay 
magnet responding to makes and breaks in 
line, and a revoluble switch mounted on the 
receiver type-wheel shaft and adapted to close 
said local circuit through the locking and uni 
son magnets only at unison position, Substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
17. In a printing telegraph system, a trans 
mitter provided with a local printing circuit 
independent of the line circuit, keys and a 
type-wheel shaft locking magnet interposed 
in said local circuit, a receiver provided with 
a local printing circuit and its accessories and 
adapted to automatically effect printing upon 
the arrest of the receiver type-wheel shaft, 
and electrical and mechanical devices and 
circuits independent of the local circuits and 
keys and operating upon the arrest of the 
transmitter type-wheel shaft to stop the mo 
tor of the receiver type-wheel shaft, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
18. In a printing telegraph system, an in 
strument provided with a switch tending to 
close a local printing circuit and restrained 
from such action by the movement of Said in 
strument, and at unison position substantially 
as and for the purposes Set forth. 
19. In a printing telegraph instrument, a 
locking electro-magnet for arresting the type 
wheel shaft, a printing and unison electro 
magnet, a local circuit having one branch 
controlled by keys and adapted to be closed 
through the coils of both of said magnets, and 
having the other branch controlled by a 
switch tending to close it through the print 
ing electro-magnet and restrained from such 
action by the movement of the instrument, 
and a manual-switch for opening and closing 
the second branch circuit to permit of the 
operation of the instrument as a receiver or 
transmitter, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
20. A printing telegraph system having a 
combined transmitting and receiving instru 
ment provided with a switch tending to close 
a local circuit and restrained from such ac 
tion by the actuation of said instrument and 
means for automatically restraining such ac 
tion of the switch at unison position, Substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
21. A printing telegraph system having a 
combined transmitting and receiving instru 
ment, means tending to close a local printing 
circuit and restrained from such action by 
the actuation of Said instrument, means, Sub 
stantially as described, for restraining such 
action of the switch at the unison position, 
and means substantially as described adapted 
to open and close said local circuit to permit 
of its actuation either as a transmitting or as 
a receiving instrument, Substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
22. A printing telegraph provided with an 
instrument having a ratchet-switch tending 
to close a local printing circuit and restrained 
from such action by the rotation of a toothed 
wheel, and means for restraining such action 
of the switch at unison position substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
23. A printing telegraph provided with an 
instrument having a ratchet-switch tending 
to close a local printing circuit at positions 
other than unison and normally restrained 
from such action by the rotation of a toothed 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
IIC 
I5 
I25 
 
509,480 
wheel, and a manual-switch for opening and 
closing said local circuit to permit of the op 
eration of the instrument as a receiver or as 
a transmitter, Substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
24. A printing telegraph provided with an 
instrument having a pivotal-switch tending 
to close a local printing circuit through its 
contacts at positions other than unison and 
restrained from such action by the movement 
of the instrument, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
25. A printing telegraph provided with an 
instrument having a pivotal switch tending 
to close a local printing-circuit through its 
contacts at positions other than unison and 
restrained from such action by the movement 
of the instrument, and a manual-switch for 
opening and closing said local circuit to per 
mit of the operation of the instrument as a 
receiver or as a transmitter, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
26. A printing telegraph provided with a 
toothed-wheel moving with a type-wheel shaft 
and a ratchet-switch controlling a local print 
ing circuit and riding over the teeth of said 
wheel as the shaft is rotated and entering a 
space between said teeth upon the arrest of 
the shaft at positions other than unison, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
27. A printing telegraph provided with a 
toothed-wheel moving with a type-wheel shaft 
and a ratchet-switch controlling a local 
printing circuit and riding over the teeth of 
said wheel as the shaft is rotated and enter 
ing a space between said teeth upon the ar 
rest of the shaft at positions other than uni 
son, and a manual-switch for opening and 
closing said local circuit to permit of the op 
eration of the instrument as a receiver and 
transmitter, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
28. A printing telegraph provided with a 
toothed wheel moving with a type-wheel shaft 
and a pivotal ratchet-switch, whereof one end 
is provided with contacts controlling a local 
printing circuit and whereof the other end 
rides over the teeth of said wheel as the shaft 
is rotated and enters a space between the 
said teeth upon the arrest of the shaft, at 
positions other than unison substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
29. A printing telegraph provided with a 
toothed-wheel moving with a type-wheel shaft 
and a pivotal ratchet-switch, whereof one 
end is provided with contacts controlling a 
local printing circuit, and whereof the other 
end rides over the teeth of said wheel as the 
shaft is rotated and enters a space between 
said teeth upon the arrest of the shaft at po 
sitions other than unison, and a manual 
switch for opening and closing said local 
circuit to permit of the operation of the in 
strument as a receiver and transmitter, Sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
30. The combination, of a revoluble wheel 
O 
25 
45 
55 
65 
provided with teeth, and a ratchet-switch 
tending to enter the spaces between said 
teeth at positions other than unison and nor 
mally restrained from such action by the 
revolution of the wheel, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
31. The combination, of a revoluble wheel 
provided with teeth, and a pivotal switch 
tending to enter the spaces between said 
teeth at positions other than unison and nor 
mally restrained from such action by the 
revolution of the wheel, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
32. The combination, of a revoluble wheel 
provided with teeth and a pivotal switch, 
whereof one end is provided with contacts 
and the other end tends to enter the spaces 
between said teeth at positions other than 
unison normally restrained from such action 
by the revolution of said wheel, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
33. A printing telegraph provided with a 
wheel having a series of teeth and a compara 
tively wide tooth, a ratchet-switch control 
ling a local printing circuit and tending to 
enter a space between said teeth upon the 
arrest of the wheel and restrained from such 
movement at the unison position by the wide 
tooth, and a manual-switch for opening and 
closing said local circuit, Substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
34. A printing telegraph provided with a 
wheel having a series of teeth and a compara 
tively wide tooth, and a pivotal ratchet-switch 
controlling a local printing circuit and tend 
ing to enter the spaces between said teeth 
upon the arrest of the wheel and restrained 
from such movement at the unison position 
by the wide tooth, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
35. A printing telegraph provided with a 
wheel actuated by a type-wheel shaft and hav 
ing a wide tooth, a pivotal ratchet-switch con 
trolling a local printing circuit and tending 
to enter the spaces between said teeth upon 
the arrest of the shaft and restrained from 
such movement at the unison position of the 
shaft by the wide tooth, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
36. A printing telegraph provided with a 
toothed-wheel actuated by a type-wheel shaft 
and having a wide tooth, a pivotal ratchet 
switch controlling a local printing circuit and 
tending to enter the spaces between the teeth 
of said wheel upon the arrest of the shaft and 
restrained from such movement at the unison 
position of the shaft by the wide tooth, and a 
manual-switch for opening and closing said 
local-circuit, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
37. A printing telegraph provided with a 
wheel having a series of teeth and a compara 
tively wide tooth, and a ratchet-switch con 
trolling a local printing circuit and tending 
to enter the spaces between said teeth upon 
the arrest of the wheel and restrained from 
75 
95 
OO 
IC 
II5 
I 25 
12 
509,430 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
such movement at the unison position by the 
wide tooth, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
38. A printing telegraph provided with a 
wheel actuated by a type-wheel shaft and hav 
ing a wide tooth, and a ratchet-switch control 
ling a local printing circuit and tending to en 
ter spaces between said teeth upon the arrest 
of the shaft and restrained from such move 
ment at the unison position of the shaft by 
the wide tooth, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
39. The combination of a revoluble wheel 
provided with small teeth and one wide tooth, 
and a switch tending to enter spaces between 
said small teeth and restrained at unison po 
sition by the wide tooth, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
40. The combination, of a normally revolv 
ing shaft provided with a type-wheel, means 
for arresting said shaft with the divisions of 
the type-wheel at the printing position, nue 
chanical and electrical printing devices and 
a local printing circuit, a wheel on said shaft 
provided with recesses in alignment with the 
characters of the type-wheel, and a ratchet 
switch controlling the local circuit and en 
gaging said recesses upon the arrest of said 
shaft at positions other than unison, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
41. The combination, of a normally revolv 
ing shaft provided with a type-wheel having 
characters and a blank space, means for ar 
resting said shaft with the divisions of the 
type-wheel in the printing position, mechani 
cal and electrical devices, a local printing cir 
cuit, a wheel on said shaft provided with re 
cesses in alignment with the characters on 
the type-wheel and with a projection in align 
ment with the blank space, and a ratchet 
switch controlling said local circuit and adapt 
ed to enter said recesses and to rest on Said 
projection, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
42. A printing telegraph having an arma 
ture-lever provided with printing, feeding and 
unison latch actuating devices and having an 
electro-magnet and local circuit connections 
independent of the line circuit and controlled 
by keys at the transmitter and by a ratchet 
wheel having a wide tooth at the receiver, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
43. In a printing telegraph, a pivotal Spring 
printing lever having at its free end a print 
ing pallet, an armature-lever provided with 
an arm having an enlarged extremity adapt 
ed to engage a projection on said printingle 
wer to actuate the pallet under the influence 
of the spring and an electro-magnet and cir 
cuit connections for actuating Said almature 
lever, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
44. In a printing telegraph, a Spring Con 
trollied unison-latch, a system of levers for Op 
erating said latch, a printing and paper feed 
ing armature-lever provided with a wedge in 
sliding engagement With one of Said levers, 
and an electro-magnet and circuit connections 
for actuating said armature-lever, Substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
45. In a printing telegraph, a Spring con 
trolled unison-latch, a system of levers for op 
erating said latch, an armature-lever actuat 
ing printing devices and provided with a 
wedge in sliding engagement with one of said 
levers, and an electro-magnet and circuit Con 
nections for actuating said armature-lever, 
Substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
46. In a printing telegraph, a spring Con 
trolled unison-latch, a system of levers for op 
erating said latch, a pivotal printing hammer, 
an armature-lever provided with an arm hav 
ing a projection in range of a rod on the print 
ing-hammer and with a Wedge for operating 
the system of levers, and an electro-magnet 
and circuit connections for actuating said ar 
mature-lever, substantially as and for the 
purposes Set forth. 
47. In a printing telegraph, a Spring con 
trolled unison-latch, a system of levers for op 
erating said latch, a pivotal printing-hammer, 
an armature-lever provided with pawl-and 
ratchet connections for feeding a paper-car 
riage and with a wedge for operating the sys 
term of levers, a projection on said armature 
lever disposed in range of a rod on the print 
ing-hammer, and an electro-magnet for actu 
ating Said armature-lever, Substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
48. In a printing telegraph, a spring con 
trolled unison-latch, a bell crank lever hav 
ing one arm in range of said latch, a pivotalle 
ver having one arm in range of the bell crank 
lever, a paper feeding and printing armature 
lever provided with a wedge in sliding con 
tact with the pivotal lever, and an electro 
magnet and circuit connections for actuating 
said armature-lever, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
49. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a pivotal printing-hammer, a unison 
latch, an armature-lever provided with a pro 
jection for Operating the printing-hammer 
and With a Wedge for operating link-work en 
gaging the unison-latch, an electro-magnet 
and local printing circuit for operating said 
armature-lever, a normally rotating wheel pro 
Vided with teeth, and a ratchet-switch con 
trolling Said local circuit and adapted to en 
ter spaces between the teeth of said wheel, 
substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
50. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with a 
type-Wheel and a toothed wheel, means for 
normally rotating said shaft, a pivotal print 
ing-hammer, a unison-latch, an armature-le 
wer provided with a projection for operating 
the printing-hammer and with a wedge for 
Operating link- Work engaging the unison 
latch, an electro-magnet and a local printing 
circuit for operating said armature-lever, and 
a ratchet-switch controlling said local circuit 
and adapted to enter spaces between the teeth 
75 
95 
do 
IO5 
O 
I 25 
509,480 
13 
75 
r 
of said wheel, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
51. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a shaft provided with a type-wheel 
and a toothed wheel, means for normally ro 
tating and arresting said shaft, a pivotal 
printing-hammer, a unison-latch, an arma 
ture-lever provided with a projection for op 
erating the printing-hammer, and with a wedge 
for Operating link-work engaging the unison 
latch, pawls actuated by said armature-lever 
and adapted to feed a paper-carriage, an elec 
tro-magnet and local printing circuit for oper 
ating said armature-lever, and a pivotal ratch 
et-SWitch controlling said local-circuit and 
adapted to enter spaces between the teeth of 
said wheel, substantially as and for the pur 
pOSes set forth. 
52. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph receiver, of a type-wheel shaft provided 
With a toothed-wheel and with a type-wheel, a 
motor responding to makes, and breaks in a 
normal line circuit and adapted to rotate and 
check said shaft, a pivotal printing-hammer, a 
unison-latch an armature-lever provided with 
a projection for operating the printing-ham 
mer and with a wedge for operating link 
Work engaging the unison-latch, an electro 
magnet and local printing circuit for operat 
ing said armature-lever, and a ratchet-switch 
controlling said local-circuit and adapted to 
enter spaces between the teeth of said wheel, 
Substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
53. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type. wheel shaft provided with a 
type-wheel and a toothed-wheel, means for 
normally rotating said shaft, a pivotal print 
ing-hammer having a spring Shank, an arma 
ture-lever provided with a projection for op 
erating the printing-hamlner, an electro-mag 
net and local printing-circuit for operating 
said armature-lever, and a ratchet-switch con 
trolling said local-circuit and adapted to enter 
spaces between the teeth of said wheel, at po 
sitions other than unison substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
54. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with a 
toothed-wheel and a type-wheel having char 
acters disposed in alignment with the spaces 
of the toothed-wheel, and having a blank in 
alignment with a tooth of said wheel, means 
for normally rotating and arresting said shaft, 
a pivotal printing-hammer, a unison-latch, an 
armature-lever provided with a projection in 
range of a rod connected with the printing 
hammer, an electro-magnet and local printing 
circuit for operating Said armature-lever, and 
a pivotal ratchet-switch, whereof one end con 
trols said local-circuit and whereof the other 
end is adapted to enter Spaces between the 
teeth of said wheel at positions other than 
unison, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
55. A printing telegraph provided with a. 
Sunflower-device comprising a conducting an 
nulus and an annulus having conducting 
25 
35 
45 
55 
and insulating segments, an insulated brush 
Sweeping over each annulus, circuit connec 
tions from earth through a generator to the 
conducting annulus and through the brush 
and conducting segments to character keys 
controlling a local printing circuit and de 
vices and to a double contact unison key Con 
trolling said local printing circuit and a uni 
son line circuit, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
56. A printing telegraph provided with a 
sunflower device comprising a conducting 
annulus and an annulus having conducting 
and insulating segments, an insulated brush 
sweeping over each annulus, circuit-connec 
tions from earth through a generator to the 
conducting annulus and through the brush 
and conducting segments to character keys 
controlling a local printing-circuit and de 
vices and to a double contact unison-key Coll 
trolling said local printing circuit and devices 
and a unison line circuit and devices, and a 
high resistance interposed in the unison line 
circuit, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
57. A printing telegraph provided with a 
sunflower device comprising a conducting 
annulus and an annulus having conducting 
and insulating segments, an insulated brush 
sweeping over each annulus, circuit-connec 
tions from earth through a generator to the 
conducting amnulus and through the brush 
and unison conducting segment to a double 
contact unison key controlling a local print 
ing circuit and devices and to a unison line 
circuit, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
58. A printing telegraph provided with a 
sunflower device comprising a conducting 
annulus and an annulus having conducting 
and insulating segments, an insulated brush 
sweeping over each annulus, circuit-connec 
tions from earth through a generator to the 
conducting annulus and through the brush. 
and unison conducting segments to a double 
contact unison key controlling a local print 
ing-circuit and devices and a unison line cir 
cuit and devices, and a high resistance inter 
posed in the unison line circuit, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
59. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a sunflower-device comprising a coll 
ducting annulus and an annulus having Con 
ducting and insulating segments and connec 
tions, local printing circuit connections from 
earth through a generator to the conducting 
annulus through the contacts of a ratchet 
switch, the coils of a locking electro-magnet, 
and the coils of a printing and unison elec 
tro-magnet to earth, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
60. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a sunflower-device comprising a con 
ducting annulus and an annulus having Con 
ducting and insulating segments and connec 
tions, local printing circuit connections from 
earth through a generator to the conducting 
Oc 
Io5 
o 
II5 
I25 
1. 
509,480 
O 
35 
45 
55 
annulus, the contacts of a ratchet-switch and 
coils of a locking electro-magnet and a print 
ing and unison electro-magnet to earth, and 
a manual-switch for controlling the local print 
ing circuit, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
61. A printing telegraph provided with a 
motor and its local circuit, a printing and a 
unison electro-magnet, a local circuit con 
trolled by the armature-lever of a relay elec 
tro-magnet interposed in line and a three-way 
revoluble switch moving with the type-wheel 
shaft and adapted to interrupt the motor lo 
cal circuit and to close the armature-lever lo 
calcircuit only at unison position and adapted 
to close the motor local circuit and interrupt 
the armature lever local circuit at positions 
other than unison, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
62. A printing telegraph provided with a 
three-Way revoluble switch having its con 
ducting parts in electrical communication and 
comprising a conducting disk, an insulating 
disk having a conducting segment in align 
ment With a blank space on the type-wheel 
and a conducting disk having a similarly dis 
posed insulating segment, a contact spring 
riding over the conducting disk and inter 
posed in a local circuit, a contact-spring rid 
ing over the conducting disk having an in 
Sulating segment and interposed in the local 
notor-circuit, and a contact-spring riding over 
the insulating disk having an insulating seg 
ment and interposed in the local printing 
circuit, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth 
63. A printing telegraph provided with a 
circuit interrupter moving with the type 
Wheel shaft and adapted to control electro 
motors at the respective instruments, a spur 
Wheel mounted on said shaft, a detent for en 
gaging said spur-wheel and arresting the cir 
cuit interrupter just before its contact passes 
off the segment over which it is traveling, 
Whereby the transmitter motor is arrested be. 
fore the completion of its stroke, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
64. The combination, of a revolving shaft 
provided with a type-wheel having characters 
and a blank Space, means for arresting said 
shaft with the divisions of the type-wheel in 
the printing position, mechanical and electri 
cal printing devices, a local printing circuit, 
a wheel on said shaft provided with recesses 
in alignment with the characters on the type 
Wheel and with a projection in alignment 
with the blank space, means for controlling 
said local circuit and adapted to enter said 
recesses at positions other than unison and 
to engage with said projection, at unison po 
sition substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
65. A printing telegraph provided with a 
type-wheel shaft having two conducting disks, 
whereof one is provided with insulated seg 
ments alternating With conducting segments, 
a spur-wheel mounted on said shaft, a detent 
for engaging said spur-wheel and arresting 
said disks, double contact springs interposed 
in a line circuit controlling an electro-motor 
at each instrument, and means for adjusting 
one of said springs, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
66. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with a 
ratchet and a stop-wheel, a reciprocating bar 
slotted for the accommodation of said shaft 
and provided at the sides of said slot with 
spring controlled pivotal pawls engaging Said 
ratchet-wheel and at the ends of said slot. With 
fixed detents for engaging the stop - wheel 
pawls and detents co-operating With Said 
wheels, a spring controlled armature-lever 
connected with said bar, an electro-magnet 
responding to makes and breaks in line, pro 
duced by a circuit breaker and closer on the 
transmitter type-wheel shaft and a ratchet 
switch controlled by a toothed-wheel on said 
shaft and adapted to make and break a local 
printing circuit, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
67. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with a 
ratchet and a stop-wheel, a reciprocating-bar 
slotted for the accommodation of said shaft 
and provided at the sides of said slot with 
spring controlled pivotal pawls engaging said 
ratchet-wheel and at the ends of said slot 
with fixed detents for engaging the stop-wheel 
pawls and detents co-operating with said 
wheel, a spring controlled armature lever con 
nected with said bar, and actuated by a no 
tor electro-magnet and circuit, a relay elec 
tro-magnet controlling said local circuit 
through its armature-lever and responding to 
makes and breaks in line produced by a cir 
cuit breaker and closer on the transmitter 
type-wheel shaft, and a ratchet-switch con 
trolled by a toothed-wheel on said shaft and 
adapted to make and break a local printing 
circuit, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
68. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a receiver and a transmitter, each 
having a type-wheel shaft provided with a 
ratchet and a stop-wheel, a reciprocating bar 
slotted for the accommodation of said shaft 
and provided at the sides of said slot with 
spring controlled pivotal pawls engaging said 
ratchet-wheel and at the ends of said slot with 
fixed detents for engaging the stop - wheel 
pawls and detents co-operating with said 
wheels, a spring controlled armature-lever 
connected with said bar and an electro-mag 
net responding to makes and breaks in line, 
a ratchet-switch at the receiver controlled by 
a toothed wheel on the receiver type-wheel 
shaft and adapted to make and break a local 
printing circuit, and a circuit interrupter 
mounted on the type-wheelshaft of the trans 
mitter and interposed in the line circuit, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
 
2O 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with 85 
35 the purposes set forth. 
509,430 
5 provided with pawls and detents co-operat. 
7o 
25 bar, a relay electro-magnet responding to 
5 
69. The combination, in a printing tele- Y wheel on said shaft and adapted to make and 
graph, of a receiver and a transmitter each break said local circuit through the coils of 
having a type-wheel shaft provided with a the printing electro-magnet, substantially as 
ratchet and a stop-wheel, a reciprocating-bar and for the purposes set forth. 
73. The combination, in a printing tele 
ing with said wheels, a spring controlled ar- graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with 
mature-lever connected with said bar and act- a unison-spiral and with ratchet and stop 
uated by a motor electro-magnet and circuit, wheels, a reciprocating-bar provided with 
a relay electro-magnet controlling said local pawls and detents co-operating with said 75 
Io circuit through its armature-lever and re-ratchet and stop-wheels, a spring controlled 
sponding to makes and breaks in line, a armature-lever connected with said bar, a 
ratchet-switch at the receiver controlled by motor electro-magnet responding to makes 
a toothed-wheel on the receiver type-wheel and breaks in line, and a unison-latch adapt 
shaft and adapted to make and break a lo- ed to arrest said shaft in position for mail- 8o 
I5 cal printing-circuit, and a circuit-interrupter taining the spring of the armature-lever in 
mounted on the type - wheel shaft of the tension, substantially as and for the purposes 
transmitter and interposed in the line cir- set forth. 
74. The combination, in a printing tele 
cuit, substantially as and for the purposes 
Set forth. 
70. A printing telegraph having an instru- a unison-spiral and with ratchet and stop 
ment provided with a ratchet and a stop-wheel, wheels, a reciprocating-bar provided with 
a reciprocating bar having pawls and detents pawls and detents co-operating with said 
co-operating with said wheels, a spring con- ratchet and stop-wheels, a spring controlled 
trolled armature-lever connected with said armature-lever connected with said bar, a no- 9o 
tor electro-magnet disposed in a local motor 
makes and breaks in line and controlling circuit cortrolled through the armature-lever 
through its front stop the local circuit of the of a relay electro-magnet responding to makes 
magnet appertaining to the spring controlled and breaks in line, and a unison-latch adapted 
armature-lever and a ratchet-switch con- to arrest said shaft in position for maintain- 95 
3o trolled by a toothed-wheel on said shaft and ing the spring of the armature-lever in ten 
adapted to make and break a local printing sion, substantially as and for the purposes 
circuit, a circuit interrupter interposed in set forth. 
75. The combination, in a printing tele 
line, and a manual-switch interposed in the 
local printing-circuit, substantially as and for graph, of printing mechanism, a paper-car- Too 
riage, a type-wheel shaft provided with a 
71. The combination, in a printing tele- unison spiral and with ratchet and stop 
graph, of a type-wheel, a type-wheel shaft pro- wheels, a reciprocating bar slotted for the ac 
vided with a ratchet and a stop-wheel, a re-commodation of said shaft and provided at 
ciprocating-bar provided with pawls and de- the sides of said slot with spring controlled Io5 
4o tents co-operating with said ratchet and stop- pivotal pawls engaging said ratchet-Wheel 
Wheels, a spring controlled armature-lever and at the ends of said slot with fixed de 
connected with said bar, a motor electro-mag- tents for engaging the stop-wheel, a Spring 
net responding to makes and breaks in line, controlled armature-lever connected with said 
a pivotal printing-hammer, a printing elec- bar, a motor electro-magnet responding to I Io 
45 tro-magnet provided with an armature-lever makes and breaks in line, produced by a cir 
having a projection for actuating the print- cuit maker and breaker on the transmitter 
ing hammer, and a ratchet-switch controlled type-wheel shaft a printing and unison elec 
by a toothed-wheel on said shaft and adapted tro-magnet and circuit connections having an 
to make and break the local circuit through armature-lever provided with devices for act- II5 
5o the coils of the printing electro-magnet, sub- uating the unison latch, printing mechanism 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. and paper carriage, substantially as and for 
- 
graph, of a type-wheel, a type-wheel shaft pro- 
76. The combination, in a printing tele 
vided with a ratchet and a stop-wheel, a re- graph, of printing mechanism, a paper-car- I2O 
55 ciprocating-bar provided with pawls and de-riage, a type-wheel shaft provided with a 
tents co-operating with said ratchet and stop- unison spiral and with ratchet and stop 
wheels, a spring controlled armature-lever wheels, a reciprocating -bar provided with 
connected with said bar, a motor electro-mag- pawls and detents co-operating with said 
net, a relay electro-magnet responding to ratchet and stop-wheels, a spring controlled (25 
6c makes and breaks in line and controlling armature-lever connected with said bar, a mo 
through its armature-lever the local-circuit tor electro-magnet interposed in a local motor 
of the motor electro-magnet, a pivotal print- circuit controlled by the armature-lever of a 
ing-hammer, a printing electro-magnet pro- relay electro - magnet responding to makes 
vided with an armature-lever having a pro- and breaks in line, and a printing and unison 13o 
65 jection for actuating the printing-hammer, electro-magnet and circuit connections hav 
and a ratchet-switch controlled by a toothed-ing an armature-lever provided with devices 
72. The combination, in a printing tele- the purposes set forth. 
16 
509,430 
75 
s 
p 
for actuating the unison-latch, printing mech 
mitter and receiver, substantially as and for 
anism and paper-carriage, substantially as 
the purposes set forth. 
81. A printing telegraph provided with a 
and for the purposes set forth. 
77. A printing telegraph provided with 
transmitter and a receiver having motors re 
type-wheel shafts having ratchet and stop 
sponding to makes and breaks in a line cir 
Wheels, reciprocating-bars slotted for the ac 
cuit, a bar actuated by an electro-magnet and 
Commodation of said shafts and provided at 
provided with pawls and detents, a ratchet 
and a stop-wheel on the type-wheel shaft of 
the sides of said slots with spring controlled 
pivotal pawls engaging said ratchet-wheels 
each instrument and a circuit maker and 
and at the ends of said slots with fixed detents 
breaker mounted on the transmitter type 
for engaging the stop-wheels, spring con 
wheelshaft and having its contact springs in 
terposed in the line circuit, substantially as 
trolled armature-levers connected with said 
bars, motor electro-magnets, relay electro 
and for the purposes set forth. 
S2. A printing telegraph provided with a 
magnets interposed in the line-circuit and 
adapted to control the local circuits of the 
transmitter and a receiver, each having a mo 
motor electro-magnets at the transmitter and 
tor responding to makes and breaks in line 
receiver, whereby synchronism in movement 
circuit produced by an interrupter at the 
is insured of the type-wheels of both instru 
transmitter type wheel shaft and comprising 
ments, substantially as set forth. 
stop and ratchet-wheels on the type-wheel 
7S. A printing telegraph provided with re 
shaft and a bar provided with pawls and de 
lay electro-magnets interposed in the line-cir- tents and actuated by the spring controlled 
cuit and adapted to control local motor cir armature-lever of an electro-magnet, and each 
cuits at the transmitter and the receiver, mag- having a unison-latch adapted to arrest its 
s 
netic devices interposed in said local motor 
type-wheel shaft and cause the same to hold 
circuits and provided with spring controlled 
the retracting spring of said armature-lever 
armature-levers, ratchet, and stop-wheels on 
in tension and to hold the circuit interrupter 
the type-wheel shafts of each instrument, a 
in position for breaking the line circuit, and 
permitting of the closing of the circuit of a 
bar attached to said armature-lever and slot 
unison key to line, substantially as and for 
ted for the accommodation of said shaft and 
provided at the sides of said slot with spring 
the purposes set forth. 
Controlled pivotal pawls engaging said ratch 
83. In a printing telegraph, a single line 
et-wheel and at the ends of said slot with fixed 
conductor adapted to be included in a line 
detents for engaging the stop-wheel, and a 
circuit and in a unison circuit, combined 
circuit interrupter mounted on the receiver 
transmitters and receivers normally operated 
through relay electro-magnets controlling lo 
type wheel shaft and adapted to control the 
line circuit, substantially as and for the pur 
cal motor circuits and responding to makes 
poses set forth. 
and breaks in the line circuit, a motor electro 
79. A printing telegraph provided with a 
magnet in Said local circuit, bars provided 
relay interposed in a line circuit and adapted 
with detents and pawls and connected with 
to Control a local motor circuit or circuits at 
the spring controlled armature-levers of said 
both transmitting and receiving instruments, 
motor electro - magnets, ratchet and stop 
devices interposed in the motor circuit or cir 
wheels on the type wheel shafts, independent 
cuits, ratchet and stop wheels on a shaft car 
local printing circuits controlled at the trans 
rying a type-wheel of each instrument, mech 
mitter by keys and at the receiver by an au 
anisln co-operating with said wheels, and a 
tomatic switch on the type-wheelshaft, unison 
circuit interrupter located on the type wheel 
circuits controlled at the transmitter by a 
shaft of the transmitter and adapted to con 
unison key and in parallel to line and through 
trol the line circuit, substantially as and for 
the devices of the transmitter to earth, a local 
the purposes set forth. 
unison circuit at the transmitter controlled 
80. A printing telegraph system, compris 
by the armature lever of the relay electro 
ing a transmitter and a receiver having motor 
magnet in response to the branch unison cir 
electro-magnets responding to makes and 
cuit in line, three-way switches for automati 
breaks in a normal line circuit, spring con 
cally controlling the circuits at unison posi 
trolled armature levers, ratchet and stop 
tion, and manual-switches for reversing the 
Wheels On the type-wheel shaft of each in 
circuits to permit the instruments to inter 
strument, reciprocating bars provided with 
changeably operate as transmitters or receiv 
pawls and detents co-operating with said 
ers, substantially as and for the purposes set 
ratchet and stop wheels and said bars slotted 
forth. 
for the accommodation of the type-wheelshaft 
84. In a printing telegraph, a transmitter 
provided at the sides of said slot with spring 
provided with a local printing circuit and its 
Controlled pivotal pawls engaging said ratch 
accessories, a receiver provided with a local 
et-Wheels and at the ends of said slot with 
printing circuit and its accessories and adapt 
fixed detents for engaging said stop-wheels, 
ed to automatically effect printing upon the 
and relay electro-magnets interposed in a line arrest of the type-wheel shaft of the receiver 
circuit and adapted to control the local cir 
at positions other than unison, a motor elec 
cuits of the motor electromagnets at the trans 
tro-magnet at the receiver having a spring 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
90 
95 
OO 
o 
IIS 
I 25 
509,480 
O 
20 
75 
controlled armature-lever provided with a bar 
having pawls and detents co-operating with 
ratchet and stop-wheels on the type-wheel 
shaft, and mechanical and electrical devices 
and circuits operating upon the arrest of the 
transmitter type-wheel shaft to cause said 
bar to arrest the type-wheel shaft at the re 
ceiver, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
85. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with a 
type-wheel and a toothed-wheel, a motor elec 
tro-magnet and circuit connections, a bar con 
nected with the spring controlled armature 
lever of the motor electro-magnet and pro 
vided with pawls and detents engaging ratchet 
and stop-wheels on said shaft, a pivotal print 
ing-hammer, a unison-latch, an armature-le 
ver provided with a projection for operating 
the printing-hammer and with a wedge for 
operating link-work engaging the unison 
latch, an electro-magnet and local printing 
circuit for operating said armature-lever, and 
a ratchet-switch controlling said local circuit 
and adapted to enter spaces between the teeth 
of said wheel, substantially as and for the 
purposes Set forth. 
86. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with 
ratchet and stop-wheels, a bar provided with 
pawls and detents co-operating with said 
wheels, an electro-magnet provided with cir 
cuit connections and with a spring controlled 
armature-lever connected with said bar and 
a switch tending to close a local printing cir 
cuit and restrained from such action by the 
movement of the instrument and at unison 
position, Substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
87. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with 
ratchet and stop-wheels, a bar provided with 
pawls and detents co-operating with said 
wheels, an electro-magnet provided with cir 
cuit connections and with a spring controlled 
armature-lever connected with said bar, a 
switch tending to close a local printing cir 
cuit and restrained from such action by the 
movement of said type-wheel shaft and at 
unison position, and a manual-switch for mak 
ing and breaking said local circuit to permit 
of the operation of the instrument as a re 
ceiver and as a transmitter, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
88. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with 
ratchet and stop-wheels, a ball provided with 
pawls and detents co-operating with said 
wheels, an electro-magnet provided with cir 
cuit-connections an armature-lever connected 
with said bar, and a pivotal switch tending to 
close a local printing circuit through its con 
tacts and restrained from such action by the 
movement of the type-wheel shaft and at 
unison position, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
89. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a type-wheel shaft provided with 
ratchet and stop-wheels, a bar provided with 
pawls and detents co-operating with said 
wheels, an electro-magnet provided with cir 
cuit connections and with a spring controlled 
armature-lever connected with said bar, a piv 
otal switch tending to close a local printing 
circuit through its contacts and restrained 
from such action by the movement of the 
type-wheel shaft and at unison position, and 
a manual-switch for making and breaking 
said local circuit to permit of the operation of 
the instrument as a receiver and as a trans 
mitter, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
90. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a toothed wheel movable on a shaft, 
a pivotal ratchet-switch, whereof one end is 
provided with contacts controlling a local 
printing circuit and whereof the other end 
rides over the teeth of said wheel as the shaft 
is rotated and enters a space between said 
teeth upon the arrest of said shaft except at 
unison position, a bar provided with spring 
controlled pawls and detents co-operating 
with ratchet and stop-wheels on said shaft, 
and an electro-magnet provided with circuit 
connections and with a controlled armature 
lever attached to said bar, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
91. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph, of a toothed-wheel movable on a type 
wheel shaft, a pivotal ratchet-switch whereof 
one end is provided with contacts controlling 
a local printing circuit and whereof the other 
end rides over the teeth of said wheel as the 
shaft is rotated and enters a space between 
said teeth upon the arrest of said shaft ex 
cept at unison position, a manual-switch in 
terposed in the local printing circuit, a bar 
provided with spring controlled pawls and 
detents co-operating with ratchet and stop 
wheels on said shaft, and an electro-magnet 
interposed in a local motor circuit and pro 
vided with a Spring controlled armature le 
ver attached to said bar, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
92. The combination, in a printing tele 
graph receiver, of a wheel mounted upon a 
shaft and having a Series of teeth and a com 
paratively wide tooth, a ratchet-switch con 
trolling a local printing-circuit and tending 
to enter one of the spaces between said teeth 
upon the arrest of the shaft and restrained 
from such action at unison position by the 
wide tooth, a motor electro-magnet provided 
with circuit connections and with a spring 
actuated armature-lever having pawls and 
detents co-operating with a detent and a stop 
wheel on the shaft, and a unison latch and 
its accessories for arresting said shaft, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
93. In a printing telegraph, a spring-con 
trolled unison latch, a system of links for 
operating said latch, an armature-lever pro 
vided with a wedge adapted to actuate said 
links, an electro-magnet and circuit connec 
- 
35 
45 
55 
go 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
509,480 
5 
tions for actuating said armature-lever, a 
type-wheel shaft provided with a ratchet and 
a stop-wheel, a spring controlled bar pro 
vided with pawls and detents co-operating 
with said wheels, and a motor electro-magaet 
and connections for operating said bar, Sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
94. A printing telegraph provided with re 
ceivers and transmitters each having a motor 
electro-magnet adapted to reciprocate a spring 
controlled bar provided with pawls and de 
tents co-operating with ratchet and stop 
wheels mounted on the type-wheel shaft, a 
circuit interrupter moving with the type 
wheel shaft of the transmitter and provided 
with circuit connections and devices adapted 
to control the motor electro-magnets at the re 
spective instruments, a spur-wheel mounted 
on the shaft of the receiver, a detent for engag 
ing said spur-wheel and arresting the circuit 
interrupter just before its contact passes off 
the segment over which it is trailing, whereby 
the transmitter bar is arrested before its ar 
mature-lever completes its stroke, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
95. In a printing telegraph instrument, a 
printing and unison electro-magnet and a 
locking electro magnet and their devices, a 
generator, an automatic switch tending to 
close a local printing circuit and restrained 
from such action by the movement of the in 
strument and at unison position, circuit con 
nections from earth through the generator, 
and in parallel by one branch through a man 
ual switch and the contacts of the automatic 
switch and the coils of the printing and uni 
son electro-magnet to earth, and by the other 
branch through the contacts of the sunflower 
device and the contacts of depressed keys 
and the coils of both of said magnets to earth, 
and a switch mounted on the type-wheel shaft 
and adapted to control the second branch cir 
cuit, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
96. In a printing telegraph instrument, a 
printing and unison electro-magnet and de 
vices, a generator, an automatic switch tend 
ing to close a local printing circuit and re 
strained from such action by the movement 
of the instrument and at unison position, a 
manual-switch, circuit connections from earth 
through the generator and the manual-switch 
and the contacts of the automatic switch and 
the coils of the printing and unison electro 
magnet to earth, normally open keys and a 
sunflower device, a locking electro-magnet, 
and circuit connections from said generator 
through the contacts of the sunflower device 
to the contacts of the keys and the coils of 
both of said magnets, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
97. In a printing telegraph instrument, a 
printing and unison electro-magnet and de 
vices, a generator, a Switch tending to close 
one branch of a local printing circuit through 
the coils of said electro-magnet and restrained 
from such action by the movement of the in 
strument, a locking electro-magnet interposed 
in the other branch of the local printing cir 
cuit, and keys tending to normally interrupt 
the branch circuit through the coils of the 
locking electro-magnet, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
98. In a printing telegraph instrument, a 
printing and unison electro-magnet and de 
vices, a generator, an automatic switch tend 
ing to close one branch of a local printing 
circuit through the coils of said electro-mag 
net and restrained from such action by the 
movement of the instrument, a manual switch 
interposed in said branch of the local circuit, 
a locking electro-magnet interposed in the 
other branch of the local printing circuit, and 
keys tending to normally interrupt the branch 
circuit through the coils of the locking elec 
tro-magnet, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
99. In a printing telegraph instrument, a 
printing and unison electro-magnet and de 
vices, a generator, a switch tending to close 
one branch of a local printing circuit through 
the coils of said electro-magnet and restrained 
from such action by the rotation of a toothed 
wheel, a locking electro-magnet interposed in 
the other branch of the local printing circuit, 
and keys tending to normally interrupt the 
branch circuit through the coils of the lock 
ing electro-magnet, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
100. In a printing telegraph instrument, a 
printing and unison electro-magnet and de 
vices, a generator, an automatic switch tend 
ing to close one branch of a local printing 
circuit through the coils of said electro-mag 
net and restrained from such action by the 
rotation of a toothed wheel, a manual switch 
interposed in said branch of the local circuit, 
a locking electro-magnet interposed in the 
other branch of the local printing circuit, and 
keys tending to normally interrupt the branch 
circuit through the coils of the locking elec 
tro-magnet, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
101. In a printing telegraph instrument, a 
printing and unison electro-magnet and de 
Vices, a generator, an automatic switch tend 
ing to close one branch of a local printing cir 
cuit through the coils of said electro-magnet 
and restrained from such action at unison po 
sition by a projection on a revoluble toothed 
Wheel, a locking electro-magnet adapted to 
be included in the other branch of the local 
printing circuit and in a local unison circuit 
controlled by impulses in line, and means 
for automatically breaking the branch of the 
printing circuit appertaining to the locking 
electro-magnet and for closing the local uni 
son circuit at unison position, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
102. In a printing telegraph instrument, a 
printing and unison electro-magnet and de 
Vices, a generator, an automatic switch tend 
ing to close one branch of a local printing 
circuit through the coils of said electro-mag 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IC) 
II5 
I 25 
509,430 
106. In a printing telegraph system, trans- 4o 
19 
synchronously arresting and releasing a trans 
mitter and a receiver, and a local printing 
circuit and mechanical and electrical devices 
independent of the line circuit and tending to 35 
automatically effect an impression, feed the 
paper, and actuate the unison latch at the re 
ceiver at positions other than unison, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
mitting and receiving instruments, relay elec 
tro-magnets for controlling said instruments, 
a line through the coils of said relay electro 
magnets, circuit interrupters as described on 
the type - wheel shaft of each instrument, 45 
branch circuits from said line through said 
circuit interrupters, a manual-switch at each 
instrument for controlling said branch cir 
cuits and for permitting of an instrument 
being used either as a transmitter or receiver, 5o 
and mechanical and electrical devices adapt 
ed to automatically effect an impression upon 
the arrest of one of the instruments, substanr 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
my signature in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 55 
ROBERTA, FOWDEN. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS M. SMITH, 
RICHARD C. MAXWELL, 
Io tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
net and restrained from such action at uni 
son position, a locking electro-magnet adapt 
ed to be included in the other branch of the 
local printing circuit and in a unison circuit 
5 controlled by a unison key and means for 
automatically breaking the branch of the lo 
cal printing circuit appertaining to the lock 
ing electro-magnet and for closing the local 
unison circuit at unison position, substan 
103. A printing telegraph system, compris 
ing a double contact unison key, circuit con 
nections, a type-Wheel and a type-wheel shaft 
in an instrument and a relay electro-magnet 
15 and its circuit connections, the construction 
and arrangement being such as to synchro 
nously release the type-wheel shaft of the in 
strument through said relay and circuit con 
nections, substantially as shown and for the 
104. A printing telegraph system compris 
ing character keys and circuit connections 
for synchronously arresting and releasing a 
transmitter and a receiver, and a local print 
25 ing circuit and mechanical and electrical de 
vices tending to automatically effect an im 
pression upon the arrest of the receiver at 
positions other than unison, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
105. A printing telegraph system compris 
ing character keys and circuit connections for 
2 o purposes set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509530.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 509,530, 
W. S. HARRISON, 
TELEPHONIC APPARATUS, 
Patented Nov. 28, 1893, 
smin a 2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM STUART HARRISON, OF HONG-KONG, CHINA. 
TELEPHONIC APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,530, dated November 28, 1893. 
Application filed December 13, 1892, Renewed October 5, 1893, Serial No. 487,296. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMSTUART HAR 
RISON, electrician, a subject of the Queen of 
Great Britain and Ireland, residing at Praya 
Central, Hong-Kong, China, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Tele 
phonic Apparatus, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention has primarily for its object, 
the application of a single fluid cell to provide 
the current for the microphone circuit in tele 
phonic apparatus, and secondarily the elimi 
nation of a switch, subsequent upon such ap 
plication. 
In applying the invention, a battery or cell 
is employed, in which the zinc, or other elec 
tro-positive element, is inserted in or with 
drawn from the exciting solution, through a 
lever or system of levers, actuated by taking 
the receiver off the hook or replacing it, or by 
any other method whereby the electro-posi 
tive element is inserted in the exciting soiu 
tion only during the period in which a current 
is required through the microphone. The con 
necting wires are so arranged that the with 
drawal of the electro-positive element from 
the solution, takes the place of a switch in 
arresting the said current through the micro 
phone. 
The accompanying drawing, which forms a 
part of my specification, represents diagram 
matically a complete telephonic apparatus, 
arranged in accordance with my invention. 
The form of battery which is found to an 
swer well for the purposes of the invention, 
consists of a jar J, of glass or other suitable 
material, half filled with a solution J' of bi 
chromate of potash and sulphuric acid, in 
which a carbon plate Kabout one and three 
fourths inches wide and one-half an inch thick, 
and preferably composed of what is known as 
retort' carbon, is suspended permanently. 
This plate carries at its top a lead cap K', 
which is cast on a brass terminal K. From 
this terminal a wire P is led direct to the pri 
mary coil of an induction coil E, and from 
thence the wire P leads through the micro 
phone H to the lever D', from the end of which 
is suspended the zinc element L. The latter 
consists of an amalgamated Zinc rod, three 
eighths of an inch in diameter, inserted in the 
solution, when the battery is put in action, to 
a depth of one and one-half inches and dis 
tant from the carbon plate about one and one 
half inches, the latter being permanently im- 55 
mersed to a depth of two inches. A battery 
soprepared has an internal resistance of about 
six ohms, and an electro-motive force of ap 
proximately two volts, and is upon the whole 
eminently adapted to the required purpose, a 6o 
single cell being all sufficient with any of the 
Various forms of microphones at presentin use. 
b The microphone shown at H, is merely sym 
OC. 
A is the receiver, hung on the forked end 65 
In the position of the parts shown on the 8o 
of the lever D', which is pivoted at D8, and 
connected to the lever Dpivoted at D by the 
link d, so that the weight of the receiver lifts 
the zinc L out of the solution, and this move 
ment throws the battery out of action and to 
serves the purpose of a Switch to break the 
circuit through the microphone. When the 
receiver is taken of the hook, the zinc drops 
into the solution, the battery comes into ac 
tion and the circuit through the microphone 75 
is closed. 
F is the magneto alarm bell, the permanent 
magnet not being shown, and G is the mag 
neto generator, the driving gear being omitted. 
diagram with the receiver on the hook, the 
battery is out of action and consequently the 
microphone circuit inoperative, while the 
magneto generator G and bell F are put to 
line through the switch B. When the re- 85 
ceiver is taken off the hook, contact is broken 
at B and the generator and bell cut out, while 
the receiver and secondary coil S' S of the 
induction coil E, are put to line through the 
switch C. 
It is not intended to limit the battery to the 
use of a bichromate of potash and sulphuric 
acid, or a chromic acid Solution, and the car 
bon may either remain permanently in the 
solution, as described, or may be withdrawn 95 
simultaneously with the zinc, and any form 
of battery may be used in which either one 
or both of the elements can be withdrawn in 
any suitable manner when the current is not 
required. 
The main advantages of the invention are 
as follows: It is less expensive to set up a cell 
of the kind above described thana Leclanch, 
as commonly used for telephonic purposes, 
9o 
OC. 
o 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
509,530 
O 
this being especially the case where its high 
electro-motive force and low internal resist 
ance permit it to replace two Leclanch cells, 
which are frequently required with the pen 
cil forms of microphone. For the production 
of the intermittent currents required in te 
lephony, this cell is much more durable than 
the Leclanch. There is positively no local 
action taking place when the cell is not in use, 
and three times the quantity of current is ob 
tained from a given quantity of zinc, when 
used in this manner, than is the case with the 
Leclanch cell, while the unusually low inter 
mal resistance, before mentioned, allows the 
microphone to act more directly upon the cur 
rent strength. The process of recharging is 
much simpler and occupies less time than 
with the Leclanch, as it consists simply in 
replacing the spent solution by new and, when 
necessary, replacing the zinc rod. 
The switch, which is dispensed with by 
means of my invention, is the one which gives 
the most trouble in practice, chiefly on account 
of the sparking which takes place, every time 
25 the circuit is opened. 
The invention may readily and at trifling 
expense be applied to the general types of 
telephonic apparatus, as at present construct 
ed and in use. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In telephonic apparatus, a battery or cell J, 
inserted in the circuit of the microphone H, 
the zinc or electro-positive element L sus 
pended from a lever D, said lever being con 
nected with a lever D', by a link d so that 
when the receiver A is hung on the lever D', 
the element L is withdrawn from the solution 
J', the cell thrown out of action and the mi 
crophone circuit broken, and when the re 
ceiver is taken off, the element L drops into 
the said solution and the said circuit is closed, 
substantially as set forth. 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 45 
W. STUART HARRISON. 
35 
40 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS ARNOLD, 
L. KENNARD DAVIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509630.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 509,630, 
F, TAYLOR 
HAT AND COAT HOOK. 
Patented Nov. 28, 1893, 
Witnesses 
A 9. Assee-1- 
22s22/26% 
 
b 
In We ntor: 
b # A-e-r- 
4-st 
THE NATIONAL LITHoGRAPHINa company. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK TAYLOR, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS, 
HAT AND COAT HOOK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,680, dated November 28, 1893. 
Application filed March 30, 1893, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICKTAYLOR, of 
Lowell, in the county of Middlesex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Hat and Coat 
Hooks, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to hat and coat hooks 
made of wire, and has for its object to pro 
vide a simple, strong and inexpensive hook, 
made of a single piece of wire. 
The invention consists in the improved con 
struction which I will now proceed to describe 
and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification: Figure 1 represents 
a perspective view of my improved construc 
tion. Fig. 2 represents a side elevation of 
the same. Fig. 3 represents a view showing 
the piece of wire of which the hook is com 
posed, after the first stage in the operation of 
forming it into a hook. Figs. 4 and 5 repre 
sent respectively a side and a front elevation 
of a modification and Figs. 6 and 7 represent 
respectively a perspective view and a rear 
elevation of another modification. 
The same letters and numerals of refer 
ence indicate the same parts in all the figures. 
In carrying out my invention, Itake a piece 
of wire, and bend the same upon itself at a 
point nearer one end than the other, thus 
forming a U-shaped piece, composed of a 
longer arm 2, a shorter arm 3, and a connect 
ing neck 4. The arms 2 and 3 in the con 
structions shown in Figs. 1, 2, 6 and 7, are 
disposed side by side for a considerable dis 
tance from the neck 4, and form an elongated 
hat-hooka, their arrangement being such that 
at any cross section of the hook a on a line 
substantially at right angles to the direction 
of projection of the hook, they are in sub 
stantially the same horizontal plane and give 
the hook a broadbearing surface. At the in 
ner end of said hook, the longer arm 2 is bent 
downwardly at 5, a portion of the residue of 
said arm being bent to form a coat-hook b be 
low the hat-hook, while another portion is in 
tertwisted with a portion of the arm 3 and 
terminates in an attaching device or spur 6, 
which is adapted to be secured to a wall or 
other suitable support. The arm 3 is bent 
upwardly at 7, the part of the arm above said 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
Serial No. 468,289. (No model.) 
point being interlocked with a part of the 
arm 2 and terminating in an attaching device 
or spur 8. It will be seen that the hook thus 
constructed is simple and strong, there being 
no liability of its parts being bent out of place. 
The interlocking of the arms 2 and 3 above 
the inner end of the coat-hook materially in 
creases the strength of the hook and consti 
tutes a rigid shank or neck connecting the 
spurs 6 and 8 with the hooks. 
I do not limit myself in all cases to the in 
terlocking of the arms above the inner end 
of the hook a, as said arms may be extended 
upwardly side by side without being inter 
locked, if desired, as shown in Figs. 6 and 7. 
In Figs, 4 and 5 another. modification is 
shown in which the members of both hooks 
are shown in the same vertical plane instead 
of being shown side by side. 
I claim 
1. A hat and coat hook, composed of a sin 
gle piece of wire comprising a neck and two 
arms of unequal length, portions of the arms 
constituting a loop-shaped hat-hook composed 
of two members relatively arranged as de 
scribed to present a broad bearing-surface, 
while a portion of the longer arm comprises 
a loop-shaped coat-hook also composed of two 
members relatively arranged as described to 
present a broadbearing-surface, the free ends 
of the arms extending above the inner end of 
the hat-hook and provided with attaching 
devices, as set forth. 
2. A hat and coat hook, composed of a sin 
gle piece of wire comprising a neck and two 
arms of unequal length, portions of the arms 
constituting a hat-hook, while a portion of 
the longer arm constitutes a coat-hook, and 
another portion is interlocked with a portion 
of the shorter arm above the hat-hook, the 
free ends of the arms constituting attaching 
devices located above the inner end of the 
hat-hook, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specifiction, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 24th day of 
March A. D. 1893. 
FREDERICK TAYLOR. 
Witnesses: 
A. D. HARRISON, 
W. S. MCLEOD. 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509731.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 509,731. 
W. 
A 
J. A. GROVE, 
WIRE FENCE, 
Patented Nov. 28, 1893. 
olo 
 
 
 
ORE 
2-2. Orms 
T 
eace 
 
 
28ibvicsscs 
 
 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN ARNOLD GROVE, OF BLUFFTON, INDIANA. 
WRE, FENCE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,781, dated November 28, 1893. 
Application filed December 30, 1892, Serial No. 456,817, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN ARNOLD GROVE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Bluffton, in the county of Wells and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Wire Fences; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to wire fences and 
is designed to provide improved means for 
Securing the ends of the fence wires to the re 
quired post or posts in such a manner that 
the wires may be released at a moment's no 
tice for purposes of repair and regulating the 
tension as may be required. 
The improvement consists of a socket hav 
ing anti friction rollers at one side, and a 
Wedged or tapering key to be driven into said 
Socket and fasten the fence wire therein. 
The improvement further consists in the 
novel features and the peculiar construction 
and combination of the parts which will be 
hereinafter more fully described and claimed 
and which are shown in the annexed drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of a portion of 
fence embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
detail view showing the preferred form of 
fastening for securing the fence wires to the 
stay. Fig. 3 is a detail view of a modified 
form of fastening in which the ends of the 
wires forming the hooks are carried forward 
along the sides of the stays and bent around 
the fence wire. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of 
a holder on an enlarged scale, the obverse 
side of the socket being removed to expose the 
anti friction rollers and show the relative lo 
cation of the key. Fig. 5 is a rear view of the 
socket. 
The fence wires Care strung upon the posts 
D in any of the usual ways which will admit 
of the said wires being tightened from one 
end. In constructing the fence the posts D 
are set farther apart than is usual and the 
fence wires are supported between said posts 
by stays G which are sufficiently long to touch 
the ground and prevent the fence wires from 
sagging. These stays G in addition to sup 
porting the fence wires and preventing them 
from sagging also serve to hold the said fence 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
wires at a fixed relative distance apart. To 
further fix the relative distance offence wires 
shorterstaysa, are located intermediate of the 
stays G. These stays a extend below the 
lowest fence wire just far enough to admit of 
the said wire being firmly secured thereto. 
The fence wires are secured to the stays a 
and G in precisely the same manner, the lat 
ter being provided with transverse notches to 
receive the fence wires which latter are Se 
cured thereto by fastenings F. The fasten 
ings F are formed of wire which is doubled 
upon itself and provided at one end with a 
hook f which is adapted to embrace the fence 
wires. The ends of the wire after passing 
through transverse openings g in the stays are 
bent in opposite directions, as shown in Fig. 
2, to fix the position of the said fastening. 
For greater security the ends of the wire 
forming the fastening F may be carried for 
Ward along the side of the stay and bent 
around the fence wire, as shown in Fig. 3. 
The opening g is preferably formed at a slight 
incline through the stay and is enlarged at 
the end opening out on the notched side of 
the stay to receive the hook.f. 
The holder for securing the end of the fence 
wire to the post at the end of the line of 
fences, or to any post desired, is composed of 
a socket B which has flanged ends by means 
of which it is secured to the fence posts by 
suitable fastenings. The mortise or opening 
in the socket B has one wall formed at right 
angles to the inner face of the socket and has 
the opposite wall slightly inclined whereby 
said mortise or opening is wider at the outer 
than at the inner end. Anti friction rollers 
b are journaled in the socket and form one 
wall of the opening therein. These rollers 
admit of the key H being readily pressed into 
the opening in the socket. The flanged at 
the outer end of the opening in the socket 
protects the outer anti friction roller and pre 
vents foreign matter from being lodged be 
tween said roller and the socket. The key H. 
is wedge shaped or tapering and is serrated 
on one side to engage positively with the 
fence wire. The outer end of the key is en 
larged to be readily grasped between the fin 
gers when it is desired to withdraw the key 
from the socket. 
In constructing the fence the posts D are 
go 
95 
o 
509,781 
tured flanges to receive the fastenings by 
means of which the holder is secured to the 
said post, and having a mortise, one Wall of 
the mortise being straight, a series of rollers 
journaled in the said mortise and forming the 
other wall, and having a flange at the outer 
end of the mortise to protect and conceal the 
rollers, and a tapering key to be thrust into 
the said mortise to secure the wire therein, 
said key obtaining a bearing on the said se 
ries of rollers, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
2O 
25 
JOHN ARNOLD GROVE. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. Fox, 
J. H. C. SMITH, 
Set up along the prescribed line and the fence 
wires are strung thereon in the usual manner, 
One end being made fast to the outer end post 
and the other end being secured to the other 
5 end post or to any intermediate fence post by 
means of the holder B. The stays G and a 
are applied to the fence wires and secured 
thereto in the manner hereinbefore set forth. : 
The end posts are braced from the next post 
by means of the diagonal posts I and the stay 
Wire J. 
Having thus described my invention, what. 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
In a wire fence, the combination with the 
posts and the wires stretched on the said posts, 
of a holder to Secure the end of the wires to 
the post, consisting of a casting having aper 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509831.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 509,831, 
N is 
H. ST ACEY. 
OIL BURNER, 
Patented Nov. 28, 1893. 
 
 
 
I 
N N 
AE 
NS N I sea 
N 
26 O 
N 
N72. Win 
Z 4 Y ZZ W. A. W. W. W. W. 
N 
M. 
N 
2 
a 
 
 
2. 
ill" 
Firs---- 
: 
   
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
28itv.cscs - 
f. (S) 
Yul 
6 (3 & Az, 
 
" 
M 1 S w Myers 
 
 
 
a 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY STACEY, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
MICHAEL H. CAIN, OF SAME PLACE. 
Ola BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,881, dated November 28, 1898. 
Application filed August 10, 1892, Serial No. 442,667, (No model.) 
O 
M 
To all whom it tally conce71. 
Be it known that I, HENRY STACEY, of In 
dianapolis, county of Marion, and State of In 
diana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Oil-Burners; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which like figures refer to like parts. 
My invention relates to new and useful im 
provements in the construction of oil burn 
ers, and is an improvement on the one shown 
and described in Letters Patent No. 473,858, 
granted to me April 26, 1892, and will be un 
derstood from the following description. 
In the drawings, Figure is a view partly 
in section of a stove with a burner therein 
embodying my improvements. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the base upon which the burner rests. 
Fig. 3 is a central section through the shell 
which forms an air chamber around the 
burner. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the burner. 
In detail, 1 represents a stove, 2 the fire pot, 
and 3 the grate. 
4 is a non-combustible filling, preferably of 
clay, which is filled in around the burner shell 
5 in a semi-plastic state, and which prevents 
any draft from passing out through the grate 
outside of such shell. 
6 represents a suitable base, shown in de 
tail in Fig. 2, which has a central projecting 
ring 7 which fits within the cored out bottom 
of the burner 8 to retain it in a central posi 
tion. The burner itself has radiating arms 
or lugs 9 which rest on top of the base 6, and 
on these arms the burner shell 5 which forms 
a surrounding air chamber rests. The burner 
also has a circular oil chamber 10 which is 
connected by a pipe 11 having a valve 12 
therein with any suitable oil supply, the cen 
tral part of the burner being raised, and its 
sides formed on an angle, this extension be 
ing centrally perforated, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 4. On the top of this central extension a 
flaring or inverted conical deflector 13 is 
adapted to rest, a projection being formed on 
its under side which fits in an opening in the 
central extension of the burner, thereby clos 
ing the same, and washers 14 may be inter 
posed between the deflector and the top of 
the burner for the purpose of raising such de 
flector to any desired position. The burner 
shell 5 is formed in the shape of a cylinder 
with an overhanging top extending inward 
and then downward, as at 15, the downward 
extension fitting snugly outside the burner, 
and has slits formed therein, thus allowing 
the air to pass up through the grate, the air 
chamber and through these slits. The shell 
forming the air chamber is formed with an 
annular flange 17 on its top, and within this 
rests an upward flaring extension 18 shown 
in Fig. 1, this serving to keep the flame against 
the flaring sides of the deflector, the shape of 
the deflector and extension being such as to 
retard the flame and cause it to hug the de 
flector, and thus secure perfect combustion 
of the oil gas before it escapes from the top 
of the deflector, thereby giving a perfect flame 
above the burner and its combustion cham 
ber, and one that is free from smoke, soot, 
and other impurities. By increasing or de 
creasing the number of washers upon which 
the deflector rests the space between the de 
flector and the extension 18 may be adjusted, 
Whereby the flame escaping from around the 
top of the deflector can be regulated, the de 
flector being either raised up from the flaring 
extension 18, or will be brought into closer 
proximity to the same, and thereby cause the 
flame to decrease in size and become thin, 
thereby decreasing the heat and completing 
the combustion of the gas. 
The advantages in the construction and op 
eration of this burner over those in my former 
patent are numerous, the combustion being 
more perfect because it takes place within 
the burner before it escapes into the fire pot 
of the stove, and owing to perfect combustion 
there is no loss of heat as there was in the 
former device, where a certain amount of 
combustion took place after the gas from the 
oil had escaped into the fire-pot of the stove, 
and through this caused to some extent a 
Smoky and dirty flame. By the construction 
of the air chamber surrounding the burner, 
the draft is evenly divided and none escapes 
from the air chamber without passing through 
the combustion chamber to the burner, and 
this secures a much better mixing of the air 
and gas generated by the oil than in the for 
mer device, and the proportion of air mixed 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
do 
2 
509,831 
o 
is just what is needed to effect perfect com 
bustion, and this can be adjusted by raising 
or lowering the deflector 13; hence a more per 
fect fire. Owing to the manner of construct 
ing the burner it is also possible to make it 
much lighter and smaller than in the former 
case, where a great number of perforations 
were necessary. In this burner they are en 
tirely done away with. Owing to the form 
and the manner of supporting and adjusting 
the central deflector in relation to the outside 
extension of the burner shell, as before men 
tioned, the size of the flame can be regulated, 
and the escape of the products of combustion 
can be retarded so that they will be consumed 
Within the combustion chamber of the burn 
er, and the volume of air coming into the 
Combustion chamber be adjusted to effect a 
mixing with the oil gas in the proper propor 
tion to produce complete combustion. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is the following: 
1. In an oil burner the combination of a 
suitable oil chamber, an inverted conical de 
flector having a solid projection below adapt- tially as shown and described. 
ed to fit in a socket in such oil chamber and 
washers adapted to fit over such projection hand this 28th day of July, 1892. 
to render such deflector vertically adjustable, 
and a Wall of the burner surrounding such 
deflector. 
2. An oil burner, consisting of an oil cham 
ber, an air chamber surrounding and extend 
ing higher than the same, suitable openings 
in the inner wall of such air chamber for the 
admission of air into the oil chamber, a Ver 
tically adjustable deflector supported above 
such burner, and a wall surrounding such de 
flector parallel with the same, substantially 
as shown and described. 
3. An oil burner consisting of an oil cham 
ber set on a suitable base and supplied with 
oil, such oil chamber having a central exten 
sion, a socket in such extension, washers 
adapted to build up such extension, an all 
chamber surrounding such oil chamber and 
extending higher than the same, a series of 
flanges extending downward from the over 
hanging top of such air chamber to the wall 
of the oil chamber, such flanges separated for 
the admission of air to the oil chamber, an 
inverted bell-shaped deflector with a solid pro 
jecting base adapted to fit in the socket in 
the extension in the oil chamber, and a wall 
surrounding such deflector extending nearly 
as high as the same, parallel with and at a 
suitable distance from such deflector, substan 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
H. D. NEALY, 
E. B. GRIFFITH. 
Witnesses: 
... 
. 
HENRY STACEY. 
35 
45 
55 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US509931.txt	(No Model.) 
 
R. MOR GENEIER, 
DUPLICATING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet . 
Patented Dec. 5, 1893, 
//azeyazz -F 
s 
s 
Sheets-Sheet 2. 
R. MOR GENEIER, 
DUPLICATING MACHINE, 
Patented Dec. 5, 1893, 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,931, 
 
 
 
 
III.g. .. 
fi'i 
2 associeties 
stases 
  
 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,931 
R. MOR GENEIER. 
DUPLICATING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 5, 1893, 
 
(i. 
 
 
') 
Na 
S27,222.77. 
y 
KX 
Rese NEA of 
333333 g -- ISS3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
-74/ZA 
Z26eeses, 
tead-21 
 
 
 
ths NATONAL Litocra-mg company. 
wAS-INGTON to. c. 
R. MOR GENEIER, 
DUPLICATING MACHINE, 
Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Dec. 5, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,931, 
Z 
71/2Zvesses, 
Z/voazza, 
THE NATIONAL LTHGRAPHNo comPANY., 
WASKENGTON, D., c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,93l. 
R. MOR GENEIER, 
DUPLICATING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Dec. 5, 1893. 
is ssN-772 se 
.ifs, N S3 
 
23 
 
 
 
 
2 
N 
W. N. L. F. 
EN 
asses 
6 % 7 57 
- 
H 2. 
is S 
E. 
S 
22 
EE 
321EE 
D ESN 
N 
N 
N E N 
N E. N 
IIH N E N 
N E N 
s2. 
H. N NS 
I 
SWII) en 
--- 
M-mor vu 
m ----- 
Mzeeses, 
The NATIONAL LITHoaraPHing company. 
wASHINGron, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,931. 
R. MOR GENEIER, 
DUPLICATING MACHINE. 
7 sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Dec. 5, 1893. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
F 
 
 
. 
  
. . . . 
. 
. ...i.ac. 
 
E. 
. 
 
r 
-. 
1 
1. 
t 
Yl 
R. MORGENEIER. 
IDUPLICATING MACHINE, 
7 sheets-Sheet 7. 
Patented Deo. 5, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 509,931. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT MORGENEIER, OF WIN ONA, MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR TO THE AMERI 
CAN CARVING AND MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
DUPLICATING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 509,931, dated December 5, 1898. 
Application filed Novemberll, 1892, Serial No,451,665, (No model.) 
2d le. 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ROBERT MORGENEIER, 
of Winona, Minnesota, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Duplicating 
5 Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
a machine by means of which the most elab 
orate and artistic carvings and sculpturings, 
Io as well as any concrete object, may be auto 
matically reproduced or duplicated; or, as in 
case of a carved or sculptured design, such 
design may, in the duplicate thereof, be cut 
deeper or shallower than the original, as may 
I5 be desired; the model, and a single operation 
of the machine, being sufficient to reproduce 
an exact duplicate, or a deeper or shallower 
one. The patterns employed may be of any 
material capable of sustaining a slight press 
The duplicating machine comprises a main 
frame, a reciprocating table, a series of recip 
rocal and independently gyratory guide fin 
gers, a projecting and retracting mechanism 
25 arranged in connection with said guide fin 
gers; a series of revoluble and reciprocal cut 
ters arranged in connection with the guide 
fingers; a means for reciprocating the table; 
a means for revolving the cutters; means for 
3o permitting an independently gyratory and re 
tractive motion in the guide fingers; holders 
for the pattern and material in which the 
pattern is to be reproduced in its normal, 
greater, or less depth, and a means for im 
35 parting a corresponding movement to the pat 
tern and material, such movement being prac 
tically universal. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of my improved duplicating ma 
4o chine, the two top clamping pieces of the ver 
tical standards being removed. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation of the machine with parts 
broken away in order to more clearly exhibit 
the pattern. Fig. 3 is an elevation of the ma 
45 chine from the opposite side to that shown in 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a front view. Fig. 5 is a 
plan view, partly in section, of the cutter and 
guide finger mechanism. Figs, 6 and 7 are 
enlarged detail views of the belt shifting 
5o mechanism, and Fig. 8 is a sectional detail 
view of the guide finger holder. Fig. 8* is a 
 
s 
o 
In the drawings, A represents the main 55 
perspective view showing means for manually 
adjusting the pattern and material or pattern 
holders vertically. 
frame of the machine which serves to carry 
the various shafts and gears, the sliding table 
and the cutter and guide finger mechanisms 
necessarily employed in the construction of 
my machine. The main shaft of the inachine 6o 
is shown at 1. On one end of this shaft are 
mounted the loose pulley 2 and the two driv 
ing pulley's 3, 4. A straight belt and a quar 
ter-turn belt run alternately, first on the loose 
pulley 2 and driver 4, and then on driver 3 65 
and loose pulley 2, such alternation, continu 
ing during the operation of the machine. In 
organizing the machine in its present form 
the pulleys 2, 3 and 4 are each fourteen inches 
in diameter. 
In proper position on shaft 1 is mounted 
the four inch gear 5, meshing with the twenty 
four inch gear 6, mounted on shaft 7. On 
shaft 7 is also rigidly mounted the four inch 
gear 8, meshing with the thirteen inch gear 9 75 
on shaft 10. On shaft 10 is mounted the four 
inch gear 11 meshing with the ten inch gear 
12 mounted on shaft 13. Gear 12 engages the 
teeth of the rack 14 formed within the sliding 
table lib. 
From the above described construction it 
will be seen that if the shaft 1 be driven at 
the rate of one hundred and fifty revolutions 
per minute, the four inch gear thereon will 
revolve the twenty-four inch gear, 6, twenty- 85 
five times per minute; the four inch gear 8 on 
the same shaft with gear 6 will revolve the 
gear 9 on shaft 10, seven and seven tenths 
times per minute; the gear 11, also on shaft 
10, will revolve gear 12, on shaft 13, three times go 
per minute, and gear 12 engaged with the rack 
14 on table 15, Will cause such table to advance 
at the rate of ninety-six inches per minute, 
approximately; and when as beforestated, the 
shaft 1 is caused to alternate in the direction 95 
of its revolution, because of the arrangement 
of the loose pulley 2 and drivers 3 and 4 and 
straight and quarter turn belts working on 
the one or the other of the drivers and on the 
loose pulley, then the table 15 will reciprocate roc 
at the rate of speed mentioned, i.e., ninety 
six inches per minute approximately. Thus 
509,931 
o 
75 
the object of the train of gears described is 
to transmit the power required to reciprocate 
table 15 continually during the operation of 
the machine. 
Bolted against the side of the main frame 
A, at B, is the belt shifting device, consisting 
of the ways 16, in which is held and slides the 
piece 17. Formed in the sliding piece 17 is 
the flattened U-shaped slot 18, best shown in 
Fig. 1 and Fig. 7. On one end and on the up 
per surface of piece 17 is formed the lug 19 
which is straddled by the lever 20. 21 and 22 
are bell crank shifting levers pivoted at their 
angles and the inner ends of these levers over 
hang the sliding piece 17 and are provided 
with studs projecting downward into the slot 
18. The outer or longer arms of the levers 21 
and 22 have studs which upwardly project 
into the transverse slots 23 in the blocks 24. 
Blocks 24 slide on the rods 25 and 26 and 
have formed on their lower sides projecting 
prongs or fingers 27, 27 which reaching down 
ward straddle the belts carried over the pull 
leys 2 and 3 when the table is advancing in 
one direction and 2 and 4 when retreating. 
Upon the lower left hand side of table 15 
is formed or secured the T-rail 28. Adjust 
ably mounted on the rail 28 are the two 
strikers 29 and 30. The striker 29 is so 
shaped that when coming in contact with the 
rocking lever 20, it will strike it at a point 
above the center of the shaft upon which it 
is mounted. Striker 30 on the other hand 
will strike such lever in opposition and be 
low the center of the shaft upon which it is 
held. From the construction above described 
it will be seen that if strikers 29 and 30 are 
securely clamped at any desired point upon 
rail 28 and the table is then caused to move 
either forward or backward, one or the other 
of the strikers will encounter the lever 20. 
The momentum of the table exerted upon 
such lever will cause it to swing on its shaft 
and acting on lug 19 formed on piece 17 cause 
such piece to slide in the ways 16; when the 
piece 17 is moved the levers 21, 22 will swing 
upon their pivots. The upward projecting 
studs of the levers moving in the slots 23 of 
the sliding blocks 24, will cause such blocks 
to slide upon the rods 25, 26 and, as the 
prongs of blocks 24 straddle the belt running 
over the loose pulley 2 and the belt on one of 
the drivers of shaft 1, these belts will be 
shifted. One of these belts being straight 
and the other crossed, the strikers 29 and 30 
acting upon the lever 20 causes the recipro 
cating motion of the table 15. 
If the strikers 
are brought toward each other the reciproca 
tive motion of the table 15 will be shorter and 
if clamped at the extreme ends of rail 28 the 
greatest distance of reciprocation is secured. 
On the top of the reciprocating table 5 are 
formed the four in Wardly beveled ways a, a, 
a, ain which slide the bases of the four stand 
ards 31, 32, 33 and 34. Standards 31 and 32 
are rigidly connected by the frame piece 35 
and the standards 33 and 34 are similarly 
connected. These standards, so connected, 
constitute frames which are vertical, parallel 
and face each other and which are adjustable 
to and from each other along the ways a. The 
frame upon the left side of the table carries a 
pattern holder 36, which is vertically adjust 
able on and also vertically movable with the 
X-shaped bars 37, one section of which holds 
said frame and the other section slides verti 
cally in V-shaped grooves in said standards. 
The bars 37 are clamped to the holder by means 
of the bolts 37, and the vertical reciproca 
t of the holder are effected through said 
The holder is also manually adjust 
3.S. 
able on the bars 37 in order to enable the re 
production of a pattern wider than the range 
or cut of the machine. This manual adjust 
ment is effected by means of the adjusting 
screw 37 (Fig. S), which screw turns in a 
fixed nut 37 on frame piece 35. On loosen 
ing the clamping bolts 37 the latter may be 
raised or lowered to bring a new portion of 
the pattern or material within range of the 
guide fingers and cutters respectively, where 
upon the clamping bolts are again tightened. 
In this adjustment the point of the screw acts 
upon a fixed lug 37 on the holder but after 
the adjustment is effected the point of the 
screw is moved out of contact with the lug to 
a suitable distance to permit the automatic 
vertical movements of the holder, which will 
now be described. The vertical sliding bars 
37 rest with their pointed lower ends upon the 
peripheries of the heart shaped cams 38, to 
the end that when such cams are rotated the 
holders will reciprocate vertically. Cams 38 
are mounted on the shafts 39, and immedi 
ately back of such cams, are mounted the 
worm wheels 40, which are engaged by the 
Worm screws 4, mounted on the shaft 42, said 
shafts revolving in boxes and the rotation of 
the cams 38 being due to the rotation of these 
shafts. On shaft 42 is mounted the miter 
wheel 45, meshing with the miter 46 which 
has a spline pin in its hub and the grooved 
shaft 47 slides through such hub, the pin 
thereof sliding in the groove of the shaft. In 
order that miter 46 may maintain its position 
in relation to miter 45, and still slide over the 
grooved shaft 47 and during or after such 
sliding, still properly revolve shaft 47 and by 
such rotation communicate notion to the de 
vices on both right and left standards, the 
shaft is provided with boxes 48, 48, each rig 
idly projecting, one from the left and the 
other from the right standard as shown. The 
vertical frame upon the right side of table 15 
is for the purpose of properly holding the ma 
terial to be operated upon, and is in all details 
an exact counterpart of the left side device 
just described, with the exception of a ratchet 
Wheel 54 and pawl 55, held on shaft 42, on the 
right side vertical frame (Fig. 1) and which is 
not necessary on the left side vertical frame. 
On the under sides of the bases of each of 
the vertical frames are formed the racks b, b, 
b,b, the teeth of which project downward. 
95 
CO 
Io5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
O 
2O. 
25 
35 
45 
 
- 509,931 
These teeth are engaged by the pinions c, c, 
c, c mounted on the shafts 49 and 50. Shafts 
49 and 50, which are held in boxes formed on 
the side of the reciprocating table 15, carry 
on their forward ends the hand wheels 51, 52. 
When it is found desirable to change the dis 
tance between the faces of the pattern and 
material holders, this can be quickly done by 
loosening the binding screws 53, (Figs. 3 and 
4) then loosening the binding bolts in slides 
C, a, C, a, and turning the hand wheels 51, 52 
in the proper direction. As heretofore men 
tioned, the right hand side vertical frame has 
upon its shaft 42 the ratchet wheel 54, flanked 
and overhung by the ratchet pawl 55, which 
ratchet pawl swings on shaft 42, and the teeth 
thereof engage the teeth of said ratchet-wheel. 
The pawl, as shown, is composed of two pieces. 
The upper one swinging on shaft 42, has lips 
or lugs on both sides. The lower piece fits 
snugly between such lugs and can slide there 
in. This lower piece has formed upon its 
lower extremity two lugs which straddle a 
canting bar 56 and ride on such canting bar, 
when the reciprocations of table 15 carries 
the ratchet pawl, of which it forms a part, 
forward or backward. The canting bar 56 is 
stiffly held by its journaled ends in boxes 57, 
58. At a point on its lower edge is formed 
the downward projecting lug 59, the outer 
face of which carries a rounded shoulder 60, 
(Figs. 1 and 4.) Inclosing the two flat sides. 
of lug 59 is the swinging bifurcated lever 
61, having on its inner side the rounded shoul 
der 62. Lever 61 is rigidly mounted on shaft 
63, which shaft as heretofore mentioned, has 
mounted upon its opposite end the lever 20, 
which lever 20 is set in motion by the strikers 
29, 30, when table 15 reciprocates, 
From the above described construction it 
will be seen that if the table 15, with the de 
vices thereon, is moved forward longitudi 
nally, it will so advance until the striker 29 
encounters the lever 20, causing such lever to 
swing. In swinging the lever 20 will cause 
the shifting device to act whereupon the mo 
tion of the table will be reversed and con 
tinue such reversed motion until the striker 
30 again reverses that motion by means of the 
lever 20. Immediately the first motion of le 
ver 20 sets in, the lever 61 on the same shaft 
is also set in motion and its rounded shoul 
der 62 encounters the shoulder 60 on lug 
59, forcing such shoulder backward, thereby 
canting the bar outwardly. Having canted 
such bar the lever 61 swings an additional 
distance sufficient to clear its lug from the 
canting bar lug, whereupon the Canting bar 
will fall into its first position. The return 
swing of straddle lever 61 will again cant the 
bar and allow it to fall, and this canting out 
wardly and inwardly will take place at the 
moment when the reversal of the sliding mo 
tion of table 15 is in process. 
As heretofore stated, the lower end of 
ratchet pawl 55 rides forward and backward 
over canting bar 56. Its lugs closely fit the 
9o 
95 
sides of said bar. Consequently when such 
bar is canted the upper end of the lower sec 
tion of the pawl will be thrown outwardly in to 
an arc, thereby elevating the upper section 
of the pawl in the manner as shown in Fig. 
The teeth of pawl 55 having previously 
4. 
engaged the teeth of ratchet wheel 54, the 
pawl will cause such wheel to rotate. Hav 
ing reached its highest elevation the canting 75 
bar allows the pawl to drop into its first posi 
tion and again engage upon the wheel; and 
thus during the termination of every recipro 
cation of fable 15, rotate the shaft 42. This 
rotation is communicated by the mechanism 
shown and heretofore described to all four of 
the heart shaped cams 38, which in turn si 
multaneously and equally raise the pattern 
and the material holders resting upon them 
step by step at the termination of each re 
ciprocating motion of the table 15 carrying 
them. After thus intermittently elevating 
such holders to the height of one and one-half 
inches, the rotations continuing, said cams 
will step by step lower the holders to their 
starting point. 
Upon the driving pulley 64 I mount the 
long belt 65 which extends upward and passes 
over a driving pulley 66 mounted in bearings 
on the top of auxiliary frame D which aux 
iliary frame is formed upon and projects up 
ward from within the main frame A. In its 
upward passage the belt 65 passes between 
the peripheral faces of a series of spindle roll 
ers 67, (such rollers being one and fifteen 
thirty-seconds inches in diameter and held 
one and one-half inches from center to cen 
ter) and a series of pressure rollers 68, of the 
same diameter and Same distance between 
centers and the centers of Such spindle and 
pressure rollers being on the same horizontal 
plane. The Several constructions are such 
that when the shaft 69, upon which the pull 
ley 64 is mounted, is driven by the belt on the 
driving pulley 100 (also mounted on shaft 69) 
at the rate of six hundred and twenty-five 
revolutions per minute, the spindles 70 in the 
rollers 67 will revolve at the rate of five thou 
sand revolutions per minute. The said press 
ure rollers are carried in separate bearings 
and held together in a housing and each is 
adjustable as to the Space allowed to the said 
belt 65; thus the pressure exerted on each 
spindle roller can be accurately adjusted by 
the particular pressure roller placed longi 
tudinally opposite it. Passing through the 
series of rollers 67 are the cutter spindles 71, 
reciprocal therein, yet compelled to revolve 
with the rollers because of a pin in said 
rollers which slides in a groove formed in 
the spindles. At One end each spindle car 
ries the chuck head 72 (Figs. 1 and 4) which 
firmly holds a cutting tool. At the other end 
spindle 71 has two rigid collars 73, 74. Held 
between these is the lipped collar 75. Fitting 
snugly between the lips of said collar and 
engaged by a bolt is the lever 76. Said lever 
has slotted ends and bolts in the lips engage 
oc 
ro5 
O 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
 
4. 
509,981 
O 
25 
the slots and serve as points of leverage. Le 
due to belt 65 running over pulley 66, the 
ver 76 is pivoted on the pivoted arm 77. To 
shaft of which pulley is connected by gear 
the arm 77 is pivoted an adjusting mechan 
with the gearing of the rollers as -shown. 
ism composed of the rod 78, the end of which 
When traction contact is established between 
5 is threaded and carries the thumb nut 82. 
said rollers and tubes the rollers yill draw 
Upon the rod is the collar 79, spiral spring 
the spindle tube, chuck and guide fingerform 
80, tightly compressed and held between the 
ing part thereof backward against the pro 
jecting pressure of spiral spring 90 and this 
collar 79 and a rigid lug 81 formed upon a 
part of the auxiliary frame D. The purpose 
backward motion will be more or less rapid, 
of this mechanism is to shift the position of 
depending upon the extent and direction of 
pressure upon the side of guide finger. The 
the pivotal center of lever 76 when such shift 
ing is desirable or necessary, the purpose of 
function of the guide finger is to indicate, 
and in conjunction with the pattern em 
which will be hereinafter described. The 
end of lever 76, opposite to that end held be 
ployed, to control the depth to which the par 
tween the lips of collar 75, is held in the same 
ticular cutter connected there with, shall cut 
manner by a similarly lipped collar 83. Col 
into the material worked upon. Its gyrata 
lar 83 passes around guide finger tube S4 and 
bility, whereby backward motions may be 
is held thereon with the rigid collar 85 and 
effected, constitutes it a sensitive guide fin 
finger chuck 86. The shank of chuck 86 is 
ger in contradistinction to a rigid point or 
tubular, is threaded on the outside and is 
finger which might be drawn or lifted over 
firmly screwed into the guide finger tube 84, 
the inequalities of a pattern by hand, or 
and forms a part thereof. The tubular shank 
which if beveled sufficiently might be auto 
matically drawn over an undulating surface. 
of chuck 86 provides a socket of sufficient 
length to support the end of a steel rod when 
The construction and application of a sen 
sitive guide finger, i.e. a finger so constructed 
the tube carrying the chuck is either advanced 
that slight pressure brought to bear upon its 
or retracted. The series of guide finger tubes 
is held in flexible sleeves 87, which I prefer 
point or side of its rounded end would actuate 
to make of soft cast rubber. They are placed 
mechanism which in turn would control the 
distance of reciprocation of such a finger in 
in a vertical row as shown, and one and one 
half inches from center to center. Within 
itself, and of a cutter connected there with, are 
the guide finger tube 84 is the compressed 
disclosed and claimed in Patent No. 456,423, 
spiral spring 90, carried on the rod SS, which 
issued to myself and J. P. Bergeron July 21, 
rod forms a part of the adjusting bolt 89 and 
1891. These capabilities in a guide finger are 
its forward end passes freely into the chuck 
due to a construction whereby the finger is sus 
35 headshank. By means of the adjusting bolt 
ceptible to pressure exerted against its point; 
89, the compression of the spring 90, which 
and when such pressure is exerted the finger 
is seated at one end against the inner end of 
will move slightly backward; and when such 
the chuckshank and at its other end in a socket 
motion ensues it actuates mechanism which 
in adjusting bolt, is regulated, and the guide 
in turn changes the direction in which such 
finger tube projected and held forward as de 
finger and its particular cutter may have 
sired. From the above description it will be 
moved immediately preceding the moment of 
activity of such finger; and during the oper 
seen that the finger tube, chuck, and finger 
held in the chuck, form one rigidly joined 
ation of the machine the distance of recipro 
piece, and that such piece is projected and held 
cation of the cutters is under the constant 
forward by the spiral spring within the tube, in 
control of said fingers, while I have in the 
the manner described. On each side Uf the 
invention herein described enhanced the ca 
guidefinger tube or spindle are adjusted the re 
pacity of the machine described in said pat 
volving traction rolls 91, 92,93, and 94. These 
ent, as well as the quality of work accom 
rolls are preferably made of hard wood or 
plished by it, by a construction wherein the 
sensitiveness of the guide fingers employed 
rawhide, with a core, the ends of which form 
journal bearings and are grooved in a man 
is due to the gyratability of such fingers. 
ner that allows of a complete encircling of 
The fingers thus constructed may when press 
tube spindle 84 at two places thereon by the 
ing upon a plane surface of any pattern be 
come entirely disengaged from the recipro 
two sets of rollers. The adjustment is such 
cating mechanism, thereby allowing the cut 
that the surfaces of the rollers and tubes are 
almost in contact yet sufficiently distant to 
ters to work better and smoother; and when 
permit of a slight gyratory motion of the 
such finger is encountered by a slight incline 
guide finger tube when pressure is brought 
its partial gyration causes the tube, forming 
to bear upon the side of the finger held there 
part thereof, to attach itself to the recipro 
in, to the end that such partial gyration may 
cating mechanism with sufficient force to al 
low the finger to rise agreeably to such in 
establish traction contact. When no press 
ure is exerted upon the side of the guide fin 
cline, and with almost insensible reciproca 
ger the speed of the four rollers will not af 
tions, the cutter controlled by the finger ris 
fect the tube spindle. The four traction roll 
ing in the same manner and constantly cut 
ting, the slightness of reciprocation permit 
ers are geared in such a manner that they all 
ting it to cut very smoothly. Finally when a 
revolve inwardly in a direction from the head 
of the spindle, the motion of such gear being rectangular projection presses against the 
55 
45 
7 o 
75 
95 
Od 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
509,981 
75 
go 
95 
too 
II5 
I 25 
o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
side of the finger its partial gyrative motion 
will establish an immediate and firm traction 
contact With the reciprocating mechanism 
Surrounding the finger tube whereby such 
finger and its cutter will instantly rise to the 
full height of the rectangular mass encoun 
tered. Thus smoothness of surface, perfect 
duplication, and greater capacity are secured. 
The essential differences between a sensi 
tive guide finger with a gyratory motion as 
herein described and a finger such as de 
3ribed in said patent may be summed up as 
follows: The latter is for the purpose of gov 
ening or controlling distances of reciproca 
tion of predetermined speed or speeds. On 
the other hand, the former is for the purpose 
of initiating, effecting and continuing every 
Variation of distance and of speed in its own 
reciprocation, or should the emergency arise 
cease all reciprocation and remain extended 
to the distance allowed of by the pattern em 
ployed. 
The movements in a machine constructed 
as described are as follows: First-the pro 
jection of a guide finger and a cutting tool 
toward a pattern and a workable material. 
Second, the movement of a pattern toward 
a guide finger until the point thereof rests 
upon the surface of the deepest depression 
therein. Third-the movement of material 
toward a cutter until enough material is ad 
Vanced into the way of travel of cutter to in 
sure a duplication of the highest parts of a 
pattern set in opposition thereto. Fourth 
a clamping of a pattern and material in such 
positions. 
Fifth, -the rotation of a cutter 
or gutters. Sixth, -a longitudinal reciproca 
tion of the pattern and material. Seventh 
an intermittent vertical movement of the 
Same. Eighth, an undulating reciprocation 
of a cutter or cutters and a finger or fingers 
When an undulating surface of a pattern is 
traversed by a guide finger or guide fingers. 
Ninth, -a complete cessation of vertical mo 
tion. When a guide finger or fingers travel 
Over a level plane in a pattern. Tenth-a, 
partial gyration of a guide finger or guide 
fingers when encountering a more or less ab 
ruptly ascending surface in a pattern followed 
by a more or less pronounced reciprocation 
of such finger or fingers. Eleventh, a quick 
partial gyration when a guide finger or guide 
fingers encounter an abrupt projection at an 
angle with the line of travel of such finger or 
fingers, and following thereon a speedy re 
ciprocation continued until such obstruction 
is passed over. Twelfth, -a transverse re 
ceding motion of a guide finger or fingers 
when encountering a rectangular projection 
squarely in the path of travel, followed by an 
instantaneous retraction or reciprocation of 
said finger or fingers. Thirteenth, -a cor 
respondingly greater reciprocation and un 
dulatory movement of a guide finger or guide 
fingers, than of the cutter or cutters connected 
there With, due to a previous adjustment for 
such particular effect. Fourteenth, -a cor 
respondingly greater reciprocation or undu 
latory movement of a cutter or cutters, also 
due to a previous adjustment for such par 
ticular effect. The second, third, and fourth 
motions are effected by hand in order to bring 
patterns and material in proper position be 
fore starting up the machine; all the other 
motions are automatic and due to the power 
transnitted by the belts and gears. Fif 
teenth, -a, manual adjustment of the pattern 
and material holders vertically when it is de 
sired to reproduce a pattern wider than the 
cut of the machine. 
For the purpose of carving or duplicating 
a panel one foot wide, six feet long and one 
inch deep, the adjustment and operation of 
the machine areas follows: From a powershaft 
arranged to turn at the proper speed, I pass 
a straight belt over the driver 4 on shaft 1, 
and a quarter turn or cross belt from the same 
shaft over the loose pulley 2 on shaft 1. 
I 
then run back the table 15 until the holders 
thereon have passed beyond the vertical se 
ries of guide fingers. I turn one of the shafts 
42 until the heart shaped cams 38 stand with 
their points upward, thereby bringing the 
panel and material holders to their highest 
altitude. I then fasten on the face of each 
of the holders a piece of smooth planed board 
in the same altitude with cutters and guide 
fingers and upon these boards I test the ma 
chine after adjustment. I now fasten in each 
of the guide tube heads by means of the fric 
tion collars 86 a guide finger. For work of 
the kind contemplated, such guide fingers are 
one and one fourth inches in length, one-half 
inch in diameter and taper to one-sixteenth 
of an inch at the point. The point as well as 
the entire tapered finger is round, Smoothly . 
polished, and preferably of hardened steel. 
In the heads of the cutter spindles are fas 
tened, by means of friction collars 72, the cut 
ters. These cutters are in shape counterparts 
of the guide fingers, but have a cutting edge 
formed on their entire length and the points 
are formed after the manner of a rounded 
spoon bit. These cutters and guide fingers 
are shown as a part of Fig. 5. I now set the 
belt 65 in motion whereby the traction rollers 
91.92, 93, and 94 are revolved. I then bring 
forward the pressure rolls 68, one by one, un 
tilisuch belt is held against the peripheral faces 
of the entire series of spindle rolls 67, where-, 
upon the rolls and the spindies therein will re 
volve at proper speed. I then turn the table 
15 forward until the testing boards on hold 
ers stand opposite the guide fingers and cut 
ters. Having loosened the binding screws 53, 
Inow bring forward the faces of testing boards 
by turning the hand wheels 51 and 52, con 
tinuing such forward motion until one or all 
of the guide fingers and one or all of the cut 
ter points just touch such boards. If, because 
of an irregular length some of the cutters or 
fingers should not touch, I then turn the thumb 
nuts forming part of the adjusting mechan 
ism of such particular cutter or guide finger, 
55 
 
509,931 
o 
95 
OC 
O 
II5 
I 25 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
whereby the same will immediately be brought 
into line. I now remove the testing boards 
and put in their stead the pattern and the 
material; run back the sliding table and ad 
vance the pattern and the material as far as 
the depth of cut to be effected. I then firmly 
clamp the vertical standards and also the 
strikers 29 and 30 in their proper positions, 
which for a pattern of the size contemplated 
would be at the ends of the rail 28. Thus ar 
ranged the adjustments are completed and 
the machine can be set in motion. The table 
15 now reciprocates the length of the pattern; 
the guide points press upon and travel in a 
straight line over the same, the revolving cut 
ters each cut a groove in the material. In 
this first travel of the table the guide fingers, 
chuck and tube will rise and fall as they pass 
Over the undulations, and the cutters because 
of their connections through lever 76 will rise 
and fall in corresponding undulations. If, 
instead of undulating surfaces the fingers en 
counter more abrupt projections, a slight side 
pressure will be exercised on such fingers and 
a slight or partial gyration of the fingers, 
chuck and tube will occur which will be per 
mitted by the flexible boxes 87 holding the 
guide tubes. The gyration will press and hold 
the guide finger tube in partial traction con 
tact with the revolving rollers 91, 92, 93 and 
94, and these Will immediately assist in draw 
ing the finger or fingers backward, thus caus 
ing them to ascend the surface of the pattern, 
the cutter or cutters connected to such finger 
or fingers rising and falling correspondingly. 
Should the fingers in this first travel encoun 
ter rectangular projections in the pattern the 
effect of gyration and consequent binding on 
traction rolls will be immediate and positive 
and the finger or fingers so encountered will 
be instantly withdrawn to the highest point 
of such projection, the cutter or cutters there 
of describing the same movement. Finally 
should a finger or fingers travel upon a plane 
surface there Will be none of the movements 
just described, the adjustable spring 90 pro 
jecting the fingeror fingers continually against 
Such plane Surface and the cutter or cutters 
will cut to a uniform depth. At the termi 
ination of the first movement of the table just 
described, the four cams 38 will be slightly 
rotated by the pawl 54, allowing the pattern 
and material holders to descend one sixty 
fourth of an inch, more or less as may be de 
sired, thus presenting a new profile for the 
guide fingers to travel upon and cutters to re 
produce. The table now reciprocates and the 
movement offingers and cutters just described 
is repeated. Thus line after line is cut, each 
cut overlapping the preceding cuts repeatedly 
as the diameter of the points of cutters are 
greater than the width of the quantity of mate 
rial removed. All parts of the face of the pat 
tern will in regular order be brought in con 
tact with the ends or sides of guide fingers, 
and the cutters reproduce all its features. 
When the cams 38 have made a one-half ro 
tation the holders will have been lowered to 
a distance that will permit each guide finger 
and cutter to pass over the first line of travel 
of the finger or cutter next adjacent thereto 
when the duplicate is finished, and requires 
even in the most artistic work only a little 
surface finishing and retouching. After the 
first adjustment the work of the attendant 
consists in keeping the machine supplied With 
sharp cutters, and with material to be oper 
ated upon. He may attend to a number of 
the machines. At the speed herein specified, 
the maximum capacity of the machine is 
sixty square feet of artistic carving or sculp 
turing per working day of ten hours. If a 
deeper and bolder duplicate is to be produced 
from a shallow cut pattern, which is often 
desirable, as shallow patterns can be more 
cheaply made, it is only necessary to lengthen 
the distance from the central pivot of lever 
76 to the pivot in the lipped collar on guide 
finger tube 84 by turning the thumb nuts 82 
to the left, or if for any reason a shallower 
duplicate is desired, the thumb nuts are to 
be turned to the right. After adjusting for 
any particular depth of cut, the fingers and 
cutters are brought up to line on the testing 
boards in the manner hereinbefore described. 
If a pattern he wider than the cut of the ma 
chine the pattern and material holders may 
be raised or lowered so as to bring the Sur 
faces not previously acted upon within the 
operative range of the machine, and a proper 
joining of the cut surfaces may thus beef 
fected. 
In the preceding description the term trav 
eling of guide fingers has been employed 
for sake of brevity. It should however be 
understood that the guide fingers and cutters 
reciprocate from a rigidly fixed frame, the 
traveling motion being confined to the pat 
tern and the material. 
claim 
1. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with pattern and material holdiers ar 
ranged parallel to and facing each other, of 
cutting and guidiug mechanisms operating 
conjointly there with, means for automatically 
moving said pattern and material holders 
longitudinally and vertically, whereby to pro 
gressively present the surfaces of the pattern 
and material to the guiding and cutting mech 
anism and said pattern and material holders 
being also manually adjustable in a plane 
transverse to the line of movement of the cut 
ting and guiding mechanisms whereby to pre 
sent new or additional surfaces of the same 
pattern and material to the action of the cut 
ting and guiding mechanisms, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with longitudinally and vertically recip 
rocating pattern and material holders ar 
ranged parallel to and facing each other and 
adjustable to and from each other of cutting 
and guiding mechanism operating conjointly 
there with, said pattern and material holders 
55 
 
509,931 
being also adjustable in relation to said cut 
ting and guiding mechanism, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a revoluble and reciprocal cutter, of 
a reciprocal and gyratory guide finger, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with longitudinally and vertically re 
ciprocating and variably adjustable material 
and pattern holders, of a series of revoluble 
and reciprocal cutters and reciprocal and in 
dependentlygyratory guide fingers, connected 
with the cutters, substantially as described. 
5. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a revoluble and reciprocal cutter, 
of a reciprocal and independently gyratory 
guide finger and a pivoted adjustable lever 
forming a connection between said cutter and 
finger, Substantially as described. 
6. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a series of revoluble and reciprocal 
Cutters, of a Series of reciprocal and inde 
pendentlygyratory guide fingers and pivoted 
adjustable levers connecting the cutters and 
fingers, substantially as described. 
7. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion. With Cutters and guide fingers connected 
by pivoted adjustable levers of mechanism 
for adjusting said levers whereby to change 
the leverage upon said cutters and fingers, 
Substantially as described. 
8. A duplicating machine having an inde 
pendently gyratory and reciprocal series of 
guide fingers and a series of revoluble cut 
ters connected there with and controlled there 
by, substantially as described. 
9. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a series of revoluble and reciprocal 
cutter spindles of rollers through which such 
spindles may slide and be revolved thereby, 
a series of pressure rollers arranged opposite 
thereof and a driving belt held by the press 
ure rollers in driving contact with the spin 
dle rollers, substantially as described. 
10. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with revoluble and reciprocalcutter spin 
dles, of reciprocal guide fingers, tubes form 
ing part of such fingers, lipped collars on the 
cutter spindles and finger tubes, and levers 
having slot and pin connections with said 
collars, substantially as described. 
ll. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with cutter spindles and guide finger 
tubes, of lipped collars having pins, a lever 
slotted at its ends and fitting between the 
lips on said collars and the pins of said lips 
engaging the slots of said lever and provid 
ing points of leverage, substantially as de 
scribed. 
12. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with cutter spindles and guide finger 
tubes, of lipped collars held thereon, connect 
ing levers movably held between such lips 
and arms whereon such levers are pivoted, 
substantially as described. 
13. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with cutter spindles and guide finger 
tubes, of connecting levers between said spin 
dles and tubes, arms to which said levers are 
pivoted, said arms being also pivoted and ad 
justing rods pivoted to said arms, substan 
tially as described. 
14. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with cutter spindles and guide finger 
tubes, of pivoted levers connecting said spin 
dles and tubes, arms to which said levers are 
pivoted, rods pivoted to such arms, collars on 
said rods, spiral springs having a bearing on 
the collars and adjusting nuts, substantially 
as described. 
15. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a cutter, of a guide finger connected 
there with and adapted to control the move 
ments thereof, and a spring arranged in Con 
nection there with and adapted to constantly 
project said guide finger and thereby the cut 
ter, substantially as described. 
16. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a cutter, of a guide finger connect 
ed therewith and adapted to control the pro 
jection thereof into contact with the work, a 
spring arranged in connection with the guide 
finger to constantly project the latter, and 
means for adjusting the pressure of said 
spring, substantially as described. 
17. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a reciprocating and rotating cutter, 
of a reciprocating guide finger connected 
therewith and adapted to control the move 
ments thereof, and a spring arranged in con 
nection with the guide finger to constantly 
project said finger, means for adjusting the 
tension of said spring and means for retracting 
the guide finger, substantially as described. 
18. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a reciprocating and rotating cutter, 
of a reciprocating guide finger connected 
therewith and adapted to control the move 
ments thereof, a spring arranged in connec 
tion with the guide finger and adapted to con 
stantly project the same, and flexible bear 
ings for said guide finger whereby it is per 
mitted a gyrating motion, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
19. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a guide finger and tube to which 
Said finger is connected, a spiral spring ar 
ranged in said tube and having a bearing 
thereon and a rod passing through the axis 
of the spring and having a sliding bearing 
in the tube, said rod being adjustable where 
by to tension the spring, substantially as de 
scribed. 
20. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with gyratory guide fingers, of flexible 
bearings for said fingers, springs for project 
ing the guide filugers and traction rolls for 
drawing back such fingers after the gyratory 
motion sets in, substantially as described. 
21. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a reciprocating carriage for the pat 
tern and material holders, of mechanism for 
reciprocating the carriage, and shifting mech 
7 o 
75 
go 
95 
IO 
d 
IT 5 
I 25 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
55 
 
509,931 
45 
So 
55 
65 
rying pattern and material holders, cams for 
moving the standards and means controlled 
by the shifting mechanism for operating said 
cams at the end of each reciprocation of the 
carriage, substantially as described. 
29. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a reciprocating carriage, of driving 
mechanism therefor, a shifting device for the 
driving mechanism, vertically movable pat 
tern and material holdiers and means Con 
trolled by the shifting mechanism for moving 
the pattern and material holders, substan 
tially as described. 
30. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a revoluble shaft, of a ratchet wheel, 
Swinging pawl, and a canting bar provided 
With projecting lug, substantially as de 
scribed. 
31. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a revoluble shaft, of a ratchet wheel, 
SWinging pawl, canting bar and lug, and a piv 
oted Swinging arm provided with a lug to en 
Counter the lug on said canting bar, substan 
tially as described. 
32. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a revoluble cam, of X-shaped bars 
bearing on said cams and grooved standards 
in which said bars slide, substantially as de 
scribed. 
33. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with revoluble cams, of X-shaped bars 
resting with one end against the peripheries 
of said cams, and a table or holdersliding upon 
such bars and adjustable thereon, substan 
tially as described. 
ROBERT MORGENEIER. 
... Witnesses: 
EDWARD LEES, 
A. H. CLARK, 
O 
anism for changing the direction of travel of 
Such carriage, substantially as described. 
22. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion of a reciprocating carriage, mechanism 
for reciprocating the same, stops for limiting 
the travel of the carriage and a pivoted cant 
ing lever for operating the shifting devices of 
Such carriage, substantially as described. 
28. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a reciprocating carriage and driv 
ing belts, a shifting mechanism for said belts, 
stops for operating said shifting mechanism, 
said stops being carried by and adjustable on 
such carriage, substantially as described. 
24. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a reciprocating carriage, of sliding 
and adjustable standards thereon carrying 
pattern and material holders and means for 
sliding and adjusting such standards, sub 
stantially as described. 
25. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with a reciprocating carriage, of adjust 
able and sliding standards, and adjustable 
clamping pieces for said standards, substan 
tially as described. 
26. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with sliding standards, carrying pattern 
and material holders, cams on which said 
standards rest and means for rotating said 
cams. Whereby to move said standards, sub 
Stantially as described. 
27. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with adjustable and sliding standards, of 
cams for moving the standards and worm gear 
ing for moving the cams, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
28. In a duplicating machine, the combina 
tion with the reciprocating carriage, of gear 
ing for moving the carriage, shifting mech 
anism for the gearing, sliding standards car 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510031.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 510,031. 
 
 
W. KUEBLER 
REVERSING MECHANISM. 
Patented Dec. 5, 1893. 
I 
Aeaeacekees 
2 % 
AS s 
2 
Sis 
Yea 
W N 
d. 
M% M%ay 
/ 7zz. &orveeves 
e -8.4. % p 
22 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIBALD KUEBLER, OF EASTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
REVERSING MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,031, dated December 5, 1893. 
Application filed Septemberll, 1893, Serial No. 485,250, (No model.) 
O 
55 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIBALD KUEBLER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Eas 
ton, in the county of Northampton and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Reversing Mech 
anism, of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide im 
proved devices for automatically reversing 
the motion of driving mechanism. 
My invention particularly relates to that 
class of machines in which a belt is employed 
to convey power to a driving shaft, and in 
which a belt shipper is used to shift the belt 
from one pulley to another to reverse the 
movement of a driving shaft. Some parts of 
the mechanism involved in my invention may, 
however, be employed to automatically re 
verse the motion of a shaft or other mechan 
ism, by operating suitable clutch mechanism. 
In carrying out my invention, I provide a 
shipping rod which may carry a belt shifter, 
or which may be connected with suitable 
clutch mechanism and to this rod I connect a 
pivoted frame which carries a rail on which 
runs a pulley, from which is suspended a 
weight. Mechanism operated by the driving 
shaft is provided for shifting the position of 
the frame, so as to cause the weight to move 
along the rail to counter-balance the frame 
and effect the movement in the desired direc 
tion of the shipping rod. 
The details of construction will be more 
fully hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, -Figure 1 
is a perspective view of my improvements ap 
plied to mechanism for automatically shift 
ing a belt from one pulley to another to re 
verse the movement of a driving shaft. Fig. 
2 is a detail view of a part of the shipping 
mechanism, showing the main working parts 
in one position. Fig. 3 is a similar view show 
ing the parts in another position. Fig. 4 is a 
detail view in section, showing the three pull 
leys employed, the gear wheel attached to one 
of the pulleys, and the manner of connecting 
the pulleys and gear wheel with the pulley 
shaft. 
Any suitable frame A, may be employed in 
Which to mount the operative parts of the ap 
paratus. The shaft B, which I call the driv 
ing shaft, is mounted in suitable bearings b 
in the frame, and carries two gear wheels C 
C', and a worm C, all of which are firmly se 
cured or keyed to the shaft. The shaft D, 
which I call the pulley shaft, is mounted in 
bearings d, and carries two gear wheels EE, 
the wheel E' being somewhat larger than the 
wheel E. The gear wheel E, meshes with the 
gear C" on the driving shaft B, while the gear 
E meshes with a gear wheel F, on a counter 
shaft F, mounted in bearings f. The shaft 
F' also carries another gear wheel E which 
meshes with the gear wheel C". The pulley 
P, is mounted loosely on the shaft D, and is 
rigidly secured to the gear wheel E'. The 
pulley P is secured to the shaft D, by a set 
screw p, or it may be secured in any other 
suitable way, and between the pulleys Pand 
P', is interposed a loose pulley P. A belt G, 
which may connect with any suitable prime 
mover, extends over the pulleys, and may be 
made to operate on either one of them. The 
belt is supposed to move at all times in the 
direction indicated by the arrow. The gear 
ing is such that when the belt surrounds the 
pulley P, which is loose on the shaft D, the 
driving shaft B, will be moved in the same 
direction, that is the direction indicated by 
arrow No. 1. When the belt surrounds the 
pulley P, motion will not be imparted to the 
mechanism, but when the belt surrounds the 
pulley P', the driving shaft will be moved in 
the direction indicated by the dotted arrow 
No. 2. 
The gear wheel C may be connected with 
any apparatus to which it is desired to impart 
movement, in reverse directions. 
I have applied my improved mechanism to 
apparatus for Washing chips employed in the 
manufacture of beer. The Worm C meshes 
with a cog H, on a shaft I, arranged at right 
angles to the driving shaft B, in bearings i. 
At one end of the shaft is a crank-arm J, pro 
vided with an armi, which is adapted to en 
95 
gage with the lower end of an arm k, on a T 
shaped frame K. The arm le projects down 
wardly from a top piece lo' having forwardly 
projecting arms k", which support a rail K, 
on which runs a pulleyl, from which a weight 
Lis suspended. The frame K, is pivoted cen 
trally at ac, to an upright lever M, pivoted at 
its lower end n to the frame, and at its upper 
end pivotally connected at m' with a linkN, 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
510,031 
IO 
which at its opposite end is pivotally con 
nected with a shipper rod O, which carries two 
parallel arms Q, through which the driving 
belt extends. The shipper rod O is provided 
with collars O, having set screws o' by which 
the movement of the rod may be regulated 
It will be clear that the belt may be shifted 
from one pulley to another by moving the 
shipper rod horizontally to the desired ex 
tent, and in the proper direction. 
I automatically effect the shipping of the 
belt by the mechanism above described, which 
operates as follows: Assuming the belt to be 
on the pulley P, and the driving shaft B to 
be turning in the direction indicated by ar 
row No. 2, the shaft I will rotate in the direc 
tion indicated by arrow No. 3, and the frame 
K, will be in the position indicated in Fig. 2. 
The continued rotation of the shaft causes 
the armi to abut against the lower inclined 
end of the arm k, of the frame K. As the 
movement continues, the arm is moved about 
its pivot to such an extent that the rail K' 
first assumes a horizontal position, and then 
is moved to assume an inclined position oppo 
site to that shown in Fig. 2. The weight will 
then by gravity ride down the rail to the op 
posite end of the frame, and then being on 
the opposite side of the lever arm M, will 
cause that lever arm to move to the left in 
the direction indicated by arrow No. 4, and 
cause the shipper rod to move in the same 
direction, thereby shifting the belt from pull 
ley P to pulley P. This pulley, being fast 
on the shaft D, will cause the shaft D, to 
move in an opposite direction. Likewise the 
shaft I, will be moved in an opposite direction 
until the crank arm?i comes against the oppo 
site side of the frame K, as indicated in dot 
ted lines in Fig. 3, when the weight-carrying 
frame will be again shifted, the weight mov 
ing to the opposite side of the frame, causing 
the shipper rod to move the belt back to pull 
ley P. In this way, a continuous motion in 
one direction of the driving belt may be 
made to communicate motion in opposite di 
rections to a driving shaft, and to any mech 
anism or machinery connected therewith. 
The mechanism herein shown and de 
scribed is simple and efficient, and shows the 
best way now known to me of carrying out 
my invention, but the details of construction 
may be varied without departing from the 
novel features of my improvements. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of a shipper rod, a 
frame pivotally connected there with, a rail 
carried by the frame, and a weight adapted 
25 
30 
40 
45 
55 
to slide on the frame to opposite sides of the 
pivotal connection. 
2. The combination of a shipper rod, a le 
ver pivotally connected there with and pivot 
ally connected with a supporting frame, a rail 
projecting in opposite directions from said 
pivotal connection, and a weight carried by 
the rail and adapted to move to opposite ends 
thereof. 
3. The combination of a pulley shaft on 
which is mounted a fast and loose pulley, a 
shipper rod carrying arms between which a 
driving belt extends, a frame pivotally con 
nected with the shipper rod, a rail carried by 
the frame and projecting in opposite direc 
tions from said pivotal connection, a weight 
Supported on the rail and adapted to move to 
opposite ends thereof, and mechanism con 
nected with the pulley shaft and adapted to 
act upon the pivoted frame to shift its posi 
tion, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the pulley shaft, fast 
and loose pulleys, mounted thereon, a driving 
shaft, gearing connecting the driving shaft 
with the pulley shaft, a crank-arm-carrying 
shaft operatively connected with the driving 
shaft, a shipper rod, a frame pivotally connect 
ed there with, a rail carried by the frame and 
projecting in opposite directions from said 
pivotal connection, a weight carried by the 
rail and adapted to move to opposite ends 
thereof, and an arm on said frame with which 
the crank arm is adapted to engage. 
5. The combination of a pulley shaft, fast 
and loose pulleys mounted thereon, a driving 
shaft, a counter-shaft parallel with the driv 
ing shaft and the pulley shaft, gearing con 
necting one of the pulleys with the counter 
shaft, gearing connecting the counter-shaft 
with the driving shaft, gearing connecting the 
pulley shaft with the driving shaft, a shipper 
rod, a lever to which it is pivotally connected, 
a T-shaped frame centrally pivoted to said 
lever, a rail carried by the frame and project 
ing in opposite directions from said pivotal 
connection, a weight carried by the rail and 
adapted to move to opposite ends thereof, a 
crank arm adapted to engage with the down 
Wardly projecting arm of the T-shaped frame, 
and gearing connecting the crank arm with 
the driving shaft. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name. 
WILLIBALD KUEBLER. 
Witnesses: 
LLOYD B. WIGHT, 
JOHN C. DITTLER. 
75 
95 
OO 
Io5 
IIC) 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510131.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 510,131. 
 
F. T. GUIHER, 
STEAM ENGINE ATTACHMENT, 
Patented Dec. 5, 1893. 
  
 
  
-tza Sall 
s 
His N) 
: 
: 
 
Z % 
2 : 
% 
% 
 
NJ 
N 
t 
 
1 
H H 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK. T. GUIHER, OF WAYNESBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
STEAM - ENGINE ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,131, dated December 5, 1893. 
Application filed May 16, 1893, Serial No. 474,389, (No model.) 
To all whom it naty concern: . 
Beitknown that I, FRANK. T. GUIHER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Waynes 
burg, in the county of Greene, State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Steam-Engine Attach 
ment, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had therein to the ac 
companying drawings. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in steam engine attach 
ments, and it has for its objects among others 
to provide a simple means for taking the wear 
of the under side of the piston head or the 
bottom of the cylinder by taking the weight 
of the piston head off the bottom of the cyl 
inder. This may be accomplished in several 
ways one of which is herein illustrated. In 
its primary form it comprises an arm at 
tached to the cross-head or to the piston rod 
and bent back so that its free end is substan 
tially over the center of gravity and said free 
end supported in any suitable manner; in one 
form it has attached thereto a cord or chain 
which passes over a pulley or pulleys and car 
ries a counterbalance weight. This weight 
is the same as that of the combined weight 
of the piston-head, piston-rod and cross-head 
so that the piston will be.free to move back 
and forth without dragging on the bottom of 
the cylinder. In lieu of the cord and weight 
a spring or springs may be employed, and 
other ways may be devised for supporting the 
free end of the arm to accomplish the same 
purpose. The improvement can be readily 
applied to pistons on engines already in use 
at little expense. It increases materially the 
life of an engine. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear and the novel 
features thereof will be specifically defined by 
the appended claims. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification and in which - 
Figure 1 is a side elevation with a portion 
of the cylinder broken away and other parts 
in section showing the application of my im 
provement. Fig. 2 is an end view of the arm 
and cross-head to which it is attached, 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in both of the views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates the cylinder, A' 55 
the bed or support, B the piston-head, B' the 
piston-rod and C the cross-head, all of known 
or preferred construction except as hereinaf 
ter specified. 
C' is the stuffing box through which the 6o 
piston-rod passes. 
The cross-head slides in the ways a, as seen 
in Fig. 1, and is provided with the cross rod 
a? to which the connecting rod D is designed 
to be connected as indicated by dotted lines 65 
in Fig. 1. 
E is an arm having a vertical portion which 
is extended upward sufficiently to clear the 
upper Surface of the cylinder as shown and 
terminating in a horizontal portion E the 7o 
free end of which is extended over the center 
of gravity of the piston-head, piston-rod and 
cross-head and arm and has connected thereto 
the cord or chain F which passes over the pull 
leys G which are suitably supported over the 75 
cylinder as Seen in Fig. 1. The other end of 
the cord or chain which hangs vertically car 
ries the weight Hof any suitable form, in sec 
tions if desired, and this weight is just the 
same as the combined weight of the piston- 8o 
head, piston-rod, arm and cross-head so as to 
keep the piston-head from dragging on the 
bottom of the cylinder, thus permitting it to 
run with less friction and guarding against 
wear upon the bottom of the cylinder more 85 
than at other points. The lower end of the 
Vertical portion of the arm is shown as con 
nected to the cross-head and is provided with 
a curved foote to conform to the curved por 
tion of the Cross-head to which it is secured no 
in any suitable manner, as by the bolts e. 
I may sometimes provide an extension on 
the upper face of the cylinder upon which the 
free end of the arm may slide; in Fig.1 such 
an extension is shown by dotted lines at I, 95 
and the free end of the arm is provided with 
a small roller which travels upon the upper 
face of the extension; in this form the cord 
and Weight and pulleys are dispensed with. 
Without departing from the spirit of the in 
vention or sacrificing any of its advantages, 
Modifications in detail may be resorted to roo 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
510,181. 
ing a counterweight as and for the purpose 
specified. 
3. The combination with the cylinder, pis 
ton-head, pistod-ron and cross-head, of an 
arm mounted on and traveling with the pis 
ton-rod and having a horizontal portion to 
which is connected a counterbalance weight, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRANK. T. GUIHER. 
Witnesses: 
J. B. RINEHART, 
J. W. MUNNELL. 
The free end of the arm may be otherwise 
supported-by a spring or springs or other 
aS 
What I claim as new is 
1. The combination with a piston-head and 
its cylinder, of an arm mounted to move with 
the piston-head and said arm carrying de 
vices to counterbalance the weight of the 
same to relieve the pressure thereof on the 
bottom of the cylinder, as set forth. 
2. The combination with a piston-head and 
its cylinder, of an arm mounted to move with 
the piston-head and having its free end ex 
tended over the center of gravity and carry 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510231.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 510,231. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
J. W. BARLOW. 
CORN PLANTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented D e C, 5, 1893. 
28% 
SASP 
 
S. 
&N S. 
 
s 
7 
 
 
 
 
s 
S 
 
- Z72/e7 zfor 
J. W. BARLOW. 
CORN PANTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Deo. 5, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 510,231. 
 
Wv7eases 
yvae fy 
 
- Ze/ 
avey far 
%. Maaza 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. BARLOW, OF QUINCY, ILLINOIS. 
CORN PLAN TER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,231, dated December 5, 1898. 
Application filed April 16, 1892, Serial No. 429,885, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN W. BARLOW, of 
Quincy, in the county of Adams and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Corn-Planters; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
The invention in the present instance re 
lates solely to the dropping mechanism of the 
planter, that is to say, the mechanism for 
dropping the kernels of grain from the seed 
box to the ground and controlling the rate of 
discharge, the objects being to drop the ker 
nels in more perfect check, to force the ker 
nels to drop at the desired points and to sim 
plify and improve the mechanism as will 
presently appear. 
The invention consists in certain novel de 
tails of construction and combinations and 
arrangements of parts as will be now de 
scribed and pointed out particularly in the 
appended claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings: 
Figure 1 is a side elevation partially in sec 
tion of one side of the runner frame and 
seeding mechanism of a planter constructed 
in accordance with my present invention, a 
portion being broken away to show underly 
ing parts. Fig. 2 is a similar view with the 
dropping mechanism actuated by the check 
Fig. 3 is a rear elevation of one of the 
We 
runner standards with the back plate re 
moved. Fig. 4 is a detail top plan view. 
Similar letters of reference in the several 
figures indicate the same parts. 
In carrying the presentinvention into prac 
tice I have for convenience combined it with 
the planter known throughout the country as 
the Barlow planter, although, as will be 
obvious to those skilled in the art, it may be 
combined with other planters of like charac 
ter. Without such changes as would involve 
more than the exercise of ordinary skill. 
One end only of the runner frame of the 
machine is shown, as it is sufficient to illus 
trate the invention, the letter A indicating a 
section of the runner or shoe, Bthe standard 
and C the cross piece to which the standard 
is secured and which carries the major part 
of the dropping mechanism. Journaled on 
the runner frame is a shaft D driven from 
the ground wheel (not shown) by the sprocket 
chain d and wheel d'. On each end of shaft 
D is a gear wheel D' meshing with a corre 
sponding wheel D for driving the seed plate 
D whereby the latter is rotated to feed the 
grain from the seed box in the ordinary man 
ner. The special detail construction of this 
part of the machine is well known and needs 
no further description, sufficeth to say, that 
the grain is fed regularly from the seed box 
through a race way or tube E, down into the 
standard or into a box attached thereto and 
if no other mechanism were employed, would 
act as a drill to distribute the grain evenly 
throughout the row, but not in proper rela 
tion to the grain in previous rows so as to form 
transverse rows. It is of course desirable that 
the grain should be planted in hills, and in per 
fect check, in by far the larger part of the plant 
ing done, and to accomplish this, without in 
any way affecting the efficiency of the ma 
chine as a drill, I provide a supplemental 
check row mechanism by interposing a gate, 
cut off, or valve (H in the drawings) in the 
race way or passage through which the grain 
passes to the ground and a driver or plunger 
(I in the drawings) which at proper intervals 
positively discharges the accumulated grain 
directly onto the spot in the field where it is 
to remain. The cut-off gate H it will be seen, 
is located well down toward the bottom of the 
standard, leaving a very short drop for the 
grain after being discharged therefrom thus 
aiding in Securing the accuracy aimed at. 
The gate is preferably elevated by a spring 
h and depressed and the grain discharged by 
the driver or plunger Ireciprocating vertically 
in grooves orguides in the standard and adapt 
ed to normally occupy the position shown in 
Fig. 1 somewhat above the cut off. When 
depressed by the check wire it descends over 
the grain and positively discharges the same 
directly on the desired spot, at the same time 
closing the aperture to prevent the passage 
of grain which might be fed by the seed plate 
while the gate is depressed. This driver or 
plunger action is highly important in that it 
forces the grains to drop all together and at 
exactly the desired spot, no straggling or 
stringing out of the kernels being possible 
95 
OO 
o 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
510,231 
O 
and that, irrespective of the speed at which 
the team is driven for the plunger acts fast 
or slow in exact accordance with the speed 
of the team and drives the grain so to speak, 
directly to the ground. The drop is so short 
that the grains are not scattered nor do they 
take any appreciable time to travel from the 
gate to the ground. 
The driver or plunger may be actuated by 
various mechanisms, but I have devised a 
simple, inexpensive and easily applied mech 
anism as follows: A bracket or support K is 
secured to each end of the cross piece and 
in them is journaled the driver or plunger 
actuating shaft L. having arms M secured rig 
idly thereon in position for their bifurcated 
rear ends to extend approximately above the 
plunger to which they are connected by rods 
m. On the extreme ends of the shaft are se 
cured cam actuating levers N, with which 
the forked lever O pivoted on a center to one 
side of the shaft is adapted to co-operate. In 
the preferred construction, the forked lever 
is pivoted between the ends and bears an 
anti-friction roller o on the lower shorter end, 
which engages and rides upon the cam lever, 
as the forked lever is moved from the posi 
tion shown in Fig. 1 to the position shown in 
Fig. 2 rotating the shaft and actuating the 
driver or plunger as aforesaid. The forked 
lever it will be noted, needs move but a very 
short distance and it might be mounted di 
rectly on the shaft L, but to secure a quick 
actuation of the driver or cut off and for other 
obvious reasons, the arrangement shown is 
preferred. All the parts after being actuated 
by the check wire are returned to normal po 
sition by springs, of any approved character, 
such as R. 
In operation the grain is fed down by the 
seed plate constantly in the ordinary man 
ner for drilling, and the gate or cut-off re 
ceives and holds the kernels until the check 
ing mechanism is actuated when they are 
discharged. 
The plunger just fills the open 
ing through which the grain has passed, and 
as the plunger is elevated, the gate closes in 
beneath it and prevents the escape of any 
grain which might have been dropped while 
the plunger was depressed. It is usual to 
time and regulate the feed of the seed plate 
to feed three kernels of grain between each 
movement of the checking mechanism, but 
such feed may be regulated in any ordinary 
method to feed a greater or less number of 
kernels as will be readily understood. 
Should it be desired at any time to operate 
the machine as a drill it is only necessary to 
open or remove the gate and if desirable to 
do the checking by hand it is only necessary 
to apply a hand lever, such as indicated in 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
75 
- 
dotted lines, to the shaft IL. The handle pro 
jects up in convenient position to be grasped 
and requires but a very slight rocking move 
ment to actuate the dropping mechanism. 
Any preferred form of cut-off and driver 
may be employed, for these elements are such 
that their form and location may be changed 
by one skilled in the art almost infinitely and 
Still accomplish the important step of posi 
tively driving the grainto the ground. Hence 
I do not wish to be understood as limiting my 
self to the specific form shown. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is- 
1. In a check row planter, the combination 
with the runner, the chute or conduit leading 
to the heel of the runner and the valve con 
trolling the passage between the seed box or 
hopper and said chute, of a gate or cut-off 
controlling the lower end of said chute near 
the ground, and a driver controlled by the 
check row cord or wire and operating upon 
the seed detained in the chute to forcibly and 
positively impel it toward the ground, and 
thus cause the seed to be properly placed ir 
respective of variations in the speed at which 
the team travels. 
2. In a check row corn planter, the combi 
nation with the runner frame having the shoe 
for opening the soil, the channel or chute pass 
ing down in rear of the runner standard, the 
valve at the top of the chute, and the gate at 
the bottom of the same but above the bottom 
of the shoe, of the driver controlled by the 
check wire and cooperating with the gate and 
the grain held thereby to positively and forci 
bly eject or shoot the grain directly upon the 
earth within or directly in rear of the shoe or 
runner; substantially as described. 
3. In a planter, the combination with the 
runner frame having the shoes for opening 
the Soil, the channels passing down in rear of 
the runner standards, the valves at the top of 
the channels and the gates closing the chan 
nels at the bottom below the plungers, of the 
reciprocatory plungers working in the chan 
nels above the gates, the shaft carrying arms 
for operating the plungers, and the independ 
ently operating check wire levers for moving 
the shaft; substantially as described. 
4. In a planter, the combination with the 
checking mechanism and the transverse op 
erating shaft therefor, of the cam lever mount 
ed on said shaft, and the forked lever for co 
operation with the check wire, pivoted on an 
independent center and engaging the cam le 
ver to move the operating shaft. 
JOHN W. BARLOW. 
Witnesses: 
J. C. BARLOW Jr., 
L. B. BOSWELL. 
95 
IOO 
O 
IT 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510332.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
M. D. DRAKE. 
WEHICLE PROPELLED BY HAND ORF00T, 
No. 510,332, 
Patented Dec. 5, 1893. 
 
M. D. DRAKE. 
-- 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
WEHICLE PROPELLED BY HAND OR FOOT, 
No. 510,332, 
Patented De C, 5, 1893. 
 
ZZZYaaaaa. 
areer 
areer 
ZarzwaaZealaad 
28itv.coca 
A6. t 4. 
%ue 92%- F. 
/6(1-4e-4 44%. 47-ol-4. 
3vue who 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARSHALL DIUGUID DRAKE, OF IRVINGTON, KENTUCKY. 
VEHICLE PROPEL LED BY HAND OR Foot. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,332, dated December 5, 1893. 
Application filed October 1, 1892, Serial No, 447,507, (No model.) 
5 
O 
To add, whom it may concern, 
Be it known that I, MARSHALL DIUGUID 
DRAKE, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Irvington, in the county of Breckinridge 
and State of Kentucky, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Tricycles; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale, 
My invention relates to improvements in 
tricycles, and it has for its object to provide 
a tricycle of a cheap, simple and light con 
Struction, and one adapted to be propelled by 
the hands or feet of the rider either separately 
Or in COncert, 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will appear from the following descrip 
tion and claim when taken in connection with 
the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1, is a side elevation of my improved 
tricycle. Fig. 2, is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3, is a front elevation of a modified con 
Struction, and Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7, are detail 
views of parts embodied in both the inven 
tion proper and the modification. 
Referring by letter to said drawings, and 
more particularly to Figs. 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, and 7, 
thereof, W, indicates the main frame or body 
of the machine which may be of any approved 
form and construction. 
X, indicates the axle which is journaled in 
suitable bearings at the bottom of the body 
or frame, and A, A, indicates the main trav 
eling wheels; the wheel A, being loosely 
mounted upon the axle, while the wheel A', 
is fixed with respect thereto, for a purpose 
presently to be described.. 
B, indicates the pilot wheel of the machine. 
This wheel is mounted upon a sleeve as D', 
(see Fig. 4) and the said sleeve is secured be 
tween the branches of a bifurcated turning 
post A, by a bolt G', which takes through 
the sleeve and the said branches, as shown. 
The sleeve D', is of a greater length than the 
width of the hub C', of the wheel B, as illus 
trated whereby it will be seen that frictional 
contact and consequent wear of the hub and 
branches of the turning post are obviated 
which is a desideratum. 
The upper body portion of the turning 
post A, is tubular and shouldered as better 
shown in Fig. 5, and its reduced portion is 
journaled in the sleeve R, at the forward end 
of the frame Z, and is secured in said sleeve 
by the vertical bolt H'. This bolt is headed 
at its lower end, and it takes through a disk 
or plate I', which bears against the shoulder 
of the turning post and through a disk or 
plate Z, which rests against the upper end of 
said post, whereby it will be seen that it will 
not in any way interfere with the free turn 
ing of the same. 
The frame Z, is connected to the main frame. 
or body W, as better shown in Fig. 1, and it 
serves in conjunction with the bar D, to brace 
the standard C, which is secured to the main 
frame and rises from the longitudinal center 
of the same as shown. This standard C, is 
provided adjacent to its upper end with lon 
gitudinal slots as M', for the passage of bolts 
J, which serve to adjustably connect the 
bearing block J, of the crank shaft E, to the 
standard C. 
As better shown in Fig. 2, of the drawings, 
the shaft E, which carries the fixed sprocket 
wheel H, at its middle, comprises the short 
crank branches E, for a purpose presently de 
scribed, and the comparatively long branches 
E, to which the handles F, are connected; 
and motion is transmitted from said shaft E, 
to the axle through the medium of the sprock 
et wheel H, the chain G, and the sprocket 
wheel U, fixed on the axle, as shown. 
By reason of the bearing block J, of the 
crank shaft, being adjustably connected to 
the standard C, it will be perceived that said 
shaft may be fixed at various elevations so as 
to suit it to persons of different sizes. When 
the crankshaft is raised or lowered, the chain 
G, may be lengthened or shortened in any ap 
proved manner, or a new chain may be sub 
stituted therefor, as is most desirable. 
P, indicates pedal levers which are pivot 
ally connected at their rear ends to lugs T, 
depending from the main frame or body and 
are designed to assistin the propulsion of the 
machine. These levers P, are provided, as 
better shown in Fig. 1, with stirrups or foot 
rests N, and they are connected to the short 
cranks E, of the shaft E, by pitmen as O. 
Thus it will be seen that the rider may use 
either his hands or his feet, or both, in the 
- 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
o 
75 
90 
OQ 
d 
510,332 
2 
propulsion of the machine, and is enabled to crank shaft E*, to the axle X, through the 
medium of two sprockets II, chain belts G, 
drive the same at a high rate of speed. 
and sprockets U, instead of one as in Figs. 1, 
In order to enable the rider to more easily 
and 2. I also provide the said crank shaft 
start the machine, I have provided the bev 
E*, with handles F, at intermediate points of 
eled gear S, which is fixedly mounted upon 
its length and journal the ends of said shaft 
the axleX, adjacent to the wheel A', as shown. 
in the bearing blocks J. 
This beveled gear S, is designed to be en 
From the foregoing description taken in 
gaged by a beveled pinion S', which is fixed 
connection with the drawings, it will be seen 
upon a vertical shaft S, and this shaft is pro 
that I have provided a tricycle of a cheap, 
vided at its upper end with a hand wheel V, 
simple, and advantageous construction and 
which rests within convenient reach of the 
one which may be driven at a high rate of 
rider and is designed to enable him to read 
speed; and it will also be seen that my im 
ily exert a leverage upon and rotate the axle. 
proved machine is capable of carrying light 
K, indicates the steering lever which is de 
parcels and merchandise, and may, if desired 
signed to be adjustably fixed by the rack M; 
be conveniently employed as a delivery ve 
and Q, indicates the pitman through the me 
hicle. 
dium of which the said lever is connected to 
In the practice of my invention I prefer to 
the crank arm Q', of the turning post A. 
employ the gearing herein illustrated and de 
The lever K is placed within convenient 
scribed for transmitting motion from the 
reach of the rider and through the medium 
crank shaft to the axle, but I do not desire to 
of the said lever and the rack M, the rider is 
be understood as confining myself to such 
enabled to fix the pilot wheel so as to travel 
gearing as in some cases a train of gear wheels 
in a straight or circular course, without the 
may be employed for the purpose. 
necessity of keeping his hand upon the lever. 
Having described my invention, what I 
In order to enable the rider to more quickly 
and easily turn the machine, I have provided 
claim is 
In a tricycle, the combination with a main 
the mechanism (better shown in Figs, 6, and 
frame or body and the curved frame Z, ex 
7), which comprises the ratchet wheel B', 
tending forwardly from the main frame and 
which is fixed upon the axle X, the disk T, 
carrying the vertically disposed sleeve R, at 
which is fixed with respect to the wheel A, 
its forward end; of the tubular and bifur 
the pawls J', carried by the disk T', and the 
cated turning post A, having its upper por 
springs K', backing said pawls. By reason 
tion reduced and journaled in the sleeve of 
of this mechanism it will be seen that the 
the frame Z, the disk Z', arranged above the 
wheel A, will turn with the axle while travel 
sleeve R, and the turning post, the disk I', 
ing in a straight course but will be loose 
arranged at the lower end of the reduced por 
thereon when the machine is making a sharp 
tion of the turning post, and the vertical bolt 
turn so as to enable the same to swing as on a 
H', taking through the disks I', and Z', and 
pivot. 
serving to connect the turning post and the 
Y, indicates a seat, which is mounted upon 
sleeve R, all as and for the purpose set forth. 
the frame Z, and is designed more especially 
for a child. 
MARSHALL DIUGUID DRAKE. 
In Fig. 3, of the drawings, I have illustrated 
a modified construction designed for a heavy 
machine. In this modification, Iemploy two 
Standards C, and transmit motion from the 
FRANK PARDON, 
F. H. NINEKIRK. 
Witnesses: 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510432.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 510,432. 
. 
. 
FASTENER FOR THE MEETING RAILS OF SASHES, 
F. J. LOUDIN. 
Patented Deo, 12, 1893. 
 
 
witvesses 
* ca. 9 (4,-, 
IWWE.T07 
C 
THE NATIONAL LITHoarAPHING courANY. 
wAskMafo 
Nation, O, O, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK J. LOUDIN, OF RAWENNA, OIIIO. 
FAST ENER FOR THE MEETING-RAILS OF SASHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,432, dated December 12, 1893. 
Application filed February 23, 1893, Serial No. 463,358, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
75 
--- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK.J. LOUDIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ra 
yenna, county of Portage, State of Ohio, have 
invented a new and useful Window-Sash 
Fastener, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to that class of win 
dow-sash fasteners which employ a swinging 
lever on the upper bar of the lower sash and 
a catch on the lower bar of the upper sash, 
with which catch said lever engages for fas. 
tening the window-sash. 
The object of the invention is to secure 
greater safety and convenience, and a fur 
ther object is to lock the lower sashin a raised 
position or the upper sash in a lowered posi 
tion, by means of a detachable extension to 
the catch; all as more particularly described 
and claimed below. 
In the drawingsforming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a broken perspective 
view, showing the sashes fastened, neither 
one being raised or lowered. Fig. 2 is a ver 
tical section of the fastener in Fig. 1, taken 
Online 1-1, in Fig. 3, showing the sashlocked 
when the lower one is raised or the upper one 
is lowered; and Fig. 3 is a plan view, with 
parts in section, on line ac-ac, in Fig. 2. 
Referring to the lettered parts of the draw 
ings A is the upper bar of the lower sash and 
B is the lower bar of the upper sash. To the 
bar B of the upper sashisattached an angled 
plate, C, fitting the upper and inner face of 
the same, and is provided with a catch, D, 
having an open notch, a, in the inner side, 
and an open, dovetailed mortise, c, in the top. 
At E is an internally recessed casting, fit 
ting the upper and inner face of the upper 
bar, A, of the lower sash, and attached thereto, 
as in Fig. 2. It will be observed that that 
part of the angled plate C which fits against 
the inner face of the sash, B, is provided with 
a rib or prongs, which impregn into the sash, 
and a like portion of the internally recessed 
casting E is provided with a similar prong or 
ribs, O. The object of this is to prevent 
house breakers from forcing the plates by 
prying under the lower sash, which, but for 
the prongs or ribs, O, would beliable to draw 
the screws which fasten said plates to the 
sash. 
Placed on the internally recessed casting 
E is a turn-cap, F, having a pendent stem, G, 
which loosely passes down through a hole in 
the internally recessed casting E, said stem 
terminating at the lower end in a key, H. 
In the interior recess of the casting E is a 
swinging lever, I. Through this lever I and 
through the bottom of the internally recessed 
casting E is formed a key-hole, J, Fig. 8, 
adapted to receive the key, H., of the stem, G. 
The knob of the turn-cap, F, is preferably 
milled, as at e, in Fig.1, to prevent the fingers 
from slipping when operating said turn-cap. 
The turn-cap, F, is adapted to be raised and 
lowered so that when lowered, the key, H, 
will be partly in the key-hole in the lever I 
and partly in the key-hole of the internally 
recessed casting E, as in Fig. 2. When in 
said position the lever is locked, so that it 
cannot be swung in either direction to disen 
gage it from the catch, D. By raising the 
turn-cap F, bringing the key, H, entirely in 
the key-hole of the lever I, and turning said 
turn-cap in either direction, the lever I can 
be swung out of or into the notch, a, of the 
catch D, the sashes being fastened, of course, 
when the lever I is in said notch, and unfas 
tened when said lever is disengaged from the 
notch. 
That portion of the internally recessed cast 
ing E which fits against the inner face of the 
sash is provided with one or more vertical 
ribs, L, (two being shown in Fig. 3) which 
loosely fit into corresponding grooves, ), Fig. 
1, of that portion of the plate C contiguous to 
them. These grooves and ribs may be em 
ployed or not, as desired, their object being 
to serve as a guide, so that the parts of the 
fastener will register with each other, and to 
make it more difficult for a burglar to obtain 
access to the lever I, since he would have to 
saw through the ribs before he could saw the 
lever. 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, P is a catch-ex 
tension, consisting of a bar having a series of 
notches, s, like those at a, in the catchD, and 
having one end formed so as to detachably 
fit in the mortise c, of the catch D, so as to 
OC 
 
2 
510,432 
25 
nally recessed casting for attachment to one 
of the sashes, a swinging lever in said recess, 
said casting and lever being provided with 
key-holes registering with each other, a turn 
cap provided with a key adapted for vertical 
adjustment in said holes and to swing the le 
ver, and a catch-plate for attachment to the 
other sash and provided with the notched 
catch for receiving the end of the swinging 
lever, in combination with the detachable 
catch-extension; substantially as set forth. 
3. In a sash-fastener, a swinging lever at 
tached to one of the sashes, in combination 
with a detachable catch-extension attached 
to the other sash; substantially as set forth. 
In testimony to the foregoing I have here 
unto subscribed my name in the presence of 4o 
two Witnesses. 
35 
FREDERCIK J. LOUDIN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN T. COOK, 
ALONZO P. GILLETT. 
O 
be located in an upright position, as in Fig. 
2. When thus employed the upper or lower 
parts of the window may be opened a desired 
distance and fastened in the same manner as 
when not open. 
When the catch-extension, P, is not em 
ployed, it is caught into a notch, 2, of the 
casting E, and placed horizontally on the 
window sash, as in Fig. 1. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. A sash-fastener comprising the inter 
nally recessed casting for attachment to one 
of the sashes, a swinging lever in said recess, 
said casting and lever being provided with 
key-holes registering with each other, a turn 
cap provided with a key adapted for vertical 
adjustment in said holes and to swing the le 
ver, and a catch-plate for attachment to the 
other sash and for receiving the end of the 
Swinging lever; substantially as set forth. 
2. A sash-fastener comprising the inter 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510532.txt	(No Model.) 
M. H. C. W. FARJASSE. 
CUTCH, 
No. 510,532, 
Patented Dec. 12, 1893, 
 
N 
2 
WITNESSES: 
27---1 
4-g? 64/ 
' 
2%rce 2% 64. 24.4.24 
INVENTOR: 
: By Ais 4ttorneys, 
- 
a 
3. NATIONAL. Thioca 
AshingtoN 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAURICE HIPPOLYTE CHARLEs WASHINGTON FARJASSE, OF NEUILLY SUR 
SEINE, FRANCE. 
CUTCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,532, dated December 12, 1898. 
Application fled March 19, 1892, Serial No. 425,625. (No model.) Patented in France March 14, 1890,No. 204,482; in England 
July 3, 1890, No. 10,318; in Belgium July 3, 1890, No. 91,129 in Switzerland-September 25, 1890, No. 2,869 in Italy 
February 26, 1891, XXV, 29,263, LVII, 268, and in Austria-Hungary August 13, 1891, No. 9,791 and No. 28,848, 
2o ing, and driven parts. 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, MAURICE, HIPPOLYTE 
CHARLES WASHINGTON FARJASSE, a French 
citizen, residing at Neuilly-sur-Seine, (Seine) 
5 France, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Clutches, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention has been patented in France, 
by Patent No. 204,482, dated March 14, 1890; 
c 1. England, No. 10,318, dated July 3, 1890; in 
Belgium, No. 91,129, dated July 3, 1890; in 
Switzerland, No. 2,869, dated September 25, 
1890; in Austria-Hungary, Vienna, No. 9,791, 
and Buda-Pesth, No. 28,318, dated August 13, 
I5 i891 and in Italy, No. XXV, 29,263, and No. 
LVII, 268, dated February 26, 1891. 
My invention relates to clutches, and par 
ticularly to friction clutches of the class 
Wherein a helix is used to lock together driv 
The invention aims to provide an improved 
clutch of the said class which will be simple 
of construction, effective in operation, and 
facile of manipulation, and one in which the 
25 clutching force can be easily controlled and 
adjusted to either a light friction or an abso 
lute locking together between the parts. 
As is Well known, all clutch apparatus con 
sists of two separate parts, either of which 
3O may be connected to a shaft, pulley, gear 
wheel or equivalent device, the one being the 
driyen part and the other the driving part, 
Which parts are coupled together or uncou 
pled accordingly as the driven part is to be 
According to my invention I provide cer 
tain improvements in the structural details 
and arrangement of a clutch or coupling in 
which a strap, which may be a cord, a wire, 
4o a metal band, or any suitable equivalent is 
attached at one end to the driving part and 
coiled around the driven part, and having its 
other end attached to a loose ring on the 
latter. 
Hereinafter I will term the end of the strap 
which is fixed to the driving part the driv 
ing end,' and the other end the clutch end,' 
while the loose ring will be termed the 
clutch ring. 
35 set in motion or to be freed. 
45 
w 
I will proceed to describe my invention, re- 5o 
ferring to the accompanying drawings in 
which 
Figure 1 is a fragmentary elevation of a 
shaft on which is shown in axial section the 
hub of a driving pulley and my improved 55 
clutch. Fig. 2 is a cross section thereof on 
Fig. 3 is a detached 
the line 2-2 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 
view of the loose ring shown in Fig. 1. 
4 is an edge view of this ring showing the 
attachment of the clutch end of the strap 6o 
thereto. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the 
inclosing sleeve shown in Fig. 1. 
Let A represent the driven shaft, P the 
driving pulley, r the strap, and B the clutch 
ring. To the pulley P is fixed the driving 65 
end ac of the strap, which in this instance is 
a band r which is coiled around a bushing e 
keyed to the shaft A and is secured at its 
driven or clutch end to the clutch ring B which 
latter loosely embraces the shaft. The ring 7o 
B is shown detached in Figs. 3 and 4, the lat 
ter showing the driven end y secured to the 
ring by riveting. It may be secured thereto 
in any other suitable manner if desired. 
The driving end ac of the strap, instead of 75 
being fixed directly to the pulley P itself, is 
preferably secured between two semi-circular 
pins gg, which are mounted in a hole in the 
projecting flange h of a sleeve M, as seen in 
Fig. 2, and more clearly in Fig. 5. The end 8o 
of the strap is preferably dovetailed as shown 
in Fig. 2 to prevent its escape between the 
pins g. The sleeve M is preferably a hollow 
inclosing sleeve bolted to the hub of the pull 
ley P and surrounding exteriorly, the strap 85 
and has an annular cover 2 at its outer end 
preferably inclosing the driven end y and a 
portion of the clutch ring B. 
Any suitable means for impeding the rota 
tion of the ring B may be employed. I pre 
fer to construct it with a peripheral groove a 
as seen in Figs. 1 and 4 and to pass around 
this a small cord b, as seen in Fig. 1, so that 
by applying a slight tension to the cord its 
friction in the groove will produce the re- 95. 
quired resistance to the rotation of the ring 
B. The extent of impeding tension of the 
cord determines the strain upon the strap r 
510,532 
IO 
and consequently the clutching force. On re 
easing the cord the ring B will be free, and 
immediately the strap r will uncoil slightly, 
owing to its stiffness and will thus at once re 
lease the driven part. 
It will be seen that the described clutch 
Will act only up to a certain strain, as should 
the resistance offered by the driven part be 
greater than the frictional grip of the strap r, 
the latter would slip around. 
The throwing in gear of my improved clutch 
being very gradual it is particularly suitable 
for use in machines in which sudden strains 
occur, such as cutting and punching Ina 
chines. In such use it avoids rupture or 
straining of the working parts. It is also ap 
plicable with advantage to heavy machinery 
such as rolling and crushing mills, in which, 
if sudden strains, stopping the motion more 
or less, occur, the clutch apparatus will give 
Way and prevent damage. 
As stated, the grip of the strap r, being pro 
portional to the force applied to the cord b 
the transmission of any degree of energy or 
speed from a motor developing a greater en 
ergy or speed can be obtained by varying the 
tension on the cord b, so that various machines 
working at different speeds can be driven di 
rect from one shaft by means of my clutches, 
and machines such as sewing machines can be 
worked at will by treadles or by power by sim 
ply throwing my clutch apparatus into or out 
of gear by exerting or releasing tension on the 
cord b thereof by a treadle or otherwise. 
My improved clutch possesses the following 
advantages:-First, a slight force serves to 
throw it into and preserve it in action, and 
upon removing this force it immediately ceases 
to act; second, the clutching action is a grad 
ual increasing one, and the release instanta 
neous; third, the driven part has no direct 
connection with the driving part when put in 
gear; its action is automatic; fourth, shocks 
in throwing the clutch into and out of gear 
are avoided. 
This clutch may be used under various con 
ditions and for numerous purposes, such as 
25 
35 
45 
55 
for a safety clutch, for detaching the shafting 
from a motor when required or for connecting 
or disconnecting two lengths of shafting. It 
can be advantageously applied to winches, 
cranes, and the like. For winches I dispose 
on the driving axle two clutches; the first 
connecting the gearing wheel with the axle 
for raising the load and the second connect 
ing this axle with the clutch ring on which a 
strain is produced to constitute a brake when 
the shaft is turraed in the contrary direction. 
What I claim is, in clutches, the following 
defined novel features and combinations, Sub 
stantially as hereinbefore set forth, namely: 
1. In a friction clutch, the driving pulley 
P and the driven shaft A, the bushinge fixed 
to said shaft, and a helical band r fixed at one 
end of said pulley and coiled around said 
bushing, in combination with a sleeve Min 
closing said band, a ring B fixed to the other 
end of said band, a grooved pulley a fixed to 
said ring, and a disk-plate 2 fixed to the outer 
end of said sleeve M, surrounding said ring 
B, and depending between the latter and said 
pulley a. and closing the end of said sleeve, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a friction clutch, the driving pulley 
P, the driven shaft A, the bushing e, fixed to 
said shaft, and the helical band coiled around 
said bushing, in combination with a sleeve M 
inclosing said band, fixed to said pulley, and 
having bored out portion h, said band having 
enlarged end ac entering the bore of said por 
tion h of said sleeve, and pins g g fitting the 
outer sides of said end ac of said band, Seated 
in the bored portion h of said sleeve, and 
locking the end of said band to said sleeve, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
75 
85 
MAURICE HIPPOIYTE CHARLES 
WASHINGTON FARJASSE, 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. M. HoOPER, 
AUGUSTE MATHIER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510632.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 510,632, 
J. DESMOND. 
LUBRICATOR. 
Patnted Dec. 12, 1893. 
 
 
 
  
 
a () b. 
P 
 
N 
N & ARS 
N/S 
R2S 
S/Zx25S NZN 
SSS 
 
 
Z/ 
is 
7. 
- a . 
 
2' ev 
v- 
ge -- 
s 
3vvuovo 
1. 
 
The NATIONAL LITHoarAPHING COMPANY. 
WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN DESMOND, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGN 
MENTS, TO THE CHAPLIN-FULTON MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF 
PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
UBRICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,682, dated December 12, 1893. 
Application filed February 14, 1893, Serial No. 462,316. (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
To all, whon, it noty concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN DESMOND, of De 
troit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Lubricators for Steam 
Engines; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention contemplates certain new 
and useful improvements in lubricators for 
automaticallyintroducing graphite into steam 
engineS. 
The invention comprises a spring-impelled 
wheel mounted on the rotary feed-shaft and 
carrying a pawl engaging a ratchet on said 
shaft, and connections between said wheel 
and the sliding steam valve or other movable 
part, substantially as hereinafter fully set 
forth and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figure 1 
is a view showing my improved lubricator as 
used in practice. Fig.2 is a vertical sectional 
view. Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view 
on the line a-ac, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a front 
WeW. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
vessel having an upper supply opening closed 
by a plug a, and a lower extension a through 
which the discharge is effected, said exten 
sion being externally threaded at its lower 
end so as to be screwed into a hole or opening 
in the steam chestX, or other suitable point on 
or about an engine. This vessel is designed 
to contain powdered graphite and the object 
of the invention is to automatically feed this 
graphite to the internal mechanism. 
B is a rotary shaft extended horizontally 
through an opening in the lower extension a', 
said shaft being supported by Screw plugs 
b,b, in opposite sides of extensions a'. At 
its outer end shaftB is additionally supported 
by a depending arm b secured to a second 
arm b extended horizontally from vessel A. 
That portion of shaft. Bextending across the 
discharge opening of extension a? is Qf greater 
diameter than the remaining portion thereof. 
In this thickened portion bare recesses b 
- 
which are designed to coincide with corre 
sponding openings bin the lower end of ves 
sel A. 
C is a grooved wheel loose on shaft B, and 
to its hub is connected one end of a coil 
spring D, the outer end thereof being held 
by a lug dextending inwardly from armb. 
To the inner face of this wheel a pawl d is 
pivoted by a screw d which is extended 
through said wheel and has a nut don its 
outer end forming a projection for engage 
ment with lug d. This pawl is constantly 
held in engagement with a ratchet wheel E. 
fast on shaft B, by a spring e carried by wheel 
C. The nut dis designed to engage lug dto 
limit the movement of wheel C under the ex 
pansion of the coiled spring. A cord or strap 
F is secured at one end to wheel C and is de 
signed to fit in the groove of the periphery 
thereof, the other end of said cord or strap 
being connected to the sliding valve Y of the 
steam engine. By pulling on this cord or 
strap the wheel C will be given a partial ro 
tation as against the action of the coil spring 
and the pawl being in engagement with the 
ratchet wheel will effect the partial rotation 
of the feed shaft. The recesses in the latter 
being filled with graphite will feed the same 
through the lower extension to the steam chest 
or engine. This operation of the wheel, resulti 
ing in the gradual rotation of the feed-shaft, 
is accomplished by the sliding movement of 
the valve. The wheel is returned to its nor 
mal position by the spring D when the cord 
or strap is not under tension. 
The advantages of my invention are appar 
ent. It will be seen that I have produced 
simple and inexpensive means for effecting 
the gradual automatic supply of graphite to 
a steam engine and that the internal parts 
thereof can thus be thoroughly lubricated. 
The feed is effected by the movement of the 
sliding valve and hence no special means 
need be employed for operating the feed 
shaft. It is obvious that by disconnecting 
the cord or strap from the sliding valve the 
lubrication can be discontinued. 
It is obvious that the lubricator can be at 
tached to any suitable part of an engine or 
any of its connections, and that the rotary 
9o 
95 
IOO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
w 
510,632 
shaft can be operated by connecting the cord tor, comprising the vessel having. discharge 
or strap to any rotary or reciprocating part ports, a ratchet wheel fast on said shaft, a 
spring impelled wheel loose on said shaft car 
of an engine, and also that a rod can be sub 
rying a projection and a pawl, a stop de 
stituted for said cord or strap, all of these 
signed to be engaged by said projection, and 
modifications being clearly within the scope 
means for moving said wheel as against the 
of my invention. 
action of its spring, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination with the steam chest 
of an engine, and a sliding valve, of a lubri 
cator having a vessel provided with a dis 
charge end opening into said steam chest, 
a rotary feed-shaft extended transversely 
through said discharge end, a ratchet fast on 
said shaft, a grooved wheel loose on said 
shaft having a projection on one side, a spring 
pawl, a depending arm supporting said shaft 
at its outer end and having a lug, a coiled 
spring secured to said wheel and to Said lug, 
and the cord or strap attached to said wheel 
and to said sliding valve, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
I claim as my invention 
l. The herein - described lubricator com 
prising the vessel having discharge ports, a 
rotary horizontal shaft having recesses de 
signed to coincide with said ports, a spring 
impelled wheel loose on said shaft and carry 
ing a pawl, a ratchet wheel fast on said shaft, 
and a cord or strap encircling said spring 
impelled wheel and connected at its outer 
end to a movable portion of the engine to 
which the lubricator is attached, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The herein-described improved lubrica 
tor, comprising the vessel having discharge 
ports, a rotary horizontal feed-shaft having 
recesses, designed to coincide with said ports, 
a ratchet wheel fast on said shaft, and a spring 
impelled wheel loose on said shaft carrying 
a pawl engaging said ratchet wheel whereby 
the gradual rotation of said shaft is effected, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The herein-described improved lubrica 
GARDNER. S. WILLIAMS, 
GEO. CATHEY. 
JOHN DESMOND. 
35 
40 
45 
O 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510732.txt	(No Model.) 
M. P. A. TOLLIN, 
STRAINER FOR OIL, OR SIMILAR PRESSES. 
36%m 
35 
N 
2 
No. 510,732, 
   
  
- 
 
  
 
  
 
i. 
Patented Dec. 12, 1893. 
FIG.34% 
43; 
/ % SNZ 
2 
32 
SN 
 
S 
. NS aN NS 
SE 
& : aft 
WNSWN %) 
IWVENTO 
at ATTORNEYs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARIE PHILIPPE ADOLPHE TOLLIN, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
STRAINER FOR OL OR SIMILAR PRESSES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,732, dated December 12, 1893. 
Application filed February 8, 1893, Serial No. 461442, (No model.) Patented in France April 21, 1892, No. 221,070 in Bel 
gium April 28, 1892, No. 99,462 in England May 5, 1892, No. 8,559 in Spain June 15, 1892, No. 13,354; in Italy June 
30, 1892, No. 31,847 in Portugal September 15, 1892, No. 1,710, and in Turkey October 26, 1892, No. 30l. 
To all whom it may concern.' 
- 
Be it known that I, MARIE PHILIPPE 
ADOLPHE TOLLIN, a citizen of the Republic 
of France, residing in Paris, France, have in 
vented certain Improvements in Strainers for 
Oil or Similar Presses, (for which I have ob 
tained Letters Patentin France April 21, 1892, 
No. 221,070; in Belgium April 28, 1892, No. 
99,462; in Great Britain May 5, 1892, No. 8,559; 
in Italy June 30, 1892, No.31,847; in Spain June 
15, 1892, No. 13,354; in Portugal September 
15, 1892, No. 1,710, and in Turkey October 26, 
1892, No. 301) of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to strainers for oil and 
similar presses. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section showing the general ar 
rangement of a strainer, the sides of which 
are constructed according to my invention. 
Fig.2 is a horizontal section of the same taken 
on the line 1-2 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse section of the metallic strips constitut 
ing the sides of the strainer drawn to an en 
larged scale. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section 
of one of these metallic strips also drawn to 
an enlarged scale. 
The metallic strips if f are of such a sec 
tion that when their rear parts are placed to 
gether narrow slits i i will be left in front 
which do not vary in size during the work of 
compression. These slits terminate in longi 
tudinal channels if which are open at their 
Each group of slits constitut 
lower ends. 
ing one of the sides of the strainer is fixed 
to a segments by means of a key or Wedge 
which insures contact between all the strips. 
The said strips are interchangeable, and have 
dovetail extremities and are held against the 
O 
5 
25 
35 
 
40 
45 
55 
jo 
segments S of the strainer by means of a plate 
k fixed by screws. The segments are inclosed 
in a casing T of sheet iron or other suitable 
material and the spaces formed between the 
casing T and the segments permits of the cir 
culation of steam to facilitate the running 
off of the oil. Under the force produced by 
a hydraulic press the oil or other liquid ex 
pelled from the solid materials will pass 
through the slits i is and flow through the 
aforesaid longitudinal channels i ij into a 
vessel placed below the strainer. This mode 
of construction of the straining surface pos 
sesses the advantage that the mounting, dis 
mounting and cleaning can be easily and rap 
idly effected, there will be no totalization of 
the space which must be left between the 
strips, consequently the liquid will be clearer, 
the strips may be replaced by others for di 
minishing or augmenting the size of the slits 
i i according to the material to be treated; 
the strainer costs less than those heretofore 
employed and can be easily kept in order, no 
special workmen being required. 
I claim as my invention- 
In a filter press, a series of strips longitudi 
nally grooved to form when placed side by 
side longitudinal channels with narrow slits 
at the front, in combination with segments to 
receive and retain the said strips and a cas 
ing inclosing the segments and strips to their 
full length, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
- 
w 
MARIE PHILIPPE ADOLPHE TOLLIN. 
Witnesses: 
LON FRANCKEN, 
ROBT. M. HOOPER. . 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510832.txt	J. W. BIR KENSTOCK. 
MACHINE FOR POLISHING MARBLE OR, GRANITE. 
3 Sheets--Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 510,832, 
Patented Dec. 12, 1893, 
 
/NWEWTOR 
-23-4 
BY 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
 
Sax 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
iii.22. 
 
 
N, 
s 
N 
NY 
S 
SEN SN 
EN & N 
| 
J. W. BIR KENSTOCK. 
MACHINE FOR POLISHING MARBLE OR GRANITE. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 510,832, 
Patented Deo. 12, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
N 
- 
WITNESSES 
s. 22.3. 
n 
  
a S SS 
Eli 
in 
The NATIONAL LITHoarAPHina company. 
A8-Maton, e, c, 
IIHEA 
 
y 
I 
 
 
 
 
 
J. W. BIR KENSTOCK. 
MACHINE FOR POLISHING MARBLE OR GRANITE. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 510,832, 
Patented Dec. 12, 1893. 
 
 
 
S 
N. e N 
 
 
  
  
S 
 
NazzZS N 
e 
YS O 
SNS 
A 
N 
y 
2 
WTWESSES 
Segea. & 9. 
 
INVENTOR 
34-6242-4e 
BY 
ATTORWEYS 
This NAonal roarrarine corary. 
was . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. BIRKENSTOCK, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MACHINE FOR POLISHING MARBLE OR GRANTE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,832, dated December 12, 1898. 
Application filed May 12, 1893, Serial No.473,932, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHNW. BIRKENSTOCK, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
City, County and State of New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Machines for Polishing Marble or Gran 
ite, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention has reference to animproved 
machine by which the surface of marble-slabs 
and the molded edges of the same are pol 
ished in a quick and effective manner, so that 
a considerable saving in time and labor is ob 
tained; and the invention consists of a ma 
chine for polishing marble slabs and the mold 
ed edges of the same, which comprises a main 
truck that is moved over fixed rails, an auxil 
iary-truck that is moved on the rails of the 
main-truck in a direction at right angles to 
the motion of the main-truck, and a polish 
ing head that is suspended by a suitable hang 
er and that is rotated on its axis by suitable 
mechanism, said head being applied to the 
Work by a weighted lever. The polishing 
head is provided with openings in its bottom, 
through which the water and polishing ma 
terial pass on to the slabs to be polished, while 
a Scraper is arranged in the head and pro 
vided with tapering points that pass over the 
openings in the head so as to keep the same 
Open for the passage of the polishing mate 
rial. A disk-valve is applied to the inside of 
the head, and provided with openings, said 
valve being adapted to be shifted on its axis, 
So as to produce the partial or entire opening 
or closing of the supply-orifices according as 
the work is to be retarded or entirely inter 
rupted. The polishing head is provided with 
a circumferential flange, which is also pro 
vided with orifices and made to correspond 
in shape to the molded edges of the slab to 
be polished, as will be fully described herein 
after and finally pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a side-elevation of my improved 
machine for polishing marble-slabs and the 
molded edges of the same. Figs, 1 and 1 
are detail sections of different forms of the 
head. Fig. 2 is also a side-elevation partly in 
section, at right angles to Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
detail-section of the driving gear and clutch 
for the main-truck. Fig. 4 shows still another 
form of head. Fig. 5 is a vertical central sec 
tion of the polishing head drawn on a larger 
scale. Fig. 6 is a modified form of polishing 
head and shaft. Figs. 7 and 8 are respect 
ively a side-elevation of the polishing head 
and a horizontal section of the same, on line 
88, Figs. 5, and 7, also on a larger scale. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
main-truck, which is supported on fixed rails 
attached to suitable timbers of the floor. Mo 
tion in forward and backward direction is 
imparted to the main-truck A by a suitable 
power-transmitting mechanism A', which is 
provided with a friction-clutch a' and revers 
ing gear a, so that the motion of the truck 
can be readily changed from one direction to 
the other. On the main-truck are supported, 
rails b with turned-up ends, and on the rails 
is arranged a second auxiliary-truck B which 
is moved over the rails b of the main-truck 
by means of suitable handlesb' at the ends 
of the truck, as shown in Fig. 1, SO that by 
means of the main and auxiliary-trucks, the 
marble-slab that is supported on the top of the 
auxiliary-truck B, can be readily moved in 
any suitable direction, so as to be subjected 
on any part of its surface to the action of a 
polishing-head C. The head C is located at 
the lower end of a shaft C which is stepped 
in a hanger C9 that is attached in a perma 
nent manner to the timbers of the ceiling. 
Rotary motion is transmitted to the shaft C 
of the polishing-head C by means of a driv 
ing shaft S and bevel gears g g located re 
spectively at the inner end of the shaft Sand 
the upper end of the shaft C. The polishing 
head Ciscounterbalanced by means of a lever 
D which is fulcrumed to a bracket-arm D' of 
the lower tubular portion of the hanger C, the 
lever being connected by a pivot-link d with 
a pin d' on the shaft C and a helical spring 
d with a fixed projection or eye on the hanger 
C, so that the polishing-head can be raised 
or lowered within certain limits. The lever 
D is weighted at its outer end, the weight bal 
ancing the head C and its shaft C. The pin 
d' is passed through a slot in the tubular por 
tion of the hanger Cand attached to a guide 
sleeve C8 in the same, as shown clearly in Fig. 
5. The transmitting bevel-wheelg', at the up 
per end of shaft C' is splined to the shaft and . 
95 
IO 
O 
35 
40 
45 
510,832 
C 
25 
35 
45 
a. 
supported on a step of the tubular portion of 
the hanger, so that the shaft C can be moved 
up and down in the hub of the bevel-wheel 
g' in following the ascending and descend 
ing motion of the polishing-head, without in 
terrupting the rotary motion of the same, as 
transmitted by the driving shaft S and bevel 
wheel g. 
The polishing-head is composed of a suit 
able composition metal, which can be readily 
cast into proper shape and provided with a 
circumferential plain or molded rim, the bot 
tom and rim being provided with apertures 
for the passage of the polishing material em 
ployed for the polishing operation. The pol 
ishing-head C is attached at its center by a 
Socket and screw connection to the lower end 
of the shaft C. The shape of the circumfer 
ential rim of the polishing-head C has to cor 
respond to the shape of the molded edge of 
the slab, so that the edge can be readily pol 
ished by the rim of the head C. The sleeve 
Cwhich supports the shaft C of the polishing 
head C is provided with a bracket f which 
passes through a slot F in the lower tubular 
portion of the hanger, said bracket serving to 
support a supply-pipef for the polishing so 
lution. The polishing solution is supplied to 
the interior of the head and fed through the 
apertures of the same, to the surface of the 
slab to be polished. The brackets falso sup 
port the shank of a scraper F which is pro 
vided at its lower end with a number of 
branching points f, that extend close to the 
apertures in the polishing-head. The points 
of the scraper F serve for keeping the aper 
tures of the polishing-head open during the 
rotary motion of the same, which is accom 
plished by the passage of the scraper-points 
over the inner ends of the apertures of the 
head. The shape of the scraper F is adapted 
to the size of the polishing-head and to the 
location of the apertures in the bottom and 
rim of the head, a different shape of the pol 
ishing-head requiring also a corresponding 
construction of the scraper. To the inside of 
the polishing-head C is applied a disk-shaped 
valve G, which has apertures that correspond 
to the apertures in the bottom of the polish 
ing-head, said valve being adapted to turn on 
its axis so as to open partly or entirely or 
close partly or entirely the apertures in the 
bottom of the polishing-head, and regulate 
the supply of the polishing solution or the 
entire discontinuance of the same, as desired. 
The disk-valve G is provided with handles 
for shifting it and with set screws for secur 
ing it into Open or closed position. 
In the modification illustrated in Fig.6 the 
shaft C' of the polishing head C8 is made 
hollow so as to form a passage which connects 
at its lower end with a central opening in the 
head and at the upper end with a stationary 
funnel C, having a regulating stop-cock in 
its neck, as shown in Fig. 5, said stationary 
funnel and central channel serving to supply 
the acid required for the polishing operation 
in a very convenient and regulated manner. 
The head C5 shown in Fig. 1 has a circum 
ferential groove a at its outer edge and the 
apertures for supplying the polishing acid 
are arranged diagonally and open into said 
groove. G' represents a disk-shaped valve 
for regulating the supply of the polishing SO 
lution. The head C shown in Fig. 1" has a 
75 
circumferential groove a' having rounded 
edges and apertures opening therein. Gep 
resents the disk-shaped valve for controlling 
the flow of polishing solution. 
The modification shown in Fig. 4 illustrates 
an elongated head C7 in the shape of a mold 
ing having apertures arranged throughout 
the length thereof. G represents the disk. 
shaped valve for regulating the supply of 
polishing solution. 
The operation of my improved machine for 
polishing marble-slabs is as follows:-The 
slab is placed in position on the top part of 
the auxiliary-truck B, and the polishing-head 
C is then lowered by means of its weighted 
lever D until its bottom comes in contact with 
the surface of the slab. The rotary motion 
of the polishing-head is then started and the 
supply of water and polishing material to the 
interior of the head and through the feed-ap 
ertures of the same to the slab kept up. The 
slab is moved below the rotary polishing 
head in any required direction, by means of 
the main and auxiliary-trucks, until the en 
tire surface of the slab is evenly polished, 
care being taken that the polishing head is 
applied to the entire surface of the slab. 
When the surface of the slab is polished, the 
motion of the slab is interrupted, and the 
placed in such a position toward 
slab then 
the polishing-head that the straight or molded 
rim of the same can be applied to the edge 
of the slab, and the edge subjected to the 
polishing action of the rim of the iead. For 
this purpose, the head has to be lowered still 
more by the weighted lever. It is accom 
plished by moving the weight on the lever to: 
ward the hanger. When the slab is placed 
in proper position toward the molded rim of 
the head, the head is rotated again and the 
edge of the slab kept in contact with the rim 
until it is entirely and evenly polished. 
By my improved machine, the polishing of 
marble and other slabs of all kinds and sizes, 
and of the molded edges of the same, can be 
accomplished with great facility and at a con 
siderable saving of time and labor, as it only 
requires a number of polishing-heads hav 
ing different shapes of rims, so that the pol 
ishing of molded edges of slabs can be read 
ily and quickly accomplished after the sur 
face-polishing of the same is completed. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination, with a support for the 
slabs to be polished, of an apertured head 
having a circumferential rim, a shaft for sup 
porting the polishing head, means for trans 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
510,832 
g 
mitting rotary motion to the shaft, a weighted 
lever connected with the shaft for counter 
balancing the head and shaft, a tube for sup 
plying Water and polishing material to the 
head, and a fixed scraper having branching 
points for clearing the apertures of the head, 
Substantially as set forth. 
2. A rotary head for marble-polishing ma 
chine, provided with a circumferential rim 
and apertures in the bottom and in the rim, a 
tube for Supplying water and polishing mate 
rial to the interior of the head, and a fixed 
scraper having branching points extending 
8s 
to the apertures of the head, so as to keep 
them clear for the passage of the polishing 
material, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, with a rotary polish 
s 
O 
ing-head having apertures in its bottom, of a 
shaft for supporting said head, and a valve 
having openings registering with the aper 
tures of the head and adapted to open or close 
the same, a tube for supplying water and pol 
ishing material to the interior of the head, 
and a scraper having branching points for 
clearing the apertures of the head, substan 
tially as set forth. 
in testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
25 
JOHN W. BIRKENSTOCK. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
H. WILLARD GRIFFITHS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US510932.txt	*No Model.) 
F. A. PERRET. 
ELECTRIC ELEWATOR, 
No. 510,932, 
Patented Dec. 19, 1893. 
WITNESSES: 
(arz (2/6%, 
-4-4 
e 
E 
1 
"El 
frazzie 77 (37 re-6- 
INVENTOR 
2%/ta4iii.25 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK. A. PERRET, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
ELEKTRON MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF NEW YORK. 
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,932, dated December 19, 1893. 
Application filed November 12, 1892, Serial No. 451,745, (No model.) 
To all whon, it nually concei'i: 
Be it known that I, FRANK A. PERRET, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Electric Elevators, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
This invention relates chiefly to that class 
of elevators, in which a platform or car is 
caused to ascend or descend by means of ca 
bles attached thereto, which pass over a pull 
ley or drum at the top of the shaft and thence 
around a winding drum, which may be lo 
cated on any floor. Such elevators may be 
divided into two classes: first, those in which 
the speed of hoisting or lowering may be 
varied at will by the operator in the car, 
this feature being essential in high speed pas 
senger elevators, as it is necessary to slow 
down just before reaching a landing in order 
to make an accurate stop at the landing, and, 
second, those elevators in which the speed of 
the car is practically constant in both hoist 
ing and lowering orisindependent of the con 
trol of the operator on the car who simply 
has the power to start the car either up or 
down and to stop same. This invention re 
lates to the latter class. Until recently in 
nearly all elevators of this class the winding 
drums were driven by belts from a constant 
source of power, the arrangement being such 
that when the elevator is not in use the belt 
runs on a loose pulley. When the operator 
desired to go up he pulls the rope passing 
through the car in one direction which shifts 
the belt to a tight pulley; pulling the rope 
back shifts it back to the loose pulley and 
stops the car; pulling it in the opposite di 
rectionshifts another belt onto the tight pulley 
which moves the car in the opposite direction. 
Electric motors have been used in many cases 
as the sources of power and connected thus 
by belts to the elevators, in which case the 
motor is usually allowed to run constantly, 
which is wasteful of current, or the attendant 
has to go to a line switch and shut off the cur 
rent to stop it, which is inconvenient. In or 
der to avoid these objections, motors have 
been coupled direct to the elevator machine 
and switching devices have been connected 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
o 
75 
to the usual operating cord by means of which 
the motor is stopped, started and reversed. 
The invention herein described is concerned 
with the starting devices for the electric mo 
tor, and, although the description refers to it 
in connection with an electric elevator, it is 
well adapted as a motor starter wherever mo 
tors are used, especially for railway motors. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 
represents a general view of the apparatus as 
applied to an elevator, and Fig. 
is a dia 
9. Al 
gram of the circuits. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, M is 
an electric motor which I prefer to be shunt 
Wound and which is connected to constant 
potential mains, L. L. I have shown the mo 
tor operatively connected to the winding 
drum, R of an elevator by a worm G, and a 
gear wheel G', but the invention is equally 
applicable to a spur gear or to a belt connec 
tion. S is the brake, which is applied by 
means of the weight W, which is adjustable 
on the lever N. This lever may be lifted and 
the brake released in the old fashioned way 
by means of a mechanical device connected 
with the sheave wheel E, around which the 
operating cable C passes, but I prefer to lift 
the lever N, and release the brake by means 
of an electro-magnet or solenoid B, which is 
connected in the armature circuit or prefer 
ably in shunt as shown in the diagram. As 
Soon as the current is admitted to the coils of 
this Solenoid it sucks in its armature, raises 
the lever N, and releases the brake. The in 
stant the circuit is opened at any point, by 
any means, the solenoid is de-energized, and 
the weight W drops and applies the brake. 
F is a reversing switch, which is preferably 
actuated by a sheave wheel over which the op 
erating cable passes. I prefer that the mov 
able portion of this switch should be mounted 
upon the sheave wheel while the two sets of 
clips O and P, with which it makes contact, 
are stationary. Fig. 1 shows this switch at 
its central position, at which point both ar 
mature and field circuits are open. A pull 
on the cable in one direction closes both field 
and armature circuits and causes rotation of 
the drum in one direction. A pull on the 
cable in the other direction closes both field 
and armature circuits and, as the armature 
95 
OO 
2 
510,932 
circuit is reversed, produces rotation in the 
opposite direction. Each set of the clips of 
this switch consists of six contact points, 
three being arranged on each side of a block 
of insulating material, and there will be four 
metallic blades.f pivoted to a block of insul 
lating materialf' carried by the sheave. Two 
of these blades are supposed to be directly 
behind the two shown in Fig. 1. The two 
blades standing to the right are adapted to 
make contact with the six clips O, one blade 
connecting three clips and the other blade the 
other three clips. The same arrangement 
occurs on the left hand side. 
H is a rheostat which is connected in the 
armature circuit. The diagram shows the 
brush on the lowest contacts at which points 
all the resistance is in circuit, and there 
should be sufficient resistance to protect the 
armature when at rest from a current in ex 
cess of its safe carrying capacity. The con 
tact brush of this rheostat is attached to the 
armature of the solenoid A, which is connect 
ed in a direct shunt to the brushes of the mo 
tor, the resistance H being outside of the ter 
minals of the shunt. Hence little or no cur 
rent will flow through the solenoid until the 
armature commences to turn and to generate 
a counter-electro-motive force. Then the cur 
rent in the solenoid will increase in propor 
tion to the increase of counter-electro-motive 
force generated by the armature and will not 
be affected in any way by the condition of 
the rheostat. The solenoid therefore is con 
trolled entirely and only by the difference of 
potential between the positive and negative 
sides of the motor armature. 
We will now suppose the switch F to be 
open, as shown, and that the operator pulls 
the cable to start the mechanism. This closes 
the switch F, and the circuit is at once made 
through the field magnets and armature of 
the motor, the rheostat H, its solenoid A, and 
the brake solenoid B. The circuits are traced 
as follows: Referring to Fig. 2, the dotted 
lines indicate the two right hand blades f 
thrown into contact with the two groups O of 
three clips each. When the switch is in this 
position the current is led from the positive 
line to clip 1, thence to clip2, along the switch 
blade to clip 3, thence by Wire4 through the 
armature of the motor, Wire 5, rheostath, wire 
6, clip7, switchblade, clip 8, wire 9 to the nega 
tive main. The field magnetic circuitbranches 
at clip 3 and isled through the switchblade to 
clip 10, thence by wire 11, wire 12, through the 
field magnet, wire 13, Wire 14, clip 15, and joins 
the armature circuit at clip 7. The brake 
solenoid B is connected in wire 16 across the 
armature and outside of the rheostat H. The 
controlling solenoid Aisin circuit 17 directly 
across the brushes of the motor. The brake 
solenoid instantly attracts the armature, 
raises the weight W, and releases the brake. 
Unless there is an excessive load on the car 
the armature will commence at Once to re 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
5o 
55 
so 
65 
 
75 
go 
95 
CO 
volve, will accelerate rapidly, the counter 
electro-motive force generated by it will in 
crease and the current through the solenoid 
A will increase correspondingly, causing it to 
draw up its armature with increasing power 
thereby moving the contact brush across the 
row of contacts on the rheostat, and cutting 
out resistance step by step until it reaches 
the top where the resistance is all out, and 
the motor is running at full speed. 
In case there should be an excessive load 
on the car or it is prevented from moving 
freely, the current, which is at first admitted 
to the armature through the rheostat, will 
not start the motor; consequently, the solen 
oid A, will receive practically no current, 
and will not attract its armature with suffi 
cient power to move the contact brush on the 
rheostat. Consequently, no resistance will 
be cut out. The operator seeing that the 
motor does not start, will open his switch, 
and will hunt up the trouble, or if it is over 
loaded will ask somebody to step out. 
The solenoid will Work against gravity, 
preferably, so that the weight of its armature 
will resist the small pull of the coil due to 
the little current which may flow through it 
while the motor armature is stationary; or a 
spring may be used to accomplish the same 
thing. h represents a dashpot or air cushion 
of any suitable construction, used, if neces 
sary, to prevent the too rapid movement of 
the solenoid armature. 
We will now suppose the mechanism to 
have been put into operation as already de 
scribed, and that a stop is to be made. The 
operator pulls the cord until the switch 
reaches the central point where a stop will 
prevent its going farther, until the contact 
brush of the rheostat has dropped again to 
the bottom and all the resistance is in cir 
cuit. This stop is held against the periph 
ery of the switch wheel while the motor is 
running, but when the wheel is moved to the 
middle position to stop the motor, it falls 
into the notch and locks the wheel until it is 
removed therefrom by the end of the resist 
ance controlling arm when it reaches the 
point where all the resistance is in circuit. 
This prevents reversing until the resistance 
is put in. As Soon as the circuit has been 
broken at the switch Fas just described, the 
Solenoid B is de-energized and the brake is 
applied. It will be seen that this principle 
of controlling the starting of the motorby 
the counter-electro-motive force generated by 
the motor armature is applicable to motors 
driving railway cars or any other apparatus 
and is a sure protection to the motor. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. An electric motor having a main or ar 
mature circuit and a shunt or field circuit, 
and a rheostatin the armature circuit, in 
combination with a third circuit includin 
al electro-responsive apparatus controlling 
the rheostat, said third circuit being a direct 
Ios 
IIo 
II5. 
I 25 
510,932 
3 
purpose set forth. 
TO 
shunt to the brushes of the motor, substan-locking device substantially as and for the 
tially as described. 
2. The combination, of an electric motor 
In testimony whereof I subscribe my sig 
and its circuit, an electric switch controlling nature in presence of two witnesses. 
said circuit, a locking device for said switch 
when in its open position, a rheostat in 
the motor circuit and an electro responsive 
apparatus operating the rheostat and the said 
WM. A. ROSENBAUM, 
JOS. J. UHL. 
FRANK A PERRET. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511033.txt	(No Model.) 
R. S. WIESENFELD. 
TOOL FOR MAKING BOTTLES 
No. 511,033, 
Patented De0, l 9, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
28tvoodoo 
(46%-24%.e4 
6a, 12-2-4- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT S. WIESENFELD, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
TO O FOR MAKING BOTTLES 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 511,033, dated December 19, 1893. 
Application filed February 17, 1893, Serial No. 462,759, (No model.) 
To all whom, it mogy concern. 
Beit known that I, ROBERTS. WIESENFELD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bal 
timore, State of Maryland, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Tools 
for Making Bottles; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My present invention relates to tools for 
making bottles and has for its object the con 
struction of a device for forming an angular 
groove in the face end of the head of the bot 
tle as will be fully disclosed in the following 
specification and claims. 
In the accompanying drawings which form 
part of this specification Figure 1, represents 
a side elevation partly in section showing the 
several parts in their normal positions; Fig. 2, 
a like view showing the position of the parts 
when in use, and Fig. 3, a cross section on the 
line ac Oc. 
Reference being had to the dra Wings and 
the letters thereon, A indicates a clamp hav 
ing a bow shaped spring end C and two arms 
or sides b b on each of which are jaws C C to 
engage the head d of a bottle. The jaws are 
concave to conform to the head of the bottle 
which has previously been formed in a suit 
able mold. To the bow end C of the clamp is 
secured a rod B, the lower end e of which en 
ters the neck of a bottle, as shown in Fig. 2, 
and centers the tool while the groove f is be 
ing formed in the face of the head of the 
bottle. 
Cindicates a bar which crosses the tool and 
through which the rod B projects, and is pro 
vided with an aperture g, and with a groove 
h on its under side to form the seat i on the 
bottle. 
To the inside of one of the arms b is pivot 
ally secured a bar D, which passes through a 
slot l in the rod B, and supports a revoluble 
wheel E mounted on a spindlel on the free 
or lower end of the bar D. The Wheel E is 
projected through the aperture g in the bar 
C, when the spring jaws are compressed to 
engage the head of a bottle, as will hereinafter 
more fully appear. The bar D is shown piv 
oted to the arm b at n by an ordinary hook 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
65 
75 
and eye O, but any approved form of hinged 
joint may be used. 
To the rod B is secured a spring p, the lower 
end of which rests against the bar D and is 
designed to hold the wheel E down to its work. 
To form the groove f in the head of a bot 
tle, the head is reheated and seized by the op 
erator by means of the spring jaws, and as 
the jaws are compressed the wheel E is pro 
jected into the soft glass and the groove f 
formed; the bottle being revolved while the 
tool is held stationary in the hand of the op 
erator. The wheel E being supported at an 
angle to the axis of the rod B the groove fis 
undercut or at an angle to the face of the 
head of the bottle as shown and in the oper 
ation of forming the groove the wheel floats 
in the glass. To withdraw the wheel from 
the groovef the operator releases his grip on 
the spring arms b b when the resiliency of the 
spring withdraws the wheel. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. A tool for making bottles, comprising a 
pair of compressible jaws, and a device for 
forming a groove in the face of the head and 
at an angle to said face. 
2. A tool for making bottles, comprising a 
pair of compressible jaws, a centering rod 
and a device for forming a groove in the face 
of the head and at an angle to said face. 
3. A tool for making bottles, comprising a 
pair of compressible jaws, a wheel attached 
to a bar pivotally connected to one arm of 
the jaws and supported to be projected into 
the face of the head of the bottle at an angle 
to the face. 
4. A tool for making bottles comprising a 
pair of compressible jaws, a revoluble wheel 
supported upon a bar pivotally connected to 
one arm of the jaws and supported to be pro 
jected into the face of the head of the bottle 
at an angle to the face. 
5. A tool for making bottles comprising a 
pair of compressible jaws, a centering-rod a 
transverse bar through which said rod passes, 
a bar pivotally connected to one arm of the 
jaws, and a wheel revolubly supported at the 
free end of said bar and at an angle to the 
axis of the centering rod. 
6. A tool for making bottles comprising a 
85 
95 
Od 
511,033 
pair of compressible jaws, a centering-rod pro- through which said rod projects and having 
vided with a slot, and a bar supporting a wheel an aperture and a groove to form a seat on 
-at an angle to the axis of said rod. 
the end of the head of the bottle, and a device 
5 pair of compressible jaws, a centering-rod pro- the axis of the centering-rod. 
7. A tool for making bottles comprising a revolubly attached to said bar at an angle to 15 
vided with a slot, a bar extending through 
said slot and supporting a revoluble wheel, presence of two witnesses. 
and a spring resting upon said bar. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
ROBERT S. WIESENFELD, 
8. A tool for making bottles comprising a 
Io pair of compressible jaws, a centering-rod pro- 
vided with a slot, a bar crossing the tool and 
Witnesses: 
D. C. REINOHL, 
H. B. REINOHL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511133.txt	(No Model.) 
J. FRETWELL, 
PHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERA. 
No. 511,133, 
Patented Dec. 19, 1893. 
 
 
 
77 1- 
milit 
1 - 
222 
1 O. 
 
  
  
  
ear 
arrators 
a 
r 
7. Trr. 
% 
v\ 
VN W. 
y NW 
A-sistasir-r 
: 
Fo:25 
W 
-na-Arts 
'S 
Aw 
21 
17 
:12 
t 
S2 R 
LLIS, 
22222222222 
 
-i 
- - - - - 
TNXNZAF 
o 44- 7e 4ve-ee, 
f 22 42. 2 6. 
%y 292-22 
(24% 
 
THE NATIONAL LITHoora P-Na copANY, 
WALHINGTON, d, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN FRETWELL OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
PHOTOGRAPHC CAM ERA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 511,133, dated December 19, 1893. 
Application filed October 24, 1892, Serial No. 449,881 (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
The camera-case 12 may be of any suitable 
To cold, whon, it way concern: 
size and shape, but is preferably square to 
Be it known that I, JOHN FRETWELL, of the 
allow for carrying the supply-roll and take 
city of Providence, in the county of Provi. 
up roll for the sensitive film together with 
dence and State of Rhode Island, have in 
any ordinary tension-device and mechanism 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
for indicating the length of film traversing 
in Photographic Cameras; and I hereby de 
the same in its movement; in the bottom 13 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and 
of the case is formed a circular-groove in 
exact description of the same, reference be 
which a glass or other suitable transparent 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, form 
cylinder 14 is free to revolve, but may be fixed 
ing part of this specification. 
by a stop when desired. To the lower sur 
This invention has reference to improve 
face of the bottom 13 is secured the annular 
ments in what are known in the arts as pano 
rack 15 which intermeshes with the remov 
all C. Cale:S. 
able-gear 11. The shaft 9 extends through a 
The object of this invention is to produce a 
central perforation in the case bottom 13 and 
simple and durable panoramic-camera. 
the upper end is squared. The portion of this 
The further object of the invention is to 
produce a panoramic-camera by which practi 
shaft within the camera case is branched as 
cally the whole horizon may be photographed. 
at 9 to allow the lens-tubes to be secured 
therein where the prisms are used, as indi 
The invention consists of the novel con 
cated in dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
struction of the camera and the peculiar com 
Outside the transparent cylinder 14 is lo 
bination there with of lenses. 
cated and supported thereby the sensitive 
The invention also consists in the combina 
film 17. If this be of material rigid enough 
tion with a camera of the novel cylinder for 
to keep its circular form without aid the trans 
Supporting the sensitive-film. 
parent cylinder may be dispensed with, but 
The invention further consists in certain 
when a flexible roller film is used the trans 
Other novel features of construction and novel 
parent cylinder will be necessary. During 
combination of parts which will hereinafter 
the exposure the film is fixed in regard to the 
be more fully described and pointed out in 
cylindrical support, but in winding it up after 
the claims. 
exposure it is guided in its passage to and 
Figure 1 represents a cross-sectional view 
from the cylinder 14 by means of the small 
of one form of the improved camera showing 
vertical rollers 18 and 19, and, as the cylin 
different positions of a lens the focallength of 
der is free to revolve when the film is drawn 
which is equal to the radius of the circle on 
around, there will be little friction between 
which the sensitive film is supported; a sys 
the sensitive surface and the cylinder. The 
tem of gearing is also indicated which may 
top 20 of the case has a circular opening and 
be used in combination with a lens of longer 
surrounding this is a raised flange 21. On 
focus. Fig.2 represents a top view of theim 
this flange is supported a rotatable cover 22 
proved camera with the top removed. 
formed of thin material so as not to obstruct 
Similar numbers of reference designate cor 
the upper half of the lens. The cover has a 
responding parts throughout. 
flange 23 to make a light-tight joint and de 
In the drawings 5 indicates a table which 
pending from the cover is a light-chamber 24 
is Supported for field use by a tripod 6 but 
which, near the center of the cover, is of a 
which may be supported in any ordinary man 
width equal to that of the lens-case. At its 
ner. In the axial center of the table is se 
outer end, near the cylinder 14, the Walls of 
cured a vertical socket-bearing 7 and above 
the light-chamber approach each other hav 
this bearing is a central gear 8 secured to the 
ing a narrow vertical slit between them 
shaft 9 the lower end of which is journaled in 
through which light may be admitted to the 
the bearing 7. Secured to the table 5 is a 
sensitive film. The light-chamber may be of 
Shaft on which a removable-gear 11 is jour 
any desirable form to contain the lens-tube 
naled, this gear intermeshing with an annu 
lar-rack 15 secured to the bottom 13 of the 25 and the prism or reflector 26, as indicated 
The cover 22 is provided with a 
in Fig. 1. 
Calea, CaSO, 
45 
50 
 
55 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
2 
511,133 
suitable aperture through which rays of light 
may be directed into the light-chamber 24, 
and in this aperture Isecure the lens-tube 25 
shown in solid lines in Fig.1. Over the aper. 
ture in the cover 22 Isometimes place a hood 
27 and in the upper portion thereof Isecure 
a mirror 29' forming the inner surface of the 
top of the hood 29, for directing the light 
rays downward before passing through the 
lens 25, Fig. 1. To the lower surface of the 
cover 22 I secure the square socket 31 which 
fits on the end of the shaft 9. It is, there 
fore, obvious that if the camera-case carry 
ing the cylinder 14 and the film 17 be re 
volved in one direction the cover 22 and the 
hood-27 with the lens 25 or 25' carried by the 
shaft 9 will be revolved in the other direc 
tion and at the same speed through the gears 
11 and 8 and the rack 15, the result being 
that when the lens 25 or 25 has traversed 
one-half of the horizon the open end of the 
light-chamber will have admitted the rays of 
light entering the same to the entire length of 
the film. When allens is used the focallength 
of which is equal to the radius of the circle in 
which the film 17 extends, the gear 11 is re 
moved and the cover 22 is revolved by hand 
or by any other suitable power; in this case 
the lens is located as represented in solidlines 
in Fig. 1 to transmit the view of the upper 
half of the horizon, or by placing the lens as 
indicated in dotted lines in Fig.1 and by the 
use of reflectors and prisms to transmit a view 
of the upper and lowerhorizon, an entire rev 
olution of the lens will be required to traverse 
the open end of the light-chamber over the 
length of the film. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a photographic-camera, the combina 
tion with a case and a transparent cylinder 
supported therein, of a rotatable cover hav 
ing a central opening, and a lens supported 
in said opening, as described. 
2. In a photographic camera, the combina 
tion with a case having means for supporting 
a sensitive film in a circle therein, of a rotat 
able cover having an aperture, a lens Sup 
ported by the cover, and a light-chamber con 
structed to direct the rays of light passing 
through the lens to the inner surface of the 
circular film, as described. 
3. The combination with the case 12, the 
annular-rack secured to the bottom thereof, 
therevoluble glass cylinder 14 contained there 
in and adapted to support a sensitive film, and 
spools for containing the film before and after 
exposure, of the table 5, a socket 7 mounted 
therein, a vertical-shaft 9 journaled therein 
and having a central gear, an intermediate 
gear journaled on a shaft secured to the table 
and intermeshing with the central gear and 
the rack, the rotatable cover 22, having an 
aperture, mounted on the upper end of the 
shaft, the light-chamber 24 secured to the low 
er surface of the cover, the hood 27 secured to 
the cover, a lens carried by said cover, and 
means for directing the light rays passing 
through the lens to the vertical opening in the 
light-chamber, as described. 
JOHN FRETWELL, 
Witnesses: 
HENRY J. MILLER, 
M. F. BLIGH, 
45 
50 
55 
6 5 
O 
20 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511235.txt	(No Model.) 
J. L. DODD. 
GALLEY SUPPORT, 
No. 511,235. 
Patented Dec. 19, 1893. 
 
 
Jr. 
1. 
C 
d 
C 
G. 
d 
M7ezverzezzr. 
4:4, r 23, 
As Azor 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH L. DODD, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY. 
GALLEY - SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 51 235, dated December 19, 1893. 
Application filed March 27, 1893, serial No. 467,753, (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
" 
- 
2o all whorn, it inctly concerta. 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH L. DODD, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Camden, New Jersey, have invented an Im 
proved Galley-Support, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention consists of an improved gal 
ley support intended to be mounted on the 
front of a type case, and adapted to be swung 
underneath the case when not in use. 
My invention is designed for use in close 
quarters where it would not be possible to 
have a table especially for the purpose of 
holding galleys. 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figurel, 
is a side view of one of the brackets consti 
tuting the main feature of my invention, said 
bracket being in position for use, and a por 
tion of the type case being also shown insec 
tion. Fig. 2, is a side view of the device on 
a smaller scale, showing it in the position as 
sumed when not in use. Fig. 3, is a front 
view of the support, showing in dotted lines 
a galley resting upon it. Fig. 4, is a detail 
view of an attachment whereby the support 
is adapted for application to type cases hav 
ing metal frames; and Fig. 5, is a view of a 
modification of a part of my device. 
Each galley is intended to be supported 
upon a number of brackets, as shown in Fig. 
3, but as each of these brackets and the means 
whereby it may be swung underneath the 
case, are the same, a description of one of 
them will be sufficient. 
A is the bracket on which the galley rests, 
this bracket being provided with an enlarged 
portion A' which is shaped so as to fit over 
the front edge of the type case B. The 
bracket A has a circular stud a, projecting 
below the enlarged portion A' and formed in 
tegral with it; and this stud terminates in a 
guiding pin a', provided at its lower end with 
a button (t, for a purpose hereinafter set 
forth. 
On the inside of the brace b of the type 
case frame is secured a bracket d, which sup 
ports the swinging link D, the latter being 
connected at its lower end to a link Chaving 
an enlarged head c which provides a socket 
for the stud (, of the bracket A. The pin a 
of the stud a. also passes through this en 
larged head c, and the button a on the lower 
end of said pin prevents it from being with 
drawn when the bracket is swung under the 
type case, as shown in Fig. 3. A lug a on 
the stud a, fits in a suitable groove in the 
socket of the head c of the link C and pre 
vents the stud from turning. 
When it is desired to swing the galley Sup 
port underneath the case, the bracket A is 
lifted until its projection a is drawn out of 
the socket in the head of the link C and be 
ing then freed from engagement with the 
front of the type case is dropped down and 
swung under the case until it can be sus 
pended from a suitable hook d, as shown in 
Fig. 2, the pin at the upper end of the link D, 
constituting the pivot on which the bracket 
swings. The bracket A may be hung in a po 
sition the reverse of that shown in Fig. 2, as 
said bracket is free to turn in the socket of 
the link C when not it use. 
Type case frames are sometimes made of 
iron piping, and the bracket for the link D 
as constructed for wooden frames would not 
be available for use on such iron frames. 
For applying my improved galley support to 
said iron frames, however, I provide a clamp 
E (shown by dotted lines in Fig.1, and in de 
tail in Fig. 4), this clamp having a remov 
able section. E' so that it may be fitted over 
the pipe and secured thereto by a thumb 
screwe; this clamp has a projection e' to 
which the link D is hung. The clamp may 
be made with a serrated or notched inner Sur 
face for the purpose of more securely grip 
ping the pipe. 
Some of the essential features of my inven 
tion may be embodied in a support having 
but one link for each bracket; for instance the 
link C may be hung to a lug on the under side 
of the brace to of the type case frame, as 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
It is obvious that instead of having the 
bracket A socketed in the head of the link C. 
these two portions could be formed integral 
with each other; and the bracket d which 
supports the structure when not in use, could 
be a slotted one, as d, shown in Fig. 5, so 
that the link D would have a sliding full 
crum, to allow of removing the bracket from 
its position when in use. When for instance 
a singie link as C, is used, whether formed 
integral with the bracket A or not, it may 
95 
O 
id 
2 C. 
35 
40 
45 
so 
 
511,235 
5 
2 
of the frame, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
4. The combination in a galley support for 
type case frames, of the galley bracket Con 
structed to engage with a portion of the 
frame and having a projecting guide pin, 
with a link support hung to the frame and 
having an opening for the reception of the 
guide pin on the bracket, substantially asset 
forth. 
5. The combination in a support for galleys, 
of the galley bracket, a clamp for engaging a 
bar of the frame, and the link support Con 
nected at one end to the bracket and hung at 
the other end to said clamp, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination in a support for galleys, 
of the galley bracket, a clamp having a 
notched or serrated inner surface, and adapt 
ed for the reception of a bar of the frame, and 
a link support connected at one end to the 
bracket and hung at the opposite end to said 
clamp, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof. I have signed my 
25 type case frames, of the galley bracket sup-name to this specification in the presence of 
also be hung to a slotted bracket, the same 
depending from the under side of the front 
brace of the type case frame. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The combination in a galley support for 
type case frames, of the galley bracket pro 
jecting inward over the type case and adapt 
ed to engage with the front bar of the same, 
With a link connection hung to the type case 
frame in such relation to the latter that said 
bracket and link connection may be swung 
under the type case when not in use, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination in a galley support for 
type case frames, of a galley bracket support 
ed upon said case, and a pair of jointed links 
One connected to the bracket, and the other 
hung to the inner side of the frame whereby 
the structure may be swung under the type 
case when not in use, substantially as shown 
and described. 
8. The combination in a galley support for 
ported upon the frame and a pair of jointed 
links, one connected to the bracket and the 
other to the inner side of the front bar of the 
frame, one of said connections having suffi 
30 cient play to permit the bracket to engage 
With or be released from the supporting bar 
Witnesses: 
MURRAY C. BOYER, 
JOSEPH. H. KLEIN. 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOSEPH L. DODD. 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511335.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. HIPWELL, 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE. 
7. Sheets-Sheet, I, 
No, 511,335, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
S. 
t 
 
WITNESSES: 
 
ATTORNEY. 
WashingtoN, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 511,335, 
 
 
3. 
A. 
e : 
72 
It"NA WN 
S-1 
i. 7. 
J. B. HIPWELL, 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE. 
7 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Deo. 26, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
36, t 
V 
DeWW2 
: S. 
His NATcMA Lithograring company. 
washing.TON, d. 
, 
(No Model.) 
No. 511,335, 
J. B., HIPWELL, 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE, 
7 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
s Y AIS" 
is 
 
 
Y. f. If 
ASAL H 
 
 
 
 
 
s: 
X 
WITNESSES: 
d a. 
S7 y 
Ed 
( a 
n 
 
The NATIONAL LIHOGRAPHiMG COMPANY 
WASHINGTON. A. C. 
- 
B 
y 
ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
J. B., HIPWELL, 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE. 
7 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No, 511,335, 
w 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
 
WITNESSES : 
-21%-24, 
C?67c-426.-2 V52 (auora 
2. - 
27 sets 
"SYK 
Ee 
the NATidMAL Lithographic company, 
WASHIMcNo, 
 
(No Model.) 
J. B. HIPWELL. 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 511,335, 
Y 
Patented De0. 26, 1893. 
SE 
 
 
T 1.2% A. 
 
K. 
  
WITNESSES: 
 
  
(? 
gf. 
ATIORNEY. 
Washinate, 
e. 
 
J. B. HIPWELL, 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE, w 
Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Deo. 26, 1893. 
72. Z6. 
W All E. 
ES 
27, 
zS 
I E. 
Es 
 
 
 
 
Rs 
 
E ammam 
 
 
 
ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
No. 511,335, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 511,335, 
J. B. HIPWELL. 
CIRCULAR KNITTING MACHINE, 
7 sheets-Sheet 7. 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
  
  
 
  
 
WITNESSES 
 
NS SH)122 
NiI2. V5 
Z 
B 
INElpR 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. HIPWELL OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CIRCULAR-KN-TTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 511,335, dated December 26, 1893. 
Application filed May 5, 1890, Serial No. 350,581. (No model.) 
55 
Go 
65 
75 
O 
25 
w 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN B. HIPWELL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Circular-Knitting Ma 
chines, which improvement is fully set forth 
in the following specification and accompa 
nying drawings. 
My invention relates to circular knitting 
machines, and consists, first, of a knitting 
machine having means substantially as de 
scribed for connecting or locking the needle 
dial and needle cylinder; second, of mechan 
ism substantially as described, for connect 
ing the cam and needle dials, and disconnect 
ing the cam dial and cam cylinder, so that 
the cam and needle dials may operate con 
jointly, when desired; third, of mechanism 
connected with the needle cylinder, for with 
drawing a portion of the needles on one side 
thereof from operation; fourth, of mechan 
ism substantially as described, connected with 
the cam cylinder for supplying an extra or 
reinforce thread to a portion of the fabric; 
fifth, of mechanism connected with the cam 
dial for withdrawing any desired number of 
needles of the needle dial from operation; 
finally of the combination and arrangement 
of parts herein set forth. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
a circular knitting machine, embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 represents a side view of 
the bed, cam cylinder, thread guide, &c. Fig. 
2 represents a side view of part of the rein 
force thread mechanism showing one means 
of carrying the bobbin for the reinforcing 
thread. Fig. 3 represents a vertical sectional 
view of one side of the cam cylinder with 
mechanism for inserting a reinforce thread in 
the stocking, as described. Fig. 4 represents 
a view of a section of the inner wall of the cam 
cylinder, showing the openings therein, to 
permit of attaching and adjusting the cam 
45 plates. Fig. 5 represents a view of a section 
of the inner wall of the cam cylinder show 
ing the cam plates attached thereto. Figs. 6 
and 7 represent views of a section of the in 
ner wall of the cam cylinder, showing sec 
tions of the two needle ways with switch closed 
and open, respectively. Fig. 7 represents a 
perspective view of detached portions of the 
35 
 
machine. Fig. 8 represents a top view, partly 
broken away of the needle cylinder showing 
extra grooves and needles, the extra needles 
being in operation. Fig. 9 represents a simi 
lar view of the same parts as in Fig. 8, the 
extra needles being out of operation. Fig. 10 
represents a perspective view of the needle 
cylinder. Fig. 10* represents a plan view of 
the needle dial. Fig. 11 represents a vertical 
section thereof, on line v v Fig. 10* showing 
the lever for locking the needle dial with the 
cam dial. Fig. 12 represents a bottom view of 
the cam dial. Fig. 13 represents a view show 
ing the inner campassage shown in Fig.12, as 
open. Fig. 14 represents a view showing the 
inner campassage, as closed at one end. Fig. 
15 represents a vertical section onlinea, ac, Fig. 
12, showing the cam dial with lever for control 
ling the switch, the said parts being inverted. 
Fig. 16 represents a Vertical section of the 
needle cylinder, and rotating plate for with 
drawing a portion of the cylinder needles 
from operation. Fig. 17 represents a plan 
view of a circular knitting machine embody 
ing my invention, the cam dial and carrier 
thereof, and the needle dial being removed 
therefrom, so as to show a plan view of the ro 
tating plate shown in Fig.16, and the operating 
lever therefor. Figs. 18, 19 and 20 represent 
different views of a portion of the segmental 
plate for operating the extra cylinder needles, 
with adjacent parts, the plate being separated 
from the other parts in Fig. 18 for clearer 
illustration, and the recesses and projections 
in the plate in said Figs. 18, 19 and 20, being 
inclined in reverse direction from that shown 
in Figs, 8 and 9. Fig. 21 represents a bottom 
view of the cam dial carrier. Fig. 22 repre 
sents a vertical section on line y, y, Fig.21; 
the parts being separate, partly in elevation, 
and in inverted position. Fig. 23 represents 
a bottom view of the plate connected with the 
cam dial shaft, and resting on the under plate 
of the carrier. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings:-A designates a 
circular knitting machine having a stationary 
needle cylinder B, and a rotatable cam cylin 
der C, with a needle dial D and a cam dial E, 
a thread guiding and feeding device F, and a 
Stitch regulating mechanism G, all of said 
95 
Od 
511,335 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
parts, except the cam and needle dials, being 
of the construction and operation as shown 
and described in application made by me for 
LettersFatent of date of April 21, 1888, Serial 
No. 271,424, and since they form no part of 
this invention, are not further described here 
in. The carrier H which individually sup 
ports the cam dial shaft J, has a supporting 
plate L, secured by screws L' on the under 
side thereof, the said plate sustaining the 
flange or rim M of a collar N, which is secured 
to the said shaft J. In the outer edge of the 
rim M, is a recess P, and in the inner edge of 
the carrier H is a recess Q, the said recesses 
forming, when opposite each other, an open 
ing adapted to receive a stud or key R., hav 
ing a cam S on the head thereof, whereby, by 
means of a cam U on a lever V, the stud R. 
may be withdrawn from said opening, so that 
the carrier H, and rim M with collar N and 
shaft J, are free to operate separately. The 
said key is connected with a spring R* which 
normally keeps it in the said opening. 
- 
The cam dial E, which is secured to the 
shaft J below the plate L, by means of a col 
lar W and screw X, has in its edge a recess 
Y to receive the end of a lever or arm Z at 
tached to the needle dial, so that the said 
needle dial and cam dial may be locked to 
gether when desired. 
On the under side of the cam dial E, are 
formed two passages, an inner one C of circu 
lar form and eccentric to the shaftJ, so that the 
dial needles having their butts guided therein, 
may be moved to and from the cylinder nee 
dles, and an outer one belliptical in form, and 
in communication with the said inner track. 
A switch A' operated by a spring lever B' 
opens or closes the communication between 
the passages; and a fixed returning piece C", 
against which the butts of the needles en 
gage, withdraws the needles within the nee 
dile dial. When the switch is closed as shown 
in Fig. 12, the butts of the needles are en 
gaged by the outside face of the cam, but 
when the switch is open, as in Fig. 13, the 
butts of the needles of the needle dial, enter 
the inner passage way, so that they are with 
drawn from operation; when the Switch may 
be closed, and the said needles kept from op 
eration as long as desired. When it is re 
quired to release the said needles, the switch 
is opened as in Fig.14, when the butts of the 
needles leave the inner passage, and again 
come in contact with the outer edge of the 
cam. The lever B' is locked in place by a 
stud D' thereon, entering an opening in the 
upper side of the cam dial. 
The inner side of the needle cylinder B is 
formed with a horizontal slot E", in which is 
fitted a curved plate F having a segmental 
slot G' therein, the inner Wall of which has a 
gate H' for the entrance within the said slot 
G' of the shank or stem. J of a segmental 
plate K, which is horizontally moved by 
means of a lever L' pivoted on the bed of the 
machine. The said plate K is provided on 
its outer edge with recesses M', and projec 
tions N' having shoulders P, the said pro 
jections being adapted to engage certain ex 
tra hereinafter described cylinder needles, 
according to the pattern of the segmental 
plate K', as may be desired, on the movement 
of said plate, and force the same into the re 
cesses, and the butts of said needles into the 
depressed portions N' of the cylinder grooves, 
and thus out of action. 
In Figs. 8 and 9, the recesses or grooves M' 
and the projections N' in the segmental plate 
are shown as inclined in an opposite or re 
verse direction from that shown in Figs. 18, 
19 and 20. Either direction of incline may 
be made as desired, all the recesses and pro 
jections being inclined, however, the one way 
in the same plate. 
The inner side of the cam cylinder is pro 
vided with an upper horizontal track Q', and 
a lower horizontal track R', with a control 
ling switch S', the said upper track being for 
the travel of the butts of the vertical needles 
in the making of the heel and toe portions of 
a stocking, and the lower track for the travel 
of said needles when making the leg and foot 
portions. By having a lower track for the 
needles, less of the upper portions of the same 
project above the cylinder, whereby there is 
less elasticity to the upper ends of the said 
needles, and by having the needles raised 
during the making of the heel and toe, so 
that a greater portion of each needle projects 
above the cylinder than when on the lower 
track, the said needles are better adapted to 
be engaged for being thrown out when de 
sired during the forming of said heel or toe. 
The stitch cams S* are secured to the inner 
face of the cam cylinder by means of the 
screws G* which pass through the bracket G', 
and the bosses G* on the same. The switch S is 
pivoted to the cam cylinder on its inner face, 
and operated by means of the lever S on the 
outside thereof. 
On the inner side of the back of the needle 
cylinder, are two lugs T', and on the under 
side of the needle dial are two depending lugs 
W adapted to engage with, and between the 
lugs T' of the needle cylinder, and thus lock 
the needle dial with the needle cylinder, so 
that the former is kept stationary during the 
knitting of the tube. 
W designates a device for supplying an ex 
tra thread to the stocking, so as to reinforce 
the same when desired, and consists of a frame 
W secured to the cam cylinder, and as shown 
in Fig. 2, said device may have an arm X' 
secured thereto for supporting the bobbin, 
and a thread support or guide X. The de 
vice primarily consists of a frame W provid 
ed with a clamping arm Y for the thread, the 
vertical portion of the said arm working in 
the frame, and having a spring Z surround 
ing the same to exert a pressure upon and 
hold the lower end thereof downward, as will 
be more fully hereinafter set forth, the upper 
end of said arm having a spring Z on its un 
75 
95 
IOC 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
55 
 
511,335 
O 
I5 p. 
der face and between which and the upper 
face of the thread guide F, thereinforce thread 
is adapted to be held. The lower end of the 
arm Y has a pivoted portion W8 with a roller 
at its lower end, the said roller traveling, a 
portion of the revolution of the cam cylinder, 
on a raised plate or elevated portion Y of the 
bed of the machine, so as to raise the upper 
clamping portion of the arm Y from the 
thread which passes through an opening in 
the thread guide F, and is fed to the knitting 
needles along with the thread supplied by 
said guide and feed. A movable arm Zhav 
ing a thread guide Z on its upper end, and a 
ivoted lower portion, is of itself pivoted to 
the frame W*, and is adapted to haveitslower 
end come in contact with, and ride over a 
cam Z on the bed of the machine, so as to os 
cillate the arm Z. and the guide, and thus 
draw on the thread on the bobbin, thereby 
loosening the same, and enabling the end 
thereof between the guide Zand the opening 
in the guide F to be more easily drawn in by 
the needles. The upper portion of the arm 
Z is connected by a spring W* to the frame 
W, to normally hold said arm in position, and 
the lower portion has a jointed part adapted 
to be raised out of the way of the cam Z, a 
spring mounted over the joint normally keep 
ing the arm extended. The arm Y and piv 
oted portion Withereof have a spring con 
nection W of preferably flat formation for 
keeping the Said parts in extended position, 
when the roller of the pivoted portion is on 
the raised plate Y, to raise the arm Y and 
thereby release the thread. The jointed con 
struction of arm Y is provided for a pur 
pose similar to that of arm Z and the spring 
Z surrounding upper part of said arm Y 
keeps the roller in the lower end of the same 
in regular contact or bearing with the surface 
upon which it travels. 
The operation of the device W' is readily 
understood. As the cam cylinder revolves, 
the roller of the pivoted piece Wrides on 
the bed of the machine, and the clamping 
arm Y is depressed so that the reinforce 
thread is clamped or held fast between the 
same and the upper part of the feeding de 
vice F; as the swinging arm Z comes in con 
tact with the cam Z, a small portion of the 
thread is unwound from the bobbin, so that 
when the roller at the lower end of arm Y 
rides upon the cam Y, and the arm Y is 
raised and the thread released, it is readily 
drawn to the needles. 
One half of the needle cylinder is supplied 
with an extra set of needles K, located be 
tween the front needles of the cylinder, and 
in front of the needles of the needle dial, and 
adapted to be thrown, either into, or out of 
operation, as desired. When making ribbed 
work, the extra needles are thrown out of op 
eration, and the dial needles on the same side 
thereof as the extra needles are thrown into 
operation, but in plain work the said dial 
needles are withdrawn from operation, and 
the extra needles of the cylinder thrown in 
operation, so that the needles on one half of 
the cylinder are operative for plain work. 
In operating the machine, so as to form a 
tube for a stocking, having a ribbed front 
and a plain back, with integral pockets for 
the heel and toe. portions, the extra set of 
needles K in front of the needle cylinder, 
and directly under the needles in the front 
of the needle dial, is placed in operation by 
rotating the segmental plate K by means of 
the lever L', the needles in the front of the 
needle dial being first thrown out of opera 
tion by opening the gate A' of the inner cam 
passage-way in the cam dial; thus making 
twice as many needles in operation in the 
front of the needle cylinder, as there are in 
the back thereof, so as to form the plain part 
of the leg portion; while the needles of the 
back of the needle cylinder, and the back of 
the needle dial, form the ribbed portion of 
said leg. When the pocket is to be made, 
the needles in the back of the needle cylin 
der are thrown out of operation by drawing 
up their butts or cam parts, so as to be free 
from the cams of the cam cylinder, then 
throwing out of operation the needles on the 
back of the needle dial, by locking the cam 
dial to the needle dial, and releasing the cam 
dial from the cam cylinder by unlocking the 
carrier and the part N carrying the cam dial 
shaft, so as to leave the needles in the front 
of the needle cylinder free to be operated on 
to form the pocket for the heel, which is nar 
rowed by revolving the cam cylinder around 
the needle cylinder, first in one direction, 
then in the opposite direction, and throwing 
out of Operation as required, one or more 
needles, first on One side, and then on the 
other. After being sufficiently narrowed, the 
pocket is widened by throwing into operation, 
in the same manner, the needles thrown out 
for narrowing. After the heelpocket is made, 
to make a ribbed top and plain bottom for the 
foot, the needles in the back of the needle 
cylinder are thrown into operation by lowering 
the same. The cam dialis then locked to the 
carrier, and unlocked from the needle dial, 
when the knitting is continued, forming a 
ribbed top and plain bottom. The toe pocket 
is made in the manner already described. If 
it be desired to form an all ribbed leg por 
tion, the cam switch of the cam dial is opened 
so as to release the butts of all the dial nee 
dles, and then closed so that the same are 
guided in the cam-way b, and the extra, nee 
dles on the front of the needle cylinder are 
thrown out of operation by means of the seg 
mental plate K and lever L'. To form now 
the pocket on the ribbed leg, the cam switch 
of the cam dial is opened so as to withdraw 
all the needles of the needle dial, and the 
cam dial is unlocked from the carrier and 
locked with the needle dial, the needles of 
the rear of the needle cylinder being drawn 
up or Out of the Way of the cams on the cam. 
cylinder, and the extra needles in the front 
3O 
35 
55 
 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
IIc. 
II5 
I 25 
511,335 
of the needle cylinder thrown into operation 
and the narrowing and widening of the pocket 
is performed as before described. 
It will be seen that I am enabled to change 
the operation of the machine from ribbed to 
plain, or from plain to ribbed fabric as de 
sired, without removing any of the needles 
from their places on the machine, and by 
mechanism convenient of access and easy of 
operation. 
In making a tube for a stocking on the ma 
chine herein described, I can either make the 
leg portion partly or wholly ribbed as desired, 
with a plain pocket for the heel, and a partly 
plain and partly ribbed, or wholly ribbed ex 
tension for the foot portion, with a plain 
pocket for the toe. The fabric thus made 
can be continued of indefinite length, and a 
portion severed therefrom, and the cut edges 
so united as to for in a stocking, seamless ex 
cepting at the toe. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A circular knitting machine having a 
stationary needle cylinder, a rotatable cam 
cylinder, a needle dial, a cam dial, a shaft in 
connection with said cam dial, and provided 
with a collar, a carrier secured to the cam cyl 
inder and supporting said shaft, mechanism 
substantially as described for disconnecting 
said collar from said carrier, and mechanism 
substantially as described for locking said 
cam and needle dials, said parts being com 
bined, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of a stationary needle 
cylinder, a needle dial, a rotatable cam cyl 
inder with a carrier, a cam dial with a shaft 
having a collar supported by said carrier, and 
means substantially as described for connect 
ing and disconnecting said carrier and collar, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of a stationary needle 
cylinder, with a needle dial, a rotatable cam 
cylinder, a carrier secured to said cam cylin 
der, a cam dial with shaft having a collar 
with flange thereon, a plate connected with 
said carrier and supporting said flanged col 
lar, and a locking device for said flanged col 
lar and carrier, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
4. A stationary needle cylinder, with a nee 
dle dial, a rotatable cam cylinder with a car 
rier, a plate secured to said carrier, a cam dial 
with a shaft, a collar secured to said shaft 
and resting on said plate, said collar and said 
carrier having recesses thereon, and a lock 
ing pin or key adapted to be inserted in said 
recesses, for locking said collar and carrier, 
said parts being combined, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
5. A stationary needle cylinder, a needle 
dial, a rotatable cam cylinder and a cam dial 
having a locking connection there with, said 
needle dial having a locking arm adapted to 
lock it and the cam dial together, Said parts 
being combined substantially as described. 
6. In a circular knitting machine, a revo 
luble cam cylinder having an upper and a 
lower horizontal track on the inner face there 
of adapted to support the butts of the cylin 
der needles thereon, a switch for directing 
the said needles from one track to the other, 
and a stationary needle cylinder with needles, 
said parts being combined substantially as 
described. 
7. In a circular knitting machine, a needle 
cylinder with grooves in its outer walls hav 
ing depressed portions, and a horizontal slot 
in its inner wall, a slotted ring or plate fitted 
in said slot, a segmental plate having its shank 
in the slot of the ring or plate, and a lever 
for operating said segmental plate, said seg 
mental plate having its outer edge provided 
with projections and recesses, said parts be 
ing combined, substantially as described. 
8. A stationary needle cylinder with a hori 
Zontal recess in its inner wall, and needle 
grooves in its outer wall, one half of the cyl 
inder having more grooves than the other 
half for extra needles, a slotted plate fitted 
in said horizontal recess, a segmental plate 
with projections and recesses on its outer 
edge, and having a shank or stem in the slot 
of the slotted plate, and a lever for operating 
said segmental plate, said parts being com 
bined, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
9. In a circular knitting machine, a station 
alry needle cylinder, a needle dial, a rotatable 
cam cylinder with a carrier having a recess 
in its inner edge, a plate secured to said car 
rier, a cam dial with shaft, a collar secured 
to said shaft, and having a flange with a re 
cess in its outer edge, said flange bearing on 
the said plate, a spring-actuated pin with cam 
head, a lever with cam adapted to engage 
said cam head of the pin, so as to raise the 
same, and thereby unlock the said carrier and 
flange of the collar, and an arm adapted to 
lock the cam and needle dials, said parts be 
ing combined, substantially as described. 
10. A circular knitting machine having an 
elevated portion on its base, a rotatable cam 
cylinder, a frame secured thereto with a rising 
and falling arm moving therein, and having 
its lower portion adapted to ride on said ele 
vated portion of the base, and its upper end 
to clamp a reinforce thread, a thread guide 
and a bobbin carrier moving with said cam 
cylinder, said parts being combined, substan 
tially as described. 
11. A circular knitting machine having an 
elevated portion on its base, a rotatable cam 
cylinder with a frame secured thereto, a ris 
ing and falling arm in said frame, having a 
pivoted portion carrying a roller at its lower 
end adapted to ride on said elevated portion 
of the base, a spring for extending said arm 
and pivoted portion, a thread guide and a bob 
bin carrier secured to said rising and falling 
arm, said parts being combined substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
12. In a circular knitting machine, a base 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
Oo 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
 
511,335 
With an elevated portion thereon, and a cam tionary needle cylinder with an extra set of 
on said base and between the ends of the ele- needle grooves in one side thereof, a needle 35 
vated portion, a cam cylinder with a frame 
dial, a rotatable cam cylinder, a two-Way cam 
dial, and a segmental plate having recesses 
secured thereto, an arm moving in said frame 
and having its upper end adapted to clamp a 
and projections, and located in said needle 
cylinder for operating an extra set of needles, 
reinforce thread, and its lower end to ride on 
working in said extra grooves, said parts be 
said elevated portion of the base, a thread 
guide and a spring actuated swinging arm 
ing combined substantially as described. 
16. A circular knitting machine having a 
With a thread guide at its upper end, and hav 
ing its lower end adapted to come in contact 
cam cylinder, a needle dial, and a cam dial, 
and provided with means substantially as de 
With said cam, said parts being combined, sub 
scribed whereby the cam dial may be locked 
stantially as described. 
with the needle dial, said parts being com 
13. In a circular knitting machine, a needle 
cylinder with a horizontally movable segmen 
bined substantially as described. 
tal plate having projections and recesses 
17. A circular knitting machine having a 
cam cylinder, a stationary needle cylinder, a 
formed on its outer edge, a guide for said 
plate, and an operating lever, said parts be 
stationary needle dial, a cam dial, a rotatable 
ing combined, substantially as described. 
shaft on which said cam dial is mounted, 
means substantially as described for connect 
14. In a circular knitting machine, the com 
ing said dials, and mechanism substantially 
bination of a stationary needle cylinder hav 
as described for connecting said cam cylinder 
ing extra needles Working in extra grooves on 
and shaft, said parts being combined, substan 
One side thereof, a cam cylinder, a needle dial, 
tially as set forth. 
a cam dial with a two-way cam for the nee 
18. A circular knitting machine having a 
dles of the needle dial, a carrier on said cam 
cylinder detachably secured to the shaft of cam cylinder, a needle dial and a cam dial, 
and provided with means for locking said 
the cam dial, a segmental plate having re 
cam dial with either said cam cylinder or said 
cesses and adapted to come in contact with 
needle dial, said parts being combined sub 
the extra needles, and throw the same in and 
stantially as described. 
out of operation, a lever for operating said 
3o plate and means substantially as described 
for locking the cam and needle dials, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
15. In a circular knitting machine, a sta 
JoHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
WM. C. WIEDERSHEIM. 
JOHN B. HIPWELL, 
Witnesses: 
40 
45 
55 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511435.txt	(No Model.) 
7 Sheets-Sheet l, 
C. KEPR, 
MACHINE FOR AND METHOD OF WEAVING COILED WIRE FABRICs, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
No. 511,435. 
 
 
  
14%ess es. 
42. 
 
zzzzzzzy 
(6- 4.6% 
MACHINE FOR AND METHOD OF WEAVING COILED WIRE, FABRICs. 
No. 511435, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
 
 
 
YYYASC 
SNSSS 
 
 
 
 
onal Lithograph-Na cow' 
washNGTON, 
(No Model.) 
7 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
MACHINE FOR AND METHOD OF WEAVING COILED WIRE FABRICS, 
No. 511,435, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
C. KEER. 
 
 
 
/(2ess 221 
C Owus. 
coMANY., 
No Model.) 
Sheets-Sheet 4. 
MACHINE FOR AND METHOD OF WEAVING COILED WIRE FABRICs, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
No. 511,435, 
C. KEHR, 
 
-Aze 66 ses, 
Q-. ly OMus. 
- 
. 
r 
All- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
H 
Grima 
ETHILIHEITIFRETI 
wa 
WA8i-Naron, , o, 
(No Model.) 
7 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
MACHINE FOR AND METHOD OF WEAVING COILED WIRE FABRICs, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
No. 51,1435, 
C. KEHR. 
 
 
 
s 
n 
 
4-Z. 
 
Z 
 
 
 S4 
s.S. 
Vs SN ass s3S a- 
..css. 
& N s 
& & X\, is 
39 s--4 NS3 
Nk 
s 
4N 
s3e 
seas 
- PRP 
(No Model.) 
7 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
MACHINE FOR AND METHOD OF WEAVING COILED WIRE FABRICS, 
No. 511435, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893, . 
C. KEHR, 
(No Model.) 
Sheets-Sheet 7, 
C. KEHR. 
MACHINE FOR AND METHOD OF WEAVING COILED WIRE FABRICS, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
No. 511435, 
t 
NNN 
has earm 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
CYRUS REHR, OF LAKESIDE, ILLINOIS. 
MACHINE FOR AND METHOD OF WEAVING COILED-WIRE FABRIC. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 511,435, dated December 26, 1893. 
Application filed September 8, 1892, Serial No. 445,383, (No model.) 
 
O 
To all, whom it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, CYRUS KEHR, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Lakeside, in 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Machines for and Methods of Weav 
ing Coiled. Wire Fabric; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My improvement consists in certain addi 
tions to and improvements of such machines 
and methods as are described in Letters Pat 
ent of the United States No. 348,150, granted 
to Orlando P. Briggs, August 24, 1886; No. 
480,007, granted to O.P. Briggs and F.L. Bry 
ant, August 2, 1892; and No. 463,993, granted 
to me November 24, 1891. My improvement 
is also applicable to what are termed hand 
machines; namely, machines in which the 
coil-forming mechanism is operated by hand 
and the fabric is formed upon a table and 
shifted and controlled by hand upon said ta 
ble and the coils are cut by hand. In other 
words, the mechanism involved in my im 
3o provement is to be so geared as to operate au 
tomatically in conjunction with the coil-form 
ing mechanism. Whether the remainder of 
the work is performed automatically, is im 
material so far as my improvement is con 
What is termed coiled wire fabric is formed 
by pushing the wire through a spiral passage, 
whereby it is formed into a spiral, to a suffi 
cient distance to form the length of the fab 
ric, and then cutting off the coil and forcing 
more wire through the spiral passage and 
causing the second coil to intertwine with 
the first at each turn, then cutting the Sec 
ond coil and forming a third and causing it, 
while being formed, to intertwine with the 
second. Heretofore, in the insertion of the 
new or in-coming coil into the last-finished or 
marginal coil of the fabric, the strength of 
the wire of which the coil has been composed 
so has been solely relied upon to effect the pro 
35 cerned. 
45 
40 
 
 
 
55 
65 
gression of the coil and devices designed to 
keep the coil in the proper course to inter 
twine with the marginal coil were relatively 
stationary and therefore passive in character 
and dependent for effectiveness upon the 
strength of the coil. It has been found that 
friction and the flexibility and pliability of 
the wire prevent this method from being per 
fect. The unavoidable variation in the pitch 
of the coils is also an element operating 
against the success of this method; for, if 
the in-coming coil differs in pitch from the 
marginal coil, the end of the in-coming coil 
will meet the turns of the marginal coil or 
any faces of parts of the machine concerned 
in holding and shifting the marginal coil and 
be deflected or stopped thereby. 
According to my improvement, the end of 
the in-coming coil is engaged and guided or 
led through its proper path. By this method 
the insertion of the new coil is not depend 
ent upon the strength of the wire, but upon 
the operation of the mechanism employed in 
engaging and leading the forward end of the 
coil. 
The essential part of the apparatus for 
practicing my improved process may be 
termed a spiral needle, which is inserted into 
the path to be traversed by the in-coming coil 
and then made to engage the end of the in 
coming coil and travel synchronously with 
the latter from the coiler spirally through the 
turns of the marginal coil. 
The accompanying drawings show my im 
provement applied to such a machine as is 
illustrated in said patent to Briggs and Bry 
anf, No. 480,007. 
In Said drawings, Figures 1 and 2 constitute 
a vertical sectional view of the machine, the 
machine being of such length as to require 
two sheets for one view. Figs. 3 and 4 con 
stitute, in a similar manner, a plan of the 
same machine. Fig. 5 is a vertical section in 
the line a-b of Fig. 3 looking in the direction 
of the arrow. Fig. 6 is a plan of the coil 
forming mechanism. Fig. 7 is a detail of the 
rolls and guides concerned in forcing the wire 
through the spiral passage. Figs, 8, 9, and 
10 are details of the needle, coils, and knife. 
FigS. 11 and 12 show alternative means for 12o 
 
 
2 
511,485 
 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
rotating the needle. Fig. 13 shows a detail tenth of the space between the two cam-faces, 
of the mechanism for reciprocating the mar- the interval during which the shaft, B', does 
ginal coil longitudinally. 
not rotate will be only one-tenth as long as 
In said drawings, A is a frame upon which the period during which it does rotate. The 
the operative parts of the machine are sup- object in providing these continuous and in 
ported. Said frame is a little more than termittent movements is to afford means for 
twice as long as the length of the fabric to be periodically arresting the action of the coil 
WOWel. 
forming mechanism and at the same time pro 
A' is a horizontal carriage supported by vide continuously-moving parts which may 
wheels, A, arranged at each corner of said be treated as a Source of movement for other 
frame and resting in ways, A, fixed upon the portions of the machine which are to operate 
frame, A, parallel to the length of said frame. during the suspension of the operation of the 
The same result may be obtained by applying coiling mechanism. 
the wheels, A', to the frame, A, and the ways, 
For convenience, the coil-forming mechan 
A, to the carriage, A'. The object of said ism will be termed the coiler. This is desig 
wheels and ways is to provide a limited lon- nated by the letter C. As any suitable form 
gitudinal reciprocation of the carriage, A', as of coiler may be used in connection with the 
and for the purposes hereinafter set forth. 
other parts of the machine, and as a variety 
B is a band-wheel mounted loosely upon a of coilers are already known to those familiar 
driving-shaft, B, which shaft is supported in with this art, it is deemed sufficient to herein 
bearings, B, suitably located upon one end describe one of said coilers as to merely its 
of the frame, A. 
general features. From the base, C', rise four 
B is a bevel-gear loosely surrounding the bearing-posts, C', each of which has extend 
shaft, B, and secured to the wheel, B, and Bing from its upper end downward through its 
is a bevel-gear meshing into the bevel-gear, B, middle a space in which are the bearing 
and surrounding and keyed to the worm-shaft, blocks, C. Said bearing-blocks, C., form bear 
B', which worm-shaft engages the worm gear- ings for the horizontal parallel shafts, C, and 
wheel, B, and imparts rotation to the latter. C, C designating the lower of said shafts and 
The worm-gear, B, surrounds and is keyed to C the upper of said shafts. Said shafts are 
a horizontal shaft, B, and upon said shaft, geared to each other by spur-gears, C", applied, 
B", at one side of the worm-gear wheel, B, and respectively, to the shafts, C, and C5. 
keyed to said shaft, is a spur-gear, B, mesh- 
C is a spur-gear located upon the shaft, C, 
ing into a small spur-gear, B', mounted upon and meshing into another spur-gear, C', suit 
and keyed to the horizontal shaft, B". Sur- ably supported between the shafts, C, and B', 
rounding the shaft, B', is a cam-wheel, B, and in turn meshing into a spur-gear, Bt, 
provided with two cam-faces, b'. 
mounted upon the shaft, B. Upon the mid 
Bisa clutch-lever pivoted between its ends, dle of the shafts, C, and C, are located wire 
as at b, and having its upper end in engage- forcing rolls, c', and c', respectively, which 
ment with a clutch, B, which is keyed to the rolls bear upon each other and are turned 
shaft, B', and adapted to engage the band- when said shafts are rotated. The two mid 
wheel, B, so that motion may be transmitted idle posts, C, terminate above in arches, C10, 
from said band-wheel to said shaft, B'. The and a vertical screw, C, extends downward 
relation of said band-wheel, clutch-lever, B', through each such arch and bears upon an 
and cam-wheel, B, is such that when the expanding spring, (not shown,) which spring 
clutch, B, is thrown into engagement with in turn bears upon the bearing-block, C, lo 
the band-wheel, B, the lower end of the arm, cated in the adjacent bearing-post, C. The 
B1, will be in the path of the cam-faces, b, lower bearing-blocks, C, have fixed positions 
and ready to be moved by the latter when in the lower portions of the channels or ver 
they pass said end. The said clutch is held tical spaces in the posts, C, so that the posi 
normally in engagement with said band-wheel |tions of the spur-gears, C', and the wire forc 
by an expanding coiled spring, B'. (See Figs. ing roll on the shaft, C, are unyielding. Driv 
4 and 6.) 
ing the screw, C, downward will cause the 
From the foregoing it will be seen that if spring, C, to press the adjacent upper bear 
the band-wheel, B, is rotated continuously the ing-block, C, downward upon the shaft, CP, 
ears, B, B, worm-shaft, B, worm-gear, B", and said shaft will be pressed down so that 
the upper wire-forcing rolland the spur-gears 
shaft, B", spur-gears, B, and B, shaft, B', upon said shafts will be forced together. 
and cam-wheel, B, will be operated continu 
C', is a guide for leading the wires, f, to the 
ously, while the clutch-lever, B, clutch, B', 
and shaft, B', will be operated intermittently, wire-forcing rolls, and C is a guide to lead 
and that the interval during which the shaft, the wire from the forcing-rolls to the coil 
B', rotates will hold the same ratio to the in- forming spindle, C. Said coil-forming spin 
terval during which it does not rotate as the dle has around it a spiral passage and a shell, 
ratio of the spaces between the cam-faces, b, |C. The wire is forced through said spiral 
passage between said spindle and said shell 
holds to the length of said faces. For exam 
ple, if the length of each cam-face is only one- and is thereby transformed into a coil, which 
- 
o 
75 
85 
95 
OC) 
los 
d 
II5 
I 25 
55 9 
65 
 
 
511,435 
d 
25 
40 
45 
75 
passes off over the end of the spindle, C1, 
into the channel, D, to be hereinafter de 
scribed. 
D is a channel formed in the upper portion 
and lengthwise of the carriage, A', in line 
with the spindle, C, so as to receive the nee 
dle, N, and the coil projected from the coiler, 
C, and at the side of said channel is a wall, 
d, to aid in retaining said coil and needle. 
D' is a roller mounted upon and extending 
lengthwise of the frame, A, at the rear of the 
channel, D, and arranged to be rotated, as 
will be hereinafter described... 
D is a roller located above and parallel to 
the roller, D', and having its journals resting 
loosely in vertical guide-ways, D, so that it 
will rest by gravity upon the roller, D', or 
upon the woven-wire fabric, F, when the lat 
ter lies between said rollers. The roller, D', 
is rotated in the direction indicated by the 
arrow, and, together with the roller, D, serves 
to draw the coiled fabric away from the line 
in which the coils are formed. 
The shaft, B', which has already been de 
scribed as rotating continuously, has sur 
rounding it rigidly the spur-gear, B. Be 
neath, parallel to, and extending along the 
entire length of the carriage, A, is a shaft, 
E, which receives motion from the spur-gear, 
B', through the spur-gear, E, with which it 
meshes and which surrounds and is keyed to 
the shaft, E. 
At the left end or foot of the machine, a 
mutilated gear, E, surrounds and is secured 
to the shaft, E. Said mutilated gear has 
upon its periphery four equidistant teeth, e. 
The roll, D', has at the foot end of the ma. 
chine a spur-gear, D', which is in plane with 
the mutilated gear, E, and of proper diame 
ter to have its teeth reach into the path of 
the teeth, e, of said mutilated gear. The 
rolls, D', and D', may or may not be provided 
with intermeshing gears like the one shown 
at D, Fig. 4. It will now be seen that with 
each quarter rotation of the mutilated gear, 
E, the rolls, D', and D', will be rotated through 
a few degrees. The extent of this rotation of 
said rolls is sufficient to move a point in the 
circumference of one of said rolls through a 
distance equal to the diameter of one of the 
coils of the fabric, the precise distance being 
attained by establishing the proper ratio of 
difference between the mutilated gear, E, 
and the spur-gear, D'. The length of the in 
tervals between these partial rotations of the 
rolls, D', and D, is dependent upon the ve 
locity of the mutilated gear, E, and the gears 
intervening between said mutilated gear and 
the band-wheel, B. 
In starting the machine, the fabric, F, is 
managed by the operator until enough has 
been formed to be properly engaged by the 
mechanism of the machine. 
Then the mar 
ginal or last-finished coil is held parallel to 
and partially in the groove, D, by the pins, 
G', of the pin-bars G, the pins G', one of 
said pin-bars standing in the coil next to the 
marginal or final coil and bearing against 
both of said coils, and the rolls, D', and D, 
tending to draw the fabric away from said 
pin-bar. (See Figs. 8 and 9.) By this means 
every marginal coil is brought with great 
accuracy into the desired relation with the 
coiling-axis, or the line which coincides with 
the axis of the new coil as the latter is be 
ing projected from the coiler, so that every 
turn of the marginal coil is in the precise po 
sition best adapted to allow the new coil to 
intertwine at each rotation with said turn. 
The groove or channel, D, is thus in accurate 
relation with every turn of the marginal coil, 
and the needle, N, in being projected through 
said groove toward the coiler is guided at 
every turn into precise relation with each 
turn of the final coil. As soon as a coil is 
completed and cut adjacent to the coiler, the 
pin-bar, G, then in engagement with the fab 
ric must be released, in order that the fabric 
may be drawn from the coiling-axis by the 
fabric-drawing mechanism, and at the same 9o 
time the other pin-bar, G, must be brought 
into proper relation to engage the coil next 
succeeding the one which was last engaged 
by said pin-bar. This is accomplished by al 
ternating the elevation of said pin-bars with 
one another. Immediately after the last-fin 
ished coil is cut adjacent to the coiler, the 
pin-bar then in engagement is lowered, while 
immediately following this change, the pin 
bar ascends and the other pin-bar descends 
and moves into the path of the coil next suc 
ceeding the one last engaged and arrests the 
movement of said succeeding coil, whereby 
the movement of the entire fabric is arrested. 
The upper pin-bar, G, is located beneath 
and has its pins, G', rising through the open 
ings, g, in the top of the carriage, A'. The 
lower pin-bar, G, is located beneath the up 
per pin-bar and has its pins, G', rising through 
the upper pin-bar between the pins, G', of the 
upper pin-bar and through openings, g, in the 
top of the carriage, A'. - Each of the pin-bars, 
G, has a vertical support G' resting upon a 
cam, G, on the shaft, E, the extended portions 
of the cams which receive the supports from 
one pin-bar alternating in radial relation with 
the extended portion of the cams supporting 
the other pin-bar, so that as the shaft, E, is 
rotated, the pin-bars, G, are alternately ele 
wated, whereby the pins on the respective 
bars, G, are alternately extended upward 
through the top of the carriage, A', into the 
path of the coils of the fabric, one set of said 
pins always rising through the top of said car 
riage, while the other set of said pins is be 
ing drawn downward through said top. 
G, G, are depending arms attached by their 
upper ends to the carriage, A', close to the 
sides of the pin-bars and serve to so confine 
the bars, G, as to allow the latter to move only 
in a vertical plane. (See Fig. 2.) If so de 
sired, such knife-bars as are described in said 
95 
o 
 
2 
O 
5 
2 
5 
O 
O 
5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
u 
4. 
511,485 
75 
patent to Briggs and Bryant, No. 480,007, may 
be placed upon the machine in proper arrange 
ment to co-operate with the pin-bars, G, as de 
seribed in said patent. 
The mechanisms leading from the shaft, E, 
to the pin-bars, G, and from said shaft to the 
rolls, D', and, D', are properly timed with ref 
erence to each other to produce the necessary 
simultaneous action. 
Attention is now asked to the mechanism 
for periodically shifting the carriage, A', from 
and toward the coiler. An arm, A, extends 
from said carriage toward the shaft, E, and 
there supports two rollers, a, one extending 
to each side of the periphery of a cam, J, and 
each presenting to said cam a face to which 
the line of movement of the carriage is sub 
stantially perpendicular. Said cam is duplex, 
being composed of two disk-form sections, J', 
each loosely surrounding and separately ad 
justable upon the shaft, E, by means of set 
bolts, J', and having on the face toward the 
adjacent roller, a, one or more cam faces, i', 
the cam face or faces on the one section, J', 
alternating in radial spacing witi that of those 
on the other section. The sections, J', of the 
duplex cam, J, are separated sufficiently to 
cause; each roller to be pressed laterally by 
the passing. of the cam-face on the other 
cam-section, so that when said other canal 
face, J, is rotated past the second roller the 
movement is reversed. Thus the carriage, 
A', is alternately shifted upon the ways, A, 
a distance equal to the difference between 
the distance between the rolls, ca, and the 
thlekness of the cam, J, from the plane of the 
cam-faces at one side of the cam to the plane 
of the cam-faces at the other side of said cam. 
This distance may be varied by shifting the 
cam-sections of the cam, J. The precise path 
of reciprocation of the carriage, A, may also 
be varied in location by bodily shifting the 
cam, J, toward and from the head of the ma 
chine upon the shaft, E. The distance through 
which said carriage reciprocates should be 
equal to about one-half the distance between 
the turns of the coils in the fabric, F, in or 
der that such turns may always be brought 
out of the spiral path through which the new 
coil is projected, to the end that the new coil 
may run forward in its path and intertwine 
at each turn with the marginal or last-finished 
coil without hitting the latter. The radial 
position of the cam-faces,i, with reference 
to the shaft, E, is to be so adjusted as to cause: 
one of said cam-faces to operate immediately 
after the operation of the knife which cuts 
the coil adjacent to the coiler. 
I, is the knife for cutting the wire adjacent 
to the coiler as often as a coil is completed. 
L' is a stationary block through which the 
coil passes as it comes from the coiler and 
against which the coil is cut by said knife, L. 
Said knife, L, is attached to a vertically-re 
cuprocating bar, L, confined above in a guide, 
Li, and extending below through a guide-plate, 
L*. The lower end of said baris surrounded by 
an expanding coiled spring, L, which has its 
lower end bearing upon said guide-plate and 
its upper end resting against the shoulders, 
l, and the expansion of said spring keeps 
said bar and said knife normally elevated. 
The knife is preferably formed with a hole, 
l, converging from the side opposite the coiler 
toward the coiler and registering normally 
with the opening through the stationary block, 
L', in order that the needle, N, may be the 
better guided to register with the opening in . 
said block, L'. (See: Fig. 10.) The new coil 
is projected through said opening, l, and the 
downward movement of the knife causes the 
shearing of the coil. From a point below the 
level of the shaft, B, an anti-friction roller, 
l, is supported by said bar, L, and extends 
laterally beneath a cam, L, surrounding the 
shaft, B. As the extended portion of said 
cam passes between said shaft, B, and said 
roller, l, the latter and the bar, L, and knife, 
L, are forced downward, so as to cut, and 
when said extended portion is passed out of 
engagement with said roller, the latter and 
said bar and knife are allowed to rise in re 
sponse to the expansion of said spring, L. 
The extended portion of said cam, L', is so 
placed radially upon the shaft, B, as to cause 
the knife, L, to operate immediately after the 
forcing-rolls of the coiler have rotated a suf 
ficient number of times to project a coil of 
the desired length and have stopped. 
The needle, N, is shown located upon a car 
riage, O, which carriage is supported by the 
frame, A, at the end of the latter opposite the 
coiler, C. Said carriage, O, is arranged in 
horizontal ways, O, extending lengthwise of 
the frame, A. The needle, N, has a stem,N', 
resting in bearings, n', axially in line with 
the coiling-axis. From this stem the needle 
extends toward the coiler a distance equal to 
the length of the fabric to be woven. The 
spiral turns of the needle conform in direc 
tion, pitch, and mean diameter to the direc 
tion, pitch, and mean diameter of the coils to 
beformed, so that said needle may be rotated 
and simultaneously move: toward the coiler 
through the precise path to be traversed by 
the in-coming coil. At its free end, said nee 
dle is tubular for a short distance, as indi 
cated in Fig. 9, in order that the new coil 
may enter or telescope with said needle to the 
extent of a few turns. 
O' is a relatively small gearpinion mounted 
upon the stem,N', of the needle, N. 
O' is a relatively large bevel gear mounted 
on a shaft, O, located upon the carriage, O, 
at right angles to the stem,N', so as to allow 
the bevel wheel, O', to intermesh with the 
pinion, O. 
O is a spur-gear mounted on the outer end 
of the shaft, O, and meshing into a horizon 
tal rack, O', extending lengthwise upon the 
frame, A, beneath said spur-gear. It will be 
seen that by reason of this arrangement of 
O 
is 
20 
25 
3o 
35 
4O 
45 
So 
55 
bo 
95 
IOC 
IoS 
IIO 
I 25 
13. 
 
511435. 
 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
gears, rotation would be imparted to the nee- cupies. In Figs, 1 and 3, the lug, p", is shown 
dle, N, when the carriage, O, is reciprocated; in contact with the lug, o, at the side of the 
that When the carriage, O, is moved toward latter toward the coiler and drawing the car 
the coiler, C, the needle, N, will be progressed riage away from the coiler. An inspection of 
bodily toward the coiler and at the same time Fig. 3 will show that the lug, p, will soon be 
rotated in the same manner that the new coil carrying said ways out of engagement with the 
is rotated while being projected through the lug, o, and around the wheel, P, into the path 
channel, D; that when the carriage, O, is held of the other lug, O. Between the time of the 
in the opposite direction, the needle, N, will disengagement from the first lug, o, and the 
be moved bodily away from the coiler and at engagement with the other lug, o, the carriage 
the same time rotated in the opposite direc- is at rest, and the coiling, cutting, and fabric 
tion. Thus the needle, N, may be made to shifting mechanisms are so timed as to Operate 
traverse toward the coiler through the pre during thisinterval. As soon as the lug, p", en 
cise path to be traversed by the new coil and gages with the second lug, o, the carriage, O, 
then retract through the same path. 
is set in motion toward the coiler, and the 
The carriage, O, should rest during a short needle is again inserted into the last-finished 
interval at each end of its range of move-coil and through the channel, D, to receive 
ment. Then, when the carriage is at its limit the next new coil. In going around the wheel, 
of movement toward the coiler, the needle, N, P, the lug, p", is disengaged from the lug, O, 
is resting in proper position to receive the end at that side of the carriage and subsequently 
of the new coil, as shown in Fig. 10. The re-engaged with the lug, o, at the other side 
needle should be thus at rest until the in- of the carriage. Thus an interval of rest is 
Coming coil has progressed sufficiently to en- afforded during which the coiler may be 
ter the needle. It should then start and move started and a new coil driven into the tubul 
away from the coiler synchronously with the lar end of the needle, N, before the needle is 
new coil. Then, when the carriage is at the retracted. 
- 
other limit of its movement and the needle 
The sprocket chain may, obviously, be re 
has been entirely retracted from the fabric, placed-by any other form of endless band, 
the needle and carriage will remainstationary but I recommend the sprocket chain as being 
long enough to permit the cutting of the wire more precise in its operation. 
by the knife, L, and the shifting of the fab- 
It is to be noted, that the needle, N, may be 
ric on the pins, G', and the longitudinal shift- made of a relatively thick and rigid wire, so 
ing of the carriage, A'. This period of rest that there will be little tendency for the free 
may, however, be avoided by retracting the end thereof to depart from the true path on 
needle farther than is necessary to disengage being inserted. At the time of retracting, 
it from the fabric and then returning it, the the entire needle is intertwined with the last 
cutting and shifting above mentioned being 
finished coil and cannot depart from the 
effected during the time in which the needle 
proper path, and because the forward end of 
is out of the range of the fabric. 
the new coil is engaged by the end of the 
Warious means may be employed for con 
needle, such end of the coil must follow the 
trolling the carriage, O. In the drawings, I 
latter through the proper path. 
illustrate the bevel gear, P, mounted upon a 
In Figs. 11 and 12, Ishow alternative means 
shaft, B", and meshing into a bevel gear, P', 
for rotating the needle as the carriage, O, pro 
on a vertical shaft, P, having suitable bear 
gresses. In each case the stem,N', of the 
ings in the frame, A, and bearing at its up 
needle is mounted in bearings, n', as shown 
per end beneath and between the ends of the 
in Fig. 3, but the gear wheels, O, and, O, are 
ways, O', toward the coiler a sprocket wheel, 
omitted. In Fig. 11, a block, Q, is located 
P. Beneath and between the opposite ends 
-upon the frame, A, at the ends of the ways, O, 
of the Ways, O', is a similar sprocket, wheel, 
toward the coiler and provided with a sta 
P, mounted on a vertical shaft, P, als hav. 
tionary passage, q, conforming to the diame 
ing suitable bearings in the frame, A. An 
ter and pitch of the needle. Through this 
endless sprocket chain extends around the 
passage the needle extends. When the car 
sprocket wheels, P, and, P, in a horizontal 
riage, O, is reciprocated, the needle is forced 
plane. Above a portion of the chain, P, at 
through said block and rotated. In Fig. 12, 
each side of the sprocket wheels, P, and, P, 
a block, R, is located at the opposite end of 
the carriage, O, has a depending lug, o, ex 
the ways, O', and the stem of the needle is 
tending almost to said chain. Upon said 
extended through a stationary grooved pas 
chain is a lug, p", resting in a horizontal plane 
sage, r, in said block and has its stationary 
of the lug, O. Since the shaft, B, has con 
groove to conform to said passage, r. It will 
tinuous motion, it follows that the sprocket 
be readily seen, that the reciprocation of the 
chain, P, must have continuous motion and 
carriage, O, will involve the rotation of the 
that the carriage, O, must move whenever the 
needle by the passage of said extended part 
lug, p", is in engagement with one of the lugs, 
of the stem through the block, R. 
I claim as my invention 
o, the direction of the movement of said car- 
1. In apparatus for weaving coiled wire 
riage depending upon which side of the cir- 
cuit of the chain the lug, p", at the time oc- fabric, the combination with a fabric support, 
- 
55 
65 
 
75 
loo 
I Io 
f 15 
I 25 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
511,485 
75 
- 
of a spiral needle having a tubular end, and 
mechanism for rotating and reciprocating 
said needle substantially as described. 
2. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with mechanism for 
Supporting the fabric, of a spiral needle ar 
ranged to engage a new coil and travel Syn 
chronously there with through a path which 
is intertwined with a coil of the fabric, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with a fabric sup 
port and a coiler, of a spiral needle arranged 
to traverse the path of the new coil and pro 
vided with means forengaging the forward end 
of the new coil, substantially as described. 
4. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with a support for 
the fabric, of a coiler located at one end of 
said support, and a rotary reciprocable nee 
dle located at the other end of said support, 
and suitable connection between said coiler 
and said needle, whereby motion may be im 
parted simultaneously to said coiler and said 
needle from the same source of power, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The method of adding a coil to a coiled 
wire fabric, which method consists in forcing 
Wire through a spiral passage and projecting 
the resulting coil through a path which is spi 
rally intertwined with one of the coils of the 
fabric, and engaging the forward end of said 
new coil by mechanism having motion in the 
direction of movement of the coil and lead 
ing it through said spiral path, substantially 
as described. 
6. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with a support for the 
fabric, of a coiler, a knife for cutting the com 
pleted coils, and a spiral needle for conduct 
ing the new coil, these several mechanisms 
being arranged to operate automatically and 
in proper order of time, substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination of fabric-supporting 
and shifting mechanism, coil-forming mech 
anism, coil-cutting mechanism, and mechan 
ism having motion in the direction of move 
ment of the new coil while the latter is being 
projected for engaging and conducting the 
free end of the new coil through its path, 
these several mechanisms being arranged to 
operate automatically and in due order of 
time, substantially as described. 
8. In a machine for Weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with a support for the 
fabric, of a coiler, ways O', carriage Olocated 
upon said ways, a spiral needle mounted in 
suitable bearings upon said carriage in line 
with the coiling axis, and mechanism for ef 
fecting the rotation of said needle simultane 
ously with the reciprocation of the needle, 
substantially as described. 
9. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with a support for the 
. 
fabric, of a coiler, ways O', carriage O located 
upon said ways, a spiral needle mounted 
suitable bearings upon said carriage in line 
with the coiling axis, and gearing extending 
from the frame of the machine to said car 
riage and needle for rotating the latter, Sub 
stantially as described. 
10. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with a fabric support 
and a coiler, of a spiral needle arranged to 
traverse the path of the new coil and being 
tubular at its free end, substantially as de 
scribed. 
11. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with a fabric. Support 
and coil-forming mechanism, of a spiral nee" 
dle, a carriage supporting said needle in line 
with the coiling axis, gearing intervening be 
tween said needle and the frame of the ma 
chine for effecting the rotation of the needle, 
and an endless band located adjacent to said 
carriage and adapted to engage and recipro 
cate the latter, substantially as described. 
12. In a machine for weaving coiled Wire 
fabric, the combination with a support for the 
fabric, coil-forming mechanism, and a rotary 
reciprocable needle arranged to traverse the 
ath of the new coil and conduct the forward 
end of the latter, of a guide located at the be 
ginning of the path of the new coil, whereby 
said needle is caused to meet the forward end 
of the new coil, substantially as described 
13. In a machine for weaving coiled Wire 
fabric, the combination with a support for the 
fabric, coil-forming mechanism, and a rotary 
reciprocable, needle arranged to traverse the 
ath of the new coil and conduct the forward 
end of the latter, of a guide combined with a 
knife and located at the beginning of the path 
of the new coil, whereby said needle is caused 
to meet the forward end of the new coil, sub 
stantially as described. 
14. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with a coiler, of a fab 
ric support arranged in line with said, coiler, 
and automatically reciprocating devices sup 
ported by said support for engaging and re 
leasing the marginal coil of the fabric, and a 
needle arranged to traverse the path of the 
new coil and conduct said coil through said 
path, substantially as described. 
15. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric for bed-bottoms, the combination with 
a coiler, of a fabric support arranged in line 
with said coiler, reciprocating mechanism Sup 
ported by said support for engaging and re 
leasing the marginal coil of the fabric, and 
mechanism also supported by said support 
for drawing the fabric from said reciprocating 
engaging and releasing mechanism, and a spi 
ral needle arranged to traverse the path of 
the new coil substantially as described. 
16. In a machine for weaving coiled wire 
fabric, the combination with a coiler, of a se 
ries of pins for engaging the marginal coil of 
the fabric, of a spiral needle arranged to trav 
yo 
95 
oc 
I IO 
II5 
I25 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
511,485 
erse the path of the new coil and conduct the duct the latter through said path, substan 
latter through said path, substantially as de- tially as described. 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature, in 
17. In a machine for weaving coiled wire presence of two witnesses, this 6th day of Sep 
fabric for bed-bottoms, the combination with tember, 1892. 
5, coil-forming mechanism and two reciprocat 
ing pin-bars, each bearing a series of pins 
adapted to alternately engage the marginal 
coil of the fabric, of a spiral needle arranged 
Io to traverse the path of the new coil and con- 
AMBROSE RISDON, 
J. H. MCGRUE. 
Witnesses: 
CYRUs KEHR. 
- 
w 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511535.txt	G. W. IEWIS. 
GAS ENGINE. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Deo. 26, 1893. 
 
S 
Nica 
 Z/ 
-4 
E S NZ N  IIlli 
  
 
 
Z74. 
 
I 
A 
Illi 
I 
(No Model.) 
. 
No. 511,535, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SEze. 
 
 
El 
Z1zzesses 3:2X - 
(No Model.) 
No. 511,535, 
G. W. LEWIS. 
GAS ENGINE. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Deo. 26, 1893. 
 
 
 
 
 
SSl s 
 
  
 
 
 
 
S % s 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
S 
 
  
 
 
S zs 
 
Z12zzesses. 
S\6R\x. 
% 
2z 
v. 
SS N Zzzazz2z 
Acoge 717leccs. 
ris NArioNAL LITHoGRAPHINa coMPANY, 
WASHINGToN. 3. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 511,535, 
G. W. LEWIS. 
GAS ENGINE. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
 
 
S 
 
 
  
 
. 
. 
 
A 
ls 
 
 
TTMC 
! 
jI  
Es7 
 
  
iz 
Z7zzvezZ27. 
George /TLeavs. 
 
abz22% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. LEWIS, OF PERU, ILLINOIS. 
GAS ENG NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 511,535, dated December 26, 1893. 
Application filed March 13,189l, Serial No. 384,876, (No model) 
To al vihon it nay concern: 
A 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. LEWIS, o 
Peru, in the county of La Salle and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and aseful 
Improvements in Gas-Engines; and I do here 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
forma part of this specification. 
This invention relates to the Valve system 
of So-called gas engines and to means for va 
porizing gasoline and similar liquids in case 
it is proposed to use such vapor with air in 
this class of engines. 
The invention has for its objectsto simplify 
the construction and improve the operation 
ofgas engines generally and, in its adaptation 
to the use of vapor of gasoline, to provide for 
the better regulation of the proportion of va 
por produced in the operation of the engine. 
In the accompanying drawings ilustrating 
my invention: Figure 1 is a side elevation of 
an engine containing my improvements, a part 
of the cylinder being broken away to show 
the pistonin its extreme outer position. Fig. 
2 is a top or plan view of the engine with the 
piston and other moving parts in the positions 
indicated in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
end view of the power cylinder and vertical 
transverse section of the ignition chamber 
midway between the induction and exhaust 
valves, or in the line 3-3 of Fig. 5. Fig. 4is 
an enlarged horizontal section of a portion of 
the power cylinder and of the ignition cham 
ber in the indirect line 4-4 of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 
is a central vertical section of the power cyl 
inder and ignition chamber on the scale of 
Figs. 1 and 2, the piston and other interior 
parts being shown in side elevation. Fig. 6 
is a side elevation of the cam Wheel by which 
the exhaust Valve is operated, and also a side 
view of the lever which is acted upon by the 
cam Wheel of the stop lever which engages 
Said lever On the attainment of a fixed limit 
of speed, and of the sliding collar which vi 
brates the stop lever into and out of engage 
ment with the cam lever under the action of 
the governor-said sliding collar being shown 
in section transverse of its shaft and through 
its peripheral groove. Fig. 7 is an end view 
C) 
15 
2 C. 
25 
35 
45 
of the cam lever, a side elevation of the stop 
lever, and a side view of the grooved collar 
operating to vibrate the stop lever, said collar. 
and its shaft being indicated in dotted lines. 55 
Fig. 8 is a detached view of the transverse 
portion of the lever system for lifting the ex 
haust valve from its seat. Fig. 9 is an en 
larged vertical section of the chamber within 
which gasoline is vaporized and to which air o 
isinitially induced for the purpose of efect 
ing such vaporization. This figure also illus 
trates in central vertical section a Valve box 
and mechanism for the regulation of the sup 
ply ofgasoline to the chamber firstmentioned. 65 
Fig. 10 ilustrates, principally in central ver 
tical section, a device for simultaneously ad 
mitting air and iluminating orother gas, to 
be used instead of the gasoline supply and 
regulating devices shown in Fig. 9 When illu- 7o 
minating orother gas is to be employed. Fig. 
11 is a longitudinal section of the gas induc 
tion pipe of Fig. 10. Fig. 12 is a fragmentary 
plan view of a duplex or two-cylinder engine 
ilustrating means for operating the exhaust 75 
valve of the second cylinder. Fig. 13 isa side 
elevation of the Second cam and the lever 
through which it operates the exhaust valve 
of the Second cylinder. Fig. 14 is a detail. 
cation to a single engine and with reference 
to Figs. 1 to 11 inclusive, A represents the 
frame, B a power cylinder and C the crank 
shaft carrying a fly Wheel. The cylinder B 
is closed at its rear end only by the head B 85 
and contains the plunger or piston Bcon 
nected by the shaft C" with the crank C. of 
the shaft C. 
D is the ignition chamber communicating 
with the interior of the cylinder B. through 9o 
the head B, as illustrated in Figs. 4 and 5, d 
(Fig. 3) is the ignition tube opening into the 
ignition chamber D through a passage d', and 
dis a valve applied to the opening d Within 
the chamber D. This valve is carried at the 95 
end of an arm dwhich, in this instance, pro 
jects laterally fron a rock shaft D' having 
its axis length Wise of the cylinder and pro 
vided with a second lateral arm d. Beneath 
the arm d passes the rod dwhich projects, Ioo 
from the rear end of the piston B, said rod 
d having an inclined upper surface which, 
First describing my invention in its appli- 8o 
x. 
511,535 
O 
as it passes beneath the arm d, raises said 
arm and swings the valve d away from the 
opening d". 
The ignition chamber Dis provided with an 
induction opening d and an eduction or ex 
haust openingdto whichare respectively ap 
plied the valves D and D. These valves are 
here shown as of the poppet order and ashav 
ing their seats in the upper ends of cham 
bered fittings di d screwed into the bottom 
wall of the ignition chamber so that said 
valves may tend to close by the action of 
gravity. The fittings di and d also afford 
passages for stems of the valves D D which 
project downwardly through the fittings, as 
indicated in Figs. 3 and 5. These valvesare 
are also shown provided with upwardly pro 
jecting stems which slide inguide fittings d 
screwed into the upper Wall of the ignition 
chamber, as shown also in Figs. 3 and 5. 
El is a vaporizing chamber employed when 
vapor of gasoline or other suitable volatile 
liquidis the combustible used. This is shown 
as a vertical cylinder communicating through 
a pipe eleading from itsupper portion to the 
induction opening d of the ignition chamber 
through the fitting d. Through the top of 
the cylinder E projects anair pipe E having 
its ends open but preferably provided with a 
perforated cap e, as shown in Figs. 1 and 9. 
This air pipe El is vertically adjustable so 
that its lower end maybe brought to any de 
sired position with reference to the surface of 
the liquid admitted to said cylinder, such ad 
justment being efected, as shown, by mov 
ing the pipe in the passage provided for it in 
the head of the cylinder and fastening it with 
a set screw. Obviouslysuch adjustment may 
be otherwise provided for. Connected with 
the bottom of the chamber Eis a pipe elead 
ingfrom a source of liquid supply. 
Fis a box or chamber discharging into the 
pipe e and being itself supplied through a 
pipe f desirably connected with a tank hav 
ing suitable elevation to allow the gasoline 
to flow to the box F by gravity. Within an 
interior prolongation f" of the pipe fis ar 
ranged a valve f controlled by a float F 
through the medium of a lever f. The box 
Fis so arranged with reference to the bottom 
of the cylinder Easto insure the presence of 
a quantity of gasoline covering the bottom of 
said cylinder, as shown in Fig. 9. 
In the operation of the engine within its 
predetermined limit of speed, each alternate 
outward movement of the piston B, by its 
tendency to form a vacuum behind it and 
within the induction chamber, causes the in 
duction valve Dto rise and produces a forci 
ble inflow of airthrough the air supply pipe 
El into the cylinder E. and upon the surface 
of the gasoline therein contained. Upon the 
succeeding return Stroke of the piston, it Will 
be understood, the ignition valve is opened, 
the gas is compressed and a portion thereof 
forced into the ignition tube, and an explo 
sionis produced which compels the next out 
Ward movement of the piston. 
I have found that by making the air sup 
ply pipe El adjustable with reference to the 
distance of its open end from the surface of 
the volatile liquid in the vaporizing chamber 
El the quantity and density of the vapor 
produced by the inflow of air maybe nicely 
regulated and varied to produce the best re 
su!ts in the operation of the engine. I have 
also found that in starting the engine it Will 
be advantageous to lower said pipe to bring 
its open end within a short distance of the 
surface of the volatile liquid and that, after 
the engine has started it should be raised to 
a greater distance from the surface of the 
liquid. By moving the said induction pipe 
up and down by hand while the engine is do 
ing regular work itsbest position maybe de 
termined and it maybe marked on its exte 
rior to enable the operator to readilly give it 
this position after having depressed it in 
starting the engine. The said pipe El may 
also be adjusted to secure substantially uni 
form work of the engine from liquids of dif 
ferent degrees of volatility, requiring of 
course to be adjusted to a greater distance 
from the liquid surface in the use of more 
highly volatile liquids and at a less distance 
in the use of those which are less volatille. 
From the fitting dleads an exhaust pipe 
D Which Will in practice be extended to a 
muffler of some suitable form at any desired 
distance from the engine. This exhaustpipe 
is provided nearits connection with the igni 
tion chamber with an air inlet provided with 
an inwardly opening check valve D, the ob 
ject of which is to readilly admit cool air to 
the interior of the cylinder in the outward 
movement of the piston Bwhen the engine 
is running above its limit of speed, the gas 
induction valve D remaining closed at this 
time. 
For the purpose of lifting the exhaust valve 
Dat the proper time, or when the outward 
extremity of movement of the piston Bis 
reached, I show a rock shaft G, mounted in 
bearings gg, as shown in Fig. 2, said shaft 
having anarm gengaged with the valve stem, 
and also an arm G" by which the shaft is op 
erated. For this purposethearm G engages 
a cam Hl mounted on a shaft H' to which is 
fixed a sprocket wheel H driven by a chain 
from a sprocket wheel c of half the diameter 
of the Wheel H, fixed on the crank shaft C, 
as indicated in Figs. 1 and 2. The direction 
of motion of the cam His indicated in Fig. 6 
by the arrow applied to the sprocket Wheel 
H and the tining of the cam H. with refer 
ence to the position of the piston Bis shown 
clearly in Fig. 1. That is to say, at or near 
the outer extremity of alternate movements 
of the piston (running within its speed limit) 
the projection h of the cam H, bearing on a 
Wheel g" mounted on the side of the arm G, 
throws said arm downward and correspond 
15 
2 C. 
25 
3 o 
35 
40 
45 
5 o 
55 
7 o 
95 
OC 
IO5 
IIO 
I I5 
I25 
65 
 
511,535 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
5 o 
55 
ingly lifts the opposite arm gof the rock shaft exhaust valve Din its elevatedor open po 
sition shown in Fig. 5. The exhaust valve 
Gagainst the lower end of the stem of the 
may have a contractile spring d connected 
exhaust valve D and raises the latter offits 
with its lower stem, as ilustrated in Fig. 1, 
seats, as indicated in Fig. 5. The cam His 
to more perfectly insure its closure When the 
constructed with a suitable extended surface 
arm gof the rockshaft is depressed. 
on its projecting portion, as indicated in Fig. 
The engine with all the improvements and 
6, so that, during the nextreturn of the pis. 
features of construction above described, ex 
ton, the exhaust Valve Will be sustained in 
ceptingthose separately ilustrated in Fig. 9, 
its raised or open position. 
maybe employed when iluminating orother 
For the purpose of keeping the exhaust 
suitable gas is to be used instead of the vapor 
valve Draised and the exhaust pipe D con 
of gasoline, by substituting in place of the va 
tinually open during the period of excessive 
porizer and its liquid supply regulator shown 
speed of the engine, the governor I (Fig. 2), 
insaid Fig.9, thegas andair admission devices 
the shaft i of which is driven by a sprocket 
ilustrated in Figs. 10 and 11. Describing 
wheel I, has its bent lever arms i engaged 
these figures, L represents a fitting adapted to 
with a grooved collar l arranged to slide on 
bescrewed upon the end of theinduction pipee. 
the shaft , and in the groove of this collar 
Thisfittinghastwobranch pipes L'Ldesigned 
runs a pinj projecting from a vibrating stop 
respectively for the admission of airandgas. 
lever J. This lever Jis shown as being piv 
Each of these pipes has aninwardly opening 
oted at its upper end to a suitable support 
valve, that of the pipe L' being shown at l 
and provided at its lower end with a shoulder 
and that in the pipe L at l. Besides difer 
j adapted to be thrown outward over the end 
ing in size with general regard to the relative 
of the arm G when the latteris in the lower 
quantities of air and gas to be admitted, the 
most position given it by the cam H. When 
valves land l are desirably adjustable sev 
the speed of the engine reaches its prescribed 
erally as to their resistance to the suction 
limit, the governor throws the stop lever J 
produced by the forward movement of the 
far enough to engage the said lever G" and 
piston in the power cylinder and by which 
retracts it from such engagement When the 
they are opened, to whichend they are shown 
speed slackens to said limit. While the arm 
connected by contractile springs l With de 
G is thus held depressed the exhaust valve 
vices for adjusting the tension of said springs. 
Dis held open and no induction of gas or 
vapor and air Will take place during this pe 
These tension devices maybe of any suitable 
kind. The adjusting device shown for the 
riod. In any outward movement of the pis 
spring of the air induction valve consists of 
ton While the exhaust Valve is thus held open, 
a screw Lthreaded through a plug or head 
cool air will be induced through the easily 
at the end of the pipe L', a set nut l being 
opening check valve Dwith the efect oficool 
ing the cylinder. In orderto more efectively 
applied to said screw to hold it from acci 
dental disturbance after adjustment. The 
prevent the gas induction valve D from ris 
pipe L' in this case has a lateral opening or 
ing in the outward movements of the piston 
openings for the admission of air, as, for ex 
while the exhaust valve is held open, as de 
ample, ilustrated at l, The gas induction 
scribed, I preferto employ the bell crank lle 
pipe Lis shown as having a movable plug 
ver K, pivoted at its angle to a suitable sup 
portand havingan offsetknearthe upper end 
L provided with a smooth surface and pass 
ing through a Stuffing box or packing at the 
of its vertical arm arranged in position to be 
struck by the projecting partig of the lever 
upper end of the tube. This plug is held in 
any position to which it maybe adjusted, by 
shaft G When the latter is brought to its p0 
means of a set screw l. This gas induction 
sition for opening the exhaustivalve, the hori 
tube Lis joined with a transverse pipe or 
zontal arm of said lever K being connected 
tube Lwith which it communicates through 
by a contractile coiled spring with the lower 
a horizontal opening C. Between this lateral 
end of the stem of the gas induction valve, 
opening l and the source of gas supply the 
as indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 1. This 
tube is fitted with a valve seat l'against which 
spring is held in tension and its force tends 
bears the needle valve Lwhich is of course 
to retain the eduction Valve on its Seat so 
opened constantly during the operation of the 
long as the eduction or exhaust valve is held 
raised, and as a consequence the forward 
machine and Will be closed When the machine 
is not running. If desired a second power 
movements of the cylinder produce inflow 
only through the exhaustpipe D. 
cylinder maybe arranged parallel with the 
cylinder shown and may have its induction 
To stop the engine the rock shaft G is 
passage to the ignition chamber connected 
shown provided with an additional arm Gat 
its outer extremity, whicharm G maybe di 
with the same induction pipe e which leads 
rectly employed as a hand lever but with 
to the cylinder shown. It should, however, 
which I preferto employa handlever G(Fig. 
have a separate exhaust pipe corresponding 
in al respects with D, as shown and above 
1) pivoted between its ends and arranged to 
bear, after the manner of a cam, upon the up 
described. In this case the shaft H. will be 
provided with a second cam corresponding 
per and outer end of the lever Gso as not 
only to depress said lever but to hold it in its 
With the cam H. This and other devices for 
depressed position and to therebylock the 
controlling the exhaust valve of the second 
75 
95 
IOC 
IO 
II5 
I25 
4 
511,535 
IO 
not herein claimed. 
cylinder are illustrated in Figs. 12, 13 and 
closes the ignition tube and which is located 
14. By reference to these figures it will be 
within the ignition chamber, maybe operated 
seen that G is a rock shaft corresponding 
by movement of the piston. It is also notes 
with the shaft G already described. This 
sential to the vaporizing device illustrated in 
shaft Gis mounted in bearings on opposite 
Fig.9 that the particular form of supply regul 
sides of the first cylinder B and extends be 
lating mechanism shown insaid figure be em 
neath said cylinder, as indicated by dotted 
ployed, or indeed that an automatic supply 
lines in Fig. 12, its remote arm extending be 
regulator of any kind be used, inas muchas a 
neath the stem of the exhaust Valve in the 
supply of liquid to the vaporizing chamber E 
ignition box of the second cylinder B in the 
maybe controlled by hand, though With the 
same manineras that of the shaft G has been 
objectionable necessity of Watchfulness and 
describedas engaging with the Valve Dof the 
care. Itherefore hereinafter claim the said 
first cylinder B. 
vaporizing chamber independently of means 
His the secondicam on the shaft Happlied 
for regulating the supply of liquid thereto as 
thereto inside of the sprocket wheel and the 
well as in combination with regulating mech 
inner bearing of said shaft. Adjacent to the 
anism generally and with the float form of 
plane of this cam H rises from the shaft G 
such mechanism herein shown. 
an arm G corresponding with the arm G but 
The devices shown in Figs. 10 and 11 are 
more nearly vertical and similarly provided 
with a wheel for engagement with the pe 
I claim as my invention 
ripheral surface of the cam H. 
1. In combination with the ignition cham 
J" is a fork having arms jj arranged in a 
ber having an opening to an ignition tube, of 
planetransverse to the arms or levers G G. 
a rock shaft provided with an arm carrying a 
The arm jis provided with a hook j and 
valve for said opening, and with a secondarm, 
above it with an inclined surface j against 
and a projection on the piston engaging said 
or in proximity with which the end of the 
second arm for the purpose of rocking the 
lever G vibrates in the operation of the en 
shaft and opening the valve. 
gine within.its limit of speed, the lever or 
2. In a gas engine, the combination with a 
arm, however, passing bellow the hook When 
piston cylinder, a piston andan ignition cham 
depressed by the cam G. The inclined arm 
berhavingan exhaust passage, of a valve con 
j has its extremity bent into a vertical direc 
trolling said exhaust passage, a rock shaft 
tion and this vertical portion of said arm bears 
having an arm adapted to engage and open 
against the prolonged extremity of the lever 
said valve and having a secondarm whereby 
G in the operation of the engine within its 
said rock shaft maybe vibrated, a rotating 
limit of speed, said lever, however, passing 
shaft provided with a cam engagingsaid sec 
bellow the angle of the armjwhen depressed 
ond arm of the rock shaft and timed with ref 
by the cam H. Against the fork J bears a 
erence to the movement of the piston to open 
spring jl of any suitable construction ar 
the Valve at or near the outer position of said 
ranged to throw the fork arms toward the 
piston, suitable driving mechanism for actu 
levers, as indicated in Fig. 14, but the hook 
ating said cam Shaft, a governor engaged with 
jis prevented from engagement with the le 
a sliding collar, and a vibrating stop lever en 
ver G When the engine is running within 
gaged with the sliding collar and adapted to 
its limit of speed by the presence of the le 
engage the second arm of the rock shaftwhen 
ver G opposite the vertical portion of the 
the latter is in the position given it by the 
armij. When, however, the lever G"islocked 
cam and When the limit of speed is reached 
in its depressed position byaction of thegov 
or exceeded, Whereby the exhaust valveis kept 
ernor on the locking lever J (Figs. 6 and 7 
open while the excessive speed is continued. 
then the hook jis freeto engage the lever G 
3. In a gas engine adapted for the use of 
when said lever next passes to its lowest po 
vapor of gasoline or other suitable volatile 
sition. Theattainment of excessive speed on 
liquid, the combination, With the piston and 
the part of the engine therefore results in 
cylinder, of a vaporizing chamber having an 
locking down both the lever G" and the lever 
induction tube for the volatile liquid, an 
G and, consequently, in upholding the ex 
eduction pipe for the mixed vapor and air 
haust valves of both cylinders. When the 
connecting with the cylinder, and an air in 
lever G is released it rises (by action of the 
duction tube arranged with its inner open 
spring-or otherwise) and by bearing against 
end above the surface of the liquid in said 
the armj of the fork throws the hookj out 
chamber and adjustable with reference to 
of engagement with the lever Gand releases 
said surface. 
the latter so that both exhaust valves are al 
4. In a gas engine, the combination, with 
lowed to again seat in their proper order and 
the piston and cylinder, of a vaporizing cham 
both cylinders to be again brought into op 
ber having an outlet for mixed vapor and air 
eration. 
connecting With the cylinder, an air-inlet 
It is obvious that the several novel devices 
tube arranged with its inner open end above 
herein described maybe varied in their form 
the surface of the liquid within said chamber, 
without departure from my invention. For 
a pipe for conducting liquid to said chamber, 
example, other forms may be given to the and nueans for regulating the supply of liquid 
devices by which the Valve which opens and to said chamber. 
3 o 
35 
45 
5 o 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
Io.5 
0 
II5 
20 
I25 
I 3 o 
 
511,535 
5 
35 
45 
5. Inagas engine, the exhaustpipeofwhich for engaging the lever G' When the limit of 
speed is exceeded, and a lock or stop for the 
lever G' normallytendingto engage said lever 
upon the depression of the latter and provid 
ed with the partwhichisin engagement With 
the lever Gwhereby the lever Gis engaged 
by the hook only when the lever Gis held ll 
its depressed position by its stop orlocking 
mechanism. 
8. The combination with thetworock shafts 
G G, the cams Hand H, anda stop mechan 
ism operated by the governor and engaging 
with the lever G, of the forkJ provided with 
arms jj, and a springfj arranged to throw 
the arms of said fork into bearing against the 
arms G" and Hof said rock shafts G G, sub 
stantially as described and for the purposes 
set forth. 
Intestimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention Iafix my signature in presence 
of two Witnesses. 
has an air inlet provided with a check valve 
adjacent to the ignition chamber, the combi 
nation, with the induction valve, of a spring 
arranged to cause the Valve to bear with 
greater force on its seat, said spring being 
connected with a movable part of the engine 
adapted to increase the tension of the spring 
while the exhaust valve is open. 
6. In a gas engine having two power cylin 
ders, and a single governor, the combination 
of two cams driven positively by the crank 
shaft, two lever systems, one acted upon by 
each cam and operating to open the exhaust 
valves of the cylinders, a stop or locking 
mechanism for one of said lever systems con 
trolled by the governor and a lock for the 
other lever system controlled by a lever of 
the system the stop of which is controlled by 
the cam. 
7. In combination with the cams Hand H, 
the rock shafts G Gbearing on the exhaust 
valves and provided with arms G Gforen 
gagement with said cams, a locking or stop 
device, as J, and its controlling mechanism 
GEORGE W. LEVIS. 
Witnesses: 
M. E. DAYTON, 
C. CLARENCE POOLE. 
 
IO 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511635.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 511,635, 
 
R. T. MULCAHY. 
GATE, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
W/7 WESSES 
A. 
/NVENTOR 
AT TORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD T. MULCAHY, OF ROSENBERG, TEXAS. 
GATE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 511,635, dated December 26, 1893. 
Application filed September 6, 1893, Serial No. 485,657, (No model.) 
To all whon it may concern. 
Be it known that I, RICHARD T. MULCAHY, 
of Rosenberg, in the county of Fort Bend and 
State of Texas, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Gates, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
Myinvention is an improvement in the class 
of farm gates, which are supported centrally 
on a pivot post and adapted to be swung in 
either direction by means of levers and pull 
cords. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
Struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth 
and pointed out in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in both the 
WeWS, 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the im 
proved gate in a closed position; and Fig. 2 is 
a plan view of the gate, the keeper posts and 
SWing posts being shown in horizontal section, 
and the gate being illustrated in an open po 
sition. 
A frame is erected at the opening to be 
closed by the gate, which frame consists of 
two uprights or posts 10 and 10, connected 
by a crossbar 11. In the central portion of 
this frame the swing post 12 of the gate A, is 
located, being pivotally connected with the 
upper cross bar 11, and likewise pivoted in a 
block or other support 13, located in the 
ground. At front and rear of the central por 
tion of the gate opening, preferably in align 
ment with the swing post 12, standards 14 and 
15 are located, one standard being in front of 
and the other back of the said swing post. 
The gate is secured at its center in any ap 
proved manner upon one side surface of the 
SWing post 12. The body of the gate may be 
of any approved construction, but above the 
top rail or top of the gate, at each side of the 
Swing post 12, a latch 16, is located, and the 
latches are pivoted at theirinner endsin brack 
ets 17 secured to the body of the gate, prefer 
ably adjacent to the swing post. The latches 
16 are guided in studs or standards 18 and 19, 
located at about the central portion of each 
Section of the gate and at each end, the latches 
being adapted for engagement with keepers 
20, located upon opposite sides of the keeper 
posts 10 and 10. A lever 21, is fulcrumed 
upon the upper portion of the Swing post at 
one side thereof, and a second lever 22, is full 
crumed immediately back of the lever 21 upon 
the opposite side of the post. These levers 
are preferably bell crank or elbow levers, and 
are horizontally located. 
The right hand member of the bell crank 
lever 21 is connected by a link 23 with One 
end of a lever 24, centrally fulcrumed, for ex 
ample upon the standard 14 in front of the 
gate, while a second link 25, connects the 
right-hand member of the front bell crankle 
ver 21 with one end of a lever 26, fulcrumed 
centrally upon the opposing standard 15, the 
links 23 and 25, being connected with corre 
sponding ends of the levers 24 and 26. 
The left-hand member of the Outer or rear 
bell crank lever 22, is connected by a link 27 
with the opposite end of the standard lever 
24, and a link 28, also connects the left-hand 
member of the elbow lever 22 with the corre 
sponding end of the standard lever 26. An 
elbow lever 29, is fulcrumed in the interme 
diate latch guide 18 on the left-hand section 
of the gate, while a like lever 29, is fulcrumed 
in the latch guide 18 on the right-hand sec 
tion of the gate. The left-hand member of 
the front angled lever 21, is connected by a 
link 31, with one member of the left-hand 
angled lever 29, the other member of the lat 
ter being connected by a link 31 with the 
left-hand latch, while the right-hand elbow 
latch lever 29 has one member connected by 
a link 30, with the right-hand member of the 
rear gate lever 22, the right-hand latch lever 
being connected with the right-hand latch by 
a link 30. The standard levers 24 and 26, 
are provided with handles 32 at their ends, 
capable of hanging down within easy reach 
of a pedestrian, and by means of these han 
dles the standard levers are manipulated. 
In the operation of the gate, by turning the 
inner standard lever 24 to the diagonal posi 
tion shown in Fig. 2 the gate will be swung 
open, as is likewise shown in the same figure, 
the latches being at the same time lifted by 
the combined action of the gate levers and 
latch levers; and both the inner and the outer 
standard levers will be in a diagonal position, 
as both levers work together. After a person, 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
2 
51,635 
ter, standards 14 and 15 fixed in the roadway 
at opposite sides of the gate, and horizontal 
levers 24, 26 fulcrumed upon said standards, 
and having handles 32, of angled levers 21, 
22, pivoted upon opposite sides of the swing 25 
post, latches located upon the gate, an angled 
lever also fulcrumed upon the gate, in con 
nection with each latch link connections be-, 
tween the right and left hand members of the 
gate levers on the swing post and the right 3o 
hand ends of both of the aforesaid standard 
levers, and links connecting the latch levers 
and the lower members of the gate levers, 
whereby the gate may be unlatched and 
swung open from either side, or closed from 35 
either side, all as shown and described. 
RICHARD T. MULCAHY. 
Witnesses: 
SILAS LATTA, 
CHARLESL. MICHAEL. 
Or a team, has passed through the opening 
disclosed by the gate, upon restoring the left 
hand lever to its normal position at right an 
gles to its standard, the gate will be closed, and 
5 the latches will automatically engage with 
their keepers 20. Since two latches are em 
ployed, one at each end of the gate, and they 
engage with keepers at opposite sides of the 
keeper posts, the gate can not be opened un 
Io less the latches are first disengaged from the 
keepers, or when the standard levers are ma 
nipulated. 
It is evident that the above-described de 
vices for opening a gate may be applied to a 
15 single as well as to a double gate. 
Having thus described my invention, 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
In a gate, the combination with a swing 
2O post to which the gate is secured at its cen 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511736.txt	C. L. LIBBY. 
ATTACHMENT FOR BORING MILS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
(No Model.) 
No. 511,736. 
7 if 7 
  
 
 
 
 
  
filiffiti 
AAEAN 
(NANAAAA; 
Illi 
 
  
Ill?till 
AAAAAA A. 
II 
A. EIILIII) 
 
 
 
 
 
  
(No Model.) 
C. L. LIBBY. 
ATTACHMENT FOR BORING MILLS. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 511,736, 
39 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
72 fia. 
    
N S. 
N 
S I 
NS Z222a24a S 
Sn 
V 
V 
A 
Kay 
K s 
r 
as:4241 
w 
 
2 
W 
x 
 
48 
V 
NY 
W Y NS 
a 
(No Model.) 
C. L. LIBBY. 
ATTACHMENT FOR BORING WITS, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 511,736, 
39 
 
 
 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
48 H fill 
 
(No Model.) 
C. L., LIBBY. 
ATTACHMENT FOR BORING MILS, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 511736, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893, 
2. 47 
L. E .22 w 
O SN2, SNS 
A : 
Fazz In 24 
SI)ES 
g 
al 
7.2, 5. 
  
39 
 
 
Ns  
 
 
& S2 
in 
N ul 
as SEO, Y&NAWS" 
7 N. WN a2 
W.W.N. 
 
   
 
81: 
2. 
26 
 
 
 
3AW, 
3. 
at? 
2AN: 
30 
3-vuovtov 
(No Model.) 
C. L. LIBBY. 
ATTACHMENT FOR BORING MILIS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 511736, 
Patented Dec. 26, 1893. 
2G 35 
as 
I se 
s 
are: 
 
 
  
  
 
CA/AS Leon L / a 6 y, 
& 6.27a, 22eewaza 8tto-wei 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES IEON LIBBY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
EDWARD P. BUILLARD, OF SAME PLACE. 
ATTACHMENT FOR BORING-Mills. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 511,786, dated December 26, 1893. 
Application filed December 5, 1892, Serial No. 454,122, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To alluvion, it inval/ concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES LEON LIBBY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Bridgeport, in the county of Fairfield and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Attachments 
for Boring-Mills; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to boring mills, and 
resides essentially in a taper attachment con 
nected therewith, together with other novel 
and useful improvements in the tool-feeding 
mechanism, all of which improvements will 
be described in the following specification, 
and such characteristic features as I believe 
to be new particularly pointed out in the 
claims to follow. 
To enable others skilled in the art to which 
this invention appertains to fully understand 
my said invention, reference is had to the ac 
companying drawings and to the figures of 
reference marked thereon, in which 
Figure 1, represents a front elevation of a 
boring mill with a taper attachment connect 
ed therewith, and a broken section of the 
down slide mounted thereon. Fig. 2, is an 
enlarged front elevation of the down slide"op 
eratively mounted upon a broken section of 
the taper attachment slide. Fig. 3, is a plan 
of the upper end of the tool down-slide shown 
in Fig. 2, exposing to view the gears for op 
erating the tool-holder independent of its car 
riage. Fig. 4, is an enlarged side elevation, 
looking from the right of the tool-holder, tool 
down-slide and slide support, said down-slide 
and support operatively mounted upon the 
taperattachment slide, and a sectional view of 
the cross-rail, its slide, and taper attachment 
supports mounted thereon. Fig. 5, is an en 
larged detail elevation of the feed rod for oper 
ating the tool-holder, with the gears for receiv 
ing and transmitting motion mounted thereon, 
also a section of the housing for two of said 
gears. Fig. 6, is an enlarged detail elevation 
partly in section of the tool-holder, its spin 
dle, the operating gear mounted upon the 
threaded end of said spindle, and broken view 
of the housing for said gear. Fig. 7, is an en 
larged detail section of the mechanism for 
operating the tool down-slide on the line ac-ac 
of Fig. 2. Fig. 8, is an enlarged side eleva 
tion looking from the right-see Fig. 2-of 
the cross rail slide, tool down slide and its 
support, showing the cross rail in section, also 
the attachment slide. The tool down slide in 
this figure is lowered from that shown in Fig. 
3. Fig. 9, is a cross section on line 2-2 of 
Fig. 8, showing the construction of the con 
nection of the tool slide with the taper at 
tachment slide. Fig. 10, is a detached front 
elevation of the cross rail slide 14. 
The construction and operation of my im 
proved machine are as follows: 
Referring to Fig. 1, 1 represents the bed; 2 a. 
rotatable table mounted thereon. The mech 
anism for operating said table being too well 
known to require special description, it is, 
therefore, omitted. 3 are uprights attached 
to the bed and Supporting the cross-rail 4 
which is vertically adjustable thereon by the 
old and well known means of the gears 5 en 
gaging vertically arranged screws (not shown) 
connected to the cross-rail 4, 6, 6 are longi 
tudinally adjustable uprights mounted upon 
the cross-rail. The taper attachment guide 
rail 7 is pivotally Supported at one end to the 
bolt 8 of the upright 6, while the other end 
is arranged to be secured in any position 
within the limit of the radial slot 9 of the 
support 6', by means of the screws 10. 
Referring to Fig. 4, 11 is a support pivot 
ally mounted upon a forwardly projecting 
stud of the sliding block 11, which block is 
arranged to be operated longitudinally in slot 
12 of the attachment guide rail 7. 13 is the 
tool down-slide mounted in the support 11 
and when required is vertically operated 
therein, as well as in the cross-rail slide 14, 
See Figs. 4 and 5, which slide in turn is lon. 
gitudinally movable on the cross rail 4, either 
automatically or by hand, which movement 
is effected by means of the threaded shaft 15 
journaled in said cross-rail and engages with 
the lug 16 of the said cross-rail slide. See 
Fig. 8. 
Referring now to Fig. 7 for a detail descrip 
tion of the mechanism for operating the tool 
down-slide 13, 17 is a pinion mounted upon the 
bushing 18, which bushing is journaled in 
- 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
95 
Od 
2 
- 
511,736 
25 
3c) 
35 
O 
frame19 and cap 20. Thispinion engages with 
the rack 21 (see also Fig. 4) of said down-slide 
13, and operates the same by hand through the 
medium of the hand wheel22 rigidly mounted. 
5 upon the projecting end of the bushing 18. 
Said slide 13 is also operated automatically 
by means of the threaded shaft 23 (see also 
Figs. 1 and 4) journaled in the cross-rail 4. 
The worm gear 24 engaging with this shaft, 
is attached to the stud 25 journaled in the 
bushing 26 of the cross-rail slide14. The gear 
27 mounted on the opposite end of stud 25 
registers with gear 28 on the spindle 29, so 
that the pinion 17 is brought under the in 
fluence of the above-mentioned feed gears by 
means of the handle 30, which, when tight 
ened against the friction 31 and that in turn 
against the hand wheel 22, will tighten the 
bushing 18 sufficiently to bring it under their 
control. 
The mechanism consisting of the necessary 
gearing and other elements of which the driv 
ing-shaft 32 (see also Fig. 1) is a part, for im 
parting motion other than by hand to the 
threaded shafts 15 and 23, is not shown, and 
forms no part of this invention. The tool 
down-slide 13 (see Fig. 7) is maintained in 
proper position upon the frame 19 by the caps 
20 and 33 and the bolts 34 and 35, the heads 
of which bolts are anchored in a circular slot 
14 formed in the face of the cross-rail slide14. 
It will be seen from the above that the cir 
cular slots will permit the setting of the frame 
19 and the parts carried thereon at any de 
sired angle to the cross rail 4, while the tool 
down slide will be free to move up or down 
within the bearings of said frame19 as the slide 
14 is fed across the rail 4, and will be guided 
in such movement by its connections with 
the guide rail 7. 
The bore 36 receives the shank 37 (Fig. 6) 
of the tool-holder and is firmly connected 
therewith by means of the clamp screws 38 
and the partly severed lower end portion of 
carrier 13. The spindle 39 attached to the 
tool-holder shank 37 is threaded at its upper 
end to receive the gear 40 in the housing 41. 
(See also Figs. 2 and 3.) Said gear registers 
with gear 42 on the splined rod 43 whose 
lower end, as seen in Fig. 5, carries the bevel 
gear 44 which registers with the bevel gear 45 
on the short shaft 46 journaled in the housing 
47a attached to the frame. To prevent the 
turning of spindle 39 it is also splined to the 
hub.41 of the housing 41, as seen at Fig.6. 
The outer squared end of gear shaft 46 is 
adapted to receive a wrench by means of 
which the tool-holder is given a vertical ad 
justment independent of its carrier. Pulleys 
47, 48 and 49 are positioned respectively on 
the frame 14 and carrier 18 to assist, in con 
nection with a cord 50 and a counterbalance 
(not shown), to relieve the rack pinion of the 
weight of the carrier. As this feature forms 
no part of my present invention no further 
description of it need be given here. 
When operating in straight holes or upon 
45 
So 
55 
parallel surfaces the guide rail 7 is arranged 
parallel with the cross rail 4, and the tool op 
erated either horizontally or vertically. In 
giving an angular feed or movement to the 
tool the guide rail 7 is set at the proper an 
gle, which angle is obtained from the scale 
shown on the support 6* seen at Fig. 4, and 
the tool down-slide 13, by reason of its piv 
otal support on the stud of the sliding block 
11 above referred to, will still retain its ver 
tical position. Therefore, when the cross-rail 
slide 14 is moved along its support, the tool 
down-slide 13 will be raised or lowered in 
conformity with the angular position of the 
taper attachment slide. 
The advantage given to machines of this 
class by reason of the taper attachment, and 
especially where the holder or slide carrying 
the toolis always maintained in avertical posi 
tion, will perform more accurate work, espe 
cially in finishing slight angular surfaces, 
than has heretofore been accomplished. In 
some cases it may be desirable to finish irregu 
lar or wavy surfaces, and to do this I propose 
to employ a taper attachment slide, or a slide 
similarly placed, whose slot or channel will be 
shaped to conform. to the required surface to 
be finished, and this irregular feature could be 
employed either horizontally or at an angle. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure bylietters 
Patent, is 
1. In a boring mill or machine of like char 
acter, the combination with a properly sup 
ported cross rail, of uprights arranged upon 
either end, a taper attachment guide pivot 
ally supported above said cross rail at one 
end to one of said uprights, while the other 
is made adjustable so as to be secured to the 
other of said uprights in an angular position 
with respect to the cross rail as desired, sub 
stantially as shown. 
2. The combination in a boring millor ma-. 
chine of like character, a properly supported 
cross rail, a crossrail slide horizontally move 
able thereon, of a taper attachment guide 
placed above and adjacent to said cross rail 
and arranged to be placed parallel or at an 
angle therewith, a sliding block arranged to 
operate in a slot in said taper attachment 
guide, and the tool carrying mechanism sup 
ported on the cross rail slide as shown and 
also in said sliding block substantially as 
specified. 
3. In a boring mill or machine of like chara 
acter, the combination with a properly sup 
ported cross rail, and a cross rail side opera 
tively mounted thereon, of a taper-attach 
ment guide, a support for the same, mounted 
upon said cross rail, a sliding block in said 
taper attachment guide arranged to operate 
substantially as shown, a tool-down-slide, a . 
tool-holder therein, a frame adjustably, at 
tached to the cross rail slide, substantially 
as shown, said down slide supported in said 
frame and in the support pivotally mounted 
on the sliding block of the taper-attachment 
7 o 
75 
95 
OC 
II) 
II5 
I25 
511,786 
3 
O 
guide, and arranged to have a vertical move 
ment in one or both by means substantially 
as shown. 
4. In a boring mill or machine of like char 
acter, the combination with a bed, a rotatable 
Work-Supporting table mounted thereon, and 
means for operating said table, a cross-rail 
carrying a slide supported on said bed, of a 
properly supported taper-attachment guide 
carrying a sliding block pivotally connected 
with a support, the tool-holding mechanism 
mounted on said sliding block and in a frame 
attached to the cross rail slide and arranged 
to operate in one or both as may be desired, 
substantially as shown. 
5. In a boring mill or machine of like char 
acter, the combination with a properly sup 
ported cross rail carrying a slide, a frame ad 
justably attached to said cross rail slide, a 
taper attachment guide carrying a movable 
block, said guide situated adjacent to said 
cross rail, and arranged to be placed at an 
angle there with, tool-holding mechanism 
mounted in the frame attached to the cross 
rail slide, a support pivotally mounted on said 
movable block, so that in case of an angular 
feed said tool-holding mechanism is main 
tained in a vertical position and arranged to 
be firmly clamped in such position, so that 
by reason of the taper attachment guide and 
the engagement of the tool holding mechan 
ism there with the tool will move in an angu 
lar path under the influence of the horizontal 
3O 
35 
movement of the cross-rail slide, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. In a taper attachment for boring mills, 
the combination with a cross rail carrying a 
slide, and a frame 19 swiveled thereto, and 
supporting the tool down-slide, of a guide 
adjustably mounted upon suitable uprights 
upon the cross rail, and adapted to be set at 
an angle to that of the cross rail, and mech 
anism connected there with as shown, where 
by said tool is caused to feed down as the 
slide traverses the rail, substantially as shown 45 
and described. . 
7. The combination in a boring mill or ma 
chine of like character, of a tool-holder, its 
down-slide, supports for the same, said slide 
arranged to move therein, rotatable gears 
mounted at the upper end thereof, the thread 
ed end of the tool-holder engaging with the 
threaded hub of one of the said gears, the 
other operatively mounted on a rod adjacent 
thereto, whereby said rod is operated, so that 
by means of such mechanism the tool-holder 
is caused to move independent of its carrier, 
and means substantially as shown whereby 
said holder is firmly clamped to its carrier 
and operated there with. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES LEON IBBY. 
55 
Witnesses: 
M. C. HINCHCLIFFE, 
A. J. TANNER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511836.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 511,836, 
 
J. DAHL STROM. 
WALWE GEAR FOR STEAM. ENGINES, 
o 
Patented Jan, 2, 1894. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
az2%2. s 
AzY227a. 
: ISSN N 
Z23 3.SSNs 
 
e -et SN 
z N 4 (2 
NaNan 
 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
 
  
ENEN 
N SN 
N N 
S s 
N Yz z 
 
 
 
 
  
 
N-7. A 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
2 2. 
 
V 
IN 
N2 arzai 
NESSSSSSS 
N SN&sexNN&SEs 
SFF 22, 
SS S3 SS3 
SSX SS 
S 
2 
2 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
RN(N1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SNY 
P 
12-zes ses. 
f 
24. Me464. 
.Z 7-zzye72Zo 
3%-4%. 
 
s/7ZZo Pyzes/s. 
THE NATIONAL LETHoaRAPHING cow PANY. 
WASHINGTON, , C, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN DAHLSTROM, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-FOURTH 
TO HARRY II. BARCLAY, OF SAME PLACE. 
VALVE GEAR FOR STEAVENGINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 511,836, dated January 2, 1894. 
Application filed June 13, 1893, Serial No, 477,418, (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whom, it indy concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN DAHLSTRM, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Buf 
falo, in the county of Erie and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Valve-Gear for Steam-Engines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to direct acting 
Steam engines which are provided with a main 
slide valve and an auxiliary slide valve con 
nected with the main valve, such, for instance, 
as are used in steam pumps. 
One object of my invention is to improve 
the construction of the valve mechanism by 
contriving it in such a manner that the aux 
iliary valve is actuated wholly by mechanical 
means, while the main valve is operated, dur 
ing part of its stroke, by the auxiliary valve, 
and during the remainder of its stroke by 
steam pressure. 
Another object of my invention is to im 
prove the mechanical means whereby the 
auxiliary valve is operated. 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figure 1. 
is a longitudinal sectional elevation of a di 
rect-acting steam engine provided with my 
improvements and showing the piston at the 
end of its backward stroke and the main 
valve in its central position. Fig. 2 is a lon 
gitudinal Section of the steam chest and 
valves, showing the main valve at the end of 
its forward stroke. Fig. 3 is a fragmentary 
longitudinal Section of the steam chest and 
main valve, showing the latter in its foremost 
position, the section being taken on one side 
of the center for the purpose of showing the 
exhaust cavity in the main valve. Figs. 4 
and 5 are vertical transverse sections in lines 
4-4 and 5-5, Fig. 1, respectively. Fig. 6 is 
a bottom plan view of the main valve. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts. 
in the several figures. 
A represents the steam cylinder, B the pis 
ton and b the piston rod. 
C represents the cylindrical steam chest 
which is arranged parallel with the steam 
cylinder. 
did represent the main front and rear steam 
ports leading from opposite ends of the steam 
chest to opposite ends of the steam cylinders. 
E is the exhaust chamber arranged on the 
under side of the steam chest and opening 
centrally into the under side thereof. 
e e' represent the main front and rear ex 
haust ports arranged between the main Steam. 
ports and the exhaust chamber and extend 
ing from the steam chest to the steam cylin 
der. 
F represents a hollow main slide valve 
which reciprocates in the steam chest, and 
which is composed of two pistons ff' connect 
ed by a contracted neck f* forming a main ex 
haust cavity f' between said pistons. 
G represents the steam chamber arranged 
above the steam chest and provided with 
main front and rear steam passages g g open 
ing into the end portions of the steam chest, 
diametrically opposite the steam ports did. 
II represents the steam supply pipe con 
nected with the steam chamber. 
During the reciprocating movement of the 
main slide valve its exhaust cavity alternately 
connects the main front and rear exhaust 
ports with the exhaust chamber, and one of 
its pistons closes the main steam passage and 
port in one end of the steam chest thereby 
shutting off steam to the adjacent end of the 
steam cylinder, while the other piston opens 
the main steam passage and port in the other 
end of the steam chest, thereby admitting 
steam to the opposite end of the steam cylin 
der, as shown in Fig. 2. 
I represents an auxiliary slide valve, pref 
erably of cylindrical form, arranged to recip 
rocate in the bore of the main slide valve. 85 
The main and auxiliary slide valves are ca 
pable of lengthwise movement upon each 
other, but this movement is limited by a trans 
verse bolt secured to the main slide valve 
and passing through a longitudinal slot i' in 90 
the auxiliary slide valve. The auxiliary slide 
valve is actuated wholly by mechanical means, 
while the main slide valve is actuated partly 
by mechanical means and partly by steam 
pressure. 
jj' represent auxiliary front and rear steam 
ports which extend from the steam chamber 
into the steam chest on the inner sides of the 
steam passages g g', and k l are auxiliary 
front and rear steam passages formed in the 
upper portion of the main slide valve and ex 
tending from the periphery to the bore there 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
2 
511,836 
75 
s 
5 
of. When the main slide valve is in its cen 
tral position in the steam chest, as shown in 
Fig. 1, its pistons close the main steam pas 
Sages and ports at both ends of the steam 
chamber and chest, and both its auxiliary 
steam passages k c' are in line with the aux 
iliary steam ports if' of the steam chamber. 
When the main slide valve is in this position 
and the auxiliary slide valve is at either end 
of its movement, one of the auxiliary steam 
passages in the main slide valve is closed and 
shuts off steam to the adjacent end of the 
steam chest, while the other auxiliary steam 
passage is open and admits steam to that end 
of the steam chest, which causes the main 
slide valve to be shifted toward the opposite 
end of the steam chest, as represented in Fig. 2. 
ll represent front and rear exhaust chan 
nels formed lengthwise in the bottom portion 
of the bore of the main slide valve and ex 
tending inwardly from both ends of the latter. 
0 m represent auxiliary front and rear ex 
haust ports formed in the lower portion of 
the main slide valve between the exhaust 
channels and the main exhaust cavity, and 
extending from the bore to the periphery of 
the main slide valve. 
n' represent auxiliary front and rear ex 
haust cavities which are formed in the under 
side of the auxiliary slide valve and which 
alternately connect the front exhaust chan 
nel With the front auxiliary exhaust port, and 
the rear exhaust channel with the rear auxil. 
iary exhaust port. 
in represents the valve rod, secured to the 
front end of the auxiliary slide valve, and 
passing through the front head of the steam 
chest. The front end of this valve rod is 
guided on a standard N secured upon the 
main frame of the engine. 
O represents a transverse rock shaft which 
is journaled in bearings o' o' formed on the 
Standard N underneath the valve rod and 
which is actuated by a depending rock arm 
P secured with its upper end to the rock 
shaft outside of the bearing o' and with its 
lower end to a cross head p on the piston rod 
by a link p'. 
Q represents a rock finger which is mounted 
loosely with its lower end on the rock shaft 
on the inner side of the bearing o' and which 
engages loosely with its upper end in an eye 
q formed on the valve rod. 
g' q represent radial tappets formed on the 
rock finger on opposite sides of its pivot. 
R represents a collar secured to the rock 
shaft between the rock finger and the bear 
ing o' and provided with radial tappets r r" 
which are arranged on opposite sides of the 
rock shaft, and which are adapted to engage 
with the tappets of the rock finger for shift 
ing the valve rod and the valves connected 
there with. The tappets of the collar and rock 
finger are so disposed that when the tappets on 
One side of the rock shaft are in contact with 
each other, the tappets on the opposite side 
are separated by an intervening space. This 
space produces lost motion during the first 
portion of the forward and backward strokes 
of the piston rod and causes the valve rod to 
be actuated only during the last portion of 
each stroke. 
In the position of the parts represented in 
Fig. 1, the piston has completed its backward 
stroke and the main valve occupies its Cen 
tral position, thereby closing the main steam 
and exhaust ports and cutting off communi 
cation with both ends of the steam cylinder. 
In this position of the parts the rear tappet 
r' of the rock shaft bears against the rear 
tappet g of the rock finger, and the auxiliary 
valve has been moved forwardly, thereby 
clearing the rear auxiliary steam passage of 
the main valve K and admitting steam into 
the rear end of the steam chest. The steam 
now enters the rear end of the steam chest 
and drives the main valve forwardly into the 
position shown in Fig. 2, thereby clearing the 
rear main steam passage and port and ad 
mitting steam to the rear end of the steam 
cylinder. This causes the main piston to 
move forwardly and the piston rod of the 
same to carry the rock arm forward. At the 
same time that the main valve clears the rear 
main steam passage and port its exhaust caV 
ity connects the front main exhaust port with 
the exhaust chamber, as most clearly shown 
in Fig. 3. During the first portion of the for 
ward movement of the main valve, when it is 
actuated by steam pressure, its front auxil 
iary exhaust port in opens into the front main 
exhaust porte of the steam cylinder and the 
front auxiliary exhaust cavity in of the aux 
iliary valve connects the front auxiliary ex 
haust port m with the front exhaust channel 
l of the main valve, whereby the steam is per 
mitted to exhaust from the front end of the 
steam chest into the exhaust chamber. Dur 
ing the last portion of the forward movement 
of the main valve communication between 
the front exhaust channel l and the front 
auxiliary exhaust cavity n is cut off and 
the front auxiliary steam passage K clears 
the auxiliary valve and connects the front 
main steam passage g with the front end of 
the steam chest as represented in Fig. 2, there 
by admitting steam into the front end of the 
steam chest whereby the main valve is cush 
ioned at the end of its forward stroke and 
jarring or pounding is prevented. During 
the last portion of the forward movement of 
the main piston the front tappet r of the rock 
shaft engages with the front tappet q' of the 
rock finger and moves the valve rod and the 
main and auxiliary valves connected thereWith 
backwardly. During the backward move 
ment of the auxiliary valve the rear end of 
its slot bears against the transverse bolt of 
the main valve and carries the latter with it. 
At the end of the backward movement of the 
auxiliary valve the front auxiliary steam pas 
sage K arrives opposite the front auxiliary 
steam porti of the steam chamber, thereby 
admitting steam into the front end of the 
95 
OC) 
O 
II5 
125 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
51,836 
3 
Steam chest, whereby the main valve is driven 
by Steam pressure to the end of its backward 
Stroke. As the main valve clears the front 
main steam passage and port during the last 
portion of its backward movement steam is 
admitted into the front end of the steam cyl 
inder, which causes the main piston to be 
moved backwardly and the main and auxil 
iary valves to be shifted forwardly into the 
position shown in Fig. 1. In this manner the 
auxiliary valve is positively operated from 
the piston rod and the main valve is posi 
tively operated from the auxiliary valve dur 
ing the first part of its stroke and moved by 
Steam pressure during the remainder of its 
Stroke. This construction of the valves and 
their operating mechanism, is comparatively 
simple, as the valves have only a rectilinear 
and no oscillatory movement, and enables the 
valves to be produced at comparatively small 
cost and to be easily fitted and kept in work 
ing order. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination with the steam cylin 
der, the piston, and the steam chest, of a main 
slide valve arranged in said steam chest, an 
auxiliary valve arranged in the main slide 
valve, operated from the piston, and having 
a limited reciprocating motion with the main 
slide valve, whereby both valves are moved 
together until the movement of the auxiliary 
Valve is arrested, when the stroke of the main 
valve is completed by the action of the steam, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with the steam cylin 
der, the piston and the steam chest, of a main 
valve arranged to slide in the steam chest and 
controlling the steam for actuating the pis 
ton, an auxiliary valve arranged to slide with 
in the main valve and provided with a slot, a 
transverse bolt or pin secured to the main 
valve and entering the slot of the auxiliary 
valve, the ends of said slot being arranged to 
come in contact with said pin or bolt during 
the first portion of the stroke of the auxiliary 
valve, and intermediate mechanism whereby 
the auxiliary valve is operated from the pis 
ton, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination with the steam cylin 
der, the piston and the steam chest connected 
with the cylinder by mainsteam and exhaust 
ports, of the steam chamber having main 
front and rear steam passages opening into 
the end portions of the chest, an exhaust 
chamber, a hollow main valve provided with 
a central exhaust cavity for connecting the 
exhaust ports with the exhaust chamber, and 
an auxiliary valve arranged to slide in the 
main valve and operated from the piston, 
substantially as set forth. 
35 
45 
55 
4. The combination with the steam cylin 
der, the piston, the steam chest connected 
with the cylinder by main steam and exhaust 
ports, the steam chamber connected with the 
steam chest by main steam passages and aux 
iliary steam ports, and the exhaust chamber, 
of a hollow main valve provided centrally 
with a main exhaust cavity and having aux 
iliary steam passages extending from its outer 
side to its bore, and adapted to register with 
the auxiliary steam ports and the main steam 
passages of the steam chamber, and having 
longitudinal exhaust channels formed in its 
bore and auxiliary exhaust passages extend 
ing transversely from the bore to its outer 
side, and an auxiliary valve arranged to slide 
within the main valve and provided with aux 
iliary exhaust cavities adapted to connect the 
auxiliary exhaust passages with the exhaust 
channels, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination with the steam cylin 
der, the piston, the steam chest and the steam 
chamber, of a main slide valve arranged in 
said steam chest, an auxiliary slide valve ar 
ranged in the main slide valve, and capable 
of a limited longitudinal reciprocating mo 
tion with the main slide valve, and a rock 
finger connected with the auxiliary valve and 
actuated from the piston, whereby both valves 
are moved together until the movement of the 
auxiliary valve is arrested, when the main 
valve is moved farther and its stroke is com 
pleted by the action of the steam, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. The combination with the steam cylin 
der, the piston, the piston rod, the steam 
chest, the valve and the valve rod, of a rock 
arm connected with the piston rod, and a rock 
finger connected with the valverod and shifted 
by the rock arm during the last portion of the 
movement of the latter, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. The combination with the steam cylin 
der, the piston, the piston rod, the steam 
chest, the valve and the valve rod, of a rock 
shaft, a rock finger mounted loosely on said 
shaft and connected with said valve rod, a 
rock arm secured to the rock shaft and con 
nected with the piston rod, and tappets on the 
rock shaft adapted to engage with tappets on 
the rock finger, said tappets being so disposed 
that the rock finger is actuated during the last 
portion of the forward or backward stroke of 
the piston, substantially as set forth. 
Witness my hand this 10th day of June, 
1893. 
JOHN DAHLSTRM. 
Witnesses: 
THEO. L. POPP, 
F. C. GEYER. 
75 
95 
CO 
Io5 
TIO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US511936.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 511,936, 
D. J. DAVIS. 
CENTRIFUGAL CREAMER, 
Patented Jan, 2, 1894. 
 
34&o-, - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL J. DAVIS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
CENTRFUGA CREAVER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 511,936, dated January 2, 1894. 
Application filed November 7, 1891, Serial No. 4ll.l72, (No model.) 
25 
O 
the bowl; the tube terminating flush with and 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL J. DAVIS, a corresponding to the curvature of the interior 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi- surface at this point. By running the inlet 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi-tube down on the outside, it can be more 
nois, have invented certain new and useful firmly secured in place, and is not in the 
Improvements in Centrifugal Creamers, of least liable to be broken away, as is the case 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact when the tube is run down on the inside and 
description, that will enable others to make is subjected to the force and action of the 
and use the same, reference being had to the liquid bodies which very often have the ef 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of fect of detaching the inlet-tube. Another ad 
this specification, in which- 
vantage in having this tube outside is, that 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of an imper- it leaves the surface of the cone on the in 
forate separator - bowl embodying my im- side of the bowl, perfectly Smooth, whereas a 
proved features; Fig. 2 a horizontal section pipe inside, along the surface of the cone or 
on line 2, Fig. 1, looking in the direction in- projecting therefrom, is an obstruction, creates 
dicated by the arrow; and Fig. 3 a broken- a ripple, breaks up the cream-wall and re 
away sectional detail on line 3 Fig. 1, look- tards the process. 
ing outwardly as indicated by the arrow. 
The receiver, C, is gradually contracted 
This invention relates to improvements in from the bottom upwardly and slightly curved 
that class of centrifugal separators more es- inwardly just before the top is reached, as at 
pecially used in the process of mechanically b, so that the uncreamed milk, passing into 
creaming milk. 
the same, is rather drawn downwardly and 
The object of this invention is to increase forced into the inlet or receiving-tube, and a 
the working capacity of the separator-bowl continuous unbroken supply maintained; 
Without enlarging the dimensions of the thus facilitating the process. When the walls 
S36, 
of the receiver are perpendicular or the area 
In the drawings, A represents a separator- of an increasing diameter in the direction of 
bowl provided with the central cone B. 
the upper end, the uncreamed milk, fed in, 
The chamber a, in the conical body, re- has a tendency to rise up in the receiver in 
ceives the driving-spindle; (not shown) the stead of pushing downwardly, as is the case 
inserted box or plug, a, providing the nec- with the form of receiver shown herein. The 
essary bearing therefor; the bowl balancing imperforate wing, E, is rigidly secured to and 
loosely in a running position. The bowl grad- follows the curvature of the inclosing wall. 
ually enlarges from the bottom upwardly on The inner edge of this wing stops short of the 
a curved line to about, or a little above, the cone B excepting near the lower end, as at b'. 
middle, and from that point the wall turns This wing forms a partition between the in 
inwardly with a somewhat sharper curve, coming and outgoing volume. The un 
forming the rounded shoulder a, and termi-creamed milk enters on the side of the wing 
nating in the contracted neck a. The greatest and direction in which the bowl is rotating; 
diameter of the bowl is about on a line with the skimmed-milk discharge-tube being lo 
the apex of the conical body B. The apex of cated on the oppositeside, (Fig. 2.) thus the full 
the cone is screw-threaded, as at a, and re-milk entering makes a full revolution before 
ceives the lower correspondingly threaded any skimmed-milk can reach the discharge 
end of the milk-receiver, C; thus the top of side. The wing E', located diametrically op 
posite the wing E, serves to balance the bowl, 
45 the cone forms a bottom for said receiver. 
with reference to the latter wing, and is per. 
The upper end of the inlet-tube, D, opens into 
forated so that the liquid may pass there 
the receiver through the top of the cone 
through. 
and terminates flush there with. From this 
The lower end of the creamed-milk dis 
point the inlet-tube extends down along the 
charge-tube, F, opens under the rounded 
exterior wall of the chambered cone, and 
shoulder of the bowl, (as indicated by a dot 
opens through the wall at or near the base 
ted line Fig. 1.) and from that point extends 
and discharges into the contracted bottom of 
35 
55 
75 
95 
OC 
 
511,936 
O 
2 
upwardly, following the curved line of the in 
closing wall and ending in the passage d, in 
the swell d' formed on the inside neck of the 
bowl. The passaged runs into the orifice d 
opening out just under the rim, and through 
which the creamed-milk is discharged. By 
means of the screw d, the area of the passage 
in the swell d' may be enlarged or dimin 
ished so as to control or regulate the outflow 
of the milk with reference to increasing the 
outflow of the cream through another pas 
sage. If the screw is turned inwardly, the 
passage is diminished, the flow of the milk 
lessened, and the flow of the cream increased. 
The curved discharge-tube, F, is secured 
rigidly in place and may be cleansed by re 
moving the screw-plug d, threaded through 
the inside wall of the swell d', and a suitable 
brush or other cleaning device inserted and 
passed into the tube. 
On the inside of the neck of the bowl, and 
opposite the point where the skimmed-milk 
is discharged, is formed the chambered pro 
jection, G, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3. The 
exit-chamberg, in this projection, has slop 
ing walls contracting the area toward the ori 
fice g', opening outwardly through the inclos 
ing wall. The separated cream escapes or is 
discharged through the orifice g; the con 
tracting walls of the chamber having the ef 
fect of drawing the body of cream in the di 
rection of the exit-passage, and facilitating 
the outward flow. The opening being in the 
face of the projection, the cream will pass in 
readily when it rises to that point. The in 
wardly projecting flange goverhangs the 
opening into the exit-chamber and prevents 
the cream from having a tendency to rise 
above, and assists in concentrating and forc 
ing the same into the exit-chamber. The 
cream-exit passage opening inwardly at a 
point away from the inclosing wall of the 
bowl, prevents the skimmed-milk from reach 
ing and mingling with the cream as the lay 
ers of milk adhere to the surface of the wall 
and follow around and escape through the 
proper passage. The uncreamed milk enter 
ing the bowl close to the bottom with the 
curved wall extending away from one side of 
the inlet opening and the inclined surface of 
30 
35 
45 
55 
75 
the cone on the other, the process of separa 
tion begins at once, the milk passing to the 
inclosing wall and the cream following the 
line of the conical surface, thus utilizing the 
entire surface of the bowl from the bottom 
upward. By taking the skimmed-milk out 
above the middle of the bowl the separating 
capacity is increased as there is less dead 
space. The abrupt shoulder formed by the 
incurving wall checks the upward flow of the 
skimmed milk when it rises to the escape 
tube, and tends to concentrate the volume at 
this point and force the outflow. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a separator-bowl, the combination with 
the cone part thereof, of a receiver, diminish 
ing in diameter from the lower end upwardly 
and seated on said cone, the top whereof forms 
a bottom for said receiver, and an inlet-tube, 
opening up into said receiver, and extending 
down along the exterior wall of said cone and 
discharging into the bottom of the bowl, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with a separator bowl, 
contracted at the top and bottom, and the in 
closing wall gradually curving outwardly and 
upwardly from the bottom to a point above 
the middle and then curving abruptly in 
wardly, of a discharge tube located on the in 
terior upper part close to and following the 
curvature of said wall, its lower end opening 
at the point of the abrupt curve, and the up 
per end communicating with a passage lead 
ing out through the contracted neck under 
the rim, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination with a separator-bowl, 
having a swell formed on the interior con 
tracted neck part with a passage there 
through, of a screw-plug inserted through the 
wall of said swell, whereby access maybe had 
to said passage for the purpose of cleaning or 
clearing the discharge-tube, substantially as 
set forth. 
DANIEL J. DAVIS. 
Witnesses: 
L. M. FREEMAN, 
L. B. COUPLAND. 
50 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512037.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 512,037, 
P. KRAUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR DRIVING TUNNELS. 
Patented Jan, 2, 1894, 
M 
issessssssessistssize ai/ 
Z2 
Egethelez22 
| 2--- 
SO99.99999990092 
 
 
 
 
Z 7 E. , 
 
EEEEEE cgt. 
\ey OOGOO60 
96.3 
A 
 
a 2. 
se: 
   
 
 
2/ZZzesses. 
2%2A-4 
Azzezior 
Aeter/2azes. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 512,037, 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR DRIVING TUNNELs. 
Patented Jan, 2, 1894. 
P. KRAUS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
2S 
SSS 
SSSSSS 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
w 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PET FR KRAUS, OF VIENNA, AUSTRIA-HUNGARY. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR DRIVING, TUNNELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,037, dated January 2, 1894. 
Application filed June 2, 1892, Serial No. 435,302, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it nual/ concern: 
Beit known that I, PETER, KRAUS, a subject 
of the Emperor of Austria-Hungary, residing 
at Vienna, in the Province of Lower Austria, 
in the Empire of Austria-Hungary, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Methods of and Apparatus for Driving Tun 
nels and other Subterranean Passages; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to the art of excavat 
ing or driving tunnels or other underground 
conduits; and the difficulties encountered 
when a tunnel or other conduit is to be driven 
into a sandy or gravelly stratum or through 
clay are well understood by engineers, as well 
as the great cost of properly lining such tun 
nels or conduits. On the other hand, if such 
stratum is also a water bearing stratum the 
difficulties are considerably increased. 
The methods of and means for tunneling 
or driving underground conduits in drifts of 
the nature referred to and heretofore brought 
into use afford no protection against subsi 
dence or caving in of the walls of the drift, 
tunnel, or conduit, except by the use of ex 
pensive artificial means, so that the driving 
of a tunnel or conduit under a building or 
water course through a loose sandy or grav 
elly or clayey stratum presents technical dif 
ficulties of such a nature or involving so great 
an expenditure and risks as to necessitate the 
abandonment of the Work. 
My invention has for its object the provis 
ion of means whereby these difficulties may 
be overcome and a lining provided for the 
conduit that is not only of Sufficient strength 
to resist the pressure of the soil about it, but 
that is cheap as compared with the cost of 
such linings as were heretofore provided. 
To these ends the invention consistS in a 
novel method of, and in the means for driv 
ing and simultaneously lining tunnels or other 
underground conduits, as will now be more 
fully described, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional view of 
a portion of a tunnel or other underground 
conduit, and of my improved excavating ma 
chine. Fig. 2 is a like view illustrating a 
slight modification in the construction of the 
excavator. Fig. 3 is a front elevation of the 
excavator shown in Fig. 1, and Figs. 4, 5, and 
6, are detail views. 
My improved excavating machine consists 
essentially of a revoluble excavator, means 
for forming a lining for the tunnel or conduit 
as fast as the excavation proceeds, a support 
for said lining adapted to move with the ex 
cavator as the latter penetrates into the drift 
so as to afford time for the lining to set be 
fore the support moves away from it, means 
for supporting or strengthening the lining 
after the excavator has moved beyond the 
set portion of such lining, means for compact 
ing the lining, means for removing the spoils, 
and a suitable motor or motors which I have 
deemed unnecessary to show as these may be 
of any desired or preferred and well-known 
construction. In addition to the above-de 
scribed elements I provide means whereby the 
caving in of the face of the drift is prevented 
When Working in very loose sandy or gravelly 
or clayey water bearing strata, as will appear 
hereinafter. 
The excavator consists of a shaft, A, driven 
by any suitable motor, and provided with four, 
more or less, radial arms, a, to which are se 
cured the excavator shovels, s, which may be 
of any suitable form, as for instance, of the 
form of plow shovels, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2, or of the form of cutter teeth, as shown in 
Fig. 4. The radial arms, Cl, are preferably 
constructed of T-iron, to the web of which 
the cutters, S, are secured, and in the web of 
the said arms, a, are formed bolt holes for 
Securing thereto a shield, F, to prevent the 
caving in of the face of the drift when work 
ing in a Water bearing stratum of loose sand 
or gravel, or of clay, said shield having bear 
ing on the face of the drift in rear of the cut 
ters, S, and the said shield has an axial open 
ing, O, through which the spoils pass. If 
necessary the radial arms, a, may be braced 
by diagonal braces, a', Fig. 3, preferably of 
angle iron, to which braces cutters may also 
be secured if desired. Of course it will be 
understood that the diameter of the excava 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
o 
45 
so 
OO 
512,037 
O 
25 
35 
45 
tor, or more properly, the reach of the outer 
cutters on the arms thereof, will determine 
the diameter of the tunnel or other conduit 
to be driven minus the lining. 
When working in non-water-bearing strata 
I prefer to connect the radial arms, a, of the 
excavator adjustably with the shaft, A, that 
is to say, they are preferably hinged to or 
otherwise articulated on said shaft, and have 
connected there with suitable stays a, Fig. 2, 
adapted to be secured to the shaft, whereby 
the arms, a, may be more or less inclined, and 
it will be readily understood that by varying 
the inclination of the said arms the diameter 
of the tunnel may be varied, and consequently 
the thickness of the lining therefor, accord 
ing to the nature of the stratum through 
which the drift is cut. On the other hand, 
by varying the inclination of the arms rela 
tively to each other, by shifting them forward 
and backward according to the varying radius 
to be cut, a drift of ellipsoidal or oval form 
in section may be cut, and this shifting of 
the arms may be effected by any suitable 
means, as for instance eccentric guides. In 
this case the support for the lining must have 
a form corresponding to the cross-sectional 
form of the drift. This support consists of a 
drum, M, of the proper form in cross section 
and of sufficient strength to stand the press 
ure brought upon it; as shown in the drawings 
it is made up of angle or T-bars, v', parallel 
with shaft, A, and bolted to angle iron support 
ingrings, m, and provided with roller bearings, 
v. I prefer to construct the periphery of 
the drum, M, of angle bars u', for the reason 
that these can be so arranged that separate 
bearings are provided for each of the rollers, 
nu, as shown in Fig. 6, which is not the case 
when T-bars are used, where a single bear 
ing has to be used for two roller journals, as 
shown in Fig. 5, which arrangement is liable 
to result in frictional resistance between the 
abutting faces of said journals. In order to 
protect the journals and their bearings from 
contact with cement or concrete of which the 
lining of the tunnel is formed, I cover them 
with a shield, U*, Fig. 6, so as to avoid too 
rapid wear or prevent the journal bearings 
from becoming clogged. For tunnels of great 
diameter, or when the support is subjected to 
very great pressures it is built up accordingly 
of correspondingly strong metal plates or gird 
ers combined with levers. The rear end of 
the drum support, M, is closed by a head P, 
through which pass the spoil pipe or pipes, 
G, and the concrete supply pipe, L. The 
spoils may be removed from within the sup 
port by suction or in any other desired man 
her, and emptied into the tunnel a proper dis 
tance in rear of the drum, M, and taken from 
thence by endless chain buckets or other suit 
able conveyers, or in trucks out of the tunnel 
or conduit, or if desired the said spoils may 
be removed from the Support, M, by means 
of a chain and bucket or other mechanical con 
veyer. 
The concrete supply pipe, L, is connected 
with an annular delivery pipe, K, that has 
suitable openings to deliver the concrete in 
a plane on a level with the peripheries of the 
roller bearings, w, that not only serve to fa 
cilitate the propulsion of the drum support, 
M, but also to roll the concrete lining smooth, 
as will be readily understood. In front of 
the delivery pipe, K, is arranged the ram 
mer, which consists of a circular box, J, the 
inner end of which is open, and is provided 
with peripheral roller bearings, v', like the 
drum support, M, which rollers, au, have bear 
ing on the inner face of the drift and hold it 
against caving in, and in rear of said rollers 
is a guard plate, i, having bearing on the lin 
ing and preventing the same from falling onto 
said rollers, U. 
In the annular box, J, is fitted a circular 
rammer, consisting of a flat ring, i, that is 
normally held in the open end of the box by 
coiled springs, i, and to said plate and pass 
ing through the coiled springs are attached 
wire ropes, i', guided by suitable pulleys, said 
ropes passing finally through the rear head, 
P, of the drum support, and at a suitable 
distance from the latter are connected to 
gether and to a single rope. It is obvious that 
when the ropes are pulled upon, the rammer 
plate, i, will be drawn into its box, J, against 
the stress of its spring, and that when said 
ropes are released the springs will throw the 
rammer plate forward against the concrete 
being delivered by pipe, K, whereby such con 
crete is rammed solid. As shown, the shaft, 
A, projects some distance in front of the ex 
cavator, so that it may be thrust into the face 
of the drift and thus serve as a guide to the 
excavator and drum Support which are simul 
taneously moved toward the face of said drift 
as fast as the excavating progresses. Any 
suitable mechanical appliances may be pro 
vided to impart this forward motion to the 
apparatus, such appliances being well known 
in mining and tunneling machinery. If for 
instance, the power that moves the apparatus 
forward is applied directly to the rear head 
of the drum support, M, at different points, it 
is possible to vary the direction of motion of 
the apparatus. Thus by applying greater 
power on one or the other side, or above or 
below the axis of the drum support, the ap 
paratus will deviate from a straight line either 
to the right or the left, or upwardly or down 
wardly, according to the point at which the 
greater propelling power is applied. Any 
suitable mechanism may be employed, where 
by this power is applied to the head, P, of the 
drum support, M, in the drawings I have 
shown a series of pipes p, applied to said head 
through which air under pressure may be ap 
plied at various points around the edge of 
the head, P, and if it is desired to produce 
a deviation of the excavating apparatus from 
a straight line, the air may be supplied at va 
rious pressures to one or more pipes of the 
series, and this can readily be done by placing 
75 
9 O 
95 
OC 
105 
O 
I 25 
55 
65 
 
512,037 
3 
C 
3o 
35 
valves in the communications between the 
pipes and the source of compressed air sup 
ply, and regulating the flow of air to the sev 
eral pipes, or the valves may be weighted 
valves and the weight thereof varied. The 
concrete may be forced through the supply 
pipe, L, and delivery pipe, K, by any desired 
means, as for instance by hydraulic pressure, 
and at a rate corresponding to the rate of pro 
gress of the excavator, or this may be effected 
by means of compressed air. 
In order that the rammer box, J, may be 
kept free from any concrete carried into the 
same by the rammer, i, said box is provided 
with ports or openings, i, on its inner periph 
ery, through which such concrete is discharged 
into the drum support, from which it is re 
moved with the spoils, the rammer acting as 
a scraper within the box to prevent the con 
crete from adhering to the inner walls of the 
latter. 
A longitudinal reciprocating motion within 
the limits of compressibility of the still plas 
tic concrete may be imparted to the drum 
support, M, when compressed air is employed 
as a propelling power by producing alternat 
ing pressures in the pipes, p, as will be read 
ily understood, so that the concrete lining will 
be smoothly rolled by the alternating or pull 
sating motion of the drum support, M, and 
the concrete prevented from choking the roll 
ers. The concrete as it is delivered at the for 
ward end of the drum support, M, is of course 
quite soft or pasty, and to give it time to set 
before the said support moves from under it, 
the support is made of sufficient length, so 
that the lining will be self-supporting for a 
length of about ten to thirteen centimeters, 
and to avoid all danger of caving in of the 
lining, brace rings, R, preferably U-shaped 
in cross section are introduced, which may 
afterward be removed, but when the lining is 
subjected to great pressure, or the drift is cut 
into a very loose sandy or gravelly or clayey 
stratum, and especially when this is a water 
bearing stratum, the brace rings, R., are left 
in place and form a permanent part of the 
conduit, so that the lining will be composed 
of a shell of concrete and a lining therefor of 
metal rings. In order that these rings may 
be rapidly positioned, I prefer to construct 
them in sections of proper curvature, so that 
when a ring is inserted it will conform in con 
figuration to that of the cross section of the 
lining, said sections being provided with bolt 
flanges for bolting the same together, 
In case a considerable volume of water is 
encountered it may become necessary to op 
erate with compressed air within the drum 
support, M, in which case the compressed air 
chambers may be formed by means of parti 
tion plates within the drum, M, itself, or in 
rear of said drum by means of partition plates 
bolted to the flanges of the supporting rings, 
R, and as the excavating proceeds these par 
titions are shifted forward. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that there is no danger of a caving in of 
the drift or liming, whatever the nature of the 
stratum into which the drift is cut or driven. 
It will also be seen that all staying, shoring, 
&c., are avoided, and as the lining is built up 
mechanically, the work proceeds at a much 
greater speed and more economically than is 
possible otherwise. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In the art of constructing underground 
conduits, the improvement which consists in 
conveying concrete in a plastic state to, dis 
tributing it over and compacting the same on 
the face of such conduit by pressure, and ap 
plying the compacting pressure in directions 
parallel with and perpendicular to the said 
face of the conduit. 
2. In the art of constructing underground 
conduits, the improvement which consists in 
conveying concrete in a plastic state to, dis 
tributing it over and compacting the same on 
the face of such conduit by pressure, apply 
ing the compacting pressure in directions 
parallel with and perpendicular to the said 
face of the conduit, and maintaining said 
perpendicular pressure until the concrete has 
set or hardened. 
3. A combined tunneling and tunnellining 
apparatus comprising an excavator, a sup 
port for the lining of a diameter equal to that 
of the drift minus said lining, and means for 
delivering concrete between the support and 
the tunnel, for the purpose set forth. 
4. A combined tunneling and tunnellining 
apparatus comprising a revoluble excavator, 
a drum for supporting the lining of a diameter 
equal to that of the drift minus the lining, 
means for forcing concrete about the periph 
ery of the drum, and a rammer interposed be 
tween the latter and the drum for ramming 
the concrete supplied about said drum, for 
the purpose set forth. 
5. A combined tunneling and tunnellining 
apparatus, comprising a revoluble excavator, 
a drum for supporting the lining of a diame 
ter equal to that of the drift minus said lin 
ing, means for forcing concrete about the pe 
riphery of the drum, a rammer for ramming 
the concrete, and a shield interposed between 
the rammer and excavator, said shield being 
arranged to bear on the face of the drift, for 
the purpose set forth. 
6. A combined tunneling and tunnel lining 
apparatus, comprising a revoluble excavator, 
a tubular-support for the lining of a diame, 
ter equal to that of the drift minus said lin 
ing, said tubular support having peripheral 
roller bearings arranged with their axes in 
planes tangential to the periphery of their 
Support, means for delivering concrete about 
the peripheral bearings of the support at its 
forward end, a rammer consisting of a ring 
shaped housing open at its rear end and ring 
shaped rammer adapted to receive a to-and 
fro motion in its housing, said rammer being 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
I 
25 
512,08? 
11. In a combined tunneling and tunnellin- 5o 
5 stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4 
arranged at the forward end of the support riphery of the support, the concrete feed pipes, 
and operating on the concrete to consolidate 
L., K, arranged in front of the support and 
the same as it is delivered between the sup 
having delivery ports in the plane of the roller 
port and inner periphery of the drift, sub 
bearings, and a spoil exhaust pipe extend 
ing into the support, of a circular to-and-fro 45 
7. A combined tunneling and tunnel lining 
movable rammer interposed between the ex 
apparatus, comprising a revoluble excavator, 
cavator and the forward end of the tubular 
a tubular support for the lining of a diameter 
support, and means for imparting motion to 
equal to that of the drift minus said lining, 
the support, for the purpose set forth. 
Io said support being closed at its rear end, 
means for delivering concrete about the pe 
ing apparatus, the combination with the ex 
riphery of the support at the forward end 
cavating devices, the tubular support, and 
thereof, and means for removing the spoils 
the mechanism for lining the drift, of the ring 
from within the support, in combination with 
stays or braces, R, substantially as and for 
I5 the air pipes, p, applied to the closed rear 
the purpose set forth. 
end of the support, for the purpose set forth. 
12. In a combined tunneling and tunnellin 
8. A combined tunneling and tunnel lining 
ing machine, the combination with the exca 
apparatus, comprising an excavator consist 
vator shaft, of a tubular support for the lin 
ing of a revoluble shaft having radial arms, 
ing provided with peripheral roller bearings, 
2O excavating devices secured to said radial 
said support adapted to receive a to and fro 6o 
arms, and a shield consisting of a discoidal 
or pulsatory motion in a plane parallel with 
plate secured to the rear face. of the radial 
the axis of rotation of the shaft. 
arms in rear of the excavating devices, said 
13. In a combined tunneling and tunnel lin 
shield provided with an opening for the pas 
ing machine, the combination with the exca 
vator shaft, of a tubular support for the lin- 65 
9. A combined tunneling and tunnel lining 
ing provided with peripheral roller bearings, 
apparatus comprising an excavator consisting 
said support adapted to receive a to and fro 
of a revoluble shaft, radial arms articulated 
or pulsatory motion in a plane parallel with 
to said shaft and provided with cutters or 
the axis of rotation of the shaft, and a ram 
3o shovels, and stays pivotally connected with 
mer connected with said support and adapted 7o 
the radial arms and adapted to be secured 
to partake of its motion, and means for im 
to the shaft whereby the position of the ra 
parting a to and fromotion to said rammer 
dial arms relatively to one another and to 
independently of its support, substantially 
the shaft may be varied, for the purposes set 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
10. In a combined tunneling and tunnellin 
presence of two witnesses. 
ing apparatus, the combination with a revolu 
ble excavator, a tubular support for the lining 
provided with peripheral roller bearings hav 
4o ing their axes in planes tangential to the pe 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 75 
PETER, KRAUS. 
Witnesses: 
W. B. MURPHY, 
PAUL BERGER. 
55 
25 sage of the spoils. 
35 forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512137.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet l, 
R. S. WIESENFELD. 
MANUFACTURE OF BOTTLES, 
No. 512,137, 
-24 
Patented Jan. 2, 1894. 
a 
 
 
  
 
 
WIHF 
 
 
  
 
ass 
N S2%f S. 
% as 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 512,137, 
 
 
R. S. WIESENFELD. 
MANUFACTURE OF BOTTIES 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Jan. 2, 1894. 
N  N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT S. WIESENFELD, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
MANUFACTURE OF BOTTLEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,187, dated January 2, 1894. 
Application filed March 20, 1893. Serial No. 466,818, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ROBERTS. WIESENFELD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Balti 
more, in the State of Maryland, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in the 
Manufacture of Bottles; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My present inventiou relates to the manu 
facture of glass bottles and has especial ref. 
erence to means for forming the head of the 
bottle shown in the patent granted to me 
January 31, 1893, No. 490,729. 
The invention will be fully disclosed in the 
following specification and claims. 
In the accompanying drawings which form 
part of this specification, Figure 1. represents 
a side elevation, partly in section; Fig. 2. a. 
top plan view; Fig. 3, a transverse section on 
the line ac ac Fig. 2; Fig. 4. a vertical longi 
tudinal Section of the mold detached and on 
an enlarged scale; Fig. 5. a transverse section 
of the mold, and Fig. 6. a side view of a bot 
tle head, the product of the invention. 
Reference being had to the drawings and 
the letters thereon Aindicates a table or stand; 
Ba two part mold provided with hinges a. a, 
a haspb and a cavity c which conforms to the 
upper part of the neck and head of an ordi 
nary bottle used for transporting liquids. At 
the Outer end of the cavity c is a seat d which 
forms a support for a rod C which is further 
Supported in brackets ee on the table; and 
in the upper part of the mold is a vertical pas 
Sagef through which the molten glass is sup 
plied to the mold. In the lower part of the 
mold is a vertical transverse slot g to receive 
a flat rectangular bar D to form the trans 
verse slot or seat h in the head E of the bot 
tle, as shown in Fig. 6. 
Findicates a bracket provided with arms 
ti which guide the plunger G in its recipro 
cations, and said plunger is reciprocated by a 
lever Hsupported on an armic of the bracket 
F and engaging two pins or studs l l alter 
nately; the plunger being provided to press 
the glass into the mold through the passage if 
when required. 
The rod C may be provided near its outer 
end with a slot m through which the outer 
end in of the lever I passes to push the rod 
into the mold and withdraw it therefrom, and 
the bar D may be connected at its lower end 
to a foot lever K by means of a rod O for the 
purpose of raising the bar and projecting it 
into the cavity c of the mold and withdraw 
ing it from the cavity of the mold. 
The bar D is provided with a pin or shoul 
der p 
to limit its extension into the mold, and 
with a cylindrical aperture or eye q through 
which the rod C passes to hold the bar in its 
proper position in the mold. 
L indicates the bottle, supported in a cradle 
M movable longitudinally on its guide r on 
the table A to insert the neck of the bottle 
into the inner end of the cavity c of the mold 
and to support the bottle while the head E is 
being formed thereon. 
In the manufacture of bottles in accord 
ance with my invention the bottle is blown 
in the usual manner with or without an ordi 
nary head on it. If blown with a head, the 
head is severed from the bottle as soon as it 
is removed from the mold and the neck of 
the bottle inserted in the furnace and re 
heated, when the bottle is placed in the cradle 
M and the neck of the bottle inserted in the 
cavity c of the mold. Molten glass is then 
poured into the mold B through the passage f, 
and the bottle revolved to form a union be 
tween the end of the neck of the bottle and the 
molten glass; when the bar D is raised into 
the mold and the rod C pushed into the outer 
end of the mold and through the eye q in the 
bar D, thus forming the transverse slot or 
seat h in the head of the bottle. The union 
between the neck and the head of the bottle 
may however be made by pressure, in which 
ractice the bar D and the rod Care projected 
O 
into the mold, the bottle placed in the cradle 
and the neck of the bottle inserted in the cav 
ity of the moldi and the cradle locked in po 
sition by any suitable means; when the molten 
glass is poured into the mold and the plunger 
pressed down upon the glass in the mold with 
sufficient force to form a union between the 
two bodies of glass. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. The improvement in the art of making 
bottles, which consists in forming the body 
and the neck of the bottle and subsequently 
id 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
75 
95 
2 
512,187 
an eye in one end, a rod adapted to pass 
through said eye and within the mold; and 
means for reciprocating said bar and rod. 
6. The combination of a mold for the head 
of a bottle, means for forming a transverse 
slot in and across the head and means for 
forming the mouth of the bottle; and a mov 
able cradle for supporting the bottle. 
7. The combination of a mold, means for 
forming a transverse slot in and across the 
head of a bottle, and means for forming the 
mouth of the bottle, a movable cradle to Sup 
port the bottle, and a plunger to force the 
glass into the mold. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ROBERT S. WIESENFELD. 
Witnesses: 
H. B. REINOHL, 
S. BRASHEARs. 
25 
35 
IO 
providing the bottle with a head having a 
transverse, slot, crossing the mouth of the 
bottle. 
2. In apparatus for making bottles, the com 
bination of a mold, a vertical bar and a hori 
ZOntal rod constructed to enter the mold and 
form a transverse slot in and across the head 
and the mouth of the bottle. 
3. The combination of a mold having a 
transverse slot in one side, a bar to project 
through said slot into the cavity of the mold, 
and a rod to enter one end of the mold and 
extend through said bar into the neck of the 
bottle. 
4. The combination of a mold, means for 
Supporting a bottle while the head is being 
formed thereon, a bar crossing the horizontal 
Center of mold transversely and a rod extend 
ing through the mold longitudinally. 
5. The combination of a mold, a bar having 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512237.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 512,237, 
G. D. STRAYER. 
BORING BRACE, 
Patented Jan, 2, 1894. 
 
W VEVTOR 
Gee. (Se?ayer 
4a 
Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE D. STRAYER, OF EAST STROUDSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
BORNG BRACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,237, dated January 2, 1894. 
Application filed June 6, 1893, Serial No. 476,729, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE D. STRAYER, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
East Stroudsburg, in the county of Monroe 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Boring 
Braces; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a plan view of 
the invention partly in section and Fig. 2 is 
a perspective view in detail of the bit stock. 
Fig. 3 is a detail view of the braces J, J. 
This invention has relation to certain new 
and useful improvements in boring braces, 
the object being to provide a brace, especially 
designed for use for boring in angles, or close 
to uprights of any kind, and designed to take 
the place of ratchet braces, being an improve 
ment Over such braces, in that it does not re 
quire to be worked forward to cut and then 
backward to get ready for the next cut, but 
Works continuously in a forward and cutting 
direction. 
A further object is to provide a brace of 
this character of simple construction, possess 
ing strength and durability, and which may, 
When desired, be used in the manner of an or 
dinary brace. 
With these objects in view, the invention 
consists in the novel construction and combi 
nation of parts, all as hereinafter described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the letter A designates the bit stock or stem, 
having a screw collar shank clutch or clamp 
B, of any approved form, said stock or stem 
terminating at its upper end portion in a semi 
spherical socket C. 
D designates the usual curved stem having 
the loose handle D', and breast pin D*, and 
terminating at its lower end in a straight 
shank portion E, on the lower end of which is 
a ball or sphere F, which works in the socket 
C. On the upper edge of said socket C is an 
annular spur gear ring G, and on the shank 
E is a spur gear wheel H, the teeth of which 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
o 
 
55 
to 
75 
mesh with the teeth on said ring, the shank 
E being inclined to the stem or stock A. 
I, I' are collars around the stem A and shank 
E respectively, said collars being connected 
by means of braces J, J, which may be short 
ened or lengthened by means of the sliding 
lapioint atti. 
When desired, the brace may be used 
straight, in the same manner as an ordinary 
brace, by loosening the braces J, J, at the joint 
i when the parts may be straightened up, and 
held by means of pins K, K. Said pins K, 
K, are carried by springs L L which cause 
them to engage seats cle in the ball F, through 
holes in the socket C. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The herein described boring brace, colm 
prising the bit stem or stock having the socket 
bearing portion at its upper end, the annular 
gear ring on said socket portion, and the stem 
having the ball or sphere engaging said Socket 
bearing, a gear wheel meshing with said gear 
ring, and a brace connecting said stock and 
stem, substantially as specified. 
2. The herein described boring brace, com 
prising a bit stem or stock, the socket por 
tion at the upper end thereof, and the annu 
lar gear ring on said socket portion, in com 
bination with the usual curved stem having 
the shank E, the ball or sphere in said shank 
and engaging said socket, the gear Wheel 
thereon adapted to engage with said gear ring, 
the collars on said stock or stem, and the joint 
ed brace connecting said collars, substantially 
as specified. 
3. In a boring brace, the combination with 
the bit stock or stem, its socket portion, and 
the annular gear ring thereon, of the shank 
E, its ball F engaging said Socket, its gear 
wheel adapted to mesh with said gear ring, 
the jointed brace, and the spring actuated 
pins adapted to engage seats in said ball, Sub 
stantially as specified. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
w 
GEORGE D. STRAYER. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. WOSS, 
F. H. KISHPAUGH. 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512338.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 512,338. 
0. TABER. 
JOCKEY PLATE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
422 
0. TABER. 
JOCKEY PLATE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894, 
(No Model.) 
No. 512,338. 
-zz, 
 
V7zz 
fl-Yvous. e. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ORRIN-TABER, OF NASHUA, NEW HAMPSHIRE, ASSIGNOR TO THE NASHUA 
SADDLERY HARDWARE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
JOCKEY PLATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,338, dated January 9, 1894. 
Application filed September 20, 1893, Serial No. 485,961 (No model.) 
55 
. 
To all whom it may concern. . 
Be it known that I, ORRINTABER, of Nash 
ua, county of Hillsborough, State of New 
Hampshire, have invented an Improvement 
in Jockey-Plates, of which the following de 
Scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters on 
the drawings representing like parts. 
This invention has for its object to improve 
the construction of jockey plates whereby 
they may be more easily finished and cheaply 
manufactured, and my invention consists in 
details of construction to be hereinafter point 
ed out. 
Figure 1, shows in front elevation a jockey 
plate embodying this invention, the parts 
thereof being separated; Fig. 2, a rear side 
view of the jockey plate as shown in Fig. 1; 
Fig. 3, a front elevation of the jockey plate 
assembled, the shape of one part however be 
ing slightly modified; Figs. 4 and 5, details 
of the fastenings employed for securing the 
parts together; Fig. 6, a side view of a saddle 
With my improved jockey plate thereon, show 
ing particularly its location, and Fig. 7, an 
edge view of the jockey plate, a portion of 
the running back band being represented by 
dotted lines. 
The jockey plate is herein represented as 
composed essentially of two parts a, b. The 
part a is formed as a flat plate cut away at 
one side to present two arms a', a ', each pro 
vided with a hole a to receive the screw a. 
The body portion of said plate a, has also a 
central hole a, see Figs. 1 and 2, yet in Fig. 
3 it will be seen that said plate is made smaller 
or cut off, and hence the hole a' is omitted. 
The edge of the plate is beveled upon its front 
side as shown in Figs. 1 and 3. 
The plate a is provided upon its under or 
rear side with a marginal rib a' extending 
around the body part and terminating at a 
point near the extremities of the arms a', and 
also with a marginal rib a' extending along 
the lower edge of the cut away portion, there 
by leaving a substantially flat surface be 
tween the ends of said ribs. The part b is 
formed as a plate having a central depression 
b', increasing in depth toward the inner edge, 
and at each side of said depression a holeb 
is formed adapted to register with the holes 
a formed in the arms a' which receive the 
screws a'. 
In securing the plates a, b together, and to 
the saddle the plate a will be laid upon the 
plate b, in such manner that the arms over 
lap said plate b at each side of the central 
depression b', as represented in Figs. 3 and 6, 
and the holes in said plates will then register. 
The inner edge of the plate b will at such 
time bear against the ends of the marginal 
rib a', and shoulders b, which may be formed 
on said plate b will bear against the ends of 
the marginal riba, and when in such posi 
tion, the screws a will be inserted, passed 
through the jockey or covering of the saddle, 
or other material part thereof and supplied 
with nuts a. The central depression b' of the 
plate b, co-operating with the cut a Way por 
tion in the plate C forms a recess for the run 
ning back band n. 
By making the jockey plates in two parts as 
shown, they may be more easily finished than 
when made in a single piece, as for instance 
no special machinery will be required to fin 
ish the central depression b' of plate b, and 
by forming the marginal ribs a, a, on plate 
a, said plate is stiffened, as well as guides 
formed for facilitating assembling the parts. 
I claim 
1. The jockey plate herein described con 
sisting of two plates a, b, and means for Se 
curing them together, one of which plates as 
b, has a central depression b' increasing in 
depth toward the edge, the middle portions 
of the adjacent edges of said plates cooperat 
ing with said central depression to form a re 
cess for the running back band, substantially 
as described. 
2. The jockey plate herein described con 
sisting of the plate a, cut away to present 
arms a', a?, holes a formed in said arms and 
the plate b having a central depression b', at 
each side of which a hole bis formed adapted 
to register' with the holes a in the arms a', 
and screws a passing through said holes 
which secure the plates together, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The jockey plate herein described con 
sisting of the plate a, cut away to present 
arms a', d', holes a formed in said arms, and 
a hole a formed in the body portion of said 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
50 
512,838 
5 
plate, and the plate b having a central de 
pression b', at each side of which a hole b is 
formed adapted to register with the holes a 
in the arms a, and screws a passing through 
Said holes which secure the plates together, 
Substantially as described. 
4. The jockey plate herein described con 
sisting of the plate a cut away to present 
arms a', a?, holes a formed in said arms, and 
the marginal ribs a, a formed on the rear side 
of Said plate as shown, and the plate b having 
a central depression b' at each side of which 
a hole b" is formed adapted to register with 
the holes a in the arms a', when abutting 
against the ends of said marginal ribs a, a', 
and screws passing through said holes to se 
cure the plates together, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
ORRIN TABER. 
Witnesses: 
B. J. NOYES, 
C. B. CROCKER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512439.txt	 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
H. HAUS SHALTER. 
SPEED AND DISTANCE MEASURING AND RECORDING APPARATUS, 
No. 512,439. 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894, 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
trius 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
III, 
it 
 
  
5 
a 
A 22-2 
% 
2 
 
V 
 
G 
s zz,7- (2. 2 
  
A. Y. 
array2 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
H. HAUS SHALTER, 
SPEED AND DISTANCE MEASURING AND RECORDING APPARATUS, . 
No. 512,439. 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
 
EY, i. 
------- 
s:- - - - - - - -- 
s 
: 
: 
IN ET: 
TH : 
in 
title 
III/III. 
this 
it it. I 
"Eye 
; Fir-27 2223. 
- 
- - - - - 
- - ----- - - - - - - - - - - - W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
m 
: 
A. 
as --11 
2 ai22 -- 1 
22 
2 
 
THE NATIONAL THogaRAPH:No company. 
wASH Ngton, o, c. 
( No Model.) 
 
 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
H. HAUS SHALTER, 
SPEED AND DISTANCE MEASURING AND RECORDING APPARATUS, 
No. 512,439, 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
 
3. G 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
striver Ary 
 
 
S 
Elair. 222s2 
 
THE NATIONAL lithographing comPANY., 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
H, HAUS SHALTER, 
SPEED AND DISTANCE MEASURING AND RECORDING APPARATUS, 
No. 512,439, 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
H, HAUS SHALTER. 
SPEED AND DISTANCE MEASURING AND RECORDING APPARATUS. 
No. 512,439, 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
 
( No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
H. HAUS SHALTER, 
SPEED AND DISTANCE MEASURING AND RECORDING APPARATUS, 
No. 512,439, 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
i 
 
 
  
y1 
a. 72, 
1 
w 
- 
Final 
i 
" 
- 
 
 
21%-2 23.24.4%) 
S--(zo- 26, 
THE NATONAL 
Hographing compari?. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HUGO HAUSSHALTER, OF DIRESIDEN, GERMANY. 
SPEED AND D STANCE MEASURNG AND RECORD ING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,439, dated January 9, 1894. 
Application filed February 24, 1892, Serial No. 422,697, (No model.) Patented in Germany December 5, 1885, No. 36,799; in 
Austria-Hungary October 26, 1886, No. 23,026 and No. 52,712, and August 22, 1892, No. 42,725 and No. 31,738; in France 
August 27, 1891, No, 215,769 in Switzerland September 7, 1891, No. 3,950; in Belgium October 2, 1891, No. 96,637; in 
England December 28, 1891, No. 22,632, and in Italy December 31, 1891, IX, 76, 
20 October 2, 1891, No. 96,637. 
To all vion, it in City concert: 
Be it known that I, HUGO HAUSSHALTER, a 
subject of the King of Saxony, and residing 
at Dresden, in the Kingdom of Saxony, Ger 
5 man Empire, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Speed-Measuring and 
Distance-Recording Apparatus, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention has been patented to me in 
Io the following countries, viz: Germany, dated 
December 5, 1SS5, No. 36,799, and patent of ad 
dition, dated July 26, 1891,No. 62,973; Austria 
Hungary, dated October 26, 1886, No. 23,026 
and No. 52,712, and August 22, 1892, No. 42,725 
I5 and No.31,73S; Great Britain, dated December 
28, 1891, No. 22,632; Switzerland, dated Sep 
tember 7, 1891, No. 3,950; Italy, dated Decem 
ber 31, 1891, Vol. LX, No.76; France, dated Au 
gust 27, 1891, No. 215,769, and Belgium, dated 
My invention relates to an apparatus to be 
used upon locomotive engines or other vehi 
cles for visibly indicating to the engineer or 
other person the speed of travel, and for re 
cording said speed and also the distances 
traveled and intervals of time, so that a per 
manent record of the speed, time, and dis 
tance may be had, forming a basis for the 
regulation, control, and improvement of the 
service. 
In carrying out my invention I eliploy 
mechanism actuated by the driving wheel of 
the engine in proportion to its speed, which 
mechanism raises a drop bolt to a height pro 
portionate to the Speed, and an indeX hand 
is operated by said drop bolt aud caused to 
sweep over the face of an index so as to in 
dicate the rate of speed upon said index, and 
simultaneously with the movement of the in 
dex hand a device adapted to puncture a 
strip of paper having numbered lines agree 
ing with the index, is moved across the face 
of said paper strip and caused to puncture 
the same on lines that agree with the position 
of the index hand at the time the puncture is 
made and which make a record of the rate of 
speed. 
The mechanism actuated from the driving 
shaft operates a mechanism for winding up a 
25 
O 
55 
spring that in turn sets in motion an escape- 5o 
ment and balance wheel or clock mechanism 
and rotates a spindle upon which the drop 
bolt is moved vertically along a key, and ro 
tates with said spindle, the clock mechanism 
causing a constant speed of rotation to be im 
parted to said spindle and drop bolt and 
which Spindle in turn actuates a train of 
speed-reducing gear that feeds along the pa 
per strip with a constant progressive move 
ment, the feed roller carrying equidistant pe 
ripheral pins which impress the paper strip 
with dots representing actual periods of time, 
Such for instance as three minute intervals. 
The mechanism actuated from the driving 
shaft also operates a ratchet and pawl and 
accompanying mechanism having a penetrat 
ing point which punctures the strip of paper 
with dots more or less close together accord 
ing to the speed and indicating miles or kilo 
meters or fractions thereof. All of this mech 
anism and the operations thereof are herein 
after more particularly described. 
In the drawings, Figurel is a front elevation 
illustrating my speed measuring and distance 
recording apparatus. Fig. 1 is a similar 
front elevation with the glass face and frame, 
the index, the index hand, and the slotted 
plate to which the same is attached removed 
so as to show in elevation the interior mech 
anism more perfectly. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
plan at the line 2-2, of Fig. 1. Fig. 2 is a 
sectional plan at the line 28-2*, of Fig.1. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section at the line 3-3, of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a partial sectional plan at 
the line 4-4 of Fig. 1. 
Figs. 5 and 6 are views 
illustrating the application of the device to a 
locomotive engine. Fig. 7 is a sectional plan. 
of the mechanism for actuating the alarm. 
Fig. S represents a portion of the strip of pa 
per upon which the record is made. Fig. 9 is 
a front elevation, Fig. 10 is a side elevation, 
and Fig. 11 a plan of the mechanism for per 
forating the strip of paper with the line of 
holes 3. Fig. 12 is a plan of the parts shown 
in Fig. 11 in the position they assume as 
moved by their operating cam. Fig. 13 is a 
side elevation of the parts shown in Fig. 12. 
Fig. 14 is a plan of the hammer plate sepa 
6 5 
7 o 
75 
90 
95 
 
2 
512,439 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
rately, and Fig. 15 is an inverted plan of the 
face of said drop bolt are plain and of less 
cam and ratchet separately that form part of 
diameter than the ribs and all of the ribs have 
the mechanism of Figs. 9 to 13 inclusive. Fig. 
one common starting edge at 4, adjacent to 
16 represents the spring mechanism. Fig. 17 
which the plain surface is set back so that 
is a rear elevation of the slotted plate U and 
when the spindle E and drop bolt B rotate 
the mechanism connected therewith includ 
the ribs separate from the lifting pinion g at 
ing the index hand. Fig. 18 is a plan view of 
this edge 4. 
the parts shown in Fig. 17 with the adjacent 
A bracket 5 (see Figs. 2 and 5) secured to 
mechanism thereto shown in dotted lines. 
the casing P carries the shaft C, and connect 
Fig. 19 is a side elevation of the dropbolt and 
ed to this shaft are a pinions' and the toothed 
part of the index hand and its racks. Fig. 
pinion g, the pinions' meshing with the worm 
20 is an elevation of the racks and part of 
gears upon the vertical spindle A and the 
the index hand. Fig. 21 is a sectional plan of 
toothed piniong engaging with the ribs of the 
the parts shown in Fig. 19. Fig. 22 is a sec 
drop bolt B. Thus it will be seen that motion 
tional plan through the drop bolt, and Fig.23 
is communicated by the revolution of the 
shows by dotted lines the train of gear for 
spindle A to the shaft C and the pinion g and 
drawing along the strip of paper. Figs. 17 to 
this pinion acts on the ribs of the drop bolt, 
22 inclusive are shown of larger size for clear 
so that the drop bolt is raised vertically on 
the auxiliary spindle E, and is disconnected 
0SS, 
My improved speed measuring and distance 
from the pinion g and drops whenever the 
recording apparatus is illustrated with spe 
ends 4 of the annular ribs separate from the 
cial reference, as in Figs. 5 and 6, to a locomo 
pinion by the revolution of the spindle and 
tive engine where the same is shown as oper 
drop bolt. 
ated by a crank and pin 31 from the driving 
A set of springs and their barrels one above 
wheel 32 of the engine through a series of 
the other on a common central shaft 34, are 
bevel wheels 33 and a spindle A, the device, 
represented at I, (see Fig.1) the sectional con 
being located in the cab of the engine pre 
struction of which is shown in Fig. 16. The 
sumably alongside of the engineer. A metal 
ratchet wheel 7 and its hub are fastened to 
casing P is provided with a removable glass 
the central shaft 34 of the spring barrels and 
face and frame P', and the casing P contains 
the upper coiled spring is fastened to the hub 
the recording mechanism and it can be se 
of this ratchet wheel and to the surrounding 
cured in place in any desired manner. The 
spring barrel, and the hub of this upper 
spindle A passes up through this casing P. 
spring barrel receives the inner end of the 
A disk m' with inclined teeth ac' is secured to 
Second coiled spring and its outer end is fas 
this spindle A and a sleeve w surrounds the 
tened to the second surrounding spring bar 
spindle A and has connected to it a forked 
rel, and so on, and the bottom spring barrel 
rest block w' which extends out toward the 
is fastened to the gear wheel 6. Hence as the 
auxiliary spindle E (see IFigs. 3 and 4) which 
ratchet wheel 7 is rotated by the pawl R', the 
is vertical and is within the casing P, the 
springs are wound up and held by the pawl 
forked end of the said rest block U' strad 
8 engaging said wheel 7 and motion is given 
dling the auxiliary spindle E. The rotation 
to the wheel 6 and by it to the train of clock 
of the disk n' with its inclined teeth below 
work gearing and balance H, (see Figs. 1 and 
the rest-block U'operates as a cam and raises 
2) so that the rotation of such wheel 6 is regu 
and lets fall the sleeve up and forked rest 
lar While the apparatus is in Work and so also 
block U'. Upon this spindle A is a worm 
the rotation of the pinion 10 and shaft E is 
gears and above the same also on the spindle 
regular. I prefer that this shaft E be rotated 
A is an eccentric R, Figs. 2 and 3 which 
Once in twelve seconds. 
eccentric carries a pawl R' which engages 
It is advantageous to use a stop that will 
the ratchet wheel 7. Farther up on the spin 
prevent the apparatus running down when 
dle A (Figs.1 and 3) is a camA and upon the 
the locomotive is standing still; this can be 
end of the spindle outside of the casing P is 
effected by a gear 20 fastened to and rotating 
a cam u', the office of these parts being here 
with the shaft 34 of the spring barrels and 
inafter more particularly described. 
having a stop 23 thereon (see Figs. 1 and 2.) 
The auxiliary spindle E is supported in 
and a gear 21 on a stud on the gear 6 gears 
suitable end bearings, and the same is pro 
with the gear 20 and carries the stop 22. 
vided with a keye running part of its length. 
Hence the stops 22 and 23 will come together 
Around the auxiliary spindle E is the drop 
and prevent the further motion should the 
bolt B and the same is provided with an in 
wheel 7 and spring barrel shaft remain sta 
tegral sleeve B' around whose outer surface 
tionary more than a predetermined period. 
is the helical inclined, the upper edge of the 
The wheel 20 rotates more rapidly than the 
bolt B having a notched rim le". 
wheel 6 and wheel21 and the stops keep clear 
The drop bolt B is provided with periph 
of each other while the mechanism is run 
eral surface ribs 35 (Figs. 1, 3 and 19) that 
ning continuously, but if the wheel 20 stops 
are parallel to each other and that extend 
With the stopping of the mechanism, the 
more or less around the circumference of said 
clock-work mechanism goes on until the stops 
drop bolt in consequence of such ribs being 
come together by the rotation of the wheels 
removed at places, so that parts of the sur- 6 and 21, which as the wheels 20, 21 are the 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
65 
 
5i 2,439 
7 O 
75 
same size, will be in each rotation of the wheel 
2 around the wheel. 20. 
The rotation of the spindle A through the 
eccentric R and the spring actuated pawl R' 
winds up the springs I and they in turn ro 
tate the toothed wheel 6, the pinion 10 and 
the auxiliary spindle E, and the rate of rota 
tion is controlled by the clock-work mechan 
ism with which the toothed wheel 6 is in en 
gagement, so that said spindle E rotates in 
an exact and predetermined period of time, 
say twelve seconds. The auxiliary spindle E 
and drop bolt B and its sleeve B rotate to 
gether in consequence of the key e, and the 
drop bolt rotates in a regular interval of time, 
it falls each rotation when the ends 4 of the 
ribs separate from the pinion g, and the drop 
bolt B is raised more or less during its rota 
tion according to the speed of the pinion g 
which is rotated faster or slower in propor 
tion to the speed of the engine. 
The strip of paper O' is upon a roller O (see 
Figs. 1" and 2) and the same passes between 
the rollers p p' and is drawn off the roller O 
by said rollers p p' and passes into a recep 
tacle L in which receptacle there is a curved 
steel spring 11, shown in Fig. 2, whose office 
is to guide the strip of paper so that it rolls 
up as the same is fed into the receptacle. 
The roller p is a friction roller mounted on 
the spring frame 13 and the roller p' is a posi 
tive motion feed roller. There is a train of 
gearing 19, shown in Figs. 23 and 1, that con 
nects the shaft of the feed roller p' with the 
auxiliary spindle E, there being in said train 
of gear a ratchet and pawl 14, so that the 
feed roller p' is capable of being turned 
freely by hand in one direction. This feed 
roller p has projecting from its surface and 
near its respective ends, small pins 15 at 
equal distances apart, which pins 15 engage 
the two opposite edges of the strip of paper 
O' (see Figs. 1" and 2) and puncture the same 
as the strip of paper is thereby drawn along 
between the rollers p p' by said train of gear. 
it will be thus seen that the power of the su 
perposed springs I is communicated through 
the wheel 6, pinion 10, auxiliary spindle E 
and the train of gearing 19 (shown in Fig. 23 
by a plan and in Fig. 1" by an elevation) to 
the feed roller j', and the parts are so pro 
portioned and timed that the spaces between 
the pins at the respective ends of this roller 
p' represent periods of time; for instance 
periods of three minutes, so that from an ex 
amination of the paper strip the three min 
ute periods could be readily distinguished by 
the punctures, and parallel lines as shown by 
the dotted lines Fig. S can if desired be drawn 
across the paper strip from these punctures 
so as to divide the strip into three minute di 
visions and within which lines the punctures 
indicating speed and distance will appear and 
their relation to the time beat once apparent. 
As seen in Fig. S, the paper Strip is divided 
into a series of longitudinal lines marked 
from 0 to 90 inclusive, these figures denoting 
miles or kilometers. A slotted metal plate U 
Figs. 1 and 17 is secured at its respective ends 
by the screws 12 to the casing P. This slotted 
plate carries the index hand D whose outer 
pointed end is adapted to sweep over the in 
dex D upon whose face are numbered divis 
ions from 0 to 90 corresponding with the par 
allel lines upon the paper strip. 
The index hand D is pivoted by a screw e' 
to the plate U and the lower end of said in 
deX hand, as shown particularly in Figs. 19 
and 21, is made as a spring, the object of 
which is to hold the index hand to the slotted 
plate U with the desired degree of friction 
until changed by a positive motion. The in 
dex hand ID carries a toothed segment U and 
a pinion c'. The segment it meshes with the 
vertical rack v and the pinion v' meshes with 
the secondary rack ', these racks and v' 
have projecting arms that pass through the 
guide slots of the plate U and form slide ways 
for the vertical movement of said racks, there 
being studs upon the rack 2 and studs i' i 
upon the rack ', and as shown in Figs. 3, 17, 
and 19, the studs and i are close to the up 
per surface of the rimlk' of the drop bolt B, and 
the studs and ' when they are moved come 
in the path of the helical inclined upon the 
sleeve B' of said drop bolt. Hence when the 
drop bolt B is raised the rim lic' moves the studs 
i and swings the hand D from zero to the fig 
ure denoting the speed at which the locomo 
tive or vehicle is traveling, and the inclined 
acts to move the hand nearer to the Zero mark 
with each decrease in speed and to return the 
hand to zero as the drop bolt is rotated after 
the locomotive is stopped. The incline d is 
notched see Figs. 2, 19, and 21 so that the lower 
part is of less reach than the upper part. The 
whole helical incline acts upon the stud but 
only the upper part acts on the studi', so that 
one or the other of these studs is acted on with 
each half revolution of said spiral in returning 
the index hand to a normal position. A spring 
frame 13, (see Figs, 1, 17, and 18,) connected to 
the upper portion of the slotted plate U car 
ries the friction roller p, and a vertically 
slotted frame T (see Figs. 1 and 17) is pivoted 
to the axis of the roller p within the arms of 
the frame 13, and upon the back of this frame 
T there is a wedge-shaped arm l that comes 
in the path of and is operated by the cam 
disk l upon the upper end of the auxiliary 
spindle E, the rotation of which cam disk with 
the auxiliary Spindle causes a backward and 
forward movement to the frame T by means 
of the arm l', in conjunction with the spring 
l, that acts to press the frame T toward the 
spindle E. A sliding head ) is connected by 
a rod 7 (see Figs. 1 and 17) to the lower end of 
the rack 2' and Said head is adapted to move 
vertically in the slot of the frame T, and pro 
jecting from the inner surface of the head r 
is a pin or puncturing point whose office is to 
puncture the paper strip and form a line of 
dots such as is shown in Fig. S at 1, the posi 
tion of each of which dots is according to the 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
IC 
I 30 
o 
 
25 p 
35 
O 
speed being traveled and agrees with the 
speed indicated by the index hand D on the 
index D'. A spring at fastened to the face 
of the frame 13 bears against the face of 
the slotted frame T and tends to press the 
same inward, the cam disk land the arm l' 
acting to keep the frame T pressed outwardly 
with the penetrating point away from the 
strip of paper for the greater portion of the 
revolution of the cam disk l, and with each 
revolution of said cam disk the wedge-shaped 
arm l is pressed into the notch of the cam 
disk l by this spring u and the sliding head 
r is simultaneously moved forward so that its 
point punctures the paper, and this is accom 
plished regardless of the vertical position of 
the sliding head r. Upon the back of the 
slotted plate U a plate M is secured, the up 
per end of which is made with the sleeve M', 
(see Figs. 9 and 17) and a pivot pin N passes 
through this sleeve and has secured to it the 
depending arms S and Q, the arm Q carrying 
a spring V which bears against the inner face 
of the slotted plate U to press away from said 
late both the arms Q and S. The lower end 
of the arm V carries a set screw W and the 
lower end of the arm Scarries a penetrating 
pin X. 
The strip of paper O' wound upon the roller 
Opasses therefrom over the face of the slotted 
plate U, (see Fig.18) and there is a spring plate 
K secured upon the back of the frame 13 and 
whose free edge extends to near the edge of 
the slotted plate U, and the paper strip O' 
passes behind this spring plate K and through 
between the rollers p p' and so on into the 
receptacle L. One or more springs of usual 
form are preferably employed to keep the 
strip of paper O' taut, and such springs are 
shown at 25, Fig. 2, and 26 Fig. 1. 
The meeting edges of the slotted plate U 
and the spring plate K are adjacent to the 
penetrating point on the back of the sliding 
head r (see Fig. 18) and also adjacent to the 
penetrating point X, so that the paper is held 
at this point for the operation in both direc 
tions of said penetrating points. 
A bracket bed plate a (see Figs. 1" and 9 to 
13 inclusive) is secured to the casing Pof the 
mechanism, and said plate a carries pins b c. 
A hammer or striking plate f, shown in Fig. 
14, is provided with openings or mortises for 
the pins bc, there being a shoulder h to said 
hammer plate f and a nose k, and said ham 
mer plate f is adapted to be moved over the 
face of the bed plate a upon which it rests. 
A ratchet q and cam O are connected together 
and pivoted at t to this bed plate Cl; the cam 
and ratchet are shown separate in the in 
verted plan Fig.15, the camo with the ratchet 
q being adapted to rotate in the direction of 
the arrow Fig. 11 and the cam to operate the 
nose k of the plate 
if and move said plate f 
backwardly upon the bed plate. The outer 
end of this hammer plate f takes against the 
arm Q above the said screw W. A spring re 
taining pawl ac (see Figs, 11 and 12) engages 
the teeth of the ratchet q, and a spring pawl 
y pivoted to a lever 2 is usd to turn the 
ratchet wheel g and said lever 2 is pivoted at 
F to the bed plate a, and the outer end of 
this lever 2 is in the path of the cam A' on 
the spindle A and by which this lever 2 is 
moved. A spring G connected to the bed 
plate a (see Figs. 11 and 12) bears against the 
lever 2, and a spring m bears against the 
end of the shoulder h of the hammer plate 
f, the spring G acting to press the lever 2 
against the cam A', and the Spring n presses 
the hammer plate f outwardly toward the 
arm Q. 
By the rotation of the spindle A and its 
cam A the lever 2 is rocked back and forth, 
and by the pawl y attached thereto the 
ratchet q is turned a tooth at a time and is 
held as turned by the pawl a. This move 
ment rotates, the cam O in the direction of the 
arrow Fig. 11, and gradually draws back the 
hammer plate funtil from the position, Fig. 
11, one complete rotation is made, and as the 
nose of the cam 0 passes the nose k of the 
hammer plate if the spring m. gives said ham 
mer plate f a forward movement. This takes 
place once in each rotation of the ratchet q 
and the cam O. The hammer plate f in its 
forward movement operates the arms Q and 
arm S and strikes the penetrating point X of 
the arm S into the strip of paper from the 
back, thus puncturing the paper once for 
each rotation of the ratchet q and cam 0; and 
it will be seen that the speed of these parts 
is controlled entirely by the speed of the 
spindle A, so that each puncture that is made 
with the penetrating point X represents a 
certain uniform distance traveled regardless 
of the speed of travel, and as shown, one 
puncture is presumed to be made for each 
mile or kilometer, as indicated in Fig. 8 by 
the dots upon the line 3 just below the zero 
line. 
The can O might be a two-part cam so as 
to cause one puncture for each half rotation 
which would represent half miles or kilo 
meters. 
Agong Y(Figs. 1,1, and 3) is mounted upon 
a standard upon the top of the casing P and 
upon the upper end of the spindle A where 
the same projects through the casing P there 
is a cam at'. A hammer arm y' is pivoted to 
a stud upon the top of the casing P and the 
same carries the striker tand its spring arm. 
The hammer arm y' is bent into the form of 
a right angle, its free outer end engaging the 
cam u'. A spring 17 is connected to the ham 
mer arm y' and its free end rests against the 
standard carrying the gong, and the office of 
the spring 17 is to keep the free end of the 
hammer arm y' pressed against the cam u' 
(see Fig. 7) so that when in the rotation of the 
cam its notch comes opposite the free end of 
this hammer arm, the same will drop into the 
notch and allow the strikert to give a blow 
upon the gong and produce an alarm. A 
spindle 2' (see Figs. 1,1, and 7) passes through 
75 
95 
OO 
IoS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
512,439 
55 
 
512,489 
75 
90 
95 
the casing P, and, as seen in Fig.1, descends 
to Some depth below the inner face of the 
Casing, and there is a head upon the upper 
end of said spindle 2" above the casing P, and 
an auxiliary arm f connected to the arm y' 
Comes against this spindle head and prevents 
the movement of the hammer arm y' or the 
Striker by the rotation of the cam at except 
When an excessive speed is attained. 
In attaining an excessive speed the drop 
bolt B is raised upon the auxiliary spindle E 
by the means herein described to such a 
height that the upper end of the sleeve B' 
of Said drop bolt during one rotation thereof 
comes against the under end of the spindle 
e' and raises the same, thus liberating the 
hanlmer arm y', and then when the notch of 
the can at' comes around, the free end of said 
halmmer arm drops therein and the striker 
Sounds the alarm upon the gong, calling the 
attention of the engineer to the excessive 
Speed. With a reduction in the speed the 
spindle 2' is no longer held up and drops in 
behind the auxiliary arm f* and prevents the 
hammer striking the bell. 
In the operation of the parts it is to be un 
derstood that the spindle A, shaft, C, and con 
nected pinions, and gear rotate in proportion 
to the speed the engine or other vehicle is 
traveling, and that the speed of the auxil 
iary Spindle E is regulated as to time by the 
train of gearing and governed by the balance 
Wheel and escapement or clock-work mech 
anism II and is unaffected by the speed of 
the spindle A, the winding up motion how 
ever being communicated to the spring bar 
rels by the pawl that is moved by the spindle 
A. The drop bolt B is rotated with the time 
mechanism and auxiliary spindle E once in 
each twelve seconds of time and while being 
rotated the toothed piniong raises the bolt and 
it drops once each rotation because of the cut 
a Way portion of the peripheral ribs herein 
before named. The height however to which 
this drop bolt is raised with each revolution 
is regulated by the speed of travel of the 
Spindle A and shaft C; the greater the speed 
the higher the drop bolt will be raised each 
rotation and vice versa, and as this drop bolt 
comes down each time it strikes and rests 
upon the forked block at' but continues to ro 
tate with uniformity of speed. This block 
t' and the sleeve 'to which it is connected 
are being raised and lowered to a slight ex 
tent by the rotation of the notched calm disk 
12' with the shaft A, the object being to 
slightly lift the drop bolt B for accurately 
engaging the toothed pinion g and peripheral 
ribs as the drop bolt rotates, the parts being 
SO made that as the block ' rests upon an 
incline on the upper edge of the notched disk 
n' the drop bolt will be moved upwardly, its 
inertia. Overcome, and the peripheral ribs will 
exactly mesh with the teeth of the pinion g, 
So that the upward movement of the drop 
bolt is again effected and wear and strain on 
the pinion and ribs are lessened. The eleva 
tion of the drop bolt B between one drop and 
the next is in proportion to the Speed and 
the rim li:' acts below the stud i (see Fig. 19) 
to raise the same and through it the rack ', 
toothed segment v, and the indeX hand D 
are moved and, to whatever extent the drop 
bolt is raised by the speed or accelerations of 
speed, the index hand D denotes it on the 
index D', and the pressure of the pivot Screw 
e' bends the spring end of the hand D and 
produces a friction sufficient to hold the in 
dex hand D, the racks v v', and the parts 
connected there with in place when the drop 
bolt B falls, and should the drop bolt at the 
next elevation be raised farther the hand D 
is again moved to indicate it. The auxiliary 
spindle E and the drop bolt B are rotated in 
the direction of the arrow Fig. 2 so that the 
top end of the helical inclined is the advanc 
ing end, and the object of this is that as the 
speed lessens the said incline runs over and 
presses down the studi, and in so doing the 
end of the indexhaud is moved toward the 
0 point, and the upper wider portion of the 
inclined is adapted to bear upon the stud ' 
to effect the same purpose so that either one 
part or the other of said helical incline is 
sure to engage either of the studs i or ' in 
bringing the index hand back to 0 either as 
the speed lessens or after the engine has 
stopped while the clock mechanism is running 
down. There is a notch l8 (see Figs. 1", 19, 
and 22) in the rim le" of the drop bolt, and the 
advancing edge of this notch 18 agrees in a 
vertical line with the lower end of the helical 
inclined and the upper end of the incline d. 
agrees vertically with the rear edge of Said 
notch 18. This notch 18 is at a point in the 
circumference of the drop bolt One-quarter 
of the circumference of said drop bolt away 
from the vertical edge 4 of its ribbed Surface. 
These parts of the drop bolt are in such rela 
tion to the studs i' that when the ribs of 
the drop bolt clear the pinion g and the drop 
bolt falls the notch 1S and the ends of the in 
clined prevent, the drop bolt from acting on 
the studs i or i'. Hence the hand remains 
stationary by friction, and when the drop bolt 
is raised during its next rotation it does not 
move the hand if the speed of travel is un 
changed, because it only rises until the rim lic' 
reaches such studs and then the bolt again 
drops. If the speed has been increased the 
rimle' lifts the studs in the latter part of the 
rotation of the drop bolt to indicate the aug 
mented speed by the hand D. If the Speed of 
travel is slackened the drop bolt will not have 
been raised so high and the lower end of the 
incline cl acts upon the studs 
to move the 
hand and indicate the less speed. When the 
engine stops the time movement continues to 
rotate the spindle E and drop bolt, but as the 
latter is not lifted, the inclined acts on the 
studs i i" until the hand D is moved to 0, and 
the distance between the lower end of the in 
clined and the surface of the rim lic' is suffi 
cient for the studs it, so that said parts pass 
OC 
O 
II5 
25 
I 32 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
512,439 
O 
( 
above and below the studs as the spindle E 
continues to rotate until it is stopped, the 
hand D remaining at zero. It will also be 
seen that with the elevation of the drop bolt 
B and the consequent operation thereby of 
the index hand D the rod in and the sliding 
head rare moved up and down in the slot in 
the frame T, the position of said sliding head 
ragreeing with the position of the index hand 
D upon the index D', so that when the spring 
at operates the frame Tand the sliding head r 
to throw the same forward and puncture the 
paper strip O' the punctures are made upon 
the line of dots 1 of the paper strip coincid 
ing with the position of the index hand and 
that this position changes with the speed, be 
cause the drop bolt is raised in proportion 
to the speed. Thus upon the paper Strip, as 
shown in Fig. 8, there are indicated by the line 
of dots 2 periods of time, say three minutes 
apart; and by the line of dots 3 below the 0 
line made by the penetrating point X are in 
dicated miles or kilometers or fractional parts 
thereof; and upon the face of the strip by the 
line of dots 1 of the diagram curve in their re 
lation to the horizontallines of the strip is in 
dicated the speed of travel; a record thus 
being made of the periods of time, the dis 
tance, and the speed for future use. 
Having reference to the lines of perfora 
tions 2,2that indicate the minute periods, the 
perforations in the line 3 that indicate miles 
or kilometers, and the diagram curve of per 
forations 1, a rectangle can be marked on the 
strip, as indicated in Fig, 8, to denote the 
average speed in miles or kilometers. 
. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording apparatus, of a spindle and mech 
anism for rotating the same by the movement 
of the vehicle, a clock or time meehanism, a 
spring for driving the same, an auxiliary 
spindle rotated by the time mechanism, roll 
ers for feeding along a strip of paper, and 
gearing connecting one roller to the time 
mechanism, an indicating hand and mechan 
ism for acting upon the same by the move 
ment of the vehicle, a pin adjacent to the pa 
per strip, a connection from the same to the 
hand, and mechanism brought into action by 
the time mechanism for pressing the pin into 
the paper periodically, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording apparatus, of a spindle and mech 
anism for rotating the same by the movement 
of the vehicle, a time mechanism, a spring 
for driving the same, an auxiliary spindle ro 
tated by the time mechanism, rollers having 
penetrating pins in the surface of one of the 
rollers for feeding along a strip of paper, and 
gearing connecting one roller to the time 
mechanism, an indicating hand and mechan 
ism for acting upon the same by the move 
ment of the vehicle, a pin adjacent to the pa 
per strip, a connection from the same to the 
hand, and mechanism brought into action by 
the time mechanism for pressing the pin into 
the paper periodically, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In a speed and distance recording instru 
ment, the combination with the spindle A, 
the eccentric R and the auxiliary spindle E, 
of the springs I connected at their respective 
ends to their own barreland the adjacent hub, 
the toothed wheel 7 and pawl Roperated by 
the eccentric R, the toothed wheel 6, the bal 
ance wheel mechanism Hengaging the wheel 
6 and the wheel 10 upon the spindle E also 
engaging the wheel 6, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
4. In a speed and distance recording appa 
ratus, the index hand D, the pinion 'v' and 
toothed segment u formed with or connected 
thereto and the pivot screw e', of the slotted 
plate U to which said hand is pivoted, the 
rack v engaging the segment v, the rack v. 
i engaging the pinion v', slideways for said 
racks to move vertically in the slotted plate 
U, the studi on the back of the rack y' and 
the stud i' on the back of the rack v, the in 
dex D', means for periodically engaging the 
stud i' to operate the hand D and means for 
engaging the studs i i" in returning the hand 
to the zero or normal point, substantially as 
set forth. 
5. The combination of a spindle and mech 
anism for driving the same by the movement 
of the vehicle, a time mechanism, an auxil 
iary spindle driven by the time mechanism, 
a drop bolt upon said spindle, and mechanism 
for raising the drop bolt from the movement 
of the vehicle and allowing the same to drop, 
an index hand, and mechanism acted upon 
by the drop bolt for raising the index hand, 
rollers for moving a strip of paper along, a 
penetrating point for acting upon the paper, 
and means for connecting the same with the 
index hand, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination of a spindle and mech 
anism for driving the same by the movement 
of the vehicle, a time mechanism, an auxiliary 
spindle driven by the time mechanism, a drop 
bolt upon and rotating with said auxiliary 
spindle, and mechanism for raising the drop 
bolt from the movement of the vehicle and al 
lowing the same to drop, an index hand, and 
mechanism acted upon by the drop bolt for 
moving the hand, rollers for moving a strip of 
paper along, mechanism for driving the 
rollers by the time movement, a penetrating 
point for acting upon the paper, and means 
for connecting the same with the indicating 
hand, substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination of a spindle and mech 
anism for driving the same by the movement 
of the vehicle, a time mechanism, an auxiliary 
spindle driven by the time mechanism, a drop 
bolt upon said spindle, and mechanism for 
raising the drop bolt from the movement of 
the vehicle and allowing the same to drop, 
an index hand, and mechanism acted upon 
by the drop bolt for moving the hand, rollers 
for moving a strip of paper along, pins upon 
go 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IIc 
II5 
2O 
I 25 
13o 
25 
30 
45 
 
512,489 
7 O 
the surface of one of the rollers to penetrate 
the paper and indicate periods of time, mech 
anism for driving the rollers by the time 
movement, a penetrating point for acting 
upon the paper, and means for connecting the 
same with the indicating hand, substantially 
as set forth. 
S. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording apparatus, of a spindle and mech 
anism for rotating the same from the move 
ment of the Vehicle, a time mechanism, an 
auxiliary spindle and the rollers driven by 
the time mechanism, a strip of paper moved 
by the rollers, pins projecting from one of the 
rollers and penetrating the paper and indi 
cating periods of time, a penetrating point 
for puncturing the paper and indicating when 
the vehicle has traveled a given distance such 
as a mile or kilometer, and a cam and ratchet 
mechanism actuated by the spindle for oper 
ating said penetrating point, substantially in 
the manner and for the purposes set forth. 
9. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording apparatus, of a spindle and mech 
anism for rotating the same from the move 
ment of the vehicle, a time mechanism, an 
auxiliary spindle, and the rollers driven by 
the time mechanism, a strip of paper moved 
by the rollers, pins projecting from one of the 
rollers and penetrating the paper and indi 
cating periods of time, a penetrating point 
and mechanism connected with the spindle 
that is rotated by the movement of the vehicle 
for penetrating the paper when the vehicle 
has traveled a given distance such as a mile 
or kilometer, a hand, and mechanism for mov 
ing the same to indicate the speed of the ve 
hicle, a puncturing point adjacent to the pa 
per, mechanisla connecting the same to the 
indicating hand, and mechanism receiving its 
movement from the time mechanism for im 
pressing the latter point in the paper at regul 
larintervals of time, substantially as set forth. 
10. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording instrument, of a spindle and mech 
anism for rotating the same from the move 
ment of the vehicle, a time mechanism, a 
Spring for actuating the same, an auxiliary 
spindle rotated by the time mechanism, a drop 
bolt upon the said auxiliary spindle having 
interrupted peripheral ribs, a pinion connect 
ed with the spindle that is rotated by the 
movement of the vehicle, said pinion engag 
ing the ribs on the drop bolt and acting to 
raise the same-the drop bolt falling when 
the interrupted ribs separate from the pin 
ion-an indicating hand and mechanism act 
ed upon by the drop bolt for moving the hand 
by the elevation of the drop bolt according to 
the speed of the vehicle each revolution of 
said drop bolt, substantially as set forth. 
11. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording instrument, of a spindle and mech 
anism for rotating the same from the move 
ment of the vehicle, a time mechanism, a 
spring for actuating the same, an auxiliary 
spindle rotated by the time mechanism, a drop 
bolt upon the said auxiliary spindle having 
interrupted peripheral ribs, a pinion connect 
ed with the spindle that is rotated by the 
movement of the vehicle, said pinion engag 
ing the ribs on the drop bolt and acting to 
raise the same-the drop bolt falling when 
the interrupted ribs separate from the pin 
ion-a friction device for holding the indi 
cating hand when not otherwise acted upon, 
a slotted plate supporting the pivot of the 
hand, and studs projecting through the slots 
of the plate, a toothed mechanism for con 
necting the same with the hand, a rim upon 
the drop bolt for acting upon the studs in One 
direction, and an incline upon the drop bolt 
for acting upon the studs in the other direc 
tion in moving the hand, substantially as set 
forth. 
12. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording instrument, of a spindle and mech 
anism for rotating the same from the move 
ment of the vehicle, a time mechanism, a 
spring for actuating the same, an auxiliary 
spindle rotated by the time mechanism, a drop 
bolt upon the said auxiliary spindle having 
interrupted peripheral ribs, a pinion connect 
ed with the spindle that is rotated by the 
movement of the vehicle, said pinion engag 
ing the ribs on the drop bolt and acting to 
aise the same-the drop bolt falling when the 
interrupted ribs separate from the pinion 
an indicating hand, and mechanism acted 
upon by the drop bolt for moving the hand by 
the elevation of the drop bolt according to 
the speed of the vehicle each revolution of said 
drop bolt, rollers and mechanism for driving 
the same from the time movement for moving 
a strip of paper progressively, a point and 
connection to the indicating hand for describ 
ing upon the strip of paper the speed curve, 
substantially as set forth. 
13. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording apparatus, of a spindle and mech 
anism for rotating the same from the move 
ment of the vehicle, a time mechanism, a 
spring for actuating the same, an auxiliary 
spindle rotated by the time mechanism, a 
drop bolt upon the said auxiliary spindle hav 
ing interrupted peripheral ribs, a pinion Con 
nected with the spindle that is rotated by the 
movement of the vehicle, said pinion engag 
ing the ribs on the drop bolt and acting to 
raise the same-the drop bolt falling when 
the interrupted ribs separate from the pin 
ion-an indicating hand and mechanism acted 
upon by the drop bolt for moving the hand 
by the elevation of the drop bolt according 
to the speed of the vehicle each revolution of 
said drop bolt, rollers having projecting points 
to move a strip of paper and penetrate the 
same to indicate periods of time, a connection 
from such rollers to the time mechanism, a 
puncturing point and mechanism connecting 
the same with the indicating hand, and mech 
anism receiving its movement from the time 
mechanism and pressing the point into the 
paper periodically, substantially as set forth. 
OC 
O 
I 25 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
 
512,439 
- 
14. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording instrument, of a spindle and mech 
anism for rotating the same by the movement 
of the vehicle, a time mechanism, a spring 
for actuating the same and mechanism driven 
by the movement of the vehicle for wind 
ing up the spring, an auxiliary spindle ro 
tated by the time mechanism, a drop bolt 
upon the same, means for raising the drop 
bolt and allowing it to fall, an indicating hand 
and mechanism on the drop bolt for moving 
the same, a bell, a hammer for striking the 
Same, and mechanism actuated by the move 
ment of the vehicle for moving the hammer, 
a spindle and stop for holding the hammer 
out of action except when the maximum speed 
is attained and the stop is raised by the drop 
bolt, substantially as set forth. 
15. The combination with the time mech 
anism, of an auxiliary spindle rotated by the 
same, a drop bolt upon the said spindle hav 
ing interrupted peripheral ribs, a pinion for 
engaging the peripheral ribs and mechanism 
for driving the same by the movement of the 
vehicle, an indicating hand and mechanism 
actuated by the drop bolt for moving the 
hand, a notched disk rotated by the move 
ment of the vehicle, and a forked rest block 
acted upon by the notched disk for commenc 
ing the upward movement of the drop bolt, 
substantially as set forth. 
16. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording apparatus, of a time mechanism, 
rollers for feeding a strip of paper, gearing 
connecting the rollers with the time mech 
anism, a spring actuated hammer plate, a 
puncturing point operated by the hammer 
plate and penetrating the paper, a spindle 
and cam A' and means for rotating the same 
by the movement of the vehicle, a cam O for 
acting upon the hammer plate in one direc 
tion, a ratchet wheel, a pawl and a lever re 
ceiving their motion from the cam A' for act 
luating the cam O and moving the hammer 
plate, substantially as set forth. 
17. The combination with the pinion g and 
mechanism for rotating the same by the move 
ment of the vehicle, of the drop bolt having 
interrupted peripheral ribs, a time mechanism 
and gearing and an auxiliary spindle for ro 
tating the drop bolt, an indicating hand, a 
friction mechanism for holding the hand 
when not otherwise acted upon, segmental 
gears connected with the hand, a supporting 
plate having slots, toothed racks engaging the 
Segmental gears, studs projecting from the 
racks, a notched rim upon the drop bolt for 
acting upon the studs in one direction and a 
helical incline for acting upon the studs in 
the other direction to set and return the hand, 
substantially as set forth. 
18. The combination with the pinion g and 
mechanism for rotating the same by the move 
ment of the vehicle, of the drop bolt having 
interrupted peripheral ribs, a time mechanism 
and gearing and an auxiliary spindle for ro 
tating the drop bolt, an indicating hand, a 
friction mechanism for holding the hand 
when not otherwise acted upon, segmental 
gears connected with the hand, a supporting 
plate having slots, toothed racks engaging 
the segmental gears, studs projecting from the 
racks, a notched rim upon the drop bolt for 
acting upon the studs in one direction and a 
helical incline for acting upon the studs in 
the other direction to move the hand, a roller 
having projecting pins for moving a strip of 
paper, gearing for driving the roller from the 
time mechanism, a puncturing point and con 
nection to the hand for indicating upon the 
strip of paper the speed curve, means for 
holding the rolled up strip of paper, a case 
for receiving the paper after it passes through 
the apparatus, and a curved spring in the re 
ceiving case for directing the paper as it is 
rolled up, substantially as set forth, 
19. The combination in a speed and distance 
recording apparatus, of a time mechanism, a 
roller and gearing connecting the same with 
the time mechanism, pins upon the roller for 
indenting the strip of paper and indicating 
periods of time, an indicating hand, a punc 
turing point and a connection from the hand 
to the point, means for pressing the point 
into the paper at stated intervals of time, 
a puncturing point and mechanism receiv 
ing its motion from the moving vehicle for 
pressing the point into the paper at regular 
distances of travel such as a mile or kilo 
meter, the strip of paper being divided by 
longitudinal lines indicating the speed of 
movement, substantially as set forth. 
20. In a speed measuring apparatus, the 
combination with an index hand and index, 
of means for feeding along the paper strip 
with a uniform progressive movement and 
for marking thereon to indicate periods of 
time, means for moving the index hand over 
the index, and means connected with said 
hand for simultaneously recording upon the 
paper strip the ratio of speed indicated by 
said hand, and means actuated by the move 
ment of the vehicle for indicating by a line 
of dots upon the paper strip the distance, 
traveled in miles, kilometers or fractions 
thereof, substantially as and for the purposes 
Set forth. 
21. In a speed and distance recording in 
strument, the combination with the spindle 
and mechanism for actuating the same by the 
movement of the vehicle, the gear S and pin 
ions', the shaft C and pinion g, of the drop 
bolt B having parallel interrupted peripheral 
ribs adapted to be engaged by the pinion g 
for raising such drop bolt in proportion to the 
ratio of speed traveled, the alarm mechanism, 
and means actuated by the rise of the drop 
bolt to release the alarm mechanism when the 
speed is excessive, substantially as specified. 
22. In a speed and distance recording in 
strument, a drop bolt B having parallel pe 
ripheral ribs extending from a vertical line 4 
partially around its circumference, there be 
ing a plain longitudinal portion between the 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
95 
I do 
I o5 
IO 
II5 
25 
 
512,439 
9 
anism giving motion to the auxiliary spindle, 
and the train of gears connecting the said aux 
iliary spindle with the feed roller p', whereby 
a regular progressive movement is imparted 
to the paper strip, means for winding the clock 
mechanism by the movement of the vehicle, 
and mechanism for marking the paper at regu 
lar intervals of time, substantially as set forth. 
25. In a speed and distance recording in 
strument, the combination with the strip of 
paper and the roller Otherefor, of the recep 
tacle L for the free end of the paper strip and 
a bent spring 11 in said receptacle for direct 
ing the said strip of paper to form a coil as 
fed into the receptacle, substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
HUGO HAUSSHALTER, 
35 
Witnesses: 
GEORG RICHTER, 
WILHELM WIESENHTTER, 
O 
ribs, in combination with means for rotating 
the drop bolt from a time mechanism, and 
means for raising the drop bolt from the move 
ment of the vehicle, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
23. In a speed and distance recording ap 
paratus, the slotted plate U and the index 
hand and toothed mechanism connected there 
with; of the slotted frame T, the sliding head 
ir carrying a penetrating point, the rod in con 
necting said head with the index hand mech 
anism, whereby the head is raised and low 
ered as the hand is turned, means for periodi 
cally holding the frame T outward and the 
penetrating point from the paper, and the 
spring it for periodically pressing said parts 
forward to puncture the paper, substantially 
as specified. 
24. In a speed and distance recording in 
strument, the combination with a strip of pa 
per, of the auxiliary spindle E, the friction 
roller p and the feed roller p' between which 
the strip of paper passes, the clockwork mech 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512539.txt	No Model,) 
No. 512,539, 
E. B. CUSHING. 
RAILWAY CAR SEAT. 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
-6 
its, 2. 
S 
C 
2 
2 2. 
 
Nventor: 
This rational LTMcgRAPHNG comPANY. 
wAshtunaro N. D. c. 
 
N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMERY B. CUSHING, OF LACONIA, NEW HAMPSHIRE, 
RALWAY CAR SEAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,539, dated January 9, 1894. 
Application filed May 22, 1893, Serial No. 474,991. (No model.) 
55 
To all whon, it nucly conce772: 
Be it known that I, EMERY B. CUSHING, of 
Laconia, in the county of Belknap and State of 
New Hampshire, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Railway - Car 
Seats, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in railway car seats, and one object 
of the invention is to provide improved means 
for rendering the seat bottom reversible, so 
that both sides may be utilized, and the life 
of the seat thereby prolonged. 
The invention also has for its object to pro 
vide means for moving the seatback and forth 
in unison with the movement of the back to 
change the inclination of the seat and its pro 
jection over the edge of the supporting frame 
according to the direction in which the seat, 
as a whole, is to face. 
To the above ends, the invention may be 
said to consist in the novel features of con 
struction and combinations of parts herein 
after described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the annexed draw 
ings, and to the letters marked thereon, form 
ing a part of this specification, the same let 
ters designating the same parts or features, as 
the case may be, wherever they occur. 
Figure 1 shows an end elevation of the seat. 
Fig. 2 shows an end view of the seat bottom. 
Fig. 3 shows a front view of the seat bottom. 
Fig. 4 shows a horizontal section of the seat 
bottom. Fig. 5 shows an end view of the back. 
Fig. 6 shows a view of the inner side of the 
outer supporting-frame and attached parts. 
Fig. 7 shows a detail of arms which support 
the back. 
In the drawings: the reference letter a des 
ignates the end supporting-frames, the outer 
one of which also constitutes an arm of the 
The seat-bottomb, which is upholstered on 
both sides, is pivotally connected with a pair 
of plates b', adapted to fit against the ends of 
the said seat bottom, and Supported from the 
frames a, as will hereinafter appear. The 
plate b' at the outer end of the seat bottom 
has a notch bin each end; and a pair of bolts 
b', embedded in the seat b, are adapted to en 
gage said notches and thereby hold the plate 
and seat bottom rigidly together. 
A rod c extends transversely through the 
seat, and has square ends, adapted to receive 
a key for turning the rod. The said rod car 
ries a pair of eccentrics c', which are connect 
ed by pitmen c with the bolts b, and hence, 
by turning said rod, the seat bottom and plate 
may be locked and unlocked. When un 
locked, the seat bottom may be turned com 
pletely over, so as to bring its under side up 
permost. Thus, When one side becomes Worn, 
the seat bottom may be reversed, and the 
other side used, while the worn side is con 
cealed from view. 
The back d is pivoted to plates d', fitting 
against each end of it, and these plates have 
openings d, which are adapted to register with 
openings in the end of the back. Pins d, in 
serted through the registering openings, serve 
to lock the back to the plates. There are two 
openings in each end of the back, and the 
latter may be turned over, so as to present 
either side for use, both sides being uphol 
stered, and may be locked in either position. 
Thus, when one side of the backbecomes worn, 
it may be reversed and the other side used. 
The connections between the back and the 
seatbottom, whereby the seat may be reversed 
so as to face forward going in either direction, 
will next be described. The construction be 
ing the same at each end of the seat, it will 
suffice to describe that at one end only. 
A. 
cross-piece or plate e is pivoted centrally to 
the frame a, and Occupies a recess in the in 
ner side of said frame, the said cross-piece 
being allowed play on its pivot which is lim 
ited in each direction by projections e' at the 
ends of the cross-piece, encountering portions 
of the frame at opposite ends of the recess. 
A pair of parallel arms or bars fare pivoted 
at their upper ends to the plate d' on the back, 
and at their lower ends to a cross-head f', 
which is pivoted to the plate b' on the seat 
bottom. The said parallel arms or bars are 
also pivoted to the cross-piece e. A plate g 
is fastened to the inner side of the frame a, 
and has a pair of curved grooves g formed 
in it, to receive pins g, projecting from the 
plate b on the seat bottom. The effect of this 
construction is to cause the seat bottom, in 
both adjustments of the seat, to assume the 
desired slightly angular position, with the 
rear edge in a lower plane than the front edge, 
and the proper position of the back is also in 
Seat. 
- 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
O 
s 
sured. This result is due to the parallel 
arms which hold the back-plate d' in a posi 
tive position, and to pivotally supporting said 
arms above their connection with the seat 
plate, whereby the seat is moved simultane 
ously with the back, and also to pivoting the 
parallel arms to the cross-piece e, which is al 
lowed a play, so that, after the parallel arms 
reach the limit of their movement relative to 
each other, they may move together suffi 
ciently to tilt the seat, the latter being prop 
erly guided by the engagement of the pins g 
in the grooves g'. 
It is evident that the construction here 
shown may be varied without departing from 
the spirit and scope of the invention, and 
hence the invention is not limited to such 
construction. 
Having thus explained the nature of the in 
vention and described a way of constructing 
and using the same, although without attempt 
ing to set forth all of the forms in which it may 
be made or all of the modes of its use, it is 
declared that what is claimed is 
1. A railway car seat, comprising in its con 
struction a reversible seat bottom pivoted to 
plates on the frame-work of the seat, bolts in 
the seat bottom adapted to engage one of the 
said plates and thereby lock the seat bottom, 
a rotatable rod extending through the seat 
proper, and eccentrics on said rod and con 
nected with the said bolts. 
2. A railway car seat, comprising in its con 
struction the seat bottom and the back, and 
25 
512,539 
3. A railway car seat, comprising in its con- 4o r 
a pair of parallel arms at each end of the seat, 35 
each pair of arms being pivotally connected 
with the seat bottom and with the back, and 
both arms of a pair supported on a single pivot 
above their connection with the seat portion. 
struction the seat bottom and the back, a pair 
of parallel arms at each end of the seat, each 
pair of arms being pivotally connected with 
the seat bottom and with the back, and a 
cross-piece pivoted to a stationary support 
and pivotally connected with the arms, said 
cross-piece having projections at each, end 
adapted to encounter fixed stops. 
4. A railway car seat, comprising in its con 
struction the seat bottom and the back, a pair 5o 
of parallel arms at each end of the seat, each 
pair of arms being pivotally connected with 
the seat bottom and with the back, a cross 
piece pivoted to a stationary support and piv 
otally connected with the arms, said cross 
piece having projections at each end adapted 
to encounter fixed stops, and a fixed support 
having curved grooves which receive pins 
projecting from the seat bottom. 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 16th day of 
May, A. D. 1893. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 6o 
45 
55 
EMERY B. CUSHING. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. A. PLUMMER, 
S. S. JEWETT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512640.txt	CASH REGISTER, RECORDER, AND CHECK PRINTER, 
C. W. WEISS. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 512,640. 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
1  
2 
2 
N 
AS 
 
 
 
 
  
S. 
 
Ztest: 
Z7 Uezudo7: 
z 
Jy. 
CASH REGISTER, RECORDER, AND CHECK PRINTER. 
C. W. WEISS. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 512,640, 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
 
sa fi: s: 
ISO) 
2. O 
pa 
C. W. WEISS. 
CASH REGISTER RECORDER, AND CHECK PRINTER. 
6. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 52,640. 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
 
0ASH REGISTER, RECORDER, AND CHECK PRINTER. 
C. W. WEISS. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894, 
(No Model.) 
No. 512,640. 
 
CASH REGISTER RECORDER AND CHECK PRINTER. 
C. W. WEISS. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
(No Model.) 
No. 512,640, 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
9. 
 
SN 
(No Model.) 
- 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
CASH REGISTER, RECORDER, AND CHECK PRINTER. 
C. W. WEISS. 
No. 512,640, 
Patented Jan. 9, 1894. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL W. WEISS, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGN 
MENTS, TO THE NATIONAL CASH REGISTER COMPANY, OF OHIO. 
CASH REGISTER, RECORDER, AND CHECK-PRINTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,840, dated January 9, 1894. 
- Application filed December 30, 1891. Renewed May 17, 1893, serial No. 474,563. (No model). 
6o 
o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARL W. WEISS, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Cash-Registers; and 
I do...hereby declare that the following is a 
full and exact description thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
so thereon, umaking a part of this specification. 
This application is a renewal or continua 
tion of application, Serial No. 416,551, filed by 
me December 30, 1891. 
The invention relates to that class of ma 
15 chines in which are employed an actuating 
device or driving member which is given a 
uniform movement at each operation of the 
machine; a driven member, such as an indi 
cator, a register, or a type wheel; means, as 
- so a latch or clutch device, intermediate the 
driving and driven members for intermit 
tently connecting and disconnecting them, to 
cause the driving member to impart different 
portions of its uniform movements to the 
s's driven member; and a series of keys, stops 
or trips representing different amounts and 
co-operating with the latch . or connecting 
means between the driving and driven mem 
bers to deterunine the extent of movement 
Various forms of machines embodying the 
above elements and having the same general 
mode of operation are well known. In all of 
them with which I am familiar the driving 
ss member has been given its movement at each 
operation of the inachine either by a crank, 
lever or other suitable handled device directly 
actuating the driving member, or by means 
controlled by a like independent handle or 
4o key, and the node of operation consisted in 
pressing in or setting the proper keys and 
then giving the driving nember its definite 
movement by a separate operation of the 
handled device. 
One feature of Iny invention consists in a 
new mode of operation of machines of this 
class, under which the simple operation or 
setting of the proper key or keys will catase 
the driving member to be given its definite : 
ge move ent by a suitable motor controlled by 
the keys, to impart tie proper portion of its 
so inparted by the former to the latter. 
4S 
movement to the driven member; and to this 
end the novelty of this feature of my inven 
tion consists in the combination of the usual 
or any suitable driving member or actuating 55 
device having a definite movement at each 
operation of the machine; a driven member, 
as a register, indicator or type wheel, suitable 
means, as a latch or clutch device, for inter 
mittently connecting the driving and driven 
members, a motor, such as a spring, for mov 
ing the driving member, means, such as a de 
tent, for holding the motor in check, and a 
series of keys, stops or trips co-operating. 
with the detent to release the motor and also 
co-operating with the latch or connecting de 
vice to determine the extent of movement to 
be imparted by the driving to the driven 
member; as will be hereinafter inore fully ex 
plained. 
Other features of my invention relate to a 
printing wheel which is rotated or oscillated 
to present the desired character at the print 
ing point, is shifted laterally to bring the de 
sired character into the proper relative posi. 
tions to represent different denominations, 
and is caused to print the several figures of 
a given number in succession; to an adding 
mechanism in which each wheel, besides be 
ing advanced one step by every complete 
revolution of the next preceding wheel of 
lower denomination is also adapted to bead 
vanced any desired number of steps by a sin 
gle gear which is automatically shifted to op 
erate in succession the several wheels of the 
series; and to various constructions, combi 
nations and arrangements of parts hereinaf 
ter described. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion on the liner--cof Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a ver 
tical section on the line y-y of Fig. 1, the 
casing and a part of the interior frame being 
also represented in section on a different 
plane. Fig. 3 is a vertical section on the line 
2-2 of Fig.1. Fig. 4 is a detail perspective 
view of a portion of the mechanism for set 
ting the print wheel. Fig. 5 is a detail view 
of the-locking-plate and parts immediately 
counected therewith. Figs. 6 and 7 are detail . 
views in perspective of parts to be referred too 
to, and Fig. 8 is a detail view in perspective 
of a portion of the adding mechanism. Fig. 
95 
75 
ho 
2 
- 
$12,640 
o 
75 
95 
O 
20 
25 
9 is a vertical sectional view on a line at the 
right of gear 35 of Fig. 1, looking toward the 
right, to show the relative arrangement of 
certain parts of the-mechanism. Fig. 10 is a 
5 front elevation of the register, looking toward 
the left in Fig. 1. 
The motor employed may be an ordinary 
clock-spring 10 secured to a shaft1l, to which 
are fixed a usual ratchet-wheel 12 and a crank 
13, a stop-pin 14 being fixed in the path of 
the latter to limit its motion. See Figs. 1, 
2 and 10. A gear 15, loose upon the shaft 11, 
carries a pawl 15, which is adapted to en 
gage the ratchet-wheel 12 to propel the mech 
anism and to slipidly over the ratchet-wheel 
during the movement of the crauk 13 to wind 
up the spring. A pinion 16, supported upon 
a stud 17, is engaged and driven by the gear 
15, and the relation between the two is such, 
in the machine shown, that the pinion makes. 
five complete rotations during a complete 
movement of the gear 15 and crank 13: The 
pinion 16 is formed with or fixed to a disk 18 
which is notched, as at 19, or is otherwise 
formed to be engaged and held against the 
stress of the spring 10 by a detent 20. The 
latter is pivoted at 21 and bears a projecting 
pin 22 which is engaged by an arm 23 extend 
ing from a spring-pressed locking-plate 24, 
Figs. 5 and 9. Spring-seated keys 25, Figs. 
1, 4, 5, 9 and 10, representing the several val 
ues from 0 to 9, are formed to engage with 
said plate in such manner that the inward 
movement of any one key shifts the plate to. 
35 release the key last-pressed in, while the key 
newly pressed in is retained by the plate un 
til it is released in its turn. The construc 
tion and operation of the keys and the lock 
ing-plate are as substantially described in Let 
ters Patent of the United States, No. 443,024, 
granted to meDecember 16, 1890, and are fully 
illustrated in Figs. 4 and 5. The inner end 
of each key-stem,-see Fig. 4-is formed with 
a lateral recess b, embracing the retaining 
plateb' (Fig. 5) audis also formed in a plane at 
45 right angles with that of the recess b, with two 
notches e andf, the one e to engage with the 
locking-plate 24 when the key is in its outer 
position, and the other when the key is pushed 
in. The portion of the stem between the two 
notches is not only formed as a wedge g to 
move the locking-plate 24 when the key is 
ushed in, but is formed with a second bevel 
EE toward the outer end of the key, 
to prevent the possibility of the key being 
caught and held by the edge of the locking 
plate 24 and to utilize the spring of the key 
to aid in throwing the looking-plate to re 
lease the detent 20, through the arm 23 and 
pin 22, from the disk18 and permit the spring 
i0 to produce the movements hereinafter re 
ferred to. The locking plate 24 may be 
loosely mounted on a stud (see Fig. 5) which 
is fixed to the front, casing of the register, 
65 and is notched peripherally, as at p, m, for 
co-operation with the key-stems. A spring 
m, which may be coiled about a fixed pin o 
projecting through a hole in the plate, presses. 
against a pin p carried by the plate and nor 
mally maintains the plate in the position 
shown in Figs. 5 and 9 so that the inward 
movement of a key shall move the plate in 
opposition to the spring. 
An eccentric pin 30.on the disk 18, (see 
Fig.2) is connected by a link 31 with a gear 
segment 32 which is fixed to a shaft 33 sup 
ported in bearings 34 in the supporting 
frame-work and casing of the mechanism. 
The gear segment lineshes with and drives a 
pinion 35 and the relations between the two 
and between the connections of the link 31 
with the disk and the segment are such that 
the pinion 35 is given a complete rotation in 
one direction and then in the other for every 
rotation of the pinion 16. The pinion 35 also 
carries with it a disk 36 which is notched as 
at 37 for the engagement therewith of a dog 38. 
See Figs. 1, 2, 4 and 9. The pinion 35 and disk 
pported 
36 are loose upon a shaft39, which issu 
in bearings in a bracket 40 and standard 41, 
while the dog 38 is fast upon the end of a rock 
shaft 42 which has a bearing in an arm 43 fixed 
to the shaft 39. To the other end of the shaft 
42 is fixed an arm 44, Fig. 4 bearing a pin 
45 which underlies the tail of a trip-latch 46 
pivoted upon the shaft 42. The dog 38 is nor 
mally pressed into the notch 37 by a spring 
a, and the arm 43 and shaft 39 are conse 
quently compelled to move with the pinion 
35, but the triplatch moves in such proximity 
to the ends of the keys 25 that when a key is 
pressed in, the outer end of the latch 46 will 
strike the inner end of that key and through 
the pin 45 and arm 44, rock.the shaft 42 and 
raise the dog 38 from the notch in the disk 36 
and the latter will continue to rotate while 
the movement of the shaft39 will be checked. 
To insure the stopping of the shaft 39 in cer 
tain and definite positions the dog 38 is formed 
with a head 38' to engage, when the dog is 
raised from the notchin the disk 36, with one 
of the notches of an interiorly notched or star 
toothed ring or plate 47, Fig. 2. 
From the foregoing description. it will be 
understood that at the beginning of any given 
operation of the machine the gear 35 and its 
disk 36 are coupled to the shaft 39 by the en 
gagement of the dog 38 with the notch in the 
disk; that when any one of the keys 25 is 
pressed in the detent 20 will be disengaged 
from the notch in the disk 18 and thereby re 
lease the motor and permitit to give said disk 
18 a complete revolution; that this revolution 
of the disk 18 will oscillate the segmental 
rack 32 back and forth through its limit of 
movement and impart a complete revolution 
to the gear 35 and disk 36, first in one direc 
tion and then in the other; that during the 
revolution of the disk 36 it a forward direc 
tion the engagement of the dog 38 with its 
notch will cause the shaft\39 to be carried 
with the disk until the latch 46 strikes the 
end of the key which has been pressed in, 
whereupon the shaft 42 will be rocked and 
40 
So 
55 
 
OO 
IoS 
tId. 
IIS 
25 
512,640 
3 
O 
15 
25 
30. 
the dog 38 lifted out of the notch in the disk 
36, and the shaft39 positively arrested by the 
engagement of the latch 46 with the key, while. 
the disk 36 will complete its forward revolu 
tion alone. The shaft 39 will thus be turned 
with the disk 36 from initial position to a 
point determined by the operated key, and 
this shaft may thus be caused to impart to a 
register, indicator or-type wheel a degree of 
movement proportionate to the value of such 
operated key. When, during the return back 
ward revolution of the disk 30, the notch in 
said disk is brought under the nose of the 
dog 38 the latter will immediately spring into 
said notch and the shaft 39 will thereby be 
again coupled to the disk 36 and carried back 
to initial position. In this maner, at each 
operation of the machine the shaft 39 is first 
moved a distance determined by the operated 
key, and then restored to initial position. . . 
The gear 35, disk 36, latch 46, dog 38, shaft 
39, and keys 25, are quite similar, both in ar 
rangement and in their co-operation with 
Yeach other, to the corresponding parts in my 
prior patent heretofore referred to, and in 
machines now in general, use, the principal 
difference being that in such prior patent and 
machines the operating lever or handle was 
geared to the driving disk 36, instead of said. 
disk being geared to a motor controlled by 
the keys. Such being the case the novelty of. 
this feature of my present invention does not 
reside in the particular construction and ar 
rangement of any of these parts, for in other 
styles of machines having the same general 
mode of operation the construction and ar 
rangement of the parts are or may be radically 
different. It is not essential in many ma 
chines that the driving member should have 
a complete revolution, either in one direction 
or back and forth in opposite directions; nor 
is it essential that the driving and driven 
members stuould be connected at initial po 
sition, as above described, and disconnected 
at different points by the operated keys, since 
in sotne machines of this class the operated 
keys co-operate with the connecting devices 
between the driving and driven members in 
such away as to connect then at different 
points, and a separate device causes them to 
be disconnected at a fixed point, so that in 
such instances the variable movements in 
parted by the driving to the driven member 
are produced by connecting the two at dif 
ferent points and discopnectibg them at a 
fixed point, instead of connecting them at a 
fixed point and disconnecting them at differ 
ent points. 
In the foregoing description the notched 
disk 36 may be termed the driving member 
of the combination, the shaft 39 or the part 
actuated by it (whether it be an indicator, 
register or type wheel) the driven member, 
and the parts interomediate the disk 36 and 
shaft 39 the clutch device or latch for.inter 
mittently connecting the driving and driven 
members; but, as before stated, the elements 
corresponding to these three in other styles 
of machines, embodying the same mode of 
operation and the novel feature of my pres 
ent invention, may differ widely in form and 
arrangement. 
. So far as Ian aware I am the first in the 
art to combine, in a machine of this general 
character, a driving member or actuating de 
vice of any sort which has a uniform move 
ment at each operation of the machine, a 
driven member of any sort or for any pur 
pose, means of any kind between the driving 
and driven members for intermittently con 
necting them, a motor of any sort for mov 
ing the driving member, detaining or locking 
means of any kind for holding the motor.in 
check, and a series of keys, stops or trips co 
operating with the detaining means to re 
lease the motor and co-operating also with 
the connecting means. between tie driving 
and driven members to determine the extent 
of movement to be imparted by the former to 
the iatter, whereby the operation of the ep 
tire machine is made automatic and requires 
only the simple operations of a key, instead. 
of the double operations of setting the key 
and then independently actuating the driving 
member as heretofore; and my invention in 
this respect is restricted only by the terms of 
my respective claims in which it is set forth. 
... It will be understood that the only purpose 
of the crank 13 applied to the shaft 11 is to 
wind up the motor spring, and that this spring 
maybe wound up in any other suitable manner 
and by any other suitable means. It will also 
be understood that the motor spring maybe of 
such length that one winding of it will suf 
fice for a considerable. number of operations 
of the machine. 
Where the shaft 39 (or the arm 43 carrying 
the latch and coupling dog, as in my prior 
patent before referred to and in unachines now 
in general use), is employed to actuate an in 
dicator, the latch 46 will be provided with a 
trigger or trip which will permit it to clear 
the end of the perated key during the for 
ward movement of the disk 36 and cause it 
to be arrested by such key and the dog 38 
disengaged from the disk during the return 
backward movement of the disk, and thereby 
leave the shaft and indicator in indicating 
position at the end of the operation of the 
At the next operation of the ma 
machine. 
chine and forward movement of the disk 30 
the dog 38 will enter the notch in the disk as . 
soon as the notch comes under the dog, and 
the disk will then carry the shaft and indi 
cator forward with. it to the end of its for 
ward revolution, and will then carry them 
backward with it until the latch 46 or its trig 
ger engages the key which has been pressed 
in, whereupon the dog 38 will be disengaged 
from the disk 36 and the latter will move on 
to initial position alone, while the shaft 39 
and indicator will remain in the position de 
termined by the key, as will be readily un 
derstood. In the machine which I have illus 
45 
So 
SS 
75 
9o 
95. 
od 
(oS 
o 
( 5 
2d. 
25 
t30 
512,640 
so 
35 
o 
15 
O 
s 
. 
. 
. 
or.cents. 
A 
trated iri the drawings, however, the shaft39 
is employed to actuate a register and print 
ing wheel. For the former purpose it is con 
nected to the driving gear of the register by 
a ratchet and pawlor clutch connection which 
will cause it to carry the driving gear with 
it in one direction and move independently 
of it in the opposite direction; but for the lat 
ter purpose it is geared directly to the print 
ing wheel, since it is desired that the print 
ing wheel shall at each operation be turned, 
from zero or initial position to print the num 
ber representing the value of the operated 
key, and be returned to initial position at the 
end of the operation. This printing wheel 
and its connection with the shaft 39 may 
now be described as follows: The shaft 39 is . 
geared, through bevel gears 49 and 50 to a 
- short shaft 51, Figs. 1, 3 and 6, which is stip 
ported in bearings in a bracket 52, and is 
connected, by a universal joint 53 with a 
shaft 54, supported as hereinafter described 
and bearing the print-wheel 55. The wheel. 
55 is so supported as to be capable, not only 
of rotary mution, but of motion to audi fron 
the plane of the paper upon which the rec 
ord is made, or from right to left with refer 
ence to Fig.1, and of motion in a plane at 
right angles thereto as well. To this end said 
shaft has a bearing 56 carried by the end of 
an-arm 57 which is forked at its lower end, 
the extremities pf the fork being pivotally 
connected in the line of the sxis of the uni, 
versal joint 53, to the extremities of a fork. 
58 (see Figs. 1 and 7), which oscillates on a. 
stud59 secured to the bracket 52, Fig.6, which 
bracket is secured to the supportingstandard 
41. The arm 57 is formed, in the line of the 
axis of the shaft 59 with a bearing 60 for the 
upper end of a spindle 6l which is free sta 
move vertically in a guide 62, carried by the 
bracket 52, Figs. Gaud 7, and in a guide 63 
carried by an arm 64 projecting from the 
supporting standard. 41, Fig. 1... A collar 65. 
may be fixed to the spindle to limit the down 
ward movement thereof by contact with the 
guide 63. . 
The oscillatingshaft 33, hereinbefore re 
ferred to, has fixed thereto a short, arm 66 
which may be provided withi'a small roller 67, 
Fig. 2. Just at the completion of the first 
movement of said arm 66 and shaft 33 toward 
the left in Fig. 2, the aran strikes the lower 
end of the spindle and raises the same, caus 
55 ing the arm 57 to swing on its pivot ahd to 
throw the wheel 55 into contact with the pa 
per. Before this action takes place, however, 
it is necessary that the wheel 55 should be 
swang laterally in order to bring the figure 
thereon which has been eat at the line of 
print, into the properpqsition to represent 
the desired denomination. . 
As before stated, the fork 58 to which the 
arm 57 is pivoted is itself supported by a stud 
69. An arm 69 is secured to the hub 59' of 
the fork 58, Figs. 1 and 3, and bears a small 
wheel or roller 70 which is adapted to rest, 
under the influence of a suitable spring at 
tached to the arm, upon the periphery of a 
cam 71 which is fixed to a shaft 72 supported 
in bearings 
in the standard .41 and in the 
casing. Said shaft 72 is adapted to be rotated 
step by step, by means hereinafter described, 
and the cam 71 has its periphery made up, in 
the construction shown in the drawings, of five 
sections. When the mechanism is in the posi 
tion shown, that is, ready to begin its move: 
ment, affer the rotation of the crank 13 to wind 
the motorspring 10, the roller 70 rests upon the 
highest point of the cam 71. The first mfove 
ment of the shaft 72 will throw the point of 
the cam 71 away from the collar 70 and allow 
the rollerto drop upon the lowest point of the 
cam, Fig. 3, thereby causing the wheel 55 to 
swing into its extreme left hand position, or 
into.the hundreds column of dollars. The 
next umovement of the mechanism after a sec 
ond key is depressed will swing the wheel 
into assition to print tens of dollars, and so 
on for the five successive movements, the last 
movement causing the wheel 55 to assume its 
extreme right hand position for printing units 
In order that the shaft 72 may be turned, 
with each movement of the mechanism, 
through one-fifth of a rotation it has affixed 
to it a notched disk or ratchet-wheel 73, Figs. 
1 and 2, having five notches or teeth. These 
notches are engaged successively by a spring 
pressed pawl 74 (Fig. 2) which is carried by 
an arm, 75 fixed. to the shaft 33, so that at 
each oscillation of said shaft the disk or 
ratchet-wheel 73, shaft 72 and caun 71 are ad 
vanced one-fifth of a rotation... A suitable 
holding-pawl 76 is provided to prevent back 
ward movement of the ratchet-wheel 73. For 
the purpose of steadying the movement of the 
shaft 33 and of the mechanism actuated there. 
by a weighted arm 77 may be fixed upon said 
The mechanism above described has for its 
object to effect the proper movements of the 
recording or printing wheel 55. 
I will now proceed to describe the mechan 
ism for causing the proper. novement. of the 
paper upon which the wheel 55 makes its ims 
priats and of the inking-ribbon. The roll 80 
of paper may be supported in a suitable cas 
ing 81 fixed in a convenient proximity to the 
print-wheel 55. Thence the paperis led over a 
bearing 82, to give the proper degree of tension 
and about a driving roll 83 which is journaled 
in a frame 84 to a winding rll 85 journaled 
in the arms 86 of said frame. Aguide 87. 
may be interposed between the driving-roll 
83 and the winding-roll 85. The driving-roll 
83 is supported in such proximity to the print 
wheel. 55 that it constitutes an impression 
roller or plate for said print-wheel, and for 
this purpose its surface may be covered with 
suitable misterial 88, as rubber. The wind 
ing-roll my be driven by means of a band 
89 and pulleys 90 and 91. Fixed to the shaft 
of the pulley 91 or formed there with is a 
shaft. ... 
So 
- 
- 
- - 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
45 
75 
go 
95 
do 
ToS 
to 
2 or 
I 25 
612,640 
20 
atchet-wheel92 which is adapted to be driven 
by a pawl-93, carried by an arm 94 which is 
fixed to a sleeve 95 supported by a stud 96, 
Fig. 8: A bent lever 97 is forked to embrace 
said sleeve aid is pivoted thereon as at 98 to 
Swing in a plane at right angles to the plane of 
h9Yement of the arm 94. The lower end 99 of 
said lever 97 is bent so as to stand when so 
Permitted in the path of movement of a roller 
100 carried by an arm 101 which is fixed to 
the shaft33, Figs. 1 and 3. The leverialso 
bears finger 102 which is adapted to rest 
ornally upon the periphery of a disk 03 
fixed on the shaft 72 or to drop into a notch 
94 formed in the periphery of said disk. 
5 
The notch in said disk 103 is formed at such 
point in the periphery of the disk as that 
the finger 102 will drop into it just as the 
mechanism before described for actuating the 
print wheel completes its fifth movement. In 
this anner the driving roll 83 is actuated 
and the paper is advanced just after the last 
figure of the annount registered has been 
printed, whether such figures be (0) or a sig 
nificant figure. lsy the co-operation of the 
finger I02 with the disk 103 the leve of 
held out of the path of the roller 100 during 
the preceding movements of the mechanis 
and advancement of the paper is consequent 
ly prevented until the proper moment. The 
inking ribbon 110 may be carried by spools 
and 112 supported by standards 13d 
ll, Fig.2. The actuating shaft 15 of the 
Spool. 112 extends downward through the 
standard 114 and is provided at itsio ereni 
with ratchet-wheel il G. Said ratchet-wheel 
is adapted to be actuated by a pawl 117 which 
is cared by an arm.118 of the fork5s, (see 
Fig. 7) and is caused by its oscillations toad 
Yanotheratchet-wheel and shift the ribbon 
slightly with every movement of the print 
Wheel. A hood 55 may be fixed to the top of 
the sing of the register to cover and pro 
tect the print-wheel and the portions of the 
shaft 54 and arm 57 which project above the 
main casing. 
The adding nechanism which has now to 
be described, is in general construction simi. 
lar to that usually employed, but instead of 
haying the whole train driven through the 
units. Wheel alone, is so far modified as to 
Permit each wheel of the higher denomina. 
tions to be operated independently of the 
Wheel of the next lower denomination while 
at the same time it may be operated, when 
necessay, by the wheel of the next lowerde. 
nation. The several number wheels 190, 
129, Figs, land 8, are mounted to rotate upon 
fixed shaft 121, and each has fixed the to 
on one side a gear 122 and on the other side 
ten-tootled gear 123, except the first wheel 
of the series which has no gear 13. Upon a 
second fixed shaft 124 is mounted to rotate 
a series of gears 125, 25, meshing respect 
yely with and equal to the gears 122, and 
hying fixed thereto the singletoothed gears 
126, 19, Wuch are adapted to drive the gears 
123. The several gears mawlue provided with 
pawls or may have sufficient friction upon the 
shafts to prevent overrunning. By these 
means each number-wheel may be advanced 
by means independent of the wheels of lower 
denominatious while it causes the proper ad 
vancement of the wheels of the higher de 
nominations. The gears 125 are adapted to 
be engaged in succession by a pinion 127, 
which is equal to the gear 125 and which is 
splined to its shaft 128 so as to slide longi 
tudinally thereon while being compelled to 
rotate there with. Said shaft 128 has suitable 
bearings in the casing and in a statidard 129 
and has fixed thereon a ratchet-wheel 130 
which may be engaged by a.hold-pawl 131 to 
prevent backward rotation of the shaft. Said 
shaft 128 is connected by a slipping clutch 132 
with the oscillating shaft 39 hereinbefore de 
scribed, so that the shaft 12S may be driven 
in one direction by said shaft 39. It will be 
evident that, as the shaft 39 is oscillated at 
each movement of its oscillating mechanism, 
to an extent corresponding to the value rep 
resented by the key 25 which has been pressed 
in, the shaft 128 will be rotated to a corre 
sponding extent, but in one direction only, 
and that the adding nechanism will thereby 
be advanced to add the value of the key 
pressed in to the amount already registered. 
The pinion 127 is embraced by an arm of a 
fork 133 which slides upon a rod 134 and car 
ries a small wheel or roller 135 which is pressed 
by a spring 130 attached to the fork, against 
the edge of a cam 137 fixed to the shaft 72. 
As before stated, the shaft 72 is rotated step 
by-step, through one-fifth of a rotation at each 
movement of the actuating mechanism by 
means of the pawl 74 and ratchet 73, Fig. 2. 
The edge of the cam 137 inay be considered 
as composed of five sections and the move 
ment of each section under the roller 35 
causes the movement of the pinion 127 from 
one gear 125 to another. In the initial posi 
tion of the whole mechanism the rollier 135 
stands upon the highest point of the cam 137 
so that in the first movement of the mechan 
is... from the position shown in the drawings 
the spring 130 pulls the gear 127 in to its ex 
treme left-hand position and carries it into 
engagement with the gear 125 which drives 
- the hundreds numboring wheel. At this time 
the shaft 128 is stationary as during the first 
forward movement of the shaft 39 the teeth 
of the two members of the clutch 132 slip idly 
over each other. The can 137 owing to its 
ratchet and pawl connection 73,74, with the 
shaft 33 ceases its movement as soon as the 
shaft 33 completes the forward movement of 
its oscillation. Upon the return movement 
of the shaft 33 to shaft 39 is turned a dis 
tance determined by the operated key and 
tly rough its clutch connection 132 with the 
shaft 128 turns the latter with it and advances . 
the hundreds numbering wheel the proper dis 
tance to register the value of the operatedkey. 
On the next movement of the mechanism the 
35 
AO 
45 
so 
55 
WS 
o 
99 
to 5 
O 
i I5 
25 
612,640 
O 
20 
o 
75 
36, rotates the shaft 39 backward and restores 
can 137 first moves, shifts the pinion 127 
the print-wheel 55 to its normal position 
into engagement with the next or tens gear 
with the 0 in the line of print. The print 
125 and comes to rest, and thereafter the pin 
wheel, however, is left opposite the hundreds 
ion is rotated to advance the tens numbering 
column as the ratchet-wheel 73 is moved only . 
wheel. By reason of the fact that each gear 
during the forward movement of the shaft.88. 
123 may rotate without moving the singles 
During these movements the ink-ribbon 10 
toothedgear of the next lower denomination 
is shifted by the means before referred to 
the addition can commence, as described, with 
and by means of the contact of the finger102 
thhighest denomination, and as the single 
with the periphery of the disk 103 the lever 
toothed gear will advance the ten-toothed 
197 is held out of the path of the arm 101 and 
gear of the next higher denomination one step 
the paper-feeding mechanism is not actuated. . 
every time it completes a rotation the proper 
The action of the adding mechanism during 
changes in the number wheels will be made 
these movements has already been fully de 
whenever the total of the figure uppna given 
scribed and need not be referred to further. 
wheel already at the sight opening (not 
As before stated, the detent 20 drops into the 
shown) and of the number to be added there 
notch 19 in the disk 18, when the latter has 
to, equals or exceeds ten. 
completed a rotation, and consequently stops 
To illustrate the operation of my improved 
the whole mechanism after one cycle of oper 
register let it be supposed that a sale amount 
ations as described. The '9" is then pressed 
ing to three hundred and ninety dollars and 
in and in the manner before set forth the 
seventeen cents is to be recorded. The print 
print-wheel 55 is rotated to bring the type. 
Wheel 55 stands in the position in which it is 
character 9 to the printing point, is shifted 
always left, that is, in its extreme right-hand 
laterally that it may stand opposite the tens 
position with the 0 opposite the cents column 
column on the tape, and is moved against the 
and clear of the paper, Fig. 2, and the crank. 
tape to produce an impression thereon; and 
13 sands on the side of the stop-pin toward 
the cam137 is advanced one step to bring the 
the observer, reference being had to Fig. 1. 
pinion 127 into engagment with the tens gear 
The crank is then turned until it strikes the 
other side. of the stop-pin, thereby winding 
125; on the return movement of the segment 
32 the print-wheel is rotated backward to 
up the motor spring 0 as indicated in said 
bring the 0 to the printing-point and the pin 
figure. The '3' key is then pressed in there 
by moving the locking-plate 24, causing its 
ion 27 is rotated to add 9 to the amount al 
ready indicated by the hundreds and tes 
arm 23 to lift the detent 20 from the notch in 
wheels of the adding mechanism. The mech 
the disk 18, Figs. 2, 5 and 9, and allowing the 
anism being stopped as befor by the detent 
disk 18 and pinion 16 to move under the in 
20, it is released again by pressing the "0". 
fluence of the motor. The plate 24 immo 
diately springs back, as described, so that the key. In this case the operations are the same 
as before, save that, as the trip-latch 46 strikes 
detent 20 falls again into the notch as soon 
the end of the '0' key as soon as the move 
as the disk 18 and pinion. 16 have completed 
ment begins and cousequently the shaft 39 
one rotation. Diiring this rotation the seg 
is not rotated at all, neither the print-wheel 
ment 32 through the link 31, Fig. 2. is oscil 
55 nor the gear 127 is rotated at all. Never 
lated to and fro, causing a complete rotation 
theless the print-wheel is caused to print a 0 
of the gear 35 and disk 36 first in one direc 
and the gear 127 is properly shifted into en 
tion and then in the other. The shaft 39 is 
carried with the disk 36 during the forward gagement with the units wheel 125. 
The action of the mechanism when the "1" 
rotation until the trip-latch 46 strikes the in 
and 7 keys are operated need not be fur 
ner end of the '3' key and lifts the dog 38 
ther described except to note that during the 
from the notch in the disk 36 and locks it in 
final movement of the mechanism the notoh 
the star plate 47, Figs. 2 and 4. Through the 
104 in the disk 103 moves under the finger 
described connections from the shaft 39, Fig. 
102 allowing the lower end 99 of the lever, 97 
1, the print-wheel 55 is thus rotated to bring 
to stand in the path of the arun 101 so as to 
the type-character 3 to the printing point and 
be struck thereby just as the movement is 
is there stopped. At the some time. the os 
completed thereby advancing the paper after 
cillation of the shaft 33 to which the segment 
the final imprint has been made. It will be 
32 is secured, through the pawl 74, ratchet 
evident, that, in case one figure was to be re 
wheel 73, cam 71, arm 69, shaft. 59, fork 58 
peated one or more times, as in 222, 00, the 
and arm 57, shifts the print-wheel. 55 later 
same key must be operated two or more times 
ally to bring the type-character 3 opposite 
the hundreds column. Just at the comple 
in succession. 
In my said Patent No. 443,024, heretofore 
tion of the forward movement of the shaft 
33, which is synchronous with the forward 
referred to; the locking-plate 24 was shifted 
by each key previously operated, there being 
movement of the gear 35, thearin 66 strikes 
no occasion to operate one key two or more 
and raises the spindle 61 and throws the print 
times in succession. In the present case, 
wheel against the paper as it passes over 
therefore, independent means must be pro 
the impression and driving roll 83. On the 
vided to release any key upon the completioh 
return movement of the pinion 35 and disk 
of the round of movements established by its 
36 the dog 38 drops into the notch in the disk 
 
45 
SO 
S5 
go 
95 
OC 
to5 
O 
IIs 
(25 
30 
512,640 
- 
t 
O 
IS 
25 
30 
 
. 
operation. To this end, on that side of the 
being mounted to swing upon a pivot in planes 
notch 19 in the disk 18 which first reaches 
both parallel with and at right angles to the 
the end of the detent 20, is formed a cam pro 
platen, and incans for rotating the wheel to 
jection 19 which, just before the notch itself 
bring the desired clharacter to printing pos 
reaches the end of the detent, moves said do 
tion and for swinging it upon its pivot paral 
tent sufficiently to shift the plate 24, through. 
lel with the platen, to bring said character to 
the pin 22 and arm 23, and release any key 
different lines of print, and for swinging it at 
held in by it. Should the number to be reg. 
right angles to the platen to cause it to strike 
istered occupy a less number of places that 
the latter and cffect the printing, substan 
the full number which the machine is capa 
tially as described. 
ble of registering the 0 key must be oper. 
3. The combination of a rit-wheel having 
ated successively until the place of the first 
thereon a series of type-figures or characters, 
significant figure is reached, so that a record 
a shaft having a universal joint, and bearing 
of seventeen cents would appear thus, 00017, 
the type-wheel, means to rotate said shaft to 
upoll the paper. 
bring the desired character on the wheel to 
To indicate the amount of each sale for the 
the line of print, an arm supporting the men 
benefit of the customer or for any other rea 
ber of said shaft which bears the print-wheel, 
son, the papermay be so guided from one roll 
means for shifting said arm laterally to cause 
83 to the other 85 as to expose to view the 
the character at tie line of print to stand in 
last record printed thereon. In some cases it 
different lines, and means for causing the. 
may also be desirable to print upon a sepa 
printing impact between said wheel and its 
rate check the amount of each sale. For this 
platen, substantially as shown and described. 
purpose a check printing wheel 140 is sup 
4. The combination of a print-wheel having 
ported and geared to rotate and move with 
thereou a series of type-figures or characters, 
the print-wheel 55, Fig. 1. I have shown it in 
a shaft having a universal joint and carrying 
the present case as mounted upon the shaft 
said wheel, an arm supporting the free men 
54 below the wheel 55 and as adapted to 
ber of said shaft and itself supported to 
make an impression on a check which may 
swing in a plane parallel with the pline of 
be slipped between itself and a platen 141. 
the paper, means to rotate said shaft and 
For the sake of clearness I have, through 
bring the desired character on the print-wheel 
out the foregoing description, made specific 
to the line of print, means to shift said arm 
mention of the various parts, but it is to be un 
to cause the character at the line of print to 
derstood that I do not thereby limit myself to 
stand in different lines, and neans for CalS 
the exact details of construction shown and de 
ing the printing impact between said wheel 
scribed, as it is obvious that many variations 
and its platen, substantially as shown and de 
tnight be made in the construction without 
departing from the spirit of my invention. 
5. The combination of a print-wheel having 
Furthermore, it is evident that the 
print 
thereou a series of type-figures or characters, 
wheel might be, for each denomination, itself 
a shaft having a universal joint and carrying 
an indicator and that the mechanism for set 
said wheel, an arin supporting the free men. 
ting the wheel to bring the desired character 
ber of said shaft, a support for said arm piv - 
to a certain point is no less applicable to a 
oted to oscillate in a plane parallel with the 
wheel or indicator rotating on a fixed axis 
plane of print and to which support said an 
than to one mounted on a laterally dhovable 
is pivoted to swing in a plane at right angles 
axis. It is therefore to be understood, that 
to the plane of print, means to rotate 8. 
while the term print-wheel' is employed in 
shaft to bring the desired character on the 
the claims hereinafter, it is so employed for 
print-wheel to the line of print, means to shi's 
the sake. of uniformity and as a convenient 
said arm in a plane parallel with the plane 
identification of the part referred to but not 
print, and means to move saidarn in it plane at 
with the intention of restricting the claims in 
right angles to the plane of print, substan 
every case to a wheel used solely for produc 
tially as shown and described. 
ing an impression on paper. 
6. The combination of a print-wheel, a shaft 
I claim as my invention 
having a universal joint and carrying said 
1. The combination of a print wheel bear 
wheel, a transmitting shaft, a gear having a 
ing a series of type figures or characters, and 
clutch connection with said shaft, a series of 
a platen co-operating there with, said wheel 
keys for effecting the disengagement of said 
being mounted to rotate and to swing later 
clutch and different points, means for actu 
ally upon a pivot parallel with the platen, 
ating said gear, an arm supporting the free 
means to rotate said wheel to bring the de 
member of said jointed shaft and pivoted to 
sured type character to printing position, and 
swing in a plane at right angles to the plane 
to swing it laterally to present said character 
of print, a cam-arm and intermediate connect 
at different lines of print, aud means for caus 
tions for swinging said supporting arm, and 
ing printing impact between the wheel and 
means to actuate said cam-arm in synch to: 
platen, substantially as described. 
nism with the movement of said gear, substan 
2. The combination of a print wheel bear. 
tially as shown and described. 
ing a series of type figures or characters, and 
7. The combination of a print-wheel, a shaft 
a laten co-operating there with, said wheel laving a universal joint and carrying Silil 
scribed. 
w 
45 
So 
55 
75 
CO 
( CS 
0. 
I is 
s 
I 25 
33 
512,640 
 
. 
. 
5 
25. 
8 
Wheel, a transnitting shaft, a gear having a 
clutch connection with said shaft, a series of 
keys for effecting the disengagement of said 
glutch at different points, means for actuat 
Sing said gear, an arm supporting the fre 
meinber of said jointed shaft and pivotally 
Supported to swing in a plane parallel with 
the plane of print, a lever connected there 
With a can for acting upon said lever, means 
to to advance said can in synchronism with the 
novements of Said gear, and means for caus 
ing the printing impact between said wheel 
and its platen, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
8. The combination of a print-wheel, a shaft 
for driving said wheel, a gear having a clutch. 
connection with said shaft, a motor for said 
gear, a detent for said motor, a series of keys, 
means intermediate said keys and detent for 
'ao releasing the latter by the operation of auy 
one Qt another of the former, and means if 
termediate said keys and clutch for effecting 
the disengagement of the latter'at different 
points, substantially as shown and described. 
9. The combination of a print-wheel sup 
ported to move in a plane parallel with the 
plan of print, a cam and connections between 
said cam and wheel for shifting said wheel, a 
motorand interinediate gearing for advancing 
said (am, a detent for said motor, a single se. 
ries of keys, and means intermediate said keys 
and detent for releasing the latter. by the op 
eration of any one or another of the former to 
permit the can to move the wheel step by 
step to different lines of print, substantially 
as shown and described. 
10. The coin bination:of a print-wheel sup 
ported to move both parallel and at right 
angles to the plane of print, a cam-arm for 
shifting said wheel, a motor and intermediate 
gearing for actuating said cam-arm, a detent 
for said motor, a series of keys, and means 
intermediate said keys and detent for releas 
ing the latter by the operation of any one or 
another of the former, substantially as shown 
and described. 
ll. The combination of a print-wheel, a no 
tor and an intermediate train of gearing for 
actuating said wheel, a notched disk carried 
by one of the train of gears and having a 
can projection in advance of the notch; a de 
tent lever adapted to engage with said notch 
and to be shifted by said cam projection, a 
series of keys, a locking-plate adapted to en 
gage with and to be shifted by said keys, and 
a connection between said locking-plate and 
said detent lever, substantially as shown and 
described. 
. 
12. The combination-bf a motor, a disk 
driven thereby, a gear segment, a link counec 
tion between said disk and segment, a pinion, 
a print-wheel supported to rotate and to move 
in a plane at right angles with the plane of 
print, means intermediate said pinion and 
wheel for transmitting the rotary movement 
of the forger to the latter and including a 
clutch means for disesgaging said clutch, a 
SS 
So 
40 
35 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
W 85 
cam on the shaft of said gear segment, arid 
means initermediate said cam and said wheel 
to move the latter toward the plane of print, 70 
substantially as shown and described. 
13. The combination of a motor, a disk 
driven thereby, a gear segment; a link con 
nection between said disk and segment, a pin 
ion, a print-wheel supported to rotate and to 75 
move in a plane parallel with the plane of 
print, means intermediate said: pinion and 
wheel for transmitting the rotary in ovement. 
of the former to the latter, and including a 
clutch, means for disengaging said clutch, a 3o 
cam and means intermediate, said segment. 
and said can for advancing the latter, and a 
lever actuated by said cam and adapted to 
shift said wheel, substantially as shown and 
described. 
14. The combination of a print-wheel, a mo 
tor to rotate said wheel to bring the desired 
character to the line of print, a detent hold 
ing the motor in check, a series of keys for . 
releasing the motor and determining the ex. 9o 
tent of movement imparted to the print wheel. 
means to support a record tape or paper to 
receive the imprint of said wheel, a check 
printing wheel connected to rotate with said 
print-wheel, and a platen adapted to support 95 
a check in position to receive the inprint of 
said check-printing wheel, substantially as 
shown and described. 
15. The combination of a paper-feeding roll, 
a ratchet-wheel for driving said roll, an actu 
ating pawl, a lever carrying said pawl, a cam 
for operating said lever, and means for hold 
ing said lever out of the path of said cam, 
substantially as shown and described. 
16. The combination of a paper-feeding roll, 
a ratchet-wheel for driving said roll, an actu 
ating pawl, a lever pivoted to said arm to 
swing in a plane at right angles to the plane 
of movement of said arm, a cam to act upon 
said lever, and means to hold said lever out 
of the path of said cam, substantially as shown 
and described. 
17. The combination of a paper-feeding roll, 
a ratchet-wheel for driving said roll, an actu 
atiug pawl, a pivoted arm carrying said pawl, 
a lever pivoted to said arm to swing in a plane 
at right angles to the plane of movement of 
said arm, and bearing a projecting finger, a 
cam to act upon said lever, and a rotating 
notched disk upon the periphery of which the 
finger of said cam lever is adapted to rest nor 
mally, substantially as shown and described. . 
18. The combination with a spring-pressed 
locking-plate, of a series of spring pressed 
. 
keys; each of said keys being movable in the (25 
line of its axis and formed with two notches 
to be engaged by said locking-plate in thein 
ner and outer positions of the key respct 
lively and the portion of the key between the . 
notches being beveled in both directions, sub- 130 
stantially as shown and described. . 
19. The combination, in a register, of a ser 
ries of adding wheels, an actuating gear mov 
able parallel with the adding wheels to actu 
ros 
Iods 
20 
o 
 
512,640 
9 
75 
95 
do 
IoS 
25 
15 
ate said wheels in succession, a motor and in 
termediate means for rotating said gear and 
successively engaging it with the different 
adding wheels, means for holding the motor 
in check, and a series of keys for releasing 
the motor and controlling its movement of the 
actuating gear, substantially as described. 
20. This combination of a driving member 
or actuating device having a uniform move 
Io ment at each operation of the machine, a 
driven member, means for intermittently con 
necting the driving and driven members, 
a motor for moving the driving member, 
means for holding the motor in check, and a 
series of keys co-operating with the means 
for holding the motor in check to release the 
motor, and with the connecting means be 
tween the driving and driven-members, to de 
termine the extent of mevement imparted 
to the driven member, whereby upon operat 
ing a given key the notor will be released 
aud the driving member, given a full move 
ment and caused to impart to the driven mem 
ber a movement proportionate to the value of 
the operated key. 
21. Th combination of a driving member 
having a uniform movement at each opera 
tion of the machine, a driven member, a latch 
for intermittently connecting them, a spring 
motor for moving the driving member, a de 
tent for holding the motor in check, and a se 
ries of keys co-operating with the detent to 
release the motor and with the latch to de 
termine the extent of movement imparted to 
the driven member, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
22. The combination of a driving meuber 
having a uniform movement at each opera 
tion of the machine, a driven member, a latch 
for intermittently connecting them, a motor 
for moving the driving member, means, as a 
detent, for holding the motor in check, and a 
series of keys of different values co-operating 
with the detent to release the motor, and with 
the latch to disconnect the driving and driven 
members at different points determined by 
the operated keys, substantially as described. 
23. The combination of an oscillatory driv 
ing member having a definite movement at 
each operation of the machine, a driven unem 
ber, means, as a latch, for intermittently con 
necting the driving and driven members, a 
motor for moving the driving member, means, 
as a detent, for holding the motor in check, 
SS and a series of keys of different values co 
operating with the detent to release the mo 
35 
45 
tor, and with the latch to determine the ex 
tent of movement imparted to the driven 
member, substantially as described. 
24. The combination of an oscillatory driv 
ing member unaking a complete revolution in 
opposite directions at each operation of the 
machine, a driven member, a latch for inter 
mittently connecting the driving and driven 
members, a motor for moving the driving 
member, a detent for holding the motor in 
check, and a series of keys of different values 
co-operating with the detent to release the 
motor, and with the latch to determine the 
extent of novement imparted to the drive 
member, substantially as described. 
25. The combination of an oscillatory driv 
ing disk having a notch in its periphery and 
making a complete revolution in opposite di 
rections at each operation of the machine, a 
driven member, a latch moving with the 
driven member and co-operating with the 
notch in the driving disk to intermittently 
connect said disk and the driven member, a 
motor for moving the driving disk, a detent 
for holding the motor in check, and a series 
of keys of different values co-operating with 
the detent to release the motor, and with the 
latch to disconnect the driving and driven 
members at different points determined by 
the operated keys, substantially as described. 
26. The combination of a train of register 
ing wheels mounted upon a shaft and each 
provided with two gear wheels, a train of 
secondary gears nounted upon a parallel 
shaft, each meshing with one of the gears 
upon one of the registering wheels and pro 
vided with a tooth or projection adapted to 
intermittently engage one of the gears upon 
the next higher registering wheel in the train, 
a rotary shaft, a driving gear splined there 
on and movable into engagement with the 
different secondary gears, a cam for sliding 
the driving gear along its shaft to successively 
engage it with the different secondary gears, 
a motor, and means intermediate the motor 
and the cam and rotary shaft for rotating the 
driving pinion and moving it into engage 
ment with the different. gears, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
- 
CARI, W. WEISS. 
Witnesses: 
A. N. JESBERA, 
E. A. GREELEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512741.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 512,741. 
J. T. O. ORTL OFF. 
B00K STAPLING MACHINE, 
Patented Jan. 16, 1894. 
w 
Y. 
 
20/77 esses; 
w 
A 26-4er. 
%iz 64%er 
Vra perfor 
Media seedor, to 
di. 
rio, 4 
4. 24 
A torney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS THEODOR OTTO ORTLOFF, OF HEIDELBERG, GERMANY. 
BOOK-STAPLNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,741, dated January 16, 1894. 
Application filed August 12, 1893. Serial No. 483,042, (No model.) Patented in Germany July 4, 1891, No. 63,254, and in 
France November 12, 1891, No,217,393, 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JULIUS THEODOROTTO 
ORTLOFF, a subject of the Grand Duke of Ba 
den, and a resident of Heidelberg, in the Grand 
Duchy of Baden, Empire of Germany, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Book-Stapling Machines, with a device for 
putting the sheets on and off, (for which pat 
ents have been obtained in Germany, No. 
63,254, dated July 4, 1891, and in France, No. 
217,393, dated November 12, 1891) of which 
the following is an exact specification. 
My invention relates to a book-stapling ma 
chine, which is provided with a device for 
putting the sheets on and off and constructed 
in such a manner that the sheets are first 
Stapled and thenfolded. By this arrangement 
the efficiency of my machine is much greater 
than is the case in stapling-machines with a 
Separated folding-machine, because in my ma 
chine simultaneously one sheet is stapled and 
another folded. This resultis attained by the 
arrangement of feeding-rollers, serving for 
conducting the sheets to the stapling mechan 
ism, and offolding-rollers,by which the sheets, 
after having been stapled, are folded together. 
The latter circumstance is highly important 
for sheets, which must be quickly folded, suc 
as newspapers, pamphlets and so on. 
In order to make my invention more clear, I 
refer to the accompanying drawings, in which 
similar letters denote similar parts through 
out the different views and in which 
Figure 1 is a side-view. Fig. 2 is a front 
view of my improved machine. Fig. 3 shows 
the heads for forming the staples in two dif 
ferent positions. 
In carrying my invention into effect, I 
construct my machine in the following man 
Z is the frame of the machine having at its 
upper end a crankshaft A supported by suit 
able bearings and driven by a pulley P. At 
the free end of the crank shaft. A there is 
secured a crank lever L attached to the slide 
K', which, together with the head K, is guided 
in the guide-pieces O' O of arm O, the latter 
forming part of frame Z. The staples are 
formed in the head K. Opposite to this lat 
ter, there are arranged between the guide 
pieces N' N* fixed to the arm N of frame Z, 
the anvil U and the slide U", which latter is 
likewise fixed at a crank lever M and moved 
by a crank shaft Bfrom a pulley Econnected 
with the pulley E of the crank shaft Aby 
means of the belt C. The head Userves for 
bending the staples and for holding the paper 
during the stapling process. The head K and , 
the anvil U are connected with the slides K' 
and U' respectively by angular pieces Q and 
T pivoted at the arms O and N of the frame 
Z and having slots a, b and cd, in which the 
pins ef and g h attached to the heads K and 
U are sliding. 
XX' are two upright arms of the frame of 
which X supports two feeding rollers W. W.' 
serving for leading the sheets of paper from 
the table T' to the stapling device by means 
of the endless band Y guided over the roller 
W and the folding roller F. The rollers W 
W' are rotated from the pulley Econnected 
with the pulley E' on shaft A by the endless 
band C. 
The double armed lever W pivoted in the 
center of folding roller F is operated by the 
cam-shaped roller F and serves for raising 
the sheets a little before being folded. 
G G' is a double-armed folding-lever piv 
oted to the arm O and provided with the fold 
ing knife J. This lever G G' is actuated by 
the cam G. 
W' is a stop for securing the position of the 
sheets to be folded. 
The manner of operation of the machine is 
as follows: The sheets are put from the table 
Tibetween the feeding rollers WW' and con 
veyed to the anvilly and head K by the end 
less band Y. By the movements of the head 
K and anvil U, as shown in Fig. 3 of the 
drawings, the sheets are stapled and then led 
to the folding rollers FF. Here the folding 
knife J presses the sheets between the rollers 
F and F and thereby folds them together in 
the manner illustrated by Fig. 1. 
of construction shown in the drawings, as I 
may arrange of course more than twofolding 
rollers before or behind the stapling device 
and employ several anvils U and heads K. 
Therefore, 
I do not confine myself to the exact form 95 
OO 
3O 
35 
45 
and F and between head K and anvil U, the 
latter two being connected with the slides K. 
and U" by levers Q and Thaving slots a, b and 
c d, pins e h fixed to the head and anvil tak 
ing into the slots at and d respectively, and 
pins f g fixed to the slides taking into the 
slots band c respectively, a folding knife I 
secured to double-armed levers G G being ar 
ranged above the space between the delivery 
rollers, said lever being actuated by cam G* 
on the main shaft A, for the purpose as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
JULIUS THEODOR OTTO ORTLOFF 
25 
JAKOB LANG, 
JOHANN HOFFMANN. 
512,741 
What I desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States is 
1. In a book-stapling machine, the combina 
tion with the stapling device proper of feed 
rollers W. W., arranged one above the other, 
delivery rollers FF arranged one in front of 
the other, and transporting bands Y running 
over the rollers W and F and between head 
K and anvil U of the stapling device, a fold 
ing-knife I secured to arm G being arranged 
above the space between the delivery rollers, 
for the purpose as described. 
2. In a book stapling machine, the combina 
tion with the staple-forming-headlKand the sta. 
ple-bending-anvill J, held and moved by slides 
K' and U' respectively, of feed-rollers W. W.' 
arranged one above the other, delivery-rollers 
F Farranged one in front of the other, trans 
porting bands Y running over the rollers W 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512841.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 512,841. 
 
J. R. PHELPS. 
ARTIFICIAL TOOTH CROWN. 
Patented Jan. 16, 1894. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES R. PHELPS, OF MARYSVILLE, CALIFORNIA. 
ARTIFICIAL Tooth-CROWN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,841, dated January 16, 1894. 
- 
Application filed August 17, 1893, Serial No. 483,880, (No model.) 
55 
75 
. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMESR. PHELPS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Marys 
ville, Yuba county, State of California, have 
invented an Improvement in Artificial Tooth 
Crowns and Attachment; and I hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the same. 
My invention relates to artificial tooth 
COWS 
It consists in certain improvements in the 
manufacture of said crowns With a metal base, 
band, and backing, and in certain details of 
construction which will be more fully ex 
plained by reference to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a bottom perspective view of . 
the attachment and incisor tooth. Fig. 2 
shows the back and opening. Fig. 3 shows 
the post and opening from below. Fig. 4 is a 
vertical section. Figs. 5, 6,7 and 8 are views 
of molars with the attachment. Fig. 9 is a 
vertical section of the attachment and post 
without the tooth. Fig. 10 is a rear perspec 
tive showing the opening in back. Fig. 11 is 
a vertical section showing the extension of 
the back to form a tip to the tooth crown. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved method of preparing artificial tooth 
crowns with a metallic backing and base at 
tachments thereto in readiness to be fitted, 
and in such a manner that the teeth and the 
metallic attachments may be kept in stock at 
all times, and ready for application with the 
minimum amount of fitting. 
In the manufacture of artificial teeth, it has 
hitherto been the custom to form the porce 
lain tooth crowns with pins projecting there 
from, which pins are set into the material of 
which the tooth crown is made while in a 
plastic condition, and secured when the ma 
terial is baked, leaving the ends of the pin 
slightly projecting. To the ends of these pins 
is fixed a metallic backing extending down 
wardly toward the base of the tooth crown, 
and forming a post. A band is fitted over 
the root to which the tooth is to be applied, 
and the tooth is fitted into the band while the 
post or pin is made to fit into a prepared cav 
ity in the root. All this work is specially 
done and fitted in each particular case, and 
occupies a great deal of time, both of the sur 
geon and patient. 
- 
By my invention I construct the backing, 
band, and base and secure them to the porce 
lain or artificial tooth crown by the single 
operation of casting, leaving the band of such 
form that it is easily fitted in any particular 
case to the root to which it is to be applied by 
swaging or otherwise, and the operation of 
fitting such tooth crowns is very easily ef 
fected. 
The particular crown. A which is to be fitted 
is placed in a plaster-of-paris, metal, or other 
suitable matrix previously formed which is 
of the shape of the crown and the proposed 
backing, base and band. The tooth crown is 
fitted into that part of the cavity in the molds 
prepared for it, and the metal is then poured 
into the mold and flowing around that part 
prepared to form the back, base and band, 
fills the molds and attaches itself firmly to 
the pins which project from the back at the 
tooth crown, or in the undercuts in the crown, 
thus forming the backing, base and band in 
The post by which the 
a single operation. 
tooth crown is secured to the root is placed 
in the mold before the casting takes place, 
and the post is firmly secured when the mol 
ten metalis poured into the mold. The bands 
which project downwardly are adapted to 
surround the root to which the crown is to be 
applied. In some cases it is desirable to form 
these backings with an opening extending up 
through the top and rear portion behind the 
tooth crown or front so that when the crown 
is secured to the root by means of the cement 
filling, the crown being pressed down, the 
band fitting outside and around the root, any 
surplus amount will pass up through this 
opening, thus allowing the crown to fit down 
to its proper position upon the root, where it 
is secured when the cement filling has be 
come set. I also make in one piece the back 
ing, band and base, without attaching the 
crown thereto, either by casting or swaging, 
and with or Without the post, in readiness for 
the attachment of the tooth crown, either by 
amalgam, cement or soldering, so that these 
parts may also be kept in stock, and in readi 
ness to be put together for any required use, 
as shown in Figs. 9 and 10. The construction 
95 
Od 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
512,841 
is seldom so perfect as to prevent the upper 
edge of the band from standing off from the 3o 
artificial tooth, presenting a clumsy appear 
ance and providing a receptacle for the lodg 
ment of foreign substances or secretions. I 
am also aware that the post has been made 
for attachment to artificial crowns, but with 
out any band attachment to fit down around 
the root of the natural tooth. I do not claim 
either of these constructions, but 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. As an article of manufacture, an arti 
ficial tooth crown consisting of a metal base, 
band and backing cast in one piece and upon 
and around the tooth crown in a single oper 
ation. 
2. As an improvement in artificial tooth 
crown attachments, a metallic base, band and 
backing cast in one piece said base having an 
integral post. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
So 
45 
35 
40 
'', 
JAMES R. PHELPS, 
Witnesses: 
S.H. NOURSE, 
J. A. BAYLESS. 
above described enables a dentist to keep 
these intermediate connecting metallic parts 
in stock in the same manner as the tooth 
crowns are kept, and they are selected and 
fitted accurately to the root, and the desired 
form of tooth crown is fitted and secured to 
the backing, with but little time or labor. 
I am aware that tooth crowns have been 
made of the artificial porcelain or tooth ma 
terial having concavities in the under surface 
for the purpose of containing a filling of cem 
ent, and holes made through the top of these 
porcelain crowns for the escape of the cement, 
but the concavities are not in the form of a 
band to fit around the root of the tooth, but 
the edges of the artificial crown simply fit 
upon the top of the remaining root and do 
not surround it. I am also aware that a band 
has been made and fitted around the tooth 
root, an artificial tooth fitted into the band, 
with a post running downward, said post set 
into the prepared nerve chamber of the tooth 
root, allowing the artificial tooth to fit down 
within the band, the whole being secured to 
gether, and in place by means of cements or 
amalgams, but the band is made separate and 
apart from the artificial tooth and post and 
requires a great amount of adjustment which 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US512941.txt	A, BOTKIN. 
COMBINATION TRUNK, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 16, 1894, 
No Model.) 
No. 512,94l, 
 
is zea Asiao, 
Lea & 22 
a22,252 
2e22ee area 
2.e 2. 
WITWESSES; 
d o, feelaar 
34-3-3-6 
 
INVENTOR 
/2-43/ 
2-/64u. 6 
AT TORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
A. BOTKIN. 
COMBINATION TRUNK, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2 
No. 512,941, 
Patented Jan, 16, 1894, 
 
/MVENTOR 
/734a/ 
2-/6m 6 
ATTORNEYS, 
(No Model.) 
A. BOTKIN. 
COMBINATION TRUNK, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 512,941, 
- 
Patented Jan. l6, l894. 
 
ATTORNEYS. 
WASNGTom, D, c, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM BOTKIN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
COMBINATION-TRUNK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 512,941, dated January 16, 1894. 
Application filed March 1, 1893, Serial No. 464,157, (No model.) 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern. 
is a perspective view of the trunk body and 
Beit known that I, ABRAHAM BOTKIN, of 
top, showing the sections of the latter closed 
New York city, in the county and State of New 
and elevated, and also illustrating the seat. 
York, have invented a new and Improved 
withdrawn from the body; and Fig. 10 is a 
Combined Trunk, Bed, Table, and Chair, of 
perspective view of the trunk body and top 
Which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
when the latter is supported in position for 
description. 
use as a table. 
My invention relates to an article of furni 
The body portion. A cf the device, is con 
ture Which embodies a trunk capable of use 
structed substantially like the body of a trunk, 
as such, a bed, and a seat or chair, and the 
and the top of the body is usually closed by 
top of the trunk is so constructed that it may 
a lid 10. The front and back of the body A, 
be utilized as a table when required. 
are usually made quite thick, in order that 
Another object of the invention is to con 
in the rear side portion, near each end, a Ver 
tical channel or opening 11 may be produced 
Struct the article of furniture in such a man 
ner that it will be convenient of manipula 
for the reception of posts 12. The openings 
tion, and whereby when it is in condition for 
are usually rectangular in cross section, and 
transportation it will have the appearance of 
the posts are of correspondingly shaped cross 
an ordinary trunk. 
sectional contour. The posts are capable of 
sliding freely in the openings, and each post 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several 
is provided with a latch 13, as shown in Fig. 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth 
6, whereby it may be held at its upper por 
and pointed out in the claims. 
tion some distance above the body portion A. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
In Fig. 6 the form of latch is a strip of 
drawings forming a part of this specification, 
spring metal attached to the post, which When 
in which similar figures and letters of refer. 
the post is slid downward is closed in tight 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
to it, but when the post is moved upward a 
views, 
sufficient distance to free the plate, the lower 
Figure 1 is a partial side elevation and par 
end of the strip will spring outward and rest 
upon the top edge of the body. 
tial Sectional view of the article of furniture, 
ShOWing the top of the trunk opened out for 
The top B of the device is connected di 
the support of the bed. Fig. 2 is a plan view 
rectly with the tops of the posts 12, and this 
of the article of furniture as it appears in 
connection is effected through the medium 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section taken 
of hinges 14, one leaf of each hinge being Se 
On the line 3-3 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a central 
cured to the under face of the cover, as shown 
Vertical transverse section through the trunk 
in Fig. 7. The other leaf of each hinge is se 
When it is folded for transportation. Fig. 5 
cured to the top of the posts 12. Thus when 
is an enlarged perspective view of one end of 
the cover is raised the posts are carried in 
the article of furniture when it is in position 
the same direction. 
for use as a bed, the view being enlarged to 
The cover B, is preferably made in three 
show the construction of the bedstead. Fig. 
sections, comprising an inner base section 15 
6 is a perspective view of one corner of the 
and two upper Sections 16 and 17, the upper 
article of furniture, illustrating the top ele 
sections being hinged to the end portions of 
Wated so as to form a table, and illustrating 
the base section and the two upper sections 
the manner in which the top is held in its 
when folded over the base section to a positive 
elevated position. Fig. 7 is a perspective 
contact thereWith, have an interlocking Con 
view of one corner of the trunk body and top, 
nection over the center of the base, as shown 
showing the manner in which the top is con 
in the drawings. Ordinarily the inner ends 
nected with the body. Fig. 8 is a section 
of the top sections 16 and 17 are beveled, so 
taken through the body, on the line 8-8 in 
that one end will fit neatly over the other. 
Fig. 10, showing the manner in which the seat 
When the upper sections of the cover are 
is connected therewith and operated. Fig. 9 folded upon the base section, the top appar 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
512,941 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
ently is the same as the top of an ordinary 
trunk; but the depth of the top may be va 
ried as occasion may demand. 
The top B, is preferably provided with a 
keeper 18, to engage with an ordinary lock, 
located in the body A, but any form of lock 
may be employed to secure the cover in a 
closed position upon the body, as locks 19 of 
any approved type are likewise used to lock 
the upper portion of the cover in a folded po 
sition upon the base section. When the top 
is folded out, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, it is 
adapted to hold a mattress and constitute a 
bed, and to that end a head board 20, is piv 
oted in one section of the cover, for example, 
the outer section 17, near the outer end of 
that section, and a foot board 21, is pivoted 
in a corresponding manner in the other fold 
ing section 16, as is likewise shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. The head and foot boards are of such 
shape that when not required for use they 
may be folded down within the sections to 
which they are pivoted, as shown in Fig. 4. 
Likewise, both the base and the top or outer 
Sections 16 and 17 of the cover are provided 
with a series of springs 22, the springs being 
attached to what is the bottom portion of all 
of the cover sections when the sections are 
folded out for use as a bed; and upon these 
springs, the mattress, which may be quite 
thin, is placed, the springs supporting the 
mattress, and the ends of the mattress are 
made to approach the head and foot boards 
20 and 21 when the latter are carried up to a 
vertical position. 
When the bed is not needed the mattress 
may be removed and the head and foot boards 
are folded within the cover sections. The 
two top sections 6 and 17, are then folded 
Over upon the base section of the cover and 
locked to the base, as shown in Fig. 4. The 
entire cover may now be thrown backward 
in like manner to an ordinary trunk, and the 
contents of the trunk may be readily viewed 
or removed by raising the lid 10. It will be 
understood that if in practice it is found ad 
visable, the cover sections may be made deep 
enough to admit of a thin mattress remaining 
therein upon the springs when the sections 
are folded one upon the other. 
When it is desired to utilize the cover of 
the device as a table, the cover B is lifted up, 
carrying the posts with it, until the latches 
13, find a bearing upon the upper edge of the 
body, as shown in Fig. 6, and then the for 
ward portion of the cover is supported by 
means of a leg 31, which is preferably fitted 
upon the top central portion of the lid 10, and 
this leg may be given a T-shape, as shown in 
Fig. 9. If in practice it is found desirable 
an additional leg 32, may be hinged to the 
central under portion of the cover to support 
that portion of it when the coveris to be ele 
wated and used as a table. 
In addition to the trunk, table and bed 
above described, a seat D, is added in the con 
struction of the device, and this seat forms a 
 
95 
O 
OC 
portion of the body section A. To that end, 
at one corner of the front portion of the 
body, in the front face thereof a recess 38, is 
produced. At the top portion of the recess a 
panel 34, is hinged, the said panel being SO 
connected with the upper wall of the recess 
that it is capable of being dropped to aper 
pendicular position and of completely filling 
and hiding the recess 33. When the panel 
is in its perpendicular position it is flush with 
the front face of the body A, as shown in 
Fig. 10. 
Near the lower edge of the panel two legs 
35, are pivoted. These legs when in use Sup 
port the panel when in a horizontal position, 
producing thereby a comfortable seat as 
shown in Figs. 8 and 9. When the seat is not 
in use the legs are folded up to an engage 
ment with the under face of the panel, and 
when the panel enters its recess 38 the legs 
enter deeper recesses 36, produced in the per 
pendicular wall of the main recess 33. 
An article of furniture constructed as above 
set forth is exceedingly convenient, as for ex 
ample, when used by a traveling salesman a 
bed may be readily made up when hotelag 
commodations are not to be had or are diffi 
cult to obtain; and, further, the cover of the 
device may be elevated to form a table upon 
which to display samples, while a seat is also 
provided, enabling the person displaying the 
samples, or looking them over, to rest while do 
ing so. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. An article of manufacture, comprising 
mainly a body and cover, the cover having a 
hinged and avertically sliding connection with 
the body, and the latter being adapted for use 
for the storage of articles, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. An article of the character described, 
comprising a body adapted for use for the 
storage of articles, posts constructed to slide 
within the body, a cover having a hinged con 
nection with the said posts, and means for 
holding the posts in position, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. An article of the character described, 
comprising a body adapted for use for the 
storage of articles, posts constructed to slide 
within the body, a cover having a hinged con 
nection with the said posts, latches for hold 
ing the posts in position, and a pivoted leg 
adapted to extend between the body and the 
cover to support the latter at its forward end, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. An article of the character described, 
comprising a body adapted for use for the 
storage of articles, a cover capable of a verti 
cal movement in relation to the body and hav 
ing a hinged connection therewith, and a seat 
provided with folding legs and pivoted to the 
body to enter a recess provided in the outer 
face thereof, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
O 
75 
IoS 
IO 
II5 
I25 
512,941 
25 
30 
35 
a mattress, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
7. An article of the character described, con 
sisting of a trunk-like body and a cover Com 
prising a base section adapted to fit on the 
top of the body, and two upper sections hav 
ing hinged connections with the ends of the 
base section and adapted to fold over the base 
section to be in contact there with and to in 
terlock with their free ends over the center of 
the base, said upper sections being also capa 
ble of being brought into longitudinal align 
ment with the base section, the said sections 
being recessed to form a frame adapted for 
the reception of a mattress, springs secured 
within the sections of the cover, and means 
for locking the said sections the one upon the 
other, substantially as described. 
ABRAHAM BOTKIN. 
Witnesses: 
J. FRED. ACKER, 
E. M. CLARK. 
O 
5. An article of the character described, 
comprising a body adapted for use for the 
Storage of articles, a cover adapted to form a 
table, and a seat having legs hinged thereto 
at the forward portion thereof, the said body 
being provided in its outer face with a recess 
adapted for the reception of the seat, and 
With deeper recesses for the reception of the 
legs, and the seat being hinged to the body 
in the upper portion of the said recess so that 
When the seat is folded into the recess, the 
upper face of the seat is flush with the outer 
face of the body, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
6. In an article of the character described, 
a COVer Comprising a base section and two up 
per Sections having hinged connections with 
the ends of the base section and adapted to 
be brought into longitudinal alignment with 
the said base section, the aggregate length of 
the upper sections being equal to that of the 
base section, the said sections being recessed 
to form a frame adapted for the reception of 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513041.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 513,041, 
 
J. H., FULTON. 
CHURN DASHER, 
Patented Jan. 16, 1894, 
 
 
SS2S 
WA: 
/6.se/7/2/7, 7%ave 
c-(w 
the National ITHocaRAPHING coMPANY., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. H. FULTON, OF WEST LEBANON, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-FIFTHS TO 
WILLIAM R. HAMILTON, OF INDIANA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CHURN DASHER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 51 3,041, dated January 16, 1894. 
Application filed June 15, 1893, Serial No. 477,675. (No model.) 
To aid whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. H. FULTON, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resid 
ing at West Lebanon, in the county of Indi 
ana and State of Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Churn-Dashers; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
churn-dashers; and it consists in providing 
the upper end of the dasher-staff with a sleeve 
which is mounted thereon so that said dasher 
staff can rotate or be rigidly connected there 
to, for the purpose to be hereinafter set forth, 
to the lower end of the dasher-staff being at 
tached the blades and a conical sleeve or fer 
rule. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view of a churn-dasher constructed 
in accordance with my improvements, and 
Fig. 2 is a side view of the upper part of the 
dasher-staff, partly in section. 
A designates the dasher-staff the upper part 
of which is reduced to present a portion B of 
less diameter than the other part of the staff 
and circular bearing surfaces b and b'. 
In 
the upper end of the dasher-staff is an aper 
ture which is threaded to receive the thumb 
screw d. 
C designates a sleeve which is adapted to 
fit loosely over the portions b and b' of the 
dasher-staff and is held thereon by the thumb 
screw d, a washer being placed between the 
head of the thumb-screw and end of the sleeve. 
E designates the dasher the blades of which 
are secured to the lower end of the staff at 
right angles with each other. The parts of 
each blade beyond the staff are cut away on 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
fo 
65 
75 
opposite sides, as shown, to provide oblique 
surfaces g g while the edges h. h. are slightly 
beveled. 
G designates a conical sleeve or ferrule 
which is secured to the lower end of the dasher 
staff immediately above the blades. The ob 
ject of this conical sleeve or ferrule is to part 
the cream and force it out upon the oblique 
faces of the blades. 
In operation, the thumb-screw is loosened, 
and the operator grasps the sleeve and forces 
the dasher down, which movement will not 
turn said dasher as the under side of the 
blades are flat, but on the upstroke the blades 
will be revolved on account of the oblique up 
per surfaces thereof, the dasher-staff revolv 
ing within the sleeve. After the cream has 
been sufficiently churned the thumb-screw 
can be turned to rigidly connect the sleeve to 
the dasher-staff, thus making a rigid dasher 
to use in gathering the butter. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In combination with a dasher-staff Ahav 
ing a reduced upper end to provide bearing 
surfaces b and band a dasher rigidly secured 
thereto, of a sleeve carried by the upper end 
of the staff, and means substantially as shown 
for rigidly connecting the sleeve and staff. 
2. In combination with a dasher-staff and 
dasher, the upper end of the dasher-staff hav 
ing a thumb-screw arid washer, a sleeve C 
mounted on the upper part of the dasher 
staff, and held thereon by the thumb-screw 
and washer, the dasherstaff having a reduced 
portion B to provide bearing surfaces b and 
b', substantially as shown, and for the pur- . 
pose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH. H. EULTON. 
Witnesses: 
W. W. CouLTER, 
J. M.REED, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513142.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 513,142, 
S. H. REDMOND. 
MUSIC LEAF TURNER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 23, 1894, 
A s' 
e sp 
WITYESSES 
y BSRyers 
IY2/AY707 
2%, V (2,n-C 
 
(No Model.) 
S. H. REDMOND, 
MUSIC LEAF TURNER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 513,142, 
Patented Jan. 23, 1894. 
rte NationAL LTamrapanes comes 
WANope, s. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIBLEY H. REDMOND, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
MUSC LEAF TURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 513,142, dated January 23, 1894. 
Application filed August 7, 1893, Serial No. 482,632, (No model,) 
Be it known that I, SIBLEY II. REDMOND, 
upright position. A little ways from the ends 
To all vi?ion, it nucly conce772: 
of these extensions, C, and Ct', and firmly fas 
a citizen of the United States, residing at De- tened thereto, are two spring clamps, one only 
troit, county of Wayne, State of Michigan, being seen at a in Fig. 1, adapted to receive 
have invented a certain new and useful Im- the first and last leaves, as hereinbefore stated. 
Firmly secured to and at the center of the 
provement in Music-Leaf Turner; and I de 
frame A, are the two disks, B and B', with a 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en- semicircular front, which may be formed of 
able others skilled in the art to which it per- one piece, or may be made separately; the 
tains to make and use the same, reference be. former is preferred, however, as it affords 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, which better means for fastening them to the frame 
form a part of this specification. 
A, by means of the portion b, which joins the 
My invention relates to music leaf turning two disks B, and B'. These disks are bent 
devices, and it consists in the improved com- at right angles to the portion b, extending out 
bination and construction hereinafter de- toward the operator and lying parallel to each 
scribed, whereby a simple and effective ar- other. 
rangement is provided that will enable the 
Secured to the frame A, at c c' is the cylin 
performer to rapidly and readily turn the drical apron, C, which fits outside the periph 
leaves with little more exertion or movement ery of the lower disk B', and having its up 
than is required to depress one of the keys per edge extending almost to the upper disk B, 
of the piano. 
while the lower edge is ornamented in any 
It has for its object the improvement in the suitable way, and extends below the lower 
construction and mode of operation of this disk B to conceal the releasing mechanism 
attached to the under side of the disk B'. It 
class of devices. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective Will be readily seen that the portion lb, the 
view of my improved device as applied to a disks B B', and the apron C form an inclos 
piano. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the music ure for the operating parts of my device. 
holding device. Fig. 3 is a section on the 
Joining the disks B B at the center of the 
line ac-ac of Fig. 2. Figs. 4 and 5 are per- semicircle is the shaft D, on which are hinged 
spectives of the attachments used when oper- the several arms d, d', d', d', d'; the arm d 
ating my device with the foot. Fig. 6 is a having its bearings on the shaft at the two ex 
perspective view of the clamp used for hold- treme ends; next, the arm d" has its bearings 
ing my leaf turner on a music rack. Fig. 7 on the shaft just inside of the bearing on the 
shows in elevation the Swinging arms and arm d, and so on in their order, until the 
their actuating springs. Fig. 8 is a perspec- whole space between the two outer bearings 
tive view of the leaf holder. Fig. 9 is a plan is filled. 
view of one of the springs under tension, show- 
To the rear of the shaft D is another shaft, 
ing the method of holding same. Fig.10 is a D', which is slotted longitudinally at inter 
perspective view showing the releasing bolt, vals to receive one end of several springs, it 
its operating lever, and the method of ad-being necessary to use one spring for each 
justing the same. Fig.11 is a section on the leaf turning arm, and, as the operation of each 
line ac'-ac' in Fig. 10. Fig. 12 is an inverted arm and spring is the same, it will be deemed 
plan of the bottom, showing the releasing sufficient to describe the first one. 
bolt and the method of holding the arm. Fig. 
The arm d, as above Stated, is hinged at 
the two extreme ends of the shaft D; the ex 
13 is a section on the line f-ly of Fig. 12. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts. 
tensions, e, e, of the two hinges lie parallel 
In the drawings, A represents the main to each other, and are joined together by 
frame or support, preferably made of sheet means of the two vertical pieces, f and f'; 
metal. This frame is extended to the right the piece fjoins the two extensions very near 
the shaft D, while the piece f' joins them out 
and left at Cl, a', to provide means for hold 
from the center and just inside of the apron 
ing the first and last sheets of music, as well 
C. From this point the upper extension is 
as forming supports to hold the device in an 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
85 
90 
OO 
 
3. 
- 
5l3,42 
20 the point h. 
continued out through the slot formed by the 
upper edge of the apron C and outer edge of 
the disk B, and terminating at a distance 
governed by the size of the leaf required to 
5 be turned. At the extreme outer end, g, of 
the arm dis secured one of the spring clamps 
hereinbefore mentioned. 
The spring his secured to the slotted shaft 
D' at g'. Shown in Fig. 9. It is then coiled 
Io around the two shafts D and D as often as 
may be thought necessary to secure sufficient 
tension on the arm through its entire move 
ment, and then secured to the vertical piece 
f' at f. In the vertical piece f', and at or 
15 near the point where it joins the extensione, 
is a depending pin h; this pin may either be 
made of spring metal, and securely fastened 
to the piece f' at its upper end, or, as shown, 
it may be a rigid pin, and loosely hung from 
Just inside of the periphery, in the lower 
disk B', is cut a semi-annular slot, E, adapted 
to receive the lower end of the pins, h., h, h, 
h, and h, in the right hand end of which is 
25 formed a shoulder, is behind this shoulder 
the pins are held by the aid of a flat spring, 
i"; the pins being loosely hinged at their up 
per ends are allowed to swing freely in or out 
from behind the shoulder, i, against the ten 
3o sion of the spring, ', and also as the pins are 
in front of each arm when the arms are 
turned to the extreme right, they firmly hold 
against the tension of the coil springsh, un 
till released by the mechanism attached to 
A plate Fis secured by means of the screws 
b' and b to the under side of the diskB', and 
is so constructed as to form suitable guides 
for the sliding bolt F, adapted to press the 
4o pins out from behind the shoulder i. This 
bolt F is held in place by means of the guides 
c? and c, which are formed by overlapping 
portions of the edges of the plate F. Two 
iugs are formed in a similar manner at i,j. 
45 To the lug is secured one end of a spring b: 
the other end of which bears against the down 
turned end ic of the bolt F. The bolt F has 
formed on it a projection?, that limits its 
movement, by engaging with the lugi' in one 
Interposed between the down-turned por 
tion l of the bolt F and a similar overlapping 
portion l of the plate F, is a flat spring J, 
adapted to hold the bolt against the opposite 
55 guide c, and allow it a free and easy move 
ment, 
While I prefer the form shown for a releas 
ing bolt, I do not wish to limit myself to this 
particular construction, as there are a variety 
do of ways by which this result may be accom 
plished; and I would have it understood that 
any suitable method may be adopted. 
When it is desired to use this device in 
connection with a piano, I attach to the frame 
65 A, with any suitable means, the adjustable 
frame G', adapted to support a bell crankle 
ver K, adapted to operate the releasing bolt. 
so way and the guide c in the other, 
35 the under side of the disk B'. 
This frame is composed of two pieces, H, H'; 
the portion His fastened to the back of the 
frame A, then carried down to a plane level 
with the lower edge of the apron C; thence 
forward where it unites with the portion H' 
to form the sliding joint I, shown in Fig. 10; 
from here H is continued out on the same 
plane for a distance equal to the distance 
from the music rack to the edge of the front 
board on a piano; then it is carried to the 
right and downward to about half the depth 
of the front board I, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The lower end, l, of the frame G' is turned in 
ward and upward, forming a projection to 
which a cushion, l, is attached against the 
front board. On the under side of this frame 
G', and out of sight of the performer, is sup 
ported a bell crank lever, composed of two 
parts K and K. The ends of these portions 
overlap each other, and are flattened on their 
inner sides, thus forming, when brought to 
gether, a round rod, as shown in Fig. 11. At 
this point they are held by means of the tube 
L., which forms a journal for said rod, the 
two parts K and K filling the tube, so that 
the rotation of one, compels a similar move 
ment of the other. The tubeL'is secured to 
the portion H of the frame G' by means of 
the staples m m'. It is evident with this form 
of joint, both in the bell crank lever and its 
supporting frame, that the distance between 
the back A and the end of the frame which 
overhangs the key-board can be easily adjust 
ed. The portion Kof the bell cranklever ex 
tends rearwardly and upwardly through the 
opening m in the portion H of the frame G', 
directly against the downward extending end 
k of the releasing bolt F. The portion Kex 
tends forward to the angle Lin the frame G', 
where it is supported by a staple, u, then is 
bent to the right and extended to the angle M 
of the frame G'; here it is pivotally secured 
to the vertically adjustable extension rod M", 
which is carried down through the opening 
P in the endi, and terminating in a finger 
piece P'. 
If the performer desires to use what is com 
monly known as a music rack, and is playing 
an instrument that requires the entire atten 
tion of both hands, he may readily convert 
this leaf-turner into a foot-operating device, 
by removing the frame G', and in its place 
attaching the angle piece N. Shown in Fig. 4. 
The bell crank lever N is practically the 
Same as the one described in connection with 
the frame G', the adjustable feature being 
omitted, and at the point, r, where the lever 
K" is pivotally secured to the extension rod 
M", it is bent in the form of a hook, r", to en 
gage with a similar hook or eye, r, on the 
upper end of the extension rod N. Shown in 
Fig. 5. The lower end of the adjustable rod 
N' engages a foot lever P. 
- 
A simple and effective method for hold 
ing the music is shown in Figs, 2 and 3. P' 
indicates the back or main support of the 
holder. Attached to this back along one edge 
75 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
y 
 
513,142 
by any suitable means is the strip R, which 
forms an acute angle with the back P', and 
having its ends, S, S', bent at right angles with 
the main body R. Parallel with the back, 
and having its edge meet the raised edge of 
the strip R, is another strip R', its ends, t, t', 
also being bent at right angles to the body R', 
and forming with the ends S and s' a hinge, 
the center pin of which is a square rod which 
passes snugly through similarly formed open 
ings in the ends t and t', and loosely through 
round openings in the stationary ends S, s. 
The square rod S' extends the full length of 
the holder, and has secured to it near the end 
t", and passing up through the hole, i, in the 
strip R', a lever S, adapted to open the jaws 
R, R', against the tension of the spring T, 
which is coiled around the rod S', and adapted 
to hold the swinging jaw R' against the sta 
tionary jaw R. The whole thing may then 
be fastened in any desired way to the back 
A, although I prefer to pivot it there, the 
pivot thus adapting it to be folded when car 
ried. The pivot is placed a little above the 
lower end at T. Just to one side and below 
the pivotal point K, I place a stop at directly 
opposite this stop, on the other side of the 
holder, and a little way from it, I secure a 
lever U adapted to be brought down against 
the holder, thus clamping it against the stop it. 
Having thus described my apparatus, its 
mode of operation is as follows: 
After the device has been secured to the 
piano or music rack by means of the clamp 
shown in Fig. 6, and the music holder secured 
in its upright position, the operator opens the 
jaws R. R.' to engage the back of the music 
by means of the lever S; the cover is then se 
cured back by means of the spring clamps a, 
and the leaves engaged in their order by cor 
responding clamps on the arms d, d", d, d, 
d; the arms and leaves are then swung to the 
right, in the position shown in Fig. 1, where 
they are held by means of the pins h", h", h, 
h", h. When it is desired to turn one of the 
leaves, the performer presses the finger-piece 
P', thereby operating the bell crank lever, 
which in turn moves the bolt F against the 
tension of the spring b. By this movement, 
the end of the bolt, u', is brought against the 
first pin, h', behind the shoulder i, thus re 
leasing it. It is obvious that, the moment the 
pin his released from the shoulder i, the first 
leaf will be quickly carried to the extreme 
left by means of the spring h. It will be 
readily seen that the instant the finger is re 
moved from the key, P', the bell crank lever 
and releasing bolt will be returned to their 
first position, by means of the spring b; and 
the arms are carried forward by their actuat 
ing springs h, thus bringing the pins h, h, h", 
75 up to the shoulder where the second one 
is in a position to be released by the bolt F. 
As the operation of my device in connec 
tion with the foot-operating mechanism is 
practically the same as the operation by hand, 
it is not deemed necessary to describe it. 
The joint in the frame G' and the bellcrank 
lever Kenables me to adjust my device to 
any style of instrument or rack. 
What I claim is 
1. In a music leaf turner, the combination 
of a frame, a music holder adapted to grip 
the music its full length, semi-circular disks, 
a semi-annular slot in one of said disks adapt 
ed to receive pins or lugs secured to swinging 
arms, a shoulder formed at one end of said 
slot, means for holding said pins or lugs be 
hind said shoulder against a tension, a releas 
ing bolt adapted to move said pins or lugs 
from behind said shoulder, a bell crank lever 
adapted to operate said releasing bolt, and . 
means whereby said bell crank lever may be 
operated from a point near the key-board, and 
the music leaves, Substantially as described. 
2. In a music leaf turner, the combination 
of a frame, a music holding device adapted 
to grip the music its full length attached 
thereto, semi circular disks attached to said 
frame and supporting a shaft to which arms 
are secured, suitable means to hold said arms 
against a tension, means whereby said arms 
can be released at the will of the operator, and 
the music leaves, substantially as described. 
3. In a music leaf turner, the combination 
of a frame, a music holder adapted to grip the 
music its full length; disks having semi-cir 
cular fronts adapted to support shafts, said 
bars adapted to receive springs and Swinging 
arms for turning the leaves, depending pins 
adapted to engage in a semi-circular slot in 
one of said disks, a shoulder to hold said pins 
against the tension of said springs, a sliding 
bolt to release said pins from said shoulder, 
and a lever to operate said sliding bolts, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a music leaf turner, a frame, a music 
holding device pivotally secured to said frame, 
said holding device adapted to grip the music 
its full length, disks having a semi-circular 
front, arms hinged at or near the center of 
said semi-circular front and springs adapted 
to carry said arms through an arc of a circle, 
spring clamps at the end of each arm adapted 
to receive and hold a leaf, a pin or lug at 
tached to each arm adapted to engage with a 
shoulder, a bell crank lever to release said 
pins and arms, said bell crank lever adapted 
to be operated at or near the key-board, all 
combined to operate as and for the purpose 
described. 
5. In a music leaf turner, the combination 
of a frame, a music holdersecured thereto and 
adapted to receive the music its full length, 
disks secured to said frame, arms pivotally 
Secured to said disks, said arms adapted to 
engage the leaves, and means whereby said 
arms and leaves are turned through the arc 
of a Semi-circle, a shoulder formed in one of 
said disks for holding the said arms at one 
end of said arc, a bolt to release said arms 
from Said shoulder, with a removable frame 
adapted to support a lever to operate said 
sliding bolt, an adjustable extension rod se 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
o 
75 
90 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
r 25 
I 30 
 
4 
513,142 
o 
cured to said lever, said adjustable rod pro 
vided with means for securing a pedal, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. The combination of a frame adapted to 
receive means for holding the first and last 
leaves and to support the device in an up 
right position, a music holder pivotally se 
cured to said frame whereby it may be folded 
down to be carried, said holder composed of 
two jaws, one stationary and the other adapt 
ed to swing away from said stationary jaw, 
whereby the music may be engaged at full 
length by said jaws, a spring engaging said 
jaws adapted to hold them together, and 
means whereby the said jaws may be opened 
against the tension of said spring, two disks 
having a semi-circular front attached to said 
frame, a semi-cylindrical apron adapted to 
fit outside the periphery of said disks to form 
an inclosure, a shaft inside of said inclosure 
and joining the said disks at the center of 
said semicircle, arms loosely pivoted on said 
shaft and adapted to swing on the arc of said 
O 
15 
semi-circle, spring clamps at the outer end of 
each arm adapted to hold a leaf, means for 
holding said arms at the right hand end of 
said arc, a sliding bolt for releasing said arms, 
whereby said arms are carried through the 
arc of said circle by means of the springs in 
side of said inclosure, a removable adjustable 
frame secured to said main frame and adapt 
ed to support an adjustable bell crank lever, 
said lever adapted to operate said sliding bolt, 
an adjustable extension rod pivotally secured 
to said bell crank lever, said rod adapted to 
be carried down near the key-board of the 
instrument and having formed on the lower 
end a finger-piece to operate said bell crank 
lever, all united to operate substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. . 
, SIBLEY H. REDMOND. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
BENJ. F. GEIGER, 
Mrs. L. E. REDMOND. 
v. . 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513242.txt	(No Model.) 
G. F. MOORE. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1. . 
. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING HEEL STIFFENERS, 
No. 513,242, 
Patented Jan. 23, 1894, 
Witnesses: 
dazed cate 
Wov/a4 & /-ece? 
 
- 
Juventor: 
ity. A 
by 1% 4-4. 
Villoraney. 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
G, F MOORE. 
MACHINE FOR OUTTING HEEL STIFFENERs, 
No, 513,242, 
Patented Jan. 23, 1894. 
 
e E. 
s 
Witnesses: 
faaz (3. c6audevd. 
Iruventor: 
George FMoore, 
Vittorney 
The National tograpHING OFANY., 
 
G. F. MOORE. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING HEEL STIFFENERS. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
G. F. MOORE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
(No Model.) 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING HEEL STIFFENERS, 
No. 513,242, 
Patented Jan, 23, 1894. 
it. 
EID 
III S). Fig. 4. 
ElizzS iSN-N 
NW2-3 
NA M fin 
2 % 
% 
% to 
AME 
o2 
3. N% 2. 
NSSRie 
%2. 
Bis 
RTyrynteyne 
2 
2 
ra 
k 
is e 
 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(Ss2 
. 
N 
 
8. 
 
 
s 
 
fate. 6-6au%a 
vec. 40 & 6. y -2%.O4a. 
Inventor: 
George F. Moore. 
RPeter 
24. a 
aZue. 
(No Model.) 
G. F. MOORE. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING HEEL STIFFENERS. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
No. 513,242, 
Patented Jan. 23, 1894. 
79.6. 
v N 
OS2 
 
 
The National lithographing company. 
wASHINGTor, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE F. MOORE, OF KENNEBUNK, MAINE. 
MACHINE FOR cutting HEEL-STIFFENERs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,242, dated January 23, 1894. 
Application Gled May 9, 1893, Serial No. 473,543, (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE. F. MOORE, of 
Kennebunk, in the county of York and State 
of Maine, have invented certain new and use 
fnl Improvements in Machines for Cutting 
Heel-Stiffeners, of which the following, taken 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings, is a specification. 
My invention relates to machines for cut 
ting heel stiffeners, is an improvement upon 
the invention shown and described in the Let 
ters Patent No. 304,844, granted to me Sep 
tember 9, 1884, and it consists in certain novel 
features of construction, arrangement and 
combination of parts which will be readily un 
derstood by reference to the description of 
the drawings, and to the claims at the end of 
this specification in which my invention is 
clearly pointed out. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
a front elevation of a machine embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the right 
hand side of the same, the left hand side be 
ing a counterpart of said right side. Fig. 3 
is a vertical sectional elevation the cutting 
plane being on line 1, 1, on Fig.2 with certain 
of the parts removed from the left side of said 
figure in order to show parts beyond. Fig. 4 
is a sectional elevation the cutting plane be 
ing on line 2, 2, on Fig. l. Fig. 5 is a partial 
horizontal section on line 3, 3, on Figs. 3 and 
4. Fig. 6 is a plan of the upper portion of the 
main section or body of the machine with the 
head or cutting off section removed. Fig. 7 
is an elevation of the notch cutting knives 
and the guiding fingers on one side of the ma 
chine. Fig. 8 is an elevation of a portion of 
a strip of leather board from which the blanks 
are to be cut. Fig. 9 is a transverse section 
of said strip, and Fig. 10 is an elevation of a 
section of said strip of the proper length to 
be delivered to the mold, and illustrates by 
dotted lines the form of the blank after being 
pressed into said mold and subjected to the 
action of the trimming knife. 
This machine is designed for cutting heel 
stiffener blanks from strips of leather-board, 
which are skived or beveled along their two 
longest and parallel edges both of said skiv 
ings being upon the same side of the material 
as shown in Figs. 8 and 9. 
In order to reduce to the minimum the waste 
- 
. 
of material, in cutting heel stiffener blanks 
it is necessary that said strips of material 
should be separated into sections of the de 
sired length by a series of cuts oblique to the 
edges of the strip alternately in opposite di 
rections as shown in Fig. 10. This was done 
in the machine described in my prior patent 
before cited, but as all of said oblique cuts 
were made by the same knife moving verti 
cally while the material rested upon a horis 
Zontal bed it was necessary to turn the strip 
up side down after each cut, and as the sev 
ered sectious Were all moved in the same di 
rection into the molds and presented to the 
action of the skiving knife without being 
turned over after being severed from the 
strip, it follows, that, in order to have the heel 
stiffeners all alike, when finished, the strips 
of leatherboard had to have their two edges 
chamfered upon opposite sides, and then the 
blank would when finished have its straight 
edge chamfered or skived on one side and its 
curved edge upon the opposite side, or waste 
considerable pnaterial. 
It is very desirable that the skiving should 
all be upon the same side and to accomplish 
this desirable result and at the same time in 
crease the capacity of the machine is the ob 
ject of my present invention. 
In the drawings A, A, are the base sections 
of the side frames connected together by the 
tie girts B, B, and having mounted in suit 
able bearings thereon the driving shaft C and 
the crankshafts C" and C, and having bolted 
thereto the upper sections A, A, of said side 
frames which are connected together at their 
upper ends by the tie girt B'as shown in Figs. 
3 and 4. The shaft C has secured thereon the 
pinion C which engages with and imparts 
motion to the spur gear wheel C, firmly se 
cured upon the crank shaft C, which gear C 
engages with and imparts motion to the gear 
C firmly secured upon the shaft C. The 
shaft C also has mounted thereon a suitable 
driving pulley as D, the shaft C has firmly 
secured upon each end thereof outside of its 
bearings a crank disk D' having set therein 
the crank-pin a, and the shaft C has firmly 
secured on each end thereof a similar crank 
disk D having set therein the crank-pin a' 
as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 4. 
Each of the upper sections A' of the side 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
513,242 
' 
65 
 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
frames has formed in its inner face two guide 
ways or grooves b, inclined to a perpendicular, 
to receive the arms E' of the mold carriage E, 
in such a manner that said carriage may be 
moved up and down therein, said carriage 
having set in each end thereof a stud b' which 
projects outward through the slot t cut 
through said frame, see Figs. 1 and 3, said 
stud having fitted thereon one end of a con 
necting-rod For F" the opposite end of which 
is mounted on a crank-pin a or a? as shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 4. 
A mold E is secured upon the outer face 
of each of the carriages E so as to be movable 
up and down therewith, said mold being con 
structed substantially the same as described 
in my before cited prior patent, except that 
the outer face of the steel rim in this machine 
is straight or in a flat plane instead of curved 
to an arc concentric to the axis of the drum 
which carried it in said prior patent. 
G, G, are cam bars each provided on its in 
ner face with the cam groove G' and pivoted 
at its upper end to the inner face of a frame 
A' and adjustably secured at its lower end to 
said frame by the bolt c which passes through 
the curved slot c' in said bar and is screwed 
into said frame, the set screw c being set in 
the outwardly projecting lip con said bar to 
facilitate a nice adjustment of said bar. 
H is a plate provided with the outwardly 
projecting ribs H', one at each end, which also 
extend below the lower edge of said plate and 
are pivoted at d to the lower ends of the 
arms E' of the carriage E, said ribs having 
secured to their outer edges near their upper 
ends the plate H*, to which is secured the de 
pressor plate H, and said ribs also have se 
cured thereto the sheet metal plate H which 
with the plate H and ribs H' forms a rectan 
gular chute down which the cut blank falls to 
the packing table L. The plate His also pro 
vided with the inwardly projecting ears Hin 
which is mounted the rod J which projects 
outward through said ears and has mounted 
on said projecting ends the anti-friction rolls 
ee which fit into and are acted upon by the 
path G' to vibrate the plate H and the de 
pressor plate H to clamp the piece of mate 
rial in the mold E preparatory to being 
skived to the desired shape, by the knife I' 
adjustably secured to the plate I* by the bolts 
f'f'' when the mold E and carriage E are 
moved downward. 
The plate I* is bolted to the edges of the 
frames A' A' in a fixed position and the knife 
I' is so arranged relative to the mold E and 
the depressor H' as to just clear their outer. 
faces when they are moved downward past 
the cutting edge of said knife. 
The ears H of the plate H have adjustably 
secured thereto, by the pivot pins e' and 
clamping bolts e the arms J J' in which are 
mounted so as to extend from one arm to the 
other the two rods ee upon which are ad 
justably secured the push pins e'e' which 
pass through slots in the carriage E and holes 
in the mold E and serve to push the blank 
out of the mold after it has been cut to the 
desired shape by the knife I and the mold 
has moved upward again till the rolls e, e, 
have passed above the throws in the cam 
paths G' and moved the depressor plate H' 
outward when the stiffener blank will drop 
down the chute between the plates H and H 
until arrested by the plate g, fitted to a bear 
ing on the stand g secured to the inner face 
of the plate H at its lower edge, and movable 
thereon toward and from the center of the 
machine by the action thereon of the arms 
gg firmly secured on the rocker-shaft g' 
mounted in bearings in the ears H, and hav 
ing secured thereon the elbow lever g the 
long arm of which is connected by the spring 
g to the inner end of the stand g while the 
short arm of said elbow lever strikes against 
the inner face of the plate H to limit the 
downward movement of the free end of the 
long arm of said lever as shown in Fig. 3. 
The long arm of the leverg, as the carriage 
approaches the end of its downward move 
ment, strikes the lug h on the slotted tie girt 
K to move it and the arms g g about the axis 
of the rocker shaftg and thus move the plate 
g inward and permit the stiffener blank to 
drop upon the packing table L in front of the 
reciprocating packer L' to which an inter 
mittent reciprocation is imparted by the ac 
tion of the rolls hand h carried by the arms 
hand h' secured upon the shafts C and C 
respectively. 
The frames A' A' are provided at their up 
per ends with the outwardly projecting lips 
i, i extending horizontally across the widths 
of said frames to each of which is fitted a 
grooved bar M so as to be movable endwise 
thereon said bars M M being connected to 
gether by the tie bar M'So as to form a single 
carriage upon which is mounted so as to be 
movable there with the knife carriage N, and 
the female notch-cutting diei. Each grooved 
bar M has formed in the middle of its lower 
edge a notch to receive the upper end of the 
three armed lever M mounted upon a stud 
set in the frame A' as shown in Fig. 4. The 
lever M has adjustably secured thereto by 
means of the clamping bolt k and the set 
screws lc k, the bar Magainst the lower sur 
'face of which the upper ends of the connect 
ing rods F and Falternately act to move the 
lever M'about is axis of motion in opposite 
directions and thus in a reciprocating motion 
to the knife carriage N. 
The tie girt or plate B' has bolted to its up 
per surface two small side frames OO which 
with the gap plate O' and the inclined plate 
O' form an inclosing casing for the front por 
tion of the knife carriage N. The front ends 
of the knife carriage and the side frames O 
O are inclined to the angle that it is desired 
to cut the strip of leather-board in dividing 
it into proper lengths for heel stiffeners and 
the knife carriage has secured to its front in 
clined end the two knives l, l, and the frames 
75 
95 
Oc 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
513,242 
3 
O 
25 
35 
45 
O, O, have secured upon their front inclined 
ends the knives or cutters m m in such a 
manner that they may be adjusted toward or 
from the knives l, l, as shown in Figs. 1. and 5. 
The knife carriage or holder N is composed 
of a top plate n, four pendent inclined ribs in 
n' and n n, and the inclined front plate n 
connecting the front ends of the ribs n n, 
and the plate in has secured therein the steel 
plate in which fits into a groove in the cap 
plate O' by which said knife carriage is 
guided in its lateral movements. 
The tie girt or plate B' is made up of a cen 
tral plate and the two side bars B, B, so 
formed and connected as to form two longi 
tudinal slots B, B, between said central por 
tion and the bars B through which the sev 
ered pieces of leather-board drop after being 
cut from the strip by the cutters l m. Upon 
the inner wall of each of the slots Bis se 
cured the male cutter f' which co-operates 
with the female die or cutteri to cut the notch 
in the center of the length of the flange form 
ing edge of the stiffener blank. The tie plate 
B' also has secured thereto and depending 
therefrom the fingers and i8 which serve to 
guide the piece of material severed from the 
strip by the cutters l, m, as it falls through the 
slot B on its way to the mold E. The bars 
B* Beach has secured thereto two stands o' 
o' in bearings in which is mounted the rocker 
shaft o' upon which are firmly secured the 
pendent arms o o' to which are attached the 
inwardly projecting fingers o, o, which serve 
to arrest the fall of the piece of material at 
the proper point and hold it, when in the po 
sition shown at the left side of Fig. 3, and to 
release it again when moved into the position 
shown at the right of said figure. 
The rocker shafts o' have secured upon one 
end thereof the arms o of the free ends of 
which are connected together by the spring 
o, and the opposite-ends of said shafts have 
secured thereon the arms of which project up 
Ward therefrom and carry at their free ends 
a truck oo, with which the lips pip, project 
ing inward from opposite ends of one of the 
bars M, engage to impart an oscillating mo 
tion to said shafts o' and in co-operation with 
the spring o' cause the fingers O, O, to alter 
nately assume the different positions shown 
in Fig. 3. 
Each of the carriages E has secured upon 
its outer face the two stands q, q, in bearing 
in which is mounted the rectangular recker 
shaft P provided with a frictional collar p' at 
one end and with an arm p' at its opposite 
end which when the carriage E is moved down 
ward engages with the inwardly projecting 
lipp of the stand P to move said shaft about 
its axis in one direction and when the carriage 
is moved upward comes in contact with the 
pin or lug p to move said shaft in the oppo 
site direction. The shaft P has formed there 
in two series of holes in one of each series of 
which is removably secured, so that it can be 
readily changed to either of the other holes 
- 
of its series, the angularly bent finger p which 
Serves as a stop gage to arrest the downward 
movement of the piece of material when in 
propr position to be pressed into the mold 
by the compressor H. 
Q Q are two levers pivoted at r to each of 
the molds E and connected together above. 
said pivots by the spring r the tension of 
which tends to throw the lower ends of said 
levers outward, which lower ends are, at the 
proper time, thrown inward, or toward each 
other, against the tension of said spring, by 
the action of the cams on the inner faces of 
the stands P' and P. upon the plungers irr 
mounted in the bearings irr, secured upon 
said mold, with their inner ends in contact 
with the lower ends of said levers, as shown 
in Fig. 2. 
The tie girt or plate B' has cut through it 
the central transverse slot S between the 
notch forming cuttersji, one side of which is 
inclined and coincides with the inclined bot 
tom of the chute R secured to the under side 
of said girt B as shown in Fig. 4, said chute 
serving to convey the pieces cut out in form 
ing the notches in the center of the blank, to 
one side of the machine. 
To each of the knife holding plates I is se 
cured a broad inclined chute I to receive the 
Waste material cut from the blanks by the 
knife I and convey the same to one side of 
the machine as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
S is a gage provided with the two parallel 
rods S' fitted to bearings in the stands S*S*, 
secured to the upper surface of the tie plate 
B' on opposite sides of the bar M', and ad 
justable in said bearings to determine the 
length of blank to be cut from the strip of 
material shown in Figs. 8 and 9. The bar 
M' has secured thereto or formed in one piece 
there with the push bars' which is movable 
with said bar M and serves to discharge the 
severed piece of material after it is cut from 
the strip and the central notch has been cut 
therein. 
The knife I' is moved upward by the screws 
II, which are threaded in boarings in in 
Wardly projecting ears on the plate I, when 
ever it is desired to adjust said knife on ac 
count of the Wearing away of the same. 
It should be understood that the machine 
illustrated in the drawings is a double ma 
chine, or in other Words that the mechanism 
upon each side of a vertical line drawn 
through the centers of Figs. 1 and 3 are du 
plicates of each other. 
In carrying out the objects of this inven 
tion as set forth herein, the operation of my 
invention is as follows: The several parts of 
the machine being in the positions shown in 
the drawings a strip of material formed as 
shown in Figs. 8 and 9 is inserted end wise 
into the inclined opening t in the front side 
of the head of the machine, see Fig. 1, and 
between the male notch forming cutterf' and 
the rib in of the knife carriage N at the 
right of the central vertical line of Figs, 1 
75 
90 
IO3 
O 
II5 
l 25 
55 
6c 
 
4. 
513,242 
O 
5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
and 3 until its end is in contact with the 
gage Swhen as the shafts C and C and disks 
D' and D are revolved in the directions in 
dicated by the arrows on Fig. 1, and the up 
per end of the connecting-rod F comes in 
contact with the depressed end of the bar M, 
attached to and practically forming a part of 
the knife carriage operating lever M moves 
said lever about its fulcrum and causes the 
knife carriage N to be moved toward the right 
of Fig. 1 and the right hand pair of cutters l 
and m to sever a piece of material from said 
strip by an oblique cut as indicated by the 
dotted line u on Fig. 8. The operator then 
turns the strip of material over and inserts 
its end into the opening t' at the left of the 
center of the head as shown in Fig. 1, as in 
the first case when the reversal of the motion 
of the knife carriage will cause a second piece 
of material to be severed from the strip by an 
oblique cut inclined in a direction opposite 
to that of the previous cut as indicated by the 
dotted line v on Fig. 8. The movement of 
the knife carriage toward the right of Fig. 1 
to sever the first blank causes the reversal of 
the positions of the fingers o', o, and said fin 
gers at the right of Figs. 1 and 3 are thus 
moved into a position to arrest the blank as 
it falls through the slot B. 
When the knife 
carriage is moved toward the left of Figs. 
land 3 the positions of said fingers o' are 
again changed and the blank that is severed 
by said movement of the knife carriage is ar 
rested in its fall by one pair of said fingers 
while the other pair of fingers is withdrawn 
from beneath the blank supported thereby, 
which blank then falls to a position in front 
of, or opposite to, the mold E, being guided 
in said downward movement by the guide fin 
gersjandi, and falling between said mold 
and the depressor plate H, where its down 
ward movement is arrested by the angular 
fingers p, said mold and its carriage being at 
that time at or near the extreme of its upward 
movement. As the carriage E and mold E 
descend the action of the throws of the cam 
path G'upon the rolls e e causes the depressor 
with its carrier to be moved inward and press 
the blank into the mold when a continuation 
of the downward movement of said carriage 
and mold past the edge of the stationary knife 
I' causes all the material which projects be 
yond the face of the steel rim of said mold to 
be cut away and fall upon the chute I. Dur 
ing the latter part of the descent of the car 
riage Eand mold Ethe finger pis withdrawn 
from beneath the blank by the action of the 
lipp upon the arm pand when said carriage 
and mold have been moved upward, till the 
truckse have passed the throw of the cam G', 
the depressor H and the push pins e'e' have 
been moved outward, and the completed stiff 
ener blank is discharged from the mold there 
by and falls down the chute composed of the 
plates H H and ribs Huntil it is arrested by 
the plate g, where it remains until the next 
descent of the carriage E, when the free end of 
the long arm of the elbow leverg strikes the 
lugh, thereby causing the shaftg to be moved 
about its axis, and by the consequent move 
ment of the lower ends of the levers g move 
the plate g inward to uncover the lower end 
of said chute and allow the stiffener blank to 
drop upon the packing table in front of the 
packer L'. When a blank has fallen upon 
the stop fingers p in front of the mold E the 
first part of the downward movement of said 
mold causes the centering levers Q Q to be 
moved toward each other to correct any ir 
regularity in the position of said blank be 
fore the depressor forces it into the mold. 
In the foregoing description of the operation, 
except so far as relates to the severing of the 
blank from the strip of material reference 
has only been made to the mechanism at one 
side of the machine but the mechanism upon 
the other side and the operation thereof is 
the same as above described except that the 
operations of one side are in advance of the 
other, due to the fact that the blanks are sev 
ered from the strip of material alternately at 
the right and left of the center of the machine. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a machine for cutting heel stiffeners 
from a strip of material the combination of a 
reciprocating knife carriage; two cutters car 
ried by said carriage with their cutting edges 
inclined to a perpendicular and facing out 
ward from the center of said carriage; two 
fixed cutters constructed and arranged to co 
operate with said movable cutters to alter 
nately act upon said strip of material to sever 
a blank therefrom; a gage to determine the 
length of the blank to be cut; two pairs of 
notch forming cutters arranged to act in uni 
son with the severing cutters; and mechan 
ism having provision for reciprocating said 
knife carriage. 
2. In a machine for cutting heel stiffener 
blanks the combination of a reciprocating 
knife carriage; two cutters carried by said 
carriage E. their cutting edges inclined to 
a perpenticular and facing outward from the 
center of said carriage; two fixed cutters con 
structed and arranged to co-operate with said 
movable cutters to alternately act upon and 
sever a section from a strip of material pre 
sented thereto; a gage to determine the length 
of the blank to be severed; a pair of molds 
having formed in their outer faces recesses 
the outlines of which correspond to the de 
sired outlines to be given to the blanks when 
completed; a pair of depressors for pressing 
the severed blanks into said molds, said molds 
and depressors being located one beneath 
each pair of severing cutters and constructed 
and arranged to be movable toward and from 
said severing cutters in rightlines; a pair of 
fixed skiving cutters for trimming the surplus 
stock from the blanks after they are pressed 
into said molds; guideways between said sev 
ering cutters and molds down which the sev 
ered blanks may fall by the force of gravity; 
- 
75 
9o 
95 
Ioo 
o 
II5 
I 25 
I 3G 
55 
 
513,242 
65 
75 
95 
TO ) 
O 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
and movable stops for arresting the descent 
of Said blanks at the proper points. 
3. In a machine for cutting heel stiffener 
blanks from a strip of material the combina 
tion of a laterally reciprocating knife car 
riage; a pair of cutters secured upon said car 
riage With their cutting edges facing in oppo 
site directions; a pair of fixed cutters con 
structed and arranged to co-operate with said 
movable cutters to alternately act upon, and 
Sever a blank from said strip; a gage to de 
termine the length of the blanks to be cut; 
guideways down which said blank may fall 
by the force of gravity; movable stops for ar 
resting the fall of said blanks; a pair of 
molds to receive said blanks; two pairs of 
centering levers Q Q; two pairs of cams, and 
two pairs of plungers for operating saidle 
Vers to Centrally locate said blanks relative 
to Said molds; a pair of depressors for clamp 
ing said blanks within said molds; a pair of 
fixed skiving knives; mechanism for imparting 
a lateral reciprocation to said knife carriage; 
and mechanism having provision for moving 
Said two molds alternately in opposite direc 
tions substantially as described. 
4. In a machine for cutting heel stiffener 
blanks, the combination of a laterally recip 
rocating knife carriage; a pair of cutters se 
cured thereon with their cutting edges facing 
in opposite directions; a pair of fixed cutters 
constructed and arranged to co-operate with 
said movable cutters to alternately act upon 
a strip of material and sever a blank there 
from; a gage to determine the length of the 
blanks to be cut from said strip; a pair of 
molds located one below each pair of severing 
Cutters; a pair of depressors constructed and 
arranged to press the severed blanks into 
Said molds; a guideway down which the blank 
severed by each pair of cutters may fall by 
the force of gravity to a position opposite 
said molds; stops for arresting said blanks in 
their descent; means having provision for 
centering said blank longitudinally; cams 
for operating the depressor to clamp the 
blank in the mold; a pair of fixed skiving 
cutters; mechanism for reciprocating said 
molds and depressors in right lines toward 
and from the severing and skiving cutters, 
and mechanism having provision for dis 
charging the skived blank from the mold. 
5. The combination of the shafts C, C, C; 
the gears C, C, C; the two pairs of cranks 
D' and D*; the crank pins a and a? the mold 
carriages E.; the molds E; the rods FF' con 
necting said cranks and mold carriages; the 
bars M, M, MI; the knife carriage N carried 
by said bars; the three armed levers M.M. 
V 
engaging the bars M M and constructed and 
arranged to be vibrated about their fulcrums 
by the alternate contact there with of the up 
per ends of said rods F and F. 
6. The combination of the reciprocating 
mold carriage E, provided with the arms E; 
the mold E secured to and movable with said 
carriage; the plate H provided with the ribs 
H' and ears H, and pivoted to the arms E'; 
the depression plate H'secured to the ribs H'; 
the cam bars G provided with the campaths 
G'; the trucks e, e, carried by the ears H in 
positions to engage with and be acted upon 
by said campaths; the arms Jadjustably Se 
cured upon the ears H the rods e'e' carried 
by said arms and the push pins e all con 
structed, arranged and operating Substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
7. The combination of a pair of cutters con 
structed and arranged to sever a piece of ma 
terial from a strip resting upon its edge; a 
gage for determining the length of piece to be 
severed; means having provision for recipro 
cating one of said cutters; guide Ways down 
which said severed piece may fall by the force 
of gravity; a mold to receive said piece of ma 
terial constructed and arranged to be recip 
rocated toward and from said severing cut 
ters in a straight line; a depressor for clamp 
ing said piece of material in said mold; a fixed 
skiving knife, means having provision for re 
ciprocating said mold and depression; mech 
anism having provision for vibrating said de 
pressor to alternately clamp and release said 
piece of material; the stops o' p' and g, and 
mechanism for intermittently advancing and 
retracting said stops. 
8. In a machine for cutting heel stiffener 
blanks from strips of material, the combina 
tion of two pairs of severing cutters con 
structed and arranged to act alternately upon 
said strip to seversections therefrom; two re 
ciprocating molds each provided with a vibrat 
ing depressor to clamp the blankin said mold, 
and constructed and arranged to be alternately 
moved toward their co-operating severing cut 
ters; a pair of fixed skiving cutters; and 
guide-ways down which said severed sections 
of material may descend, by the force of grav 
ity, to a position in front of said molds. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 2d day of 
May, A. D. 1893. 
GEORGE F. MOORE. 
w 
Witnesses: 
N. C. LOMBARD, 
WALTER, E.LOMBARD. 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513342.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
A. SCHEITHAUER, 
MACHINE FOR OUTTING MEAT OR OTHER SUBSTANCEs, 
No. 513,342, 
Patented Jan. 23, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
C 
  
% b 
 A. % - 
 
  
 
-NA 
 
 
N 
27-7- 
Waitav esses: 
 
A. SCHEITHAUER. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING MEAT OR OTHER SUBSTANCES. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 513,342, 
Patented Jan. 23, 1894. 
Tili;2 
2227% 
y 
WASHINGTen, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARNOLD SCHEITHAUER, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
MACHINE FOR cutting MEAT OR OTHER SUB STANCES. 
SSECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,342, dated January 23, 1894. 
Application filed June 11, 1892, Serial No. 436,315. (No model.) Patented in England May 18, 1892, No. 9,475, and in 
Austria-Hungary October 11, 1892, No. 25,412 and No. 43,947, 
3 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ARNOLD SCHEITHAUER, 
of Berlin, in the Kingdom of Prussia and Ger 
man Empire, have invented a new and use 
ful Machine for Cutting Meat or other Sub. 
stances, (for which I have obtained Letters 
Patent in England May 18, 1892, No. 9,475, 
and in Austria-Hungary. October 11, 1892, 
Nos. 25,412 and 43,947) of which the follow 
ing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to mincing machines, 
in which the material to be disintegrated, for 
instance meat, is fed along in a casing by 
means of a Worm or spiral, and pressed through 
a perforated disk, a knife (generally cross 
shaped, and taking part in the movement of 
the Worm) sliding round the inner surface of 
the perforated disk and cutting off the meat 
pressed into the holes of the perforated disk 
by the worm. These machines have the dis 
advantage that the feeding of the meat and 
the consequent pressing of the same against 
the perforated plate are not effected evenly at 
all parts. In consequence of this the perfo 
rated disk, held by a screwed cap, becomes 
soon loosened by the giving way of the lat 
ter, whereby the disk gets into an oblique 
position and is no longer touched at all points 
by the blades of the cross-shaped knife. The 
result is that particles of meat get between 
the blades and the perforated disk, whereby 
the regular working of the machine is af 
fected and the blades are sometimes broken 
or damaged. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
an improved arrangement by means of which 
the cross-shaped knife is always pressed 
evenly against the perforated disk, whether 
the perforated disk assumes a position ob 
lique to the axis of the feed screw or not. 
To this end, the boss of the cross-shaped knife 
is conical, or ball-shaped, and fits into a cor 
responding recess or socket formed in the 
Worm around the round pin of the latter, on 
which the cross-shaped knife and the perfo 
rated disks are arranged in such a manner as 
Will allow a certain amount of play. 
Another object of this invention is to pro 
55 
vide a device by means of which the perfo- 5C 
rated disk is kept in position. This is de 
signed so that it may be removed and easily 
cleansed, after the casing which is formed in 
halves, has been opened. 
In order that my invention may be the bet 
ter understood I now proceed to describe the 
same reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters marked thereon. 
Like letters refer to like parts throughout 
the views. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section through the 
machine, the interior parts being shown in 
side elevation. Fig. 2 is a detailplan view of 
the exit end of the machine, the easing being 
in section, and the worm and cross-shaped 
knife being omitted. Fig. 3 is a vertical sec 
tion through the cross-shaped knife and the 
adjacent part of the worm. Fig. 3 is an edge 
view of the knife. Fig. 4 is an elevation or 
face view of the knife or cutter. Fig. 5 is an 7o 
edge view of the perforated disk. Fig. 5* is 
a face view of such disk, and Fig. 6 shows 
one view of the threaded closing device. 
As shown in Figs. 3 and 4, the boss a , of 
the cross-shaped knife at is ball-shaped at its 
free end, while the worm b, has a correspond 
ing recess b, around the pinb'. By this means 
when the knife a, (after having been placed 
on the pin, so as to have a little play thereon 
and has been pushed against the worm) can 
assume to a certain degree an oblique posi 
tion as regards the axis of the worm. The 
knife a receives the necessary rotary move 
ment by the pin barranged on the end of 
the worm which projects toward the cross 
shaped knife Ct and acts against an arm of 
the latter. 
Beside the knife a there is arranged on the 
pin b the perforated disk c, provided at its 
circumference with a projection c', which is 
received in a recess d', Fig. 2, of the casing 
d, and serves to prevent any rotary movement 
of the perforated disk c. 
In practice, the casing is divided centrally 
and longitudinally, on line acac, and thus made 
in two parts to facilitate insertion and re 
moval of the interior working parts; but such 
construction being a common and Well known 
95 
75 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
513,342 
-feature of mincing machines and various oth 
ers of allied character, I have not deemed it 
necessary to illustrate it in the drawings. 
While in machines of the old type the nut 
required for the fixing of the perforated disk 
Was Screwed to the screw-threaded end of the 
casing from the outside, in this machine the 
perforated disk c is held in position by a 
threaded ring which can be easily removed 
from the casing after the latter has been 
opened. This device consists of a ring e, pro 
Vided with an ininer screw-thread, and a hol 
low ring f, having an exterior screw-thread 
and Screwed into the ring e. This ring f has 
at its Outer end (shown in Figs. 1 and 2 at 
the right hand side) a flange f' scalloped or 
milled at the periphery, (see Fig. 6,) which 
Serves to turn it when screwing it in. Like 
the perforated disk c, the ring e is provided 
With a projection e', which also is received in 
the recess d of the casing d, thus preventing 
a rotation of the ring e. 
The holding device e,f, has the position on 
the machine shown in Figs.1 and 2. The flange 
f' of the hollow piece fis outside the casing 
so that it may be easily gripped with the hand. 
After the machine has been put together the 
hollow piece f is screwed into the ringe so far 
that the inner flat end off abuts against the 
perforated disk c and presses the latter with 
Sufficient force against the cross-shaped knife 
Cl. If now during the operation of the ma 
chine the hollow piece fis unscrewed to some 
extent from the ring e accidentally, and the 
perforated disk c becomes loose, the blades 
of the cross-shaped knife a remain neverthe 
less in contact with the inner face of the per 
forated disk c. because the pressure of the 
meat fed forward by the worm compels the 
O 
25 
35 
knife a to rock on its ball joint as much as is 
necessary to keep the blades at all points in 
touch with the perforated disk c. 
As before mentioned this machine may also 
be used for mincing substances other than 
meat. 
I claim 
1. In a machine for cutting meat and other 
Substances, the combination with the case, 
feed shaft and knives, of a perforated plate, 
and a clamp device consisting of the inter 
nally-threaded ring, e, adapted to slide in said 
case, and the exteriorly-threaded ring, f, fit 
ting in part, e, and having a radially-project 
ing flange, substantially as described. 
2. In a machine for cutting meat &c., the 
combination, with the feeding-shaft, or screw, 
having a socket and pin at one end, of the 
knife having a conical boss which fits in said 
socket, and mounted loosely on said pin, 
whereby it is adapted for a certain play, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a machine for cutting meats and other 
substances, the combination, with a case hav 
ing an internal longitudinal slot, of a feed 
shaft or screw therein, knives rotating with 
the shaft, a perforated disk arranged in con 
nection with said knives and having a projec 
tion entering the slot of the case, a ring in the 
case having a projection entering said slot, 
and a threaded clamping ring engaging the 
first mentioned ring, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
ARNOLD SCHEITHAUER. 
45 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
PAUL FISCHER, 
PAUT, BRINKMANN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513442.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
W. M. RING, J. W. SMITH & A. ANNESS. 
AWN MOWER 
No. 513,442, 
Patented Jan. 23, 1894. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 513,442, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. M. RING, J. W. SMITH & A, ANNESS. 
LAWN MOWER, 
Patented Jan. 23, 1894. 
a 
Witnesses: 
(f. (f 5?self-a- 
WYY 
Inventors 
by ywom. Attorney 
re. NATIONAL LITHOGRAPHINa colla ANY 
wAsKINGTON, , c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAMSON M. RING, JOHN W. SMITH, AND ALBERT ANNESS, OF LIBERTY, 
INDIANA, ASSIGNORS OF ONE-FOURTH TO ANDREW W. SNYDER, OF SAME 
PLACE, AND SAID RING ASSIGNOR OF HIS REMAINING INTEREST TO 
IUTHER B. LEONARD, OF SAME PLACE. 
LAWN-MOWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 513,442, dated January 23, 1894. 
Application filed March 28, 1893. Serial No. 468,077, (No model.) 
. 
. . 
. 
which- 
To all whon, it may concern 
Be it known that we, WILLIAMSONM. RING, 
JOHN W. SMITH, and ALBERTANNESS, of Llb 
erty, Union county, Indiana, have invented 
5 certain new and useful Improvements in 
Lawn-Mowers, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to mowing machines, 
designed principally for lawn mowing, and 
Io the improvements will be readily understood 
from the following description taken in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings, in 
Figure 1, is a plan of the machine; Fig. 2, 
I5 a side view of the machine; Fig. 3, a bottom 
view of a portion of the cutting apparatus; 
Fig. 4, a vertical section of the cutting appa 
ratus in the line of a Fig. 5, a plan of the 
crank and its accessories for actuating the 
2 o cutter; Fig. 6, an elevation of the same, part 
vertical section in the plane of line bi' and 
Fig. 7, a plan of the same, part horizontal sec 
tion, in the plane of line c. 
In the drawings:-1, indicates a pair of 
25 ground - wheels: 2, their axle to which the 
wheels will be united by means of the usual 
ratchets so that as the machine moves forward 
the shaft will turn with the wheels or with 
whichever one of them moves the faster: 3, a 
3o frame, mounted on the axle: 4, the handle for 
pushing the machine: 5, the cutter-bar, being 
a flat sickle bar fixed across the forward part 
of the frame, the frame lying between the 
main wheels and the cutter-bar extending 
35 endwise beyond the sides of the frame and 
endwise beyond the outer lines of the main 
wheels: 6, rolls upon the frame just to the 
rear of the cutter-bar and designed to limit 
the approach of the cutter-bar to the ground: 
4o 7, the knife, being a flat sickle lying upon the 
upper surface of the cutter-bar:8, longitudi 
nal slots through the cutter-bar, of dove-tail 
cross-section: 9, dove-tail blocks engaging 
these slots in the cutter-bar and secured to 
45 the lower surface of the knife, the knife be 
ing thus at liberty to reciprocate upon the 
cutter bar without the necessity for project 
ing guides either above or below the cutting 
apparatus: 10, a socket formed in the rear 
- 
edge of the knife: 11, a frame bar disposed 5o 
above the level of the main frame 3: 12, a 
crank-shaft journaled in uprights of the main 
frame below the frame bar 11, this crank 
shaft being parallel with axle 2: 13, a bend 
in the crank-shaft to form the crank: 14, the 55 
wrist of the crank, this wrist being not par 
allel with the crank-shaft but at an angle . 
formed aboutforty-five degrees to it, the crank 
being therefore an angular crank: 15, a coun 
ter-shaft mounted in the frame parallel with 6o 
the axle and crank-shaft: 16, sprocket chain 
gearing connecting the axle and counter 
shaft and crank-shaft so that as the axle turns 
the crank-shaft turns at a multiplied rate: 17, 
a vertically slotted spindle journaled verti- 65 
cally in the frame, its upper end being piv 
oted in frame-bar 11, the slot in this spindle 
inclosing the wrist 14 of the crank, the side 
walls of the slot projecting outwardly a short 
distance from the body of the spindle to form 7o 
lips 22 which engage and fit the wrist 14 of 
the crank, the remaining portions of the slot 
being entirely free of the wrist of the crank: 
18, an arm fixed upon the lower end of the 
wrist: 19, a forwardly projecting frame part: 75 
20, a sway-bar pivoted intermediately to the 
frame part 19 and having its forward end con 
nected by knuckle pivot with the socket 10 
of the knife, and having its rear end pivoted, 
by slot, to the arm 18 of the spindle: 21, aver 8o 
tically disposed caster wheel at the rear end 
of the frame: and 22, the spindle lips before 
referred to as engaging the crankwrist 14. 
By examining Figs. 5, 6 and 7, it will be ob 
served that the spindle is virtually provided 85 
with two lever arms, namely, arm 18 which 
oscillates the swaybar and a much shorter 
arm formed by lips 22. When the bend of 
the crank hangs down, as in Fig. 6, the short . 
arm of the spindle, formed by lips 22, stands. 9o 
parallel with the axis of the crank-shaft. If 
the crank be turned quarter way, as in Figs. 
5 and 7, the Wrist of the crank, engaging lips 
22 of the spindle, will have given the spindle 
a partial rotation, and thus, as the crank ro- 95 
tates, the spindle is rapidly oscillated. 
As the machine moves forward on the 
ground the axle 2 is turned by the traction 
 
2 
53,442 
of the main wheels upon the ground and the 
knife 7 becomes rapidly reciprocated in an 
obvious manner and a swath will be cut of 
greater width than the wheel gage of the ma 
chine. In use, the height of stubble is de 
termined by the adjustment of wheel 21, the 
cutting apparatus rising as much as wheel 21 
will permit, Rolls 6 simply prevent the dig 
ging of the cutting apparatus into the ground 
in case the rear portion of the machine be 
comes elevated. It will be observed that the 
cutting apparatus is plain and smooth upon 
both its upper and lower surfaces, being free 
from projecting guides. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, with the frame and wheels and axle and 
mechanism for giving motion to the knife, of 
O 
a cutter-bar and knife lying againsteach other 
and provided with guides formed by dove- 2 o 
tailblocks fixed upon one and sliding in dove 
tail slots in the other. 
2. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, with a frame, wheels, axle, and cutting 
apparatus, of a crank-shaft provided with an 
angular crank-wrist, a slotted spindle pro 
vided with a lipped arm engaging said crank 
Wrist, and connections to transmit motion 
from said spindle to the knife of the cutting 
apparatus. 
25 
WILLIAMSON M. RING. 
JOHN W. SMITH, 
AIBERT ANNESS. 
Witnesses: 
ALBURT DAVIS, 
DANIELT. SNYDER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513543.txt	W. H. TRAVIS. 
IMPRESSION HAMMER FOR TYPE. WRITING MACHINES, 
(No Model.) 
No. 513,543 
Patented Jan. 30, 1894. 
FIG.l. 
F.O. 
   
 
 
at Hill?A2 
Z7-yz o/ 
Viruv Vrv LZ 
  
e' 
 
- Tooele-Sora 
S 1 SNA starrest estsehS 
7tes, S2). 
Serg ZZZZZZZZ72S24 
octez 
S2 
Sl 
. . 
e. 
WITNESSES; 
The NATIONALTHoararhina company, 
WASHINGTON, c. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. TRAVIS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
IMPRESS ON - HAMMER FOR TYPE-wRITING MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 513,543, dated January 30, 1894. . 
Application filed May 5, 1893, Serial No. 473,070. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. TRAVIS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
delphia, Pennsylvania, have invented an Im 
proved Impression-Hammer for Type-Writing 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to an improved con 
struction of impression hammer adapted for 
use upon wheel type writing machines. 
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of my improvements. Fig. 
2 is a longitudinal section showing the ham 
mer in its normal position. Fig. 3 is a corre. 
sponding longitudinal section, showing the 
hammer thrown out, as when striking the pa 
per against the type to make an impression, 
and Fig. 4 is a transverse section on the line 
1-2, Fig. 2. 
The saddle or frame A which carries the 
hammer, may be of any suitable shape or con 
struction. In the drawings I have by Way of 
example shown it as of a shape or construc 
tion adapted for use in connection with and 
as part of the typewriting machine for which 
I have applied for Letters Patent of the United 
States May 3, 1893, Serial No. 473,016. The 
upper part of this saddle or frame is made in 
the form of a horizontal tube Cl, slotted at the 
under side at a', and practically inclosed 
within this tube is the hammer B, and its 
spring S. The front end of this tubular por 
tion a is closed by a collar c, which may be 
made in one with or secured in the frame A. 
while near the rear end of the tube is a simi 
lar collar c'. I prefer to make one of these 
collars movable for convenience of getting at 
the parts, 
The hammer B is adapted to have a limit 
ed horizontal sliding motion within these 
guiding collars c c' and inclosing tube. The 
spiral spring S bears at its forward end upon 
projections t carried by the hammer and at 
the rearis acted upon by the rear legs of the bi 
furcated upper end of the operating lever L. 
which is pivoted to the frame at p and re 
ceives its vibrating motion from the keys of 
the type writing machine through any suit 
able means. The projections tare preferably 
carried by an adjustable rod T, which passes 
through the hammer from the rear end and 
is there threaded for the reception of an ad 
justing nutt, by means of which the rod T 
may be adjusted longitudinally to give to the 
spring any desired tension that the hammer 
may give a light or heavy blow or impact, as 
the case may require. 
Pivoted to lugs e at the rear of the tubular - 
portion a of the frame is a trigger E having 
a catch e' co-operating with a cross piece b on 
a depending lug b' of the hammer B. When 
the hammer is drawn back, as shown in Fig. 
1, this cross-piece engages with and is held 
by the catche? of the trigger E. The lever L. 
has however an adjustable projection P in 
the form of a set screw to act upon the for 
Ward end of the trigger E, so that when the 
vibrating operating lever L is moved, upon 
the operation of a key lever, to throw its up 
per end forward as indicated by the arrow in 
Fig. 2, it will first compress the spring S (Fig. 
2), and then the projection P will strike the 
under side of the forward end of the trigger 
E, raise the latter and release the hammer, 
which thereupon is thrown forward by the 
spring S (Fig. 3) with an impact force depend 
ent upon the adjustment of the rod T. On the 
return movement of the lever L, a cross pin 
p' thereon acts upon the pendent lug b' of 
the hammer to return the parts to the posi 
tions indicated in Fig. 1. It will be seen 
therefore that under normal conditions the 
Spring is not compressed, and that the one le 
wer T. performs the several functions of first 
compressing the spring, then acting on the 
trigger to release the hammer and finally re 
turning and resetting the hammer. 
Further 
more, at the moment the lever has raised the 
trigger to release the hammer, the lever is it 
Self also tending to throw the hammer for 
ward through the medium of the spring. 
I claim as my invention 
1. An impression hammer mechanism for 
type-writers, comprising a guiding frame, a 
movable hammer, a spring to throw the ham 
mer forward, a trigger and a lever to act upon 
the spring and also upon the trigger to release 
the hammer, Substantially as described. 
2. An impression hammer mechanism for 
type-writers, comprising a guiding frame, a 
movable hammer, a Spring to throw the ham 
mer forward, a trigger and a lever to act upon 
the spring and also upon the trigger to release 
the hammer the said lever on its return move 
95 
O 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
5.o. 
2 
518,543 
O 
ment also acting to reset the hammer, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. An impression hammer mechanism for 
typeWriters, comprising a guiding fraine, a 
sliding hammer, and a spiral spring acting 
upon the hammer, in combination with an 
operating lever to act upon the spring and a 
trigger to hold the hammer and released by 
said lever, substantially as described. 
4. An impression hammer mechanism for 
typewriters, comprising a guiding frame, a 
sliding hammer, a spiral spring acting at one 
end upon the hammer, an operating lever 
upon which the other end of the spring acts, 
a trigger to hold the hammer, and an adjust 
able projection upon the lever to act upon the 
trigger, substantially as described. 
5. An impression hammer mechanism for 
typewriters, comprising a sliding hammer and 
spiral spring, with a trigger and operatingle- 20 
wer and an adjustable rod passing through a 
tubular portion of the hammer and having 
projections against which the operating spring 
acts, substantially as described. 
6. An impression hammer mechanism for 
typewriters, comprising a hammer having a 
pendent lug with cross piece, a spring, a trig 
ger cooperating with said cross-piece and an 
operating lever to act upon the trigger, Sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, 
W. H. TRAVIS, 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH. H. KLEIN, 
HARRY SMITH, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513643.txt	(No Model.) 
J. v. KEMENDY. 
ELASTIC TIRE, 
No. 513,643. 
Patented Jan. 30, 1894, 
  
22s22s252 
SS243 S22343ta. 
267 S22 NS 2Z2 - 
SS 
gesas 
N2Ky4Y 
Z32326.32% say 
Se2.522,522 
22.2%z2522 
segs 
2assas 
S2 
s2 
 
 
% 
% 
 
 
 
 
% 
  
 
 
 
6. & aze (Z-2-4-z-z 
or 
 
The NationAL LITHoGRAPHiNa company, 
wAsH3NGTON, d. c. 
-2 
g 121-a-212 27-24-2-26%-26% 
-z, . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JENO. v. KEMENDY, OF MUNICH, GERMANY. 
ELASTIC TRE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 513,643, dated January 30, 1894. 
Application filed December 17, 1892, Serial No. 455,534, (No model.) 
o 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JENO W. KMNDY, a 
subject of the Emperor of Austria-Hungary, 
residing at Munich, Bavaria, Germany, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Elastic Gum Bolsters, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The present invention relates to an elastic 
bolster, the construction of which furnishes 
a great elasticity together with a great en 
durance. 
The invention is especially applicable for 
tires to take the place of pneumatic tires 
which have the disadvantage of becoming 
useless. by the least accident while the repair 
ing of the same is very difficult. 
The essential part of the invention consists 
of a bolster made up of a row of cells ar 
ranged in a certain way next to each other 
and over each other, which fit into each other, 
the material of which the bolster is made be 
ing rubber or some other elastic material. 
In the drawings, Figures 1, 2, 3 and 4 show 
cross sections of the bolster. Fig. 5, is a cross, 
and Fig. 6, a longitudinal section. 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the bolster is shown in 
the form of a tire for a wheel. It will be seen 
that the lower row of cells Z, terminate in a 
pointed arched shape. The row of cells above 
this first or lower row is arranged in reverse 
position, with the pointed ends downward and 
alternating in position with the lower cells. 
The relative position of the cells is shown 
clearly in the cross sections and the same ar 
rangement is carried outlongitudinally of the 
bolster. Thus the cells overlap each other 
and penetrate every part of the bolster. The 
result is that when a pressure is exercised in 
the direction of the arrows as in Fig. 4, for 
instance, the walls l, will communicate the 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
50 
65 
- 
same downward to the arches of the cells of 
the lower row. The latter yield and there is 
a tension very favorable for the producing of 
elasticity in the elastic walls of the cells. Of 
course the air existing in the different cells 
works also elastically. The cells can be of 
any shape; their cross section can be trian 
gular, square or as may be desired. 
If it is desired to use the bolsters for tires 
where the cross section of the same must 
evenly resist pressure, the cells or their Walls 
must be arranged radially as in Figs. 2 and 8. 
This must especially be the case because a 
side pressure is often exercised upon the 
wheel tires. 
When used for tires a great advantage arises 
that even if an accident happens to the same 
the working of the tires is not weakened and 
the repairing of the same can be made in a 
very simple way by putting a new piece in 
the place of that which becomes defective. 
I claim 
A tire or bolster having a series of upper 
and a series of lower cells formed by integral 
transverse partition walls, said lower cells 
having pointed upper ends alternating with 
the pointed lower ends of the upper cells 
whereby a zig-zag wall is formed intermedi 
ate of the sides of the tire, said Wall being 
connected with the outer walls of the tire by 
the side walls of the cells, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
J. V. KEMENDY. 
Witnesses: 
EMIL, HENZEL, 
ALBERT WEICKMANN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513743.txt	(No Model.) 
M. TWERDA. 
SAD IRON. 
No. 513,743. 
Patented Jan. 30, 1894. 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
G 
- 
a 
a 
 
4 ca, 62.le-2-2-21-6 
2effect 
3.9. Set 
 
a 
/224. 
O 
77//ZZA 71-2724/ 
2 2,323 21zzorees. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
MATHILDE TVERDAL OF STOUGHTON, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO CHARLEST. JOHNSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
SAD-RON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,743, dated January 30, 1894. 
Application filed May 20, 1893, Serial No. 474,980, (No model.) 
O 
25 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MATHILDE TVERDAL, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Stoughton, in the county of Dane and State 
of Wisconsin, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Sad-Irons; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
tion, and in which- 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
Sad-iron, with the handle attached in its op 
erative position. Fig. 2 is a similar view, but 
showing the handle in longitudinal section, 
and illustrating, in dotted lines, the position 
of the handle-lever and its operating rod 
When the handle is to be placed upon, or re 
moved from, the body of the iron. Fig. 3 is 
an end view of the iron with the removable 
handle in place; showing, in dotted lines, the 
"twist' or turning of the handle to remove 
or replace it. Fig. 4 is a detail view of the 
rear end of the iron, showing the rigid elbow 
lug for the attachment of the handle-arm and 
lever. Fig. 5 is a detail view of the handle 
lever, detached from the handle; and Fig. 6 
is a detail view illustrating the connection be 
tween the arm and the lever appertaining to 
the handle, and the rigid elbow-stud on the 
body of the iron, 
Like letters of reference designate corre 
Sponding parts in all the figures. 
My invention relates to that type or class 
of sad-irons which are provided with remov 
able handles, and my improvement consists 
in the novel construction and combination of 
parts of the handle, the body of the iron, and 
the devices for connecting these separably, 
as will be hereinafter more fully and at length 
described and particularly pointed out in the 
claim. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter A de 
notes the body of my improved sad-iron, 
which may be of any desired size and shape, 
according to the purpose for which it is in 
tended to be used. At one end of this is a 
raised boss b, forming a rigid fastening for 
a curved arm B, the upper end of which is 
bent to one side, parallel to the median line 
of the flat top of the iron, as shown at B'. At 
the other end is a similar boss d, forming the 
base for the fastening-lug D, which has a 
right-angled elbow D' for the attachment of 
the arm, E, appertaining to the removable 
handle, shown at C. Said handle, which is 
made, preferably, of wood or some other in 
expensive material that can be easily shaped 
and is a poor conductor of heat, has a central 
longitudinal bore c, extending from end to 
end, and of such dimensions that the straight 
end B' of arm B can easily be inserted there 
in. At the other end of the handle, securely 
fastened in the bore c, is a curved arm E, cor 
responding in shape and conformation to arm 
B at the front end. This handle-arm E has a 
hook E' at its lower end, adapted to catch un 
der the elbow D' on the iron, so as to hook 
arm E upon the fastening-lug DD' when the 
handle is to be applied to the iron. 
Upon one side of arm E is a short laterally 
projecting stude, forming a pivot or fulcrum 
for a lever F, the lower end of which has a 
hook Fadapted to interlock with an offset 
d' on elbow D' of the fastening lug. At its 
upper end, lever Fis pivoted to a slender rod 
G, which is inserted loosely, so as to move 
easily forward and back, into and through a 
longitudinal bore c in the handle, parallel to 
the larger central bore c and above the same. 
The forwardly projecting end of rod G has 
fastened upon it a finger-button G', and is 
also provided with a coiled spring H, the ten 
sion of which operates to pull the rod in the 
direction of the arrow, so as to push upon 
the upper end of lever F and, accordingly, 
force hook F at the lower end of the lever 
into engagement with the elbow-stud or lug 
DD d. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the drawings, the manner of 
attaching and removing the detachable han 
dle will readily be understood. To remove 
the handle, pull upon the button G', which 
through the intervention of rod G and lever 
F--withdraws or releases the hook F at the 
lower end of the lever from the shouldered 
elbow D' d'. By now giving the handle a 
slight turn or twist upon the part B of arm 
B as a pivot, the lower hooked end E' of the 
, 
35 
40 
45 
5 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
513,743 
handle-arm E. will be released from the elbow 
lug, so that the handle may be drawn off the 
part B' simply by pulling it in the direction 
of the arrow. To again replace the handle, 
the order of these operations is simply re 
versed; i.e., the forward end of the handle is 
first inserted upon the straight arm B'; it is 
then turned a little to one side (upon arm B' 
as a pivot) and turned back again until hook 
E' catches under the elbow D'; and, finally, 
the fastening or locking-hook F on lever F is 
Sprung into place behind the detent or offset 
d on the elbow-lug, thus locking the remov 
able handle firmly in its operative position 
upon the iron. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
O 
The combination with the iron. A provided 
at one end with the rigid bent arm B and at 2 o 
the other end with the elbow-stud DD' d', of 
the removable handle Chaving central bore 
c and a parallel bore c', and provided with 
the bent arm E having hook E'; lever F hav 
ing hook F'; rod G having finger-knob G'; and 25 
spring H; all constructed and combined to 
operate substantially in the manner and for 
the purpose shown and set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 3o 
in presence of two witnesses. 
MATHILDE TVERDAL. 
Witnesses: 
A. E. GILBERT, 
CHAS. T. JOHNSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513846.txt	G. WALLEY. 
TROLLEY POLE STAND. 
Patented Jan. 30, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 513,846, 
 
WTWESSAS 
24 F 
13; by 
2% INVENTOR 
B y 
1247.2 
AT TORWEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAF WALLEY, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE STEEL MOTOR 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TROLLEY-POLE STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,846, dated January 30, 1894. 
Application filed May 6, 1893, Serial No. 473,312. (No model.) 
45 
55 
75 
cross-headB, aforesaid. Spring D, at the cen 
ter thereof has a clip d, and this clip connects 
with bolt C, the latter extending with an easy 
fit through a hole centrally located in the 
cross-head. Bolt C is provided with a nut c, 
this nut engaging the inner face of the cross 
head, and by tightening this nut, tension is 
given to the spring whereby the links e e', 
are drawn taut, thus holding plate E nor 
mally in the position shown in Fig. 2. 
With the construction shown, it is evident, 
that the trolley pole will have an easy uni 
versal movement (see Fig. 3) whereby it will 
follow the over-head wire, even if the wire be 
not located centrally over the car tracks. 
What I claim is 
1. A trolley pole stand comprising a base 
plate for attaching to the car top, a trolley 
pole plate, bearing a socket for securing the 
trolley pole, links engaging the four corners 
of the trolley pole plate for suspending the 
same, two of these links engaging fixed mem 
bers of the base plate, the other links engag 
ing a cross-head, a semi-elliptic spring con 
nected with and acting outward on the cross 
head, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. In a trolley pole stand in combination, a 
trolley pole plate bearing a socket for engag 
ing the trolley pole, such socket being taper 
ing externally, and having a split free end 
with a compression band engaging the same, 
such trolley pole plate being suspended by 
links, a semi-elliptic spring and cross-head 
for holding the links taut, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 3d 
day of May, i893. 
GUSTAF WALLEY. 
Witnesses: 
G. P. NASE, 
D. W. AYLWORTH, 
I5 in the claims. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GUSTAF WALLEY, of 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Trolley-Pole Stands; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use the 
IO Sale. My invention relates to an improved trol 
ley pole stand, and it consists in certain fea 
tures of construction, and in combination of 
parts hereinafter described and pointed out 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a plan of a trolley pole stand embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a view in perspective, show 
2O ing position of parts with the trolley pole 
tilted more or less laterally. 
A represents a base plate adapted to be se 
cured on top of the car. This plate at the 
one end thereof has upturned ears a, pierced 
25 for receiving links e. e. The other end of 
plate A, has upwardly projecting ears a', the 
latter having depressions a, that serve as seats 
for the ends of the semi-elliptic spring D. 
B, is a cross-head that operates in slots A', 
3o of flanges A, these flanges projecting upward 
from plate A. 
E, is the trolley pole plate, the same having 
a socket E, in which socket the butt of the 
trolley pole G is secured. The socket E' ta 
35 pers externally and is slitted at E, and a com 
pression band E, is provided, and after the 
end of the trolley pole has been inserted in 
the socket, by driving the band down, the up 
per end of the socket is thereby compressed 
4o so as to clamp the trolley pole. The trolley 
pole plate E, is suspended by means of links 
e e, the links e'e', engaging the respective 
corners of the plate. Linksee, connect with 
ears a. a, aforesaid. Links e'e', connect with 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US513946.txt	L. LEFLEVE. 
CATTLE GUARD 
Patented Jan. 30, 1894, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS LEFLEVE, OF HOUSTON, TEXAS. 
CATTLE- GUARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,946, dated January 30, 1894. 
Application filed July 20, 1893, 
Serial No. 48),07 
(No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS LEFLVE, a citi 
Zen of the Republic of France, formerly of 
St. Laurent, Department of Ain, France, now 
a resident of Houston, county of Harris, State 
of Texas, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Cattle-Guards for the 
Use of Railroads and other Public Crossings; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to use the same. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and inexpensive form of cattle guard 
comprising rollers, wherein any roller may 
be removed and replaced readily and also 
the different bars composing each roller may 
likewise be removed. 
My invention includes the details of con 
struction and arrangement hereinafter point 
ed out. 
In the drawings, Figure 1, is a plan view of 
the guard complete between the rails; Fig. 2, 
a longitudinal section, and Fig. 3, a perspec 
tive view of one of the removable rollers. 
Fig. 4 is a view of a detail. 
The guard comprises a frame made up of 
side bars 1 with inclined ends between which 
extend the cross end plates 2 inclined to cor 
respond with the inclined ends. The side 
bars have bearing openings through which 
pass the bearing rods 3. Removably on these 
the rollers 4 turn and any one of these rollers 
may be removed by taking out the bearing 
rod. These rollers are of novel construction 
and consist of four bars radiating from a cen 
tral point but having their inner edges at a 
- 
- 
r 
slight distance apart to leave an open center, 
and through this open center the bearing rod 
is free to pass. The bars are connected with 4o 
the head plates 5 by means of tongues 6 
clinched to said head plates, and thus any 
bar may be removed from any roller as de 
sired. These head plates besides connecting 
the bars of each roller serve also as bearing 45 
plates for the bearing rods which pass re 
movably through them. 
The action of the invention will be well 
understood, the toothed edges of the bars 
serving to pinch the animal's foot when any So 
roller is turned by its treading thereon and 
causing the animal to back off of the guard. 
The roilers are of such size and are so placed 
in relation to each other that the animal's 
foot cannot fall down between them and be 55 
permanently caught. 
I claim 
1. A cattle guard comprising the frame; the 
rollers having a series of bars held with a 
space between their inner edges, and the re- 6o 
movable bearing rod, passing through the 
sides of the frame and through the open space 
of the rollers, substantially as described. 
2. In combination, in a cattle guard the 
frame, the rollers made up of a series of bars 65 
arranged with a space between their inner 
edges, the head plates connecting the bars 
and the bearing rods passing through the 
head plates and into the space between the 
bars, substantially as described. 
a 
LOUIS LEFLEVE, 
Witnesses: 
AUDRAL WANN, 
L. A. FEMANDEZ. 
O 
(5 
25 
tar 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514046.txt	(No Model.) 
ADJUSTABLE HANGER FOR, CURTAIN OR SHADE ROLLERS. 
S. R. SMITH, 
No. 514,046. 
Patented Feb. 6, 1894. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN R. SMITH, OF BELLEVILLE, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
GEORGE W. DETHARDING, OF SAME PIACE. 
ADJUSTABLE HANGER FOR CURTAN OR SHADE ROLLERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,046, dated February 6, 1894. 
Application filed June 19, 1893. Serial No. 478,084, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
To all, whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN R. SMITH, of 
the city of Belleville, in the county of St. 
Clair and State of Illinois, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Ad 
justable Hangers for Curtain or Shade Roll 
ers, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
hereof. 
My invention relates to curtain fixtures, 
and consists in the novel construction, ar. 
rangement, and combinations of means for 
bodily raising and lowering the curtain or 
shade and its roller; means for adjusting the 
hangers to different lengths of roller, and 
improved means whereby curtain rollers of 
different lengths may be mounted either be 
tWeen the opposite window-jambs or upon the 
face of the adjacent inner casings of the win 
dow or other opening in the building. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
an improved curtain fixture of the class above 
mentioned, which shall be simple in con 
struction, efficient and reliable in operation 
and of reasonable cost. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a detail rear 
elevation of a portion of a horizontal bar hav 
ing one of the roll hangers and a portion of 
the curtain roll attached thereto. Fig. 2 is a 
detail side elevation of one of the vertically 
and laterally adjustable roll hangers. Fig. 3 
is a cross-section taken on a vertical line 
drawn through the horizontal bar and roll 
hanger shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a front ele 
vation of a window having my invention ap 
plied thereto. Fig. 5 is a detail sectional plan 
view of portions of a window-frame, having 
a modified form of my invention applied 
thereto. 
1 indicates a pair of right and left hand 
roll hangers which are separately adjustable 
in a lateral direction with relation to the 
Window-jamb upon a horizontal bar 2, in the 
manner presently described, and simultane 
Ously adjustable vertically with relation to 
the height of the window. As the roll hang 
ers 1 are identical I will limit my description 
to one of them. The horizontal bar 2 has a 
length considerably less than the distance 
between the opposite window-jambs 3, and 
. 
is preferably rectangular in cross-section, and 
is to be suspended by means of a cord or 
chain 4 having one end connected to a screw 
eye or hook 5 which is attached to the upper 
edge of said bar midway of its length, and 
which passes over a small pulley or other 
similar fastening 6 secured in vertical align 
ment with the said screw eye 5 to the upper 
part of the window-frame, or if preferred 
thence passes over to one side of said win 
dow-frame, over another pulley 7, and thence 
downward along the adjacent window-jamb, 
and has itslower end secured to a suitable hook 
or other fastening 8 projecting from said jamb 
adjacent the lower end thereof, or fixed to 
some portion of the window-frame. The roll 
hanger 1 is provided with the usual horizon 
tal arm 9 having a perforation 10 adjacentits 
outer free end to be engaged by the journal 
11 of the shade-roll 12 in the usual manner. 
This hanger also has a thin flexible shank 13 
formed integral with it and extending verti 
cally. This shaluk, in cross-section, has a 
width greatly in excess of its thickness, for a 
purpose hereinafter mentioned. Projecting 
from the outer surface of the hanger and the 
shank 13 are horizontal ears 14 having aligned 
vertical perforations 15. One of these ears is 
preferably located adjacent the upper end of 
the shank 13 while the other is located at 
or closely adjacent the lower end thereof So 
that they will be located as far apart as pos 
sible. Formed upon the side of the hanger 
which is opposite the side from which the up 
per ear 14 projects, is a horizontal socket 16, 
which is rectangular in cross-section and 
loosely engaged by one end of the horizontal 
bar 2. The front wall 17 of this socket is pro 
vided with a horizontal slot 18 extending to 
points adjacent the ends of said socket. A 
suitable screw or bolt 19 is inserted through 
this slot and screwed into the bar 2, and 
thereby locks said socket and the hanger car 
ried thereby securely in position upon said 
bar, but adjustably so. This construction is 
repeated at each end of the bar 2, so that 
the shade roll 12 is mounted between and 
upon two arms 9, and so that the curtain or 
shade 20 is located in advance or in front of 
said bar, and may be unwound from and 
wound upon said roll, according to the Well 
95 
IOO 
5 
35 
45 
 
514,046 
65 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
O 
to5 
IC 
II5 
again locked in proper position by tightening 
said screws. When it is desired to raise and 
lower the shade roll and hangers bodily upon 
the wires or cords 3, all that is necessary is to 
loosen the cord 4 from its fastening 8 at the 
side of the window, and permit it to pass oyer 
the rollers 6 and 7. If, by any imperfection 
in construction the lower ends of the Wires 
21 should be located nearer each other than 
their upper ends are, the free movement of the 
hangers upon said wires will not be interfered 
with, for the reason that the shanks 13 of said 
hangers are very flexible laterally, and will 
conform themselves automatically to the in 
perfect construction and arrangement of said 
wires; likewise if the upper ends of said wires 
be improperly located by an unskilled person, 
or by reason of settling of the window frames 
or building. This improper arrangement of 
the wires is indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 4. 
What I claim is 
1. The improved curtain fixture, construct 
ed with right and left hand roll hangers 1, 
provided with the usual horizontal arm 9 car 
rying a bearing for the shade-roll, a horizon 
tal bar 2 angular in cross-section upon which 
said hangers are mounted and separately ad 
justable, the cord or chain 4 having one end 
connected to said bar and passing over a fas 
tening 6 secured to the upper part of the win 
dow - frame and thence downward, SO that 
said bar and the shade-roll carried thereby 
may be bodily adjusted in the window up and 
down, thin flexible vertical shanks 13 formed 
integral with said hangers and having a width 
greatly in excess of their thickness, horizon 
tal ears 14 having vertical perforations 15 and 
projecting from the outer surface of said 
hangers and said shanks, one adjacent the 
lower end of each shank, vertical guide-wires 
21 stretched adjacent each window-jamb, and 
the ears 14 mounted upon said wires, substan 
tially as herein specified. 
2. In a curtain fixture, the improved roll 
hanger provided with the usual horizontal 
arm 9 having a bearing for the journal of the 
roll, a thin flexible vertical shank 13 formed 
integral with the body of the hanger and hav 
ing a width greatly in excess of its thickness 
so that it may bend at different points in its 
length, horizontal ears 14 having aligned ver 
tical apertures 15 and projecting one from 
said hanger and one from Said shank, and an 
integral horizontal socket 16 rectangular in 
cross-section and provided with a horizontal 
slot 18 extending to points adjacent its ends, 
substantially as herein specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
STEPHEN R. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD WANGELIN, 
E. H. ABEND. 
known function of common spring actuated 
shade rolls now in use. A vertical wire or cord 
21 is stretched vertically parallel with the ad 
jacent window jambs 3, one adjacent each 
jamb, and preferably extending to points adja 
cent the upper and lower ends of said jambs. 
The upper ends of these cords or wires are 
Secured to suitable hooks, nails or other fas 
tenings 22 projecting from the upper portion 
of the window frame, and the lower ends of said 
Wires or cords are secured to hooks, nails or 
other fastenings 23, projecting from the lower 
portion of Said frame, so that said wires or 
cords Will be held a distance from the surface 
of Said jambs. These wires or cords 21 are 
preferably arranged parallel, but if through 
imperfect erection thereof, or through imper 
feet construction of the window-frame, they 
belocated nearer together at their upper ends 
than at their lower ends, or vice versa, the 
vertical adjustment of the roll hangers there 
on will not be seriously interfered with by 
reason of my improved construction of flexi 
ble shanks 13 of said hangers. The hanger 
at One side of the window has its aligned ears 
14 mounted upon the wire or cord 21 at one 
side of the Window, while the hanger at the 
opposite side of the window has its ears 14 
mounted upon the other wire or cord 21, so 
that said hangers may slide vertically upon 
said wires or cords. 
In the above described construction, the 
shade roll and hangers are located between 
the Opposite Window-jambs. In case the op 
erator desires to locate the shade roll and its 
shade upon the inner face of the window cas 
ing 24, he may do so by means of the modi 
fied construction of the hangers 1 which I 
have illustrated in Fig. 5. In such case, the 
horizontal arm 9 is still provided with the 
above described bearing 10 for the shade-roll 
adjacent its outer end, but is provided with 
a lateral integral extension 25, which extends 
laterally from Said arm in a horizontal direc 
tion in front of the window casing 24 and is 
provided thereat with an additional arm 26 
which extends at right angles forward from 
said extension 25 and is provided at a point 
adjacent its free end with a bearing 27 for 
the journal of the curtain-roll, so that said 
roll may engage Said last-named bearing and 
so that the shade or curtain carried thereby 
may overlap the casing 24. In this construc 
tion, the roll hanger at the opposite side of the 
window is also to be provided with the exten 
sion 25, additional arm 26 and bearing 27. 
The operation is as follows: When it is de 
sired to adjust the roll-hangers 1 upon the 
horizontal bar 2 for different lengths of rolls, 
all that is necessary is to loosen the screws 
or bolts 19, and slide the sockets 16 upon said 
bar, with slots 18 in Said sockets engaging said 
screws, when said sockets and hangers maybe 
20 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514146.txt	(No Model.) 
R HOPE-JONES, 
ORGAN, 
4. Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 514,146, 
Patented Feb, 6, 1894, 
1. 
WinBSSES 
N 
3 SSSSSSS 
4 
% is 
IVEttor 
 
(No Model.) 
R. HOPE-JONES. 
ORGAN, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Feb. 6, 1894, 
  
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
 
 
 
ESSES 
ce ?awcut. 
 
  
s - IVELLOr 
F ferz /ope--ones 
p 
ses 
Y4 
^ 
- 
(No Model.) 
 
R HOPE-JONES 
ORGAN, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 514,146, 
3 
 
 
Patented Feb, 6, 1894. 
k3 
k5 
 
 
a peer T k 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
R. HOPE-JONES. 
ORGAN, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
No. 514,146, 
Patented Feb, 6, 1894, 
 
WESSES 
dw 9. (94aw. 
was Group. 
IVEEOr 
A2Aerf- Aee-vozef 
% carz 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT HOPE-JONES, OF BIRKENHEAD, ENGLAND. 
ORGAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,146, dated February 6, 1894. 
Application filed August 8, 1892, Serial No. 442,472, (No model.) Patented in England November 20, 1890, No. 18,803 in 
France September 14, 1891, No. 216,104, and in Belgium September 14, 1891, No. 96,380, 
O 
25 
To all Luhon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT HOPE-JONES, 
electrician, a subject of the Queen of Great 
Britain, residing at Birkenhead, in the county 
of Chester, in the Kingdom of England, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Organs, (for which I have received 
Ietters Patent in England, No. 18,803, dated 
November 20, 1890; in France, by patent of 
addition to original patent, No. 216,104, of 
September 14, 1891, and in Belgium, by pat 
ent of addition, No. 97,125, to original pat 
ent, No. 96,380, of September 14, 1891, filed 
November 10, 1891) of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in the construction of organs and simi 
lar musical instruments and in the means for 
controlling the same, whereby the power, 
pitch and quality of the tone emitted may be 
more readily governed, Varied or sustained, 
at the will of the performer as hereinafter 
more fully described, the invention being 
chiefly applicable to organs having pneumatic 
or electro-pneumatic actions, some parts of 
it having reference to the invention set forth 
in my specification Serial No. 406,071. 
The invention may be carried into effect as 
follows, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure l is a section showing an arrange 
ment whereby the volume of tone may be mo 
mentarily increased or a sforzando effect may 
be obtained. Fig.2 shows a modification of 
the preceding arrangement depicted as ap 
plied to the pedals. Fig. 3 is a sectional plan, 
partly in the form of a diagram, showing an 
arrangement for operating the swell shutters, 
the pedal and its switch being, however, 
shown in elevation. Fig. 4 is a section on an 
enlarged scale of part of the apparatus shown 
in Fig. 3, the section being taken as on a line 
a 2 in said figure. Fig. 5 is an elevation, 
partly in section, of a modified device for op 
erating the swell shutters. Fig. 6 is an ele 
vation showing a modification of a part of 
the preceding device. Fig. 7 shows one form 
of transposing apparatus. Fig. 8 is a Section, 
on an enlarged scale, online / 21, Fig. 7. Fig. 
5o 9 shows another form of transposing device. 
Fig. 10 illustrates, partly in diagram, an ar 
30 
35 
 
rangement whereby the quality and power of 
the tone may be instantly varied and a sfor 
Zando effect may be obtained with the whole 
organ or any predetermined portion thereof. 
Fig. 11 is a transverse section of a portion of 
the apparatus taken as on line aca, Fig. 10. 
Fig. 12 shows a device whereby the sound of 
the notes may be prolonged at will. Fig. 13 
shows a brake apparatus for steadying the 
swell shutters and preventing rebound of the 
Salme. 
When it is desired to momentarily increase 
the volume of tone or to produce a sforzando 
effect, additional contacts may be provided 
for the pedals or keys, such contacts playing 
the octaves of the pipes in use, or playing any 
pipes belonging to other ranks, or percussion 
instruments such as a drum or drums, the con 
tacts being brought together by depressing 
the keys or pedals with more force than usual. 
An arrangement of this kind is depicted in 
Fig. 1, in which A is one of the manual keys 
provided (in an electric organ) with suitable 
contact devices (as a b) for operating its 
own notes and the notes coupled to it. 
A' is the pin rail. 
B is a stiff insulated metallic spring mount 
ed on the pin rail below the key and (if de 
sired) prevented from rising beyond a certain 
fixed point by an insulated staple or headed 
screw b, which passes through the spring. 
B' is an adjustable insulated contact screw 
mounted in the pin rail with its point in prox 
imity to the lower side of the spring B. The 
springs B of each manual are all connected 
by a wire b' to the battery supply wire U, 
while the pins B are each connected by a sep 
arate wire b to any suitable electrically con 
trolled device or devices such as an electro 
pneumatic lever or levers for operating the 
octave or octaves of the note in question or 
other pipe or instrument as before described. 
a is a piece of felt attached to each key 
above its contact spring B. 
The circuit comprising the wire b' may (if 
desired) be controlled by a suitable switch lo 
cated conveniently to the performer. 
In operating the keys with the ordinary 
touch they are not depressed farther than will 
bring the felt (, into contact with the spring 
B. When a Sforzando effect is required or it 
55 
75 
OO 
2 
514,146 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
is desired to momentarily increase the volume 
of tone in connection with any particularkey 
or keys, it or they are depressed with consid 
erable force and bring the corresponding 
spring or springs B into contact with the ad 
jacent pin or pins B, thus completing their 
respective circuits and instantly bringing 
into play the additional pipe or other sonor 
ous device as described. On the key or keys 
being released, each depressed spring B re 
turns to its elevated position against a felt 
washer below the head of the screw b. 
In Fig.2 there is shown a modified arrange 
ment of the preceding device, shown as adapt 
ed to the pedals. A is the front end of a 
pedal key, A the pin rail, and a? the ordi 
nary key spring. A is a short key or lever 
pivoted at a below the key A and carrying 
two or more contact pieces B B'B' B, each 
adapted, when the lever A* is sufficiently de 
pressed, to engage a suitable contact device 
below it, as for instance, a pair of insulated 
flexible metallic pins B' or B, which form 
terminals to the particular circuit to which 
they are connected. The contacts B'B' are 
for closing and opening the circuits of the 
key's own note and two other notes coupled 
thereto, as fully described in my specifica 
tion above mentioned. The contacts B B' 
form terminals of the sforzando circuit bb 
before described, a is a spring tending to 
depress the lever A, and a' is a link con 
necting said lever with the pedal key A, the 
latter (under the influence of its spring a) 
holding the lever A* and its contacts nor 
mally in their elevated position in defiance 
of the spring a. The link a' is capable of a 
longitudinal movement through its connect 
ing eye a on the pedal key. B is a stiff 
spring located below the lever A. a', a , C, 
a' are thumpers of felt. 
It will be noticed 
that the sforzando contact pins B' are con 
siderably shorter than the pins B. On de 
pressing the pedal key with the usual touch, 
the lever A'is unsupported and the spring a 
draws it down till the felt a touches the 
spring B", the key Abeing depressed until it 
bears upon the felta. This action closes the 
key contacts B'B', the sforzando contacts B* 
B's being still open. An additional pressure 
on the key A compresses the spring B and 
closes thesforzando contacts. The upper end 
of the screw a passes freely through the ad 
jacent limb of the spring B' and enters, with 
the head of screw, into a hole a' in the key 
A, when the latter is depressed beyond its 
normal amount, through which hole also the 
position of the screw may be readily adjusted. 
The circuits of each set of these sforzando 
contacts may (if desired) be controlled by one 
or more main switches within reach of the 
operator. 
In organs in which the volume of the sound 
of certain of the pipes is controlled by inclos 
ing said pipes within a swell-box having a se 
ries of adjustable openings or shutters through 
which the sound may escape in varying vol 
ume, I provide arrangements whereby these 
shutters, though more or less heavy in them 
selves, may be readily actuated and con 
trolled by a very light pressure by the per 
former on a key, pedal, lever or other equiva 
lent operating device. Two such arrangements 
may be described as follows: Referring first 
to Figs. 3 and 4-C is the swell box, and C 
C C C C C C the swell shutters which, in 
this instance, are supposed to stand vertically 
for the purpose of readily balancing them. 
The shutters are, preferably, so arranged that 
each shutter, or set of shutters, shall control 
an opening of a different area from the others, 
and they are arranged to be opened success 
ively according to their area, beginning with 
the smallest and ending with the largest. In 
the drawings, the first five shutters C CC: 
C Care shown as single pieces of a gradu 
ally increasing size, while the sixth and sev 
enth shutters, instead of being single pieces, 
are formed of coupled sets of shutters CC con 
taining respectively two and four single shut 
ters of a suitable size. It is preferable to pro 
vide each single shutter and coupled set 
thereof with a spring or other counterbalanc 
ing device (not shown) adapted to normally 
hold it open, and to close each independently 
by means of an electro-pneumatic lever or 
levers, governed by a contact pedal or equiv 
alent device under the control of the per 
former, the largest shutter being closed first. 
D' D* D8DDD Dare the main bellows of 
a series of electro-pneumatic levers which are 
contained in a wind box E and are connected 
with their respective bellows D'D' by tubes 
d d d d d d d. The bellows D' D, &c., 
are connected with their respective shutters 
by tail-pieces d', links d' and arms or lugs do. 
F is the battery, F is the swell pedal and F. 
an insulated contact piece which is mounted 
upon the rear end of the pedal, or on some 
part moving therewith, or with an equivalent 
operating device as described, the contact be 
ing connected by a wire f to the battery sup 
ply lead f'. G is a switch quadrant having a 
series of insulated contacts G. G. G.8 over 
which the contact Eworks. The contacts G' 
G* G are connected with their respective 
electro-pneumatic levers within the boxE by 
wires g g g. e e'ee are the return wires 
of the several electro-pneumatic levers. F8 is 
a stop against which the swell pedal rests 
when fully depressed as shown. A spring 
(not shown) may return it to its normal posi 
tion when the weight of the foot is removed. 
The pedal being fully depressed against the 
stop F, all the shutters are fully opened by 
their respective springs and all the electro 
pneumatic levers are inoperative by reason 
of the contact F being removed from the 
contacts of the switch quadrant G. On per 
mitting the pedal to move into contact with 
the section G of the quadrant G, the circuit 
of No. 7 electro-pneumatic lever is closed, its 
bellows D' operated and the set of shutters 
C closed. In a similar manner, the down 
95 
OO 
IIc 
IL5 
I 25 
 
514,146 
3 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
ward movement of the contact F closes all 
the circuits in succession, causing their re 
spective shutters C C C to be successively 
closed. 
In the apparatus as thus far described, each 
shutter would re-open again under the in 
fluence of its counterbalancing spring as soon 
as the circuit of its electro-pneumatic lever 
had been broken by the movement of the con 
tact F off the corresponding contact, as G', 
onto the contact G next below it. To pre 
vent this re-opening of the shutters, the pedal 
contact F may be extended upward so that, 
as it moves downward over the quadrant, all 
the contacts G. G. Gabove its lower end are 
retained in circuit and their respective elec 
tro-pneumatic levers remain inoperative. 
Such an arrangement would, however, entail 
an undue expenditure of electric energy. To 
avoid such waste of power, I prefer to em 
ploy an arrangement, such for example, as 
the following, whereby the wind itself may 
be utilized to hold the larger shutters closed 
while the smaller ones are being operated. 
This arrangement may however be varied 
considerably, within the scope of the inven 
tion. 
Each electro-pneumatic lever is provided 
with a device such as shown in Fig. 4. 
E" is the primary valve of the electro-pneu 
matic lever, and E the perforated valve seat, 
whence, when the valve is depressed, the air 
may escape into the atmosphere through the 
tube E, and thus allow the lever to be oper 
ated, as is fully described in my specification 
Serial No. 406,071. Above each tube Ethere 
is mounted a small wind chamber E which 
is provided on its under side with a flexible 
diaphragm E and is furnished with a wind 
tube E. 
E is a light rod passing through one of the 
perforations in the valve seat and resting 
with its lower end against the valve E, its 
upper end being provided with a button E8 
bearing on the diaphragm E. 
E is a guide for the rod E and E0 a spring 
serving to take the Weight of the rod off the 
valve. Each tube E is connected at one end 
with the wind chamber E of one electro-pneu 
matic lever, and at the opposite end with the 
wind pipe d of the lever next below it in the 
series, as seen in Fig. 3. It will thus be seen 
that, as any given electro-pneumatic lever is 
operated by its circuit being closed (by the 
movement of the contact F over the quadrant 
G) a small amount of wind from its piped 
will pass by a tube Einto the chamber E' of 
the lever next above it in the series, and, by 
depressing the diaphragm E, rod E and valve 
E will retain said latter lever in its operative 
position and hold its corresponding swell 
shutter closed. The contact F is so arranged 
that (as seen in dotted lines at F") it touches 
the adjacent contact as G before it has quite 
moved off the contact G next above it. In 
this manner, wind is admitted Successively 
into each electro-pneumatic lever, and thence 
into the chamber E of the one next above it 
in the series, before the circuit of the latter 
lever has been broken. When the swell pedal 
is in its closed position, it rests, as shown at 
F in dotted lines, with its contact F bearing 
on the section G' of the switch quadrant G, 
the shutter C being then held closed by the 
action of the electric current and the remain 
der of the shutters by the wind alone, or 
the apparatus may be arranged in a reverse 
manner, so that the shutters are normally 
held closed by a spring or other device and 
are opened successively by the action of the 
electro-pneumatic levers. Also the switch 
contact G instead of being fixed may be mov 
able with the pedal and the contact F may 
be fixed, being connected as before with the 
battery supply lead, or the swell shutters 
may be operated by an arrangement such as 
shown in Fig. 5. The shutters C are con 
nected together in the usual manner by a rod 
Coperated in either direction by a pair of 
electro-pneumatic levers H II". 
J is a Switch having two insulated contacts 
J J separated by a gap or insulation piece 
J and connected respectively by wires j'j? 
with the electro-pneumatic levers HH'. The 
switch J is movable with the swell shutters, 
being to this end conveniently mounted on a 
pivot j and connected to the rod CS by a link 
for other light mechanical device. 
F is an insulated contact moving over the 
face of the switch and mounted upon the 
pedal F, or other equivalent operating device 
as described, or upon a finger, pointer or other 
part movable there with, the said contact be 
ing connected to the battery supply lead f' 
as before. The pedal F and switch J may be 
conveniently mounted on the same pivot j, 
each moving however independently of the 
other. As the pedal is depressed or raised, 
the contact F is brought to bear upon the 
contact J or J, the circuit of the electro 
pneumatic lever H' or H is closed and the 
shutters C opened or closed. The shutters 
being connected to the switch J as aforesaid, 
the latter is moved with them until its gap or 
insulation piece J is brought opposite to the 
contact F, and, the circuit of the electro-pneu 
matic lever being thereby broken, the move 
ment of the shutter ceases until the pedal is 
again operated in one or other direction. 
If desired, the switch J could be connected 
to the shutters by a pneumatic device such 
as shown in Fig. 6, in which J is a bellows 
having its tail piece connected by a link ji 
With the Switch J. J is a second bellows com 
municating With the first by a tube J and 
having its tail piece movable with the shut 
ter rod C as shown. The bellows are so ar 
ranged that, as the upper one is expanded by 
the movement of the rod C, the lower one is 
collapsed and Vice versa. In cases where the 
pedal is located at a distance from the organ, 
the switch contact F may be operated from 
the pedal by any suitable light mechanical 
device, or by a pneumatic or electro-pneu 
75 
90 
95 
IOC) 
I O5 
IO 
I 25 
 
4. 
514,146 
45 
55 
 
o 
15 
3o 
35 
40 
matic device. If desired, the switch J could 
be movable with the pedal and the contact E. 
with the shutters. 
When it is desired to alter the pitch of an 
Organ in relation to its keyboard, this may be 
accomplished, where electricity is employed, 
by arranging a compound switch or test board 
in such manner that the order of the connec 
tions between the keys and the organ pipes 
may be readily changed. In Figs. 7, 8 and 9, 
two ways of carrying this into effect are de 
picted by way of illustration only. 
K, Eigs. 7 and 8, is a fixed test board pro 
vided with a series of terminals lic c'. There 
are as many terminals k as there are keys in 
the organ, plus a few additional terminalsk' 
at each end of the series. Each end of the 
sound board is also provided with a few ad 
ditional pipes. Wires k connect the various 
terminals k c' with their respective electro 
magnetic or electro-pneumatic actions within 
the organ. K is a second but movable test 
board conveniently mounted in slides land 
capable of being operated by the performer 
through any suitable mechanism. It carries 
a series of terminals is corresponding in num 
ber to the organ keys and connected to the 
key contacts by wires le. The terminals lic 
are preferably in the form of spring fingers 
(see Fig. 8) adapted to bear upon the ends of 
the terminals kic'. By moving the board K' 
in one direction or the other for the distance 
of one or more terminals, the pitch of the or 
gan may be raised or lowered one or more 
semi-tones. In cases where additional pipes 
are not provided at the upper and lower ex 
tremities of the organ, it is advisable to so 
arrange the aforesaid test board or switch, 
that, when the organ is transposed, the keys 
left without pipes shall play one of their oc 
taves. This may be accomplished by con 
necting the additional terminals lc with the 
terminalsk representing their upper or lower 
octaves as shown in dotted lines at le. 
In Fig. 9, Kare a series of roller switches 
mounted on a board Kand each adapted to be 
operated independently of the others by any 
suitable device under the control of the per 
former. Each rollerisprovided with a series of 
insulated contact pieces K, each located in 
proximity to a pair of insulated pins KK with 
whichitis adapted to be placed in contact when 
the roller is turned. The corresponding pins 
K of all the rollers are connected by wiresk to 
their respective key contacts. Each pin K 
of any given roller K is connected by a wire, 
as kikkolc, with that pin K on the roller 
next above or below it, which represents the 
note a semi-tone higher or lower, as the case 
may be. The wires from the pins K of the 
last roller are led away to their respective 
electro-magnetic or electro-pneumatic actions 
within the organ. Assuming No. 3 roller to 
be the 'C' or normal roller, then, when 
this roller is turned as in Fig. 9, the organ is 
of normal pitch. If it be desired to raise the 
pitch of the organ a semi-tone, the roller No. 
. 
3 is turned out of action and the roller No. 4 
is so turned as to bring its contact pieces K. 
in touch with the adjacent pins KK. The 
various key contacts are now connected in cir 
cuit with the electro-pneumatic levers of those 
pipes which are a semi-tone higher in pitch 
than the pipes to which they were previously 
respectively connected. For example, the 
wire k from the key DD was previously 
connected by the roller No. 3 to the wire k0 
leading to the electro-pneumatic lever of the 
pipe D D,' but, on transposing, as before 
described, the wire k of the key D D is 
connected by the roller No. 4 with the wire 
ki, which forms part of the circuit of the 
electro-pneumatic lever of the pipe D.D.' 
As in the construction previously described, 
additional pipes may be provided at each end 
of the sound board, or, failing this, the keys, 
which are left without pipes when the organ 
is transposed, may be so connected as to play 
one of their octaves as before described. 
Forms or arrangements of compound 
Switches other than those described with ref 
erence to Figs. 7, 8 and 9 may be employed 
with the object of altering the relative con 
nections between the keys and the organ. 
In order to vary the quality and power of 
tone, one or more adjustable keys, touches or 
pedals may be provided and so arranged and 
connected that the speech of the various 
ranks of pipes may be controlled with but 
slight effort on the part of the performer, 
and, when desirable, without moving the stop 
or coupler keys or draw stops. An arrange 
ment of this kind is depicted in Figs. 10 and 
11. It is a roller capable of being operated 
by the performer by any suitable device, as, 
for example, by a pedall, link land arm I?. 
is a spring adapted to return the roller to 
its normal position when the pedal is released. 
The roller is provided on two opposite sides 
respectively with two rows of insulated me. 
tallie pins L' L. L is one of the stop or 
coupler keys, shown in its on position. 
Fis the battery supplying current to the stop 
key by wire l. L is the on contact and 
ll the wires leading therefrom to the console 
test board L. L is the off contact and 7, 
the wires leading from it to the board L5. 
lis the cable connecting the test board L5 with 
the battery F and comprising in its circuit (as 
at l') the various electro-pneumatic levers 
and other electrical devices within the organ. 
Each of the pins Laforesaid works between 
and in Contact with a pair of flexible insulated 
metallic pins LL connected in circuit with 
the on wires ll, while the pins L? work in 
a similar manner between flexible insulated 
pins L' connected in circuit with the off 
Wires ll. The turning of the roller in either 
direction thus closes or opens all the off 
and on' circuits at the pins LL8L9. L0 is 
an insulated contact strip running along the 
roller in proximity to the pins LL and adapt. 
ed. When the pedal l is depressed and the 
roller is turned, to break the on' and off 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
O 
2 
2 
514,146 
5 
O 
35 
45 
So 
M 
circuits as aforesaid, to bear against all the 
pins LL. When the roller is thus turned, 
the strip L" is also brought into contact with 
an insulated pin L' connected with a supply 
Wirel" from the battery, so that a current is 
sent through the wirell, pin Li, strip Lo, 
pins L, on wires l', and so on, through ali 
the electro-pneumatic levers connected there 
With, back to battery. The whole of the cor 
responding stops are thus instantly brought 
into Operation, and that quite independently 
9f the positions of the various stop and coup 
le, keys L. On releasing the pedal l, the 
roller resumes its normal position and all the 
stops are silenced except those the Stop keys 
Which happen to be in the speaking posi 
O. 
A separate roller and pedal, or its equiva 
lent, may be provided for each manual and 
for the pedals, or one roller and pedal may 
Operate the stops of the entire organ, or any 
predetermined portion thereof. By the use 
of an arrangement such as just described, a 
Sforzando effect may be instantaneously ob 
tained at will, 
When it is desired to obtain a prolongation 
of the Sound resulting from the depression of 
One or more of the keys or pedals, electrical 
contacts may be arranged within the organ 
Or console, two or more of said contacts be 
ing brought together whenever a note is 
SQunded, and the whole or a given number 
of them being rendered electrically effective 
or ineffective by the movement of a key, pedal, 
lever or the like, situated within reach of the 
performer. 
An arrangement for carrying the above 
into effect is seen in Fig. 12. H2 is a wind 
box containing a series of electro-pneumatic 
levers for operating the pallets of a corre 
Sponding number of pipes by means of bel 
lows Hand rods or pull-downs H'. h. is a 
Wire leading from the battery F through the 
contacts of one key (supposed to be situated 
at h) to its electro-pneumatic lever within 
the box H. h is the return wire to the bat 
tery. It is a second supply wire from the 
battery to the electro-pneumatic lever. The 
circuit of this latter wire is broken at h" and 
at le. At h"a switch His provided, by means 
of which the circuit may be opened or closed 
at Will by the performer, the switch being 
Operated by a pedal or other suitable device 
at the console. At h; the separated ends of 
the Wire I terminate in flexible insulated 
metallic pins H. H. His an insulated con 
tact mounted upon the tailpiece of the bel 
loWs Hand adapted to establish an electrical 
connection between the pins H H at each 
Operation of said bellows. Any suitable form 
of contact device may be employed in lieu of 
the above. When the circuit is closed at hi? 
by the depression of its key by the performer, 
the corresponding electro-pneumatic lever is 
operated, the bellows H expanded and the 
note sounded. If the switch H be open, the 
circuit i? IIIF remains broken when con 
f 
tact is made ath, and, on the release of the 
key and the consequent breaking of the cir 
cuit h II* l? F at h", the electro-pneumatic 
lever becomes inoperative, the contact at h" 
is broken and the pipe silenced. When, how 
ever, the switch H is closed by the operator 
and the key also depressed, both the circuits 
aforesaid are closed and the note sounded. 
On releasing the key, the circuith, Hh F is 
broken, but the circuit h h, Hh F remains 
closed, as the electro-pneumatic lever, which 
is included in the latter circuit, operates to 
maintain the contacts II II* H closed. The 
note is thus prolonged as long as the Switch 
at I remains closed. 
It will be understood that one switch H 
only is provided for each department of the 
organ or otherwise for each predetermined 
Series of contacts H", each contact II of the 
series being connected to a common wire h" 
in electric connection with the supply lead hi. 
In some cases, Iemploy a pneumatic or elec 
tro-pneumatic brake for the purpose Ofsteady 
ing the shutters at the moment of closing and 
thus preventing rebound of the same. An 
arrangement of this kind is shown in Fig. 13. 
C is the shutter rod and HS the bellows where 
by the shutters are opened. M is a Second 
bellows of smaller area than the bellows H. 
M' is a wind box communicating by the pas 
Sages in an' with the bellows M. M is a small 
double valve adapted to close either end of 
the passage n, one end of which communi 
cates with the wind box M', and the other 
with the atmosphere. m. are guides for the 
valve spindle. M is an adjustable abutment 
carried by shutter rod, or by Some part mov 
ing there with, and adapted to strike the end 
of the valve spindle a moment before the shut 
ters are fully closed. 
In the normal position of the parts, that is, 
when the shutters are open or partly open, 
the valve M is so operated by the pressure of 
the wind in the box M that the passage in is 
closed to the wind box and open to the atmos 
phere. The bellows M is thus free to move 
with the shutter rod and offers no impediment 
to the movement of the rod. When the shut 
ters are closed, however, the abutment M 
strikes the valve spindle and closes the pas 
sage in to the atmosphere, opening it at the 
same time to the wind box. The bellows M 
is instantly filled with wind and the shutters 
are held firmly closed against any tendency 
to rebound. The bellows M being of smaller 
area than the shutter operating bellows H, 
the latter, when operated, is able to move the 
shutter rod in defiance of the bellows M, to 
sufficient distance to release the valve Mand 
permit the bellows M to exhaust. 
In some cases I may mount the abutment 
MI9 upon the shutter rod in such manner that 
it may have a slight longitudinal play thereon, 
and, in this case, I connect the shutter clos 
ing bellows to the sliding piece supporting 
the abutment. The object of this is to per 
mit the abutment to act upon the valve a lit 
o 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
55 
 
514,146 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
so 
tle in advance of the movement of the shut 
terrod, that is, before the shutters are actu 
ally closed. The inflation of the bellows M 
then acts to firmly close the shutters and hold 
them closed. 
It will be obvious that, in place of the abut 
mentStriking a pneumatic valve as described, 
the abutment may carry or move an electric 
contact or may otherwise so act as to close an 
electric circuit which operates through an 
electro-pneumatic device to inflate the bel 
lows M. 
No claim is made by mein this application 
to such features of my pending application 
Serial No. 406,071, as may be incidentally 
herein shown and described. 
ta 
I declare that what I claim is 
1. In an organ, the combination, with the 
key A, of a stiff insulated spring B below the 
key and serving to limit the depression of the 
Same under normal touch, the insulated con 
tact pin B below the spring and serving as 
a stop for it and the key when depressed un 
der a more forcible touch, and the wires bb8 
connected respectively with the spring Band 
pin Band forming parts of the circuit of one 
or more electrically operated actions as de 
Scribed, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an organ, the combination, with a se 
ries of keys A, of a corresponding series of 
contact springs B below the same, a series of 
contact pins B' below the springs, a wire b' 
collnecting said springs through a common 
Supply Wire b with the like terminals of a 
corresponding series of electrically operated 
actions as described, a series of wires b con 
necting the pins B respectively with the op 
posite terminals of said actions, and a switch 
inserted in the wire b', substantially as de 
scribed. 
8. In combination with the swell-box of an 
Organ, a Series of swell shutters, each of a 
different area, and mechanism under the con 
trol of the performer whereby said shutters 
are successively opened or closed in the or 
der of their respective areas, substantially as 
described. 
4. In an organ, the combination, with the 
SWell-box C, of a series of counterbalanced 
swell shutters C CC C4 C5 and sets of cou 
pled shutters CC, having their areasincreas 
ing from one end of the series to the other, 
and mechanism whereby said shutters may 
be successively operated in one direction, 
Substantially as described. 
5. In an organ, the combination, with a se 
ries of counterbalanced swell shutters, of a se 
ries of electrically operated actions for suc 
cessively actuating said shutters in one direc 
tion, and a switch under the control of the per 
former, whereby the circuits of said actions 
may be successively made and broken, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. In an organ, the combination of the se 
ries of counterbalanced swellshutters CC, se 
ries of electro-pneumatic actions ED' D* and 
operating their respective shutters in one di 
rection, contacts G' G connected to their re 
spective actions each to one terminal thereof, 
contact F connected to all the opposite ter 
minals of said actions and adapted to COver 
one or all of the contacts G' G, and means 
whereby the operator may place the contact. 
F8 in contact successively with the series of 
contacts G' G', substantially as described. 
7. In an organ, the combination, with a Se 
ries of counterbalanced swell shutters, of a se 
ries of electrically operated actions for suc 
cessively actuating the same in one direc 
tion, a switch whereby the performer may suc: 
cessively make and break the circuits of Said 
actions, and a pneumatic device whereby the 
shutters are automatically held opened or 
closed in defiance of their counterbalancing 
devices by the agency of the wind pressure 85 
alone after the breaking of the circuits of 
their respective actions, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
8. In an organ, the combination, With a se 
ries of counterbalanced swell shutters, of a Se- 90 
ries of electro-pneumatic actions for success 
ively actuating the same in one direction, a 
switch for successively making and breaking 
the circuits of said actions, and a pneumatic 
device whereby the one or more electro-pneu- 95 
matic actions last in operation are automati 
cally retained in their operative condition af 
ter the breaking of their circuits, substantially 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
as described. 
9. In an organ, the combination, with a se- I oc 
ries of counterbalanced swell shutters, of a 
series of electro-pneumatic actions for suc 
cessively actuating the same in one direction, 
a switch for successively making and breaking 
the circuits of said actions, and a series of by- Io5 
pass devices, whereby the wind pressure from 
that electro-pneumatic action at any time in 
operation retains the previously operated ac 
tion or actions in an operative condition after 
the breaking of the circuit or circuits there- IIo 
of, substantially as described. 
10. In an organ, the combination of the se 
ries of counterbalanced swell shutters C 
C, series of electro-pneumatic actions ED 
Dsuccessively operating the same, switchF I 15 
G for placing the actions successively in and 
out of operation, and a by-pass device for 
each action in the series except the first, each 
by-pass being adapted to convey the wind 
pressure from the operative action next below 
it in the series to its own action and to apply 
it to the primary valve thereof in such man 
ner as to retain the latter in its operative po 
sition, substantially as described. 
11. The combination of the series of swell 
shutters C C, series of electro-pneumatic 
actions ED' D* therefor, action controlling 
switch FG, chambers E applied one to each 
action in the series except the first and hav 
ing their flexible sides EP connected as de 
scribed with the primary valves of their re 
spective actions, and wind passages E each 
I 25 
I3o 
- 
 
514,146 
connecting its respective chamber E with the stop keys, substantially as and for the pur 
Wind Space of the action next below it in the 
pose described. 
Series, substantially as described. 
19. The combination, with a series of Stop 
12. The combination of a series of electric 
slides and electric actions for opening and 
actions controlling respectively the pipes of 
closing said slides, of the switch L. L., insul 
an Organ, a Series of keys controlling respect 
lated pin L, line to battery land on con 
ively the circuits of said actions, a compound 
nections land l, whereby all the correspond 
or multiple switch through the separate con 
ing actions are immediately brought into ac 
tact devices of which said circuits pass re 
tion. 
Spectively, and means for operating said 
20. A series of electric actions h controlling 
SWitch in such a manner that the relative 
respectively a series of pipes, a series of keys 
connections of the circuit wires entering the 
controlling the circuits of their respective 
Opposite sides of the switch are simultane 
actions, a series of contact devices H and H 
ously altered, whereby the entire organ or a 
each closed on the operation of its respective 
given part thereof, may be transposed at will, 
action and each connected in circuit with 
Substantially as described. 
said action by a branch circuit hand a 
13. The combination, with the electrical 
switch II controlling said branch circuits and 
connections of the keyboard, of a compound 
adapted to simultaneously render them effect 
Switch board, whereby the connections with 
ive, whereby the prolongation of the notes 
the key board can be changed one or more 
may be obtained after the release of their 
keys, 
half notes. 
14. The combination, with the electrical 
21. The combination of circuit h. h. having 
Connections of an organ keyboard, of a com 
in it electric action h' and operating electro 
pound Switch board capable of moving the 
pneumatic lever in box H, pull down H", bel 
Connections forward or backward one or more 
lows H, contacts H and h, shunt h. and 
keys, and One or more additional pipes and 
switch h operated by a stop at the will of or 
additional terminals, whereby, if the pitch is 
ganist. 
altered, each key shall still operate a pipe. 
22. In combination with a swell shutter op 
15. In combination with a series of stop 
erating device, a pneumatic brake operated 
slides and a series of electric actions for re 
by the SWell shutter closing mechanism near 
Spectively operating said slides in one or both 
the termination of its stroke, whereby a rap 
directions, a series of stop keys L8 controlling 
idly accelerating resistance is brought to bear 
the circuits of said actions respectively, and 
upon the movement of the closing rod, but a 
a Switch L. adapted to simultaneously discon 
resistance SO regulated that, at its maximum, 
nect all the stop keys from their circuits and 
it shall be less than the force used in closing 
to close all the circuits of those electric ac 
the Shutters. 
tions which open in the said stop slides, where 
23. In combination with the swell shutters 
bits Sforzando effect may be produced at 
of an organ, a bellows opened by the closing 
movement of the shutters and adapted, when 
16. The combination of the spring roller L, 
inflated, to hold the shutters closed, an air 
pins IL, stop keys L, test board I, battery 
controlling device admitting air to the bel 
F, and Wires connecting the same, substan 
lows and an abutment moving with the shut 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
ters and adapted to operate said air control 
17. The combination of the roller L, wires 
ling device as the shutters close or are on the 
II, &c., pins L'L', projecting contact strip 
point of closing, whereby the shutters are 
L" and contact piece L, whereby, by means 
held firmly closed and rebound of the same 
of the pins LL, all the off or on wires 
when closed is prevented, substantially as de 
are brought into requisition that are connect 
Scribed. 
ed by keys Land by felt L0 all the off or 
24. The combination of rod CS, abutment 
On Wires are operated whether connected 
Mthereon, operating mechanisnu HS, bellows 
by keys L or not. 
M, passages n' and n, valve Mand valvebox 
M", substantially as and for the purposes de 
18. A Series of stop slides, a series of elec 
tric actions for respectively opening and clos 
scribed. 
ing the said slides, a series of stop keys L8 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
Controlling the circuits of both off and 
name to this specification in the presence of 
On electric actions and a switch L adapted 
two subscribing witnesses. 
to simultaneously break the action of both 
stop keys with both off' and on circuits 
and to close all the on circuits, whereby 
all the stop slides are immediately opened ir 
respective of the positions of their respective 
GEO. C. DYMOND, 
L. C. JOHNSON. 
ROBT. HOPE-JONES. 
Witnesses: 
W. 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
o 
II5 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514247.txt	(No Model.) 
... " 
J. R. SUT LIFF, 
CASTER, 
No. 514,247. 
Z/ 
Patented Feb. 6, 1894 
a 6 a.a. 6 a7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES R. SUTLIFF, OF MERIDEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE FOSTER, 
MERRIAM & COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CASTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,247, dated February 6, 1894. 
Application filed June 26, 1893, serial No. 478,862, (No model.) 
Io specification, in explaining its nature. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES R. SUTLIFF, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Meriden, in the county of New Haven and 
5 State of Connecticut, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Furniture-Casters, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part of this 
The invention relates to furniture casters, 
and consists in the construction substantially 
as hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, -Figure 1 is a plan view 
I5 of a partially formed blank from which the 
socket is made. Fig. 2 represents the curved 
sides of the blank brought together to form 
a tube. Fig. 3 is a view in perspective of the 
end plate. Fig. 4 shows the tube or socket 
2O and end plate assembled but not united, the 
upper surface of the plate bearing against the 
shoulder of the socket. Fig. 5 shows the plate 
as secured to the socket by upsetting the lower 
end of the tube upon the under surface of the 
25 plate. The said upset end, however, not hav 
ing been brought down to the under surface 
of the plate. Fig. 6 is a view in plan of the 
completed socket. Fig. 7 is a view in vertical 
section thereof. Fig. 8 is a view in perspec 
3o tive thereof. Figs. 9 and 10 show slight modi 
fications, to which reference is hereinafter 
made. 
The partially formed blank A. from which 
the socket is made is shown in Fig.1. Its sec 
35 tions a. a' are curved in cross-section, and 
When brought together, form a tube. Each 
has a section of the shoulder a formed by 
Striking up, and the inner end a is formed 
preferably as represented in Figs. 1, 6, and 7: 
4o that is, there is formed in the blank A mid 
way its length the angular recesses a and the 
circular cuts a, extending in both directions 
from the inner end of these recesses and when 
the sections a a' are bent or folded together, 
45 the part a forms the upper end of the socket, 
and the sections embraced between the curved 
cuts and the sides of the recesses forming the 
parts a are bent over the piece a as repre 
sented in Fig. 6, so that they act to reinforce 
so it and make a very solid end. There is also 
 
55 
formed in the sections a ainward extending 
points a, which are formed by striking the 
metal of the blank inward. The projections 
a extend into the cavity of the socket, and 
serve to engage and hold the rounded head B 
of the socket spindle. 
An end plate C, preferably having the up 
ward extending serrated edge b is attached to 
the socket by being slipped upon its lower 
end against the shoulder a, and having the 
lower edge of the socket turned outward upon 
the under surface of the plate. This lower 
edge may be spun outward or it may be set 
and turned or folded outward upon the plate, 
and the spaces or joints therein may be filled 
by flowing soft metal into them or not as 
may be desired, and the end of the socket 
as thus finished, is flush with the lower sur 
face of the end plate. A caster socket of this 
description is cheaply made and is very strong 
and durable. If desired, the socket may have 
a circular plate upon its inside, and at its 
upper end adjacent to the top plate (see Fig. 
10), and the spindle head retaining devices 
may be made as represented in Figs. 9 and 10, 
by cutting tongues on one or both sides of the 
socket and bending their ends inward. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. A caster socket composed of a single piece 
of sheet metal having curved sections a, a 
with their edges abutting, the circular end 
piece a, the angular portions a of the side 
sections overlapping said end-piece a, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination with the socket A com 
posed of a single piece of sheet metal having 
circular end-piece a and the curved side sec 
tions a, a', provided with indented shoulders 
a', a and angular extensions a overlapping 
the end-piece a, of the end plate C secured 
to the end of said socket and held against the 
shoulders a by outwardly bent flanges at the 
lower ends of said side sections, substantially 95 
as described. 
75 
JAS. R. SUTLIFF, 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. N. FOSTER, 
GEO. C. MERRIAM, 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514349.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
G. W. COLLIN, 
ARCH SUPPORT, WATER PURIFIER, AND HEATER, 
No. 514,349, 
Patented Feb. 6, 1894. 
3. 
g 
S. 
S 
sha 
in 
 
(, 
SS N 
WITNESSES 
1.N. 
3.47 agazzez 
E. S. 
2 
r 
is, 
//WWENTOR 
. 
ATTORMEYS. 
 
WASH:GYori, o, g, 
G. W. COLLIN. 
ARCH SUPPORT, WATER PURIFIER, AND HEATER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
(No Model.) 
No. 514,349. 
Patented Feb 6, 1894, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
f 
film. 
Siminut 
AEYH S2 2I 3 
3| 
SN SI 
WITNESSES: 
A 
IWWENTOR 
G2%. 77 Czezz. 
AT TORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. COLLIN, OF CORDELE, GEORGIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
JOHN W. BULLA, OF SAME PLACE. 
ARCH-SUPPORT, WATER PURI FER AND HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,349, dated February 6, 1894. 
Application filed May 1, 1898, serial No. 472,560, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. CoLLIN, of 
Cordele, in the county of Dooly and State of 
Georgia, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Arch-Support, Water Purifier 
and Heater, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention is an improvement in arch 
supports, Water purifiers and heaters and is 
in the nature of an attachment or apparatus 
for use in connection with the ordinary boiler, 
which will serve as an efficient arch support, 
as a feed water heater, as an auxiliary steam 
generator, and will also efficiently aid in se 
curing the best results in cleaning the boiler 
by blowing off. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
structions and combinations of parts as will 
be hereinafter described and pointed out in 
the claims. 
In the drawings-Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of theimproved apparatus partly broken 
away. Fig. 2 is a detail section on aboutline 
2-2 of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of a part of a furnace and boiler, the 
brickwork of the furnace being partly broken 
away. 
The boiler A may be of ordinary construc 
tion and at the end thereof and immediately 
over the flues I support what may for con 
venience of reference be termed the heater B 
the mud drum C being on a lower level than 
the heater and all being connected in the 
manner more fully described hereinafter. 
The heater B is formed with the end columns 
or chambers B B and the connecting pipes 
B. The columns B are curved from end to 
end corresponding to the curvature of the 
furnace arch and are provided in their inner 
faces with openings at binto which the ends 
of the pipes B are secured by expanding 
them therein or otherwise as desired. In 
their outer sides and opposite the openingst 
and the ends of the pipesBI form hand holes 
b' closed in use by the removable cover plates 
which may be removed to permit access to 
the interior of the columns or to facilitate 
cleaning the tubes B as may be desired. 
Manifestly these cover plates may be of any 
desired construction and may be secured in 
any suitable manner. 
In use the heater comprising the columns 
and the connecting pipes is supported by 
resting its curved end columns upon the walls 
M of the furnace the outer sides of the said 
columns being exposed so convenient access 
When so sup 
- may be had to the hand holes. 
ported the heater forms a firm base support 
for the furnace arch which may be built di 
rectly upon the end columns and tubes of the 
heater as will be readily understood. In each 
of the tubes B* I place a strip D of sheet cop 
per fitting it in the tube so it will be self sup 
porting by engaging at its edges with the 
tube and I serrate such edges at d to permit 
the circulation of water past such edges and 
also to reduce the liability of the plates be 
coming firmly fastened at their edges to the 
inside of the tubes by the lime and other de 
posits. It should be understood that the pur 
pose of these plates D is to take up lime and 
the like from the water to prevent scale in the 
boiler the copper plates having a greater af 
finity for such scale elements than the metal 
of the heater and boiler as is well understood. 
When the plates have become covered with 
scale they may be replaced by others and if 
they should be connected at any point to the 
tubes they may be knocked loose with a slight 
tap of a hammer. At its upper end the heater 
is connected by suitable pipes with the steam 
space of the boiler So the steam generated in 
the heater will pass into the boiler and di 
rectly into the steam space. This connection 
is preferably effected by the pipes Eleading 
from the upper ends of the column E' and 
uniting with a single pipe e which discharges 
into the top or upper portion of the boiler as 
shown. 
The mud drum C which may generally be 
of ordinary construction is provided with a 
copper plate F having Serrated edges and fit 
ted in the drum for the purpose of attaching 
the scale producing elements. 
The water or supply pipe G is provided 
with a valve g and has a branch H leading to 
and opening at h into the bottom of the boiler 
and is also provided with a branch or portion I 
leading to the mud drum and having a valve i. 
A pipe J is provided with a valve i and 
connects the mud drum with the lower end 
of one of the columns B a pipe K leading 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
514,849 
* 
. 
: 
* 
: 
: 
. 
from the upper end of the opposite columns: 
B and opening at k into the boiler at about 
or just below the lower water line. The mud 
drum has an escape or discharge pipe L pro 
vided with a valvel. 
It will be seen that by my improvement I 
form a support, for the arch of a return flue 
boiler, or a like arch in similar arrangement 
for a heater of feed water a generator of steam, 
and water purifier and mud separator. 
In operation the boiler is filled with water 
to the water line (valvel closed, and valvei 
open). The fire is built in furnace, and heat 
and flannes of combustion pass back under 
boiler, up against pipes B'B' and back through 
the boiler tubes. The water in pipes B*B 
quickly becomes heated rises through pipe K, 
into boiler at k, thus getting up a circulation 
of water from the bottom of boiler ath, through 
pipes H and I, mud trap Cand pipe Jinto dis 
tributing columns B'B' and tubes or pipes B 
B into boiler through pipe K making a con 
stant current one way through my device and 
boiler in one direction up through the arch 
support or heater and its connections. When 
feeding water to the boiler from the feed pipe 
G the water is forced through the pipe I into 
the mud trap C and is taken up by the cur 
rent formed in the arch support or heater and 
asses into boiler at k at high temperature. 
The pipes E allow steam to pass the top of 
columns. B'B' into the steam space of the 
The valves i and always remain 
boiler. 
open, except when cleaning out mud trap C, 
when they are closed. When blowing off sur 
face water in the boiler valve is closed and 
valve l is opened. 
In blowing off water from the bottom of the 
boiler, valvei is closed and valvel opened. 
When cleaning out the mud trap F the valves 
j and i are closed and the head C of the mud 
trap is removed. In cleaning out columns B' 
B' and pipes or tubes B* B* the cover plates 
at b' are removed, permitting convenient ac 
cess to such parts. 
By my improvement I attain a secure arch 
support so arranged that the water may freely 
circulate through it to avoid any burning or 
bending from overheating, and by the ar 
rangement of pipes connecting the several 
parts as shown and described I have a con 
stant and free circulation from the bottom of 
the boiler at h to the upper connection with 
the boiler at k whether feeding or not and it 
follows up the course taken by the Water that 
is through mud trap and arch support or 
heater and into the boiler at k heated to 
steaming point by its passage through the 
heater thus furnishing an efficient feed water 
heater. By the described circulation the sedi 
ment is drawn from the bottom of boiler into 
the mud trap the boiler being thus kept free 
from deposit on sheet over the fire. 
It will be understood that in addition to the 
use of the invention as an arch support for 
. 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
' 
, 
; 
: 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
Patent, is- 
tubular boilers, the improvement, may be used 
on limekilns, coke ovens and other furnaces 
requiring a return arch support. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
1. A water heater and arch support for boil 
ers consisting of the curved end reservoir col 
umns, extended practically from base to crown 
of the arch and the pipes extending between 
and communicating at their ends with the 
said columns substantially as set forth. 
2. A water heater and arch support for boil 
ers consisting of the end reservoir columns 
curved longitudinally and provided in their 
outer sides with hand openings, closures for 
such openings, and the tubes connecting said 
columns and opening into the inner sides 
thereof opposite the hand openings substan 
tially as set forth. . 
3. An improved arch support for boiler fur 
naces which consists of hollow end reservoir 
columns curved longitudinally and pipes con 
necting and opening at their opposite ends 
into said end columns in combination with 
the boiler and connections between said arch 
support and boiler substantially as set forth. 
4. A combined water heater and arch sup 
port for boilers which consists of the separate 
end reservoir columns extended practically 
from base to crown of the arch, curved longi 
tudinally and provided with water and steam 
connections and the pipes extending between 
and communicating at their ends with the 
said end columns, all substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
5. The combination with the boiler and the 
mud drum, of the heater having longitudi 
nally curved end columns and cross or con 
necting tubes opening at their ends into said 
columns, the water connections, and the 
steam connections between the upper end of 
the heater and the steam space of the boiler 
all substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
6. In combination substantially as de 
scribed, the boiler, the mud drum and the 
heater, the feed pipe branched in advance of 
the mud drum and having separate branches 
leading to the mud drum and to the boiler, the 
water pipe connecting the drum and heater, 
a Water pipe connecting the heater and boiler 
and a steam connection between the upper 
end of the heater and the steam space of the 
boiler substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination of the boiler, the heater, 
the drum, the pipe G having branch H and 
branch I provided with a valve i, the pipe J 
connecting the drum and heater and having 
a valved and the pipe K connecting the boiler 
and heater all substantially as described 
whereby the valves may be manipulated to 
blow off from the top or bottom of the boiler 
as and for the purposes specified. 
8. In an apparatus substantially as de 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
75 
95. 
Eos) 
O 
II 5 
I 25 
30 
O 
25 
35. 
45 
55 
65 
 
514,849 
3 
scribed a sediment accumulating plate formed 
of copper and having its opposite edges ser 
rated substantially as set forth. 
9. The combination substantially as de 
scribed of the boiler, the heater having curved 
end columns B' and connecting tubes B, the 
water pipe K connecting the upper end of 
therheater with the boiler, the steam connec 
tions leading from the upper end of the heater 
to the steam space of the boiler, the drum, 
the pipe J connecting the drum and heater, 
and the pipe Ghaving branches Hand Ilead 
ing respectively to the boiler and to the drum 
all substantially as set forth. 
o 
10. The combination of the boiler the side 
walls M of the furnace the heater having 
curved end columns resting upon said side 
walls and tubes B connecting said end col 
umns and the arch built directly upon and 
supported by said heater substantially as set 
forth. 
April 17, 1893. 
GEORGE W. COLLIN, 
Witnesses: 
V. L. EMERSON, 
FRED HARDER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514449.txt	J. DO NOWAN. 
RAI, WAY WELOCIPEDE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 514,449. 
 
% 2. % % % 
2 
Z 1. 
O 
22 SS 
sigs Six 
yZX S 
273.32.4 - 
Zaire/26or 
/277 ves. Zozoa aeze 
% the?dapur. 
The rationAL Litkoarariana company, 
WAssisston, D.C., 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 54,449. 
 
J. DONO WAN. . 
RAILWAY. WEI,00IPEDE. 
. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
2 
. Patented Feb. 13, 1894. 
 
 
K 
 
 
 
 
S 
S S 
77-z-z-esses 
w 
Zzzrezzor 
7277 ves. Zorzel-6-7a 
is Aria T-i-gear.Aries coffAY. 
WAS:XGS is c, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES DONOVAN, OF THREE RIVERS, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THE ROB 
ERTS, THROP & COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
RAILWAY-VELOCIPEDE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,449, dated February 18, 1894. 
Application filed September 26, 1893, Serial No. 486,531 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES DONOVAN, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Three 
Rivers, in the county of St. Joseph and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
usefulmprovementsin Railway-Velocipedes, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had therein to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction of the frame, the seat support, the 
drive mechanism, and further in the peculiar 
construction, arrangement and combination 
of the various parts. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of my improved machine. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view thereof with the seat, and part of 
the driving gear removed. Fig. 3 is a verti 
cal section on line acac Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a lon 
gitudinal section on line if y Fig. 2. Fig. 5 
is a perspective view of the parts shown in 
Fig. 4 detached. Fig. 6 is a section on line 
2. 2 in Fig. 2. Fig. 7 is a section on line it u 
Fig. 2. Fig. S is a section on line 
2, Fig. 7. 
Fig. 9 is a section on line U at Fig. 2. 
My machine comprises a rigid frame sup 
ported by two track wheels in line, and an 
auxiliary wheel supported on a frame or out 
rigger, running on the opposite rail. The 
frame consists of the straight side bar A on 
the inside of the wheels and the side bar B 
on the outside of the wheels, the side bar B 
having the central offset section C between 
the wheels formed by the bends C', as plainly 
shown in Fig. 2. 
D is the drive wheel and D' its companion 
wheel at the forward end of the frame. These 
wheels are journaled on shafts E, which serve 
as tie-rods to connect the ends of the frame 
together. The shafts E are supported in lon 
gitudinally adjustable boxes F on the frame. 
These boxes are provided with clamping bolts 
F' which pass through longitudinal slots F 
in the side bars of the frame and through 
apertures F in adjusting bolts G which slid 
ingly engage in the ends of the side bars, the 
side bars being tubular. 
G' is a nut for adjusting the bolt G and G 
are clamping nuts for clamping the boxes F 
in their adjusted positions, I preferably ar 
range a curved plate or washer Gbeneath the 
nuts G. This construction enables me to ad 
just the ends of the axle separately so as to 
perfectly align the wheels and at the saline 
time to adjust the rear axle to and from the 
crankshaft H to tighten the drive chain H'. 
This drive chain passes over the Sprocket 
pinion I, which is secured to the hub of the 
rear wheel or to a sleeve to which that hub 
is secured, as shown in Fig. 6, and over the 
sprocket wheel J on the drive shaft H. The 
drive shaft is journaled in boxes on the 
under side of the frame, centrally between 
the wheels and at its end is formed of pro 
vided with cranks K, by which power is ap 
plied through the hand evers L and connect 
ingrods L. At the ends of the cranks Kare 
the pedal cranks M provided with suitable 
pedals and adapted for foot propulsion, the 
four cranks being set at quarters around the 
drive shaft. The handle levers L are jour 
naled at the lower end of a bracket Odepend 
ing below the frame and serving as a tie for 
the side bars in rear of the front wheels. 
P is a saddle post carrying at its upper end 
a suitable saddle P' and at its lower end bi 
furcated, as shown in Fig. 9, the bifurcations 
P2 extending to each side of the frame, being 
secured in position by the clamping bolt Q, 
which at the same time acts as a tie for the 
side bars of the frame in front of the rear 
wheel, and which are spaced apart by the 
sleeve Q between theside bars, through which 
the bolt passes. 
The outrigger consists of the two braces R. 
R' secured respectively to opposite ends of 
the inner side bar and adjustably Secured to 
gether near their outer ends, one of the bars 
carrying the flanged guide wheel S journaled 
on a suitable stub shaft. It will be observed 
that the weight of the rider is sustained upon 
the inner side bar and the offset section C of 
the outside side bar, which brings nearly his 
entire weight inside the frame and still Sup 
porting it upon the frame. Supporting the 
weight of the rider on the frame enables me 
to use a light outrigger, and bringing his 
weight inside of the wheels prevents danger 
of accident in going around curves. 
The saddle post I preferably brace by means 
of braces S' extending to the ends of the side 
bars and secured in position by the clamping 
bolts G. 
The central section of the frame I truss by 
O 
2C) 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
75 
9o 
g 5 
CO 
 
514,449 
means of truss rods T made in sections hav. 
ng their inner ends connected to the box T', 
in Which the crank shaft is journaled, as 
plainly shown in Fig. 8, the outer ends of the 
Sections being attached to the under side of 
the side bars by suitable bolts, as shown in 
Fig. 1. This construction of crank enables 
me to apply power by both hands and feet. 
Many accidents happen in-the use of rail 
Way Velocipedes from the fact that the noise 
which the wheels make upon the rails pre 
yents the rider from hearing an approaching 
train until too late to escape. To overcome 
this difficulty and to make the wheels noise 
less I apply with cement or in any other suit 
able manner to the rim of the wheel a non 
metallic covering U extending from the outer 
edge of the wheel rim to the edge of the flange 
and forming the tread of the wheel. This 
strip or band I preferably make of canvas and 
rubber substantially like rubber belting. 
I have foundin use that the only noise which 
Such a Velocipede will make will be the noise 
due to the touching of the wheel flange upon 
the inner face of the rail, the velocipede going 
practically noiselessly. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a railway velocipede, the combination 
With the wheels, of a frame supported on the 
Wheels composed of a straight inner bar and 
an Outer bar, the outer bar having a central 
section bent inwardly between the wheels, and 
a Seat supported on both bars, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a railway velocipede, the combination 
With the frame comprising a straight inner 
bar and an in Wardly bent outer bar forming 
a central offset portion, of shafts connecting 
the ends of the frame, wheels journaled on 
the shafts, and tie rods connecting the inner 
bar With the central offset portion of the outer 
bar, substantially as described. 
8. In a railway velocipede, the combination 
O 
25 
30 
35 
4.O 
45 
55 
65 
75 
with the frame comprising a straight inner 
bar and an inwardly bent outer bar forming 
a central offset portion, of shafts connecting 
the ends of the frame, wheels journaled on 
the shafts, tie rods connecting the inner bar 
with the central offset portion of the outer bar, 
and spacing blocks on the tie rods between 
the bars, substantially as described. 
4. In a railway velocipede, the combination 
of the wheeled frame composed of tubular side 
bars tied together, of axles supporting the 
wheels, boxes on the frame in which said axles 
engage, a slotted bearing in the ends of the 
side bars, clamping bolts on the boxes engag 
ing through said slots, and adjusting bolts in 
the ends of the bars, through which said bolts 
pass, substantially as described. 
5. In a railway velocipede, the combination 
with the wheels and frame, of a drive mech 
anism comprising a shaft having U-cranks on 
its opposite ends between the ends and center, 
hand levers connected to the cranks, crank 
arms fixed to the outer ends of the shaft be 
yond the cranks, and arranged at an angle to 
the cranks, and pedals on the crank arms, 
substantially as described. 
6. In a railway velocipede, the combination 
of the wheeled frame composed of tubular side 
bars tied together, of axles supporting the 
wheels, boxes on the frame in which said axles 
engage, a slotted bearing in the ends of the 
side bars, clamping bolts on the boxes engag 
ing through said slots adjusting bolts in the 
ends of the bars through which said bolts pass, 
nuts on the end of the clamping bolts, and 
curved washers between the nuts and sidebars, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES DONOWAN. 
- 
- 
Witnesses: 
JAMES E. BUNN, 
MARVIN H. BUMPHREY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514550.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 514,550, 
W. E., HILL, 
LOG LOADER AND TURNER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894, 
Y 
: 
w: 
f 
A 
i 
A. 
g 
E. 
g : I 
iii.) 
 
  
: 
a slaiti as 
Witnessess: 
(2%zaze/ 
 
 
: 
traits& 8:3&PANY 
R 
AST 8, 8. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. E. HILL 
LOGOADER AND TURNER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 514,550. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894. 
SS 
ERY 
N EGA ME2. 
rtittriticags? 
X6. 
NYN 
rfs 
It 
R 
S 
 
 
 
itnessess: 
2%zza24/. 
...Qaa/8%rz. 
- 
It Liegnitor. 
(242-0.4% 
Bucz/2.6% 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. HILL, OF KALAMAZOO, MICHIGAN. 
LoG LOADER AND TURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,550, dated February 13, 1894. 
Application filed November 14, 1892, Serial No. 451,959. (No model.) 
r 5 
20 
25 
- 
tion. 
showing the shape of the pivoted receding 
To all, whom it may concerns 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. HILL, a teeth and the manner in which they act. Fig. 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 9 is a view of a cylinder on bearings at the 
bottom that can be used in place of cylinder 
city of Kalamazoo, in the county of Kalama 
E and its attachments. Fig. 10 is a detail of a 
Zoo and State of Michigan, have invented a 
modification of the bar F and H showing the 
certain new and useful Log Loader and 
perpendicular bar F at some distance from 
Turner, of which the following is a specifica 
the end of the bar H. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
My invention relates to improvements in 
out the several views. 
log loading and turning machines in which 
C, O, O, B and A are the floor and sill, 
an upwardly projecting toothed bar support 
posts, carriage and headblocks, and log skid 
ed on a horizontal bar is operated by the di 
way of a saw-mill in the ordinary form. 
rect action of pistons and piston rods of per 
E and D are fixed upright steam cylinders 
pendicular or nearly perpendicular steam 
containing pistons with piston rods projecting 
cylinders without the intervention of gearing 
through stuffing boxes and guides, the piston 
or pulleys. 
rod of cylinder E, connecting by means of the 
The objects of my improvements are first 
link L, to the horizontal bar H, the piston rod 
to provide a connection of the piston rods to 
of cylinder D connecting directly to the bar H, 
the horizontal bar that will accommodate it 
under the bar F. The bars F and Harebolted 
self to the lateral motion of the end of the bar 
or riveted solid together and are practically 
when it is tipped; second, to bring the per 
one piece when finished. The piston rod of 
pendicular ball directly above one of the cyl 
cylinder E is attached to a guide block M, 
inders so that a more direct action is secured; 
which contains an antifriction roller and re 
third, to afford a simple means of connecting 
ciprocates on the guide N. The top of the 
the operating lever with the valve stems of 
piston rod of cylinder D is attached to a guid 
the cylinders; fourth, to provide by counter 
ing cross head P, which reciprocates on the 
balanced bell cranks against loss of motion 
guide rods R. R., Fig. 5, which are separated 
between the connecting rods, bell cranks and 
to allow the toothed bar F to pass between 
rock-shafts of the operating mechanism and 
them when it is in operation. The teeth a ca, 
also by the same means take the weight of 
Fig. 8 are shaped with a rounded part a'a' 
the connecting rods from the valve stems; 
projecting beyond the points g g so that when 
fifth, to provide teeth in the toothed bar that 
the teeth come in contact with the flat sawed 
will not mar or injure the sawed surface of 
surface of a log they will slide over without 
a log but will roll a log by taking hold of the 
tearing, and the teeth below the sawed part 
rough surface, or below the sawed surface. I 
will be the only ones to engage the log. The 
attain these objects by the mechanism illus 
teeth shown are pivoted receding teeth but 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
the same would be true of fixed teeth so 
which 
formed. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the machine (with 
The operating lever T with heavy weight 
out the operating mechanism) in position in 
at the bottom is pivoted on the side of the 
a saw-mill. Fig. 2 is a view of the same with 
rock shaft U, so that it will oscillate in the 
the operating mechanism attached looking 
direction of the length of the rock shaft but 
down from line 2-2 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
will when moved to either side cause the rock 
view to the right hand from line 3-3 of Fig. 
shaft to rock. To the lever T is pivoted the 
1. Fig. 4 is a detail of cylinder E on the line 
connecting rod U, which is pivoted to bell 
4-4, Fig. 1, looking to the right. Fig. 5 is a 
crank y, which is pivoted to connecting rod 
detail of cylinder D on line 5-5 Fig. 1, look 
w", which is pivoted to bell crank y', which 
ing down. Fig. 6 is a detailed view of the op 
is pivoted to connecting rod v', which is piv 
erating lever T looking to the left on line 
oted to counterbalanced bell crank V, which 
6-6 Fig. 2. Fig. 7 is another detail of the op 
is pivoted to connecting rod r, which connects 
erating lever on line 7-7 Fig. 2. Fig. 8 is a 
with the valve stem c, on cylinder D. To the 
detail of the upper end of the tooth bar F 
35 
AO 
45 
so 
55 
5 
85 
9o 
95 
ICO 
514,550 
3o 
20 
arma, of the rock shaft U is pivoted the con 
necting rod u, which is pivoted to the bell 
crank 2, which is pivoted to the counterbal 
anced bell crankW, which is pivoted to the 
connecting rod which connects with the valve 
stem of cylinder E. These connecting rods 
and bell cranks might be attached to the le: 
over at a point above the rock shaft and to an 
upwardly projecting arm, on the rock shaft 
should it be found more convenient. I pre 
C 
fer to attach them below. 
The weights attached to the arms of the 
bell-cranks VW' 
prevent loss of motion in the 
joints between the bell-cranks and connect 
ingrods of the operating mechanism and also 
take the weight of the connecting rods T from 
the valve stems c thus causing the valves to 
respond quickly and easily to the motions of 
the weighted operating lever T.. I prefer to 
use bell cranks and connecting rods to rock 
shafts and connecting rods to connect the op 
erating lever with the valves of the steam cyl 
inder because the torsion of rock shafts pre 
vents a perfect control of the valves. 
My machine is operated by tipping the op 
25 
. s erating lever T. By examining Figs. 2, 3, 6 
and 7 the action will be understood. Tipping 
the lever Tin the direction of the line 7-7 
Fig.2 toward the right will rock the rock shaft 
U, and cause by its connection with the valve 
stem, steam to be admitted to the bottom of 
the cylinder E which will raise that end of 
the bar H, which will tilt the toothed bar 
away from the carriage B, as shown by the 
dotted lines in Fig.1. Tipping the lever T 
in the opposite direction will admit steam 
to the top of cylinder Ewhich will bring that 
end of the bar H down and move the toothed 
bar F in the opposite direction. By tipping 
the top of the lever T toward the cylinders 
in a line parallel with the line 6-6 Fig. 2, 
steam will be admitted to the bottom of cyl 
inder D, which will raise that end of the hori 
zontal bar H causing the toothed bar F to tilt 
toward the carriage lis. When the bar has 
already been elevated if the lever Tibe tipped 
in the opposite direction from that above in 
dicated steam will be admitted to the top of 
the cylinder D, and that end of the bar H 
will be lowered and the toothed bar F will be 
tilted away from the carriage B. The single 
lever thus operates each cylinder separately. 
By tipping the lever T in directions between 
those above indicated both cylinders can be 
operated at the same time. Steam can be 
admitted at the top of both cylinders or at 
the bottom of both cylinders in either equal 
or unequal amounts thus causing the toothed 
bar to raise or lower or to tilt and raise and 
lower at the same time. Or steam can be ad 
mitted to the top of either cylinder and to the 
bottom of the other at the same time and in 
varying amounts thus tilting the bar without 
changing its height. These will be the mo 
tions of the toothed bar when it is not operat 
ing on a log or timber. When the toothed 
bar is acting on a log or timber a little steam 
4d 
so 
45 
5O 
55 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
- 
90 
75 
85 
95 
admitted to the top of cylinder Einstead 
of moving the toothed bar holds the toothed 
bar against the timber with an elastic yield 
ling pressure, and the larger cylinder D raises 
the whole bar and rolls the log or timber to: 
place. By these various operations the 
its 
toothed bar will slide a log sidewise or roll or. 
turn it or push it solid against the knees of 
the head blocks or turn it on the head blocks 
as desired. 
Acylinder on trunnions at the bottom shown 
in Fig. 9 could be substituted for cylinder E 
in Fig.1. The entire cylinder and piston 
oscillating and taking the place of the link L. 
The toothed bar F can be attached 
in Fig l. 
at any point on the horizontal bar H, or to 
an extension of the bar H beyond the point 
where the pistons are attached but it is pre 
ferred to have the bar F in this machine at 
tached directly over the cylinder D. 
I am aware that log loading and turning 
machines have been constructed having a 
toothed bar operated directly by pistons of 
steam cylinders, by a single operating lever 
prior to this invention so I do not claim that 
construction broadly, but 
What I do claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a log loader and turner, two upright 
stationary steam cylinders, the piston of one 
of which is attached by a vertical link to the 
end of a horizontal bar carrying an upwardly 
projecting toothbar, at its opposite end and 
the piston rod of the other pivoted directly 
to said horizontal bar, under the vertical 
toothed bar, for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a steam log loader and turner an up 
right bar for handling the logs, attached at 
the end of a horizontal bar, directly above 
the piston of one of the operating cylinders 
in combination with pistons of stationary 
steam cylinders connected to the horizontal 
bar to operate the same for the purpose speci 
fied. 
3. In a steam log loader and turner, teeth 
in the toothed bar with rounded and smooth 
portions projecting beyond the points of the 
teeth so that the points of the teeth shall be 
between the line of the smooth portions and 
the bar, for the purpose specified. 
4. In a steam log loader and turner, having 
two fixed cylinders, a vertical link connect 
ing the piston rod of one of them to a hori 
Zontal bar carrying an upwardly projecting 
toothed bar at its opposite end the said 
toothed bar being directly over the other cyl 
inder, for the purpose specified. 
5. In a steam log loader and turner, having 
steam cylinders whose valves are controlled 
by operating levers, the combination of the 
hand operating lever, connecting rods, coun 
terbalanced bell cranks and the valve stems 
substantially as described. 
6. In a log loader and turner the combina 
tion of steam cylinders E, and D, and their 
pistons and piston rods, connected to the 
guide blocks P, and M, running on guides N, 
II5 
I 25 
O 
OO 
514,550 
3 
and R, R, the vertical link L, the horizontal Ital bar with one end pivoted to one cross 
bar H, the toothed bar F, the receding teeth head, an approximately vertical link connect 
ing the opposite end of said horizontal bar to 
a, a, the weighted operating lever T, and the 
the cross head on the opposite guide, and an 
rock shaft U, with an arm near the lever 
upright toothed bar carried by said horizon 
both the arm and the lever being connected 
tal bar, the said cross heads being independ 
by means of bell cranks, connecting rods and 
ently reciprocated by suitable means, for the 
counterbalanced bell cranks to the valve 
purpose specified. 
stems of the cylinders, all substantially asset 
9. In a log loader and turner, a toothed bar 
forth for the purpose specified. 
in combination with hinged receding teeth, 
7. In a steam log loader and turner, the 
the outer ends of said teeth being rounded 
combination of two upright cylinders below, 
and projecting beyond the points, so that the 
the piston rod of one pivoted directly to a 
points of the teeth shall be between the line 
horizontal bar carrying an upright toothed 
of the rounded portions and the bar, for the 
bar, the piston rod of the other attached to 
purpose specified. 
the horizontal bar by a short approximately 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
vertical link adapted to oscillate to both 
my hand and seal in the presence of two wit 
sides of the center of the cylinder when the 
log turner is in operation, and suitable means 
eSSeS. 
of admitting steam to the steam cylinders, 
for the purpose specified. 
8. In a log loader and turner, the combina 
tion of two vertical parallel guides, suitable 
cross heads on each of said guides, a horizon 
ELBERT S. Roos, 
CoRAEVELYNE WESTBROOK. 
WILLIAM E. HILL. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
d 
15 
20 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514650.txt	H. FRIEDEBORN. 
TWIN SCREW STEAM. ENGINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894, 
(No Model.) 
No. 514,650. 
 
N 
is 
20 fresses; 
f 71.4 
inz/u%fer 
 
 
Vre were for 
/%zaagaz7%ze. 
AforgeY. 
is stat. etcrane cessipar 
finiste 
, e. 
(No Model.) 
No. 514,650. 
H. FRIEDEBORN 
TWIN SOREW STEAM. ENGINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894, 
 
20i treesses. 
a 72%er. 
&22/7.42% 
Via were for 
rewaz,%rt, 
4 
42%ry egy. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMANN FRIEDEBORN, OF MUNDEN, GERMANY. 
TWIN-S CREW STEAM - ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,650, dated February 13, 1894. 
Application filed August 18, 1893, Serial No. 483,463, (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HERMANN FRIEDEBORN, 
a subject of the King of Prussia, German Em. 
peror, and a resident of Minden, in the Prov. 
ince of Hanover, Kingdom of Prussia, Ger 
man Empire, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Double - Cylinder 
Steam-Engines, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to double-cylinder 
steam-engines, as for instance twin-engines 
or compound-engines, in which two parallel 
shafts are turned by two cranks rotating in 
the same plane, and my improvements in such 
steam-engines relate:first, to the connection 
of said two cranks with each other and with 
a third, auxiliary or guide-crank, which also 
rotates in the same plane, and the angular 
position of which constantly corresponds with 
the angular position of the other two cranks, 
and the purpose of which is to maintain the 
angular positions of said two main cranks at 
every movement in perfect accordance; sec 
9nd, to the arrangement of the cylinder, or, 
in other words, to the mode of connecting the 
piston-rods with the three coupled cranks, be 
fore mentioned, in such a manner that the 
cylinders reciprocally overcome the dead 
points of their cranks; third, to the employ 
lment of said auxiliary or guide-crank as valve 
gear for both the cylinders, in order to sim 
plify the construction of the engine generally, 
and the construction of the valve-motion es 
pecially. 
In order to make my invention more clear, I 
refer to the accompanying drawings, in which 
similar letters denote similar parts, and in 
which 
Figure I is a front-view of the steam-engine; 
Fig. II a vertical section, taken on line 8-9 
of Fig. I; Fig. III a detail, showing the re 
versing-lever; Fig. IV a back-view of the en 
gine, the valve-motion being in section; Fig. 
W a part of the axle of the auxiliary crank, 
With parts of the valve-motion, drawn in a 
larger scale; Fig. WI a vertical section, taken 
on line 10-11 of Fig. W, and Fig. VII is a de 
tail of the valve-motion. 
The two main-cranksa and a are connected 
with each other by the coupling-rod b, and 
with the auxiliary or guide-crank a by the 
two coupling-rods b' and b, the rods b b' and 
b forming a triangle. This coupled system a 
a' a, b b'bis moved from the high-pressure 
cylinder cand the low-pressure cylinder c' by 
the connecting-rods d and d", which are cross 
ing each other shortly below crank a. The 
cylinders c and c' are secured in an inclined 
position to the common frame e, in which are 
also provided the bearings f and f' for the 
crank axles g and g, the latter belonging to 
the auxiliary crank a. Crank-axle g has a 
prismatic elongation g (Figs. II and W.) two 
opposite sides of which are provided with 
grooves g. Into these latter are placed the 
slides h, and h' each of which has an oblique 
rib h; both the slides are at their outer pro 
jecting ends connected by an intermediate 
part i (Fig. VII) of suitable shape. 
The oblique ribs h hold the eccentrick, 
the latter having a long, quadrangular hole 
ic', and suitable oblique grooves within the 
broader sides of said ho, into which the 
ribs are catching. Eccentrick holds the two 
eccentric straps land l, which act in known 
manner on the slide-valves or other kind of 
valves within the valve-chests in and n' by 
the eccentric rods in and 7. 
A remarkable feature of my invention con 
sists in the ring o, Figs. II and W, which sup 
ports the elongation g within the hind part 
of the bearing f'. Ringo rotates with crank 
axle g or with its elongation g respectively, 
and has also suitable grooves for receiving 
the ribs h, when the double-slide h h' is axi 
ally moved; said grooves within ring O form, 
so to say, elongations of the grooves within 
eccentric le. 
The purpose of the arrangement, described 
in the last three paragraphs, is to effect the 
reversing of the valve-gear in a quick and re 
liable manner, without requiring a stoppage 
of the engine. This reversing is effected by 
displacing the double-slideh h' axially within 
the grooves g of the prismatic elongation g 
of crank-axle g', so as to cause thereby a ra 
dial displacement of the eccentric k with its 
straps ll, and, consequently, a corresponding 
movement of the valves. 
The double slide I h rotates, as a matter 
of course, constantly; in order to move it axi 
ally during its rotation, the head of the dou 
ble-slide with its connecting-part is rounded 
at hi, Fig. V, and carries at that place a ring 
go 
95 
C. C. 
t 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
514,650 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
of the frame. 
2, Fig. II, which is connected with the re 
Versing-lever q, Fig. III, the latter being piv 
toted at 2 to any suitable part or projection 
Having thus fully described the nature of 
my invention, what I desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States is 
1. In a double-cylinder steam-engine with 
tWO coupled main-cranks acting on two shafts, 
the combination with the main-cranks at a', 
of an auxiliary guide-crank a coupled to said 
Cranks a C', for the purpose as described. 
2. In a double-cylinder steam-engine with 
tWO Coupled main-cranks, acting on two shafts, 
the combination with the main-cranks a, a?, 
of an auxiliary guide-crank acoupled to said: 
cranks C. C., the cylinders being arranged in 
an inclined position and the connecting-rods 
Crossing each other, for the purpose as de 
Scribed. 
3. In a double-cylinder steam-engine with 
tWO coupled main-cranks acting on two shafts, 
the combination with the main-cranks at a', 
of an auxiliary guide-crank a coupled to said 
Cranks C, a, said crank a being adapted to 
act on the steam-distributer, for the purpose 
as described. 
4. In a double-cylinder steam-engine with 
tWO coupled main-cranks acting on two shafts, 
the combination with the main cranks C. C.", 
of an auxiliary guide-crankct coupled to said 
cranks ca, said crank a being adapted to 
act on the steam-distributer, the cylinders be 
ing arranged in an inclined position and the 
connecting-rods crossing each-other, for, the 
purpose as described. 
5. In a double-cylinder steam-engine with 
two coupled main-cranks acting on two shafts, 
the combination with the main-cranks a C', 
of an auxiliary guide-crank a coupled to said 
cranks CL d', axleg of said crank C. having 
eccentric (cadapted to act simultaneously on 
the valves of both cylinders, for the purpose 
as described. . 
6. In a double-cylinder steam-engine with 
two coupled main cranks acting on two shafts, 
the combination with the main-cranks a C. 
of an auxiliary guide-crank a coupled to said 
cranks C.C.', axleg' of said crank a having 
eccentric k adapted to act simultaneously on 
the valves of both cylinders, the latter being 
arranged in an inclined position and the con 
necting-rods crossing each other, for the pur 
pose as described. 
In testimony whereof. I have signed this 
Specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
HERMANN FRIEDEBORN. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS MULLER, 
WILHELMSCHMIDT. 
O 
at 5 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514750.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 514,750, 
D, HEPP. 
ROD OR SEAT MACHINE 
5 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894. 
y/7/ASSAS 
1 e/ex. (2e2 2-6 
AW/A/702. ' 
Zazzaze/ZZ, 
 
WASHigrari, a ce. 
D, HEPP. 
R0D OR STAT MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 514,750. 
s 
(r. 
N 
Q 
S. 
 
SAes 
sHis 
. 
ly 
l 
| 
His Is 
|| 
s 
N) 
- 
- 
wa s 
in s 
= -" ---PR 
Ts N 
IG 
S \S 
- 
N = - 
is s 
s Ya 
w n ef 
- N. 
-N 
| 
Uy S = H S 
(NI . 
- 
--iss 
s---is 
-se: ; 
A 
A. N 
II, S 
iss 
T5 
o 
s is G So Ai-S2 
SIENTS 
N 
will 
- 
-f 
s 
- 
GD 
R 
s 
- 
| 
\ 
sy 
. s 
s 
E. 
--Es: na 
w 
S. 
a 
- 
Sis 
| 
His 
l 
s 
N 
O 
n 
2. 2WZZWASSAS 
- 
W. 
d - 
y 
SS 
S. 
Re 
g 
--SS 
O or 
- 
| 
S. 
S N 
ZWVAW-702, 
 
Fu Y 
- 
21222222eps 
 
The NATONA. LITHogRAPH1NG "cowraNY, 
WA8HNGTON, X. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 514,750. 
D. HEPP 
ROD OR SLAT MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894, 
 
67SSSSSSS:5??|>>- 
- - 
hy/7 WASSAS: 
67.3 (2-2-26 
C (4. f 
Za/zz 
//AW702. 
27/62 
76 
2622 2. 
or?zens. 
(No Model.) 
No. 514,750, 
 
D. HEPP. 
ROD OR SLAT MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
. 
. . 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894. 
2/7ZW.A.S.S.A.S. 
4-22 Czezz-zee6 
C4% o-6, 
 
 A WYA/M202. 
2E 2 
22ee-6- 
21zzorneys, 
(No Model.) 
. 
. 
No. 514,750. 
D. HEPP 
ROD OR SLAT MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894, 
| Za. 7. - 
- 
S. 
   
 
WAZWASSAS. 
ez26 -6, 
4- 
r 
M/AM/202. 
26 2% 
22e/6 
21zdorneys 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL HEPP, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ROD OR SLAT MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,750, dated February 18, 1894. 
Application filed June 30, 1892, Serial No. 438,631. (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
To at whom it may concert: 
Beit known that I, DANIEL HEPP, a citizen 
of the United States, and a resident of Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Rod or Slat Machines; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, which form a part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
wood Working machines of that description in 
which a round rod or rectangular slat is inter 
mittently fed to a rotating cutter which also 
revolves around the material being operated, 
whereby ornamental peripheral grooves or 
beads are formed on a rod and curved or an 
gular tenons formed in a slat, according to the 
contour of the said material fed to the cutters. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
an improved construction of machine of the 
above character, by which I attain superior 
advantages with respect to simplicity and 
efficiency, and by which rods or slats of con 
tinuous or indefinite lengths may be operated 
upon. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of parts hereinaf 
ter fully described and claimed, 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a side or end elevation of a machine con 
structed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same, the devices 
for holding the journal boxes for the shafts 
of the feed rolls being removed. Fig. 3 is a 
longitudinal sectional view on the line ac, ac, 
Figs. 1 and 2, looking in the direction of the 
arrows. Fig. 4 is an end view of the upper 
portion of the machine, looking from the op 
posite side of Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a detail view 
of the sliding carriage and the cam wheel for 
operating the same. Fig. 6 is a detail view 
showing the lever and cam wheel and plate 
wheel for stopping the hollow shaft carrying 
the rotating and revolving cutters. Figs. 7, 
8, 9 and 10 are detail views of various parts. 
Fig. 11 is a detail view of the lever carrying 
the vertically movable block. Fig. 12 is a 
- 
. 
invention. 
view of a portion of a rod made by my said 
. In the said drawings the reference numeral 
1 denotes a series of uprights which are suit 
ably braced and connected at their upper 
ends by a rectangular plate forming a base 
or support for the various working parts of 
the machine. This base is slotted wherever 
necessary for any of the parts carried there 
by to project below the same. 
The numeral 3 designates the main driv 
ing shaft journaled in uprights 4, at each 
end of the machine, and provided with pull 
leys 5, 5, at one end, which may be connected 
with any suitable motor. Also carried by 
this shaft are pulleys 6, 6, connected by a 
belt 7, with either of the two pulleys 8, 8, se 
cured to the horizontal shaft 9, journaled in 
bearings 10, secured to and projecting above 
the base 2. This shaft 9 also carries two calm 
wheels 12 and 13, each having a portion of its 
diameter reduced forming peripheral exten 
sions 14, which are adapted to bear against 
rollers 15, removably journaled in the ends of 
the sliding carriage 16. This carriage com 
prises two transverse arms 17 connected to 
gether at one end and formed on their under 
side with tenons 18, which workin ways formed 
in blocks 19 secured to the base. Carried by 
this carriage is a hollow shaft 20, journaled in 
bearings. 21, and provided with a fast or fixed 
pulley 23, connected by belt 24 with a pulley 
25, secured to shaft 3. This shaft also carries 
a plate wheel 26 secured to or forming part of 
pulley 23, having a projection 27, a loose pull 
ley 28, connected by belt 29 with pulley 30 on 
shaft 3, a sun-gear 31, and a casting 32. The 
sun gear and pulley 28 are so connected to 
gether as to rotate in unison on the hollow g 
shaft while the casting is fixed to said shaft 
and rotates therewith. The casting is formed 
with a horizontal aperture in which is jour 
naled the spindle 34 of a planet gear 35 mesh 
ing with the sun gear. The opposite end of 
this spindle carries a rotating cutter 35 of 
any desirable form or contour. 
It will be noted that the bore of the shaft 
20, is of greater diameter than the rod oper 
ated upon, which will allow of the slight re 
ciprocating movement of the carriage. 
The numeral 16 denotes a spring connected 
95 
OO 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
 
514,750 
o 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
with the uprights 1, with its free end bearing 
against the carriage 16 to move the same back 
after having been actuated by the cams. The 
function of the reciprocating carriage is to 
move the rotatable cutter 35 to and from the 
work. 
Secured to or forming part of one of the 
faces or sides of cam wheel13 is a disk oran 
nular hub 37, provided with a peripheral bev 
eled recess 38, which is adapted to receive a 
roller contact 39, journaled upon one end of a 
lever 40, pivoted to a Web 41, connecting the 
two arms of the carriage. The other end of 
this lever is bifurcated or formed with two 
curved arms 42 which partly embrace an an 
nular block 43, having a slot 43. Passing 
through a central aperture in this block and 
also through a corresponding aperture some 
what larger in diameter in one of the arms of 
the sliding carriage is a horizontally slidable 
pin or rod 44 having a collar 44 abutting 
against the block. One end of this pin is 
adapted to engage with the projection 27 of 
the plate wheel 26, while its other end passes 
through an aperture in a plate 44 secured to 
said carriage. Encircling said pin and lo 
cated in the aperture in the carriage arm is a 
coiled spring 45, and passing through the slot 
in block 43, is a vertical pin 44, the ends of 
which are connected with the bifurcated ends 
42 of lever 40. The spring 45 is connected 
with said collar 44 and plate 44, the tend 
ency of which is to draw or pull the pin 44 
away from the face plate 27 so that the roller 
contacts carried by the opposite end of lever 
40, will be forced into the recess 38, in the hub 
37 when said recess registers there with. 
Secured to the base 2, just in front of the 
cutter 35, is a bracket 46, having an aper 
ture aligned with the hollow shaft and pro 
vided with a bushing through which the rod 
to be operated on passes. This bushing is re 
movable so that it can be replaced by others 
of varying sizes so as to correspond with rods 
of different diameters. 
The numerals 47, 47, denote standards car 
rying boxes 48 in which are journaled shafts 
49 49 and 50, 50 to which are secured the 
feed rollers 52 and 53. The frontfeed rollers 
52, or those which first receive the rod or 
slat, are formed with angular peripheral 
grooves, while the others 53, have curved 
grooves. The upper boxes in which the shafts 
49 and 50 are journaled are held in place by 
the plate 54 and set screw 55 passing through 
a threaded aperture in a plate 56 secured to 
the brackets. Intermediate of these feed roll 
ers and journaled in brackets 57, secured to 
base 2, is a hollow pulley 58 connected by a 
belt 59, with a pulley 60 on the main driving 
shaft. With this pulley is connected a hol 
low cutter head 61. 
The shafts 49 and 50 are provided with 
bevel gears 62 which mesh with bevel pinions 
63, upon a shaft 64 journaled in the boxes or 
bearings 65, carried by the arms 66, secured 
to the standards 47. To the outer or front 
end the shaft is provided with a ratchet wheel 
67 keyed or otherwise secured thereon, and 
with a lever 68 pivoted thereto. This lever 
at its upper end is provided with a spring 
pawl 69 adapted to engage with the ratchet 
teeth of said wheel, and is connected by means 
of a pitman 70, with a crank wrist pin 71, on 
a disk 72, secured to the front end of shaft 9. 
The pitman is adjustably connected with le 
ver 68, so as to vary the swing thereof and 
cause a more or less feed of the rod in the 
following manner: The lever consists of a 
hollow rectangular bar in which is located a 
vertically movable block 73, having a screw 
threaded aperture, through which passes a 
screw-rod 74, journaled in the lower end of 
said lever and in a plate 75, secured to the 
upper end thereof. The upper end of this 
screw-rod is squared so that it can be rotated 
by means of a wrench or other tool to verti 
cally move said block. The block is provided 
with a stud 76 projecting through a slot 77 
in the lever and is provided with a washer 
78, a flanged collar 79 on which the pitman 
70 is journaled and a securing nut 80. The 
washer is provided with a pointer 81, and the 
lever with a gage 82, to indicate the adjust 
ment of the lever. 
The operation is as follows: The driving 
shaft 3 is actuated from any suitable source 
of power, which shaft through the medium of 
pulleys 30 and 60, rotates the sun and planet 
gears, and through the medium of pulleys 
6 and 8 rotates shaft 9, the cam-wheels 12 
and 13, and the disk 72, the movements of 
which are continuous as long as shaft 3 is op 
!erated. 
This disk 72, through its crank 71 
and pitman 70, oscillates lever 68, causing the 
pawl carried thereby to ride over the ratchets 
of wheel 67, during one-half of the revolution 
of said disk, without engagement there with, 
but during the remainder of the revolution 
the pawl will engage with said teeth causing 
said wheel and its shaft 64, to be partially ro 
tated and the bevel pinions 63 and gears 62 
and their shafts 49 49* and 50, 50 carrying 
the feed-wheels 52 and 53 to be correspond 
ingly actuated. If an angular rod or bar be 
now inserted between feed-wheels 53, it will 
be intermittently fed to and through the hol 
low head 61, the cutters of which will fashion 
it into a round bar or rod. The rod will now 
pass to the feed-rollers or wheels 52, and from 
thence to and through bracket 46, to the hol 
low shaft 20, which is of larger diameter than 
the said rod. These movements must be so 
timed that just as the rod reaches shaft 20, 
the feed must stop and the rod be held sta 
tionary until the rotating cutter 35 makes a 
complete revolution around the rod. Just 
about the time the feed of the rod stops, the 
rollers 15, of the carriage 16, are traveling off 
of the cams 14 of the wheels 12 and 13, see 
Fig. 5. When the said rollers have traveled 
off the cams, the spring 16, will force the car- - 
riage toward the cam-wheels, bringing the rod 
to the center of the hollow shaft 20. By the 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
o 
II5 
I 25 
 
514,750 
75 
time this is accomplished the roller 39, will 
fall into the notch or recess 38, of the hub 37, 
causing the spring 45, to force the pin 44, out 
of engagement with the projection 27, of the 
wheel26, and allowing the latter to be rotated 
through the medium of pulley 25, and its belt, 
which in turn rotates the shaft 20, and cast 
ing 32, and revolves the cutter around the 
rod. During this revolution of the cutter it 
is rotated by means of the planet and Sun 
gear and pulley 28, as before stated. By the 
time the cutter has made a complete revolu 
tion around the rod, the lever 40 will have 
been disengaged from the recess 38, of the 
hub 37, so that its other end will be forced 
toward the plate-wheel and the pin 44, to lie 
in the path of the projection 27, which latter 
engaging there with stops the rotation of said 
plate and pulley 23, the belt of this pulley 
being loose enough to slide thereon. At the 
same time the above movements are taking 
place the pawl 69 of lever 68, will ride over 
the ratchets on wheel 67, so that the rod will 
not be fed forward, but by the time the cut 
ter has completed its revolution the said lever 
will be operated in a reverse direction through 
the medium of the pitman and connections 
when the pawl will engage with the ratchet 
wheel and again feed the rod forward as first 
described, when the operation will be re 
peated. 
From the above it will be seen that the 
shaft 3, pulleys 25, 30 and 60, shaft 9, cam 
wheels 12 and 13, disk 72, cutter 35, its spin 
dle 34, planet gear 35, sun gear 31, pulley 28, 
and the rotary cutter head 61, and its pulley 
58, rotate continuously, while pulley 23, hol 
low shaft 20, the feed rollers and ratchet wheel 
67, rotate intermittently. The carriage also 
moves intermittently back and forth. The 
parts are so timed relatively to each other, 
that while the pawls on the lever connected 
with the pitman 70, are moving the ratchet 
wheel to rotate the feed rollers and feed the 
rod forward, the carriage (with the sun and 
planet gears, the cutter, the casting 32, and 
the pulley 23), is pushed outward by the calms 
12 and 13, and the pin 44, engaged with the 
projection 27, on wheel 26, so that the latter 
and the shaft. 20 and casting 32 will remain 
stationary. By the time the rod has been fed 
forward a sufficient distance, the pitman 70 
will commence its return movement and the 
rotation of the ratchet wheel Will cease and 
the rod remain stationary. By this time the 
rollers 15 of the carriage will travel off of the 
cams 14, when the spring will force said car 
riage inward, and the pin 44 be disengaged 
from projection 27, causing pulley 23, shaft 
20, and casting 32, to be rotated and the ro 
tary cutter to revolve around and act upon 
the rod. By the time said cutter has made a 
complete revolution around the rod, the cans 
will force said carriage outward throwing the 
pin 44, into the path of projection 27, and 
stopping the rotation of shaft 20. The ratchet 
wheel will now be again actuated to feed the 
rod forward. 
As shown in Fig. 5, the parts are in the posi 
tion they occupy after the Work has been 
turned into cylindrical form and fed forward 
to be operated upon. The rollers of the car 
riage are now just ready to run off of the ex 
tensions of the cam wheels. The ends of these 
extensions are curved or beveled, and as said 
rollers travel thereon the carriage will be 
forced laterally toward the cam wheel, and 
bringing the work toward the center of the 
hollow shaft. . Just before the rollers travel 
off said curved or beveled ends the work will 
come in contact with the rotating cutter 
which will take or cut into the periphery to the 
proper depth to form the molding. At the 
moment the rollers travel of the said curved 
ends onto the reduced portions of the cam 
wheels, the work will be exactly in the center 
of the hollow tube with the rotating cutter 
taking into the periphery thereof. The ro 
tating cutter will now be revolved around the 
work through the medium of the casting 32, 
and connections before destribed, and as the 
center of the orbit of said cutter is the axis 
of the work, it is manifest that the cutter in 
its revolution will uniformly trim the circum 
ference of the Work. 
The purpose of the reciprocation of the car 
riage comprising arms 17, and carrying cast 
ing 32, tube 20, and cutter 35", is to permit 
the feed of material into tube 20, without 
striking the face of the cutter 35", which pro 
jects in beyond the edge of tube 20, on one 
side and which would obstruct the passage of 
the work, if the latter were fed centrally 
through the tube 20. When feed of the work 
is stopped the carriage is brought into posi 
tion with the tube concentric with the work 
so that the edge of the cutter engages the 
same and remains in engagement therewith 
during the complete rotation of the cutter 
thereabout. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1. In a machine for cutting moldings or ten 
ons in rods or slats, the combination of the in 
termittently reciprocating carriage, the inter 
mittently rotating hollow shaft and casting, 
and the continuously rotating planet cutter 
carried by and journaled in said casting, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a machine for cutting moldings or ten 
ons in rods or slats, the combination with the 
intermittently reciprocating carriage, the in 
termittently rotating hollow shaft and casting, 
and the continuously rotating planet cutter, 
carried by and journaled in said casting, of 
means for intermittently feeding rods or slats 
to said planet cutter, substantially as dea 
scribed. 
3. In a machine for cutting moldings or ten 
ons in rods or slats, the combination with the 
uprights and base, the driving shaft, the shaft 
connected there with, and the cam wheels on . 
I claim is 
go 
95 
too 
IoS 
o 
II5 
I25 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
 
 
514,750 
25 
 
o 
a projection adapted to engage with said pin, 
a pulley secured to said face plate and fixed 
to the hollow shaft, the casting secured to 
said shaft, the planet cutter having a spindle 
journaled in said casting and provided with 
a pinion, the sun gear and pulley loosely 
4. In a machine for cutting moldings or ten-i mounted on said shaft, and means for rotat 
ing said pulleys, substantially as described. 
6. In a machine for cutting moldings upon 
rods, the combination with the shaft having 
a disk provided with a crank or wrist pin and 
the pitman connected therewith, of the hol 
low cutter head, the feed rollers, the bevel 
gears and pinions, the shaft carrying said 
pinions provided with a ratchet wheel at its 
outer end, the hollow lever journaled on said 
shaft, the screw rod journaled in said lever, 
the screw threaded block with which said le 
wer engages and with which the pitman is 
connected and the spring pawl pivoted to 
said lever, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
said shaft, of the sliding carriage having re 
movable rollers journaled in one end, a hol 
low shaft journaled in said carriage, the cast 
ing carried by said shaft, the planet cutter 
and its pinion, the sun gear and means for op 
erating said shafts, substantially as described. 
ons on rods or slats, the combination with the 
uprights and base, the driving shaft and the 
shaft connected therewith provided with cam 
wheels, of the reciprocating carriage, the 
spring secured to said uprights and bearing 
against the end thereof, the hollow shaft car 
ried thereby provided with a casting, the 
planet cutter having a spindle journaled in 
said casting, the pinion, the sun gear and 
means for operating said shafts, substantially 
as described. 
5. In a machine for cutting moldings or ten 
ons in rods or slats, the combination with the 
uprights and base, the driving shaft, the shaft 
connected there with, provided with cam 
wheels, and the hub or disk formed or con 
nected with one of said wheels, having a pe 
ripheral recess, of the intermittently rotating 
carriage, the lever pivoted thereto, having a 
contact adapted to engage with said recess, 
the hollow shaft at one end and a pin and 
spring at the other end, the face plate having 
DANIEL HIEPP. 
Witnesses: 
I. F. DANKOWSKI, 
FRED HACKER. 
35 
45 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514850.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 514,850, 
. 
. ." 
W. M. & W. C. HENDERSON. 
ELECTRIC SWITCH FOR RAILROADS, 
Patented Feb. 13, 1894, 
 
w 
WITNESSES: 
(272z2% 
MVENTORS: 
Www.w3.owderbow. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. HENDERSON AND WILLIAM. C. HENIDERSON, OF PHILADELPHIA 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
ELECTRC SWITCH FOR RAL ROADS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,850, dated February 18, 1894. 
Application filed September 16, 1893, Serial No. 485,705, (No model.) 
To al., whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM.M.HENDER 
SON, and WILLIAM. C. FIENDERSON, residing at 
Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania, have in 
5 Vented a new and useful Improvement in Elec 
tric Switches for Railroads, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention is intended to apply to elec 
tric railroads, more particularly those for city 
Io and Suburban use, and consists in providing 
means by which the motor-man can move the 
Switches ahead of him, to the right or left, in 
accordance with the direction of his route, 
Without stopping the car for the conductor to 
L5 run ahead and shift the switches by hand, as 
now usually done. 
The points of advantage introduced as es 
Sential features to the successful working of 
such an apparatus as an electric switch throw 
2O ing device are:-(First.) The exposed parts 
are totally unaffected by any vehicle, except 
the car to be switched. (Second.) When the 
switch is thrown it becomes locked, and re 
mains. So until unlocked by the car itself. 
25 (Third.) The switch.can either be thrown by 
the motor-man when in electric working or. 
der, or by the conductor by hand, should the 
electric current fail, or for any other cause. 
(Fourth.) The application of electricity sim 
30 ply throws the switch andlocks it, the unlock 
ing arrangement being independent, avoids 
all risk from failure on the part of the motor 
man to reset the switch. (Fifth.) The main 
track is always clear after a car has been 
35 Switched. (Sixth.) With its use any frog, or 
SWitch casting may be used, all that is re 
quired is to remove the fulcrum pin, and re 
place with the parts necessary to the opera 
tion of the apparatus. 
Figure 1. is a plan representing the junction 
of a curve branching to the right of the main 
track, showing the switch throwing device, 
the locking and unlocking apparatus all in 
position. Switch not thrown, main track 
45 clear. Fig. 2. shows a truck of a passenger 
car, drawn to a larger scale, with the electro 
magnet attached to the frame of the truck, 
passing over one of the armature boxes, lo 
cated at the junction of a curve, these boxes 
are sunk in the ground, each containing an 
iron armature plate for operating the mech 
anism for throwing the switch. Fig. 3. is a 
plan view of the switch, showing throwing 
bar, locking, and one end of unlocking de 
vice, drawn to same scale as Fig. 2. Fig. 4. 55 
shows the unlocking gear enlarged, perspec 
tive elevation and plan. 
: A is a truck of a passenger car, B, an elec 
tro-magnet attached as low as practicable to 
the framework of the truck, where it will have 
a steady motion, unaffected by the movement 
of the body of the car. This magnet is oper 
ated by a switch or button at the will of the 
motor-man, either by his handlor foot. Proper 
electrical connections being made to the ter 
minals b-. b-. The electricity used being 
that furnished by the general supply line, 
either trolley system, storage batteries, or 
other description. 
C, is a cast iron box sunk in the ground, 
containing an armature plate D, having a 
flange all round overhanging the box, to pro 
tect the interior from soil and water, to be at 
tracted by the magnet when the current is 
turned on, this box is preferably placed mid 
way in the track, and the magnet in the lon 
gitudinal center line of the truck, so as to op 
erate on curves either to the right or left, the 
opening on ground line may be protected by 
a grating E if required. When the current 
is turned on, the armature plate D, pulls on 
a short lever F, secured on shaft G, carrying 
at its outer end a longer lever H, for thrust 
ing out the sliding bar or bolt I. 
K, is an ordinary switch, but it has a tail 
piece L, fastened to the fulcrum pivot M, the 
end of the sliding bar I, is furnished with a 
latch N, which clips over the end of the tail 
piece L, when pushed forward. Spring Oaf 
fords the necessarylateral movement for this 
latching and unlatching to take place, and 
spring P, pushing on the tail-piece brings 
back the point of switch K, to clear track, 
when the latch N is released, the releasing of 
the latch N is a purely mechanical automatic 95 
performance, accomplished by the flange of 
75 
9o 
 
g 
514,850 
O 
20 
25 
one of the wheels of the car. After the whole 
of the wheels have passed clear of the switch to secure by Letters Patent, is 
onto the curve, the flange of the leading wheel, 
on the opposite side to where the switch is lo 
cated, in rolling along wipes inward the curved 
chock headed lever Q; having its fulcrum at 
R, it will be seen the motion is communicated 
by arms S and T to way-shaft V, throwing the 
arm W, at the other end of the way-shaft, in 
the direction of the arrow, which impinging 
on the latch N, throws it off the end of the 
tail-piece L, when the switch is at once closed 
by the action of the spring P, taking the po 
sition of clear main track as shown by Fig. . 
The switch is shown open to the curve by Fig. 
8. The weight of the armature plate is pur 
posely made heavy enough to bring back the 
sliding bar ill readiness for another throwing. 
It Will be seen that the form, and position of 
the chock head of the lever Q is such, that 
nothing but the flange of one of the car wheels, 
or the introduction of a crow-bar can thrust 
the chock back. An ordinary carriage or cart 
wheel would simply ride over it. After the 
passage of a wheel the chock is brought to 
the rail again by a spring Z. 
XX are man-holes for gaining access to the 
working parts of the switch. 
In the event of the electric cirrent failing 
from any cause, or any part of the apparatus 
getting out of order, as may happen, provision 
is made for such accident by having a small 
oblong hole Y, cut through the armature plate 
D, to permit the introduction of a rod with a 
T head, to be kept in charge of the conduc 
tor, who can at any time performall the func 
tions pertaining to the apparatus by simply 
pulling the armature plate up until it locks. 
The switch is then thrown, and the car itself 
performs the balance of the duty. It is evi 
dent that other terminal forms may be given 
to the sliding bar I, and that the latch N, and 
Springs O, and P may be varied in form, and 
location, without departing from the princi 
ple involved in their action, the arrangement 
shown being considered a clear embodiment. 
The parts underground are to be protected by 
boxing in, as usual in such cases. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
1. The combination of the levers F, FI, shaft 
G, sliding bar I, and tail-piece L of a switch 
K, for throwing the switch substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. The combination of one set of levers F, 
H, on a shaft G, sliding bar I, and tail piece 
L of a switch K, for opening the switch, and 
a second set of levers, or arms S. T. W. on a 
way shaft V for closing the switch, arranged 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. In combination with the wheels of a rail 
road car as described, the chock headed lever 
Q, way-shaft W, arms or levers S, T, W, latch 
N, of sliding bar I, tail-piece of switch IX, and 
spring P, arranged substantially in the man 
ner for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of the levers F. H. shaft 
G. sliding bar I. latch N. and tail-piece L of 
a switch K. arranged substantially as shown 
and described. 
5. The combination of the levers F. H. shaft 
G, sliding bar I. latch N. tailpiece L of switch 
IX. and spring O. arranged substantially as 
shown and described. 
6. The tail-piece of a switch IX, in combina 
tion with the sliding bar I, latch N, way-shaft 
V, arms S, T, W, and chock lever Q, arranged 
Substantially as shown and described. 
7. The combination of the levers F. II. shaft 
G. sliding bar I. latch N. tail piece L of switch 
IX. and spring P. arranged substantially as 
shown and described. 
8. The combination of the levers F. II. shaft 
G. sliding bar 1. latch N. tailpiece T, of switch 
K. wayshaft W. arms S. T. W. chock lever Q. 
and means for operating them substantially 
as shown and described. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto set 
our signatures in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM M. HENDERSON. 
WILLIAM C. HENDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
J. L. MONTGOMERY, 
H. R. SHULTZ, 
75 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US514950.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 54,950, 
J. W. MARTIN 
BALINC PRESS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Feb. 20, 1894, 
 
 
 
  
W 
w 
w 
W 
Y-. 
Y' 
- 
L). 
% 
2 
de/eazesses 
64-1-(%ay/a?k 
N 
: 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 514,950, 
J. W. MARTIN. 
BALING PRESS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 20, 1894, 
  
 
  
 
  
See inful 
it is 
--22 at 
g 74 
9 
Z72 
2. 
 
6%e- 
9 (62. 
Washingaron, to c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JAMES W. MARTIN, OF OMAHA, NEBRASKA. 
BALING-PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 514,950, dated February 20, 1894. 
Application filed January 17, 1893, Serial No. 458,704 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JAMES W.MARTIN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Omaha, 
in the county of Douglas and State of Ne 
braska, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Baling-Presses; and I 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1, is a plan view of a baling press 
embodying my invention, the sweep being in 
the position it occupies just before the release 
and rebound of the plunger. Fig. 1 is a pro 
jected side view of the hopper and baling 
chamber. Fig. 2 is an enlarged detail sec 
tional view on the line ac-ac, Fig. 1, showing 
the baling and tying chamber, the hopper 
slide and the plunger in its advanced posi 
tion, as shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a similar 
section showing the plunger partially with 
drawn and at the point where it engages the 
hopper slide to withdraw the same. Fig. 4 is 
an enlarged plan view of the end of the pit 
man, the track therefor, and a part of the 
sweep, the parts being in the position shown 
in Fig. 1, that is to say, the plunger fully ad 
vanced. Fig. 5 is a similar view, the parts 
being in the position they occupy after the 
rebound of the plunger and pitman and just 
before the roller on the under side of the can 
lever engages the lever which gives the pri 
mary or initial novement to the pitman. Fig. 
6 is an enlarged view of the cam lever and 
the end of the pitman, showing the groove in 
the anti-friction roller of the pitman and the 
tongue on the cam lever. Fig. 7, is a de 
tached view of the resistance block used in 
the baling chamber. Fig. 8 is a detached view 
of the adjustable clamp used around the end 
of the tying chamber. Fig. 9 is an enlarged 
view of portions of the reach, the pitman and 
the spring which actuates and controls the 
pitman showing the relative arrangement and 
connection of said parts. Fig. 10, is an en 
larged detail view of the dogs on the sides of 
the plunger chamber which prevent the ex 
pansion of the compressed material. Fig.11 
is a cross section of track T, on the line J-ty, 
Fig. 5. 
Like symbols refer to like parts wherever 
they occur. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
baling presses, adapted for baling hay, straw, 
Cotton, and like material, and while, for pur 
poses of illustration, the improvements here 
inafter described, are shown in connection 
With portable, rebounding-plunger, presses, 
it is not my intention to limit the invention 
thereto, as certain features will be found of 
great utility in baling presses in general. 
The first object I have in view is to check 
and control the rebound of the plunger; and 
this I effect by means of a spring or its equiva 
lent, so combined with the pitman as to first 
actuate, and then resist the travel, of the pit 
man, which combination, or its equivalent 
embodies the first feature of my invention. 
A second object I have in view, is such a 
construction of the track in which the end of 
the pitman travels as shall properly present 
the end of the pitman to the cam levers which 
actuate the pitman, and shall also facilitate 
the clearance of the pitman on the rebound 
of the plunger, and such a construction em. 
bodies a second feature of my invention. 
There are other, minor features of inven 
tion, all as will hereinafter fully appear. 
I will now proceed to describe my invention 
more fully so that others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains, may apply the same. 
In the drawings, 1, indicates the baling and 
tying chamber, the end 1*, of which, wherein 
the plunger 2, moves, is in the form of a closed 
box, surmounted by a hopper 3, while the dis 
tant or tying end of the chamber, indicated 
by 1', has slatted sides and spring board top 
1, or is constructed in some equivalent man 
ner which will allow it to yield or be nar 
rowed by the operation of the adjustable clamp 
mechanism C, to confine the friction or resist 
ance block R, commonly employed within the 
tying chamber. 
R, indicates the resistance block, adapted 
to be used within the baling chamber, which 
block is preferably slightly tapering in form 
and recessed as at r, to permit it to yield and 
be clamped by the Walls of the tying chamber. 
C, indicates an adjustable clamp or binder, 
which is usually applied near the extreme 
end of the tying chamber and which consists 
of a flexible section c' having at its ends 
threaded rod sections c, which pass through 
perforated lugs or earpieces c, arranged on 
d 
25 
3O. 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
9c. 
95 
Iod 
 
514,950 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the tying chamber and are provided with 
nuts c, by means of which the band may be 
tightened up or loosened as required. 
In order to protect the flexible section c' of 
the clamp C and facilitate the tightening up 
of the clamp, grooved corner pieces c, &c., 
may be employed, and the perforated lugs or 
ear pieces c, may also be grooved for the pas 
sage and guidance of the flexible section of 
the clamping band. 
In order to prevent the expansion of the 
compressed material and its return into the 
plunger chamber on the recession of the plun 
ger, I arrange at the junction of the plunger 
chamber 1, and the tying chamber 1, and 
projecting through the sides of the plunger 
chamber, a series of pivoted dogs d, spring 
supported by means of spiral springs d'en 
circling pins which pins move freely through 
perforations or holes in the tails of the dogs 
and rest against the sides of the plunger cham 
ber. 
In order to avoid binding and friction be 
tween the plunger 2, and the hopper (or top 
of the baling chamber), a considerable space 
is usually left between the bottom of the hop 
per 3, and the top of the plunger 2, and this 
space is guarded by a swinging (preferably 
serrated) plate or vibrating spring leaf 4, con 
trolled by a spring 4", which plate serves to 
hold or fold down the surplus material at the 
top of the baling chamber. 
2, indicates the traverser or plunger adapted 
to travel in the plunger chamber 1, and pro 
vided with a cross-head 2 and pivot post 2, 
on which is pivoted the end of the pitman P. 
Attached to the upper face of the plunger 2, 
and extending rearward is a plate 5, and ar 
ranged above the same, and to close the bot 
tom of hopper 3 is a slide 6, the parts 5 and 6 
being connected by a strap 6, and loop 5", so 
that the slide 6 shall advance with the plun 
ger 2, during part of its inward (or compress 
ing movement) and recede with the plunger 
through part of its outward movement (or re 
bound) so that the plunger in its movements 
is effectually guarded against interference 
from the material in the hopper 3. 
As before specified, the baling press de 
vised by me is more especially intended to 
be used as a portable press; I therefore ar 
range on the baling chamber, l, adjacent to 
the plunger chamber, a frame 7 through 
which passes the rear axle, and beneath the 
sweep-posts, I secure a fifth wheel and bol 
ster 8 adapted to rest upon and be secured to 
the front axle. The plunger chamber 1", and 
the sweep post S (or the front and rear axles) 
are connected by a reach 9, Securely attached 
at one end to the plunger chamber and at its 
opposite end provided with a goose neck or 
bracket 10 which forms the upper bearing of 
sweep post S. The upper end of the goose 
neck or bracket 10 is connected with a cross 
head 11, attached to the plunger chamber by 
means of an adjustable rod connection 12, SO 
that a structure of great strength is obtained; 
and said cross-head 11 is provided with 
bumper posts 11, 11 for the plunger 2. 
S indicates the sweep post stepped below 
on the reach 9, journaled above in the bracket 
or goose neck 10, and provided at its upper 
end with a cross piece 13 to which the sweep 
S is attached and from which it is braced by 
a rod connection S'. 
Secured to the sweep post S, at a suitable 
distance above reach 9, is the cam lever 14, 
its outer ends rounded off to coact with the 
end of the pitman P and provided with a rib 
or tongue 14", adapted to engage in a groove 
in the periphery of the anti-friction roller 16, 
with which the end of pitman P is provided. 
On the under surface of cam lever 14, are 
antifriction rollers 15, adapted to engage with 
a spring 17 (secured to the bracket 10, or 
other suitable support), whenever the oppo. 
site end of the cam lever 14 escapes from 
pitman P, and thus effectually counteract any 
recoil of the sweep (so galling to the team) 
whenever the load is temporarily removed 
from the sweep. These rollers 15 also en 
gage a cam surface 18", on a lever 18 pivoted 
on the reach near the foot of the sweep post 
S, and through said lever or arm 18 cause the 
initial movement of the end of the pitman P, 
whereby it is brought within the reach of the 
short cam lever 14, which does the heavy work 
of compression. 
T, indicates a track for the guidance of the 
end of pitman P. This track which is pref. 
erably supported from or on the reach 9, is of 
irregular form composed of two sections. Of 
these the section T is the longest and is gently 
inclined toward the line of applied power so 
as to permit the gradual advance of the plun 
ger. 2 (or the initial movement of the pitiman), 
while the other section T is abruptly inclined 
to the line of applied power so as to apply the 
full power to the plunger 2 on the last part of 
its advance. The track T is preferably pro 
vided with a slotted central web 19, (or in 
Wardly projecting ribs, see Fig. 11,) through 
which passes a journal post 20, dependent 
from pitman P, and on said journal post 20 
are two anti-friction rollers 20, 20', one on 
each side of the slotted web 19, whereby the 
end of the pitman P is held down as well as 
guided. Projecting laterally from pitman P, 
is a bar or fixed alm 21, with which engages 
an anti-friction roller 18, on the pivotedle 
Ver 18, which imparts the initial movement 
to pitmall P to carry its end and grooved roller 
16 within reach of cam lever 14 on sweep 
post S. 
The rebound of the plunger is effected by 
means of a spring 22, secured to the pitman 
P, as at 22, (see Fig. 1) but the opposite end 
of Said spring 22 instead of being connected 
directly to the reach 9 (or other fixed point) 
is secured to a pivoted lever 23 (see Fig. 9) 
which lever is limited in its movement in one 
direction by a fixed stop 23, and is moved in 
the opposite direction by a pin 23 on the un 
der side of the pitman-consequently while 
75 
95 
OC 
IOS 
IC 
I I5 
I 25 
 
514,950 
3. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the contraction of spring 22 causes the re 
bound of the pitman P, it follows that as soon 
as pin 23, on the under side of the pitman P 
strikes pivoted lever 23, the draft is brought 
directly on the spring 22 which now acts to 
retard and control the rebound of the pitman 
and plunger. 
24, indicates a brake spring arranged to 
bear upon pivoted lever 23, to steady and con 
trol its motion. 
The operation of a press constructed sub 
stantially as hereinbefore specified, will be as 
follows:-Th pitman P, sweep S and camle 
ver 14, being in the relative position shown in 
Fig. 4, the roller 15 on the under side of cam 
lever 14, engages cam surface 18, on pivoted 
lever 18 and moves said lever so that the roller 
18, of lever 18 engages bar 21, on pitman P 
and forces the pitman along section T of track 
T until the end of pitman P and its grooved 
roller 16 is brought within reach of and en 
gaged by the end of cam lever 14 which forces 
the end of the pitman Palong the second sec 
tion T of track T, completing the throw or 
advance of the plunger 2, and the compressing 
operation. During this movement of pitman 
P the spring 22 has been elongated and the piv 
oted lever 23, to which it is attached, has been 
brought forward until arrested by stop 23; 
when, therefore, one end of cam lever 14 es 
capes from pitman P, its opposite end will en 
gage spring 17 on bracket 10, which will pre 
vent the recoil of the sweep S, and at the same 
time the contraction of spring 22 will cause 
the rebound of pitman P and plunger 2. The 
pitman on its rebound will bring the pin 23 
on its under surface in contact with lever 23, 
which will at once put spring 22 under ex 
tension and cause it to resist and control the 
further rebound of the pitman. During the 
latter part of the advance of plunger 2, it 
will carry with it beneath the hopper 3, the 
slide 6, and said slide will retain the position 
into which it is thus carried during the first 
part of the return travel or recession of the 
plunger so as to effectually guard the rear of 
the plunger from the interference of any ma 
terial contained in hopper 3. 
During the lat 
ter half of the reverse movement of plunger 
2 and pitman P, the slide 6 will be completely 
withdrawn from beneath the hopper so as to 
open the baling or plunger chamber 1. As 
the cam lever 14 has two arms, it is evident 
that the pitman and plunger will advance and 
recede twice for every revolution of the 
sweep-and it is equally evident that if de 
sired, the number of movements of the pit 
man and plunger can be multiplied by mul 
tiplying the cam levers 14. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a rebounding plunger press, the com 
bination with the plunger pitman, of a spring 
attached thereto, a movable support to which 
said spring is also secured, and means where 
by the pitman engages said movable support 
75. 
95 
during part of the rebound movement; sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified, 
2. In a rebounding plunger press, the com 
bination with the plunger pitman, of a spring 
attached thereto, a pivoted lever to which the 
spring is also attached, and means for limit 
ing the movement of the pivoted lever; sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
3. In a rebounding plunger press, the com 
bination with the plunger pitman, of a spring 
attached thereto at one end, a pivoted lever 
to which the opposite end of said spring is 
attached, and a projection on the pitman which 
engages said pivoted lever; substantially as 
and for the purposes specified. 
4. In a rebounding plunger press, the com 
bination with the plunger pitman, of a spring 
attached thereto, a pivoted lever to which 
said spring is also attached, a stop to limit 
the movement of the pivoted lever, and a 
projection on the pitman to engage the piv 
oted lever; substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
5. In a rebounding plunger press, the com 
bination with the plunger pitman, of a spring 
attached thereto, a pivoted lever with which 
said spring is also connected, and a brake 
spring which acts on the pivoted lever; sub 
stantially as and for the purposes specified. 
6. In a baling press, the combination with 
a pitman, of a sweep post provided with a 
cam lever 14, and a spring 17 arranged oppo 
site the pitman and in the path of the cam 
lever; substantially as and for the purposes 
specified. 
7. In a baling press, the combination with 
the outer end of the pitman having a journal 
post provided with anti-friction rollers, of the 
track having the slotted central web and 
composed of the two sections, one having a 
gradual inclination and the other an abrupt 
inclination to the line of force, and means for 
actuating Said pitman; substantially as and 
for the purposes specified. 
8. In a baling press, the combination with 
the pitman, of a pitman track, composed of 
two sections the first of which has a gradual 
and the second an abrupt inclination to the 
line of force, a pivoted lever, for causing the II5 
travel of the pitman on the first section, 
mechanism for operating said pivoted lever , 
and a cam lever for causing the travel of the 
pitman on the second section of the track; 
substantially as and for the purposes speci. 
fied. 
9. In a baling press, the combination with 
a pitman and suitable track for the end 
thereof, of a sweep post having a cam-lever, 
and a pivoted lever arranged in the path of 
cam-lever and pitman, whereby the pivoted 
lever is acted on by the cam lever and actu 
ates the pitman in advance of the engagement 
of the cam lever with the pitman; substan 
tially as and for the purposes specified. 
10. In a baling press, the combination with 
a pitman and suitable track therefor, of a 
sWeep post having a cam lever, a roller on 
25 
OO 
O 
 
 
4. 
514,950 
one face of the cam lever, a pivoted lever 
having a cam surface for the roller on the 
cam lever, and a roller to engage a bar or arm 
on the pitman, and a bar or arm on the pit 
5 man with which the roller of the pivoted le 
ver engages; substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
11. In a baling press, the combination with 
a yielding slatted tying chamber, of a taper 
Io ing recessed resistance block, and an adjust 
able clamp or binder having threaded rod 
sections and an intermediate flexible section; 
substantially as and for the purposes speci 
fied. 
12. In a baling press, the combination with 
I5 
a yielding slatted tying chamber, and a com 
pressible resistance block therefor, of grooved 
corner pieces, perforated lugs or ear pieces, 
and a flexible binder having rod ends which 
pass through the perforations of said lugs or 
ear pieces; substantially as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 7th day of 
January, 1893. 
JAMES W. MARTIN. 
Witnesses: 
MAE C. WooD, 
W. N. WILLIAMS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515050.txt	(No Model.) 
CARBURETING APPARATUS FOR, CAS OR, WAPOR ENGINES 
G. E. HOYT. 
No. 515,050, 
Patented Feb. 20, 1894, 
l 
N 
s 
s 
aN 
a 
A.9. 2 E. Z/ 
2. 
N 
 
352 
AS& S46% 
77 3. 
 
  
V 
i 
l: 
2: 
1% 
2 
% 
SS2 
 
42 P 
SS2 
 
f  ZSSS 
E-SE-R 
NEN 
N e S 
M St. S 
NHS 
NN 
N  
\SS 
SHINEE 
NHSN 
Eee 
as: 
N/ 
 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE E. HOYT, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
CARBURETING APPARATUS FoR GAS OR v APOR ENGINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,050, dated February 20, 1894. 
Application filed June 13, 1893, Serial No, 477,479, (No model 
S 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
To at twhoIn it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE E. HoyT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
and county of San Francisco, State of Cali 
fornia, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Carbureting Apparatus for 
Gas or Vapor Engines; and I hereby declare 
the following specification and the drawings 
there with to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of my invention, also the mode of 
Constructing and applying the same. 
My invention relates to the volatilizing or 
vaporizing of carbonaceous fuel for gas en 
gines, and consists of a carbureting appara 
tus, automatic in action, for supplying in 
proper proportions mingled air and gasoline, 
or other combustible liquid for engines of the 
kind. 
This apparatus is set forth and explained 
in the drawings here with, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of a gas engine pro 
vided with my improved carbureting appa 
ratus. Fig. 2 is a central longitudinal sec 
tion through the apparatus. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse section on the line ac-ac of Fig. 2. Fig. 
4 is a view of the valve for admitting the liq 
uid fuei to the carburetor. 
Like letters of reference are employed to 
designate corresponding parts in the different 
figures of the drawings. 
Referring to Fig. 1, A is a diagram of a gas 
or vapor engine, B a tank containing gaso 
line or other liquid fuel, and C a carburetor 
for admitting and volatilizing the liquid fuel, 
and mingling it with air in the proper pro. 
portion. 
D is a pipe for conveying oil or fuel from 
the tank B to the carburetor C. 
E is an inlet pipe for air, and F a supply 
pipe for conducting the mingled air and fuel 
to the engine A. 
G is the combustion chamber of the engine 
A, and Han exhaust pipe for spent or burned 
gases. Valves and other operative parts of 
the engine are omitted, not being required to 
explain my present invention. 
The carburetor C, shown in section at Figs. 
2 and 3, consists of a valve body I, into which 
is screwed at its ends the airinlet pipe E, and 
the outlet pipe F leading to the engine. This 
- 
- 
valve body is divided in the usual manner by 
a diaphragm J, and a valve L. mounted on a 
movable stem M. 
To the top of the valve body I is fastened 
a second valve chamber N provided with an 
oil or fuel inlet pipe D, and a slide valve O 
mounted in a circular yoke or seat P formed 
in the valve stem M, so that both valves L and 
O move together. On the inlet side there is 
a perforated nipple or plug Q, and opposite 
to this another plug R containing a follower S 
resting on a coil spring T, as shown in the 
section, Fig. 2. The perforated plug Q and 
the follower S have flat faces between which 
slides the valve O as the stem M and valve L. 
are moved up or down. This valve O, here 
shown of circular form, has on one side a 
groove a that when the valve is raised coin 
cides with the perforation e in the plug Q, 
and admits a small quantity of the fuel oil 
from the tank B and pipe D into the cham 
ber N, there to mingle with the air passing 
through the valve I, as indicated by arrows 
in Fig. 2. In this manner both valves open 
simultaneously to a n extent accurately regul 
lated by the screw U., against which the valve 
stem Mstops on the upward or opening stroke. 
The valve O rests loosely in the circular seat 
P formed in the stem M, and is prevented 
from turning by means of a pin n. This 
valve may, however, be of any shape on its 
periphery, the circular form being most con 
venient to make. It is free to move laterally 
to such extent as secures a close bearing on 
the valve faces, these being pressed together 
by the loose follower K and the spring T, as 
before explained. The air valve L is adjust 
able on the stem M by means of the screw 
nuts V, so the relative amount of air and oil 
or fuel can be accurately proportioned by ad 
justing this valve L. up or down on the stem 
M, thus regulating the range of the feed valve 
O, and the amount admitted at each stroke. 
On the stem M is placed a spring W that, in 
addition to the Weight of the parts, maintains 
an elastic downward pressure, and causes the 
valves to close instantly when released, as 
will be presently explained. 
A cap or cover X is provided for examin 
ing and adjusting the valve O, or if necessary 
85 
9 O 
95 
CO 
515,050 
5 
O 
the chamber N can be removed by taking out 
the screws YY, shown in Fig. 3. 
The operation of the apparatus is as foll 
loWS: When the piston of the engine A makes 
its downward or inward stroke, the exhaust 
Valve being closed, a partial vacuum is formed 
in the cylinder. This relieves the pressure on 
the top of the valve L, which then raises by 
pressure of the atmosphere through the pipe 
E, the air then rushes in as indicated by the ar 
rows in Fig. 2, and at the same time a quantity 
of the liquid fuel is drawn in through the aper 
ture e and the groove a in the sliding valve O, 
and mingles with the air, so as to form an ex 
plosive vapor or gas that rushes through the 
pipe F, and a second valve into the engine cyl 
inder, and is there ignited in the usual manner. 
iHaving thus explained the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim is 
1. In combination with a gas or vapor en 
gine, a carbureting apparatus, as herein de 
Scribed, - containing inlet valves for air and 
liquid fuel, both connected with and operated 
by a single stem and by atmospheric press 
lure; the valve for liquid fuel loosely mounted 
in an eye or yoke, and sliding on a perforated 
face or seat and free to adjust itself thereto, 
in the manner substantially as described. 
2. In combination with a gas or vapor en 
gine, a carbureting apparatus, as herein de 
scribed, consisting of air actuated valves for 
admitting and proportioning air and liquid 
fuel, the air valve adjustably mounted, but 
rigidly held on a stem for operating both the 
air and fuel valves, the fuel valve having a 
port or groove passing more or less over an 
inlet perforation in its seat, as the amount of 
oil required may demand, the stroke being 
adjustable as to its range by an externally 
operated screw, in the manner substantially 
as herein described. 
3. In combination with a gas or vapor en 
25 
35 
AO 
gine, a carbureting apparatus, as herein de 
scribed, for admitting air and liquid fuel and 
mingling the same; two valves, one for air 
and one for liquid fuel, both mounted on or 
operated by one stem, and relatively adjust 
able so as to proportion the air and fuel, the 
valves so arranged as to open by atmospheric 
pressure, and close by a spring, in the man 
ner substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
4. In combination with a gas or vapor en 
gine, a carbureting apparatus, as herein de 
scribed, the main body of the apparatus con 
taining an air valve, and a separable cham 
ber containing a fuel valve, the latter sliding 
on a perforated seat, and held thereto by a 
follower and spring in the manner shown, 
both valves connected with and operated by 
one stem, and relatively adjustable thereon 
So the amount of air and fuel admitted may 
be proportioned at will, in the manner sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a carbureting apparatus, an air valve 
an oil valve, a common stem for said valves 
having an eye which provides a seat for one 
of them, substantially as described. 
6. In a carbureting. apparatus having inlets 
and outlets for air and liquid fuel, the two 
Valves substantially as described, one for air 
and one for oil and a stem for said valves 
which is formed with an eye which provides 
a seat for the oil valve wherein the valve is 
laterally movable between the pressure of 
the parts on both sides, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto af 
fixed my signature in the presence of two 
witnesses. 
GEORGE E. HOYT. 
55 
yo 
75 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED A. ENQUIST, 
WILSON. D. BENT, Jr. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515150.txt	(No Model.) . 
No. 515,150 
 
F., LILLIBRIDGE, Deo'd. 
E. J. LILLIBRIDGE, Administratrix. 
BICYCLE 
((4t aesses. 
cle/24 
552, a 
(6. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREEMAN LILLIBRIDGE, OF EL PASO, TEXAS; EMMA JULIA LILLIBRIDGE 
ADMINISTRATRIX OF SAID FREEMAN LILLIBRIDGE, DECEASED. 
BICYCLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,150, dated February 20, 1894, 
Application filed January 13, 1893, Serial No. 458,207. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, FREEMAN LILLIBRIDGE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at El 
Paso, county of El Paso, State of Texas, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Bicycles, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of this invention is to construct 
a bicycle of the safety variety, with a com 
pensating gearing for propelling the traction 
wheel of the machine, whereby the variations 
in leverage in the various positions assumed 
by the pedal crank are equalized; that is to 
Say: where the leverage of the cranks is least 
advantageous the leverage of the chain belt 
on the Sprocket wheel is greatest and vice 
Versa or if power rather than speed is de 
sired the gearing may be set in such relation 
that the greatest effect of the crank will co 
incide with the greatest leverage of the gear. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I, is 
a side elevation of the chain gear wheel to be 
affixed to the hub of the traction wheel of the 
bicycle. Fig. II, is a side elevation of the 
pedal gear and the driven gear in their 
relative positions when set for greatest com 
pensating effect and for highest speed. Fig. 
III, is a view of like parts shown in the pre 
ceding figure set, however for greatest power. 
In the application of this plan of gearing 
to the usual style of safety bicycle, I provide 
a Sprocket wheel, 1, not unlike the ordinary 
Sprocket wheel excepting that the opening, 3, 
in its hub is elongated from the centerto. 
Ward one side, about which opening are 
ranged four elongated apertures, 3, their long 
diameters parallel with that of the central 
opening, 2. This sprocket wheel is bolted to 
the hub of the traction wheel of a bicycle by 
means of bolts passing through the apertures 
3, in the Web of the gear and through the hub 
of the traction wheel, the spindle of the wheel 
extending through the elongated opening 2, 
of the sprocket wheel. The sprocket is set 
off center as much as is desired and se 
cured firmly in that position by means of the 
bolts before mentioned. 
The crankshaft 4, the crank 5, the sprocket 
wheel 6, on the shaft and the connecting chain 
belt 7, are not different in form or function 
from like parts in all safety bicycles. 
To set the eccentrically set driven 
sprocket, 1, for the greatest compensating ef 
fect as well as the highest speed, its long axis 
is set in a vertical plane, with the large side 
of the eccentric upward, the cranks also are 
placed in a vertical position and the endless 
driving chain adjusted over the pedal sprocket 
and the sprocket wheel 1, care being taken 
that sufficient slack be allowed in the chain 
to permit the rotation of the latter wheel. 
When the upwardly extending crank 5, is 
depressed, with the sprocket wheels in the 
before described relative positions, the chain 
belt draws over a side of the wheel 1, which 
approaches the center as the crank descends, 
until the latter reaches the horizontal posi 
tion when the eccentric gear 1, is at its least 
leverage and the chain is drawing over a point 
nearest its eccentric center. As the crank 5, 
descends from the horizontal and its leverage 
thereby becomes constantly less, the eccen 
tric gear 1 increases its leverage by throwing 
the driving chain farther from its eccentric 
center until the crank reaches its lowest point 
and completes the revolution of the gear 1. 
Thus it will be understood that when the 
cranks are about the horizontal of their for 
ward throw and when in position to exert 
their greatest leverage they move most slowly 
and when about the vertical position, most 
rapidly; an arrangement which gives the long 
est time for the most effective work. 
To gear the machine for the greatest power 
the eccentric sprocket is given a half revolu 
tion relative to the pedal sprocket, 6, and the 
chain adjusted over the two wheels in this 
new relative position: that is to say; to gear 
for power the short side of the eccentric gear 
must be uppermost when the pedal cranks 
stand in a vertical position. With the parts 
in this new position it will be seen that as 
the crank descends from a perpendicular the 
leverage of the chain over the eccentric gear 
increases until the pedal reaches the horizon 
tal line where the greatest power of the crank 
meets the greatest leverage of the chain on 
the sprocket 1. 
The sprocket 1, which has one-half the num 
ber of teeth contained in the pedal gear, when 
set centrally with relation to the traction 
wheel of the bicycle, will gear the latter wheel 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
515,150 
tion wheel which sprocket wheel is adjustable 
in its degree of eccentricity and an endless 
chain belt for connecting the sprocket wheels. 
3. In a bicycle, in combination, a main 
frame, a traction wheel and a supporting wheel 
therefor, a crankshaft, a sprocket wheel there 
on, a sprocket wheel for the traction wheel, 
elongated openings in the web of the latter 
sprocket for adjustably attaching the sprocket 
wheel to the hub of the traction wheel and an 
endless chain belt for connecting the sprocket 
wheels. 
FREEMAN LILLIBRIDGE. 
Witnesses: 
A. P. COLES, 
S. O. LESSER. 
5 
Cd 
in a ratio of two revolutions to every one of 
the pedal gear, 6, but when set eccentric to 
the axis of the traction wheel will give a vary 
ingratio during different portions of the revo 
lutions, always averaging for the whole revo 
lution, however, the ratio named. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A sprocket wheel having a rim, sprocket 
teeth thereon, a web, elongated openings 
through the web and an elongated opening 
about its center and extending therefrom to 
ward the rim of the wheel. 
2. In a bicycle, in combination, a main 
frame, a traction wheeland a supporting wheel 
therefor, a crankshaft, a sprocket wheel there 
on, a sprocket wheel rotating with the trac 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515250.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 515,250. 
J. REYNOLDS 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING AND VENTILATING, &c. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Feb. 20, 1894, 
 
J. REYNOLDS . 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING AND WENTILATING, &c. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 20, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 515,250, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 515,250. 
Patented Feb. 20, 1894. 
 
S-4- 
22- -3 
a(2- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN REYN OLDS, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING AND VENTILATING, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,250, dated February 20, 1894. 
Application filed October 12, 1893, Serial No. 487,988, (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whosn, it may concern: 
Be it known that, JOHN REYNOLDS, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, and a resi 
dent of London, England, have invented a new 
and useful Improved Apparatus for Heating 
and Ventilating Rooms or Inclosed Spaces, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
lingS. 
My invention relates to apparatus for heat 
ing and ventilating rooms or inclosed spaces. 
According to my said invention I utilize the 
heat of an ordinary lamp preferably a par 
affine oil lamp, or of a stove or gas flame for 
heating and ventilating rooms or inclosed 
spaces in such a manner that the heat is rap 
idly and regularly transmitted to, and dif 
fused throughout, the air of the room or in 
closed space in which the apparatus is placed. 
I may utilize my said apparatus for inducing 
external air to enter through suitably ar 
ranged channels a room in which the appa 
ratus is placed, and thus provide for venti 
lating the room without causing drafts. 
An important feature of my invention is 
that the oil reservoir and burner are external 
to the heating surfaces and have inserted be 
tween them and the said surfaces a very bad 
or imperfect conductor of heat. By this con 
struction the communication of heat to the 
oil reservoir and burner either by conduction 
or by radiation is prevented, and an element 
of danger such as is present in heaters hav 
ing an internal oil reservoir is avoided. 
Another important feature of my inven 
tion relates to the heating Surface which I 
construct in a very simple and inexpensive 
late. 
My said invention also comprises otherim 
provements in detailashereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings I have shown 
how my invention may be conveniently and 
advantageously carried into practice. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the appara 
tus, a part of the external case being re 
moved to show the interior. Fig. 2 is a plan 
of the same. Fig. 3 shows one of the flat 
plates or blanks from which I build up the 
apparatus. Fig. 4 is a perspective view of a 
portion of the apparatus showing more clearly 
the construction. 
Like reference-letters denote corresponding 
parts throughout the drawings. 
A is a cylinder made of thin sheet-metal 
say iron or copper for example which are good 
conductors of heat. It is open at the top and 
bottom, and is mounted with its axis vertical 
on legs or standards B. 
C is a smaller inner cylinder concentric 
with the outer cylinder A. Said cylinder C 
is also open at both ends and is of the same 
length and made of the same metal as the 
outer cylinder A. 
If the apparatus is intended to be used with 
an ordinary paraffine lamp the inner cylinder 
C will be made about the same diameter as 
the lamp chimney. 
The cylinders A and Care secured together 
by metal radial websD which may be straight 
or curved. In the construction illustrated 
which is the one I prefer to adopt the two cyl 
inders A and C are built up from metal sheets 
or blanks interlocked with each other, no 
bolts, rivets, solder or the like being used to 
hold the parts together. 
Each one of the said 
sheets or blanks is constructed to form part 
of the inner cylinder, one of the radial webs, 
and part of the outer cylinder. In the ap 
paratus illustrated the two cylinders A, C 
and the radial webs are made from eight 
sheets of metal suitably perforated to form 
the blanks, and then bent and interlocked the 
one with the other to build up the apparatus 
as hereinafter described. One such blank is 
shown in Fig. 3 as it appears before being 
bent. At one side of this blank I form a num 
ber of parallel horizontal slits a, extending 
from the edge for a suitable distance into the 
sheet. Every alternate tongue of metal a? 
thus formed by the sits is intended to be 
used for locking with the neighboring sheet 
as hereinafter described, and the intermedi 
ate tongues are bent to form radial strips 
clearly shown in Figs, 2 and 4 projecting into 
the inner cylinder. A little distance from 
the inner ends of the slitsa, are formed a row 
of vertical slots beach of a size adapted to 
receive one of the tongues a? of an adjoining 
sheet. The plain space C between the ends 
of the horizontal slits a, and the vertical slots 
b forms when the sheet is in place a portion 
of the inner cylinder C. 
25 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
515,250 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5c) 
55 
d, dare U-shaped slits made in the blank. 
The tongues d', d' formed by said slits are in 
tended to be pushed out and preferably 
twisted as seen in Figs. 2 and 4. Next the 
slits did are formed other vertical slots e. e. 
The portion f of the sheet or blank between 
the series of vertical slots b, b and e, e forms 
the radial webs between the inner and outer 
cylinders, and the part g of the sheet from the 
slots e, e to the edge forms a portion of the 
outer cylinder A. In the latter part of the 
sheet, I cut U-shaped slitsh, and I turn out 
ward the tongues h' thus formed for a pur 
pose hereinafter explained. 
i, are tongues projecting from the edge of 
the blank, level with and the same in number 
as the vertical slots e, e. Said tongues are in 
tended to be passed through the correspond 
ing slots e, e of an adjacent sheet or blank and 
locked there with. 
Having thusfully described the construction 
of one of the sheets or blanks it will be clear 
how several such can be put together to build 
up the apparatus. A number of such blanks 
say eight are taken and each one is bent to 
the form indicated for example in Figs. 2 and 
4. They are then locked together to form a 
rigid structure by passing the tongues i, i. 
at the edge of each blank through the cor 
responding slots e, e of the adjacent sheet 
or blank and bending said tongues when so 
inserted in a manner that will be well under 
stood from Fig. 4, and also by passing the al 
ternate tongues a', d' at the other edge of 
each sheet through the corresponding slots b, 
b of the adjacent sheet and bending the same 
until they are closely applied to the part c 
of said adjacent sheet. The intermediate 
tongues a', d' are then bent in a radial direc 
tion, and the tongues d', d' are pushed out to 
occupy an intermediate position between the 
radial webs and are preferably twisted as in 
dicated in Figs. 2 and 4, to present to a slight 
extent their broad sides to the ascending cur 
rent of air and so cause eddies, thus bringing 
the current of air into contact with every part 
of the heated surface. The radial tongues a 
are arranged to present their sharp edges to 
ward the ascending current of heated air with 
out baffling or obstructing the same more 
than is absolutely unavoidable, and so allow 
the utmost freedom of upward movement of 
the heated air and products of combustion. 
The apparatus thus made is mounted on the 
legs or standards B and is then furnished 
with handles E by which it can be conven 
iently lifted and transported from place to 
place. 
The handles E may be covered with 
a non-conducting materialso that they can be 
touched without risk of burning the fingers. 
F indicates a paraffine oil lamp which is 
supported on the horizontal cross stays B of 
the legs B and therefore is carried by and 
travels with the heater When the latter is 
moved about. 
G is a thin metal tube which is secured in 
the lower end of the inner cylinder Cand pro 
jects downward to a short distance above the 
top of the lamp flame. The lower edge G' of 
this tube is curved inward as shown, thereby 
causing a sharp inward draft which operates 
to promote perfect combustion and avoids 
smoke and that unpleasant smell which is so 
objectionable in many oil stoves. 
H is a thin transparent tube or chimney, 
made preferably of mica, that surrounds the 
flame of the lamp and is made to slide up and 
down on the tube G thus allowing the lamp 
or burner to be removed very easily for trim 
ming and cleaning. 
The transparent tube His particularly use 
ful in bedrooms for example where it is de 
sirable that the apparatus shall give out some 
light as well as heat. If desired an external 
Opaque tube may be mounted on the trans 
parent tube Hin such a manner that by rais 
ing and lowering the same the light may be 
more or less obscured. The flame may be 
surrounded moreover with cathedral glass or 
other ornamental cover to increase the at 
tractiveness of its appearance. The mica 
tube H being a bad conductor transmits but 
very little heat to the lamp. The latter there 
fore remains quite cool and no danger of over 
heating the oil is experienced. By placing 
the lamp outside the heater and separating 
it therefrom by a bad conductor I not only 
avoid an element of danger present in heaters 
where the heat is liable to be conducted to 
the oil lamp, but I also avoid the vaporiza 
tion of the oil which usually clings to the 
various parts of the lamp, which vaporization 
would contribute to produce a disagreeable 
odor. 
In lieu of a tube H made of mica I may 
employ one made of glass or talc or other non 
conductor, or in cases where light is not re 
quired, I may use a tube made of asbestus. 
When the lamp is lighted, the inwardly pro 
jecting radial strips or tongues a which are 
situated in the hottest zone just above the lamp 
flame become very hot and conduct the heat 
rapidly to the Wall of the inner tube whence 
the heat passes along the radial vanes to the 
outer cylinder. The whole apparatus being 
thus heated communicates its heat freely to 
the air between the cylinders and webs which 
air rapidly ascends into the room, and its 
place is taken by other colder air from the 
room which becomes heated and rises in its 
turn; the operation is continuous and a large 
upward current of heated air is produced 
which air rapidly diffuses itself through and 
warms the entire room. While a lateral rush 
of outside air is prevented by the apparatus 
from disturbing the upward current of heated 
air, the outwardly projecting lips h on the 
outer cylinder A serve to gently divert the air 
which rises up the outside of the cylinder and 
to pass a portion of the same through the 
slots h into the cylinder, where it mixes with 
the hotter air inside. 
The inner tube or cylinder may be connect 
ed with a flue tube which serves to convey the 
75 
75 
95 
IOC 
ro5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
515,250 
products of combustion out of the room. In 
case such outlet tube is used I prefer to fur 
mish it with a valve to admit of regulating the 
current of air as required. 
In some cases I close the lower part of the 
free air space between the two cylinders and 
provide a pipe or tube for conducting air from 
outside the room to said air space whence it 
rises into the room. By this means the room 
is kept supplied with warmed fresh air and is 
thus effectually ventilated. The fouled air in 
the room makes its exit by Way of the chim 
mey and through the usual crevices around 
the doors and Windows. 
Isometimes dispense with the outer cylin 
der while retaining the inner cylinder and the 
radial vanes. 
My improved apparatus may be construct 
ed in an ornamental manner, as for instance 
the radial vanes may be made in the form of 
petals and leaves of flowers and plants, the 
stems being fixed or mounted on the outer 
side of the outer cylinder or on the outer side 
of the inner cylinder if the outer cylinder is 
dispensed with, or said stems may be fixed or 
mounted in any other convenient or suitable 
position. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of an air-heater com 
prising an inner and an outer cylinder made 
of thin sheet metal through which the air to 
be heated passes, an oil lamp external to said 
heater, and a metallic tube secured in the 
lower end of the said inner cylinder, the lower 
of said tube being bent or curved inward at 
its edge, substantially as described for the 
purpose specified, 
2. The combination of an air-heater com 
prising an inner and an outer cylinder made 
of thin sheet metal through which the air to 
be heated passes, an oil lamp external to said 
heater, a metal tube secured in the lower end 
of the said inner cylinder, the lower of said 
tube being bent or curved inward at its edge, 
and another tube made of a substance which 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
is a bad conductor of heat, and which slides 
on the aforesaid metal tube and serves to 
conduct the products of combustion from the 
lamp to the heater, substantially as described, 
for the purpose specified. 
3. An air-heater comprising an inner and 
an outer cylinder and connecting vanes or 
webs built up of thin sheet metal stamped and 
bent and furnished with tongues and slits 
whereby each sheet is attached to its neigh 
bors, each said sheet being constructed to 
form a part of the outer and of the inner cyl 
inder and one of the radial vanes, substan 
tially as described. 
4. An air-heater comprising an inner and 
an outer cylinder and connecting Vanes or 
webs built up of thin sheet metal stamped and 
bent and furnished with tongues and slits, 
whereby each sheet is attached to its neigh 
bors, each said sheet being constructed to 
form a part of the outer and of the inner cyl 
inder and one of the radial vanes, and U 
shaped slits in the outer cylinder forming 
tongues which are pushed outward to divert 
the air rising up outside the heater into the 
heater, substantially as described. 
5. An air-heater comprising an inner and 
an outer cylinder and connecting vanes or 
webs built up of thin sheet metal stamped and 
bent and furnished with tongues and slits 
whereby each sheet is attached to its neigh 
bors, each said sheet being constructed to 
form a part of the outer and of the inner cyl 
inder and one of the radial vanes, and hav 
ing tongues that project radially into the in 
ner cylinder and arranged to present their 
sharp edges toward the ascending heated col 
umn of air, substantially as described, for the 
purpose specified. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 28th day of September, 1893. 
JOHN REYNOLDS. 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE HOAR, 
THOMAS LAKE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515351.txt	(No Model. 
Model.) 
No. 515,35l. 
F. J. MORG AN. 
CULINARY WESSE HANDLE. 
Patented Feb. 27, 1894. 
s N a M 
L esses 
 
A 
 
W/TWESSAS 
2lov.2%ose. 
-Z Iyp/EWTOf 
2Zazz f 2. 
This NationA lithographrie COMPANY., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK J. MORGAN, OF KATAMAZOO, MICHIGAN. 
CUL NARY - VESSE HAN DE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,351, dated February 27, 1894. 
Application filed February 27, 1893. Serial No. 463,952, (No model.) 
55 
To all tuhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FRANK J. MORGAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Kala 
mazoo, county of Kalamazoo, State of Michi 
gan, have invented a new and useful Culi 
nary-Vessel Handle, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to culinary vessels 
which are provided with handles made sepa 
rate from the material of which the vessel is 
composed and attached thereto. 
The object of the invention consists in cer 
tain improvements designed to add to the 
utility and facilitate the manufacture, all as 
more particularly described below in detail. 
In the drawings forming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is an inverted plan view, 
showing the vessel broken; Fig. 2 the same, 
showing a change; and Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
cross section on line ac-ac, in Fig. 1, showing 
a change. 
Referring to the lettered parts of the draw 
ings, A is a broken portion of a culinary ves 
sel, at one side of the same, and bottom up 
ward. These vessels are first cut out of sheet 
steel and then pressed into form, and when 
cut out a short projection, B, is left integral 
with the vessel, at the side thereof, the edges 
of said projection converging from the vessel 
toward the end. The attaching end of the 
handle, C, is formed with diverging sides, so 
as to conform to the shape of the short pro 
jection, B. The handle, C, is rolled over at 
the edges and the widened end is lapped on 
to the projection and the edges of the latter 
folded over and pressed down upon the folded 
edges of the handle C, as at D. By thus mak 
ing the edges of the projection B converging 
toward the outer end and the edges of the 
handle C diverging at the inner end, so that 
the edges of the lapping parts register with 
each other, and by folding and pressing the 
edges of the projection over on to the edges 
of the widened end of the handle, the handle 
is made practically as rigid and strong as 
though all made from one piece; the handle 
part, C, cannot be pushed in nor drawn out, 
and still I am enabled to have the handle pro 
ject at a horizontal or an inclined angle, or on 
a gentle circular slope, and thus obviate the 
necessity of making opposing curves in the 
lapping parts of the handle. 
Figs, land 2 illustrate the invention as thus 
far described. 
In Figs, 1 and 3 the lapping parts of the 
projection of the handle are corrugated by 
being pressed together between dies, as at E. 
This gives additional strength, making the 
handle more rigid than without the corruga 
tions, as in Fig. 2; however, the plan in Fig. 
2 is practical. 
In forming the corrugations, one part of the 
metal is forced into the other, and thus guards 
against lateral canting of the handle, in case 
the rolled edges should be imperfectly, care 
lessly or loosely folded and pressed. 
In Fig. 3, at H is shown a piece of asbestus 
or other equivalent flexible material which is 
a non-conductor of heat, placed between the 
lapping parts of the projection B and the han 
dle C, and rolled with them at the edges, D. 
This asbestus, H, or its equivalent, being a 
non-conductor of heat, keeps the handle part 
C cooler than would be the case if it came in 
direct contact with the projection B of the 
vessel. 
Of course, for the purposes of my inven 
tion, the short projection B may or may not 
be integral with the vessel, A. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
1. A culinary vessel provided with a short 
projection, the edges of which converge from 
the vessel toward the outer end, in combina 
tion with a separate handle part, the edges 
of the inner end of which diverge, the wid 
ened end of the handle being lapped on to 
the converging projection and attached there 
to by rolling and pressing the edges of the 
latter over on to the former; substantially as 
set forth. 
2. A culinary vessel provided with a short 
projection converging from the vessel toward 
the end, in combination with a separate han 
dle part having a widened end lapping on to 
75 
95 
o 
I5 
25 
35 
45 
2 
515,351 
said projection and attached thereto by roll- I having corrugations formed therein; substan 
ing and pressing the edges together, and a tially as set forth. 
In testimony to the foregoing I have here 
suitable flexible material which is a non-con- 
ductor of heat between the lapping parts; unto subscribed my name in the presence of 
5 substantially as set forth. 
3. A culinary vessel provided with a short 
projection, in combination with a separate 
handle part lapping on to said projection and 
attached thereto by rolling and pressing the 
Io edges together, the lapping parts of the metal 
two witnesses. 
FRANK J. MORGAN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN P. OGGEL, 
J. M. CRAMER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515451.txt	(No Model.) 
A, STAIR, 
WEHICLE POLE COUPLING. 
No. 515,451. 
Patented Feb. 27, 1894. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADAM STAIR, OF MOUNT EATON, OHIO. 
VEHICLE-POLE COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,451, dated February 27, 1894. 
Application filed May 12, 1893, Serial No. 473,989. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ADAM STAIR, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Mount Eaton, 
in the county of Wayne and State of Ohio, 
have invented a new and useful Adjustable 
Pole-Coupling, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
adjustable pole couplings, and has for its ob 
ject to provideshiftable poles for vehicles that 
can be used in connection with either wagons 
or sleighs or with vehicles of different widths. 
Devices of this class have been used more or 
less in the art, but owing to inherent defects 
they have not become universally employed, 
and the essential feature of the present inven 
tion is to cure these defects as much as possi 
ble, and to also make a device of the nature 
set forth as nearly practicable as possible. 
The object of the present invention, also, is 
to provide an improved construction that will 
permit of a ready attachment and detachment 
as well as adjustment, and also to strengthen 
the parts of the pole-connections or couplings. 
With these and other objects in view, the 
invention consists of the construction and ar 
rangement of the parts thereofas will be here 
inafter more fully described and claimed. 
In the drawings: Figure is a top plan view 
of a vehicle pole and its connections embody 
ing the invention. Fig. 2 is a bottom plan 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a rear end eleva 
tion. Fig. 4 is a detail perspective view of 
a part of the device. Fig. 5 is a detail per 
spective view of one of the stub thill-irons and 
its connected shoe. Fig.6 is a detail sectional 
view showing the forwardly projecting curved 
arms of the curved cross-bar. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
SS Referring to the drawings, the numeral. 1 
designates the pole or tongue, which may be 
provided with a whiffle-tree and singletrees, 
as may be found desirable. At its rear end 
the said pole or tongue is held between a pair 
of forwardly-projecting curved arms 2 and 3, 
respectively bearing upon the upper and lower 
sides thereof and secured thereto, the said 
arms extending from the center of a curved 
cross-bar 4, having its opposite ends flattened 
and provided with upper and lower parallel 
40 
45 
 
55 
65 
overhanging or grooved guides or flanges 5, 
to form seats 6, for a purpose which will be 
more fully hereinafter referred to. Secured 
to the opposite sides of the pole or tongue are 
the front ends of a pair of rearwardly-diverg 
ing braces. 7, whose extreme rear ends are flat 
tened, as at 8, and bear against the front outer 
end-portions of the seats 6, and are turned 
over, as at 9, to form outer end closures for 
the said seats 6. 
Within the seats 6 are adjustably mounted 
shoes 10, that consist of flat plates of metal 
having slots 11 therein, and formed there with 
or connected thereto are stub thill-irons 12, 
having rear coupling-sleeves or heads 13, as 
the case may be. Engaging the slots 11, and 
extending into the seats 6, are set-screwsl4, by 
means of which the shoes 10 are held in their 
adjusted position as well as the stub thill 
irons carried thereby. 
The operation will be readily understood. 
In changing the pole from a wagon or carriage 
to a cutter, or vice versa, the set-screws 14 will 
be loosened and the shoes 10 moved either in 
Wardly or outwardly to accommodate the width 
of the thill couplings; or if it is desired to 
make the coupling directly with a cutter or 
sleigh, the shoes are moved inwardly toward 
each other and the set-screws again tightened. 
The device as herein set forth is also useful 
in adjusting the pole to one side or the other 
of a cutter or sleigh to compensate for drifts 
or grades and to bring the horses nearer one 
side than the other for evident purposes. 
Changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction may be resorted 
to without departing from the principle or 
Sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
vention. 
Having described the invention, what is 
claimed as new is 
l. In a pole or tongue coupling, the combi 
nation of a rear cross-bar having forwardly 
projecting arms secured to the pole or tongue, 
and the opposite ends flattened and pro 
vided with upper and lower grooved guides or 
flanges, a pair of braces secured to the pole 
Or tongue at their front ends and extended 
rearwardly and bent over the ends of the said 
guides to form closures for the same, slotted 
shoes mounted in said guides or flanges fit 
ting in the grooves thereof and carrying rear 
75 
95 
Edo 
2 
wardly-projecting stub thill-irons having rear the grooves thereof and having rearwardly 
connecting ends, and set-screws adjustably extending stub thill-irons, and set-screws en 
engaging the said slotted shoes, substantially gaging said "shoes, substantially as described. 
as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
nation of a rear cross-bar having seats at the the presence of two witnesses. 
opposite ends thereof provided with upper 
and lower grooved guides or flanges, a pair of 
slotted shoes disposed vertically and adjust- 
Io ably mounted in the said seats and fitting in 
5.2. In a pole or tongue coupling, the combi- my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in 15 
HIRAM. SWARTZ, 
SAMUEL.D., COULTER. 
ADAM STAIR. 
Witnesses: 
515,45. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515551.txt	A. C. PETZ MAN. 
RAILROAD TIE, 
Patented Feb. 27, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 515,55. 
 
 
 
  
 
essess 
22 SN Ov 7 
S 
N 
S 
 
i.e., 
EXOil Ull 
A. Sz  H i. 
 
   
 
2. 
N s 
E. 
A. 
a 7.42... 
-64%-24 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPH. C. PETZMAN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAILROAD TE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,551, dated February 27, 1894. 
Application filed July 21, 1893, Serial No. 481,103, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ADOLPH. C. PETZMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Railroad-Ties, which im 
provement is fully set forth in the following 
specification and accompanying drawings. 
My invention consists of a railroad tie 
for red as herein described and claimed of 
two frames which may be separated in longi 
tudinal direction to introduce and remove the 
rails, and which when closed serve to support 
the rails in a firm and substantial manner, 
the tie being also strong and durable in its 
nature. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
tie embodying my invention. Fig. 2 repre 
sents a longitudinal section thereof, on line 
ac, ac, of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents a transverse 
section thereof on line y, 21, Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings: A designates 
two frames, one being composed of the side 
or longitudinal piece B, and the end or trans 
verse pieces C, and the other composed of the 
side or longitudinal piece D, and the end or 
transverse pieces E, E. Each piece C of one 
frame is parallel with a piece E of the other 
frame, and in the upper faces of the adjacent 
pieces are recesses F, F, each corresponding 
to one-half of the width of the flange of a rail, 
so that the rails may be seated on the pieces 
C, E, in said recesses F, the upper walls of 
said recesses serving as cheek pieces to em 
brace said flanges. 
G designates bolts which are passed through 
the pieces C and E, and are provided with 
nuts H for tightening purposes. It will be 
seen that when the nuts H are unscrewed or 
loosened, the pieces C and E separate, and 
the flanges of the rails may be properly seated 
or located, after which the bolts or nuts are 
screwed-up, whereby the pieces C and E close 
against the rails and tightly embrace the Same, 
as will be seen in Fig. 2. When the nuts are 
again loosened, the rails may be removed 
when so required. 
In order to permit the rails to be seated in 
the recesses at the ends of the latter next to 
the longitudinal side pieces B and C of the 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
60 
75 
frames, said pieces are cut-away opposite to 
said ends as at J, J, the rails thus being 
adapted to rest upon the bases of the recesses 
F, and upon said cut-away portions J, as said 
bases and portions are continuities of each 
other, and said portions uncover the ends of 
the recesses on the pieces Cand E, so that the 
rails may be readily placed in said recesses, 
when said pieces are properly separated. 
Each frame is virtually three-sided, so that 
When the parts are together they form a skele 
ton tie which is light, strong and durable, and 
leaves the center of the same open for pur 
poses of ballasting, filling-in, &c. The outer 
transverse piece of each frame is longer than 
the adjacent inner piece of the other frame, 
So that said inner piece is wholly inclosed 
by said outerpiece, and a rail rests in grooves 
on both pieces and the portion of the side 
piece B in line with said grooves. 
Having thus described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A railroad tie formed of two frames, each 
consisting of a longitudinal piece having a 
transverse piece at each end thereof, one of 
said transverse pieces of each frame being 
longer than the other transverse piece of the 
same frame, and the contiguous transverse 
pieces of the frames having recesses for the 
rails, said parts being combined substantially 
as described. 
2. A railroad tie formed of two frames, each 
consisting of a longitudinal piece and paral 
lel transverse pieces at its ends of unequal 
length, where the longitudinal sides of the 
frame are separated, and the end of one frame 
incloses the end of the other, the opposite 
cross pieces having recesses for seating the 
rails, said parts being combined substantially 
as described. 
3. A tie formed of recessed transverse 
pieces, and recessed longitudinal pieces con 
nected there with, the longitudinal pieces be 
ing cut away at the ends of the recesses of 
the transverse pieces, said parts being com 
bined substantially as described. 
ADOLPH. C. PETZMAN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
R. H. GRAESER, 
go 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515651.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 515,651. 
A. H. CHILTON. 
COMBINED HORSE DETACHER AND BRAKE, 
Patented Feb. 27, 1894, 
it. 
/A -127  
p 
4 
t 
Azi Az-z 
Ali TTE 
 
- 
th 
- 
as sail/ 
IEE 
s Hit 
T CO-OPT Y 
-- TTTTTTTTTTFIIHill 
z \, 
iii. 
Z 
R 
t 
East 
2 IIHTITHEISH) 
7 
t 
WTWESSES 
&#. 
era. 
s NHug to Br W. 6 
ATIORNEYS. 
what 
toNA. tightcarAPH16 co?mPANY., 
WAskeoN 9, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AN NIE H. CHILTON OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
COMBINED HORSE-DETACHER AND BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,651, dated February 27, 1894. 
Application filed June 7, 1893, Serial No. 476,805. (No model.) 
O 
5 
2a al Zuhon, it may concern 
Be it known that I, ANNIE. H. CHILTON, re 
siding in the city of Baltimore and State of 
Maryland, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in a Combined Horse 
Detacher and Vehicle-Brake, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
simple and effective means whereby the horse 
can be quickly detached from the shafts, such 
shafts held from the ground and the brakes 
applied simultaneously, the several parts be 
ing released by means of a releasing rod, 
chain or cord extended into the vehicle body 
Within convenient reach of the driver. 
It has also for its object to provide means 
whereby in case the horse should fall, he may 
be released by the same means and by draw 
ing the wagon backward, the shafts being 
connected to the wagon body by spiral springs 
will yield and not be broken. 
With other minor objects in view, which 
hereinafter will be referred to the invention 
consists in such details of mechanism and 
combination of parts as will be first described 
and particularly pointed out in the claims, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
of my improved devices. Fig. 2 is a bottom 
plan view of the same and Fig. 3 is a side ele 
wation of the brake on an enlarged scale. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
A indicates the vehicle, C the front axle and 
D the rear axle on which are journaled the 
wheels E and F, such parts being of the or 
dinary construction. 
Upon the rear axle D at each end are se 
cured a pair of depending brackets GH, and 
in each pair of such brackets is journaled a 
rock shaft I, about which is disposed a tor 
sion spring J which serves to normally turn 
it in one direction of movement, such spring 
having one end secured to the shaft while its 
other end is secured to the bracket H in the 
usual manner. Near the outer end such shafts 
I have a crank or lever K secured thereto, by 
means of which the tension of the springs can 
be adjusted in a manner presently described. 
At their inner ends the rock shafts I have 
crank members L, see Fig. 2, which are con 
nected with one end of brake bands M, which 
75 
are passed around bearing portions in on the 
hubs N of the rear wheels; the opposite ends 
of such band brakes being secured to angle 
or crank arms H* formed on the lower ends 
of the brackets Hand prejected angularly in 
reverse directions to the cranks L. 
Upon the outer ends of the shafts I are Se 
cured notched collars O, with which are 
adapted to engage detents or latch members 
P as most clearly shown in Fig. 1 of the draw 
lings. 
So far as described it will be readily under 
stood that when the lever K is turned in the 
direction indicated by the arrow in Fig. 1, 
tension will be applied to the spring J, which 
movement will also serve to separate the ends 
of the band brakes, and thereby loosely hold 
them on the bearing faces of the hubs, and 7 o 
when such shafts I have been turned until the 
notches of the collars Opass under the mem 
bers p of the latches P such latches then move 
in place and hold the shafts and the band 
brakes to their unapplied position. The 
means for releasing the said brake appliances 
consists preferably of chain connections QQ 
arranged as shown which are joined at q to 
a single chain R, which has its end passed 
over a guide or pulley S mounted preferably 
under the central portion of the front end of 
the wagon body. 
TT indicate the vehicle shafts, and U the 
single tree to the ends of which spring actu 
ated trace holding bolts V are secured to the 
inner ends of which, flexible connections or 
chains w are secured, which in turn are se 
cured to a single chain W which passes over 
the pulley S, reversely to the chain R, such 
chain R and the chain. W being connected 
to a lift chain Y which extends up to within 
the wagon body as shown. 
Z indicates a spring secured at one end to 
the wagon body and at its other end to the 
single tree, and such spring serves to support 
the shafts when the animal is detached there 
from. 
From the foregoing description taken in 
connection with the drawings it will readily 
appear that by pulling upon the chain orcord 
Y, the connections Q Q, w, will be drawn taut 
and in consequence pull back the trace bolts, 
and trip the latch P to release the shaft I, 
which then through the medium of the tor 
95 
CC 
30 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
515,651 
sional spring will be turned in the direction 
indicated by the arrow, thereby cause the 
Crank arm to pull the band brakes tightly 
against the wheel hubs and effectively brake 
Sale 
To reset the brake devices the shafts I are 
again rocked through the medium of the le 
Vers K. as before stated until the lock or de 
tent P again engages the notched collar. 
The devices are exceedingly simple in their 
Construction, can be applied to any vehicle at 
a small cost, are easily manipulated and very 
effective for their desired purpose. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is-- 
1. An improved combined horse detacher 
and vehicle brake mechanism, comprising a 
Spring actuated band brake mechanism ar 
ranged to engage, one or more of the wheel 
hubs, a detent for normally holding such 
mechanism out of operative position, horse 
detaching devices on the vehicle shafts, a 
guide member on the vehicle body, an oper 
ating cord or chain connected to the brake 
band detent and passed up over the guide in 
One direction, an operating cord or chain con 
nected to the detaching devices and passed 
over the guide in a reverse direction to the 
detent cord, and a single, operating handle 
portion connected to the 6nds of such detent 
and detaching cords, extended up within the 
Vehicle body, all arranged substantially as 
shown and for the purposes described. 
2. The combination with one or more wheels 
of the vehicle, a brake band held on the hubs 
thereof, a shaft mounted on the vehicle held 
d 
20 
25 
35 
to rock in one direction by spring tension, 
said shaft having a crank arm, connected to 
one end of the brake band, a fixed arm con 
nected to the other end of such band, a lock 
notch or projection on such shaft, a pivoted 
detent adapted to engage such lock notch on 
the shaft, and connections between such de 
tent and an operating member on the wagon 
body whereby the detent is released from the 
shaft, and the brake band applied on such hub 
when the operating member is pulled upon all 
Substantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination with the shaft, D and 
the wheel E, of the spring actuated rockshaft 
I journaled on the shaft having an angle arm 
L at its inner end, the fixed augle arm Hin 
clined reversely to the arm I, the brake band 
M fitted over the wheel hub and having its 
ends secured to the arms. Land H* said shaft 
having a lock notch, the detent Padapted to 
engage such notch and the chain or cord con 
nections, for operating the detent Pallar 
ranged substantially as shown and described. 
4. The combination with the axles and sup 
porting wheels, of the spring actuated rock 
shaft I, having a crank arm. K. and a notched 
collar O at its inner end and an angularly ex 
tending arm L at its opposite end, a fixed arm 
H* and the band brake M secured at its ends 
to the arms L and H* and adapted to fit over 
the wheel hub all arranged substantially as 
shown and described. 
45 
So 
55 
ANNIE H. CHILTON, 
Witnesses: 
ANNEH. S. HACK, 
OLIVER, E. HACK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515751.txt	T. L., & N. W. DALTON. 
ELECTRIC SWITCH. SIGNAL. 
. 
. 
3. Sheets-Sheet . 
t 
Patented Mar. 6, 1894, 
(No Model.) 
No. 515,751. 
 
28itvesses 
g-ze, 
 
- 
8vvuci to 
43.2% 
blowog 
(No Model.) 
No. 515,751, 
T. L., & N. W. DALTON. 
ELECTRIC SWITCH SIGNAL, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 6, 1894. 
 
2. 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 515,751. 
T. L. & N. W. DALTON. 
ELECTRIC SWITCH. SIGNAL. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Mar. 6, 1894. 
() 
 
 
... Warzesses: 
fair1. 
- 
- 
 
Zezezzzzoz's 
464 
%2, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS LLOYD DALTON AND NELSON WAIT DALTON, OF SANDY HILL, 
NEW YORK. 
ELECTRIC SWITCH-SIGNAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,751,dated March 6, 1894. 
Application filed August 5, 1893, Serial No. 482,443, (No model, 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, THOMAS LLOYD DAL 
TON and NELSON WAIT DALTON, citizens of 
the United States, residing at Sandy Hill, in 
the county of Washington and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Electric Switch-Signals; and 
We do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention has relation to improve 
ments in means for operating and displaying 
signals used at switches, turnouts, side-tracks, 
and similar places or points on railroads, es 
pecially electric street railways, and it may 
be used as a station indicator, such means 
being associated with, and controlled by, elec 
trical devices, as hereinafter specified. 
The inventionishereinafter fully described, 
and particularly pointed out in the claims; 
the Sane is fully and clearly illustrated in 
the accompanying-drawings, wherein 
Figure l is a side elevation of the mechan 
ism showing the signalin horizontal position 
also showing the endless chain as having the 
lower portion broken off. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view. Fig. 3 is a view showing the device 
mounted in operative position, and a pull rod 
in connection with the endless chain, shown 
inside elevation. Fig. 4 shows contact pieces; 
Fig. 5 illustrates the position of a trolley 
pushing up the wire against the contact 
piece, to close the circuit of the signal mech 
anism and Fig. 6 is a diagrammatic view show 
ing the arrangement of the circuits. 
A designates a suitable frame or support, 
adapted to carry the mechanism, being shown 
as consisting of vertical supports 1, 2 and 
horizontal bars 3, the frame being in dupli 
cate and formed or provided with bearings 
carrying the journals of the respective gear 
ings and signal-disk, as indicated in the draw 
ings, and more specifically described, as fol 
lows:-In the horizontal bars 3 are formed 
bearings, in which is mounted a shaft 4 on 
which is loosely mounted a sprocket-wheel 5 
carrying an endless chain 6, by which the 
wheel may be rotated by any appliance 
adapted to the purpose, as by a hand imples 
ment 7, provided with a hook to engage in the 
links of the chain, as shown in Fig. 3 of the 
drawings. On the shaft of the sprocket 
wheel 5, a gear wheel 8 is fixed, meshing with 
a pinion 9 on a shaft 10, which shaft 10 car 
ries a gear wheel 11, meshing with a pinion 
2 on shaft or journal 13, in bearing 14, in . 
standards 15 substantially as shown in the 
drawings. On the shaft 13 is fixed a disk 16 
formed with oppositely arranged steps, pawls, 
or notches 16* as seen in Fig. 1 of the draw 
ings. On an extension of the shaft 13 is also 
mounted the signal 17 arranged or fixed par 
allel with the notches 16 as shown. The 
notches 16* in the disk 16 are engaged by 
the pawl-armatures 18, 19, contacting with 
the magnets B, C, in an electric circuit as 
shown in Fig. 1, of the drawings. The arma 
tures 18, 19 are arranged in such position that 
one of them will engage a, notch at every 
quarter-turn of the disk. The mechanism is 
concealed in a proper case or box20 mounted 
on a suitable support 2i with the signal 17, 
extending therefrom and exposed to view. 
On the endless chain 6 may be attached a 
weight 6*, the force of which when the pawl 
armatures are released, moves the mechanism 
until the next engagement of one of the pawl 
armatures. This weight 6 is a substitute 
power for the hand-pull 7. On the shaft of 
the sprocket-wheel 5, is a ratchet 22, engaged 
by a pawl 23, arranged to hold the sprocket 
wheel against reverse motion. 
The electrical device used in association 
with the mechanism, consists of the magnets 
B, C, and pawl armatures 18, 19, the magnets 
having circuit connection by wires a, b, to 
contact pieces c, mounted adjacent to the 
main circuit or trolley wired, from which one 
of the magnets is energized on the contact 
being made between the trolley wire and the 
contact-piece as indicated in Fig. 6, of the 
drawings. The contact pieces care formed 
with a lower forked portion which extends 
below the conducting wires, so that either by 
vibration, or elevation, the circuit which con 
trols the signal will be actuated. 
In Fig. 3 of the drawings an electric lamp 
e, is shown suspended behind the signal, to 
show the position of the same; the signal be 
ing turned with the edge at right angles to 
the lamp will leave the naked white-light to 
2. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
95 
Oc 
2 
515,751. 
.indicate safety; and the signal being turned wire m.s. And to set the signal at Safety pos. . . 
. 
rin front of the lamp, will of course display...sition the current proceeds, oneontact, through it is 
the color signal indicating the proper pur- wire a magnet B, resistance Randwire in to 35 . . . 
port, a ground wiren, is shown to complete a track T. 
i-circuit. . . 
. 
Having thus described our invention; what . . 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patri. 
- ...s:::::::::::::::::::::::::::- 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
. . . . 
... . 
. . . . 
. . . 
. . . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
 
it 
is 
 
*:::: 
5...; 
... When it is desired to operate the signal, the 
3. trolley wire is pushed up by the trolley into 
33: 2 contact with the contact-piece; as seen in the 
drawings thus energizing the magnets of the 
is signal, and withdrawing the paw-arnature 
it from engagement with the disk, which being 
effected the force of weight at once acts to 
...turn the train of gearings, which movement 
5 continues until the quarter-turn of the diskis 
- made, when one of the paw-arnatures en 
tgages the next notch in the disk, and stops 
... the movement of the cine chanism until the 
is next action of the armature. This operation 
in case the weight is not used as the power, 
may be aeeomplished by the handiniplement 
7. The currents used in operating the mag 
nets and pawls is taken from the main cur 
rent, circuit, and is reduced by a resistanced 
coil, or by lamps. Rini series concealed in the 
easing containing the mechanism, i. 
... In Fig. 6 is illustrated the circuits, and ref 
f 
i erence being thereto had, it will appear, that 
. . . . . to set the signal to the stop, or danger posi 
s 3C tion, the current enters-wireb, on contact 
with the trolley wire thence by wiret through 
magnet C and resistance E to track. T through 
. 
1. The combination of a train of gearing, a 
sprocket-wheel" on the shaft of one of the 
gears, a chain to turn the sprocket-wheel arid 
operate the train of gearing, a retating disk is is 
having oppositely arranged radial notches . . . . . 
therein, a signal on an extension of the disk 
shaft, pivotally mounted pawi-airmatures to....... 
engage the notches in the disk, magnets to . 
. 
. 
operate the pawl-arnatures, and an electric. ... assi: 
circuit to...energize the magnets, substantially, 
i. 
as and for the purpose specified. . 
50. - & 
... 2. The corabinatio of the signal circuit. If ... 
and the strolley-circuit, of a forked contact..... is 
pieee between the said circuits and the trol site. 
ley-contaetone of the circuits lying in the . . . 
scroteh of the fork, whereby the troiley wire. 
55 - 
is moved in contact with the signal wire and 
the signal operated, substantially as specified. . . . . . 
. 
... In testimony whereof...We affixioursi 
gnatures it is 
in presence of two witnesses, 
. 
FHSMASiSD DALTon. . 
ON WAIT DALTON. . 
NES 
. . . . 
. . 
g: 
. . 
. 
 
: Witnesses; . 
. . . . . . 
. 
. 
in . . . . MILO ING ALSBE, is . . 
. 
'GREEN VILLENING ALSBE 
. . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515851.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 515,851. 
 
A. N. WOOD ARD. 
-BURGIAR ALARM. 
Patented Mar. 6, 1894. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALVIN N. WOODARD, OF MANSFIELD, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OR ONE-FOURTH TO 
LEWIS REED, OF SAME PLACE. 
- 
- 
BURG LAR-ALARM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,851, dated March 6, 1894. 
Application filed May 5, 1893, Serial No. 473,32. (No model.) 
Io 
15 
55 
To all whom it maty concern: 
Be it known that I, ALVIN N. WOODARD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Mansfield, in the county of Richland and 
State of Ohio, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Burglar-Alarms, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
cheap but reliable burglar alarm, more es 
pecially for use in country places, but which, 
of course, is not limited in its application to 
any locality. 
In the preferred form of my invention, I 
employ a double-barreled spool provided with 
a cord wound about one of its barrels, so that 
by pulling upon said cord the spool will be 
rotated in one direction, and having a weight 
suspended by a cord which is wound about 
2o the other barrel in the reverse direction so 
that the unwinding of one cord will wind the 
other. This double-barreled spool is com 
bined with a pawl-and-ratchet, let-off mech 
anism adapted to be actuated or released by 
25 the opening of a door or window, and is also 
combined with a bell or equivalent alarm 
mechanism, all as I will proceed now more par 
ticularly to set forth and finally claim. 
In the accompanying drawings illustrating 
my invention, in the several figures of which 
like parts are similarly designated, Figure 
is an elevation of a complete apparatus, sav 
ing that the cover of the casing is removed. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation, with part of the cas 
ing broken away; and Fig. 3 is a side eleva 
tion looking at the side opposite to that in 
Fig. 2, also with part of the casing broken 
The casing consists of a back-plate a, by 
which the apparatus may be mounted in suit 
able position, as by means of screwsb passed 
through holes in ears c of said back-plate; 
side-pieces d projecting from said back-plate 
at Substantially right angles, and a face-plate 
or covere, the latter being removed in Figs. 
i and 2, and being shown in section in Fig. 
3. Secured to the back-plate a is a rectangular 
bracket f, the sides f' of which form bearings 
for the shaft g of the double-barreled spool h. 
5o This spool may be made of wood or other ma 
terial. The cord is wound in one direction 
upon one of the barrels of this spool, and a 
cord i is wound in the other direction upon 
the other of said barrels, and said cord i is 
provided with a weight ic. One end of the 
spool is provided with a ratchet l, and this 
ratchet is engaged by a pawl n, pivoted to 
one of the side-pieces d of the casing. At its 
other end the spool is provided with an ec 
centric or crank n, which is connected by a 
link o with the bell-hammer lever p of the 
bell q, so that the rotation of the spool in 
either direction will serve to actuate the bell 
hammer lever to sound the bell. The pawl 
in may be operated in a variety of ways, and 
I have shown two such ways. In Fig. 1, the 
cord r leads over pulleys S to a door i, to 
which it is fastened, as, for example, by a 
screw-eye ut. If the cord be stretched be 
tween the pawl in and the door, at its full 
length, then obviously the opening of the door 
will pull upon the cord and hence raise the 
pawl out of its engagement with the ratchet 
l, and thus the weight k will be free to act to 
rotate the spool, and so sound the alarm. 
Now, in order to keep the cord r taut, and, at 
the same time, take up any slack, there may 
be interposed in it at any suitable place or 
places one or more pieces v of elastic or elas 
tic cord, or coiled spring, or other resilient 
medium. The pawl may be a gravity pawl 
and returned by gravity into engagement 
with the ratchet. 
The form of the apparatus so far described 
relates to the employment of the alarm ap 
paratus itself at one point, while the connec 
tion with the door or other opening is at a 
distant point, as, for example, the alarm mech 
anism may be in a bed chamber while the 
door may be a front or rear door of a dwell 
ing some distance from the bed chamber. It 
is obvious that as many alarms may be air 
ranged in a given place as there are openings 
to be protected. 
I prefer to employ in connection with my 
alarm the guides or ways or troughs, 20, 20, 
for the cords and weight, and in case a num 
ber of alarms are arranged in a given place, 
these troughs may also receive cards to indi 
cate the opening with which that particular 
alarm mechanism is connected. If the alarm 
be arranged at the point to be protected, say, 
45 
away. 
35 
w 
o 
75 
35 
: 40 
 
95 
OC 
tion with 
hanism for said 
Witnesses: 
. Wit. II. FINCKEL, , , 
E. A.F.No. 
titgria. 
. . What I claim is . . 
. 
. . .I. An alarm. nechanism consisting essen 
. 
. 
. 
ay. 
laid of any ornati 
... ... . . . . . . 
. 
. 
. . . 
. 
. 
. 
 
   
. 
. . . . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US515951.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 515,951. 
H. B. COBB, 
LEAD PRESS, 
Patented Mar. 6, 1894, 
I 
  
| 
I 
 
H 
Hill 
 
ifi 
Sir 
XS. 
S s 
  
 
 
ZSex %2. 
NSZ 
SS 
S 
2. 
2. 
IV 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
E. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
easales 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY B. COBB, OF WILMINGTON, DELAWARE. 
LEAD - PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 515,951, dated March 6, 1894. 
Application filed July 30, 1892, 
Serial No. 441,672 (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY B. COBB, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wilming 
ton, in the county of New Castle and State of 
Delaware, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Lead-Presses, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the class of machines for use in forming tub 
ing from plastic material capable of being 
Subsequently hardened, such as molten lead, 
(from the use of which the machine is named.) 
plastic rubber, and the like. 
A machine of the class to which my im 
provement relates involves, as its generally 
Stated usual construction, a frame supporting 
a rammer, (either stationary or vertically re 
ciprocating,) a piston, usually actuated by hy 
draulic pressure, a chamber for containing 
the charge of material (as lead) and in verti 
cal line with the rammer (which, if movable, 
is operated to Work in and out of the cham 
ber, or, if stationary the chamber is recipro 
cable with relation to it) and a die-chamber 
containing the tube-forming die and extend 
ing across the lead-chamber with which it 
communicates. 
The object of my improvement is to provide 
a construction of press of the aforesaid class 
whereby its product may be turned out much 
more rapidly than by any other known con 
struction thereof, and whereby the enormous 
pressure employed in evacuating the lead 
chamber of its contents to form the tubing 
may be exerted directly from the lead-cham 
ber against the die crossing its outlet-open 
ing, without bending and injuring the die; 
and it is also my object to enable the use to 
be dispensed with of the quite commonly pro 
vided so-called bridge covering the com 
municating opening between the die-chamber 
and lead-chamber to induce distribution of 
the pressure about the die, thereby to pre 
vent injury of the latter by the enormous 
pressure, but which bridge tends to obstruct, 
and therefore to retard, the operation of the 
machine and thus reduces its capacity. I 
accomplish my objects by inclining the die 
chamber downward from the side of the lead 
chamber discharge-outlet opposite the side 
thereof adjacent to the die-chamber outlet to, 
or nearly to, or beyond, the opposite side of 
the said discharge-outlet at the base of the die 
chamber, whereby the die below such outlet 
may be exposed on its upper side to the full 
diameter of the lead-chamber discharge-out 
let while being solidly supported underneath 
throughout such diameter, and whereby, fur 
thermore, the deflection of the vertical press 
ure immediately to a right-angle in the die 
chamber, as hitherto in other constructions, 
is supplanted by a gradual, or obtuse-angle 
deflection in the die-chamber toward its dis 
charge-outlet, which very materially facili 
tates and enhances the turning out of the 
product while greatly diminishing the strain 
on the machine. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in sectional elevation showing a lead 
press provided with my improvement; and 
Figs. 2 and 3 are top views, respectively, of 
different details of my improvement and en 
larged over the scale presented in Fig. 1. 
Except as to the peculiar construction of 
the die-chamber and, preferably also, of the 
die therein, the machine may involve any 
suitable or usual construction of lead-press. 
I have designed the press with my improve 
ment for use in the manufacture of tubing 
from any suitable material, as hereinbefore 
stated, but particularly from soft rubber and 
from lead; and when used for producing lead 
tubing, then more particularly for manufac 
turing lead-coated electric conducting wire or 
cable insulated with rubber, or a rubber com 
pound, and preferably also with paraffine, or 
the like, interposed between the lead and rub 
ber. I therefore, in the drawings, show my 
improved machine as applied to the manufac 
ture of the lead-coated wire or cable referred 
to, and hereinafter describe its operation as 
applied to that particular purpose. 
A denotes the supporting pillars carrying 
on their upper ends the head B, from which 
depends a stationary rammer C. 
D is the head on the vertically reciprocat 
ing hydraulic piston (not shown) and carry 
ing the die-chamber E formed in the block F 
to extend transversely acroSS the machine. 
On the block F is supported the lead or sup 
ply-chamber G, which should be, as shown, 
of uniform diameter throughout its interior, 
and which leads at its base into an opening 
r, in vertical line with it, through the top of 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
3o 
9o 
95 
TOO 
515,951 
o 
25 
the block F, and the sides of which should 
converge downwardly, as shown, to the en 
trance of the opening into the die-chamber. 
The lead-chamber G and head D may, as 
usual, be bolted together through their re 
spective flanges, as shown. In the hollow 
block F, the die-chamber E is formed with 
the adjacent ends of hollow die-supporting 
sleeves F and F, open at their opposite ends 
and there coinciding with threaded openings 
in the block F for hollow die-adjusting set 
screws, p and p' and the opening r in the 
base of the block E continues between the 
sleeves F and F into the die-chamber. The 
sleeve F, shown as cylindrical, is beveled on 
its inner end to form about the core-tube I, 
hereinafter described, an inclined shoulder 
or flange, which affords one wall (the farthest 
from the outlet for the product) of the die 
chamber, the shoulder being at, or about at, 
such an angle of downward inclination that 
it will form a continuation of the degree of 
incline of the adjacent side of the opening r, 
and continue to the base of the die-chamber 
about to, and preferably beyond, as shown, 
the vertical plane of the base of the opposite 
side of the opening r. In the block F is the 
core-tube I held against backward displace 
ment by the set-screw p, and projecting at 
its forward tapering end ac beyond the in 
clined rear wall of the die-chamber afforded 
by the forward end of the sleeve F in line 
with the opening through a die K in the 
sleeve F, and which is held by the set-screw 
35 p'. For a purpose hereinafter described I 
extend from the top of the sleeve F a finger 
in at the base of the outlet r over the top of 
the adjacent end-portion of the core-tube I. 
As will thus be seen, the inner wall O of the 
die-chamber, formed with the inclined shoul 
der about the core-tube and afforded by the 
beveled end of the sleeve F, inclines down 
ward at an angle of forty-five degrees, or 
thereabout toward the outlet for the product 
through the die K and forms along its base 
portion a solid supporting base for the die 
nearly throughout its full length, at least ex 
tending sufficiently far to present a solid bear 
ing for the core-tube beyond the area of press 
ure exerted thereon at the top through the 
base of the lead-chamber. 
While it is preferred to form the core-tube 
and its supporting sleeve as two separate 
parts, as represented, they may be in one 
piece, when the inclined end of the sleeve 
portion would afford, practically, an inclined 
flange or shoulder surrounding the core-tube. 
The sleeve, as such, performs no particular 
function; and its separate construction is 
purely a matter of convenience in providing 
the inclined abutment, shoulder or flange at 
its inner end, which, however, could be as 
well integral with the block F, except for the 
difficulty in so constructing it. 
To operate my improved machine for pro 
ducing lead-coated cable L, the proceeding is 
as follows: It should be stated that for the 
manufacture of the cable L, I provide a bent 
guide-tube M, connected with the inlet-end 
of the set-screw p, to direct into and through 
the core-tube I the rubber-covered cable L' 
to be coated with the lead, and a paraffine 
holder N, supported on the tube M to feed 
into the latter, around the rubber on the Wire, 
the molten paraffine. The chamber G being 
charged with molten lead, which enters also 
and fills the space in the die-chamber E, and 
the cable L' having been inserted into the 
machine sufficiently far to extend past the 
die K, the hydraulic piston is actuated to 
raise the parts supported by it. Thus the 
lead in the chamber G is forced with great 
pressure against the rammer C, and discharged 
about the tapering end of the core-tube I 
through the die Karound the cable Ji', which 
is drawn, by the pressure, through the ma 
chine and coated with a lead-shield, thus 
emerging from the discharge-outlet as the 
paraffined lead-covered rubber-insulated wire 
L. As will be seen, the vertical pressure of 
the rammer against the molten lead in the 
chamber G is largely resisted by the inclined 
wall O of the die-chamber, on which the 
pressure is much more gradually deflected to 
ward the outlet and therefore the less im 
pedes the discharge, than in other machines 
wherein the resistance to the pressure is en 
tirely at a right-angle to the direction there 
of. Furthermore, the core-tube I, though 
exposed to the full force of the lead-chamber 
pressure, can not be bent and thereby de 
flected from its required straight position 
with relation to the die IK, since it bears 
against a solid foundation below the area of 
the directly exerted pressure in the lead 
chamber. 
The purpose of the inclined shoulder af 
forded by the inner end of the sleeve F will 
be understood to be twofold: It deflects the 
material in forming the tubing and equalizes 
the pressure about the die K; and it affords 
a perfect support for the core-tube I against 
the downward pressure of the material in 
the supply-chamber G under the great force 
of the hydraulic ram. 
Partly to distribute the pressure the more 
about the tapering end-portion of the core 
tube I, and partly to equalize continuously 
the supply of the molten lead, I extend the 
deflecting pointed finger in in the manner de 
scribed, from the top of the die-sleeve F. 
Too great stress cannot ba laid on the im 
portance of the advantage of my improve 
ment in enabling a bridge' to be dispensed 
with. A bridge greatly obstructs the flow of 
the material and requires that the die-block 
F be made in halves in order to give the die 
chamber E the proper shape to form the tub 
ing. By my improvement the block F may 
be originally solid and bored from the right 
hand end to the point denoted at 21, where 
the diameter of the bore is reduced, forming 
a shoulder which affords a firm support for 
the sleeve F, and affording, with the die K, 
40 
45 
55 
I 25 
13o 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
 
515,951 
O 
25 
35 
the front side of the die-chamber, the rear 
side thereof being formed by the sleeve F 
and core-tube I. According to my improved 
construction the die-chamber is perfectly and 
conveniently formed by inserting the die IX 
and sleeve F into one end of the bore in the 
block F, and the sleeve F and core-tube I 
into the other end thereof, thereby produc 
ing the die-chamber with much more exact 
ness and at much less cost than by the usual 
method of carrying out the desired shape with 
a cold chisel. 
A lead or analogous press may be variously 
constructed differently from that described 
and still be adapted to have advantageously 
employed with it my improvement, the essen 
tial feature of which is to be understood as 
consisting in the inner wall in the die-cham 
ber inclined downward from, or from near, 
the base of the lead-chamber at its inner side 
or side farthest from the die-chamber outlet, 
toward that outlet. Hence I do not wish to 
be understood as in any way intending to 
limit the use of my improvement to a particu 
lar construction of the press. 
w 
For the sake of brevity Idesignate the press 
provided with my improvement as a lead 
press, in the appended claims, but intend to 
have the claims include such a press what 
ever be the material capable of employment 
therein to produce tubing or insulated wire 
by its operation. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a lead-press, a die-chamber into which 
the Supply-chamber opens freely and having 
its inner wall inclined downward from the 
supply-chamber outlet above the plane of 
the core-tube to the base of the die-chamber 
near its discharge-outlet, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. A lead press core-tube I for a die-cham 
ber E, said core-tube having an inclined shoul 
der encircling it and adapted to be adjusted 
in said die-chamber and form, with the wall 
thereof, the inclined rear wall O extending 
downward from the supply-chamber outlet 
above the plane of the core-tube to the base 
of the die-chamber near its discharge-outlet, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a lead-press, a die-chamber into which 
the supply-chamber opens through an unob 
structed passage, said die-chamber contain 
ing a core-tube and having its inner wall 
formed with a downward inclined shoulder 
encircling the core-tube, and projecting be 
low the same forward beyond the vertical 
plane of the front side of said unobstructed 
passage, substantially as described. 
4. In a lead-press, the combination with the 
supply chamber and rammer, of a die-cham 
ber into which the supply-chamber opens and 
containing the die-sleeve F supporting the 
die IX, and core-tube surrounded in the die 
chamber by a sleeve F extending across the 
open base of the supply-chamber, inclined at 
its inner end to extend from the rear upper 
portion of the die-chamber to the base thereof 
adjacent to the - discharge-outlet and form 
the die-chamber wall O, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
5. In a lead-press, the combination with the 
Supply-chamber and rammer of a die-cham 
ber into which the supply-chamber opens and 
containing a die-sleeve F, a die K in the 
said die-sleeve and provided with a finger n, 
a die-sleeve F in the die-chamber, having its 
inner end inclined and forming the die-cham 
ber wall O, and a core-tube 1, in the die-sleeve 
F', extending across the open base of the 
supply-chamber under the said finger, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. In a lead-press, the combination with the 
supply-chamber and rammer of a block F for 
the die-chamber and having the hollow set 
screws p and p' in its opposite ends and an 
inlet-opening in its upper side at the base 
of the supply-chamber, a die-sleeve Fin the 
die-chamber containing the die IX provided 
with a finger n, and a die-sleeve Fin the die 
chamber, having the inclined inner end form 
ing the wall O, and a core-tube I, in the die 
| sleeve F", extending across the opening 1" 
under the said finger, substantially as de 
scribed. 
HENRY B. COBB. 
In presence of 
M. J. FROST, 
M. E. WINN. 
45 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516051.txt	(No Model.) 
A. E. HARTZELL. 
RIBB0N HOLDER, 
No. 516,051. 
Patented Mar. 6, 1894. 
-&-22ea 
(44.2/4372.4 
is 
(c. 3-4-17.2e, 
4-relay.f 
"To Al LaTHcarAPHiracosa. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED E. HARTZELL, OF NORMAN, OKLAHOMA TERRITORY. 
RB BON, HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 516,051, dated March 6, 1894. 
Application filed September 19, 1893. Serial No. 485,832, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ALFRED E. HARTZELL, 
of Norman, in the county of Oklahoma, and 
Territory of Oklahoma, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Ribbon 
Holders; and Idohereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it pertains to make and use 
it, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to an improved rib 
bon holder; and the object of the same is to 
provide animproved clasp which may be read 
ily adapted to ribbons of different widths for 
the purpose of holding the same wound. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings:- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a bolt of rib 
bon having my improved clasp applied there 
to. Fig. 2 is a similar view of the device de 
tached. 
A designates the ribbon and B the paper 
strip which are wound upon a core in the 
usual manner. In order to hold the free ends 
of the same and prevent them from unwind 
ing I provide the loop C through which sev 
eral layers of the material are passed so as to 
obtain a secure hold for the clasp. The ends 
of the wire from which the loop is formed are 
brought together and secured as shown at D. 
o 
25 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. F. YoRK, 
F. CARUTHERS. 
in order that the loop may be adapted for 
ribbons of different widths I construct the 
same with the lateral bends or kinks E which 
may be enlarged or contracted for use upon 
either wide or narrow ribbon. 
In use as the ribbon and paper strip are 
drawn out by one hand the clasp may be read 
ily pushed backward upon the bolt until all 
the material has been unwound. 
While I here show the device formed of 
wire it is not my desire to be limited to such 
formation as it is apparent the loop may be 
formed without a joint. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
An improved ribbon holder comprising a 
loop for the accommodation of two or more 
strands of ribbon and paper strip, said loop 
being formed of a single piece of wire having 
its ends secured together to close the same, 
and a plurality of kinks in the upper and 
lower bars of the loop, substantially as shown 
and described. 
In testimony whereofiaffixmy signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ALFRED E. HARTZELL. 
35. 
40 
45 
So 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516151.txt	( No Model.) 
No. 516,151, 
 
A. B. BUEHL, 
ADJUSTABLE DRAPING FORM. 
Patented Mar, 6, 1894. 
H. 
 
Feel 
I 
  
 
 
  
 
 
He 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
3. 
%232 
S. 
WS 
s 
2 
2 X 
2 & M s & 
& 
3 
 
 
HH 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR. B. BUEHL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ADJUSTABLE DRAPING-FORM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 516,151, dated March 6, 1894. 
Application filed May 1, 1893, Serial No. 472,515, (No model.) 
- 
pOSe. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ARTHURB.BUEHL, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Adjustable Draping 
Forms, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
Myinvention relates to a certain new andlim 
proved device adapted to be used in place of 
the Ordinary draping forms, upon which dress 
goods are displayed in show windows. 
The object of the improvement is to pro 
duce a draping form which may be quickly 
and easily adjusted to any width of cloth, or 
to any requirement as to vertical space which 
the dimensions of the show-window may im 
The device, in which I have embodied my 
improvement, is shown in the drawings by 
means of four figures, of which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of said device 
when adjusted to its shortest length. Fig. 2 
is a horizontal section in line 2-2, of Fig. 1, 
and looking downward. Fig. 3 is a front ele 
vation of the device extended to its greatest 
length; and Fig. 4 is a vertical section in lines 
4-4, of Figs. 1 and 2. 
Said device, which shows the preferred 
form, in which I have constructed my inven 
tio..., 33 insists of a base, A, which may be of 
an . . 
. . a forms commonly used in draping 
forms as ordinarily constructed, a top, B, 
preferably of similar shape, and usually 
smaller than the base, and a series of con 
necting rods, or sticks, C, C, C, C, C, C. 
The number of these rods is not material, 
their purpose being to space the top and base 
apart, and to furnish whatever intermediate 
Support may be thought necessary for the 
goods to be draped over the form. The con 
necting rods are each made of two parts, c, 
c', one of which is secured to the base, and 
the other of which is secured to the top piece. 
These rods overlap each other and are each 
provided at their free ends with bands, c, c, 
encircling the other overlapping rod. Both 
the upper and lower members of the outer 
connecting rods are flexibly united to the top 
and bottom pieces, respectively, so that they 
 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
may yield slightly in or out as the form is ad 
justed vertically. Thus, as the top piece is 
drawn from the position shown in Fig.1, to 
that shown in Fig. 3, the upper ends of the 
lower members will spread apart slightly, and 55 
the lower ends of the upper members will be 
drawn together, so that the connecting rods or 
sticks, each made up of the two members, will 
still be substantially straight between the top 
and bottom pieces. 
One of the connecting rods, C, which I pre 
fer to locate centrally, is provided With a 
rack, c, upon one member, and a spring pawl, 
c, upon the other, provided with an eye, c', 
adapted to the insertion of a finger to With 
draw the pawl from the rack. This spring 
pawl normally engages with the rack, c, and 
the teeth of the latter are shaped to permit 
of an upward movement, but not of a down 
ward movement. In extending the form, the 
top and bottom are merely pulled apart and 
the pawl slides over the inclined sides of the 
rack teeth. In shortening the form, the pawl 
is pulled outward by means of the eye, c', and 
the top is allowed to drop the required dis 
tance. 
I recognize the fact that great variation 
may be possible in the form of my invention, 
and I do not, therefore, desire to limit myself 
except as clearly pointed out in the appended 
claim. 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent 
The combination with the base, A, and top 
piece, B, of the connecting pieces, C, C, C, 
C, C, C, one of which is centrally arranged 
and provided with a clamping device, and the 
others of which are arranged about the mar 
gins of the base and top piece, respectively, 
all of said pieces being composed of two over 
lapping members, one of which is secured to 
the top piece and the other to the base, and 
each of which is provided at its free end with 
a band encircling the other member; substan 
tially as described. 
75 
ARTHUR. B. BUEHL. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES O. SHERVEY, 
A. I. H. EBBESEN, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516251.txt	(No Model.) 
W. WERLE. 
PRESSURE REGULATOR. 
No. 516,251. 
Patented Mar. 13, 1894. 
 
 
AN 
E. 
s 
SYS Z 
as 
s 
ENENESI: 
HIH 
II I 
s se 
2. 
(IN 
J3 
O 
 
S. 
Y 
2 
21 
7fz(zeoise asA 
N. N. 
Nse - Z7 verzdor 
Ira Sea 
da 
W 
- CA). SZ 
- 
arena. HoarAPNG conPA. 
watcN d. 3 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM WERLE, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
PRESSURE-REGULATOR. 
-- 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 516,251, dated March 18, 1894. 
Application filed December 30, 1893, Serial No. 495,194. (No model.) 
M 
To all whom it moly CO7 cert. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM WERL, of 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Pressure-Regulators; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it pertains to make and use the 
Sale, 
My invention relates to improvements in 
pressure-regulators, more especially designed 
for brewers' use, whereby a uniform gas press 
ure within the hogsheads or other closed 
casks or vessels for storing beer or other fer 
mented liquors can be maintained, and my 
present invention appertains more especially 
to the development or improvement of the 
invention disclosed in United States Letters 
Patent, No. 472,241, granted to me April 5, 
1892, the object being to overcome certain ob 
jectionable features of the apparatus disclosed 
in said Letters Patent. 
With this object in view, my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and in 
combinations of parts, hereinafter described 
and pointed out in the claims. 
The accompanying drawing is a side eleva 
tion, partly in section, of a pressure-regula 
tor embodying Iny invention. 
Referring to the drawing, A designates the 
main chambered body or Water-compartment 
of the apparatus, through which compartment 
gases from the vessel or vessels containing 
the fermenting liquor is caused to pass, said 
compartment being preferably cylindrical in 
form, and preferably about four inches in di 
ameter and about two and one-half feet high. 
Compartment A is closed at its upper end, 
preferably by a cap,B, that is screw-threaded 
internally and engages the corresponding ex 
ternally-threaded upper end of the surround 
ing walls of compartment A. An inlet is pro 
vided at the upper end of the compartment 
A for introducing water into said compart 
ment, said inlet consisting preferably of a 
screw-threaded hole, b, in cap B and adapted 
to be closed by a removable plug b'. Com 
partment A, at the bottom, is provided with 
a drain-cock, C, at which the Water may be 
drawn off from the compartment, as required 
for cleaning the latter, or for other purposes. 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
Compartment A, at one side, is provided, in 
the usual manner, with a water-gage, D, and 
at its upper end is provided with a pressure 
gage, E, said gage being preferably rigid with 
cap B, as shown. The bottom of compart 
ment A is preferably integral with a foot or 
chambered stand, G, that, at its upper end, is 
provided with an internally screw-thread 
ed annular flange G' that engages the corre 
spondingly externally threaded lower end of 
the surrounding Wall of compartment A. 
H represents a pipe that is adapted to con 
duct gases received from the casks or vessels 
the pressure wherein is to be regulated, to 
compartment A, said pipe discharging pref 
erably into the lower end of said compart 
ment, and being provided, in suitable prox 
imity to compartment A, with a stop-cock, h. 
An important feature consists in extending 
this pipe a suitable distance above the wa 
ter-line that it is desired to maintain at any 
time within compartment Abefore extending 
the same to the vessel or vessels containing 
the fermenting liquors, and I prefer to extend 
pipe H preferably about six feet above the 
top of compartment A, the object being to 
positively prevent any Water in said com 
partment from being conducted to the re 
spective vessel or vessels. 
At one side of body A, preferably at the 
side located diametrically-opposite pipe H, is 
provided another upright but smaller tubu. 
lar-body or compartment, K, that is prefer 
ably about one and a half inches in diameter, 
and nearly as high as compartment A, Com 
partment K is closed at its lower end, as at 
K, and is preferably Supported from foot or 
stand G, the bottom and lower end of the sur 
rounding wall of compartment K being seated 
in a socket, g, integral or rigid with an arm . 
g that projects laterally from foot or stand G. 
PipeHand the upperportion of the surround. 
ing. Wall of compartment Kare suitably sup 
ported from the surrounding wall of compart 
ment A, preferably by Collars L L that em 
brace pipe Hand surrounding wall of com 
partment K, respectively, and are rigidly con 
nected, by arms or members L'I', with a col Oso 
lar L* rigidly but removably held upon the 
surrounding wall of compartment Aby means 
of one or more screws L. 
M designates a pipe that is located and held 
. . . 
95 
75 
516,251 
o 
75 
9.C. 
95 
od 
Io5 
o 
II5 
25 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
centrally within compartment K. Pipe M. 
opens into the lower end of compartment K, 
and thence extends upwardly through said 
compartment and through a cap, N, and a 
stuffing-box provided at the upper end of 
compartment K. Pipe M, at its upper ex 
tremity, is connected by a flexible tube, P, 
with a pipe, Q, that is secured to cap B, and 
opens into the upper end of compartment 
A, pipe Q being preferably provided with a 
stop-cock, Q. Cap N is perforated vertically 
and centrally, as at N, to accommodate the 
location of pipe M, and, at its lower end, is 
provided with a screw-threaded bore, N, 
for engaging the correspondingly-externally 
threaded upper end of the surrounding wall 
of compartment K. Cap N is reduced in di 
ameter and screw-threaded externally at its 
upper end, as at N, for receiving the inter 
nally-threaded cap, O, the latter being perfo 
rated centrally, as at O', to accommodate the 
location of pipe M, and packing, R, is prefer 
ably interposed between the upper end of 
member Nandcap O. Members N, O and R. 
constitute a stuffing-box. 
I would remark that, in practice, compart 
ment A is filled preferably nearly half-full 
with water, and a suitable quantity of mer 
cury is placed into the lower end of compart 
ment K; stop-cocksh, and Q are opened; pipe 
His placed in open relation with the casks 
or vessels the pressure of the gases wherein 
is to be regulated, and gas thereupon passes 
from said casks or vessels to and through 
pipe Hinto the body of water in compartment 
A; thence through said body of water into 
pipe Q; thence via flexible tube P, to pipe M; 
thence into the mercury in the bottom of 
compartment K; thence upwardly through 
said body of mercury and through compart 
ment K and thence out of said compartment 
through a hole or perforation n in cap N. It 
will be observed that pipe M is held centrally 
within compartment K, by means of cap N, 
and is held in the desired adjustment verti 
cally by means of a set-screw, m, that engages 
a correspondingly-threaded hole N in cap N, 
and is adapted to engage pipe M. Should 
pipe M be immersed too far in the quicksil 
ver and thereby cause a greater pressure of 
gases within the hogshead or vessels, and 
which pressure will be indicated on gage E, 
then pipe M is elevated vertically and ad 
justed within compartment Kuntil the proper 
pressure is registered by the pressure-gage, 
for it is obvious that the pressure within the 
hogshead or vessel will diminish or increase 
in a corresponding degree with any reduction 
or increase in the quantity of quicksilver 
through which the gases have to pass. The 
gases passing upwardly through compart 
ment K have a tendency to carry with them 
globules of mercury. It, therefore, follows 
that if said compartment Was left open at 
the top, as is the case in the construction dis 
closed in the Letters Patent hereinbefore re 
ferred to, the mercury that Was thus carried 
up with the gases, would have ready egress 
at the top or open end of said compartment. 
By the provision of cap N, hereinbefore de 
scribed, the escape and loss of mercury as 
cending compartment K is largely prevented. 
Occasionally, however, a globule of mercury 
will find its way into hole n, and to check 
any such escaping globules before they reach 
the discharging-end of said hole, I preferably 
make the hole angular, as shown. Notwith 
standing this provision a globule will occa 
sionally find its way into discharge-pipe S that 
leads from hole in, and to avoid the escape 
of any mercury through said pipe I interpose, 
in the line of said pipe a chamber T, the top 
wall whereof is so arranged relative to the 
line of said pipe that it will serve as a hood 
or arrester to arrest any mercury carried into 
said chamber and cause the same to return 
to its place in compartment K. Chamber T 
is preferably spherical or ball-shaped in form. 
I have found that this form of chamber is 
best adapted to arrest any globules of mer 
cury that may be carried into the chamber 
and to facilitate the return of such globules 
to compartment K. 
What I claim is 
1. In a pressure-regulator, the combination 
of an upright water-compartment A, an up 
right mercury-compartment K, a pipe located 
within and opening into the lower end of the 
mercury - compartment, means establishing 
open relation between said pipe and the up 
per end of the water-compartment, a press 
ure-gage, a pipe leading from the lower end 
of the water-compartment upwardly a suit 
able distance above the water-line desired to 
be maintained in the water-compartment, the 
mercury-compartment, at its upper end, being 
provided with a discharging-hole or orifice, a 
pipe leading from said discharging-hole, and 
a chamber located in the line of said pipe, the 
top wall of said chamber being so arranged 
relative to the pipe that it shall serve to ar 
rest any globules of mercury carried into said 
chamber, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. In a pressure-regulator, the combination 
of an upright water-compartment A, an up 
right mercury-compartment K, a pipe located 
within and opening into the lower end of the 
mercury - compartment, means establishing 
open relation between said pipe and the up 
per end of the water-compartment, a press 
ure-gage, a pipe leading from the lower end 
of the Water-compartment upwardly a suit 
able distance above the water-line desired to 
be maintained in the water-compartment, the 
mercury-compartment, at its upper end, being 
provided with a discharging-hole or orifice, a 
pipe leading from said discharging-hole, and 
a spherical or ball-shaped chamber located in 
the line of Said pipe, substantially as shown, 
for the purpose specified. 
3. In a pressure-regulator, the combination 
of an upright water-compartment A, an up 
right mercury-compartment K, a pipe located 
55 
 
516,251 
within and opening into the lower end of the 
mercury - compartment, means establishing 
open relation between said pipe and the up 
per end of the water-compartment, a press 
ure-gage, a pipe leading from the lower end 
of the Water-compartmant upwardly a suit 
able distance above the water-line desired to 
be maintained in the water-compartment, the 
mercury-compartment, in its top Wall, being 
provided with a discharging-hole or orifice, 
arranged angularly, substantially as shown, 
for the purpose specified. 
4. In a pressure-regulator, the combination 
of an upright Water-compartment A, an up 
right mercury-compartment K provided at 
its upper end with a cap and stuffing-box, a 
pipe leading downwardly from a suitable 
point above the level of water desired to be 
maintained in the water - compartment and 
discharging into the lower end of said com 
partment, a pressure-gage, a pipe M located 
centrally of and opening into the lower end 
of the mercury - compartment, said pipe ex 
tending through the aforesaid cap and stuff 
ing-box, means for establishing open relation 
between the upper end of said pipe and the 
upper end of the water-compartment, and a 
gas-outlet provided at the upper end of the 
mercury - compartment, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. In a pressure-regulator, the combination 
of an upright water-compartment, an upright 
mercury - compartment, a pipe H leading 
downwardly from a point located a suitable 
distance above the water-line desired to be 
maintained in the water-compartment and 
discharging into the lower end of said com 
partment, a cap closing and forming the top 
wall of the mercury-compartment, said cap 
being provided with a discharging-hole or 
orifice, n, a pipe M located centrally of and 
O 
20 
35 
opening into the lower end of the mercury 
compartment, said pipe extending upwardly 
through the mercury-compartmentandafore 
said cap, the latter, at its upper end, termi 
nating in a stuffing-box for said pipe, suit 
able means for establishing communication 
between the upper end of the water-compart 
ment and said pipe M, the latter being ad 
justable vertically, and a set-screw for secur 
ing the same in the desired adjustment, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. In a pressure-regulator, the combination 
of an upright Water-compartment A, an up 
right mercury-compartment K, a pipe lead 
ing from a point located a suitable distance 
above the Water-line desired to be main 
tained in the water - compartment and dis 
charging into the lower end of said compart 
ment, a pipe M leading downwardly and open 
ing into the lower end of the mercury-com 
partment, and suitable means for establish 
ing open communication between the upper 
end of the water-compartment and said pipe 
M, a foot or stand for supporting the water 
Compartment, and a socket for supporting 
the mercury-compartment and rigid with said 
foot or stand, a collar rigidly mounted upon 
the upper end of the surrounding wall of the 
Water-compartment, collars loosely mounted 
upon pipe H and the surrounding wall of the 
mercury-compartment and rigidly connected 
with the aforesaid collar on the surrounding 
wall of the water-compartment, substantially - 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 28th 
day of November, 1892. 
WILLIAM WERLE. 
45 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
Witnesses: 
C. H. DORER, 
WARD HOOVER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516351.txt	(No Model.) , 
. 
J. HARLEMAN. 
FURNACE FOR PRODUCING FUEL GAs, 
No. 516,35l. 
Patented Mar, 3, 1894. 
 
1, 
g IgE H. 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---.S. 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
 
(No Model.) 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. HARLEMAN. 
FURNACE FOR PRODUCING FUEL GAS. 
No. 516,35l. 
Patented Mar. 13, 1894, 
Erillinulirst O 
E. Ayily s 
EmmHtt 
E. 
s 
28it-lossos : 
Z.2. Oceae 
w 
. . 
. 
3v-uov-bot: 
767zz ZZz72e77zazzz, 
- . 
etczac w 
 
The NATIONAL LITHogarAPHING COMPANY. 
WABHINGTON, D. c. 
No Model.) 
No. 516,351. 
Patented Mar, 13, 1894, 
J. HARLEMAN. 
FURNACE FOR PRODUCING FUEI, GAS, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
E 
  
 
  
  
- E3 EE 
Z/ 
 
  
 
 
92.6 Yz. 
8-v-uovutot; 
t/2/ze Zazzezzaze, 
This fational LTHoGRAPHEna contrary. 
wAstrator, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HARLEMAN, OF ST. GEORGE, NEAR ST. JOSEPH, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR 
OF FIVE-EIGHTHS TO EDWIN H. COLLINS, STEPHEN J. COLLINS, AND 
FRANK COLLINS, OF ROCK ISLAND, ILLINOIS, 
FURN ACE FOR PRODUCING FUEL. GAS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 516,351, dated March 18, 1894. 
Application filed September 1, 1893, Serial No. 484,581, (No model.) 
55 
75 
to which the following is a specification. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN HARLEMAN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at St. George, 
near the city of St. Joseph, in the county of 
5 Buchanan and State of Missouri, have in 
yented a new and useful furnace for produc 
ing fuelgas from coal for burning brick, heat 
ing boilers, smelting ore, and all other pur 
poses for which fuel-gas may be used, of 
Heretofore, fuel gas has been produced for 
Smelting ore, puddling furnaces, &c., by burn 
ing coal in an open draft furnace with water 
in the ash pit, or in a furnace without fire 
I5 grates with Steam and air admitted through 
the hearth or perforated chambers therein 
into the incandescent mass, in all cases the 
coal being charged in the fire box on top of 
the incandescent mass, and the heat, smoke 
2O and gases are carried by the draft of a stack 
from the fire box to the furnace or chamber 
Where the combustion is to take place. And 
the gas is produced by subjecting the coal 
charged in the fire box on top of the in 
25 candescent mass to the action of the heat 
thereof with the product of the steam and 
air drawn through the same. 
My invention is an air tight furnace for 
producing fuel gas by the process herein de 
3o Scribed, and heating air for combustion there 
with, with pressure sufficient to drive the gas 
and hot air into an air tight kiln, firebox, fur 
nace or other chamber for combustion, and 
consists of two air tight chambers, each hav 
35 ing an ash pit, a fire grate above the ash pit, 
a cold air pipe and steam pipe connecting 
With the ash pit, a fire box above the fire 
grate, air tight doors in the ash pit and in the 
firebox, arches turned and jambs built there 
4o on in the fire box, a hot air flue in the fire 
box on each side thereof between the jambs 
and the Walls of the chamber, a retort setting 
on the jambs and reaching to the top of the 
chamber, the annular space around the re 
45 tort filled with brick work built loosely to ad 
mit the free passage of hot air and steam and 
eXpose as much surface as possible to the 
Same, a hot air pipe connecting said annular 
Space With the main hot air pipe which con 
nects with the kiln, firebox, furnace or other 
chamber for combustion of the gas, a steam 
pipe connecting with said annular space 
near the top, an opening from the top of the 
retort tirough the top of the chamber to the 
bottom of the feed top, a gas pipe connecting 
the retort through said opening with the main 
gas pipe which connects with the kiln, fire 
box, furnace or other chamber for combustion 
of the gas, a feed top setting over the open 
ing leading from the top of the retort, all pipes 
provided with valves so that while one cham 
ber is producing fuel gas the other is heating 
air for its combustion. The pressure afforded 
by the cold air blast in the chamber heating 
the air, and that afforded by the steam and the 
expansion of the product of the steam passed 
through the heated annular space around the 
retort and through the incandescent mass in 
the fire box, in the chamber producing fuel 
gas, no air being admitted to that chamber, 
being sufficient to drive the hot air and the 
fuel gas respectively through their proper 
pipes into an air tight chamber for combus 
tion. By reversing the valves at intervals 
each chamber is made to produce fuel gas 
and heat air for its combustion alternately. 
The process by which I produce fuel gas 
from coal in my newly invented furnace is as 
follows: I close the cold air pipe of the cham 
ber, through which alone air can enter the 
chamber, charge the retort with coal and sub 
ject the mass of coal in the retort to the heat 
of the incandescent mass which fills the fire 
box except the hot air flues, and the product 
of the steam from the upper jet, superheated 
by passing through the heated brick work in 
the annular space around the retort and the 
hot air ?lues, passing through the incandes 
cent mass between the arches and between 
the jambs, and the product of the steam from 
the jet in the ash pit passed through the in 
candescent mass in the fire box, and thus lib 
erates all the gases from the coal which com 
bine with the product of the steam passed 
through the incandescent mass in the fire 
box as a foresaid and form a fuel gas intensely 
heated which with hot air will ignite and 
burn in the open air or in any kiln, fire box 
 
g 
516,851 
O 
- 
or furnace but which gives the best results 
When burned in an air tight chamber, which 
prevents the escape of any form of gas and 
utilizes all the heat. 
The objects of my invention are to pro 
duce a fuel gas that may be adapted practi 
cally to all manufacturing purposes and which 
can be burned in an air tight chamber for 
Combustion, and, to reduce to a minimum the 
cost of burning brick, operating steam plants, 
Smelting furnaces and all other plants to 
which my invention may be adapted. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
a detailed view in perspective of Iny new fur 
nace, showing the two chambers, their re 
spective pipes, valves and connections, and 
the front doors to each. Fig. 2, is a vertical 
Section of my furnace on a line crossing the 
arches in the fire boxes of the chambers and 
the main pipes at right angles, showing the 
two chambers and their respective pipes, 
valves and connections. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
section of one chamber on a line parallel with 
the arches in the fire box and with the main 
pipes. . 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the several figures. 
The chambers are exact duplicates in size, 
form, materials, dimensions and location of 
the several parts, pipes, valves and connec 
tions, and in Fig. 2 of the drawings similar 
letters are used to designate similar parts of 
the respective chambers; hence a detailed de 
scription of one will answer for a detailed de 
scription of both chambers. 
I prefer to construct my furnace with a 
space of about four feet between the cham 
bers, and place the main hot air pipe about 
two feet under ground midway between the 
chambers, and the main gas pipe about five 
feet above the ground midway between the 
chambers as shown in Fig. 2. I first prepare 
a suitable foundation the upper surface of 
which forms the base line and the hearth A, 
and which may be on a level with the surface 
of the ground. On this foundation I build 
the walls Y, Y, circular inform; outside diam 
eter eight feet. The inside of the chamber for 
six and one half feet above the hearth is four 
feet Square and above that is circular five feet 
and two inches in diameter. The fire grate D, 
is placed with heel about six inches and center 
about eighteen inches above the hearth; the 
space between the hearth and the fire grate is 
the ash pit. A cold air pipe B, six inches in 
diameter and steam pipe C, one inch in diam 
eter connects with the ash pit. Above the fire 
grate I turn two arches E, E, across the cham 
ber in the fire box, these arches spring from 
the front and back walls of the chambers at 
a point four feet above the hearth. Below 
these arches I put in air tight iron doors X, 
X, in the front and back walls opening into 
the ash pit and the fire box affording access 
to each from the front and rear. Between 
each side wall and the arch next to it there is 
a space of six inches and between the arches 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
there is a space of twenty four inches. On 
these arches I build jambs F, F. The tops of 
these jambs are level with the point where 
the form of the chamber is changed from 
square to circular. The space below the tops 
of these jambs and above the fire grate is the 
fire box, and the spaces between the jambs 
and the walls are hot air flues in the fire box. 
On the jambs and shoulders in the front and 
back walls of the chamber made by chang 
ing the interior form of the chamber from 
square to circular I set a retort G. The re 
tort is ten feet high, four feet long and two 
feet wide at the bottom, two feet long and 
sixteen inches wide at the top, inside meas 
urement. Its walls are two inches thick. I case 
the retort with one course of fire brick. The 
annular space around the retort I fill with 
checker work H, H, that is brick work built 
in loosely to admit the free passage of hot air 
and steam and expose to the same as much 
surface as possible. The checker work is 
supported by the jambs and shoulders in the 
walls and in turn supports the solid brick 
work which forms the top of the chamber. 
A hot air pipe I, connects this annular space 
with the main hot air pipe U. At the top of 
the checker work a steam pipe J, one inch in 
diameter connects with the annular space 
around the retort. A circuiar opening K, 
fourteen inches in diameter connects the top 
of the retort with the bottom of the feed top 
M. Through this opening the gas pipe L, con 
nects the retort with the main gas pipe O. 
The iron feed top M, is placed on the chain 
ber over the opening IK, and has an iron dump 
bottom which is dumped by the lever N. The 
main gas pipe O, connects with the kiln or 
other chamber where the combustion of the 
gas is to take place and has a valve by which 
the volume of gas entering the chamber for 
combustion may be regulated. The gas pipe 
L., may be opened or closed by the valve P, 
and is supported by a brace Q. 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
IO 5 
R is a valve in the steam pipe J. 
S is a valve in the cold air pipe B. 
T is a valve in the hot air pipe I. 
The main hot air pipe U connects with the 
kiln or other chamber where the combustion 
of the gas is to take place and has a valve 
by which the volume of hot air entering the 
chamber for combustion may be regulated. 
The valve rod V, connects all the valves ex 
cept those in the main pipes, so that they can 
be reversed by the operator with one move 
ment by means of the valve rod lever W. 
For greater strength and durability I incase 
each chamber in an iron shell Z, Z, made of 
one-fourth inch iron leaving a space of five 
and three-fourths inches on top of the cham 
ber and three and three-fourths inches around 
the chamber which I fill with mineral wool or 
sand. The feed top M, is fourteen inches 
square and thirty inches high, and has an iron 
lid. The gas pipes and hot air pipes are nine 
inches square inside, and to secure greater du 
rability and prevent undue heating I make 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
 
75 
5 
O 
516,351 
them of one-fourth inch iron fourteen inches 
square on the outside and line them with fire 
brick. 
I use fire brick for two courses inside the 
chambers, the arches EE, the jambs F, F, the 
checker work H, H, three courses above the 
checker work, and one course inside of the 
opening K, the latter however may be faced 
with iron in lieu of the course of fire brick. 
The retort is of fire clay. The dinnensions 
herein given are not arbitrary but may be va 
ried as circumstances require or convenience 
Suggests, they are given for convenience in 
illustrating the construction of the furnace. 
The materials named while not arbitrary are 
those which I believe will give the greatest 
strength and durability, and therefore the 
most satisfactory results. 
The main pipes may lead directly into the 
kiln or chamber for the combustion of the gas, 
or the connections may be made by a number 
of smaller pipes distributing the hot air and 
gas to different points in the combustion cham 
ber or to different chambers for combustion. 
When required by the capacity of the plant 
to be served my furnace may consist of two 
or more chambers on each side incased in one 
iron shell. 
Iraise the waive rod levers W of each cham 
ber, this closes the gas pipes and opens the 
cold air pipes and the hot air pipes. I then 
build a fire in the fire box of each chamber, 
preferably with coke, filling the fire boxes to 
the tops of the jambs except the hot airflues, 
air blasts blown into the ash pits through the 
- pipes B, and B drive the heat through the 
hot air flues into and through the checker 
work H, H, heating the same. While the 
checker work is being heated to the proper 
degree I charge the retorts with coal by fill 
ing the feed tops with coal and after replac 
ing the lid dumping the same into the retorts 
by means of the levers N,N, this is repeated 
until the retorts are sufficiently charged. 
When the checker work is heated sufficiently, 
that is until it is from a cherry red to a white 
heat, I push down the valve rod lever of one 
chamber, for example say the right chamber 
as shown in Fig. 2, of the drawings, this 
closes the hot air valve T and the cold air 
valve S and opens valve P in the gas pipe L 
of that chamber. The steam pipes C, C, are 
always open when the furnace is in operation 
the steam being turned on or shut off by 
valves near the boilers. The steam intro 
duced into the chamber through the pipes J, 
and C, passes through the incandescent mass 
in the fire box into the retort, that from the 
pipe J first passing through the heated 
checker work, the product of this steam with 
the heat from the incandescent mass acts 
upon the coal in the retort liberating all its 
gases and combines with the same, and the damper. 
product which is fuel gas is driven by the 
pressure of the steam and the expansion of sire to secure by Letters Patent 
its product through the gas pipes into the 
3 
kiln, fire box, blast furnace or other chamber 
for combustion, which may be air tight and 
should be to secure the best results. The re 
siduum of the coal which is coke may be 
stoked down into the fire box where it serves 
as fuel. At the same time the cold air blast 
and steam from the pipe C, in the ash pit of 
the left chamber pass through the incan 
descent mass in the fire box by which the 
steam is decomposed and the air heated in 
tensely, the volume of hot air thus produced 
is driven through the checker work, heating 
the same as it passes, thence through the hot 
air pipes into the kiln, fire box, blast furnace 
or other chamber for combustion where from 
its contact with the fuel gas from the right 
chamber combustion ensues. As soon as the 
checker work in the right chamber begins to 
cool I reverse the valves connected with the 
valve rods by raising the valve rod lever W. 
of that chamber and pushing down the same 
lever of the left chamber, the left chamber 
then produces gas while the right chamber 
supplies hot air and in doing so again heats 
the checker work to the proper degree. I re 
verse the valves at intervals of from twenty . 
to sixty minutes. Having heated the cham 
ber and brought the checker work to a proper 
degree of heat, the jet of steam introduced 
by the pipe J is passed through the checker 
work by which it is superheated, thence into 
the hot air flues in the fire box, it then passes 
through the incandescent mass in the firebox 
under the arches into that part of the firebox 
between the arches and the jambs, the steam 
from the pipe C, in the ash pit passes up 
through the incandescent mass between the 
fire grate and the arches, then with the steam 
from the pipe J, or its product through the 
incandescent mass between the arches and 
the jambs. The product of the steam thus 
passed through the checker work and through 
the incandescent mass in the fire box with the 
heat from said mass passes into the retort 
which is charged with coal. The coal in the 
retort is subjected to the action of this pro 
duct of the steam and the heat and all its 
gases are thereby liberated. These gases 
combine with the products of the steam, and 
form a fuel gas of a superior quality which 
with hot air may be burned in an open fur 
nace or an air tight chamber. 
When burning brick the products of Com 
bustion while heating the furnace to a de 
gree necessary to produce gas pass through 
the hot air pipes into the kiln and are utilized 
in water smoking the green brick; in the case 
of heating boilers, &c., these products of Com 
bustion pass through the hot air pipes into 
the fire-box and are utilized in heating the 
same and escape slowly through a vent for 
the purpose which may be controlled by a 
I claim as new and as my invention and de 
1. In a fuel gas furnace, an air-tight cham 
I 25 
s 
II5 
2O. 
95 
IOO 
O 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
516, 351 
35 
pendent pipe connecting said space with the 3o 
main air pipe, substantially as specified. 
3. The combination with the outer wall of 
the chamber having interior offset, of the 
arches sprung from the front and back walls 
of the chamber, jambs supported on Said 
arches with their upper ends on a plane with 
the said offsets, checker work supported from 
the offsets and jambs, a retort within the 
checker work supported upon said offsets and 
jambs, a top supported upon the checker work 
with a space around the retort at the upper 
part of the chamber, a top supported on the 
checker work, a feed top in line with the re 
tort, a pivoted bottom to the feed top and pro 
vided with an exterior lever by which it may 
be operated, a steam pipe and a cold air pipe 
in the ash pit beneath the grate, a steam pipe 
communicating with the air pipe leading into 
said space, a pipe connecting the retort with 
the main gas pipe and an independent pipe 
connecting said space with the main air pipe, 
substantially as specified. 
40 
45 
5 
O 
ber provided with arches above the grate in 
the fire box, jambs supported upon said 
arches, checker work supported upon said 
jambs and upon the walls of the chamber, a 
retort supported upon said jambs and a top 
Supported upon the checker work and retort 
combined with a steam pipe and a cold air 
pipe in the ash pit beneath the grate and a 
steam pipe connecting with the annular space 
around the retort above the fire box, a pipe 
connecting the retort with the main gas pipe 
and an independent pipe connecting the an 
nular space around the retort with the main 
hot air pipe substantially as specified. 
2. The combination with the outer wall of 
the chamber having interior offset, of the 
arches sprung from the front and back walls 
of the chamber, jambs supported on said 
arches with their upper ends on a plane with 
the said offsets, checker work supported from 
the offsets and jambs, a retort within the 
checker work supported upon said offsets and 
jambs, a top supported upon the checker work 
with a space around the retort at the upper 
part of the chamber, a steam pipe and a cold 
air pipe in the ash pit beneath the grate, a 
Steain pipe communicating with the air pipe 
leading into said space, a pipe connecting the 
retort with the main gas pipe and an inde 
August 24, 1893. 
In presence of 
W. H. PRINDLE, 
E. RAY. 
JOHN HARLEMAN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516453.txt	(odel.) 
(No Model.) 
No. 516,453. 
E. W. SEAMANS. 
BRICK PRESS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
e8. 
Patented Mar, 13, 1894. 
FI in 
wi 
AHH 
- a 
. s e. 
". . Cill 
 
 
 
"National Lithographina come. 
WA8HtingroM, B, e. 
(Aduard (KSeameras 
(a 4Wuz-e-47 
BY 
. 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD W. SEAMANS, OF GRAND RAPIDS, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO GEORGE C. BENTZ, OF SAME PLACE. 
BRCK-PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 516,453, dated March 18, 1894. 
Application filed October 2, 1893. Serial No. 487,050. (No model.) 
CS 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, EDWARD W. SEAMANs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Grand 
Rapids, in the county of Kent and State of 
Michigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Brick-Presses; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improved brick 
press, and its object is to provide the same 
with certain new and useful features, herein 
after more fully described, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a device em 
bodying my invention; Fig. 2 a front ele 
vation of the same; Fig. 3 a vertical section 
of the same on the line 3-3 of Fig. 2; and, 
Fig. 4 a horizontal section of a part of the 
same on the line 4-4 of Fig. 3. 
Like letters refer to like parts in all of the 
figures. 
A, A, represents the frame of the machine. 
B' is a shaft upon which are mounted two 
cam wheels B, B, having geared peripheries 
and rotated by pinions D, engaging said gears 
and fixed on a driving shaft D', rotated by 
any suitable means. Said wheels B are of 
equal diameter, arranged in parallel planes 
a short distance apart, and provided on their 
outer sides with cam ribs C, C, between which 
ribs are rolls T, T, (Fig. 4) journaled on a pin, 
which pivotally connects the respective ends 
of the vertical rods N (which rods are pivoted 
at their upper ends to the frame) and the 
horizontal rods M, which latter are pivoted at 
their outer ends to the bars E, E, which bars 
are connected at their lower ends by a heavy 
bolt F, and at their upper ends by a similar 
bolt F. The lower bolt F passes through 
vertically elongated openings A'in the frame 
and is vertically movable therein, the upper 
bolt F" passes through the axis of a square 
head G, which head may be adjusted to bring 
any one of its faces above the mold H by 
slacking said bolt and turning said head there 
on and again tightening the bolt. 
His a mold for forming the bricks, open at 
the top and bottom and secured to the frame 
between the bars E, E. The upper side of 
this mold. is closed by the head G, and the 
lower side thereof is closed by a vertically 
movable ram S, provided with a reduced ex-55 
tension S', which latter passes through an 
opening in a crosshead I, said crosshead being 
vertically movable in ways in the frame, and 
moved by the knuckle-joint levers K, pivoted 
to said cross head at their upper ends. Said 6o 
levers are pivoted on the bolt F at their lower 
ends and at the middle to the end of the op 
erating bar L, which bar is forked at the in 
ner end and embraces the shaftB, being lon 
gitudinally movable thereon, and actuated by 65 
rolls T', T' journaled on said bar and engag 
ing cam ribs C, C, C, C, on the adjacent 
faces of the wheels B, B. A lever O is inter 
mediately pivoted to the frame, having one 
endinserted in an opening in the extension S' 
of the ram, and the other end passing between 
the wheels B, B, and provided with rolls T' 
to engage cam ribs C''', C''', on said wheels. 
Adjustable set screws J limit the downward 
movement of the cross-head I, and a similar 75 
screw J limits the downward movement of 
the lever O in the opening in the extension S'. 
At the rear of the mold H is a table R, the 
upper surfaces of which mold and table are in 
the same horizontal plane, and arranged to 
slide thereon is a box P open at the top and 
bottom into which is fed by any convenient 
means the material of which the bricks are 
made; said box is connected to the bars E and 
moved thereby by means of rods Q pivoted 
at their respective ends to each. 
The mold H is divided into suitable com 
partments to form a number of bricks at once, 
and the ram correspondingly divided at its 
upper end, and the head G has suitable in 
dented designs to mold the edge of the bricks, 
which designs are successively brought into 
use by turning the head as described. 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
The rods N support the inner ends of the rods. 
M and the rolls T, and permit the same to 
move toward and from the shaft B' as said 
rolls traverse the cam ribs C, C. The bar L 
is supported by the shaft Band permitted to 
move longitudinally as the rolls T' traverse 
the cam ribs C, C. By virtue of the forms 
of the various cams as shown, the following 
OO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
2 
516,453 
movements will take place as the wheels B 
revolve in the direction of the arrows. The 
bars E, E, swing inward at their upper ends, 
moving the head G backward and uncover 
ing the molds. During and subsequent to 
this movement the cam C' moves the end 
of the lever O down, thus raising its opposite 
end and lifting the ram S to the top of the 
mold El, discharging the pressed bricks, which 
may be removed in any convenient way. The 
cam C' now moves the lever O back to its 
normal position, thus lowering the ram S to 
a point determined by adjusting the screw J', 
the quantity of material deposited in the mold 
being thus determined by the position of the 
ram in the molds. During and subsequent 
to this return movement of the ram, the bars 
E, are moved outward at their upper ends by 
the cam C, C, carrying the head outward far 
enough to bring the box P over the molds to 
permit its contents to flow into and fill the 
same. The bars E then move back to the 
vertical position and remain thus during the 
pressing operation. Thus far the pressing 
mechanism has been stationary, the rolls T' 
having been traversing the portion of the 
cam ribs C concentric to the shaft. At this 
point about one-half of a revolution has been 
made by the wheels B, B. The rolls T' are 
next carried toward the shaft B and the mid 
dle joint of the levers K drawn inward, this 
first lowers the bolt F in the opening A' and 
carries the bars and head G downward until 
said head rests on the mold H, then the cross 
head I rises and carrying with it the ram S 
compresses the contents of the mold. It will 
be observed that the strain of this pressure 
falls entirely on these side bars, E, E, and in 
line with their length, and also that as the 
pressure increases the cam rib Capproaches 
the axis of the wheel B, thus increasing the 
leverage. The bar L now moves outward 
restoring the knuckle joint lever to the posi 
tion shown, thus first lowering the cross head 
upon the screws J, which are adjusted to per 
mit said cross head to move out of the way 
of the ram S as it descends, and finally the 
bolt E rises to place thus lifting the head G 
off the mold, preparatory to repeating the de 
scribed operations; in the mean time the le 
vers N and O, have remained stationary dur 
ing the last half revolution of the wheel B, B. 
What I claim is 
1. In a brick press, a mold open at the top 
and bottom, a head to close the top of said 
mold, a movable ram within said mold a 
knuckle-joint lever operating said ram, a ver 
tically movable bolt to which said lever is piv 
oted at its lower end, bars connecting said 
bolt and head, rods pivoted to said bars and 
a longitudinally movable bar pivoted to the 
middle joint of the lever, rolls on said rods 
and bar, wheels having cam ribs engaging 
said rolls, and means for rotating said wheels, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a brick press, a mold open at the top 
and bottom, a movable head to close the top 
of the mold, a vertically movable ram in Said 
mold, a cross-head to operate said ram, set 
screws to limit the downward movement of 
said cross-head, a vertically movable bolt, a 
knuckle-joint lever connected at its ends to 
said bolt and cross-head, bars connecting said 
bolt and movable head, rods pivoted to said 
bars, rolls on said rods, a bar pivoted to the 
middle joint of said lever, rolls on said bar, a 
pivoted lever engaging said ram, rolls on said 
lever, and wheels having cam ribs engaging 
all of said rolls, substantially as described. 
3. In a brick press, the combination with a 
mold, and a head, movable both vertically 
above and to and horizontally over the top of 
said mold, of a box, having a discharge open 
ing in its bottom, and pivoted rods, connect 
ing said head and box together. 
4. In a brick press, the combination with a 
mold, and a table, having its top in the plane 
of the top of said mold, of a head, a box, hav 
ing a discharge opening in its bottom, piv 
oted rods, connecting said head and box to 
gether, and bars for moving said head hori 
Zontally over and vertically above and to the 
top of said mold, substantially as shown and 
described. 
5. In a brick press, a mold, a ram movable 
in the mold, a head movable both horizon 
tally and vertically, said head having a plu 
rality of equal sides each provided with an 
indented design, bars supporting and hold 
ing said head, a bolt passing through said 
bars and head and serving to secure them to 
gether So that any one of the faces of the 
head may be adjusted into operative posi 
tion, and a box movable with said head and 
having a discharge opening in its bottom, 
substantialiy as described. 
6. In a brick press, a mold, a ram movable 
in the same, a cross-head to actuate said ram, 
and detached from the ram and having an 
opening, an extension on said ram passing 
through said opening and movable therein, 
mechanism for operating the cross-head, and 
a pivoted lever engaging said extension at 
One end and having a roll at the other, and 
a wheel having can ribs engaging said roll, 
substantially as described. 
7. In a brick press, a mold, a movable head 
to close said mold, a vertically movable bolt, 
bars connecting Said bolt and head and 
adapted to Oscillate at their upper ends, a 
table having its surface in the plane of the 
top of Said molds, a box open at the bottom 
traversing said table and molds, and attached 
to the bars, rods, M, pivoted to said bars, piv. 
otally supported rods, N, pivoted to said rods, 
M, rolls on said rods, and wheels having cam 
ribs engaging said rolls, whereby said head 
is moved back over the table to release the 
pressed bricks, and then moved forward to 
bring the box over the mold, and then moved 
to place over the molds, substantially as de 
8. In a brick machine, in combination with 
a mold, a movable head, a ram, pivoted bars 
scribed. 
w 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
OC 
Id 
II5 
I 25 
 
516,453 
3 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
E, supporting the head, a lever K, to operate 
the ram, a longitudinally movable bar I, piv- presence of two witnesses. 
oted to said lever, rodsM, pivoted to said bars 
E, a pivoted lever O, engaging the ram, rolls 
5 on said bar I, rods M, and lever O; and wheels 
having cam ribs engaging said rolls substan- 
tially as described. 
LUTHER W. MoULTON, 
LEWIS E. FLANDERS. 
 
EDWARD W. SEAMANS, 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516553.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 516,553, 
 
ARMATURE FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES OR M0TORS. 
W. B. SAYERS 
Patented Mar. 13, 1894, 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
ARMATURE FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES OR M0TORS. 
W. B. SAYERS. 
No. 516,553. 
Patented Mar. 13, 1894, 
 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
W. B. SAYERS 
ARMATURE FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES OR MOTORS, 
 
No. 516,553, 
W Sy. 
A. \ Y \\ 
\ N S S 
Patented Mar, l3 l894, 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
W. B. SAYERs. 
ARMATURE FOR DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES OR MOTORS, 
No. 516,553, 
Patented Mar. 13, 1894. 
Fiov.5. 
 
W77 esses. 
/ Jay (ew: 
Auto 6-24- 
4 l % 
This NATIONAL IT 3&RAPHNG coMFANY, 
WAshkir:GTON, d, C, 
 
y U NRXED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM BROOKS SAYERS, OF GLEN WOOD, BEARSDEN, SCOTLAND. 
ARMATURE FOR DYNAMO-ELECTRIC MACH NES OR MOTORS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 516,553, dated March 18, 1894, 
Application filed April 26, 1892, Serial No. 430,707, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it na?ty conce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM BROOKS SAY 
ERS, a Subject of the Queen of Great Britain 
and Ireland, residing at Glenwood, Bearsden, 
near Glasgow, in the county of Dumbarton, 
Scotland, have invented Improvements in Dy 
namo-Electric Machines, of which the follow 
ing is a Specification. 
This invention has reference to improve 
ments in dynamo electric machines and mo 
tors of the kind in which the commutator 
strips are connected to the sections of the ar 
mature winding through commutator coils in 
which an electro-motive force is set up when 
the machine is running the object being to 
obtain a sparkless or nearly sparkless collec 
tion at the commutator under conditions 
where this would not be possible if the ordi 
nary direct method of connection between the 
armature winding and commutator were 
adopted, that is to say, where the commutator 
brushes have a backward lead when running 
as a generator and a forward lead when run 
ning as a motor. For this purpose according 
to my invention each of the said commutator 
coils is connected to the armature winding in 
such a manner that it will have a backward 
lead with reference to the point between Sec 
tions of the armature winding to which it is 
connected, when the machine is running as a 
generator, and a forward lead when the ma 
chine is running as a motor, and the commu 
tator brushes are arranged SO as to have a 
back Ward lead when the machine is running 
as a generator and a forward lead when it is 
running as a motor, the arrangement in each 
case being such that the armature current 
will tend to increase the total magnetic flux, 
and that the resultant electro-motive force in 
duced in any two of the commutator coils and 
in the section of the armature Winding that 
connects them will reverse or tend to reverse 
the current in the said Scotion of the arma 
ture winding and reduce to Zero the current 
in the commutator coil connected to the colm 
mutator strip that is about to leave the com 
mutator brush at the time when one of the 
said two commutator coils is under one of the 
horns of the field magnet poles that is strength 
ened by the armature current and the other 
has passed from under the same and the two 
corresponding strips of the commutator are 
Connected by a commutator brush. The com 
mutator coils may be wound over the top or 
by the side of the armature coils to which 
they are connected and are led around the 
circumference of the armature any desired 
angular distance before being led around the 
core, and they may be led either a fraction of 
a turn or any number of turns around the ar 
mature core as may be necessary to secure 
the desired result. In all cases the commu 
tator coils are angularly displaced with ref 
erence to the point of connection with the 
main winding and are so wound upon the ar 
mature core that currents in the two sides of 
the commutator coil and in the respective sec 
tions of the al'mature winding adjacent to 
them are in the same direction. 
My invention may be applied to dynamo 
electric machines of various types. 
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1 is 
a diagrammatic view illustrating its applica 
tion to a dynamo electric machine with ring 
armature. Figure 1* is a diagrammatic view 
illustrating a modified arrangement of com 
mutator coil. Fig. 2 is a perspective view 
illustrating its application to a dynamo elec 
tric machine with druun armature. Fig. 3 is 
a diagrammatic representation of field mag 
nets and armature for use with my invention 
when no winding is used upon the field-mag 
nets. Fig. 4 is a diagrammatic view herein. 
after referred to. 
Referring to Fig.1, AA is the main armature 
winding. B'-- B-- B-- and B- B- B8 
are commutation coils according to this in 
vention wound around the armature core. 
The former set are connected at one of their 
ends to the armature winding A at the points 
D' D* Drespectively, and at their other ends 
to the commutator sections E" E E respect 
ively. The latter set of commutator coils are 
connected at one of their ends to the arma 
ture winding at the points D, D, D, respect 
ively, and at their other ends to the commu 
tator sections E. E. E. respectively. Each 
commutator coil is connected to the armature 
winding at a point in advance of the coil, 
with reference to direction of rotation of the 
armature, when running as a generator, or to 
a point which would be in rear of the coil if 
the armature should be run in the opposite di 
rection as a motor. Furthermore each com 
7 o 
75 
80 
9 O 
Old 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
 
516,558 
IO 
mutator coil is doubled back from its point 
of connection with the armature winding, and 
wound around the core in the opposite cir 
cumferential direction around the core, that 
is to say when the armature winding is wound 
so as to form a left handed coil, as in the ex 
ample shown, each commutator coil may be 
wound to form a right handed coil. By this 
means a direct electro-motive force will be 
produced in each of the commutator coils as 
it passes under the tips or polar horns N*S* 
at the trailing ends of the field magnet pole 
pieces N S. 
F-- and F- are the commutator brushes. 
Assuming that the armature is rotated in 
the direction of the arrow 1, and is running 
as a generator then the direction of the cur 
rent through the armature winding and the 
respective commutator coils when the same 
are in the position shown, will be thatindicated 
by the arrows on the said winding and coils, 
at this time the armature current is mainly 
passing through the commutator coil B'-- to 
the central commutator section E under the 
brush F-- and from the brush F-through the 
commutator section E, to the commutator coil 
B'-; the current flowing through the commu 
tator coils B*-- and B- in advance of the coils 
B-- and B- and which are respectively con 
nected to the commutator sections E and 
E. that are about to leave the tips of the 
brushes, is approaching Zero under the effect 
of the greater electro-motive force which is 
being generated in the commutator coils B'-- 
and B- in consequence of the latter coils 
being under the tips N S of the pole pieces 
N S; and a current is commencing to flow 
through the commutator coils B- and B 
connected to the commutator sections E and 
E, that are just coming under the brushes in 
consequence of the electro-motive force gen 
erated in them being approximately equal to 
that in the coils B'-- B- which are carry 
ing the bulk of the current. As the arma 
ture advances forward the commutator coils 
B-- and B'- will leave the tips N*S* of the 
pole pieces N S and the electro-motive force 
generated in them will rapidly fall in conse 
quence, while the portions of the armature 
coil which are connected between them and 
the commutator coils B-- B- will also be 
well away from the tips of the pole pieces 
and will be comparatively inactive. The com 
mutator coils B-- and B- will however be 
approaching the tips N*S* of the pole pieces 
where the magnetic flux is densest, and as a 
consequence if the proportions of the arma 
ture coils to the commutator coils are correct, 
the current in the portions of the armature 
coil. A connected between B'-- B- and B-- 
B8- respectively will be reversed and that in 
the commutator coils B'-- B- will be 
brought down to Zero just as the sections E' 
E, to which they are connected are leaving 
the tips of the commutator brushes and a 
sparkless break will be the result, although 
the brushes have the opposite lead to that 
which is essential in machines wound in the 
ordinary simple manner, or even having loops 
upon the armature connecting the commuta 
tor to the main winding but which are not 
wound according to my invention. 
The two arrows N' S passing through the 
armature indicate the direction of magneti 
zation which would be produced by the field 
coils alone. The arrows N*S*indicate the di 
rection of magnetization and position of the 
poles which would be produced by the cur 
rent in the armature coils if the commutation 
took place in the ordinary way by brushes 
having a lead in the direction of rotation. 
The arrows N S indicate the direction and 
approximate position of poles when the 
brushes are set with a backward lead and the 
machine is running as a generator which is 
rendered practicable by my invention. From 
this it follows that whereas in the former case 
the current in the two sections of the arma 
ture coils situated for the time being between 
the pole pieces of the field magnet is opposite 
to the direction of field excitation; in the lat 
ter case the effect of the current flowing 
through the said two sections or series of ar 
mature coils is to aid the field excitation 
With the result that instead of an increase in 
the armature current tending to reduce the 
electro-motive. force generated as in the case 
with simple shunt machines running with a 
forward lead, in the ordinary manner the 
armature current tends to increase the mag 
netic flux and consequently to increase the 
electro-motive force generated. To secure 
that increased electro motive force shall be 
caused by an increase of current in the arm 
ature or main circuit in dynamo machines 
for parallel working, it has hitherto been nec 
essary to resort to compound winding of the 
field coils. Furthermore as the strength of 
the trailing corner of the pole piece when run 
ning as a generator, or the leading corner 
when running as a motor, increases with the 
armature current, the brushes will require 
little or no adjustment, the electro-motive 
force required to effect the reversal of the 
current in the coils during commutation, be 
ing automatically increased as required, by 
the increase in the strength of the said pole 
piece. 
Although in the preceding arrangement, 
each armature coil is shown doubled back (in 
the case of a generator) from its point of con 
nection with the armature winding and wound 
around the armature core in the opposite cir 
cumferential direction so as to form a coil of 
Opposite hand to the main winding, the said 
coils may be otherwise wound provided the 
current generated in them and in the adja 
cent sections of the armature winding are in 
the same direction. Thus if each commuta 
tor coil B be doubled back from the said 
point of connection D as shown diagrammati 
cally in Fig. 1" which for the sake of clear 
ness shows only one of such coils, and be then 
Wound around the armature core in the same 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
go 
95 
IOC 
IC 
II5 
I 25 
 
516,553 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
circumferential direction as the armature 
winding A, and then be connected to a com 
mutation section E as shown, the electrical 
result is the same as in the preceding ar 
rangement. Again the commutator coils 
need not be wound along the armature core 
as in Figs. I and 1. They may be merely 
displaced in an angular direction with refer 
ence to the point of connection with the main 
Winding as in the previous examples and then 
be wound around the al'mature core in the 
Same plane as one of the Sections of the ar 
mature winding as in the arrangement next 
herein described. 
In the arrangement shown in Fig. 2 the 
main or armature winding A is wound upon 
the well known Hefner von Alteneck princi 
ple, in forty-eight sections of two turns each 
on an armature core of the drum type. The 
slots C in this arnature core are cut deeply 
and the first half of the winding wound in 
the bottom thereof, the second half following 
next while the commutator coils occupy the 
upper portions of the slots. A portion of one 
of the commutator coils B is shown broken 
away, and a junction, with the insulation 
stripped off, between the main armature wind 
ing and a commutator coil is shown at D*. 
It will be seen from this figure that each of 
the commutator coils passes near one end into 
the slot second removed, in the direction op 
posite the direction of rotation of the arma 
ture, when running as a generator from the 
slot into which the part of the main winding 
passes to which it is connected. After trav 
ersing the length of the slot, it crosses at the 
far end to the other side of the armature and 
returns through the diametrically opposite 
slot, after which it is connected to the com 
mutator section opposite it. Thus all the 
visible junctions marked D D belong to the 
commutator coils that are connected to the 
commutator sections on the side dial metri 
cally opposite to that part where the covering 
is removed in the drawings, while the commu 
tator coils, the ends of which are seen in the 
drawings connected into their respective com 
mutator Sections, pass around the al'mature 
and are joined to the main winding on the 
opposite side at corresponding points dia 
metrically opposite to the junctions lettered 
D ID. The several commutator coils B'B' B 
which are marked with a minus sign form 
the commutator connections for the Second 
or top half of the main winding, and those 
marked with a plus sign form the commutator 
connections for the first or lower half of the 
main winding. The points in the imain Wind 
ing from which the current is drawn are ap 
proximately on the opposite side of the ar 
mature to that on which are the cominutator 
sections to which they are connected through 
the commutator coils. 
The commutator coils and the main wind 
ing are wound in the saline direction. Thus, 
assuming the armature winding to have been 
passed around the armature from left to right 
on the top and from right to left below and 
the Successive sections of the winding to have 
been put on in such a manner that each suc 
ceeding one is a step farther in the direction 
in which the armature is represented as mov 
ing, then in like manner the commutator 
coils will be wound from left to right over the 
top of the armature and from right to left be 
low. The commutator coil B'-- being under 
the trailing tip or horn N* of the pole piece N, 
the machine being considered as a generator 
has an electro-motive force generated in it 
equal to that generated in one turn of the 
main winding, and the commutator section 
connected to it being under the brushes, the 
main current is drawn through this coil. The 
path of the current in the commutator coils, 
commutator Sections, and brushes, is indi 
cated by arrows. The coil B'-- has a large 
arrow drawn upon it to indicate that the main 
portion of the armature current is passing to 
the commutator Section E' and thence to the 
brush F-- through this coil. In like manner 
the coil marked B- also has a large arrow 
drawn upon it to indicate that the main por 
tion of the current is passing through it back 
into the main winding. This arrow is shown 
divided into two toward the point, to indi 
cate the division of the current into two parts 
at the junction with the Ghain winding. A 
small arrow is drawn upon each of the com 
mutator coils marked B-- B*- B -- B8-. 
The small arrows on B- and B- are in 
tended to indicate that the current in these 
coils is approaching Zero in consequence of 
the action before described, and that by the 
time the corresponding comimutator sections 
have broken connection with the tips of the 
brushes, only one pair of which can be clearly 
seen in Fig. 2, the current in these coils will 
be just at the Zero point, and the break will 
thus be sparkless. The small arrows on coils 
B-- B- are intended to indicate that a cur 
rent is just starting in these coils owing to 
the connection being established between the 
brushes and the corresponding commutator 
sections. As the rotation proceeds, the com 
mutator coils marked B'-- B- will move 
away from under the magnet pole N, and the 
electro-motive force generated in them will 
rapidly fall, consequently the current in B'-- 
and B- will diminish, and that in B- and 
B- will increase at a corresponding rate un 
till when the coils B-- and B- have reached 
the position shown as occupied by the coils 
B'-- B-, they will be carrying nearly the 
whole current, and the coils B-- and B'- 
will then have arrived at the positions shown 
as occupied by the coils B-- B- and the 
current in them will be approaching zero. It 
will be seen that each of these commutator 
coils which has passed from under the pole 
piece, during the time in which the corre 
sponding commutator section is still under 
the brush is connected in parallel with the 
adjacent commutator coil which is still under 
the said pole, the connection between the two 
o 
CO 
IO 5 
IO 
II5 
l 25 
 
516,553 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 C. 
55 
being completed through one section of the 
main winding which is also well out from un 
der the pole piece. The excess electro-motive 
force in the commutator coil under the pole, 
over that in the main winding coil and the 
commutator coil which have passed out from 
under the said pole, will be sufficient to re 
verse the current in the main winding and 
reduce that in the last mentioned commuta 
torcoil to zero just as the commutator section 
connected to this coil leaves the brush, and 
thus a sparkless break will be secured. A 
sparkless break will be thus obtained both 
when the brushes have a backward lead and 
the machine is running as a generator, and 
also when the brushes have a forward lead 
and the machine is running as a motor. 
The effect of giving the brushes a back 
ward lead when running as a generator is as 
hereinbefore stated with reference to Fig. 1, 
that the portion of the main winding of the 
armature situate between the field magnet 
poles, assists the exciting coils of the field 
magnet by increasing the magnetic flux, with 
the result that a rise in the electro-motive 
force generated will take place with an in 
crease in the load put upon the machine-a. 
result hitherto obtained by compound wind 
ing of the field magnets. The result of giving 
the brushes a forward lead when running the 
machine as a motor, is that the current in the 
before mentioned portion of the main wind 
ing still aids in increasing the effective mag 
netic flux thereby producing greater stability 
of the magnetic field, and also an increased 
torque with an increased load. 
The density of the magnetic flux under the 
tip or horn of the magnetic pole marked N* 
(Figs. 1 and 2) will be increased when the ar 
mature currentis increased, owing to the well 
known effect of the current in the armature 
winding. 
The result will be to make the 
commutator coils more active. A greater 
electro-motive force will consequently be gen 
erated in the One for the time being, under 
the pole tip N and a greater excess of elec 
tro-motive force will consequently be pro 
duced over that generated in the section of 
the main winding in which the current is re 
uired to be reversed and in the commutator 
coil which has moved away from the pole, than 
would be the case with less current. Thus as 
a greater electro-motive force is required to 
reverse the greater current in the armature 
sections, the required conditions are produced 
nearly or quite automatically, that is to say, 
little or no shifting of the brushes with vary 
ing current, will be required. This more or less 
perfect automatic action is most pronounced 
with dynamo machines having toothed or slot 
ted armatures and short air spaces, and this 
invention is of special value for such ma 
chines, as by its use, these machines can be 
made to run sparklessly even though the air 
space be made very short, and when this is 
done, shorter and consequently lighter field 
magnets and less exciting force suffices, so 
much so that by means of my invention I call 
when desirable entirely dispense with wind 
ing upon the field magnets, in which cases I 
may make the field magnet poles to embrace a 
considerably smaller portion of the armature 
than is usual. 
Fig. 3 is a diagrammatic representation of 
field magnets and armature designed to Work 
without winding upon the field magnets. G 
is the armature core. H, H, are the magnets. 
It will be seen that if the machine is con 
structed according to my invention, as here 
in before described, to run with a backward 
lead when running as a generator, or a for 
ward lead when running as a motor, the com 
mutator brushes being set approximately on 
the line I, I, a considerable portion of the arma 
ture winding will tend directly to produce the 
required magnetic flux through the said ar 
mature, and also through the field magnets. 
The lengths of wire which are to form the 
commutator coils may be connected to the 
main armature winding as the winding opera 
tion proceeds. The ends of the said lengths 
may be either coiled up to keep them out of 
the way until the main winding is finished 
after which they can be wound into their re 
spective positions over the main winding; or 
the said lengths of wire may be wound as 
soon as convenient into their proper places 
either above, below, or in between the main 
winding wire or wires. 
I have found it convenient to join short 
lengths of insulated preferably flexible con 
ductor at convenient points between the sec 
tions of the main winding during the winding 
operation and then to put on the commutator 
coils leaving the ends free. The commutator 
coils can then be connected to the flexible ends 
after the winding is completed. The amount 
of lead of the commutator coils as compared 
with the main winding sections to which they 
are connected, can then be readily altered if 
desired. 
It is to be understood that this invention 
is not limited to the arrangement of the com 
mutator coils either for running a generator 
with a backward lead, or a motor with a for 
ward lead. The commutator coils can be ar 
ranged so as to secure diminished sparking 
at the brushes both when running with a for 
Ward lead in the case of a generator, and 
with a backward lead in the case of a motor. 
When the dynamo or motor is required to 
run in either direction at will, and the com 
mutator coils have a lead relatively to the ar 
mature coils as hereinbefore mentioned, I may 
employ two independent commutators and 
two sets of commutator coils and give the set 
of Commutator coils connected with one com 
mutator a lead in one direction and those 
connected with the other commutator an equal 
lead in the opposite direction. One commu 
tator will then be used when the machine is 
running in one direction, and the other when 
the machine is running in the opposite direc 
tion, the brushes being lifted off the commu 
75 
95 
OO 
IC 
II5 
I25 
 
516,558 
5 
tator which is not in use. Fig. 4 is a diagram 
matic view illustrating this construction as ap 
plied to a machinehaving a Gramme armature 
and intended to run as a motor with forward 
lead. A is a main armature winding. IB B 
are the commutator coils of one set; they are 
connected as before to the armature winding 
and to the respective strips of the commu 
tator E which will be in use when the ma 
chine is running in the direction of the arrow 
shown in full lines. B B are the commutator 
coils of the other set, connected to the arma 
ture winding and to the respective strips of 
the Coimmutator E which will be in use when 
the machine is running in the opposite direc 
tion and which will be fixed on the armature 
Shaft at the end of the armature opposite to 
that at which the commutator E will be lo 
cated. F is one of the brushes for the com 
mutator E, and F is one of the brushes for 
the commutator E. MIM are the field mag 
net poles. When the machine is to run in 
the direction of the full arrow, the brushes FN 
and F must be moved into the positions 
shown in full lines so that the brushes Fs and 
commutator E will alone be operative. When 
the machine is to run in the direction of the 
dotted arrow, the brushes F and Fy must be 
moved into the positions shown in dotted 
lines So that the brushes F and commutator 
E will then be alone in use. 
What I claim is 
1. In a dynamo-electric machine, an arma 
ture having the sections of its winding con 
nected to the commutator strips by commu 
tator Coils So Wound upon the armature core 
that the current generated in each of them 
and in the adjacent armature section will be 
in the same direction substantially as herein 
described. 
2. In a dynamo electric machine, an arma 
ture having the sections of its winding con 
nected to the commutator strips by commu 
tator coils angularly displaced with reference 
to the point of connection with the main wind 
ing and SO wound upon the armature core 
that the currents generated in them and in 
the adjacent Sections of the armature wind 
ing will be in the same direction substantially 
as herein described. 
3. A dynamo-electric machine, in which the 
Sections of the armature winding are con 
nected to the commutator strips through com 
mutator coils, each of said commutator coils 
being Wound so as to have, with reference to 
its point of connection with said armature 
Winding, a backward lead when the machine 
is running in one direction as a generator and 
a forward lead when the machine is running 
in the opposite direction as a motor and SO 
that a direct electro-motive force will be gen 
erated in it when passing under the polar 
horns of the field magnet that are strength 
ened by the armature current substantially 
as herein described. 
4. In a dynamo electric machine, an arma 
ture having the sections of its winding con 
nected to the commutator strips by commuta 
tor coils wound upon the armature core SO 
that the currents generated in them and in 
the adjacent sections of the armature Wind 
ing will be in the same direction, and Com 
mutator brushes arranged to bear upon said 
commutator strips so as to have a back Ward 
lead when the machine is running as a gen" 
erator and a forward lead when it is running 
as a motor substantially as herein described 
for the purpose specified. 
5. In a dynamo electric machine, the com 
bination with the sections of the armature 
winding and the commutator strips, of Com 
mutator coils connecting the saidsections and 
strips and each of which is angularly dis 
placed with reference to its point of connec 
tion with the main winding and SO Wound 
upon the armature core that the current gen 
erated in it and in the adjacent section of 
the armature winding will be in the same di 
rection, and commutator brushes arranged to 
have a backward lead when running as a gen 
erator and a forward lead when running as a 
motor substantially as herein described. 
6. In a dynamo-electric machine, an arma 
ture having two independent commutators 
and two sets of commutator coils connecting 
the armature winding to the coummtator 
strips, the one set of commutator coils that 
are connected to one commutator, having a 
lead in one direction with reference to the 
points of the armature winding to which they 
are connected, and the other set of commu 
tator coils that are connected to the other 
commutator having a lead in the opposite di 
rection, and two pairs of commutator brushes 
adapted to be brought alternately into con 
tact with their respective commutators Sub 
stantially as herein described for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILLIAMI BROOKS SAYERS. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS J. SMILLIE, 
FRANK, GOODWIN, 
Of 141 West George St., Glasgow, Solicitor. 
Of 141 West George St., Glasgow, Clerk at 
LCL U. 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
Ioo 
IC5 
O 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516653.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 516,653, 
L. F. LARY, 
GRAVITY BATTERY, 
Patented Mar, 20, 1894, 
 
 
  
 
 
s 
S. 
S SE NS NSSR 
VSS3 SKS 
The NATIONAL LITHoGrapHING corary. 
WA8lNGTON, O, C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LORENZO FLOOD LARY, OF POTTERSBURG, OHIO. 
GRAVITY BATTERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 516,653, dated March 20, 1894. 
Application filed May 23, 1893, 
Serial No. 475,289, (No model. 
. 
To all, whon, it may coracern. 
Be it known that I, LORENZO FLOOD LARY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Pot 
tersburg, in the county of Union and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Gravity-Batteries; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of galvanic batteries, known as 
gravity batteries, and it has for its general 
object to provide a battery embodying such 
a construction that a space is afforded at the 
bottom of the cell for the sulphate of zinc so 
as to prevent the loss of copper by deposit on 
such particles and keep the copper solution 
free from foreign matter. 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
vide a copper electrode adapted to serve as a 
receptacle for the blue vitriol, and embodying 
such a construction that it may be spread out 
flat when removed from the cell so as to fa 
cilitate the removal of copper formations. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will appear from the following descrip 
tion and claims when taken in connection 
with the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1, is a vertical, diametrical section 
of a battery embodying my invention. Fig. 
2, is a plan view of the copper electrode in 
the shape it assumes when placed in the cell, 
and Fig. 3, is a view illustrating the copper 
electrode as spread out so as to facilitate the 
removal of copper formations. 
Referring by letter to said drawings:-A, 
indicates a cell which may be of any approved 
form and construction, and B, indicates the 
zinc or negative electrode which may be of 
the well known crow's foot,' or other pat 
tern. This electrode is preferably provided 
with a hook a, as shown, whereby it is sup 
ported in the cell, and it is connected to 
the circuit wire b, through the medium of 
the binding post c, or in any other approved 
a0. 
C, indicates the copper or positive electrode 
of the battery which is designed to rest upon 
the bottom of the cell and serve as a recepta 
cle for the blue vitriol or equivalent exciting 
substance, indicated by D. In forming this 
copper electrode C, I take a sheet of copper 
and cut it so as to form a generally elliptical 
figure, that is one having one of its longitudi- 55 
mal edges and its ends rounded as shown at 
d, and e, and having a segment removed from 
its other longitudinal edge, I then provide 
the sheet with a large aperture g, and a se 
ries of comparatively small aperturesh, after 6o 
which Islititas illustrated to form the tongue 
supportf. I then bend the sheet as shown 
in Fig. 2, so as to form the inverted cone (see 
Fig. 3,) having the aperture g, at its lower 
end, and I also bend the tonguef, outwardly, 65 
as illustrated in the said figure, so that it 
serves to support the electrode above the bot 
tom of the cell. 
In addition to the tongue supportf, I pro 
vide the cone shaped electrode with a prop to 
or support as , and, if necessary, the said 
electrode may be further supported by bend 
ing the circuit wire i, over the upper edge of 
the cell. 
In the practice of my invention, the cone 
shaped electrode, charged with a sufficient 
quantity of blue vitriol, or other excitant, is 
placed in the cell as shown in Fig. 1, so as to 
form a chamber or space at the bottom of the 
Same. The Zinc or negative electrode is then 
placed in position, after which the liquid is 
added. 
In the practice of my invention, I prefer to 
employ a cone shaped copper electrode formed 
in the manner herein illustrated and de 
scribed, as the same is advantageous, but I 
do not desire to be understood as confining 
myself to an electrode formed in such manner, 
nor do I want to be confined to an electrode of 
cone shape as any approved shape of elec 
trode may be employed that will serve at once 
as a receptacle for the excitant and to form a 
chamber at the bottom of the cell. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The electrode C, formed by a sheet of ma 
terial bent or furled into cone shape, and hav. 
ing an aperture in its bottom; said electrode 
being adapted to serve as a receptacle for an 
excitant and being also adapted to be un 
furled and flattened out so as to facilitate 
the removal of chemical formations, substan 
tially as specified. 
2. The combination with a cell and an zinc 
95 
75 
did 
O 
25 
55 
45 
So 
516,653 
or negative electrode arranged therein; of a 
copper or positive electrode formed by bend- presence of two witnesses. 
ing a sheet of copper into cone shape; said 
electrode having an aperture at its bottom 
5 and also having the integral support f, and 
the support i, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
- 
ORLANDO BUEL EATON 
LESTER WARE CLINE. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
LORENZO FLOOD LARY. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516753.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHANN JAKOB BRACK, OF BASLE, SWITZERLAND, ASSIGNOR TO L. DURAND, 
HUGUENIN & CO., OF ST. FONS, FRANCE, BASLE, SWITZERLAND, AND 
HUNINGEN, GERMANY. 
A 
DAMD O BASE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 516,753, dated March 20, 1894. 
Application filed December 13, 1893, Serial No. 493,592, (Specimens) Patented in France April 6, 1892, No. 220,724; in 
Germany April 6, 1892, No, 66,737, and in England May 17, 1892, No. 9,360, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHANNJAKOB BRACK, 
a citizen of the Swiss Republic, residing at 
Basle, Switzerland, have invented new and 
5 useful Improvements in the Production of 
Diamido Bases, (partly patented by the firm 
L. Durand, Huguenin & Co., of St. Fons, near 
Lyon, France, Basle, Switzerland, and Hi 
ningen, Germany, in France by Letters Patent 
Io No. 220,724, dated April 6, 1892, with Letters 
Patent of addition dated April 30, 1892; in 
England by Letters Patent No. 9,360, dated 
May 17, 1892, and in Germany by Letters Pat 
ent No. 66,737, dated April 6, 1892, and Let 
15 ters Patent of addition No. 68,920, dated May 
2, 1892;) and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention. 
This invention relates to the manufacture. 
2O of new diamido-bases, suitable for the pro 
duction of substantive cotton dyes and ob 
tained by the condensation of one molecule 
formaldehyde, with a mixture of one mole 
cule of a paradiamin such, for instance, as 
25 benzidin and tolidin, and one molecule of the 
basic hydrochlorate of an aromatic diamin, 
such for instance as basic hydrochlorate of 
tolidin, basic hydrochlorate of benzidin, basic 
hydrochlorate of metaphenylendiamin and 
3o basic hydrochlorate of paraphenylendiamin. 
By Way of examples, I will describe the 
mode of producing some of these new diami 
do-bases. 
I. Diamido-base derived from formalde 
35 hyde, told in and basic hydrochlorate of meta 
phenylendiamin-21.2 kilos of tolidin and 
14.4 kilos of basic hydrochlorate of meta 
phenylendiamin (or a mixture of one-half 
molecule of metaphenylendiamin and one 
half molecule of neutral hydrochlorate of 
metaphenylendia min) are stirred together 
with ten kilos of alcohol to form a thick 
paste, to which is then added 7.5 kilos of a 
forty per cent, formaldehyde solution. The 
reaction at once takes place under spontane 
Ous heating of the mass. The reaction is 
Completed by heating for several hours on a 
Water bath, the alcohol employed being re 
- covered by distillation. The reaction pro 
45 
AO 
duct is treated with hot, dilute hydrochloric 5o 
acid and the new diamido-base, dissolved as 
a hydrochlorate salt, is precipitated in the 
form of a light brown powder by the addition 
of ammonia. When heated to 130 centigrade, 
the new diamido-base forms a resin-like mass 55 
which becomes decomposed at higher temper 
atures. It is only slightly soluble in hot al 
cohol and benzene, and is nearly insoluble in 
ether. Its hydrochlorate and sulfate salts are 
readily soluble in water. The new base has 6o 
apparently the following formula: 
N 
H 
/ 
CH-CH-NH 
CH, 
N 
H 
N / N 
65 
7 o 
CH-NH. 
A body of identical constitution is obtained 
if in the above example, the hydrochlorate of 75 
metaphenylendiamin is replaced by hydro 
chlorate of paraphenylendia min. 
II. Diamido-base derived from formalde 
hyde, tollidin and basic hydrochlorate of toli 
din.-For the production of this new diamido- 8c 
base the following process is employed: 21.2 
kilos of tollidin and 24.8 kilos of basic toli 
din hydrochlorate, are incorporated with ten 
kilos of alcohol, to form a thick paste and to 
this are added 7.5 kilos of formaldehyde solu- 85 
tion of forty per cent. The mass is allowed 
to cool and to stand for twelve hours when it 
assumes by degrees a grayish green color; it 
is then heated for twelve hours on a water 
bath. The melt first becomes thinly liquid 9o 
and then gradually thickens to a resinous 
consistency and at the end of the operation it 
forms a tough, pitch-like, green mass, which 
after cooling, solidifies and is easily pulver 
ized. The reaction product is treated with 95 
rather more than the theoretical quantity of 
hot sulfuric acid; the new base is thereby 
completely dissolved while the tolidin which 
 
516,753 
55 
75 
while the benzidin, which is not affected by 
the reaction, is separated by filtration as a 
sulfate, of difficult solution. From the sul 
fate solution the base is precipitated by alka 
lies, in the form of a light yellow, flocculent 
precipitate. This new base, called formal 
dehyde-benzidin, melts between 84 and 100 
centigrade; it is slightly soluble in hot alco 
hol, but almost insoluble in benzene and 
ether; its sulfate and hydrochlorate are easily 
soluble in water. By treating the sulfate so 
lution with nitrite, a tetrazo-compound is ob 
tained that dissolves with difficulty in water, 
and which forms, for example, with naphtyl 
amin sulfonic acid, substantive cotton dyes. 
All of the bases described above are insolu 
ble in water. 
What I claim as my invention, and wish to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The herein described process for the pro 
duction of diamido-bases applicable to the 
manufacture of substantive cotton dyes, which 
consists in condensing, with the aid of heat, 
one molecule of formaldehyde with a mix 
ture of one molecule of a paradiamin and one 
molecule of the chlohydrate of an aromatic 
diamin, as set forth. 
2. The herein described process for the pro 
duction of diamido-bases, which consists in 
condensing with the aid of heat one molecule 
of formaldehyde, with a mixture of one mole 
cule of tolidin and one molecule of the chlo 
hydrate of an aromatic diamin, as set forth. 
3. The herein described diamido-base, ap 
plicable to the manufacture of substantive 
cotton dyes, which is derived from formalde 
hyde, tolidin and metaphenylendiamin, and 
which, in a dry state, is a light brown powder, 
only slightly soluble in hot alcohol and ben 
zene, nearly in soluble in ether, forms, when 
heated to 130 centigrade, a resin-like mass 
which becomes decomposed at higher tem 
perature and which forms hydrochlorate and 
sulfate salts which are readily soluble in wa 
ter, as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
- 
JOHANN JAKOB BRACK. 
Witnesses: 
THEODORE STACHELIN, 
AMAND RITTER. 
9o 
95 
iO 
remained unaffected by the reaction, is sepa 
rated by filtration as a salt that dissolves with 
difficulty. From the sulfate solution the base 
is precipitated by carbonate of soda as a light 
green, resinous mass that quickly solidifies. 
The new base begins to liquefy at from 60' 
to 65 centigrade and is completely melted at 
85 to 90 centigrade; it is easily soluble in 
alcohol, only slightly soluble in benzene, and 
almost insoluble in ether; its hydrochlorate 
and sulfate are readily soluble in water. The 
probable formula of this new body, called 
formaldehyde-tolidin' may be assumed to 
be: 
EI 
/ 
N 
CH, 
CH-CH-NH 
H 
N / 
N 
N 
CH-CH-NH. 
This new body can be diazotized; the nitrite 
consumed corresponds tolerably accurately 
with the two amido-groups of the above for 
mula. The diazo - compound, only slightly 
soluble in water, forms, for example, with 
naphthylamin, sulfo acids, substantive cotton 
dyes. 
III. Diamido-base derived from formalde 
hyde, ben2idin and basic hydrochlorate of 
ben2idin.-For the production of the conden 
sation product from benzidin, hydrochlorate 
of benzidin and formaldehyde, the following 
process is employed. 18.4 kilos of benzidin 
and twenty-two kilos of basic benzidin hydro 
chlorate, are incorporated with sufficient alco 
hol to produce a thick paste and this paste is 
added to seventy-five kilos of formaldehyde 
solution of forty per cent. The mass is then 
left to stand for twelve hours, when it solidifies 
and assumes a light yellow color; it is then 
heated for twelve hours up to 100 centigrade 
or more. The melt forms a tough, resin-like, 
greenish yellow mass, which, on cooling, be 
comes hard and brittle. The reaction pro 
duct is treated with rather more than the the 
oretical quantity of dilute, hot, sulfuric acid; 
the new base is thereby completely dissolved, 
I5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516853.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 516,853, 
 
0. N. TURNER. 
COMMUTATOR, CONNECTOR, 
Patented Mar. 20, 1894, 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
1 
62% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ORAN. TURNER, OF LYNN, ASSIGNOR TO THE GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY., 
OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
COMMUTATOR CONNECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 516,858, dated March 20, 1894. 
Application filed June 14, 1893, Serial No. 477,541 (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ORAN. TURNER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Lynn, in 
the county of Essex and State of Massachu 
setts, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Commutator-Connectors, of 
Which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to dynamo electric 
machinery, its object being to provide a read 
ily removable connecting-device between the 
lead-wires from the armature coils and the 
Commutator segments. It is especially adapt 
ed for use in large machines where it is the 
practice to build up commutators of a large 
number of extremely thin segments. In com 
mutators of this character it is entirely im 
practical to secure the lead-wire to the seg 
ment by means of screws, for a screw large 
enough to afford the necessary strength of 
union Would require a tap out of all propor 
tion to the size of the segment. A soldered 
joint is undesirable because it is deficient in 
strength, while if the armature connector is 
inserted into an opening made therefor and 
then Soldered, it is extremely difficult of re 
moval Without injury to the segment. The 
use of Solder is objectionable also because of 
its low melting point and the consequent lia 
bility to spoil the connection if the machine 
becomes heated. It has been customary, 
moreover, to facilitate the making of such di 
rect connections by casting or drop-forging 
the segment with an angularly projecting lug 
Or arm at the end thereof, to which lug the 
lead-wire is connected. Through my inven 
tion, however, the need of this lug or arm is 
obviated, rendering it possible to make the 
Segments of rolled copper cut in suitable 
lengths from bars thereof. 
In carrying out my invention, I provide 
commutator segments of suitable length and 
at the inner end thereof I mill marrow slots 
or cuts adapted to receive and hold in place 
removable fastening pieces or devices, sub 
Stantially as hereinafter set forth, which are 
in turn strongly connected to the lead-wires 
and in good electrical contact therewith. I 
furthermore provide a clamping device af 
fording a comparatively large surface adapt 
ed to bear against the segment and firmly 
pressed against the same so as to afford an 
electrical connection of a high order of effi 
ciency. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
like letters represent like parts, Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of a slotted segment, con 
nector and clamping piece, respectively. Fig. 
2 is a perspective view of the same parts as 
sembled. Figs. 3, 4, 5 and 6 are details in 
perspective showing a slight modification of 
the connector shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 7 is a 
perspective view of the same assembled; and 
Figs. S and 9 are perspective views of a dif 
ferent form of connector, unassembled and 
assembled, respectively. 
Referring to Fig. 1, the segment A has a 
vertical cut or slit (, milled in the upper por 
tion of the end thereof, and extending from 
the surface of the segment inward a desired 
distance. A horizontal slit a, transverse to 
the slit a is also milled in the said Segment, 
a short distance below the top thereof. A 
block Bhaving upward projections b is adapt 
ed to fit and slide into the slit a', while the 
projections b are of such size and length as 
to fit the slit a and project therefrom above 
the top of the segment. An additional slit a 
is milled out across the top of the Segment a 
little beyond the inner end of the slit a. The 
armature connector C which may either be a 
separate piece attached to the armature Coil, 
or a flattened portion of the end of the wire 
which forms such coil, is bent at right angles 
at its inner end and provided with holes C 
adapted to fit the projections b. This con 
nector is placed in position on the upper sur 
face of the segment, as shown in Fig. 2, with 
the bent portion at its inner end fitting into 
the slit a and the holes c, fitting over the pro 
jections b. The said projections are then 
headed over, as shown in Fig. 2, thus strongly 
uniting the parts. When it becomes neces 
sary to renew a connector the headed por 
tions of the projections b can be chipped off, 
or otherwise removed, the block slipped out 
and a new one inserted. The construction 
shown in Figs. 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 is substantially 
the same, except that the block B instead of 
having projections, as b, integral therewith, 
is provided at its ends with slits b' and lon 
gitudinally bored through the center to re 
ceive a wire b', the ends of which are bent at 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
2 
516,858 
O 
right angles as shown in Fig. 5, and take the 
place of the projections b as shown in Fig. 7. 
In this arrangement the same block can be 
used repeatedly, it being necessary to renew 
the wire b only. 
Another form of my invention is shown in 
Figs. 8 and 9, where transversal slitsa and a 
in the top and end respectively of the seg 
ment A are adapted to be gripped by a clamp 
consisting of two parts D and D' drawn to 
gether by a screw d. The lead wire can be 
secured to either portion of the clamp in any 
suitable manner. The upper edge of the end 
of the segment, between the slitsa and a', is 
provided with a slit a cut diagonally, through 
Which the screw d passes from one portion of 
the clamp to the other, and fitting tightly 
therein prevents any lateral displacement of 
the clamp. The portions D and D' of the 
clamp are respectively recessed at d and d, 
SO that the full pressure of the clamping screw 
is brought to bear on the segment and not mu 
tually taken up by the two parts of the clamp 
themselves. 
By means of the devices herein set forth a 
Strong mechanical union is afforded between 
the lead-wire and segment resisting centrifu 
gal force and the jarring and vibration of 
the commutator when in motion. The con 
nectors, moreover, can be removed and re 
newed at slight expense without in any way 
injuring or disturbing the segment, which, 
When once prepared for the reception of the 
clamping-portion, requires no further atten 
tion. In other words, the connectors set forth 
herein are entirely independent, so far as re 
movable or working parts are concerned, of 
the segment; and while only a surface con 
tact is afforded for the conduction of elec 
tricity, the surfaces thus in contact are of 
such extent and the pressure forcing them to 
gether is so great that the conductivity be 
tween them is practically perfect. 
The main feature by which the arrange 
ment shown in Figs. 1,3 and 7 is distinguished 
from prior methods of making the armature 
connections is in the fact that the segments 
are milled so as to form a slit open at the sur 
face of the segment through which the fasten 
ing pieces B, or such other fastening devices 
as may be used, may be readily slipped into 
or removed from place, and when in place may 
be relied upon to securely hold the armature 
connections without screws or solder, while 
in the customary practice heretofore the seg 
ments have merely been tapped to receive a 
screw for holding the parts in place. 
What I claim as new, and desire to Secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. A commutator-connection comprising a 
segment milled to form one member of a clamp, 
a conductor in electrical contact with the Sur 
face of said segment and adapted to form the 
other member of said clamp, and a fastening 
device whereby said segment and conductor 
are held in clamping position, as set forth. 
2. A commutator comprising substantially 
rectangular segments, slits cut therein, fas 
tening-pieces fitting said slits and engaged 
thereby, and armature connections electri 
cally and mechanically connected to said seg 
ments by means of said slits and fastening 
pieces, as set forth. 
3. A commutator connection comprising a 
flat conducting-piece electrically connected to 
the lead-wire and adapted to engage with the 
surface of the commutator segment, a slit in 
Said segment engaged by a bent portion of 
said conducting piece whereby longitudinal 
movement thereof with relation to the seg 
ment is prevented, and a fastening piece fit 
ting and adapted to slide into a horizontal 
slit in the segment, said piece having projec 
tions extending upward through a vertical 
slit in the segment, and holes in the conduct 
ing piece, said projections being flattened or 
riveted upon said conducting piece after as 
sembly, whereby the parts are securely fixed 
with relation to one another, substantially as 
described. 
4. In a commutator connection, a remov 
able fastening piece comprising a block B 
adapted to fit a suitable retaining slit there 
for in a segment of the commutator, a wire 
b' removably fastened to said block and ex 
tending through another slit in the segment 
to the surface of said commutator, and an 
armature connection C held in firm contact 
with the segment by the ends of said wires 
passing through it and headed thereon, as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 12th day of June, 1893. 
ORA N. TURNER. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. GIBBONEY, 
BENJAMIN B. HULL. 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US516953.txt	(No Model.) 
REGULATING DEVICE FORMOISTENING LEAVES OF PRESS COPY BOOKS, 
Patented Mar. 20, 1894. 
No. 516,953, 
O. K. TRUITT. 
. 
- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OWEN K. TRUITT, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
REGULATING DEVICE FOR M0ISTENING LEAVES OF PRESS-COPY BOOKS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Izetters Patent No. 516,953, dated March 20, 1894. 
Application filed November 19, 1892, Serial No. 452,557, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OWENK. TRUITT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
vented a certain new, useful, and valuable 
Improvement in Water-Regulators Used in 
Connection with Devices for Moistening 
Leaves of Press-CopyBooks, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
devices for moistening the leaves of press 
copy books, and the particular object of my 
invention is to provide a most practical and 
economical arrangement whereby the flow of 
water to the wick, or the degree of saturation 
of the wick, can be perfectly and conveniently 
regulated. 
I will proceed to explain my invention more 
fully in connection with the annexed draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of a moistening 
device with my improvement added thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a side view of the same. 
Before proceeding further to describe my 
invention I would explain that a great objec 
tion to devices for moistening the leaves of 
letter press-books has been that on account 
of a vacuum forming at the top of the reser 
voir, upon expending a part of the water in 
using the brush, this vacuum prevents a fur 
ther flow of the water into the wick, and 
prevents it from sufficiently moistening the 
leaves, and this serious objection occurs es 
pecially when the brush is used for any con 
siderable time continuously. It will be seen 
that my invention obviates this great objec 
tion. . 
Within the reservoir AI arrange a pneu 
matic tube B, the end B projecting slightly 
beyond the edge of the reservoir and said end 
having an opening B' therein. The inner end 
B of the tube is carried to the top of the reser 
voir for the purpose to be hereinafter ex 
plained. 
The lever C, pivoted at C, as shown, is pro 
vided with a piece of rubber C which is nor 
- 
. 
mally kept pressed against the opening B' by 
the action of the spring C and effectually 
closes said opening, but a slight pressure upon 
the end C of the lever causes the rubber C5o 
to recede from the opening. The purpose of 
the valve thus formed is to admit air, at will, 
into the tube B which conducts it to the top 
of the reservoir and breaks any partly formed 
vacuum created when the wick D is held 55 
downward or when the device is in actual use, 
said wick being securely held between the 
sides of the reservoir. 
This invention is not only applicable to the 
form of moistening device patented by me 6o 
November 1, 1892, No. 485,592, but may be 
applied also to any similarly constructed de 
vices. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim is- 
1. In a moistening device of the character 
described, the combination, with a reservoir 
having one of its ends open, and a Wick 
within the reservoir projecting through the 
open end, of a tube arranged within the res 
ervoir and having one end terminating over 
the wick and the other end projecting below 
the reservoir and provided with an orifice, 
and mechanism for opening or closing said 
orifice. 
2. In a moistening device of the character 
described, the combination, with a reservoir 
having one of its ends open and a wick 
within the reservoir projecting through the 
open end, of a tube within the reservoir hav 
ing one end terminating over the wick and 
the other end projecting below the reservoir 
and provided with an orifice, and a spring 
pressed lever pivoted to the reservoir and car 
rying a plug or the like for closing the said 85 
orifice. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in. 
65 
75 
OWEN K. TRUITT. 
Witnesses: 
S. DURYEE, 
J. F. KELLY. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517053.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 517,053, 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
G. F., MATTESON. ' 
TICKET, PUNCH, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 1, 
Patented Mar, 27, 1894, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
NS 
(No Model.) 
G. F. MATTESON. 
. .TICKET, PUNCH, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. . 
GEORGE. F. MATTESON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIs, ASSIGNOR TO THE CASPAR 
AUTOMATIC PATENT COMPANY, LIMITED, OF NEW ORLEANs, LOUISIANA. 
TICKET-PUNCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 517,053, dated March 27, 1894. 
Application filed June 17, 1893, Serial No. 478,025. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE. F. MATTESON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
5 nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Ticket-Mutilators, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
Io ticket mutilating or canceling devices for so 
canceling or mutilating tickets of admission 
When deposited therein as to prevent the pos 
sibility of a second use thereof and yet with 
out destroying the character of the ticket. 
I5. The prime object of this invention is to 
have the apparatus of such character that the 
cutters or mutilators serve as a receiving-hop 
per for the ticket, and are so disposed and 
guarded that the ticket can be readily dis 
2O charged therefrom when mutilated, but can 
not be dischargedoraccidentally escape there. 
from without being first mutilated. 
Another object is to have the apparatus of 
such character that the edges of the ticket are 
25 notched and thus mutilated by a shear cut in 
such a manner that they are automatically 
discharged from between the cutters into a 
receptacle provided for their reception. 
Other objects are to provide simple and 
3o novel accessory mechanism by which the 
ticketis guided to the proper position between 
the cutters, by which the ticket is prevented 
from passing through the cutters without be 
ing mutilated, and by which the deposit of 
35 tickets is prevented when the cutters are in 
the act of mutilating another ticket and there 
fore in an operative position. 
These objects are attained by the devices 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section 
through a ticket-mutilating apparatus em 
bodying my invention, showing the parts in 
position for receiving the ticket; Fig.2 a simi 
45 lar view showing the cutters closed in the act 
of mutilating a ticket; Fig. 3 a transversever 
tical section on the line 3-3 of Fig. 1; and 
Figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 detail views 
showing the different parts of the apparatus 
4o which 
Similarletters of reference indicate the same 
parts in the several figures of the drawings. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A A' indicate the fixed male dies 
or cutters and B the movable female die or 55 
cutter, which latter is pivoted at C to a sta." 
tionary portion of the frame of the machine 
and is provided with a lateral lug or projec 
tion D which is connected by a link E with 
. 
a hand lever F also suitably pivoted to a sta- 6o 
tionary portion of the frame of the machine 
and by which lever movement is imparted to 
the female cutter through the intermediary of 
the link, and lug which causes the said cutter 
to swing on its pivot over past the stationary 65 
male cutters which enter slots or notches G. 
formed in the movable die for their reception. 
This movable die is preferably an angular 
piece of metal generally oblong in shape, piv 
oted at the angle thereof as shown and stand- 7o 
ing in a slightly oblique position so as to con 
stitute one side of a chute or hopper H, the 
opposite side of which is formed by the fixed 
cutters, so that the admission tickets depos 
ited in the hopper, will stand on edge be" 75 
tween the fixed and movable cutters and as 
the slots or notches in the movable cutter 
are just complementary to the fixed cutters, 
the edges thereof, when the fixed cutters en 
ter said slots or notches, operate in much the 8o 
same manner as the cutting edges of a pair 
of shears to clip or cut out a number of pieces 
from the edges of the ticket corresponding 
in dimensions and relative location. With the 
fixed cutters. Obviously there may be any 85 
desired number of fixed cutters and slots ac 
cording to the degree of mutilation desirable. 
The fixed cutters A and A' are attached to 
any suitable supportin such manner as to be 
in line with each other but separated SO as 9o 
to leave a space there between for the body 
of the mutilated ticket to pass through, the 
purpose being to cut or notch only the edges 
of the ticket, as illustrated in Fig. 6, which 
leaves the ticket as a whole, intact. A con- 95 
venient means of supporting the cutters is 
shown in the drawings consisting of a later 
ally extending shank I on each upper cutter 
fitting into corresponding slots in a frame 
plate Jattached to the casing Kin which all Ioo 
5o detached. 
517,053 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
of the mechanism before described is con 
tained, the shanks being secured to the 
frame-plates by means of pins, screws, or in 
any other convenient manner so as to hold 
them rigidly in position with the cutter de 
pending below the frame-plate. The lower 
fixed cutters A are also provided with lat 
erally extending shanks which find a support 
in grooves or sockets in the frame-plate L in 
which they are secured in like manner to the 
upper cutters but with the cutter extending 
above the frame-plate and shank as clearly 
illustrated in the drawings. As an addi 
tional means of securing these lower cutters 
in position, the pivot of the movable cutter 
B extends through the frame-plate Land also 
through the head of each cutter at the point 
of conjunction there with of its shank, the 
cutter standing in the continuation of the 
slots G in the movable cutter so that the cut 
ting edges of the lower fixed cutters and the 
movable cutter form an acute angle to each 
other. 
A transverse brace M may be employed 
connecting the frame-plates J and L if desired, 
for reinforcing and strengthening the parts 
and also to serve as a support for a flap N 
pivoted thereto and so disposed as to span the 
opening between the ends of the upper and 
lower fixed cutters A and A' and thus serve 
to prevent a ticket when deposited in the 
chute H from passing through this opening 
and directly into the casing of the apparatus 
without being first mutilated. This flap is 
held yieldingly in position in any suitable 
manner so that it may be moved back and 
permit the discharge of the mutilated ticket 
after each operation, a convenient means for 
accomplishing this result being the crankarm 
O on the pivot thereof, with which is con 
nected one end of a coil spring P, the opposite 
end of which is secured to the brace Mso that 
the tension of the spring normally holds, the 
closing flap in position spanning the opening 
between the upper and lower fixed cutters. 
In the act of mutilating a ticket this flap is 
moved back out of the way by means of a pin 
or projection Q on the movable cutter, which, 
On the initial movement of the cutterstrikes 
the flap near the pivot thereof and serves to 
move it entirely clear of the fixed cutters, so 
that the ticket after being mutilated may 
drop clear of the cutters and fall into a suit 
able receptacle placed in the lower portion of 
the casing K of the apparatus. 
In order to prevent a ticket being deposited 
in the chute while the cutters are closed or 
together in the act of mutilating a ticket, I 
provide a radius-plate R of substantially the 
dimensions of the mouth of the chute attached 
to the upper edge of the movable cutter, 
which, as the cutter moves across the chute, 
closes or blinds the chute and thus effectually 
prevents the deposit of any ticket until the 
cutter has resumed its normal position, which 
it does, preferably under the influence of the 
r 
coiled spring S attached at its ends respect 
ively to the hand-lever F and the easing K 
and which will be readily understood from an 
inspection of the drawings. 
If desired, pins a such as are shown in Figs. 
1, 3 and 5, may be provided upon the movable 
jaw B near the lower end thereof to serve as 
a means for preventing any possibility of the 
ticket wedging between the stationary and 
movable cutters, although in practice such 
pins are not deemed essential. 
A mutilator constructed in accordance with 
my invention is both simple, cheap and ef 
fective in its operation, serving as it does to 
absolutely insure the mutilation of a ticket 
deposited therein before it can be discharged 
from the chute, and yet in a manner that does 
not destroy the character of the ticket and 
without any fatiguing effort on the part of 
the operator, who can mutilate a large num 
ber of tickets in rapid succession and after 
an opportunity of inspecting the tickets be 
fore being deposited in the machine. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new therein, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A ticket mutilator comprising fixed and 
movable male and female cutters one of said 
cutters being slotted for reception of the other 
and means for operating the movable cutter, 
substantially as described. 
2. A ticket mutilator comprising fixed and 
movable pivoted male and female cutters Con 
stituting a chute or hopper for reception of 
the ticket one of said cutters being slotted 
for reception of the other and means for Op 
erating said movable cutter, substantially as 
described. 
3. A ticket mutilator comprising fixed and 
movable male and female cutters, said mov 
able cutter being pivoted, one of said cutters 
being slotted for reception of the other, and a 
lever connected with, for operating said mov 
able cutter, substantially as described. 
4. A ticket mutilator comprising fixed and 
movable cutters, said fixed cutters consisting 
of two sets of independent cutters, a yielding 
flap for closing the space between Said cut 
ters and means for operating the movable 
cutter, substantially as described. 
5. A ticket mutilator comprising fixed and 
movable cutters, said fixed cutters consisting 
of two sets of independent cutters, a spring 
actuated flap for closing the space between 
said sets of fixed cutters and a projection on 
the movable cutter for engaging and displac 
ing said flap during the mutilating operation, 
substantially as described. 
6. A ticket mutilator comprising fixed and 
movable cutters constituting a chute or hop 
per for reception of the tickets, said cutters 
being inclosed within a casing, and a shield 
attached to the movable cutter for tempo 
rarily closing the opening in the casing ad 
mitting tickets between said cutters, substan 
tially as described. 
75 
IOC) 
IoS 
Id 
II5 
20 
I 25 
 
517,053 
7. A ticket mutilator comprising fixed and 
movable cutters constituting a chute for re 
ception of the tickets and contained within a 
casing, said fixed cutter consisting of two sets 
of independent cutters, a spring-actuated flap 
for closing the space between said sets of fixed 
cutters, a projection on the movable cutter for 
engaging and displacing said flap, and a shield 
for temporarily closing the opening in the 
Io casing admitting tickets between the fixed 
and movable cutters, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereofIaffix my signature, in 
presence of two witnesses, this 27th day of 
April, A.D. 1893. 
GEORGE. F. MATTESON. 
Witnesses: 
W. R. OMOHUNDRO, 
V. HUGO. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517153.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 517,153, 
 
J. BEDDOW. 
MACHINE FOR FORMING TABLETS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 27, 1894. 
WITNESSES 
(222-226/ 
IWVENTOR 
tssal (332 
----- 
 
(No Model.) 
J. BEDDOW. 
MACHINE FOR FORMING TABLETS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 517,153, 
 
Patented Mar. 27, 1894. 
 
  
 
 
 
  
(A. 
the National. Hoarara oor. 
WASNTel, c. 
, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSIAH BEDDOW, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
THOMAS W. PRICE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACH NE FOR FORMING TABLETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 51,153, dated March 27, 1894. 
Application filed November 29, 1892, Serial No. 453,550, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JosIAHBEDDow, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Phila 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia, in the 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented an Im 
proved Machine for Forming Tablets of Pa 
per of which the following is a specification. 
My inyention, although of utility in various 
applications, relates especially to mechanism 
by the aid of which a number of blanks of 
paper are, first, assembled in position in which 
Selected edges of all are even or exist in a 
common plane; second, secured in such posi 
tion, and, third, exposed as to their even edges 
to allow of the application of suitable adhe 
Sive materials to bind the blanks together to 
form tablets. 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
an apparatus of the foregoing character of 
simple and inexpensive construction, and ca 
pable of being operated with greater ease than 
Such apparatus as heretofore constructed. 
In the drawings I show and herein I de 
Scribe a good form of a convenient embodi 
ment of my invention, the particular subject 
matter claimed as novel being hereinafter 
definitely specified. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in per 
Spective of an apparatus conveniently em 
bodying my invention, and shown as resting 
upon its side, or in horizontal position. Fig. 
2 is a similar view, showing the apparatus as 
resting upon its end, or invertical position, 
and illustrating in dotted lines a slight modi 
fication in the application of the swinging 
frame. 
In the drawings, A is the main frame of the 
apparatus, consisting, in the embodiment 
illustrated, of the two end members BD, con 
nected by the two tie bars C C*. The mem 
ber B is conveniently made of a metal plate, 
and is preferably provided with three feet b 
b'b, upon the sides of two of which, namely 
bb', the apparatus rests when in the position 
illustrated in Fig. 1, and upon all of which it 
rests when in the position shown in Fig. 2. 
It also embodies bosses b through which the 
tie bars pass and beyond which said bars are . 
equipped with retaining nuts. The member 
D embodies a cross bard through bosses in 
the respective extremities of which the tie 
O 
15 
2C) 
35 
40 
45 
so 
 
bars pass and beyond which said bars are 
equipped with retaining nuts, and a leg or 
pedestald the free extremity of which, when 
the apparatus is in the position represented 
in Fig. 1, rests upon the floor and constitutes 
with the feet b b' the support for the appa 
ratus. 
B* is one of a pair of corresponding clamp 
plates, and is fixedly secured to the member 
B in a position intermediate of the tie bars. 
D* is the other of said clamp plates, and is 
movable toward and from the member B, be 
ing provided with mechanism by which it may 
be advanced and retracted at will. In the 
embodiment illustrated the clamp actuating 
mechanism consists of a screw shaft E en 
gaged in a suitably threaded aperture in the 
cross bar d, having a crank handle e, at its 
outer end, and a bearing plate e swiveled or 
otherwise mounted upon its inner end,- 
which bearing plate presents against, or is 
secured to, or may take the place of, said 
clamp member D*. 
F is a swinging trough casing, or box, 
formed by preference of a pair of plates fif' 
supported in angular relationship by means 
of V-shaped angle irons f* at their respective 
extremities, and preferably arranged so that 
their contiguous edges are some little dis 
tance from each other to leave a central slot.f. 
One extremity of each of the angle irons f* 
is extended beyond the trough box or swing 
ing casing to form a lug f, and these lugs 
are each provided with an aperture through 
which the tie bar C* passes, so that the trough 
is mounted in hinged relation to the main 
frame. 
To lock the trough in the position shown in 
Fig. 1, and which I term its closed position, I 
provide the following fastening devices: At 
the apex of each of the angle irons f* is 
formed an aperture g', and in the end mem 
bers B D are formed apertures h with any of 
which the apertures g', when the trough is in 
closed or nearly closed position, are adapted 
to be placed in registry. g g are a pair of 
chains, both secured to a staple or eye mount 
ed upon the trough about midway of the 
length of the latter, and each provided at its 
free extremity with a bolt, which bolts are 
adapted to be inserted one through the aper 
55 
75 
go 
95 
CO 
517,153 
ture g in the iron f* and a corresponding 
aperture h in the end member B, and the 
other through the aperture g in the other 
iron f and a corresponding apertureh in the 
end member D. By the provision of the se 
ries of aperturesh, as will be understood, the 
trough may be locked in such closed position 
of adjustment as the form and size of the 
blanks operated upon may render desirable. 
The operation of the apparatus will be read 
ily understood. To place the apparatus in 
gondition to receive the blanks, it is arranged 
in its horizontal position, or that illustrated 
in Fig. 1, the trough is secured by the bolts 
described in closed position, and the clamp 
plates are opened, that is to say, the movable 
clamp plate is by the rotation of the screw E 
to the left withdrawn from the fixed clamp 
plate. The blanks are deposited in the trough 
and between the clamp members, with the 
binding edges downward so as to present said 
binding edges against the inner faces of the 
trough, and to allow of the projection of the 
blank corners through the opening f' in said 
trough. When the blanks are all in position, 
the screw shaft E is rotated to advance the 
movable clamp member D* and compress the 
blanks between it and the fixed member B. 
Thereupon the machine is lifted from the 
horizontal position it is illustrated as occupy 
ing in Fig. 1 in which it rests upon the feet 
bb and the pedestal d, to the vertical po 
sition which it is shown as occupying Fig. 2, 
in which it rests upon the feet bib' b, and in 
which last mentioned position, the mass of 
blanks rest one upon another, and naturally 
tend to maintain themselves in position with 
out the external assistance of the clamp plates. 
When the apparatus is thus in upright posi 
tion, the bolts are withdrawn from their aper 
tures g h and the trough swung on the tie 
bar C* as a pivot to its open position, as shown 
in Fig. 2, thus exposing the binding edges of 
the blanks in convenient position for the ap 
plication of the paste or other binding me 
dium employed. After the paste has been 
applied, the blanks may upon the loosening 
of the clamp plate D* be removed at the con 
venience of the operator. 
In Fig. 2 of the drawings I illustrate in 
dotted lines a slight modification in the ap 
plication of the trough, which modification 
consists in providing each of the frames B D 
With a lateral extension I, each provided with 
a stud i, upon which studs the lugs f of the 
trough may be mounted in case it is not de 
sired to have said lugs mounted upon the tie 
bar C*. In connection with the employment 
of the extensions I and studs i it will be nec 
essary to slightly lengthen the lugs f of the 
trough, and to slightly curve them to enable 
their clearance of the bar C*. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a tablet clamp, in combination: a rigid 
main frame adapted to occupy at will either 
a horizontal or a vertical position, a trough, 
one edge of which is in permanent hinged 
engagement with the adjacent portion of the 
main frame, so that said trough is, when the 
apparatus is in vertical position, adapted to 
be swung away from sheets contained in the 
apparatus without being manually lifted from 
said apparatus, a movable plate adapted to 
bear against sheets contained in the trough, 
and a clamp screw mounted in one end of the 
main frame and adapted to occasion the ad 
vance of the said plate, substantially as Set 
forth. 
2. In a tablet clamp in combination: a rigid 
main frame adapted to occupy at will either 
a horizontal or a vertical position, a trough 
mounted upon and in hinged relationship 
with respect to said main frame, means for 
locking said trough in various positions of 
adjustment with respect to the main frame, 
a pair of plates adapted to clamp sheets be 
tween them, and a clamp screw mounted in 
one end of the frame and adapted to occasion 
the advance or retraction of one of the clamp 
plates, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a tablet clamp, in combination: a rigid 
main frame consisting of two end plates Con 
nected by tie bars, and adapted to occupy at 
will either a horizontal or vertical position, a 
trough mounted upon and in hinged relation 
ship with respect to said main frame, aper 
tures in said end plates, and an aperture in 
each end of the trough adapted to be carried 
into registry with the apertures of the end 
plates in succession, pins adapted to engage 
in said apertures, a pair of plates adapted to 
clamp the tablet sheets between them, one of 
said plates being fixed and the other adjust 
able, and a clamp screw mounted in one of 
the end plates and engaged with the movable 
clamp plate, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as . 
my invention I have hereunto signed my name 
this 31st day of May, A. D. 1892. 
JOSIAH BEDDOW. 
In presence of 
WM. C. STRAWBRIDGE, 
F. NORMAN DIXON. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
I o5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517255.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 517,255, 
 
C. L. WORK 
BOOK SUPPORT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 27, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 517,255, 
C. L. WORK. 
BOOK SUPPORT. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 27, 1894, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES L. WORK, OF DAYTON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO ALLEN 
E. THOMAS, OF SAME PLACE. 
BOOK-SUPPORT, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 517,255, dated March 27, 1894. 
Application filed January 6, 1892, Serial No. 417,213, (No model.) 
I5 mits of practically universal application. 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs L. WoRK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Day 
ton, in the county of Montgomery and State 
5 of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
fullmprovements in Book-Supports, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates primarily to improve 
ments in Swinging and adjustable book-hold 
Io ers or supports for attachment to a desk, bed 
stead or chair, and its particular object is to 
provide a convenient holder for large books, 
such as dictionaries and other works of ref. 
erence, though its plan of construction ad 
The invention consists in various combina 
tions and details of construction relating to 
that end, as hereinafter set forth and de 
Scribed. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 shows in perspec 
tive a holder embodying my invention, sup 
ported on a bracket attached to a chair, so 
that a person sitting in a chair and reading 
may, When desired, swing the bracket carry 
25 ing the holder and book, so as to bring the 
book immediately in front of him or to his 
side. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the holder; 
Fig. 8, an elevation from the end correspond 
ing to the top of the book; Fig. 4, an end 
3o View, showing the sides open and the posi 
tion of the various parts when so opened. 
Fig. 5 is a plan view of a holder with the sides 
Opened. 
As represented in the drawings, the holder 
35 consists of the back, A, and the lids, B, made 
of Wood or any other suitable material, se 
curely hinged together as shown. The back 
is slightly concave that a book may the bet 
terfit therein. Cleats, b, are fastened to the 
4o inside of the lids, and at or near the bottom 
thereof, for the purpose of acting as rests and 
preventing the book from sliding down out 
of the holder, said cleats also serving this 
further purpose, to wit: they are so made and 
45 adjusted that when the sides of the holder 
are closed the inner ends, b', of these cleats 
strike against the upper surface of the back, 
or a projection thereof, as shown in Fig. 2, 
thus forming a positive stop, preventing 
 
55 
movement of the lids inwardly beyond a cer- 5o 
tain distance, which will, of course, gener 
ally be such that the sides, when closed, will 
be parallel to each other. A coiled retraction 
spring, C, is attached to the sides by means 
of hook-plates, c, fastened thereto so as to 
project over the lower edgethereof. When 
the lids are opened this spring is drawn into 
tension and will, except where they are fully 
opened, urge them to close and insure the 
operation of the lock-braces, hereinafter de 
scribed. To the outside of the lids are fas 
tened stop-bars, c', which are so constructed 
and arranged that, when the lids are opened, 
these stops will strike against the edges of 
the back, thus preventing the lids opening 
beyond a certain distance, usually so that 
they are in the same plane. 
In order to hold the lids and, thus, the book 
securely closed, I have provided the lock 
braces, D, pivoted to the stop-bars at d, as 
shown. The outer ends of said lock braces 
are shouldered as at d, and these shoulders, 
when the lids are fully closed, are caused by 
means of the stress of the coiled springs, d, 
to engage with the brace-rod, E, against which 
the edges of said lock-braces are constantly 
held by the tension of said springs, whatever 
their position so that the shoulders instantly 
snap behind the rod when the lids are closed 
and lock the latter instantly and securely in 
the closed position. To prevent the lock 
braces from sliding laterally along said rod, 
which would increase their liability to bend, 
collarse, are attached to the rod on each side 
of the contacting point of said braces, as 
shown. This brace-rod extends, as shown, 
from the journal or upstanding pivot upon 
which the back revolves, in a direction trend 
ing longitudinally of said back, to the upper 
end thereof and is there rigidly secured, its 
location being practically within a central 
plane intersecting the axis of the pivot and 
parallel with and equidistant from the inner 
faces or sides of the lids when they are closed. 
When it is desired to open the holder lids, 
the braces are thrown out of engagement with 
the brace-rod by means of disengaging levers, 
F, which are likewise pivoted to the stop 
95 
- 
75 
2 
517,255 
readily be understood from the foregoing de 
scription. 
I claim 
1. The combination substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the back and lids, the 
brace-rod beneath the back, the shouldered 
brace-levers pivoted to the lids and meeting 
against the brace-rod, and means holding said 
levers against the brace-rod whereby the 
shoulders catch over the rod when the lids 
are closed. 
2. The combination substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the back, the lids, the 
brace-rod beneath the back and longitudinal 
thereof and extending from the journal to the 
upper end of said back, the shouldered brace 
levers pivoted to the lids and resting against 
the brace - rod, means holding said level's 
against the brace-rod, and collars on the brace 
rod to prevent lateral displacement of the 
brace-levers. 
3. The combination substantially as herein 
before set forth, with the back and lids of a 
book-holder, of the shouldered brace-levers 
pivoted to the lids, the central brace-rod at 
which these levers meet and cross, springs 
holding said levers against the brace - rod 
whereby their shoulders catch over the brace 
rod when the lids are closed, and disengaging 
levers for throwing the shoulders out of en 
gagement to permit them to slide past each 
other with the opening of the lids. 
4. The combination substantially as herein 
before set forth, with the book-holder, of the 
central brace-rod rigidly secured near the up 
per part of its back and having a thimble in 
alignment with the socket upon said back, 
the sustaining bracket having a journal en 
tering said thimble and socket, and the brace 
levers pivoted to the lids and meeting at and 
engaging with said brace-rod. 
5. The combination substantially as herein 
before set forth, with the shouldered brace 
levers, of the central brace-rod serving both 
as a catch for said shoulders and also as a lon 
gitudinal brace for the back of the holder. 
6. The combination substantially as herein 
before set forth, with the brace-levers pivoted 
to the lids, central brace-rod upon which said 
levers meet, and disengaging levers, of stops 
for the latter to prevent them from departing 
from the operating position. 
7. The combination substantially as herein 
before set forth, of the back, the lids, the stops 
on the outer sides of said lids, arranged to 
come in contact with the edges of the back, 
the brace-levers pivoted to the lids, the cen 
tral brace-rod upon which said levers meet, 
and the disengaging levers. 
CHAS. L. WORK, 
Witnesses: 
STEPHEN T. BRYCE, 
DANIEL K. ALLISON. 
75 
90 
OC 
O 
O 
bars, the same pivot being used both for the 
braces and the disengaging levers. These le 
vers are provided with lugs or pins, f, at their 
lower or ends beyond the fulcrum, which are 
5 so placed that, when the inner ends of saidle 
vers are pressed toward the lids, said pins 
strike the lock-braces, below where they are 
pivoted, and raise them out of engagement 
with the brace-rod. The lids of the holder 
may then be opened and the book in the 
holder rendered accessible. The disengaging 
levers being pivoted low down upon the lids, 
with a great disproportion between power and 
weight arms, the tendency is for them to fall 
outward away from the sides of the holder, 
rendering them unhandy for use and expos 
ing them to breakage from being struck. To 
obviate this, I place stop pins, f', upon the 
stop-bars below the pivots so as to retain then 
in working position. It is of course essential 
that the brace rod be rigid and that its posi 
tion be fixed, in order to insure the engage 
ment of the lock-levers or braces there with. 
To render said rod thus rigid and stationary, 
one end thereof is fastened to the back of the 
book-holder, the other end being secured in 
position by means of a thimble, g, attached 
thereto and adjusted to align with the socket, 
G, for and to fit the upstanding journal, g', 
of the bracket, G', carrying said holder. As 
thus arranged it serves as a support or brace 
to the upper part of the back of the holder. 
I do not desire, however, so far as the lock 
levers are concerned, to limit myself to this 
particular construction, as any device that 
will afford a rigid and fixed support to said 
lock-levers will answer. 
It is often desirable to attach a swinging 
book-holder to a chair for the use of an in 
valid or for a student, or to the side of a desk, 
and I have therefore represented the brack 
ets for the use of my book-holder with forked 
arms, g, g, each of them having, at the outer 
end, a downwardly bent pintle, g, the two 
45 pintles being practically in line with each 
other so that they may enter sockets, g, on 
the arms and body of the chair, or upon any 
other support, and may be lifted out thereof. 
The upper fork of the bracket, it will be ob 
served, is nearly or quite horizontal, while 
the lower is inclined, merging into the upper 
adjacent to the upstanding journal, and serv 
ing as a brace. It will therefore be steady 
and can be swung in the sockets into what 
ever position desired, while the holder may 
be swung upon its own journal on the bracket 
so as to place the book properly before the 
reader's eyes, notwithstanding any attitude 
or posture he may assume. The sockets will 
not necessarily be of any great size and will 
hardly be noticeable whenever the bracket is 
removed or lifted out from them. 
The application of the holder to a desk will 
55 
3o 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517355.txt	(No Model.) 
L. M. MILLEN. 
MACHINE FOR CRIBBING CORN. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 517,355. 
 
Patented Mar. 27, 1894, 
A.: 
 
h 
l 
- 7 
A 
7% 
 
 
/ 
L W 
7 
l 
I 
3 
(No Model.) 
No. 517,355, 
 
L. M. MILLEN. 
MACHINE FOR CRIBBING CORN, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
Patented Mar, 27, 1894. 
 
st-Rei 
 
s 
S 
She 
S 
3 
es N 
NAS 
N 
THE MAtional Lithograpki Na comPAMr. 
sfascistd. . 
. 
 
(No Model.) 
L. M. MILLEN. 
MACHINE FOR CRIBBING CORN, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 517,355, 
Patented Mar, 27, 1894. 
  
 
628) -1 casca : 
y-17, 
4. 
s 2 
w 
A S3 
% 
areasessessesseeSat P 
Y- 
(S 
s 
 
 
eittozia is . 
toNAL LITHographins copy 
WASHINGTON, c. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LODRICK M. MILLEN, OF ELWOOD, NEBRASKA. 
MACHINE FOR CRIBBNG coRN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 517,355, dated March 27, 1894. 
Application filed May 5, 1893, Serial No. 473,157, (No model.) 
IO 
55 
. . 
. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LODRICK M. MILLEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at El 
wood, in the county of Gosper and State of 
Nebraska, have invented a new and useful 
Machine for Cribbing Corn, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention has for its object the produc 
tion of a portable machine designed to be ar. 
ranged alongside a corn-crib and to receive 
and elevate ear-corn to the crib; to construct 
the machine in a cheap and simple manner 
and so as to expedite the cribbing of the corn; 
and to provide for an automatic dumping, 
whereby the necessity of several operators or 
attendants for the purpose of operating the 
machine is avoided. 
Various other objects and advantages of the 
invention will appear in the following de 
Scription, and the novel features thereof will 
be particularly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings:-Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of a machine constructed in 
accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical transverse sectional view through the 
Fig. 3 is a transverse, 
tower and cage or car. 
sectional view through the drive-way illus 
trating the Wagon dumping-mechanism. Fig. 
4 is a vertical longitudinal sectional view. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
It will be understood that the construction 
of the frame and arrangement of the timbers 
for the support of the machine maybe changed 
at Will, as may also other details of construc 
tion not necessary to specifically mention; 
and I would therefore state at the beginning 
of the specification that I do not limit my in 
vention to such precise arrangement of de 
tails as I herein show and describe, but hold 
that I may vary the same to any degree and 
extent within the knowledge of the skilled 
mechanic. For the purpose, however, of illus 
tration, I will proceed to describe a simple 
form of framework which I consider as best. 
adapted to the circumstances of the case. 
1-1 designate a pair of opposite longitudi 
nal parallel base-sills of suitable length, by 
which is meant a length considerably longer 
than a wagon and team of horses, and at 
points at each side of the center thereof Iar 
range short vertical studding 2, connecting 
the same by means of upper sills 3, longitudi 
nally arranged, and in turn supporting above 
the studs transverse sleepers 4. Supported 
by the sleepers 4 are floor-beams 5, and simi 
lar beams 6 decline from the outer or end 
sleepers 4 to the outer ends of the sills1. The 
floor-beams 5 and 6 support an ordinary floor 
7, and at the opposite sides thereof a guard 
or hand-rail 8 is located. The two sleepers 
4 at one end of the framework have located 
intermediate the floor-beams 5 two pairs of 
longitudinal beams 9, the beams of each pair 
being arranged a slight distance apart, and 
pivoted between their ends between these 
pairs of beams 9, as indicated at 10, is a pair 
of levers 12, whose outer ends are connected 
by a transverse platform 13. 
A pair of transversely opposite bearings 14 
are located in the under sides of the upper 
sills 3, immediately in rear of the rear or in 
ner ends of the levers 12, which I will term 
dumping-levers. These bearings have 
journaled therein a transverse rock-shaft 15, 
and from said rock-shaft extends a pair of 
short beveled rock-arms 16, which, when the 
levers 12 are elevated, take under the free 
ends of the same and support said levers in 
position flush with the drive-way or floor 7. 
The rock-shaft, however, may be oscillated so 
that its rock-arms 16 are withdrawn from 
their supporting position under the levers 12, 
whereupon said levers 12 are capable of be 
ing depressed at their rear or inner ends be 
low the plane of the floor or drive-way. For 
the purpose of accomplishing such unlocking 
of the lovers I provide the rock-shaft with an 
operating rock-arm 17, and extend from the 
free end of the same up through a perfora 
tion in the floor an operating-rope 18 termi 
nating in a suitable hand-hold or loop. 
Arranging the two driveways at opposite 
sides of an intermediate point of the frame 
work, it will be seen that a space occurs be 
tween the inner ends of said ways, which 
space is rectangular in plan, and I support 
I upon the sills 1 at the four corners of the 
space the four posts 19 of a vertical tower. 
The posts 19 are connected at their upper 
ends by a suitable framing of ordinary con 
struction, and from the central portion there 
of there depends a sheave 20, through which 
an elevator rope 21 passes, the same also pass 
35 
4o 
45 
so 
75. 
95 
Ioo 
517,355 
75 
90 
95 
- 
. 
IO 
25 
ing through a lower sheave 21, which is pro 
vided at its lower end with a hook 22. The 
rope 21 passes over suitable guide pulley's 23 
located in the tower and on the floor or drive 
Way, and finally terminates in a hook 24 de 
signed to be engaged with the axle or other 
part of the running gear of a wagon, said rope 
and its adjuncts constituting a fall. 
25 designates a car, which is located for ver 
tical movement in the tower, and said car is 
provided at its four corners with angular re 
cesses for loosely embracing the posts 19 of 
the tower. The car has pivoted at one end 
by a rod 26, a swinging bottom 27, the same 
having opposite side-walls adapted to close 
within the side-walls of the car. The posi 
tion of the bottom pivot-rod .26 may be 
changed from that shown, that is, employed 
for pivoting the opposite end of the bottom 
in position, so that the car is capable of dump 
ing at either side, and for such purpose the 
catch-mechanism together with the devices 
for releasing the same are duplicated at each 
side of the car. The ends of the bottom are 
provided with pins. 28, and the ends of the car. 
have secured thereto spring-catches 29, whose; 
lower or shouldered ends -30 are beveled 
so: as to ride over the pins, 28 before engag 
ing the same. Levers 31 are pivoted as at 32 
to the ends of the car, and have their upper 
ends outwardly bent as at .33. A limiting 
bail of inverted U-shape and designated as 
34 is secured to the upper edges of the sides 
of the bottom, and at its upper corners is 
reversely bent as at 35 to form stops, where 
by the drop of the bottom is limited by rea 
son of the stops contacting with the upper 
edges of the sides of the car. A bracket 
frame. 36 extends outward from the opposite 
sides of the tower and into the path of the 
lateral projection or bent end of the lever 31, 
so that when the car has reached a sufficient 
elevation the upper bent end of the lever 31 
contacting with the bracket will cause said 
lever to oscillate, and inasmuch as the latter 
bears at its lower end against the spring 
catch, said spring-catch will be forced to one 
-side against its own tendency and from un 
der the pin 28 of the bottom of the car, there 
so 
by permitting said bottom to drop and the 
contents of the car to be discharged from one 
side thereof. As before stated, by the dupli 
cation of this mechanism at the oppositeside 
of the car and an interchanging of the pivot 
pin of the bottom from one side of the car to 
the other, the car is adapted to deliver at 
either-side thereof. 
: 
The top of the car, which forms a continu 
ation of the driveway when the caris in its 
lowered position, is provided with an open 
ing 39, and the same is covered by a door. 40. 
At one-side of the door, or, in other words, at 
the center of the car a ring 41 is located, the 
same being designed to be engaged remov 
ably by the hook 22 of the lower sheave or 
This completes the construction of the de 
pulley-block, 
4o 
35 
45 
. 
" 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
vice, with the exception of suitable trans 
porting rollers 42 with which the sills 1 are pro 
vided. These rollers are preferably mounted 
upon bell crank levers 43, which are pivoted 
at their angles to the sills and are designed 
to be so manipulated as to depress the roll 
rers and thus elevate the structure and Sup 
port it thereon, or, to elevate the rollers and 
lower the structure so that the latter rests 
solidly upon the sills. In either of their po 
sitions the upper bent ends of the levers act 
as stops by contacting with the upper edges 
of the sills so the rollers are supported either 
above or below the lower edges of the sills. 
When the rollers are depressed and the struct 
ure elevated, transportation is rendered easy, 
as will be obvious. 
The car being lowered to position upon the 
sills 1, a team for hauling the corn is driven 
up the incline of the driveway' opposite to 
that portion, thereof in which the dumping 
levers are located, and, crossing the car, coll 
tinues its travel, until the hind-wheels of the 
wagon rest upon the rear ends of the dump 
ing-levers 12. The trap-door of the car is now 
opened and the operator grasping the rope 
18 draws the same upward, thus withdrawing 
the rock-arms 16 from under the rear ends of 
the dumping levers and permitting the wagon 
to tilt or dump, its contents, falling from 
thence through the opening in the car; and 
into the latter. 
The hook 22 is now con 
nected to the eye, or ring in the car, and the 
hook 24 of the elevator rope connected to the 
rear axle of the wagon, after which the teain 
is started. The weight of the wagon upon 
the outer ends of the dumping levers 12 causes 
the latter to be depressed and thus: the inner 
ends of said levers elevated, where they are 
caught by the rock-arms, which fall to posi 
tion thereunder. Through the medium of 
the elevating rope the car is raised in the 
manner heretofore described, and the trip 
lever 31 coming in contact with the trip 
bracket disconnects the spring-catch from the 
pin of the bottom and permits the bottom to 
fall or drop, forming an inclined chute for 
discharging the corn into the crib, alongside 
of which it is understood the structure is ar 
ranged. When this has been: accomplished, 
the elevator rope is disconnected from the 
wagon, and the car permitted to drop back or 
lower to position. . 
1From the foregoing description, in connee. 
tion with the accompanying drawings, it will 
be seen that I have provided an exceedingly 
cheap-and-simple machine for elevating and 
discharging ears of corn into a crib, and that 
the operations of dumping, televating, and 
discharging are all accomplished with fa 
cility and dispatch. 
; 
Having described rmy invention, what I 
1. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination with a driveway, having a 
recess, of an intermediate tower arranged 
within the recess, a car mounted for vertical 
claim;is- 
. . . 
' ' ' ' ' 
. . . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
: 
- 
55 
Od 
I o5 
o 
IIS 
(25 
 
517,855 
5 
O 
movement in the tower, a fall secured to the 
tower and adapted to removably engage the 
car, a reversible bottom arranged in the car, 
a rod for pivoting said bottom to either end 
of the car, said car and bottom having corre 
Sponding end-perforations opposite catches 
secured to the ends of the car for engaging the 
bottom, and opposite levers for operating the 
catches, substantially as specified. 
2. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination with a driveway having a re 
cess, of an intermediate tower arranged within 
the recess, a car mounted for vertical move 
ment in the tower, a fall secured to the tower 
and adapted to removably engage the car, a 
pivoted bottom, means for locking the same 
in position, and an inverted U-shaped bailse 
cured to the bottom and extending above the 
sides of the car, and having its opposite cor 
ners laterally bent to form stops for engaging 
Said sides, substantially as specified. 
8. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination with the tower thereof, a car 
mounted for movement therein and means 
for raising and lowering the car, of a bottom 
pivoted to the car, a pin extending outwardly 
from the bottom, a beveled and shouldered 
Spring-catch secured to the end of the car, a 
lever pivoted to the end of the car, having its 
upper end laterally bent, and its lower end 
contacting with the latch, and a trip-bracket 
extending from the tower into the path of the 
upper bent end of the lever, substantially as 
specified. 
4. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination with a driveway having a re 
cess, of an intermediate tower arranged within 
the recess, a car mounted for vertical move 
ment in the tower, a fall secured to the tower. 
and adapted to removably engage the car, 
means for discharging the contents of the 
car, a ring upon the upper side of the car for 
engaging the fall, which latter terminates in 
a hook, guide pulleys, a hook arranged upon 
the end of the elevating rope and adapted to 
55 
engage with the running-gear of a Wagon, and 
a trap-door located in the upper side of the 
car and covering an opening therein, substan 
tially as specified. 
5. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination with a drive Way, a tower, an 
elevator car arranged for movement therein, 
and means for raising, lowering, and discharg 
ing the contents of the car, of openingsformed 
in the driveway, a pair of dumping levers piv 
oted between their ends in the openings, and 
means for temporarily locking the levers in 
an elevated position, substantially as speci 
fied. 
6. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination with a driveway, a tower, an 
elevator car arranged for movement therein, 
and means for raising, lowering and discharg 
ing the contents of the car, of openings formed 
in the driveway, a pair of dumping levers piv- 65 
oted between their ends in the openings, a 
transverse rock-shaft arranged under the in 
ner ends of the levers, rock-arms extending 
from the rock-shaft and adapted to support 
said inner ends of the levers, an operating 
rock-arm extending from the shaft, and an 
operating rod connected to the rock-arm and 
extending up through the floor of the drive 
way, substantially as specified. 
. 7. An apparatus of the class described hav 
ing lower base-sills combined with bell-crank 
levers pivoted to said sills, the upper ends of 
the levers being laterally bent to engage and 
bear on the sills when the levers are thrown 
in one direction, and rollers journaled in 
the lower ends of the levers, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
LODRICK M. MILLEN. 
75 
Witnesses: 
m 
MATHEW B. REID, 
A. M. WHITE. 
25 
3o 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517455.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 517,455. 
G. B. HENRY. 
SECONDARY CELL, OR, BATTERY. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1894. 
 
Ny 
NS 
42 
a 
Ya 
e 
A. 
a 
- 
y 
:-2: 
'...'1-21, 1a, 
Ny. 
2, 
4-yay'ss NSxS. 
- HIS v S.S. 
S. 
y 
- 2. ' 
. 
 
  
2. 
22222222 
e 
As 
rtiz stateNat Tiogaria coran Y, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE B. HENRY, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
SECON DARY CEL OR BATERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 517,455, dated April 3, 1894. 
Application filed June 21, 1893. Serial No,478,35l. (No model.) 
My improved cell is charged in the usual 65 
O 
To all whom, it may concerta: . 
Beit known that I, GEORGE B. HENRY, of 
Hartford, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Secondary Cells 
or Batteries, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, whereby any one 
skilled in the art can make and use the same. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
secondary battery, also known as a storage 
cell or accumulator, in which the several 
plates shall be made of a material not liable 
to buckle and increase the resistance of the 
cells as in the case where lead plates are used; 
and a further object is to produce a more ef 
fective cell of less weight and cost as com 
pared with prior batteries of this class. 
To this end my invention consists in the de 
tails of the several elements making up the 
battery and in the combination of such ele 
ments and parts as more particularly herein 
after described and pointed out in the claims. 
The drawing is a view in central cross sec 
tion of a cell showing the arrangement of the 
several elements. 
In the accompanying drawing the letter a 
denotes one of the plates and b the other plate 
of the cell which are arranged in an electro 
lyte c, the two plates occupying a position at 
suitable distance apart when supported with 
in the cell. These plates are preferably com 
posed of vegetable carbon produced by car 
bonizing a pasty mass of material, such as 
wheat, and barley or the like, moistened and 
then pressed to shape. Coke carbon may be 
used if desired but I prefer the vegetable car 
bon for the reason that it is more porous and 
in use emits less gas. The lowerplatebiscov 
ered with a paste b' of chloride of lead which 
may be produced by treating red lead with 
nitric and hydrochloric acid. One of the 
terminals d is secured to the carbon, as by 
soldering it onto a metallic covered surface, 
and then extends through the electrolyte, be 
ing insulated by a rubber cover. The other 
plate is suspended from a cover or supporte 
by means of a tubular piece of metal f to 
which the other terminal g is secured, as by 
soldering. The electrolyte c is made up of a 
gelatinous mass of flaxseed produced by boil 
ing the seed in Water to a proper consistency 
and then allowing it to cool and stiffen and 
then stirring into it a solution of sulphuric 
acid in Water. This spongy mass is poured 
into a vessel and surrounds both the plates. 
The advantages of this construction of cell 
reside in the lessening of the weight in the 
use of the carbon plates, in the freedom from 
buckling and consequent prevention of any 
increase in the resistance within the cell by 
such buckling; in the greater capacity of the 
plates and increase of electro motive force 
and also in the cheapness of manufacture as 
compared with the battery of the prior art. 
manner by the passage of a charging current 
in one direction through the cell and in use 
it is discharged in the opposite direction. 
In the preparation of the lower or active 
plate b by taking oxide of lead, known as red 
lead, and subjecting it to the action of equal 
parts of concentrated or chemically pure ni 
tric and hydrochloric acids, chloride of lead 
is precipitated; then subjecting this chemi 
cal to heat about 300 or more Fahrenheit a 
suboxide is produced in a chemically pure 
state. This is pulverized when cold and sifted 
over the carbon plate b placed at the bottom 
of the cell. 
In preparing the coating b' of the active or 
lower plate b the ingredients have been com 
bined in the following proportions, but these 
proportions may be varied without departing 
from the invention: To one pound of red lead 
one-eighth of a pound each of concentrated 
hydrochloric and nitric acid are used, a plate 
thus constructed being of great efficiency and 
practically indestructible. The best results 
have been found to accrue by the use of sul 
phuric acid, composing in part the electro 
lyte, having a density of about 1,100 as in 
dicated by a hydrometer. 
The actions and reactions occurring during 
charging and discharging areas follows: The 
electric current enters from the positive pole 
of the dynamo through the terminal g to the 
upper plate a from whence it passes through 
the electrolyte c to the active material. b 
(chloride of lead) which is smeared on the 
plate b. This action of the electric current 
passes through the acid, changes the mole 
cules, and the density of the acid is thereby 
increased. From the plate b the electric cur 
rent passes back to the negative pole of the 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
 
517,455 
IO 
dynamo through the terminald. The imme 
diate result of the action of the electric cur 
rent on the active material b' that is in the 
form of a sub-oxide solidifies the lead and 
changes it to a black oxide, this causing the 
plate to operate as an active plate of the cell 
on discharging. On discharging, the Sulphu 
ric acid acting on the oxide of the active plate 
changes the oxide back to its natural state 
thereby generating an electric current that 
passes through the electrolyte to the top plate 
and out through a terminal g and back by 
the usual connection through the terminal g, 
this direction of the current being reversed 
from the direction used in charging the bat 
tery. The reaction of the electric current on 
discharging reduces the density of the sul 
phuric acid back to 1,100, indicated by hy 
drometer. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a secondary cell or battery in combi 
25 
nation the plates with their terminals, and an 
electrolyte composed of a spongy mass of flax 
seed mixed with dilute sulphuric acid, all 
substantially as described. 
2. In a secondary cell in combination an 
electrolyte, and plates composed of a mass of 
vegetable carbon, one of the plates being pro 
vided with a layer of chloride of lead, all sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a secondary cell in combination an 
electrolyte composed of a spongy mass of flax 
seed and a solution of sulphuric acid sus 
pended therein, plates composed of a vege 
table carbon, a coating of chloride of lead on 35 
one of the plates, and the terminals, all sub 
stantially as described. 
GEORGE B, IIENRY. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. T. BURDETT, 
J. A. CANTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517555.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 517,555, 
I. H. REED. 
DETACHABLE STOCK FOR HAND FIREARMs. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1894 
() 
S s 
28i-tucose 
4//i.e., 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IRWIN H. REED, OF LEADVILLE, COLORADO. 
DETAC HABE STOCK FOR HAND - F REARM. S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 517,555, dated April 3, 1894. 
Application filed November 2, 1893, Serial No. 489,820, (No model.) 
On the outer ends of pins b are the thumb 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, IRVIN.H. REED, a citizen pieces b fitting closely onto the metal of the 
of the United States, residing at Leadville, in enlargement and having shoulders on their 
front edges whereby the same may be moved 
the county of Lake and State of Colorado, 
back by the thumb and one finger and there 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
On the lower end of 
provements in Detachable Stock Connections by withdraw the bolt. 
the cross-bar B is a forwardly extending arm 
for Hand-Firearms, of which the following is a 
D having an upturned end D'. On this end 
Specification, reference being had therein to 
is a fixed inwardly extending lug d and on 
the accompanying drawings. 
the arm intermediate its end is an in Wardly 
This invention relates to an improvement 
extending lug d'. The lugs did register with 
in detachable stock connections for hand fire 
and enter the sockets a-a' respectively While 
arms and it consists in the construction and 
the bolt C registers with the socket a, of the 
arrangement of parts hereinafter described 
and definitely pointed out in the claim. 
revolver handle. 
In applying the stock the lug dis inserted 
The aim and purpose of this invention is 
in the socket a, the handle being at an in 
the provision of improved means for quickly 
cline, the handle of the pistol is forced down, 
and accurately attaching and detaching a 
the bolt engaging the rear thereof and being 
stock to and from a pistol or revolver handle 
forced in until the lug d' is seated in the 
Or grip. 
socket a' and the bolt registers with the socket 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
a when the same is immediately forced into 
panying drawings wherein like letters of ref 
the socket by the spring. To detach the stock 
erence indicate corresponding parts in the 
the bolt is withdrawn and the handle tilted 
Several views, and in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of the stockin place. 
forward. 
It is evident that slight changes in the de 
Fig. 2 is alongitudinal section of the connect 
vice may be made and substituted for those 
ing portion of the same and Fig. 3 is an ele 
Vation illustrating the grip in the process of 
herein shown and described. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what 
being applied. 
is claimed as new, and desired to be secured 
In the drawings. A represents the pistol or 
by Letters Patent, is 
revolver grip, formed with a socket a in its 
In a detachable stock for hand fire arms the 
front near the lower edge, a socket Ct' in its 
combination with a hand grip of the fire arm, 
base and a socket a in its rear at a point 
having sockets a-a' and atherein, of a stock 
above the plane of socket a. 
having a connection section consisting of at 
B represents the detachable stock consist 
taching side bars, the upper bar having an 
ing of the stock proper and the metallic con 
enlargement at its forward end formed With 
necting portions B. This connecting portion 
a longitudinal chamber therein, and elongated 
consists of an integral frame having a lower 
slots in its sides, a spring actuated bolt in the 
barb which extends back, is embedded in the 
chamber, pins on the bolt extending through 
stock and there secured. The upper bar b' 
the slots, thumb-pieces on the pins, an arm 
of the frame is carried back and secured to 
extending forward from the lower bar, formed 
the stock in a manner similar to the under 
with an upturned forward end and fixed in 
bar. At the forward end of barb' is an en 
Wardly extending lugs on the extension and 
largement bhaving a cylindrical, longitudi 
upturned end adapted to enter the sockets in 
nal opening therein in which a sliding bolt C 
the handles, substantially as described. 
is placed its end projecting through an aper 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
ture in the front bar Bof the connecting por 
presence of two witnesses. 
tion. This bolt has a spring bat its rear 
which is held in place and adjusted by a 
screw plug b in the end of the cylindrical 
opening. In the sides of this enlargement b 
are formed elongated slots b through which 
suitable pins b pass and engage the bolt, 
A. LYNCH, 
S. E. ABBOTT. 
IRWIN H. REED. 
Witnesses: 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517655.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 517,655, 
 
W. McCLOSKEY. 
HARWESTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1894. 
 
 
 
S 
al 
X 
- 
s easy1 
Ayr 
S. 
AA  Azyaz AN NA. s y A: 7W 
s % N XY &= y 
\ S-NVy2KSV SS 
SyN 
s 
 
W 
WITNESSES 
- a-4, 
-- 27.2/ 
IW/EW7063 
424.7% C 
4, 2. 24ttorneys. 
THE NATONAL THOGRAPHING COMPANY 
WAs4tNGTON, O, C, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 517,655. 
W. McCLOSKEY. 
HARVESTER. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1894, 
2%.9. 
A 
WITWESSES 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 517,655. 
W. MoCLOSKEY. 
HARVESTER, . . . . . 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1894. 
 
 
  
26. 
S s 
s 
N 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITWESSES 
-%-64% 
Ivvavitoge 
by %-%a 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM McCLOSKEY, OF ESSEX, CANADA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO ALEM 
- 
- 
J. GREEN, OF SAME PLACE. 
- 
HARVESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 517,655, dated April 3, 1894. 
v 
Application filed June 12, 1893, Serial No, 477,285, (No model.) 
It rises therefrom, and, being 55 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM McCLOSKEY, 
This drum is shown in detail in Fig. 9. 7o 
To all whom it may concern: 
G, which passes over the hub I of the band 
The rear portion of the frame at g is : 
wheel. 
a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, re-pivoted to the rear portion of the tread of the 
siding at Essex, county of Essex, Province of shoe at g'. 
5 Ontario, Canada, have invented a certain new 
curved backward to fit the hub of the wheel 
and useful Improvement in Harvesters; and 
when the shoe is drawn to its greatest dis 
I declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
tance forward, it then curves forward at ga. 
exact description of the invention, such as 
short distance, then descends a few inches at 
an angle at g, then turns downward, and is 6o 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
Io it pertains to make and use the same, refer 
attached to the extreme forward end of the 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
shoeg. Attached to the rear portion of the 
which form a part of this specification. 
shoe at h" is a cord or chain h; this, passing 
Myinvention relates to harvesters, and con 
over any appropriate pulley at the rear portion 
sists in improvements, as hereinafter de 
of the frame, arises to a position near the 65 
driver at h, substantially as shown in my 
I5 scribed, upon the machine described in an 
application heretofore filed by me on the 31st 
former application, filed January 31, 1893, 
day of January, 1893, Serial No. 460,380, all 
Serial No. 460,380, and is there preferably 
of which is hereinafter specified and claimed. 
attached to and wound upon a wheel or drum 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
h. 
20 view of a harvester embodying my improve 
It consists of a wheel with a wide face, and 
having several spokes connecting the rim to , 
ments. Fig. 2 illustrates the improvements 
as applied to the seat. Figs. 3, 4, 5 and 6 
the hub in the usual form. On the rim is at 
illustrate my improvements as applied to the 
tached a handle h, by which it may be ro 
means for attaching and detaching the pole. 
tated. It is journaled upon a journal at 
25 Fig. 7 illustrates the means for adjusting the 
tached to a bracket E, arising from the frame 
relative position perpendicularly of the two 
to which it is firmly attached. This bracket 
outer carrying wheels of the platform. Fig. 
has a projecting luge. The drum has suffi 
8 illustrates an improvement in constructing 
cient longitudinal motion upon its bearing so 
the sprocket wheel driving the cutter mech 
as to permit of the spokes being engaged or 8o 
3o anism. Fig. 9 is a detailed figure illustrat 
disengaged at will from the lug, and thus 
permitting the rope or chain to be wound 
ing the manner of operating the devices for 
adjusting the carrying wheels. Fig. 10 is, a 
upon it to any desired extent, and held in 
perpendicular sectional view of the sprocket 
any position that may be desired, with one 
of the spokes engaged in the lug. 
wheel and bridge upon which it rotates in 
35 crossing a dead furrow as hereinafter de 
forward end of the shoe is attached a coil 
spring F. This projects forward and is at 
scribed. 
tached to a lug on the under side of the pole. 
The position of this spring is shown in Fig. 
1. The office of this spring is to hold the 9o 
shoe drawn to the limit of its motion toward 
the front of the machine, so that as the main 
or driving wheel descends in a dead furrow, 
the two ends of the shoe will come in contact 
with the banks, and the sprocket wheel will 95 
then come in contact with the tread of the 
central portion of the shoe which becomes 
stationary; the sprocket wheel rotates thereon 
until the driving wheelcomes in contact with 
the opposite bank. During this process, the Ioo 
spring F is stretched to the extent of the for 
ward motion of the machine. As the driving 
Similar letters refer to similar parts. . 
In the drawings, A represents the main 
frame of a harvester. B represents the drive 
4o wheel. C. represents a sprocket wheel rigidly 
attached to the axis of the drive wheel and 
compelled to rotate with it. D, D', represent 
carrying wheels for the outer end of the frame 
and platform. H represents a shoe raised in 
45 the center ath, and adapted to form a tread 
for the sprocket or band wheel C. Each of 
these are common to the mechanism of my 
former application, and Will not need a de 
tailed description. 
As described in my former application, the 
shoe H has a frame arising from it, marked 
75 
To the 85 
 
517,655 
o 
25 
30 
35 
4d. 
45 
So 
wheel is raised upon the bank, the sprocket 
wheel is released from the tread, and the 
spring will draw the shoe forward to its origi 
nal position. During this operation the cord 
or chain h may be left to hang loosely. If 
desired, however, to withdraw the shoe en 
tirely from the ground so that it may not 
come in contact there with in case of the 
wheel descending in a dead furrow or other 
wise, the cord or chain h is wound upon the 
drum by the driver, thus drawing the shoe 
against the tension of the spring to the rear, 
and at the same time raising it by virtue of 
the angularity of the forward portion g of 
the frame H. It may be fastened in this po 
sition by locking one of the spokes of the 
wheel h' over the luge projecting from the 
bracket E. Upon unlocking the wheel and 
letting go of it, the spring F will at once draw 
the shoe forward to its position, where it is 
adapted to engage and support the sprocket 
wheel when the driving wheel descends into 
a dead furrow. 
It is obvious that the outer carrying wheels 
D and D'Will notatall times remain in proper 
relation to the ground, as the front or cutting 
edge of the platform is raised and lowered 
therefrom. As it is requisite in machines of 
this character to tilt the platform, thereby 
dropping the cutting edge below the rear 
thereof; in such case, if the axles of the wheels 
were arranged in a plane parallel with that 
of the platform, it is obvious that the front 
wheel would rest upon the ground, and the 
rear wheel Would be elevated therefrom a dis 
tance proportionately to the tilting, when the 
jolting of the platform would be proportional 
to the depth of the furrow and the distance 
that the rear wheel was elevated from the 
ground. In order to furnish a ready means 
of adjusting the relative heights of the wheels, 
I have devised the mechanism shown in Figs. 
1 and 7, whereby the driver can at once make 
such an adjustment without leaving his seat. 
For this purpose, there are located in slits a 
a, cut in the main frame A, two bolts a? a '. 
These bolts have a longitudinal motion in the 
slit, somewhat more than the depth of notches 
in standards carrying the wheels, as herein 
after described. 
The bearings of the wheels D and D' ex 
tend from standards did, which are adapted 
to slide in bearings at a formed in the main 
frame, and by means of which the height of 
a wheel is adjusted by reference to the plat 
form and the frame. When so adjusted, they 
are held in position by the bolts a' a' engag 
ing in notches did upon the rear side of the 
standards. The bolts a' a' are forced up into 
the engaging position by springs aa. In 
case, therefore, the forward wheel D' is car 
rying the weight of the platform, and the 
rear wheel D is a few inches from the ground 
and is held up by virtue of its appropriate 
bolt a? engaging in the notch in the rear of 
the standard, it is obvious that, by withdraw 
ing the bolt from the notch, the standard car 
rying the wheel will drop until the wheel 
comes in contact with the ground. Upon re 
leasing the bolt, the spring will force it into 
engagement with its appropriate notch in the 
standard, and thus hold it in that position, 
thereby approximately leveling the bearing 
with reference to the ground on the two 
wheels, and bringing the weight of the plat 
form upon them both. Small differences may 
be neglected, as of course an adjustment can 
only be for approximately level ground. 
In order to place the bolts under the con 
trol of the operator, there is attached to the 
rear of each of the two bolts a' a', two cords 
or chains at a, which pass to the rear angle 
of the frame A, as more particularly shown 
in Fig. 7; and thence over sheaves fixed in 
the angle, and passing along the rear bar of 
the frame A, as shown in Fig. 1, to a position 
directly under the driver's seat. There the 
direction of the cords is changed by passing 
through appropriate pulleys, and they are 
brought up underneath the driver's seat, and 
attached to the rear end of two foot rocking 
levers a'a. These foot levers are pivoted 
so that their outer ends may be depressed by 
the driver's feet at will. It is obvious that 
by proper adjustment the depression of one 
of the levers will withdraw the bolt, to which 
it is connected, and permit the standard which 
engages with such bolt to drop with its wheel, 
until the wheel comes in contact with the 
ground. In case the rear wheel becomes the 
carrying wheel, and the forward wheel is ele 
wated from the ground, the forward wheel 
can be dropped as hereinbefore stated, and 
as rocking mechanism is provided whereby 
the front of the platform may be alternately 
lifted and depressed; by combining the two 
actions, as, for instance, depressing the front 
of the platform, thus raising the rear wheel 
from the ground, the bearing coming upon 
the front wheel, and if in that position, the 
front wheel is dropped to the ground and 
locked, and then, if the platform is tilted 
back up to a level, and the front wheel thus 
lifted from the ground, and if this is also 
dropped, and then the front edge of the plat 
form depressed, thereby lifting the rear por 
tion of the platform, the rear wheel will again 
be lifted from the ground. Thus, it will be 
seen that the platform may be raised and 
lowered by successive stages or steps, by com 
bining the two actions, and this, without the 
driver's leaving his seat. 
Figs. 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 illustrate my improved 
means of attaching and detaching the pole, 
and for tilting the platform. To the frame 
A is attached a bracket A', having two in 
ternal curved points or horns, n. m. These 
points are located so that they are a suitable 
distance apart. Upon one side of the pole 
P is rigidly attached a strip of metal, p, hav 
ing at its rearward end an eye. Upon the 
Opposite side of the pole is pivotally attached 
a similar strip of metalp', the pivot being at 
p'. This stripp' has also an eye at its outer 
75 
95 
do 
Io5 
O 
II5 
2ch 
125 
517,655. 
 
end. The eyes in the strips p and p' are 
adapted to engage in the two projections or 
horns of the bracket hereinbefore described. 
The strip p' is perforated at p, where it en 
5 gages a lug extending from the pole so that, 
when the strip is brought closely in contact. 
with the pole, it is incapable of the vertical 
movement. It is obvious that, by swinging 
the front end of the strip p' outwardly, the 
Io rearward ends of the two strips containing 
the eyes are brought closely together. This 
enables them to pass between the horns of 
the bracket, and, the horns, being engaged 
with the eyes of the two strips respectively, . 
15 the swinging of the strip p' into contact with 
the pole, and upon the lug hereinbefore men 
tioned, connects the pole with the horns piv 
otally, but, so long as the strip p' is held in 
the position described, prevents its being de 
2 o tached therefrom. In order to hold it in this 
position, I have devised a latch L, pivotally 
attached to the pole at n. One side of this 
latch, the side not shown in Figs. 1 and 5, is 
simply pivoted to a bolt passing through the 
25 pole. The opposite side is also pivoted by 
means of an eye at its extremity engaging 
with the bolt, but is pivoted at a sufficient 
distance from the pole so as to permit the 
rearward projection thereof, n', to pass over 
3o and outside of the stripp' when the strip is 
in contact with the pole. So long, therefore, 
as the latch is depressed, as shown in Fig. 1, 
with the strip p' in position, the strip cannot 
be swung outward from the pole, and hence 
35 the parts described are locked in the con 
necting position. 
The tilting mechanism consists of a rod M, 
one end of which is adjustably attached to a 
strip of angle iron, rigidly fastened to the top 
4o of a pole, and marked O; the rod M having 
its lower end made in the form of an angle 
and rounded, adapted to engage in holes in 
the angle iron, so that its position with refer 
ence to the pole may be adjusted. The hand 
45 piece of the latch hereinbefore described is so 
adjusted with reference to the bracket, that 
there is just sufficient distance, when the 
latch is swung down in position as shown in 
Fig.1, between the hand piece and the bracket 
5o to accommodate the thickness of the rod M. 
Hence, when the rod is hooked into the bracket, 
and the latch swung into position, as shown in 
Fig.1, the rod M is prevented from disengag 
ing, and thus it is pivotally attached to the 
55 pole. The upper end of the rod M is connected 
to an arm R of a rock shaft R, which is jour 
naled in appropriate bearings at the upper 
forward end of the frame, as shown in Fig. 1. 
Projecting from the main frame is a quadrant 
6o S of the usual form and construction, and to 
the rock shaft is rigidly attached a handle 
ver T, carrying the usual latch mechanism 
for engaging in the quadrant. It is obvious 
that, by swinging this lever T into different 
65 positions and locking it therein, the front end. 
of the platform may be tilted with reference 
to the angle which the pole makes there with, 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
3 
and that, if the outer end of the pole be rig 
idly held at a certain distance from the 
ground, the platform must be tilted with re 
spect to the ground by means of the mechan 
is in described. 
As a side brace for the pole, and also serv 
ing as a fender and guard, I have devised the 
mechanism shown in Figs. 1, 3, 5 and 6. This 
is made up of a curved bar U, shown more 
particularly in Fig. 6. Near the center there 
of is attached at an angle a bar U, and to both 
is firmly riveted a piece of sheet iron U. 
This ironistriangular in form, with the lower 
rearward angle cut away, and from front to 
rear is somewhat curved in shape. 
At the 
two points v, it springs away from the bars 
U U", more especially as shown in Fig. 6. 
The bar U has formed at its rearward and 
lower end a hook projecting transversely, 
Fig. 6 being a perspective of the same in a 
horizontal plane. The bar U" projects from 
the point of contact with the piece of sheet 
iron in a somewhat curved shape, there being 
a space between it and the sheet iron at its 
outer end. The outer end of the bar U is 
turned at right angles, and formed into a 
hook, which, when in position, projects down 
wardly. To the side of the pole is fastened 
a bracket W. The lower edge of this bracket 
is formed into a lug having an eye therein, 
into which the outer end of the bar U may be 
hooked, as hereinafter described. The upper 
end of the bracket, and at its rear side, is 
formed into another lug v', which does not 
project to quite the extent of the bracket with 
the eye, so that the bar U, when inserted in 
the lower lug and then swung backward into 
position, as shown in Fig.1, is brought under 
neath the bracket v in such a manner that it 
is prevented from being disengaged, as illus 
trated by Fig.1. The rearward end of the bar 
U engages in a slot in the lower portion of one 
of the standards of the frame A at A, the sheet 
iron fender projecting rearwardly outside of 
the frame, while the bar U' is in that position 
as illustrated in Fig. 1. The lower edge of the 
bar U has projecting outwardly from it, and 
in the direction of the grain, a plate, which 
thus presents an edge to the grain in the for 
ward motion of the machine. 
This is illus 
trated in Fig. 1 at U8. It is found that this 
edge of a plate forms a better fender and col 
lects the heads of the grain in much better 
shape than a round bar or a mere flat sheet 
of metal brought facewise to the grain. 
As it may be difficult at times to construct 
the sprocket wheel having a smooth tread and 
a depression in the center for the purpose of 
taking in the chain upon the sprockets, I 
have shown a device whereby the same can 
be made in three pieces, as shown in Fig. 8, 
they being formed of two smooth sections or 
rings, one of them having a recess into which 
one side of the sprocket wheel may be in 
serted, and the other being a smooth ring, and 
the whole fastened together by means of bolts, 
thus virtually forming two rings bolted to a 
75 
95 
Oo 
II5 
I 25 
 
 
517,655 
O 
sprocket wheel, with their faces raised beyond 
the projections of the sprockets. 
In order to better accommodate the driver's 
position in a mechanism of this kind, I have 
devised certain improvements in the seat, and 
which are shown in section in Fig.2 and illus 
trated in perspective in Fig. 1. Attached to 
the frame is a saddle W, having a raised cir 
cular portion shown in the figure; or a clip 
may be formed to pass over it, whereby it may 
be fastened firmly in the usual manner for 
such devices. This permits an adjustment 
upon the curve of the saddle, and thereby 
permits the seat to occupy a position relative 
to the frame, either nearer to or farther away 
from the foot levers and hand lever Therein 
before described. As such adjustment, how 
ever, necessitates a tilting of the seat, which 
might in positions be uncomfortable, I have 
arranged a similar mechanism, except in re 
verse, whereby the position of the seat may 
be brought to a level. The seat rests upon a 
saddle, the under side of which is concave, 
and the spring upon which the saddle rests 
is formed to fit this concavity, and is made 
adjustable therein, so that in case the seat is 
thrown backward by means of the lower ad 
justment, it may be brought up to a level po 
sition by means of the upper adjustment. 
This co-operates with the tilting mechanism, 
as the seat thereby may be adjusted to a com 
fortable position regardless of the tilting 
frame and platform. 
The operation of this device will be under 
stood from the description; and a separate 
description thereof I do not deem to be nec 
essary. 
What I claim is 
1. In combination with the frame and plat 
form of a harvester, two outer carrying wheels 
adapted to be raised and lowered with refer 
erence to said frame, foot levers within the 
reach of the driver, and means connecting 
said foot levers with locking bolts, whereby 
said bolts may be operated to lock or unlock 
bearings carrying the wheels, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a harvester, the combination of a main 
frame, two outer carrying wheels, means 
whereby said wheels may be made adjustable 
at the will of the driver with reference to the 
elevation of the platform, an adjustable tilt 
ing pole, and means within the reach of the 
driver whereby the adjustment of the tilting 
pole may be changed at will, substantially as 
described. 
3. The combination with the main frame of 
a harvester, of means for tilting the platform 
thereof within reach of the driver, a double 
adjustable seat constructed with an adjust 
able bearing upon the under side of the seat, 
about which the seat may be rotated, an ad 
justable bearing upon the frame upon which 
the seat spring rests, and upon which the seat 
spring may also be rotated, and means for 
fastening the seat and the seat Spring re 
spectively in any desired position within the 
limits of the rotation, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. A pole attachment for a harvester or 
analogous mechanisms, consisting of the com 
bination of the main frame, brackets project 
ing from the forward end of the main frame 
at a suitable distance from each other, a fixed 
strap upon one side of the pole rigidly at 
tached thereto and adapted to engage one of 
the brackets, a strap pivotally attached to the 
opposite side of said pole, one end of which 
is adapted to engage the opposite bracket, 
and the other end of which is adapted to be 
locked to the side of the pole in such manner 
that the straps are pivotally attached to the 
brackets and may be detached at will by a 
reversal of the operation of attachment, and 
means for locking the pivotal strap rigidly 
to the side of the pole, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. In a pole attachment for a harvester or 
analogous mechanism, the combination of the 
main frame, brackets projecting from the for 
ward end of the main frame at a suitable dis 
tance from each other, a fixed strap upon one 
side of the pole rigidly attached thereto and 
adapted to engage one of the brackets, a strap 
pivotally attached to the opposite side of said 
pole, one end of which is adapted to engage 
the opposite bracket, and the other end of 
which is adapted to be locked to the side of 
the pole in such manner that the straps are 
pivotally attached to the brackets and may 
be detached at will by a reversal of the op 
eration of attachment, means for locking the 
pivotal strap rigidly to the side of the pole, 
and a side brace adapted to be locked to the 
pole and pivotally locked to the frame of the 
harvester, substantially as described. 
6. A pole attachment for a harvester or 
analogous mechanisms, consisting of the com 
bination of the main frame, brackets project 
ing from the forward end of the main frame 
at a suitable distance from each other, a fixed 
strap upon one side of the pole rigidly attached 
thereto and adapted to engage one of the 
brackets, a strap pivotally attached to the op 
posite side of said pole, one end of which is 
adapted to engage the opposite bracket, and 
the other end of which is adapted to be locked 
to the side of the pole in such manner that 
the straps are pivotally attached to the brack 
ets and may be detached at will by a reversal 
of the operation of attachment, means for lock 
ing the pivotal strap rigidly to the side of the 
pole, a side brace adapted to be locked to the 
pole and pivotally locked to the frame of the 
harvester, a connecting rod connecting the 
pole to a rock shaft operated by a lever within 
reach of the driver, and a quadrant and latch 
for holding the lever in a predetermined po 
sition, substantially as described. 
7. In a detachable pole mechanism for har 
vesters, the combination of a pole, a bracket 
containing an upper and a lower lug separated 
by a space, a side brace adapted to engage in 
an eye in the lower lug, and when in position 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
Od 
Io5 
IC) 
IT 5 
I 25 
13o 
517,655 
being swung under the upper lug, the oppo 
site end of the side brace being connected to 
a perpendicularlug upon the main framehav 
ing eye therein, a projection extending from 
near the center of said side brace upwardly 
and backwardly, the end of which is adapted 
to engage with the slot in the main frame, and 
a link connected to a hand lever with means 
of adjustment thereof and detachably con 
O nected to a bracket upon the upper side of said 
pole, whereby, when said pole is in position 
attached to the harvester and said link is con 
nected, the upward extension from the side 
brace is compelled to pass through the slot in 
the frame and prevent the detachment of the 
side brace from the eye in the frame, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
8. In a pole mechanism for harvesters, the 
combination of a pole, means for attaching 
and detaching the pole from the harvester, 
consisting of one fixed and one swinging strap 
adapted to engage in brackets on the har 
vester, a connecting rod connected to an ad 
- justing mechanism and detachably pivotally 
25 connected with a bracket upon the upper side 
2o. 
of the pole adjacent to the outer end of the 
swinging strap, and a swinging clasp latch 
adapted to hold a swinging strap to the side 
of the pole and simultaneously secure the rod 
in an eye in the bracket on the upper side of 
the pole, substantially as described. 
9. A sprocket wheel, composed of three 
parts: first, a wheel having sprockets or teeth 
and attached by spokes to a hub; second, 
side ring recessed upon one side and having 
a face of diameter equal to or greater than the 
periphery of the teeth of the sprocket wheel; 
and, third, an opposite companion ring, and 
bolts whereby the two rings may be secured 
upon either side of the sprocket wheelin com: 
bination with a bridge upon which said 
sprocket wheel is adapted to rotate, substan 
tially as described. . 
In testimony whereof Isign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
.. 
, 
- 
35 
WILLIAM McCLOSKEY. 
Witnesses: 
R. A. PARKER, 
- 
MARION A. REEVE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517755.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. LUDOVICI. 
SELF ACTING BRAKE FOR ELEWATORS, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
No. 517,755, 
Patented Apr. 3, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 517,755. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1894. 
G. W. LUDOVICI. 
SEF ACTING BRAKE FOR ELEVATORS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Z727zesses: 
3- ?tart 
/721 
TH. national LTHoarariina courary. 
wastinator. D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 517,755. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1894. 
G. W. LUDOWICI, 
SELF ACTING BRAKE FOR ELEWATORS. 
a. - . 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
 
mi 
Afzv67ZZOZ: 
w Saey's 
also on. 
is NATIONAL LITHoarAPHiNa company. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORG WILHELM LUDOVICI, OF CASSEL, GERMANY. 
SELF-ACTING BRAKE FOR ELEVAtoRs. 
* . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 517,755, dated April 8, 1894. 
Application filed August 14, 1893, Serial No. 483,090, (No model.) 
m 
. 
w 
- 
- 
5 
IngS. 
Io 
. . 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORG WILHELM LU 
DOVICI, of Cassel, in the Empire of Germany, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Self-Acting Brakes for Elevators, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
The object of my invention is to fit eleva 
tors with improved safety brakes to arrest the 
movement of the cage in case of the breakage 
of the lifting rope or cable. And in order 
that my said invention may be particularly 
described and ascertained, reference is here 
by made to the accompanying drawings, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts. 
Figure 1 is an elevation of an elevator fit 
ted with my improvements, the ropes being 
shown intact, and the brakes out of action. 
Figs.1 and 1 represent cross sections through 
the guides, cage irons and brake frame, on 
lines 1-1 and 2-2 respectively of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 2 is a side view of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an 
elevation, partly in section, showing the 
brakes in operation. Fig. 3" represents a 
transverse section on line 3-3 of Fig. 3. 
In the drawings b represents the elevator 
cage having a platformb'. Surrounding the 
cage b is a rectangular frame a having guid 
ing portions a for engaging the vertical 
guide railsh h and the cage b is constructed 
so as to move vertically with respect to said, 
frame a, and be guided by the vertical guid 
ing portions a'. The brake mechanisms are 
fitted to the frame a. above and below the 
cage band are adapted to be instantly forced 
into operation by the downward movement of 
the cage in the frame d. 
The upper brake mechanism comprises two 
levers cc, pivoted to the frame a at did. g.g. 
are two wedge shaped brake blocks, With ser 
rated contact surfaces, pivoted at 
to the 
short arms of the levers c c. O O are Weights 
fitted to the long arms of the levers c c. k k 
45 
... are springs, one end of each spring being at 
tached to the frame a, and the other end to 
the lever c, as shown. . The objeet of the 
weighto and spring leisto render the operation 
of the brake certain so that, in case the spring 
l; should fail, the weight would cause the le 
ver to apply the brake. In ordinary cases 
35 
w 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Cage. 
however the springs c and weights O operate 
together, if are stationary cams secured to 
the frame a and provided with inclined sur 
faces which hold the brake blocks g in posi 
tion pressing them against the guide rails h 
h, when raised by the short arms of the le 
Vers c. c. 
The lower brake comprises two levers ll 
pivoted to the frame a at pp. m. m. are two 
Wedge shaped brake blocks pivoted at S S to 
the short arms of the levers l l. n n are sta 
tionary cams secured to the frame a and pro 
vided with inclined faces to hold the brake 
blocks in position, when raised by the short 
arms of the levers ll. The long arms of the 
levers l l are in contact above and below with 
portions of the framework of the cageb, in 
this instance plates bb under the floor of the 
The cage is sustained by two forked straps 
ff through which the levers c c pass. e. e are 
two pins secured to the straps.ff which lift 
the levers c when the cage is sustained by 
the straps ff. Each strap carries a loose pull 
ley at its upper end for receiving the rope. 
In the drawings I have shown a third rope 
engaging a strape' secured to the central por 
tion of the barb of the cage. 
This rope is 
secured to a suitable counter balance weight, 
not shown, as is usual in elevators. 
The operation is as follows: When the 
cage is sustained by the ropes or cords, as 
shown in Fig. 1, the upper cross bar b8 of 
the framework of the cage b is raised into 
contact with the upper part of the frame a. 
The pins e e lift the long arms of the levers 
c c, and thereby withdraw the brake blocks 
gg from contact with the guide railsh h. In 
like manner the raising of the platesbof the 
cage to in the framed, lifts the long arms of 
the levers l l of the lower brakes, the brake 
blocks m. m. being thereby withdrawn from 
contact with the guide rails h h. The cage 
is thus free to be raised or lowered. On the 
breaking of one or more rope or ropes, as 
shown in Fig. 3, or the sudden fall of the cage, 
the supports ffare released and the cage will 
instantly fall with respect to the frame a. 
The long arms of the levers c c and l l are 
then depressed by the weights oo, springs h. 
h and the lowering of the plates b b of the 
cage, whereby the wedges g g and m n are 
55 
65 
75 
95 
O 
517,755 
45 
55 
7 or 
75 
O 
jammed between the cams j and and n, and 
the guide rails h. h., thus arresting the motion 
of the cage immediately. Should the cage be 
again raised, all the wedges are immediately 
released and the cage is free to move. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In an elevator the combination with the 
cage, of an independently movable frame, 
normally supported thereby, movable brake 
blocks secured to said frame, stationary cams 
secured to said frame in position to be en 
gaged by said brake blocks, devices connect. 
ed with the cage for normally holding said 
brake blocks out of operation, and means for 
forcing said blocks into engagement with the 
said cams to apply the brakes, on the down 
ward movement of said cage in respect to said 
frame, substantially as described. 
2. In an elevator the combination with the 
vertical guide rails and the movable cage, of 
an independently movable frame, normally 
supported by said cage, and provided with 
movable brake blocks for engaging said rails, 
cams secured to said frame in position to be 
engaged by said blocks, devices connected 
with the cage for normally holding said blocks 
out of engagement with cams, and devices 
connected with said blocks for throwing them 
into engagement with said cams, and guide 
rails, on the downward movement of the cage 
with respect to said frame, substantially as 
described. 
3. In an elevator the combination with the 
guide rails, and the movable cage, of an in 
dependently movable frame, normally sup 
ported by said cage, and provided with mov 
able wedge shaped brake blocks for engaging 
said rails, stationary cams secured to said 
frame in position to engage said blocks, de 
vices connected with said cage for normally 
holding said blocks out of operation and de 
vices for throwing said wedge shaped blocks 
into engagement with said cams and guide 
rails on the downward movement of the cage, 
with respect to said frame, substantially as 
described. 
4. In an elevator the combination with the 
guide rails, and movable cage, of an inde 
pendently movable frame, normally support 
ed by said cage, and provided with wedge 
shaped brake blocks, pivoted levers connect 
ed with said brake blocks, and provided with 
springs for throwing said blocks into opera 
tion, stationary cams secured to said frame 
in position to be engaged by said blocks and 
devices connected with the cage for engaging 
said levers and normally holding said brake 
blocks out of operation, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
5. In an elevator the combination with the 
guide rails and movable cage, of an inde 
pendently movable frame normally support 
ed by said cage, provided with two pairs of 
brake blocks, one pair being provided with 
springs for throwing them into engagement 
with the rails, and the other being operatively 
connected with said cage, and devices con 
nected with the cage for normally holding 
said spring actuated brake blocks out of en 
gagement with said rails, whereby the down 
ward movement of the cage with respect to 
said frame will force one pair of brake blocks 
directly into operation and release said spring 
actuated brake blocks, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
GEORG WILHELM LUDOWICI. 
RUDOLF SEIDEL, 
CARL BRCHNER, 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517856.txt	(No Model.) 
M. C. GILBERT. 
MOTOR, 
No. 517,856, 
Patented Apr. 10, 1894. 
 
s E As s 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MATTHEW C. GILBERT, OF COLUMBUS, GEORGIA. 
MotoR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 517,856, dated April 10, 1894. 
Application filed August 22, 1893, Serial No, 483,723. (No model.) 
To all uphon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MATTHEW C. GILBERT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Co 
lumbus, in the county of Muscogee and State 
of Georgia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Churn-Motors; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in motors, designed pri 
marily for operating churns, and it has for its 
objects among others to provide a simple, 
cheap and durable yet efficient motor which 
can be readily applied to any churn dasher 
shaft or stem, easily operated and not liable to 
get out of order. I provide a shaft having a 
crank disk and crank pin which is operated 
by suitable means and to the crankpin there 
is detachably connected a link or rod which 
is connected with a lateral portion or projec 
tion on a vertical shaft which has provision 
for ready attachment to the stem or shaft of 
the dasher. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear and the novel fea 
tures thereof will be specifically defined by the 
appended claim. 
The invention in this instance resides in 
the peculiar combinations, and the construc 
tion, arrangement and adaptation of parts, 
all as more fully hereinafter described, shown 
in the drawings and then particularly pointed 
out in the claim. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of my improvement 
with the dasher stem shown in operative po 
sition. Fig. 2 is a plan view thereof. Fig. 3 
is a vertical cross section through the crank 
shaft with parts in elevation. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the several views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates a suitable frame 
65 
upon or from which the operating parts are 
supported. Journaled in suitable bearings 
in this frame or support is the transverse hori 
zontal shaft B one end of which is extended 55 
and has secured thereto the crank disk B' 
which is provided with a crank handle or 
other convenient device b whereby the same 
may be rotated. This shaft carries a small 
sprocket wheel C which is located between 
the side bars of the frame or support as shown, 
and Disasprocket chain which passes around 
this sprocket wheel and around a smaller 
sprocket wheel D' on the shaft E which is 
journaled in suitable bearings in the frame 
and one end of which is extended beyond the 
side of the frame and carries a crank disk F 
which is provided with a crank pinfas shown. 
This shaft may also carry a fly wheel E' as 
seen in Fig. 2 if desired. 
G is a link, rod or pitman connected with 
the crank pin of this disk and this connection 
may be such as to permit of ready detach 
ment thereof when desired. 
H is an upright rising from the side bar of 
the frame and to the upper end thereof are 
secured the horizontal arms h the outer ends 
of which are connected by the plate or piece 
I which is provided with an opening ithrough 
which the vertical shaft or rod J is designed 
to slide freely. To the upper end of this rod 
there is fast a lateral projection or pin j to 
which the other end of the link or rod G is 
connected in any suitable manner, preferably 
detachably. This vertical rod J also passes 
loosely through an opening k in a horizontal 
plate or piece Kwhich is supported upon the 
lateral pieces k from the side bar of the frame 
as shown. 
The lower end of the rod or shaft J carries 
the horizontal clamp arm L which has an open 
ing or notch l open upon one side to receive 
the dasher shaft or stem H' which is detach 
ably held therein in any suitable manner, as 
for instance by a set screw m, as shown, which 
is held in the arm and is made to engage the 
shaft or stem to hold it thereto. . 
The operation will be readily understood 
from the foregoing description when taken in 
connection. With the annexed drawings, and a 
further detailed description thereof is not 
deemed necessary. The dasher shaft or stem 
95 
75 
OO 
Io 
25 
30 
35 
45 
50 
2 
517,856 
can be easily and quickly secured to the clamp 
arm or released therefrom and the length of 
stroke can be readily regulated. 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
What I claim as new is- 
The combination with the frame, of the hori 
Zontal shaft, the sprocket wheel and crank 
disk thereon, the shaft parallel with said shaft, 
the fly wheel and sprocket wheel thereon, the 
sprocket chain passed around said sprocket 
wheels, the crank disk and pin the vertical 
pitman connected at one end to said pin, the 
upright Hrising from the frame, the horizon 
tal arms h, the plate I connecting the outer 
ends of said arms and having an openirig, the 
vertical rod passed loosely through said open 
O 
ing, a lateral projection at the upper end of 
said rod, and connected to the upper end of 
the pitman, the lateral pieces c' on the frame, 
the plate K supported thereon and having an 
opening through which the vertical rod loosely 20 
passes, the clamp armon the lower end of said 
rod and having open sided opening, and a set 
screw for holding the dasher stem therein, all 
substantially as shown and described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 25 
MATTHEW C. GILBERT. 
Witnesses: 
S. E. LAWHON, 
A. E. THORNTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US517956.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 517,956. 
B. F. LOUGHMILLER. 
PADLOCK. 
Patented Apr. 10, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
9 
H. 
H. 
9 
 
H. 
H. 
it. 
 
 
 
  
 
  
1N 
S. 
NH)2 C 2 S S 
Sti, 
NES D N-7 
NSSESS 
N, N-2 
Si2%N 
N 
N 
  
 
  
 
Z 
6 Y Zaf 
74. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
2 
Ze 
A-6 
4. 
3. 
z-sy 
 
 
 
 
S-Z2 
N 
N 9E-1s N 
ESz 
CEPL's 
- st 
e S. 
7 
N 
Ipepir 
Zeyzorenzerty%uezer 
ey Zeza/ offrgeys, 
NATIONAL LIH.GRAPHINs costa any 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN F. LOUGHMILLER, OF ASPEN, COLORADO, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, OF ONE-HALF TO THOMAS LATTA AND J. W. WIST, OF 
SAME PLACE. 
PADLOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 517,956, dated April 10, 1894. 
Application filed April 22, 1893, Serial No. 471,492, (No model.) , 
v 
O 
25 
shackle. 
Further objects and advantages 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN F. IOUGH 
MILLER, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Aspen, in the county of Pitkin and 
State of Colorado, have invented a new and 
useful Padlock, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
padlocks, the objects in view being to provide 
a lock in which the rear plate or plate con 
taining the keyhole is so arranged as to ren 
der it impossible of detachment from the cas 
ing or shell and thus guard against tamper 
ing with the lock. 
In carrying out my invention I form the 
member which performs the function of a 
rear plate as an integral part of a frame in 
which the tumblers and operative parts of the 
lock are mounted, whereby when the shackle 
of the lock is engaged by the tumblers, said 
frame carrying this rear plate is firmly locked 
thereto and cannot be withdrawn except af 
ter disengagement of the tumblers from the 
of my in 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion and the novel features thereof will be 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
- 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a sectional 
view taken axially of a lock embodying my 
invention said section being taken parallel 
with the plane of the shackle. Fig. 2 is a 
similar view taken at right angles to the plane 
of the shackle. Fig. 3 is a perspective View 
of the frame and tumblers. Fig. 4 is a bottom 
plan view of the lock. Fig. 5 is a vertical sec 
tional view at right angles to the plane of the 
shackle showing each tumbler provided with 
an independent spring. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in the several views of the 
drawings. 
the shell or casing of the lock 
which is provided, in the construction illus 
45 trated, with a rectangular elongated recess 2, 
openings or sockets 3 being formed in thein 
tegral top of the shell or casing to receive the 
legs of the shackle 4, such shackle being of 
the ordinary or any approved construction. 
These openings or sockets 3 are substantially 
outside of the side walls of the recess and 
1 represents 
35 
O 
w 
. 
55 
65 
75 
communicate with the upper ends of grooves 
or channels 5 which are formed in said side 
walls, whereby when the shackle is arranged 
in its operative positionin the shell or casing 
its legs are housed upon three sides in the said 
grooves or channels whereby only their inner 
notched surfaces are exposed. These grooves 
or channels extend through to the lower sur 
face of the shell or casing. 
Fitting snugly in the rectangular recess 2 
is a frame 6 which comprises the side bars 7 
terminating at their upper ends in studs 8 
which engage perforations 9 in the top of the 
shell or casing; the end plate 10 which con 
nects and is integral With the lower ends of 
the side bars; and transverse webs 11 between 
which are mounted the rotatable tumblers 12. 
These tumblers and the webs and end plate 
are provided with registering keyhole open 
ings to receive the key 13 which is shown in 
Fig.1. The end plate as will be observed fits 
snugly in the lower end of the rectangular 
opening of the shell or casing and is provided 
with integral lateral ears 14 which fit in the 
lower terminals of the channels or grooves in 
the side walls of the recess 2. 
The peculiar form and construction of the 
tumblers and the number of tumblers form 
no part of my invention and may be varied as 
in the locks now in use to produce variety, &c. 
From the above description in connection 
with the drawings, it will be understood that 
when the legs of the shackle are introduced 
into the openings or sockets in the top of the 
shell or casing and the key is turned to cause 
the engagement, with the notches in said legs, 
of the tumblers, the frame by which said 
tumblers are carried and of which the bot 
tomplate forms an integral part will be locked 
securely to the shackle and cannot be detached 
or removed except by breaking the shackle or 
the shell. Furthermore, the frame which fits 
at its lower end snugly in the recess of the 
shell or casing affords no means for the en 
gagement of a lock-breaking tool such as may 
be employed in connection with a padlock 
having the bottom plate secured in place by 
rivets or other similar devices. 
It will be understood furthermore that while 
I have illustrated a frame of a rectangular 
shape, such feature forms no essential part of 
. 
" 
95 
OO 
y 
517,956 
my invention and may be varied at the will 
of the manufacturer. 
The webs whereby the tumblers are sepa 
rated are fitted at their ends with transverse 
grooves in the inner surfaces of the side bars 
of the frame whereby they are removable. 
The terminal studs which extend through per 
forations in the upper end of the shell or cas 
ing are designed to be headed or riveted to 
prevent the members of the lock from becom 
ing separated when the shackle is unlocked. 
In Fig. 5 I have shown a construction in 
which each tumbler is provided with an oper 
ating spring 15 to maintain the same in its 
operative position, but I may employ springs 
only in connection with the bottom tumbler, 
as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. 
Various changes in the form, proportion 
and minor details of construction may be re 
sorted to without departing from the spirit or 
sacrificing the advantages of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a padlock, the combination with a hol 
low shell or casing, and a shackle having its 
legs fitted in openings or sockets in the top 
thereof, of a frame fitted snugly within said 
shell or casing and having a bottom plate 
which closes the lower end or mouth of the 
opening in the shell or casing, and also hav 
ing parallel spaced Webs, the bottom plate and 
webs being provided with registering open 
ings, and tumblers fitting loosely between the 
webs, held in place by the side walls of the 
shell or casing and provided with openings 
registering with those in the webs and bottom 
plate for the reception of a key, substantially 
as specified. 
2. In a padlock, the combination with a 
shell or casing provided with an elongated re 
cess, openings or Sockets in the upper end and 
grooves or channels in the side walls of said 
recess, and a shackle having its legs fitted in 
said openings or sockets and adapted to lie 
in the grooves or channels with their inner 
notched surfaces exposed, of a frame fitted 
snugly into said recess and provided with lat 
eral ears to close the lower ends of the grooves 
or channels in the side walls of said recess 
and tumblers mounted upon and carried by 
said frame, substantially as specified. 
3. In a padlock, the combination with a hol 
low shell or casing and a shackle having its 
legs fitted in openings or sockets in the top 
of said shell or casing, of a frame fitting snugly 
in the interior of said shell or casing and 
having side bars, a, bottom plate and trans 
verse webs, and tumblers rotatably mounted 
upon said frame between the webs and 
adapted to project at their peripheries be 
yond the side edges of such webs to engage 
the notches of the shackle, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
BENJAMIN E. LOUGHMILLER. 
H. M. MCKAY, 
CHARLES A. MILLER. 
Witnesses: 
40 
45 
55 
65 
O 
15 
2 O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518056.txt	H. EIBEN. 
BRICK HOLDER FOR STOWES, RANGES, &c. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 10, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 518,056. 
 
H. EIBEN. 
BRICKHOLDER FOR STOWES, RANGES, &c, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
Patented Apr. 10, 1894, 
(No Model.) 
No. 518 
O56, 
N N  N N N A 
N | 
 
SN:SI: 
% 
aezaevaravavaezaevaeraezzzzzzzzzZ??Zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz:(2 
N N 
N N N ZZZ N N 
:ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ. 
A8-INGTON, p. c. 
The NATIONAL LITHOGRAPHiNa company, 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
3. Sn 
N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HENRY EIBEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BRICK-HOLDER FOR STOVES, RANGES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,056, dated April 10, 1894. 
Application filed December 7, 1893, Serial No. 492,981, (No model.) 
O 
55 
65 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY EIBEN, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at New York 
city, in the county of New York and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Brick-Holders for 
Stoves, Ranges, &c.; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to the fire-brick and 
other linings of Stoves, ranges, furnaces, &c., 
and the object of the invention is to provide 
a device for holding or retaining the fire-brick 
or other lining in position at the top, and also 
to cover the spaces between the linings and 
the oven or other plates of the stove and there 
by prevent ashes, cinders, &c., from getting 
betweenthelinings and the plates of the stove. 
It frequently happens that by the accumu 
lation of ashes, cinders, &c., in these spaces 
the fire-brick or other linings are broken, and 
in case the oven plate is broken or cracked 
the ashes are apt to sift into the oven and get 
into the food. By my invention these acci 
dents are rendered impossible, and not only 
will the fire-brick and other linings be much 
easier put into, fastened and retained in the 
fire chambers, but it will be impossible for 
any ashes, dust or cinders to get in the spaces 
around the linings, 
The invention consists of a frame made of 
metal, say cast-iron, and composed of sections 
shaped to conform to the side walls of the fire 
chamber, and provided with devices for fas 
tening them together, each section being of 
such a shape in cross-section as to fit against 
the face of the lining at the top and also to 
extend over the top of the lining and rest on 
the plates or other parts of the stove adjacent 
to the top of the lining, and thereby cover the 
spaces between the linings and the walls of 
the stove. 
It further consists in the combination with 
the linings of stoves, furnaces, ranges, and 
other cooking and heating apparatus, of a 
holder placed against and over the linings to 
hold and retain the linings in position, the 
said holder consisting of a frame composed of 
sections adapted to be adjusted and fastened 
together to form a brace for the tops of the 
r 
linings. 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figure 1 
represents a perspective view of the holder, 
shown as an article complete in itself ready 
to be applied to a stove; Fig.2 a cross-section 
of the fire chamber of a stove with the holder, 
partly in section applied to hold the linings 
and cover the spaces between the linings and 6 
the walls of the stove. Fig. 3 is a longitudi 
nal section of the same fire chamber as Fig. 2, 
but showing the same parts in another posi 
tion. 
Referring to the drawings, A indicates a 
portion of a stove-top, Ba portion of the oven, 
and C the fire-chamber placed next to the oven 
and provided With a grated, and grate front . 
b in the usual manner. 
The fire chamber is . 
provided with a lining of fire bricks d, d' d' 
in the usual manner. Other linings may how 
ever be substituted for these fire bricks as my 
invention is equally applicable to all linings, 
as well as to fire chambers of any shape. 
These fire bricks are so arranged that spaces 
e, e, e exist between them and the walls or 
plates ff of the fire chamber, and also the 
oven plate g, and into these spaces ashes, 
dust, cinders, &c., accumulate and not only 
interfere with the free radiation of the heat, 
but also in the course of time press against 
the linings and tend to force them from their 
position and also frequently to break them, 
It is these accidents which the holder Gis in 
tended to prevent. This holder is shown com 
plete in Fig.1 and it consists of a frame com 
posed of sections h h' h h, each of which in 
this instance is right angular in cross-section 
forming thus flanges it'. The front and back 
sectionsh h' are provided at or about the ends 
With upward projecting lugs k with holes in 
them to receive a key or pin in, and the end 
sections are provided with open slots lat the 
ends which are arranged to fit over the said 
projections. As the slots and projections fit 
easily together a certain amount of lateral 
and longitudinal adjustment is obtained and 
thereby the holder can be adjusted or fitted 
to the slight inequalities that exist in stoves 
and linings of the same size or number. 
The holder it is intended shall be made in 
sizes corresponding to the stoves, 
75 
95 
Ioo 
25 
35 
45 
So 
2 
518,056 
35 
40 
45 
55 
I claim 
1. As a new article of manufacture a holder 
for the bricks or linings of heating and cook 
ing apparatus the same consisting of a plu 
rality of sections each of which is composed 
of two flanges at about right angles to each 
other, the ends of connecting sections pro 
vided respectively with lugs and slots which 
are constructed and adapted to permit the 
holder to be adjusted to the inequalities in 
the bricks or linings, substantially as specified. 
2. In combination with the plates or walls 
of a stove, and the bricks or linings of a fire 
chamber, a sectional holder for the linings con 
sisting of a number of plates, each of which 
is composed of two flanges at or about the 
same angle to each other as the top and face 
of the lining, and having the ends provided 
with devices for fastening adjoining sections 
together and permitting the adjustment of the 
sections to irregularities in the linings, the 
said holder when in position adapted to hold 
the linings in place and also cover the spaces 
between the linings and the walls of the fire 
chamber, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the invention 
above set forth I affix my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
HENRY EIBEN. 
Witnesses: 
ISAAC P. HUBBARD, 
EREDK. IIAYNES. 
The application of the holder to the stove 
is by placing the several sections separately 
on top of the corresponding linings so that the 
flange i will rest against the face of the lin 
ings, and the flange i' will project over the 
tops of the linings and rest on the top edges 
of the plates including the oven-plate as shown 
in Figs, 2 and 3. One section his placed 
Over the plate in above the front grate as 
shown in Fig. 3 in order in this instance to 
complete the frame and make each section 
brace the other. When thus adjusted the 
flanges of the sections completely cover the 
spaces between the linings and the walls or 
plates, thereby preventing anything from fill 
ing in the spaces. As the sections when put 
together and fastened with pins or keys n form 
a strong metallic frame around the top of the 
linings, the latter are held firmly in place. 
While the Sections in this case form a rectan 
gular frame, it is obvious that by changing 
the shape of the sections they may be adapted 
to circular, oval and other shaped fire cham 
bers, and it is to be understood that my in 
vention includes holders of any shape and 
made of any number of sections to adapt them 
to fit the fire chambers and hold and protect 
the linings of any Stoves, furnaces, ranges, or 
other heating or cooking apparatus. Further 
more, the frame or holder by bearing evenly 
and forcibly against the face of the linings 
prevents the linings from warping or becom 
ing displaced or out of shape. 
IO 
15 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518156.txt	(Nb Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet. 1, 
K. NECKER, 
MACHINE FOR SEWING BEADS TO FABRICs. 
No. 518,156, 
Patented Apr, 10, 1894, 
N 
 
 
 
a- 
 
(No Model.) 
K. NECKER. 
MACHINE FOR SEWING BEADS TO FABRICS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 10, 1894. 
No. 518,156. 
 
This NA TIONAL TOGRAPHitra company. 
WASNGTON, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
K. NECKER, 
MACHINE FOR SEWING BEADS TO FABRICS, 
No. 518,156, 
Patented Apr. 10, 1894, 
  
 
2 
(No Model.) 
No. 518,156, 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 4. 
... 
' 
MACHINE FOR SEWING BEADS TO FABRICS, 
K., NECKER 
Patented Apr. 10, 1894, 
 
N 
is NATOAL LTHoGraphitra ce. 
WA8Ngon. . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
KARL NECKER, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
MACHINE FOR SEWING B EADS TO FABRICS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,156, dated April 10, 1894. 
Application filed June 7, 1892, 
Serial No. 435,858, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, KARLNECKER, a sub 
ject of the King of Prussia and German Em 
peror, and a resident of Berlin, in the King 
dom of Prussia and German Empire, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Machines for Sewing Beads to Fab 
rics of which the following is a specification. 
My invention has reference to a machine 
for sewing beads to fabrics, by attaching the 
beads drawn on to an overstitch thread, to 
the braid, or cord, and then sewing the two 
together by means of a quilting stitch. 
In order that the invention may be fully 
understood I will proceed to describe it with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
Which similar letters are used to denotesimi 
lar parts. 
Figure 1, is the representation of an ordi. 
nary quilting stitch. Fig. 2 is the representa 
tion of a combined quilting and over stitch 
Fig. 8 represents a braid with beads sewed 
on Fig. 4 to 11 are detail views showing the 
different stages in sewing the beads on the 
braid. Fig. 12 is a schematic front view of 
the machine. Fig. 13 is a front view of the 
machine. Fig. 14 is a plan of the same, the 
COver being omitted. Fig. 15 represents the 
actuating mechanism of the bead-thread-car 
rier. Figs. 16 to 18 are detail views. 
a is the braid or cord, b the needle thread, 
C, the shuttle thread and d the over stitch 
thread. As can be seen from Fig. 3, the bead 
ing thread is not laid over the braid, as here 
tofore, alternately, as an empty, and as a full 
thread, that is, at one time with beads and 
the next without, but is always used with 
beads drawn on. This is made possible by 
the following invention which comprises, 
first, a thread-carrier bringing the beading 
thread across the braid as may be necessary 
for ultimately sewing with the quilting stitch; 
Second, a bead-holder which keeps the neces 
Sarybeads arranged ready for each row across 
the braid; third, a bead distributer which, at 
the right moment, guides the beads to the 
thread-carrier, and fourth; a bead-pusher 
which pushes the beads on that may have 
remained on the thread. 
It is immaterial whether the above four 
devices be attached to a longitudinal or a cir 
cular shuttle-machine. 
s 
In Figs. 4 to 11 are shown the various phases 
in the production of the beaded trimming. 
The braid a lies on a disk A and a little to 
the right of it (Fig. 4) the beading thread has 
formed a loop through which the needlepasses 
piercing the braid a. The thread-carrier e 
seizes the beading thread d on the right and 
carries it on the left over the braid a. Below 
the thread-carrier, are three beads on the 
thread, while the bead distributer f, fin 
closes three others. g is the bead-holder. 
Now, while the needle is piercing the braid 
a (Fig. 5), the thread-carrier e, which has 
meanwhile passed over to the left, sinks, 
the lower part of the distributer f' opens 
and three beads held by it fall on the top of 
the thread-carrier e. The holder, g during 
these movements, keeps the beads on the right 
ready for the next stitch. The thread-carrier 
e now sinks farther (Fig. 6) and slightly for 
ward so that it forms a loop on the left side 
through which the needle can pass. The 
holderg remains in its position, while the up 
per part of the distributer opens, so that a 
fresh supply of beads can be advanced. The 
needle (Fig. 7) by piercing farther forms a 
loop through which the shuttles with shuttle 
thread c can be driven. Meanwhile, thread 
carriere has left the loop and consequently 
the beading thread also, allowing the three 
beads to the left to slip down to the edge of 
the braid. The holder g has now receded, 
having released the beads held back, which 
are at once brought to the top of the braid C. 
The distributerf, f' is now closed. The nee. 
dle now goes back and draws, in the well 
known manner, the shuttle thread into the 
braid, and the loop of the overstitch beading 
(Fig. 8.) The 
thread disfast to the left side. 
thread-carrier e seizes the same above the 
three beads on the left, passes with it to the 
right, and the bead holder g is again ad 
vanced, securing the beads in their position. 
The needle has finally quite receded (Fig. 9), 
thread-carriere has sunk to the right and the 
formation of the loop of the beading thread d 
commences after the under part of the dis 
tributer has left the three beads slip onto 
the thread-carrier e. After the thread-car 
rier e (Fig. 10) has completed the loop by 
downward and forward motion (the disk A 
has in the meantime advanced one stitch) the 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
So 
Od 
618,156 
75 
95 
Od 
I5 now commences again. 
(Fig. 4.) 
2O motion vertically. 
needle again pierces through the braid, while 
the bead-holder g still assures the position of 
the three beads on the left. The lower part 
J of the distributer has now closed, the up 
5 per partif opened and three fresh beads pass 
into the distributer. Finally, (Fig.11) thread 
carrier eleaves the loop on the right side free. 
The three beads resting on the top of said 
thread-carrier slip down to the right edge of 
Io the braid a, the holder g recedes and the ten 
Sion on the beading thread not only draws 
the right thread up, but also brings the three 
beads, until then on the left of g, onto the 
Surface of the braida. The whole operation 
It is clear from the description that the 
thread-carrier e makes a to and fro motion 
transversely over the braid a, and an up and 
down motion and finally a forward and back 
The holder g must like 
Wise make a backward and forward motion 
horizontally. The distributer fif' must open 
at the top and at the bottom alternately and 
close again. There is also the bead pusher 
25 for pushing the beads down which have re 
mained on the thread from any cause what 
ever. This bead pusher has also an up and 
down motion. 
Figs. 12 and 13, show a mechanism chosen 
30 for carrying out the above operations, Fig. 
12 giving a schematic front view showing 
the advance of the beading thread and the 
Winding off of the finished braid. In the 
framing B is a can seated on the driving 
35 Spindle, for actuating the thread-carrier e, 
the distributer ff, bead-holder g and bead 
pusher i. The braid a proceeds from the 
roller c provided with a brake device and is 
brought into the disk A from under the ten 
The groove on the disk for 
the reception of the braid is naturally chosen 
according to the width of the same. The 
roller D, also provided with a brake device, 
contains the beading thread d, which is led 
45. Over a Spring roller D', and passes the dis 
tributerff, bead-pusher i and thread-car 
riere, when it is gripped by the last-named 
holder g, when the holder gholds it and comes 
into contact with the braid a, at ac, in order to 
The finished pro 
duct passes off the disk A, to the winding 
roller E, being conducted thereto by the lower 
roller E, upper rollers E and E8; the tension 
roller E. keeping the band taut. According 
55 to the greater or lesser contiguity of the rows 
of beads, is the disk A more or less advanced. 
Fig. 18 is a front view of the complete ma 
chine; Fig. 14, a plan of the same with the 
COver removed and With the omission of a few 
Figs. 15 to 18 are details. 
The movement of the thread-carriere is ef 
fected by the triple cam K, K' and K' (Figs. 
14 and 15) seated on the axle h. The cam K 
tends to raise and lower arm l of the thread 
65 carrier e, rotating on in on the one hand, 
5o be sewed onto the same. 
6o Well-known details. 
4o Sion roller C. 
and on the other hand (K' is a worm-disk 
bearing on pivot n) bears in the lever arm P 
rotating at O, said arm being actuated by 
and so giving the thread-carrier e, a to and 
fromotion transversely over the braid. The 
spring G tends to keep the arm l close to K. 
The holder g is pushed downward and for 
ward (Fig. 4) in the direction of the middle 
plane of disk A by means of the Worm disk Z8. 
The distributer (Figs. 13 to 18) consists of 
two shears.ff lying one over the other, the 
parts of which, rotating at r, are kept closed 
by the pressure of springt. When their rear 
parts if u are pressed apart by the pusher 
the parts for f' open. The lower partf 
bears in the fixed arm u', while the upper 
part f is attached to the slightly yielding iron 
won fixed arm w'. The iron w can be drawn 
on or removed from u' by means of the mi 
crometer screw ty. By this means, one can 
regulate the space between f and f' accord 
ing to the number of beads required for each 
row. The forward and backward motion of 
pushers and n' for the opening of the parts 
if and f', is effected by two eccentrics Z, Z'. 
(Figs. 14 and 16.) 
The bead pusher i (Figs. 13 and 14) receives 
its up and down motion from the cam Z. 
It has still to be mentioned that the sew 
ing needle receives its to and fromotion from 
the grooved cam F, (Fig. 14), while the shut 
tles is driven by another such cam G. When 
a vertical motion of the shuttle is chosen as 
shown in the drawings. The choice of shut 
tle and its movements is immaterial. The 
machine can also be used with other Orna 
mental threads, such as silks, chenille, &c. 
For this purpose, the thread-carriere is re 
tained for holding the thread, while the dis 
tributerf, f', holder g, and pusher are re 
moved. 
Having now described my invention, I de 
clare that what I claim, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination of a thread-carrier for 
bringing the beading thread across the braid, 
a bead-holder which keeps the necessary 
beads arranged ready for each row across the 
braid, a bead distributer which guides the 
beads to the thread-carrier, a bead-pusher 
which pushes the beads on the thread and 
stitch-forming mechanism for securing the 
thread carrying the beads to the fabric; Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination of a thread-carriere, 
the distributerff', the holder g, the pusher 
i, means for operating the same and stitch 
forming mechanism for securing the thread 
carrying the beads to the fabric; substan 
tially as described. 
3. The combination, with a braid support; 
of the thread-carrier e means for causing the 
thread-carrier to seize the thread and form a 
loop on one side of the support, means for 
withdrawing the thread-carrier and elevating 
I o5 
O 
II5 
2 
I 25 
30 
 
518,156 
wa 
3 
it, means for causing the thread-carrier to for securing the thread carrying the beads to Io 
seize the thread above the beads and carry the fabric; substantially as described. 
the thread across the support and depress the 
thread carrier and form a loop on the other hand in presence of two witnesses. 
side of the support, means for withdrawing 
the thread-carrier, elevating it, causing it to 
seize the thread again, above the beads, and 
returning it in the same manner in which it 
was advanced and stitch-forming mechanism 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
W. H. EWARDS, 
W. HEUY. 
Witnesses: 
. 
. 
KARL NECKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518257.txt	(No Model.) R. LAWRENCE & J. BLACKFORD. 
LUBRICATOR, 
 
 
 
 
_Z????e?????* 
???-e <, 
SC?????????? 
??? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
REUBEN LAWRENCE AND JAMES BLACKFORD, OF ST. JOSEPH, MISSOURI. 
LU BRICATO R. 
SRECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,257, dated April 17, 1894. 
Application filed July 24, 1893, Serial No. 481,378, (No model.) 
55 
?? ?ZZ ??ho? it ??? ????????. 
Be it known that we, REUBEN LAWRENCE 
and JAMESBLACKFORD, citizens of the United 
States, residing at St. Joseph, in the county 
of Buchanan and State of Missouri, have in 
vented certain new and useful improvements 
in lubricating devices for hydraulic-elevator 
cylinders, pumps, plungers, pistons, piston 
rods, and all moving parts of all kinds of ma 
chines; and we do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
Our invention comprises a two part cylin-. 
drical lubricator box to be combined with the 
iston and having lubricating material car 
ried by its outer side so as to bear on the in 
terior of the cylinder throughout the extent 
of said cylinder. 
Our invention includes also other features 
hereinafter pointed out. 
In the drawings: Figure 1, is a sectional 
view of a cylinder with a piston and lubri 
cator therein. Fig. 2, is a perspective view 
of the lubricator cylinder or cup with the same 
closed. Fig. 3, is a similar view to Fig. 2, 
with the parts swung open. Fig. 4, is a sec 
tional view on line A' B' of Fig. 1. Fig. 5, is 
a perspective view of a modification, and Fig. 
6, a sectional plan view of the same. 
The cylinder is shown at A, the piston at B 
and the piston rods at C. 
The lubricator box or cup E consists of two 
sections hinged together at H so as to be 
swung apart in placing or removing the cup 
from about the piston rods, and having bot 
tom portions L. L with holesl, l, through 
which the piston rods pass. The sections are 
held together when closed by the hooks I and 
pins o. Holes in are formed in the bottom 
lates L. L through which the air may escape 
when placing the cup in position against the 
piston. 
The cup is provided with projecting por 
tions on its outer side and these in the pres 
ent instance consist of flanges G. G between 
which the lubricating material X is placed to 
bear on the interior of the lubricating cup. 
These flanges are doubled at top and bottom 
and packing Pisplaced between them. 
Eyes 
Kare provided on the cylinder by which it 
may be removed for applying the lubricant 
or for any other purpose. The cylinder A 
has a port N for the admission and escape of 
water and the cup E is provided with an elon 
gated slot F communicating with said open 
ing for the admission and escape of water 
from the cup, and consequently from the cyl 
inder. 
In Fig. 5, a modification is shown, the cup 
however is hinged at H but instead of the 
hooks I of the previous arrangement a lock 
ing slide Q is used to hold the two edges of 
the cup together. Instead of the complete 
bottom portions L L we here use the flange S 
which is screwed to the head of the piston by 
screws through the holest. 
R. R. are slots in 
the cup sides in order to allow the cup to pass 
the cross beams of a cylinder in order to lu 
bricate the cylinder clear to the top on the 
inside. A Woolen pad or other material is 
placed around the outside of the cup as shown 
in dotted lines, Fig. 6, and projections are 
used in this case to hold this absorbent lubri 
These projec- . 
cating material to the cup. 
tions instead of being flanges consist of the 
pins u and these project inwardly and the 
pad edges extend through the slots R and en 
gage the same. 
We claim 
1. A lubricator for cylinders, consisting of 
a cup having a bottom portion to fit against 
the piston said bottom portion having an 
opening, cylindrical side portions, extending 
up therefrom and leaving the upper end of 
the cup open, and the lubricating packing 
around the outside of the cylindrical sides, 
substantially as described. 
2. A lubricator for cylinders, consisting of 
a cup having bottom portions to fit against 
the piston, cylindrical side portions, extend 
ing up therefrom, and leaving the end of the 
cup open, the lubrieating packing around the 
outside of the cylindrical sides and the means 
for retaining...the packing in place consisting 
of the projections extending laterally from 
the cylindrical sides to engage the packing 
material, substantially as described. 
9 O 
95 
75 
O 
I5 
25 
35 
45 0 
2 
518,257 
3. A lubricator for cylinders comprising the I. In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
REUBEN LAWRENCE, 
JAMES BLACKFORD. 
cylindrical cup having bottom portions to fit in presence of two witnesses. 
against the piston with an opening therein 
and the lubricating material extending about 
5the outside of the same, said cup having the 
open side for the admission and escape of 
water to and from the cylinder. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. COOPER, 
ED WARID DUTTON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518357.txt	(No Model.) 
T. STRAUS, 
AUTOMATIC TROLLEY WIRE FINDER 
No. 518,357, 
Patented Apr. 17, 1894. 
 
S(NS 
z DECO A 
24 Na1 la 
- - - - - - - L 
a 
 
S. 
SS 
 
   
w 
w 
- 
- - - - - - 
trs 
WAVESSAS: 
 
9% WN VAN 7OA, 
ARY 
4 T TOARAWA Y. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEODORE STRAUS, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
AUTOMATIC TROLLEY-WIRE FINDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,357, dated April 17, 1894. 
Application filed January 26, 1894, Serial No. 498,115, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THEODORE STRAUS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Balti 
more, in the State of Maryland, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Trol 
ley-Guides, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to trolley guides for 
electric cars and it consists in a guide or re 
placer which comes automatically into action 
when the trolley leaves, or tends to leave, the 
wire and returns to its normal position when 
the trolley is again replaced. 
In the following specification I shall de 
scribe the invention in such full, clear and 
exact terms as will enable others skilled in 
the art to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a trolley and 
part of the supporting arm, the guides being 
in their normal or inactive position. Fig. 2 
is a similar view showing the guides raised. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view, the guides being repre 
sented in operative position in full lines, and 
in their normal position in dotted lines. Fig. 
4 is a sectional view on the line 4-4 of Fig. 
1, and Fig. 5 is a general view showing a 
larger portion of the trolley arm than is 
shown in the other figures. 
Referring to the drawings, Rindicates the 
usual trolley arm which in this instance is 
hollow at its outer end, and N a sliding ex 
tension of the same, which is provided with a 
shank N' free to move endwise in the arm 
proper. The extension N is also provided 
with a bifurcated head or frame Nin which 
the trolley wheel W is mounted upon a shaft 
or axle B. The axle B extends beyond the 
sides of the frame N', and upon the project 
ing portions on either side of the frame are 
pivoted a pair of guides A which extend be 
yond the wheel and have inclined faces a, ex 
tending from the edges of the groove in the 
wheel outwardly, the spread between their 
outer ends being several times greater than 
the width of the wheel, and to that extent 
facilitating the placing of the wheel upon the 
wire when the guides are vertical. 
The guides Ahave short arms A arranged 
at an angle to their main portions or longer 
- 
arms, and these shorter arms are connected 
by pivots C to rods D the opposite ends of 
which are connected to the trolley arm proper 
by a pivot E. 
The shank N of the extension fits and slides 
within the hollow end of the arm R, its move 
ment therein being limited by fixed pins or 
rivets E E which pass through a slot N8 in 
the shank N. 
The sliding extension of the trolley arm is 
normally pressed outward by means of a 
spring F, one end of which bears upon the 
shank N' while the other end bears upon a 
support or washer H, which in turn rests upon 
a pair of pins or rivets I. The spring sur 
rounds and is guided by a rod L, one end of 
Which is fastened to the shank N while the 
Other end passes through the washer H and 
between the rivets I. 
In the drawings the overhead wire is rep 
resented by T. 
To facilitate the operation of my invention 
I prefer to bend the trolley arm R sharply 
upward, as shown at R' in Fig. 5, to increase 
the effect of the reaction of the wire upon the 
spring F. 
The operation of the invention is as fol 
lows: When the trolley wheel is against the 
wire, the force of the main trolley arm oper 
ating spring (not shown) presses the wheel 
With sufficient force against the wire to com 
press the spring F, the effect of which is to 
shorten the distance between the fixed pivot 
E and the trolley axle B, thus through the 
medium of the connecting rod D and the 
shorter arm A throwing the guides A into a 
horizontal position as shown in Fig.1 and in 
the dotted lines in Fig. 3. If, however, the 
trolley leaves the wire accidentally, or is 
pulled down intentionally, the spring Fim 
mediately expands and forces the sliding sec 
tion N outward, thus increasing the distance 
between the fixed pivot E and axle B and 
throwing the guides Ainto a vertical position 
as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. It will be evident 
that they will remain in this position until 
the trolley is again placed upon the wire, 
when the action of the main spring of the 
trolley arm will again compress the small 
Spring F and throw the guides into their hori 
Zontal position, in which position they are 
25 
35 
55 
75 
go 
95 
IOO 
5 
O 
- 
35 
45 
518,357 
2 
out of the way of insulators and other ob- automatically made operative when the trolley 
leaves the wire, substantially as described. 
structions along the wire. 
2. The combination with a trolley arm, of a 
Among the advantages of my improved 
sliding extension at the outer end of the said 
trolley guide it may be stated that the action 
arm, a trolley wheel and inclined guidespiv 
is entirely automatic, and that whenever the 
otally mounted in the outer end of the exten 
trolley tends to leave the wire, the guides are 
sion, connecting rods pivoted to the guides 
immediately thrown up into position to re 
and to the trolley proper, a spring arranged 
place it. If the trolley leaves the wire acci 
to urge the extension outward, and a stop to 
dentally, in most instances it will be immedi 
limit its outward movement, substantially as 
ately replaced automatically, the guides ris 
described. 
ing before the trolley has left the wire to a 
3. The combination with the hollow trolley 
distance beyond their reach. The guides 
arm, of the sliding extension having a shank 
also facilitate replacing the trolley upon the 
fitting therein, the spring urging said exten 
wire when it is pulled down by a cord or rope 
sion outward, the trolley wheel in the bifur 
as is customary in reversing a car at the end 
cated head of the extension, the inclined 
of a route. 
guides pivoted on the outside of the head and 
Another advantage of my invention is that 
provided with short arms, and the rods con 
the sliding extension permits the wheel to ad 
necting said short arms with the trolley arm 
just itself to the wire more perfectly in going 
proper, substantially as described. 
around curves, and this feature in connection 
4. The combination with a trolley arm bent 
With the automatic guides renders it almost 
upwardly near its outer end, of a spring-pro- 55 
impossible for the trolley to escape from the . 
jected sliding extension, a trolley wheel and 
wire on curves as well as at other portions of 
inclined guides pivotally mounted in said ex 
the line. 
tension, said guides being automatically oper 
Having described my invention, what I 
ated by the pressure of the trolley upon the 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
wire, substantially as described. 
S 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
1. The combination with a trolley arm, of a 
presence of two witnesses, 
sliding extension at the outer end of said 
THEODORE STRAUS. 
arm, a spring arranged to urge said extension 
outward, atrolley, pivoted guides upon the ex 
tension, and connections between the guides 
and the trolley arm, whereby the former are 
CHAs. L. HuTCHINS, 
JNO. WATSON, Jr. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518457.txt	(No Model.) 
A. R. ISAACS. 
FIRE BOX AND GRATE FOR RANGES, STOWES, OR HEATERS. 
No. 518,457. 
Patented Apr. 17, 1894. 
77. 
C 42NZ 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
s 
N SS 
2 
l/ 
Zzy2%2 
2 
eV 
-76 
AY it 
% 
WITNESSES : 
aaea 
a 6-3rt 
IAWWEWTOR 
//ec.es/ 
au?t v6 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTA R. ISAACS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FIRE-BOX AND GRATE FOR RANGES, STOVES, OR HEATERs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters eatent No. 518,457, dated April 17, 1894. 
Application filed June 28, 1893, 
Serial No. 479,062, (No model.) 
cd 
25 
35 
s 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUSTA R. ISAACs, of 
New York city, in the county and State of 
New York, have invented a new and Improved 
Fire-Box and Grate for Ranges, Stoves, or 
Heaters, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the fire pots and grates of stoves, ranges and 
heaters, and it has for its object to construct 
a fire pot adapted to be introduced into the 
regular fire pot of a stove, range or heater to 
which the application is to be made, the fire 
being adapted to be made in the auxiliary 
firepot. The auxiliary fire pot thereby serves 
to protect the fire bricks in the main fire pot 
of the stove. 
Another object of the invention is to so con 
struct the fire pot that it may rest upon the 
bottom of the ash pit of the stove, and may 
be entirely removed from the ash pit in a con 
venient and expeditious manner when desir 
able. 
Another feature of the invention consists 
in providing the auxiliary fire pot with two 
grates, one or both of which may be removed, 
one of the grates being located at the lower 
portion of the fire pot and constituting the 
bottom thereof, the other grate being located 
between the bottom and the top, thus provid 
ing for a greater or a less amount of fuel in 
the fire pot. 
Another feature of the invention is to pro 
vide one or both of the grates with a rake at 
tachment, whereby the bed of coals or the 
bed of fire may be shaken when necessary. 
The invention consists in the novel construc 
tion and combination of the several parts, as 
will be hereinafter fully set forth and pointed 
out in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in both the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a vertical central section taken 
through the ash pit and fire pot of a stove, 
and likewise centrally through the auxiliary 
fire pot located within the said main fire pot 
of the stove, the section being taken practi 
cally on the line 1-1 of Fig. 2; and Fig. 2 is 
a plan view of the auxiliary fire pot removed 
from the stove. 
In carrying out the invention the auxiliary 
fire pot A is made preferably of metal, and 
may be given any desired cross sectional 
shape; as for example it may be rectangular 
or circular in cross section, or may be made 
in any shape in which the main fire pot of a 
range, stove or heater is constructed. 
The auxiliary fire pot A, is of sufficient 
length to extend practically from the bottom 
of the ash pit B of the stove to a point imme 
diately beneath and practically close to the 
stove lid or lids C, as shown in Fig. 1; and 
ordinarily the fire pot is provided with legs 
10, which rest upon the bottom of the ash pit 
and thus hold the bottom of the auxiliary fire 
pot a proper distance above the bottom of the 
ash pit to admit of a current of air beneath 
the grate or through the bottom of the pot. 
The auxiliary fire pot is preferably con 
structed of a series of bars 11, which may ex 
tend vertically or horizontally as in practice 
may be found most desirable; or a portion of 
the bars may be vertically located while others 
may be horizontally placed; but preferably 
the bars are produced at each side of the 
center of the auxiliary pot, as shown in Fig. 
1, leaving practically a solid section at its 
central portion. The upper portion of the 
auxiliary fire pot is provided with a bail 12, 
which is folded upon the side of the pot when 
it is located in a stove or range, the bail serv 
ing as a means for withdrawing the auxil 
iary pot from the stove or range when it is 
not needed. 
The auxiliary fire pot is usually provided 
with two grates, a lower grate 13 and an up 
per one 14. The lower grate constitutes 
practically the bottom of the auxiliary fire 
pot, and when not desired may be drawn en 
tirely out from the fire pot, for example 
through the opening closed by the ash pit 
door 15 of the stove. The upper grate 14, is 
likewise removable, and both of the grates 
are preferably supported in position by rest 
ing upon lugs 16, formed upon the sides of 
the auxiliary firepot; and the grates are them 
selves provided with lugs 17, preferably lo 
cated at their rear portions, which lugs eater 
and pass through openings 18, made for ex 
55 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
45 
 
518,457 
O 
ample in the back of the auxiliary fire pot to 
receive said lugs. 
The grates are provided with suitable knobs 
or handles 19, at their front portions, and also 
preferably with a flange or flanges 20, like 
wise located at the front and adapted to cover 
the openings 21 made in the front of the aux 
iliary fire pot through which the grates are 
entered, as shown also in Fig. 1. 
All of the grates, or only one of them, if 
desired, may be provided with a raking at 
tachment E. This raking attachment pref 
erably comprises a bar 22, which is located 
for example beneath the central portion of 
the grate, and is supported by means of suit 
able hangers 23, extending downward from 
the grate, which bar is provided with two or 
more cross bars 25, usually located at the rear 
portion of the main bar 22, as shown in Fig. 
2; and from the cross bars a series of fingers 
26, is projected upward, which fingers are 
adapted to enter the spaces between the bars 
of the grate. Thus it will be observed that 
the raking attachment is practically a fixture 
upon the grate, and that when the fire is to 
be stirred, by reciprocating the main bar 22 
of the rake the fingers will be drawn through 
the bed of coals and will loosen the coal and 
sift downward the ashes. 
In Fig. 1, I have illustrated one of the 
grates as located at the center of the auxil 
iary pot and the Second as located at the bot 
tom, while a third set of lugs i6, is located 
above the intermediate set and a third front 
opening 21, is illustrated above the interme 
diate opening, and a third grate is shown in 
dottedlines as being supported by the upper 
In practice, however, two grates 
set of lugs. 
only are necessary, as when a medium fire 
only is required the intermediate grate is 
placed in position and the lower grate may 
likewise be placed in the pot. The fire is 
built upon the intermediate grate, and if sub 
sequently a much heavier fire is needed the 
45 intermediate grate may be drawn entirely out 
from the auxiliary fire pot and the coals 
dumped upon the lower grate, and it will 
then be observed that the entire capacity of 
25 
35 
50 
55 
75 
the auxiliary fire pot may be employed to re 
ceive fuel. If however, a small or temporary 
fire is needed, simply to warm an article or to 
hastily prepare a meal, one of the grates may 
be placed in the uppermost position shown in 
dotted lines, and it will then be observed that 
but little fuel will be required to produce a 
hasty and fierce fire if necessary. By means 
of this auxiliary fire pot great economy of 
fuel is obtained, as the depth of the fire pot 
may be regulated according to the amount of 
fire required. The auxiliary fire pot is ex 
ceedingly simple, it is durable and it may be 
readily placed in the main fire pot of any 
stove, furnace or range to which such appli 
cation is desired; and furthermore, I desire it 
to be understood that the bottom grate need 
not be placed as low down as shown in the 
drawings; in fact, the location of the grates 
will be entirely controlled by the character 
of the stove, range or furnace to which the 
application is made. 
It will be understood that the ordinary grate 
of the stove, range or furnace is removed be 
fore the auxiliary fire pot is placed in posi 
tion; and it will be likewise observed that the 
auxiliary fire pot will preserve the fire brick 
of the main fire pot intact. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
An improved removable fire pot for stoves, 
consisting of a grated like body or shell, hav 
ing a series of lugs 16 arranged in different 
horizontal planes, a grate section adapted to 
be slid horizontally into the shell, and to rest 
at its sides on such lugs, said grate having 
depending hangers 23, and a raker member, 
held for horizontal reciprocation in such 
hangers, and formed with rake fingers 26, held 
to project through the horizontal grate bars, 
all arranged substantially as shown and for 
the purposes described. 
AUGUSTA R, ISAACS. 
Witnesses: 
J. FRED. ACKER, 
C. SEDGWICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518557.txt	(No Model.) 
W. A. TIPSON. 
REMOWING ARTIFICIAL PIPE FROM MANDRELS, 
No. 518,557. 
 
Patented Apr. 17, 1894, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. TIPSON, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
PACIFIC ASPHALTUM PIPE COMPANY, OF CALIFORNIA. 
. 
REMOVING ART FICIAL PPE FROM MAND RELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,557, dated April 17, 1894. 
Application filed May 29, 1893, Serial No. 475,834. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. A. TIPSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at San 
Francisco, in the county of San Francisco and 
State of California, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Methods of and 
Apparatus for Removing Artificial Pipe from 
Mandrels; and Idohereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of Said invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it most nearly ap 
pertains to make, use, and practice the same. 
My present invention relates to an im 
proved method and apparatus for removing 
artificial pipe, such as made of asphaltum or 
bitumen, from off the forming mandrel for 
the pipe, as will be hereinafter more fully set 
forth and described. 
Heretofore in the manufacture of asphalt 
Orbitumen pipe, great trouble has been found 
in successfully removing the finished pipe 
from the mandrel, and in order to do so it has 
been customary to wrap the mandrel with pa 
per or other material before rolling the ma 
terial thereon. While the mandrel thus 
Wrapped will permit the removal of the fin 
ished pipe therefrom it is subject to a serious 
defect, which consists in the fact that the pa 
per or other wrapper wound around the man 
drel adheres to the pipe when removed, inas 
much as the material out of which the pipe is 
made is rolled upon the mandrel while in a 
plastic condition. The removal of this lining 
involves great expense and if it be not re 
moved the pipe will quickly become clogged 
by the flow of water therethrough. 
In order to more fully comprehend my in 
vention, reference must be had to the accom 
panying drawing, which is a side elevation of 
the steaming and cooling apparatus, showing 
the cooling chest in section and position of 
the pipe before and after removal from the 
mandrel. 
In the drawing the letter A indicates the 
receiving and cooling chamber or tank, which 
is filled with cold water, into which the pipe 
is submerged after removal from the mandrel. 
Within this tank, I secure the vertical steam 
or hot air pipe B, which projects beyond the 
top and bottom of said tank, This pipe is 
55 
55 
surrounded by the shell C, which prevents 
the water contained within the tank from con 
tacting therewith and becoming heated. To 
the lower end of the pipe B, is connected the 
pipe D, as shown, which pipe preferably runs 
from an engine, located at any suitable point 
and receives the exhaust therefrom. The top 
of shell C, is provided with an annular flange 
a, which provides a seat for the hollow man 
drel E, which fits over the projecting end of 
pipe B, as shown. Upon this hollow mandrel 
is rolled the plastic material which forms the 
After the pipe has been formed within the 
machine upon the hollow mandrel E, which 
is constructed of metal, the same is removed 
from the machine and carried to the steaming 
and cooling apparatus in order to remove the 
pipe therefrom. In order to do this the end 
of the hollow mandrel E, is placed over pro 
jecting end of pipe B, so as to allow the es 
caping steam or hot air to enter therein. The 
steam or hot air completely fills the hollow 
mandrel and makes its escape through open 
ing in the opposite end thereof. Inasmuch 
as the outer surface of the mandrel is of metal, 
it is obvious that the temperature of the steam 
uickly heats the same. When the mandrel 
0. 
is heated, the inner wall of the pipe becomes 
somewhat softened and the weight of same 
will cause it to slip from off the mandrel and 
gradually descend into tank A, as shown in 
the drawing. The mandrel is then removed 
from over the steam pipe and laid aside until 
required for use by the pipe making machine. 
The pipe removed therefrom is allowed to re 
main submerged within the receiving tank 
until thoroughly cooled. 
By my method for removing the pipe, the 
same is freed from the mandrel in a much 
quicker time than heretofore, besides com 
pletely overcoming danger of the pipe being 
broken or damaged during the process of re 
moval. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure protection 
in by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The method of removing and cooling as 
phaltum or similar pipe from a hollow man 
drel, which consists in subjecting the interior Ioo 
95 
75 
C 
25 
35 
45 
50 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518657.txt	(No Model, ) 
M. C. & W. E. WHITWORTH. 
TRANSPLANTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 518,657, 
Patented Apr, 24, 1894, 
 
III 
HO/g/ ) 
N. 
Y 
 
HE O -Z 
H 
N 
(O 
 
O N64 
| 
I 
 
  
  
  
  
 
M. C. & W. E. WHITWORTH. 
TRANSPIANTER 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Apr. 24, 1894, 
E. E Zo 
(No Model.) 
No. 518,657, 
  
  
 
 
 
 
N. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 518,657, 
 
 
 
 
M. C. & W. E. WHITWORTH, 
TRANSPLANTER, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 24, 1894. 
22 
E7tez 
22. ha 
 
 
f % 2 
 
 
 
 
 
Sa 
o 
o t 
sists 
it 
, 
s: 
st 
N 
W 
26/2 af22 esses 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAL CHIGA WHITWORTH AND WILLIAM EDWARD WHITWORTH, OF 
DONELSON, TENNESSEE. 
TRANSPLAN TER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,657, dated April 24, 1894. 
Application filed November 27, 1893, Serial No, 492,158, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, MAL CHIGA WHIT 
WORTH and WILLIAM EDWARD WHITWORTH, 
citizens of the United States, residing at Don 
elson, in the county of Davidson and State of 
Tennessee, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Transplanters; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in transplanters and it consists in the con 
struction and arrangement of the parts here 
inafter described and definitely pointed out 
in the claims. 
The aim and purpose of the invention are 
the provision of an improved machine for 
transplanting potato, tobacco and other plants 
in a greatly facilitated manner, decreasing 
the amount of labor usually incident to that 
class of work, and at the same time properly 
embrace the plants in the soil, with dispatch 
and rapidity. These objects are attained by 
the construction illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings wherein like letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in the sev 
eral views, and in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the machine. 
Fig. 2 is a top plan view. Fig. 3 is a rear ele 
vation. Fig. 4 is a frontelevation. Fig. 5 is 
a longitudinal vertical section. Fig. 6 is a 
detail view of a roller, and Fig. 7 is a trans 
verse section through the center support. 
In the drawings. A represents the side-bars 
of the frame having their forward ends con 
nected by an arched cross-bar B forming con 
tinuations of the side-bars. On the upper 
faces of the side-bars is secured the shaft or 
axle C which is intermediately arched and 
carries on its outer ends the spindles on which 
the ground wheels Dare mounted, which sup 
port the forward portion of the machine. 
D'represents the caster wheels pivotally 
secured in vertical sockets d secured to the 
rear ends of the side-bars. These Sockets are 
formed on the outer ends of laterally extend 
ing arms d' so that the caster wheels may be 
turned forward parallel with the side bars, 
when the machine is stored or packed for 
. 
F represents the opening or furrow plow 6o 
shipment, or in backing the machineifat any 
time it should be necessary. 
Mounted on the upperportions of the front 
arch B and the arched axle or shaft C is the 
 tie-bar or beam E, the same being rigidly 55 
secured to the arches, and extending from 
the arch B back to a point approximate the 
center of the machine, at which point a ver 
tical aperture is formed therein. 
consisting of two wings f united at their for 
ward ends and at that point constituting the 
penetrating or cutting edge. The wings di 
verge outwardly and extend downwardly as 
at f' and at their upper rear ends have the 65 
apron extensions F which serves to retain the 
plants in an upright position after depositing 
the same in the furrow and between the wings. 
The plow F has a curved cutting edge and is 
secured at its upper forward edge to the two 7o 
plow-beams F which extend laterally out 
ward and forward at an incline, and have 
their forward ends bent down and passed 
through apertures or sockets in the forward 
ends of the side-bars A Suitable keys f* are 75 
passed through the ends of the beams to re 
tain them in their sockets. The sockets 
through which the ends of the beams pass are 
of a size sufficient to allow a limited vertical 
movement of the beams, so that the plow 8o 
may be elevated or depressed when desired. 
To adjust the plow, a vertical adjusting 
rod G is pivotally secured to and between the 
wings thereof at a point near their forward 
ends and extends upward to and through the 85 
aperture in the beam E. The upper end of 
the rod has a cap or nut g for limiting its 
downward movement. The central portion 
of the rod is screw-threaded as g and on this 
threaded portion is a nut or disk G'. Above go 
the disk G' is a spiral spring H sleeved on 
the rod, its upper end abutting against the 
under surface of the beam E, and its lower 
end resting on the disk G'. By adjusting the 
disk G the spring pressure on the plow may 95 
be varied, so that an equal penetration may 
be had in different characters of soil, and 
also a variation in the penetration to suit 
different species of plants. By applying the 
spring pressure to the plow, we are enabled Ioo 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
518,657 
7o 
75 
25 
20 
(5 
to form a practically regular furrow in ground 
having an uneven surface. The rear ends of 
the side-bars A are connected by the cross 
bar A which is slightly arched and has two 
5 posts I on opposite sides intermediate the 
ends and center. 
J is a yoke having an arched cross-bar i 
and downwardly extending and inwardly in. 
clined arms J' having two or more bolt holes 
Io i' therein. On the ends of the barj are rear 
wardly extending flanges.fhaving slots there 
in through which the posts I pass. Sleeved 
on the posts above the flangesi are springs 
I their lower ends resting on the flanges and 
their upper ends abutting against the nuts 
meshing with the screw-threads on the posts. 
By adjusting the nuts up or down the ten 
sion of the springs may be varied to vary the 
down pressure on the yoke. 
Krepresents two spherical rollers journale 
in U-shaped frames le which are secured at 
their upper central portions to the bars K. 
These bars K' are of a length sufficient to 
carry their forward ends in proximity to the 
plow beams, and at that point have the hooks 
Ic' formed thereon, which engage with clev 
ises k secured on the beam. The rear ends 
of the bars K are upturned forming flanges 
k at points in the rear of the rollers. Suit 
able apertures are formed in the ends lic 
through which boltsk pass the same passing 
through one of the apertures in the arms J', 
preferably through the upper apertures when 
the soil is ridged and in the lower apertures 
when the soil is level, thereby constituting 
an adjustable connection. The rollers are 
held in oppositely inclined positions and the 
inclination may be altered by virtue of the 
connections between the inclined arms J and 
the flanges k thereby forming the ridges or 
hills about the row of plants, the Springs on 
the posts exerting the requisite pressure on 
the rollers. 
We have found that the use of spherical 
rollers result in much better packing of the 
soil, and ridging of the same about the 
plants, especially on level ground than other 
forms. Again these spherical rollers are in 
terchangable should one side become Worn, 
each fitting on either side. 
To clean the earth from the rolls, we Secure 
the semi-circular scrapers L to the frames lic 
by the spring arms l secured to the ends of 
the scrapers and extending back to and 
through suitable apertures formed in the 
frame. The scrapers normally rest on the 
rolls and peel or scrape off all matter adher 
ing thereto. 
It is evident that cylindrical rolls can be 
used with soil of certain character, but the 
spherical rolls we regard as an important fea 
ture of the invention. 
On the under side of the beam E. at its 
front is a bracket consisting of the vertical 
plate m and the inclined plate m'having the 
parallel vertical portion mat its lower end. 
So 
35 
45 
Between the parallel portion is an I-shaped 
block M having a central vertical socket 
therein in which the shank n, of a cutter car 
rier N is pivotally secured. 
The cutting wheel or colterN' consists of a 
large disk having a cutting edge and is lo 
cated directly in front of the plow, for the 
purpose of cutting all weeds or foreign mat 
ter that may be on the surface in the path of 
the plow. To adjust this cutter suitable 
bolts o are passed through the plates m 'm' 
between the projections on the block M. By 
tightening the bolts the block is held firmly 
in place; the projection on the block limiting 
its movement and preventing its accidental 
detachment should the bolts become loose. 
P is a leveling board adjustably secured to 
the front face of the vertical ends of the 
cross-bar by having elongated slots p formed 
therein through which suitable bolts p' pass. 
The purpose of this board is for leveling the 
ground in advance of the plow, and the same 
has the V-shaped recess in its lower edge to 
level or fit a ridge. 
Q are the plant boxes curved to correspond 
to the curvature of the ground wheels above 
which they are placed, the same being held 
fixedly in position by the supports g g at 
front and rear, the supports having their 
lower-ends secured to the frame and front 
cross bar respectively. The boxes have open 
tops and the base is carried up over a por 
tion of the rear of the tops as at Q to prevent 
the plants from falling from the boxes. By 
forming the boxes in a curve and placing 
them over the wheels they are so located as 
not to interfere with the operation of the 
machine and are in convenient reach of the 
operators, at the same time a large number 
of plants can be packed therein. 
R represents the operators' seats located in 
the rear of the boxes on the side-bars. 
R is the driver's seat located on the beam E. 
Suitable feet rests S for the operators are 
secured on opposite sides of the ground 
wheels. 
To indicate the periods in which the plants 
are to be deposited we secure a metallic spring 
T on a side bar A, its forward end projecting 
up and out, and in the path of the spokes of 
the wheel so that as the wheel revolves the 
spokes force the end of the spring in and as 
the spoke passes the same it will quickly 
spring back striking the following spoke and 
click or audibly indicate the interval for 
In operating the above described machine 
the plants being placed in the boxes are taken 
therefrom and placed separately between the 
Wings of the plow as the machine is advanced. 
The plants are held in their upright positions 
by the extension on the rear of the wings, 
which project back to a point directly in front 
of rollers. The rollers being placed at an in 
cline force the soil up against the plants and 
pack the same. The tension of the spring on 
deposit. 
. 
- 
- 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
IIS 
25 
Y 
518,657 
the yoke being regulated to exert the requi 
site pressure on the rollers so that the plants 
will be snugly but not overpacked. 
When the plants are to be thickly planted 
two operators may occupy the machine, alter 
nating in placing the plants between the 
wings, but where the plants are to be placed 
at a distance apart, one operator will suffice. 
Any desired form of draft attachment may 
be employed. 
We are aware that many minor changes in 
the construction and arrangement of the parts 
of the machine can be made and substituted 
for those herein shown and described without 
in the least departing from the nature and 
principle of our invention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a plant transplanter, the combination 
with a frame composed of side and end cross 
bars, of an opening plow centrally located be 
tween the side bars, beams extending diago 
nally from the plow to the frame, and loosely 
secured at their forwardends, a spring-pressed 
rod on the plow, and laterally, and vertically 
adjustable rollers on opposite sides and in the 
rear of the plow, substantially as described. 
2. In a plant transplanter, the combination. 
with a surrounding frame, of an opening plow 
consisting of two outwardly inclined wings 
below the frame, a fixed beam above the plow, 
oppositely diverging plow beams, rollers in 
the rear of the plow and on opposite sides 
thereof, frames in which the rollers are mount 
ed, extensions on the roller frames loosely 
connected to the plow beams and adjustable 
spring-pressed connections between the plow 
frame and rear of the roller beams, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a transplanter, a yoke having down 
wardly and inwardly inclined ends, in com 
bination with the frame supporting the same, 
and rollers adjustably secured on the inclined 
ends of the yoke, substantially as described. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
4. In a transplanter, the combination with 
a frame, of inclined supports thereon, and 
rollers adjustably secured to the supports, and 
adapted to be adjusted vertically and later 
ally thereon substantially as described. 
5. In a transplanter, the combination with 
the frame, of movable inclined supports there 
on, springs engaging the Supports, and rollers 
adjustably secured to the supports, and hav 
ing vertical and lateral adjustments thereon 
Substantially as described. 
6. In a transplanter, the combination with 
a frame, of a Spring-pressed support, rollers 
on the support, and an opening plow, having - . 
plant supporting extensions carried backbe 
tween the rollers substantially as described. 
7. In a transplanter, the combination with 
the frame, of a plow, a colter, a sliding block 
in which the colter is pivoted, suspending 
plates on the frame between which the block 
is placed and bolts passing through the plate 
on opposite sides of the block, substantially 
as described. 
8. In a transplanter, the combination with 
a frame having an arched cross-bar at its 
front, of an adjustable leveling board extend 
ing directly across the frame and adjustably 
secured at opposite ends to the vertical por 
tions of cross-bar, substantially as described. 
9. In a transplanter, the combination with 
the wheels, of curved plant receptacles located 
over the wheels, and seats adjacent to the re 
ceptacles, substantially as described. 
10. In a transplanter, the combination with 
the wheels, of plant receptacles located above 
and extending downward in the rear thereof, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof weaffixour signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
MAL CHIGA WHITWORTH. 
WILLIAM EDWARD WHITWORTH, 
75 
Witnesses: 
W. B. BALLARD, 
J. P. WILLIAMSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518758.txt	(No Model.) 
M. R. JEWELL, 
RULER 
No. 518,758, 
Patented Apr. 24, 1894, 
 
Rd.) 
2 W 
-- 
/72 2/6/2 Zaza 
avysemy will 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAJOR ROMEYN JEWELL, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
RULER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,758, dated April 24, 1894. 
Application filed March 31, 1893, Serial No. 468,536, (No model.) 
55 
fo 
75 
- 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, MAJOR ROMEYN JEW 
ELL, of Rochester, in the county of Monroe 
and State of New York, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Improvement in Rulers; 
and I do hereby declare that the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description of the 
Same, reference being had to the drawings ac 
Companying this application. 
My improvement relates, to flexible rulers 
made of thin steel or other suitable material, 
and in general features resembles that patent. 
ed by C.E. Jeweli and M.R. Jewell December 
30, 1890, No. 443,652; being provided with a 
Strip which raises one edge of the ruler from 
the surface on which it rests. In said patent 
two strips are used, located on opposite sides 
of the ruler and adjacent to both edges. 
In my present invention a strip is em 
ployed adjacent to one edge only, but of such 
size as to project from both surfaces, projec 
tions being coincident or in the same verti 
cal line, by which means one edge only of the 
ruler is used for penciling and the other for 
pen use, instead of alternate edges as in the 
before mentioned patent. 
In the drawings-Figure 1 is a plan view 
of the ruler showing the strip divided into 
two sections with a single closed space of the 
ruler between them. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
showing the strip divided into three sections 
with two closed spaces of the ruler between 
them. Fig. 3 is a view of the ruler-blankcor 
responding with Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a diagram 
showing cross sections of the ruler in oppo 
site or reversed positions. Fig. 5 is a per 
Fig. 6 
spective view of one end of the strip. 
is a plan view similar to Figs.1 and 2 but 
showing a modification in the attachment of 
the strip to the ruler. Fig. 7 is a cross sec 
tion of Fig. 6. 
A indicates the ruler, which is made of thin 
metal, hard rubber, or other suitable mate 
rial, so as to spring and adapt itself to any 
curved surface over which it may be used. 
As shown in the drawings it has an opening 
a in the center which is of slightly greater 
width than the sides bb, by which means 
when lines are drawn along the edges they 
Will be parallel and equidistant apart, as 
described in the before mentioned Letters 
Patent. 
w 
B is the strip which is inserted in the ruler 
for the purpose of raising one edge higher 
than the other. It is made in sections of rub 
ber, or some other yielding material, which 
The ruler is pro 
will bend with the ruler. 
vided on one of its sides with narrow longi 
tudinal grooves c c, having offsets or openings 
c' c' of greater width than the slots, as shown 
in Fig. 3. The strip B is also provided with 
shallow grooves did on two opposite sides, the 
body of the strip projecting above and below 
said grooves. The strip is attached to the 
ruler by inserting one end into one of the 
openings c', pushing the strip along till it is 
fully seated and fills the groove from end to 
end, and when so seated the rear end drops 
into and fills the opening c', as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2. The strip is held in place by the fit 
ting of its grooves over the edges of the slot. 
The sections are disposed at intervals the 
whole length of the ruler, leaving one or more 
solid portions f of the ruler between them in 
order to insure proper strength of the ruler. 
Fig. 1 shows two of such sections with a sin 
gle break, and Fig.2 shows three sections 
with two breaks. If desired a greater or less 
number of sections may be used. 
By the construction above described the 
supporting strip is on one side of the ruler, 
only, adjacent to one edge, and the projection 
is from both surfaces in the same coincident 
line, instead of two being employed on oppo 
site sides and adjacent to both edges as in the 
patent before referred to. The construction 
is much simpler, inasmuch as the body of the 
ruler is divested of any projection at one edge 
and is flat over the greater portion of its sur 
face, which renders it easier to handle and 
pack, and facilitates its use. The same ad 
vantage is attained, as it can be used either 
side up, as illustrated in Fig. 4, and one side 
rests in contact with the supporting surface 
and the other raised above it, thereby adapt 
ing it to use with both pencil and pen. The 
forms now shown are the result of difficulty 
experienced in cementing strips of rubber to 
steel after the latter has been polished and 
plated. 
Figs. 6 and 7 show a modified form of the 
strip each section consisting of two short 
pieces of rubber tube strung on a loop of 
wire, said loop being passed through holes 
- 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
9o 
95 
IOO 
518,758. 
2 
made in the ruler, one piece resting above a supporting strip extending longitudinally 
and the other below the body of the ruler. 
of the same adjacent to one edgethereof, the 
Having described my invention I do not plate having a slot to receive the strip and 
claim a ruler provided with supporting strips the strip provided with grooves in its sides to 25 
adjacent to both edges and attached one on embrace the edges of the slot, as specified. 
3. A ruler consisting of a body or. plate and 
each side. Neither do I claim a ruler pro- 
vided with plugs adjacent to one edge only a supporting strip extending longitudinally 
and projecting on both sides. 
of the same adjacent to one edgethereof, the 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure plate provided with a slot to receive the strip, 3o 
by Letters Patent, is- 
said slot having an offset to allow the en 
1. The combination, with a ruler consisting trance of the strip, and the strip provided 
of a thin plate, of a supporting strip seated with grooves to embrace the edges of the slot 
loosely in the ruler adjacent to one edge only, as specified. 
and projecting on opposite sides in the same 
coincident line, whereby the opposite edge of my name in the presence of two subscribing 
the ruler can be brought in direct contact witnesses. 
With a supporting surface either side up, said 
strip extending longitudinally of the ruler 
and being of such length as to support the 
2. A ruler consisting of a body or plate and 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 35 
MAJOR ROMEYN JEWELL. 
2O Same, as herein shown and described. 
Witnesses: 
JR. F. OSGOOD, 
C. R. OSGOOD. 
- 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518858.txt	(No Model.) 
H. S. PELL 
STEAM BOILER, 
No. 518,858. 
rzzzzafsaks 
Patented Apr, 24, 1894. 
y 
242 . 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
23 22 2 
 
z, 2. f 
)YM()))Y% iii. 111 fff?, iii, AK), 
& 
Yili KWAAF) 
W 
a 
% 2 
SSES 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY S. PELL, OF AKRON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE STIRLING COMPANY., 
OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
STEAM-BOLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,858, dated April 24, 1894. 
Application filed December 22, 1893, Serial No.494,405, (No model.) 
60 
65 
75 
O 
15 
ed 
25 
- 
- 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARRY S. PELL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Akron, 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Steam-Boilers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention has more par 
ticular reference to tubular steam boilers of 
the general type shown and described in the 
Stirling patent, No. 479,678, issued July 26, 
1892; and my invention consists in the fea 
tures and details of construction hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
The drawing represents a transverse ver 
tical section of my improved tubular boiler. 
In making my improved steam boiler, I 
make a fire chamber, A, of the desired size, 
and coverit With an arch, a. I arrange water 
and steam drums, B and B and B, in the 
upper part of the boiler, and connect the first 
two of them with water pipes, b, and steam 
pipes, b', which steam pipes are also used to 
connect the last two of the drums mentioned. 
I arrange in...the lower part of the boiler a 
drum, C, which is intended to be connected 
with and suspended from the three upper 
drums mentioned by a series of tubes, c, so 
as to afford communication between them. 
Deflecting plates, c and c', are arranged be 
hind the series of tubes connecting the drum, 
C, and the drums, B and B, so as to deflect 
the heat and products of combustion upward 
through the one series of tubes and down 
through the other, as indicated by arrows, in 
order to expose as great a portion of their 
length as practicable to the heat, 
Up to this point, I have simply described 
in general terms the construction shown in 
the Stirling patent referred to, except in the 
matter of suspending the lower drum, and 
reference may be had to such patent for. 
a more minute and detailed description of 
the construction and operation of the parts. 
While using these parts which are found in 
the Stirling construction, I do not, however, 
lead the heat and products of combustion di 
rectly from the last series of tubes up and out 
through the smoke stack; but arrange a wall 
or deflecting plate, D, at the back of the last 
series of tubes. Where a deflecting plate 
is used, I prefer to have it end a sufficient 
distance below the upper drum, B', so as to 
afford space for the heat and products of 
combustion to be drawn up and over its up 
per edge. Behind this deflecting plate, Iar 
range a lower feed water drum, E, which is 
connected to the upper drum, B', by a series 
of tubes, e, and which is provided with a pipe, 
e', leading from a source of water supply and 
a blow-off pipe, e. As shown in the draw 
ing, I have provided the boiler with an un 
derground connection, F, leading to the chim 
ney or smoke stack, although other means 
for carrying off the smoke and products of 
combustion may be employed if desired. 
In operation, the water from the source of 
supply enters the lower feed water drum 
through the pipe, e'. This drum is intended 
to receive and catch the larger portion of the 
sediment that may be contained in the water, 
which sediment may from time to time be 
carried off through the pipe, e. The Water 
passes up through the series of tubes, e, into 
the steam and water drum, B. This drum 
communicates through the pipe, b', with the 
steam and water drum, B, So that its upper 
portion is filled with steam exerting a press 
ure on the surface of the Water, so as to cause 
its more ready feeding into the other drums 
of the boiler. The water passes down from 
the drum, B', into the lower drum, C, and 
then up through the series of tubes connect 
ing such drum with the upper steam and 
water drums, B and B'. These drums, asbe 
fore explained, have steam and water com 
munication with each other, so that a circu 
lation of the water through the drums, Band 
B' and C, is constantly maintained. It is 
not necessary, however, that this circulation 
be so direct as to prevent the water from. 
passing through the mud drum in its circu 
lation from one elevated drum to another. 
Nor is it necessary that all the steam or water 
pass from one drum to another. 
I regard the lower feed drum as a mate 
rial and important feature of my invention. 
By causing the heavier impurities in the 
water to settle before reaching the elevated 
drums, it assists in preventing the formation 
of Scale therein and in the middle and for 
ward banks of tubes; and by utilizing escap 
ing gases it enables me to economize in fuel, 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
95 
OO 
2 
518,858 
5 
and, generally, assists in securing an economi 
cal operation of the boiler. 
What Iregard as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a water tube boiler, the combination 
of elevated drums having steam and water 
Communication with each other, a lower mud 
drum, tubes connecting the elevated drums 
with the lower mud drum, allower feed drum, 
Io tubes connecting the lower feed drum with 
One of the elevated drums, and means for sup 
plying water to the lower feed drum, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a Water tube boiler, the combination 
I5 of three elevated steam and water drums, B 
and B' and B', a lower drum, C, series of 
tubes connecting the lower drum with each 
of the elevated drums, pipes affording steam 
and water communication between the drums 
B and Band steam communication between 20 
the drums Band B, a lower feed water drum, 
E, a series of tubes connecting the lower feed 
water drum, E, with the elevated steam and 
water drum, B, and means for supplying 
water to the lower feed water drum, substan- 25 
tially as described. 
HARRY S. PELL 
Witnesses: 
P. HANSEN, 
A. R. EIENRY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US518958.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
2. sheets-Sheet 1. 
-- 
J. KIRBY, Jr. 
CURTAIN ROD FIXTURE FOR SLEEPING CARS. 
No. 518,958, 
Patented May 1, 1894. 
%2 Zaze 
 
 
inverto 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. KIRBY, Jr. 
CURTAIN ROD FIXTURE FOR SLEEPING CARs, 
1. 
Patented May 1, 1894, 
No. 518,958, 
Yi A4 . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN KIRBY, JR, OF DAYTON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE DAYTON MANU 
FACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CURTAN - ROD FIXTURE FoR SLEEP N G CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 518,958, dated May 1, 1894. 
Application filed February 13, 1893, Serial No. 462 160, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, JOHN KIRBY, Jr., a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Dayton, 
in the county of Montgomery and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Curtain - Rod Fixtures, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to curtain rod fixtures 
and clothing hooks for sleeping cars and other 
conveyances, and has for its objects, first, a 
simple and efficient means whereby the rods 
and brackets may be concealed from view 
during the daytime when the berths are not 
in use, and readily arranged in position to 
receive the curtains when the berths are made 
up at night, and Second, a convenient means 
of changing the location of the coat and hat 
hooks usually used in connection with or 
adapted to such fixtures, by which means the 
hooks are so located when the berths are 
made up at night, that the hats or clothing 
hung on them will be out of the way and not 
interfere with the comfort of the passenger 
occupying the upper berth, while in the day 
time or when the berths are not in use, the 
upper deck space will be unobstructed by 
the curtain rods and their appurtenances. 
The manner of carrying out my invention 
will be fully set forth in the accompanying 
drawings and specification, in which draw 
lings 
Figurel, represents a cross section of a por 
tion of the upper part of an ordinary sleep 
ing car with my improved curtain rod bracket 
attached and arranged below the ceiling it 
being shown as drawn out to receive the rods 
when a berthis to be made up at night. Fig. 
2, is a top view of the invention. Fig. 3, is a 
cross section through the center of one of the 
upper berths and car roof showing the fixture 
as arranged to slide between the ceiling and 
roof of the car and in the position it occupies 
during the day time or when the rods are de 
tached. Fig. 4 is a front view of the fixture 
as it appears when the berths are not in use 
and the rods removed. Fig. 5, is a perspec 
tive view of a hollow sleeve in which the 
brackets slide. Fig. 6, is a perspective view 
of the coat and hat hooks and plate to which 
they are attached. Fig. 7, is a perspective 
55 
view of the casing or bushing designed to re 
ceive the rod bearings and Fig. 8 is a cross 
section of the bracket through line B B of 
Fig. 1. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures. 
A is the car roof, B the ceiling, D the moni 
tor or upper deck sash, Epartition between 
berths, and F the upperberth (shown closed). 
G is a hollow sleeve provided with a trans 
verse front piece G' and flanges G', by which 
it is secured to the apron H and berth parti 
tion, as shown in Figs. 1 and 5, or it may be 
secured to the deck rail D'within the space C. 
I is the bracket or arm, preferably made in 
the form of a double channel and provided 
at its outer end with a transverse arm J pro 
vided with bearings K, to receive and sup 
port the rods J the ends of which are hollow 
to receive a bolt L to prevent the rods being 
accidentally displaced. This bolt is movable 
through partitions at a formed in the trans 
verse bearing arm J, a plate M to which coat 
and hat hooks N N are attached forms the 
front of the bearing arm J also a finish for 
the fixture when not in use, and this plate is 
provided with a horizontal slot b and vertical 
slot b', the purpose of these slots will pres 
ently appear. The bracket I slides to and 
fro through the sleeve G, its outward move 
ment being limited by a suitable stop such as 
O, while the bracket is fastened back in the 
position shown in Fig. 3, by means of a suit 
able catch such as P, preferably attached to 
a bushing P, recessed into the wood work to 
form a finish and to receive the bearing arm 
J. This catch in the present instance con 
sists of a spring bolt which engages with a 
hole c in the bracket I. When the fixture is 
located below the car ceiling as shown in Fig. 
1, partition Eis cut away to receive sleeve G., 
and to allow bracket I to slide to and fro, an 
opening being cut in the ceiling to allow the 
end of the bracket to pass through it into 
space C. It is however, obvious that it will 
not be necessary to cut the ceiling in cases 
where the form of the roof is such as to per 
mit the complete stroke of the bracket with 
out interfering with the ceiling nor in cases 
where the fixture is located far enough below too 
95 
75 
5 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
518,958 
the ceiling to clear it. When the fixture is 
located as shown in Fig. 3, an opening is cut 
through the roof and covered by a housing or 
hood Q, although the bracket I may be curved 
and arranged to work within the space Cand 
the roof remain intact, preference being to a 
considerable extent dependent upon the con 
struction of the car. A spring R is secured 
within the sleeve G, and arranged to press 
against one of the sides of the bracket I, by 
which a loose fit can be made and the spring 
will imparta steady movement to the bracket, 
The brackets are located at each partition be 
tween each berth, and in the day time when 
the berths are not in use, rods J are removed 
and stored away, preferably in the upper 
berths and when a berth is to be made up two 
of the brackets are drawn out as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, after first releasing spring 
catches P, bolts L are then moved one to the 
right and one to the left, when the rod is 
placed in position in its bearings bolts L are 
moved back to the positions shown in Fig. 2, 
the movement of the bolts being accomplished 
by means of an arm d provided with a knob 
d, this arm remains at rest in the slot b, and 
being attached to bolt L prevents the latter 
being moved until the arm is raised to en 
gage the slotb' when it can be moved in either 
direction carrying with it bolt L as above de 
scribed. A spring e is arranged to exert a 
pressure against arm d and thus prevent ac 
cidental displacement of bolt L. 
The fixtures now in common use for sup 
porting the berth curtain rods in sleeping 
cars, consist of brackets rigidly secured to the 
car structure and project out into the deck 
space of the car, the rods and brackets being 
exposed to view at all times, and giving the 
upper portion of the car a crowded appear 
ance, it is therefore desirable that they be re 
moved from sight when the berths are not in 
use, and it is furthermore desirable that the 
hooks usually attached to the brackets, for 
hanging clothing on should be located at or 
near the outer end of the brackets, where 
coats or other clothing hung on them will 
not interfere with the comfort of the passen 
gers occupying the upper berths and it will 
be observed that my improvement is espe 
cially noveland useful in this respect. It will 
also be observed that my improved bracket 
and hooks can be operated without lowering 
the upper berth, and furthermore, that one 
bracket serves to support one end of each of 
two rods. 
The details of my invention may be modi 
fied in various ways, without departing from 
the spirit thereof, and I do not limit myself 
to the exact construction shown and described. 
What I claim is 
1. A movable bracket or arm for supporting 
curtain rods, adapted to be drawn out into 
the deck space when it is desired to make up 
the berths for use, and to be moved back out 
of the deck space when the berths are not in 
use, said bracket being provided with bear 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
ings whereby one bracket will support one 
end of each of two detachable rods. 
2. A movable bracket or arm for supporting 
curtain rods adapted to be drawn out into the 
deck space when it is desired to make up a 
berth for use and to be moved back out of the 
deck space when the berth is not in use, said 
brackets being provided with bearings where 
by one bracket will support one end of each of 
two rods, in combination with suitable means 
for locking the bracket in position. 
3. A movable bracket or arm for supporting 
curtain rods, a sleeve in which the same is 
adapted to slide, whereby the bracket may 
be drawn out into the deck space when a 
berth is to be made up for use, and moved 
back out of the deck space when the berth is 
not in use, in combination with means for 
supporting a detachable rod upon which to 
hang curtains at the outer end of said bracket. 
4. A curtain rod fixture consisting of a mov 
able bracket or arm provided with one or 
more rod bearings at its outer end and adapt 
ed to be moved out into the deck space when 
a berth is to be made up for use, and to be 
moved back out of the deck space when the 
berth is not in use, a sleeve or other suitable. 
guide in which said bracket is adapted to 
slide, and a plate as M constituting the front 
of the bearings and forming a finish for the 
fixture when not in use. 
5. A curtain rod fixture consisting of a mov 
able bracket or arm, provided with one or 
more rud bearings at its outer end, and adapt 
ed to be moved out into the deck space when 
a berth is to be made up for use, and to be 
moved back out of the deck space when the 
berth is not in use, a sleeve or other suitable 
guide in which said bracket is adapted to 
slide, a bushing or casing attached to the 
deck to receive said bearings and a plate con 
stituting the front of the bearings and form 
ing a finish for the fixture, when not in use. 
6. In a curtain rod fixture, the combination 
of movable bearings for supporting the rods 
and one or more hooks or equivalent means 
for supporting clothing adjacent thereto. 
7. A movable bracket or arm for supporting 
curtain rods adapted to be concealed from 
view When not in use, in combination with 
one or more hooks, or their equivalent upon 
which to hang clothing by which means said 
hooks may be extended out into the berth 
Space. 
8. The combination of one or more hooks 
or their equivalent upon which to hang cloth 
ing, a movable bracket or arm to which said 
hook or hooks are attached, and a sleeve or 
other suitable guide in which said bracket or 
arm is adapted to slide, whereby said hook 
or hooks may be drawn out and withdrawn 
in substantially the manner shown and de 
scribed. 
JOHN KIRBY, JR. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. W. HUNSAKER, 
C. U, RAYMOND, 
75 
90 
95 
do 
Io5 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519058.txt	(No Model.) 
C. EFRAMSON. 
FOLDING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 519,058, 
Patented May 1, 1894, 
 
A2072esses 
(2/3-6242-24. 
6.2. 6 ?. 
a 2 
/72 zvez2227 
6. 46 
2orzes/ . 
a s 
zer 
 
This NATIONAL LITHOGRAPHINa company, 
WASHINGTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 519,058, 
  
C, EFRAMSON. 
FOLDING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented May l, 1894, 
E. 
22,539 
7276 
 
72-y 7 
Afz/zzesses 
as 2-2. 
727s 6 ?.t. - 
A y 
: THE NArtdinal Lithographs company. 
was care, D.C. 
 
/72 zvez2627 
-63-46 
Zeror 
1%azzalez/. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL EFRAMSON, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO EDWIN WIEDENBECK, OF SAME PLACE. 
FOLDING - MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 519,058, dated May 1, 1894. 
Application filed October 2, 1893, Serial No. 487,087. (No model.) 
to all whom it may concern: 
For cutting out the strips of tin, shears are 
Beit known that I, CARL EFRAMSON, a citi 
employed operating after the manner of what 
zen of the United States, residing at Minne 
are known as square shears composed of 
apolis, in the county of Hennepin and State 
the jaw 4 and knife 5. The jaw is secured to 55 
of Minnesota, have invented a new and useful 
the sides of the table 1, and slightly above its 
Folding-Machine, of which the following is a 
top so that the sheets of tin may be passed 
specification. 
beneath it upon the table, and is made ad 
My invention relates to improvements in 
justable by means of the set screws 6. The 
apparatus for cutting strips of tin or other 
knife 5, slides up and down within grooves 6o 
metal and securing the same to the edge of 
or Ways 7 at the sides of the table, and through 
a slot in its top. Its upper or cutting edge is 
such articles as cardboard or paper calendars, 
advertising cards, maps or other display hang 
higher at one end than at the other, so as to 
ings usually placed against the Wall; and the 
Operate after the manner of shears in the 
objects of my improvement are, first, to pro 
usual Way. It is obvious that the knife may 65. 
vide convenient means for cutting the strips 
be placed above and the jaw below the top 
of the table, if desired, though I prefer the 
of tin or other metal in connection with the 
folding apparatus; second, to provide a series 
arrangement above described. 
of folding apparatus to fold the tin upon the 
For Operating the shears, a rock shaft 8 
edge of the card or other article; third, to 
extends from one side to the other of the to 
provide an automatic feeder to feed the strips 
sides 1 of the table and is pivoted therein. 
of tin into the folding machine; and fourth, 
Curved arms 9, are rigidly attached at one 
to provide an adjustable holder to hold the 
end to the rockshaft 8,-preferably one there 
strip of tin while being bent. I attain these 
of near each end of the rock shaft, and pa-SS 
objects by the mechanism illustrated in the 
through openings in or loops upon the knife. 75 
accompanying drawings, in which 
5 as shown in Fig. 1. An arm 10 is also rig 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of the machine. 
idly attached at one end to the rock shafts, 
Fig. 2 is a top view, with a portion of the up 
and at the other end, by means of the link 11, 
per jaw of the holder, a portion of the ham 
is loosely attached to the pedal 12. The le. 
merand of the first and secondfolders broken 
Ver or pedal 12 may be pivoted at one end to 8o 
away. Fig. 3 is a detail showing a side view 
the frame of the machine, and a guide 13 at 
of the feeding apparatus. Fig. 4 is a rear 
tached to the frame, maybe provided to steady. 
view thereof, and Fig. 5 a top view of a por 
the free end of such pedal against lateral 
tion of the same. Fig. 6 is a detail showing 
movement. By the downward pressure of 
the operator's foot upon the pedal 12, the rock 85 
the cams and arm which operate the second 
folder. Fig. 7 is a view of the same looking 
shaft 8 will be rocked and the knife 5 of the 
from the rear. Fig. 8 is a detail showing a 
shears raised to cut the metal sheet which is 
cross section of the lower jaw of the holder 
fed over the top of the table 3 beneath the 
jaw 4 by the operator. 
and the first folder, with operating parts. 
Fig. 9 is an end view of the metal strip, when 
each operation of cutting to make ready for 
ready for the insertion of the edge of the pa 
per or card. Fig. 10 is an end view of the 
the next, it is desirable to use some appropri 
metal strip and edge of the paper or card 
ate spring such as that designated 14 Fig. 1, 
when the first fold is completed. Fig. 11 is 
attached to the frame and operating down 
an edge view of the paper or card and the end 
Ward upon the outer end of the arm 15 which 
of the metal strip when the folding is com 
is secured at its inner end rigidly to the rock 
pleted. 
shaft,8. Igage the width of the strips to be 
Similar numerals refer to similar parts 
used by means of a set slide orgage 16, which 
throughout the several views. 
is adjustably secured to the top of the table 
3, by means of bolts 17 passing through slots too 
The frame of the machine is in the form 
of a table with its sides 1, its legs 2, and its 18 in the set slide and provided with nuts to 
top 3. 
screw down thereon as shown in Figs. 1 and 
To withdraw the knife 5 promptly after 9o 
95. 
IO 
3c) 
35 
45 
 
519,058 
2. By this arrangement the metal strips are 
conveniently cut and delivered where they 
are wanted by the operator to be fed into the 
parts of the machine hereinafter described. 
The more important features of my inven 
tion pertain to the folding of the metal strip. 
To assist in this operation, a holder is pro 
vided consisting of the crossbeam 19 attached 
rigidly to the sides 1 of the table, forming 
the upper jaw of the holder, and a cross bar 
20, Figs. 1, 2 and 8, beneath it forming the 
lower jaw thereof. The upper jaw 19 is raised 
sufficiently above the top of the table 3, to al 
low the strip of metal to be passed beneath it 
upon the table. The lower jaw 20 has two 
arms 21, cast in one piece with or rigidly at 
tached to the lower jaw, and pivoted to the 
sides 1 of the table as shown in Figs. 1 and S, 
so as to allow the jaw to move up and down 
in grasping and releasing the metal strip. 
The first folder 22, may be constructed simi 
larly to the lower jaw 20, and pivoted to the 
sides of the table by arms 23, Figs. 1, 2 and 8. 
The second folder 24 extends transversely 
across the table and may be made capable of 
moving in a horizontal plane, by being con 
fined at its ends within grooves 25 upon the 
sides 1 of the table. The hammer 26 is rig 
idly attached to two arm plates 27, one at 
each side of the table, which are pivoted to 
the sides 1, by pivots 28. 
The folding mechanism just described may 
be operated in any suitable manner. For 
this purpose I have provided a short shaft 28 
at the side of the frame or table, having a 
crank 29 and a fly wheel 30 thereon. The 
link 11 at its upper end may be detached 
from arm 10 and attached to said crank 29, 
and the shaft 28 revolved by the foot of the 
operator upon the treadle 12. The sprocket 
wheel on shaft 28 by means of the endless 
chain 31 and sprocket wheel on the camshaft 
32, as shown in Fig. 2, will serve to transmit 
such motion to the latter shaft. The cam 
shaft 32 may extend transversely across the 
table and revolve in journals at its sides 1. 
Upon the cam shaft 32, is arranged a sys 
tem of cams for operating the folding parts. 
Two of these cams designated 33 operate upon 
levers34, pivoted one to each side of the table 
by pivots 35, Figs. 1, 2, and 8. Arms 36 are 
pivoted preferably upon the same pivots 37 
to which the arms 21 of the lower jaw are 
pivoted, and are provided with rollers 38that 
rest upon the upper side of levers 34. A lug 
39 on arms 21 extends over arms 36, and a set 
screw 40 passes through arms 36 and is 
screwed up against the lug, so that the weight 
of the lower jaw 20 is thereby borne upon the 
arm 36, and the height of the lower jaw is 
adjusted by the set screws to suit the thick 
ness of metal which is to be grasped by the 
holder. The cams 33 raise the levers 34 which 
first lift the jaw 20 to grasp the metal strip, 
and the first folder 22 quickly follows lifted 
by the same lever. When the cams 33 have 
passed the levers 34, the levers drop against 
the cam shaft allowing the folder and jaw to 
drop down. It is desirable to have the folder 
22 rest upon lugs 85 projecting from each side 
1, of the table under the arms 23, when the 
folder is down. 
The second folder 24, may be provided with 
two arms 41 rigidly secured to it, each hav 
ing a spring, shoulder 42 at the front side of 
the cam shaft 32 against which the cams 43 
upon the calm shaft operate to press the sec 
ond folder forward within its grooves, Figs. 
1, 2, 6 and 7. The shoulders 42 being springs 
will prevent breakage or the pressing of the 
tin fold too tightly. Set screws 44 will regul 
late the tension. For drawing the second 
folder back, shoulders 45 may be provided 
upon each arm 41 at the rear of the cam 
shaft, against which cams 46 press in the revo 
lution of the cam shaft 32. To drive the 
hammer 26 down upon the metal fold, two 
flat springs 47 may be provided, secured to 
the two arm plates 27 at 48, and adjusted by 
means of set screws 49, these springs47 form 
ing shoulders against which the cams 50 press, 
Figs. 1 and 2. The hammer may be lifted af 
ter the cams 50 have passed the shoulders 47, 
by means of appropriate springs, such as 
those designated 51, firmly secured to the 
sides 1 of the table, at 52 and with their free 
ends pressing downward upon the arm plates 
27 at points to the rear of the pivots 28. 
In order to feed the strips of metal into the 
folders, I provide slots 53 in the top 3 of the 
table through which the feeders 54 project 
above the table, Figs. 1, 2, 3 and 5. No cer 
tain number of slots and feeders is essential, 
but I prefer to provide several so as to adapt 
the machine to use strips of metal of various 
lengths. The feeders 54 may be rigidly se 
cured to a horizontal cross piece 55, borne 
upon a standard 56. Upon the two horizon 
tal cross beams 57 secured to the two sides 1 
of the table, may be placed a horizontal bar 
58, which may be provided with flanges over 
which lugs 59 attached to the cross beams 57 
project, holding the bar 58 to the cross beams, 
and allowing it to move endwise freely, as 
shown in Figs. 3, 4 and 5. The standard 56 
is secured to the horizontal bar 58. Forbest 
results this connection should be a joint and 
the standard 56 will be held in substantially 
a perpendicular position by means of a suit 
able spring such as 60, attached to the bar 58, 
while a loop holds the standard 56 against the 
upper end of the spring. Grooves are pro 
vided in the under side of the upper jaw, 19, 
Fig. 1, immediately over the grooves 53 in the 
top of the table, so that when the bar 58 is 
moved toward the rear of the machine, the 
feeders 54 may be carried in such grooves as 
far as the rear edge of the jaw 19, thus car 
rying the strip of metal to be fed finally be 
Similar grooves may also 
yond the holders. 
be provided in the lower jaw 20. Such grooves 
in the holders are not essential but are desir 
able since they will enable the feeders to be 
made to extend both above and below the 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
: 519,058 
... 3 
7o 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
w 
- 
the stops 78, at any point forward or back 
space between the jaws of the holder, and 
ward desired, Figs. 1 and 2. It is preferable 
will insure that the thin strip being fed, will 
also to provide grooves in the under side of 
be kept from wedging between the feeders 
the second folder 24 corresponding to the 
and the jaws or table. 
In the process of folding, the metal strip is 
slots 79 in the first folder, so that the stops 
78 may extend upward within such grooves, 
advanced successively three times toward the 
for the same reason that such grooves are 
rear end of the machine. To accomplish this, 
provided in the under side of the jaw 19 as 
I prefer the following mechanism: I place a 
before stated. Similar grooves may also be 
secondary cam shaft 61 below the cam shaft 
provided in lower edge of the hammer 26, if 
32, revolving within journals in the stand 
desired, to prevent injury to the stops78 and 
ards 62, which are rigidly secured to the rear 
feeders 54 by the descent of the hammer, 
cross beam 57, Fig. 4. This secondary cam 
though the stops and feeders will ordinarily 
shaft may be made to revolve with camshaft 
32, by means of two cog wheels 63, 64, on the 
be out of the way of such harm. 
respective shafts engaging each other. A 
The method heretofore used for accom 
plishing the work which may be done by my 
dog 65 is pivotally secured by two joints 66, 
machine, has been slow and laborious, by the 
67 to a standard or support 68, upon the 
use of the common tinners' tools known as 
rear cross beam 57, Fig. 5. A cam 69 upon 
square shears' and common folder. 
the secondary camshaft 61 by the revolution 
By the use of my machine the work may 
of the latter, engages a lug 70, on the side of 
be done rapidly and hence with much less 
the bar 58, draws the latter barrearward and 
with it the feeders, until the dog 65 drops into expense, and is done neatly, with uniformity 
and precision. The operator having provided 
the first notch 71 on the side of the bar 58. 
a quantity of strips of metal of proper width 
By this time the cam has passed beyond the 
cut upon the shears, as described, places a 
lug 70, and the dog holds the feeding appa 
strip on the table in front of the feeders 54. 
ratus at the point to which it has advanced. 
The first movement of the feeders described, 
The cam 72 on the same shaft next engages 
carries the strip back so that its rear edge is 
the lug 73 on the bar 58 and draws it back 
against the stops 78. The jaw 20 rises, 
until the dog engages in the second notch 74, 
firmly grasping the strip in the holder, fol 
and holds the apparatus as before. The cam 
lowed by the first folder which turns the por 
72 in its next revolution engages the lug 75 
tion of the strip projecting over it, upward, 
and draws the feeding mechanism still far 
forming a right angle, and this is followed 
ther rearward, until the rear edge of the feed 
quickly by the forward movement of the sec 
ers have delivered the folding strip of metal 
ond folder 24, which comes in contact with 
beyond the holders 19, 20. The dog 65 has 
the upturned edge of the strip and bends it 
then advanced beyond the notches 71,74, and 
forward over the top of the jaw 19. The 
has dropped into the groove 76, which leads 
metal strip 86 is now in the shape shown in 
around said notches and back to the first po 
Fig. 9, ready for the insertion of the edge of 
sition of the dog. When the cam 72 passes 
the card-board or other material over which 
the second lug 75, any suitable spring such 
it is to be folded. In order that this may be 
as that designated 77 which is attached to the 
inserted, the first folder drops down, the sec 
rear cross beam 57 and engages in a hook 
ond folder moves back out of the way, the 
upon the bar 58, will serve to drive the feed 
lower jaw 20 drops releasing its grasp upon 
ing mechanism toward the front of the ma 
the metal strip, and the second feeding: mo 
chine and so return the feeders ready foran 
tion of the feeders carries the strip back till 
other strip of metal. The dog 65 will return 
it is again in contact with the stops78, at the 
to its first position along the groove 76, the 
The operator then quickly 
angle of the turn. 
pivot 66, allowing the dog to swing laterally 
passes the paper over the top of the upper 
in the groove around the notches in return 
jaw 19 and under the hammer 26, and inserts 
ing to the position shown in Fig. 5, while the 
its edge into the open mouth of the first fold 
pivot 67 will allow it to rise over the notches 
of the strip. The hammer 26 next descends 
when the bar 58 is being drawn back. 
upon the first fold causing it to press tightly 
To regulate the width of the fold of the 
about the inserted edge of the paper 87, and 
metal strip I provide stops78, which I prefer 
grasping it as shown in Fig. 10. The first 
to have project upward through slots 79 in 
fold is thereby completed. The second fold 
the first folder 22. The same number of stops 
is made by a repetition of the same action of 
as offeeders may ordinarily be provided. The 
the folding parts. After the first descent of 
stops may be rigidly secured to a horizontal 
the hammer just stated, and the cams 50 
transverse bar 80 similar to that to which the 
which operate it have passed the spring shoul 
feeders 54 are secured, and bar 80 rigidly se 
ders 47, the hammer flies up out of the way 
cured to alongitudinal bar81 which maybe held 
and the jaw 20 again grasps the unfolded por 
by front and rear standards 82, 83, attached 
tion of the strip. The first folder 22 rises 
to the rear crossbeam 57. The rear standards 
pushing up the first fold lying upon it to a 
83 may be bifurcated at the upper end between 
position at right angles to the part held in 
the branches of which a nut 84 Working upon 
the holder, and the second folder 24 moves 
screw threads upon the bar 81, may be placed 
forward pressing the first fold over onto the 
for the purpose of adjusting the position of 
O 
o 
jo 
5 
 
519,058 
O 
15 
3o 
35 
top of jaw 19. The first folder again drops, 
the second folder recedes and the lower jaw 
20 drops down releasing the strip for another 
action of the feeders. The feeders now make 
their third rearward motion, by the calm 72 
engaging on the lug 75. This moves the 
folded strip again back against the stops 78, 
and this time completely out of the holder. 
The hammer 26 now descends again pressing 
down the second fold tightly, thus complet 
ing it, and rises as before. The paper with 
its metal border is drawn out over the top of 
jaw 19 as the paper was inserted, and the op 
eration is completed as shown in Fig.11. The 
feeders 54 have returned to the first position 
ready to feed a new strip of metal as hereto 
fore described. 
In the adjustment of the parts, it is desir 
able that it be so made that the lower jaw 20 
will rise and grasp the metal strip before the 
first folder 22 has risen materially; and that 
after the first folder shall have risen to bend 
the strip upward, it shall begin to descend 
out of the way, before the forward motion of 
the second folder 24 has been completed. 
Any appropriate spring such as that desig 
nated 60 applied to the feeders gives an elas 
ticity that is very desirable, though the ma 
chine would operate without this spring. In 
other words, spring feeders will adapt them 
selves to the width of the strip and to the ad 
justment of the stops 78. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a folding machine for folding strips of 
metal upon the edge of hanging cards and 
other like articles, the combination of a holder, 
a first folder, a second folder adapted to foll 
low the action of the first folder, and further 
complete the fold, spring shoulders against 
which cans act to press the second folder 
upon the fold, and a cam shaft having cams 
to operate the second folder, substantially as 
, set forth. 
2. In a folding machine for folding strips of 
metal upon the edge of hanging cards and 
other like articles, the combination of feeders 
adapted to feed the strip to be folded suc 
cessively into the folding parts, stops against 
which the strip is fed, and folding parts 
adapted to fold the strip, with suitable mech 
anism to operate the parts, Substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. In a folding machine for folding strips of 
metal upon the edge of hanging cards and 
other like articles the combination of auto 
matic spring feeders adapted to feed the strip 
to be folded successively into the folding 
parts, stops against which the strip is fed, 
and folding parts adapted to fold the strip, 
with suitable mechanism to operate the parts, 
substantially as shown and described. 
4. In a folding machine for folding strips of 
metal upon the edge of hanging cards and 
other like articles, the combination of a cam 
shaft having cams mounted thereon adapted 
to engage lugs on a bar, feeders secured to 
. 
such bar, a table having slots through which 
the feeders project, and folding parts, Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
5. In a folding machine for folding strips of 
metal upon the edge of hanging cards and 
other like articles, the combination of a cam 
shaft having cams mounted thereon, adapted 
to engage lugs on a bar, to move the bar and 
feeders, feeders secured to such bar, a dog 
adapted to engage in notches upon the bar, 
and to swing in a grooved way around such 
notches, a spring adjusted to move the bar 
back when the dog is released, and mechan 
8 
ism adapted to fold the strip which is fed into 
the same by such feeders, substantially as set 
forth. 
6. In a folding machine for folding strips of 
metal upon the edge of hanging cards and 
other like articles, the combination of a holder, 
folding parts adapted to fold a strip of metal 
upon the edge of a card, automatic feeders 
adapted to advance the metal successively 
three times into the folding parts, so that the 
folding may be performed, the edge of the 
card inserted, and the completed fold with 
drawn, mechanism whereby the feeders are 
held in the position to which they advance 
each time but the last when they return to the 
point of first starting, and stops against which 
the metal is fed, substantially as specified. 
7. In feeding mechanism for the purpose 
Set forth an automatic spring feeder secured 
to a bar having lugs on which cams upon a 
cam shaft engage to draw the bar back with 
a dog adapted to engage in notches upon the 
bar, and to Swing in a grooved way around 
such notches, and a spring adjusted to move 
the bar back when the dog is released, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
8. In a holder for a folding machine for 
folding strips of metal upon the edge of hang 
ing cards and other like articles, the combi 
nation of a stationary jaw, a movable jaw 
pivoted upon arms, roller arms having roll 
ers upon which the movable jaw is supported, 
levers adapted to act against the rollers to 
move the jaw, and a camshaft having cams 
adapted to operate against the lever, sub 
stantially as specified. 
9. In a folding machine for folding strips of 
metal upon the edge of hanging cards and 
other like articles the combination of a 
holder composed of a stationary jaw and a 
movable jaw, rollers upon which the mov 
able jaw is supported, levers adapted to act 
against the rollers to move the jaw, a cam 
shaft having cams adapted to operate against 
the lever, automatic feeders to feed a strip of 
metal into the machine, folding parts adapted 
to fold the strip of metal around and upon 
the stationary jaw while being held by the 
holder, and a hammer to close down the fold, 
substantially as specified. 
10. In a folding machine for folding strips 
of metal upon the edge of hanging cards and 
Other like articles, the combination of auto 
matic feeders, stops against which the metal 
45 
55 
 
519,058 
5 
the feeders of the folding parts, said shears I5 
consisting of a stationary jaw and a movable 
knife actuated by a curved arm upon a rock 
shaft, a spring adapted to withdraw the knife 
after a strip is cut, an adjustable gage SO 
placed as to leave the proper space for the 
width of such strip between the gage and 
the cutting edge of the knife, folding mech 
anism, and a table to support the whole, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
CART, ERRAMSON. 
Witnesses: 
; 
A. B. CHOATE, 
LAURA. E. UHLIN. 
strip is fed, a first and second folder adapted 
to move in different directions successively, 
a hammer and a holder adapted to grasp the 
metal while the metal is being folded, and 
then to release it for the action of the feed 
ers in moving the fold away from the bar 
over which it is folded for the insertion of 
the paper and for the hammer to close down 
the folds, substantially as specified. 
11. In a machine for cutting strips of metal 
and folding the same upon the edge of cards 
and other like articles, the combination of 
shears adapted to cut such strips of metal 
from a larger sheet and to deliver them near 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519158.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 519,158, 
P. J. OGLE. 
WRAPPER, OR, EN WEEOPE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 1, 1894. 
Fay. 1. 
  
Y 
X 
S 
b-y \ . 
Ov 
 
C/ 
SA 
e 
C/ 
 
. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 519,158. 
P. J. OGLE. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
- WRAPPER, OR, ENVELOPE, 
- 
. 
. 
. . 
Patented May 1, 1894, 
  
V. 
. 
 
 
 
V 
a NATtoNAL LITHogRAPHING comPAMY, 
. . . 
- UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PERCY J. OGLE, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
WRAPPER or ENVELOPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 519,158, dated May 1, 1894. 
Application filed December 12, 1893, Serial No. 493,508, (No model.) 
O 
I5. 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PERCY JOHN OGLE, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain and 
Ireland, residing at 4Bishopsgate Street with 
in, in the city of London, England, have in 
vented certainlimprovements in Wrappers or 
Envelopes for Inclosing Periodicals or the 
Like, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
a Wrapper more especially intended for in 
closing periodicals or the like which it is de 
sired shall be rolled for transmission through 
the post or otherwise. It has hitherto been 
the practice to rc the rerioical or the like 
(which I will refer to as the inclosure) into a 
cylindrical form and encircle it by the wrap 
per which is then secured by gum at its edge. 
The tendency of the inclosure being to un 
roll itself the Wrapper and inclosure are se. 
2 o curely held together but great difficulty is ex 
perienced in removing the Wrapper, as owing 
to the tightness with which the wrapper em 
braces the roll and owing to the cylindrical 
shape thereof if it be attempted to tear the 
25 wrapper from end to end thereof the two 
lines of fracture which are made at the com 
mencement in such an attempt converge and 
meet and the result is that only a compara 
tively small wedge shaped piece of the wrap 
per is removed. These lines which so con 
verge I will call the lines of irregular frac 
ture. The attempt to remove the ordinary 
wrapper moreover frequently results in the 
tearing of the inclosure. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
these difficulties and consists in perforating or 
penetrating or logally weakeng that part of 
: the wrapper whicii comes outermost when it is 
rolled around its inclosure with preferably 
4o twolines of cuts, slits, slots ortheir equivalents 
(I will refer to them as slits) so arranged that 
the strip between them can be readily re 
moved by tearing from end to end of the wrap 
per. The slits are so disposed relatively to 
each other that the aforesaid lines of irregu 
lar fracture which occur after the ends of 
the respective slits are reached in tearing 
will run into the next of the slits and so on 
throughout the length of the series of slits. 
35 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings 5o 
represent a wrapper provided with lines of 
slits according to my invention. The slits a 
of each line are shown at the angles and dis 
position relatively to each other that I find 
best in practice. By the dotted lines at b in 55 
Fig. 1 I have indicated the lines, of irregular 
fracture tending in each case inward when 
the wrapper is wound round the roll which it 
incloses and the strip is torn away. The ar 
row represents the direction in which the 6o 
strip is to be torn. It will be seen that when 
the end of each slit is reached the severance 
is in the said lines of irregular fracture until 
they run into the next slits and so on through 
out the length of the strip the disposition of 65 
the slits constantly counteracting theinward 
tendency of the lines of irregular fracture. 
Fig. 2 shows an inclosure with a wrapper 
around it and the strip in course of being 
torn off. 
When the wrapper is around a cylinder or 
roll the tendency of the lines of irregular 
fracture is always inward. If it be desired 
to provide a wrapper which will also be suit 
able for flat packages or folded articles I may 75 
duplicate the slits of each series as shown in 
Fig. 3 one member (a) pointing outward and 
the other (a) inward as with a flat wrapper 
the lines of irregular fracture may tend to 
take either an inward or an outward course. 8o 
The slits a counteract the inward tendency 
of the lines of irregular fracture while the 
slits a counteract the outward tendency of . 
the lines of irregular fracture. I have shown 
in each case at the end from which the sev 
erance is to be commenced a tab d made by 
the two slits at did by which the severance 
can be properly started. As it is generally 
not allowable to place advertisements out 
side postal envelopes or Wrappers and in sep 
arating the strip the back thereof is exposed. 9 
I may utilize the back of this strip to print 
advertisements upon. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
A Wrapper or envelope provided with two 
95 
O 
w 
45 
 
2 
519,158 
lines of slits, forming a tearing strip, the in 
dividual slits of each line being disposed at 
such angles to this lines that the line of frac 
ture-is prevented from deviating from its 
5 proper course by succeeding slits, substan- 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my Both of 31 Lombard Street, London. 
name to this specification in the presented 
two subscribing witnesses. 
PERCY J. OGLE 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
WM.JOHN WEEKs, 
H. D. HOSKINS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519258.txt	(No Model.) 
G. P. HILL. 
DARNING OR EMBROIDERING FRAME 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 519,258, 
-Z44 
Patented May 1, 1894, 
  
  
   
 
 
SS G m 
IHEIo o os 
 
 
4. f Eup ( 
. 
EriHi. T. E. 
2 a v/ 
III: 
6- 
3v-vov to 
(2 
26 eve66/4266 
 
 
28ibvices 
 
(No Model.) 
G. P. HILL. 
DARNING OR EMBROIDERING FRAME 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 519,258, 
Patented May 1, 1894, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
. 
Y. 
GEORGE POWELL HILL OF RICHMOND, VIRGINIA. 
DARNING OR EMBROIDERING FRAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 519,258, dated May 1, 1894. 
Application filed May 1, 1893, 
Serial No. 472,654 (No model.) 
O 
55 
Be it known that I, GEORGE POWELL HILL, 
To all whom it may concern: 
I secure the set screw a'. The other end of 
the frame in Fig. 3 is slotted as at a, and near 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the inner end of such slot I secure by means 
Richmond, in the county of Henrico and State of rivets or otherwise, a pinion a from which 
of Virginia, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Darning and Em extends an operating stem a having aheada'. 
The said pinion when in position meshes with 
broidering Frames; and I do hereby declare the racka and is adapted to operate the 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de same. B is a clamping ring which is adapted 
scription of the invention, such as will enable to clamp the material over the frame A and 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
when used with the adjustable frames one 
to make and use the same. 
end of such ring is provided with a T head 
My invention relates to darning, and em 
b and set screw b' while the other end is slot 
broidering frames. 
ted as at b. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
When desirable a split ring C of flexible 
frame that will hold a stocking or piece of 
material may be used in place of the adjust 
fabric in such a manner that if desired the 
able ring, and when the rigid frame is used 
darning or embroidering may be done on an 
it is sometimes more convenient to use this 
ordinary sewing machine, further to provide 
split flexible ring. 
means whereby such frames may be adjusted 
On the inside of the frames AI secure a 
to different diameters; and it consists of a 
strip of spring metal D which is bent out 
darning and embroidering frame to which is 
Ward atd to form spaces at intervals between 
secured a series of independently revoluble 
the frame A and such strip D. In the space 
angular fingers and means of holding the 
thus formed I loosely secure fingers d, bent 
same in predetermined positions, and a clamp 
Substantially in the form of an L. On the 
ing ring, said clamping ring to hold a fabric 
extreme end of these fingers Iform a head di 
stretched across the frame, while the fingers 
while the portion d has a cam like shape, in 
hold the unstretched portion against the side 
cross section, such portion d working be 
of the frame. 
tween the strip D and the frame A as shown. 
In the drawings: Figure lis a top plan view 
: The operation is as follows: It will be pre 
of one form of my invention showing a stock 
sumed that the frame is to be used as a darn 
ing applied. Fig. 2 is a central section of ing frame, for purposes of illustration. The 
same on the line X-X. Fig. 3 is a top plan 
frame is inserted in the stocking and placed 
view of an adjustable frame which is the pre 
in the desired position, the stocking is then 
ferred construction, and Fig. 4 is a section of 
stretched over the frame and the ring C 
the same on the line X-X. Fig. 5 is an en 
pressed over the frame and thus clamping the 
larged detail sectional view of Fig. 1. Fig. 6 
stocking tightly to the frame. The fingers d? 
is an enlarged detail sectional view of Fig. 3 
are all pressed toward the center of the frame 
showing rack and pinion. Fig. 7 is a side ele- before it is inserted in the stocking. That go 
vation of the same and Fig. 8 is a top plan 
portion of the stocking above the frame is 
view of the same. 
pulled to the one side and one of the fingers 
A represents the darning ring which may 
turned outward and over such portion thus 
be made in several sizes or it may be made 
holding the stocking at that place outside of 
adjustable as found most desirable. When 
the frame A and under such fingers the next 95 
made adjustable one end of the strip of metal 
finger is likewise turned and so on until all 
that forms the ring or frame is slotted as at 
of the fingers have been turned outward, af. 
a while on the other end is secured a set 
ter whichall of the stocking, above the clamped 
screw a' which is adapted to slide in the slot. 
portion, will have been secured under the fin 
In Fig. 3 I show an adjustable frame in the 
gers d and outside of the frame A. The 
preferred construction of which one end of 
frame may now be placed under the needle 
the strip of metal, forming the frame, is 
of a sewing machine and worked back and 
formed with a T head a, and near this head 
forth until the hole in the stocking is darned. 
is secured a racka and just beyond the rack 
If it is found that the stocking is not drawn 
85 
. 
. 
IOJ 
7o 
75. 
8o 
25 
35 
45 
 
 
is 
519,258 
tight enough, after it has been clamped, the 
operator loosens the set screw a' and turns 
the pinion a by means of the stem and head 
a and a thus operating the rack a thereby 
expanding or enlarging the frame and draw 
ing the stocking tighter, thus obviating the 
necessity of removing the stocking for such 
further stretching. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination with a darning and em 
broidering frame continuous in outline, of a 
series of independently revoluble angular fin 
gers secured to said frame and means of hold 
ing the same in predetermined positions, and 
a clamping ring, said clamping ring to hold a 
fabric stretched across the frame while the 
fingers hold the unstretched portion against 
the side of the frame. 
2. The combination with a darning and em 
broidering frame of spring loops secured to 
such frame, and angular fingers secured in 
the loops and each provided with a cam-like 
portion such portion seated in said loop. 
3. The combination with a darning and em 
broidering circular frame of a yielding strip 
O 
25 
secured to the inside of such frame loops 
formed in said strip, and fingers of substan 
tially - shape secured and working in such 
loops, substantially as described. 
4. A darning and embroidering frame con 
sisting of a strip of suitable material one end 
of which is provided with a slot, and the other 
end with a T head adapted to work in such 
slot, a pinion secured to the slotted end and 
a rack and set screw secured to the T headed 
end, substantially as described. 
5. A darning and embroidering frame con 
sisting of a strip of suitable material one end 
of which is slotted, and the other end pro 
vided with a T head adapted to work in the 
slotted end, a pinion secured to the slotted 
end and a rack and set screw secured to the 
T headed end; spring loops secured to said 
frame, and fingers secured and working in 
said loops, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
- 
GEORGE POWELL HILL. 
35 
40 
45 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN. S. CLARKSON, 
THOMAS A. BURNS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519359.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
R. M. TAYLOR, 
- 
MANUFACTURE OF ARTIFICIAL ICE, 
Patented May 8, 1894, 
No. 519,359, 
  
D 
% 
 
 
2YZ 
712zzesses, 
Azeezzzo-, 
... " 
WashingtoN, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
"... 
i 
ROBERT M. TAYLOR, OF MELROSE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
MANUFACTURE OF ARTIFICIAL ICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 519,859, dated May 8, 1894. 
Application filed May 17, 1893, Serial No.474,520, (No specimens) 
55 
o 
75 
To old, whom it, may concern: 
Melrose, county of Middlesex, and Common 
Wealth of Massachusetts, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Process in the Manufac 
ture of Artificial Ice, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to use the same. 
My invention, relates to a new and useful 
process by which the defects of artificial ice 
are removed. 
In the formation of natural ice on rivers 
and ponds the ice forms downward and the 
air is driven in the same direction as the ice 
is formed and rests against the under surface 
of the ice, and in ponds these air bubbles are 
frozen in layers in the ice and show a series 
of laminations which indicate the successive 
formations of the ice. In rivers, on the con 
tary, the air, as fast as it is moved down by 
the formation of the ice, is carried away by 
the current and the ice is formed clear and 
transparent, that is, it does not have the lay 
ers Which are shown in ice formed in ponds 
for the reason above stated. It is a well es 
tablished fact that air and impurities in wa 
ter, are rejected as the crystallization goes on, 
and the Water alone being congealed to make 
the ice. 
In the formation of artificial ice, remember 
ing that the same law of crystallization takes 
place and the water alone is congealed and 
the air bubbles and impurities are rejected, it 
will be found that in the formation of this ice 
the air bubbles and impurities in the water 
are driven to the center of the can as the ice 
forms, the said bubbles and impurities being 
rejected from the water as the crystallizing 
goes On, as above stated, and what is known 
as the feather or core in artificial ice is 
formed by the continued congealing of the 
Water, with the impurities in solution and the 
air bubbles in the center of the block. As it 
is impossible for the air bubbles and impuri 
ties to be further rejected, there being no es 
Cape as the ice is formed in cans, they are 
driven to and held in the center of the block 
by the crystallization of the surrounding wa 
ter. This center, which thus consists of im 
purities in solution and the air, not only re 
tards the continued freezing of the water, but 
Be it known that I, ROBERT M. TAYLOR, of forms the objectionable feather or core which 
gives to artificial ice its perishable character 
and renders it opaque, in comparison with the 
clear and transparent natural ice. 
In the accompanying drawing I show one 
form of apparatus by whichI propose to carry 
out the processin manufacturing artificial ice. 
In the drawing, which represents a vertical 
section of the apparatus, A represents the 
usual brine wat. B the brine; C the ammonia, 
'pipes which are arranged in any desirable 
manner. D a series of cans in which the ar 
tificial ice is formed. E the artificial ice in 
the cans. F the center of the artificial block 
to which the impurities in solution and the 
air are driven and which forms the feather or 
core. G represents a pump. H a flexible 
pipe for withdrawing from the center of the 
block of artificial ice the water which contains 
the air bubbles and impurities. J a flexi 
ble connection for supplying fresh water to 
the center of the block after the water con 
taining the impurities and the air has been 
removed. 
K represents a pipe from which the water 
is forced from the pump G to a cooling tank 
L in which the water pipes M for supplying 
fresh water are located, and the Water there 
in is cooled, before passing to the pipe J, by 
the surrounding water which is drawn from 
the center of the block of artificial ice and 
forced to the said cooler through the said 
pipe K. 
From the above it will be seen that my pro 
cess consists in withdrawing at the proper 
time from the center of the block of artificial 
ice, during the formation thereof, the water 
in which is contained the impurities in solu 
tion and the air bubbles rejected toward the 
center from the water as the crystallization 
takes place from the sides and bottom of the 
can, and replacing for the same fresh water 
from a suitable supply, which, in this case is 
shown as above, preferably cooled by the war 
ter which is drawn from the center of the 
block, although it may be cooled, if desired, 
in any other manner. 
By such a process it will be seen that a 
clear block of artificial ice can be produced 
without the objectionable feather or core, 
95 
TOO 
d 
25 
35 
40 
45 
As 
 
2 
519,359 
Having thus ascertained the nature and set 
forth a method of carrying out my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The herein described process in the man 
ufacture of artificial ice which consists, first, 
in removing from the freezing can during the 
formation of the block of artificial ice the Wa 
ter which contains the impurities and air bub 
bles, and, second, in substituting other Water 
for the water withdrawn, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The herein described process in the man 
ufacture of artificial ice which consists, first, 
in removing from the block of artificial ice 
during its formation the water which contains 
the impurities and air bubbles; second, in 
utilizing the water withdrawn to cool other 
water; third, in substituting for the with 
drawn water the other water cooled thereby, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 11th day 
of May, 1893. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT M. TAYLOR. 
35 
45 
A. F. ACTON, 
F. E. C. GREENE. 
Which not only retards the rapid freezing of 
the block of ice, and renders it perishable in 
character and opaque, but gives to it its ob 
jectionable taste caused by the impurities in 
Solution being frozen in the block. The per 
ishable character of artificial ice is due to this 
objectionable core which consists of air bub 
bles and impurities found in the water. The 
net Work of fissures in the feather or core of 
can ice permits the free infiltration of water, 
Whereby the structure of the ice is weakened 
and disintegration is rapid; thus it will be 
Seen by my process that I avoid this feather 
or core with the network of fissures, so that 
this rapid disintegration of the block will not 
take place and thus destroy the formation of 
the ice and hasten its breaking up. 
I do not limit myself to the exact statement 
of my process or the manner of carrying it 
out, but intend to claim broadly in the man 
ufacture of artificial ice the removing from a 
block of artificial ice, during its formation, 
the Water which contains the air bubbles and 
impurities by which the objectionable feather 
or core is formed, and substitute therefor wa 
ter in its normal condition which may, if de 
sired, be cooled by the water which has been 
withdrawn from the block during the forma 
tion of said block. 
IC 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519459.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 519,459. 
W. C. SMITH, 
CONTROLLER FOR ELEWATORS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
Patented May 8, 1894, 
(P 
CP p N of a 2/1 
2e/ 
William C. Smith 
f 
 
%.7- 
ATIOf N E Y. 
(No Model.) 
No. 519,459, 
W. C. SMITH, 
CONTROLLER FOR ELEVATORS, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 8, 1894, 
--P-Cs 
G 
s 
W. A follo Fra 
C2CZN/tase// 
-6, 4-2% &/ 767 afte-a--- 
Arto RM Ey. 
Invey to 
William C. 5mill 
 
(No Model.) 
W. C. SMITH, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
" - . 
CONTROLIER FOR ELEWATORS, 
No. 519,459, 
Patented May 8, 1894, 
 
 
S 
2 EE 
 
 
 
EE 
is st 
- a 
57 
east- 
s 
s se 
E-5 
RR-4/z. 
SN 
NN - A 
177 -2/6 
Fist. 
 
 
 
 
 
Witnesses 
CSRGBWVa. 
VNV en"Vow. 
William C. Smith 
 
A VV or NY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. SMITH, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO M. J. O'DONNELL & 
CO, OF SAME PLACE. 
CoNTROLLER FOR ELEVAtoRs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 519,459, dated May 8, 1894. 
Application filed March 6, 1893. Serial No. 464,705, (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WIELIAMC. SMITH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Cleveland, 
in the county of Cuyahoga and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
provements in Controllers for Elevators; and 
Idohereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art 
to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
improved mechanism for controlling the 
movements of elevators. 
Although my invention is especially adapt 
ed for use in connection with elevators pro 
pelled by electrical apparatus, it may be used 
With the same advantages with other means 
of propulsion. 
The improvements consist of a construc 
tion of parts, and combinations thereof, that 
Will greatly simplify, such devices, enhance 
their durability, and insure a more certain, 
prompt, and desirable action in operation. 
In the accompanying drawings forming a 
part of this specification and representing an 
embodiment of the invention, Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of my improved mechanism. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged side elevation, showing 
the Worm and gear wheels by which the cable 
Wheel is operated through or from the motor 
shaft, and also portions of the controlling 
mechanism whereby the power is turned on 
or off and the brake applied to stop the motor, 
all as hereinafter separately and fully de 
Scribed. Fig. 3 is a front elevation of my im 
proved mechanism. Fig. 4 is a detail of the 
brake; and Fig. 5 is a view showing the ini 
tial devices through which the brake is op 
erated. This view is taken substantially on 
line ac, ac, Fig. 3. 
In the drawings, 2 represents the base or 
foundation-frame, provided with suitable 
Supports or bearings for an electric motor. 
This motor has an armature shaft 3 which 
extends inwardly to the flanged or hollow fric 
tion brake wheel 4, and the hub 5 of this fric 
tion brake wheel is constructed with projec 
tions 6 on its inner side, Fig. 2, adapted to en 
gage with the correspondingly slotted head 7 
of the worm shaft 8. This leaves the Worm 
shaft or wheels as free as may be needed for 
practical operation and at the same time 
makes a positive and continuous connection 
between the shaft of the motor and the said 
worm shaft, so that it is practically the same 
as if they were in a continuous piece. It of 
course follows that the worm 8 travels with 
the same speed and regularity as the arma 
ture and axle 3, and that both are stopped 
and started together, 
At right angles to the worm gear or shaft 8 
and some distance above the same, is the shaft 
10, which carries the large grooved or chan 
neled cable wheel 11 at one end and over 
which run the cables which carry the plat 
form or cage of the elevator. This shaftlike 
wise is supported upon suitable bearings ex 
tending from base 2, and has mounted upon 
it a large wheel 12, suitably incased and 
meshing with the worm wheel or gear 8, and 
serving to transmit power therefrom to the 
cable wheel 11. The relation of this wheel 
12 to the said worm is clearly seen in Figs. 1 
and 2. It follows, of course, that the direc 
tion of travel of the cable wheel is governed 
by the direction of rotation of the worm 8 
and the motor, and the said motor and Worm 
may be rotated in either direction and re 
versed from one direction to the other at 
the will of the elevator man on the platform 
or carriage. That is to say, if he wishes to 
go up, the motor is rotated in one direction; 
if to come down, the motor is rotated in the 
opposite direction, and the direction of travel 
is determined by the switch mechanism un 
der the control of the elevator man. 
Obvi 
ously, too, if the elevator is to be stopped the 
current should be thrown off and the cable 
wheel 11 will then be held from turning in 
either direction when the motor stops, be 
cause the wheel 12 will be absolutely locked 
against turning, 
Now in order that the electric current may 
be thrown on or off from the motor, or the 
motor reversed, I provide the switch mechan 
ism shown clearly in Figs, 1 and 2. This 
mechanism consists primarily in the shaft 14 
having brushes or projections 15thereon, and 
arranged to swing to either side and touch 
the contact points or projections 16. When 
in the position seen in Fig. 2, the brush is out 
25 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
so 
55 
75 
9 O 
CO 
 
o 
2 
519,459 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
- 
 
o 
ther from the axle 21, according to the de 
of contact at either side and the current is 
gree of rotation, and the said cam may be 
off the motor. Then when the brush is turned, 
turned in either direction with the same effect. 
say, to touch on one side, the motor will re 
Beyond the pivot point 32 the said lever has 
volve in one direction, and when turned to 
a head 33 which works between two set screws 
the other side, the motor will revolve in the 
34, fixed on opposite sides of said headlineas 
opposite direction. The shaft 14 is under 
35 of the rocking head 36, which likewise is 
control of the operator in the carriage through 
pivoted upon the shaft 32. This rocking head 
the cable or rope 17 connected at its ends 
36 has a pair of short arms 37 between which 
with the rocking bar 19, which has a somewhat 
is pivoted what may be termed a wedge 38, 
long extended hub 20, and is supported on 
and this wedge is adapted to rest between 
and turns freely on the shaft 21. On the ex 
two wheels or sheaves 39, fixed in the ends of 
tremities of the rock bar 19 are lugs 22 on its 
two short levers 40. These levers are piv 
inside in which the ends of the operating 
oted below their center at 41, and are con 
rope 17 are fastened, and this rope runs over 
nected at their lower ends with the ends of 
a sheave at the top of the elevator shaft. 
the friction band 42, which embraces, the fic 
Hence, if the operator pulls down on a por 
tion wheel 4 on the motor shaft. This fric 
tion or strand of this rope he will make con 
tion band 42 encircles and envelops the fric 
tact on one side with the current controlling 
tion wheel 4, and its ends are brought corn 
switch, and by pulling down on the other 
paratively near to one another, as seen in 
strand of the rope he will make contact on 
the other side and thus reverse the motor; or Fig. 4. At the bottom of this fiction band 
on the outside thereof, is a lug 43 set between 
he can operate the rope so as to throw the 
two studs or posts 44, in which are set Screws 
switch out of contact and thus stop the mo- 
45. A pin 46 projects into this stud 44 fron 
tor as herein described. 
the bottom and around the pin is a spring 47 
The shaft 14 has a sprocket wheel 25 at one 
which bears at its top against the shoulders 
end and is operated by a chain 26 connected 
of the studs 44. The object of this botton 
at its ends near the extremities of the rocking 
mechanism is to withdraw the friction band 
bar 19 by suitable link connections 27 in 
which the ends of the said chain are adjust- from the friction wheel slightly when the band 
is relaxed, so that the Weight or natural 
Obviously equivalent means for con spreading of the said band is not alone relied 
able. 
necting the switch with the rocking bar 19. 
upon to release it from the friction wheel 
may be employed and I do not wish to be 
when pressure is withdrawn. The operation 
confined in this particular to the exact mech 
of this mechanism proceeding from the cam 
anism and construction herein shown and de 
29 to the friction band '42 is now obvious. 
scribed. Upon the same shaft with the rock 
As the said can 29 is rotated it moves the arm 
ing bar 19 at one side thereof and sleeved on 
or lever 31 on its pivot 32, and this novel 
the hub of said bar and held rigid there with 
ment is transmitted through the head 38 and 
by means of a set screw 28, is the cam 29 hav 
the set screws bearing thereon to the rock 
ing communicating grooves 29' 29' formed 
head 36, causing said head to rotate upon the 
symmetrically with respect to the axis of the 
shaft 32, and by reason of its arms 3 to raise 
cam, as shown clearly in side elevation in 
or lower the wedge 38 according to the direct 
Fig. 5. It follows that when the rocking bar 
tion in which said head may be turned, and 
19 is rotated by the operator through the cords 
thus, by means of the reversely inclined sur 
or ropes 17 to control the current switch that 
faces of the wedge either tighten or release 
this cam 29 is likewise rotated. Now, this 
the friction band 42 on the wheel 4. In Fig. 
cam is intended to control the brake mechan 
3 the said band is shown as tightened and the 
ism connected with the motor, so that braking 
wedge 38 is raised so as to spread the levers 
the motor and turning off the current occur 
40 at their top. In Fig. 4 the opposite posi 
at the same time, and the current is no sooner 
tion is shown and the lever 38 is down and 
turned off than the brake is applied. A re 
the band 42 released from the wheel 80. By 
verse operation occurs when the current is 
means of the set screws 34 the relation of the 
turned on because then the brake is released. 
head 36 to the lever 31 may be adjusted and 
A chain of mechanism proceeds from this cam 
regulated so that the friction band may be 
to the friction wheel 4, shown in perspective 
tightened at one point or another more or 
in Fig. 1, in edge view partly broken away in 
less, according to the adjustment and the po 
Fig. 2, and in side elevations in Figs. 3 and 4. 
sition of the cam29, or the said set Screws 34 
This friction wheel 4 may be made of any 
may be so set as to give more or less play for 
suitable material and style, but is here shown 
the head 33 between the Set ScreWS. 
as a band wheel rigidly affixed to the motor 
It might occur that by oversight or acci. 
shaft 3 by the hub and flange mechanism 5 
dent the operator in the carriage would fail 
hereinbefore described. Said cam 29 has the 
to do his duty and stop the car when the car 
lever 31 working in the grooves 29'29' of the 
ascends or descends to the limit of travel, and 
calm and pivoted near its opposite end on 
in order to provide against danger or acci. 
shaft 32. It follows that when the said cam 
dent on account of such possible neglect, I 
is rotated through the operations of the rock 
have provided means to prevent the same, 
ing bar 19 the free end of the lever travels in 
This consists primarily in a pinion 50 secured 
said grooves and is brought nearer to or far 
75 
OO 
I.O. 
II5 
I 25 
 
4. 
519,459 
O 
upon the outer extremity of the shaft 10 
Which carries the large cable wheel and ro 
tates positively with said cable wheel. Mesh 
ing With this pinion is a large gear wheel 51 
Supported upon the shaft 21, and this wheel 
has in Ward projections 52, said projections 
being adjustable in a curved slot in said gear 
Wheel, which is shown here as concentric with 
the axis of the wheel. Then there is upon 
the back of the cam 29 a rib 53 which the 
projection 52 is adapted to engage when either 
limit of movement of the elevator carriage 
has been reached, whether at the top of the 
shaft or at the bottom; and the parts are so 
adjusted in respect to one another that when 
the extreme limitin either direction has been 
reached, and engagement has been effected 
between the projections 52 and the rib 53, 
the current is turned off and the brake is ap 
plied. This occurs automatically and cer 
tainly and will stop the machine before in 
jury can result. 
The brake band might be made in sections, 
if preferred, and the levers connected there 
With might be operated by different mechan 
ism than that shown and yet be within the 
Spirit of the invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The combination, to wit: sprocket wheel 
25, rocking bar 19, chain 26 connecting the 
bar and wheel, cam 29 movable with the rock 
ing bar, lever 31 constructed at one end to en 
gage and be operated by the cam, a wedge 
connected with the other end of said lever, 
levers 40 40 arranged to be engaged by the 
35 
 
45 
Wedge, the brake wheel 4, brake band 42 con 
nected with the levers 4040, a projection 53 
on cam29, pinion 50, the large wheel 51 mesh 
ing with said pinion, and a pin or stud 52 on 4o 
wheel 51 to engage projection 53, all con 
structed, arranged, and operating, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination comprising, to wit: 
brush 15, contacts 1616, sprocket wheel 25, 
rocking bar 19, chain 26 connecting the bar 
and wheel, cam 29 movable with the rocking 
bar, lever 31 constructed at one end to engage 
and be operated by the cam, a Wedge connect 
ed with the other end of said lever, levers 40 
40 arranged to be engaged by the Wedge, brake 
wheel 4, brake band 42 connected with the 
levers 40 40, all constructed, arranged, and 
operating, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination, to wit: shaft 14, brush 
15thereon, contacts 1616, cam 29 having Com 
municating grooves 29' 29' formed symmetri 
cally with respect to the axis of the cam, 
means for transmitting motion between the 
cam and shaft 14, lever 31 constructed at One 
end to engage and be operated by said grooves, 
a wedge connected with the other end of said 
lever, levers 4040 arranged to be engaged by 
the wedge, brake wheel 4, and brake band 42 
levers 4040, substantially 
connected with the 
as set forth. 
Witness my hand to the foregoing specifi 
cation. 
WILLIAM. C. SMITH. 
55 
Witnesses: 
H. T. FISHER, 
'GEORGIA SCHAEFFER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519559.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 519,559, 
H. E. WIN ANS, 
SHOT SPREADER, 
Patented May 8, 1894. 
 
2 
2 Yale' 
a. 
A: , 2. ? 7 
7 
1% 3. 
A 
928)it-cases 
3.11uovtov 
747S76. % Aerary A2. A/Encens. 
2%. 7 -4-4. 
sy are 10-6 eleby's. 
3e06 
y 
A. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY E. WINANS, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
SHOT-SPREADER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters eatent No. 519,559, dated May 8, 1894. 
Application filed November 18, 1893, Serial No. 490,724, (No model. 
w 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, HENRY E. WINANs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
ark, in the county of Essex and State of New 
5 Jersey, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Shot-Spreaders; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
Io to which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
f5 The object of this invention is to cause the 
shot to spread or scatter as they leave the 
gun and thereby kill more game at each dis 
charge of the piece than heretofore. 
The invention consists in the improved de 
vice and in the arrangement and combina 
tion of the parts thereof, as herein set forth 
and pointed out in the claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
in which similar letters of reference indicat 
25 corresponding parts in each of the several fig 
ures where they occur, Figure 1, represents a 
central vertical section of a cartridge embody 
ing my improvement and Fig. 2, is a perspec 
tive view of the spreader. Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view of one of the partitions or sec 
is of the spreader, in the form shown in 
ig. 2. 
In said drawings, a designates the shell of 
an ordinary cartridge, b the charge of pow. 
der, c the shot, d, the wad and e, is one form 
of my improved spreader. 
L usually make the spreader of paste-board 
and of two pieces, each cut in the form shown 
in Fig. 3, with an opening, f, equalin width 
4o to the thickness and extending from one end 
to the center thereof, so that when pressed 
35 
Witnesses: 
OLIVER DRAKE, 
FREDRICKE, SINNOCK. 
. 
55 
together they are in the form shown in Fig. 
2, and are ready for use. The fastening-pin, 
e', may or may not be used. They are in 
tended to fit the bore of the cartridge, or gun, 45 
and to rest upon the wad and are long enough 
to reach to the top or nearly to the top of 
said cartridge, or charge of shot, as the case 
may be. The spreader, in this form when 
placed in position divides or separates the So 
shot into four compartments, g, the result of 
which is that when the gun is discharged the 
shot will scatterin every direction and cover 
a very large space, thereby doing greater exe 
cution than the ordinary cartridges. 
Though the spreader in the form shown 
may be made very quickly and at a minimum 
of expense I do not limit myself to such form 
as they may be so made as to form l greater 
or lesser number of compartments as will be 
obvious; for example:-they might easily be 
made in three divisions, thus-X, or in six 
divisions thus:-->k, without departing from 
the spirit of the invention, as will be readily 
understood, and the several partitions may 65 
be secured by suitable adhesive material or . 
be made of metal or other material. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is- 
In a cartridge, a shot spreader composed of 
a series of partitions intersecting with and 
crossing one another to divide the shot-space 
into a multiplicity of compartments, as de 
scribed and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 7th day of 
November, 1893. 
HENRY E. WINANS. 
75 
. 
y 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519659.txt	(No Model.) 
E. BLUTCHEN. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING QUILL STRIPS, 
No. 519,659, 
Patented May 8, 1894, 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
O 
of 
In in 
IAEAEI 
HIEINE 
sist Sssalz 
e 
HHS 
HHS 
IHL,e 
SeSSzzHz. 
S 
. 
9 
: 
26- 
 
- Z22 2/27.7ar 
& 4/24:(4. 
4.75, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNST BL T CHEN OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
MACHINE FOR CUTTING QUILL-STRIPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 519,659, dated May 8, 1894. 
Application filed June 14, 1893, Serial No,477,582, (Nomodel.) 
Io 
5 : 
25 
p 
tleS. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ERNSTBLTCHEN, a sub 
ject of the Emperor of Germany, residing at 
Berlin, in the Empire of Germany, have in 
yented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Machines for Cutting Quill-Strips; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
machine for cutting quills into strips, for use 
E. all kinds of brushes instead of costly bris 
Referring to the drawings which form a 
part of this specification: Figure 1 is an ele 
Vation of the machine partly in vertical sec 
tion on lines ac-ac of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the machine, the feeding mechanism 
being removed. Fig. 3 is a plan of the feed 
rollers whose casing or cover is shown in sec 
tion on line y-y of Fig. 1. 
The frame of the machine consists of two 
standards r riveted on the bed plate w, and 
held in position by rails s's. In the bear 
ings O of the standards r, rollers b', b are 
mounted, and caused to rotate in opposite 
directions by pinions n', noperated by power 
or by a handle n. The faces of the said roll 
ers are ribbed or fluted in such way that the 
ribs of the one engage the corresponding slots 
or spaces between the ribs on the other, thus 
forming the cutting mechanism. A second 
pair of rollers a' a' is operated from the 
shaft of roller bby string pulleys in, mand 
pinions n n and, in such way, that the roll 
ers run in opposite directions, the speed at 
which these rollers run relative to the speed 
of the cutting rollers being determined by 
the relative size of the pulleys in and n. 
In order to prevent the quill to be cut, run 
ning obliquely through the rollers b', b, the 
feed rollers are fluted, the gripping effect be 
ing increased by the roller a being mount 
40 
 
ed in slide bearings c c, and working under 45 
pressure against roller a. 
The casing q, in which the feed rollers a? a 
are mounted, is cast with a funnel-like pro 
jection it of the same width as the feed rollers, 
and serving as guide or feed slot. The plate 5o 
p has a slot of the same dimensions as the 
lower end of the funnel, through which slots 
the quills coming from the feed rollers, enter 
the cutting rollers. A corresponding open 
ing in the bed plate allows of the passing out 55 
of the quills cut into more or less thin strips. 
In order to keep the grooves of the cutting 
rollers free from shreds of quills, &c., the 
bent end of a spring platellis inserted with 
projecting edges into the grooves of each 6o 
roller from underneath, said plates being fas 
tened to the railss', s. 
Having now described my invention, I de 
clare that what I wish to secure by Letters 
Patent is- 
1. In a quill cutting machine the combina 
tion of the cutting rollers and the two feed 
rollers geared together so as to rotate in op 
posite directions, and fluted, whereby they 
prevent the quills from being fed obliquely, 
substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
2. In a quill cutting machine, in combina 
tion with the cutting rollers, the removable 
support in which are mounted the feeding 
rollers and consisting of the plate p provided 
with a slot between the feeding and cutting 
rollers, and a casing q, surrounding the feed 
ing rollers and provided with a feed slot, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
65 
8o 
75 
ERNST BLUTCHEN. 
Witnesses: 
LESSER, 
ALFRED MEISTER, 
5 Neue Ross St., Berlin. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519759.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 519,759, 
 
J. W. BUCHAN AN. 
WIRE FENCE, 
Patented May 15, 1894, 
2WZZM/ASSA 
e. 44 as 
, a 4. 
e. e. e. a se e is 
Pyzyz O2 
7-4 7713-eceasea 
1, 27%tee, 
21222'eep 
THE NATIONAL LITHOGPAPHNG COMPANY., 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. BUCHANAN, OF SMITH VILLE, OHIO. 
WIRE FENCE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 519,759, dated May 15, 1894. 
Application filed September 27, 1893, Serial No. 486,577, (No model.) 
O 
20 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN W. BUCHANAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Smithville, county of Wayne, State of Ohio, 
have invented a new and useful Improve 
mentin Wire Fences, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
making part of this specification. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
Wire fences, the object of which is to provide 
an improved means for spacing and securing 
the fence wires at desired distance apart and 
to secure said wires in the kerfs or spacing 
notches provided in the spacing strip, by a 
a special wire provided therefor. 
With this object in view, my invention re 
lates to certain features of construction and 
combination of parts as will be hereinafter de 
scribed and pointed out in the claim. 
Figure 1, of the accompanying drawings is 
a view in perspective of a wire fence illus 
trating my invention, and Fig. 2, is a similar 
view of the spacing strip showing kerfs or 
notches in the edges thereof, a fragment of 
fence wire in the kerfs and the wire, whereby 
the fence wire is secured. 
Referring to Fig. 2, A represents the spac 
ing strip, having formed in the edges thereof 
kerfs a, in which the fence wires B are placed 
To secure the wire B in the kerfs, 
is as shown. 
a binding wire C is provided, and for the pur 
poses of this application, as seen, is secured to 
the lower fence wire B, as shown at b, and is 
then passed back and about the strip A, to 
and about the same wire B, binding the fence 
wire in the kerf a, thence up and over to the 
outside of the next wire above as shown by 
the dotted lines, that represent the position 
of the wire C on the opposite side of the strip 
35 
40 
A, thence back and about the strip and for 
ward and about the outside of the fence wire 
as shown at ac and thence up to the next wire, 
where the operation is repeated and so on, to 
the top wire, of the fence, about which the 
end of the binding wire C is wound as shown 
at e. It will be noticed that the binding wire 
C can be quickly put on or taken off, that 
when on, it will secure the fence wires in the 
kerfs, and yet allow the fence wire to be 
slacked or tightened while in position to make 
allowance for expansion and contraction. 
Having thus fully described the object and 
the nature of my invention, what I claim, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination with a wire fence of a spac 
ing strip, having at its side portions a series 
of kerfs to receive the fence wires B and a 
continuous binding wire C, adapted to secure 
a series of fence wires in said kerfs, in verti 
cal order by binding the wire C, about the 
lower fence wire, at one side of the strip, then 
about the strip and the fence wire on the op 
posite side, thence up to the front or outside 
of the next fence wire above and over and 
back and about the strip to the front side of 
the fence wire, thence up to and repeating the 
operation to secure all the intermediate fence 
wires in the kerfs, then bending the wire C 
about the top fence wire at one side of the 
strip, then about the strip and finally about 
the fence wire on the other side, substantially 
as described and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 19th day of September, A. D. 
1893. 
JOHN W. BUCHANAN. 
45 
55 
65 
o 
75 
Witnesses: 
Y. S. BAKER, 
C. G. TUCKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519859.txt	 
 
 
  
Arnaverator: 
Isaaie AFrchette 
rney. 
(No Model.) 
I. FRCHETTE. 
HAND ASTING TOOL 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 519,859. 
Patented May 15, 1894, 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
d 
 
Javezaitor: 
- Zasatie Ziffrchelizate 
/htorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAIE FRECHETTE, OF MONTREAL, CANADA. 
HAND LAST|NG-TOO L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 519,859, dated May 15, 1894. 
Application filed August 26, 1893, Serial No. 484,150, (No model.) 
55 
7 ? 
75 
- 
Zo al ?v???,  ??? concern; 
Be it known that I, ISAiB, FRCHETTE, of 
Montreal, in the province of Quebec and Do 
minion of Canada, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Hand Lasting 
Tools, of which the following, takenin connec 
tion with the accompanying drawings, is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to hand lasting tools, 
and it consists in certain novel features of 
Construction, arrangement and combination 
of parts which will be readily understood by 
reference to the description of the accompa 
nying drawings and to the claims hereto ap 
pended and in which my invention is clearly 
pointed out. 
Figurel of the drawings is a side elevation 
of a lasting tool embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a front end elevation. Fig. 3 is a 
partial vertical section on line 1, 1 on Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a partial horizontal section on line 
2, 2, on Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a partial section on 
line 3, 3, on Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a section online 
4, 4, on Fig.3. Fig. 7 is a sectional end eleva 
tion of the thumb lever for operating the nail 
feeding and severing devices. Fig. S is a side 
elevation of the cam lever m separated from 
the adjustable arm secured thereon. Fig. 9 
t a side elevation of the receiver operating 
In the drawings A and B are two levers piv 
oted together at a. and provided at their front 
ends with the pincher jaws A' and B and at 
their opposite ends with the shear like bows 
A and B to receive the thumb and fingers of 
the right hand for manipulating the same. 
The jaw A' has formed thereon or secured 
thereto near the fulcrum a the hammerhead 
b which serves the double purpose of a full 
crum to rest upon the inner sole while the op 
erator presses downward upon the bow ends 
of said levers A and B to strain the upper of 
the shoe upward, and as a hammer to ham 
mer down the upper or any imperfectly 
driven tacks. The jaw B' has set in a suit 
able bearing therein the plunger c which car 
ries at its lower end the steel driver c' and at 
its upper end the horizontally projecting arm. 
c which embraces the guide rod d and has 
pivoted thereto the pendentlifter bare which 
has a second bearing between guide rolls at 
ff, and has formed on its rear edge the cam 
8??. 
- 
surface f' by which it is moved to the rear, 
and with the shoulder e' with which the for 
ward end of the lever C engages to raise said 
plunger against the tension of the spring D 
attached at its lower end to the jaw B and at 
its upper end to the arm c. The lifter bare 
has formed on its front edge the shoulder e 
with which the stop pawl g engages to lock 
the plunger c in its raised position as shown 
in Fig. 1. The pawl g is pressed into engage 
ment with the shoulder e, when the plunger 
is raised, by the spring h acting upon a pin 
set in the side of the bar l' pivoted at one 
end to said pawl and provided with a slot in 
its other end, with which the pin 'set in the 
short arm of the elbow lever E engages to 
move said bar toward the front of the tool 
and thus disengage said pawl from the shoul 
der e, and permit the plunger c to be forced 
downward by the spring D to drive a tack or 
nail, deposited beneath the driver c', the nose 
of the jaw B' being provided with a suitable 
guideway j for the passage of Said, nail, as 
shown in Fig. 3. The jaw B' is also provided 
with an oblique channel or passageway k. 
down which the string of connected nails lc 
is fed to the separating cutters and the driver. 
The wire from which the nails are formed is 
rolled so as to form a series of projections for 
the heads and depressions for the points of 
the nails and is wound upon the reel F mount 
ed upon a stud l, set in the side of the lever 
B, and secured thereon by the spring catch 
l' as shown in Fig. 5. 
The lever B has formed thereon or set there 
in a hub or pin m upon which are mounted, so 
as to be movable about its axis, the cam levers 
im' and in which are normally held in raised 
positions by the springs land respectively. 
The lever n' has pivoted to its free end the 
arm in adjustably secured at its rear end to 
said lever n' by means of the slot mand 
clamping screw m, and has pivoted to its 
front end the feed pawl in the lower end of 
which engages with a projection on the string 
of connected nails to feed the same, it being 
pressed into engagement with said connected 
nails by means of the spring in connected 
at one end to a pin set in the arm mand 
at its other end to an arm in firmly secured 
on the outer end of the short shaft in upon 
the opposite end of which is firmly secured or 
? 
- 
9o 
95 
CO 
1 ? 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
519,859 
5 
O 
II 5 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
7 o 
75 
formed in one piece there with the pawl in said 
shaft in having a bearing in the free end of 
the arm n as shown in Figs. 1 and 4. 
The jaw B has a second oblique groove O 
formed therein parallel with the groove lc and 
in near proximity thereto, in which is fitted, 
so as to be movable end wise therein, the 
notched bar o', with the notch in the outer 
edge of which the free end of the lever m 
engages, so that "a vibration of said lever 
about its axis of motion will impart to said 
bar o' a reciprocating endwise motion. 
In the nose of the jaw Bjust below the lower 
ends of the pawl n, and the bar o' is formed 
a chamber in which is pivoted the nail re 
ceiver o provided with a longitudinal per 
foration of sufficient size to permit the pas 
sage of the nail, and so located that said per 
foration, when in an oblique position, will be 
in axial line with the string of connected nails 
to be fed, and when moved into a perpendicu 
lar position will be in axial line with the nail 
driver c'. The upper rear corner of the nail 
receiver ois beveled to form a cam like sur 
face against which the correspondingly bev 
eled lower end of the reciprocating bar o'en 
gages to move said receiver about its pivot 
into a perpendicular position, during which 
movement the upper end of said receiver co 
operating with the lower end of the pawl in as 
a pair of shears severs a nail from the string 
and carries it into a perpendicular position 
beneath the driver which when it descends 
drives said nail into the shoe or boot being 
operated upon. When the bar o' is moved 
upward again the receiver is moved into its 
normal or oblique position by the tension of 
the spring o' acting upon a pin set in the side 
of the receiver o and projecting through a 
slot in the covering plate O. 
The levers mand nhave their upper edges 
made cam shaped, and are acted upon by the 
roll p carried on the inner end of the pin i' 
in the short arm of the lever E, to depress 
them, said cam surfaces being so formed and 
arranged relative to each other that, the first 
part of the movement of the lever E caused 
by the pressure of the operator's thumb upon 
the pad E at its rear end will depress the 
lever in and feed the nail wire downward 
without moving the lever mand then a con 
tinuation of said movement Will depress the 
lever m, move the bar o' downward and thus 
sever a nail and move it into a position to be 
driven. The lever E is moved in the oppo 
site direction, after being depressed by the 
operator, by the spring p'. 
The lever C is mounted upon and movable 
about a stud set in, or formed in one piece 
with, the lever B, has its front or longer arm 
curved upward and downward to clear the 
hub of the lever E, and has formed upon its 
front end the shoulder q adapted to engage 
the shoulder e' of the lifter bar e, and has 
formed in the movable end of its rear Or 
shorter arm a slot q' with which the ping 
set in the lever A engages to impart to said 
lever C a vibratory motion about its pivotal 
connection to the lever B for raising the driv 
ing plunger c preparatory to driving a nil. 
The levers A and B are pivoted together 
by means of a hub r formed on one of said 
levers projecting into a bearing in the other 
lever with an annular space surrounding said 
hub in which is placed a coiled spring S Sur 
rounding said hub with one end connected 
to the lever A and the other end to the lever 
B, in such a manner that the tension of said 
spring will tend to open the pincher jaws af: 
ter they have been closed by the pressure of 
the operator's hand. 
The operation of improved lasting tool is 
as follows: The inner sole and upper of a 
boot or shoe being placed upon and tacked 
to the last, and the reel F, having Wound 
thereon a quantity of the prepared wire, 
forming what has herein been termed a string 
of connected nails, being placed in position 
on the stud l with the end of said wire passed 
down the oblique channel le past the Spring 
it and the lower end of the pawl in when said 
pawl is in its raised position and the pincher 
jaws are open, the Operator takes the tool in 
his right hand, with his fingers through the 
bow or loop of the lever Band the thumb 
through the bow or loop of the lever A. with 
the end of the thumb above the pad E' of the 
lever E, and placing the pincher jaws astride 
the edge of the upper, he presses the boWs Of 
the levers A and B toward each other, thus 
causing the pincher jaws to seize the upper 
in a firm grip, and the lever C to raise the 
driving plunger cito its uppermost position, 
when the spring h, presses the stop pawl Q 
into engagement with the shouldere to lock 
said plunger in said raised position. The 
operator then, resting the hammer head b as 
afulcrum presses downward upon the handle 
end of the tool to strain the upper and then 
pulls it over the inner sole, and then press 
ing the nose of the pincher jaw down upon 
the upper and inner sole he presses upon the 
pad E of the lever E to depress it, the first 
efect of which is to cause the pawl (n. to be 
moved downward and feed the nail Wire a 
distance equal to the length of a nail, and 
then to move the bar o' down Ward to move 
the mail receiver o into a perpendicular po 
sition thereby severing a nail from the Wire 
or string and conveying it into a perpen 
dicular position beneath the driver c' and 
then by a continuation of the downward move 
ment of the pad end of the lever E, the piim 
i? comes in contact with the front end of the 
slot in the bar h' and moves the pawl g out 
of engagement with the shoulder thus re 
leasing the plunger c and permitting the 
tension of the spring D to force said plunger 
and the driver c' downward with sufficient 
force to drive the nail in the upper and in 
ner sole. When the thumb is raised and the 
grasp of the hand is relaxed the several parts 
will assume their normal positions, by the re 
actions of the several springs, with the jaWS 
9 O 
95 
C. C. 
Io5 
II. ? 
II 5 
I 25 
519,859 
3 
Opened the pawl in and bar o' raised and the 
nail receiver Omoved in an inclined position 
With its nail receiving orifice in axial line 
with the lower end of the nail wire prepara 
tory to another like operation. When the op 
erator has once pressed the bow ends of the 
levers A and B together and raised the driver 
plunger until it is locked by the pawl g, the 
pincher jaws may be operated an indefinite 
number of times, to strain and pull the upper, 
Without operating the driver or being subject 
to any friction of said driver or the lever for 
lifting the same, provided he omits to press 
his thumb upon the lever E. 
What I claim is 
1. In a hand lasting tool, the combination 
of a pair of pincher jaw levers pivoted to 
gether and crossing each other as set forth; a 
nail delivering orifice through the nose of one 
of said pincher jaws; a vertically movable. 
driver mounted in a bearing in said jaw above, 
and in axial line with, said orifice, a spring 
applied to said driver to move it toward the 
nose end of said jaw; a vertically movable 
bar connected at one end to said driver and 
provided at its opposite end with shoulderse' 
and e, a lever pivoted to the jaw lever which 
carries said driver, and connected to, and wi 
brated by the other jaw lever and adapted to 
engage, at its free end, the shoulder e' to raise 
said driver without being attached thereto; 
the pawl g constructed and arranged to en 
gage the shoulder e and lock said driver, and 
maintain it in said raised position, while the 
pincher jaws may be operated an indefinite 
number of times; means having provision for 
automatically placing a nail in position in 
line with said orifice; and means having pro 
vision for tripping said pawl to release said 
driver. 
2. In a hand lasting tool, the combination 
of a pair of pincher jaw levers pivoted to 
gether; a spring for opening said jaws; a 
hammer head on one of said jaws; a nail de 
livering orifice through the nose of the other 
jaw; a nail driving plunger mounted in a 
bearing in said jaw above said orifice; a 
Spring connected to, and acting upon said 
plunger, and adapted to be strained when 
said plunger is raised; the lever C; the pin 
55 
?? 
g; the shouldered bar e connected to said 
driver; the oblique channels or groovesk and 
oformed in the jaw B'; the cam levers n' and 
im; the lever m pivoted to and adjustable 
on the lever in 
the feed pawl carried by the 
levers m' m; the nail receiver and carrier o' 
pivoted in a cavity in the jaw B, and con 
structed and arranged to cooperate with the 
lower end of said feed pawl to sever a nail; 
the bar o' for operating said receiver; the 
pawl g; the slotted link h"; and the thumb 
operated lever E. 
3. The combination of the pincher jaws A 
and B' provided respectively with the oper 
ating arms A and B; the driver c, c', the lifter 
bare provided with the shoulderse' and e'; 
the lever C provided with the shoulder q at 
one end and the slot q' at its other end, and 
pivoted to the lever B; the stud g set in the 
lever A and engaging the slot q', the pawl g; 
the spring h; the bar h provided with the 
slot is the lever E provided with the pin i' 
projecting into said slot; and a nail deliver 
ing and guiding passage through the nose of 
the jaw B beneath the driver c c'. 
4. The combination of the pincher jaws A' 
and B provided respectively with the oper 
ating arms A and B; a nail guiding orifice 
through said jaw B the driver c c'; the chan 
nell for guiding the nail blank wire; the 8o 
nail receiving and severing jaw of the re 
ceiver operating bar o' the spring o; the 
cam levers in and in 
the arm in adjustably 
attached to the cam lever in 
the pawl in; 
the springslland p' and the lever Epivoted 
to the lever B and provided at the end of its 
short arm with a truck to act upon the cam 
levers in and in and at its other end with the 
pad E all constructed arranged and operat 
ing substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 25th day of 
August, A. D. 1893. 
75 
o 
ISAE FRCHETTE. . 
Witnesses: 
N. C. LOMBARD, 
WALTER E. LOMBARD. 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
4. ? 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US519959.txt	(No Model.) ANTHONY ISKE & ALBERT ISKE, 
No. 519,959. 
SLICING MACHINE. 
  
4.7-2. S. C. 
C. -- CASNC 
assessee 
 
3. 
Zuevreziors. 
c1ay 92.6 
1. far-reley. 
 
THE NAIONAL LITHOGRAPHING company. 
WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTHONY ISKE AND ALBERT ISKE, OF LANCASTER, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SLICING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 519,959, dated May 15, 1894. 
Application filed June 27, 1893, Serial No. 478,986, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern, 
Beit known that we, ANTHONY ISKE and 
ALBERT ISKE, citizens of the United States, 
residing at Lancaster, in the county of Lan 
caster and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Slicing-Machines; and we do hereby de 
clarethe following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
that class of slicing machines which are es 
pecially adapted to the slicing or chipping of 
dried-beef, bologna-Sausage, radishes, pota 
toes, and the like; and in which the cutting 
is done by an inclined knife-blade rigidly se 
cured in position to a vertical plate having a 
reciprocating motion, back and forth, in guide 
grooves formed in parallel strips or rails se 
cured to the framework of the machine. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
hinged plate or gate, in front of the knife 
blade, and a set-screw, swiveled, whereby the 
free edge of said gate may be moved toward 
or from the cutting edge of the knife, to reg 
ulate the thickness of the cut or chip, more 
sensitively, conveniently and quickly than 
can be done in slicers of this class as they 
have heretofore been constructed. 
The particular features of the invention 
will more clearly appear in the following de 
scription, and will be distinctly set forth in 
the claims. 
The purposes of the invention are attained 
by the mechanism and devices illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which simi 
lar letters and figures of reference designate 
like parts throughout the several views, and 
in which 
Figures 1, 2 and 3 are, respectively, a plan, 
a front and an end elevation of a slicing ma 
chine embodying the elements of the inven 
tion. Fig. 4 is a plan of the central portion 
below the line a ac, viewed from the direction 
of the arrow 1 in Fig. 2; Fig. 5, an end view 
of the portion of the reciprocating knife-rack 
to the left of the line by y, viewed from the 
direction of the arrow 2, in Fig. 2. Figs. 6, 
7, 8 and 9 are views showing details in the 
construction, 
In the drawings. A designates the sliding or 
knife supporting rack which is preferably 
made of cast iron in one body, practically 
rectangular inform. It consists of top and 55 
bottom rails A and A, each provided along 
its inner edge with a projecting riba, which 
ribs are oppositely disposed and adapted to 
move back and forth in guide-grooves yet to 
be described. These rails are joined by two 6o 
plates A and A set in separate parallel ver 
tical planes, so as to be off-set with each other, 
best shown in Figs. 4 and 5, which off-set 
should always be equal to the depth of the 
thickest chipitis desired to cut; and the plates 65 
have an oblique opening Abetween them, 
best shown in Fig. 2, against the oblique sides 
of which are secured the cutting knife and 
gaging plate both to be hereinafter described 
and this gaging plate is a distinctive feature 7o 
of the presentinvention. The plates are pro 
vided on the outside with strengthening ribs 
a' and a wide strip a, is placed along the ob 
lique edge of the plate A to better support 
the said cutting blade, while the top and bot- 75 
tom rails are also joined by vertical end ribs 
a flush with their outer edges, and the guide 
rib d of the bottom rail is provided near its 
left hand end with a notch a to be engaged 
by a locking plate yet to be described. Into 8o 
the back of the wide strip a, is formed a 
recess a, into which is placed the knife or 
cutting blade 3 and, by means of screws 4 
tapped into said strip, it is rigidly secured to 
said plate, see Figs. 2, 4 and 5. In front of 85 
the knife, and filling the rest of the opening 
A, is fitted a plate or adjusting gate A, pro 
vided along its top and bottom and forward 
oblique edges with outwardly projecting ribs 
a to strengthen said gate, while its oblique 9o 
rear edge is hinged to the oblique forward 
edge of the plate A'. This gate is also pro 
vided on its outer face with a rearwardly pro 
jecting arm. A having tapped through its free 
end a thumb or finger screwA which has its 95 
extremity a loosely swiveled into said plate 
A", whereby said gate may be readily adjusted 
to regulate or gage the thickness of the cut, 
see Figs. 2 and 4, but it is best shown in Fig. 
5. The outer face of the plate A, near the roo 
left hand end of the rack A, is provided with 
a handle A", to reciprocate said rack; said 
O 
(5 
3o 
35 
45 
 
519,959 
25 
5 
O 
handle, by means of a pin C, being pivoted 
to said plate so as to oscillate with the motion 
of the actuating hand. 
To support the knife-rack in working posi 
tion a metallic frame B is provided, which 
may be integrally made as one casting, and 
it consists of two horizontal rails, an upper 
one B' and a lower one B, joined near their 
extremities by vertical posts B and B. The 
lower rail, within a recess, is secured verti 
cally in place by screws b to the forward face 
of a wooden base 5. Along the forward edges 
of these rails, and oppositely disposed, are 
formed angular recesses b, Figs. 3, 8 and 9, 
having a depth a trifle greater than the width 
of the top and bottom rail-ribs a before de 
scribed, forming a portion of the guide grooves 
to engage said ribs, while strips or plates B 
and B, secured in place against said edges, 
by screws b, serve to complete said groove. 
These plates are provided along their oppos 
ing edges with outwardly projecting flanges 
b', forming bearing faces against which the 
top and bottom rails of the knife-rack ride. 
The orifices through which the screws b pass 
are made vertically oblong, (shown in Fig.2) 
so that said plates may be raised or lowered 
at pleasure to take up any lost motion that 
may occur between said rack and plates. The 
upper plate is provided with an ornamental 
centerpiece b which may serve as a name 
plate. Rearward of the post B, having its 
inner face in line with the inner face of said 
post, is pivoted the forward end or edge of a 
door orgate B, by means of trunnions or pivot 
pins b, which project upward and downward 
from said end, the upper one passing through, 
extending slightly beyond, an orifice in a 
rearwardly projecting lug from the top-rail, 
B', of the frame, and the lower one, into an 
orifice or socket formed in the upper face of 
- the wooden base, 5. Near the rear end of the 
gate, and projecting outward from the lower 
edge of its outer face, is a two-pronged lug or 
jaw b to engage a vertically disposed screw 
and to receive the action of a thumb-nut to 
hold said gate fixed in opened position. This 
gate, extended rearward and fixed in position, 
Fig.1, forms a rest for the articles to be 
chipped or sliced; and it may be folded for 
ward against the supporting frame as is shown 
by dotted lines b in Fig. 4. 
Extending horizontally rearward from the 
wooden base, 5, its upper face being level 
therewith, is an approved platform C, having 
its forward edge hinged, as at c, to the top of 
said base. Near the upper right hand cor 
ner of the platform is fixed an upwardly pro 
jecting screw C" to engage the lug b', before 
mentioned, and a thumb-nut c', screwed home 
thereon, serves to secure said gate and plat 
form together. Pivoted centrally to the rear 
edge of the platform by a screw 6, is a strip 
C?, having in its inner face, near the lower 
edge and left hand end, a prolonged and out 
wardly sloping recess c, shown by dotted 
lines in Figs. 1, 3 and 4, and by full lines in 
Fig. 7. The platform, C, forms the base on 
which the articles to be cut or chipped are 
placed, and it may be folded upWard against 
the top of the supporting frame; the strip, C, 
supports the rear end of said platform in a 
level position, and on being reversed on its 
pivot screw 6, the recess cis brought into po 
sition to receive the projecting end of the up 
per trunnion, b, to hold the folded platform 
in position, as indicated by dotted lines, c, 
all of which is best shown in Fig. 3. 
Against the left hand end of the wooden 
base, 5, is rotatably secured a metallic plate 
D by means of a screw d, the plate consisting 
of a straight portion D provided with an 
outwardly projecting handle d' near one end, 
and a curved portion D'So placed as to form 
a notch or angular stop d, at the other end 
thereof, the pivot or rotating point being ec 
centric of said curved portion. A pin d is 
placed in this end of the base, as shown, to 
Stop the upward progress of the plate when 
it is turned in this direction. When the 
plate, D, occupies the position shown in Figs. 
1, 2 and 3, it forms a stop against the edge of 
a table or board, to hold the machine in place 
while in use for slicing or chipping; and 
when it occupies the position shown in Fig. 
6, the curved portion, D, having entered the 
recess, C., (Fig. 2) and the stop d having 
been brought against the knife-rack, said 
blade serves to securely lock said knife-rack, 
preventing it from being reciprocated in its 
guides. 
Having now described the invention and set 
forth the manner in which it is to be per 
formed, what is considered new, and desired 
to be secured by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination in a slicing machine, 
with the knife-rack consisting of a top, and a 
bottom, rail; off-set plates, in parallel planes, 
joined to the adjacent sides of said rails, 
and guide-ribs, oppositely disposed, projected 
along the inner edges from the outer faces 
thereof; an oblique opening, between the in 
ner ends of said plates; and a knife-blade, 
within said opening, secured to the oblique 
end of one of said plates, of a gage-plate, fill 
ing the rest of said opening, and having its 
rear edge hinged to the oblique end of the 
other one of Said plates, and having means 
provided whereby the free edge of said gage 
plate may be moved either way, by means of 
said hinges, and securely held in position, 
substantially as described and for the pur. 
pose set forth. 
2. The combination in a slicing machine 
having a reciprocating knife-rack, comprising 
two parallel rails, having guide-ribson their 
outer faces, and off-set plates to join their in 
ner ones, an oblique opening between the in 
ner ends of said plates, and a knife-blade 
Within said opening and secured to the ob 
lique end of one of said plates, with a gage 
plate in front of said knife-blade and having 
its rear edge hinge-jointed to the oblique end 
of the other one of said plates, and a rear 
45 
55 
75 
95 
ECO 
I o5 
IO 
f IS 
f 25 
I 3G 
65 
 
519,959 
5. The combination in a slicing machine, 
with the upper and lower guide rails B and 
B of the frame-work, having the angular re 
cesses b and b' and the upwardly and down 
wardly projected lugs with the screws b, as 
described, and the knife-rack A, as described, 
movable back and forth between said guide 
rails as shown, of the flanged retaining plates 
having the oblong orifices as shown adjust 
ably secured, by means of said screws b, to 
the front faces of said guide-rails, substan 
tially as described and for the purpose set 
forth. 
6. The combination in a slicing machine, 
having a frame-work, as described, supported 
by a base-piece 5, as shown, with a support 
ing platform having its front edge top-hinged 
to the rearward edge of said base-piece, of 
a supporting strip, centrally and reversibly 
pivoted to the rear edge of said supporting 
platform, and having an outwardly sloping 
and elongated recess in its inner face, near 
to the lower edge and left-hand end of said 
strip, substantially as described and for the 
purpose hereinbefore set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ANTHONY SKE, 
ALBERT ISKE. 
35 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN BOOKMYER, 
ZURIEL, SWOPE, 
5 
o 
25 
wardly projected arm having one end secured 
to the outer face near the rear edge of said 
gage-plate, of a thumb-screw having its shaft 
tapped through the free end of said arm and 
its forward end loosely pivoted into the ad 
jacent off-set plate of the knife-rack, sub 
stantially as described and for the purpose 
set forth. 
3. The combination in a slicing machine, 
having grooved guide-ways in the vertical 
face of its supporting frame-work, as herein 
before described, with a knife-rack, as de 
scribed, movable back and forth in said guide 
Ways, of an actuating handle as described, 
having its base plate rotatably pivoted near 
to an end of the front face of said knife-rack 
as shown, substantially as described and for 
the purpose hereinbefore set forth. 
4. The combination in a slicing machine 
having a base piece 5, as shown, to support 
the frame-work thereof, and grooved guide 
ways in the front vertical face of said frame 
work, with a reciprocating knife-rack having 
guide ribs projected vertically outward from 
its upper and lower parallel faces, and mov 
able back and forth in said guide-ways, and 
a locking notch placed in the lower rib near 
to the left-hand end of the rack, of a locking 
plate, such as hereinbefore described, rotat 
ably pivoted to the adjacent end of said base, 
5, substantially as described and for the pur 
pose set forth, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520059.txt	(No Model.) 
E. B. KEITH, 
HAY LOADER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 520,059. 
Patented May 22, 1894, 
w 
Oe 
C 
la 
 
  
 
h/ITYASSES 
6-24- 
ely 6oz. 
The NATIONAL LITHoarArne COMPANY. 
WAHINGTON, D.C. 
'til 
II; 
it mm 
is 
 
r 
Iy 2/EWTOf 
dazzi Vizcz, 
a 4-ece C 212-(, 
(No Model.) 
E. B. KEITH. 
HAY LOADER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 520,059. 
Patented May 22, 1894. 
 
by TWESSAS 
12-26 
2. 
IA7/EWTOf 
/ 64, & V24, 
4, &ece (if 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ETHAN B. KEITH, OF GALESBURG, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO WILLIAM R. 
RITTER, OF DOWAGIAC, MICHIGAN. 
HAY LOADER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 520,059, dated May 22, 1894. 
Application filed February 10, 1894, Serial No. 499,801. (No model.) 
Oa. 
30 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ETHAN B. KEITH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Gales 
burg, gounty of Kalamazoo, State of Michigan, 
5 have invented a new and useful Hay-Loader, 
Of Which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of hay 
loaders which employ alternately reciprocat 
ing toothed elevator bars and rakes, operated 
?o by a crank-shaft having a series of zigzag 
Eks, to gather and elevate the hay onto the 
The invention has for its object important 
features in the construction of the gathering 
5 rakes, and in the plan of operating and asso 
ciating them with the toothed elevator-bars. 
Another object consists in the mode of at 
taching the teeth to the elevator-bars. 
Another object is to provide the floor of the 
2O elevator-rack With an extensible portion, and 
to provide Said portion with a hinged adjust 
able platform, so that the height of elevating 
the hay may be governed in accordance with 
the increasing height of the load. 
25 These and other objects will be more fully 
Set forth below, and the peculiar advantages 
thereof clearly described. 
In the drawings forming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1, is a side elevation ; Fig. 2, 
abroken front view looking from a point at 
the left of Fig.1; Fig. 3, an enlarged perspec 
tive of parts in Fig. 2; Fig. 4, an enlarged 
section on line 1-1 in Fig. 3; Fig. 5, an en 
larged rear view of broken details from Figs. 
351, and 2, in perspective, and Fig. 6, shows an 
enlarged perspective view of one of the gath 
ering rakes in Fig. 3. 
Referring to the letters and figures of refer 
ence on the drawings, A is the base frame sup 
ported by the wheels B, Figs. 1, and 3. The 
elevator rack C, at an incline, Figs. 1, 2, and 5, 
is attached to the base frame B, at D, and 
is braced by uprights or standards E. The 
9&nk-shaft F, having a series of zigzag cranks 
45 G, has bearings at each end in the base-frame 
A, and is driven by the gears H, and I. The 
gear I, is of course in use provided with some 
arrangement for throwing the crank-shaft in 
and out of gear. Any well known clutch or 
5o the like may be employed for the purpose. 
The reciprocating elevator-bars J, it will be 
noticed are not attached directly to the cranks 
G, but are pivotally attached at the lower end 
to the lower end of the short rake handles K, 
at L, Fig. 6, which rake handles are pivotally 55 
attached between their two ends to the cranks 
G, at N. 
A cross-bar O, is supported above the ele 
Vator-rack C, and base-frame A, by standards 
P, which standards are attached to said base- 6o 
frame, Figs. 1, 2, and 3. To the cross-bar O, 
and to the upper end of the rake handles K, 
are pivotally connected at each end, rods R, 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3, which rods form a fulcrum 
to the rake handles, and assist in establish- 65 
ing and controlling the peculiar sweep made 
by the rakes during the operation of gather 
ing and loading the hay. 
The principal advantage in the peculiar 
SWeep of the gathering-rakes S, is that in- to 
stead of describing a circle as heretofore, (in 
which case they do not rake as clean) they 
describe an oblong or somewhat egg shaped 
path, but flattened or nearly straight on the 
under side near the surface of the ground, 75 
thus moving a greater distance near to the 
ground, after they have entered the hay with 
their teeth tilted to the front as they start on 
their backward movement, by which means 
the hay is delivered to the elevator teeth W, 
in a manner less liable to become entangled 
with the gathering-rakes. The tilt of the 
teeth of the gathering-rakes S, is also partially 
controlled by their peculiar construction and 
attachment to the rake handles K. These 85 
rake teeth are provided with an elastic coil 
near the top, and with an end T, extending 
above the coil and terminating in an eye, Fig. 
6. A rod U, is passed through the elastic . 
coil, and through the lower end of the rake 9c 
handle K, just above the pivot L and another 
rod V, is passed through the eye of the end 
T, and through the rake handle K, at a point 
a little above the rod U. Thus the elastic 
coil and the eye are pivotally attached to the 95 
rods U, V, the rod U, forming a fulcrum on 
which the rake teeth tilt when the rake han 
dle K, swings on the fulcrum N, during the 
operation. It will be noticed that the teeth 
of the rakes S, are independent of each other Ioo 
O 
15 
20 
520,059 
2 
and easily detachable. As many of the teeth provided with short handles, said handles be 
may be employed in a single rake as desir- ling pivotally attached between their two ends 
able. 
to the cranks of the crank-shaft, the lower 
The teeth W, of the elevator-bars J, are end of said rake-handles being pivoted to the 
made by bending in something the shape of lower end of the toothed elevator-bars, and 
an inverted letter U, and placed astride of rods pivotally attached at one end to said 
the bars, Fig. 4. They are secured by a tie- transverse bars, and at the other end to the 
wire X, bent upon itself, placed astride of the upper end of the rake handles, substantially 
loop of the teeth W, and the ends passed as set forth. 
down through a hole in the bar J, and from 
2. ln a hay loader, the combination, of the 
thence bent laterally each way on the under base - frame, the transverse bar supported 
side of the bar, and wound around the side above said frame, the crank-shaft, toothed Ter 
prongs of the teeth. This is a strong and ciprocating elevator-bars, the gathering rake 
convenient manner of securing the teeth, and handles pivotally attached between their two 
they can be readily detached and replaced ends to the cranks of the crank-shaft, the 
with new ones should they become broken or lower end of said rake handles being pivoted 
unduly bent. 
to the lower end of the toothed elevator-bars, 
The extensible part of the floor of the ele- rods pivotally attached at one end to said 
vator-rack C, consists of cross pieces Y, Z, transverse bar, and at the other end to the 
and slats 1, which slats 1, slide between the upper end of the rake handles, and rake teeth 
slats 2, of the floor of the main part of the provided with the elastic coil, and with the 
elevator-rack, Fig. 5. This extensible part eyed end above said coil, said coil and eyed 
further consists of the adjustable platform 3, end being pivotally attached to the lower end 
hinged to the cross piece Z. The object of of the rake handles at a point just above the 
this is to deliver the hay onto the load at a pivotal attachment of said handles with the 
point lower down when the load is first com- toothed elevator - bars, substantially as set 
menced, and to raise the extensible part as the forth. 
load increases in height, thus obviating the 
3. In a hay loader, the elevator-bars, pro 
necessity of elevating all the hay to the top vided with the inverted U-teeth astride of 
of the elevator. 
said bars, and the tie-wires passed over the 
In Fig. 1, the platform 3, is swung down to bow of the teeth, downthrough the bars, thence 
a horizontal position, and is held by a hooked bent laterally each way on the under side of 
rod 5, one on each side, which rod is attached the bars, and attached to the sides of the teeth, 
to an extended end of the side cleats 1, Fig. substantially as set forth. 
5. The rod 5, is shown broken in Fig. 5. 
4. In a hayloader, the gathering-rakes, com 
This platform 3, prevents any hay from fall- prising a handle, and the teeth provided with 
ing between the rack and the load. As the the elastic coil and the eyed-end above said 
load grows higher the extensible partis raised coil, said coil and eyed-end being pivotally 
and held by the extended ends of the cross and detachably attached to the handle, by 
piece Z, resting on one of the notches of the rods which project laterally from the sides 
dogs 6, which dogs are attached to the sides thereof, and loosely pass through said eyes 
of the elevator-rack C, Figs. 1, and 5. When and coils substantially as set forth, 
the load becomes high enough to allow the 
5. In a hay loader and the like, an elevator 
hay to pass over the upper end of the eleva- rack in combination with the extensible part 
to the floor said part comprising the main 
stor-rack C, the platform 3, of the extensible 
portion having a sliding connection with the 
part, is closed, and its upper end caught un 
elevator-rack, and the adjustable platform 
der the lugs 7, attached to the sides of the 
hinged to said main portion, substantially as 
elevator-rack, and its cross piece Z, allowed 
to rest on the upper notch of the dogs 6. 
set forth. 
6. In a hay loader and the like, an elevator 
It will be understood of course that Figs. 2, 
rack, in combination with the extensible part 
3, and 5, illustrate one side of the machine, 
to the floor, said part comprising the main 
and that the other side in the complete de 
portion having a sliding connection with the 
vice is a duplicate thereof. 
elevator-rack, the adjustable platform hinged 
When in use, the hay loader is attached to 
to said main portion, the pivoted notched dogs 
the rear of the wagon, (not here shown) con 
for holding up said extensible part, and the 
nection being made with the base frame at 8. 
hooked rods for holding the platform in its 
In Fig. 1, is shown at 9, a rest to support the 
down position, substantially as set forth. 
end of the base frame A, when detached from 
In testimony of the foregoing I have here 
the Wagon. 
unto subscribed my name in the presence of 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters two witnesses. 
Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a hay loader, the coinbination, of the 
base frame, the transverse bar supported 
above said frame, the crank-shaft, toothed re- 
ciprocating elevator-bars, gathering - rakes 
LEVI. F. Cox, 
- 
WILLIAM R. RITTER. 
ETHAN B. KEITH. 
Witnesses: 
45 
50 
55 
65 
35 
70 
75 
go 
95 
CO 
IOS 
o 
I5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520159.txt	(No Model.) 
C. C. FIELDS, 
AUTOMATIC ALARM REGISTER 
NO, 520,159. 
Patented May 22, 1894. 
 
 
  
 
ae N 
 
diposses 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES C. FIELDS, OF BRISTOL, TENNESSEE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
ABRAM. D. REYNOLDS, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC ALARM - REGISTER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 520,159, dated May 22, 1894. 
Application filed February 10, 1893, Serial No. 461813, (No model.) 
O 
To cult, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES C. FIELDS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bris 
tol, in the county of Sullivan and State of Ten 
neSSee, have invented a new and useful Au 
tomatic Alarm-Register, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
registers; the objects in view being to pro 
vide a register of cheap and simple construc 
tion and consisting of few parts and adapted 
to be operated in connection with any mech 
anism, such for instance as printing-presses, 
or in fact any machine wherein it is desired 
to employ a register capable of being set so 
as to indicate when a certain number of acts 
have been accomplished. 
My invention is especially adapted for use 
in connection with yard-sticks for use in 
making long measurements of carpets and 
fabrics of various kinds wherein it is desired 
to avoid accidental miscalculation which is 
now mentally carried on, thus reducing the 
calculation to a mechanical certainty and re 
quiring no mental exertion upon the part of 
the operator to ascertain when he has meas 
ured off a certain predetermined quantity of 
yards or feet as the case may be. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain features of construction 
hereinafter specified and particularly pointed 
out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings:-Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of a yard-stick, a register 
constructed in accordance with my invention 
being applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a reverse 
view illustrating the preferred manner of se 
curing the register upon the stick. Fig. 3 is 
a plan view of the register, the back-plate 
being removed to expose the interior mech 
anism. Fig. 4 is a detail in transverse sec 
tion of the register. Fig. 5 is a detail in per 
spective of the spring bell hammer. Fig. 6 
is a detail of the operating-pawl. Fig. 7 is a 
detail in reverse plan of the trip-mechanism. 
The same numerals of reference indicate 
the same or like parts in all the figures of the 
drawings. 
In constructing the register I preferably 
make the same round, but it may be given 
any other external shape desired whereby it 
may be adapted for the various purposes for 
which it is intended. In the present instance 
I have illustrated the same in connection with 
a circular case consisting of a face 1 having 55 
an annular flange or surrounding wall 2 sur 
rounding the same, and a back-plate or disk 
3 conveniently secured in position through the 
medium of suitable screws 4 passed through 
perforations in the back-plate or disk and into 6cy 
internally-threaded posts 5, which extend from 
the inner surface of the face I, all as shown 
in Figs. 2 and 3 of the drawings. 
The face 1 is provided with an annular 
slightly raised rib 6, which is divided into de- 65 
grees by shallow indentations or notches 7, 
which degrees indicate the unit of measure 
ment, as for instance a yard or foot or it may 
be otherwise where it is desired to make 
measurements of great length. The degrees 7o 
are numbered so as to be readily observable, 
and at the Zero point a sight-opening 8 is 
formed in the casing. 
In the center of the casing a perforation is 
formed, in which is mounted a short hollow 75 
shaft 9 fixed to the casing and upon the short 
hollow shaft there is mounted for rotation a 
disk 10 of such diameter as to extend beyond 
the sight-opening in the casing and conse 
quently be exposed below said opening. This 8o 
disk 10 has its upper face divided into de 
grees or units that correspond with those 
formed on the face of the casing and its pe 
riphery is provided with a series of teeth 11, 
which correspond with the degrees upon the 85 
face of the disk and consequently with those 
upon the face of the casing. 
Arranged against the back face of the disk 
10 is a disk-shaped bell 12, the same having 
an annular flange 13 and of less diameter go 
than the disk 10. The center of the bell is 
provided with an opening in which is rigidly 
secured a hollow shaft or stud 14 which pro 
jects beyond each face of the disk and is 
mounted in the hollow shaft 9. The front 95 
extremity of this shaft is Squared where it 
passes through and beyond the hollow shaft 
9 and consequently beyond the face of the 
casing and there receives the indicating-hand 
or pointer 15 which is provided with a square- too 
opening so as to receive the shaft and rotate 
therewith. The hand is provided upon its 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
 
520,159 
75 
O 
25 
under side in this instance with a shallow-rib 
16 adapted to engage with the shallow in 
dentations indicating the degrees upon the 
face of the casing, and is further provided 
with a nib by which it may be conveniently 
grasped and moved over the face of the cas 
ing. An arm 17 is mounted upon the inner 
end of the hollow-shaft 14 and extends ra 
dially therefrom to a point adjacent to the 
flange of the bell and from this arm there ex 
tends a projection or stop 18 which overlaps 
the flange of the bell. 
Pivoted to the under side of the arm 17, as 
indicated at 19, is a trip-?inger or lever 20, 
the same having its upper side recessed or cut 
away to receive the tail-end 21 of a spring 
hammer 22, said tail-end being likewise piv 
oted to the arm 17 by the pivot 19. The rear 
end of the trip-lever or finger 20 forms a 
shoulder 23 so that, as will be obvious, when 
the lever is moved in one direction said 
shoulder will abut against the tail-end of the 
spring-hammer and thus oscillate said ham 
mer upon the pivot while at the same time 
the said lever is free to move to a limited ex 
tent in the opposite direction without influ 
encing said spring-hammer. 
Flat springs 24 and 25 are secured to the 
edges of the arm 17 and bear against the 
edges of the tail-end of the spring-hammer in 
rear of the pivot-point 19 of the latter, so that 
the springs exert a tendency to maintain the 
trip-finger or lever 20 and the tail-end of the 
Spring-hammer in alignment and the lever 20 
in position beyond the edge of the bell, where 
by it may be struck by a projecting post 25 
which is mounted upon the disk 10. 
Secured to the flange 2 of the casing within 
the same is a spring detent 26, the same be 
ing provided at its free end with a rounded 
nib or pawl 27 that extends into the path of 
and engages the teeth 11 of the disk 10. This 
pawl serves to hold the disk to a limited ex 
tent against retrograde movement, but being 
rounded it will be seen that the disk may be 
rotated against the influence of the pawl, the 
said pawl riding over the teeth. 
Secured to the flange 2 of the casing to one 
side of the Spring detent is a spring lever 28, 
the same having its free end bifurcated (see 
Fig. 6) and having pivoted between its bifur 
cations as at 29 a curved pawl 30 whose op 
erating end is beveled and adapted to engage 
with the teeth 11 of the disk10. A flat spring 
31 is secured to the lever and presses against 
the tail of the pawl, whereby the operating 
end of the latter is normally pressed inward 
and adapted to engage with the teeth of the 
disk. A thumb-stud 32 is mounted on the 
spring-lever and extends through a hole 33 
formed in the flange. 2, beyond which it is 
provided with a thumb-plate 34. 
This completes the construction of the reg 
ister, and its operation is as follows: If, for 
65 instance, it be desired to register a predeter 
mined number of acts of any kind upon any 
machine or by hand, it is simply necessary 
to turn the indicating-hand to the degree cor 
responding with that degree upon the face of 
the casing at which point the small rib upon 
the under side of the hand will cause the 
same to become stationary. Now by press 
ing upon the thumb-stud either mechanically 
or manually as the case may be, it will be 
seen that at each pressure the spring-lever 
will be forced inward or toward the disk 10 
and its pawl engage with a tooth of said disk 
thus causing the disk to move the distance 
of one tooth, which as before stated, will in 
dicate one degree upon the face of the cas 
ing and will expose the number of teeth 
through the sight-opening in the casing. It 
will be seen that the bell remaining station 
ary and the disk 10 revolving will cause the 
post carried by the disk 10 to come in con 
tact with the trip-finger or lever of the bell 
at the time that the post has arrived opposite 
the disk over which the indicating-hand is 
located, it being understood that the trip fin 
ger or lever 20 of the bell is directly in align 
ment with said indicating-hand, and thus will 
the bell be sounded and indicate that the 
number of acts, whatever they may be, have 
taken place. 
Various changes in the details of my inven 
tion will readily suggest themselves to those 
skilled in this particular art, and I therefore 
do not limit myself to those herein shown, 
but hold that I may vary the same to any ex 
tent and to any degree within the knowledge 
of the skilled mechanic. 
As before stated my invention is particu 
larly adapted for use in connection with yard 
sticks and other measuring devices of this 
character, and I have therefore illustrated 
such use in Figs. land 2 of the drawings. To 
thus adapt the register I provide the back 
face or disk of the same with a clip-plate 35, 
the same being formed of spring-metal and 
having its ends upturned as at 36 and carled 
at the extremities to enable them to be read 
ily introduced over the end of a yard or other 
measuring stick. 
It Will be understood that various other 
means may be provided for securing the regis 
ter upon the stick, this being a simple form 
that has occurred to me as being convenient 
and not apt to mar the stick and permit of a 
ready application and removal when desired. 
The utility of the device in connection with 
a yard or other stick will be at once apparent 
from the foregoing description taken in con 
nection with the drawings and the introduc 
tory to the Specification and as before stated 
Such utility and advantages consist in the 
fact that instead of mentally counting each 
yard as measured the operator simply touches 
the thunb-plate having previously set the de 
Vice to the number of yards to be measured 
and the instant that that number of yards 
has been measured the bell will sound the 
alarm and the operator will at once know that 
35 
45 
5 O 
55 
. 
95 
CO 
IO 5 
I 15 
I 25 
 
520,159 
IO 
the precise number desired has been meas 
ured which will be a mechanical certainty. 
As beforestated the application of the regis 
ter to the yard-stick is only one of the very 
many that may be made, and I have herein 
illustrated such application, more for the pur 
pose of illustration than anything else, though, 
as before stated it may be as well adapted for 
printing-presses, cloth-measures of various 
kinds, Wall-paper measures, &c., all of which 
I deem as within the scope of my invention 
and as covered by the claims of the specifica 
tion. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a register, the combination with the 
casing having its front face divided into de 
grees, a perforation in the center of the face, 
a hollow stud located fixedly therein and ex 
tending rearwardly therefrom, a toothed disk 
mounted for rotation upon the stud, a pawl 
Spring-pressed and adapted to be depressed 
into engagement with the teeth of the disk, a 
plunger for depressing the pawl, and a hold 
ing pawl, of a bell at the inner side of the 
toothed disk, a fixed shaft passing there 
through, and loosely through the hollow stud, 
a register-hand located fixedly upon the outer 
end of the shaft and adapted for travel over 
the face of the casing, a tripping mechanism 
carried by the inner end of the shaft, a ham 
mer operated by the tripping mechanism, and 
a post extending from the toothed disk and 
adapted to operate the tripping mechanism, 
Substantially as specified. 
2. In a register, the combination with the 
casing whose face is divided into degrees and 
which is provided with a central opening, a 
hollow-stud extending inwardly and fixedly 
therefrom, a rotatable toothed disk carried 
loosely by the stud, and having an inwardly 
disposed tripping-post, a bell, a shaft secured 
thereto and passed through and beyond the 
hollow stud, a register hand carried by the 
outer end of the shaft the same adapted to 
move there with and over the face of the cas 
25 
35 
40 
45 
ing, of a pawl for Operating the toothed disk, 
a plunger for operating the pawl, an arm pro 
jecting from the inner end of the shaft and 
having an extension extending into the path 
of the tripping-post, a beveled trip-pawl or 
lever pivoted to the arm, said pawl having 
one face recessed and provided with a shoul 
der, and extending at its outer end into the 
path of the tripping-post, a spring-hammer 
having a tail-piece at one end located in the 
recess and mounted upon the pivot of the 
pawl and in the path of its shoulder, and a 
flat spring secured to the arm and bearing 
against the edges of the tail-piece and trip 
pawl opposite the point of pivot, substantially 
as specified. 
3. In a register, the combination with the 
circular register-case, the face of which is 
divided into degrees and is provided with a 
central opening, and the sight-opening, a hol 
low stud extending from the central opening, 
a toothed disk mounted for rotation upon the 
inner end of the stud and having its inner 
face provided with indicating-numerals agree 
ing with the degrees upon the casing and in 
line with the sight-opening in the casing, an 
alarm-mechanism carried by the inner end of 
the shaft, a tripping-post for operating the 
same carried by the toothed disk, of the 
spring-holding pawl secured to the casing and 
having a rounded end engaging with the teeth 
of the toothed disk, the curved spring-arm 
also secured to the casing, a pawl loosely con 
nected there with a spring for elevating the 
pawl out of engagement with the teeth of the 
disk, and a plunger passing through the cas 
ing and resting upon the spring-arm, Sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
C. C. FIELDS. 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
E. G. SIGGERS, 
J. H. SIGGERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520259.txt	(No Model.) 
C. I. EARLL. 
GRIP MECHANISM FOR, CABE RAILWAYS 
5. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 520,259. 
 
Patented May 22, 1894. 
 
Q. 
%zcovea 
C4a 
27 fzal A 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
C. I. EARLL, 
GRIP MECHANISM FOR CABLE RAILWAYS, 
No. 520,259, 
Patented May 22, 1894, 
s 
 
M 
ESEEEEEE 
zz 
t 
zz  
Ele 
R 
NS 
(No Model.) 
No. 520,259, 
Patented May 22, 1894. 
C. I. EARLL. 
GRIP MECHANISM FOR, CABLE RAILWAYS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
 
as a -a - -ra- -As -----------w- - - m -- 
----------------------- 
(No Model.) 
C. I. EARLL, 
GRIP MECHANISM FOR, CABLE RAILWAYS 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 520,259. 
Patented May 22, 1894, 
 
  
 
 
 
  
2SN 
SNS 
V 
 
a 
2 23 SB, 22 
NYS S 
3SSSSSS2 
252 22 
K2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES I. EARLI, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
GRP MECHANISM FOR CABLE RALWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 520,259, dated May 22, 1894. 
Application filed June 12, 1893. Serial No. 477,293, (No model. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES I. EARLL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Grip Mechanism for Cable Railways, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
grip mechanism for cable railways, the ob 
jects thereof being to readily grip and un 
grip the cable in starting and stopping the 
cable car, and also from the car and auto 
matically to operate and release the movable 
jaw and throw out the cable. 
In carrying out my invention I employ de 
vices operated from the car for raising and 
lowering the movable jaw to grip and ungrip 
the cable in stopping and starting the car; 
also devices operated from the car for releas 
ing the movable jaw and throwing out the 
cable from the grip together with devices 
connected with the slot rails of the cable con 
duit for automatically performing the same 
operation. These devices may be operated 
from either end of the car or from an inter 
mediate point when a special grip car is used. 
All of these devices are hereinafter more 
fully described. 
In the drawings:-Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion illustrating my improvements with the 
parts in the position occupied when the cable 
is gripped. Fig. 2 is a vertical cross section 
at the line U. v. of Fig. 1. showing the grip 
ping mechanism and in addition a cross sec 
tion of the slot rails and end elevation of the 
ejector bars connected there with. Fig. 3 is a 
plan view of said parts. Fig. 4 is a partial 
side elevation with the parts in the position 
they will assume when the movable jaw is 
fully raised. Fig. 5 is a partial side eleva 
tion with the parts in the position they will 
assume when the movable jaw is operated 
and the cable simultaneously released and 
thrown out or ejected either from the car 
mechanism or automatically. Fig. 6 is a sec 
tional plan at the line acac of Fig. 4. Fig. 7 
is a sectional plan at the line / y of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 8 is a detached vertical section at 4, 4, 
of Fig. 5. Fig. 9 is an elevation illustrating 
a modification of my device and Fig. 10 is a 
vertical section at 2 2 of Fig. 9. 
A represents the yoke frame carrying the 
operating mechanism and which yoke frame 
is supported from the truck of the car. The 
longitudinal girders K have connected to 
them the cross carrying bars I. The carrier 
sleeves H surround and are adapted to move 
lengthwise upon the bars I and these sleeves 
have rising pins H' which pass through holes 
made in the respective ends of the yoke frame 
A and the yoke frame and the grip mechanism 
supported thereby are thus connected to and 
carried by the cable car. The yoke frame A 
is made with depending ribbed portions 1 to 
which the vertically placed outer shanks BB 
are secured by the bolts 2 and standards AA 
rise from the said yoke frame to receive and 
act as bearings for the rock shafts c c'. The 
vertically placed intermediate shanks C C' 
and centralshank D occupy the space between 
the outer shanks B B and are in the same 
plane therewith so as to pass freely through 
the slot between the slot rails N N. The 
blocks a a' are secured upon the opposite 
faces of the shanks C C and the crosshead 
plates b b' are bolted to the opposite faces of 
the central shank D and their free ends ex 
tend across the shanks C C and over the ad 
jacent edges of the outer shanks BB' where 
by the outer shanks B B act as guides for 
the plates b b and shank D and the plates b 
b' act as guides for the shanks C C'. 
did represent rocker arms upon the rock 
shafts c c' and these rocker arms are con 
nected by a linke. Rocker arms h h' are 
also connected to the shafts c c' and links . 
." 
connect the ends of these rocker arms h. h. 
with the upper ends of the intermediate 
shanks C C within the open yoke frame A. 
A rocker arm g is connected to the shaft c 
and a connecting rod 3 passes from its upper 
end to one end of the cable car; and a con 
necting rod 5 from the other end of the cable 
car is connected to the upper end of the 
rocker arm d' by a pivot ping'. A lever l 
forked at its lower end is pivoted to the yoke 
frame A by the pivot pin 6 and a rock shaft - 
k' passes through this lever land to the outer 
end of this rock shaft ic' is connected a rocker 
arm lic whose lower end is connected to the 
rock shaft c' by the linke' and rocker armf, 
which latter is connected to the rock shaft c'. 
The rock shaft k' carries a pawl m and the 
upper end of the lever l is provided with a 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
c 
520,259 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
connecting rod and coupling 4 extending in ply the usual brakes and stop the cable car 
both directions to the respective ends of the for passengers to alight, the connecting rod 
4 is pulled upon in the direction of the arrow 
cable car. 
21, Fig. 1, operating the lever land causing 
Within the forked lever l upon the pivot 
its cross web to bear upon the projection 11 
pin 6 is mounted a tumbler in and links o o' 
of the tumbler n and raising said tumbler n, 
are pivoted to said tumbler and to the cen 
links o o', shank D and upper jaw G to what 
tral shank D upon the opposite faces of the 
ever extent may be necessary to free the ca 
crosshead plates b b'. The tumbler n, is pro 
ble. To start the car the motion of these 
vided with a notch 10 for the pawl m and a 
parts is reversed and the shank D and jaw G. 
projection 11 against which the cross web of 
are forced down as heretofore described. 
the lever l bears, and the axial center of the 
pin 20 connecting the rocker arm k and link 
There are times when it is desired to throw 
Out the cable entirely and this operation 
e' in the normal position of the parts agrees 
shown by Fig. 5 may be effected in two ways, 
essentially with the axial center of the pivot 
either by the operator on the car, or auto 
in 6 so that in the position Fig. 1 it is possi 
matically. When effected by the operator 
ble to rock the lever l by the connecting rod 
on the car one of the connecting rods 3 or 5 
4 and by means of the pawl n, tumbler in and 
is pulled upon (according to the direction in 
links O o' to raise and lower the central shank 
which the car is moving) in the direction of 
D without moving or throwing out the pawl 
m or operating the rocker arm k or disturbing 
the arrow and the rocker arms g, d and h on 
the shaft c and the rocker arms d, h' and fon 
any of the other parts of the grip mechanism. 
the shaft c together with the links e e' are 
The lower jaw Eis secured to the outershanks 
operated and swung over toward the position 
BB' and is stationary. 
shown in Fig. 5, raising the links i, 
inter 
The upper jaw G is secured to the central 
mediate shanks C C and lifter bar F and 
shank D and is vertically movable there with. 
moving the pins 13 upward in the slots of the 
The lower jaw E is a casting with central end 
ejectors LL' and simultaneously pushing for 
mortises for the outer Shanks B B and the 
Ward the link e' swinging the rocker arm ki 
upper jaw G is also a casting with a central 
upon the rock shaft k' and raising the pawl 
mortise for the shanks B B which pass 
in Out of engagement, with the tumbler n. 
through it and for the central shank D to 
This movement brings the blocks a a' up 
which said jaw is attached by the rivets 9. 
against the crosshead plates b b' and the pins 
These jaws are made With recesses to receive 
13 to the upper ends of the slots of the ejec 
the grip shoes r r' and Ss' which act upon the 
tors L. L. The further movement upon the 
cable S and said grip shoes are held remov 
aforesaid parts brings them into the full po 
ably in place in said recesses by the pins 7, 8. 
sition shown in Fig. 5 wherein the interme 
A lifter bar F illustrated as made in two 
diate shanks C C by their blocks a a', the 
similar parts is securely riveted to the inter 
plates b b' and shank D have lifted the mov 
mediate shanks C C and to each other upon 
able jaw G off the cable and the lifter bar F se 
the opposite aligned faces of the shanks, and 
the respective ends of said bar are secured 
cured to the shank C C has elevated the 
ejectors LL' and caused their inclines to act 
together by rivets 12 and are provided with 
upon the cable and eject or slide it out of the 
pins 13. 
grip mechanism. In this operation the posi 
The respective ends of the lower jaw E are 
provided with depressions or recesses extend 
tion of the lever l is not affected. When the 
cable is ejected automatically the operation 
ing across the said jaw widthwise and L L' 
is accomplished by the ejector bars O O' 
are ejectors whose inclined flaring lower ends 
shown in the end view Fig. 2 and in dotted 
are received in said recesses. These ejectors 
extend up through the jaw G and through 
lines Fig. 5. These ejector bars O O" are illus 
trated as connected by bolts 15 to the foot 
the lifter bar F and their upper ends are slot 
plates of the slot rails N N or said ejector 
ted for the pins 13 of said lifter bar. The 
bars O O' may be connected to the conduit 
lower edges of the lifter bar Fare inclined in 
structure in any desired manner, and they 
opposite directions from the central portion 
have inclined edge faces that come within 
toward the ends, and I provide in the cable 
conduit and preferably connected to the un 
and rise between the vertical inner faces of 
Said slot rails. In the movement of the cable 
der sides of the slot rails inclined ejector bars 
car and as the grip mechanism comes along 
O O' whose purpose will be hereinafter more 
to the fixed ejector bars O O' the under in 
fully described. 
clined edges of the lifter bar Fride up the 
In the position of the parts Fig. 1 the cable 
inclined edges of these ejector bars O Olift 
shown in dotted lines is Supposed to be 
gripped between the jaws EG pressure being 
ing the bar F and intermediate shanks C. C. 
applied through the connecting rod 4 leverl 
connected there with. This movement brings 
the blocks a C up to the plates b b' and the 
pawl in tumbler n and links O o' to force down 
pins 18 to the top of the slots of the ejeetors 
the central shank D and movable jaw G upon 
T, L' and simultaneously by the links 
the cable, this pressure being augmented in 
proportion to the power applied by the op 
SWings the rocker arms h h", shafts c c', rocker 
arms did flinks ee', rocker arm k, and rock 
erator on the cable car in drawing upon the 
shaft lc and lifts the pawl m from the tum 
rod 4. To ungrip the cable in order to ap 
o 
75 
85 
95 
Ox 
to5 
O 
II5 
20. 
25 
30 
 
520,259 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
bler in releasing the shank D and movable 
jaw G and the further movement of the parts 
just described elevates the jaw G and ejector 
bars O O" and slides the cable out of the 
grip mechanism. When these parts return 
by the descent of the moving jaw to a normal 
position the tumbler n is rotated and the 
pawl m turned down to place against the 
tumbler thereby bringing the center of the 
pin 20 connecting the rocker arm k and link 
e' into axial line with that of the pivot pin 6. 
In the modification shown in Figs. 9 and 
10, the upper jaw T is stationary and is se 
cured to the outer shanks B B and the lower 
jaw V is movable and is secured to the cen 
tral shank D the blocks a a' are not employed, 
the tumbler n is of slightly modified form, 
and the pawl in is made with a hooked end 
to engage the lower edge of the said tumbler. 
Otherwise the construction and operation of 
the other parts is the same as heretofore de 
scribed. In this modification the lower mov 
able jaw is raised and the cable gripped by 
pulling on the rod 4 in the direction of the 
arrow 22, Fig. 9, and this jaw is dropped and 
the cable released or ungripped by tripping 
the pawl n, by the mechanism heretofore de 
scribed by pulling on either rod 3 or 5 from 
the cable car, or automatically by the ejector 
bars O O' in the trench raising the lifter 
plate F and when the lower jaw V drops and 
the lifter bar Fraises the ejectors LL' by the 
automatic action of the bars O O", the cable 
is slid out of the grip mechanism by the in 
clines of the ejectors LL'. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a grip mechanism the combination 
with a stationary and a movable jaw; of a 
tumbler and a pivot therefor and connections 
from said tumbler to said movable jaw and 
to the car for operating said tumbler, a pawl 
engaging the tumbler and devices for disen 
gaging said pawl from said tumbler to per 
mit the jaws to open and release the cable, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a grip mechanism the combination 
with a stationary and movable jaw; of a shank 
carrying the movable jaw, a tumbler and links 
connecting the said tumbler with the shank 
a lever operated from the car and a pawl car 
ried by said lever and engaging the said tum 
bler, whereby the movable jaw is operated 
to grip and ungrip the cable, substantially as 
specified. 
3. In a grip mechanism the combination 
with a stationary and movable jaw; of a shank 
carrying the movable jaw, a tumbler and links 
connecting the said tumbler with the shank, 
a lever operated from the car and a pawl car 
ried by said lever and engaging the said tum 
bler, and devices acting upon the said pawl 
for disengaging it from the tumbler, Substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. In a grip mechanism the combination 
with a stationary and a movable jaw; of the 
central shank D connected to the movable 
jaw, the tumbler n and its connection to the 
- 
shank D, the leverland the rod 4 for moving 
said lever from the car, and a pawl m pivoted 
to the leverland adapted to engage the tum 
bler for operating the movable jaw, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. In a grip mechanism the combination 
with a stationary and a movable jaw; of the 
central Shank D connected to the movable 
jaw, the tumbler n and its connection to the 
shank D, the lever l, the pivot pin 6 upon 
which both the tumbler in and lever l are 
mounted, and the rod 4 for moving said lever 
from the car, and a pawl m pivoted to the 
lever land adapted to engage the tumbler 
for operating the movable jaw, substantially 
as set forth. 
6. In a grip mechanism, the combination 
with a stationary and a movable jaw; of the 
central shank ID connected to the movable 
jaw, the crosshead and guide plates b b' upon 
the upper end of said shank, the tumbler in 
having a notch 10 and projection 11, the links 
pivoted to and connecting the tumbler and 
Shank D, the rocking lever land a connection 
therefrom to the car, a pawl pivoted to said 
lever and engaging the tumbler in the notch 
10, whereby the lever and pawl move the 
tumbler and parts operated thereby in one 
direction and the lever and projection 11 
move the tumbler and parts in the other di 
rection, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a grip mechanism the combination 
With a stationary jaw, a movable jaw and 
their shanks and the mechanism for operat 
ing said jaw; of the intermediate shanks C 
C', the lifter bar F secured thereto, the ejec 
tor bars O'O' in the cable trench for acting 
upon and automatically lifting the bar F and 
the ejectors L. L' connected to and operated 
by the bar F whereby the movable jaw and 
cable are released or ungripped and the cable 
thrown out, substantially as set forth. 
8. In a grip mechanism, the combination 
With the stationary and the movable jaws and 
their shanks; of the intermediate shanks C 
C, the lifter bar F and blocks a, a secured to 
said shanks C C, the ejectors LL'extending 
through the lifter bar and having slotted con 
nections at their upper ends and inclines at 
their lower ends received in recesses in the 
lower jaw, and means for raising the lifter 
bar F to release or ungrip and throw out the 
cable, substantially as set forth. 
9. In a grip mechanism, the combination 
with the movable jaw, its shank D, the pawl 
and mechanism engaged by said pawl and 
connected to the shank, and devices for op 
erating the Same in gripping the cable; of the 
rock shafts c c', the rocker arms d df and k, 
the connecting links e e' and the rock shaft 
k' to which said pawl is pivoted, and mech 
anism substantially as specified for operating 
the aforesaid rock shafts, arms and links for 
moving the said pawl to release the movable 
jaw, Substantially as set forth. 
10. The combination with the gripping 
jaws, the means for actuating and holding 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 30 
 
4. 
- 
520,259 
 
the same, and a cable ejector; of a lifter bar raised for throwing out the cable, substan 
movable independently of the gripping jaws tially as specified. 
and their shanks, stationary inclines within 
Signed by me this 31st day of May, A. D. 
the cable trench and with which the lifter bar 1893. 
5 comes into contact and is raised, connections 
from the lifter bar by which the grip holding 
mechanism is first disconnected and then the 
gripping jaws are opened and the ejector 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
HAROLD SERRELL. 
CHARLES I. EARLL. 
- 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520359.txt	(No Model.) 
R. M. HUNTER. 
APPARATUS FOR ELECTRIC WELDING, 
 
No. 520,359. 
Patented May 22, 1894, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RUDOLPH. M. HUNTER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE JOHNSON COMPANY, OF PENNSYLVANIA. 
APPARATUS FOR ELECTRIC WELDING 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 520,359, dated May 22, 1894, 
Application filed October 12, 1893, Serial No. 487,949, (No model.) 
O 
2 o 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, RUDOLPHM. HUNTER, of 
the city and county of Philadelphia and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented an Improve 
ment in Apparatus for Electric Welding, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention has reference to electric weld 
ing, and consists of certain improvements 
which are fully set forth in the following 
Specification and shown in the accompanying 
drawings which form a part thereof. 
This application, Case No. 266, has particu 
lar reference to apparatus for welding metal 
parts together, and is adapted to various 
manufactures. The particular construction 
shown as an example of the use of the appa 
ratus is that in which it is used for the manu 
facture of Steel rails wherein the feet or 
chairs are welded to the webs of the girder 
rail SO as to give it additional height and a 
Self supporting base. The rail construction 
is Well known and has been manufactured 
by other methods of welding the two parts 
together, therefore in this application no 
claim is made to the rail proper. 
In the processes heretofore used for elec 
trically welding the feet to the web of a girder 
rail, there was employed apparatus in which 
the two parts were firmly gripped in suitable 
jaws, the parts pressed together, and an alter 
nating current of great volume caused to 
pass through the parts in contact SO as to 
cause the metal to fuse and weld together. 
In carrying out my invention I bring the 
two parts of the metal to be welded in firm 
contact, and cause the said parts to be sub 
merged in a liquid, preferably acidulated 
water, and while so surrounded with the liq 
uid, I pass a continuous electric current from 
an electrode in contact with the liquid through 
the metal parts to be united and back to the 
source of electrical energy, employing the 
liquid as a conductor for the current. In 
practice the positive current is delivered to 
the electrode submerged in the liquid and 
the negative current is delivered to the parts 
of the metal to be welded. The action of the 
current causes the decomposition of the liq 
uid, generating gases adjacent to the metal 
parts in contact to be welded, and this pro 
duces such re-actions that the portions of the 
metal in contact with the liquid becomes in 
stantly brought to a Welding heat. In this 
method of Welding a considerably more in 
tense current or one of greater tension is re 
quired than in the alternating System before 
referred to, and the current is preferably con 
tinuous in its nature or what is known as a 
continuous current as distinguished from an 
alternating current. It might be a pulsating 
or intermittent current if desired. When 
the two parts of the metal in contact are 
fused or brought to a welding heat they in 
stantly unite, forming an integral structure; 
and this joint may be further strengthened by 
having the parts which are welded subjected 
to pressure performed by hydraulic gravity 
or steam devices asis evident to anyone skilled 
in the art. 
In the particular apparatus shown, I pro 
vide a traveling support or carriage for the 
girder rail proper, and Suitable clamps car 
ried by the traveling Support or carriage for 
the feet whereby the latter may be adjusted 
in position with respect to the girder rail 
while it is clamped or held on the carriage. 
At one place adjacent to the rails or bed 
upon which the carriage moves the joint be 
tween the foot portions and the girder rail 
is surrounded by a suitable hollow frame 
through which a liquid is caused to flow to 
submerge the parts in contact during the 
electric Welding operation. After the Weld 
ing has been performed, the liquid is low 
ered, the hollow frame is separated, and the 
rail with its welded foot is moved along to be 
brought under a hammer or compression de 
vice. Simultaneously with the foregoing op 
eration a second foot, previously clamped in 
position upon the rail, is brought into posi 
tion So as to be held in the hollow frame and 
subjected in its turn to the welding opera 
tion. By this means the welding and forg 
ing or compression Operations may be car 
ried on simultaneously but successively with 
respect to a single part operated on. 
My improvements will be better understood 
by reference to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a transverse section through the 
entire Welling apparatus at a point corre 
sponding to the hollow frame where the Weld 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
40 
45 
 
520,359 
75 
95 
OO 
d 
II5 
I 25 
(3o 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ing operation takes place. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of my improved apparatus; and Fig. 3 
is an end elevation at that portion adjacent 
to the forging or compression devices. 
A is a carriage or movable frame or sub 
ject of any suitable construction, and prefer 
ably runs upon a railway track B. This car 
riage A may be of a length equal to that of 
the rail section and is provided at intervals 
with suitable jaws or clamps C adapted to 
support the head of the rail as clearly indi 
cated in Fig. 1, and at the same time permit 
the Web of the rail to project out laterally. 
It is immaterial what form of jaw or clamp 
is employed to hold the rail to the carriage. 
The carriage at intervals is provided with an 
overhanging arm E furnished with guiding 
supports or jaws e for receiving the foot 
flanges of the feet F of the rail, and is fur 
ther provided with a clamping screw Gadapt 
ed to force the foot toward the Web of the rail 
so as to bring the feet and the Web in close 
contact. In practice the web of the rail is 
provided with a bulbous portion, and the up 
per part of the foot is provided with a curved 
or recessed portion adapted to fit upon the 
bulb portion as is clearly indicated in Fig.1. 
It is quite evident that these parts may be 
reversed, that is to say, the bulbous portion 
might be upon the foot and the curved or 
recessed portion upon the Web of the rail. 
Any other means of butting the two parts to 
gether may be employed without departing 
from the general structure of the invention. 
The carriage A is moved over the track B 
in any suitable manner such as by a windlass 
connected to it by a Suitable chain and the 
parts may be returned for the purpose of in 
serting a new rail after the completion of one 
complete series of welding operations by giv 
ing just enough inclination to the rails B to 
enable the carriage to run back by gravity. 
At one place along the line of the railway 
track B is a hollow frame formed of a lower 
vessel H and an upper vessel K, the vessel 
H resting upon an iron frame I extending up 
to the upper portion and forming a seat for 
the rail parts D and F. The vessels H and 
K are preferably made of glazed terra cotta 
or porcelain or of some substance which is a 
non-conductor and at the same time not lia 
ble to be materially injured by the action of 
the welding operation. The upper Vessel K. 
is surrounded by heavy iron case J adapted 
to fit upon the upper part of the frame I and 
with said frame to form heavy metallic jaWS 
operating by gravity to hold the two parts of 
the rail in perfect alignment, and with the 
aid if desired of plastic sealing Substance L. 
in grooves in the adjacent faces of the parts 
J and I to form a liquid tight joint to pre 
vent the lateral escape of the liquid. When it 
rises to surround the portions of the rail in 
contact. The upper part of the Vessel H is 
contracted to form a neckh corresponding in 
size to the aperture k in the upper vessel K, 
and is just large enough to surround the joint 
of the parts F and D of the rail. The Vessel 
His connected with a vessel N by a pipe M, 
or in any suitable manner, said vessel N is 
provided with a displacing plunger n. When 
the plunger n is lowered, the liquid is caused 
to rise in the parts h, k to the level indicated 
in Fig. 1; but when the plunger n is raised 
the liquid falls to level corresponding sub 
stantially with the lower part of the neck h 
so as to be out of contact with the rail D, F. 
The vessel H is provided with an electrode 
S of lead or other suitable metal and this is 
connected by a circuit P with the positive 
pole of a continuous current generator O. 
The generator may be of any suitable con 
struction so long as it generates current of 
constant polarity such as continuous pulsat 
ing or intermittent currents. Such a generator 
may be provided with a rheostat O for vary 
ing the current and voltage. The frame I is 
is connected also by a circuit P with the nega 
tive terminal of the generator O. A double 
pole switch or any other suitable switch p 
may be employed for interrupting the circuit 
when desired. It is quite evident however, 
that the circuit might be interrupted by sim 
ply raising the plunger in breaking contact 
through the liquid. 
The parts J and Iare so shaped as to make 
a tight joint and yet permit the ready inser 
tion and the removal of the rail; and, as be 
fore stated, they act as clamps or jaws for 
clamping each of the parts of the rail or met 
als to be united and thus bring them into di 
rect electrical connection with the negative 
terminal of the electric generator whereby the 
current is caused to divide and pass partly 
over each of these parts D and F, properly 
distributing the welding effects. When the 
parts have been properly Welded or brought 
to a Welding heat, a Suitable hydraulic or 
other crane Q (shown in Fig. 2) may be em 
ployed to lift the upper vessel J, K, from off 
the rail after the liquid has been lowered in 
the manner before described. The carriage 
A is then moved along so as to bring another 
foot into position for the electric welder and 
at the. Same time bring the parts which have 
been electrically heated to a welding heat un 
der the hammer or compressor R, which is 
provided with suitable shaped jaws radapted 
to properly compress or forge the joint be 
tween the parts F and D of the rail as is 
clearly shown in Fig. 3. The arrow in Fig. 
2 indicates the direction of the travel of the 
carriage A and the rail during these opera 
tions. 
It will be understood that the particular de 
tails of the various parts may be modified or 
changed to Suit the particular uses to which 
the invention may be put, the changes neces 
sary to adapt the invention to other uses be 
ing those capable of being made by any one 
skilled in the art to which this invention per 
tains. 
In this application I do not claim the pro 
ceSS or method of Welding herein set out as 
65 
 
520,359 
3 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
that forms subject matter of another pending 
application Serial No. 487,951 and filed Octo 
ber 12, 1893. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of clamping devices for holding 
two pieces of metal to be united, a divided 
hollow frame to contain a solid body of a con 
ducting fluid in which the parts to be united 
are submerged, adapted to permit the parts 
to be united to project into the interior, an 
electrode within the hollow frame in electri 
cal connection with the liquid, and a Source 
of electrical energy having one of its poles 
connected with the electrode and its other 
pole electrically connected with the clamping 
devices so as to be in circuit with both of the 
pieces of metal to be united. 
2. In apparatus for electric welding, the 
combination of clamping devices for holding 
two pieces of metal to be united, a divided 
hollow frame to contain a solid body of a con 
ducting fluid in which the parts to be united 
are submerged, adapted to permit the parts 
to be united to project into the interior, an 
electrode within the hollow frame, in electri 
cal connection with the liquid a source of 
electrical energy having one of its poles con 
nected with the electrode and its other pole 
electrically connected with the clamping de 
vices so as to be in circuit with both of the 
pieces of metal to be united, and means to 
vary the height of the liquid within the hol 
low frame. 
3. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of clamping devices for holding 
two pieces of metal to be united, a divided 
hollow frame to contain a solid body of a con 
ducting fluid in which the parts to be united 
are submerged, adapted to permit the parts 
to be united to project into the interior, an 
electrode within the hollow frame, in elec 
trical connection with the liquid and a con 
tinuous current generator having One of its 
poles connected with the electrode and its 
other pole electrically connected with the 
clamping devices so as to be in circuit with 
both of the pieces of metal to be united. 
4. In an apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of clamping devices for holding 
two pieces of metal to be united, a divided 
hollow frame to contain a solid body of a con 
ducting fluid in which the parts to be united 
are submerged, adapted to permit the parts 
to be united to project into the interior, an 
electrode within the hollow frame, in elec 
trical connection with the liquor and a con 
tinuous current generator having its positive 
pole electrically connected with the electrode 
and its negative pole electrically connected 
with the clamping devices so as to be in cir 
cuit with both of the pieces of metal to be 
united. 
5. In an apparatus for electrical Welding, the 
combination of clamping devices for holding 
 
two pieces of metal to be united, a hollow 
frame to contain a conducting fluid in which 
the parts to be united are Submerged, an elec 
trode within the hollow frame, in electrical 
connection with the liquid a source of elec 
trical energy having one of its poles electri 
cally connected with the electrode and its 
other pole electrically connected with the 
clamping devices so as to be in circuit with 
both of the pieces of metal to be united, con 
veying devices adapted to move the metallic 
parts transversely to the hollow frame, and 
compression devices arranged near the hol 
low frame and in the path of the conveying 
devices whereby the metal parts after being 
heated may be immediately subjected to the 
compression devices. 
6. In apparatus for electric welding, the 
combination of clamping devices for holding 
two pieces of metal to be united, a hollow 
frame to contain a conducting fluid in which 
the parts to be united are submerged, an elec 
trode within the hollow frame, in electrical 
connection with the liquid a Source of elec 
trical energy having one of its poles electri 
cally connected with the electrode and its 
other pole electrically connected with the 
clamping devices so as to be in circuit with 
both of the pieces of metal to be united, means 
to vary the height of the liquid within the 
hollow frame, conveying devices adapted to 
move the metallic parts transversely to the 
hollow frame, and compression devices ar 
ranged near the hollow frame and in the 
path of the conveying devices whereby the 
metal parts after being heated may be im 
mediately subjected to the compression de 
vices. 
7. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of clamping devices for holding 
two pieces of metal to be united, a hollow 
frame to contain a conducting fluid in which 
the parts to be united are submerged, an elec 
trode within the hollow frame in electrical 
connection with the liquid a continuous cur 
rent generator having one of its poles con 
nected with the electrode and its other pole 
electrically connected with the clamping de 
vices So as to be in circuit with both of the 
pieces of metal to be united, conveying de 
vices adapted to move the metallic parts 
transversely to the hollow frame, and com 
pression devices arranged near the hollow 
frame and in the path of the conveying de 
vices whereby the metal parts after being 
heated may be immediately subjected to the 
compression devices. 
8. In apparatus for electric welding, the 
combination of clamping devices for holding 
two pieces of metal to be united, a divided 
hollow frame to contain a conducting fluid 
in which the parts to be united are sub 
merged, an electrode within the hollow frame, 
in electrical connection with the liquid a con 
tinuous current generator having one of its 
poles connected with the electrode and its 
other pole electrically connected with the 
75 
95 
IOC 
To 
o 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
clamping devices so as to be in circuit with 
both of the pieces of metal to be united, and 
means to vary the height of the liquid within 
the hollow frame. 
9. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of a hollow frame made in parts 
adapted to fit together and clamp between 
them two parts of metal to be united, a con 
ducting fluid contained within the hollow 
frame, an electrode in contact with the fluid 
at a distance from the line of separation of 
the two parts of the hollow frame, and a 
source of electrical energy having one of its 
poles connected with the electrode and its 
other pole connected with the two parts of 
the metal to be united. 
& 
10. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of a hollow frame made in parts 
adapted to fit together and clamp between 
them two parts of metal to be united, a con 
ducting fluid contained within the hollow 
frame, an electrode in contact with the fluid 
at a distance from the line of separation of 
the two parts of the hollow frame, and a con 
tinuous current generator having its positive 
pole electrically connected with the electrode 
and its negative pole electrically connected 
with the two parts of the metal to be united. 
11. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of a hollow frame made in parts 
adapted to fit together and clamp between 
them two parts of metal to be united, a con 
ducting fluid contained within the hollow 
frame, an electrode in contact with the fluid at 
a distance from the line of Separation of the 
two parts of the hollow frame, a source of elec 
trical energy having one of its poles connect 
ed with the electrode and its other pole con 
nected with the two parts of the metal to be 
united, and a liquid tight packing between 
the parts of the hollow frame and the metal 
parts to be united. 
12. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of a hollow frame made in parts 
adapted to fit together and clamp between 
them two parts of metal to be united, con 
ducting fluid contained within the hollow 
frame, an electrode in contact with the fluid 
at a distance from the line of separation of 
the two parts of the hollow frame, a Source 
of electrical energy having One Of its poles 
connected with the electrode and its other 
pole connected with the two parts of the metal 
to be united, a continuous current generator 
having its positive pole connected with the 
electrode and its negative pole electrically 
connected with the two parts of the metal to 
be united, and a liquid tight packing be 
tween the parts of the hollow frame and the 
metal parts to be united. 
13. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of a hollow frame made in parts 
adapted to fit together and clamp between 
them two parts of metal to be united, a con 
ducting fluid contained within the hollow 
frame, an electrode in contact with the fluid 
at a distance from the line of Separation of 
the two parts of the hollow frame, a Source 
of electrical energy having one of its poles 
eonnected with the electrode and its other 
pole connected with the two parts of the metal 
to be united, and means to vary the height of 
the liquid within the hollow frame. 
14. In apparatus for electric welding, the 
combination of a hollow frame made in parts 
adapted to fit together and clamp between 
them two parts of metal to be united, a con 
ducting fluid contained within the hollow 
frame, an electrode in contact with the fluid 
at a distance from the line of Separation of 
the two parts of the hollow frame, a Source 
of electrical energy having one of its poles con 
nected with the electrode and its other pole 
connected with the two parts of the metal to 
be united, a continuous current generator 
having its positive pole connected with the 
electrode and its negative pole electrically 
connected with the two parts of the metal to 
be united, and means to vary the height of 
the liquid within the hollow frame. 
15. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of a hollow frame made in parts 
adapted to fit together and clamp between 
them two parts of the metal to be united, a 
conducting fluid contained within the hollow 
frame, an electrode in contact with the fluid 
at a distance from the line of separation of 
the two parts of the hollow frame, a source of 
electrical energy having one of its poles con 
nected with the electrode and its other pole 
connected with the two parts of the metal to 
be united, a continuous current generator 
having its positive pole connected with the 
electrode and its negative pole electrically 
connected with the two parts of the metal 
to be united, a liquid tight packing between 
the parts of the hollow frame and the metal 
parts to be united, and means to vary the 
height of the liquid within the hollow frame. 
16. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of a frame adapted to hold two 
parts of metal to be united in contact with 
each other, a hollow frame made in sections 
and adapted to inclose the joint between the 
two parts to be united, an electrode arranged 
within the hollow frame a conducting fluid 
also contained within the hollow frame, and a 
Source of electrical energy having one pole 
connected with the electrode and the other 
pole electrically connected with the two parts 
of metal to be united. 
17. In apparatus for electric welding, the 
Combination of a Support adapted to hold two 
parts of metal to be united in contact with 
each other, a hollow frame made in sections 
and adapted to inclose the joint between the 
two parts to be united, an electrode arranged 
within the hollow frame, a conducting fluid 
also contained within the hollow frame, a 
Source of electrical energy having one pole 
connected With the electrode and the other 
pole electrically connected with the two parts 
of metal to be united, a railway, and a car 
riage upon the railway adapted to sustain the 
55 
 
520,859 
75 
9 O 
95 
do 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I30 
520,859 
5 
IO 
' 20 
25 
Support for the metal parts whereby the metal 
parts may be moved relatively to the hollow 
frame. 
18. In apparatus for electric welding, the 
combination of devices adapted to hold two 
parts of metal to be united in contact with 
each other, a hollow frame made in sections 
and adapted to inclose the joint between the 
two parts to be united, an electrode arranged 
within the hollow frame, a conducting fluid 
also contained within the hollow frame, a 
Source of electrical energy having one pole 
Connected with the electrode and the other 
pole electrically connected with the two parts 
of metal to be united, a railway, a carriage 
upon the railway adapted to sustain the de 
vices for holding the metal parts whereby the 
metal parts may be moved relatively to the 
hollow frame, and means for varying the level 
of the liquid within the hollow frame. 
19. In apparatus for electric welding, the 
combination of a frame adapted to hold two 
parts of metal to be united in contact with 
each other, a hollow frame made in sections 
and adapted to inclose the joint between the 
two parts to be united, an electrode arranged 
within the hollow frame, a conducting fluid 
also contained within the hollow frame, a 
Source of electrical energy having one pole 
connected with the electrode and the other 
pole electrically connected with the two parts 
of metal to be united, and means for varying 
the level of the liquid within the hollow 
frame. 
20. In apparatus for electric Welding, the 
combination of a carriage having devices 
adapted to hold two parts of the metal to be 
united in contact with each other, a hollow 
frame made in sections and adapted to in 
close the joint between the two parts to be 
united, an electrode arranged within the hol 
low frame, a conducting fluid also contained 
within the hollow frame, a source of electri 
cal energy having one pole connected With 
the electrode and the other 
connected with the two parts of metal to be 
united, a railway upon which the carriage 
travels, and a compression device for Com 
pressing the welded joint arranged adjacent 
to the hollow frame and in the line of travel 5o 
of the carriage. 
unto set my hand. 
In testimony of which invention I have here 
pole electrically 45 
R. M. HUNTER, 
Witnesses: 
ERNEST HOWARD HUNTER, 
MAMIE J. FRIES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520459.txt	(No Model.) 
S. SWAN BUM. 
BARB WIRE MACHINE 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 520,459, 
Patented May 29, 1894, 
 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 520,459, 
 
 
 
TT ... 
 
5 Siheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 29, 1894. 
. 
S, SWAN BUM, 
BARB WIRE MACHINE. 
zz9: 24 
THE NATIONAL LITHoGRAPHINe company, 
(No Model.) 
S, SWAN BUM. 
BARB WIRE MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 520,459, 
Patented May 29, 1894, 
 
 
 
 
J 
 
i. 
 
His 2  
I 
f 
Sn 
R 
 
s 
 
 
Azses 
9.64%2 ozda-i-S . III 
H 
4a 
are: 
5% -2. 
 
T 
(No Model.) 
No. 520,459. 
S, SWAN BUM. 
BARB WIRE MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented May 29, 1894, 
 
    
 
III 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SANFORD SWAN BUM, OF DE KALB, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE I. L. 
ELLWOOD MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BARB-WIRE MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 520,459, dated May 29, 1894. 
Application filed June 13, 1893, Serial No. 477,436. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SANFORD SWAN BUM, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at De 
Kalb, in the county of De Kalb and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Barb-Wire Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to a machine for 
making barbed wire, having preferably two 
Strand wires cabled or twisted together and 
four pointed barbs which are coiled at their 
middle about one of the strand or cable wires 
and are bound thereon by the fellow or bind 
Ing WIre. 
The object of the invention is to produce 
a machine whereby four pointed barbs hav 
ing their points arranged at right angles to 
the strands of the cable may be rapidly and 
economically produced. 
To this end the machine is so organized that 
the strand wires move continuously through 
the machine while the wires from which the 
barbs are formed are fed from opposite sides 
of the machine and at right angles to the di 
rection of movement of the strand wires, the 
barb wires being fed intermittently. This 
capacity of the machine for applying the 
barbs without interrupting the movement of 
the strand wires forming the cable is one of 
the features of the machine. 
Another feature of the machine relates to 
a construction whereby the barbs are severed 
from the barb stock wires by a shear cut, the 
beyel of which is upon the outer sides of the 
points of the barbs. Heretofore no one, so 
far as I am aware, has produced a machine 
capable of making four point barbed wire 
and cutting the points so that the bevels 
thereof are on the outside. 
The result has 
been a ragged or rough looking fence, the 
barbs when cut with their bevels upon the in 
side of the point standing at an acute angle 
with reference to the strand wire. The product 
of this machine is a barbed wire in which the 
points of the barb form substantially a right 
angle with the strand or cable wires, and the 
fence is not only neater in appearance but 
the points of the barbs standing at a right 
angle to the fence wire increase the deter 
rent efficiency of the fence and render the 
barbs less likely to be bent down in a line 
with the wire. 
The mechanical features of the machine 
which are novel relate, first, to a reciprocat 
ing carriage upon which the barb twisting 
spindle, the cutters and the feed mechanism 
for the barb wires are mounted; second, to a 
pivoted twister spindle which is automati 
cally raised after the application of the barbs 
in order that the latter may pass over the 
knives; third, to a retractive movement of the 
twister spindle which enables the stock of 
the barb to be wound about one of the strand 
wires helically, the bodies of the two barbs 
being intertwined and the coiling being in a 
direction opposite to the direction of the move 
ment of the strand wire; fourth, to a novel 
arrangement of the gearing whereby the dis 
tance between barbs may be varied so as to 
produce what is designated as a thick set 
wire or a wire having its barbs more widely 
separated; fifth, to a novel construction of 
mechanism whereby the distance of recipro 
cation of the carriage may be varied. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure l is 
a plan view of the machine. Fig. 2 is an end 
elevation. Fig. 3 is a broken elevation, sec 
tional through the longitudinal center of the 
machine. Fig. 4 is a transverse sectional ele 
vation on the line 4-4 of Fig. 1. Figs. 5, 6 
and 7 are detail views of an eccentric which 
is adjustable so as to vary the travel of the car 
riage. Figs, 8 to 11 inclusive are detail views 
showing two forms of gearing for varying the 
speed of feed of the strand wires. Fig. 12 is 
a detail view of the cutters. Fig. 13 shows 
the product of my machine. 
In the drawings, 15 represents the frame or 
stand upon which the machine is mounted. 
The operative parts of the machine are car 
ried by the stationary base or bed 16, which 
carries the bearings for the main shaft 17, 
and also for a driven shaft 18, from which 
power is taken to drive the feed mechanism 
for the barb wires, and for operating the 
twister spindle. Said bed is also provided 
with ways 19, in which reciprocates a car 
riage comprising a bed plate 20, and stand 
ards erected thereon, marked 21, and in which 
the bearings for the arbors of the feed wheels 
25 
35 
75 
9o 
95 
Oc 
 
2 
520,459 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
for the barbed wires are furnished. The 
shaft 18 has a crank wheel 22 thereon, and 
its crank pin drives a pitman 23, said pitman 
being pivoted at its respective ends to boxes 
24, one of which is carried by the crank pin 
and the other of which is connected to the 
Crank pin of an arm 25 carrying a pawl 26, 
which engages the teeth of a ratchet 27, the 
latter being mounted on a shaft or arbor 28, 
which imparts motion to the train of gears 
carried upon the several arbors 29 and the 
studs 30 through the gear wheels carried by 
said arbors and studs as clearly shown in Fig. 
2, said arbors 29 each carrying feed wheels 
31 which feed the wires 32, 33, from which 
the barbs are cut. 
The strand wires are marked 34, 35, and 
they are fed by the wheels 36, 37, which are 
arranged in pairs, the upper ones being 
shown in Fig. 1. The wire 34 is carried 
through a cylindrical guide 38 and passes 
through the twister spindle 39. Said spindle 
is provided at its rear end with the gear 40, 
and at its front end with the twister pins 41. 
Said twister spindle is rotatably mounted in 
a pivoted arm 42, said arm being sleeved upon 
a shaft 43, mounted so that it may rock in the 
bearings 44, which are carried by the bed 20. 
The arm 42 is perforated, as seen in Fig.1, and 
one end of the bell crank lever 45 projects into 
the slot, the bell crank being pivoted on the 
carriage bed and its other member projecting 
below the main driving shaft. A second bent 
arm 46 is rigidly secured at one end to the 
under side of the vibrating arm 42 and its 
rear end projects back over the driving shaft, 
and said shaft has mounted thereon two ec 
centrics 47,48, on one of which the bell crank 
45 rides, and upon the other of which the rear 
end of the bent lever 46 rides. When the 
end of the arm 46 is raised by its cam it raises 
the arm 42 carrying the twister spindle. The 
bell crank 45 and the lever 46 are coupled by 
the Spring 49 which holds them in contact 
With their respective cams. The carriage is 
reciprocated by the pitman 50, whose rear end 
carries a strap 51 which circumscribes an ec 
centric 52, said eccentric having a slot 53 
through which the shaft 17 passes. The ec 
centric has also a rib or block 54 on its end 
which is adapted to slide in a groove formed 
in a collar 55, said collar having a cylindrical 
bore through which the shaft 17 passes, and 
having the set screws 56, 57, the former serv 
ing to confine the collar upon the shaft, and 
the latter to bind the slotted eccentric in any 
position to which the length of its slot adapts 
it to be adjusted. The twister spindle is ro 
itated alternately in opposite directions by 
means of the pivoted rack lever 58 which is 
driven by an eccentric 59 on the shaft 18. 
The mechanism for driving the feed wheels 
for the strand wires may be of the usual con 
struction, but I have shown in Figs. 8 to 11 
inclusive two novel forms of gearing, where 
by the feed of the strand wires may be va 
ried to adapt the machine for making wire 
having thick set barbs or wire with longer 
spaces between the barbs. In Fig. 8 the 
main shaft 17 is shown provided with a spur 
gear 60 enmeshing a pinion 61 which is car 
ried by a stud on a sector 62 adapted to be se 
cured in any desired position to which its slot 
permits it to be adjusted by means of the bolt 
and nut 63. The pinion 61 drives a gear 
wheel 64 which imparts motion to a shaft 65, 
whereby the pairs of feed wheels 36 and 37 are 
driven. By substituting for the gear 64 an 
other of a different size and adjusting the 
sector to correspond there with, the feed of 
the strand wires may be varied, and at the 
same time the length of the reciprocation of 
the carriage will be correspondingly varied 
by adjusting the eccentric 52. 
In Fig. 10 I have shown another form of 
gearing in which a pinion 66 is mounted on 
the main shaft 17 and drives a short counter 
shaft 67 which imparts motion to the shaft 
By reimoving the gear 64 and the pinion 
65. 
which drives it and substituting others of 
different size, the feed may be varied. 
By referring to Figs. 3 and 12, the manner 
of twisting and severing the barb will be best 
The barb wires are fed in across 
understood. 
the path of the strand wire 34, and above and 
below respectively as shown in Fig. 12, and 
beneath the shearing blocks 68. As the car 
riage is advanced the twister pins 41 respect 
ively engage the ends of the wires from which 
the barbs are formed and the twister spindle, 
being rotated, the ends of the wire from which 
the barbs are afterward severed are coiled 
about the strand wire 34, and to effect this 
without wrapping the barbs upon each other 
a slight backward movement of the twister 
spindle is effected through the bell crank 45, 
which shifts the arm carrying the twister 
spindle, withdrawing it to a distance deter 
mined by the eccentric 47, the boxes 44 being 
separated sufficiently to permit this slight 
backward movement. The coiling of the ends 
of the barb wire about the strand wire hav 
ing been effected, the next movement of the 
machine is to sever the coiled barbs from the 
stock, and this is effected by means of the 
pivoted arm 69, which is mounted on the car 
riage and at its heel is provided with the 
shearing blades 70. A bent end of this arm 
69 depends through a slot in the bed 20 and 
through the open body of the bed 16, the lat 
ter having a striking block 71 thereon which 
engages the end of the arm 69, rocking it on 
its pivot and causing its shearing blades to 
engage the wires from which the barbs are 
formed, and shear them by a beveled cut on 
the outside of their points. In order now to 
permit the barbs to pass over the shearing 
block, the arm carrying the twister spindle 
must be raised and this is effected in due or 
der and sequence by the arm 46 and its cam 
48. When the barbs have cleared, the lean 
side of the eccentric 48 permits the twister 
spindle to drop down, thus carrying the strand 
wire into proper position for the inserting of 
75 
95 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
520,459 
3 
O 
the barb wire above and below it, their move 
ments being intermittent by reason of the 
ratchet mechanism previously described. 
The product of the machine is shown in 
Fig. 18, and the appearance of its barbs is 
much better than that of the common four 
point barbs. The fellow or binding wire 35 is 
fed through a slot in the rack lever 58 and is 
twisted with the strand wire 34, after the 
barbs are applied, in the usual or any suit 
able manner so as to bind the barbs. 
I claim 
l. In a barbed wire machine, the combina 
tion, with means for continuously feeding a 
strand wire and means for intermittently feed 
ing barb Wires across its path, of a recipro 
cating carriage having a twister spindle ro 
tatably mounted thereon and capable of end 
Wise movement independent of its carriage, 
means for reciprocating the carriage, and 
means for rotating the twister spindle and 
retracting it during its rotation, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a machine for making barbed wire, 
the combination, with means for continuously 
feeding a strand wire and for intermittently 
feeding barb wires across the path thereof, of 
a reciprocating carriage, a twister spindle 
carrying the strand wire and twister pins 
rotatably mounted upon said carriage, the 
said spindle being capable of being raised, 
and shearing mechanism whereby the barb 
wire may be severed by a beveled cut on the 
outside of its barbs and said barbs raised to 
pass the shears, substantially as described. 
3. In a barb wire machine, the combination 
with the reciprocating carriage, of a revolu 
ble and vibratory twister spindle, and means 
for retracting said spindle during the act of 
coiling the barbs, substantially as described. 
4. In a barbed wire machine, the combina 
tion with the reciprocating carriage, of a revo 
luble and vibratory twister spindle, and 
p 
55 
meansfor retracting said spindle, and a shear 
ing mechanism mounted upon the carriage 45 
and adapted to sever the barbwire by a bev 
eled cut upon the outside of said barbs, 
whereby the barbs have their points disposed 
at substantially, right angles to the strand 
wires, substantially as described. 
5. In a barbed wire machine, the combina 
tion, with the reciprocating carriage having 
a twister spindle and a shearing mechanism 
mounted upon such carriage, of means for 
reciprocating said carriage, consisting of a 
pitman and a variable eccentric, substantially 
as described. 
6. In a barbed wire machine, the combina 
tion, with the reciprocating carriage and a 
twister spindle and shearing mechanism 
mounted upon such carriage, of means for 
reciprocating the carriage, comprising a Val 
riable eccentric, and means for feeding the 
strand wire, said latter means being also ca 
pable of adjustment whereby the distance 
between adjacent barbs may be varied, sub 
stantially as described. 
7. In a barbed wire machine, the combina 
tion with the means for feeding the strand 
wires audi barb wires, of means for forming 
and severing the barbs, a reciprocating car 
riage carrying the barb forming and severing 
mechanism, the feed mechanism for the barb 
wire being also mounted upon and recipro 
cating with said carriage, a ratchet mechan 
ism for operating said feed mechanism inter 
mittently, and a pitman for driving Said 
ratchet mechanism, said pitman being pivot 
ally connected at each of its ends, whereby it 
is adapted to follow the movement of the car 
riage, substantially as described. 
75 
65 
7 O 
SANFORD SWAN BUM. 
Witnesses: 
C. C. LINTHICUM, 
L. T. MANN. 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520559.txt	(No Model.) 
INERTIA PIECE, RELEASING SECOND BARREL BY RECOIL OF FIRST. 
Patented May 29, 1894. 
No. 520,559, 
A BURGESS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
 
Juvevitov 
(No Model.) 
- 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
INERTIA PIECE, RELEASING SECOND BARREL BY RECOIL OF FIRST, 
No. 520,559, 
A BURGESS. 
 
 
 
 
928 itv.cscs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AND REW BURGESS, OF BUFF ALO, NEW YORK. 
INERTIA-PIECE, RELEASING SECOND BARREL BY RECOIL OF FIRST, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 520,559, dated May 29, 1894. 
Application filed May 19, 1892, Serial No. 433,60l., (No model.) 
55 
o 
75. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the breech of the hammer Fl'. 
To ald, whom, it inau concern: 
out against an abutment 3 in the frame to 
lock the bolt in closed position, as in many 
Be it known that I, ANDREW BURGESS, re 
siding at Buffalo, in the county of Erie and 
guns of this class. The locking brace has an 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
arm D connected by a link E to a movable 
and useful Improvements in Magazine-Guns 
sleeve F on the handle, as in several guns 
and Methods of Firing, of which the following 
heretofore patented. 
is a specification, reference being had there 
The two hammers H, H', occupy the usual 
in to the accompanying drawings. 
positions in the frame, behind the respective 
This invention relates to magazine guns, 
firing pins. Each hammer has the usual 
although applicable to some extent to other 
Spring, Sear, and trigger connections common 
in fire-arms. A supplementary sear, 5, is piv 
guns. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
oted in the bolt, So that its nose 6 extends in 
double gun in which the second barrel may 
front of the hammer H when said hammer 
be fired by the shock of firing the first barrel; 
is in its cocked position. The end 7 of this 
also to render one cartridge feeder inopera 
Supplementary sear is much longer and heav 
tive when one barrel only is fired; also to 
ier than the projecting end 6. For conven 
ience in application to the gun the supple 
lock the breech mechanism in such manner 
that it may be unlocked by the shock of fir 
mentary sear may be made of U form, as 
ing; also to improve the cartridge feeding shown, but other forms would answer the 
same purpose. A spring, 8, normally presses 
also to improve various parts of 
mechanism; 
the point 6 of the supplementary sear in front 
a gun. 
A turning catch, cam, or 
action of a gun, the main operating parts be 
button 10 engaging the Sear, may lock it so 
that the Supplementary sear is held out of 
ing indicated within the frame in dotted lines. 
Fig. 2 is a top plan, showing about the same 
engaging position with the hammer. Now, 
portion of the gun as Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a side 
assuming both barrels of the gun to be load 
elevation, partly broken away, of one carrier, 
ed, and both hammers in the position shown 
showing the operating abutment, and the 
in Fig. 2, if both triggers be pulled the ham 
spring and connection for holding the carrier 
mer H' will be held from falling by the end 
raised or depressed. Fig. 4 is a detail view 
6 of the Supplementary Sear. But as soon as 
of the bolt, partly in section, showing locking 
the gun fires, the recoil, or the shock, or the 
brace, and so much of the adjunctive mech 
vibration, moves the bolt and then the main 
part of the gun suddenly. The weighted end 
anism as is necessary to show the connection 
7 of the supplementary sear is held by iner. 
of the inertia piece which locks the brace. 
tia, and thus this sear swings on its pivot, 
Fig. 5 is a detail view of the bolt and some of 
its connections slightly modified and partly 
the nose 6 is turned away from the front of 
in section, showing the inertia piece in inop 
the hammer, H', and the hammer H' then 
falls and fires its barrel. The trigger I is sup 
erative position. Fig. 6 is a detail of the Sup 
plementary sear. Fig. 7 is a detail plan of 
posed to hold or release hammer H, and trig 
the inertia piece and its bolts and springs, 
ger I' performs a similar office to hammer H. 
The trigger I' may be held back in inoper 
and a foil. Fig. 8 is a detail of the carrier in 
raised position. Fig. 9 is a detail of a part 
ative position by a detent K, and then the 
falling of hammer Fil' will be controlled en 
shown in Fig. 5. 
tirely by the supplementary sear 5, so that 
A. A denote the barrels, B the frame, and 
the second hammer will fall directly after 
Cthe stock, having the usual relation of these 
parts. 
the first barrel is fired. The detent 10, hav 
ing a bearing surface in position to swing 
The bolt 1 is broad enough to close both 
the supplementary Sear 5 out of position to 
barrels, (where two barrels are used,) and is 
held in closed position by a locking brace 2, 
act as a stop for the hammer, may be used to 
render the supplementary searinert, so that 
which turns into the bolt to unlock, and opens 
9 O 
95 
CC 
3. 
5. 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
75 
O 
15 
25 
35 
520,559 
2 
the hammers may be left entirely under con- this purpose, a spring 30 is attached to the 
trol of the respective triggers as in ordinary carrier, and has a projection 31 near its free 
end. This projection 31 engages a pin or 
double guns. 
abutment 32 in the frame, and rides over said 
abutment as the carrier is swung on its pivot 
13. The projection 31 engaging the abut 
ment causes the spring to hold the carrier 
either up or down, according to theside of the 
abutment with which it engages. 
The locking brace 2 operates in the man 
ner common in this class of guns. I retain 
the locking brace in locked position by means 
of the inertia piece 40, so that the breech can 
not be unlocked until after it is fired (save as 
hereinafter explained) but the inertia piece 
is detached by the shock of recoil to release 
the locking brace. The inertia piece 40 is 
pivoted in the bolt. Its point 41, below the 
pivot, is in position so that it may swing over 
the extreme rear end of the locking brace 2, 
and fasten said brace (see Fig. 4). When the 
inertia piece is in this position, of course the 
bolt, handle, and operative connections are 
also locked thereby. The upper end 42 of the 
inertia piece 40 is much heavier than the 
point 41. When the brace is locked, as in 
Fig. 4, and the gun is fired, the shock of fir 
ing throws the bolt or gun back, and the in 
ertia piece swings on its pivot, the heavy end 
moving (relatively) forward, and so releasing 
The inertia piece 40 has 
the locking brace. 
a projecting thumb piece 43, by which it may 
be turned to unlock by hand, when desirable. 
The inertia piece 40 is forced into locking en 
gagement with the locking brace, normally, 
by the spring 44 acting on the piece 40 through 
the bearing piece or bolt 45, (Figs. 2 and 4) 
or in other suitable manner. The spring 44 
is strong enough to hold the inertia piece 
against Ordinary shocks or shaking, as in 
opening and closing the breech, and may also 
hold it against the shock of firing; but the 
spring will be compressed by the blow of a 
hammer, which leaves the inertia piece free 
to unlock. The bolt 45 projects at one side 
of the inertia piece, into the path of the ham 
mer H' while moving toward firing pin P, 
consequently the falling of the hammer will 
drive in the bolt 45, and compress the spring 
44, thus leaving the inertia piece free to op 
erate when the hammer is down. 
When the inertia piece is used with a double 
gun, as in Figs. 1, 2, and 4, a Second movable 
bolt 47 is placed in the breech bolt in front 
of the hammer H. This bolt 47 is pressed to 
holding position by the spring 48, (Figs.2 and 
7) as has been described of the bolt 45. As 
both bolts 45 and 47 bear against the inertia 
piece 40, and either one will force it into po 
sition to fasten the locking brace when the 
breech bolt is closed, it follows that both ham 
mers must fall and both bolts be driven in 
before the inertia piece can operate. If only 
one barrel is fired, the inertia piece must be 
moved by hand to release the locking brace, 
unless the other hammer shall also be in its 
I have heretofore patented a device in 
5 which the falling of one hammer releases the 
second. Should the first cartridge hang fire, 
both may explode at once, to the great dis 
comfort or danger of the gunner. By caus 
ing the second hammer to be released by the 
shock of firing the first barrel, the Second ex 
plosion must follow the first at about the de 
sired interval of time. 
While I prefer to arrange the supplemen 
tary sear in the bolt as shown, to receive the 
first shock of the discharge on the bolt, as 
well as the recoil of the gun, it is obvious 
that the recoil may operate it, if said sear be 
attached to any other part of the gun. 
Each barrel A and magazine A' has a 
carrier 12, and both carriers are supported 
on pivots, as 13, as usual in this class of guns. 
At least one of the carriers has a dog 14 piv 
oted therein, and preferably in a mortise 15 
near the supporting pivot. This dog is rigid 
with its pivot 17 and has a nose 16 which pro 
jects above the body of the carrier, and an 
arm 18 below said pivot. The lower end of 
arm 18 is rounded or inclined in both direc 
tions. A spring 20, attached to the carrier, 
bears against said arm. 18. The spring has 
an inclined projection 21 in proximity to said 
arm, and the arm may be held (by the force 
of the spring) in either its forward or back 
ward position, whichever way it is turned. 
When the arm 18 is turned forward, the nose 
16 of the dog is in its most elevated position, 
and in that position a projection 22 on the 
bolt will engage the nose 16, when the bolt 
is nearly to the extreme of its backward 
movement, and such engagement will cause 
the carrier to rock on its pivot 13, and the 
front end will raise a cartridge if one be on 
the carrier. But if the nose 16 of dog 14 be 
turned forward, said nose Will not project 
high enough to be engaged by the projection 
22 of the bolt, and the backward movement 
of the bolt will then not raise the carrier. 
The pivot or shaft 17 of the dog 14 projects 
through a slot in the side of the frame, and 
the outer end of said pivot has a button 24, 
which may be turned by hand to place the 
dog 14 in either its operative or inoperative 
position. The button 24 also covers the slot 
in the frame through which the pivot or shaft, 
17 projects. Should both carriers be pro 
vided with dogs 14, the pivots of these dogs 
will project at opposite sides of the frame. 
The same result of rendering the dogs in 
operative may be reached without the pro 
jection outside the frame, by opening the 
breech and moving the dog 14 into Operative 
or inoperative position by hand. When the 
carrier is either up or down it is desirable 
that it be retained with Some little force, so 
that it will hold the cartridge until other 
mechanism takes control thereof. To effect 
40 
45 
So 
55 
9 O 
3 C, 
II5 
I 25 
I 3G 
 
520,559 
s 
O 
25 
35 
down position. A foil piece 50 is placed in 
the bolt, and has a shoulder 51 in position to 
engage the inertia piece and hold it so it can 
not swing into position to fasten the locking 
brace. This foil piece has a handle or finger 
piece 52, by which it may be turned, and is 
held by friction. 
In Fig. 5 illustrate a slight modification, 
by which the inertia piece 40 is adapted for 
use with a bolt for a single gun. The bolt 
45 is pressed out by the spring 44, against 
the inertia piece, above the pivot thereof. 
In any construction, a friction Spring O may 
be applied to the bolt, to bear on and retain 
the inertia piece in the position to which it 
has been moved. 
The foil piece 50 may be pivoted in the 
lower part of the bolt, so as to hold the in 
ertia piece in inoperative position when swung 
to do so. The foil in any case will prefer 
ably have a projection (55 or 55) which ex 
tends into the path of the hammer, and the 
hammer knocks the foil out of operative po 
sition when it falls. 
I have illustrated a common form of lock 
ing brace applied to the bolt, it being under 
stood that there are many equivalent mech 
anisms therefor, now well known in the art. 
The holding of the bolt in locked position by 
an inertia piece, and unlocking by the shock 
of firing, I believe to be new in a broad sense. 
The locking brace is not a necessary ele 
ment, as a breech piece locking in the other 
manner is considered the equivalent for this 
The absolute safety of a breech mechanism 
which is positively locked until after firing 
takes place, and is then unlocked by the ex 
plosion of the charge, renders this invention 
advantageous in many forms of breech load 
ing guns. 
purpose. 
m 
I claim 
1. In a double gun, the frame, barrels, and 
operative connections, a double breech piece 
and a supplementary sear projecting in front 
of one of the cocked halmmers, and removable 
from said position by the shock of firing, so 
that the second barrel may be fired by the 
shock of firing the first, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a double gun, the frame, barrels, and 
operative connections, a hammer and trigger 
mechanism for each barrel, means for lock 
ing one of the triggers, and a Supplementary 
sear, projecting into position to prevent the 
falling of the hammer to which said trigger 
is connected, and movable by the shock of 
firing the other barrel. 
3. The combination with one of the hammers 
of a double gun, of an inertia piece holding 
said hammer in cocked position, said inertia, 
piece being actuated by the recoil (when the 
first barrel is fired in usual manner) to re 
lease the second hammer and fire the Second 
barrel, substantially as described. 
4. The combination with one of the hammers 
of a double gun, of a pivoted Sea having one 
weighted end, and the other end projecting 
into position in front of the said hammer, 
whereby the shock of firing the other barrel 
will release said hammer. 
5. The combination of the frame and oper 
ative connections, the two hammers in the 
frame, the bolt and means for reciprocating 
it, and a supplementary Sear pivoted in the 
bolt and having one end projecting in front 
of one of the hammers, and the other end 
weighted to cause the sear to swing under the 
shock of firing. 
6. In a magazine gun, the combination of 
the frame, barrel, and adjunctive connections, 
a reciprocating bolt, and a carrier having a 
pivoted dog therein, and a spring bearing on 
the dog to hold it in either of two adjusted po 
sitions, so that the dog may be engaged by 
the bolt in its movement, or not, as desired. 
7. In a magazine gun, the combination of 
the frame, barrel, and adjunctive connections, 
the reciprocating bolt having Suitable abut 
ments, and the pivoted cartridge carrier hav 
ing a movable dog pivoted therein, and a fin 
ger piece connected to the dog and extending 
through a hole in the frame, substantially as 
described. 
S. The combination with the carrier of a 
spring attached thereto, having inclines, an 
abutment against which said spring bears on 
either side to hold the carrier either up or 
down as described, and operative adjunctive 
connections, Substantially as set forth. 
9. In a gun, the combination of the frame 
and operative connections, the reciprocating 
bolt, the locking brace engaging Saidbolt and 
an abutment in the frame, and an inertia, 
piece hung in the bolt and engaging said 
brace to fasten the same, until moved by the 
shock of firing, substantially as described. 
10. The combination, in a gun, of the frame 
and adjunctive connections, the breech piece, 
and an inertia piece carried by the gun and 
acting on the breech piece to fasten the same, 
and to be released by the shock of firing, 
substantially as described. 
11. The frame and breech piece housed 
therein, an abutment in the frame against 
which said breech piece is locked, means for 
locking Said breech piece against the abut 
ment, and an inertia piece connected to the 
breech piece, propelled by a spring to hold 
the locking parts in locked position and by 
the shock of firing to release the same, all in 
combination. 
12. The frame and connections, the recipro 
cating bolt and locking brace pivoted thereto, 
and the inertia piece pivoted in the bolt near 
the free end of the locking brace and in posi 
tion to engage the same, Substantially as de 
Scribed. 
13. The frame and connections, the bolt and 
means for locking the same, the inertia piece 
pivotally connected to the bolt, and a spring 
operating on the inertia piece to hold it as 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
II 5 
I 25 
45 
65 
 
4. 
520,559 
against ordinary shocks, all combined sub 
stantially as described, 
14. The combination with the bolt and its 
operative connections, of an inertia piece 
hung in the bolt, a spring piece engaging said 
inertia piece and having a projection in the 
path of movement of the hammer, all substan 
tially as described. 
15. The bolt and operative connections, the 
inertia piece hung in the bolt and acting as 
a fastening to the locking mechanism thereof, 
the spring piece bearing on the inertia piece 
and having a projection in the path of move 
ment of the hammer, and a foil in position to 
hold the inertia piece inoperative. 
16. The bolt and its operative connections, 
the inertia, piece connected to the bolt and 
engaging the locking mechanism substan 
tially as described, and a foil engaging the 
inertia piece to hold it out of operation, all 
combined substantially as described. 
17. The bolt and its operative connections, 
the inertia piece hung to the bolt, the foil in 
position to engage the inertia piece and hold 
it out of operative position, said foil having 
a projection in the path of movement of the 
hammer, all in combination. 
18. The bolt and its operative connections, 
the inertia piece hung in the bolt, the spring 
bearing on the inertia piece and having a 
projection in the path of movement of the 
hammer, and the foil in position to hold the 
inertia piece out of operative position and 
having a projection in the path of movement 
O 
25 
30 
45 
of the hammer, all combined substantially as 35 
described. 
19. In a double gun the bolt and its opera 
tive connections, the inertia piece carried by 
the bolt, and a spring piece in the path of 
movement of each hammer, both engaging the 4o 
inertia piece, whereby both bearing springs 
must be compressed by the hammers before 
the inertia piece can be operated by the shock 
of firing. 
20. The combination with the double gun 
having separate hammers, of a supplementary 
sear as a detent to the second hammer and 
having one end heavy to operate by the shock 
of firing to release the hammer, and a detent 
in position to engage said supplementary Sear 
and hold it inoperative, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
21. The frame and operative connections, 
the reciprocating breech piece and a sliding 
handle connected thereto, means for locking 
the breech piece in closed position, and an 
inertia piece mounted in the gun and engag 
ing the locking means to hold the same, but 
actuated to release the locking mechanism 
by the shock of firing, all combined substan- 6o 
tially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
Intestimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
ANDREW BURGESS. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. BARTLETT, 
D. M. BARTLETT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520659.txt	(No Model.) 
F. RHIND 
SIGNAL LANTERN FOR; BICYCLES, 
No. 520,659. 
Patented May 29, 1894. 
 
 
 
  
 
4-FF 
 
WITNESSES 
36-7-?a-2. 
NVENTOR 
4-6/24 
C2zz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK RHIND, OF MERIDEN, ASSIGNOR TO THE BRIDGEPORT BRASS 
COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
SIGNAL-LANTERN FOR BICYCLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 520,659, dated May 29, 1894 
Application filed October 26, 1893, Serial No, 489,85 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK RHIND, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Meriden, 
in the county of New Haven and State of Con 
necticut, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Signal-Lanterns for Bi 
cycles, &c.; and Idohereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention is applicable to lanterns gen 
erally but is especially adapted for use upon 
signal lanterns such as are used upon bi 
cycles, boats, railway cars, &c., and has for its 
object to so improve the construction of the 
lantern as a whole that neither the reservoir 
nor the body shall become heated in use. 
With these ends in view I have devised the 
novel construction of which the following de 
Scription in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings is a specification, numbers be 
ing used to designate the several parts. 
Figure 1 is an elevation of my novel lan 
tern partially broken away to show the de 
tails of construction, and Fig. 2 is a perspec 
tive illustrating the mode which I have adopt 
ed of connecting the reservoir to the body, 
the special object being to place the body 
and reservoir in close proximity to each other 
leaving an airspace between them, but at the 
Same time to give the greatest length to the 
metallic connections that is possible within 
the space by which the body and reservoir 
are separated. 
1 denotes the body of the lantern, 2 the top 
plate, 3 the top ring, 5 the outer perforated 
plate, 6 the reservoir, 7 the wick tube, and 8 
connections between the reservoir and body. 
The special object of my novel construc 
tion is to make the points of attachment to 
the reservoir as far distant from the points 
of attachment to the body as the construc 
tion will permit, it being of course apparent 
that the air space between the reservoir and 
body is a non-conductor of heat, and that 
While metal is a comparatively good conduc 
tor, the greater the distance between the 
points of attachment of the connections them 
selves, the less heat will be conducted from 
the body to the reservoir. This is especially 
true in the present instance where the con 
nection is fully exposed to the air. The con 
nection is shown as made from a single piece 
of sheet metal which is perforated to give 55 
free passage to the air and is of course So 
formed as not to come in contact with either 
the body or the reservoir except at the points 
of attachment. The connection is provided 
on its under side with lugs 9 for attachment 
to the reservoir and on its upper side with 
lugs 10 for attachment to the body. It will 
be noticed that lugs 9 by which the connec 
tion is attached to the reservoir are placed 
intermediate lugs 10 by which the connection 
is attached to the body thereby placing the 
respective points of attachment as far apart 
as possible so that in practice the tempera 
ture of the oil in the reservoir will not be 
raised to any perceptible degree by heat con 
ducted from the body. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
In a lantern of the class described the com 
bination with a body and a reservoir having 
an air space between them, of a metallic con 
nection 8 by which said body and reservoir 
are joined together, said connection being 
made from a single piece of sheet metal so 
shaped as not to come in contact with either 
the body or the reservoir and provided on its 
under side with lugs 9 for attachment to the 
reservoir and on its upper side with lugs 10 
for attachment to the body, said points of at 
tachment to the body being placed interme 
diate the points of attachment to the reser 
Voir, as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
FRANK RHIND. 
7 O 
Witnesses: 
A. M. WOOSTER, 
PEARL REYNOLDS. 
O 
I5 
25 
35 
4.O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520760.txt	(No Model ) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
G. H. POOR. 
MECHANISM FOR RAISING OR LOWERING BERTHS. 
No. 520,760, 
Patented May 29, 1894, 
ea|e e 
s. 
2 
W. 
% 
Y 
3-6 
1.------------------------------------------- AN 
%. 
AS) 
Z/ WN 
% 
W 
%N 
69 
. 
2 
C. 
2%% . 
x 
   
At 
7, 
; 
Z. 
if 
, 7 
9. A 
avaaaaaaaaaaaaaa 
26 2atea 242 Sz 
sess X 
N 
NS SNSSSSSSSSSSS 
SSS. 
N 
S 
N. 
N. 
N 
7 N 
N N 
X N N 
N is 
N 
N 
Sz 
22 
sists 
Nile 
a 
SSSSSSSS 
SS 
SSSSSSSS 
esses 
 
3. 
5, 2 
2 5. 
 
N 22 s S essessesses 
ss SA 
A. 
4,434,4'- 
6:24, 9 Resea a a a ex 2 2 a 2 22 2. 
N 
X 
2, 14 Ca 
N 
Ne s 
NS SSS 
SS S 
22 
The NAIorial 
THogartArris company. 
WASHINeston, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
G. H. POOR. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MECHANISM FOR RAISING OR LOWERING BERTHS. 
No. 520,760, 
Patented May 29, 1894, 
% 
Saucas-P 
42 % 
22 
  
SY D 
 
Witness ES 
les (12-4--. 
 
IM 
WZZZZZM2 N\/EN T OR 
the National LTHographing.cgiaNY. 
wAshington, D.C. 
 
G. H. POOR. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
MECHANISM FOR RAISING OR LOWERING BERTHS, 
Patented May 29, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 520,760. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
VX/TN Fasi: y 
Azazel, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE H. POOR, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
MECHANISM FOR RAS ING OR Low ERING BERTH S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letterspatent No. 520,760, dated May 29, 1894. 
Application filed September 15, 1893, Renewed May 1, 1894, Serial No. 509,720, (No model.) 
immediate means for operating the winding 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. PooR, of wheels. Fig. 6 is a sectional view drawn to 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of an enlarged scale, showing the manner of se 
curing a berth in raised position, and lock 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
ing it to the partition of the section. Fig. 7 
useful Improvements in Mechanism for Rais 
is a perspective view of the berth holder and 
ing and Lowering Berths, of which the fol 
lock. Fig. 8 is a detail view of means for 
lowing is a specification. 
holding the berth holder and lock back out 
My invention has relation to that kind of 
of operative position. Fig. 9 is a sectional 
sleeping cars, vessels for navigation, &c., in 
detail view showing means for securing one 
Which sleeping berths are raised from pockets. 
end of the cables to the section partitions. 
beneath the floor or from low storage position, 
Fig. 10 is a perspective view of part of the 
to a higher point to be in position for occu 
means shown in Fig. 9. Figs. 5 to 10, inclu 
pancy. 
sive, are drawn to an enlarged scale. Fig.11 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
such improvements in means for raising and 
is a detail view hereinafter referred to. 
In the drawings a designates what, for the 
lowering berths as will enable the same to be 
purpose of this specification, may be supposed 
done with greater ease and rapidity than is 
to be the bottom of the car body, and the floor 
the case with contrivances now employed. 
is elevated above said bottom to provide pock 
It is also the object of my invention to sim 
ets or compartments for the storage of the 
plify the construction of the means for rais 
berths C d when the same are out of use. The 
ing and loweringberths, and render the same 
double floor sections ef over the pockets are 
certain and safe in operation, all appliances 
hinged at their ends to stationary parts of the 
being outside of the berth, there is no liability 
car so as that they may be raised from hori 
of the mechanism soiling or in any way in 
Zontal to vertical position, as is shown in Fig. 
terfering with the contents of the berth. 
1, and so form the partitions between the sec 
It is also the object of my invention to pro 
vide improved means for securing the berths 
tions. 
Each berth is composed of end and side 
in a raised position and locking them with 
parts and a bottomg and false bottom h. The 
the partitions, so that each individual berth 
space above the false bottom his adapted to 
may have an absolutely secure support, and 
receive the mattress which may be spring 
in addition in a series of berths in a row each 
supported. Between the bottom and the false 
may serve as a secure brace or support to the 
bottom of each berth I arrange in horizontal 
others. 
position a winding wheel i of a diameter as 
To these ends my invention consists of the 
great as can be conveniently accommodated, 
improvements which I will now proceed to de 
or as great as maybe necessary, which wheel 
scribe and claim. 
is grooved upon its periphery to receive coils 
Reference is to be had to the annexed draw 
of the lifting cables k which may be wound 
ings and to the letters marked thereon, form 
ing a part of this specification, the same let 
thereon. 
There are four lifting cables for each berth 
ters designating the same parts or features, 
two at each end-one of the ends of each ca 
as the case may be, wherever they occur. 
ble being connected to the winding wheeli, 
Of the drawings-Figure 1 is a sectional 
and the other to a threaded metal shankl 
side elevation of a berth-section, its storage 
(see Figs. 9 and 10) which extends through 
pocket or compartment, and end supports, 
an arm of a bracket l' fastened to one of the 
equipped with my improvements, parts of the 
floor sections at the outer or free end there 
adjacent sections being also shown. Fig. 2 
of and contained in a recess in said floor Sec 
is a cross section taken in the plane of the 
tions, said recess being covered by a plate l'. 
axis of the Winding wheels. Fig. 3 is a sec 
A worm-wheel i, is screwed on said shank 
tional plan view taken in a plane above one 
and bears on the upper side of the bracket 
of the winding wheels, Fig. 4 is a plan view 
arm, and a worm l mounted in bearings on 
showing the berth in raised position and 
said arm engages said worm wheel, and has 
locked. Fig. 5 is a detail view showing the 
. 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
5 
IO 
35 
40 
45 
 
 
520,760 
75 
9 O 
95 
Od 
IS 
25 
5 
a projecting square end to which a suitable 
implement may be applied for turning the 
Worm thereby taking up slack in the cable, 
in opening being provided in the cover-plate 
to accommodate such implement. It will 
be observed by this construction I avoid pro 
jections from the floor sections. The cables 
Will be so arranged as to pass from the wheel 
out of the berth over pulleys in disposed at 
Io or near their lower corners, and thence up, it 
may be in grooves k' (see Fig. 9) formed in 
the ends of the berths and partitions to their 
fastening point. The wheels i have bevel 
teeth 7 formed in their upper face at or near 
their edges adapted to be engaged by the 
teeth of a small miter gear o fixed upon the 
inner end of a short shaft properly supported, 
on the outer end of whichshaft is fixed a simi 
lar gear p, (see Fig. 5) which is adapted to en 
gage alike horizontally arranged miter gear q. 
A shaft r extends through the miter gear 
of the lower berth and up to a point just be 
low the miter gear q of the upper berth, and 
the last mentioned gear receives a shafts 
which is adapted at its lower end to engage 
and be locked with the upper end of the shaft 
'', so that, supposing the berths to be down 
(as shown infull lines in Fig. 1) the shafts 
may be inserted through a suitable bearing, 
then through the miter gear 9, of the upper 
berth and be locked with the upper end of 
the shaft r, when by the application to the 
upper end of the shafts of a crank it, the gears 
OP Q and the wheels imay be rotated to wind 
up and unwind the cables and raise the berths 
out of, or lower them in their pockets or com 
partments. 
When the berths are above their pockets 
or compartments, the shaft of the crank may 
be inserted through a hole in the side of either 
berth and engaged with a gearp so that by the 
turning of the said crank each berth may be 
raised and lowered independent of the other. 
When the berths are raised to the desired 
height (see dotted lines in Fig. 1) they may 
be engaged at their ends by wedge-shaped 
catches or dogs u, which enter the bottom of 
similarly-shaped recesses formed in metallic 
blocks or pieces y suitably secured to the ends 
of the berth, and so not only hold the berths 
in raised position, but lock them to their par 
titions, and in this way form a structure in 
which each section of a made-up series shall 
form an end support for the other sections. 
In other words, so that the several sections of 
a series shall be as it were, solidly connected, 
(see Figs. 6, 7 and 8.) 
When the berths are to be lowered into 
their pockets, they will first be raised suffi 
ciently far to release the catches or dogs at 
which may be folded back into recesses u 
formed in the sides of the partitions, as shown 
by dotted lines in Fig. 6, in which position 
they may be held by a laterally sliding bolt 
65 a (see Fig. 8) connected with the partitions 
and moved in front of the said dogs, or by 
other suitable means when the berths may be 
lovered without obstruction. The dogs at 
may be pivoted on a metallic supporty which 
may serve the double purpose of attaching 
the dogs to the partitions, and also form a bear 
ing at the point y' for the dogs when the lat 
ter are operating to hold the berths in raised 
position (see Figs. 6 and 7). 
I may provide each wheeli in one of its un 
der side hollow faces with a counterbalanc 
ing spring a (shown by dotted lines in Fig. 3) 
secured at one end to the wheel and at the 
other end to the axis or shaft i? upon which 
the wheel turns, in such manner that when 
the wheel is turned to lower the berth the 
spring will be wound up, and when the said 
wheel is operated to raise the berth the spring 
will be unwound. By this means should the 
normal supports for the berth by any chance 
give way, the counterbalancing spring may 
still support it against running down. 
The pulleys n arranged at or near the cor 
ners of the berths, under or around which the 
cables ic pass extend into the grooves c' lic' 
formed in the partitions and ends of the pock 
ets, by which means the berths are guided in 
their movements and maintained against any 
undue play or motion sidewise. This is an 
important feature of the invention. 
When my improvements are constructed 
and arranged as shown in the drawings, the 
upper berth may be fully raised and lowered 
by turning its wheel to an extent less than 
one revolution, and the lower berth may be 
similarly operated by turning its wheel a lit 
tle over one-half of a revolution, and the Work 
of raising and lowering the berths may be 
speedily and easily accomplished. 
In view of the fact that it may be neces 
sary from time to time to adjust the tension 
or stress of the counterbalancing spring 2, I 
may provide means for this adjustment such 
as is shown in Fig.11 wherein a ratchet wheel 
i is secured to the upper end of the shaft or 
journal studi' of the wheeli, and a holding 
pawlf is pivoted upon the false bottom h, 
which pawl engages the ratchet wheel to pre 
vent the same and the wheel i from running 
back by the stress of the spring 2. The lower 
end of the studi' is provided with a squared 
hole i for the reception of a key or crank so 
that the studi' may be turned to adjust the 
tension of the spring 2, and when the adjust 
ment is made the spring may be maintained 
under the adjusted tension by the pawlien 
gaging ratchet wheel f* fast on the said jour 
nal stud. 
It is to be noted that the wheel j occupies 
but little room, and that all of the parts are 
out of the way of interfering with the make 
up of the berths. 
Having thus explained the nature of the in 
vention and described a way of constructing 
aud using the same, though without attempt 
ing to set forth all of the forms in which it 
may be made or all of the modes of its use, it 
is declared that what is claimed is 
1. Aberth raising and lowering meanscom 
55 
35 
40 
45 
Io5 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
 
 
 
520,760 
 
- 
prising in its construction a berth having a 
bottom and a false bottom a wheel horizon 
tally arranged between the bottom and false 
bottom, cables connected at one end to the 
Said wheel and at the other end to the berth 
Support, and means for actuating the said 
Wheel, as set forth. 
2. Aberth raising and lowering meanscom 
prising in its construction a horizontally ar 
ranged wheel, provided with gear teeth, be 
low the bed or mattress, cables connected at 
One end to the said wheel and at the other 
end to the berth support, and gearing engag 
ing the gear teeth of the wheel for actuating 
the latter, as set forth. 
3. Aberth raising and lowering means com 
prising in its construction a horizontally ar 
ranged wheel below the bed or mattress, ca 
bles connected at one end to the said wheel 
and at the other end to the berth support, a 
spring connected with the latter and operat 
ing with a tendency to wind the cables there 
on, and means for actuating the said wheel, 
as set forth. 
4. Alberth raising and lowering means com 
prising in its construction a horizontally ar 
ranged wheel below the bed or mattress, ca 
bles connected at one end to the said wheel 
and at the other end to the berth support, a 
spring connected with the latter and operating 
with a tendency to wind the cables thereon, 
means substantially as described for adjust 
- 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
ing the tension of the said spring, and means 
for actuating the said wheel, as set forth. 
5. Aberth supporting means comprising in 
its construction, wedge-shaped dogs pivoted 
to the section partitions adapted to engage 
similar recesses formed in the bottom of the 
berths at the ends thereof, as set forth. 
6. Aberth adapted to be raised and low 
ered, provided with a bottom and false bot 
tom, means for raising and lowering the berth 
arranged between the bottom and false bot 
tom, and cables connected at one end to said 
means, and at the other end to the berth Sup 
port, as set forth. 
7. Aberth adapted to be raised and low 
ered, cables connected to the partitions for 
raising and lowering the berth, means con 
nected to the berth to which the cables are 
also attached, pulleys at the ends of the berth 
under or around which the cables pass, part 
of said pulleys extending beyond the plane 
of the berth, and grooves in the berth parti 
tions into which the extended parts of the 
said pulley project, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name, to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 18th day of 
May, A. D. 1893. 
GEORGE H. POOR. 
55 
Witnesses: 
W. S. HILL, 
FRANK E. WATERMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520860.txt	(No Model.) 
H. O'SHEA, 
RAILWAY RAIL CHAIR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 520,860, 
Patented June 5, 1894, 
WITNESSES 
26.4% & 2-4 
f/WWEAVTOR 
62/42 
%ry e/aeleo/ 
ATTORAWEY. 
T-E national Li-iographing cerary 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 520,860. 
 
H. O'SHEA. 
RAILWAY RAIL CHAIR 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 5, 1894, 
WITNESSES; 
ge 77. Capelleye- 
INVENTOR 
BY 
zo. 
-le-tee-4- 
ATTORNEY. 
"NATIONAL LITHOGRAPHina compar., 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY O'SHEA, OF JOHNSTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE JOHNSON COMPANY, OF PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAWAY = RAI CHA R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 520,860, dated June 5, 1894. 
Application filed April 24, 1893, Serial No. 471,659, (No model.) 
55 
By the interposition of the filler F and con- 5o 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, HENRY O'SHEA, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Johns 
town, county of Cambria, State of Pennsylva 
nia, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Railway-Rail Chairs, of which the fol 
lowing is a true and exact description, due ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
Ings. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
railchair which may be rigidly secured to the 
rail at any point without previous cutting or 
punching of the rail and will at the same time 
firmly grasp and secure the rail. 
My improvement belongs to that class of 
rail chairs in which the lower flange of the 
rail is grasped by the two independent sides 
of the chair and a supporting block is inter 
posed between them to form a seat for the 
rail. 
Referring to the drawings Figure 1 shows 
an end view of a chair embodying my inven 
tion and showing a rail in section mounted 
thereon. Fig. 2 is a side view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a side view of a detail hereinafter 
described and Fig. 4 is an end view of a chair 
slightly different in detail from Fig. 1. Figs. 
5 and 8 are modified forms of Fig.1 and Figs. 
6 and 9 are side views of same. Fig. 7 is a 
view of detail hereinafter described. 
In Fig. 1, R is any rail to be supported. 
The two sides of the chair C are drawn to 
gether by the bolt B so as to firmly grasp the 
rail the upper flanges of the chair pressing 
against the web of the rail and thus assist 
ing in the support. The block or filler F per 
forms a double duty; in the first place it af 
fords a direct support for the rail and base 
thereof resting upon it and so distributing 
some of the load upon that part of the tie 
directly beneath the rail base; the second 
duty of this block is as a distance piece to af 
ford a fulcrum V against which the bolts B 
may draw the sides of the chair C and cause 
them to close in upon the rail. By slotting 
this filler F as shown at S Fig. 3, I am en 
abled to place the bolt immediately beneath 
the flange of the rail at the point where its 
action is the most efficient, 
sequent distance between the vertical webs 
of the chair below the base of the rail, I am 
enabled to make this chair with a large bear 
ing surface on the tie and the greater dis 
tance to the edge of the chair reduces the 
tendency to give way to side. thrust against 
the rail. 
In Fig. 4 the filler F is shown as having a 
single vertical web instead of the box form 
shown in Eig. 1. 
In Figs. 5 to 9 is shown a modification of 
Fig. 1. 
In these the side C is constructed 
having the two inclines I, I'. The upper 
one conforms to the taper of the rail base 
while the lower one passes beneath a corre 
sponding incline formed on a flange P on the 
top of filler F. The bottom of F holding 
the sides C of the chairs apart at the points 
V the action of the bolt is to draw the taper 
ing recess of the chair side Cupon the wedge 
formed by the rail base and flange P and 
firmly press the two together. The top and 
bottom surfaces of the flange P might be 
parallel and the taper of the rail flange re 
lied upon to force the two together. As the 
final distance between the two sides C is wa 
riable depending upon how far they draw 
upon the rail and filler the upper webs, 
which in Fig. 1 press against the web of the 
rail are omitted and the clamping action of 
the inclines II' is relied upon to hold the rail. 
Fig. 8 shows a modified form of Fig. 5 and 
filler F being constructed with two vertical 
webs instead of one. In place of the bolt B 
having a nut to draw the sides together a key 
or similar device might be substituted. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to protect by Letters Pat 
ent, is- 
A rail chair for railroad rails, comprising 
two side members, the upper portions of 
which engage the rail, while the lower edges 
...  
75 
9o 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
520,860 
are provided with feet for a bearing on the be attached to a rail without cutting or simi- Io 
tie; an interposed chock upon which the rail larly preparing said rail. 
rests, and which has lower flanges bearing on 
the tie, the edges of which flanges engaging nature in presence of two witnesses. 
5 the bases of the side members act as a dis 
tance piece between said side members, and 
means, passing beneath the rail, for secur- 
ing the two side members against the rail 
and against the chock, whereby the chair may 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
H. W. SMITH, 
WM. A. DONALDSON. 
Witnesses: 
- 
HENRY O'SHEA. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US520960.txt	No Model.) 
No. 520,960, 
J. H. HORNIE. 
ROLL BAR FOR PULP ENGINES, 
Patented June 5, 1894, 
 
 
 
|- 
Il 55E 
?g/e/e7e1 
\ * * * * s<! 
#  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. HORNE, OF LAWRENCE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
ROLL- BAR FOR PU LP- EN GINEs. 
SPESIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 520,960, dated June 5, 1894. 
Application filed January 20, 1894, Serial No. 497,502. (No model.) 
To all Lvho7mv it 7may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN H. HORNE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Law 
rence, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Roll-Bars for Pulp 
Engines; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to rolls employed in 
paper-pulp engines, and pertains especially 
to the construction of the bars, which form 
the periphery of the roll and which are em 
ployed in reducing the stock, upon : which 
they operate to such a consistency as will 
paper web or 
permit it to be converted into a 
sheet. 
The drawings represent in Figure 1 a per 
spective view of a roll-bar embodying my in 
Vention. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of a roll in 
part with a number of bars in position. Fig. 
3 is a cross-section of a single beveled bar. 
Fig. 4 is a modified form of a bar. 
This invention, as before premised, relates 
to the manufacture of bars or blades for use 
in the rolls which form an essential part of 
all paper-pulp engines, and it may be con 
sidered as relating to and constituting an im 
provement upon an invention described un 
der United States Letters Patent No. 253,606, 
and issued in my name on July 14, 1882. 
The primary feature in said invention and 
patent consisted in constructing a bar in 
which the metal composing it was disposed 
equally of a median line drawn centrally and 
longitudinally of said bar. Furthermore in 
dividing the side surfaces into two portions 
Which slope toward the opposite bounding 
edges of the sides. In other words the bar was 
made with a double bevel, which not only en 
abled a roll to be made interchangeable from 
a right-handed to a left-handed engine, but 
likewise assisted in maintaining the wooden 
strips or wedges, which are employed in lock 
ing said bars fast to the roll, in place. In the 
active operation of the rolls, the knives are 
continually subjected to sudden lateralshocks 
or blows due to the passage of hard material 
between the roll and the bed-plate in the act 
of comminuting the stock, wood-pulp, or other 
material circulating about in the engine. 
These repeated blows serve to start the wood 
filling, and when this occurs the bars are fre 
quently bent and become loose; the roll is 
then in need of repairs, which necessitates 
the stopping of the engine with loss of time, 
while the producing capacity of the mill is 
reduced. 
- The object of my invention is to produce a 
roll-bar of such form, that after the wooden 
filling or wedges are driven home positive en 
gagement shall occur between the bar and 
the wedge, in order to prevent the wedges 
ever starting from their places under any or 
dinary shocks or blows which may occur when 
the roll is in use. To this end I have shown 
a roll-bar at 2, as made from steel which is to 
be manufactured in strips, and then cut into 
suitable lengths. 
Thisbar, as shown in cross 
section has its thickest part preferably to one 
side of the longitudinal center and is formed 
with a double bevel; the lower or longer bev 
eled surface 3 being inserted in the roll, the 
upper and shorter surface 4 projecting be 
yond the roll proper and serving to act as the 
cutting edge. Between the blades are insert 
ed strips or wedges of wood adapted to extend 
longitudinally of said blades. The upper se 
ries are indicated at 5, the lower series at 6. 
In order to prevent these wedges from be 
coming loose, I roll, cut, press or otherwise 
form upon one side of the bar, or that part . 
contiguous to the wedges, a step surface 7. 
This surface is made up in the present - in 
stance of portions 8, 9, located in different 
planes and separated by shoulders 10, 10', 
the height of the shoulder representing the 
difference in the position of the planes. 
Hence when the wedges are driven into place, 
the woody fibers will yield sufficiently to ad 
mit of a snug fit being made, the wedges be 
ing given a taper approximating the general 
shape of the space between the bars. After 
said wedges have been driven into place the 
natural expansion of the wood due to the 
presence of moisture will cause the wood to 
conform exactly to the stepsurface, and in 
this way fill compactly the space between the 
bars. When this expansion has occurred, 
I O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
35 
4 O 
45 
55 
75 
9 o 
95 
I O 3 
520,960 
45 
 
55 
75 
O 
20 
the shoulders 10,10', then act as stops to pre 
yent the wedges from becoming loose or draw 
ing out, since the bars now have positive en 
gagement with the wedges. 
In the operation of keying the barsinto the 
roll, Iarrange said bars as shown in Fig.2, that 
is in this particular instance only one half of 
the lower side portion of each bar is provided 
with a step surface, hence the next adjacent 
bar is positioned with the smooth lower side 
portion opposite the step-surface of the other 
bar, since I find in practice that a step-sur 
face on one bar is sufficient to hold the wedges 
between any two bars firmly in place. The 
bars are to be secured to the roll in any suit 
able manner now practiced, preferably how 
ever, hoops (not shown) are shrunk on the 
ends of the roll, while slots are cut in the ex 
tremities of the bars. Thus by causing the 
bars to engage the hoops said bars are fas 
tened strongly to the roll and are then wedged 
in the manner set forth. However both the 
lower beveled surfaces may be formed with 
step-surfaces, and still be within the gist of 
my invention, since I do not wish to be lim 
ited to the precise form of the step-surface, or 
whether it is applied to one or both sides of 
a bar. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown my invention as 
applied to a single bevel bar 2, one side be 
ing a continuous plane surface, the upper 
beveled surface is indicated at 4, while the 
lower beveled surface is formed with a step 
portion 7". In some instances, as shown in 
Fig. 4 the lower body of the bar, or that por 
tion which is embedded in the roll, in contra 
distinction to the projecting part or cutting 
portion has no taper, but is of rectangular 
shape in cross-section, the step portion being 
raised upon it. In this particular class of bar, 
it is found much more difficult to retain the 
wood filiing, since the angle between the di 
verging side faces of adjacent bars is much 
sharper, and hence my invention is pecu 
liarly applicable. 
What I claim is- 
1. A bar for pulp engines having a portion 
of its side surface divided into a number of 
separate surfaces located in different planes 
to create successive shoulders, which extend 
inwardly into the substance composing the 
bar, substantially as and for the purposes eX 
plained. 
2. A bar for pulp-engines having a portion 
of its side surface divided into steps, and madle 
up of a number of plane surfaces extending 
longitudinally of the bar, and a number of 
shoulders or risers which separate the several 
plane surfaces, the risers not projecting be 
yond the general side surface of the bar, sub 
stantially as set forth and described. 
3. A bar for pulp-engine rolls having its 
opposite sides tapering from a longitudinal 
line central or thereabout oppositely to each 
edge, and having a portion of its surface 
formed with a series of steps, which extend 
lengthwise of the bar, substantially as speci 
fied and stated. 
4. In combination with a roll, a series of 
bars, a series of plane surfaces longitudinally 
of each bar, a series of steps which separate 
the several surfaces, and wedges adapted to 
be inserted between the individual bars and 
engage the steps upon the bar, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN H. HORNIE. 
Witnesses: 
II. E. LODGE, 
FRANCIS C. STAN WOOD. 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521060.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 521,060. 
 
J. B. TIN SLEY. 
TURN TABLE, 
Patented June 5, 1894. 
Zzzeyear 
47 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH BURTON TINSLEY, OF ANTHONY, KANSAS. 
U R N TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,060, dated June 5, 1894. 
Application filed November 3, 1893, Serial No. 489,922, (No model.) 
I5 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPHBURTONTINS 
LEY, of Anthony, in the county of Harper 
and State of Kansas, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Locomotive 
Turn-Tables; and I do declare that the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters and numerals of reference marked there 
on, which form part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in turn-tables for locomotives. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
an improved automatically operated turn-ta 
ble for locomotives exceedingly simple and 
durable in construction and whereby the ta 
ble is turned by the forward movement of 
the locomotive entering the table. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction and in combination of 
parts more fully pointed out hereinafter and 
particularly described. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings: 
Figure 1, is a plan view of the turn table. 
Fig. 2, is a side elevation of the turn table 
with a locomotive shown diagrammatically 
thereon, parts being broken away. Figs. 3 
and 4 are respectively, detailed views show 
ing different styles of trips for operating the 
rack bar. 
In the drawings the reference letter a, in 
dicates a turn table of any suitable or ordi 
mary construction, mounted on a central pivot 
b, and provided with supporting Wheels c. 
Two of the supporting wheels are mounted 
rigidly on the main driving axle d, and this 
driving axle extends transversely of the track 
on the turn table and is provided with a small 
strongly constructed pinion e, preferably lo 
cated between the rails. This pinion e, 
meshes with gearing on the under side of an 
45 elongated sliding rack barf, extending longi" 
tudinally of the turn table, preferably, be 
tween the rails thereof and adjacent to One 
of the rails. The said rackbar slides on Suit 
able pulleys g, and is confined in position by 
5o suitable yokes or guides h, so that it can 
freely slide in either direction when properly 
m 
35 
io 
75 
actuated and yet will always be maintained 
in engagement with the pinion of the main 
drive shaft. At or about its center this 
sliding rack-bar is provided with an elevated 55 
portion having a central notchi, to engage 
means carried by the locomotive and lock 
the rack bar to the locomotive so that when 
the locomotive passes on the turn table 
from adjacent tracks, means carried by the 
locomotive will drop into said notch and will 
thereby cause the rack-bar to move longi 
tudinally with the locomotive, hence by means 
of the gearing revolving the main drive shaft 
of the turn table and causing the turn table 
to revolve the desired degree. The rack-bar 
and pinion are usually so geared together and 
proportioned with the drive wheels c, and ar 
ranged to connect with the operating appara 
tus on the locomotive that the forward move 
ment of the locomotive entering the turn ta 
ble will revolve the turn table one-half a revo 
lution so as to turn the locomotive completely 
around. 
It is evident that in the present device the 
contact between the locomotive and the rack 
bar cannot be made until the locomotive and 
tender are completely upon the turn table; 
hence the table must be formed of such length 
as to permit forward movement of the loco 
motive, after it has passed on to the table, 
sufficient to cause the desired rotation of the 
table. 
The ends of the turn table are provided 
with suitable sliding bolts lic, arranged to en 
ter suitable slots or openings in the surround 
ing frame or wall of the turn table pit so as 
to lock the turn table in alignment with the 
tracks. These sliding bolts are operated to 
gether by suitable links and levers l, n, con 
nected with a hand lever o, at the center of 
the turn table so that the operator canthrow 
the bolts as desired. This hand lever is con 
trolled by suitable pawl ratchet mechanism 
and hand clip as shown in any usual or suit 
able manner. 
Various means can be carried by the loco 
motive to operate the sliding rack-bar and 
lock the locomotive thereto. In Fig. 3, this 
means consists of sliding posts or blocks p, 
located on opposite sides of the locomotive 
so that the locomotive can enter either end of 
95 
Oo 
3. 
521,060 
the turn table and yet always have a device 
to operate the rack-bar. These vertically 
sliding blocks p, move in suitable vertical 
guides q, in the locomotive so that their lower 
ends can project into the path of the rack 
bar and enter the notch therein when low 
ered. These bars can be raised when desired 
by means of a rock shaft n, having lateral 
toes or arms at, extending loosely into slots or 
notches in the vertically movable blocks p, 
and provided with an upwardly extendingle 
ver or arm v, for rocking said shaft. Thus 
when the locomotive passes into a turn table 
the shaft r, is rocked to drop said blocks p, 
to permit them to enter the rack-bar. When 
the locomotive has been turned, the blocks 
are raised out of the way. 
In Fig. 4, a rock shaft 3, is shown mounted 
on the under side of the locomotive and pro 
vided with an upwardly extending operating 
arm and with oppositely extending curved 
arms 4, arranged to engage the notch of the 
rack bar when the rock shaft is moved to 
throw said arms down. The raised portion 
of the rack-bar has a limited movement be 
tween the yokesh, and hence can serve as a 
stop for the locomotive. 
I do not wish to limit myself to any pecu 
liar means or mechanisms carried by the loco 
motive to operate the rack-bar as my inven 
tion is not limited to any specific construc 
tion for this purpose. 
This invention possesses many advantages 
and is of great utility and it is evident that 
various changes might be made in the forms, 
arrangements, and constructions of the parts 
described, without departing from the spirit 
and scope of my invention, hence I do not 
wish to limit myself to the exact construc 
tion herein set forth, but consider myself en 
titled to all such changes as fall within the 
spirit and scope of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
45 
55 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. A turn-table having a longitudinally 
movable rack-bar adapted to be moved by the 
locomotive entering the turntable and geared 
to the driving mechanism of the turn table to 
operate the same, substantially as described. 5o 
2. A turn table provided with a longitudi-. 
nally movable bar adapted to be moved lon 
gitudinally by a locomotive entering the ta 
ble and connected with the driving mechan 
ism of the table to revolve the table by the 
movement of the locomotive, substantially as 
described. 
3. A turn table having its main drive shaft 
provided with a pinion and a longitudinally 
movable rack-bar gearing with said pinion 
and arranged to be engaged and moved lon 
gitudinally by means carried by the locomo 
tive, substantially as described. 
4. A turn table having its main drive shaft 
provided with a pinion, the longitudinally 65 
sliding rack-bar on said turn table meshing 
with said pinion the supporting pulleys and 
guides for said rack-bar, said rack-bar hav 
ing an elevated portion provided with the 
notch arranged to receive means carried by 
the locomotive so as to move the rack bar as 
the locomotive enters the turn table substan 
tially as described. 
5. A locomotive provided with vertically 
movable means arranged to engage the notch 
of the rack-bar on the turn table, and means 
for operating said engaging means, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own Iaffix my signature in presence of two 8o 
witnesses. 
o 
75 
JOSEPH BURTON TINSEY. 
Witnesses: 
E. C. WILCox, 
S. A. BLUMER, 
O 
20 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521160.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C. E. GEIGER, 
DRIWING MECHANISM FOR ELECTRIC ELEWATORS, 
No. 521,160, 
Patented June 12, 1894, 
 
wrests. SN 
S 
4t45%ia, s 
f 
/ 
1//WEA/TOR 
Chelstel . 
v 
1--ee 
ATTORNEY. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. E. GEIGER. 
DRIVING MECHANISM FOR ELECTRICELEVATORs, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 521,160, 
Patented June 12, 1894, 
  
 
 
ERS 
tle. 
II.I.T.T. - Til 
ULL || 
 
treete-ree 
IHIHTT IIs St. 
 
 
WITNESSES 
v.4, e4, & 44. 
e1e4 27 
1//WEWTOR 
Cr-el.e- 
BY af24-6244 
ATTOR//EY. 
WASH:Naron, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. GEIGER, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
DRIVING MECHANISM For ELECT Ric ELEVATORs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,160, dated June 12, 1894. 
Application filed February 27, 1892, Serial No. 422,960, (No model.) 
O 
claims. 
w 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs E. GEIGER, 
of Louisville, in the county of Jefferson, in 
the State of Kentucky, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Driving Mech 
anism for Electric Elevators, of which the fol 
lowing, taken in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
driving mechanism for electric elevators and 
attachments relating thereto, and it consists 
in certain details of construction and opera 
tion of parts, all as hereinafter more fully set 
forth and specifically pointed out in the 
In the annexed drawings similar letters of 
reference indicate corresponding parts in all 
the views wherein 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of an electric 
elevator provided with my improvements, a 
part of the casing being broken away for the 
purpose of better illustrating the details of 
construction. Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of the 
device shown in Fig. 1 with the electric mo 
tor omitted. Fig. 3 is an enlarged side ele 
Vation of the centrifugal clutch and brake op 
erating device with one of the disks of the 
clutch removed to better illustrate the inter 
nal construction of said clutch. Fig. 4 is a 
vertical section of the clutch shown in Fig. 3. 
In this class of elevators, I have found that 
it is desirable to permit the electric motor to 
gain considerable speed before starting the 
elevator car, as thus it will be more economi 
cal in use than where the power of the motor 
is applied immediately totheelevatorcarshaft 
and connections. For that reason I provide 
an Ordinary electric motor-A- from which 
extends a motor shaft -B- at the end of 
which is attached a diskor.clutch section-C- 
carrying two or more radially movable shoes 
-D- normally drawn toward the motorshaft 
-B- by the springs -E-. Said shoes are 
connected to the clutch section -C- by 
means of bolts -a a- passing through the 
slots -b b- in said segments. Immediately 
beyond the motor shaft-B- is a worm shaft 
--F- and upon the end of said shaft near 
the motor is provided a disk or companion 
clutch section -G - provided with an e 
shaped flange-g'-, which incloses the shoes 
-D- attached to said clutch section -C-. 
Upon the opposite end of the shaft, -F-I 
provide a screw-H- which meshes with the 
worm wheel, -J- inclosed within the cas 
ing -K-. The portion of the frame within 
which the worm-H- is inclosed is used also 
as a support for the bent lever --L-- one end 
of which connects with the lever -M- of the 
brake operating device herein more fully de 
scribed, while the opposite end of said lever 
-L-lies beneath the cam -N- on the shaft 
-O- of the starting wheel-P- which lat 
teris operated by the hand cable-Q- which 
is carried by any convenient and well-known 
plan to the elevator car for manipulation by 
the conductor. 
As the current controlling device forms no 
part of this present application, a detailed 
description thereof will not be entered into, 
but any suitable device for the purpose of 
controlling the current of electricity of the 
motor may be used and may be connected in 
any suitable manner to the starting wheel 
-P- so as to be regulated from that point 
at the will of the conductor. 
It will be noted that the worm wheel-J- 
is journaled on the shaft-c- and referring 
to Fig. 2, it will be seen that the shaft-c- 
carries a pinion, -R- which meshes with 
the internal gear -S- of the druin -T- 
upon which is wound the hoisting cable-N- 
by means of which the elevator car is raised 
and lowered. 
Referring, now, to Figs, 3 and 4 it will be 
seen that the shoes -D- are held normally 
contracted away from the flange -g- of the 
clutch section --G-, but said springs are 
only sufficiently powerful to retract the shoes 
-D- when no centrifugal force is exerted 
to throw them away from the central shafts 
-B and F-, but upon rapid rotation of the 
shaft -B- the radially movable shoes-D- 
are thrown by centrifugal force away from 
the center of the clutch casing, and are caused 
to bear upon the inner peripheral face of the 
clutch at-g' - so as to cause said disk-G- 
and its connected shaft -F- to be rotated 
with the shaft-B- running from the motor, 
and thus communicating powerfrom the motor 
to said shaft-F-and the screw-H-there 
on, which latter, meshing with the Worm wheel 
-j- causes the drum -T-e to revolve 
25 
30 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
8) 
90 
95 
OO 
 
521,160 
through the medium of the shaft-c-, pin 
ion -R-, and the internal gear -S- within 
the drum. It will be noted that the clutch 
Sections -C and G- are held on the shafts 
-B and F- at a point within the brake 
frame-2-, and that said frame is provided 
at its lower portion with the pivoted lever, 
M- pivoted to the standard, -3- and that 
the lever, -4-is pivoted at-5- to the frame 
It will be noted that the arm -6- 
Connects the lever-M- and the arm -4-in 
Such manner in relation to their pivots that 
the Weight-7- will depress the outer ends 
of both -M- and -4- and cause the brake 
Shoes -8- of both levers to bear on the 
outer periphery of the clutch sections -C 
and G - except when the weight -7- is 
raised by means of the cam -N- bearing 
on the free end of the lever -L- and lift 
ing the weight -7- above its normal posi 
tion. 
In operation, it will be found that a small 
amount of power will be sufficient to start 
the motor, and that when the motor is under 
way, the current may be increased at pleas 
lure until a Sufficient amount is turned on to 
cause the connection of the several parts of 
the clutch to turn the elevator drum and 
raise or lower the car as may be desired, and 
when the current has been shut off, the start 
ing wheel -P- will rest in the position 
shown in Fig. -- at which position the 
cam -M- will permit the lever -- to 
rise at its free end, thus allowing the weight 
-7- to drop and cause the brake shoes 
-8- to bear with their full force upon the 
outer periphery of the clutch sections. It 
will also be noted that the weight -7- is 
adjusted by means of the set screw -9- in 
its position on the lever -M- so that a 
greater or leSS braking resistance may be ob 
5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
tained by shifting said weight out or in on 
said lever -M-, 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a device for operating an electric ele 
vator, the combination of a motor, a motor 
shaft, a driven shaft, a centrifugal clutch 
connecting said shafts, consisting of a clutch 
section on the motor shaft having radially 
movable shoes and a companion clutch Sec 
tion on the driven shaft inclosing the ra. 
dially movable shoes, and a friction brake 
bearing on the periphery of each clutch Sec 
tion, substantially as described. 
2. In a device for operating an electric ele 
Vator, the combination of a motor, a motor 
shaft, a driven shaft, a friction clutch carried 
partly on each of said shafts at their adja 
cent ends and a friction brake bearing on the 
Outer peripheral face of each section of said 
friction clutch, substantially as described. 
3. In a device for operating an electric ele 
Vator, the combination of a motor, a motor 
shaft provided at its outer end with a clutch 
Section, a series of radially movable shoes 
carried by said clutch section, a driven shaft, 
a companion clutch section on One end of 
said shaft embracing said radially movable 
shoes, and a brake bearing normally on the 
Outer peripheral faces of said clutch sections, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name, in the presence of two attest 
ing witnesses, at Louisville, in the county of 
Jefferson, in the State of Kentucky, this 16th 
day of February, 1892. 
CHARLES E. GEIGER, 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK II. GIBBs, 
FREDERICKE.. IIEINIG. 
45 
So 
55 
Go 
65 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521260.txt	(No Model.) 
F. DUBERO & P. MOHRDIECK. 
y 
ELECTRIC BATTERY. 
No. 521,260, 
Patented June 12, 1894. 
 
 
-- I Tai criter Irira 
 
\ Ei 
SS 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
s 
S Sai 
22.2%222222222222222222222222% 
---- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
N 
R 
N N 
R S 
3-uo-woz 
33% 
2 
 
SS 
7-ga- 
-- 
4-6-2-1-2. 
/26 a1 /2 24, 242.e4 
C 
N 42-2's 
thE MAtto Al LirHographins company. 
WASHINeoM, E. e. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED. DUBERO AND PETER MOHRDIECK, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
ELECTRIC BATTERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,260, dated June 12, 1894. 
Application filed January 15, 1894, Serial No. 496,965. (No model.) 
I5 
2o batteries and their connections. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, FRED. DUBERO and 
PETER MOHRDIECK, citizens of the United 
States, residing in the city and county of San 
5 Francisco, State of California, have invented 
an Improvement in Electrical Batteries; and 
We hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same. 
Our invention relates to an improvement in 
Io batteries for generating electricity, and in 
means for operating the same. 
It consists in certain details of construction 
which will be more fully, explained by refer 
ence to the accompanying drawings,in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section through 
the battery showing one form of applying our 
invention. Fig. 2 is a view of a series of our 
batteries, one of them being shown in cross 
section. Fig. 3 is a diagrammatic view of the 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
continuous or constant battery, the elements 
of which are renewed during the operation of 
the battery, and in the employment in con 
25 junction with said battery of sea water as the 
active energizing elements of said battery. 
In the construction of our battery, we em 
ploy any suitable or desirable substance 
which will form the positive and negative 
3o elements of the battery, these being well 
known to those conversant with such matters. 
These elements are SO arranged with relation 
to each other that the negative element may 
be alternately submerged in the active solu 
35 tion in which the positive element remains 
submerged, and then withdrawn therefrom 
and exposed to the air to become dry and to 
absorb a certain portion of air before it is 
again submerged. This operation may be 
4o carried out in various ways. We have found 
a very suitable method is to make the nega 
tive element in the form of a rotary hollow 
cylinder. 
In this construction, A is an outer case 
45 which may be made of any suitable or desir 
able material, and may, if desired, form a part 
of the negative element of the battery. With 
in this case is placed the positive element or 
plate B. In the present case it is shown in 
5o the form of a hollow rectangle which fits with 
in the outer case and is maintained out of 
 
C is a shaft extending across the outer-case 55 
contact there with either by insulating sup 
ports at the bottom or similar insulating sus 
pending devices from above. 
and turning in suitable bearings therein hav 
ing stuffing-boxes to prevent leakage at the 
point where the shaft enters the case. Upon 
this shaft is fixed a circular revolving hollow 
cylinder D. In the present case, this hollow 6o 
cylinder consists of two sides separated from 
each other and having a surrounding rim 
forming an inclosure within which is placed 
a filling of manganese or other suitable or de 
sired material, in coarse particles about the 65 
size of peas. The sides of the hollow cylin 
der are perforated with small holes so as to 
admit the solution or liquor of the battery to 
enter freely into that portion which is sub 
merged, and from which it can escape as the 7o 
portion of the hollow cylinder emerges from 
the liquid. Openings are made transversely 
through the sides of the hollow cylinder and 
through these openings are introduced the 
carbon blocks E which extend through from 75 
side to side and project a little on each side 
of the disk. The hollow cylinder is rotated 
by any suitable power applied thereto so that 
it is turned very slowly. 
By experiment, we have found that sea water 
forms a most economical and valuable excit 
ing liquid for this apparatus, which has been 
designed especially for use upon sea-coast and 
upon ship-board where it is intended to gen 
erate power for any purposes for which it is 85 
desired to use it. In order to economically use 
Sea Water and to constantly renew it as is nec 
essary, We have shown an inletpipe or passage 
F through which the Wateris delivered into the 
interior of the outer case. A near the bottom. 
This outer case extends up so high as to nearly 
or entirely inclose the rotary hollow cylinder, 
and the supply pipe extends up to a point 
near the top of the disk. Upon the opposite 
side of the case, at a point below the line of 
the shaft, is a discharge pipe or passage G. 
through which the liquid is constantly flow 
ing out and discharging through a suitable 
discharge pipe H. By this arrangement we 
are enabled to supply fresh exciting liquid 
constantly to the battery and renew it con 
tinuously. The hollow cylinder being rotated, 
yo 
95 
OC) 
521,260 
tive electrode forming connection through 
the shaft of the apparatus. 
2. In a battery, an exterior tank for con 
taining an exciting liquid, a positive electri 
cal element of the battery submerged therein, 
a shaft extending across the containing tank 
and turning in journal-boxes thereon, and a 
cylinder composed of perforated sides and 
rim, and adapted to contain a pulverized ele 
ment which acts as a negative in the battery, 
substantially as herein described. 
3. In a battery, an exterior containing tank 
for the exciting liquid, a positive element of 
the battery consisting of a rectangular plate 
supported within the tank and insulated from 
the negative element of the battery, a shaft 
journaled across the tank and rotatable 
thereon, a cylinder composed of perforated 
sides and rim secured to said shaft, openings 
made through the sides of said cylinder and 
carbon blocks fixed in said openings within 
the ends projecting upon each side of the 
cylinder, so that the constant rotation of the 
cylinder alternately submerges and removes 
the periphery of the same and the carbon 
blocks from the exciting liquid, substantially 
as herein described. 
4. A battery consisting of an exterior con 
taining tank, a positive element suspended 
therein and insulated therefrom, a negative 
element consisting of a hollow cylinder with 
perforated sides journaled and revoluble 
within the containing tank and having a fill 
ing of negative material, a supplypipe through 
which the sea water or exciting liquid is in 
troduced near the bottom of the containing 
tank, and a discharge pipe having an open 
ing below the level of the supply whereby a 
constant circulation is maintained. 
In witness whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands. 
So 
Go 
7 o 
75 
85 
FRED, DUBERO. 
PETER. MOIRIDIECIK. 
Witnesses: 
S. II. NOURSE, 
II. F. ASCHECK. 
as previously described at a very slow rate, a 
portion of it will always be submerged in the 
liquid and another portion will be constantly 
exposed to the air where it and the contents 
will be partially dried and will absorb a cer 
tain amount of oxygen from the atmosphere 
which remains therein when it is again 
plunged beneath the surface of the exciting 
liquid. In order to couple the batteries of 
this sort together the shafts C, of any number 
of these batteries, may be united by coup 
lings, as shown at I, it being necessary when 
uniting these batteries in series to introduce 
a non-conducting plate of hard rubber or other 
Substance J into the couplings so as to pre 
vent actual contact of the shaft sections. The 
outer case and the hollow cylinder which form 
a negative element of each section of a cou 
pled battery will be connected with the posi 
tive element of the next succeeding battery, 
and so on to any extent which may be desired, 
by the usual couplings. 
The connection with the positive element 
of the battery is made by means of a binding 
screw Phaving a metallic rod or wire extend 
ing through it to form contact between the 
elements B and the conductor fixed to the 
binding post. The connection with the nega 
tive element is made through the shaft C 
upon which the cylinder is mounted by 
means of a binding screw N fixed to the cas 
ing, with a similar wire connecting it with 
the shaft, and through it with the negative 
element. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a sea water battery consisting of a con 
taining tank, an interior positive element sus 
pended within said tank having a binding 
post or connection for the positive wire, a 
negative element consisting of a revoluble 
hollow cylinder with a filling or negative ma 
terial and perforations through which the ex 
citing liquid may reach the material when 
submerged and be drained from it when 
raised out, and a binding post for the nega 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521360.txt	(No Model.) 
A. BECHMANN. 
EDUCATIONAL APPLIANCE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 521,360. 
Patented June 12, 1894. 
6-23.3-a- 
7%. -422/-zeez 
WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
A BECHMANN. 
EDUCATIONAL APPLANCE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 521,360, 
Patented June 12, 1894, 
 
/ 
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 
M2 M/ /2 M 
M 
a eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 
a as a sea leavesses a 
zeeeeeeeeeeeeeezz 
a loselesses corolaeses a 
elee also see-eeeeeee 
releazareleases are z 
eeleraeoloeeeeeeeeeee 
earles re-eleases 
eleaseolaeoeoeeeeeee 
vae overseezeweesaw 
earles seeze see eeeeee 
 
 
7zzzesses. 
Zzzeezzzzra 
a 
w 
(7. 2,-73 w 
aw 0471-- 
HE National ITHogarhire coran 
wAsiinson, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERTINA BECHMANN, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
EDUCATIONAL APPLAN CE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,360, dated June 12, 1894. 
Application filed December 28 1893, Serial No. 494,981, (No model.) 
To att, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERTINA BECHMANN, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Cincinnati, in the county of Hamil 
ton and State of Ohio, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Educational 
Appliances, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
educational appliances. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
a means whereby the addition, subtraction, 
multiplication and division of numbers may 
be easily and readily learned by a child with 
Out the aid of a teacher and in a manner to 
firmly impress the lesson upon the mind. 
The invention consists in the construction, 
Combination and arrangement of parts here 
inafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my complete device. Fig.2 is a cross 
Section on line 2-2 Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an en 
larged view of one of the marbles. Fig. 4 is 
an enlarged plan view of a table carried by a 
roller. 
A, designates a stand or board preferably 
of the form shown, mounted on legs a, in such 
manner that it will be slightly inclined from 
the front to the rear. In the top of the stand 
Aareformed alongitudinally arranged groove 
or way a? and a series of receptacles a ar 
ranged in rows and adapted to hold a num 
ber of balls or marbles B, each carrying on 
its surface a different problem in addition, sub 
traction, multiplication or division. Span 
ning the groove a' is a series of graduated 
arches C preferably twelve in number. The 
first arch is the largest and is mounted at the 
front of the stand, the remaining ones de 
creasing in size toward the rear. 
D is an indicator, carrying on its face a se 
ries of rows of figures as, for instance, those 
shown in Fig. 4. These figures designate the 
answers to the problems carried by the mar 
bles and are so placed on the indicator that 
the correct answer to any problem Will ap 
pear opposite the arch designed to arrest the 
marble. 
The indicator D is preferably of roll form 
and mounted in or under a slot a in the stand 
and parallel to the arches, but any indicator 
55 
which can be arranged to display the desired 
series of figures will serve the purpose. 
The first row of receptacles a contains the 
marbles carrying problems in addition. The 
first receptacle is marked 1- and the mar 
bles contained therein are each marked with 
a different problem from 1--1 to 1-1-9. The 
second receptacle is marked 2- and the 
marbles contained therein are each marked 
with a different problem from 2-1-1 to 2--8 
and so on up to the ninth receptacle which 
contains only the problem 9-1-1. Each mar 
ble is of a different size, the greater the sum 
the larger the marble. 
To ascertain the answer to the first prob 
lem, 1--1, the roller is first turned until the 
column of figures appears with the -- sign at 
the top. The marble having 1-1 marked 
thereon (which is the smallest marble in the 
receptacle) is placed in the groove a? the in 
clination of the stand causing it to roll until 
it is stopped by an arch, too small for it to 
pass under, and situated opposite the answer 
appearing on the indicator. 
The second row of receptacles contains the 
marbles carrying the problems in subtraction, 
from 1-0 to 10-9. The first receptacle of 
this series, being marked 1-, will contain 
two marbles with the problems 1-0 and 1-1 
while the tenth receptacle will contain ten 
marbles varying in size with the problems 
10-9 down to 10-0. The answers are aScer 
tained in the same manner as above described. 
When the answer is 0 the marble carrying 
the problem will pass underall the arches and 
drop into a receptacle a' at the end of the 
groove. 
The third row of receptacles contains the 
marbles carrying the problems of the multi 
plication tables from 1 to 12. In the first re 
ceptacle of this series the marbles are marked 
with the table of one, up to twelve, the sec 
ond with the table of two, &c. If itis desired 
to learn the table of five, the indicator is 95 
turned until the results in the table of five 
appear, the column being designated by the 
sign X5 at the top of the roll. To multiply 
nine by five the marble in the fifth recepta 
cle marked 9X5 is placed in the slot and al- Ico 
lowed to roll until stopped by an arch too 
small for it to pass under, the arch being op 
go 
75 
O 
I 5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
521,360 
same answers, an indicator adapted to regis 
ter with the arches and carrying a table of 
figures arranged to bring the results of the 
mathematical tables in series correspoliding 
with the arches, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
3. The combination of a stand, a series of 
graduated balls each carrying a mathemati 
cal problem, a series of arches each adapted 
to engage the balls carrying the problems re 
quiring the same answer, and an indicator 
adapted to register with the arches, substan 
tiaily as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination of a stand, a series of 
balls each carrying a mathematical problem, 
a series of graduated arches each adapted to 
engage with the balls carrying the problems 
requiring the same answer, and an indicator 
adapted to register with the arches, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
5. The combination of a stand, a series of 
graduated balls each carrying a mathemati 
cal problem, a series of graduated arches each 
adapted to engage the balls carrying the prob 
lems requiring the same answer, and an in 
dicator adapted to register with the arches, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
AILBERTINA BECHMANN. 
Witnesses: 
ELLA. WALSH, 
JAMES N. RAMSEY. 
35 
45 
5.o. 
55 
O 
15 
posite the answer on the indicator, as illus 
trated in the drawings. 
The problems in division are marked on 
the marbles contained in the bottom row of 
receptacles and consist of all the problems in 
division, between 2--2 and 144-12, whose 
quotient will be between the numbers 1 and 
12. In the first receptacle the divisors will 
be equal to the dividends; while the divisors 
in the twelfth receptacle will be one twelfth 
of the dividend. 
The number of arches and the number of 
tables may be increased if desired, but I have 
only deemed it necessary to show a device of 
the size described to properly illustrate my 
invention. 
In the addition and subtraction of numbers 
from one to ten the first two arches may be 
removed to prevent confusion. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of a stand, a series of 
balls each carrying a mathematical problem, 
a series of arches each adapted to engage the 
balls carrying the problems requiring the 
same answers, and an indicator adapted to 
register with the arches, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination of a stand, a series of 
balls each carrying a mathematical problem, 
a series of arches each adapted to engage the 
balls carrying the problems requiring the 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521460.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 521460, 
S. ELLIOTT. 
SULKY, 
Patented June 19, 1894. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STERLING ELLIOTT, OF NEWTON, ASSIGNOR TO THE HICKORY WHEEL 
COMPANY, OF SOUTH FRAMINGHAM, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SU KY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,460, dated June 19, 1894. 
Application filed December 16, 1892, Serial No. 455,329, (No model.) 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STERLINGELLIOTT, of 
Newton, county of Middlesex, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Sulkies, of which the following description, in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
is a specification, like letters and figures on 
the drawings representing like parts. 
In Sulkies as now commonly made the shafts 
have been composed each of a single long 
slender bar, and as the frontends thereof are 
repeatedly and quickly raised by the horse in 
trotting, the said shafts spring or vibrate, 
thereby unduly vibrating the load, and hav 
ing a tendency to disturb the even gait of the 
horse, and also to disturb the driver. It has 
also been the aim to place the seat directly 
above the axle so that the weight of the rider 
will be balanced as nearly as possible, and as 
the sulky is vibrated the rider is moved from 
one to the other side of a point in a vertical 
plane with the axle. The seat, so arranged, 
therefore enhances the tendency of the shafts 
to Spring and increases the vibration of the 
sulky, because when the preponderance of 
the weight of the rider is thrown to the rear 
of the axle, gravity cannot restore it to its 
normal position. The stirrups or foot rests 
have been arranged on the inside of the hori 
Zontal shafts, while the seat has been sup 
ported in a plane but little above the shafts 
so that the legs of the driver have been brought 
into nearly horizontal position, and when 
driving he usually bends forward, thereby as 
suming a most unnatural position, which it 
has been found in practice is conducive to 
'many permanent physical injuries. 
This invention has for its object to so im 
prove the construction of sulkies that these 
serious objections may be overcome, and at 
the same time reduce its weight. 
In carrying out this invention the shafts 
have been made as divided shafts, that is di 
vided from a point at or near where the back 
strap is attached, and extending rearwardly 
as two essential parts, and suitable struts or 
supports are interposed between said divided 
portions, to give additional stiffness, and form 
a truss like frame. The upper part or bar of 
the divided portion of the shaft occupies sub 
stantially a horizontal plane, and is connected 
55 
at the rear to the top of the wheel Supporting 
cross-bar or frame, while the lower part or 
bar is connected to said frame at a point near 
the ground. To give as wide a divergence as 
possible to said divided portions of the shafts, 
and furnish a suitable support to which the 
rear ends of the lower parts may be connected 
as well as for many other reasons, the wheels 
are made quite small in diameter, and turn 
on short axles supported at the lower ends on 
arms or forks which depend from the axle or 
frame. 
The seat is located at such a point as to 
bring the preponderance of the weight of the 
rider continuously in front of the axle, so 
that as the sulky vibrates on the axles as piv 
ots, his weight is moved from a point in ad 
vance of a vertical plane with said axles to 
a point substantially in said vertical plane, 7c. 
thereby depending upori gravity to restore 
the weight. 
The stirrups or foot rests are arranged be 
low the horizontal portions of the shafts, so 
that the legs of the rider may assume a more 75 
natural position. 
of braces are provided which will be herein- ". 
after described. 
Figure 1, shows in side elevation a sulky 8 o 
embodying this invention; Fig. 2, a rear side 
view of the sulky shown in Fig. 1, and Fig. 
3, a plan view of the sulky shown in Fig. 1. 
The cross-bar or frame a, which is or may 
be curved in any usual way, is provided at 85 
each end with depending arms a', or in lieu 
of such arms, suitable forks may be employed, 
and the short axles or journals of the small 
wheels a are supported at the lower extremi 
ties of said arms. 
As distinguished from that class of sulkies 
in which is employed a duplicate or double 
set of shafts, one arranged within the other, 
approximately in the same horizontal plane 
or position, as well as that class of sulkies in 95 
which the usual form of shafts is employed, 
together with braces extending from beneath 
the shafts at a suitable point forwardly of 
the wheels, and thence backwardly to the 
wheel supports, the shafts of the present in 
vention differ in the respect of their being 
divided at points at or near to the forward 
Many details of construction in the form 
9 O 
IOO 
 
521,460 
go 
75 
o 
ends thereof, say for instance, at the point 2, 
about where the back strap is attached. The 
shafts are made alike and are constructed 
or formed preferably from a single piece 
of Wood or other suitable material, possess 
ing practically the same uniform thickness 
throughout, but the divisions of the shafts 
are made so that after the shafts are divided 
into the upper and lower portions b, and b', a 
forwardly projecting end will remain undi. 
yided, substantially as appears in the draw 
lilgS. 
The two divided portions of the shafts oc 
cupy Substantially the same vertical planes, 
the lower divided portion b being practically 
directly beneath the upper divided portion 
b, the said upper portions b, extending rear 
Wardly and being curved as desired, and at 
tached to the cross-bar or frame a at 3, and 
the lower portions l' also extending rear 
Wardly and having their rearward extremi 
ties attached to the lower ends of the de 
pending wheel Supporting arms a'. The lower 
divided portion b' of each arm is split at a 
suitable distance from its rearward end to 
form two side arms b, b, which constitute 
practically a fork receiving the wheel, there 
by Securing a simple and effective form of at 
tachment as well as a guard for each of the 
wheels. Instead of dividing the rearward ex 
tremities of the lower portions l', the said 
portions b' may be made continuous, and at 
tached at their lower extremities to the lower 
end of either the inside or outside depending 
arms, but I prefer to provide such arms l', as 
I thereby obtain an extra stiffness to the 
frame, as Well as a strong and permanent 
guard for the wheels. In the event of dis 
pensing with the said arms b, and forming 
the lower divided portion b' of a continuous 
piece, a divided shaft within the spirit and 
scope of this invention is provided. 
The shafts are preferably constructed from 
a single piece, but it is apparent that the same 
could also be made of separate pieces bolted 
or otherwise secured together. 
Struts or Supports c, c' are interposed be 
tween the upper and lower portions of the di 
vided shafts, connecting them together, and 
braces care provided, one end of which is 
connected to the upper divided portion of the 
shafts, and their opposite ends being con 
nected to the extremities of the cross-bar or 
frame, thereby giving to the shafts additional 
stiffness and rigidity, like a truss, 
The arms l', b, which constitute the forked 
guard, as hereinbefore explained, are prefer 
ably connected together by short cross-pieces 
or bars b, which are brought in front of the 
wheels, and suitable curved bars care con 
nected at their upper ends to the ends of the 
cross-bar or frame, while the lower ends there 
of are connected to said short connecting 
bars b. 
From the construction thus far explained, 
it will be seen that the rearward extremities 
of the upper portions of the shafts extend back 
wardly and are suitably secured to the cross 
bar or frame, while the rearward extremities 
of the lower divided portions extend back and 
are attached or secured to the lower ends of 
one or the other of the depending wheel-Sup 
porting arms, thereby obtaining a construct 
tion differing essentially from this class of 
sulkies as heretofore constructed. 
Instead of attaching the rearward extremi 
ties of the lower divided portions of the shafts 
to the lower ends of the depending arms, I 
may in some instances, construct such rear 
wardly extending extremities so as to receive 
the short axies or spindles upon which the 
wheels are directly supported, but preferably 
I resort to the arrangement herein shown. 
The stirrups or foot rests are formed on the 
struts c, being herein represented as formed 
by curving said struts outwardly, and pro 
viding additional struts c, curved in the op 
posite direction, and connected at the ends to 
the upper and lower divided portions, and in 
terposing cross-bar c between and connect 
ing said struts c, c'. This construction en 
ables the stirrups or foot rests to be arranged 
below the horizontal portions of the shafts So 
that the legs of the rider may assume a more 
natural position. 
A curved connecting rod or bar d is inter 
posed between and connects the horizontal 
portions b of the shafts as usual, while the 
rear ends of said portions bare connected by 
the connecting bar d", curved in the opposite 
direction, crossing and resting upon the axle 
or frame and connected thereto by bolts or 
otherwise, and also connected to the connect 
ing bard. By making this connecting bard 
in the form shown additional supports are 
provided, and therefore additional stiffness 
given to the connected parts. 
The seat e is supported by suitable props 
e' in the usual way, but asbest shown in Fig. 
1, is located so that the preponderance of the 
weight of the rider is always in front of the 
point in a vertical plane passing through the 
axles of the wheels. 
The whiffle-tree is pivoted in a suitable 
support rising from the connected bars d, d. 
I do not desire to limit myself to the par 
ticular shape or construction of parts, as it is 
obvious that the shafts may be divided in 
different ways and provided with intermedi 
ate struts, and also that the stirrups or foot 
rests may be arranged below the shafts in 
different ways. 
By providing the small wheels as shown 
good and sufficient connecting points are pro 
vided for the arms b, b, of the lower divided 
portion of the shafts, to thereby permit the 
introduction of struts or supports of suitable 
length to give great stiffness to the shafts, 
and furthermore the pivotal points on which 
the sulky vibrates are brought nearer the 
ground. 
The shafts constructed in this way or in 
95 
Oc 
I o5 
O 
II 5 
25 
130 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
521,460 
O 
25 
35 
45 
- 
any equivalent way cannot spring, yet in 
practice I find that the sulky can be made 
even lighter than when constructed in the 
usual way. 
I claim- 
1. A sulky, each shaft of which is in a plane 
above the top of the wheels, and is a single 
bar at the forward end, and is split or divided 
back of said end, one portion extending hori 
Zontally to the seat and support, and the other 
extending at an angle to the first and down 
Ward to the axle, substantially as set forth. 
2. A sulky provided with shafts each of 
which is a single bar at the forward end and 
divided toward the back end, the upper por 
tion extending to the seat frame, the lower 
portion to the axle, and the two portions be 
ing braced to form one rigid structure, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. A sulky provided with a pair of divided 
shafts, each shaft constructed of a single 
piece split or divided at a suitable point from 
the forward end thereof, and arms projecting 
from the lower divided portions of said shafts 
So as to embrace the wheels, substantially as 
described. 
4. A sulky provided with a pair of divided 
shafts consisting of upper and lower portions 
the former of which extend back to the frame 
of the sulky, occupying a plane above the 
tops of the wheels, and the latter extending 
back to the wheel supports, and braces con 
necting said upper and lower portions to form 
a rigid structure, substantially as described. 
5. A sulky provided with a pair of divided 
shafts, each constructed of a single piece split 
or divided at a suitable point from the for 
ward end thereof, the lower divided portions 
of which being provided with projecting arms, 
and struts or supports connecting the upper 
and lower divided portions of said shafts, and 
connections between said projecting arms 
and the lower divided portions, substantially 
as described. 
6. In a sulky, the combination of a cross 
bar or frame, having at its ends depending 
wheel-supporting arms or forks, and a pair 
of divided shafts each constructed of a single 
piece, and consisting of an upper and lower 
portion, the rear ends of the said upper por 
tions being connected with the body of the 
CrOSS-bar or frame, and the rear ends of the 
lower divided portions being connected to the 
lower ends of said wheel-supporting arms, 
substantially as described. 
7. In a sulky, the combination of the frame, 
seat, wheel-supporting frame having at each 
end a wheel support, and wheel, and shafts, 
each shaft having an upper portion on a plane 
above the wheels and below the seat, and a 
lower portion which is split to form a fork re 
ceiving the wheel, the ends of said split por 
tion being attached adjacent to the lower ends 
of the wheel supports, substantially as set 
forth. 
8. In a sulky, the combination of a cross 
bar or frame having at its ends depending 
wheel-supporting arms or forks, and a pair 
of divided shafts, the lower divided portions 
of which are provided with projecting arms, 
and the rear ends of the upper divided por 
tions being connected to the body of the cross 
bar or frame, and the rear ends of the lower 
divided portions, together with said project 
ing arms, constituting forked braces which 
are connected to the lower ends of the Wheel 
supporting arms, substantially as described. 
9. In a sulky, the combination of a cross 
bar or frame having at its ends depending 
wheel-supporting arms or forks, and a pair of 
divided shafts, the rear ends of the upper 
portions of which being connected to the cross 
bar or frame, and the rear cnds of the lower 
divided portions of which being connected to 
the lower ends of said wheel-supporting arms, 
and braces connecting the said lower divided 
portions with the cross-bar or frame, substan 
tially as described. 
10. In a sulky, the combination of a cross 
bar or frame having at its ends depending 
wheel-supporting arms or forks, and a pair of 
divided shafts the rear ends of the upper di 
vided portions of which are connected with 
the cross-bar or frame, and the rear ends of 
the lower divided portions of which are con 
nected to the lower ends of said wheel-Sup; 
porting arms, and braces connecting the Said 
lower divided portions with the cross-bar or 
frame, and braces connecting the said upper 
divided portions with said cross-bar or frame, 
substantially as described. 
11. In a sulky, the combination of a cross 
bar or frame having at its ends wheel-sup 
porting arms, a pair of divided shafts, the 
lower divided portions of which are provided 
with projecting arms, and with said arms con 
nected to the lower ends of the wheel-sup 
porting arms, short connecting bars connect 
ing the said projecting arms and lower di 
vided portions, and braces connecting the 
said short connecting bars, with the cross-bar 
or frame, substantially as described. 
12. In a sulky, the combination of a wheel 
supporting frame, wheels thereon, a seat lo 
cated above the tops of the wheels, a pair of 
divided shafts, the upper portions of which 
extend rearwardly in substantially a horizon 
tal plane to the wheel supporting frame, and 
the lower portions of which extend at an an 
gle with relation to the upper portions and 
are connected with the wheel-supports at their 
lower ends, braces interposed between and 
connecting said upper and lower portions of 
the shafts, and cross pieces connected between 
said braces to form foot rests, substantially 
as described. 
13. In a sulky, a rigid frame constructed 
and arranged to support a seat and a pair of 
wheels, with the seat in elevation above the 
tops of said wheels, and a pair of shafts, each 
comprising a substantially horizontal upper 
portion, and a lower portion arranged at an 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
4. 
521,460 
angle with relation thereto, the rear extremi name to this specification in the presence of 
ties of said portions being connected to said two subscribing witnesses. 
frame at suitable points whereby the frame 
Serves as a rigid connection between said up- 
5 per and lower portions, substantially as de- 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
BERNICE. J. No YES, 
LUCY F. GRAVES. 
Witnesses: 
STERLING ELLIOTT. 
r 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521561.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 521,561. 
 
W. F. WOLFE. 
WENTILATOR, 
Patented June 19, 1894, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILTSIE. F. WOLFE, OF NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
VENTILATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,561, dated June 19, 1894. 
Application filed August 10, 1893, Serial No. 482,862, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILTSIE. F. WoLFE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in New 
ton, in the county of Middlesex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Ventilators, of which 
the following, taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of venti 
lating flues in which a burner or jet is used 
for creating a draft to effect the ventilation. 
It consists of a simple and economical con 
struction of radiator to be used in connection 
with the burner whereby a small flame may 
be employed, a large amount of the heat 
evolved utilized, a large extent of heated sur 
face obtained to cause the draft and the least 
resistance possible offered thereto by the ra 
diator, substantially as herein described and 
particularly claimed. 
In the drawings referred to, Figure 1 is a 
view in elevation of a part of a ventilating 
flue, showing the entrance to the same and 
the slide for closing said entrance. Fig. 2 is 
a sectional view on the lineX,X, Fig.1, show 
ing the device in position, and Fig. 3 is an 
isometrical view of the device. 
In the several figures, like numerals refer 
to like parts. 
Referring to the drawings, 11 are the walls 
of the fue. 
2 is the radiator, which consists of a tube 
or chimney open at both ends and preferably 
of metal, as, for example, sheet copper, and 
fitted to set over, and receive the heat from a 
suitable flame, as, for example, a gas jet or 
lamp. Suitably attached to this tube or chim 
ney are two plates intersecting each other at 
the longitudinal axis of the tube forming 
wings-3- and preferably composed of the 
same material as the tube; the tube and Wings 
being thus arranged in vertical planes so as 
to offer the least resistance possible to the 
draft. 
4 is a slide by means of which the entrance 
-10- to the flue -9- may be partly or 
wholly closed, thus regulating the amount of 
air passing into the flue. 
5 is a grating which may be placed over the 
opening to the flue if desired, in order to pre 
vent papers and other articles from being 
drawn into the flue with the current of air. 
6 is a knob moving in the slot-7- and at 
o 
25 
35 
45 
1 tached to the slide -4- for regulating the 
position of the slide. 
55 
11 is a pipe for supplying gas. 
12 is an opening in the chimney for con 
venience in lighting the flame, and 13 is a 
slide for closing this opening. 
The operation of my invention is as fol 
lows:- The tube or chimney -2- being 
placed in position to receive the heat from a 
lighted gas jet or other suitable flame the 
flame will heat the chimney and the heated 
products of combustion will strike against 
and heat the parts of the plates or wings 
within the tube and thereby more completely 
utilize the heat given off by the flame. These 
parts of the wings will also retard the pas 
sage of the gases and thus retain the heat 
within the tube and about the inner edges of 
the plates. In this Way a much largerheated 
surface is presented to the action of the air 
and the least resistance to the movement of 
the air is offered, and consequently a greater 
amount of air is heated and a stronger draft 
created in the flue than would otherwise be 
possible, thus affording means for removing 
a large amount of air in a given time with a 
small flame from the apartment to be ven- 8o 
tilated. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States, is 
having a burner therein, of a vertically ar 
ranged tube 2 over said burner open at both 
ends and having Wings 3 lying in vertical 
planes and extending on the inside of and 
within the tube, substantially as shown and go 
described. 
2. The herein described radiator for venti 
lating flues comprising tube 2 open at both 
ends, and Wings 3 secured to said tube ar 
ranged in planes parallel or co-incident with 
the longitudinal axis of the tube and extend 
ing on the outside of and within the tube, 
substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 8th day of August, A. roo 
D. 1893. 
1. The combination with a ventilating flue 85 
95 
75 
WILTSIE. F. WOLFE. 
Witnesses: 
G. D. ROBERTSON, 
CHAS. A. KELLOGG. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521662.txt	(No Model.) 
B. H. MONNE USE. 
MUSICAL INSTRUMENT, 
No. 521,662. 
Patented June 19, 1894. 
 
-N3. 
O) 
R 
O) 
O) 
O) 
O) 
O) 
N 
O) 
O) 
 
/WWEAVTOR 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BERNHARD H. MONNEUSE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
MUSICAL INSTRUMENT 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,662, dated June 19, 1894. 
Application filed April 19, 1894. Serial No. 508,156, (No model.) 
To all, whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, BERNHARD H. MON 
NEUSE, of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Musical Instru 
ments, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvement 
in musical instruments, and especially to that 
class of instruments which are played upon 
by means of hammers or their equivalents, 
and the object of the invention is to provide 
a tubephone, or an instrument which is made 
up of a series of tubes, the tubes being ar 
ranged in such order that when struck by a 
hammer or its equivalent the scale may be 
played thereon in whatever key the tubes 
have been tuned to, or any piece of music 
written in such key. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a means whereby such tubes may be 
suspended in a frame in an exceedingly sim 
ple, durable and economic manner, and 
whereby should the support of a tube become 
accidentally broken or worn, the said sup 
port may be replaced by any one of ordinary 
intelligence. 
The invention consists in the novel construc 
tion and combination of the several parts, as 
will be hereinafter fully set forth and pointed 
out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the improved 
musical instrument, a portion of one side be 
ing broken away to illustrate the support for 
the tubes. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the in 
strument; and Fig. 8 is a longitudinal section 
taken practically on the line 3-3 of Fig. 1. 
In carrying out the invention a frame A, 
is employed to receive the tubes. This frame 
is usually made to taper in direction of one 
end, and comprises a bottom 10 and sides 11. 
The frame may be made of metal, wood, or 
any desired material, and each side 11 is pro 
vided with a cap strip 11 which extends 
along its upper face preferably from end to 
end; and the said cap strip may be provided 
with a groove extending longitudinally in its 
under face, or the groove may be produced 
in the upper edge of the side of the frame. 
In Fig. 3 the groove is designated as 14, and 
is illustrated as produced in the top of the 
sides of the frame. Thus it will be observed 
that each side of a frame is virtually made 
in two sections, the body section 11 and the 
cap section 11. The body section of each 
side of the frame is provided with a series of 
longitudinally arranged openings 12, prefer 
ably of a circular character, said openings 
being so located that they will extend through 
the upper edge of the body of each side to a 
predetermined extent. The tubes 13, which 
are graduated in length in order that they 
shall produce a proper tone, are preferably 
made of brass, although they may be made 
of any metal that in practice may be found 
desirable. These tubes are made to extend 
through transversely aligning openings 12, 
and are held in place, or are held suspended 
in Said openings in such manner as not to 
come in contact with the walls, by means of 
threads or cords 15 of any desired material, 
One thread or cord being employed in con. 
nection with each side of the frame; and in 
the manipulation of these supporting threads 
or cords one end of a cord is secured in any 
Suitable or approved manner to one end of 
the body of a side of the frame, and the cord 
is then carried over the top surface of the 
said side body along the groove 14, if pro 
duced in said surface, and is passed around 
the tube located in the nearest opening 12, a 
loop 15" being thereby formed. The cord is 
then passed through the groove to the next 
tube, looped around that one, and thus the 
cord is taken from one tube to another until 
the last tube is reached and supported, where 
upon the cord is then secured to a side of the 
frame and the cap section 11 is placed over 
the cord upon the body section of the side 
treated, and secured in place by means of 
nails, screws or equivalent fastening devices. 
The tubes are then supported in like manner 
at the opposite side of the frame. Under this 
Construction it is obvious that the tubes will 
be suspended in the openings 12 in the frame 
in such manner as not to touch the walls of 
the said openings, and likewise in such man 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
4 O 
45 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
ICC 
 
 
2 
521,662 
ner as not to interfere with the vibratory 
qualities of the tubes. Furthermore, an in 
strument of this character under the above 
construction is rendered exceedingly simple 
and consequently economic, and in the event 
the support for any of the tubes should be 
come broken, any person of ordinary intelli 
gence will be enabled to add a new support 
to the frame. It will be understood that al 
though a continuous cord is preferred for 
holding the tubes at each side of the frame, 
the cords may be made in sections if in prac 
tice it is found desirable, and that instead of 
cords, tapes may be employed for this pur 
Ose although cord is usually preferred. 
The letter of the scale represented by each 
tube is produced upon the upper face of the 
cover strip, opposite the correspondingly 
tuned tube, thus rendering the instrument 
readily understood to even a novice in music. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A musical instrument, the same consist 
ing of a frame, open at the top and provided 
with openings in its sides, tubes constructed 
to produce predetermined sounds when 
struck, and extending through transversely 
opposing openings, and a flexible support 
maintaining said tubes in suspension within 
the openings through which they pass, and 
out of contact with the walls of said open 
ings, as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A musical instrument, the same consist 
ing of a frame having openings produced in 
its sides, tubes constructed to give forth a 
I5 p. 
25 
35 
predetermined tone, passed through aligning 
apertures in the frame, and a cord or tape at 
tached to the frame, passed across the open 
ings therein and looped around the tubes, 4o 
maintaining the tubes in pendent position, 
free from contact with the walls of the open 
ing, substantially as described. 
3. A musical instrument, the same consist 
ing of a frame having openings in its sides, 45 
tubes arranged to produce the tones of a pre 
determined scale and passed through align 
ing apertures in the frame, and flexible hang 
ers secured to the frame, extending within the 
said openings and surrounding and receiving 5o 
the said tubes, and a cap strip whereby the 
hangers are concealed and protected, as and 
for the purpose set forth, the hangers serving 
to hold the tubes out of contact with the walls 
of the said openings, as and for the purpose 55 
set forth. 
4. A musical instrument, the same consist 
ing of a frame having openings in its sides, 
tubes arranged to produce the tones of a pre 
determined scale and passed through align 
ing apertures in the frame, a cord or tape at 
tached to each side of the frame near one end, 
passed over all the openings in a side and 
looped around all of the tubes within said 
openings, and a cap strip covering and con 
cealing the upper portions of the said tapes 
or cords, the said cap strip being removable, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
BERNEIARD H. MONNEUSE. 
Witnesses: 
J. FRED ACKER, 
JNO. M. RITTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521762.txt	(No Model.) , 
MIXED AIR AND STEAM. ENGINE AND GENERATOR. 
E. E. DEPP. 
No. 521762, 
Patented June 19, 1894, 
 
| | | 
 
| | 
| | 
| 
| 
| 
 
R m. 
? 
R T!!!!!!!!!! 
This NATIONAL LiTHoarArhNa company, 
WANTON is 
, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEZEKIAH. E. DEPP, OF SEDALIA, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO OLIVIA M. 
RITCHEY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MXED AR AND STEAM ENGINE AND GENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,762, dated June 19, 1894. 
Application filed October 28, 1893, 
Serial No. 489,425 (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HEZEKIAHE. DEPP, a - 
citizen of the United States, residing at Se 
dalia, in the county of Pettis and State of 
Missouri, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Mixed Air and Steam 
Engines and Generators; and Idohereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
devices for feeding air and water to steam 
boilers, and its objects are, first, to supply 
compressed air and water, having first heated 
them to the temperature of the exhaust from 
the main engine, to the boiler; second, to 
utilize the exhaust steam for such heating, 
and third, to use the live steam on its way to 
the engine to operate the air compressor or 
pump. Iaccomplish these objects by the pecu 
liar construction and combinations of devices 
hereinafter more particularly described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawing forming part 
of this specification, the figure represents a 
side elevation of the devices embodied in my 
invention. 
The live steam pipe a, leading from the 
steam dome of an ordinary horizontal, tubu 
lar boiler, has connection with the engine B 
by a branch pipe b and with the steam chest 
Cof the cylinder D, by pipe b'. The pump 
E is operated by the cylinder D and is pro 
vided with air and water inlets. The pipe e 
leading from said pump E receives and com 
presses air and water and conveys them to 
the boiler into which they are discharged. An 
exhaust pipef connected to the engine dis 
charges into a steam boxF which is provided 
with an ordinary exhaust pipe. The pipe e 
from the air compressor enters this box at 
one end and passes therethrough on its way 
to the boiler, thus the contents of said pipe 
are heated to the temperature of the exhaust 
steam from the main engine and When dis 
charged into the boiler will not cause the 
condensation of the steam as they otherwise 
would. The steam that exhausts from the 
engine will not be equal in temperature 
to the steam in the boiler but the heat 
caused by the compression of the air in the 
air compressor and absorbed by the water 
therein will be sufficient in addition, to raise 
the temperature of the air and water to the 55 
required degree. The piston rod of the cyl 
inder D is connected by a pitman and crank 
to a fly wheel G which in turn actuates an 
eccentric g operating the valve in the chest 
C. An exhaust pipe f' from said cylinder 6o 
communicates, with the supply pipe b of the 
engine, thus conducting the exhaust of said 
cylinder to the engine. A branch pipe J con 
nects this exhaust pipef with the exhaust 
pipef so that, if desirable, the exhaust from 65. 
cylinder D can be turned into the steam box . 
Fby opening cock J, and thus the compressor 
could be operated without the main engine 
when so desired. A governor His mounted 
in the branch pipe b and is connected with 7o 
the shaft of the fly wheel by a belt h and belt 
wheelsh. A cock bis placed in the supply 
pipe of the cylinder D and a cock b in the 
Supply pipe of the engine to regulate the flow 
of steam to each respectively. A cock a' is 75 
also provided to regulate the flow of steam 
from the steam dome into pipe a. The air 
compressor cylinder as before mentioned has 
a suitable Water Supply pipe k so that the 
Water may act as a lubricant to the air cyl- 8o 
inder while under high pressure. This pipe 
has a cock k' which controls the supply. A 
pipe provided with a regulating cocklis con 
nected to the pipe e and discharges into the 
heating space surrounding the boiler, thus 85 
allowing compressed air to be supplied to aid 
combustion if desired. 
For low pressure the air can be compressed 
without water and lubricated with oil, but 
for high pressure water must be used. I pre- 9o, 
fer Water as it helps to supply the boiler with 
The operation of the devices is as follows: 
Live steam passes from the steam dome 
through pipe a. and branch pipes bandb' and 95 
simultaneously starts the air pump and the 
engine. The compression of the air in the 
air pump or compressor causes considerable 
heat which is taken up or absorbed by the 
Water admitted to said pump. This heated roo 
Water and air pass through pipe e which is 
heated by the exhaust steam in the steam 
Water. 
- 
3o 
35 
45 
50 
 
521,762 
box F as before described. The exhaust 
steam from cylinder D passes by pipef' to 
pipe b and thus to the engine B. By this ar 
rangement the steam that is used to operate 
the pump is not wasted, but used again in 
the engine B. The engine though, is not al 
together dependent on the cylinder exhaust 
for its supply of steam as branch pipe b sup 
plies it with steam directly from the boiler, 
but this only when the pump is at rest or 
moving slowly. By placing the governor in 
the pipe b I regulate the supply of steam so 
that when the pump is working its full ca 
pacity the governor will close pipe b and 
cause all the supply for the engine to first 
pass through the cylinder D. It will thus be 
seen that the engine always has the same 
pressure of steam, said steam sometimes pass 
ing through both the pipe b and the cylinder 
D, and sometimes through the pipe alone or 
the cylinder alone according to whether the 
cylinder is in operation or not. 
By my invention a great saving of fuel is 
accomplished as the force used in running 
the air compressor or pump is not lost but is 
returned to the boiler in the shape of highly 
heated and compressed air. It will be seen 
from the foregoing description that the chief 
element used to accomplish the desired sav 
ing of fuel is heated and compressed air. It 
has been proven in practice that air supplied 
in such a way has a very decided advantage 
in preventing condensation of steam. It has 
been also successfully demonstrated that 
aereated steam is much more effective than 
d 
25 
30 
35 
steam alone as it has a much more lively ac 
tion. 
The supply pipe b, which receives the sup 
ply of live steam directly from the boiler and 
also the exhaust from the pump engine, has 
the usual governor B placed therein to gov 
ern the supply of steam and consequently the 
speed of the engine. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The combination with a steam boiler, of 
an engine, steam connection from said en 
gine to said boiler, an air compressor intro 
duced in said connection and discharging 
into the boiler, a steam discharge from said 
compressor to said engine, and a governor 
operated by said compressor and placed in 
the supply pipe of said engine, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination with a steam boiler, of 
an air compressor actuated by and discharg 
ing into the same, an engine, steam connec 
tion between said engine and said compressor 
and between said boiler and engine, a gov 
ernor regulating the supply of steam from 
the boiler to the engine and operated by the 
compressor, and a steam exhaust heating the 
air supplied to the boiler from the compressor, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
HEZEKAI E. DEPP. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
J. E. RITCHEY, 
E. C. MASON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521862.txt	" W. H. McCONNELL & F. A. RAY. 
No. 521,862. 
WENTIATING FAN, 
Patented June 26, 1894. 
3. 
N22.2% 
N2. 
W 
 
 
 
 
s 
S 
8 
S As % 
Al-Hi 
7 
 
arrara 
as 2 See 
sess 
2 
A 
way 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
s 
46%.4-6--> 
2. ' 
6 6.6 ea7. 
SIES 
- 
THE NATIONAL tit-toesrAPHNs company. 
WASHINGTON, o, c. 
s 
Maa. 27anian 
BY 
+ 7 ?tay 
s 
72-azz 1. 
2. 74-6 5 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
W 
WILLIAM H. McCONNELI, OF NELSON VILLE, AND FRANK A. RAY, OF CONGO, 
OHIO. 
VENT LATING FAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,862, dated June 26, 1894. 
Application filed August 24, 1892, Serial No. 443,965, (Model.) 
15 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM. H. MCCON 
NELLOf Nelsonville, in the county of Athens, 
and FRANK A. RAY, of Congo, in the county 
of Perry, State of Ohio, citizens of the United 
States, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Ventilating-Fans, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to the improvement 
of Ventilating fans of that class which are 
adapted for use in mines, buildings, &c. 
The objects of our invention are to provide 
a fan of this class of superior construction 
and arrangement; to so form and construct 
the parts thereof as to decrease the friction 
between the air and fan case and greatly fa 
cilitate the production of a strong draft or 
Suction; to admit of a large volume of air be 
ing propelled thereby with a comparatively 
Small degree of power and to produce other 
improvements which will be more specifically 
pointed out hereinafter. These objects we 
accomplish in the manner illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which - 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of our 
improved fan and case therefor. Fig. 2 is a 
transverse section of the same taken on line 
& ac of Fig. 1 and Fig. 3 is an enlarged sectional 
View through one of the vanes taken on line 
ly y of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a section through the 
fan body at right angles to the sectional line 
of Fig. 1, illustrating only one of the vanes. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
- 
Out the several views. 
C. represents a shaft, the inner end of which 
is provided with any suitable socket or other 
bearing as indicated at b, said bearing being 
supported from a suitable cross-beam or frame 
piece b'. Upon this shafta is rigidly secured 
in any desirable manner, the central sleeve 
or hub c of our improved fan wheel c'. As 
shown in the drawings, the body of this fan 
wheel is preferably formed of one piece of 
sheet or plate metal, said body being divided 
into two vanes which are indicated at d and 
e respectively. Each of the vanes d and e 
which project on opposite sides of the shaft a 
is bent longitudinally as shown, to form a 
double or compound curve as more plainly 
5o indicated in Fig. 3 of the drawings, which 
45 
40 
35 
55 
forms what we shall term for the sake of 
clearness an upper and lower vane Wingfand 
g at the rear and front end of the vane re 
spectively. The rear wing fourves upwardly 
longitudinally of the vane, from a diametri 
cal line d' (shown dotted in Fig. 2) which 
passes through the shaft a, and its rear end 
stands parallel with this line. The front 
wing g curves downwardly longitudinally of 
the vane, from this line d' to the front end 
of the vane and this end is formed on a line 
g' which is oblique to said diametric line d' 
and approximately follows a diametric line 
through shaft d. at another angle. The inner 
edge f' of the rear wing is formed on a straight 
line at right angles with the line d', although 
this edge as well as the outer edge partakes 
of the longitudinal double-curvature of the 
wing as shown in Fig. 3. The outer edge is 
struck on the arc of a circle, as shown in Fig. 
2. The rear wing frises higher above the 
longitudinal center of the vane than the front 
wing g depends below the same. 
e' represents outer edge flanges which pro 
ject upwardly as shown, from the outer edge 
of each of the vanes, said flanges being of 
uniform height and thus corresponding with 
the curves of said Vanes. 
h represents the fan case which as shown 
in the drawings, consists of a central vertical 
tubular portion h within which said fan is 
adapted to rotate, and upper and lower flar 
ing end portions handhi. The upper por 
tion of the shaft a is provided with a journal 
bearing which may be formed in a cross 
piece i at the upper end of the casing. Said 
shaft may also be provided with a suitable 
driving wheel indicated at . The case h 
may have its base supported upon the Cross 
beam b' or otherwise supported or suspended 
by suitable frame-Work. 
From the construction herein shown and 
described, it will be seen that when rotated, 
the forward downwardly pointed portions g 
of the fan vanes will in conjunction with the 
side flanges thereof, tend to produce a cen 
tripetal movement of the air caught by the 
wanes instead of the usual centrifugal move 
ment by fans of this class. By this means 
it will be seen that the friction between the loo 
9o 
75 
95 
 
2 
521,862 
35 
the curvature of the vane, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. In a ventilating fan, the combination 
with a cylindrical casing, and a rotating shaft 
concentric therein; of a fan body secured to 
said shaft and comprising two oppositely dis 
posed vanes, each having its body formed into 
a double or compound curve throughout its 
length in its direction of movement, thus pro 
ducing rear and front wings, the rear wing 
rising higher above the longitudinal center of 
the vane than said front wing depends there 
from, substantially as described. 
4. In a ventilating fan, the combination 
with a cylindrical casing, and a rotating shaft 
concentric therein; of a fan body secured to . 
said shaft and comprising two oppositely dis 
posed vanes, each having its body formed into 
a double or compound curve throughout its 
length in the direction of its movement, thus 
producing rear and front wings respectively 
rising above and depending below the central 
line of the vane, the rear end of the rear wing 
being parallel with said line, and the front 
end of the front wing being oblique to said 
line and approximately diametric with the 
central shaft, substantially as described. 
WILLIAM II. MCCONNELL, 
FRANK A. RAY. 
In presence of 
H. B. IIINMAN, 
ASHER BUCKLEY. 
45 
55 
moving air current and the inner walls of the 
case will be greatly reduced and that by thus 
Creating a reduction in friction and conse 
Quently in resistance, a great reduction in the 
power required to operate said fan is attained. 
It will also be observed that the double 
Curved or compound form of the vanes will 
result in a lifting or direct forcing of the air 
through the case rather than in the outward 
motion of said air current against the case. 
Having now fully described our invention, 
what we claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a ventilating fan, the combination 
With a cylindrical casing, and a rotating shaft 
concentric therein; of a fan body secured to 
Said shaft and comprising two oppositely dis 
posed Vanes, each having its outer edge struck 
on the arc of a circle smaller than said cas 
ing, and its body formed into a double or com 
pound curve on a line approximately parallel 
With said outer edge, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. In a ventilating fan, the combination 
With a cylindrical casing, and a rotating shaft 
concentric therein; of a fan body secured to 
said shaft and comprising two oppositely dis 
posed vanes, each having its outer edge struck 
on the are of a circle smaller than said cas 
ing and its body formed into a double or com 
pound curve on a line approximately parallel 
With said outer edge and a flange rising from 
each of said outer edges and conforming with 
O 
5 
25 
30 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US521962.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 521,962, 
2 HP 
  
 
 
C. W. NASON, 
STEAM TRAP, 
Patented June 26, 1894. 
23 
Nes z7. N SS 
 
2 
2 
N42s 42 
62. 
2x 
J/ 
HMix 
2. 2H22N %2SE 22 
2 % 
S SF Parar Azazi, 
222 
NHN 
N 
3. 
NE 
UNS 
- 
Hists' 74 
H3. 
3 
LUE, re- 
to 2.2 
%SHS 
  
 
3, 
33-31 
2SER2 
III 
esses %FES3 
, 
F. - E 3. 
- - 
- - - 
 
 
 
  
 
-- - - - 
ck 
y 
- 
- 
- - 
-- 
-- 
A 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
l 
 
  
ns-E NS N 
 
28twcocco 
(444, 
o 
G 2. 
-- 
3v-uov to 
evleton.90.8 as ov, 
334 elitovney:gall- $attiate 
Na ceMPANY.,' 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARLETON W. NASON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STEAMTRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 521,962, dated June 26, 1894. 
Application filed February 19, 1894, Serial No. 500,666 (No model) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARLETON W. NASON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State 
of New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Steam-Traps, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
steam trap which shall be positive.in its op 
eration, and which will be less liable to leak 
than are steam traps as now constructed; and 
the especial aim of my invention is to im 
prove the construction of steam trap shown 
in the patent to David Saunders, No. 72,088, 
granted December 10, 1867. 
To these ends, my invention consists of the 
parts and combinations of parts, as hereinaf 
ter described, and more particularly pointed 
R in the claims at the end of this specifica 
O. . 
The accompanying drawing shows a cen 
tral transverse section of a steam trap con 
structed according to my invention. 
Referring to the drawing and in detail, A 
designates the casing of the trap. 
B designates the main cover, and C desig 
nates an additional or supplemental cover. 
The casing A is provided with an inlet 10, 
which connects with a passage 11 formed in 
the cover B, and the steam and water passing 
through the passage 11 enter the steam trap 
through the orifice 12. The passage 11 also 
connects with a chamber 13 formed in the 
Supplemental cover C. The chamber 13 con 
nects by a passage 14 with the chamber 22 of 
the cover B. The passage 14isprovided with 
a valve-seat 15, which co-operates with a nor 
mally closed valve 16 carried by a valve-stem 
17, the valve-stem being provided with a suit 
able hand-wheel as 18. The valve-stem 17 is 
threaded into a suitable stuffing box19, which 
is threaded into the supplemental cover C, 
and carries a suitable packing ring 20, which 
is secured in place by a threaded cover 21. 
The chamber 22 connects with a passage 23 
formed in the supplemental cover C, and the 
passage 23 connects with the passage 24 
formed in the cover B, the passage 24 being 
connected with the outlet passage 25, which 
is formed in the trap casing. Whenever it is 
desired to clear out the passages through the 
steam trap, the valve 16 may be opened, and 
25 
30 
35 
- 
the steam and water may be allowed to pass 
from the chamber 13 through the outlet pas 
sages, as described, and will effectively blow 
out or clear the same. 
26 designates a central pipe or guide, which 
is provided with a shoulder 27, and is threaded 
into the walls of the chamber 22 as at 28, and 
carries at its upper end a threaded cover 282 
carrying a threaded valve-seat 281. 
29 designates a float, which may be made 
of sheet metal and is preferably provided with 
a lug or enlargement 30 near its center. 
Threaded into the lug 30 is a pipe or guide 31, 
which is provided with inlet openings 32. 
The parts so far described are somewhat 
similar to the parts shown in the patent to 
Saunders, No. 72,088, above referred to, but 
instead of having the valve of the steam trap 
carried directly by the pipe 31, I preferably 
employ a system of levers, which are actuated 
by the float, and which will more positively 
close the valve, and will hold it against its 
seat more firmly. 
... The central pipe or guide 26 is provided 
with ears 33 and 34. Pivoted in the ears 33 
and 34 are levers 35 and 36, which are con 
nected to the sides of the float by means of 
slotted brackets 37 and 38. 
Pivoted to the levers 35 and 36 are the links 
39 and 40, which are connected at their lower 
ends to a cross piece 41. Pivoted to the cross 
piece 41 is the valve spindle 42, which carries 
at its upper end a valve 43 co-operating with 
the valve seat 281. The valve stem 42 moves 
up and down inside of the pipes or guides 26 
and 31, and is centered and held in position 
by means of guide-wings 44 and 45. 
In order to prevent the steam and water, 
coming through the orifice 12, from imping 
ing directly upon the float 29 and preventing 
the same from rising, I provide an annular 
deflectorplate 46, which is secured to the cover 
B by means of the screws 47, as shown. 
When the steam trap is in use, it is placed 
lower than the apparatus or system which it 
is desired to drain, and is connected thereto 
by the inlet passage 10. The valve 16 being 
closed, the steam and water enter through 
the orifice 12, and as the water collects with 
in the float 29 the same falls, and through the 
levers 35 and 36 opens the valve 43. The 
pressure of the steam upon the surface of the 
55 
9o 
95 
IOC 
M 
521,962 
float, a valve spindle, a guide or pipe inclos 
ing said spindle, second class levers pivoted 3o 
to said guide, and operated by the float, and 
connections between said levers and the valve 
spindle, substantially as described. 
2. In a steam trap, the combination of a 
casing, a cover for said casing having a cen 
tral guide or pipe provided with a valve seat, 
a valve spindle having guide wings located 
inside of said central guide and pivoted to a 
cross piece, a float guided by said central 
guide, second class levers actuated by said 
float, and links connecting the levers and said 
cross-piece, substantially as described. 
3. In a steam trap, the combination of a 
casing, a cover for said casing, a central valve 
spindle, a guide for said valve spindle carried 
by the cover of the casing, a float, second 
class levers pivoted to the guide and connect 
ed to said float and actuating said valve spin 
die, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof have hereunto set 5 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
45 
o 
CARLETON. W. NASON. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN J. MURRAY, 
SAMUEL GREASON. 
O 
water within the float forces the water up in 
side of the pipes 31 and 26 through the valve 
seat 281, and out through the passages 23, 24, 
and 25. When the water has been nearly ex 
hausted from the float 29, the float is allowed 
to rise, and through the levers 35 and 36, the 
valve 43 is closed. 
The levers which are preferably employed 
in my improved steam trap are constructed 
so that the valve 43 moves about one-fifth 
of the distance traversed by the float 29. 
It will thus be seen that the valve is more 
positively operated, and that there is less 
liability for the same to become stuck, and 
rendered inoperative. It is also to be noted 
that the valve 43 is held up against its valve 
seat with about five times the pressure, due 
to the buoyancy of the float, and hence there 
will be less liability of any leakage, which will 
Iam aware that many changes may be made 
in the construction of my improved steam 
trap, by those who are skilled in the art, and 
I do not wish to be limited to the exact con 
struction which I have shown and described. 
What I do claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a steam trap, the combination of a 
20 allow the escape of steam. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522063.txt	 
 
Patented June 26, 1894, 
 
AT TORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
No. 522,063, 
 
L. Z. JENKINS, 
CANOPY FOR BICYCLES, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 26, 1894, 
h partera. THerArrh?e KoKPA*Y. 
WASHMST3: . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LANCASTER Z. JENKINS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CANOPY FOR BICYCLEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 522,063, dated June 26, 1894. 
Application filed April 26, 1893, Serial No. 471,863, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it ???? concern: 
Beit known that I, LANCASTER Z. JENKINS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provements in Canopies for Bicycles, &c., 
which improvementis fully set forthin the fol 
lowing specification and accompanying draw 
lingS. 
My invention consists of a canopy for a bi 
cycle, &c., which is adapted to be easily se 
cured to the bicycle, &c., the angle of the 
Same may be varied, and it does not present 
a blunt edge to the wind, the covering may 
be properly stretched and raised above the 
head of the rider and firmly held in open po 
sition, all as will be hereinafter described and 
pointed out in the claims. 
- 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
canopy embodying my invention. Fig.2 rep 
resents an enlarged view of a fastening de 
vice for the canopy. Fig. 3 represents an en 
larged view of the pivoted part of the canopy 
stick and collar therefor. Fig. 4 represents 
a side view of the canopy in raised position. 
Fig. 5 represents a perspective view of the 
device when closed and detached from the 
bicycle. Fig.6 represents a plan view of the 
frame of the canopy. Fig. 7 represents a sec 
tion on line ac, ac, Fig. 6. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings: A designates 
the head of a bicycle, and B the handle bars 
thereof. . 
C designates the stick of a canopy which 
has the joint D therein. Moving on said stick 
is the collar E, which is adapted to surround 
said joint when it is desired to retain the can 
opy in a horizontal position. A sleeve'F 
moves on said stick having stretchers piv 
oted thereto. A thumb screw is also pro 
vided, whereby the sleeve may be fixed at any 
desired place. Secured to the stick C is the 
centerrod G of the canopy. Moving on said 
rod G are the sleeves H and J, which have 
the ends of ribs pivoted thereto, the other ends 
of said ribs being pivoted to the frame K of 
the canopy, whereby to open said canopy the 
sleeves are placed at the desired spot, and 
then clamped by thumb screws or other suit 
able means provided for the purpose. 
It will be noticed that the frame K is flar 
ing from front to rear, and that the sleeve J 
is in front of the stick C, and the sleeve His 
rearward of the same. The ribs attached to 
the sleeve J and apexportion of the frame K 
are short, while the ribs attached to the sleeve 
Hare long, so that the flaring form of the 
frame is preserved and a portion of the can 
opy proper is in front of the rider. 
Passing around and removably secured to 
the head of the bicycle is a clip L, to which 
is pivoted a bar M, whose other end is piv 
oted to a clip N, the latter being removably 
secured to the stick C of the canopy. 
A double clip P is secured to the handle 
bars B of the bicyle, the arms P of which are 
pivoted to a clip Q which is attached to the 
stick C of the canopy, whereby Said canopy 
is secured to the bicycle. By loosening the 
set screws of the clips N and Q, the angle of 
the canopy may be varied as desired, whereby 
the rider may be protected from the rays of 
the sun, or from rain, &c. . 
The canopy may be made very ornamental 
and attactive in appearance. When closed 
it will occupy but a small space, and because 
of the joint D, it may be folded parallel with 
the stick C. A bar R is secured to the stick 
C, above the frame K, the same giving the 
hump appearance to the canopy, and raising 
the portion of the same which is directly over 
the head of the rider, so as to remove the 
same farther from him, the sides of the can 
opy not needing to be as elevated as the said 
portion. 
It will be noticed that by the construction 
shown the canopy when up and open does not 
catch the wind and naturally stop the speed 
of the rider. 
The canopy is wedge-shape, and the stick 
or standard engages with the frame interme 
diate of the ends thereof, the flaring form be 
ginning in front of the stick, so that while 
the rider is shaded overhead and rearward, 
he is also shaded from the front, owing to 
part of the canopy which projects forward of 
the stick, said parts being adapted to be 
stretched and loosened independent of the 
rear part, it being noticed that both stretch 
ing devices are operative independent of the 
raising and lowering device, and the jointed 
stick C permits the angular adjustment of 
. 
75 
85 
90 
95 
ICO 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
2 
- 
522,063 
stick adapted to be secured to a suitable part 
of the same, a collar on said stick, a rod Se 
cured to said stick, and a frame fastened to 
said rod, sleeves on said rod with means for 4o 
securing the same at any desired point ribs 
connecting said sleeves and frame, a barse 
cured to the stick above the rod, a covering 
for the frame and rod, and suitable means for 
securing the device to a bicycle, substantially 45 
as described. 
5. A jointed stick, a horizontal rod connected 
therewith, a flaring frame partly in front and 
partly in rear of said stick, a runner on said 
stick and stretchers connected with said run- 5o 
ner and frame, in combination with the slid 
ing sleeve H on said rod rearward of said 
stick, and the sliding sleeve J forward of said 
stick, and the long and short ribs connecting 
the sleeves with the rear and front portions of 55 
said frame, substantially as described. 
6. A jointed stick, a horizontal rod connected 
therewith, a flaring frame partly in front and 
partly in rear of said stick, a runner on said 
stick and stretchers connected with said run- 5o 
ner and frame, in combination with the slid 
ing sleeve H on said rod rearward of said 
stick, and the sliding sleeve. J forward of said 
stick, the long and short ribs connecting the 
sleeves with the rear and front portions of 65 
said frame, and the elevating rod R on the 
stick above the central rod G, substantially 
as described. 
- 
LANCASTER, Z. JENIKINS. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIRDERSHEIM, 
A. P. JENNINGS. 
I 5 scribed. 
the canopy by the proper adjustment of the 
sleeve or runner F, thus producing a practi 
cal and efficient canopy. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
5 I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A canopy for bicycle riders consisting 
of a frame with covering, a center rod with 
sleeves thereon having ribs pivoted thereto 
Io and to the said frame, a stick having a fold 
ing upper end to which said center rod is se 
cured, and means for attaching said stick to 
the handle bars and head of a bicycle, said 
parts being combined substantially as de 
2. A canopy for bicycle riders consisting 
of a frame with covering, a center rod with 
sleeves thereon having ribs pivoted thereto 
and to the said frame, the ribs pivoted to one 
2 o sleeve being shorter than those pivoted to the 
other sleeve a stick having a folding upper 
end to which said rod is secured, and means 
for adjustably securing said stick to the han 
dle bars and head of a bicycle, said parts be 
3. A canopy for bicycle riders, consisting 
of a wedge-shaped frame with covering, a cen 
terstick with sleeves thereon having ribs piv 
oted thereto and to said frame, a stick with 
3o folding upper end having a clamping sleeve, 
said center rod being secured to said stick 
above Said frame, and means for adjustably 
securing said stick to the handle bars and 
head of a bicycle, said parts being combined 
4. A canopy for a bicycle formed of a jointed 
25 ing combined substantially as described. 
35 substantially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522163.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 522,163. 
U. G., JOHNSON, 
WATER CLOSET SEAT, 
Patented June 26, 1894, 
Z5 
C/ 
C/ 
S)xNZ 
 
  
 
7t2Zizesses 
SN SN.S.W. 
leafow . . 
. . 
ASNGof, p. c. 
ZzzEzz77 
y vesses 3. 90.6/son 
'class dia, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ULYSSES G. J.OHNSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
WATER-CLOSET SEAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 522,163, dated June 26, 1894, 
Application filed November 7, 1893, Serial No. 490,267, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ULYSSES G. JoHNSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Water-Closet Seats, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to water-closet seats 
which can be converted from a seat having 
an opening of large area, to a seat having an 
opening of small area, or the converse, as may 
be desired, in which way the seat can be con 
veniently used by both adults and small chil 
dren. 
In carrying out my invention I provide in 
conjunction with a Seat having an opening 
of ordinary or usual area, an upper supple 
mental seat having an opening of sufficiently 
small area to adapt it for children's use, and 
hinge the said supplemental seat between the 
lower seat and a hinged cover so that when 
it is desired to use the main or lower seat, hav 
ing an opening of large area, the upper seat 
having an opening of smaller area together 
with the cover, can be swung back, so as to 
\be out of the way, while on the other hand, 
the cover can be swung back independently 
of the said supplemental seat, whereby the 
latter can rest upon the lower seat and thus 
adapt the closet for the use of a small child. 
As a matter of further improvement I re 
cess the under side of the cover so as to adapt 
it for the reception of the supplemental seat 
and in conjunction therewith, I provide any 
suitable latch or locking device for tempora 
rily securing the supplemental seat within 
the recess in the cover, in which way, when 
the supplemental seat is locked within the 
recess in the cover, and the latter is swung 
back, the whole will present a new and fin 
ished appearance. 
In the accompanying drawings, -Figure 1 
representsin elevation, the cover swung back 
with the supplemental seatin position for use 
on the lower main seat, Fig. 2 is a top plan 
view of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a section through. 
Fig. 2 on line 3-3. Fig. 4 is a bottom plan 
view of a part of the cover with the corner 
portion thereof in section so as to show an 
arrangement of spring latch which can be 
conveniently employed for temporarily lock 
ing the supplemental seat within the recess 
in the cover. 
A, indicates the main or lower seat hinged 
at a. as usual and provided with an opening 
of ordinary area, said opening being indicated 
by dotted lines a'. 
B, indicates the supplemental seat provided 
with an opening b of less area than the open 
ing of the lower seat and understood to be of 
a size suitable to adapt the supplemental seat 
for children's use. 
C, indicates the cover which is hinged at 
c, so that it can be swung back as in Fig. 1. 
The cover is provided with a recess c' which 
adapts it to receve the supplemental seat B 
as illustrated in Fig. 3 wherein the supple 
mental seat is shown within the recess in the 
said cover. 
While I may employ any suitable latching 
or locking device for temporarily securing 
the supplemental seat within the cover, I 
have shown a spring latch Darranged within 
a recess d, in one of the corner portions of 
the cover and have provided the supplemental 
seat with a socket d within which the catch 
portion of said latch may engage when the 
supplemental seat is closed within the cover. 
In order to permit the cover to be swung 
back independently of the supplemental seat 
as in Fig. 1, the hinges: E, for the supple 
mental seat are conveniently attached to the 
under side of the supplemental seat and to 
the rear edge portions of the cover, and are 
formed with leavese, which are intermediate 
with the supplemental seat and cover so that 
when the supplemental seat and cover are 
locked together, the seat leaves will lie flat 
against the rear under side portions of the 
cover as in Fig. 3 and on the other hand, 
bridge the space between the said seat and 
cover when the former is down and the latter 
swung back as in Fig 1. 
, 
- 
w 
What I claim as my invention is- 
A water-closet seat comprising a cover hav 
ing a recess in its under side, a supplemental 
seat adapted to fit within said recess and hav 
ing an opening of comparatively small area, 
a lower seat having an opening of compara 
tively large area, and hinges attached to the 
under side of the supplemental seat and to 
the rearedgeportion of the cover and formed 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
O 
 
2 
522,163 
with leaves arranged intermediate of the sup-tween the said seat and cover, substantially 
E. seat and cover, whereby when the as described. 
Supplemental seat and cover are locked to- 
gether, the said leaves will lie flat against the 
5 rear under side portions of the cover, and 
When the said seat is down and the cover 
raised, the leaves will bridge the space be- 
CHAS. G. PAGE, 
RETA. M. WAGNER. 
Witnesses: 
ULYSSES G. JOHNSON. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522263.txt	(No Model.) 
W. O. LUDOVICI, 
GAS COWERNOR 
No. 522,263, 
Patented July 3, 1894. 
SSN Ses.N 
S S N N s H.N.IN 2 f 
ELKIH 
 
% 
c 2 
% 
32EU-23 
2 
%is: 
52% 
 
 
A 12 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
us a 1 a 
55 u 
I 
a Sn 
 
5 SN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
w -2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. O. LUDOVICI, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. . . . 
GAS-GOVERNOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 522,268, dated July 3, 1894. 
Application filed December 10, 1892, Serial No. 454,760, (No model.) 
. 
, 
to all, whom it may concern: 
: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM OSCAR.LUDo. 
VICI, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at San Francisco, in the county of San Fran. 
cisco and State of California, have invented 
new and useful Improvements in Gas-Gov. 
ernors; and I do hereby declare that the fol 
lowing is a full clear, and exact description 
of Said invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improved gas 
governor, the objects of which are to provide 
a simple as well as effective mode of regu 
lating the pressure of the gas from within 
the pipe and at some distance away from the 
point of consumption, to equalize the flow 
So that a steady and brilliant light can be ob 
tained and at the same time to prevent waste 
from excess of pressure-and it consists of 
Special features in the construction and ar 
rangement of the parts composing the im 
proved governor and in their various combi 
nations to effect the object above mentioned 
and it is fully set forth in the following de 
tailed description, and is illustrated in th 
accompanying drawings, in which-- 
Figure is a vertical section of my gas-gov 
ernor. Fig. 2 is a top view of Fig.1 looking 
in the direction of the arrows from dotted 
line 1-1. Fig. 3 is a detailed view of part 
of my invention taken from dotted line 3-2 
Fig. 2; and Fig. 4 is also a detailed view taken 
from dotted line 3-3 Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference are used to des. 
ignate like parts throughout the drawings. 
The letter A represents the body or outer 
shell of a gas-governor within which the dif 
ferent parts of my invention are inclosed. 
B represents a partition at the top of the 
shell. This partition has an annular pocket 
b' in its upper face extending. around the 
sides of the partition and a central opening 
therein. This opening and pocket is designed 
to receive the lower parts of the floats a, and 
the mercury or other suitable liquidin which 
the floats rest. 
D is the inlet and Ethe outlet pipe. Both 
the inlet and outlet pipes are tubular and 
provided with threads cut thereon so that my 
device can be readily united to a gas-pipe by 
means of the usual fittings F. 
W 
- 
after. 
Immediately above the partition, are the 
cup-shaped floats a made of thin light metal 
of suitable substance. The sides of said 
floats and their lower edges dip into the liq 
uidb which is poured into the annular recep 
tacles and forms a seal at this point. 
c is alight wire bent in the shape of a semi 
circle the ends of which pass through the holes 
bored centrally through the partition and se 
cured to the middle of said floats. 
The man 
ner in which I propose to secure said wire to 
the float will be more fully described herein 
d is the valve stem which may be attached 
to the wire c by any suitable means, how 
ever, I prefer to carry out this feature of 
my invention in the manner shown in the 
drawings, where it will be seen in looking 
over Fig.1 that the stem is made in the shape 
of an eyebolt having male threads cut thereon 
at its lower end corresponding with the fe 
male threads of valve e and through the open 
ing at the farther end passes wire c to which 
it is held in position. Thus constructed in 
this manner all vibrations of the valve stem 
caused by the movement of the floats will be 
prevented as the stem is held loosely to the 
semicircular wire c and will keep always its 
perpendicular position no matter how much 
vibration or oscillation the floats are sub 
ject to. 
fis a jam-nut screwed to the stem dinor 
der to prevent accidental unscrewing of the 
valvee. Howeverif by accident or otherwise 
the valve should become loose from its stem 
and the floats beforced up by the pressure of 
the gas, the wire c will act as a stopper and 
prevent the floats from going too far up as 
soon as said wire strikes the lower edge of the 
partition B or the outer edge of the receptacle 
b as at G plainly shown in Fig. 1, and prevent 
thereby the gas escaping through the cover or 
cap H. 
g represents bushing adjusted to the inlet 
D and used as a seat for the valve; h, stem 
guides attached to or near the upper edge of 
bushing g and form part thereof. 
Placed upon the top part of floats a and 
secured thereon is a plate L, which may be 
made of any suitable material intended to 
bind the floats together and keep them at a 
proper distance apart. With this plate I 
O 
15 
25 
i 35 
45 
50 
55 
65 
7o 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
 
2 
w 
522,263 
the floats over each partition and plate Lover 
the floats-and provide them with suitable 
washers and thus screw all these different parts 
tightly together. This being done the bush 
ing g with guide h is adjusted within the in 
let aperture and the valve e with its jam nut 
f is screwed to the stem d thus my governor 
is ready to be connected to the gas-pipe-and 
by pouring the mercury into the receptacle C, 
then placing the weight l upon plate L and 
cover Hin position my gas-governor is ready 
for operation. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by United 
States Letters Patent, is 
1. In a gas governor, the combination with 
a liquid containing shell, of a valve seat within 
the shell, a valve for the valve seat, a valve 
stem for the valve having an eye at its upper 
end, a partition at the upper end of the shell 
having circular pockets in its upper face and 
a depending central projection forming one 
section of the pockets and apertures at the 
center of the pockets, floats having their lower 
edges located in the pockets, a plate connect 
ing the floats, a curved bail loosely passing 
through the eye in the valve stem and aper 
tures in the partition, nuts N on the ends of 
the bail, a screw no passing through the plate 
and floats and secured to the nuts, and pack 
ing between the plate and floats and floats 
and nuts, substantially as described. 
2. In a gas governor, the combination with 
a liquid containing shell, of a valve seat within 
the shell, a bushing surrounding the waive 
seat, a valve resting on the bushing, a valve 
stem on the valve, a guide on the bushing for 
the valve stem, an eye on the end of the valve 
stem, a partition at the upper end of the shell 
having circular pockets in its upper face and 
a depending central projection forming one 
Section of the pockets, and openings at the 
center of the pockets, floats having their lower 
edges located in the pockets, a plate connect 
ing the floats, a counter weight on the plates, 
and a curved bail passing through the Open 
ings in the partition having its opposite ends 
secured centrally to the floats and loosely 
passing through the eye in the valve stem, 
substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and affixed my seal. 
W. O. LUDOVICI. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
H. P. TRICOU, 
GEO. W. HIND. 
75 
9 O 
95 
Od 
1 o5. 
O 4. 
have a further object in view which is to 
Quinterbalance the floats by putting a weight 
l in the middle of the top part of said plate 
between the two floats as shown in the draw 
lingS. 
M is an ordinary pin secured to plate L 
and Serves to hold the weight in place. Plate 
L, floats a, and the semicircle wire c are fas 
together by intermediate double nuts 
in 12 are Screws passing through plate L, 
and floats a, and screwed to the nuts N, the 
the semicircle wire c is screwed to the lower 
part of Saidnut as particularly shown in Fig. 3 
of the drawings. I have found that this mode 
of binding together these different parts is 
Very simple and effective. 
7 are Washers placed between the plate L, 
and floats a, also between nuts N, and the 
floats a in order to make these connections 
gas-tight. 
The usual cover II is held to the body A, by 
an ordinary Screw O. countersunk into the 
Wilf said body as plainly shown in Figs. 2 
When my invention is in practical use if 
it is desired to stop the working of the valve 
e either to test the reliability or usefulness of 
my devices, I provide a pin P which may be 
Screwed to the top part of the projections R as 
plainly shown in the drawings. The pin P is 
bent at right angles and when used to lock 
the floats down it overlaps the plate L. Fig. 
4 shows said pin in operation while in Figs. 
1 and 2 it is open. 
The projections R are naturally formed be 
tween the two diaphragms when making the 
annular receptacles Cand may be cut open 
near the center line to allow the mercury to 
run freely from one receptacle to the other as 
plainly shown in Figs. 1, and 2. For more 
convenience when drawing the mercury from 
the receptacles for safe keeping or otherwise 
when my governor is out of use I provide the 
Wall of body A, within or near the inner up 
per edge with one or more grooves S shown 
in FigS. 1 and 2, into which the mercury 
passes out. 
When putting up together the different 
parts which compose my improved governor 
for Operation-the stem d is first inserted 
through theinlet D then one end of the semi 
circle wire cispushed through one of the open 
ings on the diaphragm into the eye of the stem 
dandout through the other opening in the next 
diaphragm. At each end of said semi-circle 
wire I screw tightly the nut N. I then place 
O 
25 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522363.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. DAVIS, OF WILMINGTON, DELAWARE. 
coPING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 522,863, dated July 3, 1894. 
Application fled April 20, 1894, Serial No. 508,268, (No model.) 
. 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN D. DAVIs, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Wilmington, in the county of New Castle 
5 and State of Delaware, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Coping, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improved me 
tallic coping for general use. 
Io The object of the invention is to provide a 
coping constructed of casing or metallic plates 
suitably secured together to form a hollow 
interior which may be filled with cement or 
other suitable material. 
I5 A further object is to combine simplicity 
Construction with cheapness in manufac 
le. 
For a full and clear understanding of my 
invention reference is to be had to the accom 
panying drawings, whereincorrespondinglet 
ters indicate like parts in the several views, 
and in which 
Figure 1, is a perspective view of two sec 
tions forming a corner of the coping, parts 
25 being broken away for better illustration. 
Fig. 2, represents a cross-section of the cop 
ing, taken on the linea-ac Fig. 1. Fig. 3, is 
a view in elevation of one of the rests or sup 
ports used for the support of one of the ends 
of a section of coping. Fig. 4, is a detail of 
a plate or tie band by means of which the 
ends of two sections are secured together and 
the joint on the top plate of the coping is 
protected. 
, 
pending plates b' in order that bolts b pro 
vided with nuts on their ends may be used 
to secure the side plates to the top plate, as 55 
shown. Plate C has its lower side edge bent 
inwardly to form a rest cupon which one 
edge d?of the bottom plate D may rest and 
through which and rest c suitable bolts may 
pass to secure these plates together. 
- 
As preferably constructed, a cross-section 
of the coping would be of the form of a trape 
zoid. This particular form or shape of cont 
struction is found to be of greater utility and 
less expensive on account of the slope of the 65 
land where coping is usually erected. 
E are rests upon which the ends of sections 
of the coping are supported. These rests con: 
sistoftwo rods FF of unequallength, pointed 
attheirlower ends so that they may be readily 7o 
inserted in the ground, and an upper inclined 
cross-piece E which connects the rods FF' 
at points near their upper ends leaving up 
per projection e and e above the cross-piece, 
as shown, to form a support for the ends of 75 
the coping to rest upon when said rests are 
driven into the ground, the incline of the 
cross-piece E' to the rods FF corresponding 
to the incline of the bottom of the coping to 
its sides. 
When the surface of the ground is smooth 
and the rests are well driven into the ground, 
the bottom pieces D of the coping may be 
dispensed with, as the ground itself may 
serve as a sufficient base for the coping upon 85 
which the cement or other similar material 
may rest when it is inserted in the interior 
of the coping. 
G are inwardly inclined projections or ribs 
on the interior of the plates C. C. 
When the bottom plates D are dispensed 
with and cement is used for the interior, the 
coping casing, after the plates have been 
bolted together, is inverted, bottom upward, 
and the cement is filled in the interior of the 95 
casing and allowed to set and harden, after 
which the coping is ready to be set up, the 
ribs on the interior of the side plates about 
which the cement has hardened preventing 
the cement from falling out of the casing in Ioo 
case the ground on which the casing is erected 
should be unevenor should settle at anytime. 
Tie bands G made of thin strips of metal, 
having dependingends g and apertures g in 
90 
8o 
- 
- 
40 
35 
In the drawings, A refers to the coping. 
B is a top plate of the coping, preferably 
of V shape in cross-section to prevent foreign 
material from lodging on top of the coping, 
see Fig. 2. 
C.C., are rectangular shaped metallic plates 
of unequal width which form the sides of the 
copling. 
The top plate of the coping has enlarged 
portions or rimsb on its sides and depending 
45 plates b' on its under side near its edges, 
between which and the rims the upper ends 
of plates C and C are secured by bolts or 
otherwise. Apertures are formed in the up 
per ends of the plates C and C and under 
5o neath the rims b, so that when the plates 
are to be secured to the top plate, these aper 
tures will register with apertures in the de 
 
2 
522,363 
35 
40 
45 
and pins to secure the abutting ends of the 
sections of the coping together and to pro 
tect the joints in the upper surface of the 
coping, and cement forming the interior of 
the coping, substantially as described and set 
forth. 
2. The combination in a coping, of rectan 
gular shaped metallic plates secured together 
at their contacting edges, side plates of un 
equal width and parallel, ribs on the interior 
surfaces of the side plates, rims on the side 
edges of the top plates and plates depending 
from the top plates, near said rims, means to 
secure the plates of the casing together near 
their contacting edges, rests having rods of 
unequal length sharpened at their lower ends, 
cross-pieces connecting the rods near their 
upper ends, tie bands, and means to Secure 
the same over the joints on the upper surface 
of the coping, and a plastic material forming 
the interior of the coping, as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
r 
JOHN D. DAVIS, 
Witnesses: 
S. B. HUSSELMAN, 
J. MALIN CLARK. 
O 
the middle portions thereof, are placed over 
the joints on the top of the casing which are 
formed by abuttiugend sections, and a ping 
passes through aperture g in the band, 
through the joint which may be enlarged at 
this point, and through corresponding aper 
tures in the bottom plates D, should the lat 
ter plates be used, and is then driven into the 
ground to hold the bands as well as the sec 
tions in place. Tie bands H having depend 
ing ends h" of similar construction to bands 
G' are likewise used for the corners of the 
coping, see Fig. 1. 
The wider or narrower sides of the coping 
may be used outwardly depending upon the 
slope of the land where the coping is placed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is- 
1. The combination in a coping comprising 
rectangular shaped metallic plates bolted to 
gether at their contacting edges, side plates 
of unequal width and parallel, rims on the 
side edges of the top plates, and plates de 
pending from the top plate near said rims, 
means to secure the upper edges of the side 
plates between the rims and depending plates, 
rests having rods of unequal length sharp 
ened at their lower ends, and connected near 
their upper ends by cross-pieces, tie bands 
- 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522463.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 522,463. 
J. J. FLANDERS. 
PULP SOREEN, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 3, 1894. 
: 6 
I 
A 
8) 
terree 
7 
Y 
R s 
A. S7 fe 
Aa 
J1/7 Zzzesses. 
'44 42%rz. 
 
Ele 
2 inity 
/zzvez Zor: 
* ere: 
(No Model.) 
No. 522,463. 
J. J. FLANDERS. 
PULP soREEN. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 3, 1894. 
 
| L. i4 
girl. U 
Zee) 
t 
  
  
 
V777/7 esses, 
I777/entor. 
Shad."Qg 
oars perERs co, PHOT-LITHC, WASHINGTON. P. 
 
J. J. FLANDERs. 
PULP SOREEN. 
-3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 522,463. 
... 2 2  
N N N 
2 as 
3 
 
 
2 22 6. 
N N NS N 3. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Patented July 3, 1894. 
s SNS 
 
  
Xo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
| 
S. 
z 
 
  
 
 
 
 
3 
3 er 
sty 
3 
22 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
s 
W 
Z 
s s 
S 
SC in esses s $2. 
cuckw 
2lies 6. 
77 vez toy, 
THE 
NORRIs Peters co. Photo-Lito. WASHINGTON. C. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN J. FLANDERS, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
PULP-SCREEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 522,463, dated July 3, 1894. 
Application filed November 26, 1892, Serial No. 453,256. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, JoHN J. FLANDERs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Port 
land, in the county of Cumberland and State 
of Maine, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Pulp-Screens; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
pulp screens and consists in new and im 
proved means for hanging or supporting the 
screen frame, new and improved means for 
Operating said frame, and in certain other de 
tails of construction, which will be hereinaf 
ter particularly described. 
In the drawings herewith accompanying 
and making apart of this application, Figure 
1. is a horizontal sectional view taken on one 
side above and on the other side below the 
cross heads K, the top of the oil box in the 
latter being removed. Fig. 2 is a side eleva 
tion of my improved screen partly in section. 
Fig. 8 is a central vertical cross section of 
Same, with parts broken away to show pack 
ing for lifter rod. Fig. 4 is a detail planview 
of. the hydraulic mechanism removed from 
the oilbox and having parts broken away to 
show interior. Fig. 5 is a central vertical 
CrOSS Section of same, and Fig. 6 is a horizontal 
section of the hydraulic mechanism for im 
parting vibratory motion to the screen frame. 
Same letters refer to like parts. 
In Said drawingsXrepresents the base cast 
ings and Y a girder connecting the same. 
At each end of the machine is a box A, con 
taining a suitable liquid medium, said box 
Comprising an outer head X, an inner head 
X', a stuffing-box X and a cover X. In said 
liquidboxare a cylinder M, piston head Hand 
piston rod J, which extends upwardly through 
the top of said box. Beneath said cylinderis 
a chamber M' opening into said cylinder by 
Way of port mas seen in Fig. 5. Opening 
from the liquid box into chamber M is an 
inlet port m', as seen in Fig. 6. Adapted 
to penetrate chamber M' and alternately to 
open and close port m' is a reciprocating 
plunger O. Teading from chamber M' into 
the oil box is a port no having in its path a 
plug cock P and a check valve Q. Said plug 
s 
cock may be operated in any convenient man 
ner as for example by the series of arms and 
levers p, p', p, p, p. Mounted on the base 
are standards R. Resting on said standards 
are striking bars S, on the outer ends of which 
are strikers S and connecting said striking 
bars may be employed lateral supporting rods 
r. Mounted in suitable bearings is a shaft 
U having on one end a driving pulley W and 
on the other end a crank diskW. A connect 
ing rod T connects the crank disk and the 
plunger O, or an adjustable sleeve Zadapted 
to slide on said plunger, whereby a recipro 
cating motion may be imparted to plunger O 
by the rotation of said disk. To lessen the 
shock caused by the plunger entering the 
confined liquid medium the plunger may have 
its end N conical. 
In Fig. 6 the plunger is shown after it has 
penetrated chamber M', and when in this po 
sition, port n' is closed. When the plunger 
is withdrawn to the position shown in dotted 
lines in Fig. 6, port m' is open and the liquid 
can flow freely therethrough and into the 
open liquid box A', and the pressure being 
removed from beneath the piston the Weight 
of the screen frame causes the piston to de 
scend, aided during part of the descent, by 
atmospheric pressure due to the vacuum cre 
ated by the withdrawal of the plunger from 
the chamber. This pressure continues until 
the plunger is withdrawn sufficiently to open 
port m', and permit the liquid to flow out into 
box A. As the plunger again enters cham 
ber M', it closes port m', this confining the 
liquid within chamber M' and consequently 
causes the piston and the screen supported 
thereby to rise. When it is desired to lessen 
the length of the stroke of the piston, the 
plug cock is turned so that apart of the liquid 
confined in chamber M' can escape through 
port m. 
Supported in the frame of the machine is 
a tank C to receive the pulp as it passes 
through the screen D which rests on bars d 
set in frame A. The screen frame A is 
mounted above said tank, its sides extending 
down some distance into the tank. Between 
the tank and the exterior walls of the screen 
frame A is a packing E. The screen frame 
is mounted on the ends of lifter rods T, there 
being two of said rods at each end of thema 
90 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
2 
522,463 
chine as shown in the present drawings. The 
lifter rods may be pivotally attached to the 
bottom of the screen frame or to plates a. at 
tached thereto by means of pins l', and they 
5 pass down through the bottom of the tank 
and through stuffing boxes l. The lifter rods 
are connected by a yoke K to which is at 
tached the piston rod J. Outside of the 
tank is set a trough B and leading from the 
Io bottom of the tank into said trough is a port 
b. The trough B has an outflow pipe F in 
which is set an adjustable sleeve G carried 
by a screw g running in a screw-threaded sup 
port g and having a lever wheel g for oper 
I5 ating the same. The adjustable sleeve set 
in the outflow pipe in trough B may be raised 
or lowered and thus regulate the depth of 
pulp in the space between the tarak and the 
screens, thereby increasing or diminishing 
Having thus described my invention and 
its use, I claim 
1. In a pulp screen, a vibratory screen 
frame mounted on connecting rods, a piston 
25 operating in a confined liquid medium, a pis 
ton rod attached to said connecting rods, and 
a plunger adapted to be forced into the cham 
ber beneath said piston to force said piston 
upWard by hydraulic pressure and to be with 
3o drawn therefrom to allow the piston to be 
2O the suction. 
forced down by gravity, atmospheric press 
ure, &c., substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
2. In a pulp screen, a vibratory Screen 
mounted in a suitable tank, connecting rods 35 
pivotally attached to said screen frame, a cyl 
inder set in a liquid medium, a piston having 
a rod connected with said connecting rods and 
adapted to operate in said cylinder, a cham 
ber beneath said cylinder, and a plunger hav- 4o 
ing its entering end cone shaped and adapted 
to be forced into and withdrawn from said 
chamber to operate said piston, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
frame mounted on connecting rods, a piston 
operating in a confined liquid medium, a pis 
ton rod attached to said connecting rods, a 
plunger adapted to penetrate the chamber 
beneath the piston cylinder, a plug cock and 5o 
means for operating said cock to regulate the 
length of the piston stroke, as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
Intestimony whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
3. In a pulp screen, a vibratory screen 45 
JOHN J. FLANDERS, 
Witnesses: 
ELGIN C. WERRILL, 
NATHAN CLIFFORD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522563.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 522,563, 
W. E. HUNT. 
HEAD REST. 
Patented July 3, 1894. 
h/ITWESSAS 
Iy/EWTOf 
22.3%. 
91ziorney. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. HUNT, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
HEAD-REST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 522,563, dated July 3, 1894. 
Application filed June 15, 1892, Serial No, 436,778, (No model) 
w 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. HUNT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at De 
troit, in the county of Wayne, State of Michi 
gan, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Head-Rests for Barbers 
Chairs; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
improvements in head rests for barber chairs; 
and consists in a certain construction and ar 
rangement of parts, as fully hereinafter set 
forth, the essential features of which being 
pointed out particularly in the claim. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
head-rest for barber-chairs, which will recip 
rocate in the arc of a circle so as to permit of 
the head being turned from side to side, with 
out raising it from the rest or turning it 
thereon, and by means of which such adjust 
ment of the head may be accomplished with 
out touching it with the hands of the opera 
tor. This object is attained by the mechan 
ism illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a barber 
chair having my improved head-rest attached 
thereto. Fig. 2 is an enlarged longitudinal 
section through the head rest. Fig. 3 is a ver 
tical section through the rest and supporting 
standard. Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the 
parts composing the head rest, disconnected. 
Referring to the letters of reference, A in 
dicates the vertically adjustable standard 
that supports the head-rest, which is provided 
with a rack b and which is mounted in the 
back of the chair, as shown in Fig. 1. To the 
upper end of said standard is attached a 
curved plate B, provided with a strengthen 
ing rib c, and having the depending stem d, 
that is let into the vertical face of the stand 
ard A, and is attached thereto by the screws 
a or other suitable means. The upper end 
of the standard. A rests against the circular 
face of the plate B, and is slightly concaved 
to receive said plate. This plate B is dove 
tailed in cross-section or provided with the 
beveled edges e, as clearly shown in Fig. 3. 
C indicates the head-block or rest which is 
upholstered with plush or other suitable mate 
rial. Said rest is crescent shaped and is pro 
vided in its under face with a recess f that 
receives the curved plate D which is secured 
therein. Said plate D is curved concentric 
with the plate B, and is provided with an 
under-cut wayh, that receives the dove-tailed 
plate B, upon which the plate D and rest C 
slide. 
On referring to Figs, 3 and 4, it will be seen 
that the center of the way h in the plate Dis 
depressed, leaving the raised bearing edges i 
on which the plate B bears, which arrange 
ment Overcomes any undue friction between 
said parts, and permits of the free movement 
of the rest. Secured to the under face of the 
head-rest, at each end of the way in the plate 
D, is a buffer k of rubber, or other suitable 
material, against which the plate B strikes, 
when the rest is moved so far as to bring the 
end of said way into contact with said plate, 
which overcomes concussion and obviates the 
noise of contact between said parts, and pre 
vents said plate from wearing away the ends 
of the head block or rest. 
It will now be apparent, that, by means of 
this improved head-rest, which reciprocates 
in the arc of a true circle, the head may be 
readily turned from side to side, by the ad 
justment of said rest, which maintains the 
neck in a free and comfortable position, and 
obviates any change in the position of the 
body, and also obviating the necessity of 
grasping and turning the head upon the rest, 
as is ordinarily practiced. . 
Having thus fully set forth my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
In a head rest, the combination of the ver 
tical standard, the segmental plate Brigidly 
attached thereto, the crescent shaped head 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
 
g 
522,563 
rest, provided with a curved recess in its un-cated in the lower arc of a vertical circle, sub 
der face having a buffer at each end thereof, stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in 
the segmental bearing plate D secured in said 
recess in said head rest and having a curved presence of two witnesses. 
5 way in its under face with open ends which 
WILLIAM E. HUNT. 
terminate at said buffers, the segmental plate 
on the vertical standard fitting freely in said 
way, whereby said head rest may be recipro- 
H. R. WHEELER, 
E. S. WHEELER, 
Witnesses: 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522663.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 522,663. 
W, P. JAUS. 
PNEUMATIC TIRE, 
Patente d July 10, 1894, 
reseeae 
Trre ?cofirrs Peters.co. Photo-Litrio, was firston. D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM P. JAUS, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CARL H. SCHULLER, OF SAME PLACE. 
PNEUMATIC TRE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 522,663, dated July 10, 1894. 
Application filed February 15, 1894, Serial No. 500,205. (No model.) 
9 
To all whom it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM P. JAUS, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at In 
dianapolis, in the county of Marion and State 
of Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Pneumatic Tires; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale, 
This invention relates to improvements in 
pneumatic tires for bicycle or other wheels 
and has for its object the protection of the 
air tube by means of an impregnable armor 
and to provide an armor that will adjust it 
Self to the dimensions of the air tube when 
inflated and to provide means for protecting 
the tube from the edges and ends of the ar 
mor so as to prevent the latter from cutting 
through the tube. 
I accomplish the objects of the invention 
by the mechanism illustrated in the accom 
- - 
panying drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a transverse section of a pneu 
matic tire armored in accordance with the 
spirit of my invention. Fig. 2 is a detail 
showing a portion of a tire and showing the 
outer shoe sectioned to expose the air tube 
and its armor. Fig. 3 is a detailin longitudi 
nal Section of my improved tire, showing the 
- Overlapped ends of the armor forming the 
joint in same. Fig. 4 is a detail showing the 
armor at the joint rubber shield connecting 
the two ends. One end of the shield is shown 
removed from its wrappings through the slots 
in the armor in order to show the slots. 
Similarletters of reference refer to like parts 
throughout the several views of the drawings. 
A is the air tube of usual construction and 
which will be inflated with air in the usual 
mannel. 
B is the enveloping shoe which serves as a 
protection to the air tube and is also of usual 
C is my improved armor which will be con 
structed of any suitable material as sheet steel 
bent in the form of a ring or circle and con 
caved on its inner side so as to fit upon the 
construction. 
n 
- 
- 
outside of the air tube and when placed in 
position will in consequence occupy a posi 
tion between the air tube and the shoe as 
shown in the drawings. 
The ends of the armor will be made to over 
lap each other and will be free to slide longi 
tudinally as the air tube is inflated in order 
to suit the increased diameter of the tire. 
Spring steel will be preferably used in the 
construction of the armor and will be tem 
pered and shaped so as to fit close to the air 
tube at all times and will be sufficiently strong 
throughout its entire surface to resist and 
turn aside any sharp pointed object that 
Would otherwise puncture the air tube. 
To guard against the wearing or cutting of 
the sides of the air tube by the sides of the 
armor or the free end of the same it will be 
best to interpose a protecting medium. With 
this in view the concave side of the armor 
Will be lined with suitable woven material as 
canvas, shown at C in the drawings, and the 
edges of the material bound over the edges 
of the armor plate as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The canvas Will be cemented or otherwise se 
Curely fastened to the armor. 
To protect the air tube from the free end 
of the armor which might cut through the 
tube by the continued motion when the wheel 
is in use, a protecting strip or shield D pref 
erably of rubber will be interposed between 
the loose end and the tube and to maintain 
the shield in its right position the ends of 
the shield will be secured to the armor. This 
may be done by cementing but the prefer 
able method will be as shown in the drawings 
in which two transverse slots d and d' will 
be made in the armor near the lapped ends 
and the ends of the rubber shield woven 
through the slots in the manner as shown in 
Fig. 3. As the armor is expanded the rubber 
shield Will stretch to accommodate the in 
creased length. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and wish to secure by 
Letters Patent, is- 
In a pneumatic tire, the combination, with 
the air tube, of a steel armor plate bent in 
the form of a ring, disposed on the outside of 
- 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
90 
95 
 
g 
522,663 
the air tube and entirely surrounding it, the 
two ends of the plate overlapping each other, presence of two witnesses. 
each end being provided with transverse slots, 
and an extensible protecting strip secured 
5 to the ends of the plate by having its ends 
Woven through said slots, substantially as de- 
scribed. 
JoSEPHA. MINTURN, 
T. F. MEANY. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM P. JAUS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522763.txt	(No Model.) 
T. MORRISON. 
METHOD OF ROLLING METAL, 
No. 522,763, 
 
Patented July 10, 1894, 
witnesses 
272 6. 
c-17726 --- 
NVNTOR 
74-2244 -4.2777-224-1 
1, 4, 22.2724/ 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS MORRISON, OF DUQUESNE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
METHOD OF ROLING METAL 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 522,763, dated July 10, 1894. 
Application filed July 1, 1893, Serial No. 479,387, (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS MORRISON, of 
Duquesne, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Methods of Roll 
ing Metal, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, in which 
the seven figures represent the successive 
passes employed, showing the various reduc 
tion of the metal. 
My invention relates to the reduction and 
elongation of metal by rolling and more par 
ticularly to the production of billets, wherein 
the metal is taken from the roughing mill 
with a cross-section of about four by four 
and reduced to about one and one-half inches 
square, though I do not wish to restrict my 
self to this particular size or class of work. 
In the drawing, 2 represents the last pass 
of the roughing-mill, the metal emerging in 
the form of a square bar with rounded cor 
ners. The next pass flattens the metal into 
the form of figure 2, a longitudinal groove or 
depression being rolled in its top and bottom 
faces. The metal is then flattened further 
and corners produced upon its side edges by 
the pass of figure 3. This bar is then turned 
upon one of its side edges and introduced 
into the pass of figure 4. This is the most 
essential and important pass of the series and 
by it the metalis reduced to the flat diamond 
shape of the figure. The next pass reduces 
the metal to the shape of a diamond, the side 
edges of which are formed from the top and 
bottom faces of the original bar, while the 
upper and lower edges are formed from the 
original side faces of the metal. . 
The advantages of my invention will be ap 
arent to those skilled in the art. The flat 
is well worked before the corners are rolled, 
thus insuring a good edge. This edge has 
always been the weakest portion of the bar 
or billet when the metal was reduced without 
change and in the same section, as this method 
is very trying upon the quality of the steel. 
The rolling of the grooves in the first and 
second passes prevents overfilling of the 
metal when it is edged in the flat diamond' 
pass, when a heavy reduction takes place and 
the edge changed to the flat and the corner 
formed from the side of the billet. By the use 
of this pass billets may be rolled with the 
same tables and other machinery as is em 
ployed in rolling rails, thus enabling a mill 
to be easily and readily changed from a rail 
mill to a billet mill, and vice versa. 
By the word flat diamond in the claims, 
I intend to cover substantially the shape of 
figure 4. 
Many minor variations may be made in the 
form and arrangement of the passes without 
departure from my invention; since 
What I claim is 
1. The method of rolling, consisting in flat. 
ting the metal and rolling longitudinal de 
pressions in its faces, and then edging the 
metal and rolling corners from such faces; 
substantially as described. 
2. The method of rolling, consisting in flat 
ting the metal twice in successive passes and 
forming longitudinal grooves in its faces, 
then edging the metal in a flat diamond pass, 
and rolling corners from the faces; substan 
tially as described. 
3. The method of rolling consisting in flat 
ting the metal and working its face, then turn 
ing the metal on edge and rolling a corner 
from Such face; substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
THOMAS MORRISON. 
Witnesses: 
H. M. CoRWIN, 
GEO. B. MOTHERAL. 
s 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
40 0 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522863.txt	23 - 366 
74 6 5 
(No Model.) 
EX 
XR 
522 863 
S. & E. TAUS SIG 
DISINFECTING DEWICE, 
No. 522,863. 
Zaz-Z. 
 
Patented July 10, 1894. 
Z, Zaz' 2. 
24- z 
A 7TOAMEYS. 
+E Horn's Pyers co P- or Letc. was - Maio. . . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
N AI.() NI ()N TASSI; ANI). EMII, TAl SSI ( , ( ) l NEW Y ( ) 
is , N. Y. 
OSN FECT N G DEW CE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patcut No. 522,863, dated July 10, 1894. 
Application filed March 12, 1894, Serial No. 503,282, iN in mill, 
(5c. 
Zo (20 at f oil it a?tly concern. 
Beit known that we, SALOMON TAUSSIG and 
EMILTA USSI(, both of New York city, in the 
county and State of New York, have invented 
new and useful Improvements in Disinfecting 
IDevices, of which the following is a full, cloar, 
and exact description. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
portable devices for the disinfection of places 
Subjected to contaminating exhalations that 
are liable to produce disease; and has for its 
object to provide a novel, simple and effective 
apparatus, that is of compact form and in ex 
pensive construction, which is adapted to con 
tinuously supply a proper amount of the dis 
infecting fluid to a porous medium of con 
siderable area, which by exposure to air cur 
rents, that pass through the dovice, will in 
pregnate the air with the vaporized disin 
fectant, and thus effectively sterilize disease 
germs that may pervade the air. 
A further object is, to conveniently coin 
bine in a vaporizing disinfecting device, a lil 
uid dropping device, whereby air currents 
will be disinfected, and a liquid disinfectant 
be periodically deposited in a cess-pool, wa 
ter closet, or other place requiring disinfec 
tion at the same time, from the same device. 
To these ends, our invention consists in the 
construction and combination of parts, as are 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
leference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views shown. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the device in com 
plete form. Fig. 2 is a sectional side view 
taken through the center of the device, Fig. 
3 is a detached side view of an essential part 
of the improvement, IFig. 4 is a sectional 
plan view, on the line 4-4 in IFig. 2; and IFig. 
5 is a sectional plan view, on the line 5-5 in 
Fig. 2. 
The external casing 10 of the improved dis 
infecting apparatus, is preferably given a cy 
lindrical form, of proper dimensions to re 
ceive other parts, avoiding too great bulk, as 
it is designed to provide a conveniently port 
able and light levice for the indicated pur 
pose, having its side wall numerously perfo 
rated, as shown at 10'. The bottom 11, of the 
casing () is flat, and at a suitable distance 
above it a in annular rucket shelf 2, is so 
cured on the in the surface of the case, as 
show in Fig. 2. There is a cover 13, fur 
mished for the easing l?, having a preferably 
foraminated convex ventilator cap formed on, 
or secured to the apertured to wall of sail 
cover, which piece may be renovably secured 
on the upper open cind of the casing. 
The disinfecting liquid holder 14, is an in 
portant feature of the invention, and consists 
of a preferably cylindrical receptacle, formed 
of sheet metal for the sake of lightness, al 
though it may be otherwise iroduced. 
On the lower end portion of the holder 14, 
an annular drip-clhamber 1 
is formed or se 
cured, which is open at the top, and projects 
from the wall of the holder sufficiently to be 
adapted for the reception of a sponge fill 
ing 16. 
On the top Wall of the holder 14, two filler 
apertures are oppositely locatedl, which are 
inclosed by a separately projecting circular 
flange secured around each loe, these being 
preferably threaded externally for the recep 
tion of the screw caps 17, that serve to meas 
urably seal the apertures, the tops of the caps 
being perforated for the introduction of a 
fibrous feedler wick lS, in each, that are of 
such a length as will allow portions to hang 
within and on the outside of tho holder, as 
shown in Figs. 2 and 4. 
There is a scries of perforations in the bot 
tom wall of the drip chamber 15, which may 
be arranged opposite a similar row of holes 
in the annular bracket shelf li, other concen 
tric rows of holes li2 being formed in the 
shelf wall as shown in Fig. 5, for the free es 
cape of fluid that enters the drip chamber. 
The compartment 10" formed below in the 
casing 10, by the introduction of the shol? 12, 
is partly filled with sponge 20, rows of per 
forations 10, being produced in the side wall 
of the compartment along with those formed 
in the side wall of the casing above the com 
partment, and near the side edge a small 
tube 21 is downwardly projected from the 
bottom wall 11 of the casing 10, for the gradu 
aterl discharge of disinfecting liquid from 
the compartment 10". 
The liquid holder 14 is furnished with a 
looped handle 11", that is secured on the top 
wall of the same between the filler holes, this 
o 
75 
So 
95 
CO 
O 
15 
30 
35 
45 
522,863 
S 
' ) 
it 
' 
T ) 
iiiz.: 
it "( ) l l 
i) in 
' - 
ntvai of the part 1 1. 
-\t it side if l (; ('insing i , this a gir 
()() is 
1't settlie, which projecting in the 
sil in vert it'll late arts S() sla?tl from t 
( 
will if it' ('asing, tilt their () (pel ortions 
may it 
lic' ('d over two vertically aligned 
tails 
si''' Ws, that are projected from an 
light will ()' other stalle Sull ort, at a point 
a live t| 
ioculity that is to receive a drip 
ling is clarge () i? disinfect ig lili from the 
: )):liatus. 
When the device is put into scrvice, the 
lituitl holder 1, is supplied with a charge of 
any referred disinfecting liquid, and then 
it is introduced within the casing (), rosting 
on the shol? 12, the older being centored by 
the laterally projecting cars 14, that extend 
from it at the bottom of the dril) chamber 15. 
Tlic ?ectling wicks 1S, by their relative ar 
rangement, hang above the drip chamber 15, 
as shown clearly in Fig. 2, so that by capil 
lary attraction, and the force of gravity, they 
will raise liquid from the holder 14, and dis 
charge it by drops into the drip chamber be 
low the outcr ends of said wicks. 
When the spongo ?illing 16, in the chamber 
15, becomes super-saturated with the volatilo 
(lisinfecting liquid, it will discharge the sur 
plus into the compartment ()', the sponge 20 
absorbing it, and after the latter named ima 
terial is su?liciently charged with the liquid, 
it will exude a suficient amount to permit a 
dropping lischarge from the tule 21, that ly 
a constriction of its free end may be adapted 
to deliver a desired number of lrops in a 
given period of tine. If desired the device 
may be seated on a shelf or other stable su 
hort. 
It will be seen, that the permeation of sur 
rounding air within the casing 10, through 
the perforations 10", will permit the atmos 
phere to be charged with the vaporized dis 
infectant, at the same time the liquid is being 
dropped from the apparatus, so that disease 
germs that may not be killed by the liquid 
application, will be neutralized by the vapor 
ized disinfectant if a proper material is em 
ployed. 
Iaving thus fully described our invention, 
we clain as now and dosiro to secure by Let 
ters latent-- 
2 C. 
25 
35 
4 O 
45 
l. 
: (lisii ?ectii is cle vice, the coiliilation 
with a foraminatcd cylindrical chaminer, a per 
forated (over therefor', and all anular self 
Within the chain or, of a cylindrical lituid 
holder in sail clan ('I' sealed (in they anti 
lar sliclf, wicks ?eeding from the liquid holiter, 
an annular drip chain or below the wicks, a 
compartment below the shelf laying a ?or:li 
ill cil side wall a spoilo filling in sail lin 
chainer, an il a sponge filling in the coinari, - 
in eit lyclow, substantially as described. 
2. In a disinfecting device, the combination 
with a cylindrical casig having its wall 
numerously perforated a reticulated cover 
hereon, hanger loops on the casing, a dis 
clarge pipe at the base of the casing, an all 
nular perforated bracket sliclf within the cas 
ing near its botton, and a sponge filling within 
the compartment formed by the shelf, of a 
cylindrical liquid holder in the casing, an in 
nular drip chamber concentric with the base 
of the holder, feeding wicks engaging per?o 
rations in caps over filler apertures in the top 
wall of the holder, sponge filling in the drip 
chamber below the outer ends of the wicks, 
and means to hang the device on a stablo 
support, substantially as described. 
3. In a disinfecting device, the combination 
with a foraminated casing provided with an 
outlet at the bottom, and an internal shelf 
above the bottom, forming a chamber, and 
having openings, of a renovable holder for 
the disinfectant, said holder being seated oil 
the sliclf and laving an exterior trough-like 
drip-recoiver, the bottom of which is formed 
with openings leading outwarl from said re 
ceiver to the shelf openings, and capillary 
wicks arranged substantially as shown and 
describedl. 
4. A disinfecting device, comprising a case, 
having a drip spout near the bottom, the case 
above said drip spout being foraminated, a 
holder for liquid disinfectants within the case, 
capillary wicks arranged substantially as de 
scribed, and an absorbent in the bottom of 
the case, adapted to receive the drip from the 
wicks, substantially as described. 
SAILOMON TA TSS (i. 
ENIII, TAUTSSI ( . 
Witnesses: 
THOS. SHULTZ, 
WALLACE ROSEN LET M. 
55 
65 
o 
75 
95 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US522963.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 522,963, 
 
J. P. BROWNLEE. 
ORDER BOOK. 
Patented July 17, 1894. 
Witnesses. 
# (27%e. t 
I72Uerditor? 
*/ 
renorris Peters co, Photo-litho. Washington.D.C 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH P. BROWNILEE, OF GALVA, ILLINOIS. 
ORDER-BOOK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 522,968, dated July 17, 1894. 
Application filed March 15, 1893, Serial No. 466,157, (No model.) 
contained between the covers being thus made 
to interlap. This cardboard is pushed at one 45 
end into one pocket and then sprung into the 
other, the leaves being all thus securely held 
between the covers, 
w 
D represents the pockets. 
The advantage of the books with two pock 
ets and the reversed leaf sections is that a 
merchant can make two copies, giving one to 
the customer and retaining the other in the 
book, where it can be kept until evening when 
it can be posted or torn out, thus saving him 
a trip to the office at every sale. In ordinary 
check books, this cannot be done as both 
tickets must be torn out before another can 
be made out, 
By fastening the two reversed sections of 
the leaves to the same cardboard and spring 
ing it into the pockets, the book is always in 
a solid compact form and can be easily re 
filled when the leaves have been used up. 
By securing half of the leaves to each end 
of a strawboard, each ticket may be filed away 
beneath the other half of the book after it 
has been Written upon. 
Having thus described all that is necessary 
to a full understanding of my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to protect by Letters 
Patent, is 
An order book, for salesmen, having two 
opposite pockets upon the inside of one cover 
and, upon the inside of the other cover, two 
reversed interlapping sections of memoran 
dum leaves fastened to the opposite ends of 
a cardboard, the salesman's card being de 
tachably secured in said pockets as shown 
and described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH. P. BROWNLEE. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM MCMEEKIN, 
J. H. BOYD, 
So 
55 
7 O 
75 
80 
To add, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSEPH. P. BROWNLEE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Galva, in the county of Henry and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Order-Books; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
The invention relates to duplicating order 
books and consists in arranging two leaf sec 
tions, which are to be inserted in the pockets, 
upon one another and securing them to a 
cardboard at the opposite ends with a carbon 
leaf between the sections. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a perspective 
view of the order book with the covers open. 
Fig. 2 is a view showing the arrangement of 
leaves, carbon sheet, and cardboard. 
In the drawings, AA represent the two cov 
ers which are connected by a flexible back a. 
On the inside of one cover are arranged two 
opposite pockets in which is detachably se 
cured a salesman's card to contain a memo 
randum of his cash and credit sales as well as 
the number of each ticket. On the inside of 
the opposite cover is arranged at one or both 
ends the device for holding the memoranda 
leaves of the book. In Fig. 1 of the drawings 
I place at each end a metallic pocket the two 
being exactly opposite to one another, corre 
sponding in form, and with their open sides 
facing each other. 
B represents a section of leaves which con 
tains the carbon leaf c, all the leaves being 
sewed at one end to a subjacent cardboard C, 
while to the other end of the cardboard are 
sewed the section of leaves without any car 
bon leaf, the two sections of leaves which are 
5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523063.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 523,063. 
G. B. ADAMS. 
TROUSERS STRAP 
Patented July 17, 1894. 
WITNESSES 
4.66-7-- p. 
'79 / 
INVENTOR: 
Geor; gre 1B.A. CZ Czzara-s, 
By 14, C. 4-cycty. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE B. ADAMS, OF IRVINGTON, NEW JERSEY. 
TRO USERS- STRAP 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 523,063, dated July 17, 1894. 
Application filed September 9, 1893, Serial No. 485,189 (No model.) 
Specification, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE B. ADAMS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Irving 
ton, in the county of Essex and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Trousers Straps or Belts; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
- 
The general class of inventions to which 
the devices herein-described relate is trousers 
straps or supporters, which can be readily at 
tached to the trousers with the least difficulty, 
serving as a belt, which is far superior to the 
Ordinary style of belts or trousers supporters, 
The improvements herein described are de 
signed to provide a device which will effect 
ually perform all the functions of a belt or 
trousers supporter, with nothing to mar the 
OutWard appearance thereof. 
The invention therefore consists essentially 
of a band, such as webbing, which is prefer 
ably elastic, the ends of which are fastened 
to suitable holding or fastening devices pro 
vided with a pin or pin-pointed hooks and 
means for securing the ends of said band to 
said fastening devices. 
The invention further consists in certain 
other arrangements and combinations of parts 
such as will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and finally embodied in the clauses 
of the claim. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying sheet of drawings, in which similar 
letters of reference are employed to indi 
cate corresponding parts in the several views 
thereof. 
Figures 1 and 2 are a front and side view 
respectively of a trousers strap embodying the 
principles of my present invention. Fig. 3 is 
a back view of the trousers strap in which the 
ends of the band or strap are secured by 
means of a pin orpin-pointed hooks, arranged 
in a shell or casing, directly beneath the mar 
ginal rim of said shell or casing; and Fig. 4 
is a similar view, one of said fastening de 
55 
vices being provided with a suitable grasp 
ing pull or loop. 
In said drawings, b is a suitable strap or 
band, preferably of elastic material, having 
its ends connected with holding devices A, 
which may be of any suitable shape or orna 
mentation and of any preferred design. Said 
holding devices A may be button-shaped and 
consist essentially of a shell or casing a pro 
vided with an inwardly projecting marginal 
bead or rim a. 
As will be seen from Figs. 3 and 4 of the 
drawings, instead of forming the back-plate 
of a solid blank of metal, as I have done in 65 
my previous patent, No. 489,702, issued Jan 
uary 10, 1893, said back-plate is made of a con 
tinuous piece of wire c, provided with a bent 
portion c and the curved end portions c, all 
of which are sprung under the marginal rim 
or bead a' of the shell or casing a, the curved 
end-portions c' being provided with pin-points 
e and e, formed integral with said wire, 
The ends of the band or strap b are securely 
held between said portions c and the rim a 
of the shell or casing a, as will be clearly un 
derstood from said Figs. 3 and 4. 
The application of my trousers strap is very 
simple. By means of said hook-shaped pin or 
pins connected with the casing or shell of said 
holding or fastening devices A, one of said 
devices is hooked into the material of the 
trousers, and by pulling on the other holding 
device, the strap or band b can be instantly 
adjusted, when this second device or button 
is pressed down against the material and its 
holding teeth embed themselves in the ma 
teria, 
It will thus be seen, that the strap answers 
the purpose of a belt, when worn in the back 
of the trousers, near the waist line, conform 
ing itself to any position of the body, and still 
allowing great freedom of ease and motion. 
Connected with one of said holding devices 
A may be a pull-loop b', being the one end of 
the strapb, which is doubled, and said doubled 
end extending from the opposite side of the 
shell or casing a, thereby forming the pull 
loop b' for adjusting the strap to the trousers, 
or for detaching the same, as may be desired. 
In the construction illustrated in Fig. 4, said 
pull-piece or loop may be made of cord or 
75 
go 
95 
OG) 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
523,063 
O 
other like material, which is secured to the 
curved portions c, as clearly shown. 
I am aware that other arrangements and 
constructions of the several forms of holding 
devices A may be made, without departing 
from the scope of my invention, and I there 
fore do not limit my invention to the exact 
arrangement and construction of the parts 
herein shown. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a holding clasp, consisting essentially of a 
shell or casing, having an inwardly project 
ing marginal rim or bead a', and means for 
Securing the end of a band to said clasp, con 
sisting of a wire having holding portions 
sprung beneath said beada' and held thereby, 
Substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a holding clasp, consisting essentially of a 
shellor casing, having an inwardly projecting 
marginal rim or bead a', and means for se. 
curing the end of a band to said clasp, con 
sisting of a continuous piece of wire c' hav- 25 
ing holding portions c and curved end-por 
tions c sprung under said bead a' and held . 
thereby, and pin-points formed integral with 
said curved portions c, substantially as and 
for the purposes set forth, 
3. The combination, in a trousers strap, of 
a band b, and fastening devices at the ends 
of the band, consisting essentially of a shell 
or casing having an inwardly projecting mar 
ginal rim or bead a', and means for securing 35 
the ends of said band to said fastening de 
vices, consisting essentially of a wire having 
holding portions sprung beneath said bead a 
and held thereby and having pin-points, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 4o 
In testimony that I claim the invention set 
forth above I have hereunto set my hand this 
28th day of August, 1893. 
GEORGE B. ADAMS. 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. C. FRAENTZEL, 
H. M. MARSH, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523163.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 523,163. 
 
J. GUZ0WSKI. 
TROLLEY. 
Patented July 17, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
fh---- 
?VI 
Ira 
f 
f 
V 
's PETERS Co. Photo-Litho. wastero. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH GUZOWSKI, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
TROLLEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 523,168, dated July 17, 1894. 
Application filed January 13, 1893, Serial No. 458,250, (No model.) 
- 
2 ? 
25 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, Jose PH GUZOWSKI, a 
subjeet of the Emperor of Germany, residing 
at Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Trolleys, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to that class of trol 
leys more especially adapted for use on elec 
tric cars and the like, but my improvements 
are also applicable to trolleys for other pur. 
pOSes. 
The improvements have more especial ref 
erence to the means for keeping the bearings 
or journals oiled and providing for the free 
rotation of the trolley-wheel in the event the 
ordinary journal thereof should become over 
heated and stick, 
My improvements also have reference to 
the general construction of the trolley. 
One of the objects of my invention is to 
provide the trolley-wheel with a number of 
bearings or journals so arranged that the 
Wheel may rotate on either independently of 
the other and to automatically supply such 
bearings with a suitable lubricant.  further 
object is to provide for the ready removal of 
the trolley-wheel from the frame or bracket. 
With these ends in view, my invention con 
sists in certain features of novelty by which 
the said objects and certain other objects 
hereinafter described are attained, which fea 
tures are shown in the drawings and herein 
after fully described in connection therewith 
and particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the said drawings,-Figure 1 is an eleva 
tion of my improved trolley, partly in section, 
on the line 1-1, Figs. 3 and 4. Fig.2 is a side 
elevation thereof, showing the pole socket in 
section. Fig. 8 is a plan view, with the wheel 
and its pintle or journal removed. Fig. 4 is 
a plan section on the line 4-4, Fig.1, the 
Wheel being removed. Fig. 5 is a detail view 
of one of the bushings hereinafter described; 
and Fig. 6 is an end view of the pole socket. 
Like signs of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the several views. 
In carrying out my invention I employ a 
bracket or frame composed of separable sec 
tions, each of which is provided with an oil 
chamber or receptacle, and between their op 
posing faces or sides is journaled the trolley 
wheel, whose pintle and other bearings are 
automatically supplied with oil or lubricant 
from said chambers, the wheel itself being 
formed of a number of concentric rings and 
bushings, and the inner bushings being inde 
pendently revoluble, whereby the wheel may 
rotate in the event the ordinary journal be 
comes overheated and sticks. 
The frame or bracket of the trolley is con 
structed of two sections 1, 2, which may be 
substantially duplicates of each other. These 
sections 1, 2 may be provided with laterally 
projecting webs3, on the under side of which 
are formed bosses 4, one on each section, 
which register with each other and through 
Which passes a bolt 5 by means of which the 
sections may be securely clamped together. 
In order, however, that the sections may be 
lmore Securely held against movement with 
relation to each other, each is provided below. 
the bosses 4 with one-half of a threaded stem 
6, upon which may be screwed a ferrule or 
Socket 7 for the reception of the upper end of 
the pole 7 by which the trolley is supported on 
the top of the car, the stem 6 being held from 
turning out of the ferrule or socket by means 
of a pin or bolt 6 passing through the squared 
end of the ferrule and a hole 6 in the stem, 
and the pole being held in place in the socket 
or ferrule 7 by suitable pins or bolts 8 pass 
ing therethrough, a set-screw 8 being pro 
vided for tightening the pole in its socket. 
The strength and rigidity of the frame or 
bracket may be still further added to by pro 
viding each of the webs 3 with upwardly pro 
jecting flanges 9 bolted together, as shown 
more clearly in Figs. 3 and 4. 
Each of the sections 1, 2 of the frame or 
bracket is provided with an oil chamber or 
receptacle 10 having a removable screw cap 
or cover 11 by means of which the filling holes 
or openings may be closed. 
The horizontal or lateral webs 3 hold the 
upper portions of the sections 1 and 2, in 
which the oil chambers are formed, at a dis 
tance from each other, whereby the trolley 
So divisible bracket or frame, that is to say, a wheel may be mounted between them, and the 
opposing or inner faces of these upper por 
45 
35 
55 
?? 
75 
go 
95 
 
523,163 
tions of the sections 1 and 2 are provided with 
Sockets or recesses 12 arranged diametrically 
opposite each other for the reception of the 
pintle or shaft 13 upon which the trolley 
Wheel is mounted. The pintle or shaft 13, 
however, is preferably journaled at each end 
in a divided bushing consisting of two semi 
circular rings 14, 15, as shown more clearly 
in Fig. 5, which are arranged or fitted within 
the recesses 12, and one of which is provided 
with a cavity or socket 16, into which engages 
the inner end of a set-screw 17 threaded in the 
side of each section of the bracket and adapted 
to crowd one section of each bushing against 
the journal or pintle 13 and thus hold it in 
contact with the other sections of the bushing 
for compensating for wear between the parts. 
Each of the set-screws 17 may, if desired, be 
provided with a lock-nut 18 for holding them 
up to their adjustment. The upper side 19 
of each of the recesses 12 is provided with a 
perforation 19 through which passes the up 
per end of a wick 20, whose lower end 21 dips 
into the oil in the chamber 10 and feeds the 
same by capillary attraction to the end of 
the journal or shaft 13, the upper end of the 
Wick 20 being arranged between the sections 
14, 15 of the divided bushing so as to be in 
contact with the revolving journal, whose mo 
tion will accelerate the flow of the oil. 
The divided bushings consisting of the 
Sections 14, 15 are preferably composed of 
soft steel, while the journal or pintle 13 is 
composed of tool-steel; but while these sub 
stances are desirable for the sake of reduc 
ing the friction, it will nevertheless be un 
derstood that any other well known combi 
nation of metals or materials for bearings will 
be within the spirit of my invention. 
The ends of the sections 14, 15 are prefer 
ably of such length as to project slightly be 
yond the inner faces or walls of the sections 
land 2 SO as to come against a bushing or 
sleeve 22 mounted upon the pintle or jour 
nal 13 and forming a part of the trolley 
Wheel and thus limit or prevent the end 
thrust or axial movement of the wheel. 
Mounted revolubly upon this sleeve 22 and 
being detachably secured thereto by means 
of a screw or pin 23 is a bushing 24 which, 
When detached from the sleeve 22, consti 
tutes an independent bearing for the wheel 
upon which it may revolve. This bushing 
24 is surrounded by a ring 25, which latter 
is surrounded by an exterior ring 26 having 
a grooved periphery for the reception of the 
conductor or wire 27, the rings 25, 26 being 
Secured together by any suitable means such 
as the keys or dowels 28 arranged in sockets 
or cavities formed in the meeting surfaces of 
such rings. The outer ring 26 is secured by 
means of bolts or rivets 29 to two circular 
side plates or disks 30 whose outer edges are 
Out-turned, as shown at 31, and form exten 
sions or side flanges to the groove of the ring 
26 for preventing the wheel from slipping off 
the wire. 
The side plates 30 are provided with cen 
tral openings 32 which form annular spaces 
around the journal 13 and the end of the 
sleeve 22, and such sleeve is of sufficient 
length to project slightly beyond the edge of 
the bushing 24, whereby a set-screw 33 may 
be driven through the sleeve in such a man 
ner as to impinge the journal 13 for causing 
the two parts to rotate in unison, while the 
bushing 24 is provided in each side or face 
with an annular recess or groove 34 which 
forms a hub-like portion 24", through one 
end of which the screw 23 is driven in such 
a manner that its inner end will impinge the 
sleeve 22. With this construction it will be 
seen that access to the set-screw's 23, 33 may 
be had through the opening 32 in one side of 
the wheel when it is desired to loosen either 
the bushing 24 or the sleeve 22; but a fur 
ther purpose of these openings 32 is to admit 
the lower ends of oil ducts or pipes 35 lead 
ing from the oil chambers 10, and a further 
purpose of the annular grooves 34 is to ac 
commodate the protruding ends of wicks 36 
dipping into the oil chambers 10 and passing 
through the tubes 35, their protruding outer 
ends being so arranged as to rub against the 
bushing 24 where it touches the side plates 
30, whereby the flow of the oil or lubricant 
will be accelerated by the motion of the bush 
ing, and the oil, as it leaves the wick, will 
collect on the lower sides of the grooves 34 
and work its way between the bushing and 
the side plates and diffuse itself over the pe. 
riphery of the bushing where it rubs against 
the ring 25. To the end that the oil may col 
lect at the intersection of the bushing 24 and 
each of the side plates, I provide each of such 
plates around the inner side or edge of its 
opening 32 with a bevel 37, which will form 
a slight groove or channel in each side of the 
wheel, as shown in Fig. 1. 
In order that the oil may not feed too freely 
through the wick 36, I carry the ends of the 
pipes or ducts 35 upward in the oil chambers 
to a point considerably above the ordinary 
level of the oil, whereby the flow of oil along 
the wick will be purely siphonic and its wast 
age through the pipe or duct when the wick 
is withdrawn for any purpose will be avoided. 
The rings and bushings of which the trol 
ley-wheel is composed are formed alternately 
of steel and bronze, such as aluminum bronze, 
or brass, or any other alloy which forms a 
good bearing surface for steel, the sleeve 22 
being formed of the alloy, the bushing 24 of 
steel or other hard metal, the ring 25 of the 
alloy whereby the bushing 24 will have a 
proper bearing surface at its outer side orpe 
riphery in the event the wheel should rotate 
around such bushing, while the ring 26 may 
be formed of either steel or an alloy, but 
preferably of hardened steel in order that it 
may better withstand the friction of the wire 
or conductor, the side portions of its groove 
being of sufficient extent to protect the side 
flanges 31 of the plates 30 and thereby avoid 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
2 o 
I 25 
? 
o 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
65 
 
523,163 
ing the necessity of composing the side flanges 
31 of the plates 30 of steel. 
It will now be seen that with a trolley con 
structed according to my invention the wheel 
is always at liberty to revolve upon the bush 
ing 24 should the journal 13 stick from over 
heat or from any other cause. So also by 
loosening the screws 23, 33, the sleeve 22 may 
be permitted to turn on the journal 13 or the 
bushing 24 allowed to turn on the said sleeve. 
Each of the sections 1, 2 is provided with a 
Wire-guard 38, which is preferably magnet 
ized and which projects over the opening or 
Space between the side of the wheel and the 
inner side of the section, for preventing the 
Wire or conductor wedging between the wheel 
and the bracket or frame on either side in the 
event it should slip off of the wheel, or in the 
event the wheel should miss the wire when 
elevated by the operator. The lower side of 
each section 1, 2 is also provided with a curved 
Web 39, which has two sections, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2, arranged flush with the outer 
ends of the nuts on the bolt 5, the lower sec 
tions of such webs tapering gradually down 
to the sleeve or ferrule 7, whereby the wire 
or conductor will be prevented from catch 
ing upon either side of the bosses 4 or bolt 5, 
Or on the under sides of the oil chambers 10. 
A space 39 between the stem and webs 39 
is left for the reception and rotation of the 
end of the ferrule 7. 
Each of the sections 1, 2, on both sides, may 
be provided with an eye 40 which eyes fit to. 
gether, as shown, and form a single eye on 
each side for the attachment of the motor 
wire and trolley rope respectively. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new therein, and desire to secure by 
Tetters Patent, is 
1. In a trolley, the combination with a frame 
or bracket and a shaft or pintle journaled 
therein, of a trolley wheel having a concen 
tric independently revoluble portion 24 pro 
vided with grooves 34, the sleeve 22 arranged 
on said pintle and projecting beyond the side 
of the portion 24, a screw passing through 
the end of said sleeve and impinging said 
pintle and a screw arranged in said groove 
and passing through the portion 24 for secur 
ing it to the sleeve 22, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. In a trolley, the combination of a divisi 
ble frame or bracket, the sections of which 
are provided in their opposed surfaces with 
recesses or sockets 12, contractible bushings 
located in said recesses or sockets, a screw 
passing through each of said sections for ad 
justing said bushings, and a wheel having its 
journal mounted in said bushings, substam 
tially as set forth. 
3. In a trolley, the combination of a divisi 
ie frame or bracket, the sections of which 
are provided in their opposed faces with re 
cesses or sockets 12 and oil chambers, divided 
bushings located in said recesses or sockets, 
and wicks leading from said oil chambers and 
- 
forth. 
having their ends arranged between the sec 
tions of said bushings, substantially as set 
4. In a trolley, the combination with a frame 
or bracket having an oil chamber, of a wheel 
journaled in said frame or bracket and hav 
ing side plates and an independently revolu 
ble bushing between said plates provided in 
its side with a recess or groove, a tube or duct 
extending from said oil chamber to said bush 
ing, and a wick dipping into said oil chamber 
and extending through said tube or duct and 
having its end arranged in said recess or 
groove, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a trolley, the combination with a frame 
or bracket having an oil chamber, of a wheel 
journaled in said frame or bracket, and hav 
ing side plates provided with central bevel 
edged openings, an independently revoluble 
bushing arranged between said plates, a tube 
or duct extending from the upper part of said 
oil chamber above the oil level, and a wick 
dipping into the oil chamber- and extending 
through said tube, or duct for supplying oil 
to said bushing, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a trolley, the combination with a frame 
or bracket having an oil chamber, of a wheel 
journaled in said frame or bracket and hav 
ing an annular opening in its side and being 
provided with an independently revoluble 
bushing having an annular recess opposite 
said opening, the edges of said annular open 
ing in the side of the wheel, extending over 
the edges of the annular recess in the bush 
ing, a tube projecting into said annular open 
ing, and a wick passing through said tube 
from the oil chamber and extending into said 
annular recess, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a trolley, the combination with a frame 
or bracket and a journal mounted therein, of 
a wheel mounted on said journal and having 
circular side plates provided with open spaces 
around said journal, the annular exteriorly 
grooved ring 26 secured to said side plates, a 
sleeve mounted on said journal, an inde 
pendently revoluble bushing surrounding 
said sleeve and arranged between said side 
plates, and means for securing said sleeve and 
bushing together, arranged to be accessible 
through one of the openings in said side 
plates, substantially as set forth. 
8. In a trolley, the combination with a frame 
or bracket and a journal mounted therein, of 
a wheel mounted on said journal and having 
circular side plates having the central open 
ings 32, the ring 26 secured to said side pieces, 
the independently revoluble bushing 24 hav 
ing annular recesses arranged opposite said 
openings 32, the sleeve 22 mounted upon the 
journal within the bushing 24, a set Screw 
passing through the sleeve 22 and impinging 
the journal and having its head arranged in 
one of the openings 32, and a second set screw 
passing through a portion of the bushing and 
impinging said sleeve and having its head ar 
ranged in one of said annular recesses, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
II. ? 
(5 
2 ? 
35 
45 
50 
55 
?? 
7? 
75 
go 
95 
? ? ?. 
1 ? ? 
II 5 
I 25 
523,163 
2 ? 
25 
wheel having a journal, of a frame having 
enlargements on its sides in which said jour 
nal is mounted and a pole secured to said 
frame, said frame having guard webs extend 
ing between said enlargements and said pole, 
substantially as set forth. 
12. In a trolley, the combination with a trol 
ley frame or bracket having a pintle jour 
naled therein, a sleeve journaled on said pin 
tle, a bushing journaledon said sleeve, a ring 
journaled upon said bushing, an outer ring 
mounted upon and secured to said first ring, 
and side plates having central openings, Se 
cured to said outer ring and holding said 
bushing in place, substantially as set forth. 
JOSEPH GUZOWSKI. 
Witnesses: 
F. A. HOPKINS, 
EDNA B. JOHNSON. 
5 
I. ? 
9. In a trolley, the combination with a frame 
or bracket having an oil chamber, of a trolley 
wheel journaled in said bracket and having 
an opening 32 in its side, and an independ 
ently revoluble bushing provided with an an 
nular recess opposite said opening, the inter 
section of said bushing and the side of said 
opening being provided with a groove, and a 
wick leading from said oil chamber and pro 
jecting into said groove, substantially asset 
forth. 
10. In a trolley, the combination with a 
wheel, of detachable sections in which said 
Wheel is mounted, and a bolt for securing said 
Sections together, said sections having the 
guard webs39 arranged flush with and extend 
ing from the ends of said bolt, substantially 
as set forth. 
11. In a trolley, the combination with a . 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523263.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 523,263. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
process OF MANUFACTURIN HYP0CHLOROUS ACID, 
G. A. CANNOT. 
Patented July 17, 1894. 
 
CXi41-c-33 c 3 
s 
34-so-vior, 
A 2 2 
?y/hfinil 4 orali. 
G. A. CANNOT. 
PROCESS OF MANUFACTURING HYPOCHLOROUs ACID, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 523,263, 
Patented July 17, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
Q 
S 
ES S 
s 
SaaSSas 
S. 
 
S N. articiziczarrestscore:streetcars:cstasarascartisterestrate N 
--- 
2Wit-coacs 
2.ir 
2. 2. 
3v-uo 4-to 
2. a. L (heavil 
24 Qilaady-th/&eat 
ethovvies. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAVE ADOLPHE CANNOT, OF LONDON. ENGLAND. 
PROCESS OF VANUFACTURING HYPOCHLOROUs Acid, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,263, dated July 17, 1894. 
Application filed Septemb9r 22, 1893, Serial No. 486,218, (No specimens.) Patented in England August 1, 1891, No. 13,102 
in France September 18, 1891, No, 216,200 in Belgium September 18, 1891, No. 96,437, and in Austria-Hungary October 
5, 1892, No. 21.77l. 
5 5 
7 o 
o 
Io 
25 p 
To all whom it may concern: 
apparatus. Fig. 3 represents a central longi 
Beit known that I, GUSTAVE ADOLPHE CAN 
tudinal section of the ozonizing apparatus, 
NOT, manufacturer, a subject of the Queen of 
and Fig. 4 represents a transverse section of 
Great Britain, residing at London, in the 
the Ozone tubes. 
county of Middlesex, England, have invented 
The same parts are indicated by the same 
a certain new and useful Improved Process for 
letters throughout the several views. 
the Manufacture of Ilypochlorous Acid, (for 
This apparatus forms the subject matter 
which I have obtained letters Patent of Great 
of the clainas in my application, Serial No. 
Britain, dated August 1, 1891, No. 13,102; of 
486,216, filed September 22, 1893, and is not 
France, dated September 18, 1891, No. 216,200; 
claimed in this application. 
of Belgium, dated September 18, 1891, No. 
This apparatus consists of a rectangular box 
96,437, and of Austria-IIungary, dated Octo 
a lined with glass and having at its opposite 
ber 5, 1892, No. 21,771) of which the following 
sides and top, windows a' of transparent glass 
is a specification. 
through which the interior can be observed; 
My invention relates to an improved pro 
and having a perforated partition b upon 
cess for the manufacture of hypochlorous acid, 
which are placed fragments of pumice stone 
for bleaching purposes, and especially for the 
c impregnated with sulphuric acid, or other 
bleaching of peat fiber. 
desiccating material. The chlorine gas is ad 
The said process is as follows:-Oxygen and 
mitted above through the piped and has a 
chlorine gases are produced in separate gen 
specific gravity of 1.33, while the oxygen ad 
erators and are contined in ozone tubes. The 
mitted below through the pipee has a specific 
chlorino gas on leaving its generator is al 
gravity of only 1.05, so that the former has a 
lowed to bubble up through a solution of chlo 
tendency to pass down through the perfora 
ride of sodium, and the oxygen gas through 
tions in the partition b, while the latter tends 
lain water, contained in suitable vessels, and 
to rise up through them. As fresh bubbles 
from theince they pass through washing ves 
of both gases are constantly arriving they be 
sels where they leave any remaining impuri 
comed mixed together and dried, and pass 
ties, and into a receiver where they are dried 
forward and out through a pipe fat the other 
and mixed together, and from which they pass 
end of the box a, through which they pass to 
together into an apparatus kept coolby a cur 
the oxidizing apparatus, Fig. 1, shown on a 
rent of cold water, in which they are submit 
larger scale in Fig. 3, the object of which is 
ted to the action of a stream of electric Sparks. 
to render the oxidation of the chlorine much 
The mixed gases combine in this apparatus, 
more energetic, by the presence of ozone in 
that is to say the chlorine attaining its re 
the air, thus obtaining considerable advan 
35 uired degree of oxidation passes into the 
tage, in which however the liability to dan 
state of chlorine monoxide which being un 
gerous explosions has to be guarded against 
stable and dangerous in a free state is passed 
where they pass together through tubes in 
into an alkaline solution such as caustic Soda. 
which they are subjected to the action of elec 
or potash, by which it is absorbed. 
tric sparks. To avoid such explosions, or to 
tithe oxygen gas is produced preferably by 
render them harmless, if in spite of precau 90 
the action of sulphuric acid upon peroxide of 
tions they should occur, a glass tube C, C, C' 
manganese, and the chlorine gas is produced 
(Fig. 8) about 0.008 millimeter diameter and 
in a somewhat similar way to the OXygen, by 
0.002 millimeter thick, and about 1.50 milli 
the action of hydrochloric acid upon peroxide 
meters long, is arranged horizontally, through 
5 of manganese. 
the center of which passes a copper wire B, 
The chlorine and oxygen gases, after leave 
coated with silver, gold, or preferably plati. 
ing the washing vessels pass separately to the 
num, . This wire ends at a short distance 
apparatus hereinafter described in which 
(about 0.05 millimeter) from the outer end of 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
the tube C''', its other end B being connected 
the apparatus, Fig.2 represents a central 
to one of the poles of an electrical induction 
longitidinal section of the drying and mixing coil J. Outside the tube C, C, C''', is coiled 
95 
ECC 
gcer is early to the potten of a, "FeSe QR ca. 30 
boy is containing "Yates', with which it inites 
forming hypochloroi is 8.5iii. 
acid dilated if the 8:3ess of wate; if Yel 
stopperedi and kept i: t:16 iari. Yetails its 35 
properties for a longine, 
The reaction iss-C.--&iG-23. 
Siaving thus diascribed as inventi)}}, Yila 
eters at 
;ire to SacGre is 
 
a mixing appa 
nd a stream of eleg- ent of the Jnite 
in, 3.26 
Teilerei 
coii, and throtigh the interglass facture of iy 
aise the gases to coin bide rar in drying and 
isei proportion 3 to choi: G gase 
ii. 
tween the Wires fron 
& 
t 
  
 
 
C. : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
. 
. 
. 
. 
2. iiiction coil 
53.5Gig out through the pipe H and cock. U. 
is connected with a, 
tail board , of any suitable construction, 
iol by 2, cylazo is of Sigf 
a y Stittails) kit (i. 
} 
iorine monoxide, 
while subjected to said 
in finally conveying the 
22, into a suitable sov 
ribed. 
estiscay wereof I have here into set to 
in is in restice of two witnesses, 
E A {{PIE CANNOT, 
i, 20 sciclersviri, i Ordon, 
 
siatry, Orado, F. C. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523363.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MECHANISM FOR DOUBLING WEBS OF FABRIC LONGITUDINALLY. 
Patented July 24, 1894, 
No. 523,363, 
E. T. & E. H. MARBLE, 
7// 
VVTNESSES 
(4.2%. 27.3%2 
w 
INVENTORs. 
The Norris Peters co, PHTollTHC., WASHINGTON, C. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
MECHANISM FOR DOUBLINGWEB's OFFABRIGLONGITUDINALLY. 
Patented July 24, 1894. 
No. 523,363, 
E. T. & E. H. MARBLE 
s 
WITNESSES 
?4 (224- 
INVENT ORS - 
21:3 
re. RRs Peters co. HoTo-ltho, WASHINGTON. . 
. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN T. MARBLE AND EDWIN H. MARBLE, OF WORCESTER, 
MASSACHUSETTS, 
MECHANISM FOR DOUBLING WEBS OF FABRIC LONGITUDINALLY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,363, dated July 24, 1894. 
O 
I5 p. 
Application filed December 23, 1893, Serial No, 494,516 (No model.) 
To all, whom i may concern: 
Beit known that we, EDWINT.MARBLE and 
EDWIN, H. MARBLE, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Worcester, in the count 
of Worcester and State of Massachusetts, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Mechanisms for Doubling Webs of Fabric 
Longitudinally, of which the following, to 
gether with the accompanying drawings, is a 
specification, sufficiently full, clear, and exact 
to enable persons skilled in the art to which 
this invention appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
Our present invention relates to an im 
roved construction and organization of mech 
anism for doubling webs of cloth or similar 
fabrics longitudinally, or edge to edge, as the 
fabric is continuously drawn forward through 
the machine; also, to the improved combina 
tion and arrangement of devices for spread 
ing and smoothing the fabric as it passes to 
the doubling frame: the object of our inven 
tion being to render the doubling mechanism 
conveniently adjustable in a Way and man 
ner that will more perfectly adapt the mech 
anism to the condition and requirements of 
various kinds, qualities and Weights of goods; 
for varying the tension at the respective sides 
of the folded fabric, and for properly doub 
ling different widths of fabric. 
Another object is to provide for the more 
efficient and satisfactory spreading and 
smoothing of the fabric as it passes to the 
doubling frame. 
These objects we attain by mechanism such 
as hereinafter explained and illustrated in 
the drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is an elevation view of our im 
proved mechanism. Fig. 2 is a bottom view 
of the vertex of the duplicator angle, showing 
the hinging of the brace-bar thereto. Fig. 3 
is a sectional view showing a portion of the 
spreader-plate. Fig. 4 is a vertical section of 
the machine at line XX Fig. 1. Fig. 5 shows 
side and plan views of the attachment forse 
curing and adjusting the upper end of the 
duplicator in connection with its support. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional view of the same, and 
Fig. 6 shows top and plan of the duplicator 
: brace and illustrates the manner of connect 
ing and adjusting said brace. 
Our improvements are more especially de 
signed for use in connection with edge-stitch 
ing mechanism of the character described in 
Letters Patent No. 489,590, but are applicable 
to other machines wherein it is required to 
fold the fabric in similar manner longitudi 
nally, or edge to edge. 
The mechanism to which the fabric is car 
ried after being doubled is notherein shown, 
as it forms no part of our present invention 
and may be of any suitable kind or structure. 
In general construction our present appa 
ratus comprises a tall frame or pair of stand 
ards, supporting between them the roll, bars 
and devices for guiding, spreading, or smooth 
ing out the fabric; and a lower frame stand 
ing transversely to the plane of the spread 
ing appliances; which lower frame supports 
the fold-laying roll, or guide beneath which 
the doubling fabric passes. Upon the upper 
part of said tall frame the broad end of a 
V-shaped duplicator or angular fold-forming 
frame is adjustably supported, disposed in 
position downwardly inclined from the top 
bar toward the point or vertex and capable 
of varied inclination. Said duplicator is sus 
tained at proper degree of inclination for at 
taining the most efficient action by means of 
an adjustably connected brace-bar hinged or 
suitably attached at or near the vertex or 
oint of the duplicator, and supported at its 
other end in a manner that affords conven 
ient adjustment to meet the conditions and 
requirements of different kinds, qualities and 
widths of fabric. 
The particular features of our invention 
are hereinafter more definitely specified. 
Referring to parts, A A' denote the sup 
porting frames. 
B indicates a top-bar or shaft mounted in 
bearings at the top of the frames A, and free 
to rock or move therein. 
D denotes the duplicator for throwing the 
fabric into doubled or longitudinally folded 
form; said duplicator being formed of two 
bars connected together at their lower ends, 
at the vertex d, by a plate or hinge piece D', 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
528,333 
75 
(see Figs. 2 and 4) and having their upper 
ends respectively connected with the top-bar 
B by attachments E that afford facility for 
ready adjustment in directions longitudinally 
of the bars. 
The attachment E is preferably made as 
shown, (see Figs. 5 and 5) and consists of a 
sleeve arranged upon and adjustable longi 
tudinally on the bar B, and having an up 
Wardly projecting flange or ear e inclined or 
adaptable to correspond to the angle of the 
duplicator D, and provided with a stud or pin 
3 in the face thereof, against which said bar 
is clamped by a grip-bolt 4 and thumb-nut 5; 
the bar of the duplicator D being provided 
with a series of holes or recesses 6 for the re 
ception of the stud 3 which prevents longi 
tudinal slip of the bar when adjusted. The 
sleeve is provided with a set-screw 7 for con 
fining it at any position on the top-bar B. 
: The vertex of the duplicator is supported 
by a central brace-bar C, one end of which is 
hinged to the plate D'' and its other end is 
fitted with a series of recesses 9 that latch 
onto or engage with a stud 10 supported in 
the frame A' (see Figs. 1, 4 and 6). The 
available working length of the brace can be 
varied by placing its different notches or re 
cesses 9 on the stud 10; and the vertex d of 
the duplicator D thereby raised or depressed; 
or, if supplemented by adjustment at the at 
tachment E, carried in or out horizontally. 
The stud 10 is preferably made as a screw 
bolt so that by screwing it into the ear A of 
the frame it will clamp the bar C firmly 
against said ear. Under ordinary conditions, 
however, the brace-bar is simply latched onto 
the stud and can readily be lifted off and 
shifted when adjustmant is desired. 
F indicates a rotatable friction or drag 
roll, mounted in suitable bearings a near the 
top of the frame A, parallel with the top-bar 
B, and provided on its end or journal with an 
adjustable friction-brake F whereby the de 
ree of frictional drag can be regulated. 
Hindicates a stationary beam supported 
upon and extending across the space between 
the uprights of frames A, parallel with and 
below the top-bar B and drag-roll F, and pro 
vided, near its ends, with spreader-plates H' 
having their faces formed into a series of 
diagonal outwardly inclined ribs or corruga 
tions (see Figs.1 and 3) that serve for spread 
ing the fabric laterally toward the right and 
left as it is drawn over the face of the beam. 
I and J indicate the horizontal guide-bars 
in the breast of the frame; preferably at a 
height of about four feet, more or less, from 
the floor. The bar I is as usual provided with 
edge-guiding collars i. 
The fold-laying guide, or rough-faced roll 
K, beneath which the folded fabric passes as 
it is drawn from the angular duplicator, is ar 
ranged in well known manner. By means of 
said roll the two plies are laid together, sel 
vage to selvage, to be delivered horizontally, 
as at W, or advanced to such mechanism as 
may be employed for any further operation. 
The fabric can be drawn forward or advanced 
by feed-rolls L or any suitable well known 
means such as ordinarily employed in ma 
chinery of this class. 
Mindicates a bar or roller located between 
the duplicator angle and the guide-roll K and 
journaled on swinging arms or suitable bear 
ings in n. that afford backward and forward 
adjustment of said roller toward or from the 
central vertical plane of the duplicator. The 
purpose and operation of this roller is to give 
a degree of tension on the upper fold of fab 
ric sufficient to equalize the tension on the 
under fold due to its passing outside, or on a 
larger circle about the roll K. The adjust 
ment of the roll M permits the variation re 
quired, for controlling the slackness of the 
upper fold when doubling fabrics of different 
weights or thickness; thereby rendering the 
mechanism more efficient and successfully 
operative for doubling a variety of fabrics. 
A latch lever n' and recessed arc in, or other 
means, is employed for adjusting and retain 
ing the roll M. 
In the operation the cloth or fabric passes 
over the bar I beneath the bar J, thence about 
the face of the spreader-beam H and over the 
drag-roll F and top-bar B to the downwardly 
inclined duplicator D whereby it is directed 
into folded form, and from thence down to 
and under the guide-roll K; from which it is 
carried forward in doubled condition to such 
place, or mechanism, as may in any instance 
be desired. In its passage the fabric is folded 
at the vertex d and its edges brought together 
from the divergent sides of the duplicator, as 
indicated by the dotted lines at v. 
By making the bars D of the duplicator ad 
justable in connection with their supports, 
and the brace-bar adjustable in connection 
with its support in the manner described, we 
provide a mechanism that is readily adapted 
by such adjustments to the doubling of either 
wide or narrow fabrics, without changing the 
position or lines at which the selvage edges 
run, this being accomplished by extending or 
shortening the projection of the duplicator D 
over the roll K. Adjustment of the duplica 
tor D at its heel or supported end is effected 
by loosening the nut 5 and bolt 4 sufficiently 
to release the recess 6 in the bar from the 
stud 3, and then bringing the bar to the posi 
tion required, engaging the stud in the re 
cess 6 and re-tightening the bolt and thumb 
nut. The vertex of the duplicator D can also 
be raised or depressed by adjustment of the 
brace-bar C, thus varying the inclination of 
the plane of the duplicator so as to give more 
or less tension at either side to the folding 
fabric, and to accommodate the peculiarities 
in folding of different qualities and weights 
of fabrics. This feature is of practicalim 
portance and advantage in the successful 
doubling of a variety of fabrics. 
By constructing and arranging the spread 
er-beam, guiding bars and drag-roll as shown 
95 
OO 
IC 5 
O 
II5 
125 
O 
JS 
25 
35 
40 
45 9. 
So 
55 
65 
523,863 . 
3. 
I5 
and combining the same with the V shaped 
duplicator, as described, we produce a mech 
anism whereby the web of fabric is extended 
and freed from wrinkles in a very efficient 
5 and practical manner and delivered for doub 
ling in a manner to give a true and perfec 
fold. 
The sides of the duplicator D may, in some 
instances, be non-adjustably connected to the 
Io plate D', as in Fig. 1, in lieu of being hinged 
at the vertex d and made rigid by the adjust 
able attachment, as shown by Fig. 2. 
What we claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for doubling fabrics longi 
tudinally, the combination, substantially as 
described, of the rocking support, the trian 
gular duplicator having converging side-bars, 
their inner ends joined with a point-plate and 
2 o their outer ends connected with said rocking 
support, attaching devices therefor that af 
ford longitudinal and transverse adjustment 
of said side-bars, the center-brace sustaining 
the Vertex of said duplicator, one end of said 
25 brace hinged to said point-plate, its other end 
fitted with a series of recesses or notches, and 
a stud fixed on the frame for engaging said 
recesses; whereby said center-brace is con 
nected with its support to afford instant de 
3o tachment thereof for adjustment of the du 
plicator, for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a fabric doubling mechanism, the V 
shaped duplicator, and a center brace hinged 
thereto, each of the side-bars of said duplica 
35 tor and said brace being provided with facili. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. H. BURLEIGH, 
ELLA P. BLENUS, 
ties for their longitudinalindependent adjust 
mentin connection with their supports; where 
by said duplicator is adapted for variation in 
its extension and also in its position of in 
clination, for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, Substantially as de 
scribed, with the duplicator, its side bars be 
ing fitted with series of holes or recesses near 
their outer ends, and the top-bar over which 
the fabric is delivered to said duplicator, of 45 
the bar-clamping attachment adjustable on 
said top-bar and provided with an ear-plate 
for receiving said side-bar and carrying a 
stud that engages the recess therein, the grip 
bolt that retains the bar to said ear-plate, and 5o 
the adjustable supporting brace connected 
with said duplicator, for the purposes set 
forth. 
4. The combination, with the V-shaped du 
plicator, and the guide-roll to which the fab- 55 
ric passes from the inclined sides of said du 
plicator; of a roll or bar M disposed between 
said duplicator and guide-roll, and mounted 
in bearings that are adjustable toward and 
from a vertical plane central to the duplica- 6o 
tor, and means for effecting and maintaining 
the adjustment of the same, for the purpose 
set forth. 
Witness our hands this 19th day of Decem 
ber, A. D. 1893. 
EDWIN T. MARBLE, 
EDWIN, H. MARBLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523463.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 523,463, 
J. H. COLLISTER, 
PANTS GUARD. 
Patented July 24, 1894. 
WITNESSES. 
-6 M, 2 42 
(a/26 A 
- 
INVENTOR, 
/2/22 A. Codezser, 
Z/ 22.4/forzez 
 
iva 
THE NoRRisperers wer- WASHIMGN... c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. COLLISTER, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
PANTS GUARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 523,463, dated July 24, 1894. 
Application filed November 28, 1892, Serial No, 453,332, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN HENRY COLLIS 
TER, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Trousers-Guards, of 
Which the following is a specification, that will 
enable those skilled in the art to which my in 
vention pertains to make and use the same. 
8 My invention relates to trousers guards and 
is particularly adapted to protect the bottoms 
of pants from wear or abrasion on the inner 
sides between the feet, 
It consists of a band or clasp to embrace 
the ankle or lower part of the leg to which is 
attached a ring or guard of much larger area 
than the band or clasp, the attachment of the 
guard to the band being of such a nature 
that the area of the space within the guard 
may be increased or diminished to suit the 
Weae, 
The accompanying drawings show my in 
Vention in the best form now known to me 
but many obvious changes might be made in 
the details within the skill of a good mechanic 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
Vention as set forth in the claims at the end 
of this specification, 
Figure 1, shows one form of my invention. 
The band A is preferably composed of spring 
metal that willfitaround the leg of the wearer 
and adjust itself to the proper size. The 
guard B, is composed of spring wire and is 
attached to the band by closely fitting loops 
b,b, which may be slipped along the band to 
adjust the position of the guard or to vary 
the area inclosed by it as clearly shown by 
the full and dotted lines in Fig. 2. These 
loops should snugly fit the band so that while 
they may be forced along they will not slip 
accidentally and they are further locked in 
position by the spring of the wire guard B, 
Which pinches or cramps them on the band. 
The dotted lines in Fig.1 represent the trou 
Sers and show how the bottom of the leg is 
eXpanded at one side, preferably the outside 
of the leg, that point where the dotted line 
touches the band being at the inside of the leg. 
In Fig. 2, I show a modification of my de 
vice; the loop B, being attached to the band 
and not adjustable thereon, while the loop b', 
is provided with a spring b, which bears 
against the band to produce greater friction 
and prevent the loop from slipping from any 
point to which it may have been adjusted. 
Fig. 3, represents another modification of 
the means of attaching the guard to the band. 
In this the band is provided with a series of 
holes in a manner that will be readily under 
stood. 
Fig. 4, shows the application of my device 
at the lower end of a man's leg. 
My invention is useful for pedestrians as it 
holds the pants snugly to the ankles on the 
inner side and prevents the wear which comes 
from the constant striking of one trousersleg 
against the other, which occurs with many 
people who walk close,' but it is particularly 
adapted to the use of bicycle riders to whom 
loose trousers are a nuisance owing to the fact 
that they come in contact with the crank and 
other parts of the machine that are liable to 
be greasy or soiled, and to the further fact 
that loose bottoms are frequently drawn into 
entanglement with the sprocket wheel and 
driving chain with disastrous results to the 
pants. Numerous devices to prevent this 
have been placed upon the market, the most 
successful of which, consists of spring bands 
or garters within the embrace of which, the 
pants, gathered in close folds about the ankles, 
are clasped. This prevents the entanglement 
of the pants with any part of the machine 
but it is unsightly and spoils the shapes of 
the pants bottom by holding them pressed in 
close folds for a considerable period of time. 
My guards prevent entanglement of the 
pants with the machinery and does not spoil 
the shape of the garment and as they hold the 
pants in a position that is natural and sightly, 
need not be removed when the rider dis 
mounts from his machine. 
The band A, which clasps the ankle, may 
be made of spring metal as heretofore stated 
but it might be a strap or elastic garter if 
preferred. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and useful, and desire to Se 
cure by Letters Patent, is- 
1. A trousers guard consisting of a clasp or 
- 
25 
30 
35 
45 
50 
55 
65 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
iod 
- 
g 
528,468 
5 
forth. 
15 
2. A trousers guard consisting of a clasp or 
garter to embrace the leg and provided with garter having attached to it a ring or guard 
an adjustable ring or guard which expands with means for adjusting the size of the ring 
the pants and holds them away from the leg, or guard, substantially as hereinbefore set 
Substantially, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature, in 
garter to embrace the leg and provided with the presence of two witnesses, at Cleveland, 
a guard which expands the pants, said guard Ohio, November 22, 1892. 
being adjustably connected at its ends to the 
clasp or garter, substantially as and for the 
3. A trousers guard consisting of a clasp or 
JOHN H. COLLISTER. 
Witnesses: 
CORNELIAA. SKINKLE, 
JAMES WADE. 
Io purpose hereinbefore set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523563.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 523,563, 
R. E. ALEXANDER. 
CAR REPLACER 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented July 24, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
  
E 
(No Model.) 
No. 523,563, 
R. E. ALEXANDER. 
- CAR REPLACER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 24, 1894, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT E. ALEXANDER, OF FOREST CITY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CARRE PLACER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,568, dated July 24, 1894. 
Application filed April 3, 1894, Serial No. 506,170. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ROBERTE. ALEXANDER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at For 
est City, in the county of Susquehanna and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Car-Re 
placers; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the figures of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
The object of my invention is to improve 
upon the car replacer shown and described in 
my pending application filed 15th day of Sep 
tember, Serial No. 485,571, consisting of a Inov 
able track or guide-way having inclined sur 
faces adapted to extend from the ties up 
wardly and inwardly to the central apex, and 
provided with grooves or hollows formed in 
said inclined surfaces for the purpose of leav 
ing flanges and ridges to guide and receive the 
wheels. In said device the base was made 
substantially rectangular in general outline 
so that when placed against the rail the side 
contiguous thereto would lie parallel with the 
rail and thereby make it impossible to shift 
the extremities of the replacer closer to or far 
ther from the rails without throwing the cen 
tral portion out of adjustment. The purpose 
of the present invention is to overcome this 
difficulty and to provide other features to fa 
cilitate the replacement of the wheels, and 
this I accomplish by using a pair of replacers 
having many of the same general character 
istics, excepting that the sides of the replacer 
adapted to lie contiguous to the side of the 
rails are formed so as to diverge away from 
the rails and from the central portion of the 
replacers, so that the ends of the replacers 
can be readily shifted closer to or farther from 
the sides of the rails without changing to any 
appreciable extent, the relation of the central 
portion of the device to that of the rails. 
My invention further consists in other pe 
culiar features and characteristics which will 
be more fully described hereinafter and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1, 
represents a top view of my invention as ap 
plied to ordinary railroad tracks, a pair of car 
wheels being shown ready to ascend; Fig. 2, 
an end view of my invention in which dotted 
lines represent a pair of wheels in the act of 
descending upon the rails; Fig. 3, a perspec 
tive view of one member of my complete in 
vention; Figs. 4 and 5 transverse sections 
through 4-4 and 5-5 respectively of preced 
ing figure; Fig. 6, a perspective view of the 
right hand guide or replacer, and Figs. 7 and 
8 transverse sections through 7-7 and 8-8 
of preceding figure. 
It is my practice to employ two metallic 
guides or replacers alike in general construc 
tion, one being higher at the center than the 
other; and these are designated by the refer 
ence figures 1 and 2. The central portion 3 of 
the guide 1 is lower than the corresponding 
portion 3 of the guide 2 and each is adapted 
to be placed upon the right hand side of each 
rail when the wheels are coming toward the 
observer as shown in the drawings. This 
relative altitude of the two guides is for the 
purpose of depositing first the left hand wheel 
4, and then the right hand wheel 4', success 
ively upon the rails in order to create as little 
jar as possible and to more perfectly effect 
the replacing of the wheels. The central sur 
faces 5 and 5' respectively slope about forty 
five degrees from the apex 3 to the base, the 
line curying slightly inward as will be clearly 
seen in the end views given in the drawings. 
The inner edges 7 and 7 or those which lie 
next to the bottom of the rails, are each curved 
from one end to the other of the guides 
whereby they will diverge, from the central 
surfaces 5 and 5' away from the rail when 
placed alongside the rails. This construction 
permits either end of the guide to be adjusted 
farther from or nearer to the rails, without 
throwing the central portions 5 and 5' out of 
operative adjustment. 
8 indicates the longitudinal grooves in the 
inclined surfaces of the guides and 9 and 10 
the ridge and flange respectively extending 
along the opposite sides of the grooves. These 
grooves, ridges and flanges merge into the 
central smooth surfaces 5 and 5' and are sub 
stantially the same as those in my copending 
application and therefore need no further de 
scription. In order to make the replacers as 
light as consistent with strength they are 
9o 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
523,568 
O 
formed by stamping them in a die out of 
cheap metal. Pins or teeth 11 are formed at 
the opposite ends so that when the weight of 
the wheel passes upon the replacer the teeth 
will sink into the ties and the replacer be pre 
vented from sliding. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
apparent that when the replacers or guides 
are placed against the rails as in Fig. 1, and 
the wheels are advanced upon them, the tread 
of the left wheel will travel upon the ridge 9 
while its flange travels in the groove 8, the 
flangeless side of the tread being guided up 
ward and in Ward by the sloping side of the 
flange 10. A corresponding action will ensue 
with reference to the other wheel, excepting 
that while the tread is ascending the ridge the 
flange will be guided to the rail by coming in 
contact with the ridge 9. As soon as the 
wheels approach the apexes of the replacers 
they run onto the smooth, sliding surfaces 5 
and 5', as seen in Fig. 2, and sliding down lat 
erally are successively deposited on the top 
of the rails. In this latter action the replacer 
1 being lower than the replacer 2 the wheel 4 
is deposited upon the rail slightly in advance 
of the wheel 5 for the purposes before ex 
plained. Hand holes 12 in the sides of the re. 
placers permit them to be easily handled. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to Secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A car replacer comprising a pair of 
grooved replacers or guides adapted to be 
35 placed alongside the rails, and having later 
ally and longitudinally sloping outer surfaces 
converging to a smooth apex, the apexial por 
tion of one of the replacers or guides being 
3O 
made lower than the apexial portion of the 
other, whereby the wheels are successively 4o 
deposited upon the track, in the manner and 
for the purpose substantially as described. 
2. In a car replacing device a pair of re 
placers of different heights, and provided with 
smooth apexial portions, in combination with 45 
grooved surfaces sloping downwardly away 
from said apexial portion, and a curved or 
divergent edge whereby the ends of the re 
placer can be moved toward and away from 
the rail, in the manner and for the purpose 
substantially as described. 
3. A car replacing member consisting of a 
grooved guide, substantially as described, 
having an apexial portion, and a sloping in 
ner side arranged to lie alongside of and to 
diverge away from the rail at the central or 
apexial portion, whereby the ends of the re 
placers can be adjusted toward and away from 
the rail, as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a car replacer, a replacing member or 
guide provided with oppositely sloping sur 
faces, having longitudinal grooves therein and 
longitudinal ridges extending upwardly and 
merging into a smooth apexial surface, said 
surface extending from the apex obliquely 
down to the edge of the base, and said edge 
being made to diverge from the smooth sur 
face toward its ends, in the manner and for 
the purpose substantially as described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 7o 
55 
ROBERT E. ALEXANDER. 
Witnesses: 
W. B. GRITMAN, 
GERRIT P. ROGERS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523663.txt	(No Model.) 
J, HOFFMAN, 
COMMUTATOR FOR, DYNAMO ELECTRIC MACHINES 
No. 523,663, 
 
Patented July 31, 1894. 
F is 
 
WTNE55E5. 
ce 3 
 
-7==== petite, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH HOFFMAN, OF SCHENECTADY, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE GEN 
ERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
COMMUTATOR FOR DYNAMo-ELECTRIC MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,663, dated July 31, 1894. 
Application filed December 21, 1893, Serial No.494,285, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, Jose:PH HOFFMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Schenectady, county of Schenectady, State 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Commutators for Dy 
namo-Electric Machines, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to commutators for 
Io dynamo-electric machines or motors, and has 
for its object to provide a ready means of mak 
ing the commutator bars with the insulation 
molded upon them so that they may be readily 
assembled and may be tested separately, if 
I5 desired, before such assembling, thus greatly 
reducing the danger of short circuits between 
the segments, and cheapening the construc 
tion. To this end, as already indicated in the 
statement of invention, I mold the insulation 
20 around two sides and by preference around 
two ends also of the commutator bar, which 
is of the usual form; although, if desired, I 
may form the insulation, where a special thick 
ness of greater or less extent is necessary, 
25 around the entire commutator bar, and after 
the parts are assembled, turn off the face 
against which the brushes will bear when the 
machine is in operation. 
In the accompanying drawings hereby re 
3o ferred to and made part of this specification, 
Figure 1 is a commutator bar inside eleva 
tion, made after my improved process. Fig. 
2 is a section upon the line 2-2 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a bar of different design. Fig. 4 is 
35 a section upon the line 4-4 of Fig. 3. Fig. 
5 is a modified form, and Eig. 6 is a section 
upon the line 6-6 of Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a modi 
fication. 
Referring by letter to Fig. 1, A is the body 
4o of the commutator bar or segment, and B is 
the insulation extending around the bar. As 
shown in Fig. 2, the insulation is slightly 
thicker at the top than at the bottom, for the 
purpose of giving a taper to the bar so that 
45 all the segments may be set upon radii of the 
commutator; the same effect may be produced 
however in the body of the bar itself and the 
insulation may be made of uniform thick 
heSS 
50 In Fig. 3 I show a modification designed to 
protect the ends of the commutator more ef 
fectually against short circuits, which I ac 
complish by making the insulation of greater 
thickness, as shown at B', and further by ex 
tending it slightly around the other side of 
the bar, as seen best in Fig. 4. 
In order to provide for the ready inspection 
of the ends of the bars, after the commutator 
is assembled, I may omit the insulation from 
the ends and put it on separately in the form 
of the ordinary commutator ring or cone. In 
this event it may be found expedient to bore 
tapered holes through the body of the bar 
itself into which also the insulation may be 
inserted, being formed integrally with the in 
sulation upon the side of the bar. Such a 
construction is illustrated in Figs. 5 and 6, 
wherein C, C are the tapered holes referred 
to, and D, D are the ordinary commutator 
rings or cones, which may be formed of mica 
or any other suitable insulating material ca" 
pable of resisting the high potential differ 
ences found at this part of the commutator, 
In Fig. 7 Ishow theinsulation molded around 
the entire body of the commutator segment; 
in this case it is intended that the segments 
shall be assembled and then the face E upon 
which the commutator brushes are to rest 
shall be turned off in the lathe, exposing the 
copper to the brush. 
It has been found difficult to obtain a ma 
terial which when molded upon a copper bar 
would have sufficient adhesion for the pur 
poses of my invention. Such a material how 
ever I have found in the substance now known 
in the art asliebite, which is composed of asbes 
tus and certain binding materials, and is de 
scribed and claimed in my Patent No. 505,916, 
dated October 3, 1893, which may be readily 
molded under heat and great pressure so as 
to adhere firmly to the commutator bar; and 
this material I have employed with good re 
sults. I do not however mean to limit myself 
to the precise materials named, as so far as I 
am aware I am the first to make a commutator 
segment having insulating material firmlyad 
herent thereto; and I therefore wish to cover 
broadly the use of other materials in place of 
the one specified, which Iname only as an ex 
ample, and as having been the first with which 
my improved process has been successfully 
practiced. 
95 
O) 
 
2 
523,668 
What I claim, and wish to secure by Let 
ter's Patent of the United States, is 
1. The process of insulating commutator 
bars, which consists in molding the insulat 
ing material thereon so as to make it firmly 
adherent thereto. 
2. The process of insulating commutator 
bars which consists in covering the bar with 
insulating material molded thereto under heat 
and pressure so as to become firmly adherent. 
3. The process of making commutators for 
dynamo-electric machines, which consists in 
insulating the bars by molded material firmly 
adherent thereto, then assembling the parts 
in the commutator and then turning off the 
brush face so as to expose the copper, substan 
tially as set out herein. 
O 
4. As a new article of manufacture, a com 
multator Segment for a dynamo-electric ma 
chine, having insulating material firmly ad 
herent thereto. 
5. As a new article of manufacture, a com 
mutator bar for the commutator of a dynamo 
electric machine, having an insulating mate 
rial firmly adherent thereto, such insulating 
material being thicker upon the parts having 
greatest potential difference, 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 13th day of December, 1893. 
es 
JOSEPH HOFFMAN. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR CHURCHILL, 
WOOSTER, B. CURTISS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523763.txt	(No Model.) 
J. T. DUFF, 
CAR BRAKE, 
No. 523,763, 
Patented July 31, 1894. 
 
  
N 
41 
NYS -, CS) 
EESEE 
v3 
 
2 
2. 
7. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN T. DUFF, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CAR-BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 523,763, dated July 31, 1894. 
Application filed February 20, 1894. Serial No. 500,873, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN T. DUFE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Car-Brakes; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improved car 
brake, and it consists in a disk attached to 
one of the axles of the car, a horizontally mov 
ing brake shoe, and means for moving said 
shoe, together with certain details of con 
struction and combination of parts as will be 
fully described hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, is 
a side elevation of a portion of a street rail 
Way car, provided with my improved brake 
which is constructed in accordance with my 
invention. Fig. 2. is a front sectional eleva 
tion of the same, said section taken on the 
line a.ac. of Fig. 1. Fig. 3. is an enlarged side 
elevation of the two shafts used in operating 
the brake shoe. Fig. 4. is an enlarged side 
Sectional elevation of the brake shoe holder, 
showing the shoe in position. Fig. 5. is a sec 
tional plan view of the same, said section 
taken on the line J. J. 
To construct a railway brake in accordance 
With my invention, and adapt the same to an 
Ordinary street railway car 1. I attach in a 
suitable manner to the front axle 2. a hard 
ened metal disk 3. This disk 3. is arranged 
at or near the center of the axle, and may be 
formed in two sections bolted together when 
arranging the brake on cars that have been 
in use for some time; or the same may be 
cast With or shrunk on the axle. Arranged 
at the front of this disk 3. and in line with 
the same is a frame 4. securely bolted be 
neath the floor of the car 1. and having two 
integral bearings 5. 6. These bearings are 
bored smooth, and the one 5 at the rear of a 
greater diameter than the other. Operating 
in the rear bearing 5 is a strong shaft 7, have 
5o ing a central threaded opening extending in 
45 
35 
40 
 
55 
the direction of its length in which a threaded 
shaft 14. is made to operate. This last men 
tioned shaft. 14, is formed with a threaded 
part 21. and a collar 15, said collar bearing 
against the rear of the bearing 6, and is fit 
ted at its forward end with a bevel pinion16. 
The rear end of the large shaft 7.isprovided 
with a shoe holder 9, consisting of a casting . 
having an annular opening 13. for the recep 
tion of the rear end of the shaft 7. and a dove 
tailed recess in which the removable shoell. 
is secured by a pin or bolt 12. This large shaft 
7. is prevented from turning in its bearing 
5 by means of a key way 8, and spline formed 
in the bearing, leaving the said shaft free to 
move in the direction of its length. Ar 
ranged-in a vertical position at the forward 
end of the car 1 is a shaft 18, fitted with a 
handwheel 19, at the top, and provided With 
a bevel gear 17, at the bottom, said gear be 
ing in mesh with that 16 attached to the for 
ward end of the small horizontal shaft 14. 
In operation: when it is desired to set the 
brake and thereby retard or stop the car 1. 
the operating hand-wheel 19. is revolved, 
which turns the bevel gearing 16. 17. and 
thereby rotates the shaft 14. This shaft be 
ing confined in its bearing 6. is prevented 
from end movement and by its rotary move 
ment withdraws the threaded portion 21 partly 
from the large shaft 7. This withdrawal will 
move the large shaft 7 toward the disk 8. and 
move the brakeshoe against the same thereby 
creating sufficient friction to stop or check 
the car as desired. By this construction and 
arrangement a slight movement of the hand 
wheel will set or release the brake, and by 
the combined force or leverage of the Screw 
thread 14. the gearing 16.17. and hand wheel 
19, the wheels of the car may belocked or re 
leased instantly. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim- . 
In a car brake the combination consisting 
of the disk 3. attached to the axle of the car, 
the frame 4 beneath the floor of the car and 
in line with the said disk, suitable bearings 
5. 6. formed integral with said frame, shafts 
7. 14 arranged in said bearings the one con 
nected to the other by means of screw threads, 
. 
75 
go 
95 
TOO 
2 
528,763 
a brake shoe holder 9. attached to the larger 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
shaft, and a bevel gear 16 attached to the hereunto affix my signature this 18th day of 
smaller shaft 14, the gear 17. in mesh with December, A.D. 1893. 
the gear 16. and attached to a vertically ar- 
5 ranged shaft 18. fitted with an operating wheel 
19. all arranged and combined for service, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
In presence of 
JOHN C. THOMPSON, 
J. A. HERRON. 
JOHN T. DUFF. L. s. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523863.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNEST NIENSTAEDT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
LEO GOLDMARK, OF SAME PLACE. 
NK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 523,863, dated July 31, 1894. 
Application filed October 25, 1893, Serial No. 489,121 (No specimens.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ERNEST NIENSTAEDT, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Inks, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention has reference to an improved 
ink, and the invention consists of hard gran 
ules the surfaces of which are covered with 
a dry ink compound, which compound is suc 
cessively dissolved by the addition of water, 
S0 that by the combination of the water with 
the ink compound a good liquid writing ink 
is obtained. 
In preparing my improved ink, I granulate 
any suitable hard non-porous matter, pref 
erably quartz, so that I obtain granules of a 
diameter of about one-sixteenth of an inch. 
The granules are thrown into a liquid ink of 
any composition and any color, and the aque 
..ous portion of the ink is then evaporated by 
heat or in the atmospheric air. The residues 
of the ink are thus retained and cover entirel 
the surfaces of the granules, which, when 
they are dried, can be handled like any dry 
powder, as the ink-residues reliably stick on 
the Surfaces of the granules. 
When the ink is to be used, a small portion 
of the granules is thrown into an ink-stand 
and a little Water, just enough to be in level 
With the granules, is then added thereto. A 
Sufficient quantity of the ink residues is at 
Once dissolved in the water to convert the lat 
ter into a very good fluid writing ink. As 
Soon as the liquid is used plp, the water is re 
newed, and so on until the covering of the 
granules is consumed. Then the granules 
25 
35 
are removed from the ink stand and new cov 
ered granules are put into the same which 
are treated in the described manner. 
My ink-granules have many advantages, 
viz: They can be shipped without any dan 
ger, as the breakage of bottles used for liquid 
ink, is done away with by my dry granules; 
they leave nosticky residues in the ink-stand 
which is always the case with the liquid ink 
now in use; the granules in the ink serve to 
keep the pen always clean and sharp, as the 
edges of the granules continuously wipe the 
pen when it is slipped into the ink stand; 
they are especially of great use to travelers 
which by means of the dry granules and a 
small quantity of water have always a good 
ink on hand. 
I am aware that dry powders, for instance, 
infusorial earth, charged with coloring mat 
ter and with an oleaginous constituent have 
been used heretofore for coloring fibrous ma 
terials, and I do not claim such powders 
broadly. 
What I claim is 
As a new article of manufacture granules. 
of hard, non-porous matter covered with a 
layer of dry ink, which has been applied to 
the granules by throwing the same into a 
liquid ink and evaporating the aqueous por 
tion of the ink, substantially as set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county and 
State of New York, this 16th day of October, 
1893. 
m 
ERNEST NIENSTAEDT. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES KARP, 
JULIUS ASHER, 
40 
45 
55 
o 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US523963.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 523,963, 
E. GERLACH, 
WAWE MOTOR, 
Patented July 31, 1894, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMIL GERLACH, OF SANTA MONICA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO HENRY 
MATSON AND ASMUS N. BRUHN, OF LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA. 
WAVE-MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 523,963, dated July 31, 1894. 
Application filed October 19, 1893, Serial No. 488,566, (No model.) 
O 
s 
& 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EMILGERLACH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Santa 
Monica, in the county of Los Angeles and State 
of California, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Wave-Motors, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
improved means for utilizing the wave power 
of the ocean and other large bodies of water. 
I accomplish this by means of the device de 
scribed herein and illustrated in the accom. 
panying drawing. 
The figure is a perspective view of mechan 
ism embodying my invention. 
My invention comprises the combination of 
an axle A journaled in a suitable frame or 
support B and provided with a paddle Car 
ranged to be operated upon by the waves; 
two driving wheels DD' fixed upon the axle 
to rotate with such axle; a motion converting 
shaft E journaled to revolve; two power re 
ceiving pulleys FF' journaled upon the mo 
tion converting shaft E and respectively con 
nected therewith by ratchets G. G' which are 
arranged to drive the converting shaftin one 
and the same direction; a crossed band H 
connecting the driving wheel D with the re 
ceiving pulley F, and a straight band H con 
necting the driving wheel D' with the re 
ceiving pulley F. The arrangement of the 
driving wheel D, crossed band H, receiving 
pulley F and ratchet G with relation to the 
driving wheel D', straight band H', receiving 
pulley F' and ratchet G' is such that the ro 
tation of the wheelsDD'in one direction will 
operate to rotate one of the receiving pulleys. 
-(F) in one direction to bring the ratchet in 
operation to drive the shaft E, and at the 
same time will operate the other receiving 
pulley F in the opposite direction with its 
ratchet slipping to release the shaft E and to 
allow it to be rotated by the other receiving 
pulley. 
The bands H H shown in the drawing are 
designed to represent wire cables but it is 
to be understood that sprocket wheels and 
chains may be used in place of the mechan 
ism shown and that I do not desire to limit 
my claim specifically to the particular struct 
ure of parts detailed in the drawing. 
In operation the apparatus is placed with 
the paddle C in position to receive the im 
pulse of the waves and the force of the under 
tow. The Waves operate upon the paddle C 
5 
and swingitforward and the undertow swings 
it back, thus partially rotating the axle A and 
the wheels D D'. This partial rotation will 
be transmitted through the cables to the pull 
leys, rotating them simultaneously in opposite 
directions, thus always driving one of the 
pulleys to rotate the shaft, except at the mo 
ment when the paddle comes at rest to begin 
its return movement. 
In the practical application of my inven 
tion, the power is to be applied through the 
medium of an air compressor, thus to secure 
uniform power. Such air compressor, is not 
shown in the drawing because it has hereto 
fore been suggested that air compressors may 
be used for a like purpose and such use re 
quires no invention for its application to my 
device. 
The wheels ID ID might be united and both 
placed on the same side of the paddle Cthus 
constituting practically a single wheel which 
would then be connected with the pulleys F 
F' through the reverse bands HH'. The pull 
leys FF in that case would be placed close 
to each other to correspond with the position 
of the driving wheels. Such construction 
would be within the spirit of my invention. 
Also more than one paddle might be applied 
to the axle but these modifications are deemed 
obvious and not requiring illustration. 
The ratchet mechanism G G' is of common 
construction and therefore is not illustrated 
herein in detail. 
I indicates means for transmitting power 
to the air compressor or other mechanism. 
Now, having described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Tatent, is 
The Wave motor set forth comprising an 
axle journaled in a suitable support and pro 
vided with a paddle fixed upon the axle and 
arranged to be operated upon by the waves; 
a driving wheel fixed upon the axle to rotate 
- 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
75 
9o 
95 
2 
523,963 
with such axle; a motion converting shaft of the receiving pulleys and a straight band 
journaled to revolve; two power receiving connecting the driving wheel with the other 
pulleys journaled upon the motion converting receiving pulley. 
shaft and respectively connected therewith 
5 by ratchets arranged to drive the converting 
shaft in one and the same direction; a crossed 
band connecting the driving wheel with one 
JAMES R. TOWNSEND, 
ALFRED I. TOWNSEND. 
Witnesses: 
EMIL GERLACH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524063.txt	(No Model.) 
K. S. KLOGEL, 
SEWING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 524,063, 
Patented Aug. 7, 1894. 
 
22z4L22zzzzzzzzzzz:2222222 
Le 
2zzzzzzzzzzz22 R 
O 
WITNESSES: 
3 
6-2 % 
INVEWTOR. 
v.vz, 
NORRIS PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo, washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 524,063, 
 
 
 
K. S. KLOGEL. 
SEWING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Aug. 7, 1894, 
Fig. 5. 
Ea seas 
Fig. 6. 
 
R 
 
s 
as Fig 10. Eig (i. 
29 
 
E 
WITNESSES 
 
 
INVENTOR 
4. / 224 
2. 
3r 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
KARL SIGURD KLOGEL OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SEWING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 524,063, dated August 7, 1894. 
Application filed July 22, 1891, Serial No. 400,282, (No model.) 
- 
views. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, KARL SIGURD KLOGEL, 
of New York city, in the county and State of 
New York, have invented a new and Im 
proved Sewing-Machine, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Sewing machines, and the most importantim 
provements in the machine embodying my in 
vention are, the new rotary shuttle with the 
new arrangement of the shuttle bearing and 
its adjustments, and to this end, my inven 
tion consists in certain features of construc 
tion and combinations of parts, which will be 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters and figures of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
Figure 1 is a front end view, partly in sec 
tion, of the machine, on a line 1-2 in Fig. 2 
showing a front view of the shuttle in place. 
Fig. 2 is a side view of a machine, with the 
front side of the bed removed, showing the 
shuttle mechanism and its connection with 
the main shaft. Fig. 3 is a top view of the 
machine, with the arm and bed plate removed 
to expose the shuttle. Figs. 4 to 14 inclusive, 
show in detail the shuttle mechanism and its 
separate parts; Fig. 4 being a front view; Fig. 
5 a vertical section; Fig. 6 an end view show 
ing the back side; Fig. 7 a top view of the en 
tire shuttle mechanism; Fig. 8 a front view 
of the shuttle mechanism, whereby the bob 
bin holder and the bobbin are removed from 
the machine, and which mechanism also 
serves as a latch for the bobbin holder; Fig. 
9a top view of the parts shown in Fig. 8; Figs. 
10 and 11 front and side views of the bobbin 
holder; Figs, 12 and 13 front and side views 
of the shuttle and bobbin holder as they ap 
pear together; and Fig. 14 a vertical section 
of the shuttle. Fig. 15 is a front view, and 
Fig.16 a side view of the shuttle carrier. 
The machine comprises a bed, forming an 
oblong box. 10 of square cross section, covered 
with a steel plate 11, upon which the arm 12 
is secured by means of screws. 
The manner in which motion is transmitted 
from the main crank shaft A to the shaft M 
which drives the shuttle and feeding motion 
is shown in Fig.2. On the main shaft is a 
crank A, which is located above the vertical 
portion of the arm 12, and this crank connects 
by means of a pitman N, with the link Ppiv 
oted to the side of the arm and on the middle 
of the pitman N, and also, by means of the 
short link p and the crank disk O, with the 
shaft M which is mounted longitudinally in 
the bed in the usual way. It will thus be seen 
that the movement of the main shaft willim 
part to the shaft M, a rotary motion in a di 
rection opposite to that of the main shaft. 
The shuttle device comprises an angular 
bracket S, to which is attached on one side a 
cylindrical cell X, by means of screws 22 se 
cured in the bracket, the cell X constituting 
the bearing of the shuttle. It is held to slide 
upon the screws 22", and is pressed against 
the bracket S by spiral springs coiled around 
the screws, and is held from actual contact 
with the bracket by means of set screws 23, 
whereby an accurately adjustable space be 
tween the bracket S and cell X is provided. 
The cell or ring X, as before stated, con 
stitutes the peripheral bearing or race for the 
shuttle 25, which is constructed to be manu 
factured of sheet metal and consists of a 
bulging shell having the rim formed into a 
cylindrical or nearly cylindrical bearing sur 
face, axially projecting to a satisfactory width, 
and at the face side edge which turns close 
to the needle, provided with a radially pro 
jecting guide flange 24, (see Figs. 13 and 14) 
lying within the adjustable space between 
the cell X and bracket S, whereby the shuttle 
is held in its plane of rotation. (See Figs. 5 
and 7.) This construction of the shuttle with 
a guide flange radially projecting from the 
peripheral bearing surface for holding it in 
its plane of rotation is an important improve 
ment, because thereby the thread of the loop 
is prevented from coming in contact with the 
bearing surface, While in shuttles as hereto 
fore used in combination with an annular 
race, the extreme edges of the properbearing 
surface being used for holding the shuttle in 
its plane of rotation, the needle thread, when 
the shuttle is passing through its loop, al 
Ways glides against the rear edge of the bear 
ing surface, whereby it is very apt to be cut 
or soiled. The shuttle is actuated by the 
driver 25" on the shuttle carrier Q, engaging 
O 
25 
35 
so 
55 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
2 
524,063 
the recess 25 in the shuttle, and in cutting 
this recess a hook or loop catcher 25isformed 
as shown in Figs. 12 and 13. 
The shuttle device is attached by the an 
gular bracket S to the bottom of the machine 
bed in such a way that it can be adjusted in 
the direction of the shaft M, and easily taken 
out of the machine when desired. 
The bobbin holder consists of a nearly half 
spherical cover 27, provided with a pin 28 
to hold the bobbin, this pin being drilled 
through, forming a pipe which fits upon the 
center spindle 28 in the shuttle, and a verti 
cal spur 29, made of one piece with the cover 
and Serving as the thread guide, said spur 
having at its upper end a hole through which 
the bobbin thread is passed. This spur 29, 
loosely fitting in a notch 30, in the circular 
opening in the bracket S, also prevents the 
the cover 27 and the bobbin therein from par 
taking of the rotary motion of the shuttle. 
One side of the cover 27 is cut off to nearly 
the same radius as that of the bobbin disks, 
and beveled down to the circumference of 
the cover, for the purpose of facilitating the 
slipping of the thread loops off the shuttle. 
Tension upon the bobbin thread is obtained 
by passing it under a tension plate 31 inside 
of the cover 27. 
The bobbin holder is kept in position by a 
device which also serves. the purpose of tak 
ing the bobbin holder and bobbin out of the 
machine. This device (shown in Figs. 4 to 7 
inclusive) has a cross piece or latch Z, which 
slides upon two pins 32 secured in the bracket 
S. In the middle of the latch Z, and in line 
with the center spindle in the shuttle, is a 
spindle ac, having on one end a short pin which 
fits into the center hole in the bobbin holder, 
and on the other end a lock plate q, in which 
a hooky is secured, as shown in Figs. 7 and 9. 
An inclined slot 33 (see Fig. 7) is cut in the 
semicircular portion of the latch Z, where the 
spindleac passes through it, and a screw passes 
through this slot and is secured in the spindle 
a. In the position shown in Figs. 4 and 7, 
the lock plate q, pressing against the pin n. 
secured in the bracket S, keeps the latch Z, 
close to the bracket, thus preventing the bob 
bin holder from sliding out. If turned into 
the position shown in Figs, 8 and 9, the screw 
in the inclined slot pushes the pin on the 
spindle ac in the center hole of the bobbin 
holder, and at the same time the hook y 
grasps the spur 29 on the bobbin cover 27, 
and then the whole system as represented in 
Figs. 8 and 9, can be pulled out and lifted 
above the bed plate. 
From the foregoing description, and by ref 
erence to the drawings, it will be seen that 
the shuttle and bobbinholder are practically 
of the same thickness in all parts, so that 
they may be cheaply made by striking them 
up out of sheet metal. It will also be noticed 
that by supporting the shuttle bearing and 
bobbin holder on the bracket S, it may be 
adjusted so as to be at all times near enough 
to the needle. 
The construction described enables the bob 
bin holder and shuttle to be easily removed. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a sewing machine, the combination of 
a shuttle shell having a peripheral bearing 
surface provided with a radially projecting 
guide flange, a hook or loop catcher cut out 
from the rim and retreating into the bulging 
portion of the shuttle shell, with an out 
wardly flaring bobbin holder shell, loosely 
mounted upon a journal pin in the shuttle 
and kept stationary, on one side cut away to 
form a loop passage and the other side ex 
tending its periphery to the shuttle shell, to 
form a thread-guard for guiding the thread 
loops over the bobbin on the face side of the 
shuttle, substantially as set forth. 
2. The device consisting of the latch or 
cross piece Z, the spindle X, movable cen 
trally through the latch and carrying the 
locking plate q, with the hook gy, the parts 
being constructed as set forth and the device 
mounted upon the bracket S, substantially as 
set forth for the purpose specified. 
KARL SIGURD KLOGEL. 
Witnesses: 
WARREN B. HUTCHINSON, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
So 
55 
65 
75 
90 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524163.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 524,163. 
Patented Aug. 7, 1894, 
J. W. COLEMAN. 
w 
ADJUSTABLE PARTITION FOR PACKING BOXEs, &c. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
74 firesses. 
CAA,2-ca. 
to, You a. 
 
 
E NORRIS PEERs co., Photo-Ho, WAsinator, .c 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
 
JAMES W. COLEMAN, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
ADJUSTABLE PARTITION FOR PACKING-BOXEs, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 524,168, dated August 7, 1894, 
Application filed August 1, 1893, Serial No. 482,108, (No model.) 
O 
25 
30 p 
To oil whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES W. COLEMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of 
California, have invented a new and useful 
Adjustable Partition for Packing - Boxes, 
Travelers' Trunks, &c., of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to a novel construc 
tion of movable partitions adapted for pack 
ing-boxes, trunks, portmanteaus and boxes 
for sporting goods such as fishing and hunt 
ing tackle, and the object of my invention is 
to provide a means for separating and com 
pressing the articles into a small compass 
and keep them in place, whereby great econ 
omy in space is had and the contents of the 
box easily reached at all times. 
To this end my invention consists in pro 
viding such receptacles withinwardly formed 
grooves along which lugs connected to the 
partition-plates move; the latter being pro 
vided with centrally arranged rods or thumb 
screws the lower ends of which engage with 
a base-plate and hold the partition-plates 
firmly in place, all of which together with the 
details of construction and operation will be 
hereinafter fully set forth and described. 
In the accompanying drawings which form 
art of this specification and to which refer 
ence is had by letters:-Figure 1 is a perspec 
tive view of a box embodying my invention 
with movable partitions in place and one end 
removed. Fig. 2 is a vertical transverse sec 
tion of the same. Fig. 3 is a perspective view 
of one of the sections. 
The partitions A A may be composed of 
metal or other suitable material and are pro 
vided with split lugs B B B* B* riveted to 
edges at each end of the plate, the faces of 
the upper lugs B B being made flush with the 
top edge of the partition so that it will move 
without friction in the groove assigned for it 
to be hereinafter described. 
Each partition is provided with fixed cen 
tral sockets D D* in which is set a screw rod 
E having a head E. on the upper end for 
turning the rod. The lower end portion is 
screw-threaded and fits a threaded socket in 
the lower block D. The end of this screw 
portion rests on a bearing plate or strip F 
fixed along the bottom of the box, case or re 
ceptacle, so that when the rod is screwed 
down the upward pressure exerted by the 
screw upon the partition causes the lugs BB 
- 
- 
As thus constructed it will be seen that 65 
to bind in the grooves CC and hold the par 
tition firmly in place. The bearing strip Fis 
fixed to the bottom of the box or receptacle 
as shown in Fig. 1 to take the pressure of the 
screw and prevent it from cutting into the 6o 
bottom of the box. 
The height of the partitions may be such as 
to leave space between them and the cover 
of the case for rods, landing-net, &c. 
each partition is movable along the grooves 
and independent of its fellow and that the 
whole interior of the box or case can be di 
vided into smaller spaces and the contents 
of the sub-divisions be compressed and made to 
compact by exerting pressure upon the plate 
of such compartment and turning down the 
binding-rod or thumb-screw. It will also be 
seen that the contents of one division can be 
removed without disturbing any other com- 5 
partment of the series. 
When a removable tray is provided in a 
box or receptacle to which my movable par 
tition is applied the ledges for the tray will 
be set just above the upper groove in the 8o 
sides, as shown at G Figs. 1 and 2. 
. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
The combination with a box or similar re- 85 
ceptacle having grooves in the inner walls or 
faces of its opposite Vertical sides, of a mov 
able. Vertical partition provided on its oppo 
site ends. With lugs or projections adapted to 
fit and slide in said grooves and a clamping 9o 
or locking device on the partition consisting 
of a vertical rod rotatable in guides on one 
face of the partition, its foot or end at the 
bottom of the partition adapted to bear 
against the bottom of the box, a head on the 95 
top-end accessible from the top of the parti 
tion and a screw-threaded portion on the 
body of the rod fitted to a corresponding, 
threaded socketin one of the guides; whereby 
the partition is locked in position by the roo 
downward thrust of the rod against the said 
bottom when the rod is rotated and the said 
locking means is operative from the upper 
part of the box. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I ro5 
have hereunto set my hand and seal. 
JAS. V. COLEMAN. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
C. W. M. SMITH, 
EDWARDE, OSBORN, 
35 
40 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524263.txt	(No Model.) 
R. s. MURRAY & F. W. EAMEs. 
MACHINE FOR DROPPING LIQUID MATERIAL INTO MOLDS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 524,263. - 
F G: . 
 
 
His NE. 
|y| 
E 
S 
 
(at 
(sERI 
ES 
Si 
EE 
 
o 
M17/vassas. 
1. 
d 
/WVewrops. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 524,263. 
R. S. MURRAY & F. W. EAMES. 
MACHINE FOR DROPPING LIQUID MATERIAL INTO MOLDs, 
Patented Aug. 7, 1894, 
WZwesses. 
Cf. /wv wers. 
 
THE WORRIs PETERs co, PHOTO-LITHo, WASHINGTON, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT S. MURRAY AND FREDERICK. W. EAMES, OF LONDON, ENGLAND; 
SAID EAMES ASSIGNOR TO SAID MURRAY. 
. 
MACHINE FOR DROPPING LIQUID MATERIAL INTO MOLDs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 524,268, dated August 7, 1894. 
Application filed February 5, 1894, Serial No. 499,179. (No model.) 
- 
To all, whom, it may concern 
Be it known that we, ROBERT STUARTMUR 
RAY, manufacturer, a citizen of the United 
States of America, residing at 4 The Terrace, 
Camden Square, London, England, and FRED 
ERICK WILLIAMEAMEs, confectioner, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at 36 Shepherdess Walk, City Road, London, 
England, have invented Improvements in 
O Machines for Dropping Liquid Material into 
Molds, of which the followingisa specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
machinery or apparatus for casting (i. e. 
dropping or running out) materials in a liq 
uid or semi-liquid or such like state such as 
the cream or other material in a molten or 
soft state used for making gum jellies, fond 
ants, creams or other sweetmeats, &c., and the 
object of this said invention is to produce a 
hand operated machine capable of rapidly 
and cheaply casting a number of such con 
fections. 
Our invention consists of certain novel fea 
tures for accomplishing this result hereinaf 
ter described and claimed. 
Reference is had to the accompanying draw 
ings, wherein the same parts are indicated by 
the same letters. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the stockbox 
mounted on wheels running on rails. Fig. 2 
is a plan of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an end view look 
ing in the direction of the arrow ac, in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a cross sectional view on line 1-1 
Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a view of the series of plun 
gers removed from the stock box. 
a is the stock box or vessel containing the 
material to be cast. 
b is the framework or carriage in which said 
stockboxis carried-the top part of the frame 
work b having a flanged edge b' all round in 
side forming a seating or resting edge upon 
which the flange a' of the stockbox rests and 
is there secured in position by the turn but 
tons & so that this stock box can be thus read 
ily dropped into its carriage and secured 
therein by said turn buttons 2 or easily re 
moved therefrom for cleaning or other pur 
poses. Or said stock box a may be arranged 
and mounted in said framework or carriage 
So in any other equivalent or suitable manner. 
c care the grooved wheels on the axles c' 
journaled in the said frame b. 
d is a hand wheel keyed or otherwise rig 
idly fixed to the axle c' in any suitable man 
ner so that on rotating the wheel d by the 
hand of the operator the wheels c on the same 
axle as wheel d will be revolved and conse 
quently the carriage b and stock box a will 
be carried along the rail track provided for 
same. 
e e are the guide rails upon which the 
grooved wheels c run. 
ff are the funnel-shaped outlets which may 
be either separately screwed or otherwise 
mounted in the bottom of the stock box a, or 
said outlets f may all be carried in a remov. 
able plate or bottom sliding on or otherwise 
Suitably attached to and forming the bottom 
of the stock box a. 
g are the plungers corresponding in num 
ber to outlets f 
fand which in the case illus 
trated control said outlets so that when raised 
as hereinafter explained they permit the ma 
terial to escape through said outlets and when 
lowered they close said outlets and prevent 
any further escape of the material in the 
stock box Ct. These plungers g are each se 
cured by any suitable means such as by nuts 
h to the horizontal bar i-this said bar i is 
attached by any suitable means such as a 
Winged nut, turn buttons, &c., to the handle 
verbars i which latter at their front end are 
connected by the handle bar k and at their 
other end are hinged at l to the support b on 
the aforesaid frame b. By lifting the bar i by 
means of the handle k it will thus be seen 
that the whole series of plungers g are simul 
taneously raised and thereby the whole se 
ries of outlets fare simultaneously opened 
While by lowering said handlek said outlets 
90 
are all simultaneously closed, 
by J are handles attached to the stock box . 
C. by means of which same can be lifted in or 
out of the carriage b-the bar i and series of 
plungers g being first moved clear out of the 
Way by detaching the same from the handle 
bars j and then turning the latter back on 
the hinge pins l and then lifting out bar i and 
plungers g thereon. 
The molds or receptacles into oronto which 
45 
35 
40 
 
55 
75 
95 
IOs 
2 
524,263 
O 
the material is to be cast are placed between 
the guide rails e which latter may extend 
for any length required and these molds, &c., 
may advantageously be of the well-known 
flexible character now in use for dropping 
sweetmeats and furthermore the position of 
each hole or depression in each row of holes 
in said mold exactly correspond respectively 
with one of the outletsf, and each row or oth 
erwise of holes corresponds to the row or oth 
erwise of outlets f. 
The guide bars or longitudinal sleepers v 
carrying the guide rails e in combination with 
the lower longitudinal sleepers ) form a guide 
way or means to adjust and keep the molds 
(which exactly fit in between the guide bars 
w-resting on the sleepers v) in the proper 
position. 
The operation is as follows: The stock box 
a is filled or partially filled with material 
when ready to be cast and the stock box is 
placed in position on the traveling carriage 
b. The operator now takes hold of the han 
dle ic with one hand and takes hold of the 
driving wheel d with the other hand and by 
the latter moves the stock box at into the de 
sired position over the molds and then with 
the other hand raises the plunger and thereby 
drops or casts some of the material from 
each of the outlets f simultaneously the re 
turn downward movement of the plungers g 
stopping these outlets, and also serving to 
force out or assist in forcing out the material 
from each outlet-if required. By revolving 
the driving wheel d the operator now moves 
the stock box so as to bring the outlets over 
the next row or otherwise of holes in the 
mold which are simultaneously filled as be 
fore and so on until all the rows (or other 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
wise) in the mold are filled-then the stock 
box is moved on over the next mold which is 
quickly filled as before while meantime each 
mold as the same is filled is removed from 
between the guide rails and replaced by 
empty molds. The operation of this appa 
ratus, replacing the molds, &c., being easily 
and cheaply effected (by boys or girls--if de 
sired.) It will thus be seen that the move 
ment of the stock box over the molds and the 
means for simultaneously dropping the ma 
terial from a number of outlets respectively 
are both independently under the hand con 
trol of the operator and this separate and in 
dependent hand control constitutes a very es 
sential feature of the present invention. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
In an apparatus of the character described, 
the combination with a traveling stock box 
for viscous liquid provided with a series of 
outlet openings in its bottom, of a series of 
tapering plungers for closing said openings, 
a bar connecting the tops of said plungers, a 
hand lever hinged to the top of said box and 
detachably connected with said bar and 
adapted to regulate the movement of said 
plungers, and a hand knob for moving said 
traveling stock box, substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
R. S. MURRAY. 
F. W. EAMES. 
Witnesses: 
8, Southampton Buildings, London, Eng 
HENRY BIRKBECK, 
Cl10. 
GEORGE W. KEY, 
31 Ohurch Street, London, N., England. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524364.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 524,364, 
C. W. WALKER. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 14, 1894. 
W2 (2 esses; 
f (Ge424. 
Izverz (or: 
64.244. 4- 4auter 
the NORRIS PETERs co, PHoTo-LTHo, washingtoN. c. 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
C. W. WALKER 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 524,364, 
 
Patented Aug. 14, 1894, 
We / esses: 
432424. 
M 20-7-6 
I 
Zor 
64% (752. 
73: 0-674 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 524,364, 
 
C. W. WALKER. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
. 
Patented Aug. 14, 1894, 
22 
sa 
1722-e 72 for: 
64a...E.222 
 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
C. W. WALKER, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1894, 
I. 
zor: 
44a:4,232 
73. 
QA. 
(No Model.) 
No. 524,364, 
A2 to esses : 
75.4 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 524,364, 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
C. W. WALKER. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Aug. 14, 1894, 
s i& 
O 
O 
SaSassas SS 
SaaSaaSaaSSSas 
W2 tiless es: 
(2 (642-4. 
ef/ D--z-z- 
172 ve. 724 or : 
&a 4-4 424/zo 
7: Q-67aa. 
rte Norris PETERs co, PHOTo-Litho. was: NGTON, D. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. WALKER, OF STRANG, NEBRASKA. 
TYPE-WRITING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 524,364, dated August 14, 1894. 
Application filed April 18, 1893, Serial No. 470,863, (No model.) 
leuram-nix 
55 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs W. WALKER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Strang, in the county of Fillmore and State of 
Nebraska, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Type-Writing Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of type 
Writing machines in which a pad is employed 
and consists in the details of construction. 
shown in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1, is an isometrical view of my im 
proved typewriter. Fig. 2, is an end eleva 
tion of the upper portion thereof in its nor 
mal position. Fig. 3, is a similar view in 
which the platen is tilted to expose the print 
ing. Fig. 4, is a plan view of the escapement. 
Figs. 5, and 6 are elevations of the type bar. 
Figs. 7 and 8 are isometrical representations 
of the parts composing the type bar. Fig. 9, 
is an isometrical view of the upper portion of 
the typewriter showing the support for the 
carriage, and a paper guide secured thereto. 
Fig. 10, is an isometrical view of the inner 
face of one of the sides showing the spring 
arrangement for moving the carriage during 
the process of printing. Fig. 11, is an iso 
metrical view of the mechanism for tilting 
the platen to expose the writing. Fig. 12, is 
an isometrical representation of the manner 
of constructing the key levers, showing their 
connection with the keys, also showing the 
spacing device. Fig. 13, is a horizontal length 
wise section, through the key levers, upon an 
enlarged scale. 
The main frame of my improved typewriter 
consists of sides, 1, rear end 2, and front end 
3, properly secured together. The front up 
perfaces of the sides are provided with steps 
ascending from the front, and key guides 4, 
are located upon these steps and secured 
thereto. 
The top 5, of the machine is provided with 
a central opening within which is seated the 
metallic support 6, for the type bars, carriage 
and necessary connections. 
Centrally over the opening in the metallic 
support 6, and some distance above its upper 
face is secured a disk 7, by legs 8. To the 
upper face of this disk and transverse of the 
main frame of the machine is secured a cy 
lindrical rod 9, and forward of this rod is se 
cured a paper shield 10, having its front edge 
curved upward, and in front of the shield is 
secured a roller.11. 
The paper carriage consists of the length 
wise bars 12, and 13, and end bars 14, provided 
with suitable bearings for the platen 15. 
The end of the platen at the left hand of the 
machine is provided with a ratchet wheel 16, 
and to its opposite end is secured a knob 17, 
by which it may be rotated. From the under 
side of the rear lengthwise bar 12, is secured 
a section of a tube 18, having its lower por 
tion cut away, the cut away portion being less 
than half of the tube. This tube is slipped 
over the rod 9, thereby forming a connection 
between the paper carriage and rod 9, con- . . 
sequently with the main frame of the ma 
chine. The front lengthwise bar 13, rests 
upon the roller 11, secured to the upper face 
of the circular support 7. The upper face of 
the front lengthwise bar is marked with divis 
ions, forming a scale and from the center of 
its length rises a stationary pointer 19. To 
the underside of the end bars 14 are secured 
bearings 20, which form supports for a paper 
feed roller 21, located in rear of the platen 
and in contact therewith, and a paper guide 
22, has a connection with this paper roller, 
in order that the paper may properly enter 
between the face of the paper feed roller and 
the platen. 
From the upper face and left hand of the 
paper carriage, rise arms 23, connected by a 
tube 24. This tube is provided with vertical 
lengthwise slots 25. A dog 26, is located in 
the vertical slots and a spring 27, is located 
in the tube pressing against the dog. A plun 
ger 28, is located in the tube surrounding the 
plunger by means of which the dog may be 
moved in the lengthwise direction of the tube. 
The lower end of the dog engages the toothed 
ratchet wheel 16. By pushing in the plunger 
the dog will engage the toothed ratchet mov 
ing the platen a double space, that is, the dis 
tance of two teeth, and when a single space 
is required, a pivoted latch 29, is turned up, 
and around the shank of the plunger, limit 
ing the extent of the movement of the plun 
ger, consequently the extent of the movement 
of the platen. From the rear lengthwise bar 
12, of the paper carriage rise right angle arms 
95 
- 
IOC 
75 
... O 
15 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
 
524,864 
o 
25 
35 
75 
30, extending upward and rearward and con 
nected by a transverse rod 31. 
To a suitable support is connected a lever, 
consisting of arms 32 and 33. The longer 
arm engaging the transverse rod on the front 
side thereof. To the shorter arm is connected 
a vertical rod 34, having its lower end con 
nected to a bar 35, pivoted to the rear end of 
the main frame. A lever 36 has a pivotal 
Connection with one side of the main frame 
and to its front end is pivoted a key 37, its 
short end resting under the end 38, of the bar 
35. A spring 39, is connected to this bar 35 
and to the main frame. By this arrangement 
We have a connection between the key 37 and 
the paper carriage. By pressing upon the 
key 37, the bar 35, will be moved upon its pivot, 
drawing down upon the rod 34, against the ac 
tion of the spring 39. This drawing down 
movement will carry the lever from the posi 
tion shown at Fig. 2, to that shown at Fig. 3, 
causing the paper carriage to tilt upon its 
connection with the rod 9, exposing to view 
the printed matter as shown at Fig. 3, and 
upon releasing the pressure upon the key 37, 
the carriage will return to its normal posi 
tion. This key is located near the keyboard 
and consequently within easy reach of the 
operator. 
To the circular support 7, in front of the 
paper carriage I have secured a pointer, con 
sisting of its support 40, and the pointer 
proper 4l. This pointer lies in contact with 
the front edge of the front lengthwise bar of 
the paper carriage and when the paper car 
riage is tilted to the position shown at Fig. 
3, this pointer will, by reason of its upper end 
being Weighted, move in contact with the pa 
per as shown in said figure, pointing out the 
exact location of the point at which the type 
print, and by its use the location of any let 
ter may be easily ascertained, and upon low 
ering the paper carriage it will assume its 
normal position as shown at Fig. 1. 
By employing the fixed paper guide 10, the 
paper will readily feed into the proper posi 
tion to be printed upon and the stationary 
pointer 19, will prevent the paper from fall 
ing forward. 
From the upper face of the metallic sup 
port 6, rises an arm 42, supporting a roller 
43, at its upper end, over which passes a cord 
44, connected at one end to the paper car 
riage and at its other end to a wheel 45, se 
cured to the inner face of one of the sides of 
the main frame as shown at Fig. 10. To the 
face of this wheel is secured a cam shaped 
wheel 46, to the greatest diameter of which 
is secured a cord 47, and to this cord is se 
cured a spring 48, having its opposite end se 
cured to the main frame. By means of this 
arrangement I exert a uniform pulling strain 
upon the carriage, that is, as the spring loses 
its force the leverage or its purchase over the 
wheel 45, is increased. 
To the rear of the lengthwise bar of the 
paper carriage is pivoted a toothed rack 49, 
by the arms 50, and at Figs. 2, 3 and 4, I 
have shown the escapement mechanism, 
which consists of a stationary dog 51, and a 
movable dog 52, said dogs having a sliding 
engagement, and when the toothed rack is in 
its normal position its teeth will lie in en 
gagement with the movable dog, preventing 
the movement of the paper carriage and dur 
ing the printing process this toothed rack 
bar is raised and lowered to be in engage 
ment with either of the dogs, and when it is 
in engagement with the stationary dog, the 
movable dog is drawn in the lengthwise di 
rection of the toothed rack by the spring 53, 
keeping it in line with the stationary dog SO 
that when the ratchet bar descends its teeth 
will come in contact with the movable dog, 
and the spring force exerted upon the paper 
carriage being greater than the spring force 
exerted upon the movable dog, the paper car 
riage will be moved the extent of the move 
ment of the movable dog, this operation is 
repeated at each impression of the type or 
operation of the space bar. 
It will be noticed at Figs. 2 and 3, that when 
the paper carriage is tilted upon its pivotal 
connection with its support, the ratchet bar 
will be moved rearward and in order to pre 
vent the disengagement of the toothed rack 
with the dogs the rear edge of the ratchet bar. 
will come in contact with the uprising bar 
54, which has a connection with the dogs, and 
as the toothed rack moves rearward it will 
carry the dogs with it and upon the return of 
the carriage to its normal position, a spring 
55, secured to the stationary portion of the 
machine and exerting its force against the 
uprising bar 54, will force the dogs forward, 
always holding the dogs in engagement with 
the toothed rack during the horizontal move 
ment of the ratchet bar. 
The escapement is effected by a rod 56, 
moving upward against the under face of the 
toothed rack causing the toothed rack to 
move from its engagement with the movable 
dog, to the stationary dog as shown at Fig. 2. 
The mechanism for inparting this vertical 
movement to the rack will now be explained. 
At Fig. 12, I have shown the construction 
of a universal bar, which consists of a plat 
form 57, pivoted to the rear end of the sides 
of the main frame and extending forward 
covering the space occupied by the keys. A 
spring 58, has a connection with the upper 
face of this universal bar and to the under 
face of the upper portion of the main frame 
so that an upward influence is exerted upon 
the bar. Underneath this universal bar is 
pivoted an inclined rocking bar 59, by pivots 
60, having an engagement with the ends of 
the main frame. A screw 61, having an en 
gagement with the tilting bar rests against 
the under face of the universal bar, by means 
of which the proper adjustment may be given 
to the toothed rack in order to allow the 
proper escapement. The rod 56, which oper 
ates upon the ratchet bar, has a connection 
45 
So 
55 
65 
9 O 
95 
CO 
lo5 
Io 
I I5 
I 25 
524,864 
3 
O 
2 O. 
with this tilting bar and a spring 62, sur 
rounds this rod, its upper end resting against 
the under face of the top of the machine and 
its lower end against a tilting bar hold the 
parts in the position shown at Fig. 12. The 
space key 63, shown at Figs. 1, and 12, passes 
through an opening in the upper face of the 
machine and its lower end having a pivotal 
connection with a bar 64, the other end of 
which has a pivotal connection with the front 
end of the main frame. 
It will be seen that by depressing the space 
bar, the universal bar will be correspondingly 
depressed which will rock the tilting bar upon 
its pivot, causing the rod 56, to move in an 
upward vertical direction, causing the toothed 
rack to move from its engagement with the 
movable dog to the stationary dog and upon 
the release of the space key the parts will as 
sume the position shown at Fig. 12, allowing 
the toothed rack to assume its normal posi 
tion shown at Fig. 2. 
At Figs, 12 and 13 I have shown my im 
proved construction of key lever, which con 
sists in locating a series of levers upon the 
same axial center, that is the first lever 65, 
may be a tube or solid lever and upon this 
first lever is located a tube 66, forming the 
second, and upon the second tube is located 
a third tube 67, and so on until the required 
number has been attained. In this instance 
I have located eight as shown at Fig. 13. 
From one end of each of these levers is per 
manently secured an arm 68, and upon the 
other end is set screwed a collar, from which 
projects an arm 69. The arms 69, have a piv 
otai connection with the keys 70, as shown at 
Fig. 12, and the solid arms have a connection 
with the type bars as shown at Figs. 5 and 6. 
By this arrangement I am able to locate a 
series of key levers within a very small com 
pass and each one having an oscillatory 
movement, giving the least possible friction. 
The stems of the keys rest in contact with the 
upper face of the universal bar 57, so that 
when any one key is depressed the universal 
bar will be correspondingly depressed which 
will operate the escape mechanism as before 
described in relation to the space bar. 
To the periphery of the circular support 7, 
is secured a series of radial type bar sup 
porting blocks 71, by means of a screw 72, so 
that any one block may be removed without 
disturbing the others. My type bar consists 
of two bars 73, and 74, of sheet metal con 
nected together at their upper faces for a por 
tion of their length and having one end piv 
oted to the blocks 71, so the block will lie be 
tween the arms, and to the free ends of these 
bars is pivoted a type carrying arm 75, hav 
ing the type located upon its free end 76. 
The lower type bar 74, is provided with an 
extension 77, to which is pivoted a link 78, 
connecting it with the arm 68, extending from 
45 
the key levers. The circular support 7, is 65 
provided with a central, conical opening 79, 
through which the type pass and come in con 
tact with the under face of the platen. 
At Fig.6,Ihave shown the type barin its nor 
mal position and its type resting against the 
ink pad 80. This pad being supported from the 
metallic support 6, as shown at Fig.1 and in 
this instance is in four sections, each section 
made removable for re-inking. By depress 
ing the keys the type bar will be moved from 
its position shown at Fig. 6, to that shown at 
Fig. 5, leaving its imprint upon the paper and 
upon releasing the keys it will drop to its nor 
mal position. It will be seen by this construc 
tion of type bar, the arms being slotted and 
pivoted to their support, that the support 
forms a guide for the type bar in its move 
ment and prevents lateral movement of the 
bar and will consequently present the type 
at the required position at each depression of 
the key. 
When it is desired to set the carriage the 
operator will lift upon the toothed rack, re 
leasing it in its engagement with the dogs, 
when the carriage may be moved in either di 
rection transversely of the machine. 
- 
75 
95 
IOO 
TO 
I 15 
I claim as my invention- 
1. In a type writing machine, a paper car 
riage having a vertical oscillatory movement, 
arms extending upward and rearward from 
the center, upon which the carriage is piv 
oted, and at the end thereof a rod connecting 
the arms, a pivoted hook engaging the rod 
and a key lever for operating the hook for 
imparting the vertical oscillatory movement 
to the carriage. 
2. In a type writing machine, the combina 
tion of a paper carriage, a toothed rack hav 
ing a pivotal connection therewith and capa 
ble of a horizontal bodily movement, a piv 
oted dog and a stationary dog and a movable 
base supporting said dogs to move in unison 
with the horizontal movement of the toothed 
rack. 
3. In a typewriting machine, the combina 
tion of a paper carriage, a toothed rack, an 
escapement device, a universal bar capable 
of a vertical oscillatory movement, a tilting 
bar located beneath the universal bar and 
operated thereby, a connection between the 
tilting bar and toothed rack, and keys for op 
erating the universal bar. 
4. In a type Writing machine, a type bar 
consisting of two bars having a pivotal con 
nection with a stationary support and a piv 
otal connection with the type carrying arm, 
one end of each of the bars lying on each side 
of the stationary support, forming a guide for 
the bar. 
CHARLES W. WALKER, 
Witnesses: 
A. O. BEHEL, 
E. BEHEL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524464.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 524,464, 
 
W. M. GRISHAM. 
FENCE, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1894, 
Witnesses 
y 
pesscs 
- Zzza/6.6 res/eeze 
y 7&zs Aftrpeys, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILEY M. GRISHAM, OF WINCHESTER, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CHARLES H. TOWNSEND AND JOSEPH E. EDDINGS, OF SAME PLACE. 
FENCE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 524,464, dated August 14, 1894. 
Application filed November 28, 1893, Serial No, 492,295, (No model.) 
o 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILEY M. GRISHAM, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Win 
chester, in the county of Scott and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful 
Fence, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
fences, and to that particular class thereof 
known as portable; and the objects in view. 
are to provide a very simple fence of cheap 
construction, that may be readily set up or 
taken apart and packed for transportation, 
and which by reason of its peculiar construc 
tion will be rigid and strong as a fence. 
With these and other objects in view the 
invention consists in certain features of Con 
struction hereinafter specified and particu 
larly pointed out in the claim. 
Referring to the drawings:-Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of a fence embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section of 
one of the posts. Fig. 3 is a perspective view 
Fig. 4 is a 
of one end of one of the panels. 
detail in perspective of one of the cap or base 
plates. 
Ilike numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
In practicing my invention I employ any 
number of panels and also a corresponding 
number of posts. Each panel consists of a Se 
ries of horizontal rails, in this instance three, 
indicated as 1, which are clamped near their 
opposite ends by pairs of vertical cleats 2, 
whose ends extend above the aforesaid rails 
and are preferably connected by longitudinal 
wires 3. Of the posts employed each consists 
of an upper cap and a lower base-casting 5, the 
same having formed upon their inner sides 
blocks 6 arranged near the ends of their re 
spective castings and disposed at an obtuse 
angle to each other. 
, Interposed between the cap and base-plates 
are pairs of transversely opposite Vertical 
standards 7, and the same are located at op 
posite sides of the blocks, or, in other Words, 
the blocks serve to space the standards of 
each pair. These standards are connected at 
their upper and lower ends by a plurality of 
transversely disposed clamping-bolts 8, which 5o 
also pass through perforations 8 in the blocks, 
So that the standards embrace the blocks and 
Secure the cap and base-plates in position, the 
whole being bound snugly together. A cen 
tral transverse bolt 9 passes through each 55 
pair of standards, and the same is removably 
engaged by the notched ends 1 of a projec 
tion. The fence panel is provided at each 
end with a vertical series of projections to fit 
between the standards 7; and these projec- 6o 
tions may be either extensions of the rails 1 
or separate pieces where wires are employed 
in place of rails. 
It will be seen that when the fence is in po 
sition it is of zigzag pattern, and possesses all 65 
the strength and stability of this well known 
class of fence. It may be readily taken apart 
and set up on any part of a farm, or may be 
conveniently packed for shipment or storage, 
as the case may require. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
In a fence, the combination, with the panels, 
provided at each end with a vertical series 
of projections, one of the projections being 75 
notched, of intermediate posts, each of which 
consists of an upper and a lower metal plate 
having formed upon their inner sides inte 
gral perforated space-blocks arranged at ob 
tuse angles, a pair of opposite clamping stand- so 
ards arranged at opposite sides of each space 
block and between the plates, clamping-bolts 
through the standards and blocks, and the 
intermediate transverse bolts through the 
standards removably engaging the notches of 85 
the projections substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
o 
WILEY M. GRISHAMI. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPHD. HENSON. 
CHARLES CRISP. 
3O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524564.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 524,564. 
G. C. RICHARDS. 
FRUIT BOX, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1894. 
 
 
  
 
 
| 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
LSSSSSSSSS<<< 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE C. RICHARDS, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
FRUIT-BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 524,564, dated August 14, 1894. 
Application filed May 14, 1894. Serial No, 51227, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE C. RICHARDs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of 
9alifornia, have invented an Improvement in 
Fruit-Boxes; and I hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same. 
My invention relates to an improved con 
Eetion for boxes for the transportation of 
U. 
It consists in certain details of construction 
which will be more fully explained by refer 
ence to the accompanying drawings,in which 
Figure 1 is a view of a box of my construc 
tion, a part being broken away, showing the 
interior. Fig. 2 is a transverse section show 
ing the arrangement of the boxes for trans 
portation. 
In the construction of fruit boxes for trans 
portation, it is customary to nail the sides 
upon the end pieces in such a manner that they 
do not extend quite to the upper and lower 
edges of these end pieces, the bottom and top 
being nailed on so as to extend approximately 
to the full width of the end pieces. Chan 
nels or spaces are left between the two, upon 
the sides, for the admission of air to circulate 
through the contents of the box. This con 
struction is objectionable because when the 
boxes are piled up in the cars for transporta 
tion, and what are known as car strips are 
laid across the tops of the boxes to support 
the next tier, they press the top and bottom 
of the boxes inwardly on account of the short 
ness of the sides until the fruit is pressed and 
In my construction I have improved the 
boxes by SO constructing them that each box 
provides a support for these car strips and 
prevents any pressure upon the top and bot 
tom of the box. I also subdivide the interior 
of the box into cells to separate each article 
of fruit from the others, and provide an im 
proved method for ventilating the whole. 
AA are the end pieces of the box made of suf 
ficient thickness to receive the nailsby which 
the sides B B are secured to them. These 
sides are made of one or more boards each 
separated from each other, when more than 
One is used, sufficiently to allow air to enter 
through the slot or channel thus formed. 
damaged. 
t 
t 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
55 
65 
For cherries, strawberries and small fruits, 
the boxes are made shallow and the sides con 
sist of a single narrow strip. The upper and 
lower edges of these side pieces extend above 
and below the top and bottom of the end 
pieces a distance equal to the thickness of the 
top and bottom pieces C and D, so that when 
the top and bottom are in place, they will be 
approximately flush with the upper and lower 
edges of the side pieces. The top and bot 
tom are also made of two boards, each slightly 
separated along the center to admit of a cir 
culation of air, and they are sufficiently nar 
rower than the distance between the sides to 
leave channels E between the sides and the 
edges of the top and bottom for the free ad 
mission of air at these points. 
FF are transverse strips extending across 
the top boards, at each end, and holding them 
together. These strips project far enough to 
rest upon the upper edges of the side boards 
as shown. It will be seen that when the boxes 
are piled up in tiers, one above the other, 
these end pieces will act to support the boxes 
above, and what are known as the car strips 
which are laid across at intermediate points, 
will rest upon the upper edges of the sides of 
the boxes, and will make no pressure what 
ever upon the tops and bottoms, and these 
latter will, therefore, remain straight and will 
not be pressed in upon the contained fruit. 
This construction makes the boxes stronger 
to resist pressure, and enables me to make the 
boxes of much thinner material than ordinary 
which is a considerable saving in lumber. 
The interior of the box is fitted with par 
titions fitted to and crossing each other as 
shown at G, thus dividing the box into little 
spaces of a size proportionate to the kind of 
fruit which is to be transported, such as 
peaches, plums, apricots, &c. When used for 
the larger fruits, each of these pieces is in 
tended to contain a single article of fruit 
which may also be wrapped in tissue paper, 
if desired. For the smaller fruits, a quantity 
sufficient to fill it is placed in each compart 
ment. Each tier of these partitions Gis sepa 
rated from the one above by a horizontal par 
tition H. The essential feature of these hori 
Zontal partitions is a series of openings I 
which are made at such points that they will 
lie over the meeting angles of the chambers 
3o 
85 
go 
do 
2 
524,564 
formed by the partitions so that each open 
ing acts as a ventilator for the meeting an 
gles of four adjacent compartments, and no 
openings are made directly over the center 
of these compartments where the pressure 
and weight of the fruit lies. 
By reason of the vertical channels made in 
the bottoms of the boxes, instead of the side 
edges, I have found that a better circulation 
of air takes place and the holes made through 
the horizontal partitions are in such position 
that the circulation is unimpeded as it passes 
up through the corners which are not occu 
pied by the fruit. 
The vertical strips which form the compart 
ments, support the horizontal partitions and 
tiers above, and as they stand on edge, have 
sufficient stiffness to relieve the bottom of the 
box, of much of the weight, and thus prevent 
its sagging when lifted. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
An improved fruit box comprising the ends 
thereof, the sides formed of boards or strips 
separated along their adjoining edges and 
projecting at their opposite edges beyond the 
o 
20 
25 
top and bottom of the ends a distance equal 
to the thickness of the top and bottom of the 
box, said top and bottom being formed of 
boards or strips separated along their meet 
ing edges and having their outer edgester 
minating short of the inner walls of the pro 
jecting portions of said sides to form ventilat 
ing spaces, strips extending across the ends 
of the top and bottom boards or strips and Se 
cured to said ends of the box with their outer 
ends resting upon the top edges of said sides, 
interior partitions dividing the box into a se 
ries of compartments in tiers one above the 
other, and horizontal partitions extending be 
tween each tier of compartments and having 
openings made in them coincident with the 
angles of the compartments above and below 
whereby each opening communicates with 
the four adjacent compartments, substan 
tially as herein described. 
In witness whereof I have here into Set my 
hand. 
GEORGE C. RICHARDS. 
30 
35 
O 
45 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. STRONG, 
S. H. NOURSE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524664.txt	(No Model.) 
F. A. BREWSTER, 
ELECTRIC BET, 
No. 524,664, 
Patented Aug. 14, 1894, 
- MINESSES- 
--NMENT OR 
4-ye 2.4- 
, %a. 
E airs reless ca. Photo-like. WASHINeston, c. 9 
3 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
FLORA A. BREWSTER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR TO HENRY L. 
FAIRCHILD, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRIC BELT 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 524,664, dated August 14, 1894. 
Application filed June 2, 1894. Serial No. 513,234 (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FLORA. A. BREWSTER, 
of the city of Baltimore and State of Mary. 
land, have invented certain Improvements in 
Electric Belts, of which the following is a 
specification. 
In the description of my improved electric 
belt which follows, reference is made to the 
accompanying drawings forming a parthere 
of, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the im 
proved belt. Fig. 2 is a top view of the front 
Support. Fig. 8 is a section of Fig. 1 taken 
on the dotted line a-ac. Figs. 4, 5 and 6 are, 
respectively, a front, a rear and an edge view 
of the battery forming a part of the invention. 
Referring now to the drawings, A is the 
front Support and B the rear support of the 
belt, connected by straps C and buckles a. 
The front support A is gored at the top and 
bottom So as to make it fit the lower part of the 
abdomen of the Wearer and it is formed pri 
marily of two thicknesses of drilling, sateen 
Or any other suitable material sewed together 
at the lower edge, and at the ends only, so as 
to form a well pocket D. 
Within the pocket D is situated a remov 
able battery which as an entirety is denoted 
by E. This battery consists of two thick 
nesses of felt b, see Figs. 3 and 6, which are 
respectively a longitudinal section, and an 
edge view, to which are secured zinc plates c, 
and Copper plates d'. The copper plates are 
shown with lined surfaces, and the zinc plates 
With plain surfaces. 
The plates c and d are fastened to the outer 
Surfaces of the felt pieces, and to each copper 
strip is riveted a metallic strip f which is 
passed through the two thicknesses of felt, 
and riveted to the zinc plate which is oppo 
site an adjacent copper plate. The opposite 
or opposing copper and zinc plates are held 
together and to the two thicknesses of felt, by 
means of stitches g which pass through the 
pieces of felt. 
The end zinc plate to the left, and the end 
copper plate to the right, are longer than the 
others and folded so as to form hooksh, which 
Serve as means to connect the battery with 
the contact plate F and the electrode G, re 
spectively. 
The contact plate F and the electrode Gare 
confined in pockets respectively denoted byf 
and k which are not in communication with 
the main pocket except at the upper ends. 
A second electrode His secured within the 
material of the rear support B of the belt, and 
it is connected by a silk covered cord O Com 
posed of copper wires, to the contact plate F. 
The interior of the pocket D is lined with 
oiled silk, rubber or any other suitable Water 
and dilute acid proof material which in the 
drawings is denoted by m. 
To excite the battery, the felt pieces are 
saturated by any suitable fluid, from the ac 
tion of which the wearer is protected by the 
water proof lining of the well pocket. 
The electric belt constructed as described 
is light in weight and comfortable to Wear, 
and in view of the strap connection, between 
the front and rear support is well ventilated. 
In connecting the flexible conducting cord 
O to the contact plate F instead of to the bat 
tery proper, the said cord is not so liable to 
breakage and the battery can be removed 
without disturbing the cord. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an electric belt, a support containing 
an electric battery formed of two pieces of 
felt having secured to one side thereof a se 
ries of copper plates and to the other a series 
of zinc plates, the two series being electri 
cally connected by metallic strips which pass 
through the pieces of felt, substantially as 
specified. 
2. In an electric belt, the combination of a 
support provided with a well pocket contain 
ing a battery formed of two pieces of felt hav 
ing on one side thereof a series of copper 
plates and on the other a series of zinc plates, 
the two series of plates being electrically con 
nected by means of metallic strips, an elec 
trode in the said support, a second support 
having an electrode which is electrically con 
nected to the battery by means of a flexible 
insulated wire, substantially as specified. 
3. In an electric belt, a support having a 
well pocket containing an electric battery and 
two other pockets isolated from the well 
pocket, one of which has therein a contact 
plate and the other provided with an elec 
trode, a second support provided with an elec 
o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
95 
do 
524,664 
trode which is electrically connected to the 
battery by means of a flexible insulated wire, 
substantially as specified. 
4. In an electric belt, two supports united 
by straps, one support carrying an electric 
battery and the other an electrode which is 
electrically connected to the battery by means 
of a flexible insulated wire, substantially as 
Specified. 
5. In an electric belt, the combination of a 
front support having a well pocket contain 
ing a battery, a contact plate and an electrode, 
5 
O 
both of which are electrically connected to the 
battery, and situated in pockets isolated from 
the well pocket a rear support containing an 
electrode, straps to connect the front and rear 
support and a flexible insulated wire which 
electrically connects the contact plate and the 
rear electrode, substantially as specified. 
FLORA. A. BREWSTER. 
15 
Witnesses: 
G. EVERETT REARDON, 
HORRY C. MATHIEU. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524764.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 524,764, 
  
 
J. W. KRIEGER, 
COAL SOUTTLE. 
m 
Patented Aug. 21, 1894, 
37zav Af.ys. 
O) 
p 
HE MORRIS PETERs co. Ptoro-THo, wasHINGroN, t. c. 
 
 
... 
: ;: ; . 
i. 3...: 
. ." 
A. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. KRIEGER, OF DAN VILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
COAL-Scuttle. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 524,764, dated August 21, 1894. 
Application filed February 21, 1894, Serial No. 501,018, (No model.) 
O 
15 
40 
- 
Specification. 
To al., whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN W. KRIEGER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Dan 
ville, in the county of Montour and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Coal-Scuttle, of which the following is a 
My invention relates to coal scuttles, and 
has for its objects to provide a device in which 
the body portion of the container is elongated 
vertically, whereby the load is mainly located 
below the point of attachment of the handle; 
to provide a device which may be used as a 
Scoop for filling to obviate the use of a shovel, 
and so constructed as to enable it to be emp 
tied easily when inclined to project the coal 
into a stove or furnace; and to provide means 
whereby, When carried, the device is free from 
vibration upon the pivotal point of the handle. 
Further objects and advantages of my in 
Vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be par 
ticularly pointed out in the appended claim. 
In the drawings-Figure 1 is a perspective 
25 View of a coal scuttle embodying my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a vertical central section of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a similar view showing 
the scuttle in position for emptying. Fig. 4 
is a bottom plan view. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
1ngS. 
The scuttle is provided with a flat bottom 1, 
from the edges of which rise the walls 2, the 
front and rear walls being inclined forward, 
and the inclination of the rear wall being 
greater than that of the front wall, whereby 
the scuttle is reduced in horizontal section, or 
is tapered, toward its upper or outlet end. 
The front wall is extended above the plane of 
the upper edge of the rear wall to serve as a 
means of guiding the coal as it is discharged 
from the scuttle, and the upper edges of the 
side walls are curved from the upper edge of 
the front wall to the upper edge of the rear 
Wall, and are beaded, as shown at 3, for a pur 
pose hereinafter explained. The front wall 4 
and the side walls 5 are preferably formed 
from a single sheet of metal, as shown in the 
5o drawings, and the rear edges of said side walls 
45 
3O 
35 
overlap the adjacent edges of the rear wall 6, 
and are secured thereto by means of rivets 7, 
or similar devices. The front wall is prefer 
ably rounded, as are the several corners of the 
body of the scuttle. Loosely connected to 55 
ears 8 upon the side walls near the top of the 
scuttle is a bail or handle 9 provided with a 
grip 10, whereby, when the scuttle is sus 
pended as when carried, the bail bears against 
the downwardly curved upper edges of the 6o 
side walls, thus bringing the greater portion 
of the weight below and slightly in rear of 
the pivotal attachment of the handle. The 
beading of the upper edges of the side walls 
prevents cha?ing the hand of the carrier. At- 65 
tached to the rear wall near the bottom of the 
Scuttle is a hand-hold 11 which may be grasped 
to enable the operator to incline the scuttle 
to discharge its contents or to fill the same in 
the manner of a scoop. The bottom of the 7o 
scuttle is provided with feet or rests 12, which 
may be of any desired shape or construction, 
but which preferably consist of rolls formed 
of sheet metal and riveted to the bottom; and 
Secured to the latter at or near its center is a 75 
hand-hold 13, similar in construction to the 
hand-hold 11 above described. 
From the above description, it will be under 
stood that the reduced mouth of the scuttle 
and the tapered shape of the body thereofen- 8o 
able the device to be inserted into a stove or 
furnace door to facilitate the discharge of its 
contents; and owing to the peculiar relative 
inclinations of the front and rear walls, an in 
clination of the scuttle, such as is shown in 85 
Fig. 3, causes the coal to pass freely therefrom. 
In Fig. 1 the scuttle is shown in the carry 
ing position, and by reference thereto it will 
be seen that the coal which passes into the 
rear portion of the scuttle causes the upper go 
edges of the side walls to bear against the 
sides of the bail or handle, thus steadying the 
device and preventing the vibration common 
to those Scuttlesin which the weightis equally 
divided upon oppositesides of the attachment 95 
of the handle. 
The connection of the bail or handle 9 to the 
sides of the scuttle is made near the upper por 
tions of said sides, whereby when the device 
is suspended by means of its bail or handle roo 
524,764 
and a bail or handle loosely connected to the 
side walls at points near the top of the scuttle, 
whereby, when suspended by its bail or han 
dle the bulk of the weight or the center of 
gravity of the scuttle is slightly in rear of a 
vertical plane embracing said points of con 
nection, and the upper edges of the side walls 
bear against the bail or handle to hold the 
scuttle from vibration substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
2 cd 
25 
JOHN W. KRIEGEER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. L. SIDLER, 
G. E. BORTZ. 
the length of the scuttle is substantially ver 
tical and in line with said bail or handle, 
whereby the major portion of the weight is be 
low the point of connection of the handle. 
Various changes in the form, proportion 
and minor details of construction may be re 
Sorted to without departing from the spirit or 
Sacrificing any of the advantages of my in 
vention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
A scuttle having forwardly inclined front 
and rear walls, the inclination of the rear wall 
being greater than that of the front wall, and 
the front wall being extended above the plane 
of the upper edge of the rear wall, side walls 
having their upper edges curved to connect 
the upper edges of the front and rear walls, 
Cd 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524864.txt	(No Model.) 
B, PORTER, 
NUTIOCK 
No. 524,864, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1894. 
 
s H 
 
Fists 
24272M/ASSAS 
42% 
AWVAWZO2 
26 4, 272---- 7%. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN PORTER, OF FULLERTON, NORTH DAKOTA. 
NUT. LOC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 52 4,864, dated August 21, 1894. 
Application filed May 3, 1893, serial No. 472,894 (No model) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN PORTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Full 
lerton, in the county of Dickey and State of 
North Dakota, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Nut-Locks, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
nut locks, and consists in the construction 
and arrangement of a bolt, washer and nut, 
by which means the washer holds the nut in 
such a position that it becomes perfectly 
locked and rendersitimpossible to workitself 
loose in any manner. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1. is a side view of my improved 
washer applied to the bolt, in use. Fig. 2. 
represents a perspective view of the washer 
detached. Fig. 3. is a side view of the washer 
looking at the spring portion. 
In the figures, A represents the washer 
made of steel, having a hole bored through 
its center of such size to allow it to fit around 
the bolt H. At one of the sides of the washer 
A, projects an arm B which is slightly curved 
up and sharpened at its outermost end as at 
C, which forms a spring adapted to bear up 
against the plain or corrugated surface of 
one of the pieces which is held together, the 
opposite side of this washer also extends out 
a distance from the nut and turned down 
forming a lip D which fits close against the 
side of the nut, by which means a complete 
nut lock is formed. 
When the bolt H has been inserted into 
the material, the Washer A is placed thereon. 
Then the nut I is screwed upon the bolt forc 
it 
; 
ing the end C of the arm B to bear against 
the material, making it impossible for the 
washer to move out of its position, and at the 
same time holding the nut in position by 
means of the lip D, therefore by forming this 
completed nut lock it renders it impossible 
for the nut to work loose accidentally. 
It will be noticed that the spring arm B is 
wholly beyond the periphery of the nut, so 
that as the nut is screwed on, it will not con 
tact with and render useless the said arm B. 
Furthermore, the spring arm B, lies wholly 
beyond the periphery of the washer. A so that 
the washer may be forced against a flat un 
broken surface without coming in contact 
with said arm as it would do if the free end 
of the arm was bent inwardly beyond the 
edge of the washer. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A nut lock consisting in a washer provided 
with the usual bolt aperture, an outwardly 
projecting lip D at one side of the washer to 
engage the periphery or edge of the nut, and 
a spring locking arm or tongue B a greater 
distance from the bolt hole E, than said lip 
to prevent it from being engaged by the nut; 
the said spring tongue or arm lying wholly 
beyond the edge of the nut to allow the washer 
to be forced against a flat surface without the 
nut engaging said tongue or arm; said spring 
tongue being projected at its free end beyond 
the body of the washer and terminating in a 
sharpened or cutting edge to penetrate the 
surface engaged by it, Substantially as herein 
described. 
BENJAMIN PORTER. 
Witnesses: 
F. H. STURZENACKER, 
C. C. MISFELDT. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US524964.txt	 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
N. B. FASSETT, 
MACHINE FOR COUPLING DRIVE CHAIN LINKS. 
No. 524,964, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1894. 
 
A. 
C. 
T 
- G 
72 
Z. 
Z: e 
"----|- C 
- - - - 
V 
a -3. 
Hi-Zi 
- - 
s -aes --r 
- - -( -r -\ -- 
 
-- V -: 
. 
O--- 
NV Ry 
s yw 
w ww My : A.s si. N 
g 
v 
 
711 -s //w 
Wz ZZ7 eleS 
(No Model.) 
MACHINE FOR COUPLING DRIVE CHAIN LINKS, 
No. 524,964, 
Patented Aug. 21, 1894, 
N. B. FASSETT. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
4. 
: 
! 
S 
GH 
A 
2-77 
C1 
A 
7, 
17 
g-1 
Z 
e 
HIE I 
-: 
- 
ii. 
icz, 
7A 
A-4C HC Z. 
7 
-2'- 
EO,7s. 
y $25 
zax 
Z 
 
 
NIL3 
 
 
 
1e/sor Z3. ZzsseZZ. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
.NELSON B. FASSETT, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MACHINE FOR COUPLING DRIVE-CHAIN LINKs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 524,964, dated August 21, 1894. 
Application filed April 14, 1893, Serial No. 470,388, (No model.) 
55 
70 
75 
25 
O 
5 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, NELSON B. FASSETT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Coup 
ling Drive-Chain Links, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention has for its object the con 
struction of a machine for coupling or unit 
ing together the separate links of detachable 
drive chains, which shall be much cheaper of 
construction and more simple and direct in 
its operation than any of those now in use. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
15 tion of a machine embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
side elevation of the same, viewed in the di 
rection indicated by the arrow V, in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a top view looking endwise down 
wardly into the link channel, as represented 
in Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a plan of the chain links 
and their relation to the chain channel. Fig. 
6 is a partial view of a section taken in the 
line y, y, of Fig. 5, or in the line ac, ac, of Fig. 2. 
At the present time there are to my knowl 
edge but two kinds of machines for coupling 
or uniting the cast links of drive chains so 
as to form the completed chain. In both of 
these the link channel is arranged at an in 
cline and the links pass down endwise. In 
one, the chain channel is arranged directly 
under the link channel and in the other the 
link channel is arranged at one side of it, so 
that the links are bodily moved sidewise. In 
both, however, the links move on their sides 
and endwise, and in neither of them do they 
move edgewise. In my present machine, 
however, the link channel is preferably ar 
ranged in a vertical position, the links move 
down it edgewise, the chain channel is ar 
ranged so that the links move along it on 
their edges, the last link in the chain chan 
nel is moved so that its hook is under the 
edge of the link channel, which contains the 
end bars of the links, the chain channel is lo 
cated in the same plane as the end bars of 
the uncoupled links, is at right angles to the 
longitudinal plane of the link channel and at 
an acute angle to the transverse plane of the 
It is thought, however, that these and 
Sale, 
other differences between my present ma 
45 
. 
- 
- 
. 
. . 
spectively. 
chine and those which have been heretofore 
used, will be fully understood from a study 
of the drawings and the detailed description 
of my invention. 
In the specification, Aindicates the driving 
wheel; B the main shaft, journaled at c and d. 
F, is a sprocket wheel pivoted at h. 
f is a friction roller by which the sprocket 
wheel is rotated. 
k is a double crankshaft having an oscil 
lating crank, k'at one end, and a thimble 
coupling crank, k', at the other. 
L is a connecting bar connecting the thim 
ble, m, with the crank n, of the main shaft B. 
O and P are link and chain channels, re 
q is the link coupler or link coupling bar. 
r is a chain link occupying the lowermost 
link space in the link channel. 
ris the first link above it, and the one which 
is to be next pushed downward into coupling 
with the hook of the lower link r after the 
latter has been drawn around the fulcrum 
corner into the chain channel by the sprocket 
wheel F. 
S is the fulcrum corner above mentioned. 
t in Fig. 1 is a spring arm attached at its 
upper end to the link channel standard, and 
is curved inwardly through it at its lower 
end, -its purpose being to press against the 
hook end of the link so as to prevent that end 
from any tendency to drop down by its own 
weight, and thus cause a possible cramping 
of the plain end bar in the hook link with 
which it is being coupled. 
u is a coiled spring to keep the lower end 
of the link coupler q always drawn toward 
the link channel, so that on its downward 
thrust it will engage with the lower side bar 
of the second link r up in the link channel, 
and cause the coupling of it with the last 
link in the chain channel. 
The hook of the last link subserves the 
purpose of a link guide for the plain end bar 
of the interlocking link on its downward pas 
sage, the interior hook and the plain end bars 
of the links above it being in the same verti 
cal line. It will be seen also that the chain 
channel is set up edgewise and partially un 
der the link channel, that is, under that por 
tion of the link channel which contains the 
is .. 
- 
95 
OO 
524,964 
2. In a machine for coupling chain links, 6c 
ceive uncoupled links, a guide-way adapted 
to receive coupled links when in an edgewise 
position, and located in the same plane as the 55 
end bars of the uncoupled links in the feed 
chute, and means for advancing the coupled 
links along the guide way substantially as der 
scribed. 
the combination of a feed-chute adapted to re 
ceive uncoupled links, and a guide-way in a 
plane at right angles to the longitudinal plane 
of the feed-chute adapted to receive coupled 
links when in an edgewise position, the inte 
rior of the hook of the last coupled link in the 
guide-way being directly under the end bar 
of the text uncoupled linkin the feed-chute, 
and means for advancing the coupled links 
-along the guide way substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a machine for coupling chain links, 
the combination of a feed-chute adapted to re 
ceive uncoupled links, a guide-way in a plane 
at right angles to the longitudinal plane of the 
feed-chute and at an acute angle to the trans 
verse plane of the feed-chute and adapted to 
receive coupled links when in an edgewise po 
sition, and means for advancing the coupled 
links along the guide way substantially as de- 8o 
scribed. 
'4. In a machine for coupling chain links, 
the combination of a feed-chute adapted to re 
ceive uncoupled links, a fulcrum corner, a 
guide-way adapted to receive coupled links 
when in an edgewise position, and located in 
the same plane as the end bars of the un 
coupled links in the feed-chute, and means 
for advancing the coupled links along the 
guide way substantially as described. 
5. In a machine for coupling chain links, 
the combination of a feed-chute adapted to re 
ceive uncoupled links, a guide-way adapted to 
receive coupled links when in an edgewise po 
sition, and located in the same plane as the 
end bars of the uncoupled links in the feed 
chute, and means for intermittently advanc 
ing the coupled links in the guide-way, sub 
stantially as described. 
95 
9o 
75 
NELSON B. FASSETT. 
Attest: 
A. R. BASSLER, 
AUG. C. LANDIS. 
O 
plain end bars of the loose links, and that the 
chain channel is horizontal and the link chan 
nel vertical, and that the plain end bar of 
each link is always parallel with the link 
channel. The links are coupled together 
while one of them is yet lying wholly within 
the link channel, and is never pushed side 
wise from it, but always thrust endwise of the 
link channel to interlock with the link set 
ting up edgewise in the chain channel to re 
ceive it; the link coupler being arranged 
above or over the link channel and moving 
endwise of it, the links being themselves 
thrust in the direction of their crossbars lon 
gitudinally through the hooks of the link 
with which they are being coupled. While 
this machine is therefore, an endwise coup 
ling machine, the coupling of links that go 
together sidewise is effected. 
The sprocket wheel F is made with wide 
sprockets, so as to nearly or quite fill length 
wise the central opening of the links. The 
stud or friction rolleri is made fast to the 
crank wheele, and is carried around by the 
25 driving shaft B. At each revolution of this 
shaft the roller i enters successively the space 
between the sprockets, and causes the wheel 
E to advance in the direction of the arrow 
2 a distance between two sprockets, or the 
length of one link of the chain, as shown. By 
this simple arrangement of the wheel F, 
crank wheel e and roller i, the assembled 
chain is carried along intermittently in the 
chain channel as new links are added, and by 
35 the timely movements of the crank n, con 
necting bar L, rocks the shaft ic, with its two 
cranks and the link coupler q, the separate 
links are separately and automatically assem 
bled into a chain. 
4o . The separate links are fed, as will be seen, 
into the link channel at its upper edge, as 
shown in Fig. 1. Each link is, one after the 
other, forced downwardly in the link channel 
by the link coupler into coupling with the last 
45 link in the chain channel, and all are carried 
along together, and are discharged out of the 
machine through the chain channel at W, as 
shown in Fig. 2. 
. 
What I regard as new, and desire to secure 
1. In a machine for coupling chain links, 
the combination of a feed-chute adapted to re 
30 
: 5o by Letters Patent, is 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525064.txt	2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented Aug. 28, 1894, 
r -- a----- 
S. WILL COCK. 
CHIMING CLOCK, 
s.S. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
sis l 
, SS 
f 
o 
S S 
S. : 
/2 (J-e-Z-O (OZ 
afe/4/22%-4- 
(No Model.) 
No. 525,064, 
s 
ar 
2. 
t 
'd 
Ali 
 
 
-1 
 
(No Model.) 
S. WILL COCK, 
CHIMING CLOCK, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 525,064, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1894, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN WILLCOCK, OF TORONTO, CANADA, ASSIGNOR TO THOMAS 
SARGANT, OF SAME PLACE. 
CH M N G CLOCK 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,064, dated August 28, 1894. 
Application filed March 12, 1894, Serial No. 503,345. (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN WILLCOCK, of 
the city of Toronto, in the county of York 
and Province of Ontario, Canada, have in 
Vented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Chime-Clocks, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of this invention is to produce 
a cheap, simple and efficient chime clock, and 
it consists, essentially, of a chime movement 
preferably having an arm attached to its start 
ing Spindle, which arm is moved at every 
quarter hour through the medium of a disk 
placed on the center arbor of the time move 
ment. 
It further consists of a chime movement 
having a pin placedon one of its wheels, which 
pin is So arranged as to make one revolution 
each hour, and which is located in the path 
of a wire connected with the starting spindle 
of an ordinary striking movement, so that at 
the proper time the striking movement is set 
in motion by the movement of said pin. 
My improvement also consists in locating 
the case of the chime movement substantially 
in the same plane as the case containing the 
time and striking movements. By so arrang 
ing the cases of these movements, the casing 
of the chime movement may be made in one 
piece with the casing of the time and striking 
movements, or it may be made separate there 
from and be attached to the frame to which 
the ordinary clock movement is secured, thus 
needing much less room in the thickness of 
the clock case. 
The invention also consists in the peculiar 
construction, arrangement and combinations 
of parts hereinafter more particularly de 
scribed and then definitely claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, which rep 
resent the preferable way of carrying out my 
invention-Figure 1 is a perspective view 
showing my chime movement placed below 
and suitably connected with a time movement 
and a striking movement. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective view from the other side of the chime 
mOWement. 
In showing and describing my invention in 
detail, it will be unnecessary to describe in 
detail all of the parts of the time and strik 
ing movements, as they form no part of my 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
- 
o 
55 
present invention, and any of the Well-known 
forms of such movements may be used. It 
will therefore only be necessary to state that 
a casing is provided which contains the time 
and striking movements, and that the letter 
represents the center arbor of the time move 
ment and the letter in represents the starting 
spindle of the striking movement. 
A, is the main driving wheel on the chime 
mo Wement. 
B, is a pinion on the spindle C, with which 
the main wheel A, meshes. 
D, is a spur wheel rigidly connected to the 
spindle C, and meshing with the pinion E, on 
the count wheel spindle F. G., is the count 
wheel which is sprung on to the said spindle, 
preferably on the outside of the movement, 
as shown. The spur wheel D, also meshes 
with the pinion H, on the chime drum spin 
dle I. 
J, is the chime drum, which is rigidly con 
nected to this spindle outside the movement, 
as shown. . 
K, is a spur wheel rigidly connected to the 
chime drum spindle I, and meshing with the 
inion L, on the locking disk spindle M. The 
end of the locking disk spindle M, is carried 
by the bracket T, to give the necessary room 
for the warning wheel R. To this spindle the 
locking disk N, is rigidly connected. 
O, is a spur wheel rigidly connected to the 
locking disk spindle M, and meshing with 
the pinion P, on the warning wheel spindle 
Q. R, is the warning wheel rigidly connected 
with this spindle. 
S, is the fly driven from the warning wheel, 
as indicated. 
U, is the locking arm spindle, from which 
projects the locking arm V, having an end 
adapted to engage with the notches in the 
locking disk N. An arma, also projects from 
this spindle and has its end bent to engage 
with the notches of the count wheel G. 
b, is a spindle having an arm c, which is 
adapted to engage with the locking arm W. 
in, is an arm attached to this spindle having 
its end adapted to engage with a pin O, on the 
warning wheel R, when the said spindleb, is 
rocked. From this spindle b, another arm d, Ioo 
projects, which arm is bent outwardly at its 
end and engages with a Wiree, the upper end 
90 
95 
75 
32,064 
...) 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
of which is pivoted to the rock arm f. This 
arn.J. is so located as to be alternately raised 
and dropped by the action of the pins g, on 
the Luarter hour disk h, which is connected 
to the center arbor i, of the time movement. 
The rest of this movement is not shown in 
the drawings, as it may be of any ordinary 
Construction. 
?i, is a pin projecting from the face of the 
Count wheel G. 
l, is a wire rigidly connected to the start 
ing Spindle m, of the striking movement. 
The lower end of the wirel, lies in the path 
of the pin j, so that at the proper time, the 
Wirel, is rocked and the striking movement 
Set in motion. The drum J, is of course pro 
Vided with suitable pins to operate the piv 
oted bell-hammers s, in the usual way. The 
drum J, makes two revolutions while the 
Count Wheel G, is making one. Thus it takes 
tWO Complete revolutions of the drum to 
Sound the quarter hour, half hour, three 
quarter and four quarter hour chimes. As 
there are thus ten quarter hour chimes 
Sounded, the drum J, must be provided with 
five quarter hour sets of pins. 
The operation of my chime clock is as fol 
lows:-l3y the revolution of the center arbor 
i., one of the pins g, is caused to raise the piv 
oted rock arm f, which through the wire e, 
and arm d, rocks the spindle b. The arm c, 
is thus made to lift the locking arm W., out of 
One of the notches in the locking diskN, and 
the arm C, is by the movement of the locking 
alm Spindle b lifted out of the notch in the 
Count Wheel in which it was lying; at the 
same time the end of the arm n, is brought 
into the path of the pin o, on the warning 
Wheel R. The train is this left free to move 
till the pin O, comes in contact with the arm 
7. This motion of the train is sufficient to 
bring the periphery of the locking disk un 
der the locking arm V, preventing the drop 
ping of the locking arm, which prevents the 
alm Cl, again dropping into the notch in the 
Count Wheel G, when the spindle b, is left 
free to rock after one of the pins g, on the 
quarter hour disk has passed from under the 
pivoted rock arm f, and allowed it to drop. 
When the pin on the quarter hour disk has 
passed from underneath the pivoted rock 
arm?, the arm falls, and thus the spindle b, 
is allowed to rock so that the arm n, is re 
moved out of the path of the pin 0, on the 
Warning wheel and the train revolves till the 
next notch on the count wheel G, comes un 
der the end of the arma. At the same time, 
one of the notches on the locking disk N, is 
under the end of the locking arm V, and the 
tWO arms simultaneously fall into their re 
Spective notches, and the movement of the 
train is stopped. The chine drum J, has thus 
been caused to revolve to an extent regulated 
by the Space between two notches on the 
Count Wheel G, which, in the movement illus 
trated, are spaced to ring the quarter, half, 
three quarter and four quarter hour chimes. 
The pini, on the count wheel G, is so located 
as to start the striking movement as Soon as 
the chime movement has completed the ring 
ing of the four quarter chime. It will be no 
ticed that the gearing of the train is so pro 
portioned that four notches are required in 
the locking disk N, to insure that a notch on 
the locking disk shall be below the locking 
arm, when one of the notches on the count 
Wheel G, is beneath the arm Ct. 
I am aware that striking movements are 
made in which the count wheel is geared to 
an intermediate spindle geared to the naill 
driving wheel, but in such movements, the 
locking disk is placed on the same spindle as 
the striking wheel which corresponds with 
the chime drum and the warning wheel is 
geared to the striking wheel spindle. Such 
an arrangement is impossible in a chine 
movement such as mine, where the chilne 
drum of necessity moves slowly and I have 
overcome the difficulty by placing the lock 
ing disk on an independent spindle geared to 
the chime drum spindle and gearing the 
Warning wheel spindle to the said locking 
disk spindle. This arrangement increases 
the speed of the locking disk and warning 
wheel and allows the locking arm to engage 
and disengage from the locking disk and the 
warning to take place within the time the 
chime drum is making one-forty fifth of a 
revolution, which is all the space that can be 
allowed between each set of four chime pins. 
From the above description it will be seen 
that I have succeeded in producing a very 
cheap, simple and efficient chime clock, and 
Owing to the simplicity and compact nature 
of the chime movement, it will occupy very 
little more space than an ordinary time and 
Striking movement. 
It will also be seen that, as the casing of the 
chime mechanism is on substantially the 
Same plane as the casing of the regular clock 
movement, it may easily be used in connec 
tion with any ordinary clock mechanism or 
be attached to the casing or housing of clocks 
already manufactured without making the 
Said housing or casing any thicker. 
When describing the movements as being 
On the same plane with each other, I mean 
that the chime movement is placed in such a 
position relative to the regular clock move 
ment that the casing of the chime movement 
(or the front and back plates which consti 
tute said easing) is made in continuation of, 
or in line with, the casing or front and back 
plates of the regular clock movement, for 
When it is So made, the chime movement may 
be placed either underneath or on the side 
of the regular movement instead of in front 
or in back of said movement, and thus will 
not take up any room in the thickness of the 
clock; there generally being much superflu 
OuS room on the sides of and underneath the 
clock movement, while that part of the clock 
immediately back of or in front of the move 
ment is generally taken up by some part of 
o 
75 
So 
90 
95 
CO 
TO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
525,064 
3. 
O 
25 
35 
said movement. It will thus be seen that by 
making the movements in line with or on the 
same plane with each other, that much less 
room is occupied in the thickness of the 
clock. If the chime movement is not quite 
as thick as the clock movement, I prefer to 
place the back plate of the chime movement 
in line with the back plate of the clock move 
ment; by so doing the rear parts of the move 
ments are On a plane with each other, thus 
enabling the connections between the move 
ments to be easily made. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a chime clock, a chime movement, lo 
cated substantially in the same plane as a 
time movement and operated by a wire recip 
rocated by a disk connected to the center ar 
bor of the time movement, in combination 
With a striking movement having a wire rig 
idly connected to its starting spindle, the 
lower end of which lies in the path of a 
pln. 
attached to one of the wheels of the chime 
movement, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
2. In a chime clock, and in combination with 
the chime-drum, count wheel and lock arms 
thereof, a rock-armf, a disk h, connected with 
the center arbor of the time movement and 
having pins g projecting therefrom arranged 
to Operate said arm fat each quarter revolu 
tion, and a connection between said rock arm 
and the chime movement, substantially as de 
scribed. 
8. In a chime clock, a chime drum making 
two revolutions in the hour; a count wheel 
making one revolution in the hour, in combi 
nation with suitable stopping and starting 
mechanism operated by an arm adapted to 
engage with notches in the count wheel; a 
reciprocating wire operated by a disk con 
nected to the center arbor of a time move 
ment; and a Wire rigidly attached to the start 
ing Spindle of a striking movement, its lower 
end lying in the path of a pin on the count 
Wheel, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
4. In a chime clock, a chime drum making 
two revolutions in the hour and carried by a 
spindle deriving motion from the main wheel 
of the movement, a count wheel making one 
revolution in the hour and carried by an in 
dependent spindle also deriving motion from 
the main wheel; a locking disk carried by a 
spindle geared to the chime drum spindle; a 
Warning wheel carried by a spindle geared to 
the locking disk spindle; suitably carried 
and Operated lock arms adapted to engage 
with the count wheel, locking disk and warn 
ing wheel; a wire adapted to raise the said 
iocking arms and operated from a disk con 
nected to the center arbor of a time move 
ment; and a striking movement having a wire 
rigidly connected to its starting spindle, the 
lower end of which lies in the path of a pin 
attached to the above mentioned count wheel, l 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
45 
55 
 
5. In a chime clock, the combination of 
the following elements:--the chime drum J, 
carried by the spindle I, revolving twice in 
the hour and deriving motion from the main 
wheel A; the count wheel G, revolving once 
in the hour and carried by the independent 
spindle F, deriving motion from the main 
wheel A; the locking disk N provided With 
four notches and carried by the spindle M, 
geared to the chime drum spindle I; the 
warning wheel R, carried by the spindle Q, 
geared to the locking disk spindle M; the pin 
o; the spindleU, carrying the lock arm W, and 
arm a the spindle b, carrying the arms, c, n, 
and d the wire e, pivoted rock arm f disk h, 
carrying one or more pins g; Wire l; pin j, 
on the count wheel G.; and starting spindle 
im, substantially as and for the purpose Speci 
fied. 
6. In a chime clock, a chime drum making 
two revolutions in the hour and carried by a 
spindle deriving motion from the main wheel 
of the movement, in combination with a 
count wheel making one revolution in the 
hour and carried by an independent. Spindle 
also deriving motion from the main wheel; a 
locking disk carried by a spindle geared to 
the chime drum spindle; a warning wheel 
carried by a spindle geared to the locking 
disk spindle and suitably carried and oper 
ated lock arms adapted to engage with the 
count wheel locking disk and warning wheel, 
substantially as and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
7. In a chime clock, a chime movement com 
prising the following elements:-the chime 
drum J., carried by the spindle I, revolving 
twice in the hour and deriving motion from 
the main wheel A; the count wheel G, re 
volving once in the hour and carried by the 
independent spindle F, deriving motion from 
the main wheel A; the locking disk provided 
with four notches and carried by the spindle 
M, geared to the chime drum spindle I, the 
warning wheel R, carried by the spindle Q, 
geared to the locking disk spindle Mi; the pin 
o; the spindle U, carrying the lock arm W, 
and arma; and the spindle b, carrying the 
arms c and in, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
8. In a clock and in combination with the 
time and striking movements thereof, a chime 
movement, mechanism between said time 
and chime movements adapted to set said 
chime movement in operation, and a con 
nection between said chime and striking 
movements, so arranged that said striking 
movement is set in motion by the operation 
of said chime movement, substantially as de 
scribed. 
Toronto, March 9, 1894. 
STEPHEN WILLCOCK. 
In presence of 
A. M. NEFF, 
FREDK. CLARKE. 
75 
9 O 
95 
do 
IO 5 
O 
II5 
2 of 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525164.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 525,164, 
H. SMITH. 
CURLING IRON. 
Patented Aug. 28, 1894, 
WITNESSES 
20, S-127'?, 
"/4 (2/-, 
the Norris Peters co, Photo-LTHow SHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HENRY SMITH, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
CURING RON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,164, dated August 28, 1894. 
Application filed January 19, 1894, Serial No. 497,453. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY SMITH, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Cincinnati, in 
the county of Hamilton, State of Ohio, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve. 
ments in Hair-Curling Irons, of which the fol 
lowing is a description, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon. 
My invention relates to curling irons and 
has for its object to produce a device which 
shall be simple, cheap, and very effective, and 
Which consists in the improved construction 
of the same as will be hereinafter more fully. 
set forth. 
As heretofore constructed, curling irons 
have had the mandrel or portion over which 
the hair has been curled either made solidor 
as a shell, having a solid wall, such construc 
tions being based upon the theory that the 
heat should be radiated from the outer sur 
face of the iron into the hair. In either case, 
it is necessary to heat the entire iron or to 
heat a removable core which is placed within 
the shell and left there until the heat has 
passed into the shell and from there is radi 
ated, which requires a greater or less amount 
of time according to the means employed for 
heating the iron. But I have found that by 
making the mandrel full of holes from one 
end to the other, so that it becomes substan 
tially porous for the passage of heat, a very 
Superior iron is produced, as a heating sub 
stance can be inserted into the interior from 
which the heat will be radiated through the 
perforations of the mandrel directly into the 
hair, and thereby effect quite a saving in time 
and also in material used for heating. 
In the accompanying drawings which show 
One form of carrying my invention into effect, 
and in which the same reference letters indi 
cate the same parts in the different views, Fig 
ure 1 is a perspective view of a curling iron 
constructed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a modification of the pressure plate, 
and Fig. 4 is a modification of the support for 
the heating medium. 
Referring more particularly to the draw 
ings, B indicates the tube or mandrel around 
which the hair is wrapped which it is desired 
to heat and curl, and which is preferably 
formed from a sheet of finely perforated metal 
rolled into a cylinder of the desired size and 
length. A suitable handle A, is attached to 
one end of the tube, as by forming, the han 
dle with a reduced portion, a?, which is in 
serted into the end of the tube and secured 
in any desired manner. The opposite end of 
the tube or mandrel may be closed by a plug 
D. A suitable pressure plate F is pivotally 
secured to the handle with one end project 
ing along the tube and the other end extend 
ing over the handle so that it may be grasped 
by the hand when in use, and the clamp por 
tion moved away from the tube for the inser 
tion of the hair. 
One means of applying heat to the interior 
of the tube or mandrel is by means of a suit 
able cartridge C which is placed within the 
mandrel and supplied with sufficient air to 
keep it burning while the hairis being curled. 
To prevent the ashes from the cartridge pass 
ing through the perforations in the cylinder 
into the hair I prefer to use a cartridge which 
is so composed that after it has burned, it 
holds together and does not drop apart but I 
make no claim to the particular construction 
of the cartridge as any suitable kind maybe 
used with my invention. Owing to the in 
tense heat generated by combustion, it is de 
sirable that the cartridge be supported at a 
distance from the walls of the mandrel S0 as 
not to burn the hair directly adjacent to the 
portion of the cartridge that is burning. For 
this reason, I prefer to support the cartridge 
by means of a wire H coiled at its inner port 
tion h. By inserting the opposite or uncoiled 
end of the wire into the plug D, and by mak 
ing the coil of a less diameter than the inte 
rior diameter of the mandrel the inner end 
of the wire, together with the cartridge, is sup 
ported about centrally of the mand reland the 
heat is thereby radiated equally in all direc 
tions. As the perforations in the surface of 
the mandrel are so numerous there is butlit 
tle obstruction to the passage of the heatfrom 
the cartridge directly into the hair, and there 
fore, a very small amount of heating material 
is needed and the operation is performed in 
much less time than is required for heating 
a solid mandrel or for heating a core and in 
serting it into a hollow shell and waiting for 
the shell to become hot enough to curl the 
55 
6o 
65 - 
o 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
 
525,164 
5 clamp 
hair. In addition to affording a direct pas 
Sage for the heat from the interior to the hair, 
the perforations in the mandrel also permit 
of the passage of the air from the outside to 
Support the combustion of the cartridge. To 
further facilitate the passage of the air to the 
interior, and also to permit of the escape. of 
Vapor or Smoke from the heated hair under the 
pressure plate, I prefer to provide the press 
lure plate with perforations through which the 
Vapor may pass in the central portion of the 
braid of hair, and also through which the air. 
can paSS to the interior of the tube at the 
Outer or thin portion of the braid. As a por 
tion of the hair must be caught between the 
and the umandrel and the remaining 
portion of the hair wound around the man 
drel and the plate, the importance of perfo 
rating the plate, which preferably extends 
from end to end of the clamp portion of the 
plate, becomes apparent. The perforations 
therefore may consist of a long slot G extend 
ing from end to end, or it may consist of a 
series of perforations as shown in Fig. 3. In 
stead of making the mandrel of perforated 
sheet metal, it could be made of a strip of fine 
Wire gauze with smaller or larger mesh, as 
desired, either one of which would permit of 
the heat passing directly to the exterior of 
the mandrel and into the hair except the 
small amount which would be absorbed by 
the material comprising the mandrel and be 
radiated from there into the hair. It is also 
preferable when the handle is made of wood, 
which I find very satisfactory and desirable, 
to fasten upon the inner face of the reduced 
portion a? a metallic plate K which is most 
conveniently made in the form of a button 
with a shank for entering the handle. This 
4o Will prevent the heat from the cartridge char 
35. 
25 
30 
45 
ring or burning the end of the handle, and 
instead of using the coiled wire for support 
ing the cartridge, a plate may be used adapted 
to bear upon the opposite end of the cartridge 
from the handle, as shown in Fig. 4. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. A curling iron comprising a hollow man 
drel provided with a handle at one end, and 
a perforated clamp pivotally secured thereto, 
said mandrel being provided throughout its 
entire surface with numerous perforations, 
and means for supporting a heating substance 
within the mandrel, whereby the heat from 
Said substance may be radiated directly 
through the perforations in the mandrel into 
the hair, substantially as set forth. 
2. A curling iron comprising, in combina- - 
tion, a hollow mandrel provided throughout 
its entire surface with numerous perforations, 
6c. 
and having a handle at one end and a remov 
able plug at the other, a perforated clamp 
pivotally secured to the handle, and a wire 
rigidly secured in the plug, the inner end of 
which is provided with a coil of a less diameter 
than the interior diameter of the mandrel, for 
supporting a cartridge at a distance from the 
walls of the mandrel, whereby the heat from 
the cartridge may be equally radiated in all 
directions through the perforations of the 
mandrel into the hair, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
55 
HENRY SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
H. HEAD, 
A. C. BINKLEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525265.txt	(No Model.) 
A. N. GAUTHIER, 
MAIN SPRING BARREL FOR, WATCHES, 
No. 525,265, 
Patented Aug. 28, 1894. 
 
a. 3. 
-3%. G 
Yez 
72.7%.4- 
s'i' 
a 537. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AGILE N. GAUTHIER, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA. 
MAIN SPRING-BARREL FOR WATCHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,265, dated August 28, 1894. 
Application filed August 30, 1893. Serial No. 484,393, (No model.) 
- 
longer slot G, reaching nearly to the lower 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
edge of the barrel. A head H on the end of 
Be it known that I, AGILE N. GAUTHIER, of 
spring C engages the barrel and holds the 
New Orleans, in the parish of Orleans and 
State of Louisiana, have invented certain new 
spring end thereto. 
In placing the spring in the watch the same 
and useful Improvements in Mainsprings; and 
Ido hereby declare the following to be a full, is first put into the barrel with its outer end 
extended through the slot G until the center 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
coil of the spring is in the center of the bar 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
rel, as shown in Fig. 3. The arbor A is then 
which it pertains to make and use it, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
inserted and the inner hook end of the spring 
engaged with slot B. The cover is then 
ings, which form part of this specification. 
placed upon the barrel and the arbor revolved 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
until the spring is entirely moved around the 
mainsprings and it consists in the novel man 
ner of securing the spring to the central ar 
Sale, 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
bor and the watch barrel, as will be fully de 
scribed hereinafter and especially referred to 
I claim 
1. The combination of a center arbor hav 
in the claims. 
ing slot B, formed therein, a main spring with 
The object of my invention is to attach the 
respective ends of the spring so that they will 
a hook on its inner end to engage said slot, a 
barrel having a slot in its wall, and a head at 
not become detached of their own volition. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings:- 
the outer end of the spring to engage the bar 
rel adjacent said slot, substantially as shown 
Figure 1, is a plan view of a watch barrel, 
showing my improved spring therein. Fig. 
and described. 
2. The combination of an arbor, a main 
2, is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3, is a 
plan view showing the method of placing in 
spring secured at its inner end thereto, a bar 
rel having communicating slots F and G, for 
position the spring. Fig. 4 is a detached 
the purpose described, and a head on the outer 
view of the central arbor. Fig. 5 is an eleva 
end of the spring, substantially as shown and 
tion of a portion of the barrel. 
A designates the central arbor or post and 
described. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
formed therein is the slot B of the same width 
as the enlarged end of spring C, which end is 
presence of two witnesses. 
formed into a hook D. Thus a very secure 
connection between the center and post is ob 
tained. 
The barrel E has formed therein a short slot 
F, while communicating with the same is a 
E. BOISSON, 
LEON LACHOT. 
A. N. GAUTHIER, 
Witnesses: 
45 
55 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525365.txt	(No Model,) 
No. 525,365, 
N. H. S.H.A.W. 
FRAME SAW, 
Patented Sept., 4, 1894, 
27. af- 
-la. 3.27.2- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NATHANIEL H. SHAW, OF SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
FRAME-SAW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,365, dated September 4, 1894. 
Application filed January 4, 1894, Serial No. 495,629. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NATHANIEL H. SHAW, 
of Somerville, in the county of Middlesex, 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and usefullmprovements in Frame-Saws, 
of which the following is a description suffi 
ciently full, clear, and exact to enable any 
person skilled in the art or science to which 
said invention appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
buck-saw; Fig. 2 an inner side elevation of 
one of the clamp-members; and Fig. 3 an 
elevation of the handle-bar detached from the 
frame. 
Like letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the different figures of the 
drawings. 
My invention relates especially to frame 
Wood-saws commonly known as buck-saws 
and is particularly designed to improve and 
strengthen the construction of the frame while 
affording means for adjusting the frame to 
different lengths of saw-blades. 
The nature and operation of the improve 
ment will be readily understood by all con 
versant with such matters from the following 
explanation: 
In the drawings, A represents the blade of 
the saw and B the frame considered as a 
whole. The frame comprises a handle-bar, 
C, which is bent slightly at an angle at, f, 
where it is to receive one end of the blade, A. 
Said handle-barcomprises a rod of steel rect 
angular in cross-section and on its lower end 
a wooden or metallic handle, g, is secured, a 
like handle, h, being secured to the upper end 
of said bar, and midway of the bar a second 
ary handle, i, is secured. The spring-bar, D, 
of the frame also consists of a rectangular 
rod of steel. This is secured to the handle 
bar by a right-angle clamp, m. One member 
of this clamp is shown in Fig. 2. One arm of 
the clamp is grooved at, p, to receive the han 
dle-bar, the opposite arm being grooved at, g, 
to receive one end of the spring-bar. Said 
clamp-members are held together by screws 
passing through lugs, r, on the casting. A 
similar clamp, m, holds the spring-bar to the 
front-bar, ti, of the frame, the edge of said 
clamps being provided with a brace, v. The 
spring-bar, D, projects through the clamp, m. 
The clamps, m, m, may be substituted by 
angle socket couplings of well known form 
fitted to receive the ends of the spring-beam 
and front bar. 
The blade is secured to the bar, t, and the 
handle-bar, C, by rivets or screws, w. By 
loosening the screws which hold the members 
of the clamp, m, together said clamp can be 
moved outward on the spring bar, D, so that 
a longer saw-blade may be secured to the 
frame in a manner which will be understood 
by those conversant with such matters. The 
front-bar, t, is pitched slightly at an angle to 
the beam or spring-bar, D, and when the blade 
is strained said beam springs slightly. This 
springing of the beam by tightening the blade 
Will when a socket coupling is employed 
clamp the portions of the framein said socket 
so that they will not rattle or work loose. By 
socket coupling it will be understood that I 
intend to employ a coupling of the same gen 
eral shape as the clamp described, but which 
is formed in one piece, the grooves, p, q, of 
the clamp forming the sockets for the spring 
beam and front-bar. An extremely rigid 
saw-frame is produced by this construction; 
all the parts excepting the handles, g, h, i. 
being of metal the danger of splitting which 
is incident to the use of wooden bars in saw 
frames of ordinary construction is avoided. 
When it is desired to use the saw-frame in 
substantially the same manner as the ordi 
nary hand or carpenter's-a necessity which 
frequently occurs--the handle, i, disposed in 
proximity to the blade enables this to be done 
readily. 
It will be seen that the saw-frame can be 
easily knocked down greatly facilitating pack 
ing for shipment, 
Having thus explained my invention, what 
I claim is- . 
1. In a frame-saw, a frame comprising a me 
tallic handle-bar, a spring-beam and a front 
bar said beam being detachably connected to 
the handle-bar and front bar by couplings 
comprising two members embracing the join 
ingends of said beam and bars respectively 
and connected by screws, 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
 
525,865 
3. In a frame-saw, the frame, B, comprising Io 
the handle-bar, C; beam, D; and front-bar, t, 
respectively connected by clamps, m, m, said 
handle-bar being provided with handles, g, 
h, i, arranged substantially as specified. 
NATHANIEL, H, SHAW. 
Witnesses: 
O. M. SHAW, 
K. DURFEE. 
2. A frame-saw having a frame comprising 
a metallic spring-beam; a metallic handle 
bar detachably secured thereto by a clamp; 
a metallic front-bar detachably secured to 
said beam by a clamp and arranged at an an 
gle thereto, said clamps comprising two mem 
bers connected by screws and said handlebar 
projecting above the beam and below the saw 
blade to form handles. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525465.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F. MALLINCKRODT. 
TOBACCO PIPE, 
No. 525,465, 
Patented Sept. 4, 1894, 
iv-dooco- 
35. "3 a... 
8t-hati. C. 
 
THE MORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-Ho, washi Naron, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. MALLINCKRODT, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
TOBACCO-PIPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,465, dated September 4, 1894. 
Application filed August 25, 1890, Renewed December 30, 1892, Serial No. 456,803, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that, JOHNF.MALLINCKRODT, 
of Denver, in the county of Arapahoe and 
State of Colorado, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Tobacco-Pipes; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, Such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
tobacco pipes and stems. 
The object is to provide a pipe of light and 
Substantial construction with such an ar 
rangement of parts that a free circulation of 
air is had around the parts receiving heat 
from the light and smoke in the pipe. 
With this end in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combinations of parts, as will be hereinafter 
fully described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal sectional view of the preferred 
construction. Fig. 2 is a modification, and 
Fig. 3 is a section on the line ac-ac of Fig. 2. 
A represents the bowl of the pipe and B 
the stem. These are preferably made of pa 
per pulp or comminuted fibrous material ca 
pable of being molded or compressed into the 
required form. The bowl is cupped out in 
the ordinary manner and the stemisprovided 
throughout its length with a cavity b, the in 
ner end b of which is of conical form, and 
having communication with the interior of 
the bowl through a passage c. Perforations 
d in the stem extend to the cavity to allow 
the air to freely circulate therein. 
A tube C composed preferably of paper 
pulp or comminuted fibrous material consti 
tutes a porous lining for the stem. This tube 
is of such diameter that an annular space c 
is afforded between it and the inner Wall of 
the stem for the free circulation of air to in 
sure coolness of parts as well as evaporation 
of moisture which might otherwise collect in 
the porous tube. The ends h, h' of the tube 
are conical and may be coated with paraffine 
or wax, and the former is adapted to enter 
the conical end b' of the cavity b. A ferrule 
Efits tightly over the end of the stem B. 
The cavity in the outer end of the ferrule is 
about the size of cavity b and provided with 
screw threads l. Mouth piece F has the gen 
eral appearance of those ordinarily used, it 
being provided with the usual air passage 
through its center, but its inner end besides 
being made to fit the cavity in the outer end 
of the ferrule and provided with screw threads 
m to engage the threads l, also has a conical 
cavity in therein, adapted to receive the coni 
cal end h' of the tube C. Enough space is 
left between the ferrule and tube C for the 
mouth piece to move endwise so that the more 
the mouth piece is screwed into the ferrule 
the tighter the joints at the conical ends of 
the tube C are formed, thus making them 
preferably air tight, but leaving a continuous 
air passage through the stem and mouthpiece. 
In the modification shown in Figs. 2 and 3 
the bowl A is cupped out a little more so as 
to receive an inner shell G. The latter is 
preferably made of the same material as the 
bowl and its upper edge overlaps the latter, 
while its lower end tapers somewhat, thus 
leaving an air space G' between it and the 
bowl. The shell is provided on its outside 
with ribs g adapted to enter recessesg' inside 
the bowl for preventing the shell from turn 
ing and also holding it away from the inner 
wall of the bowl. The lower end of the shell 
is provided with a conical cavity b' corre 
sponding to the conical end of cavity b, in 
former construction. This cavity is adapted 
to receive the conical end of tube C and 
thus one continuous air space is formed 
around the tube Cand the shell G. The other 
parts are all the same as in former construc 
tion. Of course the pipe may be finished and 
embellished to suit the fancy and also it is 
worthy of notice that the parts nnay be 
changed and renewed without throwing away 
the whole pipe. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. Atobacco pipe consisting of a bowl, stem, 
and mouth piece, the stem provided with in 
ternal conical recesses at each end, and a tube 
having tapering ends seated in the conical 
recesses whereby the tube is supported at its 
ends only and an annular space is formed 
between it and the interior of the stem, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. A tobacco pipe comprising a bowl, stem 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
go 
95 
CO 
 
525,465 
having tapering ends fitted in the coaical re- is 
cesses whereby the tube is supported at its 
opposite ends and an annular space is formed 
around the tube, and the stem provided with 
perforations for supplying air to the annular 
space. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
20 
JOHN F. MALLINCKRODT. 
Witnesses: 
S. G. NOTTINGHAM, 
ROBERT S. FERGUSON, 
and mouthpiece and having internal recesses 
or sockets formed internally at each end of 
the stem, a cylindrical tube of less size than 
the internal diameter of the stem whereby an 
annular space is formed between the tube 
and the stem, the ends of the tube supported 
in the recesses or sockets, and the stem pro 
vided with perforations for admitting air to 
the annular space, substantially as set forth. 
3. A tobacco pipe comprising a bowl, a 
stem, and a removable mouth piece, said 
mouth piece having a conical recess in its in 
ner end and a corresponding conical recess 
formed at the opposite end of the stem, a tube 
O. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525565.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 525,565. 
A. G. SNELL, 
PARASOL RUNNER, 
Patented Sept., 4, 1894. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPHUS G. SNELL, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO CHARLES B. JONES, OF SAME PLACE. 
PARASOL-RUNNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,565, dated September 4, 1894. 
Application filed March 24, 1894, Serial No. 504,977, (No model) 
o 
25. 
To oil, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ADOLPH.Us G. SNELL, of 
New Haven, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new 
Improvement in Parasol-Runners; and I do 
hereby declare the following, when taken in 
Connection with the accompanying drawings 
and the letters of reference marked thereon, 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
Sne and which said drawings constitute part 
of this specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a view in perspective showing a 
runner provided with a shield constructed in 
acgordance with my invention, and applied to 
a jointed parasol standard; Fig. 2, a broken 
View partly in side elevation and partly in 
Vertical section, showing the position of the 
shield when the parasol is raised; Fig. 3, a 
detached, broken plan and sectional view of 
the runner and shield, and the lower member 
9f the standard; Fig. 4, a broken view partly 
in longitudinal section, showing the outer end 
of the upper member of the parasol standard, 
the parasol tip 
a 
and the outer slotted head to 
Which the outer ends of the ribs are pivotally 
attached; Fig. 5, a detached plan view of the 
said head; Fig. 6, a perspective view of one 
of the modified forms which the shield may 
assume; Fig. 7, a broken view of a child's 
carriage shown as provided with an inside 
parasol standard of the type with which my 
invention is employed. 
My invention relates to an improvementin 
parasol runners designed to be used in con 
nection. With jointed parasol standards, and 
particularly to that class which support the 
parasol from the inside instead of from the 
Outside, the object being to provide simple 
and effective means for protecting the fingers 
and gloves while the parasol is being raised 
and lowered. 
With these ends in view, my invention con 
sists in providing the outer end of a parasol 
runner With a shield for protecting the fin 
gers, the said shield consisting of a hand piece 
extending laterally and longitudinally be 
yond the runner. 
My invention further consists in certain de 
tails of construction and combinations of 
parts as will be hereinafter described and 
pointed out in the claims, 
55 
In carrying out my invention I provide the 
outer end of the runner A, which may be of 
any approved construction, with a shield, 
which may take different forms, but which 
will extend longitudinally and laterally be 
yond the said end of the runner. As shown 
in Figs. 1,2 and 3 of the drawings, the shield 
consists of a hand-piece B, and an elastic re 
taining-tube B', the said hand-piece being 6o 
made from a single piece of heavy sheet 
metal bent to form an intermediate bearing 
portion extending laterally with respect to the 
runner and tube, and two corresponding in 
Wardly bowed finger-pieces standing opposite 
each other, and extending longitudinally be 
yond the outer end of the runner, and the 
said tube, which is applied to the center of 
the inner face of the intermediate bearing 
portion of the hand-piece, being made elastic 
by constructing it with a longitudinal slit b, 
and a transverse slit b, intersected by the 
longitudinal slit. This tube is located in 
line with a circular opening b formed in the 
intermediate bearing portion of the hand 
piece, and adapted in diameter to fit snugly 
within the outer end of the runner, from 
which it may be removed at pleasure, but 
sufficientfriction is developed between it and 
the runner to hold it in place when in use. I 
do not limit myself to making the shield as 
described, nor to connecting it removably 
with the outer end of the runner, though I 
prefer that construction, as it enables me to 
apply the shield to independently made run 
ners of ordinary form, but I might dispense 
with the tube, and permanently connect the 
hand-piece with the outer end of the runner. 
The parasol-rod or standard comprises a bent 
lower member C, which is attached at its go 
lower end to the carriage, and a short straight 
upper member 'C', to the upper end of which 
the parasol D is applied, the upper end of 
the lower member C, and the lower end of 
the upper member C" being jointed together 95 
in the usual manner, as at E, by slotting one 
piece, and constructing the other to form a 
tongue adapted to enter the said slot, and 
uniting the two by a pivote. The runner is 
adapted in diameter, in the usual manner, to loo 
slide freely on these two members of the 
standard. 
75 
35 
40 
45 
 
525,565 
 
 
95. 
Od 
tos 
O 
25 
35 
70 
75 
80 
85 
When the parasol is closed, it occupies a 
horizontal position, with the short upper mem 
ber of the standard in line with the horizon 
tal upper end of the lower member thereof. 
Then in order to raise the parasol into posi 
tion for use, the runner Amust be pushed 
beyond the jointE, uniting the two members 
of the standard, after which the upper mem 
ber is raised into a vertical position in which 
it is retained, as these parasols are ordinarily 
Constructed, by the engagement of the lower 
edge of the runner with the upper face of the 
extreme upper end of the lower member of 
the standard. In carrying the runner be 
yond the joint, and then in lifting the upper 
member of the standard into right position, 
the fingers are very apt to be caught and 
pinched in the joint, and moreover it is diffi 
cult to manipulate the device as described 
without soiling the gloves. Under my inven 
tion, however, the shield is clasped by the 
fingers, which are thereby held away from 
both members of the standard in such a man 
ner that it is impossible for the fingers to 
come in contact with the joint. Then when 
the runner has been carried beyond the joint 
and the upper member of the standard ele. 
Vated into a vertical position, the intermedi 
ate bearing portion of the hand-piece of the 
shield is pressed down by the tension of the 
parasol ribs acting through the medium of 
the runner, upon the upper face of the ex 
treme upper end of the lower member of the 
Standard, whereby a wide bearing is secured 
for holding the parasolin its proper open po 
sition. By means of my improved shield, 
therefore, the parasol is safely and readily 
manipulated, and firmly held in its open po 
sition. Then when the parasol is brought 
back into its horizontal position and closed, 
the shield again protects the fingers of the 
hand. 
It will be apparent that for the convenient 
use of a parasol provided with a shield con 
structed in accordance with my invention, 
the parasol must be held from rotation on its 
standard, for otherwise the opening of the 
shield cannot be maintained in the same plane 
With the joint between the two members of 
the standard, and that relation is obviously 
necessary to permit the outer member of the 
standard to be raised and lowered. I prefer 
therefore to secure the parasol against rota 
tion. As herein shown, I attain that end b 
constructing the head F to which the outer 
ends of the umbrella ribs D'are pivotally 
applied, with a square central opening F, 
which adapts the head to fit down over four 
bevels c, located at the base of the threaded 
Outer end c' of the outer member C of the 
parasol standard, the said threaded end c', 
receiving the parasol tip G which forms a fin 
ish for the outer end of the parasol, and 
holds the head F in place. The ribs ID' are 
pivotally connected in the usual manner with 
the outer ends of the parasol supports D', 
the inner ends of which are pivoted in the 
usual manner, to the slotted collar H, secured 
to the inner end of the runner which carries 
my improved shield, which is thus prevented 
from rotation on the parasolstandard through 
the medium of the slotted collar H, the sup 
ports D, the ribs D', and the slotted rib 
holding head F, which is held from rotation 
on the outer member of the standard. 
Aside from maintaining the shield in right 
relation to the joint of the parasol standard, 
it is desirable to prevent the parasol from 
rotation, not only for the sake of appearance 
and the comfort of the tender occupant of 
the carriage, but also because the rotation of 
the parasol is liable to cause the parasol-tip 
to work loose and come off. 
I do not limit myself to constructing the 
shield in any particular manner. Thus, if 
desired, it might be made of two rings II, of 
wire, held apart by transverse webs JJ, and 
secured to a short tube K, having its outer 
end split and reduced in diameter to adapt 
it to be inserted into the outer end of a run 
ner, the inner end of the tube being inserted 
between and secured to the rings at opposite 
points thereon. Nor do I limit myself to the 
particular means shown and described for 
preventing the rotation of the parasol so as 
to maintain the shield in right relation to the 
joint between the two members of the stand 
ard, for other means than those shown might 
be employed for the same purpose. I would 
therefore have it understood that I do not 
limit myself to the exact construction shown 
and described, but hold myself at liberty to 
make such changes and alterations as fairly 
fall within the spirit and scope of my inven 
tion. Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. Aparasol runner, provided at its outer 
end with a shield for protecting the fingers, 
the said shield consisting of a hand-piece ex 
tending laterally and longitudinally beyond 
the runner, substantially as described. 
2. A parasol runner, provided at its outer 
end with a shield extending laterally and lon 
gitudinally beyond it for protecting the fin 
ers, and removable from the runner, substan 
tially as described. 
3. A parasol runner provided at its outer 
end with a removable shield for protecting the 
fingers, said shield consisting of a hand piece 
extending laterally and logitudinally beyond 
the said end of the lunner, and an elastic tube 
adapted to be removably engaged with the 
runner, substantially as described. 
4. In a parasol, the combination, with a par 
asol - standard, comprising an upper and a 
lower member jointed together, of a parasol 
proper mounted upon the outer end of the up 
per member of the standard, means applied 
to the extreme outer end of the upper men 
ber of the standard to prevent the parasol 
from rotating thereupon, a runner connected 
with the parasol and sliding upon the two 
45 
55 
65 
525,565 
- 
8 
5 means employed to prevent the parasol from and a parasol tip applied to the threaded end 20 
members of the said standard, and a shield having a square central opening adapting it 
for protecting the fingers, located at the outer to fit over the outer end of the short upper 
end of the runner and held in right relation member of the standard which is thereto 
to the joint of the parasol-standard by the adapted to receive the said head and threaded, 
rotation. 
of the standard, and bearing upon the head 
5. The combination with a parasol-stand- to hold the same in place, substantially as de 
ard comprising a lower member having its up-scribed. 
per end bent horizontally, and a short upper 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
end of the lower member, of a runnermounted ing witnesses. 
upon the said standard, and provided at its 
Outer end with a shield extending laterally 
Witnesses: 
and longitudinally beyond it, for protecting 
I5 the fingers, a circular slotted rib-holding head, 
Io member jointed at its lower end to the upper specification in the presence of two subscrib- 25 
ADOLPHUS G. SNELL. 
FRED C. EARLE, 
LILLIAN D. KELSEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525666.txt	(No Model.) 
A, SARNMARK, 
WATCH PROTECTOR, 
No. 525,666. 
Patented Sept. 4, 1894. 
s 
s 
& 5 s SN 
AZAASSZJ. 
G2 
d 
F 
Z772/70/2 
(2424.2%gree 
AZZOAS, 
The Norris PETERs co. Proto-LIHC. WASHGTOM, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
AXEL SARNMARK, OF TORSBY, SWEDEN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TOJOHAN 
HALL OF SAME PLACE. 
WATCH - PROTECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,666, dated September 4, 1894. 
Application filed March 28, 1894, Serial No, 505,383, (No model.) Patented in Sweden Januaryll, 1894, No. 4,862. 
* 
Sale. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that, AXELSARNMARK, a sub 
ject of the King of Sweden and Norway, and 
a resident of Torsby, in the Kingdom of Swe 
den, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Watch-Protectors, (for which I have 
obtained Letters Patent of Sweden, No. 4,862, 
dated January 11, 1894) of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to a device, applica 
ble to watches, in order to prevent the watch 
from falling out of the pocket, either by its 
OWn weight or by pulling the watch chain. 
This watch protector also serves as a link be 
tween the Watch and the chain. The latter 
can moreover by using this watch protector 
be totally dispensed with. 
On the annexed drawings Figures 1 and 3 
are side elevations of the watch protector in 
full size and Fig. 2 a front elevation of the 
It consists of a flat spring or metal strip, 
bent in shape of two loops a, and b, which are 
intended to be joined, the lower, a, with the 
ring of the watch, and the other, b, with the 
last link of the chain, if such is used. The 
front part or armf of the lower loop a is elon 
gated upwardly and bent into the shape of a 
downwardly open cramp, which is intended 
to catch the edge of the pocket, when the 
watch is put down; the front arm h of the 
cramp will then slide on the outside of the 
pocket. The front arm d of the upper loop 
b extends downward behind the cramp and 
ends about at the middle of the cramp in a 
forwardly bent tooth e, for which is made a 
hole or groove g in the rear arm f of the 
cramp. When the watch protector occupies 
its normal position (shown in Fig.1), the arm 
d will bear against the arm f, so that the 
tooth e will enter the groove g and the space 
between the arms of the cramp. If on the 
contrary the upper part of the watch pro 
tector at i is pressed together indirection for 
ward and backward, the parts will occupy 
the position shown in Fig. 3, that is to say 
the front arm d of the upper loop is pressed 
backward so that its undermost part is with 
drawn from the cramp and the tooth e re 
moved out of the groove g. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
The rear arm k, which is common for both 
loops, has beneath at can incurvation so as 
to form a narrowing between the arms of the 
undermost loop a in order that the ring of 
the watch may not ascend too far. When the 
device is to be applied to the watch the tooth 
e is brought out of its groove, so as to allow 
the ring of the watch to pass between the 
tooth and the cramp and descend through the 
narrowing above mentioned into the loop a. 6o 
In applying the chain (if such a one is de 
sired) the tooth is also forced backward so 
that the outmostlink of the chain may be in 
serted between the tooth and the cramp, 
whereafter it is forced upward between the 
arms d and k and into the loop b. 
In putting the watch into the pocket, the 
upper part of the protector is seized at i be 
tween the fingers and slightly compressed, so 
as to remove the tooth e from the cramp, 
which then easily catches the edge of the 
pocket. When the pressure has ceased the 
tooth will enter the cramp and grasp or pinch 
the cloth or stuff, so that neither the device 
itself nor the watch or the chain (if such is 
used) can be removed without tearing the 
cloth. When it is desired to take the watch 
out of the pocket, the upper part of the de 
vice is seized between the fingers in the same 
manner so as to release the tooth out of the 
stuff and cramp. 
It is obvious that more teeth may be pro 
vided on the arm d instead of a single one as 
shown on the drawings. These teeth may 
either be placed at the same level or the one 
above the other, and they may enter recesses 
in the arm for project on the side of said 
arm. They may further be either pointed, so 
as to easily pinch the cloth, or obtuse so as 
to press the stuff against the foremost arm h. 
When a chain is not used, the upper loop 
may be dispensed with or supplied by a part 
of any desired form; this part may be con 
nected with the downmost loop or with the 
cramp. 
Instead of making the watch protector of 95. 
a single spring, as stated above, it may of 
course be made in several pieces, which are 
united in any convenient manner. Also size 
and shape may be varied to a certain extent. OO 
85 
75 
g 
525,666 
Any suitable ornaments may be applied for 
instance on the foremost arm h of the cramp 
or on other part or parts of the protector. 
I claim 
5 A watch protector consisting of a resilient 
strip of wire having loops at either end 
thereof, the lower loop having a vertical ex 
tension thereon, which said extension is bent 
downwardly to form a parallel arm adapted 
Ic to clasp on the outside of the pocket, the said 
vertical extension having an aperture therein, 
and an arm extending downwardly from the 
upper loop and bent at angles to form a tooth 
normally bearing upon the vertical extension 
and passing through the aperture therein, Es 
substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
myinvention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 3d day of March, 
1894. 
AXE, SARNMARK. 
Witnesses: 
GOTTF. HARLING, 
OSCAR STJCINE. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525767.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 525,767. 
  
  
46 
a de H22523H as a 
s3sy 
Sesees R 
N SSN 
72 
2 70 
M. A., KLEIN. 
PUZZ.E. 
Patented Sept. 11, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
W 
2 - 
NSSSN 
2 N 
 
 
17 
Cuzzy-esses: 
-14-45 
77a veza Zo 7. 
Zig-?ikovar 
M7zzo-o-e yS. 
THE Mores Peters co. ProTouro. wasteroic 
s iniai. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL A. KLEIN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO ADOLPH KLEIN, OF 
SAME PLACE. 
PUZZLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,767, dated September 1 1, 1894. 
Application filed November 28, 1893, Serial No. 492,813, (No model.) 
To all, Zuhon, it mall concern: 
Be it known that I, MICHAEL A. KLEIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
5 nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Puzzles; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
To add to the skill required to gain the ob- 7o 
posite each pocket that communicate with 
communicating side channels. The puzzle is 
worked with a plurality of small balls, con 
veniently shot, and in the instance illustrated 55 
I have shown nine balls, although the num 
ber may be varied. The object of the puzzle 
can of course be varied, but a difficult and 
amusing object requiring patience and skill, 
is to place three of the balls in each pocket o 
by manipulating the board. This is found to 
be interesting and amusing, as it requires a 
great deal of patience and skill to so manip 
ulate the board to so place the balls owing to 
the location and arrangement of the pockets 55 
and channels, for it is manifest that the in 
clination of the board to cause certain of the 
balls to roll in one direction will cause other 
balls to roll in other and undesired directions. 
ject of the puzzle and as a feature of my in 
vention, I make radial channels 7, 8 and 9 
largest at their outer ends, which, while al 
lowing the balls to be more easily directed 
into these channels from the side channels, 75 
nevertheless permits the balls to escape eas 
ily from the radial channels. At one corner 
of the board I also make short channels 13 
joining the radial channel 7 that runs toward . 
the corner with the side channels 10 and 12, 8o 
and these side channels instead of joining 
each other at the point where the radial chan 
nels join them, join at the corner of the board 
and a little beyond the short channels 13. It 
is customary to start the puzzle by locating 85 
the balls in this corner of the board, one ball 
being located in the corner and four in each 
of the side channels between the corner and 
said short channels. It is also found prefer 
able to extend the side channels 10 and 12 go 
running from the corner close to the other 
corners, in which case owing to the enlarge 
ment of the mouths of the radial channels 8 
and 9, the other side channel will be compara 
tively short. In making a puzzle of this kind 95 
it is preferable to extend the side rails 14 
above the board proper and set in a piece of 
glass 15 that will not only keep the balls in 
place and prevent loss, but will prevent a 
player from manipulating the balls directly roo 
with the fingers. 
It will be understood that although I term 
3O 
Io it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to a novel construc 
tion in a puzzle wherein a board or apparatus 
is provided with a plurality of pockets and 
channels to act in conjunction with a number 
I5 of balls, the object being to place or lead cer 
tain of the balls into the different pockets. 
The invention consists in the features of 
construction hereinafter fully described and 
specifically claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings illustrating 
my invention, -Figure 1 is a top plan view of 
a puzzle board or apparatus constructed in 
accordance with my invention. Figs. 2 and 
3 are sectional views of the same taken re 
25 spectively on the lines 2-2 and 3-3 of Fig.1. 
Referring now to said drawings, 1 indicates 
the base of the board or apparatus which is 
made in the shape of an equilateral triangle 
with three pockets, and three radial chan 
nels, and three side channels. 
The pockets indicated by 2, 3 and 4 have 
mouths 5 that open toward each other, said 
pockets being located at about the center of 
the board and disposed with relation to each 
35 other that their mouths are located at the an 
gles of an equilateral triangle, that is to say, 
the mouths of the three pockets are regularly 
disposed around the center of the board and 
at a little distance from the same to form a 
field 6 between the mouths of these pockets. 
From this field and running toward the cor 
ners of the board are radial channels 7, 8 and 
9. These radial channels 7, 8 and 9 commu 
nicate with side channels 10, 11 and 12, that 
45 extend along the sides of the board and com 
municate with each other at the corners of 
the board. In this Way it will be seen that I 
provide a board with a plurality of angularly 
disposed pockets with their mouths opening 
5o in different directions and toward a common 
field in connection with radial channels op 
40 
525,767 
the channels running out from the field ra 
dial' channels, which they are properly, in 
the instance illustrated, yet they may not be 
technically radial, and may be varied, but, 
however, I use such term to indicate their ar 
rangement and do not use it in a strictly tech 
nical sense. 
I claim as my invention 
A puzzle board or apparatus having three 
communicating channels arranged in the form 
of a triangle, three radial channels communi 
cating with said side channels approximately 
at the angles formed thereby and extending 
... inwardly and communicating with each other 
O 
at about the center of the board in a field, 15 
and three pockets disposed around said field 
and having mouths opening into the field be 
tween the inner ends of said radial channels, 
said board to be used in connection with a 
plurality of balls, substantially as and in the 20. 
manner described. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
MICHAEL A. KLEIN. 
Witnesses: 
HARRY COBB KENNEDY, 
RUDOLPH. W. LOTZ. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525867.txt	( No Model.) 
No. 525,867, 
H. A. W. SMITH, 
PLOW. 
Patented Sept, ll, 1894. 
 
33% 
area wer 
 
 
 
44/we eZ/2 - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY A. W. SMITH, OF MINNEOLA, VIRGINIA. 
PLOW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,867, dated September 11, 1894. 
Application filed December 20, 1893, Serial No, 494,197, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY A. W. SMITH, of 
Minneola, in the county of Pittsylvania and 
State of Virginia, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Plows; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of this specification, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
plows, more particularly iron shovel plows, 
and has for its object to obviate the necessity 
of resetting the point of the beam upon which 
the shovel or share is mounted. 
The invention consists in certain novel de 
tails of construction which will be now de 
Scribed and pointed out in the appended 
claim. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a side elevation illustrating the application 
of my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical section, 
and Fig. 3, a horizontal section through the 
end of the beam and shovel shank. 
Like letters of reference in the several fig 
ures indicate the same parts. 
The letter A indicates an iron beam of or 
dinary construction, and which preferably 
constitutes the main portion or frame of the 
plow. The handles, &c., being attached in the 
Ordinary Well known manner, constitute no 
part of my present invention and need not 
be further described. In this form of plow, 
the rear end of the beam is usually curved 
down and forward slightly for the attach 
ment of the shovel or share, if it be a single 
share plow and bifurcated and extended 
down in the same manner for the attachment 
of the shovels or shares, if it be a double 
shovel plow, and it is found in practical use, 
that When the shovels or shares have become 
Worn Or broken, and it is desired to renew 
them, or the plow has been subjected to hard 
usage, it becomes necessary to have the beam 
taken to the shop and reset by being heated 
and bent forward in order to give the shovel 
the proper set so as to enter the ground at 
the proper angle, and to a sufficient depth, 
Without burrowing. Even with the shovels 
Set properly, when it is desired to vary the 
depth at which the shovels shall run, it can 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
only be done by changing the harness on the 
horse, thereby raising or lowering the front 
end of the beam and consequently changing 
the angle at which the shovel stands. 
My invention has for its object to overcome 
these difficulties, and to provide a device 
which is simple, strong and not liable to be 
come danaged or get out of order by con 
stant or hard use, and in carrying it into prac 
tice, I provide the beam some distance above 
its point, with an opening for the reception 
of a bolt B, by means of which the upper end 
of the shovel or upper end of the shovel shank 
is secured to the beam in the ordinary man 
ner, and at the lower end of the beam I form 
a threaded aperture for the reception of a set 
screw C, the point of which projects on the 
forward side of the beam and forms a rest or 
stop against which the shovel comes to rest. 
In the preferred construction, the rear face 
of the shovel or its shank is provided with a 
groove or recess D into which the end of the 
set screw is adapted to fit, thus not only pre 
venting any lateral movement of the shovel 
itself, but also locking the set screw against 
accidental movement. The set screw, it will 
also be observed is flattened or cut away so 
as to present flat faces for the application of 
a wrench by means of which the screw may 
be adjusted. This enables me to dispense 
with a head or other protection on the rear 
side of the beam and hence there is little or 
no danger of the same being knocked off or 
broken in rough usage. 
Should the beam become set or it become 
desirable for any purpose to change the an 
gle of inclination of the shovel, it can be 
readily accomplished by first loosening the 
bolt B and turning the set screw to the de 
sired point of adjustment, then placing the 
shovel in position and tightening the bolt B. 
This adjustment is easily and quickly made. 
Hence the farmer may change the angle of 
the shovel while in the field, should it become 
necessary to vary the depth at which the 
shovel travels. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new is 
In a plow, such as described, the combina 
tion with the beam having the downwardly 
and forwardly extending rear end and the 
90 
too 
525,867 
shovel or share having the recess in its rear 
side, of the bolt connecting the top of the 
shovel and beam and the set screw having 
flat faces passing through the beam in prox 
imity to the connecting bolt and co-operating 
with the recess on the rear side of the shovel, 
whereby the inclination of the shovel may be 
varied and the set screw is prevented from 
turning; substantially as described. 
H. A. W. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
DRYDEN WRIGHT, 
O. C. WRIGHT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US525967.txt	(No Model.) 
F. G., & A, C, SARGENT, 
FIBER, DRIER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 525,967. 
Patented Sept, ll, 1894, 
F. G. & A. C. SARGENT. 
FIBER, DRIER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Sept. 11, 1894, 
(No Model.) 
No. 525,967, 
 
\\ \\\\esses 
V\\\sevvex's 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK G. SARGENT AND ALLAN C. SARGENT, OF GRANITEVILLE, 
MASSACHUSETTS, 
- 
FIBER - D RER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 525,967, dated September 11, 1894. 
Application filed May 15, 1890, Serial No. 351,880, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, FREDERICK. G. SAR 
GENT and ALLAN C. SARGENT, of Graniteville, 
in the county of Middlesex and State of Mas 
Sachusetts, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Fiber-Driers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
Our improvement relates to machines for 
drying fiber, and it consists in certain new 
and useful constructions and combinations of 
certain parts thereof substantially as herein 
after described and claimed. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of a drying machine constructed accord 
ing to our invention. Fig. 2 is a top plan 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal 
section of the same through the line ac-ac of 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is an enlarged view of a part 
of Fig. 2, showing the operation of the eccen 
tric which works the damper. Fig. 5 is a side 
elevation of Fig. 4 with the parts in front of 
the dotted line 2-2 removed for clearness of 
illustration. 
A is the outer casing of the drier, which in 
closes it completely and is provided with a 
door, a, in one side of it for introducing the 
fiber to be dried. 
a' is a passageway outward to allow the air 
to escape, and is provided with a damper, a, 
operated by a crank, a , turning on pivots in 
the casing A. 
G is a slide damperor covering for the open 
ing G', through which air is admitted to the 
drier when it is opened, and by sliding this 
damper to and fro by hand the amount of air 
admitted may be regulated as desired. 
e is a vertical air passage at one end of the 
drier and F is a horizontal air passage or tube 
extending on top of the drier throughout its 
length; these passages being connected to 
gether as shown in Fig. 3. Across the drier 
internally, extending from side to side, is a 
partition A', reaching from the top of the 
main part of the drier down toward its bot 
tom part, SO as to leave a passageway, e, un 
derneath its lower end and partition off a 
space, I, in one end of the drier, which is con 
nected with the passageway F at the top. 
H is a damper or valve in the passageway 
F, between this space and the opening G', by 
which the passage may be closed when de 
55 
sired. This damper turns on a shaft, h, piv 
oted in the side walls of the passageway and 
having attached near its outer end the arm 
R, which is provided with the weight R. 
Another arm h provided with a wrist pin is 
attached to the extreme outer end of shaft h, 
to which wrist pin, the pitman bar, h", is at 
tached. This pitman bar is made in two 
parts screwed into the nut, h, between them, 
so that it may be lengthened or shortened by 
screwing the parts farther in or out. This 
pitman bar is connected to the strap, 20, which 
embraces a cam on the shaft, 21. This shaft, 
21, is mounted in stands, 22, 22, on top of the 
main part of the drier and revolved by the 
band wheel, 23, from a proper countershaft. 
The throw of the cam and its strap, 20, is such 
as to alternately open and close the damper 
H as the shaft 21 revolves. 
In the space I is located the steam pipes c, 
c, arranged in the form of a heater or radiator 
for heating the air which passes through this 
space, which are to be connected to a boiler 
by the pipes c', c, in the usual manner for 
supplying them with steam. 
On the inner faces of the casing A and par 
tition A' is secured the screen C in a horizon 
tal position, and at some distance below it 
the horizontal screen B is also arranged so as 
to have the fiber rest upon it during the dry 
ing process. 
The function of the screen C is 
to prevent the fiber from being drawn upward 
by the air current passing through the drier 
and carried away from the screen B. The 
screen B is supported upon a frame, b, which 
rests upon the bars battached to the casing 
A and partition A', so that the screen B and 
its frame b may be slid outward and inward 
on these bars, and the door a in the side of the 
drier is opened to allow the screen B to be 
withdrawn and replaced, when the fiber that 
is dried is to be removed and fresh fiber placed 
upon the screen for drying. The door a 
closes tightly so as to prevent the admission 95 
of air around it when it is closed, and the 
valve H also closes tightly. 
In one end of the drier the casing A has a 
circular hole cut in it, opening into the pas 
sage e, and in this hole is mounted the fan, d, Ioo 
so as to fill it. This fan is supported on a 
shaft, 30, in boxes in the stands, d, one of 
75 
25 
35 
45 
 
P 
525,967 
which is attached to the cross bar, d, extend 
ing across and attached to the walls of the 
passage e, and the other stand d is attached 
to the cross bar, d, which is fastened to the 
horizontal frame pieces d', d', and the upright 
posts d'; the whole of these d, d, d, d, con 
stituting a frame to resist the strain of the 
running fan. The shaft 30 is revolved by the 
pulley, 31, which is driven from any suitable 
countershaft. When the damper II is closed 
the fan d partially exhausts the air from the 
inside of the drier, all its casing being so 
tightly fitted as to prevent the ingress of air 
through the joints, and this exhaustion of 
the air causes the moisture of the fiber being 
dried on the screen B to be taken up more rap 
idly by the rarefied air remaining in the 
drier. The damper II being then opened as 
well as the slide G, the sudden inrush of air 
carries the moisture-laden air within the drier 
out through the passage e and passageway 
outward a, the damper a being of course 
left open during this process. The fan d is 
run at such a speed that the alternate open 
ing and closing of the damper II thus causes 
an alternate partial exhaustion of the air in 
the drier and admission of air through passage 
F, which greatly accelerates the drying pro 
CeSS. 
In case it is desired to use the air several 
times over through the drier, the damper a 
is closed or almost closed, the slide Gis closed 
or almost closed, and the damper His opened, 
which allows the air to pass around continu 
ally, by the action of the fan d, from the in 
side of the drier through the passages e, F, 
and space I. If the damper a and slide G 
are entirely closed, all the air will pass around. 
If they are left slightly open part of it will 
escape during its passage and its place be 
supplied with fresh air past the partly opened 
slide G. We are thus enabled to use the drier 
with the stationary screen B to great advan 
tage and in a variety of ways, as may be de 
sired for operation in drying different grades 
of wool, or for drying it in a greater or less 
degree. The slide G is held in guide-ways 
undercut in the strips g, which are attached 
to the casing. 
The detail construction of the can strap, 
20, and shaft 21 is shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 
The cam strap 20 is provided with slots, 40, 
in its sides, through which the shaft 21 runs, 
the position of these slots being such that as 
the weight, h, holds the damper Holosed, the 
shaft will be in one end of the slots 40. The 
cam, 41, as it revolves, however, having come 
in contact with the strap through a portion 
of its revolution pushes the latter along upon 
the shaft, moving the pitman endwise and 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
overcoming the weighth, opens the damper 
H. As the revolution of the cam continues 
it is withdrawn from the strap and the weight 
h closes the damper by sliding the strap along 
on the eccentric shaft 21. 
What we claim as new and of our inven 
tion is 
1. The combination of a drying chamber; 
a screen placed horizontally within it and di 
viding it into upper and lower portions; an 
air inlet passage provided with a damper, 
leading into the chamber on one side of the 
Screens; an air outlet passage, provided with 
an exhaust fan, leading out of the chamber 
from the other side of the screen; and means 
for operating the damper and fan so as alter 
nately to exhaust the air from the chamber 
through the Screen, and to admit fresh air 
thereto. 
2. The combination of a drying chamber; 
two parallel screens placed horizontally with 
in it and dividing it into upper and lower 
portions; an air inlet passage provided with 
a damper, leading into the chamber on one 
side of both screens; an air outlet passage, 
provided with an exhaust fan, leading out of 
the chamber from the other side of both 
screens; and means for operating the damper 
and fan so as alternately to exhaust the air 
from the chamber through the screens and to 
admit fresh air thereto. 
3. The combination of a drying chamber; 
a screen for carrying the material to be dried, 
placed horizontally within it; an ingress pas 
Sage, provided with a damper, leading into the 
chamber on one side of the screen; an egress 
passage, provided with an outlet with a dam 
per therein, leading out of the chamber from 
the other side of the screen and connecting 
with the ingress passage; and a means of 
moving air through the passages and cham 
ber, located in the air outlet passage. 
4. The combination of a drying chamber; 
a screen for carrying the material to be dried, 
placed horizontally within it; an ingress pas 
sage, provided with a damper and with an 
inlet regulated by a slide, leading into the 
chamber on one side of the screen; an egress 
passage, provided with an outlet with a 
damper therein, leading out of the chamber 
from the other side of the screen and connect 
ing with the ingress passage; and a means of 
moving air through the passages and cham 
ber, located in the air outlet passage. 
FREDERICK. G. SARGENT. 
ALLAN C. SARGENT. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR B. PLIMPTON, 
W. A. HARRIS. 
75 
95 
dCd 
I o5 
IC 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526067.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
4. Sheets-Sheet i. 
G. H. ZSCHECH & W. H. SUMBLING, 
STEAM WACUUM PUMP, 
No. 526,067. 
 
Patented Sept. 18, l894. 
2 K 
22 
2.5% al 
SS 
N 
(No Model.) 
G. H. ZSCHECH & W. H. SUMBLING. 
STEAM WACUUMPUMP, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 526,067. 
Patented Sept. 18, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Y. 
N 
% 
- (Z 
 
% -2-2-2, A. 2-2, 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
G. H. ZSCHECH & W. H. SUMBLING, 
STEAM WACUUM BUMP, 
No. 526,067. 
Patented Sept. 18, 1894, 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
2. 
22 
EE --- 
&a 2 
A 4 
 
N 
 
 
 
Z% 
% is, 5 W2 
N 2-2S / 
, 72-2 
N 
N 
Y 
N 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
G. H. ZSCHECH & W. H. SUMBLING. 
STEAM WACU UM PUMP, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 526,067, 
N 
Ns 
WNNWS 
N & 
%/A 
A. 
 
  
S. A- W 
trip 
M%. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
SN 
NS 
N 
W % 
% 'CZ272 
s 
i. AF 
(sf 
2. VSOYP 
Z2 
sy3. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Patented Sept. 18, 1894, 
 
 
O N 
N 
S N 22 
2 
 
S 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAVUS H. ZSCHECH AND WILLIAM H. SUMBLING, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
STEAM WACUUM-PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,067, dated September 18, 1894. 
Application filed July 14, 1893, Serial No. 480,543, (No model.) 
6 o 
65 
75 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that we, GUSTAVUSH. ZSCHECH 
and WILLIAM. H. SUMBLING, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Chicago, Cook 
County, Illinois, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Steam Vacuum-Pumps, 
of which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
steam. Vacuum pumps for pumping waterim 
pregnated with sand or other matter. 
The object of our invention is to supply an 
improved pump for this purpose, that will be 
free from many of the objections to which 
Such pumps as now made are subject, as the 
Wear on valves and valve attachments, &c. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure is an elevation in part section. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of base of pump. Fig. 3 is a 
Section through the base of one cylinder on 
line 3, ac, Eig. 2. Fig. 4 is a vertical section 
through the pump cylinders. Fig. 10 is a plan 
View of the cap for same. Fig. 5 is a section 
through one of the condensing jet nozzles. 
Fig. 6 is a vertical section through one of the 
air valves. Fig. 7 is a section on line ac, ac, 
Fig. 6. Figs. 8, 9 and 10 are detailed views 
of the steam admission valve. 
Like parts are indicated by like letters 
- 
throughout, 
The steam chest Ais connected by the pipes 
A, A, with the cylinders A, A, which are: 
fastened to the base B. Within the steam 
chest A is a cylindrical cavity containing the 
valve body or valve F. 
The steam valves are preferably made of 
Some non-corroding metal, as gun metal, so 
that when the pump is out of use, they will 
not corrode and stick to the steam chest, 
The passages A, A, are divided into two 
branches A, A', when they leave the steam 
chest, the branches A' entering the steam 
chest above the valve as shown. Steam en 
ters, the steam chest through the pipe A0. 
The passages A are each provided with the 
air valves, which are regulated by the stop 
cocks A. One of these valves is shown in 
detail in Figs. 6 and 7, and consists of the 
Outer cup shaped portion or case A, contain 
ing the grooves A, and the cup-shaped valve 
A, resting on the valve seat A. It will be 
seen that in this device there are two cup 
shaped portions opening in opposite direc 
tions. The passages A are provided at their 
ends with the spray baskets A, having con 
vex bottoms and provided with the slotSA. 
A pipe A supplies the condensing nozzles A", 
A9 with Water. 
Fig. 5 is a modified form of the condensing 
nozzle, in which there is no valve. The top 
or cap A is provided with the bell A, as 
shown, which catches any dropping particles, 
and prevents them from entering the holes 
A. These holes get larger as they descend, 
so that if anything does get into them, it will 
not stop up the passage. The bell A* also 
scatters the jets of water throughout the cyl 
inder. 
Lugs B, B' and B, B are cast on the base 
B, so as to come within the steam cylinders 
A, A, each lug being beveled as shown in 
Fig. 3. The lugs B, B have each one side 
consisting of two beveled surfaces which cut 
each other at the middle of said side and 
form a point or projection B as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
The mouths of the pipes C, C, through 
which the water and impurities are admitted 
to the cylinders, A, A, are covered with the 
valves C C, or rubber or some similar ma 
terial. These valves are covered with the 
semicircular cast iron plates C, provided 
with the annular lugs C, and fastened to the 
said valves by the rivets C. These valves 
rest upon a removable valve seat D, the top 
of which is composed of two inclined planes, 
upon each of which rests a valve. (See Fig. 
3.) These valve seats are provided with the 
cavities or hollow portions D', D', for the re 
ception of the heads of the screw bolts D, 
D, which pass through the rubber valves C 
and are screwed into threaded holes in the 
pieces C. 
These bolts hold the said valves 
in position, the rubber bending at the point 
between the iron pieces C and C when the 
valve is moved. By this arrangement, the 
heads of the securing bolts D', Dare out of 
reach of the sand or other destructive mat 
ter, and therefore are not worn so as to make 
it impossible to remove them with a wrench, 
which is the case when they are exposed as 
in the ordinary pump. These valve seats are 
provided with beveled ends, and have grooves 
into which fit the projectionsBon the lugs B. 
The said valve seats are held in place by the . 
9o 
95 
ICO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
526,067 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
keys, D, tapered both ways as shown to hold 
the valve seat firmly in place. D, Dare the 
covers for the hand holes, through which the 
valves are reached. 
E, E, are the openings of the discharge pas 
sages leading to the discharge chamber E', 
which is fastened to the base E. These dis 
charge passages are controlled by the valves 
E, E, which are of the same pattern as the 
valve C, C, referred to above, but somewhat 
modified in form to utilize the space in the 
discharge chamber to the best advantage. 
An air chamber E is secured to and commu 
nicates with the discharge chamber E'. 
The portion of the base B, upon which the 
valve seats D rest, are raised so as to allow 
of their being smoothed up without smooth 
ing the surface of such plate exposed to the 
action of the sand and other destructive mat 
ter, said surface being left in the rough as 
When cast, which prevents the sand and other 
material from wearing it away. 
Referring to the modification of the steam 
admission valve represented in Figs. 8,9, and 
10. In this case, the valve F is a hollow cyl 
inder, having the opening F, through which 
steam from the boiler enters, and the open 
ings F, F, through which steam is admitted 
to the passages A, A', and hence, cylinders 
A, A. The passages A', Aare divided into 
the passages F, F and F. The passage F4 
is continuous between the two passages A", 
A', but is closed by the pieces F, F, project. 
ing from the valve F, and is enlarged at F, 
F, so as to allow a sufficient motion of said 
pieces, and hence, the valve F, to open and 
close the passages F, F. One piece F may 
be used alone and would be situated between 
the two pieces F shown in the drawings. A 
bolt F. passes through the top of the steam 
chest A, the lower end of said bolt entering a 
hole in the center of the top of the valve F, 
and bearing upon the hard metallic piece F8 
at the bottom of said hole. The end of this 
bolt acts as a pivot on which the valve rotates 
the upward pressure of the steam, keeping 
the said valve in contact with the bolt. By 
this arrangement, we get a very small bear 
ing surface and hence, a small amount of fric 
tion, thus allowing the valve to be readily 
moved. The bolt F can be adjusted to take 
up the Wear and prevent the valve from rub 
bing against the top of the steam chest. 
F" is an oil hole which supplies oil to the 
bearing of the valve by means of a hole 
through bolt F. 
FF' are grooves on the top of the valve F 
to allow lubrication of the sides of the valve. 
The manner of working this valve is simi 
lar to that o the valve of which it is a modi 
fication, viz: When the condensing jet pro 
duces a partial vacuum in the right-hand 
cylinder, the pressure in the passage F on 
the right becomes less than the pressure in 
Said passage on the left, and the valve is 
moved in the direction of the arrow, cutting 
off steam from the right-hand cylinder, and 
admitting steam to the left-hand cylinder and 
vice versa. 
The reason for making the passage F con 
tinuous is to prevent a cushion of air in the 
enlargement F, which would impede the mo 
tion of the valve. 
In the modification of the steam admission 
valve shown in Figs. 8, 9, and 10, the valve 
H contained in the steam chest A is a hol 
low rectangular shaped reciprocating valve. 
Steam is admitted into the hollow portion of 
the valve H' through the openings H, steam 
being supplied to the cylinders through the 
openings H, H. The upper part of the valve 
is provided at its center with a receptacle and 
bearings H for the journals Hof a roller, II, 
which rolls along the adjustable plate H, in 
the upper part of the steam chest A'. 
H is an oil hole by which oil is applied to 
the bearings of the roller. 
The particular form, construction and ar 
rangement of these various parts may be al 
tered or changed without departing from the 
spirit of my invention, and I therefore do not 
wish to be limited to the precise arrange 
ment shown. 
The use and operation of our invention are 
as follows: When the steam admission valve is 
in the position shown in Fig. 9, steam is being 
admitted into the pipe A' on the right through 
opening F and hence into the right hand cyl 
inder A* (see Fig. 4) which at this time would 
be full of sand and water. The entering 
steam is scattered by a spray basket A' 
(shown in left hand cylinder Fig. 4) and its 
pressure evenly distributed over the surface 
of the sand and water which will be forced 
into the discharge E' and thence to the place 
where it is desired to lift it. When the level 
of the sand and water in the cylinder falls 
below the nozzle A' of the condensing jet, a 
jet of water is forced up into the steam con 
densing it and producing a partial vacuum. 
The pressure in the passage F on the right 
of the valve F (Fig. 9) becomes less, on ac 
count of the steam rushing rapidly through 
passage F to fill up the vacuum in the cylin 
der, than the pressure in passage F on the 
left, and hence said valve will be rotated so 
as to cut off steam from the right hand cylin 
der and admit steam to the left hand cylin 
der. The partial vacuum in said right hand 
cylinder causes the air to force the sand and 
water through pipe C, which raises valves C 
C and enters said cylinder. When the level 
of the sand and water rises above the jet 
nozzle A'the jet ceases to play. In the mean 
time the water is being forced out of the left 
hand cylinder by the entering steam and 
when the level falls below the jet nozzle A' 
a jet of Water is forced up into the steam, 
condensing it and forming a partial vacuum. 
This causes the valve F to be rotated as de 
scribed above, so as to cut off steam from the 
left hand cylinder and admit steam into right 
hand cylinder, when the same process is re 
peated as described above. 
7 o 
75 
95 
do 
O 
II5 
I 25 
526,067 
The air chamber E gives the discharge 
streams a steady flow. When the valves C 
are Worn out, the key D is driven out, the 
Valve seat removed, the bolts D taken out 
and new valves replaced. By this arrange 
ment the heads of the bolts D'are not injured 
by the sand, and they can be readily removed, 
Which is a great item in this sort of a pump. 
The manner in which the jet nozzles are ar 
ranged prevent sand, &c., from clogging and 
stopping the jet and insures a correct working 
of the pump. The air valves. A prevent the 
sand and water from rising too high and fill 
ing up the passages A' and F. 
I claim 
1. In a steam vacuum pump, the combina 
tion of a cylinder with a valve and valve seat 
wholly within the cylinder, said valve seat 
removably secured to the bottom of the cylin 
der, and screws passing through said valve 
Seat from beneath so as to secure the valve 
to the seat without being exposed to the inside 
of the cylinder. 
2. A valve for a steam vacuum pump and 
the like consisting of a removable valve seat 
recessed below, a flexible valve body, and a 
plate, between which plate and the seat the 
flexible body is secured, and screw bolts which 
pass upwardly through the seat through the 
flexible body of the valve and into such se 
curing plates so that no part of such screw 
bolts is exposed within the cylinder. 
3. The combination of a cylinder with a 
Valve, said valve entirely within the cylinder 
and consisting of a flexible portion, a strength 
ening plate secured thereto above the valve 
aperture, a securing plate placed at one end 
of the flexible portion, a valve seat and screw 
bolts projecting through such valve seat 
40 
45 
Sc 
through the flexible portion and into the se 
curing plate. 
4. A condensing nozzle for steam vacuum 
pumps consisting of a nozzle projecting into 
the cylinder, and provided with passage-ways 
which continuously and regularly diminishin 
cross-sectional area to the point of opening, 
and a deflecting hollow inverted bell rigidly 
attached to said nozzle and disposed between 
such openings so as to guard said openings, 
and receive within itself, substances, which 
otherwise might be discharged upon such 
openings. 
5. An admission valve for steam vacuum 
pumps consisting of a hollow cylindrical valve 
body closed at one end and having an open 
ing at the other end for the admission of steam 
into the hollow portion of such valve body, 
and openings on the sides through which 
steam is admitted to the cylinders and a pro 
jecting piece or pieces on the outside of such 
valve body by which said valve body is ro 
tated by the difference of pressure in the two 
cylinders. 
6. An admission valve for steam vacuum 
pumps consisting of a hollow cylindrical valve 
body with an opening on one end for the ad 
mission of steam into such valve body and 
openings on the sides through which steam 
is admitted to the cylinders, and a projecting 
piece on the outside of said valve body, said 
valve body rotating on a pivot bearing in a 
hole at the center of its upper end. 
GUSTAVUS H. ZSCHECH, 
WILLIAM. H. SUMBLING. 
Witnesses: 
D. M. CARTER, 
WALTER J. GUNTHORP. 
O 
20 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526167.txt	(No Model.). 
No. 526,167. 
D. A. STILES, 
POCKET KNIFE, 
Patented Sept. 18, 1894, 
 
A 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DORAS A. STILES, OF DURHAM, CONNECTICUT. 
POCKET-KNIFE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,167, dated September 18, 1894. 
Application filed January 15, 1894, Serial No, 496,935. (No model.) 
55 
75 
a 
To all, whon, it nay concern. 
Beit known that I, DORAs A. STILES, of Dur 
ham, in the county of Middlesex and State of 
Connecticut, have invented a new Improve 
ment in Pocket-Knives; and I do hereby de 
clare the following, when taken in connection 
With the accompanying drawings and the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, and 
which said drawings constitute part of this 
Specification, and represent, in- 
Figure 1, a detached view inside elevation 
of a knife-lining adapted to form a secondary 
spring containing my invention; Fig. 2, a 
plan view thereof; Fig. 3, a detached view in 
side elevation of an independent secondary 
knife-spring containing my invention; Fig. 4, 
a plan view thereof; Fig. 5, an enlarged broken 
view in inside elevation showing the position 
of an independent secondary spring con 
structed in accordance with my invention, in 
a knife; Fig. 6, a view in transverse section 
of a knife having its linings utilized as sec 
Ondary Springs; Fig. 7, a view in side eleva 
tion of a knife of the type to which my in 
vention relates; Fig. 8, a plan view thereof. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
that class of pocket-knives in which the knife 
blades are automatically ejected into position 
for being firmly grasped by the fingers pre 
paratory to fully opening them, whereby the 
finger-nails are spared. A knife of this type 
is shown and described in United States Pat 
ent No. 401,093, granted April 9, 1889. Such 
knives are provided with an auxiliary or sec 
ondary spring for each blade, each of the said 
springs having a finger-piece arranged to pro 
ject beyond the adjacent end of the knife, 
and normally standing under the heel of the 
knife-blade with which it co-operates, for 
holding the blade in its closed position, and 
manually retracted for disengagement from 
the heel of the blade, to permit the partial 
ejection of the same by the knife-spring, by 
means of the fingers which are used to move 
the finger-piece laterally to the longitudinal 
plane of the knife. As heretofore constructed, 
knives of the type described have been ob 
jectionable on account of the sticking of the 
finger-pieces, and their refusal on that ac 
count to spring back under the heels of the 
knife-blades forlocking them in their closed 
positions, the sticking of the finger-pieces be 
ing due to the friction between their edges 
and the adjacent edges of the auxiliary or sec 
ondary springs with which they are integrally 
formed. 
The object of my invention is to avoid the 
objection above recited, and to produce a 
knife of the character described in which the 
finger-pieces will not stick, but will invariably 
return freely to their closed positions. 
With this object in view, my invention con 
sists in an automatic knife, constructed with 
a secondary or auxiliary spring, having a fin 
ger-piece formed integral with one of its ends, 
and formed with a clearance space located ad 
jacent to the inner end of the finger-piece to 
reduce the friction of the operation of the 
Salme. 
In carrying out my invention I may utilize 
either or both of the knife-linings in the con 
struction of the secondary springs, or I may 
employ independent springs for the purpose. 
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2 of the drawings, 
I have converted an ordinary knife-lining A, 
into a secondary spring, by constructing it at 
one of its ends with an integral finger-piece, 
comprising a head A and an in Wardly set 
tongue A, which normally extends inward 
under the heel B of the knife-blade B', as 
seen in Fig. 6, for holding the blade in its 
closed position, and which is retracted from 
under the heel of the knife by drawing it out 
ward by means of its head A' into the space 
b, seen in said Fig. 6. In order to reduce 
the friction of the operation of the tongue A 
of the finger-piece, I form at the base of the 
tongue, a clearance space A, which so far 
reduces the friction upon the edges of the 
tongue, that its spring power will always be 
sufficient to operate it freely in recovering its 
normal position, in which it stands under the 
heel of the knife-blade. Without this clear 
ance space the tongue is liable to stick, and 
cause great annoyance in the operation of the 
knife. 
As shown in Figs, 3 and 4 of the drawings, 
the secondary spring C, consists of an inde 
pendent piece of sheet-metal, which is riveted 
into the knife. It is provided at one end with 
an integrally formed finger-piece comprising 
a head C, and an inwardly set tongue C for 
the free operation of which the spring is con 
O 
(5 
2 o' 
35 
45 
So 
95 
IOC 
2 
526,167 
O 
structed with a clearance slot C, located ad 
jacent to the base of the tongue, and reducing 
the friction of the lateral operation thereof to 
Such an extent that its spring power is always 
sufficient to accomplish its recovery after it 
has been drawn outward and retracted for 
the automatic ejection of the knife-blade. 
Without this slot the finger-piece is of uncer 
tain operation, and hampers the use of the 
knife. In Fig. 5 of the drawings I have shown 
the position of such a secondary spring as 
just described, within a knife. 
Figs. 7 and 8 of the drawings show the pro 
jection of the heads of the finger-pieces be. 
yond the ends of a knife of the type described. 
It is apparent that in carrying out my in 
vention the particular form of the secondary 
spring and its finger-piece may be changed, 
and I would therefore have it understood that 
I do not limit myself to the exact construc 
tion shown and described, but hold myself at 
liberty to make such changes as fairly fall 
within the spirit and scope of my invention; 
but whatever form the secondary spring takes, 
25 
35 
m 
a clearance slot will always be formed at the 
base of the tongue of its finger-piece substan 
tially in the manner illustrated. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
An auxiliary or secondary spring for knives 
of the character described, having formed in 
tegral with one of its ends a finger-piece com 
prising a head, and an inwardly set tongue, 
and having a clearance space formed at the 
base of the said tongue, and along one of its 
edges to reduce the friction of its operation, 
and so that it will invariably spring back into 
its locking position when released, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
DORAS A. STILES. 
Witnesses: 
F. T. WELLMAN, 
L. M. LEACH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526267.txt	No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. W. SARGENT & R. H. RICE. 
WALWE GEAR 
No. 526,267. 
Patented Sept. 18, 1894, 
& Ad. a CE 
 
 
zzo- sves. 
l 
a 
-Zzzzle-lez-s: 
-- 
22. 1%2%% 277 
 
(No Model.) 
J. 
No. 526,267. 
W. SARGENT & R. H. RICE. 
WALWE GEAR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 18, 1894. 
 
 
... 
al 
I 
J. W. SARGENT & R. H. RICE. 
WALWE GEAR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 526,267. 
 
Patented Sept, 18, 1894, 
  
Wzz 2 esses. 
Zzvezzors." 
J. W. SARGENT & R. H. RICE. 
VALVE GEAR 
Patented Sept. 18, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 526,267. 
 
I 
3.E. 
7th EHEYs 
5. RS 
WS 
a 
& 
sal 
 
UNITED STATES 
JOHN W. SARGENT AND RICHARD H. RICE, 
ISLAND. 
PATENT OFFICE. 
OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE 
VALVE-GEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,267, dated September 18, 1894. 
Application filed June 1, 1894, serial No, 513,169, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, JOHN W. SARGENT and 
RICHARD H. RICE, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Providence, in the State of 
Rhode Island, have invented a new and use 
fulmprovementin Valve-Gear for Steam-En 
gines, of which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to the valve gear and 
valves of automatic cut off engines, and it is 
especially adapted to the so called Corliss 
engine, or the rotary four valved type. 
The object of our invention is to provide 
improved means for opening the steam valve 
with a locked engagement of the valve oper 
ating mechanism up to the point of cut off, 
which point is automatically controlled by 
the governor, to provide improved means for 
operating the exhaust valves by the . wrist 
plate motion, whereby the strain on the ex 
haust bonnets is lessened, and the cost of con 
struction cheapened. 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figure 1, 
represents a side elevation of a steam engine 
cylinder provided with our improvement. 
Fig. 2, represents a partial end elevation of 
Fig. 3, represents a detail front 
the same. 
elevation of the cut-off valve gear showing 
the parts in their engaged position. Fig. 4, 
represents a detail side elevation of the same 
separate from the cylinder. 
Fig. 5, repre 
sents a section taken in the line 2, 2, of Fig. 
4, showing the inner side of the rocker, the 
cam lever and the trip lever. Fig. 6, repre 
sents a detail front view as in Fig. 3, the rocker, 
and driving toe being shown at their forward, 
position, with the latch disengaged, and the 
valve closed the rearward position of the 
rocker and driving toe being shown by dotted 
Fig. 7, represents a section taken in 
lines. 
the line v, v', of Fig. 3, showing a top view of 
the latch. Fig. 8, represents a vertical section 
taken in the line ac, ac, of Fig. 7. Figs. 9 and 
10, correspond with the views shown in Figs. 
3 and 4, and show a modification. 
In the drawings, Figs. 1 and 2, A is the cyl 
inder of a Corliss engine; B and B, the 
steam valve bonnets, and C and C the ex 
haust valve bonnets. 
Heretofore it has been the custom to con 
nect the four steam and exhaust valve rock 
ers, to a wrist-plate carried on a separate stand 
at the side of the cylinder, the wrist-plate 
having a rocking motion imparted to it from 
an eccentric upon the main shaft. In our in 
vention the two steam valve rockers sus 
pended from the bonnets B, B, are connected 
together at their lower ends by means of the 
link 1, and motion is imparted to the same by 
means of link 2, which is connected to an in 
dependent eccentric on the main shaft, the 
desired Wrist-plate unotion for each exhaust 
Valve being obtained by attaching a bell-crank 
rocker lever 45 to each of the exhaust valve 
bonnets C, C, preferably upon a projecting 
arm 47 which forms a part of the bonnet cast 
ing. As the valve gear for each end of the 
cylinder operates in the same manner, we will 
for illustration describe the valve gear for the 
front end of the cylinder, or the end toward 
the crank, in which the rocker 5 is journaled 
upon a fixed bushing 6, projecting from the 
bonnet B, which bushing Surrounds and car 
ries the Valve stem 7, and a regular motion is 
imparted to the rocker by means of the link 
2, which connects with pin 8 at the lower end 
of the rocker, and with the eccentric on the 
main shaft, 
The rocker 5 is provided at about midway 
of its length with a bearing hub 11, for hold 
ing the driving toe 12, the said hub being 
cut away at 48, to provide for the forwardly 
projecting portion of the driving toe and al 
low the free vibration of the same upon its 
pivot or turning axis. A pivot spindle 13 
forming part of the driving toe 12, has a free 
fit in the hub 11, and passes through to the 
rear, and to the rear end of the spindle 13 is 
keyed the cam lever 35, which is carried ob 
liquely upward behind the rocker 5, and is a 
free fit between the two rollers 18, 18, which 
are held upon the pins 14 projecting in front 
of the trip lever 20, the said trip lever being 
pivoted upon the bonnet B concentrically 
with the valve stem, and provided with the 
upwardly extending arm 22, which is con 
nected by means of the link 23 with the gov 
enO. 
The valve lever 24, Figs. 3 and 4, is keyed 
to the valve stem 7, and has a branch arm 26 
carrying the pin 27, from which connection is 
made to the dash pot by means of the link 
28, for properly closing the valve. 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
75 
95 
OO 
 
526,267 
A. 
5 
O 
The valve lever 24 projects downward at 
about an angle of forty-five degrees when in 
middle position, and carries from a lug 29 in 
the rear, a latch 30, which is engaged by the 
driving toe 12 of the rocker, to open the 
valve. Fig. 3 shows the parts engaged, and 
in the act of moving to the right, as shown 
by the arrow to open the valve. The nor 
mal position of the latch in relation to the 
lug 29 of the valve lever is shown in Figs. 3 
and 6, and it is held in said position by its own 
weight, the front portion of the latch resting 
against the face 31 of the lug 29, and receiv 
ing the thrust of the toe 12 for opening the 
valve. The upper part of the latch extends 
backward over the lug, and is provided with 
a cylindrical turning point or pivot 32, where 
by the latch may be raised, when the driving 
toe 12 passes under it on the return move 
ment of the rocker 5. The bearing 21 for 
the latch 30, extends through the valve lever 
24, and a cap-nut 25, is screwed upon the ex 
tension of the latch pivot, to prevent the 
lateral movement of the latch in its bearing. 
In Fig. 8, the line v, v, indicates the direc 
tion of the pressure imparted to the latch 
from the toe 12 for opening the valve, and it 
is seen that the center of the pivot or turning 
point 32, is located at a considerable distance 
r, above the line of pressure, so that the latch 
will be prevented from rising while subjected 
to the action of the toe 12, the engaging cor 
ner 36 of which bears against the corner 37 
of the latch, so that a very great amount of 
wear would be required to cause the latch to 
jump out of its engagement. This is an impor 
tant feature of our invention as We are thus 
enabled to use a light gravity-latch, Without 
the employment of springs, and at the same 
time the latch is automatically locked in po 
sition when at work. The cam lever 35, has 
a short incline 16, about midway of the length 
of the cam, thus dividing the length of the 
cam into two parts, 15 and 17, each of which 
is a segment of a circle, so arranged that its 
center will coincide With the center of the 
valve stem when the said segment is held be 
tween the rollers, so that in operation there 
will be no change in the relation of the cam 
lever and the attached driving toe 12 with the 
rocker 5, except when the incline 16 of the 
cam passes between the rollers 18. The seg 
ments 15 and 17, of the cam-lever 35, are 
made of equal radius, while their curves are 
struck from different centers, so that the said 
segments will be eccentric with each other, 
and when either segment is held between the 
rollers 18, 18, it will be concentric with the 
axis of the trip-lever, while the opposite seg 
ment will be eccentric thereto, which is a 
distinguishing feature of our invention. 
In Fig. 5, the outer portion 17 of the cam 
is between the rollers, so that the cam lever 
and driving toe are in their highest positions, 
which is the position for engagement with 
the latch, the driving toe being thus con 
nected by means of the cam lever with the 
trip lever 20, it is obvious that the driving 
toe has a resultant movement depending 
upon the motion of the rocker 5 and the va 
rying location of the trip lever 20, which lat 
ter is under the control of the governor. 
The movement imparted to the rocker by 
the eccentric, is represented by the space be 
tween the dotted lines 9 and 10 in Fig. 6, the 
position of the rocker and the driving toe at 
the commencement of the forward movement 
for opening the valve being shown by the dot 
ted lines; and at this position of the rocker, 
the outer portion 17 of the cam lever will or 
dinarily be between the rolls 18, 18, with the 
toe 12 raised to its engaging position, the 
latch 30 having been dropped down in front 
of the toe, so that as the rocker advances, the 
corner 36 of the driving toe 12 will engage 
with the corner 37 of the latch, thus impart 
ing an opening movement to the steam valve; 
and as the rocker 5 continues to advance, the 
incline 16 of the cam enters between the roll 
ers, causing the driving toe 12 to be depressed 
sufficiently to effect the disengagement of the 
latch to close the valve. The toe 12 then con 
tinues its forward movement with the rocker, 
while the valve lever 24 being set free, is 
drawn back to the closed position of the 
valve, as shown in Fig. 6, by means of the 
dash-pot link 28, connected to the pin 27. On 
the return movement of the rocker 5, the in 
cline 16 of the cam, returns between the roll 
ers and raises the toe 12 for subsequent en 
gagement with the latch, and as the toe 12 
comes back to its first described position, the 
latch 30 is raised by contact with the upper 
surface of the toe 12, and then dropsin front 
of the toe ready for re-engagement to open 
the valve as before. It is obvious that the 
angular position of the trip-lever 20, which is 
controlled by the governor, will regulate the 
amount of opening and time of closing of the 
valve, and the trip-lever may be depressed by 
the action of the governor so that only the 
inner portion 15 of the cam lever, will be held 
between the rollers, and the toe will not in 
this case engage with the latch; and on the 
other hand, the trip-lever may be raised by 
the action of the governor, so that the rollers 
Will only engage With the outer portion 17 of 
the cam lever, and in this case the toe and 
latch will continue in engagement for the 
whole stroke, thus giving the latest possible 
cut-off of the steam: and between these ex 
treme limits, the governor will control the cut 
off and supply of steam as required. 
The governor link 23 is connected to the 
front side of the arm 22 of the trip-lever 20 
located at the front end of the cylinder A, 
and a downwardly inclined link 38, extends 
from the pin 34 at the rear of the said trip 
lever, to the rear of the trip-lever 20 at the 
opposite end of the cylinder, thus imparting 
the necessary reversal of motion to the two 
trip-levers. 
The rollers 18, 18, are set out of line with 
the center of the valve stem 7, in order that 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
526,267 
- 
3 
lever pivoted concentrically with the rocker, 
and provided with the rollers which embrace 
the opposite sides of the cam-lever and serve 35 
to actuate the connected cam-lever and driv 
ing-toe, substantially as described. 
2. In an automatic cut-off engine, the com 
bination with a rocker actuated by the ec 
centric, and the lever for actuating the valve, 4o 
of the driving-toe controlled by the governor, 
and the latch having its pivot or turning axis 
out of the line of the driving pressure be 
tween the rocker and the valve lever, so that 
the latch will be automatically held in en 
gagement by the direction of the thrust rela 
tively to its pivot or turning point, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In an automatic cut-off engine, the com 
bination with a rocker actuated by the ec 
centric, the lever for actuating the valve, and 
a latch jointed to the valve-lever and having 
its pivot or turning axis out of the line of 
driving pressure between the rocker and the 
valve lever, of a driving-toe controlled by 55 
the governor and adapted to impart an end 
thrust upon the latch, so that the latch will 
be automatically held in engagement, sub 
stantially as described. 
50 
45 
JOHN W. SARGENT. 
RICHARD H. RICE. 
Witnesses: 
SOCRATES SCHOLFIELD, 
HARRY J. GARCEAU. 
O 
the cam lever 35 may be made of uniform 
width and fit the space between the rollers 
without backlash. 
A modification of our invention is shown 
in Figs. 9 and 10, in which the rocker 5 is 
provided with the upwardly extending arm 
5, to which the cam lever 35 is pivoted, and 
the pivoted latch 30' is made, to perform the 
function of the driving toe, the said latch be 
ing arranged to act upon a fixed portion 62 
of the valve lever 24 above the valve stem 7, 
and being also actuated for engagement and 
disengagement by means of the cam lever 
35' which passes between the rollers 18, 18, 
as before described for the driving toe 12; 
and in this case the latch 30' is pivoted to an 
arm 63 which is integral with the spindle 13' 
to which the cam lever 35 is attached, and 
the operation of this form of the device will 
be practically the same as that of the driving 
toe 12 and the latch 30 arranged below the 
valve stem 7, as before described. 
We claim as our invention 
1. In an automatic cut-off engine, the com 
bination with a rocker actuated by the ec 
centric, and a driving-toe jointed to the rocker 
and provided with a connected cam-lever hav 
ing the circular segment portions, which are 
made of equal radius, eccentric with each 
other, and connected by an inclined campor 
tion, which joins the adjacent ends of the 
said segments, of the governor actuated trip 
30 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526367.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 526,367 
W. H. ROUSE 
00MBINED HAY STACKER 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
L0ADER, 
Patented Sept. 18, 1894, 
(No Model.) 
W. H. R. OUSE, 
COMBINED HAY STACKER AND LOADER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 526,367. 
Patented Sept. 18, 1894, 
 
the Norris PereRs co, Photo-LTHo...washingtoN, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HENRY ROUSE, OF FAIRMONT, MIN NES OTA. 
COMBINED HAY STACKER AND LOADER. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,367, dated September 18, 1894. 
Application filed July 14, 1893, Renewed August 27, 1894, Serial No,521,468, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM HENRY ROUSE, 
a citizen of Fairmont, in the county of Martin 
and State of Minnesota, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in a Com 
bined Hay Stacker and Loader; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improved con 
bined hay stacker and loader,-the object of 
the invention being to produce an apparatus, 
of the class stated which shall be simple in 
Construction and effectual in the performance 
of its functions. 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists in certain novel features of construction 
and combinations and arrangements of parts 
as hereinafter set forth and pointed out in the 
claim. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 
is a perspective view illustrating my improve 
ments. Fig. 2 is a side view. 
A represents a horizontal frame compris 
ing two beams a, C. arranged preferably in 
V-shape and at their forward ends are se. 
cured to a shoeb. Shoes care also prefer 
ably secured to the under sides of the beams 
C, a, at their rear ends. A cross beam B is 
Secured at its ends to the rear ends of the 
beams C, a, and to this cross bar two up 
right beams c', c', are secured, said upright 
beams being so disposed as to produce a ver 
tical A-shaped frame. Between the uprights 
c', preferably near their upper ends, a diago 
nal beam or brace D is secured, the lower 
end of said diagonal beam or brace being se 
cured between the forward ends of the hori 
Zontal beams a, C. Between the uprights c' 
above the connection of the brace D there 
with, a roller or pulley dis mounted, for a 
purpose which will be hereinafter explained. 
In advance of the cross bar or beam B, a 
second cross bar E is secured to the V-shaped 
frame A and is adapted to project at its ends 
laterally from the same. To the ends of the 
crossbar or beam E, two forwardly project 
ing, parallel beams F, F, are pivotally con 
nected, said parallel beams terminating at 
their forward ends beyond the frame A and 
to their under sides a beam G is secured. 
Braces e are secured at their rear ends to the 
parallel beams F at a point in proximity to 
the rear ends of the latter, and at their for 
ward ends said braces are secured to the 
beam G. at or near its center. A beam FI is 
secured on the parallel beams F and the 
braces e and at its ends projects laterally 
from said parallel beams as does also the 
beam G. Secured to the top of the beam G. 
and to the under side of the beam H is a se 
ries of forwardly projecting fingers I, each 
being provided at its rear end in proximity 
to the beam H, with upwardly and slightly 
rearwardly projecting guard fingers I'. In 
proximity to the ends of the beam H. pulleys 
ff', are located, and at or near the center 
of said beam pulleys g, g are located. A 
pulley h is also located on the rear side of 
the cross beam B. Cords or ropes , 
are 
secured at one end to the upper ends of the 
uprights c', c'. From its connection with the 
upright c', the cord or rope i is extended for 
wardly and downwardly and passed about 
the pulley if on the cross bar H, from which 
it extends to and is passed over the pulley g, 
at the center of said crossbar or beam. From 
the pulley g the rope or cord i extends up 
wardly and is passed over the roller or pull 
ley, d at the top of the uprights c' and after 
passing off the pulley or roller d the rope or 
cord i, extends downwardly and passes over 
the pulley h and is then extended laterally 
from the apparatus and adapted to be at 
tached to a suitable whiffletree. The cord or 
rope i? extends from its connection with one 
of the uprights c', downwardly and passes 
first over the pulleyf, then over the pulley 
g', then upwardly and over the pulley d, 
then downwardly and over the pulley h and 
is then extended laterally from the appara 
tus and adapted to be connected with the 
whiffletree in the same manner as the cord 
or rope i. 
From this construction and arrangement 
of parts it will be seen that when a team is 
attached to the whiffletree to which the cords 
or ropes i, i are adapted to be attached, and 
driven of laterally from the apparatus, the 
frame pivotally connected to the cross beam 
E will be raised and the hay on the fingers 
at the forward end of said frame will be ele 
vated and deposited on the stack. 
Io 
30 
35 
45 
65 
75 . 
95 
CO 
2 
526,867 
In order to render my apparatus capable 
of removing hay from the stack and loading 
it onto a wagon, I provide a derrick, a de 
scription of which will now follow. The cross 
beam B is made with a socket i, for the re 
ception of a tenoni' at the lower end of the 
upright or standard k of the derrick, said Patent, is 
tenon being adapted to fit loosely in the 
socketi so that the upright can turn freely. 
The upright k will preferably be made angu 
lar in cross section, and at a pointle' between 
its ends is made. round, so that it can oscil 
late freely in a bracket l secured to the up 
rights c, c. At the upper end of the oscilla 
tory upright or standard k, a laterally pro 
jecting bar or beam m is secured by means 
of a metal strap l', and said laterally project 
ing bar or beam is braced by means of bars or 
braces in, n, secured at one end to the free end 
of said laterally projecting bar or beam and 
at the other end to the oscillatory standard. 
The laterally projecting beam m of the der 
rick is provided with suitable pulleys o, o, 
for the accommodation of a rope o', to which 
a hay sling, a hay fork, or other desired de 
vice can be attached. 
My improvements are simple in construc 
tion, comprise few parts, are cheap to manu 
facture, will operate freely without cramping, 
and are effectual in the performance of their 3o 
functions. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
The combination, with a hay stacker, con 
sisting essentially of an oblong horizontal 
frame or body, an upright frame secured to 
the rear end of the horizontal frame, a brace 
connecting the upper end of the upright 
frame with the forward end of the horizontal 
frame, a movable frame pivoted at its rear 
end to the rear end of the horizontal frame, 
and means for lifting the front end of said 
movable frame, of a derrick loosely supported 
in bearings carried by the horizontal and up 
right frames. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
WILLIAM HENRY ROUSE. 
Witnesses: 
B. F. WOREIS, 
PAUL W. ANTHONY. 
35 
45 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526467.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. TIMMERMAN. 
PUZZLE, 
No. 526,467. 
- 
Patented Sept. 25, 1894, 
N 
re NS 2S 
yers 
e? N N 
3 8 
a af y 
 
 
sea 
as 
47 
 
 
s sts 
s 
s 
JX 
5|| 
 
eaveral 
Z72'-e-Z27 
24'6.77mmerman, 
& (6. 
M 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. TIMMERMAN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PUZZLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,467, dated September 25, 1894. 
Application filed May 17, 1894, Serial No. 511,517, (No model.) 
55 
70 
75 
8. 
. 
. 
degree. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. TIMMER 
MAN, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Puzzles, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to that class of puz 
zles which have for their object the arrange 
ment of a movable body in a certain position 
with reference to some other part, and more 
particularly to that class in which the mov 
able body is arranged in an inclosing case 
and rests upon a base board upon which it is 
manipulated by the agitation of the board for 
causing it to assume the desired position. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and pleasing puzzle or toy of this class 
which may be cheaply manufactured and will 
be entertaining or a musing in a maximum 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of novelty in the con 
struction, combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter described with reference to 
the accompanying drawings, and more par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the said drawings, Figure 1 is a plan 
view of my improved puzzle, and Fig. 2 is a 
vertical cross section thereof. 
In carrying out my invention I employ a 
base board over which is preferably arranged 
a transparent inclosing case or cover and 
within this inclosing case upon the baseboard 
I locate a movable object of irregular form 
and being composed of such material that the 
slightest agitation of the casing will alter its 
position, the board being provided with a 
pocket or goal so formed and located that 
the movable object may not be placed therein 
excepting by mere chance or by a certain ma 
nipulation of the device which is not appar 
ent at first sight. 
The base board is represented at A, and it 
is preferably struck out of a single piece of 
sheet metal and formed integrally with an 
upturned flange B which constitutes the sides 
of the casing or cover and which is itself 
formed with a flange b which constitutes a 
seat for a glass cover C, the edge of the flange 
b being reamed over the glass. 
The base board A is provided preferably at 
a central point with the pocket or goal D in 
which it is the object of the puzzle to place 
the movable object E, the surface of the base 
A being bulged upwardly toward the pocket 
D so that the object E may not be readily 
rolled into the pocket but will have a tend 
ency to roll away from the pocket. 
The object E is preferably elliptical or egg 
shape and its larger end which is the end to 
be placed in the pocket D is complementary 
in shape to such pocket so that by proper 
manipulation of the puzzle the object may be 
caused to stand on end in a vertical position 
in the pocket, the purpose of making the ob 
ject elliptical or egg shape being to render 
its movement more irregular, and less subject 
to the control of the operator. 
The object E may be composed of any suit 
able material such as Wood, metal or gutta 
percha or even cork, but I prefer to compose 
it of elastic rubber so that it will be exceed 
ingly sensitive to the slightest agitation of 
the casing. The base or bottom A is also pro 
vided with a number of grooves or channels 
a which radiate from the pocket D and ex 
tend preferably to the sides B. The real pur 
pose of these grooves or channels is to aid in 
placing the object in the pocket D, but if the 
puzzle is not properly manipulated they have 
the tendency of only making the agitation of 
the object more violent and its movements 
less regular. In order to place the object in 
the goal or pocket D however, it is only nec 
essary to agitate it until it rests within one 
of the grooves a with its larger end turned 
toward the pocket D; and then by holding 
the groove in which it rests leveland lightly 
tapping the casing lengthwise of the groove 
the object will be caused to slide along the 
groove until it reaches the pocket D where 
upon the preponderance of weightin its larger 
end will cause it to tip downward at that end 
and sink into the pocket in an upright posi 
tion. 
The principle of my invention may be em 
bodied in any suitable design such as that 
shown where it is to be utilized as a toy sim 
ply; or it may be made up in the form of a 
glass paper Weight and in fact in any other 
design without departing from the spirit of 
my invention. 
- 
9o 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
- 40 
45 
2 
526,467 
1. As a new and useful article of manufac- 
5 ture, a puzzle having in combination a base ture, a puzzle having in combination a base 2 o 
Having thus described my invention, what pocket, a transparent casing over said board 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure by and an egg shaped object arranged within 
Letters Patent, is- 
3. As a new and useful article of manufac 
board provided with a pocket and being in- board provided with a pocket, and grooves 
clined downwardly from said pocket and hav- leading to said pocket, a casing inclosing said 
ing grooves leading to said pocket, and an board and an egg-shaped object composed of 
elastic irregular rolling object arranged on elastic rubber arranged within said casing, 
said casing, substantially as set forth. 
To said board, substantially as set forth. 
2. As a new and useful article of manufac 
ture, a puzzle having in combination a base 
board provided at its center with a pocket and 
grooves radiating from said pocket, the said 
15 board being inclined downwardly from said 
substantially as set forth. 
WILLIAM E. TIMMERMAN. 
Witnesses: 
F. A.HOPKINS, 
JNO. G. ELLIOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526567.txt	(No Model.) 
W. D. FORBES 
REGISTER FOR STREET CARS. 
No. 526,567, 
NY). NSS). 
Patented Sept. 25, 1894, 
N 
ZZZZZZZZZ2222222 SN 
22222222222222 
 
 
 
  
 
 
SZZ S.Laza 
R 
A. 
error 
SSS 
g 
 
t 
g 
WITNESSES: 
a11/11 
w 
/AWWEWTOR 
%al 2, 2-4- 
A. ATIORNEY.S. 
THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHoio-LTHo, wASHIIaron, b, c, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. FORBES, OF HOBOKEN, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO 
HORACE B. MILLER, TRUSTEE, OF MONTCLAIR, NEW JERSEY. 
REGISTER FOR STREET CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,567, dated September 25, 1894, 
Application filed November 4, 1893, Serial No. 490,012, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM D, FoRBEs, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Hoboken, Hudson county, New Jersey, have 
5 invented an Improved Register, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a simple and economically manufactured reg 
ister which is reliable and cannot be tampered 
Io With, and is more particularly adapted for use 
On Street cars, at entrance gates and other 
such places. 
In the accompanying drawings I have shown 
my invention as applied to a construction of 
I5 register adapted to be used more particularly 
in street railway cars, but it should be under 
stood at the outset that my invention is ap 
plicable to the construction of indicators and 
registers for many different uses. 
2 o In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of the register, partly in section. Fig. 2 
is a vertical section of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
view of a detail. 
The inclosing frame or casing A may con 
25 veniently be formed of a casting of cylindri 
cal form closed at the back but open in the 
front, and having at a suitable point (the top 
in the case illustrated) an opening a for the 
passage of the operating cord, chain, or rod 
3o C by which motion is imparted to the interior 
mechanism to make a registry. Over the front 
of the casing is fitted and secured a remov 
able but stationary flanged rim B, which may 
be conveniently made of sheet metal, and 
35 which has marked upon its face the desired 
graduations to constitute the dial. The ex 
ample illustrated is marked off into one hun 
dred divisions. Within this annular dial is 
mounted a disk D carried by a hub d which 
4o can turn upon a central fixed spindle E se 
cured to or forming a part of the frame or cas 
ing A. This disk closes the front opening 
left within the annular dial. Upon this fixed 
spindle E there is also mounted within the 
45 casing a toothed or gear wheel F whose ex 
tended hub f has fixed upon it a ratchet wheel 
F, so that the latter moves with each motion 
of the toothed wheel F. Upon the inner face 
of the disk D is pivoted a pawl d' which en 
5o gages with the ratchet teeth of the ratchot 
wheel F, as indicated in Fig. 1, so that the 
disk D must move with each forward move 
ment of the toothed wheel E. Adjacent to 
the toothed wheel F there is mounted within 
the casing, in suitable guides, a transverse 55 
bar or strip G to which the operating chain, 
cord, or rod C is connected. In the present 
instance I have shown this bar as guided 
partly by the fixed central spindle E, and 
partly by pins e in the back of the casing. 6o 
This bar G can have a limited longitudinal 
sliding movement imparted to it within the 
guides by means of the operating rod or chain 
in one direction, while a suitable spring g or 
a weight may be provided to give the return 65 
movement, the normal position of the barbe 
ing that indicated in the drawings. This bar 
carries a pawl K which engages with the teeth 
on the periphery of the toothed wheel F as 
shown in Fig. 1. At each longitudinal move 7o 
ment of the operating bar G the pawl K will 
turn the toothed wheel F around to the ex 
tent of one tooth. In order that it may not 
be moved more than one tooth at a time, I 
provide a locking tailk on the pawl K, which 75 
locking tail comes into contact with another 
of the teeth of the wheel F, as indicated in 
Fig. 3, when the sliding bar has been moved 
to the full extent. 
There are of course as many teeth on the 
wheel F as there are graduations upon the 
dial. Upon the face of the disk D there is 
mounted a suitable pointerp, and as the disk 
is locked by its pawl d' to the wheels F and 
F, every movement of the latter imparts a 85 
corresponding movement to the indicating 
disk with its pointer. 
The operating bar G carries a spring pawl 
h, acting upon a spring-controlled hammer H. 
which is pivoted to the casing at h' and is 
adapted when the operating bar G has been 
pulled to its full extent, to be then released 
and caused by its spring to strike upon a 
gong J. This gong consists of a spring Se 
cured to the inner side of the casing at one 95 
end i and curved to correspond with the 
curve of the casing. In order to lock the 
disk D between each registration I provide 
upon the operating bar G a pin in which, 
when the said operating bar is in its normal Io) 
position, as indicated in the drawings, will en 
ter between two adjacent teeth of the toothed 
 
526,56? 
wheel F and lock the latter, as shown in Fig. 
2. The indicating pointer cannot be turned 
back, but whenever it is desired it may be 
brought to zero to start a new succession of 
registrations, simply by turning the disk ID 
forward by hand by means of its hub d until 
the pointer is brought down to zero point, for 
the toothed wheels F and F being held by the 
stop pin m, the pawl d' of the disk, during this 
movement, simply slips over the teeth of the 
ratchet wheel F. In order that this register 
ing disk may, however, be stopped with cer 
tainty at the Zero point, Isecure to the inner 
face of the disk a finger in which willcome into 
contact with a stop on the bar G when the disk 
has been brought around to indicate zero. 
For convenience I utilize the pin m, as the 
stop. When the operating bar Gis moved to 
turn the toothed wheel F and the disk D, the 
pin in on the bar releases both the toothed 
wheel F and the finger n. 
In registers of the class to which this in 
vention particularly belongs, it is usual to 
combine with the part which may be termed 
the trip register (which part in this case has 
been thus far described) a permanent regis 
try showing upon the face of the device. 
The better to avoid confusion between the 
two registries, I prefer to arrange my perma 
nent registry wheels to show through the 
side of the casing instead of through the face. 
These permanent registry wheels may be of 
any Convenient or Well-known construction. 
In the street car register which I have shown 
in the drawings, I arrange these registry 
wheels as indicated by dotted lines at R to 
show through an opening indicated at r in 
the lower side of the case, where the man who 
enters the car may take note of the registry 
and may conveniently see them just as he 
steps inside. The series of registry wheels R. 
are geared to the toothed wheel F, as will be 
readily understood. 
To provide for temporarily registering upon 
the face of the device more passengers or 
fares than there are graduations on the dial, 
I provide a numbered wheel S mounted on a 
transverse spindles which has at its inner 
end a toothed wheels' adapted to be struck 
by a pint on the face of the wheel F at the 
completion of each rotation to bring a suit 
able number on the wheel S (in this case to 
indicate hundred multiples) to show through 
an opening in the dial B. A thumb piece T 
on the outside of the casing is secured to the 
. 
spindles to turn the wheel Sback to show zero 
when starting a new succession of registra 
tions. 
As the pointer disk D may be made to fit 
closely under the flanged rim or annular dial 
dust cannot enter the casing to any harmful 
extent, so that the inclosing glass front 1S 
ally used is dispensed with, and even if a con 
siderable amount of dust should get in, the 
internal mechanism is of such a simple and 
substantial character that no derangement of 
the mechanism would result. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A register having a case, and a Station 
ary but removable flanged rim graduated tO 
form an annular dial in combination with a 
rotary disk inclosing the front of the case 
and carrying a pointer to co-operate with the 
annular dial, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a register, the combination of a dial 
and a pointer disk carrying a locking device 
with a wheel with which the said locking de 
vice engages to transmit motion to the pointer 
disk through said locking device, Substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination of the dial and pointer 
or other registering device of a register with 
a transverse sliding bar carrying a pawl, a 
toothed wheel to be operated thereby and a 
ratchet wheel and pawl connection between 
the toothed wheel and the said registering de 
vice, all substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the pointer and dial 
or other registering device of a register with 
a toothed wheel to transmit motion to Said 
registering device and a transverse sliding 
bar having a pawl to act upon said toothed 
wheel, said bar having also a locking pin to 
lock the toothed wheel when the bar is in its 
normal position of rest, substantially as set 
forth, 
5. The combination of the dial of a register 
and a pointer disk having a finger on the in 
side with a toothed wheel, a transverse slid 
ing bar having a pawl to operate said toothed 
wheel and having also a stop pin to co-operate 
with the finger on the disk to arrest the disk 
at Zero, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM D. FORBES. 
Witnesses: 
EDITH J. GRISWOLD, 
HUBERT HOWSON. 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
Co 
IO5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526667.txt	(No Model.) 
F. B. SCHULTZ. 
DOT.I., 
Patented Sept. 25, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
 
A 7 TOFFWEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK B. SCHULTZ, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
DOLL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,667, dated September 25, 1894. 
Application filed October 4, 1893, Serial No. 487,154. (No model.) 
?? 
To CVV Zwhorn it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICKB. SCHULTZ, 
of New York city, in the county and State of 
New York, have invented a new and Improved 
Doll, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The invention relates to jointed dolls, such 
as shown and described in the Letters Patent 
of the United States, No. 504,627, granted to 
me September 5, 1893. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide a new and improved jointed doll in 
which the articulated members can be read 
ily turned without danger of breaking or dis 
locating the jointed parts. 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
details, and combinations of the same, as will 
be fully described hereinafter and the 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawing, forming a part of this specification, 
in which the figure represents a sectional side: 
elevation of the improvement. 
The improved doll is provided with the 
usual head A, the body B, the thigh part C 
of the leg, the lower limbs D, the feet E, the 
shoulder parts F, the fore-arms G and the 
hands H. The several parts enumerated are 
joined to each other by ball and socket joints, 
as plainly illustrated in the drawing, so that 
the several parts can be readily moved in any 
desired direction, or turned in their sockets. 
In order to hold the arms and legs in po 
sition I provide the following device: A chain, 
band or rope I, passes through the hollow 
parts forming the articulated members, to 
their outer ends, and the chain is connected 
with a hook on a rod J extending loosely 
through apertures in disks J and J', between 
which is arranged a coil spring J coiled 
around the said rod J, and around a second 
rod J likewise loosely mounted in the said 
disks but extending in an opposite direction 
to the rod J. The outer end of this rod J, 
is connected by a hook with a hook on a rod 
K, secured in the uppermost part of the re 
spective articulated member, that is either 
the hand H, or the foot E, as will be readily 
understood by reference to the drawing. 
The inner end of each chain I, is connected 
with a disk L arranged in the body B and 
opposite which is arranged a second disk L', 
seated on the inner surface of the body, and 
between the disks L and L', is arranged a 
coil spring L*, through which passes part of 55 
the chain I. Thus, the outer end of the spring 
practically has a bearing against the inner 
surface of the body, and each articulated 
member is connected with the body B and a 
yielding connection is made between the 
body and the chain, also between the chain 
and the articulated member. 
The head A is connected by a chain N with 
the body, the upper end of the chain being 
held on a pin. N' secured on a projection or 
lug held in the said head. A. The lower end 
of the chain passes through an aperture in 
the body B, and is connected with a disk O 
opposite which is arranged a disk O', seated 
on the inner surface of the body, and between 
the disks is interposed a Spring O', so that a 
yielding connection is made by the said disks 
and spring, with the chain. 
The ball P forming part of each ball and 
socket joint, is provided with a shank P', se 
cured in the corresponding part of the articu 
lated member, and this shank P' forms a stop 
for the disk J, in the fore-arm G or lower 
limb D, as will be readily understood by ref 
erence to the drawing. Formerly this ball P 
was made in one single piece with the re 
spective part, but I. prefer to form the ball 
with the hollow shank P. glued or otherwise 
fastened in the corresponding part of the ar 
ticulated member. 
The rod K previously mentioned, is formed 
at its lower end with a cross-piece or head, 
and the rod is cast or embedded directly in 
the hand or foot E, with the outer hooked end 
extending beyond the same so as to engage 
the hook of the rod J. 
Now, it will be seen, that by the especial 
construction described, the hand or foot can 
be conveniently turned in its socket, as the 
rod J is free to turn in the disks J8 and J', 
and when a pull is exerted on the hand H or 
foot E, then the head of the rod J resting on 
the disk J', will draw the latter outward to 
compress the spring J, as the disk J is then 
held in place by the head of the rod J. A 
yielding and turning connection is thus had 
by the hand or foot with the chain. 
When the pull is exerted on the fore-arm 
G, or the lower limb D, then the disk J will 
7 ? 
75 
95 
I OO 
I. ? 
2 ? 
35 
45 
So 
rest against the shank P, and the disk J is 
moved upward to compress the spring Jas the 
head of the rod J draws the said disk upward. 
When a pull is exerted on the shoulder part 
F, or the thigh part C, then the spring L* is 
compressed owing to the pull of the chain I, 
exerted on the disk L. 
Several parts of each articulated member 
can be conveniently turned, as the chain 
passes loosely through the said parts and re 
mains at a stand-still while the part is turned. 
By this arrangement any part of any member 
can be readily turned or pulled, without dis 
connecting or dislocating the parts, and as 
soon as the part is released the springs draw 
the same back to their normal position. 
In order to conveniently arrange the several 
parts of the yielding device in the body B, 
and to connect the articulated members with 
the body, I prefer to make the same in two 
parts B and B, divided transversely at or 
near the middle of the body, and connected 
with each other by a band B, lapping the 
joined ends of the body portions B and B, 
as will be readily understood by reference to 
the figure. The band B is preferably glued 
to the outside of the body portions so as to 
securely hold the same in place, after the 
several parts have been joined together as 
described. 
It will be seen that an individual chain is 
used for each articulated member, and each 
chain is provided with yielding devices to 
permit of exerting pulls on the parts of the 
said members, and also to permit of turning 
the same in the manner described. It will 
further be seen that the spring Jacts in both 
directions, that is, can be compressed by 
pulling on the hand H, so that the disk J. 
moves against the spring and away from its 
socket P', and when the fore-arm G is pulled, 
the other disk J, compresses the spring. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A doll, provided with a body and a tubu 
lar articulated member, a coil spring located 
Within the member and connected with the 
outermost part thereof, a flexible connection 
between the body and the spring, and a ball 
forming part of the joint between two sec 
tions of the member, said ball being provided 
With a tubular shank that extends into one 
of the member sections adjacent to the spring 
to form a stop therefor, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. A doll, provided with a body and an ar 
ticulated member, whose outermost part is 
Solid while the other sections are tubular, a 
coil spring held within the body, a diskseated 
on the inner surface of the body and adapted 
to be engaged by the outer end of the spring, 
another disk adapted for engagement with 
the inner end of the spring, a chain connected 
with the said inner disk and extending there 
from to the outermost tubular section of the 
articulated member, a coiled spring located 
in the said part of the member, disks held in 
contact with the respective ends of the spring, 
a ball forming part of the joint between the 
said outermost tubular section and the ad 
joining tubular section of the member, said 
ball being provided with a tubular shank 
that extends into the said outermost tubular 
section to form a stop for the inner end of 
the spring located therein, a rod whose inner 
end is connected with the said chain and 
whose outer end is connected with the disk 
at the outer end of the coiled spring in the 
member, another rod whose inner end is con 
nected with the disk at the inner end of the 
said spring, and a third rod having a per 
manent connection with the outermost, solid 
part of the articulated member, and a de 
tachable connection with the outer end of the 
said second rod, substantially as described. 
EFREDERICK B. SCHULTZ. 
Witnesses: 
THEO. G. HOSTER, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
75 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526767.txt	(No Model.) 
R. B. WILSON. 
ELECTRIC RAILWAY CONDUIT, . 
No. 526,767, 
- 
Patented 00t, 2, 1894, 
N 
(g Fr. Fr3 
3. % 
s 25 
3 
I AN 1 
* - 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT B. WILSON, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
JEREMIAH. M. WILSON, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
ELECTRIC-RALWAY CONDUIT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,767, dated October 2, 1894. 
55 
Application filed January 2, 1894, 
Serial No. 495,419, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
blocks and provided with cover-plates having 
Be it known that I, ROBERT B. WILSON, a 
downward-projecting flanges serving to re 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cin 
tain the blocks in place; and, finally, the in 
cinnati, in the county of Hamilton and State 
vention consists in various novel details of 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
construction, arrangement, and operation. 
Improvements in Electric-Railway Conduits; 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
part of this specification, and in which like 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
letters of reference indicate corresponding 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
parts: Figure 1- is a view in vertical cross 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
section, showing an approximately U-shaped 
same. 
conduit with flanged base hy which it is se 
This invention relates to conduits for elec 
cured in position, and upright ribs; also, the 
tric conductors, particularly, to conduits for 
bracket and hanger blocks in position, with 
conductors used in connection with electric 
insulation on the hanger-block, and the cover 
railways. 
plates with depending flanges holding them 
The object of the invention is to produce 
Fig. 2- is a view in perspective, show 
fast. 
a conduit of this kind which may be applied 
ing a section of the conduit, having an incut 
to railways already constructed without dis 
or socket at one end, a reduced portion at the 
placement of rails or cross-ties. The object 
other, and the flanges and ribs; and, also, 
is, furthermore, to produce a conduit of the 
notches in the upper edges of the walls, and 
kind, in which the introduction and removal 
a bracket-block ready to be set into a notch. 
of a conductor may be accomplished with 
Fig. 3- is a view in perspective, showing one 
great quickness and facility. The object is, 
of the cover-plates. Fig. 4- is a view in per 
finally, to produce a conduit of the kind, in 
spective, showing a bracket-block. Fig. 5 
75 
which conductors may be held in place by 
is a view in perspective, showing a hanger 
simple and inexpensive means, readily ap 
block; and Fig. 6- is a view in perspective 
plied. 
of a modified form of hanger-block, showing 
With these objects in view, the invention 
the under surface of a block provided with a 
consists of a conduit having a projecting or 
pivoted frame constituting a switch. 
flanged base, upon which it rests and by which 
In the drawings, A represents one of the 
it is secured to the ties of a railway, the con 
conduit-sections, which is of a height corre 
duit being made up of sections, each section 
sponding to the thickness of paving covering 
having an incut or a socket at one end and a 
the cross-ties of a road, or to the distance be 
reduced portion at the other, the socket of 
tween the upper surface of the rails and that 
; each section being entered by the reduced 
of the cross-ties, and has, at one end, an incut 
portion of another, and the reduced portion - 
portion or socket, a, and, at the other end, a 
of one section fitting the socket of the next. 
reduced portion a. When sections are placed 
Furthermore, the invention consists of a 
together, the socket will be fitted upon the 
conduit, made up of sections incut at one end 
reduced portion of an adjacent section, and 
and reduced at the other, and provided with 
the reduced portion of the present section will 
a. projecting or flanged base and with upright 
enter the socket of another. Each section, A, 
is approximately U-shaped in cross-section 
TOS. 
Furthermore, the invention consists of a 
and provided with a base-flange a, designed 
conduit having notches in the upper edges of 
to rest upon the cross-ties of a railroad and 
its walls, combined with bracket and hanger 
be held there in any suitable manner. Thus, 
blocks for sustaining the conductors, the 
each flange may be perforated as at a, for the 
bracket-blocks being set in the notches and 
reception of spikes or the like. The flange 
holding therein, and the hanger-blocks tak 
may be continuous or may be cut away be 
ing into the bracket-blocks. 
tween the perforations. Each section is, fur 
Furthermore, the invention consists of a thermore, provided with upright strengthen 
conduit combined with bracket and hanger-ling ribs a, or lugs for perforations above. It 
85 
95 
OO 
 
526,767 
O 
is, also, provided, on each side, at its upper 
edges, with one or more notches a to receive 
the bracket-blocks, B. These blocks have 
flanges, b, b, at each end and dove-tailed fin 
gers b projecting at right-angles from one 
face. A block is set into a notch with the 
flanges projecting at each end beyond the 
notches and on the outer and inner side of 
the conduit-wall, whereby the block is held, 
and with the fingers projecting inward into 
the conduit and with its upper face flush or 
even with the upper edge of the conduit-wall. 
C designates a hanger-block which is pro 
vided on its upper face with dove-tail fingers 
c, adapted to fit between the fingers, b, of the 
bracket-block, B, and be retained thereby, 
and has, oil its lower face, jaws, c, to hold an 
electrical conductor. 
The hanger-blocks C are entirely covered 
with some insulating substance, such as india. 
rubber, so that, passage of a current of elec 
tricity from the conductor through hanger and 
bracket-blocks to the conduit-sections will be 
prevented. 
At the top of the conduit are cover-plates 
D which, when in position, leave a narrow 
slot along the middle of the conduit for a cur 
rent-collector from a car. These plates have 
perforated lugs dand are attached to the con 
duit-sections by screws or bolts passing 
through the lugs and through perforations a 
in the ribs a on the sides of the conduit-sec 
tions. The ribs a on the conduit-sections 
and the lugs don the plates, are arranged at 
regular intervals, and at such distances apart 
that, when one of the lugs is brought into con 
tact with one of the ribs, the remaining lugs 
and ribs will be brought into proper position 
to be connected. Instead of ribs, there may 
be only lugs at the upper outside part of the 
wall, these lugs being properly perforated. 
The inner faces of the lugs d of the plates D 
are straight, and are designed to fit closely 
against the outer faces of the conduit-sec 
tions, so that raising of the plates without 
removing the bolts by which the plates are 
attached to the ribs is rendered impossible. 
The plates D are provided along their inner 
edges with flanges d, which serve both to . 
form a passage-way for trolleys, and to retain 
the hanger-block C in place, in engagement 
with the bracket-block B, the parts being of 
such construction and size, that, when in place, 
the plates being over the blocks B, these 
blocks will be held directly by them, while the 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
- 
- 
flanges of the plates will hold the blocks Cin 
the blocks B. 
With a conduit constructed in accordance 
with my invention, conductors therein will be 
retained in such position that any danger of 
short-circuiting or grounding of the current 
will be avoided. Water or other matter, such 
as earth, falling between the plates, Will be 
carried by the flanges to a point below the 
conductors and be deposited in the bottom of 
the conduit, from which it will be removed 
by any suitable means. 
The invention thus described, is applicable, 
to the usual and common forms of electrical 
railway systems, but, to employ it in connec-7 ( 
tion with a novel system for which I have 
made application for Letters Patent of even 
date here with, I use a modified form of 
hanger-block at intervals with the block C, 
namely at the end of each section. Such a 7 
block appears in Fig. 6. Here, on the lower 
face of a portion of the hanger-block is piv 
oted a frame c, constituting a switch, which 
serves as a means of connecting the electrical . 
conductor carried by the hanger-block with 8 
the other operative parts in the novel electri 
cal railway-system described in said other ap 
plication. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 8. 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A sectional conduit having a projecting 
or flanged base, continuous and integral there 
with each section having an incut or a socket 
at one end and a reduced portion at the other, 9 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. A conduit-section incut at one end and 
reduced at the other, and provided with a 
projecting or flanged base and with upright 
ribs, substantially as and for the purpose set 9 
forth. 
3. The combination with a conduit, notched 
in the upper edge of its wall, of a bracket and 
a hanger-block, substantially as described. 
4. The combination with a notched conduit I 
and a bracket and hanger-block, of a cover 
plate having a depending flange, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
ROBERT B. WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID H. MEAD, 
E. H. PARRY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526867.txt	(No Model, 
No. 526,867, 
D, MACFARLAN. 
RHEOSTAT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Oct. 2, 1894. 
 
The NORRIS Peters to, PHoro-LTHo. washingtoN, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 526,867, 
 
D. MACFARLAN, 
RHEOSTAT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 2, 1894, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DUNCAN MACFARLAN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RHEO STAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,867, dated October 2, 1894. 
Application filed May 18, 1894, 
Serial No. 51643. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DUNCAN MACFARLAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Philadelphia, in the county of Phila 
delphia and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Rheostats, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to a composition con 
ducting and resistance structure designated 
as a rheostat for controlling or adjusting the 
Voltage of an electric circuit; and it relates 
more particularly to the homogenizing of the 
materials entering into the same so as to pro 
duce a conducting and resistance structure 
which included in a circuit offers required re 
sistance to a current around, about or through 
the same, whereby the current from a source 
of energy can be manipulated and collected 
off from the structure without dangerous 
heating, burning out or sparking at any part, 
point or portion so that perfect safety in the 
handling of an electric current is insured for 
various purposes. 
The principal objects of my present inven 
tion are first, to provide a homogeneous com 
position structure or rheostat which in a cir 
cuit is adapted to regulate or adjust the volt 
age of a current in proportion to the resist 
ance offered by the same to the current; sec 
ond, to provide a rheostat composed of mate 
rials in which the atomic constituents of the 
same are so homogenized as to produce after 
thorough admixture or combination and bak 
ing a homogeneous structure and in a circuit 
from a Source of energy will regulate or ad 
just the current thereof though offering re 
quired resistance substantially in proportion 
to the current through, about or around the 
structure, thereby insuring absolute safety 
in the handling of the same of any intensity 
for various purposes; and third, to provide 
a rheostat for electric currents composed of 
materials caused to assume a structure in the 
shape or form of a thread, bar, block or the 
like and which in a circuit is adapted to per 
mit of the regulation of the voltage of a cur 
rent around, about or through such a struct 
ure for different purposes with absolute safety 
and the current adapted to be varied ad libi 
tum from wire or pin contacts at or about the 
structure through the manipulation of a 
switch or similar device in the path thereof. 
My invention consists of a rheostat, com 
prising a homogeneous composition structure 
constructed and arranged in substantially the 
manner hereinafter described and claimed. 
The nature and general scope of my inven 
tion will be more fully understood from the 
following description taken in connection 
With the accompanying drawings forming 
part hereof, and in which 
Figure 1, is a diagrammatic view of a dy. 
namo circuit with a rheostat of my inven 
tion included therein, and showing the wires 
coiled around the same from the source of 
energy. Fig. 2, is a similar view of a source 
of electric energy with conductors connected 
there with and leading therefrom to a rheo 
stat of my invention provided with a series 
of pin contacts and with a switch adapted to 
be manipulated in the path thereof; and Fig. 
3, is a similar view of a dynamo circuit con 
nected with a rheostat of my invention pro 
vided with pin contacts and a switch and 
with wires therefrom having handling de 
vices to adapt the same for employment for 
medical or other purposes. 
Referring to the drawings with reference 
more particularly to Figs. 1 and 2, A, is a 
dynamo or source of energy provided with 
brushes or commutators a, and a', and hav 
ing conductors 10 and 11 therefrom to the 
homogeneous composition structure B, con 
stituting the rheostat of my invention to be 
hereinafter more fully described as to the 
material composition thereof, for controlling 
any voltage of a circuit ad libitun for per 
mitting of the absolutely safe use of the 
Same, for various purposes. 
In Fig. 1, the conductors 10 and 11, are 
coiled around the rheostat B, because in prac 
tice such has been found to give most excel 
lent results. This structure due to the thor 
ough homogenizing of the materials entering 
into the composition thereof affords, as ex 
tended practice of my invention has demon 
strated, requisite conductivity being offered 
to permit of the safe manipulation of the 
current of any Voltage. This is determined 
by the fact, that the atomic constituents of 
the mass composing the structure are thor 
9o 
95 
Od 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
526,867 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
Oughly mixed and baked, with the ulterior 
object in view of making the structure ho 
Imogeneous, which as practice has demon 
strated prevents all tendency to dangerous 
heating, burning out or sparking, and such 
a structure affords a quick, uniform and safe 
distribution or collecting off of the current 
therefrom by means of wires coiled around 
the same with suitable devices connected 
there with or by such means connected with 
switch devices adapted to sweep over pin 
contacts embedded in or contacting with such 
Conducting and resisting homogeneous struct 
ure B, for cautery and many other purposes. 
In Fig. 2, the rheostat in the form of a rect 
angular block is provided with a surround 
ing insulating and fire proof covering b, of 
asbestos, mineral wool or other suitable ma 
terial or materials. This homogeneous com 
position structure is also provided with a se 
ries of pin contacts b', which project into the 
body of the compound mass and extend up 
Ward from the surface of the same. 
C, is a Switch of any suitable construction 
included in the dynamo circuit and arranged 
So as to be brought into the path of said pin 
contacts b', for regulating or adjusting the 
current thereof, that is, from two thousand 
volts to the fractional part of a volt through 
the resistance which is offered by the said 
materials of the rheostat B, to the current in 
paSSage through or about the same. In fact, 
an electric current of any voltage may be col 
lected off through a rheostat of my invention, 
due to the fact that the same is capable of 
withstanding any intensity of current with 
out burning out. 
My invention is well adapted for galvanic 
actions, cautery and other operations from 
Such dynamo currents of any voltage with ab 
Solute safety and this can be effected by sim 
ply manipulating the switch C, in the path of 
the pin contacts b', of the rheostat B, in sub 
Stantially the manner illustrated in Fig. 2. 
In Fig. 3, the rheostat B, in the form of a 
thread or cord b, in zig-zag arrangement with 
an insulated block D, is connected by con 
ductors 10 and 11 with the source of energy 
A, as hereinbefore explained, and the switch 
C, is moved in the path of the pin contacts b'. 
This cord or thread constituting the rheostat 
in this instance is composed of a resisting sub 
stance Saturated with materials adapted to 
produce when baked an absolute homogene 
ous conducting and resisting structure. 
12 and 13, are distributing or collecting off 
Wires connected with said switch and with 
one end of the thread or cord b, as shown. 
These wires 12 and 13, are provided with han 
dles d and d", for the application of the hands 
thereto, so that by the manipulation of the 
switch C, over the series of contacts b, in suc 
cession, the strength of current for galvanic 
action in the treatment of medical cases and 
for other uses, may be readily obtained and 
safely applied to the intended purpose. 
In Fig. 3, the rheostat is in the form of a 
thread or cord, while in Figs. 1 and 2, it is in 
the form of a cylinder and a block, but such 
compounded composition structure constitut 
ing the rheostat of my invention, as herein 
before described and for the purposes stated 
among many others, may be made in various 
other forms or shapes with most excellent re 
sults when included in a circuit from a Source 
of energy. 
The rheostat B, may be composed of asbes 
tos, graphite or black lead bound together 
with a binder of dextrine or starch, molasses, 
gum or similar material or of mineral Wool, 
graphite and sugar, or of asbestos, mineral 
wool, graphite or black lead and a binder, 
composed of one or more of the materials 
hereinbefore mentioned, or of mineral Wool, 
black-lead, chloride of aluminium and kaolin 
or of asbestos, graphite or black lead, and 
sugar or of asbestos, graphite or black lead, 
silver and a binder, as a gum or Sugar, Or 
of asbestos or mineral wool, graphite or black 
lead and cement, or of mineral Wool, chlo 
ride of aluminium, black lead, kaolin, or of 
chloride of aluminium, graphite, kaolin, sil 
ver, asphalt or coal tar and cement, or of as 
bestos or mineral wool, graphite and rubber 
or gutta, percha, or of earthy matter, such as 
clays in combination with one or more of the 
hereinbefore mentioned materials or Sub 
stances, these materials being employed in 
such proportions in the aforesaid different 
combinations, among others, with the re 
quired quota of water to permit of the admiX 
ture and the effecting of a thorough combina 
tion or compounding of the same so as to pro 
duce a homogeneous structure, when brought 
in a mortar or other suitable vessel to a dough 
like consistency. The mass so homogenized 
is then baked to assume the form, shape or 
condition for the required use, as a rheostat 
in a circuit, in substantially the manner here 
in before explained. 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A rheostat, comprising a homogeneolls 
baked composition structure for controlling 
or adjusting voltage of an electric circuit and 
provided with pin contacts, conductors from a 
Source of energy in connection with Said 
structure, and a switch adapted to be manipu 
lated in the path of said contacts, substan 
tially as and for the purposos described. 
2. A rheostat, comprising a homogeneous 
composition cord or thread for controlling 
voltage of an electric circuit from a source of 
energy and having pin contacts connected 
there with for establishing a circuit therefrom 
by the manipulation of a switch in the path of 
said contacts, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
3. A rheostat, comprising an insulated 
homogeneous composition structure for con 
trolling voltage of an electric circuit and pro 
vided with pin contacts, conductors from a 
Source of energy connected with said struct 
75 
95 
IOC) 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
I 3O 
 
526,867 
3. 
ure, and a switch movable in the path of said 
contacts, substantially as and for the purposes 
described, 
4. A rheostat, comprising a baked compo 
sition structure included in a circuit from a 
source of energy for controlling the voltage of 
a current therefrom and provided with pin 
contacts, a switch adapted to be manipulated 
in the path of said contacts and current dis 
to tributer or collecting off wires connected with 
said switch and structure and having hand 
ling devices, substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my signature in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
DUNCAN MACFARLAN. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS M. SMITH, 
RICHARD C. MAXWELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US526967.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
H. EISERT & R. B. TALCOTT, 
HOT WATER HEATER, 
Patented Oot, 2, 1894, 
No. 526,967. 
 
 
3-vuovtova 
Aermarry Azsert. 
fobert, A Zazacoee/ 
%22-au. 
the Noris Peters c. PHo-Ho WASH:NGTON, O, C 
(No Model.) 
No. 526,967. 
Patented Oot. 2, 1894, 
H. EISERT & R. B. TALCOTT. 
HOT WATER HEATER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
28itvicesco 
/%a? 7%/z, 
24.72% 
8wuowbos; 
y Hernarvt. Asere 
Aabert A. Zadcote/ 
trueui 8ttozyo, 
The Norihis PETERS co, Photo-LTHo. washington.D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMANN EISERT, OF BALTIMORE, AND ROBERT BARNARD TALCOTT, OF 
GARRETT PARK, MARYLAND. 
Hot-WATER HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 526,967, dated October 2, 1894. 
Application filed February 13, 1894, Serial No. 500,035. (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that we, HERMANN EISERT, re 
siding at Baltimore, and ROBERT BARNARD 
TALCOTT, residing at Garrett Park, in the 
county of Montgomery and State of Mary 
land, citizens of the United States, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements: 
in Hot-Water Heaters; and we do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention has reference to new and 
useful improvements in hot water heaters 
for use in connection with pipes and radi 
ators for heating the rooms and halls of build 
ings, and has for its object the production of 
a simply constructed heater having a large 
and effective heating surface, and provision 
for obtaining an immediate and rapid circu 
lation of the water in the entire heating ap 
paratus, with a maximum economy in the 
consumption of fuel. In heaters of this class 
heretofore produced, so far as we are aware, 
the circulation of the water through the 
heater is attended with difficulties, inasmuch 
as the passages therefor are made circuitous, 
and added to this the gases of the highest 
temperature are directed to heat the water 
at a point, generally at the bottom of the 
heater, and the water within the furnace 
above this point being comparatively cool, 
considerable time must elapse before the Wa 
ter in the upper part of the heater can be dis 
placed. By reason of this arrangement it will 
be seen that even after a circulation is estab 
lished it must necessarily be slow and aside 
from this, currents of less temperature com 
ing in contact with that of greater tempera 
ture within the heater cause a diminution 
of temperature and a consequent retarding 
of the circulation. . In our construction the 
gases having the greatest heat are directed 
to the water at the highest pointin the heater 
or just before the water leaves the heater for 
circulation through the pipes and radiators, 
and the body of water below said highest point 
is heated in proportion to the amount of heat 
retained by the gases in their passage down 
ward through the heater, after being deflected 
by impact against the concave under side of 
the upper or main water containing chamber. 
The water in the different parts of the heater 
will absorb heat in proportion to the differ 
ential temperature of the gases and the wa 
ter, and in consequence of the high degree of 
temperature of the gases at the top of the 
heater as compared with those at the bottom, 
the water near the top will absorb heat more 
rapidly than at or near the bottom. Thus is 
secured a regular and rapid upward move- 6 
ment of the water in the heater without coun 
ter-currents and internal circulation in the 
heater itself, which would confine the water 
therein a longer time than necessary without 
any beneficial results. In practice the water 
enters the heater in a cool condition at a 
point at or near its bottom and absorbs the 
heat while rising, and just before its exit is 
subjected to the action of the hottest portion 
of the gases. This insures a circulation im 
mediately after the fire is started and the 
Water having practically a direct passage 
through the heater, the circulation is a rapid 
Oe. 
To these ends our invention consists in a 
heater provided with a water chamber at its 
top, the bottom of which is so located with re 
lation to the source of heat as to concentrate 
the products of combustion at their highest 
temperature, and to then deflect the same 
downward through the heater and against the 
connections, thus exhausting their full heat 
ing capacity, said chamber having the outlet 
for the heated water; and provided with a wa 
ter chamber at its bottom having a waterinlet. 
The invention also consists in the con 
struction, relative arrangement and opera 
tion of the several parts of the heater, all of 
which will fully and clearly appear from a 
careful reading of the following description, 
taken in connection with the accompanying 
drawings which form a part of this specifica 
tion, and in which- 
Figure 1 is an elevation of the front of our 
improved heater. Fig. 2 is an elevation of 
. 
75 
95 
Ioo 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
526,967 
25 
C 
5 6 is a detail of the arrangement of tubes. 
the rear of the same. Fig. 3 is a top plan 
view. Fig. 4 is a vertical, central longitudi 
nal sectional view. Fig. 5 is a horizontal sec 
tional view taken on line ac-ac of Fig. 4. Fig. 
Like letters and numerals of reference de 
note like parts in the several figures of the 
drawings. 
In carrying out our invention we construct 
the heater with an outer casing or shell A, 
and in the forward end we arrange the fire pot 
or grate B which is elevated above the place 
usually adopted, in order to bring the radi 
ated heat and the products of combustion 
when hottest in contact with the top water 
section or crown 1. In the rear of the heater 
we arrange the flues by which the products 
of combustion pass off to the chimney after 
they have been deprived of their heat. 
The fire pot or grate B is constructed with 
the sides b of grating, the lower end of which 
is contracted to form an opening as shown 
which is closed by two or more revoluble 
grate bars b' which are operated by a crank 
handle b. 
Access to the ash chamber or pit C is had 
by the two openings c and c', the upper one 
being adjunct to the grate and permitting 
the agitation of the fuel by the usual tools, 
and the lower one permitting the removal of 
the accumulation of ashes. These openings 
are normally closed by doors d, d, the lower 
one having an auxiliary draft door d as 
shown. 
E is a magazine fuel hopper, the lower con 
tracted end of which is open to the fire pot 
while the inner wall of this hopper is formed 
by the outer shell of the top water chamber, 
presently to be described. This hopper is 
4O O rovided with a hinged lid e, and in practice 
is filled with fuel which is gradually fed to 
the fire pot after the manner of the usual 
magazine fuel hopper. 
The top of the heater consists of a water 
chamber or reservoir 1, the upper shell of 
which may form a portion of the casing A 
and generally be convex, the forward end 
being curved in the arc of a circle downward 
and terminating on the water fire box above 
the point of connection of the hopper and fire 
pot. This portion of the shell may form the 
inner wall of the fuel hopper as before stated. 
The curvature of the shell gradually dimin 
ishes and the rearward termination is on a 
line nearly coincident with the forward end. 
The lower shellf of the chamber 1 conforms 
practically to the curvature of the upper 
shell and is consequently concave. This shell 
f receives the radiated heat from the burning 
fuel and is in contact with the products of 
combustion when at their highest tempera 
ture and at the same time serves to deflect 
the said products in a downward direction, 
- 
as will presently appear. 
Above the fire pot or grate B is a fire box 
2 which is also a water chamber, and is im 
mediately under the forward part of the top 
chamber 1. This fire box as shown in Fig. 5 
is rectangular in shape, the rear portion ex 
tending across the heater above the back of 
the grate and having side portions extending 
from each end thereof forward to the front 
portion, which latter is located in the front 
This front portion forms a 
of the heater. 
part of the inner wall of the fuel hopper E, 
and the opening of the lower end of said hop 
per into the fire box. The two front corners 
of the fire box come under the corresponding 
corners of the top water chamber and con 
nection is made at these points by nipples 3, 
3. It will be noticed here that the water 
spaces in this fire box are inclined upward 
to the front or when connection is made to 
the top water chamber 1. 
4 denotes a Water chamber or space, the 
walls g of which are preferably parallel and 
extend across the heater transversely at a 
point just to the rear of the fire pot or grate, 
and is immediately under the rear part of 
the fire box. The outer wall of the chamber 
serves as the rear wall of the ash chamber. 
The upper end of this chamber is connected 
by a nipple g with the rear portion of the 
fire box 2, (by which communication is estab 
lished) and terminates at its lower end near 
the base of the heater, with the inlets for the 
water, 8-8. The walls g are preferably in 
clined as shown and for a purpose herein 
after explained. 
At the rear of the heater is a water cham 
ber or space 5 formed by walls h, and sup 
ported in an inclined position preferably 
between the direct flue i and the indirect 
flue . This chamber extends transversely 
across the heater and connects by means of 
pipes or tubes 6, 6, with the rear end of the 
crown or top water chamber 1. The water 
chambers 4 and 5 have preferably the same 
degree of inclination and are connected by a 
Series of pipes or tubes 7, 7, which latter com 
plete the communication between the several 
chambers before described. These tubes are 
arranged in rows one above the other in such 
a manner as that the spaces between the 
pipes of one row are opposite to the pipes in 
the next adjoining row, in order that the pas 
Sage through the spaces of the products of 
combustion may be circuitous, and in that 
way bring the heated gases in contact with a 
larger area of the surfaces of the pipes or 
tubes. In Fig. 6 we have shown a cross sec 
tional view of the tubes, and it will be noted 
that the distance between the pipes of one 
row is twice or nearly twice as great as the 
distance between adjoining pipes of differ. 
ent rows; or in other words the space indi 
cated by y-y is about one-half or a little more 
than one-half the space indicated by 2-2. 
By this arrangement of the pipes or tubes, 
the areas of spaces through which the pro 
ducts of combustion pass are practically the 
same throughout. 
The Water enters the heater through the in 
let openings 8-8 which lead into the lower 
65 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
526,967 
O 
35 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
end of the front water chamber 4. After en 
tering the chamber 4 the water can pass in 
two directions; through the tubes 7, 7, into 
the rear water chamber 5 and thence by the 
pipes or tubes 6, 6, to the top or crown Water 
chamber 1, or through the nipple g into the 
water fire box 2 and thence through nipples 
3, 3, into the top or crown water chamber 1. 
From the water chamber 1 the water passes 
through the outlet 9, which is located at the 
highest point of said water chamber into the 
pipes and circulates through the radiator. 
The flues i i? are each provided with dam 
pers i by which the products of combustion 
may be permitted to escape at different points, 
in order to increase or decrease the amount 
of heating surface in contact with the heated 
gases. 
When the damper in the direct flue i is 
open the products of combustion pass from 
the fire box along the under-side of the top 
water section to the upper or direct flue and 
in this event the heated gases come in Con 
tact with the fire box and the top water sec 
tion only. When the direct damper is closed 
and damper in flue i is open the products 
of combustion are compelled to pass down 
through the spaces between the tubes 7, 7, 
and out through the flue i' to the chimney, 
in this way bringing additional heating Sur 
face in contact with the heated gases. The 
direct flue is intended equally for use When 
starting fire or when fire has become low. 
Access to the interior of the heater for 
cleaning purposes, &c., is had through open 
ings in the sides of the outer casing, which 
are normally closed by doors if', and to the 
interior of the water chambers 4 and 5 and 
the tubes or pipes through openings normally 
closed by screw plugs k le. 
In the operation of the heater, the products 
of combustion from the fire box are thrown 
first against the crown sheet or bottom of the 
top water chamber and are deflected back 
ward and downward between the front and 
rear water chambers and through the spaces 
between the tubes. The products of combus 
tion when coming in contact with the crown 
sheet are at their highest temperature and 
gradually decrease in temperature in their 
backward and downward course as heat is 
given off to the heating surface. When the 
fire is first started in the heater, the Water in 
the top chamber receives the heat first and a 
circulation is immediately started in the en 
tire system. An increase in the fire Will only 
cause a more rapid movement of Water in the 
heater and consequently a quicker circula 
tion in the heating apparatus. The return 
water from the heating apparatus enters the 
heater at its lowest point receives heat at the 
lowest rate the gases being of a lower tem 
perature there, and in its upward course re 
ceives heat at a gradually increasing rate 
until the top is reached and the now highly 
heated water goes out of the top to the radia 
tors of the heating apparatus. 
9o 
75 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a hot water heater, the combination 
with a fire box, of a shell in the top of the 
heater constituting a Water chamber or space 
and having an outlet at its highest point, said 
shell being horizontally rectangular in shape, 
the under side thereof forming the crown of 
a combustion chamber and longitudinally 
concave but diminishing in curvature toward 
its rearward end and the upper side thereof 
having a longitudinal curvature similar to 
that of the under side, the forward end of the 
shell being located directly over and in close 
proximity to the fire box. 
2. In a hot water heater, the combination 
of a shell in the top thereof constituting a 
water chamber or space and having an outlet 
at its highest point, said shell being longi 
tudinally rectangular in shape, the under side 
thereof forming the crown of a combustion 
chamber, and longitudinally and transversely 
concave but diminishing in longitudinal curv 
ature toward its rearward end and the upper 
side thereof having a longitudinal curvature 
similar to that of the under side, a water 
chamber forming the fire box and located di 
rectly under and near to the forward end of 95 
the shell and connected to the latter by Water 
ways, and a fire pot beneath said fire box. 
3. In a hot water heater, the combination 
of a shell in the top thereof constituting a 
Water chamber or space and having an out 
let at its highest point, said shell being lon 
gitudinally rectangular in shape, the under 
side thereof forming the crown of a combus 
tion chamber, and longitudinally concave but 
diminishing in curvature toward its rearward 
end and the upper side thereof having lon 
gitudinal curvature similar to that of the un 
der side, a rectangular Water chamber form 
ing the fire box and located directly under 
the forward end of the shell and having com 
munication with the interior thereof, a water 
chamber in the bottom of the heater having 
an inlet, and connecting chambers and spaces 
between Said bottom chamber and the shell 
and fire box Water chamber. 
4. In a hot water heater, the combination 
with a water chamber forming a fire box, of 
a crown Water chamber having a concave un 
der side and an outlet for the Water at its 
highest point, a front Water chamber and a 
rear Water chamber with connecting water 
tubes, waterways or connections between the 
fire box and crown water chamber and front 
water chamber and between the crown water 
chamber and rear Water chamber said front 
chamber having a Water inlet substantially 
as described. 
5. A hot water heater comprising a top wa 
ter chamber or space the under side of which 
forms the crown of a combustion chamber, the 
fire box located beneath and in close prox 
imity to a portion of said top chamber, a 
front water chamber below the fire box, a 
rear Water chamber, and a series of sets of 
O 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
4. 
526,967 
water tubes connecting said front and rear 
chambers, the tubes of one set being opposite in presence of two witnesses. 
to the spaces between the tubes of the adjoin- 
r 
ing set, and the spaces between the tubes of EN ASE TALCOTT 
5 one set being about or nearly twice as great 
as the spaces between the tubes of two ad- 
joining sets, substantially as and for the pur- 
poses set forth. 
ARMISTEAD PETER, Jr., 
G. FREELANDLITER. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527067.txt	(No Model.) 
N. LEHMANN. 
STOWE. 
W S 
s W 
S 
& 
4 
als 
THE MORRIS PETERs co. Photo-Litho. Washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NICHOLAS LEHMANN, OF ATLANTA, GEORGIA. 
STOVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,067, dated October 9, 1894. 
Application filed January 2, 1894, Serial No. 495,446. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NICHOLAS LEHMANN, a 
citizen of the United States of America, and a 
resident of Atlanta, in the county of Fulton 
and State of Georgia, have made certain new 
and useful Improvements in Stoves; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of the device with one of the 
doors open showing the grate proper. Fig.2 
is an end elevation thereof. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tion on the line 3-3, Fig. 5, showing the inte 
rior construction centrally. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tion vertically on the line 4-4, Fig. 5, the 
grate being removed from its setting. Fig. 5 
is a horizontal section on the line 5-5, Fig. 
4, showing a plan of the operative parts be 
Fig. 6 is a section horizontally 
low that line. 
on the line 6-6, Fig. 4, showing the interior 
and exterior form of the base. 
In the figures, like reference marks are uni 
formly employed in the designation of corre 
sponding parts in all the views. 
The outer walls of the setting are composed 
of four parts, a rectangular base piece 1, an 
intermediate piece 2, a bead piece 3, and the 
top Section 4, the whole being surmounted by 
a cap or cover 5. Abottom may be provided 
if desired, which together with all the other 
parts just noted should be made of pottery 
suitably ornamented exteriorly and of the 
desired finish. Joints of cement or fitted 
joints may be made between the several parts 
as is thought best to prevent leakage of smoke 
and gases. The front of each section 1 and 2 
is depressed so as to form in section 2, an up 
Wardly flaring fire-box 6, arid in section 1 an 
ash-chamber 11. The clay in molding is sim 
ply depressed in these places, the molds hav 
ing correlative forms, and the depressions are 
hence integral parts of the sections. The 
portion of the walls of the chamber 6 which 
is part of the section 1 of the casing is rect 
angular, which is also the case with the lower 
end of the part thereof forming part of the 
section. 2 of the casing, the remainder thereof 
being formed of diverging sides as shown in 
Fig. 4, the back being practically parallel to 
the front and being forward at the top edge 
7 whereby a deflector is formed. This com 
bustion chamber is smaller than the main 
chamber leaving thereby at the back and 
sides a space of considerable size. At the 
point where the deflector 7 is formed the ex 
terior face as well as the interior (front) face 
should incline forward the purpose of which 
is two-fold: first, to deflect the flame against 
the back of the casing as it descends from its 
contact with the under side of the top thereof, 
and second to assist in the spreading of the 
said flame, the further deflection thereof be 
ing accomplished by the outer side of the pipe 
or flue 9 which extends downwardly to near 
the bottom of the space back of the chamber 
6, and is flared downwardly larger near the 
bottom, and at its top end opening into the 
pipe 10 leading to the chimney. 
A space ll for the ashes is formed under 
the grate and said space is closed by a door 
12 having a damper 13 therein. Doors 14, 
made in two or more sections are hinged to 
the facing f the casing and operate to close 
the opening above the grate and so act as a 
blower. These doors should be of fanciful 
design. 
It is designed to set this device on a floor 
ing of tiles or other suitable material whereon 
the soot may fall without detriment. 
It is plain that in this device a thorough 
heating of the walls is obtained and a good 
radiation obtained, as well as a complete com 
bustion as far as desirable of the fuel, and 
that the device may be removed in warm 
Weather and again reset in cold, being knocked 
down if desired for the purpose. 
It is also 
capable of receiving a very handsome finish 
at moderate expense. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
A stove made of pottery, and consisting of 
a rectangular main section having its front 
wall depressed in such a manner as to form 
an upwardly flaring fire-chamber, a base sec 
tion of correlative shaped and depressed cor 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
e 
527,067 
relatively forming an ash-chamber, a binding Ting substantially as and for the purpose speci 
Section of greater thickness or strength rest- fied. 
ing on top of the main section and a rectan- 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
gular Section seated thereon, a cover on top signature in presence of two witnesses. 
5 of same, and an eduction flue leading down- 
Wardly through said cover into the space be- 
hind the fire-box and nearly to the bottom of 
the stove, all combined arranged and operat- 
NICHOLAS LEHMANN. 
Witnesses: 
A. P. WooD, 
S. M. WOOD. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527167.txt	(No Model.) 
W. R. BAKER. 
MAST HOOP 
 
 
28i-tv.cscs ??????? 
UNIn ED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. BAKER, OF WATERTOWN, NEW YORK. 
?AS?-???P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,167, dated October 9, 1894. 
Application filed May 9, 1894, Serial No. 510,65l. (No model.) 
O 
20 
To all, whom it may concern: 
heretofore experienced, also lessening fric 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM R. BAKER, a tion and undue wear between the parts--the 
citizen of the United States, residing at Water- loops and mast-and permitting the hoops to 4o 
town, in the county of Jefferson and State of slide freely up and down upon the mast as 
New York, have invented certain new and the sail is raised and lowered. 
useful Improvements in Mast-Hoops; and I 
The ends of the single or continuous wire 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and of the hoop are suitably and firmly secured 
exact description of the invention, such as or clasped together and upon the central or 45. 
will enable others skilled in the art to which intermediate body portion thereof by a clasp 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
or sleeve b soldiered or brazed thereto as 
My invention belongs to a class of devices shown, or otherwise, while the rear, divergent 
of a nautical character, known as sail or mast portion of the coils or circles a are braced or 
hoops, and it has for its object to prevent lia- stayed preferably by a clasp or plate c whose 5o 
bility of the binding of the same on the mast upper and lower edges are turned over, and 
as the sail is raised and lowered, permitting soldered or brazed to, said coils or circles, or 
the sliding thereof freely up and down on the otherwise secured thereon. 
mast, also lessening frictional contact and 
Having thus described my invention, what 
undue wear between the parts, and to these I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat- 55 
ends the invention consists of such a hoop || ent, is-- 
adapted to have two rear, diverging bearing- 
1. As a new article of manufacture a mast 
surfaces upon the mast, and of its detailed hoop having two rear isolated or diverging 
construction, substantially as hereinafter bearing surfaces or points upon the mast, 
more fully disclosed and specifically pointed 
substantially as set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a mast 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
or sail hoop consisting of a single or continu 
a side view of my invention, as applied for 
ous piece coiled or curved toward the rear 
use. Figure 2 is a perspective view, and Fig. 
into two diverging circles or coils from a sin 
gle point at the front, with the ends thereof 65 
3 is a section thereof. 
In the embodiment of my invention, I pro 
clasped or secured upon the intermediate 
duce the hoop A of a single or continuous 
body portion, substantially as set forth. 
piece of metal or wire, it being curved into 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
two circles or coils a, a, diverging from a sin 
presence of two witnesses. 
gle central point at the front, toward, and 
having their maximum divergence at, the rear, 
thus providing two bearing-surfaces thereat, 
to prevent, as well understood, the liability 
of the binding of the hoop upon the mast as 
A. D. CHATTAWAY, 
J. B. WISE. 
WILLIAM R. BAKER. 
Witnesses: 
. 
?? 
- 
, 
- 
25 
3 ? 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527267.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. CUTHBERT. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
SYSTEM OF ELECTRIO BLOCK SIGNALS FOR RAILWAYS, 
No. 527,267, 
 
 
Patented Oct. 9, 1894, 
928)itv.cscs 
24a a 9%/es 
 
34uc4 to 
7taura fewieri, 
(No Model.) 
W. M. CUTHBERT. 
SYSTEM OF ELECTRIC BLOCK SIGNALS FOR RAILWAYS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 527,267. 
& IN 
is 
Iriri-III in 
Patented Oot, 9, 1894. 
s 
 
. . 
el & 
 
s 
f 
- 
VS 
is 
is ". s 
3. 
RS 
e S 
s 
R 
N 
s 
St. 
SS 
- 
28i-evossos 
&4a/94% 
3v.uck-bot 
74.7% afet 
  
 
(No Model.) 
6 sheets-Sheet 3. 
W. M. CUTHBERT. 
SYSTEM OF ELECTRIC BLOCK SIGNALS FOR RAILWAYS, 
No. 527,267. 
Patented Oct. 9, 1894, 
S. C-5. 
R. 
R. 
 
N 
RS 
is 
isit 
is 
is 
ill 
rN 
(No Model.) 
SYSTEM 
No. 527,267. 
W. M. CUTHBERT, 
0F ELECTRIC BLOCK SIGNALS FOR RAILWAYS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Oct. 9, 1894, 
  
 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
W. M. CUTHBERT, 
SYSTEM OF ELECTRIC BLOCK SIGNALS FOR RAILWAYS, 
No. 527,267. 
M 
w 
Patented Oct., 9, 1894. 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSNSSSNS 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
AA. 
a 
S SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
FR3 is F: is ar), Precit...iris, sco c. 
W. M. CUTHBERT, 
SYSTEM OF ELECTRIC BLOCK SIGNALS FOR RAILWAYS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 6. 
(No Model.) 
No. 527,267, 
Patented Oct. 9, 1894. 
 
928) evossos 
- 
3vvue-vitov 
/%-44%. 
as pettas co. Proro-Litho., w". D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. CUTHBERT, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
SYSTEM of EECTRC BLOCK-SIGNALS FOR RALWAYS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,267, dated October 9, 1894. 
Application filed February 16, 1893, Serial No. 462,657. (No model.) 
. 
Zo all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM.M. CUTHBERT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State of 
5 New York, have invented a new and useful 
Method or System of Electric Block-Signals 
for Railways, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to block signals, elec 
to trical, automatic and locomotive cab signals. 
The objects of my improvements are: first, 
to prevent collisions between railroad trains; 
second, a signal that may be seen by the en 
gineer of a train, irrespective of the weather; 
I5 third, accuracy and economy in operating. I 
attain these objects by dividing a railroad 
into, a number of longitudinal sections, each 
section being provided with, and represented 
by an office, and also by the subdividing said 
sections into blocks, each block being pro 
vided with, and represented by a signal post, 
said posts being electrically connected the one 
with the other by an open circuit of high elec 
tric motive force, and with the office by a 
closed circuit of low electric motive force, 
also having in mechanical connection a de 
vice for setting a signal in the cab of a pass 
ing locomotive, said device being stationed 
in advance of the post and actuated simulta 
neously with, and by the changing of the sig 
nal at the post, a signal in the cab of a loco 
motive having means of connection with a 
signal setting device, whereby said cab signal 
is set to indicate danger if the next block is 
closed, (occupied,) said posts also automati 
cally telegraphing the section office of the 
passage of trains, -number of cars in the 
train and the condition of the several blocks 
in the section. I further attain these objects 
by the mechanism illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1, is alongitudinal view of a part 
of a railroad track (running, say, east and 
west), which is provided with my improved 
45 block system and signals, only one track of 
the road being shown. Fig. 1, Sheet 1- is 
a cross section of the same taken at dotted 
line W.W. of Fig. 2", Sheet 3. It shows the 
mechanism which connects the railroad to the 
5o signal posts, and by which the said posts are 
operated by passing engines. Fig. 2, Sheet 
35 
40 
2- is a front elevation of the interior of a 
section office, (section C.) and also a side ele 
vation of the interior of a signal post (E, sec 
tion C.). Fig. 2, Sheet 3- is also a side ele- 55 
vation of the interior of a signal post (E", 
section .C.) and its mechanical connection 
with its cab signal setting device. Fig. 3, 
Sheet 3,--is a rear view of an electrical enu 
merating instrument, showing its mechanism. 6o 
Fig. 4, Sheet 4- is a side view of a device 
for setting a signal in the cab of a passinglo 
comotive, the post of which is in part a sec 
tion taken at XX. of Fig. 5. Fig. 5, Sheet 
4- is a front view of same. Fig. 5", Sheet 65 
4-is a side view of a hand lever which may be 
used to operate the cab signal setting device, 
or arm. Fig. 6, Sheet 4 is a side view of 
another form or modification of a cab signal 
setting device. Fig. 7, Sheet -5,- is a front 7o 
view of the interior of the cab of a locomo-., 
tive, showing the cab signal, also its connec 
tion with a tell-tale clock. Fig. 7 is a detail 
view of the latch for the cab signal. Fig. 8, 
Sheet 5- is a vertical section of the same 7S 
taken at line Z.Z. of Fig. 7. Fig. 9, Sheet 5-. 
is a rear view of anotherform or modification 
of the cabsignal. Figs.10, 11, and 12,-illus 
trate another arrangement of the cab signal 
and setting device, Fig. 10 being the side ele- So 
vation of a part of an engine and its cab, 
showing the standard, lever and end of the 
signal case. Fig.11, is a plan, of the same. 
Fig. 12- is a vertical cross section of a cab, 
showing the position of the signal in the cab, 85 
also the signal setting device in connection. 
- Similarletters and numerals refer to similar 
parts throughout the several views, and fur 
ther, the numerals connected to the letters, 
which indicate the batteries and instruments 9o 
in the office, and also the line wires, corre 
spond to, and show the signal post to which 
Referring to Fig. 1, Sheet 1-A is a rail 
road track. B. C.D. are sections of the road, - 95 
C. being a full section of three blocks, only 
the last post in section B. and the first in sec 
tion D. being shown. O is the office of Sec 
tion B., and O', the office of section C. 
connected to the respective offices of their 
sections, and are numbered consecutively, be 
E. E. E. E. E. are signal posts electrically too 
they connect. 
" . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
2 
527,267 
 
ginning in each section with the post far 
thermost from the office. 
E, E, E, E, E, are the cab signal set 
posts Or arms, mechanically connected to the 
signal posts to which they belong. Thus E, 
section C. is a signal post electrically con 
nected to the office, O', and having the ad 
joining cab signal setting arm E, connected 
to it. These posts are placed alongside of the 
track-one or more miles apart, the signal 
fronting in the direction from which the 
trains approach. The space between signal 
posts constitutes a block. 
The cab signal setting devices are placed 
at such distance in advance of their respect 
ive posts as will permit a train of cars to be 
stopped, before arriving at the post. 
a.a.a., are line wires connected with instru 
ments in the office, and extend thence to the 
several posts. b.b.b. are also line wires which 
extend from an automatic electrical Switch or 
circuit changer, (hereinafter described,) of the 
first post in one section, to the last post in 
the preceding section. 
O 
15 
25 
galvanometer or circuit closer, to which they 
connect as described in said Letters Patent. 
Referring now to post E8, Fig. 2, Sheet 2, 
and also post E, Fig. 2. Sheet 3, ... is a shaft 
mounted on bearings at the upper part of the 
post, and extending centrally through it from 
front to back. At its: front end it has a sig 
nal disk, K, permanently attached, said disk 
being, say, three feet in diameter, and con 
sisting of a hub from which arms extend to a 
rim, thus forming a circular frame, which is 
covered with transparent material. One half 
of its face, R. is colored ired, -and the other 
half. W., white. Just back of this signal disk, 
and fast on said shaft is a stop-wheel, K, 
having a notch, l', in its rim, the use of which 
Back of this stop 
is hereinafter explained. 
wheel is a pinion, k, fast on shaft k. into 
which meshes the teeth of the upright rack 
bar, F. Said baris provided with guides, E, 
and is of such length that it will reach from 
its bearings on lever F. to a point above its 
upper guide. 
H, is a relay-magnet, adjusted that, it will 
not not be effected or close its armature ex 
cept by a current of higher electromotive 
force than that of the constant (gravity) cur 
rent which passes through it. 
h., is its plati 
num point which is connected to the local 
carbon battery, C. 
L. is an instrument consisting of an electro 
magnet provided with two armatures, L', and 
L, which are levers of the third order. The 
adjustment of the armature L', is of less re 
sistance than that of I, yet it is such that it 
will not be closed by the constant (gravity) 
The 
current which is passing through it. 
free end of thisarmature L', is reduced in size 
and when not in service is held back by a re. 
traction spring, against an adjustable stop. 
When, however, it is in service and closed, 
its upper end comes in contact with a plati 
num point, l, which has a wire running to the 
ground, and thus short circuits the instru 
ment as hereinafter explained. The arma 
ture, L, is at the opposite end of the magnet 
from L'. Its upper end l', is bent outwardly 
at an angle to its shaft and is of such size. 
that it will enter the notch l, in the rim of 
stop-wheel K, said notch being located so that 
when it is engaged by the armature L', it will . 
hold the: shaft, k, from a return movement 
when the signal, R. is uppermost and exposedi. 
M. is a break-spring, m. being its free end; 
m", a pin on the rack-bar, F, projecting un 
der and just clear of said spring when the 
bar, F, is elevated. 
Its free end is. 
pressed down on, and electrically connects 
with the break-spring M. by the projecting. 
pin, m, on bar F, when said bar is down. 
M, is a resistance coil placed last in the 
constant, or closed circuit. 
N.is an automatic switch or circuit changer. 
Its bar is a lever of the first order. Its full 
crum (pivot) n, is placed nearest the power 
M, is a short circuit spring. 
- 
- 
9 O 
95 
OO 
Ios 
O 
IIS 
13 
35 
45 
55 
20 and 76 are engines. 
A', A', (Fig. 1, Sheet 1) are rails. 
c. is a pin which passes down along the in 
side of the outer rail and bears on the end of 
the lever F. which has its fulrum, c', located 
at such a distance from its free end, that 
when the power end is only slightly depressed 
pin c. being forced down, its opposite, 
by the 
or free end will lift the upright rack-bar F", 
sufficiently to give a half revolution to the 
signal shaft le. by means of its rack acting on 
the pinion ls, on said shafts. (Fig. 2, Sheet 2.) 
C, represents carbon batteries used on open 
circuits; G., gravity batteries used on closed 
circuits; H. H., relay magnets in the office so 
adjusted, that the armatures are held closed 
and away from the platinum point h...by a 
constant current passing through them. 
II'', H', are enumerating instruments (see 
Fig. 3), consisting of a dial I. having numbers 
around its margin, the space between the 
figures being divided into equal parts; ,l, 
an electro-magnet; l, its armature which is 
a lever of the third order and has a pawl", 
pivoted on its free end, which will engage 
one tooth of the ratchet, wheell, at each 
movement of the armature when it, opens, 
and moves said wheel forward one tooth or 
point when the armature closes. Said wheel 
is fast on the shaft i. to which is also attached . 
the index hand I. Said shaft is mounted in 
suitable bearings. 
, is an indent pawl act 
ing on said wheel I. These pawls are pro 
vided with the usual springs to bind them to 
service. . 
J', 'J', J, are galvanometers, similar in 
construction to that described in Letters.Pat 
ent, No. 120,744, dated November 7, 1871, en 
titled in provement in circuit closers to which 
reference, is had. 
J, are announcement drops, and are re 
spectively numbered to correspond to the 
-- 
527,267 
3 
o 
75 
o 
d 
90 
end. Its opposite end is held in contact with 
the plate n, by a suitable spring, this being 
its normal position. n., is a similar plate in 
sulated from n, and a little apart from it. 
This plate, n, is connected with the local 
carbon battery. 
m, is a projection on the bar F, which 
comes into contact with the power end of the 
switch-bar when said bar, F, is moved up 
ward, and causes said switch-bar to leave its 
connection with plate ... and connect with 
plate n, but before the bar, F, has reached 
its full-height the projection, m, lets go of 
the switch-bar which then returns to its nor 
mal position. 
Having thus described the various instru 
ments, magnets, &c., used in offices and posts, 
I now describe the run of the various circuits, 
premising that in all the circuits G', is the 
ground wire; the arrow heads on the lines 
marked, a, the course of the closed circuits; 
the arrow heads on the lines b, the open cir 
cuits; also that the galvanometers and in 
struments in the office, the posts to which they 
are connected, and the line-wires all have the 
same relative number-as before stated. Be 
ginning at battery G, in the office (Fig. 2), 
the circuit passes through the relay-magnet 
H', holding it closed, then to and through the 
galvanometer, J, thence by line wire a, to 
post E, where it first connects with relay 
magnet, H, passes through it to the double 
armature magnet, L. and through it to the 
break-spring, M.; thence to the coil M, and 
then by the wire, G', to the ground. The 
above is its course if the block represented 
by this post is closed or occupied by a train, 
and the red signal, R.exposed. 
(See Fig. 2.) 
At the same time in the office the index hand 
of the galvanometer will point to the zero (J', 
and J). When the block is open (unoccu 
pied) the circuit is as follows: The bar, F, 
being down (and the white signal, W. ex 
posed), the short circuit spring, M', is pressed 
down by the projection, m, on the break 
spring, M. (Fig.2) and makes electrical con 
nection with it. The course of the current is 
thereby changed, taking the short route to 
the ground through the spring, M'; thus cut 
ting out the coil, M, resulting in the deflec 
tion of the index hand of the galvanometer 
to the right of zero, as is shown by J., (Fig. 
2,) and thereby shows in the office that the 
block is open. The line wire to the last post 
in a section extends directly to it from the 
office as seen in post, E, section C. but with 
all other posts in the section, it first enters 
the post which is in advance of it (to the 
course a train is moving), and connects to the 
plate n, of the switch, N. it then passes 
through and out of the switch at the pivot, 
n, to its proper post, as will be seen by ref 
erence to Fig. 2, which shows the line a... from 
galvanometer, J, to the switch, N. of post E, 
thence to the relay magnet, H, of post E. 
Thence its circuit is the same as above de 
scribed. 
The open or carbon circuits which connect 
one post with the other--are as follows: 
When an engine passes a post, (post E, sec 
tion C., for instance) and raises the bar F", 
the projection in, moves the switch bar N. 
from its normal connection with plate m. into 
connection with plate n, cutting out the 
gravity current and office instruments, and 
closing the open circuit which will then ex 
tend from the local carbon battery of this 
post (see Fig. 2), to and through the switch 
bar N. and the line wire a, to the relay mag 
net H', of post E, section C. (see Fig. 2.) and 
cause its armature to connect with the point 
h, closing the circuit from the local battery 
of this post (E'), which extends from said 
battery through the relay-armature and wire 
connected to its pivot, to the double armature 
magnet L. causing its armature L', to connect 
with the pointl, whereupon the current will 
be through the bridle b. to the pivot of the 
armature I, through it by the ground wire 
: G, to the ground; thus cutting out the re 
sistance coil, whereupon the armature L, will 
close; the action of said armature 
I, and L, 
being synchronous. 
The switch'N. of the first posts in a section 
(see E', section D., and E, section C. Fig. 1), 
is connected to the last post of the preceding 
section by a special wire." In this case the 
circuit is as follows: Referring to Fig.2, be 
ginning at battery C, post E, section D. the 
circuit extends to the plate n, through the 
switch arm N when in contact with plate n', 
as above described, to and through the wire 
b', to the post E, section C. where it connects 
with the line wire a, through which its cir 
cuit is continued to the relay-magnet H, of 
this post from whence its course is the same 
as above set forth. 
The cab signal setting device consists of a 
post, P. about twelve inches square, which is 
securely fixed in an upright position on the 
same side of the track as, and in line with 
the signal post to which it is an adjunct, and 
at such preceding distance as will permit a 
train to be stopped before arriving at said. 
signal post. Its height is relative to the actu II5 
ating mechanism of the cab signal and is such 
that the arm, P., when extended over the 
railroad track will make mechanical con 
nection with lever S, (hereinafter described.) 
From the back of this post P. projects up 
ward and rearward at an angle of about 
twenty-two degrees, a limb, P, its height be 
ing about the same as that of the post. 
Both 
post andlimb are mortised through from front 
to rear at their upper ends, p", said mortises 
being in line-the one with the other and are 
provided with anti-friction rollers, B, which 
are journaled in their sides; the rollers in 
the mortises being, one at the top and one at 
the botton, the space between them being a 
little more than the width of the arm, P., so 
that it can freely move longitudinally be. 
tween them. The roller in the limb, P, is 
placed at the lower end of its mortise. The 
95 
". 
. 
. . 
25 
2O 
do 
Io5 
Io 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
4. 
- 
- 
. 
. 
527,267 
2 O. 
arm is of such dimensions that it will move 
back and forth in these mortises, riding on 
the lower roller. of the post and that in the 
limb. It is of a length that when projected: 
from the front of the post it will extend over: 
about one third of the width of the track, as 
is shown by dottedlines p", and its rear end 
bears on the roller of the limb. Its outer end 
is provided with a roller, p. placed length 
A chain, p, having a . 
wise on its under side. 
O 
weight p, heavy enough to move the arm to 
- the rear, passes over a groove. in the center. 
of the limb roller, from the rear of the limb 
to the front, and in line with and under the 
arm, down diver a groove in the lower roller. 
of the post. It is attached to the arm at such 
distance back from its frontend; as will draw 
the arm forward and cause it to project over 
the track the required distance, when the 
chain is drawn forward, or withdraw it by 
the weight, p, when the chain is relaxed. 
Said chain extends down from the front roller 
in a groove in the face of the post, passes 
around a pulley, p, at the bottom of the post, 
the axle of the pulley being at right angles to 
the face of the post, and thence to the lower 
end of bar, F, in the signal post. Here it 
passes around a pulley, and extends up into 
- the signal post, and is attached to bar, F, 
just above its bearing on the lever, F. A. 
modification of this cab signal setting device, 
is shown in Fig. 6, Sheet 4. It consists of the 
post, P. mortised through from front to back 
at the top, in which is journaled, the arm, 
R', at such distance back from its front end, 
that when the arm is in a horizontal position. 
it will extend over the track as above men 
tioned. The chain p, is attached to the unders 
side of the arm at the front of the post and 
brings it to the horizontal position when 
drawn on, and when relaxed a weight or 
counter-balance mounted on the rear end of 
the arm, R', raises the front end and its roller, 
R. The chain passes around the pulley p, at 
the foot of the post, thence to the signal post 
as described of the first device. 
Fig. 12, Sheet 6, shows another modificar 
tion of the signal setting device and arrange 
ment of the eab signal. The signal setting 
device is similar in construction to the one 
last above described, except that the roller, 
R", is vertical and mounted on the end of 
arm R', (see Fig. 11) and the arm is shorter 
so that it will project when in a horizontal 
position such distance as would bring its 
roller, R, to within, say, eight inches of the 
side of a passing engine cab, and a few 
inches below its roof. The cab signal setting 
device may be used separate and apart from 
the signal posts by connecting the chain p, 
with a lever such as that shown in Fig. 5. 
The cab signal is illustrated in Figs, 7 and 
8, Sheet 5. It consists of a rectangular case, S. 
about five and one-halfinches Wide by fifteen 
inches in height and-two and one-half inches 
deep. It has an opening, S', in its front at a 
little more than one-third of its height from 
the bottom, and is about four inches square. 
At this opening the signal is exposed to the 
view of the engineer. A rod, S', extends such 7o 
a height above the roof of the cab as may 
be required to clear the roofs of the cars in a 
train, --then down through the roof of the 
cab of the engine, and through the center of 
the case. The upper end of this rod has a bi- 75 
furcated head S9. Itslowerpart passes through . 
and takes bearing on the top of the spiral 
spring, s, which bears on- and is secured to 
the bottom of the case: Said spring is of such 
resistance that it will a little more than count 8o 
terbalance the weight of the rod, S', the sig 
nals and a part of the lever, S. A card of 
paper board or other material, nine or ten 
inches, long and a little less in with than the 
internal width of the case is permanently 85 
mounted on the rod inside of the case, its up 
per end being against the top of the case 
when the spiral-spring is expanded and the 
rod at its highest point. This card is divided 
transversely into two equal parts. The upper go 
one, R', is colored red, and the lower one, W, 
Under the bottom or the case is at 
white, 
tached a spring latch, s. This latch engages 
the notch s', in the rod when it is pressed 
down, and holds the red signal, R', in view 95 
until relaxed. The spring then raises the rod 
so that the signal W', is exposed to view. The 
free end of the lateh which extends beyond 
the side of the case acts upon a light lever, s, 
(of the first order) which acts in turn on the loo 
punching lever of a tell-tale or, watchman's 
clock, W, that whenever the latch is moved 
to release the rod, S', and change the signal 
from red to white, a record will be made on the 
dial paper in the clock, of the hour and minute Io5 
of such change. A standard, S', is firmly se 
cured to the engine at the side. It is of such 
height that it will be just below the roller, p. 
of the projecting arm of the cab signal setting 
device. Its upper end is forked and receives 
one end of the lever, S, which is pivoted 
therein. Said lever is of the third order and 
extends to, and rests in the bifurcated headS, 
of the signal rod, S. At this end it is slotted 
longitudinally through its side and a bolt 
through the head, S', passes freely through 
the slot and secures the lever, S', from being 
thrown out of its connection with the rod. By 
reference to Fig. 8, Sheet 5, it will be seen that 
the head of S, is much higher than the top of 
the standard so that the lever, S', iihits course 
from one to the otherforms an inclined plane, 
also that the roller p. of the arm, P', of the 
signal setting device is of such relative 
height that as the engine passes under the 
arm, the lever and also the signal rod will be 
forced down and the white signal changed 
to red. 
Another-form of the cab signalis shown in 
T., is the case having its 
Fig. 9, Sheet 5. 
back removed. S, is a vertical rod passing a 
little to one side of its transverse centers. It 
is provided with a rack T, which acts on the 
pinion, T, fast on a shaft which has mounted 
45 
35 
40. 
d 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
527,267 
5. 
25 
35 
5 
Io 
on its front end a signal disk, T, which is 
equally divided into red and white signals. 
An opening in the front of the box, less than 
half the size of the disk admits the signal to 
view. S. is a spiral spring placed on top of 
the case, and acts on the rod S, to raise it. 
Said rod is provided with bifurcated head 
connections as the rod in the signal last above 
described. 
When the form of the signal setting device, 
last above described, (Figs. 11 and 12,) is em 
ployed the cab signal is horizontal in the cab 
in place of vertical, and its rod S*, projects 
through the side of the cab, (in place of the 
roof,) and is connected with the lever S, as 
before described. Said lever is curved in 
wardly (S'), and is connected to the top of the 
standard S., by a vertical pivot so that the le 
ver has a lateral movement. The standard, 
S, is mounted on, say, the outer edge of the 
foot-board, S', of the engine, and is provided 
with the pivot as above mentioned. (See 
- 
Fig. 10.) 
Operation: When a train passes a post 
(signal post, E, for instance), the first wheel 
of the engine (20) will by means of the pin, c. in 
the outside rail, A', and the lever F., raise the 
bar, F, and give one half revolution to the 
shaft, k, and change the signal from white to 
red, at which it will be held by the armature of 
the instrument, L., impinging in the notch, l, 
of the stop wheel, K. As the bar, F, is 
raised, the chain, p, is drawn upon and the 
arm P', of the cab signal setting device is ex 
tended over the railroad track, and remains 
in that position as long as the bar, F. is up 
and the red signal exposed, -and further the 
projection, m, on the bar, F, comes in con 
tact with the power end of the switch lever, 
N. and as it passes, changes its connection 
from plate, n. to plate n'. This cuts out the 
gravity current, d, and brings the local car 
bon battery, C, of this post into circuit with 
the relay-magnet, H., of post E, section C. 
which in turn brings its local carbon battery 
as before described into circuit with the 
double armature magnet, L. The first effect 
of this current is to close the armature, L', 
bringing it into contact with the point, l, and 
short circuit the instrument so as to cut out 
the resistance of the coil, M. When this is 
done, the armature, I, will instantly close, 
thereby releasing the stop wheel, K', and 
shaft K, will by reason of the weight of the 
bar, F, make a half return revolution and 
change the red signal to white. The bar 
(post E, section C.) being down, releases the 
chain, p, and the weight, p, draws the arm, 
P", of the cab signal setting device of this 
post from its projection over the track, and 
further, the projection in, of the bar, F, 
brings the short circuit spring, M', into con 
tact with the break-spring, and by cutting 
out the resistance coil, M, acts on the gal 
vanometer as before described; and shows 
the operator the change of the block from 
closed to open. Although the bar, F. at sig 
nal post, E, is held up, it will receive a slight 
motion from each wheel of the passing train. 
This motion is conveyed by the pin, m', to 
the break-spring, M. causing it to alternately 
break and make connection with the plate at 
its free end, (m.) and this breaking and mak 
ing of the current acts on the galvanometer, 
causing its index hand to swing to the left of 
Zero and return, and also causes the relay 
magnet, H. to release its armature, which 
then comes into contact with the point, h., 
closing the circuit of the office carbon bat 
tery with the instrument, H', to be broken 
again when the gravity circuit is made. This 
alternate action on the magnet and armature 
of instrument, H', causes its index hand to 
advance on the dial, one point at each move-. 
ment, and thus enumerate the number of 
wheels in a train passing the post, and thus 
gives the number of cars. When the train 
has passed, the standing of the index hand 
of the enumerating instrument is recorded, 
and the hand turned up to zero, (0) ready for 
the next train. When a block is occupied 
as shown in Fig. 2., the arm of the cab sig 
nal setting device of the signal post last past, 
by the occupying train, will be extended hori 
Zontally over the track. A following engine 
when it passes under this arm will bring the 
lever, S, of its cabsignal into contact with the 
roller of the arm which will force the lever and 
rod, S, down, changing the white signal to red, 
thus warning the engineer to stop until the 
signal at the signal post, at which he halted, 
shall change from red to white, showing the 
block ahead of him to be clear. On passing 
into the open block the engine sets the dan 
ger signal at the signal post thus closing the 
block it enters, and also opens the block it 
has just left, by changing its red signal to 
white, as before described. Should a train 
be run past a post when the red signal is set, 
the action of the wheels of the train, -as be 
fore described-on the break-spring will tel 
egraph it to the operator at the office, by the 
action of both the galvanometer and enumer 
ating instrument and as the hand of the gal 
vanometer constantly returns to Zero, indi 
cates that the danger signal was exposed when 
the block protected by said post was entered. 
When a post has been passed, the red signal 
in the cab is released by withdrawing its 
latch, and the time will be recorded in the 
clock. 
It will be seen by those skilled in the art, 
that a relay-magnet, having the arm of its 
armature extended, so as to act as an index 
on a dial in connection with a break-spring 
might be used as a substitute for the galva 
nometer, to indicate the state of a block 
whether open or closed. In this case there: 
sistance coil would not be required, also that 
other forms of electrical instruments might 
be used. The use of any such instruments I 
claim as mechanical equivalents. Again, in 
place of the enumerating instrument de 
scribed, one or more pen registers might be 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
OO 
Ios 
IIc 
II5 
25 
130 
527,267 
Io 
x5 
I 
go 
used. This, I also claim as a mechanical equiv 
alent. It will be understood that regular tele 
graphic connection is had between the sec 
tion offices and also the division office. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
. . 
I claim- 
1. In signals for railways, a signal system 
consisting of a railroad divided into sections, 
and the sections into blocks, each section hav 
ing an office provided with a suitable indi 
cating instrument or instruments, an auto 
matic signal post to each block, a cab signal 
setting device in advance of and connected 
to the signal post; a signal located in the cab 
of a locomotive engine or on a train, and hav 
ing means of connection with said device; 
each section office being electrically connected 
with each post in its section, and each post 
being electrically connected to the post next 
preceding it, substantially as specified. . 
2. In signals for railways and the like; a sig 
nal system consisting of the following: pne or 
more sections, each of which has an office or 
station; an indicating instrument or instru 
ments in each office or station; the section or 
sections divided into any desired number of 
blocks, a signal-post at the entrance of each 
block, means operated by a passing engine or 
train for changing a set signal at a post and 
a special closed circuit and a line-wire ex 
tending from each individual post to its cor 
responding indicating instrument or instru 
ments in its respective office or station, to con 
trol said instrument or instruments and show, 
the condition of the block represented by said 
post, substantially as set forth. 
3. In signals for railways and the like, a sig 
nal system consisting of the following:-one 
or more sections, each of which has an of 
fice or station, indicating instrument or in 
struments in each office or station; the sec 
tion or sections divided into any desired num 
ber of blocks, a signal post at the entrance of 
each-block, a closed circuit to control said in 
dicating instrument or instruments, and an 
open circuit of greater electro-motive force 
than the closed circuit; means operated by the 
engine for changing the signal, as it passes the 
post, a switch operated by the signal changer 
to close said open circuit, for the purpose of 
changing the signal to safety at the post at the 
entrance of the block the train is leaving, sub 
stantially as specified. 
4. The combination in a signal system of one 
or more sections, each of which is provided 
with an office or station, one or more blocks in 
each section provided with a signal post at the 
entrance of each block, indicating instrument. 
or instruments located in the office or station, 
a closed circuit connecting each post with an 
indicating instrument or instruments, a re 
sistance coil, an open circuit of greater electro 
motive force than the closed circuit and con 
necting the post of one block, with the post of 
the block next preceding it, a device in each 
post operated by a passing engine for ctang 
ing the signal and releasing the short circuit 
spring in this post to bring the coil into action 
 
90 
. 
. . 
o 
85 
75 
in the closed circuit, and indicate on said in 
strument that the block the engine is entering 
is occupied; and by operating a switch close 
Said open circuit and thereby through suit 
able mechanism change the signal at the sig 
nal post at the entrance of the block the en 
gine is leaving; and by the short circuit spring 
in this post cut out the coil and show on the 
indicating instrument that this block is clear 
or unoccupied. 
5. The combination in a signal system of 
an indicating instrument or instruments, lo 
cated in an office or station, a closed circuit, 
a signal post connected by said circuit with 
said indicating instrument, a short circuit 
Spring a resistance coil and meansin the signal 
post operated by a passing engine for changing 
the signal, to release or open the short circuit 
spring, and bring the coil into circuit and show 
on said indicating instrument, the character 
of the signal displayed at the post. . 
. 
6. The combination in a signal system of 
an indicating instrument or instruments, lo 
cated in an office or station, a closed circuit, 
a signal post connected by said circuit, with 
said indicating instrument, a short circuit 
spring, a resistance coil, and means located 
in said post for closing said spring, cut out 95 
the coil and show on the said indicating in 
strument, the character of the signal dis 
played at said post, 
7. The combination of an open circuit, a 
relay or circuit closer, an enumerating instru 
thent, all located in an office or station, a sig 
nal post provided with a break spring, a 
closed circuit connecting said relay with said 
break spring, and means operated by a pass 
ing engine or train which operates on the 
break spring, for the purpose of indicating. 
on said office instrument the passing of a train 
past Said post, and the number of cars in 
such, train, substantially as specified. 
8. In a signal system, the combination of a 
signal post provided with danger and safety 
signals, means operated by a passing engine. 
or train for setting a signal, a stop for hold 
ing the signal when set, an open local circuit 
and battery, a relay magnet, electro magnets. 
for releasling the set signal, a foreign: battery 
having an open primary circuit extending to 
and connected. With said relay, and meanslo 
cated at a distance operated by a passingen 
gine or train to close said primary circuit and 
actuate the relay to close said local circuit, 
substantially as specified. 
9. In a signal system, the combination of a 
signal post provided with danger and safety 
signals; means operated by a passing engine 
or train for setting a signal, a stop for hold 
ing the signal when set, a foreign battery, a. 
primary open circuit and a circuit closer, a 
secondary open (local) circuit and battery, a 
relay magnet and electromagnets for releas 
ing a set signal, substantially as set forth. . 
10. In a railway system, an enumerating 
instrument, located at an office or station, a 
local battery and open circuit a relay magnet, 
O 
25 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
So 
8o ; 
: 
tos 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
527,267 
Io 
T5. 
a closed circuit, which passes through said 
relay to a signal post, means operated by a 
passing engine or train which alternately 
open and close said closed circuit, and actuates 
said relay to alternately close and open said 
local circuit and so actuate said enumerating 
instrument, substantially as specified. 
11. In railway or other signals the combina 
tion with a signal changer, of an electro mag 
net having two synchronized armatures, one 
of which is of less resistance than the other 
and is provided with means of connection 
with a ground wire, thereby changing the 
circuit and reducing the electrical resistance 
to the other armature; which is thereby 
caused to release a set signal, substantially 
as specified. 
13. The combination in a signal system of 
an indicating instrument or instruments lo 
2d cated in an office, a signal post, an electrical 
circuit extending from said instrument or in 
struments to said post, a break spring, a re 
sistance coil, and means located in said post 
and actuated by a passing engine, or train 
and operating on said break spring, to indi 
cate on said indicating instrument or instru 
ments, the passing of an engine or train, and 
the character of the signal displayed at said 
post, substantially as specified. 
13. In a signal system for railways, consist 
ing of a railway divided into sections and the 
sections into blocks, each section having an 
office or station, and each block an automatic 
signal post, electrically connected with its 
respective office, and with the signal post 
next preceding it, and also having mechan 
ism operated by a passing engine or train to 
set a danger signal at said post, in combina 
tion therewith, an adjunct to said post con 
sisting of a post P provided with an arm, a 
25 
35 
40 
. 
- 
roller mounted on the end of the arm nearest 
the track; said adjunct being located at the 
side of the track at a distance from and in 
advance of said signal post, and having means 
of connection with said post whereby its roller 
is thrown into a position simultaneously with 
and by the setting of a danger signal at said 
signal post, to actuate the lever S. located 
on a passing engine to set a danger signalin 
the cab of said engine, substantially as shown 
and described. 
14. In railway signals, a device for setting 
a signal in a signaling apparatus on a passing 
engine or train, said device consisting of the 
post P, pivoted lever or arm R', having a 
roller mounted on that end of the arm near 
est the track, and a counter balance on the 
other or rear end a chain p. and pulley p 
said arm and roller when in an operative po 
sition having a relative height to the lever 
S. located on said engine or train, substan 
tially as shown and described, 
15. In railway signals, a device for setting 
a signal in a signaling apparatus on a passing 
engine or train consisting of the post P. hav 
ing the limb P. said post having the rollers 
P. a sliding arm P. provided with a roller 
on that end nearest the track, a chain p. and 
pulley.p. a second chain p' connected to said 
arm, and passing over the roller P. of the 
limb and a weight p. on its free end, said 
arm and roller when in an operative position 
having a height relative to lever S. located 
on said engine or train, all combined and op 
erating substantially as described and for 
the object set forth. 
WILLIAM M. CUTHBERT. 
In presence of 
H. GRIGGS, 
HERMAN LEHRENKRAUSS. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527367.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 527,367. 
H. H, IEE, D, 
RAILWAY RAIL JOINT, 
Patented Oct. 9, 1894. 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
' 
HENRY H. FIFIELD, OF LA PLATA, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO SILAS S. BONHAM, OF SAME PLACE, AND BARUCH. W. BONHAM, 
OF LACROSSE, MISSOURI. 
RAILWAY-RAIL JOINT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,867, dated October 9, 1894. 
Application filed April 6, 1894, serial No. 506,618, (No model.) 
55 
I. ? 
To all wh???, it ??? ????cer?: 
Beit known that I, HENRY H. FIFIELD, 
citizen of the United States, residing at La 
Plata, in the county of Macon and State of 
Missouri, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Railway-Rail Joints, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to railway rail joints, 
the purpose being to provide a construction 
of simple and inexpensive character, by which 
the ends of the rails shall be joined in such 
manner as to form a practically jointless rail, 
and secure the essential advantages obtained 
by using integral rails, which avoid the jar 
15 ring and pounding of the wheels upon the 
ends of the rails, when the latter are united 
in the usual manner, by which they are beaten 
down and soon destroyed, besides the noise 
and discomfortinflicted upon passengers, and 
the danger resulting from high speeds upon 
roads where such defects may be encountered. 
It is my purpose, also, to provide a joint for 
rail'ay-rails by which the necessity of using 
fish-plates, or splice-bars may be avoided, the 
number of track-bolts diminished, and the 
labor and time required in laying the track 
largely reduced. 
The invention consists in the several novel 
features of construction and new combina 
tions of parts hereinafter fully described and 
then more particularly pointed out an di de 
fined in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings: 
Figure 1, is a plan view showing the cnds of 
two adjacentrails jointed in accordance with 
my inventi)n. Fig. 2, is a horizontal section 
of the same, taken below the rail-head. Fig. 
3, is a central vertical section, taken in the 
horizontal line of the rail. Fig. 4, is a trans 
verse section upon the line 4-4, in Fig. l. 
The reference numera 1, in said drawings, 
indicates the head of a railway-rail of the or 
dinary pattern, commonly known as a T-rail. 
The numerals 2 and 8 denote, respectively, 
the web and the foot of said rail. 
In applying my invention to this form of 
rail, the Web 2 is increased in thickness until 
it is flush, or nearly so, with the tread, this 
increase extending from one extremity of the 
rail for some little distance, as more fully ex 
plained hereinafter. The rail is then slitted 
in two converging lines 4-4, beginning very 
near the opposite edges of the tread of the 
rail and converging to an opening 5, centrally 
located at some distance from the end of the 
rail. The lines of cut and the central open 
ing extend entirely through the thickened 
web of the rail, as well as its foot. The end 
of the other rail is provided with a short sec 
tion of thickened web 6, beyond which the 
end of the rail is symmetrically tapered in 
such manner as to fit the opening in the slit 
ted rail and completely fill the same. Upon 
the extremity, or apex, of the tapered, Wedge 
shaped tenon 7, is formed an enlargement 8, 65 
similar in its outline to the shape of the open 
ing 5 in the slitted rail, but preferably some 
what smaller than the same, in order that a 
limited play may be possible. The Wedge 
shaped tenon 7 and enlargement 8 extend, 
like the mortise in the other rail, from the 
tread entirely through the web and foot of 
the rail, so that when the rails are jointed to 
gether the mortise and the opening 8 are com 
pletely filled. 
When the rails are united, a bolt 9 is passed 
through the thickened web of the slitted end 
of the one rail and through the wedge-shaped 
tenon, and a nut 10 is turned upon its end. 
I may employ more than one bolt, should the 
weight of the rail, or the circumstances of the 
case require it, but in ordinary cases a sin 
gle bolt, or two at most, will be sufficient. 
The rails are supported upon sleepers in 
the ordinary Way, and secured by spikes, or 
in any preferred manner. Instead, however, 
of requiring chairs for the meeting ends of . 
the rails, as has been usual heretofore, the 
rails may be spiked directly to the sleepers, 
a single spike on each side being all that is 
ordinarily necessary. Notches 12 may be 
formed in the rail-foot for this purpose. I 
am able, also, to dispense with the use of fish 
plates, splice-bars, and like devices heretofore 
employed to sustain the ends of the rails and 
hold them in juxtaposition. At the same 
time, my invention provides for the expan 
sion and contraction due to variations in tem 
75 
9o 
95 
25 
35 
45 
 
s 
527,367 
- 
from the edges of the tread to a central open 
ing at a distance from the end, and the other 
rail end having a tenon symmetrically ta 
pered to fill said notch and provided at its 
apex With an en largement, substantially as 
described. 
4. A rail-joint consisting of two meeting 
rail-ends, having a portion of the web thick 
ened to the width of the tread, one end pro 
vided with a notch formed by slits extending 
from the edges of the tread to a central open 
ing at a distance from the end of the rail, and 
the other rail-end having a tenon symmetri 
cally tapered to fill said notch, its apex pro 
vided with an enlargement corresponding in 
outline, but smaller than, the central open 
ing in the other rail, said notch and opening 
extending from the tread through the foot of 
the rail, substantially as described. . 
In testimony whereof. I have hereunto set 
my hand and affixed my seal in presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
. 
. 
HENRY H. FIFIELD. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. P. JoHNSON, 
J. W. SANDERS. 
35. 
. 
45 
perature, provides a joint which renders the 
two rails practically a unit, so far as wear, 
smooth travel, and strength are regarded. 
What claimis 
1. A rail-joint consisting of a symmetrically 
tapered, wedge-shaped tenon on the end of one 
rail, adapted to enter and fill a notch formed 
byslitting the end of the abutting rail in con 
verging lines, said tenon having an enlarge 
ment at its apex, or extremity, adapted to lie 
in an opening at the point of the notch in the 
other rail, substantially as described. 
2. A rail-joint consisting of a symmetrically 
tapered, wedge-shaped tenon having an en 
largement at its apex adapted to enter and 
fill a notch in the end of the abutting rail 
formed by converging slits extending from 
the edges of the tread through a thickened 
part of the web and through the foot, said 
notch having an opening at its point to re 
ceive the enlargement on the end of the tenon, 
substantially as described. 
meeting 
rail-ends, having a portion of the web thick 
ened to the width of the tread, one end pro- i 
vided with a notch formed by slits extending 
3. A rail-joint consisting of two 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527467.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. TRAINER, 
REED ORGAN, 
 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 527,467, 
Patented 0ct, 16, 1894, 
S.y 
 
O. 2 2 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
/ 
N 
N 
se 
S. 
res 
a-2227-zz e? 
 
(No Model.) 
J. W. TRAINER, 
REED ORGAN. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 527,467, 
Patented 0ct, 16, 1894, 
2222222222222222222 
\ N 
N 
N N N 
N N 
2N 
Ze/z7z esses 
52 . 
. 
. 
Zzzz/e7ZZor 
.", 
NORRIS Peters co, Photo-l'Ho, washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. TRAINER, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA 
REED ORGAN 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,467, dated October 16, 1894. 
Application filed July 6, 1894, Serial No. 516,744 (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHNW. TRAINER, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Fort 
Wayne, in the county of Allen and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Reed-Organs; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
reed organs; and it has for its general object 
to provide a pedal bass attachment for such 
Organs embodying a bellows, exhausters 
I5 therefor, a pumping apparatus, a series of 
sub-bass reeds and foot keys, &c.; the said 
attachment being adapted to be placed un 
der any ordinary reed organ and the exhaus 
ters of the bellows being so arranged that 
their straps may be readily connected with 
the pedal straps of the organ without the em 
ployment of skilled labor, in order that the 
bellows and exhausters of the organ as well 
as the bellows and exhausters of the bass at 
tachment may be worked through the medium 
of the pumping apparatus of said attachment. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will be fully understood from the follow 
ing description and claims when taken in con 
nection with theannexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1, is a vertical, sectional view of a 
portion of a reed organ with my attachment 
under and connected with the same. Fig. 2, 
is a detail, plan view of a portion of the at 
tachment, and Fig. 3, is a plan view of the 
attachment casing. 
Referring by letter to the said drawings: A, 
indicates an ordinary reed organ embodying 
the usual bellows B. 
C, indicates exhausters; D, pedals; E, straps 
connecting the pedals and exhausters; and 
F, indicates the casing of my improved at 
tachment which is preferably of the propor 
tional height illustrated in Fig. 1, and of the 
45 configuration in plan shown in Fig. 3, so as 
to conform to the ordinary organ case. The 
said casing F, is provided in its forward por 
tion with a horizontal reed board G, having 
a series of apertures C; and on this board 
So and over the apertures a, are arranged a se 
ries of thirty (more or less) reed cells H, in 
which are placed a corresponding number of 
35 
3O 
sub bass reeds I, which are caused to speak 
when the valves J, are opened as will be pres 
ently described. The valves J, which cor- S5 
respond in number to the reed cells and reeds, 
are arranged below the board G, and they are 
backed and held normally closed by springs 
as b, and are provided at their forward ends 
with vertically-disposed pins c, which extend 6o 
loosely through the board G, and are pro 
vided with collars or enlargements d, for a 
purpose presently described. 
K, indicates the foot or pedal keys of my 
attachment. These keys K, are suitably 65 
mounted in a frame R, in alignment with 
their respective valves J, as shown, and they 
are provided at their inner ends with bifur 
cations or slots b', to engage the pins c, of the 
valves whereby it will be seen that while 
they will serve, when depressed, to open the 
valves J, they may be readily disconnected 
from the pins c, by drawing them outwardly 
or a Way from said pins. The said keys K, 
may also be as readily placed in engagement 75 
With the pins c, it being simply necessary to 
arrange them in alignment with the pins and 
push them toward said pins until their bifur 
cations or slots engage the same above the 
collars or enlargements d, as illustrated. 
Communicating with the chamber L, 
formed beneath the reed cells by the reed 
board G, and the bottom of the casing F, is 
the bellows M, of my improved attachment. 
This bellows M may be of the ordinary or 
any approved construction and it is arranged 
in the rear portion of the casing F, and is 
provided upon its upper side with the ex 
hausters N. These exhausters N, are hinged 
or flexibly connected to the bellows M, as 
shown at e, and they are provided with straps 
as P, which are designed to be connected with 
the straps E, of the organ in a manner pres 
ently described. The said exhausters N, are 
also provided on their upper sides with bear 
ings as f, (see Fig. 2,) and in these bearings 
are journaled the ends of the bail g, to which 
is connected the crankarmh, of the exhauster 
operating rock shaft Q. This rock-shaft Q, 
is journaled in the side walls of the casing F, Ioo 
above the exhausters N, as better shown in 
Fig. 2, and it has one of its ends extended 
through the wall of the casing and provided 
with a crank handle R', whereby it will be 
95 
 
- 
2 
527,467 
O 
Seen that the exhausters N., may be conven 
iently operated by a person stationed at the 
side of the organ. The bail g, intermediate 
of the crank arm h, of the shaft Q, and the 
exhausters, is designed and adapted to pre 
vent binding of the parts as the exhauster's 
are opened and closed. 
In order to connect the exhausters of my 
improved attachment with those of the Organ, 
it is simply necessary, after the organ has 
been placed upon the attachment, to suitably 
connect the straps P, of the exhausters N, 
with the straps E, of the exhausters C, as shown 
at S, in Fig.1. In doing this however, care 
must be taken to have the exhausters of the 
attachment expanded or open and the ex 
hausters of the organ collapsed or closed or 
vice versa, in order that when the rock shaft 
Q, of the pumping apparatus is rocked in one 
direction, the exhausters N, will be opened 
and the exhausters C, closed, while when said 
shaft is rocked in the opposite direction, the 
exhausters N, will be closed and the exhaus 
ters C, opened. Thus it will be seen that by 
simply connecting the straps P, and E, the 
bellows and exhausters of both organ and 
attachment may be worked, through the me 
dium of the pumping apparatus of the latter, 
by a person stationed at the side of the or 
gan, and the organist may use his feet to de 
press the keys K, and give voice to the sub 
bass set of reeds. 
The pedal frame R., of my improved at 
tachment is preferably of the form shown in 
Fig. 1, and it has its side contiguous to the 
casing F, open for the passage of the bifur 
cated ends of the keys K, which engage the 
pins c, as before described, and also has 
springs as S', which are connected to the keys 
and are designed to return the same to their 
normal position when they have been de 
pressed. By the provision of the pins c, and 
the keys having their ends slotted or bifur 
cated to engage the pins, it will be perceived 
that the keys can be detached from the said 
pins and the pedal action, by simply drawing 
the keys forwardly or away from the pins. 
The said keys may also be as readily con 
nected with the pedal action, it being simply 
necessary to place them so that each key will 
be in alignment with its respective pin c, and 
then push them toward the pins until their 
bifurcated ends engage said pins as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
The original cost of my improved attach 
ment is small as compared to the cost of an 
organ, and since no expense is entailed in at 
taching it to an ordinary reed organ, it will 
be seen that such an organ may be provided 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
With the attachment with but a slight ad 
dition to its original cost. It will also be ap 
preciated that my improved attachment is 
advantageous, even when it is not desired to 
use the Sub-bass set of reeds, inasmuch as it 
affords a means whereby the organ may be 
pumped by a person other than the organist. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The combination with a reed organ com 
prising a bellows, exhausters therefor, pedals 
and straps connecting the pedals and ex 
hausters, of the attachment arranged beneath 
the Organ and comprising a suitable casing, 
a Set of reeds and reed cells, a set of valves 
controlling the passage of air through the 
reed cells, a set of keys for operating said 
valves, a bellows, and exhausters connected 
with the bellows and having straps as P, 
adapted to be connected with the straps be 
tween the pedals and exhausters of the organ, 
whereby the exhausters of both organ and 
attachment may be operated by a common 
means, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination with a reed organ com 
prising a bellows, exhausters therefor, pedals, 
and the straps connecting the pedals and ex 
hausters; of the attachment arranged beneath 
the organ and comprising a suitable casing, 
a set of reeds, and reed cells, a set of valves 
controlling the passage of air through the 
reed cells, a set of keys for operating said 
Valves, a bellows, exhausters connected with 
the bellows and having straps as P, adapted 
to be connected with the straps between the 
pedals and exhausters of the organ, a rock 
shaft journaled in the casing and having one 
end extended through the same and also hav 
ing a handle on its extended end and a crank 
arm as h, and a suitable connection between 
the crank arm and the exhausters, Substan 
tially as specified. 
3. The combination with a casing as F, and 
a series of valves arranged therein and hav 
ing the pins c, provided with collars or en 
largements; of a frame as R, keys arranged 
therein and having one of their ends notched 
or bifurcated to engage the pins c, of the 
valves, and springs connecting the rear ends 
of the keys and the casing and adapted to 
return the keys to their normal position when 
they have been depressed, substantially as 
specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN W. TRAINER. 
Witnesses: 
A. S. BOND, 
PAUL F. KUHNE. 
IOO 
I IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527567.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 527,567, 
J, B, WALLACE. 
000K FOR GAS STOWES, &c. 
Patented Oct, 16, 1894, 
2 
 
 
  
  
  
 
& a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
a 2 SS 
--% 
2 
2 2 
44NS2. 
SS2S2 
(so c S. 
2 
w 
 
28-tv coccy 
22:7 w 
841-121-bov 
364 &etovovira 
K5 %- 
"2%-ev646 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JACOB B. WALLACE, OF ERIE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
coCK FOR GAS-STOVES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,567, dated October 16, 1894. 
Application filed February 8, 1894, Serial No. 499,546. (No model.) 
 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB B. WALLACE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Erie, 
in the county of Erie and State of Pennsyl 
Vania, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Cocks for Gas-Stoves; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to cocks for gas 
stoves, and consists in certain improvements 
in the construction thereof as will be here 
inafter fully described and pointed out in the 
claims. 
Figure 1 is a horizontal section of the cock 
on the line 1-1 in Fig. 3. Fig. 2 is a plan of 
the top of the adjusting cock, showing the 
registering dial. Fig. 3 is a vertical section 
On the line 3-3 in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is an en 
larged section of the adjusting cock plug the 
line of section being the same as in Fig. 1. 
A marks the body of the cock; A' A', the 
Ordinary connection fittings thereon; a, the 
Way leading through the cock body; B, the 
plug of the controlling cock; B', its handle; 
b, the Way through said plug; C, the plug of 
an adjusting cock, preferably placed between 
the controlling cock and the mixer, and Ethe 
In gas stoves it is desirable that the cock 
have an accurately and positively ascertain 
able variable capacity. The capacity of the 
Ordinary cock, or valve, can be readily varied 
by turning them full on or only partly on, 
but it is difficult to make any number of these 
so accurately alike that a given predetermined 
movement of any one of the cocks will have 
the same effect upon the flow through the 
cock that the same movement would have 
upon the flow through any of the other cocks. 
Of course each cock can be tested and the 
position of the plug or valve for each ca 
pacity registered so that the capacity of the 
COck at each position can be ascertained with 
out noting the effect of the flow through it, 
but such a test would be too expensive for 
the uses to which these cocks are ordinarily 
put. A cock, the capacity of which can be 
readily ascertained without such a test is 
particularly desirable in connection with gas 
burners, especially in gas stoves where natu 
mixer. 
-- 
> 
ral gas is used, as it is seldom that the gas 
: pressures at any two different sections of 
country are the same, and as the burners and 
mixers are designed for a certain volume of 
gas, so that where the pressure is greater a 
smaller capacity of cock is desirable and vice 
versa, and an inexperienced person can, with 
a cock so made and instructions as to the ca 
pacity desired for a certain pressure, prop 
erly adjust the cock for the best results. 
To make a cock having the hereinbefore 
desired qualities, I make the cock plug, C, 
preferably with an internal cavity, C, there 
in, and perforate it with a series of ways, c, 
of the various sizes desired, preferably in 
At the rear of the plug and 
regular rotation. 
at the opposite side from the perforation or 
ways, c, is cut the elongated way, c, which 
opens into the Way, a, of the cock body, and 
is of such circumferential length that it is 
open to the way, a, whenever any of the ways, 
c, are open to the Way, Cl, in front of the plug. 
This construction is particularly, desirable 
wherever it is desired that the gas should be 
ejected in the form of a fine jet into a mixer, 
as it has been found that better results are 
obtained with a smaller jet at greater press. 
ure than with a larger jet at less pressure. 
Where an ordinary plug is used having but 
one straight Way, as shown in the drawings, 
plug, B, and way, b, of the controlling cock, 
and it is desired to use less than the entire 
capacity of the cock, the cockplug is turned 
slightly, so that the passage, b, is at a slight 
angle to the passage, d, and the gas, as it 
comes from the way, a, is first reduced at 
the cock side of the plug and then again at 
the mixer side of the plug so that the force of 
the jet is very much reduced and its injector 
force broken. With a plug constructed 
in accordance with my invention, by reason 
of the elongated way, c, and the internal 
cavity, C, there is but one reduction, and 
the small or reduced way (c) is so short that 
the friction and loss of pressure are reduced 
to a minimum, and where the regulating is 
accomplished (as shown) by means of a series 
of ways of different sizes opening into an 
enlarged Way at the opposite side of the plug, 
the jet leaves the plug in a direct line with 
the way, a, and enters the mixer, if the plug 
is in close proximity to it, in an unbroken 
O 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
. 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
527,567 
 
column with substantially the initial pressure 
of the gas. 
In order that the capacity of the cock may 
be readily ascertainable I place indicating 
5 marks on the cock plug, c', and the cock body, 
a'. If the ordinary plug is used these marks 
will have to be placed by means of a test. 
Where they are placed on a plug of my im 
proved construction, the marks, c', are pref 
to erably placed directly over the ways, c, and 
the mark, a', over the way, Cl, so that it can 
be ascertained at a glance which of the ways, 
c, is open to the way, a, and the cock regul 
lated accordingly. 
15 The features hereinbefore described are es 
pecially designed to be used simply for ad 
justing or auxiliary cocks in connection with 
a shut-off or controlling cock, and I prefer 
that the adjusting cock be placed between 
2 o the controlling cock and the mixer or burner, 
as shown, in order that the reduction of the 
flow may be as near the outlet as possible so 
as to obtain a greater force for the jet, and I 
also prefer that it have no handle, and be 
25 turned simply by a slot, C, the intention be 
ing that the position of the adjusting cock 
should be practically permanent after once 
adjusted to the pressure. 
What I claim as new is 
1. In combination with a fuel gas burner, 
and the mixer therefor; of a cock placed in 
the gas Way and in close proximity to the 
mixer, the way in the plug of which is so en 
larged in the cock side of the plug as to be in 
35 full register with the cock way throughout 
the regulating movement of said plug. 
2. In combination with a fuel gas burner, 
and the mixer therefor; of a cock placed in 
the gas way in close proximity to the mixer, 
the plug of which has a series of ways of differ 
ent sizes adapted to be brought one at a time 
into direct line with the gas way in the cock 
body. 
3. In combination with a fuel gas burner, 
and the mixer therefor; of a cock placed in 45 
the gas Way in close proximity to said mixer, 
the plug of which has a series of regulating 
Ways at one side of the plug, said ways being 
of different sizes and adapted to be brought 
into register with the gas way of the cock 5o 
body one at a time, and all of said ways lead 
ing into an enlarged common way at the op 
posite side of the plug, which said common 
way registers with the way of the cock body 
When any one of the regulating ways is in 55 
register with said way in the cock body. 
4. In combination with a fuel gas burner, 
and the mixer therefor; of a cock placed in 
the gas way in close proximity to said mixer, 
the plug of which has a series of regulating 6o 
ways in the mixer side of said plug, said ways 
being of different sizes and adapted to be 
brought into register with the way leading to 
the mixer one at a time, and all of said ways 
leading into an enlarged common way in the 65 
cock side of said plug which said common way 
registers with the ways leading into the cock 
body when any one of the regulating ways 
i is in register with said way in the cock body 
leading to the mixer. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JACOB B. WALLACE. 
7o 
Witnesses: 
WM. MARKS, Jr., 
H. C. LORD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527668.txt	(No Model.) 
J. C. COWDRICK. 
RAI, WAY RAI TIE, 
. 
No. 527,668. 
Patented Oct. 16, 1894. 
 
 
  
   
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
 
 
 
2% Hell. 
2Zz NNF 
NNNN 
sEalatase 
Escalatas 
4, 
2a . . . 
2 222s 
N 
757-5 
fNVEWTOR 
Zasz 
2. % frozees 
/ 
ATTORNEYS. 
rHE NORRIS PETEAs co. Phoroutia, washinton, d.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESSE C. COWDRICK, OF OGDENSBURG, NEWJERSEY. 
RAILWAY-RAIL TIE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,668, dated October 16, 1894. 
Application filed April 4, 1894, Serial No. 506,319, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
parallel transverse cuts 11 in its upper face, 
Be it known that I, JESSEC. CoWDRICK, of whereby virtually two tongues 12 are formed, 
one at each side of the central opening 10, 
and the said tongues are pressed downward 
preferably on a curved line, as shown in Fig. 
2, bringing their upper faces below the plane 
of the upper face of the body of the tie. The 
rails B are adapted to be seated upon the 
tongues 12, as shown in Fig. 1, whereby the 
upper face of their flanges will be below the 
plane of the upper face of the body of the tie. 
At each side of the space between the tongues 
12 two or more apertures 13, are produced, 
and at each side of the said space, beween 
each set of tongues 12, a retaining shoe C, is 
adjustably located. The retaining shoe com 
prises a head section 14 and a shank section 
15. The shank section is provided with a 
longitudinal slot 16, and the shank is pro 
jected from the upper rear portion of the head 
section, as best shown in Fig. 4. The head 
section is therefore thicker than the shank, 
providing a shoulder 17 beneath that portion 
of the shank which connects with the head, 
and the free end of the head upon its upper 
surface is rendered more or less cylindrical, 
as shown at 18 in Fig. 4. 
The under faces of the heads of the retain 
ing shoes C, are adapted to bear upon the 
upper faces of the flanges of the rail, as illus 
trated in Fig. 1; and the shoulders 17 of the 
heads of the said retaining shoes engage with 
the side walls of the opening produced in 
the tie by the formation of the tongues 12, as 
is clearly shown in Fig. 1; and the shoes are 
held in engagement through the medium of 
bolts 19, which are passed through the slots. 
16 in the shanks of the shoes, through the 
apertures 13 in the tie, and through a con 
necting plate 20, located in engagement with 
the under face of the upper section of the tie, 
the said connecting plates being made to 
cross the tongues 12, as shown in Fig. 2, and 
to form a seat or bearing for the rails B be 
tween opposing tongues. The connecting 
plates 20 prevent rattling, since they form a 
firm bearing for the rails at that portion of 
their under surface where the tongues 12 do 
not engage, it being understood that the 
space between the cutsilin a tie corresponds 
ractically to the width of a rail at the base. 
The side walls of the openings produced by 
To all whom it may concern. 
Ogdensburg, in the county of Sussex and 
State of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Railway-Rail Ties, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
metallic ties for railway rails, and it has for 
its object to provide a metallic tie which may 
be substituted for the ordinary solid wood 
tie, and one by means of which the rails of a 
track may be kept in alignment as well as 
With a wooden tie. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a tie so constructed that the rail when 
located thereon will be prevented from rat 
tling, and to provide a fastening device which 
will hold the rail in its seat on the tie, under 
all circumstances. 
The invention consists in the novel construc 
tion and combination of the several parts, as 
will be hereinafter fully set forth and pointed 
out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section 
through the improved metallic tie, the section 
being taken essentially on the line 1-1 of 
Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a transverse section taken 
essentially on the line 2-2 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 
is a plan view of a portion of the metallic tie; 
and Fig. 4 is a perspective view of one of the 
fastening dogs employed in connection with 
the tie. 
In carrying out the invention the tie or 
sleeper A, is tubular and is constructed of 
steel, iron, or any suitable metallic substance. 
The Said sleeper or tie is made somewhat 
oval in cross section, approximating in shape 
or contour that of the ordinary sleeper or tie. 
The said metallic tie is provided with a slot 
10, extending from end to end thereof at about 
the central portion of its upper face, whereby 
the tie may yield under pressure to a certain 
extent, and is practically of the same elas 
ticity as a wooden tie. . 
At that point in the tie where the rails B 
are to cross it the tie is provided with two 
45 
 
55 - 
75 
95 
IOC 
527,668 
o 
65 
formed in the said upper surface of the tie 
at each side of the slot therein, which tongues 55 
are projected downward below the plane of . 
the upper surface of the tie, forming seats or 
bearings for the base of railway rails, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with a tubular metal 
lic railway tie having transverse cuts made 
in its upper face, forming opposing tongues, 
Which tongues are separated and downwardly 
curved forming seats for the reception of rails, 
of a connecting bar or plate extending trans 
versely across the opening between the 
tongues and above the inner ends of the lat 
ter, the said connecting bar being attached to 
the body of the tie, and retaining shoes adjust 
ably carried by the tie, one at each side of the 
central portion of the opening between each 
Set of said tongues, the said shoes comprising 
a shank adjustable upon the tie, and a head 
adapted for engagement with the flanges of 
the rails and likewise for engagement with 
the Walls of the said opening in the tie above 
the tongues, as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. The combination, with a tubular metal 
lic railway tie having transverse cuts made 
in its upper face, forming opposing tongues, 
Which tongues are separated and downwardly 
Curved, forming seats for the reception of 
rails, of a connecting bar or plate extending 
transversely across the opening between the 
tongues and above the inner ends of the lat 
ter, the said connecting bar being attached 
to the body of the tie, and retaining shoes 
carried by the tie, one at each side of the cen 
tral portion of the opening between each set 
of said tongues, the said shoes comprising a 
shank adjustable upon the tie and a head 
adapted for engagement with the flanges of 
the rails, and likewise for engagement with a 
Wall of the said opening in the tie above the 
tongues, and a brace bar carried by the shank 
of one of the retaining shoes and adapted to 
extend upwardly and inwardly over the open 
ing between two opposing tongues, the inner 
member of the said bar or plate being adapted 
for engagement with the outer surface of the 
rail at the junction of its head with its shank, 
substantially as shown and described. 
75 
JESSE C. COWDRICK. 
CO 
Witnesses: 
S. M. LAURENSE, 
H. C. GOULD. 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
the tongues prevent the rails from moving 
laterally, the retaining shoes prevent them 
from moving in an upwardly direction, while 
the connecting plates or bars 20 prevent them 
from moving in a downwardly direction ex 
cept sufficiently to provide a proper elasticity. 
Where the ties are used on a curve, a brace 
plate or bar D of angular construction is 
made to engage with the shank of the rail 
immediately beneath its head upon the outer 
face thereof, the said brace bar or plate being 
secured upon the shank of one of the retain. 
ing shoes through the medium of the same 
bolts which hold the shoes in place, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
A metallic tie or sleeper constructed as 
above set forth may be readily substituted 
for any Wooden sleeper, and may be gaged in 
equally as expeditious and convenient a 
manner, and the said sleepers or ties may be 
sent from the factory complete, with the re 
taining shoes loosely attached thereto. By 
this means but little time and labor are re 
quired to place the rails upon the ties and 
fasten them in place. In the event the old 
fish plates are employed, the lower flange or 
member of Said fish plates may be raised to 
receive the heads of the retaining screws 
when the plates happen to come opposite the 
shoes; out any form of fish plate may be em 
ployed, and either the fish plates may be 
adapted to the shoes or the shoes to the plates. 
The tie may be attached to bridge trestles, 
or other metallic structures by passing bolts 
through apertures 21 produced in the bottom 
of the ties; or when the ties are to be at 
tached to structures of wood, lag screws may 
be employed instead of bolts. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Eatent 
1. A railway tie formed of a tubular metal 
lic body having transverse cuts in its bearing 
face and a longitudinal slot joining the trans 
verse cuts, whereby opposite tongues are 
formed, said tongues being bent downward 
whereby their bearing faces are at a point 
below the plane of the upper face of the body 
of the tie, substantiallv as shown and for the 
urposes described. 
2. A tubular, metallic railway tie, provided 
with a slot extending through from end to 
end in its upper face, tongues transversely 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527769.txt	A. H. CHAPMAN, 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING BONES. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
Patented Oct. 23, 1894. 
 
(No. Model.) , 
No. 527,769, 
 
 
Witnesses. 
(No Model.) 
No. 527,769. 
A. H. CHAPMAN, 
MACHINE FOR OUTTING BONES. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
. 
Patented Oct. 23, 1894. 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
2 
NS 
3SS 
25 
- - 
2 N 
3&N M 
2SW, 
2SN 
2GSSNS 
% 2A 
2N. 
7 
n 
N-41 
- - - 
- 1 a 
Wy 
Y 
si- 
\ 
Y 
--- 
w 
, 
N/ 7 
S 
vyw 
- 2'- 
- 
- 
to 
\\ 
2. 
i. 
&n 
nv. 
1 
/ 
/ 
M 
w 
1 / 
1. 
a 
er t 
- 
N 
7 
- 
 
  
f 
223 
al APat 
A11412 
ESSSNisei 225 
Ss, as it 
2 filtraSNS 
s Y 
Z} S3LT 1/3 
A. 
A 
. 
 
griV 
term 
 
(No Model.) 
A. H. CHAPMAN. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING BONES. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 527,769, 
Patented Oct. 23, 1894. 
 
w 
fM 2SS 
  
 
  
As Sas 
firize, 3 2 SN S 
2 
Witnesses. 
&4 (202. 
A.: 7 4% t 
4 eazva? 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 527,769, 
 
A, H, CHAPMAN. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING BONES. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
- 
Patented Oct. 23, 1894. 
Witnesses. 
t 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT H. CHAPMAN, OF UPTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
MACHINE FOR cutti NG Bones. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,769, dated October 23, 1894. 
Application filed September 1, 1893, Serial No. 484,587, (No model.) 
O 
2 C. 
25 
fo all tufton, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ALBERT H. CHAPMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Up 
ton, in the county of Worcester and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Machine for Cutting Bones, of which the 
following, together with the accompanying 
drawings, is a specification sufficiently full, 
clear, and exact to enable persons skilled in 
the art to which this invention appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention relates to the construction 
and organization of mechanism in a machine 
for cutting or comminuting green bones for 
poultry food, and for similar purposes; the 
object of my present invention being to pro 
duce a simple and more convenient and effi 
cient mechanism for the purposes named; 
Which can be operated with comparative ease, 
either by power or hand, and maintained in 
proper condition for use with little attention, 
labor and expense; also, to provide a cutter 
of peculiar construction and adaptation for 
the Work, and to combine said cutter with its 
operating mechanism in a manner that will 
permit of its ready removal for sharpening 
or cleaning. 
Another object is to provide a presser op 
erating mechanism of peculiar construction 
for forcing the material upon the cutter, to 
combine the parts and gearing of said mech 
anism in a manner to give a more advan 
tageous, powerful and desirable feed action; 
and to mount the same in connection with 
the cylindrical hopper in a way that affords. 
35 elevation and tilting thereof, together with 
the elevation or tilting of the cylinder, and 
also permits the presser and its operating 
mechanism to swing laterally out of the way, 
Without detachment of parts, to facilitate 
charging the uncut materials into the hopper. 
These objects I attain by mechanism, con 
structed and operating as explained in the 
following description; the particular subject 
matter of my invention being hereinafter 
definitely specified in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front view. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical central section at line acac 
Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a plan view. Fig. 4 is a hori 
Zontal section showing, on a somewhat larger. 
Scale, the cutter-bed and a portion of the cut 
ter and bed-frame. Fig. 5 is a vertical sec 
tion through one side of the mechanism at 
the cutter-bed bearing. Fig.6 shows a top and 
side view of the cutter. Fig. 7 is a bottom 
view of the presser-plate. Fig. 8 is a side 
view showing the machine provided with a 
worm and worm-wheel devices for operating 
the feed-presser, and Fig. 9 is a plan view 
showing said worm mechanism, the fly-wheels 
being omitted. 
My improved bone-cutting machine com 
prises an upright cylindrical hopper, at the 
bottom of which there is a rotatable cutter of 
peculiar construction supported at its pe 
ripheral rim upon an annular horizontal revo 
luble cutter-bed that runs in a ring bearing 
on the bed-frame, and is provided with gear 
teeth into which are meshed the teeth of a 
beveled pinion (or pinions) fixed on an oper 
ating shaft (or shafts) mounted in a suitable 
bearing fixed to the bed-frame; which shaft 
is provided with a fly wheel and crank, or a 
hand-wheel, gear or suitable means for im 
parting power and motion to the machine. 
The cylinder or feed receptacle is supported 
above the cutter, preferably by a plate or 
frame that is hinged at its rear end to the bed 
frame so that the cylinder can be swung up 
ward and backward for releasing the cutter, 
and giving access to the cutter-bed and parts 
beneath. The cylinder has upon its exterior 
a bearing in which is supported a laterally 
swinging crane that projects upward and for 
ward over the cylinder and forms a guide and 
support for the vertically moving rack that 
carries the presser-plate, and for a pinion and 
hand-wheel mechanism for operating said 
presser. 
In accordance with my invention the sev 
eral parts of this mechanism are constructed 
and organized in the manner hereinafter more 
particularly described. 
Referring to parts, A denotes the cylinder 
consisting of an upright shell open at both its 
upper and lower ends, and provided on its in 
terior with inwardly projecting longitudinal 
ribs a. The cylinder is cast integral with, or 
attached to, a horizontal plate or frame A', 
the rear end of which is preferably hinged, 
as at b, to the bed-frame B, which latter is 
supported on suitable legs B that sustain the 
mechanism at proper heights from the floor. 
C indicates the cutter which is of circular 
45 
5o 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OG 
 
527,769 
7 o 
75 
85 
- 
form of substantially the same diameter as backward when in its raised position. The 
front end of the plate A' is retained when the 
the interior of the cylinder, and located with 
cylinder is in working position by means of a 
its working face within the lower end thereof. 
suitable latch or holding device at t. 
Said cutter is supported upon a ledged within 
The operating shaft F is mounted in a bear 
the central opening of the annular plate or 
ing fattached to the bed frame at the side of 
cutter-bed D, which is furnished with gear 
the machine. Said shaft carries a bevel pin 
teeth at its outer edge, and is mounted to. re 
ion F that meshes with the teeth on the upper 
volve in a bearing ring E formed in the bed 
side of the cutter-bed, and is provided at its 
frame B; the cutter-bed and the cylinder be 
outer end with a wheel H and crank h, or 
ing axially coincident with each other. The 
means for imparting power and motion to the 
supporting ledge d and the cutter-rim are 
mechanism. In the present instance the ma 
fitted with intermatching lugs and recesses, 
chine is shown with an operating shaft and 
as d", which cause the cutter to rotate with 
pinion at each side, but in any instance de 
the cutter-bed D. 
sired one shaft may be employed, the other 
The cutter consists of an integral perforated 
circular disk (see Fig. 6) having on its upper 
being omitted. 
I indicates a crane or goose-neck having its 
surface a series of projecting sharp-edged 
lower end journaled in an upright position 
teeth or ribs 5 that are disposed in approxi 
within a bearing J formed on the exterior of 
mately radiating order, but onlines that radi 
the cylinder A. The head of the crane I is 
ate from different points eccentric to the axis 
provided with an upright guide-way through 
of the disk. Perforations 6 are formed through 
which is arranged the rack K, carrying at its 
the plate in front of the cutting edges, as illus 
lower end the presser-plate M. A pinion N is 
trated, to allow the cut bone to pass through. 
mounted within the hollow of the crane-head 
The principal cutting ribs do not meet at the 
meshing with the toothed rack, and its shaft 
center of the disk, but a transversely disposed 
in projects through a bearing i at the side of 
cutting tooth or rib c is arranged with its edge 
the crane-head, and has on its outer end a 
at or upon the axis, as shown, which serves to 
hand-wheel or lever-head P by which said 
cut away the bone at the axis of rotation. The 
pinion can be readily operated for recipro 
working faces of the cutters are approxi 
cating the rack and presser-plate as desired. 
mately in the same plane, and the edges can 
When the presser-plateis raised above the top 
be readily sharpened by taking the disk from 
of the cylinder the crane I and parts sup 
the machine and grinding off the tops of the 
ported thereby can be swung laterally to one 
projecting ribs; which can be done by any per 
side, as indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 3, 
son and upon any ordinary grindstone. At the 
thus leaving the top of the cylinder free and 
periphery the cutter-diskis best provided with 
open to facilitate charging or cleaning the in 
a downwardly extended rim C for resting 
terior. The crane I is retained in its bearing 
upon the ledge d, and in said rim are formed 
J by an overlapping washer r secured to the 
the retaining recesses at d'. The cutter sim 
lower end of the journal, as in Fig. 2. If de 
ply rests upon the supporting ledged within 
sired said washer may be notched at one side 
the circle of the geared-bed D, without being 
and a stoplug engaged there with for limiting 
otherwise fastened thereto, and can readily 
the lateral swing of the crane I. 
be lifted out and replaced when the cylinder 
The presser-plate is fitted with notches 7 
is swung backward, as indicated by dotted 
at its edges that engage with the ribs a on the 
lines Fig. 2. 
interior of the cylinder, and its under sur 
The bearing ring E on the bed-frame B is 
face is furnished with a series of angular 
formed with a cylindrical bearing surface e 
ribs mo, the sharp edges of which are directed 
for the downwardly extended tubular portion 
in a manner to retain the bones in opposi 
of the cutter-bed, and with a flat bearing sur 
tion to the force and direction of the cutting 
face e' that supports the cutter-bed and mech 
devices. 
anism thereon. This flat bearing is best pro 
For power-driven machines, or in any in 
vided with an annular groove having a filling 
stance wherein a steady and powerful down 
of felt therein, as indicated at G (see Fig. 5) 
ward action of the feed-presser M is desired, 
for containing oil; thereby insuring proper 
the machine is best provided with a worm O, 
lubrication of the bearings. The opening 
worm-wheel P' and actuating devices such 
through the cutter-bed is approximately the 
as illustrated in Figs. 1, 8 and 9. The shaft 
same in diameter as the interior of the cylin 
in extends at the right of the pinion N and 
der Aless the width of the cutter-supporting 
crane-head I, and the worm-wheel P is ar 
ledged, thus affording ample space for the 
ranged loose on said shaft with a disengage 
discharge of the cut bone which can drop di 
able clutch R, adjacent thereto, which can be 
rectly from the cutting disk into a suitable re 
operated by a suitable hand-knob at its outer 
ceptacle placed beneath the central opening 
end, for clutching and unclutching said worm 
on the shelf S. 
wheel in its relation with the pinion-shaft n, 
The cylinder frame A' and the bed-piece B 
The worm O which meshes with the wheel P. 
are best provided or formed at their hinges 
for operating it, is arranged upon an arbor 
with protuberant portions or stops 3 that rest 
or shaft a mounted to turn in a bearing l 
against each other and sustain the cylinder 
supported upon the crane-head I, and having 
and parts connected therewith from falling 
95 
IOC 
To 5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
527,769 
5 
O 
. I5 
25 
35 
45 
. 
. 
at its front end a lever-head or hand-wheel 
P by which the mechanism can be conven 
iently actuated by the operator for depress 
ing the feed-presser M with a powerful ac 
tion when the clutch R is engaged. Then 
when the clutch is thrown off the worm-wheel 
is released from the shaft in and a quick re 
turn or lift of the presser can be effected by 
the wheel P. The clutch R is fitted to en 
gage with teeth on the worm-wheel when 
moved up to the same, and to be disengaged 
by moving it outward along the shaft, which 
can be easily done by taking hold of its outer 
end. 
In Fig. 3 the machine is illustrated as made 
without the worm-screw feed-operating de 
vices; while Fig. 9 shows a somewhat similar 
view of the machine with said worm-screw 
feed employed therein. 
In the Operation, the bone or material to 
be cut is placed in the cylinder A. The crane 
Iis swung forward bringing the presser mech 
anism into position over the same with its 
notches 7 in line with the internal ribs a. 
The presser is then depressed, by means of 
its rack K, pinion N and hand-wheel, P. forc 
ing the bones upon the cutter-disk C which 
is rotated with the cutter-bed gear by the 
pinion, operating shaft and wheel. The cut 
ter operates across the entire interior area of 
the cylinder-end cutting the bone at what 
ever position it may be presented, and de 
livering the cutor comminuted thaterial di 
rectly downward as fast as produced, and si 
multaneously Working over the whole face of 
the cutter-disk; while the operator with his 
hand on the wheel P, or lever P, can move 
the presser M so as to regulate the force of 
the feed as he may desire. The bones be 
ing held by the sharp angular ribs of the 
presser-plate, in opposition to the cutting ribs 
of the cutter-disk, are maintained in position 
and forced upon the cutting edges in a man 
ner that insures rapid and easy disintegra 
tion of their substance. 
With a cutter of the construction and na 
ture above described there are no detachable 
blades to require frequent adjustment; and 
no liability of cutters becoming loose or dis 
placed. The entire working face being of 
cutting angles, the material to be cut rests 
only upon the sharp cutting edges, and is not 
supported upon a flat portion of plate as in 
previous practice. Hence it offers no fric 
tion and resistance to the operating power of 
the machine other than that required for the 
actual cutting of the bone or material. This 
is a feature of importance and utility in the 
working of the mechanism. This style of 
cutter also acts to comminute the bone into 
fine granules or scrapings rather than into 
coarse chips. 
By constructing and arranging the cutter 
bed and the ring bearing in the manner 
shown, the bone or material comes into con 
tact only with the interior tubular opening 
of the cutter-bed, and the bearing joint is 
, 
, 
- 
protected so that the fine bone chips cannot 
get between the bearing surfaces e e' and 
thereby clog the mechanism or interfere with 
the free running of the parts. This feature 
is of much importance in machines for the 
purpose named. 
The tipping of the cylinder greatly facili 
tates the removal, from the cutter, of shreds 
of tough fiber and tendons, which do not be 
come cut with the bone, but are drawn out 
by the cutters and accumulate above them. 
The employment, in a cutting machine, of 
a revolubly geared plate, carrying diversely 
arranged cutters attached thereto, in combi 
nation with a cylindrical hopper or feed re 
ceptacle, is a feature that, in different con 
structions, has long been public and well 
known. It will therefore be understood that 
I do not include such feature, broadly, as of 
my invention; but that my claims refer to 
specific construction and arrangement sub 
stantially such as defined. 
What I claim as of my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The hopper-cylinder having a rigidly 
attached support-plate, said support-plate 
hinged at one end to the bed-frame to swing 
upward and backward, the hinged parts pro 
vided with engaging stops, as set forth, a lock 
ing device for retaining said plate and cylin 
der down in Working position, and a feed-forc 
ing presser-mechanism attached to said cyl 
inder; in combination with the bed-frame car 
rying the hinge-ear, the annular geared 'cut 
ter-bed revoluble in a ring-bearing on said 
bed-frame, and having a central opening with 
an annular ledge, and the cutter-disk sup 
ported on said ledge with its top projecting 
upward within and surrounded by the lower 
end of said cylinder, all substantially as set 
- 2. The laterally swinging crane having its 
lowerendjournaled in a bearing formed upon 
the feed-cylinder top, the vertically sliding 
toothed rack guided within the crane-head, 
and carrying the presser-plate, the pinion N 
having a shaft in supported in a bearing on 
the crane-head, and the hand-wheel P fixed 
on said shaft, for operating said pinion and 
rack, in combination with the feed-cylinder, 
and cutting mechanism at the bottom of said 
cylinder, as set forth. 
3. The cutter for the purpose specified, 
formed in a single piece consisting of a disk 
provided upon its face with a series of inte 
gral upwardly projecting ribs with sharp an 
gular edges, and having slots or openings 
through the disk at the front of said ribs, and a 
peripheral rim provided with lugs or notches 
for sustaining said cutter in rotative action, 
as set forth. 
4. In a machine for cutting bones, the bed 
frame having the ring-bearing fitted with ver 
tical and horizontal bearing surfaces e e' the 
latter having an annular groove and packing 
G therein, and the annular rotatable cutter. 
bed having the central opening and down 
forth. 
- 
75 
90 
95. 
Io J 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
55 
 
527,769 
O 
bearing, its chambered head provided with a 
wardly extended tubular portion fitted with 
exterior bearing surfaces corresponding to vertical guide-way and projecting bearing 
sleeves, the feed-presser non-rotatably con 
said ring-bearing, supported on and covering 
fined within said hopper-cylinder, the recip 
the same, in combination with the cutter sup 
rocating rack carrying said feed - presser 35 
ported on said cutter-bed, the feed cylinder, 
mounted in said guide-way, the pinion-shaft 
presser mechanism, and means for operating 
mounted in the projecting bearing and carry 
said cutter bed. 
ing the presser-actuatingpinion fixed thereon, 
5. In a machine for cutting bones, in com 
the hand-lever-wheel fixed on the outer end 
bination substantially, as described, the rev 
of said shaft, the worm-wheel mounted loose 
oluble cutter-bed, the cutters, the hopper cyl 
on said shaft with the knob-handled engag 
inder having the upright bearing formed on 
ing-clutch connecting the shaft and worm 
its exterior, the laterally swinging crane jour 
wheel, the worm-screw meshing with said, " 
naled in said bearing and having a hollow 
worm-wheel, and the hand-operating-wheel 
head with upright guide-way, a lateral, and 
fixed on the front end of the worm-arbor, for 45 
a forwardly projecting bearing-hub thereon, 
the purposes set forth. 
the reciprocating feed-presser and its rack 
7. In a bone-cutting machine, a feed-hop 
supported in said guide-way, the pinion mesh 
per having an upright bearing formed upon 
ing therewith within the crane-head, the pin 
the exterior of its cylindrical rim, and the 
ion-shaft extending through said lateral bear 
overhanging crane having its standard end 
ing hub, the worm-wheel mounted on said 
journaled within said bearing, as set forth, in 
shaft, the worm-screw operating said worm 
combination with feed-forcing appliances car 
wheel, and the hand-wheel on the worm-screw 
ried on said crane, and the cutting mechan 
arbor, for the purposes set forth. 
ism beneath said hopper. 
6. A bone-cutting-machine, comprising, in 
Witness my hand this 19th day of August, 55 
combination substantially as described, the 
A. D. 1893. 
supporting-bed, the revoluble cutter-bed car 
rying a cutter, the hopper-cylinder surmount 
ing the bed and cutting devices, and having 
the upright bearing formed on its rim, the 
laterally swinging crane journaled in said 
CHAS. H. BURLEIGH, 
ELLA. P. BLENUS.. 
3O 
ALBERT H. CHAPMAN. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527869.txt	P. MAUSER. 
MAGAZINE FOR BREECH LOADING FIREARMS. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 527,869, 
Patented Oct, 23, 1894. 
2 
SS 
S. 
?ST-No.STINo. 
 
 
 
 
py/rwa SSAS : 
Ayya Ayfeva: 
P. MAUSER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MAGAZINE FOR BREECH L0ADING FIRE ARMS 
Patented Oct. 23, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 527,869, 
 
RILI 
   
  
 
 
? ? 
2????????? 
py/7/vassas: 
AAW vacay voa 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL MAUSER, OF OBERNDORF, GERMANY. 
MAGAZINE FOR BREECH-LOADING FREARMs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,869, dated October 28, 1894. 
Application filed. September 15, 1893, -Serial No. 485,603, (No model.) Patented in Germany July 8, 1893, No. 74,63; in Bel 
gium July 31, 1893, No. 105,890 in France August 1, 1893, No. 23i,904 in England August 12, 1893, No. 15,390; in 
Italy August 12, 1893, No. 34,642/84; in Switzerland August 15, 1893, No. 7,276 in Spain September 30, 1893, No. 14,582 
and in Austria-Hungary January 23, 1894, No. 41,426 and No. 70,284, 
. 
. 2d 
. . 
 
O 
. . , a 
"; , 
. . 
. 
. 
- 
. 
... . . . 
. . 
6o 
. . . . 
from the latter. Fig. 5 is a fragmentary lon, 5o 
To all whom it may concern: 
. 
gitudinal section, partly in elevation, of the 
... Beit known that I, PAUL MAUSER, a sub 
ject of the German Emperor, and a resident 
lock portion of a gun, showing the shape of 
the magazine when intended for cartridges 
of Oberndorf am Neckar, in the Kingdom of 
having projecting bottom-rims, and showing 
5 Wirtemberg, German Empire, have inverted, 
a modified construction of the locking device 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Fixed Magazines for Breech-Loading Bolt 
of the bottom-plate differing from that shown 55 
Guns, of which the following is a specification. 
in Fig 1. Fig.6 is an axial section of the 
trigger-guard shown in Fig. 5 removed. Fig. 
This invention is the subject matter of Let 
: a plan of a bottom plate and its bolt of 
ters. Patent in Germany, No. 74,163, dated 
econstruction shown in Fig. 5. 
July 8, 1893; in Great Britain, No. 1539 
Referring to the drawings, leth indicate 
dated August 12, 1893; in France, No. 231,90. 
ereceiver; A, the head thereof; B, the open 
dated August 1, 1893; in Belgium, No. 105,899 
gthereof; C, the magazine opening thereof; 
dated July 31, 1893; in Austria-Hungary, No. 
41,426 and No. 70,284, dated January 23, 
the bolt;k', the head thereof; a, the maga 
zine; b, the cartridge-carrying plate thereof; 
in Italy, No. 34,642/84, dated August 
in Spain, No. 14,582, dated September 30, 
c, the bottom plate thereof; f, the spring 
thereof, and 2 the trigger-guard. 
and in Switzerland, No. 7,276, dated August 
... According to my invention the magazine a 
. 
15, 1893. . 
is made in one piece With the trigger-guard . 
My invention relates to those breech-load 
ing bolt-guns which are provided, under the 
a, and from top to bottom is of the same in- 7o 
cartridge rest, with a cartridge magazine, 
side width, without lateral springs, ribs, pro 
jections or indentations. The frontportionis 
which is made in one piece with the trigger 
narrower than the rear portion, but through 
guard and permanently fixed to the gun, such 
out it is wider than a single cartridge, so as 
2 5 as shown in my Letters Patent. No. 490,029, 
to give room for a plurality of rows of car 
dated January 17, 1893, and its object is to 
tridges side by side but of different eleva 
simplify the construction of the magazine 
tion, as heretofore. The magazine is, as is 
and the parts connected to it, and to obtain 
usually done with the trigger-guard alone, . 
certain other advantages derived from the 
screwed to the receiver case h, so as to fit 
. 
snugly to its under side. The inner space 
To this end in carrying out my present in 
of the magazine goes into the opening C of 
vention Iprovide certainimprovements which 
the under side of the receiver h, which open 
will be hereinafter fully set forth. 
ing narrows from its front toward its rear in 
... Theinventionis EE to various styles 
curved lines from both sides in such manner 
but I will illus 
that only one cartridge at a time can pass 
trate and describe it for an example as ap 
into the cartridge-rest as heretofore. 
plied to that particular type of gun which is 
The side walls of the magazine opening C 
known as the Mauser' gun. . . . 
In the accompanying drawings, Figurelis a 
are broadest at their forward ends to permit 
the rising of the cartridge between them as 
fragmentary side elevation of the lockportion 
it is forced forward, and are drawn inwardly 
of a Mauser gun in the opened state and 
toward their rear ends forming overhanging 
partly invertical axial section. The maga 
shoulders g g which engage and retain the 
zine shown is intended only for cartridges 
uppermost cartridge. These shoulders are 
having no projecting bottom-rim. Fig. 2 is 
disposed relatively to the cartridges to so em 
a vertical cross-section of the gun, cut on the 
line 2-2 of Fig.1, and showing the magazine 
brace the uppermost thereof that it cannot 9 
rise past the shoulder engaging it and through 
: "... empty. Fig. 3 is an axial section of the trig: 
... ger-guard removed. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the opening C, until it has been pushed for 
the bottom-plate of the magazine removed ward to the wide front part of the opening. 
35 of breech-loading boltgun 
3o new construction. 
40 
. 
. 
. 
75 
truly 90 
. 
. 
. 
. 
'V 
. 
 
. 
. 
. 
The, magazine a is closed at its lower side 
by a separate removable plate or bottom, as 
represented in the drawings and described 
hereinafter. 
For causing the cartridges to ascend they 
5 are arranged upon a carrier or plate b corre. 
sponding to the interior space of the maga 
The said carrier b is under the action, 
Zae, 
of an underlying springfmade zigzag-shaped 
Io of one piece of suitably bent steel band. As 
usual the carrier b is provided on its upper 
face out of its middle with an elevation, or a 
longitudinal rib, b', which supports the last 
but one of the lower cartridges D, and keeps 
the last one in its correct position. The up 
permost cartridge is situated in the arched 
and suitably shaped space Ebelow the open 
ing C in the under side of the receiver h...At 
one time the uppermost cartridge is at the 
left side of this space, and when this one is 
removed the following cartridge becomes the 
uppermost one, which is then at the right 
hand side of this space. The uppermost 
cartridge is the only one engaged by the bolt, 
25. When the cartridge is shoved forward by 
... the bolt k the point of its projectile is 
forced against the peculiarly hollowed out 
and rounded lower portion h of the boring 
of the head A of the receiver h, Fig. 1, and 
3o it is caused to ascend thereby through the 
case opening B, and comes sugeessively more 
and more into the axis of the barrel until 
it attains lastly the normal position. The 
headh of the bolt his furnished on its under 
side with side-projections kito enable the 
35 bolt-headh' to catch unfailingly the cartridge 
lying alternately to the right or the left in 
front of it. The said projections it work 
during the longitudinal movement of the 
bolt lc in corresponding grooves of the case 
h, and traverse the magazine opening C. 
In case the rear end of the ribb'-of the 
carrier b is made blunt, as shown in Fig.1 in 
full lines, the boltic cannot be pushed for 
ward when the last cartridge has been fired 
and the bolt drawn back. Thus therib serves. 
as a stop for the bolt when the magazine is 
empty as formerly. This will be an admo 
nition that the magazine is empty and should 
be refilled. If that is not desirable, the rib. 
b'may be rounded at the end, as shown in 
Fig.1 in dotted lines, to permit free passage 
of the bolt, 
In the drawing the spring fis shown as se 
55 cured with its ends passed under suitable 
projections ac on the carrier b, and like pro 
jections y on the bottom-platec; but it may, 
. 
... if desired, be fastened to these parts in any 
other convenient way, or beinterposed loosely 
6o but the construction shown is considered the 
... The magazinea is shut below by a remov 
able bottom c. Figs, 1 to 4 show the construc 
tion arranged for removing it without any 
55 tool other than by means of the projectile of 
a cartridge. The bottom-plate cis furnished 
on the front and on the rear end with hook 
5ope. 
bestone. 
45 
40 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
- 
. 
a 
. 
. 
/ 
shaped lugs-rrentering in corresponding: 
groovess's in the body of the trigger-guard 
g when the bottom c is pushed forward. 70 
Thereafter a vertical snap-boltic' situated in 
a boringt of the trigger-guard 2 and acted 
upon by a spring enters in a corresponding 
hole u in the rear part of the bottom c and 
secures the latter in its position. For remov-75 
ing the bottom c. the boltre' is pressed up 
ward by the point of the projectile of a ear 
tridge, and simultaneously the bottom c is 
drawn backwards, for which purpose sufficient 
space is provided at its rear in the trigger-8c. 
guard, until the hook-shaped lugs rleave their 
grooves s, whereupon the bottom may be re 
moved. 
. 
The last described construction cannot be 
tused for inclined magazines for cartridges. 
with projecting rims, as there is no roomfors 
the snap-bolt c.. For such magazines the ar 
rangement shown in Figs, 5, 6 and 7 is. con 
sidered a superior one, which may be also 
used for straight: magazines instead of that go 
above described. The bottom, here lettered 
, c, fits with a projection r", on its rear endin , 
a recess s' of the trigger-guard, here lettered 
2, and with a chamfered hook ron its front 
end, over a plate c sliding in and guided by 95 
a groove it on the under side of the trigger: 
guard 2', which plate is actuated by a spring 
v. The plate cis forced forward by the hook 
ir as the bottom c is pressed home, whereupon . 
. 
the plate c' snaps back under the hooks and too 
holds the bottom c. in its shutposition. For 
removing the bottom c. the plate cispushed 
forward by the point of the projectile of a 
cartridge inserted in an indentation conthe. 
under side of the plate c until the hook is re 
leased, when the bottom c. may be taken off. 
After having thus described this invention : 
as applied to the "Mauser gin' any expert 
in fire-arms will be in the position to apply . 
the invention to bolt-guns of other styles. 
It will be seen that this invention is an im 
proved magazine for breech-loading bolt guns. 
which can be variously availed of, and it will 
be understood that the invention is not lim 
ited to the precise details of construction and E15. 
arrangement set forth and shown, as these, 
may be modified in such respects as circum." 
stances or the judgment of those skilled in 
the art may dictate, without departing from 
the essential features of the invention. , 
What I claimis, inbreech-loading bolt-guns, 
the following defined novel features, substan 
tially as hereinbefore specified, namely 
1. In a breech-loading boltgun, the receiver, . 
the magazine, and bolt, in combination with a .25 
trigger-guard consisting of a single integral 
piece of metal having the fixed cartridge. 
magazine a in its forward part, said guard 
having tipright walls surrounding said magar . 
. 
zine and seating at top against the under side 130 
of said receiver, said guard having grooves s 
at botto ind the bottomplate for said maga 
zine removably connected thereto, and having 
lugs r entering said grooves and retaining 
Io5. 
rao 
. 
o 
 
. 
 
527,869 
8 
and bolt, in combination with a magazine, a 
carrier plate therein having projections a on 
its underface, a removable bottom plate clos 
ing said magazine and having projections y 20 
on its upper face, and a leaf spring fin said 
magazine connected to said top plate by said 
projections a and to said bottomplate by said 
projection y, substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 25 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
PAUL MAUSER. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
". . 
5 
. . . . 
said plate in position on said magazine, and 
a snap catch carried by said guard and en 
gaging said plate for preventing separation 
of the latter. 
. 
2. In a breech-loading bolt gun, the receiver 
and bolt, in combination with a magazine a 
and a carrier plate b thereon having a ribb' 
on its upper face, and projections a on its 
under face, of a trigger-guard having said 
Io magazine formed in its forward part, a bot 
torn-plate c. closing said magazine, and hay 
ing projections y, and a leaf springfin said 
magazine connected to said bottom plate by 
said projections y and to said carrier plate by 
I5 said projections a substantially as set forth. 
3. In a breech-loading boltgun, the receiver 
Witnesses: 
EDWIN F. STEIN, 
S. B. STIFTER. 
w 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US527969.txt	 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FEUILLEN GRAND MONTAGNE, OF BRUSSELS, BELGIUM. 
PROCESS OF MANUFACTURING ARTIFICIAL MARBL ES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 527,969, dated October 23, 1894. 
Application filed May 16, 1894, serial No. 511,505, (No specimens.) Patented in Belgium June 9, 1892, No. 100,054, and 
July 18, 1892, No. 100,492; in France December 6, 1892, No. 226,209, and in England January 24, 1893, No. 1,582, 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, FEUILLEN GRAND MON 
TAGNE, manufacturer, of Brussels, in the 
Kingdom of Belgium, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in a new Process of 
Manufacturing Artificial Marbles, (for which 
no patent has been obtained in any country 
except in Belgium June 9, 1892, No. 100,054, 
and July 18, 1892, No. 100,492; in France 
December 6, 1892, No. 226,209, and in Eng 
land January 24, 1893, No. 1,582,) of which 
the following is a specification. 
The present invention has for its object the 
manufacture of artificial marbles in the form 
of plates, slabs or blocks of all dimensions 
and thicknesses, traversed by veining and 
coloring-of the marble it is desired to imi 
tate-extending right, through the material 
in such a manner that the entire mass will 
have the appearance of the natural marble, 
exactly as it occurs in nature. To obtain 
this result, I employ well known cements, and 
in particular cements which are perfectly 
White such as magnesian cements composed 
of magnesia and chloride of magnesium; cem 
ents of silicate of aluminia and of lime; Eng 
lish cements known under the name of Keen's 
cement, &c. I may also employ colored cem 
ents such as Portland cements, or cements 
made of slag, but only for certain highly col 
ored marbles. However none of these cem 
ents has the hardness and resonance required 
to enable them to imitate the natural mar 
bles, and it is for this reason that with the 
eXception of the magnesian cements which 
are employed as they are, all the other cem 
ents must be treated in a special manner. 
Instead of simply tempering the cements with 
Water only, I temper them with an acid solu 
tion of sulfate of zinc or of other metal 
suitable for the ground color of the marble 
to be produced. The solution should be of 
greater concentration the greater the degree 
of hardness desired. 
In practice the solution lies between ten 
and twenty per cent, and the amount of me 
tallic oxide mixed with the sulfuric acid 
varies according to the shade it is desired to 
produce. For certain marbles, instead of the 
sulfuric acid is employed hydrochloric acid 
which is used in the same manner. The dry 
cement is tempered with the metallic solu 
- 
The mode of manufacture varies accord 55 
tion to the consistency required for working 
the marble. 
ing to the nature of the marble it is desired 
to produce, and also according to whether the 
marble is merely mottled or veined. In the 
first case the cement formed into a paste is 
divided into as many portions as there are 6o 
shades of color in the marble to be produced, 
and each of these portions is colored accord. 
ingly. The artist then mingles these differ 
ent portions of paste in such a manner as 
to produce the desired effect, and he spreads 65 
all these portions in a suitable mold, arrang 
ing the colors together in accordance with 
the nature of the marble to be produced. 
If the marble to be produced is to be trav 
ersed by large veins, the mode of manufac- to 
ture is slightly modified. The various shades 
of color of the marble are prepared as above 
stated, but in a much more fluid condition. 
Further, the various colors of the veins are 
arranged in different vessels, and in these 75 
vessels the prepared colors may be mixed 
with a small quantity of cement so as to 
slightly thicken the thin pastes. Moreover 
long tresses or long skeins of silk are pre 
pared of various thicknesses varying from 8o 
single threads up to tresses of one centime 
ter and more. These tresses are first dipped 
in the metallic Solution hereinabove referred 
to, and are then immersed in the various col 
ors with which they are thoroughly impreg- 85 
nated. They are then arranged on the bot 
tom of the mold, and into the latter are 
poured the various portions of cement col 
ored as herein before described. When the 
mold has been filled in this way, all the silk go 
tresses are Withdrawn singly and in a verti 
cal manner, thereby producing in the paste 
cuts or fissures both sides or faces of which 
retain the color of the tresses, and which 
faces, when brought together by the pressure 
produced by the operation of the trowel em 
ployed to even the material in the mold, 
produce veinings that extend throughout the 
mass of the plate or slab. 
According to the subsequent use of the 
marble, I mix with the cement, while it is be 
ing tempered, various inert substances such 
as marble, alabaster, gypsum, silica, lime 
stone, &c, crushed to a powder of more or 
Co 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
IO 
So 
527,969 
O 
2 C. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
less fineness. These additions may vary be 
tween thirty and fifty per cent. of the cement 
used. This mode of manufacture allows of 
the production of partitioned work with or 
without metal borders or frames. In the 
former case I arrange on the bottom of the 
mold small strips of tin, copper or other 
soft metal so as to form the outlines of the 
design I wish to reproduce. Between these me 
tallic strips I arrange my various shades of 
cement prepared as above described, taking 
care to embed these strips completely in the 
cement. I then allow the cement to Set, and 
I thus obtain on the lower side or face of the 
plate or slab, the desired partitioned 
design. 
When the partitioned work is not to 
have any metallic outlines whether in the 
case of figures or of mosaics, I prepare a 
mold having in relief of suitable thickness 
the lines of the design to be produced. I 
then arrange between the Said projections 
the colored paste portions in Such a manner 
as to keep the colors exactly inside the pro 
jections in the mold. This mode of manu 
facture is also applicable to the production 
of decorative designs on a large Scale, bas 
reliefs, &c., on marble panels. For instance, 
any object, head, bust, statue or group may 
be molded in white marble on a ground of 
colored marble. A bas-relief consisting of 
any subject of white or colored marble may 
be molded on a marble ground of different 
color; also, base-plates, capitals, vases, &c., 
may be made of marble of different colors, 
all in one piece; also, by the same process, 
inscriptions, emblems, numerals, &c., of all 
kinds may be incrusted or let into slabs or 
blocks of marble. Finally imitations of 
woods of all kinds can be made. 
The marble slab thus prepared is left alone 
until the cement has become quite hard, which 
happens usually after forty-eight hours. The 
marble must then be rendered impervious, 
must be rubbed with pumice-stone smoothed 
and polished. For this purpose the plate is 
first rubbed down with a rough Stone-nat 
ural or artificial pumice-stone- to clean the 
surface well. The marble plate is then coated 
with the metallic liquor alone or mixed with 
a small quantity of cement, either by im 
mersing the slab into a bath of the same na 
ture, or by coating it with the said solution 
by means of a sponge, brush or other equiva 
lent implement. The slab is allowed to dry 
for twenty-four hours. It is then lightly 
rubbed with pumice stone, and the same op 
eration is recommenced with the same sub 
stance slightly less liquid. The slab is al 
lowed to dry, is then rubbed with pumice 
stone, and its surface is smoothed by means 
of suitable Stones. 
To polish the artificial marble after the 
manner of natural marble, use is made of a 
ball or rubber or cloth which has first been 
moistened with alcohol so as to cause the ad 
herence to, it of white tin putty mixed with 
w 
crushed borax. As soon as the marble has 
assumed a suitable degree of polish, an addi 
tional brilliancy or finishing touch is given 
to it with a rubber or flannel moistened with 
alcohol and salt of sorrel. 
For marble which is required to undergo 
repeated washings, such as counters, restau 
rant tables, &c., the marble after having re 
ceived its polish must be coated with a prep 
aration consisting of virgin wax melted in a 
waterbath in essence of turpentine with the 
addition of some grams of sulphur per liter 
of turpentine. Before being subjected to 
the finishing polish, and previous to being 
coated with the virgin wax preparation, these 
marbles are heated to a certain temperature 
in such a manner as to cause the Stearine 
with which the said marbles have been pre 
viously coated, to penetrate into the same. 
The artificial polish which I preferably em 
ploy in the case of decorative marbles on a 
large scale, is the same as is used for polish 
ing Wood. 
Having thus described my said invention 
and the manner of performing the same, what 
I claim is 
1. In the manufacture of artificial marbles, 
producing the veining by means of tresses or 
skeins of silk previously dipped in an acid 
solution of a metallic Sulfate and then im 
pregnated with a very thin cement, dyed to 
the color desired for the veining, said tresses 
being then withdrawn vertically through the 
paste, and the latter being then caused to 
settle down so as to produce a Solid mass hav 
ing no fissures, substantially as hereinbefore 
described. 
2. Polishing the artificial marbles pro 
duced as hereinbefore described, by first using 
a rubber moistened With alcohol and coated 
with tin putty and borax, then using a second 
rubber of flannel moistened with alcohol and 
salt of sorrel, Substantially as described. 
3. The herein described process of forming 
artificial marble consisting in first coating 
the marble with stearine and then coating the 
same With a preparation of Virgin wax melted 
in a water bath in essence of turpentine with 
a small addition of Sulphur and then polish 
ing the same, substantially as described. 
4. The manufacture of impervious and per 
manent artificial marbles consisting in first 
coating the heated marbles with stearine, and 
then, after they have become dry, coating 
them with a preparation consisting of virgin 
wax melted in a Water bath in essence of tur 
pentine with the addition of a few grams of 
sulphur per liter of turpentine, then polish 
ing the same, substantially as hereinbefore 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 22d day of March, 1894. 
GRAND MONTAGNE. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT TROU FONE, 
GREGORY PHELAN. 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
IOS 
O 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528069.txt	 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 528,069. 
 
 
C. J. BLOOM. 
ROTARY OWEN. 
Patented Oct. 23, 1894. 
 
: 
ES: 
Hi: 
He 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEs J. BLOOM, OF BURLINGTON JUNCTION, MISSOURI. 
ROTARY OVEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,069, dated October 23, 1894. 
Application filed May 3, 1894, Serial No, 509,905, (No model.) 
To add, whon, it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bur 
lington Junction, in the county of Nodaway 
and State of Missouri, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Rotary 
Ovens; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. , 
My invention, relates to improvements in 
ovens, the objects in view being to produce 
an oven that is portable, cheaply constructed 
and simple, and which has increased capacity 
for the bakings of cakes, pastries, &c., either 
for domestic or bakers' use, and which by 
reason of its construction will impart an even 
heating to all portions of the bakings con 
tained therein, whereby advantageous results 
aCCIe. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will appear in the following description 
and the novel features thereof will be par 
ticularly pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings:--Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of an oven embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a vertical longitudinal sec 
tional view thereof. Fig. 4 is a detail of one 
of the bake pans. 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
In the practice of my invention I construct 
an outer casing or cylinder of sheet metal and 
the same consists of an annular wall or drum 
l, having front and rear heads 2 and 3 re 
spectively which are secured to the casing 
and provided at their centers with openings 
4 and 5 respectively. The first mentioned 
opening is sufficiently large to insert the bak 
ings and bake-pans for containing the same, 
While the latter opening is simply a bearing 
opening. 
The casing thus constructed is sup 
ported upon suitable frames 6 whose lower 
ends are bent to form feet and are bolted to 
cross sills or supports 7. Between these 
frames 6 the annular wall is provided with 
depending flanges 8 which are connected at 
their lower ends by a cross-piece.9, the whole 
producing a fire box. 
This fire-box has sup 
ported within it a grate 10, and at one end is 
provided with a fuel opening 11 which is cov 
Beit known that I, CHARLES J. BLOOM, a ered by a swinging door 12 having a draft 
opening 13 over which is arranged a slide 14. 55 
In the present instance it is intended that the 
oven should be operated by the consumption 
of hard fuel, but it will be obvious that soft 
fuel may be used or gas as desired, in which 
case the fire-box may be omitted or modified 
in its construction to adapt it for the purpose. 
The upper side of the casing is provided 
with front and rear flanged openings 15, the 
two being connected by an inverted U-shaped 
pipe. 16 having a central outlet 17 common to 
both elbows of the pipe. Arranged in the el 65 
bows are dampers 18 whose stems extend to . 
the exterior and thereby afford a means by 
which said dampers may be manipulated. . 
Contained within the casing thus con 
structed is a cylinder 19, and the same is of 
less diameter and length than the casing so 
as to produce an intermediate space in con 
junction with the same. This cylinder is 
provided at its rear end with a shaft 20 which 
extends through the bearing 5, and at its 75 
front end with a flanged opening 21, the 
flange thereof extending through the open 
ing 4 of the front of the casing. Arranged in 
annular series within the cylinder 19 is a se 
ries of axially disposed rods 22, and suspended 
loosely and in a removable manner from each . . 
rod is a bake-pan. 23. These bake-pans 23 have 
their ends formed triangularly in the present 
instance, and at the centers of said ends are 
rovided with hooks 24, which loosely engage 
the rods and may be readily disengaged from - 
the same when desired. 
The flange. 21 of the opening at the front 
end of the cylinder-19 is provided with a coni- go 
cal cover 25, the same preferably having at 
its apex a vent tube 26. 
A horizontal frame 27 is located at the rear 
of the fire-box, is suitably braced by braces 
28 and has a vertical portion or standard 29 
arising therefrom. This standard 29 has an 
upper bearing 30 in line with the opening 5 
in the rear end of the casing and is also pro 
vided with a lower bearing 31 in which a 
short shaft 32-is designed to rotate. The up 
per bearing 30 receives the shaft 20 of the 
cylinder 19. The outer end of the shaft 20 
is provided with a sprocket-wheel 33, and a 
smaller sprocket-wheel 34 is arranged on the 
95 
- 
- 
. 
CO 
o 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
so 
 
528,069 
75 
90 
95 
end of the shaft 32, while between this lat 
ter sprocket-wheel and the standard 29 a 
larger sprocket-wheel 35 is located on said 
shaft 32. 
5. A pair of bearing brackets 36 extend from 
the front and rear end walls of the casing 
and accommodate a counter-shaft 37 which 
extends in front and rear of the casing. The 
rear end of the counter-shaft is provided 
Io with a sprocket-wheel 38 and the front end 
thereof with a pulley or it may be a hand 
wheel 39, by means of which said shaft 37 
may be operated. If it is designed to operate 
the shaft by hand the hand-wheel 39 shown 
I5 is employed, or if on the other hand it is to 
be operated by power a pulley is substituted. 
A sprocket-chain 40 connects the sprocket 
wheel 38 with the large sprocket-wheel 35, 
and thus communicates motion from the 
2 o counter-shaft 37 to the small shaft 32, and a 
sprocket-chain 31 connects the small sprocket 
34 of the shaft 32 with the large sprocket 33 
of the shaft 20that projects from the rear end 
of the cylinder 19, so that as will be obvious 
25 motion is communicated from the counter 
shaft 37 to the cylinder 19. 
A curved bracket 42 surrounds the lower 
portion of the front opening 4 in the outer 
casing and is provided at its ends with loose 
3o rollers 43, see Fig.1, which support the flange 
21 of the front opening of the cylinder 19 
whereby a bearing is produced for the front 
end of said cylinder. 
This completes the construction of the oven 
35 and the operation of the same will be readily 
understood. The products of combustion 
pass up from the fire-box around the sides 
and ends of the inner cylinder to the pipe 
16, and finally out of the pipe 17. The pro 
4o ducts may be directed in either direction 
by a manipulation of the dampers 18, and 
they may be contained within the oven any 
length of time by an adjustment of said dam 
pers so as to retard their egress. As before 
45 stated the pans containing the bakings are 
inserted through the opening 4 in the outer 
casing and through the flanged opening 21 of 
the cylinder 19, the pans being hung success 
ively upon the suspension rods 22, after which 
So the cap or cover 25 is replaced upon the flange 
21 and the machine started. In operation 
the machine is slowly revolved so that all bak 
ings and all portions of each baking are sub 
jected to the same degree of heat and as a 
55 consequence an even browning takes place 
within the pans. 
I do not limit my invention to the precise 
details of construction herein shown and de 
scribed, but hold that I may vary the same to 
6o any degree and extent within the knowledge 
of the skilled mechanic. 
Having described my invention, what I 
1. In an oven the combination with a cas. 
65 ing having front and rear bearing openings, 
smoke-pipes and draft openings, of an inner 
claim is 
cylinder having a shaft extending through the 
rear opening, and at its front end an opening 
having a flange extending through the front 
opening of the casing, a cover for the flanged 
opening, bake-pan supports arranged in the 
inner cylinder, and means for giving motion 
to the shaft of said cylinder, substantially as 
specified. 
2. In an oven the combination With an ex 
ternal casing, a combustion-chamber Com 
municating there with, and a smoke-pipe, of 
an inner cylinder arranged for rotation in 
the casing and provided with an axial open 
ing for giving access thereto, rods arranged 
parallel to the axis of and within the inner 
cylinder around said opening and bake-pans 
loosely suspended on the rods, and means 
for rotating said inner cylinder, substantially 
as specified. 
3. In an oven the combination with an ex 
ternal casing having a smoke-pipe, and a 
combustion-chamber communicating with the 
cylinder of an inner cylinder journaled for 
rotation in the casing and having an axial 
opening, means for giving motion to the cyl 
inder and around the opening, rods arranged 
annularly within the cylinder and bake 
pans having opposite end hooks for loosely 
and removably engaging the rods, substan 
tially as specified. 
4. In an oven the combination with the outer 
casing having front and rear openings and a 
smoke-pipe, of an internal cylinder arranged 
in the casing and having a rear shaft extend 
ing through the rear opening of the casing 
and a front opening having a flange extending 
through the opening in the casing, a cap or 
cover arranged upon the flange in a remov. 
able manner and having a vent, a series of 
rods arranged within the cylinder around the 
opening, a Series of bake-pans having hooks 
at their ends loosely suspended from the rods, 
and means for giving motion to the inner cyl 
inder, substantially as specified. 
5. In an oven the combination with an outer 
cylindrical casing having a rear bearing open 
ing and a front opening, the U-shaped pipe 
having dampers at its ends and the common 
discharge at its center, of the inner cylinder 
19 having the flanged opening 21 and the re 
movable cover, the shaft 20 extending from 
the inner cylinder through the rear opening 
of the casing, means for rotating the shaft, 
a curved bracket 42 and rollers 43 for sup 
porting the flange of the inner cylinder, sub 
stantially as specified. 
6. In an oven the combination with the outer 
casing having the supports 6, the depending 
fire-box between the supports and the dis 
charge-pipes 16 and 17 having dampers 18, 
of the cylinder 19 having the suspension rods 
22, the loose pans 23, the shaft 20, the flanged 
opening 21, the cover 25 and the vent 26, the 
sprocket-wheel33 on the shaft 20, the counter 
shaft 87, means for operating the same, the 
gear 38 on the counter shaft, and means for 
I Od 
I o5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
30 
 
528,069 
ing and having the front flanged opening 21 
provided with the cover 25, and the rear shaft 15 
20 arranged in the bearing 30 of the standard, 
the sprocket-wheel 33 and the sprocket-chain 
41 connecting the wheel 33 with the sprocket 
wheel 34, substantially as specified. 
presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 20 
CHARLES J. BLOOM. 
Witnesses: 
H. B. WILLIAMS, 
E. F. BERRY. 
communicating motion from the sprocket 
wheel 38 to the sprocket-wheel 33, substan 
tially as specified. 
7. In an oven the combination with the outer 
casing having front and rear bearings, the 
horizontal frame 27 having braces. 28, the 
standard 29 arising therefrom having bear 
ings 30 and 31, the brackets 36, the counter 
shaft 37, means for rotating the same, the 
sprocket 38, the short shaft 32, the sprocket 
wheels 34 and 35 arranged thereon, the chain 
40 connecting the sprockets 38 and 35, of the 
cylinder 19 arranged for rotation in the cas 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528169.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 528,169. 
 
J. B. KENISON & M. F. BURK. 
STAGING BRACKET. 
Patented Oct. 30, 1894. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. KENISON AND MICHAEL F. BURK, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS, 
STAG N G - BRACKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,169, dated October 30, 1894. 
Application filed January 16, 1894, Serial No. 497,033, (No model.) 
d 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JoHN B. KENISON and 
MICHAEL F. BURK, of Lynn, county of Essex, 
State of Massachusetts, have invented an Im 
provement in Staging-Brackets, of which the 
following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters and figures on the drawings rep 
resenting like parts. 
This invention relates to staging brackets, 
and is intended as an improvement upon the 
staging bracket shown and described in 
United States Letters Patent No. 511,721, 
dated December 26, 1893. In the patent re 
ferred to a thin flat end portion was provided 
at the upper end of the wall plate having 
Several keyhole slots or openings through 
which the nails for securing the bracket to 
the roof were driven, and after a course of 
shingles had been laid covering said end por 
tion, the bracket was removed by forcing it 
upward a short distance, and then raising it 
from the securing nails. 
In practice we find that after a course of 
shingles has been laid, covering said end por 
tion, that there is great liability of forcing 
the bracket up too far, and as a result the 
heads of the nails still act to hold the bracket. 
Our present invention is intended to obvi 
ate this difficulty, and to effectually do so we 
have provided a guide or guides, and a short 
distance below it a limiting stop, the distance 
between the two being substantially equal to 
the distance between the end of the slot of 
the keyhole opening and the center of the cir 
cular portion of said opening, and by placing 
the bracket with the guide upon the line 
drawn for the butts of the shingles, we can, 
after a course of shingles has been laid, force 
up the bracket until the limiting stop strikes 
the butts of the shingles, at which time the 
securing nails will occupy a position at the 
center of the circular opening of the keyhole 
slots. This guide is herein termed the butt 
line guide. 
Figure 1, shows in perspective view a stag 
ing bracket embodying this invention; Fig. 
2, an enlarged detail showing the upper end 
portion of the wall plate with the securing 
nails in their proper position to hold the So 
bracket, the guide being upon the butt-line; 
Fig. 3, a similar detail showing the bracket 
forced up so that the limiting stop strikes the 
butts of the shingles, at which time the secur 
ing nails will occupy a position at the center 55 
of the circular portion of the keyhole slots. 
The wall plate a having its side edges C.", 
upturned, and also having a thin flat upper 
end portion a, provided with keyhole slots 
5, the sole plate b pivotally connected to said 
wall plate at 2, and the brace rod c; pivotally 
connected at its lower end at 3, to the Wall 
plate, are all substantially as shown and de 
scribed in the patent referred to. 
Herein the end portion a, is provided at 
one or both sides with a notch 6, so located 
that when the bracket is placed in position 
said notch or notches will register with the 
usual butt-line drawn for the butts of a course 
of shingles. 
The side edges a' are formed at the points 
7 adjoining the end portion a to serve as 
limiting stops, the distance between the 
notches or butt-line guides, and the limiting 
stops being stubstantially equal to the dis 
tance between the ends of the slots of the 
openings 5 and the centers of the circular 
portions thereof. 
In using the bracket, it is placed upon the 
roof or previous row of shingles in such man 
ner that the butt-line guides register with: 
the butt-line drawn for the next course of 
shingles, and after said course of shingles 
has been laid, covering the end portion a', 
by forcing the bracket upward until the lim 
iting stop strikes the butts of the shingles so 
laid, it will be found that the securing nails 
will occupy a position at the center of the 
circular portions of the keyhole slots, and by 
raising the end portion a, the bracket may 
be readily removed, without disturbing the 
Securing nails. 
We claim 
In a staging bracket, the combination of a 
M 
5 
90 
25 
35 
40 
45 
528,169 
sole plate, brace rod, and wall plate, said wall names to this specification in the presence of 
plate having a thin flat end portion provided two subscribing witnesses. 
with several keyhole slots for the securing 
nails, and also with a butt-line guide, and a 
limiting stop located a short distance be 
low said butt-line guide, substantially as de- 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
JOHN B. KENISON. 
MICHAEL F. BURK, 
Witnesses: 
S. EVERETT, 
WILLIAM. H. GERRISH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528269.txt	L. L. BETTYS, 
ATTACHMENT FOR LOCKS, 
Patented Oct. 30, 1894. 
i 
 
 
2 
s 2 
(No Model.) 
No. 528,269, 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LAFAYETTEL. BETTYS, OF OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA. 
ATTACHMENT FOR LOCKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,269, dated October 30, 1894. 
Application filed June 20, 1894. Serial No. 515,083, (No model,) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LAFAYETTE L. BETTYs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Oak 
land, in the county of Alameda and State of 
California, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Attachments for Locks; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof. 
My invention relates to means for prevent 
ing at Will any ordinary lock from being op 
erated from the outside. 
It frequently happens that houses are felo 
niously entered by the simple insertion of a 
duplicate or a skeleton key into the keyhole, 
or else, the door having been locked on the 
inside and the key left in place, by using for 
ceps to turn this key, and thus unlocking the 
door with little difficulty. 
My invention provides a simple means for 
rendering it impossible to move the bolt, 
whether the key is left in place or taken out, 
and which can be manufactured and sold as 
a separate implement, capable of easy attach 
ment to any ordinary lock. 
In the following description of my inven 
tion reference will be made to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a part of a 
door, showing the lock-case and bolt in dot 
ted lines, with my attachment applied to the 
Same. Fig. 2 is an end view, partly in sec 
tion, of the same, showing the door locked 
and the bolt secured by my device. Fig. 3 is 
a top view showing the door locked, with my 
device attached but withdrawn from the bolt. 
Fig. 4 is an elevation of the attachment itself. 
Fig. 5 is a view of the same at right angles. 
Fig.6 is an end elevation of my device. 
A is a portion of a door, showing in dotted 
lines an ordinary lock B mortised therein, 
and having a bolt C, which is operated by 
means of a key inserted in the keyhole D. 
This lock forms no part of my invention, and 
is illustrated only to show the method of ap 
plying my device, which is shown thus ap 
plied in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and separately in 
Figs. 4, 5, and 6. 
Eis a plate orescutcheon, which is attached 
to the door in the same horizontal plane as 
the bolt C. The escutcheon E is provided 
With a hollow boss or thimble 1, which, when 
the device is in place, is countersunk into the 
door. This boss is bored to a size sufficient 
to accommodate the sliding pin 2 which moves 
freely therein. The doorahving been locked, 
a hole is bored through the lock-plate B and 
bolt C in line with the pin 2. This simple 
arrangement would render the lock inoper 
ative when the pin is pushed in, as the pin 
Would penetrate both lock-plate and bolt, and 
prevent the latter from sliding; but it would 
be open to some objections. The pin could 
be pulled entirely out of the escutcheon and 
mislaid, or, having been pushed in, it might 
be displaced by violently shaking the door. 65 
I obviate these objections by the following 
means: A transverse pin 3 is secured through 
the pin 2, and the boss 1 is slotted at 4 so that 
the pin 3 is guided in the slots when the pin 
2 is moved in either direction in the boss. 
This pin 3 prevents the pin 2 from being 
drawn entirely out of the escutcheon, and 
also forms part of the arrangement for hold 
ing the pin2 tightly in place when pushed in. 
For this purpose the two sides of the inner 
end of the boss 1, separated by the slot 4, are 
beveled or inclined at 5, 6, in the direction of 
opposite portions of a screw thread. Conse 
quently, when the pin 2 is pushed in to its 
fullest extent, and then turned, the pin 3 will 
bear or wedge upon the inclined planes 5, 6, 
and will be held securely. Figs. 2, 4, 5, and 
6 show the device in this position. To with 
draw the pin it is only necessary to turn it in 
the opposite direction as far as it Will go, 
which brings the transverse pin 3 into line 
with the slot, it being prevented from turning 
too far by striking the projecting ends of the 
opposite planes. The pin 2 has, for conven 
ience, a knob 7 at its outer end. After the 
pin has been pushed in and turned as de 
scribed, it will be seen that no key, whether 
applied from the inside or the outside, can 
unlock the door, and no shaking can dislodge 
the pin, on account of its firm frictional con 
tact with the two inclined planes. 
After the 
pin has been withdrawn and the door un 
locked, the pin cannot inadvertently be 
pushed in, as it is immovable, except when 
the hole in the bolt C is in line with it. 
95 
75 
What I claim is 
An attachment for the locks of doors and 
the like, consisting of an escutcheon having 
a hollow boss slotted longitudinally, oppo 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
IOO 
2 
528,269 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 11th day of 
June, 1894. LAFAYETTE I BETTYS. 
Witnesses: 
L. W. SEELY, 
JOHN COFFEE. 
sitely inclined ends to said boss, and a lock 
ing pin having a fixed transverse guide pin, 
the said guide pin being adapted to travelin 
said slot, to be wedged upon the inclines of 
said boss, and to prevent the withdrawal of 
the sliding pin, through the escutcheon, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528369.txt	J. A. HASENPFLUG. 
SASH LOCK, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 30, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 528,369. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 528,369. 
J. A. HASENPFLUG, 
SASH L00K. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 30, 1894, 
 
  
 
   
23% 
N 
(i. N 
SSSN SS 5 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. HASENPFLUG, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE CHAMPION 
SAFETY LOCK AND NOVELTY COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SASH-Lock. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,369, dated October 30, 1894. 
Application filed December 18, 1893. Serial No. 493,939. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN A. HASENPFLUG, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Sash-Locks; and I do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to sash locks of the 
variety in which the latch or bolt is auto 
matically locked when turned into engaging 
position with the strike, and is proof against 
being opened by an instrument inserted be 
tween the sashes, substantially as shown and 
described and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of my improved lock with the 
parts represented as attached to sections of 
Window sashes and as they appear in practi 
cal use, the full lines representing tha handle 
in unlocked position and the dotted lines in 
the Semi-locking and locking positions, re 
spectively, as hereinafter fully described. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the part of the 
lock which is attached to the lower sash, and 
viewed from the open side. Fig. 3 is a bot 
tom view of the parts shown in Fig. 2, and in 
the same relative position as in said figure 
and in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a bottom view of the 
lock shown in Figs, 2 and 3, and as the parts 
appear in the semi or half way locking posi 
tion. 
Fig. 5 is a view of the same parts in 
full locking position. Fig. 6 is a bottom view 
of the lock with the cam removed and show 
ing the position of the parts as they appear 
in Figs. 2 and 3. Fig. 7 is a view corre 
sponding to Fig. 6, excepting that in this case 
the parts are in their semi-locking position, 
the post supporting the cam and bolt being 
shown in cross section in both these views. 
Fig. 8 shows the full lock in cross section and 
a cross section of the sashes to which the 
parts are affixed and the parts of the lock in 
the semi-locking position shown in Fig. 7. 
Fig. 9 is a plan perspective view of the catch 
or bolt detached from the other parts, and 
Fig. 10 is a plan perspective view of the cam 
which belongs on the lower or inner extrem 
ity of the handle post and is constructed to 
rotate therewith. Fig. 11 is an under per 
spective view of the lock casing which is at 
tached to the lower sash and carries the oper- 55 
ating mechanism. 
The operating parts of this lock consistes 
sentially of three distinct members, which 
co-operate with each other and with the cas 
ing on the lower sash to effect the locking of 6o 
the sash in a simple and efficient manner. 
The casing A which is attached to the lower 
sash, as seen in Fig. 11, is the same in gen 
eral outline as is now Well-known to the art, 
and its novel features are those which are 65 
shown on its inner and under side and adapt 
ed to co-operate with the moving parts of 
the lock. 
The handle B has a central post -2- in 
tegral there with and circular in cross sec- to 
tion, except at its lower extremity -3-, 
where it is made square or angular SO as to 
fit the corresponding hole -4- through the 
center of the cam C, which is rigidly attached 
to the lower end of said post, as clearly seen 75 
in Fig. 8. 
Above the cam Cisthe latch or bolt D which 
has an oblong central opening -5-, and 
adapted to the circular part of the post. 
the several parts are so constructed that when 
locking is to occur and the handle is turned 
for that purpose, the bolt or catch D will first 
be turned into the semi-locking position, seen . 
in Figs. 4 and 7, and then as the handle is 85 
moved to position as in Fig. 5, it will be 
drawn directly back without swinging farther 
around, as shown in full lines Fig. 5. 
Now, it will be observed that the latch or 
bolt D, besides being constructed to engage 9o 
and lock on the strike E on the upper sash, is 
provided with a gradually deepening flange or 
rib -6-, and when this rib engages the pro 
jection -7- on the strike, as seen in Fig. 8, 
and the lever B is then turned around in the 95 
position shown in Fig. 5, the sashes will be 
leveled and drawn closely together. The first 
or semi-locking position, or that which is 
shown in Figs, 4 and 7, is obtained by moving 
the parts from the position of rest, as seen in Ioo 
Figs. 1, 2, 3 and 6. This represents the full 
swing or rotation of the latch and levels the 
The handle B and cam C turn together, and So, 
O 
15 
2 O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
2 
528,369 
sashes with one another. In this first move 
ment we have the cam C and the latch or bolt 
D engaged so as to rotate together by catch 
ing the lug -8- on the bottom of the bolt, 
Fig. 9, in the open outer extremity -9- of 
the cam groove on the top of the cam C. This 
engagement is caused by a cam-11- at one 
side of the hub -12-, Fig. 11, on the inside 
of the casing A, and a projection -13- on 
the top of the bolt and at the front of the ob 
long hole through the center thereof. This 
keeps the bolt out till the half way place is 
reached, and then the cam -11- is passed 
and the rotation of the bolt ceases. In other 
words, the cam-11- causes the cam and bolt 
to be locked together always up to the half 
way point and back, and in this part of the 
work they move together as if they were one; 
but, reaching the halfway place the lug-13 
leaves the cam and interlocking of cam and 
bolt ceases. 
When the cam and bolt reach the semi or 
half way place, as seen in Fig. 7, the lug-14 
on the heel of the bolt strikes the down Wardly 
projecting lug-15- on the casing A, and the 
lug-13-strikes the projection -12'- at 
the front of the casing, and the further rota 
tion of the bolt is arrested. This having oc 
curred, and the handle being further rotated 
to the opposite extreme, as in dotted lines Fig. 
7, the cam turning with the handle engages 
lug-S- on the bottom of the bolt D and 
causes it to travel back in the cam groove 
-16-, or about as shown from dotted to full 
lines Fig. 5. In this operation the lug-15 
on the bottom of the casing A is forced into 
the notch-18- at the heel of the bolt by 
the side of projection-14-, and the projec 
tion -1.3- on the top of the bolt is at the 
same time forced into the notch -19- on the 
inside of the casing A at the side of lug 
-12'-. The backward movement of the 
bolt in this operation is in straightlines, and 
serves both to lock the bolt itself and to 
draw the sashes together. It now is made 
impossible for any one to open the bolt from 
the outside by introducing an instrument be 
tween the sashes, because the bolt is really 
locked in two places against rotation, and 
can only be released by turning the handle. 
In opening the lock the exact reverse of 
the foregoing operation occurs and with the 
same steps; that is, the bolt is first brought 
to the half way place, as in Figs. 4 and 7, in 
which it has not yet been rotated but is sim 
ply carried out from its locked position on 
casing A and unlocked therefrom. Then as 
the lug-8- on the bottom thereof is brought 
into the mouth G of the cam groove by this 
movement, a further rotation back of the 
handle will bring lug-13-into engagement 
with cam-11- on case A and thus cause 
O 
20 
45 
55 
 
cam and bolt to lock together at -8- and 
-9- and rotate to full open position, as in 
Figs. 1 and 6. In this latter position the 
shoulder-21- on the bolt strikes the pro 
jection -12'- on its rear and stops the fur 
ther rotation of the parts, the limit of back 
Ward movement being seen in Fig. 1. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a sash lock, the casing for the inner 
Sash, the central handled rotating post, the 
cam plate fixed rigidly on the lower end of 
the said post, and a locking bolt on said 
post between the cam plate and the said cas 
ing, said locking bolt being engaged and 
rotated by said cam, arrested by the casing, 
and then moved longitudinally by the cam, 
Whereby the bolt is locked, substantially as 
Set forth. 
2. A sash lock having a shell or casing con 
structed to be fastened to the lower sash and 
provided with projections about its hub on 
its inside, in combination with a handled 
post in the said casing, a plate having a cam 
groove in its upper side fixed to said post, 
and a locking bolt between the casing and 
Said plate having a lug engaging in said 
groove and constructed on its top with pro 
jections to engage the projections on said 
casing, substantially as set forth. 
3. The inclosing casing having a central 
opening and a cam and projections inside 
about said opening, a handled post in said 
opening, a locking bolt with an oblong hole 
through which the said post passes and pro 
vided with a projection at the front of said 
opening to engage the cam on the casing 
and a projection on its bottom, and a plate 
with an eccentric groove fixed to the said 
post and engaging the projections on the bot 
tom of the said bolt, Substantially as set forth. 
4. In a sash lock, the casing having lugs 
on its inside about its center, and a cam be 
tween said lugs, the handled post extending 
down into said casing and the strike for the 
opposite sash, in combination with the lock 
ing bolt on said post provided with a rib of 
increasing depth about its outside and pro 
jections to engage the projection and cams on 
the casing, and a cam plate fixed on said 
post beneath the locking bolt and constructed 
to engage there with and force the bolt into 
engagement with the strike and the lugs on 
the inside of the casing, substantially as set 
forth. 
Witness my hand to the foregoing specifi 
cation this 7th day of December, 1893. 
JOHN A. HASENPFLUG. 
Witnesses: 
H. T. FISHER, 
GEORGIA SCHAEFFER. 
65 
75 
9 O 
95 
ICO 
O 
I I5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528469.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 528,469. 
A. FEINER & T. G. SAXTON. 
DEVICE FOR HOLDING COLLARS OR, CUFFS ON SHIRTS, 
Patented 00t, 30, 1894, 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ADOLPH EFEINER AND THOMAS G. SAXTON, OF LEXINGTON, KENTUCKY. 
DEVICE FOR HOLDING co LLARS OR CUFFS ON SHRTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,469, dated October 30, 1894. 
Application filed February 10, 1894, Serial No. 499,822, (No model.) 
.  
2 ? 
to all whom it may concern: 
? 
Be it known that we, ADOLPH FEINER an 
THOMAS G. SAXTON, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Lexington, in the county 
5 of Fayette and State of Kentucky, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Devices for Holding Collars and Cuffs on 
Shirts; and we do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
Io of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
devices for holding collars and cuffs on shirts, 
15 and for kindred purposes, and it consists of 
certain improvements on the device described 
in our application Serial No. 474,699, filed 
May 18, 1893, which improvements will be. 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Reference is had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which the same parts are indicated 
by the same letters and numerals throughout 
the several views. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
25 one form of the device as completed and 
ready for use. Fig. 2 represents a perspec 
tive view of the device shown in Fig.1, but seen 
from the oppositeside of the said figure. Fig. 
3 represents a section of the device shown in 
3o Fig. 1, made by the plane acac of the said 
figure. Fig. 4 represents a perspective view 
of a modified form of the device, and Fig. 5 
represents a section of the device shown in 
Fig. 4, made by the planey y of the said fig 
35 ure. Fig. 6 represents a similar section to 
that shown in Figs. 3 and 5 of a slightly 
modified form of device, from that shown in 
the preceding figures. Fig. 7 represents a 
side elevation of another form of the device. 
4o Fig. 8 represents a central vertical section of 
the device shown in Fig. 7, and Fig. 9 repre 
sents a section made by the plane a 2 in Fig. 
8, and looking down, the position of the cam in 
Fig. 8 being represented by the dotted lines, 
In all the figures. A represents a U-shaped 
frame, in which are mounted, or to which are 
attached, the various parts for holding the 
shirt, collar, or cuff. This frame consists of 
a front leg 1, and a rear leg 2 forming the 
5o sides of the U-shaped frame, as shown in the 
various figures. 
In Figs. 1 to 3 the rear leg 2 is continued 
45 
and bent over as at A', and the two legs are 
cut away as at a and a'. Between these two 
legs the collar clamp B is held either by fric- 55 
tion, or a clamp such as a in Fig.6 may be 
provided to prevent the clamp B from being 
detached from the frame A. This clamp B 
is made of resilient material, the sides b of 
which are bent up, and the ends b' of the 6o 
said sides are corrugated or roughened in any 
way suitable for increasing the friction with 
the collar or cuff. 
In the frontleg 1 of the frame, the bent le 
ver C is pivoted as at c', and has its upper end 
6 
bent inwards as at c. 
This bentend projects 5 
through the opening C in the leg 1, and when 
the lever C is in the position indicated in the 
figure,it compresses the two pointsb together, 
causing them to firmly hold the collar or cuff. To 
When this lever is turned up in the position 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3, the ends b' 
spring apart, allowing the collar or cuff to be 
readily disengaged from the holder. In order 
that the lever G may not be turned up too far, 
the shoulders care so made as to strike 
against the face of the leg 1 at either side of 
the opening a, but these shoulders are not 
necessary, as the resiliency of the metal in 
the holder B will keep the end c of the lever 
C down and the opposite end up when the 
said holder is open. 
To the extension A' of the rear leg 2, a lever 
D similar to the lever C, is pivoted as at d', 
and has a curved end projecting into the open 
ing a'. The shoulders d are provided for a 
similar reason to that given with regard to 
the shoulders c. On the inside of the exten 
sion A', a spring Eis Secured, as by the rivete. 
In order to fasten the device to the shirt, 
the extension A, having the spring E and the 
lever G in the position shown in full lines in 
Fig. 3, is thrust through the button hole, of 
the neck or Wrist band of the shirt, and then 
the lever D is turned upward in the position 
shown in dottedlines in Fig3, when the curved 
end d will press the spring Einward, causing 
it to clamp the shirt between it and the rear. 
face of the leg 2. At the same time the lever 
D presses the part of the band above the but 
ton hole between the back of the leg 2 and 
the spring E. 
It will be obvious that the device may be 
applied either through a button hole or to a 
95 
So 
75 
O) 
2 
528,469 
TO 
5 
2 ? 
25 
plain band of any kind, such as the neckband 
of a shirt. Having attached the implement 
to the shirt the collar or cuff holder B is 
opened by turning up the lever C, the collar 
or cuff is inserted, with the ends overlapping 
between the ends b' of the holder, and the 
lever C is turned down again, thus firmly 
clamping the end of the collar or cuff. 
The device shown in Figs. 4 and 5 is simi 
lar to that shoWn in FigS. 1, 2, and 3, the only 
difference being that the extension A' and 
attached parts are replaced by a collar but 
ton A attached to the rear leg 2 by a suit 
able extension C. 
In the device shown in Fig. 6, the rear leg 
2 is cut off at its upper end and a bent lever 
D' is pivoted in the slot a' as at d'. This le 
ver is curved outward as at dand terminates 
in a thumb lug d. In order to attach this 
form of device to the shirt, the lever C and 
the lever D'are raised to the positions shown 
in dotted lines in Fig. 6. The end of the le 
wer D' is then inserted in the button hole and 
the lever is pushed into the button hole until 
stopped by the face of the leg 2, when the 
lever is turned down to the position shown in 
full lines in Fig. 6, and the resiliency of the 
rear leg of the collar holder B pressing on 
the upper end d of the lever D', will cause 
the lower end d to press against the shirt 
and hold it between the said lever and the 
rear face of the leg 2. The collar is clamped 
in place as described with reference to Figs. 
1 to 3. 
In the device shown in Figs. 7 to 9, the rear 
leg 2 of the U-shaped frame is continued and 
is bent over as at A', and the front leg 1 and 
the said continuation A' are provided with 
holding teeth a'. Between the legs 1 and 2 
the double cam F is pivotally mounted on the 
spindlef which is bent upward as at f' and 
so curved at f as to bear against the front 
face of the leg 1 when in the open position. 
This operating arm of the spindle terminates 
in a ball or thumb lug f, so that it may not 
catch in the necktie. The vertical spindle f : 
is journaled in suitable bearings a and a? in 
the rear side of the U-shaped frame A. In 
order to use the device, the cam F is turned 
into the position shown in Figs, 7 and 9, the 
tongue A* is inserted on the interior of the 
collar band of the shirt, or through the but 
ton hole if desired, the ends of the collar are 
lapped over each other in the frame A in front 
of the cam F, and the cam is turned in the 
position shown in dotted lines in Fig. 9, thus 
compressing the collar and shirt between the 
said cam and the teeth a, and holding them 
firmly in position. 
It will be seen that the friction of the part 
f on the front face of the leg 1, will keep the 
collar holder in the open position, and that 
after it is turned to the locking position, the 
necktie will hold the ends fagainst swing 
ing out and allowing the collar to become de 
tached. 
35 
4 ? 
45 
So 
55 
?? 
9 o 
95 
7 ? 
75 
. 
It will be evident that in these various de 
vices the collar may be fitted to the neck of 
the Wearer irrespective of the position of the 
button holes of the said collar, and except 
with the devices shown in Figs. 4 and 5, irre 
spective of the position of the button hole in 
the shirt. 
It will be evident that the herein described 
devices are especially adapted for shirts or 
collars with enlarged or torn out buttonholes, 
and also for cuffs so affected. 
It will be obvious that various modifica 
tions of the herein described devices might 
be made, which could be used without depart 
ing from the spirit of our invention. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States, is- 
1. A device for attaching collars or cuffs 
to shirts comprising a U-shaped frame hav 
ing two legs 1 and 2, the front leg 1 being slot 
ted as at a, a U-shaped collar or cuff holder 
made of resilient material and provided with 
roughened holding arms, mounted in said 
frame, a bent lever pivoted to said front leg 
projecting into said slot a and adapted to 
preSS Said holding arms together, an exten 
sion A' integral with said rear leg 2, bent 
over as shown, and slotted as at a', a bent 
lever D pivoted in said slot, and a spring 
mounted on the inside of said extension and 
adapted to be pressed forward by said lever, 
substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
2. A device for attaching collars or cuffs 
to shirts comprising a U-shaped frame hav 
ing its rear leg extended and slotted and 
curved downward, a bent lever mounted in 
Said slotted extension, a spring mounted on 
the inside of said extension and adapted to 
be pressed forward by said lever, a U-shaped 
collar or cuff holder made of resilient material 
and provided with roughened arms mounted 
in Said frame, and means for pressing said 
arms together, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
3. A device for attaching collars or cuffs 
to shirts comprising a U-shaped frame hav 
ing its rear leg extended and slotted and 
curved down Ward, a bent lever mounted in 
Said slotted extension, a spring mounted on 
the inside of said extension and adapted to 
be pressed forward by said lever, a U-shaped 
collar or cuff holder made of resilient material 
and provided with roughened arms mounted 
in Said frame, and a bent lever pivoted to the 
front of Said frame and projecting into a slot 
therein for pressing said arms together, sub 
Stantially as and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ADOLPH EFEINER. 
THOS. G. SAXTON. 
d 
II5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
Witnesses: 
- 
F. M. BAMELL, 
FRED. A. CRAMER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528571.txt	(No Model.) 
D. U. STONER, 
SHUTTER HINGE, 
No. 528,571. 
Patented Nov. 6, 1894, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID U. STONER, OF MOUNT JOY, PENNYSYLVANIA. 
SHUTTER. H. N. G. E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of retters Patent No. 528,571, dated November 6, 1894. 
Application filed October 13, 1893, Serial No. 488,042. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID U. STONER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mount 
Joy, in the county of Lancaster and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Shutter-Hinges; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sae. 
This invention relates to hinges for shut 
ters and similar swinging devices, and has for 
its object to provide simple and effective 
means for holding the shutter or other device 
at a desired adjustment for the purpose of 
bowing the same. 
With these and other objects in view the 
invention consists of the construction and ar 
rangement of the several parts which will be 
more fully hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings: Figure l is a perspective 
view of a portion of the window frame and 
a shutter showing the improved hinge applied 
thereto Fig. 2 is a detail perspective view 
of the parts of the hinge separated and shown 
on an enlarged scale. Fig. 3 is a side eleva 
tion of a part of one of the members. 
Similar numerals of reference are employed 
to indicate corresponding parts in the several 
views. 
Referring to the drawings the numeral 1 
designates the male member of the hinge 
which is stationary and attached to the win 
doW frame 2. The said male member has an 
arm 3 projecting outwardly therefrom with a 
pintle or post 4, extending upwardly with an 
incline 5, in front thereof and a recess or slot 
6, at the opposite side, one of whose walls is 
formed by a vertically extending beveled lug 
7. From the outer lower end of the said arm 
and extending inwardly is a semicircular in 
cline 8, which is formed with diagonally dis 
posed locking notches 9, in the upper edge of 
the same adjacent to the inner end. The in 
cline of the said semi-circle has its highest 
point adjacent to the inner end of the arm 
aforesaid and extends downwardly toward the 
outer end of said arm. . 
To the shutter is secured the female mem 
ber of the hinge which is provided with socket 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
DAVID U. STONER. 
Witnesses: 
D. R. WAGNER, 
JOHN R. GREINER, 
55 
10, fitting over the post or pintle on the arm 
of the male member, and having an outer lug 
11, and an inner incline 12, which co-acts with 
the parts of the said arm and is a well known 
construction in the art. The socket and other 
parts of the female member are carried by 
an arm extension 13, and adjacent to the se 
curing leaf 14, of said female member is a 
depending lug 15 which is arranged diago 
nally or at an angle and has its lower edge clear 
to engage the notches in the upper edge of 
the semi-circular incline heretofore set forth. 
In the operation of bowing the shutter, the 
latter is opened until the said lug 15 moves 
around upon the semi-circular incline and 
drops into the desired notch where it finds its 
bearing and properly holds the shutter at the 
angle required. The position of the shutter 
can be readily changed by merely pushing the 
latter open and shut and in all instances an 
automatic hinge is provided which is com 
paratively cheap and is required to be located 
at the bottom of the shutter only. 
The device can be quickly and readily manu 
factured and it will be understood that 
changes in the dimensions or proportions of 
the same might be made and substituted for 
those shown and described without in the least 
departing from the nature or spirit of the in 
vention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
An automatic locking hinge composed of a 
male member having a central arm extending 
therefrom carrying a pintle, and having re 
verse inclines on opposite sides of the pintle, 
a semicircular rim uniting the leaf of the 
hinge and the extended arm provided with 
notches, and a female member having in 
clines working on the inclines of the male 
member and a downward extending lug rid 
ing on the semicircular rim and engaging the 
notches thereon, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
- 
85 
9o 
95 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528671.txt	(No Model.) 
W. C. HOOKER, 
ANIMAL, TRAP, 
No. 528,671. 
Patented Nov. 6, 1894, 
 
   
  
 
 
. 
.. 7 
 
NSN 2 
Zs 
Z 
 
Wilpesss 
P 
piepir 
WZZzazaz CAooez; 
(3. 2. Jy 1224. Allrpeys, 
E NORRIS Peters co, PHOTO-lit Ho., WASHINGTON, d. cd 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. C. HOOKER, OF ABINGDON, ILLINOIS. 
ANIMAL-TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,671, dated November 6, 1894. 
Application filed March 14, 1894, Serial No. 503,629, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
- 
To all Luhon, it may concern: 
Beit known, that I, WILLIAM. C. HoOKER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Abingdon, in the county of Knox and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Ani 
mal Trap, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
animal traps. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide, for catching mice and rats, a simple, 
inexpensive and efficient trap adapted not to 
excite the suspicion of an animal, and capa 
ble of being arranged close to a rat-hole, and 
of being sprung by the animal passing over 
it when not attracted by the bait. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a sensitive trap which may be readily 
Set, and which will be instantly sprung at the 
slightest attempt of an animal to obtain the 
bait. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter more fully described, illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, and 
pointed out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a trap constructed in accordance with 
this invention and shown set. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal sectional view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a plan view, the trap being sprung. 
Like numerals of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
IngS. 
1 designates a base, upon which is mounted 
a spring-actuated jaw 2, formed integral with 
a spiral spring and adapted to be forced 
downward by the same against the frontpor 
tion of the base and in contact with an ani 
malfor catching the same. The resilient wire, 
of which the spiral spring and the jaw are 
constructed, is bent to form an arm 3. It is 
then coiled into the transverse spring 4 and 
is extended from one end thereof to form the 
loop or jaw 2, which terminates at the other 
end of the transverse coil4. It is then passed 
through the longitudinal opening of the coil 
and terminates in an inward extension 5, 
which is arranged below the jaw, and which 
Serves to Support the same. The jaw and the 
spring are secured hingedly to the base by 
perforated ears 6, which are provided with 
shanks 7, passed through the base and bent 
upward against the lower face of the same, 
the perforations of the ears receiving the ex 
tension 5, and the rear terminal of one side 
of the jaw. The outer end of the arm 3 is 
bent downward, and inserted in the base, 
which is preferably constructed of wood. 
The spring is of sufficient strength to force 
the jaw violently against an animal, and the 
front end 8 of the jaw which is approximately 
V-shaped is bent downward at an angle to 
the body of the jaw beyond the base, to form 
a grip to prevent the animal caught from 
being forced outward, and to hold the same 
securely. The jaw is held backward, when 
the trap is set, against the action of the 
transverse spring by a locking-bar 9, which 
passes over the jaw and which has its rear 
end loosely connected to the base. The front 
end of the locking-bar is adapted to engage 
a catch 10, of a hinged trigger 11, which is 
centrally arranged at the front of the base. 
The catch consists of a piece of sheet metal, 
which is doubled above the trigger and which 
is bent rearward to form a shoulder, and 
which extends below the trigger and is bent 
to form a pintle-eye 13, to receive a pintle 14; 
and the ends of the sheet metal are extended 
forward forming securing-plates, which are 
fastened to the rear end of the trigger. The 
pintle may consist of a staple, or may have 
its endsbent to form shanks which are passed 
through the base. The rear end of the lock 
ing-bar is bent to forman eye which is linked 
into a staple or eye 14 at the rear end of the 
base. 
The particular construction of the catch 
forms a very sensitive trap, and the latter 
may be conveniently set by inverting it and 
arranging the front end of the locking-bar 
above the shoulder of the catch, which will 
automatically engage it. The slightest press 
ure on the trigger will cause the springing of 
the trap. 
The trigger is preferably constructed of 
wood, but may be made of any suitable ma 
terial. It is provided with a bait-opening 15, 
beneath which is secured a plate. 16 which 
closes the bottom of the opening; and by this 
arrangement a bait receptacle is provided 
which necessitates an animal touching the 
trigger in order to obtain the bait; and in so 
- 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
528,671. 
O 
(5 
touching it a downward pressure is necessa 
rily produced, which will cause the trap to 
be instantly sprung. 
It will be seen that the trap is simple and 
comparatively inexpensive in construction, 
that it is positive and reliable in operation, 
and that it is adapted to be placed adjacent 
to a rat-hole or between boxes or near furni 
ture where mice are liable to run, and that it 
is readily sprung by an animal in passing 
over it, even when not attempting to obtain 
the bait, 
Changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction may be resorted 
to without departing from the principle or 
sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
vention. 
What I claim is 
1. A trap, comprising a base, a Spring-actu 
ated jaw constructed of a single piece of wire 
coiled to form a transverse spring and ex 
tended from one end of the latter and shaped 
into a loop terminating at the opposite side 
of the coil and continued to form a transverse 
portion arranged within the coil, bearings 
receiving the ends of the transverse portion, 
a locking-bar, and a trigger for setting the 
jaw, substantially as described. 
2. A trap, comprising a base, a Spring-actu 
ated jaw constructed of a single piece of wire 3o 
coiled to form a transverse spring and ex 
tended from one end of the latter and shaped 
into a loop terminating at the opposite side 
of the coil and continued to form a transverse 
portion arranged within the coil, one end of 35 
the wire being extended rearwardly to form 
an arm and the other end being extended 
transversely, a locking-bar, and a trigger for 
setting the jaw, substantially as described. 
jaw, a locking-bar, a trigger provided at its 
rear end with a catch, and an eye constructed 
of a single piece of sheet metal doubled above 
the trigger and bent rearward and having its 
ends secured to the upper and lower faces of 45 
the trigger, a pintle arranged in the eye and 
hinging the trigger to the base, and a locking 
bar, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 5o 
the presence of two witnesses. 
3. A trap, comprising a spring-actuated 4o 
WILLIAM. C. IOOKER. 
Witnesses: 
K. R. MARKS, 
J. E. Cox. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528771.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 528,771. 
G. s. DUFFIN. 
TRACE, 
 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 6, 1894. 
- - - - - - A ---PFPPPPPP 
-------- oranayam - now 
 
: NNN N 2 
2 
 
2. 
Oo o, o (C) o o o) 
. A 77 
A. 2 
A73 
WITNESSES; 
(2/22/2-az2) 
FNVENTOR 
afs % 
BY 
ATTORMEYS. 
The Norris Peters co. Photo-LTHo., WASHingTON. D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. S. DUFFIN 
TRACE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 528,771. 
Patented Nov. 6, 1894. 
WITNESSES; 
(2%22/222222. 
6 4.e3.co(, 
r 
the NORRIS PETERS co, PHooto, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
IWWEWTOR 
824%/ 
--f(u, v6 
RY 
AITORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
-S 
GEORGE SHACKLER DUFFIN, OF CHENEYVILLE, ILLINOIS. 
TRACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,771, dated November 6, 1894. 
Application filed July 6, 1894, Serial No. 516,735, (No model.) 
65 
o 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown thatl, GEORGE SHACKLERDUF 
FIN, of Cheneyville, in the county of Vermil 
ion and State of Illinois, have invented a 
new and Improved Trace, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The invention relates to harnesses, and its 
object is to provide a new and improved 
trace, which is simple and durable in con 
struction, and arranged in such a manner as 
to prevent twisting of the trace when a pull 
is exerted thereon, and to give perfect ease 
and freedom to the animal at all times. 
The invention consists of a trace made in 
Sections, and a coupling for the sections, one 
trace section being extended beyond the joint 
of the coupling and on the inside thereof. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in Which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the improve 
ment. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the coupling. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional plan view of a modified 
form of the coupling. Fig. 4 is a side eleva 
tion of the same. Fig. 5 is a side elevation 
of the improvement as applied and with parts 
in a different position; and Fig. 6 is a sec 
tional plan view of the same on the line 6-6 
of Fig. 5. 
The improved trace is provided with two 
sections A and B, united by a coupling C, as 
plainly illustrated in Fig. 1. The coupling C 
is provided with two members, of which one 
member is formed with a horizontally - ex 
tending eye C, held on a shank C fastened 
by rivets or other means E, to the rear end 
of section A. The other member of the coup 
ling is formed with a hook C, engaging the 
eye C and formed on a shank C, fastened 
by rivets or other means E' to the forward 
end of the section B. 
The front end of the section A is adapted 
to hook on one of the hooks D' of the hame 
tug D connected in the usual manner with 
the hame. The rear end of the section A 
passes through the loop D of the hame tug, 
and the shank C is made of such a length 
that no matter which hook D' is engaged by 
the frontend of the section A, the said shank 
C is still within the loop D. The hame tug 
is provided with the usual back band D9. 
The section B is fastened at its rear end to 
the single-tree, in the usual manner. The 
section A is extended as at Abeyond the 
joint of the coupling C and at the inner side 
thereof, so that the coupling does not in any 
shape or form whatever, come in contact with 
the animal, as the said extension A' serves 
as a guard to protect the skin of the animal 
from any rubbing action of the coupling C, 
as it is aligned on the inside thereof. 
Usually the section A is split vertically to 
form the rounded front flange A', between 
which and the rear extension flange A, is 
placed the shank C of the coupling member 
united to the section. A by the rivets E, as 
plainly shown in Fig. 1. 
The coupling C may be made in different 
shapes or forms, such for instance as illus 
trated in Figs. 3 and 4, it being understood, 
however, that the main features of my in 
vention consist in extending one trace sec 
tion beyond the joint of the coupling and at 
the inside thereof, as previously described. 
It will also be seen that the coupling C per 
mits of conveniently swinging the rear sec 
tion B over the animal's back into the posi 
tion indicated in Fig. 5. In case the trace 
should break it can readily be spliced at the 
broken portion by inserting and fastening 
the shank of a coupling Cin the broken ends 
of the trace, so as to render the latter as good 
as new and not shorten it by the operation. 
It will also be seen that the coupling C will 
readily pass through buckles, loops or other 
parts and hence does not form an obstruc 
tion in manipulating the trace, as the grain 
of the leather sections of the trace is not af 
fected by the insertion of the coupling and 
the trace is rendered very strong and du 
rable. 
In the modified form shown in Figs, 3 and 
4, the coupling F is provided on one of its 
members F with a pivot F engaging an 
aperture in the other member F, the said 
pivot pin having a reduced end carrying a 
counter-sunk washer F held in place by riv 
eting pin F. By the arrangement described. 
the inner faces of the two coupling members 
are perfectly aligned so that the extension 
A* of the trace section. A fits snugly against 
the inner side of the coupling and extends 
beyond the joint thereof. 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
528,771. 
5 
- 
Patent- 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Tetters 
1. A trace formed in two sections A, B, 
united at their adjacent ends by jointed 
coupling, the shanks of which enter and are 
riveted in the split ends of the said trace sec 
tions, the inner side of the section A having 
a rearward extension crossing the coupling 
to take the wear, and the said coupling be 
ing in rear of and wholly independent of the 
back strap connections. 
2. The combination with the tug Dhaving 
a hook D' at its forward end, a loop D at its 
rear end and a back strap connection D8 in 
advance of the loop, of the trace formed in 
two sections, A, B, coupled by a jointed coup 
ling in rear of and separate and independent 
of the tug and any of its parts, the trace sec 
tion A extending through the loop D* and pro 
vided at its forward end with a hook to en 
gage the hook D the rear end of the section 
A having on its inner side an extension A 
crossing the coupling and taking the wear, 
substantially as described. 
2 C. 
GEORGE SHACKLERDUFFIN. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM J. PARK, 
PARK S. DUFFIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528872.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
0. N. GULDLIN. 
/ 
OIL FEEDING APPARATUS FOR GAS GENERATORS, 
No. 528,872, 
 
Patented NOV, 6, 1894, 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
(% (6 (26-344/ 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs.co, PHoro-LITHO, washington. 
/WWENTOR 
Q4/.464. 
(6464-6- 
AITORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
OLAF N. GULDLIN, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA. 
O - FEED N G A PPARATUS FOR GAS GENERATORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,872, dated November 6, 1894. 
Application filed November 21, 1893, Serial No. 491,591. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, OLAF N. GULDLIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Fort 
Wayne, in the county of Allen and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Oil-Feeding Apparatus 
for Gas-Generators; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to feeding hydrocar 
bon oil in automatically controlled and meas 
ured quantity, under substantially uniform 
pressure, to the Superheating or other cham 
ber of a Water-gas generator. 
It is now the common practice, in supply 
ing hydrocarbon oil to the carbureting cham 
ber or superheater of a water-gas generator, 
to first pump the oil from the storage tank 
into an oil measuring tank having a scaled 
index, and at the end of each run make a 
record of the oil used, as shown by the fall 
of the oil level in the measuring tank. The 
25 height of the oil must be recorded before start 
ing the run,' the difference in the level be 
ing the amount of oil used. This arrange 
ment requires two or more operations at each 
run in order to keep the record and is la 
borious and inaccurate. It is also the prac 
tice, in connection with the above arrange 
ment, to inject the oil supplied to the super 
heater by a jet of steam. Thisplan was never 
successful, since it was wasteful of oil and 
35 the steam present deteriorated the gas by 
causing the production of carbonic acid and 
also interfered with the proper fixing of the 
hydrocarbon gas or vapor. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
these objections and difficulties in the manu 
4O facture of gas and produce greatly improved 
results, in the uniformity of the equality or 
candle power of the gas produced, the econ 
omy of oil used and the purity and perma 
nence of the gas produced. 
One of the particular objects of my inven 
tion is to supply oil or liquid hydrocarbon un 
der uniform pressure which is automatically 
regulated to the requirements of the appa 
5o ratus by a governor on the steam supply pipe, 
so that a uniform pressure is maintained on 
3O 
45 
the steam piston, and, consequently, a uni 
form pressure maintained in the oil delivery 
pipe, the pump starting automatically when 
the pressure falls and stopping when the 55 
pressure exceeds that to which the governor 
valve is set. 
Another object of my invention is to auto 
matically register the quantity of oil deliv. 
ered by means of a meter-doing away with 6o 
the necessity of taking records of the quan 
tity of oil used from a measuring tank and 
also the necessity of intermediately filling the 
tank by a pump as is now the usual practice. 
Another object is to provide for heating 
the oil, by steam and to automatically control 
the supply of steam to the heater by means 
of a governor valve by which absolute econ 
omy in the use of Steam is secured and also 
a uniform pressure of oil or oil vapor main 
tained. The governor valve on the steam 
pipe is automatically controlled by the press 
ure in the oil delivery pipe, shutting off steam 
whenever the pressure is raised by the heat 
above that required and vice versa. 
In connection with my apparatus, I also 
provide a safety relief valve in the pipe con 
nection from the inlet of the meter to the suc 
tion pipe of the oil pump below the check 
valve of the latter. This provides for return 
ing oil to the storage tank whenever a higher 
temperature and resultant pressure occurs in 
the oil heater than is desired. By means of 
this arrangement the meter Will record oil re 
turned by registering backward. The safety 
relief valve should be adjusted to open by 
pressure of from ten to fifteen pounds in ex 
cess of the working pressure of the oil supply. 
In carrying out my invention, I preferably 
heat the oil by exhaust steam from the engine 
used in driving the blower or fan which sup 
plies air to the generator, and in practice, such 
steam has been found to be not only sufficient 
to heat the oil to a suitable temperature, but 
a portion of such steam has also been used to 
heat feed water to the boiler, 
The matter constituting my invention will 
be defined in the claims. 
I will now particularly describe my appa 
ratus by reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 represents an elevation of the oil 
95 
90 
75. 
OO 
& 
528,572 
5 
o 
feeding apparatus in connection with the su 
perheater of a water-gas apparatus. Fig. 1 
represents a sectional detail of a pressure 
regulating valve. Fig. 2 represents a top plan 
view of the apparatus. Fig. 3 represents an 
elevation of a part of the apparatus. Fig. 4 
represents an elevation of a part of the ap 
paratus showing a governor connecting with 
the oil heater. Fig. 4 represents a sectional 
detail of the governor valve. 
The superheater, B, is of that kind which 
is usually employed in water-gas generators 
and consists of an iron jacket or shell having 
a lining of fire brick and a filling of fire brick 
or tile checker work, and it has near the bot 
toman inlet pipe b, by which it connects with 
the generator. Nothere shown. The Super 
heater is provided internally with the carbu 
reting compartment or chamber, and at about 
the top of such chamber are connected the 
oil atomizing injectors, a, arranged in the Wall 
and having connecting with them the circular 
oil supply pipe O', the branch connections, of 
which are provided with valves, O. The injec 
tors, a, are also provided with the usual valves, 
having hand wheels, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2. The oil supply pipe, O, connects the heater 
C, with the annular pipe, O', and is provided 
with an operating valve, p, the stem of which 
extends up into the floor stand pipe p'. A 
steam supply pipe S, having a valve, S, con 
nects with pipe O, and the stem of said valve 
projects up into the floor stand s', the said 
stands, p' and s', being secured to the oper 
ating floor. 
The oil heater, C, preferably consists of a 
cylindrical casing supported in a suitable 
frame, and provided with upper and lower 
tube sheets, into which are set the tubes, c', 
and above and below which are formed the 
steam boxes, c and c'. The steam inlet pipe 
D, connects with the upper steam box c, and 
the drain or exhaust pipe D, connects with 
the lower box c', and such pipe may connect 
at the bottom with a steam trap, d', as shown 
in Fig. 4. 
I have found that exhaust steam from the 
engine which is used in driving the air blower, 
may be successfully used to heat the oil in 
the heater C, and propose to use such steam 
for that purpose by conducting it through the 
tubes c' of the heater. I also use live steam 
for heating the oil and in connection with a 
live steam pipe, employ a governor valve for 
automatically controlling the supply of steam 
in proportion to the pressure of vapor in the 
oil heater and in the oil delivery pipe, said 
pressure serving to automatically actuate the 
governor valve and shut off steam whenever 
the pressure is raised above that required, 
and vice versa. The governor valve E, con 
necting with steam supplypipe, D, and heater 
C is shown in Fig. 4. Governor valve E, is 
connected at the top by a pipe, d, having a 
Oil is drawn from the storage tank T, by 
r 
pump F, and is thence forced through meter 
M, into the oil heater C. The pump F, and 
meter M, are suitably supported on the 
bracket or other device and the pump con 
nects by a pipe, L, having a check valve, l, 
with oil tank T, and also by pipef, with me 
ter M. A steam supply pipe I, connects with 
the steam cylinder of the pump, and is pro 
vided with a governor or reducing valve, G, 
which automatically maintains a uniform 
steam pressure on the piston, and, conse 
quently, a fixed pressure in the oil delivery 
pipef. 
The governor valve G., (Fig. 1) is provided 
internally with a valve, g, a coiled spring, g', 
which tends to raise the valve from its seat, 
and a pressure diaphragm h. The hand 
wheel H and stem h, connect with the valve 
for properly adjusting and setting it to the 
desired pressure. The delivery pressure of 
steam or other fluid bears upon the dia 
phragm h, tending to draw the valve, g, to 
ward its seat. In opposition to this the 
spring tends to open the valve until there is 
an equilibrium established between these two 
forces. 
It will be understood that when the ten 
sion of the spring is proportioned to the 
pressure bearing on the diaphragm, a con 
stant and uniform discharge of steam is in 
sured and, therefore, a uniform pressure ex 
erted upon the piston of the steam cylinder, 
so that a constant and uniform stream or 
supply of oil is pumped from tank. T and is 
registered by the meter M, as it flows into the 
heater C. 
In case the oil becomes heated to too high 
a temperature and there results a higher 
pressure than desirable, the safety relief 
valve, n, will be opened permitting part of 
the oil to flow back through pipe N to the 
suction pipe L, below the check valve, l, thus 
relieving the excessive pressure. 
Tnder the 
above conditions the meter will credit the 
oil returned by registering backward. The 
safety relief valve is preferably adjusted to 
automatically open by a pressure of from ten 
to fifteen pounds in excess of the working 
pressure of the oil supplied to the super 
heater. 
In order to guard against an excessive press 
ure in the oil heater and pipes, I provide the 
governor valve E, having internally suitable 
seats and valves, e, also a coiled spring con 
necting with the valve stem, as shown in Fig. 
4. An equalizing pipe, d', connects pipe, d. 
with a part of the casing containing the coiled 
springs below. By means of the pipe d, con 
necting pipe O, with the top of governor E, 
the pressure in the oil delivery pipe actuates 
the valve e, in the governor, thereby wholly 
or partially shutting off the supply of steam 
to the heater. When the pressure falls, the 
valves automatically open again admitting or 
increasing the supply of steam to the heater, 
The governor valve is adjusted to close at a 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
go 
95 
CO 
I I5 
2 5 
I 30 
65 valve, d, with pipe O. 
 
528,872 
3 
5 leading into the fixing chamber. 
lower pressure than the safety relief valve, n, 
but still at a greater pressure than is required 
in the oil delivery pipe for properly forcing 
and spraying the oil through the injectors Cl, 
The quantity of oil delivered to the fixing 
chamber or other part of the gas apparatus 
in a given time, is regulated by the adjustable 
injector valves and a corresponding pressure 
Io maintained by the pump. After the valves 
and the pressure of the pump have once been 
adjusted, the operator only has to open wide 
the operating valve, p, in oil pipe O, for each 
gas making run under the ordinary Work 
I5 ing conditions. The work of the operator is 
thus greatly simplified, possibilities of error 
in records of oil are eliminated, and a uniform 
supply of oil is insured with resultant uni 
formity in the quality or candle power of the 
gas made. The use of my apparatus also pre 
vents irregularities in reports by competing 
operators of the quantity of the oil used and 
at the same time affords facilities for record 
ing the quantity of oil used during each run 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
Sara 
1. The combination with the superheater 
of a gas apparatus, of an oil injector in the 
wall thereof, a steam heated oil heater having 
a steam supply pipe, an oil delivery pipe con 
necting the heater with the injector, a gov 
ernor valve connecting the heater with said 
35 steam supply and oil delivery pipes, and 
25 for test records or other purposes. 
3O 
3. The combination with a superheater of 45 
means for supplying oil under pressure to 
the heater, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with a superheater, of 
an oil injector, a steam heated oil heater, hav 
ing steam and oil supply pipes, a meter on 4o 
said oil supply pipe, means for forcing oil 
under pressure through the meter and heater 
to the injector and suitable pipe connections, 
substantially as described. 
an oil injector, an oil heater having suitable 
supply and delivery pipes, a meter connected 
in the supply pipe, a steam pump for forcing 
oil under pressure to the superheater, and an 
automatic governor valve on the steam induc 
tion pipe of said pump for maintaining a uni 
form pressure of oil in the delivery pipe, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination with the superheater 
. 
having an oil injector, of an oil heater, a 55 
meter, a steam pump having an automatic 
governor valve, an oil tank, suitable pipe con 
nections between said devices, a return pipe 
connecting the delivery pipe with the suction 
pipe of the pump and having a safety irelief 6o 
valve for automatically returning oil in case 
of excessive pressure in the apparatus, Sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
OLAF N. GULDLIN. 
Witnesses: 
WM. J. LENNART, 
ERNEST F. LLOYD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US528972.txt	(No Model.) 
C. F. PIKE 
ORE WASHER OR CONCENTRATOR, 
No. 528,972, 
Patented Now, 13, 1894, 
 
 
 
 
  
   
l 
 
2eases as east 
- - m --- - -- 
2 22 SyN 
Z2 3. 
 
IEli 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES F. PIKE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ORE WAS HER OR CONCENTRATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 528,972, dated November 18, 1894. 
Application filed April 6, 1894, Serial No. 506,651 (No model.) 
To all, whom it nagy concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES F. PIKE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Philadel 
phia, in the county of Philadelphia and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Ore Washers 
or Concentrators; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention has relation to ore washers 
and concentrators having a feed device, a suc 
tion-discharge device, and one or more mag 
nets between said devices above and adjacent 
to the flow of ore. 
In the separation of gold from the black 
sand in placer gravel it is very difficult to 
exhaust the sand by suction from the receiv 
ing vessel, owing to the high specific gravity 
of said Sand, so that a powerful suction is nec 
essary that is liable to carry off the lighter 
particles of precious metal with the sand. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
means whereby the black-sand is practically 
held in a state of suspension at the inlet of 
the suction-discharge instead of allowing the 
same to Subside more or less after having 
passed out of the magnetic field of the mag 
net or magnets arranged between the feed and 
suction-discharge. This Iaccomplish by sub 
jecting the sand to the influence of a mag 
netic field in the immediate vicinity of the 
inlet of the suction-discharge, so that the said 
sand Will be held in suspension at the said 
inlet. It is obvious that by holding the black 
sand in Suspension at the inlet of the suction 
discharge a comparatively small or minimum 
suction force Will take the Sand out of the re 
ceiving vessel, while a very greator maximum 
suction force would be required if the sand 
were left to Subside after having passed out 
of reach of the magnetic field between the 
feed and Suction-discharge. 
The invention, therefore, consists essen 
tially in the combination with the suction 
discharge of a magnet at or near the inlet 
thereof, as hereinafter more fully described 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is had to the accompanying draw 
ings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a section of a washer and cons 
25 
35 
40 
45 
o 
centrator embodying my improvements, illus 
trating a jet-tube device as the positively act 
uated means for conveying or moving the ore 55 
from the feed device toward the discharge 
device. Fig. 2 is a sectional elevation of part 
of a washer or concentrator and amalgamator 
embodying another form of my improvements, 
the same showing a rotating pan or plate as 6o 
the positively acting means for conveying or 
moving the ore from the feed to the discharge 
devices, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the form 
of suction-discharge inlet end with magnet 
thereon, shown in Fig. 2. 
A represents a washer, concentrator or 
amalgamator of any suitable or desired kind, 
having a feed B, and a suction-discharge Cas 
the demands of service require. 
In Fig. 1 of the drawings above and adja 
cent to the bottom a' of the receiving vessel 
a is located a series of magnets G, which, 
if desired, may have their poles connected 
by a plate g, or the latter may be the top of 
the vessel u, at such location. 
3 represents the source of electrical power, 
and 1-1 the circuit connections for said mag 
nets G, the circuit including a circuit breaker 
4 for intermittently charging the magnets G 
simultaneously or successively according as 
they are in circuit with one another in any 
of the well-known ways. If desired an alter 
nating current may be used for the magnets. 
As the magnets G are alternately active 
and inactive the black-sand particles move 
to their poles and fall away therefrom to im 
part to them a zigzag movement in their travel 
to the discharge device C for maintaining 
them in a scattered or dispersed condition 
to admit of any segregated metal particles to 
separate and fall therefrom to the bottom a? 
of vessel a. The bottom a? of vessel a may 
be straight or inclined as shown in Fig. 1. 
In the latter case the metal particles pass 
Y. the incline and accumulate in a cham 
ber b. 
The circuit breaker 4 for the circuit 1-1 
or for the magnets G may be operated from 
the dynamo shaft or by separate power mech 
anism, which may be electrical or mechanical 
as desired. 
In Fig.1 a jet-tube f is illustrated entering 
the vessela below the feed B and in line with 
the path of travel of the ore from the feed to 
9o 
95 
75 
IOO 
528,972 
the discharge devices. The jet from tubef 
acts to convey the ore or cause it to move 
toward the discharge tube C until it comes 
within the influence of its suction force, and 
also assists in dispersing or scattering the 
black-sand and other particles of the ore dur 
ing such travel. 
G', Figs. 1 and 2, indicates a magnet placed 
at the inlet of the suction-discharge C where 
by the black-sand, after moving out of the 
magnetic field of magnets G is again sub 
jected to the influence of a magnetic field for 
the purpose of keeping the sand in suspen 
sion or scattered as it reaches the said inlet, so 
that but a comparatively small suction force 
is required to discharge the sand from vessel 
a, without danger of carrying away any of 
the lighter metal. 
In Fig. 2f indicates a revolving mercury 
holding vessel or amalgam plate form of 
Washer, said figure also showing a magnet G' 
located on the inlet end of the suction-dis 
charge. Fig. 3 shows an end view of such 
suction-discharge inlet end detached from 
the machine. 
In the form of suction-discharge tube C in 
Fig. 1 its outlet end is or may also be pro 
vided with a magnet for acting upon the 
black-Sand in the ore at such locality. 
As the construction and arrangement of 
parts for practicing the invention may be 
greatly varied without departing from the 
spirit thereof, I do not confine myself to the 
Same as shown and described. 
I do not claim broadly an ore washer and 
concentrator having a receiving vessel with 
or without an inclined bottom, a feed device 
- 
O 
25 
35 
4C 
45 
55 
and a suction-discharge device for said ves 
sel, and one or more magnets with circuit 
connections and a source of electric supply 
located between the feed and the discharge 
and above and adjacent to the bottom of said 
vessel, as the same forms the subject matter. 
of another pending application filed by me of 
even date herewith, Serial No. 506,654. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In an ore washer, concentrator, or amal 
gamator, the combination of a receiving ves 
sel, a suction-discharge therein, and a magnet 
at or near the inlet of said suction-discharge, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In an ore washer, concentrator or amal 
gamator, the combination of a receiving ves 
sel, a suction-dischargetherein, and a magnet 
at or near the inlet of said suction-discharge, 
and circuit connections including a source of 
electric supply for said magnet, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. In an ore washer, concentrator, or amal 
gamator, a receiving vessel, a suction-dis 
charge therein, a magnet at or near the inlet 
of said suction-discharge, and circuit con 
nections including a source of electric sup 
ply and a circuit breaker for said magnet, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES F. PIKE, 
Witnesses: 
THOS. S. RODGERS. 
S. J. WAN STAVOREN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529074.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 529,074, 
S. KRUE GER, 
SPRING MOTOR 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented N0 v, il 3, 1894, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NS 
?vvewtoz 
See anacea Aizesyear. 
8, 9 -???< C. ?. 
(No Model.) 
S. KRUE GER 
SPRING MOTOR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 529,074. 
Patented Nov. 13, 1894. 
Z 
% 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 529,074, 
S. KRUEGER. 
SPRING MOTOR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 13, 1894, 
 
 
& 
rrit roFFs Pare:Rs'eo. Foror-EMFIHo. wassHistor. o.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
S. KRUE GER, 
SPRING MOTOR. 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 529,074. 
Patented Nov. 13, 1894. 
 
?? 
2 
928) twossov 
'hM/uo 1mtoz 
8 -???C C ( 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL KRUEGER, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
S PRING - MOTOR 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,074, dated November 13, 1894. 
Application filed November 6, 1893, Serial No. 490,193, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To Cli, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL KRUEGER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
ark, in the county of Essex and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Spring-Motors; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters and figures of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
comparatively inexpensive motor for driving 
light machinery, to control and regulate the 
distribution of the power and to secure other 
advantages hereinafter referred to. 
The invention consists in the improved 
Spring motor and in the arrangement and 
combination of the several parts thereof, as 
herein set forth and finally pointed out in the 
claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, in 
which similar letters and figures of reference 
indicate corresponding parts in each of the 
Several figures where they occur, Figure1, rep 
resents, in plan, a spring motor embodying my 
improvements, the box or frame thereof being 
shown in a horizontal section. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tion taken on the line ac; Fig. 3, a section on 
the line y, and Fig. 4. a section on the line & 
of Fig. 1. 
In Said drawings A, A, A, A, and A, des 
ignate parts of the box or frame in which 
the Working parts are mounted. The power 
Springs, four in number, only two of which, 
A' and C', are shown in the drawings, are 
firmly secured at their extremities to shafts 
A, B, C, D, respectively, and to heads, (a por 
tion only of which are shown, a and c) which 
are keyed or otherwise secured to sleeves e, 
f, g, h, carried by and rotating upon said 
shafts as the springs relax or are being wound 
up. The power from the springs is trans 
mitted to a driving shaft E, centrally located 
with respect to the shafts A, B, C, D, by 
means of gears 1, 2, 3, 4, which engage a pin 
ion 5, carried by said driving shaft, said gears 
being also carried by said sleeves e,f, g, h, 
and connected with the said heads, adjacent 
to them, by arms i, j, k, l, or the said heads 
may be enlarged and formed into gears in 
stead of having them separate, as will be read 
ily understood upon reference to Figs. 1 and 
2. The power is utilized for other purposes 
by means of a belt-pulley, F, keyed or secured 
to said driving shaft E, as indicated in the 
drawings. 
The motor may be stopped when desired 
by a brake, G, working in a suitable frame 
H, and operated by a screw I, so as to engage 
with a wheel, J, keyed to the driving shaft, as 
indicated in Fig. 1, or by any other appropri 
ate means. 
The shafts A, B, C, D, are journaled in 
boxes or bearings seated in the sides A* of 
the frame or box in which the working parts 
are inclosed, and carry ratchet wheels L which 
engage pawls m, to hold said shafts when the 
springs are wound up, by means of a crank, 
(not shown) or are under tension, as will be 
understood. Said pawls are held in engage 
ment with said ratchets by suitable springs in. 
The center or driving shaft, E, is journaled 
in portions A and A of said box or frame or 
in boxes carried thereby. 
The mechanism for regulating the speed or 
the distribution of power is as follows:- 
Upon the said sleeves, e,f, g, h, are secured 
gears 6, 7, 8, 9, which also connect with the 
heads, adjacent to them, by means of arms , 
f', k', l, Figs. 1 and 3, or they may be integral 
with said heads, and engage, in pairs with 
pinions O and p carried by shafts o' and p', 
journaled in the parts A and A, as seen in 
said Figs. I and 3. Said shafts o' and p' also 
carry toothed wheels, q, which engage with 
pawls q', the latter being held in such en 
gagement by a Spring r, the pressure of which 
may be increased or diminished by means of 
a screw S, as Will be understood upon refer 
ence to Figs. 1 and 4. By this arrangement 
it will be seen that the power exerted by the 
springs is controlled and regulated by the 
pressure of the pawls g upon the ratchet 
wheels g, said pressure being regulated by 
the screw S. The power maybe further regul 
lated by winding up the springs alternately, 
for example, when the motor is started with 
all the springs fully wound up and has run, 
say for one hour or until one quarter of their 
power is spent, one of the springs may be 
I. ? 
IS 
25 
45 
90 
95 
od 
529,074 
each of said pinions being in engagement 
with two of said gear wheels, and each pin 
ion provided with a toothed wheel, a spring 
actuated pawl in engagement with each 
toothed wheel, and means for regulating the 
pressure of the pawls upon said toothed 
wheels, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a spring motor, the combination, with 
a frame, of a shaft journaled therein, four 
spring actuated drums and gear wheels for 
operating said shaft, a pair of regulators for 
controlling the drums and gear wheels, each 
of said regulators being provided with a 
toothed wheel, a pawl for each toothed wheel, 
a spring having its end in engagement with 
said pawl, and a screw for regulating the 
pressure of said spring and pawls against Said 
wheels, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 28th day of 
October, 1893. 
SAMUEL KRUEGER. 
Witnesses: 
OLIVER, DRAKE, 
ROBERT SOLLBERGER. 
35 
4 ? 
45 
again fully Wound up and in another hour 
another be wound up, and so on, as will be 
understood upon reference to Figs. 1, 3, and 4. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and wish to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a spring motor, the combination, with 
a frame, of a series of shafts journaled therein, 
four of which are each provided with a sleeve 
and one is provided with a pinion, a spring 
actuated drum and a pair of gear wheels on 
each sleeve, one wheel of each of said pairs 
of wheels being in engagement with said pin 
ion, two of the shafts of said series being pro 
vided with pinions in engagement with the 
other wheels, and means for controlling the 
movement of each of said two pinions, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a spring motor, the combination, with 
a frame, of a series of shafts journaled therein, 
four of which are each provided with a pair 
of spring actuated gear wheels, and one of 
which is provided with a pinion in mesh with 
one wheel of each of said pairs of wheels, a 
pair of the shafts of said series having pinions 
in engagement with the other gear wheels, 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529175.txt	(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
MECHANISM FOR TESTING AND RECORDING PROPERTIES OF FLOUR, 
Patented Nov. 13, 1894, 
No. 529, 175, 
J. H0 G ARTH. 
& 
YA 
c 
 
IST 
I 
' N VENT O R 
The roaris Peters Co., Photo-THo, washington, D.c. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MECHANISM FOR TESTING AND RECORDING PROPERTIES OF FOUR, 
Patented Nov. 13, 1894. 
No. 529, 175, 
J. HO GARTH, 
 
S 53 
f 
S N R S 
d 
 
S 3 
  
 
  
 
 
s 
 
 
  
MV NESSES 
 
 
 
 
2zzzzzzzzzzz22 
4 , A  '% 
2 
?TA - ". 
9 
| N VENTOR 
???? 
??? 
?? 
2 
S 
ZA 
?? 
THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHC, washington. D. c. 
(No Model.) 
MECHANISM FOR, TESTING AND REC0RIDING PR0PERTIES 0F FI,0 UR. 
Patented Nov. 13, 1894, 
No. 529,175, 
J. HO GARTH. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
WTNESS ES 
??????? 
the NORRIS PETERS co. Photo-li-iowashington, p. c. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
MECHANISM FOR TESTING AND RECORDING PROPERTIES OF FLOUR, 
Patented Nov. 13, 1894. 
No. 529,175, 
J, HO GARTH, 
 
FC 
.12. 
 
YYYYYLLLLYLLLLLYLLLLLLLLLLLLYL0YLLLLYYYLLLYYLLLLmLLLLLLLLLLLLLYYLLLLYYLLLLYYYYLLL%?*|- 
???2???? ? 
WTNESS ES 
 
 
 
 
 
    
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
222222222222222222222222224 
The Norris Peters co, PHoto-LTHC. WASH:NGTON. b. c. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
MECHANISM FOR TESTING AND RECORDING PROPERTIES OF FLOUR, 
No. 529, 175, 
Patented Now, 13, 1894. 
J. HO GARTH, 
 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
(No Model.) 
MECHANISM FOR TESTING AND RECORDING PROPERTIES OF FLOUR, 
No. 529,175. 
Patented Nov. 13, 1894, 
J. H0 GAIRTH. 
F. G.5. 
the Norris Peters co, PHoro-LTHo, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES HO GARTH, OF KIRKCALID Y, s COTLAND. 
, MECHANISM FOR TESTING AND RECORDING PROPERTIES OF FLOUR, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,175, dated November 13, 1894. 
Application filed June 30, 1892, Serial No. 438,518, (Nomodel.) Patented in England April 20, 1891,No. 6,784, and in Belgium 
- 
March 16, 1892, No. 98,851, 
I. ? 
- 
To all who?, it ??? ??? ??r?: 
Beit known that I, JAMESHOGARTH, miller 
- and corn merchant, a subject of the Queen 
of Great Britain and Ireland, of West Mills, 
Kirkcaldy, Fifeshire, Scotland, have invented 
5 
certain Mechanisms for Testing and Record 
ing the Properties of Flour, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
Patents have been obtained for said inven 
tion in Great Britain, No. 6,784, dated April 20, 
1891, and in Belgium, No. 98,851, dated March 
16, 1892. 
This invention has reference to and com 
prises certain improvements upon the means 
and appliances used in my system of testing 
and recording the characteristic properties 
of flour described in the specification of my 
Patent No. 474,636, dated May 10, 1892, and 
has mainly for its object to simplify and im 
prove the construction and action of said ap 
pliances and render them more beneficially 
useful; and in order to enable others skilled 
in the art to which my invention relates to 
understand how it may be carried into prac 
tice, I have hereunto appended explanatory 
drawings in which the same reference letters 
are used to indicate corresponding parts in all 
the figures where shown, and so far as possi 
ble to corresponding parts and their letters 
of reference in the specification of the said 
former patent, so that many of these parts 
will not herein require to be particularly de 
scribed. 
Figures 1 and 2 are a sectional elevation 
and a plan, and Figs. 3 and 4 transverse sec 
tions taken near the lines 3-3 and 4-4 re 
spectively of Figs. 1 and 2 illustrating an 
improved simplified form of flour testing ma 
chine; and Figs. 5 and 6 show front and end 
sectional elevations of a modified form of a 
flourtesting machine. Figs. 7 and 8 show front 
and end sectional elevations of mechanism 
used for feeding water to the kneading ma 
chine, and Fig. 9 shows a detached end eleva 
tion of the indicating dial mechanism. Figs. 
10 and 11 show sectional elevations of water 
feeding mechanism, and Fig. 12 an elevation 
of a portable parallel rod used for displacing 
the water during the testing operations. Figs. 
13 and 14 are a front elevation and plan of 
the kneading mechanism. Fig. 15 is a sec 
tional elevation of a modified form of knead 
ing machine, and Figs. 16 and 17 are a side 
section and end view of the diagram barrel 
and fittings. Figs 18 and 19 show side and 55 
plan views, and Fig.20 an end view of record 
ing mechanism. Fig. 21 is a sectional eleva 
tion of an improved form of dynamometer. 
Referring to Figs.1 and 2 the improvements 
consist first in dispensing with a separate 6c 
diagram cylinder F used in my said former 
patent, and converting the dynamometer D 
into a combined long diagram cylinder F and 
dynamometer D, fitted preferably in its one 
end as shown in Fig. 1. Either the bevel or 65 
the spur gear constructions describei in refer 
ence to Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9 respectively of the 
specification of said former patent the latter 
of which I have shown here as fitted in the 
one end of the cylinder F might be used. 7o 
This cylinder F, Figs. 1 to 4, is oscillated 
through the dynamometer D, the first and sec 
ond motion shafts C, C' being rotated loose in 
pillow blocks A, A8. In carrying this arrange 
ment into practice, I mount the whole on a 75 
light rectangular hollow plate frame A, pref 
erably secured on the top of a wooden open 
frame Z, of a convenient height of the floor 
Z', for the operator to work the machine, as 
seen more particularly in the end section 8o 
Fig. 3. On one end of the frame A8 I 
mount the kneading machine A, by its end. 
bracket A', to the pillow block frame A, A, 
screwed direct to the one end of the plate 
frame A. The bearing block A, carries one 85 
boss end F, of the diagram cylinder F, which 
also answers as the end journal bearing of 
the shaft C, which drives the spindles act of 
the kneading machine A. The other end of 
this shaft C is carried in the inner boss D7 go 
of the case of the dynamometer D and secured 
to the internal toothed wheel d' of the dyna 
mometer D. The small pinion dof the dyna 
mometer D, is secured on the inner end of the 
first motion shaft C, rotating loose in the end 95 
boss F of the cylinder F. This first motion 
shaft C is carried in the bearing pillow blocks 
...A, A, projecting up from the end standard 
piece A secured to the other end of the base 
plate A, the shaft C being provided with fast roo 
and loosepulleys C', C'. The adjustable heli 
cal spring E, as shown more particularly in 
25 
35 
45 
 
529, 175 
7 ? 
75 
Fig. 3, is here mounted in a vertical tube D 
secured at D to the frame A and the end E 
of the spring E is secured to the lower end D 
of the tube D, by an adjustable nut E. The 
5 other moving end E of the spring has one end 
of the cord D' attached to it which cord is 
carried up and passed round and attached to 
the cylinder F. Thus while the first motion 
shaft C, is driven at a regular speed the dia 
gram cylinder F is turned or oscillated more 
or less according to the power taken to drive 
the kneading machine A. 
The marking pencile, Figs. 1 to 4 and 20, 
travels at a slow uniform rate of speed lon 
gitudinally across the diagram paper X, Xby 
means of a screw spindle fearried in bearing 
blocks A, A secured to the bed plate A, the 
block A being formed on the bracket A. 
The spindle f may be driven by a bevel wheel 
2Of' and pinion f the former secured on the 
end of the screw shaft f, and the other on a 
transverse spindlef which is carried in an 
eccentric bush bearing f" mounted in the 
bracket A'. This bearing f is turned by a 
25 handle f to put the wheels f' and f into or 
out of gear with each other. The other end 
of the spindlefhas mounted thereon a screw 
wheel c' gearing into a screw c on the first 
motion shaft C so as to drive the screw spin 
dle fat a slow uniform rate, and thus move 
the pencil e parallel to the axis of the dyna 
mometer cylinder Facross the lines y y on 
the divided paper, secured on the cylinder 
F. This would give line diagrams with the 
zero line at O O", the lines varying according 
to the stiffness of the dough and power re 
quired to drive the mixer A. The cord D' 
and spring E are connected tangentially di 
rect from the dynamometer D, or cylinder 
F, without the separate diagram barrel and 
its gearing, required in the arrangement 
described in the specification of the former 
patent. 
The pencil e is carried on the upper end of 
45 a spring blade e' (Figs. 1, 2, and 4), having 
its lower end secured to a slow moving side 
bracket e working in a long planed guide e 
in the bed plate A, as seen particularly in 
Figs. 2 and 4. 
5o . In Figs. 18, 19 and 20 is shown a slight modi 
fication in which the spring bladee' is re 
placed by a weighted lever e'. The upper 
arms of this brackete, Figs. 2, 4, 18, 19, and 
20 are steadied by bush eyes on the outer 
55 circumference of the screw of the spindie if 
and a screw bush e, to work into this thread 
is mounted between these arms of the bracket 
e on an eccentric spindle e', with a small 
weighted handle e om one end, which when 
turned in one direction keeps this bush al 
ways into gear with the screw thread of the 
spindlef. Referring to Figs, 2 and 4, this 
traversing bracket e carries a lateral hori 
zontal index plate.g, with an open recess g 
65 in it fitted with a sheet of mica or glass. In 
line with the pointer e, across the mica or 
glass, a hair or fine wire S is stretched and 
tightened up by the pinching screw at g to 
pass over one or more fixed or adjustable di 
vided scales s', s, s', mounted on the bed 
plate A' just below the traversing plate g, g 
to set the pencile to start forming the graphic 
diagram at zero on these scales and the paper, 
and by the hair line S read on the scale the 
space traversed and time taken by the pencil, 
and the quantity of water used, as will here 
inafter be described. Thus in this arrange 
ment, Figs. 1 to 4, it will be seen that the dia 
gram paper X which is mounted by india 
rubber bands X', or other equivalent, at its 
ends to the cylinder F, requires to have its 
wide equidistant division lines f, gy formed 
on the paper in the transverse direction 
round the cylinder F at right angles to its 
axis starting from the Zero line O O' on 
the paper, which indicates the time taken to 
form the diagram, and also the water added 
to the sample of flour being treated in the 
mixer A, during that time, while the pencil 
is moving at a regular speed parallel to the 
zero line O, O'across these lines y J. While 
the closer equally divided lines ac, a. are or 
may be formed on the diagram paper equi 
distant from the parallel to the zero line O, O' 
and axis of the cylinder F, and indicate the 
varying power exerted while the pencil e is 
forming the undulating graphical diagram 
across these lines by the varying oscillation 
of the cylinder F. These lines and divisions 
y, y and ac, ac may or may not be first put 
on the paper to suit the scales and tables it is 
determined to work the machine and all the 
samples of flour upon, as described in my 
said former patent, as plain paper may be put 
on the moving barrel or surface, and the zero 
lines or points only put on the paper at start 
ing by the pencil e itself; and have the last 
or maximum or any desired intermediate of 
these time and pressure lines put on by the 
pencile after finishing the diagram according 
to the scale used as says' which is shown as 
divided to indicate the number of cubic centi 
meters of water added regularly to the sample 
of flour in the mixer A, as say forty grams 
during the time the pencil e and index lines 
are traversing to any division on the scales' 
up to thirty-five or forty centimeters, 
The scales' is or may be divided to indicate 
the percentage of water required to be added 
to the sack of flour, and scaless, in like man 
ner can be divided to indicate the number of 
loaves of a desired fixed weight to be obtained 
from the sack of flour of any particular sample 
of flour that may be taken or indicated by the 
scales s' used; but of course other scales may 
be used, and tables may be made out and 
printed for use instead of the scaless, s; but 
whichever are used they must be made out 
from tested experience gained from the form 
of and power and maximum pressures indi 
cated by the diagrams and which gives the 
relative qualities of the flours as to the gluten 
and starch in them. 
Another improvement consists in various 
?? 
35 
95 
CO 
IO 5 
II 5 
I 25 
 
529,175 
3 
7 ? 
75 
simple arrangements of the fittings in connec 
tion with the vertical parallel cylinder of 
water for delivering a uniform quantity of 
water from same and feeding it to the dough 
mixer A, and sample of flour in it, during the 
time of taking the diagrams. One way of do 
ing this consists in mounting the parallel meas 
uring cylinder B, to move vertically within 
a stationary steadying bracket B, screwed 
to the sole plate A (Figs. 1, 2, and 3). This 
cylinder B has an open funnel filling mouth 
B at top, and has its lower end connected 
at B to a small rubber or other elastic tube b', 
which tube b' has its other end connected to 
the lower end of the stationary small metal 
tube b which supplies water to the kneading 
machine A, this elastic moving tube b' acting 
as an inverted U-shaped siphon, as seen par 
ticularly in Fig. 3, the upper delivery end b, 
of the tube b, always determining the height 
of the water in the moving cylinder B. The 
cylinder B is moved upward at a uniform rate 
from its lowest position shown in Fig. 1, when 
filled with water at the filling mouth B to de 
liver the water regularly therefrom. This up 
Ward movement is made by forming a toothed 
rack B, Figs. 1 and 2, on its one side, actuated 
by a pinion B so mounted on a shallow spin 
dle or sleeve b carried on a driving spindleb, 
rotating in bearings in the standard B, as to 
be driven by the spindleb!. The bevel or face 
wheel b on one end of the spindle b is actu. 
ated by a small pinion at f on the overhung 
end of the slow motion screw shaftf. The 
water cylinder B is thus raised and delivers 
the water from the pipe b, b into the dough 
mixer slowly and at a uniform rate. The screw 
spindle f is turned to move the pencil e in the 
direction of the arrow across the cylinder F in 
Fig. 2. A hand leverb, fulcrumed at its lower 
end b, is connected to a grooved clutch ring b 
at the center by pinching screws; and this 
clutch slides on the squared end of the spindle 
b' and takes into the hollow spindle b of the 
pinion B, so as to engage or disengage the 
pinion B and the spindle b", as the lever b is 
shifted in either direction. 
In some cases the cylinder F has a tendency 
to recoil suddenly backward with the power. 
of the helical spring E when the power re 
quired to drive the kneading machine A is 
suddenly released. To prevent this shock to 
the cylinder F, and its overrunning the action 
of the spring E and the cord D', by one ar 
arrangement as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, Imount 
a stop bracketh on one end of the cylinder F 
over the stem h of a helical springh mounted 
in an adjustable cylinder case hsecured ath 
to the base plate A'; or a piston and air cyl 
inder could be used instead of the spring h" 
which arrangement stops the cylinder F 
gently and prevents this over recoil. Another 
means of accomplishing the same result is 
seen in the sectional elevation, Fig. 3, and con 
sists in Securing one end of a cord H, to the 
boss F of the cylinder F, and winding it a half 
turn or so in the reverse direction to that in 
which the cord D' of the spring E, is wound 
round the cylinder F and insecuring the lower 
end of the cord H to an adjustable screw spin 
dle H' passed through a fixed rubber or other 
elastic ring H, with adjustable hand screw 
nut H below. This rubber elastic ring Hacts 
to prevent this over back recoil of the cylin 
der F. 
Instead of using a spiral, helical, or coiled 
spring E, to act against the power of the dyna 
mometer D to give approximately divided dis 
tances on the graphical diagram paper, pro 
portionate to the force in pounds exerted in 
mixing the dough, and indicated by the dyna 
mometer as described in reference to the pre 
vious figures hereof and in the specification of 
the said former patent, by further improve 
ments I accomplish this more accurately by 
improved arrangements of an accumulative 
weight or weights. 
Referring to Figs. 5 and 6, these show views 
of one of my flour testing machines, analogous 
to that shown in Figs.1 and 2, but as fitted with 
an arrangement of improved weight levers. 
This arrangement consists in mounting on the 
frame Z, below the sole plate A, a cylinder K 
and attaching a cord or preferably a chain D 
wound round the barrel F, to a form of piston, 
K' working in the cylinder K (which cylinder 
is a little larger in diameter than the piston) 
as indicated in dotted lines in these figures. 
This cylinder K would be open at the upper 
end and closed at the lower end to act as a 
steadiment and air cushion for preventing jar 
in the working of the piston and cord while the 
different strains were on it. A cord or chain 
D' from the lower side of this piston K' would 
pass through a small hole in the bottom of the 
cylinder K, tangentially down to and round 
an oscillating grooved quadrant K mounted 
on a transverse boss and spindle K. 
The 
quadrant K is provided with radial arms or 
websleading down to a weight K, mounted on 
the quadrant below the fulcrum spindle K, in 
its normal inactive Zero position as shown in 
this position in the figures. The chain D 
would preferably be carried round and up the 
back web or arm of the quadrant K, and se 
cured to a bracket near the fulcrum by an ad 
justable small crew spindle K', and securing 
jam nuts to bring all to their normal zero posi 
tion for starting the diagram on the barrel F of 
the dynamometer D. 
The grooved quadrant K might be formed 
in various ways as by turning the segmental 
web of the quadrant and mounting or secur 
ing on its side segmental plates K, to form 
the groove for the chain D; and the boss of 
the quadrant Would be mounted on a steel 
spindle K, mounted to oscillate on antifric 
tion rollers c, carried on studs in brackets lic' 
secured to horizontal bars Z of the frame Z; 
or as shown in Figs. 7 and 8, the spindle K5 
of the differential weighted segment K might 
be mounted on fine steel centers of screw 
studski'screwed into brackets k in the frame. 
Z, and have jam nuts ki. 
90 
95 
? ? ? 
Io 5 
II. ? 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
I 30 
5 
. ? 
55 
?? 
 
529,175 
75 
95 
? ? 
When the machine was started and the 
dough increased in stiffness, the dynamom 
eter D would wind up the cord and turn the 
quadrant and weight up, the weight always 
increasing as it rose from the normal position 
below the fulcrum toward the tangential po 
sition of the cord under the cylinder as in 
dicated by the dotted lines K9, K, in Fig. 5; 
but by preference the quadrant K would be 
made of such a size that it and the weight K? 
and chain D would not require to turn more 
than sixty degrees upward from the vertical 
position so as to give approximately equal dis 
tance of leverage for equal pounds of pressure 
of increase in weight. A cord H, Fig. 6, is 
preferably wound round a grooved pulley II 
on the diagram cylinder F in the opposite di 
rection to that of the said weighted chain D', 
as before described, and have a screw spindle 
H' at its free end passed through a fixed 
bracket or part of the frame Z with adjust 
able securing nuts H on it, either with or 
without an india rubber or spiral spring H at 
its end, as shown in Fig. 3, below the bracket, 
to act and maintain the barrel or dynamom 
eter at its said normal zero position, and 
check the recoil action of the weight and 
quadrant, This spring would come into ac 
tion as the weight K, on the cord D' and the 
quadrant leverK* fell toits normal lowest zero 
position and prevent any sudden jerk of the 
weight and barrel in their back reaction to 
this position and this arrangement would 
be suitable for any or all of the accumulative 
weights or the springs; or this weighted lever 
IK might come back against a stretched rub 
ber disk or cushion H'secured to the side of 
the frame Z. 
Instead of using a chain. D, a toothed seg 
mentlk may be mounted round the periphery 
of the quadrant K', as shown in Figs. 7 and 8, 
and this toothed segment K' works up 
through a slot in the bed frane Z of the ma 
chine, and gears into a corresponding toothed 
wheel K, on the case of the dynamometer D 
or on the second motion shaft Cactuated 
through the pinions of the dynamometer. 
This arrangement is very suitable for the sim 
ple arrangement of attaching, the dynamom 
eter direct to the spindle C' of the dough 
mixing vessel A, without a separate indicat 
ing diagram barrel, and suitable for being 
driven by a crank handle C, on the spindle 
C, of the dynamometeras shown instead of the 
belt pulleys C, Cof the former arrangements; 
and a fixed radial pointer 2 may be attached 
to one of the bearing brackets A or other 
fixed part of the frame, and have the divis 
ions of pounds shown at 2', cut or indicated 
on the radial end of the dynamometer barrel 
D, or on its outer periphery at one side as 
shown in the detached end view Fig. 9. In 
Figs. 7 and 8 is also shown part of the mech 
anism for another arrangement for feeding 
the water to the kneading machine. A. In 
this arrangement a toothed wheel is turned 
by a pinion i on the first motion shaft C of 
the dynamometer D, and is made to turn a 
screw nut on the screw spindle i mounted 
on the outer end of a liquid tight piston B 
working in a bored steel or other metal cyl 
inder B filled with mercury, the cylinder B' 
as well as the screw end of the spindle and 
the nut being carried on brackets at B in the 
axial line of the cylinder. The inner end of 
the cylinder B is fitted with a vertical stuff. 
ing box B and parallel small glass tube B' 
for containing water on the top of the mer 
cury. This tube B' is filled by a small fun 
nel Bat the top of the tube, which a little 
below the top has a delivery branch b, U' for 
delivering the water into the vessel of the 
dough mixer A; and as the piston B is regu 
larly and slowly screwed into the cylinderB, 
the mercury will rise up in the glass tube B 
at a uniform rate and deliver the water also 
uniformly into the dough mixer A. The glass 
tube B' is divided and marked lineally into 
inches or fractions of inches on one side, and 
the rise of the surface level of the mercury 
will show the amount delivered during any 
period of the regular turning of the machine. 
Fig. 10 shows an arrangement of the par 
allel vertical water cylinder and its fittings, 
in which the measuring cylinder B' is mount 
ed to reciprocate water tight (by a stuffing 
box B at its lower end) on a small fixed in 
ternal parallel tube B', secured at its lower 
end B to the sole plate A and connected by 
a lateral branch and cock below the stuffing 
box B of the water cylinder B, to the fixed 
tube b, b which delivers the water into the 
kneader A. The inner tube B', has small 
holes B", near its top, through which the wa 
ter flows from the outer cylinder B', as it is 
raised by the cord G, the cord in this case 
being connected to the open filler end B, of 
the cylinder B to raise it. The level of the 
water in the inner tube B' is always that of 
the delivery nozzle b". 
Fig. 11 shows a water feeding arrangement 
in which the cylinder B' is shown as fixed 
vertically at B'at its lower close end to the 
soleplate A, with a small nipple branch at 
B87 to which one end of the flexible U-tubeb' 
is attached, the other end being attached by 
a branch nipple to a weighted coupling B', 
connected to the lower end of the delivery 
tube b, b', which in this case is made to move 
in parallel guides a projecting from the side 
of the kneading chest A, instead of moving 
the cylinder B as in the first case. The up 
per delivery end b of this tube b is connected 
to the lower end of the lowering and raising 
cord G; this cord being wound round any 
pulley or cylinder driven at a uniform rate 
by the gearing during the taking of the dia 
gram and a revolution of the cylindor F, so 
as to lower the tube b, b and deliver the 
water from the cylinder Bat a slow uniform 
I 
rate by the nozzle b" into the kneader A, the 
level of the water falling in the cylinder B, 
as the nozzle b" is lowered, or this lowering 
of the cord might be effected as described 
2 
2 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
529,175 
O 
further on in reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 12 
shows an elevation of a portable parallel rod 
or spindle R, which may be of any suitable 
diameter for insertion into any of the water 
cylinders preferably of the vertical class as 
shown dotted in in Fig. 11 with a band and 
cruciform top for resting in the funnel end 
of these Water cylinders for varying the area 
and giving any regular displacement of the 
Water from these cylinders during the testing 
of a sample and taking of a diagram. 
In the case in which the pencil e is moved 
by a slide framee, and screw fat a uniform 
Speed as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 4, and as 
modified and shown in partial side plan and 
end Views in Figs. 18 to 20, one end of the 
cord G may be attached to this traversing 
frame 6 and brought over a guide pulley G, 
Fig. 18, with its other end attached to the 
lower part of the delivery water tube B to 
raise it direct and deliver the water regularly 
from the tubes b, b into the kneading vessel 
A, instead of by the rack and pinion B, B8, 
described and shown in reference to Figs.  
and 2. 
As shown in Figs. 13 and 14 the screw spin 
dle f may be elongated and have a finer pitch 
Screw at b formed on it so as to move a screw 
bush socket b formed with a lateral stud so 
as to actuate a parallel piston or plunger B41 
Working in a stationary horizontal water sup 
ply cylinder B0 secured at B48 to the sole 
plate A, so as to discharge the water at a 
uniform rate through the tube b', b, b9 to the 
kneading vessel A; and formed with a filler 
B' and filling tube and tap b5 at the other 
end of the cylinder F, analogous to that shown 
in Figs, 1 and 2 of the specification of the 
aforesaid patent, but actuated in this way 
direct without the complicated gearing of 
Wheels and pinions shown in that arrange 
ment. The diagram may be moved horizon 
tally and the pencil reciprocate over its sur 
face, or the diagram may be stationary and 
the pencil traverse horizontally and vertically 
OVerit. 
As shown in Fig.15 I construct the kneader 
.A. in the form of a deep hollow vessel A, F 
of cylindrical shape, with an annular series 
of vertical pins or blades a projecting up 
from its bottom part and mounted loose by a 
deep eye on the lower end of a vertical spin 
dle T, L, working in a footstep bearing at L 
bolted to the main framing Z carrying the 
whole, the upperpart F of the vessel A which 
answers as the diagram barrel for taking the 
diagrams on, being carried by a journal boss 
at F", in a bracket M', projecting from the 
main standard Mbolted to the frame Z and 
carrying the driving gearing. 
While the stirrer or agitator consists of a 
disk L, secured by an eye E to the spindle 
L., L', and carrying a number of radial arms, 
preferably two annular rings or frames a 
projecting down on each side of the lower 
arms at the top part L' of the vertical spin 
dle L is carried up through the top journal 
F', of the case F, as a hollow spindle with a 
bevel wheel Lion it actuated by a correspond 
ing pinion L on a first motion driving shaft 
C which is provided with fast and loose belt 
pulleys C, and C3. In this case the water is 
fed to the kneading machine from a tube b 
through the open top of the hollow shaft L', 
which has a hole or nozzle at b for the escape 
of water to the kneading machine. The 
lower part of the casing has a pulley fitted 
on it, to make it act instead of the dynamome 
ter and to which the one end of the chain D' 
is attached, and carried around a quadrant 
sector weighted lever K, analogous to that 
described in reference to Figs. 5 and 6, full 
crumed to adjustable screw stud centers at 
K in brackets K*, projecting down inside 
the main frame Z, but this chain or cord D' 
might be connected to any of the arrange 
ments of springs E, described in the specifi 
cation of the said former patent, and in ref 
erence to Figs. 1 to 4 of this specification. 
The mechanism is made to move a pencil e 
and its carrying spring arme' at a uniform 
rate over the paper on the barrel F, the pencil 
being moved by a parallel traveling nut if 
working on and actuated by the vertical screw 
spindle f carried in a journal and footstep 
bearings in the bracket f bolted to the 
bracketM at the top, and actuated at a slow 
uniform rate by a large spur wheell, on the 
spindle f and pinion l on the upper end of 
the spindle L'. The varying action or 
heights of the diagram hereinbefore de 
scribed as indicated by the lines acac are here 
produced by the varying action of the case 
A, and the weighted lever quadrant K. 
When this arrangement is used without the 
diagram barrel Fa pointer may be used with 
an indicating dial on the top closed end of 
the case A. In this case also a pointer and 
divisions on the end or circumference of the 
barrel A, may be made to indicate the power 
being taken to knead the dough, and espe 
cially the maximum power taken, in the same 
manner as the pointer of a steam pressure 
gage indicates pressure, and analogous to that 
shown and described in reference to Fig. 9. 
Instead of mounting the bosses F, F of the 
barrel F, as previously described, they may 
as shown in section and end view Figs. 16 
and 17, be mounted on antifriction pulleys 
k0 carried in studs ic projecting from the 
pillow blocks. A carrying the axial shafts C 
or C of the diagram barrel F. 
The dynamometer D is improved to make 
it more suitable for mounting the said gear 
ing wheel or wheels, or scroll cams or pulleys 
for the wire cord D' on the revolving axis for 
actuating the toothed racks, or other equiva 
lent of the weights of the dynamometer here 
in before described; and this improvement 
consists informing one of the actuating shafts 
of the dynamometer D, preferably the driv 
ing shaft Chollow, while the driven shaft C 
might either be solid or hollow, which actu 
ates the agitators of the mixing machine A, 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
?? 
75 
9o 
95. 
OO 
T I. ? 
II5 
(25 
 
6 
529, 175 
and the hollow driving shaft C, might either 
be actuated by a belt pulley or pulley's C 
mounted on it, or by gearing. In this ar 
rangement, referring to Fig. 2), I mount with 
5 in the hollow shaft C, a solid shaft or spindle 
d having cross arms di, d5, at its inner end 
carrying the axes of the bevel or spur pin 
ions d', d'of the arrangement shown in Figs. 
6 and 7 of and described in the specification 
Io of my said former patent, gearing into and 
within or between the driving wheel d and 
the driven wheel d' of the dynamometer D. 
The inner end of this solid shaft dmay 
either be overhung at the cross arms or have 
I5 a journal don its extreme inner end, work 
ing into a hollow bearing in the adjacent end 
of the driven shaft C', actuating the mixer 
A. This solid shaft d" would project out be 
yond the extreme end of the hollow driven 
20 shaft C, preferably carried on journal bear 
ing blocks outside. On this projecting end 
of the solid shaft d would be mounted very 
conveniently a grooved pulley D for the cord 
D', of any of the gearing for actuating the 
25 accumulative weights of the dynamometer. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In an apparatus for testing and record 
ing the properties of flour, the combination 
of a cylinder adapted to have a diagram 
30 paper mounted on its circumference and a 
dynamometer formed in one with the cylin 
der, with a traveling pencil to mark on the 
paper mounted on the circumference of the 
cylinder, substantially as and for the pur 
35 poses set forth. 
3. In an apparatus for testing and record- 45 
2. In an apparatus for testing and record 
ing the properties of flour, the combination 
of a dynamometer and a dough mixer, with 
a water tube, a rod for varying the volume 
of liquid in the same, a pipe connection from 40 
the water tube to the mixer and means for 
delivering the water from the tube to the 
dough mixer at a uniform rate, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
ing the properties of flour, the combination 
of a dynamometer, a dough mixer and in 
verted siphon or U-shaped water tube and de 
vices for raising and lowering one arm of 
said tube, said devices being operated from 5o 
the prime movingshaft of the apparatus, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. In an apparatus for testing and record 
ing the properties of flour, the combination 
of a dough mixer. with a dynamometer, a 55 
variably acting quadrant lever and means 
for transmitting motion from the dynamome 
ter cylinder to the circumference of and act 
uating said weighted quadrant lever, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 60 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JAMES IIO GARTHI. 
Witnesses: 
THos. S. DUFFIE, 
R. C. THOMSON, 
land, N. B. " 
Both of 96 Buchanan Street, Glasgow, Scot 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529275.txt	(No Model.) 
H. C. KENNEDY & G. W. R.0LETTER. 
STREET CAR, FENDER, 
No. 529,275. 
M 
Za, Z 
Patented Nov. 13, 1894. 
Ea sizzz Kws: 
geolor 
A. EEEE Eeef --- 
22:SS2 
 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. KENNEDY AND GEORGE W. ROLETTER, OF PHILADELPHIA, 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
STREET CAR FSN DER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,275, dated November 13, 1894 
Application filed July 10, 1894, Serial No. 517,162, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that we, HENRY C. KENNEDY 
and GEORGE W. ROLETTER, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Philadelphia, in the 
county of Philadelphia and State of Pennsyl 
Vania, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Street-Car Fenders; and we 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
. 
This invention relates to certain new an 
useful improvements in fenders for street 
railways, and especially to fenders which are 
designed to be earried beneath the platform 
of the car and which do not project out be 
yond the front or rear ends of the platforms. 
We also aim to provide means for throwing 
objects which are likely to come in contact 
With the sides of the fender, which is made 
preferably, in a V-shape, from the tracks, 
rather than to scoop them up or catch them. 
A further object of the invention resides in 
the provision of an elastic strip which is made 
desirably, of thick rubber, and is held at the 
forward end or apex of the fender, so that 
When an object strikes the free edge of the 
said Strip, the elastic piece will bend to one 
side thus avoiding a heavy jar to both the 
object and to the fender. 
To these ends and to such others as the in 
Vention may pertain, the same consists fur 
ther in the novel construction, combination 
and adaptation of parts as will be hereinafter 
more fully described and then specifically de 
fined in the appended claims. 
We clearly illustrate our invention in the 
accompanying drawings which with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon form a part 
of this specification, and in which drawings, 
similar letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the several views, in which 
Figure 1, is a side elevation of a street car 
equipped with our improved fender. Fig. 2 
is an enlarged perspective view of the fender. 
Fig. 3, is a section through one side of the 
fender, 
Reference now being had to the details of 
the drawings by letter, A represents the plat 
form of an ordinary street car, to the under 
side of which is bolted or otherwise securely 
fastened the fender B, which is held to the 
under side of said platform by means of the 
ribs b' which ribs are riveted to the metallic 
bars b which are bent so as to form a sub 
stantially W-shaped fender, having a wide me 
tallic base strip c, having its free longitudi 
nal edges slightly concaved which is for the 
purpose of being more effectual in throwing 
objects from the tracks. On the upper Sur 
face of this strip c is held the elastic corru 
gated rubber strip which is fastened to the 
metallic strip by means of rivets secured be 
tween the corrugations. The ends of the fen 
der bars b are bent slightly where they meet 
the side bars of the side fenders, and are 
bolted to the said ends, thus preventing any 
catching on the projected ends. To the up 
right post b is held the elastic piece d which 
is made preferably of rubber of at least two 
inches in thickness, and is secured by means 
of the clevisese by being held thereto by nuts 
on the screw threaded shank of the clevis. 
This rubber strip extends the entire length 
of the post and extends forward a sufficient 
distance, of at least several inches, so as to 
offer a resilient resistance to any objects which 
may come into contact there with. When an 
object strikes the free edge thereof, the rub 
ber will bend, thus throwing the object to 
one side when it will be, by the peculiar con 
struction of the fender, gently thrown from 
off the tracks. 
It will be seen that a fender of this descrip 
tion while being an ornament to a car, is held 
to the under surface of the platform, the apex 
of the fender being flush with the end of the 
platform, and that in case a human being 
comes in contact with the point, the flexible 
rubber will give, breaking the force of the 
blow, and then will resume its normal shape. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim to be new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a fender for street cars, the combina 
tion of the W-shaped track cleaner composed 
of the metallic bars b held by vertical posts 
to the under side of a truck platform, and 
5 
O 
15 
3o 
35 
45 
 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
529,275 
having the concaved pieces c, of the corru 
gated elastic strips Csecured thereto and over 
lapping the said concaved edges and conform 
ing thereto in shape, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. In combination with a street car fender 
Substantially V-shaped having its lower ends 
Concaved, and an elastic strip secured thereto, 
an elastic member held to the apex of the 
fender and curved to conform to the shape 
of the post b, the bars b of the fender de 
signed to be fastened at their ends to the ends 
of the bars of the side fenders, all substan 
tially as shown and described. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures E3 
HENRY C. KENNEDY. 
GEORGE W. ROLETTER, 
Witnesses: 
A. L. HOUGH, 
W. CLARENCE DUWALL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529375.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 529,375, 
R. GALOWAY 
CEARING FOR GRAIN DRILLS. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 20, 1894, 
 
3 2 | | 
2 
the NGRRIs Peters Co., PHOTO-LIT 
Ho, WASHINGTON, O. C 
(No Model.) 
No. 529,375. 
R. GALLOWAY. 
GEARING FOR GRAIN DRILLS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 20, 1894, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT GALLOWAY, OF MACEDON, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE BICK 
FORD & HOFFMAN COMPANY, OF NEW YORK. 
GEARING FOR GRAIN-DRILLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,375, dated November 20, 1894. 
Application filed June 9, 1894, Serial No. 514,066 (No model.) 
O 
To all, Zuhon, it hay concern. 
Beit known that I, ROBERT GALLOWAY, of 
Macedon, county of Wayne, and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Gearing for Grain-Drills, &c., 
of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
gearing by means of which an intermittent 
motion may be imparted from a continuously 
rotating shaft. 
My invention is intended for use more par 
ticularly, but not necessarily, in connection 
With grain drills or other seeding machines 
Wherein the ground wheels are geared to the 
Seed distributing mechanism in such manner 
as to operate it continuously and uninter 
ruptedly for the purpose of planting wheat, 
oats or like grains in rows. By the applica 
tion of my invention to machines of this char 
acter, I adapt them for planting corn, beans 
and other seeds in hills by giving to the dis 
tributing mechanism an intermittent motion 
So that the feed of the seed instead of being 
continuous, will take place periodically, and 
at predetermined points corresponding to the 
location of the hills, &c. 
Myinvention consists in providing between 
the continuously rotating driving shaft and 
the driven pinion for imparting motion to the 
Seed distributing mechanism, an intermediate 
driving pinion of improved construction con 
taining at intervals teeth adapted to mesh 
with the teeth on the driven pinion and to drive 
the Same, the spaces between the teeth being 
inward of the pitch line' and formed as 
more fully described hereinafter to prevent 
the pointing of the teeth of the pinions and 
to insure their certain and proper engage 
ment. 
The invention also consists in the details of 
construction and combination of parts herein 
after described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a portion of a grain drill 
having my invention applied thereto. Fig. 2 
is an elevation of the driving pinion removed. 
Fig. 3 is a view of a modification of the same. 
Fig. 4 is a view of still another modification. 
I have represented for convenience of de 
Scription my improvement as applied to a ma 
chine for planting wheat or oats, &c., the said 
machine being provided with a speed device 
for imparting to the seed distributing mech 
anism a continuous variable speed, such a de 
vice being described in Letters Patent of the 55 
United States, No. 345,018, dated July 6, 1886. 
It will be understood, however, that the appli 
cation of my invention is not to be confined 
to a mechanism of this particular nature, but 
that it may be employed wherever an inter 
mittent motion is to be imparted from a con 
tinuously rotating driving shaft. 
1 represents a portion of the frame of the 
machine; 2, the driving axle receiving mo 
tion from the ground wheels; 3, the grain box 
provided as usual in its bottom with the grain 
distributing mechanism which is operated by 
a grain shaft 4, receiving a continuous mo 
tion from the axle of the machine through 
suitable intermediate gearing. In the pres 
ent case the intermediate gearing comprises 
a shell 5, sustained to be adjusted around 
the axle and having journaled therein a Se 
ries of pinions 6, 7, 8, 9 and 9 of varying di 
ameters grouped around and meshing with a 
pinion 10 fixed to the axle. These pinions 
within the shell are provided with studs ex 
tending through the side of the same, where 
they are formed to receive a removable pin 
ion which may be applied to one or the other 
of the internal pinions according to the speed 
required for driving the seed distributing 
mechanism. This removable pinion meshes 
with a driven pinion 1* which in turn gives 
motion through intermediate gearing to the 
grain shaft. 
The foregoing parts constitute a variable 
speed gear for transmitting a variable con 
tinuous motion from the axle to the seed dis 
tributing mechanism, as described in said 
Letters Patent above referred to, and in them 
selves they form no part of the present in 
vention, except in so far as hereinafter indi 
cated. 
In applying my invention to a mechanism 
of this character, I adapt the seed distribut 
ing mechanism to operate at predetermined 
times, thereby enabling a machine to be used 
for planting beans or other seeds at intervals 
or in hills. This change is effected by re 
75 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
529,375 
O 
placing the ordinary removable pinion by a 
driving pinion 14, such as represented in Fig. 
2. This pinion instead of being provided 
with a series of teeth extending uninterrupt 
edly around its circumference, is formed at 
intervals only with teeth 15, the spaces be 
tween the teeth being smooth and inward of 
the pitch line. As a result of this con 
struction the driven pinion by being engaged 
by the teeth 15, will be moved intermittently 
and will impart a corresponding movement 
through the intermediate gearing to the dis 
tributing shaft. By varying the number of 
teeth on the driving pinion 14, the frequency 
of the operation of the seeding mechanism 
may be regulated according to the conditions 
encountered in practice. 
In the use of the device as described when 
employed for planting beans, it has been 
found that after the operation of the distribut 
ing mechanism by one of the teeth on the driv 
ing pinion 14, a slight recoil will take place 
which being transmitted to the driven pinion 
l will cause the same to retreat slightly, the 
result being that when the next tooth of the 
driving pinion engages the teeth of the driven 
pinion, it will be apt to point there with. 
To prevent this I locate in rear of each tooth 
on the driving pinion ld, a stop or recoil pin 
16 SO arranged with relation to the teeth 
that it will act as a stop to prevent the re 
treat of the driven pinion by encountering 
momentarily a tooth of the same after the dis 
engagement of the active teeth of the pinions. 
In order to take up any lost motion of the 
driven pinion to the end that the proper en 
gagement of the teeth of the driving pinion 
therewith may be insured, Ilocate in advance 
of each tooth of the driving pinion a pin or 
baby tooth 17, which when the pinion is re 
volved will engage the teeth on the driven pin 
ion and move the same slightly to a point 
where the proper engagement of the two pin 
ions may take place with certainty. It will 
be thus seen that I am enabled to impart to 
the driven pinion an intermittent motion 
from a constantly revolving shaft and this 
with certainty and without danger or inter 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
ment of the teeth. 
ruption by pointing or improper engage 
In Fig. 3 I have represented my improved 
gear as being embodied in a reversible pinion, 
one side of which contains four teeth while the 
other side contains 5. By the removal of a 
wheel of this character from the stud of the 
internal pinion, reversing it, and again fixing 
it in position, I may vary the frequency of the 
operation of the seed distributing mechan 
ism. 
Where the character of the seed distribut 
ing mechanism is such as to require a greater 
movement to effect its operation than that 
given by a single tooth of the driving pinion, 
I contemplate providing two or more teeth at 
intervals as shown in Fig. 4. The principle 65 
of operation is obviously the same here as in 
the first case described. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The combination with a continuously ro 
tating driving pinion formed at intervals with 
teeth, between the teeth with smooth surfaces 
below the pitch line, and provided adjacent 
to the teeth with radial stop or recoil pins, of 
a driven pinion in position to be engaged by 
the teeth of the driving pinion; whereby the 
driven pinion will receive an intermittent 
motion and pointing will be prevented. 
2. The combination with a continuously ro 
tating driving pinion formed at intervals with 
teeth, between the teeth with smooth surfaces 
below the pitch line, and provided on oppo 
site sides of the teeth with radial recoil pins 
and baby teeth, of a driven pinion in posi 
tion to be engaged by the teeth of the driving 
pinion; whereby the driven pinion will re 
ceive an intermittent motion, pointing will 
be prevented and the proper engagement of 
the teeth of the two pinions insured. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 16th day of May, 1894, in the pres 
ence of two attesting witnesses. 
75 
ROBERT GALLOWAY. 
- 
Witnesses: 
C. J. THISTLETHWAITE, 
WAYNE GALLUP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529475.txt	(No iodel.) 
G., W. BOND. 
WIRE NAIL. MAKING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 529,475, 
Patented Nov. 20, 1894, 
mRRIS peers co., HOTOLIX. WASHINTN. C. c. 
 
( No Model.) 
G. W. BOND 
WIRE NAIL. MAKING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 529,475, 
Patented Now, 20, 1894. 
282-11-12832. 
77 -6.7%-262. 
8-v-uovvitov 
C sor. Cu/, fe-6--U. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 529,475, 
 
 
G. W. BOND, 
WIRE NAII, MAKING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Now, 20, 1894, 
SSSS, 
(2) 
 
N 
N 
% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. BOND, OF RAYNHAM, MASSACHUSETTS, 
WIRE - NALs MAK N G VACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,475, dated November 20, 1894. 
Application filed March 8, 1894, Serial No. 502,895. (No model.) 
To all whom it. Ivay concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE.W. BOND, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Rayn 
ham, in the county of Bristol and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Wire-Nail-Mak 
ing Machines; and I do declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, Such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to nail machines, and 
its object is to produce rapidly and cheaply, 
double ended nails or dowels, such as are 
largely used for fastening together the parts 
of barrel heads, boxes, furniture, and the like. 
The machine which I have invented consists 
of a combination of feeding devices, cutters, 
and grippers, by means of which a wire is fed, 
cut offin properlengths and pointed, and then 
upset at any desired place to form a head be 
tween the pointed ends. The moving parts 
are all actuated from a single driving shaft 
which carries suitable cams. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the machine. Fig. 2 is a top plan 
view. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section online 
3-3, Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a cross section onlines 
4-4, Fig. 2. Fig. 5 shows the swing guide for 
the Wire. Fig. 6 shows one of the gripping 
dies. Fig. 7 is one of the cutters, and Fig. 8 
shows a dowel or nail made by the machine. 
The frame A Supports suitable bearings B 
for the driving shaft C, which has fast and 
loose pulleys C c', and a flywheel c'. At one 
end of the shaft is a crank disk D carrying a 
crank pin d, which is radially adjustable in 
a diametrical slot in the disk, by means of a 
Screw d'. A pitman E is connected with the 
Crank pin by a ball joint, the brasses e being 
adjustable for Wear as usual. The lower end 
of the pitman connects by a similar ball joint 
With a rock arm f on a rockshaft F extending 
transversely across the machine, and jour 
naled in bearings f". Secured to this rock 
shaft is an upright feed arm G, at the upper 
end of which is a stationary jaw g having a 
shank fitting into a hole in the arm. Below 
this jaw is an inclined jaw g' hinged at its 
25 
35 
 
In the arm G, in line with the stationary 6o 
lower end, and having its upper end pressed 
against the stationary jaw g by a flat spring 
g. The inclined jaw is hinged in a block G' 55 
which is adjustably fastened to the arm G by 
a bolt g passing through a slot g in the arm. 
A screw g enables the block G' to be pushed 
up to press the jawg' tightly against the jaWg. 
jaw, is a hole g through which is passed the 
wire X, which is firmly nipped between the 
jaws. Bolted to one side of the arm G is a 
bracket G', on which are carried straighten 
ing wheels G, and G', and a wiping device, 65 
such as the box G' filled with oiled waste. 
The wire passes through these devices before 
reaching the feed jaws g g. In line with 
these jaws is a detent clamp H, consisting of 
a stationary jaw h and a movable jaw h", 
mounted on a short shaft which is journaled 
in the bearing B'. This jaw h' has a tail hi 
which rests against the periphery of a cam 
H' on the shaft C. At the proper times, the 
cam closes and opens the jaws h. h. Adjacent 
to the clamp on each side, are guides I K, the 
latter being vertically adjustable in an arm k. 
The foregoing devices serve to straighten, 
feed, and guide the wire to the nail forming 
dies, and to detain the wire from being pulled 
back when the feeding arm is retracted to get 
a fresh hold. It now remains to describe the 
means by which the wire is cut off, pointed 
at each end, and upset to form the head. In 
brief these results are effected by four dies 
and two cutters. The latter sever the Wire 
and form the point at one cut. The dies grip 
the ends of the severed piece of Wire, and One 
pair moves toward the other pair to upset the 
metal between them. 
Rigidly mounted on, or formed integral 
with the frame A is the die socket Lin which 
are held by set screws one or more gripper dies 
M. These are preferably steel bars, having 
in their working ends grooves in to receive the 
wire X and preferably roughened to give them 
a firm hold. In each of the other three die 
sockets L,L,L, are one or more of these dies 
M, and they are all set at an acute angle, pref 
erably forty-five degrees, with the line of the 
wire X, the apex of the angle between the 
dies in each pair of sockets pointing in the 
direction said pair will move when forming 
the head upon the nail, 
I find it essential to 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
52 
9,475 
IO 
25 
the operation of my machine that the dies be 
set at an acute angle to the wire, as described 
above, and as shown in the drawings. 
In the sockets LL are cutters N, arrange 
behind the gripper dies M. Each cutter has 
two cutting edges a crossing each other, so 
that when the two cutters are forced against 
the opposite sides of the wire, it will be sev 
ered, and the cut ends of the wire will be 
beveled to a point, as shown in Fig. 8. The 
dies and cutters all lie in the same horizon 
tal plane. As stated above the socket L is 
Stationary. The other sockets are movable, 
sockets L'Lhaving motion transverse to the 
wire in order to.co-operate with sockets LL 
respectively in gripping it; while sockets L' 
Li have a movement lengthwise of the wire 
to effect the formation of the head upon the 
nail. Socket I*, therefore, has both motions. 
2 o The construction which permits and accom 
plishes these movements is as follows: Socket 
L' is mounted upon or forms a part of a lever 
lfastened to or integral with a longitudinal 
rock shaft O journaled on conical bearing 
pins P. Socket L is similarly mounted upon 
a transverse rock shaft O' supported upon 
pins P'. The leverl carrying socketL* is fast 
on a transverse rockshaft Osupported on pins 
P' which are carried in a yoke O', journaled 
on alongitudinal axis on pinsP. This mount 
ing of the socket L* constitutes a universal 
joint which permits it to be moved both 
lengthwise of and transverse to the wire. 
The conical pins are all adjustable for wear 
by means of plates Q and screws q, which also 
permit the pins to be readily removed. 
The sockets L'L*are simultaneously rocked 
on their pins PP by a cam R. on the shaft C, 
which bears against the upper part of the 
leversill. The lengthwise movement of the 
socketL*L* is produced by the transverse cam 
shaft S which has a hardened plates bearing 
against the levers carrying the sockets. The 
camshaft is actuated by an arms' connected 
by a ball bearing with the pitman S which 
has at its upper end a yoke encircling a cam 
or eccentric R' on the shaft C. Attached to 
each socket is a retracting spring, to insure 
the opening of the dies after the nail has been 
made. These springs may be of any suitable 
construction, and may be omitted when the 
machine is run at low speed. In the drawings 
I have shown one form of spring, being a bent 
steel bar T rigidly held at one end in a block 
t, and having its free end connected by a rod 
t' with the socket. 
A cross bar U is held by adjusting screws 
in standards B on the frame A, and limits 
the backward movement of the sockets LL 
after the head is formed. The amount of this 
movement determines the amount of material 
used to form the head. A movable or swing 
guide for the wire is supported by this cross 
bar, and serves to carry the wire out of the 
65 cutter in the socket Li, so as to insure its be 
ing free to be fed forward for the next nail. 
This guide W depends from a block v in a lug 
35 
45 
55 
u rising from a plate W which is secured by 
bolts at' to the crossbar U, said bolts passing 
through slots u' to render the plate longi 
tudinally adjustable. The guide W is thus 
capable of swinging transversely to the path 
of the wire, and toward and away from the 
socket L. A bar Y in the socket L operates 
to push the guide toward the socket L when 
the sockets LL come together. When they 
separate, the guide is swung away from the 
socket L by means of a coiled spring vacting 
against an arm on the block v. A screw ly 
serves as a stop to regulate the normal posi 
tion of the guide. 
A clearer Z, consisting of a thin blade ad 
justably secured to a stationary arm 2, pro 
jects between the sockets L' L and serves to 
push the formed nail out of the dies when the 
sockets separate. The arm 2 is bolted to One 
of the standards Bsupporting the crossbar U. 
A screw b, carried by the framework con 
tacts with a lug l on the socket L" and sus 
tains it against lengthwise pressure when the 
nail is formed, thus relieving the pins P from 
all undue strain. 
The operation of my machine is as follows: 
The wire is nipped by the feed jaws gig' and 
the forward movement of the feed arm pushes 
it through the guides, the detent clamp be 
ing open, until the end of the wire lies be 
tween the dies, which now stand retracted. 
The detent clamp then seizes the wire, and 
the feed arm moves back for another hold, 
carrying with it the straightener and oiler 
which thus operate on a fresh length of Wire. 
The range of movement of the feed arm 
and consequently the length of the nail, is 
regulated by the radially adjustable crank 
pind. As soon as the wire has been fed, the 
socket L' moves toward the socket L and like 
wise the socket L* moves toward the socket 
L', the dies in each pair gripping the Wire 
firmly, and the cutters in the last named pair 
severing and pointing the wire. (See Fig. 3.) 
The sockets. I* I then move simultaneously 
toward the other pair, thereby upsetting a 
head on the piece of wire between them, which 
is firmly held by the dies and the cutters. The 
sockets then separate, and release the nail, 
any tendency to stick in the dies being pre 
vented by the clearer Z. At the same time, 
the swing guide frees the end of the wire from 
the cutters, and holds it in a position to be fed 
forward by the next stroke of the feed arm. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A nail making machine, comprising a 
wire-feeding device, a detent clamp, two pairs 
of gripping dies, a pair of cutters adjacent to 
and moving with one pair of dies, and means 
for causing said latter pair of dies to approach 
the other pair, substantially as described. 
2. In a wire nail-making machine, the com 
bination with a stationary die, of a die mov 
able transverse to the wire to co-act with the 
stationary die in gripping it, a third die move 
able both transverse and lengthwise of the 
7 o 
90 
95 
do 
I IO 
Il 5 
I 25 
I 30 
529,475 
wire, and a fourth die movable lengthwise of 
the wire only, the third die co-acting with the 
fourth to grip the wire, and the two pairs of 
gripping dies co-acting to upset the wire be 
tween them, Substantially as described. 
3. In a wire nail-making machine, the com 
bination with a pair of gripping dies set at an 
acute angle to the line of the wire, of a sec 
ond pair Qf gripping dies and a pair of point 
ing cutters adjacent thereto, all set at an acute 
angle to the wire, the apex of the angle formed 
by one pair of dies pointing toward the apex 
of the angle formed by the other pair, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a wire-nail-making machine, the com 
bination with a stationary die-socket, of a die 
Socket lever fulcrumed on an axis parallel 
with the line of the wire, a die socket lever full 
crumed on an axis transverse to the line of 
the wire, a die-socket lever fulcrumed on a 
universal joint so as to have motion both trans 
verse and lengthwise of the wire, and means 
for actuating these levers, substantially as 
described. 
5. In a wire-nail-making machine, the com 
bination with the stationary die-socket, of 
three movable die-sockets each mounted on a 
O 
25 
lever, a driving shaft carrying cams for mov 
ing the first and second of said levers, and a 
cam shaft actuated from said driving shaft, 
for moving the second and third of said le 
vers, substantially as described. 
6. The combination with the stationary die 
socket L, of the movable sockets L', L, L, 
the rock shafts O, O', O supporting said 
sockets, the yoke O' supporting the shaft O, 
the driving shaft C carrying the cams R, R', 
the camshaft Shaving a rock arms', and the 
pitman S connecting said arm with the cam 
R', substantially as described. 
7. In a nail making machine, the combina 
tion with the cross bar U, of the plate Wad 
justably secured thereto, the block v jour 
naled on the plate W, and provided with an 
arm, a coiled spring 'acting against said 
arm, and the guide V depending from said 
block, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
3 5 
45 
GEORGE W. BOND. 
Witnesses: 
ARBA. N. LINCOLN, 
CHARLES L. FOOTE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529575.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 529,575. 
 
 
E. S. WINCHESTER, 
LATCH, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Now, 20, 1894, 
 
 
N No. 
N // 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD S. WINCHESTER, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
/ 
LATCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,575, dated November 20, 1894. 
Application filed March 19, 1894, 
Serial No. 504,226, (No model.) 
55 
7 or 
75 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARD S. WINCHES 
TER, of Dorchester, (Boston,) county of Suffolk, 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Latches, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to latches for doors, 
&c., the objects being to provide for the con 
venient and easy application of the latch to 
the door; to avoid the difficulty in operating 
the same which results from the shrinkage or 
swelling of the wood; to prevent the projec 
tion of the latch bolt while the door is open; 
and to provide a latch which will beneat in 
appearance, and which will operate effect 
ively. 
With these ends in view, my invention con 
sists in a latch of improved form embody 
ing various features and constructions fully 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical longitudinal section through a por 
tion of the rail of door, and a latch having 
my invention embodied therein, the devices 
for automatically releasing the latch bolt 
when the door is closed, being shown in ele. 
vation. Fig. 2 is a vertical transverse sec 
tion on the line 2-2 of the preceding figure, 
looking toward the left. Fig. 3 is a top plan 
view of the upper edge of the door showing 
the lever for automatically releasing the latch 
bolt. Fig. 4 is a vertical longitudinal section 
on the line 4-4 of Fig. 6. Fig. 5 is a front 
elevation of a portion of the rail of the door, 
and the face plate of the latch casing. Fig. 
6 is a horizontal section on the line 6-6 of 
Fig. 4, the latch bolt being shown in a re 
tracted position. Fig. 7 is a similar view 
with the latch bolt projected. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents the 
casing composed of two side walls 2 and 3, a 
face plate 4 and top and bottom end plates 5 
connecting the face plate and side walls, the 
casing being thus left open at its rear, through 
which opening a rocker arm 6 extends to 
the interior of the casing, as more fully de 
scribed hereinafter. The top and bottom 
end plates of the casing incline from the face 
plate toward each other, the face plate being 
extended beyond the ends of the casing, 
which extended portions are formed with 
openings to receive screws 7 by which the 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
- 
casing is secured in the mortise in the rail of 
the door. As a result of the inclination of 
the ends of the casing, the fastening screws 
will hold more firmly in the wood on account 
of the increased thickness of the same at the 
points where the screws enter, which is due 
to the shape of the inclined mortise. Further 
a mortise of this form may be made with less 
trouble and more quickly than is required 
for a mortise with parallel ends, for the rea 
son that there is less Wood to be removed and 
less difficulty encountered in the formation 
of the inclined ends. 
The face plate of the casing is formed with 
an opening through which a latch bolt 8 
Swings, it being mounted loosely at one end 
on a vertical pivot pin 9 fixed to the face plate 
of the casing, the bolt being urged constantly 
forward by a spring 10, which encircles the 
pivot pin and has one end fixed to the side 
Wall of the casing, while its opposite end bears 
against the latch bolt as shown in Fig. 7. The 
arrangement is such that when the bolt is re 
tracted, as shown in Fig. 6, its front face will 
be flush with the face plate of the casing, and 
when projected it will occupy the position 
shown in Fig. 7. In its rear side the bolt is 
formed with a cavity in which a vertical pin 
11 is fixed near one side, and on this pin are 
loosely mounted the front ends of two arms 
12, which arms are connected together at their 
rear ends by a cross bar 13, the arms and bar 
constituting a frame pivoted to the latch bolt. 
This frame is acted on by the ends of two 
coiled springs 14, which encircle and are fixed 
to the pin, while their free ends bear upon 
the two arms, as shown in Fig. 4. The cross 
bar of this frame is extended at its ends be 
yond the arms, forming ears 15, which are 
engaged by SWinging lever-plates 16, operated 
by the rocker arm, before alluded to. These 
lever-plates are triangular in form and are 
pivoted between the walls of the casing as at 
17, and are urged constantly toward each 
other by spring arms 17* fixed to the plates 
and bearing against the casing. The adja 
cent edges of the plates are formed with re 
cesses 18, near their front ends, while rear 
Ward of these recesses the edges of the plates 
extend straight and parallel with each other 
as at 19. 
The rocker arm 6 has its free end formed 
go 
95 
OO 
529,575 
2 
with two oppositely extending fingers 20, 
against which the two straight edges of the 
plates bear, and between the fingers a friction 
roller 21 is mounted on a central spindle 22 
and revolves against the sides of the casing 
as the arm is rocked to operate the latch. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that when the free end of the rocker 
arm is moved either upward or downward by 
turning a spindle 22* to which it is connected, 
it will tip one or the other of the swinging 
plates on its axis, and cause it to move rear 
ward at its free end, the front wall of the re 
cess in the plate engaging the projecting ear 
on the pivoted frame and causing the latch 
bolt to be retracted within the casing. On 
the release of the spindle, the swinging plate 
under the influence of its spring, will restore 
the rocker arm to its normal position. The 
spindle is connected to one of the knob stems 
23 and is square in cross section and extends 
through a hub 24 on the end of the rocker 
arm. The extreme end of the spindle beyond 
the hub is threaded exteriorly and screwed 
into the other knob stem 25, a spiral spring 
being provided between the hub and knob 
stem 23 to prevent the parts from rattling. 
Instead of mounting the spindle in bear 
ings in the casing, as has been the case here 
tofore, in the present invention it is discon 
nected from the casing and has its bearing 
only in knob roses 26 and 27, which are ap 
plied to the opposite side of the door around 
the opening located at the rear end of and 
communicating with the mortise in which the 
latch casing is mollinted These two knob 
roses constitute the sole bearing for the spin 
dle, the rose 26 being provided with the usual 
annular flange 28, which bears against the 
rail of the door, from which flange three posts 
29 extend into the opening. On the ends of 
these posts an exteriorly threaded ring 30 is 
fixed, upon which an interiorly threaded neck 
31 extending from the flange of the rose 27 is 
screwed. By thus sustaining the threaded 
ring by the three posts, the rocker arm is 
enabled to extend between the posts and be 
moved to operate the latch. 
As a result of the disconnection of the spin 
dle and its rocker arm from the casing, the 
shrinkage or swelling of the wood cannot 
affect the movement of the spindle, for the 
reason that it is free to move to a limited ex 
tent relatively to the casing. Were it other 
wise, and were the spindle mounted in the 
latch case and also in the knob roses, the 
shrinkage or swelling of the wood would cause 
the parts to bind, and in this way would se 
riously interfere with the turning of the spin 
dle. Another advantage resulting from this 
arrangement, is that the spindle may be ap 
plied to the true center of the rail of the door 
without regard to the location of the latch 
casing. On reference to Fig. 4, it will be seen 
that on account of the extended straight par 
alleledges of the swinging plates, the rocker 
arm is enabled to operate them either when 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
occupying the position indicated or when 
located farther to the rear, as indicated in 
dotted lines. In other words, the rocker arm 
and the spindle carrying the same, have a 
limited lateral adjustment with respect to the 
latch casing in which the operative parts are 
mounted. 
In order that the latch bolt may be tempo 
rarily held in a retracted position when it is 
operated to open the door, I provide a spring 
detent in the form of a pin 32, which pin is 
mounted on the end of an angular spring arm 
33, fixed to the outside of the side wall 2 of 
the casing. The pin extends laterally through 
the casing, and has its end in position to ex 
tend beyond the cross bar of the frame which 
is pivoted to the latch bolt, as shown in Fig. 
6. The pin is beveled so that the frame may 
ride thereover and beyond the same, when 
the bolt is retracted. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that when the spindle is operated, the 
latch bolt will be withdrawn and the pivoted 
frame will engage the beveled end of the pin, 
be lifted, drop behind the same, and will be 
held in this position by the pin. The spindle 
will then be restored to its former position by 
the spring actuated swinging plate. It will 
be seen that the latch bolt is locked in a re 
tracted position with its front face flush with 
the face of the casing. This is of advantage 
in that while the door is open, there will be 
no projecting parts to be tampered with, and 
the latch will present a neat and finished ap 
pearance. In order that when the door is 
closed the latch bolt may be automatically re 
leased and allowed to be projected, I provide 
connections extending to the top of the door, 
which connections are adapted when the door 
is closed to automatically move the locking 
pin and cause the same to be disengaged by 
the latch bolt. This action is effected in the 
following manner: To the side wall 2 of the 
casing, a lever 34 is pivoted, the lower end of 
the lever extending beneath the spring arm 
33, while its upper end terminates at the up 
per end plate of the casing. At this point, 
the end of the lever is extended through the 
end of an arm 35, which is fixed to a vertical 
rock shaft 36, from which a vertical rod 37 
extends through an opening in the door rail 
to the top of the same, where it is provided 
with an arm 38 fixed thereto and having on 
its end a vertical finger 39. Near its upper 
end the rod is encircled by a spiral spring 40, 
which tends normally to hold the arm in the 
position indicated in full lines in Fig. 3, in 
which position the vertical lever 34 will have 
its lower end held normally as shown in Fig. 
2, the locking pin extending in front of the 
frame of the latch bolt, and holding the same 
in a retracted position. The parts being in 
this position, when the door is closed the fin 
ger 39 on the arm will come in contact with 
the jamb of the door and the movement of 
the door being continued, the arm will be 
moved to the position indicated by dotted 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
d 
I2O 
I 25 
529,575 
3 
lines in Fig. 3, which movement will rock the 
vertical shaft and throw the lower end of the 
vertical lever 34 outward, thereby forcing the 
spring arm 33 outward and disengaging the 
locking pin from the frame on the latch bolt, 
which latter will by its actuating spring, be 
projected. 
When the door is to be opened, the spindle 
is turned, and the latch bolt retracted to the 
position shown in Fig. 6. The spindle is held 
in this position, until the door is opened far 
enough to allow the arm 38 to be moved to its 
normal position by its spring, which will throw 
the lower end of the lever 34 inward and per 
mit the locking pin to engage in advance of 
the frame of the latch bolt. 
In order that a tight joint may be formed 
between the rail of the door and the knob 
roses to prevent rattling, I interpose between 
the flange of the rose 26 and the side of the 
door, a ring 41 of rubber or other elastic ma 
terial. 
It will be understood, of course, that the 
devices for operating the locking pin to re 
lease the latch bolt may be actuated by en 
gagement with the door frame instead of the 
door jamb, as shown and described, the es 
sential requirement in this regard being, 
when the door is closed the devices will con 
tact with some fixed portion of the frame and 
release the latch. 
While I have described the spindle as being 
separate from the knob stems, it is in fact a 
continuation of the stems and in the claims 
it is to be understood as such. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is- 
1. The combination of the casing, the latch 
bolt pivoted therein, two swinging plates in 
osition to engage the latch bolt and formed 
with adjacent straight edges, the spindle 
mounted in bearings disconnected from the 
casing, and the rocker arm connected at one 
end to the spindle and having its opposite 
end extended between the two adjacent edges 
of the swinging plates in position to engage 
the Same. 
2. The combination of the casing, the latch 
bolt mounted therein, the two oppositely dis 
posed lever-plates pivoted respectively at op 
posite sides of the latch bolt and having their 
free ends arranged to engage and move the 
latch bolt when swung outward, the spindle, 
and the rocker arm thereon having its free 
end extended between the free ends of the 
swinging lever-plates; whereby the move 
ment of the rocker arm in either direction 
will swing one or the other of the plates out 
ward and act to retract the latch bolt. 
3. The combination of the latch bolt, a 
spring detent for temporarily holding the bolt 
in retracted position, a lever fulcrumed at the 
side of the case for throwing the detent out of 
. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7o 
75 
95 
OO 
Io5 
IO 
1 I5 
M 
action, a rock shaft extending to the top of 
the door and having an arm in engagement 
with said lever for actuating the latter and 
an arm to engage the door frame and rock the 
shaft when the door is closed. 
4. The combination of the casing, the latch 
bolt therein, a spring detent for temporarily 
holding the latch bolt in a retracted position, 
a vertical rock shaft arranged to be operated 
by the closing movement of the floor and 
adapted to retract the detent and release the 
bolt, 
5. The combination of the casing, the latch 
bolt therein, the laterally movable detent for 
temporarily holding the same in a retracted 
position, the vertical rock shaft, the arm on 
the lower end of the shaft, the lever between 
said arm and the detent, and the arm on the 
upper end of the shaft arranged to be moved 
by the closing movement of the door and to 
operate the detent and release the latch bolt. 
6. The combination of the casing, the latch 
bolt therein, the spring arm fixed to the outer 
side of the casing, the pin on the end of the 
arm extending through the casing in position 
to engage the latch bolt when the salme is re 
tracted, the lever pivoted to the casing and 
having its lower end in engagement with the 
spring arm, the rocking arm connected to the 
upper end of the lever, the vertical rockshaft 
connected to the arm, the horizontal lever at 
the upper end of the door in position to be en 
gaged by the frame, and the rod connecting 
said lever with the rock shaft. 
7. The combination with the casing, of the 
latch bolt pivoted near its end therein, the 
frame pivoted near the opposite end of the 
latch bolt, means for retracting the bolt, the 
spring detent in position to extend in ad 
vance of and engage the pivoted frame when 
the latch bolt is retracted, and means for re 
tracting the detent to release the bolt. 
8. The combination of the swinging latch 
bolt, a frame pivoted thereto and provided 
with lateral ears, a plate pivoted at one end 
and formed in its free end With a recess cor 
responding in length to the throw of the latch, 
a spindle, a rocker arm connected to the spin 
dle with its free end in position to engage the 
free end of the plate and SWing the same out 
ward on its pivot and retract the bolt, a de 
tent arranged to engage said pivoted frame 
and hold the bolt temporarily in a retracted 
position, and means adapted to be actuated 
by the door frame to release the bolt when the 
door is closed. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 12th day of March, 1894, in the press 
ence of two attesting Witnesses. 
EDWARD S. WINCHESTER, 
Witnesses: 
- 
J. BROWN LORD, 
GEO, HALL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529675.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
& 
m 
A, T, BEMIS. 
BRICK DRIER, CAR 
No. 529,675, 
 
Patented Nov. 20, 1894. 
Inventor. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ALBERT T. BEMIS, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
BRICK-DRIER CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,675, dated November 20, 1894, 
Application filed June 1, 1894, Serial No. 513,178, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To aid, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERTT. BEMIS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Indian 
apolis, in the county of Marion and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use. 
ful Improvements in Brick-Drier Cars, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
My invention relates to an improved car of 
the class employed in conveying brick to and 
from a drying kiln, the brick being piled there 
on in such manner as to permit a free circu 
lation of heated air around and between the 
Courses during the operation of drying. A 
peculiarity of a car of the above class is that 
it admits of no central, longitudinal or diago 
nal side bracing, as such would interfere with 
the insertion and removing of the loaded pal 
lets, and as a consequence the car has hereto 
fore been required to be made of heavy ma-. 
terial to support the immense weight it is re 
quired to carry, this weight often exceeding 
a ton and a half. Even when made heavy 
and cumbersome as heretofore the car has not 
proved satisfactory to users, because of the 
racking strain and breakage to which it was 
subjected by reason of the longitudinal mo 
mentum acquired by the load when the car is 
brought to a sudden standstill, as is often 
done in the yard or kiln, from which cause the 
standards are frequently twisted and broken 
from their attachment to the sills. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
car framework so constructed that the center 
of gravity of the load placed thereon will fall 
over or toward the axles, instead of about 
midway between them, as in previous con 
structions, whereby I am enabled to make a 
durable car much lighter and at a consider 
able less cost than heretofore. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the accoulpanying drawings, and 
then pointed out in the claims. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a side elevation 
of my car showing several loaded pallets in 
place thereon. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section 
taken on the line aca, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an end 
elevation of the car. 
Referring to the drawings, AA are the axles 
on which the carrying wheels B Bare mounted 
in the usual manner. 
CC are the longitudinal sills, from which 
are suspended the journal-boxes D D, these 
sills being connected near their ends by cross 
bars E, secured to the sills by bolts and nuts, 
as shown at F. To each sill, midway between 
the axles, I bolt two standards G G in such a 
position that while their lower ends are about 
eight inches apart their upper ends are pref 
erably brought together, lapped, and riveted, 
as at 9. 
H H are the end standards, bolted at their 
lower ends to the sills C C, and each inclined 
toward the longitudinal center at an angle co 
incident with the angle of the central stand 
ard facing it. These standards are connected 
at the top by a tie-bar I, to which the upper 
ends of the centerstandards are also secured. 
Both the sills and the tie-bar are provided 
with a series of holes c and i, respectively, in 
order that the end standards may be made 
adjustable in position to meet the require 
ments of pallets of different lengths. To all 
the standards are secured suitable brackets 
J for supporting the pallets K. As seen in 
Fig. 3, the end standards are braced on the 
outer side by cross-braces L. L. The frame 
work thus constructed is exceedingly light 
and durable, as all the parts except, perhaps, 
the sill connections are made of L-shaped an 
gle-iron. 
It will be noticed that by the inclination of 
the standards, the center of gravity of the 
load is not only thrown toward the axles, but 
that a space is left between the inner ends of 
the pallets, permitting the heated air to cir 
culate throughout the central portion of the 
material to be dried. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
Iclaim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a brick-drier car, a framework com 
prising longitudinal sills, cross connections 
therefor, two central standards secured at 
their lower ends to each sill at a suitable dis 
tance apart and inclining longitudinally to 
ward each other, end standards secured at 
their lower ends to the sills and each inclined 
toward the longitudinal center at an angle co 
incident with the incline of the central stand 
ard facing it, longitudinal tie-bars connecting 
the standards at the top, and pallet-brackets 
carried by the standards. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
95 
O). 
529,675 
2. In a brick-drier car, a framework com 
prising longitudinal sills, cross connections 
therefor, two central standards secured at 
their lower ends to each sill at a suitable dis 
tance apart and meeting at their upper ends 
and secured together, end standards secured 
at their lower ends to the sills and each in 
clined toward the longitudinal center at an 
angle coincident with the incline of the cen 
tral standard facing it, longitudinal tie-bars 
connecting the standards at the top, and pal 
let-brackets carried by the standards. 
3. In a brick-drier car, a framework com 
prising longitudinal sills, cross connections 
therefor, two central standards secured at 
their lower ends to each sill at a suitable dis 
ch 
tance apart and meeting at their upper ends 
and secured together, end standards adjust 
ably secured at their lower ends to the sills 
and each inclined toward the longitudinal 2C) 
center at an angle coincident with the incline . 
of the central standard facing it, longitudi 
nal tie-bars adjustably connecting the end 
standards with the central standards, and pal 
let-brackets carried by the standards. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
25 
ALBERT T. BEMIS. 
Witnesses: 
WM. HuNTER MYERs, 
DAVID. W. GouLD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529775.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 529,775, 
C. N. BRIGGS, 
BILLIARD CUE TIP, 
Patented Nov. 27, 1894, 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES N. BRIGGS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
BILLIARD-CUE TIP, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,775, dated November 27, 1894, 
Application filed November 27, 1893. Serial No. 492,112. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs N. BRIGGs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Billiard-Cue Tips, of which 
the following is a full, clear, concise, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this 
specification, 
My invention relates to billiard cue tips, and 
its object is to provide a tip that may be 
readily applied to the end of the cue, and 
easily replaced when worn; that shall not tend 
to split the end of the cue, and that shall be 
cheap of construction. 
Heretofore, it has been proposed to secure 
a tip to a billiard cue by providing in the end 
of the cue a circular recess, from the bottom 
of Which extends a tapering screw, so that a 
projection upon the butt piece when screwed 
thereon Will be expanded against the walls of 
the recess to maintain the tip in position and 
prevent its working loose, the end of the 
screw extending into the cue being also taper 
ing so that it may be wedged therein to pre 
vent the turning of the screw when the tip is 
removed. This construction is objectionable 
because the tapering screw being wedged into 
the end of the cue the material thereof is 
strained, which strain is further augmented 
by the outward pressure of the butt piece 
upon the Walls of the recess in the end of the 
Cue. The material being thus under consider 
able strain, the tendency of a side blow given 
by the cue is to split the end of the cue. The 
construction is further objectionable since 
the cost of the screw tapered at the ends is 
considerable. 
My invention consists, first, in providing 
instead of the tapering screw, a pin, the sides 
thereof being so fashioned that when the pin 
has been driven into the end of the cue, turn 
ing of the same will be prevented, the ex 
posed end of the pin being provided with a 
screw thread upon which a butt piece of 
ebonite or kindred non-metallic material is 
adapted to be screwed. 
My invention consists, second, in a butt 
piece provided with a flange having slightly 
tapering internal sides adapted to engage 
, 
correspondingly tapering sides upon a cen 
trally located projection upon the end of the 
cue, whereby when the butt piece is screwed 
upon the end of the cue, the material of the 
end thereof is compressed, thus reinforcing 
the material of the cue and tending to pre 
vent splitting of the cue, due to side blows. 
My invention consists, further, in such 
other matter as shall hereinafter appear. 
My invention will be more readily under 
stood by reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view partially in section show 
ing a cue embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a detail view of a pin notched to prevent turn 
ing. Fig. 3 is a sectional view of the butt 
piece. Fig. 4 is a view of the leather tip. 
Like letters refer to like parts in the sev 
eral figures. 
A pin a is driven into the end of the cueb, 
its surface being provided with properly 
formed indentations or teeth into which the 
wood of the cue may expand to prevent the 
tnrning of the screw. In order to more thor 
oughly secure the pin and prevent its turn 
ing, the pin may be made square. When a 
round pin is used I preferably form indenta 
tions in the sides so that the material of the 
cue engaging with the straight surfaces of the 
bottoms of theindentations may prevent turn 
ing, but a pin with a smooth surface may be 
used when driven under such a press tire as 
to prevent turning when the butt piece is 
screwed on or off the threaded end. Upon the 
exposed end of the pin is provided a screw 
thread upon which a butt piece c' is adapted 
to be screwed. This butt piece I preferably 
make of ebonite, or similar non-metallic ma 
terial which will not dent the ball. A tip d 
of leather is glued to the end of the butt 
piece. The butt piece c is provided with a 
flange c, the tapering inner walls of which 
are adapted to engage with the tapering sides 
of the centrally located projection b' upon 
the end of the cue, the outer edge of the butt 
piece being adapted to lie flush with the sides 
of the cue when secured in position. The en 
gagement of the tapering Walls of the flange 
with the correspondingly tapering sides of 
the projection b' tends to compress the ma 
terial of the end of the cue, thus strengthen 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
5 O 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
oO 
w 
 
529,775 
b' formed integral with the material of the cue 
and provided with slightly tapering sides, of 
a metallic pin a driven in the end of the cue 
and provided with a surface adapted to en 
gage the wood of the cue to prevent the turn 
ing of the pin, the end of said pin projecting 
from the end of said central projection and 
provided with a thread, a butt piece c' of 
non-metallic material provided with a tapped 
hole adapted to engage the screw threaded 
end of said pin, said butt piece carrying a 
flange c provided with interior tapering 
walls adapted to engage the tapering sides of 
said central projection when the butt piece is 
screwed into position, and a tip d secured to 
the face of said butt piece, whereby the ma 
terial of the end of the cue is compressed and 
reinforced and the tendency of said pin to 
split out is prevented, while the wedging of 
said flange against said central projection 
prevents the working loose of the butt piece, 
substantially as described. 
In witness thereof I hereunto subscribe my 
name this 22d day of November, A. D. 1893. 
CHARLES N. BRIGGS. 
Witnesses: 
HARRIET G. TEMPLETON, 
W. CLYDE JONES. 
35 
45 
O 
ing the same against tendency to split when 
glancing blows are struck which subject the 
Clle to a transverse strain. 
The billiard tips as thus formed may be 
readily removed from the cue when worn, by 
merely unscrewing the butt piece from the 
Screw thread with which it is in engagement, 
the leather tip having been glued to the butt 
piece in preparing the tip for the market, 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a billiard cue, the combination with 
a cue provided upon its end with the cen 
trally located projection b' provided with 
slightly tapering sides, of the butt piece c 
carrying the flange c provided with internal 
tapering walls adapted to engage and com 
press the material of said projection, said 
butt piece being provided with a tapped hole, 
a screw thread extending from the end of said 
projection band adapted to enter said tapped 
hole, and the tip d secured to the face of said 
butt piece, whereby the strength of the ma 
terial of the end of the cue is reinforced, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination with a billiard cue pro 
vided upon its end with a central projection 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529875.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 529,875, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
H. F. PARKER & M. G. GILLETTE. 
POWER APPLYING MECHANISM, 
Patented Nov. 27, 1894, 
m 
eastes:secrascaise 
3. 
50 
 
^% CS. 
26% z 324. 
THE Norris perers co, Hoto-LITHO, washingtoN. D. C. 
H. F. PARKER & M. G. GILLETTE. 
POWER. APPLYING MECHANISM, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 529,875. 
 
Patented Nov. 27, 1894, 
WITNESSES: 
w 
INVENTORS 
H. F. PARKER & M. G. GILLETTE. 
POWER APPLYING MECHANISM, 
Patented Nov 27, 1894. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 529,875. 
 
H. F. PARKER & M. G. GILLETTE. 
POWER APPLYING MECHANISM, 
Patented Nov. 27, 1894. 
(No Model.) 
No. 529,875, 
 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
%a even 
244. 
Z-221-772-272-22 
29 
3. 
Y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY F. PARKER AND MOTT G. GILLETTE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
POWER-APPLYING MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,875, dated November 27, 1894. 
Application filed September 10,1894, Serial No. 522,546. (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
- 
- - 
- 
- - 
fication. . 
To all whom it may concern 
Beit known that we, HENRY F. PARKER 
and MOTT G. GILLETTE, citizens of the United 
States, residing at the city, county, and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Power - Applying 
Mechanism, of which the following is a speci 
This invention relates to foot power apply 
ing mechanism for operating rotary or other 
hand tools intended to be used in various po 
sitions and moved about different parts of 
the work. 
The invention is herein shown and de 
Scribed as embodied in a horse clipping ma 
chine, although applicable to other purposes, 
as for example, drilling, burnishing, or clean 
ing various stationary objects. 
The invention consists in an improved foo 
power mechanism of the said character, as 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings in 
which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts, Figure 1, is a side 
elevation of the machine, partly in section 
illustrating the invention; Fig. 1, a detail 
view, showing on an enlarged scale a cross 
section at U-w, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 2, is a rear end 
elevation of Fig. 1, partly in section at ac-ac, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3, is a plan view partly in hori. 
Zontal section on the line a-ac, Fig. 1. Fig. 
3, is a horizontal section at 2-2, Fig.1. Fig. 
4, is a plan view of the supporting staff, 
partly broken away and adjacent parts re 
moved. Fig. 5, is a partial side view showing 
certain modifications in the supporting staff. 
Fig. 6, is a plan view of Fig. 5. Fig. 7, is a 
detail VieW showing in sectional elevation 
certain modifications in the flexible connec 
tion of the supporting staff to the standard; 
and Fig. 8, a plan view of the staff yoke in 
Fig. 7, 
The machine is mounted upon a tripod or 
other base 2, in the central part of which the 
stationary tubular standard 4, is fixed. A 
rotary tubular standard 6, is movably 
mounted in the standard 4, resting thereon 
by means of the collar 8, of the handlebar 
10, which is used to direct the rotative posi 
tion of the standard 6, and parts thereon. 
Within the telescoping tubes 4, and 6, there 
extends a rotary shaft 12, suitably journaled, 
and bearing at its upper extremity a belt pull 
ley 14. The shaft 12, is preferably composed 
of two sections adapted for longitudinal ex 
tension, and the lower section 16, is journaled 
in the base 2, and bears a belt pulley 18 un 
der the base. The lower section 16 is partly 
composed of a tube. 20, and receives the end 
of the upper shaft section 12 rotative there 
with but longitudinally movable therein by 
means of the feather 24 (Fig. 1) on the shaft 
12, and groove 25, in the sleeve 20, or other 
equivalent connection. The rotative section 
6 of the standard may thus be vertically ad 
justed in the stationary one 4, simply by 
loosening and re-setting the clamping screw 
26 in the collar of the handle bar, and the 
telescoping connection of the shaft 12, is de 
signed to accommodate the length of the lat 
ter to the adjustment of the telescoping stand 
ard, and the distance... of the pulley 14, and 
supporting, staff 28, may be conveniently 
changed as circumstances require. 
Removed at a suitable distance from the 
standard 4, there is a driving belt wheel 30, 
mounted in the bifurcated standard 31, sup 
ported on the base 2, and the wheel 30, thus 
located, admits of the saddle 32 being placed 
vertically above the double treadle 34, or as 
nearly so as desirable in order that the op 
erator thereon may exert his power to great 
est advantage with comparative ease. 
The relative positions of the seat, handle 
bar, and treadle correspond to those usual in 
a bicycle, and any other well known form of 
treadle than that illustrated may be substi 
tuted, and provision is made for adjusting 
the saddle 32, as indicated. Head room is 
also afforded for the operator in the saddle 
to lean forward in the most advantageous po 
sition for exerting power. 
Motion is transmitted from the driving 
wheel 30, to the pulley 18, by means of the 
belt 36, suitably directed upon idle pulleys 
38, 40, as shown in Figs.1 and 3 located within 
the mortise 42 in one leg of the tripod base. 
The movable parts in the lower portion of 
the machine are thus principally concealed 
and various characters of mechanism may be 
employed for transmitting motion from the 
driving wheel 30 to the shaft 16, other than 
that shown; such for instance as sprocket 
chains, gear wheels, &c. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
95 
IOO 
- 
s 
529,875 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
7 o 
75 
The staff 28, for supporting the flexible 
shafting 44, or other mechanism to be driven, 
is movably mounted in the rotative standard 
6, so as to swing vertically and owing to the 
horizontal rotatability of the standard 6, the 
extremity of the staff 28, affords a univer 
Sally movable support for the shafting 44. 
The machine is adapted for operating any 
character of hand implement such as a horse 
clipper 46, to be held in the hand of a second 
operator, and moved about as required. The 
staff 28, is counterbalanced by one or more 
suitable springs 48, and the staff being swung 
horizontally when the handlebar 10, is moved, 
the operator in the saddle may assist the op 
erator at the tool to reach relatively distant 
points in the Work. 
The spindlebox. 50, Figs. 1 and 4, is circum 
ferentially recessed, and rests movably in a 
fork 52 adjustable in the staff to suit the 
length of the belt 54, which transmits motion 
from the pulley 14, to the pulley 56 irrespect 
ive of the limited angular variations of the 
staff; the spindle 58, of the pulley 56 remain 
ing vertical owing to the weight of the flexi 
ble shaft 44, and the universal oscillation of 
the box. 50, in its fork. The weight of the 
shaft 44, keeps the belt 54 taut by maintain 
ing the spindle 58, vertically, or nearly so, 
and this function is assisted in Figs. 1 and 
4, by the spring 48, which being inclined 
draws the staff outward longitudinally as 
well as counterbalancing it. The yoke 60 of 
the staff rides on rollers 62 on the journal 
box 64, which is squared to carry the staff 
laterally when the standard 6 is rotated, and 
by means of said rollers the staff is free to 
move endwise and draw the belt taut by the 
contraction of the Spring 48. 
Another construction appears in Figs. 5 and 
6 wherein the belt may be held taut therein 
by an independent spring 64, and the fork 52, 
is movable; the yolke 60 being on a fixed 
pivot 66. 
We have illustrated here with a depending 
shank 68 carrying the Spindle 58, and a remov 
able sleeve 70 of the flexible shaft adjustable 
thereon for facilitating the attachment or de 
tachment of the interior rotary part of the 
flexible shafting 44, to the spindle 58, as more 
fully described in the patent application of 
Mott G. Gillette, Serial No. 453,919, filed De 
cember 3, 1892. 
A further modification which may be em 
ployed if preferred, consists in mounting the 
journal box 15, on a flexible wrist 72, as in 
Fig. 7, connecting the shaft 12, with a sepa 
rate section 11 thereof bearing the pulley 14, 
by a flexible section 74 of any suitable char 
acter, and securing or making integral the 
staff 28, with said box. 15. The staff is in this 
instance counterbalanced by two springs 49, 
49 connected from a yoke 80 to the yoke 82, 
on the staff; which springs in co-operation 
with the extremity of the staff, balance the 
latter at three points about the flexible sup 
porting center 72, preventing its displace 
ment. The pulley 56, and spindle 58, are 
journaled in a box 51 fixed to the staff 28 in 
Figs. 7 and 8. 
Having now fully described our invention, 
what we claim, and desire to secure by Tet 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a power applying mechanism, the Com 
bination of a suitable base, a stationary stand 
ard upon the base, a rotary standard mounted 
on the stationary standard, a handle bar for 
guiding the rotary standard, a driving shaft 
extending through the stationary and rotary 
standards connected to the mechanism to be 
driven, a driving wheel removed from the 
standard, and a suitable support therefor 
mounted on the said base, a treadle for oper 
ating the driving wheel, a seat above the 
treadle, and mechanism for transmitting mo- 85 
tion from said driving wheel to said driving 
shaft. 
2. In a power applying mechanism, the com 
bination of a stationary standard, a rotary 
standard, a movable staff mounted thereon 9o 
supporting the mechanism to be driven, a 
guiding handle bar on said rotary standard 
for controlling the horizontal sweep of the 
staff, a driving wheel removed from the 
standard, a treadle, a saddle above the treadle 
opposite the handle bar, a driving shaft in the 
standard connected to the mechanism to be 
driven, and means for transmitting motion 
from the driving wheel to the said driving 
shaft. 
3. In a power-applying mechanism, the com 
bination with the stationary standard, the ro 
tary standard mounted thereon, the driving 
shaft extending through said stationary and 
rotary standards, and means for actuating 
the said shaft, of a movable supporting staff, 
projected in a normally horizontal direction 
from said rotary standard, and means for 
counter-balancing it, and at the extremity of 
said staff a flexible shafting depending there. 
from connected with the mechanism to be 
driven, a universally movable journal-box and 
spindle therein for rotating the said flexible 
depending shaft, mounted in a fork at the ex 
tremity of the staff, and a belt pulley upon 
the said driving shaft, a belt pulley upon the 
said driven shaft, a belt pulley upon said 
spindle, and a belt connecting said pulleys, 
and means for extending the said staff longi 
tudinally to hold said belt taut, 
4. The combination with the standard the 
driving shaft therein and the pulley on said 
shaft, of the herein-described supporting staff 
28, provided with a fork 52, at its extremity, a 
spring for pushing the fork outward, and the 
supporting journal-box. 50, circumferentially 
recessed to fit said fork and admit of universal 
oscillation, and a pulley journaled in said box 
50, and a belt connecting said pulleys. 
5. In a power-applying mechanism, the com 
bination of a standard for supporting the 
mechanism to be driven, a driving shaft in the 
standard and means for rotating it, a normally 
horizontal movable supporting staff mounted 
95 
OO 
IO 5 
IC) 
I 15 
20 
I 25 
 
529,875 
3 
on the extremity of the standard, a flexible standard mounted therein, a driving shaftex 
joint connecting the staff to the standard, tending through the said stationary and ro 
means for counterbalancing said staff, a belt tary standards connected to the mechanism to 15 
pulley journaled on the staff upon a separate be driven, and means for revolving said shaft; 
5 section of said driving shaft connected to the said standard and shaft being longitudinally 
main section by a flexible shafting, and at the extensible as set forth. 
extremity of said shaft another belt pulley 
journaled therein adapted to operate the 
mechanism to be driven, and a belt connect- 
Io ing said pulleys, substantially as described. 
6. In a power-applying mechanism, the com- 
bination of a stationary standard, a rotary 
--- 
ENR.E.E.E.E. 
a will ---- 
Witnesses: 
WM. IRWIN, 
E. MARTIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US529976.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 529,976, 
R. TRAN QUILLI. 
FIRE EXTINGUISHINGAPPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 27, 1894, 
sRIs PerERS Co. PHOTO-LITHC. washington, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 529,976, 
R. TRAN QUILLI. 
FIRE EXTINGUISHING APPARATUS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 27, 1894, 
 
 
Xe sias 
 
  
 
S 
s : s : :s s 
. 
N 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RAF FAELE TRAN QUILLI, OF ROME, ITALY. 
FIRE-EXTINGUISHING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 529,976, dated November 27, 1894. 
Application filed July 24, 1894, Serial No. 518,488. (No model.) 
55 
75 
io all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, RAFFAELETRANQUILLI, 
a subject of the King of Italy, residing at 
Rome, Italy, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Fire-Extinguishing 
Apparatus, of which the following is a descrip 
tion. 
Myinvention has relation to fire-extinguish 
ing apparatus or devices, and among the ob 
jects in view is to provide a simple, inexpen 
sive and efficient apparatus whereby the pres 
ence of a fire will be made known and such 
fire extinguished before the same has spread 
to any extent, and with the above and other 
objects in view all of which will presently be 
made apparent, the invention consists in the 
novel construction, arrangement, and combi 
nation of parts as hereinafter fully described, 
illustrated in the drawings and pointed out in 
the claims. 
In the drawings:-Figure l is a sectional 
elevation illustrating my apparatus. Fig. 2 
is a similar view, showing a slightly different 
arrangement of the parts. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tionai view showing a modified arrangement 
of the cut-off valve. 
Referring to the above-described drawings 
and more particularly to Fig. 1, A B C D in 
dicate a suitable metallic tank or cistern 
adapted to contain water, and with which 
tank communicates a discharge pipe H II. 
which leads off to the apartment or locality 
desired to be protected, said pipe being 
provided with a number of perforations to 
permit of the discharge therethrough of the 
Water. 
The communication between the tank and 
the discharge pipe is controlled by means of 
a suitable valve, adapted to normally remain 
in a position to cut of the communication be 
tween said parts, and to open communication 
between the same upon the breaking out of 
a fire. 
In Fig. 1 I show a conical valve F, adapted 
to be seated within the conical valve seat F, 
and said valve is carried by a valve stem F. 
which passes upwardly through a guard or 
bridge h, and is connected at its upper end 
with one end of a lever EG centrally pivoted 
upon the tank. To the opposite end of the 
said lever is connected a wire or rod GM 
whose lower end is connected to one end of 
a counterpoised lever MO pivoted centrally 
at N upon a suitable support. The opposite 
end of the said lever MO carries a metallic 
contact c, and to said end is also connected one 
end of a combustible cord O', which passes 
around suitably-arranged guide pulleys T, U, 
located in the compartment desired to be pro 
tected, and the opposite end of the said cord 
carrying a weight, preferably a casing Q. Con 
taining a substance that is readily melted. 
R indicates a suitable battery, the Wires 
from which connect with the contact c, and 
a similar contact b, a suitable alarm S being 
included in the electrical circuit. 
It will be seen that in the event of a fire, 
if the cord O' should be burned at any point 
in its length the weight P carried by the le" 
ver M? O will draw down the rod GM which 
causes the lever E G to assume the dotted 
line position whereby the valve F will be 
raised from its seat and permit the Water to 
flow from the tank into the discharge pipe 
and through the perforations therein into the 
apartment to extinguish the fire; or if the 
cord should not be burned, the substance con 
tained in the casing Q will be melted thereby 
reducing the weight and permitting the de 
scribed operation of parts to take place. In 
either event the electrical circuit will be 
closed by the contact of the contacts b, c, 
thereby causing the alarm S to sound. 
In the arrangement seen in Fig. 2, I show 
the apparatus applied to protect a bed-room, 
and in order to protect any number of rooms, 
as in a hotel, each of said rooms may be pro 
vided with the apparatus, all of which may 
derive their supply of water from the dis 
tributing pipe-system, the communication be 
tween such system, and each set of devices 
being controlled by a cut-off valve or cock 
connected with a lever as seen in Fig. 3, and 
in this arrangement the cord O' is carried 
over guide pulleys so arranged as to bring 
the cord in close proximity to combustible 
materials, such as the bed-clothing, window 
curtains, &c., so that ignition of these will 
immediately effect the desired operation of 
the parts and consequent discharge of water 
to extinguish the fire. In this arrangement, 
the contacts b, c, may be in electrical con 
O 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
50 
go 
95 
IOO 
529,976 
- 
nection with wires leading off to a fire-alarm 
station, whereby the brigade will be notified 
of the outbreak of a fire. 
My apparatus may be employed for cooling 
heated bearings in various machinery where 
in there may be parts liable to become hot, as 
for instance bearings of crank-shafts, thrust 
blocks of propeller shafts, &c. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination in a fire-extinguishing 
apparatus, of a suitable supply of water, a 
discharge pipe communicating there with a 
valve adapted to control said communication, 
a lever connected with said valve, a normally 
balanced lever, a connection between the lat 
ter and the first lever, and a combustible cord 
connected With said balanced lever and 
adapted when severed to permit the parts to 
operate the valve to open communication be 
tween the water supply and the discharge 
pipe, as and for the purpose specified. 
2. The combination in a fire-extinguishing 
apparatus, of a suitable supply of water, a 
discharge pipe communicating there with, a 
valve adapted to control said communication, 
a pivoted lever connected with said valve at 
one end, a wire or rod connected with the op 
posite end of said lever, a pivoted normally 
balanced lever carrying a weight and con 
nected at one end with said wire or rod, a 
combustible cord connected with the opposite 
35 
O 
45 
end of said balanced lever, guide-pulleys 
around which said cord passes, and a casing 
carried by the said cord and containing a 
readily melted substance, all as and for the 
purpose specified. 
3. The combination in a fire-extinguishing 
apparatus, of a suitable supply of water, a 
discharge pipe communicating there with, a 
valve adapted to control said communication, 
a pivoted lever connected with said valve at 
one end, a wire or rod connected with the op 
posite end of said lever, a pivoted normally 
balanced lever carrying a weight and con 
nected at one end with said wire or rod, a 
combustible cord connected with the opposite 
end of said balanced lever, guide pulleys 
around which said cord passes, a casing car 
ried by the said cord and containing a read 
ily melted substance, an electrical circuit con 
taining an alarm and adapted to be closed 
when the said cord is severed, in the manner 
and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
E of two witnesses, this 4th day of June, 
1894. 
RAFFAELE TRANQUILLI. 
Witnesses: 
DWIGHT BENTON, 
JOHN L. HURST. 
d 
2 d 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530076.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 530,076. 
J. H. ALKER. 
BOLT HEADING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet . 
Patented Dec. 4, 1894. 
 
WITNESSES. 
J. H. ALKER, 
BOLT HEADING MACHINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 4, 1894, 
(No Model.) 
No. 530,076, 
 
 
WNESSES 
NWENTOR. 
co. Photo-litho 
(No Model.) 
No. 530,076, 
42 1/ 
70 A 2) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
J. H. ALKER, 
BOLT HEADING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Deo. 4, 1894, 
- 
2 
3 
 
au--a 
% % z 22 3. 
 
 
 
NESSES. 
syf72 2-6, 
- 
/774,62.------- 
r 
923. i?ed. 
22. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 530,076. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
J. H. ALKER. 
BOLT HEADING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Dec. 4, 1894, 
 
 
 
... 3 9. 
z. 
22NS 2 
3.2% 
2 3. 
29 
33 
22 
SS 
22.2% 
erases 
w 
a 
SSIS 22, 
% - 26 15-O 
2 
 
WITNESSES 
Aa. 
The NORRs peers ce. Photo-lho, WASHENSON, o, . 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 530,076, 
 
J. H. ALKER. 
BOLT HEADING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Dec. 4, 1894. 
WNESSES. 
1766 ------- 
19 
4326, 
%rgia;. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. ALKER, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE OLIVER 
IRON AND STEEL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BOLT - HEADING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,076, dated December 4, 1894. 
Application filed December 29, 1891, Serial No. 416,466, (No model.) 
O 
Figure 1 is a top plan view of my 
is the hopper or inclined bed 11, in which the 
Beitknown that I, JOHN H. ALKER, of Pitts- blanks are placed so that they lie closely one 
against the other and crosswise of the flat bot- . 
tom of the hopper. The higher end of this 
55 
hopper is supported upon a rod 12, which 
passes through the adjustably-secured verti 
cal post 13, and to the ends of which the side 
pieces of the hopper are pivoted. The lower 
end of the hopper terminates in a vertical 
case or guide 14, the outer side of which has 
an upwardly-projecting lip 15, which prevents 
the blanks from leaving the hopper. It will . 
be noticed that the sides of this case are Cor 
respondingly bent in concave and convex 
form, respectively. This is to prevent the 
canting and sticking of the blank which Would 
occur if the blank fell into the groove. By 
forming this slot or inclined guideway, the 
blank rolls downwardly and is preserved in 
parallelism so that no sticking can occur. 
The lower portion of the case 14 terminates 
in a casting 16, having a slot or groove 17, in 
which reciprocates the feeding-rod 18. In the 
outer portion 19 of this casting the groove be 
comes a hole passing through the casting. 
The feeding rod is actuated by means of the 
lever 20 pivoted at 21 to the block 22, which 
is pivoted in a perforated piece 22", adjust 
ably held in the groove 23 of the base by a 
bolt 24 passing through a flange 25 upon the 
piece and a slot 26 in the base. The outer 
end of this lever 20 is slotted at 27, and in 
this slot moves the post 28 which is carried 
upon a reciprocating bar 29. The connection 
of the post to this bar is shown in Figs. 8 and 
9. The bar 29 passes through the post, and 
secured to a flange of the post is the pivoted 
bell-crank lever 30 bearing upon one arm the 
rivet or pin 31, the other arm being in the 
form of a handle. The bar is provided with 
a steel bushing 32, into which the pin is thrust 
when the parts are locked together. By this 
means, whenever for any cause a sudden 
strain is brought upon the machine, this rivet 
will be sheared off and prevent breaking of 
costly parts of the machine. The bar moves 
in slotted guideways in the casting 33 and in 
the rear guide 34, and is provided upon op 
positesides with the bearing-pieces 35, against 
which the separate cams 36 and 37 bear. The 
cam 37 acts to push the bar forward, and as 
To all whom, it may concern: 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Bolt-Heading Machines, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming part of this 
Specification, in which 
improved 
machine. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a front elevation. Figs. 4 and 
5 are enlarged plan and cross-sectional views, 
respectively, of the feeding mechanism, Fig. 
5 being on the line V-W of Fig. 2. Figs. 6 
and 7 are enlarged longitudinal sectional 
views of the feeding rod and attachments. 
Figs. 8 and 9 are detail views of the fastening 
device for the lever arm, in open and locked 
positions respectively; and Figs. 10, 11 and 12 
are detail views of the dies employed. 
Like symbols of reference indicate like 
parts in each of the views. 
My invention relates to that class of bolt 
heading machines wherein the blank is held 
between reciprocating dies while a hammer 
strikes its projecting portion and heads up 
the same, and it consists in an improved feed 
ing device for feeding the blanks to the ma 
chine and forcing them forward the proper 
distance, as well as in the improved construc 
tion and arrangement of the parts as herein 
after more fully described and set forth in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, 2, 2, are the end supports, 
upon which rests the usual frame in which is 
mounted the shaft 3, which carries a suitable 
cam for actuating the heading-die 4, which 
heading-die moves in guideways and is pro 
vided with a suitable strap surrounding the 
cam. Upon this shaft is also mounted a sec 
ond cam which actuates the wedge-piece 5, 
which serves to reciprocate the movable 
clamping - die 6, having the corresponding 
wedge-face 7. This movable die is normally 
held retracted by the flat spring 8, connected 
thereto by a rod 9. 10 is the stationary die 
these dies having suitable registering grooves 
which serve to clamp the bolt therein when 
the dies are closed. 
Mounted upon the front end of the machine 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 
25 
35 
45 
 
 
530,076 
5 
Soon as the outermost point of the cam is 
passed, the cam 36, bearing upon the other 
piece 35, retracts the bar. The bar then re 
mains retracted for a short time, when the 
quick reciprocation is again effected. 
In Fig. 7 illustrate the means for connect 
ing the lever and feed-rod. A clip 38, about 
the lower part of which the slotted lever 
passes, is provided with a cylinder 38', having 
a longitudinal hole 39 in which the rod is car 
ried. A stem 40 upon the rod projects through 
a small hole in the end of the cylinder, and 
between the shoulder upon the rod and the 
inner face of the cylinder bears the spring 41, 
the amount of compression of the spring be 
ing regulated by nuts 42. The clip may be 
adjusted in various positions upon the cyl 
inder. Through a hole in the clip passes the 
stationary guide-rod 43, which is secured to 
the cylindrical casting 16. In the hopper re 
ciprocates the slide 44 actuated by the slotted 
lever 45, which bears about the post 46 pro 
jecting through a slot in the hopper. This 
lever is normally held so that the slide closes 
the entrance to the case 14 by a spring 47 bear 
ing against the post, and is actuated against 
the pressure of the spring by the adjustable 
tappet 48 upon the reciprocating die 7. 
The dies which I employ, as shown in Figs. 
10, ll and 12, have four working recesses in 
which the head is formed, there being two re 
cesses 49 and 50 at the ends of each groove 
51, such groove being formed upon each end 
of the die. In this way there are four posi 
tions in which the die may be used and con 
sequently the life of the die is four times as 
long as formerly. 
The operation is as follows:-The shaft be 
ing rotated by suitable power connections the 
bolts are placed upon the slide in the hopper 
by an attendant. Upon the forward motion 
of the reciprocating die the slide 44 is drawn 
back, allowing a blank to pass in front of the 
reciprocating feed-rod which is retracted. As 
the die is retracted the feed-rod pushes the 
blank forward through the dies a distance 
which may be regulated by the throw of the 
lever and presses it against the heading-die 
which is in forward position, upon which the 
dies close, and the heading-die, being re 
tracted, moves forward and heads the blank. 
The advantages of my invention are ob 
vious. The attendant has merely to place the 
blanks in the hopper and the headed bolts are 
ejected from the machine. The parts of the 
feeder are simple and are operated automati 
cally by the machine, while liability to break 
age is obviated by the spring connections and 
the pin in the lever which is readily sheared 
off if any sudden strain is brought thereon. 
Many changes may be made in the form and 
arrangement of the parts without departure 
from my invention, since 
What I claim is 
1. A blank-feeder, comprising an inclined 
bed, of a width corresponding to the length of 
the blanks, a vertical case at its lower end, a 
grooved casting beneath the case, and a rod 
arranged to reciprocate in the groove of said 
castings; substantially as described, 
2. A blank-feeder, comprising an inclined 
bed, of a width corresponding to the length of 
the blanks, a rod arranged to reciprocate in 
the lower part of said feeder, a pin upon the 
outer end of the rod located in the slot of a 
lever, and means for actuating said lever; 
substantially as described. 
3. A blank-feeder, comprising an inclined 
bed or hopper, of a width corresponding to the 
length of the blanks, a reciprocating rod in the 
lower part of the feeder, a lever arranged to 
actuate the rod, and an adjustable fulcrum 
for said lever; substantially as described. 
4. A blank-feeding mechanism comprising 
an inclined feeder, a reciprocatory rod in the 
lower part thereof, a lever arranged to actu 
ate the rod, a post at the outer end of the le 
ver, and a reciprocating rod passing through 
the post and secured thereto by a removable 
pin; substantially as described. 
5. As a connection between a levor and its 
actuating rod, a post upon the lever through 
which the rod passes, a handle pivoted to the 
post and carrying a pin, and an aperture in 
the rod arranged to receive the pin; substan 
tially as described. 
6. A blank-feeding mechanism comprising 
an inclined feeder, a rod arranged to recip 
rocate in its lower portion, a pin upon the 
rod about which a slotted lever bears, and 
an actuating bar having a pin engaging a slot 
in the other end of the lever; substantially 
as described. 
7. In a blank-feeder, a feeding-rod, a lever 
having a slot at each end and a movable full 
crum, an actuating rod having a pin entering 
one of said slots, and a pin upon the feeding 
rod engaging the other slot; substantially as 
described. 
8. A blank-feeder, comprising an inclined 
bed, having a slide therein, and a lower up 
right case or guide, a lever arranged to actu 
ate said slide, and a tappet upon a movable 
part and engaging the lever; substantially as 
described. 
9. A blank-feeder, comprising a hopper con 
taining a reciprocating rod, a lever carry 
ing a perforated post, a stem upon the rod 
passing through the post, and a spring be 
tween the post and rod; substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof Ihave hereunto set my 
hand this 15th day of December, A. D. 1891. 
JOIN HI, ATIXER. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. WHITTLESEY, 
II. M. CORWIN. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
7 o 
9o 
IOO 
I o5 
o 
II5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530176.txt	(No Model.) 
BEST AWA 
v 
LABLE COP 
0. 
ALTERNATING OURRENT MOTOR AND METHOD OF OPERATING SAME, 
Patented Dec. 4, 1894, 
No. 530,176. 
L. GUTMANN. 
 
EC)(3)(C)(3) 
E32 
9-serie 32-8-8 
. 
Sp e/ey 
4-25. 
4.2.2% 4. 
-64-14 voice, 
S. . 
By his Atto 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
BESTAVAILABLE cop, 
I, UD W I G GUT MAN N, O F PITT's BURG, PEN NSYWAN IA. 
ALTERNATING-CURRENT MOTOR AND METHOD OF OPERATING SAME, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 530,176, dated December 4, 1894. 
Application filed October 30, 1889, Serial No. 328,641. (No model.) 
55 
Zo all, whom, it may concern: 
magnetic field that the sum of their currents 
Be it known that I, LUDWIG GUTMANN, a 
is zero. It is therefore evident, that if the 
subject of the German Emperor, residing at 
armature has not this position to begin with 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
it will start from state of rest but will come 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
to rest, as soon as the short circuited wind 
new and useful Improvements in Alternating 
ings have as near as possible a symmetrical 
Current Motors and Methods of Operating 
position with regard to the field poles, when 
Same, of which the following is a full, clear, 
the armature will be currentless. This is how 
concise, and exact description, reference be 
ever, not the case with all constructions, for 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, form 
if the alternations are not very high and the 
ing a part of this specification. 
field poles comparatively far apart, the first 
My invention relates to a novel method of 
initial impulse may cause the armature to pick 
producing rotation in an electric motor for 
up in speed when running without a load, and 
power transmission purposes. 
arrive or pass a certain speed which has to be 
The invention in short consists in produc 
reached for it to continue to accelerate and run 
ing or inducing by means of a single ener 
in harmony with the alternations. With ordi 
gizing current in one conductor polyphase 
nary constructions desirable for efficient mo 
Currents in another conductor and in conse 
tors the self-starting would be uncertain, and 
quence a resultant rotary magnetic field. 
this therefore is a weakpoint for a commercial 
Figure 1, represents the device in diagram. 
machine. This uncertainty increases with 
Figs. 2, 3, 4 and 5 are diagrams explaining 
increase of alternations or decrease of poles 
the action in the armature Fig. 1. 
and closed circuited windings. 
If, however, 
Referring in particular to Fig. 1 A, B, are 
by some suitable mechanical, electrical or 
the two field magnet poles of magnet J which 
electro magnetic means, for instance by a 
is provided with the energizing coil C. This 
quickly given impulse of rotary motion man 
winding is connected by means of conductors 
ually imparted to the shaft, the armature is 
G H to the brushes I, and collector K of a 
brought over a certain speed, which I will call 
suitable generator D of alternating, pulsating 
its critical speed, then it will continue to in 
or intermittent currents. An armature is 
crease in speed, and run at synchronous or 
placed in the field of this magnet. Its core E 
slightly below synchronous speed, which facts 
is surrounded by the winding F and further 
have been found experimentally. 
. 
more the winding is provided with cross con 
With an unequal or different number of 
necting conductors, or close circuiting conduc 
close circuits from that of the pole pieces, the 
tors I. The figure represents no particular 
close circuited windings produce a differen 
mechanical construction but a diagram only, 
tial action, which is the cause, that the torque 
which will enable the explanation of the un 
at the start is very low or zero, but when an 
derlying principle. It may however be stated, 
armature coil in rotation, normally close cir 
that the field and armature windings, also i cuited, passes from one pole to the other in 
the numbers of poles and close circuited ar 
the time of one-half period and attains the 
mature coils may be multiplied as now well 
same position in front of this pole, it is evi 
known and described in other patents, for 
dent, that the force, which gave this coil the 
instance No. 463,314, without departing from 
first impulse, will cause it to rotate in the 
the nature of the invention. 
same direction. 
If D is an alternating current dynamo or 
The construction of the amature disclosed 
transformer, and from it a current should be 
in the diagrams differs from those heretofore 
sent through the field magnet winding C, cur 
used in practice. It is a commutatorless ma 
rents would be induced in the armature wind 
chine, whose winding contains close circuits 
ing, owing to the closed circuits, which act 
in electrical connection with one another. 
differentially and establish poles, which cause 
To facilitate the explanation, it may be as 
the armature to move so as to re-establish 
sumed, that the three conductors L are di 
magnetic equilibrium, and this is reached, 
rectly in touch with each other and divide the 
when all closed circuits are so placed in the 
armature winding in but three subcircuits of 
75 
95 
25 
35 
45 
2 
530,176 
BEST AVAILAB 
equal sizes, and in electric connection with on 
another, which assumption is permissible, in 
asmuch as the principle involved is the same 
in both cases. It will be seen, that one coil is 
5 in parallel to the other two, which latter are in 
series across the terminals of the first named 
coil. Each of these coils as it passes through 
a magnetic field or passes in front of a pole, 
generates two current impulses, which dis 
Io tribute themselves over the winding through 
the various passages offered, according to well 
known laws. However, those currents in the 
three coils are not simultaneous, because the 
closed circuits have not identical position to 
I5 the field magnet poles as they differ in num 
ber therefrom. 
Fig. 2 presents the armature running at 
synchronous speed. The two positions a and 
b show, that the armature poles remain prac 
20 tically stationary in the armature core. It 
will be noticed, that coils 1 and 3 are acting 
in the same sense, coil. 2 in opposition. Ro 
tation is mainly due to coill, while the others 
at this position neutralize each other or are 
25 nearly equal and opposite. The consequence 
is the formation of poles N and S, and rota 
tion in counterclock-wise direction. Position 
bindicates the distance, which the armature 
y rotates in one-half period and shows the field 
3o poles reversed. Evidently the poles in the 
armature remain stationary and rotate with it. 
If we however consider, that the armature is 
symmetrical and that it should be indifferent 
to the action of the machine which coil reaches 
35 the point where another ought to have ar 
rived, We may obtain another synchronous 
speed. This is indicated in Fig. 3. This set 
of four diagrams in which the coils are in 
dicated by the number, the winding being 
4o omitted, shows a difference in regard to Fig. 
2, as coil 1 does not reach the north pole 
again, but coil 2 takes the identical position 
and evidently rotation will be the conse 
quence. Similarly at the next half impulse 
45 coil 2 cannot reach the other pole. However, 
- coil 3 does, and in this way the three coils ex. 
change position with one another. However, 
the north and South poles no longer are sta 
tionary with one coil, as in Fig. 2 where the 
In the present case the poles change from 
coil 1 to 2 to 3; 1, 2 and 3, &c., and also the 
Working of the coils in the same sense changes; 
in the first position coils 1 and 3, in the sec 
55 ond coils 2 and 1, in the third coils 3 and 2 
are working together, while the third either 
carries no current or else is in opposition. 
Following the arrows in the various positions, 
we notice, that they naturally would change 
6o their direction, and that the currents in the 
different sub-circuits differ in phase by one 
hundred and twenty degrees, but if we ex 
amine now into the position of the poles we 
observe, that they travel in this particular 
65 case at a differentrate from the armature and 
in opposite direction. Looking at the first 
and third positions we observe, that coil 1 has 
5o poles rotate with coil 1. 
made but one-third of a iFi.SQRie the 
magnetic poles have traveled once around, or 
in other words the magnetic field of the arma- 7o 
ture makes three revolutions in one direction, 
while the armature itself rotates but once in 
the opposite direction. The fourth position 
it will be noticed, shows the armature after 
one-half revolution. The close circuited coill 75 
stands again in front of a north pole, in spite 
of having a position opposite to that shown 
in the first diagram of Fig. 3. Evidently the 
armature will now undergo the same changes 
and in the same order with the right hand 8o 
pole as north pole (fourth position) as it has 
undergone before, starting with coil No. 1 in 
front of the left hand pole piece as a north 
pole. In this case the armature itself has a 
speed of one-sixth revolution per half period. 85 
Another harmonic speed is admissible, in 
which the armature makes one-third of a revo 
lution per half alternation. This is shown in 
Fig. 4. In these four diagrams the coils ex 
change position of maximum activity, but not go 
as in the former case in front of a pole of the 
same polarity. It will be noticed, that with 
this particular harmonic speed every one of 
these close circuited coils passes through the 
same field of maximum magnetic flux. Every 95 
one has its greatest torque when in front of 
the same core portion. Nevertheless as the 
field energizing current is an alternating cur 
rent this same core part must change its sign. 
The speed of rotation of these three closed oc 
coils, 1, 2, and 3, is pointed out as follows: If 
coil 1 stands in front of a fully developed 
north pole, it rotates in counter clockwise 
direction, and by the time that coil No. 3 
reaches the position occupied by coil No. 1 c 5 
the north pole has died out, changed into a 
south pole and reached its normal strength. 
By the time that coil No. 2 reaches the posi 
tion just held by coil No. 3 the polarity has 
changed again to north; the next coil will I lo 
stand in front of the same core part when it 
has changed again to a south pole. It will 
thus be clear, while in Fig. 3 all coils of maxi 
mum activity stand before alternate core 
parts having all the same polarity, viz: north, I I5 
the condition presented in Fig. 4 shows all 
coils of maximum activity in front of the 
same core part however the polarity alter 
nates, so that coil No. 1 stands in front of a 
north pole, while coil No. 3 a moment later 12 o 
stands in front of a southpole, coil No.2 stands 
in front of a north pole and soon. The fourth 
position shows, that the armature has made 
a complete revolution however the poles are 
reversed; evidently the poles travel at a dif- I 25 
ferent rate; they have rotated one and a half 
times in the opposite direction. 
Inasmuch as the change of polarity appears 
too abrupt, and especially as the armature 
poles travel at different speeds in the core, I 3o 
this action may be shown more gradual in a 
four-pole field Fig. 5. 
The five diagrams show the armature in 
synchronism with the alternations. All three 
580-176 
- 
BEST AVAILA 
8 
7 o 
75 
So 
9o 
95 
CO 
1 OS 
C 
IIS 
2 O 
I 25 
O 
coils in turn stand in front of a north pole 
but not before the identical piece of iron. In 
fact, owing to the difference of armature coils 
and field poles, different core portions are 
used having the desired polarity, viz: for the 
armature coil of maximum action the field 
poles are rotating in clockwise direction. It 
will thus be clear, that if the close circuits 
operate at this harmonic speed with the alter 
nations, the alternating field exercises the 
Same identical effect on the armature as a ro 
tary magnetic field applied to the stationary 
magnet. Following now the poles, we see, 
that the armature poles change from coil 1, 
to 3, to 2 to 1, to 3 to 2, &c. In respect to the 
armature coils the alternating field fluxes 
Seem to rotate in clockwise direction, because 
for them constantly progressive core parts 
are the seat of maximum magnetic flux of the 
Sane polarity, which periodically and pro 
gressively react on closed armature coils, an 
gularly displaced from one another. It will 
also be noticed, that in the fifth position the 
almature has traveled but a third revolution, 
but we are now enabled to follow the travel 
ing armature poles and notice, that in one 
third al'mature revolution the magnetic poles 
have made a complete revolution. The ro 
taly magnetic field in the armature is due to 
periodic and successive excitation of the coils, 
and also to the distribution discharge or cir 
culation of the currents induced, to other 
parts of the winding, having a lower differ 
ence of potential and being angularly dis 
placed, thereby converting the rotary core 
into three systems whose magnets are angu 
larly displaced and whose poles vary in 
Strength and intensity with the currents caus 
ing them. This class of motors belongs to the 
Synchronous type, but synchronism in this 
case is not only the one speed n, where n is 
the number of alternations and p is the num 
ber of field poles, but it may vary from that 
speed to others, down to , 
where p' is the 
pp 
number of close circuited armature coils. The 
greatest torque however, lies between the nu 
merical values . and divided by the small 
est common factor between p and p'. 
In the present case the motor Fig. 1 has 
been shown to possess three synchronous 
Speeds. This synchronism is desirable for 
the efficient Working of the motor. This mo 
tor has the good qualities of a polyphase mo 
tor in having the capacity of remaining in 
synchronism, but of changing from one speed 
into another; that is to say, if due to load a 
certain coil cannot reach its proper position, 
a heavier current will be generated in the coil 
ahead, which causes an increase in torque, 
and the armature goes on, but this takes 
place only between limits, and if the lowest 
synchronous speed is passed the motor will 
come to a standstill like every other over 
p 
v 
worked synchronous ARL BiQQ Rotor has 
nine closed circuits instead of three, it is evi 
dent, that also the motor speed can vary be 
tween wider limits than with three as indi 
cated by above formula, other conditions re 
maining as before. It will be clear further, 
that in the particular case Fig. 1, there would 
be generated a system of three currents lag 
ging behind one another one hundred and 
twenty degrees, which are due to two forces: 
One is an alternating current or a field of va 
riable intensity, the second is rotation. The 
magnetic field around the armature becomes 
within limits the more constant the greater 
the number of close circuited coils, and the 
greater therefore the number of currents 
which lag behind one another in phase. 
By having six closed circuits the periodic 
currents would be six, which depending on 
the connection may lag behind one another 
by sixty degrees, or may form two systems 
displaced in regard to one another and each 
three lag one hundred and twenty degrees be 
hind each other. Again, other number of 
closed coils may be used for such armature 
systems, for instance, 7, 11, 21, and they would 
be producing as many currents lagging in 
phase from a single source. With the in 
creased number of close circuited coils the 
magnetization would be more regular and 
the changes from one speed to another less 
marked. 
The diagrams Figs. 3, 4 and 5 have dis 
closed that there are two forces acting against 
one another. Each is produced by periodic 
currents lagging in phase. The forces pre 
dominating establish a rotary field in clock 
wise direction. If we consider however for 
a moment the opposing force or forces alone, 
it is evident that, being periodic currents lag 
ging in phase and displaced from one another 
angularly around a common center, they also 
produce a rotary magnetic field however 
weaker than the former, and their field would 
rotate in the opposite direction to the one 
named first, so that in reality two rotary fields 
are created, the resultant of which is shown 
in the diagrams. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. The method herein described of operat 
ing an alternating or pulsatory current mo 
tor which consists in magnetizing one of the 
elements (the field) by a single energizing 
circuit and producing a continuously pro 
gressive shifting of the magnetic polarities in 
the other motor element (the armature) by 
developing currents differing in phase and 
current quantity in different closed circuits 
of a winding of said element. 
2. The herein described method of trans 
forming electrical energy into mechanical, 
consisting in energizing one of the motor ele 
ments (the field) normally by a single phase 
alternating electric current, and progress 
ively changing the position of the magnetic 
poles of the other element (the armature) by 
periodic currents differing in phase. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
539,76 
3. The method herein described of produc 
ing mechanical motion from electrical energy, 
consisting in establishing a field of rapidly 
varying intensity by a single phase alternat 
ing or pulsatory current, and producing in a 
motor element whose winding is exposed to 
said field of force polyphase currents in suc 
cessive closed circuits of said winding. 
4. The method herein described of produc 
ing mechanical motion from electrical energy, 
consisting in establishing by means of a sin 
gle phase alternating current, a field of rap 
idly varying intensity for one of the elements 
of a motor, and producing polyphase currents 
in interconnected closed windings, and there 
by developing a rotary magnetic field for the 
Second element, as herein set forth. 
5. The combination with a source of single 
O 
BEST AVAILABLE COP. 
phase alternating currents, of a motor pro 
vided with field magnet coils all of which are 
electrically connected in circuit with said 
source, and an armature provided with inter 
connected circuits the number thereof being 
different from the number of field poles or 
positions of maximum magnetic flux, where 
by the motor may run harmoniously at more 
than one speed substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 24th day of Octo 
ber, 1889. 
25 
LUD WIG GUTMANN. 
Witnesses: 
E. G. DUVALL, Jr., 
EDWARD P. THOMPSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530276.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 530,276, 
W. F. KENDT, 
TROLLEY CATCHER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Deo. 4, 1894, 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N W 
-  - 
?? 
Y 
?2222 
a 
? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Attorneys. 
 
. The NoRRIS PETERs co, Photo-Litho, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM F. KENDT, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS 
TO GEORGE M. MITCHELL AND ROD McLEOD, OF SAME PLACE. 
TROLLEY-CATCHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 530,276, dated December 4, 1894. 
Application filed May 26, 1894, Serial No. 512,509, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. F. KENDT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Buf 
falo, in the county of Erie and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Trolley-Catchers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to trolley catchers of 
that class in which the trolley, in the event 
of accidentally leaving the conducting wire, 
is automatically drawn down by a rotary 
spring-drum having a detent device which is 
connected with the trolley rope. 
The height of the conducting wire gener 
ally varies at different points of the line and 
the trolley rope must, therefore, have enough, 
slack to enable the trolley to reach the most 
elevated sections of the conducting wire. In 
order to insure the requisite slack of the rope, 
it is desirable that it should have a definite 
length. Heretofore, the drum has usually 
been provided with ratchet teeth and the de 
tent pawl was at all times free to engage with 
the teeth of the drum. This construction is 
undesirable, because it locks the drum irre 
spective of whether the trolley rope is suffi 
ciently unwound or not, so that in case it is not 
sufficiently unwound, it has too little slack to 
permit the trolley to reach the highest points 
of the conducting wire. 
One of the objects of my invention is to or 
ganize the catcher so that in unwinding the 
trolley rope for tensioning the spring, the 
drum will not be locked against backward 
movement except when the trolley rope is suf 
ficiently unwound therefrom, thus always in 
suring the requisite slack of the rope to allow 
the trolley to remain in contact with the con 
ducting wire under ordinary circumstances. 
Another object of my invention is to pro 
vide the spring-drum with a simple attach 
ment which permits it to be readily removed 
from and applied to the car. 
. 
In the accompanying drawings consisting 
of two sheets:-Figure 1 is an end view of a 
street car equipped with my improved trolley 
catcher. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section, on an 
enlarged scale, in line 2-2 Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
vertical section of the device showing the 
spring of the drum wound up and the trolley 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
7 ? 
rope unwound from the drum. Fig. 4 is a simi 
lar view showing the trolley rope wound upon 
the drum. Fig. 5 is a vertical section at right 
angles to Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a vertical section, 
in line 6-6, Fig. 5, looking toward the right. 55 
Fig. 7 is an enlarged view of the detent pawl, 
its link and the adjacent portion of the drum. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the several figures. 
A is the pole carrying the trolley a. and at 6o 
tached to the roof of the car B in any well 
known manner. 
C is the rope depending from the trolley 
pole and D is the flanged rotary drum upon 
which the rope is wound in drawing down the 65 
trolley. This drum is journaled in a casing 
composed of side plates E, E, a base E' con 
necting the lower ends of the side plates and 
transverse rods e connecting the upper por 
tions of said plates. 
d is the shaft of the drum which is prefer 
ably stationary and provided with square 
ends which are seated in correspondingly 
shaped openings formed in the side plates 
of the casing, the remaining portion of the 
shaft being cylindrical and the drum turning 
thereon. 
F represents coiled springs surrounding the 
drum shaft and secured at their inner ends to 
the shaft and at their opposite ends to the 
drum. The drumshaft is preferably divided , 
diametrically from end to end and the inner 
ends of the springs Fare confined between the 
opposing faces of the shaft-sections as shown 
in Fig. 3, the sections being held together by 
the engagement of their ends in the openings 
of the side plates E. This forms a simple and 
ready attachment for the springs which in 
volves no screws or other separate fastenings. 
gisa detent pawl carried by the rotary drum 
and adapted to interlock with the casing, for 
preventing backward movement of the drum 
under the impulse of its springs. This pawl 
consists of a transverse bar which is arranged 
in a radial pocket or recess g formed in the 
drum, within the peripheral face thereof, and 
which is capable of sliding radially in said 
pocket. The ends of the pawl bar extend be 
yond the sides of the drum and project into 
circular grooves or depressions h, formed in 
75 
? ? ? 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
3 
530,276 
II. ? 
25 
3 ? 
35 
4. ? 
45 
55 
the inner sides of the casing, as shown in Fig. 
5. The inner wall of each of these grooves is 
constructed in the form of a cam and is formed 
with an abrupt face or shoulder h, against 
which shoulders the projecting ends of the 
pawl engage in arresting the rotation of the 
drum, as shown in Fig. 6. 
is a flat spring secured centrally to the 
back of the pawl and bearing with its ends 
against the adjacent inner side of the drum, 
as shown in Fig. 5. This spring tends to press 
the pawl inward into the path of the stop 
shoulders on the casing. 
f is a link connecting the detent pawl with 
the lower end of the trolley rope and passing 
through an opening formed in the face of the 
drum. The pawl is provided with an eye g, 
and the linki is pivoted at its lower end to 
this eye by a pivot-pin arranged parallel with 
the drum shaft, so as to permit the link to 
Swing against the face of the drum, as shown 
in Fig. 4. 
The trolley rope is so long that when it is 
wholly unwound from the drum, it has suffi 
cient slack to allow the trolley to reach all 
sections of the conducting wire. 
When the parts are in the normal position, 
shown in Figs. 3, 5, 6 and 7, the trolley rope is 
unwound from the drum, the spring of the 
latter is strained, and the detent pawl is held 
in engagement with the shoulders of the cas 
ing by its spring. In case the trolley leaves 
the conducting wire, its upward movement 
Causes the trolley rope to pull the detent pawl 
Out of engagement with the shoulders of the 
casing, and the drum being now released, its 
Springs turn it in the proper direction to wind 
the rope thereon, whereby the trolley is drawn 
down below the conducting wire and the sup 
ports of the latter. The rotation of the drum, 
which takes place the moment the pawl is 
retracted, causes the link to swing or fold 
against the face of the drum, as shown by full 
lines in Fig. 4, and by dotted lines in Fig. 7, 
and as the link is firmly held in this position 
by the winding of the rope upon the drum, 
the link acts as a stop which restrains the in 
Ward or return movement of the pawl, until 
the rope is wholly unwound from the drum. 
In subsequently unwinding the rope from the 
drum, for again straining the spring, it is 
therefore impossible to lock the drum by 
partly unwinding the rope. The conductor 
orother car attendantisthus compelled to un 
wind it wholly in order to allow the pawl to en 
gage with the shoulders of the casing, thereby 
always giving the trolley rope a definitelength 
and insuring a sufficient amount of slack in 
the same. 
In unwinding the rope the pawl rides freely 
over the cam shaped faces which lead to the 
stop shoulders of the casing. 
The trolley catcher may be attached to the 
car roof or the end of the platform by any 
suitable fastening, but it is preferably Sup 
ported upon the buffer block Kof the carand 
detachably secured thereto by the following 
mean S. 
L is a base plate secured upon the buffer 
block and provided on its upper side with 
longitudinal ways or guidesl, which are dove 
tailed or undercut, as shown. The base of 
the casing is provided with a correspondingly 
shaped tenon m, which engages with the Ways 
of the base plate L. These ways and the 
tenon of the base are preferably tapered, so 
that the tenon may be wedged between the 
ways to prevent rattling. n is a spring catch 
secured at its rear end to the upper side of 
the base plate Land provided at its free front 
end with a shoulder or nose in which over 
laps the front side of the base and thereby 
locks the same in place on the base plate. 
This spring catch is arranged in a recess 
formed in the under side of the base of the 
trolley catcher, as shown in the drawings. 
The catcher is readily removed from the base 
plate L by depressing the front end of the 
spring catch and withdrawing the catcher 
from the ways of the plate. A base plate L. 
is arranged at each end of the car, so that the 
catcher may be readily fastened to either end 
thereof. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a trolley catcher, the combination with 
a stationary frame or casing having a stop or 
shoulder and a rotary spring-drum journaled 
therein, of a detent pawl carried by the drum, 
adapted to be connected with the trolley rope 
and engaging with the stop or shoulder of the 
casing, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a trolleycatcher, the combination with 
a stationary frame or casing having a stop or 
shoulder and a rotary spring-drum journaled 
therein, of a detent pawl carried by said drum, 
capable of moving toward and from the axis 
of the drum for engaging and clearing the 
stop or shoulder of the casing, and adapted 
to be connected with the trolley rope, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a trolley catcher, the combination with 
a stationary frame or casing having a stop or 
shoulder and a rotary spring-drum journaled 
therein, of a detent pawl carried by said drum 
and engaging with the stop or shoulder of the 
casing, and a link pivoted to said pawl and 
adapted to be connected with the trolley rope, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination with the stationary cas 
ing having stops or shoulders in its sides, of 
a spring-drum journaled in said casing and 
having a radial pocket or recess, a transverse 
detent pawl arranged to slide radially in said 
pocket or recess and adapted to engage with 
said stops or shoulders, and a spring whereby 
the detent pawl is moved into engagement 
with said stops or shoulders, substantially as 
set forth. 
5. The combination with the stationary cas 
ing having openings in its sides, of a shaft ar 
ranged with its end portions in said openings 
and divided from end to end, a drum mounted 
? ? 
75 
9 O 
?. ? ? 
Io 5 
IIS 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
-- 
O 
65 
 
on said shaft, and a spring secured at one whereby the trolley catcher is locked in said Io 
end to the drum and having its other end con- guides, substantially as set forth. 
fined between the sections of said divided 
shaft, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination with a base plate se- 
cured to the platform or other stationary part . 
of the car and having undercut guides, of a . 
removable trolley catcher having a tenon en- 
gaging with said guides, and a spring catch 
Witness my hand this 12th day of April, 
... 
CARL F. GEYER, 
THIEo. L. PoPP. 
: 
y 
WILLIAM F. KENDT. 
: 
530,276 
1894. 
- 
. Witnesses: 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530376.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 530,376, 
Patented Dec. 4, 1894, 
 
*****TERS, do; Piero Lirao westeroic 
(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. A. WILSON, 
ATTACHMENT FOR, SELF BINDING HARWESTERS 
No. 530,376, 
Patented Dec. 4, 1894, 
???? 
??????? 
?? 
??? 
 
THE NORRIs PETERs cq. Photo-tho...washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. WILSON, OF NIOTAZE, KANSAS. 
ATTACHMENT FOR SELF-BINDING HARVESTERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 530,376, dated December 4, 1894. 
Application filed August 9, 1894, Serial No,519,905, No model.) 
O 
25 
To all ?????, it ??? ?????? ?: . 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM A. WILSON, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Niotaze, in the county of Chautau 
qua and State of Kansas, have invented cer 
tain new and usefullmprovements in Attach 
ments for Self-Binder Harvesters; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
{???con, which form a part of this specifica 
lO, 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
self-binder harvester with means for dropping 
the sheaf upon the sheaf-carrier, said means 
embodying a table or platform which is 
2O adapted to be lowered after the sheaf is 
formed and thus provide an increased space 
below the tying or binding mechanism which 
permits the sheaf to pass freely therefrom 
Without liability of choking or clogging. 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
grain receiving table or platform which is sup 
ported by the frame of the binder so as to 
have an oscillating movement, the table be 
ing connected to the tying mechanism so that 
the movement of said table will be governed 
thereby, the connection being such that the 
table operates in unison with the needle. 
My invention also consists in connecting 
the hinged boards at the lower end of the main 
platform to the grain receiving table or plat 
form so that said boards will rise and fall 
thereWith, and in combining the table or plat 
form. With the usual trip-arm so that both op 
erate in unison. 
My invention further consists in the con 
struction and combination of the parts, as 
will be hereinafter fully set forth and particu 
larly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings forming 
45 part of this specification, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation with one of the side boards of the 
deck removed, showing the application of my 
invention to a self-binder harvester; the grain 
receiving table being elevated and the needle 
So represented as having commenced its upward 
movement toward the table. Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation showing the table lowered the needle 
being represented as having commenced its 
downward movement away from the table to 
release the sheaf. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the 
grain receiving table, and Fig. 4 a detail view. 
A designates the platform with which self 
binder harvesters are provided, and in car 
rying out my invention this platform is cut 
away at its lower end adjoining the needle 
arm of the tying mechanism to provide a 
step or lower platform A' to the outer end of 
which the boards A are hinged in the usual 
manner. The oscillating table or platform 
moves above the lower platform or step A' as 
hereinafter described. 
B designates the shaft which operates the 
needle-arm of the tying mechanism, said shaft 
being provided with an arm b which is con 
nected by means of a rod b' to a wheel, disk, 
or plate, C, according to the type of binder. 
The wheel or disk C. carries a cam-wheel C. 
which is attached thereto or to its supporting 
shaft c and with which engages a rod d, en 
circled by a helical spring d within a frame 
d connected to the shaft d, the shaft d be 
ing attached to the crank-arm e of a rock 
shaft E and the said rock-shaft having an 
other arm, e', which is jointed and connected 
to one end of rods E the other end of said 
rods being connected to a projecting end of 
one of the looped bars f andf which sup 
port the movable grain receiving table or 
platform F. The movable grain receiving 
table or platform is connected to the loop 
portion of the bars f and f', and said bars are 
pivoted to the frame of the harvester below 
the platform A', the platform being provided 
with slots or openings through which the bars 
pass. The grain receiving table or platform 9o 
F is provided at its outer end with projec 
tions.f3 which are adapted to engage with the 
hinged boards Aso as to raise said boards 
when the platform or table is elevated and 
permit them to fall when the table F is low 
ered to discharge the sheaf. 
In operation when the grain receiving ta 
ble or platform F is elevated the grain or 
gavel is deposited thereon against the com 
pressing and tripping finger G which is of 
ordinary construction and is connected to the 
binding mechanism in the usual manner and 
after it is bound into a sheaf by the usual 
compressing and tying mechanism the rota 
35 
40 
75 
95 
OO 
- 
 
2 
530,876 
55 
75 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
tion of the wheel or disk C will draw upon 
the rod d which will rock the shaft E and 
cause the grain receiving table or platform 
to fall, through the interposition of the con 
necting-rods E, the compressing and tripping 
finger G moving in unison there with, as well 
as the hinged boards A*. This operation pre 
sents a space of increased size beneath the 
tying mechanism which will permit the sheaf 
to be positively discharged and obviate any 
liability of the machine clogging by reason of 
the sheaf not being discharged at the proper 
time. It will be noted that the very weight 
of the sheaf upon the table or platform as 
sists in lowering the latter so that as a matter 
of fact less power is required to successfully 
operate a binder with this attachment than 
one in which it is absent. After the table 
has been lowered and the sheaf discharged, 
as hereinbefore described, the table will be 
returned to its normal position by means of 
the same connections employed for lower 
ing it. 
Should it be desired at any time to discon 
nect the operating rod E' of the movable grain 
receiving table from its connection with the 
binding mechanism the lock-joint in the arm 
e' of the rock-shaft may be broken by means 
of a lever or other suitable device, and this 
lock-joint is for the purpose of providing 
means whereby the table can be permitted 
to fall independent of the binding mechan 
ism when it is desired to thread the needle 
and for other purposes. 
It will be noted that the movable table or 
platform F, compressing and tripping finger 
G and boards which are hinged to the lower 
end of the part A of the platform all work 
in unison with each other and in unison with 
the needle, knotter and twine cutting mech 
anism of the binder. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The herein described discharge mechan 
ism for the sheaves of self binder harvesters, 
comprising a movable grain receiving table 
carried by the platform of the harvester so 
that it will be when elevated on a line with 
theplatform, barsfandfpivotally connected 
to the grain receiving table and to the har 
vester platform, the barsfhaving bent ends 
which engage with the bars E' and the bars 
E being connected to a rock-shaft which is 
actuated by the binding mechanism, substan 
tially as shown. 
2. The herein described discharge mechan 
ism for harvesters, comprising a platform and 
binding mechanism, a grain receiving table 
F supported so as to have a downward move 
ment in the direction in which the sheaf is 
discharged, the movement of the table being 
parallel with the face of the platform, sub 
stantially as shown and for the purpose set 
forth. 
| 3. In a self binder harvester, the combina 
tion, of a movable grain receiving table or 
platform, its parallel supporting arms and 
operating mechanism, of a connection form 
ing a part of the operating mechanism, said 
connection having a lock joint substantially 
as shown whereby the grain receiving table 
or platform can be moved independent of the 
operating mechanism which connects with 
the grain binding mechanism, for the pur 
pose set forth. 
4. In combination with the platforms A and 
A, the platform A' having boards Ahinged 
to the lower end thereof, of a movable grain 
receiving table or platform which is adapted 
to be brought on a line with the upper plat 
form A, the movable grain receiving table 
having projections f for engagement with the 
inner ends of the hinged boards A so that 
they will be operated by the movement of the 
grain receiving table substantially as shown. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM A. WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
EUGENE. W. JoHNSON, 
HORACE S. BEALL. 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530476.txt	...! 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
... 
" ? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER E. DODGE, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
INJEC???. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 530,476, dated December 4, 1894. 
Application filed October 11, 1894, Serial No. 525,545. (Model.) 
55 
?? 
65 
7 ? 
75 
85 
95. 
CO 
5 
I. ? 
2 ? 
. 
. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER E. DoDGE, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Injectors, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to injectors such as 
are commonly employed on locomotives to 
feed the boiler, and is an improvement on the 
device of this kind shown and described in my 
?????????! patent, No. 478,741, granted July 12, 
1892. 
One object is to arrange for adjustinent of 
the Waste-Valve to compensate for wear with 
out the necessity of going inside the casing. 
Another object of the invention is to provide 
an improved form of connection between the 
steam and waste-valves and the operating 
lever. 
To the above ends the invention consists in 
a number of novel constructions and combi 
nations of parts which are recited in the ap 
pended claims. 
The accompanying drawings which form 
part of this specification, ilustrate an em 
bodiment of the invention. 
Figure 1 shows the complete device in lon 
gitudinal section. Fig. 2 shows a section on 
line 2-2 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 shows a section on 
line 3-3 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 shows a plan view 
of part of the connections between the oper 
ating lever and the waste-walve. 
The general arrangement and operation of 
the injector are the same as ordinarily em 
ployed, and hence a brief enumeration of the 
well-known features will suffice without a de 
tailed statement of their construction and 
functions. 
The letter, a, designates the casing having 
inlet-ports, a" and a", for steam and water re 
spectively; b, the coubining cone; c, the steam 
cone; d, the steam-valve; e, the water-valve; 
and, f, the Waste or surplus water-valve. 
In the form of injector shown in my prior 
patent above referred to, the waste-valve is 
located at a point beyond the combining cone. 
Now, it is highly desirable that the injector 
be interchangeable with other styles of in 
jectors and it so happens that in the fittings 
of a Nathan injector, the waste-water pipe 
comes at a place farther out than the point of 
location of the Waste-valve in this former con 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
struction of mine. To allow for this in the 
present case, Ilocate the waste-valve near the 
place of connection of the combining cone 
with the casing. This, it will be observed, 
brings the valve directly under the said cone, 
and therefore I provide the valve with a bi 
furcated or slotted stem, f', which straddles 
the cone, as clearly shown in Fig. 2. There is 
a loose connection between the stem and 
valve which permits the stem to turn to a lim 
ited extent without the valve, so as to avoid 
the latter turning on its seat. This connec 
tion is effected by means of a pin, f, entered 
through the shank of the valve and engaging 
slots in the stem. See Fig. 3. 
There is a rod like portion, f, to the valve 
stem which is pinned to the bifurcated por 
tion, f', and is formed with a screw-thread, f, 
engaging a correspondingly threaded gland, 
f, so that by turning the stem the valve can 
be seated and unseated. The upper end of 
the stem-member, f, is screw-threaded and 
receives an arm, g, with jam-nuts, g', above 
and below said arm, so that said arm can be 
moved to different positions around the stem 
and locked in any of them. The object of 
this construction is to compensate for wear 
of the valve, for changing the relation of the 
arm and the stem changes the relation of the 
valve and its seat. 
The operating-lever, h, is pivoted to a ra 
dius-bar, h, which is in turn pivoted to the 
casing, and said lever is pivotally connected 
with a slide, h, fitting on a guide-rod, h, pro 
jecting from the casing. 
Said slide is formed 
with a curved rack, h, on its upper side and 
the lever carries a pawl, h, for engagement 
with said rack, and is operated by a handle, 
h5. The stem, d', of the steam-valve is screw 
threaded and passed through ears on the slide, 
h, and is adjustably locked by nuts, d, be 
tween said ears. The stem, e', of the water 
valve is screw-threaded and passed through 
a sleeve, e, which is connected by a link, e, 
with the lever, h. The stem engages the 
sleeve loosely and a check-nut, e, on the stem 
beyond the sleeve provides for adjustment 
of the valve. 
Near the upper end of the lever there is 
pivotally attached a sleeve or collar, i, which 
loosely embraces a rod, i, carrying abutument 
nuts, i, on opposite sides of the collar. This 
35 
45 
50 
 
". 
530,476 
nation of a suitably constructed casing, a 
guide-rod projecting therefrom, a slide on 
said guide-rod having a rack, an operating 
lever centrally pivoted on a movable support 
attached to the casing, and pivotally con 
nected with the slide, a pawl on said lever for 
engagement with the rack, asteam-Valve hav 
ing a stem connected with the slide, and a 
water-valve having a stem connected with the 
lever on the side of its fulcrum opposite that 
where the slide is connected, the arrangement 
being such that the valve-stems are moved in 
opposite directions and the valves open and 
close simultaneously. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 8th day of Oc 
tober, A. D. 1894. 
WALTER, E. DOIDGE. 
Witnesses: 
E. BATCHIEILDER, 
A. D. HARRISON. 
25 
35 
O 
rod has a pivotal connection at, , with the 
arm, 9. 
Normally the water-valve, f, stands open, 
and the steam and water supply valves, dand 
It will be 
e, are closed, as shown in Fig. 1. 
seen that upon drawing back the lever, h, the 
valves, d and e, will be opened, and as the le 
wer reaches the limit of its movement, the 
valve, f, will be closed. 
What I claim as my invention is as follows: 
1. In a boiler-feeding injector, the combi 
nation with the operating lever and the waste 
valve whose stem is screw-threaded to en 
gage a correspondingly formed gland so that 
its turning seats and unseats the valve; of an 
arm rotatively adjustable on said stem and 
adapted to be locked thereon at different ad 
justments, and a rod connected with said arm 
and extending through a collar on the oper 
ating lever and having abutments on oppo 
site sides of said collar. 
2. In a boiler-feeding injector, the combi 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530578.txt	L. S. BUFFINGTON & W. C. JONES. 
ELECTRIC ELEWATOR CONTROLLER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 530,578. 
Patented Dec, ll, 1894. 
 
H 
(Oz (resses: 
3.23. 372 - 
- 
z-7-1 4 y 
Znven Zors; 
Zergy. S Buffry (or, 
M%lier Coyce Jones. 
t1--- //ys. 
L. S. BUFFINGTON & W. C. JONES. 
ELECTRIC ELEWATOR CONTROLLER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
"(No Model.) 
 
No. 530,578. 
- 
- 
- 
w 
t 
Co. tresses: 
- 6. 
2 a. 
c 4C 622. 
a 
- 
Anver tors; 
Aeroy SBuffington 
l//alier CZ de Jones. 
4 y 
f 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEROY S. BUFFINGTON, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA, AND WALTER 
CLYDE JONES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR-CONTROLLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 530,578, dated December 11, 1894. 
Application fled February 23, 1894, Serial No. 501,116. (No model.) 
IC 
. IS 
25 
35 
To all uphom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, LEROY S. BUFFING 
TON, residing at Minneapolis, county of Hen 
nepin, and State of Minnesota, and WALTER 
CLYDE JONES, residing at Chicago, county of 
Cook, and State of Illinois, citizens of the 
United States, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Electric Elevator 
Controllers, (Case No. 1) of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, concise, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to electric elevator 
controllers, and more particularly to means 
for automatically controlling the elevator car 
and the elevator doors. 
The object of our invention is, first, to pro 
vide means for automatically bringing the 
elevator car to rest opposite any floor; sec 
Ond, to provide means for automatically open 
ing and closing the elevator doors without 
positively connecting the same with the mov 
ing elevator car at any time; and, third, to 
provide an elevator system which will be 
more automatic in its operation than systems 
heretofore in use. . 
Our invention consists, first, in an elevator 
system comprising an electro-magnetic device 
for controlling the motive power, switches at 
the several floors, which may be designated 
floor Switches, which are adapted to be actu 
ated to control the circuit through the con 
trolling electro-magnetic device, electro-mag 
netic devices adapted to control the position 
of the floor switches, whereby the same may 
O' may not be engaged by the moving ele 
vator car, and switching apparatus carried 
upon the elevator car and adapted to control 
the electro-magnetic devices that control the 
floor switches. 
Our invention consists, second, in an ele 
vator door suspended from and adapted to 
slide upon a pivoted bar serving as a track, 
the bar normally resting with its free end at 
5, a less elevation than the pivoted end, an in 
cliuation being thereby imparted to the bar 
to maintain the door closed, means being pro 
vided for raising the free end of the pivoted 
bar by engagement with the moving elevator. 
car, the bar being thereby inclined in a re 
verse direction, whereby the door is caused 
55 
to slide open, means being also provided 
whereby the operator may release the pivoted 
bar permitting the same to return to its nor 
mal position to cause the door to close. 
Our invention consists, third, in an elevator 
system comprising an electro-magnetic device 
for controlling the motive power, switches at 
the several floors, adapted to be actuated by 
the movement of the several doors to control 6o 
the circuit through the power controlling elec 
tro-magnetic device, elevator doors adapted 
to operate in their movement the several floor 
switches, and switching apparatus carried 
upon the elevator car and under the control 65 
of the operator for placing the elevator doors 
in condition to be actuated by the moving 
elevator car. 
Our invention consists, fourth, in such 
other constructions as will be hereinafter de- 7o 
scribed. 
We believe that it has not heretofore been 
proposed to automatically bring the elevator 
car to rest at any predetermined floor through 
the agency of apparatus controlled by the op-75 
erator in the car. 
In the system of our invention, as herein 
after illustrated, the operator is provided 
with switching apparatus placed in the car, 
which may comprise a lever moving over a 8o 
series of contact points, by means of which 
he may close circuit through any one of a 
number of electro-magnets placed upon the 
wall of the elevator shaft at the respective 
floors. The closing of the circuit through one.85 
of the electro-magnets serves to place the cir 
cuit closing element of a floor switch in the 
path of a projection upon the elevator car. 
The movement of the elevator car serves to 
actuate the floor switch an instant before the go 
car reaches the level of the floor where it is 
desired to stop, and the actuation of the floor 
switch closes circuit through an electro-mag 
netic device, which, when excited, cuts of the 
motive power and brings the car to rest. In 95 
an electric elevator system the motive power. 
is derived from the motor, and the excitation 
of the electro-magnetic device may serve first 
to open the armature circuit, and then tothrow 
On a brake. 
only necessary to open the circuit through 
the magnet controlling the floor switch, by 
in starting the car again it is Ioo 
SO 
2 
580,578 
means of the switching apparatus on the car 
when the floor switch will, through the resil 
iency of a spring, or otherwise, open the cir 
cuit through the electro-magnetic device con 
trolling the motive power. The armature 
switch may be adapted to be closed through 
the resiliency of a spring, or otherwise, and 
the brake may be thrown of through the 
agency of compressed air in a well known 
mainer. 
To secure automatic operation of the ele 
vator doors each is suspended from and 
adapted to slide upon a bar, serving as a track, 
said bar being pivoted at one end and nor 
mally resting with its free end at a less ele 
vation than its pivoted end, an inclination 
being thereby imparted to the bar which 
serves to maintain the door in a closed posi 
tion. Upon the end of said bar, as well as 
upon a bar adapted to be engaged by the car 
in its downward travel, is provided a tongue 
adapted to he moved into or out of the path 
of a projection on the elevator car, through 
the agency of an electro-magnet carried upon 
the end of said bar. The circuit of the elec 
tro-magnet extends to the elevator car, 
whereby the operator may close or open pir 
cuit through the same to cause the tongue to 
move into or out of the path of the projection, 
as desired. When the tongue is moved into 
the path of the projection on the car, the move 
ment of the car raises the free end of the piv 
oted bar, thus imparting to it an inclination 
in a reverse direction, thereby causing the 
door to open by sliding down theinclined track 
thus produced. The door being thus opened, 
the tongue may be withdrawn from engage 
ment with the projection on the car, thus per 
mitting the free end of the pivoted bar to de 
scend, imparting to the same an inclination 
in a direction to cause the door to close. 
We are enabled to produce an entirely au 
tomatic elevator system by so placing the 
floor switches that they will be operated by 
the opening of the elevator door, circuit be 
ing preferably maintained open through the 
electro-magnetic device that controls the mo 
tive power, So long as the door remains closed, 
and closed so long as the door remains opened. 
By this construction the operator is able at 
will to place any door in position to be opened 
by the car, and the door at the instant of 
Starting operates the means provided for 
bringing the car to rest. When it is desired 
to start the car the operator can withdraw the 
tongue, thereby permitting the door to close. 
The door at the instant of closing operates 
the means provided for starting the car. The 
only attention requisite on the part of the op 
erator is to properly manipulate the switch 
ing apparatus upon the car. 
Our invention will be more readily under 
stood by reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a diagrammatic representation 
of an elevator System equipped after our in 
wention, the elevator car being ghown in dot 
. 
- 
ted lines. Fig. 2 is a view showing the floor 
switch in a position to close circuit through 
the electro-magnetic device controlling the 
motive power. Fig. 3 is a similar view show 
ing the position assumed by the switch when 
the electro-magnet is de-energized, the circuit 
being thereby opened. Fig. 4 is a diagram 
matic view of a system equipped after our 
invention, the door being adapted to be auto 
matically opened and closed, and the car be 
ing adapted to be brought to rest, opposite 
any desired floor automatically; the elevator 
car being shown in dotted lines. Fig. 5 is a 
view showing the door in its opened position, 
the projection on the elevator car being shown 
Fig. 6 is a view of the oper 
in dotted lines. 
ator's switching apparatus. 
Like letters and numerals refer to like parts 
throughout the several figures. 
In Fig. 1 we have illustrated that part of 
our invention which relates to the automatic 
stopping of the elevator car opposite the de 
sired floor. At each floor is provided an elec 
tro-magnetic device and a switch. The elec 
tro-magnetic device may be in the form of an 
electro-magnet a acting upon an armature 
carried upon the end of a pivoted levera'. 
The other end of the lever a? is connected 
with the longitudinally movable rod a sup 
ported in a bearing and carrying upon its end 
the switch levera pivoted thereto and adapted 
to make contact with contact points a' or a, 
To the rod a' and the switch lever a is at 
tached a spring a which tends to maintain 
said rod and lever in a straight line and to re 
turn the lever to this position when displaced 
to either side. 
Upon the elevator car is provided a projec 
tion b which is adapted, to impinge against 
the lever a when in its outer position to cause 
the same to make contact with one or the 
other Qf the contact points. When the elec 
tro-magnet is excited the lever is brought in 
position to be engaged by the projection on 
the car, and when not excited the lever is not 
in position to be so engaged. 
Upon the elevator car is provided a contact 
arm c provided with a handle whereby the 
same may be easily manipulated by the op 
erator, said arm being adapted to be moved 
over a series of contact points 1, 2, 3, 4. The 
contact arm is electrically connected with one 
side of an electric circuit, while each of the 
contact points is connected with one termi 
nal of one of the electro-magnets placed at 
the several floors. Thus contact point 3 is 
connected with electro-magnet a at the third 
floor, and contact point 4 is connected with 
the electro-magnet at the fourth floor. We 
have not illustrated the switching apparatus 
at the first and second floors but Such appa 
ratus may be the same as that illustrated at 
the third and fourth floors. The other ter 
minal of each of the electro-magnets is con 
nected with a common wire dextending to 
the other side of the source of electricity. 
When the contact arm crests upon a contact 
I 
3O 
35 
4 O 
45 
So 
55 
65 
9o 
95 
I oc 
to 
II 5 
I 32 
530,578 
8 
(Cd 
O 
point, as, for instance, contact point 3, one of 
the electro-magnets will be excited and the 
switch will be placed in position to be engaged 
by the elevator car. Thus, as illustrated, the 
contact arm c is on contact point 3 and the 
switch at the third floor is in position to be 
engaged by the car. 
In the car is provided. 
also means for operating a reversing switch d. 
This may consist of an arm d' connected with 
one side of an electric circuit and adapted to 
make contact with terminal points did con 
nected respectively through solenoids did to 
the other side of the circuit. When the arm 
rests on one contact point one of the Solen 
oids is excited and acts upon its core to place 
the switch in one position, and when it rests 
upon the other the position of the switch is 
reversed. 
The reversing switch is included in circuit 
with the armature of the motor e, as is also 
a rheostat h comprising terminal points be 
tween which are included resistance coils, 
and an arm h adapted to be moved over the 
terminal points. To the arm is secured the 
core h' of a solenoid h in such manner that 
when the solenoid is excited the arm will be 
caused to traverse the terminal points. The 
solenoid his included in circuit with the 
floor switches, the latter being placed in mul 
tiple with one another. 
We have shown the motor as provided with 
a friction band brake, comprising a band e' 
encircling a pulleye' on the armature shaft. 
The band is connected with a weighted lever 
e' in a well known manner, the end of the 
lever being maintained in an elevated posi 
tion by compressed air acting on a pistone' 
provided in the cylinder e. 
A valve e is 
provided in the pipe leading to the compressed 
air supply adapted to maintain the cylinder 
e in communication with the compressed air 
supply until the magnet i is energized, when 
the valve is operated to open the cylinder to 
the external air and to cut of the compressed 
air supply. The compressed air being re 
moved from beneath the piston e' the latter 
descends, due to the weight on the end of the 
lever, thus causing the friction band to grip 
the pulley and bring the motor armature to 
rest. 
The operation of the system, as thus de 
scribed, is as follows: Suppose the car in the 
act of ascending and the operator desirous of 
stopping at the third floor. The contact arm c 
is moved to make contact with terminal point 
3, thereby closing circuit through electro 
magnet a, which, being-excited, attracts its 
armature to thrust the lever a into the path 
of the projection b on the elevator car. The 
projection b on the car in its ascent impinges 
against lever a, causing the same to make 
contact with contact point athereby closing 
circuit through solenoid l. Solenoid hibe. 
ing excited attracts its core l', thereby caus 
ing contact arm h to move over the terminal 
points to gradually cut resistance out of and 
finally open the armature circuit. At the in 
stant the armature circuit is opened the brush 
h', carried on the extended end of arm h, 
makes contact with terminal h", thereby clos 
ing circuit through magnet i which attracts 
its armature to cut of the supply of com 
pressed air and open the cylinder e to the 
external air, thereby permitting the setting 
of the brake which brings the motor arma. 75 
ture, and, consequently, the elevator car, to 
rest. When it is desired to start again the 
contact arm c is moved to some, other posi. 
tion, magnet a being thereby de-energized to 
permit the spring attached to levera' to draw 
back the levera out of the path of the projec 
tion b, the spring a then acting upon lever a 
to cause it to break contact with terminal a. 
Circuit being thus opened through solenoid 
h, the spring h causes arm h to move to 
break circuit through magneti, thereby re 
leasing the brake, and to close circuit through 
the motor armature and then to cut resist 
ance from the armature circuit, thus starting 
the elevator car. The car is automatically 
stoppel at the floor corresponding to the 
terminal with which the arm c makes contact, 
and during the travel the arm c may be moved 
slightly in advance of the car so that the car 
may be stopped at any floor that may be 
called without reversing the motion of the 
arm c. When it is desired to descend the 
arm d' is moved to operate the reversing 
switch and change the direction of the cur. 
rent through the armature. 
In Fig. 4 we have illustrated the above de 
scribed system of automatically stopping the 
elevator car in connection with means for 
automatically opening and closing the eleva 
tor doors. The door is pivotally suspended 
from a bark provided with rollers running 
upon the inclined bar las a track. The bar 
lis pivoted at l'. A lever pivoted at 28 is 
provided with a pin in its end adapted to 
work in a slot in said barl, so that when the 
end of lever is depressed the free end of 
bar l is raised. Upon the end of barl is pro 
vided a tongue in adapted to slide back and 
forth so that the end thereof may in one po 
sition extend beyond the end of the bar 2. 
To the tongue is connected a pivoted lever car 
rying upon one end the armature of a mag 
net ma', which, when excited, attracts said 
armature to cause said tongue to extend be 
yond the end of the bar. A similar tongue 
is provided upon the end of lever l? and is 
similarly operated by a magnet m. The ele 
Yator is provided with switching apparatus 
similar to that described in connection with 
Fig. 1, and the motor connections and the 
brake are similar. Instead of floor switches 
adapted to be acted upon directly by the 
moving car...a switch is provided adapted 
to be actuated by the door. Such a switch is 
provided at each floor and they are connected 
With the Solenoid h in the same. manner 
as heretofore described. When the door is 
opened the switch is adapted to close the 
circuit through the solenoid h9, and to main 
95 
- 
I 25 
I 5 
2 cy 
do 
fics 
O 
35 
5 
50 
55 
4. 
530,578 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
o 
75 
tain the circuit open so long as the door is 
closed. The switch unay be of any well known 
form, as for instance, a contact plate n' form 
ing one terminal of the circuit and a plate n 
forming the other terminal, the plate nbeing 
held out of contact with plate in while the 
door is closed, but being adapted to close 
against the same when the door is opened. 
Upon the elevator car are provided projec 
tions O o', one in the path of tongue m, and 
the other in the path of tongue m, projec 
tion o being so pivoted that it will permit 
the passage of lip'm on the downward travel 
of the car, but will engage there with on the 
upward travel. Likewise projection o' en 
gages with tongue m on the downward travel, 
but not on the upward travel. 
The operation of the system, as above de 
scribed, is as follows: The car being in its up 
ward travel and it being desired to stop at, 
say, the third floor, the operator moves arm c 
to terminal 3. Circuit is thus closed through 
the magnets m, m, causing the tongues m. 
and m to be thrust forward. As the car con 
tinues the projection O impinges against 
tongue m, thereby raising the end of bar l, 
imparting to the same an inclination such 
that the door is caused to open by sliding 
down the inclined track thus produced. As 
the door opens the switch in closes the circuit 
through the solenoid hi. The latter is ex 
cited to attract its core, causing the arm h 
to move over the terminal points and open 
the armature circuit and throw on the brake, 
in a manner heretofore described. When it 
is desired to again start the car, the contact 
arm c is moved from terminal 3, thereby open 
ing the circuit through magnet m' to de-ener 
gize the same and permit the tongue m to be 
withdrawn from engagement with the projec 
tion o, due to the reaction of a spring. The 
end of barl being thus unsupported the same 
descends and imparts to the bar an inclina 
tion such that the opened door is caused to 
close by sliding down the inclined track, 
When the door completes its travel the switch 
n is opened, thus de-energizing the solenoid 
hand starting the elevator car in a manner 
heretofore described. When it is desired to 
descend, the arm. d is moved to operate the 
reversing switch to change the direction of 
the current through the armature, and, con 
sequently, the direction of travel of the ele 
WatOr car. 
The arm d" may be preferably mounted 
upon the arm c, as illustrated in Fig. 6, in 
which the arm d is connected with the han 
dle d' which is adapted to be given a slight 
rotary motion whereby said arm d may make 
contact alternately with contact points did 
carried upon the arm c. 
When the handle is 
at one or the other end of its stroke circuit 
will be closed through one of the solenoids of 
the reversing switch. The operator becom 
ing accustomed to the positions of the han 
dles in ascending and descending, will be en 
abled to control the car with the use of but 
One hand. 
It is evident that many of the operations 
of the system as herein described may be ac 
complished by other means and in a different 
manner without departing from our inven 
tion. We desire, therefore, to claim broadly 
the features specified in the several clauses 
of claim. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an elevator system, the combination 
With an electro-magnetic device adapted to 
control the motive power, of a switch adapted 
to control the operation of said electro-mag 
netic device, an electro - magnetic device 
adapted to place an element in position to be 
engaged by the moving elevator car and there 
by to cause the actuation of said switch, and 
Switching apparatus provided upon the ele 
Vator car in electrical connection with said 
Second mentioned electro - magnetic device 
and adapted to control the same, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In an elevator system, the combination 
with an electro-magnetic device adapted to 
control the motive power, of a switch adapted 
to control the operation of said electro-mag 
netic device, an electro-magnetic device, an 
element adapted to be placed thereby in po 
sition to be engaged by the moving elevator 
car and thereby to cause the opening of the 
elevator door, said door being adapted in its 
movement to actuate said switch, and switch 
ing apparatus provided upon the elevator car 
and adapted to control said second mentioned 
electro-magnetic device, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In an elevator system, the combination 
with an electro-magnetic device adapted to 
control the motive power, of a switch adapted 
to control the operation of said electro-mag 
netic device, a pivoted bar, an elevator door 
suspended therefrom, an electro-magnetic de 
vice, an element adapted to be placed thereby 
in position to be engaged by the moving ele 
vator car, and thereby to raise the end of said 
pivoted bar to cause said door to open, said 
door being adapted in its movement to actu 
ate said switch, and switching apparatus upon 
the elevator car and adapted to control said 
second mentioned electro - magnetic device; 
whereby the door is automatically opened and 
closed and the car is automatically brought 
to rest opposite a predetermined floor, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In an elevator system, the combination 
With a pivoted bar, of an elevator door sus 
pended therefrom, and means for raising and 
lowering the free end of said pivoted bar to 
effect the opening and closing of the elevator 
door, substantially as described. 
- 
5. In an elevator system, the combination 
with a pivoted bar, of an elevator door sus 
pended therefrom, an electro-magnetic device 
95 
do 
I as 
E Io 
II5 
2 
I 25 
y 
530,578 
7 o 
75 
9 O 
95 
 
IO 
25 
adapted to place an element in position to be 
engaged by the moving elevator car, and 
thereby to raise the end of said pivoted bar 
to cause said door to open, and switching ap 
paratus provided in the elevator car adapted 
to control'said electro-magnetic device, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. In an elevator system, the combination 
with switches provided at the several. floors, 
of motor mechanism controlled by said 
switches, said switches being adapted to be 
actuated through the agency of the moving 
elevator car, and electro-magnetic devices 
controlled from the car for predetermining 
the switch to be actuated; whereby the car 
may be brought to rest opposite any floor, 
substantially as described. 
7. In an elevator system, the combination 
with a contact arm adapted to be moved over 
a series of contact points, of circuit gonnec 
tions through said arm and contact points for 
controlling the movement of the elevator car, 
a lever pivoted upon said arm, a pair of con 
tact points carried upon the said arm and 
adapted to be alternately engaged by said le 
ver, and circuit connections through the lever 
and the pair of contact points adapted to con 
trol the direction of movement of the car, 
- 
substantially as described. 
8. The combination with a laterally sliding 
elevator door, of door opening mechanism 
for opening and closing the same through th 
agency of the weight of the door. 
9. The combination with a laterally sliding 
elevator door, of means for opening the same 
through the agency of the weight of the door. 
10. The combination with a laterally slid 
ing elevator door, of means for raising the 
center of gravity of the same by the move 
ment of the elevator car, and means for open 
ing the door by the descent of the center of 
gravity of the door. 
11. The combination with a laterally slid 
ing elevator door, of means for raising the 
center of gravity of the same by the move 
ment of the elevator car, mechanism for open 
ing the door by the descent of the center of 
gravity, and means for closing the door by 
the descent of the center of gravity. 
12. The combination with an elevator door, 
of means for opening the same through the 
agency of the moving elevator car, and a de 
vice for automatically stopping the car by 
- the opening of the door, substantially as de 
55 scribed. 
13. The combination with an elevator door, 
of means for opening the same through the - 
agency of the moving elevator car, and a de 
vice for automatically starting the car from 
rest by the closing of the door. 
14. The combination with an elevator door, 
of means for opening the same through the 
agency of the moving elevator car, a device 
for autoimatically stopping the car by the 
opening of the door, and means for automati 
cally starting the car from rest by the closing 
of the door, substantially as described. 
35 
45 
so 
15. The combination with an elevator door, 
of a moving elevator car, mechanism inde 
pendent of the motion of the car for auto 
matically opening said door, a device actu 
ated by the moving elevator car adapted to 
place said mechanism in condition to open 
the door, and means for automatically stop 
ping the car by the opening of the door. 
16. The combination with an elevator door, 
of the elevator car, an electric switch thereon, 
an electro-magnetic device controlled thereby 
and means for opening the door through the 
agency of the moving car, said means being 
placed in operative condition by said electro 
magnetic, device. 
17. The combination with an elevator door, 
of the elevator car, an electric switch thereon, 
an electro-magnetic device controlled thereby 
and means for opening the door through the 
agency of the moving car, said means being 
piaced in operative condition by said electro 
magnetic device, and means for automatically 
stopping the car by the opening of the door. 
18. The combination with an elevator door, 
of the elevator car, an electric switch thereon, 
an electro-magnetic device controlled there 
by, means for opening the door through the 
agency of the moving car, said means being 
placed in operative condition by said electro 
magnetic device, and means for automatically 
starting the car from rest by the closing of the 
door. 
19. The combination with an elevator door, 
of the elevator car, an electric switch thereon, 
an electro-magnetic device controlled there 
by, means for opening the door through the 
agency of the moving car, said means being 
placed in diperative condition by said electro 
magnetic device, means for automatically 
stopping the car by the opening of the door, 
and means for automatically starting the car 
from rest by the closing of the door. 
20. The combination with an elevator car, 
of an elevator door, mechanism independent 
of the motion of the elevator car for opening 
the door, said means being controlled in its 
time of operation by the movement of the car, 
a device actuated by the opening of the door 
for bringing the car to rest, and mechanism 
for starting the car from rest by the closing 
of the door, substantially as described. 
21. The combination with an elevator car, 
of an elevator door, mechanism independent 
of the motion of the car for opening the same, 
an electro-magnetic device, a switch upon the 
car for operating the same, a movable element 
ed to be moved into the path of the car 
adapt 
by said electro-magnetic device, said car be 
ing adapted to engage the same to throw said 
door opening mechanism into operation, sub 
stantially as described. 
22. The combination with an elevator car, 
of an elevator door, mechanism independent 
of the motion of the car for opening the same, 
an electro-magnetic device, a switch upon the 
car for operating the same, a movable element 
adapted to be moved into the path-of the car 
- 
do 
Ios 
8 
I 1.5 
130 
6 
530,578 
by said electro-magnetic device, said car be. 
ing adapted to engage the same to throw said 
door opening mechanism into operation, and 
a switch controlled by said door for throwing 
on and off the motive power, 
23. The combination with an elevator car, 
of an elevator door adapted to be opened 
through the agency of the moving car, an elec 
tric switch controlled by said door, an electro 
magnetic device controlled by said switch, and 
motive mechanism adapted to move said car, 
controlled by said electro-magnetic device. 
24. The combination with an elevator car 
of a series of contact terminals located thereon 
and connected respectively through electro 
(d 
ls 
magnetic devices located at the several floors, 
a contact arm adapted to make contact with 
any one of said terminals to close circuit 
through the respective electro-magnetic de 
vices, and mechanism controlled by said elec. 2d 
tro-magnetic devices for bringing the elevator 
car to rest opposite the respective floors. 
. In witness whereof we hereunto subscribe 
our names this 27th day of October, A. D. 
1893. 
LEROY S. BUFFINGTON. 
WALTER CLYDE JONES. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE L. CRAGG, 
GEO. S. BUELL. . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530678.txt	(No Model.) 
PROCESS OF MANUFACTURING SAMPLES OF HOSE, &c. 
W. F. BOWERS. 
No. 530,678. 
Patented Dec. ll, 1894. 
 
(n-, C7-6- 
-suite, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. F. BOWERS, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
PROCESS OF MANUFACTURING SAMPLES OF HOSE, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 530,678, dated December 11, 1894. 
Application filed May 3, 1894, Serial No. 509,866, (No specimens.) 
55 
o 
75 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. F. Bow ERs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at San 
Francisco, in the county of San Francisco and 
State of California, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Methods or Pro 
cesses of Manufacturing Sample Pieces of 
Hose, Belting, or Packing; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of said invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
most nearly appertains to make, use, and prac 
tice the same. 
This invention relates to a new and useful 
method or process of manufacturing sample 
piece of hose, belting, packing, or other arti 
cles composed of rubber and woven or other 
fabric, the object being to produce a sample 
piece having a portion of its surface free of 
the rubber or left in an unfinished condition, 
whereby the quality of the duck, canvas, or 
Woven material used in the manufacture of 
the hose, belting, or packing may be readily 
ascertained from an inspection of the sample 
piece. 
The advantages derived by the use of a 
Sample piece having a free or unfinished por 
tion I have fully set forth in another appli 
cation for Letters Patent executed by me of 
even date here with and filed concurrent with 
this application, consequently the same need 
not be set forth herein, reference being made 
to my other application. 
In order to more fully understand my in 
vention reference must be had to the accom 
panying sheet of drawing, which shows a per 
spective view of a rubber calendering ma. 
chine showing the sheet of canvas or duck 
passing between the rolls thereof and the rub 
ber coating or surface being pressed thereon, 
likewise showing a portion of the finished 
sheet with rubber removed. 
In the drawing the letters A and A' are 
used to indicate the heating and pressing 
rolls of an ordinary calender machine em. 
ployed in the manufacture of belting, pack 
ing and sheets, from which hose is made, com 
posed of rubber and canvas or other fabric. 
Between these rolls is passed or run the sheet 
of canvas or duck B, which sheet of canvas 
or duck as passed between the rolls has a 
coating of rubber rolled or pressed thereon 
in the usual manner, which gives a coating 
of rubber to the sheet of canvas after having 
been carried between the rolls of the calen 
der machine. This coating of rubber being 
in a soft condition after having passed 
through the heating rolls may easily be re 
moved before the same is vulcanized. 
Upon the surface of the sheet of canvas, 
before entering between the rolls of the cal 
ender machine, I place a series of strips or 
pieces of thin sheeting B", which strips or 
pieces of sheeting take up the rubber as run 
between the rolls, consequently after the sheet 
of canvas has been run between the rolls by 
simply removing the strips of sheeting or pro 
tecting strips the rubber covering that por 
tion of the canvas sheet protected by the strips 
of sheeting will be removed, hence leaving 
the canvas at these points free of rubber. Of 
course it will be understood that the free por 
tion of the canvas may be of any size, this de 
pending upon the width of the protecting 
strips made use of. These strips may be used 
over a number of times for the reason that 
they can only take up so much of the rubber. 
After the strips of sheeting have been re 
moved in order to leave the canvas exposed, 
as above described, the sheet of canvas with 
its rubbercoating is placed within the vulcan 
izing press or heaters and the coating of the 
rubber is vulcanized in the ordinary manner. 
The manner of making the sheet for man 
ufacture of hose, belting or packing does not 
differ from that now made use of, excepting 
that I form a sheet having a portion of its 
canvas exposed or left unfinished. 
The strips of sheeting in no manner ad 
here to the canvas, consequently the only re 
sistance offered to the removal of the pro 
tecting strips takes place on the edges of the 
strips themselves due to the strength of the 
rubber, but this coating or surface of the rub 
ber being in a soft, pliable, condition, it is 
obvious that the resistance offered to the re 
moval of the strips is exceedingly slight. Af 
ter the sheet of canvas has passed through 
the calender rolls and the protecting strips 
have been removed the sheet may be cut into 
a number of sample pieces for distribution 
among the dealers in this class of goods, which 
sample pieces show a finished and unfinished 
portion of the article. 
O 
IS 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
95 
IOC) 
2 
530,678 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure protection 
in by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The method of producing a sample piece 
5 for displaying the material used in the man 
ufacture of hose, belting, packing, or similar 
articles containing rubber and woven or other 
fabric, which consists in coating the canvas 
sheet, or other fabric, with a layer of rubber 
and thence removing a portion of the rubber 
surface, whereby a free or uncoated portion 
of the canvas is exposed to view. 
2. The method of producing a sample sheet 
or piece for displaying the quality of the ma 
15 terial used in the manufacture of hose, belt 
ing, packing, or similar articles containing 
rubber and canvas or other woven fabric, 
O 
which consists in placing upon the sheet of 
canvas or woven fabric a protecting strip 
which covers a portion of the canvas or woven 2 c 
material, coating the surface of the canvas or 
woven fabric and protecting strip with rub 
ber, and thence removing the protecting strip 
and sueh portion of the rubber coating as ad 
heres thereto, thereby leaving the portion of 
the canvas or woven fabric covered by the 
protecting strip free or exposed, whereby the 
material may be inspected. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM. F. BOWERS. 
Witnesses: 
N. A. ACKER, 
M. G. LOEFLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530778.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 530,778, 
L. C. INGERSOLL. 
TIMBER RAILROAD. TIE, 
Patented Deo, ll, 1894, 
zz-r 
 
WITNESSES 22. 
, , 
ATTORNEYS, 
the Norris Peters co, PHora- THowashingto... c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
LUMAN C. INGERSOLL OF KEOKUK, IOWA. 
M 
MBER RAILROAD a TE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of illetters Patent No. 580,778, dated December 11, 1894. 
3, 
Application filed May 31, 1894, Serial No. 513,036. (No model.) 
O 
' 
To all whom it may concern; 
Beit known that I,LUMAN C.INGERSOLL, of 
Keokuk, in the county of Lee and State of 
Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Timber Railroad-Ties, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact. 
description. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view illustrating 
the application of my invention, and Fig. 2 is 
a plan of the improved tie. 
Like letters denote like parts in both the 
views. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
timber railroad tie that will be readily manu 
factured, and produced at less cost than me 
tallic ties, while affording a high degree of 
safety against lateral displacement of the 
track. 
To this end my invention consists in a par 
ticular formation of the tie which will be fully 
disclosed hereinafter, and specifically pointed 
out in the appended claim. 
The tie A illustrated by the drawings is 
provided with plane parallel top and bottom 
surfaces, the end surfaces a being arranged 
essentially perpendicular to the bottom or at 
any suitable angle thereto. The whole tie 
consists of a single piece of wood. 
My invention has especial reference to the 
formation of the side and top surfaces of the 
tie. The side surfaces are formed with por 
tions b extending perpendicularly to the bot 
tom, or approximately so, and inclined por 
tions spreading downward, as indicated at c. 
The portions b being arranged at a greater 
angle to the top or bottom than the portions 
c, shoulders d are formed between the said . 
portions. In consequence of the provision of 
the above inclined portions the top surface of 
the tie consists of a central spine e running 
lengthwise of the tie, and enlargements or 
shouldersfprojecting on each side of the said 
spine. The portions b of the side surfaces, 
and consequently, the enlarged portions f of 
the top surface, are placed at such a distance 
apart as will correspond to the width of the 
track, the rails R being adapted to rest on 
the said enlarged portions, as will be seen in 
Fig. 1. 
70 
In practice the improved ties may be made 
from ordinary timberties, by cutting out their 
lateral surfaces to form the inclined portions 
c, while the other surfaces are left intact, ex-55 
cept as far as the cutting of the lateral sur 
faces involves an alteration of the top surface. 
It will be seen that the enlarged portions f , 
form ample bases for the support and fasten 
ings of the rails, as the said portions extend 6 
the full width of the timber; also the full 
width of the bottom surface is preserved, so 
that the load that may rest upon the tie is 
distributed over a comparatively large sur 
face of the ballast B. Furthermore, the shoul 
ders d, being in intimate contact with the bal 
last packed between the ties, will effectively 
prevent endwise movement of the ties, i.e., 
transverse displacement of the track, while 
by the provision of the inclined surfaces cand 
the essentially vertical portions b between 
them, the ties are enabled to better resist the 
tendency of the rails to longitudinal move 
ment, so that both longitudinal and trans 
verse displacements of the track are pre 
vented. 
It will be understood that no skilled labor 
is required for the production of my improved 
ties, and that they therefore can be manu 
factured economically. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
A timber railroad tie, consisting of a single 
piece whose top surface is composed of a lon 
gitudinal spine and enlargements projecting 
on each side thereof at such a distance as 
Will correspond to the width of the track, 
while the side surfaces of the tie comprise 
downwardly spreading inclined portions ar 
ranged both interiorly and exteriorly of the 
said enlargements of the top surface, and por 
tions of greater inclination relatively to the 
top surface of the tie than the said inclined 
portions and located between the inclined 
portions, whereby shoulders are formed on 
the side surfaces of the tie, substantially as 
shown and described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
LUMAN, CINGERSOLL. 
75 
95 
9o 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK C. FIELD, 
J. C. PARROTT. 
25 
35 
4 O 
45 
SO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530878.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 530,878, 
W. S. BRADEN 
TWINE HOLDER. 
Patented Deo, ll, 1894. 
 
VVitnesses: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER. S. BRADEN, OF WATSEKA, ILLINOIS. 
TWINE-HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 530,878, dated December 11, 1894. 
Application filed July 9, 1894, Serial No. 516,967, (No model.) 
55 
75 
75 
w 
cation. 
to all whom it may concern: 
surrounding the spindle is a coiled spring, i. 
On the inside of the side, c, directly opposite 
Be it known that I, WALTER. S. BRADEN, a 
the spindle, L is placed a spindle. k. The 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
spindles L and k are to support a spool B. A 
siding at Watseka, in the county of Iroquois 
short distance below the spindle k, a flat 
and State of Illinois, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Twine 
spring brake, l, is fastened to the side, c, and 
Holders, of which the following is a specifi 
extends upwardly and inwardly and bears 
against a face of a flange of the spool. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
The spool or bobbin B is of the ordinary 
kind placed within the frame, A, supported 
Wrapping twine reels. 
The object of my invention is to adapt a 
and adapted to revolve on the spindles, L and 
simple, spool cylinder for use in stores or 
k. The spool B as shown in the drawings is 
other places where wrapping twine is con 
filled with twine with one end of the twine 
extending up through a small hole in the top, 
stantly used, and to this end it consists, gen 
erally stated, of an open, jointed frame and 
a, of the frame. 
Spool Supporting spindle, a spool tension de 
The operation of my invention may be de 
Vice and a brake, in combination with a spool, 
scribed as follows: To insert the spool the 
frame is opened, which is accomplished by re 
all as more fully hereinafter described and 
particularly claimed. 
leasing the catch f and raising the topia, 
which throws back the top and side on the 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
hinge joint, c'. The bobbin may noW be 
easily put in place on its spindles L and k. 
Figure 1 is a front view of the spool frame 
When the spoolisin place the tension Washer, 
and its attachments, except the spool, the 
frame being thrown open; Fig. 2, a similar 
i, will bear against the end of one spool 
flange and the spring brake, l, against the 
view showing frame closed, with spool cylin 
The pressure of 
face of the opposite flange. 
der and twine thereon, in place, and Fig. 3, 
the springion the washeri, and consequently 
an end view. 
Referring to the drawings, A is a jointed 
the tension of the spool, against which the 
washer presses, is regulated by the thumb 
frame consisting of the top, a, baseb, and the 
two sides, c, and, d. The top, a, is discon 
screw, J, to which the washer, i, is attached. 
The tension may thus be adjusted to the de 
nected from one side, d, and the side, c con 
nected to the based by a hinge joint c'. The 
sired strength. The brake spring controls to 
frame A may be made of any suitable material 
a certain degree the tension and holds the 
spool from turning back when the twine is 
and the shape may be varied without depart 
not pulled. The spool and twine being in po 
ing from my invention. The base, b is pro 
sition in the frame, one end of the twine is 
vided with holes to enable the frame to be 
passed up through the small hole in the top, 
screwed or otherwise secured to the counter, 
shelves or other convenient place. The top, a, 
a, and the device is ready for use. 
is provided at its open end with a short down 
By the use of my invention the twine does 
Wardly Xetending arm, e, which has secured 
not become tangled while being removed from 
the bobbin, the bobbin is easily put in place 
to it a catch, f. The frame is so constructed 
that the short arm, e, will overlap the side, d, 
and removed, the action of the springs allows 
of only a steady feed while the frame is simple, 
when the frame is closed and the catch, fis 
adapted to enter a slot, g, formed in the side, 
cheap and durable, and by its construction 
gives easy accoess to its interior for putting 
d, near its top and in this manner to lock the 
on or removing the spool, and forlocking the 
frame. Fixed to the inside of the vertical side, 
d and about midway of its length, is a spin 
frame when in use. 
Having thus described my invention, what. 
dle, L, which spindle is provided with a mov 
able washer, i. The washer, i, is secured to 
claim is 
the end of a thumb screw, J, which passes 
1. The herein described twine holder, con 
sisting of the open jointed frame, A, having 
through the side of the frame. Interposed 
between the side, d, and the washer, i, and I interior spindles L and k, a brake spring, l, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
go 
95 
Oc 
2 
and a coiled spring, i, both adapted to bear with a short arm, e, having a catch thereon, 
against the bobbin B substantially as de- said arm, e, adapted to overlap the side, d, .5 
said catch, f, adapted to enter a slot in side, 
scribed. 
2. A twine holder, consisting of the framed, whereby the frame is locked in combina 
5 A, bobbin B, bobbin spindles, L and k, brake tion with spindles L and k, the springs, l and 
530,878 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 20 
spring, l, and tension spring, i, adapted to j, and a spool, substantially as described. 
bear against said bobbin, a washer between 
said tension spring and the spool and a thumb presence of two witnesses. 
screw for carrying said washer, and thereby 
lo regulating the tension, substantially as de- 
scribed. 
3. A twine holder consisting of a frame, A 
having sides, a, b, c and d, the side a provided 
S. F. SWINFORD, 
FRED WILL TOVEY. 
WALTER. S. BRADEN. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US530978.txt	T. M. WALLACE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
COMBINED BELT SHIFTER AND BRAKE FOR COTTON PRESSEs, 
(No Model.). 
No. 530,978, 
Patented Deo, 18, 1894, 
 
A 
s s 
- 
A 
- 
? 
- - 
s 
2 s 
Ele 
 
V 
SEs re 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
. 
SS 
e 
207 
: Zzz 7 
INVEWTOR 
Z727zees Z 722eoe, 
AT TORNEYS, 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
(NO Model.) 
T. M. WALLACE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
S 
NN 
 
r 
s 
See 
N THIA 
& a 62 
Sist6 
 
I Eas 
 
 
f it. 
 
 
 
- S. 
N 
r 
2. 
teNSE 
firlin 
Sa 
 
"I 
Fil 
IIs S 
3. Ill 
eer 
Ses 
WIE s 
--9-l- 
! itra Ya - 
SAI Him 
o ose 
o 
o 
- - - 
- 
s 
II 
eea 
Is 
As E 
N 
E 
SI 
s 
- 
O 
N 
3. 
III 
A7 TORNEYS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS M. WALL ACE, OF MARION, A LAB AMA. 
COMBINED BELT SHIFTER AND BRAKE FOR COTTON-PRESSES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 530,978, dated December 18, 1894. 
Application filed June 21, 1894, Serial No. 515,256. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS M. WALLACE, 
of Marion, in the county of Perry and State 
of Alabama, have invented a new and useful 
Improvementina Combined Belt-Shifter and 
Brake for Cotton-Presses, of which the foll 
lowing is a specifieation. 
My invention is applicable to various forms 
of presses in which a reciprocating follower 
is employed, but is especially adapted for use 
in connection with so-called self-tramper' 
presses, in which the follower is actuated by 
toggle levers and a rotating screw-shaft. 
The principal feature of my invention is the 
means for automatically shifting the two belts 
used on such presses, from tight to loose pull 
leys, and the reverse, for the purpose of run 
ning the follow-block or follower up or down. 
In self-tramping cotton presses, it is desirable 
to have the follower reciprocate rapidly, and 
especially to make its return movement very 
quickly, in order to economize time in com 
pressing the several charges of cotton re 
quired to form the standard five-hundred 
pound bale. It is, therefore, expedient to 
employ a brake in addition to the belt-shift 
ing mechanism, in order that the speed of 
the follower may be maintained up to the 
limits of its movement in either direction, 
without danger of strain or other injury to 
the press, which would be likely to result if 
the shifting of belts were alone relied on to 
arrest the movement of the follower. I have 
therefore combined a friction-brake mechan 
ism with the belt-shifter, but in such manner 
that it coacts with and virtually forms a part 
of the latter, as hereinafter described. 
In accompanying drawings-two sheets 
Figure 1 is a side view of a toggle-lever press 
to which my invention is applied, the parts 
of the latter being represented in the position 
they occupy when the follower is about be 
ginning its ascent. Fig. 2 is a side view of 
the same, the parts being shown in the posi 
tion they occupy when the follower is de 
scending. Fig. 3 is an end elevation of the 
press, some parts being broken away or in 
section. Fig. 4 is a section on line 4-4 of 
Fig. 3. Figs. 5 and 6 (Sheet 1) are face views 
of two slides employed to operate the belt 
shifters proper. Fig. 6 shows a modification 
of the main slide. Fig. 7 is a transverse ver 
- 
tical section of the guide frame of the belt 
shifting mechanism. 
In the drawings and following description, 
for sake of perspicuity, I will indicate the 
movable parts by numerals and the fixed ones 
by letters. 
The stationary frame, A, of the press, has 
for the most part the usual construction and 
at the bottom is arranged the ordinary screw 
shaft 1 that actuates the toggle-levers 2-2, 
(Fig. 1) which are jointed to and operate the 
follower 3. The said screw-shaft 1 is counter 
to a driving shaft 4 geared therewith. On 
the driving shaft are keyed two sets of pull 
leys, to-wit, the two sets of fast and loose 
pulleys. The larger and smallerfast pulleys 
are arranged together, the larger and smaller 
loose ones being arranged exteriorly of the 
same. An open belt 7, (Fig. 3) runs on the 
larger pulleys 5, 5, and is used to drive the 
follower up; while a crossed belt 7, runs on 
the smaller pulleys 6,6', and serves to reverse 
the driving and screw-shafts and thereby 
runs the follower down. 
The belt-shifters proper are arranged in a 
guide-frame B, attached to the side of the 
press frame A. The belt-shifters are two 
slidable bars 8 and 8' arranged horizontally 
in suitable guide ways, one above another, 
and provided with the usual prongs or arms 
9, for engaging the belts 7,7'. Both of these 
sliding bars are operated, i.e. reciprocated, 
to shift the belts, by means of a slide 10, 
(Fig. 6) consisting of a slotted plate arranged 
to reciprocate vertically in the guide frame 
B. There are two obtuse-angled slots 11 and 
11' (Figs. 1 and 2) in the said slide 10, their an 
gles being reversed, or projected in opposite 
directions, and one slot ll being located 
higher then the other 11'. 
Pins or studs 12 and 12 are affixed to the 
respective bars and project through horizontal 
slots in the guide frame B into the corre 
sponding slots 11 and 11 (see Fig. 7;) that 
is to say, the stud 12 of the upper bar 8, that 
shifts the open belt 7, in the larger pulleys 
5, 5' works in the upper slot 11, and the stud 
12' of the lower bar 8 which shifts the 
crossed belt 7, on the smaller pulleys 6,6', 
works in the lower slot 11. The slide 10 
having the aforesaid slots 11, 11", i.e. moved 
up or down for the purpose of shifting the 
95 
CO 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
So 
 
530,978 
IO 
2 o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
5 O 
bars 8, 8', and belts 7, 7', by means of a piv 
oted lever, 13, and a rod 14. (Fig. 1). The 
latter, 14, extends upward, (see Fig. 1) along 
side the press-box, C, through a guide-way 
on the press, at the floor line, its upper end 
being provided with a cross pin, 15, that sub 
serves a purpose hereinafter stated. The 
lever, 13, is right-angular, having a pendent 
arm, 13', its inner end being pivoted to the 
side of the guide frame, and its opposite or 
free end to the rod, 14, and at an intermedi 
ate point to a link, 16, which connects it with 
the slide, 10. 
When the follower or follow - block, 3, 
reaches the limit of its ascending movement, 
the open belt, 7, is first shifted from the large 
fast pulley, 5, to the loose one, 5', and imme 
diately, the crossed belt, 7', is shifted from 
the small loose pulley, 6', to the fast one, 6, 
so that the rotation of the screw-shaft, 1, is 
reversed and the follower, 3, run down. The 
successive or connected movements of the 
shifting devices required to effect this result 
are more specifically as follows: 
As shown in Fig. 1, the lever, 13, and slide, 
10, have been adjusted by pulling the rod, 14, 
up into the position required to run the fol 
lower, 3, up; that is to say, the open belt, 7, 
has been shifted onto the large fast pulley, 
5, and the crossed belt, 7, onto the smaller 
loose pulley, 6', so that the Screw-shaft, 1, ro 
tates in the direction required to draw the 
lower ends of the toggle levers 2, 2', toward 
each other, which necessarily forces the foll 
lower, 3, up. It will be observed (Fig.1), that 
a weighted, angle-shaped, pivoted pawl, or 
dog, 17, has engaged a notch in the upper, 
belt-shifting bar, 8. This is for the purpose 
of holding the said bar fixed in position, so 
that there is no possibility of the open belt, 
7, being shifted accidentally while the foll 
lower is ascending. (The dog, 17, might en 
gage a notch in the slide, 10, with the same 
result.) When the follower reaches the limit 
of its ascent, the lever, 13, is reversed, or 
thrown down, and all the connected movable 
parts then assume the position shown in Fig. 
2; that is to say, the slide 10, is moved down 
and the bars 8 and 8', slid to the left, thus 
shifting the belts 7 and 7' onto the large loose 
pulley 5' and fast smaller pulley 6, respect 
ively. This movement may be effected man 
ually at any position of ascending follower, 
by manually disengaging the dog, 17, from the 
bar, 8, but it is in fact effected automatically, 
by means now to be described. 
When the follower, 3, is at nearly its high 
est point, the toggle levers 2,2', approach the 
vertical, as shown in Figs. 2 and 4, and at this 
time the lower projecting end of one of said 
levers (2) comes in contact with a long lever 
18, (see Fig. 3) that is pivoted to one of the 
cross beams, Cl, of the press frame, A, and 
whose free end projects over the upper belt 
shifting bar, 8, between the dog, 17, and the 
vertical slide, 10. It will be seen, that, as the 
toggle lever presses against the long lever, 
18, the free end of the latter is pushed later 
ally against the dog, 17, and thus the dog is 
tilted and disengaged from the bar, 8, and the 
bar, 14, and slide, 10, drop by gravitation, 
throwing lever, 13, into position, as shown in 
Fig. 2, which shifts the belts and reverses the 
motion of the screw-shaft and follower as be 
fore stated. 
It is to be noted, in respect to the above de 
scribed movements of the belt-shifting mech 
anism, that it is necessary one belt shall be 
shifted before the other, and that this is ef 
fected, by the arrangement of the slots 11 and 
11, in slide 10. Thus, when the said slide 
moves down to the position shown in Fig. 2, 
the pin, 12, of the upper belt-shifting bar, 8, 
first runs in the inclined portion of the up 
per slot, 11, while the pin, 12", of the lower 
bar, 8', is in the vertical portion of the lower 
slot, 11. Hence, the result is that, in the first 
half of the downward movement of the slide, 
10, the upper bar, 8, moves to the left and 
shifts the open belt, 7, from the large fast 
pulley, 5, to the large loose pulley, 5, and 
that during this operation the lower bar, 8, 
remains stationary; but, as the pin, 12, of the 
upper bar 8, passes from the inclined into 
the vertical portion of the upper slot, 11, the 
pin, 12, of the lower bar, 8, passes from the 
vertical into the inclined portion of the lower 
slot, 11, so that during the remainder or sec 
ond half, of the downward movement of the 
slide, 10, the upper bar remains at rest while 
the lower one shifts the crossed belt, 7', from 
the small loose pulley, 6', to the fast pulley, 
6. This being done, the rotation of the screw 
shaft, 1, is reversed and the follower, 3, de 
scends, as before stated. It is obvious, that 
when the slide, 10, is moved upward, this rel 
ative movement of the belt-shifting bars 8, 
8', is reversed and that 8 is first shifted to 
the right, and then the upper one, 8, so that 
the crossed belt, 7', is first thrown from the 
smaller fast pulley, 6, onto the loose one, 6', 
and then the open belt, 7, from the larger 
loose pulley, 5, onto the fast one, 5. 
The foregoing description makes it clear, 
that the press is automatic as to reversal of 
the ascending movement of the follower to a 
descending movement. The means for chang 
ing the descending movement of the follower 
to a state of rest when it reaches the bottom 
of box, consists of a second vertical slide, 20, 
shown detached in Fig. 5, which is arranged 
in a guide frame B, at the left (Figs. 1 and 2) 
of the larger slide, 10. 
It has an inclined 
shoulder, 21, that works, in contact with a 
pin, 22, projecting inward from the lower 
belt-shifter, 8', and its upper end is jointed 
by means of a link, 23, to a lever, 24, (Fig. 3,) 
of the first class, which is pivoted on a cross 
bar of vertical standards, 25, (only one being 
shown,) and whose free, inner end projects 
into the path of the follower. It results, that 
when the latter closely approaches the limit 
of its descent, it comes in contact with and 
depresses the inner end of said lever, 24, and 
75 
9o 
I o5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
530,978 
o 
25 p 
35 
45 
55 
forces the latter into the inclined position 
shown in dotted lines, Fig. 3, whereby the 
slide, 20, is raised, and thus its inclined 
shoulder, 21, is made to act on the pin, 22, of 
the lower belt-shifter, 8', and forces the latter 
to the right. An abutment, 26, or other form 
of projection, on the shifter, 8', is thus brought 
into contact with the pendent arm, 13, of 
the main lever, 13, which latter and the hori 
zontal bar, 8', are consequently thrown into 
a position which raises the slide, 10, only high 
enough to shift the crossed belt, 7, from the 
fast pulley, 6, onto the loose pulley, 6', thus 
stopping the movement of the follower at the 
bottom of the box. 
The operation of the follower is hence auto 
matic throughout, except the movement to 
start the follower up by raising the bar, 14; 
that is to say, it is reciprocated automatically 
four or five times, or, until by compression of 
successive charges of cotton in the upper por 
tion of the press-box, C, a sufficient quantity 
has been accumulated to produce a bale of the 
required weight-usually from four hundred 
ounds to six hundred pounds. 
When the last charge has been made, and 
the follower is at its highest point, it is neces 
sary it shall remain there and hold the bale 
under pressure long enough to allow the bag 
ging to be properly arranged and the ties put 
on, and not be permitted to return at once to 
the bottom of the press-box as it had previ 
ously done after compressing a charge. For 
this purpose, a pin 15, (Figs. 1 and 2) before 
referred to, is inserted in a hole in the rod, 14, 
a short distance above the floor that extends 
around the press-box; and this is done when 
the rod is raised, and the follow-block has 
been started up to compress the last charge. 
The pin, 15, will, when the dog, 17, is tilted by 
lever, 18, and the bar, 14, falls, come in con 
tact with the floor or guide way and thus serve 
as a stop to arrest the downward movement 
of the rod 14, and change the main lever, 13, 
from the upwardly-inclined position shown in 
Fig. 1, to the horizontal position shown by 
dotted lines in Fig. 1, since it allows the slide, 
10, to descend but half way, that is to say, to 
the point where the pin, 12, of the upper bar, 
8, passes from the inclined into the vertical 
portion of the upper slot, 11, in said slide, 
whereby the open belt, 7, is shifted from the 
fast pulley, 5, onto the loose one, 5, but with 
out shifting the crossed belt, 7, onto the fast 
pulley, 6. Thus, both belts run on the re 
spective loose pulleys, and meanwhile the fol 
lower, 3, will remain at rest until the stoppin, 
15, is removed, when the slide, 10, continues 
its descent and moves the lower bar, 8, and 
thereby shifts the crossed belt, 7, onto the 
fast pulley, 6. Of course the pin, 15, is re 
moved immediately after the bale has been 
duly Wrapped, the ties applied and fastened, 
and the finished bale ready to be rolled out 
of the press. 
m 
It remains to describe the brake mechanism. 
I have filed an application, Serial No. 498,234, 
. . 
for Letters Patent in which I have shown a 
brake-shoe, 27, (Fig. 3,) hinged to the under 
side of the follower, so as to come in contact 
with the brake wheel, 28, (Figs. 3 and 4) 
keyed on the screw-shaft, 1, when the follower, 
3, is just reaching the limit of its descent. 
This action arrests, or rather assists in arrest 
ing the comparatively rapid descent of the 
follower at the critical moment, and thus 
avoids injury to the press which might other 
wise result. On this device or feature, the 
hinged brake-shoe, I make no claim here, and 
refer to it thus briefly, merely in order to in 
dicate the brake system of which it forms a 
part. I have also shown in the aforesaid ap 
plication a brake mechanism for arresting the 
follower at the limit of its ascent. Such mech 
anism is composed of the long lever, 18, (see 
Figs. 3 and 4) a pivotal vertical lever, 29, 
against which it acts, i. e. pushes, and a slid 
ing horizontal brake-shoe or bar, 30, which is 
hinged to the upper end of such vertical lever 
and rests free on a crossbeam, a. Thus, when 
the righthand toggle lever, 2', comes in con 
tact with the long lever, 18, it forces the latter 
against the shorter vertical lever, 29, which in 
turn pushes the shoe, 30, forcibly against the 
side of the Wheel, 28, and hence arrests its 
rotation and that of the screw-shaft, 1, so that 
the follower 3, is instantly brought to rest. 
The only change made in this arrangement 
of brake mechanism from that described in 
the aforesaid application is the extension of 
the lever, 18, and its connection and coaction 
with the belt-shifting mechanism and brake 
at a critical juncture. 
To briefly recapitulate the operation of the 
invention the rod, 14, being pulled upward, 
the main lever, 13, slide, 10, and belt-shifters 
8, 8", assume the position shown in Fig. 1, and 
thus the belts 7, 7, are shipped onto the re 
spective fast and loose pulleys 5, and 6', 
whereby the follower, 3, is caused to begin its 
ascent. At the proper limit of the upward 
movement of the follower, the right-hand tog 
gle-lever, 2, presses against the long trans 
verse lever, 18, and thus causes it to unlock 
the dog, 17, and then the bar, 14, and slide, 
10, drop by gravitation, whereby the brake, 
30, is applied and the main lever, 13, thrown 
down into the position shown in Fig. 2, which 
moves the main slide, 10, down, and this in 
turn shifts the belts 7, 7, successively, from 
the pulleys 5 and 6' onto the pulleys 5 and 6, 
which (the crossed belt, then running on the 
small, fast pulley 6) reverses the rotation of 
the screw-shaft, l, and consequently moves 
the lower ends of the toggle-levers 2, and 2', 
apart, so that the follower descends. When 
about to reach the limit of its downward move 
ment, the follower strikes and tilts the nor 
mally-horizontal lever, 24, which raises the 
supplementary slide, 20, and this, acting on 
the lower belt-shifter, 8', moves the crossed 
belt, 7, from the fast pulley, 6, onto the loose 
one, 6', and then the follower comes to a stop 
at the bottom of the box. It will be observed, 
7 o 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
ro5 
II5 
I 25 
A. 
530,978 
that, in this movement of the lower belt- box, for operating said lever, as shown and 
shifter, 8', to the right, its abutment,26, pushes 
described. 
2. The combination with a press-box, a re 
against the lower end of the pendent arm, 13, 
ciprocating follower, and means for forcing 
of the main lever, 13, and thus raises the lat 
the latter upward which include fast and 
ter to the horizontal position, whereby the 
loose pulleys, a sliding bar or belt-shifter hav 
follower is brought to a state of rest, and re 
ing a lateral projection, a fast and loose pull 
mains so, because the slidle, 20, is not capable 
ley and a driving belt, of a vertical recipro 
of having any effect on the bat, 8, which 
cating slide having an angle slot in which 
moves the open belt, 7, onto the fast pulley, 
the projection of the belt-shifter works, and 
5, to start the follower up. ASSunning that 
a pivoted locking dog which automatically 
one charge of cotton has been made and 
engages the belt-shifter when the latter has 
pressed into the upper box, C, and that the 
shifted the belt onto the fast pulley, as shown 
follower has returned to the botton of the 
box and stopped, the press is ready for an 
and described. 
3. The combination with a press-box, fol 
other charge, after receiving which, the bar, 14, 
is again raised till the dog, 17, engages with the 
lower, levers connected with the latter, a ro 
tatable screw-shaft for actuating said levers, 
bar, S, which holds the bar, 14, up. The fol 
fast and loose pulleys, a shaft carrying the 
lower presses this second charge as it did the 
atter and geared with said screw-shaft, open 
first and then returns to the botton and stops 
and crossed belts, two belt-shifters, a device 
as before. When the last of the four charges 
for locking the latter, a lever arranged trans 
has been made and compressed, the return 
versely in the path of the follower levers, 
or downward movement of the follower, 3, is 
and its free end engaging such locking de 
prevented by previous insertion of stop pin, 
vices, and means for operating said lever, 
15, in the trip rod, 14, when the same was 
substantially as shown and described, where 
1'aised to start the follower up. This controls 
the position of the main or angle lever, 13, 
by, when the follower reaches the limit of its 
upward novelinent, the belt-shifter is moved 
which arrests, at the half-Way point, the de 
to shift the driving belt, as specified. 
sceut of the slide, 10, that operates the belt 
4. The combination, with a press-box fol 
shifters or slide bal's S, S', and thereby throws 
lower, and means for Operating the latter, of 
the open belt, 7, on the loose pulley, 5'. The 
fast and loose pulleys, a sliding belt-shifter 
follower is thus held at rest SO long as re 
having a lateral projection, a device for lock 
quired to wrap, and tie the finished, stand 
ing said belt-shifter, a vertical reciprocating 
ard-weight bale. Then the stop, 15, is clis 
slide having all angle slot, and a pivoted le 
placed, and the downward in ovement of the 
ver 18 connected with saidslide for operating 
slide, 10, continues and is coill pleted, which 
it, of a lever pivoted and arranged in the path 
in turn completes the belt-shifting operation 
of the nea as for forcing the follower upward, 
required to run the follower down. The fin 
and its fi'ee end engaging said locking device, 
ished bale is rolled Out of the press after the 
whereby the latter is operated and allows the 
stop, 15, is removed, all d the follower has 
shifting of the driving belt, when the follower 
moved down sufficiently to relieve the press 
is a bolt to reach the upward limit of its move 
ure and give roo in for egress of the bale. 
neit, substantially as shown and described. 
I show, in Fig. 3", a slide, 1.0', having bit 
one slot, 11, which will Operate the sliding 
3. The coin bination with a slidable bar or 
beit shifter, a dog for engaging the latter and 
bars, 8 and 8', in the sane manner as the 
means for operating the belt-shifter, of a piv 
slide 10. The dotted lines show the relative 
oted lever whose free end engages said dog, a 
position of said bars when the slide, 10, is in 
press-box, a follower and means for operat 
the position corresponding to that of slide, 
ing the latter, Said means being adapted to 
10, shown in Fig. 1, that is to Say, when the 
belt is on the fast large pulley alld the fol 
act on the lever when the follower is at one 
limit of its movement, as shown and described. 
lower is therefore going up, 
G. The combination with a press box, fol 
lower, and neans for operating it which in 
clude fast and loose pulleys and belts, of slid 
ing belt-shiftel's having lateral projections, 
and two vertical slides, the main slide having 
two guide Ways and the other one guideway 
for the Said projections, and means for rais 
ing the supplementary slide and lever con 
nected with said mail slide for raising it, and 
a projection or shoulder on the lower belt 
shifter, which comes in contact with such le 
wer when said belt-shifter is moved endwise 
by the supplementary slide, Substantially as 
shown and described, for the purpose specified. 
7. The combination with the press-box, the 
follower, ineans for operating the latter, in 
cluding fast and loose pulleys, and belts run 
What I claim is 
1. The combination, With two sets of fast 
and loose pulleys, which are of different di 
ameters aud have the sa, the axis, the two fast 
pulleys being arranged contiguously, and two 
slidable belt-shifter's, or bat's, a 'ranged par 
allel horizontally and having lateral projec 
tions, of a vertically-slidable plate, having 
two obtuse angle slots, one arranged above 
another, their apexes pointing in Opposite di 
rections, their adjacent portions being ill 
clined, and the upper polition. Or line in ber of 
the upper slot and the lower portion of the 
lower slot being vertical, a pivoted angle e 
wer which engages one of Said bal's, the press 
follower, and a bar connected with Said lever 
and extending upward alongside the press 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
I o5 
... O 
I I5 
2 O 
I 25 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
580,978 
3 
ning thereon, and two sliding belt-shifters 
having lateral projections, of the main slotted 
vertical slide and the parallel supplemental 
slide, the pivoted, main, angle-shaped, lever 
5 connected with the main slide and having a 
pendent free arm, and a pivoted lever having 
a joint connection with the supplementary 
slide, and its free end projecting into the path 
of the follower, whereby, when the latter is 
Io nearing the limit of its descent, it tilts such 
lever and thus raises the supplementary slide, 
and shifts the belt that runs the follower 
down, as set forth. 
8. The combination with a press-box, a fol 
I5 lower, levers for operating it, a screw-shaft 
for operating the levers, a brake wheel, a mov 
able brake-shoe acting on the latter, and a 
transverse brake lever arranged adjacent to 
the brake-shoe, to press the same against the 
wheel when the follower levers are at their 20 
closest approximation, and the main, slotted, 
vertical slide, a horizontal sliding belt-shifter 
connected with said slide, a lever, connected 
with the latter and having a pendent mem 
ber against which the brake lever acts simul- 25 
taneously with its action on the brake-shoe, 
as shown and described. 
THOMAS M. WALLACE. 
Witnesses: 
J. A. MOORE, 
J. T. FITZGERALD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531078.txt	 
 
 ( az??? 
62222222 
woza 
nuo3 
(No Model.) 
No. 531,078. 
T. C. WALES, Jr. 
TELEPHONE SPEAKING, TUBE SYSTEM, 
Patented Dec. 18, 1894. 
| 
Irventor, 
THE NORRIS pete 
difhd., WASNSTON, s.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS C. WALES, JR, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS,ASSIGNOR TO THE 
AMERICAN BELL TELEPHONE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TELEPHONE SPEAKING-TUBE systEM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 531,078, dated December 18, 1894. 
Application filed April 7, 1894, Serial No, 506,731. (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS C. WALES, Jr., 
residing at Boston, in the county of Suffolk 
and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
certain Improvements in Telephone Speak 
ing-Tube Systems, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention relates to systems of elec 
trical circuits and apparatus used for tele 
phonic interconnection and communication 
in hotels, factories, &c., often denominated 
telephone speaking tube systems,' in which 
there are a plurality of stations, each of which 
is provided with means for connecting, sig 
naling, and speaking with every other asso 
ciated station, and in which a common source 
of electrical supply is employed for signaling 
and for talking purposes. 
The object of my invention is to do away 
with expensive apparatus and complicated 
circuits, and replace them with others less 
costly, but equally, if not more efficient, and 
more simple in construction and manipula 
tion. 
To these ends the invention consists of a 
plurality of telephone circuits, preferably 
metallic in twisted pairs, extending between 
a plurality of stations, combined with a source 
of electricity and a calling wire, there being at 
each station a vibrating call bell in a branch 
of the calling circuit; telephones in a nor 
mally open bridge; and switching devices con 
sisting of spring jacks the normally openter 
minal springs of which are connected by 
branches to both conductors of each circuit; 
and a circuit connector or uniter. The SWitch 
ing devices are double or four point switches 
or spring jacks one for each circuit, the two 
inner springs of which are normally open 
branch terminals from the respective sides or 
conductors of the home circuit, and the two 
outer springs are normally open branch ter 
minals from the respective conductors of one 
of the other circuits. The connector is a 
double plug, the insertion of which into a 
jack connects the two conductors of the home 
circuit with the two conductors of another 
circuit, and permits the bridging in of the 
call key and of the telephones. 
A common source of electric current is em 
ployed for signaling and conversational pur 
poses, and consists preferably of a battery 
located at one of the associated stations, or 
at any suitable place, from the poles of which, 
branches in pairs extend to the two conduc 
tors of each of the associated circuits. One 
of each of these pairs of branches connects 
With a common pole of the battery and with 
the upper or hook switch conductor of each 
of the associated circuits, and includes the 
helices of an electro-magnetic retardation or 
choking coil; and from the same common 
pole of the battery circuit, a branch wire 
which includes the helix of a simple resist 
ance coil, connects to a common call wire 
which extends to all of the stations and has 
branches to the lower contact of each hook 
switch, and includes the helices of a vibrat 
ing call bell. The calling device at each sta 
tion consists of a key or press button bridged 
in between the conductors of each home cir 
cuit. The telephones are in a normally open 
bridge between the two conductors of each 
home circuit, and when the receiving tele 
phone is removed from the hook switch, the 
said bridge is automatically closed and the 
telephones are connected therein; all of which 
I will now proceed to describe and point out 
in the claims. 
In the drawing which illustrates my inven 
tion are shown three metallic circuits, LL? 
and L, a common calling wire, A, and the 
battery circuit or bus bars S, l, the metallic 
circuits being preferably bunched into a ca 
ble, and extended through the several asso 
ciated stations. The conductors l, l, l, land 
ll constitute the sides of the respective cir 
cuits L, L* and L, and are twisted together 
as is common in telephone cables. At each 
station are spring jacks J J which are con 
nected by branches to the other circuits, as for 
instance at station No. 1. The outer springs 
1 and 4 of jack Jare connected by branches 
o and n to the conductors land l of the cir 
cuit L*, and the outer springs 5 and 8 of jack 
J8 are connected by branches in and k with 
the conductors l and l of circuit L. The 
upper inner springs 2 and 6 of the two jacks 
are connected by wired with the conductor 
land the lower inner springs 3 and 7 are con 
nected by the wire i with the conductor of 
the home circuit L. A branch a from the call 
o 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
Ioo 
 
2 
581,078 
d 
3O 
35 
O 
45 
55 
wire A terminates at the back contact of the 
vibrating bell b whose armature is in circuit 
with its helices and wirei which terminates 
in the lower contact of the hook switch h. 
The hook switch is connected to the upper 
conductor lby the wire c. The telephones T 
and t are in the normally open branch g from 
the conductor . 
IX is a press button or key connected by 
wiree to the wire d, and has an anvil or con 
tact at the terminal of branch f from wire i. 
q and rare branch wires from conductors 
l, and to the bus bars or conductors s and u. 
respectively; and in the branch q is inserted 
the electro-magnetic resistance or choking 
coil R. 
It will of course be understood that the 
two helices of coil R are not necessarily con 
nected close together, as shown, in the same 
branch conductor, but that the same effect 
will be obtained by including one helix in 
each of the branches q and r. 
The apparatus at all of the stations is the 
same; and all the branches from the battery 
bus bars or conductors to the circuit con 
ductors and call wire, are connected at the 
place where the battery is located, there be 
ing no necessity to extend the battery con 
ductors to each station. 
P is a double plug and consists of a handle 
of non-conducting material in which are in 
serted the metal pins p and p. 
a'is a wire connecting the call wire A with 
the battery bus bar S and includes the helix 
or helices of a common resistance coil without 
a core, S. 
The operation of the system is as follows: 
Let us suppose that station No. 1 wishes to 
call up and converse with station No. 3. The 
pins, p, and, p, of plug, P, are inserted be 
tween the springs 5, 6 and 7, 8 respectively of 
jack Jas shown at station 1. The effect of 
this operation is to connect the conductors l 
of circuit L with the conductors l l of cir 
cuit Li, and when the key K is pressed upon 
its anvil, the circuit is closed through the 
battery B causing the vibrating bell b at 
station No. 3 to ring (and also the vibrating 
bell at the home station No. 1) as will be 
seen by tracing the circuit. Starting from 
battery B by wire it, branch r, conductor l, 
branch k spring 8, pin p, spring 7, wires i 
and f, key K, wires e and d, spring 6, pin p, 
spring 5, branch n, conductor l, wire c, bell 
b', wire a, to and along call wire A, wire a', 
and by conductor S to the other pole of bat 
tery B. It will be seen that the bell bat 
station No. 3 is in a derived circuit around 
the electro-magnetic retardation coil R8 the 
vibrating bell b, at the home station being 
also in a derived circuit around the local re 
tardation coil R. The circuit from the bat 
tery through the bell b at station No. 1 is 
from point 40, on conductor u, by branch r, 
conductor l, wires g and i andf, key K, wires 
e, d, and c, hook switch h, wirei, bellb, wire 
a, and along the call wire A to junction 20 
75 
and wire a, conductors to battery, B. 
The 
resistance S, (about five ohms,) in wire a' is 
placed there to prevent the bells from ring 
ing too loudly. Upon releasing the key IK at 
station No. 1 the bell ceases ringing, and the 
telephone t is taken from its hook switch h. 
which automatically opens the bell circuit 
and completes the talking circuit through its 
back contact by bridging the telephones be 
tween the conductors l, l of the circuit L. The 
same result ensues in the circuit No. 3 when 
the telephone i is removed from its hook 
switch h, the two circuits being connected 8o 
together by means of the branches k and m;1 
as will be seen by tracing them as follows: 
Starting from telephone T at station No. 1 
by hook switch h, wires c and d, springs 6 
and 5 of jack J, branch m. conductor i to sta 
tion No. 3, wire c, hook switch h, wire g and 
telephones T and t, conductor i, branch k, 
springs 8 and 7 of jack J, wires i and g to 
telephones at station No. 1. This is the talk 
ing circuit. 
The circuit from the battery B to tele 
phones at station No. 1 is as follows: from 
battery by conductor u, branch r, conduc 
tor l, wire g and telephonest and T, wire c, 
conductor l, branch g, conductor S, to other 
pole of battery, and the circuit from the bat 
tery to the telephones at station No. 3 is from 
battery by conductor u, branch r, conductor 
l, wire g, and telephonest and T, wire c, 
conductor i, branch q, conductor, S, to other 
pole of battery. 
The circuits can be simplified by leaving 
out the calling wire A, and its branches a, a, 
a, &c., and the connecting wire a, if the 
back contacts of the vibrating bells and the 
wire a are grounded as shown in dotted lines, 
but I prefer to employ the common calling 
wire connected as shown and described. 
85 
9o 
95 
IOO 
I claim 
1. In a telephone speaking tube system 
comprising a plurality of stations, the combi 
nation of a plurality of circuits; a common 
source of electricity; a call wire connected 
by branches to said circuits and source of 
electricity; said circuits extending to each 
station and there provided with normally open 
branch terminal switches or spring-jacks, 
with a circuit uniter, with a call key in a nor 
mally open bridge of the home circuit, and 
with a signal receiving instrument in a 
branch of said call-wire; and branches from 
said circuit conductors to the said source of 
electricity containing an electro-magnetic re 
sistance; whereby upon the connection of the 
circuit uniter with a spring-jack and the 
closure of said key bridge, the signal receiv 
ing instrument at a distant station is oper 
ated, substantially as described. 
2. In a telephone speaking tube system 
comprising a plurality of stations, the combi 
nation of a plurality of circuits, a common 
source of electricity, and a call wire connected 
by branches to said circuits and source of elec 
tricity, as set forth; the said circuits extend 
Io5 
IO 
I (5 
I25 
581,078 
3 
ing to each station and there provided with 
normally open branch terminal switches or 
spring jacks, with a circuit uniter, with a call 
key in a normally open bridge of the home 
circuit, and with a signal receiving instru 
ment in a branch of said call wire; and 
branches from the said circuit conductors to 
the said source of electricity one of each pair 
having included therein an electro-magnetic 
resistance, whereby upon the connection of 
the circuit uniter with a spring jack, and the 
closure of the said key bridge the signal re 
ceiving instrument at a distant station is op 
erated. 
3. In a telephone speaking tube system 
comprising a plurality of stations, the combi 
nation of a plurality of circuits, a common 
source of electricity, and a call wire as set 
forth, the said circuits extending to each sta 
tion and there provided with normally open 
branch terminal switches or spring jacks, one 
for each circuit, with a circuit uniter, and tele 
phones in a normally open bridge of the home 
circuit; and branches from the said circuit 
conductors to the said source of electricity 
one of each pair having included therein an 
electro-magnetic resistance; whereby... upon 
the connection of the circuit uniter with a 
spring jack and the removal of the telephone 
from the hook switch, the home circuit is 
linked to a distant station, and the telephones 
are automatically bridged into the said cir-. 
cuit. 
4. In a telephone. Speaking tube system 
comprising a plurality of stations, the combi 
nation of a plurality of circuits, a common 
source of electricity, and a call wire, as set 
forth, the said circuits extending to each sta 
tion and provided with normally open branch 
terminal switches or spring jacks one for each 
circuit, the inner springs of which are con 
nected to the respective conductors of the 
home circuit and the outer springs of which 
are connected to the respective conductors of 
the associated circuits as set forth with a 
plug connector, and telephones in a normally 
open bridge of the home circuit, and branches 
from the said circuit conductors to the said 
source of electricity one of each pair having 
included therein an electro-magnetic resists 
ance; whereby upon the insertion of the plug 
connector into a spring jack, and the removal 
of the telephone from the hook switch, the 
home circuit is linked to a distant station, 
and the telephones are automatically bridged 
into the said circuit. 
5. In a telephonic system of interconnection 
comprising a plurality of stations, the com 
bination of a plurality of circuits extending 
to each station, and a common Source of cur 
rent supply for signaling purposes associated 
with each circuit, there being at each station 
switching and calling devices, an electro-mag 
netic retardation coil in a branch conductor 
between one pole of the source of electricity 
and the home circuit, and a call bell in the 
signaling circuit which is normally a derived 
circuit around the said electro-magnetic re 
tardation coils, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 28th day of 
March, 1894. 
THOMAS C. WALES, JR. 
45 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
- 
GEO. WILLIS PIERCE, 
JOSEPH. A. GATELY. 
5 
O 
2 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531179.txt	T. S. GILBERT. 
CORSET, . 
Patented Dec. 18, 1894, 
-----i z 
to: 
(No Model.) 
No. 531,179. 
 
 
the NaaRisperers co. Photo-Lito, WASHINGTON, O, C, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS S. GILBERT, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
GILBERT CORSET COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
coRSET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,179, dated December 18, 1894. 
Application filed August 24, 1894, Serial No. 521,210. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS S. GILBERT, of 
Springfield, in the county of Hampden and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
Improvement in Nursing. Corsets; and I do 
hereby declare the following, when taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
and the letters of reference marked thereon, 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
same, and which said drawings constitute part 
of this specification, and represent, in 
Figure 1, a view in front elevation of one 
form which a corset constructed in accordance 
with my invention may assume, one of the 
flaps being open and the other closed; Fig. 
2, a view in horizontal section, on the line 
a-b of Fig. 1, through one of the flaps and 
Shields; Fig. 3, a detached view of one of the 
shields, as it would appear if spread out flat. 
My invention relates to animprovement in 
nursing corsets, the object being to produce 
a simple, convenient, shapely, cleanly and 
comfortable corset, constructed with particu 
lar reference to concealing the breast when 
the nursing feature of the corset is in use, 
and to protecting the breast at other times. 
With these ends in view, my invention con 
sists in a nursing corset having certain de 
tails of construction as will be hereinafter de 
Scribed and pointed out in the claim. 
In carrying out my invention, I locate 
shields or covers A A made of some fine soft 
fabric, as muslin or lawn, in openings B B 
formed in the upper ends of the front sections 
CC of the corset, the said shields being made 
full enough to receive the breasts, which they 
normally entirely cover and protect, but 
adapted to be parted enough for the require 
ments of nursing, when, however, there need 
be no more exposure than of the shields to 
view. Normally the shields and the openings 
which they occupy are covered by flaps D D, 
Secured by their outer edges to the corset at 
points near the rear edges of the said openings. 
As herein shown, each shield is composed of 
two strips or pieces corresponding to each 
other in shape, wider at their upper than at 
theirlowerends and having theirinner corners 
overlapped. The upper ends of both pieces 
arebound and secured together by a tape A, 
while their lower ends are bound and secured 
together by a tape C, the said tapes finishing 
and reinforcing the upper and lower ends of 
the shield, which are not attached to the corset 
but left free. Preferably I shall apply the 
shields in such manner that, when soiled, they 
may be readily removed, washed and replaced. 
I do not, however, limit myself to so applying 
them. One way of removably applying the 
shields is by tacking the outer edges of their 
strips to the back of the corset by coarse 
stitches a, seen to the left in Fig. 1. By the 
term tacking,' I wish to be understood as re 
ferring to stitching of a temporary character. 
When tacked on to the corset the tapes pre 
vent the ends of the shield from being unduly 
strained and from getting out of place. 
It is designed that the shields shall be fulled, 
so to speak, in the openings B B, and afford 
ample room for the breasts, which they en 
tirely coverand protect from the corset proper, 
and which, when the flaps are open, they con 
ceal, the separation of the inner edges of the 
strips for nursing being effected without any 
exposure of the person. 
The flaps D D are triangular in form, as 
shown, and fastened by spring studs D and 
collets D, familiar to all on account of their 
extended use as fastenings for gloves; but 
the flaps may be fastened in any other way 
found convenient and effective. 
I do not limit myself to making or apply 
ing the shields in the exact manner shown 
and described, nor to making the openings 
in the corset sections and the flaps as repre 
sented. I would therefore have it understood 
that I do not limit myself to the exact con 
struction set forth, but hold myself at liberty 
to make such "changes as fairly fall within 
the spirit and scope of my invention. 
I am aware that a corset having its front 
sections cut away to form openings in their 
upper edges, and provided with loose shields 
of knitted material located in the said open 
ings, and with covers attached to it and adapt 
ed to cover the said openings and shields, is, 
broadly speaking, old. I am also aware that 
a corset having the upper edges of its front 
sections cut away to form openings and pro 
vided with flaps secured near the rear edges 
of the said openings is old, and I do not claim 
that construction broadly. 
3o 
35 
45 
so 
55 
75 
99 
95 
COO 
 
2 
581,179 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The herein described nursing-corset having 
5 a front section constructed with an opening 
located in its upper edge, aloose shield placed 
in the said opening, and comprising two ver 
tically arranged pieces of soft cloth con 
structed and adapted to entirely cover and 
Io protect the breast and nipple, and having 
portions of their inner edges free to be pushed 
back and separated to expose the nipple as 
required for nursing, and a flap secured to 
the outer face of the said section and adapted, 
when closed, to cover the said opening and 15 
shield, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
THOMAS S. GILBERT. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK H. BOWEN, 
EDWARD N. BOWEN, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531282.txt	E. SOLWAY. 
CHARGING APPARATUS, 
- 
w 
Patented Deo. 18, 1894, 
 
 
 
 
 
2. 
h N e % 
n 3 - C 
f 
. 
(No Model.) 
No. 531,282, 
 
 
  
 
X - 
- 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
62% 
INVENTOR 
BY 6-7.62 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNEST SOLV AY, OF BRUSSELS, BELGIUM. 
CHARGING APPARATUs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,282, dated December 18, 1894. 
Application filed November 10, 1890, Renewed November 14, 1894, serial No. 528,755, (No model.) Patented in Belgium July 
2, 1890, No. 91,114 in England July 3, 1890, No. 10,721 in France July 19, 1890, No. 207,081, and in Germany July 31, 
1890, No, 558, 
55 
73 
75 
To at whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ERNEST SOLVAY, a citi 
Zen of Belgium, residing at Brussels, Belgium, 
have invented a new and useful Charging 
Apparatus, (for which I have obtainedpatents 
in the following foreign countries, to wit: Bel 
gium, No. 91,114, dated July 2, 1890; France, 
No.207,081, dated July 19, 1890; Germany, No. 
55,811, dated July 31, 1890, and Great Britain, 
No. 10,721 dated July 3, 1890) of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
charging apparatus suitable for use in tow 
ers, and has for its object the production of a 
simple and effective device, whereby the dis 
tribution of the material charged may be gov. 
erned at will; either for the purpose of spread 
ing it evenly within the tower, or for conduct 
ing the finer material toward the outside and 
the coarser toward the interior or vice versa, 
or for producing any other classification of 
the material at a determined point, 
To this end the invention consists, essen 
tially, in a spirally shaped distributer or 
charger having one extremity bent inwardly 
toward its center and the other bent spirally 
outward beyond the plane of said inner ex 
tremity. 
The invention furthermore consists in a dis 
tributer formed of a spiral conical shape, in a 
wheel for rotating the same having a hollow 
hub to permit entrance of the material, and 
in the detail construction and arrangement 
of the parts, all as hereinafter more particu 
larly described and pointed out in the claims. 
In describing this invention, reference is 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of the specification, in which like letters 
indicate corresponding parts in both the 
views. 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section of the 
upper part of apartially filled cupola having 
my improved charging apparatus shown in 
operative position. Fig. 2 is a horizontal sec 
tional view, taken on line -ac-or-, Fig.1. 
In certain kinds of furnaces kilns and like 
apparatus, it is very desirable to charge the 
material uniformly and evenly within the 
tower in order to present a plane surface, and 
to permit the production when desired of uni 
form layers of different materials. By the use 
of the charging cones, as heretofore produced, 
there is more or less classification of the ma 
terials charged, the smaller pieces remaining 
in place and the large ones rolling to the bot 
tom. This localization of the parts consti 
tuting the charge is opposed to the desired 
end and is detrimental to regularity of opera 
tion and uniformity of the product produced. 
My improved invention obviates these seri 
ous difficulties by uniformly distributing the 
charge irrespective of the size of the compos 
ing particles, and by attaining this result with 
but a single inlet opening for the charge. 
-A- represents a tower of any desirable 
form, size and construction suitable for the 
particular operation to be effected. 
-B- is the cential chamber within which 
the material is charged. 
-C-represents the distributer or charger, 
which consists of a spiral cone of any suit 
able material. The base -c- of the cone is 
disposed in a particular spiral curve deter 
mined according to the conditions to be full 
filled. If, for instance, absolute uniform charg. 
sing is desired in order that each point of the 
chamber B may receive an equal proportion 
of the material, this base is determined by a 
spiral of such contour that any two radii 
thereof making between themselves a con 
stant angle determine on their revolution two 
circles between the area of which a constant 
difference exists. Each portion of the spiral 
corresponding to a constant angle at the cen 
ter produces therefore a constant 
annular 
surface. 
In Fig. 2 it will be seen that one end of the 
sheet from which the spiral cone is formed 
must stand truly vertical as it is coincident 
with the vertical axis; and the lower or outer 
edge of this sheet broadens from said axis, 
during its single revolution around the same, 
to a point on the same radius as the point of 
starting, as seen at the left of this figure. 
-D-represents any suitable construction 
of actuating wheel, which is suitably jour 
naled within the chamber -D'- and upon 
a bearing -d-in its upper part, and is con 
nected by straps or other suitable means-e- 
to the distributer or charger for supporting 
o 
25 
35 
40 
50 
95 
oc 
531,282 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
and revolving the same. These straps may 
pass through the distributer C and have 
hubs or nuts at their lower ends. The up 
per extremity of the tower and the gear-D- 
are formed with the respective openings 
-A'-and-D9- to permit the entrance of 
the material through a single opening di 
rectly upon the charger-C-. 
-F- represents a suitable wheel for driv 
ing the wheel-D-. This wheel -E- is 
Supported on a shaft or spindle-F-, which 
may be revolved by any suitable construction 
of actuating wheel-E-driven by suitable 
power. As the charge falls upon this spiral 
cone it is divided equally according to its pe 
riphery, and if the cone makes one complete 
revolution during the fall the material will 
be equally and uniformly spread over the en 
tire upper surface of the material within the 
furnace. 
When different materials are successively 
charged they are arranged in uniform layers 
in the furnace, and when the materials are 
intimately mixed in wagons, cars, or other 
means before the charge, they are deposited 
in the same condition in the furnace, with a 
constant thickness at all points of the fur 
nace Section. It will thus be readily appar 
ent from the foregoing description and upon 
reference to the drawings that an absolutely 
equal and uniform charging is accomplished. 
Instead of causing the charger to turn dur 
ing the fall of the first charge, it may remain 
stationary during this time, and then turn to 
a constant angle during the succeeding, and 
if desired every alternate charge. In this 
manner after one complete revolution of the 
distributer and a certain number of charges 
a regular and uniform feeding of the mate 
rial will have been effected. 
It is evident that the cost of my improved 
apparatus is slight, its operation simple and 
easy; that by its use the effectiveness of the 
furnace is greatly augmented; and that the 
uniformity of the product conforms to the 
will of the operator. 
The operation of my invention will be ap 
parent upon reference to the foregoing de 
Scription and the drawings, and it will be un 
derstood that I do not limit myself to its pre 
cise form and construction, since the same 
may be changed without departing from the 
spirit of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
l. The herein described apparatus for dis 
tributing material, the same consisting of a 
distributer or charger in the shape of a spiral 
cone having its upright sides inclining down 
Wardly and outwardly from a point at the 
axis of the distributer and having its base 
disposed in a horizontal plane and forming 
Substantially a true spiral, one extremity of 
which extends substantially to the axis of the 
distributer the body completely surrounds the 
axis, and the other extremity of which is con 
siderably separated from the axis of said dis 
tributer, substantially as set forth. 
2. The herein described apparatus for dis 
tributing material, the same consisting of a 
distributer or charger in the shape of a spiral 
cone having its upright sides inclining down 
wardly and outwardly from the axis of the 
distributer and having its base disposed in a 
spiral plane, one extremity of which extends 
substantially to the axis of the distributer 
where this end of the spiral is vertical and 
the other extremity of which is considerably 
separated from the axis of said distributer 
and has its greatest inclination, and means, 
substantially as described, for supporting and 
rotating said distributer, from above, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The herein described apparatus for dis 
tributing material, the same consisting of a 
revoluble distributer or charger in the shape 
of a spiral cone having its upright sides in 
clining downwardly and outwardly from the 
axis of the distributer, upwardly extending 
straps having their lower ends secured to op 
posite sides of said spiral, and a gear formed 
with a hollow hub standing above the apex 
of said cone and to which gear on opposite 
sides of its hub are secured the upper ends 
of said straps for supporting the distributer, 
and means, Substantially as described, for ro 
tating said gear, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
4. In an apparatus for distributing material, 
the combination with a tower having an in 
terior furnace chamber and a chamber above 
it, an annular bearing supported within said 
upper chamber, a horizontal gear mounted 
upon said bearing and having a hollow hub 
registering with the opening in the bearing 
and means for rotating said gear; of a revolu 
ble distributer formed in the shape of a spiral 
cone and located within said furnace cham 
ber below the gear, and upright straps con 
nected at one end with the sides of the dis 
tributer and at the other end with opposite 
sides of said hollow hub, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name, in the presence of two attesting wit 
nesses, at the city of Brussels, Belgium, this 
30th day of August, 1890. 
ERNEST SOLWAY, 
Witnesses: 
R. LUCION, 
GREGORY PHELAN. 
65 
7 o 
75 
95 
Oc 
IoS 
O 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531382.txt	(No Model.) 
- - 
F. C. McCLARY, 
REVERSING TAP HOLDER. 
- 
No. 531,382, 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Patented Deo, 25, 1894. 
77 
 
 
restameae 
as 
elease 
e - 
- BE 
W7 a 
 
W es 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK C. MCCLARY, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
REVERSING TAP HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 531,382, dated December 25, 1894. 
Application filed April 7, 1894, Serial No. 506,732, (No model.) 
- 
O 
motion. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, FREDERICKC. McCLARY, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Hartford, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Reversing Tap 
Holders, of which the followingis a full, clear, 
and exact description, whereby anyone skilled 
in the art can make and use the same. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
device which may be used in any machine 
tool having a fast moving live spindle or ar 
bor on which the device maybe mounted and 
Where it will serve the purpose of a tap holder 
Containing within itself means for reversing 
the movement of the tap without compelling 
the spindle to which the device is secured to 
be reversed as to the direction of its rotary 
To this end my invention consists in the 
details of the several parts making up the tap 
holder as a whole and in the combination of 
such parts as more particularly hereinafter 
described and pointed out, in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings: Figure 1 is a 
detail side view of my improved tap holder 
illustrating the manner of its use. Fig. 2 is 
a detail view in lengthwise central section of 
the tap holder. Fig. 3 is a detail view in cross 
Section of the tap holder showing the revers 
ing gears. 
In the accompanying drawings the letter a 
denotes the body of the holder, which is pref 
erably a cylindrical block of metal, as steel, 
35 having at one end means of attachment to a 
live spindle or arbor b of a lathe or other suit 
able machine tool, the socket c in the form of 
holder described serving as a direct means of 
attachment. A cap d is secured to the outer 
end of the holder, as by means of screw bolts 
e, and between this cap and the end of the 
body a there is a recessf in which the gear 
wheels of the reversing mechanism are lo 
cated. A shaft g extends through a central 
hole in the cap and bears on its inner end a 
pinion g that is adapted to be thrown into or 
out of engagement with a gear wheel h of the 
train of gears of the reversing mechanism. 
This spindle bears on its outer end a chuck 
So or head i adapted to securely hold a tap k as 
by means of a binding screwk' which extends 
45 
- - - 
- 
 
55 
05 
75 
through a threaded socket in the head and 
binds upon the shank of the tap. 
The main body of the holder, including the 
cap d, and the head are adapted to be con 
nected by means of the clutch parts formed 
by the pins or shoulders i' extending from the 
rear end of one part and the pins or shoulders 
dextending from the other part. These pins 
are made of such a length as to enable them to 
pass each other when the head is extended, as 
shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings, and permit 
a rotary movement of the body part without 
turning the head also. 
The inner end of the shaft g is reduced in 
diameter and has the groovesgadapted to be 
engaged by the pointed end of a spring catchl. 
This spring catch is located in a socket in the 
body a of the holder and is thrust inward as 
by means of a spring l', the outer end of the 
socket opening being closed as by means of a 
short screw. When the shaft g is at the in 
ner limit of its play, as shown in Fig. 1 of the 
drawings, the rotary movement of the spin 
dleb turns with it the holder, and the pins or 
shoulders striking corresponding pins on the 
head turn that also in the same direction of 
movement. This direction of movement is 
such as to cause the tap k to be advanced into 
a nut held in a suitable chuck and to cut a 
thread therein. After the thread has been cut 
it is desirable to remove the tap, and this is 
accomplished by drawing back the spindleb 
and with it the body of the holder until the 
parts have assumed the relative position illus 
trated in Fig. 2 of the drawings. 
On the body part there is supported a loose 
sleeve m having an internal gear in which is in 
engagement with a gear wheel, O, of the train 
of gears of the reversing mechanism. This 
sleeve is preferably knurled on the outer sur 
face, or it may be provided with means which 
will enable it to be easily held either by the 
hand or by means of any special tool. The 
spindle b is supposed to be driven constantly 
in one direction and it is the object of my in 
vention to provide a simple and compact tool. 
which may be secured to the end of such a 
live spindle so as to remove the necessity of 
providing any reversing mechanism for the 
spindle of the machine tool. The spindle, as 
b, being driven in one direction carries with 
95 
OO 
2 
581,882 
it the holder a and the sleeve n, but when the 
latter is held as by grasping it with the hand, 
or as by means of any suitable tool or device, 
this rotary movement is stopped and the body 
a continuing its revolution will drive the gear 
wheel in the opposite direction as indicated by 
the arrow in Fig. 3 of the drawings. Through 
the medium of theidler h of this train of gears 
a motion in a reverse direction is imparted to 
the pinion g and to the shaft g on which the 
tool holding head is secured or of which it 
forms a part. The result of this rotary move 
ment of the head will be to withdraw the tap 
from the thread in the nut or other like part 
in which a thread has been cut. A longitudi 
nal reverse movement of the spindle b, or like 
part, is effected by the usual appliances on 
either a screw cutting machine, speed lathe, 
drill press or like machine tool in which the 
tool holder is usable. 
In the further operation of the device 
another thread may be cut by giving a for 
ward movement to the tool and when the tap 
encounters the work the two parts of the 
holder will be closed toward each other so as 
to cause the shoulders or pins ' d' to be again 
thrown into engagement, the catch l holding 
the head in the inward position until a posi 
tive force in the line of the axis of the holder 
is exerted to give a lengthwise outward move 
ment to the shaft g and disengage the shoul 
ders. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with a body part, a loose 
sleeve mounted on the body part and revolu 
ble thereon and bearing an annular gear, a 
rotary shaft mounted in the body part and 
having a lengthwise movement in its bearings 
therein, the outer end of said shaft having a 
tap holding device and the inner end bearing 
a pinion adapted to mesh with the train of 
reversing gears, the reversing train of gears, 
and the clutch appurtenant to the body part 
and rotary shaft respectively, all substantially 
as described. 
2. In combination in a reversing tap holder, 
55 
a body part having means for attachment to 
a live spindle, a sleeve. loosely borne on the 
body part and having an internal gear, a tap 
holding shaft having a lengthwise and rotary 
movement within the body part, a pinion 
borne on the inner end of said shaft and 
adapted to be moved into and out of engage 
ment with the train of reversing gears, the re 
Versing gears, the catch device located within 
the body part and adapted to hold the shaft 
at either limit of its play, and a clutch device 
appurtenant to the body part and tap holding 
shaft, all substantially as described. 
3. In a reversing tap holder, in combina 
tion, a body part having means for attach 
ment to a live spindle, a sleeveloosely mounted 
on the body part and having an internal annu 
lar gear, a tap holding shaft loosely mounted 
in the body part and having a rotary and 6 
also a lengthwise sliding movement in bear 
ings in the body part, reversing gears located 
within the body part, and a clutch adapted 
to unite temporarily the body part and the tap 
holding shaft, all substantially as described. 
4. In combination in a reversing tap holder, 
a body part having a shoulder, a cap secured 
to the body part as by means of screw bolts, 
a loose sleeve borne on the body part and hav 
ing an internal gear, a recess formed between 
the body part and the cap, reversing gears lo 
cated in said recess, a rotary and lengthwise 
movable shaft held in a bearing in the cap, a 
pinion secured to the shaft, the extended in 
ner end of the shaft having grooves, a spring 
catch borne in a socket in the body part and 
adapted to engage the grooves in the shaft, 
a tap holder borne on the outer end of the 
shaft, and the fixed pins arranged on the body 
part and cap respectively whereby a positive 
clutch is formed, all substantially as de 
Scribed. 
75 
FREDERICK C. MCCTARY. 
Wisnesses: 
CHAS. L. BURDETT, 
JOSEPH ARTHUR CANTIN. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531482.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 531,482, 
J. THOMAS, 
REGULATOR FOR OPEN TANKS, 
Patented Deo, 25, 1894, 
42Azee?e/, 
-64a, 44 ee-a-, 
Izvestor. 
a 4.2/26%. 6. 
E NORRIS PETERs co, Photo-iro. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
fis 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J OSHU A THOMAS, OF CLE V E LAND, OHIO. 
REGULATOR FOR OPEN TANKs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 531,482, dated Decemher 25, 1894. 
Application filed April 23, 1894, 
Serial No. 508,629. (No model.) 
55 
Zo all, whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, JOSHUATHOMAS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Cleveland, county of Cuyahoga, and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Regulators for Open Tanks, 
of which the following is a specification. 
. This invention relates to automatic means 
for regulating the filling of open water tanks 
used in supplying water to steam boilers, and 
Consists in the new construction and combi 
nation of devices for the purpose substantially 
as hereinafter described and pointed out in 
s 
the claim. . 
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a tank and a feed pump 
having my improved regulator attached show 
ing the method of constructing and applying 
my invention. Fig.2 is an enlarged sectional 
view of the regulator. 
A represents a tank which may be of any 
suitable dimensions, designed for containing 
Water for supplying boilers, and may be made 
open or closed at the top. 
B is a feed water pump having my gov 
ernor C attached, for which an application, 
Serial No. 463,244, filed February 27, 1893, 
was made, and which was allowed December 
5, 1893. 
D is the tank supply regulator connected 
in the discharge pipe from the aforesaid feed 
pump, and is the subject of this present ap 
plication, and it consists in the adaptation of 
the said governor with means for operating 
the same, by the rise and fall of water in the 
tank, in such a manner that the height or 
quantity of water is constantly maintained, 
without waste or loss, and without attention 
from an operator. 
D is a frame like the frame D' of the gov 
ernor, one end of which is connected with the 
valve E located in the discharge pipe F lead 
ing from the pump, the frame being sus 
pended in a perpendicular position. 
G, in the lower end of the frame, is a cylin 
der, like G', in the governor. 
His a piston in said cylinder having a rod 
extending toward the valve E and is coupled 
to the valve stem in the same manner as in 
the governor, and S is a spring on the piston 
rod bearing against the piston and a crossbar 
- 
w 
as follows: 
I, on the said piston rod, held by rods at 
tached in the frame. This is the same con 
struction as the governor, and is an adapta 
tion of the governor for this purpose. The 
cylinder G is connected by a pipe, J, with the 
water pipe F for the purpose of providing an 
equal pressure on the piston and the valve, 
thus making it a balanced valve. 
The means for operating the regulator is 
K is a small tank or vessel suspended by a 
cord or rod L to the outer end of a lever M, 
fulcrumed to an arm in on the frame D. The 
short arm of said lever M is connected with 
the coupling nut on the valve stem and pis 
ton rod, and the tank is counterbalanced by 
the spring S. In the bottom of the small 
tank K is provided a pipe N, to the elbow of 
which is attached a flexible pipe or hose O, 
connecting said small tank with the large 
tank A, below the Water level. The purpose 
of this connection is to provide for conveying 
- water from the main tank to small one, and . 
the position of the small one must be such 
-75 
that its middle part shall be on the same level 
with the water level in the large tank. The 
object of this is, that whenever the water in 
the large tank falls below the required level, 
there will be a similar fall in the small tank. 
This would diminish the quantity of water 
and reduce the weight of the small tank in 
proportion to such reduction, and thereby en 
able the spring S to lift said tank and open 
the valve E to allow for replenishing the large 
tank. Now when the required level of water 
is again reached in the large tank, there is a 
like replenishing of water in the small tank, 
and its weight is again increased so as to 
overcome, the power of the spring S and the 
valve E is again closed, and the pump will 
also cease to operate. The pump governor 
controls the supply of steam to the steam cyl 
inder of the pump, which works in conjunc 
tion with the regulator. 
P is a pipe connected with the tank. A by 
which water is drawn from said tank to sup 
ply boilers or other purposes. 
IIaving described my invention, I claim as 
follows: 
In a regulator for open tanks the combina 
tion with water pipe F, of the regulator con 
f 
go 
95 
OO 
O 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
581,482 
sisting of the frame D, connected with the 
valve E in said water pipe; the cylinder G 
in lower end of frame D and connected by a 
branch pipe J with said water pipe F; a pis 
ton in said cylinder having a rod coupled 
with the valve stem; a crossbar I, connected 
to frame D, a spring S on said piston rod, 
a lever M, fulcrumed to the frame D and 
connected with the coupling nut on said valve 
stem and piston rod; and means substantially Io 
as described for operating said lever M, for 
actuating the valve E, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
JOSHUATIOMAS. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. TIBBITTs, 
CHAS. TAYLOR. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531583.txt	(No Model.) 
G. M., BENNETT, 
FOLDING CHAIR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 531583, 
Patented Dec. 25, 1894, 
A6.7. 
Sage 
 
2 %. 2 2A 
 
74 - SH 
/ 6 
77 
73 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 531,583. 
G. M. BENNETT, 
FOLDING CHAIR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
. 
. Patented Dec. 25, 1894. 
e 
s 
2 
2 
- ZN 
& 
a 
a 
3 * 
SS-7 
a 
Z. 
re-s 
O 
I-9 
to 
8 
a. 
e 
s 
e 
as 
es 
8 
--> 
Weavesses 
Z 
4-unifa. 
hist 
4. 
of R1s Peters co. Photo-liro. washington, b. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
G. M. BENNETT 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
FOLDING CHAIR 
No. 531,583, 
 
Patented Dec. 25, 1894. 
79. 2. 
C -|-- 
The NCHR is PETERs co, PHoto-Tho...washington.o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE MERRIT BENNETT, OF GRAND RAPIDs, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR, By 
, TO THE GRAND RAPIDS SEATING: 
DIRECT AND MESNE ASSIGNMENTS 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FOLDING CHAIR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,588, dated December 25, 1894. 
Application filed August 12, 1893, Serial No. 482,994, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE MERRIT BEN 
NETT, of Grand Rapids, county of Kent, and 
State of Michigan, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Folding Chairs, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention has reference to chairs with 
folding seats, such as are now universally 
used in theaters and public halls, and refers 
more particularly to the joint by which the 
Seat proper is connected to the standards. 
In Seats of this character trouble has been 
caused on account of the parts of the joint be 
coming loose from wear which caused the 
Seat to rattle as it was raised or lowered, and 
to operate imperfectly and unsatisfactorily. 
The aim of the present invention is to over 
come this objection, and it consists in mount 
ing the seat bracket between bearings of such 
construction that the parts of the bearing 
Will be caused to automatically embrace the 
bracket With a clamping action as the seat is 
raised or lowered. 
The invention also consists in so connect 
ing the seat brackets with the seat backs and 
i in so sustaining the latter, that as the seat 
proper is raised or lowered, the seat back will 
becaused to assume a greater or less degree 
of inclination as the case may be. 
The invention also consists in the details of 
construction and combination of parts here 
inafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, is 
a perspective view of two connected chairs 
having my invention embodied therein, the 
said chairs being provided with rigid backs. 
Fig. 2, is a front elevation of the same, partly 
in section. Fig. 3, is a vertical sectional ele 
Vation on the line A-A of the preceding fig 
lure. Fig. 4, is a horizontal section on the line 
B-B of Fig. 3; looking upward from below. 
Fig. 5, is a front elevation of two connecting 
chairs having my invention embodied therein, 
the said chairs being provided with tilting 
45 backs. Fig. 6, is a vertical sectional eleva 
tion on the line C-C of Fig. 5. 
Referring to Figs, 1, 2, and 3, 1 represents 
the seat standards between which seatbacks 
2 and Seats proper 3 are sustained as usual. 
o 4 represents seat brackets towhich the seats 
- 
55 
proper are secured at opposite ends in any ap 
propriate manner. These brackets are piv 
oted to the standards by means of the pecu 
liar joint now to be described, and as the 
joints for both brackets are identical, the de 
scription of one will suffice. 
The joint comprises a fixed member 8 pro 
vided with a semi-circular socket, and a mov 
able member 6 also provided with a semi-cir 
cular socket, between which sockets a globu- 6o 
lar head or ball bearing enlargement 7 on the 
seat bracket is mounted to turn therein. The 
fixed member of the joint is in the form of a 
vertical bracket and is provided with two lat 
erally extending ears 9, adapted to extend 65 
through openings in the seat standard and 
to be seated on laterally extending lugs 10, 
the brackets being adjustably secured to the 
lugs by means of bolts 11, extending through 
vertical slots in the ears and into the lugs. 
When the chairs are set in rows as illus 
trated, it will be seen that one standard an 
swers for two seats, so that in connecting. 
the brackets as described, the ears of the ad 
ijacent brackets will overlap, those on one: 
bracket being seated upon the ears on the 
other bracket as plainly shown in Fig. 2. 
The connection of the brackets with the 
standards in the manner set forth, is deemed 
of importance, in that when the standards are 
set at an angle as on a curve, the brackets 
may be set parallel to receive the seat proper. 
The connection is also of importance for the 
reason that it will not be necessary to accu 
rately set each standard, as the distance may 
be approximated, and the brackets thereafter 
accurately set to receive the seats, 
In shipping the seat proper may be attached 
to the seat brackets, and the hanging bracket 
8 will also be attached to the seat brackets. 
So, when the standards are in place it will 
only be necessary to connect the lugs 9 to the 
standards. 
. The movable member of the joint is in the 
form of a plate, which extends in an approxi- 95 
mately horizontal position a slight distance 
from the bracket, it being sustained thereby 
so as to be capable of a limited yielding lat 
eral movement Yby means of a bolt 12, and a 
spring washer 13 seated around the bolt, be- Ioo 
25 
35 
Y 
 
531,583 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
(bo 
neath its head and arranged to bear on the 
plate. 
This washer tends to hold the plate 
against the seat bracket, and acts as a nut 
lock to prevent the bolt from unscrewing, 
and also admits of the yielding of the plate 
laterally when pressure is applied, as more 
fully described hereinafter. 
The rear end of the movable plate is seated 
in an open notch formed in the laterally bent 
end 14 of the fixed member or bracket S, the 
arrangement being such that the end of the 
plate will be guided within the notch as it is 
moved on the bolt. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that by moving the rear end of the plate 
away from the bracket, its opposite end con 
taining the socket will be caused to approach 
the fixed member of the bearing, and will act 
to clamp the globular enlargement or ball 
bearing on the seat bracket tightly within the 
socket. In order that this clamping action 
may be effected automatically when the seat 
is raised to a folded position, and also when 
it is lowered to a horizontal or extended po 
sition for use, to the end that when the seat 
is in these positions, the parts of the joint will 
be tight to prevent rattling, I provide the seat 
bracket with a curved depending arm 15, ar 
ranged to extend within the space between 
the yielding plate and the bracket 8. This 
arm is provided at its free end with a lip or 
stop 16, in position to encounter the laterally 
bent end 14 of the bracket, when the seat is 
in an extended position, and serves to limit 
The arm is also 
the extension of the seat. 
formed at its free end on its side with an in 
clined shoulder 17, which is of such form that 
as the seat is extended, the shoulder will en 
gage the inner face of the yielding plate and 
on the continued movement of the seat, will. 
act to move the end of the plate 6 away from 
the bracket 8 with a wedging action, and 
cause its front end to act with a clamping ef. 
fect on the globular enlargement on the seat 
bracket. Where it joins the seat bracket, the 
arm is provided with an inclined shoulder 18, 
which when the seat is raised will engage the 
inner face of the plate, and act also on the 
bearing in a manner similar to the shoulder. 
on the free end of the arm. 
In Figs. 5 and 6 I have represented my im 
proved joint applied to a chair having a 
tilting back. In this construction the form 
and operation of the joint are the same as 
above described, but the brackets 8 (which 
take the place of the brackets 8 shown in 
Figs. 1, 2 and 3) are of different form, and 
instead of being supported as above described, 
they extend upward approximately to the 
tops of the seat standards where they are 
connected in Such manner as to be capable 
of swinging backward and forward at their 
lower ends. They are rigidly connected to 
the seat backs 2, and sustain the latter. 
At its upper end, each swinging member 8 
is provided with a depending finger 19, hav 
ing on its end a ball or globular enlargement 
20, which is seated loosely in a correspond 
ingly shaped socket formed in a bracket or 
hanger 21 adjustably connected by means of 
a bolt 22 to the seat standard in a manner 
similar to the connection of the bracket S in 
the case first described. 
The seat bracket is provided with a down 
Wardly projecting arm 40 which extends be 
yond the globular enlargement thereon, and 
is bent laterally in the form of a spindle 23, 
which is mounted in an elongated socket 24, 
formed in the seat standard as shown. This 
arm forms a lever which, when the seat is 
turned, causes the swinging member 8 to 
swing backward or forward (according to the 
direction in which the seat is turned) chang 
ing the positions of the connected parts as 
indicated in full and broken lines in Fig. 6. 
From this it will be understood that as the 
seat is raised or lowered, the lower ends of 
the swinging members 8 of the bearing be 
tween which the seat back is mounted to 
gether with the clamping plates and seat 
joints will be moved back and forth, the seat 
brackets turning on the spindles 23, as cen 
ters, which action will cause the seat back to 
assume a greater or less degree of inclination 
according to the movement of the seat proper. 
In applying my invention to a school desk 
I where there is no necessity for providing for 
the adjustment of the bearings between which 
the seat proper is mounted, the fixed member 
of the bearing will be formed integral with 
the standard, instead of being made a sepa 
ratepart as in the cases above described. The 
clamping action of the joint, however, will 
be the same. On account of the construction 
of the seat hinge, as the occupant rises from 
ithe seat, his limbs will encounter the front 
edge of the seat and will cause it to foldback 
automatically. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a folding chair the combination of the 
iseat bracket provided with an enlargement, 
a bearing for said enlargement, said bearing 
comprising a fixed and a relatively movable 
member adapted to clamp the enlargement 
between them, and means controlled by the 
bracket for moving the movable member of 
the bearing toward the fixed member when 
the seat is turned. 
2. In a folding chair the combination with 
the seat standard and with the seat bracket 
provided with an arm having an enlargement 
thereon, of the bearing within which said en 
largement is mounted, said bearing compris 
ing a fixed and a relatively movable member 
coupled together to permit a swinging or vi 
brating movement of the movable member 
relatively to the fixed member, and means 
controlled by the seat bracket for vibrating 
said movable member. 
3. The seat bracket provided with a globu 
lar enlargement or head and with an arm hav 
ing inclined shoulders, in combination with 
a fixed member provided with a socket, and 
7 o 
75 
85 
95 
Od 
IO 
IIS 
I 25 
531,588 
3. 
t 
a laterally yielding plate coupled with the 
fixed member, and also provided with a socket, 
the enlargement on the bracket being seated 
between said members, in the sockets thereof, 
and the shoulders on the arm arranged to en 
gage and move the plate laterally as the seat 
is raised or lowered. 
4. In a folding seat the combination with 
the seat bracket formed with an enlargement, 
the seat standard provided with a fixed or 
rigid bearing for said enlargement, a clamp 
ing plate coupled at one side of the axis of 
movement of the seat bracket, and arranged 
to clamp the enlargement in its bearing, and 
a cam arm on the seat bracket to engage and 
rock the clamping plate on its coupling to 
move the clamping end toward the fixed bear 
ing when the seat is turned. 
5. The combination with the fixed seat 
standards, of the brackets 8 jointed at their 
upper ends to the standards, the seat back 
connected rigidly to said brackets, the bear 
ings sustained at the lower ends of said brack 
ets and comprising each two members, and 
the seat brackets 4 pivoted between the mem 
bers of said bearings and extended downward 
beyond the same, and having their ends 
mounted in elongated slots in the standards; 
whereby when the seat is folded upward it 
will swing the lower ends of the brackets 8 
rearward and the ends of the seat brackets 
rising in the elongated slots will admit of a 
- 
corresponding downward movement of the 
Seat. 
6. The combination of the standards, the 
Seat back, the brackets sustaining the back 
and mounted to tip back and forth with re 
spect to the standards and provided at their 
lower ends with sockets, the relatively mov 
able plates sustained by the brackets and pro 
vided with sockets, the seat brackets pivoted 
between the standards and provided with en 
largements seated in the sockets, and the arms 
carried by the seat brackets and arranged to 
engage and move the movable plates as the 
seat is raised or lowered. 
7. In a folding seat the combination of the 
joint comprising a fixed and a relatively mov 
able member each provided with a comple 
mentary socket bearing, the seat bracket pro 
vided with an enlargement seated in said bear 
ings and a curved arm carried by the bracket 
and arranged to engage and move the mov 
able member of the bearing, said arm having 
a stop lug adapted to engage the seat support 
and limit the forward movement of the seat. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 22d day of May, 1893, in the pres 
ence of two attesting witnesses. 
GEORGE MERRIT BENNETT. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS.A. RENWICK, 
ERNST. E. KASPER, 
35 
45 
55 
O 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531683.txt	H. C. INGRAHAM. 
TRANSFER CAR, 
Patented Jan, l, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 531,683, 
 
is co, s-of-it-o., was titato: , b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C.ING RAIIAM, OF BUCYRUS, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE FREY-SHECKLER 
COMPANY, OF SAMIE PLACE. 
TRANSFER. CAR. 
StiCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 531,688, dated January 1, 1895. 
Application filed May 7, 1894, Serial No. 510,293. (No model.) 
d 
2O (-27 Zvi on it incy concern. 
Beit known that I, HENRY C.INGRAHAM, of 
Bucyrus, in the county of Crawford and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
5 Improvements in Transfer - Cars; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
transfer-cars designed to carry laden or enpty 
cars from one track to another. For instance, 
my improved transfer-car is well adapted for 
receiving-cars laden with brick at a brick 
15 machine and then carrying such brick-laden 
ear'S to a track in the dry house that is usu 
ally composed of several tunnels having tracks 
extending lengthwise of the tunnels, the brick 
laden cars being carried by the transfer-car 
20 to the track leading into a drying-tunnel, and, 
lipOn the completion of the drying process, 
being taken from the opposite end of the tun 
nel onto the transfer-car, and thence to the 
kiln in which the product is burned. It is 
25 obvious that any appliance or attachment to 
the transfer-car, that will facilitate the move 
ment of the transfer-car, such, for instance, 
as stopping at the right place, so as to bring 
the track on the transfer-car into line or reg 
3o istering-position with the track onto which or 
from which the car on the transfer-car is to 
be taken, is of great value in saving time and 
labor. 
I Would remark that by present practice of 
35 moving transfer-cars, the operator stoops over 
and pushes on the corner of the loaded car in 
order to move it, and to chuck or sprig 
the wheels by placing blocks on the track or 
a short stick between the spokes to stop the 
4o movement, and then employing some me 
chanical means, such for instance, as a latch 
to assist in holding the transfer-car in posi 
tion while a car is run onto or off from, the 
transfer-car. 
My present invention consists, primarily, of 
a brake applied to the transfer car and at 
tached to a handle whereby to push or pull 
the car to the desired position, with the ar 
rangement of parts such that, as the operator 
5o raises the handle into position to push or pull 
the car, the brake is automatically released, 
45 
7 o 
so that when the operator frees the handle, 
as required when the transfer car is in posi 
tion with the track thereon in line or regis 
tering position with the track to or from which 55 
a car, from or onto the transfer-car, respect 
ively, is to be taken, the handle drops, and, by 
its own weight sets or applies the brake. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective of a transfer-car embodying my 6o 
invention, and Fig. 2 is an enlarged plan, por 
tions being broken away in Fig. 1, to reduce 
the size of the figure. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
wheels of the car, the same being shown ar- 65 
ranged in pairs at opposite ends of the cars, 
and mounted upon axles B. 
A represents the treads of the wheels, and 
C designates the frame that connects the axles 
with each other, and supports a track D ar 
ranged transversely of the car, and adapted 
to receive a car laden with brick or other ma 
terial, which track D is adapted to register 
with the track to and from which a car trans 
ferred by the transfer-car, is adapted to be 75 
taken. 
My improved transfer-car, at one end, is 
provided with a bail-shaped handle E, that, at 
the treads of the adjacent pair of wheels of 
the car, is provided with brake-shoes G that 8o 
are pivotally secured to the handle, as at g, 
and adapted to frictionally engage the treads 
of the wheels. The handle, at its ends, is 
pivotally secured, as at e, to arms or brackets 
C rigid with the frame-work of the car, pref- 85 
erably integral with the journal-boxes that 
bear the axle having the wheels adapted to 
be engaged by the brake-shoes. The pivotal 
bearings of the handle are, however, out of 
line with the axis of said wheels and axle, Said go 
pivotal bearings being located preferably be 
tween the axis of said wheels and axle and 
the brake-shoes borne by the handle, so that 
the latter and consequently the brake-shoes, 
in the oscillation of the handle, are SWung or 
moved eccentrically to the treads of the wheels, 
&nd the arrangement of parts is such that 
when the handle is raised into position for 
pulling or pushing the transfer-car, the brake 
shoes are disengaged from the wheels, and Too 
the handle, when freed, drops or oscillates 
downwardly by gravity, until the brake-shoes 
95 
2 
531,688 
25 
35 
to the car, one or more brake-shoes attached 
to the handle and adapted to frictionally en 
gage or brake the adjacent wheel or wheels 
of the car, the axis of the handle being located 
between the axis of Said wheel or wheels and 
the portion of the tread of the wheel adapted 
to be engaged by the brake-shoe, the arrange 
ment of parts being such that the brake-shoe 
is released upon the oscillation or elevation 
of the handle to pull or push the cars and is 
Set or applied upon dropping or releasing the 
handle, and a stop for limiting the movement 
of the handle in the direction in which said 
handle is moved to render said brake-shoe 
inoperative, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 27th 
day of March, 1894. 
HENRY C. INGRAHAMI. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS BEER, 
ROBERT BEER. 
O 
engage the treads of the wheels, resulting in 
the braking of the car by means of said shoes 
and instantly arresting the movement of the 
car, and holding the car in the desired posi 
tion until the handle is again raised prepara 
tory to moving the car to another location. 
A stop for limiting the upward oscillation or 
movement of the handle is preferably pro 
vided and consists, preferably, in a lug or pro 
jecting-member C formed upon the journal 
boxes or members to which the handle is piv 
oted, the arrangement of parts being such that 
Said stops shall be adapted to engage the ends 
of the handle when the latter is oscillated up 
wardly to release the brakes, and thereby limit 
the oscillation of the handle in that direction. 
I would here remark that the transfer-car 
is preferably provided with arms or brackets 
C and one or more stops C, at each end of 
the car, as shown, so that the brake-bearing 
handle can be applied to either end of the car. 
What I claim is 
In a transfer-car, a handle pivotally secured 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531784.txt	?, ! 3N 
zzzzzzzzzz 
WNESSES 
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
A. CROSBY. 
ROPE CABE ADDER, 
NWENTOR 
.4% z 76. 
the sonais Peters co, Photo-litro. washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTINE CROSBY, OF WATERVILLE, MAINE. 
RO PE CABE ADDER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 531,784, dated January 1, 1895. 
Application filed November 2, 1894, Serial No. 527,692, (No model.) 
40 
45 
50 
55 
B designates a ball of metal or other hard 
material arranged within the said tip at the 
junction of the said bore and transverse pas 
sage. When the end of the rung C is screwed 
into the bore C, it forces the ball B against 
the rope D, thereby pressing the said rope into 
the recess A and bending it at this point so 
that it will be gripped firmly. As each end 
of each rung is provided with one of these 
tips or irons, the entire ladder is very se 
curely held together. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a rope ladder the combination with a 
rung and rope of a rung-tip or iron having a 
bore for the said rung a transverse passage for 
the said rope and a movable ball and rounded 
recess opposite the said ball, arranged and 
operating substantially as set forth. . 
2. As an article of manufacture a rung-tip 
having a movable ball arranged to receive the 
pressure of the end of the rung and a rounded 
recess opposite to the said ball in the inner 
face of the closed outer end of the tip sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereofI affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
AUGUSTINE CROSBY. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER GETCHEL, 
L. B. SPENCER. 
o 
I 5 
To all won, it n-cy concern. 
Be it known that I, AUGUSTINE CRCSBY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Waterville, in the county of Kennebec and 
State of Maine, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Rope-Cable Lad 
ders; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
This invention is closely allied to that 
which forms the subject matter of my appli 
cation, Serial No. 513,891, filed June 7, 1894, 
and constitutes an improvement thereon for 
rope-ladder rung or round fastenings. 
The said invention consists in the combi 
nation of a rung tip containing a movable 
bail and having a recess in the inner face of 
its opposite end opposite the said ball, the 
screwing of the rung into the said tip forcing 
the rope into the said recess and thereby 
bending and gripping the said rope So as to 
hold the rung in place. 
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1 
represents a perspective view of a rung tip 
or iron embodying my invention. Fig. 2 rep 
resents alongitudinal central section through 
the same the proximate parts of the rung and 
rope also being shown. 
A designates a rung-tip or iron having a 
screw-threaded bore C to receive the end of 
the rung, a transverse passage A' for the rope 
and a recess A* of rounded form in the inner 
35 face of its outer end, opposite the said bore. 
25 
2 C. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531885.txt	(No Model.) 
A. WESTLEY. 
BEARING FOR, NECKS OF ROLS, 
No. 531885. 
Patented Jan, l, 1895, 
A '67, 7. 
c 
f 
e 
2. 
   
sR snRene R 
 
Mitresses :- 
4,444 
Aoose/Aor 
4./74 72.7% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTH U R WESTLEY, OF DUDLEY, ENGLAN D. 
BEARNG FOR NEC KS OF RO L S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 531,885, dated January 1, 1895. 
Application filed September 13, 1894. Serial No. 522,942, (No model.) Patented in England May 4, 1892, No, 8,446. 
55 
to 
65 
o 
75 
curved shoulder of the neck of the roll so that 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR WESTLEY, a the said fillet' or curved shoulder of the 
neck does not come in contact with the bear 
ing, the whole bearing surface of the neck of 
the roll being supported on the horizontal 
part of the bearing so that overheating at the 
fillet part of the neck of the roll is wholly 
prevented. The rolls are kept in position by 
the snugs and collars bearing against the 
body of the rolls sidewise as usual. 
I prefer to make my improved bearing of 
bronze the recess situated under the fillet' 
or curved shoulder of the neck extending 
nearly across the bearing and the bottom of 
the recess may either be curved or angular. 
In addition to preserving the necks of the 
rolls, bearings made according to my inven 
tion possess the minor advantages that less 
friction being produced at the neck a reduced 
quantity of lubricant is necessary and less 
power is required for driving the rolling mill. 
Figurel of the accompanying drawings rep 
resents in side elevation partly in longitudi 
nal section, a portion of a cylindrical roll to 
which a bottom hot neckbearing constructed 
according to my invention is applied, and Fig. 
2 represents an end elevation of the same. 
Fig. 3 represents in plan, Fig. 4 in longitudi 
nal section and Fig. 5 in end elevation, taken 
at the recessed inner end, my improved bear 
ing detached from the roll. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in the several figures of the draw 
To all whom it mazy concern: 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at Dudley, England, have invented a certain 
new and useful Improved Bearing for the 
Necks of Rolls, (for which I have obtained 
Letters Patent of Great Britain, No. 8,446, 
dated May 4, 1892;) and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, which will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
Myinvention consists of a new or improved 
bearing for the necks of rolls constructed as 
hereinafter described. 
Bearings of the kind to which my invention 
refers are commonly called hot neckbearings 
and are principally used for supporting the 
necks of tin plate mill rolls, iron and steel 
sheet and plate mill rolls and other like rolls. 
The object of my invention is so to construct 
the bearings of the necks of the said rolls as 
to reduce to a minimum the tendency of the 
said necks to break at the fillet' or the 
curved shoulder of the neck where the neck 
joins the body of the roll. 
By the use of bearings of the ordinary kind 
fine surface cracks are formed at the fillet' 
or curved shoulder of the neck of the roll in 
consequence of the excessive friction at and 
overheating of that part of the roll, and at the 
said cracks the necks frequently break or 
split. I prevent the production of the said 
fine surface cracks and thereby reduce to a 
minimum the breaking of the necks at the 
fillet' or curved shoulder by the use of bear 
ings constructed according to my invention. 
In a bearing of the ordinary kind the inner 
end of the bearing situated under the fillet 
or curved shoulder of the neck of the roll is 
curved or made convex for the fillet or 
curved shoulder of the neck of the rollto seat 
itself closely upon, the whole of the neck of 
the roll resting on the bearing, that is, the cy 
lindrical part of the neck rests on the hori 
ontal part of the bearing and the fillet' or 
curved shoulder on the convex inner end of 
the bearing. 
In making a bearing according to my in 
vention I form a recess at the inner end of the 
bearing and at that face when the bearing is 
in use which is presented to the fillet' or 
ingS. 
a is the cylindrical body of the roll, 
b is the neck of the roll and c the fillet or 
curved shoulder where the neck joins the body 
of the roll. 
d is the Wabbler of the roll. 
The bottom bearing of the neck constructed 
according to my inventionis markede, f. The 
bearing is of the ordinary kind excepting at 
the inner end or that end which when the 
bearing is in use is presented to the fillet or 
curved shoulder c of the roll. At the said in 
ner or fillet end of the bearing make the re 
cessf which extends nearly from side to side 
of the said bearing. The shape and position 
of the said recess f will be understood by an 
examination of Fig. I and the separate bear 
ing Fig. 3. The said recessfis curved at bot 
tom, but the said recess may be square or of 
- 
85 
9o 
95 
IOO 
2 
531,885 
other angular figure instead of curved as rep 
resented in the drawings. 
It will be seen by an examination of Fig.1. 
that when the bearing is in use, the recessf 
at its inner end, is situated under the fillet or 
curved shoulder c of the neck of the roll and 
that the said fillet or shoulder does not come 
in contact with the bearing, the whole bear 
ing surface of the neck of the roll being sup 
ported on the horizontal seat part e of the 
bearing, instead of the whole of the neck rest 
ing on the bearing as usual. By the absence 
at the inner end of the bearing of the usual 
curved or convex projecting part for bearing 
against and supporting the fillet or curved 
shoulder of the neck of the roll, overheating 
at the fillet part of the neck of the roll is 
wholly prevented and the tendency of the said 
neck to break or split at the fillet is thereby 
prevented or reduced to a minimum and as 
less friction is produced at the neck, a less 
quantity of lubricant is required as before 
stated. 
The side and top bearings at the neck of 
the roll (not represented) are constructed and 
applied in the manner described and repre 
IO 
25 
sented with respect to a bottom bearing, that 
is, each side and top bearing has at its inner 
or fillet end a curved or angular recess which 
is situated under the fillet part of the neck of 3o 
the roll. 
The bottom, top and side bearings of the 
rolls are supported in the housings in the or 
dinary way and are kept in position by the 
ordinary appliances which I do not think it 
necessary either to describe or to represent. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my invention and the 
manner in which the same is to be performed, 
1 declare that I claim as my invention 
A new or improved bearing for the necks 
of rolls provided at its inner or fillet end with 
a curved or annular recess extending nearly 
from side to side of the said inner end so that 
the fillet or curved shoulder of the neck of the 45 
roll does not come in contact at that part with 
the bearing for the purposes and substantially 
as set forth and shown. 
35 
ARTHUR WESTLEY. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD SKERRETT, 
ARTHUR JOHN:POWELL, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US531985.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
No. 531,985. 
E. WAGNER, 
FAUCET, 
Patented Jan. 1, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A767. 2 
c 2s 
 
EsNE s s 2S  
13 SAFENSXS 3 
  
 
 
 
 
 
fAVENTOR 
Zzzeraza W277zer. 
AITORNEYS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD WAGNER, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE HALF TO 
HUGO KOEHLER, OF SAME PLACE. 
FAU CET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 531,985, dated January 1, 1895. 
Application filed May 25, 1891, Serial No. 394,082, (No model.) 
To all Zwho it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARD WAGNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have 
invented new and useful Improvements in 
Faucets, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to that class of fau 
cets which are combined with a hollow plug, 
externally Screw threaded so as to screw into 
a cask or barrel, its outer end provided with 
a nipple externally threaded to engage with 
the internal screw threads of a coupling ring 
arranged to be held on, and to rotate around 
the inner end of the faucet shell, such plug 
being provided with a valve and stem, auto 
matically closed by a spring, and the faucet 
shell With a longitudinal screw-threaded rod 
to operate against said valve stem for the 
purpose of opening the valve. 
My invention consists in forming a valve 
Seat within such class of faucet at the junc 
tion of its shell with its discharge spout, and 
forming upon such longitudinal screw thread 
ed rod, a valve to operate in such valve seat, 
and other details of construction which will 
be hereinafter pointed out. 
This invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of the faucet and 
plug combined. Fig. 2 is a view of a longi 
Fig. 3 is a plan 
tudinal Section of the same. 
view of the inner end of the plug and its 
valve. Fig. 4 is a side view of the plug valve, 
its arms and stem, and Fig. 5 is a view in 
croSS Section of the faucet on the line ac-ac of 
Fig. 2, also showing a cross section of the lon 
gitudinal screw threaded rod with its guide 
arms attached. 
Similal figures of reference refer to similar 
parts throughout the several views. 
10 is a hollow plug externally screw thread 
ed so as to Screw directly into the cask or bar 
rel, provided at its outer end with an exter 
nally screw threaded nipple 11 and between 
such nipple and the threaded portion of the 
plug, is a nut 12 by means of which a wrench 
may be used for screwing the plug into the 
cask or barrel. The inner end of the plug is 
provided with longitudinal openings 13, in 
form rectangular, for the passage of the liq 
uid, and which openings also act as guides 
for the valve arms. Within the interior of 
the plug and back of, and adjacent to said 
openings, is formed a beveled valve seat 14. 
The beveled valve 15 is seated in the valve 
seat of said plug, and such valve is provided 
with arms 16 extending horizontally from its 
rim, such arms being arranged to fit neatly 
in the openingsl3, and such valve is also pro 
vided with a stem 17 which extends through 
a guide i8 in the interior of such piug. 
The faucet consists of a globular shell 9 
from which extends a discharge spout 20, the 
end of which is externally threaded as at 21 
for the purpose of connecting with a hose. 
At the opposite side of the globular shell is 
a cylindrical extension of such shell as at 22 
the end of which is provided with a flange 23. 
The cylindrical extension of the shell is pro 
vided with an internally screw threaded coup 
ling ring 24 adapted to engage with the screw 
threaded nipple 11 of the plug, such coupling 
ring being formed with an annular flange 25 
that fits against the flange 23. 
The outer end of the valve stem of the plug 
is screw threaded to receive a nut 26 and upon 
such stem between said nut and guide 18 is a 
spiral spring 27 for closing said valve. 
The discharge spout is provided with a 
horizontal tubular extension 2S the axis of 
which is in line with that of the shell and 
with that of the valve stem 17, when the shell 
is secured to or coupled to the plug. In the 
outer end of this tubular extension is formed 
a stuffing box 29 and the remaining portion 
of such extension is internally screw threaded 
to engage with and constitute a bearing for 
the screw rod 30 which is provided with a 
handle by means of which it can be screwed 
in or out. The inner end of the rod 30, when 
the shell is coupled to the plug, abuts against 
the outer end of the valve stem 17, and by 
turning or screwing said rod 30 inward the 
plug valve 15 is opened. 
The junction of the globular shell with the 
discharge spout forms a valve seating as at 
31. I form upon the rod 30 an oval shaped 
valve arranged to operate upon such seat, 
which valve is shown at 32, and by means of 
turning such rod in opposite directions such 
valve may be opened or closed. I also pro 
O 
2 C. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
85 
9 o 
95 
co 
2 
581,985 
So 
55 
7o 
75 
- 
vide the rod with guide arms 33 the outer 
ends of the arms sliding or moving against 
the interior of the cylindrical extension of the 
shell, retaining such rod 30 in line with the 
Valve stem 17. 
It will be seen that the valve 32 acts simul 
taneously with the plug valve 15, either in 
opening or closing, when the shell is coupled 
to the plug and such valves operated by said 
rod 30. When hose is attached to the faucet, 
and it is desired to couple the shell to another 
plug in another cask, the valve 32 may be 
closed, so that the liquid in the hose may be 
retained after such shell has been uncoupled 
from the former plug. 
I am aware that it is not new to construct 
a hollow plug, externally screw threaded, its 
outer end arranged to be coupled to the in 
ner end of the faucet shell by means of a 
coupling ring, to provide the inner end of the 
plug with a valve having a stem extending in 
the interior of the plug, such valve arranged 
to be automatically closed by a spring, and 
to provide a longitudinal screw threaded rod, 
extending through the faucet shell, its inner 
end abutting the outer end of the plug valve 
stem, the outer end of such rod passing through 
a tubular extension at the outer end of the 
faucet shell internally screw threaded to en 
gage with and constitute a bearing for such 
Such construction is described in 
Screw rod. 
Letters Patent No. 243,340, issued to Albert 
Zoller, June 21, 1881. Faucets of this character 
are extensively used in breweries where they 
are coupled with hose, the opposite end of the 
latter being provided with a stop cock, the 
device being used for conveying beer from a 
vessel located in an upper story to another 
vessel in a lower story, frequent changes of 
vessels being made, requiring the uncoupling 
of the faucet from the stationary plug in the 
vessel, and a serious objection to said pat 
ented faucet is that when so uncoupled, great 
loss issustained, by reason of the beer or other 
fluid in the hose escaping through said faucet. 
I am also aware that in a gage cock, it 
has been proposed to construct a shell per 
manently placed in the boiler, provided with 
a valve and stem, and to attach to this, an 
other shell provided with a discharge spout, 
and at the inner end of such shell to provide 
a valve seating adapted to receive a valve at 
tached to the end of a threaded rod, extend 
ing through such shell, which latter valve 
and rod are adapted to operate against the 
valve and stem in the shell secured in the 
boiler. Such construction is described in 
Letters Patent to Casey, dated April 29, 
1884, No. 297,569. If this device could be 
adopted for use as a faucet, the location of 
the valve at the end of the removable shellis 
objectionable, because in use, such valve is 
liable to be struck by other objects and bent, 
... displaced, or broken off from the screw rod, 
and in operating it by causing it to come in 
contact with said stem in the other shell, it is 
liable to be bent or displaced so as not to 
make a sufficiently tight joint when in its 
Seating. I have obviated these objections by 
Constructing a removable shell or discharge 
spout provided with a valve within the in 
terior of the shell, which is secured to the 
Screw rod, and which does not come in con 
tact with the valve stem in the plug or shell 
Secured in the vessel, thus preventing wast 
age of beer or other liquid when in the hose, 
and the faucet uncoupled, and also render 
ing it impossible to injure or displace such 
valve in said faucet. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
In a faucet, the combination of the hollow 
plug formed at its inner end with a number of 
openings 13, a valve located within said plug 
and adapted to be held to its seat by means 
of a spring, arms 16 formed on said valve, 
Said arms being adapted to fit and be guided 
in the openings 13, a shell provided with dis 
charge spout connected with said plug, a 
valve located within said shell, and a stem 
controlling said valve and the valve in the 
hollow plug, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
- 
EDWARD WAGNER. 
Witnesses: 
F. CLAUSEN, 
HENRY KoEHLER, Jr. 
O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532085.txt	 
(No Model.) 
A. H. MURRAY & C. S. WELCH. 
DIE OR MOLD FOR MAKING CLAY SHINGLES, 
No. 532,085. 
Patented Jan, 8, 1895. 
WITNESSES 
4.2%-4- 
AT TORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. H. MURRAY AND CALVIN S. WELCH, OF HUNTINGTON, WEST 
VIRGINIA.- 
DE OR MOD FOR MAKING CLAY SHINGL ES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 532,085, dated January 8, 1 895. 
Application filed June 22, 1894, Serial No. 515,376, (No model.) 
- 
- 
55 
This invention is an improved die or mold 
Our invention consists also in certain de- 7 o 
5 county of Cabell and State of West Virginia, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
which can be attached to any machine and 
Be it known that we, ALEXANDER. H. MUR. produce a thin even shingle blank, the edges 
RAY and CALVIN S. WELCH, citizens of the and sides of which shall be perfect and free 
United States, residing at Huntington, in the from splits. 
With these objects in view our invention 
have invented certain new and useful Im. consists broadly of a die or mold having a cir: 
provements in Dies or Molds for Making Clay cular opening at the rear, the desired shaped 
Shingles; and we do declare the following to opening at the front, flat retarding surfaces 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the arranged adjacent to the front of said die or 6o 
Io invention, such as will enable others skilled mold and the central curved portions which 
in the art to which it appertains to make and serve to guide the clay evenly and steadily to 
use the same. 
the sides and retarding portions of the mold. 
Our invention consists also in making a tWO 
for making clay shingles and other articles of part die or mold each portion having a semi- 65 
I5 similar character, and it also purports to cover circular opening at the rear, a flat retarding 
the article produced thereby. 
surface at the front, a central convex portion 
and the concaved surfaces adjacent to Said 
The die is adapted to be attached to any 
of the well known clay working machines in 
central portion. 
which the clay is worked into a plastic state 
2O and then forced from a compression chamber 
tails of construction and novelties of Combi 
by a piston or worm through a die or mold to 
nation all of which will be more fully described 
hereinafter and designated in the appended 
give the strip or blank of clay the desired 
shape, said strip or blank being subsequently 
claims. 
Cut into the desired lengths. Bricks and tiles 
25 have been made in this manner because in ing a part of this specification, and in which 
these articles there was considerable depth to similar reference characters designate the 
the strip or blank, but even in these cases it same or similar parts, Figurel is a perspec 
has been found that the sides or edges were tive view of the die or mold showing the clay 
split owing to the central portion of the clay blank, ribbon or strip issuing therefrom Fig. 8o 
3o strip or bar moving faster than the side. This 2 is a rear view of the two part mold. Fig. 3 
is due to the friction between the sides of the is a perspective view of the lower half. Figs. 
mold or die and the mass of clay. This de- 4 and 5 show slight modifications. 
fect has now been partially cured by lubricat- 
In carrying out our invention we prefer 
ing the molds. Attempts have also been ably construct our mold or die in two pieces 85 
35 made to form a blank or strip for clay shingles, A A which may be connected to each other 
but inasmuch as this strip must be verythin in any desired manner and also to the com 
it has heretofore been found to be impossible pression chamber B of a clay working ma 
to form a perfect blank with perfect sides and chine in any preferred way. At its rear end 
edges suitable for shingles. 
4o In brick machines the column of clay is so the opening in the compression chamber will 
thick that by lubrication a comparatively be made circular also. 
even brick can be produced, but where the 
At the forward end the die or mold has an 
clay is forced through a long narrow slot, still opening D which is shaped according to the 
greater difficulties are to be met with as in- article desired, but is usually an oblong as 95 
clay being retarded the entire side portions 
The die or mold though preferably made 
are retarded and the clay strip has frequently in two pieces can be made integral HOW 
divided in the center and curled the same as eyer, in the treatment of this specification, 
a Wooden shaving. 
5o Now the object of this invention is to rem- similar in construction and a description of 
edy these defects and provide a die or mold one part, therefore, will suffice for both, 
45 stead, of the skin or outer portion only of the shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
In the drawings hereunto annexed, form- 75 
the die or mold has a circular opening C, and 9o 
. 
we shall consider the mold made of tWO parts loo 
 
SO 
Each section of the die or mold is formed 
of a solid block and at its rear end is cut out, 
at a, in the form of a semi-circle, so that when 
the two parts are placed together they pro 
duce the circular opening C. At the forward 
end is formed a recess or depression a so 
shaped that when the two parts are in posi 
tion they will produce the oblong opening D. 
Adjacent to the depression a' and level there 
with is the central retarding surface E essen 
tially segment shaped, broadest at the center 
and tapering from said center toward each 
corner of the depression a'. The surface be 
tween the retarding surface and end of the 
block is convexed between the corners of the 
surface and the center of the rear end, as 
shown at F, or that portion confined between 
the retarding portion and the dotted lines X 
X while the surface on each side of the lines 
X X is concaved as clearly shown at G. G. 
This construction produces a central convex 
portion and guiding tapering grooves or con 
caved surfaces upon each side to feed the 
clay evenly to the edges while the central 
portion is being retarded. 
In Figs. 4 and 5 we have shown a slight 
modification wholly within the scope of our 
invention, from which it will be seen that in 
stead of placing the retarding surface with 
in the die or mold, it may be placed at the 
forward end, as shown at G, and the central 
raised portion can be dispensed with, if de 
sired, and the interior of the mold be made 
conical in shape, or the retarding surfaces 
may be convex on both sides, as shown in 
Fig. 5. 
The parts of the mold are provided with 
suitable flanges a by means of which they 
are connected together and to the compres 
sion chamber. 
In operation the parts are assembled and 
connected with the machine as shown in Fig. 
1. The clay in a plastic state is then fed to 
the die or mold by means of a piston or the 
spiral or worm conveyer as desired. As it 
enters the mold or die the central convex por 
tion divides it and spreads it into the chan 
nels G. G so that the sides are supplied plenti 
fully and evenly. When the retarding sur 
face is reached here equalization again takes 
place as it will be noticed that this surface 
is widest at the center and decreases toward 
both ends. By this construction the blank 
strip or ribbon issuing from the mold will be 
found to be perfect and free from flaws and 
splits at the edges as heretofore described. It 
will thus be seen that we are enabled to pro 
duce a thin blank or strip of clay suitable for 
making shingles, and such as has never been 
produced before. 
Where the lip or retarding 
surface is arranged upon the outer side it is 
also widest at the center. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. An improved die or mold having a cen 
tral retarding surface or surfaces broadest at 
the center and decreasing toward each end, 
said retarding surface being flat and level 
with the mouth or opening of the die substan 
tially as shown and described. 
2. An improved die or mold having a cen 
tral retarding surface or surfaces at its for 
ward end, said surface being flat and level 
with the mouth of the die, broadest at the cen 
ter and decreasing toward each side, substan 
tially as described. 
3. An improved die or mold having a flat 
central retarding surface or surfaces level 
with the mouth of the die, broadest at the cen 
ter and decreasing toward each end, and a 
central convex portion or portions extending 
from the retarding surface to the rear end of 
the die, substantially as described. 
4. An improved die or mold made in two 
parts each part having a flat central retarding 
surface, broadest at the center, a central con 
vex portion and concaved surfaces upon each 
side of the convex portion, substantially as 
shown and described. 
5. An improved die or mold made in two 
parts each part having a flat central retard 
ing surface, broadest at its center, a central 
convex portion broadest at the forward end, 
and the concaved surfaces on each side of the 
central convex portion, said concaved sur 
faces being broadest at the rear ends and 
forming a semi circular opening or recess at 
the rear end of the die, substantially as shown 
and described. 
6. An improved die or mold composed of two 
parts, and having a circular opening at the 
rear and an opening of the desired shape at 
the front, retarding surfaces E, level with the 
face of the opening, convex portions F and 
concave portions G G all substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. An improved die or mold having a re 
tarding lip or surface upon the front of said 
die or mold, said die being made in two parts 
having a conical shaped chamber within the 
same, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof weaffix our signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ALEXANDER. H. MURRAY. 
CALVIN S. WELCH. 
Witnesses: 
AZEL, MCCURDY, Jr., 
F. F. MCCULLOUGH. 
75 
9 O 
95 
O. 
Io. 
II ( 
2 
532,085 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532186.txt	(No Model.) 
G. L., ROLFE & J. H. JOHNSON. 
BRCK, MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 532,186. 
Patented Jan. 8, 1895. 
 
y 
 
- NS 
& 
N 
S. 
- a SS 11 is 
s is 
- 
Q 
Yli- eva 
N 
r- 
if 
S 
s 
N 
N - 
fi 
(No Model.) 
G. L., ROLIFE & J. H. JOHNSON. 
BRICK MACHINE. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 532,186. 
Patented Jan. 8, 1895, 
 
 
7 
22 
 
(No Model.) 
. 
G. L. R.0LFE & J. H., JOHNSON. 
BRICK MACHINE, 
No. 532,186, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
$. 
is 
, 
Patented Jan, 8, 1895. 
Codazz & esses. 
G 2 D 
27, 28%2 
72& 
S. 
zzeezers 
7, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE L. ROLFE AND JAMES H. JOHNSON, OF ST. JOSEPH, MICHIGAN. 
BRICK-MACHINE. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 532,186, dated January 8, 1895. 
Application filed May 25, 1894, Serial No. 512,469, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whon, it may concero: 
Be it known that we, GEORGEL.ROLFE and 
JAMES H. JOHNSON, citizens of the United 
States, residing at St. Joseph, in the county 
of Berrien and State of Michigan, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Sand-Brick Machines; and we do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
machines for making sand brick; and it has 
for its several objects to provide sand brick 
machines embodying such a construction that 
a plurality of them may be placed side by side 
and driven through the medium of a common 
drive shaft; to provide means whereby the 
pressed bricks may be quickly and conven 
iently removed from the mold boxes without 
danger of breakage; to so connect the dies to the 
follower that they may be readily removed to . 
be cleansed or for any other purpose; to so 
construct and arrange the parts that breaks 
age will not result from a failure to get the 
cap upon the mold boxes before the material 
therein is subjected to pressure; to provide 
means for automatically cleaning the face of 
the cap as it is moved toward and from its 
position above the mold boxes; to provide 
means for raising the cap so as to enable it to 
freely move on and off the mold boxes; and 
to provide means whereby the feed may be 
quickly cut off without loss of material. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will be fully understood from the follow 
ing description and claims when taken in 
connection with the annexed drawings, in 
Figure 1, is a vertical, longitudinal section 
of our improved machine. Fig. 2, is a trans 
verse section taken in the plane indicated by 
the line ac, ac, of Fig. 1. Fig. 3, is a detail rear 
elevation of the slidable feed box and the 
mechanism for adjusting the same. Fig. 4, is 
a detail, horizontal section taken in the plane 
indicated by the line 2, 2, of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5, is 
a detail, vertical section taken in the plane 
indicated by the line y, y, of Fig. 2. Fig. 6, 
is a detail perspective view illustrating the 
mechanism through the medium of which the 
cap is raised to enable it to take on and off 
which - 
. 
... 
" 
the mold boxes. Fig. 7, is a perspective view 
of the follower with one of the dies partly re 
moved, and Fig. 8, is a perspective view of the 
plunger removed from the toggle levers. 
In the said drawings similar letters desig 
nate corresponding parts throughout the sev 
eral views, referring to which 
A, indicates the main frame of the machine 
which preferably comprises the side castings 
B, which are of a greater height at their for 
ward than at their rear ends, and B', indi 
cates the drive shaft which is journaled on 
the side castings adjacent to the rear ends 6 
thereof and may therefore be extended in 
either direction so as to permit of its being 
employed to drive a plurality of machines. 
This drive shaft B", is provided with a band 
wheel a, to receive a belt from a suitable mo 
tor, and it is also provided with a suitable 
pinion as b, which meshes with a large gear 
wheel C, on the crank shaft D. The said . 
crank shaft D, which is arranged transversely 
of the frame in advance of the shaft B, has 
its crank c, connected to one end of the pit 
man E, which has its opposite end connected 
to the toggle levers F, at their point of con 
nection, whereby it will be seen that when the 
crankshaft is rotated, the toggle levers will 
be alternately flexed and straightened so as 
to reciprocate the plunger G, which is con 
nected to the upper lever or levers and is ar 
ranged in the guides d, upon the inner sides 
of the side castings B. (See Fig. 1.) 
We prefer for the sake of strength and du 
rability to construct the toggle levers F, in 
the manner shown, and connect them by the 
bolte, which is designed to travel to and fro 
in the guides.f, but we do not desire to be un 
derstood as confining ourselves to this or any 
other specific construction as toggle levers of 
various kinds may be employed. 
. As better shown in Fig. 2, of the drawings, 
the lower toggle lever F, is fixedly connected 
to a transverse shaft H, and this transverse 
shaft is arranged in slots as g, in the side cast 
ings and is designed to rest, when the togglele 
vers are straightenedor drawn into alignment, 
upon the bearing blocks h. Better shown in 
Fig.1. The slotsg, admit of the shaft H, mov 
ing vertically, and it will therefore beseen that 
the mold box cap, which is fixedly connected 
by bars as J, with the shaft H, may be raised 
9o 
co 
2 d 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
532, 186 
OC) 
I o5 
as presently described so as to enable it to 
swing on and off the mold boxes K, which are 
preferably formed in a casing TL, arranged 
upon the upper edges of the side castings B, 
as illustrated. 
M, indicates the pressing follower of the 
machine which is arranged in the guides d, 
beneath the mold boxes and is normally held 
in the position illustrated in Fig. 1, by suit 
able stops (not illustrated). This follower M, 
is provided upon its upper side with dovetail 
projections i, which are designed to engage 
corresponding grooves in the dies N, so as to 
permit of a ready removal of the said dies for 
cleaning or for other purposes; and the said 
follower is also provided with a bifurcation 
l, to enable it to pass up on either side of the 
wall m, and with an opening n, the purpose. 
of which will be presently understood. 
In order to enable the operator to raise the 
follower M, with the exercise of but little ef 
fort, so as to discharge the pressed bricks or 
to raise the dies to a point above the mold 
boxes, where they can be readily detached 
from the follower, I provide the lever P, which 
is fulcrumed on a hanger depending from the 
main frame and has its weight end resting in 
the opening in, of the follower, and the lever 
Q, which is fulcrumed at one end on the frame 
and is connected with the power end of the 
lever P, by a linkasp. By reason of this con 
struction it will be perceived that the opera 
tion is enabled to exert a great leverage and 
consequently raise the follower with but little 
effort, which is a desideratum. 
R, indicates the fixed feed spout of the ma 
chine which may lead from an upper floor and 
be provided with a valve or cut off as q, and 
S, indicates the movable spout section which 
is flexibly connected to the fixed section in 
any approved manner. This movable spout 
section S, is connected in turn to the slidable 
feed box T, which is mounted on a shelf, at 
one side of the mold boxes as better illus 
trated in Fig. 1, and is provided in its bottom 
with an opening as S, through which the ma 
terial may pass into the mold boxes. The 
said feed box T, is provided with a wheel i, 
designed to travel in a groove in the shelf r, 
to ease the movement of the box, and said box 
is designed to be adjusted through the me 
dium of the lever it, the rock shaft v, the 
crank arm U, and the pitman ac, which latter 
is connected to a hanger 21, which depends 
from the box through a slot in the shelf r, as 
shown. By reason of this mechanism it will 
be perceived that when the lever it, is raised, 
the box will be moved to a position over the 
mold boxes so as to permit a full charge of 
material to pass into said boxes, and when 
the lever is moved downwardly in the direc 
tion indicated (see Fig. 1), the box will be 
drawn away from the mold boxes and the 
feed will be cut off without the loss of any of 
the material which is an important advantage 
as is obvious. It will also be perceived that 
when the feed box is moved from over the 
95 
mold boxes, all material above the mold boxes 
will be carried with the feed box and only 
the exact amount to form the bricks will be 
left in the molds. 
U, indicates the weighted yoke lever 
through the medium of which the shaft II, is 
raised so as to enable the cap I, to clear the 
mold boxes in moving on and off the same. 
This yoke lever which has its weight ends 75 
resting beneath the shaft H, is fulcrumed at . 
a point adjacent to said shaft as indicated by 
a', and is provided at an intermediate point 
of its length with a pedal piece V, which ex 
tends up through an opening in a platform 
as W, so as to enable an attendant to raise 
the shaft H, and consequently the cap I, at 
the proper time. The yoke lever U, also en 
ables the attendant to raise the cap I, in case 
the plunger commences its upward movement 
before the mold boxes are fully charged, so 
as to permit the loose material to be pushed 
up without being pressed. This results in a 
saving of material as we have found from ex 
perience that where a part of a brick is 
pressed it is impossible to connect the loose 
material to the same so as to form a whole 
brick of standard size. 
X, indicates the strip of rubber or similar 
material which is designed and adapted to 
scrape the face of the cap I, as it moves 
toward and from the mold boxes. This strip 
X, is connected to the forward side of the cas 
ing of the mold-boxes as better shown in Fig. 
1, and its fastening may if desired be rein 
forced by a metal strip. 
In the practical operation of our invention, 
when the machine is set in motion and the 
mold boxes charged with material, the shaft 
D, through the medium of the pitman E, will 
draw the toggle levers into alignment so as to 
raise the plunger G, and will rock the shaft 
H, through the medium of the lower toggle 
lever so as to raise the cap I, to its position 
above the mold boxes. The plunger as it con 
tinues to rise will engage and raise the foll 
lower M, and through the medium of the same 
will subject the material in the mold boxes to 
pressure, after which the plunger will move 
downwardly when the pressed bricks may be 
conveniently removed by raising the follower 
M, by hand through the medium of the mech 
anism described. 
By reason of the gearing embodied in our 
improved machine it may be run with but 
little power; and it will therefore be perceived 
that a number of the machines may be driven 
through the medium of a single common shaft 
as B', by an engine of small horse power. 
It will also be perceived that our improved 
machine is very simple and strong and that 
it embodies no parts tihat are liable to get out 
of Order. 
While we have in some respects specifically 
described the construction and relative ar 
rangement of the several parts of our im 
proved machine in order to impart a full and 
e xact understanding of the same, we do not 
II 5 
2. W 
5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
6 o 
532,186 
3 
- 
35 
desire to be understood as confining ourselves a lower toggle lever connected to the upper 3o 
to such specific construction and arrangement 
as such changes or modifications may be made 
in practice as fairly fall within the scope of 
our invention. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim is 
1. In a sand brick machine, the combina 
tion with a mold or mold box; of a slidable 
feed box mounted on a shelf or platform and 
having an opening in its bottom adapted to 
register with the mold or mold box, a mov 
able feed spout leading from a source of Sup 
ply and connected to the feed box, the rock 
shaft v, having a crank arm as U, a pitman 
connecting said crank arm with the slidable 
box, and a lever fixed on the rock shaft, all 
substantially as specified. 
2. In a sand brick machine, the combina 
tion with a mold or mold box; of a slidable 
feed box having an opening in its bottom 
adapted to register with the mold or mold box, 
and a movable feed spout leading from a 
source of supply and connected to the feed 
box, substantially as specified. 
3. In a brick machine the combination with 
a frame, and a mold or mold box; of a rock 
shaft as H, a vertically movable plunger, an 
upper toggle lever connected to said plunger, 
lever and fixed on the shaft H, a cap as I, fix 
edly connected with the shaft H, and a suit 
able means for actuating the toggle levers, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a brick machine, the combination with 
a frame and a mold or mold box; of a verti 
cally-movable rock-shaft H, a cap as I, fixedly 
connected with the rock shaft, means for 
rocking the rock shaft so as to move the cap 
toward and from the mold or mold box, and 
means for raising the rock shaft, substan- . 
tially as and for the purpose, set forth. 
5. In a brick machine, the combination with 
a frame, a mold or moldbox, a vertically mov 
able rock shaft H, a cap as I, fixedly con 
nected with the rock shaft and means for 
rocking the rock shaft so as to move the cap 
toward and from the mold or mold box; of a 
lever U, having its weight end resting under 
the rock shaft, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affixour signatures 
in presence of two witnesses. 
GEO. L. ROLFE. 
JAMES H. JOHNSON. 
45 
So 
Witnesses: 
LEVI S. MANN, 
JNO. B. MELSHEIMER. 
m 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532286.txt	(No Model. 
. 
H. D. PER, KY. 
RECEIVING TROUGH AND CUTTER FOR, CEREAL REDUCING MACHINES. 
No. 532,286, 
Patented Jan, 8, 1895, 
Fig. 1. 
x 
KS 22222 
f 
X 
W 
 
 
7: 
  
F. 
E. 
M 
if 
Y 
2, 
 
C 
E3 
 
g N N 
  
A 
F' 
 
WITNESSES 
%, 71. (undwan/ 
IWWEWTOR 
173 vey 47 (2-4, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY D. PERKY, OF DENVER, COLORADO, ASSIGNOR TO THE CEREAL 
IACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
RECEIVING-TROUGH AND CUTTER FOR CEREAL-REDUCING MACH NES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,286, dated January 8, 1895. 
Application filed March 31, 1894, 
Serial No. 505,947, (No model.) 
trough or receiver is then placed upon the 
base cutter F, and pressed down thereon so 
that the knives G enter the slots of the 55 
trough or receiver and divide the product 
therein into sections of the desired size for 
baking, this division however being to some 
extent incomplete, especially in the case of 
the product from wheat. To complete the 6o 
division a top-cutter H may be employed, the 
knives Kof which pass downward, guided by 
the side wall grooves of the trough A, and 
passing the cutting edges of the knives of the 
base cutter, exercise a shearing movement in 65 
connection therewith completely dividing the 
sections of the food product. 
The base cutter F, is a gang cutter having 
a knife for each slot of the trough A. . Its 
knives are braced, preferably by beveled base 7 o 
strips I, which, when the trough A is pressed 
down upon the base cutter, enter the wide 
lower portions or enlargementsM of the slots 
D well up toward the surface of the trough 
bottom. 
N represents a guide on the base cutter to 
facilitate the registering of the slots of the 
trough with the knives G. This guide may 
be arranged to also facilitate the entrance of 
the knives of the top gang cutter H into the 8o 
side grooves of the trough. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A transversely slotted open-end receiv- 85 
ing trough having grooved side Walls, substan 
tially as specified. 
2. The combination with a transversely 
slotted trough, of a gang base cutter, having 
a registration guide, substantially as speci- go 
fied. 
3. The combination with a transversely 
slotted trough of a gang base cutter having 
upwardly extending knives, a registration 
guide, and a gang top cutter having down- 95 
Wardly extending knives, adapted to exert a 
shearing action in connection with the knives . 
of the base cutter, Substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof Iaffix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY D. PERKY. 
75 
Witnesses: 
J. M. STANLEY, 
HARRY C. JAMES, 
Io 
30 
To all whom, it molly concern 
Beit known that I, HENRY D. PERKY, a citi 
zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Denver, in the county of Arapahoe and State 
of Colorado, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Receiving-Troughs 
and Cutters for Cereal-Reducing Machines; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
Figure of the drawings is a longitudinal - 
vertical section of the trough and the upper 
and lower cutters, the parts being separated 
from each other. Fig. 2 is a sectional view 
on the line ac-ac Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
of the trough. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
troughs or receivers for the reciprocating de 
livery slides of machines for preparing cereals 
for food, and in connection there with means 
for dividing the product discharged upon the 
receivers into biscuit-form parts, adapted to 
be readily removed from said receivers for 
baking. 
In the accompanying drawings, the trough 
or receiver Aisrepresented in elongated form, 
having a bottom B, and side walls C, the lat 
ter having their inside faces a little inclined, 
usually, upward and outward to facilitate the 
removal of the contents of the receiver or 
trough. The ends of the trough are open. 
The bottom B, is divided into portions, 
which are of the size of the biscuits desired, 
by narrow transverse slots D, which may ex 
tend in the form of grooves E vertically in 
the inside face portions of the side walls C. 
The slots D are usually widened below, to 
prevent clogging, and to guide the base cut 
ter knives. 
The trough or receiver is designed to be 
used in connection with the reciprocating 
slide of a food preparing machine to receive 
the shredded or thread-like product in layers. 
When the accumulation of layers is of suffi 
cient thickness, the receiver is remgved from 
the machine, and its place supplied by an 
other of like character. The charged or full 
- 
45 
- So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532386.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 532,386, 
S. D. MURRAY. 
COTTON PRESS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 8, 1895. 
 
ata 
4 EECKOC 
//ZZeeges: 
4272%22z. 
4.4204 
C.E. Zozow, 
a2%e2ZZzyze/ 
 
 
(No Model.) 
. 
No. 532,386. 
S. D. MURRAY. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
COTTON PRESS, 
. . 
. 
. 
Patented Jan. 8, 1895. 
. 
. 
. 
29 
7zzeesses. - - Zzzzzzoz. 
1 
. 
4%eze. Z vzzzzzzy 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 532,386. 
 
  
 
S. D. MURRAY. 
COTTON PRESS, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Jan. 8, 1895, 
| 5 
z 
 
@ 
Zezezeor 
s 2%ze Z way 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN D. MURRAY, OF DALLAS, ASSIGNOR TO THE REMBERT ROLLER 
COMPRESS COMPANY, OF GALVESTON, TEXAS. 
COTTON-PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 532,386, dated January 8, 1895. 
Application filed June 16, 1894, Serial No. 514,788, (No model.) 
25. 
means for preventing the cotton adhering or 
Be-it known that I, STEPHEN D. MURRAY, sticking to the compressing rolls which reduce 
the cotton to a compact bat or sheet prepara 
tory to disposing or laying the latter in folds 55 
or laps; to provide a new and improved chute 
or conductor for guiding the bat or sheet in 
transit from the compressing rolls to the fold 
laying mechanism; to provide a new and im 
proved continuously operating apparatus 
wherein the bat or sheet can be laid in folds 
or laps, held against expansion while being 
folded, and deposited in one press-box or 
chamber, while a previously lapped or folded 
portion in another press-box or chamber is 
being subjected to final pressure to expel the 
air; and to provide novel and efficient press 
ing and folding mechanism. 
The general characteristic features of my 
invention concisely stated reside in conduct 
ing the cotton from a condenser to a com 
pressing mechanism by which the cotton is 
powerfully compressed into a comparatively 
compact bat or sheet and delivered in folds 
or laps into a folding chamber in which the 
folds or laps are held against expansion by a 
pressure folder and a platen which automati 
cally recedes in the same vertical plane when 
the pressure reaches or exceeds a pre-deter 
mined limit, the construction being such that 
when the requisite number of folds or laps 
have accumulated, they can be quickly de 
posited into a movable press-box or chamber 
for transferring the bale or package to an 
other point for the final pressure which ex 
pels the air, and for the application of the 
ties while the bale or package is held under 
pressure in the press-box or chamber. 
Myinvention involves the combinations or 
arrangements of parts and the mode of op 
eration hereinafter described and claimed, 
reference being made to the accompanying 
drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a broken side elevation of a cot 
ton compressing and baling apparatus em 
bodying my invention. Fig.2 is a detail end 
elevation of the same; and Fig. 3 is a detail 
vertical sectional-view, showing the com 
pressing rolls, t 
fold-laying mechanism, the... 
folding chamber, and the platenin its elevated CO 
position withiri the folding chamber. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Dallas, in the county of Dallas and State of 
Texas, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Apparatus for Compressing 
and Baling Cotton, of which the following is 
a specification. 
This invention relates to that type of ap 
To paratus adapted for continuously compress 
ing and baling cotton in juxtaposition to the 
ginning machinery, by conducting cotton 
from the condenser to compressing rolls 
operating to progressively compress the fluffy 
mass into a compact bat or sheet which is 
laid in folds or laps and subsequently moved 
or transferred to a suitable baling press and 
subjected to final pressure to expel the air 
from between the folds or laps and enable the 
bale or package to be tied while under press 
ure, particularly as described in Letters Pat 
ent No. 441,022, issued November 18, 1890, to 
the Rembert Roller Compress Company. 
The chief object of the present invention 
is to simplify apparatus of the general char 
acter alluded to, and render the same more 
effective, rapid, and desirable in practicable 
operation, for producing greater density and 
weight in proportion to the size of the bale or 
package. 
The invention also has for its objects to dis 
tribute the cotton equally and uniformly in 
folds or laps in a folding chamber and then 
carry the same into a press box or chamber 
adapted to move or travel at the propertime 
for transferring the folded or lapped cotton 
bat or sheet to another point for the applica 
tion of the final pressure to expel the air; to 
effectually prevent the folds or laps of the 
bat or sheet from expanding in the folding 
chamber during the folding operation, where 
by a high degree of density and great weight 
are obtained in a bale of comparatively small 
dimensions or size; to provide more efficient, 
practicable and useful means whereby it is 
possible to rapidly transfer the folded or 
lapped portions of the bat or sheet to a baling 
press for final pressure and the application 
of the ties, without interfering with or inter 
rupting the continuity of action of the gin 
ning machinery; to provide new and improved 
In order to enable those skilled in the art 
95 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
7o 
75 
go 
35 
45 
 
W 
2. 
532,386 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
tractible. 
to make and use my invention, I will now cally one upon the other in any suitable man 
describe the same in detail, referring to the ner, whereby the chute is extensible and re 
drawings, wherein 
The chute walls are suspended independent 
The numeral 1 indicates a main frame or 
supporting frame-work of any construction 
of each other and at their lower ends are con 
suitable for the purpose in hand, but which, 
nected with the side bars of the reciprocating 
in the present example, is composed of up 
carriage or frame through the medium of slip 
right and horizontal timbers connected to 
bolts 21, which serve as hinge-joints during 
gether in any proper manner. 
the reciprocating motion of the carriage or 
The ginning machinery may be of any 
frame, and the oscillating movements of the 
known or suitable type, and therefore I do 
chute. The slip-bolts are removable and re 
not deem it necessary to illustrate the same, 
placeable, so that it is possible to readily gain 
but simply indicate by the numeral 2 a con 
access to the parts by removing the bolts and 
denser, which may be constructed in any 
swinging back the walls of the chute. 
In the 
proper manner and constitute a part of or be 
reciprocating movements of the carriage or 
arranged in suitable relation to the gin or gins. 
frame the extensible and retractible construc 
The compressing rolls 3, mounted in boxes 
tion of the chute is an important element. 
4, are designed to run in superficial contact, 
The belts 10 and 12 which pass around the 
and the fluffy cotton delivered thereto from 
two sets or gangs of pressure rollers 8 and 9 
the condenser through the medium of a suit 
are secured to tightener-bars 22, adapted to 
able conduit 5 is powerfully compressed into 
move vertically in suitable recesses 23 in the 
a compact bat or sheet, which is delivered by 
main frame, and so arranged that the edges 
a chute 6 to a pressure folder, or pressure and 
of these recesses bear against portions of the 
fold-laying mechanism, comprising a recip 
belts, in such manner that by moving the bars 
rocating carriage or frame 7, carrying two 
downward, the belts are tightened for the 
Separated sets or gangs of pressure rollers 8 
purpose of presenting a smooth and even Sur 
and 9, and endless or other appropriate belts 
face at all times to the cotton, and for com 
10 and 12 made of canvas or other material 
pelling the outermost rollers to rotate as the 
and passing respectively around the two sets 
carriage or frame is reciprocated. The tight 
or gangs of rollers, as best shown in Fig. 3. 
ener-bars are adjusted by means of screws 
The compressing action of the rolls 3 may be 
23, secured thereto and having thumb-nuts 
regulated by means of adjusting screws, as 
24 adapted to bear against portions of the 
at 13, Fig. 1, and these rolls may be rotated 
main frame, in Such manner that by screw 
by a suitable pulley or wheel, mounted on the 
ing up the nuts, the tightener-bars will be de 
shaft of one of the rolls; but as any suitable 
pressed and tighten the endless belts. The 
belting or gearing can be employed for ro 
tightener-bars are very desirable features, in 
tating the rolls further description and illus 
connection with the rollers journaled on the 
tration are deemed unnecessary. 
reciprocating carriage or frame, in that they 
In ordinary roller compresses, as the cotton 
render it possible to maintain proper tension 
commences to pass down between the rolls, 
on the belts and force the pressure-rollers to 
it is very liable to adhere or stick to one or 
rotate during the operation of the carriage 
the other compressing roll and wrap around 
or frame. The tightener-bars are stationary 
the Same, which is an objectionable feature 
as regards the reciprocating movements of 
that I entirely avoid by providing a wiper 
the carriage or frame, and therefore it is pos 
roller 14 in operative connection with each 
sible to adjust the tightener-bars while the 
compressing-roll, as shown in Fig. 1. The 
carriage is in motion, which is very advan 
wiper-rollers may be of any suitable construc 
tageous. 
tion, but, as here shown, they are provided 
In operative connection with the pressure 
with free flaps 15 of any suitable material 
folder is arranged a folding chamber 25, Figs. 
which operate to wipe the compressing rollers, 
1 and 3, which may be of any suitable con 
prevent the bat or sheet adhering or sticking 
struction so long as it is adapted to receive 
to either roll, and start the bat or sheet on its 
the compacted bat or sheet, and also receive 
proper course into the chute 6 to the pressure 
a platen 26 or 26, as hereinafter explained. 
folder or pressure and fold-laying mechanism. 
The folding chamber is a walled in space 
The wiper-rollers are rotated in any suit 
partially or wholly closed at all sides to prop 
able manner in a direction the reverse of the 
erly confine or retain the folded bat or sheet 
direction of rotation of the compressing rolls, 
of cotton. 
and these rollers are mounted on shafts 16, 
The folding - chamber 25 is arranged di 
from which are suspended hangers 17, carry 
rectly beneath the pressure-folder, and in a 
ing CrOSS-bars 18, Sustaining the chute 6. 
plane below the folding-chamber is arranged 
This chute is extensible and retractible, and 
a series of connected press-boxes or cham 
is suitably connected at its lower end with 
bers, one of which is adapted to be brought 
the side bars of the reciprocating carriage or 
directly beneath the folding chamber, so that 
frame 7, so that the chute is oscillated by the 
the platen 26 can be elevated therethrough, 
carriage or frame. The chute is made of two 
and caused to enter the folding chamber and 
separate walls, each composed of two plates 
lie in juxtaposition to the reciprocating car 
or sections 19 and 20, adapted to slide verti 
riage or frame. As the carriage or frame 7 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
Io5 
TO 
II5 
I 25 
$532,386 
O 
- 2 o 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
of the pressure folder reci procates, the bat or 
sheet passing down between the two adjacent 
rollers of the sets of rollers 8 and 9, is con 
'tinuously folded or lapped back and forth on 
the bagging previously laid on the platen, 
and the endless belts 10 and 12 are held by 
the bars 22, in such manner that the belts 
force the rollers to rotate and flatten and press 
down the folds or laps. . 
In the present example I have illustrated 
a duplex or double press-box composed of two 
boxes or chambers 27 and 28, suitably con 
nected with upper and lower timbers 29 and 
30 which are journaled centrally between 
their extremities on a perpendicular shaft 31, 
so that the press-boxes or chambers can ro 
tate in a horizontal plane to place either press 
box under a folding chamber with its platen 
26, or 26, directly over the head 32 of a plun 
ger 33, movable vertically in a hydraulic cyl 
inder 34. The hydraulic cylinder is supported 
in any manner suitable for the conditions re 
quired, and it communicates with an upright 
receiver or reservoir 35, composed of a cylin 
der or stand-pipe of proper dimensions, all in 
a manner similar to a hydrostatic press. 
The receiver or reservoir is designed to con 
tain a body or column of water, or other liq 
uid, and into the upper end of this receiver 
or reservoir extends a steam or other fluid 
pressure-pipe 36 having a three-Way cock or 
valve 37, and an exhaust or waste-pipe 38, in 
such manner that in one position of the cock 
or valve, the steam or other fluid can enter 
the receiver or reservoir 35 above the body 
of water or liquid therein, while in another 
position of the cock or valve the steam or 
other fluid will pass off through the exhaust 
or waste-pipe 38. 
The communication between the cylinder 
34 and the receiver or reservoir 35 is estab 
lished through the medium of a pipe connec 
tion 39 having a cock 40, and from opposite 
sides of the cock 40 depend pipes 41 and 42, 
connected at their lower and upper portions 
by approximately horizontal pipes 43 and 44. 
The pipe 43 is provided with a suitable press 
ure regulator 45, and the pipe 44 is supplied 
with a suitable check-valve 46. . The cock 40 
is designed to be operated through the me 
dium of a vertical stem or rod 47 extending 
to a point in proximity to the three-way cock 
or valve 37, so that both can be conveniently 
manipulated by the attendant as occasion de 
mands. 
The carriage or frame 7 is designed to be 
reciprocated by any suitable mechanism, but 
preferably through the medium of cranks 47 
and rods 48 connected at one end with the 
cranks and at the other end with the sides of 
the carriage or frame. The cranks 47 are 
mounted on a shaft 49 carrying a suitable 
wheel or pulley 50 adapted to be rotated in 
any suitable manner for rotating the cranks 
and imparting motion to the carriage or frame. 
In the practical operation of the improved 
apparatus, the compacted bator sheet passes 
 
For the purpose of elevating the platen the 75 
8 
through the extensible and retractible chute 
to a point between the two sets or gangs of 
rollers 8 and 9, and, owing to the reciprocat 
ing motion of the carriage or frame, and the 
oscillatory motion of the chute, the bat or 
sheet of cotton is laid in folds or laps upon 
one of the platens 26 or 26, which has pre 
viously been elevated to the required position. 
three-way cock or valve 37 is operated to ad 
mit steam or other fluid under pressure, into 
the receiver or reservoir 35, which, as before 
stated, stands full or approximately full of 
water, or liquid, and the steam acting upon. 
the column of water or liquid presses the lat 
terdownward and drives it through the check 
valve 46 into the hydraulic cylinder 34. The 
hydraulic pressure in cylinder 34 drives the 
plunger 33 and head 32 upwardly and ele 
vates the platen, as for example platen 26, 
into the folding-chamber 25, in juxtaposition 
to the reciprocating carriage or frame, and 
after the platen has been raised to the posi 
tion mentioned, the three-Way cock or valve 
is manipulated to cut off the steam from the 
receiver or reservoir, and the steam contained 
in the latter is permitted to escape through 
the exhaust side of the cock or valve, while 
the check-valve 46 holds the water in the hy 
draulic cylinder and prevents the plunger 33 
and head 32 from descending. 
The bat or sheet of cotton, laid by the press 
ure folder in folds or laps upon the platen, as 
hereinbefore explained, causes the pressure 
folder to be forced upward against the roller 
bearings or wheels 51 which are journaled on 
the main frame directly above the side bars 
of the carriage or frame 7. These roller-bear 
ings or wheels hold the carriage or frame from 
further upward motion, and as the folds of 
cotton accumulate, the pressure on the platen 
increases until such pressure reaches the 
point at which the pressure-regulator'45 has 
been set to open and permit some of the water 
to escape from the hydraulic cylinder into the 
receiver. 
It is proper to here state that the pressure 
regulator may be of any ordinary valved con 
struction which will automatically open at a 
pre-determined pressure, for which reason I 
do not deem it necessary to further describe 
or illustrate the same in detail. In the prac 
tical operation of the pressure-regulator, if it 
requires, for example, one hundred pounds 
pressure to the square inch to open the press 
ure-regulator, the plunger and head of the 
hydrostatic press will not recede until the 
pressure on the folds of cotton reaches or ex 
ceeds one hundred pounds, whereupon the 
plunger and its head, and the platen, will 
automatically recede, whereby the pressure 
on the folds remains uniform and from the 
beginning to the end of the folding operation 
above referred to the platen will be automati. 
cally, gradually, and uniformly lowered as the 
cotton is folded under the pressure 
exerted 
by the pressure-folder, 
. 
. 
90 
ICO 
II5 
I2 or 
I 25 
532,388 
Io 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
When a sufficient quantity of cotton to form 
a bale of the desired weight-say five hun 
dred pounds or more-is folded on the platen 
in the folding-chamber, the cock 40 is opened 
by the attendant, and the Water can then rap 
idly escape from the hydraulic cylinder 34 
through pipe 39, into the receiver, or reser 
voir 35, whereby the plunger 33 is caused to 
drop or quickly descend until the platen rests 
upon and is supported by the hooks, shoul 
ders, or supports 52, Fig. 1, in which position 
the folded cotton lies wholly within the press 
box or chamber, as for example the press-box 
or chamber 28. The press-boxes are now ro 
tated horizontally for the purpose of placing 
the loaded box 28 over the screw or other bal 
ing press 53, and the empty press-box or 
chamber 27 beneath the folding chamber 25. 
The press 53 is then operated to exert the 
final pressure to expel the air from between 
the folds, after which the ties are applied, so 
that a beautiful bale is obtained having a 
density equal to, or greater than that required 
in a compressed bale of cotton, such density 
being, at least, twenty-two and one-half (223) 
pounds to each cubic foot in the bale. The 
flooring around the press-boxes or chambers 
rotates there with, and the small quantity of 
cotton dropping from the pressure-folder, or 
fold-laying mechanism, while the press-boxes 
or chambers are being rotated, is picked up 
and laid upon the receiving platen as the lat 
ter rises, as hereinbefore explained. 
When the press-boxes or chambers have 
been rotated, as above explained, to place the 
loaded box or chamber 28 over the screw 
press 53, and the empty box or chamber 27 
beneath the folding chamber 25, the three 
way cock or valve 37 is operated by the at 
tendant to permit steam to enter the receiver 
or reservoir 35, when the operations herein 
before described are repeated. 
The operation of lowering the receiving 
platen with the folded cotton thereupon and 
rotating the press-boxes or chambers can be 
accomplished very easily and quickly, and 
does not interfere with the continuous opera 
tion of the fold or lap-laying mechanism, or 
in fact with any other part of the apparatus. 
When the press-boxes or chambers are 
turned or rotated, as above mentioned, and 
while the cotton is being folded on the receiv 
ing platen, the screw or other baling-press is 
operated to raise it against the loaded platen, 
and thus expel the air from between the folds 
or laps of cotton which have been previously 
compressed, for the purpose of reducing the 
folds or laps to the required density, and to 
enable the ties to be applied while the bale 
is held under pressure. 
The screw-press illustrated is a simple type 
of press suitable for the purpose in hand, but 
it is obvious that in order to impart this final 
pressure to the folded cotton, any ordinary 
or desired construction of press can be em 
ployed without affecting the spirit of my in 
vention. 
In the operation of the apparatus, as above 
explained, the folded bat or sheet of cotton is 
transferred to the screw or other press, while 
it is contained in one of the movable press 
boxes or chambers, and this is important, in 
that it materially facilitates the transfer of 
the folded cotton from beneath the pressure 
folder or fold-laying mechanism to the point 
where it is to receive the final pressure and 
be tied. 
In my invention the folding chamber and 
the platen are disconnected from the press 
ure-folder, and do not reciprocate with the 
latter, while the platen always moves in the 
same vertical plane until the folded cotton is 
transferred. For this reason I am enabled to 
employ a hydrostatic press in the manner and 
for the purposes hereinbefore explained. 
The compressing rolls act upon the cotton 
fibers progressively as they are delivered 
thereto from the condenser, the operation be 
ing such that while individual portions of the 
bat or sheet are powerfully compressed the 
fibers are not injured and the commercial 
value of the article is not diminished. 
I have only described my invention for 
compressing and baling cotton, but obviously 
the improved apparatus may be used for com 
pressing and baling other materials. 
It has heretofore been proposed to use in 
baling apparatus a reciprocating carriage 
having a series of pressure-rollers journaled 
therein and adapted to take the cotton from 
the ginning machinery and deposit it in folds 
on a bed adapted to recede and between which 
and the carriage the folds or layers are 
pressed, the ties being applied prior to remov 
ing the pressed bale from between the car 
riage and bed. The prior apparatus is not 
practicable for effective and rapid work, and 
is objectionable for many reasons, chiefly, 
however, because the ginning machinery 
must cease action, or the supply of cotton to 
the carriage be discontinued or interrupted 
while the ties are being applied, and because 
the density of the bale is dependent entirely 
on the pressure exerted by the carriage, no 
provision being made for greater pressure 
than is placed upon the cotton by said car 
riage during the fold-laying operation. 
My invention is clearly distinguished from 
prior apparatus as above stated, in that as a 
folding chamber is arranged above a movable 
press-box, it is unnecessary to discontinue or 
interrupt the action of the ginning machin 
ery, the continuity of action of the fold or 
laying mechanism need not be interfered 
with, a strong and uniform pressure in the 
folding chamber is preserved from start to 
finish to hold the folds from expanding, the 
fluffy bat or mass from the ginning machinery 
is first subjected to a great preliminary press 
ure between suitable rolls, so that every part 
of the cotton is compressed uniformly and in 
detail, and the bat or sheet is placed in the 
proper and best condition to facilitate the 
subsequent manipulation by the pressure 
75 
95 
Iod 
Ios 
d 
II5 
I 25 
582,886 
26 
25 
Io 
folder and secure high density and great 
weight in proportion to the dimensions or size 
of the bale. The operation of lowering the 
receiving platen with the folded cotton there 
5 on and moving the press-boxes can all be ac 
complished quickly, easily, and conveniently 
without interfering in any manner with the 
operation of the pressure-folder, or other 
parts of the apparatus. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The combination of a reciprocating press 
ure-folder, and a folding-chamber below the 
latter, with a series of rotatable press-boxes 
or chambers, movable successively into opera 
tive connection with the pressure-folder for 
receiving and transferring the bale from the 
pressure-folder to another position for the 
application of final pressure to expel the air, 
Substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a pressure -folder, 
and a folding-chamber arranged below the 
latter, with a series of press-boxes or cham 
bers, movable successively into operative con 
nection with the folding-chamber for receiv 
ing and transferring the bale to another po. 
sition for the application of final pressure to 
expel the air, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a reciprocating press 
ure-folder and a folding-chamber below the 
latter, with a series of press-boxes or cham 
bers, one of which is movable from beneath. 
the pressure-folder while another moves into 
operative connection there with, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination of a pressure - folder, 
and a folding-chamber arranged beneath the 
same, with a series of rotatable press-boxes 
or chambers, one of which moves from be 
4o neath the pressure-folder to a pressing mech 
anism while another moves into position be 
neath the pressure-folder, substantially as 
described. 
5. The combination of a reciprocating press 
ure-folder and a folding-chamber below the 
latter, with a two-box rotary press for trans 
ferring the bale from the pressure-folder to a 
- position where other mechanism may exert 
final pressure to expel the air, substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
with a vertically movable platen, a hydro 
static press for raising the platen in juxtapo. 
sition to the pressure-folder, and means for 
55 automatically releasing the fluid pressure to 
gradually lower the plunger of the press when 
the pressure on the platen reaches a pre-de 
termined limit, substantially as described. 
7. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
6o with a platen supported in operative connec 
tion with the pressure-folder by a hydrostatic 
column, and means for partially releasing 
the fluid pressure and permitting the platen 
to recede from the pressure-folder when the 
65 pressure on the cotton reaches a certain point, 
substantially as described. 
8. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
So 
45 
- 
... 
35 
 
75 
9o 
95 
with a platen movable vertically in juxtapo 
sition to the pressure-folder, a hydrostatic 
press for supporting the platen, and an auto 
matic pressure-regulator for partially releas 
ing the fluid pressure and permitting the 
plunger of the press to automatically recede 
during the operation of the pressure-folder, 
substantially as described. 
9. The combination of a pressure - folder, 
with a series of press-boxes or chambers, one 
of which is movable from beneath the press 
ure-folder while another moves into operative 
connection there with, a platen movable verti 
cally through each press-box or chamber in 
juxtaposition to the pressure-folder when its 
press-box is brought into operative connec 
tion with the latter, and mechanism operat 
ing to permit the platen to automatically re 
cede and to hold the cotton under a uniform 
predetermined pressure from the upper to the 
lower portion of the press-box during the op 
eration of the pressure folder, substantially 
as described. 
10. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
with a series of press-boxes or chambers, one 
of which moves from beneath the pressure 
folder while another moves into operative 
connection there with, a platen movable ver 
tically through each press-box or chamber in 
juxtaposition to the pressure-folder when its 
press-box is brought into operative connec 
tion with the latter, a hydrostatic press for 
supporting the platen, and means connected 
therewith for causing the press-plunger to 
automatically recede during the action of the 
pressure-folder, substantially as described. 
11. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
with a series of press-boxes or chambers, one 
of which is movable from beneath the press 
ure-folder while another moves into opera 
tive connection there with, a platen movable 
vertically through each press-box or chamber 
in juxtaposition to the pressure-folder when 
its press box is brought into operative con 
nection with the latter, a hydrostatic press 
for supporting the platen, and a pressure reg 
ulator for partially releasing the fluid press 
ure. and permitting the press-plunger to au 
tomatically recede during the operation of 
the pressure-folder, substantially as described. 
12. The combination of a pressure - folder, 
with a platen, steam and hydraulic apparatus 
for supporting the platen, and an automati 
cally operated valve for partially releasing the 
fluid-pressure whereby the platen automati 
cally recedes during the folding and pressing 
operation, substantially as described. 
13. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
with a platen, a steam and hydraulic apparatus 
for supporting the platen, and an automatic 
pressure-regulator, whereby the platen auto 
matically recedes during the operation of the 
pressure-folder, substantially as described. 
14. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
with rotatable press-boxes or chambers, a 
platen movable through each press-box or 
chamber, steam and hydraulic apparatus for 
too 
Io5 
IIo 
I I5 
I25 
I 30 
6 
532,386 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
raising and supporting the platen, and all 
automatically operated valve for partially re 
leasing the fluid-pressure whereby the platen 
automatically recedes during the operation 
of the pressure-folder, substantially as de 
scribed. 
15. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
With a two-box-revolving press, a platen mov 
able through each press-box in juxtaposition 
to the pressure-folder, steam and hydraulic 
apparatus for supporting the platen in opera 
tive connection with the pressure-folder when 
its press-box is brought into operative con 
nection with the latter, and an automatically 
operated valve for partially releasing the fluid 
pressure, whereby the platen automatically 
recedes during the operation of the pressure 
folder, substantially as described. 
16. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
With a folding chamber arranged below the 
same a press-box beneath the folding cham 
ber, a platen movable vertically through the 
folding-chamber into operative connection 
with the pressure-folder, a hydrostatic press 
for raising and supporting the platen, and 
means whereby the platen automatically re 
cedes during the operation of the pressure 
folder, substantially as described. 
17. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
with a platen movable into operative connec 
tion there with to receive the folds therefrom, 
a plunger and fluid cylinder to raise and sup 
port the platen, and means for partially re 
leasing the fluid pressure in the cylinder and 
permitting the plunger and platen to recede 
during the operation of the pressure-folder, 
Substantially as described. 
18. The combination of a pressure-folder, 
With a folding-chamber arranged beneath the 
pressure-folder, and a horizontally movable 
preSS-box or chamber which receives the 
folded material from the folding- chamber 
and transfers the same to another point for 
final pressure and the application of the bale 
ties, substantially as described. 
19. The combination of a suitable baling 
press, With a pressure-folder, a folding-cham 
ber arranged beneath the pressure-folder, and 
a preSS-box or chamber movable into and out 
of operative connection with the folding 
chamber for transferring the folded material 
from said folding- chamber to the baling 
press for the application of final pressure, 
Substantially as described. 
20. The combination of baling-press devices, 
a hydrostatic pressin relation thereto, a series 
of movable press-boxes, one of which is mov 
able over the hydrostatic press while another 
is movable into connection with the baling 
press devices, a pressure-folder, platens which 
are each raised and supported by the hydro 
Static press in turn, and a pressure-regulator 
for permitting the hydrostatic press-plunger 
and platen supported thereby to automati 
cally recede during the operation of the press 
ure-folder when the pressure on the platen 
reaches a pre-determined limit, substantially 
as described. 
21. The combination of baling-press devices, 
a hydrostatic press, a series of rotary press 
boxes, one of which is movable over the hydro 
static press while another is movable into con 
nection with the baling-press devices, a press 
ure-folder above the hydrostatic press, platens 
which are each raised and supported by the 
hydrostatic press in turn, and a pressure-regu 
lator for permitting the hydrostatic plunger 
and platen supported thereby to automati 
cally recede during the operation of the press 
ure-folder when the pressure on the platen 
reaches a pre-determined limit substantially . . . 
as described. 
.22. The combination with compressing de 
vices for compacting cotton into a bator sheet, 
of a pressure-folder, and press-boxes movable 
successively into operative connection with . 
the pressure-folder for receiving the folded 
bat or sheet, and transferring it to another 
point for final pressure, substantially as de 
scribed. 
23. The combination with compressing-rolls 
for compacting cotton into a bat or sheet, and 
a folding- chamber below the compressing 
rolls, of a pressure-folder between the com 
pressing rolls and the folding-chamber, and 
press-boxes arranged below the folding-cham 
ber and movable successively into operative 
connection with the folding-chamber for re 
ceiving the folded bat or sheet and trans 
ferring it to another point for final pressure, 
substantially as described. 
24. The combination with the two compress 
ing-rolls, of Wiper-rollers mounted respect 
ively in juxtaposition to the said compress 
ing-rolls for preventing the bat or sheet ad 
hering thereto and between which the bat or 
sheet travels to folding devices, substantially 
as described. 
25. The combination with the compressing 
rolls for compacting cotton into a bator sheet, 
and folding mechanism, of wiper-rollers 
mounted in juxtaposition to the compressing 
rolls for preventing the bat or sheet adhering 
to the compressing-rolls and between which 
the bat or sheet travels to the folding mech 
anism, substantially as described. 
26. The combination with the compressing 
rolls for compacting cotton into a bator sheet, 
and a reciprocating folding mechanism, of a 
chute interposed between the compressing 
rolls and the folding mechanism, and wiper 
rollers arranged at the upper end of the chute 
in juxtaposition to the compressing-rolls for 
preventing the bat or sheet adhering to the 
compressing-rolls and between which the bat 
or sheet travels into the chute, substantially 
as described. 
27. The combination with the compressing 
rolls for compacting cotton into a bat or sheet, 
and reciprocating folding mechanism, of an 
extensible and retractible chute interposed 
between the compressing-rolls and folding 
95 
I do 
To 5 
IO 
II5 
I 30 
532,386 
O 
25 
mechanism and pivotally connected with the 
latter, and wiper-rollers mounted at the up 
per end of the chute in juxtaposition to the 
compressing-rolls for preventing the bat or 
sheet adhering thereto and directing the same 
into the chute, substantially as described. 
28. The combination with compressing de 
vices for compacting cotton into a bat or sheet, 
and a reciprocating folding mechanism adapt 
ed to move horizontally, of an extensible and 
retractible chute interposed between the com 
pressing-rolls and folding mechanism and 
pivotally connected with the latter, substan 
tially as described. 
29. The combination with compressing de 
vices for compacting cotton into a bat or sheet, 
and reciprocating folding mechanism, of an 
extensible and retractible chute interposed 
between the compressing devices and folding 
mechanism and connected with the latter, 
substantially as described. 
30. The combination with compressing de 
vices for compacting cotton into a bator sheet, 
of reciprocating folding mechanism, and an 
extensible and retractible chute pivotally con 
nected with and oscillated by the folding 
mechanism, substantially as described. 
31. The combination with compressing de 
vices for compacting cotton into a bator sheet, 
and reciprocating folding mechanism, of a 
pivotally mounted chute composed of oppo 
sitely arranged extensible and retractible 
walls and interposed between the compressing 
devices and the folding mechanism, and con 
; 
- 
scribed. 
nections between the chute and the folding 35 
mechanism whereby the chute is oscillated 
thereby, substantially as described. 
32. The combination with compressing de 
vices for compacting cotton into a bat or sheet, 
a reciprocating carriage provided with sets or 4o 
gangs of rollers, and belts extending around 
the rollers, of tightener-bars connected re 
spectively with the belts and held against 
horizontal movement by engagement with the 
frame of the machine, and devices for verti- 45 
cally adjusting the tightener-bars to tighten 
the belts on the rollers, substantially as de 
33. The combination with compressing de 
vices for compacting cotton into a bat or sheet, 5o 
a folding chamber, and a reciprocating car 
riage arranged between the compressing de 
vices and the folding-chamber, and provided 
with sets.of rollers and belts extending around 
the rollers, of adjustable tightener-bars con- 55 
nected with the belts and held against hori 
zontal movement by engagement with the 
frame of the machine, and screw-adjusting 
devices for vertically adjusting the tightener 
bars to tighten the belts on the rollers, sub- 6o 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and affixed my seal in presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
STEPHEN ID. MURRAY. L. s. 
R. T. BARLOW, 
B. L. BARTLETT. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532487.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 532,487. 
9% / 
2. 
3. % S 
W. S. CHARN WEBER, 
WINDOW WENTILATOR, 
Patented Jan, 15, 1895, 
 
7 
-22 2. 
 
G. 
 
 
E2, J. 
AH 9%as 
2 
% W 
, 
% 
A/ 
p 
-22.1 
-SD - 
92 of 
9. 
7. Of 
(7.or 53. 
4 24%. 
 
 
5 
5 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM SCHARN WEBER, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO GEORGE BAKEWELL, OF QUINCY, ILLINOIS. 
WINDOW-VENTILATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 532,487, dated January 15, 1895. 
Application filed September 10, 1894, Serial No. 522,640. (No model.) 
25 
to wherein 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that, WILLIAMSCHARNWEBER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of St. Louis, State of Missouri, have in 
5 vented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Window-Ventilators, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
Figure 1 is a sectional view through a win 
dow, showing the application of my improved 
ventilator thereto. Fig. 2 is a detailed view 
of the main frame of my ventilator. Fig. 3 
I5 is a detail view of the draft-regulating slide. 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of the draft-plate. Fig. 
5 is a detail view of a frame which secures the 
Weather-strips and wire-mesh to the main 
frame. Fig. 6 is a detail view of the manner 
2 o of securing the weather-strip to the ventila 
tor. Fig. 7 is a detail view of the deflector 
plate bracket and a piece of the deflector. 
plate; and Fig. 8 is a detail of one of the 
springs. 
This invention relates to a new and useful 
improvement in window-ventilators, of that 
class in which the draft-openings are formed 
in a suitable frame, which frame extends the 
width of the window and is held in place by 
Suitable means are provided on the frame 
to regulate the draft-openings, and in front 
of said openings is arranged a deflector-plate, 
which directs the incoming air upwardly, so 
35 that, should the ventilator be used when the 
Weather is cold, the incoming cold air will 
create a circulation in the room. 
In the drawings, Aindicates the main frame, 
which is formed with a longitudinal opening 
4o or slot, which slot is surrounded by a project 
ing flange a on the inner face of the frame. 
Introduced in the slot, is the draft-regulator 
B, which bears against the flanges a, and 
which frame B is of a length sufficient to per 
45 mit movement in the slot in the main-frame, 
so that its draft-opening b can be caused to 
register with similar openings c in a frame C, 
or said frame B may be moved longitudinally 
of the slot so as to entirely close the openings 
So in the frame C. A suitable handle B' is pref 
3o the lower sash impinging thereupon. 
55 
erably placed upon the frame B, by which 
the same may be moved longitudinally. The 
frame C, before referred to, is longer than the 
frame B, and has no longitudinal movement 
in the slot of the frame A. 
Springs D are mounted on the frame A in 
some suitable manner, and bear upon the 
frame C so as to hold it against the frame B, 
and press frame B against the flanges a sur 
rounding the slot of the main frame. The 
object of Ethese springs is to yieldingly hold 
the frame C against the frame B, so that if 
expansion should take place, due to dampness 
or other causes, neither of the frames would 
bind, and frame B could still be operated 
easily. Another function of springs D, by 
pressing against frame C, is to compensate 
for any irregularity between the two frames, 
which might be due to the warping of either 
of them. . 
The back of the frame A is faced with a 
prevents foreign parti 
wire-gauze E, which 
cles, such as soot, &c., from passing through 
the openings b and c, and which forms a 
chamber behind the frame C from which the 75 
air is drawn through the opening. 
- The main frame A is formed with a groove 
in its side edges, into which is received one 
side of a piece of weather-stripping F, which 
weather-stripping is turned back upon the 
main frame A, and secured in place by a 
frame G, which frame G also holds the wire 
gauze Ein position. On the ends of the main 
frame A, I preferably attach a piece of 
weather-strip H, which forms a tight joint 85 
with the window-jambs. 
On the front of the main frame, I secure 
two brackets I, which are formed with a lat 
erally-projecting flange i, which flanges at the 
upper, outer corner form an eye, into which go 
is received the rolled edge i of the deflector 
plate J, said deflector-plate being held in posi- - 
tion by the brackets. 
In raising the lower sash, to locate my im 
proved ventilator therebeneath, a space is 
formed between the top of the lower sash and 
the bottom of the upper sash, and, in order 
to prevent cold air from entering through this 
space, which might be objectionable in some 
instances, I arrange on the bottom of the top Ioo 
95 
 
532,487 
sash a flexible strip K, which, when the lower 
sash is raised, will closely contact with the 
glass thereof, and make a tight joint. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a window-ventilator, the combination 
with a main frame, slotted longitudinally, of 
a yielding ventilator-plate located within the 
slot of the main frame, and a longitudinally 
movable ventilator plate, also located within 
the slot of the main frame, which longitudi 
nally movable ventilator-plate regulates the 
passage of air through the yielding ventilator 
plate, substantially as described. 
2. In a window-ventilator, the combination 
with a main frame, slotted longitudinally, of 
a flange along the inner edges of the slot, a 
movable ventilator-plate which rests against 
said flanges, a stationary ventilator plate, 
which is behind the movable ventilator plate 
and holds the same in position, and springs 
on the main frame for yieldingly retaining 
the stationary ventilator-plate in position, 
substantially as described. 
O 
15 
25 
3. In a window-ventilator, the combination 
with a main frame slotted longitudinally and 
formed with a flange along the inner edges 
of the slot, a longitudinally movable venti 
lator-plate, which rests against said flange, a 
yielding ventilator-plate mounted behind the 
longitudinally movable ventilator-plate, a 
wire gauze which covers the back of the slot, 
and weather-strips on the main frames, Sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a window-ventilator, the combination 
with a main frame having a longitudinal slot 
formed therein, ventilator-plates which are 
yieldingly held in position in said slot, and 
a deflector-plate which is mounted upon the 
main frame in front of the slot, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature, in presence of two witnesses, this 
31st day of August, 1894. 
35 
WILLIAM SCHARN WEBER. 
Witnesses: 
F. R. CORNWALL, 
HUGH K. WAGNER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532588.txt	(No Model.) 
F. W. SCHINDLER-JENNY. 
CONTACT DEVICE FOR ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES 
No. 532,588. 
Patented Jan. 15, 1895. 
 
'' 
22%- 44/22 (42.2". 
a/e7zzo7. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRIEDRICH WILHELMSCHINDLER-JENNY, OF KENNELBACH, AUSTRIA 
HUN GARY. 
CONTACT DEVICE FOR ELECTRICAL AP PANCES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,588, dated January 15, 1895. 
Application filed February 19, 1894, Serial No. 500,658, (No model.) Patented in Austria-Hungary November 2, 1893, No. 66,076 
and No. 9,799 in France November 10, 1893, No, 233,957; in Belgium November 11, 1893, No. 107,185, and in Italy Novem 
ber 30, 1893, No, 35,280/173, 
to c. whom it in City Concern: 
Be it known that I, FRIEDRICH WILHELM 
SCHINDLER-JENNY, a citizen of Switzerland, 
and residing at the city of Kennelbach, near 
Bregenz, Austria-Hungary, have invented cel 
tain new and useful Improvements in Contact 
Devices for Electrical Appliances, (for which 
I have obtained Letters Patent in Austria 
Hungary, No. 66,076 and No. 9,799, dated No 
vember 2, 1893; in France, No. 233,957, dated 
November 10, 1893; in Belgium, No. 107,135, 
dated November 11, 1893, and in Italy, No. 
35,280/173, dated November 30, 1893;) and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention has for its object to produce a 
simple and efficient contact device which will 
enable me to feed the current to the conduc 
tor or conductors so as to obtain one, two, three, 
or more, heat units according to the number 
of wires or conductors brought into the cir 
cuit. 
The invention consists in what I will desig 
nate as a contact block provided with a lead 
ing-in wire having forks or branches to con 
stitute two or more contact points, and a lead 
ing - out wire constituting another contact 
point, the contact-block being removable or 
capable of sliding so that if one fork or branch 
of the leading-in wire be brought in contact 
with a single conductor wire and the leading 
out wire be connected with the same conduc 
tor wire there will be one heat unit produced, 
and if two forks or branches of the leading-in 
wire be connected with two conductors or 
wires and both of said wires be connected 
with the leading-out wire there will be tWO 
heat units produced, and so on according to 
the number of conductor Wires, or the num 
ber of forks or branches of the leading-in wire 
that may be employed. 
An illustration of this invention is given in 
the accompanying drawings, in which-e- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
Figures 1, 2 and 3 represent Sectional side 50 
The letterg designates what may be a body 65 
views of the device, each figure showing the 
contact-block in a different position. 
In the drawings the letter A designates the 
contact-block of any suitable insulating ma 
terial and provided with the leading-in Wire 55 
designated by the -- mark and represented as 
formed within the block with two branches or 
forks leading to suitable contact points desig 
nated by the letters l and c, and also with the 
leading-out wire designated by the - mark 6o 
and represented as connected with the contact 
point a inside the contact-block which con 
tact point C is illustrated as between the con 
tact points b and c. 
to be heated and formed of any suitable heat 
transmitting material which is preferably of 
a refractory character, for instance, a suit 
able fire clay. In this body there is made or 
embedded the conductor wires designated by 7o 
the letters ac and y which at their ends may 
terminate in or contact with any Suitable 
form of contact points, for instance, such as 
designated by the letterse, d and f. 
sition illustrated in Fig. I with the contact 
point c of the leading-in wire in contact with 
the contact point d of the conductor wire a 
in the body g and the contact point C of the 
leading-out wire in contact with the contact 8o 
point e of the same conductor wire ac, the cir 
cuit will be established so that the electric 
current will pass through the conductor wire 
ac alone, thereby giving or producing a single 
heat unit. 
If the contact block Abe placed in the po 
sition illustrated in Fig. 2 SO as to bring the 
side contact point b of the leading-in wire in 
contact with the contact point d of the con 
ductor wires y and ly', and the contact pointf 9o 
of those wires in contact with the middle con 
tact point C of the leading-out Wire, the cir 
cuit will be established so that the current 
will pass from the leading-in wire to the con 
ductor wires if f' and out through the contact 95 
point f to the leading-out wire, thus giving 
or producing two heat units. 
If the contact-block. A be placed in the po 
If the contact-block A be placed in the po- 75 
85 
532,588 
sition illustrated in Fig. 3 So that the side 
contact points to and c will be in contact with 
the contact points e and f of the conductor 
wires ac and y if', and the contact point d of 
said wires in contact with the middle contact 
point a, the circuit will be established so that 
the current will be directed through the two 
branches or forks of the leading-in wire to the 
two side contact points band c and from thence 
through the contact pointse and f to the wires 
ac and , f' and thence out through the con 
tact point d and the middle contact point C. 
of the contact-block to the leading-out wire, 
thus giving or forming three heat units. 
It is obvious that if one of the conductor 
wires of 
y' should be omitted, only a single 
heat unit Would be obtained if the contact 
block should be arranged in the position 
shown in either Figs. 1 or 2 and that in such 
event the heat would be applied to one side or 
the other of the body g according as the con 
tact point would be arranged as shown in 
Figs. or 2, but that under the same condi 
tions two heat units Would be obtained if the 
contact points be arranged as shown in Fig. 
3, as in the latter case the current would pass 
through both wires and out through the mid 
dle contact point and leading-out Wire. It is 
also obvious that the number of conductor 
wires may be increased and thus the number 
of heat units obtained correspondingly in 
creased. 
The contact device is applicable to electric 
appliances or apparatuses of different kinds, 
but it is particularly well adapted to electric 
heating or cooking apparatuses where it may 
be desired to increase or lessen the heat, the 
heat being increased in proportion to the num 
ber of heat units employed, and proportion 
ately decreased according to the number of 
heat units taken out of action. 
It will be observed that the removable con 
tact block or member has three contact points, 
of which the central one is connected with one 
pole, while the two lateral or side contact points 
have the other pole in common. It will be 
further observed that the body g is provided 
with three contact points, insulated from one 
55 
another, the central contact point forming & 
common pole to all of the conductors or circuits 5o 
in the body while at the other pole the circuits 
Will distribute themselves on the lateral or side 
contacts as one set of contacts may be ad 
justed over the other set. It is this arrange 
ment that enables me to vary to the extent 
already specified the number of heat units. 
Having described my invention and set 
forth its merits, what I claim is 
1. A contact device for electrical appliances 
comprising a contact block or member pro 
vided with a leading-in wire or conductor hav 
ing branches leading to two separate contact 
points and a leading-out wire having a con 
tact-point between said leading-in contact 
points combined with the three other contact 
points and their conductors the middle one 
of Said contact-points forming a common pole 
to all of said last mentioned conductors as de 
scribed, whereby by adjustment of the con 
tact points one or more of the leading in con 
tact points may be connected in circuit with 
one or more of the conductors and the leading 
Out contact point for the purpose of regulat 
ing the units of heat as specified. 
2. A contact-block or member provided 
with a leading-in wire or conductor having 
branches leading to Separate contact points 
and with a leading-out wire or conductor hav 
ing a contact point located intermediate of the 
contacts to the leading in wire, in combination 
with a plurality of wires or conductors having 
contact points adapted to register with the 
contact points of the wires or conductors of 
the contact-block or member, the Said contact 
block or member being adapted to be noved 
to establish circuit between one or more of the 
contact points of the leading-in wire and one 
or more of Said wires or conductors, and the 
leading-out wire, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
FRIEDRICH WILHELM SCHINDIER-JENNY. 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
Witnesses: 
JULIUS A. BOURRY, 
H. R.ABHART. 
O 
5 
3O 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532689.txt	(No Model.) 
S. McCOLM. 
SOIT, PULWERIZER, 
NO, 532,689. 
Patented Jan, l5, 1895, 
Jaz A-GeSNS tw.s 
  
 
Wit M Ess Els, 
& Ga-e- e/ 
-9. 8. -S-66 
Stephen McCow, 
NVENTOR 
- 
3 kts.co. 47. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN 
MCCOLM, OF MANCHESTER, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO THE 
H. P. DEUSCHER COMPANY, OF HAMILTON, OHIO. 
soil-PULVERIZER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 532,689, dated January 15, 1 895. 
Application filed August 24, 1894, 
Serial No. 521,212 (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN MCCOLM, of 
Manchester, Adams county, Ohio, have in 
yented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Soil-Pulverizers, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of soil 
pulverizers that crush the clods or loosen the 
Surface of the soil to better prepare it to re 
ceive the Seed, and the objects of my improve 
ment are, to make the machine reversible in 
its direction of movement, and to locate the 
lugs or spurs on the wheels in such inclined 
positions that they penetrate the soil deeper 
during the movement of the wheels in one di 
rection than in the other. These objects are 
attained in the following described manner 
as illustrated in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure is a plan of the machine; Fig. 2, 
a longitudinal vertical section thereof; Fig. 
8, a transverse vertical section of a portion of 
the Wheel shown in Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a side ele 
vation of the wheel with the spurs or lugs in 
a different position thereon; Fig. 5, a trans 
portion of the wheel 
VerSevertical section of a 
shown in Fig. 4. 
In the drawings. A represents the frame of 
the machine formed alike at both ends; B, the 
pole that may be attached to either end there 
of according to the direction it is desired to 
pull the machine. The axle C spans the mid 
dle portion of the frame and is journaled to 
rotate in bearings secured under the sides 
thereof. A series of metal pulverizing wheels 
D are mounted on the axle within the frame, 
and are free to turn thereon independently 
of each other. 
Collars E of the desired length encircle the 
axle to form wider spaces between contiguous 
Wheels thereon than exist when the hubs are 
in contact, 
The driver's seat F is mounted on the frame 
by Seat boWs G in the usual manner. The 
length of the seat preferably equals the width 
of the frame. 
The rim Hof each of the pulverizing wheels 
is formed with a peripheral edge to penetrate 
the soil with less resistance. Series of wings 
or spurs I are formed integral with said rim 
and project perpendicular from each of its 
. 
- 
sides and at equal distances apart. The 
wings on one side of the rim are directly op 
posite to the spaces formed between the wings 
on the other side and in this manner they al 
ternate from opposite sides of the rim Suc 
cessively. The inner ends of the wingster 
minate on a line with the annular edge that 
terminates the periphery of the rim and said 
wings are extended some distance beyond the 
periphery of the wheel similar to the teeth of 
spur gears which they resemble in being ta 
pered to a dull edge parallel with the axis of 
the wheel. The thickest portion of the wings 
is on a line with the edge of the rim and par 
allel with the axis of the wheel whence the 
wings are tapered inwardly to a dull edge to 
form inwardly divergent spaces between 
them to prevent the clods from becoming 
wedged therein. The inner edge of the Wings 
is preferably tapered from theside of the rim 
of the wheel to their point at their thickest 
portions. 
The position of the wings on the sides of 
the rim of the wheel may be on a line With 
the radii of the wheel as shown in Fig. 4. It 
is preferable however to form the wings on 
the rim at an oblique angle to the radii of the 
wheelin such manner that their planes shall 
be inclined in the same direction to approxi 
mately bisect the angles formed by radii and 
tangents of the wheel intersecting at the outer 
edge of the respective wings (as shown in 
Fig.2). In this inclined position of the wings 
they are permitted to penetrate the soil in a 
perpendicular direction as the wheels are 
moved in the direction of the arrow. They 
consequently enter the soil to a greater depth 
and pulverize it in a manner that resembles 
chopping or spading. 
By moving the wheels 
in a direction opposite to the direction of the 
arrow the sides of the wings are brought first 
in contact with the surface of the soil and 
tend to ride thereon rather than to enter it to 
any great depth. This action of the sides of 
the wings is preferable to crush the surface 
clods that exist when the soil is dry or arid. 
It is thus evident that the machine is capa 
ble of performing different functions accord 
ing to the direction in which the wheels are 
moved to obtain the greatest efficiency in 
either the arid or humid condition of the Soil, 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45. 
SO 
2 
582,689 
Instead of changing the pole to the oppo 
site ends of the frame the pulverizing wheels 
may be reversed on the axle to change the 
direction of their movement. If desired to 
only partially modify the penetration of the 
Wheels in the soil some of the wheels may be 
placed on the axle with the wings slanted in 
an opposite direction from the wings on the 
Others. 
Any plural number of wheels within the 
capacity of the axle may be placed thereon as 
desired, and they may be spaced different 
distances apart by means of collars of differ 
ent lengths being used to encircle the axle 
between the hubs of contiguous wheels. 
During the movement of the machine in a 
Straight line the axle turns with the wheels 
and in the bearings, but the independent ro 
tation of the wheels on the axle facilitates the 
turning of the machine to change its direction 
of movement. 
Having fully described my improvement, 
What I claim as my invention, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is-, 
1. A pulverizing wheel formed integral with 
a series of wings at equi-distant intervals on 
its rim, said wings being oblong in cross-sec 
tion and projecting endwise from the sides of 
the rim alternately in opposite directions par 
o 
15 
25 
allel with the axis of the wheel and project 
ing edgewise beyond the periphery of the 
wheel to the extent of about the one-third 
portion of their width. 
2. A pulverizing wheel formed integral with 
a series of wings at equi-distant intervals on 
its rim, said wings being oblong in cross-sec 
tion and projecting endwise from the sides of 
the rim alternately in opposite directions and 
projecting edgewise for a portion of their 
width beyond the periphery of the wheel and 
on opposite sides alternately of the extended 
middle plane of the wheel, the planes of the 
wings being inclined laterally to the same ex 
tent and in the same direction to the respect 
ive radii of the wheel. 
3. A pulverizing wheel formed integral with 
a series of wings at equi-distant intervals on 
its rim, said wings being oblong in cross-sec 
tion and projecting endwise from the sides of 
the rim alternately in opposite directions and 
perpendicular thereto, the planes of the wings 
being inclined laterally to the same extent 
and in the same direction to the respective 
radii of the wheel. 
STEPHEN MCCOLM. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID DUNBAR, 
S. G. MCGOVNEY. 
35 
45 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532790.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 532,790, 
 
 
 
J. L. KETCHER. 
ELECTRICAL DISPLAY APPARATUS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Jan, 22, 1895, 
w s Os 
s 
a 
 
27. s 
6.6 (24. 
 
4, 
tlebovci, 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
w 
J. L. KETCHER, 
ELECTRICAL DISPLAY APPARATUS, 
No. 532,790, 
Patented Jan. 22, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
SS 
 
-le 
S8ibviesses 
g2 (2, (2-6. 
 
 
 
SEz)Zz), 
 
A.etzer 
elitovie44. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH L KETCHER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-THIRD TO 
WILLIAM L. BEADNELL, OF SAME PLACE, 
ELECTRICAL-DISPLAY APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 532,790, dated January 22, 1895. 
Application filed April 26, 1894, Serial No. 509,102 (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPHL, KETCHER, a 
Subject of the King of Sweden and Norway, 
residing at New York city, in the county of 
New York and State of New York, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Electrical-Display Apparatus, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The purpose of my invention is to produce 
a coin-controlled machine or apparatus for 
producing various electrical phenomena or 
effects, and to this end it consists in the con 
Struction, combinations, and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter set forth, and illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a face elevation of the apparatus 
with the front of the inclosing shell or casing 
removed to show the internal devices; Fig. 2, 
a vertical section at right angles to Fig. 1; 
and FigS. 3 and 4, views illustrating details 
of construction hereinafter referred to. 
My invention is primarily designed to give 
to the masses an opportunity of observing va 
rious physical phenomena which at the pres 
ent time are not within their reach, owing to 
the COstliness of apparatus generally con 
structed for their production. To this end I 
combine in one structure various electrical 
devices, together with a switch for bringing 
Said devices into operation successively, and 
With a coin-controlled detent or locking dog, 
the actuation of which releases the switch and 
permits it to act. 
The form and dimensions of the apparatus 
may be varied at will, and the electrical cur 
rent employed may be generated within the 
structure itself, by battery or dynamo-electric 
generator, or it may be obtained from a gen 
eral supply main, as found expedient. In the 
drawings, however, I have represented a dy 
namo-electric generator, actuated by a spring 
motor, in order to adapt the apparatus for 
general application and use, without cost be 
yond the original outlay and the occasional 
expenditure of a moderate amount of manual 
labor. 
Referring again to said drawings, A indi 
cates a shellor casing of any convenient form 
and material-here represented as of circular 
form in its upper part, with a suitable base 
1 or pedestal below. Within the upper portion 
of this shell or casing are arranged the vari 
ous electrical appliances to be exhibited, here 
represented as an electric drum B; an elec 
tric bell, C; a word or design D, composed of 
slightly separated and electrically insulated 
bits of tin foil or other conducting material, 
which design becomes luminous upon the pas 
sage of an electric current, owing to the arcs 
forming between the bits of foil; rotary disks 
E of transparent material bearing designs, 
and illuminated by an electric light F behind 
them; an electric cascade G; a transparent 
rotary spiral Hilluminated by an electric light 
I; a rotatable transparency J, illuminated by 
an electric lamp K; a music box L; a spark 
ing induction coil M, and a rotatable group of 
Geissler tubes N. . These several devices are 
suggestive rather than essential but will be 
found quite suitable for general adoption. 
O indicates a dynamo-electric generator, 
and P a spring motor for driving said gener 
ator. These may both be of ordinary form 
and construction, and will be of dimensions 
suited to the requirements of the apparatus. 
Motion is transmitted from the motor to the 
generator by belt or gearing, a simple belt 
being shown in the drawings, connecting a 
speed wheel of the motor with the armature 
shaft of the generator. Instead of this dy 
namo-generator and its motor, a galvanic bat 
tery may be employed, or a storage battery, 
or any other source of electric energy. Hence 
the further use of the term generator is to be 
understood as meaning or comprehending 
broadly any convenient source of electric en 
ergy. 
For some of the devices employed a con 
tinuous or direct current is necessary or de 
sirable, while for others an alternating cur 
rent is required. Thus the primary current 
of the induction coil, the electro-magnet 
within the drum; the electro-magnet of the 
bell, and the several lamps receive a continu 
ous current directly from the generator O; 
while the word or design composed of sepa 
rated and insulated bits of tin foil; the cas 
cade and the Geissler tubes are supplied with 
an alternating current from the secondary coil 
of the inductorium M. 
95 
IOO 
30 
35 
45 
 
2 
582,790 
IO 
2 cd 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
3o 
9 o 
95 
The delivery of current to the several de- the spindle or axle l, but is electrically con 
nected with a collar p on the circumference 
of the sleeve S. Against each collar p bears 
a contact spring q, each electrically connected 
with one of the contact studs or blocks of 
switch R. Hence, whenever and so long as arm 
i of switch R, rests upon a stud i, the Second 
ary circuit of the induction coil M will be com 
pleted through the Geissler tube connected 
with said collar. As above mentioned, the 
sleeve S carries a pulley T, which is provided 
with a series of grooves, so that, being itself 
driven by belt from the motor P, it may in 
turn transmit motion to the disks E, the spiral 
II, the transparency J and the drum or cyl 
inder of music box L., as illustrated in Fig. 1. 
The speed of rotation of sleeve S is such that 
during the advance of armi of switch R, from 
one contact to the next, the sleeve will make 
a number of revolutions, and thus the effect 
produced will be made more striking. 
The case A is formed with an opening r, 
through which to observe the devices within. 
To control the action of the apparatus I 
may employ any convenient or usual type of 
coin-controlled lock or catch. Such a device 
is illustrated in Fig. 1, and consists of a lever 
U, pivoted at a suitable point within the case 
A and having one end arranged directly be 
neath a coin chute v, a second lever V pro 
vided with a dog or detent r to engage with a 
shoulders on a disk or wheel t carried by the 
main shaft of the motor P; and a connecting 
rod at extending from lever U to lever V and 
causing one to move the other. The parts 
are counterbalanced, so that a slight weight 
falling upon the free end of lever U shall 
serve to withdraw the detent, and permit the 
motor to go into operation. This Weight is 
afforded by the coin, entering through chute 
-the coin, however, falling from the lever as 
the latter tips or rocks upon its pivot, and 
permitting the detent to re-engage the shoul 
der S as soon as one revolution is completed. 
In this way each coin deposited will bring 
about one complete rotation of the main shaft 
of the motor, and this, under the arrange 
ment set forth, will cause each of the devices 
described to go into operation at Once, and so 
continue for a predetermined length of time. 
Any usual construction and arrangement 
of appliances may be employed in connection 
with the coin chute to preclude the introduc 
tion of bogus coins, or the release of the mech 
anism thereby; but such devices are not a 
part of my invention. 
It is obvious that the extent of rotation, 
the relative number of turns or the different 
rotary devices, and other details may be con 
siderably varied without departing from the 
spirit or scope of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In an electric display apparatus, the com 
bination of a source of electric energy, a series 
of translating devices for utilizing the cur 
vices is controlled by two switches, Q and R, 
Figs. 1 and 2. Switch Q consists of a fixed 
plate or disk, which may conveniently be 
made of vulcanized fiber or other non-con 
ducting material, provided with a series of 
conducting studs or blocks d, from each of 
which a separate conductor passes to one 
binding post or terminal of one or another 
of the devices which is to receive culrrent 
through said switch; and of a movable con 
tact arm e adapted to travel over and make 
contact with the studs or blocks d in succes 
Sion. The contact arm e is carried by but is 
electrically insulated from a shaft f, which 
also carries a pulley g, and receives motion 
through a belt from a pulley h secured upon 
the slowly rotating main shaft or motor P. 
By this arrangement the arme is caused to 
travel slowly over all the contacts d, and 
thereby to bring each connected device into 
and retain it in circuit with the source of 
electric supply for a proper length of time. 
The running of the circuits is indicated in 
the drawings and is so obvious that no de 
tailed explanation is required, it being suffi 
cient to say that one of the conductors of 
each circuit connects with one of the contacts 
d, and consequently each circuit is completed 
and interrupted in like manner, and the de 
vices in said circuits consequently go into 
and out of action consecutively. 
The switch R is in all material respects the 
same as switch Q, but its contact studs or 
blocks are alternated with the blocks d of 
switch Q, or its contact armi is set out of line 
With contact arm e, so that when either closes 
a circuit the other shall not do so. The con 
tact armi of switch R, is included in the sec 
ondary circuit of induction coil M, and con 
trols the delivery of current to the device D, 
the cascade G, and the Geissler tubes N, and 
also completes the sparking circuit of the in 
duction coil. 
To bring the Geissler tubes into circuit, I 
mount them in holders carried by a rotatable 
sleeve S, provided with a pulley, and receiv 
ing motion by belt from a pulley on one of 
the shafts or spindles of the motor P having 
a higher speed of rotation than the main shaft 
thereof. The sleeve S is made of or covered 
with insulating material, and is provided with 
a metallic hub or collar lic, which is electri 
cally connected through the spindle or axle l 
on which sleeve S rotates, or otherwise, with 
a series of radial metallic arms m2, equal in 
number to the Geissler tubes employed. A 
spring arm, n, bears upon the hub or collar 
ki, and thus delivers electric current from the 
the secondary circuit of induction coil. M 
with which it is connected, to the arms in. 
The sleeve S also carries a second series of 
arms o, each designed to support and carry 
one end of a Geissler tube, the opposite end of 
which is carried by one of the arms in. Each 
arm O is insulated from the others and from 
Od 
Io5 
IO 
II5. 
I2O 
I 25 
 
582,790 
3 
O 
rent so supplied, a switch adapted to direct 
the current to and divert it from the translat 
ing devices in series or succession, a motor for 
actuating said switch, and a locking device 
for holding the motor out of action, adapted 
to be moved or released by the introduction 
of a coin, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an electric display apparatus, the com 
bination of an actuating motor, an electric 
generator driven by said motor, a detent for 
said motor, and a coin-actuated lever con 
nected with and serving to withdraw the de 
tent and thereby to permit the motor to op 
3. In an electric display apparatus, the com 
bination of an electric generator, a motor for 
operating said generator, a series of translat 
ing devices, a switch interposed between the 
generator and the translating devices and 
adapted to bring said devices successively into 
erate. 
- 
circuit with the generator, and a coin-con 
trolled detent adapted to hold the motor out 
of action until a coin is deposited and then 
to permit the motor to operate to a predeter 
mined extent. 
4. In combination with a source of electric 
energy, a series of translating devices, rotat 
able transparencies adapted and arranged 
to co-operate with the translating devices, a 
switch for directing the current to the trans- 3o 
lating devices in predetermined order, and a 
motor connected with and serving to actuate 
said rotatable devices and the switch. 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
25 
JOSEPH L KETCHER. 
Witnesses: 
D. S. HoTALING, 
GEO. W. SHORT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532892.txt	(No Model.) 
J. B. & W. A. MILLER. 
TOBACCO DIPPING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 532,892, 
m 
Patented Jan, 22, 1895, 
m; 
2. 
7. / 
Ayeo. Z 
(9. 6. 
'' 
t 
it 
2. 
2 
l | 2 
4. 
ses - 
gie ) 
O 
f C 
HES) Clini 
t 
ERIE R.E.E; , 
t 
: ) 
| II 
I 
s 
l 
. 
A 
f 
--- 
-E 
27 
2 
d 
C 
C 
6E CE ) 
O 
& , 
a H 
i 
as 
r 
Z2 
Ya 
!!! 
7 
ZZ 
7- 
s 
7 
2 Z 
al-Ha - 
e : 
------- 
ze 
ZZ. 
3. 
2 
Z 
| 
Z-67. 2. 
G, 
y 
7, 
is Ll 
a 
Y-m-m-m-m- 
in 
l 
W. 
|\ | 
t 
. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. B. & W. A. MILLER, 
TOBACCO. DIPPING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
No. 532,892. 
Patented Jan. 22, 1895, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. MILLER AND WILLIAM A. MILLER, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
ToBAcco-DIPPING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,892, dated January 22, 1895. 
Application filed November 6, 1898, Serial No. 490,129, (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JoHN B. MILLER and 
WILLIAM. A. MILLER, of Louisville, in the 
county of Jefferson and State of Kentucky, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Tobacco-Dipping Machines, of which the 
following, taken in connection with the ac 
Companying drawings, is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
improvements in machines for handling to 
bacco in the leaf, and especially in the dip 
ping of leaf tobacco preparatory to manipu 
lating the same and forming it into the plug 
tobacco of commerce, and it consists in cer. 
tain peculiarities of detail, construction and 
Operation of parts, all as hereinafter more 
fully set forth and specifically pointed out in 
the claim. 
In the annexed drawings similarletters and 
figures of reference denote corresponding 
parts in all the views, wherein 
Figure l is a top plan view of our improved 
machine. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sectional view. 
Sale. 
Fig. 4 is a view in detail showing the means 
of adjustment for the top one of the compres 
sion rollers - I of the machine. Fig. 5 is a 
detail view showing the manner in which the 
Said compression rollers are secured to the 
shafts upon which they are carried, and illus 
trates the ready means adopted to permit of 
their removal for repairs or renewal when oc 
casion requires. Fig. 6 is a detail showing 
the manner in which the conveyers and con 
veyer troughs are brought into coincidence 
at the side of the machine, and Fig. 7 is a de 
tail of the conveyer device used to carry the 
tobacco from the liquid bath to the rake 
Which feeds the rolls-I-I-. 
In the manufacture of plug tobacco it is 
Customary to dip the leaf tobacco into a suit 
ably prepared liquid composed of flavors and 
ingredients used for flavoring the finished 
product, and this is now generally prepared 
and placed into a tank or suitable receptacle 
into which the leaf tobaccois dipped entirely 
by hand and then passed through compres 
sion rollers to express the surplus liquid re 
maining in contact with the tobacco leaf be 
fore the other steps are carried out, 
The present method of handling entails 
more or less waste of material and is lacking 
in that cleanliness which should characterize 
work of the sort, and in addition to these 
causes we have produced our machine so that 
the liquid may be kept at a greater degree of 
heat, which is very desirable in working leaf 
tobacco but impracticable at the present time 
because such great heat will prevent the Op 
erator handling with his hands the tobacco 
leaf. 
In the drawings -A- is a liquid recepta 
cle into which liquid is placed, the greater 
portion of which naturally finds its Way to the 
lower end beneath the paddle wheel-C-. 
B-is a hopper into which tobacco leaf may 
be introduced, the said leaves falling onto 
the paddles-C- and being carried by them 
down and into the liquid within the recepta 
cle-A-. 
D- is a slat-conveyer designed to raise the 
leaf from the liquid to the rake -E- which 
projects it into and between the rollers-I-, 
and G- is the reciprocating rod which pro 
duces movement back and forth of the rake 
-E- being connected by the pitman -F- 
to the shaft-e- thereby converting the ro 
tary motion of the shaft-e- to the required 
reciprocating motion required for said rake 
-E-, the opposite end of said reciprocating 
rod being suitably supported in the horizon 
tal slide-H- adapted to support and carry 
the same. 
The rollers -- are so set that they may 
be adjusted vertically by means of thead 
justing screw -i- which carries the sliding 
bearing -i- into which the upper roller 
-I- is journaled, and said rollers are set as 
shown in detail at Fig. 5 so that they may be 
readily removed from the machine by detach 
ing the collars or clutches -b-b' as shown 
in Fig. 5 thereby permitting withdrawal of 
the rollers -- when required. 
It will be noticed that there is a scraper 
-K- above the top roller-I- which bears 
constantly against it so as to prevent return 
of any tobacco leaves which may pass between 
the rollers. A similar scraper -M- is pro 
vided at the outer side of the machine though 
this scraper is left a very slight distance 
away from the lower roller so as to leave it 
possible for any broken leaves to fall into the 
conveyer trough-J- and be carried by the 
. 
90 
95 
IOC 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
 
532,892 
conveyers -J- to the hopper end of said 
trough -J'- from whence small bits of to 
bacco and liquid will pass through as indi 
cated by the arrow at the right of Fig. -1- 
into the receptacle-A- from which place 
they may be again carried by the conveyer 
-D- to the rolls-I-. 
It will be observed that the conveyer -J.- 
running longitudinally of the machine is se. 
cured to the conveyer shaft -j- which has 
a bevel gear -ac-on its extreme outer end 
meshing with a corresponding beveled gear 
-ac'- on the lateral shaft -j'- while the 
lateral conveyer -J.- is driven by the shaft 
--J. 
In operation the machine works as follows: 
The leaf tobacco is fed into the hopper-B- 
and is carried by the paddles -C- into the 
liquid in the lower part of the receptacle be 
neath the same where it is sufficiently satu 
rated with the flavoring material after which 
it is carried up the link conveyer and dropped 
off at the upper end thereof. The rake -E- 
being constantly reciprocating carries the 
leaf to the rolls-I- through which the same 
is drawn, thus expressing the surplus moist 
ure and leaving the tobacco in condition to 
be immediately worked into plugs. The sur 
plus moisture falls into the conveyer troughs 
-J- and is carried back to the receptacle 
-A- to be used again. 
It is desirable that a steam pipe enter the 
receptacle - A- so as to heat the flavoring 
liquid therein, and this pipe may be run in 
at any convenient point to accomplish this 
purpose. A plug may be provided also at the 
lowest point in the said receptacle for draw 
ing off the contents when desired. 
A driving pulley-P- is provided on the 
shaft -2- which latter carries the lower roll 
-I- provided with the gear -10-, which 
gear meshes with the corresponding gear 
-11- of the upper roll and drives the said 
upper roll. On said shaft -2- is the pull 
ley -Q- and the belt -1- runs from said 
pulley-Q- to the pulley-P' on the shaft 
-P'-. The paddle-wheels-C'- are rigid 
with and are rotated by the shaft-P'-'. The 
pulley -g- on the same shaft drives the belt 
O 
2 d 
25 
35 
40 
45 
-4- which runs from the pulley-q- to the 
pulley-q'- on the shaft-r- on which the 
sprocket-s-is secured so that said sprocket 
may actuate the slat-conveyer -D-. The 
rake -E- gets its motion through the pit 
man -F- from the belt -6- which runs 
over the pulley -i-, said belt receiving its 
motion in turn from the pulley -it-- on the 
shaft -2-. The screw-J- receives its 
motion from the belt -5- actuated by the 
pulley -q'- and running over the pulley 
---, on the shaft -f- placed vertically 
beneath the shaft -2-, thus driving the 
screw -J-, while the belt -8- transmits 
rotary motion to the shaft -7-, on the end 
of which is a beveled gear -v- meshing 
with a corresponding gear-w'- on the shaft 
-j-, which latter drives the screw. --J'- 
running longitudinally of the machine. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim is 
In a machine of described class a liquid re 
ceptacle, a feed hopper above the same, revo 
luble paddles adapted to force the contents 
of said hopper into the liquid receptacle, an 
endless conveyer entering said liquid recep 
tacle and rising therefrom at an oblique an 
gle to a point above said liquid receptacle, a 
platform near the upper terminus of said con 
veyer, a reciprocating rake near the upper 
end of said conveyer passing along the line 
of said platform, a pair of compression rolls 
at the extreme end of said platform, an ad 
justable scraper bearing on the upper roll of 
said rolls, a supplemental liquid receptacle 
beneath the lower roll and a screw conveyer 
leading from said supplemental receptacle to 
said liquid receptacle substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto 
signed our names, in the presence of two at 
testing witnesses, at Louisville, in the county 
of Jefferson, in the State of Kentucky, this 
30th day of August, 1893. 
JOHN B. MILLER, 
WILLIAM. A. MILLER, 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK H. GIBBS, 
M. S. KICE. 
55 
75 
9o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US532993.txt	(No Model.) 
M. SETTLE, 
LIME CARTRIDGE, 
No. 532,993, 
Patented Jan, 22, 1895. 
 
. 
. 
WITNESSES. . 
2(6 A.-arc- 
INVENTOR. 
- 4 or 5% to 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MILES SETTLE OF DARCY LEVER, ENGLAND. 
ME CARTRIDGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 532,993, dated January 22, 1895. 
Application filed October 8, 1894, Serial No. 525,251. (No model.) 
. 
. 
O 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, MILES SETTLE, a sub 
ject of the Queen of GreatBritain and Ireland, 
residing at Darcy Lever, in the county of Lan 
caster, England, have invented Improvements 
in Lime Cartridges for Breaking Down Coal, 
Rock, and other Minerals, of which the fol. 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention applies to that class of car 
tridges employed forbreaking-downcoal, rock, 
and other minerals, known as lime car 
tridges,' wherein the rending action of the 
coal or other mineral is produced by the ad 
mission of water to the compressed lime, the 
latter swelling or increasing rapidly in bulk 
by the absorption of the water and thus rend 
ing asunder the coal or other mineral. 
The nature of my said invention and the 
manner in which the same is to be performed 
or carried into practical effect will be readily 
understood on reference to the annexed sheet 
of drawings and the following explanation 
thereof. 
Figure.1 is a transverse section and Fig.2 
a longitudinal section of my improved lime 
cartridge inits simplest form. Fig. 3 is an end 
view, and Fig. 4 apartial sectional elevation 
of a modification thereof hereinafter more 
particularly described. 
. 
According to my invention I compress the 
lime into the form of a cylindrical cartridge a 
So as to leave a hole b extending down through 
the center of the lime from one end to the 
other (or nearly so) whereby the water is in 
troduced at once into about the center of the 
lime. 
In addition to the central hole, I make lon 
gitudinal shallow grooves or channels, as 
shown at c, Figs. 3 and 4, on the outside of the 
lime, in order to faciliate the simultaneous ac 
cess of the water to the outside of the cylinder. 
In the cartridge shown at Figs. 1 and 2, in 
addition to making the compressed lime cylin 
der a with a central hole b I provide, the same 
with longitudinal passages or flattened spaces 
dradiating outward from the central hole b 
and extending from end to end of the cylinder 
a or nearly so. The object of these additional 
radiating spaces is to faciliate the rapid dis. 
so tribution of the water or acidulated water to 
the whole mass of the lime when it is forced 
into the central hole b by the pump. 
45 
35 
. 
. 
. 
Witnesses: 
cHARLESA, DAVIES, 
JNO. HUGHES, 
- 
55 
In the modification shown at Figs. 3 and 4, 
in addition to the central hole b Imake several 
auxiliary holes b' surrounding the central 
hole, and I connect them there with by longi 
tudinal flattened spaces dradiating from the 
central hole b to the auxiliary holesb', and at 
the ends of the cartridge I make shallow chan 
nels e connecting the holes band b' together. 
and with the longitudinal channels or grooves 
c outside the cylinder a, 
By these two methods the water or acidu 
lated water is distributed, as regards Figs. 1 
and 2, longitudinally through the center of 
the cartridge and radially into the interior of 
the mass; and as regards Figs. 3 and 4, it is 
distributed first centrally into the hole b then 
radially along the passages d to the auxiliary 
holes b' and thence at the ends along the 
shallow connecting channelse to the longitu 
dinal grooves c outside the cylinder, so that 
the water or acidulated water acts simultane 
ously on a great surface of the lime cylinder, 
the effect of this being to hasten the operation 
of breaking-down the coal or other mineral. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A lime cartridge having a central hole 
and internal radiating passages, the said 
hole and passages extending longitudinally 
through the cartridge, as and for the purpose. 
set forth. 
2. A lime cartridgehaving a central long; 
tudinal hole, auxiliary longitudinal holes b' 
and internal radiating passages also extend. 
ing longitudinally through the cartridge, as 
and for the purpose set forth. . . 
3. A lime cartridge having a central hole 
external grooves candinternal radiating pas 
sages, the said hole, grooves and passages ex 
tending longitudinally through the cartridge 
and radiating channelse at the end of the car 
tridge leading to the grooves c, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 95. 
two subscribing witnesses. 
75 
- 
MILES SETTLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533095.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 533,095. 
F. W. STARR. 
DRAWING INSTRUMENT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 29. 1895. 
282it.cscs 
-6-4----- (? (a 
a^2 o-60-24 
3v-uov to 
Gala 91 day 
elttozve 98.2%ly 
33 //at 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 533,095, 
F. W. STARR, 
DRAWING INSTRUMENT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 29, l895. 
28itv.cscs 
-6 AO-42%. 
2. 
3v-uc41 to 
Vaca 76-6-4- 
33. A.Y elitovicy (73. (2-4% 
 
 
s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FERDINAND W. STARR, OF SPRINGFIELD, OHIO. 
DRAWING-INSTRUMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 533,095, dated January 29, 1895. 
Application filed December 23, 1893, Serial No.494,531 (No model) 
55 
6 o 
65 
75 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, FERDINAND W. STARR, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Spring 
field, in the county of Clark and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Drawing-Instruments; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters and figures 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
drawing instruments, the several features of 
which will be fully hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
The object of my invention is the construc 
tion of an instrument adapted to drawing a 
great variety of forms, as parallel lines, angu 
lar, circular, radial, elliptical, square, &c. 
The object is accomplished by the mechan 
ism illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan of the instrument omit 
ting the finger bar. Fig. 2 is a front eleva 
tion of the same with the omitted finger bar 
shown. Fig. 3 is a detailed view of the axes 
or shafts at a right angle to these parts as 
shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is an enlarged view 
of the under axis with the parallel integral 
guiding bars. Fig. 5 is a side view of a modi 
fied form of the pencil holder. Fig. 6 is a 
side elevation of the instrument with the near 
leg cut away and also a portion of the finger 
bar. 
Like letters and numerals designate like 
parts throughout the several views. 
The metallic frame A is mounted on the 
three legs in, two in front and one on the rear 
extension. It has the groove 1 in its upper 
surface. This groove in form represents a 
line made by lateral movements of the slotted 
bar H. pivotally held by the stud 3, as the 
inner end is moved at a right angle to the 
longitudinal line of the instrument, and al 
though curved is not the arc of a circle. At 
the rear end, it has a threaded orifice to re 
ceive said stud, and has a square Orifice ex 
tending through its whole length, correspond 
ing to its longitudinal center and in which 
is held the sliding-bar D. This sliding-bar 
moves freely within the orifice of the frame, 
and in the front end of which is a bearing 
for the axis L of the parallel bars E and F, 
and within which it freely rotates. These 
parallel guide bars have their centers, radiat 
ing from the axis of their shaft, and the po 
sition of said shaft must be in line with the 
vertical longitudinal center of said sliding 
bar. These guide-bars are not only parallel, 
but must be radially exactly in line. The 
indicator C is fixedly attached to the under 
surface of said sliding-bar, or its bearing 
plate, and the point of which must be in ex 
act line with the vertical longitudinal center 
of said sliding-bar, and the axial center of 
said guide-bars. To the top of the guide-bar 
F is attached the circular ring B, on which 
is marked a graduated scale, which may note 
three hundred and sixty degrees, or any 
other suitable division. The two guide-bars 
have their flanges in reverse order. The lower 
is embraced by the grooved head of the pen 
cil holder G; and the other by the grooves in 
the bottom of shaft I, as shown at Fig. 3. 
The guide-bar H embraces the upper shaft 
I by a central orifice in its inner end. It is 
slotted at its rear end to embrace the stud 3, 
and has the pin 2, attached by a screw, at the 
left of its center. The shaft embraced by the 
inner end of this guide-bar remains directly 
over the center of the lower shaft, except 
when it is desirable to form an ellipsis, 
when the shaft I is carried along the guide 
barE, and the pin2 is screwed down and made 
to enter the groove 1 of the frame; and in 
this position the pencil will describe an ellip 
sis, the only fixed points being the stud3, the 
sliding bar moving with the rotation. The 
dotted lines show the position of this guide 
bar H in moving the same to form an ellipsis. 
When it is desirable only to make radial, lon 
gitudinal or transverse lines, the screw m is 95 
used to bind the lower shaft, to prevent its ro- . 
tating. Over the end of guide-bar H is the 
spiral springs, and above is the finger arm K 
secured to the shaft I by the nut J. 
To operate the pencil grasp the knob on 
arm K and turn the parts as desired. By 
pressing down, the pencil rests on the paper, 
and releasing the pressure the spring raises 
it, and in this manner dottedlines are readily 
8 
O. 
85 
O 
f5 
3o 
45 
 
533,095 
produced. In the drawings, Fig. 2, it is shown 
depressed as in use, when the pencil is in con 
tact with the paper on which the drawing is 
to be made. 
The pencil holder G is adapted to slide on 
the guide-bar. It is hollow to receive the spi 
ral spring 4 and the body of the pencil 5. 
Said spring presses against the head of the 
pencil, and causes the point to bear against the 
paper with a uniform pressure. 
At Fig. 5, is shown a modified form of holder 
G'. The metallic plate 6 is attached to the 
head, and is provided with an orifice at the 
bottom to hold the lower end of the pencil. 
To add friction to the pencil holder, a spring 
plate may be used between the guide-bar and 
its head, and a screw may be used to fasten 
the same rigidly when necessary. For all 
transverse and radial movements, the line or 
angle is determined by the relation of the in 
dicator to the graduated scale, and then the 
pencil holder is made to traverse the guide 
bar. In circular, elliptic or other curved 
movements, the pencil holder remains in a 
fixed relation to the guide-bar. In making 
longitudinal marks the pencil-holder is 
slipped to the proper point, or the graduated 
scale is turned until the point is reached. 
Then the sliding bar D is moved. This bar 
having a reciprocating movement, and the 
principal operating parts being supported 
thereon, the same may be carried to any center 
or point from which it may be desirable to 
Work. 
At r Fig. 1 is a block notched and slipped 
onto the edge of the graduated scale, which 
is used as a stop. This or other form of stop 
may be used; and the object of which is to 
arrest the Scale against the indicator arm, and 
roduce a definite radial movement by the po 
sition of the stop on said scale. 
The movements possible to the instrument 
are almost infinite, and only the operations 
most readily discerned have been described. 
By using a cord attached to the frame and 
wound around the shaft L, or by attaching 
the same to the pencil holder, and wound on 
a rod central to the instrument, a variety of 
spiral forms may be made by said instrument. 
The position of the guide bar E may be 
changed by placing the grooved head on the 
shaft I, and attaching the bar E to the shaft 
I, and the operation would be substantially 
the same. 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
FIaving fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. The combination of the frame A mounted 
on legs and having a square orifice through 
out its length, the sliding-bar D held in said 
orifice, the shaft I, supported in the end of 
said bar and the guide arm F integral there 
with, the circular graduated scale B, the in 
dicator C fixedly attached to said sliding-bar 
and the sliding pencil holder, to produce cir 
cular, transverse, radial or longitudinal lines, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the frame Ahaving 
a square orifice throughout its length and the 
irregular groove 1 in its upper surface, the 
sliding-bar D held in said orifice, the shaft L. 
with the integral guide-bars E and F, the 
graduated scale attached to the latter, the 
sliding shaft I, the bar H pivoted to said 
shaft, the stud 3 to engage the slot in said 
bar and pin 2 to traverse said groove of the 
frame, and the pencil holder rigidly held to 
its arm, to form an ellipsis, substantially as 
described. 
3. The combination of the sliding-bar D, 
the shaft L with its integral guide arms, the 
sliding shaft I, the arm H, the spiral spring 
S, to elevate the several parts, the operating 
and depressing arm IK and the pencil-holder, 
to produce continuous or broken lines, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The frame mounted on legs with a lon 
gitudinal orifice and the groove or guide-way 
in its upper surface, in combination with the 
reciprocating bar having three points of con 
nection in a longitudinal line, viz., the fixed 
pivot at the rear of the frame, the travers 
ing pin for said guide-way and the axial cen 
ter, the guide-arm provided with an axial 
bearing on its inner end and a longitudinal 
slot in its outer end, the principal shaft pro 
vided with parallel guides, the sliding shaft 
mounted on the upper guide of said princi 
pal shaft, and with marking appendages for 
drawing lines, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
FERDIN AND W. STARR. 
9o 
95 
CO 
Witnesses: 
B. PICKERING, 
MICHAEL CAHILL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533195.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
A. P. HAYS 
DENTIST's CROWN SWAGING APPARATUS, 
No. 533,195. 
Patented Jan, 29, 1895, 
 
(No Model.) 
y 
A. P. HAYS. 
DENTIST's CROWN SWACING APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No, 533,195. 
 
Patented Jan. 29, 1895. 
7 
A AA) 
A A & SN NSS VXX 
| H 
NRS O\\ 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
AD A M PIER SON HAYS, OF T. OS ANGELES, CA LI FOR NIA. 
  
DENTISTS CROWN- SWAG ING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 533,195, dated January 29, 1895. 
Application filed October 1, 1894, Serial No. 524,649, (No model.) 
I5 
conformed to half of the crown of the tooth to 65 
In the practice of dentistry, great difficulty line 3-3 in Fig. 1. 
to is often experienced informing artificial gold 
6o 
Be it known that I, ADAMPIERSON HAYS, a invention. 
25 the part of the operator to produce an accu- swaging a ductile thimble to fit the mold. 
To all tuhon, it invay concern: 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
citizen of the United States, residing at Los 
Figure 1 is a fragmental perspective view 
Angeles, in the county of Los Angeles and of a swaging machiae embodying my inven- 55 
5 State of California, have invented a new and tion. Fig. 2 is a vertical mid-section of the 
useful Improvement in Dentists' Crown- same. Fig. 3 is a fragmental view of the en 
SWaging Apparatus, of which the following is gaging faces of the upper and lower plates. 
The line of fracture is indicated by dotted 
a specification. 
My newly invented machine comprises the 
crowns;-the present process of forming the combination of a lower half- crown swaging 
Same being laborious and requiring consid- plate having a plain upper face and pro 
erable skill upon the part of the operator. vided in such face with a socket, cup or mold 
This makes crown work very expensive. 
Various methods of forming artificial be fitted, an upper, combined draw-and-half 
Crowns of gold or other ductile metals have crown SWaging plate having a plain under 
been employed. For instance, one method is face fitted upon the upper face of the half 
to form a band or open ended thimble of the crown swaging plate and having a die hole 
desired size and to solder upon one end of flaring at the lower end and conformed to and 7 c 
2O this thimble a cusp stamped from another registering with the margin of the socket in 
piece of the metal and to fill in the bottom of the half-crown swaging plate and arranged to 
the thimble with solder to strengthen the form there with a mold for the crown, suit 
cusp. This manner of making the crown is able means for detachably securing the plates 
Very laborious and requires great skill upon together and suitable means for drawing and 75 
rate fit, and in such case the body of the 
I will now describe my invention; reference 
crown is straight and does not conform to the being had to the specific form of machite 
natural shape of the tooth. Another method shown in the accompanying drawings. 
is to swage a straight thimble and a cusp in- A indicates the press frame of the machine 8o 
3o tegral With each other to form the crown, but and B indicates an ordinary power-operated 
in this method of doing the work as hereto. plunger carrying a punch b and operated 
fore employed the body of the crown does through the medium of the lever C. 
D indicates the half-crown swaging plate 
not conform to the shape of the tooth. 
35 ducing an integral crown having its body vided with a circularly arranged series of half 
shaped to correspond with the shape of the crown-swaging sockets which in the drawings 
tooth to be fitted. 
are marked with the reference letter d, to 
The object of my invention is to produce a gether with suitable indices, and in practice 
Crown swaging apparatus which, at slight ex- are distinguished by suitable numerals as in- 9o 
4o pense of time and labor, will form the crown dicated in the drawings. The half-crown 
integral and of proper shape corresponding swaging plate D is also provided with locking 
to the shape of the tooth for which it is de- catchers marked D. 
E indicates the combined half-crown-draw 
signed; and by means of which a worldman of 
only ordinary mechanical skill will be en- and-swaging plate provided with the circu- 95 
45 abled to accurately and quickly fit a crown to larly arranged series of crown forming holes 
any tooth desired; and that without liability which comprise the series e of draw - holes 
of mistake. 
e', &c., and the draw-and-half-crown-swaging 
My invention comprises the various fea- holes, e' &c., and the seriese' of half-crown 
tures of construction and combinations and swaging holes. The several holes which cor. Ico 
5o arrangements of parts whereby Iattain these respond in size, are, in practice, distinguished 
ends, 
by suitable numerals as indicated in the draw 
My improvement consists in means for pro-seated upon the base of the press A and pro- 85 
533,195 
7 o 
75 
sponding recess A' to allow the partially 
ings. The draw-and-half-crown - swaging 
formed blanks to be driven downward through 
holes e', &c., and the half-crown-swaging 
and out of the large swaging holes e', e, e, 
holes of the inner seriese', respectively flare 
&c., so that when the pivot post is seated in 
at their lower ends as indicated in Fig. 2 and 
tho outer post hole f', punches can be used 
their rims at the lower face of the plate con 
through the several draw holes to draw the 
form respectively to the contour of the mid 
thimble to the proper reduced size, and then 
section of the bellies of the teeth to be fitted, 
the plates can be shifted and the pivot post 
and to the rims respectively of the half-crown 
F screwed into the inner post hole f' so as to 
Sockets d. The sockets and swaging holes of 
allow a punch to be used to swage the thimble 
corresponding size are marked with the same 
in those molds which are formed by the half 
numerals indicative of their size. It will be 
crown swaging holes and the half-crown 
understood that there will be several differ 
Swaging sockets in the inner circle. I have 
ently shaped holes of the same size to respect 
shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings one of the 
ively fit the several teeth of the same size 
draw holes in the outer circle arranged to 
which have different shapes. For example, 
form both a draw hole and a swaging hole. 
holes e'18, e'18, and e'18" and sockets d'1', d'18 
It is possible to combine in one hole the draw 
and d'. The plate E is also provided upon 
ing hole and swaging hole in those molds 
its under side with the catch E. The catches 
which fit teeth which do not have any con 
E' and D' are arranged with such relation to 
tracted portion below the neck of the tooth. 
each other and to the draw-and-half-crown 
In such swaging holes the upper portion 
Swaging holes and the half-crown swaging 
thereof may be made circular, and of the size 
sockets that when the catch of the upper plate 
of the neck of the tooth and can therefore 
catches with the catch of the lower plate, the 
serve as a suitable draw hole and therefore 
two plates will be held against rotation with 
can be arranged (as shown at e' in Fig. 2) in 
relation to each other, and the swaging holes 
the outer circle with the other draw holes. 
and swaging sockets will register with each 
The lower plate D is provided with a half 
gother. 
crown swaging socket d' arranged in the 
The two plates are removably pivoted to 
outer circle to register with such combined 
the press frame A by the pivot post F which 
draw-and-half-crown swaging hole, e'. 
is Screw threaded at each end and is fastened 
In practice, in beginning the operation, the 
by being screwed into the base of the frame. 
half crown swaging plate is adjusted with 
On the tipper end of the post is screwed a 
the recess D'registering with the recess 'A' 
thumb-nut G provided with the sleeve g 
and the combined draw-and-half crown SWag 
which is arranged to engage the combined 
ing plate E is arranged with its largest hole 
dra W-and-Swaging plate to clamp the plates 
e' above the recess D'. The two plates are 
in position. This sleeve is detachably at 
pivoted together with the pivot post seated 
tached to the post by means of the thumb-nut 
in the outer screw socket f', to hold the 
in order to allow the plates to be removed 
plates in position during the process of draw 
while the post is fixed in the base. Means are 
ing. The blank is then drawn through the 
provided for fixing the plate engaging and 
draw hole e' by a punch or plunger of suit. 
clamping sleeve g to the post. They com 
able size for the purpose. After the plunger 
prise a set screw g which screws through the 
is withdrawn, the draw plate is rotated to 
sleeve into a seat g' in the post so that the 
bring the next draw hole to register with the 
thumb-nut can be fixed on the pivot post to 
plunger. The process of drawing is then re 
serve to turn it to screw it into or out of its 
peated with the several holes of succeedingly 
SOcket in the base of the press frame. 
diminishing size until a cylindrical trimble 
The two plates are circular and are pivoted 
of the size required for the tooth to be fitted 
at their centers to the base of the press A. 
The pivot post F passes through the pivot 
is formed, with one end closed. In the draw 
ings the size of the tooth being fitted corre 
holes ff' in the plates and screws into the 
sponds with the draw hole e' and when the 
post socket f' or f' and is thus fastened to 
thimble has been drawn through the hole e' 
the base of the press. The holes in the upper 
the plates are then adjusted so that the lower 
plate are circularly arranged in two circles, 
end or swaging portion of the hole e' will 
the outer circle containing the draw holese 
register with the swaging socket d' and the 
and the combined draw-and-half-crown 
plates are then firmly clamped to the base A 
SWaging holese', &c., and the inner circle 
by means of the post F and the thumb-nut 
containing the half-crown swaging holese'. 
G. and sleeveg. When thoroughly fixed and 
The half-crown swaging sockets d, &c., in 
secured the thimble H is inserted the second 
the lower plate are located to register with 
time into the draw hole e' and is partly filled 
the appropriate holes in the upper plate when 
with molding-sand I or with some other suit 
the two plates are pivoted together at the 
able material which will give pressure in all 
Center as shown, and the punch is arranged 
directions under the action of the punch. 
With its extended axis intersecting the path 
The punch b, which is rounded at the end for 
of Such holes and sockets. 
this purpose, is then forced into place. When 
The half-crown swaging plateD is provided 
sufficient force has been applied to force the 
With a peripheral recess or notch D'' and the 
base of the press is provided with a corre- I sand to cause the gold to perfectly conform to 
9 O 
95 
1 OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35, V. 
45 
So 
55 
65 
583,195 
. 
tinued. 
k 
O 
the mold, the punch is withdrawn and the 
thumb-nut and sleeve G g are removed from 
the post and the draw-and-half-crown swag 
ing plate is lifted from the lower plate, thus 
releasing the crown, which is complete. 
The numbers J, J which indicate the sizes 
of the inner series of swaging holes and sock 
ets are applied to the edges of the plates D 
and E so that the operator can readily adjust 
the plates with proper relation to each other. 
The post F serves as a guide for the com 
bined draw-and-half-crown swaging plate E 
so that in the act of removing it from the 
half-crown swaging plate D the crown will 
not be injured by any accidental displace 
ment of the plate; and, in connection with 
the catch E', it prevents any lateral move 
ment of the plate B. When the crown has 
been removed, the thumb screw and sleeve 
are again screwed upon the post F and se 
cured by the set screw g and the post is then 
unscrewed from the base A and the plates 
are again placed together and pivoted in po 
sition for drawing another thimble to the 
size for another tooth; and so the work is con 
The screw-threaded pivot post F together 
with the screw-threaded sockets f' and f' 
provided in the base of the press frame con 
stitutes means for adjustably pivoting the 
two plates to the press frame. The socket f' 
is arranged at a distance from the extended 
axis of the punch equal to the radius of the 
circle in which the outer series of holes in 
the upper plate E, is arranged, and the dis 
tance from the center of the socket f' to the 
extended axis of the punch is equal to the ra 
dius of the circle in which the inner series of 
holes in plate E is arranged, so that when the 
plates are pivoted by the post screwed into 
the Socket f', the path of the outer series of 
holes is brought beneath the punch, and when 
the plates are pivoted by the pivot post set in 
the socket f', the path of the inner series of 
holes is brought beneath the punch. 
It will be understood without illustration 
that plungers of various sizes will be used for 
the different sized holes, the same as is cus 
tonary in drawing and swaging thimbles. b' 
indicates a spring catch for holding the punch 
b in place. 
Now, having described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A crown Swaging machine comprising a 
half-crown swaging plate having a plain up 
per face and provided in such face with a 
socket arranged to conform to half of the crown 
of the tooth to be fitted; a combined draw. 
and-half-crown swaging plate having a plain 
under face fitted upon the upper face of the 
half crown swaging plate and having a die 
hole flaring at the lower end and conformed 
to the shape of the upper half of the crown 
of the tooth to be fitted, and registering at its 
margin the margin of the socket in the half 
crown swaging plate, and arranged to form 
with such socket a mold for the crown; suit 
able means for detachably clamping the plates 
together, and suitable means for drawing and 
swaging a ductile thimble to fit the mold. 
2. A swaging machine comprising the base; 
the half-crown swaging plate provided with 
the central post hole, the half-crown sockets 
arranged around the post hole in a circle, 
suitable catch devices and the peripheral re 
cess; the combined draw - and - half-croWn 
swaging plate provided with the central post 
hole and with the circularly arranged draw 
and swaging holes respectively flaring at 
their lower ends and conforming to the rims 
of their respective swaging sockets in the 
half-crown swaging plate; the center post Se 
cured to the base and passing through the 
half-crown swaging plate and the combined 
draw-and-half-crown swaging plate; means 
mounted on the post for clamping the plates 
to the base, and a power operated punch for 
drawing and swaging, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. The combination of the base; the half 
crown swaging plate provided with the cen 
tral post hole and the circularly arranged 
sockets; the draw-and-half- crown swaging 
plate provided with the central post hole and 
the circularly arranged holes corresponding 
with the sockets in the half-crown SWaging 
plate; the pivot-post passing through the post 
holes in the two plates and secured to the 
base; the thumb-nut provided with the plate 
engaging sleeve; and the power operated 
punch arranged with its extended axis inter 
secting the path of such holes and Sockets. 
4. A crown swaging machine having two 
swaging plates pivoted to a press frame and 
provided with a circularly arranged series of 
holes and sockets in the plates for forming 
the crowns, and having its punch arranged 
with its extended axis intersecting the path 
of such holes and sockets. 
5. In a swaging machine, the combination 
of the base; the two swaging plates provided 
respectively with a pivot-post hole; the pivot 
post passing through such holes and fastened 
to the base; and the plate - engaging-and 
clamping sleeve detachably attached to the 
pivot-post. 
6. In a swaging machine the combination 
of the base; the two swaging plates provided 
respectively with a pivot-post hole; the pivot 
post passing through such holes and fastened 
to the base; and the thumb nut provided with 
the plate engaging sleeve and arranged to 
screw upon the top of the pivot-post. 
7. The crown swaging machine set forth 
comprising the base provided with the two 
screw-threaded post-hole sockets; the upper 
plate provided with the pivot post-hole and 
two circularly arranged series of crown form 
ing holes; the lower plate provided with the 
pivot-post hole; the pivot-post screw-threaded 
at its opposite ends; the thumb-nut provided 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
fo 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
Ios 
O 
II 5 
I 25 
65 
 
4. 
533,195 
with the plate-engaging sleeve arranged to the crown; and means for adjustably pivot 
Screw upon the top of the pivot-post, and ling the plates to the press frame. 
means for fixing the thumb-nut to the post. 
8. In a crown swaging machine the E. 
nation with the punch and press frame, of . 
the two swaging plates each having two cir- 
cularly arranged series of holes for forming 
JAYES R. TOWNSEND, 
M. i. SHEEKS. 
Witnesses: 
A. PIERSON HAYS. 
A V 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533295.txt	(No Model.) 
C. HALL. 
PIPE WRENCH, 
 
No. 533,295, 
Patented Jan. 29, l895. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES HALL OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
PPE-WRENCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 533,295, dated January 29, 1895. 
Application filed July 23, 1894, Serial No, 518,332, (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES HALL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city, 
County, and State of New York, have invented 
an Improvement in Pipe-Wrenches, of which 
the following is a specification. 
In Letters Patent No. 516,485, granted to me 
March 13, 1894, there is a wrench containing 
a hook-shaped jaw and also a jaw at the end 
of the lever handle, the pivot of the hook 
shaped jaw forming a nut that is adjusted by a 
Screw within a slot, and in my Patent No. 
521,312, the inner surface of the hook-shaped 
jaw sets back from the line of the adjacent 
side of the handle jaw, so as to give more space 
for the reception of a large size pipe. 
I find that the principal wear in using this 
pipe Wrench comes upon the angle at the edge 
of the jaw and the end of the lever handle, 
and that it is advantageous to grind the jaw 
SO as to keep this edge sufficiently sharp, and 
in addition to the foregoing features I find 
that when the aforesaid wrench is made use 
of for turning a nut or a bolt, it is advanta 
geous to have the point of the jaw at the end 
of the lever handle project so as to be adapted 
to pass down into a recess or between one pro 
jection and another in grasping the nut or 
bolt that is to be turned. . 
In order to adapt my aforesaid wrench to the 
various uses desired, I make the jaw at the 
end of the lever handle removable so that it 
may be ground from time to time to keep its 
edge sufficiently sharp and also to allow for 
the removal of one jaw and the substitution 
of another in case of prolonged wear or break 
age, and the acute-angled edge of the jaw at 
the end of the lever handle is set back from 
the line of the side of such lever handle so as 
to be distant from the inner side of the adja 
cent hook and facilitate the use of the wrench 
with a large sized pipe, and this jaw at its op 
posite edge projects beyond the side of the 
lever handle so as to be adapted to the grasp 
ing of a bolt head, nut or similar polygonal 
article, thus more fully adapting my improved 
pipe Wrench to the ordinary uses of a monkey 
wrench. 
In the drawings, Figure l is a side view of 
my improved wrench with a portion of the 
handlebroken off. Fig. 2 is a view of the base 
of the removable jaw detached, and Fig. 3 is 
an end view of the wrench with the remov 
able jaw detached and with the Swinging jaw 
in section at the line at ac of Fig. 1. 
The handle A is slotted longitudinally for 
the reception of the screw D which passes 
through the pivot C of the swinging hook 
shaped jaw F, such pivot C forming a nut to 
the screw D, and the swinging hook-shaped 
jaw E is made with two strap portions 6 that 
pass one at each side of the lever handle A at 
its slotted portion, and the edge or side 10 of 
the lever handle A is in line with the edge or 
side 11 of the swinging hook E when the parts 
stop one against the other, as seen in Fig. 1, 
but the chisel-shaped edge 12 of the jaw K 
is not adjacent to the side 11 but sufficiently 
distant therefrom to aid in adapting the 
wrench to the reception of large sized pipes, 
and the jaw Kis made of a separate piece from 
the lever handle so that it may be of hardened 
steel, and the parts slip together transversely 
with dovetailed interlocks that are slightly 
tapering, so that the jaw K can be firmly con 
nected with the end of the lever handle by be 
ing driven on transversely, or it may be sepa 
rated by driving it in the opposite direction; 
and by making the dovetailed interlocks in 
the manner represented, the block 15 at the 
end of the lever handle A over which the dove 
tailed portions of the jaw pass, firmly sup 
ports the jaw while in use, and the end 14 of 
such jaw projects sufficiently beyond the edge 
of the lever handle to allow the end of the jaw 
to pass in between nuts or other articles that 
may be adjacent to the nut or bolt to be turned 
by the action of the wrench, thus greatly fa 
cilitating the use of this pipe Wrench upon 
polygonal articles. 
It will be observed that the hook-shaped end 
5 of the swinging jaw E is also reduced in 
width so as to be adapted to use the same as 
an ordinary wrench. 
The bearing blocks F may be provided for 
the end of the screw D, as in my aforesaid 
patent. 
- 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination in a Wrench, of a lever 
handle a separate jaw at the end of the lever 
handle having a flat face standing at an acute 
angle to the lever handle and with a chisel 
edge at one end and the other end projecting 
beyond the side of the lever handle and re 
9o 
95 
IOO 
25 
35 
45 
 
3 
583,295 
... O 
cessed centrally and transversely upon its un 
der surface to receive a dovetailed projection 
at the end of the lever handle, a swinging 
hook shaped jaw, and a screw for adjusting 
the swinging hookin relation to the lever han 
dle, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination in a wrench, of a lever 
handle a separate jaw at the end of the lever 
handle having a flat face standing at an acute 
angle to the lever handle and with a chisel. 
edge at one end and the other end projecting 
beyond the side of the lever handle and re 
cessed centrally and transversely upon its un 
der surface to receive a dovetailed projection 
at the end of the lever handle, a swinging 
hookshaped jaw having strap projections that 
pass at each side of the lever handle, a pivot 
pin passing through such strap projections 
and forming a nut and an adjusting screw in 
2 o a mortise in the lever handle and acting upon 
the pivot nut C, substantially as set forth. 
 
Ya. 
3. The combination in a wrench, of a lever 
handle having a flat face at the end forming 
an acute angle with the lever handle, a chisel 
edge at one end of the jaw, off-set from that 
side of the lever handle, and the other end of 
the jaw projecting beyond the side of the le 
ver handle, a Swinging hook having a flat jaw 
face that is parallel to the face of the jaw at 
the end of the lever handle when the swing 
ing jaw is stopped against the side of the lever 
handle, straps upon the swinging jaw passing 
at each side of the lever handle, a pivot pin 
passing through such straps and forming a 
nut and a screw acting upon said nut and 
within alongitudinal mortise in the lever han 
dle, substantially as set forth. 
Signed by me this 18th day of July, 1894. 
CHAS. HALL, 
Witnesses: 
. 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
A. M. OLIVER, 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533395.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 533,395, 
 
W. H. PAGE. 
SEGTIONAL BOILER, 
Patented Jan. 29, 1895. 
 
?& ? 
gzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz! 
& 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz! 
ft. Norf IS PETERs co. RHoro-Ho. washineros, p, t, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. PAGE, OF NOR WICH, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE WM. H. 
PAGE BOILER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SECTIONAL BOILER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 533,395, dated January 29, 1895. 
Application filed January 12, 1894, Serial No. 496,665, (No model.) 
D 
To all typhi??, it ??? ??? ????: 
Be it known that II, WILLIAM H. PAGE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Nor 
Wich, in the county of New London and State 
5 of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Sectional Boilers; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, Such as will enable others skilled in the 
Io art to Which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
The nature of the present improvements in 
sectional boilers relates, first, to the employ 
ment of certain heat-deflecting and radiating 
I5 hollow-sections which alternate with one or 
more water-heating flue-sections and afford 
an increased radiating surface, and said ra 
diating Sections are constructed to obviate 
unequal expansion and contraction so as to 
2O avoid the danger of fracture or breakage; 
Second, to a novel form of fire-pot section 
With a large number of individual projections 
cast on the inside thereof and divided or sepa 
rated by intersecting series of vertical and 
25 horizontal grooves or channels, said projec 
tions serving to keep the water in the hollow 
fire-pot-section from chilling the fire, whereby 
the fire can be kept as bright at the sidesad 
jacent to the fire-pot as in the center of the 
3o bed of fuel, and, thirdly, to means whereby 
water can be heated in the boiler for supply 
ing hot water for domestic purposes, all as 
will be hereinafter more fully described and 
pointed out in the claims. 
I have illustrated the preferred embodi 
ment of my improved sectional boiler in the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of 
this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view. Fig. 
4o 2 is a detail perspective view of one of the 
hollow heat-radiating or deflecting sections, 
looking at the bottom side thereof, and Fig. 
3 is a top plan view of the section shown by 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a like view of a water-heat 
45 ing flue-section. Fig. 5 is a detail view of a 
part of the fire-pot section, illustrating the 
individual projections on the interior thereof. 
Fig. 6 is a detail view of the water-heating 
circulating tank for supplying hot water for 
35 
5o domestic purposes. 
 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
A is the fire-pot section; B, the dome or up 
per section; and C, D, D, are the interme 
diate sections between the fire-pot, A, and 55 
the dome, B, which, in connection with the 
enveloping jacket, E, form the sectional boiler 
embodying my present invention. 
The dome B is made in the form of a hol 
low casting to contain the hot water and steam 6o 
that may be generated in the boiler, and 
through this dome extends the smoke-pipes, 
b, which conduct the smoke and products of 
combustion from the chamber, e, to the Smoke 
space, F, above the dome, B, from which 65 
Smoke-space leads the exit pipe, if 
The fue section, C, of my boileris cast with 
upper and lower nipples, c, c', which are in 
ternally screw-threaded, a series of radial 
arms, c', and a hollow rim, c', all of which 7o 
are hollow and communicate to form Spaces 
for the circulation of the water to be heated 
therein. This section C, is arranged between 
the dome, B, and the crown-sheet of the fire 
pot, A, at a suitable distance from said parts, 75 
and the nipples, c, c', of the section C, are con 
nected with similar nipples on the sides of 
the adjacent sections, D, D, and these latter 
sections are connected in like manner, re 
spectively, with the dome, B, and a water-re- 8o 
ceptacle or depression, a, in the crown sheet, 
a', of the fire-pot, A, in such a manner that 
the water is free to circulate through the 
whole series of sections, A, B, C, D, D, form 
ing the improved boiler. Said section, C, fur- 85 
thermore, has its radial hollow arms, C, 
spaced to provide the smoke passages or flues, 
C', between said arms, through and around 
which flues the heat and products of combus 
tion are compelled to pass, as the section, C, go 
is made of such diameter as to closely fit 
within the jacket, E, and thereby prevent, in 
a great measure, the passage of the products 
of combustion between the jacket, E, and the 
hollow rim, c', of the section. 
The heat-deflecting and radiating Sections, 
D, D, alternate with the flue section or sec 
tions, C, and it is evident that I can employ 
any desired number of these sections, C, D, 
according to the desired capacity of the boiler, Ioo 
95 
588,895 
7 ? 
75 
9o 
95 
? ? ? 
IO 
II5 
5 
but in the accompanying drawings, illustrat 
ing one embodiment of the invention, I have 
only shown one section, C, and two sections, 
D. These sections, D, are disposed on oppo 
site sides of the section, C, one between the 
fire-pot and the section, C, and the other be 
tween the dome, B, and the section, C, al 
though this arrangement is not essential and 
is varied when more than one section, C, is 
employed. The sections, D, are made of less 
diameter than the section, C, and they do not 
contact with the jacket, E. Hence a space is 
provided between the jacket and each sec 
tion, D, through which spaces the products of 
combustion are compelled to pass, as they can 
not go through the sections D. Said sections, 
ID, are hollow, similar to the flue-sections, C, 
and they have the radial arms, rim, and nip 
ples, the latter being connected to the dome, 
the fire-pot and the flue-section, C, for con 
tinuous circulation of water; and these sec 
tions, D, provide increased radiating surfaces 
within the boiler and they serve to deflect the 
heat and products of combustion, to cause 
the same to take a sinuous or circuitous course 
around the edges of the section D, thence 
through the flues of the section, C, then 
around the other section, D, and so on until 
the heat passes through the smoke-pipes, b, 
and thence to the smoke-space, F. 
If the sections D were cast to present a 
solid unbroken surface to the action of the 
heat and products of combustion, they would 
be subject to unequal expansion and con 
traction and liable to become broken or 
cracked; and to overcome this objection, I 
Construct each section, D, in the manner 
shown by Figs. 2 and 3, which construction 
compensates for such unequal expansion and 
contraction and also serves to retain the heat, 
and deflect the current passing through the 
boiler. Each section, D, is cast in single 
piece with a series of narrow slots, d, which 
extend radially from the central opening for 
a suitable distance near to the hollow rim of 
the Section, and on the lower side of this cast 
ing is the series of radial, hollow arms, d", and 
the hollow rims, d', said arms extending from 
the nipples at the center of the section out to 
and joined with the rim, d', and the arms are 
disposed alternately with relation to the nar 
row slots, d, in the webs between the hollow 
arms. This construction of the section in 
Sures absorption of the heat, as the ribs and 
flanges detain the same in a measure, so as to 
heat the water in the section, D, and the cur 
rent of heat, smoke, &c., is caused to pass 
around the edges of the section D, with the 
possible exception of a small quantity of gas 
which may pass through the slots, d, while at 
the same time, the section is not liable to 
crack or break because the narrow slots, d, 
compensate for un equal expansion and con 
traction. 
The fire-pot section, A, shown in Figs. 1 and 
4, is cast hollow to contain water, as is usual 
in this class of boilers, and on its inner sur 
face, is cast a large number of individual pro 
jections, a ', which are arranged in series 
throughout the whole inner surface of the 
fire-pot, said projections being divided or 
separated by the series of vertical and hori 
zontal grooves or channels, a'". These pro 
jections are so well defined that they extend 
from the surface of the fire-pot and they serve 
to prevent the fuel from having direct contact 
with the walls of the fire-pot and also obviate 
the cold water in the water-space of the fire 
pot from chilling the fire, serving a better 
purpose than the common fire-brick lining 
and enabling a bright fire to be kept at the 
sides of the fire-pot, just next to the Walls 
thereof, as at the center of the bed of fuel. 
In Figs. 1, 5, and 6 of the drawings, I illus 
trate a tank G within the boiler and circu 
lating pipes, g, g', whereby cold Water may 
be supplied to the tank and hot Water con 
veyed to any suitable place for domestic pur 
poses. This tank, G, is preferably located 
within the combustion chamber of the fire 
pot, to be exposed directly to the heat and 
products of combustion therein, and the tank 
is attached to, or suspended from, the crown 
sheet, a?, of the fire-pot in any suitable way, 
said tank being arranged close to the crown 
sheet so as to be out of the way. This tank 
is constructed to cause the cold Water ad 
mitted by the inlet pipe, g, to circulate Within 
the same so as to be heated therein and de 
liver hot water to the outlet pipe, g. In Fig. 
5, the tank consists of a hollow rim, h, with 
radial arms, h', and with a partition, h', be 
tween the points where the inlet and outlet 
pipes are connected to the tank, but in Fig. 
6, the shell of the tank is divided by a parti 
tion, i, equivalent to the partition, h', and 
which partition i extends from one side of the 
tank nearly to the opposite side thereof, SO as 
to leave a space, i, through which the cold Wa 
ter from the inlet pipe and one chamber can 
pass into the other chamber and thence to the 
outlet pipe. These pipes, g, g', extend verti 
cally.through one of the flues in the crown 
sheet of the fire-pot and then they are led 
horizontally through the casing, E, to the out 
side of the boiler, from which said pipes are 
continued to any desired place. 
It is evident that changes in the form and 
proportion of parts and details of construc 
tion of the mechanisms herein shown and de 
scribed as an embodiment of my invention 
can be made without departing from the spirit 
or sacrificing the advantages of my invention, 
and I therefore reserve the right to make 
such alterations as fairly fall within the Scope 
of the same. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a sectional boiler, a heat deflecting 
section consisting of a hollow hub, a hollow 
rim, a series of radial hollow arms united with 
said hub and rim, and slotted webs which fill 
the spaces between the radial arms, the hub 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
?? 
65 
m 
583,895 
1. 
? 
O 
andrim, said webs presenting practically con 
tinuous surfaces with the arms, rim and hub 
to prevent the passage of heat through the 
section and defect the heat and products of 
5 combustion around the hollow rim of said 
section, in combination with a fire pot, a dome, 
a casing, and a section of greater diameter 
than the heat-deflecting section to extend to 
the annular casing and coupled to the said 
heating section, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
2. In a sectional boiler, a heat-deflecting 
section D cast in a single piece of metal with 
a series of narrow slots, hollow rim, and ra 
dial arms which alternate with said slots, 
combined with a fire-pot, a dome, and the 
flue-sections alongside of the heat deflecting 
section, substantially as described. 
3. In a sectional boiler, the combination 
with a dome, of a fire-pot having its crown 
sheet provided with a water chamber, and the 
series of hollow sections, C, D, alternately dis 
posed with relation to each other in a smoke 
chamber between the dome and crown sheet 
and having nipples which are connected to 
form a continuous water-circulating chamber 
through said fire-pot, dome and the sections, 
the section, C, having the smoke-flues, and 
the sections, D, presenting continuous sur 
faces for deflecting the heat and products of 
combustion but provided with slots to com 
pensate for unequal expansion and contrac 
tion, substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
4. In a sectional boiler, a fire-pot provided 
25 
35 
 
5. In a sectional boiler the combination 45 
with a surrounding water space and having 
its inner surface cast with a multiplicity of 
projections or teats a' which are closely air 
ranged in relation to each other and separated 
by intersecting grooves or channels, whereby 4o 
the inner surface of the fire-pot is made up 
entirely of thickened metal to prevent the 
cold water from chilling the fire and dispense 
with the use of a fire brick lining, as set forth. 
with a s fire-pot having its crown sheet pro 
vided with smoke flues, of a hollow heating 
tank suspended from said crown sheet within 
the fire-pot, and provided with a division wall 
and with inlet and outlet ports situated on 5o 
opposite sides of said division wall, and the 
circulating pipes, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
6. In a sectional boiler, the combination 
with a fire-pot having its crown sheet pro- 55 
vided with smoke flues, of a suspended wa 
ter-tank attached to the crown-sheet and di- . 
vided by a partition into connectedchambers, 
and inlet and outlet pipes connected to the 
tank on opposite sides of the partition and 
extending through one of the smoke-flues in 
the crown-sheet of the fire-pot, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
?? 
WILLIAM. H. PAGE. 
Witnesses: 
LUCIUS BROWN, 
DONALD G. PERKTNS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533496.txt	(No Mode.) 
S. O. ROOT, 
WISE, 
No. 533,496, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895, 
N N N R S 
VizzZeSS eS 
Z72efe: 
7s. 
-z-2-e- 
-z, y 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SANFORD O. ROOT, OF LODI, NEW YORK. 
VSE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 533,496, dated February 5, 1895. 
Application filed June 4, 1894, Serial No. 513,406. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
70 (22 Zvuot, it inay concern. 
Tike letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the several views. 
Be it known that I, SANFORD O. RooT, 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lodi, 
ings by letter, A designates the bench or other 
in the county of Seneca, State of New York, 
support to which the wise is attached, one of 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
the jaws being provided with a bracket or lug 
provements in Vises, of which the following is 
a Specification, reference being had therein to 
A' for its attachment thereto as shown in 
the accompanying drawings. 
Fig. 1. 
B and B are the jaws of the vise. They 
This invention relates to certain new and 
Useful improvements in vises and it has for 
are each formed with a tubular enlargement 
its objects among others to provide a simple, 
bandb' respectively through which works the 
ratchet rod. The jaw B, I will term the fixed 
cheap, durable and efficient wise with the 
jaw and the jaw B' the movable jaw. The 
parts SO constructed and arranged that by a 
single motion of the operating lever the jaws 
jaws are connected by the crossed arms C and 
C the upper ends of which are pivotally at 
will be moved a considerable distance, and the 
tached to the shanks of the jaws as shown in 
maximum amount of power can be most eco 
Fig. 1 and the arms are pivoted together at 
nomically used, the minimum amount being 
ample for ordinary purposes. The jaws are 
their point of intersection on a suitable 
connected by toggle levers and through the 
pivot c. 
D is the ratchet rod. It is provided upon its 
jaws passes a rod which is provided with 
teeth for the engagement of a retaining pawl 
under face for a portion of its length with 
and on this rod is a revoluble collar against 
teeth as shown at d and near its outer end 
which Works a cam lever mounted adjustably 
with a lug d' which fits in a recess in the boss 
or enlargement of the jaw B' as shown in 
on an extension of the said rod beyond the 
Fig. 1 to prevent turning of the rod. This 
revoluble coliar, this extension having a 
rod passes through the hub e of a collar E 
ratchet with which engages a pawl mounted 
which hub is provided with an annular groove 
On the cam lever. Means are provided for 
disengaging the pawl from the teeth of the 
e' into which extends a pin or screw E' held 
in the enlargement of the jaw B' to permit of 
rod and for opening or spreading the jaws, 
rotary movement of the collar and yet prevent 
Said means being connected to be actuated 
together, first to disengage the pawl and then 
endwise movement thereof. The outer end of 
to separate the jaws, 
this rod carries an extension E in the form 
of a flat plate provided with a plurality of 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
vertical openings e and having its outer edge 
tion will hereinafter appear and the novel 
features thereof will be specifically defined 
toothed as shown at e to form a ratchet as 
by the appended claims. 
seen best in Fig. 3. 
F is the operating cam lever. It is bifur 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
cated at one end as shown best in Fig. 2 the 
bifurcations embracing the extension E of 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
the ratchet rod and being provided with a 
of this specification, and in which 
plurality of openings f the lever being piv 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improve 
ments with the jaws separated. Fig. 2 is a 
oted on the said extension by means of a re 
movable pivot pin G which may be inserted 
perspective view of the cam lever with its 
in any of the holes to change the leverage and 
pawl and pawl-operating mechanism. Fig. 3 
increase the cam surface, the cam portions of 
is a perspective view of the ratchet rod and 
the lever acting against the outer face of the 
its revoluble collar, with the pins removed. 
Fig. 4 is a detail showing the parts in posi 
collar as shown in Fig. 1. 
H is a pawl pivoted on a pivoth held in the 
tion with the removable pin inserted to pre 
vent retrograde movement of the lever on bifurcated end of the lever and working there 
between as shown to engage the ratchet on 
9 o 
95 
O 
I 5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
5o its pivot. 
 
583,496 
d 
s 
20 
35 
45 
55 
the extension E. This pawl is connected at 
its outer end to the rods or links H to the 
Other end of which is connected one end of 
the flat spring I which lies along the handle 
of the lever as shown, being bent at to have 
a bearing against the ever and its other end 
being provided with an opening through 
which passes the pin or stud I' on the lever 
to prevent movement of the spring toward 
the outer end of the handle. 
J is a coiled spring which passes around the 
coupling pin G, with one end attached to the 
enlargement of the jaw B' as shown in Fig. 1 
and its other end attached upon the opposite 
side serves to hold the head of the ratchet 
rod against the head block or collar through 
which said rod passes and materially aids in 
the manipulation of the vise. 
K is a pawl pivoted at k on the enlargement 
of the jaw B as shown in Fig. 1 in position to 
engage the teeth of the under side of the 
ratchet rod. 
T is a lever pivoted at l on the shank of the 
jaw, or some other fixed part, with one end 
arranged under the tail of the pawl and to 
this end of the lever is connected a weightM 
and to the other end is pivotally attached as 
at in the vertical rod N, the other end of which 
is pivotally connected as at n with the foot 
lever N' which in turn is pivotally connected 
as at O with the foot treadle O the inner end 
of which is pivotally supported as at o' from 
a bracket O' attached to the bench or sup 
port A. 
The treadle O has pivotally connected there 
with between its ends as at p one end of the 
vertical connecting rod P the upper end of 
which is pivotally connected as at q with the 
Curved arm or lever Q one end of which is 
pivotally supported as at q' from the bench 
or other Support while its other end presses 
against one of the arms C so that slight press 
lure upon the foot treadle will open the jaws, 
after the pawl has been disengaged from the 
teeth of the ratchet rod. 
With the parts constructed and arranged 
Substantially as above set forth the operation 
will be readily understood. 
The jaws having been forced together to 
clamp whatever is placed between them the 
lever is held in its position by a removable 
pin R, which is inserted through the proper 
openings as shown in Fig. 4 to prevent retro 
grade movement of the lever on its pivot. 
When it is desired to open the jaws the foot 
is placed upon the foot lever N and the lat 
ter pressed downward. This disengages the 
pawl K from the teeth of the ratchet rod, 
when continued downward pressure will op 
erate the curved lever Q to spread the jaws. 
Modifications in detail may be resorted to 
without departing from the spirit of the in 
vention or sacrificing any of its advantages. 
What I claim as new is 
1. The combination with the ratchet rod 
and the jaws, of a pawl mounted to engage 
- 
9 O 
- 
- 
6. The combination with the jaws and 
the ratchet rod, a collar revolubly mounted 
on the rod, and a cam lever acting upon Said 
collar, as set forth. 
2. The combination with the jaws and the 
ratchet rod having an extension with open 
ings and ratchet, of the pawl mounted on one 
of the jaws to engage the ratchet rod, the can 
lever mounted to act upon the rod, and a pawl 
mounted on the lever to engage the ratchet 75 
on the extension of the rod, substantially as 
specified. 
3. The combination with the jaws, of the 
crossed pivoted arms pivotally connected with 
said jaws, the ratehet rod and its pawl, and 
the curved lever acting to spread the jaws, as 
set forth. 
4. The combination with the jaws and their 
pivoted crossed connecting arms, of the curved 
lever, and the foot lever connected there with 
to spread the jaws, as set forth. 
5. The combination with the jaws and the 
ratchet rod and its pawl, of the crossed pivoted 
arms connecting the jaws, the curved pivoted 
lever acting to spread the jaws, the foot lever, 
the foot treadle and connections between the 
lever, as Set 
same and the pawl and curved 
forth. 
the 
ratchet rod, of the collar revolubly mounted. 
on the rod, the cam lever, pivotally mounted 
on the end of the said rod and the spring, car 
ried by the said lever substantially as speci 
fied. 
rod, its pawl, the cam lever pivoted adjustably 
on the head of the rod, the pawl on the lever, 
the spring on the lever and connections be 
tween said lever and the pawl on the lever, 
substantially as specified. 
8. The combination of the jaws, the ratchet 
rod, its pawl, the crossed arms connecting the 
jaws, the pivoted curved lever for spreading 
the jaws, the foot lever connected with a lever 
acting on said pawl, and a treadle pivotally 
connected with the curved lever, substantially 
as specified. 
9. The combination of the jaws, their piv 
oted crossed connecting arms, the ratchet rod 
with head with ratchet and openings, the col 
lar revolubly mounted on the ratchet rod, the 
cam lever adjustably mounted on said head, 
the pawl on the lever engaging the ratchet on 
the head, the spring and connections between 
the same and the lever-pawl, the pawl acting 
on the ratchet rod, the curved lever engaging 
one of the crossed arms, the foot lever, the 
treadle and connections between the foot le 
ver and treadle and the ratchet-pawl and 
curved lever, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
95 
7. The combination of the jaws, the ratchet Iod 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
SANFORD O. ROOT. 
Witnesses: 
GILBERT TOWNSEND, 
D. WOODWORTH TOWNSEND. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533596.txt	(No Model.) 
H, A, HOUSE. 
APPARATUS FOR REFINING METALS BY ELECTROLYSIS, 
No. 533,596, 
 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895, 
A2, e 
(? 
d 
A 
I 
AM 
4/o 
E 
6. 
S 
- 
A 
A? 
A 
o? 
4 
*::: 
3 
S 
$3. 
S2SS 
A 
a 
A 
: 
: 
E 
^ 
Z 
M22zasses 
a 
a 
 
Y-O 
Z22.2%az77 
1%rezz/4. 7%Zease. 
a -0 
22/ Aluc (2cu 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY A. HOUSE, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO ROBERT RINTOUL SYMON, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
AP PARA US FOR REF N N G METALS BY E L E CRO YSS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 583,596, dated February 5, 1895. 
Application filed May 2, l894, Serial No. 509,773, (No model.) 
To aid tufton, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY A. HOUSE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Bridgeport, in the county of Fairfield and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Apparatus 
for the Refining of Metals by Electrolysis, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the drawings accompany. 
ing and forming a part of the same. 
This invention pertains to apparatus for re 
fining metals, particularly silver, by electro 
lysis, and consists in the improvements in the 
Construction of said apparatus which are here 
in after more fully described. 
The object of the invention is to separate 
from the impure or base bullion, the silver in 
a pure State and to recover the other metals 
by the same operation, in a more economical 
and practical manner than has heretofore 
been done. For this purpose I provide, in a 
suitable tank or vat, a horizontal shaft with 
means for rotating the same, and on said 
shaft I mount one or more cathodes and one 
or more anodes of the impure metal to be re 
fined. The cathodes upon which the metal is 
deposited are in the form of segments of a 
disk carried by an insulating support and 
adapted to be alternately connected with the 
circuit while in the solution and cut out of 
circuit during that part of their movement 
when they are out of the solution. The an 
Odes of impure metal are also carried by suit 
able supports and may be cast in the form of 
annular disks or in segments that are secured 
to Such support and similarly arranged to be 
brought into and cut out of the circuit. 
Under each electrode support or carrier, is 
arranged a porous receptacle such as a can 
was bag to retain the impurities or particles 
of metal that may fall off from the electrodes, 
and under all the carriers is a larger bag or 
receptacle. Provision is made for lifting the 
electrodes and these bags and also the main 
bag out of the tank when so desired. 
Above the level of the solution I provide 
brushes that Sweep over the surface of the 
anodes for the purpose of removing all bub 
bles of gas or impurities that may tend to 
form on and adhere thereto, and I also pro 
vide Scrapers that bear on and remove from 
O 
 
55 
the cathodes the film of deposited metal and 
cause it to drop into a trough or suitable de 
vice for retaining it and delivering it into a 
receptacle. 
The details of the apparatus thus generally 
described are illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of my 
improved apparatus. Fig. 2 is a top plan 
view of the same with portions shown in sec 
tion. 
A is a tank or vat of any suitable charac 
ter such as is commonly employed for this 
purpose. In suitable bearings A at the ends 
of this tank, which are preferably open or 
otherwise arranged so that it may be readily 
lifted up or removed from the tank is a rotary 
shaft B having a pulley B', by which rotary 
movement may be imparted to said shaft. 
On the shaft B are mounted one or more 
pairs of electrode supports or carriers, prefer 
ably consisting of disks or circular frames C 
D of insulating material, with hubs E of metal 
which are insulated from the shaft by the in 
sulating material 3 and divided into three or 
more insulated segments by the insulating 
material 2. 
The electrodes are in the form of segments of 
a disk and are inserted in recesses in the sides 
of the carriers, or in any other convenient 
manner secured thereto in contact with the 
hubsegments respectively but separated from 
each other by the insulation of the disk or 
carrier. 
The cathodes F are preferably plates of 
copper with silvered surfaces while the anodes 
G. are composed of the inpure metal to be re 
fined cast in suitable forms. 
Each electrode carrier has suspended be 
neath it a bag H of canvas or other similar 
porous receptacle, and beneath the pair or se 
ries of carriers is a large bag K of the same 
material. 
Secured to the edges of the tank are arms 
LL' of conducting material or carrying con 
ductors that terminate in contact plates or 
brushes that bear on the segmental hubs or 
commutators E, there being one of such 
brushes for each of said hubs. 
M. M designate brushes of bristles or fine 
flexible wires that are supported in any con 
go 
95 
OO 
533,596 
venient manner above the level of the solu 
tion therein and that rub over the surfaces 
of the anodes. 
N N are scrapers or blades also secured 
above the level of the solution, by attachment 
to the sides of the tank or in any other proper 
manner and which bear against the surfaces 
of the cathodes. Under such scrapers are 
troughs or chutes O which are perforated or 
made of fine wire netting, and which lead to 
boxes or other receptacles P. 
The circuit connections are made as indi 
cated in Fig. 2. The anode brushes L are con 
: nected with the positive pole of the generator, 
through wires a C and the other brushes with 
the negative pole through wires b b. 
When the shaft B is rotated and the current 
sent through the circuit it passes from each 
anode segment in the solution to the opposite 
Cathode segment, the electrode segments out 
of the solution being cut out of circuit by the 
position of the brushes LL" with reference 
to the commutators E. By the use of a proper 
solution and by regulating the density of 
the current in a well understood manner the 
silver is deposited on the faces of the cathode 
Segments in a loose spongy state, from which 
it is scraped off by the scrapers N and falls 
into the foraminous troughs beneath the 
Scrapers. Any particles of metal, whether 
detached from the anodes or cathodes, drop 
into the bags under the electrodes and may 
be recovered when the electrodes and bags 
are lifted out. In the same way any metal or 
other particles that may fall into the tank are 
caught in the larger bag. 
The isolation of the electrode segments 
while out of the solution reduces the liability. 
of leakage of current, and obviates thene 
cessity of insulating the scrapers and brushes. 4C 
2. In an electrolytic apparatus, the combi- 5o 
What I claim is 
1. In an electrolytic apparatus, the combi 
nation with a rotating cathode, partially im 
mersed in the solution, of a scraper for re 
moving the film of metal from the surface of 45 
the cathode above the solution as the cathode 
revolves, and means for insulating that part 
of the cathode with which the scraper en 
gages, as set forth. 
nation with a rotary cathode partially im 
mersed, of a scraper for removing the film of 
metal from the surface of the cathode above 
the solution, as the cathode revolves, means 
for insulating that part of the cathode with 55 
which the scraper engages and a receptacle 
for receiving the metal removed by the 
Scraper, as set forth. 
3. The combination with one or more ro 
tary anodes divided into segments and par-6o 
tially immersed in a solution, and a commu 
tator to which the anode segments are con 
nected, of one or more rotary segmental cath 
odes partially immersed in the solution and 
commutators to which said segments are con- 65 
nected. . 
4. The combination with an anode, a ro 
tary segmental cathode, a commutator con 
nected with said segments and adapted to 
connect the submerged segments in circuit, a 7o 
scraper bearing on the cathode segments out . 
. 
of the solution as herein set forth. 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
: 
, 
; 
. 
. 
HENRY A. HOUSE. 
Witnesses: 
; 
: 
: 
: 
; 
: 
JAMES N. CATLOW, 
. R. F. GAYLORD. 
. 
. 
. . . 
O 
I5 
35 
I 
: 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533696.txt	 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 533,696, 
W. YOUNG. 
PROCESS OF MAKING ILLUMINATING GAs, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895. 
s 
EEASE2ns - EH 
  
 
N 
S 
s 
  
 
 
 
 
 
ed S 7 r 
 
s 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 533,696. 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895. 
WYOUNG. 
PROCESS OF MAKING ILLUMINATING GAS, 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
W. YOUNG 
PROCESS OF MAKING ILLUMINATING CAS, 
5. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
No. 533,696, 
s 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895. 
  
2 
 
 
% 
 
the Norris Priers co., Phord-latho., WASHNGTON. O. c. 
W YOUNG. 
PROCESS OF MAKING ILLUMINATING GAS, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895. 
 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 533,696, 
 
 
<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<N 
SN 
 
 
 
The Norris PETERs'Co., PHOTO-L'Ho. washington, D.S. 
W. YOUNG. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
PROCESS OF MAKING ILLUMINATING CAS, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 533,696, 
 
A. 2. 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAMI YOUN G, OF PEEBLES, SCOTLAND. 
PROCESS OF MAKING LLUMINATING-GAS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,696, dated February 5, 1895. 
Application filed May 9, 1894, Serial No. 510,659, (No specimens.) Patented in England June 23, 1893, No. 12,355, 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. YoUNG, con 
sulting chemist, of Briorsford, Peebles, in the 
county of Peebles, Scotland, have invented 
new and useful Improvements in the Produc 
tion of Illuminating-Gas from Mineral Oils and 
for Producing Water Gas, (which have not been 
patented in any country except Great Brit 
ain by Letters Patent No. 12,355, dated June 
23, 1893;) and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art or manufacture to which it 
relates to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to the production 
of illuminating and heating gases by that 
class of processes in which a mass of carbon 
placed in a cupola furnace is fired and blown 
up by a current of air so as to become highly 
heated and at the same time heat up a mass 
of brickwork or other material contained in 
the cupola or an attached chamber, thereaf. 
ter employing the heat so obtained and stored 
up to produce water gas and decompose liq 
uid hydrocarbons to carburet the water gas. 
By all such processes the major part of the 
carbon employed to produce the heat has been 
obtained from sources outside the hydro 
carbon employed and has consisted of anthra 
cite coal, gas coke or other carbonaceous 
Substances, and the water gas has been pro 
duced at the same time that the hydrocarbon 
was decomposed. 
Now most liquid hydrocarbons employed 
for the production of illuminating gas contain 
in their constitution a considerable quantity 
of carbon in excess of what can be rendered 
gaseous by destructive distillation. Especially 
is that the case with crude tarry oils of high 
specific gravity. In existing forms of appara 
tus and as that class of processes are at pres 
ent conducted, that excess of carbon has hith 
erto caused considerable trouble either from 
the carbon being deposited upon and closing 
up the brick-Work passages, or being set free 
as flocculent carbon which being carried for 
ward in the current of gases choked up the 
condensing apparatus rendering the result 
ing tars thick and pitchy. 
This invention has for its object to over 
come those difficulties and it comprises an 
improved process of producing gas from liq 
. . 
. 
uid hydrocarbons so conducted that the ex 
cass of carbon which has hitherto been a 
source of trouble may be eliminated during 
the process of decomposition, in such a form 
and under such conditions as to be available 
to produce by its partial combustion in air the 
heat necessary to decompose the hydrocarbon 
fluids and also to produce water gas sufficient 
to wash out the apparatus and if desired di 
lute the rich hydrocarbon gases. 
The accompanying drawings represent four 
modifications of the apparatus which I be 
lieve will most conveniently and commer 
cially produce the results aimed at. 
Figure 1 is an elevation partly in section 
showing one modification of the general ar 
rangement of apparatus. Fig. 2 is a plan cor 
responding to Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a cross sec 
tion of the gas producing arrangement. Figs. 
4 and 5 are vertical sections at right angles 
to each other of the condensing chests. Fig. 
6 is a plan view of Fig. 5. Figs. 7, 8 and 9 
are respectively sectional, plan and cross sec 
tional views of a modified form of producer. 
Figs. 10, ll and 12 are similar views of a 
modified form of apparatus. FigS. 13 and 14 
show a modification, these figures being ver 
tical sections at right angles to each other. 
Figs. 15 and 16 show a plan and cross section 
of the producer. In these and the other 
drawings hereinafter referred to the same ref 
erence letters are used to mark the same or 
like parts wherever they are repeated. 
The apparatus comprises a vertical cylin 
drical producer A built of riveted boiler 
plates, having in the lower part a combustion 
and water gas generating chamber B, the 
walls of which are built of firebrick and pro 
vided with fire bars B, ash pit B and clean 
ing and clinkering doors B. Over the com 
bustion chamber is built, also of fire brick, a 
decomposing chamber C in which the vapors 
of the liquid hydrocarbons are exposed to the 
action of radiant heat. The walls of the de 
composing chamber C are perforated with a 
series of ports and openings D* and sur 
rounded by annular spaces or flues C and 
C terminating in the stack C provided with 
the valve C. The annular space or flue D 
between the outer wall and the Wall inclos 
ing the space C is for the admission of a sec 
ondary air supply which enters the bottom 
I do 
5 
IO 
(5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
533,696 
7 o 
75 
- 
of the decomposing chamber C by the open 
ings D. Sight holes D* are provided in the 
sides of the producer to allow of the tempera 
ture of these flues being observed. 
The air necessary for the process is supplied 
from any convenient blowing arrangement 
by the pipe E, the primary air for the burn 
ing of the carbon into carbonic oxide gas be 
ing supplied through the valve E' and pipe 
E to the ashpit B, and the secondary air to 
consume the carbonic oxide gas into carbonic 
acid gas by the valve E and pipe E to the 
annular heating space in the flue D. 
The steam necessary for the process is sup 
plied through the pipe F and regulating valve. 
F into the ashpit B through the same pipe 
as the air. 
In the top of the producer there is an open 
ing G provided with a door G' and the outlet 
pipe for the gases G* leading to the seal and 
wash box G' connected up by the pipe G to 
the condensing arrangement H which consists 
of the series of vertical pipes H' rising from 
the main Hand ascending and descending 
alternately from the chests Hand finally de 
scending into the main H to the outlet pipe 
H. leading to the gas purifiers, 
The store tank K for the supply of the hy 
drocarbon fluid to be decomposed is placed at 
such an elevation that the fluid on its way to 
be decomposed can be made to flow through 
the arrangement of pipes K' and valves K* 
through all or any number of the condenser 
chests H8 and through the pipes G' into the 
seal box G' and overflow by the pipes Linto 
the store cistern M from which it is drawn 
and raised by the pump M' through the pipe 
M into the cistern N placed on the top of the 
producer A. From the bottom of the cistern 
N the pipe O provided with the stop cock O' 
is led to the gas outlet pipe G. 
When starting the apparatus the hydro 
carbon fluid to be decomposed is charged 
from the supply tank Kinto the various parts 
of the apparatus so as to seal the condenser 
chests Hand also the main seal box G' and 
overflow into the cistern M and a supply is 
pumped into the cistern N on top of producer 
The combustion and water gas generator 
A. 
B is then charged by the door G' with any 
convenient kind of carbon, preferably anthra 
cite coal, or gas or other description of coke 
and kindled. The valve C on the smoke 
stack C being opened, the primary blast of 
air is turned on by opening the valve Ead 
mitting the air to the ashpit B and the fire 
bars B. The quantity of coke or other fuel 
should have a depth of several feet and on 
this mass of carbon becoming sufficiently 
heated to allow of the kindling of the car 
bonic oxide gas over its surface, the second 
ary air valve E is opened and the air admit 
ted through the pipe E and annular air space 
D and ports Dinto the bottom of the decom 
posing chamber Cand over the surface of the 
carbon. The air valves E and E are ad 
justed so that the carbon will be completely 
consumed into carbonic acid gas. The two 
adjusted blasts of air are kept blowing into 
the chamber B till the desired temperature is 
attained in the mass of carbon in the chamber 
B and in the walls of the decomposing cham 
ber Cand also the walls of the surroundingan 
nular flue spaces C and C. On the desired 
temperature being reached, which can be ob 
served by the sight holes D provided for the 
purpose in thesides of the producer and which 
necessarily varies dependent upon the nature 
of the liquid hydrocarbon being employed, 
but which is soon ascertained in practice, both 
air valves are closed and steam admitted un 
der the firebars by opening the valve F. The 
steam passing up through the carbon in cham 
ber B becomes decomposed into water gas and 
the process is continued till all the air and 
products of combustion have been entirely 
displaced by the water gas. The stack valve 
C is then closed and the flow of steam into 
the chamber stopped or at least so greatly re 
duced that only sufficient water gas is made 
to prevent the vapors of the liquid hydrocar 
bons from their high specific gravity sinking 
through the mass of heated carbon. The ob 
ject of lessening or stopping the production 
of water gas during the decomposition of the 
liquid hydrocarbon is that the presence of 
the water gas interferes with the decomposi 
tion of hydrocarbon vapor in various ways, 
particularly when the decomposition is ef 
fected by radiant heat. The stop cock O' on 
the pipe O is now opened which admits the 
hydrocarbon fluid into the gas outlet pipe G* . 
flowing down which it drops through the 
whole depth of the decomposing chamber C 
upon the surface of the highly heated coke 
in the chamber C where it spreads and is rap- . 
idly volatilized and rising in vapor through 
the decomposing chamber C it is subjected 
to the action of the heat from the walls of the 
chamber becoming to a considerable degree 
gasified. The flocculent carbon and dense 
hydrocarbon set free or produced during the 
decomposing process owing to the slow up 
ward current in the decomposing chamber C 
to a large extent keep falling or get entangled 
in the descending inflowing hydrocarbon 
liquid and agglutinate or cake upon the sur 
face of the hot carbon in a hard or solid con 
dition which will stand the blast of air in 
blowing up for the next run. 
The rate at which the hydrocarbon is al 
lowed to flow into the decomposing chamber 
C and upon the surface of the heated carbon 
B is so adjusted that a considerable quantity 
of the hydrocarbon will escape as vapor and 
accompany that portion that has been com 
pletely gasified. To insure such being the 
case the hydrocarbon fluid is run into the 
chamber at a greater rate at first when the 
temperature of the heat is high, gradually 
slowing as the temperature falls. This is 
automatically accomplished by the greater 
pressure upon the cistern Nat first when full, 
lessening as it empties, but any other conven 
9o 
95 
CSC 
C 
II5 
I 25 
5 
Io 
30 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
588,696 
ient means of adjusting the flow may be used, 
the object being that the hydrocarbon vapor 
accompanying the gasified portion will in con 
densing hold in solution any flocculent car 
bon that may be present and keep the appa 
ratus free from all obstruction and enable the 
flocculent carbon to be returned to the pro 
ducer to form hard coke for use there. The 
gases and vapors leaving the chamber by the 
pipe G enter and pass through the hydrocar 
bon liquid in the seal box G', thence to the 
condensers H where they are subjected to the 
alternate cooling action in the series of ver 
tical pipes H and to the Washing action of 
the hydrocarbon liquid contained in the 
chests H8 which are provided with the ser 
rated partition H (shown in Figs. 4, 5 and 6) 
under which the gases are made to bubble 
and pass through the contained liquid. 
The operation of producing gas by the de 
composition of the liquid hydrocarbon is con 
tinued till the heat in the decomposing cham 
ber falls to a temperature so low that the pro 
cess of gasifying becomes slow. The hydro 
carbon fluid is then stopped by closing the 
stop cock O' and steam is again turned into 
the mass of carbon by opening the valve F, 
still in an incandescent state and sufficient 
water gas produced to sweep out of the cham 
ber to the condensers the residual hydrocar 
bon vapors and gases, and should vapor still 
remain in the flue space it may be swept out 
by means of steam. Sufficient water gas hav 
ing been produced for the purpose, the steam 
is shut off, the stack valve Copened and the 
air valve E for the admission of the primary 
air under the firebars B opened, the second 
ary air supply valve Ebeing then also opened, 
care being taken to see that the carbonic ox 
ide gas fires immediately on the admission of 
the secondary air so as to prevent explosion. 
The ignition of the gas can be readily accom 
plished by inserting a flame of gas or a torch 
through the sight holes B. The two currents 
of air are kept blowing into the chamber till 
the carbon in the producer and the walls of the 
decomposing chamber are again brought up 
to the proper temperature. Meantime a sup 
ply of hydrocarbon fluid is raised by the pump 
M' from the cistern M into the supply cistern 
N on the top of the producer A, and a supply 
of the hydrocarbon liquid as near as can be 
calculated equal to what is being gasified in 
the producer run into the condensing arrange 
ment H from the tank K. On the desired 
temperature being attained in the carbon in 
the producer and in the walls of the decom 
posing chamber, both the air valves are closed 
and the steam turned on under the fire bars 
and up through the carbon, producing water 
gas to displace the products of combustion, 
the Stack being then closed and the steam 
stopped or checked and the hydrocarbon fluid 
run into the chamber all as before described. 
The processes of blowing up with air so as 
to heat the carbon and the walls of the de 
composing chamber to the desired tempera 
Io. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
8 
ture and thereafter employing the stored up 
heat to produce water gas and decompose the 
liquid hydrocarbon are carried on consecu 
tively in a continuous manner. 
The carbon originally charged into the com 
bustion chamber is rapidly consumed by the 
air blast and in decomposing the steam into 
water gas, but from the manner of conduct 
ing the process by which the hydrocarbon fluid 
and condensed products are returned from 
the condenser to the gas producing chamber 
there is deposited upon the surface of the 
carbon contained in the combustion and gas 
generating chamber a quantity of carbon 
from the decomposed liquid hydrocarbon 
equivalent to the carbon consumed in per 
forming the operation of the process. Indeed 
most liquid hydrocarbons when gasified in 
accordance with this invention produce more 
fixed carbon than is necessary to simply gasify 
themselves and supply Water gas to Wash out 
the apparatus, and in such cases it is neces 
sary either to withdraw a part of the carbon 
from the producer, which is done through the 
clinkering doors Bby withdrawing the guide 
piece P and raking out the desired quantity 
of coke, or the surplus carbon is employed to 
produce a larger quantity of watergas. When 
such is the object of the process the gas pro 
ducer is preferably modified as shown in Figs. 
7, 8 and 9, which are respectively sectional 
elevation, plan and cross section of the pro 
ducer. The essential modification consists in 
altering the flue and air spaces surrounding 
the decomposing chamber C by which the 
secondary air supply can be more highly 
heated and introduced to the carbonic oxide 
gases coming from the combustion chamber 
at the top of and external to the decomposing 
chamber instead of at the bottom and inter 
nal as in the previously described arrange 
ment thereby enabling a much larger quan 
tity of carbon to be accumulated in the pro 
ducer. C' and C are the annular spaces or 
flues for the products of combustion termi 
nating in the smoke stack Cand the second 
ary air to be heated enters by the pipe E into 
the heating annular space D descending and 
again ascending and meeting the carbonic 
oxide gases as they come through the ports 
D at the top of the decomposing chamber. 
The admission of the secondary air at the 
top and external to the decomposing chamber 
allows the surplus carbon deposited from the 
liquid hydrocarbon to accumulate not only 
in the combustion chamber but also partially 
in the decomposing chamber and to become 
highly heated not only by the hot producer 
gases from the combustion chamber but also 
by the combustion of the carbonic oxide gas 
by the secondary air around the walls of the 
decomposing chamber. The process of gasi 
fying the liquid hydrocarbon by this modified 
construction is in every other respect identi 
cal with that previously described. The in 
creased quantity of carbon contained in the 
producer enables a greater store of heat to 
75 . 
go 
95 
OO 
IO 5 
Oy 
II5 
I2O 
I 25 
I 30 
O 
4 
accumulate each time the carbon is blown up 
with air. This increased store of heat in turn 
is devoted to a larger production of water gas 
intermittent with the decomposition of the 
liquid hydrocarbon; or should the carbon 
accumulate then the process may be so modi 
fied that the accumulated heat of the one 
blowing up of the generator may be as far as 
possible devoted to gasifying the liquid hy 
drocarbon, only sufficient water gas being 
made to wash out the apparatus, the next two 
or more blowings up of the carbon to incan 
descence being devoted to the production of 
water gas alone. When such a modified pro 
cess is adopted the steam for the production 
of the water gas may be introduced by the 
pipe S shown in dotted lines into the flue space 
C descending which it ascends the flue space 
C and getting highly heated passes down 
through the highly heated carbon getting de 
composed into Water gas which would pass 
into the ashpit B and away by the pipe S, 
shown by dotted lines, to any suitable cooling 
arrangement. 
Instead of producing the Water gas and de 
composing the liquid hydrocarbon alternately 
the two processes may be conducted simul 
taneously, but in Such a case it is necessary 
to employ two or more combustion and de 
composing chambers in one producing ar 
rangement. Such an arrangement of appa 
ratus is shown in Figs. 10, 11 and 12, which 
are respectively a sectional elevation, a plan 
and a cross section of a producer consisting 
of three separate combustion chambers B, B, 
B, and decomposing vessels C, C, C. Each 
combustion and gas generating chamber B is 
provided with clinker doors B8 and ashpit 
B, primary air valves E, E, E, as also sepa 
rate valves F, F, F, for the admission of 
steam. The three separate decomposing 
chambers C, C, C, are surrounded by the flue 
space C' in which the carbonic oxide gases 
coming from all the combustion chambers B, 
B, B, through the ports D* are consumed to 
form carbonic acid gas by the secondary cur 
rent of air admitted by the valve Eand pipe 
E into and superheated in the flues D, D, 
the products of combustion passing away by 
the stack C. In producing illuminating gas 
by this modification, each of the three com 
bined combustion gas generating and decom 
posing chambers is brought into working 
order and operated in the same manner as 
with the construction already described. 
Instead however of the whole three being 
used at the one time in the same sequence of 
operating, one of the three sections of the 
producer may be producing Water gas alone, 
while the other two are employed to decom 
pose the hydrocarbon fluid, or two sections 
may be employed producing Water gas while 
the other is alone devoted to the decomposi 
tion of the liquid hydrocarbon and each sec 
tion may be used in sequence, that is the sec 
tions may be used alternately for the produc 
tion of water gas and decomposing the liquid 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
588,698 
9 O 
95 
75 
hydrocarbon, using the stored up heat of the 
one blowing up with air to produce watergas, 
and the next blown-up to decompose the 
liquid hydrocarbon, each of the sections be 
ing provided with the steam valves F, F, F, 
and the valves O', O, O, and pipes O, O, O, 
for the admission separately of a Supply of 
steam and of liquid hydrocarbon into each 
section of the producer as desired. The com 
mingled gases from the three sections pass 
away by the pipe G to the condenser H. 
Some hydrocarbon fluids during the pro 
cess of volatizing, sponge or SWell up in foam 
and such hydrocarbon fluid when dropped on 
the top of the heated carbon contained in 
the combustion and gas generating chamber 
sponges up and closes the spaces between 
the carbon and impedes the process of gasi- 85 
fication. 
To overcome that difficulty a modified ar 
rangement is adopted as shown in Figs. 13 
and 14 which are respectively vertical sec 
tions at right angles to each other and Figs. 
15 and 16 which are a plan and cross section 
of the producer. The essential features of dif 
ference in the modification are the placing of . 
the decomposing chambers in a sloping in 
stead of a horizontal position to prevent the 
hydrocarbon fluid dropping on to the top of 
the carbon in the combustion and gas pro 
ducing chamber. The decomposing chambers 
consist of a series of retortS or chambers C 
made of fire brick or other refractory or fire 
resisting material. These are placed at a 
slight inclination alternately in the reverse 
direction and are connected by the chambers 
C provided with the access doors C. The 
lower inclined decomposing chamber C is in 
direct communication through the opening 
C with the combustion, and gas generating 
chamber B and the upper inclined decompos 
ing chamber has an opening D' communicat 
ing with the flue space C around the outside 
of the decomposing chambers C. The upper 
inclined chamber is provided with a mouth 
piece G with door G' connected by the pipe 
G to the seal box G'. The decomposing 
chambers Care provided with iron Sole plates 
to prevent the liquid hydrocarbon from pene 
trating the fire clay soles of the chambers and 
the chambers are strongly bound by fire brick 
blocks placed in the flue space to prevent dis 
integration of the clay retorts. This modified 
construction is operated substantially in the 
manner already described, the primary air be 
ing supplied through the valve Eandpipe E' 
and the secondary air by the valve Eand pipe 
E to the heating flues. D, the carbonic oxide 
gases from the combustion chamber meeting 
the secondary air as it enters the flue space 
C through the ports D in the upper cham 
ber C and the combustion of the carbonic 
oxide gases taking place in the space or flue 
around the decomposing chamber walls. The 
only essential difference is that instead of 
the liquid hydrocarbon dropping vertically 
through the decomposing chamber upon the 
Too 
To5 
IC 
II5 
I 25 
 
583,696 
O 
35 
45 
hot carbon it is allowed to flow from the sup- form, then such liquid hydrocarbons require 
ply tank down the pipe G into the upper in- to be passed back through the condensing 
clined decomposing chamber down the bot- arrangement so as to enable the water and . 
tom of which it flows to the second chamber benzole to be isolated and removed and fit 
and so on to the bottom chamber, being in its them for the process of decomposition. 
passage volatilized and in part gasified. 
The gases and vapors coming from the pro 
The large surface area of the bottom of the ducer have so high a temperature that in 
decomposing chamber allows the liquid hy- bubbling through the hydrocarbon liquids in 
drocarbon to spread and volatilize without the seal box G' they heat those liquids up to 
foaming or seriously impeding the action of a temperature considerably over the boiling 
the apparatus. By this arrangement the car- point of water. Even after traveling for 
bon is principally deposited upon the bottom Ward through the first set of condensing 
of the decomposing chambers and has from pipes and entering the first washing chest the 
time to time to be raked down into the com-. vapors and gases will still be little if at all 
bustion and gas generating chamber by means under the boiling point and are still capable 
of suitable tools inserted through the open- of holding in diffusion the volatile benzole 
ings C provided with doors C. The products and water vapor. From this point the tem 
of decomposition coming from the generator perature of the vapor and gases gradually 
are treated in the condenser as already de. falls till a little over that of the atmosphere 
scribed. 
before leaving by the pipe H. Now by caus 
The only remaining parts of this invention ling the tarry liquid hydrocarbons to travel 
requiring explanation are matters relating back against the current of gas and vapor, 
to the nature of the liquid hydrocarbons and and by bringing them into intimate contact 
the modified method of using them or of treat- with the gases and vapors coming from the 
ing them prior to their introduction to the producer, first in the washing chests of the 
condenser, and finally in the seal box, the 
gas generator. 
When the hydrocarbon liquids employed tarry liquid hydrocarbons are gradually 
are free from water and require a low heat 
heated to such a temperature, that the water 
for their decomposition such as is the case 
and volatile hydrocarbons are liberated from 
With natural petroleum and paraffin oils then 
the tar and driven forward into the condenser 
the best results will be obtained by dividing 
chests where they are condensed. In order 
the decomposing process into two stages. 
to isolate or separate the water and hydrocar 
The portion of the oils which is purposely 
bons so liberated, as also water which may 
allowed to escape decomposition in the de 
be derived from steam coming from the pro 
composing chamber in order to keep the floc 
ducer one of the condenser chests is isolated, 
the flow of tar or hydrocarbon liquids being 
culent carbon in Solution and enable it to be 
returned from the condensers to the producer 
by-passed by means of the stop cocks K* on 
requires a higher temperature for its decom- the pipes K', that chest being selected where 
position than would give the best results with the gases and vapors have been so far cooled 
the original oil. 
as to allow of the Water and hydrocarbons be 
To enable the portions to be subjected to ing condensed and collected, the condensed 
the desired temperature the generator is pro-liquid produced being drawn of through the 
vided with two supply cisterns N and N as stop cock K on the chest through the pipe 
shown by Figs. 2 and 8. The fresh oil is K4 into the tank K provided for the purpose. 
The apparatus in the several forms de 
charged into the cistern N' while the con- 
densed returned products are pumped into scribed is applicable for use in the production 
the cistern N. 
of water gas alone, the arrangements for Sup 
When the producer has been nearly blown plying the liquid hydrocarbons being omitted 
up with air and the carbon and the walls of and a supply of solid carbon to replace that 
the decomposing chamber are at a high tem- deposited from such hydrocarbons being fed 
perature and the decomposition of the hydro- into or through the decomposing chamber. 
carbon commenced the returned condensed 
Having thus particularly described my said 
products contained in cistern N are at first invention and arrangement of apparatus 
run into the producer as they require the whereby the same may be carried into effect, 
highest temperature for their decomposition. I wish to state that I make no general claim 
As the temperature of the heat of the carbon for a gas producer in which water gas and 
and the walls of the decomposing chamber carbureted water gas is produced by the al 
falls and becomes suited for the decomposi- ternate blowing up with air to incandescence 
tion of the fresh oil, the returned products of a mass of carbon contained in a combus 
are shut off and the fresh oil in the cistern tion chamber and the heating up of a decom 
N' made to take the place of the returned posing chamber or retort in connection with 
products. 
the same, and thereffter shutting off the air 
When the liquid hydrocarbons are crude and blowing in steam and running into the 
and tarry and contain water, or when as in decomposing chamber hydrocarbon fluid. 
the case of coal tar they contain benzole, Neither do I claim a condensing and Wash 
which it is desired to recover in the liquiding apparatus in connection with such a gas 
- 
7 o 
75 
9o 
95 
roo 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
533,696 
IO 
- 
generator, because these are well known 
forms of apparatus and methods of produc 
ing illuminating and heating gases; but 
What I consider to be novel and original, 
and therefore claim, is- 
The process of decomposing or gasifying 
liquid hydrocarbons to produce illuminating 
gas, which consists in blowing steam through 
a mass of carbon raised to incandescence by 
an air blast in the lower end of a gas pro 
ducer or decomposing chamber to produce 
Water gas for sweeping out the chamber, then 
cutting off the steam and passing liquid hy 
drocarbon in at the top of the decomposing 
chamber and on to the incandescent carbon, 
whereby the hydrocarbon is decomposed and 
illuminating gas is produced, the said gas 
flowing out against the stream of inflowing 
hydrocarbon and being scrubbed by it, so 
that the condensible vapors and flocculent 
 
carbon produced are absorbed and again dis 
charged into the decomposing chamber, and 
the carbon present in the liquid hydrocarbon 
in excess of what can be gasified by-destruct 
ive distillation is isolated and deposited in 
the gas producer so as to render it directly 
available as the source of heat by its partial 
combustion with air to effect the destructive 
distillation of the liquid hydrocarbons and to 
produce water gas sufficient to wash out the 3o 
apparatus, Substantially as described. 
hand and seal the 15th day of March, 1894. 
WM. YOUNG. L. s. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
25 
Witnesses: 
m 
WALLACE FAIRWEATHER, 
C. E., Chartered Patent Agent, 62 St. 
cent Street, Glasgow. 
JOHN ARMSTRONG, Jr., 
Clerk, 62 St.Vincent Street, Glasgow. 
Vin 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533796.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
COMBINED PLANTER, HARWESTER, HAY RAKE, AND CULTIVATOR, 
No. 533,796. 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895. 
J. EHRHARD. 
. 
s 
Sy 
s 
s 
d 
MA04. 
& 
bn 
w 
zee 
ATTORNEYS. 
i 
t 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
COMBINED PLANTER, HARVESTER, HAY RAKE, AND CULTIVATOR, 
No. 533,796, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895. 
J. EHRHARD. 
z72. 
 
 
st g- 
sa 
 
 
 
 
2 
EEF-EO 
ziris t U-32 
Eff Elli? 
id-202 I-II.E.L. 
P-R- H. 
O E. Al-HI- 
t 
--- 
T 
- 
3 
 
 
2EE 
. 
Nes 
11 
AT TORNEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J. EHRHARD. 
COMBINED PLANTER, HARWESTER, HAY RAKE, AND CULTIVATOR, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895, 
No. 533,796. 
AITORNEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
COMBINED PLANTER, HARWESTER, HAY RAKE, AND CULTIVATOR, 
Patented Feb. 5, 1895. 
No. 533,796, 
J. EHRHARD. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
. . . . z? 
 
WITNESSES 
5 NVENTOR 
af 
AT TORNEYS. 
The Norris Perers' co, Phate-urio. washscroN. oc. 
UNITED SAATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH E H R H A R D, OF DII, L E R N E B R ASIKA. 
COMBINED PLANTER, HARVESTER, HAY-RAKE AND CULTIVATOR, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 533,796, dated February 5, 1895. 
Application filed June 28, 1894, Serial No. 515,990. (No model.) 
55 
75 
5 
25 
3 5 
45 
To a zvhot, it may CO2,662772, 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH EHRHARD, of 
Diller, in the county of Jefferson and State 
of Nebraska, have invented a new and Im 
proved Combined Planter, Harvester, Hay 
Rake, and Cultivator, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
agricultural implements, and it has for its ob 
ject to combine in one implement or machine, 
mechanism through the medium of which 
stalks may be cut and ground plowed and cul 
tivated, and whereby corn may be drilled and 
cultivated, and all kinds of smallseedplanted; 
whereby also the machine may be utilized for 
harvesting grass or grain of any description. 
The iavention consists in the novel con 
Struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the machine. 
Fig. 2 is a rear elevation thereof. Fig. 3 is a 
plan view of the cultivating disks and their 
carrying fratme. Fig. 4 is a transverse sec 
tion through the machine, taken essentially 
on the line 4-4 of Fig. 6, looking in a for 
wardly direction. Fig. 5 is a section taken 
practically on the line 5-5 of Fig. 6; and Fig. 
6 is a longitudinal vertical section taken on 
the line 6-6 of Fig. 1. 
In carrying out the invention the frame 
proper of the machine consists of side bars or 
beams 10, having enlarged sections 10 at their 
ends, a front cross bar and a rear cross bar 
12. The forward left-hand axle 13, is a crank 
axle, and is journaled in boxes 14, secured 
upon the forward extension of the left-hand 
frame beam 10, as shown in Fig. 6, and this 
axle has loosely mounted upon it a ground 
The forward right-hand axle 15 is 
wheel 13, 
of like formation as the forward left-hand 
axle, as shown in Fig. 4, and is journaled 
also in boxes 14, located upon the forward ex 
tension of the right-hand beam 10, and carries 
at its outer lower end a ground wheel 15. 
Both of the axles 13 and 15 extend upward 
above the frame, the upper end of the axle 13 
having a plate 13 secured to it, while the up. 
per end of the right-hand axle 15 is provided 
with a similar plate 15. The rear right 
hand axle 16, is of the same construction as 
the axles heretofore described, having loosely 
mounted upon it a ground wheel 16, and the 
upper end of this axle has attached to it a 
plate 16, the axle being held to turn in suit 
able boxes 17. 
The rear left-hand axle 18, is horizontal, 
and is made to run in a sleeve i8, the axle 
having secured upon its outer end the left 
hand rear ground wheel 18; and the sleeve 
1S, has secured to it in any approved man 
ner an upright shaft 18, which is mounted in 
suitable boxes 17, located upon the rear ex 
tension of the left-hand beam of the frame. 
The shaft 18, by reason of its connection with 
the sleeve 18, will in its turn move the ground 
wheel 18 in the same manner as the other 
ground wheels would be moved by turning 
their axles. The upper end of the axle shaft 
18 is secured to a plate 18. 
The pole 19 has secured upon the upper 
portion of its rear end a plate 19, which is 
in alignment with the front plates 13 and 15. 
The rear end of the pole is pivoted upon a 
bracket 20, extending rearwardly and cen 
trally from the front cross bars 11 of the 
frame; and the left-hand plates 13 and 18, 
as shown in Fig. 1, are connected by links 21 
and 22, which links cross one another, the 
right-hand plates 15 and 16', being connected 
in like manner; while the pole plate 19 and 
the plate 13 of the forward left-hand axle 
are connected by links 23 and 24, which are 
parallel with each other, similar links 25 and 
26 being employed to connect the pole plate 
19 with the plate 15 of the forward right 
hand axle. 
A hanger 27, is projected downward from 
the forward central portion of the front cross 
bar 11 of the frame, and this hanger is made 
to support a horizontal forwardly extending 
bar 28, upon which the doubletree 29 is mount 
ed. Thus it will be observed that when the 
team is harnessed, whether it moves to the 
right or to the left the pole 19 will be carried 
in like direction, and the pole in turning, 
through its link connections with the axles, 
will turn all of the wheels in a position to 
9 O 
ICO 
2 
533,796 
o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
so 
55 
frame are pivoted through the medium of 
move with the team, thus enabling the ma 
chine to turn in a short space and at little 
pins 44 at one side of their centers, the pins 
expense of power on the part of the team. 
being made to pass through suitable sockets 
formed upon the outside edges of the sup 
A central cross bar 30, is made to connect 
porting beans 35, as shown in Figs. 3, 4 and 5. 
the side bars of the frame, and this crossbar 
is connected by a brace 31 with the hanger 27, 
In addition to the end plates 42 the frame 
as shown in Fig. 6. A smoothing blade 32, 
consists of a series of auxiliary box-like 
is secured to the lower portion of the hanger 
frames 45, which extend practically from one 
27, and extends vertically downward. between 
end plate to the other, the box frames or bars - 
as they may be called being pivoted at their 
the forward ground wheels to an engagement 
with the surface of the ground, being adapted 
ends in the blocks or brackets 43 pivoted in 
to smooth said surface, and this plate is pro 
the end bars or plates of the frame, whereby 
vided with an opening 32 in the central por 
the box bars 45 have, as it were, rotary move 
tion of its lower edge. 
ment, in the end: bars of the frame, while the 
Two horizontal beams 35, are pivotally con 
end bars have lateral movement in a for 
wardly or rearwardly, direction, upon their 
nected with the front. Smoothing plate 32, one 
supporting bars. 35. . 
at each side of its center, the beams being 
capable of upward movement at their free 
The box. bars, 45 are given their rotary 
movement, or, are shifted as shown in Fig. 5, 
ends. These beams extend well to the rear, 
preferably, between the rear ground wheels, 
by connecting all of the box bars of one frame 
at one of their ends by means of a connecting 
and are attached at their rear ends to a sec 
ond smoothing plate 33, parallel with the front 
bar 46, which, ass shown in Fig. 5, is prefer 
plate 32, this latter smoothing plate.33 being 
ably, provided with a rack 47 at one end, A 
lever,48, is pivoted upon the connecting bar, 
likewise provided with an opening 34 in the 
central portion of its lower edge. The open 
provided with a hand, latch to engage with 
ings in these two plates are preferably of a 
the rack. The lower, end of the said lever, 
triangular, shape, as shown in Fig. 4. 
which extends-down below the box bars, con 
The horizontal beams 35, may be raised 
nects with one of the outer box, bars by 
and lowered by connecting links 36 with their 
means of a link. 49, as shown in Fig. 5. 
rear ends, and carrying said links upward to 
Vertical standards 50, are located in about 
an engagement. With a shaft 37, the links be 
the central portion of each box bar, but one 
member of these standards may be employed 
ing attached to crank arms at the ends of the 
upon any one of the box bars. The standards 
shaft, and the said shaft has attached to it a 
lever 38, which lever, by rocking the shaft, 
shown in the drawings extend down below the 
box bars, and are bent at their lower ends to re 
will cause the beams to be raised or lowered; 
and the lever is provided with the usual 
ceive each a disk cutter 52; and these cutters 
may be employed; as furrow-openers, or for 
thumb latch to engage with the rack. 40, the 
cultivating purposes, or, for the purpose of 
said rack being usually formed upon arms 39, 
projected upwardly, and forwardly, from the 
removing stalks or other, obstructions, from 
the ground, according to the position given 
rear crossbar, 12 of the frame, and in these 
them by inclining the box. bars, upward or 
arms the shaft 37 is journaled, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 6. The driver's seat. 41, is sup 
downward, or by adjusting the disks inde 
ported in any approved mainer upon the arms 
pendently of the box bars, or by adjusting 
39, and these arms may be provided with foot 
both, since the standards carrying the disks 
are adjustable in the box bars independently 
rests for the driver. 
The beams 35, are adapted to carry frames 
of the latter. This adjustment is accom 
plished by attaching to the upper end of each 
A, and the said frames are adapted to carry 
implements for pulverizing the ground, open 
standard a horizontal arm.53, and pivotally 
ing furrows therein or plowing the same, or 
connecting with each of said arms, a lock bar 
54, provided with a series of apertures longi 
the frames may be employed likewise to carry 
tudinally arranged therein, shaped to receive 
Series. Of cutters for removing stalks, &c., 
from the ground. One of the frames is piv; 
a bolt. 55, one of which is located upon each 
otally supported upon each of the said beams. 
bOX bar, as shown in Fig. 3. 
35, preferably near the central portion there 
The entire frame. A, is given a position di 
of, and each beam is provided with a series. 
agonally of its supporting beam, or, the end 
of longitudinally arranged openings or aper 
bars are: held at a right angle to said beams, 
through the medium of links 58, which are of 
tures 42. 
different lengths according to the position re 
The frames consist, as shown in Figs. 3, 4, 
5 and 6, of end plates 42, formed in pairs, 
quired for the, frame, being of the same length 
the plates of each pair being spaced; or the 
when the frame stands straight upon its sup 
porting. bar, ass shown in Fig. 1, and of dif 
Said end plates may be of box construction, 
since they are adapted to receive between ferent lengths when, the frame has a diagonal 
position relative to its supporting bar, as illus 
their upper and lower members the beams 35, 
and these plates carry between their mem. 
trated in Fig. 3. These links 58, as shown in 
Fig. 6, may be provided with a hand grip, 
bers a series of brackets or blocks 43, pivot 
by means of which they are manipulated, and 
plates 42, as . 
ally connected with the end 
shown best in Fig. 3. The end plates of the 
may be made of angular construction, one 
7 o 
75 
So 
go 
Oc 
II5 
I 25 
333,796 
3 . 
75 
3o 
member being adapted to enter an aperture ter, as shown in Fig. 6, the shaft being jour 
42 in the supporting bar 35, the other member naled preferably atoneside of the standard 71. 
The supporting bar of the sickle is raised 
being connected, for example, with a pivot 
or lowered by a chain 72, which is passed 
pin pivoting the brackets or blocks 43 in the 
around a drum 72, located upon or operated 
end bars of the frame. 
by a lever 72, adapted for locking engage 
It will be understood that the standards 50, 
ment with a rack 72, the lever being full 
may be utilized to carry plow blades, culti 
crumed at the right-hand side of the frame. 
vator blades, harrow teeth, or other similar 
A rake is located at the rear of the frame 
tools or implements employed in the cultiva 
of the machine, which rake consists of a series 
tion of the ground. Each standard, as shown 
of teeth mounted loosely upon a shaft 77, 
in Fig. 6, has loosely mounted upon it an arm 
journaled in bearings at the end of the ma 
56, and each of said arms carries a covering 
chine and constituting a rake head, the said 
wheel 57. Therefore, a covering, wheel will 
rake head or shaft being preferably carried 
travel over the path of each disk, since the 
beyond both, of the rear supporting wheels, 
covering wheels are located at the rear of the 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
disks. 
The rake head is provided with crank arms 
A seedbox. 59, is located transversely across 
78, secured to it and extending rearwardly 
the frame of the machine, above the main 
therefrom, the several crank arms being con 
frame and over the space between the cover 
nected by a bar 78, which bar extends under 
ing wheels and disks 52, the said box being 
all of the rake teeth 76. The rake head is 
supported preferably by standards 60, at 
provided with another crank arm 79, extend 
tached to its end portions and to the beams 
ing upwardly therefrom, the said crank arm 
35, whereby the seed box will be raised when 
being connected by a link 80 with a handle 
the said beans are elevated. The seed box 
ver 81, adapted for locking engagement with 
is provided with a series of outlets 61 in its 
a rack 82. Thus by manipulating the lever 
bottom, and a seed distributing cylinder 62, 
81, the rod 78 connected with the rake head 
or other form of seed dropper, adapted to de 
will be raised or lowered, and will therefore 
liver seed to the outlets 61; and each outlet 
raise the rake teeth from the ground, or per 
is in communication with a chute or delivery 
mit them to drop in engagement there with. 
tube 63, these chutes extending downward, 
With reference to the driving mechanism, 
one at the rear of each of the disks 52, or they 
a beveled gear 83, is secured upon the inner 
i may be differently arranged if desired. 
end of the left hand rear axle 18, the said 
A standard 64, is projected upward from 
gear being made to mesh with a like gear 84 
the central rear portion of the pivoted sup 
secured upon a sleeve 85, turning upon the 
35 porting beams 35, being located upon a plate 
rear axle shaft 18. The upper end of the 
65, which connects said beams, as shown in 
sleeve.85 carries a beveled pinion 86, which 
Fig. 1; and this standard 64, is adapted to 
meshes with a like pinion 87, fast upon a hori 
support a seed box. 66, adapted especially for 
zontal shaft 88, the said shaft 88 being pro 
use in planting corn. This box is provided 
vided with another pinion 89 at its forward 
with an outlet 67 in its bottom, in direct com 
end, meshing with a beveled gear 90, located 
munication with a chute or delivery tube 
upon the shaft 75 imparting movement to the 
68, extending downward to within a prede 
sickle, and this gear 90, by meshing with a 
termined distance from the ground. Any 
gear 91 upon a transverse shaft 92, will com 
form of seed dropper may be employed, that 
municate motion to the said dropping mech 
shown in the drawings consisting of a disk 
anism of the corn receiving box 66, this being 
69, mounted to turn in the bottom of the seed 
accomplished by securing a beveled pinion 93 
box and provided with a series of seed pockets 
upon the inner end of the shaft 92 to engage 
70, adapted alternately to register with the 
with a beveled gear 94 secured to the seed 
outlet 67 and deliver the corn thereto. It 
dropping disk 69. 
will be observed that by adjusting the sup 
The shaft 92, extends beyond the left-hand 
porting beams 35, the cultivating and seed 
side of the machine, and carries a sprocket 
dropping devices will be likewise adjusted. 
wheel 95 connected by a belt 96 with a second 
A hanger 7, see Figs. 2 and 6, is projected 
sprocket wheel 97 located upon a short shaft 
downward from the rear portion of the left 
97 journaled upon the left-hand end of the 
hand side beam 10 of the frame, and a bar 72. 
seed box 59. This shaft carries in its turn a 
is hinged to the bottom of this hanger, which 
pinion 97, which is adapted to mesh with a 
bar extends transversely across the bottom of 
gear 98 located upon the driving shaft 62 of 
the machine a predetermined distance from 
the seed dropping cylinder 62 in said box. 
the ground beyond the right-hand rear ground 
The gear 98 is preferably a cone gear, as shown 
wheel 16, as shown in Fig. 1, being supported 
in Fig. 1, in order that the speed at which the 
at its outer extremity by a small wheel 73, 
said cylinder shall travel may be regulated. 
and a sickle bar 73, is pivotally connected 
It will be understood that when the machine 
with the outer end of the supporting bar 72, 
is employed for planting corn, for example, 
the sickie or cutter of which is operated 
the seed box 59 adapted for drilling or to re 
through the medium of a pitman 74, which is 
ceive small seed, may be disconnected from 
connected with an upright shaft 75, through 
the driving mechanism, or removed, and that 
the medium of a crank disk 75 upon the lat 
65 
55 
45 
95 
CC 
IC 5 
d 
I I5 
I 25 
 
4. 
588,796 
Io 
is 
; : 
; 
; 
: 
Having thus described my invention, 
instead of the disks. 52 other forms of furrow 
openers may be used, and that when corn is 
being planted the seed will be covered by the 
opening 34 in the rear scraper or smoothing 
plate 33, which will form, as it were, a hill over 
the seed. These openings also act to form a 
division, as it were, by means of a ridge, be-, 
tween the seed planted from each side of the 
center of the machine. 
The rake may be used in connection with a 
harvester sickle, or each may be employed in 
dependently, and the rake and the sickle may 
both be removed or elevated so as not to be 
brought into action when the machine is used 
for cultivating or for planting. In fact, if any 
part of the machine is not required, it may be: 
thrown out of gear, or carried out of action 
in any other desired way. 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters: 
Patent 
1. In an agricultural machine, a seed-plant 
sing mechanism, a furrow opener and a cover 
ing device acting in conjunction with the said: 
seed dropping mechainsm, a rake located at: 
one end of the machine, means for raising and 
lowering the rake, a sickle bar located at one 
side of the machine, means, substantially as: 
shown and described, for raising and lower 
ing the said bar, a driving connection between 
the seed dropping mechanism and an axle of 
the machine, and a driving connection be 
tween the said axle and the sickle the sev 
eral devices when not 
in use being carried 
5 out of action. 
2. In an agricultural machine, a wheel sup 
ported frame, a seed box carried by the frame, 
an auxiliary frame capable of vertical adjust 
ment, cultivators carried by the said auxil 
iary frame and located in front of the deliv 
ery from the seed boxes, covering devices car 
ried by the cultivators and located at the rear 
of the delivery of the seed boxes, and smooth 
ing plates carried by the said auxiliary frame 
at the front and rear end thereof, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. In an agricultural machine, the combi 
nation, with a wheel supported frame and 
seed boxes carried thereby, provided with out 
let chutes projected therefrom, of supporting: 
beams having pivotal connection with the 
wheel supported frame, an adjusting mech 
anism connected with the said beams, auxil 
iary frames mounted upon the said beams, 
the said frames being laterally adjustable 
upon the beams and provided with members 
capable of independent adjustment to that of 
the frame proper, and standards carried by the 
said independently adjustable members of 
the auxiliary frames, the standards being 
adapted to carry a ground working tool, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose Specified. 
4. In an agricultural implement, the com 
bination, with a wheel supported frame, a 
seed box carried thereby, beams having piv 
otal support on the main frame, located be 
neath the seed boxes, and an adjusting mech 
- 
- 
anism connected with the free ends of the 
frames, of auxiliary frames mounted upon 
the said beams, each auxiliary frame com 
prising an end bar pivotally connected with a 
supporting beam, brackets pivotally coni 
nected with the end bars, and longitudinal 
bars journaled in the 'said brackets, standards 
journaled in the longitudinal bars, and fas 
tening devices, substantially as described, for 
securing the end bars in predetermined posi 
tion relative to the supporting bars and the 
standards in a predetermined position, as and 
for the purpose specified. 
5. In an agricultural implement, the com 
bination, with a wheel supported frame, a 
seedbox carried thereby, beams having piv 
total support within the frame, located beneath. 
: the seed boxes, and an adjusting mechanism 
connected with the free ends of the frame, of 
an auxiliary frame mounted upon one of the 
said, beams; adjustably, the said auxiliary 
frame consisting of end bars pivotally con 
nected with a supporting bar, brackets 
piv 
oted to the end bars, the longitudinal bars 
pivoted in said brackets, standards journaled 
in the longitudinal bars, ground-working 
tools carried by the said standards, covering 
wheels likewise supported from the standards, 
links whereby the end bars of the auxiliary 
frame are maintained in a given position upon 
the supporting bar, and means, substantially 
as shown and described, for simultaneously : 
operating all of the longitudinal bars, and ad ECO 
justing devices connected with the said stand 
ards, as and for the purpose specified. 
6. In an agricultural implement, the com 
bination, with a supporting bar, of a frame 
adjustable thereon, said frame comprising 
end bars pivotally and adjustably connected 
with the supporting bar, brackets pivotally 
connected with the end bars, longitudinal bars 
journaled in the said brackets, a device for 
rocking the longitudinal bars, standards jour 
naled in the said longitudinal bars, and lock. 
ing devices for the standards and for the end 
bars of the frame, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
7. The combination, with a frame, crank 
axles journaled in the frame, supporting 
wheels mounted upon the said axles, a capse 
cured to the upper end of each axle, a pole 
having pivotal connection with a fixed sup 
port, said pole being provided with a cap 
plate, and links connecting the various cap 
plates, Substantially as shown and described, 
whereby the wheels will be turned in a direc 
tion to cause the frame to move in the direc 
tion in which the pole is shifted, as and for 
the purpose specified. 
8. The combination, with a frame, crank 
axles journaled therein, the upper end of each 
crank axle terminating in a cap, ground 
wheels carried by each of the axles, a pole 
pivoted upon a fixed support, crossed links 
connecting opposing caps of the axles at each 
side of the frame, and straight links connect 
ing the caps of the forward axles with the 
If 5 
Io 5 
I 25 
O 
45 
56 
 
5 
necting bar and provided with a latch engag 
ing said rack, and a link connecting the lower 
end of the lever with one of the tooth bars, 25 
substantially as described. 
13. In a planter, the combination with end 
plates, of cultivator bars swiveled to the end 
plates, means for adjusting the cultivator 
bars, and cultivators having their shanks 
adjustable in said bars, substantially as de 
scribed. 
14. In a planter, the combination with a 
supporting bar, of a disk cutter having its 
shank projecting through the bar and pro- 35 
vided at its upper end with an arm, and a 
lock bar secured to the said arm and adjust 
ably to the said supporting bar, substantially 
as described. 
JOSEPH EHRHARD. 
Witnesses: 
J. D. FANDERs, 
FRANK. T. PEARCE. 
538,796 
said pole, whereby the wheel-supported frame 
may be made to turn short and will respond 
to the direction in which the pole is carried, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
9. In a planter, a cultivator frame, com 
prising end bars or plates, tooth bars swiveled 
thereto, and means for adjusting the tooth 
bars, substantially as described. 
10. In a planter, a cultivator frame, com 
prising end bars or plates, blocks pivoted to 
said bars or plates, tooth bars pivoted to the 
said blocks to turn, and means for adjusting 
the tooth bars, substantially as described. 
11. In a planter, the combination with a 
beam, of end plates adjustably pivoted to said 
beam, tooth bars swiveled to the said end 
plates, and means for adjusting the tooth 
bars, substantially as described. 
12. In a planter, the combination with end 
bars and tooth bars swiveled thereto, of a 
bar connecting the tooth bars and provided 
with a rack, a lever pivoted upon said con 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533896.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 533,896. 
E. HOLTHAUs, 
PR00ESS OF TREATING GARBAGE 
3 sheets-sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. l2, 1895, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 533,896. 
 
 
 
z, y 
AL 
C) 
E. HOL THAUS. 
PROCESS OF TREATING CARBAGE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 12, 1895. 
s 
I 
Is 
Sty 
7 Sz 
N 
Sly. NSNS 
V 
2222a 
4 ives v. 
Zzzavezzaoz: 
62.26 
(No Model.) 
No. 533,896. 
 
E, HOL THAUS. 
PROCEss OF TREATING GARBAGE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
y 
Patented Feb, 12, 1895. 
o 
Zze were ez. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMIL HOLTHAUS, OF CANARSIE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO CYRUS C. CURRIER, 
OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
PROCESS OF TREATING GARBAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 533,896, dated February 12, 1895. 
Application filed May 9, 1894, Serial No. 510,620. (No model.) 
... O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EMIL HOLTHAUs, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Canarsie, 
Kings county, New York, have invented cer 
5 tain new and useful Improvements in Pro 
cesses of Treating Garbage, fully described 
and represented in the following specification 
and the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of the same. 
This invention relates to a process of dry 
ing garbage to render the same odorless and 
transportable and at the same time to recover 
any anmonia and grease contained therein. 
In practicing the process, the garbage is con 
I5 fined in a tight steam jacketed vessel, and the 
vapors and gases which are produced during 
the treatment are condensed by suitable ap 
paratus so that nothing whatever is dis 
charged into the atmosphere. A solvent, as 
2 o naphtha, may be injected to dissolve the 
grease, and the naphtha recovered for future 
use by condensing its vapor. The residuum 
after the removal of the grease and ammonia 
is thoroughly dried in the same vessel, and is 
25 then adapted for transportation or for use in 
the manufacture of a fertilizer. 
The apparatus employed in carrying out my 
process consists of a steam jacketed shell hav 
ing suitable heads through which an axle is 
3o extended and connected with steam inlet and 
outlet pipes by swivel joints, the axle having 
flanges, inside the shell, carrying a series of 
longitudinal scrapers and a series of heating 
pipes which are connected with the inlet and 
35 outlet of the axle. The bottom of the shell 
is provided withinlet pipes to supply a solvent, 
as naphtha, or sulphuric acid, and the shell 
is connected with a surface condenser for the 
purpose of recovering the ammonia, or any 
4o naphtha, which may be used as a solvent in 
treating the garbage. 
A water cock is provided neartle bottom of 
the apparatus to draw off any water, and 
grease cocks are provided near the top to draw 
45 off the liquid grease, and the shell is connected 
with a jet condenser to absorb the fumes 
which are generated in drying the material. 
The construction of the apparatus will be 
understood by reference to the annexed draw 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of the appara 
5o ings, in which 
tus. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section, where 
hatched, at the center line of the apparatus. 
Fig. 3 is an end view of the shaft with the 
scraper and pipes attached, the return flange 
being partly broken away; and Fig. 4 is a side 
view of the same parts with one end of the 
shaft broken off for want of space upon the 
drawing. 
A designates the shell, around the lower two 
thirds of which a steam jacket B extends. 
The shell has a man-hole C for admitting, and 
a man-hole D for discharging the material. 
The heads are designated E' and E, and 
are provided with stuffing boxes F through 
which an axle or shaft. His extended. The 
ends of the shaft are formed with steam ducts 
O, and are connected respectively by swivel 
joints with a steam inlet pipe P and a steam 
outlet pipe Q. The shaft is provided, close 
to the ends of the shell, with flanges or disks 
J, one of which is provided with a series 
The flanges are formed , 
of man-holes J. 
on their periphery with radial lugs k, and 
scrapers K are extended longitudinally from 
one flange to the other, forming scrapers 
interior are rotated by the flanges close to the 
which of the shell. 
A series of longitudinal pipes L are ex 
tended between the flanges and through holes 
in the same adjacent to the scrapers K, and 
the pipes are connected at the ends by re 
turn bends l; the series forming a continuous 
heating coil, the opposite ends of which are 
connected by pipes i' with the ducts O, and 
thus in communication with the steam inlet 
and outlet as the shaft revolves. 
The casing, for a charge of four or five tons, 
would be six feet in diameter and thirteen feet 
long, and to give suitable strength to the 
heads they are shown dome shaped and hol 
low; and one of the heads is provided at the 
bottom with a water cock E, and near the top 
with a series of grease pipese provided with 
cocks e', the grease pipes being at different 
levels to facilitate the removal of the liquid 
grease from the surface of the water within . 
the shell. 
The head which is supplied with the dis 
charge pipes is formed upon its inner plate 
with perforations e' to admit the liquid to 
such pipes. The opposite head E is provided 
90 
OC 
33,896 
s 
O 
with a man-hole and cover IF" in line with 
the man-openings J in the flange J, thus af 
fording access within the pipes I, to adjust 
or repair the Same. 
A supply pipe T is connected with the bot 
tom of the shell, through the steam jacket, 
by pipes T', to inject a solvent into the ma 
terial under treatment. 
Adomo M connects with the top of the shell 
and is provided with pipe M having branches 
N and N' to connect respectively with a sur 
face condensel and a jet condenser; the latter 
being adapted to condense the gaseous fumes 
discharged from the material in drying the 
same, while the former is adapted to recover 
the ammonia or volatile solvent discharged 
at different stages of the treatment. 
The pipes N, N', are provided respectively 
with cocks P', P, to connect with the condens 
ers in turn. 
The shaft or axle II is shown provided with 
gearing Q' connecting it with a pair of driv 
ing pulleys R, R', which are adapted to rotate 
it respectively at about three revolutions and 
twelve revolutions per minute. 
The apparatus is used as follows: A charge 
of garbage is inserted through the luan-hole C 
and the casing is filled to a suitable level with 
water to properly cook the same, all the cocks 
being then closed, and the shaft with its 
scrapers K and pipes L being rotated at the 
slower speed for about five hours. The ma 
terial is subjected not only to the heat of the 
steam jacket B, but is continually intersected 
and broken up by the series of heating pipes 
I, which are rotated with the scrapers. The 
heat generates a pressure within the shelli of 
about forty pounds per square inch, which 
pressure may be regulated by a pressure gage 
S upon the dome. The cock P* is opened 
from time to time to conderse any ammonia 
that is discharged from the material, and 
when the cooking is completed, the liquid 
grease which rises to the surface of the water 
is drawn off through the pipes e, and the 
water is then wholly discharged from the 
shell by the cock E. The grease which is not 
removed by the treatment with water, may 
then be completely extracted by injecting 
naphtha through the pipes T'; the material 
being then treated for another hour, with con 
nection to a surface condenser (not shown) 
to recover the naphtha, which is wholly vapo 
rized during the process. The cock P* is then 
closed and the cock P' opened to connect the 
shell with a jet condenser, (not shown) and the 
materialisthen dried by rotating the shaft and 
scrapers at the higher rate of speed, for about 
thirty minutes; the jet condenser operating 
to absorb the fumes which are generated in 
such drying operation. The progress of the 
treatment in its different stages is readily 
tested through a suitable opening in the shell, 
and the material when thoroughly dried is 
ready for discharge in an odorless condition. 
25 
35 
45 
50 
65 
75 
The water which is mixed with the garbage 
and afterward drawn from the shell may be 
mixed with the succeeding charge. For treat 
ing the garbage of a city, several of the ap 
paratuses would be required, and the water 
discharged from one of the shells, as well as 
the naphtha recovered by the condenser, would 
be used over again. The valuable substances 
extracted in the water would thus be utilized 
and concentrated in the successive charges. 
Where it is desired to utilize the material 
in the manufacture of fertilizers, it may be 
treated with sulphuric or other mineral acids, 
and is thus adapted for combination with lime 
and analogous materials. 
It will be understood from the above de 
scription, that no vapors or fumes are dis 
charged from the apparatus at any stage of 
the treatment, and the process is entirely odor 
less, and all the products of value are pre 
served. 
I have not claimed the apparatus which I 
have shown herein, but have made it the Sub 
ject of a separate application, Serial No. 
525,062, filed October 6, 1894, entitled Appa 
ratus for treating garbage. 
Having thus set forth the nature of the in 
vention heroin, what is claimed is 
1. The process herein described for the 
treatment of garbage, which consists first, in 
mixing a suitable quantity of water there with 
to cook the same, second, drawing off the 
fluid grease and the water from the material 
separately, thirdly, injecting a solvent, stir 
ring the material there with to dissolve the 
remainder of the grease, and drawing off and 
condensing the vapor generated from the solv. 
ent, and fourthly, stirring and simultane 
ously treating the material until dried and 
condensing the vapor generated during such 
drying operation, substantially as set forth. 
2. The process herein described for the 
treatment of garbage, in a tight steam jack 
eted vessel, which consists first, in slowly stir 
ring and heating a mixture of the garbage 
with water under pressure for a considerable 
time, as four or five hours, second, drawing 
off the fluid grease and the water separately 
from the material, thirdly, injecting a volatile 
solvent, as naphtha, and slowly stirring the 
material with the same, and drawing off and 
condensing the vapor of the solvent to re 
cover the same, and fourthly, rapidly stirring. 
and simultaneously heating the material un 
til dry, and drawing off and condensing the 
fumes during such drying operation, substan 
tially as herein set forth. 
In testimon whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
85 
go 
95 
od 
I o5 
II5 
EMIII, IIOLTIIAUS. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS S. CRANE, 
T., T.R.E. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US533996.txt	(No Model.) 
C. D. MARSH & C. F. OWERHISER, 
CHIP BREAKER FOR WOODWORKING MACHINEs. 
No. 533,996, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1895, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- 
3v-uo vitov4 
-?aw-67. - 
/ >1-Sep-ow/asia, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CALVIN D. MARSH AND CHARLES F. OVERHISER, OF WILLIAMSPORT, PENN 
SYLVANIA, ASSIGNORS TO ROWLEY & HERMANCE CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
CHIP-BREAKER FOR Woodworkin G-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 538,996, dated February 12, 1895. 
Application filed June 20, 1894. Serial No. 515,177, (No model.) 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, CALVIN D. MARSH and 
CHARLESF. OVERHISER, of Williamsport, in 
the county of Lycoming and State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Chip-Breakersfor Wood 
Working-Machines; and we do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to an improvement 
in chip breakers for wood working machines 
the object being to provide means whereby 
the chip breaker can give or yield to any un 
evenness of surface of the board being oper 
ated upon, without leaving the board and it 
consists in the parts and combinations of 
parts as will be more fully explained and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in side elevation of a section of a plan 
ing machine embodying our invention. 
Fig. 
2 is a detached view partly in section show 
ing the yielding support for the weight and 
Figs, 3, 4 and 5 are similar views of modified 
Constructions. 
A represents the upper cutter and B the 
table over which the boards to be dressed or 
molded, as the case may be, are passed. 
C represents the chip breaker of the ordi 
nary shape, hinged at a to the frame of the 
machine and shaped to catch the flying chips 
cut off by the cutter. This breaker is located 
in advance of the cutter, and is preferably con 
structed of two parts b and b both of which 
have rearwardly projecting flanges c by which 
they are secured together. The lower section 
b is beveled or cut away on its under side as 
shown at d to form an enlarged bearing face 
which latter when the machine is in opera 
tion rests on the board being dressed. 
The weight of the chip breaker tends to 
hold it in position but this weight is supple 
mented by the rod F and the weight G. This 
rod is rigidly attached to the breaker and has 
no movement independent thereof. This rod 
is preferably provided with teeth on its up 
perface for engaging the downwardly turned 
so ends of the spring H. This spring is pref 
35 
O 
40 
45 
erably semi-elliptic as shown and being passed 
through the weight G supports the latter on 
its convex surface, the two ends of the spring 
resting on the upper surface of the rod F. 
The spring if desired can be secured to the 55 
weight so that the latter will be prevented 
from shifting its position. Instead of hav 
ing the spring bear at its two ends on the 
top of the rod, it can be secured at one end 
to the rod and rest at its other end on the rod 6o 
as shown in Fig. 3. 
In Fig. 4 we have shown the weight re 
cessed to receive a spiral spring the lower 
end of which rests on the rod, while in Fig. 
5, the weight is shown suspended by a spring 65 
from the rod. In all of these forms or emi 
bodiments of our invention the weight has a 
limited movement independent of the chip 
breaker and rod and the latter can also have 
a slight movement independent of the weight. 7c. 
Hence it follows that the chip breaker can 
rise to follow inequalities or elevations in the 
surface of the board by simply compressing 
or expanding (as the case may be) the spring 
without elevating the weight. This elevation 75 
of the chip breaker compresses or expands 
the spring and the latter together with the 
weight causes the breaker to follow the sur 
face of the wood and ride over the elevations 
without actually leaving the board. 
It is evident that changes in the construc 
tion and relative arrangement of the several 
parts might be made without avoiding our 
invention and hence We Would have it under 
stood that we do not restrict ourselves to the 85 
particular construction and arrangement of 
parts shown and described, but, 
Having fully described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a wood working machine, the combi 
nation with a hinged chip breaker having an 
arm extending outwardly therefrom, of a 
weight slotted to receive the arm and permit 
of vertical movement, and a spring inter- 95 
posed between the weight and the arm, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a wood Working machine, the combi 
nation with a hinged chip breaker having an 
arm extending outwardly therefrom, of a roo 
2 
533,996 
weight mounted on said arm and having an 
opening therein of greater depth than the specification in the presence of two subscrib- Io 
vertical thickness of the arm whereby to ad-ling witnesses. 
mit of vertical play therein, and a spring in 
5 the weight and interposed between the latter 
and the arm in such manner as to receive and 
absorb the first upward vibration of the arm, 
substantially as set forth. 
CALVIN D. MARSHI. 
CHARLES F. OWERHISER. 
In testimony whereof we have signed this 
Witnesses: 
D. R. FoRKMAN, 
C. W. THOMPSON. 
3. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US534097.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. M. DODGE. 
ELEVATING AND CONVEYING MECHANISM, 
No. 534,097. 
Patented Feb. 12, 1895, 
Wazaesses: 
ass-?-A Ade Auy- 
(%-cy 24- 
. 
Zrz atz 
e/2772es 272 
A77zs Aarvey 
 
He noRRIS PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo, wrSHNGTON, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
J. M. DODGE, 
ELEWATING AND CONWEYING MECHANISM, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 534,097, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
TOETZ 
S 
 
 
Z72 vezzar: 
earnes M. Zelaze 
Az-Zas/Zarneas 
eZ2.94. Y at ?et 
THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHo, washingtonio, c. 
WZZ72 esses: 
SeaSo A.C. c-Alr 
C7 (221 
J. M. DODGE. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
ELEWATING AND CONWEYING MECHANISM, . 
(No Model.) 
No. 534,097, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1895. 
4. 726SSes : 
2%l u% (284. 
. 
zma ,7. 
ayazs/Zarveys 
The NORRS PETERS co. PHoTo-Lito...washingtoN, p. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. DODGE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
- 
LINK BELT ENGINEERING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELEVATING AND conveying : M ECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,097, dated February 12, 1895. 
Application filed September 25, 1893, Serial No. 486,860, (No model.) 
a 
i5 ers, and independent elevators. 
- 
. 
Be it known that I, JAMES M. DODG 
E, a citi. tion on the line 5-5, Fig. 4. 
To g00 whom it may concern: 
ling two of the buckets; and Fig. 5, is a sec 
Zen of the United States, residing in Phila. 
A is the storage building situated in the 
delphia, Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
present instance on a wharf and between the 55 
5 Improvements in a Combined Elevating and 
water and the building are suitable tracks 
Conveying Mecha 
nism, of which the follow 
for the railway cars. 
ing is a specification. 
In the building are storage bins A and in 
The object of my invention is to so con 
the upper portion of the building may bear 
struct a continuous conveying apparatus that 
ranged delivery bins B, shown by dottedlines 6o 
to material can be carried by it without dis 
in Fig. 2. 
charging, in a horizontal plane, a vertical 
It will be understood that the construction 
plane and in another horizontal plane in a 
of the building and bins may be modified. A 
manner fully described hereinafter, and thus 
simple framework may be used when the de 
dispense withindependenthorizontalconvey. 
vice is to be used only for loading cars or 65 
vessels. 
My invention is especially applicable for 
Extending along the front of the building 
use in buildings or large bins where it is 
at the base is a trough D open at the bottom 
wished to transfer material from the base of 
and directly under this trough are rails d, d. 
the bin or building up one end thereof and 
upon which travels the conveyer. In the 70 
20 deliver it into bins in the upper portion of 
present instance the trough D is open to the 
the building or into cars or boats. 
wharf and to the bins, so that material can be 
Usually the transfer of material has been fed to the conveyer either from cars or boats 
accomplished by the use of independent con 
or from the binsA'. 
Veyer's at the top and bottom, either using 
25 flights, buckets or pans, and an independent 
c is a series of buckets connected together 
elevator at one end of the building or bin 
by pivot rods e. Linkse' connect the several 
which receives material from the lower con 
rods together and are mounted on each side 
veyer and discharges it into the upper con 
of the bucket, as clearly shown in Figs. 4 and 
Weyer. This method has been the most prac 
5. On the ends of the pivot rods are wheels 8o 
e' which traverse the track d and d'. A pivot 
Another form is what is termed the swing 
rod is mounted in one end of each bucket and 
ing bucket conveyer, in which the buckets 
the pivot rod of an adjoining bucket passes 
are pivoted at a point above their center so. 
through slotted projections eat the opposite 
that they will always hang in a vertical posi 
I end of the bucket, allowing sufficient play for 85 
35 tion. This construction necessitates an inter 
the twisting movement of the conveyer. Thus 
mittentloading and unloading of the buckets, 
the buckets have a fixed relation to the chain 
and is not what is commonly known as a 
in counter-distinction to the ordinary pivoted 
continuous conveyer, it being very slow in 
buckets. 
comparison. With the continuous conveying 
rails don which travel the wheels e' of the 
I am enabled by my improvement to gain 
conveyer E, the conveyer passing around the 
the advantages of a continuous conveyer with 
wheels F at each corner of the building. 
a single run and thus materially decrease the 
It will be noticed that the wheels of the con 
first cost of the apparatus, and also econo 
veyer traverse the horizontal rails d, d, with 95 
the buckets in the position shown by full 
In the accompanying drawings:-Figure 1, 
lines in Fig. 5, but when the chain passes 
is a side view of a storage bin and wharf illus. 
from the lower, run and travels upward the 
trating my improved conveying mechanism. 
buckets are in the position shown by dotted 
Fig. 2, is a section on the line 2-2, Fig. 1. 
lines in said figure, and in order to present Ioo 
5o Fig. 3, is a perspective view showing one end the buckets in the same position on the top 
of the conveyer. Fig. 4, is a plan view show- rails as they were on the bottom rails a half 
40 method, and therefore not so acceptable. 
In the upper portion of the building are 9o 
The conveyer E is constructed as follows:- 75 
3o ticable, and the one in general use. 
45 mize in the running expenses. 
 
2 
534,097 
O 
25 
35 
45 
twist is given to the conveyer between the 
upper and lower runs, as shown fully in Fig. 
3, thus turning the mouths of the buckets 
from the inside of the conveyer to the outside 
So that when the conveyer passes over the 
upper guide wheels the buckets will assume 
a position on the upper rails similar to that 
assumed by the buckets on the lower rails. 
Thus material can be carried from the lower 
run to the upper run without discharging and 
without using independent elevators or swing 
ing buckets. 
The buckets are made as shown in Fig. 5, 
having a bottom i, an upright end i' and an 
inclined end i. Extending part way over the 
bucket is a cover , which when the bucket 
is turned as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 5, 
holds the material in place. 
When it is wished to discharge the buckets 
the position of each bucket is reversed with 
the inclined end down, thus allowing the ma 
terial to freely flow therefrom. 
The mechanism I use to discharge the ma 
terial is constructed as follows:-M is a car 
riage having wheels an adapted to traverse 
the track d' and on this carriage is mounted 
a driving shaft N having sprocket wheels in 
engaging with the chains of the conveyer. In 
the present instance this shaft N is the driv 
ing shaft for the conveyer, being geared to a 
shaft N' by a train of gears illustrated in Fig. 
l, and on this shaft N' is a rope sheave n' 
around which passes the rope ac which drives 
the mechanism, the rope passing around guide 
wheels n' mounted on the carriage and around 
rope sheaves n, n, at each end of the struct 
ure. The shaft N, upon which the sheave 
n is mounted is driven in the present in 
stance by a rope a' extending to a motor. 
n is the usual take-up used in connection 
with rope driving mechanism. The conveyer 
E passes around a guide an under the chute 
M and up over the sprocket wheels 7, thus 
turning the buckets so that their contents 
will readily flow into the chute M'. The con 
veyer then rests upon rails n on the car 
riage M returning to the trackd'. The chute 
is a double chute in the present instance hav 
ing passages m, m, the passages m direct 
ing the material to the bins, while the pas 
sages m allow the material to flow to a car 
or boat. A valve in the upper portion of the 
chute directs the material either to one pas 
sage or the other. Connected to the carriage 
M is a carriage M having wheels adapted to 
rails a, a, mounted on the framework of the 
building Aso that it will travel with the car 
riage M. Pivoted at p is a trough P, forming 
a continuation of the chute M. This trough 
can be raised or lowered by a windlass p' to 
which it is connected by a chain p. 
In the rail or stringer a forming part of 
the structure A are a series of openings a 
and in the frame of the carriage M is an 
opening k which aligns with any one of the 
openings a according to the position of the 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
carriage M, so that a pin K passed through 
the opening k and into one of the openings 
a in the frame will lock the carriage to the 
frame. 
I utilize the same driving mechanism to 
move the carriage upon the rails as is used 
to drive the conveyer, and when the carriage 
is locked by the pin Kor other locking mech 
anism to the frame A the driving mechanism 
will drive the conveyer, but when the pin K 
is removed the driving mechanism will oper 
ate to move the carriage using the conveyer 
as a rack, owing to the fact that it is much 
easier to move the earriage than to move the 
conveyer. When the carriage is moved to 
the position required it is again locked and 
motion will then be imparted to the conveyer. 
While I have shown double links connect 
ing the several pivot rods of the conveyer 
together single links may be used and in 
some instances wire or manilla rope or jointed 
rods may be substituted for the links and 
while I have shown the conveyer as free to 
twist in its upper run it may be guided by 
spiral guides, without departing from my in 
vention. 
In some instances it may be necessary to 
guide the conveyer in different planes and in 
a circuitous path, depending upon the con 
struction of the apparatus and while I have 
used the terms horizontal and vertical' 
runs it will be understood that the runs may 
be inclined, the object of my invention be 
ing to connect the upper and lower runs in 
such a manner that the buckets assume the 
same position on the upper run as they do on 
the lower run. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination of a conveying appa 
ratus, buckets thereon for the material, said 
buckets being fixed in relation to the chain, 
the conveyer being twisted between the up 
er and lower planes so that the buckets will 
assume the same position in the upper plane 
as they assume in the lower plane, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination in conveying appara 
tus, of the structure having bins, a trough 
open at the bottom, an endless conveyer pass 
ing around said structure and under the 
trough, fixed buckets on the conveyer, wheels 
over which the conveyer passes, said con 
veyer adapted to receive material on its lower 
run from the trough and deliver material 
from its upper run and twisted in its vertical 
run so that the pockets or buckets will as 
sume the same position on the upper run as 
they do on the lower run, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JAMES M. DODGE, 
d 3 
O 
I I5 
20 
I25 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. A. BARR, 
JOSEPH. H. KLEIN, 
65 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US534198.txt	(No. Model.) 
E. CHAPMAN, 
ARTIFICIAL LEG, 
No, 534,198, 
Patented Feb. 12, 1895. 
Wilpesses 
 
the Norris Peters co. Photo-Litho. WashingtoN.-D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD CHAPMAN, OF DALLAS, TEXAS. 
ARTIFICAL LEG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 534,198, dated February 12, 1895. 
Application fled January 2, 1894, Serial No. 495,865, (No model.) 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD CHAPMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Dal 
las, in the county of Dallas and State of Texas, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Artificial Legs, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to artificial legs; and 
it has for its object to effect certain improve 
ments in apparatus of this character wherein. 
the ankle joint and the socket for receiving 
the stump of the amputated membershall be 
rendered more efficient in their functions. 
To this end the main and primary object 
of the present invention is to provide an arti 
ficial leg, the ankle joint of which will have 
sufficient motion for walking without any lost 
motion from the time the heel is placed upon 
the ground until the weight of the body is 
changed to the ball of the foot, and to provide 
an ankle joint that will assist in bringing the 
Weight of the body from the heel to the toe, 
and in fact making provision for universal 
movement in any direction. 
The invention also contemplates a com 
fortable and yielding bearing for the stump 
of the amputated member. 
With these and other objects in view, which 
will readily appear as the nature of the in 
vention is better understood, the same con 
sists in the novel construction, combination, 
and arrangement of parts hereinafter more 
fully described, illustrated, and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings:--Figure 1 
is a side elevation of an artificial leg con 
structed in accordance with this invention. 
Fig.2 is a rear view thereof. Fig. 3 is a simi 
lar view showing the leg socket, the foot, and 
the interposed cushion block therebetween, 
slightly separated from each other. Fig. 4 is 
a side elevation showing the leg socket, the 
foot and the interposed cushion block there 
between, slightly separated from each other. 
Fig. 5 is a vertical sectional view of the artifi 
cial leg at one side of the center. Fig.6 is a de 
tail sectional view on the line ac-ac of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 is a detail sectional view of the foot por 
tion of the leg showing the ball and socket 
joint. Fig. 8 is a detail sectional view on the 
line J-y of Fig. 7. Fig. 9 is an enlarged de 
tail sectional view of the upper portion of the 
leg socket, 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
1 designates a hollow leg socket having the 
configuration of the lower part of a person's 
limb and which is made of any suitable ma 
terial ordinarily employed for the manufac 
ture of artificial limbs. The hollow leg socket 
1, is provided at the upper end thereof with 
the interior annular recess 2, that is adapted 
to snugly receive therein the pad band 3. 
The pad band 3, preferably consists of a rub 
ber band or ring lined with a good quality of 
oil tanned leather, and said pad band is 
formed by being molded around a plastic cast 
of the stump of the amputated leg, and pro 
vides a comfortable yielding rest for such 
Stump. 
The hollow leg socket is provided with a 
lower solid portion 4, beveled at its lower side 
to form a V-shaped point 5, that registers in 
the V-shaped socket 6 in the upper side of 
the cushion block 7, interposed between the 
lower solid end of the leg socket and the foot 
8, of the leg. The foot 8, is made solid and 
of any suitable materia), and of a size pro 
portionate to the person, and said-foot 8, is 
provided in the upper side thereof with a V 
shaped recess 9, in which registers or fits the 
double beveled or V-shaped lower side 10, of 
So 
the intermediate cushion block 7. The inter 
mediate cushion block 7, is made of any suit 
able elastic material, preferably rubber, to 
provide a yielding joint between the leg, or 
more properly speaking, the leg socket and 
the foot, and at the heel or rear side of the 
foot, the leg socket, cushion block, and foot 
are connected together by the anti-friction 
heel cord or string 11, that is arranged within 
the aligned openings 12 in the lower solid 
portion 4 of the leg socket 1, the cushion block 
7 and the foot 8, and said anti-friction heel . 
cord or string is provided with upper and 
lower loop ends 13, that are passed over the 
securing pins 14 and 15 arranged respectively 
in the leg socket above itslower solid portion, 
and in the heel of the foot 8. The heel cord 
or string 11, while providing for properly se 
curing the foot to the lower end of the leg 
socket, at the same time admits of any ad 
justment the foot may assume when Walking, 
and therefore does not interfere with the uni-. 
versal adjustment of the foot. 
In adjusting the foot and cushion block 
85 
95 
75 
CO 
TO 
3o 
35 
40. 
45 
50 
534,198 
onto the lower end of the legsocket the lower 
side of the cushion block is cemented into 
the V-shaped recess 9, in the upper side of 
the foot 8, and these parts are additionally 
Secured to the lower solid end of the leg 
socket by the side securing rods 16. The 
side securing rods 16, are mounted in suit 
able openings in the lower solid portion 4, of 
the leg socket and are retained therein by the 
Securing nuts 17, engaging the upper threaded 
ends of the rods, and the lower ends of the 
side rods 16, are provided with the eyes 18, 
that are disposed within openings 19 formed 
in the cushion block 7, and are engaged with 
the upper looped ends of the short antifric 
tion connecting loops 20, the lower ends of 
which are provided with the securing heads 
21, arranged to bear on the metallic Wear 
plates 22, interposed adjacent to the under 
side of the elastic washer plug 23, that is fitted 
Within a washer recess 24 formed centrally 
in the under side of the solid foot 8, and said 
side connections 16 and 20, not only firmly 
retain the several parts of the leg properly in 
position but at the same time admit of any 
side or backward and forward movement of 
the foot that may be occasioned by walking. 
At a central point the extreme lower end 
of the leg socket 1 and the upper side of the 
foot 8, are provided with the block sockets 25, 
in which are fitted the opposed socket blocks 
26, provided in their adjacent ends with the 
bearing recesses 27, that accommodate therein 
the joint ball 28 which together with the 
blocks 26 provide a center ball-and-socket 
joint between the foot and the leg proper, 
hereby a universal adjustment is provided 
O. 
From the above it is thought that the con 
struction, operation and many advantages 
of the herein-described artificial leg will be 
readily apparent to those skilled in the art, 
but at this point attention is directed to the 
operation wherein as the weight of the body 
brings the heel flat upon the ground, the rear 
portion of the cushion block 7, is necessarily 
compressed, and by its own elasticity assists 
in moving the weight of the body from the 
heel to the toe, while the front part of the 
55 
cushion block 7, affords a yielding support 
for the leg as the weight of the body is brought 
forward, and said cushion block therefore 
provides sufficient motion for walking with 
out any lost motion. The elastic washer plug 
23 and flexible connections with the elastic 
cushion block 7, permit a free side motion, 
and the ball and socket joint prevents a dis 
placement of parts while the leg and foot are 
securely held together at the ankle joint, and 
at the same time admits of universal move 
ment. 
Having described the invention, what is 
claimed, and desired to be secured by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an artificial limb, the combination of 
the legsocket, the foot, a ball and socket joint 
connection between the leg socket and the 
foot, a cushion block interposed between the 
leg socket and the foot, and a flexible con 
nection between the leg socket and the foot, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In an artificial limb, the combination of 
the leg socket provided with a lower solid end 
having a V-shaped under side, the foot pro 
vided with a V-shaped recess in its upper 
75 
side, an elastic cushion interposed between 
the leg socket and the foot and having a V 
shaped socket in its upper side and a double 
beveled pointed lower side, and flexible con 
nections between the leg socket and the foot 
to hold the cushion in a registering position 
between the socket and the foot to prevent 
the displacement thereof, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In an artificial limb, the combination of 
the leg socket and the foot provided with op 
posed sockets, socket blocks removably fitted 
in said sockets and provided with bearing re 
cesses in their adjacent ends, a joint ball ar 
ranged between said socket blocks, an elastic 
cushion block interposed between the leg 
socket and said foot, and flexible connections 
between the leg socket and the foot, substan 
tially as set forth. 
EDWARD CIIAPMAN. 
9 O 
Witnesses: 
A. I. HUDSON, 
EWD. A. STUART. 
o 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US534298.txt	(No Model.) 
WITNESSES; 
(e... J-4 
W. H. R. TOYE. 
PRINTING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Feb. 19, 1895. 
44-5%/4, 22 
1WWEWTOR 
-%. ... 3-6242 ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
 
W. H. R. TOYE. 
PRINTING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ATTORNEY. 
PTES co, Poorth 
o, washi 
- 
(No Model.) 
. 
. . 
. 
W. H. R. TOYE, 
PRINTING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3, . 
No. 534,298, 
: . 
. 
- 
Patented Feb. 19, 1895. 
   
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
2. DS As 
 
u. 
5ts 22%z 
FD 
3% 
2, 3, 
'sz72 
... INVEWTOR 
- 22 
 
UNITED STATES O ATEN: O FFICE 
WILLIAM. H. R. TOYE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PRINTING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 534,298, dated February 19, 1 895, 
Application filed April 10, 1893, Serial No. 469,814, (No model.) 
O 
25 
colors. 
. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. R. TOYE, a trated, and in which 
To all Luhon, it may concern: 
nection with the drawings in which it is illus 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
Figure l is a side elevation of a printing 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and press, here shown as adapted to print in sev 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
eral colors, embodying some of the important 
and useful Improvement in Printing-Ma 
features of my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan 
chines, of which the following is a specifica 
view of the press shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
a perspective view of one of the pulleys which 
ing drawings, forming a part thereof. 
support and drive the flexible gripper carrier. 
My invention relates to printing presses 
Fig. 4, is a view of one of the links showing 
and especially to mechanism thereon designed 
a mode of securing binding chains on the 
to make perfect register and cause each sheet 
side thereof. Fig. 5 is a cross section on the 
to receive its impression in an exactly corre 
line ac-ac of Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is a side elevation 
sponding position, and while applicable to all 
of one of the adjustable links showing the 
printing presses is particularly designed for 
means for longitudinal adjustment to take 
use in presses adapted to print in several 
up wear. Fig. 7 is an end view of the link 
shown in Fig. 6, showing the preferred mode 
The effect of the processes necessary to 
of dividing the link. Fig. 8 shows another 
print a multi-colored picture on a sheet of pa 
mode of dividing the link for adjustment 
per or other material is well known to those 
which is preferable in a link which has no 
skilled in the art, as for instance, when pass 
teeth on its upper surface, and Fig. 9 shows 
ing between cylinders where it receives a. 
a modified form of the adjusting devices for 
heavy impression the sheet is apt to be re 
the pulley shown in Fig. 3. 
tarded more than When passing between rolls 
A is the frame of the press on which the 
where it receives but a light impression. 
various shafts, levers and so on are arranged. 
Again, if the gripper fingers act sluggishly, a 
B, represents the driving shaft to which 
power is applied by means of a belt b' and a 
different width of margin is obtained from 
pulley b. 
that desired, and if a flexible link carrier is 
used which is supported on a polygonal wheel 
CC are plate or type cylinders shown 
theirregularity in the movement of this wheel 
driven from the shaft B by means of a spur 
causes corresponding irregularities in the 
gearb on the shaft B and gear wheels c c' on 
the ends of the plate cylinders C C respect 
movement of the sheet. 
ively, and additional gears d'd pivoted at e' 
To overcome these and similar difficulties, 
my invention consists, first, in arranging a 
e serve to rotate the gear wheels EE which 
are secured to studs.ff respectively. 
feed mechanism in the manner pointed out 
in the claims and so that it will always seize 
the sheet in the same position and will not 
be disturbed by any increase in the speed of 
the machine or sticking of the sheets, and 
secondly, to So arrange a flexible carrier for 
the gripper mechanism that it can be ad 
justed either to throw the whole gripper sys 
tem slightly forward or retard it, and also to 
adjust the carrier so as to take up for wear, 
and to assist in correcting expansion or con 
tractions due to changes of temperature; and 
it consists also in certain other improvements 
in the details of a printing press which will 
be pointed out hereinafter in the claims ap 
pended to this specification. 
My invention may best be described in con 
W Ware sets of inking rollers. 
D D' are impression cylinders shown sup 
ported on movable journals marked M. M', 
these journals being carried in a well known 
manner by two levers indicated at M M8 
which form toggle joints and are raised and 
lowered by levers as KK' operated by cams 
k k' on some rotating part of the machine and 
which serve to hold the cylinders D D at 
proper times, in contact with the plate cylin 
ders C. C. 
G indicates the main feed mechanism, 
which operates to seize the sheet and carry it 
between the rolls CD, C, D, &c., which to 
gether form a printing couple. This main 
feed mechanism consists essentially of a flexi 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
35 
45 
52 
 
: 
534,298 
75 
85 
9 O 
7 . 
ble carrier and suitable gripper mechanisms 
Secured to said carrier which operate to seize 
and carry along the sheet to be printed. The 
flexible carrier may consist of a steel band, a 
chain, cable or other suitable device, but I 
prefer to form it of a series of links so formed 
and secured together that the carrier as a 
whole or each separate link may be capable of 
very careful adjustment. 
On the outside of the link-carrier are se 
cured suitable tumbler cams. G' which operate 
under the influence of suitable pins as shown 
at p p r 7 to raise the fingers at proper times 
to seize or drop a sheet, a spring at g being 
used to hold the fingers tightly pressed on the 
sheet when not moved therefrom by means of 
the tumbler cams and pins. This construc 
tion of gripper mechanism is well known in 
the art and serves to seize a sheet from a state 
of rest on the front edge of a feedboard as O, 
and carry it around between the rolls of the 
plate and impression cylinders. The objec 
tion to the use of this gripper mechanism in 
work demanding exact register is, that if the 
gripper fingers act slugglishly or if there is a 
slight variation of the sheets, or if the speed 
of the press varies the impression on two suc 
cessive sheets will not be in exactly the same 
place thus destroying register and margins. 
To remedy this defect I provide an auxiliary 
feed mechanism which operates to seize a 
sheet which is placed in a definite position on 
the feed board when both the sheet and the 
auxiliary feed mechanism are at rest, to carry 
the sheet forward from Said state of rest un 
til it is moving at a speed substantially the 
same as the speed of the main feed mechan 
ism and then to deliver the sheet to the main 
feed mechanism. Such a device is indicated 
generally at H, Fig. 1. Here a plate h is ar 
ranged to slide along the top of the frame 
just under the front edge of the feed board 
O'. A link 1' connects this plate to a rack 
on guided between side rails n' on the side 
of the frame. This rack is pivoted at h, 
which may also be the pivotal point of the 
link i', to a bar h. The bar I has on the 
opposite end from that at which it is piv 
oted, a head h with a slot h therein and a 
projecting cam h, shown in dotted lines in 
Fig. 1. A pin as I serves normally to sup 
port the bar h in the position shown in Fig. 
1. In order to slide the plate h evenly a link 
h1 similar to link hand a rack n' are pref 
erably arranged on the other side of the frame 
as best seen in Fig. 2 and spur wheels in in 
on a shaft in serve to operate the two links 
simultaneously. A spring in fastened at one 
end to the frame of the press and at the other 
end a block n' on the shaft n' is wound up as 
the shaft in is rotated in the direction indi 
cated by the arrow and tends to unwind and 
keep the racks n mand the plate h and le 
ver h in the position shown in Fig. 1. On the 
front of the plate II are secured brackets H' 
II' and in these are journaled two shafts t, t' 
which between the brackets, as best seen in 
Fig.2 are provided with a plate tand fingers 
trespectively. These shafts t t are provided 
respectively with cranks tit, to which are 
pivoted links t t which are provided with 
rollers as shown adapted to read cams as TT . 
on the rotating stud f of the pulley E and 
driving spur wheel E. 
The fingers iserve as stops to fix the posi 
tion of a sheet when presented by the opera 
tor from the feed board. The plate t'serves 
to hold the sheet securely between itself and 
the plate h, and the advantage in using a 
plate instead of a set of fingers is, that if a 
sheet is presented to the plate in a crumpled 
condition or with edge slightly bent the plate 
icoming down on the plate h will smooth the 
paper out and present it to the gripper fin 
gers g in a smooth condition. This plate 
may advantageously be made of some trans 
parent material as glass, or may consist of a 
frame of the outline of the plate, so that the 
operator can see the edge of the paper as it is 
presented under the auxiliary feed mechan 
ism. An arm G' is also secured to and re 
volves with the stud f and has a pin g se 
cured therein at the same radial distance 
from the center of the stud as the pitch line 
of the gear teeth e in the spur wheel E. A 
ping is also secured to the frame substan 
tially above the center of the stud fand pro 
jects as shown in the path of the cam li on 
the head 7 of the link F. 
Before describing the operation of the aux 
iliary feed mechanism I would call attention 
to the construction of the flexible carrier for 
the feed mechanism. This flexible carrier is 
driven by the pulleys EE' which are secured 
on the studs.ff' and consists preferably of a 
series of links connected together by chains 
or cables R., one of such chains being ar 
ranged on each side of the several links, as 
shown in Fig. 3. Each separate link S of the 
construction shown in Figs. 3 and 4 has curved 
flanges S' extending from its sides of a curva 
ture similar to that of the pulley's EEso that 
when carried thereby they may fit thereon 
neatly as indicated in Fig. 3. A flat flange or 
projection s' is also arranged preferably as 
shown, which fits in a groove S of guides S. 
which are secured on the sides of the frame 
and serve to support the link carrier when it 
is traveling between the pulleys E E'. A 
groove e' is arranged in the pulleys E E to 
accommodate the flanges. The links are 
also provided with internal teeth S prefer 
ably one to each link and the pulleys are pro 
vided with recesses e in which the teeth S 
fit and whereby the series of links is driven. 
Every eighth link, or one of any other con 
venient number of links, is arranged to carry 
a gripper bar and the rod carrying the grip 
per fingers, and also to have secured thereto 
the various lengths of chains or cables which 
secure the sets of links together. Such a link 
is shown in series at S in Fig. 3, and sepa 
rated from the series in Fig. 4, and in this con 
struction, as shown, a broad tooth stakes 
35 
45 
55 
TOO 
lo5 
I 5 
I 25 
(3o 
5 
2 O. 
 
534,298 
IO 
35 
45 
55 
the place of the tooths, a corresponding re 
It is often desirable, especially in color 
cesse' being provided therefor in the pulley. printing for the operator to be able to see both 
Two standards s and s' serve for the sup 
the front and back of the sheets as they are 
port of the devices which secure the chain or 
deposited on the receiving boards. It is also 
cable. This broad tooth also provides ample 
advantageous on some occasions to have two 
space for the gripper bar and the finger bar 
feed boards so that two operators can feed 
as shown at g Fig. 3. The chain is conven 
the press at the same time. Such an arrange 
iently secured by means of pins r" r which 
ment is contemplated in the construction 
pass through links R. R. of the chain, one of 
shown in Fig. 1. 
the pins r being secured to a bolt r which is 
O', is the feedboard already referred to and 
capable of adjustment by means of the nut r. 
a second feed board is situated behind the 
The horizontal rail or support Sabove men 
first feed board as indicated in dotted lines 
tioned is arranged on a tangent line from 
at O. A second auxiliary feed mechanism 
the highest point of the rim of the pulleys or 
may also be arranged in the same relation to 
supporting wheels E E and as the links have 
the board Oas the auxiliary feed mechanism 
a curved bearing flange of the same curva 
H is to the board O and a link h can be ar 
ture as the pulleys the links are taken from 
ranged as shown to cause the two devices to 
the slide S on to the pulley without any of 
operate synchronously. Two receiving boards 
the up and down movement observed when 
PP' are also arranged as shown, one inside, 
polygonal wheels are used. 
and the other outside of the travel of the car. 
To preserve perfect alignment of the links, 
rier rack, so that sheets delivered on the board 
pins as sadapted to fit in small sockets son 
P will be impression side up and the sheets 
the adjacent link can be advantageously used. 
delivered on the board P will be delivered 
The links Shave been shown, some with exter 
blank side up and suitable mechanism oper 
nal and internal teeth and some simply with 
ating in a well known fashion is arranged to 
operate tumbling mechanism so that the grip 
internal teeth. The internal teeth serve to 
mesh with corresponding recesses in the pull 
perfingers will open and close at proper times. 
leys E E while the external teeth if used, 
Such a mechanism is shown in Figs. 1 and 2 
mesh with teeth as don gear wheels secured 
where a is a small gear wheel on the stud f. 
on the impression cylinders and serve as ad 
a' is a second gear wheel meshing with the 
ditional security for perfection of register. 
gear a, and carrying a cama'. A lever a piv 
In order to compensate for wear, I prefer to 
oted at a' is rocked by the cam a' and serves to 
reciprocate the pin p' into and out of the path 
construct the links as shown in Figs. 6 to 8, 
so that an adjustment of each separate link 
of the tumbler cams G' on the gripper barsg. 
can be made. As shown in Fig. 6the link is 
A second lever a pivoted at a and actuated 
divided into two parts SS which are se 
by the lever a serves to operate the pin p into 
cured together by bolts as S. which work 
and out of the path of the tumbler cams G in 
through an elongated slott in one of the sec 
such a way that one pin p' is in operative po 
tions. A taper screws is screwed through 
sition when the other pin p is not. Operated 
the sections as shown and by loosening the 
by the same cam a are two levers bbl piv 
screws s and adjusting the taper screw s a 
oted at bib' respectively, and operating pins 
micrometric adjustment can be made of any 
r' '. These pins serve to tumble the gripper 
or all of the links. It will be noticed that 
cams as they come to the front of the feed 
such adjustment would set one half of a 
boards so that the gripper fingers will oper. 
tooth Sa little in advance of the other half 
ate to seize a sheet. By connecting the pins 
thereof, aid this serves to take up wear in 
ir r in the manner shown to the levers b10 b11 
which are operated by the cam a these pins 
the gear teeth. Where no external teeth are 
are alternately put into and out of operative 
used, the division of the link may be conven 
iently made as shown in Fig. 8. 
position so that every alternate gripper mech 
anism is tumbled as it passes by the front of 
In order to set the whole carrier mechan 
ism forward or retard it as may be necessary, 
each feed board. 
I secure the supporting pulleys E E to the 
The operation of the press is as follows: 
shafts or studs ff' by an adjustable connec 
Power being applied and the carrier mechan 
tion. In Fig. 3 a sleeve f is secured to the 
ism with its gripper fingers being driven by 
stud f' and the pulley E" is adjustably se 
means of the gear wheels E E and pulleys E 
E' and the type'and impression cylinders by 
cured thereto by means of a bolt f one end 
their driving wheels the operator pushes a 
of which screws into a bracket on the sleeve 
if and the other end of which is secured to a 
sheet on which an impression or picture is to 
projection f on the pulley E'. In Fig. 9 an 
be printed in position against the fingerston 
the shaft t'. Thereupon the auxiliary grip 
other means of adjusting the pulleys is seen 
per fingers or plate ton the shaft toperated 
where screws working in elongated slots are 
shown by which the driving rim may be ad 
by the linkt from the cam T' come down and 
justed relatively to the hub. It is evident how 
seize the sheet, and hold it firmly against the 
ever, that various expedients may be used to 
edge of the plate h and while the sheet is so 
adjust the pulleys with reference to their 
held, the stop fingers t are moved out of the 
driving shafts without departing from the 
way by the link tand the cam T. At this 
spirit of my invention. 
time the arm G' on the stud f has revolved to 
75 
5 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IO 
IIS 
I2O 
I 25 
4. 
534,298 
5 
IO 
2C) 
25 
the position seen in Fig.1 and the ping there 
on has just entered the slothin the head lo 
of the link hi. As the arm G' continues to 
rotate it carries with it the link hand so 
moves the auxiliary feed mechanism and the 
sheet which has been caught thereby. When 
the arm G' has rotated so far as to be per 
pendicular the auxiliary gripper mechanism 
is moving at substantially the same speed 
as the rack which constitutes the main car 
rier mechanism and at this point the grip 
per fingers g' of the main feed mechanism 
seize the sheet and the fingers t which have 
held it thus far release it under the influence 
of the cam T. The projecting cam hon the 
head h of the lever h now engages with the 
ping and raises the lever h disengaging the 
slot h from the pin, thus permitting the lever 
and all the auxiliary mechanism under the in 
fluence of the spring into regain the position 
shown in Fig. 1 where it rests until again put 
in action as the pin g comes around again. 
It will be noticed, that as the auxiliary feed 
mechanism seizes the sheet when the sheet 
and gripper mechanism are both at rest and 
delivers the sheet to the main feed mechan 
ism when moving at the same speed there with 
that there will be no sudden hitch whereby 
the predetermined position of the sheet will 
be disturbed. If two feed boards are to be 
used, the gears at a' and the levers a'a' oper 
ate in the manner described and each feedler 
feeds to every alternate gripper barg. Any 
lack of register may be corrected by retard 
ing or setting ahead the carrier as may be nec 
essary, and individual links or the wholese 
ries may be adjusted to compensate for ex 
pansion and contraction. As will be noticed 
in Fig.2 the supporting pulleysEE'are driven 
by studs which do not extend across from one 
side of the press to the other which construc 
tion permits free access to the impression cyl 
inders. 
It is evident that various changes could be 
made in the arrangement of many of the parts 
of the press. For instance, the teeth marked S 
may be cut on the pulleys and corresponding 
recesses made in the several links, and various 
modes of adjustment may be substituted for 
the modes shown and changes made in the 
form of the link. 
The auxiliary feeding device may be oper 
ated from any position of the machine other 
than the stud f as the main shaft B. If de 
sired more than two printing couples may be 
used and various other changes may obviously 
be made in the arrangement of the parts which 
would not involve a departure from the spirit 
of my invention. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a printing machine the combination 
with a printing couple and main feed mech 
anism having a continuous motion, and adapt 
ed to carry the sheet to be printed between 
the printing couple, of a feed board, a set of 
stops arranged in front of said feedboard and 
adapted to limit the position of a sheet, an 
auxiliary feed mechanism adapted to seize a 
sheet from its position on the feed board as 
limited by the stops and when the sheet and 
auxiliary feed mechanism are at rest, means 
to move the stops out of the way, a connec 
tion between a moving part of the machine 
and the auxiliary feed mechanism adapted 
to move said auxiliary feed mechanism for 
ward with gradually increasing speed till it 
is moving at substantially the same speed as 
the main feed mechanism, and means for 
transferring the sheet from the auxiliary to 
the main feed mechanism. 
2. In a printing machine the combination 
with a printing couple and main feed mech 
anism having a continuous motion, and adapt 
ed to carry the sheet to be printed between 
the printing couple, of a feed board, a set of 
stops arranged in front of the feed board, and 
adapted to limit the position of a sheet, an 
auxiliary feed mechanism having two plates 
between which a sheet is adapted to be seized, 
at the position limited by the stops, when both 
the sheet and the auxiliary feeding mechan 
ism are at rest, and carried forward from that 
position, a connection between an operative 
part of the machine and the auxiliary feed 
mechanism adapted to move said auxiliary 
feed mechanism forward with gradually in 
creasing speed till it is moving at substan 
tially the same rate as the main feed mech 
anism, and means for transferring the sheet 
from the auxiliary to the main feed mechan 
3. In a printing machine the combination 
with a main feed mechanism of a crank G.' 
having a pin g therein, an auxiliary feed 
mechanism adapted to transfer sheets to be 
printed from a feed board to the main feed 
mechanism, a link h having a notch adapted 
to engage with the ping connected to the aux 
iliary feed mechanism and a ping adapted to 
disengage the link h from the crank G'. 
4. In a printing machine, the combination 
with a flexible rack having gripper mechan 
isms connected there with and serving as a 
main feed mechanism, of supporting pulleys 
for said rack, a crank G' connected with one 
of said pulleys and having a ping therein, 
an auxiliary feed mechanism adapted to trans 
fer sheets to be printed from a feed board to 
the main feed mechanism, a link hhaving a 
notch adapted to engage with the ping con 
nected to the auxiliary feed mechanism, and 
a ping adapted to disengage the link h from 
the crank G'. 
5. In a printing machine, the combination 
with a printing couple, of main feed mechan 
ism operating to carry the sheet between the 
rolls of the printing couple, an auxiliary feed 
mechanism, means for driving said auxiliary 
feed mechanism at gradually accelerated 
speed from a state of rest to a speed substan 
tially equal to that of the main feed mechan 
ism and means for disconnecting the auxiliary 
SI). 
- 
35 
4 O 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
IOO 
I o5 
O 
I I5 
13O 
 
684,298 
separate curved links, and circular supports 
for said carrier in combination with a chain 
or cable for connecting the links together and 
gripper mechanism carried at suitable inter 
vals by the flexible carrier. 
12. The combination with a printing couple 
of an endless flexible carrier composed of a 
series of separate curved links, an adjustable 
chain on each side of the series of links for 
holding the links together and gripper mech- 6o 
anism carried at suitable intervals by the 
flexible carrier. 
13. In a printing machine the combination 
with a printing couple or couples, of gripper 
mechanisms, a flexible carrier on each side 6 
of the machine on which the gripper mech 
anisms are secured, said carrier operating to 
convey the sheet to be printed between the 
rolls of the printing couple, driving and sup 
porting pulleys for the flexible carriers and 
studs secured to each side of the frame of 
the press for supporting the driving pulleys 
whereby free access may be had to the print 
ing couple or couples. 
14. In a printing machine, the combination 
with main feed mechanism of an auxiliary feed 
mechanism having plates h, and t between 
which the paper is held, and means for mov 
ing said auxiliary feed mechanism forward 
from a state of rest till it acquires practically 
the same speed as the main feed mechanisms, 
all substantially as specified, and so that the 
sheet may be delivered to the main feed 
mechanism in a smooth condition and exact 
register may be insured. 
15. In a printing machine the combination 
with main feed mechanism, of an auxiliary 
feed mechanism having plates h, and i be 
tween which the paper is held and presented 
to the main feed mechanism, stops to limit 
the position of the paper before it is seized 
by the auxiliary feed mechanism S, means 
10. An endless flexible carrier composed of for moving the auxiliary feed mechanism in 
the manner specified, and means for transfer 
ring the sheet from the auxiliary to the main 
feed mechanism. 
feed mechanism from its driving motor and 
for returning it to its original position. 
6. In a printing machine, the combination 
With a link h having a head provided with a 
notch, of a rotating arm G having a pin ar 
ranged to come in line with the notch and en 
gage there with, means for disengaging the 
link from the pin at a predetermined point of 
the travel of the arm G, means for restoring 
the link to its first position, and an auxiliary 
feed mechanism operated by the link. 
7. In a printing machine the combination 
with a printing couple, of an endless flexible 
rack, Supports for said rack, gripper mechan 
isms carried by said rack, two feedboards, two 
receiving boards, pins at the feed and receiv 
ing boards for actuating the gripper mechan 
isms, and means for actuating said pins that 
they will tumble every alternate gripper 
mechanism wherebysheets maybe taken from 
each feed board and delivered to each receiv 
ing board. 
8. In a printing machine the combination 
with a printing couple of an endless flexible 
rack carrying gripper mechanisms, supports 
for said rack, two feed boards and two aux 
iliary feed mechanisms operating to seize the 
sheets to be printed and deliver them to the 
main feed mechanism. 
9. The combination in a printing machine 
of two or more printing couples, an endless 
flexible carrier for conveying sheets to be 
printed between the printing couples, a sup 
porting and driving pulley for the carrier, a 
shaft or stud on which said pulley is mounted, 
and by which it is driven, said shaft or stud 
being connected by suitable gearing with the 
printing couples so that it revolves in a defi 
nite relation thereto, and means for adjust 
ing the pulley circumferentially on the shaft 
so that the point at which a sheet is printed 
on may be varied. 
links, certain of which are provided with rela 
tively broad and the others with relatively 
narrow internal teeth, a support for said links 
having recesses as ee arranged to fit the 
several teeth and gripper mechanism Sup 
ported on the links with a broad tooth. 
11. An endless flexible carrier composed of 
ALF. H. FABER, 
EDW. F. AYRES. 
WILLIAM. H. R. TOYE. 
9o 
95 
Witnesses: 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US534399.txt	2 
584399 
which are pivoted betweentwo bearings,B/, 
?rojecting upward from the bottom of the 
Valve casing,One ear of the weight J has 
two lugs,J and/,which may engage the 
lug@upon the valve operating barand,by 
their engagement with such lug?throw the 
Valve actuating bar either rearward orfor 
wardastheweightistiltedeitherforwardor 
rearward,Thetermsforwardandrear 
wardarearbitrarilyusedinthisconnection, 
forward being indicated as in a direetion 
towardthe inletandoutlet,andrearwardbe 
ingindicatedasin adirectionawayfromthe 
inlet and Outlet? 
Alatch,K,is pivoted uponasuitable up 
right,B,projectingfrom the bottom of the 
Valve casing;andSaidlatch hasanupwardly 
curvedforwardarm,K/,andalaterally pro 
jecting Catch portion,k,which mayengage 
the shoulder / of the valve operating bar, 
preventing Said bar from sliding rearward 
whensaidlatch engagessaidshoulder?The 
upperside oftherearend of the latch hasa 
yieldingcushion,/,againstwhichtheweight 
maystrike whenthelatteristiltedrearward? 
The weightis providedwithalongitudinaly 
slotted,segmentalarm,J,andtheslotinSaid 
segmentalarmisengaged byafinger,,pro 
iecting laterally from the lower end of a 
sleeve,L,which slides upon an upright rod, 
IM,uponthe bottomof the valvecasing,The 
upperend ofthe sleeveissecuredtoashift 
ing rod,N,projecting up into the air and 
water cylinder;and the upper end of Said 
shifting rod has an eniarged head,72?The 
weight Dof the air and_water piston is 
formedwithanaxialbore,d/,into whichthe 
shiftingrod may project,and the lowerend 
ofsaidaxialboreisSuficientlycontractedto 
engagethe headoftheshiftingrod andthus 
raise the latter and the sleeve when the air 
andwater piston arrivesatthe upper end of 
its stroke? 
Ifweassumethepartsoftheaircompressor 
as beingin the positionillustrated byFigs? 
II,IIIandV,Such positionindicatesthatthe 
airandwater piston has reachedthe upper 
end of its stroke,has tilted the actuating 
weight of the valve meghanism,and has 
shifted the inlet and outlet valves in such 
mannerastoClOSetheinletandopenthe out 
1et?The weightedairandwater piston will 
therefore beat the beginning ofitsgravitat 
ingdown-stroke asindicatedin Fig.II,The 
rising of the shifting rodand sleeve atthe 
upperendof the up-Stroke oftheairandwa 
ter piston hascaused the fingeratthe lower 
end of the sleeve to move upwardinthe slot 
tedSegmentalarm ofthe tiltingweight,and 
has caused Said weight to be thrown overin 
itsforwardposition?Asthe weightdropped 
overin its forward position,it struck the 
Curved arm of the latch,andraised the Catch 
Dortion of the latter fromits engagement 
withthe valve operatingbar,thusreleasing 
- 
the latterand allowingitto be shiftedrear 
ward by one of the lugs upon the ear of the 
weight,The rearward motion of the valve 
operating bar caused the inlet valve to be 
closedandthe outletvalve tobeopened?AS 
the weightedair and water piston descends 
bygravity,andreachesthelowermostendof 
its stroke,the piston will strike the upper 
end of the shifting sleeve,force the latter 
down uponits upright guiderod,and Cause 
itsfingertobearagainstthelowerendof the 
slottedSegmentalarm ofthe valve aCtuating 
weight,tiltingthelatterfromitsforwardpo 
sitiontoits rear position?Asthe Valve act 
uating weighttilts rearward,the lug upon 
the earwilengage the lug upon the valve 
operating bar,andwillthrowSaid bary?and 
the inlet and outlet valve8withit??forward? 
Asthe valve operatingbaristhrownforward, 
the valve actuatingweight forces the catch 
end of the latch downward to engage the 
shouldered end of the valve operating bar, 
preventingthe latterfrom beingforcedrear 
ward bythe pressure oftheinletwaterupon 
the inletvalve and uponthe Yoke onthefor 
ward end of the valve operating bar?The 
inlet valve will now be open andthe outlet 
Valve closed,as shown in Figs?TVand VI, 
andthe pressure ofthe inlet waterwillraise 
theweightedairandwaterpiston,forcingair 
under pressure out throughthe outlet valve 
and nipple? 
It will be observedthattheinletvalve and 
outlet valve both close against their Seats 
with the pressure of the water,so that,as 
Soonasthe valve operating bar hasreceived 
it8initial movement,the pressure of the in 
rushing or out-rushingwaterwill Carrythe 
Valve with it toit8Seat?Asthe inlet Valve 
thus has atendencyto automaticallyclose 
under the pressure of the in-rushingwater, 
itis necessarytoprovide the latch mechan 
ism for the valve operating bar,to prevent 
Dremature closing ofthe inlet valve? 
Othermodes of applyingthe principle of 
ourinvention maybe employedforthe mode 
herein explained?Change maytherefore be 
made as regards the mechanism thus dis 
closed,provided the principles of construc 
tion Set forth respectivelyin the following 
Claimsareemployed? 
We therefore particularly point out and 
distinctlyclaimas ourinvention? 
l?In a hydrauliCair CompreSSor,the Com 
binationofavalve operatingbar,alatch hav 
ing a,catch end engaging a Shoulder upon 
Said barand havinga projectingend,anda 
tilting,Valve aCtuating weight engagingthe 
projectingendof Saidlatchat one portion of 
its throw to disengage the latch from the 
Valveoperatingbar,substantiallyassetforth? 
2?In a hydraulic air C0mpreSSOr,the Com 
binationofavalve operatingbarformedwith 
ashoulderand with 3,projectinglug,alatch 
havinga catch end engaging Said Shoulder 
75 
85 
90 
95 
?OS 
Tr5 
[20 
T25 
15 
3O 
35 
55 
65 
 
534399 
 
3 
anda projectingend,andatiltingvalveact- be ourinventionwe have hereunto set our 
ating weight provided with lugs engaging handsthis7th day of February,A.D,1893. 
R?N,LOWE? 
thelugupon the Valve Operating bary?said 
Weight engaging the projectingend of the 
F,C,GUYSER? 
5 latchat One end of its stroke,Substantially 
In testimonythatweelaim the foregoingto 
WM.SECTUR, 
J,C,TURNER? 
aSSetforth? 
Witnesses: 
 
V 
-? 
* 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US534499.txt	(No Model,) 
J. M. DODGE. 
FRICTION CLUTCH, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
val 
1 
-???? 
(No Model.) 
No. 534499, 
J. M. DODGE. 
FRICTION CLUTCH, 
2 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 19, 1895. 
  
 
? JK || IV ( 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
JAMES M. DODGE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
LINK-BELT ENGINEERING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FRICT ON-CLUTCH 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 584, 499, dated February 19, 1895. 
Application filed January 23, 1893, Serial No. 459,42), (No model) 
. 
60 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMESM. DoDGE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain Improvements in Friction-Clutches, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to improve 
the construction of what may be termed the 
disk friction clutch, so that the movement of 
the jaws away from the disk will be positive, 
and the parts so arranged that the grip will 
be powerful and the parts strong and compact. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1, is 
alongitudinal sectional view of my improved 
clutch. Fig. 2, is a view looking in the direc 
tion of the arrow, Fig. 1. Fig. 3, is a section 
On the line 1-2, Fig. 1. Fig. 4, is a perspective 
view showing parts of the clutch toggle joint 
detached; and Fig. 5, is a view of a portion 
of the carrier showing the socket for one of 
the levers. 
The clutch shown in the accompanying 
drawings is arranged to couple a driving and 
driven shaft that are in line, but it will be 
understood that the clutch can be mounted 
on the driving shaft or driven shaft, and the 
Casing may be used as a pulley or may have 
gear teeth on its periphery without departing 
from my invention, or a wheel or pulley may 
be formed on either of the elements of the 
clutch, as desired. . 
In the present instance A is the driving 
shaft; B, the driven shaft. On the driven 
shaft is a toothed clutch headA'secured to the 
shaft by a key, so as to turn therewith. Keyed 
to the shaft B is the carrier D for the friction, 
clutch mechanism. This carrier consists of 
a hlub d, web d' and flange d, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 1. The hub is keyed to the 
shaft B, and the flanged may be of a width 
sufficient to accommodate a belt or may sim 
ply form the casing for the clutching mech 
a.S. 
Eis the disk with which the clutches on the 
carrier engage. This disk has a hub e pro 
vided with teethe' which engage with the 
teeth a on the clutch head A', and carried by 
the hub is a bushing E' through which passes 
the end of the shaft B. The object of having 
the teeth on the head A' and the hub e is to 
allow for the slight movement of the disk 
. 
- 
when engaged by the friction clutching mech 
anism. The diskE is perforated in the pres 
ent instance, and mounted in the perforations 
are wooden blocks e'. The faces of these 
wooden blocks extend beyond the line of the 
faces of the disks, and the friction mechanism 
engages with the blocks, thus giving a better 
surface for contact. The blocks can be readily 
replaced when worn out. 
G is a clutching ring adapted to turn with 
the carrier D, and between this ring and the 
face d. of the carrier, is situated the clutch 
ing disk E. The ring is notched at intervals, 
and entering the notches are ribs d on the 
rim d of the carrier as clearly shown in Fig. 
3, thus insuring the turning of the ring G with 
the carrier, at the same time taking the strain 
off the operating bolts F. These operating 
bolts F are passed through openings din the 
carrier, and are tapped into the ring G as 
shown in Fig. 1. On the outer end of each 
bolt is a nut.f, back of which is a head H hav 
ing pockets.h for the reception of the heads 
of links I, the opposite heads of said links 
resting in pocketsi in a lever J, clearly shown 
in Fig. 4. This lever has extension pivotsk. 
resting in sockets d' in the carrier D. The 
long armi' of the lever J is attached at f to 
a link K which is pivoted at k' to an operat 
ing sleeve K suitably grooved for the recep 
tion of an operating lever. Thus it will be 
seen that the links I are connected to the 
short arm of the lever J, the long arm being 
connected to the operating sleeve. 
The bolt F passes through a sloti in the 
arm, and in order to give the proper strength 
to the clutching mechanism, I pass the bolt. 
also through the head H, and mount on each 
side of the bolt a link I. The links are held 
in place by flanges on the head and on the le 
ver, and the nut f can be so turned as to give 
the proper pressure. Thus it will be seen 
that pilus are entirely dispensed with at what 
may be termed the knuckle joint. 
The heads of the links are extended later 
ally and pass through openings in the flanges 
h' of the head H, and the flangest of the le 
ver J, so that the movement of the ringtoward 
and from the clutching disk is positive, dis 
pensing with the use of springs to retract the 
ring as is commonly done. Thus the ring 
65 
?? 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
?. ? ? 
I Oy 
2 ? 
25 
35 
40 
45 
2 
584,499 
a series of levers, each lever being forked and 
adapted to pass on each side of the bolt, and 
fulcrumed in bearings on the carrier, a head 
through which the bolt passes, a nut beyond 
the head, links on each side of the bolt, pins 
on said links adapted to pockets in the lever 
and head, mechanism for operating said le 
ver, whereby when the bolt is inserted the 
several parts are held in position, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The combination of the carrier, the 
clutching ring, the clutch disk mounted be 
tween the ring and carrier, levers for operat 
ing the ring, a series of bolts connected to the 
said levers and nuts on the ends of said bolts, 
with a shell L. mounted on the carrier, hav 
ing openings conforming to the shape of the 
nuts, and in which the nuts rest thus pre 
venting them from turning, substantially as 
described. 
5. The combination of the carrier, the 
clutching ring, the clutching disk, positive 
lever mechanism for moving the ring toward 
and from the carrier, a bushing on which the 
clutching disk is mounted, said bushing be 
ing adapted to the shaft, teeth around the 
Said clutching disk, a shaft, a clutch head on 
said shaft having teeth engaging with the 
teeth of the friction disk, a shaft in line with 
the shaft carrying the clutch head, and upon 
which is mounted the carrier, substantially 
as described. 
The combination of the carrier, the 
clutching ring adapted to turn with the car 
rier, a clutching disk mounted between the 
carrier and ring, bolts carried by the ring and 
passing through the carrier, lever mechanism 
on said bolts, a nut on the end of each bolt, a 
shell having openings shaped to correspond 
with the nuts, and in which the nuts rest, 
with studs secured to the carrier, said studs 
having reduced portions which pass through 
holes in the carrier, with nuts on the studs 
whereby the shell is held rigidly to the car 
rier, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
6. 
JAMES MI. T)ODGE. 
?I 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD W. YERKES, 
JAMES B. CRAWFORD. 
55 
?? 
75 
95 
cannot adhere to the disk as is often the case 
when springs are used. The movement be 
ing very limited enables me to exert great 
pressure upon the disk, and thus make a posi 
tive clutch. 
In order to prevent the nutsf from turning, 
and also to protect the parts, I mount a shell 
L at one side of the clutch, the flangel of the 
shell passing back of the rim d of the carrier 
D, and openings l' shaped to correspond with 
the nutf, are so made that the nuts extend 
through the shell as shown in Fig. 1." 
Studs MI are tacked into the web d' of the 
carrier, and their reduced ends n pass through 
openings in the shell L, the said shell resting 
against the shoulder, and nuts are applied to 
hold the shell in position. This shell also 
tends to support the outer ends of the bolts 
F, taking the strain off of the ring G. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination in a friction clutch of 
a shaft, a carrier mounted on said shaft, a 
friction disk also on the shaft, one of said 
parts being fixed and the other loose, an op 
erating sleeve, a clutching ring adapted to 
turn with the carrier, and between which and 
the carrier the clutching disk is mounted, 
bolts attached to the ring, and passing through 
the carrier, a head on each of said bolts, le 
Vers adapted to bearings on the carrier, links 
between the short arms of the levers and the 
heads on the bolts, the long arms of the Ie 
vers being connected to the operating sleeve, 
the whole so arranged that the movement to 
ward and from the clutching disk will be a posi 
tive movement, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the shaft, a carrier, 
and the clutching disk, a clutching ring 
adapted to turn with the carrier and between 
which and the carrier the clutching disk is 
mounted, a series of bolts passing through 
the web of the carrier and into the clutching 
ring, a nut on each bolt, a head back of said 
nut, a forked lever fulcrumed on the carrier, 
flanges on said lever and flanges on the head, 
links having pins adapted to pass through the 
flanges on the lever and head, means for op 
erating said lever, Substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the carrier, the 
clutching ring, a clutch disk mounted be 
tween the ring and carrier, a series of bolts 
passing through the carrier and into the ring, 
25 
35 
45 
5 ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US534599.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 534,599, 
 
C. B. BOWLING, 
PNEUMATIC TIRE, 
Patented Feb. 19, 1895. 
2% vs. 
 
 
 
 
 
S pvci 
Czarence/3/oeverag, 
y 7-z-d a 
Injentp 
as - 
 
 
 
d irpasses 
a 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLARENCE BENJAMINE BOWLING, OF BURR OAK, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO 
B. S. BOWLING AND SARAH A. BOWLING, OF SAME PLACE. 
PNEU MATC TRE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 534,599, dated February 19, 1895. 
\pplication filed October 26, 1893, Serial No,489,160, (No model.) 
To all whom it invay concern: 
4 and 5 designate, respectively, the Outer 7o 
canvas, by means of cement or other adhesive 
substance, such fabric forming a webbing 
or backing which permits free, independent 
movement of the strips comprising the layers 
and prevents the shield from interfering with 55 
the flexibility of the tire. In the construction 
which I have illustrated, the shield is com 
posed of duplicate inner and outer layers of 
metallic strips, which are separated by an in 
terposed layer of fabric, the strips in one 6o 
layer being arranged to break joint with the 
strips in the other layer, so as to prevent a 
sharp instrument which may be inserted be 
"tween the joints of the outer layer from reach 
ing the air-tube. The outer surface of the 65 
outer layer of strips, and the inner surface of 
the inner layer of strips, are covered by layers 
of fabric similar to that which is employed to 
separate the layers of strips. 
and inner layers of strips, separated by the 
interposed webbing or backing 6, and covered 
upon opposite sides by the outer layer of fab 
ric 7 and the inner layer of fabric 8. Said 
inner layer of fabric is extended beyond the 75 
edges of the layers of metallic strips and is 
secured at its edges to the inner surface of 
the shoe 2, thus forming a smooth or beveled 
edge or surface for contact with the outer sur 
face of the expansible tube. 
The strips in each metallic layer are ar 
ranged in a common plane with their edges 
contiguous but not overlapping, whereby each 
strip is separated from its neighbors by a 
small interval which is sufficient to prevent 85 
contact and avoid chafing, and the strips are 
prevented from being displaced, to alter this 
relative arrangement, by means of the cem 
ent or adhesive material by which the strips 
are secured to the webbing or backing. The go 
cement or adhesive material whichI prefer to 
employ in this connection is vulcanized rub 
ber, which is applied between the metallic 
strips and the adjacent surfaces of the fabric, 
and is vulcanized by means of hot irons ar- 95 
ranged upon the outer surfaces of the layers 
of fabric. 
When completed, the shield presents a com 
pact unitary construction composed of the al 
ternately-disposed metallic and flexible lay- Ioo 
Be it known that I, CLARENCE BENJAMINE 
, BOWLING, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Burr Oak, in the county of St. Joseph 
5 and State of Michigan, have invented a new 
and useful Pneumatic Tire, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to tires, and has spe 
cial reference to pneumatic tires for use in 
Io connection with bicycles and similar vehicles. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
protective shield to be arranged between the 
shoe and the expansible tube of a pneumatic 
tire to protect the latter from puncture by 
I5 sharp objects with which the tire comes in 
Contact, Such shield being composed, in part, 
of metal strips so arranged as to avoid fric 
tional contact between the metal parts or 
members. 
I am aware of the use of metallic protective 
shields in connection with tires, but in order 
to avoid the friction and wear, both upon the 
metal and upon contiguous portions of the 
tire, I provide a flexible backing or webbing 
25 to which the strips are secured by means of 
cement or other adhesive substance, whereby 
contiguous strips of metal are separated suffi 
ciently to avoid contact in use. 
Further objects and advantages of my in 
3o vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a perspective 
35 view of a portion of a tire constructed in ac 
cordance with my invention, the same being 
broken away to show the different layers of 
material. Fig. 2 is a perspective section of a 
portion of the tire. Fig. 3 is an axial section 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lingS. 
1 represents the expansible air-tube; 2, the 
45 shoe which is ordinarily constructed of rub 
ber, and 3 the interposed protective shield 
embodying my invention. This shield is con 
structed, essentially, of layers of thin metallic 
strips, preferably spring steel, which are se 
5o cured to contiguous' layers of fabric, such as 
4o of the same. 
Y. 
584,599 
55 
exterior shoe and an inclosed inflatable tube, 
of a protective shield, of less width than the 
circumference of the inflatable tube, and 
adapted to be attached permanently to the 
inner surface of the shoe to cover the Said 
inner surface of the tread or exposed portion 
of the same, said shield comprising alternate 
layers of continuous webbing or fabric and 
interposed transversely arranged metallic 
strips, the stripsin each layer being arranged 
with their contiguous edges out of contact 
and the strips in one layer being arranged to 
break joints with the strips in the adjacent 
layer, said alternate layers of webbing or 
fabric and metallic strips being connected by 
cement or adhesive material and the inner 
layer of webbing or fabric, or the layer which 
is adjacent to and comes in contact with the 
surface of the inflatable tube, being extended 
laterally beyond the edges of the other layers 
to forman edge for attachment by cement or 
adhesive material to said inner surface of the 
shoe, whereby the inflatable tube is remov 
ably arranged within the tube, substantially 
as specified. 
3. The herein described protective shield 
for the exposed sides or treads of tires, con 
prising duplicate parallel layers of trans 
versely-disposed metallic strips disposed in 
the layers at intervals to avoid friction be 
tween adjacent edges, and the strips in each 
layer being arranged to break joints with the 
strips in the other layer, an interposed layer 
of fabric to the opposite surfaces of which the 
metallic strips are secured by cement or other 
adhesive material, and outer and inner lay 
ers of fabric secured by cement or adhesive 
material to the exposed surfaces of the layers 
of metallic strips, the lateral edges of the in 
ner layer of fabric being extended beyond 
the ends of the metallic strips to form flaps 
for attachment to the inner surface of a tire, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
CIARENCE BENJAMINE BOWLING. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK. A. GALLOWAY, 
FRANK PEASE. 
75 
90 
95 
ers, which is comparatively light in weight 
and is sufficiently yielding to avoid interfer 
ing with the flexibility of the shoe. 
From the above description it will be un 
derstood that the construction of the shield 
may be and preferably is completed before 
application to the tire, thus adapting it for 
sale as an independent article of manufac 
ture; and that the shield is preferably at 
tached to the shoe of the tire rather than to 
the inflatable tube, thus permitting free con 
traction and expansion of the latter without 
the risk of displacing the shield. Further 
more, the improved shield is made of less 
width than the circumference of the inflat 
able tube, in the first place, because there is 
no necessity for a shield except for that por 
tion of the tube which is adjacent to the ex 
posed side of the tire, and therefore the con 
tinuance of the shield to the inner side of the 
tire adds to the weight without increasing the 
efficiency of the shield, and in the second 
place, because a shield of a given size may be 
attached to tires of different sizes, and at the 
Same time Sufficient space at each lateral edge 
of the shield is provided to permit of the at 
tachment to the inner surface of the shoe of 
the extensions of one of the layers of fabric. 
By the construction as above described, a new 
inflatable tube may be introduced without af 
fecting the protective shield. 
Various changes in the form, proportion, 
and the minor details of construction may be 
resorted to without departing from the prin 
ciple or sacrificing any of the advantages of 
this invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is- 
- 
1. As a new article of manufacture, the 
herein described protective shield for inflat 
able tires, the same comprising a plurality of 
layers of metallic strips and webbing or fab 
ric, alternately arranged and cemented to 
gether, the terminal layers being of webbing 
or fabric and one of them being extended be 
yond the metallic layers to provide means 
for the attachment of the shield to the inner 
surface of the shoe of a tire, substantially as 
specified. 
2. The combination with a tire having an 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US534700.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 534,700, 
 
A. H. SIMMS & W. M. FULTON, 
HYDRAULIC COMPRESS, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 26, 1895. 
SI 
ad 
c 
E 
t 
- 
st s 
THE NORRs PETERs co, PHOTO-lit Ho, wiASHINGTCN, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 534,700. 
Fig. 3. 
If 12 
l 
1. 
l LLII. A S 
SfSz 
 
S 
N 
3- N O A. 3 
2%2. 
A. H. SIMMS & W. M. FULTON. 
HYDRAULIC COMPRESS, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 26, 1895. 
F.C.. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
2 
% 
6-2, S1 
22H 
2. 
2 
37- 
1. \Z 12 
g-37 
1. 
 
 
  
 
 
   
SN2%NSS 22 N 
53. 2 (N 
is N. N. 
22 
%z 2 
a % NN 32 
2 3&N 
   
5 N NY 
SN 2 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALONZO HENRY SIMMS AND WILLIAM MILTON FULTON, OF BIRMINGHAM, 
ALABAMA. 
HYDRAUL C COMPRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 534,700, dated February 26, 1895. 
Application filed September 13, 1894, Serial No. 522,957, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ALONZO HENRY SIMMs 
and WILLIAMMILTON FULTON, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Birmingham, in the 
county of Jefferson and State of Alabama, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Hydraulic Compresses; and we 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
cotton compresses in which the bottom platen 
is raised to compress the bale; and the ob 
jects of our improvement are, first, to provide 
a Cotton compress of that description having 
hydraulic plungers to raise the bottom platen 
the plungers operated by a hydraulic press 
lure pump, the pump operated by steam from 
an adjoining boiler; second, to provide a cot 
ton compress consisting of a boiler, a hy 
draulic pressure pump, and a hydraulic com 
press, all attached to a railway car, by which 
the compress can be moved from place to 
place as required; third, to provide a port 
able cotton compress of a cheap and durable 
construction the parts of the press of such 
dimensions as to be easily arranged on a rail 
Way car to facilitate its moving from town to 
town, the press operated by a hydraulic press 
ure pump having a low pressure cylinder with 
a high pressure cylinder to finish the com 
pression; fourth, to provide a railway car 
having a cotton compress and operating ma 
chinery attached, the car provided with a 
steam engine connected to the car axle by a 
chain belt operating on sprocket wheels to 
operate or move the car from place to place 
as may be desired. We attain these objects 
by the mechanism and the arrangement of 
the parts illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1, is a vertical side view of our im 
proved cotton compress as arranged on a rail 
Way car, part of the platform above the car 
removed to show the press. Fig. 2, is a to 
view of the same. Fig. 3, is a detail cross 
Sectional view of the press through the cen 
ter, showing the connection of the press to the 
car sills. Fig. 4, is an enlarged detail longi 
tudinal section through the center of one of 
5 
25 
45 
So 
the hydraulic press cylinders with plunger 
and their connections. Fig. 5, is an enlarged 
cross sectional view through the center of 
one of the hydraulic pressure cylinders, show- 55 
ing the suction and discharge pipes with their 
Fig. 6, is an enlarged longi 
check valves. 
tudinal section through the end of the con 
necting pipe, showing the valve to allow the 
discharge of the water to the tank. 
Similar figures refer to similar parts 
throughout the several views. 
The car 1 as shown in the drawings, rep 
resents a railway car of the usual form of 
construction adapted to operate upon the 
rails of a railway track as usually constructed, 
which permits the car to be moved to any 
part of a continuous track to which it is de 
sired to place a car. - 
Two suspension plates 2.2 made of steel or 
other suitable metallic material and formed 
as shown, are placed with the ends resting on 
the car sills 3.3 and attached thereto. The 
suspension plates support the bottom plate 4 
of the press. The bottom plate is made of 
cast steel or other suitable metallic material. 
The ends of the plate are supported on the 
suspension plates. The bottom plate is ribbed, 
and formed to attain the most desirable form . 
for strength. 
Two hydraulic cylinders 5. 5 are attached 
to the bottom plate by flanges and bolts in 
the usual manner, the bottom plate forming 
the heads of the cylinders. The cylinders are 
provided near the bottom with a connecting 
pipe 6 to permit the Water to pass from one 
cylinder to the other. The cylinders are at 
tached to each other near the bottom by 
flanges on the connecting pipe secured by 
bolts, and near the top by a flanged Web 7 se 
cured in the same manner. 
Two hydraulic plungers 8. 8 are placed in 
the cylinders 5.5. The plungers are made of 
cast steel or other Suitable metallic material. 
The plungers are provided at the bottom ends 
with heads, and they have flanges formed on 
the upper edges as shown. A bottom platen 
9 made of cast steel or other suitable metallic 
material is placed on the top ends of the 
plungers, and attached thereto, by counter 
sunk bolts 10, 10 passing through the plunger 
flanges. 
95 
75 
do 
 
584,700 
7 o 
75 
Four columns 11 extend upward from the 
bottom plate 4. The columns are made of 
wrought steel or other metallic material, and 
have collars formed on them near the top and 
bottom ends, pins being formed at the ends 
with screw threads for nuts. The pins formed 
on the bottom end of the columns are inserted 
through the bottom plate and suspension 
plates, and secured to place by nuts 12 screwed 
on the ends of the pins. A top platen 13 
formed as before described for the bottom 
plate, and made of the same material, is placed 
on the top ends of the columns, holes being 
provided in the plate to allow the column pins 
to pass through. Two braces i4. 14 formed 
as shown are placed over the column pins to 
engage the ends of the platen, the lower ends 
of the braces resting on the ends of the sus 
pension plates 2.2. The braces and suspen 
sion plates are both secured to the car sills 
by bolts 15.15. The platen and braces are 
both secured to the heads of the columns, by 
the nuts 12 screwed on the ends of the column 
pins. 
A platform 16 is constructed above the car 
floor. The platform is made to inclose the 
press on all sides, and of an elevation suffi 
cient to come even with the bottom platen 
when down, so as to roll the cotton bales into 
or out of the press on a level. Temporary 
platforms or skids can be used as additions 
to the platform if necessary. 
A hydraulic pressure pump 17 is placed on 
the floor of the car and attached thereto. The 
pump is provided with a steam cylinder 18, a 
low pressure water cylinder 19, and a high 
pressure water cylinder 20. All the cylinders 
are connected together in the usual manner, 
and provided with the usual form of plun 
gers provided with the necessary packings. 
A water tank 21 made of tank iron or other 
suitable material, is attached to the car on 
the under side of the floor, the tank extend 
ing underneath the pump. 
A suction pipe 22 extends from each water 
cylinder of the pump to the tank. The pipes 
are provided with check valves 23 placed at 
any desired position between the pump and 
the water. A connecting pipe 24 extends from 
the tank to one of the hydraulic press cylin 
ders. The pipe is attached to the cylinder by 
flanges and bolts in the usual manner. The 
end of the pipe at the water tank is closed by 
a valve 25. Any other form of valve to the 
one shown can be used, the valve to be oper 
ated by a hand lever 26 pivoted to the car. A 
discharge pipe 27 is connected to each of the 
water cylinders of the pump. The discharge 
pipes are attached to the connecting pipe lead 
ing to the press cylinder. Each discharge 
pipe is provided with a back pressure check 
valve 28 located between the pump and con 
necting pipe. 
The pump cylinders are provided with the 
usual drain pipes having straight way cylin 
der or vent cocks 29 fitted thereto, and the 
cocks in the high and low pressure pump cyl 
inders are connected by a connecting rod, the 
rod being pivoted to cranks attached to the 
stem of the cocks. A second connecting rod 
pivoted at both ends, connects the low press 
ure vent cock crank with the bottom end of 
a hand lever 30, and the handl lever is piv 
oted in a bearing attached to the car floor. 
The hand lever when set as shown by full 
lines in drawings, opens the vents to the high 
pressure pump cylinder, and closes the vents 
to the low pressure cylinder. The pump if 
then started, will only operate the cylinder in 
which the vents are closed, namely the low 
pressure. If the hand lever is then reversed 
as shown by dotted lines, it opens the vents 
in-the low pressure cylinder, and closes the 
vents in the high pressure, thereby changing 
the operation of the pump from one cylinder 
to the other, and reversing in the same man 
ner, by a reversal of the hand lever. 
A boiler 31 is placed on the car and secured 
thereto, the form of boiler known as a fire 
box, or locomotive, boiler preferred. The 
boiler is provided with a steam pipe 32. The 
pipe connecting to the steam cylinder of the 
pump, supplies steam from the boiler to the 
pump. The pipe is provided with a valve 33 
to shut steam from the pump when desired. 
A Steam engine 34 is secured to the car. 
The engine can be of any of the usual forms, 
one having double cylinders preferred. The 
main shaft of the engine is provided with a 
sprocket wheel 35, the sprocket wheel pro 
vided with a chain belt 36 connecting with a 
like sprocket wheel on the car axle. The 
steam engine and operating chain communi 
cates motion to car, when necessary to trans 
port the car on the rails 37 to some other de 
sired position. 
A steam pipe 38 connects the boiler with 
the cylinders of the engine, to furnish steam 
from the boiler to the engine. A valve 39 is 
placed in the pipe to cut steam off from the 
engine when desired. 
To operate the compress, steam is admitted 
from the boiler to the steam cylinder of the 
pump. The hand lever operating the cylinder 
cocks, being thrown to open the vent pipes 
from the high pressure cylinders and close 
the vents from the low pressure cylinder, the 
operation of the pump will force water from 
the tank through the low pressure cylinder 
and connecting pipes to the press cylinders. 
The water operating on the plungers will force 
the bottom platen to ascend. When the in 
creasing pressure is sufficient to slow the . 
pump, the hand lever operating the cylinder 
cocks is reversed, to open the low pressure 
and close the high pressure cylinder vents. 
The high pressure cylinder then operates un 
til the bale is compressed. The opening of the 
valve in the end of the connecting pipe by 
the operation of the hand lever, allows the 
water to escape from the press to the tank. 
The plungers descending as the Water escapes, 
brings the platen and compressed bale down. 
to the level of the platform, when the bale is 
O 
I5 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
4o 
45 
5O 
55 
6 o 
95 
CO 
IOS 
I I5 
25 
584,700 
3 
plate suspended on plates attached to the car 
sills, two connected hydraulic cylinders open 
above, the cylinders at their bottom ends at 
tached to the bottom plate, an aperture pro 
vided in one cylinder for the admission of an 
operating fluid, two plungers operating in the 
cylinders, a platen extending across the heads 
of both plungers and attached thereto, four col 
umns having screw-threaded pins formed on 
both ends of the columns, the column secured 35 
to the bottom plate by nuts on the ends of the 
pins, a top platen placed on the heads of the 
columns, two metallic braces placed over the 
ends of the platen, the ends of the braces ex 
tending downward and attached to the car 
sills, the braces and platen secured to the col 
umns by nuts on the ends of the pins, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
ALONZO HENRY SIMMS. 
WILLIAM MILTON FULTON. 
Witnesses: 
J. E. NORMAN, 
S. W. BYARS, 
rolled out and another rolled in, to repeat the 
operation. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a cotton compress, the combination 
with a railway car of a hydraulic compress 
the compress having a bottom plate suspended 
on plates attached to the sills of the car, two 
hydraulic cylinders attached to the bottom 
plate, two hydraulic plungers operating in the 
cylinders, the plungers having a platen at 
tached to flanges on the upper ends of the 
plungers, four columns attached to and ex 
tending upward from the bottom plate, the 
columns having a platen attached to their up 
per ends, braces embracing the ends of the 
platen, the braces extending downward and 
attached to the car sills, a hydraulic pressure 
pump having connections to the press cylin 
ders, and a boiler having a steam pipe con 
necting with the pump, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. . 
2. In a hydraulic compress, the combina 
tion with a railway car of a compress bottom 
p 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US534800.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 534,800, 
- 
S. KREISHER 
k 
BRAKE FOR RAILWAY CARS, 
Patented Feb. 26, 1895. 
- 
w- 
- S s 
 
  
 
  
G. 
R 
y 
 
 
n- ==----- 
Ipiapir 
solozaaon 7(rezsauer 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SOLOMON KREISHER, OF SNYDERTOWN, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO 
GEORGE O. MARTZ, OF SHAMOKIN, AND J. H. MARVZ, OF REED STA 
TION, PENNSYLVANIA. 
BRAKE FOR RALWAY. CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,800, dated February 26, 1895. 
Application filed January l5, 1895, Serial No. 535,008. (No model.) 
O 
15 
To all uviuOIn it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SOLOMON KREISHER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Sny. 
dertown, in the county of Northumberland 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
new and useful Railway-Brake, of which the 
following is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
car brakes. 
The object of the present invention is to 
improve the manner of mounting the hand 
wheels of car brakes, and to enable such 
hand wheels to be readily folded back out of 
the Way to clear the steps of a passenger 
coach, and to enable freight cars to be more 
completely loaded, and the like, and to be 
quickly brought into operative position when 
desired. 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
vide such a folding hand wheel, which will in 
no wise decrease the efficiency of the brake, 
and which may be readily removed when de 
sired, and in which there will be no noise and 
rattling. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
Out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a portion of a brake shaft provided 
with a hand wheel, constructed in accordance 
With this invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
tional view of the same. Fig. 3 is a similar 
view, the wheel being in operative position. 
Like numerals of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lings. 
l designates the ordinary vertically dis 
posed railway brake-shaft, designed to be 
mounted at the ends of a car, in the usual 
mainner, and to be connected with the brake 
levers; and the shaft is provided at its upper 
end with a socket or head 2, which may be 
formed integral with the shaft, but which is 
preferably constructed separately and se 
cured to the upper end of the shaft by screw 
threads, or other equivalent means. The 
socket 2 is provided at its lower end with an 
25 
35 
45 
 
7 o 
55 
opening 3, to receive the upper end of the so 
shaft, and its upper end is enlarged and shaped 
into a substantially semi-circular head 4. The 
top or head of the, socket is provided at its 
upper and outer edge with a quadrant-shaped 
opening 5, communicating with a rectangular 
or other polygonal-shaped socket opening 6, 
receiving a stem or shank 7, to which is 
detachably secured a hand wheel 8. The 
stem or shank 7 of the hand wheel fits snugly 
between the sides of the head in the curved 
or quadrant shaped opening, and, When in 
a vertical position, its lower end is stepped 
in the socket opening 6, and fits against the 
inner vertical side or wall of the head, and is 
rigidly connected with the brake shaft, 
whereby the hand wheel is connected with 
the same, and is maintained in a horizontal 
position for operating the brakes. 
The stem or shank of the hand wheel is pro 
vided with projections or lugs 10, extending 
from opposite sides of it, and preferably 
formed by a pin arranged in a perforation of 
the shank and projecting therefrom; and 
these projections are arranged in vertical 
slots 11 of the head of the socket, when the 
stem or shank is in a vertical position, and 
prevent the hand wheel from accidentally 
swinging downward and outward. The ver 
tical slots 11 permit the shank or stem of the 
hand wheel to be lifted vertically to disen 
gage its lower end from the socket opening 6, 
and curved slots 12 extend downward and 
outward from the upper ends of the Vertical 
slots, whereby when the stem or shank of the 
hand wheel is lifted out of engagement With 
the socket opening 6, it is adapted to be SWung 
downward and outward into a horizontal po 
sition, the projections moving in the curved 
slots. This construction permits the hand 
wheel to be readily changed from a vertical 
to a horizontal position, and the change may 
be instantly effected. When the stem or 
shank is arranged in a horizontal position, its 
inner end engages a stop or shoulder 13, pref 
erably formed by recessing the inner Verti 
cal wall or side of the socket. This stop or 
shoulder limits the upward movement of the 
inner or lower end of the shank or stem, and 
90 
95 
75 
534,800 
O 
25 
35 
prevents the latter swinging downward past 
a horizontal position. 
The hand wheel is detachably secured to 
the upper end of the shank or stem, by means 
of a nut in the ordinary manner, and it is 
adapted to be detached when desired, and by 
enoving the pin from the shank or stem, the 
latter may be taken out of the socket. 
In order to prevent any noise or rattling 
the movements of the hand wheel and its 
shank are cushioned by blocks 14 of rubber, 
or other elastic material, arranged at the bot 
tons of the vertical and curved slots, but any 
other form of cushion may be employed. 
At the base of the socket opening is a drip 
9 escape opening 15, to prevent accumula 
tion of dust, dirt and other substances, and 
also to prevent the collection of Water, and 
the accumulation of ice in the socket open 
ing, whereby the stem or shank of the hand 
Wheel will always fit snugly in the socket 
Opening. 
It will be seen that the hand wheel is ex 
ceedingly simple and inexpensive in con 
struction, that it is adapted to be readily ap 
plied to the ordinary brakeshafts in use on 
cars, that it possesses great strength and du 
ability, and that it does not in any manner 
impair the strength or efficiency of car brakes. 
It will also be seen that the hand wheel may, 
be readily folded out of the way, when de 
sired, and may be quickly brought into oper 
ative, position, by a train hand, by simply 
drawing the wheel upward toward him, and 
that when in operative position it is firmly 
interlocked with the brake shaft. 
Changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction may be resorted 
to without departing from the principle or 
Sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
Vention. 
What I claim is 
1. A brake shaft provided with a socket, 
having a substantially quadrant-shaped open 
ing at its top, combined with a hand wheel 
provided with a shank fitting in the socket 
and interlocked with the same and adapted 
to be lifted out of such engagement and ar 
ranged to swing downward in said opening, 
whereby it is transferred from a horizontal 
to a vertical position, and vice versa, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A brake shaft socket provided at its top 
With a substantially quadrant-shaped open 
ing, and provided at opposite sides with ver 
tical slots and having curved slots extending 
downward and outward from the upper ter 
minals of the vertical slots, combined with a 
hand wheel having a stem fitting in the socket 
and provided with projections arranged in 
said slots, whereby the stem is capable of ver 
tical movement to disengage its lower end 
from the socket, and is adapted to be swung 
down to a horizontal position for folding the 
hand wheel out of the way, substantially as 
described. 
3. A brake shaft socket, provided at its top 
with a head, and having a quadrant-shaped 
opening and provided at the bottom thereof 
with a socket opening, and having on its in 
terior a shoulder or stop, combined with a 
hand wheel provided with a stem arranged 
in the socket and having its lower end inter 
locked with the socket opening and capable 
of a limited vertical movement to disengage 
its lower end and arranged to swing down 
ward into a horizontal position, and to en 
gage the stop or shoulder, substantially as 
described. 
4. A brake shaft socket, provided at its up 
per end with a head, having a quadrant 
shaped opening, and provided at opposite 
sides with vertical and curved slots, and hav 
ing on its interior a stop or shoulder, Com 
bined with a hand wheel having a stem ar 
ranged in the socket and provided with pro 
jections fitting in the slots thereof, and cush 
ions located at the lower ends of the slots and 
adapted to receive the projections of the stem, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
SOLOMON KEREISHER. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN H. SIGGERS, 
E. G. SIGGERS. 
55 
o 
75 
90 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US534900.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. MATHUSHEK. 
SOUNDING BOARD FOR STRINGED INSTRUMENTS, 
No. 534,900, 
Patented Feb. 26, 1895, 
 
Z7267,1, 
WITNESSES : 
a 4- 
 
NVENTOR; 
Azcz2722ca22%zZ726/24/6. 
4/.2% AITORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
VICTOR HUGO MATHUSHEK, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SOUND IN G-BOARD FOR STRING ED INSTRUMENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 534,900, dated February 26, 1895. 
Application filed October 25, 1894, Serial No. 526,949. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, VICTOR: HUGo MATHU 
SHEK, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Sounding-Boards for Stringed In 
struments, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in piano sounding boards as pointed 
out in the following specification and claim 
and illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a sounding board. 
Fig. 2 is a section along acac Fig. 1. 
It is a well known fact that piano sounding 
boards constructed of wood are affected by 
changes in weather and temperature, while 
the strings being of metal or steel are affected 
at times to a different extent by such changes, 
thus giving rise to disturbances disadvanta 
geously affecting the tone or musical quality 
of the instrument. By making my sounding 
board of metal, such as steel, copper, compo 
sition metal or the like, such disturbances 
can be obviated. The strings for example be 
ing made of steel, and the sounding board of 
steel homogeneous with the string steel, it is 
manifest that atmospheric changes to which 
the instrument is exposed must affect the 
strings and the sounding board to an equal 
IC 
25 
degree, so that the strings and the board re 
main at rest or unaffected relatively to one 
another. 
The sounding board. A composed of a suit 
ably thin sheet or sheets of metal, being pro 
vided with a bridge or bridges B will support 
the strings as well known. Ribs C may be 
employed as well known, but if the board. A 
is composed of a suitable metal sheet possess 
ing the required strength, and vibratory qual 
ity, the ribs may be omitted. 
The metallic Sounding board will be left 
free to expand and contract by being secured 
to its Support along one edge by slot and pin 
connections D E. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
As a new article of manufacture, a piano 
sounding board made of metal and rigidly se 
cured at one edge and movably secured along 
its other edge by pins loosely passed through 
elongated slots in the sounding board, Sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
- 
VICTOR HUGO MATHUSHEIK. 
Witnesses: 
WM. C. HAUFE, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535000.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 535,000, 
E. GOODMAN. 
OIL BURNER, 
Patented Mar, 5, 1895, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMANUEL GOODMAN, OF POCAEIONTAS, VIRGINIA. 
Ola BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 535,000, dated March 5, 1895. 
Application filed March 5, 1894, Serial No. 502,385. (No model.) 
To a (, wiO77, it may concern: 
Be it known that i, EMANUEL GOODMAN, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resid 
ing at Pocahontas, in the county of Tazewell 
and State of Virginia, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Oil-Burn 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to a hydrocarbon 
burner and is designed to provide a simple 
form of burner for the use of oil as a fuel 
Combined with steam and air which shall be 
Very effective in use and adapted to be used 
in any situation where it is desirable to use 
oil as fuel. 
I have aimed to make my burner of few 
parts and of such simple construction as to 
make it durable in use and economical to 
make. 
My invention consists in a casting having 
a passage for the oil and a passage for the 
Steam, these passages extending parallel with 
the oil passage discharging above the outlet 
for the steam and of a shell surrounding the 
end of the first casting so as to form a cham 
ber around the same and this chamber I con 
nect with a hot air supply and provide feed 
openings at the front end thereof so as to pro 
mote the combustion of the oil and steam by 
discharging jets of hot air at the point of 
combustion. 
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1, is 
a longitudinal vertical section of the burner, 
and Fig. 2, is a front view of the same with 
Some of the parts in dotted lines. 
In the figures I have shown my improved 
burner as composed of two castings, the first 
A having two channels one for the oil and 
One for the steam and it will be understood 
that proper connections are made to an oil 
Supply and a steam supply. The steam sup 
ply and the oil supply may be located at any 
convenient point and any ordinary connec 
tions be made with the channels. The steam 
issues from its channel a through an elon 
gated slit b at the front end thereof and this 
slit extends entirely across the end of the 
casting as shown in Fig. 2, so that the steam 
not only issues directly in front, but is also 
ejected at each corner in the shape of a fan. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
The channel b' for the oil extends the entire 
length of the casting, but at its front end as 
shown in the figures the passage is contracted 
and is directed downwardly so as to feed the 
oil in a thin film directly above the discharge 
opening for the steam so that the steam re 
ceives the oil as it is fed and atomizes it 
breaking it up thoroughly so that the steam 
and oil become intermingled in the form of 
Vapor. 
The shell B surrounds the front end of the 
burner and is bolted to the casting Aby lugs 
c and bolts d. This shell forms a chamber 
around the casting A covering the front end 
except at the mouth of the burner where an 
elongated opening is left for the flame to 
issue. The space formed by the shell is in 
connection with the hot air supply and this 
hot air is fed to the mingled steam and oil 
through a series of perforations in a flange 
e extending inwardly around the opening of 
the shell B. 
It will be understood that the oil supply, 
the steam supply and the hot air supply are 
all regulated by suitable valves and thus there 
may be a thorough mixture of the ingredients 
in regulated quantities and thus a combus 
tion be promoted. 
What I claim is 
An oil burner, consisting of a casting A, a 
steam passage through the same terminating 
in a flaring slit, an oil steam passage having . 
a flaring exit at right angles to the passage 
directly above the exit of the steam passage, 
a shell B forming a chamber around the cast 
ing A, an air supply for said chamber, a flame 
opening in said shell flanges e closing the 
passage from the air chamber to the flame 
opening and a series of perforations in Said 
flanges for feeding the air from the said cham 
ber across the line of the steam and oil exits, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
E. GOODMAN. 
Witnesses: 
JOS. FORREST, 
WALTER DONALDSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535100.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES B. GILL, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
BURG LAR-ALARM FOR GLASS Doo RS. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 535,100, dated March 5, 1895. 
Application filed February 27, 1893, Serial No. 463,800, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JAMES B. GILL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
and county of San Francisco, State of Califor 
nia, have invented a new and useful Burglar 
Alarm for Glass Doors, Windows, &c., of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
means for immediate announcement of at 
tempted burglaries through glass-doors, plate 
glass and other windows, sky-lights, tran 
Soms, &c. I attain this object by the means 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings 
Which form part of this specification, and in 
which 
Figurel represents an inside view of a large 
plate-glass window embodying my invention 
and showing a thin strip of metal around the 
border of the plate with connecting wires and 
parts. Fig. 2 is a view in perspective of a pad 
by which the wires are secured to the border. 
A represents a thin narrow strip or film of 
silver or other conductor of electricity con 
nected to the face of the glass by some adhe 
Sive substance which extends all around the 
glass near the frame in an unbroken line save 
at one corner preferably the upper corner. 
To each end of the film or strip of conduct 
ing metal I connect a pad B, B, (best shown 
in Fig. 2) which is composed of a narrow strip 
of blotting paper interiorly lined with a film 
or Strip of the same substance as the film or 
Strip around the glass pane is composed of, 
and of the same width as that of the blotting 
pad. The pads are held in position and in 
contact with the film by means of springs B^ 
fastened to the window-frame. These pads 
B,B, are connected by means of the wires C, 
C with a closed battery circuit of a burglar. 
alarm appliance (not shown) which causes an 
alarm to sound when the circuit is broken 
? ? 
35 
and therefore when the film or strip of metal 
that borders the glass is ruptured or broken 
the circuit will be broken and an immediate 
alarm will be given at the central office or 
place indicated by the burglar-alarm appa 
ratus or instrument, and steps may at once be 
taken to arrest the burglars or thieves that 
would naturally congregate at such a place as 
a store front at the sound of broken glass. 
In such an attempt to gain entrance to a build 
ing by cracking or breaking the pane of glass 
provided with the safeguard above described 
it is quite evident that in breaking the glass 
the film will also be broken or ruptured and 
the electric circuit connecting the wires with 
the burglar alarm will be broken at once. 
The film may be of gold, silver quicksilver 
or other conducting substance and may be 
made to adhere to the glass in straight border 
lines as shown in the drawings or be applied 
in curved lines forming ornamental borders, 
but under such conditions as that, the border 
should be continuous and unbroken save and 
except at one corner as above set forth. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
In a burglar alarm a thin strip or film of 
metal applied to the inner face of glass-doors, 
windows, &c., the continuity of which is bro 
ken and the ends provided with conductive 
pads composed of a thin strip of conductive 
metal inclosed by bibulous paper, connecting 
with the wires of a battery, as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have here unto Set my hand and seal. 
JAMES B. GILL. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
C. W. M. SMITH, 
GEO. T. KNOX. 
45 
55 
?? 
7 o 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535200.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 535,200, 
T. J. GRAY, 
CAR STARTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar, 5, 1895. 
 
Aiz 4 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
(32-/( 4/6 
INVENTOR 
Clas. (s 
ATTORMEY 
"THE NER1s PEERS Co., PHOTO-THC., W.SINGTON, d, c. 
(No Model.) 
T. J. GRAY. 
CAR STARTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 535,200, 
Patented Mar. 5, 1895, 
WITNESSES: 
&4 (?yner 
INVENTOR 
cka 40s 
ATTORNEY 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 535,200, 
. 
T. J. GRAY. 
CAR STARTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Mar, 5, 1895, 
34 As s 
Stil 
E. 
- 
a 
71 
H 
SSSally II. 
HIzil 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
S& S\,.SRS. 
24 (4 for 
INVENTOR 
BY c. 7, 
ATTORNEY 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 535,200, 
 
T. J. GRAY. 
CAR STARTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Mar, 5, 1895. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS J. GRAY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM J. 
EDWARDS, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR-STARTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 535,200, dated March 5, 1895, 
Application filed January 27, 1894, Serial. No, 498,l65. (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all, whom, it may concern 
Be it known that I, THOMAS J. GRAY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Car-Starters, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
In a car-starter characterized by my inven 
tion, the power for starting the car is stored 
up by the momentum of the car while stop 
ping the latter, the increasing resistance due 
to the storing up of such power being at such 
time in opposition to the advancement of the 
car, and hence being a means for stopping the 
Same. Upon the releasement of the stored 
up power, it will instantly act as a means for 
effectively starting the car, no matter how 
heavily the same may be loaded. The in 
creasing resistance of the starting power be 
ing thus opposed to the momentum of the car 
will increase proportionally to the momentum 
of the car due to its speed and load, and hence 
the power will be stored up to an extent pro 
portional to the load it is required to start. 
As a means for attaining these ends, one of 
the car axles is connected with a loose gear 
by an intervening convolute spring. The axle 
also carries a clutch device whereof one mem 
ber is fixed upon the axle and the other pro 
vided with a set of pinions which connect it 
With said gear. These pinions also engage 
With an abutment gear, which is independent 
of the axle. When both of said gears are held 
against rotation by any suitable brake or 
locking devices, the spring will be wound up 
to an extent proportional to the momentum 
of the car and will oppose the movement of 
the car with an increasing resistance until 
the car stops. By then releasing the gear 
which is subject to the spring it will turn for 
Wardly and in so doing compel the pinions to 
traverse the abutment gear. This action 
causes the clutch members to lock together 
and also revolve the entire clutch, forwardly, 
whereby the axle will be rotated and the car 
Started. After starting, the abutment gear 
can be released, whereupon the gears and 
clutch will turn as a whole with the axle, 
In the accompanying drawings, -Figure 1 
is a vertical section through the starting de 
vice on a plane coincident with the car-axle, 
which latter together with the wheels is shown 
in elevation. Fig. 2 is a section taken trans 
versely through the axle and mainly shows in 
end elevation, the clutch, pinions and a brake 
device, a portion of said clutch being broken 
away so as to show one of the pinions in sec 
tion and its spindle in elevation. Fig. 3 shows 
the axle partly in end elevation, and broken 
away so as to show the inner end of the con 
volute spring attached thereto, the spring and 
the chambered side of gear B (with plate c, 
Fig. 1, removed) being shown in elevation. 
Fig. 4 shows the opposite side of the gear with 
a portion broken obliquely away so as to show 
its peripheral groove for a brake-strap. Fig. 
5 shows a portion of a car in front end eleva 
tion, and illustrates a brake actuating mech 
anism, portions of the hollow rotary shaft P. 
and rod P being broken away for convenience 
of illustration. Fig. 6 is a top plan of the 
brake mechanism and starting device, por 
tions of rods N and N' being broken away, 
with portions of a cross beam of the car be 
ing also broken away. Fig. 7 shows in front 
elevation, a couple of brake-levers which may 
be used in place of the rotary shaft and rod 
of Figs. 5 and 6. Fig. 8 is an elevation show 
ing the straps connected with said brake-le 
vers. Fig. 9 shows one of the said brake de 
vices in elevation and illustrates means for 
releasing the dog or pawl. 
In said drawings, A indicates the axle, and 
B denotes a convolute spring arranged about 
the axle and having its inner end secured 
thereto. The gear C is loose upon the axle 
and is chambered to inclose the spring, which 
latter has its outer end attached to said gear. 
The chamber within this gear can be closed 
in any suitable way so to exclude dust, for 
example, by an end cap or plate c. 
The clutch device is arranged between the 
loose gear C and an oppositely arranged abut 
ment gear D which is likewise loose upon the 
axle, it being observed that while for the sake 
of lightness the abutment gear is chambered 
as at d and its chamber closed by an end cap 
or plated, it can be made solid if so desired. 
The inner member E of the clutch device 
is fixed upon the axle and is shown in the na 
ture of a ratchet or hub which is peripherally 
notched so as to be engaged by any one or 
o 
25 
35 
45 
So 
go 
95 
Od 
Y 
S 
2 
585,200 
In order to exclude dust, an annular band a brake in conjunction with gear D. 
more of a set of roller dogs F arranged be- than the gear C, and hence ample leverage 
tween the said inner fast clutch member E and power for starting the car will be secured. 
and the outer annular clutch member G which 
After the car has been started the abut 
is in the nature of a pawl or dog ring or carrier. ment gear D can be released from its allotted 
This outer clutch member has in its perim- brake, and hence the gears and clutch will 
eter, a series of recesses g, for beveled pinions simply turn with the axle. The gear D might 
H which are journaled in said outer clutch be permanently held against rotation, but 
member and arranged to engage the opposing this would necessitate a continuous running 
bevel gear faces c' and d, respectively of the on the part of the pinions H which would be 
gears C and D. 
objectionable. I prefer therefore to employ 
Springs foould be used in conjunction with 
I is arranged about the outer clutch member 
with its edges in juxtaposition to the gears C the dogs F, but such are not necessary. 
and D, and in this way, the outer end of the 
I do not confine myself to any particular 
spindles for bevel pinions H, can be fixed in form or construction of clutch or pawl or 
said ring or band I, the said pinions in such ratchet device so far as the establishment of 
case being free to turn about their respect- connection between a carrier for the pinions 
ively allotted spindles. 
H and the axle is concerned, it being obvious 
While any desired or suitable construction that various forms of clutches or pawl and 
of brake devices can be employed, I have ratchet devices could be employed. The 
shown a couple of brakes-consisting of bands clutch shown however is exceedingly effect 
K and L, respectively applied to the grooved live, and is on many accounts preferable. 
perimeters c and d of the gears C and D, and 
With reference to the brake operating mech 
have provided brake operating mechanism anism or devices shown in Figs. 2, 5 and 6, 
whereby the brake can be released from gear each brake-band is attached to its allotted bell 
C without releasing the brake from gear D. crank M, M' understood to be pivoted upon 
In order to store up power for starting the the car frame. These bell-cranks are con 
car, the attendant will apply the brakes to the nected with operating rods N,N' and the lat 
two gears C and D so as to lock the same ter are in turn connected with and operated 
against rotation, and assuming the car to be by chains O, O, respectively. One of these 
running at such time, the forward movement chains is attached to a pulley P fixed upon a 
of its axle A will wind up the spring C to an rotary hollow shaft or sleeve P while the 
extent proportional to the momentum due to other is attached to a pulley P fixed upon a 
the load. This winding up of the spring nec- rotary rod P arranged within the hollow 
essarily opposes the forward movement of the shaft. The brake K is operated from the ro 
axle and hence the car will be stopped when tary hollow shaft while the brake L is oper 
the opposition of the spring is sufficient to lated from the rotary rod. A crank handle 
overcome its momentum. 
P is secured upon the hollow shaft P' and 
In order to start the car, the attendant will provided with a latch P for engaging rod P 
release the brake from gear C, but leave the so as to lock the two shafts together. When 
abutment gear D still locked by its allotted therefore it is desired to apply with brakes 
brake. At such juncture, the tendency of the respectively to one and the other of the two 
convolute spring to unwind, will act to turn gears C and D, the attendant will turn the 
the gear Cin a forward direction, as indicated crank Pin a direction to wind up both chains, 
by the arrow in Fig. 3, it being understood the two shafts P' and Pat such time being 
that the term forward direction means the locked together by the latch P, and after the 
direction of rotation of the wheels and axle chains have been wound up sufficiently to 
when the car is moving forward. This for- tighten the brakes and lock the gears, the shaft 
ward rotation of gear C revolves the pinions P' can be locked by any suitable device, such 
H and since the latter are in mesh with the for example as the pawl and ratchet ordi 
stationary abutment gear D, they will neces- narily employed on street cars. The gears 
sarily be compelled to travel along the same being locked, the spring will wind up until 
and in So doing cause the clutch section G to the car stops. To start the car, the attend 
turn in a forward direction. This action on ant will operate latch P so as to release the 
the part of the outer clutch section throws rod P and hence release the brake on gear 
the rolls or dogs F in positive engagement C. After the car has been properly started, 
with the ratchet or clutch section E which is the attendant can release the shaft P', and 
fast upon the axle, and hence places the two thus release the brake on gear D. 
clutch members in clutch, and establishes 
In Figs. 7, 8 and 9, levers R and R are sep 
power transmitting connection between the a rately allotted to the brake-strokes and di 
gear C and the axle. The spring action will rectly connected with the bell cranks by rods 
therefore cause the axle to turn in a forward N and N' respectively. Each lever can in such 
direction, and thereby start the car. It will case have its own locking device. For ex 
also be seen that owing to the aforesaid gears ample each lever can carry a pawl or dog r 
interposed between the spring and the axle, for engaging a rack-segment R', and in order 
the clutch will rotate at a less rate of speed to release the pawls at proper times each rack 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOC 
I o5 
O 
II5 
125 
585,200 
3 
for holding and releasing the gears, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a car-starter, the gear Chaving a closed 
chamber, a convolute spring arranged within 
Said chamber and connecting the gear with 
the axle, and a friction device for connecting 
and disconnecting said gear with and from 
the axle, substantially as described. 
4. In a car-starter, the clutch arranged upon 
the axle and comprising inner and outer mem- 45 
bers with intervening dogs, pinions carried 
by the outer clutch members, a pair of gears 
loose upon the axle and engaging the pinions, 
a winding spring connecting one of said gears 
with the axle, and means suitable for hold 
ing and releasing the two gears, substantially 
as described. 
5. In a car-starter, the inner clutch member 
fixed upon the axle, the outer clutch member 
provided with recesses g, pinions arranged in 
said recesses, an annular outer band in which 
the outer ends of the spindles for the pinions 
have their bearings, and gears engaging the 
pinions, substantially as described. 
6. A car-starter comprising a clutch ar 
ranged upon the axle, and carrying pinions, 
gears engaging the pinions, a spring connect 
ing one of the gears with the axle, brake 
bands for locking and releasing the Spring, 
and mechanism for operating the brakes, sub 
stantially as described. 
65 
55 
THOMAS J. GRAY. 
Witnesses: 
RETA. M. WAGNER, 
ARTHUR F. DURAND, 
C 
segment can be accompanied by a vibratory 
releasing bar S pivoted at sat one end and 
at its opposite end connected with an operat 
ing foot-lever or treadle. By operating either 
foot-treadle, its allotted releasing bar will rise 
alongside its allotted rack-segment and dis 
engage the pawl therefrom, the pawl in such 
case riding back along its allotted releasing 
bar when the lever carrying the pawl swings 
back. With such arrangement, the lever con 
trolling the brake for gear C can have a lug 
r' which will engage the lever allotted to the 
brake for gear D, whereby when one lever is 
thrown forward to lock the brake upon gear 
C it will carry forward the other lever and 
hence lock the brake upon gear D, it being 
observed that at the proper moment, the lever 
allotted to the brake for gear C can be al 
lowed to swing back and loosen up said brake 
without disturbing the other lever. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A car-starter comprising a gear con 
nected with the axle by a power storing 
spring, a clutch interposed between the axle 
and gear, pinions carried by the clutch and 
engaging said gear, and an abutment gear 
engaged by the pinions, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
2. A car-starter comprising a clutch device 
having one of its members fixed upon the 
axle, pinions carried by the clutch, an abut 
ment gear independent of the axle and en 
gaged by the pinions, a loose gear connected 
with the axle by a winding spring and engag 
ing the pinions, and suitable brake devices 
3o 
35 
r 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535300.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 535,300, 
Patented Mar, 5, 1895. 
C, F, SLIGER, 
MAIL BAG CATCHER AND DELIVERER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
  
 
ATTORNEYS. 
renorris PETERs co, PHoro-Litho. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MAIL, BAG CATCHER AND DELIVERER, 
C, F, SLIGER. 
a 
Patented Mar. 5, 1895. 
No. 535,300. 
  
 
a/ 
2ZZZZ M 
2 
SY2 
(S)2 
2 
2 
Z2 
 
 
 
NN 
s 
3. 2. 
res 
Eg 
SA N 
es 
SS 
S 2 i 
 
 
 
 
 
O Aa. 
22 
& 
 
 
 
WITNESSES; 
ifty-ye 
Z7%. 6 
 
INVENTOR 
483 
--faul ve 
ATTORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
8 sheets-Sheet 3. 
C. F. SLIGER. 
MAIL BAG CATCHER AND DELIVERER, 
No. 535,300. 
Patented Mar, 5, 1895. 
  
 
 
WTWESSES 
starts 
. 
W 
 
S. 
sa 
INVENTOR 
66,847 
BY 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES F. SI. IGER, OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS. 
VAL-BAG CATCHER AND DE LIVE RER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 535,300, dated March 5, 1895. 
Application filed July 3, 1894, Serial No. 516,454, (No model.) 
O 
& 
Zo all whon, it nagy concern: 
spective view showing the invention applied 
Be it known that I, CHARLES F. SLIGER, of to a car and in the act of delivering one bag 
San Antonio, in the county of Bexar and 
and catching another. 
State of Texas, have invented a new and Im 
The invention may be said to consist pri 
proved Mail-Bag Catcher and Deliverer, of 
marily of a base A, a catcher arm B, a deliv 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
ery arm C and a retaining arm D. The base 
description. 
A is usually made rectangular in cross Sec 
Myinvention relates to a device capable of 
tion, and is provided with an interior cham 
catching or transferring mail bags from a 
ber open at the front and at one or both ends, 
mail bag hanger to the mail car while the car 
the back of the base being made more or less 
is in motion, the device also acting to deliver 
dove-tailed, in order that it may fit in corre 
a mail bag at the same station, if necessary, 
spondingly-shaped sockets A, four of which 
one operation in no manner interfering with 
sockets or receivers are upon a car, one at 
the other. 
each side of each car door, since the device 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
is intended to be shifted as occasion may de 
vide a device of the character above set forth, 
mand. 
which may be used at either side of a door 
The catcher arm B, is preferably somewhat 
opening in a car, and which will be exceed 
inverted U-shaped in cross section, compris 
ingly simple, durable and economic in its 
ing a front wall and a top and bottom wall, 
construction and entirely automatic in its 
the rear portion being substantially open, as 
operation. 
shown in Fig. 3. The catcher arm is prefer 
The invention consists in the novel con 
ably made in two sections, a body section b 
struction and combination of the several 
and an extension section b', the two sections 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
being connected by a latch 11 of any approved 
and pointed out in the claims, 
construction. The object of making the 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
catcher arm in two sections is that the de 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
livery arm may be shifted as it is carried by 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
the extension section, in order that the said 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
delivery arm may be made to work in direc 
views. 
tion of either end of the car. The inner end 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the device at 
of the body of the catcher arm is enlarged, 
tached to a car, the device being shown in 
and is pivoted in the base A by a pivot pin 
positive lines in position to deliver a sack and 
10. This pivot pin is loosely passed through 
to receive one, and in dotted lines the device 
the catcher arm mounted to turn loosely in 
is illustrated in the position it assumes when 
the base. 
delivering the sack caught from the hanger, 
The retaining arm D is provided with a cir 
to the doorway of a car. Fig. 2 is a plan 
cular enlarged inner end, formed substan 
view of the device in operative position. Fig. 
tially of two disks 12, and this arm is pivoted 
3 is a rear elevation thereof, in the position 
in the catcher arm by passing a pivot pin 13 
shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a transverse sec 
loosely through the catcher arm and through 
tion taken essentially on the line 4-4 of Fig. 
the disk end of the retaining arm. 
2. Fig. 5 is a horizontal section through the 
A spring 14, is coiled around the pivot of 
catcher arm and body portion of the device. 
the catcher arm between its members, the 
Fig. 6 is a plan view of the device with the 
spring being secured at one end to said pivot 
delivery arm in tripped or horizontal position. 
and at its opposite end to the outer face of 
Fig. 7 is a transverse section, takenessentially 
the said arm, as illustrated best in Fig. 5, the 
on the line 7-7 of Fig. 5. Fig. 8 is a detail 
tendency of the said spring being to throw 
view of the delivery arm, the hook being in 
the catcher arm parallel with the base, as 
open position and the arm proper horizon 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1, or across the 
tally located. Fig. 9 is a view similar to 
door opening. A similar spring 15, is made 
Fig. 8, the arm being shown in operative po 
to control the retaining arm, being secured. 
sition and the hook closed. Fig. 10 is a per 
at one end to the pivot 13 of said arm, be 
55 
75 
90 
95 
CC 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2. 
535,800 
75 
8 W 
90 
95 
tween the disks 12, and the opposite end of 
the spring is attached to a pin 16 connecting 
the two disks near their peripheries, as is 
likewise shown in Fig. 5. The lower disk 12 
5 of the retaining arm is provided with a recess 
17, and in front of this recessed portion of 
the disk a block 18 is located in the catcher 
arm, carrying a spring-controlled bolt 19, and 
the spring of the bolt serves to normally 
to force said bolt to an engagement with the 
periphery of the said lower disk of the retain 
ing arm, in order that when the arm is at a 
right angle to the catcher arm the bolt will 
enter the recess 17 and preserve such posi 
15 tion. The bolt 19 is operated by a finger 20, 
adapted to draw it out from the recess 17, 
which finger is attached to a rock shaft 21, 
transversely journaled in the catcher arm at 
its rear, and the said rock shaft is provided 
2o with a finger 22, extending out Wardly and 
longitudinally of the catcher arm, terminat 
ing at its outer end in a head 23, extending 
within the catcher arm transversely thereof, 
as shown in Fig. 5. The longer finger 22 ex 
25 tends over and into the extension b' of the 
catcher arm, and in this extension upon its 
forward surface, a series of bearings 25 is 
arranged, preferably in pairs, three pairs be 
ing illustrated. A cam 26, shown best in 
3o Fig. 7 and of substantially a heart or ellipti 
cal shape, is located between each outer and 
inner pair of the bearings and secured upon 
a shaft 24, held to turn in said bearings and 
extending through all of them. 
The delivery arm is shaped substantially 
in cross-section like the catcher arm, the for 
ward face of the delivery arm being however 
open, as shown at 27, and the said delivery arm 
is secured upon the shaft 24 between the bear 
4o ings of the intermediate set, and springs 28, are 
coiled around the shaft between the outer set 
of bearings and the intermediate bearings and 
the inner set of bearings and intermediate 
bearings, one end of each spring being at 
5 tached in any approved manner to the sides 
of the delivery arm; and the tendency of these 
springs is to throw the delivery arm inward 
at a right angle to the catcher arm, as shown 
in Fig. 6. A latch 29, which is in the nature 
5o of a plate, is located in the framing of the 
delivery arm longitudinally thereof, the lower 
end of the latch being provided with a recess 
30 adapted for engagement with the upper 
forward corner of the catcher arm, acting 
55 when in such contact to maintain the deliv 
ery arm in a vertical position at right angles 
to the catcher arm, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3 
and 4. The upper end of the latch 29 is pro 
vided with opposing studs 31, which limit the 
6o upward movement of the latch in the deliv 
ery arm by contact with a pin 31, located at 
its open side; and the lower inner end of the 
latch is pivoted within the framing of the de 
livery arm by a pin 32, as shown in Fig. 4, 
65 and the latch is normally held in an outer po 
sition by a spring 33, shown in dotted lines 
in the same figure. A keeper 34, is Secured 
35 
to one side of the delivery arm, extending be: 
yond its rear or closed face, and at the Outer 
or upper end of the said delivery arm, near 
its closed face, a shaft 35, is located, and at 
one end of this shaft a link 36 is Secured, 
having pivotally connected with it a hook 37, 
adapted when the arm is in a vertical position 
to engage with the keeper 34, being held in 
position for engagement by a spring 38, 
whereby the hook may be removed from the 
keeper independent of its automatic closing 
mechanism, thus permitting a bag to be in 
serted or removed if desired, since the bag E 
to be delivered is to be carried by the hook 
when it is in engagement With the keeper. 
The automatic operating mechanism of the 
hook consists of a link 39, attached to the op 
posite end of the shaft 35, as shown in FigS. 
8 and 9, the said link being pivotally con 
nected with a longer link 40, having its op 
posite end pivoted upon the upper surface of 
the catcher arm. 
A lever 42 is fulcrumed upon preferably 
the lower member of the inner end of the 
catcher arm, as shown in Fig. 5, the said le 
wer being provided with a cylindrical surface 
engaging with the stud 16 on the retaining 
arm; and the lower member of the catcher 
arm at its inner end is made circular or cyl 
indrical, and is provided with a recess 44, 
adapted to receive a spring 43 attached to 
the base, the spring being adapted for en 
gagement with the rear edge of the lever 42. 
The spring upon the pinion 10 may be wound 
up, if required, by means of a wrench or key 
applied to its upper end, which is squared, 
the said upper end being likewise provided 
with a ratchet wheel 45, engaged by a pawl 
46 located upon the base; and the spring of 
the retaining arm may be wound in like man 
ner by applying a suitable implement to its 
upper end, and the pivot 13 of this arm is 
provided with a ratchet wheel 47, engaged by 
a pawl 48, pivoted upon the catcher arm. 
In the operation of this device, before the 
car approaches a station at which mail is to 
be delivered and where a mail bag hanger E 
is located, supporting the mail bag E to be 
gathered, the catcher arm is carried to the 
position shown in positive lines in Fig. 1, 
namely, at a right angle to the side of the car, 
and when the arm is carried to this position 
the spring latch 43 will have entered the re 
cess 44 in the catcher arm, maintaining it in 
such position. The retaining arm is carried 
at a right angle to the catcher arm, as is also 
shown in positive lines in Fig. 1, and the bolt 
19 will enter the recess 17 in the retaining 
arm, maintaining it in the position in which 
it has been placed, and the delivery arm is 
carried to a vertical position, whereupon its 
latch 29, will engage with the catcher arm 
and hold it in such position. When carry 
ing the delivery arm to its upper position, the 
links 39 and 40 will act to automatically close 
the hook 37 down upon the keeper 34, and 
passing through the ring of the mail bag E' 
CO 
IOS 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
535,300 
3 
O 
to be left at the next station if mail is to be 
delivered there. When the car approaches 
the mailbag hanger E, the latch 29 will strike 
the upper horizontal arm of the hanger, and 
will be disengaged from the catcher arm, at 
which time the springs 28 will act to throw 
the delivery arm rearward to a horizontal 
position, as shown in Fig. 6, and the hook 
will be carried out from the keeper and the 
bag relieved from connection with the deliv 
ery arm. The action of the springs 28 will 
serve also to turn the shaft 24 in the catcher 
arm and revolve the cam 26 sufficiently to 
cause the arm 22 of the rock shaft 21 contact 
ing with the cam to be carried rearward, thus 
drawing the bolt 19 from engagement with 
the retaining arm D. At this time the mail 
bag upon the hanger E will be engaged by 
the catcher arm, and the retaining arm being 
freed from the bolt 19 will be forced to the 
parallel position with the catcher arm by its 
spring 15. The retaining arm will therefore 
clamp the bag in engagement with the catcher 
arm, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1, and 
the movement of the retaining arm to ac 
complish this holding position with relation 
to the mail bag, will cause the stud 16 of the 
retaining arm to force rearward the lever 42, 
causing the said lever to carry the spring 
latch 43 from engagement with the catcher 
arm, whereupon the spring 14 of the latter 
arm will act and carry it across the door open 
ing, as likewise shown in Fig. 1, enabling an 
attendant to readily remove the bag and set 
the device for operation at the next gather 
ing or delivering station. 
Two cams 26 are provided in the drawings 
in order that the extension b' of the catcher 
arm may be reversed and cause the delivery 
arm to operate from either side of the door. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A mail bag catcher comprising a base, a 
catcher arm pivoted at its inner end thereon, 
a spring for throwing the catcher arm in 
Wardly, a latch for locking the said arm in its 
outermost position, a retaining arm pivoted 
at its inner end to the catcher arm, a spring 
to throw the retaining arm toward the catcher 
arm, a releasing mechanism actuated from 
the inner end of the retaining arm to release 
the said latch and permit the catcher arm to 
be thrown by its spring toward the car, a 
locking device mounted on the catcher arm 
and engaging the retaining arm when swung 
away from the catcher arm and a releasing 
mechanism mounted on the catcher arm to re 
lease the latch of said retaining arm, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
2. In a mail bag catcher, a base, a catcher 
arm pivoted in the base, having spring-con 
trolled movement, a latch having locking en 
gagement with the inner end of the catcher 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
arm, a spring controlled retaining arm piv 
oted in the catcher arm, a releasing device 
mounted on the catcher arm operated by the 
inner end of the retaining arm and operating 
upon the latch of the catcher arm, a locking 
device engaging with the retaining arm, and 
a releasing mechanism carried by the retain 
ing arm and operating upon the said locking 
device, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
3. In a mail bag catcher and deliverer, a 
spring-controlled catcher arm, a retaining arm 
carried by the catcher arm, a locking mech 
anism for the catcher arm, controlled by the 
retaining arm, a delivery armfulcrumed upon 
the catcher arm, a locking device engaging 
With the retaining arm, a trip connection be 
tween the locking device and the delivery arm, 
a carrier located upon the delivery arm, and a 
trip whereby the carrier is thrown in open po 
sition, substantially as shown and described. 
4. In a mail bag catcher and deliverer, the 
combination, with a catcher arm, spring con 
trolled and provided with a locking device, a 
retaining arm likewise spring-controlled and 
provided with a locking device, and a releas 
ing connection between the locking device of 
the catcher arm and the retaining arm, of a 
delivery arm pivoted upon the catcher arm, 
provided with a latch adapted to hold it in a 
predetermined position, a latch likewise serve 
ing as a trip, Springs acting to carry the de 
livery arm from a delivery position to a posi 
tion of rest, carriers adapted to hold a mail 
bag, operated by the movement of the delivery 
arm, and a releasing connection, substan 
tially as shown and described, between the 
delivery arm and a locking device of the re 
taining arm, as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. In a mail bag catcher and deliverer, the 
combination, with a catcher arm, spring-con 
trolled and provided with a locking device, a 
retaining arm likewise spring-controlled and 
provided with a locking device, and a releas 
ing connection between the locking device 
of the catcher arm and the retaining arm, of 
a delivery arm pivoted upon the catcher arm 
and provided with a keeper, a hook for en 
gagement With the keeper, and a shifting 
connection between the hook and the catcher 
arm, a shaft upon which the delivery arm is 
mounted, the said shaft being spring-con 
trolled, a latch carried by the delivery arm 
and adapted for engagement with the catcher 
arm, holding the former in position for deliv 
ering, a cam carried by the said shaft, and a 
releasing device operated by the cam and op 
erating upon the locking device of the retain. 
ing arm, as and for the purpose set forth. 
CHARLES F, SLIGER 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT HAZLETT, 
EDWIN T. ANDERSON, 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
Io5 
I IC 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535401.txt	(No Model.) 
W. I. REED, 
FILE FOR NEWSPAPERS, &c. 
No. 535,401, 
Patented Mar. 12, 1895. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILKINS I. REED, OF CLARION, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FILE FOR NEWSPAPERS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No, 535,401, dated March 12, 1895. 
Application filed July 13, 1894, Serial No. 517,470, (No model.) 
O 
k 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, WILKINSI. REED, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Clarion, 
in the county of Clarion and State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Files for Newspapers, 
&c.; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
This invention relates to files for newspa 
pers, periodicals, receipts, bills and such pa 
pers as are usually stored in compact form 
for ready reference. 
The object of the invention is the provis 
ion of a holder for securing the papers in con 
venient form so that any desired paper can 
be readily gotten at for inspection or other 
required purpose. 
The device is simple, compact, light, and eas 
ily manipulated by one hand, thus leaving the 
Other hand free to adjust the papers, and is 
efficient and capable of being suspended from 
a peg or rack and convenient for carrying 
and handling. 
Other objects and advantages will be mani 
fest on using the file holder and are the re 
sult of the special organized structure herein 
after more particularly set forth and claimed, 
and which are shown in the annexed draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1, is a perspective view of a file 
holder embodying the invention, the yielding 
frame being slightly compressed. Fig. 2, is a 
cross Section showing the application of the 
The file holder comprises, essentially, two 
frames between parallel members of which 
the papers, periodicals, receipts, &c., are held 
on pins carried by one of the said members 
and adapted to work through openings in the 
other member. 
It Will be understood that the size and ca 
pacity of the holder will depend upon the na 
ture of the papers to be filed, and the special 
use for which the device is designed. 
The holding frame is composed of two bars 
A and Barranged in parallel relation and con 
nected at their ends by posts C. The clamp 
ing frame is of similar construction, being 
composed of bars D and Eparallel with each 
other and with the bars A and B, and end 
posts G. The posts G work through openings 
invention. 
-- 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
90. 
TCC 
in the bar A and receive springs F mounted 
thereon and confined between the bars E and 
A serving normally to hold the bar D against 
the bar Aso as to clamp the papers between 
them. Pins d attached to and carried by the 
bar D, pass through openings a in the bar A, 
and penetrate the filed papers which are held 
in place thereby. The ends of the bar D are 
notched to receive the posts Cand it is guided 
in its movements thereby. The bar E is 
turned and forms a handle for convenience in 
carrying the device and suspending it from 
a peg or rack. The strips H attached to one 
side of the bars A and B form guides to in 
sure a proper and even filing of the papers. 
To use the file holder, the bar B is placed 
on a table or other support and the bar E is 
pressed upon until the ends of the pins d are 
withdrawn a sufficient distance below the bar 
A to receive the paper to be filed between 
the bars D and A, the paper I is pressed un 
der the bar. A until its edge strikes the guides 
H after which the pressure is removed from 
the bar E and the springs Fregaining them 
selves, cause the pins d to pass through the 
paper which is now filed for future reference. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
l. A file holder composed of a holding and 
a clamping frame, each having its bars par 
allel and connected by end posts, the lower 
bar of the clamping frame working between 
the bars of the holding frame and having its 
ends notched to give clearance for the posts 
of the holding frame, pins to receive the pa 
pers, and springs to close the two frames, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. A file holder composed of two similarly 
constructed frames, having parallel bars con 
nected by end posts, a bar of one frame work 
ing between the bars of the other frame and 
carrying pins and having its posts Working 
loosely through the contiguous bar of the 
other frame, springs mounted on the said 
posts, and guides provided on the frame 
through which the said posts work, substan 
tially as described for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILKINS I. REED. 
Witnesses: 
C. R. HALL, 
SAML. K. CLARKE, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535501.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 535,501. 
F. E. KING, 
SEAT, I,00K 
Patented Mar, l 2, 1895. 
 
INVENTOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK E. KING, OF TERRE HAUTE, INDIANA, 
SEAL LOC K. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 535,501, dated March 12, 1895. 
Application filed May 21, 1894, Serial No. 511,919, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK E. KING, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Terre 
Haute, in the county of Vigo and State of In 
diana, have. invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Seal-Locks; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to seal locks; and it 
consists in the novel construction and com 
bination of the parts hereinafter fully de 
Scribed and claimed. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a side view of 
the device, showing it locked. Fig.2 is a side 
view of the device, showing it in a position 
to be locked by means of its key. Fig. 3 is an 
end view of the hooked portion of the lock. 
Fig. 4 is a side view of the key. 
A and A are the two portions of a car door. 
B is an eyebolt projecting from part A, and 
B' is a hinged tongue secured to part A and 
provided with a slotted end b which is slipped 
over the eyebolt. The lock is passed through 
the eyebolt after the manner of a padlock, and 
is applicable to most situations where a pad 
lock can be applied. 
The lock consists of a spring loop C, pref 
erably formed of spring steel, provided with 
a hooked portion c. The hooked portion is 
secured to, or formed integral with, the shank 
C of the loop. The hooked portion has a re 
taining lip i. 
D is an eye on the hooked portion c, and d 
is a chain which connects the said eye with 
a staple d' on the car door so that the lock 
may not be removed when detached from the 
eyebolt. 
E is a rivet of lead or other soft metal. This 
rivet is passed through holes in the back of 
the hooked portion and in its point, and the 
head e of the rivet is adapted to receive the 
impression of a seal, when its point is riveted 
OWel. 
F is the key by means of which the device 
is locked and unlocked. This key is prefer 
ably shaped like a pair of tongs. A socketf 
is formed in the end of one handle, and a pry 
- 
f' is formed on the end of the other handle. 
The two parts of the key are provided with a 
pivot ping. 
G. G' are the seal dies arranged face to face, 
and h is a punch at the end of the jaw to which 
the impression die G is connected. 
When the device is to be locked, the loop 
C is slipped through the eyebolt and placed 
in the position shown in Fig. 2. The socket 
f of the key is then slid over the end c' of the 
loop. The end c' is then moved in the direc 
tion of the arrow in Fig. 2 by means of the 
key, and is forced into engagement with the 
hooked portion c, the shank of the loop being 
held by the eyebolt during the locking oper 
ation. When the free end c' of the spring 
loop engages with the hooked portion C it slips 
behind the lip and is thereby securely held 
in position. The spring loop is strong and 
stiff, and a key which affords ample leverage, 
and a knowledge of how to place the loop with 
respect to the eyebolt, is necessary to enable 
any one to lock the device. When the end c'. 
has been slipped into the hooked portion, a 
lead rivet is passed through the holes in the 
hooked portion and is secured by means of 
the dies G. G. The die G presses a device, 
numeral or cipher into the rivet head, and 
the blank die G' upsets the point of the rivet 
so that it cannot drop out accidentally. The 
device is removed by placing the die G' against 
the part 2 at the back of the hooked portion 
and forcing back the rivet by means of the 
punch. If the rivet does not then come out 
freely, the pry is placed under its head and 
it is removed like a tack. The end c' is re 
leased from the hooked portion by placing 
the shank of the loop in the eyebolt as shown 
in Fig. 2 and using the key as a lever, the 
socket f being slipped over the end c' as here 
in before described. 
What I claim is 
1. In a seal lock for car doors, the combi 
nation, with a stationary eyebolt, of a spring 
loop engaging with the said eyebolt and pro 
vided at one end with a hooked portion and 
at the other end with a straight portion 
adapted to receive an operating key for forc 
ing it into engagement with the said hooked 
. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
9o 
95 
535,501 
portion, and a seal rivet passed through the 
said hooked portion beyond the said straight 
portion, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a seal lock for car doors, the combi 
5 nation, with a stationary eyebolt, of a spring 
loop engaging with the said eyebolt and pro 
vided at one end with the hooked portion c 
having the retaining lip i, and provided at the 
other end with a straight portion c' a key 
Io provided with a socket for engaging the said 
portion c' and forcing it into engagement with 
the Said hooked portion and lip, and a seal 
rivet passed through holes in the back of the 
hooked portion and in its point, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
- 
I5 
FRANK E. KING, 
Witnesses: 
T. A. NANTZ, 
THOS, W. ERAYMOND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535603.txt	(No Model.) 
E, F, SMITH, 
LINK SHIFTING MECHANISM FOR ENGINES, 
N0, 535,603, 
Patented Mar, 12, 1895. 
Wit IESSES. 
4, . 
M1. 
33. 
IVEntOR 
22ze a paz 25% ea a 
" 
... 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD F. SMITH, OF TITUSVILLE, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
LINK. SHIFTNG MECHANISM FOR ENGINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 535,603, dated March 12, 1895. 
Application filed May 25, 1894, 
Serial No. 512,471. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD F. SMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ti 
tusville, in the county of Crawford and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Link-Shifting 
Mechanism for Steam-Engines; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
forming part of this specification. 
My invention consists in the improvements 
in link shifting mechanism for steam engines, 
hereinafter set forth and explained and illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a steam en 
gine embodying my improved link shifting 
mechanism. Fig. 2 is a top or plan view of a 
portion of a steam engine embodying a por 
tion of my improved link shifting mechanism. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a convenient link shifting mechanism for 
steam engines, by means of which the link of 
a steam engine can be conveniently operated 
at a distance from the engine, so as to reverse 
the engine, or stop it by moving the link until 
its center operates On the valve stem. 
In the construction of my invention illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, A is a 
steam engine, provided with eccentrics B B', 
eccentric rods C C, a link D connected there 
to, and a valve stem E upon which the link 
operates in the usual manner, all of which 
are of ordinary construction. 
Upon a stud pin F on the frame of the en 
gine A at a point "thereon a little below the 
point of traverse of the center of the link D, I 
pivot a grooved sheave G in such position that 
the link D will pass down outside of it, and 
on an arm HSecured to and projecting upward 
from the engine frame, I pivota second sheave 
G' directly above and in line vertically with 
the sheave G, and to a projection d on the cem 
ter of the part d of the link D, I secure an 
arm I, which curves backward and forward 
behind the link D to a point coincident, ver 
tically and horizontally, with the center of the 
opening in the link D. To an eye I' secured 
to the side of the end of the arm I is secured, 
preferably, a wire rope J which passes over 
and around the sheaves G and G' to a sprocket 
wheel K where the rope J is secured to a sec 
tion of sprocket chain L which passes around 
the sprocket wheel K, pivoted to a suitable 
support M and is again secured to the other 
end of the rope J, so that the rope J and chain 
Kform an endless belt around the sheaves G. 
G' and the sprocket wheel K. This sprocket 
wheel K may be placed at any convenient 
point, either in direct line with the sheaves G. 
and G or carried off to one side by means of 
ordinary guide sheaves (not shown) as may be 
desired. 
To the sprocket wheel K is secured an op 
erating lever N, preferably provided with an 
adjustable weight N adapted to counterbal 
ance the weight of the link D and eccentric 
rods C and C, so that it will remain in any 
desired position. A stop mechanism O is how 
ever preferably provided by means whereof 
the lever N may be secured in any position 
desired. 
The operation of the mechanism hereinbe 
fore described is So obvious that further de 
scription thereof is believed to be unneces. 
sary. Therefore, 
Having described my invention, so as to en 
able others to construct and use the same, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination with a steam engine 
valve link, of sheaves on the engine frame, a 
rope or belt secured to said link, and operat 
ing around said sheaves and means for simul 
taneously operating both ropes, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination with a steam engine 
valve, of a sheave pivoted to the engine frame 
below the end of the valve stem, and at the 
rear of the link, a sheave pivoted to an arm ex 
tending upwardly from the engine frame and 
directly above the lower sheave, a rope or 
chain belt Secured to an arm at the center of 
the link, and operating as a continuous belt 
around said sheaves, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
9 O 
CO 
O 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
535,603 
5 sheave at some distance from the engine, set forth. 
3. The combination of a steam engine valve around which said rope and chain belt oper 
link, an endless belt a portion of which is lates, an operating lever N on said sprocket 
chain, secured centrally thereto, sheaves on wheel K, and a counterbalance weight N' 
the engine frame, and a sprocket wheel or thereon, substantially as and for the purpose 15 
around which the chain portion belt operates, 
Substantially as and for the purpose set forth. in presence of two witnesses. 
4. The combination of a steam engine valve 
link D, and endless rope and chain belt J, L, 
Io secured to an arm I thereon, sheaves G and G' 
on the engine frame, and a sprocket wheel K 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
EDWARD E. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
F. EINFELDT, 
H. J. CURTZE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535703.txt	No Model.) 
R, LAMB, 
ELECTRIC CABLE WAY, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
  
  
e 
- se 
- E. 
is 
 
 
INVENTOR 
far, 
24a v 
ATTORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
R. L.A.M.B. 
ELECTRIC CABLE WAY. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 535,703, 
Patented Mar. 12, 1895. 
WITNESSES: 
472. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 535,703, . 
R. L.A.M.B. 
ELECTRIC CABLE WAY. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
s: l S. r 
sa 
''' -- 't'. ----------- rv - M - - - - 
WFNESSES." 
- 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEYS, 
the Norris PE reas co, Photo: Lirho. washingtoN, f. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 535,703, 
 
R, LAMB. 
ELECTRIC CABLE WAY. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Mar, 12, 1895. 
 
th girl:- 
WITNESSES 
4, 24.7%/el-, -, 
. 
. 
. . 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD LAMB, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRIC CABLEWAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 535,703, dated March 12, 1895. 
Application filed July 19, 1894, Serial No. 518,000, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RICHARD LAMB, of New 
York city, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a new and Improved 
Electric Cableway, of which the following 
is a Specification, reference being had to the 
annexed drawings, forming a part thereof, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in sec 
tion, of my improved apparatus for handling. 
logs by means of electricity as a motive power. 
Fig. 2 is a pian view of the locomotive with 
out the gear covering. Fig. 3 is a side eleva 
tion of the same, partly in section. Fig. 4 is 
a side elevation of the log-carrying trolley. 
Fig. 5 is a detail transverse section of the seat 
for the motorman and pocket for ballast. Fig. 
6 is a side elevation showing auxiliary appa 
ratus adapted for hauling logs to the place of 
loading. Fig. 7 is a transverse section show 
ing the application of the auxiliary hauling 
apparatus to the cable between supports. 
Fig. 8 is a detail view of clamps applied to 
the Supporting cable for holding a strut; and 
Fig. 9 is a side elevation of my improved ap 
paratus applied to the propulsion of canal 
boats. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the views. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
simple and effective mechanism for convey 
ing logs from the interior of a forest, for con 
veying other heavy bodies, for the propulsion 
of canal boats, and similar work. 
My invention consists in supporting a car, 
Carrying a motor, on a cable, and in providing 
means independent of the weight of the ap 
paratus for causing tractional friction be 
tween the car and hauling cable to haul the 
Car on the supporting cable. 
. 
It also consists in the combination with the 
propelling trolley or locomotive, of a log-car 
rying trolley placed on the supporting cable 
and connected with the locomotive. 
It also consists in the combination with the 
locomotive, of a counterweight or balance for 
trimming the locomotive so that it will main 
tain a practically vertical position. 
It also further consists in the combination 
With the locomotive, of a seat for the motor 
man, all as will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed. 
My present invention embodies some of 
the features found in my application for Let 
ters Patent of the United States, for a log 
ging system, filed December 16, 1893, Serial 
No. 493,852, but I do not claim these features 
except in so far as they enter into new com 
binations. 
The bearing cable A, which supports the 
log carrying trolley and the locomotive, ex 
tends over brackets B, attached to trees of 
posts C. The bracket B, in the present case, 
is formed of a T-iron bar a having the webb 
cut away at the lower end of the bracket, the 
body of the bar being bent at at angle of forty 
five degrees, and slotted to receive the spike 
c, which is driven into the post C. To the up 
per surface of the T-iron bar, near its upper 
end, is attached an eye-plated. 
Two braces D, each having a pointed hook 
e on one end and an eyef on the opposite end, 
are connected with the eye-plate d, and the 
hooked ends of the braces are driven into the 
tree or post C. Near the mid-length of each 
brace is formed an enlargement 9, and a chain 
h passes around the braces above the enlarge 
ment, and its ends are fastened together so 
that when the chain is twisted, the braces D 
will be drawn toward each other, and the 
hooked ends of the braces will be securely 
held in their places in the tree or post C. 
To the upper end of the T-iron bar a, is at 
tached a saddle E, for supporting the bearing 
cable A. The saddle E is provided with a re 
cess for receiving the end of the bar a, and 
another recess for receiving the heads of the 
bolts by which the saddle is secured to the T 
iron bar. The saddle, and the bolts by which 
it is secured in place, are insulated electrically 
from the bar a, and are constructed to shed 
rain. The saddle E is made concave in a 
transverse direction and convex in a longi 
tudinal direction, to adapt it for receiving the 
cable A. 
To the lower part of the bara, is attached a 
horizontal bar i, which is supported at its 
outer end by a brace i, attached thereto and 
extending upward to the bar a, to which it is 
secured. The bar i has at its free end a cast 
ing k, having a V-shaped notch for receiving 
the traction cable F, which normally rests in 
a recess formed in the casting k, at the bottom 
of the notch. At the mouth of the V-shaped 
75 
9 O 
95 
O 
O 
EO 
25 
4. 
45 
So 
535,703 
O 
notch the casting k is provided with projec 
tions in, which extend inwardly toward each 
other and serve to prevent the traction cable 
from accidentally leaving its support. 
The bearing cable A is clamped on the sad 
dle E by a clip in, and upon the cable A is 
placed a trolley G, formed of the plates O o', 
connected by studs p p', upon which are 
placed the grooved wheels H, which ride upon 
the cable A. On a stud q which extends 
through the plates O o' is suspended a bar I, 
the said bar being provided at its upper end 
with a heavy arm r for receiving the stud q, 
the said arm r being secured to the bar I, by 
means of a U-bolt r", which extends over, and 
embraces the said arm, with its ends extend 
ing downwardly through the flange at the up 
per end of the bar I. The lower end of the 
arm r has a downwardly curved flange which 
extends beyond the sides of the bar I, and is 
curved downwardly to protect the joint be 
tween the arm and bar from rain and dust, 
and between the arm and the bar I, is placed 
suitable insulating material, and the ends of 
the U-shaped bolt r" and the nuts thereon 
are insulated from the bar I. 
The bar I, extends downwardly, and at a 
point opposite the traction cable F, is bowed 
outwardly, and the lower end of the said bar 
is offset so that it hangs nearly in line with 
the cables A, F. To the bar I is secured an 
electric motor J, of any approved construc 
tion, and the armature shaft S of the electric 
motor extends upwardly and is provided with 
a Worm K, which is preferably of the kind 
known as the Glen Cove, which revolves 
between thrust blocks ti', between which and 
the ends of the worm are placed steel balls 
forming ball bearings above and below the 
SC'eW. 
The thrust blocks i t are attached to the 
Web of the hanging bar I, and to the said bar 
I is secured a casting L, used to bring the 
point of application of the pulling or connect 
ing rod h' directly under the cable A. The 
casting L is provided with a sleeve M, in 
which is journaled a shaft N. Upon the front 
Or Outer end of the shaft N is secured a worm 
wheel O, which is engaged by the worm K, 
and upon the inner end of the said shaft is 
Secured a sheave P, around which the cable 
F is wrapped. The sheave P is preferably 
elliptically grooved, and the worm wheel and 
Worm are inclosed in a casing containing oil, 
So that the Worm gearing is constantly and 
thoroughly lubricated, while at the same time 
dust is excluded. 
To the lower end of the bar I, is attached 
a bracket ... which supports the seat v for the 
motorman. The back of the seat is made 
hollow, as shown in Fig. 5, for the reception 
of the weight or ballast for counterbalancing 
the motor J, and causing the bar I to hang 
vertically. An arm w, secured to the lower 
end of the bar I, extends diagonally to the 
rear of the seat v, and from the said bar is 
suspended a weight a ', which may be moved 
back and forth to counterbalance the motor J. 
The main parts of the motor J are prefer 
ably inclosed, and the armature shaft S of 
the said motor carries an inverted hollow cone 
b', which extends over the journal box of the 
motor and is designed for excluding oil from 
the worm gear, and also rain and dust. 
The seat v is supported at the front by con 
nection with the bar I, and the back of the 
seat is sustained by a brace c, attached to the 
seat back and to the bar I, near the bend 
therein, as shown. To the bar I, is attached 
a horizontal bar d", which is curved out 
wardly, as shown in Fig. 2. This bar serves 
as a guard to prevent the motor from acci 
dentally striking a tree or the bracket in pass 
ing over the bracket, a vertical roller lc be 
ing suspended from the bar i, for engaging 
the said bar d'. 
On the supporting cable A, a short distance 
from the locomotive, is placed a log-carrying 
trolley Q, similar in construction to the trol 
ley G, having plates o, o, studs p, p, 
grooved wheels H, and the bar I, extending 
-downwardly and curved outwardly opposite 
the traction cable F. The lower end of the 
bar I is provided with a link for receiving 
the locking tackle block R., by means of which 
the log or other load is lifted and sustained. 
The trunnion r is electrically insulated from 
the bar I. 
To the bar I", at or near its mid-length, is 
attached a bare', having eyes on opposite 
ends for receiving the hooks f'. The bare' 
is arranged to admit of its revolving on the 
end of the connector. S which connects the 
locomotive with the log-carrying trolley. The 
connector S, in the present case, is formed of 
two barsg',h', connected together at the hook 
f', the bar g being attached at the opposite 
end to the bar I of the locomotive, near the 
upper end thereof, and the bar h' being con 
nected with the casting L, opposite the sheave 
P. Instead of using the connecting bars g, 
h', I may dispense with the barg' and use 
only the bar h. The log-carrying trolley Q 
is furnished with a curved guard bar d' like 
the bar d' carried by the locomotive. 
The motor of the locomotive is provided 
with a starting box and reversing switch T, 
both of which are of the usual construction. 
The current which drives the motor J air 
rives by the cable A, passes through the trol 
ley and an insulated conductor to the motor, 
and returns by the bar I, sheave P, and trac 
tion cable F, which is preferably grounded. 
When the motor is in operation, the sheave 
P, by engagement with the cable F, winds up 
and at the same time pays out the said cable, 
and draws along the log-carrying trolley Q, 
and the log supported by it. 
When the log is at some distance from the 
cable A, I arrange an auxiliary cable U, for 
the purpose of conveying the log to the vicin 
ity of the cable A. For this purpose I carry 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
70 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
O 
I 15 
125 
I 30 
535,703 
3 
wheel and hauling cable to haul the car on 
the supporting cable, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with an electric loco 
motive suspended from a supporting cable, of 
E. adjustable ballast, substantially as speci 
ied. 
4. The combination with a traction cable, 
of a supporting column, a cable supporting 
bracket attached to the column and furnished 
with a V-shaped notch and having projections 
extending inwardly over the V-shaped notch, 
substantially as shown and described. 
5. In an electric cable way, the combina 
tion of a supporting cable forming one branch 
of the electric circuit, a car supported and 
suspended from the said cable, an electric 
motor carried by the car and insulated from 
the cable, a wheel revolved by the motor, a 
hauling cable anchored at its ends and en 
gaged about the wheel, said hauling cable 
forming the other branch of the electric cir 
cuit, and means independent of the Weight 
of the apparatus for causing tractional fric 
tion with the hauling cable to haul the car 
over the supporting cable, substantially as 
described. 
6. The combination of a supporting cable, 
a suspended locomotive, a traction cable, en 
gaged by the locomotive, an auxiliary cable, 
and snatch blocks for changing the direction 
A. She auxiliary cable, substantially as speci 
90. 
7. In an electric cable way, the combina 
tion of a cable, a car supported and suspended 
from the cable, a motor carried by the car, a 
wheel operated by the motor, a hauling cable 
anchored at its ends and engaged about the 
wheel, means independent of the weight of 
the apparatus for causing tractional friction 
with the hauling cable to haul the motor 
on the supporting cable, and a tow line con 
nected with the car and attached to a boat, 
said tow line carrying electrical conductors, 
substantially as described. 
8. In a cable way, the combination of a 
cable, a car supported and suspended from 
the said cable, a motor carried by the car, a 
sheave revolved by the motor, and a hauling 
cable passed one or more times around the 
sheave and having its ends anchored, Sub 
stantially as described. 
RICHARD IAMB. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. M. RITTER, 
F. W. HANAFORD. 
75 
90 
95 
O) 
to 5 
IO 
the auxiliary cable around a horizontal snatch 
block i', to a second block at the post or tree 
C, thence upward to a snatch block secured 
to the post or tree some distance above the 
cable A, thence to the log to be drawn forward, 
as shown in Fig. 6. In this case the forward 
movement of the locomotive and log-carrying 
trolley carries the cable U forward and thus 
draws the log toward the cable A. 
In Fig. 7, I have shown a method of doing 
the same thing at any point between the sup 
ports of the cable A, by employing a strut 
abutting against a tree or other solid object 
at one end, and embracing the cable at the 
other end. 
In Fig. 9, I have shown the application of 
my improved system to the propulsion of 
canal boats. . The cables A, F, are arranged 
along the side of the canal, and the locomotive 
is placed on the cable A and made to engage 
the cable F, as in the other case. The log 
carrying trolley is of course dispensed with, 
and a cable or tow line which leads from the 
locomotive to the boat, carries conductors 
25 which are readily connected with a resistance 
box and reversing switch at the end which 
terminates on the boat. The locomotives are 
not to pass each other, but when boats pass 
ing in opposite directions, meet, the boatmen 
exchange locomotives by exchanging to W 
lines, the wires in which are then connected 
to rheostats on the boats, the motors are re 
versed, and the boats proceed as before. 
In lieu of carrying the conductors through 
the tow line, the resistance box and revers 
ing switch may be carried by the locomotive, 
and the motorman may ride with the locomo 
tive as in the case of the logging system. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Tetters 
Patent 
1. In a cable way, the combination of a sup 
porting cable, a car supported on said cable, 
a motor carried by the car, a hauling cable 
anchored at both ends, and means independ 
ent of the weight of the apparatus for causing 
tractional friction between the car and the 
hauling cable to haul the car on the Support 
ing cable, substantially as described. 
2. In a cable way, the combination of a sup 
porting cable, a car supported on and sus 
pended from said cable, a motor carried by 
the car, a wheel revolved by the motor, a 
hauling cable anchored at its ends, and means 
independent of the weight of the apparatus 
for causing tractional friction between the 
55 
35 
45 
50 
30 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535803.txt	(Specimens.) 
M. H. MARCUS & W. O. COLLINS, 
STAIR PAD, 
No. 535,803, 
Patented Mar. 12, 1895, 
 
 
3v-uo v-tots 
&ltovcy 
* noRRis Peters co, Hoto-Litho...washingro. oc 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN H. MARCUS AND WALTER O. COLLINS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS; SAID 
COLLINS ASSIGNOR TO SAID MARCUS. 
STAIR-PAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 535,803, dated March 12, 1895. 
Application filed December 14, 1894, Serial No. 531843. (No model.) 
Io to make and use the same. 
To all, whon, it may concert: 
Be it known that we, MARTIN H. MARCUS 
and WALTER O. COLLINS, of Chicago, in the 
county of Cook and State of Illinois, have in 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Stair-Pads; and we do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
Our invention relates to an improvement 
in stair pads,-the object of the invention be 
ing to produce a soft and elastic stair pad hav 
ing a curved lip or nose, constructed in such 
I5 manner that no stitching, quilting, tufting or 
sewing device need be used in its manufact 
ture. 
A further object is to so construct a stair 
pad that it can be easily and quickly made 
2O and which shall be cheap to manufacture and 
combine simplicity, efficiency and durability. 
A further object is to so construct the pad 
that the covering part shall be effectually se 
cured to the base part and in such manner 
25 that the securing devices shall be hidden from 
view and the neat appearance of the pad thus 
improved. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
3o tion and combinations and arrangements of 
parts, as hereinafter set forth and pointed out 
in the claims, 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a view of the base and covering parts before 
35 the filling is inserted. Fig. 2 is a view of the 
completed pad. Fig. 3 is a sectional view of 
the same. 
Our improved pad comprises a compara 
tively stiff base part, A, a flexible covering 
4a part B, a soft or elastic carded cotton filling 
C, and devices for securing the covering part 
to the base part. The covering part B is pref 
erably made of muslin, which is cut about 
two and a half inches longer and about three 
45 inches wider than the actual dimensions of 
the completed pad, SO as to give ample space 
for the filling of the pad and of the formation 
of the curved lip or nose D hereinafter de 
scribed. 
A piece of moderately stiff card or straw 
board is cut the size it is desired to make the 
pad and laid on the piece of muslin. The 
muslin is then turned or lapped over the edges 
a,b,c, of the board or base. Strips a', b', c', of 
card board or heavy paper, previously coated 
with glue, are then placed on the lapped or 
turned over edges of the muslin. So as to Se 
cure the same to the edges of the base A. Be 
fore this is done, however, the muslin is pulled 
toward the edge a sufficiently to cause a full 
ness so that the muslin will properly cover 
the lip D afterward made. The device when 
thus far completed has the appearance shown 
in Fig. 1; that is to say, three edges of the 
covering part are secured to the base part and 
the edge d is loose to permit the insertion of 
the elastic filling, and to the edge d of the 
muslin, a strip of card board d' of a length 
corresponding to that of the pad, is secured by 
glue. The covering part B is then reversed 
or turned inside out and upon the other side 
of base A from which it is first placed so that 
it will be disposed over the same side of the 
base part as that on which the strips are se 
cured. The strips will then be hidden from 
view. The smearing of glue on the bottom 
of the base part will therefore be avoided and 
the pad will be given a neat and marketable 
appearance. The filling C, made of carded 
cotton or cotton batting, is then inserted in 
the device between the covering and base 
parts and made thickest at and in proximity 
to the edge a where the curved lip or nose is 
to be formed because that edge, which becomes 
the front edge of the pad when in use, is sub 
jected to the greatest amount of wear and 
pressure. In order to cause the elastic filling 
or hatting to retain its proper position. When 
the pad is in use, it will be secured to the base 
part by coating the latter with a suitable siz 
ing before the filling is inserted. The carded 
cotton elastic filling having been placed in po 
sition, the strip d' will be coated with glue 
and secured to the top face of the base part 
as shown in Figs, 2 and 3. The edge a of the 
base part will then be moistened and bent 
over a heated pipe or bar of the desired size 
and retained there until dry in order to form 
the nose or lip D, which conforms to and 'em-. 
braces the nosing or front edge of the step. 
The nose or lip D may be formed at the 
edged of the pad if desired but we prefer to 
SO 
55, 
75 
90 
95 
TCO 
 
535,803 
O 
make it at the edge a. In either case, the cot 
ton filling must be thickest at the side of the 
pad where the nose is made. 
By constructing a stair pad in the manner 
above described much time and labor are 
saved in its manufacture as the complete pad 
can be made by one person, whereas, with pads 
as heretofore constructed, having sewed ends, 
quilting and tufting, it was necessary that the 
pad should go through several hands before 
its completion. 
Our improvements are simple in construc 
tion, cheap to manufacture and effectual in 
the performance of their functions. 
Having fully described our invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. As an article of manufacture, a stair pad 
consisting of a base portion, a covering se 
cured at its edges to the edges of the base por 
tion whereby an envelope or closure is formed 
between the base and covering for a soft fill 
ing, the several edges of the covering turned 
Witnesses: 
WM. B. HosWELL, 
C. L. FERNOW. 
inward and stuck to the base portion on the 
upper face of the latter just inside or within 
the extreme outer edge of the base portion, 
whereby the line of attachment is inside of 
the extreme outer edge of the envelope or 
closure, substantially as set forth. 
2. As an article of manufacture, a stair pad 
comprising a base portion, a covering having 
its edges turned in Ward and stuck to the up 
per face of the base, strips secured over these 
inwardly turned edges and located entirely 
inside of the closure formed by the covering 
whereby they are concealed, and a filling 
placed in the closure between the covering 
and base portion, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
MARTIN H. MARCUS. 
WALTER, O.. COLLINS. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US535903.txt	(No Model.) 
M. P. HOLMES. 
LIFTING JACK, 
No. 535,903, 
Patented Mar, 19, 1895. 
 
  
 
 
s 
SSS "2. 
 
  
 
8, 12402 
fertisa, 
co, PHOTO-LITHO, washington, D. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MILO P. HOLMES, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
LIFT N G - JACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 535,903, dated March 19, 1895. 
Application filed February 20, 1894, Serial No. 500,878, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may conce77: 
Be it known that, MILO P. HoLMES, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
and county of San Francisco, State of Cali 
fornia, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Lifting-Jacks, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
lifting jacks for raising wagons and trucks, 
moving machinery, replacing cars on tracks 
and other similar work. 
It is an improvement on the lifting-jack for 
which Letters Patent of the United States 
were issued to me on the 19th day of August, 
1890, numbered 434,712, and it consists in cer 
tain novel construction and combination of 
the post or standard, in means for holding the 
lifting-lever, and in novel means for holding 
the movable dog or rest at any point on the 
standard independently of the lifting - bar 
whereby the lever can be withdrawn and 
shifted to take a fresh lift on the dog. 
The nature of these improvements and the 
manner in which I construct and produce the 
same will be understood from the following 
description and the accompanying drawings 
which is referred to by figures and letters. 
Figure 1 represents a lifting-jack construct 
ed'according to my invention with the mov 
able dog or rest locked on the standard and 
with the lifting lever setting clear of the dog. 
Fig. 2 is a side-view of the same parts show 
ing the lifting-lever removed from the stand 
ard. Fig. 3 is a front-view on an enlarged 
Scale looking toward the notched edges of the 
standard, and showing the top and the bottom 
ends of the standard and the base partly in 
Section. Fig. 3 is a top-view of the standard 
looking down upon the upper end. Fig. 4 is 
a plan of the base, the upright bars that form 
the standard being cut off just above the base. 
Fig. 5 is a view of the movable dog or rest in 
longitudinal section. Fig. 6 is a perspective 
view of the same piece. 
The frame or standard of my lifting jack is 
composed of the flat bars -A-A- united 
by a spacing-block of metal at the upper end, 
and by screw-bolts near the bottom, and hav 
ing notches or teeth -a--a- along one 
edge to form rests and bearing-points for the 
fulcrum-pin -f- of the lifting-lever. The 
lower ends of the uprights are fixed in the 
base-plate -C-by bolts set through the bars 
and through the central upright web -C*. 
The slidable lifting-dog or rest-D-differs 
from the corresponding piece in other lifting 
jacks of this description in being formed with 
a central web -D'- dividing it inside into 
two separate sockets, one for each upright-bar 
of the standard. The addition of this piece 
serves to keep the toe in position and to over 
come the tendency to twist or set out of line 
while being lifted by the lever as well as to 
increase the strength of this piece. On the 
back of this piece -D- are formed ears 
-d- to which are attached by a loose joint 
-d- a locking-piece composed of a latch 
-E- having an eye in one end to receive the 
pin -d- of the joint, and at the other end 
a cross-bar-E- of suitable length of pro 
jection to take into the notches in both bars 
of the standard, when the piece -E- is 
turned upperpendicularly as shown in Fig.1. 
The lifting-lever -E- is of the usual con 
struction with a curved cam-shaped lower end 
and a handle-portion on the upper end and 
with a fulcrum-pin-E-properly formed to 
set into the notches of the standard. The le 
ver is of suitable thickness to fit in and work 
smoothly in the slot or opening between the 
side-bars -A- of the standard. 
On the front or inner edge of the lifting 
lever is formed or fixed a finger or projection 
-G-standing out perpendicularly and also 
rigidly from the lever over and in line with 
the cam-shaped end below, and this piece 
-G-inthickness corresponds with the width 
of space between the parallel inner faces of 
the two uprights of the standard and exceeds 
very slightly such width between the uprights, 
so that while the finger will enter between the 
two uprights it is necessary to exert some 
pressure against the lever when in upright 
position, in order to force the finger into the 
slot or opening between the uprights. The 
finger being thus.tightly fitted to the slot will 
act to hold the lever in position when it is 
turned upright, and consequently the lever 
cannot drop down as long as the finger sets 
into the slot and it will remain in whatever po 
sition it is shifted and set along the standard. 
The dog or rest -D- on which is set the 
axle or other part to be raised can be locked 
at any point along the standard by turning up 
IO 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
50 
95 
ICC) 
535,903 
5 
O 
25 
35 
the latch -E, and setting the cross-bar-E- 
on the end into the notches on the edge of the 
standard, and the weight on the toe-piece be 
ing thus sustained by the latch, it will be seen 
that the lever -F- can be shifted along the 
standard to take a fresh hold for another lift. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
i claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a lifting-jack, the slotted standard 
composed of the upright bars -A-A-pro 
vided with spaced notches on the edges, the 
base-plate-C- having a central upright web 
-C*- setting between the ends of the up 
right and to which the said bars are bolted, 
and the spacing-block between the upper ends 
of the said bars, in combination with a slid 
able-dog embracing and movable on the said 
bars of the standard, and the lifting-lever 
-E-having a cam-shaped lower end adapted 
to work between the said bars of the stand 
ard, and a cross-pin -F- fitting into the 
notches of the said bars and forming a full 
crum-point for the lever; the said cam-shaped 
end of the lever and the lifting-dog being 
disconnected from each other, whereby one 
part may be shifted and adjusted independ 
ently of the other part, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. In a lifting-jack, the combination with 
the slotted standard formed of parallel bars 
-A-A-With notches on their upright edges, 
of the slidable-dog-D- embracing the said 
bars, and having its central opening divided 
by a web that is fitted to move between the 
said bars, the hinged latch -E- on the heel 
of the said part-D-adapted to engage the 
notches in the standard and the lifting-lever 
-F- provided with a cam-shaped end to act 
- 
3. In a lifting-jack, the combination with 45 
against the part -D- and a fulcrum-pin 4d 
F fitted to the standard, said lever being 
adjustable in the standard independently of 
the part-D, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
a notched standard of a slidable-dog, a lift 
ing-lever having a fulcrum-pin to engage the 
said notches and provided with a cam-shaped 
end which is adapted to set against and raise 
said dog on the standard by contact with that 5o 
said piece and by the movement of the lever 
on its fulcrum-pin, and the hinged-latch on 
the slidable-dog as a means for locking the 
said dog on the standard and holding it at any 
point thereon independently of the lifting-55 
lever, substantially as shown and described. 
4. The herein-described lifting-jack com 
prising the standard formed of the parallel 
bars -A-A-provided with notches on their 
upright edges, the slidable-dog-D-embrac 
ing the said bars and having a central web in 
the space between the bars of the standard, 
the lifting-lever -F- setting between the 
said bars, and having at one end a cam 
shaped part and a fulcrum pin -F, and at 
the opposite end the projecting finger -G, 
and the hinged latch -E- on the back of 
the slidable-dog provided with the cross-bar 
-E- engaging the notches of the standard 
constructed and arranged for operation as 72 
shown and described. 
65 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand and seal. 
MILO P. HOLMES. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
C. W. M. SMITH, 
CHAS. E., KELLY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536003.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 536,003. 
A. WOLKENRATH. 
PAN LIFTER, 
Patented Mar. 19, 1895. 
 
:Wiii pesses 
it! 
-97 
147usz /0226727ata. 
pays, 
3y 22 SAfter 
z w 
The NORRIS PETERS CO., PHOTO-Litho. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
Y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST VOLKENRATH, OF HUNTINGTON, WEST VIRGINIA. 
PAN - LIFTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,008, dated March 19, 1895. 
Application filed May 4, 1894, Serial No. 510,095, (No model.) 
55 
7 cy 
75 
95 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, AUGUST VOLKENRATH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hunt catch. 
ington, in the county of Cabell and State of 
West Virginia, have invented a new and useful 
Pan-Lifter, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
pan-lifters. 
The object of the present invention is to 
improve the construction of pan-lifters, and 
to provide a simple and inexpensive device, 
adapted for readily lifting cooking utensils, 
ash-pans, and the like, without liability of 
accidentally upsetting them or spilling their 
COIntents. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claim hereto appended. 
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a perspective. 
view of a pan-lifter constructed in accord 
ance with this invention. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal sectional view, showing the lifter in 
engagement with a pan. Fig. 3 is a plan view. 
Like numerals of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lingS. 
l designates a box composed of a bottom 
2, sides 3, and a back 4, and provided at its 
front with a flat shovel extension 5 forming a 
continuation of the bottom of the box. The 
shovel extension is tapering, having oppo 
sitely beveled front edges 6 to adapt it to be 
readily inserted under a pan; and it projects 
laterally beyond the sides of the box. The 
back 4 of the box is inclined, and has secured 
to it a shank 7 of a handle 8; and the said 
Shank is flattened and extends forward on the 
lower face of the bottom 2 of the box. The 
front edges 9 of the sides 3 form shoulders, 
adapted to abut against a side of a pan, and 
in order to retain the pan 10 on the shovel 
extension, which is slightly beveled at 11 to fa 
cilitate insertion beneath the pan, a swinging 
catch. 12 is mounted on the box. The sides 
of the box are connected by cross-rods 13 
and 14, and the latterforms a pintle for the 
SWinging catch, which is composed of approxi 
mately L-shaped sides 15 and a thumbloop 16 
arranged at the innerends of thesides between 
the same, and adapted to be depressed by 
the thumb to lift the sides of the swinging 
It will be seen that the thumb loop is 
arranged at the inner end of the handle in con 
venient position to be operated by the thumb 
of the hand grasping the handle. 
The swinging catch is preferably con 
structed of a single piece of wire, which is dou 
bled to form the thumb loop, coiled to form 
eyes 17 at opposite sides of the loop, and then 
doubled and bent at each side of the thumb 
loop to form the approximately L-shaped 
sides 15. The terminals of the wire are bent 
to form eyes. 
The pan-lifter is adapted for lifting all 
kinds of cooking utensils having vertical or 
approximately vertical sides of not too great 
a height, ash-pans, and the like; and it will 
be seen that the shovel extension of the box 
forms a broad supporting base for the pan, 
and that the latter is securely retained on 
the shovel extension by the swinging catch. 
It will also be apparent that the upwardly 
swinging catch has its thumb loop located at 
the inner end of the handle, in order to be in 
convenient position, to be engaged by the 
thumb of the handgrasping the handle. 
Changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction may be resorted 
to without departing from the principle or 
sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
vention. 
- 
What I claim is 
A pan-lifter, comprising a box provided at 
its front with a shovel extension, a handle ar 
ranged at the back of the box, a transverse 
pintle mounted on the box, and an upwardly 
swinging catch constructed of a single piece 
of wire and consisting of the doubled approxi 
mately L-shaped sides provided at their in 
ner terminals with eyes receiving the pintle 
and the intermediate finger loop arranged at 
the inner end of the handle and located be 
tween the sides, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
R. L. HUTCHINSON, 
A. E. SALMON. 
AUGUST VOLKENRATH. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536103.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 536,103. 
 
2. ---- 
 
 
WAZMMASSAS 
%aya2z4, 
H. J. SNYDER & F. PITSKE. 
GAGE FOR ROTARY OUTTERs, 
- 
Patented Mar. 19, 1895. 
 
A. 
i 
w- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---- 
sansassssssssss 
22 
222 22 %.S2 fic 2 
a 
%N2. 2 
Zeed.6ez rea t/ 57%77 
Z7-zza Zezsate 
AW/AWZO2 
-y 
Azzopaeep 
The Norris perers co, PHOTo-LTHO, WASHINGTON, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HUBBERD J. SNYDER AND FRANK PITSKE, OF MERRILL, WISCONSIN. 
W 
GAGE FOR ROTARY CUTTERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,103, dated Viarch 19, 1895. 
Application filed September 6, 1894, Serial No. 522,285 (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, HUBBERD. J. SNYDER 
and FRANK PITSKE, citizens of the United 
States of America, residing at Merrill, in the 
5 county of Lincoln and State of Wisconsin, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Gages for Rotary Cutters; and 
We do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
gages for setting the cutting knives on the 
heads of rotary cutters. 
The object of our invention is to provide 
a gage of improved construction which is 
adapted to be fitted to rotary cutter heads of 
different sizes for use in setting or adjusting 
the knives thereon; and with the above ob 
ject in view our invention consists in a gage 
which is provided with means for adjusting 
the same so as to adapt it to cutters having 
heads of different lengths and widths, and it 
further consists in the construction and com 
bination of the parts, as will be hereinafter 
fully set forth and particularly pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a plan 
View showing our improved gage applied to 
a rotary cutter of ordinary construction. Fig. 
2 is a sectional view on the line 2-2 of Fig. 
1. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view on the line 3-3 
of Fig. 1, and Fig 4 is a detail perspective 
WieW. 
In the drawings we have illustrated a rotary 
cutter-head and frame thereof in dotted lines, 
said cutter head being of ordinary construc 
tion, such as is used on planing, matching and 
grOOwing machines. 
A designates the gage which consists of a 
CrOSS-bar a having bent ends which are ad 
justably attached to the supports B, one end 
of each support having a notch b for engage 
ment with the frame or yoke which supports 
so the cutter-head, the opposite end of each sup. 
port B having a semi-circular recess b' which 
40 
45 
35 
7 o 
engages with the shaft or spindle of the ro 
tary cutter. The supports B are each pro 
vided with a slotb through which pass thumb 
screws c, said thumb-screws also passing 55 
through the downwardly bent ends of the bar 
CL and engaging with nuts c' which bear 
against the bar a to prevent their turning. 
The bara is preferably provided on its inner 
edge at a suitable distance from each support 
B with projections a which are notched as 
shown, and against these projections the 
edges of the straight blades on the cutter 
head are adapted to a but in adjusting the 
Same, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The rear 
edge of the bar d is beveled to receive and re 
tain upon said bar movable gage-blocks A 
which may be used when a plurality of 
straight cutters are employed, 
The supports B adjoining the semi-circular 
recesses b are provided with set-screws d 
which are adapted to be set for engagement 
with the ends of the cutter-heads. 
It will be noted that with so much of the 
device hereinbefore described we provide a 
gage which is adapted to be used with cutter 
heads of different lengths and upon which 
blades having straight edges are used, but in 
practice blades with curved cutting edges are 
often used with the straight blades, especially 
in making holdings or in planing and groov 
ing lumber, and in such cases we provide a 
gage-plate D which is provided on each edge 
with recesses of the same shape as the ends 
of the grooving blades, and this plate is se 
cured upon the bar a by set-screws e, the set 
screws passing through slots in the plate 
which extend from opposite sides thereof So 
as to provide for readily reversing the same. 
Each gage is furnished with several plates D 
having different shaped recesses. When one 
of the plates D is used the ends of the cutters 
fit into the recesses therein and rest upon the 
bar C. 
on the cutter-head can be readily and accu 
rately adjusted, and the device can be readily 
removed. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to Secure by Let- IOO 
ters Patent, is 
By means of this device the cutting blades 95 
1. A gage for the knives of rotary cutters, 
75. 
9 O 
536,103 
2 
comprising supports which are adapted to en 
gage with the periphery of the spindle or shaft 
of the cutters and with its supporting frame, 
of a gage-bar which is attached to the sup 
ports, so as to be adjustable thereon, and set 
screws carried by the Supports So as to pro 
ject at right angles there with for engagement 
with the ends of the cutter-heads, substan 
tially as shown and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A gage for rotary cutters, comprising 
supports B B having at one end semi-circu 
lar recesses band at the other end a notch 
b, and intermediate slots by a cross-bar hav 
ing bent ends which lie over the supports, and 
set-screws which pass through the slots band 
engage with nuts for the purpose of adjust 
O 
ing the cross-bar upon its supports to and from 
the cutter-head, substantially as shown. 
3. In a gage for rotary cutters, a cross-bar 
carried by supports which engage with the 
cutter-head and its frame, substantially as 
shown, the combination, of a reversible, bar 
or plate attached thereto and provided on one 
or both edges with recesses for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
HUBBERD. J. SNYDER. 
FRANK PITSKE. 
25 
Witnesses: 
* 
C. C. MAXIN, 
GEORGE E. ALLEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536203.txt	(No Model.) H. P. HANSON & W. C. MEYRICK. 
No. 536,203, 
METAL TOWER 
Patented Mar, 26, 1895, 
4 H 
 
 
H 
 
z. 
2INS t 
w 
E. 
 
2. 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HAWKEN P. HANSON AND WILLIAM C. MEYRICK, OF DECORAH, IOWA, As. 
SIGNORS TO THE DECORAH WINDMILL COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
METAL TOWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,203, dated March 26, 1895. 
Application filed May 23, 1894, Serial No. 512,245, (No model.) 
- 
To all, whom it may concern 
Be it known that we, HAWKEN P. HANSON 
and WILLIAM C. MEYRICK, both citizens of 
the United States of America, residing at De 
5 corah, county of Winneshiek, State of Iowa, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Metal Towers, of which the 
following is a description. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Io wherein like reference letters indicate like or 
corresponding parts, Figure 1, is a section of 
a tower showing our improvement. Fig. 2, is 
a side elevation of our improved device for 
connecting together the adjacent ends and 
I5 tightening the braces, and Fig. 3, is a top 
plan of the same. 
In the construction of metal towers, such 
as are used in connection with wind-mills, 
electric lights, &c., the ends of the diagonal 
2 o braces are usually connected directly or in 
directly to the corner posts. For this purpose 
the corner posts are either punched or other 
Wise cut a Way to adapt them to such connec 
tions. It is obvious that the punching or cut 
25 ting of the corner-posts weaken them at that 
point, and to offset such effects it is necessary 
to use heavier material to secure the desired 
strength. 
The object of our invention is to construct 
3o a tower of suitable rigidity and strength, by 
using lighter and cheaper material, and in 
order to do this to dispense with a large part 
of the punching or cutting of the parts, as 
well as the labor and expense of the same. 
For this purpose our invention consists, 
first, in the construction of a tower in which 
the proximate ends of a part or all the braces 
are secured together and the said braces tight 
ened by means of a device disconnected and 
4o separate from the corner posts of the tower, 
and, second, the construction of a practical 
device for such purpose. 
In the drawings our invention is shown as 
applied to a four post tower, but it is equally 
45 applicable to other towers of a greater or less 
As shown, A, A represent the corner posts 
number of posts. 
35 
55 
75 
of a tower, preferably of angle-steel. B, B, B, 
B', &c., are the diagonal braces of the same. 
C, C, are the horizontal struts, or girts, and 
D, D are our improved fastening. The fas 
tening device is composed of preferably du 
plicate parts d-d', secured together by a 
draw bolt d, or its equivalent. The parts d, 
dare each constructed with projecting wings 
d-d, to which the ends of the braces may be 
secured in any preferred manner. As shown 
in the drawings short bolts d-dare used 
for such purpose. 
It will thus be seen that 
the connection rests or rides upon a corner 
post, but is neither directly nor indirectly at 
tached to the same. 
The mode of operation is preferably as fol 
lows: The distant ends of four braces, as, for 
example, B, B* B, B, are first secured to the 
proper corner posts in the proper manner. 
The several free ends of said braces are then 
assembled as at D, and each secured to its 
proper wing. The bolt, d, is then positioned 
and the nut, e, or its equivalent, permits the 
two parts d-d', to be drawn toward one an 
other, thus tightening the braces and jointly 
clamping and binding the tower together in 
all directions. The connecting device thus 
rides upon the post, as described, and yet is 
as securely held in position by the opposing 
strain of the several braces as if it were se 
cured to the post. The several braces thus 
act as trusses, giving the tower great strength 
without weakening it by punching or cutting 
If preferred, the braces need only be secured 
directly to the posts at the extreme top and 
bottom thereof, the connections described be 
ing used at all the other points. We prefer, 
however, to construct the tower as first de 
scribed. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a metal tower, the corner posts, the 
horizontal struts, and the diagonal braces, se 
cured at one end only to the corner posts in 
combination with a securing and tightening 
device, disconnected from the corner posts 
w 
V 
2 
536,203 
but riding thereon, and so arranged that the when thus connected, adapted to ride upon 
proximate free ends of the braces attached a corner post, and retain its position thereon 
thereto will be securely held in position and without connection with said post, substan 
the braces tightened, substantially as set tially as set forth. 
HAWKEN P. HANSON 
ANSN 
WILLIAM C. MEYERICK. 
- 
Witnesses: 
H. C. GODDARD, 
J. E., TUCKER. 
5 forth. 
2. A securing and tightening device for 
metal towers, consisting of two parts secured 
together by a straining rod, each part so con- 
structed as to afford means for attaching the 
Io proximate ends of two braces, the whole, 
f 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536303.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 536,303, 
T. H. STACKHOUSE. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar, 26, 1895, 
witnesses; 
f/2. 
 
NVENTOR 
skS %ao A. Jae-4----- 
(No Model.) 
No. 536,303, 
T. H. ST ACKHOUSE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 26, 1895. 
E ae 
invent or 
v6/ C42-44-1 
%27. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 536,303, 
T. H. STACKHOUSE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Mar, 26, 1895, 
 
 
 
A 
F.C. 
- - r - - - - -v- 
f 
SYs A. raia 
  
 
  
islas 
s's 
(S 
: 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
IEEE-III 
R e anw is 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 536,303, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
T. H. ST ACKHOUSE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
Patented Mar. 26, 1895, 
 
6/. yists 76.73. 
(2 
- - - - - - . 
the Norris Peters co, Photo. 
W 
TON. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
THOMAS H. STACKHOUSE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
TYPE - WRITING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,303, dated March 26, 1895. 
Application filed February 7, 1894, Serial No. 499,368, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS H. STACK 
HOUSE, a citizen of the United States, and a 
resident of the city and county of Philadel 
phia, State of Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Type-Writing Machines, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
type Writing machines, and more particularly 
to improvements in mechanism for driving 
the carriages of type writing machines, and 
the object of my invention is to furnish a 
type Writing machine the carriage of which 
may be driven in either direction. 
English and most other European languges 
are Written from left to right, and type writ 
ing machines for writing these languages are 
consequently so constructed that their car 
riages move, during the writing, from right 
to left. . Machines of this character are not 
adapted for Writing the languages that are 
Written from right to left, notably the Hebrew, 
and it is my purpose to furnish a machine 
the carriage of which may be driven during 
the Writing either from right to left or from 
left to right as may be required by the lan 
guage that is being written. 
In the accompanying drawings forming 
part of this specification and in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate similar parts 
throughout the several views, Figure 1, is a 
rear elevation of a type writing machine em 
bodying my improvements; Fig. 2, a plan 
of the rear part of machine furnished with 
lmy improvements, the plate being removed 
and Some of the parts broken away so as 
to show my attachments more clearly; Fig. 
3, a side elevation of the rear part of a ma 
chine furnished with my improvements, part. 
of the frame of the machine being broken 
away; Fig. 4, a side elevation of the double 
escapement motion, the levers for operating 
the double racks, the gearing by which the 
carriage may be driven in either direction, 
and the mechanism for throwing the inter 
mediate gears into or out of action with the 
main driving gear; Fig. 5, a front elevation 
of the main driving gear, the rack which is 
secured to the carriage, and the interme 
diate gears between the main gear and the 
rack; Fig. 6, a rear elevation of the spacing 
pawls or dogs, the rocking frame which car 
ries them, and part of the double ratchets; 
Fig. 7, a side elevation-of Fig. 6; Fig. 8, a rear 
elevation of pawl for engaging ratchet to pre 
vent spring from unwinding when carriage is 
removed from machine; Fig. 9, a plan of Fig. 
8; Fig. 10, a plan of rocking lever which con 
nects collars on hubs of intermediate gears; 6o 
Fig. 11, a plan of Fig. 10; Fig. 12, a front ele 
vation of rear ratchet which is loose on shaft 
to which the driving spring is secured, and 
Fig. 13, a central sectional elevation through 
the driving spring, the front and rearratchets 
on the shaft to which said spring is secured, 
and the main driving gear. 
A is the frame which supports the carriage 
and its connected parts; B, the carriage 
frame; C, the platen; D, a rack secured to 
the carriage; E, a gear wheel gearing with 
rack D; F, a gear wheel fast upon a shaft G.; 
H, I, gear wheels carried loosely on studs J, 
K, Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and which are adapted 
to engage alternately with and be driven by 
gear F. The gear I gears directly with gear 
E, and the gear H gears with an intermediate 
gear I, which gear's with gear E. 
The shaft G. and gear F are driven, when 
the machine is in use, by a coil spring M, 
shown by dotted lines in Figs. 1 and 12 and 
by full lines in Fig. 13, the arrows in full lines 
in Fig. 5 showing the movement of the wheels 
when the gear H is in gear with and driven 
by gear F. . 
In the drawings the gear I is shown out of 
contact with gear F but is in gear with gear 
E and is running idly, the rack D and the car 
riage being driven as shown by the arrows in 
full lines, that is from left to right as the op 
erator faces the key board. 
If it be desired to reverse the driving of the 
carriage the gear H is thrown out of contact 
with gear F and the gear I into contact with 
it, the mechanism for accomplishing this be 
ing as follows: The gears H, I, are carried 
upon studs J, K, which are carried by a suit 
able frame N which may form part of frame 
A or be secured to said frame. 
O is a lever pivoted at its middle to a suit 
able support, and the ends of which are piv 
otally secured to one end of links a, a?, the 
other ends of which are pivotally attached to 
the upper ends of forks b, b' which pass down 
85 
9o 
95 
75 
CO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
3 
536,303 
fo 
75 
I to 
(5 
2 go 
3O 
35 
ward and upon each side of a groove cut upon 
the hubs of gears H, I. 
Upon one end of lever O and pivotally con 
nected to said lever is a U shaped frame P 
the ends of which project upwardly and are 
furnished with slots into which the lower end 
of a frame R, which is carried by a shaft S, 
passes. One end of shaft S is furnished with 
a crank T, Figs. 1, 2, 3 and 4, which is con 
nected with a lever U by a link W. 
When it is desired to reverse the movement 
of the carriage, the lever U is thrown over, 
as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 4, pushing 
over link V and crank Tand rocking shaft S 
and causing the frame R to be thrown out as 
shown by dotted lines. This frame moves the 
frame P out, or in, as the case may be, and 
throws one end of lever O in one direction 
and its other end in the opposite direction and 
causes one gear, as I, to be thrown into gear 
with gear F, and the other gear, as H, out of 
gear with gear F. The faces of gears E, L, 
are much broader than the face of gear F, so 
that these gears may be at all times in gear 
with gears H, I. It will be understood that 
this construction of the gears may be reversed, 
that is the gears E, I, may have narrow faces 
and the gears H, I, broad faces. 
As the carriage may be driven in either di 
rection it is necessary that it be furnished 
with two spacing devices, one of which will 
control its movement in one direction, and 
the other its movement in the opposite direc 
tion. These spacing devices are so arranged 
that they are thrown into and out of oper 
ative action simultaneously with that one of 
the driving devices whose motion they limit. 
The lever U, through which the gears H, I, 
are thrown into or out of operative action 
with the driving gear F, has its lower end se 
cured to a shaft or stud c which is carried in 
suitable bearings in the carriage frame B. 
Upon the opposite end of the carriage frame 
is a similar shaft or stud c'. Secured to shafts 
c, c', are collars d, d, to which are secured 
two ratchets e,f Suitably pivoted to frame 
A of the machine, or to bearings carried by 
this frame, is a rod g, and secured to this rod 
is an upwardly projecting arm h the upper 
end of which is furnished with two movable 
pawls i,j, and two stationary pawls k, l. The 
pawls i, k, are adapted to engage ratchete, the 
pawls i, l, to engage the ratchetf 
m, n, are springs carried by arms h the free 
55 ends of which engage the outer ends of the 
movable pawls i, j, and return these pawls to 
their first positions after having been moved 
forward by the movement of the carriage as 
hereinafter described. 
The key board, the type bars, the type, &c., 
are not shown as their arrangement and con 
struction are so well known as to render this 
unnecessary. It will be understood that they 
may be of any of the well known and suit 
able patterns. It will be also understood that 
in writing, English and Hebrew for instance, 
two complete sets of type bars, key boards, 
&c., should be used, one being removed from 
the machine in order to make place for the 
other, or other suitable provision should be 
made for the use of the differentletters or char 
acters that may be necessary in writing the 
different languages. 
In the drawings the machine is shown 
geared so as to drive the carriage from left to 
right, as the operator faces it and its opera 
tion is as follows: One of the keys being 
struck depresses the lever O which is fast to 
rockshaftg. This rocks shaft g and moves in 
arm h which is fast to this shaft. As the upper 
end of this arm is moved in, movable pawl i 
is moved out of contact with the tooth on 
ratchete which it is engaging and at the same 
'instant the stationary pawl k is moved into 
contact with the next tooth on this ratchet 
and prevents the ratchet and the carriage 
from moving. As soon as movable pawl i is 
moved out of contact with the teeth of the 
ratchet the spring m throws this pawl back 
until it is directly opposite stationary pawl k, 
and when the key is released the spring p, 
Figs, 1 and 3, returns arm h and its connected 
parts to their first position, drawing the sta 
tionary pawl out of contact with ratchete and 
moving the movable pawl into contact with 
that tooth on this ratchet that the stationary 
pawl has just left. As soon as this is done the 
spring M, through gears F, H, L and E, and 
rack D, drives the carriage forward until it is 
arrested by the stopping of movable pawl i, 
which may be accomplished by a pin r car 
ried by the arm h and which passes through a 
slots in the pawls i ori. See Fig. 6.. When 
the machine is to be driven in the opposite di 
rection, the lever U is moved down, as shown 
by the dotted lines in Fig. 4. The ratchet e is 
then lifted out of contact with the pawls i, k, 
and the ratchet f is thrown down so as to be 
engaged by the pawls i, l. At the same instant 
the frame R on shaft S moves out frame Pon 
lever O and this lever moves gear H out of 
contact with driving gear F and the gear I 
into contact with gear F and the driving of 
the carriage will be reversed. When this is 
done the action of the pawls i, l, and the 
ratchet f will be similar to that described for 
the pawls i, k, and the ratchet e. 
ti, Figs. 1 and 3, is a pawl that engages with 
a ratchet wheel u, Figs. 1, 3 and 13, which is 
fast to shaft G, to which inside end of spring 
M is secured. 
iv, Figs. 1, 2 and 3, is a thumb wheel upon 
the end of the shaft G. By means of wheel 
the shaft, G may be turned in order to wind 
up or increase the tension of spring M. The 
ratchet wheel it and pawl t prevent the spring 
from unwinding. 
w, Figs. 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7, is a lever which is 
pivoted at w', and the lower end of which is 
furnished with a tooth ac and the upper end 
of which is adapted to pass under and to be 
engaged by a flat surface D', carried by the 
rack D. Ordinarily the flat surface D' on 
the rack D engages the upper end of lever 
Co 
So 
45 
I do 
Io5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
536,303 
d 
tly and holds this end down, but if the car 
riage be removed for any purpose from the 
machine, the lower end of this lever drops 
and tooth ac engages one of the teeth on the 
ratchet y and prevents this ratchet and the 
gear F from revolving and the spring M from 
unwinding, which it would always do when 
the carriage was removed from the machine 
were it not for some device of this kind. 
The upper end of spring M is secured to a 
pin M' which passes through a slot y' in the 
ratchet wheely and through a slot F in gear 
F. When the carriage is pushed forward so 
as to commence writing upon a new line, the 
spring M, as is the case in all type writing 
machines, is wound up, and when this is done 
the pin M' is drawn down to the bottom of 
the slots ly', F. Hence when the spring is 
tightly wound and exerts its greatest force, 
this force is applied near the center of the 
wheel F and ratchety. As the spring un 
winds the pin Mrises and its force is applied 
farther from the center of the gear and 
ratchet. By this device the spring transmits 
to the gear F and ratchet y very nearly as 
much power when it is unwound as it does 
when fully wound. 
I do not desire to confine myself to the pre 
cise construction that I have shown in my 
drawings for the details of my invention may 
be considerably modified without departing 
from the Spirit of my invention, and in ap 
plying the invention to typewriting machines 
of a different construction from that shown 
in the drawings it might be necessary to make 
modifications in order to adapt the invention 
to the different construction of the carriage 
and its connected parts. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination in a type writing ma 
chine of a carriage, a main driving spring, 
mechanism operated by said main driving 
spring by means of which said carriage may 
be driven in either direction, mechanism op 
erated by the keys of the machine by means 
of which the carriage may be caused to move 
in either direction with a step by step move 
ment, and means by which one set of driving 
and one set of spacing mechanisms may be 
thrown out of operative action when the other 
set are thrown into operative action. 
2. The combination with the carriage of a 
type writing machine and means for driving 
the same in either direction, of two movable 
and two stationary pawls, means for operat 
ing said pawls and for operating them by the 
movements of the keys, two ratchets carried 
by said carriage the teeth of which are in 
clined in opposite directions and one of which 
is adapted to be engaged by one set of pawls, 
the other by the other set of pawls, and means 
for at the same time throwing one set of 
pawls and one ratchet into gear and the other 
set of pawls and the other ratchet out of gear. 
3. The combination with the carriage of a 
type Writing machine of a main driving gear 
and neans for driving the same in one direc 
tion, mechanism controlled by the keys of the 
machine for dictating the movements of said 
driving gear, mechanism actuated by said 
driving gear for driving the carriage in the 
opposite direction, mechanism controlled by 
the keys of the machine for dictating the 
movements of said second driving gears, and 
means for throwing said driving mechanisms 
alternately into and out of operative action. 
4. The combination in a type writing ma 
chine of a carriage, a rack secured to said car 
riage, a main driving gear and means for act 
uating the same, a set of gears driven by said 
main driving gear for moving said rack and 
carriage in one direction, a set of gears actu 
ated by said main driving gear. for driving 
said rack and carriage in the opposite direc 
tion, means for throwing one set of gears out 
of operative action with said main driving 
gear when the other set of gears are thrown 
into operative action with it, and mechanism, 
operated through the keys of the machine, 
for imparting a step by step movement in 
either direction to said carriage. 
5. The combination with the carriage of a 
type writing machine of a rack secured to 
said carriage, a gear wheel engaging said rack, 
a main driving gear and means for actuating 
the same, an intermediate gear adapted to 
gear into said main driving gear and into said 
rack engaging gear, an intermediate gear 
adapted to gear into said gear and into said 
main driving gear, and means for throwing 
one of said intermediate gears out of contact 
with said main driving gear when the other 
is thrown into gear with it. 
6. The combination with the intermediate 
gear wheels and the studs upon which they 
are supported, of a lever pivoted at its center, 
links pivoted to the ends of said lever and 
to forks engaging the hubs of said gears, said 
forks, a slotted frame secured to one of the 
ends of said lever, a frame extending into said 
slots, a shaft upon which said latter frame is 
carried, and means for rocking said shaft. 
7. The combination with the carriage of a 
type Writing machine and an actuating spring 
or springs by means of which said carriage 
may be moved in either direction, of two es 
capement movements, one of which is adapted 
to determine the spacing movement of the 
carriage in one direction, the other to deter 
mine the spacing movement of the carriage 
in the other direction, and mechanism for 
throwing one of said escapement movements 
out of operative action when the other is 
thrown into operative action. 
8. The combination with the carriage of a 
type writing machine and means for driv 
ing the same in either direction, of an arm 
adapted to be rocked by the action of the 
keys of the machine, two movable and two 
stationary pawls carried by said arm, two 
ratchets carried by said carriage the teeth of 
which are inclined in opposite directions and 
one of which is adapted to be engaged by one 
- 
I 25 
I 30 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
I o5 
IO 
I 15 
ul 
536,303 
rear side of said rack, and a pawl the upper 
end of which is adapted, when the carriage is 
on the machine, to be engaged by the flat sur 
face on said rack and be thereby held out of 
contact with said ratchet and adapted when 
said carriage is removed from the machine to 
fall and engage said ratchet, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
THOMAS H. STACKEIOUSE. 
Witnesses: 
STEVENSON H. WALSH, 
CHAS. A. R.UTTER. 
5 
set of pawls and the other by the other set of 
pawls, and means for throwing, at the same 
time, one ratchet into gear with one set of 
pawls and the other out of gear with the other 
set of pawls. 
9. The combination in a type writing ma 
chine of a carriage, a main driving spring, a 
shaft to one end of which this spring is se 
cured, a gear wheel driven by said spring, 
a rack upon said carriage adapted to be driven 
by the movements of said gear wheel, a ratchet 
fast to said gear wheel, a flat surface upon the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536403.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 536,403, 
J. C., SPEIRS. 
SADDLE, 
Patented Mar, 26, 1895. 
2. 
 
s 
NS 
28). Evlossos 
v 
% 64 
3v-uovtov 
S$ &ltto vicio 
THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHOTo-LTHO. washington.D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. SPEIRS, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
SPEIRS MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SADDLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,408, dated March 26, 1895. 
Application filed March 2, 1894, Serial No. 502,089, (No model.) 
20 all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JoEIN C. SPEIRs, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Worcester, 
in the county of Worcester and State of Mas. 
Sachusetts, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Saddles, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The aim of this invention is to provide a 
neW and improved means for securing saddles 
of seats in place, especially in velocipedes or 
bicycles, which shall be very simple, admit of 
ready adjustment, and be easy of manufac 
ture. 
To this end, the invention consists of the 
device described and claimed in this specifi 
'cation, and illustrated in the accompanying 
sheet of drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation partly in section 
of my improved device. Fig. 2 is a perspec 
tive view of a part I term the forward spring 
Support. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a 
part I term the rear spring support. Fig. 4 is 
a Sectional view illustrating the clamp for se 
Curing the tWO spring supports together. Fig. 
5 is a sectional view illustrating the clamp for 
Securing the rear spring support to the seat 
post, and Fig.6 represents a modification of the 
clamp used between the two spring supports. 
The special object of my invention is to 
provide a simple and efficient means for se 
curing Saddles in place, which shall admit of a 
peculiar rocking adjustment hereinafter de 
scribed, and which shall be very simple and 
easy of manufacture. 
Referring to the drawings, and in detail, S 
represents the usual leather seat or saddle, to 
the inside forward end of which is secured a 
hook H, and to the rear end of which is se 
cured a cantle C, the cantle and saddle being 
riveted together to hold the rear end of the 
Saddle or seat in place in the usual manner. 
My improved support consists of two 
Springs, each of which is made preferably of a 
Single piece of spring wire bent as hereinafter 
described, a peculiar clamp for clamping the 
tWO together, and a peculiar clamp for clamp 
ing the same in place on the seat-post. 
25 represents the forward spring support. 
This forward spring support is made of a sin 
gle piece of wire which is bent so as to have 
straight arms 26-26 and the upper curved 
arms 27-27, which unite as at 28, thus form 
sing a hook or clasp, around which the hook H 
is adapted to be secured to hold the forward 
end of the saddle S in place. The two flaps 
of this seat S can be stitched together, if de 
sired, as at A. The rear spring support 29 is 
also made of a single piece of spring wire. 
This wire is bent so as to have the two curved 
arms 30-30, and then is bent around on the 
curve as at 31-31, then around the straight 
portions 32-32, the upward extending por 
tions 33-33, then the horizontal portions 
The portions 
34-34, which unite as at 35. 
34-34 and 35 of this rear spring support, are 
preferably flattened, as shown. 
The cantle C has a pocket as C' into which 
fits a bolt 20, which has threaded on its lower 
end a nut 23, under which is placed a washer 
24, and by this means, the flattened portions 
34-34 and 35 of the rear spring support cau 
be adjustably secured to the cantle. 
The arms 26-26 of the forward spring sup 
port 25 are made so that they will just fit 
within the arms 32-32 of the rear spring Sup 
port, and a peculiar clamp is used to secure the 
two spring arms together. This clamp con 
sists of a cylindrical bushing or sleeve 37, 
which is cut in or notched on its ends as at 
38-38. Fitting into this bushing 37 is the 
post 36. This post 36 has a slot 39 cut in the 
same, into which the arms 26-26 and 32-32 
are passed when the post is in place in the 
bushing 37. 
The post 36 has an extending boss 40 in 
which is tapped a screw 41 which has a head 
By this means, the two Spring supports 
42. 
will be rigidly clamped together, as the bolt 
41 is screwd up. As the bolt 41 is screwed 
up, it will push or draw the arms 32-32 
against the arms 26-26, and this motion will 
be limited by the arms 26-26 striking or 
bearing against the bottoms of the notches 
38-38. By this means, an efficient, strong, 
and simple clamp is provided for clamping 
the two wire supports together. 
The leather S may be adjusted on its two 
spring supports either by loosening the nut 
23 and adjusting the cantle on the rear spring 
support, or by loosening the screw 41, and by 
adjusting the two spring supports relatively 
to each other. 
O 
15 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55. 
65 
75 
90 
95 
do 
536,403 
25 
A peculiar clamp is provided to secure the 
rear spring support to the seat-post L, and 
thus the saddle in place. This clamp con 
sists of a sleeve 43 which is bored out so as 
5 to nicely fit on the seat-post L, and this camp 
43 has extending arms 44-44, through which 
is bored a hole, into which the post 46 can fit. 
These two arms 44-44 are slightly separated 
from each other as shown. The post 46 has 
Io a slot 45 cut in the same as shown, and the 
sides of the lugs or projections 44-44 are 
notched so as to receive the arms 30-30 of the 
rear spring support through the slot 45 of the 
post 46. 
Fitting on one end of the post 46 is a cap 
48 which extends over the post as at 48, and 
which will bear against the arm 30 nearest the 
same. The post 46 has an extending screw 
threaded shank 47, on which is threaded 
nut 50, which is adapted to bear against the 
sleeve or collar 48. By this means, when the 
nut 50 is screwed up, the extending sleeve or 
collar 49 of the collar 48 will be forced against 
the arm 30 nearest the same, and this sleeve 
48 is preferably slightly notched or grooved 
so as to nicely bear against the arm. 30. As 
the nut 50 is screwed up, this will draw, the 
other arm 30 tightly against its lug. 44, and 
will thus tightly clamp the rear spring support 
in place. Also at the same time, the tendency. 
will be to draw the two lugs. 44-44 of the 
clamp 43 together around the seat-post I, and 
thus also to secure the clamp on the seat-post. 
Thus, this clamp by a single nut, accom 
plishes both functions of securing the rear 
spring support in place in the same, and also, 
of Securing the clamp to the seat-post, which 
provides a very simple, and economical con 
Struction. 
Of course other forms of clamps can be used 
to secure the two spring supports together, 
and one of such otherforms is shown in Fig. 
6. In this instance, the means for securing 
the two spring supports together consists of a 
clamp made in two parts 500 and 51, which are 
adapted to bite on the arms. 32-32 and 26-26 
of the spring supports, and by means of screw 
52 and nut 53 clamp the two together. 
By means of the peculiar clamping means 
for securing the rear support to the seat post, 
it will be seen that I have provided a rocking 
Or tipping adjustment, depending upon the 
curvature of the arms 30. Thus, by loosening 
the nut 50, the saddle can be pushed forward 
or backward on the seat-post, and can be 
tipped at any desired angle, and the whole. 
can then be secured in place simply by turn 
ing the nut 50. This means forms a very ef 
ficient adjusting mechanism for saddles of 
55 
45 
35 
this kind, and, of course, so far as this rock 
ing adjustment is concerned, other spring 
supports could be used, the only essential part 
co-operating with this clamp being the two 
curved arms 30-30. 
The details of the invention herein de 
scribed may be greatly varied by a skilled 
mechanic without departing from the Scope 
of my invention, as expressed in the claims. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a bicycle saddle, the combination of a 
leather seat, a spring support for said seat 
constructed of cylindrical wire, a seat-post for 
supporting the saddle, and a clamp for secur 
ing the spring support to said seat-post, said 
clamp consisting of a split clamp having eX 
tended perforated arms, a slotted bolt or post, 
and an exterior threaded clamping device for 
tightening said slotted post to secure the wires 
of the spring support together and to Secure 
the split clamp to the seat-post, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a bicycle saddle, the combination of a 
leather seat, a support for said seat consisting 
of a forward spring support, and a rear spring 
support, and a clamp for securing said Sup 
ports together, said clamp consisting of a per 
! forated sleeve, a slotted bolt or post extending 
through said sleeve, and a clamping device at 
one end of the slotted bolt for forcing the 
spring wires against the perforated sleeve and 
for securing them together, substantially as 
described, 
3. In a bicycle saddle, the combination of a 
leather seat, a support for said seat comprising 
: a forward spring support and a rear spring 
I support, said supports being formed of cylin 
drical spring wire, a clamp for securing the 
parts of said support together, said clamp 
comprising a perforated sleeve, a slotted bolt 
or post extending through said sleeve and 
adapted to be actuated by an exterior clamp 
ing bolt, and a clamping device for securing 
the spring Support to the seat-post, Said clamp 
ing device comprising a split clamp for en 
gaging the seat-post, and a slotted bolt or post 
adapted to be actuated by an exterior clamp 
ing device for compressing said split clamp 
and securing the same to the seat post, sub 
stantially, as described. 
In testimony, whereof i have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
JOHN C. SPEIRS. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP W. SouTHGATE, 
E. M. HEALY. 
65 
75 
go 
95 
ECO 
o 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536503.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 536,503. 
 
 
 
 
W, ALBACH, 
APPARATUS FOR FILTERING BEER, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 26, 1895. 
ZZZZZ 
THE MORIS PETERS CO. PHOTO-LITHO.WASHINGTON, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 536,503. 
W. ALBACH, 
APPARATUS FOR FILTERING BEER, 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 26, 1895, 
(No Model.) 
No. 536,503, 
W, ALBACH. 
APPARATUS FOR FILTERING BEER, 
5 sheets-Sheet 8. 
Patented Mar, 26, 1895, 
THE NORRIs PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo, wash NGTON, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
W, ALBACH. 
APPARATUS FOR FILTERING BEER, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
No. 536,503, 
Patented Mar. 26, 1895. 
 
(No Model.) 
W, ALBACH. 
APPARATUS FOR FILTERING BEER, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 536,503, 
Patented Mar. 26, 1895, 
S 
a 
-(6 72 
N 
s N 
S 1 3 
N 74 
S 222N 
-1 S 
2 22 2 2 22 22 2 
\ 
26 N 33 N 
f 22222 N 
  
  
 
 
- 
C.S. . . 
a lar-a-SS 
---...- SS 26S 
222 2.222 
w 79sf s 
S 37 
SS S 
He noRRIS PETERS co, PHoro-Litho, washington, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELM ALBACH, OF HOCHST-ON-THE-MAIN, GERMANY. 
APPARATUS FOR FILTERING BEER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,508, dated March 26, 1895. 
Application filed July 12, 1894, Serial No. 517,305. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILHELMALBACH, a 
Subject of the Emperor of Germany, residing. 
at Hchst-on-the-Main, Empire of Germany, 
have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Apparatus for Filtering Beer and other 
Aerated Liquids, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Myinvention relates to apparatus for filter 
ing beer and other aerated liquids, the gen 
eral purpose of which is as follows: In trans 
ferring beer from the large casks, or barrels, 
in which it is contained, to smaller casks in 
which it is sold to the retailers, it is frequently 
necessary to filter it, and many different forms 
of filtration-apparatus have been devised for 
this purpose. Heretofore, however, difficul 
ties have been experienced in each instance 
which it is the purpose of my invention to 
avoid. For example, either the beer has been 
mingled with water, or an escape of the car 
bonic acid gas has been unavoidable, by either 
of which causes the quality of the beer has 
been greatly deteriorated. The escaping car 
bonic acid gas, in combination with air, which 
it has been found impossible to wholly remove 
by the methods heretofore in use, produce a 
thick, heavy foam, which renders the opera 
tion of filtering very difficult, as it seriously 
clogs the filtration apparatus and obstructs 
its action, while the removal of this foam, 
which cannot be introduced into the casks, 
involves the loss of a considerable quantity 
of carbonic acid which is not only necessary 
for the preservation of the beer, but is an im 
portantingredient in rendering the same pala 
table. It has been found, also, that in some 
methods of filtration a variation in the press 
ure by which the beer is forced through the 
filtering material, causes the latter to lose its 
normal consistency, and the beer, from this 
cause, comes forth in a muddy, or turbid con 
dition, which greatly impairs, and often de 
stroys its market value. 
To avoid one of the difficulties mentioned, 
it has been proposed to fill the entire filtra 
tion-apparatus with water, in order to expel 
the air, after which the water was forced out 
by the passage of the beer through the filter. 
The unavoidable consequence of this mode 
of procedure is that the beer is more or less 
adulterated by water, whichimpairsits quality 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
and reduces its strength. It has been found 
in practical use, moreover, that when the beer 
enters the filtration-apparatus from below, or 
from below and from both sides, and passes the 
filtering-material upward, or from the outer 
toward the inner part, the carbonic acid gas 
rises and occupies the space which is required 
for the liquid, and for this reason only about 
half the space of the filter can be utilized. 
This fact is clearly shown when the filtering 
material is removed, its lower portion being 
of a brown color and filled with a yeasty sub 
stance, while the upper part is still white, 
the presence of the carbonic acid gas hav 
ing prevented the beer from penetrating this 
portion. It has also been proposed to admit 
the beer to the filtration-apparatus at the 
side and cause part to flow upward and the 
other part downward, each portion passing 
through beds or layers, of filtering-material 
separated by a chamber, on inclosed space, 
in which the liquid which has passed the 
first layer accumulates, before it begins to 
penetrate the second layer. The beer enter 
ing the filter at the side flows into two sepa 
rate chambers, or compartments, at or near 
the middle of the apparatus, and is forced 
from the same upward and downward, respect 
ively. The carbonic acid gas, however, rises 
from the beer flowing upward, and enters the 
space, or compartment, between the layers of 
filtering material, being forced therein by the 
pressure of the beer until further compression 
is impossible. As it does not re-unite with 
the beer, it offers an effectual barrier to its 
passage through the Second layer, and as it 
combines with the air present it produces a 
thick, heavy foam which, of itself-alone, is a 
serious obstacle to the passage of the beer. 
Finally, if the cock be closed in the pipe which 
supplies beer to the filter, the filtering mate 
rial, which is under an excess of pressure, 
while the cock is open, is radically changed 
in consistency by its close, and the yeast par 
ticles, which are prevented from passing the 
filtering material by this excess of pressure, 
are enabled to enter said material when it is 
softened by the removal of pressure. Then 
when the cock in the inlet-pipe is again 
opened, these particles are carried away by 
the entering beer, which becomes turbid and 
muddy in appearance because of their pres 
9 O 
95 
too 
536,508 
EO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
ence. These being some of the principal diffi 
culties in the filtration of beer and aerated 
liquids, it is my purpose to provide apparatus 
for filtering said liquids in such manner as to 
avoid the objections and difficulties noted, 
and to enable others to understand and prac 
tice said invention I will proceed to describe 
the same in detail, reference being had, for 
such purpose, to the accompanying drawings 
showing an apparatus suitable for the prac 
tice of my invention. 
In the said drawings-Figure 1 is a vertical 
section taken centrally, from end to end of an 
apparatus organized in accordance with my 
invention. Fig. 2 is an end elevation taken 
from the right hand of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a ver 
tical section taken from end to end of a mech 
anism slightly modified from that shown in 
Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is an end elevation taken from 
the right hand of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a detail 
section, upon a somewhat larger scale, show 
ing the construction of parts and the arrange 
ment and means of retaining and compressing 
the filtering material. 
The reference-numeral 1, in said drawings, 
indicates a carriage - frame, preferably of 
wrought iron, its lower sills 2 being mounted 
upon wheels 3, to facilitate its removal from 
place to place. Near the ends of these sills 
rise the two end parts of the framel, strength 
ened by diagonal braces. Upon these end 
portions of the frame are supported boxes 4, 
in which hollow journals 5 and 6 have bear 
ing. Between these journals and supported 
by them is a drum, inclosed by a substan 
tially circular wall 7, of a suitable metal, and 
two covers 8 and 9, which are outwardly con 
vex. Each of these covers is provided with a 
circumferential, upwardly turned flange 10, 
which lies just within the circular wall 7, and 
each flange has an outwardly turned edge, or 
collar, 12, which projects over the edge of the 
wall 7 and lies in substantial parallelism with 
a flange, or collar 13, on the said wall 7. The 
covers are connected to the circular wall by 
bolts 14, passed through openings in the 
flanges and collars 12 and 13, and thumb-nuts 
15 are turned upon their threaded ends. In 
order to pack the joint and render it practi 
cally air-tight, a ring, or gasket 16, of rubber 
or other suitable material, is interposed be 
tween said collars and compressed by turn 
ing up the thumb - nuts. Metallic rings 16 
of suitable weight, are placed above and below 
the respective collars to serve as clamps, or 
compressors, and afford a suitable bearing 
for the bolts and nuts. 
Within the drum are arranged perforated, 
or foraminous plates 17, formed of any suit 
able material, on the edges of which the edges 
of the convex cover's rest. Between said 
plates 17 and the concave interior faces of the 
covers are interposed angle-irons 18 which 
support the plates 17 against strain. Upon 
each side of the central, horizontal plane of 
the drum, and at a short remove therefrom 
are arranged foraminous plates 19, between 
which and the plates 17 are interposed the 
bodies of filtering material 20. The compo 
sition of this material forms no part of my 
present invention, and need not therefore, be 
described further, except to state that it may 
be of any known, or preferred kind. The 
perforated, or foraminous plates 17 and 19 
are usually made of copper of sufficient 
strength to resist any strain that will be im 
posed thereon. They are reinforced by the 
angle-irons 18, and by supports 21, interposed 
between the plates 19. Adjacent to the plates 
17 lie fine sieves 22 their edges provided with 
rubber bindings 23, which have contact with 
the interior face of the circular wall 7. Two 
thirds, or thereabout, of the mass of filtering 
material lie between the sieves 22, and sieves 
24, of somewhat coarser texture, the other 
third being inclosed between said sieves 24 
and sieve 25, which lie against, or in close 
proximity to, the copper plates 19. Between 
the covers 8 and 9 and the two copper plates 
17 are inclosed chambers 26, of substantially 
similar form, and between the two copper 
plates 19 lies a central chamber 27. Between 
the latter and the two chambers 26 lie the two 
bodies of filtering material, already described. 
The covers 8 and 9 are each provided with an 
outlet 28, having an inspection-glass 29, and 
cock 30. The central chamber 27 is divided 
into two equal parts by a diagonal partition 
31, which extends from the top of the cham 
ber, on one side, to the bottom thereof, upon 
the sides diametrically opposite. 
The hollow journals 5 and 6 have flanges 32 
which are bolted to the circular wall 7, at op 
posite points. Each hollow journal has com 
munication with the central-chamber 27, the 
journal 5 opening upon one side of the divid 
ing partition, and the journal 6 upon the 
other side. Springing from the journal 5 is 
a branch pipe 33, which enters one of the 
chambers 26, and a similar branch 34 places 
the other journal 6 in like communication 
with the other chamber 26. At the points 
where said branch-pipes open out of the re 
spective hollow journals, are arranged three 
way cocks 35 and 36, respectively. The axis 
of the journals 5 and 6 is horizontal, and they 
are intended to revolve in their bearings, for 
a purpose presently to be explained. In or 
der to arrest, or prevent, such revolution, 
brake-screws 37 may be provided, whereby 
the bearing of one, or both, the journals may 
be so clamped thereon as to prevent revolu 
tion. 
Coupled to the hullow journal 5 in any suit 
able manner, is an elbow-tube 38, which turns 
upward and is connected to a neck 39, which 
opens into a chamber 40, a little above the 
point of connection. This chamber is sur 
mounted by a cylindrical air-trap 41, usually 
formed of glass, and provided at its upper 
end with an outlet 42, communicating with a 
pressure-gage 43. Entering the chamber 40, 
between the air trap and the bottom of said 
chamber, is a passage 44, formed by a short 
85 
9 O 
95 
I do 
I O 5 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
536,508 
() 
tube which is coupled to a neck 45, 
ing horizontally from the side of the cham 
ber. Within the latter is a ball-valve 46, con 
sisting of a hollow sphere of rubber, or other 
suitable material, having a specific gravity 
which enables it to float upon the liquid pass 
ing through the filtration-apparatus. This 
valve seats in the bottom of the chamber 40, 
and closes the entrance to the elbow-tube 38. 
This ball-valve, which is seated by the fall of 
the liquid in the chamber 41 is kept seated 
by the pressure of the liquid in the pipe 44. 
It may be unseated by a displacing-stem 47, 
lying in a hollow nipple 48, and operated by 
means of a knob 49. When said ball-valve 
is displaced from its seat its buoyancy will 
enable it to rise, if the chamber 40 is filled 
with fluid, and even ascond to the upper part 
of the air-trap 41, or as high as the fiuid level 
may rise. The air-trap is maintained in a 
vertical position by means of a bracket 50, 
rising from the end-frame 1. 
Coupled to the hollow journal 6 is a short, 
tubular section 51, communicating with an 
upwardly and downwardly extending branch 
52. Upon the former is mounted a cylindri 
cal glass vessel, or receiver 53, having an out 
let 54 at its top, capable of being opened and 
closed by a cock 55, and communicating with 
a pressure-gage 56. The downwardly pro 
jecting portion of the branch 52 is provided 
with a terminal 57, which is adapted to con 
nect with the end of a flexible tube, not 
shown in the drawings. The horizontally 
projecting tube connected to the neck 45, on 
the opposite side of the drum, has a similar 
provision, for a like purpose. ' 
The beer to be filtered enters through the 
passage 44, chamber 40, and hollow journal 
5, passing from the latter through the three 
way cock 35, part going to that portion of the 
central chamber 27 which lies upon one side 
of the diagonal partition 31, and the other 
part flowing through the branch pipe 33 into 
one of the chambers 26. In the one case, the 
pressure forces the beer through the single 
layer of filtering material, by which the greater 
part of the foreign matter, or impurities, is 
eliminated, and then through the remaining 
two-thirds part of said layer, which completes 
the filtration by retaining the more finely 
divided matter. In the other case the beer 
is forced through the two-thirds part and then 
through the one-third part of the other filter 
ing layer. 
The process of filtration is carried on sub 
stantially as follows: The double filtration 
apparatus, above described, is so organized 
that there are two filtering layers in one drum, 
separated from each other by the diagonal 
partition 31. In the position shown in Fig. 
1 of the drawings, the liquid to be filtered 
passes through the filtering-layer from be 
neath to above, but when the drum is turned 
through one half of a revolution, the liquid 
will pass in the opposite direction, or from 
above the filtering-layers downward. All wa 
project ter contained in the drum is led off, and the 
drum is so placed that the water contained 
first fills the upper chamber 26, expelling the 
air by means of the outlet 28, and cock 30, 
the lower chamber after it is inverted by a 
half revolution of the drum being freed from 
air by filling the same with water and letting 
the air escape through faucet 30. The beer 
is then admitted to the upper chamber 26, 
expelling any air that remains by way of the 
outlet 28, the water and air that may remain 
in the filtering material moving in advance 
of the beer until the latter is seen to be pure. 
The drum is then turned one-half a revolu 
tion, whereby the beer is caused to rise and 
press upward through the filtering-material 
until the remaining air is expelled from the 
other chamber 26, through the outlet 28. As 
soon as the beer is seen to be pure in the in 
spection-glass 29, the cock 30 is closed and 
the drum is again revolved through half of a 
revolution and clamped by means of the 
brake-screws. The filtration then proceeds 
from above the filtering-layers downward. 
As the first flow of beer enters the passage 
44, the displacing stem 47 is drawn out, to 
permit the ball-valve 46 to seat and close the 
entrance to the hollow journal 5. The beer 
then fills the air-trap 41, the outlet 42 being 
open, and after all the air has been expelled, 
the displacing stem 47 is pushed in, the ball 
valve is unseated and swims upward into the 
inspection-glass of the air-trap, and the beer 
flows through the hollow journal 5 into the 
drum. 
When the barrel from which the beer is 
taken is emptied, the air-trap prevents the 
entrance of air to the drum, since the ball 
valve 46 descends, with the last of the beer, 
into the chamber 40, and, the displacing-stem 
47 being drawn out, after unseating the ball, 
it drops into its seat and closes the entrance 
to the hollow journal 5 before any air has an 
opportunity to enter. When a new barrel 
is broached, the air contained in the pipe lead 
ing to the air-trap is led off in the manner 
described, and as soon as clear beer is seen 
in the inspection glass the ball-valve is again 
unseated by means of the displacing-stem 47, 
and the filtration proceeds, in the manner al 
ready described. 
When the process is to be arrested, the dis 
placing-stem is pushed inward to prevent the 
ball-valve from seating, and the air, pressing 
upon the filtered beer, drives it out of the fil 
tration-drum, thereby preventing loss by ob 
taining all the beer that enters the drum in 
the casks receiving the filtered beer. 
While I may use any suitable filtering-ma 
terial, I prefer to employ a chemically pure 
substance, consisting of the fibers of linen, 
wool, cotton, celluloid, and asbestos, which 
can be used for long periods and may be 
cleansed by steam, whereas the flannel filters, 
which have been used heretofore, especially 
where very fine impurities were to be elimi 
nated, cannot be cleansed by heat and moist 
- 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
yo 
75 
Of 
IC 
I 25 
". 
4. 
536,503 
d 
25 
35 
45 
55 
:" 
ure, by reason of the shrinkage thereby pro 
duced. 
The fine sieves lying close to the copper 
plates 17 and 19 are provided with rubber 
binding, or packings, upon their edges, as al 
ready stated, which make close joints and all 
the parts which come in contact with the beer, 
or other liquid, are covered with English tin 
and are Soldered in accordance with the most 
modern sanitary principles. 
The grossest impurities are removed by the 
filtering layer of least thickness, in one half 
the drum, and by the thicker layer in the 
other half, the process of filtering being first 
through the thin layer, on one side and then 
through the thicker, while on the other side 
it is first through the thicker and then through 
the thin layer. 
The modified form of the apparatus, shown 
in Figs. 3 and 4, differs from that described 
above in having a single layer 37 of filtering 
material, arranged substantially in the cen 
tral part of the drum, the latter being pro 
vided with but one removable cover. The 
branch pipes 33 and 34 are omitted and the 
inlet journal 5 is so formed as to communi 
cate with one of the chambers 26, on one side 
of the filtering layer, while the outlet 6 com 
municates with the other chamber, on the op 
posite side of the filtering layer. In other re 
spects the two organizations do not differ ma 
terially, and their operation is, in all essential 
respects, similar. 
The cost of filtration is small, and if ordi 
nary care is taken the filtering material can 
be used for a long period without being re 
newed. 
The apparatus can be used for filtering 
wine, cider, whisky, gelatine, water, and all 
kinds of liquors, or fluids, can be filtered by 
the apparatus described. 
Yarn-cotton, or nitro-cellulose, which here 
tofore could only be washed in distilled wa 
ter, has been successfully washed with water 
filtered by my invention and the results ob 
tained were fully equal to those secured by 
using water condensed from steam. 
To filter cider, or wine made from berries, 
all that is needed is to place more or less fil 
tering material in the apparatus. The me 
chanical clarification of wine is greatly to be 
preferred to any chemical process for a like 
purpose, since the former does not impair the 
aroma, or bouquet' of the wine, but simply 
removes foreign impurities, leaving the liquor 
unchanged. 
- 
What I claim is- 
1. The apparatus herein shown and de 
scribed, the same consisting of a revoluble 
drum containing a central chamber lying in 
the axial plane and divided by a diagonal par 
tition terminating on opposite sides of the in 
let and outlet, respectively, each of the two 
parts of the drum lying on opposite sides of 
the central chamber being provided with one 
or more layers of filtering material, a hollow 
journal forming an inlet for the beer which 
communicates with the drum upon one side 
of the central chamber, a second hollow jour 
nal forming an outlet for the filtered beer 
which communicates with the drum upon the 
other side of said chamber, a branch pipe 
from the inlet and outlet, respectively, com 
municating with spaces between the filtering 
material and the top and bottom of the drum, 
an air-trap arranged above the pipe leading 
to the hollow inlet, a buoyant ball-valve 
adapted to close the passage to said journal, 
and means for displacing said ball-valve from 
its seat, substantially as described. 
2. An apparatus for filtering beer and other 
aerated liquids, consisting of a revoluble drum 
containing two chambers provided, each with 
one or more layers of filtering material, op 
posite hollow journals which form an inlet 
and outlet and communicate with a central 
phamber lying in the axial line of the drum 
and separated by a diagonal partition into two 
parts, one communicating with the inlet and 
the other with the outlet, branch pipes con 
necting the inlet and outlet with chambers be 
tween the filtering material and the top and 
bottom of the drum, each branch having a 
three-way cock, and an air-trap communicat 
ing with the inlet and with the branch pipe 
therefrom, substantially as described. 
3. An apparatus for filtering beer and other 
aerated liquids, consisting of a revoluble drum 
containing two layers of filtering-material 
separated by a central chamber, each layer 
being divided by a sieve plate into two parts, 
one comprising about one-third and the other 
about two-thirds of the thickness, a partition 
dividing said central chamber diagonally, 
hollow journals forming an inlet and outlet 
and communicating with said chamber upon 
opposite sides of the partition, respectively, 
said journals being provided with branch 
pipes which connect the inlet and outlet with 
chambers between the layers of filtering ma 
terial and the top and bottom of the drum, 
and three-way cocks arranged at the points 
where said branch-pipes unite with the hol 
low-journals, substantially as described. 
4. An apparatus for filtering beer compris 
ing a revoluble drum containing two layers 
of filtering material, each layer divided into 
two parts by a sieve-plate and inclosed by 
sieve-plates of different fineness, one of said 
parts comprising about one-third and the 
other about two-thirds of the thickness of 
each layer, a central chamber separating the 
two layers, a partition dividing said chamber 
diagonally, hollow inlet and outlet journals 
communicating with said chamber on oppo 
site sides of the partition, respectively, said 
journals having branch pipes one communi 
cating with the central chamber on opposite 
sides of the partition, and cocks arranged at 
the points where said branch pipes enter the 
hollow journals, substantially as described. 
5. A filtering apparatus for filtering beer 
and other aerated liquids, consisting of a drum 
containing one or more layers of filtering ma 
75 
90 
OO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
- 
536,508 
5 
said journal below the trap, and a displacing 
stem to unseat said valve, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand and affixed my seal in presence of 15 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILHELM AIBACH. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK H. MASON, 
THEODOR WILHELM. 
terial, hollow journals forming an inlet and 
outlet to said drum, and communicating with 
chambers between the filtering material and 
the top and bottom of the drum, respectively, 
5 said top and bottom being provided with out 
lets having inspection-glasses and cocks, an 
air-trap arranged above the pipe leading to 
the inlet journal and provided at its top with 
a three-way cock and pressure-gage, a buoy 
Io antball-valve adapted to close the passage to 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536603.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 536,603, 
O, S, CONKLIN. 
SIGNAL LAMP. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 2, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 536,603, 
O. S. CONKLIN, 
SIGNAL LAMP. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 2, 1895. 
 
  
sists. 
sa 
 
Willnesses. 
- 
Inventor: 
(2-4, 6-4. 
- 
% A. azry 
e-2-5 M3-2422/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ORANGE s. CONKLIN, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
SIGNAL-LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,608, dated April 2, 1895. 
Application filed September 14, 1894, Serial No. 522,973, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ORANGES. CoNKLIN, of 
Jersey City, Hudson county, New Jersey, have 
invented an Improved Signal-Lamp, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to a railway signal 
lamp embodying various features of improve 
ment, such as an improved air supply, anim 
proved top, and an improved reflector, by 
Which the rear light may be put into or out 
Of action. 
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is 
a Vertical section of my improved lamp on line 
1, 1, Fig. 6. Fig. 2 is a similar section online 
2, 2, Fig. 6; Fig. 3, a rear view of the reflector; 
Fig. 4, a plan, showing the reflector connected 
to the back light: Fig. 5, a vertical central 
Section through a modification of the lamp 
top; Fig. 6, a horizontal section of the lamp, 
On line 6, 6, Fig. 1, and Fig. 7, a similar sec 
tion on line 7, 7, Fig. 1. 
The letter Cl, represents the body of a sig 
nal lamp made of suitable form and designed 
for any of the various uses to which railway 
lamps are put. Above the bottom a', of the 
lamp, I arrange a false bottoma, upon which 
the oil reservoirb, is supported. Between the 
bottoms a , a, there is formed an air chamber 
c, which is supplied with fresh air through a 
perforation or perforations a, of bottom a.?. 
This perforation may, if desired, be protected 
and Subdivided by a series of spaced parallel 
wires a, as shown in Fig. 1. Above the per 
forations a, I secure to the false bottoma, a 
depending shield or deflector m, beneath 
which a narrow air passage is formed. This 
passage connects with the larger end sections 
of the air chamber c, the object of the deflec 
tor being, to break the direct current of air 
and throw it sidewise, so that flickering will 
be prevented. Into the enlarged end sections 
of the chamber c, enter the lower ends of air 
delivery tubes c', that are adapted to feed 
fresh air from the chamber c, to the flame. 
I employ two inverted Ushaped air tubesc', 
that connect at both their ends with the cham 
ber c (Fig. 2), and which are placed with their 
upright shanks within the corners of the 
lamp (Fig. 6). The perforations c, of the 
tubes care bored at such an angle, as to face 
outwardly and to conduct the air, not directly 
to the flame, but toward the sides of the lamp, 
as indicated by the arrows in Fig. 6. In this 
way, the flame is supplied with air from all 
sides, and at the same time flickering is pre 
vented. I have found that by this construc 
tion of air supply, the lamp is kept perfectly 
cool for an indefinite period of time, and thus 
a very desirable object is attained. 
The side walls of the deflector m, are per 
forated, so that a current of fresh air circu 
lates through the chamber formed by said de 
flector and the false bottom a. In this way 
the oil reservoir b, is cooled and overheating 
of the oil is prevented. 
d, is the front lens or semaphore, and e, the 
back lens which is secured within the center 
of the annular frame e' and directly opposite 
the lens d. To the inner side of this frame 
is connected a reflector f, for increasing the 
volume of light emitted through the sema 
phored. This reflector is so constructed, that 
the back light may by it, be shut off or ex 
posed, and thus the lamp may be readily con 
verted from a single light lamp, into a double 
light lamp. To effect this result the reflector 
f, is provided with a small central perforation 
f', that forms the mouth of a rearwardly ex 
tending flaring tube f*. This tube carries at 
its free end a head f, adapted to engage a 
pair of converging rails e, connected to the 
back of lens frame e', at the sides of lense, 
(Figs. 2 and 4.) To attach the reflector to the 
lamp, its head f, is slipped downward be 
tween the rails e, while a reverse motion will 
disconnect the reflector, as will be readily un 
derstood. The tube f, is provided with a 
transverse slit f, adapted for the passage of 
a lid or shutter f, pivoted to an arm f, of 
the tube. The openingf, and tubef, are in 
line with the lense, and thus when the lid is 
swung across the tube, it will shut off the light 
from the lens and extinguish the back light, 
but when the lid is swung up to clear the 
tube, the light is free to pass to the lens, so 
that the back light will show. In this way 
the backlight can be quickly turned on or off. 
The top of the lamp is composed of an outer 
cylindrical shell g, and an inner shorter coni 
cal shell g', connected to a joint corrugated 
roof g, so as to leave an air outlet below the 
roof. The lamp body is provided with the up 
wardly projecting short conical tube a, that 
flares toward its upper end. This tube enters 
O 
- 20 
25 
35 
O 
45 
So 
5 5 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
co 
 
2 
586,608 
O 
the mouth of the conical tube g, (Fig. 1) which the enlarged end sections of the air chamber 
and doliver the air into the body of the lamp, 
flares toward its lower end and forms a tight 
substantially as specified. 
joint with the tube a. The tubes a, g, jointly 
2. The combination in a signal lamp, of a 
constitute a central exit flue for the hot gases 
front lens with a back lens placed in align 
and products of combustion. These gases 
ment there with, a burner between the lenses, 
pass through the open roof a., of the lamp 
a perforated reflector between the burner and 
body, and thence through the tubes a, g, and 
the back lens, a slitted conical tube project 
out beneath the roof g. The outer cylinder 
ing rearwardly from the reflector, and a shut 
g, is perforated at its lower end as at g, for 
ter pivoted to said tube and adapted to engage 
the admission of fresh air, which is drawn up 
the slit, substantially as specified. 
into the annular space g, and thence out be 
3. The combination in a signal lamp, of a 
neath the roof g. The current of cool air is 
back light with a retaining frame, a pair of 
induced by the flow of the heated gases, and 
rails secured thereto, a perforated reflector, a 
Will serve to increase the draft and also to 
tube secured thereto, a head secured to the 
cool the lantern top. 
tube and adapted to engage the rails, and with 
In Fig. 5, the outer cylinderg, is connected 
a shutter adapted to be projected across the 
to the roof g, by an open lap joint g., by 
tube, substantially as specified. 
which any possibility of a back draft is 
4. The combination in a signal lamp, of a 
avoided. It will be seen that my improved 
conical inner tube g', with a roof having an 
lamp is supplied with an abundant quantity 
inwardly and upwardly curled lower edge, a 
- of fresh air which furnishes oxygen for a per 
conical tube a, that enters the tube g', and a 
fect combustion. Thus the wick will not car 
perforated outer tube having an outwardly 
bonize and the lamp will remain cool without 
and downwardly curled upper edge, thatforms 
regard to the period of time during which it 
an open lap joint with the roof, substantially 
has remained lighted. 
as specified. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination in a signal lamp, of a 
ORANGE. S. CONKLIN. 
perforated bottom with an upper false bottom 
to form an air chamber, a deflector within said 
chamber above the perforations, and with up 
wardly extending perforated tubes that enter 
F. W. BRIESEN, 
F. W.M. DRESSEL. 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 
45 
5 c 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536703.txt	as: 
(No Model.) 
T. L. REGE STER. 
AUTOMATIC WINDMI REGULATOR, 
 
No. 536,703. 
Patented Apr. 2, 1895. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS LYLE REGESTER, OF STERLING, ILLINOIS. 
AUTOMATIC WiNDMILL-REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,703, dated April 2, 1895. 
Application filed March 28, 1894, serial No. 505,405. (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS LYLE REGES 
TER, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Sterling, in the county of Whiteside and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Automatic Windmill 
Regulators; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters and fig 
ures of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
My invention has reference to improve 
ments in automatic windmill regulators, and 
pertains to that class of regulators in which 
the vertical movements of the pump-rod are 
utilized to draw the wind-wheel out of the 
wind, at and during such periods as it is de 
sired to suspend the operation of the wheel. 
The engagement of the pump-rod with the 
mechanism for withdrawing the wheel, as 
aforesaid, is set in motion by the ascent of the 
usual float in the water tank; but, as the op 
eration of the float is well known, I do not 
deemit necessary to show or describe the same 
in this application, but will confine the de 
scription hereinto those features which Iclaim 
to be new, together with their relation to, and 
co-operation with other Well known parts, so 
as to render intelligible the construction, ap 
plication, and operation, of my invention. 
In the drawings, Figurel is a side elevation 
of the frame or metallic box A, containing the 
mechanism involved in my invention. Fig. 
2 is an inside view of the side B with a de 
taining pawl, and its actuating coiled spring 
connected there with. Fig. 3 is a side view of 
the inside of side C of box A, being the side 
farthest from the beholder in Fig. 1, showing 
all of the parts attached to the inner surface 
of said side C. Fig. 4 is a view of the lever 
operated by the pump-rod, as aforesaid, and 
is shown removed from its position in Fig. 3, 
so as not to conceal the underlying parts in 
the latter figure, and Fig. 5 is an elevation of 
the interior of the box with the outer portion 
of the side B removed, and the side sectioned 
to show the relative arrangement of the parts, 
and also showing the connection with a float 
in the water trough. 
Similar letters and numerals refer to similar 
parts throughout the several views. 
1-1 are simply prominences formed on side 
C to enter corresponding recesses in the rim 
of side B, to lock the two sides from lateral 
movement. 
Referring to Fig. 1, D is a vertical notched 
baf passed through box A, and suspended 
from the ordinary wire, which, through its 
connection with the wind wheel, when dra Wn 
downward, draws said wheel out of the wind. 
E is the actuating lever aforesaid, full 
crumed in box A and extending past the face 
of the usual pump-rod, and is raised, when 
desired, by engaging the ledge or lug formed 
on said pump-rod below lever E. As the en 
gagement of the pump-rod with the lever is 
of the ordinary construction aid forms no 
part of my invention, I have not shown it in 
the drawings. The opposite end of lever E is 
projected within the box A, and the trunnions 
E' of said lever seated in the openings 2-2, 
formed, respectively, in the sides B and C. 
It will be noticed that the edge 3 of side B 
(Fig.2) is against the edge 3 of plate C (Fig. 
3), when in position. 
A pawl F. (Fig. 4) is pivotally attached to 
the lower side of the inner end of lever E, 
and provided with a weighted arm G to se 
cure the engagement of said pawl with the 
notched draw rod D just before, and when 
the long end of said lever is raised by the 
pump-rod, as aforesaid. 
Referring to Fig. 2, H is a pawl pivoted in 
side B, and adapted at its lower end to en 
gage the notches on bar D alternately with 
the engagement of pawl F, and to hold bar D 
from rising when lever E. drops at its long 
end to re-engage bar D at a higher point. 
Pawl. H is held adjustably in engagement 
with rod D by the coiled spring J seated in 
said side B. 
The conformation of the notches 4 of bar D 
is such that they can pass downward, by the 
force of pawl F, between pawl II and the edge 
of side B, by forcing said pawl in Ward. 
K (Fig. 3) is a movable stop, provided with 
a slot 5 placed against the side C, and held by 
a short stud 6 formed on said side, and pro 
jected within said slot, and also held between 
ways formed by the stud 7 and the raised 
wall of the opening 2. The engaging end 8 
) 
... 
95 
CO 
TC) 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
536,703 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
of stop Kis formed with a beveled projection, 
which, when the wind-wheel is running, is 
thrown, as hereinafter described, over a small 
lug 9 formed on the inner end of lever E at 
the side thereof next to the plate C, and in 
that position holds the long end of said lever 
up at its highest elevation so that the recur 
ring movements of the pump-rod do no longer 
engage it. 
I, is a trip, operated by the arm M, the latter 
being suitably connected to the wire operated 
by the float. The arm M is pivoted on the 
plate or side Cat its upper end on a suitable 
pin 17, formed on said plate. A lug 10 is 
formed on the extremity of the trip L., and 
engaged by the arm M when the latter is 
drawn from the rod D by the float wire, the 
effect being to draw the trip L. from said rod 
D, and the angle 15 of the trip L engaging a 
lug 11 formed on the pawl H, and the upright 
portion of trip L engaging a lug 16 on the 
lower end of pawl F next to plate C draws 
both of said pawls out of engagement with 
the rod D. 
A vertical key N, working loosely at its up 
per end in the bracket O attached to the side 
C, is adapted, when the trip L is thus with 
drawn, to drop down in front of the recess 12, 
formed on the upper side of trip L. In this 
position both pawls F and Hare withdrawn 
from engagement with the notches 4 in rod 
D, and permit the rod D to rise, and the wind 
wheel to swing into the wind. 
A straight heavy wire P passed through a 
projection 13 formed on the end of bracket 
O, and inserted at its upper end in stop K 
and at its lower end in trip L when the trip 
L is thrown back as aforesaid by the arm M, 
throws and holds the stop K forward, as afore 
said, above the lug 9 on lever E at the next 
upward movement of lever E. 
The arm M is thrown against the lug 10 and 
Withdraws the trip L, as aforesaid, by means 
of a short bell-crank lever attached to the 
float at its long end, and to the lower end of 
said arm Mat its short end, so that when the 
Water in the tank has fallen, the arm M, by 
engagement with lug 10, withdraws the trip 
L and the pawls F and H, and releases the 
rod D, as aforesaid. 
When the water in the tank rises to a cer 
tain altitude, the float wire attached as afore 
said to the lower end of the arm M suspends 
its draft, and permits the counterpoise weight 
ed lever S to throw arm M toward the rod D, 
and a lateral projection R on the end of said 
arm, which projects over the key N, engages 
the under side of a lug 14 formed on said key, 
and raises said key out of engagement with 
recess 12 of trip L, which releases pawls H 
and F, and permits said pawls to re-engage 
the rod D, the wire P throwing stop K back 
from lug 9 on lever E, thus permitting the 
long end of lever E to drop, so as to be en 
gaged and lifted by the pump-rod, as afore 
said, and begin the process of forcing the rod 
D down, and drawing the wind-wheel out of 
engagement with the wind. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
Starting with the water tank empty, the float 
wire T, more than counter-acting the counter 
poise S, will have drawn the arm M to the 
limit of its out stroke, in which position said 
arm having engaged the lug 10 will have 
drawn trip L outward, and by the engage 
ment of said trip with lug 11 on pawl H, and 
the lug 16 on pawl F, will have drawn said 
pawls out of engagement with rod D, and the 
latter, therefore, being at the limit of its up 
stroke, the wind-wheel will be in the wind, 
and the pump operating to fill the tank. 
Meanwhile key N, having engaged recess 12 
of trip L, the parts will be held for the time 
permanently in the position just described. 
Also the last preceding stroke of the pump 
rod having thrown the long end of lever Eup, 
and its short end down, the end 8 of stop IX 
will be over the lug 9 on the short end of le 
ver E, and hold the long end of the lever so 
high that the lug on the pump-rod, at the 
limit of its up stroke, will only reach the lower 
- side of said lever, and not actuate the latter. 
When the water shall have risen in the tank 
as high as it is desired, the float wire T will 
be slacked, and no longer resist the influence 
of counterpoise S, when the weight of the lat 
ter will throw arm M toward rod D, thereby 
releasing trip L, which will be thrown toward 
rod D by the reaction of lug 11 of pawl H, 
and spring J will throw pawl Hinto engage 
ment with rod D. At the same time projec 
tion R of the arm M, lifting on lug 14 of key 
N, raises the latter out of engagement with 
recess 12 of trip L, so as to permit said trip to 
move toward rod D, as aforesaid. The re 
taining pressure of the upright portion of 
trip L on lug 16 of pawl F being ended, the 
weight G will throw pawl F into engagement 
with notches 4 on rod D. At this point 
both pawls F and H, being in engagement 
with rod D, the succeeding vertical move 
ments of the pump-rod, engaging the long 
end of lever E, will proceed to gradually 
work the rod D downward. When the latter 
has been forced down so far that the pawl 
F has reached the upper recess 4 of rod D, 
the wind-wheel will have been drawn out of 
the wind, and the movement of the entire 
mechanism is suspended, and nothing further 
is done until the lowering of the water in the 
water tank draws the arm M against lug 10 
of trip L, and thereby withdraws pawls Fand 
H from the recesses 4 of rod D, and permits 
the wind-wheel to draw said rod up and again 
begin the operation of refilling said tank. 
The purpose of the key N working in con 
junction with the trip 
I, is to prevent the 
pawls F and H from being let into the re 
cesses 4 of the rod D, in any degree, until the 
float has risen sufficiently tolet them into full 
engagement with recesses 4. Without the 
locking effect of the key N, the gradual rising 
75 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
I 30 
536,703 
35 
of the float would permit said pawls to gradu 
ally engage recesses 4, and the effect would be 
to either break the end off the pawls or to tear 
the edges off of said recesses. 
In the present construction, the relation of 
the arm M to lug 14 on the key N is such that, 
when the arm M is swung toward rod D far 
enough to raise key N out of engagement 
With recess 12, said arm has moved inward 
from lug 10, and when the key N is released 
there is space enough between lug 10 and the 
arm M to permit trip L to move far enough 
toward rod D to allow an instantaneous and 
complete engagement of both of the pawls F with stud 14, and adapted to engage recess 12 45 
and H with the recesses 4 of rod D. 
It will be noticed that all of the working 
mechanism is inclosed in and protected by 
the box A, and therefore its operation not 
rendered uncertain by the accumulation of 
ice or snow during the winter season. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Jetters Patent of the United 
States, is 
1. The combination of a vertical notched 
bar D, suitably connected to the withdrawing 
mechanism of a wind-wheel; and the leverE, 
adapted to be actuated by the pump-rod, a 
weighted pawl connected with the inner end 
thereof to engage said rod D, and provided 
with a lug 16; a coincidently acting pawl H 
provided with lug 11; and trip L., adapted to 
coincidently engage lugs 16 and 11, and re 
tain the pawls F and H from engagement with 
rod D; substantially as shown, and for the 
purpose described. 
2. The combination of a vertically moving 
recessed bar D, suitably connected to the 
withdrawing mechanism of a wind-wheel;le 
ver E provided with pivoted pawl F, adapted 
to normally engage rod D; pawl H also 
adapted normally to engage rodD; trip L pro 
vided with recess 12, and adapted to coinci 
dently engage both of said pawls; arm M 
provided with extension R; key N provided 
in the withdrawal of said trip; and means 
substantially as shown for actuating said 
arm M; for the purpose described. 
3. In combination with a vertically acting 
recessed rod D, leverE provided with pivoted 
pawl F and lug 16, and adapted to engage rod 
D; reciprocating stop K; a spring Padapted 
to throw stop Kabove said lug 16, and thereby 
suspend the operation of lever E; substan 
tially as shown, and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS LYLE REGESTER. 
55 
Witnesses: 
MARTHA. W. BARRETT, 
JOHN G, MANAHAN. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536803.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 536,803, 
S. HARRIS, 
CONTACT FINGER FOR ELECTRIC CONTROLLERS, 
Patented Apr. 2, 1895. 
I 
WITWESSES 
IWWEWTOR 
sea 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL HARRIS, OF CLEVELAND, OFHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE STEEL MOTOR 
: 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
t 
contAct-fing ER FOR ELECTRIC CONTRO LERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,808, dated April 2, 1895. 
Application filed December 5, 1894, Serial No. 530,889, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL HARRIS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Contact-Fingers for 
Electric Controllers; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the contact fingers of electric controllers. Its 
object is to increase the efficiency and adapt 
ability of the apparatus; and it consists in 
the novel construction, arrangement and com 
bination of the parts to effect such object, as 
hereinafter fully described and specifically 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings Figurel represents in side 
view a contact finger embodying my inven 
tion, shown in engagement with one of the 
connecting disks of the roller of a street car 
controller. Fig. 2 represents the same in plan 
view. 
A represents the connecting disk of insu 
lating material; a, the contact strip embedded 
in its periphery. 
B is an insulating disk interposed between 
each of the disks A, parts of two of which 
are shown in Fig. 2. 
C is the contact finger, composed of the 
shoe or bearing piece cattached to an endless 
spring c, preferably of oval or elliptic shape 
and of flat metal, which is attached at its op 
posite side to the carrying piece c, whereby 
the finger is secured to the bar D', in position 
to bear against the disk A, so as to effect the 
electrical connection of the circuit in the 
usual way when the roller is appropriately 
turned by its handle. 
It is well understood that the bearing be 
tween the bearing surface of the finger and 
the disk must be as complete as possible in 
order to decrease the resistance and avoid 
the heating of the roller and the inevitable 
burning of the contacts or other parts. For 
this reason the contact fingers are usually 
provided with springs to insure their firm con 
tact with the disk, and various forms of 
coiled and flat springs arranged in various 
ways have been adopted in the effort to se 
cure this very desirable end. There is, how 
ever, a tendency to an unequal Wear on the 
shoe or eontact piece of the finger, which 
renders it essential to the best results that it 
should have practically universal play, yet a 
rigidity greater than could be obtained by 
any joint, which would also introduce resist 
ance and be objectionable on that account. 
I accomplish the results aimed at by the 
construction above described, as the elliptical 
spring yields readily to pressure in any direc 
tion and also transversely, so that the shoe c 
has sufficient freedom of motion both later 
ally and longitudinally and yet is kept to a 
firm bearing not only throughout its length 
but also throughout its width. This result 
cannot be obtained with coiled or flat springs, 
as the latter do not insure perfect lengthwise 
contact of the shoe, and neither affords per 
fect compensation for lateral wear. 
The finger is attached to bar D'by means 
of a connecting piece D to which it is secured 
by screws e e, and in case of burning or 
greater wearing of the shoe cat one end than 
the other, the entire finger may be reversed 
by removing the screws e e and replacing the 
finger inverted, so that thereby the life of the 
finger may be prolonged. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A contact finger for electric controllers 
having the contact shoe rigidly affixed to an 
endless spring which is free to flex in any di 
rection and is rigidly affixed to a carrying 
piece, substantially as described. 
2. A controller finger for electric controllers 
having the contact shoe rigidly affixed to an 
endless spring of flat metal which is free to 
flex in any direction and is rigidly affixed to 
a carrying piece, Substantially as described. 
3. A contact finger for electric controllers 
having the contact shoe rigidly affixed to an 
endless elliptical spring which is free to flex 
in any direction and to which is rigidly af. 
fixed a carrying piece, Substantially as de 
Scribed. 
4. A controller finger for electric controllers 
having the contact-shoe rigidly affixed to an 
endless elliptical spring of flat metal which is 
free to flex in any direction and to which is 
rigidly affixed a carrying-piece, substantially 
as described. 
o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
75 
95 
CO 
2 
526,803 
IO 
5. A contact finger for electric controllers 
having the contact-shoe rigidly affixed to the 
long side of an elliptical spring which is free 
to flex in any direction and whose free por 
tions are without joints, and to the opposite 
side of which spring is rigidly affixed a carry 
ing piece, substantially as described. 
6. A contact finger for electric controllers 
having the contact-shoe rigidly affixed to the 
long side of a flat elliptical spring which is 
free to flex in any direction and whose free 
portions are without joints, and to the oppo 
site side of which spring is rigidly affixed a 
carrying piece, substantially as described. 
7. A reversible contact finger for electric 
controllers having the contact-shoe rigidly 
affixed to an endless spring to which is rig 
idly affixed a reversible carrying piece, sub 
stantially as described. 
8. A reversible contact-finger for electric 
controllers having the contact shoe rigidly 
affixed to an endless spring of flat metal to 
the opposite side of which is rigidly affixed a 
reversible contact-piece, substantially as de 
scribed. 
9. In a contact-finger for electric controllers 
the combination of the reversible carrying 
piece having similar sides, the flat elliptical 
spring rigidly affixed thereto by one of its 
long sides and having its free portions with 
out joints, and the contact-shoe rigidly affixed 
to the opposite side of the spring and having 
both ends alike, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereto affix my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
SAMUEL IIARRIS. 
Witnesses: 
P. PRENTISs, . 
ROLAND RIDER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US536903.txt	(No Model.) 
- G. M. WEEKS.. 
COVER OR STOPPER FOR MILK CANs, &c, 
No. 536,903, 
Patented Apr. 2, 1895. 
Seas a S 
 
 
  
 
 
A. 
A. 
 
SAS |F 
M 
S 
Y 
V 
S 
y 
Aslavassava V 
A. 
N Y 
the NORRIS PEERS Co. PHOTo-lthio., washingtoN, b. c. 
NVENTOR; 
Grenvicte Wheeks 
4.5 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GREN VILLE M. WEEKs, OF NEW ARK, N E W J E R SEY. 
COVER OR STOPPER FOR MILK-CANS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 536,903, dated April 2, 1895. 
Application filed July 19, 1894. Serial No. 517,998, (No model.) 
to oil, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GREN VILLEM. WEEKs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
ark, in the county of Essex and State of New 
5 Jersey, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Covers or Stoppers for Milk 
Cans and other Wessels, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
Io stopper for vessels which is adapted to be pro 
vided with a refrigerator or cooling source, 
and to have the heat rapidly driven away from 
proximity of the cooling source. 
The invention consists in the novel features 
I5 of construction setforthin the following speci 
fication and claim, and illustrated in the ac 
Companying drawing. 
The drawing shows a sectional elevation of 
the cover or stopper. 
20. The covercomprises the cover or flange por 
tion 1 adapted to close the vessel, and said 
cover portionis provided with a cooling cham 
ber 2 carried by the cover portion 1 and adapt 
ed to receive ice or suitable cooling or refrig 
25 erating medium or mixture. The cover por 
tion has a flange 3. 
The cover portion, by being provided with 
an access opening for the cooling chamber will 
allow the latter to be properly charged or 
3o cleaned, and by providing a suitable stopper 
or cover 5 for said access opening the contents 
of chamber 2 will be properly inclosed or pro 
tected. The cover 5 is shown with a suitable 
bail or handle 6, and with a vent 7 leading to 
35 the cooling chamber. By suitably jointing or 
connecting the cover or stopper 5 at 8 to the 
- 
cover portion 1 and providing a catch or lock 
9, the cover 5 can be opened and closed and 
locked as desired, and will be prevented from 
becoming detached or lost. 
The flange or side 3 of the stopper is readily 
made to sit about the neck of a milk can or 
vessel. 
The cooling chamber 2, when made to con 
tact centrally with the upper portion of the 45 
contents of the vessel to which the cover is ap 
plied, will even when of limited capacity ex 
ert an efficient cooling influence. 
The device can be applied not only to milk 
cans, but elsewhere, as to water coolers, or for 
cooling other beverages or substances. 
In addition to vent 7, a vent-tube 15 having 
orifices 16 is provided. When the cooling 
chamber 2 is thoroughly cooled, or the heat 
driven out therefrom through vents 7 and 15, 55 
the vent 7 may be plugged or closed. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
A stopper for a vessel, consisting of a cover 
portion and a cooling chamber carried by the 
cover portion and made to extend into the ves 
sel, said cover portion being provided with a 
vent, and said cooling chamber being provided 
with a cover and a vent-tube, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
65 
st 
GREN WILLE M. WEEKS, 
Witnesses: 
WM. C. HAUFF, 
E. F. KASTENHUBER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537003.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
s 
FREDERICK T. BURGI, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO FREDERICK 
A. LORENZ, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
METHOD OF MANU FACTURNG RELEF GEO GRAPHICAL MAPS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 537,003, dated April 9, 1895. 
Application filed September 25, 1893, Renewed December 3, 1894, Serial No. 530,742, (No specimens.) 
Io practice the invention. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK T. BURGI, 
of Rochester, in the county of Monroe and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in the Method of 
Manufacturing Relief Geographical Maps; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
which will enable those skilled in the art to 
My invention. has for its object to provide 
a new method of manufacturing geographical 
maps or globes in relief, showing the eleva 
tions and depressions of the earth's surface, 
I5 though Well adapted, as will be understood, 
to the manufacture of other molded objects 
of irregular contour, and it consists in certain 
improvements in construction, as will be here 
inafter fully specified and the novel features 
pointed out particularly in the claims at the 
end of this specification. 
In carrying out my invention I first model 
in some suitable material, preferably wax or 
other plastic composition, an accurate repre 
25 sentation or topographical model for the map 
to be produced, being a relief map itself, or 
this may be accomplished by building up, 
upon a suitably printed map, the various ele 
vated portions of the earth's surface indicat 
3o ing accurately the various topographical fea 
tures of the country or section, and from this 
map or pattern I produce by casting or other 
wise a mold or female die, preferably of plas 
ter of paris, from which, if desired, I produce, 
35 by casting a suitable male die. I then take 
a sheetofordinary printing paper, upon which 
is printed or otherwise marked a correct flat 
map, preferably suitably colored, of the coun 
try of which a relief map is desired, and soak 
said paper in a Solution prepared substan 
tially as follows, for about fifteen or eighteen 
hours, sufficiently to thoroughly impregnate 
the paper, but insufficiently to cause its dis 
integration. This solution is prepared as foll 
45 lows:--To five gallons of water I add one-half 
pound of alum, one spoonful of vinegar, and 
One spoonful of granulated white soap, boil 
this solution for about one-half hour and then 
allow it to cool. The vinegar may be omitted 
5o from this solution, but I prefer to employ it. 
40 
After soaking the paper in this solution for 
from fifteen to eighteen hours, as before men 
tioned, I remove it therefrom and allow it to 
drain until about half dry. Then, while damp 
it is placed over the female die or mold and 55 
the parts printed on the map caused to accu 
rately register with the corresponding parts 
of the mold, the printed side being next the 
mold. I then spread over the back of the 
soaked sheet or map, which is uppermost, a 6p 
plastic compound capable of setting or becom 
ing hard, prepared substantially as follows:- 
I take one pound of whiting, two pounds of 
plaster of paris, one-fourth pound of flour, 
one-fourth ounce of pulverized glue, mix these 65 
in one-half gallon of water, and boil for about 
one-half hour, which will insure the thorough 
dissolving of the glue and the thorough mix 
ing of the ingredients. 
This compound is 
then placed over the rear side of the map, 7o 
while over the mold or die, to the depth of 
about one-fourth of an inch and may be 
pressed down by hand, causing the paper and 
composition to be pressed into and fill the 
deepest parts of the mold, (that is, the parts 75. 
constituting the highest portions of the com 
plete map) after which the compound is 
worked with the fingers until it is of a uni 
form thickness on the paper. The map is then 
allowed to dry in the mold and is finally re: 8o 
moved, attached to a suitable frame or back 
ing, appropriately colored if desired, and War 
nished. . 
Instead of pressing the composition on the 
rear of the map by hand the male die or mold 85 
may be employed instead, and a stop for lim 
iting the approach of the dies, which will in 
sure uniformity in thickness of the backing 
of plastic material, but if no stops were em 
ployed the limited quantity of material used go 
would cause this, if its escape at the sides 
were prevented, and the map may then be 
dried while between the mold-sections, but 
this operation performed in this way will, of 
course, require a longer time for drying. 
The solution in which the paper is soaked 
enables the paper to be stretched sufficiently 
to fill the interstices of the mold or die with 
out tearing, and the employment of soap in 
the solution enables it to slide and dra W Ioo 
95 
 
3. 
537,003 
The map thus produced has as a support 4o 
results are produced by this method of pro 
cedure. 
for the printed paper only a thin shell of 
composition that is not rigid enough to be 
readily fractured by a blow, but is light and 
sufficiently rigid for all practical purposes, 
and is made in such a way that all the parts 
of the map in high relief are faithfully repro 
duced. 
45 
I claim as my invention 
1. The herein described method of making 
relief maps consisting in forming a mold or 5o 
die exhibiting the topographical features of 
the country, then placing over this a map 
suitably printed and rendered pliable by Soak 
ing in a Solution of alum and Soap, causing 
the parts of the map to register with those in 55 
the mold, then covering the back of the paper 
inap with a plastic composition capable of 
hardening, pressing the composition and map 
into the mold, and drying it, as set forth. 
relief maps consisting in forming a mold or 
die exhibiting the topographical features of 
the country, then placing over this a map 
suitably printed and rendered pliable, caus 
ing the parts of the map to register with those 
in the mold, then covering the back of the 
map with a plastic composition composed of 
whiting, plaster of paris, flour and glue, press 
ing the map and composition in the mold, and 
drying the whole, as set forth. 
2. The herein described method of making 6o 
65 
FREDERICK T. BURGI. 
Witnesses: 
FRED F. CHURCH, 
GRACE A. RODA. 
easily over the projections without tearing, 
though, of course, this object could be accom 
plished by applying oil or some similar mate 
rial to the face of the die or mold, in which 
event, however, it would be more difficult to 
varnish or paint the surface of the map when 
completed. 
By proceeding in the manner described, re 
lief maps may be easily and comparatively 
cheaply made, without the necessity hereto 
fore existing, of first forming the relief map 
in paper, papier mach, or similar material, 
and then painting or printing the names of 
the rivers, lakes, cities, &c., upon it, as these 
are of course indicated upon the printed map, 
which is formed into the topographical map. 
While I prefer to employ the solution and 
the plastic composition herein described, as I 
have found them well adapted for the pur 
pose and capable of producing excellent re 
sults, I do not wish to be confined to exactly 
the proportions or ingredients described, as 
they could be modified to some extent with 
out departing from the spirit of my invention; 
as for instance, other plastic materials than 
whiting and plaster of paris, and other bind 
ing materials than flour and glue could be 
used, but, as stated, I prefer these as I have 
used them with success, and they are com 
paratively inexpensive. 
When employing the male and female dies 
in producing maps, I prefer to place a piece 
of tissue or similar thin paper over the plastic 
composition to prevent its adhering to the 
male die and also to submit the map and plas 
tic composition to pressure between the dies 
for about five hours, as I find that the best 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537103.txt	(No Model.) 
H. BERRY. 
CONSTRUCTION OF WALWES AND THEIR CONNECTIONS, 
No. 537,103. 
Patented Apr. 9, 1895. 
FIG.2. 
 
Y 
2 
SS 
27F 
FIG.1. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY BERRY, OF LEEDS, ENGLAND. 
CONSTRUCTION OF VALVES AND THEIR CONNECTIONs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 537,103, dated April 9, 1895. 
Application filed March 12, 1894. Serial No. 503,320, (No model.) Patented in England November 10, 1893, No. 21,416, 
55 
6 o 
7 o 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY BERRY, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing at 
Leeds, in the county of York, England, have 
invented new and useful Improvements in the 
Construction of Working-Valves and their 
Connections Applicable to Water, Steam, Air, 
or Gas, (for which I have obtained a patent 
in Great Britain No. 21,416, bearing date No 
vember 10, 1893) of which the following is a 
Specification. 
The object of this invention is to overcome 
the difficulty which has hitherto been experi 
enced in the rapid and efficient opening and 
closing of working and other valves. 
According to my invention I employ, to at 
tain this object, an auxiliary or working valve 
which communicates with a main pressure 
Valve, and is so arranged, that by the open 
ing or closing of the said auxiliary valve, the 
main pressure or outlet valve is similarly 
opened or closed. 
Figures 1 and 2 are sectional elevations of 
a hydraulic single acting working valve con 
structed according to my invention, Fig. 3 
is a plan view. Fig. 4 is a detail plan view 
of the shaft H showing the arrangement of 
the cams J, with the valves in section. 
In carrying out my said invention I dupli 
cate the valves, that is, in the one body AI 
have two main pressure valves B and B of 
which B is the exhaust, and two auxiliary 
valves C and C, of which C' is the exhaust. 
The Said valves fit loosely in their chambers 
SO as to admit of the passage of the compressed 
fluid as hereinafter explained. A passage of 
communication g is formed between the two 
main pressure valves B B underneath the 
seat of the pressure orimlet valve B to the top 
of the seat of the exhaust or outlet valve B7. 
D and E are passages of communication 
from the pressure inlet F to the pressure out 
let G and are regulated by the auxiliary valve 
C. Similar passages of communication are 
made between the main pressure exhaust 
valve B' and auxiliary exhaust valve C'. 
The auxiliary valves C and Care actuated 
by means of a shaft H having cams J and a 
hand lever Kfastened upon the said shaft H, 
and are so arranged as to be worked by the 
said lever K, the cams J, for each valve be 
ing so designed, that one valve is never open 
at the same time as the other, sufficient lap' 
or clearance being left so that when the lever 
K, stands at the center of its stroke or move 
ment, both of the said valves are closed. The 
cams Jactuate alternately the said auxiliary 
valves. 
L is the exhaust for allowing the fluid to 
escape from the machine, and M is the main 
pressure valve-box. 
The action is as follows: The compressed 
fluid passes into the main pressure valve box 
M, through the pressure inlet F and a portion 
thereof forces itself between the main pressure 
valve B and the walls of the chamber in which 
such valve works, on to the top of the said 
main pressure valve B. The pressure accumu 
lating on the top of the said valve B, forces it 
down on to its seating, and so closes it. To 
open the main pressure valve B, the auxiliary 
valve C is lifted by means of the hand lever 
K and camshaft H, so exhausting the press 
ure or water from the top of the main press 
ure valve B and prevents, so long as it is kept 
Open, any accumulation of Water thereon. 
The main pressure valve B then rises and ad 
mits pressure to the machine. At the same 
time the outlet passage G is in communica 
tion with the valve box passage N entering 
on the top side of the said valve seat. The 
same action which has been gone through 
with the valves B and C is followed out in the 
valves B and C. The pressure which is 
passing through accumulates on the top of 
the main pressure exhaust valve B and closes 
it. To open the said valve to exhaust, the 
cam shaft His moved so. as to first close the 
auxiliary pressure valve, sufficient lap 'be 
ing allowed to allow both auxiliary valves to 
remain closed. The exhaust auxiliary valve 
B' is then opened and water allowed to escape 
from the machine by the exhaust I, the main 
pressure valve B, in the meantime being 
closed. . 
w 
What I clain is- 
The combination, with the valve casing pro 
vided with valve chambers M and N; of the 
valves B and B in the respective chambers 
M and N; the valves C and C sliding in 
chambers behind the respective valves B and 
B', the valves B and B' being connected to 
9o 
95 
o 
35 
45 
50 
 
IOC 
is 
2 
537,103 
the valves C and C', respectively, bypassages provided with an operating lever and cams J To 
D above the valves and passages E below the engaging the said valves C and Cand operat 
valves, and the valve casing being further ing to raise them alternately, substantially as 
provided with the pressure inlet F above the set forth. 
5 valve B and the pressure outlet G below the 
valve B, the passage g connecting the outlet 
G with the space above the valve B, and the 
exhaust outlet L below the valve B'; and the 
shaft H journaled in the valve casing and 
JoHN E. WALSH, 
WM. HY. REED. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY BERRY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537203.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 537,203, 
000KING AND EJECTING MECHANISM FOR BREAKDOWN GUN's, 
F. A. HOLLENBECK 
Patented Apr. 9, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
ele 2  
a S. 
2 
sessesses 
2. 
2. 
- 
3. 
N NQS 
) 
5. S 
t sSSSNSNN (Nis 
f 
f 
7 
ZZ Zi 
rerure SSSN 
A? a hy, ez y f : 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK A. HOLLENBECK, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
cockING AND EJECTING MECHANISM FoR BREAKDown GUNs. 
SYRACUSE ARMS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,203, dated April 9, 1895. 
Application filed June 25, 1894, Serial No. 516,648. (Nomodal). 
20 in the following description and claims. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that, FRANKA. HoLLENBECK, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Syr 
acuse, in the county of Onondaga and State 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and 
usefulmprovementsin Breech-Loading Fire 
arms; and I do hereby declare the following. 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
Io in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention is an improvement in car 
tridge ejectors for breech loading guns and it 
consists in the novel features of construction 
I5 and combination of parts hereinafter fully 
described, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings which illustrate oneform in 
which have contemplated embodying my in 
vention, and said invention is fully disclosed 
Referring to the said drawings, Figure 1 
represents portions of the stock and barrels 
of a breech loading gun having my invention 
embodied therein. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
25 showing the breech open. Fig. 3 is a rear 
view of the barrels and the barrel lug. Fig. 
4 represents afront elevation and a side view 
of the ejector hammer. 
In the said drawings. A represents the stock 
3o portion of the gun and B the barrels. The 
extractor plate is of the usual form but is 
made in two parts C C (see Fig. 3) so that 
only one cartridge maybe ejected if only one 
has been discharged. Each part C of the 
35 ejector plate is provided with a slide or rod c 
semi-circular in cross section the said rods c 
c engaging a tubular recess in the barrel por 
"...tion of the gun. Each part C of the extractor 
plate is also provided with a guide pin' and 
4o the said guide pins are formed like the slides 
c c and engage a tubular recess in the barrel 
portion of the gun to prevent the plates CC 
from twisting. The two rods c care both en 
gaged by an extractor pin or lug D secured to 
45 the stockportion of the gun just forward of 
the barrel lug and the plates C C are posi 
tively moved out a certain distance by the 
said pin or lug D. 
- E represents one of the ejector hammers 
50 shown in detailin Fig. 4, there being one for 
- 
- 
55 
each plate C. These hammers are constructed 
preferably as shown in Fig. 4 and are provided 
with a central recessed portione, alongoneside 
of which is a weh e', the said recess terminat 
ing at the bottom in a shoulder e which forms 
one of the cocking shoulders of the gun. The 
barrel lug b is provided with a recess on each 
side of a central web b' and in each of these 
recesses is located one of the ejector hammers 
Eas shown, said hammers being pivoted in 6o 
position by a pine passing through apertures 
in the webse' of said hammers and the cena 
tral webb' of the barrellug. The outer walls 
of the barrel lug are cut away near the bot- . 
tom and the shoulderse of the ejector ham- 65 
mers are off-set to the right and left respect 
ively as shown in Fig. 3, so as to give broader 
bearing surfaces to be engaged by the cock 
ing arms. The upper end of eachejector ham 
mer is preferably narrowed. and made to en 
gage a recess or cut away portion of one of 
the slides c c as clearly shown in Figs. 1, 2 
and 3, and the front edge of each ejector ham 
mer is provided with a notch e' which is en 
gaged by a sear Fpivoted in the recessed por- 75 
tion of the barrel lug and operated by a 
spring f 
The sears FF are tripped by means of slid 
ing trip pins f'f'' passing through apertures 
in the barrel lug and projecting slightly be 
yond the front face of said lug. These pins 
are preferably provided within said recess 
with slightly enlarged heads for engaging the 
sear and also for preventing said pins from be 
coming displaced accidentally when the gun 85 
is taken apart, and said pins are of such length 
that their forward ends will engage a portion 
of the forward end of the frame as shown in 
Fig.2 and trip the sears FF when the breech 
has been opened far enough to allow a car 
tridge shell to be freely ejected without strik 
ing the stock. 
The hammers G G (only one being shown) 
have slotted portions for engaging their sup 
porting journals g and each hammer has a 
forwardly extending cocking arm g' which, 
when the parts of the gun are assembled, has 
its forward end lying just above the cocking 
shoulder e of the ejector hammer E. 
- 
go 
95 
HH represent the main springs, which en- roo 
 
2 
537,203 
d 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
gage a curved or inclined portion of the ham 
mer as shown in dotted lines so as to force the 
rear ends of the slots against the pivotal bolt 
g, while also operating to fire the hammer. 
Each of the hammers G G is provided with 
a notch g and is engaged by a suitable sear 
K which, is adapted to be tripped by a trig 
ger in the usual manner to release the ham 
mer and discharge the gun. 
Fig. 1 represents in full lines the position 
of the parts after the gun has been discharged. 
Upon opening the breech the extractor pin 
D will engage the front ends of the extractor 
slides c c and force the extractor plates C C 
backward into the position shown in full 
lines in Fig. 2. As the breech is opened the 
cocking arms g'g' will be raised by the cock 
ing shoulders of the ejector hammers and the 
main springs will exert a strong pressure 
upon the ejector hammers through the cock 
ing arms g g which pressure is resisted by 
the sears FF. The breech is opened until 
the hammers are moved almost into the cock 
ing position, as shown in Fig. 2 when the trip 
pins.ff will release the sears F F and the 
pressure of the main springs causes the ejec 
tor hammers to strike a quick blow backward 
as shown in dotted lines Fig. 2, thus throw 
ing the slides c c and extractor plates C C 
quickly backward and ejecting the shells with 
considerable force. The ejector hammers 
will be arrested by striking a portion of the 
barrels at the end of their movement and the 
hammers will be cocked by a further down 
ward mvement of the barrels when they will 
be held in cocked position by their sears. 
It is to be noted that by my improved con 
struction only the exploded shell will be 
ejected in case one shell. has been fired and 
the other has not. If one of the hammers has 
not been fired, it will remain in the position 
indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 1 being re 
tained in that position by its sear K and the 
cocking arm g will be held out of engage 
ment with the ejector hammer. It will thus 
be seen that when the breech is opened both 
shells will be moved backward slightly by the 
extractor through the intervention of the ex 
tractor pin D, but the ejector hammer for the 
extractor plate engaging the unfired shell, 
will not be operated as the cocking arm 
through which the force of the main spring 
is imparted to it to operate said ejector ham 
Imer, is held out of engagement with it by its 
sear. Hence only the empty shell will be 
ejected and the unfired shell will be returned 
to firing position when the breech is closed. 
It will be seen that the cocking arms and 
hammers have a movement longitudinally of 
the gun by reason of the slots in said ham 
mers. In assembling the parts of the gun 
the cocking arms being in their lowest posi 
tions, the cocking shouldersee of the ejector 
hammers will engage the cocking arms g'g' 
as the breech is closed, and one of said parts 
is beveled or curved so as to act as a cam and 
force said cocking arms rearwardly thus per 
mitting the cocking shoulders to pass be: 
neath and into operative position with the 
cocking arms. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a fire arm the combination with the 
barrel lug and an ejector hammer pivoted 
thereto having a shoulder upon the same, of 
the firing hammer and its cocking arm, said 
cocking arm extending above the shoulder of 
the ejector hammer and in constant engage 
ment, therewith during the operation of cock 
ing the firing hammer and ejecting the shell, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a fire arm the combination with the 
barrel lug and an ejector hammer pivoted 
thereto having a shoulder upon the same, of 
the firing hammer and its cocking arm, the 
said cocking arm extending above the said 
shoulder and in constant engagement there 
with during the operation of cocking the fir 
ing hammer, means for retaining the ejector 
hammer in its normal position when the gun 
is closed and means for releasing it before the 
completion of the movement of the barrel in 
breaking the gun, substantially as described. 
3. In a firearm the combination with the 
ejector hammer, a sear for holding said ejec 
tor hammer against operation and a trip for 
releasing said sear, of the main spring of the 
lock and connections between said main 
spring and said ejector hammer for operating 
the same, substantially as described. 
4. In a fire arm the combination with the 
firing hammer, its cocking arm and the main 
spring, of the barrel lug, an ejector hammer 
pivoted thereto having a shoulder adapted to 
engage the said cocking arm to cock the han 
mer for operating said ejector hammer, a sear 
for holding said ejector hammer against op 
eration and a trip for releasing said Sear, Sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a fire arm, the combination with the 
cocking arm movable longitudinally of the 
gun upon its pivot, of the barrels and barrel 
lug, an ejector hammer pivoted to said barrel 
lug and provided with a cocking shoulder for 
engaging the cocking arm, the said ejector 
hammer and cocking arm having the one a 
cam surface for engaging the other to move 
the cocking arm rearwardly in assembling the 
parts of the gun, substantially as described. 
6. In a fire arm the combination with the 
two barrels of a double barreled fire arm, of 
a separate extractor for each barrel, the firing 
hammers, each provided with a main spring 
and cocking arm, independent ejector ham 
mers for said extractors, each provided with 
a cocking shoulder for engaging one of the 
cocking arms to cock its firing hammer and 
operate said ejector hammer, a sear for each 
ejector hammer for holding it out of operation 
and trips for releasing said sears before the 
firing hammers are moved into 'cocked posi 
tion, substantially as described. 
75 
go 
95 
do 
I o5 
Ed 
15 
587,203 
3 
7. In a fire arm the combination with the 
ejector hammer, its operating spring, a sear in presence of two witnesses. 
for holding said ejector. hammer against op- 
eration and a trip rod for releasing said Sear, 
5 having a part engaging a portion of the frame 
of the gun when the breech is opened, to op- 
erate said trip rod, substantially as described. 
F. S. WICKS, 
KATIIARINE TOOLE. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
- 
FRANK A. HOLLENBECK. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537303.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 537,303, 
J. W. NUNAMAKER 
ALARM FOR, WATCHES, 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 1, 
Patented Apr. 9, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 537,303, 
J. W. NUNAMAKER 
ALARM FOR WATCHES, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
Patented Apr. 9, 1895. 
 
 
r less 
 
   
 
 
N S. % V 
(No Model,) 
J. W. NUNAMAKER, 
ALARM FOR, WATCHES, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 537,303, 
Patented Apr., 9, 1895. 
i. 
KER 
KSJEREX 
REE 
a 
O 
O 
IISERY Is 
NRSRES 
k 
SE 
SS3 
sy S23 2. 
X S.S 
y 
w 
77/2-7e a 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. NUNAMAKER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ALARM FOR WATCHES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 537,803, dated April 9, 1895. 
Application filed August 13, 1894, Serial No. 520,227, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whom it may concern; 
Beit known that I, JOHN W. NUNAMAKER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Alarms for Watches, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
alarm mechanism to be applied to watches, 
and consists of certain devices for actuating 
the alarm by the main spring, and setting, 
starting and throwing off the same as may be 
required; and the object of my invention is 
to utilize that part of the main spring which 
is attached to and runs the drum or barrel of 
the Watch for actuating the alarm mechan 
ism. I attain this object by the mechanism 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of so many 
of the Works of a Watch as are necessary to 
be shown to embody my invention looking 
down upon the front or dial plate; Fig. 2, a 
detailed view in elevation and partly in ver 
tical Section of the movable collar lever, mov 
able collar and part of plate upon which said 
lever rocks; Fig. 3, a detailed view in per 
spective of the alarm adjusting hand; Fig. 4, 
a plan view partly broken away showing the 
reverse side of watch shown in Fig. 1, looking 
O W upon the under side of dial plate and 
m bacing So much of the mechanism of the 
watch as is necessary to embody my inven 
tion; Fig. 5, a detailed view in perspective of 
the movable collar lever; Fig. 6, a detailed 
view in perspective of the hand lever; Fig. 7, 
a detailed view in perspective of the striking 
hammer and pallets; Fig. 8, a detailed verti 
cal section of the different engaging parts of 
Figs. 5 and 6; Fig. 9, a detailed perspective 
view of engaging parts of Figs. 5 and 6; Fig. 
10, a detailed side view of the drum, with es 
cape wheel and movable collar, driving gear 
and ratchet wheel shown; Fig. 11, a cross sec 
tion enlarged and partly broken away of Fig. 
10; Fig. 12, a detailed top view of driving 
wheel C, shown in Fig. 10; Fig. 13, a detailed 
bottom view of escapement wheel shown in 
Figs, 10 and 11 showing lock in position. Fig. 
14, a detailed perspective view of driving 
wheel; Figs, 15 and 16, detailed top views of 
lock; Figs. 17 and 18, top views of escape 
ment wheel showing lock seat and lock un 
seated; Fig. 19, a cross section of lock; Fig. 
20, a detailed view in perspective of movable 
collar. 
Referring to the drawings in which similar 
letters refer to similar parts throughout the 
several views: X, is the dial plate to which 
is engaged in the usual way the drum A, car 
rying the main spring B, of the Watch. The 
drum A, is provided with the driving gear Cl, 
escapement wheel b, and arbor C.'. The driv 
ing gear Cl, is fitted loosely on the drum so as to 
turn independently of it and is provided with 
the pin a ', located on its face next to the es 
capement wheel and at a point near its cir 
cumference, all as shown in Figs. 12, 13, and 
14. The escapement wheel b, is attached to 
the drum so as to turn with it and is provided 
with the lock-seat b' on its face next to the 
gear a, as shown in Fig. 13, in which is seated 
the lock C, of shape shown in Fig. 13, piv 
oted at c'. The lock C, is provided with the 
two horns c'c' and the inclined faces c', c', 
against which the pin a engages, and has its 
ends slightly sprung upward as shown in Fig. 
19. The arbor a' carries the winding ratchet 
wheel i, between which and the escapement 
Wheel plays vertically the collar D, into and 
out of the collar seat d' and has its engaging 
end of truncated cone shape, and its other end 
provided with the annular recess d, as shown 
in Figs. 11 and 20. The driving gear a, lock 
C, escapement wheel b, and collar D, come 
together in the order shown in Figs. 14, 17, 18, 
and 20. Within the recess d, are the fingers 
e, e, of the vertically rocking lever E, as shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, 4, and 5; Said lever being piv 
oted at e' and having its other end provided 
with the elbow e'. Said elbow extends up 
ward through an opening in the dial plate and 
engages with the lever F, as follows: The lower 
edge e' of the elbow e' is beveled as shown 
in Fig. 5, while the edgef, of the finger f', - 
the latter being a part of the lever F, -is also 
beveled so that when the lever F, is horizon 
tally moved it causes the elbow e' to ride up 
ward upon the finger f' the several operations 
being shown as in Fig. 8. The lever F is piv 
oted at f' and is provided at one end with 
the thumb knob f' extending out of the edge 
of the watch movement and playing in the 
slot f' while its other end extends inwardly 
from the circumference of the Watch move 
ment so that it may engage with the trip-pin 
g, at f' as shown in Fig.1. The trip-ping, 
is fastened to the collar g' and the latter sur. 
9o 
95 
O) 
IO 5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
537,303 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
rounds the tube g'. The upper end of said 
tube g' carries the alarm hand G, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3. The alarm hand G, by means 
of the last described device is fitted to the 
hour wheel H, friction tight. 
Referring to Fig. 4, there is shown pivoted 
to the top and bottom plates at r, of the Watch 
the alarm hammer lever R, one end r' being 
the hammer head and the other end being 
provided with the pallets 'r' engaging with 
the teeth of the escapement wheel b, causing 
the hammer head ' to beat upon the inside 
of the Watch movement-or a gong attached 
thereto not shown in the drawings-as the 
escapement wheel revolves. 
My improved alarm mechanism for watches 
operates as follows, viz: The alarm is always 
set at twelve oclock so that if it is desired to 
have the alarm strike at say two o'clock, it is 
necessary to set the alarm hand atten o'clock. 
The alarm hand having been properly set as 
indicated above, the movement of the alarm 
hand G, in the said setting does not disturb 
the accuracy of the watch as it is fitted only 
friction tight to the hour wheel II. The trip 
ping, will be so located that it will take the 
hour wheel just two hours to revolve far 
enough to engage with the end f' of the 
lever F, which has been put in the position 
indicated in Fig. 1, by means of the thumb 
knob f' which has been moved downward so 
that the finger f' engages with the under bev 
eled side of the elbow e' thereby raising said 
elbow and that end of the lever F, to which 
it is attached, causing its other end to be de 
pressed SO that the movable collar D, is thrust 
into the collar seat d' and its truncated cone 
shape thrusts the horn c.' of the lock C, into 
the position shown in Fig. 15. Before this 
action takes place, the lock is in position 
shown in Figs. 11 and 13, having the pin Cl' of 
the driving gear a, held firmly in position 
against the sloping side c' of the lock, and 
the horn c.' of the lock C, projecting inward 
toward the arbor as shown in Fig. 11, thereby 
securely locking the driving gear a, and es 
capement wheel b, together. After the above 
operation the pin a' is in position shown in 
Fig. 15 and is held against the side c' of 
the lock still keeping the driving gear a, and 
escapement wheel b, locked by reason of the 
pressure of the main spring on the drum and 
consequently on the escapement wheel to 
which the latter is affixed. This is the posi 
tion of the parts after the alarm mechanism 
is set. As soon as the propertime has elapsed, 
the trip-ping, engages with the end f' of 
the lever, causing it to turn horizontally 
around the pivotif' and assume the position 
shown in the dotted lines as seen in Fig. 1. At 
the Same time the finger f is released from 
the elbow e' of the lever E, and said elbow 
and the end of the lever to which it is attached 
is caused to be depressed by the action of 
the horn c' shown in Fig. 11 acting against 
the sloping side of the truncated cone shape 
of the collar D. As soon as the collar D, is 
withdrawn from the collar seat cl the lock 
C is enabled to resume the position shown 
in Fig. 13, so that the lock between the gear 
wheel a, and the escapement b, is broken and 
the barrel and escapement wheel make one 
entire revolution, during which, the pin (' 
comes in contact with the end ly, of the lock 
C, and throws it to the first position described. 
While the escapement wheel is revolving it 
Operates the hammer lever and its pallets in 
the usual manner so as to cause an alarm. 
Should the pressure of the horn c' against 
the truncated cone shape of the collar D, be 
insufficient to unseat the said collar, the 
spring S, Fig. 9, may be applied to aid the 
Sale, 
I am aware that prior to my invention, 
watch alarms have been used which are op 
erated by the main spring of the watch. Ience 
I do not claim that feature broadly, but 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an alarm for watches in combination 
with the drum A, provided with the loose gear 
a, and escapement wheel b, provided with the 
lock C, the levers E, and F, and trip-pin (1, 
for operating same, and the hammer R, pro 
vided with the pallets ' ' substantially as 
described. 
2. In an alarm for watches in combination 
with the drum A, provided with the main 
Spring B, loose driving gear C, and escape 
ment wheel b, the latter provided with the lock 
C, the lever E and collar D, operated by the 
lever F, and tripping, for operating said le. 
ver, and the hammer R, provided with the 
pallets ' ' substantially as described. 
3. In an alarm for watches in combination 
with the drum A, provided with the main 
spring B, for operating same, the loose driv 
ing gear a, provided with the pin a', the es 
capement wheel b, provided with the lock C, 
and the lever E, provided with the collar I), 
and elbow e' the lever F, provided with the 
finger f' and trip pin (1, for operating said 
lever, and the hammer R, provided with the 
pallets ' ' substantially as described. 
4. In an alarm for watches in combination 
with the drum A, actuated by the spring 3, 
and provided with the loose driving gear (, 
carrying the pin a ', and the escapement wheel 
b, provided with the lock C, and actuating 
the pallets ' ' of the hammer R, the lever 
E, engaged with and operating the collar D, 
and provided with the elbow e' having the 
beveled face e', the lever F, provided with 
the stop knob f' and finger f, and having 
the beveled face f' to engage with the face 
e' of the lever E, the hour wheel II, actuat 
ing the alarm hand G, provided with the col 
larg and trip-pin (1, for operating said lever, 
substantially as described and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
Witnesses: 
W. N. UNAMAKER. 
JOHN 
JAMESS. SHORTLE, 
THOMAS J. RODIAN. 
o 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
OO 
I o5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537403.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 537,403, 
G. D. BURTON. 
ART OF EXTRACTING GREASE FROM WOOL, 
Patented Apr., 9, 1895. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE D. BURTON, O F BOST ON, MASSA CHUSETTS. 
ART OF EXTRACTING GREASE FROM wool. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 537,403, dated April 9, 1895. 
Application filed October 31, 1894, Serial. No. 527,532, (No specimens.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE DEXTER BUR 
TON, a citizen of the United States of America, 
residing at Boston, in the county of Suffolk, 
in the State of Massachusetts, have invented 
Certain new and useful Improvements in the 
Art of Extracting Grease from Wool, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to effect the 
extraction of oil and grease from wool in a 
rapid and economical manner. 
The invention consists essentially in ex 
tracting the grease from the greasy, fibrous 
Substance by subjecting said substance to the 
action of an electrolytic solution, the proper 
electric current being passed through that 
portion of the solution with which the fibrous 
Substance is commingled, said electric cur 
rent being of a character which causes a di 
electric polarization of the fibrous substance 
and tends to separate the fibers thereof and 
thoroughly expose them to the action of the 
solution. 
The accompanying drawing represents a 
perspective view of an apparatus for carrying 
out this process. 
Any suitable vat, as 10, preferably con 
structed of Wood, earthenware or other non 
conductive material constitutes a part of this 
apparatus and serves as a receptacle for the 
cleansing liquor. An electrode 20, which may 
serve as the anode, is disposed in the vat, 
preferably at one end or one side thereof, and 
another electrode, as 30, which may consti 
tute the cathode, is also disposed in the bath, 
preferably at the other end or other side 
thereof. These electrodes are preferably com 
posed of lead, but may be constructed of car 
bon, zinc, or other suitable material, or the 
anode may be composed of carbon and the 
cathode of lead or other material. I have 
found that when both electrodes are com 
posed of lead, a quicker cleansing action is 
obtained than when a carbon anode and a 
lead cathode are employed. For a vat having 
a capacity of thirty gallons, more or less, the 
electrodes are usually about a foot square 
and three eighths of an inch thick. A wire 
21 connects the anode 20 with a dynamo, elec 
tric service wire or any suitable, source of 
electricity, and a conductor 31 connects the 
cathode 30 with the negative pole of said elec 
tric source or with a negative service wire. 
A rheostat 40 is preferably inserted in the 
circuit on either side of the vat, 
A cleansing liquor 50 is disposed in the Vat. 
This cleansing liquor preferably consists of 
a strong or saturated solution of bichromate 
of potash but any equivalent solution or liq 
uor may be employed. As an instance of 
an equivalent solution, I will state that I 
have used for this purpose a solution of sul 
phuric acid of chloride of sodium and water 
in the proportions of about five pounds of 
chloride of sodium, three ounces of sulphuric 
acid and twenty gallons of water. The com 
position and the proportions thereof may be 
varied without departing from the scope of 
this invention. 
For a bath of thirty gallons consisting of a 
solution of bichromate of potash, having a 
strength sufficient to raise the gravity of the 
liquid to 1.050, an electric current of two 
hundred and twenty volts and sixty-five a in 
peres will heat the bathin five minutes to the 
boiling point; and after that the current may 
be reduced to twenty ampres, which will be 
sufficient to maintain the proper temperature 
of the liquor. The voltage may remain prac 
tically or substantially the same during and 
after the heating of the liquor. To heat the 
bath more quickly, the gravity of the solu 
tion and the amperage of the current are in 
creased. 
In the use of this process, the wool to be 
cleansed is immersed in the cleansing liquor 
50 in the tank 10 and the required current 
of electricity is switched on. The current 
passes from the electrode 20 to the electrode 
30, through that portion of the liquor which 
is disposed between said electrodes and with 
which the fibrous material is commingled. 
The current has an electrolytic action upon 
said liquor, developing gases therein, and 
also effect a dielectric polarization of the 
fibrous? material which has a tendency to 
cause the fibers to separate and sway in the 
liquor and become thoroughly exposed to the 
action thereof. The fibers of the material 
being treated are thus agitated and brought 
into intimate contact with the liquor and the 
oil or grease contained thereon readily sepa 
rates therefrom rapidly and rises to the sur 
face of the liquor, from which it can be re 
O 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
so 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
537,408 
moved in any suitable manner. The kind of 
gases formed depends upon the character of 
the solution employed. A current of the 
character substantially as described raises 
the temperature of the liquor to 155 Fahren 
heit, more or less. The wool is subjected to 
the action of the electrolyzed liquor for a 
period of from fifteen to twenty minutes, ac 
cording to the quantity of grease contained 
in the wool. When the grease has been fully 
extracted, it may be skimmed off the top of 
the solution and the wool is then removed 
from the liquor in a cleansed condition and 
may be washed in clear water. 
Instead of taking the wool out of the vat, 
the cleansing solution may be drawn off and 
a supply of fresh water for washing purposes 
may be passed through the Vat. 
This process may be applied to cotton and 
other substances containing oil, grease or 
fatty matter to be extracted. 
The voltage may vary from one hundred 
and ten volts to five hundred volts, and the 
amperage may vary from fifty to five hun 
dred according to the size of the bath and 
the quantity of wool being cleansed. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The art of extracting grease from a 
fibrous substance, which consists in subject 
ing the greasy fibrous substance to the action 
of an electrolyzed solution, the electric cur 
rent passing through that portion of the so 
lution with which the fibrous substance is 
commingled and causing a dielectric polari 
zation and movement of said substance. 
2. The art of extracting grease from a 
fibrous substance, which consists in immers 
ing the substance in an electrolytic solution, 
TO 
25 
35 
and passing an electric current, which causes 
a dielectric polarization and movement of the 4o 
fibrous substance, directly through that por 
tion of the solution in which the fibrous sub 
stance is immersed, and with which it is com 
mingled. 
3. The art of extracting grease from a 45 
fibrous substance, which consists in immers 
ing the fibrous substance in a watery solu 
tion of bichromate of potash, and passing an 
electric current therethrough during the im 
mersion. 
4. The process of extracting grease from a 
fibrous substance which consists in immers 
ing the fibrous substance in a watery cleans 
ing solution, and passing therethrough dur 
ing the cleansing operation an electric cur 
rent having substantially the voltage and am 
perage herein set forth and which causes a 
dielectric polarization and movement of the 
fibrous substance. 
5. The art of extracting grease from a 
fibrous substance which consists in immers 
ing the substance in an electrolytic solution 
and passing an electric current directly 
through that portion of the solution in which 
the fibrous substance is immersed and with 
which it is commingled, said current being of 
a character which maintains the proper tem 
perature of the solution during the extracting 
operation and which causes a dielectric po 
larization and movement of the fibrous sub- 7o 
Stance. 
65 
55 
GEO. D. BURTON. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. FALLEN ADAMS, 
E. F. PHILIPSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537505.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 537,505, 
 
J. H. WAN DORN 
WROUGHT METAL JOIST HANGER, 
Patented Apr. 16, 1895, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. V AND ORN, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
WROUGHT-METAL Joist-HANGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,505, dated April 16, 1895. 
Application filed November 28, 1894, serial No. 629,972, (No model) 
. 
55 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
25 
ao 
Io 
To all whom it may concern: 
off, whereby the bending of the flanges on the 
Beit known that I, JAMESH. VAN DoRN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing atcleve sides into the desired position may be effected 
without danger that the blank will be split 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga aid State 
during said bending operation. 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
When the hanger is secured to the beam, 
Improvements in Wrought-Metal Joist-Hang 
the flanges CC lie against the side of the 
ers; and I do hereby declare the following to 
beam, and the arms C'C' lie on top thereof; 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
and when the hanger is fastened in this posi 
invention, such as will enable other's skilled in 
tion by screws or nails passing through said 6o 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
sides and arms, it is believed that the hanger 
use the same. 
has greater supporting strength than any 
Myinvention relates to wrought metaljoist 
hanger ever made of equal weight. 
hangers; and the object of theinvention is to 
By supporting the hanger in part by the 
produce a wrought metal joist hanger which 
side flanges, there is less danger than there 65 
shall be strong enough for the intended use, 
would otherwise be that the arms C'C' will 
and, in my opinion, stronger than any metal 
straighten out wholly or in part and thus per 
joist hanger heretofore made of equal weight, 
mit the hanger to be pulled loose from the 
and which shall also be cheaper than any 
beam. Another advantage of the connection 
Wrought metal joist hanger heretofore made. 
of the hanger to the beam by means of the ro 
The invention consists of the described 
side flanges, is that thereby all side motion of . 
hanger, the blank from which it is made, and 
the hangers is prevented; and through the 
the method of forming said blanks with no 
described hangers, a joist may be secured to 
considerable waste of material. 
a beam as firmly as if mortised thereto. . 
. . 
In the drawings, Figures 1 and 2 are per 
The described hanger may be made by cut-75 
spective views of two forms of bars from which 
ting blanks alternately from opposite sides of 
the hanger blanks may be cut alternately 
either of the two forms of bars shown in Fig. 
from opposite sides. Figs. 3 and 4 are end 
1 or 2. Fig.1 shows a flat bar, and when the 
views of the bars shown in Figs. 1 and 2 re 
blanks (which have oppositely inclined ends 
spectively; and Fig. 5 is a perspective view 
and unequal parallel sides) are cut from this 8o 
of the completed hanger. 
. 
bar, the sides thereof remain connected to 
Referring to the parts by letter, A A rep 
and projecting from the ends of the long 
resent the two substantially parallel vertical 
sides-forming the arms C'C'; and that part . 
sides of the hanger; B, the intermediate hori 
C of the said edge which is at the middle of 
Zontal shelf; and CC represent flanges which 
the blank and attached to that part thereof 85 
are integral with the rear edges of the two 
from which the shelf is formed, is cutaway, 
sides and lie at right angles thereto. These. 
as indicated in Figs. 1 and 2. When the 
flanges extend beyond the ends of the sides 
blank has been cut out, the rear side is bent 
and are bent backward into planes substan 
at right angles to the body, thereby forming . 
tially at light angles to the sides themselves 
the flanges C-C and arms C'C'; the body is 90. 
and parallel to the shelf B, thereby forming 
bent on dotted lines 1-2 to form the sides: 
arms C'C' which are adapted to lie on top of 
and intermediate shelf; and the arms are 
and to be secured to the beam by which the 
bent back on lines 3-4, thus completing the 
hanger is to be supported. Holes careformed 
hangers. 
in the flanges C C and in the arms C'C', 
The bar shown in Fig.2 is rolled with the 95. 
through which pass the screws or spikes by 
means of which the hanger may be secured 
to said beam. In the preferred form, which 
is shown in the drawings, there is no flange on 
the rear edge of the shelf. 
So In forming the hanger the rear part of that 
part of the blank which forms the shelf is cut 
two edge flanges at right angles to the body 
or web. The blanks are cutout in the man 
ner heretofore described; and the part C of 
the flange is cut off from that part of the 
blank which forms the shelf. When this too 
form of bar is used, the operation of turning 
the flanges at right angles to the body of the 
40 
. . 
" 
. 
. 
," 
... 
3 
35 
. 
537,505 
O 
blank is of course dispensed with, or rather, 
said bending is done before the blanks are 
cut out. 
It is advantageous to employ a bar having 
its sides a little thicker than the web, because 
thereby the hanger will be stronger. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The herein described process of making 
blanks for joist hangers, which consists in 
cutting sections alternately from opposite 
sides of a wrought metal bar, cutting the edges 
of said bar away from the opposite sides of 
adjacent sections, and leaving the edges so 
cut away from each section attached to and 
projecting from the ends of the adjacent sec 
tions, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. The herein described process of making 
blanks for joist hangers, which consists in 
cutting, alternately, from opposite sides of a 
wrought metal bar, sections each of which has . 
oppositely inclined ends and unequal paral-, 
- 
lel sides and arms projecting from both ends 
of its longer side, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
3. The herein described process of forming 
a wrought metal joist hanger, which consists 
in cutting alternately from opposite sides-of-a - 
bar, blanks having oppositely inclined ends 
and unequal parallel sides, and arms which 
project from both ends of the long side, turn 
ing the edge of the long side up at right an 
gles to the body, cutting away the middle part 
C of said turned up edge, bending the blank 
to form two parallel sides and an intermedi 
ate shelf, and bending back the projecting 
arms, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
J. II. WAN DORN. 
V 
- 
Witnesses: 
25 
35 
EDWIN E. THURSTON, 
F. GRISWOLD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537605.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 537,605, 
 
H. A. FELT, R. S. McLAUGHILIN & M. L., EWELY. 
GAME APPARATUS, 
Patented Apr. 16, 1895. 
Witnesses. 
 
Auentors 
(O. 
t 
1. 
' 
' 
'. 
Y - 
1 
THE NORRS PETERs co. PHoto-Litho...washington, c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOWARD ASHTON FELT, ROBERT SAMUEL McLAUGHILIN, AND MARTIN 
LUTHER, EVELY, OF OSHAWA, CANADA; SAID EVELY ASSIGNOR TO 
SAID FELT. 
GAME APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 537,605, dated April 16, 1895. 
Application filed December 17, 1894, Serial No. 532,100, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, HOWARD ASHTON 
FELT, jeweler, ROBERT SAMUEL MCLAUGH 
LIN, manufacturer, and MARTIN LUTHER 
EVELY, mechanic, of the town of Oshawa, in 
the county of Ontario, in the Province of 
Ontario, Canada, have invented a new Game 
Apparatus, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
Our invention relates to a new parlor game 
and it consists of a board having a suitably 
raised edge and provided with a central 
pocket raised upon a beveled disk above the 
Surface of the board and outer pockets ar 
ranged radially and circumferentially to the 
central pocket and having suitably tapered 
Stop blocks, corner pockets being arranged 
for the dead balls and spaces being arranged 
at the center of each side of the board inside 
the edge for the delivery of the balls, the 
board being otherwise arranged as herein. 
after more particularly explained. 
The drawing represents a perspective view 
of Our game board. 
A, is the central pocket made in the cen 
tral disk, A', which has a rounded bevel from 
the surface of the board. 
B, are four arc-shaped pockets formed at 
the Outer edge of the disk by the tapered 
blocks, B'. The tapered blocks, B', are pref 
erably four in number and diametrically op 
posite each other and the center of the sides 
of the board. 
C, are four pockets located on the circle, c, 
to the inside edge of the tapered blocks, C', 
which are arc-shaped as shown. The pockets, 
C, are diagonally opposite each other. 
D, are pockets located on the outside circle, 
d, at the outer end of the tapered blocks, C, 
Which ends are arc-shaped in form as shown. 
E, are wells situated diagonally on the 
board about midway between the pockets, D, 
and the corner triangular pockets, N. 
H, are semi-circular spaces located prefer 
ably at the center of each side of the board 
and designed for the delivery of the balls. 
I, is the raised edge to prevent the balls roll 
ing off the board. 
The drawing shows the hand in preferred 
form for the delivery of the balls but any 
other form convenient to the player may be 
used. 
In our game any number of persons may 
play each playing separately or as partners 
sitting opposite each other. The game is 
played preferably with twelve balls. When 
three are playing one of them can play against 
the other two, he holding the twelve balls and 
playing alternately after each of them. 
The game is started by one of the players 
placing his ball on the space, H, between the 
half circle lines. With the fillip or snap of 
the finger he endeavors to lodge the ball in 
the center pocket, A, by a carom shot mak 
ing the ball strike on side of, C', and then 
take an angle for center pocket, A. The first 
having played, the one at the left plays next, 
his object being, if there is an alley in the 
center pocket, to knock it out, and lodge his 
own in its place, which is frequently done. 
The most skillful and fascinating part of 
the play is in forcing your opponent's balls 
in the wells, E, or caroming off another ball 
for pocket, D. 
The rules are as follows: 
First. Each player plays a ball in turn till 
all the balls have been played. 
Second. Each player must have the same 
number of shots, excepting when one is play 
ing against two, and in placing the ball for a 
shot must confine himself to his position on 
the board, viz., the space, H, between the two 
half circle lines in front of him. 
Third. Each player must keep his hands 
and balls off the board except when playing. 
Fourth. The board, or the seat of any 
player, cannot be moved while the round is 
in progress. 
Fifth. No ball can be played but once dur 
ing the round. 
Sixth. After each round the balls are again 
distributed and another round is played in 
the same manner, excepting the second player 
in the previous round plays first in the new 
round. 
The count is now recorded as follows: A 
ball lodging in the central pocket, A, counts 
thirty-five for the player and must be recorded 
at once, unless such record completes the 
game, when it can only be counted where it 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
7 c. 
75 
9 O 
95 
 
2 
587,605 
35 
45 
lies at the end of the round. For instance in opponent's ball was in, they would count ten 
playing a game of two hundred should you for you. After pairing off all balls in equal 
already have a count of one-hundred and value and each side being counted as above, 
sixty-five or more and lodge into the pocket, the difference is scored to the one having the 
A, you cannot conclude the game with this largest count. Should any ball leave the 
score of thirty-five, unless the ball remains board it would be counted a dead ball. 
It is necessary in playing this game that op 
there until the end of the round, in which 
case it would be the first one counted. Un- ponents should use balls of different colors. 
der other circumstances a score of thirty-five 
What we claim as our invention is 
is recorded as soon as made. A ball resting A parlor carom game comprising a board 
in the central pocket, A, at the end of the having a centrally raised disk with central 
round, and a score of thirty-five already re- pocket, tapered blocks secured on the board 
corded, cannot be recorded again. At the abutting the edges of the disk, situated dia 
end of the round each ball remaining in pock- metrically opposite each other and provided 
ets, B, counts five, and in pockets on circle, with pockets at the inner end, and tapered 
C, counts ten, outside circle pockets, D, count blocks secured on the board circumferentially 
twenty. Balls in wells, E, at the round up, outside the former blocks and between them, 
count ten for the opposition. Any balls en- having the ends bounded by circles concen 
tering the corner pockets, N, are dead balls tric to the central pocket, situated diago 
and do not count. At the end of the round nally opposite each other, and provided with 
you pair off all you can of equal value, then pockets at each end, diagonally situated wells, 
count the value of balls in pockets, and five corner pockets, and side delivery spaces all 
for every ball on the board not in pockets. | bounded by a suitable raised edge as and for 
For example if in round up count you have the purpose specified. 
a ball in center pocket, A, and in pockets, B, 
C, D, also in well, E, you would count noth- 
a- 
ing for pocket, A, as it was recorded when 
made; but for pocket, B, you would count 
five, for pocket, C, ten, for pocket D, twenty. 
If you had any balls in the wells, E, they 
would count ten each against you, or if your 
St. sE FELT, 
U.S. 
MARTIN UTHER EWELY 
a 
'N 
EL, MCAUGHILIN. 
u 
Witnesses: 
E. O. FELT, 
W. E. WRIGHT, 
i 
o 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537706.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F. McLAUGHLIN. 
SECTIONAL CONDUCTOR FOR ELECTRIC RAILWAYS 
No. 537,706. 
Patented Apr. 16, 1895, 
As a 16 an 
SYNSNSNSNSS2S 
732 
ZSSN 
2 
SN 
2577 
2 
M6 N. 2x2 
2ZZZ% 
2 
2 
2 
Aut 
MiG-Tcts 
-254. 
waiti 
2 
2 
ME65 E. E. 
aginAE 
%a 
N. & e 
T 
6 
a; 
f N 
M7 
as 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
v 
2&?ecto 
6 a c2-4.2% 
V 
t 
/WWENTOR 
eZ27zes Z/7Z * Zaeez& 
429. ATTORNEY, 
BY 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHOTo-LTHO, was HINGTONo. G. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. MCLAUGHILIN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
SECTIONAL CONDUCTOR FOR ELECTRIC RALWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 537,706, dated April 16, 1895, 
Application filed February 5, 1895, Serial No. 537,387, (No model.) 
55 
- 
- . 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES F. McLAUGHLIN, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer. 
tain new and useful Improvements in Electric 
Railways, of which the following is a specifi 
Cation. 
This invention has reference to improve 
ments in electric railways in which an ex 
posed Sectional working conductor is fed with 
current from a buried main or supply con 
ductor by means of underground switches Op 
erated by electro magnets carried upon the 
motor cars. 
Prior to the present invention such mag 
netically operated switches were held in the 
closed position solely by the attractive force 
of the magnets and were returned to the nor 
mal position, as soon as the magnets had 
passed, by the action of springs or gravity. 
Consequently, it was necessary, in order to 
keep the circuit closed, to use many switches 
So near together that a switch would be at 
tracted by the magnets before the one just 
preceding had been released, or to use one or 
more magnets or groups of magnets so ar 
ranged either as to length or number as to 
span the distance between two switches spaced 
apart. 
It is the object of the present invention to 
provide means whereby the switches are op 
erated both to open and close the electric cir 
cuit between the main and working conduc 
tors, by the attraction of magnets upon the 
motor cars. With such arrangement but one 
SWitch is necessary to each section of the work 
ing conductor, and but twomagnets are needed 
On each car, one near each end of the same. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a longi 
tudinal section of a switch inclosed in a pro 
tecting box or casing, with one of the travel 
ing magnets in elevation. Fig. 2 is a cross 
Section of the switch, and elevation of the 
magnet, and Fig. 3 is a diagram illustrating 
the Whole system constituting the present in 
Vention. 
Referring to the drawings and more par 
ticularly to Fig. 3, there is shown a generator 
1, With one terminal connected to a main or 
supply conductor 2, and the other terminal to 
the traffic rails 3. In order to avoid acci 
dental contact with the conductor 2, the same 
is, as usual, insulated and buried beneath the 
surface of the ground. An exposed, sectional 
working conductor 4, is laid in the road bed 
midway between the traffic rails. This con 
I ductor is suitably insulated and its sections 
are separated a short distance from each 
other at the ends. Each section of the con 
ductor 4, is connected to the supply conduc 
tor 2, by a branch conductor 5, the continuity 
of which is broken to include a switch 6, 
which is shown in detail and will hereinafter 
be described with reference to Figs. 1 and 2. 
Current is collected from the exposed sec 
tional working conductor 4, by means of a 
trolley 6', carried by a motor car which is 
merely indicated in Fig. 3. From the trolley 
the current passes to the car motor 7, by a con 
ductor 8, in which a circuit controller 9, (illus 
trated simply as a switch) is included, and 
finally reaches the rails through one of the car 
axles 10, and the car wheels in the usual man 
ner. A branch 8', of the conductor 8, is con 
nected to one of the car axles 10, and includes 
two switch-operating electro-magnets 11, and 
a switch 9'. These magnets are so placed 
that as the car travels along they will pass 
over the switches and operate the same in the 
manner to be described. For this purpose 
the pole pieces of the magnets are placed as 
near the surface of the road bed as is practi 
cable, and the magnets are located apart a 
distance somewhat greater than the length of 
a section of the Working conductor. 
The switch 6, is shown in detail in Figs. 1 
and 2. It is inclosed in a box 12, buried in 
the road bed between the rails underneath 
the line of travel of the two magnets l1, on 
the car, and this box is provided with a re 
movable cover 13, preferably of non-magnetic 
material, flush with or slightly above the Sur 
face of the road-bed. The switch is composed 
of a movable and a fixed member. The mov 
able member consists of a cylinder 14, of in 
sulating material secured to a horizontal 
shaft, journaled to turn in bearings in the up 
right sides 15, 15', of a U-shaped frame 16, 
fixed to the bottom of the box 12, and em 
bedded in the periphery of the cylinder are a 
number of equi-distant metal bars 17, paral 
lel with the axis of the cylinder and having 
75 
go 
95 
OC) 
d 
20 
25 
30 
35 
45 
 
2 
537,706 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
OC 
IO5 
IO 
I I5 
O 
their outer surfaces flush with the face thereof. 
The fixed member of the switch consists of 
two parallel spring brushes 18, 18, resting at 
one end upon the periphery of the cylinder 
14, and secured at the other end to an insul 
lating support 19, extending between and 
fixed to the sides 15, 15', of the frame 16. 
Extending laterally across the box 12, un 
derneath and near to the lid thereof, there is 
an iron armature bar 20, pivotally supported 
on a rod 21, by ears 22, formed on the bar 20. 
The rod 21, is mounted in the sides of the 
frame 16. In the normal position, this bar 
20, rests by gravity upon a ledge 23, formed 
on each side 15, 15', of the frame 16, and it is 
drawn up by magnetic attraction whenever 
one of the traveling magnets passes over the 
box 12, the upward movement of the bar 
around its pivot being limited by a stop pin 
24, on the side 15, of the frame 16, in the path 
of an arm 25, constituting a continuation of 
one of the ears, 22. Pivoted to and depend 
ing from the outer end of the arm 25, there is 
a pawl 26, with its lower end in operative re 
lation to the teeth of a ratchet disk 27, fixed 
to one end of the cylinder 14, so as to rotate 
there with, and this pawl 26, when actuated by 
the armature bar causes the cylinder to rotate 
about its axis. The movement of the armature 
under the action of a magnet is just sufficient 
to effect the rotation of the cylinder 14, a dis 
tance equal to the length of one tooth of the 
disk 27. When the magnet has passed, the ar 
mature, which is so pivoted as to overbalance 
the pawl 26, returns by gravity to its normal 
position and raises the pawl into operative 
relation to the next succeeding tooth of the 
ratchet disk. Backward movement of the cyl 
inder 14, is prevented by a stop-pawl 28, piv 
oted to the side 15, of the frame 16, with its 
free end resting on the teeth of the ratchet 
disk 27, and both pawls 26 and 28 are pressed 
against the disk by the action of a helical 
spring 29, fast, at one end, to an eye 30, on 
the pawl 26, and at the other end to an eye 
31, on the pawl 28. 
The portion of the conductor 5, coming from 
the Supply conductor 2, terminates at one of 
the brushes 18, while the other portion, lead 
ing to a section of the conductor 4, starts from 
the other brush 18. Thus it will be seen, that 
the circuit to the car is closed whenever one 
of the bars 17, passes under the free ends of 
brushes 18. 
There are only half as many bars 17 as there 
are teeth in the ratchet disk 27, and conse 
quently the brushes are bridged, and the cir 
cuit through the conductor 5, is completed 
only at every other forward movement of the 
cylinder 14. 
When a car approaches one of the switches 
6, the magnet at the front of the car, on mov 
ing over the switch, attracts the armature, 
thereby actuating the movable member of the 
Switch a distance equal to the length of a 
tooth. Assuming that, in the normal position 
of the switch, the brushes 18, are upon the in 
sulating material of the cylinder 14, between 
the metal bars 17, the movement of the arma 
ture when attracted by the magnet at the 
front end of the car, will cause a metal bar 17, 
to be moved under and bridge the two brushes 
18, thus completing the circuit from the main 
conductor 2, to a section of the conductor 4. 
The circuit will remain closed after the mag 
net at the front of the car has passed and the 
armature has dropped to its normal position, 
and will not be broken until the magnet at 
the rear end of the car comes over the Switch 
and attracts the armature. This second at 
traction of the armature causes the cylinder 
14 to rotate until the metal bar has been 
moved away from under the brushes and they 
rest on the insulating material of the cylin 
der between the bars 17, thus breaking the 
circuit between the main conductor and the 
section of the working conductor. 
The making and breaking of the circuit 
occurs each time a car passes over a switch, 
and in order that current may be constantly 
fed to the car motor, the switches and mag 
nets are so spaced that each switch is closed 
before the preceding one is opened. Conse 
quently the sections of the conductor 4, are 
energized in succession as the car travels 
along, and in so far as the motor is concerned, 
this conductor becomes, in effect, a continu 
ous conductor. 
The space between the two magnets on the 
car will depend upon the spacing of the 
switches, and it needs to be only a little 
g 
reater than the distance between the switches 
so that they will be operated as described. 
The sections of the conductor 4, may be of 
any suitable length, but by preference they 
should be of such length that at least two 
sections, are covered by the car at all times, 
since the magnets on a car cannot bridge 
more than two sections into circuit at a time, 
as will be evident. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. In an electric railway, the combination 
with a main or supply conductor and a sec 
tional working conductor, of rotary switches, 
one for each section of the working conduc 
tor, and traveling electro-magnets positively 
operating the rotary switches step by step 
to alternately close and open the circuit be 
tween the main conductor and the sections of 
the working conductor, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In an electric railway, the combination 
With a main or supply conductor and a sec 
tional working conductor, of rotary switches, 
one for each section of the working conductor, 
neutral armatures for rotating the switches 
step by step and traveling electro-magnets 
positively actuating the armatures to alter. 
nately close and open the circuit between the 
main conductor and the sections of the work 
ing conductor, substantially as described. 
3. In an electric railway, the combination 
I 25 
587,706 
with a main or supply conductor, and a sec 
tional working conductor, of rotary switches 
between the two, one for each section of the 
working conductor, an armature for each 
Switch, pawl and ratchet connections between 
the armatures and switches, and two electro 
magnets mounted on the motor car, for actu 
ating the armatures to close and open the cir 
cuit at the switches, substantially as described. 
4. In an electric railway, the combination, 
with a main or supply conductor and a sec 
tional working conductor, of rotary switches 
for coupling the same, pivoted armatures for 
actuating the Switches, and traveling magnets 
passing over the armatures in inductive rela 
tion thereto, substantially as described. 
5. In an electric railway the combination, 
O 
with a main or supply conductor and a sec 
tional working conductor, of switches for 
coupling the same, consisting of stationary 
brushes forming the terminals of an electric 
circuit, and a rotary member of insulating 
material carrying metal bars adapted to 
bridge the brushes, traveling electro-magnets 
passing over the switches, and armatures for 
the magnets actuating the rotary member of 
the switch, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JAS. F. MCLAUGHILIN. 
25 
Witnesses: 
WM. BARNET LE VAN, 
C. L. BROWN, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537807.txt	J. P. HASTY. 
RAILROAD SWITCH. 
Patented Apr. 16, 1895, 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 537,807, 
e AA 
St. 
Tige: 
sts SS 
sess's e 
'ss 
&N R 
& 
 
 
 
 
s 
 
s s QS 
w 
al 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
K SS2 
S 
r 
se w 
A. 
2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPH. P. HASTY, OF SUPERIOR, NEBRASKA. 
RAILROAD a SWITCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,807, dated April 16, 1895. 
Application filed August 21, 1894, Serial No,520,876, (No model.) 
Stand. 
- 
Beit known that I, JosEPHP. HASTY, a citi- from a single switch-stand. 
to all whom it may concern 
to set the switch for either of the three tracks 
Zen of the United States, residing at Superior, 
G is the switch-stand, which has an oblong 
in the county of Nuckolls and State of Ne. 
shaped base g, a tapering cylindrical bodyg', 
braska, have invented a new and useful Rail- on top of which is secured a semi-circular cap 55 
road. Switch, of which the following is a speci- H, which is provided with a series of notches 
fication. 
h cut in its rounded edge, and two vertical 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
studs h near the straight edge, for a purpose 
railroad switches; and it has for its object the 
hereinafter explained. The base of the stand 
production of a three-throw switch that can 
is lollow and contains the operating mech- 6o 
be effectively operated from a single switch 
anism. An operating-rod I passes centrally 
through the stand, its lower end projecting 
The invention will first be described in con 
within the hollow base and its upper end con 
nection with the accompanying drawings, and 
siderably above the cap H, being provided 
then pointed out in the claims. 
with the usual disk-signal and pointer i', as 65 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
seen in Figs. 1 and 2. On the lower end of 
my improved switch and switch-stand, show 
the rod I, within the base g, is securely fas 
ing the switch set for the main line. Fig. 2 
tened what I term an operating-disk J. This 
is a rear elevation of the switch-stand, the 
disk is provided with a lateral armi, which 
Switch lever being locked in a position to set 
has at its outer end a down Wardly-projecting 7 or 
the switch for the left-hand turnout. Fig. 3 
studi'. A recess f is formed in the periph 
is a vertical central section, partly in eleva 
ery of the disk in the same vertical plane as 
tion, of the switch-stand, the switch-lever be. 
the armi, for a purpose hereinafter explained. 
ing shown unlocked. Fig. 4 is a broken sec 
K and IK' represent two bell-cranks, which 
tional view illustrating the manner of lock 
are pivotally secured on studs 1 at opposite 75 
ing the switch-lever. Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are 
ends of the base g, these studs being so lo 
bottom plan views of the switch-stand with 
cated that the rear portion k' of each bell 
the base-plate removed, the operating mech 
crank will normally bear on the periphery of 
anism being shown in the positions to set the 
the disk, and the front portion k will project 
SWitch for the main line, the right-hand turn 
through an opening 2 formed in the front 8o 
Out, and the left-hand turnout, respectively. 
wall of base g, these openings being consid 
Referring to the drawings, A represents 
erably wider than the portion k of the bell 
the rails of the main line; B, the rails of the 
cranks, thus permitting the necessary lateral 
left-hand turnout; C, the rails of the right 
movement of the latter. Guard-plates L., 
hand turnout, and D a frog common to all the 
which are loosely fitted in grooves 3 formed 85 
tracks. 
in the front wall of base g, contain openings 
E is a set of switch-points connected by 
4 of a size to just receive the front portions k. 
angle-plates a to the ends of the main-line 
of the bell-cranks and are adapted to slide 
rails, and F a set of switch-points connected 
with the latter in operation. These guard 
by angle-plates a to the inner rails of the 
plates serve to close openings 2 at all times, go 
turnouts. band b are two tie-bars connecting 
thus preventing the ingress of foreign. Sub 
the points of one set with those of the other 
stances to interfere with the movement of the 
near the heels, and c and c are tie-bars con 
bell-cranks. 
necting the toes of the switch-points, these 
To the operating-rod, just above the cap H, 
connections being made in the usual manner. 
is secured a switch-lever M, which is adapted 95 
The tie-bars c and c' extend beyond the track 
to turn the said rod to operate the switch 
and have attached to these extended ends 
oints. To the outer end of this lever is piv 
throw-bars d and d, respectively, for connec 
otally connected a handleN, which is adapted 
tion with the bell-cranks of the switch-stand. 
to normally restin one of the notches h in cap 
so By this manner of construction I am enabled H, as shown in Fig. 4. The switch lever con- Ioo 
O 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
2. 
537,807 
tains mechanism for automatically locking 
the handle in its normal position, said mech 
anism consisting of a pivoted gravity-dog 5, 
the forward end of which is adapted to en 
gage with a shoulder 7 on the upper end of 
the handle N, as shown in Fig. 4, the dog be 
ing thrown out of engagement with said 
shoulder by an ordinary key inserted through 
a keyhole 8 engaging with a projection on 
the dog, thereby raising the dog from contact 
with the shoulder 7, as seen in Fig. 3 and per 
mitting the handle to be raised into operative 
position. 
A base-plate O is secured to the bottom of 
the switch-stand, serving to protect the mech 
anism, and is provided with slightly project 
ing ends for securing the stand to a tie or 
ground-plate P. 
The switch-stand being secured in position 
the throw-bars d and d are pivotally con 
nected to the ends of the bell-cranks K and 
K", respectively. 
The operation of my three-throw switch is 
as follows: When the handle is locked in the 
central notch h, the rear portion of each bell 
crank is bearing on the periphery of the op 
erating-disk and the front portions of said 
bell-cranks are thrown inward, as shown in 
Fig. 5, which operates to move the switch 
points to set the switch for the main line, as 
clearly seen in Fig. 1. 
If it is desired to open 
either turnout-the left-hand one, for in 
stance-the handle is unlocked, raised from 
the notch, and turned toward the right until 
it is above the notch in that portion of the 
cap, the stud h' preventing it from going too 
far, and the handle is dropped into the notch, 
when as before described it will be automati 
cally locked. This movement of the handle, 
through the switch-lever and operating-rod, 
moves the disk J toward the right, when the 
studi' comes into contact with the rear por 
tion of the bell-crank K and guides said por 
tion into and holds it in the recess j, thereby 
moving the outer portion of said bell-crank 
toward the right, as shown in Fig. 7, which 
moves the Switch-points connected to said 
bell-crank to open the left-hand turnout. The 
movement of the handle toward the left tends 
to place the respective parts of the mechan 
ism in the positions shown in Fig. 6, which 
would move the switch - points to open the 
right-hand turnout. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a three-throw switch, the combination, 
With a main line, two turnouts, one on either 
side of the main line, two sets of switch-points, 
One set being connected to the ends of the 
main-line rails and the other to the inner rails 
of the turnouts, and tie-bars connecting the 
SWitch-points of one set with those of the 
other, of a switch-stand provided with a hol 
loW base, a disk located in said base, the disk 
having a recess in its periphery, bell-cranks 
pivotally mounted within the hollow base, 
their forward ends projecting through open 
ings therein and their rear ends adapted to 
bear on the periphery of the disk and enter 
the recess therein in operation, and means for 
turning the disk, whereby the bell-cranks are 
operated to open or close either track at Will. 
2. In a three-throw switch, the combination, 
with a main line, two turnouts, one on either 
side of the main line, two sets of switch-points, 
one set being connected to the ends of the 
main-line rails and the other to the inner rails 
of the turnouts, and tie-bars connecting the 
switch-points of one set with those of the 
other, of a switch-stand provided with a hol 
low base, a peripherally recessed disk located 
within the base, said disk having a lateral 
projection provided with a stud in line with 
the recess, bell-cranks pivotally mounted 
within the hollow base, their forward ends 
projecting through openings therein and their 
rear ends adapted to bear on the periphery 
of the disk and be guided into and held in the 
recess by said stud, an operating-rod on which 
;the disk is secured, and a switch-lever Se 
cured to the operating-rod for turning the lat 
ter, whereby the bell-cranks are operated to 
open or close either track at will. 
3. In a three-throw switch, the combination, 
with a main line, two turnouts, one on either 
side of the mainline, two sets of Switch-points, 
one set being connected to the ends of the 
main-line rails and the other to the inner rails 
of the turnouts, and tie-bars connecting the 
switch-points of one set with those of the 
other, of a switch-stand provided with a hol 
low base, a peripherally-recessed disk located 
within the base, said disk having a lateral 
projection provided with a stud in line with 
the recess, bell-cranks pivotally mounted in 
the hollow base, their forward ends projecting 
through openings therein and their rear ends 
adapted to bear on the periphery of the disk 
and be guided into and held in the recess by 
said stud, an operating-rod on which the disk 
is secured, a notched cap, a switch-lever se 
cured to the operating-rod above the notched 
cap, a handle secured in the outer end of the 
switch-lever and adapted to turn the operat 
ing-rod, whereby the bell-cranks are operated 
to open or close either track at will, said han 
dle resting normally in one of the notches in 
the cap, and means for automatically locking 
the handle when in normal position. 
4. In a three-throw switch, the combination, 
with a main line, two turnouts, one on either 
side of the main line, two sets of switch-points, 
one set being connected to the ends of the 
main-line rails and the other to the inner rails 
of the turnouts, and tie-bars connecting the 
switch-points of one set with those of the 
other, of a switch-stand provided with bell 
cranks, the ends of which project through 
openings in the base of the switch-stand and 
75 
9 O 
95 
Ioo 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
537,80? 
3. 
are connected with the tie-bars, means for my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
operating the ls. R Open or t 
either track at will, and guard-plates sliding 
loosely with the bell-cranks in operation and 
5 adapted to close the openings in the base of 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
"r-r 
JOSEPII P. HASTY. 
presence of two witnesses. 
the switch-stand. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. BOSSERMAN, 
BOYD KIRK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US537907.txt	E. A. SNOW, 
ROSETTE OR CEILING OUT-OUT. 
Patented Apr. 23, 1895, 
civil 
2 
Era 
INVENTOR 
1,4- 
a/ 6.04:52. 
ATTORNEYs, 
(No Model.) 
No. 537,907, 
 
E. i6%as 
26%%-44 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EUGENE A. SNOW, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO JOHN R. OWEN 
OF SAME PLACE. 
ROSETTE OR CE LING CUT OUT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 537,907, dated April 23, 1895. 
Application filed September 21, 1894, Serial No. 523,753, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, EUGENE A. SNOW, of 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
5 useful Improvements in Rosettes or Ceiling 
Cut-Outs, of which the following, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Io rosettes or cut-outs employed for connecting 
main current-supplying wires or leads and a 
Supply branch, and for automatically sever 
ing such connection when the current is ab 
normally increased; and has for its object 
15 the production of a simple device, which is 
manufactured at a minimum cost, is readily 
assembled and connected in operative posi 
tion, affords secure mechanical connection be 
tWeen its base and cap, and insures practical 
. 2 o and efficient electrical connection between 
the members for fastening together the base 
and cap; and to this end it consists, essen 
tially, in the general construction and arrange 
ment of the parts of the rosette or cut-out, all 
25 as hereinafter more particularly described 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In describing this invention, reference is 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part of this specification, in which, like 
3o letters indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view of my 
improved rosette or cut-out. Figs. 2 and 3 
are, respectively, top and inverted plan views 
35 of the detached base. Fig. 4 is an inverted 
plan view of the detached cap. Fig. 5 is a de 
tail sectional view of adjacent portions of the 
fastening and circuit-connecting members of 
my rosette or cut-out. Figs. 6 and 7 are iso 
4o metric perspectives of said fastening and cir 
cuit-connecting members; and Fig. 8 is a de 
tail of a portion of a slightly modified form of 
rosette or cut-out piece, and a fastening and 
circuit-connected member secured thereto. 
The base is composed of wood, porcelain, or 
other suitable material, and is fastened upon 
a supporting Wall or ceiling, being provided 
with apertures a? a for receiving fastening 
screws, not illustrated. The cap b is also com 
5o posed of wood, porcelain, or other suitable 
45 
material, and is, as presently described, de 
tachably secured to the base a. The adja 
cent or inner faces of the base and cap a bare 
provided with annular shoulders a b' ar 
ranged one within the other and the cap b is 55 
formed with a socket b extending inwardly 
from its inner faced. If desired, the shoul 
ders a b' may be omitted, or one or both 
of said shoulders may consist of a series of 
separated projections arranged in an annu- 6o 
lar plane, as will be evident to one skilled in 
the art. 
The base and cap a b are secured together 
by fastening and circuit-connecting members 
cd secured to said parts, and it will be evi- 65 
dent that either of said members may be se 
cured to the base and the other to the cap. 
I have here illustrated two oppositely ar 
ranged pairs of fastening and circuit - con 
necting members, but obviously a single pair 7 o 
only may be used. The members c are shown 
as secured to the base a by clamping screws 
c' and the inner face of the outer ends of said 
base is preferably provided with cut-outs or 
angular sockets a for receiving the adjacent 75 
portions of the members c. The outer ends 
of said members c are suitably connected to 
the main current-supplying wires or leads, 
and are preferably extended beyond the pe 
ripheral face of the base ct, and are provided 8o 
with shoulders carranged at an angle less 
than a right angle with the remaining por 
tions of said members, and with clamping 
screws carranged at the inner sides of the 
shoulders cc. 
The main current-supplying wires or leads, 
not illustrated, are readily inserted between 
the shoulders c, and the shanks of the clamp 
ing screws c, and are engaged by the heads 
of said screws c and firmly secured to the 9o 
members c. The inner ends of the fastening 
and circuit - connecting members c are pro 
vided with arms c'extending outwardly from 
the inner face of the base C, and Said arms 
are formed with outer contact faces c and 95 
with shoulders c'extending laterally from the 
faces c' and provided with engaging faces c, 
and stop faces c. 
The fastening and circuit-connecting mem 
bers d are secured to the inner face of the cap Ioo 
85 
 
2 
587,907 
piece b by screws or other fastening means d' 
and are provided with arms diprojecting out 
wardly from said face and arranged at the 
outside of the arms c' of the corresponding 
members c, and with second arms d' inter 
posed between the arms cd. The arms di 
are formed of less width than the arms d, 
and corresponding extremities thereof pro 
ject laterally from the arms d and their Op 
posite extremities extend inwardly to Ward the 
center of the cap piece b. The outer faces d' 
of the arms d form contact faces, and in as 
sembling the parts of the rosette or cut-out 
the cap or base is partially rotated, and the 
faces d' impinge firmly against the corre 
sponding contact faces c of the fastening 
and circuit-connecting members c, as seen at 
Fig. 5. During this movement of the cap or 
base the arms dare free to yield more or less, 
and thus insure a more perfect engagement 
and a better electrical contact of the faces d" 
c than would otherwise be possible. 
The shoulders c, as clearly seen at Fig. 1, 
are normally interposed between the inner 
face of the cap b and the adjacent edges d' 
of the arm d, and the engaging faces c of 
said shoulders make contact with said faces 
d, and securely hold together the base and 
cap a b. The edges d of the arms dare pro 
vided with stop shoulders d', which engage 
the stop faces cof the fastening and circuit 
connecting members c and limit the partial 
revoluble movement of either the base or cap 
a, b incidental to the securement together of 
Said parts. 
The fastening and circuit-connecting mem 
bers cd are readily manufactured at a mini 
mum cost, and form a practical means of me 
chanically connecting the base and cap a b, 
and, OWing to the peculiar construction of said 
parts and the freedom of the arms d to yield 
When Securing said parts together, an ex 
tremely practical and efficient electrical con 
nection of the fastening and circuit-connect 
ing members c d is effected. The cap b is 
provided with suitable wire clamps e e', and 
fuse wires e interposed between said clamps 
and the fastening and circuit - connecting 
members C d. The supply-branches or wires, 
not illustrated, are passed through an aper 
ture b' in the cap b, and are also connected to 
the wire clamps ee'. 
At Fig. 8 I have shown a portion of a base 
a' formed with an opening a for the en 
trance of the main current-supplying wires 
or leads, and a circuit-connecting member c0 
having its outer end provided with an out 
wardly extending arm c and a shoulder c1, 
and it is obviows that this is no material de 
parture from my invention. 
The operation of my invention will be read 
ily perceived upon reference to the foregoing 
description and the accompanying drawings. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination with the base and cap 
O 
2) 
25 
45 
55 
Go 
 
o 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
of a rosette or cutout; of a fastening and cir 
cuit-connecting member d secured to one of 
said parts and provided with an arm dex 
tending outwardly from the inner face of said 
part, and a second arm d having one ex 
tremity extending laterally from a side edge 
of the arm d and its other extremity arranged 
at one side of said arm d and provided with 
a contact face d' and with an engaging face 
d5 separated from the adjacent face of said 
part, and a fastening and circuit-connecting 
member c secured to the other of Said parts, 
and provided with an arm c' extending out 
wardly from the inner face of the other part 
and formed with a contact face c for engag 
ing the former contact face d', and with an 
engaging shoulder c'extending laterally from 
its contact face c between the inner face of 
the former part and the arm d for engaging 
the face d, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
2. The combination with the base and cap 
of a rosette or cutout; of a fastening and cir 
cuit-connecting member d Secured to one of 
said parts, and provided with a yielding arm 
d having a contact face d', an engaging face 
d separated from the inner face of said part 
and a stop shoulder dextending from the 
faced toward said inner face, and a fasten 
ing and circuit-connecting member c secured 
to the other of said parts, and provided with 
a contact face c for engaging the contact face 
d', and with an engaging shoulder c extend 
ing laterally from the face c' for engaging the 
faced, said shoulder c being provided with 
a stop face c for engaging the shoulder d, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination. With the base and cap 
of a rosette or cutout; of a fastening and cir 
cuit-connecting member secured to one of 
said parts and provided with an arm extend 
ing outwardly from the inner face of said part, 
and a second arm of less width than the for 
mer arm having one extremity extending lat 
erally from the former arm and its other ex 
tremity arranged at the inner side of the for 
mer arm and provided with a contact face, an 
engaging face, and a stop shoulder extending 
toward the inner face of said part, and a fas 
tening and circuit - connecting member se 
cured to the other of said parts and provided 
With an arm arranged at the inner side of 
said second arm and extending outwardly 
from the inner face of said other part and 
formed with a contact face for engaging the 
former contact face, and with an engaging 
shoulder extending laterally from its contact 
face between the inner face of the former part 
and the second arm for engaging the engag 
ing face and stop shoulder of the former fas 
tening and circuit-connecting member, Sub 
Stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
4. The combination with the base and cap 
of a rosette or cutout having their adjacent 
faces provided with annular shoulders ar 
ranged normally one within the other; of op 
positely arranged fastening and circuit-con. 
TO 
II5 
I 25 
537,907 
8 
necting members Secured to one of said parts, 
and each being provided with an arm extend 
ing outwardly from the inner face of said 
part, and a second arm of less width than the 
former arm having one extremity extending 
laterally from the former arm and its other 
extremity arranged at the inner side of the 
former arm and provided with a contact face, 
an engaging face, and a stop shoulder ex 
tending toward the inner face of said part, 
and Oppositely arranged fastening and cir 
cuit connecting members secured to the other 
of Said parts and each having its outer ex 
tremity provided with an engaging shoulder 
arranged at the outside of the correspond 
ing annular shoulder, and at an angle less 
than a right angle, with the remaining por 
tion of Said member, and a clamping screw 
arranged at the inner side of said engaging 
shoulder; the inner extremity of each of the 
latter fastening and circuit-connecting mem 
IO 
 
bers being provided with an arm arranged at 
the inner side of said second arm and extend 
ing outwardly from the inner face of said 
other part and formed with a contact face for 
engaging the former contact face, and with 
an engaging shoulder extending laterally 
from its contact face between the inner face 
of the former part and the second arm, for en 
gaging the engaging face and stop shoulder 
of the former fastening and circuit-connect 
ing member, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name, in the presence of two attest 
ing witnesses, at Syracuse, in the county of 
Onondaga, in the State of New York, this 12th 
day of September, 1894. 
EUGENE A. SNOW. 
Witnesses: 
E. A. WEISBURG, 
K. H. THEOBAL.D. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538007.txt	(No Model.) 
C, ADAM. 
MECHANICAL TOY 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 538,007, 
Patented Apr. 23, 1895. 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
Gas 
i SS 
ass) 
E. E.I.T. H 
Hist". 
EEED- 2. 
era. 
  
a 
22Aneg 
T. e6 
624(2% 
- - - 
- 
The Norris PETERS co, Photo-LTHo., washingtoN, D. c. 
M2 2/eveale/ 
6erM.7%pa 
- 
72ervey 
2% 
(No Model.) 
No. 538,007, 
C, ADAM. 
MECHANICAL TOY, 
3 sheets-sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 23, 1895. 
t 
j 
( 
22aesses 
a%rewees tro 
6%.A(2% 
 
A weader 
62//7% we 
24% 
the Norris. Peterisco, photo-litho. Washingto. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 538,007, 
 
  
 
C. ADAM. 
MECHANICAL TOY, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Apr. 23, 1895, 
ZZIZE 
2S 2242 rtill II ?till 
SWITH TI-44 IZA 
(Zizzlizz 
H 
 
 
 
22eesses 
-76erawes 7%eweese. 
6.40% 
A22/e/eazr 
6.ar/7Zeeze 
. 
4%, . 
3%/54 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHOTO-LITHo, wasHINGTON. D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL ADAM, OF KNIGSBERG, GERMANY. 
MECHANICAL TOY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 538,007, dated April 23, 1895. 
Application filed May 9, 1894, Serial No. 610,672, (No model.) 
6 o 
75 
5 increase the illusion. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, CARL ADAM, a subject of 
the King of Prussia, German Emperor, and a 
resident of Knigsberg, in the Kingdom of 
Prussia, German Empire, have invented an 
Improved Mechanical Toy Imitating a Creep 
ing or Running Animal, of which the follow. 
ing is an exact specification. 
This invention refers to a toy representing 
an animal the motion of which is effected di 
rectly by its legs. In the similar toys known 
up to now, in which the legs were also caused 
to move, this movement did not cause that of 
the Whole animal, but was provided only to 
The animal was moved 
then by wheels driven by a wheel-work ar 
ranged Within the hollow body of the animal, 
said wheel-work effecting also the to-and-fro 
motion of the legs. 
In my improved construction, wheels for 
moving the animal forward are dispensed 
with. The wheel-work acts only on the legs, 
in Such a manner, however, that the same are 
not only moved forward and backward, but 
are at the same time lifted and lowered, these 
movements being so alternating that the mo 
tion of the animal is effected thereby, 
in order to make my invention more clear, 
I refer to the accompanying drawings, in 
which similar letters and numerals denote 
similar parts throughout the different views, 
and in which- 
Figure 1 shows a vertical longitudinal sec 
tion through the improved toy. Figs. 2,3 and 
4 show three different positions of the movable 
legs with their connecting-slide, the upper 
part of the body being removed. Figs. 5 and 
6 show details of the construction. . Figs. 7, 
8 and 9 show front-views of the movable pair 
of legs, corresponding to the Figs. 2, 3 and 4. 
Figs. 10 and ll are modifications. 
The drawings show two modes of execution, 
one (Figs. 1 to 9) representing a creeping, the 
other, (Figs.10 and 11) a going animal. There 
are provided in each of these cases two pairs 
of movable legs, which are coupled by a slide 
like organ serving at the same time to trans 
fer the movements of the source of force (the 
wheel-work within the body) to saidlegs. The 
latter are operated in such a manner, that 
those on the same side of the body always 
move in opposite directions, and that those 
which move forward are raised during this 
time, while the other legs moving relatively 
backward remain with their feet on the 
ground. 
Referring to Figs. 1 to 4, d. a' and a a are 
the two movable pair of legs, which are firmly 
connected with the pivots or axles b b', ar 
ranged in the frame c c'. The peculiar ar 
rangement of these axles forms a very essen 
tial part of this invention, in that the said 
axles may not only turn, but may also Swing 
sidewise in the manner of pendulums. The 
axles or pendulums b b' are held in the frame 
part c by projections c, Figs. 1 and 6, punched 
out of said part c, and are guided at their 
free ends by slots did, Fig. 5, provided in the 
frame-part c'. If, thus, the pendulum-axles 
bb are caused to swing, the two feet forming 
the pair (, a' or a a will be alternately lifted 
and lowered. (Compare Figs. 7 and 9.) 
The two pairs a. a' and a' a' of the legs are 
connected by a slide-like organe, Figs. 1 to 4, 
which is guided by aid of a slot e', Fig. 3, on 
the lower projecting end of an axle f of the 
wheel-work. Slide e may be displaced length 
wise, as well as turned on pivot f, both move 
ments being imparted to the slide by a trian 
gle g fixed to the main-axle h of the wheel 
work, and taking into a cutting-out e, Fig. 3, 
of said slide. The turning of the slide is but 
a slight one, only as small as necessary for 
swinging each of the pendulum axles from 
its one end-position, Fig. 7, into its other end 
position, Fig.9, by virtue of which movements 
either the legs a, and a or a? and a are 
lifted or lowered simultaneously. While be 
ing lifted and again lowered, the respective 
legs are moved forward by the axial displace 
ment of slide e, this displacement being also 
effected by the action of triangle g on the slide. 
Each pair of legs then represents a one-armed 
lever, the fulcrum of which is formed by that 
foot which remains on the ground. (Compare 
14 in Figs. 3 and 9 and 15 in Figs. 3 and 7.) 
If the position of the pendulumb or b' with 
the legs a a' or a a is in the middle between 
that of Fig. 7 and that of Fig. 9, the pendu 
lum-axles stand vertical, Fig. 8, their lower 
portions being in the middle of the slots did 
Fig. 5. Suppose now, axle b be oscillated in 
- 
O 
35 
45 
9o 
95 
O) 
2 
538,007 
The arrangement of parts above described 5o 
the direction of arrow 12, Figs, 3 and 9, leg a 
wheel-work, as shown in Figs. 1 and 6. Shaft 45 
will be lifted, while leg a' remains on the 
f of the, wheel-work is in this case provided 
ground, and supports alone now the weight of 
with a crank l connected by rods k with the 
the fore part of the body. Axle b' is, how- wings i. This crank when rotating causes the 
ever, at the same time oscillated in opposite 
wings to Swing up and down. 
direction, i. e., in the direction of arrow 13, 
Fig. 7, so that leg a is lifted, while leg a re 
with regard to an animal with horizontal or 
mains on the ground. The whole animal is, 
nearly horizontal legs, may be employed also 
thus, supported at the points 14 and 15, Figs. 
for animals with upright legs, as represent 
2 and 3, the latter being diagonally opposite 
ed as an example in Fig. 10. Instead of 
to each other. If, now, all parts are in the 
using in this case a triangle for operating 
position shown in Fig. 3, and if slide e is dis 
slide e, I may employ a crank g, Figs. 10 and 
placed then by triangle g in the direction of 
11, secured to the lower end of shaft f, and 
arrow 16, the pairs a. a' and a? a will be 
taking into the rear part of the slide the full 
turned like one-armed levers on the points 14 
crum and guide for the latter are formed in 
and 15, so that the body of the animal is 
this case by the main-shaft f'. The manner 6o 
moved forward, and the movable legs get the 
of working of this mode of execution is ex 
position shown in Fig. 2. Triangle g rotat 
actly the same as above described, and needs 
ing in the direction of arrow 17, Fig. 2, causes 
no further explanation. 
now the slide to turn a little on pivot f, so 
IIaving thus fully described the nature of 
that the position of the pendulums is re 
this invention, what I desire to secure by Let 
versed, i.e., the latter are swung to the other 
ters Patent of the United States is 
side. There are, therefore, the legs a and a 
In a toy representing a creeping or going 
lowered, and the legs a' and a lifted. The full 
animal, the combination with two pairs at a ', 
and a a of movable legs, of two axles b lo' 
Crums for the one-armed levers a d' and at a 
are transferred, thus, from the points 14 and 
carrying the latter, and being adapted to be 
15 to the points 18 and 19, Fig. 2, so that on 
turned as well as oscillated sidewise like 
the next displacement of slide e, the respect 
pendulums in slots did of the frame, together 
ive parts are moved from the position shown 
with said legs, leg a' being connected with 
in Fig. 2 into that shown in Fig. 4. By the 
leg a' by a slide e having a slot e', and em 
alternation and co-operation of the said two 
bracing with the latter a pivot fadapted to 
motions, i. e., the longitudihal displacement 
for in the fulcrum as well as the guide for said 
of slide e with its action on the horizontal 
slide, the latter being operated from a wheel 
movement of the legs, and the turning of that 
work, arranged within the body of the ani 
mal, by a revolving projection taking into 
slide with its action on the vertical movement 
of the legs by the mediation of the pendulum 
said slide, substantially as described. 
axles, the animal is moved forward directly 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
by its legs without the employment of wheels 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
1'unning on the ground. 
ing witnesses. 
In order to retard the movement of the ani 
mal, so that it moves but slow like a creeping 
chafer, and at the same time to increase the 
illusion, I prefer to make the wings of the 
chafer movable, and to connect them with the 
ARTHUR FAMLAND, 
CARL WINEY, Jr. 
CARL ADAM. 
55 
7 o 
75 
IO 
35 
4 O 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538107.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 538,107, 
H. J. FREDERICK. 
SAW. 
Patented Apr. 23, 1895. 
 
/WVENTOR 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY J. FREDERICK, OF BRAINERD, MINNESOTA. 
SAW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 538,107, dated April 23, 1895. 
Application filed June 27, 1894, Serial No. 515,878, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY J. FREDERICK, 
of Brainerd, in the county of Crow Wing and when the operator now desires to release the 55 
State of Minnesota, have invented a new and 
Improved Saw, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
The invention relates to the construction of 
buck SaWs, fret saws, and other saws having 
frames, and its object is to provide a new and 
improved saw, which is comparatively simple 
and durable in construction, and arranged to 
permit the operator to quickly give at any 
time the desired tension to the saw blade, and 
to permit of removing the saw blade without 
disconnecting the members of the saw frame. 
The invention consists in certain parts and 
details, and combinations of the same, as will 
be hereinafter more fully described and then 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figurel is a side elevation of the improve 
ment. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same; and 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged sectional plan view of 
part of the improvement, on the line 3-3 of 
Fig. 1. 
The improved saw is provided with the 
usual handlebar A, rigidly connected with the 
spacer bar B, carrying a brace C, on which is 
pivoted, at C, the front bar D, to which the 
front end of the saw blade E is secured, the 
latter being also attached in the usual man 
ner to the handle bar A. 
In the upper end of the front bar D is held 
a longitudinally-extending screw rod F, hav 
ing a wing nut F, abutting against a washer 
E resting on the front face or edge of the 
front bar D. The screw rod F has its rear 
portion extending over the top surface of the 
spacer bar B, and its rear end is formed with 
an eccentric strap F, in which works an ec 
centric G, mounted to turn on a pin G' held 
in the spacer bar B. On the top of the ec 
centric G is secured a handle G', adapted to 
be taken hold of by the operator, to turn the 
eccentric in the eccentric strap F, so as to 
impart a swinging motion to the front bar D, 
to loosen the saw blade E, or to give the de 
sired tension to the same. 
It will be seen that when the several parts 
are in the position illustrated in the drawings, 
then the saw blade E is under tension, and 
tension of the saw blade, he swings the han 
dle G' to the front, so as to give a half turn 
to the eccentric G, whereby the screw rod F 
is moved outward, and consequently the front 
bar D can swing in the direction of the arrow 
a', to loosen the saw blade E. 
In order to again give the desired tension 
to the saw blade the operator swings the han 
dle G rearward, back to the position shown 
in the drawings, so that the screw rod F is 
moved longitudinally and inwardly to pull 
with the nut F on the upper end of the front 
bar D, so as to cause the latter to SWing in the 
inverse direction of the arrow a', and from 
its fulcrum at C on the brace C. By the op 
erator adjusting the wing nut F, more or less 
tension can be given to the SaW blade E. 
In order to take up the strain when apply 
ing tension to the saw blade, I provide the 
spacer bar B with the forks Band B', of which 
the former is connected by a strap B with 
the handle bar A, so that the said strap takes 
up the strain at the time the handle G' is 
swung into an innermost position, as shown 
in the drawings. 
By the arrangement described, the operator 
is enabled by the simple movement of the han 
dle G as above described, to give the desired 
tension to the saw blade, or to loosen the same, 
and the saw blade E can be entirely removed 
from the handle bar A and front bar D with 
out disconnecting the individual members of 
the saw frame. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
I. A saw frame comprising the front and 
rear bars, a rigid spacer bar fixedly secured 
to the rear or handle bar and movably con 
nected with the upper end of the front bar, a 
brace secured to the spacer bar and pivotally 
connected at its front end to the middle por 
tion of the front bar to serve as the fulcrum 
thereof, a screw rod extending longitudinally 
along the spacer bar with its threaded end 
extended through an aperture in the upper 
end of the front bar and there provided with 
a nut, the inner end of the rod being provided 
with an eccentric strap, an eccentric pivoted 
75 
95 
25 
35 
45 
So 
538,107 
to the rigid spacer bar and working in the of the front bar to serve as the fulcrum there- 15 
said strap and a handle for the eccentric, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A saw frame comprising the front bar 
and rear or handle bar, a rigid spacer bar 
forked at its rear extremity and there secured 
in recesses in the upper end of the handle 
bar, the upper member of the fork being pro 
vided with a ?m shaped strap which embraces 
said handle bar, the front end of the spacer 
bar being movably connected with the upper 
end of the front bar, a brace secured at its 
inner end to the spacer bar and pivotally con 
nected at its forward lower end to the middle 
of, an eccentric pivoted on top of the rigid 
spacer bar near the forward end thereof and 
provided with a handle, an eccentric strap 
encircling said eccentric and provided with 
a screw rod extending forwardly through the 
upper end of the front bar, and a nut on the 
outer end of said rod, substantially as de 
scribed. 
HENRY J. FREDERICK. 
Witnesses: 
J. M. ELDER, 
D. R. ELDER. 
IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538209.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 538,209. 
J. O. COLLINS. 
WAX HEEL BURNISHING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 23, 1895. 
Atia 
 
 
 
IE 
I 
 
 
A HE II A 
AISR IS 
A. 
IEE. 
S. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 538,209, 
J. O. COLLINS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
WAX HEEL BURNISHING MACHINE, 
Patented Apr. 23, 1895. 
s S s 
B - 
T 
B' 
G 
 
WiFiless Es. 
? 
le- 
As 
IVe ?tor 
w 
the Nogris Perers co, Phoro-LTHO. washiiNGTON. D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN O. COLLINS, OF LYNN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO GEORGE E. 
BUTTERFIELD, OF MARBLEHEAD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
WAX-HEEL-BURNiSHING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 538,209, dated April 23, 1895, 
Application filed September 4, 1894, Serial No. 522,152, (No model.) 
To 0, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN O. COLLINS, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Lynn, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Wax-Heel-Burnishing Ma 
chines, of which the following, taken in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings, is 
a specification. . 
This invention relates to improvements on 
the United States Patent granted to me Feb 
ruary 27, 1894, No. 515,653, for wax heel bur 
nishing machines and it is carried out as foll 
lows, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of the 
invention. Fig. 2 represents a top plan view. 
Fig. 3 represents a vertical longitudinal sec 
tion on the line 3-3 in Fig. 1 parts being 
shown in elevation; and Fig. 4 represents a 
cross section on the line 4-4 shown in Fig. 2. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts wher 
ever they occur on the different parts of the 
drawings. 
In the drawings. A represents the base or 
standard of the machine to which is Secured 
the head B in bearings in which is journaled 
the driving shaft C which is set in a rotary 
motion by belt power applied to its pulley C 
like that described in my above mentioned 
patent. 
D,D represent the rockingburnishing disks 
having segmental corrugated portions d, d. 
and smooth portions d', d' and set in a rock 
ing motion by means of a cam or eccentric C' 
on the shaft C on which are journaled the 
links E, Ethe outer ends of which are pivoted 
to links F, F secured to the shafts D, D' of 
the burnishing disks D, D in a manner and 
for a purpose as fully shown and described 
in my aforesaid Letters Patent. 
The burnisher shafts D, D are journaled 
in longitudinal adjustable boxes G, G adapted 
to be guided in slotted perforations or re 
cesses B, B' in the head B as shown in Fig. 
4 and they are adjusted simultaneously to 
and from each other by means of a ScreW 
shaft Hjournaled in bearings in Said head 
and held from longitudinal motion therein; 
O 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
said shaft having right and left handed screw 5o 
threads h and h' working in correspondingly 
screw threaded projections on the respective 
adjustable boxes G, G as shown in Fig. 4. 
H is a crank or handle secured to one end 
of the spindle H and it will thus readily be 
seen that by turning said handle H the bur 
nisher disks and their boxes are simultane 
ously adjusted to and from each other as may 
be needed according to the size of the heel 
that is to be burnished. 
For the purpose of firmly securing the boxes 
G, G in their adjusted positions I employ set 
screws I, I which are screwed through the 
ends of the head B and having their inner 
ends pressing against the outsides of the 
boxes G, G as fully shown in Fig. 4. In prac 
tice I prefer to provide said set screws with 
check nuts i, so as to prevent their working 
loose after the boxes have been properly ad 
justed. 
Between the rocking burnishing disks D, 
D is arranged a yielding top lift support 
Kagainst which the lift of the heel is held 
during the burnishing operation as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 3. Said heel lift support is 
secured to a spindle k passing through a per 
foration in the head B as shown in Figs. 3 
and 4, and between said top lift support K 
and the head B is located a preferably coiled 
spring L which serves as a yielding support 
for the boot or shoe heel when held against 
the top lift support K as shown in Fig. 3. 
k' is a collar or projection secured to the 
rear end of the spindle c and it serves as a 
stop to limit the forward motion of the top 
lift support K as shown in Fig. 3. 
In the operation of burnishing the boot or 
shoe heel its top lift is held in contact with 
the yielding support K by which the boot or 
shoe is steadied while being guided against 
the rocking burnishing disks D, D and said 
yielding top lift Support K. also serves to 
prevent the outer edge of the top lift from 
being turned over during the burnishing op 
eration. 
Min dotted lines in Figs. I and 3 represents 
the boot, the heel in of which is to be bur 
nished and the top lift of which is held with 
85 
75 
95 
2 
538,209 
a yielding pressure against the yielding top 
lift or heel support K during the burnishing 
operation for the purpose set forth. 
Having thus fully described the nature, con 
5 struction, and operation of my invention, I 
wish to secure by Letters Patent and claim 
In a burnishing machine the combination 
with a Supporting frame of boxes G. Gadjust 
able to and from each other, rock shafts jour 
io naled respectively in the boxes and provided 
with burnishing disks D, D and a yielding 
top lift support K arranged between said 
burnishing disks substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 1st day of 
August, A.D. 1894. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 15 
JOHN O. COLLINS. 
Witnesses: 
ALBAN ANDREN, 
SAMUEL J. CRADDOCK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538309.txt	(No Model.) 
H. L. WOOD 
NUT AND BOLT LOCK, 
 
 
 
AZ72esses:- 
- 
-C-27 
Z2722/e72221 
46.4.4% -z, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE L. WOOD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
NUT AND BOT LOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,809, dated April 30, 1895. 
Application filed March 28, 1894, Serial No. 505,407, (No model.) 
To Cult, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HORACE.L. WooD, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city, 
county, and State of New York, have in 
Vented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Bolt and Nut Locks, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
bolt and mut locks, and has for its object the 
Safety and security of bolts and nuts, whereby 
the same are prevented from turning or be 
coming loose, and consists in the construction 
and novel combination which is illustrated 
by the accompanying drawings. 
Figure 1 represents a longitudinal view, 
partly in section, of a bolt and a nut embody 
ing my invention. Fig. 2 is a transverse sec 
tion in the line 2, 2, of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view of the dog which constitutes an 
essential feature of my invention. Fig. 4 rep 
resents a sectional view illustrating the ap 
plication of my invention to a screw bolt with 
Out a nut. 
For a further detailed description, A, in 
Fig. 1, designates a plain threaded bolt partly 
in Section, having a transverse slot a, partly 
through its threaded portion so as to receive 
the dog C, inserted thereinto, also having a 
cone-pointed screw b, screwed longitudinally 
into the threaded portion of the bore of the 
bolt and into the said slot and against the 
said dog, thus forcing the same outward and 
against the nut B, on said bolt; also A (in Fig. 
4) designates the bolt without a nut. 
B designates the nut on the, bolt A. 
B' and B, as shown in Fig. 4 designate two 
iron plates screwed together by the threaded 
bolt A, also showing the cone-pointed screw 
b, screwed into the threaded bore of the bolt 
and against the dog C, in slot a, in said bolt 
thus forcing the same outwardly and against 
said iron plate and thus locking the bolt. 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
The dog C, designated in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 
4 and more particularly shown in Fig. 3, has 
a groove on the curved portion thereof where 
the cone-point of said screw engages the same 
in forcing it outwardly when the same is in 
position in the slot of the bolt and has a 
sharp beveled edge, so that when in position 
and sufficiently forced outwardly and against 
the threads of the nut or plate, as the case 
may be, it holds firmly the nut or bolt and 
thus prevents the same from turning or be 
coming loose. 
To unlock the bolt or nut, simply turn the 
cone pointed screw backward two or three 
turns. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination with a screw bolt hav 
ing in one end a screw-threaded bore and 
having a transverse slot communicating with 
said bore, of a dog arranged in said slot and 
a cone-pointed screw screwing into said bore 
to press against the said dog for the purpose 
of forcing it outward, substantially as herein 
set forth. 
2. The combination with a nut, of a screw 
bolt having in one end a screw-threaded bore 
and having within the range of the nut a 
transverse slot communicating with said bore, 
a dog arranged in said slot and a cone-pointed 
Screw screwing into said bore for the purpose 
of forcing the said dog outward into engage 
ment with the nut, substantially as herein 
set forth. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
27th day of March, 1894. 
- 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
HORACE. L., WOOD, 
Witnesses: 
JAMES R. STEERS, Jr., 
ANTHONY J. ERNEST.' 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538409.txt	(No Model.) 
C. C. BURTON. 
TROLLEY WHEEL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 538,409, 
 
- Patented Apr. 30, 1895. 
 
 
 
& C. A 
3. 
S S 
M 
due edge 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
C. C. BURTON. 
TROLLEY WHEEL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 538,409, 
4- Patented Apr. 30, 1895, 
7-y i. 
f/ 
6 
39. 8 
= 
, = El 
20ichesses 
C. f. 6 (er- 
(?i-6 cc AC. 
N-VAveytorv 
-6-(a-& 6 ?jura - 
/3, way, yc/CL. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES C. BURTON, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF FOUR 
FIFTHS TO CURTIS G. HUSSEY AND JOHN C. DES GRANGES, OF SAME 
PLACE, LEWIS E. HOLDEN, OF BELOIT, WISCONSIN, AND GEORGE. M. LUD 
LOW, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
TROLLEY WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,409, dated April 30, 1895. 
Application filed August 24, 1894, Serial No. 521,153, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES C. BURTON, a 
resident of Pittsburg, in the county of Alle 
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
5 Vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Trolley-Wheels; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
My invention relates to electric current 
lo transmission wheels, or as they are more com 
monly termed, trolley wheels. 
The present invention bears a close rela 
tion to an invention set forth in an applica 
tion for Letters Patent, filed by me on the 
I5 11th day of August, 1894, Serial No. 520,075. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe the same 
more fully, referring to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figurel is a side view of a section of my 
improved wheel partly broken away. Fig. 
2 is a view of the outside plates. Fig. 3 is a 
Section on the line 33, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tion on the line 44, Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a top view. 
25 Figs. 6, 7, and 8 are views of another form of 
my invention. 
Like letters indicate like parts in each view. 
The trolley wheel a may be mounted to op 
erate in a vertical or horizontal position as 
3O may be desired. The said trolley wheel is 
composed of the hub a', spokes a and rim as, 
the hub and spokes being incased by the plates 
Ct' secured together by the bolts a. 
The spaces b between the several spokes 
35 form chambers for the reception of felt or 
other Suitable absorbent material b'. The 
hub ( has the passages b communicating 
With the chambers b whereby the lubricant 
employed finds its way to the journal b. 
4o When the wheela is in motion the centrifugal 
force Will throw the lubricant toward the rim 
a', but when the wheel is at rest the felt b' by 
capillary attraction draws the lubricant from 
the rim toward the center whence it makes 
45 its Way by the passages b to the journal b. 
In order to make an oil-tight connection be 
tWeen the rim a and the plate a?, said plates 
are formed with the shoulders b with which 
the rim C engages, so that when the bolts a 
 
55 
are tightened a very close connection is formed 5o 
which will prevent the leakage of oil. En 
circling the rim a are the contact blockS C, 
said contact blocks having the groove c' 
through which the conductor d passes. The 
contact blocks care further provided with the 
oblong lugs c on both sides thereof. The 
lugs care adapted to enter the oblong seats 
or recesses e' formed around the retaining 
rings e, said retaining rings e being held in 
place on both sides of the wheel by means of 
the bolts e' passing through said rings and 
the rim a. The recesses e' are of greater 
length than the lugs c, and consequently said 
lugs are free to move up and down therein. 
Furthermore the recessese' gradually increase 
in width toward the lower endse, whereby the 
lower ends of said lugs c have a certain 
amount of play therein thus imparting a rock 
ing movement to the contact blocks c. 
In order that the contact blocks C may be 
forced normally outward, I employ the Springs 
f. These springs fare interposed between the 
periphery of the rim a and the bottom faces 
of the contact blocks c, one spring engaging 
two adjoining blocks between the lugs c'. 
In Figs. 6, 7, and S I have illustrated my in 
vention in another form. The lugs care cir 
cular in form and adapted to enter the oblong 
recesses e'. The rim a has the groove a to 
receive the yielding cushion or tire g. The 
retaining rings e and contact blocks C are 
formed with the grooves g, g, respectively, 
to conform to the shape of the yielding tire g. 
When my improved trolley wheel is in use 
and traveling in contact with the conductor 
d it is forced up into contact with said con 
ductor by the ordinary spring mechanism 
commonly employed. The trolley wheel is 
forced against the conductor with sufficient 
force to depress two or more of the contact 
blocks. As the contact blocks are depressed 
the lugsic slide down in the recesses e', while 
at the same time the enlarged ends e' of said 
recesses permit of the rocking of said blocks 
slightly to enable them to conform to the con 
ductor, so that the faces of three or more 
blocks are held in contact with the conductor. 
This brings the conductor into contact with 
95 
7 o 
75 
538,409 
a greater portion of the periphery of the wheel 
than where the ordinary rigid contact surface 
is employed. The current thus taken up by 
the wheel may be transmitted by any suitable 
means to the motor. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. An electric current transmitting or trol 
ley wheel having seats or recesses formed 
therein, and a series of yielding contact 
blocks, each of said blocks being formed of 
One piece of metal, and lugs on the outer 
faces of said blocks adapted to move back 
and forth in said seats or recesses, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. An electric current transmitting or trol 
ley Wheel having seats or recesses formed 
therein, said seats or recesses widening toward 
the inner ends thereof, and a series of yield 
ing contact blocks, each of said blocks being 
formed of one piece of metal, and lugs on the 
outer faces of said blocks adapted to move 
back and forth in said seats or recesses, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. An electric current transmitting or trol 
ley wheel having a rigid rim, a series of yield 
ing contact blocks around the periphery of 
Said rim, lugs on said blocks, and retaining 
rings having recesses formed therein secured 
to said rim, said lugs entering said recesses 
and adapted to move back and forth therein, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. An electric current transmitting or trol 
ley wheel having a rigid rim, contact blocks 
around the periphery of said rim, lugs on 
said blocks, retaining rings having recesses 
formed therein, secured to said rim, said lugs 
entering said recesses and adapted to move 
back and forth therein, and a yielding body 
interposed between said rim and said blocks, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
5. An electric current transmitting or trol 
ley wheel having a rigid rim, contact blocks 
around the periphery of said rim, lugs on 
said blocks, retaining rings having recesses 
formed therein secured to said rim, said lugs 
entering said recesses, and adapted to move 
back and forth therein, and springs interposed 
between said rim and said blocks, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I, the said CHARLES 
C. BURTON, have hereunto set my hand. 
CHARLES C. BURTON. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. D. TOTTEN, 
ROBERT C. TOTTEN. 
- 
5 
O 
I5. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538509.txt	(No Model:) 
No. 538,509. 
W. J. FROST 
SPEAKING TUBE EXCHANGE, 
Patented Apr. 30, 1895. 
2x 
 
 
 
 
 
( 
M 
C) 
O O 
X X () 
sc-23XYXXXXXXN2 
XSS X XXX 
X XSS 
C X XXXX XXX 
&xSca {Z. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
XXXX Careers size2 
CXXX S2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z/2Zzzasses. 
\'s two 
Z7zzvezzz27 
Wa44. 9 (2.4/ 
g/ 
 
THE Norris PETERs co, PHOTo-LITHO. wasHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER J. FROST, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE RAU MANU 
FACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PIACE. 
SPEAKING-TUBE EXCHANGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 538,509, dated April 30, 1895. 
Application filed April 14, 1894, Serial No. 507,576, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it indy concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER J. FROST, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and usefui 
Improvements in Speaking-Tube Exchanges; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sae. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Speaking tube exchanges. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
simple and efficient means whereby Oral eom 
munication can be had between any two rooms 
of a building, or between any number of 
rooms connected in pairs, with the utmost fa 
cility and dispatch, the speech being con 
ducted simultaneously, and audible only to 
the occupants of the rooms so connected. I at 
tain this object by the novel combination, con 
struction and arrangement of parts herein 
after described and set forth, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a speaking 
tube exchange embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 is a central vertical section through Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged sectional detail view of 
a terminal tube, with the connecting tube 
inserted therein, showing also the terminal 
cover in a lifted position and the bolts with 
the circuit-forming wires connected thereto. 
Fig. 4 is a plan view of one of the terminal 
covers and the supporting-bolt to which it is 
pivotally attached. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates the 
switch-board or cabinet, formed of a non-con 
ducting substance or material, in which all 
the tubes from the several rooms to be con 
nected, terminate. Said switch-board is lo 
cated at a point in the building, or system, 
most convenient for running the tubes there 
from to the various rooms, and, with regard 
to the attention required for its operation. 
2 are the tube terminals, which as repre 
sented are elbows formed of cast metal, the 
inner ends of which are attached to the speak 
ing tubes, while the outer terminal ends pass 
O 
35 
40 
45 
fo 
7 O 
through perforations in the Switch-board, and 
project a slight distance beyond the front face 
thereof. 
3 are terminal indicator covers. Said cov 
ers are pivotally attached or hinged to the 55 
heads of bolts 4, secured to the Switch-board, 
and in their normal position are adapted to 
close the tube terminals. Said covers have 
outward central projections 5 formed there 
on, which projections-when the covers are 
thrown down -strike against the heads of 
bolts 6, secured to the switch-board directly 
underneath the bolts to which the covers are 
attached. Said covers are formed with an 
outward extending end 7, which-When the 
cover is in its lowest position, in contact with 
one of said bolt heads-projects above the bot 
tom of the terminal tube opening, in Such 
manner, that when a cylindrical body is in 
serted in the tube opening, it will push said 
extended end down, and will lift the cover up 
out of contact with the bolt head, to the po 
sition shown in Fig. 3. The screw ends of the 
bolts to which the covers are attached, pro 
ject from the inside of the switch-board, and 
are all connected together by a circuit form 
ing wire or conductor 8, connecting there 
with an electrical battery 9, and bell 10, and in 
like manner the lower bolts are connected to 
gether, and to the battery and bell by the 
wire 11, the arrangement for ringing the bell 
being that in ordinary use, and operated by 
closing the circuit in the usual manner, and 
which is accomplished by contact of the cover 
with the head of the lower bolt, the circuit be 
ing broken by lifting the cover therefrom. 
12 is a flexible tube, centrally secured to a 
projecting shelf of the switchboard, and is 
provided at its center with a flap covered 
whistle 13, and at its ends With Sockets or 
thimbles 14, which are adapted to be inserted 
into the terminal tube openings, to connect 
any two of Said openings or tubes. Any de 
sired number of said flexible tubes may be 
arranged side by side, and of varying lengths, 
Suited to the size of the SWitchboard and to 
the number of rooms, so that private conver 
sation can be carried on between any num 
ber of pairs of rooms at the same time, and 
which is a desired object. 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
 
538,509 
which tube is then removed and the terminal 
covers returned to their normal position. 
The numbers of the respective rooms are rep 
resented upon the Switchboard as shown in 
the dra Wings. 
I am aware that it is not new, to blow over 
a hinged terminal cover by means of an air 
current forced through a speaking tube. I 
am also aware, that a sliding indicator cover 
for the tube terminal, has been blown from a 
rest or support, and allowed to drop by grav 
ity, a sufficient distance to expose the numer 
als representing the number of the room, and 
in thus dropping to close an electrical circuit 
to ring a bell, after which it is required to be 
pushed down by hand to expose the tube 
opening and to stop the bell. I do not, there 
fore, claim such as my invention. In my in 
vention, the tube opening is fully exposed 
when the bell rings, and the bell is automati 
cally stopped by the insertion of the flexible 
tubes, the arrangement being exceedingly 
Simple and not liable to derangement. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
The combination in a speaking-tube ex 
change, of a cover pivotally attached to the 
exchange Switchboard, and adapted in its 
normal position to cover or close the terminal 
tube end, and to be blown down therefrom, to 
ring a bell or sound an alarm as described, 
said cover provided with an end portion 
which projects above the bottom of the tube 
opening when the cover is in a down position, 
and by which the cover is adapted to be au 
tomatically lifted up to stop the alarm, by the 
insertion of a connecting tube into the termi 
nal tube opening, Substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WALTER, J. FROST. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE A. SWARTWOUT, 
A. ALBERTA BESSOR, 
55 
o 
75 
15 represents a transnitting, receiving and 
signaling apparatus, and which, as it is of a 
well known type and already patented, needs 
no description. Said apparatus is secured at 
any convenient point in relation to the switch 
board, and has attached thereto a flexible 
tube 16, the free end of which is adapted to 
be inserted into the tube terminals, and to 
lift the terminal covers to stop the alarm. 
One of Said apparatuses is located in each 
room, and attached to the speaking tube con 
necting the exchange there with. 
From the foregoing description, the mode 
of operation will be readily understood. The 
Occupant of One room desiring to communi 
cate with that of another, pushes down the 
collapsible signal device attached to the trans 
mitter, compressing the air in the speaking 
tube With Sufficient force to throw down the 
exchange terminal cover of the tube, which 
in falling closes the electric circuit, thereby 
ringing the bell, and directing attention to 
the fallen cover, and open terminal tube, into 
Which the attendant inserts the flexible tube 
attached to the exchange transmitter, thereby 
lifting the cover, breaking the circuit and 
Stopping the bell. The attendant then ascer 
tains the number of the room with which com 
munication is desired, after which the trans 
mitter tube is removed, and the ends of the 
flexible connecting tube are inserted. The two 
rooms being thus connected, the occupant of 
the room desiring to communicate, sends a 
signal from his transmitter to the connected 
room, -or which, if preferred,-may have 
been sent thereto by the attendant before the 
connection is formed, when the occupants of 
the connected rooms may converse at will, and 
when done a signal sent from either or both 
of the rooms will Sound the whistle in the con 
necting tube, the flap cover of which will be 
blown Over, thereby, and the attendant noti 
fied that communication is no longer desired, 
the particular rooms being indicated by the 
blown over whistle flap of the connecting tube, 
O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538609.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 538,609. 
Patented Apr. 30, 1895. 
T. C. DEXTER, 
PAPER FOLDING AND PASTING MACHINE. 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
g t2: 
root, 
 
(No Model.) 
T. C. DEXTER. 
PAPER FOLDING AND PASTING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 538,609. 
Patented Apr. 30, 1895. 
: ; 
; ; 
-- 
; ; 
i. i. 
-- 
e-; ; 
- 
; 
: 
; i.e.- : 
f 
L- 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
4. 
s 
| 4-2, 
 
ES iT 
 
 
 
 
 
TTY, 
 
s' 
 
| \s 
re 
H 
f 
i 
i 
t 
: -6+ 
zzi 
All 
 
 
 
4. 
 
ill 
mm 
His ini 
- 
Z-E E. 
(7. 
O 
s: 
it 
X 
42-1 o s 
-s E 
WNESSES : 
NVENTOR: 
42 
%-4-?ee 
a. 
/3, 6, 4 
ze ATTORNEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
T. C. DEXTER. 
PAPER FOLDING AND PASTING MACHINE. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 538,609, 
Patented Apr. 30, 1895, 
WITNESSES : 
62 (2.42es 
2%-4ae. 
e 
NyENTOR: 
7.2% (6. /6%. 
/%. 62.-- 
% ATTORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TALBOT C. DEXTER, OF FULTON, ASSIGNOR TO THE DEXTER FOLDER 
COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
PAPER FOLDING AND PASTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,609, dated April 30, 1895. 
55 
75 
O 
25 
Application filed April 13, l894, 
Serial No. 507,360, (No model.) 
of the insert feed-table being broken away to 
illustrate subjacent mechanisms. Fig. 3 is a 
side view of a portion of the paper-folding 
blade. Fig. 4 is a transverse section of the 
same. Fig. 5 is an enlarged side view of that 
portion of the machine where the folding of 
the paper is effected. Fig. 6 is an enlarged 
vertical section on line XX in Fig. 2, showing 
the parts in position for introducing the sheets 
between the folding-rolls; and Fig. 7 is an en 
larged detached plan view of one of the pa 
per-supporting fingers. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre. 
sponding parts. 
-R-R- represent the rollers which re 
ceive the paper and fold the same in its pas 
sage between said rollers. These folding roll 
ers are journaled in boxes mounted on the 
frame-A- and are geared together to rotate 
with the upper portions toward each other in 
the usual and well known manner. 
-a-a-a- are bars, the tops of which are 
in a plane slightly above the tops of the fold 
ing-rollers. Upon these bars is carried the 
main sheet to be folded...said sheet being fed 
onto the aforesaid bars by tapes -e-e-e- 
in the same manner as shown in my Patent 
No. 488,271 hereinbefore referred to or by any 
: other suitable and well known paper-convey 
ing devices, and when the sheet is delivered 
to its requisite position for being folded, it 
lies with the center of its width over the bite 
of the aforesaid folding-rollers as indicated by 
dotted linej'. 
-G- denotes the folding blade which re 
ceives a vertically reciprocating motion to in 
troduce the paper between the folding-rollers. 
Said motion may be derived by any suitable 
mechanism, it being in this case represented 
of the same form as in my patent aforesaid, 
viz: A lever-e-I'-pivoted to the frame-A- 
has one end in contact with and is oscillated 
by a revolving cam -I-. The opposite end 
of said lever is connected with the blade-G- 
To aid tufton, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, TALBOT. C. DEXTER, of 
Fulton, in the county of Oswego, in the State 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Paper Folding and Pasting 
Machines, of which the following, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to the class of ma 
chines which fold a sheet of paper by pass 
ing it between revolving parallel rollers, and 
simultaneously insert another sheet between 
the folds of the aforesaid sheet and paste it 
thereto; and the invention has more particu 
larly reference to the machine for which I 
have obtained United States Letters Patent 
No. 488,271, dated December 20, 1892. In the 
machine shown in said patent, I attempted to 
cause the folding blade to obtain the requi 
site hold on the sheet to be inserted by press 
ing the front marginal portion of said sheet 
tightly between a flexible bar and the folding 
blade so as to double said portion of the sheet 
over the edge of the blade. I found however 
by subsequent practical use of said machine 
that said treatment of the sheet could not be 
depended upon for producing the desired ef 
fect, even with needles permanently attached 
to the folding blade. Ifound that there was a 
tendency of the needles preventing the insert 
sheet from being readily discharged by the 
folding blade, resulting in its not being prop 
erly tucked into the main sheet. I also found 
some difficulty in feeding the insert sheet to 
35 its requisite position over the folding-rollers, 
owing to the excessive space between the edge 
of the feed-board carrying said insert sheet 
and the cushion or yielding plate which was 
designed to temporarily support the advance 
edge of the insert sheet. 
The purpose of my present invention is to 
obviate all of the aforesaid defects, and to that 
end the invention consists in the improved 
construction and combination of parts as here 
inafter fully described and set forth in the by a pitman-P-. 
claims. 
a side elevation of a paper folding and past 
ing machine embodying my improvements. 
Fig. 2 is a top plan view of the same, a portion 
To one side of the blade-G - is connected 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a plate - G- which has a limited vertical 
movement and has secured to it a plurality 
of clamps -n - in which are secured verti 
cally adjustable needles or pins -n- which 
45 
 
95 
IOO 
588,609 
75 
5 
95 
IOO 
los 
Io 
II5 
I 25 
O 
2 or 
25 
35 
45 
5 O 
normally project with their points beneath 
the bottom edge of the folding blade -G-. 
To the folding blade-G- are also attached 
a plurality of brackets -o-o- each of which 
is formed with vertically perforated ears 
-o'-o'- in which slides a stem -b-, to the 
lower end of which is pivoted a roller-o'-. 
Said stem is suspended by means of a collar 
fixed to the upper end thereof. and resting 
upon the upper ear -o'-. Immediately 
above the lower ear-o'- is another collar 
fastened to the stem -b- and between this 
latter collar and upper ear is a spiral spring 
-b'- surrounding the stem and imparting a 
downward pressure thereto for the purpose 
hereinafter explained. 
-D-represents the feed-table from which 
to pass the supplemental sheet to its position 
under the folding blade-G-. This table is 
mounted on a rock-shaft-C- which receives 
its rocking motion by a lever -E- fixed at 
one end to said shaft and has pivoted to its 
opposite end, a roller-c-by which it bears 
on a rotary cam-E'- as more clearly shown 
in Fig. 2 of the drawings. The table is thus 
caused to rock longitudinally and carry its 
delivering end to a limited degree toward and 
from the folding rollers -R-R-. Across 
the under side of said end of the rocking table 
-D- extends a bar -X- as shown in Fig. 6 
of the drawings, which bar is supported on the 
table movably lengthwise thereof by means of 
shoes --d--d- loosely embracing the edges 
of the table. To this bar are attached thin 
flat metallic fingers -d'-d- respectively 
opposite the needles -m-n - and extending 
toward the same. Said fingers are provided 
with slots -d'- extending through the free 
ends thereof and adapted to receive through 
them the aforesaid needles during the opera 
tion of the machine. These firgers receive 
intermittent longitudinal movement toward 
and from under the folding blade by means 
of pitmen - if f - connecting the ends of the 
finger-carrying bar to the free ends of arms 
- f'-f'- fixed to a rock-shaft -g- which 
is actuated by another arm -g- fastened 
to said shaft, and connected at its free end to 
a pitman -h- having on its opposite end a 
roller by which it bears on a rotary cam-h'-. 
To cause the needles to pierce the supple 
mental sheet and draw it down to the main 
sheet and then automatically withdraw the 
needles from the paper as the folding blade 
introduces the paper between the folding 
rollers, I connect to the plate-G'- upwardly 
extending stems -i- which pass through 
eyes -B'- on the free ends of arms -B'- 
supported on the cross-bar -B-, which is 
fastened to the frame A. By means of spiral 
springs -- surrounding the stems and 
bearing with their upper ends against the un 
der sides of the eyes-B'-- and with their 
lower ends on collars -'-attached to the 
stems a downward pressure is imparted to 
the plate -G-, the vertical movement of 
which is limited by the lengths of the verti. 
cal slots -w- through which the attaching 
screws -'- of the plate -G'- pass as 
shown in Fig. 3 of the drawings. The nee 
dles are thus held normally projecting be 
neath the folding blade -G - to pierce the 
paper as hereinafter described. 
To cause the needles to automatically with 
draw from the paper after the supplemental 
sheet is brought into position to enter with 
the main sheet between the folding rollers, I 
provide the stems -i- with vertically ad 
justable nuts or other suitable stops -j- 
which strike the tops of the eyes --B'- at 
the proper time to cause the stems to arrest 
the downward movement of the needle-sup 
porting plate-G'- while the folding blade 
tucks the paper between the folding-rollers 
in which operation the paper is pushed down 
from the ends of the needles. 
The nuts or stops -j- can be secured at 
the desired elevation above the eyes -B'- 
to allow the needles to retain their hold on 
the paper for a longer or shorter period as 
may be desired. 
To the cross-bar -B- are also attached 
the bars -k-k- which have their free ends 
over the adjacent folding roller -R- and 
have attached to them downwardly project 
ing gage-plates -l-l- for receiving the ad 
vance edge of the supplemental sheet of pa 
per as it is fed from the table -D-. 
-p-p-p represent a paste-trough which is 
hinged to the under side of the table -D- 
and has the pasting roller -r- protruding 
through the bottom of the trough to apply a 
strip of paste to the top of the main sheet 
when the said table is tilted down and the 
said sheet is being drawn through between 
the folding-rollers. Said pasting-roller may 
be rotated by any suitable mechanism, which 
in this instance is represented of the form of 
a miter-pinion -s- on the shaft of the roller 
-- which pinion meshes with a similar 
pinion-s-attached to a shaft -t- which 
extends through the rear end of the paste 
trough and is supported on an arm -t- 
mounted on the rock-shaft -g-. To the 
rear end of said shaft is secured a pulley 
-t, - which is connected by a driving belt 
with a pulley -t/- fastened to a counter 
shaft -- which is driven by a belt -'- 
running on a pulley -n - attached to said 
counter - shaft and on a pulley -m'- at 
tached to the shaft of the can ---. 
The portion of the main sheet at the oppo 
site side of the folding blade-G- receives a 
strip of paste by a pasting device which is 
constructed and operated in the following 
manner: Ashaft-N-parallel with the past 
ing blade is mounted in suitable bearings 
-O-O-attached to the cross-bar-B- and 
receives a rocking motion by a crank-O- 
attached to said shaft and connected to the 
end of a pitman -O'- which receives in 
termittent reciprocating motion from a cam 
-L-attached to the shaft of the cam -I-. 
Opposite the center of the length of the fold 
5 5 
 
588,609 
O 
25 
35 
45 
ing blade is an arm -F- fastened to the 
shaft -N- and extending toward the fold 
ing blade. On the free end of said arm is 
mounted the paste-trough -p'- the bottom 
of which is provided with a slot through 
which the pasting - roller -r'- protrudes. 
This roller is secured to a shaft-F-mount 
edin bearings on the arm-F-and on the arm 
-F'- secured to the end of the rock-shaft 
-N-. To the corresponding end of the shaft 
-F'- is fastened a pinion -H- which 
meshes with the gear of one of the folding 
rollers-R- when the arms-F-and-F'- 
are depressed by the motion of the rock-shaft 
-N- as represented in Fig. 6 of the drawings. 
The operation of the described machine is 
as follows: When the machine is in position 
for receiving the paper to be folded, the fold 
ing blade-G-, arms -F-and-F'- and 
adjacent end of the table -D- are raised 
and the fingers -d--d- are pushed for 
ward under the folding blade as shown in 
Fig. 1 of the drawings, the main sheet be 
ing then fed to its requisite position under 
the folding blade and the supplemental sheet 
pushed forward on the table -D- until the 
advance edge of the sheet strikes the gages 
-l-l-and in this position the fingers-d'- 
-d'-support said portion of the sheet. The 
folding blade then descends and causes the 
needles -n-n- to pierce the supplemental 
sheet directly over the slots of the aforesaid 
fingers, which slots permit the needles to ef 
fectually penetrate the paper. Then the fin 
gers-d'-d'-are retracted to allow the blade 
-G - with its needles and rollers -o'- to 
further descend. At the same time the table 
-D- is tilted to increase its inclination and 
carry its delivery end closer to the folding 
rollers and thus facilitate the withdrawal of 
the supplemental sheet from the table -D-. 
The needles having a secure hold on the sup 
plemental sheet, compel the same to follow 
the movement of the folding blade, which in 
troduces the same with the main sheet into 
the bite of the folding-rollers -R-R-. In 
this operation the needles are prevented from 
following the folding blade by the stops -j- 
on the stems -- coming in contact with the 
stationary eyes -B'- as represented in Fig. 
6 of the drawings. Said arresting of the move 
ment of the needles causes the same to be 
withdrawn from the paper while the folding 
blade tucks the paper between the folding 
rollers. At the same time the rollers -o'- 
bear on top of the supplemental sheet and 
hold said sheet down while the needles are 
being withdrawn from the paper. Said bear 
ing of the rollers-o'-upon the supplemen 
tal sheet directly over one of the folding-roll 
ers, also insures the entering of said sheet 
between the folding rollers simultaneously 
with the main sheet. As the paper is drawn 
down between the folding-rollers, the tilted 
5 table -D- and depressed arm -F- hold 
the pasting-rollers-r-and-r'-in contact 
with the main sheet and apply thereto strips 
of paste by which the supplemental sheet is 
fastened to the main sheet in the process of 
folding the same. 
; O 
85 
75 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In combination with the folding rollers, 
main sheet-supports, folding-blade and sup 
plemental sheet gage, a supplemental feed-ta 
ble rocking longitudinally and carrying its 
delivery edge toward and from the folding 
rollers, a bar extending across said table and 
movable lengthwise thereof, fingers project 
ing from said bar and supporting the edge of 
the supplemental sheet, intermittently recip 
rocating pitmen imparting movement to Said 
bar, and needles carried on the folding blade 
and piercing the advance edge of the supple 
mental sheet to draw it down to the main 
sheet substantially as set forth. 
2. In combination with the folding-rollers, 
main sheet support, supplementary feed-ta 
ble and folding blade, brackets attached to 
said blade, vertically movable stems sus 
pended from said brackets Springs imparting go 
downward pressure to said stems and rollers 
pivoted to the lower ends of the stems and 
in position to bear on the paper in the process 
of entering between the folding -rollers, as 
shown. 
3. In combination with the folding-rollers, 
main sheet support, supplementary feed-ta 
ble, folding blade and supplemental sheet 
gage, intermittent reciprocating fingers on the 
delivery edge of the supplementary feed-ta 
ble temporarily supporting the advance edge 
of the supplemental sheet, needles on the fold 
ing blade piercing the said sheet while thus 
supported, brackets attached to the folding 
blade, vertically movable stems suspended 
from said brackets, springs pressing said 
stems downward, and rollers pivoted to the 
lower ends of said stems to bear on the sup 
plemental sheet as set forth. 
4. In combination with the folding-rollers 
and folding blade, a supplemental feed-table 
having its delivery end over one of the fold 
ing-rollers and parallel there with, gages over 
the other of said folding-rollers, fingers on said 
feed-table movable toward and from the gages, 
a plate extending lengthwise of the folding 
blade and connected thereto movable verti 
cally independent thereof, needles secured to 
said plate and projecting normally beneath 
the folding blade, springs imparting down 
ward pressure to the needle-carrying plate, 
stationary arms provided with vertical eyes 
over said plate, stems attached to the plate 
and passing through said eyes, and stops on 
the upper ends of the stems and by contact 
with the said eyes arresting the downward 
movement of the needle-carrying plate while 
the folding blade tucks the supplemental 
sheet and main sheet between the folding 
rollers as set forth. 
5. In combination with the folding-rollers 
and folding blade, the Supplemental feed-ta 
ble -D- rocking with its delivery edge to 
ward and from said rollers, the fingers-d'- 
95 
OO 
. 
I 1.5 
I 25 
 
4. 
538,609 
5 
o 
connected to said table movable longitudi 
nally and provided with the slots-d'-, the 
gage -l- in front of said fingers, pasters re 
spectively under the table -D- and back of 
the aforesaid gage and movable vertically to 
and from the plane of the main sheet convey 
ers, the plate -G - carried on the folding 
blade movable vertically independent thereof, 
the stationary arms -B"- provided with 
eyes-B'- over said plate, the stems -i- 
connected to said plate, and passing through 
said eyes, collars-i'-attached to said stems 
beneath said eyes, springs -i- interposed 
between the eyes and collars, stops -i- at 
tached to the upper ends of the stems, brack 
ets -o- attached to the folding blade, verti 
cally movable stems -b-supported on said 
brackets, springs -b'-imparting downward 
pressure to said stems and rollers-o'-piv 
oted to the lower ends of the stems -b-all 
combined to operate substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name this 19th day of March, 1894. 
TALBOT C. DEXTER. L. S. 
Witnesses: 
C. F. ANDERSON, 
F. E. CHUBB. 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538709.txt	E. P. SPAFARD. 
DESK RULER, 
Patented May 7, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 538,709. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELISHA P. SPAFARD, OF GLASTONBURY, CONNECTICUT. 
DESKs RULER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 538,709, dated May 7, 1895. 
Application filed December 28, 1894, Serial No. 533,162, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ELISHA. P. SPAFARD, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Glas 
tonbury, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Desk-Rulers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to the class of imple 
ments that are used about a desk for ruling 
straight lines, for measuring short distances 
or for tearing paper, checks and the like; and 
the object is to provide an implement of this 
class which is simple and cheap to manufac 
ture, which is convenient for use in ruling 
straight lines or tearing paper, checks or the 
like, which is so shaped that it can be easily 
and readily handled, and which is so con 
structed that it will retain its shape without 
danger of warping, twisting or bending with 
use and age. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the device. Fig.2 
is an enlarged view of the same, and Fig. 3 
is an end view of a modified construction of 
the device. 
In the views 1 indicates the body of the 
ruler, which is usually made of a strip of 
wood, but may if desired be formed of any 
other suitable material with the ordinary bev 
eled edge 2 which is provided with the cus 
tomary markings into inches and parts of 
inches, or any other convenient scale. This 
beveled edge may be reinforced with a strip 
of metal 3 in the usual manner and the mark 
ings may be upon the upper flat face or the 
lower beveled face, either or both as desired. 
Secured at an angle to the upper face of this 
body near the back edge, so as to project up 
Ward and backward, is a handle and stiffen 
ing strip 4 which is usually formed of the 
same material as the body part, and prefer 
ably of about the same width. If the body 
part 1 is formed of wood this back strip may 
be also formed of wood and simply glued to 
the upper face near the back edge of the body 
part. In this case the body part and the back 
strip may be formed at the same time on the 
same machine, one part being the counter 
O 
25 
35 
45 
part of the other with the exception, of course, 
of the measuring scales, which are marked 
along the beveled edge of the body part. If 
desired, this back strip need not be secured 
to the upper face of the body part, but the 
body part may be also beveled on its back 
edge and this back edge glued to the lower 
edge of the back strip, as shown in Fig. 3. 
A desk tool formed in this manner is sim 
ple to manufacture, is cheap to construct and 
is convenient in use. When the body part 
is provided with a back strip projecting at 
an angle in this manner it is held perma 
nently in such a way that it will not warp 
and bend or twist out of shape, for the body 
part stiffens the back strip and the back strip 
stiffens and holds the body part. The back 
strip applied in this manner also provides a 
handle for the implement which can be firmly 
grasped and securely held by the fingers 
when the implement is used either for ruling 
lines or for tearing paper. When the imple 
ment is constructed in this manner it always 
stands on the desk in such position that it 
can be quickly picked up ready for use, for 
the back strip will stand projecting upward, 
and as it is on the side opposite from the 
bevel on the lower front edge of the body 
part, that edge is always right side up ready 
for use in ruling lines, tearing paper or meas 
uring. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A desk ruler consisting of a body part 
having the lower side of one edge beveled 
and a back strip projecting from the upper 
face of the back edge of the body part, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. A desk ruler consisting of a body formed 
of a strip of wood having the lower face of 
one edge beveled and provided with a wooden 
back strip which projects upward and back 
ward at an angle from the back edge of the 
upper face of the body part, substantially as 
specified. 
ELISHAP. SPAFARD. 
7 o 
75 
90 
Witnesses: 
H. R. WILLIAMS, 
E. J. HYDE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538809.txt	(No Mode. 
No. 538,809. 
 
 
- B. WOLHAUPER. 
TIE PLATE. 
Patented May 7, 1895. 
- E 
A. 
Fictor occasiztierest 
2.222 22, 
2%.22% . 
2 
Ce 
| g if FF c 
1. 
 
C 
sells Le Hassess Miss 
 
 
 
 
 
unmauwa 
merneauaaroaaaaaa.os 
Felipsis 
namenaruanacos 
s 
. 
 
leg ce 
 
 
Z12zzesses. "W 
(N. S. 52%. . 
." 
42-224-2, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
. . . 
BENJAMIN WOLHAUPTER, OF MORGAN PARK, ILLINOIs. . 
 
TiE-PLATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 638,809, dated May 7, 1865. . 
.w 
Application filed March 13, 1895. Serial No. 541,521 (No model). 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
; : 
. 
" : 
. . 
* 
To all whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN WoLHAUP. 
TERa subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
residing at Morgan. Park, county of Cook, 
5 State of Illinois, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Tie-Plates; and I 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
So it pertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form apart of this specification. 
Heretofore in the use of railway tie plates 
two general styles of plates have been em 
is ployed. The plates were first put into use 
without top flanges, that is, flanges on the top 
of the plate against which the rail flange could 
abut and the plate thereby be utilized to pre 
... vent the latral movement of the rail aud 
20 consequent widening of the gage; but in the 
use of these smooth top plates it was found 
that the constant thrusts of the rail laterally 
tended to shear the spike and the latter had to 
be frequently-renewed. To relieve the spike 
e5 and obviate this item of reinewals the plate 
was provided with atop ridge or flange against 
which the rail flange could bear, the flanges 
on the under side of the plate which engaged 
the tie supposedly holding the plate against 
3O. any movement along the tie and the plate 
thereby relieving the spikes from the shear 
ing action of the rail caused by its lateral 
thrust; but in the use of these plates with 
top flanges it has been found that the lateral 
thrust of the rail has caused the flanges on 
the under side of the plate to break or com 
prss the wood fibers, and allow the plate to 
creep along the tie longitudinally thereof. 
When the plate has once moved it has been 
practically impossible to again hold the top 
flange against the rail flange after the rail 
has been returned to its original and proper 
position, since, the under flanges have no 
wood to abut against, the result being that 
45 even with the top flange on the plate, the 
spike has had to take the thrust of the rail 
after the plate has been in use a short time 
thus rendering useless thi 
soon shearing the spike ". . 
- 5 
My invention has for its object the prodie: 
tion of a plate which while heig provided 
with the top flange to receive the thristgf. 
the rail is so cohstricted on its under side 
that after it has been moved by the lateral 
. . 
So 
35 
. . 
. . . 
. . . 
. . . 
The invention further contemplates a form:60 
pressure of the rail it, together with the rail 55 
can be easily moved back to the proper posi 
tion to maintain the gage, and beheld in that: 
position even more firmly than when origi: , 
nally laid, 
. . . . 
of plate provided with top and under flanges'. 
which shall.be...extremely strong, in-its cons. 
struction and effective in-its-designed use: 
and yet easily rolled or formed into shape as 
well as very lightweight. . 
. 
65; 
It consists in a combination of devices and ". 
appliances hereinafter described and claimed 
In the drawings, Figure' is a plan view of . 
the rail and plate thereqa and portion of the . . 
tie. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the rail, 70. 
showing an end elevation of the plate. Fig.'" 
3 is a cross-section of the rail and side elevar. 
tion of the plate. . . 
. " 
In carrying out the invention. A represents: 
the track rail; B the tie, and C the:tie plate. 75. 
The plate is preferably, although not neces 
sarily formed into the shape, shown inore p&r- 
ticularly in Fig. 2, that is to say, what may be 
termed a trussed shape so that flanges airs. 
provided on both the inder side as at e, cc, 8o 
and top sides as atc. On the top side a . 
way c for the railor what may be termed 
the rail seat is provided. The flanges on their 
under side are preferably shaped with coil 
paratively sharp edges, c, so that they will 85 
readily enter and separate the grain of the 
tie. As will be seen when in position these 
under anges extend parallel with the grain 
of the tie, the ends being substantially bluut, 
or square and forming abutments to preyeit 9o 
so far as possible the plate fron creeping, 
along the tie. It will be observed that by this 
form of plate there is much less opportunity 
or chance of buckling than with the ordinay . 
flatplate since each point where the railrasts. 55 
upon the plate, is sipported and trussed by 
metal which is more or less of edge instead, 
of on its side, thereby fortning for each rest. 
ing point of the rail two girdersc joined . . 
. 
the apex by the top flanges (where ther 
co 
rests. By the above, constrictionals, the 
wood between the flarges c, e, c, Wille. , 
of the approaching sides. 
cause of the sloping. 
of the flanges becompressed between he 
flanges, thereby greatly aiding in sustaining Q5 
the weight put upon the plate, and also ine 
digmoisture from the wood utider the s: 
plate. A form of plate such as I have just de 
top flange and wood be 
r. 
 
Y 49 
2 
538.809 
 
go 
io 
s 
So 
. 
scribed is also of material advantage in that 
am enabled to make it muchlighter in weight. 
In this construction of plate with the same 
amount of material as is ordinarily used in 
tie plates a nuch stronger plate is obtained. 
Heretofore it has been a commercial neces 
sity in order to get the price of plates, where 
they could be sold for use on the cleaper 
grade of ties, to reduce and diminish as far 
as possible the material and consequently the 
weight of the plate;. The result has been that. 
with the plate flat and thin it has buckled 
when the rail pressure has been broughton it 
thereby daunaging the tie as well as render 
ing the plate useless as a bearing for the rail; 
but in my construction since the points where 
the rail rests are supported by metal thore or 
luss in upright position the plate is greatly 
strengthenied without addition of weight. So 
also by a construction as above the top of the 
plate where the rail is seated comprises a ses' 
ries of flat portions with 
series of depres 
sions between, so that while there is abtin 
datatwearing surface between the rail and 
plate, there is space for sand, cinders, &c., to 
Again, these depressions permit 
work out. 
the draining off of water aid moisture so that 
in cold weather the top of the plate partieu 
larly the space between the raii and plate is 
not covered with ice and the friction between 
the rail and plate thereby either lesseed or 
obviated entirely. 
. . . . 
will now describe the second feature of the, 
invention, viz., the ability to adjust the plate. 
to take up any widening of the gage due to 
the lateral movement of the plate and rail. 
The ends of the engaging fanges on the un 
der side of the plateate regularly stepped or 
cut on a diagonal line as counpared with tie 
rail flange. It is of course-obvious that the 
ends of the danges might be cut on this di 
agonal line or the entire end of the plate cut 
in this way. In my presetit drawings I have 
shown the latter construction, the entir end 
of the plate being sheared diagonally as at D. 
- The operation is as follows: The plate is of 
course originally engaged to the tie in such a 
location as that the rail will be in proper posi 
tion to form the proper gage of track. Each. 
of the flanges c toc will displace enough of 
the fiber to alluw then to enter the face of the 
After the plate has been iti use sothe 
tie. 
time the lateral pressure of the rail.will move 
the plate to a greater or less.extent along the 
length of the ti and the ends d of each flange 
c to c' will compress the fiber in advance of 
it... Now if the plate is removed theie will be. 
a series of indentations or perforations in the 
face of the tie-made by the flanges c to cand 
these indentations or perforations will be 
stepped or on a diagonal line...The plate is 
now replaced on the tie with the edge Emoved 
to a position shown by dotted lines F. This 
will bring each flange c to cinto the inden 
tation or perforation originally occupied by 
the flage next adjacent with the exception 
of the flange c nearest the edge E, this fiange. 
gastring a new indentation for itself. Now if. 
the end d of each fanged to c is brought to: 
a bearing against the end of the indentation 
made by the next preceding faige and the 
ends of these fianges are as a diagonai line 
as compared to the rail flagge, i.e. plate will 
be found to have foved lengthwise of the tie 
a distance equai to the difference between the 
length of each plite fange measured from its 
end to the railfange. Noyy as will be seer. 
this movement of the plate engthwise of the 
tie will forea the rail laterally a correspond- . 
ing distance, thus restoring the desired gage. 
of the track. If one shifting of the plate is 
not sufficient to take up the abnormal width . 
of the gage, or if after the plate has been 
shifted, it again gives way to sufficiently 
widen the gage the edge E can he shifted to 
the position shown by dotted lines G. 
It will be seen by the above description that 
I have described only one end of the plate as 
having the finges stepped or on a diagonal 
line. It practice, however, both ends could 
and probably would be beveled or stepped 
and as I will presently explain this will give . 
an opportunity to reverse the plate end for 
end and obtain additional adjustments. It 
is obvious that after the second adjustment 
the flange c' wilt occupy the space originally 
occupied by the fanged. Now by reversing 
the plate and for end, the end cof the tiange 
could be in the indentation originally occa 
pled by the flanged. Therefore by making the 
distance between the rail fiage and the endic 
one step-greater than the distance from the 
raii flange to the end can additional adjust 
ment is gained when the plate is reversed 
and by inaking the ends , crespectively a 
step longer than, the preceding flage two 
more adjustinents are gained...it will thus be: 
seen that after the plate is laid it caci, be 
shifted twice, then turned eud for nd (an ad 
justment being gained by the turning) and 
then shifted twice, tinaking in all five adjust 
ments. It is obvious, however, that the num 
ber of adjustinents ean be greatly increased 
if desired, only being limited by the width of 
i is 
the tie. 
Amaterial advantage in thias employing the 
indentations for another flange after they 
have once been made by a preceding flange, . . 
is that every time the plate shifts by virtue of . . 
. 
the pressure of the rail laterally, it compresses 
: 2c 
the fibers in advance of it so that by the time 
the plate has been adjusted once or twice it 
takes much more pressure arid a much longer 
time for the rail. to shift it more. 
. Athuther feature of the iuventioni is the pro 
vision of the pairs of spike. holes in diagonal 
corners. This is for the purpose of permitting 
'the spike to be driven into the old spike hole 
in the tie after the plate has been adjusted, 
, thus obviating the necessity of driving a hew 
plateis adjusted, 
hole in the tie every time the 
and thus spoiling the tie. . 
. 
It is obvious that the construction just de 
scribed is susceptible of tuany changes, and 
95 
. . 
. . 
. 
. 
o 
f io 
1 25 
13c. 
o 
25 
30 
35 
to 
45 
SS 
55 
. 
. . . scribed . 
- 
to 
IS. 
20 
25 
 
the princ object of the invention still be at 
tained. lor instance, the under flanges might 
be divided, or instead of flanges they might 
be merely projections and the plate instead 
of having its end beveled might be square, 
and the inder flanges alone bestepped; or but 
a single end of the plate need be stepped; or 
the flanges having one or more of their ends 
stepped might be applied to a flat plate or to: 
the numerous other constructions of plates 
now on the market. . 
. In all of the above named variations the 
principle enployed is the sauno, and each 
would embody the essential idea of my inven 
tion which consists in providing a plate on 
its under side with a series of stepped flanges 
or projections, that is to say, flanges or pro 
jections arranged on a diagonal line with re 
spect to the rail flange. 
- 
What I claim is 
1. The combination with the rail and tie of . 
the tie plate provided with a seriesiotstepped 
tie engaging flanges or projectionsist the un 
der side, each arranged to fit into the perfo-. 
ration made by the flange or projection next 
adjacent, whereby when the plate is shifted 
transversely of the tie it is also shifted longi 
tudinally thereof, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with the rail and tie of 
the tie plate provided on its under side with 
a Series of engaging flatiges, adapted to enter 
the tie at least one end of said plate and 
flanges being cut on a diagonal iina with re 
lation to the rail flange, substantially as de 
seribed. 
3. The eonbination with the rail and tie, of 
tlie tie plate provided on its ander side with 
one or more engaging flanges, adapted to en 
... ter the tie extending parallel with the grain. 
of the tie, the opposite ends of said flange or 
flanges being different distances from the ver 
tical plane of the rail, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination with the rail and tie of 
the tie plate provided on its under side with 
a Series of tie engaging flanges or projections, 
adapted to enter the tie the ends of the flanges 
or projections at one end of the plate being a 
greater aggregate distance from the rail flange 
than the ends of the flanges at the otheriend 
of the plate, substantially as described, 
5. The combination with the rail and tie of 
the tie plate provided on its under side with 
a series of engaging flanges or projections, 
adapted to enter the tie the ends of which are 
with respect to each other a variable distanc 
from the vertical plane of the rail flange, the 
ends of the flarges or projections at one end 
of the plate aggregating a greater distance 
from the rail flange tillan those at the other 
end of the plate, substantially as described. 
G. The combination with the rail and the tie 
of the tie plate provided on its undor side 
with a series of flanges adapted to enter the 
tig and at least a portion of which project be. 
yond the vertical plane of each edge of the 
rail flange, the series of flangoes on one side of 
. . . . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
So 
SS 
538 809 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
90 
7o 
the vertical plane of the rail ?aage being 
longer than those on the other side, substan 
tially as described. . . 
7. The combination with the rail and tie? 
the tie plate, provided on its tinder side with. 
a series of fanges adapted to enter the is 
and at least, aortion of which projects be 
yond the vertical plane of each edge of the 75 
rail flange, at least one endo each dange be 
ing arranged on a diagonal line with respect 
to the railfange, the series of flanges on oge 
side of the raifange beioglonger thaa the 
series bn the other side, substantially as de- 80 
scribed... 
8. A railway tie plate formed on the under 
'side with. devices more' or less sharpened 
adapted to penetrate and engage the tie, and 
on its apper side with a series of fanges on 85 
which the rail rests, substantially is de 
9. A railway tie plate formed with fianges 
on the under side for entering and engagin 
the tie parallel with the grain thereof at 
having initieupper side depressions parallel 
with and ve:issily above the fianges on the 
under side, substantially as described. . . 
. 
10. A'railway tie plate the body of which is 
formed intos series of arches, the lower edges 95 
of said arches being provided with tie-enter 
ing and engaging devices or flanges, substan 
tially as described. . 
- -3. 
ii. A railway tie plate the body of which is 
formed into a series of arches the lower edges 
of which are provided with tie-eatering and 
engaging flanges, and the upper side of the 
plate having a series of depressions vertically 
above said engaging flanges, substantially as 
12. A railway tie plate provided on its un 
described. 
der side with tie engaging flanges more orless 
sharpened extending parallel with the grain 
of the tie, and with spike holes, extending 
hrough said flanges, substaitially as de IIo 
'seribed. 
i3. A tie plate provided with at least,four 
spike holes arranged in pairs in diagonacor 
ners of the plate, substantially sas described. 
tie of the plate havirig on its underside one 
or more holding fanges or projections adapted 
to enter, and perforate the tie, and at least 
one or more additional flanges or projections 
on the plate, the latter being a differeri dis 20 
tance from the yertical plane of the raif and 
on a plane paralek with the length of the tie, 
different from the first namedflange or pro 
jection whereby when the position of the plate 
is changed so that the second flarge enters as 
the perforations originally occupied by the 
een shifted, along the 
- 
first the plate has 
length of the tie, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifics 
tion in the presence of two witnesses, 
BENJAMIN WOLHAUPTEB. 
14. The combination with the rail and the as 
- - - 
AO5 
Chey 
- 
- 
Witnesses: 
W. H. CHAMBERLIN, 
FLORENCE EBRsy. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US538909.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 538,909. 
J. GROSS, 
LUBRICATOR. 
Patented May 7, 1895. 
A 727 
  
 
 
 
wooeo: 
26%. 
THE NORRisperers co, PHOTOLITso: WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB GROSS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
LUBRICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 538,909, dated May 7, 1895. 
Application fled September 20, 1893, Serial No. 485,951. (No molel) 
vr 
fication. 
claimed. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB GROSS, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at the city of 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia, 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Lubri 
cant Cups, of which the following is a speci 
My present invention relates to lubricant 
cups and more particularly to lubricant cups 
having a forced feed. 
The principal objects of my present inven 
tion are, first, to provide a simple, reliable, 
compact, and comparatively inexpensive lu 
bricant cup from which the lubricant is con 
tinuously and automatically fed; second, to 
provide convenient means for re-filling the cup 
and readjusting its working parts, and, third, 
to provide convenient means for accurately 
regulating or controlling the rate of feed from 
the cup. 
My invention consists in the improvements 
in lubricant cups hereinafter described and 
The nature, characteristic features, and 
scope of my invention will be more fully un 
derstood from the following description taken 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings forming part hereof, and in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal central section of 
a lubricant-cup embodying features of my in 
vention and showing the central portion there 
of broken away for convenience of illustra 
tion. Fig. 2 is an elevational view of a rod 
adapted for use in removing the piston or 
plunger of the lubricant-cup in order to per 
mit of the refilling of the oil receptacle or 
casing, and Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional 
view taken on the line 33 of Fig. 1 in order 
to illustrate the set-screw for clamping the 
plug to place. 
In the drawings, C, is a lubricant receptacle 
or casing having its respective or opposite 
ends up-set, thickened, or flanged as at a', and 
externally threaded as at a. 
b, is an internally tapering discharge nozzle 
or fixture provided with a transversely rang 
ing open ended seat b, and screwed onto the 
externally threaded portion a, of the lower 
end of the casing a. 
c, is plug afforded a range of rotary and of 
endwise motion in the seat b, and provided 
- 
. 
5 
O 
5 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
- 
a- 
with a fluid way c', corresponding in diame 
ter with the internal opening or fluid way b', 
of the nozzle or discharge fixture b. This plug 55 
c, is provided with a shank c, that penetrates 
a revoluble cap d, screwed onto the exterior 
of the seat b', which is threaded for this pur 
pose. The plug c, is revolubly connected with 
the cap d, by means of a nut e, screwed or 60 
otherwise attached to the outer end of the 
shank c. 
f, Fig. 3, is a set-screw penetrating the 
curved wall of the seat b, and having its end 
adapted to enter and work in a slot or key 65 
way c, Fig. 1, cut or otherwise formed in the 
curved wall of the plug c. When the cap d, 
is screwed away from the seat b', or in other 
words is shifted toward the left in the draw 
ings, it causes the plug c, to be shifted in a 70 
similar direction with the result that the ap 
erture or fluid way c', in the plug is moved 
out of alignment with the internal opening or 
fluid way b?, in the discharge nozzle or fixture 
b, whereby the flow of oil, grease, or other lu- 75 
bricant from the casing or receptacle C, is 
checked. In this connection, it may be re 
marked that during the above described Op 
eration of the screw cap d, the point of the set 
screw f, works in the slot or key Way c, and 8e 
thus prevents accidental rotation of the plug 
without preventing or otherwise interfering 
with the free endwise movement thereof. 
Moreover the set screw f, may be screwed in 
ward until its point engages the bottom of the 85 
slot or key way c, and thus prevents acci 
dental movement of the plug c, after the same 
has been adjusted into the required position. 
The rate of discharge through the aperture b, 
of the nozzle or fixtureb, may also be increased 9 O 
or diminished by screwing the set Screw f, out 
of engagement with the slot c, and clear of the 
plug c, and then rotating the latter c, by means 
of the nute, thus causing the fluid way c', to 
be turned out of or into alignment with the 95 
internal opening or fluid way b, in the dis 
charge nozzle or fixture b. 
g, is a cover plate screwed onto the upper 
threaded portion of or otherwise attached to 
the casing or receptacle C, and provided With IOC 
a gasket or packing g', whereby the upper 
end of the receptacle or casing C, is hermeti 
cally closed or sealed, h, is a piston or plum 
ger afforded a range of movement in the cas 
 
538,909 
ing or receptacle a, and tightly fitted to the 
side walls thereof by means of split rings h". 
This piston or plunger h, is provided with a 
tapped socket h, adapted for detachable en 
gagement with the threaded end , of a rod i, 
as is hereinafter more fully explained. In 
the present instance, the rod i, is provided 
with a guide disk i, and with a pointed end i. 
The disk , serves to direct the pointed end 
i, of the rod i, into the socket h, and thus 
facilitates the operation of screwing the rod 
into the socket when the piston is at or near 
the lower end of the casing or receptacle a. 
i, is an inlet connection penetrating the en 
largement or flange a, at the top of the cas 
ing or receptacle a, and adapted to introduce 
steam, air, Water, or other analogous sub 
stances or materials under pressure into the 
space A, above the piston h. 
lc, is a drip cock penetrating the flange or 
ring a', at the bottom of the receptacle or 
casing a, and adapted for purposes herein 
after mentioned. 
The mode of operation of the hereinabove 
described lubricant cup is as follows: The 
portion b, of the discharge nozzle or fixture 
b, is connected with the bearings of a crank 
pin or cross-head, or with the pillow block of 
a shaft, or with a suitable portion of the parts 
to be lubricated. The interior portion B, of 
the receptacle or casing a, beneath the piston 
or plunger h, is filled with oil, grease, or other 
lubricant. For this purpose, the cover plate 
g, is unscrewed and removed from the top of 
the casing or receptacle a, and the piston or 
plunger h, is drawn out by means of the rod 
i', which is caused to engage the socket h, in 
the manner herein above described. The pis 
ton or plunger h, and cover plate g, are then 
replaced and steam, Water, air, or other anal 
ogous substances or materials under press 
ure are introduced into the chamber A, by 
means of the valve j', through the inlet con 
nections.j, with the result that the piston h, is 
continuously forced downward, thus causing 
the oil, grease, or other lubricant to be dis 
charged from the chamber B, through the fluid 
ways band c', onto the bearings or other parts 
to be lubricated; it being understood that the 
drip cock k, is closed during this operation. 
The rate of discharge from the chamber B, 
may be regulated or controlled in two ways, 
first, by turning the screw cap d, and thus 
shifting the plug c, endwise whereby the fluid 
way c', is shifted into or out of alignment with 
the fluid way b, thus increasing or diminish 
ing the rate of flow, and, second, by turning 
the set screw f, out of engagement with the slot 
or key way c, and clear of the plug c, and then 
turning the latter by means of a wrench or 
other suitable means applied to the nute. In 
either case the plug c, may be retained to place 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
55 
after it had been properly adjusted by means 
of the set screw f, which for this purpose is 
screwed inward in such manner that its end 
bears upon the plug. Where steam or water 
is employed, for depressing the piston or 
plunger h, the drip-cock lic, affords means for 
drawing off the water contained in the cham 
ber A, after the piston or plunger has com 
pleted its full downward stroke and before 
the chamber is refilled, because the distance 
from the bottom of the chamber A, to the 
drip-cock k, exceeds the thickness of the pis 
ton or plunger. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
apparent that the pressure exerted by the 
substance or material in the chamber A, will 
uniformly force the oil, grease, or other lubri 
cant out of the chamber B, without requiring 
any manipulation or attention, in contradis 
tinction to lubricant cups in which use is 
made of a spring or other device that requires 
to be adjusted in order to compensate for the 
discharge or feed of the lubricant. The pis 
ton h, serves to prevent the material or sub 
stance under pressure and contained in the 
chamber A, from puncturing the oil or grease 
contained in the chamber B, and escaping 
through the fluid way b. 
It will be obvious to those skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains that modi 
fications may be made in details of construc 
tion and arrangement without departing from 
the spirit thereof. Hence I do not limit my 
self to the exact arrangement and disposition 
of parts herein set forth and illustrated in 
the drawings, but 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my present invention, what I claim 
as new, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
In a lubricant cup having inlet connections 
near its top for introducing steam or the like 
under pressure and having lubricant outlet 
connections at its base, the combination of, 
an imperforate cover detachably applied to 
the cup, an imperforate piston-head having a 
smooth periphery, a pet cock located above 
the bottom of the cup at a distance exceed 
ing the thickness of the piston and adapte?i 
for drawing off water from above the same 
after the completion of its full stroke, and a 
rod for detachably engaging the piston to af 
ford means for removing the same after the 
water has been drawn off from above it, sub 
stantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
JACOB GROSS. 
Witnesses: 
A. B. STOUGHTON, 
KATIE. M. GILLIGAN. 
65 
75 
95 
O 
I o5 
IO 
II5. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539009.txt	(No Model.) 
G. F. QUINN. 
COMBINED REFRIGERATOR AND FREEZER. 
No. 539,009. 
trar 
F.I. CC/ 
Patented May 7, 1895, 
2 
SNS 
2%ar 2 2 2. 
2S2 
(ZZ N 
 
. 
 
-- 
 
 
N 
NZN 
 
 
N2 
222222222222 ZZZZZZZZZZZZ & SNSSN 
NYANYSNYaYa 
N NNE 
WZZinesses: 
Fig. 2. 
p. 
Iruye72ZoZ: 
THE NORRIS PETERs co. PHOTO-LTHO. wash.INGTON, D. c. 
 
y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GILBERT F. QUINN, OF PORTLAND, MAINE, ASSIGNOR TO THE G. F. QUIN 
- 
REFRIGERATOR COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
coMBINED REFRIGERATOR AND FREEZER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 539,009, dated May 7, 1895. 
- Application filed May 26, 1894, Serial No. 512,578, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GILBERT F. QUINN, a 
citize 
the United States of America, resid 
ing at Portland, in the county of Cumberland 
5 and State of Maine, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in a Combined Re 
frigerator and Freezer; and I do hereby de 
clare, the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
-i o enable other's skilled in the art to which it ap 
- pertainake and use the same. 
avention relates to improvements in a 
6ined refrigerator and freezer, and more 
articularly to certain principles of construc 
f5 tion which tend to increase the refrigerating 
and freezing power and to regulate the degree 
of temperature. 
It consists in a containing case constructed. 
with suitable air spaces and non-conducting 
2O Walls and arranged and constructed inte 
riorly as follows: Between the ice bunker and 
the refrigerating or freezing room is a parti 
tion formed by a series of angular sections 
arranged one above the other and forming 
25 between each two sections an open space lead 
ing from the refrigerating or freezing room 
into the ice bunker, the apex of each section 
extending above the lowest point of the sec 
tion immediately above it, thus forming be 
3o tween each two sections an inverted V-shaped 
open space, the object of which will be here 
inafter more fully set forth. Between the 
bottom of the ice bunker and the bottom of 
the refrigerator case is a series of ice sup 
35 porting bars placed at short distances apart, 
and extending from the lower section of said 
partition over said ice bars, and thence to the 
wall of the ice bunker is a wire netting to 
hold small particles of ice and salt. Under 
40 neath the ice bunker are an inclined drippan 
and a trap leading down through the refrig 
erating case, and a partition which prevents 
the water from passing through into the re 
frigerating or freezing room. At the top of 
45 the refrigerating room is a ceiling inclined 
downwardly away from the ice bunker. The 
walls of the ice bunker have a shield with in 
clined openings therein leading to a cold air 
space between the partition and refrigerator 
The object and operation of these several 
5o Case. 
In the drawings herewith accompanying 55 
parts, together with certain other details of 
construction, will be hereinafter more fully 
described. 
and making a part of this application, Figure 
1 is a vertical longitudinal section. Fig. 2 is 
a horizontal section of the same. 
Same letters refer to like parts. 
In said drawings a represents the case 6o 
proper of my improved refrigerator and 
freezer. This case may be made in any con 
venient or desirable way. As at present con 
structed, it rests upon the floor and has an 
outside wall b, dead air space c, interior wall 65 
d, insulatore, air space f, and inner wall g. 
It also has suitable doors leading into the re 
frigerating room and into the ice bunker. 
The space formed by the interior wall g is 
divided into two parts by a partition formed 7o 
of a series of sections h arranged to form an 
angle and placed one above the other leaving 
a spacej between each two sections. These 
sections have their ends supported in any 
convenient manner against the walls of the i5 
case. These sections are so arranged that the 
apex of one is higher than the lower extrem 
ity of the one next above it, so that said 
spacesi between each two adjacent sections 
form as it were air siphons leading from the 8o 
refrigerating room k into the ice bunker l. 
To reduce the temperature in the refriger 
ating room below the point of freezing, it will 
be necessary to break up in some measure the 
ice in the ice bunker and mix there with a 85 
quantity of salt to promote rapid melting of 
the ice. In order to do this, it is necessary 
to provide means or openings for the inser 
tion of an ice breaking tool into the bunker. 
at levels below the door m. To accomplish go 
this object, I leave out half of each alternate 
section c' next to the refrigerating room. 
At the bottom of the ice bunker is a series 
of bars in resting upon suitable supporting 
bars O. Extending from the inner wall of the 95 
lower section downwardly and over said sup 
porting bars o and thence to the rear wall of 
the ice bunker, is a wire netting p which 
serves to prevent small particles of ice and 
salt from passing through. Passing over said Ico 
netting at points directly over said bars o are 
supplemental bars q, upon which the cakes 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
f 
: 
Y 
539,009 
 
75 
So 
of ice are designed to rest instead of resting 
The netting al 
directly upon the netting. 
lows the free passage of water and cold air 
out of the ice bunker into the drip pan r be 
5 neath. These last are not essential, but they 
protect the wire from injury by the cakes of 
ice. The walls of the ice bunker are lined 
with a partitions forming an air space t be 
tween the partitions and the interior wall g 
Io of the case. This partition has a series of in 
clined ports' u leading from the ice bunker 
into said air space. Said air space t leads 
downwardly and opens into the lower extrem 
ity of the ice bunker, and thence through the 
netting into the drip pan. 
The drip pan is formed by the two sides 
and rear wall of the case, and a partition v 
between the drippan and the refrigerating 
room. A considerable portion of the floor of 
20 the drippan is formed by an inclined bottom 
w, extending from the rear wall downwardly 
and terminating just before the trap.'" The 
trap consists of a pipe a leading from the 
drip pan out of the refrigerator case: . Over 
25 the head of the pipe is a strainer headly near 
the bottom of which are perforations 2, through 
which the surplus water escapes. 
The top of the refrigerating room' inclines 
downwardly from the partition between the 
3o ice bunker and said chamber, as seen at a 
Fig. 1. 
The operation of my improved combined 
refrigerator and freezer is as follows: The ice 
is placed in the bunker through the door b'. 
35 The fineness of the ice and the quantity of 
salt will depend upon the degree of coid it is 
desired to attain. The finer the ice is crushed 
and the greater the proportion of salt, the 
more rapid will be the melting and the colder 
4o the temperature. The cold air in the ice 
bunker passes down through the netting di. 
rectly and also out through the ports'u and 
thence through the netting at the bottom of 
the bunker, and thence under the bunker and 
into the bottom of the refrigerating room. As 
the cold air descends in the bunker, each 
space i becomes as it were a siphon, draw 
ing the air in the refrigerating room through 
said spaces into the ice bunker, and down 
5c through the ice and netting. The inclining 
downward of the parts of the sections gives a 
downward motion to the column of air pass 
ing through the spaces, and the apex of each 
-being higher than the lower extremity of the 
55 one next above, there will be no drawing of 
the air horizontally across the bunker. More 
over, this arrangement prevents any water 
escaping from the melting ice through said 
spaces into the refrigerating room. When 
refrigerating only is required, all the sections 
may be complete, as it will not be necessary 
to break the ice after it is placed in the bunker, 
but when it is desired to reduce the tempera 
ture below freezing and to keep it at that 
point for a considerable time, it becomes nec 
essary once in about twenty-four hours to 
break the ice in the bottom of the bunker, be 
cause-the air at that point gradually freezes 
it again into a solid mass at the bottom of the 
bunker, and the melting becomes in conse 
quence thereof too slow to induce the required 
temperature. To facilitate the rebreaking 
of the ice in the bottom of the bunker, I leave 
out the half of the partition sections next to 
the refrigerating room, as seen in Fig. 1, so 
that an ice breaking tool can be inserted be 
tween said sections into the bottom of the ice 
bunker. 
The inclination of the bottom of the drip 
pan downward and forward toward the re 
frigerating room tends to throw the cold air 
descending from the bunker above into the 
refrigerating room. Again the inclination of 
the ceiling of the refrigerating room tends 
to throw the warmer and drier air into the 
bunker to take the place of the colder and 
moister air which has passed downward to. 
ward the bottom of the bunker. Thus a con 
tinual circulation of air is obtained passing 
from the refrigerating room through the 9o 
spaces in the partition into the bunker, and 
thence through the bottom of the bunker and 
back into the refrigerating room, cold and i 
Having thus described my invention an 
its use, what I claim is------- 
95 
1. In a combined refrigerator and freezer, a 
suitable outside case, a refrigerating room 
and an ice bunker therein separated by a par 
tition, inverted V-shaped ports in said parti 
tion leading from the refrigerating or freezing 
room into said ice bunker and ports leading 
through the bottom of said ice bunker and 
thence into the bottom of the refrigerating 
room, substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
2. In a combined refrigerator and freezer, a 
suitable outside case, a refrigerating or freez 
ing room and an ice bunker contained therein, 
separated from each other by a partition hav 
ing a series of ports therein leading from said 
refrigerating or freezing room to the ice 
bunker, a back wall, an air space between said 
back wall and the outside of the case, and 
downwardly inclined ports in said wall lead 
ing from the ice bunker to said air space, 
which opens underneath the bunker to the 
refrigerating and freezing room, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. In a combined refrigerator and freezer, a 
suitable outside case, a refrigerating or freez 
ing room and an ice bunker therein separated 
from each other by a partition, inverted V 
shaped ports in said partition leading from 
the refrigerating or freezing room into said 
ice bunker, the bottom of said ice bunker be 
ing perforated and in communication with 
the refrigerating or freezing room, the floor 
under said ice bunker inclining downwardly 
toward the refrigerating or freezing room, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. In a combined refrigerator and freezer, a 
suitable outside case a refrigerating or freez 
ing room and an ice bunker contained therein 
separated from each other by a partition, in 
65 
45 
I 25 
OO 
IoE 
I 
I 15 
 
 
539,009 
verted V-shaped ports in said partition, the 
bottom of said ice bunker being perforated 
and in communication through said perfora 
tions with the refrigerating or freezing room, 
the floor beneath the ice bunker inclining 
downwardly toward the refrigerator or freez 
ing room, and the ceiling of the refrigerating 
or freezing room inclining away from said ice 
bunker, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
5. In a combined refrigerator and freezer, a 
suitable outside case, a refrigerating or freez 
ing room and an ice bunker contained there 
in separated from each other by a partition 
formed by a series of angular sections, placed 
one above the other and at some distance 
apart forming inverted V-shaped ports lead 
ing from the refrigerating or freezing room 
into said ice bunker, the half of one or more 
of the lower partitions next to the refrigerat 
ing or freezing room being removed, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
6. In a combined refrigerator and freezer, a 
suitable outside case, a refrigerating and 
freezing room and an ice bunker contained 
therein separated from each other by a par 
tition formed by a series of angular sections 
placed one above the other and at some dis 
tance apart forming thereby inverted V 
shaped ports leading from the refrigerating 
or freezing room into said ice bunker, a lining 
in said ice bunker, an air space between said 
lining and the wall of said ice bunker and 
ports leading from the interior of said ice 
bunker into said air space the bottom of said 
ice bunker being perforated so as to leave a 
free passage way for the air from said ice 
bunker and from said air space to pass out 
into the refrigerating or freezing room, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
7. In a combined refrigerator and freezer, a 
suitable outside case, a refrigerating or freez 
ing room and an ice bunker contained there 
in separated from each other by a partition 
formed by a series of angular sections placed 
one above the other and at some distance 
apart, forming inverted V-shaped ports lead 
ing from the refrigerating or freezing room 
into said ice bunker, the apex of one section 
being higher than the lower extremities of the 
section next above it, the bottom of said ice 
bunker being perforated and in communica 
tion with the refrigerating or freezing room, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
GILBERT F. QUINN. 
Witnesses: 
NATHAN CLIFFORD, 
ELGIN C. VERRILL. 
35 
45 
55 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539109.txt	 
(No Model.) 
G. W. WYS 0 R. 
KITCHEN CABINET, 
WS 
SSSS 
SS 
PR) 
E 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. WYSOR, OF HUNTINGTON, WEST VIRGINIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO ROBERT. L. DAY, OF SAME PLACE. 
KITCH ENCAB || NET 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 539,109, dated May 14, 1895. 
Application filed March 7, 1895. serial No. 540,893, (No model.) 
To all, ??h???, i? ??? ?????????: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. WYSOR, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hunt 
ington, in the county of Cabell and State of 
West Virginia, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Kitchen-Cabi 
nets; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, Such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
Specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in kitchen cabinets, and 
the aim of the invention is to produce a com 
pact cabinet having compartments for the re 
ception of various ingredients, as flour, spices, 
and receptacles for culinary articles, the flour 
bins having slides through which the flour 
may be fed to the kneading board beneath, 
and a sieve slidingly attached to the cabinet, 
which sieve may be pushed back out of the 
Way When not in use. 
A further object of the invention resides in 
the peculiar construction of a cabinet of this 
character, in which a removable kneading 
board is so constructed with a longitudinal 
slot along its rear edge through which any 
Waste four may pass to be caught by a tray 
located beneath the same. 
To these ends and to such others as the in 
vention may pertain, the same consists further 
in the novel construction, combination and 
adaptation of the parts as will be hereinafter 
more fully described and then specifically de 
fined in the appended claims. 
I clearly illustrate my invention in the ac 
Companying drawings, which with the letters 
of reference marked thereon form a part of 
this specification, and in which, similar let 
ters of reference indicate like parts through 
out the several views, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my cabinet 
With the doors removed or open. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section on the line 22 of Fig.1. Fig. 
3 is a detail view of the kneading-board. Fig. 
4 is a perspective view of the tray, and Fig. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
5 is an enlarged detail in perspective herein- 5o 
after referred to. 
Reference now being had to the details of 
the drawings by letter, A designates the in 
closing frame having doors A', and a, C, rep 
resent partitions dividing the portion behind 
the set of shelves into bins for the reception 
of flour, sugar, &c., and B, B, designate slides 
covering the outlets to the bins; c, c, a series 
of small shelves for the reception of spices; 
e, e, and d and g, receptacles for holding 
spoons, knives and various culinary articles; 
L., a salt receptacle. Behind the shelves 
above mentioned, the space is divided into 
three bins, and directly beneath the flour 
slides to the bins is located my improved 
kneading board, made either of wood, wood 
lined with porcelain or made of any suitable 
material. The said board Ghas acleat G, se 
cured to its under surface which abuts against 
the front facing of the cabinet, when the 
kneading board is drawn out, thus serving to 
check the board and prevent its being en 
tirely withdrawn from the cabinet, 
H is a longitudinal slot in the kneading 
board near its rear edge through which slot 
the waste flour is adapted to fall to be caught 
by the tray J which is mounted in a recessi 
in the cross-piece K. When it is desired to 
withdraw the kneading board, the forward 
end is slightly raised and the same may be 
readily taken out, after which the tray may 
be removed to empty its contents. When the 
board is not in use it is pushed back under 
the dresser L. 
Located beneath the flour bin is the sieve 
M having cleats on its two opposite edges 
which work in the slots in the members N 
fastened to the bottom of the bin, whereby 
when the sieve is not in use it may be pushed 
back out of the way, the stirrer of the sieve 
being composed of the angular shaped wires 
resting on the wire mesh and having a handle 
passing through a perforation in the front 
face of the sieve. 
I claim to be new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a kitchen cabinet, the combination of 
Having thus described my invention, what 95 
85 
90 
75 
539,109 
5 molding board having an elongated slot in presence of two witnesses. 
the shelves, and bins having slide covered elongated slot, II, the tray J, seated in a recess 
outlets as described, a sieve having side cleats j in the cleat K, substantially as and for the 
and designed to work in recesses in members spurpose set forth. 
on either side of the flour outlet, the sliding 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
through which waste flour is adapted to pass, 
and a removable receptacle for receiving such 
waste, substantially as shown and described. 
2. In combination with a kitchen cabinet as 
Io described the kneading board G, having an 
ROBT. L. HUTCHINSON, 
C. R. WYATT. 
GEORGE W. WYSOR, 
? 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539210.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. ADDICKS, 
METALLIC RAILWAY TIE, 
No. 539,210, 
Patented May 14, 1895. 
 
 
(%22 
39 a a 9 
ae, 
sea 97 
SNS SNSSNSN 
V7 
 
 
3.22 
O z&z z%. s 
N N 
A (7/ 
ses 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM H. ADDICKS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
METALIC RALWAY-TE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 539,210, dated May 14, 1895. 
Application filed January 23, 1895, Serial No. 535,895, (No model.) 
- 
r 
To all whom it may concern: 
- 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. ADDICKs, 
of the city of Philadelphia, State of Pennsyl 
vania, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Metallic Railway - Ties, of 
Which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to that class of me 
tallic railway ties in which the tie is espe 
cially shaped for the purpose of securing the 
rails in position, its object being to provide a 
secure and economical construction of tie, 
which, in connection with auxiliary fastening 
devices of simple character, may be employed 
to hold the rails in place, as more fully set 
forth hereinafter. In my improved construc 
tion herein described the necessity for the 
employment of spikes, screws, &c., is obvi 
ated, and a firmer locking construction pro 
vided. In constructions where spikes, screws, 
&C., are employed they are always liable to 
work loose under the vibrations consequent 
upon the passage of trains. The parts nec 
essary to the complete construction of my 
invention herein described are reduced to a 
minimum, and these parts are constructed so 
as to be interchangeable and can be readily 
replaced. In this construction the line and 
gage of the rails so adjusted will be accurate 
and positive, and can be readily set into po 
sition. Without loss of time and labor, as for 
instance, not only in the original construc 
tion of the line but in case of accidental de 
struction or derangement of the line. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional elevation on the line 1 1, Fig. 2, 
of a railway-tie constructed in accordance 
with my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the 
proper. Fig. 4 is a perspective view of 
tie 
one of the rail-fastening keys. Fig. 5 is a 
similar view illustrating a form of key and 
spacing-block which may be placed between 
one of the rails and a guard-rail at bridges, 
curves, or switches; and Fig.6 is an elevation 
of a slightly-modified construction of tie. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents 
the tie provided with two lower depending 
flanges, a, so as to form a channel bar, with 
a centrally located rib, a ', on its upper sur 
face, extending longitudinally of the tie, and 
being interrupted or cut away at the points 
where the rails lie in order that the base of 
the rails may rest directly upon the broad 
upper surface of the main body of the tie, 
and be secured thereon through the medium 
of the central rib. 
The rib, a , is cut away and recessed at b 
to conform to the base and web of one side 
of the rail, and at c is cut away at an angle, 
as shown more clearly in Fig. 1. To one side 
of the base of each rail the upper surface of 
the tie is provided with a slot, d, extending 
preferably in a line parallel with the length 
of the rail. 
The securing key, E, is formed of a block 
of metal of a thickness about equal to that of 
the rib, a, and on one side is so shaped as to 
conform to the contour, in cross-section, of 
one side of the base and vertical web of the 
rail, and on the opposite side or end is cut 
away at an angle corresponding to the angle 
at which the rib, a?, is cut at c, and is of a 
size to fill the space intervening between the 
end of the rib at c and the inner surface of 
the rail, to snugly fit therein and to hold the 
rail, laterally considered, rigidly in position. 
On one face of the key is secured a tongue, 
g, which may be bent around at a right angle 
to the length of the key, as shown in Fig. 4, 
and when in position is adapted to enter an 
opening, h, formed in the rib, a', and then 
bent to lock the key in position. The base of 
the key is provided with a tongue, e, the 
length of the tongue e, being somewhat less 
than the length of the slot, d, connected with 
the main body of the key by the shank, e', 
the latter at its central portion being provided 
with slightly curved walls forming an open 
ing in which the shank or neck, e', of the key 
may readily turn. 
In assembling the parts the rail is first laid 
n position on the tie and pressed against the 
portion, b, of the rib, a?, and the key, E, is 
turned at a right angle to the length of the 
rib, a.', and its tongue, e, is passed through the 
slot, d. The key being then turned it comes 
into alignment with, or practically forms a 
continuation of, the rib, a. This turning of 
the key causes one of its ends to come into 
contact with the web and base of the rail and 
its opposite end to pass under and in contact 
- 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
ICO 
589,210 
O 
with the portion, e, of the rib, a ', while at the 
same time its tongue, g, will have passed 
through the opening, h, and can then be turned 
parallel with the rib, or given a slight twist, 
as shown in Fig. 2, in order to prevent its re 
turn. When the key is in place it is pre 
vented from turning by this bending or twist 
ing of the tongue, g, and is prevented from 
rising by reason of the inclined face, c, of the 
rib, a ', and its locking tongue, e, which has 
been passed through the slot, d, and then 
turned until it is at a right angle to such slot. 
The surface of the walls, c, transversely con 
sidered, is at a right angle to the length of the 
tie. When, therefore, the key is locked with 
its inner end abutting against the surface, c, 
the liability to lateral displacement of the rails 
is positively provided against. The rails can 
not spread owing to the outer portion of the 
ligid rib, a ', and they cannot be forced in 
wardly, as above stated, as the inner edge of 
the key, E, coinciding with the lines of the 
walls, c, against which it abuts, is held firmly 
by the inner portion of the rib, a', against any 
in Ward movement. 
In Fig. 6 I have illustrated a modification 
of the invention in which the height of the 
rib, a', is materially reduced, and the fasten 
ing devices operate only on the base or lower 
flange of the rail, to be employed principally 
See lateral support is not especially de 
SeC. 
Where a double, or guard rail, is used, as 
at curves, bridges, crossings, or switches, the 
outer rail is first placed in position against 
the specially shaped portion, b, of the rib, a?, 
as shown to the right of Figs. 1 and 2. The 
upper surface of the main body of the tie is 
provided with a T-shaped slot, l, l, the por 
4 otion, l, extending at a right angle to the length 
of the tie while the portion, l', is formed im 
mediately in line with the rib, O'. After the 
first, or outer rail, has been placed in position 
the base, n, of a spacing block or key, M, is 
passed through the portion, l, of the slot, and 
the key is then moved up in the portion, l, 
until it is in contact with the rail. 
The Sec 
ond rail is then placed in position, and locked 
as in the first instance with a key, E. 
It will be noticed that the opposite ends of 
the key or spacing block, M, are both shaped 
to conform to the contour of the sides of the 
main rail and the guard rail, so that both 
rails will be firmly clamped and held down in 
position on the tie. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination of the railway tie hav 
ing On its upper surface a recessed rib one 
Wall or edge of each recess being so shaped as 
to conform to the contour of one side of the 
web and base of a railway rail and the oppo 
site wall or edge being inclined, there being 
in the upper surface of the main body of the 
tie a slot, as d, extending at an angle to the 
35 
45 
55 
 
length of the tie, with a locking key having 
one end so shaped as to conform to the con 
tour of one side of the base and web of the rail 
way rail and its opposite end being inclined 
at an angle corresponding to the angular Wall 
of the recess in said rib, a tongue formed in 
tegral with and extending parallel to the 
length of the key, said tongue being adapted 
to enter the slot, h, and means for locking 
said key in position, substantially as specified. 
2. In a metallic railway tie having a Cen 
trally disposed longitudinal recessed rib, re 
cessed for the reception of the rails, a remov 
able locking key having a downwardly pro 
jecting shank and a keyed head provided at 
the lower end thereof adapted to fit into and 
through a recess provided in the base of the 
tie, the upper surface of the head of the shank 
constructed to impinge against the lower Sur 
face of the base of the tie when the key is 
turned against the rail in its locking position 
tending to prevent upward displacement, said 
key being formed at one end to fit upon and 
against the inner walls of the rail and at the Op 
posite end having an inclined surface increas 
ing toward the base conforming in shape to 
the outer end of the inner central portion of 
the rib and adapted to positively abut against 
the same at a right angle to the length of the 
rib, and an L-shaped pin provided horizon 
tally upon the side of said key, the L-portion 
adapted to enter and protrude through an ori 
fice provided in the central portion of the rib 
near its outer end and to be clinched in said 
orifice, substantially as described. 
3. A metallic railway tie comprising a chan 
neled base plate and a recessed longitudinal 
rib, the outer end portions of the rib con 
structed to bear upon and against the outer 
side of the base and web of the rail, a remov 
able key adapted to a transversely disposed 
slot, said key having its outer end constructed 
of a shape to enable said end to bear upon 
and against the inner portion of the base and 
web of the rail, the opposite end of said key 
to abut against the outer end of the inner 
portion of the central rib, and a locking pin 
provided upon said locking key adapted to 
engage with the rib through an orifice pro 
vided therein for the purpose, substantially 
as described. 
4. A metallic railway tie having an upper 
longitudinally disposed recessed rib, the in 
ner portions of the outer ends of said rib 
formed by the recesses constructed to bear 
upon and against the outer portion of the base 
and neck of the rail, a transversely disposed 
slot provided in each recess, a removable key 
adapted to be engaged in said slot and to lock 
the tie in position, said key having one end 
of a shape adapted to bear upon and against 
the inner portion of the base and neck of the 
rail, and having in the opposite end an abut 
ting portion with its plane at a right angle to 
the line of its length adapted to abut against 
a similarly shaped end of the centrally dis 
25 
9o 
95 
ICO 
O 
IIS 
639,210 
posed portion of the longitudinal rib and lock 
ing pin provided upon said key adapted to 
protrude into and through an orifice provided 
in said rib and to be clinched therein, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination of a metallic tie hav 
ing an upper longitudinal rib provided with 
a recess of a width greater than the combined 
Widths of a rail and guard rail, and securing 
keys adapted to slots provided in the upper 
surface of the main body of the tie for lock 
ing the said rails in position upon the tie, and 
a spacing block having a contour at its oppo 
site ends adapted to conform to the upper 
Surface of the base of the rails, an integral 
downwardly projecting neck an elongated 
key head provided upon the lower end of said 
neck adapted to pass through a T-shaped 
slot provided in the base of said tie, said head 
adapted to engage against the under surface 
of the upper portion of said tie when slid into 
locking position in the shank of the T and to 
hold said spacing block against vertical dis 
placement, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of the tie having an up 
per rib provided with a recess of a width 
greater than the combined widths of a rail 
and guard rail and securing keys adapted to 
slots provided in the upper surface of the 
main body of the tie and to fill that portion 
of the recess not occupied by the rail and the 
Id 
5 
32 
35 
45 
guard rail with means for locking such keys 
in position, substantially as specified. 
7. The combination of the tie, A, having an 
upper rib, a?, provided with a recess having 
Walls, b, and c, there being in the upper Sur 
face of the tie a slot, d, extending at an angle 
to the length of the tie, a locking key, E, hav 
ing a lower tongue, e, adapted to pass through 
said slot, d, and a locking tongue, g, secured 
to or formed integral with said key and 
adapted to extend through an opening in the 
rib, a?, substantially as specified. 
8. The combination of the tie, A, having an 
upper rib, a', provided with a recess of a width 
greater than the combined widths of a rail 
and a guard rail there being in the upper sur 
face of said tie slots, d, l, l', a key or spacing . 
block, M, having a base portion, m, adapted 
to enter the slot, l, and to confine the adjacent 
faces of the rail and the guard rail and a fill 
ing block or key, E, having a tongue, e, adapted 
to the slot, d, and a locking tongue, g, adapted 
to an opening, h, in the rib, a?, substantially 
as specified. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 19th day of January, A. D. 1895. 
WILLIAM H. ADDICKS. 
Witnesses: 
C. PERCY WILLCOX, 
HORACE PETTIT, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539310.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
J. S. SHEARER. 
CONVERTIBLE FURNITURE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 539,310, 
Patented May 14, 1895. 
 
 
  
A) 
S 
22 222 
2 2 
as a H. 
 
2 
 
Witnesses: 
(226-e-- /8 ?ee -e, -e-...-a, 
 
Atto inney 
TiE NORRisperers co, Photo-Lito, wishington, D.C. 
J. S. SHEARER. 
CONWERTIBLE FURNITURE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 14, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 539,310, 
 
 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
7 
32 
2ZZZZZZZ 
6 
 
A. 
Witnesses: 
In Verht () r. 
Attorney. 
 
THE MORRIS PETERs co, PHOTOLITHO,-washingtoN., c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN s. SHEARER, OF VERONA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CONVERTIBLE FURNITURE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,810, dated May 14, 1895. 
Application filed March 25, 1895, Serial No. 543,149, (No model.) 
d 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JoHN S. SHEARER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Werona, 
in the county of Allegheny and State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Convertible Furniture; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the letters of reference 
marked on the accompanying drawings, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of a 
piece of furniture to which I have applied 
my improvements, such as a desk, wardrobe, 
bed-cabinet, settee or tete-a-tete, bookcase, or 
Washstand. Fig. 2 is a horizontal sectional 
view showing the device converted into a bed 
or couch. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of my 
improvements when formed into a bed. Fig. 
4 is a detail sectional view partly broken 
away, showing the hinged desk-lid. Fig. 5 is 
a side elevation of the adjustable-back settee. 
Fig. 6 is a modified form of securing the ad 
justment of the settee-back. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
combination interconvertible furniture alike 
useful for a bed or couch, a bookcase, a cabi 
net, a wardrobe, a desk, a washstand, a settee 
and chairs, the advantages of which are ob 
vious at a glance. 
With these objects in view my invention 
consists of the following construction and 
combination of parts, the details of which 
will first be fully described, and the features 
of novelty then pointed out and claimed. 
In the drawings, A represents a bookcase, 
cabinet, or the like. It is preferably provided 
with double doors D having glass or mirror 
fronts. In one side may be a wardrobe or 
shelves, in the other pigeon holes, but the ar 
rangement may be varied to suit special re 
quirements. 
B is a rear compartment having preferably 
doors at each end, within which, when not in 
use, is housed a mattress C. E are lower 
cabinet doors at each side. 
- 
 
O 
5 
20 
25 
35 
45 
His a settee or tete-a-tete of the width of 55 
Fis the desk-lid hinged at its upper or rear 
edge to the case A, so as to swing inwardly 
under the space beneath the same to provide 
for the bed, or to be extended horizontally 
and supported by an adjustable support G. for 
use as a desk. 
a bed, and provided with a hinged or detach 
able back which can be brought into a hori 
Zontal position in forming the bed. In Figs. 
2, 3, and 4 it is shown as detachably adjust. 
able. I are metal plates at each side rigid 
with the back. Jare projecting ends thereof 
which extend into slots or eyes K when the 
settee back L is vertical, and into slots M 
when the back L is horizontal. Additional 
pins, such as N, prevent undue movement 
when the back is in either position. The 
spring pressed pivoted latch Olocks the back 
in either position. 
P is a metal rod or rail extending along the 
top of the settee back L which serves to secure 
and lock the back When horizontal to the case 
A. For this purpose two adjustable supports 
Q are provided hinged to the lower portion of 
the case A and projecting inwardly into the 
space beneath the desk lid F. When used in 
supporting the settee back for the purpose of 
forming a bed, the supports Q. project in 
wardly into such space as shown in Fig. I and 
are rigidly held in that position. At each end 
of the rod P is found a hook shaped part as 
clearly shown in Figs. 2 and 5 which engage 
the supports Q and support the settee back 
at that point. The rear extension of the bed 
is formed by two chairs which are secured to 
the front edge of the settee by means of pins 
and swinging link connections R. 
The settee and chairs are preferably up 
holstered. They may be provided with 
springs, in which case no mattress would be 
needed, although the mattress may be used 
whether the settee, and chairs have springs, 
Or not. . 
Instead of the settee back being adjustable 
by the plates I and connections, a segment 
plate S may be used secured either to the back 
or seat and provided with a segmental slot in 
- 
65 
75 
95 
539,310 
the binding screw by means of which the in- and means for securing said extension sup 
clination of the back may be adjustably set, 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
as illustrated in Fig. 6. 
ports to said bed support. 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
O 
I claim 
The combination of a mattress holding up 
right casing, a bed support provided with an 
adjustable back, extension supports, means 
for securing said bed support to said casing, 
JOHN S, SHEARER. 
Witnesses: 
WILL. M. CALHOUN, 
CLIFFORD E. S.HEARER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539411.txt	G. H. BROWN, 
FENCE POST, 
Patented May 21, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 539,4ll, 
72 ? 
928)ievossos 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GILBERT H. BROWN, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
FENCE - POST 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 539,411, dated May 21, 1895. 
2 o of the wires. 
Application filed March l8, 1895, 
Serial No. 549,15l. (No model.) 
described, resist the strain brought to bear 
To all Luhon, it 7 day CO7 ce/7 
on the post A, at two points, to-wit: the up 
Be it known that I, GILBERT H. BROWN, of 
Dayton, county of Montgomery, State of Ohio, 
per and central parts thereof. 
(D) designates a brace or anchor post 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
which is approximately half the length of the 
5 in Fences; and I do declare the following to be 
post A and has a similar ground end (D). 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
(c) designates a metallic cap adapted to in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
close the upper end of the post (D) and pre 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
vent moisture from entering, and which has, 
the Same, reference being had to the accom 
as integral parts, dowels (c) and (c') that 
Io panying drawings, and to the letters of ref 
project inwardly, on horizontal and inclined 
erence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
planes substantially as is shown in the draw 
ings. These dowels (c') and (c') receive ends 
My invention relates to new and useful im 
of the braces C and 'C'. The cap (c) has 
provements in fences, with special reference 
also, projecting from its lower sides, incline 
15 to means for bracing the corner posts thereof. 
slotted lugs (e) and (e') through which, screw 
The object of the invention is to provide 
threaded bolts (f) and (f) project. Upon 
simple and substantial means for bracing said 
corner post, to the end that it may be always 
the inner or lower ends of said bolts a trans 
verse piece (g) is attached, to which the an 
maintained in a true position under the strain 
chor cable (g') is made secure. This frame, 
consisting of the bolts (f)(f) and the piece 
With this aim in view, the invention con 
(g), is adjustable to tighten the anchor cable 
sists of an anchor or brace post approximately 
and the braces, by means of nuts () on both 
One half the length of the corner post; means 
combined in one integral piece consisting of 
ends of said bolts. The strain incidental to 
the adjusting or tightening of the braces, is 
25 dowels, a cap, and support for the device for 
mainly upon the cap (c), while upon the cor 
tightening the anchor chain. The dowels 
ner post, it is borne at two points, to-Wit: the 
projecting from the cap on horizontal and in 
upper and central parts. 
cline planes, are adapted to form dowel joints 
The advantages of having the joints or con 
between horizontal and incline braces be 
nections between the corner post, anchor ca 
Referring to the annexed drawings that 
ble, and the brace or anchor post, at one point 
and upon one integral piece on the anchor 
form a part of this application, and upon 
post, is that a more even or regulated adjust 
which similar letters of reference indicate cor 
responding parts, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
ment of the braces is obtainable, and further, 
the connections can be easily made by any 
35 of a corner of a fence constructed in accord 
ance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a top view 
O 
Having fully described my invention, I 
of the same. Fig. 3 is an enlarged detached 
view of the dowel-cap. 
claim as new 
A designates a corner post for a wire 
1. In a fence, the combination with a corner 
post provided with collars at its upper and 
4o fence, of tubular form, having a ground point 
intermediate parts, dowels projecting from 
or base A' of the usual form and construction, 
said collars, of a brace post approximately. 
and a cap A' to prevent moisture from enter 
half the length of said corner post, a cap, dow 
ing the interior. 
els projecting in horizontal and incline planes 
B and B' designate collars that inclose 
from said cap and being integral parts thereof, 
45 the post A, and are maintained thereon in 
a proper position by lugs or pins (a) (a) that 
and a horizontal and an incline brace joining 
project from the sides of said post. These 
said dowels and the dowels. On the corner 
collars have integral, and inwardly project 
post, substantially as described.. 
ing dowels (b) and (b), over which ends of 
2. In a fence, the combination with a corner 
post provided with dowels on its upper and 
5o inclined and horizontal tubular braces (C), 
and (C) fit. These braces, when connected 
intermediate parts, and an anchor or brace 
at their lower or opposite ends, as presently post, of a cap adapted to cover the upper end 
3o tween said corner and brace posts. 
75 
85 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
539,411 
of said brace post, dowels on said cap project. (e) projecting laterally from opposite sides 
of said cap and bolts (f) and (f) adapted to 15 
ing on a horizontal and an incline plane, an 
be supported in said lugs, a transverse piece 
incline and a horizontal brace inclosing said 
(g) attached to said bolts to which the anchor 
dowels, lugs projecting from the oppositesides 
cable is attachable and means for adjusting 
of said cap and having inclined slots therein, 
said bolts, as herein specified. 
an adjustable frame for tightening the anchor 
cable, mounted in said slots, substantially as 
my hand this 11th day of March, 1895. 
described. 
3. The combination with the corner post 
having dowels on its upper and intermediate 
parts, of a brace post D, a cap (c) provided 
with dowels (c') and (c') projecting on hori 
Zontal and incline planes, slotted lugs (e) and 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 2 o 
GILBERT II. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
J. B. WHEELER, 
R. J. MCCARTY. 
Cd 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539512.txt	(No Model.) 
A. G.R. UNER, 
TELEGRAPHRELAY. 
No. 539,512, 
Patented May 21, 1895. 
 
9ssivesac. 
Aerzezd 
vve-wo. 
6z/2-7-e---e- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALOIS GRUNER, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
TELEGRAPH - RELAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 539,512, dated May 21, 1895. 
Application filed July 28, 1894, Serial No. 518,872, (No model,) 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
IS 
30. 
with lever E when armature E', is attracted 
To att, who7), it inctly concern. 
Be it known that I, ALOIS GRUNER, a citi. by the magnet. The plate B is connected, by 
wire c, to repeating point c', which is in con 
Zen of the United States, residing at San Fran 
tact with the lever E, when no current is pass 
cisco, in the county of San Francisco and State 
ing around the magnets and the armature E, 
of California, have invented certain new and 
is consequently away from the poles. By this 
useful Improvements in Telegraph. Relays; 
arrangement the relay can be used on either 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
a closed or open circuit by changing the plug 
full, clear, and exact description of said inven 
or switch A, so as to connect armature carry 
tion, such as Will enable others skilled in the 
ing lever with either A or B. 
art to which it most nearly appertains to make, 
Suppose the main signal circuit is on a 
use, and practice the same. 
closed circuit system, that is, in its normal 
This invention relates to an improved tele 
condition and at rest, the electro-magnets will 
graph relay, designed for use in connection 
hold the armature E, against the poles and 
With an open or closed circuit, and the essen 
cause lever E, to contact with repeating point 
tial feature thereof consists in so connecting 
nearest the poles of the magnets, which point 
the coils that the battery for actuating the 
connects with plate A. The plug or switch 
circuit will be located therebetween, instead 
connects the plate B, with plate D. If a sig 
of to one side thereof, and connected to the 
nal be transmitted while the relay is connected 
ends of both coils, the opposite ends being 
as described, it will cause the lever to contact, 
connected to the telegraphic or signal circuit. 
at each break of the circuit, with repeating 
This arrangement of the coils, or dividing of 
point c', which connects with B, and so trans 
the battery, is for the purpose of creating two 
late by the local circuit. 
distinct circuits, that is to say, permitting 
Should at any time, during the working of 
each coil to act for itself independent of the 
the relay, the main line circuit become inter 
other, in order that the relay will not be en 
rupted in any manner whatsoever-say for 
tirely useless in case of a break occurring in 
instance by becoming broken, and both ends 
one circuit, but will still operate through the 
of the break remain clear of the ground, then 
other circuit, as will be hereinafter more fully 
the armature will fall away from the magnets 
set forth and described. 
and the register F, in the usual manner, will 
In order to carry out my invention the main 
indicate that the circuit is broken or open. 
battery is divided by a connecting wire lead 
The main battery is connected to the mag 
ing to a terminal on the relay, which is con 
net coils by two distinct or independent cir 
nected with a point or plate so as to permit 
cuits, each circuit leading from an opposite 
of the same being switched on or off as de 
side of the battery. For the purpose of more 
sired, under the conditions hereinafter ex 
fully understanding this feature of the device, 
pressed. The switch used for this purpose 
I will refer to the battery as being divided. 
is connected to a wire which extends by either 
From the section or half F, of the battery 
ground or otherwise to some point on the 
runs the wire 1, which passes around the bind 
nain line. 
ing post 2, enters the magnet Section G at one 
The relay is provided with two or more re 
side, is wound therein and passes from the 
peating points governed by means of a suit 
opposite side of the magnet section and from 
able switch, which in the accompanying dia 
post 3, to the main circuit. The section or 
grammatic drawing is shown or represented by 
half F, of the battery is connected to the mag 
plates A, B. The plate D, which is connected 
net section G', by wire 4, which enters at one 
to either plate A or B, by means of a plug A', 
side thereof, is wound therein and passes 
is connected by wire a to a terminal Ci, which 
from the opposite side thereof and from post 
leads to one pole of a local battery and con 
5, to the main line circuit. It will thus be 
nects with the lever E, which carries an arma 
seen that each section of the magnet is con 
ture E'. By means of wire b, the plate A is 
trolled by independent circuits, each of which 
connected to repeating point b, the one near 
est the electro-magnet, which is in contact is operated by one half of the main battery. 
45 
 
2 
589,512 
The battery is divided by the wire 6, which 
leads to a terminal point H, connected to a 
ground wire 7, by the switch H'. 
In case the main line circuit becomes 
5 broken, under the conditions before de 
scribed, by changing the plug A', from B to 
A, then D and A will become operative when 
the main circuit is established or closed. The 
switch H, being turned on stud or point H, the 
Io main battery will be divided as it is through 
two distinct circuits, the point of break in 
main line circuit being one terminal, and H', 
being connected with a conductor either by 
ground or otherwise with the main circuit, 
15 the other terminal. Thus each side of the 
relay magnet acts for its own circuit. As 
long as no current flows through the coils, the 
cores remain neutral. However, in case sig 
nals are transmitted on one side of the coils, 
2O the other core, in view of the fact that no 
current would flow through both, except also 
a signal be sent on that side, will by virtue of 
induction become also magnetic and the arma 
ture lever will respond promptly to signals. 
Supposing the main circuit breaks and in 
so doing one or both ends connect with the 
ground, instead of remaining clear. Then this 
fact will readily become known, as by chang 
ing the plug A' from B to A, and switch H', 
3o to point H, the repeating points will stand 
25 
D with A. The switch H', is then turned off 
of point H, when the unknown ground will be 
the terminal. 
By the relay, as the main battery is divided 
on both circuits, it will be seen that the nega-35 
tive and positive go to line respectively. Con 
sequently in searching for a break or trouble, 
the same can readily be located by simply at 
taching, for instance, a small galvanoscope 
and by indicated polarity the searcher will 4o 
know if he is near or beyond the trouble. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure protection 
in by Letters Patent, is 
having independently operated coils, of a bat 
tery, independent wires leading from the bat 
tery to the respective coils and from the coils 
to a main circuit, a supplemental dividing 
wire leading from the battery and forming an 5o 
auxiliary intermediate circuit through the 
ground or otherwise, and a switch in said 
ground circuit, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In a relay, the combination with a magnet 45 
ALOIS GRUNER. 
 
Witnesses: 
W. A. ACKER, 
LEED. CRAIG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539612.txt	(No Model.) 
J. DONO WAN. 
CAR, WHEEL. 
No. 539,62, 
Patented May 21, 1895. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
as 
6as 
S 
NYS 
sa 
as 
a 
SNs 
SSS 
2 
ava 
S 
S. 
Nass SS 
awa a 2 2 
SS 
y 
a. 
sers as 
sy. 71. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES DONOVAN, OF THREE RIVERS, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
ROBERTS, THROP & COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 539,612, dated May 21, 1895. 
Application filed May 21, 1894, 
Serial No. 511943, (No model.) 
by means of which the disks may be clamped 
together upon the hub. The rim may be 
shrunk on, riveted on or secured in any other 45 
manner. The clamping of the hub sections 
of the disks together forces the flanges H. 
against the rim and aids in producing a rigid, 
solid wheel. 
tions of the disks, as shown in Fig. 3, or I 
may make the hub by casting it upon the 
disks, as shown in Fig. 4. 
I may use a sleeve M between the hub sec- 5o 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A wheel combining two oppositely in 55 
clined disks, centrally apertured, radial 
spokes formed in the disks by a series of 
apertures, the edges of the spokes being bent 
in, means for securing the outer edges of the 
disks together, oppositely turned flanges on 
the outer edges of the disks, a rim secured 
upon the face of Said flanges, and a nipple 
passed through the central apertures in the 
disks, substantially as described. 
2. A. Wheel combining two oppositely in 
clined disks, centrally apertured, radial 
spokes formed in the disks by a series of 
apertures, the edges of the spokes being bent 
in, means for securing the outer edges of the 
disks together oppositely turned flanges on 
the outer edges of the disks, a rim secured 
upon the face of said flanges, a nipple passed 
through the central apertures in the disks, a 
flange at one end and a nut engaging a screw 
threaded bearing on the other end for clamp 
ing the disks between, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
65 
75 
JAMES DONOWAN. 
Witnesses: 
JAMESB. ROBERTS, 
GEORGE A. ROBERTS. 
d 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES DONov AN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Three 
Rivers, in the county of St. Joseph and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Car-Wheels, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
ingS. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction of a wheel comprising a body of two 
Steel metal disks, separated at the hub, in 
clined toward each other and secured together 
at the rim, and a rim secured to the body; 
further in the construction of the hub, and 
in the construction of the means of connect 
ing the rim to the body, all as more fully 
hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of my improved wheel. Fig. 2 is a cross-sec 
tion thereof on line acac. Fig. 3 is a section 
through the hub, showing a modification; and 
Fig. 4 is a similar section showing another 
modification. 
A are two like disks of sheet metal, havin 
a central aperture B and the radial apertures 
C forming between the apertures C, the spokes 
D. The edges E are turned in to form stif 
fening flanges for the spokes. The disks are 
dished so that when two such disks are ar 
ranged together, the hub sections will be 
separated, while the outer ring shaped sec 
tions F will contact and may be secured to 
gether in any desired manner as by rivets G. 
near the edge. The edges of the disks are 
35 formed with the outwardly turned flanges H, 
forming a wide bearing on which the rim. I 
may be secured in any desired manner. 
The hub I preferably form as shown in Fig. 
4o 2, where I have shown a tubular nipple J, 
having a flange K at one end and screw 
threaded at the other end to receive the nut, 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539712.txt	(No Model.) 
F. J. TROLL, 
TELEPHONE CALL, 
No. 539,712, 
Patented May 21, 1895. 
(F.A. 
E. I 
. 
. 
2. H 
also 
a 
 
 
 
  
 
1.T. 
7. 
2 
a e 
. 
 
  
 
 
 
l 
2. 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
shif 
-4 , 
Cese 
is 
 
S "............ . . . 
 
O 
 
 
Sea 
TD 
  
  
 
- ZAZ2. 
   
2 
2 
2 
E3 
ors 
P 
% as E31Es 
s 
O 
- MM 8. 
X 
2s 
 
as 
WITNESSES 
ce (78.262-24 
ca 4.1%68 
INVENTOR 
Z772%zed V. Z720. 
BY ?ecur(6. 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FREDERICK J. TROLL OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
TELEPHONE - CALL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 539,712, dated May 21, 1895. 
Application filed September 22, 1894, Serial No. 523,833 (No model.) 
fo at UFOn it naily concert: 
this outer projecting end of the lever is con 
Beit known that I, FREDERICK.J. TROLL, of 
nected a suitable pull handle F. 
Washington, District of Columbia, have in 
E is a cut-out spring, upon the upper end 
Vented a new and useful Improvement in 
of which the lever D stops when at rest, or 
Telephone-Calls, of which the following is a 
the pull F is in its elevated position. This 
full, clear, and exact description. 
spring is connected by a wire b to a horizon 
My invention relates to that form of tele 
tal spring I on the side of the box, which in 
phone call in which the revolving armature 
turn is connected by wire b' with a binding 
post b on the top of the box. Beside the bind 
is rotated by a flexible metal tape on a drum, 
ing past b is another binding post a which 
which tape when drawn out turns the arma 
connects with wire a', and through hinge Cl 
ture in one direction, and is rewound again 
by the tension of a coil spring. Myinvention 
with the bell magnets at C, and through wire 
consists in the peculiar construction and ar 
Ct, hinge a' and wire a connects with the frame 
rangement of parts operating upon this gen 
Work of the magnet M. 
eral principle by which this motion may be 
The armature G has its coil connected in 
Conveniently transmitted to the armature di 
the usual way, one end to the shaft and frame 
rect, and the armature made to ring a call by 
Work of the magnet, and the other end to an 
insulated pin i in the end of the shaft, which 
both the forward and backward movement of 
pin always bears endwise against the flat 
its oscillation, and by which also the arma 
spring I. 
ture is cut out when the call is not in use, as 
will be hereinafter more fully described. 
The operation of this call is as follows: 
Figure I is a front elevation of the call-box 
When the parts are in a condition of rest as 
with the door opened and parts broken away; 
shown, the bell magnets at C are Subject to 
the influence of any call coming over the line 
and Fig. 2 is a detail in horizontal section, 
through the following circuit: The binding 
through line 22, of the armature of the mag 
net and its end contact-spring. 
posts a and b being connected to the line, the 
In the drawings. A represents the box or 
current passes from a to a ', C., bell magnets, 
a, a , a, frame of magnet M, pulley in, metal 
outer casing, and B is the door which is hinged 
ribbon C, lever D, spring E, wirel, spring I, 
thereto at Cand C. On the door is carried 
wire b' to binding post b, and to the line or 
the bell and bell magnets, as shown at C, the 
ground, thus putting the bells in the range of 
bell being upon the outside of the door, and 
the bell magnets on the inside of the door. 
the influence of any remote call. 
M is the compound permanent horse shoe 
In operating this call to signal any remote 
bell, the handle F is grasped and is quickly 
magnet Secured to the back of the box, and 
having its armature Garranged upon a shaft 
pulled down and up. This oscillates the ar 
J to revolve between the poles of the mag 
mature shaft, and calls by both the forward 
and backward movement. The current gen 
nets. At one end of the shaft there is a coiled 
spring II, one end of which is fixed to the said 
erated in the armature now passes to line 
shaft, and the other end to any stationary 
over the following circuit: From one end of 
the armature wire through insulated pin , 
part of the frame Work. At the opposite end 
spring I and wire b' to binding post b, to 
of this shaft is a Small pulley m, which is in 
line and back over the line to binding posta, 
electrical connection with the magnet frame 
wire a, hinge a, bell magnets, wire a, hinge 
through the armature shaft and its bearings. 
a', wire a, frame of magnet M, shaft J, and 
Around this pulley is wound a flexible steel 
tape C", or a cord, chain, or band, one end be 
the other end of the armature wire. 
ing fast to the pulley, and the other carried 
When the instrument is at rest, it will be 
up vertically and connected to the end of an 
seen that the magnets are cut out by the 
operating lever D fulcrumed in the side of the shunt circuit which passes through steel tape 
case and projecting outside the same. TO ca, spring E, and wire b', 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
65 
75 
95 
 
539,712 
2. In a telephone call, the combination with 3o 
attached to the end of the lever outside the 
box substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
the box, the permanent magnets, and the ro 
tating armature arranged between the poles 
of the magnets; of a coil spring H fixed at 
one end of the armature shaft and directly 
connected to the same, a pulley m fixed to the 35 
opposite end of the armature shaft, a metal 
tape a woundabout said pulley and contained 
wholly within the box, a lever D connected at 
its inner end to the said tape and fulcrumed 
to the opposite side of the box and extending 4o 
through a slot in the same, a pull handle at 
tached to the end of the lever outside the box, 
a stop spring E forming a support for the le 
ver D when at rest, and circuit wire b con 
nected to the spring E and forming therewith 45 
a cut out for the armature through the lever, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
FREDERICK J. TROLL, 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK N. TROLL, 
EDWD. W. BYRN. 
5 
The call box as thus described is very sim 
ple and practical, is free from the complica 
tion and noise of other forms, and is not lia 
ble to be damaged by inexperienced opera 
tors, as..the most ignorant person knows that 
a pull handle is to be pulled, and by so doing 
he rings by both the forward and backward 
movement of the armature. 
I do not claim broadly the reverse rotation 
of the armature shaft as effected by a coil 
spring and flexible band, as this is not broadly 
new, but 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a telephone call, the combination with 
the box, the permanent magnets, and the ro 
tating armature arranged between the poles 
of the magnets; of a coil spring H fixed at 
one end of the armature shaft and directly 
connected to the same, a pulley m fixed to the 
opposite end of said armature shaft, a metal 
tape a wound about said pulley and contained 
wholly within the box, a lever D connected at 
its inner end to the said tape and fulcrumed 
to the opposite side of the box and extending 
through a slot in the same, and a pull handle 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539812.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 539,812. 
W. H., HILL, 
GRAIN DAMPENER, 
Patented May 28, 1895. 
S3 S 
S S S S 
see 
voy sessesses 
e aesaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa 
 
 
  
 
s 
ege S. 
y "Fall 
y 
ra 
w 
2 
-- 
 
Trit: NORRIS RETERS co. Photo.L. was icon, c. 
i JNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. HILL OF CLEVELAND, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
E. FRANK WALLACE, OF HARRISBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
GRAIN-DAMPENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 539,812, dated May 28, 1895. 
Application filed September 6, 1894, Serial No. 522,281. (No model.) 
d 
(5 
3o 
35 
55 
7 o 
75 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. HILL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Grain-Dampeners, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This improvement is designed mainly to 
provide grain dampeners with a feeding de 
vice that will be regular and positive in its 
action and not likely to get out of order. 
To these ends the invention consists in the 
peculiar construction, arrangement and com 
binations of parts hereinafter more particu 
larly described and then definitely claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a side view of a dampener constructed accord 
ing to my improvement, with one side of the 
case removed. Fig. 2 is a central vertical sec 
tion on a larger scale, taken diagonally to the 
view shown in Fig. 1. 
Referring to the details of the drawings by 
figures, 1 represents the casing, which may 
be either square or round, in horizontal sec 
tion, terminating at the bottom in a short in 
clined flange 2, at the lower end of which is a 
short tube or ring 3, which partly incloses a 
cone 4, screwed onto a spindle or rod 5, which 
passes through a guide 6 in the case, and car 
ries near its upper end another cone 7. Its 
extreme upper end passes through a guide or 
spider 8, set in the tube 9, which is connected 
to a cap 10, having a flangell, fitting tightly 
inside the casing 1. 
Securely fastened to the under side of the 
cone 7 is a bar 12, which extends across to 
and receives a rod 13, working through a guide 
ls attached to the tube 9, and a nut 16 secured 
to the cap 10, said rod being threaded at 17 
to fit the thread of said nut. A knob 18 is 
provided at its top to enable it to be readily 
turned, and a spiral spring 25 is set between 
said knob and the cap to prevent the rod turn 
ing too easily and so accidentally changing 
the position of the cones 4 and 7. The lower 
end of the rod 13 is grooved at 19, and thus 
forms a support for the bar 12 and the parts 
immediately connected there with. 
On the inside of the casing 1, about the cen 
ter of its length, is secured a deflecting flange 
20, beneath which is set a ring of perforated 
pipe 21, provided with an inlet valve 22, 
through which the steam is admitted, and a 
second valve 23, through which the condensed 
water may be discharged-the perforated pipe 
being set slightly inclined, so that the con 
densed water will readily run out through 
said valve 23. 
At the under side of the cone 4 is a locking 
nut 24, by which said cone will be retained 
in the desired position when once set. 
The operation of dampening grain is so well 
understood that description thereof is hardly 
necessary, and it is sufficient to say that the 
grain enters at the top, and falling on cone 7 
is spread thereby, passing through the circu 
lar passage formed between the tube 9 and 
said cone 7, and as it descends it is dampened 
by the steam issuing from the perforated pipe 
21-the deflecting flange 20 compelling it to 
pass inside of the ring of perforated pipe, 
The grain passes out at the bottom between 
the ring 3 and cone 4. By the peculiar ar 
rangement of the two cones supported by the 
same rod they both move simultaneously, and 
so when it is required to increase or diminish 
the feed by moving the top cone, the lower 
one is moved simultaneously, so that the in 
let and outlet of the grain are always adjusted 
in a corresponding degree by simply turning 
the rod 13. 
I deem it important that the inlet and out 
let be of substantially the same size, or (what 
is essentially the same thing) that the valve 
governing the inlet and outlet shall be so ar 
ranged as to allow substantially the same 
a mount of grain to pass out as passes in, so 
that although the grain passes freely through 
the casing, the inlet and outlet are almost en 
tirely closed by the grain passing through, 
and thus there is but little escape of steam 
through said inlet and outlet, and conse 
quently the space within the casing is kept 
thoroughly permeated with it, with but little 
loss thereof. 
As it is necessary that the lower opening 
should be varied to some extent according to 
the nature of the grain, as some kinds of 
grain will swell more than others, the lower 
- 
95 
OO 
2 
539,812 
stantially the same capacity, of inlet and out 
let cones 7 and 4, connected together by the 
spindle 5 and governing the ingress and egress 
of the grain, a bar 12 connected with one of 
said cones, and a threaded rod 13 engaging 
with said bar 12, for positively adjusting both 
cones simultaneously and equally, Substan 
tially as described. 
4. The combination with a casing 1, having 
a contracted outlet 3, of a cone 4 Working 
therein, a cap 10 fitting the top of the casing, 
a tube 9 of the same capacity as the outlet 
depending from the cap, a cone 7 set in the 
bottom of the tube, and connected to cone 4, 
a threaded rod 13, and a bar 12 connected to 
said rod and with the cones 4, 7, for simul 
taneously adjusting both of said cones and 
positively holding them in any fixed or de 
sired position, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 3d day of 
September, 1894. 
WILLIAM II. HILL. 
Witnesses; 
SAMUEL. D. DODGE, 
JOSEPH. S. BERNHARD. 
35 
AO 
45 
cone can be adjusted separately by turning 
it on the rod 5, and fixing it in the desired po- . 
sition by turning the nut 24. 
I do not limit myself to the exact construc 
tion here shown, as it is evident that changes 
may be made without departing from the 
spirit of my invention. 
What I claim as new is 
1. The combination of a casing, having an 
inlet for the grain, and a valve governing the 
inflow of said grain, of an outlet for the grain 
of substantially the same size as the inlet, 
and a second valve governing the size of the 
passage for the egress thereof, said valves be 
ing connected together to move simultane 
ously, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with a casing, having 
an inlet for the grain, and a valve governing 
the inflow of sail grain, of an outlet for said 
grain of substantially the same size as the in 
let, and a second valve governing the size of 
the passage for the egress thereof, said valves 
being connected to move simultaneously, and 
one being adjustable independently of the 
Other, substantially as described. 
3. The combination with a casing 1, having 
an inlet and outlet for the grain, both of sub 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US539912.txt	(No Model.) 
E. CARRINGTON, 
HEATING APPARATUS FOR OIL TANKS. 
No. 539,912, 
Patented May 28, 1895. 
 
 
 
r 
So saEA3E 
A 
2-2 2 
VVITNEcss Ecs: - INVENror: - 
(2 (O. 26.24-22.c4 ecozy 
2. 26- 12 
v. 4, 6.4 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
X 
EUGENE CARRINGTON, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
MORTON SAFETY HEATING COMPANY, OF WEST VIRGINIA. 
HEATING A PPARATUS FOR OL-TANKS. 
--- 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 539,912, dated May 28, 1895. 
Application filed March 2, 1893, Serial No. 464,333. (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EUGENE CARRINGTON, 
of the city of Baltimore and State of Mary 
land, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in the Equipment of Cars with 
Heating Apparatus, of which the following is 
a full description. 
It is known among railroad men and those 
experienced in that line, that the wear and 
tear of heating apparatus upon certain classes 
of railway cars is very great. 
The object of my invention is to so con 
struct the heating device as to have little or 
no part of it exposed to the cold outer air and 
to arrange it so that it may readily stand 
the strain, thumping and rough treatment to 
which such cars are subjected. 
... The drawings which illustrate the inven 
tion although applicable to any class of cars 
are shown as illustrating an oil tank. Now 
in the transfer for long distances of oil in 
tanks and during cold weather the oil solidi 
fies and gets very thick and when it arrives 
at its destination, will not run out of the tank 
unless there be some means for heating the 
same to liquefy it to that point at which it 
Will readily pass through a tube. For this 
purpose various devices have been used but 
so far as I know none of them have been sat 
isfactory. In some, the pipes were exposed, 
in others the apparatus was provided with 
valves which subjected to the rough treat 
ment of train men soon became out of order 
and the whole apparatus was easily deranged 
by the more than ordinary strain and severe 
service placed upon it. 
My apparatus is in 
tended to remedy this defect. 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of the de 
vice within an oil-tank; Fig. 2, a side view 
of the same; Fig. 3, a sectional view taken on 
the line acac of Fig. 2. 
A is a tank for holding oil. 
B-B are the heating pipes connected with 
the steam supply through the pipe b'. The 
pipes B-B are joined together by an elbow 
bat one end, and the steam pipe b' enters 
this elbow about centrally of the elbow and 
projects up through the top of the car. At this 
end of the car I place a clamp C constructed 
substantially as shown in Fig. 3. A flat bar 
of iron of about three-fourths of an inch in 
thickness and a couple of inches wide is pro 
vided with the bearings c'-c', and with the 
extended and curved ends c-c which con 
form in shape to the inner surface of the tank, 
and are riveted thereto to hold the clamping 
pieces tightly in place. Within these bear 
ings the pipes B are placed and are usually 
provided with collars on either side of the 
camp as shown at c. The collars or shoul 
ders are usually made by the ordinary coup 
ling screwed onto the end of the pipe which 
forms a shoulder of one side of the clamp. 
The short piece of pipe extending therefrom 
and connecting with the elbow forms the 
part which enters the bearing and the elbow 
itself provided on either side with a coupling 
or collar forms the shoulders on the other 
side of the clamp; so that when the pipes 
with the connecting elbow are inserted in the 
bearings they are held rigidly and there can 
be no lateral or longitudinal movement of the 
pipe. The caps care then bolted in place 
sufficiently tight to hold the pipe without 
breaking it. This arrangement on that end 
prevents the breakage or straining of the 
pipe b' and also prevents the straining of 
the aperture above in the upper part of the 
tank through which the pipe passes and in 
sures a good joint. I have also placed other 
clamps D and E of similar construction and 
similarly attached to the tank. These clamps 
are provided with bearings and caps but in 
stead of screwing them down tightly, the 
pipes pass loosely therethrough, and being 
without collars or shoulders may have any 
amount of lateral or longitudinal movement. 
It will be seen by this arrangement that the 
pipes B being rigidly held at one end, the ex 
pansion and contraction due to heat and cold 
may have free play without exerting any 
strength or creating any damage upon the 
structure of the device, and all of the pipes 
being entirely closed within the tank are 
never subjected to the jamming, pumping and 
straining incident to the rough railway traffic 
which they have to encounter. 
At the other end of the tank where the 
clamp E is placed the pipes B-B are joined 
by the T-pipe F, and as this end of the pipe 
would be located nearly or quite over the 
trucks of the car it is extended backwardly 
9o . 
Id 
I5. 
2C) 
25 
35 
So 
539,912 
O 
(5 
2 d 
25 
and passed through the car beyond the trucks. 
It is also formed in a serpentine or S-shape, 
So that it may readily yield and give to the 
eXpansion and contraction of the pipes B. At 
its outlet, the aperture in the bottom wall of 
the tank is reinforced by a piece of metal f' 
On One or both sides, and riveted thereto, and 
for convenience provided with a screw thread 
within which is inserted the outlet pipe. It 
will be seen that this structure will effectually 
resist any strain or rough treatment to which 
it may be subjected. The inlet aperture 
through the upper wall of the tank at the 
Other end through which the pipe b passes 
may also be reinforced in the same way. 
The ends of both the inlet pipe and the out 
let pipe are simply capped or plugged, by the 
plugs band e without a valve or any other 
delicate device liable to disarrangement, and 
are secured by a chain to prevent loss. 
Now notwithstanding the fact that a pipe 
such as herein above described may be used, 
nevertheless in cold climates the stea in in 
such pipe is apt to condense and the water of 
condensation freeze therein, or become so cold 
as not effectually to perform its work, and if 
the pipes remain open so that the steam may 
have direct passage therethrough it would be 
very difficult to get them hot enough to ef 
fectually heat the oil and render it sufficiently 
liquid to run out of the tank, and yet it is de 
sirable not to allow the steam to remain in 
the tank but to pass it entirely through in a 
Constant flow. I therefore insert within the 
pipe an earthenware or non-metallic block 
similar to that used by the Morton Companys 
system and illustrated in the patent to Thomas 
M. Morton, dated August 21, 188S, No. 388,065. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
The tanks arrive at their destination filled 
with an oil in a congealed or thickened state. 
The caps or plugsband eare removed. Steam 
connection is made with the pipe b' and the 
Steam allowed to pass through the pipes B. 
In passing, the brick absorbs the heat, holds 
and retains it and the steam and water of con 
densation pass through and out the other end, 
at all times retaining heat sufficient to liq 
uidize the oil and allow it to run, while the 
pipes may expand without strain upon the 
Structure. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In an oil tank, a heating device located 
wholly within the tank at or near the botton, 
consisting of the pipes B-B running longi 
tudinally with the tank, and connected with 
35 
40 
45 
55 
the steam inlet pipe b', running through the 
top of the tank and secured thereto, in combi 
nation with supporting brackets for the pipes 
B-B, rigidly secured to said pipes at the steam 
inlet end, whereby said pipes are allowed to 
expand toward their opposite end and thereby 
prevent strain or breakage of the connecting 
pipe b', substantially as described. 
2. In an oil tank, a heating device located 
wholly within the tank at or near the bottom, 
consisting of the pipes B-B, running longi 
tudinally with the tank, and connected with 
the steam inlet pipe b, running through the 
top of the tank and Secured thereto, in combi 
nation with supporting brackets at each end 
of the pipes B-B, and rigidly secured to the 
bracket at the steam inlet end with an expan 
sion outlet pipe running from the end of pipes 
B-B opposite the steam inlet, through the bot 
tom of the tank and secured thereto, substan 
tially as described. 
3. in an oil tank, a heating device located 
wholly within the tank at or near the bottom, 
consisting of the pipes B-B, running longi 
tudinally with the tank, and connected with 
a steam inlet pipe b', running through the top 
of the tank and secured thereto, in combina 
tion with supporting brackets at each end of 
the pipes B-B, and rigidly secured thereto, 
at the steam inlet end, and passing loosely 
through the bracket at the other end, and pro 
vided at said end with an expansion pipe run 
ning through the bottom of the tank and se 
cured thereto, and having the inlet and outlet 
pipes provided with plugs, substantially as 
described. 
4. In an oil tank, a heating device located 
wholly within the tank near the bottom, con 
sisting of the pipes B-B running longitudi 
nally with the tank, and connected with a 
steam inlet pipe b', the pipes B-B provided 
with an inclosed perforated heating brick, in 
combination with supporting brackets at each 
ead, rigidly secured to the pipes B-B, at the 
steam inlet end, and loosely holding the same 
at the opposite end, and an expansion outlet 
pipe passing through the bottom of the tank 
and rigidly secured thereto, substantially as 
described. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 9th day of 
February, A. D. 1893. 
r 
EJGENE CARRINGTON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. C. Cox, 
WILLIAM SUTPHEN. 
75 
95 
C. Cd 
ros 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540012.txt	(No Model.) 
G. D'ADHEMAR, 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 540,012. 
Patented May 28, 1895. 
WTWESSES; 
7 
2. 
2. f WWEAVTOR 
% (11%--- 
/ 
ATC4WEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
G. D'ADHEMAR. 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 540,012. 
Patented May 28, 1895. 
Fa: 2. 
A 
Zo 
A 
He 
ALT 
 
 
WWW 
Y N 
I 
az 
 
  
l 
 
 
 
Y 
WTWESSES 
O 
St. 34. 
7-car Af 
 
22 
3.16. 
INVENTOR 
Zge 3 2.4. 3%. , 
BY 
4 
A 4t2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 540, Ol2. 
G. D'ADHEMAR. 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented May 28, 1895. 
A 
I th. 
A y. 2' 
- 
A 
25. 
572 
Sf94. 2%te, 
 
| WWEAVTOR 
BY 
% YS, 
(No Model.) 
G. D'ADHEMAR, 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 540,012. 
Patented May 28, 1895, 
W 
--A-AH-A- 
AAA 
s 
. 
') 
2-g 
IE 
K 
sf92-92 , 4. 
A 
WITNESSES 
v 
2. (4%- 
/WWENTOR 
/2/2/ 
3. 
Zo 
A 7TO 
S. 
 
(No Model.) 
G. D'ADHEMAR, 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
No. 540,012. 
Patented May 28, 1895, 
/iy. 
 
 
 
2 2 
 
 
 
 
In LL 
III 
22 
 
E. 
ill- W V V II 
FT I A N = 
LL 
O I 
I 
Z23 
 
2, 
Sf23.2 7:1. 
64- 
 
   
77 
| WVENTOR 
BY 
3.4, at 1%.-- 
2,462 
(No Model.) 
G, D'ADHEMAR. 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 540,012, 
Patented May 28, 1895, 
azz aws 
WITNESSES 
V 'Z' 
a' 
z 27 
weto 
/.../ 2% 
5,462. 
ATTORNEYS, 
hie NorS PETERS co, PHoro-Tho, washington, b.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
G. D'ADHEMAR, 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 sheets-Sheet 7. 
No. 540,012, 
Patented May 28, 1895, 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
NS zz 2 
24s w 2. 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
ere, 924. 
7a. 246-4 
IWVENTOR 
.3% aale-1 
BY 
WS2, 
thig Norris EggRs co. Photo-Li Tho... was HINGron, D. c 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 540,012, 
 
G. D'ADHEMAR, 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 8, 
Patented May 28, 1895. 
3.22. 
/.../e 
a % 2%. 
3646 
 
(No Model.) 
G, D'ADHEMAR, 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 9. 
No. 540,012. 
Patented May 28, 1895. 
 
 
  
 
 
SYSS N 
Er 
s T 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
Sf93. 
a 2. 
-6 /WWENTOR 
%-1.9%. 
BY 544 7. 
f:1: NORRIS PETERs Co., Phisto.H.O., WASHINGOM, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 540,012, 
G, D'ADHEMAR, 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 10. 
Patented May 28, 1895, 
 
-S 
2 SVY 
i 
Y 
24A6) Z. 
v V 
 
 
 
f t E. w O AR 
a 
ATT 
The 
4 is fat. ERS CO, Photo. Tho... wash MGN. C. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GAST ON DAD HEMA R, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
TELEPHONE CENTRAL STATION. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 510,012, dated May 28, 1895. 
Application filed June 20, 1894, Serial No. 515,150, (No model.) Patented in France May 10, 1893, No. 230,380, 
To all tufton, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, GASTON DADHEMAR, a 
citizen of the Republic of France, residing at 
Paris, in said Republic of France, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Telephone Central Stations, (for which Let 
ters Patent were granted to me in France, No. 
230,380, dated May 10, 1893, and a certificate 
of addition thereto, dated December 28, 1893.) 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in telephone central stations and appa 
ratus for the same, by which a greater num 
ber of Subscribers can be connected with each 
station and attended to with greater facility 
by a smaller number of employs than the 
telephone central stations heretofore in use, 
and the invention consists of a telephone cen 
tral station which comprises primarily, an im 
proved annunciator, a switch board arranged 
below said annunciator and provided with 
rows of jacks having metallic sockets and con 
tact springs, separated by insulating blocks, a 
local circuit connected with said jacks and 
containing an electro-magnet, the armature of 
which cuts out the electro-magnet of an an 
nunciator while the line is occupied, said local 
circuit also acting on the telephone of the op 
erator at the moment of calling in Such a man 
ner that no electric communications can take 
place between the telephones of the different 
Operators. 
The invention consists, further, in the con 
struction of the plugs by which the connec 
tion with the subscribers' jacks is established, 
next in the construction of a combined key 
for conversation and listening, and in the 
combination of the latter with the calling-up 
keys, an induction coil, a relay and a local 
circuit, as will be fully described hereinafter 
and finally defined in the claims. 
The general object and nature of my inven 
tion being thus indicated, I will now proceed 
to describe particularly the different appa 
ratus of which my improved central station 
is composed and the circuits by which said 
apparatus are connected and by which they 
are operated in practice. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my improved telephone 
central station with its annunciators, jacks, 
plugs, and keys, and showing the relative posi 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
55 
75 
So 
tion of the operator to the station and the re 
ceiving and transmitting telephones. FigS. 2, 
2,29, and 29 are diagrams showing the different 
apparatus which compose my improved tele 
phone central station and the circuits connect 
ing them with each other and with the lines 
of the subscribers. Fig. 3 is a side elevation, 
drawn on a larger scale, of an annunciator by 
which the number of the subscriber who de 
sires to communicate with another subscriber 
is indicated. Fig. 3 is a detail front view of 
an annunciator-drop. Fig. 4 is a vertical lon 
gitudinal section of a portion of the switch 
board, showing a plug inserted into one of the 
jacks. Fig. 4 is a plan of Fig. 4; Fig. 4", a 
frout view of the perforated front plate for 
the jacks. Figs. 5 and 5 represent, respect 
ively, a side elevation and a vertical longi 
tudinal section of one of the plugs used with 
the jacks in my improved central Station, 
said figures being drawn on a larger Scale. 
Fig. 6 is a sectional side elevation showing 
one of the plugs in a position of rest when 
not connected with a subscriber's line. Fig. 
7 is a side elevation of the multiple-wire 
connection by which the line of every sub 
scriber is connected with the central station. 
Figs. 7 and 7 are details of Fig. 7. Fig. S is 
a diagram showing the local circuits for each 
jack. Figs, 9 and 10 are respectively a side 
elevation and a vertical transverse Section of 
the compound key by which the operator 
makes or establishes connection, and Figs. 
11, 12, and 13 are vertical longitudinal sec 
tions showing the three different positions 
into which the compound key can be placed 
for making proper connections. 
Similar letters and figures of reference indi 
cate like parts in all the drawings. 
The annunciator is arranged above the 
switch-board, and in such a position that any 
drop can be readily seen and read by the op 
erator. An annunciator is arranged for each 
subscriber, and provided with a drop, carry 
ing number of the subscriber. The annun 
ciator and its drop are shown in detail in 
Figs. 3 and 3, and it consists of an electro 
magnet A, which is attached to an upright 
plate B at the upper front part of the station, 
and of an armature C, which is pivoted at to 
and provided with a forward-extending rod 
c, that moves with the armature. In front 
90 
95 
OO 
3 
540,012 
O 
of the plate B is pivoted at d to suitable lugs 
e, a piece f, g, h, to the lower end of which 
is attached a drop , which is formed of a 
convex plate of metal' and on which is en 
graved or otherwise produced, the number of 
one of the subscribers, as shown in Fig. 3. 
The piece f, g, h, is so balanced on its pivot 
d, that it assumes, when released, the posi 
tion shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3, in which 
position the number on the drop i, is exposed 
to view. The piece f, g, h, however, is held 
ordinarily in the position shown in full lines 
in Fig. 3 by the rod c, which engages the up 
per end f, of said piece and retains thereby 
the drop in its inward position so that its 
face is covered by the forward projection 
bracket-platei, which is attached to the front 
plate B. A second electro-magnet K is at 
tached to the front-plate B, below the electro 
magnet A and provided at its rear-end with 
an armature lic', which is pivoted at l and 
provided with a forward-extending arm m, 
the front-end of which is located below the 
projecting nose g of the piece f, g, h. A 
plate n, of hard rubber or other suitable in 
sulating material, is attached to the armature 
k' and provided with an opening which is 
engaged by a spring 0, that is attached to a 
plate p. Adjacent to the upright plate p is 
arranged a plate q, which is insulated from 
the plate p and which carries a contact-screw 
ir against which the spring O abuts when in 
a state of rest. One end of the coils of the 
electro-magnet A is connected with a bind 
ing-screw on the upright plate p, while the 
other end of said (oils is connected with a 
line-wire, the plate q being connected by a 
binding-screw with the second line-wire of a 
subscriber. The coils of the electro-magnet 
IK are connected with a local circuit, which 
will be described hereinafter. 
By the action of the magneto-call of the sub 
scriber the electro-magnet A is excited, and 
its armature a attracted, so that the rod c is 
raised and the piece, f, g, h, permitted to turn 
on its axis, whereby the drop i, on which the 
number of the subscriber is arranged, is moved 
forward beyond the bracket-plate i, so as to 
be seen by the operator. The rod c is stopped 
by a contact-screws, which is supported by 
an insulated lug attached to the front-plate 
B, as shown in Fig. 3, and which screw closes 
the local circuit of a call-bell. On the other 
hand, when a current is passed through the 
coils of the electro-magnet K, its armaturek' 
is attracted so that the forwardly-extending 
rod m of the same engages the nose g of the 
piece f, g, h, so as to return it into its initial 
position, the numbered drop , being likewise 
moved and covered by the bracket-plate j. 
The plate n, which connects the armature k' 
with the spring O, moves the spring o, away 
from the contact-screw r, cuts the electro 
magnet A out of the circuit of the subscriber's 
line, and returns the armature a, and rod c 
into their former position. As soon as the 
current ceases in the electro-magnet K, its 
75 
armature k", and rod m are returned into their 
former position under the action of the spring 
o, so that the latter again forms contact with 
the contact-screw r, while the piece f, g, h, is 
retained in its normal position by the contact 
of the rod c, with its upper end f. If desired, 
a second spring o, and contact-screw r may 
be used without changing the general arrange 
ment described, so as to produce in the same 
manner, the throwing in or out of circuit of 
the second line wire of the electro-magnet A. 
It is most advantageous to arrange the an 
nunciators above the switch-board, so as to 
have as much place as possible available for 
the jacks, which have to be arranged as con 
veniently as possible to the hands of the op 
erator. By this arrangement of the annun 
ciators, the numbers of the subscribers are 
conveniently visible to the eye of the opera 
tor, without requiring any change of position 
of the head. It is also possible to arrange, 
while preserving the position of the drops of 
the annunciators, to render the numbers visi 
ble to the operator by means of inclined mir 
rors, which are arranged in front of the oper 
ator, so as to reflect in the direction of the 
eyes of the same, when sitting in front of the 
switch-board, said mirrors reflecting the num 
95 
ber of any annunciator-drop as shown in Fig. 
In this case, however, the number has to . 
1. 
be inscribed on the drop in reversed figures, 
so as to appear in its proper position in the 
mirror. By this arrangement, the operator 
can give all her attention to the proper Su 
pervision of the jacks on the manipulating 
table. 
The connecting-plug.-One of the connect 
ing-plugs is shown as inserted into a jack in 
Fig. 4, and inside elevation and in longitudi 
nal section respectively in Figs. 5 and 5. It 
consists of a metallic tube 1, into one end 
of which is screwed a hollow cylindrical piece 
2, which incloses an insulating tube 3 that 
surrounds a metallic tube 4, which is again 
separated by a second insulating tube 5, from 
the central cylindrical rod or core 6 of metal. 
A tube 4, is screwed into the front-end of a 
piece 7, the rear end of which is perforated 
and connected by a screw 9, with the termi 
nal tube of a flexible conducting cord, in which 
the conducting wires are arranged. The cen 
tral rod 6, is screwed into a metallic cylinder 
10, in which another conducting wire of the 
flexible cord is firmly held by a screw 11. 
Onto the opposite end of the rod 6, is screwed 
a cylindrical piece of metal 12, which forms 
the terminal of the interior conductor of the 
The tube 1, has an opening at. 
flexible cord. 
its middle portion, so as to permit the inser. 
tion of the screws 9 and 11. This opening is 
closed by a sleeve 14, which is securely held 
in position by the screw 15. The flexible cord 
contains an interior conductor of fine wire, 
which terminates in the piece 10 and which 
is covered by an insulating layer of suitably 
prepared silk or cotton. Around the central 
wire a second conductor is formed by suitably 
25 
I 3G 
IOO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
 
540,012 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
O 
3O 
the sleeve d by the key d, which engages 
covered conducting wires, which terminate in 
notches in the sleeve, plates and collars, as 
the small tube 8, and which are likewise cov 
ered by an insulating layer of suitably pre 
shown in Figs, 7 and 7. The three star-shaped 
plates of each group on the supporting rod 
pared silk or cotton. The two insulated con 
ducting wires are arranged concentrically to 
dare shifted relatively to each other, so that 
they assume the position shown in Fig. 7, 
each other and pass freely through the open 
whereby the stringing of the wires for each 
ing of the piece 13, and then through a flexi 
group of plates d is greatly facilitated. 
ble tube or cover 16, formed of a helically 
In Fig. 8, is shown the electric connections 
wound wire, which is again covered by a 
braided layer of silk, cotton or linen. The 
of the metallic circuit of a subscriber with 
the common jacks on the different Switch 
exterior coiled wire 16 forms a conductor, 
boards I, II, III, N, of a central station, the 
which terminates in the body of the plug and 
replying jack R and the annunciator A. The 
which is placed thereby in electric connection 
two wires of the metallic circuit of a Subscriber 
with the tubes 1 and 2. 
are connected with the springs c and d of 
The jacks.-The plugs are inserted into a 
the different jacks and are then connected 
series of jacks, which are shown in vertical 
section in Fig. 4, in plan in Fig. 4", while Fig. 
with the annunciator, one of the wires passing 
to the contact e, f, which is controlled by 
4, is a front-view of the front-plate of a dou 
an electro-magnet D*. The Sockets C of the 
ble series of jacks. Each jack is composed of 
different jacks of the same circuit are con 
a metallic socket C.', which is connected with 
a backwardly-extending metallic plate t' to 
nected with each other and with the electro 
magnet D*, which latter is connected with 
which the conducting wire is solidered and of 
one pole of a battery B, while the other pole 
two metallic springs, c', d', which are made 
of unequal length and which are separated by 
is connected with the body of the plug, as in 
dicated ath, Fig. 8. In the switch-board on 
a block e of hard rubber or other suitable in 
which the annunciator and the replying-jack 
sulating material. The different parts are 
are arranged together with the circuit just 
supported on a bracket f", g', h", which is 
described, the connection of the three wires 
made of hard rubber or other insulating mal 
of the replying jack with the three wires of 
terial, and in general form of the letter T, 
the common jacks is made by a group of Star 
and which carries two rows of jacks, which 
shaped plates, arranged on the cylinder M, as 
are symmetrically arranged on the T-shaped 
bracket and which permit the grouping Of a 
before described. The two wires, which come 
large number of jacks in comparatively Simall 
from the station of the subscriber are con 
space. The corresponding pieces of the sec 
nected either with the springs of the jack on 
the switch-board I, or with those of the switch 
ond row of jacks are indicated by the same 
board N, the extremities being selected for 
letters as those of the first row. The springs 
this connection so that the Wires can readily 
c' and d are attached to the lower part of the 
T-shaped bracket by means of screws ' and 
be extended to new Switch-boards in case Such 
should be necessary. The battery B consists 
j', which are insulated from the springs by 
of primary or secondary cells and may be re 
4o plates lic' and short tubes l and n' of hard 
placed by any other source of electricity, by 
rubber or other suitable insulating material. 
The backwardly-extending plates b' are re 
which the current for all the different local 
circuits of the station is supplied in such a 
tained in place and insulated from the Springs 
manner, that all the electro-magnets, Such as 
c' d' by the blocks e' and plates lic'. 
D*, are connected at W* with one pole, while 
In Fig. 4, a plug is shown as being inserted 
the other pole of the battery is connected at X* 
into one of the jacks, so that the tube 2 of 
with the body of the plugs. When a plug such 
the plug is in contact with the socket Cl', the 
tube 4 with the contact-spring c' and the piece 
as his inserted into a jack, the local circuit of 
the battery is closed and the current passes 
12 of the plug with the spring d" of the jack. 
from the battery through the plug to the Socket 
In Fig. 7, are shown the arrangements of a 
C. of the jack and to the electro-magnet D*. 
number of star-shaped plates which are 
The armature of the electro-magnet D* is at 
mounted on a Supporting cylinder, Said plates 
tracted, the contact is broken at e and the 
having three arms each, to which the wires 
annunciator A is placed out of circuit during 
for the common jacks and the wires of the 
jacks used for replying, are attached. Fig. 
the time that the plug remains inserted in 
the jack. As soon as tie plug is withdrawn, 
7, shows an end-elevation of a group of three 
star-shaped plates and Fig. 7, a single de 
the armature of the electro - magnet D* is 
dropped and the contact ef is re-estab 
tached plate. These star-shaped plates are 
lished, so that the annunciator A is replaced 
punched from suitable metal and locked by 
means of a key to the supporting rod on which 
in the circuit of the subscriber. In Fig. 8, 
all plates are assembled, as shown in Fig. 7, a 
for the sake of clearness the two wires of the 
metallic circuit of the plug are not shown, 
sufficient number being arranged so that the 
but they are shown in Fig. 2 and will be de 
wires connected there to can be united into 
one cable. The interior rod is covered with 
Scribed later On. 
an insulating sleeve don which are placed 
The local circuit, the effect of which on the 
alternately the star-shaped plates d and the 
electro-magnet D* has just been described, is 
separating collars d' which are retained on also combined with other accessories in the 
55 
Od 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 3O 
 
4. 
540,012 
Cd 
- 
central station, which forms a testing circuit rod is is lifted, owing to the movement of 
that is entirely independent of the telephone 
the pivot l in upward direction so that the 
block l, together with the switch-springs li 
of the operator. 
The combined conversing and listening 
is is raised and at the same time the pin 
key.-Figs. 9 to 13 show the construction of the 
forms contact with the spring l. The con 
combined key for conversing and listening. 
necting-strap l is moved in a downward di 
Fig.2 shows the relative position of the com 
rection following the oscillating motion of 
bined conversing and listening key to the other 
the block l, but without exerting any special 
parts of the station. Fig. 13 shows the posi 
effect. As the pivot l is moved beyond the 
tion of the key when in its normal position of 
dead-center of the axis of the lever, l, the 
rest; Fig. 11, when it is set for conversation, 
lever is retained in the position shown in 
and Fig. 12, when it is set for listening; the 
Fig. 11, until it is returned into the position 
last three figures showing merely the differ 
shown in Fig. 13. 
ent positions of the key so as to render its op 
In passing the lever l' from the position 
eration clearer. The lever l is keyed to a 
shown in Fig. 13, to the position shown in 
square pivot l, to which is also applied a 
Fig. 12 or into the listening position, the in 
block l, which carries two concentric pivots 
verse effect is produced namely, the connect 
land l. At the lower part of the key-frame 
ing-strap l is raised, also the block with 
is arranged a movable insulating block l', to 
its switch-springs, while simultaneously the 
which are attached two pairs of flat switch 
pin l9 makes contact with the spring land 
springs land l, the block being open in its 
presses the latter in contact with the studi, 
center part and carrying a transverse pin l9. 
but as the position for listening is necessary 
The insulating block lisguided in its verti 
only for a moment, it is not necessary to 
cal movement on two pins l which are at 
move the pivot l beyond the dead-center of 
tached to the transverse insulating bottom 
the axis of the lever l', so that as soon as the 
piece l of the key-frame. Two pairs of heli 
lever l is released, it is returned again into 
cal springs l'are arranged at opposite sides 
the normal position shown in Fig. 13. 
The diagrams, Figs. 1, 2,2 and 2', show the 
of the block l', and exert a tension on the 
block, which holds the same in the position 
application of the key in combination with the 
circuits, which participate in the functioning 
shown in Figs. 9 and 10, the lower ends of 
the springs being attached to binding-posts 
of the different parts. By the contact-spring 
land l at the under side of the insulating 
land the disposition of the relay Q, the ar 
bar l. The current passes from the binding 
mature of which carries an insulated contact 
posts land l, by means of connecting-screws 
spring b that abuts on a contact-point b, and 
715 and li to the respective switch - springs. 
by the combination of the listening and con 
A connecting-strap l is applied at its upper 
versation keys into one member, a single re 
end to the pivot l while its lower slotted end 
lay only is required, and thereby the construc 
enters into the central opening of the block 
tion of the central station considerably sim 
land is engaged by the fixed transverse pin 
plified. In Fig. 2, the combined - key l is 
79. A second connecting-rod or strap l is 
shown in the position of conversation. P 
formed of two pieces of exactly the same 
shows the plug of the calling subscriber, and 
shape as the strap l', said pieces being ap 
P' the plug of the subscriber that is called up. 
plied to the pivot l of the block li while 
Fig. 2, shows further the connections of the 
their lower slotted ends are extended into 
different members of the central station. / 
the central opening of the movable block 
and 2 indicate the connecting-jacks of two 
l, and are likewise engaged by the fixed 
subscribers y' and 2'. They are connected 
transverse pin . The connecting-strap lif 
with similar jacks on the other switch-boards, 
is provided with a laterally-extending pin 
as was before described. y is the special 
219, which serves to raise a contact-spring l?, 
jack required for replying to the subscriber 
which is attached at one end to the insulated 
y', which is connected by means of the star 
block l, and the free end of which forms 
shaped plates M with the wires of the common 
contact with a studi' on the insulating-block 
jacks. A is the annunciator of the subscriber 
l28. The connecting-strap l carries a similar 
y' and Kits local electro-magnet. The special 
pin l, which forms contact with a contact 
jack of the subscriber y' and his correspond 
spring 
which is attached to the insulating 
ing annunciator are supposed to be located on 
block 38. The pins land l are connected 
another switch-board. P is the plug of the 
by their straps land l, plug land lever l' 
calling subscriber and P' the plug of the sub 
with the metallic supporting-plate of the 
scriber called up, which is placed into its nor 
keys, said plate being electrically connected 
mal position of rest, on the table below the 
with the pole w of the battery B. The le 
switch-board. The flexible cords of the plugs 
wer l' which is provided with a knob or but 
are made in the usual manner and are held 
ton l is retained in the position of rest, 
on proper tension by weighted pulleys (not 
shown in Fig. 13, by the tension exerted on 
shown) which move over the cords. For each 
the connecting-straps land l by the helical 
pair of plugs such as P and P' is required a 
springs l. By taking hold of the button l 
combined conversation and listening key l, 
of the leverland moving the same over into 
an annunciator P, for indicating the end of 
the position shown in Fig. 11, the connecting 
the conversation, with a local electro-magnet 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
I 25 
 
540,012 
s 
5 
O 
25 
30 
35 
4.O 
45 
55 
P. This latter is made of exactly the same over the inducting-coils i, the resistance-coil 
r, the supporting-plate of the calling key, the 
construction as the local electro-magnet K of 
supporting-plate of the conversation-key and 
the annunciator A, but is not provided with a 
contact-spring. 
over the wired to the pole u' of the battery 
B. The passage of the current to the induct 
Each operator attends to a certain number 
ing-coil it induces a current in the coil 9 
of pairs of plugs, with a combined conversation 
and listening key, a pair of calling-up keySW 
which passes into the telephone T and pro 
and v, a telephone-receiver T, an induction 
duces a signal or click in the same. 
coil it, a microphone-transmitter S and a local 
It is obvious that if no plug is pressed into 
relay Q. The calling-up keys V and v are 
the jack of the subscriber Z", the socket of 
all corresponding jacks are cut off from the 
similar in construction, their construction and 
arrangement being clearly understood from 
pole ac of the battery, so that at the moment 
the diagram, Fig. 2, in which the key v is 
of touching the socket no current passes 
through the plug P', so that the telephone re 
mounted above a Supplementary contact 
plate f, which is not necessary for the key V. 
mains silent and indicates thereby that the 
The induction-coil t comprises three coils, 
line is free. 
the coil go for the telephone, the microphone 
In Fig. 2, the operator having ascertained 
that the jack Z of the subscriber Z is free, 
coil h9 and the testing-coil it. The latter is 
always in open circuit except in the moment 
forces the plug P' into the jack, so as to es 
when the line already occupied is tested. A 
tablish communication with the subscriber 6. 
This figure shows the moment when in press 
resistance i* is placed in the circuit of the lat 
ing down the key the subscriber Z' is called 
ter coil for weakening the current. U and ac' 
are the wires of the primary or secondary bat 
up, which has the effect that the current of 
the battery n, n is sent through the plug P', 
tery, dynamo or other source of electricity B, 
which supplies by branch-wires the necessary 
while at the same time by the contact U, f", 
the electro-magnet Q is cut out of circuit, the 
current for the electro-magnet of the annun 
current passing the pole U of tie battery B 
ciator P for indicating the end of the conver 
over the wired, the supporting-plates of the 
sation and for the local relay Q. The poles 
conversation and calling-keys, Over , f' and 
of the calling battery are indicated by the let 
the coils of the electro-magnet Q to the pole ac" 
ters in and 7. 
Figs. 2, 2, 2 and 2 show the different 
of the battery B. This causes the armature C. 
positions of the circuits during the four op 
to leave the contact b and make contact With 
c. From this moment, the core of the plug P. 
erating stages. In each of these figures the 
does not communicate any more with the in 
circuits of two subscribers only are shown for 
the purpose of simplifying the description. 
duction-coil 
but with the core of the plug 
P. It is clear that as soon as the contact of 
It is understood, however, that each sub 
the key with the plate f is interrupted, the 
scriber has a general jack in each table and 
a special jack and a calling-annunciator in 
armature a remains still attracted, as the Con 
tacts b, b close a new circuit for the current, 
one of the sections. 
which passes from the pole ac' over the coils of 
Referring to Fig. 2 it is assumed that the 
the relay Q, contacts b, b, and over the contact 
subscriber y' has called which is indicated by 
l, it to the supporting-plate of the key land 
the annunclator A. The operator then places 
the plug P into the jack f. This produces 
over the wired back to the pole U. Therefore 
during. the conversation of the operator with 
the current from the pole ac of the battery B 
that passes through the body of the plug P to 
the subscribers Z' and G, all parts remain in 
the positions described. It is obvious how 
to the socket of the jacky and from the same 
ever, that as soon as the operator returns the 
to all the corresponding jacks in the other 
key l into its vertical position or position of 
sections. The current passes then to the elec 
rest, the contacts land l are interrupted and 
tro-magnet IK which is excited and then back 
the current does not pass any more through 
to the other pole U of the battery B. The 
the coils of the relay Q, so that the armature C, 
armature of the electro-magnet K is attracted, 
leaves the contact c and drops back against 
the contact O, r interrupted and thereby the 
coil of the calling-electro-magnet A placed out 
the contact b. This latter position is shown 
of circuit. The operator sets then the key l 
in Fig. 2 where the two subscribers 7 and S 
are in communication and in which the ap 
into position for conversation, takes the plug 
paratus of the operator is cut out from the 
P and touches with its core the Socket of the 
jack 2 of the subscriber 2 called up. The 
circuit of communication between the Sub 
scribers. In this position the cores of the 
line of the subscriber 2' thus called upon is 
plugs P and P' are in direct communication 
shown as being already occupied in Fig. 2. 
with the contact l of the conversation-key 
Consequently in this figure the body of the 
and in addition thereto the annunciator P. 
plug P' connects the socket of the jack 2 with 
the pole ac' of the battery B. Likewise in 
which indicates the end of the conversation, 
Fig. 2, the current of the battery enters into 
is in communication in the usual manner 
with the plugs P and P. 
the core of the plug P', passes over the con 
versation-key l', the calling-key v, the arma 
When the annunciator Pindicates the end 
of the conversation, the operator Verifies this 
ture C and the contact b to the relay Q, then 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
od 
IC 5 
I 5 
I 25 
I 3O 
 
6 
540,012 
5 
O 
fact by placing the key linto the listening 
position, as shown in Fig. 2, which has the 
result that the telephone-circuit of the oper 
ator is switched in in place of the annunciator 
P, while at the same time the parts l', land 
l' are placed in contact-that is to say, the 
Communication of the two last contacts is es 
tablished with the pole w over the wiro d 
and the supporting-plate of the conversation 
key. From the contact the current passes 
over P and then to the pole a, so that the 
signal P is effaced. From the contact the 
current passes through the coils of the relay 
Q to the pole ac", so that the armature a is at 
tracted and placed against the contact c, and 
thereby direct communication between the 
cores of the plugs Pand P' is established. The 
operator then replaces the key linto its posi 
tion of rest, by which the contacts l1, l, and 
l' are separated. The current can then 
neither pass over P nor over the coils of the 
relay Q, so that the armature leaves the con 
tact c and returns to the contact b by the 
action of its spring. It results from the fore 
going description that it is not necessary to 
make any connection between the testing cir 
cuit and the earth, so that in consequence 
thereof the metallic circuits of the subscrib 
ers do not influence each other, nor is there 
any interfering noise that would impair the 
Conversation. Further as the circuits of the 
telephones of the different operators have no 
connection with each other nor with the earth, 
these devices are entirely independent from 
each other and are not subject to any dis 
turbance or confusion of sounds. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a telephone central station, the com 
bination, with a calling-annunciator of an 
electro-magnet, a local circuit for said elec 
tro-magnet, and means for automatically 
breaking the circuit of said electro-magnet of 
the annunciator and at the same time return 
ing the drop of said annunciator, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In a telephone central station, the com 
bination, with a calling-annunciator, of an 
electro-magnet in local circuit with said an 
nunciator, means for automatically breaking 
the circuit of said electro-magnet and return 
ing the drop of the annunciator, a plug formed 
of three concentric conductors, and a jackcom 
posed of a socket that is always isolated from 
the line and earth and two insulated contact 
springs, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a telephone central station, the com 
bination of two series or rows of jacks, com 
posed of a double row of sockets, two rows of 
contact-springs arranged back of said sock 
efs, and separating blocks of insulating ma 
terial provided with enlarged heads at their 
inner ends extending between the contact 
springs of each row, and an insulating bracket 
arranged to support both rows of jacks, one 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
9 O 
OO 
O 
O 
above and the other below said bracket, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In a telephone central station, the com - 
bination with a group of three star-shaped 
connecting plates, shifted relatively to each 
other on their supporting axle, each plate be 
ing connected with the three wires in a Sub 
scriber's circuit, of jacks, composed each of a 
metallic socket, a pair of contact-springs and 
an insulating block for separating said con 
tact-springs, and plugs formed of three con 
centric conductors, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a telephone central station, the com 
bination, of a combined conversation and lis 
tening key, provided with two pairs of auxil 
iary contacts, a local circuit connected with 
said auxiliary contacts, a relay in said local 
circuit, an armature for said relay provided 
with an insulated extension-arm, contacts for 
said armature and arm, and electric connec 
tions between said auxiliary contacts, the 
armature and its contacts, whereby the arma 
ture is attracted when the key is set for con 
versation or listening but dropped into 
normal or initial position when the key is 
placed into its position of rest, substantially 
as set forth. 
6. In a telephone central station, the com 
bination with the calling-up keys and the tele 
phone of the operator, of a local circuit, a re 
lay in said circuit, a pair of connecting-plugs 
of which the core of the plug of the subscriber 
called-up is in connection with the armature 
of the relay which armature is normally in 
said local circuit, and a special testing coil 
located in the induction - coil of the micro 
phone arid isolated from the line and earth, 
said armature being switched out of said local 
circuit when the relay is operated and con 
nected with the core of the plug of the call 
ing subscriber, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a telephone central station, the com 
bination of a combined conversation and lis 
tening key, having two pairs of auxiliary con 
tacts, a key for the subscriber to be called up, 
an auxiliary contact-plate for said calling-up 
key, a relay, an armature for said relay hav 
ing an extension-arm, a local circuit which 
comprises said auxiliary contacts, the coils of 
the relay and the contact-plate, contacts for 
the armature of the relay, and two connect 
ing plugs, respectively for the calling and 
called-up subscribers, said auxiliary contact 
plate closing the local circuit, so as to con 
nect the cores of the plugs and attract the 
armature of the relay until the conversation 
key is returned from its position of conver 
sation or listening into its position of 
rest, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
- 
GASTON DADHEMAR. 
I 25 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
K. R. BRENNAN. 
65 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540112.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 540,112. 
M. RUDE. 
MATTRESS. 
Patented May 28, 1895, 
WITNESSES; 
%au/ .9%%e 
Yaz- 
INVENTOR 
2.724. 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
the ORRIS PEreRS co, Photo-IrHo. washioro... c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MORRIS RUDE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MAT TRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 540,112, dated May 28, 1895. 
Application filed February 27, 1895, serial No. 539,885, (No model.) 
5 
Id 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MORRIS RUDE, a sub 
ject of the Emperor of Austria-Hungary, at 
present residing in New York city, in the 
county and State of New York, have invented 
a new and Improved Mattress, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved mattress, which is com 
paratively simple and durable in construc 
tion, arranged for convenient handling while 
turning or airing the same, and adapted to 
be bound loose or tight whenever necessary. 
The invention consists principally of a mat 
tress provided with a string alternately en 
gaging part of the top and part of the bottom, 
the said string being adapted to be drawn to 
compress the mattress at opposite faces. 
The invention also consists in certain parts 
and details, and combinations of the same, as 
will be hereinafter fully described and then 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same with one 
of the mattress-sections in transverse section, 
and Fig. 3 is an end elevation of one of the 
mattress-sections. 
The improved mattress is preferably made 
in a series of sections A, A, A, having their 
adjacent ends connected together by fasten 
ing devices B, preferably made in the shape 
of ordinary glove fasteners, that is, a fasten 
ing having a spherical head engaging a spring 
pressed receiver. By this means the sections 
can be readily attached or detached, so that 
the individual sections can be conveniently 
handled, and be taken hold of on either side 
by providing each section with a suitable 
handle C. 
Each of the sections A, A, A is provided 
on the top and bottom with registering eye 
lets D, as plainly illustrated in Fig. 1, and 
through these registering eyelets is passed a 
String E, arranged in such a manner that the 
string is passed first through two registering 
eyelets, then along part of the bottom of the 
mattress to the next adjacent eyelet, then 
passed through the same in an upward direc 
tion to the corresponding registering top eye 
let, and then passed along the top of the mat 
tress to the next adjacent eyelet on top and 
through the same in a downward direction to 
the corresponding eyelet in the bottom of the 
mattress. The string is then passed along 
the bottom of the mattress to the next adja 
cent eyelet and up through the same, and so 
on through all the different sets of eyelets in 
the mattress. Thus it will be seen the string or 
cord Eisformed into several parallel series of 
loops extending transversely of the mattress, 
the loops of each series being arranged alter 
nately at top and bottom of the mattress. 
Between the eyelets D at the corresponding 
ends of adjacent series extending transversely 
of the mattress, I arrange auxiliary or sup 
plemental eyelets D', located about midway 
between the end eyelets D and the cord or 
string E after having passed up or down, as 
the case may be, through the corresponding 
last eyelets D of one transverse series is 
passed across the bottom or top surface of the 
mattress to the supplemental eyelets ID' adja 
cent thereto, and is passed down or up through 
said supplemental eyelets D' to the opposite 
surface of the mattress and across said Sur 
face to the end eyelets D of the next adjacent 
transverse series. In this manner it will be 
seen the several transverse series of loops 
formed at top and bottom of the mattress by 
the cord or string E, are joined together by 
two short loops one at the top and the other 
at the bottom surface of the mattress, and by 
this arrangement the corresponding aligned 
loops in adjacent series are caused to lie at 
opposite surfaces, one being at the top and 
one at the bottom of the mattress. The loops 
in the respective transverse series alternate 
with each other at each surface of the mat 
tress, the end loop of one series being at the 
top, the end loop of the next series being at 
the bottom and so on. 
When desired, the contents of the mattress 
may be shifted and rearranged, by drawing 
on the string or cord E and then releasing 
said cord, and should the mattress become 
worn, the cord E may be similarly drawn and 
knotted at one end so as to compress the con 
tents of the mattress by lessening the lengths 
of those portions of the cords uniting the ends 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
9 o 
2 
540,112 
o 
of the loops as well as the loops themselves. 
Moreover, the alternate arrangement of the 
loops of the several series prevents the mat 
tress when cord E is so drawn and tightened 
from being formed into longitudinal or trans 
Verse ridges and hollows, as would be the case 
were the corresponding loops of adjacent s 
ries similarly located. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A mattress, having corresponding eyelets 
in its top and bottom surfaces, said eyelets 
being arranged in parallel series, and a cord 
extending through the apertures of the sev 
eral series, being passed vertically through 
the corresponding eyelets at top and bottom 
of the mattress and across the spaces between 
the adjacent eyelets of each series to form 
longitudinal series of loops located alternately 
on opposite surfaces of the mattress, the cor 
responding loops of the several series being 
located alternately at opposite surfaces of the 
mattress, substantially as set forth. 
2. A mattress, having similarly arranged 
eyelets in its top and bottom surfaces, said 
eyelets being arranged in parallel series, said 
mattress being also provided with similar 
auxiliary eyelets in its opposite surfaces, said 
auxiliary eyelets being located between the 
end eyelets at corresponding ends of adjacent 
series, and a cord passed through said eyelets 
to form parallel series of loops alternately at 
top and bottom of the mattress, the corre 
sponding loops of the several series being al 
ternately at top and bottom of the mattress, 
substantially as set forth. 
25 
35 
MORRIS RUDE. 
Witnesses: 
THEO. G. HOSTER, 
JNO. M. RITTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540212.txt	(No Model.) 
s 
No. 540,212, 
T. P. MAGRATH. 
SMOKE CONSUMER, 
Patented May 28, 1895. 
 
$2zzzzzzzzz 
<<<<<< 
SW 
aataraya 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHoto-LITHo, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS P. MAGRATH, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
SM OKE-CONSUMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 540,212, dated May 28, 1895. 
Application filed February 13, 1896, Serial No, 538,263, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, THOMAS P. MAGRATH, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of 
California, have invented an Improvement in 
Smoke-Consumers; and I hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same. 
My invention relates to a device for con 
suming smoke, and other unconsumed pro 
ducts of combustion which ordinarily escape 
from the chimney or stack of boiler furnaces. 
It consists in details of construction which 
will be more fully explained by reference to 
the accompanying drawing, in which the fig 
ure is a vertical section of my device and its 
application. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
a mechanism by which the smoke and uncon 
Sumed products arising from the combustion 
of fuel in boiler furnaces are returned to a 
point beneath the grate and again delivered 
into the fire-box with the incandescent fuel, 
Whereby these products are heated to a tem 
perature which will entirely consume them. 
A is a boiler of any-suitable construction. 
In the present case it may represent a return 
flue boiler, having the fire-box B, ash-pit C, 
the rear combustion chamber into which the 
Smoke and products of combustion pass, and 
flues through which they are returned to the 
front. Not shown. At this point they are de 
livered into a smoke-box, and in the ordinary 
construction of such furnaces, they are al 
lowed to escape from the smoke-box through 
a Stack. 
In my invention I have shown a curved 
tapering pipe D connected with the top of the 
smoke-box, so that all products of combustion 
are delivered into this pipe. The curvature 
of this pipe is such that it forms approxi 
mately a quarter of a circle, and it tapers or 
diminishes in size from the receiving end at 
the smoke-box to the delivery end where it 
discharges into a fan case E. This case has 
a shaft F. passing through it extending also 
outwardly through the curved top of the pipe 
D as shown. Upon this shaft are fixed the 
two sets of fans G and H. The fan G is ad 
jacent to the end of the case E with which the 
pipe D is connected, and the other fan His 
at the opposite end of the casing E. An an 
nular diaphragm or partition I partially sep 
arates the chambers in which these two fans 
revolve: The end of the pipe D is continued 
a little way into the chamber in which the 
fans G revolve, and the blades of the fan are 
cut away so as to fit around this projecting 
end of the pipe as shown in section. 
Around the shaft F and approximately fill 
ing the end of the pipe D is the cone J through 
the center of which the driving shaft passes, 
and to which the blades G are fastened. This 
cone serves to direct the current of smoke and 
gases arriving through the pipe D to the open 
ing Kformed between the cone J and the side 
of the case E. 
Around the base or receiving end of the 
pipe D is an enlarged cylindrical drum D' 
which incloses the exterior of the pipe D. 
Holes are made through the pipe D, so that 
the interior of the drum communicates with 
the interior of the pipe, and these holes open 
into passages L of different lengths which are 
fixed within the pipe-D, as plainly shown, for 
a purpose to be hereinafter explained. 
From the fan case E a pipe M opens, its in 
ner end communicating with that part of the 
case in which the fan or blower H revolves. 
This pipe has a branch N leading into the 
drum D', and the extension of the pipe M is 
curved so as to lead into the ash-pit C of the 
furnace. If there is a battery of two or more 
boilers, it will be manifest that this connec 
tion can be made with the ash-pits of all of 
the boilers. Suitable cocks or valves O serve 
to close either of the passages Mor Nat will. 
The operation of the device will then be as 
follows: Power being applied to the shaft F 
from any suitable source, not here shown, the 
fans G and H will be caused to revolve with 
any desired degree of rapidity. The action 
of these fans will be to produce a vacuum 
which will draw from the smoke-box through 
the pipe D the products of combustion as fast 
as they arrive. These being directed by the 
cone J, are delivered through the opening K 
and are drawn by the action of the fan Ginto 
the interior of the fan case. The fan G is of 
smaller diameter and of less capacity than 
the fan H, and the products of combustion re 
ceived into that part of the chamber in which 
the fan G revolves, are delivered through a 
passage P similar to the opening K into that 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
95 
CO 
2 
540,212 
o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
75 
85 
part of the case in which the fan II revolves. 
The smoke and other products of combustion 
are then forced from the fan case Einto the 
pipe M and the pipe N being opened, a part 
of them will be returned through this pipe 
into the annular chamber or drum D' sur 
rounding the pipe D, and will thence pass into 
the pipe D through the various passages I. 
previously described. The length of these 
passages varies so that while a portion of them 
deliver almost directly into the opening K 
and thence into the fan case, the others de 
liver into the pipe D at various points, be 
tween the drum D and the end of the pipe. 
The remainder of the smoke products of com 
bustion pass through the pipe M and are de 
livered into the ash-pit C whence a portion of 
the smoke and other products pass up through 
the grate bars directly into the incandescent 
fuel where they are again heated to such a 
point that any unconsumed particles will be 
consumed. 
Through what is known as the dead plate 
S, which is a horizontal plate situated between 
the front ends of the grate bars and the fur 
nace front, I make a series of vertical holes 
which will allow a portion of the smoke which 
has been returned into the ash-pit through 
the pipe M to pass upward between the boiler 
front and the doors, and the fuel upon the 
grate. The object of this is to protect the 
doors and front to a certain extent from the 
more intense heat of the fuel, and thus pre 
vent the destruction of these parts, and this 
is effected by reason of the smoke having been 
considerably cooled in passing through the 
fan casing and pipes, SO that when it does 
pass up into the front end of the fire-box, the 
heat of the fuel is absorbed in raising the 
temperature of this unconsumed smoke to 
the point where it will again be burned. 
Although I have described this apparatus 
as connected with what is known as the re 
turn flue boiler, it will be manifest that it 
may be applied to any other form of boiler 
the connections being made in an essentially 
similar manner to those here described. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a boiler furnace, 
of a curved tapering pipe leading from the 
smoke-box, a fan and a case therefor into 
which the reduced end of said pipe delivers 
said case having a perforated diaphragm di 
viding it into two compartments, a drum sur 
rounding the base of the curved pipe and 
communicating with the interior thereof, and 
branches from the discharge pipe of the fan 
case, one of which delivers into said drum 
and the other into the ash-pit of the furnace. 
2. The combination with a boiler furnace 
of a pipe connected with a smoke-box, a fan 
case into which the discharge end of said 
pipe delivers, fans of different diameters 
mounted upon a shaft and rotatable within 
the case, a conical or diverging center at the 
discharge end of the pipe having openings 
around its peripherythrough which the smoke 
is delivered into the chamber of the smaller 
fan, other openings through which smoke is 
delivered from the chamber of the first fan 
to the chamber of the second fan and Sup 
plemental air openings to the exterior air, 
whereby the fan draws a supply of air into 
the casing to mix with the smoke, and the 
larger fan draws the whole of the smoke and 
air from the receiving end of the casing, and 
a discharge pipe connecting with a fan cas 
ing and delivering into the ash-pit of the fur 
800 
3. In a smoke consumer, a curved tapering 
pipe having the larger end connecting with 
the smoke-box of a boiler furnace, and the 
smaller end with a fan casing, a shaft extend 
ing through said casing having two fans of 
different diameter fixed upon it, openings 
from the discharge end of the curved pipe 
into the chamber of the smaller fan, and air 
openings surrounding the exterior of the pipe, 
also opening into the same chamber, a per 
forated diaphragm between the two fans 
through which the contents of the smaller fan 
chamber pass into the larger fan chamber, a 
pipe or pipes through which the contents of the 
larger fan chamber are expelled, a drum sur 
rounding the inlet end of the curved pipehav 
ing openings made from it into the interior of 
the pipe, and curved conveying pipes of differ 
ent lengths fixed along the interior of the main 
pipe whereby the contents are discharged at 
various points within said pipe, branches 
from the discharge pipe of the fan casing, one 
of which delivers into said drum and the 
other into the ash-pit of the furnace. 
4. In a smoke consumer, a curved tapering 
pipe into which the smoke and products of 
combustion are delivered after escaping from 
the furnace, a drum surrounding the base of 
said pipe having openings communicating 
with passages within the pipe, said passages 
being of different lengths so as to deliver at 
various points within the pipe, a fan casing 
with which the discharge end of said pipe is 
connected and into which it extends a short 
distance, a directing cone around the central 
shaft whereby the contents of the pipe are 
directed toward the inner periphery of the 
pipe, openings or passages through which the 
contents of the pipe and the small passages 
are delivered and airpassages around the ex 
terior of the pipe also opening into the fan 
case, a fan wheel rotating in close proximity 
with the side of the case and fitting over the 
projecting end of the inlet pipe, a second fan 
wheel of larger diameter fixed to the shaft 
and rotating in a chamber at the opposite end 
of the fan casing, passages through which the 
contents of the first fan chamber are delivered 
into the second, a discharge passage through 
which the contents of the second fan cham 
ber are expelled, said pipe having one branch 
leading to the ash-pit of the furnace, and the 
second branch leading to the drum which sur 
95 
Iod 
Io 5 
IO 
I (5 
. 
. 
. 
. 
-- 
540,2i2 
3 
nected with the fan case discharge and lead 
ing into the ash-pit of the furnace, and a 
dead plate in front of the grate bars of the 15 
furnace having holes made in it whereby a 
portion of the smoke and gases are directed 
up between the fire and the furnace doors. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
THOMAS P. MAGRATH. 
Witnesses: 
S.H. NoURSE, 
H. F. ASCHECK. 
rounds the curved smoke conveying pipe 
whereby a part of the material is again re 
turned through the fans and another portion 
delivered directly to the fire-box of the fur 
O8. 
5. In a smoke consumer, the combination, 
of a pipe leading from the smokebox of a fur 
nace, and into which the smoke and products 
of combustion are delivered after escaping 
from the furnace, a fan case connecting with 
the discharge of the pipe, fans of different di 
a meters mounted within said case, a pipe con 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540313.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. HILLS & 0, KROMER. 
CONWEYER FOR GRAIN BINDERS, 
s 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 540,313, 
Patented June 4, 1895. 
772&72-esses 
u-W. C. e? 
22, 7/0%: 6/6% sele-va. 
-4 (//s - 
- 
Z727-27 2-zovs 
772-222-carzz-Z/2ZZs 
Ofo/22772ey 
THE NORRIS PETERS CC, PHOTO-LITHO WASHINGTON, D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. E. HILLS & O. KROMER, 
CONWEYER FOR GRAIN BINDERS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 540,313, 
Patented June 4, 1895. 
i 
71 
d 17) 
I -(Z 
72 - 
4. 
72 
t 
l 
M 
-74 
7 
7. 
B-17 
i 
o 
772-67 aesses 
22 * 7%ay was a 
Z72-7e/ears 
/72 AA-ce/72, Z/72-ZZs 
Oo/67 a 77ze 7 
 
ar 
s JNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. HILLS AND OTTO KROMER, OF SANDUSKY, OHIO. 
CONVEYER FOR GRAN BNDERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 540,313, dated June 4, 1895. 
Application filed January 29, 1894, Serial No,498,405. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, WILLIAM E. HILLS 
and OTTO KROMER, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Sandusky, in the county of 
Erie and State of Ohio, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Conveyers 
for Grain-Binders, of which the following is 
a Specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings. 
The invention consists in the construction 
of a conveyer for grain binders, and particu 
larly in the construction of a support for oth 
erwise unsupported sections of the conveyer 
belt, and further in the peculiar construction, 
arrangement and combination of the various 
parts. 
The object of the invention is to effect a 
steady flow of grain to the binding or tying 
apparatus without danger of stopping or slip 
ping of the carrier belt; further to obviate 
the necessity of adjusting the belt in wet or 
dry Weather, and further to reduce the fric 
tion and therefore the power required to drive 
Such belts. 
We have shown our invention as applied to 
What is known as the three apron style of car 
rier in which a horizontal carrier takes the 
grain from the cutter and carries it to two 
elevator belts which lead to the bundle form 
ing mechanism, but we wish it understood 
that it can be applied as well to other forms 
or styles of elevators. We have also shown 
two chains applied near the ends of the rollers, 
but it is evident that one chain may be used 
or more than two if desired. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical cen 
tral longitudinal section through the platform 
and elevator of a grain-binder embodying our 
invention. Fig. 2 is an enlarged longitudinal 
Section through one of the conveyers or eleva 
tors. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section through 
one of the conveyer shafts or rollers. Fig. 4 
is a section on line y y, Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a 
perspective view showing one manner of con 
necting the ends of the canvas to the chain. 
Fig. 6 is a central section through the carrier 
belt, showing the peculiar construction of the 
intermediate support for the canvas. Fig. 7 is 
a plan view of the rollers with the intermediate 
Support, the chain and canvas being removed. 
Fig. 8 is a perspective view illustrating the 
construction of the canvas-supporting bar. 
25 
35 
45 
 
Fig. 9 is a detached perspective view of the 
parts forming the cleat or conveyer-bar on the 
belt. 
A is the frame of the machine. 
B is the platform conveyer and C the ele. 
vator conveyers of a grain binder of any de 
sired construction. At the end of each con 
veyer are the shafts or rollers D D', one or 
both of which may, as desired, be driven from 
any suitable connection from the drive shaft 
on the machine. We prefer to drive but one 
roller of each conveyer and have shown the 
roller D' of each conveyer adapted to be 6 
driven. On this roller, preferably away from 
the end, we form a contracted portion E, by 
cutting a groove in the roller and on this con 
tracted portion or neck we secure a sprocket 
wheel F. preferably made in sections, as shown 
in Fig. 2, the teeth of this wheel preferably be 
ing sunk below or flush with the outer face of 
the roller. On the roller D we form comple 
mentary contracted portions G forming bear 
ings in which the sprocket chain H may run 
but without the sprocket wheel, the portion G. 
being of proper diameter so that the chain in 
running around the roller will be counter 
sunk below or flush with the face thereof. If 
the roller D' is to be driven, we provide the 
contracted portion G with suitable sprocket 
wheels or teeth. It is evident if the roller D be 
driven, the chain EI will be driven in the usual 
way. We prefer to arrange two chains, one 
near each end of the rollers, as We find this 
gives the best results, but as previously stated 
we do not desire to be limited to this arrange 
ment. Either or both of the rollers may be 
journaled in spring actuated sliding boxes, 
shown at G' to take up any slack in the chains 
which may arise from any cause. Around 
the chains and rollers thus constructed and 
combined we secure a carrier belt I, prefer 
ably of canvas or rubber belting and of a 
width to extend across the rollers, and hav 
ing its edges rest on the guide ways J at the 
ends of the rollers. This belt is secured to 
the chain or chains, so that when the chain 
is driven, the belt will be carried there with 
and act as the carrier for the material there 
on. The belt may be secured to the chain or 
chains detachably or fixedly, or it may be se 
cured only at one point or at a number of 
points as desired. The construction, which 
75 
55 
9o 
95 
CC 
2 
540,813 
we prefer, however, is shown in the drawings 
and comprises a cross bar K to which one end 
of the canvas is secured and which is detach 
ably secured to the chains, in any suitable 
an 0. 
We have shown the chains provided with 
a link having a raised central portion L, pro 
vided with a pin L' passing through the cross 
bar K and secured in position by a spring 
pin, or in any other suitable manner. The 
canvas being passed around the rollers, its 
other end is secured to the bar or to the can 
was by suitable adjusting straps L or in any 
Other suitable manner. 
The canvas may be, and preferably is, ar 
ranged quite loosely about the rollers, the 
load or work keeping the working side taut, 
even if the other or return side is quite loose, 
as shown in Fig. 2. The canvas lies upon 
and is carried over the rollers without wear 
or friction on the chain, which as described 
is countersunk below the face of the rollers. 
This arrangement of canvas in which the 
driving is done by the chain, the canvas be 
ing left comparatively loose, is free to take up 
any shrinkage or unevenness arising from 
any cause. The unsupported portions of the 
canvas, whether at the ends or middle, we 
preferably support against sagging or bag 
ging by providing the supporting bar or bars 
M, shown in detail in Figs, 6, 7 and 8, having 
an eye M formed at one end to embrace a 
contracted or grooved portion N of one roller. 
Its other end may be left straight to rest in a 
similar groove in the other roller. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 7 in which 
one or both of the rollers are provided with 
spring supporting boxes, one end only of the 
bar should be provided with the eye M, but 
where the rollers are journaled in stationary 
boxes both ends may be provided with such 
eyes if desired. The canvas is provided with 
suitable cleats or ribs. These we preferably 
form by making loops O in the canvas, in 
which is placed a bar or rod P, and the rod is 
then clamped in position by means of a spring 
metal clamp Q formed in the shape of a split 
tube, as shown in Figs. 2 and 9. 
In the usual construction of conveyer 
aprons, the rollers are smooth, one or both be 
ing driven, and the apron being driven by 
the friction of the can was on the rollers. In 
this construction it is necessary that the can 
was be drawn taut over the rollers and the 
shrinkage of the canvas in using it in wet 
Weather or Wet grain often makes the device 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
 
inoperative requiring frequent adjustments, 
and in this construction if one side is tighter 
than the other, the canvas will work to one 
side and therefore bind. In addition to this 
the tension of such canvas is very great and 
adds much to the power required to draw the 
machine. In tests made with a dynamome 
ter this extra power was shown to be about 
two hundred and fifty pounds draft, while 
with our device and the loose belts described, 
nearly all of that power is saved and the draft 
required for such a binder is reduced from 
about six hundred pounds to about four hun 
dred pounds when working in the field. 
By forming the grooves for the chain a short 
distance from one end and leaving the plain 
portions R at the ends, the liability of the 
straw getting under the edges of the canvas 
and under the chains is greatly lessened. 
What, we claim as our invention is 
1. In a conveyer, the combination with the 
frame, rollers journaled therein, longitudi 
nally adjustable bearings for one of the roll 
ers, means for actuating the rollers, a belt on 
the rollers, and a support for the belt having 
one end secured in a groove in one roller and 
slidingly supported in a groove in the other 
roller, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with the rollers, sprocket 
wheels intermediate the ends thereof, the 
chain or chains and belt, substantially as set 
forth, of the middle support comprising the 
bar M, an eye formed at one end engaging a 
groove in one roller, and the other end sup 
ported in a corresponding groove in the other 
roller, substantially as described. 
3. In a conveyer, the combination with the 
shafts or rollers and the belt, of a support for 
the belt between the shafts, comprising the 
bar M supported on the shafts and spanning 
the space between, substantially as described. 
4. In a conveyer, the combination with the 
shafts or rollers and the belt over the same, of 
a support for the belt between the rollers, 
comprising the bar M the eye M at one end 
engaging in a groove in one roller, and having 
its other end secured in a corresponding 
groove in the second roller, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM E. HILLS. 
OTTO KEROMER. 
Witnesses: 
M. B. O'DoGHERTY, 
JAMES WHITTEMORE, 
o 
75 
95 
ICO 
Io5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540413.txt	A. VANDERBEEK. 
WISE. 
Patented June 4, 1895, 
N 
SA 
IWF 
(No Model.) 
No. 540,413. 
Wizza esses: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM VANDERBEEK, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
VISE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 540,413, dated June 4, 1895. 
Application filed February 15, 1895, Serial No,538,576. (No model.) 
O 
Zo oil whon, it may concern: 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Hart 
ford, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Wises, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to vises of that class 
commonly known as planer-vises; the ob 
ject of my invention being, primarily, to fur 
nish an improved vise of this class having a 
pair of working-grasping jaws, one of which 
is adapted for movement toward and from the 
other, and to provide, in connection with the 
movable jaw, an improved adjusting-and 
locking device adapted for exerting a down 
wardly-inclined moving force upon said mov 
able-jaw in the direction of the advancing 
movement thereof, thereby positively holding 
the jaw and work against lifting movement, 
relatively to the bed. 
Another object of the invertion is to fur 
nish a planer-wise of such construction and 
organization that the movable jaw thereof 
may have a limited amount of transverse and 
Oscillatory movement, relatively to the oppos 
ing jaw, to adapt the vise to irregular work, 
and may also be quickly shifted forward or 
backward, to adapt the vise for small or large 
work, without manipulation of the adjusting 
and-clamping device, other than loosening 
the same. 
In the drawings accompanying and forming 
a part of the specification, Figure 1 is a plan 
view of a planer-vise embodying my present 
invention, said figure showing in dotted lines 
an oblique position of the movable jaw. Fig. 
s. 2 is a vertical longitudinal section of the vise, 
taken in line a. a, Fig. 1, and showing in dot 
ted lines a piece of work between the two 
clamping-jaws of the vise, and showing the 
parts of the vise in the position they occupy 
just preparatory to the clamping adjustment 
of the movable jaw. Fig. 3 is a similar lon 
gitudinal section of a portion of the vise, show 
ing the movable jaw and the clamping device 
in connection there with in the positions they 
occupy when said jaw is tightly clamped 
against movement. Fig. 4 is a similar view 
of the parts shown in Fig. 3, showing the mov 
able jaw released from its clamped position 
and the clamping device in position to permit 
free sliding movement of said jaw. Fig. 5 is 
Beit known that I, ABRAHAMVANDERBEEK, a cross-sectional view of the vise, taken in 
line bb, Fig. 3, looking in the direction of the 
arrow in said figure. 
Like characters represent like parts in all 
the figures of the drawings. 
In the preferred embodiment of my inven 
tion, herein shown and descrbed, the vise com 
prises, in part, a longitudinally-recessed bed 
or frame B, having a rack 2 upon the under 
side thereof, adjacent to the longitudinal re 
cess, and having a fixed-jaw J at one end 
thereof; a movable jaw J', supported upon 
said bed; a rack-block R, supported below 
and adapted for engaging the rack 2; a clamp 
ing bolt C, projected through the movable 
jaw J', and the bed B, at an inclination to the 
plaine of movement of said jaw, and pivotally 
connected at the lower end thereof to said 
rack-block R, and means carried by said bolt 
in position and adapted for tightly clamping 
the parts in adjusted position, all of which 
will be hereinafter fully described. 
The bed B, and the fixed jaw J at one end 
of said bed, will preferably be formed integral 
with one another, as illustrated in the draw: 
ings, although it will be obvious that the jaw 
J, and bed B, might be separately constructed 
and secured together in any suitably manner. 
The bed B, which may be of any suitable 
general conformation, is herein shown, in the 
nature of a rectangular-block longitudinally 
channeled at its under side, as shown at 3,3' 
and 3', to form longitudinal flanges 4 and 4, 
on each side the longitudinal center of Said 
bed, which flanges, and the channel 3, inter 
mediate thereto, constitute a guideway for the 
rack-block R, which is supported in said chan 
nel between said flanges. Formed through 
the upper wall 5 of the bed B, preferably mid 
way between the two flanges 4 and 4', and 
communicating with the channel 8, is an 
elongated longitudinal opening 6, and upon 
each side of said opening 6, in the under side 
of the upper wall 5, a series of notches or 
teeth, which, in the form thereof herein 
shown, constitute a divided-rack 2, which ex 
tends approximately from end to end of said 
bed, as clearly shown in Figs. 2 to 5, inclu 
sive, of the drawings. 
The movable-jaw J', which is supported for 
sliding movement upon the upper face of the 
45 
25 
35 
55 
9 O 
95 
 
540,413 
upper wall of the bed, is herein shown in the 
nature of an oblong rectangular-block having 
the perpendicular work-grasping face 7, hori 
Zontal upper and lower faces 8 and 8', and an 
inclined or oblique rear bearing-face 9. 
Formed in this inclined movable face of the 
jaw, is a spheriform-socket 10, which consti 
tutes a seat for a coirrespondingly spheroidal 
bearing-block or washer 12, and formed 
through the lower face 8 of the movable-jaw 
J', and communicating at its upper end with 
the spheriform-socket 10, is a bolt-receiving 
opening 13, which, is preferably conical in 
form, it being enlarged or laterally-elongated, 
at the lower end thereof, to permit a limited 
play of the holding-down bolt or clamping 
bolt C, which extends through said opening, 
and also permits the jaw J to swing sidewise 
in a horizontal plane, and through a moder 
ate arc, around said bolt, to thereby adapt the 
jaw for engaging a piece of work of irregular 
Contour. 
As a convenient means for facilitating the 
quick adjustment of the movable jaw J', rela 
tively to the fixed jaw J, so as to accommo 
date said jaws to work of varying sizes, at the 
least possible expense of time, I have pro 
vided in connection with the movable-jaw and 
bed, an oscillatory clamping - device, desig 
nated in a general way by D, which is adapted 
to be quickly thrown into operative engage 
ment with the bed, when it is desired to tightly 
clamp the movable-jaw against a piece of 
work (as W), and is adapted to be quickly 
thrown out of engagement with said bed, 
when it is desired to open or close the jaws 
of the vise, preparatory to clamping them 
against a piece of work. This clamping-de 
vice for the movable-jaw J, in the form 
thereof herein shown, consists of the holding 
down bolt or clamping-bolt C, extending diag 
onally through the recess 6 in the bed B, and 
through the bolt-receiving opening 13 in the 
movable jaw J'; a rack-block R, pivotally 
carried at the lower end of the inclined bolt 
C, which block is supported for traversing 
movement in the channel 3, between the 
guide-flanges 4 and and 4' below the rack 2, 
and has a rack 14, at the upper face thereof, 
the teeth of which are adapted for engaging 
the teeth of the rack 2 of the bed; a sphe 
roidal bearing-block 12, carried upon the up. 
per screw-threaded end 15 of the bolt C, and 
normally bearing against the corresponding 
spheriform wall of the socket 10, and a clamp 
ing-nut or thumb-nut 16, adjustably fitted to 
the extreme outer end of the clamping-bolt 
C, as will be readily understood by reference 
to Figs. 2, 3 and 4, of the drawings. In the 
preferred form thereof herein shown, the cen 
ter of curvature or axis of the spheroidal 
bearing-block and the spheriform-socket in 
which said bearing-block is normally seated, 
is located, during the clamping action of the 
bolt C, at a point approximately in align 
ment with the upper plane of the movable 
jaw J, or at a point considerably above a hori 
zontal line drawn midway between the upper 
and lower faces of said jaw, so that, when 
clamping a piece of work between the jaws 
J and J', the pressure against the upper edge 
of the working face 7 of the sliding-jaw J', is 
taken directly by the clamping-bolt C, and 
does not tend to lift the jaw. It will also be 
seen, by reference to Fig. 2, that pressure ex 
erted upon the working face of the movable 
jaw J at any point below the upper edge of 
said working face, will, owing to the location 
of the axis of the spheroidal bearing-block 
above the point by which pressure is exerted, 
tend to directly hold down the working end 
of said jaw, while the rearward end of said 
jaw will be held down by the downward stress 
of the bolt C. 
For normally holding the rack-block R, in 
engagement with the rack 2 of the bed B, 
some suitable spring will preferably be pro 
vided. In the present instance, this Spring 
designated by s, is shown secured at one end 
to the lower face of the block by means of a 
screw 18, and has its free end bearing upon 
a longitudinally - disposed bar 19, which is 
fixed at opposite ends thereof to the under 
side of the bed B, as shown in Figs. 2 and 5. 
This construction and arrangement allow a 
free sliding movement of the rack-block when 
thrown out of engagement with the rack 2 of 
the bed, and bar 19, and will also prevent the 
rack-block from dropping out of place, should 
the springs, be broken, and also limits the 
releasing movement of said rack-block. 
As a convenient means for depressing the 
lower end of the clamping-bolt to throw the 
rack-block R. out of engagement with the 
rack 2 of the bed IB, for the purpose of quickly 
shifting the movable-jaw toward or from the 
fixed-jaw J, I have provided in connection 
with the nuovable jaw, a pressure-pin, or plun 
ger 20, which is seated for vertical movement 
in a vertical recess in said jaw J with its 
lower end projected into the bolt receiving 
recess 13, in position for bearing against a 
shoulder 21, formed on the clamping-bolt C. 
In practice, this shoulder 21, will preferably 
be formed by notching the upper face of the 
bolt C, as clearly shown in Figs. 2, 3 and 4, 
of the drawings. The depressing-pin or plum 
ger 20, will preferably be shouldered at the 
upper ends thereof, and the recess in which 
said plunger works, will have an internal 
abutment to limit the depressing movement 
of said pin. 
In practice, when it is desired to throw the 
rack-block R., out of engagement with the 
rack 2 of the bed, to effect a quick shifting 
movement of the movable jaw J, it is simply 
necessary to loosen the clamping-nut 16, and 
bear down upon the depressing-pin 20, which 
will depress the lower end of the bolt C, and 
disengage the rack-block R, from the rack 2, 
as shown at Fig. 4 of the drawings. In some 
cases, however, especially when a thumb-nut 
of convenient size is used on a bolt, said bolt 
may be depressed or tipped downwardly by 
95 
Od 
Io 5 
I I5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
4 O 
45 
55 
65 
540,413 
9o 
95 
OO 
Io5 
IIO 
IIS 
2Cd 
I 25 
75 
5 
O 
using the thumb-nut as a lever for this pur 
pose. 
In operation, if the thum-nut 16, is turned 
to advance the movable-jaw forward, the rear 
ward upward end of the bolt C, will, of course, 
move forward with the jaw, while the lower 
end of said bolt remains at a fixed point, rela 
tively to the bed, by reason of its connection 
with the rack-block, which block, during the 
clamping operation, is in fixed engagement 
With the rack 2 of the bed of the wise. The 
advancing movement of the jaw, through the 
medium of the thumb-nut 16, and bearing 
block 12, owing to the inclined position of the 
bolt, not only changes the inclination of the 
bolt, relatively to the working face of the jaw, 
but lifts the projecting end thereof, so that 
the nut, when screwed down, will traverse a 
greater distance than will the jaw J', propor 
tionate to the hypoten use and the vertical 
side of the triangle. This increase of move 
ment of the thumb-nut on the bolt, relatively 
to the movement of the jaw on the bed, has 
the effect of multiplying the power of the nut 
for the clamping of a piece of work between 
the jaws of the vise, so that a coarser and 
stronger thread may be used on the bolt, than 
would otherwise be the case and maintain a 
given amount of power. The relation of the 
shoulder 21, and the bolt, to the depressing 
pin 20, will be such as to positively insure a 
bearing-contact between said pin and shoul 
der, when the rack-block is in engagement 
with the rack 2 of the bed. 
By the construction and organization of 
clamping means herein shown and described, 
it will be seen that a turning of the thumb. 
nut downward upon the bolt C to effect a 
clamping action of the jaw J', will draw the 
rack-block upward and backward and, into 
locked engagement with the rack 2, and that 
the movable-jaw J will be. simultaneously 
forced downward and forward, in opposition 
to the locking movement of the rack-block; 
the backward movement of the rack-block 
being, of course, relatively small, as compared 
with the forward movement of the jaw J, as 
will be readily understood by a comparison of 
the figures of the drawings. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
l. The herein-described wise, comprising a 
longitudinally-recessed bed- having a fixed 
jaw at or near one end thereof, and having 
a rack below the upper face of said bed; a 
movable-jaw supported upon said bed, and 
having an inclined bolt-receiving opening 
therethrough, and a clamping-device for said 
movable-jaw, consisting of a clamping-bolt 
extending inclinedly through the bed and 
through the recess of said iaw, a rack-block 
pivotally-carried at the lower end of said bolt 
below, and in position for engaging, the rack 
of the bed; and an adjusting-device carried 
at the upper projected end of the bolt in po 
sition, and adapted for bearing against the 
claim- 
. 
movable-jaw, substantially as described, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a vise of the class specified, the com 
bination with the wise-bed having a fixed, 
work-engaging jaw, and having a rack the 
teeth of which depend below the upper face 
of said bed; of a movable-jaw supported upon 
said bed; a rack-block supported below and 
in normal engagement with the rack of the 
bed; and means in connection with the mov 
able-jaw, and pivotally engaging the rack 
block, for moving the rack-block into locked 
engagement with the rack of the bed, and for 
simultaneously moving the movable-jaw lon 
gitudinally of the rack and in opposition to 
the locking moving of the rack-block, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
3. In a wise, the combination with the bed 
having a fixed work-engaging jaw, of a lon 
gitudinally-disposed rack; a movable-jaw sup 
ported above said rack; a rack-block sup 
ported below said rack, and normally in en 
gagement with said rack; a bolt pivotally 
engaging said rack-block and extending 
through the sliding-jaw, and a thumb-nut 
carried by said bolt in position and adapted, 
through the medium of the bolt, for forcing 
the rack-block and movable-jaw in opposite 
directions, substantially as described, and for 
the purpose set forth. 
- 4. In a vise of the class specified, the com 
bination with the bed having a fixed work 
engaging jaw; of a movable jaw; a rack in 
the bed below said movable jaw; a clamping 
device carried bw said movable jaw, and ex 
tending inclinedly through the bed and mov 
able jaw, and embodying a pivoted rack-block 
in normal engagement with the rack, Sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a vise of the class specified, the com 
bination with the bed having a fixed work 
engaging jaw, and having a rack below the 
upper face of said bed; of a movable-jaw sup 
ported upon said bed; a clamping-device car 
ried by said movable-jaw, and having a piv 
oted rack-block embodying a rack extending 
upon opposite sides of the pivot of said rack 
block, and in position and adapted for engag 
ing the rack of the bed; and means in position 
and adapted for normally retaining the rack 
block in engagement with the rack, substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose set 
6. In a vise of the class specified, in combi 
nation with alongitudinally-recessed bed hav 
ing a series of transverse notches on the un 
der face of the upper wall thereof adjacent to 
the longitudinal recess, and having a fixed 
jaw; a jaw movably-supported upon the bed, 
and adapted to co-operate with the fixed-jaw, 
a bearing-block supported below and having 
teeth adapted for engaging in the notches in 
the upper wall of the bed; and a bolt piv 
otally-connected with the rack-block and pro 
jected diagonally to the upper wall of the 
forth. 
- 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
4. 
540,413 
a clamping - device carried for oscillatory 
movement by said movable-jaw and embody 
ing a spring-actuated rack-block in normal 
engagement with the rack, and means carried 
by said movable-jaw in position and adapted 
for engaging and depressing the clamping-de 
vice, to release the rack-block from engage 
ment with the rack, substantially as described. 
11. In a vise of the class specified, the com 
bination with the bed having alongitudinally 
disposed rack, and with the movable jaw, of 
a clamping-device carried for lateral move 
ment, in and by, said movable-jaw, and em 
bodying a rack-block located in position for 
engaging the rack on the bed; means in posi 
tion and adapted for normally retaining the 
rack-block in engagement with the rack; and 
means carried by said movable-jaw in posi 
tion and adapted for engaging and depressing 
the clamping-device, to release the rack-block 
from engagement with the rack, substantially 
as described, and for the purpose set forth. 
12. In a wise of the class specified, the com 
bination with the bed having a fixed work-en 
gaging jaw and an inclinedly-recessed mov 
able-jaw having a spheroidal bearing-socket 
the axis of which is located approximately in 
the plane of the upper face of said jaw, and 
with a fixed longitudinally-disposed rack, of 
a rack-block carried by said movable-jaw in 
position and adapted for normally engaging 
the longitudinally-disposed rack; a clamping 
bolt pivotally-connected to said rack-block, 
and extending inclinedly through the mov 
able-jaw; a spheroidal bearing-block seated 
in the bearing-socket in the movable-jaw and 
having the axis thereof approximately in the 
plane of the upper face of said jaw; and a 
thumb-nut carried at the upper outer end of 
said bolt, and adapted for exerting an ad 
vancing force upon the bearing-block at an 
inclination to, and in the direction of move 
ment of, said movable-jaw, substantially as 
described, and for the purpose set forth. 
13. In a wise, the combination with the bed 
having a fixed work-engaging jaw and a lon 
gitudinally-disposed rack, and with the mov 
able-jaw upon said bed, carrying a clamping 
device embodying a rack-block in normal en 
gagement with the rack of the bed, of a clamp 
ing-device actuator consisting of a depressing 
pin or plunger seated in an opening in the 
movable-jaw and having the lower end thereof 
in normal engagement with the clamping-de 
vices, substantially as described, and for the 
purpose set forth. 
ABRAHAM WANDERBEEK. 
65 
o 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 5 
to 
II5 
Witnesses: 
FRED. J. DOLE, 
T. W. POTTS. 
O 
T 5 
25 
35 
45 
So 
bed and through the movable-jaw, and carry 
ing means in position and adapted for mov 
ing the rack-block into locked engagement 
with the notched portion of the bed, and for 
simultaneously moving the movable-jaw to 
ward the fixed-jaw, and in opposition to the 
locking movement of the rack-block, substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
7. In a vise of the class specified, the com 
bination with the bed having a fixed jaw and 
a longitudinally - disposed rack of a rack 
block supported below and in position for en 
gaging said rack; a bolt pivotally-connected 
with said rack-block and extending upwardly 
at an inclination to said bed; a jaw having an 
inclined bolt-receiving recess, and movably 
carried by said bolt; and adjusting means car 
ried by said bolt in position and adapted for 
bearing against said movable-jaw, substan 
tially as described, and for the purpose set 
forth. 
8. In a vise of the class specified, the com 
bination with the bed having a fixed longi 
tudinally-disposed rack below the upper face 
thereof and having a fixed work-engaging 
jaw; of a movable-jaw having a laterally 
elongated bolt-receiving opening there 
through, inclined in the direction of move 
ment of said jaw; a rack-block supported be 
low and adapted for normally engaging the 
rack of the bed; a clamping-bolt pivotally 
connected at its lower end with said rack 
block, and having a screw-threaded upper 
end projecting inclinedly through the later 
ally elongated recess in the movable-jaw; 
and adapted for swinging movement therein; 
a bearing-block carried at the upper end of 
said bolt and bearing against the movable 
jaw; and a thumb-nut carried by said bolt 
and bearing against said bearing-block, sub 
stantially as described, and for the purpose 
set forth. 
9. In a vise of the class specified, the com 
bination with the bed, having a longitudi 
nally-disposed rack, and with the rack-block 
and the clamping-bolt pivotally-connected 
therewith; of the movable-jaw supported 
upon said bed, and having an inclined bolt 
receiving opening therethrough which termi 
nates at its upper outer end in a spheroidal 
socket; a spheroidal bearing-block seated in 
said spheroidal socket and carried by said 
clamping-bolt, and a thumb-nut carried by 
said clamping-bolt and bearing at its inner 
end against the outer face of the spheroidal 
bearing block, substantially as described, and 
for the purpose set forth. 
10. In a vise of the class specified, the com 
bination with the bed and its longitudinally 
disposed rack, and with the movable-jaw; of 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540514.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 540,514, 
 
E. L. ROGERs. 
CATCHER'S CLOWE, 
Patented June 4, 1895, 
WTN ess Es: 
724A. 2%46. 
NN EN TO R. 
h (7. 
Z. 4tave f 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELROY L. ROGERS, OF CHICOPEE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CATCHERS GLOVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 540,514, dated June 4, 1895. 
Application filed March 4, 1895, serial No, 540,394, (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ELROY L. RogERs, of 
Chicopee, in the county of Hampden and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Catchers Gloves 
or Mitts, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in catchers' gloves or mitts, and consists in 
Certain novel features of construction and ar 
rangement of parts which will be hereinafter 
fully described in the specification, clearly 
illustrated in the drawings, and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings and the characters marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification, like 
characters designating like parts or features, 
as the case may be, wherever they occur. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a catcher's mitt in the condition in 
which it is bought and before using. Fig. 2 
is a similar view of a mittin which a pocket 
has been formed by my invention. 
As is well known, catchers mitts as they 
come from the store are flat in the palm or 
side where the ball strikes; and being of a 
considerable thickness, the mitts cannot be 
doubled up by the hand to form a pocket. 
This is a serious defect in mitts, which players 
endeavor to remedy as soon as possible by re 
peated blows by the fist upon the mitt or by 
bending or punching it. After a while the 
action of the ball upon the mitt spreads the 
padding and forms a pocket. Until this is 
done, however, the ball is liable to slip from 
the glove or mitt. In my invention, this de 
fect is remedied and the player is able to take 
a new glove and form a pocket in it at once. 
a represents an improved glove or mitt. (I 
desire it to be understood that my invention 
applies to either, although I have shown only 
the mitt.) 
'a' is the palm-portion of the mitt; a, the 
thumb; a, the butt or wrist end of the mitt; 
a', the tip. 
The mitt and its general proportions may 
be of any desired construction, as these form 
no part of my invention. 
b represents a strap or other securing de 
vice fastened to the tip of the mitt by rivets 
b'. At its free end, the strap is engaged by 
a buckle 'c' secured by a strap or in any other 
suitable way to the side of the thumb-portion 
a. The strap is retained in position on the 
periphery of the mitt by means of cross-straps 
b' suitably secured at their ends to said mitt 
and permitting strap b to pass between them 
and the mitt, as shown. 
The mitt being in position and condition as 
illustrated in Fig. 1, the strap loose, as it is 
when it comes from the store, it is now desired 
to form a pocket. The player tightens up the 
strap b, thus forcing the contiguous edges of 
the hand-portion a? and thumb-portion a to 
gether and forming a pocket ac, as shown in 
Fig. 2. The size of this pocket ac may mani 
festly be varied at will. If desired, the strap 
b may be continued around the side of the 
hand-portion a' of the glove and its free end 
at this side secured to a buckle e attached in 
any desired way to the side of the mitt. The 
strap may be continuous, or may be made in 
two parts. By tightening the strap at the 
buckle e, the size of the pocket may be in 
creased and the glove puckered. I design to 
use either of the straps as occasion may re 
quire. 
I desire it to be understood that it is within 
my invention to include any means for forc 
ing the thumb and hand portion of a glove to. 
gether in order to form a pocket, and also of 
aiding in the formation of a pocket by means 
of puckering a glove at the side. Manifestly 
a cord wrapped around a button would accom 
plish the same result as the strap and buckle. 
By my invention, as already stated, the dis 
advantages of a new glove are overcome and 
the player can form a pocket in his glove of 
a size to suit himself, without waiting for this 
pocket to be pounded into the glove by the 
action of the ball. 
Having thus explained the nature of my in 
vention and described a way of constructing 
and using the same, although without at 
tempting to set forth all the forms in which 
it may be made or all the modes of its use, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. A catcher's glove or mitt comprising in 
its construction a hand portion and a thumb 
portion, a strap attached at one end to said 
hand portion and at its other end secured to 
said thumb portion and means for adjusting 
- 
o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
d 
540,514 
such strap, whereby the said parts may be 
drawn together to pucker the glove and form 
a pocket in the palm thereof, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A catcher's glove or mitt comprising in 
its construction a hand portion and a thumb 
portion, and adjustable means connected to 
said parts near their ends or tips whereby 
said parts may be drawn together to pucker 
the glove and form a pocket in the palm 
thereof substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
3. A catcher's glove or mitt comprising in 
its construction a hand-portion, a thumb-por 
tion, a strap secured at one end to the tip of 
said glove and adjustably connected at its 
other end to the side of said glove, whereby 
the glove may be puckered to form a pocket, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
(5 
o 
4. A catcher's glove or mitt comprising in 
its construction a strap attached to the tip of 
said glove, one end of said strap being con 
nected with a buckle upon the thumb of said 
glove, the other end of said strap being con 
nected to a buckle upon the side of the hand 
portion of said glove, whereby said glove may 
be puckered to form a pocket in the palm 
thereof, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 28th day of 
February, A. D. 1895. 
ELROY L. ROGERS. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE W. BRAY, 
SIDNEY SANDERS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540614.txt	(No Model.) 
H. L. GATES & M. W. CLARK, 
JACKETED CAN, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 540,614, 
Patented June 4, 1895, 
 
eZZZZZZZZZZegazze 
S S332 26 
s 
R 
(No Model.) 
No. 540,614, 
Patented June 4, 1895. 
H. L. GATES & M. W. CLARK, 
JACKETED CAN. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2, 
N. 
5. 
W 
Se 
YN 
N N 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY I. GATES AND MYRON W. CLARK, OF MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN, 
ASSIGNORS TO THE UTILITY MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
JACKETED CAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 540,614, dated June 4, 1895. 
Application filed October 1, 1894, Serial No. 524,547, (No model.) 
55 
to all, whom it nay concern: 
Be it known that we, HENRY L. GATES and 
MYRON W. CLARK, citizens of the United 
States, and residents of Milwaukee, in the 
county of Milwaukee and State of Wisconsin, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Jacketed Cans; and we dohere 
by declare that the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description thereof. 
Our invention has for its main object to 
simplify, strengthen and cheapen the con 
struction of that variety of jacketed-cans that 
have the jackets held in place by overlapping 
portions of the cans; said invention consist 
ing in the peculiarities of construction and 
combination of parts hereinafter set forth with 
reference to the accompanying drawings and 
Subsequently claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a sec 
tional view of a can embodied in our inven 
tion as it appears before a jacket is secured 
thereon; Fig. 2, a similar view of the can and 
jacket, partly in elevation; Fig. 3, a detail 
perspective view of metal-bound meeting 
edges of the jacket; Fig. 4, a similar view of 
a metal binder for an edge of the jacket; Fig. 
5, a sectional view of another form of jacketed 
can embodying our improvements. Fig. 6 
represents a sectional view of a portion of a 
can embodying a structural peculiarity of our 
invention applied somewhat different than is 
shown in the preceding figures, and Fig. 7 a. 
similar view illustrating that feature of our 
invention that relates to the attachment of 
handles to the jacket. 
Referring by letter to the drawings, A rep 
resents the body of a sheet-metal can, and in 
any form of this body, as distinguished from 
ends of the can, either or both of the upper 
and lower portions thereof are provided with 
a primary outwardly extended lateral flange 
b, that is subsequently curled or otherwise 
laid upon the outside of a jacket B to hold the 
latter in place, and said flanges may be either 
in one piece with the can-body or separate 
pieces joined thereto. 
In that form of our invention illustrated in 
Figs. 1 and 2, a folded upper end c of the can 
body projects beyond the adjacent end of the 
jacket the length of the fold, and a horizontal 
extension of this fold constitutes the flange b 
above specified. In said Figs. 1 and 2 we 
show that an end piece C, conical or other 
wise may be seamed to the can-body fold 
above the flange - extension b thereof. As 
usual in the class of goods to which our in 
vention relates, the end piece C of the can is 
provided with a flanged mouth normally closed 
by a cork or other suitable stopper. 
As shown in Fig. 5, the fold c in the can 
body may be omitted and a flange b formed 
by turning the upper portion of said body at 
a suitable angle to the remainder thereof. 
Another construction embodied by our in 
vention is illustrated in Fig. 6, the end-piece 
C being shaped for a solder-joint with the 
above described fold c of the can-body. 
In any of the various possible constructions 
that involve a flange extending outward from 
the can-body, this flange is laid down upon 
the jacket B by a suitable tool, and while we 
have shown the result of the operation in the 
form of a curl, it may be an angular fold or 
such other contour possible in the art of work 
ing sheet-metal. 
As herein shown we find it preferable to 
have the lower end-piece E of the can pri 
marily provided with a depending right-an 
gle flange joined to the can-body by a bead 
ing operation, another flange b being a result 
of this operation. The inturned beadd is op 
posed by a shield F of the same material as 
the jacket B, and this shield is held in place 
by turning the edge of the flange that de 
pends from the lower end-piece of the can 
thereon, said edge being either curled or 
folded. The latter flange b of the can-body 
is curled or otherwise laid against the jacket 
the same as the one aforesaid, and thus it will 
be seen that said jacket is firmly secured in 
place. In practice the beading together of 
the can-body and its end-piece E results in a 
normally fluid tight joint that is always ac 
cessible for the application of Solder ein case 
of leakage, this being one of the especial ad 
vantages of our invention. 
The utilization of the flanges b of the can 
body, as a means for holding the jacket B in 
place, is the same whether a can have two 
end-pieces joined to the body thereof in as 
many different ways or both end-pieces joined 
to said body in the same Way, and it is possi 
ble to make the can with only one end-piece 
joined to the aforesaid body in either of the 
. 
. 
75 
I5 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
95 
OC 
540,614 
2 of 
25 
ways herein set forth or possibly in some 
other convenient way. 
The jacket B is generally made from wood 
veneer and it is preferable to bind its meet 
ing edges with sheet-metal to prevent split 
ting. Therefore we have shown binders G. 
each in the form of a strip of sheet-metal bent 
to form a trough-like device that engages a 
vertical extremity of said jacket, the outer 
most edge of the strip being preferably in 
turned in order to present a smooth dull finish. 
In Fig. 5, we show a jacketed can having 
certain of the above described features in 
volved in its construction, and this can being 
designed as a package for butter, lard, candy, 
tobacco or other non-fluid commodity we pro 
vide the same with a removable end-piece or 
cover. In practice the body of the latter can 
is preferably provided with an in turned bead 
for the support of the end piece or cover H, 
and another in turned bead g may be formed 
on the can parallel to the former bead to pro 
ject over the upper portion of said end piece 
or cover, the latter being sprung in place. 
However we do not wish to be understood as 
confining ourselves to any particular means 
for supporting the end piece or cover in the 
latter form of can. 
As a means for fastening the end piece or 
cover H in place, we show the same provided 
with pivotal latches I that engage depressions 
or slots in the can body, and these latches may 
be sealed in their engagement with said can 
body by wax or other suitable means as a 
guard against pilfering of the contents of the 
can when in storage or shipment. 
As a means for Securing handles J to the 
can jacket We may employ vertical strips K 
having transverse depressionsh for said han 
dles and held in place by the can-body flanges 
above specified, this feature of our invention 
being illustrated in Fig. 7. In practice one of 
the handle-attaching strips may be arranged 
to cover the meeting edges of the jacket. 
In the manufacture of jacketed cans es 
pecially designed for the dutiable liquor trade 
we glue, nail or otherwise secure an extra 
piece L of Wood-veneer to the outside of the 
jacket B, as shown in Fig. 1, this attachment 
being of such dimensions as to receive a reve 
nue stamp held in place by tacks. By hav 
ing the double thickness of wood-veneer the 
tacks employed to affix the revenue stamp are 
not liable to damage the can, and it follows 
that the extra piece L of wood-veneer may 
serve as a base upon which to tack a label of 
any description. 
Having now fully described our invention, 
what we claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A jacketed-can having a folded end of 
its body projected beyond the adjacent end 
of the jacket the length of the fold, a flange 
extension of this fold laid against said jacket 
as a means for holding the same in place, and 
an end-piece joined to said fold. 
2. A jacketed-can having a folded end of 
its body projected beyond the adjacent end 
of the jacket the length of the fold, a flange 
extension of this fold laid against said jacket 
as a means for holding the same in place, and 
an end-piece double seamed to said fold. 
3. A jacketed-can having the body-portion 
thereof and a flanged end-piece united by an 
in turned bead, and an outwardly extended 
flange of the can body, resulting from the 
beading operation, laid against the jacket as 
a means for holding the same in place. 
4. A jacketed-can having the body-portion 
thereof and a flanged end-piece united by an 
inturned bead, an outwardly extended flange 
of the can-body, resulting from the beading 
operation, laid against the jacket as a means 
for holding the same in place, a shield oppos 
ing the bead, and the flange of the end-piece 
turned over on the shield. 
5. Ajacketed-can having the upper portion 
of its body provided with an outwardly ex 
tended flange and suitably connected to an 
end-piece, the lower portion of said body and 
a flanged end-piece united by an inturned 
bead, another outwardly extended flange of 
the can-body, resulting from the beading op 
eration, a shield opposing the bead, the flange 
of the latter end-piece turned over on the 
shield, and both of said outwardly extended 
can-body flanges laid against the jacket as a 
means for holding the same in place. 
6. A jacketed-can having the body-portion 
thereof provided with upper and lower flanges 
laid against the jacket, as a means for hold 
ing the same in place, longitudinal metal 
strips provided with transverse depressions 
and having the ends thereof caught between 
said jacket and can-body flanges, and han 
dles engaging said depressions. 
7. A jacketed-can having the upper portion 
of its body provided with an outwardly ex 
tended flange and an inturned bead, an end 
piece that rests on the bead, pivotal latches 
on the end-piece engageable with indenta 
tions or slots in the can-body, the lower por 
tion of said can-body and a flanged end-piece 
united by an inturned bead, another out 
wardly extended flange, resulting from the 
union of the aforesaid can-body and latter 
end-piece; a shield opposing the lower bead, 
the flange of the lower end-piece turned over 
on the shield, and both of said outwardly ex 
tended can - body flanges laid against the 
jacket, as a means for holding the same in 
place. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing we 
have hereunto set our hands, at Milwaukee, 
in the county of Milwaukee and State of Wis 
consin, in the presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY L. GATES. 
MYRON W. CLARK. 
Witnesses: 
N. E. OLIPHANT, 
HENRY DANKERT. 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540715.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 540,715, 
W. T. BUTLER, 
COASTINC APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
s 
 
 
c. 
O 
I SS: 
2D (d. 
SY 
 
  
- 
R 
R 
4. & 
s 
ss 
h 
 
 
 
 
 
  
S. 
Rieks. 
EEE 
Egg 
this 
 
to-LTHo, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
W. T. BUTLER, 
COASTING APPARATUS, . 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June ll, 1895. 
EITTE 
IEEEN 
ise 
it it Stu 
e 
EITIII 
S. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 540,715. 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
A 
- WARREN T. BUTLER, OF CHELSEA, MASSACHUSETTS. 
COASTING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 540,715, dated June 11, 1895. 
Application filed April 3, 1893, 
5 
O 
(5 
25 
- 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WARRENT. BUTLER, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Chelsea, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Coasting Apparatus, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
coasting apparatus adapted for use in con 
nection with boats descending on inclined 
Ways into the water and is designed as a 
means of entertainment at lake and seaside 
resorts, 
The invention is carried out as follows, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, wherein 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of the im 
proved apparatus. Fig. 2 represents a lon 
gitudinal section on the line 22, shown in 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents a cross-section on 
the line 33, shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 repre 
sents a detailplan view of the upper platform 
and its connections. Fig. 5 represents a lon 
gitudinal section on the line 55, shown in Fig. 
4; and Fig. 6 represents a cross-section on the 
line 66, shown in Fig. 4. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts wher 
ever they occur on the different parts of the 
drawings. 
A represents a suitable frame work or nat 
ural declivity having a proper and suitable 
inclination on which is firmly supported and 
secured one or more inclined tracks composed 
preferably each of a pair of parallel rails or 
ways B, B, as shown, on which the boats C, 
C, are guided while descending into the water 
D at the lower ends of said ways as well as 
when being drawn upward into position for 
descent. Each boat is provided on its under 
side with runners or keels C, C, adapted to 
slide on the ways B, B, said ribs being pref 
erably made concave or grooved on their un 
der sides to fit the correspondingly shaped 
rails B, B. 
E, E, represent side rails at the sides of the 
tracks which side rails are arranged about 
even with the railing of the boats, as shown, 
the latter having guide rails C''', C''', secured 
level with the side rails E, E, so as to prop 
erly guide the boats and keep them on even 
35 
45 
50 
 
55 
Serial No. 468,760, (No model.) 
keels while descending or when being drawn 
up on the inclined tracks. 
F, F, represent stationary or floating plat 
forms arranged at one or both sides of the 
lower end of the inclined ways for landing the 
passengers preparatory to hauling the boat or 
boats into their upper positions on the in 
clined ways. 
- 
Each track is provided with an endless 
chain G or its equivalent carried around a 
hoisting pulley H located at the upper por 
tion of the track and a guide pulley Iarranged 
at the lower part thereof and preferably 
guided on suitable intermediate wheels or 
rollers K, K, as shown. 
h is the shaft of the hoisting pulley H which 
is located in suitable stationary bearings and 
may be operated by hand or machine power 
for raising the boats which, for this purpose 
are temporarily attached to said chain by 
means of a suitable grip, or other equivalent 
locking device. 
I, L, are stationary platforms arranged at 
the sides of the upper ends of the inclined 
tracks, and l, l, are stairways leading there 
from to the ground, as shown, for enabling 
the passengers to reach the said upper plat 
forms preparatory to descending the coast in 
the boats. 
In a line with the upper part of each sta 
tionary track is arranged a movable track 
composed of rails b, b, which are pivoted at 
their forward ends at b', b, and provided with 
suitable mechanism by means of which said 
tracks may be swung to the inclined positions 
shown by dotted lines in Fig. 5. In the draw 
ings I have shown the mechanism for raising 
and lowering said rails b, b, as consisting of 
toothed racks M, M, secured to the pivoted 
rails b, b, and having their teeth meshing in 
the teeth of the pinions m, m, secured to a . 
shaft m', located in stationary bearings, and 
provided with a chain pulley N, from which 
leads a chain in to a similar chain pulley O 
secured to a shaft O', located in stationary 95 
bearings and provided with a crank or hand 
wheel P for its operation as shown. Any 
other suitable mechanism may, however, be 
used for this purpose without departing from 
the essence of my invention. 
If so desired, the side guides and runners 
75 
90 
OO 
 
540,715 
25 
35 
1. A marine coaster consisting of one or 
more inclined tracks combined each with an 
upper pivoted track, one or more racks se 
cured thereto, and a pinion or pinions meshing 
in said racks and means for actuating said 
pinions, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. In a marine coaster one or more boats 
having each a pair of longitudinal runners 
on the under side combined with side guides 
at or near the upper portion, and a grip or 
equivalent means for attaching one end of 
the boat to the hoisting mechanism, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 29th day of 
March, A. D. 1893. 
WARREN T. BUTLER. 
Witnesses: 
ALBAN ANDREN, 
LAURITZ N. MOLLER, 
or keels of the boats may be provided with 
antifriction rollers. 
In using and operating the marine coaster 
the boat is temporarily connected by means 
of a suitable grip, &c., to the chain G, and as 
the latter is set in operation the boat is drawn 
upward on the inclined track and made to 
rest on the now horizontally held rails b, b, 
after which the passengers embark in the 
boat. The boat is then disconnected from the 
chain G, and the tracks or rails b, b, are swung 
upward in their rear ends causing the boat to 
descend swiftly on the inclined track and to 
shoot into the water when reaching the lower 
end of the track, after which, the boat is rowed 
to the landings, the passengers disembark and 
ascend the steps leading to the upper plat 
forms of the coast, while the boat is again 
drawn up to its raised position on the track, 
and so on; or if so desired, the passengers 
may be drawn up with the boat. 
Having thus fully described the nature, 
construction, and operation of my invention, 
I wish to secure by Letters Patent and claim 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540815.txt	G, LE CLEAR. 
WHIRLING TOY OR BUZZ. 
Patented June ll, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 540,815. 
 
 
 
  
the Norris Peters ce. PHOTO-Litho. Washington, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GIFFORD LE CLEAR, OF CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
WHIRLING TOY OR BUZZ. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 540,815, dated June 11, 1895. 
Application filed September 19, 1894, Serial No, 523,458, (No model.) 
55 
6) 
75 
To all, Luhon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GIFFORD LE CLEAR, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cam 
bridge, in the county of Middlesex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Whirling Toys or 
Buzzes, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My improvement relates particularly to that 
class of whirling toys in which a disk is re 
volved alternately in opposite directions by 
the untwisting and twisting of a loop of cord 
held by the ends in the hands of the operator, 
and pulled upon and relaxed at the proper 
periods, the two members of the loop being 
engaged with the disk at points near its cen 
ter. I use such a disk and loop, and attach 
to one face of the disk flaps or wings, each 
hinged on one edge so that as the disk is re 
volved in one direction or the other the re 
sistance of the air and the momentum of the 
parts cause the wings to turn on their hinges 
and show alternately one face and the other, 
and as the faces are differently colored or 
marked, they show one color or device when 
the disk is rotated in one direction, and a dif 
ferent color or device when the direction of 
revolution is reversed. The edge of the disk 
is provided with fasteners adapted to hold 
removable rings, which may be colored or 
marked to produce interesting or a musing ef 
fects when revolved, and may be applied and 
removed as desired. 
The accompanying drawings represent what 
I consider the best means of carrying out the 
invention. 
Figure 1 is an edge view showing the entire 
toy. The remaining figures are on a larger 
scale. Fig. 2 is a face view of the disk. Fig. 
3 is a section on the line 33 in Fig. 2. Fig. 
4 is a face view of the disk, showing the side 
opposite to that shown in Fig. 2, with one of 
the rings in place; and Fig. 5 is a section on 
the curved line 55 in Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in all the figures. 
A is the disk, a circle of thin wood or heavy 
strawboard. It is provided with two eyeleted 
holes a, a, near the center, through which the 
two parts of the loop Mare passed, the latter 
imparting the required rotatory motion to the 
disk as the twisted loop is strongly pulled by 
the force of the hands applied through suit 
able handles M', M', in each bight of the loop. 
B, B, are sector-shaped wings or flaps of 
card-board, each having eyelets b, b, on one of 
the straight edges, corresponding to the dou 
ble row of eyelets a, a?, set on radial lines in 
the disk A. I have shown five wings equally 
spaced, each a sector corresponding to one 
sixth of a circle, thus allowing one-sixth of the 
entire circle to be divided up into spaces be 
tween the wings to reduce the liability of in 
terference when the motion is reversed if the 
wings should not begin to turn at exactly the 
Same moment. 
C, C, are short lengths of soft copper wire, 
curved as shown, and extending from the back 
face of the disk A through one eyelet a', 
thence through the eyelet b set in the edge 
of the wing B, and then through the other 
eyelet a' of the pair. The ends are bent down 
close against the back face of the disk. These 
bent wires and the eyelets b form removable 
hinges for the wings B, and allow the latter 
to swing freely when influenced by the resist 
ance of the air or the momentum of the parts 
at the time of reversing the direction of ro- . 
tation. 
D is one of several wide rings supplied with 
the toy. It is of thinner material than the 
disk A. It may be ordinary stiff paper or 
thin card-board. The opening d at the center 
is large enough to inclose the two eyeleted 
holes a, a, and allow the bight of the loop to 
be passed through. This ring is held in place 
on one face of the disk A by means of fas 
teners A, A, of thin metal, bent into U-form, 
and turning in holes provided for the rivets 
A near the periphery of the disk. The space 
between the leaves of the fastener is just a 
little less than the thickness of the disk so 
that when turned inward upon the edge of 
the disk, they are held frictionally against the 
strong centrifugal force tending to cause them 
to fly outward. 
In applying a ring D, the fasteners are 
turned outward. One end of the loop M is 
passed through the central hole dand the ring 
laid against the face of the disk. The fasten 
ers are then turned inward and engaged over 
the edges of both the ring and disk, and on 
- 
95 
Od 
IO 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
540,815 
being forced completely home will hold the and untwisting of a loop engaged there with, 
ring D against displacement radially, and in combination with a wing flexibly secured 
cause it to revolve with the disk. 
thereto and adapted to show first one face and 
There may be any number of the rings D, then the other as the direction of revolution 
with various devices, colors or combinations of the disk is changed, substantially as herein 35 
of colors, printed, painted, or otherwise pro. specified. 
duced on the surfaces. The example shown 
2. The disk A, having the holesa, a, adapted 
has the seven primary colors in equal divis- to receive the looped cord M for imparting 
ions, producing upon the eye the well-known the required rotatory motion to the disk alter. 
effect of an apparently white ring, when rap- nately in opposite directions, in combination 4o 
idly rotated. 
with the wing B, and with wires C engaging 
The wings B may be removed, when de- the disk and the wing and forming a remov. . 
sired, by simply bending upward the ends of able hinge upon which the latter may swing, 
the soft copper wires C, C, sufficiently to re-all substantially as herein specified. 
lease their hold upon the disk. The wings 
are then free, and may be disengaged from to receive the looped cord M for imparting 
the wires and a new series substituted. 
the required rotatory motion to the said disk 
Modifications may be made in the details alternately in opposite directions, in combi 
without departing from the spirit of the in- nation with the hinged wings B, removable 
Vention. 
Other means than the wires C, C, may be ring temporarily in place, all substantially as 
used to hinge the wings B to the disk A. herein specified. 
In testimony that I claim the invention 
Strips of muslin or other flexible fabric glued 
to each may serve well in cheap forms of the above set forth I affix my signature in pres 
invention. I may use more than the three lence of two witnesses. 
fasteners Ashown, or other forms may be em 
ployed. 
ring D and fasteners, as A', for securing the 5o 
3. The disk A, having the holesa, a, adapted 45 
GIFFORD LE CLEAR. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The disk adapted to be revolved alter 
nately in opposite directions by the twisting 
Witnesses: 
PATRICK McINERNEY, 
M. F. BOYLE. 
O 
25 
30 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US540915.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 540,915. 
| A, S. H0GE. 
TYPE DISTRIBUTING MACHINE, 
Patented June ll, l895. 
??? 
??? 
I 
 
  
28). Eveaco 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT S. HOGE, OF WISE, VIRGINIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF To EMORy 
E. HOGE, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
TYPE-DISTRIBUTING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 540,915, dated June 11, 1895. 
Application filed February 7, 1895, Serial No. 537,601, (No model.) 
? ? 
15 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT S. HogE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wise, in 
the county of Wise and State of Virginia, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Type-Distributing Machines; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in machines for distributing type, and 
has for its object to provide means for sort 
ing and distributing type taken in blocks or 
lines from a form or font and depositing each 
individual type in a separate and distinct re 
ceptacle, the type of a given character rest 
ing one above the other in lines. 
My invention is especially designed to be 
2 o used in connection with a type setting ma 
- chine which forms the subject-matter of an 
application for Letters Patent of the United 
States filed by me on the 25th day of Janu 
ary, i895, Serial No. 536,237. The type, when 
sorted and distributed in their respective re 
ceptacles in the present machine, are then fed 
from said receptacles into the type chutes and 
hoppers of the typesetting machine described 
in the above noted application. 
My said invention consists in certain nov 
elty in the construction, arrangement and 
combination of the various parts, all of which 
I will now proceed to point out and describe, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a machine 
embodying my invention; Fig. 2, a transverse 
section on line ac ac of Fig. l.; Fig. 3, a longi 
tudinal section; and Figs. 4 and 5 are details 
of parts of my said invention. 
In this machine each character has a sepa 
rate receptacle in which it is deposited, but 
for convenience in illustrating my invention 
I have only shown in the drawings two of said 
receptacles and the distributing mechanism 
connected with each. In practice said re 
ceptacles will be arranged in series, side by 
side, extending from one end of the machine 
to the other. 
Referring to said drawings: the numeral 
5o 
45 
35 
 
65 
?? 
1 indicates the frame of the machine, on the 
top of which are secured two horizontal and 
parallel bars forming tracks or ways, 2. 
3 are parallel bars supported upon the bars . 
or ways, 2, and raised above the same so as 55 
to leave a space between the said bars and 
ways. 
4 are elongated cam-shaped and parallel 
slots formed in each bar and raising in steps 
of a different horizontal plane and raising 
from one end of the machine to the other. In 
the drawings I have shown four different 
planes as at 5, 6, 7 and 8, for the purpose 
hereinafter described. 
9 is a rectangular type distributing box 
mounted on and adapted to be moved back 
Ward and forward on the ways, 2. Said box is 
of sufficient width to accommodate a type laid 
lengthwise across said box. The box may be 
of any desired height and length. 
10 are vertical and parallel grooves or guides 
formed on the inner faces of the sides of the 
box and at one end of the same. 
ll are Vertical type holding fingers mounted . . 
in the guides and adapted to be moved verti- 75 
cally in said guides. The inner faces of the 
said fingers are flush with the inner faces of 
the box and their upper ends are connected 
by the cross-piece, 12. Said fingers are suf 
ficiently far apart to hold a type laid length- 8o 
wise between the same. 
13 is a transverse slot in the bottom of the 
box at right angles to its length and located 
directly below the guides, 10, and through 
which the lower ends of the fingers project. 
14 are inwardly projecting lugs on the lower 
ends of the fingers, which support the type 
when placed between said fingers, the ends of 
the type resting on the lugs. 
15 are Vertical slots in the sides of the box 
directly below the guides, and 15 are vertical 
slots in the lower part of the type fingers. 
16 are outwardly projecting pins on the type 
fingers which project through the vertical 
slots, 15, and engage the cam slots, 4, and as 
the type box is moved back and forward regu 
late the position of the lower ends of the type 
carrying fingers with relation to the bottom 
of the box. 
85 
95 
go 
17 are the type receptacles, one being pro- Ioo 
? . 
-- v 
540,915 
3 
. 
described in my application hereinbefore re 
ferred to and forced by a plunger into said 
chutes. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for distributing type, th 
combination with suitable ways, a movable 
type carrying box mounted thereon and pro 
vided with a discharge opening or slot in its 
bottom, vertically movable type holding fin 
gers mounted in said box and passing through 
the opening, means for automatically raising 
and lowering the fingers of a series of type 
receptacles located under the ways, and means 
for forcing a type from the type fingers into 
the receptacles, substantially as shown and 
described. 
2. In a machine for distributing type, the 
combination with suitable ways, a movable 
type carrying box mounted thereon and pro 
vided with a discharge, opening in its bot 
tom, vertically movable type holding fingers 
mounted in the box and passing through the 
discharge opening or slot, and means for auto 
matically raising and lowering said fingers, 
of a series of type receptacles located under 
the Ways, and mechanism for forcing the type 
from the type fingers into the receptacles, and 
an individual key lever located at each box 
for operating said mechanism, substantially 
as shown and described. 
3. In a machine for distributing type, the 
combination with suitable ways, a movable 
type carrying box mounted on said ways and 
provided with the discharge slot in its bottom, 
vertically movable type holding fingers pro 
jecting through the discharge slot and pro 
vided with inwardly projecting lugs on their 
lower ends, and outwardly projecting and op 
positely disposed pins on their sides, and par 
allel bars located above the ways and pro 
vided with parallel cam slots arranged in a 
series of different planes, forming steps and 
adapted to be engaged by the pins on the fin 
gers of a series of type receptacles located 
below the ways, mechanism for forcing a type 
from the fingers into the receptacles, and a 
series of key levers for operating said mech 
anism, substantially as shown and described. 
4. In a machine for distributing type, the 
combination with suitable ways, a type box, 
2, mounted on said ways and having the dis 
charge slot, 13, vertically movable type fin 
gers, 11, mounted in the box and extending 
through the slot and provided with the lugs, 
14, and projecting pins, 16, and the bars lo 
cated above the ways and provided with cam 
slots, 4, arranged in a series of different planes 
and adapted to be engaged by the fingers, of 
a series of type receptacles arranged under 
the Ways, independent mechanism for forc 
ing the type from the type fingers into the 
receptacles, and a series of key levers for 
operating said mechanism, substantially as 
shown and described. 
5. In a machine for distributing type, the 
combination with a movable type carrying 
box having a discharge slot, 13, the type hold 
ing fingers, 11, mounted in the box and ex 
tending through the slot and provided with 
the lugs, 14, and projecting pins, 16, and the 
parallel bars having the cam slots, 4, arranged 
in a series of different planes and adapted to 
be engaged by the pins, of the series of type 
receptacles arranged under the ways and 
provided with the vertically movable type 
stops, 27, and the key levers, 28, pivoted to 
said stops, all constructed, arranged and oper 
ating substantially as shown and described. 
6. In a machine for distributing type, the 
combination with suitable ways, the type box 
mounted thereon and provided with the dis 
charge slot, 13, and parallel side slots, 15, the 
type holding fingers, 11, provided with verti 
cal slots, 15", lugs, 14, and projecting pins, 
16, and the parallel bars having the cam slots, 
4, arranged in a series of different planes and 
adapted to be engaged by the said pins, 16, 
substantially as shown and described. 
7. In a machine for distributing type, the 
combination with a movable type carrying 
box having the spring actuated plunger, 30, 
and cut-off, 31, and the discharge slot, 13, of 
the vertically movable type holding fingers, 
11, passing through the discharge slot, and 
means for operating said fingers, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
8. In a machine for distributing type, the 
combination with the type carrying box, 
mechanism for discharging the type there 
from, one at a time, and suitable key levers 
for operating said mechanism, a series of type 
receptacles, each provided with a plunger, 
and mechanism controlled by the key levers 
for lowering one of the plungers a given space 
at each operation of its connected key lever, 
substantially as shown and described. 
9. In a machine for distributing type, the 
combination with the series of type recepta 
cles, the plungers, 18, mounted in said re 
ceptacles and having the rack, 19, of the piv 
oted pawls, 20, having the rigid members, 21, 
and spring members, 22, and lever arms, 23, 
the rods, 25, pivoted to said lever arm, and 
the key levers, 28, engaging said rods, 25, all 
constructed, arranged and operating substan 
tially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
, 
ALBERT S. HOGE. 
Witnesses: . 
- 
CHAS. L. DU BOIS, 
GEO. M. COPENHAVER. 
75 
95 
O 
II5 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
?? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541015.txt	(No Model.) 
Y 
H. SCHROEDIER, 
PNEUMATIC COLLAR PAD, 
No. 541,015, 
Patented June ll l895, 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
% 2. 
 
41% 
s 
Attest: 
7777ezzor: 
7Zermann Schroea?e 
(24v., 26 62-, 
2.24% Ay-Azao? Azzolor Aoazza 
the Noffs Peters co, Photo-Litho, washinson. . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERMANN SCHROEDER, OF BREESE, ILLINOIS. 
PNEU MATIC COLLAR-PAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,015, dated June 11, 1895. 
Application filed April 15, 1895. Serial No. 545,802. (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HERMANN SCHROEDER, 
of the city of Breese, Clinton county, State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Pneumatic Collar-Pads, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part hereof. 
My invention relates to an improved pneu 
matic collar pad, and consists in the novel 
construction, combination and arrangement 
of parts, hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure is a front elevation 
of my improved collar-pad. Fig. II is a sec 
tional view on the line II II of Fig. I, and 
looking in the direction as indicated by the 
arrow in Fig. I. Fig. III is a horizontal ver 
tical Sectional view taken, approximately, on 
the indicated line III III of Fig. I. 
Referring by numerals to the accompany 
ing drawings, l indicates the body of my im 
proved pad, the same being a section of rub 
ber or analogous flexible material, said body 
being either square, oval or round in plan 
view when flattened out. Said body1 is bent 
or molded into an inverted U-shape, in order 
that it may be easily fitted and adjusted upon 
an animal's back or neck. 
Formed in the sides of the body 1 after it 
has been bent into the proper shape are a 
series of apertures 2, for the purpose of venti 
lation to the space beneath the pad when it 
is properly located upon an animal. 
Formed integral with the under side of the 
body l adjacent each end thereof are inflat 
able tubular sacks or pads 3, the same extend 
ing to the lower edges of the body 1. The 
ends of said sacks are closed and a connect 
ing-tube 4 extends from one of said sacks to 
the other at a point immediately beneath the 
apex or upper end of the section 1. 
An air-valve 5 of any common construction 
is provided with a cap 6, and serves as a means 
O 
2 
35 
40 
45 
55 
for inflating the pair of sacks 3, as said air 
valve is located in the upper and forward end 
of one of said sacks. When the end of an air 
pump is applied to this valve and said air 
pump is manipulated, air will be forced into 
the sack in which said valve is located, and 
from thence said air will travel through the 
tube 4 and into the opposite sack 3. When 
said sacks are properly inflated, the air-pump 
is removed from the valve 5, the cap 6 placed 
upon said valve, and the pad is ready to be 
placed in position upon an animal's neck. 
A pad of my improved construction is in 
expensive, is constructed in a single piece and 
greatly relieves the pressure and Wear upon 
an animal's neck. 
I claim 
1. A pneumatic collar pad, constructed of a 
single piece of flexible material bent into in 
verted U-shape, and provided on its under 
side with a plurality of integral inflatable 
sacks or cushions. 
2. A pneumatic collarpad, constructed of a 
single piece of flexible material of inverted 
U-shape, integral inflatable sacks or cushions 
located on the under side of said piece of 
flexible material, and a tube connecting said 
inflatable sacks or cushions. 
3. A pneumatic collar pad, constructed of a 
single piece of flexible material of inverted 
U-shape, the same having apertures formed 
in the sides, inflatable sacks, or cushions 
formed integral with the under side of said 
piece of flexible material, a flexible tube con 
necting said inflatable sacks, and an air-valve 
located in one of said inflatable sacks. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
HERMANN SCHROEDER. 
- 
75 
Witnesses: 
MAUD GRIFFIN, 
JOHN C. HIGDON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541115.txt	(No Model.) 
A. S. N. OILSON. 
PRINTER'S QUOIN. 
No. 54ll 15. 
Patented June 18, 1895. 
WITNESSES: 
Wa 
(2&A. 
NVENTOR: 
J.7. 9&le. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT S. N. OLSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PRINTER's QUOIN. 
SiFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,115, dated June 18, 1895. 
Application filed November 30, 1894, Serial No. 530,454. (No model.) 
O. 
w 
tion. 
. To all uhon, it nazy concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT S. N. OLSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Printer's 
Quoin, of which the following is a specifica 
My invention relates to quoins used by 
printers for securing type within a form when 
made ready for the press and my object is to 
provide a means for preventing the ordinary 
two piece wedge quoin from slipping back 
Wardly, after having been once set in proper 
position, the construction thereof being de 
scribed hereinafter, and is illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure l is a plan of a portion of one corner 
of an ordinary printer's form, showing a piece 
of furniture and a quoin in which is em 
bodied my improvement in the position which 
it is used. Fig. 2 is a plan of one of the pieces 
of a quoin with a portion of one end shown as 
broken away better to illustrate one manner 
of applying my improvement. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation of one of the wedge pieces of this 
quoin with my improvement attached thereto. 
Fig. 4 is a small portion of one end of one 
piece of the quoin with one part in a different 
position from what is shown in the other fig 
ures. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of two de 
tents which are firmly attached to their piv 
otal shaft to act in unison. 
This improvement may be applied to both 
wedge halves of the quoin, but in the draw 
ings is shown as applied to but one. 
The kind of quoin shown in the drawings 
consists, as is well known, of two wedges 
which when placed together have their oppo 
sitefaces parallel and in contact, respectively, 
with the form and with the furniture, the dis 
tance between these opposite faces being in 
creased or decreased by sliding one of the 
wedges or both, longitudinally by means of a 
key which is provided with cogs which are 
fitted to mesh into the cogs plainly shown pro 
jecting toward one another from the opposite 
pieces A and B. 
On account of the presence of ink or water, 
or from the two parts of the quoins of this 
character wearing very smooth on the con 
tacting surfaces, there is a tendency of the 
parts to slip backwardly and loosen the fur 
niture, and various provisions have been made 
to prevent this, among which may be men 
tioned a series of serrations on the surfaces in 
contact between the two halves A and B, the 
serrations of one registering with the depres 
sions between the serrations of the other, but 
this expedient is objectionable in that, when 
the quoin is under even a moderate pressure 
in locking up the form the serrations must be 
made to jump over one another which not only 
requires an undue amount of power applied 
at the key but causes the serrations to quickly 
wear away to a comparatively smooth surface 
when the quoin is useless for the purpose in 
tended, and to obviate these objections I have 
provided detents or dogs C and C which have 
one end firmly attached to the pivotal shaft 
C' which is mounted transversely in the quoin 
near the large end thereof, the detents being 
disposed in a housed out portion D of the end 
of the half quoin so as not to increase the 
width of the same. The free end of each 
detent projects sufficiently to engage with 
notches Ein the opposite half, as shown in Fig. 
1, both detents being held in yielding contact 
with the sides of the notchss by means of a 
pin F, which projects from a longitudinally 
disposed hole G and contacts a flat face H at 
one side of the boss portion of one of the de 
tents, C, the pin F being held in such contact, 
yieldingly, by means of a small helical spring 
J, Fig. 2. 
The flat face H serves as a cam to force the 
pin F inwardly against the resiliency of 
spring J, when the detents are swung out 
wardiy, Fig. 4, and are held in this position 
whenever necessary before fully locking up a 
form. 
It is obvious to those skilled in the art to 
which this invention pertains that, when lock 
ing up a form the two wedges comprising this 
quoin are so disposed that, when two complete 
quoins are used on one side of a page of mat 
ter, the wedge half next the furniture of one 
quoin must be locked up in an opposite direc 
tion to the wedge half next the furniture of 
the other quoin of the same side in order to 
prevent slipping the wedges of the quoin first 
locked, and also for other obvious reasons both 
sides of the complete quoin must be capable 
of being engaged with the key and also both 
sides must have a detent C or C or a lever on 
25 
35 
AO 
A-5 
fo 
7 o 
75 
go 
95 
Oo 
 
2 
- 
541,115 
one side and a detent at the other, both at- ally through the head of one quoin and a de 
tached to the pivotal shaft C' so that, the de- tent fixed at each end of the shaft which op 
tent at the lower side next the imposing stone erate in housed outside portions at opposite 20 
may be thrown into or out of engagement with sides of the head, and are adapted to engage 
5 notches E as desired when the quoins are be. notches in the opposite quoin at each side of 
ing manipulated in the operation of locking the longitudinal rib, and a spring operating 
to yieldingly hold the detents either into or 
up or unlocking the forms. 
I claim as my invention- 
out of contact with the opposite quoin as de-, 25 
The combination in a pair of quoins having scribed. 
To contiguous faces made inclined and provided 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
with two parallel rack bars, located below the have hereunto set my hand, this 10th day of 
plane of the contiguous faces, and adapted to November, 1894, in the presence of witnesses. 
be moved in opposite directions by a pinion 
inserted between the rack bars, and with a 
I5 laterally central longitudinal rib or feather, 
and a corresponding groove arranged at the 
head of each quoin, of a shaft mounted later- 
ALBERT S. N. OLSON. 
Witnesses: 
A. LONG, 
H. C. DURFEE. 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541215.txt	(No Model.) 
W. SCOTT. 
FLUSHING DEWICE FOR WATER CLOSETS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 541,215. 
Patented June 18, 1895. 
a. 
 
 
 
E. 
a 
s 
 
 
s 
 
4 Dar NS, 
life 
SER, FL 
 
 
ana N 
a 
D 
  
GN 
s) 
N 
N S N 
TIS - 7 
ic 
s S 
  
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
PereRS ca. Photo-urho. washingro... c. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. SCOTT. 
FIUSHING DEVICE FOR WATER CLOSETS. 
- 
No. 541,215. 
Patented June 18, 1895, 
 
 
TT I III 
Y 
7c67-ze-sas-e-y 
24% 
7, C. 
s 
Z7ez/ezzaop: 
7%zzeez256 ozz, 
% -1.t 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM SCOTT, OF MEDFORD, ASSIGNOR TO THE DALTON-INGERSOLL 
COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
FLUSHING DEVICE FOR WATER-closets. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,215, dated June 18, 1895. 
Application filed Februaryll, 1895, Serial No. 538,002, (Romodel) : 
55 
until the latch is disengaged by the tripping 
To all livhon it may conceit: 
device and it then closes automatically. It 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMSCOTT, of Med 
is obviously not essential that the tripping 
ford, county of Middlesex, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
device should be controlled by a float, how 
Flushing Devices for Water-Closets, of which 
ever, since other means might in Some cases 
the following description, in connection with 
be substituted with equally good results. 
the accompanying drawings, is a specifica 
While, as has been stated, any of the usual 
tion, like letters on the drawings represent 
forms of tanks may be used with this operat 
ing like parts. 
ing device, together with any suitable actu 
ator, it is preferable to employ a novel form 
The present invention relates to water 
closets, and is embodied in improved means 
of tank, which, in combination with a new 
for Operating the flushing valve, whereby sub 
and improved automatic actuator, also forms 
Stantially the same amount of water is dis 
a feature of the present invention. The main 
portion of the said tank may be constructed 65 
charged at each use of the closet, and also in 
in the ordinary way, but the front and side 
a novel construction of the tank and means for 
automatically actuating the flushing valve. 
walls thereof, in accordance with the inven 
The operating device of the present in 
tion are extended below the bottom thereof, 
and the tank is adapted to be supported di 
Vention may be applied to any tank such as 
is commonly employed, and consists in an 
rectly over a rear extension from the bowl in 
arm or lever having a latch adapted to en 
which the service pipe is formed; the Sup- - 
ports consisting preferably of brackets upon 
gage the valve or a connection there with 
when the said lever is moved from its nor 
the wall of the room in which the closet is 
mal position, in which it is retained by some 
situated. The outlet of the tank is then 
coupled directly to the said service pipe, the 
retractive force as that of a weight or spring, 
couplings being readily accessible for repairs, 
and a device for subsequently tripping the 
latch and disengaging the valve from its le- and at the same time hidden from view. The 
actuating device is then Supported or given 
ver. As soon, therefore, as the lever is re 
a suitable bearing in the extensions below 
leased after having been thus moved it re 
the bottom of the tank, the operating cons 
turns to its normal position, carrying with it 
nections thereof thus being inclosed and hid 
the valve which is then connected with it by 
den from view. The apparatus is thus all 
means of the latch above mentioned. The 
contained within a very small space and pre 
apparatus is of course so arranged that this 
sents a neat and finished appearance. 
movement of the valve unseats it, allowing 
The distributing device herein shown is of 
the Water to be discharged into the bowl. In 
novel construction and consists of two noz 
order to restore the valve to its normal or 
zles opening in opposite directions from the 
closed position after a predetermined amount 
of water has been discharged, it is necessary 
mouth of the service pipe, one of said nozzles 
to trip or disengage the latch upon the op 
being at one side of the bowl, and the other at 
erating lever, and as herein shown such dis 
the other side, so that a stream of water from 
engagement depends upon the fall of level of 
each nozzle is directed, one along and against 
one side of the bowl, and the other along and 
the water in the tank, said latch being con 
against the other side. At the front of the 
trolled by a float which may be the float which 
bowl directly opposite the flushing pipe a de 
controls the inlet to the tank, so that when 
flector is provided consisting of a rib project 
the said float has fallen a certain distance 
owing to the discharge of water from the 
ing inward from the inner surface of the bowl 
and extending from the top of said bowl to the 
tank, it will trip the latch, allowing the valve 
surface of the water therein, when at its nor 
to return to its seat, against which it is nor 
mally held by force of gravity or in any of 
mailevel, so that the entire volume of water 
issuing from said nozzles after passing around 
the ordinary ways. Thus when the lever is 
once operated the valve is placed beyond the the sides of the bowlis intercepted thereby 
control of the operator and cannot be closed and directed outward from the Walls of the 
95 
75 
9o - 
Oo 
O 
25 
35 
45 
: 
541,215 
75 - 
l 
15 
25 
30 
Fig. 5, so that the outlet valve a will auto 
bowl to the center thereof, so that substan 
tially the whole volume of water falls directly 
matically close. 
By the construction herein shown a positive 
into the center of the bowl. 
and certain engagement and disengagement 
Figure I is a vertical section of the tank 
of the stem or lifting rod by the latch as well 
and upper part of the bowl looked at from 
one side. Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the 
as freedom of movement of the valve stem 
when disengaged, are, secured, as will be seen 
tank looked at from the front, the bowl and 
by reference to Figs. 4 and 5. Referring to Fig. 
seat being shown in elevation. Fig. 3 is a top 
plan view; Figs. 4 and 5, details of the valve 
4, as the lever b is rocked on its pivot the end 
wall of the guide slot therein through which 
actuating lever and latch, showing in full and 
the lifting rod or stem a passes engages the 
dotted lines the positions thereof, during op 
said lifting rod and prevents it from receding 
eration. Fig. 6 is a modification; and Fig. 7 
is a section of the bowl on line ac, Fig. 1. 
from the latch and after the said latch reaches 
and drops under the shoulder a the lifting rod 8o 
The tank at is preferably mounted back of 
is prevented from slipping off the said latch, 
the bowl and directly over an extension there. 
being positively held between the end of the 
from in which is formed the service pipe, the 
said tank being preferably supported by 
latch and the end guide wall in the lever until 
released by an upward and inward movement 
means of brackets a fastened to the wall. To 
of the end of the latch engaged with the valve 
control the supply of water from the tank to 
stem. In order to insure a positive disengages 
the bowl, a valve a is provided at or near the 
ment of the stem by the latch the latter is pro 
bottom of the tank, the said valve being of any 
usual construction, but preferably adapted 
vided with a heel or extension below the shoal 
to be opened by an upward movement of the 
der or lifting surface thereof, which, as will be 
seen by reference to Fig. 5, engages a portion 
valve proper a which lifts it from its seat a 
upon which it is normally held in any suitable 
of the said stem a below the shoulder a so 
Way, by its own weight for example, as shown, 
that when the latch is turned on its pivot by 
aided by the pressure of the water in the tank. 
the descent of the float a lateral movement of 
the valve stem toward the latch is prevented 
In order to operate the valve, a stem or lift 
ingroda is provided extending upward there 
thus insuring the withdrawal of the latch from 
from toward the top of the tank through a 
the shoulder a. 
guide-Way consisting of a slot in a movable 
The said valve operating device may be act 
uated in any suitable way, it being desirable 
lever b mounted on a rock shaft band con 
nected to an actuating device which will be 
however, that the actuating means be so ar 
ranged that the initial movement thereof 
hereinafter described. The said lever U is 
shall not in itselfoperate the valve but merely 
normally disconnected from the said stem a 
bring the main operating lever into engage 
but is provided with a latch badapted when 
ment with the valve stem so that the return of 
the said leverb is rocked on its shaft b to en 
said lever to its normal position automatically 
gage a shoulder a formed in the stem a the 
effected by a weight or spring, shall open the 
position thereof when thus engaged being 
shown in Fig. 4. When the lever b thus en 
valve and hold it open until released, as above 
gaged with the valve stem a' is returned 
described. It is preferable, however, to use 
a novel automatic actuating device which 
to its normal position as shown in full lines 
forms a feature of the present invention and 
Fig. 5, it carries with it the said stem a thus 
opening the valve a and allowing the water 
which may be described as follows: A leverarm 
U extending outward from the rock shaft b 
to discharge from the tank into the bowl. To 
opposite the main lever arm b is connected 
close the valve, therefore, after the bowl is 
flushed it is necessary to provide means for 
by a link t) to a lever b8 pivoted in a lug bin 
Subsequently disengaging it from the leverb, 
the front wall of the tank a which is extended 
by which it is held open as above described. 
below the bottom thereof as shown in Fig. 1, 
5o As shown herein, this is accomplished by con- and the outer end of said leverb is connected 
necting the outer end of the latch, as by a link by a hinged jointb0 to the rear end of the wa 
to, to a float which may be and preferably is 
ter closet seat c. The said leverb is normally 
held in the position shown in Fig. 2, by any 
that which controls the inlet a so that as the 
said float falls owing to the discharge of water 
suitable means, preferably by making the 
from the tank it will trip the latch and permit 
link b of sufficient weight to counterbalance 
the valve to close. The link b is preferably 
the said lever b and also the weight of the 
arranged to be engaged by the float only after 
rear end of the seat c the said rear end being 
thus supported as shown upon the hinges b 
a predetermined amount of water has been 
discharged from the tank and for this purpose 
somewhat above the level of the bowl, while 
is provided at its lower end with a loop bex 
the front end thereof rests upon the edge of 
tending around the stem a' operated by the 
the bowl itself. When, therefore, the said 
seat c is depressed by weight or pressure 
float a 0. Thus as the water discharges from 
thereon, the lever or levers b (there being 
the tank so that the float a sinks toward the 
bottom thereof, the stem a' will finally engage 
preferably one at each side of the seat, con 
55 with the loop b thus tripping the latch band nected together at their ends by a rod bias 
releasing the stem a' as shown in dotted lines shown in Fig. 3) are rocked in their pivotal 
35 
45 
95 
90. 
oo: 
Ios 
I lo 
) 
tas. 
tao 
Iss: 
30 
 
- 
 
541,215 
, 
3 
o 
2 O 
25 
35 
o 
45 
50 
55 
of the water therein when at its normal level. 
When therefore, the said streams reach the 
said deflector, they are diverted thereby to 
ward the middle of the bowl, as indicated by 
the arrows, mingling and discharging directly 
over the center thereof. The water issuing 
from the nozzles e is not confined by any 
pipe or passage at the upper portion of the 
bowl so that by force of gravity the streams 
widen; and when they reach the deflector and 
are turned inward thereby a considerable vol 
ume of water is dropped bodily directly into 
the center of the bowl. Substantially the 
entire volume of water is thus directed to the 
center of the bowl and it is thus rendered 
immaterial if one of the said nozzles e is 
slightly larger or smaller than the other as 
may sometimes be the case owing to the Warp 
ing of the earthenware in baking, or to other 
causes, although it is intended that they 
should be of substantially the same size and 
discharge the same amount of water. With 
out the deflector e' however, if such irregu 
larity existed, it is obvious that the stream 
from the larger opening meeting the stream 
from the smaller opening would overbalance. 
it, so to speak, to some extent, so that the 
combined volume of water, instead of falling 
in the center of the bowl as is most desirable, 
would be diverted therefrom, falling to one 
side or the other, and the flushing would not 
be so effective as when the whole volume of 
water from the service pipe falls directly into 
the middle of the bowl. 
While the flushing device forming the main 
feature of the present invention has been 
herein described in connection with a novel 
form of tank and actuating means, it is obvi 
ous that it may be equally well applied to 
tanks of ordinary construction, and actuated 
in any of the usual ways. It is not therefore 
intended to limit the invention to a combina 
tion of the said operating device with any 
specific form of tank or actuating means; 
nor is the invention limited specifically to 
that form of the operating device itself, herein . 
shown, since modifications may obviously be 
made therein. 
bearings thus lifting the rod band lowering 
the lever b until the latch b engages with 
the shoulder a as hereinbefore described. 
The operating device is thus brought to its 
operative position, so that it will open the 
Valve as soon as the pressure upon the seat c 
is relieved, this being accomplished as already 
described by the return of the leverb thus re 
leased, to its normal position; and the valve 
thus opened will then be closed also automati 
cally when the proper amount of water has 
been discharged from the tank into the bowl. 
It is not however essential that the valve op 
erating means should be actuated by a de 
pression of the seat, as it may be readily ar 
ranged to be actuated otherwise, for example, 
manually as illustrated in the modification 
Fig. 6, in which an elbow lever b80 pivoted at 
b is connected with a rod be which may be 
supported or given a bearing in the extension 
of the front wall of the tank a and provided 
with a knob or handle b, by which the arm 
b is lowered as above described, so that the 
automatic operation of the flushing device 
takes place when the said handle is released. 
The tank C, when constructed in accord 
ance with the present invention is provided 
as has been hereinbefore mentioned, with 
the extensions a from the bottom of said 
tank to the upper surface of the bowl thus 
forming an inclosed space or chamber within 
which are contained the couplings d through 
which the outlet from the tank is connected 
to the service pipe of the bowl. The lever 
connections from the valve operating device 
are also mainly contained within the said 
chamber the walls of which may be utilized 
as shown to afford a support or bearing for 
the said levers, and all the operative parts 
are thus closed in and hidden from view, 
while, since the tank may be supported di 
rectly over the rear extension from the said 
bowl, the whole apparatus is compact and 
occupies the least possible space, and may be 
very conveniently installed. 
In order to obtain an efficient distribution 
of the water admitted to the bowl when flush 
ing the same, a service pipe e' which is pref 
erably integral with the bowl e, is provided 
I claim- 
1. In a flushing device for water closets, the 
in accordance with the present invention with 
combination with a valve having an upwardly 
two outlets or nozzlese see Figs. 1 and 7, one 
extending stem or lifting rod and a shoulder 
at each side of the said service pipe and 
opening adjacent to and substantially par 
on the said lifting rod, of a lever provided 
with a guide for said lifting rod, a latch piv 
allel with the inner walls of the bowl. Wa 
oted upon said lever and adapted to engage 
ter admitted to the service pipe therefore is 
discharged through the said nozzles e flow 
said shoulder to lift the Valve, and means for 
tripping the said latch, substantially as de 
ing around the inner walls of the bowl in the 
dirrection of the arrows, Fig. 7, from the back 
scribed. 
2. In a flushing device for water closets, the 
to the front of the bowl. At the front of the 
combination with a valve having an upwardly 
bowl in the middle thereof and extending 
extending stem or lifting rod and a shoulder 
inwardly from the inner wall is a deflectore 
consisting preferably of a rib projecting in 
on the said lifting rod, of a lever provided 
with a guide for said lifting rod, a latch piv 
ward from the front inner surface of the 
oted upon said lever and adapted to engage 
bowl across the path of the streams discharg 
ing from the nozzles e, extending substan 
said shoulder to lift the valve, and a link con 
tially from the top of the bowl to the surface nected with said latch and adapted to be en 
F 
75 
go 
95 
do 
o 
II5 
4 
* 541,215 
5 
o 
25 
gaged by a float whereby said latch is tripped 
when said float has reached a predetermined 
level, substantially as described. 
3. The combination with the valve having 
an upwardly extending lifting-rod or stem and 
a shoulder on said lifting rod below the up 
per extremity thereof, of a lever having a 
guideway through which said lifting rod ex 
tends, a latch pivotally supported on the said 
lever, and normally engaging said:lifting rod 
above the shoulder thereof, but adapted when 
said lever is moved downward with relation 
to said lifting rod to engage said shoulder, 
means for moving said lever, downward with 
relation to said lifting rod and for restoring 
Said lever to its normal position when re 
leased, and a tripping device for said latch 
adapted to operate when said lever, is in its 
normal position, substantially as described. 
4. In a flushing device for water closets, the 
combination with a valve having an upwardly 
extending stem or lifting rod and a shoulder 
On the said lifting rod, of a lever provided 
With a guide for said lifting rod, and a latch 
pivoted upon said lever and adapted to en 
gage said shoulder and a portion of said valve 
Stem below the shoulder thereof, and means 
for turning said latch on its pivot to disen 
gage it from the shoulder of the valve stem, 
substantially as described. 
5. The combination with a water closet bowl 
having a rearward extension containing the 
Service pipe; of a tank separately supported 
directly over said extension and back of the 
bowl, the bottom of said tank being above 
the level of the bowl while its walls extend 
downward below the bottom to said level; 
couplings below the tank in the space or 
chamber formed by the bottom of the tank, 
the walls thereof, and the said rearward ex 
45. 
so. 
'tension; saidi couplings, connecting the tank 
* with the service pipe; and an operating lever 
also within said chamber and pivotally sup 
ported in the wall of the tank below the bot 
tom thereof, substantially, as described. 
6. The combination with a water closet bowl 
having a rearward, extension containing the 
service pipe, of a tank separately supported 
directly over said extension and back of the 
bowl, the bottom of said tank being above the. 
level of the bowl while its walls extend down 
Ward below the bottom. to said level, an op 
cerating lever below the bottom of said tank 
and extending outward through the front wall 
thereof in which it is pivotally supported, and is 
a water-closet seat ?hinged at its rear end to 
the outer end of said lever, said:rear end be 
ing normally supported by the lever, some 
what above the level of the bowl, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
7. In combinations with a flushing device, a 
-bowl having a service pipe connected there 
s with, two oppositely directed nozzles for said 
service, pipe, respectively opening substan 
tially parallel to the opposite inner walls of 65 
the bowl, and adjacent thereto, and a deflector 
consisting of a rib projecting inward from the 
front inner-surface of the bowl, and extend 
ing from the top of the said: ; bowl substan 
tially to the surface of the water therein when 
at its normal level, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
In testimony, whereof. I have signed any ... . 
ss 
70. 
, WILLIAM SCOTT. 
Witnesses: 
M.E. HILL, 
H. J. LIVERMORE. 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541315.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 541,315. 
J. T. CREWS. 
CAR COUPLING 
Patented June 18, 1895, 
P[[] 
 
Jy/ZWASSAS. 
W/VAW207? 
Vo (6. P t2-eee-s, 
7 
Zeyes 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSIAII. T. CREWS, OF FRANKLIN, GEORGIA. 
CAR CO U PNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,315, dated June 18, 1895. 
Application filed September 17, 1894, Serial No. 523,181, No model.) 
To all utifuom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoSIAH. T. CREWS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Franklin, in the county of Heard and State of 
Georgia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Car-Couplings; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Which will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
car-couplers of that class or description in 
Which the coupling link is automatically 
coupled or connected with the coupling head 
when the cars come together. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
car coupler of the above description which 
shall possess superior advantages with re 
spect to Simplicity in construction and effi 
ciency in operation; and it consists in the 
novel construction and combination of parts 
hereinafter fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a central longitudinal sectional view of a car 
coupler constructed in accordance with my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view on the 
line ac ac, Fig. 1. 
In the said drawings the reference-numera 
1 designates a draw-bar to be attached to the 
end of a car in any ordinary or suitable man 
ner, and is formed with the usual flaring head 
2. Hinged to this draw-bar, near the rear 
end thereof, and upon the upper and lower 
inner sides, are two rearwardly extending 
plates 3, beveled at their side edges which 
serve as link-holders, for holding the link 
When the cars are coupled, as will hereinaf 
ter be described. Interposed between these 
plates and the inner sides of the draw head 
are coiled springs 4, the tendency of which is 
to throw said link-holders inwardly, so that 
they Will engage with the heads on the link, 
when the latter is inserted in the draw head. 
Formed in the draw head in the rear of said 
plates is a block 5, having a central recess 6, 
to receive the head of the link. 
55 
The numeral 7 designates a vertically mov 
able rod or bar which passes through the 
draw bar near the front end thereof, formed 
with a head 8 at its upper end. The lower 
end of this rod or bar is provided with a chain 
9 which passes through an aperture in the 
lower side of the draw bar and is connected 
with the lower link-holder 3 and intermediate 
of its ends the said rod or bar has secured to 
it a chain 10, which passes over a pulley 12, 
journaled on the upper side of the draw bar 
and then passes down through an aperture in 
the draw bar and is connected with the upper 
link-holder. 
The numeral 13 designates the coupling 
link consisting of two parallel bars formed 
or provided at the ends with a conical head 14. 
The operation is as follows: When two cars 
approach each other the link of one car will 
enter the flaring head of the other car, and 
as the movement continues the head of the 
link will strike the link holders, forcing them 
outwardly, when the said head will enter the 
recess 6, in the block or draw-head. The 
link-holders will then be forced inwardly by 
the coiled springs and their ends will engage 
with the inner end of the conical head of the 
link, holding it securely in place, yet allow 
ing the necessary play in turning curves. 
To uncouple the cars the rod or bar 7 is de 
pressed, either by hand or foot, and through 
the medium of the chains connected there 
with will force the link-holders outwardly 
disengaging them from the head of the link 
and allowing the latter to be withdrawn from 85 
the draw-head. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
In a car coupler, the combination, with the 
draw bar having a flaring head and a recess go 
in its rear for centering the link, the hinged 
link holders, the coiled springs having their 
outer ends seated in recesses in the draw 
head and their inner ends pressing against 
. 
the link holders, the vertically movable rod 95 
or bar passing through aligned apertures in 
the draw head, the chain secured to the lower 
end thereof, passing through an aperture in 
the draw head and secured to the lower link 
holder, the chain secured to the upper link I oo 
7 o 
75 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
 
2 
541,315 
 
holder passing through the draw head and my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
secured to said rod intermediate its ends and in presence of two witnesses. 
the pulley over which said chain passes, of 
the link consisting of two parallel bars con- 
5 nected together at each end by a conical head, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
FRANK S. LOFTIN, 
ROBT. G. CRAIN. 
Witnesses: 
JOSIAH. T. CREWS. 
W 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541415.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 541,415. 
F. A. BAIER, 
STREET CAR. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 18, 1895. 
also 
Zalezza Zr, 
22e22-226 (22222e22 
224-7-72-7 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 541415, 
Z, ZZZ, 
 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
F. A. BAIER. 
STREET CAR, 
Patented June 18, 1895. 
ses 
 
 
 
E. : 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
Z72, 
2 
 
YS 2n 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK A. BAIER, OF ST.LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO THE BROWNELL 
CAR COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
STREET CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,415, dated June 18, 1895. 
Application filed November 13, 1894, Serial No. 528,690. (No model.) 
D 
of the end sills. 
t 
its, 
t of her. 
- e- 
IS 
Figure I is a side elevation of my improved 
ly linvention relates to an improved con- formed Inside of the mortises 7 so tha 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Each end sill is provided with a rabbet 10 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK A. BAIER, to receive the ends of the floor boards so that 
of the city of St. Louis, in the State of Mis 
they will lie flush with the upper surface of . 
souri, have invented a certain new and useful the end sills, as shown in Figs. W and VIII. 
The end sills are perforated at points ad 
5 Improvement in Street-Cars, of which the fol- 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, jacent to the sills so as to provide diagonally 
reference being had to the accompanying positioned holes 11 to receive the ends of the 
E. d'Elias Reign . 
drying EEE this SES 
his E. 
e 
to struction for street cars, the object being to truss rods do not pass through the side sills 
provide Strength and firmness to the frame but on the inside of them, as shown in Fig. 
work, and to provide against moisture get- I, so that while the side silis are supported and 
ting between the posts and the sills upon strengthened by the truss rods they are not 
which they rest. p 
weakened by f rods passing frigh them. 
I5 My invention consists in features of novelty The rods are provided with washers and nuts 
fully described and pointed out 12 fitting against the lower outside corners 
i.e., 
in the claims. 
The truss rods extend, in elevation, to a 
car, part broken away. Fig. II is an enlarged point well up and horizontally under the car 
2O detail section of one of the truss-rods and one windows, as shown in Fig. I, and they extend 
9. 
posts s eigh 
racketS 1n edge view. E.g. 
ey are made fast by straps 13. See Fig. II. 
larged detail top view of one corner of the car, By thus extending the rods to a high eleva 
showing the curvature of the truss over the tion and making them fast to the posts, the 
25 ends of the sill. Fig. IV is a detail side view. sills are much better supported than with the 
Fig. Wis a section taken on line W W, Fig. ordinary low truss rods, and the sills and 
III. Fig. VI is a perspective view of one end posts are bound and held together in a very 
of One of the side sills. Fig. VII is a perspec- firm and rigid manner. 
tive View of one end of one of the end sills. 
As shown in Fig. III. the truss rods are 
3O Fig. VIII is a perspective view on a smaller curved outwardly after rising over the side 
Scale, showing the sills jointed together. 
sills so as to come against the posts, and the 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents one result of this is that the rods exert, an inward 
of the side sills of the car; 2, the end sills; 3, pull on the posts, preventing the latter from 
being strained outwardly when the car is in . 
the floor; 4, one of the truss-rods, and 5 the 
35 main posts extending along the sides of the 
Se. 
car and resting on the side sills. Each end 
I claim as my invention 
1. A car comprising a side sill, the end sills 
of each side sill is formed with a tenon 6 that 
fits in a mortise 7 in the end sill, and each secured to the side sill, the main posts sup-. 
end of each side sill has a tongue 8 that is ported on the sills, the truss-rod having its 
4O received by a shallow notch 9 in the end sill, ends extending diagonally through the end 
the tongue being somewhat thicker than the sills inside of the side sill, curved outwardly 
notch is deep, so that the upper face of the over the side sill, and extending horizontally 
side sill is slightly higher than the upper face under the windows, means for securing the 
of the end sill and the surface of the floor, truss-rod to the main posts, and means for se 
45 see Fig. VIII, and thus moisture is prevented curing the ends of the truss-rod to the end 
from passing off the floor onto the upper sur- sills; substantially as described. 
face of the side sills and rotting the lower 
2. A car comprising the side sill having a 
ends of the posts where they rest on the side tongue, and a tenon at each end, the end sills 
sills. 
having a shallow notch, a diagonal hole, and 
g issil 
f 
55 
75 
. 
90 
95 
 
541,415 
a mortise, the main posts supported on the 
side sill, the truss-rod having its ends ex 
tending through the diagonal holes of the end stantially as described. 
sills inside of the side sill, curved outwardly 
over the side sill and extending horizontally 
under the windows, straps for securing the 
truss-rod to the main posts, and washers and 
In presence of 
GEO. H. KNIGHT, 
E. S. RNIGHT. 
nuts for securing the ends of the truss-rod to 
the outer lower corners of the end sills; sub 
FRED. A. BAER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541515.txt	(No Model.) 
B. W. WAR WICK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
SELF NEUTRALIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUCTOR FOR TRANSMITTING 
MOTION TO MOVABLE OBJECTs, 
Patented June 25, 1895, 
 
 
the NORR's PETERs co, Photo-titHo, WASHINGTON, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
B W, WAR WICK 
2 sheets-sheet 2. 
SELF NEUTRALIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUCTOR FOR TRANSMITTING 
MOTION TO MOWABLE OBJECTS, 
No. 541,515. 
Patented June 25, 1895, 
 
 
If Ittifritter 
 
-ZCC est 
Z72-cy e7-2 Co 7, 
u1.C. 
9 
The RRs peers to. Photo-lh., Washington, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
BENJAMIN WILLIAM WARWICK, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
SELF-NEUTRALIZING FLEXBLE CONDUCTOR FOR TRANSMITTING MOTION TO MOVABLE OBJECTS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,515, dated June 25, 1895. 
Application filed September 3, 1892, Serial No. 445,024, (No model.) Patented in England August 10, 1891, No, 13,478 in Ger 
many September 1, 1892, Nos, 68,485 and 69,572; in Switzerland September 1, 1892, No, 5,670 in France September 2, 1892, 
No. 224,106; in Belgium October 18, 1892, No. 101.77l; in Italy October 20, 1892, No. 32,874; in Canada March 1, 1893, No. 
42,125, and in Austria-Hungary June 21, 1893, No. 56,082 and No. 10,257, 
55 
more or less or distend in the direction of the 5o 
spirals and this tends to inaccurate indica 
tions. I obviate this by so joining up left and 
right-handed spirals as to neutralize these 
variations; or, by employing two or more con 
ductors rotating in opposite directions so con 
nected to the receiver as to neutralize their 
own inaccuracies. 
Figure 1 is an external view of one form of 
the invention, the face of the stamp being 
shown for convenience in diagrammatic form, 
the detail of which appears in section in Fig. 4. 
In tihis case rotary motion is communicated 
from some part or parts of the clock-work to 
spirals A and A'. These spirals are held to 
gether at suitable places B, and communicate 
motion by suitable gearing in stamp C to hands 
on dial-plate D. D' is a minute-hand and Q 
is an hour-hand. The dial D is the reverse of 
an ordinary clock-dial and the hands D' Q are 
moved in a direction opposite to those of a 
clock. Fig. 2 is a representation of impression 
from dial-plate D. Fig. 3 is a representation of 
impression from a modified form of dial-plate 
adapted for postal purposes. Fig. 4 is an eleva 
tion of gearing within the stamp. Fig. 5 is a 
plan of same connected to the driving mechan 
ism. Fig. 6 is a section of stamp-fraume. Fig. 7 
is a modified form of the flexible shafting. 
Fig. S shows a modified arrangement of motion 
for transmitting intermittent motion. Fig. 9 
is a view of a detail. 
To the set-hands H of the clock I attach the 
wheel G which acting on the pinion J drives 
the wheel IX and the spiral A. The wheel IX 
operating wheel K" drives the spiral A' in the 
opposite direction. The spiral A moves pinion 
E and axle F. The pinion E drives crown 
wheel F. The spiral A" moves pinion E' and 
axle G'. The pinion E' also aids in driving 
crown wheel F. As the proper motion of spiral 
A is the opposite to that of spiral A, but is com 
municated to the opposite side of crown wheel 
F it is obvious that the effect of the proper 
motions is to turn F in the same direction, but 
any variations in the spirals arising from dis 
tention or other cause common to both spirals 
produce no effect on crown wheel F, because 
they tend to give equal and opposite motions, 
95 
7 O 
75 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN WILLIAM 
WARWICK, a subject of the Queen of Great 
Britain, residing at 134 Highbury Hill, London, 
5 England, have invented a certain new and 
useful Self. Neutralizing Flexible Conductor 
for Transmitting Motion to Movable Objects; 
and I hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
Io tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form part of this specification. 
The invention has been patented in the fol 
lowing countries: Great Britain, No. 13,478, 
dated August 10, 1891; Austria-Hungary, No. 
15-56,082 and No. 10,257, dated June 21, 1893; 
Germany, Nos. 68,485 and 69,572, dated Sep 
tember 1, 1892; Italy, No. 32,874, dated Octo 
ber 20, 1892; Canada,No. 42,125, dated March 1, 
1893; Switzerland, No. 5,670, dated Septem 
20 ber 1, 1892; France, No. 224,106, dated Septem 
ber 2, 1892, and Belgium, No. 101,771, dated 
October 18, 1892. 
This invention consists mainly in the special 
means for conveying regular or intermittent 
25 motion from a clock or other progressive or 
reciprocating mechanism by the agency of a 
flexible or jointed conductor in such a manner 
as to allow attaching at its distant end receiv 
ing mechanism to be movable in any direction 
3o without interrupting the transmitting move 
ments of the conductor or the relative accu 
racy between the stationary origin and the in 
dications on the movable receiver. 
This invention has reference in particular to 
35 that class of instruments known as hand 
stamps for time and date and other kindred 
machines for giving information. From a 
clock the motion may be taken off the minute. 
axle, or center wheel axle, or off a more slowly 
4o moving part which may have to be added. 
The conductor may consist of a helical spiral, 
which conveys motion around curves. I may 
employ a second train to drive the flexible con 
ductor liberated by the first clock at intervals. 
45 The motion may be conveyed around the walls 
of a building and used at various points as 
When a helical spiral is subjected to power 
tending to rotate it the coils are liable to yield 
desired. 
- 
 
2 
w 
541,515 
The crown wheel F carries the minute halid 
D'. To the crown wheel F is rigidly attached 
the pinion I, which by the ordinary clock mo 
tion, viz.:-wheel M, pinion N and wheel O 
carries the piece P to which is attached the 
hour hand Q. 
The right handed spiral R. Fig. 7 is attached 
to rod T which at its farther end is attached 
to left handed spiral S. This combination 
may be divided into any suitable number of 
sections, but it is not so effective as the two 
spirals above described. This modification is 
designed to accomplish the same purpose as 
the two spirals A, A' before described in neu 
tralizing the effect of any variations in the 
spirals, as one spiral is reversed from the 
other and whatever cause loosen or distend 
the coils of one spiral will have the opposite 
effect on the other spiral. The spirals are 
held to the rod T, by soldering or in any other 
desired way. 
U, Fig. 8, is spindle of some part of clock 
work, say, the minute wheel. U has two flat 
tened parts V, V. The piece W has its teeth 
X resting on the spindle U except when the 
flattened portions V come round. It is then 
freed and is forced round one revolution by 
the action of spring Yacting through suitable 
gearing Y Y and Y on pinion Z' of rod Z 
which rod is attached at one end to piece W. 
and at the other end to spiral A. The wheel 
B' connected to spiral A operates on wheel C" 
and so gives reverse motion to spiral A. Thus 
the revolution of pinion Z' is communicated 
to the spirals and the motion is controlled 
by the master clock through the spindle U. 
I do not limit myself to the forms herein 
shown, for my invention is capable of indefi 
nite variations, especially as regards the dial 
portion, but I only show certain forms to in 
dicate clearly the nature and scope of the in 
vention. 
I claim 
1. In combination, the movable time stamp 
having hands operating mechanism in the 
stamp, including a crown wheel F, a time mo 
tor mechanism and the flexible shafting com 
prising the two shafts A, A, connected to said 
motor mechanism to be rotated in opposite 
directions relatively to each other the pinions 
on opposite sides of the crown wheel and con 
nected with the said shafts, substantially as 
described. 
2. In combination, the movable time stamp 
having hands and operating mechanism there 
for, the motor mechanism and the flexible 
shafting comprising the right and left sec 
tions of spirals arranged end to end and con 
nected together, the saidsections being of sub 
stantially the same diameter substantially as 
described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
BENJAMIN WIANE WARWICK. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM HENRY MUNNs, 
WILLIAM ALFRED LYMES. 
35 
40 
45 
55 
(5 
2 ) 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541615.txt	(No Model.) 
F. S. HUNTING, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
TRANSMISSION OF POWER BY ALTERNATING OURRENTS, 
No. 541,615, 
Patented June 25, 1895, 
nS 
 
 
re 
with 
 
 
  
 
YS 
S l 
S 
S 
 
A. 
  
RS 
WITNESSES: 
66.64, 
-*ra -6.4% 
2%a 27. tyENT: 
by his 4ttorneys, -- 
civic 6. eracy) rse 
 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
TRANSMISSION OF POWER BY ALTERNATING CURRENTS, 
F. S. HUNTING, 
No. 541,615, 
Patented June 25, 1895. 
AIG, 3, 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
-  -64 
e/ cee/ 
NVENTOR: 
7% 46-voay, 
Ay his 4ttorneys, 
Ju-kW 6.Crav Gu 
HE MORRIS PErifts co. Photo-Litho, washington, D.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. S. HUNTING, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
TRANSMISSION OF POWER BY ALTERNATING CURRENTS, 
No. 541,615, 
Patented June 25 l895, 
AIG, 4, 
WITNESSES: 
-6 .-64 
A. 
77-g? 
W 
1. 
2-ce 
NVENTOR: 
2?. 2%ray, 
Ay his 4ttorneys, 
THE NORR's PETERs ca. PHOTO-Li Ho., WASHINGTON, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. S. HUNTING, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
TRANSMISSION OF POWER BY ALTERNATING CURRENTS, 
No. 54l,615. 
Patented June 25, 1895, 
AIG, 6 
WITNESSES: 
-6 .444 
7% 
-&le/6 
4. 
INVENTOR: 
2ee y2u24ty, 
usal M 6. Orgav Ge 
Ay his 4ttorneys, 
 
TRANSMISSION OF POWER BY ALTERNATING CURRENTS. 
F. S. HUNTING. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
(No Model.) 
No. 54l,615, 
Patnted June 25, 1895. 
WITNESSES: 
4 6-6 
476/ AY7 
 
M 
INVENTOR: 
24, 27.2%ray, 
Asy his 4ttorneys, 
cue- 6. On cog Ge: 
(No Model.) 
F. S. HUNTING, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
TRANSMISSION OF POWER BY ALTERNATING CURRENTS. 
No. 541,615. 
Patented June 25, 1895. 
FIG, 10, 
w 
WITNESSES: 
(i. 
wa? 
 
INVENTOR: 
Ay his 4ttorneys, 
R.C. S screen See 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRED S. HUNTING, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIAN A. 
TRANS MISSION OF POWER BY ALTERNATING CURRENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,615, dated June 25, 1895. 
Application filed January 19, 1895, Serial No. 535,444 (No model.) 
To atti, Luhon, it in latly conce71. 
Be it known that I, FRED S. HUNTING, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Fort 
Wayne, in the county of Allen and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in the Transmission of 
Power by Alternating Currents, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to systems of trans 
mission of power by the employment of sim 
ple or single phase alternating currents. It 
is well understood that in the driving of a 
notor by such currents, the magnetic field of 
the motor is oscillatory as distinguished from 
a rotating field, and hence the motor is not 
self-starting under a load; also that when 
once started such a motor will revolve equally 
well in either direction. In order to operate 
a motor by alternating currents to render it 
self-starting and give it a torque sufficient to 
enable it to start under full load, it has been 
necessary to resort to poliphase currents, usu 
ally either di-phased or tri-phased, whereby a 
rotating field is generated. Such currents, 
however, involve the disadvantage of requir 
ing circuits with three wires instead of two. 
My invention provides a means whereby or 
dinary alternating motors having closed cir 
cuit armatures can be operated in the same 
inauner as by di-phased currents from a cir 
cuit supplied with simple alternating cur 
rents, or in other words my invention pro 
vides a means for generating di-phased cur 
rents at the point to which the power is elec 
trically transmitted, whereas only simple or 
mono-phased currents are produced at the 
point where the energy is generated. My in 
vention thus enables simple alternating mo 
tors to be operated through transformers in 
connection with any ordinary alternating cur 
rent circuit designed for operating electric 
lights through suitable transformers. 
To this end my invention provides an im 
proved transformer constructed to transform 
a single phase alternating current into cur 
rents of two phases which differ theoretically 
by ninety degrees, and practically by a suffi 
cient approximation thereto to generate a re 
volving field. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
a circuit diagram illustrating the feeding of a 
motor and of lamps from the same single 
O 
2C) 
25 
4. 
45 
50 
 
55 
o 
75 
phase alternating dynamo according to my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a plan of my improved 
transformer in its preferred form and the elec 
trical connections with the motor. Fig. 3 is 
a diagram illustrating the oscillations of mag 
netism and of electromotive force or current 
involved in the operation of my transformer. 
Fig. 4 is a plan illustrating a modified con 
struction of transformer. Fig. 5 is a diagran 
matic illustration of a still further modifica 
tion. Figs. 6 to 10 are diagrams showing 
modified circuit arrangements. 
Referring first to Fig. 1, let G designate the 
dynamo or generator generating single phase 
alternations of electro motive force and dis 
charging them upon a primary circuit a CI. 
From this circuit branches are taken off to 
transformers connected in derivation in the 
usual manner. One of these transformers, 
B, is shown as of usual construction feeding 
a secondary circuit b b wherein in candescent 
lamps are introduced in multiple in the usual 
manner. The other transformer, C, which is 
shown in this figure connected to the primary 
circuit in like manner, is employed for feed 
ing an electro-motor M. This motor may be 
of any construction wherein the armature 
has a short-circuited winding such as the so 
called squirrel-cage armatures, and in which 
the field - magnet is wound with coils con 
nected in two circuits after the manner en 
ployed in the transmission of power by di 
phased currents. These coils are connected 
in two secondary or induced circuits c and Cl 
leading from the transformer. For clearness, 
I will call c the secondary circuit, and d the 
tertiary circuit. 
The peculiar construction of the trans 
former will be described with reference to 
Fig. 2. The magnetic core m is laminated or 
built up of separate laminae of soft iron 
punchings in the usual manner, any suitable 
subdivision of the punchings for assembling 
the parts being resorted to, the core being 
formed with preferably two openings or slots 
in which the primary and secondary coils may 
be wound. So fair as the core and the pri 
mary and secondary coils are concerned, this 
transformer does not differ necessarily from 
the transformers now commonly constructed 
for converting high tension primary into low 
tension secondary currents, except that the 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
511,615 
o 
primary and secondary coils instead of being 
di-phased alternating currents, that is to say, 
wound the one over the other as is usually 
a revolving field is generated and the motor 
done, are wound in opposite ends of the slots 
becomes self-starting, and has a torque suffi 
or openings. Thus in Fig. 2 the primary coil 
cient to enable it to start under load. 
is wound in the spaces P and the secondary 
The principle of operation of my invention 
coil is wound in the spaces S, each filling 
will be made apparent from the diagram. Fig. 
these spaces from the end of the slot to nearly 
3. The line v designates the magnetic oscil 
the middle thereof. By reason of this ar 
lations in the core of the transformer induced 
rangement consequent magnetic poles are 
from the primary circuit (or which might be 
formed which are strongest in the positions 
To avoid compli 
due to some other source). 
denoted by the arrowse e, that is to say, be 
cating the diagram, I have omitted any desig 
tween the coils P and S, their strength gradu 
nation of the primary current. Inasmuch as 
ally diminishing toward each end of the slot. 
the greatest electro-motive force is generated 
The formation of these consequent poles is 
wien the rate of change in the number of 
due to the opposition of the magnetization in 
magnetic lines in the coil is greatest, it is evi 
duced by the primary current, and the coun 
dent that the electro-motive force generated 
ter magnetization induced by the secondary, 
in the secondary will vary by ninety degrees 
current. For example, if the primary coil 
from these oscillations of magnetism, this be 
has eleven hundred ampreturns, it tends to 
ing denoted by the line. v. Assuming that 
throw a proportionate number of lines of 
the current generated by this secondary elec 
magnetic force through the core, in the direc 
tro-motive force, is working against a non-in 
tion of the arrow 1100, while if the secondary 
ductive load (which is approximately true in 
coil has for example one thousand ampre 
practice) then the phase of the secondary cur 
turns, it tends, to project a corresponding 
- rent will coincide with the phase of the sec 
number of lines of force through the core in ondary electro-motive force as denoted by the 
the contrary direction as denoted by the ar 
same line w. (In the operation of such a mo 
row 1000, and these opposing forces result in 
tor, as is contemplated, the lag of the current 
may byproper proportioning be made so slight 
the diversion of lines of force, in the direction 
of the arrowse e. at the, consequent poles, that for the purpose of this explanation it 
whereby lines are projected across. the gaps. 
may be ignored.) Hence the secondary cur. 
or slots in the form, of magnetic leakage, 
rent coincides in phase or approximately so 
the extent of which will be: determined by 
with the primary, current, which is not shown 
the particular proportions given to the trans 
in the diagram, the two currents being nearly 
former. These lines of magnetic leakage oc 
equal and opposite. As the magnetic leakage 
35 cur in oscillations of like frequency to that or cross, magnetism depends upon the mutu 
of the primary and secondary currents, and 
ally opposing magnetizing action of the pri 
are capable of generating: alternating cur 
mary and secondary currents, being greatest 
rents in any coil which may be arranged to 
when they are greatest, and least when they 
inclose them. For utilizing this leakage mag 
are least, it is necessarily in step with them, its 
netism or cross field which extends trans 
phase being as denoted by the curve acin Fig. 3. 
versely of the slots, I wind coils, in such posis. The: electro-motive force generated by this 
tions as to inclose and catch the lines of this 
cross magnetism in the tertiary coils, varying 
cross field. To accomplish this with the con 
there from in phase by ninety degrees, is de 
struction shown in. Fig. 2, I wind a coil in the: noted by the liney. Assuming that the load on 
spaces TT and another coil, in the spaces T' 
T', these coils being in planes perpendicular the tertiary circuit is non-inductive (which by 
suitable proportioning may be made approxi 
to the planes of the primary and secondary mately true in practice), then the same line 
coils. These coils. T and T' I will for clear- will designate the tertiary current, which as 
ness, designate: tertiary coils. They are: 
is best seen at the right of Fig. 3, varies by 
connected in the tertiary circuit did, either in 
ninety degrees from the secondary current. 
series as shown in Fig. 1, or in multiple as I thus obtain di-phased currents having a dif 
shown in Fig. 2, as may in any case, be found ference of phase amounting theoretically to 
preferable, For reducing somewhat the mag-ninety degrees, and practically to somewhat 
netic resistance of the path of the cross mag-less than ninety degrees. 
In practice there 
netic field, and to, gather in the lines as close 
is a slight departure from the theoretical con 
as possible, I prefer to provide the core with ditions, due to both the secondary current 
lugs n n projecting into the coils.TT', where. 
and the tertiary current Working on a more 
by as: many lines, as possible are: directed. or less inductive: circuit, whereby they are 
through the inner convolutions of the coils. 
forced to some extent out of step with their 
The electro-motive force induced in these: 
electro-motive forces, a condition which will 
tertiary coils, and hence also the tertiary cur 
vary according to the design of the trans 
rent, differs in phase from thiat in the second 
former and motor, and will also vary from 
ary coil S. by very nearly ninety, degrees, or 
time to time according to variations in the 
one quarter of a period. Hence by passing 
load. There is also a slight magnetic disturb 
these tertiary and secondary currents into the 
ance due to reaction between the cross mag 
field winding of the motor, the effect upon the netism and the main magnetism. These dis 
motor is the same as though it were fed with turbing elements appear to slightly divert 
45 
So 
55 
95 
OO 
To5 
II5 
I 30 
 
541,615 
5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
o 
75 
9 O 
95 
from ninety degrees the difference in phase 
between the secondary and tertiary currents, 
reducing the difference in some instances to 
considerably below ninety degrees. 
Any proportions giving a phase difference 
sufficient for generating a rotary field in the 
motor will be within my invention. 
The consequent or cross field is not con 
stant, but varies with any given proportions 
of transformer as the load on the secondary 
varies, being dependent on the number of op 
posed ampere turns in the primary and sec 
ondary coils. The voltage in the tertiary coils 
Will therefore increase as the current in the 
secondary coil increases; and as this second 
ary current increases its voltage will decrease, 
as in any transformer wherein the primary 
and Secondary coils are wound so as to induce 
consequent poles. It results that the tertiary 
current is greatest when the secondary cur 
rent is greatest, or in other words, when there 
is the greatest load. Hence the motor be 
comes self-compensating, being driven by di 
phased currents in starting or whenever run 
ning under a heavy load, but as the load is 
diminished the tertiary current falls off, until 
when running under a very light load the 
tertiary currents have so nearly ceased that 
the motor becomes practically a single phase 
motor. 
The particular construction or arrangement 
of parts in the transformer whereby the stated 
result is attained may be greatly varied so 
long as the principles indicated as essential 
to my invention are followed. As examples 
of modifications of which my invention is 
susceptible, I will refer to Figs. 4 and 5 of the 
drawings. 
Fig. 4 shows a construction in which the 
primary and Secondary coils are wound one 
over the other, so that the consequent poles 
generated by the opposed magnetic forces in 
duce consequent poles in the positions indi 
cated by the arrows e'e', and in these posi 
tions the transformer core is formed with 
lugs in to better concentrate the lines of force. 
Around these lugs, of which there are four, 
are wound respectively tertiary coils TTT 
T. These coils may be coupled in series, 
multiple or otherwise, as found most desir 
able in any particular case. This modifica 
tion thus illustrates that it is not strictly es 
Sential to the formation of consequent poles 
upon which my invention depends, that the 
primary and secondary coils should be wound 
at opposite ends of the core, and also that it 
is not essential that the tertiary coils shall be 
in planes perpendicular to the planes of the 
primary and secondary coils. 
Fig. 5 shows another modification wherein 
the conventional symbol designating a trans 
former is modified by the provision of lugs 
n on which are wound tertiary coils T. This 
view illustrates in a simple form the essential 
Fig. 6 illustrates an application of my in 
vention which under some conditions may be 
desirable. The current in the secondary coil 
S is increased by introducing a resistance R, 
which may be constant or variable, in shunt 
or parallel with the secondary circuit c, 
thereby increasing the number of ampre 
turns in the coil S, and consequently increas 
ing the strength of the consequent magnetic 
field, and increasing the electro-motive force 
in the tertiary circuit. By this means the 
phase-difference between the tertiary and sec 
ondary currents may be brought nearer to 
ninety degrees than would be possible under 
otherwise the same conditions. This arrange 
ment will be particularly advantageous where 
it is desirable to obtain from the motor the 
maximum torque. 
The essential principles of my invention 
may be applied in a variety of ways, it being 
only essential that relatively primary and 
secondary currents be applied so as to gener 
ate a consequent magnetic field, and the mag 
netic lines of this field be utilized to generate 
electro-motive force in a separate or tertiary 
circuit. Examples of possible modifications 
coming within the essential principles of my 
invention are given in Figs. 7 and S. 
In Fig. 7, B' designates diagrammatically a 
transformer of any ordinary type, the second 
ary coil of which is included in a secondary 
circuit c', in which also are included the coils 
of the motor M. In this same secondary cir 
cuit is introduced serially the secondary coil 
S' of the transformer C". The primary coil 
P of this transformer is fed from the primary 
circuit either in series with the primary of the 
transformer B', or in parallel, as shown. The 
tertiary coils, here lettered it, are connected 
in the tertiary circuit d", and with the motor 
winding, in the same manner as already de 
scribed. 
In the modification shown in Fig. S, B is a 
transformer of any ordinary construction, the 
secondary of which is connected in a second 
ary circuit c, which is connected in the same 
manner with the motor windings. A second 
transformer C has its primary coil p con 
nected in parallel in the secondary circuit. 
Its secondary coil S is connected in an inde 
pendent circuit containing a resistance R, 
which may be fixed or variable. The tertiary 
coils t are connected in a tertiary circuit d, 
which is also connected with the motor wind 
ing in the same manner as previously de 
scribed. In this construction the consequent 
magnetic field is generated by the opposing 
action of coils which are primary and second 
ary relatively to one another, the currents in 
the primary coil, however, being secondary 
currents in the sense that they are derived 
from the secondary circuit c, while the sec 
ondary coils being in an independent circuit, 
its current is free from the disturbing influ 
ences of the variations in the motor; and also 
by working on a resistance which may be non 
inductive, the current may be freed entirely 
CO 
IO 5 
I IO 
1. L5 
I 25 
o5 characteristics of my transformer. 
 
541,615 
1. 
-1 - 
5 
O 
25 1 
35 
40 
45 
from lag. By this construction a greater 
phase difference may be secured in the cur. 
rents on the circuits c and d. 
IFig. 9 shows a further modification or devel. 
opment of my invention by means of which 
tri-phased currents may be generated from 
single phase currents. By means of an ordi 
nary step-down transformer B, the high-ten 
sion currents on a primary circuit are trans 
formed into low tension currents on a second 
ary circuit c. Relatively to the motor and 
other transformers, this circuit is a primary 
circuit, and I will therefore call it the local 
primary circuit. From this circuit a branch 
c is taken, which includes the coils. 1 of the 
motor M8. Another branch c is taken from 
the local primary circuit, in which is included 
the primary coil pof a consequent pole trans 
former C9. The secondary coils of this is in 
circuit with a resistance R or other suitable 
load. The tertiary coilst of this transformer 
are included in the tertiary circuit d which 
traverses the coils 2, 2, of the motor M. This 
tertiary circuit also traverses the primary coil 
p of a second consequent pole transformer 
C. The secondary coils of this transformer 
also includes a dead resistance R or other 
suitable load. The tertiary coils t of this 
transformer are included in a second tertiary 
circuit d which traverses the coils 3, 3, of the 
motor M. Starting with the phase of the al 
ternations on the local primary circuit cand 
its branches as zero, I will assume that the 
parts are so proportioned as regards the 
amount of lag due to self-induction or other 
causes in the secondary coils and tertiary 
circuit d, that the phase of the current in 
this tertiary circuit has a lag of thirty degrees 
behind the theoretical phase difference of 
ninety degrees, thereby reducing it to a phase 
difference of sixty degrees from that on c. 
As this first tertiary current traverses the 
primary coil in the second transformer C, the 
current in the secondary coil i should have 
theoretically a phase difference of ninety de 
grees therefrom, but I will assume that the 
proportions are such that it lags thirty de 
grees behind this theoretical, giving it there 
by a phase difference of sixty degrees from di 
or one hundred and twenty degrees from c. 
Hence the currents traversing the motor coils 
1 and 3, have the required phase difference 
of one hundred and twenty degrees. By in 
verting the connections of the motor coils 2, 
the current phase is transposed or inverted, 
thereby giving it a phase difference of one 
hundred and twenty degrees from the cur 
rents in the coils 1 and 3 respectively. Thus 
the currents in the three coils have phases 
separated by one hundred and twenty degrees 
as required in a tri-phase motor. 
Fig. 10 shows a simpler arrangement for 
accomplishing the same result. Here a step 
down transformer B8 feeds a circuit c as be 
fore, and this local primary circuit has a 
branch c which includes the coils 1, 1, of the 
motor M precisely as in Fig. 9. The circuit 
c also is connected in like manner to the pri 
mary coil p of a consequent-pole transformer 
C5. The secondary coils thereofisconnected 
in a secondary circuite in which are included 
the coils 2, 2, of the motor. The tertiary coils 
t of this transformer are connected in a ter 
tiary circuit d which includes the coils 3, 3, 
of the motor. The proportions are such as to 
produce a lag of phase in the secondary cur 75 
rent in circuit e, and again in the tertiary 
current in d, such as to approximate the re 
sults attained by Fig. 9, but with one less 
transformation, so that the phases of the cur 
rents in coils 1,2 and 3 vary in succession by 
approximately sixty degrees, and hence by 
inverting the connections of the intermediate 
coil a phase-difference of approximately one 
hundred and twenty degrees is secured be 
tween the three coils. 
My invention is not limited to the applica 
tion of the currents of different phases forgen 
erating a revolving field in a motor, being 
equally applicable to generating such a field 
in a transformer, or wherever elsewhere such 
a revolving field may be desired. 
I claim as my invention the following-de 
fined novel features, substantially as herein 
before specified, namely: 
1. The improved mode of electric transmis 
sion of power, consisting in generating a sin 
gle-phase alternating current, inducing there 
from a secondary current, generating a con 
sequent magnetic field by subjecting an iron 
core to the opposed magnetization of rela 
tively primary and secondary coils, inducing 
from said consequent field a tertiary current 
of phase different from said secondary cur 
rent, and applying said secondary and tertiary 
currents to generate a rotary field. 
2. The improved mode of electric transmis 
sion of power, consisting in generating a sin 
gle-phase alternating current, inducing there 
from a secondary current, generating a conse 
quent magnetic field by subjecting an iron 
core to the opposed magnetization of said pri 
mary and secondary currents, inducing from 
said consequent field a tertiary current of 
phase different from said secondary current, 
and applying said secondary and tertiary cur 
rents to generate a rotary field. 
3. A transformer for electric power trans 
mission consisting of a core, primary and sec 
ondary coils wound thereon in positions to 
generate between them a consequent mag 
netic field, and a tertiary coil wound to in 
close the lines of said consequent field, where 
by there is generated in it an alternating elec 
tro motive force differing in phase from the 
secondary current and said tertiary coil hav 
ing terminals for connecting a consumption 
4. A transformer for electric power trans 
mission consisting of a core formed with two 
slots, primary and secondary coils wound 
therein at opposite ends thereof to generate 
between them a consequent magnetic field, 
and tertiary coils wound in said slots to in 
circuit. 
I 25 
I30 
- 
 
95 
Icd 
Io5 
II5 
 
541,615 
mary circuit, and a secondary coil in said sec 
ondary circuit, said coils wound in positions 
to generate a consequent magnetic field, a ter 
tiary coil wound to inclose the lines of said 
consequent field, a tertiary circuit fed from 
said tertiary coil, and a motor having its field 
coils connected in said secondary and tertiary 
circuits. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
FRED S. HUNTING. 
Witnesses: 
G. T. WOOD WARD, 
H. D. HARING. 
25 
close the lines of said consequent field and 
having terminals for connecting a consump 
tion circuit. 
5. A transformer for electric power trans 
mission consisting of a core, primary and sec 
ondary coils wound thereon in positions to 
generate between them a consequent magnetic 
field, the core formed with lugs in said con 
sequent field, and tertiary coils wound on said 
lugs to inclose the lines of said consequent 
field and having terminals for connecting a 
consumption circuit. 
6. The combination of a relatively primary 
and secondary circuit, a transformer having 
its core wound with a primary coil in said pri 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541715.txt	(No Model.) 
I, MACW. BOUR KE. 
SPRING WHEEL. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 541,715. 
Patented June 25, 1895. 
the Norris PEERs co. Polito, washingo, d. c. 
w 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 541,715. 
I. MAC W. BOUR KE. 
SPRING WHEEL. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
- 
Patented June 25, 1895. 
la 2. %2 
2 
 
S 2 
teams 
2 
  
 
 
| 3al6ay 
feet/hoco&argue, 
The Norris Peters co, PHoro-LTHo...washi Noron, p. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISIDORE MAC WILLIAM BOURIKE, OF I.ONDON, ENGLAND. 
SPRING-WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,715, dated June 25, 1895. 
Application filed November 26, 1894. Serial No, 530,058, (No model.) 
55 
, 
m 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, 1 is the axle box 
forming at its ends the ball races. 2 is a slide 
fixed to the said axle box and sliding on a 
frame 3 which constitutes another slide slid 
ing on the cross bars 4 which are secured to 
the hub. The direction of motion of the slide 
3 is perpendicular to that of the slide 2. 
5 is a flange to which spokes are attached. 
6 is an adjusting nut. 
7 are springs attached at one end to the hub 
and at the other end to the slide 3. 
8 are 
other springs attached at one end to the 
slide 2 and at the other end to projections 
extending from the slide 3. When the slide 
3 moves along the bars 4 it carries with it not 
only the slide 2 but also the springs 8 and 
therefore does not affect the tension of the 
springs 8. When the slide 2 moves in or on 
the slide 3 it compresses or extends the 
springs 8 but does not affect the springs 7. 
As before stated these springs are duplicated 
by others on the opposite side of the slides. 
Each compoundslide is thus accompanied by 
four springs 7 and four springs 8, and each 
set of springs is at right angles to another set. 
It will be observed that the springs 7, which 
govern the slide 3, are attached at one end to 
said slide and at the other end to the hub 
ring 5; while the springs 8, that govern the 
slide 2, are attached at their opposite ends to 
the slides 2 and 3, respectively. By this man 
ner of attaching the springs 7 and 8 and ar 
ranging them at right angles to each other 
each set will have a movement only in the 
direction of its length and, therefore, the 
springs cannot become injuriously bent or 
strained. 
I provide ball bearings between the slides 
2 and 3 and also between the slide 3 and the 
bars 4. The balls work in grooves and act as 
driving connections between the slides and 
the bars 4. The grooves in which the balls 
work are closed at the ends to maintain the 
balls in place. In some instances the grooves 
are divided by stops into two or more spaces 
each of which contains one, two or more balls. 
Adjusting screws or their equivalent may be 
used for adjusting the parts relatively to each 
other. The slides may have any suitable or 
convenient form other than that shown. I Ico 
95 
90 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ISIDORE MAC WILLIAM 
BOURKE, physician, a subject of the Queen of 
Great Britain, residing at 40 Redcliffe Square, 
London, England, have invented an Improved 
Spring Apparatus for Use in Wheels, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings. 
This invention has for its object the pro 
vision of an improved driving connection be 
tween the axle or the part of the wheel in 
contact with the axle (said part being herein 
after termed the axle box) and the hub from 
which the spokes spring. The said connec 
tion is composed of springs and one, two or 
more compound slides. Each compound slide 
consists of two slides arranged to slide in di 
rections at right angles to each other, so that 
the axle box is free to move in any direction 
in a plane at right angles to the axle, while 
the axle box and hub must turn together. 
The chief feature of my present invention 
relates to the springs. Those which govern 
one of the slides of each compound slide are 
attached at one end to the hub and at the 
other end to the slide, and those which gov 
ern the other slide are attached at one end to 
the said slide and at the other end to the other 
slide by which construction the springs have 
a movement only in the direction of 
length, and hence do not become injuriously 
bent and strained. 
Illustrations of my improved apparatus 
are shown in the accompanying drawings, 
wherein 
Figure 1 is a side view of a spring-hub suit 
able for the rear driving-wheel of a bicycle, 
for example, and showing two pairs of spiral 
springs in position acting on their respective 
slides in directions at right angles to each 
The slides will have when complete 
other. 
other springs directly opposed to those shown. 
Fig. 2 is a section of the said hub. Figs. 3 
and 4 are side elevation and section, respect 
ively, of a modified form of hub. Fig. 5 is a 
side elevation of another modified form of 
hub; and Figs. 6 and 7 are side elevation and 
section, respectively, of a still further modified 
hub. In Figs. 3 to 7 all the springs are re 
O 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
5o moved. 
 
55 
the said center portion and hub - ring, of a 
slide secured to the hub-ring, a slide secured 
to the center portion or axle, and an interme 
diate slide operatively connecting the two 
aforesaid slides, in such manner that the hub 
ring and center portion are rigidly connected 5o 
both circumferentially and laterally and are 
free to move radially with respect to each 
Other. This I do not claim herein. 
What I do claim as my invention is 
1. In a wheel, the combination with a hub, 
a movable axle, and a compound slide com 
prising several parts or slides adapted to move 
on each other and connecting said hub and 
axle, of the sets of springs arranged at right 
angles to each other, as shown and described, 6o 
one set of springs being attached at one end 
to one of the slides and at the other end to a 
fixed part of the hub and the otherset attached 
at opposite ends to different slides in the same 
compound slide, whereby torsional straining 65 
of the said spring is prevented, substantially 
as specified. 
2. In a wheel, the combination of a hub, an 
axle supported in a compound slide and free 
to move in any direction in a plane at right 
angles to the axle, the said compound slide 
comprising several parts or slides adapted to 
move on each other and provided with ball 
bearings, and the sets of springs arranged at 
right angles to each other, as shown and de 
scribed one set of springs being connected at 
one end to one of the slides and at the other 
end to a fixed part of the hub, and the other 
set attached at opposite ends to different 
slides in the same compound slide, whereby 
torsional straining of the said springs is pre 
vented, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 8th day of November, 1894. 
ISDORE MAC WILLIAM BOURKE. 
d 
75 
Witnesses: 
J. WINLO HOAR, 
T. F. BARNES. 
541,715 
45 
may provide one, two, or more of such com 
pound slides arranged in any suitable manner 
with respect to the hub. 
Figs. 3 and 4 show a similar arrangement of 
slides but without ball bearings. 
Fig. 5 shows an arrangement where the 
slides are furnished with rollers 9 in lieu of 
ball bearings. This arrangement may be de 
Scribed as a double ended lever 2 fixed upon 
the axle box and provided with two rollers 9, 
9 free to roll on the outside of the secondary 
frame or slide 3, which in turn is furnished 
with rollers that roll on the outside of the 
frame 4 attached to the hub. These rollers 
act as drivers when the axle box is rotated. 
Figs. 6 and 7 show a telescopic cruciform 
arrangement of slides. 10, 10 are bars fixed 
to the hub. 11, 11 are telescopic rods attached 
at their inner ends to the axle box and fur 
nished at the outer ends with eyes that slide 
on the bars O. 
Instead of the four telescopic slides as 
shown only two may be used in certain cases. 
Ball bearings may be used in the portions 
which side on the bars 10. 
Chains and bars which can bend in one di 
rection only may be substituted for the tele 
Scopic arrangement. 
The springs 7 and 8 have been omitted from 
Figs. 3 to 7 only for the sake of clearness in 
illustrating the modified forms of hub shown 
in these figures, and I would have it under 
stood that in each modified form of hub the 
same arrangement of springs 7 and 8 is to be 
employed as has been hereinbefore described 
with reference to Figs. 1 and 2. 
My improvements are also applicable to 
those cases where the axle box is dispensed 
with and the spoke hub is attached directly 
to the axle. 
In Letters Patent No. 510,S82, granted to me 
December 19, 1893, I have shown and claimed 
the combination with a hub-ring a center por 
tion, or axle, and springs interposed between 
25 
35 
40 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541816.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 541816, 
Patented June 25, 1895, 
D. O'DONNELL, 
EQUALIZER FOR WATER MAINS, 
 
a ar 
O al O C 
l 
; 
h/AZMASSAS 
: 
4%zvale/26(22% 
Av ze 
 
Ay/AA/202 
23ale? (22246 
223-24, 
-2/ 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL O'DONNELL, OF RICHMOND, VIRGINIA. 
EQUALIZER FOR WATER-MAINs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,816, dated June 25, 1895. 
Application filed December 20, 1894, Serial No. 532,498. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
30 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
citizen of the United States, residing at Rich 
mond, in the county of Henrico and State of 
Virginia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Equalizers for Water 
Mains; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, which form part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to equalizers for wa 
ter mains and has for its object to so regulate 
the pressure in a system of water distribu 
tion that the supply will be as great at the 
highest point as at the lowest, through which 
the Water is distributed, and my invention 
consists in accomplishing this object in the 
manner and by the means hereinafter de 
scribed and more particularly pointed out in 
the claims. 
It is well known that in very rolling or 
hilly cities the supply of water is not as plen 
tiful in buildings on the elevated portions as 
it is in those on the lower sections, and that 
this is a source of great inconvenience to the 
occupants of the elevated portions of the city. 
By the use of my invention however, the 
preSSure can be so equalized as to insure an 
even distribution of water to all parts of the 
city at the same time. 
Referring to the drawings in describing my 
invention, Figure 1 is an elevation, partly in 
section, of my improved apparatus in posi 
tion for operation; and Fig. 2 is a detailed 
view of a detached part of the same. 
Similar letters of reference refer to corre 
sponding parts in each figure of the draw 
lingS. 
A represents the supply reservoir. located 
at some elevated point within or near the city, 
and B a water main distributing pipe leading 
down into the city from the reservoir. 
C indicates a stand pipe or supplementary 
reservoir, situated on a plane below that 
of the reservoir, into the bottom of which, 
through a vertical pipe H, a branch pipe D 
leads from the water main B, for the purpose 
of filling the stand pipe with water. 
From the stand pipe C, and preferably at 
a point substantially on the same horizontal 
Be it known that I, DANIEL O'DONNELL, a plane as that of the mouth of the water main 
at the supply reservoir A, although it may be 
lower if desired, a pipe E leads to the main 
distributing pipe B for the purpose of carry 
ing the raised water in the stand pipe back 
into the water main, thereby forming a con 
nection through the stand pipe between the 
supply reservoir and the water main leading 
down into the city. 
The water main pipe B is provided with a 
cut off valve b, at a point between the con 
nections of the branch pipe D and the pipe E 
With the main pipe, for the purpose of forc 
ing the flow through the pipe D into the stand 
pipe, and the branch pipes D and E are pro 
vided with cut off valves d and e, in order to 
prevent the water from entering or leaving 
the stand pipe in case the whole force is 
needed in the city below to extinguish fire in 
a great conflagration. 
F represents a branch distributing pipe 
which may lead from the water main pipe B 
at any point between the reservoir and the 
stand pipe for supplying water to the upper 
part of the city, and this pipe is provided 
with private supply pipes f, at any desired 
points. 
In carrying my equalizing water supply sys 
tem into operation, I erect a stand pipe C in 
an elevated part of the city below the plane 
of the reservoir where a supply of water is 
desired and connect it with the main distrib 
uting pipe. The valve b is closed and the 
water will naturally rise in the stand pipe 
until it reaches the level of that in the sup 
ply reservoir. If the branch distributing 
pipes F lead from the Water main at a point 
between the reservoir and the stand pipe, it 
is evident that the full normal pressure from 
the reservoir will be maintained in these dis 
tributing pipes as there will be an equal 
pressure on both sides of the connection be 
tween the main and the distributing pipes. 
The water for the lower sections of the city. 
will pass through the stand pipe C, the exit 
therefrom being on substantially the same 
plane as the connection of the Water main 
pipe with the reservoir though the exit may 
be lower down on the stand pipe if desired. 
By this arrangement the pressure in the lower 
sections of the city will be substantially the 
- 
65 
75 
95 
OC 
541,816 
pipe, a branch distributing pipe leading fromi 
the water main at a point between the Sup 
ply reservoir and stand pipe, an exit pipe 
leading from an elevated point on the stand 
pipe to the water main and a cut off in the 
Water main between the two connections 
from said water main to the stand pipe, as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination with a supply reservoir 
and water main, of a stand pipe located on a 
plane below that of the reservoir, a branch 
pipe leading from the water main to the 
stand pipe, a branch distributing pipe lead 
ing from the water main at a point between 
the reservoir and stand pipe, an exit pipe 
leading from an elevated point of the stand 
pipe to the water main, a cut off in the water 
main between the two connections from said 
Water main to the stand pipe, and cut offs in 
the inlet and outlet pipes connecting the wa 
ter main and the stand pipe, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. The combination with a supply reservoir. 
and a Water main leading therefrom, of a con. 
duit having inlet and outlet connections with 
the Water main on a plane below that of the 
reservoir, said conduit extending vertically 
to a plane Substantially the same as that of 
the exit from the reservoir to the water main, 
a cut off in the water main between the inlet, 
and outlet connections of the conduit, and a 
branch distributing pipe leading from the 
water main between the reservoir and the 
conduit, as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
DANIEI. OD ONNEL. 
Witnesses: 
WM. WINGFIELD, 
A. S. CRAWFORD. 
45 
SO 
55 
7 O 
75 
O 
2 C. 
25 
same as the full normal pressure of the reser 
voir and be equal to that in the distributing 
pipes in the upper section of the city. 
In the event that the elevations vary con 
siderably, other stand pipes may be erected 
on intermediate levels between the first stand 
pipe and the lowest section of the city. Such 
stand pipes however, should preferably be of 
sufficient height to permit the water to rise 
therein to the level of that in the supply res. 
ervoir, and the exit point from such stand 
pipe for the supply of the next lower section 
should be on substantially the same level as 
the connection of the water main distribut 
ing pipe with the supply reservoir although it 
may be lower down if desired. By the use 
of such a series of stand pipes arranged on 
different elevations, the water supply will be 
uniform in all sections of the city. 
By using my system in equalizing the 
pressure of water, in case a fire should occur 
in the elevated section of the city, the full 
pressure of the supply reservoir can be tem 
porarily concentrated in that section by clos 
ing the valve e, of the exit pipe E, and there 
by shutting off the water supply to the lower 
section; or in case the fire should occur in 
the lower section, the same result may be 
practically obtained by closing the valved, 
and opening the valve b thereby partially 
shutting off the pressure in the upper sec 
tion of the city. 
. Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination with a supply reservoir 
and Water main, of a stand pipe or supple 
mentary reservoir located on a plane below 
1 hat of the supply reservoir, a branch pipe 
leading from the water main to the stand 
30 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US541916.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 541,916, 
0, F, B0WMAN, 
MICROMETER CACE, 
Patented July 2, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES F. BOWMAN, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
MIC ROMETER GAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 541,916, dated July 2, 1895. 
Application filed January 21, 1893, Serial No. 459,145, (No model.) 
?? 
65 
75 
to all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs F. Bow MAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Haven, in the county of New Haven and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Measuring-In 
struments; and Ido declare the followingtobe 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
o the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the Same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the figures of ref 
erence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
This invention relates to certain novel and 
useful improvements in measuring instru 
ments of the micrometer class, and has special 
reference to that construction having two up 
rights mounted upon a beam, one of which is 
fixed thereon, and the other movable and ar 
ranged to be secured in certain positions on 
the beam; which positions are determined by 
means of removable blocking of any suitable 
length. 
The object of my invention is to dispense 
With the use and annoyance of the removable 
blocking or distance pieces, and to arrange 
upon the beam fixed positions or stops, against 
which, the movable upright is brought and 
firmly secured; also to improve and simplify 
the construction of the mechanism of the mi 
crometer measuring screw. 
With these ends just recited in view, my 
invention consists of stops attached to the 
beam and arranged preferably at an angle 
thereto, which stops are also preferably made 
adjustable, so that in making the instrument 
that may be regulated as to height, or in case 
of Wear, Such Wear may be compensated for 
by means of this adjustable feature. These 
stops are SO arranged on the beam as not to 
interfere with the travel of the movable up 
right When Such upright is not located against 
any One of Said stops; which latter action or 
result is effected by means of a hardened piece 
attached to said upright, which piece is so ar 
ranged that it is capable of being engaged 
With any one of the said stops, and thus locate 
the upright, or when disengaged therefrom, 
to allow the said upright to be moved along 
the beam. 
The improvements in the micrometer screw 
mechanism consists in combining with the 
screw, a nut having cone shaped ends, longi 
tudinal opening or split in one side, a cone 
shaped seat provided in the micrometer thim 
ble or shell, for one end of said nut, combined 
with a threaded sleeve having a cone shaped 
Seat to engage the other end of said nut, where. 
by the nut is closed upon the traveling screw 
SO as to eliminate lost motion therein, all of 
which improvements, will be more fully de 
scribed in the following specification, and 
Such features as are believed to be new and 
novel, particularly pointed out in the claims 
to follow. 
To enable others to understand my said in 
vention reference is had to the accompanying 
drawings which, together with the specifica 
tion explain the device. 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of the 
micrometer gage, central sectional view of the 
screw mechanism; a portion of the movable 
upright and beam broken away to show the 
Stops of the beatm and the engaging piece of 
the said upright; also the movable upright in 
dotted position, with its contact piece thrown 
out of engagement with the stops on the beam. 
Fig. 2 is an end elevation of the gage and 
broken section of the movable upright, look 
in the direction of the arrow seen in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a broken view of a round beam with 
broken view of the movable upright mounted 
In this view as well as in Fig. 1, the 
thereon. 
contact piece or arm is brought into engage 
ment with one of the stops of the beam. Fig. 
4 is an end elevation of Fig. 3, looking in the 
direction of the arrow, showing the manner 
of maintaining a perpendicular position of 
the uprighton a round or circular beam. Fig. 
5 is an end view of the circular beam, showing 
a longitudinal slot therein to assist in connec 
tion with a key shown in Fig. 4, to steady the 
movable upright. Fig. 6 is both a side and 
an end elevation of the micrometer nut. Fig. 
7 is a perspective view of the split taper pin 
arranged to pass transversely through the 
movable upright and holes of the beam. Fig. 
8 is a broken sectional view of the micrometer 
screw and shell projection of the movable up 
right, cone-shaped seat therein, for the cone 
shaped end of the micrometer nut. Fig. 9 is 
a detail view of the blockinserted in the lower 
end of the movable upright, 
25 
35 
45 
 
541,916 
7 ? 
75 
A. 
Its construction and operation are as fol 
lows: 
1 (see Fig. 1) represents the beam, 2 the 
movable upright, and 3 the fixed or stationary 
upright. 
4 are what may properly be termed distance 
points or stops and are screw threaded a part 
of their length, to engage threaded holes an 
gularly arranged through the beam 1. The 
angle shown being thirty degrees which en 
ables the faces 4" of the stops 4 to abut squarely 
against the outer face of the eccentrically ar 
ranged contact arm 5, which is attached to 
the rod 6, and this rod is rotatably mounted 
in a hole obliquely arranged through the up 
right 2 and surmounted by the nut 7 om its 
outer projecting end. 
8 is the threaded portion of the micrometer 
screw and S its measuring point, said screw 
being rigidly fixed-as is usual in such cases 
to the traveling sleeve 9. 
10 is the tubular projection of the upright 
2 which supports the micrometer screw mech 
anism. See also Fig. 8. The outer end of this 
projection has an enlarged mouth, at the bot 
tom of which is the cone shape seat 11, the 
taper of which seat conforms to the cone shape 
ends 12 of the micrometer nut 13. See also 
Fig. 6. This nut 13 has the longitudinal open 
ing 14 cut through one side thereof. The en 
larged mouth of the projection 10 is threaded 
a portion of its depth to admit the threaded 
sleeve 15, whose taper or cone-shape mouth 
engages with the outer cone shape end of the 
nut 13, so that, by reason of the cone shape 
ends of this split nut, and the cone shape seat 
of the projection 10, combined with the ad 
justable feature of the cone sleeve 15, the nut 
is compressed or closed down upon the screw, 
whenever it becomes necessary to take up 
Wear therein. The outer surface of the nut 
13, is smooth, and is prevented from rotating 
with the screw 8 by means of the pin 16,-see 
Fig. 8-engaging partly-see also Fig. 6 
With the longitudinal groove 17 of the said nut, 
and a corresponding groove-not shown-in 
the walls of the shell projection 10. The 
short threaded shell 18 in the front face of the 
upright, -Fig. 1-operates as a bearing or 
support for the smooth cylindrical portion of 
the end 8 of the micrometer screw. The split 
taper pin 19-see also Figs. 7 and 2-is ar. 
ranged to pass through the hole 20,-see dot 
ted position of said upright in Fig. 1-and 
the straight sides 21 of the upright 2 and also 
through the holes 22 of the beam 1. 
Referring to Fig. 2, the frame of the upright 
which is mounted upon the beam, whose sides 
as before mentioned are indicated by the ref 
erence figures 21, is preferably forked or in 
other words constructed with its lower portion 
open, into which open end is riveted the block 
23. Interposed between the upper surface 
See Fig. 1-of this blocking and the under 
surface of the beam 1 is the key 24, whose 
downward projecting ends 25 overhang the 
ends of the block before mentioned, and, by so 
doing, said key is maintained in place. The 
threaded end of the tightening screw 26, which 
screw passes through a threaded hole in the 
block 23, engages with said key 24, and by so 
doing, the upright 2 is firmly clamped to the 
beam. The beam shown in Figs. 1 and 2 be 
ing square, and the base of the upright con 
structed to conform there with, will insure the 
upright 2 maintaining a perpendicular posi 
tion. In the construction shown in Figs. 3,4 
and 5, the beam is round, and it will therefore 
require a special arrangement for that pur 
pose, which consists of the longitudinal slot 
27 in the lower side of said beam to receive 
the key 24. The arrangement of this key with 
the block 23 is the same as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2, with this exception, that in the upper 
end of the block 23,-see also Fig. 9-is the slot 
28, which registers with the slot in the beam, 
and into both of which slots the key opera 
tively fits. When, therefore, the grip or press 
ure of the screw 26 is released from the key 
24, said key will drop,-see Fig. 4-sufficiently 
to release the upright, and allow it to be moved . 
along the beam, and yet always maintain its 
influence over the same in keeping it plumb. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
When the upright 2 is brought into any one 
of the five positions shown, the arm or contact 
piece is turned, and its outer face brought to 
bear against the end 4 of the required stop of 
the beam. The pin 19 is passed through the 
hole 20 in the upright and through one of the 
holes 22 of the beam with which said hole will 
approximately register. As there is more or 
less vertical play in the upright when the 
screw 26 is loosened, there is a tendency, owing 
to the inclined faces of the stop, and contact 
piece 5, Fig. 3, for the said contact piece to be 
located too high, So that the tightening screw 
26 would not pull it down. To counteract this, 
I employ the split screw 19 which, by reason 
of its springy nature and the fact that the 
holes in the bea in and upright are slightly 
mismatched, will have a tendency to draw the 
upright slightly to the left, so that, when the 
screw 26 is tightened, the stop of the beam and 
the contact piece of the upright will be 
brought into proper engagement with each 
other by reason of the controlling influence. 
of the two screws 19 and 26. If a pin having 
a solid body were used instead of the split pin 
above mentioned, the tendency would be 
rather to maintain...the upright in its slightly 
elevated position, an error which the split 
pin effectually corrects. It may be advis 
able as the contact arm 5 and the stops 4 
are hardened, to counteract any tendency to 
wear, or for the arm 5 to make any impres 
sion on the face of the boss or projection 29 
of the upright 2, to insert in such projection 
the hardened pin 30. When the micrometer 
screw is at zero, and the upright 2 in the first 
position, viz., against the first stop to the 
right of the fixed upright 3, the end of the 
measuring point 8 will abut the anvil 31 of 
the latter and each of the said stops 22 may 
95 
IC O 
fo5 
II d 
I I5 
H 2 ? 
I 25 
25 
35 
45 
?? 
65 
 
541,916 
3 
55 
2. The combination in a micrometer gage 
with the beam carrying the fixed and movable 
gaging heads or uprights having the gaging 
points, of a series of angularly arranged 
threaded holes through said beam, a series of 
threaded pins adjustably engaging there with, 
one end of each of said pins hardened and 
arranged to be located near the surface of 
the beam, means provided on the movable up 
right to readily engage with said stops or be 
disengaged therefrom, so that, by means of 
the adjustable feature of the said stops the 
movable upright can be accurately located 
with respect to its position on the beam and 
the stationary upright. 
3. A micrometer gage comprising in Com 
bination, a beam having mounted thereon a 
fixed and a movable upright each carrying 
gaging points, adjustable stops for locating the 
movable upright in different positions on said 
beam and angularly arranged therein, means 
on such upright for engaging such stops, 
transverse holes through said beam, a hole 
through the said movable upright coinciding 
with the holes of the beam, a split pin ar 
ranged to pass through the same and locate 
said movable upright firmly against orie of 
the before mentioned adjustable stops and 
the beam, combined with a tightening screw 
as shown. 
4. A micrometer gage comprising in com 
bination, a fixed standard a measuring Screw 
supported therein, a threaded nut mounted 
on said screw and having a longitudinal open 
ing in one side thereof, and beveled ends, a 
stationary beveled supporting seat in the said 
standard for one of such ends, an exteriorly 
threaded thimble surrounding said measur 
ing screw and adjustably engaging with a 
threaded portion of the said standard, said 
thimble having also a beveled mouth to en 
gage the outer beveled end of the before men 
tioned nut, so that, by this combined arrange 
ment of the beveled ends of the nut, longi 
tudinal opening; fixed beveled seat; and ad 
justable thimble the nut is closed upon the 
screw or released therefrom by the slightest 
movement of the said thimble, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof. I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES F. BOWMAN. 
Witnesses: 
IRVING C. WILCOX, 
IDA Tu. TLILEWIELLYN. 
95 
O 
be arranged at such a distance from each 
other that will represent the full travel of the 
micrometer screw, so that work of different 
lengths, proportionate to the distance any 
one of these stops is placed from the anvil 31 
plus the travel of the micrometer screw, can 
be measured. 
From the foregoing description of my im 
proved beam, it will readily be seen that 
there is a decided advantage to be derived in 
the use of permanent fixed stops or distance 
points, both to the maker and user, that when 
detachable pieces are inserted between the 
uprights to establish the different distances 
required. To the maker of the instrument a 
slight variation between the holes formed in 
the beam for the several stops, can be recti 
fied by means of the adjustable feature of 
Such stops, which may also be employed to ad 
vantage by the user to compensate for wear. 
I do not wish to be confined to the exact 
arrangement shown on the movable upright 
for bringing it in contact with the stops of 
the beam, as a vertically operating sliding 
piece on such upright would answer equally as 
well. The most important feature of my de 
vice consists in locating certain well defined 
stops or points of distance, established from 
the anvil of the fixed upright upon the beam, 
so that the movable upright can be brought 
into engagement with any one of said points, 
and when disengaged therefrom, said up 
right may be moved along said beam un 
obstructed by said points or stops and there 
by dispense with the use of the insertible 
distance pieces heretofore employed. There 
fore I do not wish to be confined strictly to 
the arrangement or construction of these 
stops but hold myself at liberty to place them 
at right angles to the beam or inclined there 
to, as shown, or to make them of any shape 
best calculated to produce the best results. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination in a micrometer gage 
with the beam carrying the gaging heads or 
uprights, one of which is fixed and the other 
movable thereon, of a series of adjustable 
locating stops on said beam for the location 
of the movable upright at certain predeter 
mined distances from the fixed upright, means 
on said movable upright to engage with said 
Stops. 
I D 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542016.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 542,016, 
0, C, HALL. 
MILL FOR ROLLING METAL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 2, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
m 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 2, 1895. 
O. C. HALL. 
- 
MILL FOR ROLLING METAL, 
- 
No. 542,016. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ORLANDO CLIFFORD HALL OF AUBURN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO 
CHARLES L. SHIELDON, OF SAME PLACE. 
MILL FOR ROLLING METAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,016, dated July 2, 1895. 
Application filed June 13, 1892, Serial No. 436,556, (No model.) 
55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ORLANDO CLIFFORD 
HALL, a citizen of the United States, and a 
resident of Auburn, Cayuga county, New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Mills for Rolling Metals, of 
which the following is a specification. 
In the manufacture of that class of axles 
known as fantail-axles-that is, the beds of 
which are spread and reduced in thickness at 
the center, as also in the manufacture of cer 
tain other forms of axles and other articles 
it is common to use mills having two parallel 
rollers with dies formed upon or attached to 
them, said rollers being rotated or rocked, so 
as to secure the requisite movement for the 
passage of the bar that is formed into the 
axle or blank. 
Heretofore in the manufacture of axles it 
has been common to provide the dies with 
grooves which practically conform to the 
shape of the part of the bar which is oper 
ated upon, which necessitates the use of ex 
pensive appliances, the dies themselves cost 
ing a great deal, requiring nice fitting and 
adjustment and being liable to break and be 
ing expensive to repair. 
The object of my invention is to avoid the 
expense of dies corresponding in shape to the 
article to be rolled and to facilitate the op 
erations of the mill and improve its construc 
tion, to which end I construct both the dies 
and the mill as set forth fully hereinafter and 
as illustrated in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a central elevation of a rolling 
mill having my improvements. Fig. 2 is a 
side view of the rolls and dies, showing them 
in a different position from that shown in 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an edge view of the parts 
shown in Fig. 2; and Fig. 4 is a perspective 
view of a fantail-axle, such as can be rolled 
in the said mill. Figs. 5 and 6 are views 
illustrating the invention in connection with 
revolving rolls. 
The frame and housing A of the mill may 
be of any suitable construction, and in this 
instance are combined with a bed B, which 
constitutes bearings for two shafts 12, pro 
vided with gear - wheels 34, driven in any 
suitable manner. 
In the bearings in the housing fit the axles 
or journals of two rolls B C, each of which 
carries the dies that co-operate with those of 
the other roll. 
The dies may be secured to the rolls or they 
may be formed of the same, as illustrated in 
the drawings, in which each roll has eccentric 
die-faces 78, the center ac of the die-face 7 
being upon one side of the center of the roll 
and the center y of the die-face 8 upon the 
opposite side of the center of the roll. 
The form or curvature of the die-faces 7 is 
such that when the centers of said pair of said 
faces are opposite each other in the vertical 
plane of the axis of the rolls, as shown in Fig. 
2, the space or pass between will be greater 
in height than when the other portions of the 
faces are brought opposite each other, so that 
the swinging or turning of the rolls in either 
direction will bring the faces 7 7 closer to 
gether. As a result of this construction, if a. 
blank of the form illustrated in dotted lines, 
Fig. 2, is introduced sidewise between the 
the said dies and in contact there with about 
midway of its center, and if the rolls are then 
rocked in either direction, the result will be 
to roll down one end of the bar, elongating it 
and reducing it in height, as illustrated in 
full lines, Fig. 2. After one end is thus 
rolled down the blank is reversed and the 
other end is rolled down in like manner. 
Thus the requisite taper is imparted to the bar 
or blank in one direction. It is now neces. 
sary to taper the blank from the end toward 
the center, so that it will be thickest in the 
other direction at the ends and thinner to 
ward the center. For this reason the pair of 
die-faces 8 are closer together when their cen 
ters are on said plane of the axes of their rolls 
and the rolls are in the position shown in Fig. 
2 than when said rolls are in any other posi 
tion. It is therefore necessary, in order to ta 
per the bar in the opposite direction, to turn 
the rolls to the position shown in Fig. 1, when 
the die-faces will be farther apart than when 
the said rolls are in any other position, and 
then one end of the bar, as shown in full lines, 
is introduced into the pass between the said 
faces and the rolls are rocked in the direction 
of the arrow, Fig. 1, when the bar will be 
somewhat elongated and gradually tapered 
90 
95 
CO 
O 
I5 
2O 
25 
3o 
35 
4o 
45 
So 
542,016 
O 
or reduced in thickness from the end toward 
the center, as shown in dotted lines, Fig. 1, 
after which the bar is removed and reversed 
and the opposite end operated upon in the 
5 same manner, when the proper shape will be 
imparted to the same, the result of the oper 
ation between the two dies imparting to the 
bar the fan-shaped form illustrated in per 
spective in Fig. 4. 
It will be evident that by properly forming 
the die-faces the bar may be rolled to other 
shapes than that illustrated, but that in any 
case the pass of each die is open at the side 
and the working face extends to said side, so 
that the bar or blank can be introduced from 
one side to enter said pass, and that then, by 
the rotation or rocking of the roll, the requi 
site effect is produced without the necessity 
of making the passes conform to the exact 
shape of the article to be rolled. 
Any desired means may be empleyed for 
imparting the movement to the rolls. 
It will be evident that each roll or die may 
have any desired number of die-faces of dif 
ferent degrees of eccentricity and different 
shapes, according to the shape and character 
of the article to be formed. Thus Figs. 5 and 
6 illustrate rolls in which the face 7 is at one 
side of each roll and the face 8 at the other, 
the rolls being revolved and the action being 
essentially the same as before. 
Instead of rolling first one half and then 
the other, the whole length of the bar may be 
30 
25 
Witnesses: 
R. R. KEELER, 
CHAS. F. STUPP. 
35 
rolled first on one edge and then on the other, 
or the blank may be inserted between the 
rolls when the sides 7 7 are opposite, as in 
Fig. 5. One half-turn of the rolls shapes the 
sides of the blank to the form shown at X. 
The blank is then pulled quickly back in the 
direction of the arrow and turned one-quar 
ter over and passed between the faces 8 8 
when farther separated and then rolled to the 
form shown of Y, Fig. 6. 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
struction and arrangements of parts described 
and shown, I claim 
In a mill for rolling bars that are spread or 
widened in one direction and reduced in 
thickness in the other direction toward the 
center, the combination of the two roll dies 
each having two eccentric die faces, as de 
scribed, one pair of die faces formed to ap 
proach as the centers thereof are brought to 
the vertical plane of the axis of the rolls, and 
the other pair being formed to approach as 
their centers are carried to either side from 
said plane, said dies being open at and ex 
tending to the side of the roll for the intro 
duction of the bar or blank, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
ORLANDO CLIFFORD HALL. 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542119.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 542,119, 
B. J. SYKES, 
NECK YOKE ATTACHMENT, 
Patented July 2, 1895. 
/ 
 
WTWESSES: 
&f Scz, 
G4-z/6 
-r:ys. 
Nasi 
i 
/WWENTOR 
zevarez Viveco 
By 77teeleyQR, 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- BENJAMIN J. SYKES, OF TROUTVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
NECKYOKE ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,119, dated July 2, 1895. 
Application filed Februaryll 1895. Serial No. 537,926. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom, it may concern." 
Beit known that I, BENJAMIN J. SYKES, of 
Troutville, in the county of Clearfield and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Neck-Yoke At 
tachments, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
neck-yoke attachment for double teams which 
shall always hold the neck-yoke in proper re 
lation to the neck of the team. 
In the ordinary neck-yoke a strap passes 
from the neck-yoke to the collar, and serves 
to hold the pole; but in going downhill such 
single connection allows the neck-yoke to ride 
up under the horse's nose, much to the incon 
venience of the team, throwing the collar up 
and making it difficult for the animals to hold 
back the vehicle. My invention is designed 
to provide an attachment which will obviate 
this difficulty by steadily holding the neck 
yoke and pole to the proper position; and to 
that end it consists in the special combina 
tion and arrangement of straps, as will be here 
inafter fully described. 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective, and Fig. 
2 is a side view of the same applied to a horse. 
In the drawings, Erepresents the neck-yoke, 
and A B C represent the neck-yoke attach 
ment. A is the ordinary neck-yoke holdback 
strap, which has a loop a? at its lower end 
that encircles the neck-yoke, and another loop 
a at its upper end that encircles the lower 
bend of the collar, a buckle being employed 
in this loop to permit it to be opened and 
closed or adjusted as to length. 
B is a horizontal strap whose rear end b 
passes between the horses' legs and is formed 
with a loop having a buckle and adjustable 
end, through which loop is passed the belly 
band of the harness. The front end of this 
strap is also provided with a loop b', which 
encircles the neck-yoke, and is also provided 
with a buckle and adjustable end. 
C is a third strap occupying a triangular 
relation to the straps A and B. This strap C 
has its lower end fastened to the belly-band 
strap B, about midway its length, by a metal 
ring or keeper c', or by stitching or otherwise. 
This strap has at its upper end a loop c, with 
buckle and adjustable end, which loop is de 
signed to encompass the lower bend of the 
collar. This upper end of strap C may, how 
ever, be buckled or otherwise secured di 
rectly to the strap A without passing around 
the collar, if desired. 
D is a tongue, made of leather or any other 
This tongue is perma 
suitable material. 
nently secured by nails, screws, or otherwise 
to the neck-yoke at the inner end, and its 
outer end is provided with a slot d, through 
which the lower end of strap A is passed be 
fore being looped over the end of the neck 
yoke. This slotted tongue thus holds the 
the strap on the neck-yoke, so that it cannot 
accidentally slip over the end of the same. 
The end of the neck-yoke is provided with 
two recessed seats e e', or one elongated seat 
long enough to receive side by side both the 
loop b' of strap B and loop a? of strap A, 
and in putting these loops around the neck 
yoke the loop b' of strap B is first slipped 
over the end of the neck-yoke, then loop a? of 
strap A is passed through the slotted tongue 
D and afterward slipped over the end of the 
neck-yoke outside of the loop b. The parts 
are now all firmly and securely connected, for 
strap. A locks strap B on the neck-yoke and 
slotted tongue D locks strap A on the neck 
yoke, so that none of them can be acciden 
tally detached. 
With the attachment as thus described the 
strap A performs its ordinary function of pull 
ing back on the neck-yoke. .Strap B co-op 
erates with it to also aid in pulling back, but 
prevents the neck-yoke and pole from rising 
in going downhill, while strap C serves to 
hold strap B up and in a horizontal position, 
so that when the belly-band is removed from 
loop b and the neck-yoke from loops a? and 
b' the whole attachment will still be sus 
pended by the collar, and will not drop down 
under the horses feet. 
If desired, the two straps A and C may be 
permanently connected together at their up 
per ends and the two straps A and B may 
also be permanently connected at their front 
ends, in which case there would be but a 
single loop at the top of the triangle and a 
single loop at the front lower end of the tri 
angle. 
I am aware that it is not new to provide a 
whiffletree with a slotted tongue through 
which a trace is passed before being hooked 
. 
. 
9o 
95 
CO 
O 
E5 
2C 
25 
3O 
35 
4.O 
45 
 
542,119 
belly band strap having loops at both ends 
and extending from the neck yoke to the belly 
band and embracing the same; and the third 
strap being permanently attached to and ex 
tending from an intermediate position on the 
belly band strap to the upper end of the hold 
back strap and having a loop at its upper end 
for embracing the collar substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
3. The combination with the neck yoke; of 
a slotted tongue D attached to the neck yoke, 
a belly band strap B having a loop at its for 
ward endencircling the neck yoke, and a hold 
back strap A extending through the slot of 
the tongue D and encircling the neck yoke 
outside of the loop of the belly band strap 
substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
BENJAMIN J. SYKES. 
35 
Witnesses: 
EDW. W. BYRN, 
SOLON C. KEMON. 
O 
Over the end of the whiffletree, and I make 
no claim to such construction broadly. 
It will be understood that my invention is 
equally as well adapted to use in connection 
With a breast-strap as it is for use with a col 
lar, as shown. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A neckyoke attachment comprising three 
straps; a hold-back strap extending from the 
Collar to the neck yoke, another strap extend 
ing from the neck yoke to the belly band, and 
the third extending from the intermediate po 
Sition on the belly band strap to the upper 
end of the hold-back strap, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
2. A neck-yoke attachment, consisting of 
three triangularly arranged straps, one being 
a hold-back strap with loops at both ends and 
extending from the collar to the neck yoke 
and embracing the same; another being a 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542219.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 542,219, 
/7 
J. J. K. FITZPATRICK. 
TUBE CUTTER, 
Patented July 2, 1895. 
a 
A3E H 
Wis 
 
 
 
as se 
SSW WYao a 
33-WE 33 
 
  
  
EV 
lIH 
 
 
AHH f 
H 
NIH 
N 
U 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
H 
 
% 
 
 
74, 
 
2 
l 
 
 
3 %IH s 
iirgsses 
e334a/; 
Iojepfar 
e-167/7, e7.17, ZZZzZazz2:26.7, 
3y ZzscAlrpys, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN JAMES KELSOE FITZPATRICK, OF KEMP, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR TO HERMAN 
STRAUSS, OF SAME PLACE. 
TUBE-C UTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,219, dated July 2, 1895. 
Application filed June 19, 1894, serial No. 515,078, (No model.) 
25 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN JAMES KELSOE 
EITZPATRICK, a citizen of the United States, 
residing at Kemp, in the county of Kaufman 
5 and State of Texas, have invented a new and 
useful Tube-Cutter, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to tube-cutters; and it 
has for its object to provide a simple, inex 
Io pensive, and efficient apparatus for use in 
Cutting boiler flues or tubes to facilitate the 
operation of removing and replacing such 
tubing. 
It is my object, furthermore, to provide 
I5 means for cutting the tubes, whereby the 
spreading of the latter is avoided, to enable 
the tubes to be withdrawn through the holes 
in the boiler-sheet after the removal of the 
detached end from such hole. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
vide a tool of compact construction, which 
may be operated in a limited space, and which 
will be capable of adjustment to fit various 
sizes of tubes. 
Further objects and advantages of my in 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
a tube-cutter embodying my invention ap 
plied in the operative position to a tube. 
Fig. 2 is a central sectional view of the cutter. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse section on line 33 of . 
35 Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a similar view on line 44 of 
Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is an enlarged vertical section 
to show retracting-spring. Fig. 6 is a trans 
verse section on the line 6 6 of Fig. 2, show 
ing the clutch mechanism. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the 
drawings. 
1 designates a hollow or tubular stock, com 
prising the body portion of my improved 
45 tube-cutter, and to this stock is removably 
and slidably fitted a bushing 2, shouldered, 
as at 3, to fit in the end of the boiler-tube. A 
portion of a tube is shown at 4 in Fig.1. This 
bushing is interiorly shouldered, as at 5, to 
So engage a corresponding shoulder 6 upon the 
exterior surface of the stock to limit the inde 
pendent movement of these parts in operation. 
7 represents a central spindle fitted rotaf 
ably and slidably in the bore of the hollow 
stock, and provided at its inner end with a 55 
reduced threaded portion or stem 8, which is 
arranged to engage the hollow or recessed 
feed-nut 9, secured to the extremity of the 
stock. The portion of the spindle adjacent 
to the threaded portion 8 is tapered or coni- 6d 
cal, as shown at 10, to engage the inner ends 
or feet 11 of the cutters or knives 12, which 
are arranged radially in suitable guides 13 in 
the stock and are adapted to project at their 
outer or sharpened ends beyond the outer 65 
surface of the stock to engage the inner surface 
of a boiler-tube. 
The stock being of less diameter than the 
tube, it is necessary to provide means for pre 
venting vibration of the inner end thereof 
during operation and at the same time 
strengthen the outer portions of the cutters 
or knives which are beyond the support of 
the guides 13, and hence to the outer surface 
of the stock, above the lower plane of the cut 
ters, is keyed a seating-ring 14, provided in 
its lower side with radial rest 15, registering 
with the guides 13, and below the plane of the 
cutters is arranged a collar 16, secured to the 
seating-ring by means of screws 17, bearing 
against the under surface of the cutters and 
of equal diameter with the reduced portion 
of the bushing 2, to fit snugly in the bore of 
the boiler-tube. The feet 11 of the cutters 
are inclined inwardly or toward the axis of 
the stock to avoid unnecessary friction with 
the tapered portion of the spindle, and re 
traction-springs 18 bear at their inner ends 
against said feet and at their outer ends 
against the inner surface of the collar 16 to 
automatically retract the cutters when the ta 
pered portion of the spindle is disengaged 
therefrom. 
Secured to the outer extremity of the spin 
dle is a handle 19, and connected to the ad- 95 
jacent portion of the stock is an operating-le 
ver 20, by means of a clutch mechanism 21. 
This clutch may be of any ordinary or well 
known construction, comprising, for instance, 
a collar 22, a ring 23, carrying pawls to engage Ioo 
75 
542,219 
... 
O 
a ratchet 23, a washer 24, and a nut 25, the 
lever 20 being secured to said ring 23. This 
feature forms no part of my invention. 
The operation of the improved cutting ap 
pliance will be readily understood from the 
foregoing description, and it is obvious that 
by substituting bushings 2 and collars 16 of 
different sizes tubes of various sizes may be 
cut with the same tool. 
If preferred, washers or bushing-rings of the 
ordinary and well-known construction may 
be used to adjust the sizes of the bushing and 
collar to fit different tubes. 
Spreading or expanding of the tube is 
avoided by the use of flat plate-cutters or 
knives, sharpened to an edge and inclined or 
tapered in plan, as shown in Fig. 4, whereby 
the points of the cutters first engage the sur 
face of the tube. 
Various changes in the form, proportion 
and minor details of construction may be re, 
sorted to without departing from the spirit or 
sacrificing any of the advantages of my in 
vention. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claima 
1. The combination with a hollow stock pro 
vided with guides, and adapted to be rotated, 
of cutters or knives fitted in said guides and 
provided at their inner ends with inclined 
feet, a seating ring fitted exteriorly upon the 
stock and provided with radial seats, a collar 
secured to the seating ring to close the lower 
sides of the rests, coiled springs arranged in 
transwere perforations of the stock and bear 
ing at their outer ends against the inner sur 
face of said collar and their inner ends against 
25 
35 
 
45 
50 
55 
the feet of the cutters, a spindle fitted in the 
bore of the stock and having a tapered por 
tion to engage the feet of the cutters, and 
means for feeding the spindle axially in the 
stock, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination with a hollow-stock 
adapted to be rotated, of a shouldered bush 
ing adjustably mounted upon the stock and 
having a reduced portion to fit within the end 
of a boiler tube, radially slidable cutters 
mounted in guides near one end of the stock 
and provided at their inner ends, within the 
bore of the stock, with inclined feet 11, a seat 
ing ring fitted exteriorly upon the stock and 
keyed thereto, the same being provided with 
radial rests registering with the guides in the 
stock, a collar secured to the seating ring and 
closing said rests therein, a feed-nut secured 
to the inner end of the stock, a spindle fitted 
in the bore of the stock, having a tapered por 
tion to engage the feet of the cutters and termi 
nating in a threaded portion to engage said 
feed nut, and retraction-springs arranged in 
perforations in the stock and bearing against 
the feet of the cutters to return the same 
when the tapered portion of the spindle is 
disengaged therefrom, the outer ends of the 
perforations in which the springs are seated 
being covered and closed by said bushing, 
substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN JAMES KELSOE FIT/PATRICK, 
Witnesses: 
FRANK KAVANAUGH, 
II. C. STOUT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542319.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 542,319, 
W., I, TWOMBLY, 
MOTOR FOR WEHICLES, 
Patented July 9, 1895. 
  
-6 
N 
NS 
%.7%ly 6%-ex 
 
  /22- F at-4, r 
Mal-C4 44-9w 
42 
Fig. 3. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLARD I. TWOMBLY, OF PORTILAND, MAINE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
BENJAMIN. S. LOWELL OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
MotoR FOR VEHICLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,819, dated July 9, 1895. 
Application filed August 31, 1894, Serial No. 521,793, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, WILLARD I. TwoMBLY, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Portland, in the county of Cumber 
5 land and State of Maine, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Motors 
for Vehicles, &c.; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
o others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
means of propulsion for vehicles, and more 
particularly for bicycles; but it is applicable 
5 to other road-machines, to vessels, and to sta 
tionary engines. 
It consists in the application of ether or 
other volatile substance as a motive force in 
the manner hereinafter described. 
o It further consists in the combination, with 
a vehicle, of an engine for propelling it, said 
engine being adapted to be driven by ether 
l, or other volatile substance. 
It further consists in mechanism for auto 
25 matically regulating the supply of fuel for 
heating the boiler. 
It further consists in certain details of con 
struction, which will be hereinafter more fully 
3o The drawings show my invention as applied 
to a bicycle. 
In Said drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion, with parts broken out, of the right side 
of a bicycle embodying my improvement. 
35 Fig. 2 is a side elevation, with parts broken 
out, of the left side of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
detail showing the construction of the stuff 
, ing-box of the engine, and Fig. 4 is a sec 
tional detail showing air-vent and supply 
described. 
a 
w 
chests g of engines h, mounted on the rear 
part of the frame, said case dextending back 
ward and covering the top of the engines. 
The engines, one each side of the rear wheel, 55 
have pistons and a cut-off valvei. The pis 
tons are connected to cranks k on the axle by 
connecting-rods l, and the cut-off valves are 
connected to said cranks by connecting-rods 
m. The exhaust from the engines may be 6o 
through pipe in and thence into the hollow 
frameo on the right side at the top. 
At the front of the frame near the forward 
fork is arranged a condenser composed of a 
jacket p in which is a coil of pipe q opening 65 
into the frame O and terminating at the bot 
tom on the right-hand side in the hollow por 
tion of the frame '. 
Between the frames beneath the condenser 
is a tank s, which contains the fuel, which 7o 
may be naphtha, gasoline, or other combusti 
ble volatile substance, said tank being con 
tinuous with the condenser-jacket. Leading 
from said tank to a point beneath the coil of 
pipe in the boiler is a burner t, which may 75 
terminate over an orifice u in the conduit v, 
and through which a blast of air is forced by 
means of an air-pump U, operated by connec 
tion with the crank k on the left side, the 
hollow frame on the left side serving as a 8o 
conduit for said blast. Said air-pump has a 
supply-valve at and a valve y opening into 
the hollow frame when the air-pump is in op 
eration. Leading out of the hollow frame 
on the lower left-hand side is a nipple 2, and 85 
leading from the fuel-tank and terminating 
over the orifice in said nipple is an atomizer 
pipe a'. The pump fills the hollow frame 
with compressed air, thus causing a spray of 
gasoline or other fluid from the fuel-tank to 9o 
be thrown against the condenser-coil, which, 
after condensing, falls back into the tank. In 
the top of the condenser-jacket is a supply 
opening b, closed by a stopper c', having a 
small air-vent d'. Attached to the bottom of 95 
the frame on the right side is a force-pump e', 
having a plunger f' and connecting-rod g, 
connected to and operated by connection with 
crank k on the right-hand side. Said pump 
has a valve opening into the coil in the boiler Ico 
and also into the hollow lower portion of the 
frame on the right side. 
4o opening in the condenser-case. 
Same letters refer to like parts. 
In Said drawings, a represents the wheels 
of a bicycle, b the forward fork, and c the 
handles to said fork, said fork being pivoted 
45 in the front of the frame. The frame is 
double and made of the usual hollow tubing 
arranged in any convenient manner. Sup 
ported by the frame is a boiler composed of a 
suitable case d, having within a coil of pipe 
5o e, terminating at the top in a steam-chest f, 
which is in communication with the steam 
 
2 
542,319 
75 
5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 p. 
Inasmuch as the motive power must be pro 
duced by a volatile substance, it becomes of 
the utmost importance to have a nicely-ad 
justed and automatically-operated gage to 
regulate the pressure in the boiler or steam 
chest. For this purpose I place a cylinder h. 
in a convenient position. In said cylinder is 
a piston i', controlled in one direction by a 
spring i' and connected to and operating a 
valve lc in the conduit, which furnishes fuel 
to the burner by a suitable connecting-rod 
l'. A pipe m', open to the steam-chest in the 
boiler, leads into the cylinder above the pis 
ton, and, as the pressure in the steam-chest 
increases or diminishes, it operates the piston 
in the gage and opens or closes the valve in 
the fuel-supply conduit more or less and 
lessens or increases the supply of fuel, thus 
keeping the pressure at any desired degree. 
To shut off completely the supply of fuel from 
the burner, a valve n' is inserted in the sup 
ply-conduit. 
The throttle-valve o' inserted in the steam 
pipe leading from the steam-chest of the 
boiler to the steam-chest of the engines is op 
erated by a series of levers p', the last of 
which is pivotally attached to the handle on 
the right side. 
Inasmuch as the motive fluid is exceedingly 
volatile and is to be used over and over again, 
it is important to prevent waste. 
The stuffing-boxes for the pistons are con 
structed, as seen in Fig. 3, with a packing 
which consists of two sections of waste v', 
with an intermediate section v' of glycerine 
or other similar fluid. Pivotally attached to 
the handle on the left side is a brake-lever 
q, the lower section passing through a sleeve 
r' and terminating in a brake-shoes', adapted 
to press upon the rim of the forward wheel. 
Pivotally connected to the frame at or near 
the bottom is a brake levert to be operated 
by the fork, one end being linked to a brake 
shoe pivoted to the frame and adapted to be 
ressed against the forward wheel by saidle 
ver. Said shoe is held away from the wheel 
normally by a spring u' located behind the 
The operation of my improved vehicle is as 
follows: The coil-pipe forming the boiler is 
filled with ether through a supply-opening in 
the top thereof. The fuel-tank is filled with 
naphtha, gasoline, or other combustible and 
volatile material. The supply-valve in the 
bottom of the fuel-tank is opened and the jet 
beneath the boiler is ignited. As soon as the 
ether becomes heated, as it does at a very low 
temperature, it becomes converted into vapor, 
passes from the steam-chest to the engine, 
setting in operation the piston, and rotating 
the wheels of the vehicle. At the same time 
it sets in operation the air-pump and the force 
pump. The ether-vapor passes from the 
steam-chest through the exhaust to the con 
denser-coil at the front of the machine and 
is there condensed by a spray of some vola 
tile substance thrown upon it by the atom 
lever. 
-- 
izer, thence passes down through the hollow 
frame on the lower right side to a point at or 
near the bottom of the boiler, whence it is 
taken up into the force-pump and forced 
again into the boiler. The air-pump contin 
ually taking up air forces if in a blast through 
the orifice beneath the end of the sprayer, 
and thus forces a spray of some volatile sub 
stance from the fuel-tank through the pipe 
upon the condenser-coils. This condenses 
the ether-vapor much more rapidly than it 
otherwise would. The blood or case surround 
ing the boiler, steam chest, and engines tends 
to retain the heat and thus keep the engine 
and boiler hot. The temperature can be 
regulated automatically by the gage before 
described, the plunger being connected with 
the valve which regulates the supply of fuel 
to the burner. The pressure on said plunger 
operates to close said valve, while the spring 
beneath the piston tends to force the plunger 
upward and open the valve. The operation 
of the engine and cut-off is substantially the 
same as in ordinary engines. 
Instead of the frame being hollow and serv 
ing as a conduit for the exhaust from the en 
gine to the condenser and from the condensel 
to the boiler, a separate pipe may be used. 
A separate pipe may also be used for the con 
duit for the air-blasts. It is, however, very 
convenient to use the frame for this purpose, 
and the cost, bulk, and weight are lessened 
thereby. 
The advantages of this machine are numer 
ous and substantial. It can be easily and 
readily set in motion. Its speed can be regul 
lated to a nicety. The pressure on the en 
gine can be regulated automatically. The 
motive fluid can be used repeatedly, thus ren 
dering it unnecessary to carry a large weight. 
The same fluid used for heating the boiler can 
be used as a spray in the operation of con 
densation. A vehicle thus constructed is 
specially adapted for long journeys on the 
public highways, and inasmuch as the rider 
has only to guide the machine and regulate 
the valves he can carry a considerable weight. 
Having thus described my invention and its 
use, I claim 
1. A motor comprising a boiler, engine, tank 
adapted to contain a combustible volatile fluid 
and condenser, a pump mechanism operated 
by said engine and adapted to re-convey the 
motive fluid after condensation into the boiler, 
and an air pump operated by said engine and 
adapted to force a spray of the volatile fluid 
upon the condenser, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
2. In a vehicle, a motor comprising an en 
gine, boiler and condenser, an exhaust pipe 
leading from the engine to the condenser, a 
fuel tank supported in said vehicle, a force 
pump operated by said engine and adapted 
to re-convey the motive fluid after condensa 
tion to the boiler, a burner located beneath 
said boiler and receiving its fuel supply from 
said fuel tank, an atomizer consisting of a 
95 
IO 
II 
2 
I 2. 
65 
 
/ 
542,319 
3 
denser to the boiler and on the other side serv 
ing as a conduit for an air blast to feed air 
to the burner and to the atomizer, whereby a 
spray of volatile fluid is thrown upon the con 
denser, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
6. In a vehicle, the combination with an en 
gine, boiler and condenser mounted on said 
vehicle, a fuel tank mounted in said vehicle 
and formed continuous with the condenser 
case, an atomizer leading from said fuel tank 
to a point beneath the condenser coil, and 
means for automatically forcing a blast of air 
across the orifice of the atomizer, and upon 
the condenser, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
7. In a vehicle, the combination with a suit 
able frame and wheels, of an engine, boiler 
and condenser mounted on said frame, a 
burner adapted to supply heat to said boiler 
and a continuous jacket surrounding said 
boiler and engine, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLARD I. TWOMBLY. 
Witnesses: 
ELGIN C. VERRILL, 
NATHAN CLIFFORD. 
35 
40 
45 
50 
pipe leading from the fuel tank and terminat 
ing beneath the condenser, and an air pump 
adapted to force a spray of the fuel from the 
atomizer upon the condenser, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. In a vehicle, a double frame made hollow, 
a boiler, engine and condenser mounted on 
said frame, an exhaust pipe leading from the 
engine into said frame and thence through 
said frame to the condenser, a conduit leading 
from said condenser to the boiler forward by 
the lower part of said hollow frame, and a 
force pump adapted to take up the motive 
fluid from said conduit and re-convey it to the 
boiler, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
4. In a vehicle, the combination with wheels 
and a suitable frame, of an engine, boiler and 
condenser mounted upon said frame, said 
frame being hollow and serving as a conduit 
from the exhaust to the condenser and from 
the condenser to the boiler, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
5. In a vehicle, the combination with wheels 
and a hollow double frame, arranged one on 
each side of said wheels, of a boiler, engine 
and condenser mounted on said frame, the top 
of said hollow frameserving as a conduit from 
the exhaust to the condenser, the bottom on 
one side serving as a conduit from the con 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542420.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 542,420. 
J. W. MORRIS. 
CROSSCUT SAW. 
Patented July 9, 1895. 
 
WITNESSES; 
/NVENTOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. MORRIS, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO 
CHARLES S. BRONSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
CROSSCUT-SAW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,420, dated July 9, 1895. 
Application filed December 18, 1894, Serial No. 532,179, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHNW. MoRRis, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing at Indian 
apolis, in the county of Marion and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Crosscut-Saws, of which 
the following is a specification, 
The object of my present invention is to 
produce a crosscut-saw which will run very 
o steadily in use, and thus obviate the well 
known fault in most saws of this character 
of trembling in the kerf, which manifestly is 
disadvantageous to the operation of the saw. 
. I do this by a certain peculiar arrangement 
5 and formation of the teeth, as will be herein 
after more particularly described and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which are made a part hereof and on which 
similar letters of reference indicate similar 
!o parts, Figure 1 is a side elevation of a cross 
cut-saw with teeth formed and arranged in 
accordance with my invention; Fig. 2, a frag 
mentary view of such a saw on a much larger 
scale, showing substantially the full size of 
5 the teeth as ordinarily constructed; and Figs. 
3 and 4 transverse sectional views on the 
dotted lines 33 and 4 4, respectively, in Fig. 
2, looking in the direction indicated by the 
arrows at the ends of such lines. 
o The saw-blade A is provided with the usual 
handles B, and has formed upon its cutting 
edge the advance or primary cutting-teeth 1, 
the clearing-teeth 2, and the secondary cutting 
and kerf-widening teeth 3. The respective 
5 lengths of these teeth are best shown in Fig. 
2, where dotted lines are arranged intersect 
ing their points, in order to make the varia 
tions in length more clearly apparent upon 
casual inspection. The advance or primary 
o cutting teeth 1 are the longest, the clearing 
teeth 2 come next, while the secondary cut 
ting and kerf-Widening teeth 3 are the short 
est, the difference between the first and sec 
ond and second and third of these said teeth 
5 being about the same; and I have found in 
practice that a variation of one-sixteenth of 
an inch between each set of teeth, making a 
total of one-eighth of an inch between the 
longest and the shortest teeth, is a desirable 
o difference in actual operation. The advance 
or primary cutting-teeth 1 are simply filed 
 
sharp, and are not set 'atall. The clearing 
teeth 2 are of the ordinary form, and also are 
not set. The secondary cutting and kerf 
widening teeth 3 are set somewhat, as shown 
in Figs. 3 and 4. The operation is, in sawing, 
that the advance or primary cutting-teeth 1 
enter about an eighth of an inch into the cut. 
before the kerf-widening teeth begin opera 
tion at all, and these teeth 1 being nothicker 
than the plate from which they are formed 
there is no waste room to permit trembling of 
the saw, and they consequently cut much 
more rapidly and easily than if they were set, 
in proportion to the number of teeth engaged. 
The secondary cutting and kerf-widening 
teeth 3 then come into operation, trimming 
down the sides of the kerf and widening it 
to the necessary width to prevent binding of 
the saw-blade after the kerf has been cut so 
deep as would otherwise result in causing 
such binding, being in this respect more simi 
lar to the operation of all the cutting-teeth 
in ordinary saws. The clearing or raking 
teeth 2 simply clear or rake out the sawdust 
produced by the cutting-teeth 1 and 3 in the 
ordinary and well-known manner. 
I have found by actual experiment and com 
parison with the best saws of other forms of 
which I have any knowledge that my saw 
will cut as rapidly as the best, will run much 
more steadily, and be operated with less 
power, while it will run longer without being 
freshly set, as the teeth 3 wear away less rap 
idly than the teeth 1. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion, what I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
A cross-cut saw having primary cutting 
teeth with little or no set, shorter secondary 
cutting teeth provided with set, and clearing 
teeth of intermediate length and interposed 
between said primary and secondary cutting 
teeth, substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal, at Indianapolis, Indiana, this 
15th day of December, A. D. 1894. 
JOHN W. MORRIS. (L. s. 
Witnesses: . 
CHESTER BRADFORD, 
JAMES A. WALSH. 
55 
o 
75 
9o 
y 95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542521.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
C. F. CODDARD, 
STEERING MECHANISM FOR THRASHING MACHINES, 
 
No. 542,521. 
Patented July 9, 1895, 
(No Model.) 
- 
C. F. GODDAR.D. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
No. 542,521. 
Patented July 9, 1895. 
STEERING MECHANISM FOR THRASHING MACHINES, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES F. GODDARD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
STEERING MECHANISMFOR THRASHING-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,521, dated July 9, 1895. 
Application filed February 3, 1895, Serial No. 538,193, (No model.) 
The hand-lever J is pivoted so as to be ca- 7 Q 
supported upon the upper end of the shaft, 6o 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
D is a sleeve on the shaft E, and it has 
Beit known that I, CHARLES F. GODDARD, downwardly-projecting parts D D, which 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi-form the sides to encircle the upper end of a 55 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi- cap D on the shaft D. At the sides the parts 
5 nois, have invented a certain new and use-DD are perforated to admit the screw-bolts 
ful Improvement, in Steering Mechanism for D', which enter the groove D in the upper 
Thrashing-Machines, of which the following end of the shaft D, so that the sleeve Dis 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to steering mechanism and so as to be capable of tilting thereon. 
to especially designed for thrashing-machines, The shaft E has keyed to it the gear-wheels 
though, of course, it might be used with other E' E, and it is provided with a collar Eand 
friction-wheel E' and sleeve E, which sleeve 
similar apparatus. 
I have illustrated my invention by the ac- passes through the aperture in the cross- 65 
Companying drawings, wherein- 
beam G. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the device with 
J is a hand-lever pivoted at K and passing 
my improvement in position. Fig. 2 is a plan 
through an aperture in the upper part of the 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a detailed en 
rod F. 
larged view of the transmitting devices proper. 
Fig. 4 is a detail looking in the direction of 
pable of being moved in either direction. It 
2O the arrow in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a cross-section 
may be raised to raise the rod F on one end 
on line 55, Fig. 3. 
of the shaft E, or it may be moved laterally 
Like parts are indicated by the same letters 
to swing the rod F and one end of the shaft 
E and the friction-wheel E'. As suggested 75 
A A are the body and usual parts of an or- above, it would be possible to arrange these 
25 dinary thrashing-machine to which an engine parts otherwise than as here suggested and 
B has been applied. This engine B may be this transmitting mechanism might be em 
employed to operate the traction-gear to pro-ployed in connection with the other parts to 
pel the separator, or it may be employed to run transmit motion or power to other than the 8o 
the cylinder, or both. I desire to employ steering mechanism; but I have found it par 
3o transmitting mechanism in connection with ticularly applicable to my self-contained 
this engine which shall have certain proper- thrashing-machines, in which the steering of 
ties or capacities, and I have illustrated my the separator can thus be easily accomplished 
invention particularly in its application to by the application of the power or energy put 85 
the steering mechanism. The steering mech- forth by the engine on the separator. 
The use and operation of my invention are 
that portion which is necessary to be illus- perhaps sufficiently illustrated and have per 
trated for the purpose of showing my inven- haps been already sufficiently described; but 
tion. 
C is a gear-wheel on the shaft C", from which this direction. Assuming that the shaft D is 
4o shaft, or a pulley thereon, proceeds the belt connected with the steering or other mechan 
or rope C, whereby the steering mechanism is ism to which it is desired to impart an inter 
controlled. 
mittent motion in opposite directions, it will 
ample, through the platform D', on which the said shaft unless either one or the other of 
45 operator stands, and it earries a worm-gear the wheels E' E is in engagement with the 
D at its lower end to engage the gear-wheel wheel D, and also that no such motion will 
handle, so that by turning the shaft D the be imparted, even when either of the wheels 
gear-wheel handle may be rotated in either is so engaged, unless the shaft E is rotated. Ioo 
direction to steer the separator. The shaft D Now I have provided means by which either 
5o is retained in suitable boxes at DD and car- of said wheels may be brought into operative 
ries at its upper end, rigid with it, the bevel- engagement and then the shaft be made to ro 
tate. The wheel E' of course is opposed to 
gear D. 
D is a vertical shaft which passes, for ex- be seen that no motion will be imparted to 9. 
35 anism, however, I do not show, except as to 
it may be proper to add some observations in 90 
in all the figures. 
- 
- 
- 
I5 
 
542,521 
O 
the edge of a wheel associated with the driv 
ing mechanism and which wheel is normally 
in motion. Now, if the lever J be swung to 
either side-that is, either to the right or left 
it is plain that the upper part of the base F 
will be in like manner swung back and forth 
and that therefore the wheel E will be moved 
into or out of contact with the edge of the ro 
tating wheel associated with the driving mech 
anism. When, therefore, the handle J is 
moved in such direction as to bring the wheel 
Eagainst a supposed wheel, the wheel E will 
begin to rotate and this of course will rotate 
the shaft E and wheels E" E. If now, or if 
prior to setting shaft E, in rotation, the 
lever J be raised or lowered, it is plain that 
the bar F will be raised or lowered and that 
either the wheel E' or E will be brought into 
engagement with the wheel D. Now, by 
properly manipulating the lever, it is evident 
that either wheel may be brought into en 
gagement with the wheel D and may then be 
set in motion, and the direction of rotation of 
shaft D will depend upon which wheel, E' or 
E, is in engagement with D. 
I claim 
1. The combination of a shaft having a gear 
wheel on the end thereof, with a transverse 
shaft mounted upon a cap on the end of the 
first mentioned shaft so as to swing thereon, 
and gear wheels on such transverse shaft 
adapted to intermittently engage the gear 
Wheel on the first mentioned shaft. 
2. In a thrashing machine the combination 
of a steering gear with a controlling shaft 
therefor, a gear on such shaft, a tilting shaft 
with gears thereon which move there with said 
gears adapted one at a time to engage the 
controlling shaft, and means for driving said 
gears. 
3. The combination of a controlling shaft 
with a gear thereon, a transverse shaft with 
gears thereon adapted alternately to engage 
the first mentioned gear, and means whereby 
the transverse shaft may be raised or lowered 
at one end to bring the gears thereon alter 
nately in engagement with the gear on the 
controlling shaft. 
25 
35 
 
55 
7 o 
75 
4. In a thrashing machine the combination 
of a rotating driving wheel with a shaft hav 
ing a friction wheel on one end thereof op 
posed to the driving wheel and gears on the 
other end, means for moving the end of the 
shaft carrying the friction wheel either ver 
tically or laterally, and a shaft and gear adapt 
ed alternately to engage the gears on the trans 
Verse shaft. 
5. The combination of a shaft adapted to 
be alternately rotated in opposite directions, 
with a gear wheel on the upper end thereof, 
a tilting bearing on the top of said shaft, a 
transverse shaft in such bearing, gears there 
to on opposite sides of the bearing and adapt 
ed alternately to engage the gear on the re 
versing shaft. 
6. The combination of a shaft adapted to 
be alternately rotated in opposite directions, 
with a gear wheel on the upper end thereof, 
a tilting bearing on the top of said shaft, a 
transverse shaft in such bearing, gears there 
to on opposite sides of the bearing and adapt 
ed alternately to engage the gear on the re 
versingshaft, and a friction wheel on the other 
end of the transverse shaft, and means for 
moving that end of the shaft to bring one and 
then the other of its gears into engagement 
with the gear on the vertical shaft. 
7. The combination of a shaft adapted to 
be alternately rotated in opposite directions, 
with a gear wheel on the upper end thereof, 
a tilting bearing on the top of said shaft, a 
transverse shaft in such bearing, gears there 
to on opposite sides of the bearing and adapt 
ed alternately to engage the gear on the re 
versing shaft, and a friction wheel on the other 
end of the transverse shaft, and means for 
moving that end of the shaft to bring one and 
then the other of its gears into engagement 
with the gear on the vertical shaft, and to 
bring the friction gear against an opposed 
driving gear, whereby the transverse shaft is 
rotated. 
CHARLES F. GODDARD. 
Witnesses: . 
J. H. COULTER, 
DONALD M. CARTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542621.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. BACON. 
PNEUMATIC WATER, ELEWATOR, 
No, 542,621, 
Patented July 16, 1895 
|-?sssssssssssssssss!!No. 
2.!=--~~~~------------- 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. B A CON, OF RICHMOND, VIRGINI A. 
PNEU MATC WATER - E L EVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,621, dated July 16, 1895. 
Application filed July 5, 1894, Serial No. 516,548, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
chamber C and delivers the air into the up 
take-pipe B. 
Beit known that I, JAMES EDWARD BACON, 
I have shown the uptake-pipe B as suffi 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
ciently large to contain within it the pipe A, 
Richmond, in the county of Henrico and State 
of Virginia, have invented an Improvement 
and also the elongated tubular chamber C; 
in Pneumatic Water-Elevators, of which the 
but where the size of the well is sufficient the 
following is a specification. 
pipe A may pass down outside of the uptake 
pipe B, and the tubular chamber C may also 
Water has been elevated from wells by the 
be outside of the uptake-pipe B, as illustrated 
action of air passing into the bottom of the 
in the diagram, Fig. 3. 
column of water and displacing the water in 
such a manner that the uptake-column ex 
Under all circumstances the air from the 
tending to the desired height is not heavier 
compressor reaches the tubular chamber C, 
and any pulsations of the air cease to be ap 
than the column of water in the well itself, 
and the pipe which conveys the air down to 
preciated at the bottom of the tubular cham 
ber C in consequence of the length of the 
the lower end of the uptake-pipe has usually 
same and the air acting similarly to a spring. 
been of the same size, or nearly so, all the 
Hence the flow of atmosphere upwardly from 
way down, and for this reason it has become 
the discharge pipe or nozzle D will be sub 
necessary to employ a separate reservoir or 
stantially uninterrupted and uniform, and 
receiver at or near the surface of the ground 
the action of the same in aerating or lighten 
in order that the flow of air down the well 
pipe may be as nearly uniform as possible, so 
ing the column will be more uniform and re 
as to prevent the reciprocations of the air 
liable than in cases where the pulsations in 
the air-supply may reach the discharge pipe 
compressing piston causing the air to pass out 
from the upward ejector intermittently or 
or nozzle at the bottom of the Well; and this 
apparatus is cheap to construct, and it is out 
with greater force at one moment than at an 
of the way and at a point where the atmos 
other. 
The object of the present invention is to 
phere is confined under the pressure due to 
render the discharge of the air into the up 
the head of water, so that the efficiency of the 
take-pipe as nearly uniform as possible and 
air in the chamber C as a spring in neutral 
izing the pulsations of the air-compressor is 
without the necessity of employing a receiver 
fully obtained. 
above the ground and between the well and 
the air-compressor. 
It will de observed that the discharge pipe 
In carrying out this invention the pipe 
or nozzle D rises to a considerable height 
which leads the air from the air-compressor 
within the uptake-pipe. In Fig. 1 it is rep 
is passed down into the well and into the up 
resented as coming above the top of the air 
per end of an elongated tubular chamber, 
chamber C. The object of this construction 
is twofold: First. That the upward discharge 
from the lower part of which the air issues 
through a nozzle and passes into the uptake 
of the air in a continuous jet may fill the col 
pipe to aerate or lighten the column of water 
umn of water with numerous and compara 
tively small air-bubbles in that portion of the 
so that the same rises to the desired height 
well which only contains the comparatively 
and flows away. 
In the drawings, Figure i is a vertical sec 
small air-pipe A, and hence there will be 
tion of the present improvement. Fig. 2 is a 
nothing to interfere with the uniform rise of 
the column of water in the uptake - pipe, 
horizontal section at the line acac. Fig. 3 is a 
whereas any obstruction in the uptake-pipe 
diagram of a modification. 
The uptake-pipe B is of any desired char 
might tend to detain either the air or the wa 
acter, and the pipe A leads from the air-com 
ter and cause the numerous bubbles of air to 
pressor down into the well to the top of the 
unite in larger bubbles and interfere with the 
proper aerating of the whole mass of water. 
elongated chamber C, which is in the form of 
The second object in employing a long noz 
a tube, and the discharge pipe or nozzle D 
passes upwardly from the lower end of the zle D is that after the well has remained qui 
95 
Ico 
O 
2 C. 
25 
35 
45 
 
542,621 
O 
escent the water will pass through the nozzle 
D, fill the chamber C and the pipe A up to 
the level of the exterior water in the well, and 
when the compressed air is admitted in the 
pipe A it has to drive down the column of 
water to the lower end of the nozzle D, and in 
so doing a greater pressure of air than that 
subsequently required to raise the water is 
required, because the column of Water dis 
placed is higher than the column of water 
above the upper end of the nozzle D. For 
this reason the superior pressure of air which 
is required to displace this column escapes 
suddenly by the nozzle D and acts violently 
upon the water in the well, and not only 
aerates the same and causes it to rise, but acts 
with sufficient suddenness to stir up any sedi 
ment or mud that there may be in the well 
and cause a more perfect flow of the water 
than would be the case were it not for the 
violent ebullition, and during the operation 
of the elevating device, after the same has 
been started as a foresaid, the pressure re 
quired of the air is only sufficient to displace 
the column of water above the top of the nozzle 
D, and the jet of air so escaping is purposely 
caused to be continuous in order that the col 
umn of water in the uptake-pipe may be filled 
with a very large number of comparatively 
small air-bubbles, which, permeating the en- | specified. 
tire column of water, lessens the weight of 
that column sufficiently to cause it to rise to 
the point of delivery, and the efficiency of 
this water-raising apparatus is largely aug 
35 mented by the fact that the force exerted by 
the continuously-issuing jet of air is effective 
25 
45 
in drawing the water at the bottom of the 
uptake-pipe and in sustaining the column of 
water above the issuing jet of air, and, the 
air-bubbles being very numerous and smail, 4o 
break at the surface of the water without in 
terfering with the continuous and uninter 
rupted flow of the water from the discharge 
Opening. 
I claim as my invention- 
1. In an ejecting apparatus for wells, the 
combination with the uptake pipe of a long 
air chamber near the lower end of the uptake 
pipe, a tube for supplying air into such cham 
ber and a pipe open at both ends and ex-5o 
tending up from near the lower end of the 
air chamber into the uptake pipe above such 
air chamber and delivering a continuous jet 
of air into the water in the uptake pipe, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. A tubular well lining forming an uptake 
pipe and having a delivery upper end, in com 
bination with an air forcing pipe a long air 
chamber within and near the lower end of 
the tubular lining and to which the lower end 6o 
of the air forcing pipe is connected and a dis 
charge pipe or nozzle receiving air from the 
lower part of the chamber and delivering 
the same as a continuous jet into the uptake 
pipe above such air chamber substantially as 65 
55 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
WILLIAM G. MOTT. 
Signed by me this 2d day of July, 1894. 
J. E. BACON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542721.txt	(No Model.) 
J. G., YOUNG. 
DRAW KNIFE, 
No. 542,721. 
Patented July 16, 1895. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN G. YOUNG, OF HYDE PARK, MASSACHUSETTS, 
DRAW-KNIFE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,721, dated July 16, 1895. 
Application filed January 12, 1895, Serial No. 534,633. (No model.) 
55 
75 
to all, whom it may concern: 
Be...it known that I, JoHN G. YoUNG, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Hyde 
Park, in the county of Norfolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Draw-Knives, of which 
the following is a specification. 
By my invention I construct a draw-knife 
of the folding-handle class, which combines 
simplicity and cheapness of construction with 
great strength. 
It has long been the desire of manufac 
turers of carpenters tools to make a folding 
draw-knife which shall be readily opened and 
fixed in any desired position and be firmly 
locked when the handles are in place. Many 
draw-knives have been made which are read 
ily manipulated so far as changing the posi 
tion of the handles is concerned, but their 
construction is usually attended by multipli 
cation of parts and consequent reduction in 
size and strength of the parts, and the lock 
ing of the handles in position is not suffi 
ciently rigid to constitute a perfect draw 
knife. 
The object, therefore, of my invention is 
the construction of a folding draw-knife which 
shall be readily manipulated and which, when 
the handles are locked, shall be as stiff and 
strong as if the handle-shank were a continua 
tion of and integral with the knife tang. I 
accomplish this object by the following novel 
construction and arrangement of parts: I 
pivot the knife-handles on the tang ends to 
turn in the plane of draft of the knife, and 
by means of a thumb-nut on the pivot, which 
is threaded for the purpose, enable the user 
to withdraw the handle from the tang or press 
it toward the tang, as desired. The adjacent 
surfaces of the tang and handle end overlap 
each other in a plane substantially coincident 
with the plane of draft, and between these 
surfaces in this plane I locate the locking 
devices which operate whenever the handle 
end and tang are pressed together. Further, 
in the construction of what I believe to be 
the best embodiment of my invention, I ar 
range the fastening devices in a circle sym 
metrically about the pivot. This relieves all 
strain from the pivot-bolt and distributes the 
locking-surface in such a manner that all tor 
sional or direct stress is resisted with the best 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
possible economy and the least demand on 
the strength of any individual part. 
In the drawings which form part of this my 
specification I have shown what I believe to 
be the best and most economical embodiment 
of my invention. 
Figure 1 shows my improved draw-knife 
with parts assembled. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view of one of the tang ends, showing the 
mode of arranging the pivot-hole and fasten 
ings. 
Fig. 3 shows a similar view of the han 
dle end. Fig. 4 is a section through tang and 
handle on the line yy', Fig. 1, and Fig. 5 the 
pivot-bolt. 
The tang ends of the blade are enlarged to 
form flat cylindrical terminations with one of 
the flat sides in the plane of draft of the 
knife. This plane I find to be one which bi 
sects the solid angle between the back of the 
The plane 
blade and the bevel of the edge. 
of draft may of course be variously located 
between fair limits, according to the needs or 
notions of the carpenter or toolmaker. The 
handle ends are metal, set at an angle with 
the wooden grip of the handle to give suffi 
cient spread to the handles when open and also 
to set the handles properly over the blade when 
closed. These handle ends terminate in flat 
cylindrical heads of about the same diameter 
as the tang ends. Through the centers of the 
flat sides of the cylindrical termini of tangs 
and handle ends are bored holes for the pivot 
bolts. 
Referring now to the drawings, in which 
like letters are always used to denote like 
parts, the tangs T of blade B are flattened 
into cylindrical heads A, Fig. 2, and the han 
dles H terminate in flat cylindrical heads C, 
Fig. 3. In the center of A is bored a hole ac, 
Fig. 2, tapped to receive a screw-bolt S, Figs. 
4 and 5, and in the center of C, Fig. 3, is bored 
a smooth hole for the reception of the same bolt 
S. This bolt S, which is the pivot joining tang 
and handle, is made with two sections of va 
rying diameter. (See Fig. 5.) Sections', the 
smaller, screws into the tapped hole a' in the 
tang-head A. Section s, the larger, is also 
threaded, but slides in hole ac' in handle end 
C. By screwing bolt S into hole a until the 
shoulder between s' and s bears on the flat 
surface of tank-head A the screw-bolt S is 
firmly set. A thumb-nut L, Fig. 1, (shown in 
9. 
90 
95 
IOC 
2 
542,721 
O 
25 
section in Fig. 4.) fits the large section s of 
Screw S. Handle end C slides on s between 
nut I and tang-head A. The head of the bolt 
Skeeps nutIL in place on the bolt. On a circle 
about the axis of bolt S (or holes ac and ac') as 
a center I bore four holes, preferably conical, 
in tang-head A. These holes are shown at 
m. Similar holes n n are bored in the handle 
end C. The holes in and in lie in the surfaces 
of handle end and tang-head, which face each 
other when the parts are assembled, Fig. 4. 
Connecting the tops of holes in in C is a shal 
low annular groove 2. These holes are equally 
and evenly spaced in the surfaces of tang 
head and handle end, respectively, so that 
when the two parts face each other, with screw 
S in place, the holes coincide in any one of four 
different positions of handle as the handle is 
turned on screw S. Between the handle end 
and tang-head I place four steel balls a, which 
lie in the tops of holes m or n. When han 
dle end C is crowded toward tang-head A by 
screwing down thumb-nut L on screw-bolt S, 
balls a are pressed into holes m, and corre 
sponding holes n, so that the handle is locked 
firmly in place. 
To change the position of the handle loosen 
thumb-nut L. until the tops of balls a can slide 
in groove 2. Then turn handle H until the 
holes in come again opposite holes m and clamp 
with thumb-nut L. 
I have shown my fastenings in a group of 
four about the pivot, because this arrange 
ment Secures the handle in any one of four 
desirable positions-closed, at right angles 
with the knife-blade, extended in line with the 
blade, or turned back on the back of the blade. 
This last position is assumed when, with the 
other handle extended in line with the blade, 
the knife is used like a cleaver; but obviously 
any desired number of fastening members 
can be used within the limits of reasonable 
construction. 
The location of the balls and sockets in a 
circle enables all the fastenings to sustain any 
stress together and to distribute the work over 
a considerable area, meanwhile relieving the 
pivot itself from wear and tear. Thus the 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
75 
joint between tang and handle always will re 
main sound and firm and as strong to resist 
the strain of hard work as the knife-tangs 
themselves. By using detachable fastening 
members between tang end and handle end, 
as described, the wear from use and clamping 
and unclamping the handles is automatically 
taken up, and breakage from any conceivable 
cause is easily repaired by inserting a new set 
of detachable fastening members. It will be 
obviously advantageous to have the locking 
members hardened. 
I claim 
1. A draw-knife having its handles pivoted 
to the tangs and rotatable upon the pivots in a 
plane substantially coincident with the plane 
of draft, tang-end and handle-end having ad 
jacent surfaces substantially parallel to said 
plane of draft, the said surfaces containing 
cavities disposed about the pivot, detached 
locking members consisting of solids of revo 
lution adapted to lie between said surfaces 
and to fit said cavities, and means whereby 
said locking members as they lie in said cavi-. 
ties may be pressed between tang-end and 
handle-end. 
2. A draw-knife having its handles pivoted 
to the tangs and rotatable upon the pivots in a 
plane substantially coincident with the plane 
of draft, tang-end and handle-end having ad 
jacent surfaces substantially parallel to said 
plane of draft, the said surfaces containing 
cavities symmetrically disposed about the 
pivot axis in a circle, an annular groove con 
centric with the pivot axis connecting the 
cavities, detached locking members consist 
ing of solids of revolution adapted to lie be 
tween said Surfaces and to fit said cavities 
and means whereby said locking members as 
they lie in said cavities may be pressed be 
tween tang-end and handle-end. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN G. YOUNG. 
Witnesses: 
ELEANOR F. GROLL, 
GRACE M. SHAY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542821.txt	(No Model.) H. S. BROUGHT ON & C. BRIGGS. 
HOP TRELLIS, 
 
Patented July 16, 1895. 
J 
S. 
f. 
t 
ls 
sy . 
7 3 
Y 
M / Y. 
2/ 
/ M7 
M 
M M. 
v2.2% 
 
-, 
351 vowtows: 
Aezz7% S. Z3/ozezzazz. 
s SS Czzzzz Z3/22.7s, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY S. BROUGHTON AND CALVIN BRIGGS, OF CLYMER, OREGON. 
HOP-RELIS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,821, dated July 16, 1895. 
Application filed June 16, 1893, Serial No. 477,813, (No model.) 
Referring to the said drawings, the letter P 55 
To cell, Luhon, it nagy CO7 cert: 
Be it known that we, HENRY S. BROUGHTON 
and CALVIN BRIGGS, citizens of the United . 
States, residing at Clymer, in the county of 
Marion and State of Oregon, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Hop 
Trellises; and we do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention relates to trees, plants, and 
flowers, and more especially to trellises for 
Supporting the vines in the art of hop-culture; 
and the object of the same is to effect certain 
improvements in said trellises. 
Heretofore for many years it was customary 
to train the hop-vines on upright poles or 
stakes, and when it became desirable to strip 
the hops from the vines the pole or the poles 
and vines were cut down, so as to bring the 
hops within reach of the operater for the pur 
pose of picking. Later the idea was conceived 
of building what was called the horizontal 
hop-frame, which consisted of wires or poles 
Strung between arms supported at suitable 
distances by upright poles or posts; but the 
objection arose with the use of this frame that 
When the hops were picked it was necessary 
either to cut down the wires or the wires and 
arms or the entire structure or to provide lad 
ders or similar supports for raising the picker 
to a suitable height to reach the hops. The 
present invention avoids this objection by pro 
viding means whereby the supporting wires 
or rods may be let down when it is desired to 
pick the hops, so that the latter will come 
within reach of an operator standing on the 
ground, as will be understood; and to this end 
the invention consists in uprights, arms piv 
oted thereto, stays supporting said arms nor 
mally in horizontal positions, means for loos 
ening the stays so as to let down the arms to 
oblique or Vertical positions, and supporting 
wires or rods connecting the arms in pairs 
across a field, all as hereinafter more fully de 
scribed, and as shown in the drawings, where 
- Figure 1 is a plan view showing in dia 
gram a small field as provided with two hop 
trellises of this improved construction. Fig. 
2 is an enlarged perspective view of one of 
the end uprights. Fig. 3 is a reduced eleva 
tion showing a slight modification. 
designates an upright, which is by preference 
a four-inch square post driven into the ground 
and rising about twelve feet above the sur 
face, although it could be a round post, a pole, 
a tube, and of metal or any suitable material. 
These uprights are seated in alignment with 
each other about forty-two feet apart and in 
rows across the field, and the end uprights of 
each row are suitably braced or anchored, as 
by the inclined beams I. 
AA are two arms, preferably of Wood, meas 
uring four inches by one inch and about seven 
feet long, and the inner ends of these arms 
are pivotally mounted at opposite sides of the 
upright on a bolt B extending through the 
same about eight feet above the ground. 
S is a stay or supporting wire connected at 
its ends to the arms A at points preferably 
between their extremities, and extending at 
its center through a groove or between nails 
N, driven into the upper end of the upright 
or in one of its side faces near said upright. 
The length of this stay is such that when it 
passes through the notch it will hold the arms 
about horizontal, as seen in full lines in Fig. 2. 
The letter H designates a hook or other 
suitable support seated in one face of the up 
right about midway between the bolt B and 
the upper end thereof, as shown. 
The letters W. W. in the present instance. 
designate wires, although they could be stout 
cords, rods, or strips of any suitable material, 
and these wires are connected with the outer 
extremities of the arms A of the end most up 
rights and extend through the extremities of 
the arms of all the intermediate uprights, 
thus passing entirely across the field. 
In Fig. 3 is shown an upright having some 
what longer arms A, each of which carries 
two of the wires W, and it will be obvious 
that one or more wires could be carried by 
each arm. 
W designates an additional wire secured 
by any fastening means, as the eye F, to each 
end most upright at a point somewhat below 
the bolt B and extending through the inter 
mediate uprights, as will be understood, and 
F designates a fastening device seated in the 
side of the upright and which could be an 
75 
O 
2 C. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
95 
CO 
 
3 
542,821 
eye or a hook, as shown, these fastening de 
vices being used on the intermediate uprights, 
or the end most ones, or both. 
In the use of this improved trellis the vines 
V are planted in rows at such points that 
they will grow beneath the three wires W, 
and they are trained up to the wires on twines 
T. In time they will grow to a height of 
eight feet, and if higher their tops are led out 
laterally along the wires. When the hops have 
ripened, or reached the proper stage for pick 
ing, a pole is passed up the upright under 
the stay S and the latter is lifted out of the 
notch and let down onto the hook II, which 
operation lowers the arms A to the positions 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2. With the 
artms the wires W are lowered and the hops 
can readily be picked by an operator stand 
ing on the ground. As the intermediate wire 
W' is not so high it is not necessary to lower 
it for the purpose of picking the hops. After 
picking, the arms can be again raised by lift 
ing the stay of the hook and again passing 
it over the upper end of the upright. 
We do not limit ourselves to the exact sizes, 
shapes, proportions, or materials of parts, nor 
to the precise construction herein shown and 
described, as considerable change may be 
made therein without departing from the 
spirit of our invention. It is also obvious that 
this improved trellis may be used for other 
purposes than hop-culture; but we have de 
scribed it in that connection because we find 
it especially desirable that the hop-vines be 
let down for picking rather than torn down, 
either with or without their supporting-trel 
lises. 
What we claim as new is 
1. A support of the character described, con 
sisting of an upright, arms pivotally con 
nected with and extending from oppositesides 
of said upright at a point near its upper end, 
an open notch at the upper extremity of the 
upright, and a stay-wire connected at its ends 
with said arms and leading intermediate its 
ends removably through said notch, and of a 
length to then hold the arms horizontal, as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. A support of the character described, con 
sisting of an upright, arms pivotally con 
55 
nected with and extending from opposite sides 
of said upright at a point near its upper end, 
a notch at the upper extremity of the upright, 
a stay-wire connected at its ends with said 
arms and leading intermediately through said 
notch, and a hookin the upright between said 
pivotal point and notch, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. In a hop trellis, the combination with a 
pair of uprights, arms pivotally connected at 
their inner ends with each upright, and a stay 
for supporting said arms in horizontal posi 
tion or allowing them to be dropped from 
such position; of horizontal wires connecting 
the outer extremities of the corresponding 
arms of the two uprights, and braces for the 
uprights opposing the tension of the horizon 
tal wires, as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a hop trellis, the combination with a 
pair of uprights, arms pivotally connected at 
their inner ends with each upright, and a stay 
for supporting said arms in horizontal posi 
tion or allowing them to be dropped from 
such position; of horizontal wires connecting 
corresponding arms of the two uprights, and 
an additional wire connecting the uprights be 
low the pivotal point of the arms, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
5. In a hop trellis, the combination with a 
pair of uprights, a pair of arms having their 
inner ends passing to opposite sides of each 
upright below its upper extremity, a bolt 
through said inner ends and through the up 
right, a notch in said upper extremity, a hook 
in the upright between said notch and bolt, 
and a stay connected at its ends with said 
arms and of a length to hold the same hori 
zontal when it is passed through said notch; 
of horizontal wires connected with corre 
sponding arms of two uprights at points re 
mote from their pivots, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY S. BROUGHTON. 
CALVIN BRIGGS. 
Witnesses: 
WM. A. WHITE, Jr., 
JOHN A. DITTER, 
O 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US542922.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 542,922. 
  
 
- 
W. H. BROOK. 
FLANGE WRENCE. 
Patented July 16, 1895. 
// 
WITNESSES, 
 
1N WEWTOR 
AITORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. BROCK, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FLANGE-WRENCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 542,922, dated July 16, 1895. 
Application filed November 20, 1894, Serial No. 529,386, (No model) 
To aid, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. BROCK, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and Im 
proved Flange-Wrench, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to a Wrench particu 
larly adapted for screwing flanges upon pipes, 
the Wrench being exceedingly simple and du 
rable in its construction and capable of being 
used right-hand or left-hand, as occasion may 
require, and of manipulation in a manner to 
rapidly and conveniently place a flange in 
position upon a pipe or remove it therefrom. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
Struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figurel is a perspective view of the wrench, 
illustrating also its application to a flange of 
a pipe. Fig. 2 is a plan view of one side of 
the Wrench, and Fig. 3 is a plan view of the 
opposite side. 
In carrying out the invention the wrench 
consists of a handle 10 and a head 11. The 
said head is of substantially segmental con 
struction, being provided with teeth 12 at 
each of its ends, whereby, the said head has 
two working-faces and is therefore capable of 
being reversed when necessary. In connec 
tion with the head an arm 13 is employed, 
which arm is pivoted upon one side face of 
the handle adjacent to the head, and the pivot 
of the said arm is about central with respect 
to the space between the Working-faces of the 
head. The arm 13 is of such length that it 
extends over and beyond the outer or con 
vexed face of the head and is provided at its 
outer end with a stud 14, the stud being so 
located that the arm may be carried in direc 
tion of either of the Working-faces of the head 
without the stud interfering with the same. 
The pivot-pin 15 of the said arm may be either 
attached to the handle or made an integral 
portion of the same. 
The operation of this wrench is plainly 
shown in Fig. 1, in which it will be observed 
that one toothed or Working face of the Wrench 
is placed in engagement with the periphery 
of the flange A, while the arm 13 is carried 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
 
s 
downward below and back of the engaging 
working-surface of the head, and through the 
medium of its stud is made to enter one of 
the bolt-holes a, in the flange. By operating 
the handle 10 of the wrench as a lever it is 
evident that the flange will be turned in a 
manner to screw it on the pipe B, and When 
the flange has been turned as far as possible 
the arm is disengaged from the flange and its 
studisplaced in the next lowerbolt-hole. This 
operationis continued until the flange is prop 
erly screwed to place. 
It is evident that this wrench, by reason of 
its two working-surfaces, may be used either 
right or left, and may be employed to remove 
a flange from a pipe as well as to Screw one 
on the same. 
The wrench is simple, durable, and eco 
nomic, comprising practically but two parts, 
since the head and handle are made prefer 
ably from one piece of material. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A flange wrench, comprising a handled 
head, an arm pivoted thereto, and a stud pro 
jected from the arm substantially parallel to 
its pivot, the arm connecting the pivot to the 
stud being located entirely to one side of the 
handle, so that when the stud is swung to 
either side of the handle, there will always 
be a free space between the stud and the head 
to permit the tool to be engaged with a flange, 
substantially as described. 
2. A flange wrench comprising a head hav 
ing a biting face on each side and provided 
with a handle and an arm pivotally connected 
to the head and extending beyond the biting 
faces and provided with a stud projecting 
from its free end substantially parallel to its 
pivot pin, substantially as set forth. 
3. A flange wrench comprising a head hav 
ing a lug projecting from one face and having 
a biting face on each side of the lug, and be 
ing also provided with a handle and an arm 
having a perforation to receive said lug, the 
end of said arm extending beyond the end of 
the head and having a stud projecting from 
it parallel to the said lug on the head, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
WILLIAM. H. BROCK. 
Witnesses: 
J. L. MCAULIFFE, 
C. SEDGWICK, 
75 
9 O 
Od 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543023.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
J. J. KEYES, 
BASKET, 
No. 543,023, 
Patented July 23, 1895. 
A 
asses 
 
 
Af 
W 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES J. KE YES, OF PERU, INDIANA. 
BASKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 543,023, dated July 23, 1895. 
Application filed November 19, 1894, Serial No. 529,299, (No model.) 
- 
To al., whon, it may concern 
Be it known that I, JAMES J. KEYES, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Peru, in 
the county of Miami and State of Indiana, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Baskets; and I do hereby de 
clare that the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, reference being 
had to the annexed drawings, making a part 
of this specification, and to the letters of ref 
erence marked thereon. 
The present invention has for its object to 
provide a basket that will possess durability 
and strength particularly at the corners there 
of and Will be materially improved in its gen 
eral construction and its value enhanced. 
The invention consists in a basket con 
structed substantially as shown in the draw 
ings, and hereinafter described and claimed. 
Figure 1 of the drawings represents a per 
Spective view of a basket constructed in ac 
Cordance with my invention, the basket being 
shown as lying upon its side and looking to 
Ward the bottom thereof. Fig. 2 is a perspec 
tive view of one of the guardson an enlarged 
Scale; Fig. 3, a similar view of the frame of 
the basket previous to the splints being woven 
thereon. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
Sents the bottom of the basket which is formed 
in two sections and held together by the lon 
gitudinal central support B. These sections, 
Which are represented at a, b, do not come to 
gether at their inner ends, but a sufficient 
Space is left to receive the bottom c of the 
side braces C, which extend above and trans 
versely with the longitudinal support B. 
The corner guards or protectors DE have 
their horizontal portions F extending under 
the bottom A of the basket and longitudinally 
there with and at their juncture with the 
guards have shoulders d. In preparing these 
guards or protectors a piece of lumberistaken 
of the required width, thickness, and length 
to pass under the basket and extend upward 
at each end to the height thereof, and the ends 
of the Strip of lumber are divided or sawed 
into three parts, and the one of the parts cut 
off to leave the shoulder d, as shown more 
clearly in Fig. 2 of the drawings. 
The bottom portion of the strip of lumber 
is left solid, so as to form a substantial sup 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
 
port F for the bottom of the basket and the 
guards or protectors DE, or that portion of 
the strip which is to form the same, is steamed 
and bent into shape over a suitable former in 
the usual manner. 
The side braces C extend up to the top of the 
basket and serve to give additional strength 
to the sides thereof. 
The splints G. Hare woven together in the 
usual manner to form the interior bottom of 
the basket, the splints H being thinner and 
narrower than the splints G and extend up 
only a certain distance to form a portion of 
the sides of the basket, as shown in Fig. 1 of 
the drawings. The splints G extend up to the 
top of the basket and splints I are woven 
thereon, which are substantially of the same 
width as the splints G. 
The above manner of weaving the splints, 
so as to carry the filling-splints H, inside the 
guards or protectors DE, a certain distance 
up the sides of the basket, adds materially to 
the strength and durability and especially at 
the corners of the basket, as it leaves exposed 
the guards or protectors to better serve their 
purpose. 
Having now fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a basket, the bottom formed of two sec 
tions separated at their inner ends by the 
cross brace, combined with the central sup 
port, the croSS brace, and the corner guards or 
protectors which have their central portions 
to extend along opposite edges of the bottom 
sections, substantially as shown. 
2. In a basket, the corner guards or protec 
tors, having their ends split and reduced in 
thickness by cutting away one of the split por 
tions; the central portions being made to ex 
tend under the bottom of the basket, while 
their ends are bent so as to extend upwardly 
and have the splints woven around them, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
JAMES J. KEYES. 
55 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
Witnesses: 
JAMES M. BROWN, 
L. D. ATKINSON, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543123.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 543,123, 
Patented July 23, 1895. 
R. I. BROWN. 
BELTING FOR TRANSMISSION OF POWER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1 
 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
(No Model.) 
No. 543,123, 
Patented July 23, 1895. 
R. I. BROWN, 
BELTING FOR TRANSMISSION OF POWER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
WITNESSES. 
INVENTOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT IN GM. BROWN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BELTING FOR TRANSMISSION OF POWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 543,128, dated July 28, 1895. 
Application filed August 26, 1891, Serial No. 408,818, (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
a citizen of the United States, residing in New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Belting for the Transmission of Power, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the use of a flexible 
metal band passing in an endless circle over 
Wheels, &c., for transmitting power, and the 
objects of my improvements are, first, to in 
crease the percentage of wear permissible be 
fore exceeding the margin of safety; secondly, 
to reduce the diameter of wheels necessary 
for easy and rapid flexion of the band when 
passing around them, and, thirdly, to remove 
the possibility of slip between the band and 
wheels while reducing the tension ordinarily 
given to prevent such slipping; and the 
means whereby I attain these objects are par 
ticularly set forth in the claims hereinafter 
following. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part hereof, Figure 1 is a section, and Fig. 2 
a side view of the usual method of uniting 
wires for the transmission of power. Fig. 3 
shows their action with small wheels at high 
speed. Fig. 4 is an end view. Fig. 5 is a top 
view, and Fig. 6 is a side view, of one man 
ner of arranging and uniting the separate 
wires for the transmission of power according 
to my invention. Figs. 7 and 8 show their ap 
plication with pulleys. 
Similarletters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
When a wire rope is bent in a curve, as 
around a wheel, each individual wire C, Figs. 
1 and 2, slides longitudinally on its neighbor 
in the endeavor to equalize the strain pro 
duced on itself. Otherwise that part of each 
wire which is in the part of the rope on the 
outside A, Fig. 2, of the bend would have the 
most tensile strain, while that on the inside 
B, Fig. 2, of the bend might even be in com 
pression. This internal sliding friction and 
resistance to bending a wire rope is an im 
portant element in determining the diameter 
of a wheel. It can be satisfactorily run over 
or around. In high angular speeds of the 
wheel it has a very strong tendency to reduce 
the contact of the wire rope with the wheel, 
as illustrated in Fig. 3, because the former 
rides slightly past the wheels E before bend 
Beitknown that I, ROBERTINGRAMBROWN, ing. Consequently, the frictional contact and 
driving power are reduced To avoid this an 
otherwise unnecessary tension is usually put 
on the rope, causing increased friction and 
wear on the bearings of the wheels or their 
shafts. Now, if the sides of the rope-groove in 
the wheel are cut into sprockets and lugs or 
clips rigidly attached to the rope, so as to en 
gage with the sprockets, the rope cannot slip 
around the wheel. Where attached these clips 
must necessarily grip the rope very firmly 
Consequently, 
to prevent their slipping. 
when bending around the wheels the separate 
strands of the rope are prevented from freely 
sliding on each other, and this increases the 
rigidity of the rope, the power taken to op 
erate it, and the diameter of the wheel it 
should run over; but by reducing the size 
of the rope and using two or more, parallel 
and fastened to the same clip, less power will 
be exhausted in bending, because the sides 
A and B, Fig. 2, will be nearer the center of the 
rope, and therefore their tension less unequal, 
and a wheel of less diameter may be used. 
The fact still remains that if the ordinary 
Wire rope is made of Wires of, say, one-six 
teenth of an inch in diameter, and that much 
(one-sixteenth of an inch) should be worn off 
the outside of the rope, all the wires would 
be cut into short pieces and the rope have 
practically no tensile strength. Yet the one 
sixteenth of an inch Worn off the outside 
would be a comparatively Small proportion of 
the total in the rope, the remaining part being 
Worse than useless, as it has required power 
to keep it in motion and especially to bend it 
around the wheels. 
In my invention, by using single wires C, 
Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 8, not twisted into a rope, 
but arranged straight and parallel to each 
other, fastened or united together at suitable 
intervals by suitable clips D, which are rig 
idly attached thereto, Figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8, 
spacing them as convenient and so that they 
will all travel on the same pitch line, and are 
adapted to ride directly on the wheels E, Figs. 
7 and 8, the power necessary to bend the belt 
thus constructed is only that due to the spring 
of the wires, because, having no frictional con 
tact with each other, they do not slide on each 
other to equalize the strain on themselves, as 
fS 
25 
45 
So 
9o 
95 
Oc 
2 
543,123 
45 
55 
7 () 
of the belt. For this reason drawn wire is 
preferable as having the straightest, toughest, 
and most regular fibers. 
Several methods may be used for attaching 
the clips to the wires and various kinds of 
wheels utilized, but I prefer those described 
and claimed in other specifications of mine 
for Letters Patent. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. Abelt for the transmission of power com 
posed of two or more wires arranged parallel 
to each other, and securely united together 
by means of clips, or other suitable fastening 
devices, which are rigidly attached to said 
wires at intervals only of their length and 
leave the inner face of the belt without pro 
jections. 
2. A belt for the transmission of power com 
posed of two or more separate, drawn wires 
arranged parallel to and prevented from hav 
ing frictional contact with each other, and 
rigidly united together without materially re 
ducing their sectional area and without pro 
jections, in the line of the wire, on the inner 
face of the belt. 
3. A belt for the transmission of power, com 
posed of separte, drawn wires arranged par 
allel to each other, and securely united to 
gether, without materially reducing their sec 
tional area, by means of clips or other suitable 
fastening devices which are rigidly attached 
to said wires at intervals of their length, said 
wires being prevented from having frictional 
contact with each other and having an unin 
terrupted side adapted to ride directly on the 
same pitch line over wheels or pulleys. 
ROBT. IN GM. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
P. NICHOLS, 
CHARLES BITTNER, 
s 
above mentioned, in bending a wire rope of 
many times the diameter of each wire. 
In my invention each wire C stands its full 
duty in wear throughout its length, except 
where covered by the clips D, and when worn 
out there will not be a great mass of metal 
which was twisted inside and received little 
wear. Instead, a part of this weight will be 
retained in the clips, which, however, perform 
active service in preventing slip on the wheels, 
but do not consume power to be bent around 
them. Consequently, where a large wire rope 
was used at low tensile strain, the size being 
necessary to give surface contact with the 
wheel for frictional grip and the whole re 
quiring to be bent, I can use much less wire 
at a high tensile strain and run it around 
much smaller wheels, because it will bend so 
much easier. 
In the drawings, Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7, the 
wires are shown united by clips, which leave 
one side of the belt with an uninterrupted 
smooth surface. This is an important factor 
where belts are to be crossed or used on idlers 
or other wheels not recessed for the clips be 
low the riding line of the wires, but it is not 
necessary to all belts embodying my inven 
tion. 
Any number of wires may be used. Tose 
cure the completest possible freedom from 
stretch, which stretch would destroy the cor 
rect pitch of the cross-bars or clips and make 
the whole inoperative, and to obtain the 
maximum use of all the material, and there 
fore weight that it contains, it is preferable 
that the wire should be of a uniform section 
throughout its length, and it should be free 
from irregularities of grain or fiber caused in 
the manufacture and from perforations or 
other reductions of sectional area at places 
which may be worn or weakened by the use 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543224.txt	(No Model.) 
E. WALKER. 
CORK PULLER, 
- 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 543,224. 
Patented July 23, 1895. 
Wit IESSES. 
fail/e/24 
7% Mall call 
 
IVEntOR. 
-Z22ave n Zaza/622 
Z52, 74%2- 
(No Model.) 
E. WALKER. 
CORK PULLER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
. 
No. 543,224. 
Patented July 23, 1895. 
 
WLMESSEs. 
4 2. 
- 
Invent OR. 
1226-27 4aze y 
27462 - 
427, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN WALKER, OF ERIE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
S. 
CORK- PULLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 543,224, dated July 28, 1895, 
Application filed February 20, 1895, Serial No. 639,147, (No model.) 
EO 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN WALKER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at the city. 
of Erie, in the county. of Erie and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Cork-Pullers; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, forming part of 
this specification, 
My invention consists in the improvement 
in cork-pullers, hereinafter set forth and ex 
plained, and illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view in elevation of my 
improved cork-puller with part of the oper 
ating-lever broken away. Fig. 2 is a side 
view partially in elevation and partially in 
section and with the operating-lever removed. 
Fig. 8 is a rear view of a portion of the op 
erating-lever. Fig. 4 is a front viewin eleva 
tion of a section of the frame of my improved 
Cork-puller embodying a modified construc 
tion of my improvement thereon. Fig. 5 is a 
side view of the same, partially in elevation 
and partially in section. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the cork-puller described in my Letters Pat 
ent No. 515,412, granted February 27, 1894; 
and it consists chiefly in the addition of a 
bottle-rest and support to the lower end of 
the frame, whereby the axis of the cork is 
more readily brought into line with the axis 
of the screw and breakage of the bottle-neck 
by the contact of the screw therewith is pre 
vented, and in the modification in the con 
struction of the operating-lever, whereby the 
travel of said lever during the operation of 
the machine is largely reduced and a more. 
available leverage obtained for forcing the 
screw into the bottle-cork. These features 
are hereinafter fully described in the speci 
fication and claims. 
In the construction of my improved cork 
puller shown in the drawings, A is the base 
of the frame thereof, adapted to be secured 
to a counter or suitable support by means of 
a clamp B, or in any other convenient man 
ner. The upright portion of the frame A' 
rests upon this base A, and is provided with 
a tubular passage, within which the cork 
screw mechanism operates, this mechanism 
being, however, the same in all respects as 
that described in my said Letters Patent No. 
515,412 above referred to. Further descrip 
tion thereof herein is not deemed necessary. 
The lower end of the tubular portion of the 
frame is extended downward for some dis 
tance below the lowest point of the traverse 
of the corkscrew-nut D, so as to form a tubu 
lar extension or sleeve C, which is made large 
enough to receive the necks of bottles to be 
uncorked, and within this sleeve C is cut an 
annular recess c, within which is preferably 
secured an annular ring C, of rubber or other 
resilient substance, within which ring C' the 
upper end E of the bottle-neck passes, and is 
thereby prevented from contact with the 
metal sides of the sleeve C, as illustrated in. 
Fig. 2. From the under side of the lower 
end of the tubular portion C a semitubular 
arm F extends downward some distance, and . 
at its lower end is preferably provided with 
a semicircular cushion f, of rubber or other 
suitable resilient substance, secured in a re 
cessf' in the part F, upon which cushion the 
lower part E of the bottle-neck rests, as illus 
trated in Fig. 2, while the cork G is being 
withdrawn, and is thereby prevented from 
contacting with the metal end of the arm F. 
It will readily be seen that in placing a bot 
tle in position to draw the cork therefrom the 
lower part of the neck rests upon the cushion 
f, while the mouth of the neck is pushed into 
the annular ring C, which operation brings 
the bottle-neck and cork therein substantiall 
central and in line with the screw H of the 
cork-puller, so that the screw H will pass down 
through the center of the cork without strik 
ing the sides of the bottle-neck. 
In Figs. 4 and 5 I have shown a modified 
construction of the improvement hereinbe 
fore described. In this modified construction, 
instead of making the tubular extension C 
therein in the shape of a solid sleeve, I make 
the upper half Cof said tubular extension 
integral with the frame A', and extending lon 
gitudinally downward from each side thereof 
I make ears c' c', in which I pivot a semi 
tubular lever F, the upper end C of which 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
So 
 
2 
543,224 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
- 
forms the lower half of said tubular extension tween the stud-pins, and I", and this moye." 
ment continues until the operating-lever I is 
of the frame and operates to clamp the up 
moved forward and downward to a position 
per end of a bottle-neck, while the lower end 
substantially parallel with the tubular por 
E of said lever operates as a rest or support 
tion A' of the upright portion of the cork 
for the lower part of a bottle-neck. In the 
puller frame, at which point the forward trav 
inside of the upper half C of said tubular 
erse of the operating-lever I is complete and 
extension and in the upper surface of the end 
the cork completely withdrawn from the bot 
C of the lever F, I preferably secure semi 
tle; and then by simply reversing the move 
circular cushions c and c, of rubber or other 
ment of the operating-lever I and moving it 
resilient substance, between which the upper 
upward and backward, thereby reversing the 
end of a bottle-neck is received, and in the 
action of the parts above described until it 
lower end F of said lever I preferably secure 
reaches its normal position at the dotted line 
a semicircular cushion f to receive the lower 
part of the bottle-neck and prevent its con 
ac, the cork is automatically removed from 
the screw H and the machine is again ready 
tact with the metal end of the lever F. It 
will readily be seen that this construction, in 
for operation. 
On the base A of the cork-puller frame I 
addition to the advantages hereinbefore de 
scribed, is also adapted to grip the mouths of 
have shown an auxiliary device P for remov 
ing crowns and seals from bottles; but as I 
bottles of different sizes and clamp them 
firmly while the corks are being withdrawn 
have fully described and claimed said device 
in a separate application, filed coincident 
therefrom. 
The operating-lever I of my improved cork 
here with, further description herein is deemed 
puller is provided with a central stud-pin J, 
unnecessary. 
which passes through and rotates freely in 
Having thus fully described my invention 
the hole J in the rear part of the upright 
so as to enable others to construct and use the 
portion of the frame. Upon the operating 
same, what I claim as new, and desire to se 
lever I there is also secured a semidisk K, in 
cure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
which is secured two inwardly - projecting 
S 
stud-pins L and L', and on the periphery of 
1. The combination in a cork-puller, of an 
this semidisk K. there is also an in Wardly 
extension at the lower end of the frame, sub 
projecting cam-surfacek, which extends from 
stantially in line with the travel of the cork 
the point k' around to the point lc at the 
screw, adapted to receive the upper end of a 
stud-pin L, leaving an opening between the 
bottle neck, With an arm or Support at One 
stud-pins L and L' without any cam-surface 
side of and substantially inline with one side 
therein, through which opening the lug in on 
of said tubular extension adapted to engage 
the nut-carrier N passes up between the stud 
one side of the lower part of the bottle neck, 
pins L and L' during a portion of the traverse 
and operate as a lateral support therefor, sub 
of the operating-lever I. 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In operation, at the time when the bottle 
2. The combination in a cork-puller, of an 
mouth is placed in position, as hereinbefore 
extension at the lower end of the frame, at 
described, for removing the cork therefrom, 
one side of and substantially in line with the 
the operating-lever I is normally in substan 
traverse of the cork screw, and adapted to 
tially the position shown by the dotted lineac 
engage one side of the upper end of a bottle 
in Fig. 2. At this time the stud-pin L'thereon 
neck, and a pivoted arm adapted to engage 
is engaged with the slot m in the projection 
and support the opposite side of both the up 
M on the cork-screw carrier M', the end lic' of 
per end and the lower part of a bottle neck, 
the cam le on the semidisk K being then in 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
engagement with the top of the projection n. 
3. The combination in a cork-puller, of an 
on the nut-carrier N, and as the operating 
extension at the lower end of the tubular part 
lever I is moved upward and forward these 
A? of a cork puller frame, a cushion of resil 
parts continue in engagement until the oper 
ient material therein adapted to receive the 
ating-lever I has reached substantially the 
upper end of a bottle, an arm projecting from 
position shown by the dotted lines ac' in Fig. 2. 
the under portion of the lower end of said ex 
At this point in its traverse the screw H has 
tension, substantially in line with one side 
been driven into the cork G and the stud-pin 
thereof, and a cushion in the top of the lower 
L' is just passing out of the rear end of the 
end of said arm adapted to engage the lower 
slot m, and the stud-pin L is just entering the 
part of a bottle neck, substantially as and 
front end of the slot n' in the projection N' 
for the purpose set forth. 
on the nut-carrier N, as is clearly illustrated 
4. The combination in a cork puller, of a 
by the dotte?d lines in Fig. 2, while at the 
cork screw carrier, a nut carrier an operat 
same instant the endle of the cam k has passed 
ing lever, a stud pin on said lever, adapted to 
off of the projection or lug n on the nut 
engage and operate the cork screw carrier, a 
carrier N, and as the operating-lever travels 
stud pin on said lever adapted to engage and 
onward and downward the stud-pin L, operat 
operate the nut carrier of said cork screw, 
ing in the slot in in the nut-carrier N, raises 
and a cam surface thereon adapted to engage 
a lug on the nut carrier, substantially as and 
the nut-carrier, the projection or lug in thereon 
meanwhile passing up into the opening l be: 
for the purpose set forth, 
7 o 
9 O 
95 
ics 
Io5 
IC 
IIS 
I25 
3o 
65 
y 
 
543,224 
3 
5. The combination in a cork puller, of a disk, substantially as and for the purpose set to 
cork screw carrier M' having a projection M forth. 
thereon, and a slot m in said projection, a 
nut carrier N having a projection Nithereon 
and a slot n' in said projection, and a lug in 
on said nut carrier N, an operating lever I 
having a semi-disk K thereon, an inwardly 
projecting cam k on the periphery of said 
semi-disk, and stud pins L and L' in said 
Witnesses: 
FRED EINFELDT, 
ISADOR SOBEL, 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
EDWIN WALKER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543324.txt	. 
S 
. . . 
MAS 
( No Model . ) 
No . 543 , 324 . 
S . M . VAUCLAIN . 
RIVETING MACHINE . 
2 Sheets - Sheet 1 . 
Patented July 23 , 1895 . 
- Bei 
- 
- - 
- 
- 
- 
- - 
il 
- 
- - 
- - 
- 
- 
- - - - - - 
- 
- 
- 
- - 
- 
- 
- 
FIG . 1 . 
a 
5 ! 
- 
= = 
- 
= = vr - r - - - - - r 
- - : = = = = = = = = = = 
ED = = = - - - - - - - 
R 
FILTER 
4 
- - 
- Y = = 
ams = = = - - - - - - - - 
= = = = = = 
r 
F 
PADA 
witnesses , 
Rischleicher : 
bloodurin 
IIZ 
WHERE 
Samuel M . Vauclaize 
Inwentor : 
by hri Attorneys focisouk Howsoer 
. . 
: 
: : . . 
. 
. . 
: : : . . . . . . . . 
: : : 
: : : : : 
: : : 
: : : : 
: 
( No Model . ) 
No . 543 , 324 . 
S . M . VAUCLAIN , 
RIVETING MACHINE , 
. 2 Sheets - - Sheet 2 . 
Patented July 23 , 1895 . 
FIG ; 2 . 
0 
0 
0 
0 
0 
9000 , - 0 . 6 - - 
- 
- 
00 O O O O 
O 
O 
O 
O 
O 
o 
- - 
- - 
- 
O 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- - - 
- 
- 
- 
??????? 
OO 000 
* 
5 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- - 
- 
- - 
- - 
- - 
- 
- - - 
- 
- - - - - - - - 
. 
1 
. 
- 
000 . 000 - - - - 
- - - - - - - - - 
Witnesses : 
Rischleicher 
blooduin 
the technieken 
Inventor : 
Samuel M . Vauclain 
by his Attorneys 
Howson . 
. 
. . 
. 
- 
. 
. 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE . 
SAMUEL M . VAUCLAIN , OF PHILADELPHIA , PENNSYLVANIA . 
RIVETING - MACHINE . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No . 543 , 324 , dated July 23 , 1895 . 
Application filed March 23 , 1893 , Serial No . 467 , 269 . ( No model . ) 
. 
. 
. . . . : 
a 
C 
50 
15 place . 
20 nection with other work as well . 
I ards to a point near the standard B , and this 
To all whom it may concern : 
Be it known that I , SAMUEL M . VAUCLAIN , | portion is preferably flat on the under side ; 
so that the article to be riveted can be drawn 55 
a citizen of the United States , residing in 
- Philadelphia , Pennsylvania ; have invented up as near the riveting - plunger as possible to 
. 
5 . an Improved Riveting - Machine , of which the properly rivet the end rivets . 
The plunger d in the present instance is 
following is a specification . 
The object of my invention is to so con - operated by means of a hydraulic cylinder 
struct a riveting - machine that a locomotive - having suitable pipes and connections at - 60 
boiler can be riveted entirely by the machine tached to the pressure mechanism ; but it will 
20 without readjustment of the boiler . 
be understood that mechanical riveting mech 
In the accompanying drawings ; Figure 1 is | anism may be used without departing from 
; 
: 
. 
. 
1 . 
I will describe my invention in connection 
. 
The anvil b is secured to the standard Bin 05 
a side view of my improved riveting - machine . my invention . 
Fig : 2 is an enlarged view of the head portion ; 
showing the fire - box section of the boiler in any suitable manner and in line with the 
plunger d . 
. As shown in Fig . 2 , the looomotive - boiler is 
with the locomotive - boiler , as it is especially arranged in position so that the riveter can 
. 
adapted for this work ; but it will be under rivet the joint between the fire - box and the 70 . 
stood that the invention can be used in con - trunk of the boiler , the fire - box section being 
in the space under the overhanging portion 
In the ordinary construction of riveters of D ' of the head and between the two standards 
this class the two standards Aand Bare placed A and B . By hanging the boiler in this man 
rias close together as possible , as shown by dot - ner the operator can see every rivet as it is 75 
ted lines in Fig . 1 , and the riveting - head is headed without stooping . Consequently the 
25 usually made flat on top and the boiler is hung rivets can be placed in position more quickly 
in such a manner that the fire - box section will and the head of each riyet properly made . 
swing over the head Binstead of under it , as 
I do not wish to limit myself to the construc 
shown in the drawings . This arrangement tion of the lower portion of the riveter , as 80 
necessitates the readjustment of the boiler in shown in the drawings , as this construction 
30 many cases three or four times , and then a may be modified without departing from my 
number of the rivets have to be headed by invention . 
hand . The hanging of the boiler with the 
fire - box uppermost prevents the operator see 
ing the greater portion of the rivets , as they arranged a distance apart to allow the fire box 
and consequently several of the rivets are a spacing block mounted between the stand 
ards , a bolt , securing the standards together , 
headed at random . 
pended as shown in Fig . 2 , and every rivet | D on the standard A and overhanging the 
40 in the trunk portion as well as the fire - box ' space between the standards A and B to a 
portion can be seen by the operator and can point near the anvil , riveting mechanism in 
. be properly riveted without readjustment . 
said head , the overhanging portion of the head 
 A is a standard secured to another standard being flat on the under side , substantially as 95 
B by tie - bolts C . A spacing - block C is placed and for the purpose set forth . 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
to give sufficient space for the article to be name to this specification in the presence of 
riveted to swing in . The lower portions of two subscribing witnesses . 
tho standards are . mounted in 
a suitable 
foundation , as shown in Fig . 1 . 
Secured to the plate a of the standard A is 
the riveting - head D , the portion D ' of which 
projects over the space between the two stand . I 
I claim as my invention 
The combination of the standards A and B 85 . 
35 are adjusted and riveted without stooping , of a locomotive boiler to swing between them , . . . 
By my invention the boiler can be sus - an avil on the standard B , a riveting head go 
45 between the two standards at the base so as 
SAMUEL M . VAUCLAIN . 
Witnesses : 
JAS . H . M . HAYES , 
JAMES G . KEYS . 
. 
. 
i 
. . 
. 
. 
. i 
2 . 2 . 
: 
- - - * 
. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543424.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 543,424, 
- 
W. K. MoELHENY. 
SMOKE CONSUMING FURNACE, 
Patented July 23, 1895. 
 
 
2 I Y 
 
  
  
 
 
C 
Z 
M 2H2 
C  
Z 
-C- EZ 
|% - 
 
--A 
man-A 
narrara-rr ran urass-wear-r 
unauseu 
Y 
ST 
- E 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
VICTOR. K. McELHENY, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SMOKE-CONSUMING FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 543,424, dated July 23, 1895. 
Application filed November 3, 1894. 
- 
To all tuhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, VICTORK. McELHENY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Smoke-Consum 
ing Furnaces; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the same, reference being had to 
the annexed drawings, making a part of this 
Specification, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, in which- 
Figure 1 is a horizontal section of the fur 
nace, showing a boiler placed in proper posi 
tion. Fig. 2 is a vertical cross-section of the 
furnace, showing the location and arrange 
ment of one of the flues leading from the 
fuel-chamber or furnace to the combustion 
Fig. 3 is a vertical horizontal sec 
chamber. 
tion. 
The present invention has relation to 
Smoke-consuming furnaces; and it consists 
in the peculiar construction and arrange 
ment hereinafter described, and particularly 
pointed out in the claim. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all of the figures of the 
drawings. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the fuel-chamber, which is provided 
With suitable grate-bars a, which grate-bars 
may be located and arranged substantially 
as shown, or they may be differently ar 
ranged, inasmuch as the grate-bars within 
themselves form no particular part of the 
present invention, except that grate - bars 
must be used to carry out the object of the 
present invention. 
The fuel-chamber A is located to one side 
of the boiler B, and is provided with a closed 
top and rear end. From the upper portion of 
the furnace A lead a series of flues C, which 
flues are formed in the walls of the boiler 
furnace proper, and extend downward to a 
point below the chamber D, and horizontally 
below said chamber D, and are extended up 
Ward and into the chamber D. 
The fuel-chamber A is used in the ordinary 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
Serial No. 527,794, (No model.) 
manner, the flame and smoke being conveyed 
through the flues C. As the flame passes 
through the flues C they will become heated, 
thereby consuming the smoke as it passes 
through said flues. The flame will enter the 
chamber D directly below the boiler, from 
whence it is conveyed rearward and brought 
through the flues b in the ordinary manner. 
It will be understood, by locating the flues 
Casillustrated in the drawings, that the flame 
must necessarily travel a circuitous route, 
thereby causing the smoke to mingle with the 
flame to be consumed. 
... It will also be understood that by provid 
ing a series of flues the body of the flame, to 
gether with the smoke, will be divided, there. 
by providing a better means for consuming 
the smoke, inasmuch as the smoke is divided, 
which gives the flames a more direct contact 
upon the particles forming the smoke. 
The flues C are extended laterally from the 
fuel-furnace A, by which arrangement the 
flames are first extended downward below the 
boiler-heating chamber D and thence upward, 
thereby giving the flame a sufficient dis 
tance to travel to better consume the Smoke, 
by which arrangement the smoke is substan 
tially consumed or removed from the flame 
and heat before it reaches the boiler-heating 
chamber. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination of the fuel chamber A, lo 
cated to one side of the boiler furnace, a se 
ries of flues leading from the side of the fuel 
chamber, and extended downward below the 
boiler furnace, and thence upward, and into 
said boiler furnace, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
VICTOR. K. McELHENY. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN N. DUNN, 
DAVID S. McCANN. 
 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543524.txt	:(No Model.) 
J. P. B. FISKE. 
IDEWICE FOR AUTOMATICALLY OPERATING BRAKES AND RHEOSTATS. 
No. 543,524, 
Patented July 30, 1895. 
 
28itv.coocy 
3.T., 
&ype 11 to 
3. O Qg7a-e- 
2(as - &ltitotic 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J ON AT IIAN P. 3. FIS RE, OF A LLIANCE, OHIO. 
DEVICE FOR AUTOMATICALLY OPERATING BRAKES AND RHEOSTATS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,524, dated July 30, 1895. 
- 
Application filed December 6, 1894, Serial No. 531046 (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoNATHAN P. B. FISKE, 
a resident of Alliance, in the county of Stark 
and State of Ohio, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Devices for Au 
tomatically Operating Brakes and Rheostats; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to improved devices 
for automatically operating a brake and rhe 
ostat, the object of the invention being to 
produce simple and efficient means whereby 
to automatically operate a motor-brake and 
rheostat by or through the medium of the ac 
tion of the motor in conjunction with the load 
put upon it. 
A further object is to so construct and 
mount an electric motor that its movement as 
a whole will be utilized in the operation of a 
brake and a rheostat. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in the combination, with a pivotally 
Supported motor, of a brake connected there 
With and operated by the movements thereof. 
The invention also consists in the combi 
nation, with a motor having a lateral pivotal 
Support, of a brake connected with said mo 
tor and operated by the movements thereof. 
The invention also consists in the combi 
nation, with a motor having a lateral pivotal 
support and yielding devices constructed and 
adapted to Sustain the motor in a normal po 
sition when not running, of a brake connected 
with said motor and operated by the move 
Inents thereof. 
The invention also consists in the combi 
nation, with a pivotally-supported electric 
motor, of a brake and a rheostat connected 
therewith and operated thereby. 
The invention also consists in the combi 
nation, with a shaft or axle and a motor hav 
ing a lateral pivotal connection with said 
shaft or axle, of gearing connecting said shaft 
or axle and motor and a brake connected 
with said motor, the operation of the brake 
depending upon the movements of the motor 
as controlled by the load on the motor; and 
the invention also consists in certain novel 
features of construction and combinations 
and arrangements of parts, as hereinafter set 
forth, and pointed out in the claims. 
The accompanying drawing illustrates an 
embodiment of my invention. 
A represents a shaft or axle for conveying 
the power of a motor to the machine or ap 
paratus to be driven, and on this shaft or axle 
the frame or field-magnets a of an electric 
motor B are pivotally supported, said frame 
having an ear (or ears) bat one side for that 
purpose. A gear-wheel c is secured to the 
shaft or axle A and receives motion from a 
pinion c' secured to the armature-shaft d of 
the motor. The motor is sustained in its nor 
mal position relatively to the shaft or axle 
by means of a spring C secured at one end to 
the motor-frame and at the other end to any 
suitable fixed object independent of said 
frame, the capacity of said spring being suf 
ficient to counterbalance the weight of the 
motor, and yet permit a movement thereof, 
when the motor is running, in a manner and 
for a purpose hereinafter explained, and this 
movement of the motor will be cushioned and 
its abruptness checked by means of a dash 
pote, the piston d' of which is connected with 
the lower portion of the motor-frame by a 
link or piston-rod e', the connection of the 
link or pistol-rod with the frame being, of 
course, a pivotal one. 
A lever D is pivotally connected at one end 
to the motor or field-magnet frame a, prefer 
ably at a point in proximity to the connection 
of the latter with the shaft or axle A, or said 
lever might be pivoted to some object inde 
pendent of the motor-frame. 
From its pivo 
tal connection the lever D projects across the 
end of the motor and laterally beyond the 
same, and its free end is provided with a 
weightf. The lever D projects between two 
pins g h, projecting from the motor-frame. 
One end of a chain h' or other flexible device 
is connected with the pin h, and said chain, 
after passing over a pulley i, (supported by a 
device independent of the motor,) is secured 
at its other end to the lever D. A rack-bar 
j is connected with the free end of the lever 
D and meshes with a pinion k, which carries 
a shoel of a starting-rheostat E, so that when 
said lever is moved the rheostat will be oper 
ated. The lever ID constitutes also a brake 
lever, a brake-band m being secured at one 
O 
f5 
2O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
95 
dos 
2 
543,524. 
o 
po 
oc 
To 5 
Ios 
I TS 
5 
end to the lever at the pivotal connection of a movement bodily relatively the reto when 
the latter and at the other end to said lever 
the load on the driven shaft increases or de 
creases, and starting and stopping devices 
between the ends of the latter, said brake 
band being made to pass over and bear upon 
connected with said motor and operated by 
the said movements thereof, substantially as 
a brake-wheel m, secured to the armature 
set forth. 
shaft of the motor. 
When the motor is in operation and consid 
4. The combination with a driven shaft 
erable load is placed on the shaft or axle A, 
and a gear wheel secured thereto, of a motor 
pivotally connected with the shaft, a pinion 
more or less resistance will be offered by the 
gear-wheelc to the pinion c', and consequently 
on the driving member of said motor meshing 
said pinion will tend to ride on the gear-wheel 
with said gear wheel so that when the load 
and thus cause the motor to move down, 
on the driven shaft increases the pinion will 
tend to ride on the periphery of the gear wheel, 
which movement will be utilized to reduce 
and starting and stopping devices connected 
the frictional contact of the brake-band with 
the brake-wheel and thereby permit a freer 
with said motor and operated by the move 
rotation of the armature, as will be presently 
ments thereof, substantially as set forth. 
more fully explained. 
5. The combination with a driven shaft, 
and a gear wheel secured thereto, of an elec 
It will be seen that when the motor moves 
downwardly it will pull upon the chain h", 
tric motor pivotally connected to the shaft, a 
and the other end of said chain, after passing 
pinion carried by the armature of said elec 
over the pulley i, being secured to the lever 
tric motor and meshing with said gear wheel 
D, the latter will be raised and the brake-band 
so that when the load on the driven shaft in 
released, so that when the load on the driven 
creases or decreases the pinion will tend to 
ride on the periphery of the gear wheel, where 
shaft A increases the brake-band will be 
by to cause the motor to have a movement on 
loosened and the freer rotation of the arma 
ture-shaft permitted. It will be seen that 
its pivotal connection with the shaft, and a 
when the lever ID is thus made to rise the 
brake and a rheostat connected with said mo 
rheostat will be operated automatically and 
tor so as to be operated by the said move 
simultaneously with the brake device to throw 
ments thereof, substantially as set forth. 
more or less resistance into the circuit of the 
6. The combination with a driven shaft, of 
a motor geared therewith and so mounted as 
motor. 
When the current is cut off from the motor 
to have a movement bodily in two directions 
and the torque ceases, the weight f, in falling, 
in accordance with the increase or decreaso 
will centralize the field-magnet frame and will 
of the load on the driven shaft and a brake 
act to apply the brake. In a similar manner 
and a rheostat connected with said motor and 
the rheostat will be operated by the lever 
operated by the said movements thereof, sub 
through the medium of the devices above de 
stantially as set forth. 
scribed. The dash-pot serves to cushion or 
7. The combination with a driven shaft 
check the too-rapid movement of the field 
and a motor pivotally connected thereto, of a 
magnet frame, brake, and rheostat. 
spring for counterbalancing the weight of 
My improvements are very simple in con 
said motor, gearing between said motor and 
struction and effectual in all respects in the 
shaft, and a brake connected with the motor 
performance of their functions. 
and operated by the movements thereof on 
I do not wish to limit myself to the precise 
its pivotal connection with the driven shaft, 
details of construction herein set forth; but, 
substantially as set forth. 
1Iaving fully described my invention, what 
8. The combination with a driven shaft, a 
I claim as new, and desire to seeure by Iletters 
gear wheel thereon and an electric motor piv 
Patent, is 
otally connected with said shaft, of a pinion 
1. The combination with an electric motor 
on the armature shaft meshing with said gear 
constructed and adapted to move bodily in 
wheel, a brake wheel carried by said arma 
response to the increase or decrease of the 
ture shaft, and a friction device bearing on 
amount of load put upon it, of starting and 
said brake wheel and connected with the mo 
stopping devices connected with said motor 
tor in such manner that when the motor moves 
:nd operated by said movements thereof, 
on its pivotal connection with the driven shaft, 
substantially as set forth. 
said friction device will be operated relatively 
2. The combination with a driven shaft, of 
to the brake wheel, substantially as set forth. 
an electric motor geared there with and sup: 
9. The combination with a driven shaft, and 
ported in such manner as to be capable of a 
an electric motor pivotally connected thereto 
movement bodily when the amount of the 
and geared there with, of a brake wheel car 
load on the driven shaft increases or de 
ried by the armature shaft, a pivoted lever, a 
creases, and starting and stopping devices 
brake band connected with the pivoted lever 
connected with said motor and operated by 
and bearing on the brake wheel, and devices 
the said movements thereof, substantially as 
carried by the motor whereby to operate said 
set forth. 
lever when the motor moves on its pivotal con 
3. The combination with a driven shaft, of 
nection with the driven shaft, substantially 
a motor pivotally connected thereto, said mo 
as set forth. 
tor being so geared to the shaft as to have 
10. The combination with a driven shaft, a 
3O 
40 
45 
50 
55 
65 
downwardly the lever will be raised, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination with a driven shaft, an 
electric motor pivotally connected thereto and 
gearing between said motor and shaft, of a 
brake wheel on the armature shaft, a pivoted 
lever, a brake band connected with said lever 
and bearing on the brake wheel, devices con 
nected with the motor for causing said lever 
to move to release the brake when the motor 
moves on its connection with the driven shaft, 
a rheostat, a pinion carried by the contact 
brush of said rheostat, and a rack bar mesh 
ing with said pinion and connected with said 
pivoted lever, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
JONATHAN P. B. FISKE. 
40 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. P. SMITH, 
H. W. HARRIs. 
543,524 
3 
25 
30 
35 
O 
motor pivotally connected at one side thereto 
and gearing between said shaft and motor, a 
spring for counterbalancing said motor, a dash 
pot to cushion the movement of the motor on 
its pivotal connection with the driven shaft, 
a brake wheel carried by the driving part of 
the motor, a pivoted lever, a brake band con 
nected with said lever and bearing on said 
brake wheel, and devices connected with the 
motor for operating said lever to operate the 
brake when the motor moves on its pivotal 
connection with the driven shaft, substan 
tially as set forth. 
11. The combination with a driven shaft, of 
a motor having a lateral pivotal connection 
with said driven shaft, gearing between said 
motor and shaft, a brake wheel on the motor 
shaft, a pivoted lever, a weight on said lever, 
a brake band connected with said lever and 
bearing on said brake wheel, a pulley, and a 
flexible device passing over said pulley and 
connected at its ends to the motor and lever 
respectively so that when the motor noves 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543625.txt	No Model.) 
J. G. & R. H. HENDERSON, 
. 
MACHINE FOR BORING JOISTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT WIRING, 
No. 543,625. 
Patented July 30, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
AI 
\---- 
928)ibvicsecs. 
- 
7. ck?, (22.2% 
44%tez 
- 
As 
tric 
31-uo vitovs. 
u/672 2-2 - 6 1/ez-z-6(erseizu 
722 & e2 & 7/7/222aze-rez. 
, 4am-6A, Ava 444 ee-, 
&letozawa 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN G. HENDERSON AND ROBERT H. HENDERSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MACHINE FOR BORNG JOSS FOR ELECTRIC-LIGHT WRNG, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,625, dated July 30, 1895. 
Application filed October 3, 1894, Serial No. 524,846 (No model, 
w 
d 
25 desired. 
To all, Luhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that we, JOHN G. HENDERSON 
and ROBERTH. HENDERSON, of Chicago, Cook 
county, Illinois, have invented a new and use 
5 ful Machine for Boring Joists for Electric 
Light Wiring, which is made and used sub 
stantially as set forth hereinafter, and shown 
in the accompanying drawing, which is a per 
spective view of the machine. 
The object of this invention is to enable the 
operator to stand on the floor beneath and 
bore holes in the joist overhead for the pur 
pose of stringing electric-light wires. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
I5 and use our invention we proceed to describe 
its construction and operation. 
The apparatus is made with a long handle 
or column A, having an extensible part B. 
These are made, preferably, of gas-pipes, with 
2 o part B forming a support and fulcrum and 
sliding up inside of part A, so it may be drawn 
out to suit the height of rooms, and a clamp 
screw Hadapted to hold this as adjusted and 
the head at the proper height for boring, as 
The handle or column A bears head D on 
its top end, in which is mounted a shaft held 
securely and free to rotate. This shaft bears 
a removable boring-bit C held securely, and 
The wheelFEbears a link-chain belt F, which 
passes down over an idler G on the column. A 
below, so the bit may be turned for boring by 
drawing down the belt by hand on one side, 
35 and withdrawn by drawing the belt down on 
the other side. 
Any suitable form of wheel and belt may 
In using this machine the operator grasps 
4o the column with his left hand and presses the 
bit against the joist, and with his right hand 
grasps the nearest chain and draws down. 
This imparts the motion to the bit and bores 
the hole. Then by grasping the chain or belt 
45 on the other side the bit is turned backward 
and comes out. 
All machines previously used for boring 
joists for electric-light wiring have used 
clamps on the joist to hold the machine in 
So place, a screw-feed to force the bit through 
3o a sprocket-wheel E to turn the bit by. 
be used. 
 
55 
the joist, and a crank to transmit motion to 
the bit. 
The adjustment of the clamps requires time 
and labor, and the running back of the Screw 
feed requires as much time and labor as it 
takes to bore the hole, and the complicated 
machinery.necessary to run a force screw-feed 
makes the chain run so hard that it is neces 
sary to use a crank to give the operator lever 
age. The weight of these appliances makes 
it difficult to adjust the machine to its work 
far above the head of the operator. The re 
sult is that there is none of them in use or on 
sale in Chicago at the present time. 
Having thus set forth the state of the art at 
the present time, we will proceed to show what 
we claim to have accomplished in the ad 
vancement of the art by our invention. 
Our machine is a light portable tool to be 
held in the hand and rest on the floor. Used 
thus it becomes a lever of the third class. The 
floor being the fulcrum, the Working-point be 
ing the bit, and the power being applied to 
the middle portion of the shaft by the hand 
of the operator. This pressure of the hand, 
we have discovered, is amply sufficient to 
force the bit through the joist when being ro 
tated by drawing down on the chain and draw 
it out again when the hole is bored through 
the joist. This enables us to dispense with 
the clamps on the joist, the screw-feed, and 
the crank, together with the time and labor 
required to adjust the clamps and run back 
the screw-feed, and leaving the bit perfectly 
free of cogs or screws. It runs So easily that 
a direct pull on the chain is amply sufficient to 
turn it and causes it to run much faster and 
steadier than can be done with a crank. 
The Weight of the machine is so small that 
it can be moved from one place to another 
with one hand while the other holds the chain 
ready to start the instant the bit touches the 
joist, thus multiplying the Speed many times. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination in an overhead portable 
boring machine of an extension adapted to rest 
on the floor and a column adjustable thereon, 
provided at the top with a bearing for the ro 
tatable bit shank, a sprocket wheel directly Ioo 
85 
go 
95 
75 
8. 
2 
543,625 
secured to the bit shank, a revoluble sprocket extending down to turn the bit by, substan 
idler at the lower end of the column, and an tially as set forth. 
endless driving chain belt connecting the 
Sprockets. 
2. In a boring machine a portable handle or 
Column provided with an adjustable extension 
below and a head above bearing a rotatable 
shaft holding a boring bit and a chain or belt 
JOHN G, HENDERSON 
ROBERT H. HENDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM LOEHDE, 
J. H. HUTCHINSON. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543725.txt	... (No Model.) 
No. 543,725, 
 
H. COOK. 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR, 
Sheets-Sheet ..., 
Patented July 30, 1895. 
 
E. 
  
 
EE E 
 
 
 
 
- 
RP EEE 
es es 
A 
7%zzese 
Ya. 
2.7% Q. 20of%. 
u14- 2 44. 
2/ 
z- 
ha 
 
(No Model.) 
H, COOK. 
CASH. REGISTER AND INDICATOR, 
Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 543,725, 
Patented July 30, 1895. 
 
 
N Z. 
s i. 
NN 
. 
 
El-EB 
74 
. 
 
 
 
 
. 
. 
 
Z/ 
 
 
" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 543,725, 
 
H. COOK, 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR, 
7 sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented July 30, 1895. 
sissists axisssssssssssrara 
N N 
N N 
N N N N N N N N iN N N N R N N N S. 
(No Model.) 
H. COOK. 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR, 
Sheets--Sheet 4. 
No. 543,725, 
Patented July 30, 1895. 
? 
A14% 4 
2 5- - -/2 
 
z/Z 
z 
agayyy 
 
z/ 
|JV7 TWESSAS 
t 
374 a loo?aaz NYS 
N - 
1%ze 4-4. 
 
(No Model.) 
H, COOK, 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR, 
7 sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 543,725, 
Patented July 30, 1895, 
27-2 
2fa 
A. 
 
1 
  
AIE It 
| 
 
H 
WLZZYilill-2 
mi EHeize EEE 
III.i.az TM 
Eas 
5. 
SUI 
Mills NEN3 lessell US 
 
H.R. 
 
  
 
 
 
WITNESSES. 
WWJZEWTOR 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 543,725, 
 
H, COOK, 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR, 
7 sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented July 30, 1895. 
IWPENTOR 
(No Model.) 
H. COOK, 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR 
7. Sheets-Sheet . 
* No. 543,725. 
- 
Patented July 30, 1895. 
WITNESSES. 
/7 
INVENTOR 
Jze 4-6 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HUGO COOK, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
CASH REGISTER AND INDICATOR. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 543,725, dated July 30, 1895. 
Application filed January 17, 1893, Serial No,458,642, (No model.) 
d 
To all whom it nag concern. 
Be it known that I, HUGO COOK, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Dayton, in 
the county of Montgomery and State of Ohio, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Cash Registers and Indicators, 
of which the following is a description, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of this specification. 
My invention relates primarily to a new 
mechanical movement for such machines, and 
Secondarily to the various combinations nec 
SSary to the embodiment of said movement 
in a complete machine suitable for the market, 
all as will be hereinafter set forth, and more 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a top plan view of a structure em 
bodying and illustrating my new mechanical 
movement with the handle of the driving 
member in normal position; Fig. 2, a corre 
sponding view with the handle given about 
three-quarters of a revolution from normal po 
sition; Fig. 3, an end view with the handle 
in the position shown in Fig. 1; Fig. 4, an end 
view with the handle in the position shown in 
Fig. 2; Fig. 5, a vertical longitudinal section 
With the handle in normal position; Fig. 6, a 
detail of the driving member; Fig. 7, a sec 
tional detail showing the connecting devices 
between the driving member and the indicat 
ing member; Fig. 8, a front elevation of a 
cash register and indicator embodying my 
new mechanical movement; Fig. 9, a detail of 
the bell-crank frame upon which the register 
ing-wheels are mounted; Fig. 10, a vertical 
Section of the machine on the line 10 10 of 
- Fig. 8, with one of the operating-keys pressed 
in; Fig. 11, a Sectional detail showing a plan 
view of the registering-wheels and adjacent 
parts; Fig. 12, a sectional plan view approxi 
mately on the line 1212 of Fig. 10 with most 
of the indicating and registering devices 
broken away to expose the parts beneath; Fig. 
13, a detail view of one of the operating-keys 
and its guide and detent-plates; Fig. 14, a de 
tail view, in rear elevation, of the driving-arm 
and locking devices co-operating there with; 
Fig. 15, a detail view of the driving-gear and 
cam co-operating with the registering-wheels; 
Fig. 16, a Vertical section of the same; Fig. 17, 
a vertical section of the machine approxi 
mately on the line 1717 of Figs. 10 and 12, with 
the lower part of the indicating-dial and its 
hub broken away to expose the parts beyond; 
Fig. 18, a sectional detail just within the front 
Wall of the casing, showing the driving-gear 
and cam and the registering-wheels and gear's 
co-operating there with; and Fig. 19, a rear 
elevation of the machine with the rear Wall of 
the casing removed and part of the ratchet 
upon the driving-shaft broken away to expose 
the notched locking-disk on the indicator. 
The same letters of reference are used to 
indicate identical parts in all the figures. 
My new mechanical movement, illustrated 
in the first seven figures of the dra Wings, con 
sists of three principal elements-to wit, a 
driving member, an indicating member, and 
a registering member. 
The driving member has a uniform move 
ment at each separate operation, and is auto 
matically connected with the indicating mem 
ber during the first half of its movement, for 
the purpose of picking up the latter and car 
rying it to initial position. The driving mem 
ber continues to carry the indicating member 
with it during the second half of its move 
ment until they are disconnected at a point 
determined by the amount to be indicated, 
and simultaneously with the disconnection of 
the indicating member the registering mem 
ber is connected with the driving member 
and moved by it during the remaining portion 
of this second half of movement of the driv 
ing member. At the end of the movement of 
the driving member the registering member 
is disconnected from it, so that at the next 
forward movement of the driving member 
the registering member remains stationary, 
while the driving member picks up the indi 
cating member at that point at which it has 
been left and carries it forward to initial po 
sition again, as above described. It will thus 
be understood that the first half of the move 
ment of the driving member is employed to 
pick up the indicating member and carry it 
to initial position and thereby destroy the 
previous indication, and that the second half 
of the movement of the driving member is 
employed to first turn the indicating member 
to position to effect the new indication and 
to then turn the registering member to regis 
ter that indication, the last half of the move 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
 
2 
543,725 
75 
ment of the driving member being thus di 
vided between the indicating member and the 
registering member in proportions deter 
mined by the amount to be indicated and reg 
istered, 
So far as I am aware this general mode of 
operation is broadly new, and I desire to se 
cure the same, and the combination of ele 
ments necessary to carry it out, as my inven 
tion, without regard to the form of arrange 
ment of the parts employed. 
I am aware that heretofore it has been com 
mon to connect a driving member to a regis 
tering member by clutches, ratchets, and 
other intermediate devices well known to the 
art, but I believe myself to be the first to di 
rectly connect and disconnect a registering 
member and a single driving member con 
nected and disconnected by any one of a se 
ries of keys, one member mounted on a mov 
able Support and adapted to engage and dis 
engage the other. In the first seven figures 
of the drawings I have illustrated a very sim 
ple structure by which this new movement 
may be explained, and from which its em 
bodiment in a complete machine, illustrated 
in the remaining figures of the drawings, may 
be readily understood. As there illustrated, 
the driver consists of a rotary member A, 
mounted upon a horizontal shaft B, which 
projects at its ends through bearing-open 
ings in the opposite standards C D of the 
supporting framework. The driving mem 
ber A is provided on its right-hand side with 
a laterally-projecting hub or sleeve which 
extends through the opening in the standard 
D, around the shaft B, Fig. 5, and has secured 
to its projecting end an operating crank or 
handle E. The member A and handle E are 
not fast to the shaft B, but are connected to 
it by pins FG, respectively, which fit in a 
longitudinal groove H in the shaft B, so that 
the latter and the member A and operating 
handle must turn together, while the shaft is 
free to be slid longitudinally, while the mem 
ber A and handle are held from such move 
ment by the standard D. The driving mem 
ber A is in this instance composed of three 
parts--a gear-Wheel I, a cam-disk J, and an 
annular flange or ring K, all cast integral 
the purpose of which parts will be presently 
explained. The indicating member in this 
instance consists of a numbered wheel L, car 
lied by or formed integral with a large cylin 
drical hub M, mounted upon the shaft B be 
tween the driving member A and the left-hand 
standard C. A screw N, passed through the 
hub MI, enters a circumferential groove O in 
the shaft B, so that while the shaft and indi 
cating member are free to turn independently 
of each other they must move longitudinally 
together. The right-hand end of the hub M 
is provided with two diametrically-opposite 
bores P, Fig. 7, in which are screwed plugs Q, 
provided with bores in which fit sliding pins 
or plungers R., having enlarged inner ends or 
heads, between which and the ends of the 
bores P are confined coiled springs S, which 
yieldingly press the pins R outward. These 
pins co-operate with the ring IS upon the driv- 7 p. 
ing member A, Fig. 6, and with two diametri 
cally-opposite recesses or cut-away spaces T 
in said ring. Now, with the parts in the po 
sition shown in Fig. 1, with the operating-han 
dle and driving member in normal position 
and the spring-plungers R engaged with the 
recesses T in the ring K of the driving mem 
ber, it will be seen that if the operating-han 
dle and driving member be turned forward 
in the direction of the arrow they will carry 
the indicating member with them and that if 
at any point in their forward movement the 
shaft B be slid to the left it will carry the in 
dicating member with it and disengage the 
pins R from the driving member, whereupon 
the indicating member will come to rest and 
the driving member continue its movement 
alone. To positively arrest and lock the in 
dicating member when it is disengaged from 
the driving member in this manner the wheel 
L has fast or formed upon its left-hand side 
a toothed ring or ratchet U, which co-operates 
with a locking tooth or lug V upon the inner 
face of the standard C. When the indicating 
member is slid to the left, the lug W engages 
a notch in the ratchet U and locks the mem 
ber from further movement. 
At the end of the movement of the driv 
ing member the indicating member is slid 
to the right again by means which may be 
now described. Pivotally supported upon 
the upper end of a post X is a horizontal bell 
crank composed of the arms YZ, the latter of 
which is forked and embraces the hub MI of 
the indicating member and is provided with 
pins A, which fit in a circumferential groove 
B' in said hub. The arm Y of the bell-crank 
is formed into or has projecting from its end 
a spindle C", upon which is mounted a friction 
collar D in line and adapted to co-operate 
with the cam-disk J of the driving member. 
When the parts are in normal position, (shown 
in Figs. 1 and 3,) the cam-disk engages the 
collar D' and holds the bell-crank in the po 
sition shown in Fig. 1, with its arm Y in rear 
most position and its arm Z thrown to the 
right and thereby holding the indicating 
member in its right-hand position. When 
the driving member completes one-half of a 
forward revolution the cut-away portion of 
the cam-disk J is brought opposite the fric 
tion-collar D'. The sla?t B is thereupon free 
to be slid to the left, carrying the indicating 
member out of engagement with the driving 
member and rocking the bell-crank and throw 
ing its alm Y forward until the collar D' en 
gages the reduced periphery of the cam-disk 
J, as seen in Figs. 2 and 4. When the oper 
ating-handle and driving member reach nor 
mal position, however, the shoulder of the 
cam-disk will strike the collar D and throw 
the arm Y of the bell-crank rearward again, 
as seen in Fig. 3, thereby shifting the indi 
dicating member N to the right to the posi 
13o 
95 
ICO 
I o5 
I I5 
20 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
 
543,725 
Io 
5 
25 
35 
one of its numbers beneath the pointer W and 
tion shown in Fig. 1. If at this movement of 
the indicating member the pins R stand op 
the driving member will move on to normal 
posite the openings T in the ring K of the 
position. In this manner, after an indication 
driving member the pins will enter said open. 
has been made and the driver returned to 
normal position, the driver will, during the 
ings, as indicated in Fig. 1; but if the pins 
first half of its next revolution, pick up the 
and openings are not opposite each other at 
indicating member and carry it to initial po 
such movement of the indicating member the 
sition with one or the other of its naughts be 
ends of the pins will strike the surface of the 
neath the pointer W, and from this point will 
ring and be forced to the left, into the bores 
carry the indicating member with it until dis 
P, against the resistance of the springs L., and 
connected from it at the point desired by the 
When, at the next forward movement of the 
driving member, they come opposite the open 
sliding of the shaft B to the left. Thus at 
ingST they will spring into them and connect 
each operation the indicator is first moved 
the indicating member with the driving mem 
from the indicating number in one series to 
ber, so that from this point forward the driv 
the Zero between that series and the Second 
ing member will carry the indicating member 
one, and then forward to the new indicating 
number in said second series, the indications 
with it until the shaft B. is slid to the left to 
being alternately made by numbers in the two 
disconnect them in the manner before de 
Series. 
scribed. 
A brake-spring E, secured to the base-plate 
The indicating-wheel L is provided with two 
F and extending upwardly and curved over 
series of numbers arranged in backward order 
and bearing upon the hub M, overcomes the 
relatively to the direction of movement of the 
Wheel, and which in this instance represent 
frictional connection between the pins R and 
face of the ring K and prevents the indicat 
multiples of one from 1 to 19, with two diamet 
rically-opposite naughts between the two se 
ing member from being turned by the driv 
ing member except when the pins R are en 
ries. A pointer W, projecting over the wheel, 
in this instance, indicates the indicating-point. 
gaged with the recesses in the ring K. 
Having now described the indicating mem 
When the indicating member stands with 
either of its naughts beneath this pointer, it 
ber and its mode of operation, I will next de 
may be said to be in initial position, as seen 
scribe the registering member, which, in this 
instance, consists of a registering-wheel G', 
in Fig. 1. 
If, with the parts in the position 
shown in said figure, the operating-handle and 
mounted on the spindle C of the bell-crank 
arm Y, and having fast upon its right-hand 
driving member be turned forward to the posi 
side or hub a pinion H', adapted to be thrown 
tion shown in Figs. 2 and 4, and the number 10 
be brought under the pointer W, and the shaft 
into and out of mesh with the gear-wheel I of 
B be thereupon slid to the left, the indicating 
the driving member. When the parts are in 
normal position, (shown in Figs. 1 and 3,) the 
member will be disengaged from the driving 
cam disk J of the driving member holds the 
member and the wheel I will stand with its 
number 10 at the indicating-point, as seen in 
arm Y of the bell-crank in its rearmost posi 
tion and the pinion H' out of engagement with 
Fig. 2, while the driving member will continue 
the gear-wheel I; but when the shaft B is slid 
its movement alone, thus leaving an indica 
to the left, carrying the indicating member 
tion of the number 10 exposed to view. At 
with it and disconnecting it from the driving 
the end of the movement of the driving mem 
member and rocking the bell-crank and throw 
ber the cam-disk J will rock the bell-crank 
and shift the indicating member to the right, 
ing its arm Y forward, in the manner before 
causing the pins R to engage the surface of 
described, the pinion H' is thrown into mesh 
with the gear I, and thus the registering-wheel 
the ring K and be forced into the bores P in 
is connected with the driving member simul 
the hub M. When the driving member is in 
normal position, the openings T in the ring K 
taneously with the disengagement of the in 
stand in approximately a horizontal plane. 
dicator from said member. As before ex 
plained, the shaft B cannot be slid to the left 
When the driving member is now turned for 
until the driving member has completed the 
ward until the openings are brought into ver 
tical line with each other, opposite the pins R, 
first half of its revolution and carried the in 
dicating member to initial position; but when, 
the latter will spring into them and the driver. 
during the second half of the revolution of 
and indicator be thereby connected. The 
driving member will thereupon carry the in 
the driving member, the shaft B is slid to the 
left the indicating member is disconnected 
dicating member on with it, and when it has 
from the driving member and the registering 
completed one-half of its movement one of the 
member simultaneously connected with the 
naughts upon the wheel L will stand beneath 
the pointer W. During the further move 
driving member, so that during the remain 
ing portion of the movement of the driving 
ment of the driving member the numbers in 
member it turns the registering member with 
the next series upon the wheel L will success 
ively pass under the pointer W in backward 
it until as it reaches normal position the cam 
order until the shaft B is slid to the left again 
J throws the arm Y of the bell-crank rearward 
again and disengages the pinion H from the 
and the indicating member thereby discon 
nected from the driving member, whereupon 
gear I. The second half of the movement of 
the indicating member will come to rest with the driving member is thus divided between 
55 
65 
 
75 
go 
95 
CO 
IOS 
c 
I I5 
I 30 
543,725 
-: 
o 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
I o5 
IIS 
25 
o 
2 C. 
25 
35 
49 
the indicating and the registering members in 
proportions determined by the point in its 
movement at which the sihaft 3 is slid to the 
left and the indicating member disconnected 
from and the registering member connected 
with the driving member. The registering 
wheel G' is provided with a single series of 
numbers corresponding to one of the series 
upon the indicator-wheel I and turns forward 
in the order of its numbers instead of back 
ward relatively thereto, as does the indicator 
wheel. It may be assumed, in the present in 
stance, that the second half of the revolution 
of the driving member is divided into twenty 
equal portions. If, now, the driving member 
be turned forward five-twentieths of the sec 
ond half of its revolution before the indicat 
ing member is disconnected from it, the latter 
will be turned five-twentieths of a half- rewo 
lution, and five of the twenty numbers in one 
series will pass in backward order beneath the 
pointer W, bringing the number 15 beneath 
said pointer. When the indicating member 
is now disconnected from the driving member 
and the registering member simultaneously 
connected with the driving member, the driv 
ing member will turn the registering member 
forward during the remaining fifteen-twen 
tieths of its second half of revolution, and will 
thereby turn the registering-wheel G' forward 
fifteen numbers and, assuming a 0 on said 
wheel to have been at the reading-point in 
Fig. 1, cause the number 15 to be exposed at 
that point. Of the second half of the revolu 
tion of the driving member five-twentieths 
have thus been transmitted to the indicating 
member and the remaining fifteen-twentieths 
to the registering member, thereby causing 
the number 15 to be exposed upon the indi 
cating linember and fifteen to be added upon 
the registering member. If the indicating 
member be disconnected from the driving 
member and the registering member con 
nected with the driving member, when the lat 
ter has completed seven-twentieths of the sec 
ond half of its revolution the number 13 would 
remain exposed upon the indicator and thir 
teen would be added upon the registering 
wheel. If the driver had completed fifteen 
twentieths of its second half of revolution be 
fore the shifting of the indicating and regis 
tering membel's was effected, fifteen of the 
numbers in one series on the indicating-wheel 
would pass in backward order under the 
pointer and the number 5 would remain ex 
losed at the indicating-point, while five would 
be added upon the registering-wheel by the 
last five-twentieths of the half-revolution of 
the driving member, and so on, the second 
half of the movement of the driving member 
being in this manner, as before stated, divided 
between the indicating and registering mem 
be's in proportions determined by the point 
at which the disconnection of the indicating 
member from and the connection of the reg 
istering member with the driving member was 
effected. The pinion II' of the registering 
member, as will have been understood, is pro 
vided with half as many teeth as the gear I, 
so that during the time the pinion is engaged 
with the gear it turns twice as many degrees 
of revolution as the gear. It will also be un 
derstood that owing to the cam J only one 
half of the gear I is ever engaged with the 
pinion, so that the remaining half of the gear 
is unnecessary. A semicircular toothed seg 
ment might, therefore, be substituted for the 
geal'. 
For the purpose of positively locking the 
registering member when it is disconnected 
from the driving member at the end of the 
movement of the latter, I provide a locking 
plate I'', secured to the upper end of a post J', 
and which is adapted to engage and lock the 
pinion II' when the latter is thrown rearward 
by the cam J at the end of the movement of 
the driving member, as seen in Fig. 3. 
For the purpose of arresting the operating 
handle E when it reaches normal position, 
there is provided the usual spring-stop IX", con 
sisting of a rod passed through and adapted 
to slide in a hole in an arm L' of the frame 
work, being provided with a stop-pin M' at 
one side of said arm and surrounded by a 
coiled spring N' confined between the op 
posite side of the arm or the bottom of a 
recess therein, and a second pin O' passed 
through the rod. The spring N' yieldingly 
holds the rod in its outer position in the path 
of travel of the operating-handle E, but it 
may be pushed in Ward out of the path of the 
handle E to permit the latter to move forward, 
and will spring outward to normal position 
again as soon as the handle has passed. 
I am aware that it has heretofore been pro 
posed to combine a rotary driving member, 
making a complete revolution at each opera 
tion, With a rotary in clicator and intermediate 
devices, by which the driving member dur 
ing the first half of its revolution will pick 
up the indicator and carry it to initial posi 
tion and during the second half of its revo 
lution will carry the indicator forward from 
initial position to the new indication, at which 
point the indicating member will be discon 
nected from the driving member and the lat 
ter will move on to normal position alone. 
I am also aware that it has been proposed 
to combine a rotary registering member with 
such driving member, indicating member, 
and in termediate devices in such manner 
that the driving member will carry the reg 
istering member with the indicating mem 
ber from the initial position of the latter to 
the point, at willich it is disconnected from the 
driving member, the registering member be 
ing simultaneously disconnected from the 
driving member; but, as I have before stated, 
I believe I am the first in the art to combine 
a driving member with an indicating and a 
registering member by any sort of interme 
diate or connecting devices which will cause 
the driving member to pick up the indicating 
member and carry it to initial position during 
45 
 
548,725 
C 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
7 o 
75 
90 
95 
Od 
Io5 
O 
II5 
the first half of the movement of the driving 
member, and during the second half of the 
movement of the driving member cause the 
latter to first carry the indicating member 
from initial position to the new indication 
and then release the indicating member and 
become connected to the registering member 
and transmit its movement to the latter dur 
ing the remaining portion of the second half 
of its movement, whereby, after the indicator 
has been moved to initial position during the 
first half of the movement of said driving 
member, the second half of the movement of 
said member is divided between the indicat 
ing and registering members in proportions 
determined by the point at which the discon 
nection of the one from and the connection of 
the other with the driving member is effected; 
and I desire to secure as my invention the 
combination of any sort of a driving member 
with any sort of indicating and registering 
members by any sort of intermediate devices 
by which such mode of operation may be car 
ried out. 
Having now explained my new mechanical 
movement, I will proceed to describe its em 
bodiment in a complete cash register and in 
dicator suitable for the market, reference be 
ing had to Figs. S to 19, inclusive. 
As seen in Fig. 10 there is a central rotary 
and horizontally-movable shaft B, correspond 
ing to the shaft B heretofore described, 
mounted at its rear end in a bearing P' upon 
the rear Wall Q of the casing and projecting 
at its forward end through the front wall R' 
of the casing. Fitting over and around the 
front end of the shaft B is a cap or sleeve S', 
which extends through the front wall of the 
Casing arid has fast upon or integral with its 
inner end the driving member A, while the 
Operating handle or crank E is fast upon or 
formed integral with its outer end. The sleeve 
S' is splined to the shaft B at T', so that the 
operating-handle and driving member A turn 
With the shaft, but the latter is free to move 
longitudinally without them. Loosely mount 
ed upon the shaft B, in rear of the driving 
member A, is the hub or drum M of the indi 
cating member, carrying, in this instance, in 
stead of the indicating-wheel I, a flat dial U', 
bearing two series of equidistant indicating 
members, each representing the nine digits, 
with diametrically-opposite naughts between 
the two series, Fig. 8. The numbers upon this 
dial are adapted to be exposed singly at a 
sight-opening W' in the upper part of the front 
wall of the casing. The hub M is free to turn 
upon the shaft B, but is held from longitudi 
nal movement thereon by a collar W, fast 
upon the shaft at the front end of the hub, 
and by the hub X of an arm Y fast upon the 
shaft immediately in rear of the hub M, and 
hereinafter described. The front end of the 
hub M is provided with the bores P, having 
the spring-pressed rods R confined in them 
by the Screw-plugs Q, and arranged to co-op 
erate with recesses in the driving member A 
in the manner heretofore described. These 
recesses, as seen in Figs. 15 and 16, are slightly 
different in form from those in Fig. 6, and 
have at one side lugs Z, against which the 
pins R are adapted to strike, as well as to en 
gage the recesses themselves. The hub Mis 
provided with a circumferential groove B', in 
which fit pins A upon the forked arm Z of 
the bell-crank, which is, in this instance, piv 
oted at its angle between lugs or ears Aupon 
the side of the casing, Fig. 11. The arm Y of 
the bell-crank has mounted on it a train of 
registering - wheels B, the primary one of 
which corresponds to the registering-wheel 
G' heretofore described, and has fast upon it 
a pinion H', corresponding to the pinion H' 
in Figs. 1 to 5, and co-operating with the gear 
I of the driving member in the same manner. 
The cam-disk J of the driving member co-op 
erates with the extreme forward end of the 
arm Y, or the spindle upon which the regis 
tering-wheels are mounted, to throw the pin 
ion H' out of mesh with the gear I at the end 
of the stroke of the operating-handle. 
As seen in Fig. 9 the arm Y of the bell 
crank is provided with a pendent curved arm 
C terminating in a spindie upon which are 
mounted the usual set of transfer-gears D, 
which co-operate with the registering-wheels 
upon the arm Y in the usual manner to cause 
the complete revolution of each wheel to be 
added upon the next higher wheel of the se 
ries. The side of the casing is provided with 
two reading-openings E F opposite the reg 
istering-wheels B, through which the nun 
bers upon the latter can be seen. A locking 
lug or tooth G' is secured upon the inner face 
of the casing in position to engage the pinion 
H' when the latter is thrown out of mesh with 
the gear I and lock the same, as seen in Fig.11. 
In the explanation of my new mechanical 
movement no means was described for sliding 
the shaft B to disconnect the indicator from 
the driving member except the hand of the 
operator, but in the machine now being de 
scribed this movement of the shaft is effected 
automatically by the operating-keys. These 
keys Hare in this instance nine in number, 
representing the nine digits, and arranged in 
the are of a circle concentric to the shaft B, 
as seen in Fig. 8. They are mounted near 
their front ends in the front wall R. of the 
casing and their rear ends pass through holes 
in a flange-plate 1 formed upon the casing. 
Coiled springs J, surrounding the keys be 
tween said flange-plate, and pins K, passed 
through the keys, yieldingly hold the keys in 
their outer position, their outward movement 
being limited by pins L' passed through them 
near their front ends and engaging the front 
wall of the casing. The rear ends of the keys 
are tapered or beveled off and are provided 
with notches M. Mounted in a guideway in 
the flange-plate I" is a semicircular sliding 
detent-plate Nprovided with a series of open 
ings O' slightly overlapping the respective 
openings in the flange-plate I, through which 
 
6 
543,725 
Io 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the ends of the keys pass, the ends of the keys 
also projecting through the openings O' in the 
detent-plate. A coiled spring P, connected to 
one end of the curved plate N, yieldingly 
holds it in normal position. When any one of 
the operating-keys is pressed inward to its 
limit of movement, its beveled rear end will 
press the detent-plateNaside until the notch 
in the key comes opposite the plate, where 
upon the latter will spring back into the notch 
and hold the key in its inner position. When 
the detent-plate is again moved, either by the 
pressing in of any other key, or by other 
means, the key which had been first pressed 
in will be released and its spring will throw 
it outward to normal position. When any 
key is pressed in and caught by the detent 
plate, its rear end projects into the path of 
travel of a cam Q upon the forward side 
of the outer end of the arm Y, which is 
fast upon the shaft B, as before described, 
the result being that when in the revolution 
of the operating-handle and shaft the cam Q 
strikes and rides over the rear end of the op 
erated key the shaft B will be forced rear 
ward, carrying the hub M with it and disen 
gaging the indicating member from the driv 
ing member, so that the indicator will come 
to rest while the operating-handle and parts 
turning with it will move on to normal posi 
tion alone. The arm Y is secured upon the 
shaft B at right angles to the operating-han 
dle E, so that when the latter is in its normal 
position (shown in Fig. 8) the arm Y will oc 
cupy a horizontal position at the left of the 
central shaft B. It results from this that the 
operating-handle and driver complete a half 
revolution from normal position before the 
arm Y is carried around to position to engage 
the operated key. The first half of the revo 
lution of the operating-handle and driving 
member is employed to pick up the indicator 
where it has been left by the previous opera 
tion and carry it to initial position, as in the 
construction illustrated in the first seven fig 
ures of the drawings and heretofore described. 
During the second half of the revolution of 
the driver the indicator is carried with it un 
til the cam Qupon the arm Ystrikes the key 
which has been pressed in, whereupon the 
shaft B will be slid rearward, the indicator 
disengaged from the driver, the bell-crank 
rocked, and the registering-wheels thrown into 
connection with the driver, and from that 
point on to normal position the movement of 
the driver will be transmitted to the register 
ing-wheels. Thus, in Fig. 8, if the 9 key be 
pressed in and the operating-handle be given 
a complete revolution the indicator will be 
picked up and turned to initial position, at 
which point the arm Y will stand in a hori 
Zontal position. From this point the indica 
tor will be carried on by the driver until the 
cam upon the arm. Y' strikes the 9 key, at 
which moment the number 9 will stand oppo 
site the reading-opening V. The indicator 
will be disengaged from the driver as the cam 
rides over the 9 key, and its number 9 will 
remain exposed, while the register will be si 
multaneously thrown into gear with the driver 
and the last nine-tenths of the second half of 
the revolution of the driver will be transmit 
ted to the register and add 9 upon it. 
Extending horizontally across the machine, 
in rear of the hub M of the indicator, is a bar 
R, which is mounted at its opposite ends by 
slots and screws upon bosses S projecting 
rearward from the front wall of the casing, 
Fig. 12. Upon the forward side of this bar 
R, adjacent to the shaft B, is a locking tooth 
or lug T, Figs. 12 and 17, adapted to co-op 
erate with notches U upon the rear face of 
the hub M, Figs. 10 and 19, to lock the latter 
whenever the shaft B is slid learward and the 
indicator disconnected from the driver in the 
manner before described. The bar R is ca 
pable of slight longitudinal movement and is 
provided upon the forward side of its left 
hand end, Fig. 17, with two pins V, between 
which fits the upper left-hand end of the de 
tent plate N, heretofore described, the end 
of the plate being beveled off or inclined, as 
shown. The result of this connection of the 
plate N with the bar R is that when the plate 
N is slid in the direction of the arrow by 
pressing in one of the keys the bar R* will be 
slid in the direction of the arrow upon said 
bar, and when the detent-plate is released and 
returned to normal position by the spring P. 
the bar R* will be returned to its normal po 
sition. As seen in Fig. 19, which is a rear ele 
vation, the bar R is provided upon its rear 
side at one end with two lugs WX', the lower 
end of which is beveled, as shown. When the 
operating-handle and parts turning with it 
are in normal position the extreme end of the 
arm Y fits between the lugs WX' upon the 
bar R, its end being cut away and suitably 
shaped for that purpose. In this position of 
the parts the arm Y is held from forward 
movement by the lug W, and the shaft B, 
driver, and operating-handle are consequently 
locked from movement. They are released 
when the bar R is slid in the direction of the 
arrow by the movement transmitted to it by 
the detent-plate N whenever any one of the 
operating - keys is pressed in, as above de 
Scribed and as seen in Fig. 14, so that after 
any key has been pressed in the operating 
handle is free to be turned to effect the indi 
cation and registration. As the arm Y com 
pletes its revolution and approaches normal 
position its outer end will ride over the bev 
eled lug X and force the bar R' in the direc 
tion of the arrow until it clears said lug. This 
movement of the bar R will move the plate 
in the reverse direction to that indicated by 
the arrow upon said plate, and will thereby 
release the key which had been pressed in 
and permit its spring to throw it outward to 
normal position. When the end of the arm 
Y clears the beveled lug X the detent-plate 
N will be immediately returned to normal 
position by the spring P', and this movement 
o 
75 
9o 
95 
do 
Cd 
I 15 
20 
I 25 
I 30 
 
543,725 
75 
of the plate N will force the bar R* to the 
left, in Fig. 19, and carry the lug W* over the 
end of the arm Y, thereby again locking it 
in normal position between the lugs WX. 
In this manner the machine is normally locked 
from operation and is released by the press 
ing in of any one of the keys, while the op 
erated key is released and allowed to return 
to normal position at the end of the operation 
and the machine again becomes locked. A 
pawl Y, spring-pressed into engagement with 
a ratchet Z, fast upon the rear end of the hub 
X of the arm Y, prevents backward move 
ment of the parts. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim 
l. The combination of a driving member 
having a definite movement at each opera 
tion, an indicating and a registering member 
driven thereby, and suitable intermediate 
connecting and disconnecting devices, where 
by the driving member during the first half 
of its movement is caused to pick up the in 
dicating member and carry it to initial posi 
tion, whereby the second half of the move 
ment of the driving member is divided be 
tween the indicating member and the regis 
tering member in proportions determined by 
the point at which the one is disconnected 
from and the other connected with the driv 
ing member, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a rotary driving 
member making a complete revolution at 
each operation, rotary indicating and regis 
tering members driven thereby, means for au 
tomatically connecting the indicating mem 
ber with the driving member during the first 
half of the revolution of the latter, to cause 
it to pick up the indicating member and carry 
it to initial position, and means for simulta 
neously disconnecting the indicating mem 
ber from the driving nember and connecting 
the registering member with the latter dura 
ing the Second half of the revolution of the 
driving member, to cause the latter to im 
part a given portion of the second half of its 
movement to the indicating member and the 
remaining portion to the registering member, 
Substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a rotary driving 
member, a rotary indicator wheel having the 
indicating numbers thereon arranged in back 
ward order relatively to the direction of move 
ment of said wheel, a registering wheel hav 
ing the numbers thereon arranged in forward 
Order relatively to the direction of movement 
of Said Wheel, and suitable connecting and 
disconnecting devices, whereby the driving 
member during the first half of its revolution 
picks up the indicator-wheel and turns it to 
initial position, and whereby the second half 
of the revolution of the driving member is 
divided between the indicator wheel and the 
registering wheel in proportions determined 
by the point at which the one is disconnected 
from and the other connected with the driv 
ing member, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of a rotary driving 
member, a rotary indicator wheel provided 
with two series of numbers arranged in back 
ward order relatively to the direction of 
movement of the wheel, a registering wheel 
provided with a series of numbers arranged 
in forward order relatively to the direction 
of movement of the wheel, and suitable in 
termediate connecting and disconnecting de 
vices, whereby during the first half of revo 
lution of the driving member the indicator 
wheel is turned to initial position, the num 
bers in one series thereon passing the indi 
cating point in backward order, and whereby, 
during the second half of revolution of the 
driving member the numbers in the second 
series upon the indicator wheel pass the in 
dicating-point in backward order until the 
number to be indicated is reached, where 
upon the indicator wheel is disconnected 
from the driving member and the registering 
wheel connected with the latter, so that the 
indicator wheel remains stationary while the 
remainder of the second half of the move 
ment of the driving member is transmitted 
to the registering wheel, substantially as de 
scribed. 
5. The combination of a driving member 
having a definite movement at each operation, 
an indicating and a registering member driven 
thereby, suitable intermediate connecting de 
vices, whereby the driving member during the 
first half of its movement picks up the indi 
cating member and carries it to initial posi 
tion, and whereby the second half of the move 
ment of the driving member is divided be 
tween the indicating member and the register 
ing member in proportions determined by the 
point at which the one is disconnected from 
and the other connected with the driving mem 
ber, and an arresting or locking device co-op 
erating with the indicating member to auto 
matically lock the latter upon its disconnec 
tion from the driving member, substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination of a driving member 
having a definite movement at each operation, 
an indicating and a registering member driven 
thereby, suitable intermediate connecting de 
vices, whereby the driving member during the 
first half of its movement picks up the indi 
cating member and carries. it to initial posi 
tion, and whereby the second half of the move 
ment of the driving member is divided be 
tween the indicating member and the register 
ing member in proportions determined by the 
point at which the one is disconnected from 
and tile other connected with the driving mem 
ber, an arresting or locking device co-operat 
ing with the indicating member to autoimati 
cally lock the latter upon its disconnection 
from the driving member, and a second lock 
ing device co-operating with the registering 
member to automatically lock the latter upon 
its disconnection from the driving member at 
the end of the movement of the latter, sub 
stantially as described. 
95 
CO 
o 
IIS 
1 25 
I 30 
O 
2 o 
25 
35 
o 
45 
SO 
 
543,725 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
7. The combination of a driving member 
having a definite movement at each operation 
a registering member, an indicating member 
whose indicating numbers are arranged in 
backward order relatively to its direction of 
movement, and suitable intermediate connect 
ing and disconnecting devices, whereby the 
driving member, during the first half of its 
movement, is caused to pick up the indicat 
ing member and carry it to initial position, the 
numbers upon the latter moving in backward 
order past the indicating point, and whereby 
during the second half of the revolution of 
the driving member the indicating member is 
turned from initial position to the new indi 
cation, its numbers continuing to pass the in 
dicating point in backward order until the 
number to be indicated is reached and the in 
dicating member disconnected from the driv 
ing member and connected to the registering 
member, substantially as described. 
S. The combination of a driving member 
having a definite movement at each operation, 
a registering member an indicating member 
provided with two series of indicating num 
bers arranged in backward order relatively to 
the direction of movement of the member, 
and suitable intermediate connecting and dis 
connecting devices, whereby during the first 
half of the movement of the driving member 
the indicating member is carried from its 
previous indicating position to initial posi 
tion, the numbers in one of its series passing 
the indicating point in backward order, and 
whereby during the second half of the move 
ment of the driving member the indicator is 
carried on from initial position to the num 
ber in its other series representing the amount 
to be indicated, the numbers in such second 
Series passing the indicating point in back 
Ward order until the number to be indicated 
is reached and the indicating member discon 
nected from the driving member and con 
nected to the registering member, substan 
tially as described. 
9. The combination of a driving gear or seg 
ment having a definite movement at each op 
eration, a registering pinion arraged to be 
thrown in to and out of engagement with said 
gear, means for throwing it into engagement 
with the gear at different points in the move 
ment of the latter, and a cam operating to 
throw it out of engagement with the gear at 
the end of the movement of the latter, sub 
stantially as described. 
10. The combination of a driving gear or seg 
ment having a definite movement at each op 
eration, a registering pinion mounted upon a 
pivoted support and arranged to be swung into 
and out of engagement with the driving gear, 
means for throwing it into engagement with 
the driving gear at different points in the 
movement of the latter, and a cam co-operat 
ing with the pivoted support of the register 
ing pinion to throw the latter out of engage 
ment with the driving gear at the end of the 
movement of the gear, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
11. The combination of a driving member 
provided with a gear wheel or segment and 
having a definite movement at each operation, 
a registering member provided with a pinion 
adapted to be thrown into alad out of gear with 
the driving member, an indicating member 
movable into and out of engagement with the 
driving member, a bell-crank interposed be 
tween the indicating member and the regis 
tering member, to cause one to be thrown into 
engagement with the driving member when 
the other is thrown out of engagement with 
said member, means for rocking the bell-crank 
at different points in the movement of the 
driver, to throw the indicating member out of 
engagement and the registeriug member into 
engagement with the driving member, and a 
can co-operating with the bell-crank to throw 
the registering member out of engagement 
and the indicating member into re-engage 
mont with the driving member at the end of 
the movement of the latter, substantially as 
described. 
12. The combination of a rotary and longi 
tudinally movable shaft, a driving member 
arranged to turn with said shaft but permit 
independent longitudinal movement of it, an 
indicating member mounted to revolve upon 
said shaft but movable longitudinally with it 
into and out of engagement with the driving 
member, means for sliding the shaft in one 
direction at different points in its revolution, 
to disconnect the indicating member from the 
driving member, and means for sliding the 
shaft in the opposite direction at the end of 
its revolution, to re-connect the indicating 
member with the driving member, Substan 
tially as described. 
13. The combination of a rotary and longi 
tudinally movable shaft, a driving member 
arranged to turn with said shaft but permit 
independent longitudinal movement of it, an 
indicating member mounted to revolve upon 
said shaft but movable longitudinally with it 
into and out of engagement with the driving 
member, means for sliding the shaft in one 
direction to disconnect the indicating mem 
ber from the driving member, a bell crank 
connected to the indicating member, and a ro 
tary cam co-operating with the bell-crank to 
throw the indicating member into re-engage 
ment with the driving member, substantially 
as described. 
14. The combination of a rotary and longi 
tudinally movable shaft, a driving member 
arranged to turn with said shaft but permit 
independent longitudinal movement of it, an 
indicating member mounted to revolve upon 
said shaft but movable longitudinally with it 
into and out of engagement with the driving 
member, a bell-crank interposed between the 
indicating and registering members, means 
o 
95 
15 
I 25 
55 
 
543,725 
7 o 
75 
90 
95 
for sliding the shaft in one direction to dis 
connect the indicating member from and con 
nect the registering member with the driving 
member, and a cam co-operating with the bell 
crank to disconnect the registering member 
from and reconnect the indicating member 
with the driving member, substantially as de 
scribed. 
15. The combination of a rotary and longi 
tudinally movable shaft, a driving member 
arranged to turn with said shaft but permit 
independent longitudinal movement of it, an 
indicating member arranged to revolve upon 
said shaft but movable longitudinally with it 
into and out of engagement with the driving 
member, a bell-crank connected to said indi 
cating member, a registering member mount 
ed upon said bell-crank and movable into and 
out of gear with the driving member, means 
for sliding the shaft in one direction to dis 
connect the indicating member from and con 
nect the registering member with the driving 
member, and a cam co-operating with the bell 
crank to disconnect the registering member 
from and reconnect the indicating member 
with the driving member, substantially as de 
scribed. 
16. The combination of a driving member 
having a definite movement at each operation, 
an indicating and a registering member driven 
thereby, means for automatically connecting 
the indicating member with the driving mem 
ber during the first half of the movement of 
the latter, to cause it to pick up the indicat 
ing member and carry it to initial position, 
and a series of keys for simultaneously dis 
connecting the indicating member from and 
connecting the registering member with the 
driving member at different points in the sec 
ond half of the movement of the latter, to 
cause the driving member to impart a given 
portion of the second half of its movement to 
the indicating member and the remaining 
portion to the registering member, substan 
tially as described. 
17. The combination of a rotary driving 
member, a rotary indicator having the indi 
cating numbers arranged thereonin backward 
order relatively to the direction of its move 
ment, a registering wheel having the numbers 
thereon arranged in forward order relatively 
to the direction of its movement, means for 
automatically connecting the indicator With 
the driving member during the first half of 
the revolution of the latter, to cause it to pick 
up the indicator and carry it to initial posi 
tion, and a series of keys for simultaneously 
disconnecting the indicator from and con 
necting the registering member with the driv 
ing member at different points in the second 
half of the revolution of the latter, whereby 
the second half of the revolution of the driv 
ing member is divided between the indicator 
and register in proportions determined by 
the operated key, substantially as described. 
18. The combination of a driving gear or 
segment having a definite movement at each 
Operation, a registering pinion arranged to be 
thrown into and out of engagement with said 
gear, a series of keys and suitable connec 
tions for throwing it into engagement with 
the gear at different points in the movement 
of the latter, and a cam operating to throw it 
out of engagement with the gear at the end 
of the movement of the latter, substantially 
as described. 
19. The combination of a driving gear or 
segment having a definite movement at each 
Operation, a registering pinion mounted upon 
a pivoted support and arranged to be swung 
into and and out of engagement with the driv 
ing gear, a series of keys and connections for 
throwing it into engagement with the driv 
ing gear at different points in the movement 
of the latter, and a cam co-operating with the 
pivoted support of the registering pinion to 
throw the latter out of engagement with the 
driving gear at the end of the movement of 
the latter, substantially as described. 
20. The combination of a driving member 
provided with a gear wheel or segment and 
having a definite movement at each opera 
tion, a registering member provided with a 
pinion adapted to be thrown into and out of 
gear with the driving member, an indicating 
member movable into and out of engagement 
with the driving member, a bell-crank inter 
posed between the indicating and registering. 
members, to cause one to be thrown into en 
gagement with the driving member when the 
other is thrown out of engagement with said 
member, a series of operating keys and con 
nections for rocking the bell-crank at differ 
ent points in the movement of the driver, to 
throw the indicating member out of engage 
ment and the registering member into engage 
ment with the driving member, and a cam 
co-operating with the bell-crank to throw the 
registering member out of engagement and 
the indicating member into re-engagement 
with the driving member at the end of the 
movement of the latter, substantially as de 
scribed. 
21. The combination of a rotary and recip 
rocating shaft, a driving member arranged to 
turn with said shaft but permit independent 
longitudinal movement of it, an indicating 
member mounted to revolve upon said shaft 
and reciprocate with it into and out of en 
gagement with the driving member, a series 
of keys and connections for sliding the shaft 
in one direction at different points in its revo 
lution, to disconnect the indicating member 
from the driving member, and means for slid 
ing the shaft in the opposite direction at the 
end of its revolution, to reconnect the indi 
cating member with the driving member, sub 
stantially as described. 
22. The combination of a rotary and recip 
rocating shaft, a driving member arranged to 
CO 
I o5 
O 
I 1.5 
2 ed 
I 25 
I 3G 
O 
s 
39 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
65 
 
O 
543,725 
o 
75 
turn with said shaft but permit independent 
longitudinal movement of it, an indicating 
member mounted to revolve upon said shaft 
and reciprocate with it into and out of en 
gagement with the driving member, a series 
of keys and connections for sliding the shaft 
in one direction to disconnect the indicating 
member from the driving member, a bell 
crank connected to the indicating member, 
and a rotary cam co-operating with the bell 
crank to throw the indicating member into 
engagement with the driving member, sub 
stantially as described. 
23. The combination of a rotary and recip 
rocating shaft, a driving member arranged to 
turn with said shaft but permit independent 
longitudinal movement of it, an indicating 
member mounted to revolve upon said shaft 
and reciprocate with it into and out of en 
gagement with the driving member, a bell 
crank interposed between the indicating and 
registering members, a series of keys and 
connections for sliding the shaft in one direc 
tion to disconnect the indicating member 
from and connect the registering member 
with the driving member, and a cam co-oper 
ating with the bell-crank to disconnect the 
registering member from and reconnect the 
indicating member with the driving member, 
substantially as described. 
24. The combination of a rotary and recip 
rocating shaft, a driving member splined there 
on, an indicating member arranged to revolve 
upon said shaft and reciprocate with it into 
and out of engagement with the driver, a bell 
crank connected to said indicating member, 
a registering member mounted upon said bell 
crank and movable into and out of gear with 
the driving member, a series of keys and 
connections for sliding the shaft in one di 
rection to disconnect the indicating member 
from and connect the registering member 
with the driving member, and a cam co-oper 
ating with the bell-crank to disconnect the reg-, 
istering member from and reconnect the in 
dicating member with the driving member, 
substantially as described. 
25. The combination of the rotary driving 
member A, the rotary and reciprocating in 
dicating member M, the spring-plungers R. 
constituting connecting devices between the 
two members, and means for rotating the 
member A and moving the member M into 
and out of engagement with it, substantially 
as described. 
26. The combination of the rotary and re 
ciprocating shaft B, the driving member A 
splined thereon, the indicating member M 
mounted to revolve upon said shaft and recip 
rocate with it, connecting devices, as the 
spring-plungers R, between the indicating 
and registering members, and means for ro 
tating and reciprocating the shaft B, sub 
stantially as described. 
27. The combination of the rotary driving 
r 
member A having the cam disk J, the rotary 
and reciprocating indicating member M, Con 
necting devices, as the spring-plungers R, 
between the two members, the bell-crank YZ 
connected to the indicating member M and 
co-operating with the cam disk J, and means 
for rotating the member A and moving the 
member M out of engagement With it, Sub 
stantially as described. 
28. The combination of the rotary driving 
member A having the gear I, the rotary and 
reciprocating indicating member M, connect 
ing devices, as the spring-pressed plungers 
R., between the two members, the bell-crank 
YZ connected to the member MI, the regis 
tering wheel G' and pinion II mounted on the 
arm Y of the bell-crank, and means for rotat 
ing the driving member A and rocking the 
bell-crank, substantially as described. 
29. The combination of the driving member 
A having the gear I and cam disk J, the ro 
tary and reciprocating indicating member 
M, connecting devices, as the Spring-plungers 
R, between the two members, the bell-crank 
YZ connected to the member M at one end 
and co-operating with the calm disk J at the 
other, the registering wheel G' and pinion II' 
mounted upon the bell-crank and co-operat 
ing with the gear I, and means for rotating 
the member A and moving the member Mout 
of engagement with it, substantially as de 
scribed. 
30. The combination of the rotary and re 
ciprocating shaft B, the driving member A 
splined thereon and having the geal I and 
cam disk J, the indicating member M mounted 
to revolve upon the shaft B and reciprocat 
ing with it, connecting devices, as the Spring 
plungers R, between the two members, the 
bell-crank YZ having its arm Z forked and 
provided with pins fitting in the groove 3' in 
the member M, and the registering wheel G' 
and pinion H' mounted on the arm Y of the 
bell-crank, substantially as described. 
31. The combination of the rotary driving 
member A, the rotary and reciprocating indi 
cating member M, connecting devices between 
the two members, means for rotating the mem 
ber A and reciprocating the member M, and 
a locking projection V co-operating with 
notches in the member M, to lock the latter 
when it is slid out of connection with the mem 
ber A, substantially as described. 
32. The combination of the rotary driving 
member A having the gear I, the registering 
pinion H' movable into and out of mesh with 
the gear, means for rotating the member. A 
and throwing the pinion II into and out of 
gear with it at different points in its move 
ment, and a locking projection, as I", co-oper 
ating with the pinion II' to lock the latter 
when it is disengaged from the gear i, sub 
stantially as described. 
33. The combination of the rotary driving 
member A having the gear I, the registering 
90 
95 
OO 
I o5 
T 15 
20 
I 25 
I 3G 
O 
35 
4 O 
45 
So 
55 
65 
 
548,725 
11. 
o 
IS 
25 
35 
5 O 
55 
o 
75 
pinion H' movable into and out of mesh with 
the bar R* to move the latter and unlock the 
arm Y when a key His pressed inward, sub 
the gear I, means for rotating the member A 
and throwing the pinion H' into gear with it, 
stantially as described. 
a cam disk J for throwing the pinion H' out 
39. The combination of the rotary shaft B, 
the arm Y fast thereon, the reciprocating bar 7o 
of gear with the member A, and the locking 
projection I' co-operating with the pinion H', 
R provided with the lug X*, the keys H hav 
ing the resetting springs J, and the recipro 
substantially as described. 
cating detent plate N co-operating with said 
34. The combination of the rotary driving 
keys and with the bar R', whereby when the 
member A having the gear I and cam disk J, 
the rotary and reciprocating indicating mem 
shaft B is given a complete revolution the 
arm Y as it reaches normal position moves 
ber M, connecting devices between the two 
the bar R and detent plate N and releases 
members, the bell-crank YZ co-operating with 
the operated key, substantially as described. 
the member Mand cam disk J, the registering 
wheel G' and pinion H' mounted upon the arm 
40. The combination of the rotary shaft B, 
the arm Y fast thereon, the reciprocating bar 
Y of the bell-crank, means for rotating the 
R having the lugs W X co-operating with 
member A and disconnecting the member M 
the arm. Y', the keys II having the resetting 
from it, and the locking projections W and I 
springs J, and the reciprocating detent plate 
co-operating respectively with the member M 
N co-operating with said keys and with the 
and pinion H, substantially as described. 
bar R* in the manner and for the purpose de 
35. The combination of the rotary and re 
ciprocating shaft B, the driving member A 
scribed. 
Splined thereon, the arm Y fast thereon, the 
41. The combination of the rotary and re 
ciprocating shaft B, the driving member A 
indicating member M loose thereon between 
splined thereon and having the gear i and 
the driving member A and arm Y and recip 
rocating with the shaft B, connecting devices 
cam disk J, the arm Y fast upon the shaft B, 
the indicating member Mloose upon the shaft 
between the driving member A and indicat 
ing member M, and the keys H co-operating 
B between the driving member A and arm. Y' 
and reciprocating with the shaft, connecting 
with the cam Q on the arm Y to disconnect 
the indicating member M from the driving 
devices between the members A and M, the 
indicating wheel U' carried by the sleeve M 95 
member A, substantially as described. 
and provided with two series of numbers 
36. The combination of the rotary and re 
adapted to be exposed at the sight opening 
ciprocating shaft B, the driving member A 
W, the bell-crank YZ co-operating with the 
Splined thereon and having the cam disk J, 
member M and cam disk J, the registering 
the arm Y fast thereon, the indicating mem 
wheels mounted upon the arm Y of the bell 
ber Mloose thereon between the driving mem 
ber and arm Y and reciprocating with the 
crank, the primary one having the pinion H' 
co-operating with the gear I, the keys H co 
shaft B, the keys H* co-operating with the 
operating with the calm Q on the arm Y, the 
cam Qupon the arm Y to disconnect the in 
resetting springs J for the keys, the detent 
dicating member from the driving member, 
plate N co-operating with the keys, and the 
and the bell-crank YZ co-operating with the 
reciprocating bar. R* co-operating with the 
indicating member M and cam disk J, sub 
plate N and provided with the lugs WX co 
stantially as described. 
operating with the arm Y, substantially as 
37. The combination of the rotary and re 
ciprocating shaft B, the driving member A 
described. 
Splined thereon and carrying the gear I and 
42. The combination of a driving member, 
a registering member normally out of engage 
cam disk J, the arm Y fast upon the shaft B, 
the indicating member M loose upon the shaft 
ment with but bodily movable into engage 
B between the driving member A and the 
ment with said driving member, means in 
arm Y and reciprocating with the shaft B, 
cluding any one of a series of keys for effect 
ing the engagement of the driving and regis 
connecting devices between the members A 
tering members, and revoluble disengaging 
and M, the bell-crank YZ co-operating with 
means therefor, substantially as described. 
the member Mand cam disk J, the registering 
43. The combination of a single driving 
wheels B mounted upon the arm Y of the 
bell-crank, the primary wheel being provided 
member, a registering member movable bodily 
With the pinion H co-operating with the gear 
into and out of engagement with said driving 
I, and the keys H co-operating with the cam 
member, means including any one of a series 
of keys for effecting the engagement of the 
Q on the arm Y to disconnect the indicating 
driving and registering members, and a rew 
member M from the driving member A, sub 
stantially as described. 
oluble cam for disengaging said members, 
substantially as described. 
38. The combination of the rotary shaft B, 
the arm Y fast upon said shaft, the recipro 
44. The combination of a single driving 
cating bar R* provided with the locking lug. 
member, a registering member movable bodily 
W co-operating with the arm Y, the operat 
into and Out of engagement with said driving 
ing keys H, and the reciprocating detent 
member, means including any one of a series 
plate N co-operating with the keys and with of keys for effecting the engagement of the 
I Od 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
543,725 
12 
driving and registering members, a lock op- said driving member, a series of keys and 
erating to arrest the movement of the regis- means cooperating there with to throw the reg- to 
tering member, and revoluble disengaging istering member into engagement with the 
means therefor, substantially as described. 
driving member, substantially as described. 
45. The combination of a single driving 
member having a constant definite movement 
at each operation, a registering member mov- 
able bodily into and out of engagement with 
ARCHIBAL.D. C. REEVES, 
JOSEPH A. WORTMAN. 
Witnesses: 
HUGO COOK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543827.txt	 
 
(No Model.) 
M, D, FLANDERS. 
WELL, DRILLING MACHINE, 
 
No. 543,827. 
/ 
23, 2. 
w 
\ 
a 
Patented July 30, 1895. 
A. 
-27 
A full 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARCELLUS D. FLANDERS, OF HAMILTON, IOW.A. 
WELL-DRILLING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 543,827, dated July 30, 1895. 
Application filed January 24, 1895. Serial No. 536,000, (No model.) 
- - 
O 
25 
To di uhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARCELLUs D. FLAN 
DERS, a citizen of the United States of Amer 
ica, residing at Hamilton, in the county of 
Marion and State of Iowa, have invented an 
Improved Well-Drilling Machine, of which 
- 
the following is a specification. 
The objects of this invention are to provide 
a simple, strong, and durable machine that 
may be operated with a minimum of applied 
power and that will automatically drop the 
Well-drilling tools from their greatest point 
of elevation, and which may be quickly and 
easily adjusted to move the tools both up 
Wardly and downwardly at the same speed. 
My invention consists in certain details in 
the construction, arrangement, and combina 
tion of the various parts of the device, as here 
in after set forth, pointed out in the claims, 
and illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of the machine. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 
3 is a detail perspective view of the trip de 
vice, and Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the 
upper end of the trip-bar and the device for 
guiding its movement. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the reference-letter A is used to indicate the 
frame of the machine, and A'an upright piv 
oted to its top and having a pulley Ain its 
upper end adapted to support the tool-oper 
ating cable A. 
B indicates the drum upon which the cable 
is wound. This drum is supported upon suit 
able bearings in the forward part of frame A 
and is adapted to be operated by a pinion B', 
fixed to a shaft B, on which is fixed a belt 
wheel B, said pinion being in mesh with a 
cog-wheel B fixed to the said drum. The 
cable is wound upon said drum, passed up 
Wardly over a pulley, mounted in the ma 
chine-frame above the drum and then up 
wardly over the pulley A, and finally straight 
downwardly with the well-drilling tools at 
tached to its end. 
The mechanism for operating the tools com 
prise a shaftD, mounted in suitable bearings 
near the rear bottom portion of the machine 
5o frame, having a belt-wheel Don one end and 
45 
35 
40 
 
55 
a cog-wheel D on the other, having a wrist 
pin D on its outer surface. 
D is a shaft mounted in suitable bearings 
above the shaft D and geared thereto by the 
pinion D in mesh with the cog-wheel D, and 
provided with a fly-wheel D. 
Findicates a pitman pivoted to the wrist 
pin D, and F is a trip-bar pivoted to the 
pitman and extended parallel with the sides 
of the frame A and supported at its lower end 
by the guide F and at its upper end by means 
of a guide F, adapted to allow the bar a slight 
vertical movement. 
His a frame having two rollers H* therein 
adapted to admit the upper end of said trip 
bar between them. This frame is normally 
pressed upwardly by means of the leaf-spring 
H', fixed thereto and to a part of the machine 
frame, and its end projecting beyond the front 
of the frame and held downwardly by a rack 
J and connected with said frame H by the 
rope J. It will be obvious that a downward 
pull upon the lever J will bring the frame H 
and the upper end of the trip-bar down 
wardly, and vice versa. 
Kindicates the trip device, having an open 
ing Kadapting it to be placed on the upper 
end of the trip-bar and be held in place by 
the set-screw K. Its upper edge is rounded 
at K for purposes hereinafter explained, and 
on its under surface two lugs K are formed 
to admit a roller K between them, the outer 
lug being preferably extended some distance 
beyond the edge of the roller. 
N indicates a lever pivoted near its one end 
to the top of the frame A by means of the 
detachable pin. N, and having a pulley N. 
mounted in a suitable frame. N that is ad 
justably connected with its central portion 
and under which pulley the cable A is passed. 
The other end of said lever passes under a 
guard N on the opposite side of the machine 
frame, with its end in position to be engaged 
by the trip device K, and of such a length 
that the trip device will pass beyond its end 
when drawn downwardly to the full limit of 
its stroke. 
N indicates an opening formed in the end 
of said lever beyond its pivoted point, that 
when the lever is pivoted by extending the 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOC) 
 
543,827 
IO 
- 
pin through the said opening its other end 
will not pass beyond the trip device when at 
the limit of its stroke. 
In practical operation the cable is wound 
upon the drum B, passed over the pulley C, 
under the pulley N, and finally over the pull 
ley at the top of the frame. When the shaft 
D is rotated the trip-rod is drawn downwardly, 
the trip device will engage the end of the le 
ver N, and the lug K'overlap said end and 
hold the lever to the roller K. Then as the 
trip-rod is moved downwardly the roller will 
gradually approach the end of the lever and 
the well-tools on the cable be elevated. Before 
reaching the downward limit of its stroke the 
trip device will pass beyond the end of the 
lever and the well-tools will drop and the le 
ver be elevated. As the trip-rod again moves 
upwardly the rounded edge of the trip device 
will engage the end of the lever and press the 
trip-rod downwardly to pass under the lever, 
and by means of the spring H be pressed 
upwardly to engage the lever on its next 
downward movement. When it is desired to 
quickly stop the operation of the machine 
the lever J is pressed downwardly and the 
trip-bar held out of engagement with the le 
ver N, and if it is desired to operate the well 
tools with equal speed on their upward and 
downward movements the lever N is pivoted 
in the outer opening. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States there 
for, is 
1. In a well drilling apparatus the combi 
nation with a suitable frame having a drum 
thereon, a pulley fixed to an inclined station 
ary support, a cable wound upon said drum 
and passed over said elevated pulley, and well 
drilling tools on its ends, of a lever pivoted 
at one end to the machine frame, a pulley at 
tached to its central portion and having said 
cable passed thereunder, a bar mounted in 
suitable bearings in the side of the machine 
frame at right angles to said lever and adapted 
to move longitudinally, a trip device thereon 
adapted to engage the free end of said lever 
and draw the lever downwardly until the end 
30 
35 
40 
45 
6. 
6: 
of the lever passes inwardly beyond the said 
trip device, and means for reciprocating said 
bar, for the purposes stated. 
2. In a well drilling apparatus, the combi 
nation with a suitable frame having a drum 
thereon, a pulley fixed to an elevated station 
5. 
ary support and a cable wound upon said 
drum and passed over the elevated pulley and 
well drilling tools on its end, of a lever piv 
oted on an inclined part of the frame, a pull 
ley attached to its central portion and having 
said cable passed thereunder, a trip bar slid 
ingly mounted in the frame at approximately 
right angles to the lever and having its upper 
end capable of a movement downwardly from 
the said lever a yielding pressure device for 
holding the end of said bar upward, a trip de 
vice on said bar to engage the end of said le 
wer and means for reciprocating said trip bar, 
for the purposes stated. 
3. An improved well drilling machine, com 
prising a suitable frame, a drum mounted 
therein, means for operating the drum, a ca 
ble wound upon said drum, a pulley in the 
frame near the drum and a pulley at the top 
of the frame, a lever pivoted at one end of the 
frame, a pulley attached to said lever and 
having said cable passed thereunder, a trip 
bar slidingly mounted at the side of the frame 
with its upper end capable of swinging down 
wardly, a frame adapted to admit the upper 
end of said trip bar to slide therein, a yielding 
pressure device for holding the said frame 
upwardly, a lever connected therewith for 
drawing the frame downwardly, the trip de 
8. 
vice on said trip having a roller on its under 
side and a lug projecting beyond the roller 
for the purposes stated, a shaft adapted to be 
driven by suitable power and having a crank 
wheel thereon, a pitman pivoted to the crank 
wheel and to said trip bar and a shaft geared 
to the said power shaft and a fly wheel fixed 
thereto, substantially as and for the purposes 
stated. 
c 
75 
8. 
9 
MARCELLUS D. FLANDERS, 
Witnesses: 
J. T. MITCHELL, 
I. L. MUNSELL. 
p 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US543927.txt	(No Model.) 
D, J, DAVIDSON. 
PURIFIER, SEPARATOR, AND GRADER. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 543,927, 
Patented Aug. 6, 1895. 
WITWESSAS 
Tild-- 
IW2/AWTOf 
oeve?( / &e-era-e- 
2.Te ?zz 
(274. 272-27. 
m 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 543,927, 
Patented Aug. 6, 1895. 
D. J. DAVIDSON. 
PURIFIER, SEPARATOR, AND GRADER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
SE 
s 
WITWESSES 
- 
IW2/EWTOf 
% a 24-2, 
By 4- %itorney 
elee S, 62% 
 
(No Model.) 
4 sheet-sheet 3. 
D. J. DAWIDSON, 
PURIFIER, SEPARATOR, AND GRADER. 
No. 543,927. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1895. 
s NaN4,242(K Sn. 
2. 
    
2 
2 
4. 
- - Pro 
22 
1. 
Elth 
IW2/EWTOf 
rania 
Ay 76ea pittorney 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
D. J. DAVIDSON, 
PURIFIER, SEPARATOR, AND GRADER. 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 543,927. 
- 
Patented Aug. 6, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
s witvesses IgE 
6%/62 eyser- y 
27 (22zaztw 
aEe N 
Ay 4c1 attorney 
eleva/esee tea-e- 
7zeera ?a-24 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
DAVID J. DAVIDSON, OF PORT HURON, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
DAVIDSON, MARTIN MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PUR FER, SEPARATOR, AND GRADER. 
SeBCIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 543,927, dated August 6, 1895. 
Application filed 0ctober 16, 1894, Serial No. 526,099, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Port 
Huron, county of St. Clair, State of Michigan, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im. 
provement in a Purifier, Separator, and 
Grader; and I declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as Will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci. 
fication. 
My invention has for its object certain new 
and useful improvements in a purifier, sepa 
rator, and grader, and is more particularly 
designed as an improvement upon a device 
of this class for which United States Letters 
Patent were granted to me June 12, 1894, No. 
521,402. 
My present invention has in view certain 
modifications and improvements to secure the 
greatest efficiency in the operation of such a 
machine; and to this end my present inven 
tion consists in the construction, combination, 
and arrangement of devices and appliances 
hereinafter specified and claimed, and illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which- 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective showing 
the exterior of my improved machine. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section of the same. Fig. 3 is 
a horizontal section on the line 3 8, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is an inverted plan view of the ma 
chine. Fig. 5 is a detail view of the feed 
Controlling valve. Fig. 6 is a vertical section 
of the base of the vertical trunk into which 
the stock is fed on the line 6 6, Fig. 4. Fig. 
7 is a detail view in perspective of the scat 
tering-plate. Fig. 8 is a front view of the 
Same. Fig. 9 is a detail view of the mechan 
ism for adjusting the diaphragm M. Fig. 10 
is a view of the eccentric lever employed in 
Connection there with. Fig. 11 is a detail sec 
tional view on the line 11 11, Figs. 1 and 2. 
I carry out my invention as follows: 
A represents an inclosing-case, provided 
therein with essentially a U-shaped partition 
A", dividing the interior of the case into an 
air-chamber A, and into a vertical air-trunk 
A', and a vertical air-trunk A' on the opposite 
Be it known that I, DAVIDJ. DAVIDSON, a side of the case, and an air-trunk A. beneath 
the partition A', connecting the two vertical 
air-trunks AA on the opposite sides of the 
machine. 
B is a fan case within the case A, commu 
nicating with the air-trunk A, as shown at b, 
and its sides communicating with the cham 
ber A, as shown in Fig. 3, at t' and b. B' is 
a fan within said case. 
B' is the fan-shaft, and B the driving 
pulley. 
A is an opening in the partition A' through 
which the air-trunk. A communicates with 
the air-chamber A. The air-trunk Aat the 
side of the machine opposite the fan is pro 
vided with a feed-inlet A. Toward the up 
per end of the air-trunk A8 at a suitable dis 
tance below the feed-inlet A, I locate a feed 
controlling valve C, its upper end being joint 
edly connected with the case in any suitable 
manner. Thus, for example, as shown in de 
tail in Fig. 5, the valve C may be provided at 
its upper edge with pivoting-bars C C, pref 
erably separate and independent the one from 
the other and each provided with bifurcated 
fingers c and c', between which a set-screw c' 
may be engaged in the valve C to bind the 
respective pivoting-bars upon said valve. 
As so constructed the pivoting-bars may 
be adjusted laterally upon the valve as may 
be required and also longitudinally of the 
valve. The outer extremities of the pivot 
ing-bars are journaled in the case A, adjacent 
portions of the case being indicated in Fig. 
5 in dotted lines. Upon the outer end of one 
of said bars, as upon the outer end of bar C, 
is engaged an operating-handle C on the out 
side of the case. A spring C connects the 
free end of said handle with the case A, to 
which any suitable tension may be given, the 
spring tending to close the valve C. The 
valve C extends in an angular direction across 
the upper end of the trunk A, forming there 
above a feed-hopper or stock-chamber A. It 
will be seen that the weight of the stock in 
the chamber A will tend to open the valve 
C. By adjusting the tension of the spring C, 
it will be understood more or less Weight of 
stock will be required in the chamber A to 
- 
O 
2 C. 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
543,927 
75 
95 
OC 
I OS 
d 
I IS 
I 25 
13o 
o 
15 
2 
3d 
35 
o 
45 
So 
open the valve C. The spring C may be pro 
vided with any suitable tension-adjusting de 
vice, as a thumb-screw c, on one side thereof. 
Beneath the valve C, I locate a scattering 
plate D having a hinged or jointed connection 
with the case at its upper end and extended 
across the trunk A on an incline, the scatter 
ing-plate being jointed or hinged to the case 
on the side of the trunk A opposite that on 
which the valve C is hinged, so as to direct 
the grain as it falls thereupon in the oppo 
site direction. The upper end of the scatter 
ing-plate is hinged to the case preferably a 
little above the top of the opening A', as 
shown, the scattering-plate extending on an 
incline downward over said orifice. The 
Scattering-plate is provided at its lower end 
with a lip D', preferably having an offset to 
Ward the air-chamber A, as shown at d. 
This lip may extend downward within the 
trunk Aany required distance, the same be 
ing spaced from the two adjacent walls of the 
trunk Aso as to form passage-ways on either 
side thereof, as indicated at a, and a . 
The case A in front of the lower end of the 
Scattering-plate and its lip-plate D'' is pref 
erably bulged, as shown at a. This may be 
done by cutting away the case A, as shown 
at C, and engaging over the cut-away portion 
a metallic casing a , in which I prefer to set 
or engage an observation-glass a. This bulge 
a performs, it will be seen, several important 
offices-viz., to maintain the desired area of 
the passage-way between it and the scatter 
ing-plate, while also the lower half thereof 
acts as a stock-deflector. The plate D and its 
lip D' are made adjustable within the trunk 
A'. I prefer to construct the scattering-plate 
D and lip D' of an integral casting having 
pivotal lugs d' d' at the upper end of the 
Scattering-plate by which it is jointedly en 
gaged in the case. 
Engaged with the scattering-plate is an op 
erating-lever D having a jointed connection 
with the scattering-plate, as shown at d. 
With the opposite end of the lever D is en 
gaged an operating-bar D, having a link con 
nection D therewith, the bar D9 extending to 
the outside of the case and provided with an 
operating-handle D. 
D is a locking-arm engaged at one end 
With the case and at its opposite end engag 
ing the operating-handle D in any suitable 
manner to hold the handle in a given posi 
tion. 
It will be readily seen that any desired ad 
justment can thus be readily given to the 
scattering-plate D and its depending lip D', 
so as to divide the space on each side thereof, 
as may be required. 
The Scattering-plate is provided on its sur 
face with teeth d. Within the trunk A, be 
neath the case a, Ilocate an additional scat 
tering-plate E, having teeth e thereupon, this 
latter scattering-plate serving to separate and 
scour the grain passing through the channel 
a into the trunk Abeneath the lip D'. The 
trunk A is also preferably provided with de 
flecting devices a to deflect the grain toward 
the center of the trunk A and also serving to 
break the velocity of the fall of the stock. 
In the operation of the device a current of 
air is discharged from the fan-case into the 
trunk A, the air - current passing thence 
through the air-trunk A into the air-trunk 
A, the air then passing from the trunk A 
into the chamber A, from which chamber it 
re-enters the fan-case. Thus a continuous 
air-current is formed in the operation of the 
machine, the air-current being discharged 
from the fan and re-entering the fan. 
As the 
grain descends within the air-trunk A the 
air ascending the trunk A strikes the stock 
therebeneath, commingles thoroughly there 
with, separating therefrom the lighter im 
purities or lighter portions of the stock, the 
lighter impurities or portions thereof being 
carried with the current into the chamber A. 
The heavier grade of the stock falls by grav 
ity to the base of the trunk A, the primary 
separation of the stock being made at the 
base of the air-trunk A. The air-trunk A. 
enters the trunk Aa suitable distance above 
the base of the trunk A, forming in effect 
a dead-air chamber a at the base of the trunk 
A.into which dead-air chamber the heavier 
portion of the stock falls. At the base of the 
trunk A is a discharge-orifice a? and there 
above a controlling-valve a, preferably hav 
ing a weighted aim a', the valve a being 
hinged to an inclined plate a', as shown at 
a. A slant-board a directs the stock to the 
base of the valve a. It will be perceived 
that the weight of stock at the bottom of the 
air-trunk A, when the weight thereof is suffi 
cient, will open the valve a and allow the 
stock to be discharged through the orifice a. 
The air-trunk A is preferably provided with 
hand-holes and suitable covers therefor, as 
shown at the numerals 1, one such hand-hole 
being located adjacent to the feed-controlling 
valve C, another, at the base of the air-trunk 
A, and another intermediate the extremities 
of the air-trunk A, adjacent to the commu 
nication of the trunk A there with. 
F denotes a valve within the trunk. A for 
controlling the air- current discharged into 
the trunks A and A. Within the trunk. A 
are located separating devices. Below the 
orifice A, I locate a cant-board G, then a di 
viding-wall G', and an additional cant-board 
G, the two cant-boards G and G, inclined 
from the opposite sides of the chamber A 
downward to the partition A'. The division 
wall Grises vertically at about the center of 
the chamber A, intermediate the cant-boards 
G and G, its base being spaced from the 
lower edges of the said cant-boards, as shown 
more particularly in Fig. 2. At the top of the 
wall G' is a wing G, preferably having a 
hinged engagement with the wall G', as shown 
at g. Between the lower ends of the cant 
board G and the division-wall G is formed 
a dead-air chamber. H. Another dead-air 
6 o 
 
543,927 
7 O 
75 
90 
chamber H is formed between the lower ends 
of the wall G' and the cant-board G. Con 
duits J J communicate with said dead-air 
chambers, respectively, at the base of said 
chambers, through which are discharged de 
posits made in said dead-air chambers. Said. 
dead-air chambers are preferably provided 
each with a slaint-board I to direct the de 
posit in each of said chambers into its corre 
sponding conduit. 
. The base of the air-trunk A is preferably 
formed with downwardly and inwardly in 
clined walls KK, having therebetween a ver 
tical wall K. Between the inclined wall K. 
and the vertical wall K, I prefer to suspend 
from the partition A a diaphragm of any 
suitable construction, as shown at K, which 
may or may not be hinged at its upper end, 
the same being provided, however, as shown, 
with a hinged joint k, whereby it may be ad 
justed, as desired. . By this diaphragm the 
air-current is obviously deflected thereunder 
if made solid, or if made foraminous the 
force of that portion of the air-current pass 
ing therebeneath is diminished. Between the 
walls K and K is formed a dead-air chamber 
L, and between the walls K' and K is formed 
an additional dead-air chamber L'. These 
dead-air chambers are provided with dis 
charge-openings land l'. 
Within the chamber A* and above the open 
ing AI suspend from the upper wall of said 
chamber a diaphragm M. This diaphragm I 
prefer to make vertically adjustable. To 
this end I construct the case Awith a depend 
ing support M'. Adjacent to said support I 
locate an eccentric latch or fastening N. To 
this end the fastening may be provided with 
a bracket N, secured to the inner face of the 
casing A, as by screws, at n and n'. This 
bracket is provided with a sliding latch or 
bar N, whereby, as the handle N is manipu 
lated, the latch will be moved to and fro. 
The latch N, it will be seen, is constructed 
to hold the diaphragm M between the latch 
and the Support M', and to permit the dia 
phragm M being vertically adjusted, as may 
be required. I also desire that the lower por 
tion of said diaphragm should be laterally ad 
justable. To this end the diaphragm M may 
be formed in two parts hinged together, as 
shown atm. To hold the diaphragm in a lat 
erally-adjusted position I locate above the 
orifice A a toothed bar P, having a hinged 
engagement, as shown at p, upon the inner 
wall of the trunk A. The lower end of the 
diaphragm is provided with a loop engaging 
the toothed portion of the bar P, as shown at 
m'. By this construction, it will be perceived, 
said diaphragm may be moved laterally and 
held in a given position of adjustment. This 
diaphragm M being suspended over and in the 
vicinity of the orifice A may be adjusted to 
direct the air-current at its entrance into the 
chamber. A more or less downward, as may 
be desired. 
Toward the opposite side of the chamber 
A, in the vicinity of the fan-case, I prefer to 
locate an additional diaphragm Q, depending 
from the upper surface of the case, as from a 
bracket Q', with which bracket said dia. 
phragm has a jointed engagement, as shown 
at q. Thus it will be understood that the dia 
phragms M Q and the wing G8 may all be ad 
justed laterally while the diaphragm MI may 
also be adjusted vertically, by which means 
the air-current within the chamber. A may 
be diverted and controlled, as may be required. 
The diaphragms and the wing G may be made 
in any suitable manner. The diaphragm Q 
is preferably made foraminous. Obviously 
the air-current in the chamber A will be in a 
direction toward the fan. The chamber Ais 
also in the nature of an expansion-chamber. 
In consequence of this fact and of the provis 
ion of the separating devices, heretofore ex 
plained, located within the chamber A, sepa 
rations will be made within said chamber, one 
separation being made into the dead-air cham 
ber H and the other into the chamber FI. I 
do not limit myself to providing simply two 
such dead-air chambers within the expansion 
chamber A, as any desired number of such 
dead-air chambers may be provided Within 
the scope of my invention by adding addi 
tional diaphragms, cant-boards, and dividing 
walls. 
The pivot-pin of the joint q may be pro 
vided exterior to the frame with a quadrant 
g', by which the diaphragm Q may be ad 
justed, as required, a set-screw gholding said 
quadrant in any given position. The Wing 
G may be held in any given position of ad 
justment in any suitable manner. 
This construction forms an improved con 
tinuous air-belt purifier, separator, and 
grader. The various dead-air or settling 
chambers may communicate with chutes (in 
dicated in dotted lines, Fig. 1) for withdraw 
ing the separations from said chambers. 
It will be evident by the construction of the 
controlling-valve a, with its weighted arm, 
that the valve will automatically close and 
open just in proportion to the weight of stock 
thereabove. This will effectually prevent any 
air-current entering the trunk A through the 
feeding-inlet and passing downward through. 
said trunk, as the valve a is effectually 
closed, except as opened just sufficiently for 
the stock to be discharged therethrough. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a continuous air belt purifier, separa 
tor and grader, the combination with a fan 
and fan case, of an air chamber communicat 
ing with the interior of the fan case, separat 
ing devices located in said air chamber, a ver 
tical air trunk communicating with said air 
chamber, an air passage leading from the fan 
into said vertical air trunk separate from said 
air chamber, said vertical air trunk provided 
with a feed opening at its upper end, with a 
feed controlling valve beneath said opening, 
with an adjustable scattering plate, and With 
an adjustable depending lip pivoted at its up 
CO 
Io5 
d 
II5 
25 
O 
2 d 
25 
35 
45 
. So 
55 
 
 
543,927 
35 
45 
. 
the discharge opening, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. In a continuous air belt purifier, separa 
tor and grader, the combination of a fan and 
a fan casing, an air chamber communicating 
with the interior of the fan casing, a vertical 
air trunk communicating with said air cham 
ber and bulged intermediate its extremities, 
an air passage leading from the fan into said 
vertical trunk separate from said air chamber, 
an adjustable scattering plate D, and lip D' 
located in said vertical air trunk adjacent to 
the bulged portion thereof, an additional scat 
tering plate Ebelow the bulged portion of the 
vertical trunk, a feed opening in the top of 
said vertical air trunk, an automatic feed con 
trolling valve located in the air trunk below 
said opening, a discharge opening in the base 
of said vertical trunk, an automatic discharge 
controlling valve located in said trunk above 
the discharge opening, and separating devices 
located in said air chamber, the bulged por 
tion of said vertical trunk providing a pas 
sage way in front of the scattering plate D 
and lip D and serving as a deflector, substan 
tially as set forth. 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica- 6o 
55 
DAWI?) J. DAVIDSON. 
Witnesses: 
N. S. WRIGHT, 
M. A. MARTIN. 
O 
per end to have an oscillatory movement, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
2. In a continuous air belt purifier, separa 
tor and grader, the combination with a fan 
and fan case, of an air chamber communicat 
ing with, the interior of the fan case, separat 
ing devices located in said air chamber, a ver 
tical air trunk communicating with said air 
chamber, an air passage leading from the fan 
into the vertical air trunk separate from said 
air chamber, an adjustable scattering plate 
provided with a depending lip located within 
said vertical air trunk, and means connected 
with said scattering plate for adjusting said 
plate and lip, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a continuous air belt purifier, separa 
tor and grader, the combination with a fan 
and fan casing, of an air chamber communi 
cating with the interior of said fan casing, 
Separating devices located in said chamber, a 
vertical air trunk communicating with said air 
chamber, an air passage leading from the fan 
into said vertical air trunk separate from said 
air chamber, an adjustable scattering plate D 
and lip D'located in said vertical air trunk, an 
additional scattering plate Ebelow the scatter 
ing plate D, deflecting devices located in said 
air trunk, a feed opening in the top of said 
vertical air trunk, an automatic feed control 
ling valve located in said air trunk below said 
opening, a discharge opening in the base of 
said air trunk, and an automatic discharge 
controlling valve located in said trunk above 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544027.txt	'(No Model.) 
No. 544,027, 
R. E. CONVERT, 
WATER SUPPLY REGULATOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
- 
Patented Aug. 6, 1895. 
Ez 
a 
SEESSESSEsseS 
See 
ZAZZzesses, 
/ 
Z722/277227; 
-/a/a/ a Z (222-2. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 544,027. 
 
R. E. CONVERT. 
WATER, SUPPLY REGULATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1895, 
- 
SR 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD E. CONVERT, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
WATER. SUPPLY REGULATOR, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 544,027, dated August 6, 1895. 
Application filed January 11,1895, Serial No. 584,518 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RICHARD E. CONVERT, 
a subject of the Emperor of Germany, resid 
ing at Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Water-Supply Regu 
lators, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Water-supply regulators generally, though my 
object is more particularly to provide mech 
anism for automatically regulating the sup 
ply of Water to the cylinders or water-recep 
tacles of Soda-water or other apparatus em 
ployed in the manufacture of carbonated bev 
erages. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view in the 
nature of a diagram, showing a water-supply 
pump, two carbonating-machines connected 
therewith, and my improved mechanism for 
regulating the operation of the pump and 
the supply of water to the carbonators: Fig. 
2, an enlarged broken sectional view also in 
the nature of a diagram, showing mechanism 
for cutting of the supply of water from the 
supply-pipe to the carbonator-cylinder when 
the water reaches a certain level in the lat 
ter; and Fig. 3, a broken section, enlarged, of 
means for shutting off the supply of steam to 
the pump by back-pressure of water in the 
Supply-pipe. 
AA are carbonators, of which there may 
be any desired number, to be supplied with 
water from the steam-pump B. The carbon 
ators shown are of an improved construction, 
forming the subject of an application for 
Letters Patent of the United States, filed si 
multaneously herewith, Serial No. 584,514. 
A' A' are the water receptacles or cylin 
ders of the carbonators, and A dome-cham 
At the pump B is a steam-supply pipe i, 
provided with a valvet, a water-inlet pipes, 
and a discharge-pipe S", leading to branch 
pipess's, which are the supply-pipes for the 
carbonators. 
Interposed in the supply-pipes s are regu 
lators C C, shown in section in Fig. 2, but 
upon a much larger scale, comparatively, than 
the cylinder A. In fact the relative sizes of 
the carbonator-cylinder A and regulator C 
are, in practice, about as indicated in Fig. 1. 
The regulator C comprises a base portion r, 
inclosing a valve shellor chamber C, which is 
interposed in the branch pipes. In the 
chamber C' is a suitable valve g upon a stem 
q', which passes upward through a stuffing 
box r" at the top of the shell or chamber C. 
Rising from the top of the base r is a cylin 
der ropen at the top. 
C is a close annular chamber through the 
center of which extends a vertical tube q, and 
provided with openings pip', provided with 
hose couplingsp. Extending downward from 
the base of the chamber C is a cylindrical 
extension C, which passes loosely over the 
cylinder r, the parts telescoping together. A 
rod g passes downward through the tube q 
in the chamber C, and at its lower end con 
nects with the upper end of the valve-stem 
q'. At its upper end the rod q is fastened to 
the top of the chamber C by means of a 
thumb-screw q. In the chamber formed by 
the cylinders Cr is a collar g, adjustably. 
fastened to the rod g by a thumb-screw q, and 
extending around the said rod and confined 
between the collar q and a raising and low 
ering plate fisa helical spring g. The spring 
q supports the weight of the chamber C and 
cylindrical extension C, and the tendency 
of the spring is to raise the said parts, where 
by the rod q is drawn in the upward di 
rection to raise the stem g and valve q and 
uncover the ports of the pipes. The plate 
f is provided with ears f', which pass through 
vertical slots fin opposite sides of the cyl 
inder r, which latter is threaded on its outer 
side. The ears rest on a nut f, which works 
on the threaded portion of the cylinder r. 
By turning the nut f the plate f may be 
raised and lowered, and the tension of the 
spring g thus regulated. 
Extending from the opening p, being fas 
tened thereto at one end by means of the 
coupler p, is a hose-section n, leading to the 
under side of the adjacent carbonator-cylin 
der A, and a hose-section in extends from the 
opening p' of the chamber. C to the upper 
side of the carbonating-cylinder A. The 
chamber C of the regulator is at the side of 
and extends to, or approximately to, the top 
of the cylinder A', and the spring q is so 
regulated by adjustment of the nut f that 
the weight of the chamber C will overcome 
bers, 
w 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
9o 
95 
oO 
- 
 
2 
544,027 
5 
O 
15 
25 
35 
the resistance of the spring and sink to close 
the valve q when a given quantity of water 
has entered the chamber. 
In operation the pump B when started will 
pump water through the pipes' and branch 
pipes and through the interposed ports s 
into the top of the dome-chamber A* of each 
carbonator. Water flowing to the cylinder 
A' also passes through the hose-section in to 
the chamber C, while air is vented from the 
top of the chamber C through the hose in to 
the cylinder A'. When the water has reached 
the desired level in the cylinder A' and cham 
ber C, the weight of the water in the cham 
ber C overcomes the resistance of the spring 
q and closes the valve q, whereby the supply 
of water to the respective cylinder A' is cut 
off. When, by the injection of carbonic-acid 
gas, the water in the cylinder A' is sufficiently 
charged it may be withdrawn through dis 
charge-pipes l. Before opening the valvest 
at the pipes l valves s in the branch pipess' 
may be closed to shut off the supply of water 
until the respective cylinder A' is drained of 
its contents. When the contents of the cyl 
inder A' are withdrawn the water-level in the 
chamber C will lower with that of the cylin 
der and permit the spring g to raise the cham 
ber and open the valve g, whereby, when in 
the next operation the respective valves is 
opened, water will flow freely to the carbon 
ating-cylinder until shut off by the regulating 
mechanism C. When the carbonators are 
worked continuously-that is to say, when 
contents are withdrawn more or less con 
stantly while water flows into the cylinders 
and is carbonated-the regulator C will rise 
and fall as the water-level changes, and main 
tain the valve g open just sufficiently to cause 
water to flow to the cylinder as fast as con 
tents are withdrawn. 
Interposed in the steam-pipet is a valve-shell 
D, presenting a valve-seatic, upon which seats 
an opening and closing valve k' provided with 
a stem lic. The stem k extends upward 
through a stuffing-boxic in the top of the shell 
or chamber D. Mounted upon the shell or 
chamber D is a frame D', carrying a piston 
chamber D. In the chamber D is a piston i 
upon a stem i', which passes through a stuffing 
box in the lower part of the chamber and con 
nects with the valve-stem c. Confined be 
tween the piston and lower part of the cham 
ber D is a spring . The tendency of the 
spring is to raise the piston i, and through 
the latter draw up the stems k and lift the 
valve k' from its seat, whereby steam flows 
freely to the pump to operate the latter. Ex 
tending from the top of the chamber D is a 
pipe h, leading to the water-supply pipes'. 
In operation, the valve h' being opened, 
when Water pumped through the pipes' has 
filled the receptacles or cylinders of the car. 
bonators to cause the regulators C to shut off 
the supply, the continued operation of the 
pump will raise the pressure in the pipes' 
and branch pipes to the valves q of the regul 
lators, and without some means such as I pro 
vide to prevent it there would be danger of 
bursting of the pipes. The spring i is capa 
ble of resisting pressure against the piston i 
during the normal operation of the machine; 
but under the increased pressure in the pipe 
s', and consequently in the pipe h, under the 
continued action of the pump when the said 
valves are closed, the piston i is forced down 
ward against the resistance of the spring , 
and by moving down the stems ill closes the 
valve k' and shuts off the supply of steam, 
causing stoppage of the pump. When the 
pressure is relieved by opening any valve 
which will cause water to flow to a carbonat 
ing-cylinder, the spring will raise the pis 
ton i and open the valve k to start the pump. 
My improvements constructed as described 
are automatic in their operation, and while 
I prefer to provide the mechanism in every 
detail as shown and described, the construc 
tion is subject to modification in the matter 
of details without departing from the spirit 
of my invention as defined by the claim. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
The combination with two or more recep 
tacles, of a steam actuated pump, a water 
supply-pipe extending from the pump and 
communicating with all the receptacles, a wa 
ter-supply regulator at each receptacle com 
prising a valve interposed between the re 
spective receptacle and the supply-pipe, and 
valve closing means operated by the rise of wa 
ter in the receptacles above a predetermined 
level, and means for stopping the pump when 
all the said valves are closed, comprising a 
valve interposed in the steam supply-pipe, a 
stem on the valve, a chamber in open com 
munication with the water-supply-pipe, a 
movable abutment in the chamber connected 
with the said stem and subject on one side to 
pressure from the water supply-pipe and a 
spring operating counter to the water press 
ure to maintain said abutment normally in 
the position of opening the said valve, the 
parts being so constructed and arranged 
that rise of pressure in the water supply-pipe 
will move the abutment against the resistance 
of the spring and close the said valve in the 
steam supply-pipe, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
RICHARD E. CONVERT, 
In presence of 
J. N. HANSON, 
M. J. FROST. 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
II.5 
5 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544127.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 544,127. 
 
R. & C, F. SCHMIDT. 
BOTTLE OR CAN LABELING MACHINE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 544, 127 
R. & C. F. SCHMIDT. 
BOTTLE OR CAN LABELING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
0%u, 
(No Model.) 
. 
. 
. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
. 
. . 
R. & C. F. SCHMIDT. 
BOTTLE OR, CAN LABELING MACHINE, 
No. 544,127. 
 
Patented Aug. 6, 1895. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD SCHMIDTAND CORNILS F. SCHMIDT, OF LEAVEN WORTH, KANSAS. 
BOTTLE OR CAN LABELING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 544,127, dated August 6, 1895. 
Application filed November 28, 1894, Serial No, 530,243, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, RICHARD SCHMIDT and 
CORNILS F. SCHMIDT, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Leavenworth, in the county 
of Leaven Worth and State of Kansas, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Bottle or Can Labeling Machines; and we 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the figures of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to labeling-machines, 
and the purpose thereof is to provide auto 
matic mechanism for applying labels to bot 
tles or cans by taking the printed labels from 
a continuous Web, either previously or subse 
quently gummed, separating the single labels 
Successively and applying the labels to the 
moistened bottles as the latter are fed to the 
point where the separated labels issue from 
the mechanism by which they are advanced, 
Where the adhesive faces of the labels are 
brought in contact with the bottles or cans, 
the union being completed or perfected by 
pressure. 
It is our object, also, to make provision for 
the application of two separate labels to each 
bottle or can, one being placed upon the body 
and the other upon the contracted portion or 
neck, if it be a bottle, simultaneously, our aim 
being to accomplish this double application 
in the same machine and without materially 
increasing the number of operative parts or 
Complicating the mechanical arrangement. 
It is our object, also, to simplify and im 
prove the construction and operation of mech 
anism of this type; and the invention consists 
in the novel features, parts, and combinations 
of parts, hereinafter fully explained and then 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
To enable others skilled in the art to clearly. 
understand and use our invention, we will 
proceed to describe the same in detail, refer 
ence being had for this purpose to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a machine in 
which the invention is incorporated. Fig. 2 
is a vertical longitudinal section of the same, 
and Fig. 3 is a plan view, 
The reference-numeral 1 in said drawings 
indicates the frame of the machine, which is 
of any suitable form that will provide support 
for the operative parts. We prefer, however, 
to employ an elevated base projecting beyond 
the forward end of the machine, the essential 
parts of the frame consisting of posts rising 
above the base to which they may be bolted. 
Upon these posts is mounted the feed-board 
2, provided with side strips 3 separated from 
each other by such an interval that the bot 
tles may pass between the same when laid 
upon the feed-board transversely. Over the 
surface of the latter is carried an endless 
apron or carrier 4, which may consist of jointed 
belts, chains, or sprocket-belts 5 connected to - 
gether at suitable intervals by transverse 
slats or strips 8, which rise, or project far 
enough above the base or board 2 to retain 
the transversely-placed bottles between them. 
The apron passes around the ends of the feed 
board and beneath the same, rolls or shafts 
being provided with sprockets or other suit 
able gears 7 to carry the jointed belts 5. 
Beneath the rearward portion of the feed 
board 2 is arranged a roll 9, upon which is 
supported a continuous Web 10, upon which 
the labels are printed and which has one side 
gummed. The web is carried toward the 
front end of the machine and passed between 
an upper and lower roll 12 and 13, journaled 
posts 
in bearings supported by one of the 
which sustain the feed-board 2. These rolls 
are provided one with a cutting edge or knife 
14 and the other with a groove 15, into which 
the knife presses in making its cut. Spur 
gears are mounted on the shafts of said rolls 
and meshed, so that they will revolve in uni 
son. Between the shaft carrying the continu 
ous web and the cutting-rolls may be ar 
ranged a gumming-roll 16 in contact with 
the web, to which it applies the required ad 
hesive coating if the web has not been pre 
viously gummed. The severed portion of the 
web passes between an upper and a lower 
guide-plate 17 and 18, which direct the web 
to the label-feeding mechanism. This mech 
anism consists of two upper rolls 19 and 20, 
which carry a belt 21, and two similar lower 
rolls 22 and 23, carrying a belt 24. Between 
the rolls by which they are stretched and car 
ried the belts are in contact and are slightly 
O 
25 
3) 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
7 o 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
 
2. 
544,127 
Io 
20 
2 5 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
inclined upward to bring the higher pair of 
rolls nearly in vertical line with and a little 
beneath the end of the apron or carrier 4, 
where it passes around the forward end of 
the feed-board. The rolls 19 and 20 are 
geared respectively to the rolls 22 and 23, so 
that they revolve in unison, carrying the con 
tacting-faces of the belts toward the forward 
end of the feed-board. 
Immediately in front of the rolls 20 and 23 
is placed a support 25, having an angle which 
partly enters between the rolls to aid in di 
recting the label upward above its surface 26, 
which is inclined somewhat downward, so that 
the bottle or can will lie below the label. 
This support is preferably formed or sur 
faced with any suitable yielding or elastic 
imaterial, so that the bottles which descend 
thereon by gravity as they pass over the end 
of the feed-board above shall not rebound or 
be damaged. 
In front of the support 25 is placed a drop 
mechanism consisting of a yoke-shaped frame 
27, having the ends of its two parallel arms 
pivoted to posts 28, which stand at the sides 
of the frame and close to the support 25. 
The parallel arms of the frame are also curved 
slightly, so that their upper edges are con 
cave. In these arms are supported the jour 
nals of a series of rolls 29, capable of revolv 
ing freely, their upper cylindrical faces being 
in a line substantially parallel with the con 
cave edges of the arms supporting them. 
From One side of the frame at or near the 
transverse member thereof is a laterally-pro 
jecting arm 30, to which is connected a spiral 
spring 31, the end of said spring being at 
tached to an overhead arm 32 on a vertical 
support 33. The tension of this spring is such 
as to maintain the yoke-frame substantially 
in the position shown in Fig. 2. At each side 
of the frame, near its middle portion, is 
erected a post 34, in which is supported one 
journal of a roll 35, which is preferably formed 
of rubber or suitable elastic material, or sur 
faced there with. The end of this roll is pro 
vided with a sprocket-gear 36, driven by means 
described hereinafter. 
In one of the posts of the frame near its 
middle is placed a main driving-shaft 37, 
having a driving-pulley 38 and a spur-gear 
39, which meshes with the gear on the roll 12. 
On the oppositeside of the machine a sprocket 
40 is mounted on the shaft 37 and geared by 
a Sprocket-chain 41 to a sprocket 42 on the 
shaft of the roll 19. A second sprocket-gear 
43 on the shaft last named is geared by a 
sprocket-chain 44 to the sprocket-gear 36 on 
the shaft of the elastic roll 35. 
The forward roll 6, which carries the apron 
4, is driven by a sprocket-chain 46, geared to 
a Sprocket 47 on the shaft of said roll and to 
a smaller sprocket 48 on the roll 22. 
Upon the driving-shaft 37 is a bevel-gear 
49, meshing With a similar gear 50, the latter 
being on a shaft 51, arranged in laterally-pro 
jecting brackets 52 and parallel with the side 
of the machine. On the forward end of this 
shaft, which extends to the point where the 
roll 35 is placed, is an L-shaped crank-arm 53, 
having an antifriction-roll 54, which lies di 
rectly over the laterally-projecting arm 30 of 
the frame 27, the arrangement being such 
that at each revolution of the shaft 51 the roll 
54 will strike the arm 30 and swing the yoke 
frame 27 downward, thereby placing the 
spring 31 under the increased tension. 
The bottles or cans are arranged upon the 
apron 4 between and parallel with the slats 
S, and they are wet or moistened by sprink 
ling or wetting with water in any suitable 
manner. As they are brought successively 
to the end of the feed-board they fall by 
gravity onto the surface 26 of the Support 25 
and from there pass onto the yoke-frame 27. 
The label is advanced by the belts 21 and 24 
and passed upward and above the surface 26, 
as indicated in the drawings, the gummed 
face of the label being lowermost and the 
label passed over the bottle or can, so as to 
bear against the same. The rolls carrying 
the belts 21 and 24 are geared to a greater 
speed than the rolls 12 and 13, which feed 
and cut the web, whereby each severed label 
is carried forward and separated from the 
one following by an interval sufficient to per 
mit the bottle to descend upon the frame and 
receive the label and have the same pressed 
against it by the roll 35 and allow another bot 
tle to reach the required point for the attach 
ment of the next label. 
The bottle, which falls upon the inclined 
face 26 and rolls onto the rolls 29, passes be 
neath the rubber roll 35, by contact with which 
it is caused to revolve, turning upon and with 
the rolls on which it rests. This rolling con 
tact securely attaches the label by pressing 
it closely against the outer surface of the 
bottle, and the latter is then rolled off upon 
a mat or suitable surface 55 by the action of 
the crank-arm 53, which tilts the frame 27, as 
already described. 
Ef it be desired to apply a second label to 
the contracted portion or neck of a bottle, we 
simply mount the Web containing the second 
Series of labels on the same shaft which car 
ries the web, heretofore described. The sec 
ond Web is fed, gummed, cut, and applied in 
the same manner and by the same means al 
ready explained, the principal change made 
being in the rubber roll 35, which is shaped 
at or near one end, as shown by dotted lines 
60, Fig. 3, to correspond with the shape of 
the bottle-neck. A separate roll may, how 
ever, be used for this purpose, if preferred. 
We have shown and described what we con 
sider to be the best construction and arrange 
ment of the several parts; but changes can be 
made therein without departing from the es 
Sential features of the invention. 
What we claim is 
1. In a bottle and can labeling machine, the 
combination with a belt or carrier carrying 
bottles, of rolls feeding and cutting a web of 
o 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IoS 
O 
I 15 
I 25 
 
544,127. 
3 
labels, means advancing the severed labels at 
increased speed, a support having an inclined 
face beneath the end of the carrier and onto 
which the cans or bottles fall as they pass 
from the carrier, a frame having a series of 
rolls to receive the bottle, an elastic roll ar 
ranged above said rolls, and means for driv 
ing the elastic roll, substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
2. In a bottle and can labeling machine, the 
combination with an endless belt or carrier 
carrying bottles or cans, of rolls feeding and 
cutting an endless web of labels beneath the 
belt or carrier, means advancing the severed 
labels over the can or bottle as it rests upon 
a drop-frame, a drop consisting of a pivoted 
spring sustained frame, the side arms of said 
frame supporting rolls, an elastic rollarranged 
above said rolls, and driven by suitable means, 
and mechanism for periodically tilting the 
pivoted drop-frame downward, substantially 
as and for the purposes described. 
3. In a bottle and can labeling machine, the 
combination with an endless belt or carrier 
carrying bottles or cans, of rolls feeding and 
cutting labels from an endless web beneath 
the belt or carrier, belts for advancing the 
severed, gummed labels, means for driving 
said belts at an increased speed, a pivoted 
spring sustained drop-frame having a series 
of rolls, a positively driven elastic roll ar 
ranged over said rolls, and a shaft carrying a 
crank-arm which at each revolution impinges 
on a laterally projecting arm on the drop 
frame, to tilt the same downward, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
O 
I5. 
35 
4. In a bottle and can labeling machine, the 
combination with a can or bottle carrier, of a 
pivoted spring sustained drop-frame having 
a series of rolls sustained by its side arms and 
provided with a laterally projecting arm, 
means for periodically impinging on Said lat 
erally projecting arm to depress the drop 
frame and tilt the same downward, means for 
delivering labels to the bottles or cans on said 
drop-frame, and a driven roll to press the la 
bels onto the cans or bottles and revolve the 
latter, substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
5. In a bottle and can labeling machine, the 
combination with an endless belt or carrier, 
carrying bottles or cans, of rolls feeding and 
cutting labels from an endless web, a guide 
plate to receive the severed portions of the 
web from the cutting rolls, belts for advanc 
ing the severed gummed labels, a support 
placed beneath the end of the belt or carrier 
to receive the bottle or can from said belt or 
carrier, a drop frame to support the bottle or 
can while the label is being applied, a roller 
for pressing the label on the bottle or can, 
and means for tilting said drop to discharge 
the bottle or can after the label is applied, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signar 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
RICHARD SCHMIDT. 
CORNILS. F. SCHMIDT. 
Witnesses: 
FRITZ LORCH, 
HENRY KEGEL.MYER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544227.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. HOFF & C. K. PICKLES. 
STENCIL CUTTING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 544,227, 
a 
2 Patented Aug. 6, 1895. 
77767, 7. 
4ZZesz- 
A? ( A. 
-- 
227a 
612 
7zarazzzzz zot, 
(/2/2/z (Y. Zez72 
(zz'g ZzZ%s 
24/3, 2%, 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 544,227. 
777, fi, 
J. A. HOFF & C. K. PICKLES. 
STENCIL CUTTING MACHINE. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1895. 
 
12zz/24 
2%22% 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J. A. HOFF & C. K. PICKLES. 
STENCIL CUTTING MACHINE, 
No. 544,227. 
 
  
 
N 
 
S N 
 
S SIN 
 
  
N 
N T 
s 
 
 
N 
 
 
 
2 
SA 
Q 
e/222a (2/22/2, 
47%.7%s 1, 12.6%s. 
y 2, 27/2- 
Zzzt 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN A. HOFF AND CHARLES K. PICKLES, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGN 
ORS, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE AMERICAN STENCIL MACHINE 
COMPANY, OF EAST ST. LOUIS, ILLINOIS. 
STENCIL-CUTTING MACHINE. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 544,227, dated August 6, 1895. 
Application filed November 16, 1894, Serial No. 529,014 (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN A. HoFF and 
CHARLES K. PICKLES, of the city of St. Louis, 
in the State of Missouri, have invented a cer. 
5 tain new and useful Improvement in Stencil 
Cutting Machines, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description; reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming part of this specification. 
The object of our invention is to provide 
improved means for forming stencils in pa 
per sheets, cardboard, sheet metal, or board, 
and relates more particularly to the avoid 
ance of loosely reciprocating patrices, there 
I5 by producing a machine of less moving parts 
and elements in a more compact and easily 
operated manner. 
Our invention consists in the construction, 
arrangement, and combination of parts, here 
2O in after set forth, pointed out in our claims, 
and illustrated by the accompanying draw. 
ings, in which 
Figure l is a plan view of the complete ma 
chine. Fig. 2 is a detail elevation of a por 
25 tion of the rack-bar and clamp, partly insec 
tion. Fig. 3 is a plan of the matrix-plate from 
Which Some of the matrices have been re 
moved. Fig. 4 is a plan of the patrix-plate 
from which some of the patrices have been 
3o removed. Fig. 5 is a sectional elevation on 
the line 55 of Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a detail ele 
Vation, partly in section, of the patrix-oper 
ating devices. Fig. 7 is a sectional elevation 
on the line 67 of Fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a sectional 
35 plan on the line 88 of Fig. 5. Fig. 9 is a de 
tail elevation of a portion of the yoke-bar. 
Fig. 10 is a transverse sectional elevation on 
the line 10 10 of Fig. 8. Fig. 11 is a detail 
front elevation of the yoke-bar. Fig. 12 is a 
4o detail view illustrating a modification of our 
device. Fig. 13 is a detail sectional elevation 
of another modification. 
In the construction of the machine, as 
shown, the numeral 10 designates a table, hav 
ing in one portion an annular depressed por 
tion 11, in the center of which depressed por 
tion is located a hub 12. 
Mounted within the hub 12 is a bolt 13, 
having a reduced lower end portion bearing 
4 
p 
S. 
55 
65 
. 
in said hub and screw-threaded a portion of 
its length, nuts 13 mounted upon said screw 
threaded portion firmly seating the bolt 13 in 
the said hub. 
Mounted upon the bolt 13 and adapted for 
horizontal rotation on the upper surface of 
the hub 12 is a matrix-plate 14, having mar 
ginally-arranged matrices 15, in which are 
formed symbolical configurations, the repro 
duction of which is to be formed in the sten 
cil-sheet. 
Mounted for horizontal rotation on the bolt 
13 and secured to rotate conjunctively with 
the matrix-plate 14 is a patrix-plate 16. The 
patrix-plate 16 is formed of resiliant metalin 
one piece, and has a plurality of radial arms 
17, produced by the formation of radial slots 
18 in said plate at uniform distances of sepa 
ration. 
A guide-plate 19, having a series of up 
Wardly - extending separated posts 20, is 
mounted upon and fixed to the patrix-plate 16 
by means of screws 2l, the marginal roW of 
posts 20 on said guide-plate being concentric 
with the axis of rotation of the patrix and 
matrix plates. 
A collar or shoulder 22 is formed on the bolt 
13 above and in engagement with the center 
or hub of the guide-plate 19. 
Each of the radial arms 17 of the patrix 
plate is provided with a vertical aperture 23 
in its extremity, through which is passed the 
stem 24 of a patrix 25, the upper end of which 
stem is screw - threaded and has mounted 
thereon a nut 26, which, acting in conjunction 
with the patrix 25, rigidly secures the patrix to 
said arm. The lower end of each patrix 25 is 
provided with an embossed or projecting por 
tion 27, corresponding in size and configura 
tion with the matrix 15, located immediately 
beneath the same and registering there with, 
the said patrices and matrices corresponding 
also in number. The arms 17 of the patrix 
plate 16 are curved upwardly, as clearly shown 
in Fig. 5, so as to provide for a clearance be 
tween the lower face of the patrix projection 
27 and the upper face of the matrix 15 for the 
admission of the stencil-sheet. Each of the 
radial arms 17 of the patrix-plate 16 is pro 
95 
2 
544,227 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
7c 
75 
90 
95 
go 
vided with an index-symbol corresponding to 
the symbolical configuration of one of the 
adjacent patrices. 
A yoke-bar 2S is mounted transversely of 
the machine from front to rear of the patrix 
plate and above the same, the rear end of 
which bar is rigidly secured to the table 10 
by means of screws 29, the center of said bar 
having formed therein a bearing adapted to 
admit the upper end portion of the bolt 13, 
to which bolt said bar is secured by nuts 30. 
A vertical bearing or bossed portion 31 is 
formed in the forward end of the yoke-bar 
2S, within which bossed portion is mounted 
for vertical reciprocation an operating-plun 
ger 32, having a cavity 33 in its lower face 
adapted to inclose and engage the upper end 
of the patrix stem and nut. The plunger 32 
is also provided with a transverse horizontal 
slot 34, adapted to admit an arm 35, formed 
on and laterally extending from a lever or 
handle 36, fulcrumed on a pin 37 in a bifur 
cation or slot 38 of the yoke-bar 28. The por 
tion 35 of the operating-handle 36 has a 
curved periphery adapted to bear upon the 
sides (top and bottom) of the slot 34 of the 
plunger 32. 
A slide 3S is mounted outside and in front 
of the bossed portion 31 of the yoke-bar 28, 
which slide is provided with a stud 39 later 
ally extended through a slot 40 in the said 
bossed portion and seated in the upper por 
tion of the plunger 32. The slide 38 is also 
provided with a slot 41 below the stud 39, 
through which slot an adjusting-screw 42 is 
passed and seated in the adjacent wall of the 
bossed portion 31. The slide 3S is provided 
at its lower end with an inwardly-extending 
flange 43 adapted to engage with and beneath 
individual arms 17 of the patrix-plate. 
A retractile spiral spring 44 is fixed at one 
end to the yoke-bar 28 within the bifurcation 
3S, and at its other end to the lever or handle 
36 above the fulcrum-pin 37. 
Formed on the lower end of the operating 
handle 36, beneath the fulcrum-pin 37, is an 
arm 45, to which is pivotally connected, by 
means of a pin 46, a guiding-arm 47, which 
guiding-arm has a sliding connection or bear 
ing in the slot 38 of the yoke-bar 28. Formed 
on and extending downwardly from the inner 
end portion of the guiding-arm 47 is a lug or 
finder 4S, having an attenuated edge adapted 
to enter between two of the posts 20 and re 
tain said posts in given positions relative to 
the yoke-bar. 
An index-pointer 49 is fixed to the central 
portion of the yoke-bar 28 and extends at 
right angles laterally therefrom. 
Extending across the forward end of the 
table 10, and supported above said table on 
standards 50 50 is a rack-bar 51, the rack in 
which bar is formed by V-shaped notches ar 
ranged at intervals in its upper surface. A 
plate 52 having a horizontal bearing 53 is 
mounted by said bearing on the rack-bar 51, 
and is adapted for movement longitudinally 
of said bar. Vertically positioned in the cen 
tral portion of the bearing 53 is a latch-pin 54 
having a V-shaped lower end portion adapted 
for engagement with individual V-shaped 
notches of the rack-bar, which latch-pin is se 
cured to and depressed by a leaf-spring 55 
connected thereto at one end and Secured at 
the opposite end to the bearing 56 by means 
of a screw 57. The bearings 5656 are formed 
on a plate 58, which normally rests on the 
table 10, and said bearings have a slide con 
nection with the rack-bar conjunctively with 
the bearing 53. Mating with and immediately 
above the plate 58 is a plate 59, hinged to the 
inner end of the plate 52. An adjusting-screw 
60 is passed transversely through the plate 52 
and seated in the plate 5S, whereby the said 
plate 52 is adjusted relative to the plate 5S, 
and caused to bring into contact and close 
parallel relation the plates 5S and 59. 
The plates 52, 5S, and 59, bearings 53 and 56, 
and adjusting-screw 60 constitute the clamp, 
whereby a stencil-sheet (shown by dotted 
lines in Fig. 1) is rigidly retained in a desired 
position. Graduating scales G1 are formed 
on the forward margin of the table 10 and 
coincide with the V-shaped notches in the 
rack-bar. 
In Fig. 12 we have provided for a double 
patrix-plate comprising parallel member's 62 
63, located at slight distances of separation 
and formed with a plurality of coinciding ra 
dial arms 6465 in the outer ends of which arms 
the patrix is mounted. 
In Fig. 13 we have provided the plunger 32 
with a downwardly - extending socket (3G 
adapted to embrace a head 67 formed on the 
upper end of the stencil-patrix, and have 
formed the washer 68, between the nut 26 and 
the patrix-arm 17, with an outwardly and up 
wardly extending flange 69, adapted for slid 
ing and lifting engagement with a flanged 
lug 70, formed on and downwardly extending 
from the plunger 32, thus insuring the return 
of the patrix and its arm to its normal seat 
and providing a broad bearing whereby said 
patrix is uniformly depressed and returned. 
In the practical operation of this machine 
the stencil-sheet is positioned as shown by 
dotted lines in Fig. 1 and rigidly retained in 
the clamp by the adjustment of the screw 60, 
the clamp being positioned relative to the 
side margins of the machine by manual opera 
tion and retained temporarily by the engage 
ment of the pin 54 by one of the notches of 
the rack-bar. The stencil-sheet being posi 
tioned, the patrix and matrix plates are con 
junctively rotated to bring the desired sym 
bol or patrix into alignment with the plunger 
32, the correct adjustment of said plates be 
ing determined by the designation of the 
pointer 49 to the desired index-symbol, the 
rotation of said plates being effected by the 
manual engagement thereof. 
Having positioned the stencil-plate and the 
desired patrix relative thereto, the outer end 
of the operating-handle 36 is manually de 
O 
I 15 
I 25 
544,227 
pressed, thus longitudinally removing the 
guiding-bar 47, and causing the lug 48 to en 
gage between two of the guide-posts 20 and 
retain the patrix-plate against rotation. A 
further depression of the outer end of the 
operating-handle 36 results in the depression 
of the plunger 32 and engagement of said 
plunger with the patrix through the engage 
ment with said plunger of the arm 35, thus 
depressing the patrix and spring-arm with 
which it is connected and causing said patrix 
to penetrate the stencil-sheet in registration 
with the aligning matrix. 
The movement of depression of the plunger 
32 carries the slide 38 downward coincident 
with the depression of the spring-arm and 
patrix, and, upon the release of the manual 
depressing-force from the lever 36 the said 
leveris withdrawn into its normal inoperative 
position by the resilience of the retractile 
spring 44, thus elevating the plunger-slide and 
spring-arm conjunctively through the engage 
ment of the plunger by the arm 35 and the 
withdrawal of the guiding-bar from engage 
ment with the guide-posts. 
In order to position the stencil-sheet for the 
next succeeding perforation the clamp is 
moved, by the application of manual force 
thereto, longitudinally of the rack-bar the de 
sired distance, and the desired imprint made 
on said stencil-sheet by a sucessive movement 
of the operating-handle. 
In the provision of the parallel patrix-plates, 
as shown in Fig.12, I have insured the paral 
lelling of the contact-position of the cutting 
face with the normal at rest position of 
said cutting-face. 
While I have specially referred to this ma 
chine as Working upon paper, it will be under 
stood that it is as well adapted for stenciling 
sheets of metal as sheets of paper or analogous 
material. 
What we claim is 
1. A stencil cutting machine comprising a 
radially slotted plate, providing spring arms, 
carrying the patrices a plunger adapted to 
positively engage and move the patrices with 
their spring arms, in both directions, a guide 
plate Surmounting the slotted plate, having a 
series of posts, a radially sliding guiding-arm 
engaging the posts and a lever connected with 
the plunger and with the guiding-arm. 
2. The combination of the table provided 
with an annular portion having a hub, the 
yoke-bar secured to the table, the bolt sup 
ported on the hub, and by the yoke-bar, the 
matrix-plate surrounding the bolt, the ra 
dially slotted patrix-plate providing spring 
arms and surrounding the bolt, and supported 
on and rotating with the matrix-plate, the 
patrices Secured to the outer ends of the 
spring-arms, the plunger sliding in the yoke 
bar for depressing the patrices, having means 
... O 
O 
45 
55 
for returning the patrices to normal position, 
and an operating lever, pivoted to the yoke 
bar, having an arm engaging the plunger, sub 
tantially as described. 
3. The combination of the table, provided 
with an annular portion having a hub, the 
yoke-bar secured to the table, the bolt sup 
ported on the hub and by the yoke-bar, the 
matrix-plate, surrounding the bolt, the ra 
dially slotted patrix-plate, providing Spring 
arms, surrounding the bolt, and supported on 
and rotating with the matrix-plate, the pat 
rices secured to the outer ends of the spring 
arms, the plunger sliding in the yoke-bar for 
depressing the patrices, the slide, secured to 
the plunger having an inwardly extending 
flange for returning the patrices to normal 
position and an operating lever, pivoted to 
the yoke-bar, having an arm engaging the 
plunger, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the table provided 
with an annular portion having a hub, the 
yoke-bar secured to the table, the bolt sup 
ported on the hub, and by the yoke-bar, the 
matrix-plate, surrounding the bolt, the ra 
dially slotted patrix-plate providing spring-.. 
arms and surrounding the bolt, and supported 
on and rotating with the matrix-plate the 
patrices secured to the outer ends of the 
spring-arms, the guide-plate, surmounting the 
patrix-plate, having posts, the guiding arm 
secured to the yoke-bar sliding thereon and 
adapted to engage the posts, the plunger slid 
ing in the yoke-bar, for depressing the pat 
rices, and an operating lever, pivoted to the 
yoke-bar, having an arm engaging the plun 
ger, and an arm connected with the guiding 
arm; substantially as described. 
5. The combination with a table of a sten 
ciling machine, of the standards, a rack-bar 
mounted in the standards, an upper plate 
having a horizontal bearing on the rack-bar, 
the lower plate having horizontal bearings on 
the rack-bar, the pressure plate hinged to the 
upper plate, the adjusting screw working in 
the upper plate and seated in the lower plate, 
and the latch-pin, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of a table having a 
graduated margin a bar mounted on Said ta 
ble in alignment with said graduated margin 
and provided with notches registering with 
the graduations of said margin, a clamp 
mounted for travel on said bar, a Spring 
pressed detent mounted on said clamp and 
adapted for successive engagement with said 
notches and means for adjusting the clamp 
members, 
JOHN A. HOFF. 
CHARLES K. PICKLES. 
75 
95 
I do 
IC5 
Id 
In presence of 
E. S. KNIGHT, 
N. FINLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544327.txt	(No Model.) 
H, SPRINGSTUBE, 
SAND BOX, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
No. 544,327, 
Patented Aug. 13, 1895. 
 
ZZZZZ 
Z722/e7ezoz. 
 ZevezZ SZ272?zegzis Ze. 
. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 544,327. 
H, SPRINGSTUBE, 
SANDBOX 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY SPRINGSTUBE, OF ALLENTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SAND-Box. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 544,327, dated August 18, 1895. 
- 
Application filed April 15, 1895, Serial No. 545,771, (No model.) 
55 
6 2 
7 ? 
75 
90 
9. 
I oo 
To all, ? ????, it ??? ????cer?: 
Be it known that I, HENRY SPRINGSTUBE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Allen 
town, in the county of Lehigh, State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Sand-Boxes, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had thereinto the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in devices for sanding 
railway tracks or rails, and is designed more 
especially for use upon electric street-cars. 
It will of course be understood that the in 
Vention may be applied to other forms of cars. 
It has for its objects, among others, to pro 
vide a simple and cheap sand-box and mech 
anism for controlling the discharge of sand 
therefrom, always under the control of the 
driver, motorman, or other person on the car. 
I provide for the screening of the material as 
it is placed in the box or hopper so as to pre 
vent particles beyond a predetermined size 
passing into the same, and otherwise guard 
against injury to the operating parts or to 
their derangement. Ifurther provide for the 
agitation of the sand to prevent clogging 
or caking, and further, I construct and ar 
range the parts as a whole so as to be readily 
assembled and occupy a minimum space. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear, and the novel 
features thereof will be particularly pointed 
out in the appended claims. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan of the parts of the 
device located beneath the platform of the 
car or other support, the actuating mechan 
ism being omitted. Fig. 2 is a top plan with 
the upper plate removed, but indicated in 
position by dotted lines. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
section on the line 33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a 
side elevation. Fig. 5 is a vertical section 
through the line 55 of Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is an 
elevation at right angles to that of Fig. 4, with 
the agitating devices removed. Fig. 7 is an 
enlarged sectional view with portions broken 
away and parts in elevation, showing the box 
and the actuating devices in position on the 
Ca. Fig. 8 is a section on the line 88 of Fig. 
9. Fig. 9 is a detail in elevation with a part 
in section, showing a modified form of the op 
erating device. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout the several views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates a portion of the 
platform of a car, and B a box, hopper, or 
other receptacle mounted in any suitable po 
sition upon the car and designed to receive 
and contain the sand which is to be fed to 
the rails by means soon to be described. This 
box or receptacle has a screen B', as seen in 
Fig. 7, by which the sand is screened to pre 
vent any particles above a predetermined 
size entering the box or receptacle, so as to 
prevent clogging or injury to the parts. As 
above stated, this box or receptacle may be 
placed in any desired position, as under the 
seat or wherever may be found most expedi 
ent. The remainder of the mechanism, ex 
cept the lever for actuating the same, is de 
signed to be all arranged beneath the bottom 
or platform of the car, as indicated in Fig. 7. 
Referring now to Figs. 1 to 6, inclusive, the 
construction and arrangement of the parts 
constituting the box and the mechanism for 
controlling the discharge therefrom will be 
readily understood. It comprises the hopper 
C, having flanges C through which pass suit 
able means, as bolts C, for securing the same 
to the under side of the car or platform, as 
seen in Fig. 7. The capacity of this hopper 
or sand-box may be varied as may be required, 
and it has a central sleeve or boss C, shown 
best in Figs. 1 and 3, the shape of which is 
best indicated in Fig. 1, so as to provide the 
small opening C, seen in Figs. 1 and 2, the 
said box or hopper having also the flange or 
lugs C, through which pass suitable bolts D, 
which pass also through the flange E' of the 
lower casting or receptacle E to bind the two 
together, the said part E having at diamet 
rically-opposite sides the recesses e in which 
are located the flat springs F, which are de 
signed to bear against the under face of the 
slide to keep the same in close contact with 
the under face of the flange of the part C, as 
indicated best in Fig. 3, to prevent the in 
gress of sand between the upper face of the 
plate and the said flange, as will be readily 
understood. 
I. ? 
15 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
544,327 
? ? 
The part E is formed with a sleeve or boss 
E coincident with that of C of the part that 
is seen in Figs. 3 and 5, and in coincident 
openings in these two lugs or openings is the 
pin G, as seen best in Figs. 3 and 5, which 
pin extends in opposite directions from the 
center of the plate H, which is mounted for 
rotation upon said pin as a pivot or center, 
and the outer edge of which plate is, as above 
stated, located between the springs F and 
the under edge of the fange and part C, as 
clearly shown in Fig. 3. This plate has two 
diametrically-disposed openingsh, preferably 
circular, although they may be of any other 
shape, and this plate is provided with an arm 
or lug I that extends through a slot or recess 
di in the part E, as seen in Figs. 1, 4, 5, and 
6, and has an opening or openings for the 
connection of the means which are employed 
for actuating the plate. When this plate is 
moved in one direction it brings the openings 
h therein coincident with the openings or 
passages C in the box C, as indicated by full 
lines in Fig. 2, and the sand in the box may 
pass through said openings into the spout; 
but when the plate is turned in the opposite 
direction the openings l are brought under 
a solid portion of the bottom of the box C, as 
indicated by dotted lines in said Fig. 2, and 
the flow of material is prevented. 
J is a spout extending preferably in an in 
clined direction from the under side of the 
part E, as indicated, and arranged in position 
with relation to the rails to deposit the sand 
thereon when the plate is in position to per 
mit of the discharge of the sand. This spout 
may be of any suitable character, in this in 
stance being shown as in sections united by 
a coupling J. 
In order to agitate the sand within the box 
and prevent clogging or caking thereof, I pro 
vide a stirrer or stirrers IK, consisting of up 
right forks carried by the plate H, as shown, 
and extending up into the sand, so that as the 
plate is moved the said forks or stirrers move 
through the Sand and agitate the same. 
Any suitable mechanism may be employed 
for actuating the plate Hand controlling the 
discharge of the sand. In Fig. 7 I have shown 
One form, while in Figs. 8 and 9 is illustrated 
another, and it will of course be understood 
that other forms of mechanism may be em 
ployed for this purpose. 
The form shown in Fig. 7 comprises a bell 
crank lever L, pivoted at its elbow, as at l, to 
a bracket or support L', suitably secured to 
the under side of the platform or support A, 
and having connected to the free end of its 
Vertical arm, as at m, a link or rod M, the 
other end of which is connected with the arm 
I extending from the plate H. 
? 
N is a foot-lever or push-pin suitably 
mounted to reciprocate vertically through an 
opening in the platform A and carrying at 
its lower end a pin n, designed to engage in 
a concavity or recess n' in the upper face of 
the free end of the horizontal arm of the lever 
L, so that pressure upon the foot-lever or 
push-pin N will tilt the lever L on its pivot, 
as indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 7, and 
thus through the medium of the rod M change 
the position of the plate II so that the open 
ings h therein will be brought in position to 
permit of the discharge of the sand from the 
box. When pressure is removed from the 
foot-lever or push-pin, the spring O, connected 
at one end of the under side of the platform 
and at the other end to the rod M, between 
its ends, returns the plate and the lever to its 
normal position, as will be readily understood. 
In the form shown in Figs. 8 and 9 there is 
a lever P, suitably pivoted, as at p, between its 
ends, the lower end being designed to be con 
nected with the rod M, while the portion 
above its pivot passes through a yoke P suit 
ably secured to the dashboard Q of the car, 
and having teeth or a ratchet-bar p", as seen 
best in Fig. 8, into which is designed to en 
gage the rib or lug P on the lever P, as indi 
cated in Fig. 8. When it is desired to allow 
the sand to be discharged, the lever P is moved 
into position indicated in dotted lines in 
Fig. 9, and there held, if desired, by engage 
ment of the rib or lug with the ratchet of the 
yoke, and when it is released the spring will 
return the parts to their normal position. 
Modifications in detail may be resorted to 
without departing from the spirit of the in 
vention or sacrificing any of its advantages. 
What I claim as new is 
1. The combination of the receptacle pro 
vided with a screen, a sand box arranged be 
neath the same, a discharge spout and an in 
terposed centrally pivoted plate for control 
ling the discharge of the sand, and a stirrer 
fixedly mounted on said plate, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination of the two-part sand 
box, a centrally pivoted rotatable plate inter 
posed between said parts, and carrying a 
stirrer fixedly supported thereon and springs 
bearing upon the under side of said plate, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a two-part sand box, 
each part having a stirrer fixedly mounted 
thereon and a boss centrally disposed and an 
interposed plate having an integral central 
pin extended upon opposite sides of said 
plate and held in said bosses, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination of a two-part sand box, 
each part having a stirrer fixedly mounted 
thereon and a boss centrally disposed and an 
interposed plate having a central pin extend 
ing above and below the plate and held in 
said bosses, and springs bearing upon the 
under side of said plate, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
5. The combination of a two-part sandbox, 
each part having a bOSS centrally disposed 
and an interposed plate having an integral 
central pin held in said boss, and a stirrer 
carried by said plate, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
r 
3O 
35 
5 ? 
55 
?? 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
I OC 
I o5 
I I. ? 
I I5 
I 25 
 
544,327 
8. The combination of a two-part box hav 
ing flanges and each part with centrally dis 
posed oppositely extending bosses, and a plate 
having also a stirrer fixedly mounted thereon 
and centrally disposed oppositely extending 
integral projections entering said bosses and 
forming a pivot upon which the plate may 
turn, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
2 ? . 
HENRY SPRINGSTUBE. 
Witnesses; 
JOHN BECK, 
DANIELD. TREYLER, 
6. The combination of a two-part sandbox, 
each part having a boss centrally disposed 
and an interposed plate having an integral 
central pin held in said boss, and springs 
bearing upon the under side of said plate, 
and a stirrer carried by said plate, substan 
tially as described. 
7. The combination with a two-part sand 
box, each part having flanges and one part 
with diametrically disposed recesses, of 
springs arranged in said recesses, and a 
rotatably mounted plate interposed between 
said springs and the flange of the upper part 
of the box, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
I. ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544427.txt	(No Model.) 
H. R. & E. T. COLLINS, 
BICYCLE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 544,427. 
Patented Aug. 13, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
H. R. & E. T. COLLINS. 
BICYCLE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 544,427. 
Patented Aug. 13, 1895, 
 
 
5% 2S25% 
AA 
E. 
 
 
A 27. 1. 
(O) 
5 
-Z2 
 
28i-byees 
-67A. A6, 
 
2% & 47 
3vvue vitovs 
1%a 42-6242-e- 
g 
7. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY R, COLLINS AND EDMUND T. COLLINS, OF SOUTH BETHLEHEM, 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
BICYCLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 544,427, dated August 18, 1895. 
Application filed March 12, 1895, Serial No. 541,459, (No model.) 
- 
To ad, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, HARRY R. COLLINS 
and EDMUND T. COLLINS, citizens of the 
United States, residing at South Bethlehem, 
in the county of Northampton and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Bicycles, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object and purpose of our invention is 
to provide light, simple, and effective mechan 
ism for the propulsion of bicycles and tricy 
cles, whereby the speed of the machine may be 
reduced relatively to the speed of the pedals 
and cranks, or the leverage of the cranks in 
creased relatively to the speed of the wheel, 
which is the same thing. 
The purpose of the invention is to enable 
riders to climb hills which are too steep to 
ascend with machines as ordinarily con 
structed and to render the climbing of ordi 
nary hills much easier than at present. 
In carrying out the invention we employ 
certain mechanism which we will now proceed 
to describe, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of a bicycle employ 
ing our improvements. Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
side view, partly in section and partly broken 
away, showing the invention in detail. Fig. 
3 is a sectional view taken on the line 33 of 
Fig. 2; and Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7 are enlarged 
detail views of several of the parts. 
Our invention is applicable to any of the 
well-known bicycles, and in the drawings it 
is shown applied to one of ordinary construc 
tion. The crank-shaft 1 is provided with 
cranks 2 and pedals 3 of usual construction, 
the shaft being mounted in Suitable ball-bear 
The sprocket-wheel 5 is 
ings 4 in the frame. 
loose upon the crank-shaft, and upon its inner 
face there is a gear 6 of about half the diame 
ter of the sprocket-wheel. On the inner face 
of the hub of the sprocket-wheel are projec 
tions 7, which form one member of a clutch. 
The other member consists of corresponding 
projections 8 upon a pinion 9, which is ar 
ranged to slide on the crank-shaft, but com 
pelled to turn with it by suitable means, such 
as the feather 10. The pinion 9 is normally 
pressed into engagement with the sprocket 
wheel by a series of springs 11, which fit in 
sockets in the pinion and opposing sockets in 
a ring or washer 12 of the crank-shaft bear 
ing, the part 12 being fixed on the shaft. 
Upon the cylindrical outer surfaces of the 
clutch-teeth 7 and 8 there is a flat ring 13, 
which serves as a guard to keep dust and dirt 
out of the clutch, and also serves to draw the 
pinion 9 and its clutch member back and out 
of engagement with the sprocket-wheel. The 
ring 13 is connected with the two prongs of a 
lever 14. The lever 14 is pivoted to the main 
frame above the crank-shaft, and the said 
prongs are in the form of a semicircular yoke, 
one prong extending down on each side of 
the shaft to about the middle thereof. The 
prongs are connected to the ring 13 by a pair 
of links 15. The means for operating the le 
ver 14 will be presently described. 
Upon the central main tube 16 of the frame 
is a boss or projection 17, into which is rigidly 
screwed a bearing-pin 18. Upon the bearing 
pin is pivoted a lever 19, having an eccentric 
hub 20, and upon this hub is journaled a dou 
ble pinion 21 of two diameters. When the 
lever 19 is thrown in the position shown in 
full lines in Fig. 2 its eccentric hub is re 
volved so as to hold the pinion of larger di 
ameter just above the sliding pinion 9 on the 
crank-shaft, and the pinion of smaller diame 
ter just above the gear 6 on the sprocket 
wheel. If, however, the lever 19 be drawn 
forward by the rod 22 or other means into the 
position shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2 the 
double pinion 21 will be thrown into engage 
ment with the gears 6 and 9. During this 
forward movement of the lever 19 a projec 
tion 23 on the hub of the lever engages the 
upper end of the lever 14 and depresses it, 
thus drawing the ring 13 backward and dis 
engaging the pinion 9 from the sprocket 
wheel. The rod 22 is preferably operated by 
means of a lever 25 on the handle-bar and 
suitable intermediate connections, in the 
manner in which the brake-operating rods 
are usually operated. The lever 19 is nor 
mally drawn back to hold the double pinion 
out of engagement with the crank-shaft and 
sprocket-wheel by means of a spring 24 con 
necting the lever with a portion of the main 
frame. If desired, the double pinion 21 and 
movable parts may be provided with ball 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
35 
40 
45 
544,427 
In a bicycle the combination with the crank 
shaft, of a sprocket wheel loose upon said 
shaft and provided on its inner face with a 
gear 6 and clutch projection 7, a gear 9 
adapted to slide upon and turn with the shaft 
and having clutch projections upon its outer 
face adapted to engage with the sprocket 
wheel, a flat ring 13 encircling the clutch 
members of said gear and sprocket wheel, a 
lever pivoted above the shaft and having its 
lower end forked and connected with the ring 
13 by links 15, a double pinion arranged to be 
thrown into and out of engagement with the 
gears upon the shaft and sprocket wheel, and 
means for throwing the double pinion into en 
gagement with said gears and simultaneously 
operating the forked lever and the ring 13 to 
disengage the clutch, said flat ring forming a 
dust proof casing or cover for the clutch, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
HARRY R. COLLINS. 
EDMUND T. COLTLNS. 
Witnesses: 
II. S. HousIKEEPER, 
A. L. WICKERT. 
30 
35 
40 
45 
bearings and other antifriction devices, and 
the mechanical details of the invention may 
be somewhat changed without departing from 
the spirit thereof. 
In using the bicycle provided with our im 
provements, the springs 11 and 24 normally 
hold the parts so that the sprocket-wheel is 
compelled to rotate with the crank-shaft, and 
the bicycle operates the same as those ordi 
narily in use. When a hill is to be ascended 
the lever 25 is operated by hand, and, without 
stopping the machine or getting off, the clutch 
between the pinion 9 and the sprocket-wheel 
is disengaged and the double pinion 21 thrown 
into engagement with the gears 6 and 9. 
With the parts built to the proportion shown 
in the drawings, the leverage is thus increased 
in the proportion of three to one and the la 
bor of climbing the hill very much reduced. 
The additional parts necessary to provide a 
bicycle with our improvements need weigh 
but two pounds, and the additional weight is 
thus inconsiderable in view of the advantages 
to be gained. 
IIaving described our invention, what we 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544529.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 544,529. 
R. H. CUNNINGHAM, 
ELECTRIC AIRO LAMP, 
Patented Aug. 13, 1895. 
 
WITNESSES: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
RICHARD H. CUNNINGHAM, OF RICHMOND, VIRGINIA. 
ELECT RC-ARC AMP 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 544,529, dated August 18, 1895. 
Application filed September 8, 1894, Serial No. 522,448, (No model.) 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, RICHARD H. CUNNING 
HAM, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Richmond, in the county of Henrico and 
State of Virginia, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Electric-Arc 
Lamps, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
This invention relates to electric-arc lamps, 
and has special reference to the class of lamps 
known as focusing. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
lamp of this character which shall give a per 
fectly steady radiant, maintained absolutely 
at a fixed point and especially adapted as a 
luminant in photomicrography and various 
forms of optical projection, theatrical illumi 
nation, search-lights, light-houses, &c. 
The lamp is operated upon the well-known 
differential principle; and the invention 
Consists in the arrangement of the solenoids 
and their cores and the special devices con 
nected therewith for transmitting motion to 
the lamp-electrodes. 
The invention also consists of details of con 
Struction, which will be fully described and 
particularly pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a section of the lamp-casing and 
the regulating mechanism contained therein, 
the electrodes and holders being shown in 
side elevation. Fig. 2 is a detail of a differ 
ential Winding-drum forming part of the regu 
lating mechanism. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A rep 
resents the casing inclosing the regulating 
mechanism. 
C and b, respectively, represent solenoids 
in Series and in shunt with the lamp-elec 
trodes. Through the central passage of solen 
oid C. extends a brass tube c, which projects 
Some distance above and below the same and 
is guided by antifriction - rollers c', fixed to 
the head of the solenoid to insure free longi 
tudinal movement of the tube. Inside of the 
tube is a soft-iron cored. This core is coni 
cal in shape and its position within the tube 
may be adjusted and fixed by means of a set 
Screwd, (shown in dottedlines,) which passes 
through the tube and impinges against the 
Core. The shunt-solenoid b is fitted with a 
tube e, similar to the tube c, except that its 
length is about one-half that of the tube c. 
It also contains a conical coref, which is ad 
justably connected with the tube by means of 
an extension f' and thumb-screw working in 
a slot.f. This tube islikewise mounted upon 
antifriction-bearings. To the upper end of 
each tube is fixed an arm g, extending at right 
angles therefrom and provided at their outer 
ends with carbon-holders g', which hold the 
carbon-holders in a line parallel to the tubes 
c and e. Between the two solenoids is freely 
mounted a winding-drum h, having two wind 
ing surfaces, the circumference of one of 
which is twice. that of the other. To the 
smaller spool is attached one end of a cord i, 
which thence leads over a guide-pulley i and 
finally to the upper end of the tube e, to which 
it is firmly attached. To the larger spool of 
the winding-drum is attached one end of a cord 
i, which thence leads directly to the lower end 
of tube c, to which it is firmly attached. Both 
cords i and fare attached to the same side of 
the winding-drum, so that the pull of the cords 
upon the drum caused by the weight of each 
tube and its attachments will be in opposite 
directions, and inasmuch as the tube which is 
attached to the small spool is about one-half 
the size, and consequently of about one-half 
the weight of the tube attached to the large 
spool, they will balance each other and tend 
to maintain the radiant point of the lamp at 
a fixed position. These two forces acting 
upon the drum, however, will be so nearly 
balanced that the slightest excess of pull on 
one side will be very quickly felt. The lamp 
will be designed so that any variation of cur 
rent will cause the core of the main solenoid 
C. to move twice the distance of that of the 
solenoid b. 
In the operation of the lamp, the current 
being turned on, the are is first formed by the 
main solenoid, which lifts the upper carbon. 
The adjustment of the lamp will be such that 
when the arc is of the normal length the pull 
of the shunt-solenoid plus the force of gravity 
will exactly balance the pull of the main so 
lenoid. When by the consumption of the car 
bons the resistance of the arc increases, the 
shunt-magnet will correspondingly be in 
creased in Strength, while the main magnet 
Will lose its force. The result will be that the 
upper carbon will drop at twice the speed 
45 
 
55 
7 O 
90 
OO 
2 
544,529 
combination with a shunt solenoid and nega 
tive carbon holder, the core of the solenoid 
being positively attached to the holder, and 
a winding drum having two different sized 
spools over which two cords respectively pass, 
one cord being connected with the core of one 
Solenoid while the other is connected with the 
core of the other solenoid, the cores of both 
Solenoids being acted upon constantly by a 
force such as gravity and the arrangement 
being such that the forces thus acting balance 
each other, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Isubscribe my signa 
ture in presence of two witnesses. 
RICHARD H. CUNNING FIAM. 
20 
25 
Witnesses: 
FRANKS. OBER, 
WM. A. ROSENBAUM. 
with which the lower carbon will lift, and this 
movement will continue until the length of 
the arc becomes again normal. During this 
motion the action of gravity upon the two 
carbons remains constant owing to the differ 
ential winding-drums. The action of gravity 
applied in this mannel produces a very sensi 
tive lamp, inasmuch as it maintains the two 
carbons constantly in a floating or suspended 
state, susceptible and responsive to the slight 
..est disturbance of the magnetic balance, 
while being substantially free from extra 
neous or concomitant vibrations. 
IIaving thus described my invention, I 
In an arc lamp, a main Solenoid and a posi 
tive carbon holder, the core of the solenoid 
being positively attached to the holder, in 
claim 
Io 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544629.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 544,629. 
W. H. PHILLIPS. 
SPARK ARRESTER, 
Patented Aug. 13, 1895, 
928) by coco 
a 4/ 2, 
N Ns 
r 
7Fideau 3vvue v to 
?/hdeau04-0-4-44, 
elekovic S. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HOLMAN PHILLIPs, OF PERRY, MISSOURI. 
SPARK-ARRESTER. . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 544,629, dated August 18, 1. 895. 
Application filed July 11, 1895, Serial No. 555,625, (No model) 
w 
Zo all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. HOLMAN 
PHILLIPS, a citizen of the United States re 
siding at Perry, in the county of Ralls and 
State of Missouri, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Spark-Arresters; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
spark-arresters for use on locomotives; apdit 
consists of certain novel features hereinafter 
described and claimed, 
Reference is had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which the same parts are indi 
cated by the same letters throughout the sev 
eral views, 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
portion of a locomotive fitted with my im 
proved spark-arrester. Fig. 2 represents an 
end view of the device shown in Fig. 1, as 
seen from the left of the said figure. Fig. 3 
represents a perspective view showing the 
upper end of the smoke-stack with the cylin 
drical Screen and outer cylinder removed. 
Fig. 4 represents a side elevation of the dome 
shaped cylindrical screen used in my inven 
tion, and Fig. 5 represents a side elevation of 
the outer cylinder which incloses the lower 
portion of the cylindrical screen. 
A represents the exterior of the ordinary 
locomotive-boiler provided with a smoke 
stackB of the same general nature as that 
ordinarily in use, but provided with the spark 
arresting attachments, which will be herein 
after more fully described. This smoke-stack 
consists of an inner funnel B and an outer 
funnel comprising the base portion B, reach 
ing only part of the way up on the inner fun 
nel, and the cylindrical sleeve F, which fits 
down over the top of the base portion B. This 
outer funnel is separated from the inner fun 
nel by the metal bars or ribs b, of which there 
are three or more, but preferably four, as 
shown in Fig. 3. Above the top of the inner 
funnel B are placed at a suitable distance 
therefrom a lower and coarse screen C and an 
upper and finer screen D, which screens are at 
Some distance apart and are secured to the 
ribs b, while they are themselves stiffened 
with cross-ribs c and d, respectively. The 
upper screen D-is convex from below so as to 
deflect laterally the finer particles of solid 
matter that pass through the coarse screen C, 
which is preferably a flat screen placed at 
right angles to the axis of the smoke-stack. 
The cylindrical screen E is slipped over the 
ribs b, and at its lower portion is still fur 
ther spaced therefrom by means of the studs 
b projecting from the said ribs, whereby a 
greater annular space is obtained between 
the inner funnel and the said cylindrical 
screen. The upper part of this cylindrical 
screen is made in the form of a dome-shaped 
cap E, hinged to the cylindrical part ate and 
fastened by means of the latch, and catch e' 
and e, as shown in Fig. 4. This hinged cap 
not only renders it possible to obtain access 
to the interior of the Smoke-stack and so to 
clean out the various screens from time to 
time, but it also enables the fireman to get a 
better draft when starting fires; but it would 
rarely be necessary to lift the cap for this pur 
pose. 
The cylindrical sleeve F is fitted over the 
cylindrical screen E and is spaced at a suffi 
cient distance from said screen to allow the 
smoke to rise in the annular space between 
the two. 
The cinders which are caught in the annu 
lar space between the inner funnel B and 
the screen Efall down into the annular space. 
between the said inner funnel and the outer 
funnel B and are directed either through 
the passages H. to the boxes. Kor through the 
pipe M to the fire-box P. These passages H 
are controlled by dampers h, so that all of the 
cinders may be deflected into the pipe M. 
when desired. The cinders when they are al 
lowed to pass through these passages Henter 
the boxes K, placed beneath the foot-board L. 
These boxes are provided with bottoms k, 
hinged at k' and provided with latches k' for 
holding the same closed when desired. It 
would generally be preferable to leave these 
boxes open in damp weather, as shown to the 
left in Fig. 2; but they might be kept closed 
and emptied periodically, if preferred. It 
55 
65 
75 
85 
90 
95 
do 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
 
2 
544,629 
will thus be seen that the herein-described 
apparatus will prevent the escape of sparks 
or large particles of solid matter of any kind 
from the furnace, while the smaller particles 
that will be able to get through the various 
screens will be so small that they will cool 
rapidly on reaching the atmosphere and will 
do no injury. 
While I have described my invention as ap 
plied to locomotives, it will be obvious that 
it can be applied to fixed or portable engines 
of any description. 
It will be obvious that various modifica 
tions of the herein-described apparatus might 
be made which could be used without depart 
ing from the spirit of my invention. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters. Fat 
ent of the United States, is 
1. In a spark arrester the combination with 
a furnace, an inner funnel leading therefrom, 
an outer funnel inclosing said inner funnel, 
ribs separating the two and extending above 
the top of the inner funnel, a screen secured 
a short distance above the top of the inner 
funnel, and between said ribs, a screen pro 
vided with a cylindrical base and dome 
shaped cap, fitting over said ribs, and a sleeve 
inclosing the lower portion of said outer 
screen with an annular space between said 
sleeve and said screen, and means for carry 
ing off the cinders caught between said inner 
funnel and said cylindrical screen, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a spark arrester, the combination with 
a furnace, of an inner funnel leading there 
from, an outer funnel inclosing said inner 
funnel With a cylindrical screen between the 
two funnels, and separated from each by an 
annular space, ribs attached to the inner fun 
nel and extending above the top thereof, a 
screen secured a short distance above the top 
of the inner funnel and between said ribs, a 
Second Screen placed above said lower screen 
and also between said ribs, a dome-shaped 
screen placed over said ribs and inclosing the 
two Screens last mentioned, and means for 
carrying off the cinders caught between said 
inner funnel and said cylindrical screen, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a Spark arrester, the combination with 
a furnace, of an inner funnel leading there 
from, an Outer funnel inclosing said inner 
funnel With a cylindrical screen between the 
two funnels and separated from each by an 
annular space, ribs attached to the inner fun 
nel and extending above the top thereof, a 
Coarse Screen Secured a short distance above 
the top of the inner funnel and between said 
ribs, a finer Screen made convex downward and 
placed above said lower screen and also be. 
tween said ribs, a dome-shaped screen placed 
above Said ribs and on top of said cylindrical 
Screen, and means for carrying off the cin 
ders caught between said inner funnel and 
said cylindrical screen, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a spark arrester, the combination with 
a furnace, of an inner funnel leading there 
from, an outer funnel inclosing said inner 
funnel, with a cylindrical screen between the 
two funnels and separated from each by an 
annular space, ribs attached to the inner fun 
nel and extending above the top thereof, a 
screen secured a short distance above the top 
of the inner funnel, and between said ribs, a 
dome-shaped screen placed over the top of 
said ribs, and a pipe leading to the fire box 
from the base of the annular space between 
said inner funnel and said cylindrical Screen, 
substantially as described. 
5. In a spark arrester, the combination with 
a furnace, of an inner funnel leading there 
from, an outer funnel inclosing said inner 
funnel with a cylindrical screen between the 
two funnels, and separated from each by an 
annular space, ribs attached to the inner fun 
nel and extending above the top thereof, a 
screen secured a short distance above the top 
of the inner funnel and between said ribs, a 
second screen placed above said lower screen 
and also between said ribs, a dome-shaped 
screen placed over said ribs and inclosing 
the two screens last mentioned, and a pipe 
leading to the fire box from the base of the 
annular space between said inner funnel and 
said cylindrical screen, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. In a spark arrester, the combination with 
a furnace, of an inner funnel leading there 
from, an outer funnel inclosing said inner 
funnel, with a cylindrical screen between the 
two funnels and separated from each by an 
annular space, ribs attached to the inner fun 
nel and extending above the top thereof, a 
screen secured a short distance above the top 
of the inner funnel, and between said ribs, a 
dome-shaped screen placed over the top of 
said ribs, and a pipe leading to the fire box 
from the base of the annular space between 
said inner funnel and said cylindrical screen, 
cinder passages leading down to either side 
of the locomotive, dampers controlling said 
passages, and boxes with hinged bottoms con 
nected to said passages, substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. In a spark arrester the combination with 
a furnace, of an inner funnel leading there 
from, an outer funnel inclosing said inner 
funnel, with a cylindrical screen between the 
two funnels and separated from each by an 
annular space, ribs attached to the inner fun 
nel, and extending above the top thereof, a 
screen secured a short distance above the top 
of the inner funnel, and between said ribs, a 
finer screen made convex downward and 
placed above said lower screen, and also be 
tween said ribs, a dome-shaped screen placed 
above said ribs and on top of said cylindrical 
Screen, a pipe leading to the fire box from the 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
oc 
Io5 
O 
II5 
25 
 
544,629 
. 
3 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
base of the annular space between said inner 
funnel and said cylindrical screen, cinder in presence of two witnesses. 
passages leading from said annular space 
aownto either side of the furnace, dampers 
5 controlling said passages, and boxes with 
hinged bottoms connected to said passages, 
Substantially as described. 
JOS. H. BLACKWOOD, 
GEO. M. COPENHAVER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. HOLMAN PHILLIPS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544729.txt	. (No Model.) 
No. 544,729, 
 
F. P. HARNED. 
SAFETY PACKAGE. 
Patented Aug. 20, 1895, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRANK. P. HARNED, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE PENN CHEMICAL WORKS, OF SAME PLACE, 
SAFETY PACKAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Ratent No. 544,729, dated August 20, 1895. 
Application filed June 22, 1895, Seria No. 553,657 (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, FRANK P. HARNED, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Philadelphia, in the county of Phila 
delphia and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Safety Packages, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention has relation to a safety pack 
age or can for containing pulverized lye, pot 
ash, or matter in other form to insure safe 
carriage as well as ready discharge of the 
Same from the can or package without con 
tact of the hands therewith; spilling or waste 
thereof. 
My invention consists of a safety package 
or can constructed and arranged in substan 
tially the manner hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
The nature and scope of my invention will 
be more fully understood from the following 
description, taken in connection with the ac 
Companying drawings, forming part hereof, 
and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the de 
tached parts of the safety package or can of 
my invention; and Fig. 2 is a vertical central 
section through the can or package, 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
can or other Suitably shaped package, of metal 
or other preferred material, having an inte 
gral or applied bottom C, and the package or 
can recessed at a', about the upper edge, to 
form a channel for a cover B, with a recessed 
rim b, which is adapted to be sprung or oth 
erwise secured into the recessed portion a' of 
the can or package A. The cover B is pro 
vided with an aperture b', into which is in 
Serted and held snugly therein a smooth-sur 
faced countersunk and flanged stopple C, pref 
erably of the type clearly illustrated detached 
from its seat in the cover B in Fig. 1, and in 
operative or seated position in Fig. 2, of the 
drawings, 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
65 
75 
D is the sealing-cap for the can, fitting 
snugly down onto the face of the stopple C 
and having a projecting peripheral rim d fit 
ting snugly against the edges band b of the , 
recessed rimb of the cover B, and contacting 
also with the surface of the can at a, as illus 
trated in Fig. 2 of the drawings, whereby is 
provided a safety can or package in which lye, 
potash, or other matter can be safely carried 
and from which they may be readily removed 
without spilling, waste, or contact of the fin 
gers there with or any necessity to destroy any 
part of the can to gain access to the interior of 
the same; 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A safety package, comprising a can or 
the like, provided with a perforated cover 
sprung onto or secured to the can, a counter 
sunk and flanged stopple detachably fitting 
the opening of said cover and a flanged seal 
ing cap for said can and adapted to hold said 
stopple in operative position in said cover, 
substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
2. A safety package, comprising a can pro 
vided with a recessed upper portion, a perfo 
rated cover With a recessed rim fitted to the 
recessed portion of said can, a countersunk 
and flanged stopple detachably fitting the 
opening of said cover and a flanged sealing 
cap fitting down onto said stopple and recessed 
rim of said cover and onto Said can, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my signature in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
FRANK. P. HARNED. 
Witnesses: . 
THOMAS M. SMITH, 
RICHARD C. MAXWELL, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544830.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. SAUWAGE & R. J. FUQUA. 
BRAKE BLOCK, 
No. 544,830, 
Patented Aug. 20, 1895. 
N 
S 
S. 
2. 
s 
s sis 3 
S S 
/2. 
Ma 
  
 
 
N ts 
 
 
 
T 
a 
 
2. 
it 
 
\ yet 
22.3, 
4 - 
f2-1 
is 
. 
Al--- % 
 
Ma, 
Wiiyesses 
6, SS s 
3y2%e2? Altarpeys. 
peplrs 
(2a2z/zeszzzzzeeve 
Zze?aze? / Zzzaz, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. SAUVAGE AND RICHARD J. FUQUA, OF DURANGO, COLORADO. 
BRAKE-Block. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 544,830, dated August 20, 1895. 
Application filed January 12, 1895. Serial No. 534,707, (No model.) 
55 
6 to 
?o Oil whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM. H. SAU 
WAGE and RICHARD J.FUQUA, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Durango, in the 
county of La Plata and State of Colorado, have 
invented a new and useful Brake-Block, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to brake-blocks; and 
it has for its object to provide a simple and 
efficient device in which the shoe is forced or 
crowded against a wheel after application by 
the frictional contact there with of the wheel 
in rotation. 
Further objects and advantages of the in 
vention... will appear from the following de 
Scription, and the novel features thereof will 
be particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a brake-block embodying our inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a side view with the remov. 
able plate partly broken away. Fig. 3 is a 
transverse section. Fig. 4 is a detail view in 
perspective of the shoe. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
1 designates a brake-block provided with 
an integral casing 2, which is cored to form a 
cavity 3, the walls of the cavity being pro 
vided with slots 4 for the reception of the 
revoluble brake-bar 5. The front wall of the 
cavity in the block is arranged at an inclina 
tion or divergence from the face of the block, 
said divergence being upward, and this in 
clined or divergent wallis provided with teeth 
to form a rack-bar 6, which is thus disposed 
at an inclination to or a divergence from the 
face of the shoe. Keyed upon the brake-bar 
within the cavity of the block is a spur-gear 
7, the teeth of which mesh with the teeth of 
the rack-bar. It will be seen that if the brake 
bar is held from vertical movement and the 
face of the block is brought into contact with 
the rim of a rotating wheel by turning the 
brake-bar the block will be moved downward 
and the inclination of the rack will cause the 
face of the block to move toward the wheel 
and crowd against the rim thereof, 
The cavity in the block is closed at one sid 
by a removable plate 8, and the shoe is pro 
vided contiguous to its face with lateral, bev 
1ngs. 
. 
. 
- . 
eled, or dovetailed ribs 9, one of said ribs be: 
ing formed upon the contiguous edge of said 
removable plate. The shoe 10 is provided in 
its rear or convex side with a dovetailed chan 
nel or seat 11 for the reception of the face of 
the block, the beveled or dovetailed lateral 
ribs on the block engaging the undercut 
flanges 12 at the side edges of the shoe. It 
will be seen that the shoe serves to hold the 
removable plate of the block in place, and 
that when worn said shoe may be removed 
and replaced by another without detracting 
from the operativeness of the device and at 
a small expense. 
From the above description it will be seen 
that the improved brake-block has an auto 
matic clamping action, which results upon 
bringing its face in contact with a moving sur 
face, and therefore the brake may be used in 
connection with vehicle-wheels of all classes, 
including carriages, Wagons, street-cars, &c. 
It will be seen, furthermore, that the con 
struction is simple, in that the use of springs 
or other parts having a similar action is 
avoided. 
The brake is especially suitable for use in 
connection with four-wheel car-trucks, which 
it is usually necessary to check when going 
in either direction, and by connecting dupli 
cate sets of the improved brake-block in such 
a manner as to cause the strain upon one set 
to be communicated to the other the oper 
ation of an ordinary brake-lever will, without 
excessive exertion upon the part of the oper 
ator, apply the brakes to all of the wheels of 
the truck. 
Various changes in the form, proportion, 
and the minor details of construction may be 
resorted to without departing from the spirit 
or sacrificing any of 
the advantages of this 
invention. 
Having described our invention, we claim 
1. A brake-block having a cavity, the front 
wall of which is provided with a rack-bar ar 
ranged at an inclination to the face of the 
block, a rotatable brake-bar arranged in slots 
in the sides of the block, and a spur-gear fixed 
to the brake-bar and meshing with the teeth 
of the rack, substantially as specified. 
2. The combination with a rotatable brake 
bar, of a brake-block provided with a rack 
which is arranged at an inclination to the face 
75 
85 
90. 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
2 
544,880 
5 
of the block and diverges therefrom toward removable-shoe provided with a dove-tailed 
its upper end, and a spur-gear fixed to the or under-cut channel to receive the face of 
brake-bar and meshing with the rack, sub- the block, substantially as specified. 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
3. The combination with a rotatable brake- our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
bar, of a brake-block having a cavity closed in the presence of two witnesses. 
at one side by the removable-plate, a spur 
gear fixed to the brake-bar and engaging a 
rack on the front wall of the cavity of the 
Io block, the block and the removable-plate 
thereof being provided adjacent to the face 
of the block with lateral beveled ribs, and a 
WILLIAM. H. SAUWAGE. 
RICHARD J. FUQUA. 
Witnesses: 
J. C. HENDERSON, 
S. L. G. ATKINSON, 
I5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US544930.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 544,930, 
A. G. PROVINE. 
SPRAYER, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 20, 1895. 
N N. 
Aimsim \ 
EN 4R s 
Title 
ise 
Fell-sc 
A 65 plag. HeINNES. 
n 
\ 
else 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
WITNESSES; 
44.27% 
AE 
BY My 7 over 
... 
- 
AT TORNEYS, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 544,930, 
A, G, PROWINE. 
SPRAYER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 20, 1895, 
WITNESSES 
INMENTOR 
2% 
222-2-42 
 
BY 
"u?e f 
ATTORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 544,930, 
A, G, PROVINE, 
SPRAYER, 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 3, 
Patented Aug. 20, 1895. 
re 
 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
.2% 
a/6 
;  
ATTORAVEYS. . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT G. PROVINE, OF PUYALLUP, WASHINGTON. 
SPRAYER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 544,930, dated August 20, 1895. 
. 
Application filed March 16, 1894, Serial No. 508,870. (No model.) 
55 
75 
disks into and out of operation. The pumps 
To all whom it may concern: 
are mounted low on the frame A for giving 
Beit known that I, ALBERT G. PROVINE, of 
Puyallup, in the county of Pierce and State 
greater steadiness to the machine. Branch 
of Washington, have invented new and use 
pipes J at the rear of the machine connect the 
ful Improvements in Sprayers, of which the 
pumps with the suction-pipe K, the latter ex 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. 
tending from said pipes J around to one end 
of the roller B and entering, as at K, through 
The invention relates to wheeled sprayers 
for applying insecticides to plants, trees, and 
the journal B of the roller, the suction-noz 
zle L being arranged within the roller at the 
the like, and the object of the invention is to 
provide an improved sprayer of this charac 
bottom and provided with a suitable strainer. 
ter in which the spraying-nozzles are so ar 
A vent - pipe M extends into the roller B, 
through the opposite journal to near the top 
ranged as to discharge the insecticide in such 
thereof, and is suitably supported at the ex 
a manner and under such a pressure as to ef 
fectually reach the plants or the like; and a 
terior against rotation, as at M'. 
The discharge-pipe N from each pump I 
further object is to provide for adjusting the 
leads upward to the top of the machine, where 
groups of nozzles toward or from each other 
according to the width of the rows of plants, 
it has suitable connection with an air-cham 
ber O, and by a pipe N with the pipe P, to 
and also to provide for automatically main 
taining the nozzles in vertical position irre 
which are connected sections of hose Q, and 
Spective of any unevenness of the ground. 
said sections of hose deliver to pipes R., one 
of which ranges longitudinally of the machine 
Finally, the invention embodies various de 
tails designed to promote general efficiency in 
at each side, each of the said pipes R having 
the apparatus. 
a closed front end which is loosely supported 
to permit certain adjustment, as hereinafter 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
explained. The rear end of the pipe R leads 
to and supports the vertical pipe S (of which 
in which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in all the figures. 
one is provided at each side of the machine) 
and the latter is provided with a series of 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a sprayer con 
roses or discharge-nozzles T, one above the 
structed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation. Fig. 3 is a rear 
other. 
The front ends of the pipes Rare so formed 
elevation. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal sectional 
as to permit a loose connection with eyebolts 
view of the hollow roller for containing a sup 
U or the like on the frame A, as at R', and 
ply of liquid insecticide, and Figs. 5 and 6 
are provided with depending arms R, with 
are detail views to be hereinafter referred to. 
In constructing a sprayer in accordance 
which are connected the links V, Figs. 1 and 
5, the transversely-ranging links from each 
with my invention, the framework A is of 
side of the machine being connected at about 
suitable form and strength to support the sev 
eral parts and is provided with a proper pole 
the center of the machine with a bar W, the 
front end of which bar is pivoted, as at W, to 
or tongue for the attachment of the draft-ani 
mals, the tongue having, preferably, a caster 
a transverse member or part of the frame A. 
wheel A", which will readily follow the lateral 
The rear end of the bar W extends beneath 
the seat X, and a study on the Swinging sup 
movements of the tongue and guide the struct 
orting-bar Y of the seat engages the bar W, 
ure in turning. On the frame A is suitably 
the latter being slotted for the purpose. The 
mounted a hollow roller B, adapted to contain 
supporting-bar Y extends horizontally be 
a supply of liquid insecticide, and said roller 
neath the seat and carries the latter, and said 
is provided on one end of its axle with a chain 
bar Y is of crank formation and extends up 
wheel C, which is geared by a belt D to a 
wardly from the seat and then rearwardly, as 
chain wheel E on the main shaft F, which 
at Y', where it is supported in bearings Z, 
latter is provided with the crank-disks G, to 
formed on or secured to the brackets a. Thus 
which are connected the pitmen H of the 
pumps I, the shaft having a clutch F, oper- it will be seen that the Weight of the driver 
ated by a lever F for throwing the crank-1 on the seat X will maintain the latter in a 
. 
95 
CC 
O 
IS 
25 
45 
 
s av 
544,930 
horizontal position, the bar Y being free to 
rock in its bearings, and when the machine 
rises at one side, as for instance on a side 
hill, the seat will maintain its horizontal po 
sition, and acting through the bar Y, links V, 
and arms R', will rock the pipes R. and thus 
maintain the vertical pipes S, carrying the 
discharge-nozzles, in the vertical plane, not 
withstanding the tilting of the machine, with 
the result that the pipes S will be prevented 
from damaging contact with the rows of 
plants or trees. It will be observed by ref 
erence to Fig. 5 that during such rocking 
movement the pipes R. will swing about axes 
that extend longitudinally of the sprayer and, 
as shown, are horizontal or approximately so. 
Provision is made for adjusting the nozzle 
carrying pipes Stoward and from each other, 
as desired, by the following devices: At the 
rear of the machine, near each side, a barb is 
arranged, its lower end having a suitable piv 
otal connection with the frame A, as at b', 
and said bar at its upper end passes through 
a socket or eye c, carried by the pipes R, ad 
jacent to the vertical pipes S. The bar b 
passes also through one end of a horizontal 
bar d, which ranges transversely of the ma 
chine and passes through a guide-eye e on 
the machine-frame, and by moving the bars 
b toward or from each other the pipes R, and 
with them the nozzle-carrying pipes S, will 
be adjusted accordingly, the pipes R. readily 
swinging on their connections at U. The 
bars b and d are formed, in practice, with a 
longitudinal series of apertures for receiving 
split pins or cotters bf, which retain the 
parts in the adjusted position. The vertical 
pipes S are braced by the rods S' that are se 
cured thereto at top and bottom, the opposite 
ends of the braces converging and being suit 
ably fastened to the front end of the pipe R, 
as at S. The crank-disks G preferably are 
provided with two or more apertures g at dif 
ferent distances from the center, whereby the 
position of the wrist-pins of the pitmen H 
may be shifted to increase or diminish the 
stroke of the pumps. 
The machine is provided with a blow-off 
valve h, having a connection i with pipes J, 
and a connectioni, Fig. 6, leading to the dis 
charge-pipes and air-chamber. 
The bunching or clustering of the dis 
charge-nozzles by arranging them on the sin 
gle vertical pipe at each side affords the 
proper pressure, and this, with the vertical 
series of nozzles, is efficient in reaching the 
plants; also, the general structure of the ma 
chine, with the adjustments specified, affords 
a proper equipment for the intended service. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a spraying machine, the combination 
With a vertical nozzle-carrying pipe, and a 
supply pipe connected there with, adapted to 
be rocked, of a swinging driver's seat, and 
connections between said seat and the said 
supply pipe, for causing the nozzle-carrying 
pipe to respond to the movement of the seat, 
thereby maintaining the nozzle-carrying pipe 
in the vertical position, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a spraying machine, the combination 
with the pumps and a source of supply there 
for, of a longitudinally-ranging pipe at each 
side of the machine, to which the pumps dis 
charge, said pipes being pivotally supported 
at their front ends and provided with vertical 
pipes provided with discharge nozzles, the 
pivoted pipes being also adjustable toward 
and from each other, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with the pumps and a 
source of supply therefor, of longitudinally 
ranging pipes at the sides of the machine, ad 
justable toward and from each other, pivoted 
bars connected with said longitudinal pipes, 
adapted to move the same, guide bars for 
guiding the pivoted bars, and means for lock 
ing the parts in the adjusted position, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination of the hollow roller, the 
pumps, the suction pipes of which have con 
nection with the hollow roller, discharge pipes 
including flexible hose, pipes ranging longi 
tudinally at the sides, to which said hose de 
liver, said longitudinal pipes having pivotal 
supports permitting them to rock transversely 
of the machine, and also permitting them to 
be swung toward and from each other, verti 
cal pipes having vertical series of discharge 
nozzles said vertical pipes being supported 
from the longitudinal pipes, means for rock 
ing said longitudinal pipes, and means for 
swinging the same toward and from each 
other, substantially as described. 
5. In a spraying machine, the nozzle carry 
ing pipes disposed vertically at each side of 
the machine, and having each the vertical se 
ries of discharge nozzles, whereby the press 
ure of the pumps will be concentrated, the 
vertical series of nozzles and the concentrated 
pressure thus increasing the efficiency of the 
machine, in combination with pipes support 
ing the said nozzle-carrying pipes and pivot 
ally connected with the machine frame to 
rock transversely thereof so as to maintain 
the nozzle-carrying pipes in a vertical posi 
tion, means for rocking the supporting pipes 
and with them the nozzle-carrying pipes, and 
means for swinging said supporting pipes to 
ward and from each other, substantially as 
described. 
ALBERT G. PROVINE. 
Witnesses: 
RODERICK MCDONALD, . 
R. E. CRANE. 
65 
9 O 
Or 
IO 
I I5 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545030.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 545,030. 
F, G, WISELOGEL. 
SEWAGE FILTERING APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 20, 1895. 
7-9 se 
- 7 
Czzzzzzzzz 22SSSS 2442s 
Seseeee 
EEE M-Z771? 
27 SNS 
Z77 
N 
AA As 
r 
t 
Z72-67. Z. 
3 S SN 
- 1 d 
T 
Z ta 
is 
S 
Zazz, . 
St ev 
- 1 
u 22nsii 
s 
2. 
2 
--- 
t 
- A. 
(r 
-E 
am 
(EEE 
W 
N 
W 
E. 
PE 
res 
RE 
a 
R 
S22S 
l 2. a Z 2. 
NS2.24 NSJSU J4& N22RZN 
N2S 
politic NZEEEte 
Anna Swas sauansmaxanassawannuaxxxxxxx, NY way SNNNNNYaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa 
& 
s 
St. 
: 
SS 
tures R. 
Ps 
s 
NZ 22S 
e- 
s 
NA 
SS 
--a 2- 
w 
f. 
s89 
SS 
N% 2 
12 
St 
s 
 
 
s NS 
RN 7/S 
in SH 
ir 
- S. 
F. : 33 
, 21 3. 
2 
a 
R 
e 
t 
WITNESSES 
ter. 
sic. Li 4& 2.4 c. 
ZZeeeey are cac G. Zesc 49%e2, 
N 
INVENTOR 
a 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 545,030, 
 
F. G. WISELOGEL. 
SEWAGE FILTERING APPARATUS, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 20, 1895. 
W/TWESSES 
2, s.r-c-e- 
/MVENTOR 
7?reeaezrecac G. V2sees/ez, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK. G. WISELOGEL, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
SEWAGE-FILTERING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 545,030, dated August 20, 1895. 
Application filed February 26, 1895, Serial No, 539,805, (No model.) 
5 
O 
joint being secured by means of packing a. 
2 odd, whon it may concerta: 
The cylinder C is entirely open in the inside, 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK. G. WISE 
and at the lower end connects with the pipe 
LOGEL, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Indianapolis, in the county of Marion 
D, while at the upper end it connects with an 
elbow F leading to the T. F., which in turn 
and State of Indiana, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Sewage-Fil 
is connected to the pipe F. By uncoupling 
tering Apparatus, of which the following is a 
the elbow F from the T F8 (by removing the 
specification. 
bolts for otherwise) the whole filter can be 
readily lifted out for purposes of cleaning or 
The object of my said invention is to pro 
duce an apparatus by which liquid can be 
repair, as it rests loosely in a socket d formed 
for the purpose in connection with that por 
filtered from solid sewage matter and after 
Ward properly treated, while the noxious 
tion of the pipe or tube D which is inside the 
structure A. By removing the top B, which 
gases and other products are at the same 
can easily be done by taking out the bolts b, 
time effectually disposed of. Such an appa 
ratus or filter will be first fully described, 
access is had to the interior of the filter, as 
and the novel features thereof then pointed 
will be readily understood. 
The pipe D extends through the structure 
out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
A, preferably substantially horizontally, and 
preferably continues out at both sides of said 
which are made a part hereof and on which 
structure by means of the continuation-pipes 
similar letters of reference indicate similar 
D' and D', although, obviously, one connection 
parts, Figure 1 is a central vertical sectional 
view of an apparatus or filter embodying my 
is sufficient for mere filtering purposes. In 
serted in these continuation-pipes are the 
said invention; Fig. 2, a horizontal sectional 
view looking downwardly from the dotted 
valves d' and d', by which the passage in 
either direction can be closed. Commonly, 
line 22 in Figs. 1 and 3; and Figs. 3 and 4 
detached views of the outer and inner casing 
one of these pipes leads to the sewer, and its 
of the filter proper, respectively. 
valve should normally be open; while the 
In said drawings the portions marked A 
other is adapted to be connected to a steam 
or water pipe, forming a means for the pur 
represent the outer casing or tank of my im 
ose of cleaning out the apparatus. Assum 
proved apparatus; B, the outer casing of the 
) 
ing that the liquid matter ordinarily runs off 
filtering device; C, the inner casing thereof; 
through the continuation-pipe D, the valve 
D, a discharge-pipe for the fluid matter; E, a 
d would ordinarily be open and the valve d' 
discharge pipe for the solid matter, and F a 
discharge-pipe for the gases. 
closed. The liquid would then filter in into 
the inside of the cylinder C and thence run 
The casing or tank A is of considerable 
down into the pipe D and out through the 
size, and is shown as supported by brackets 
a' upon a floor A'. It is provided at the top 
pipe D freely. When the filter becomes foul, 
with a hinged door A, through which the 
however, it can be easily washed out by clos 
ing the valve d, opening the valve d', and 
sewage matter or garbage is to be introduced. 
connecting a water-pipe thereto, as will be 
It is hopper-shaped and converges toward the 
readily understood. This connection is also 
bottom, where it is connected to the upper 
of value in the treatment of offal from hospi 
end of the pipe E. It is provided with a top 
tals, as a jet of steam can be turned into the 
A, which can be removed, if desired, and in 
apparatus therethrough and the microbes thus 
this top is a door A*, as shown. 
destroyed. 
The filter proper is composed of the two 
The pipe E may lead to a drier, such, for in 
cylindrical structures B and C, one arranged 
stance, as shown in my pending applications, 
inside of the other, with filtering material 
between them, both said cylinders being per 
Serial No. 523,276, filed September 17, 1894, 
and Serial No. 537,123, filed February 2, 1895. 
forated. The structure as a whole rests in 
an opening formed therefor in the top A, out . It is provided with a valve e, and this, during 
through which it is easily removable, a tight the ordinary operation of the apparatus, is 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
8. 
go 
95 
OO 
 
2 
545,080 
kept closed, so that the solid matter will accu 
mulate in the bottom of the structure A, 
while the liquid matter filters through and 
runs off, as above described. After a certain 
5 period, however, when the structure A has 
become as full of solid matter as is desired, 
further introduction of such matter is for the 
time suspended and the valve e opened, when 
the comparatively solid matter is discharged 
Io into the drier, after which the valve e is 
closed and the apparatus is ready for further 
Se. 
The pipe F leads preferably to an exhaust 
fan, which is intended to discharge into a 
I5 furnace, whereby all noxious vapors and 
gases are drawn from the apparatus through 
the pipe F, by means of its connections F and 
F, and carried off and destroyed or rendered 
harmless. This double connection to the ap 
2 o paratus, one by means of the elbow F to the 
upper end of the cylinder C and the other by 
means of the TF to the main tank, renders 
this device exceedingly efficient in this par 
ticular. 
The operation is as follows: The matter to 
be treated-such as garbage, night-soil, and 
other sewage-matter-is dumped or run into 
the tank A. I have illustrated a construction 
especially adapted to receive it from wagons, 
3o from which it may be dumped in through the 
door A, the floor A' being suitable for teams 
to drive upon, and the height of the appa 
ratus above said floor being suitable to re 
ceive the discharge from dumping carts or 
As is Well known, carts or wagons 
for this purpose are usually liquid-tight. 
There is usually a large proportion of liquid 
in such matter, which would render it ex 
ceedingly difficult to dry the mass if it was 
My apparatus serves to separate a very 
large proportion of the liquids from the solids, 
as has already been described, thus leaving 
the solids in better condition for the drier, 
45 while the liquid is drawn off and run to the 
4o thrown directly into a drier. 
35 Wagons. 
25 
- 
. 
sewer or elsewhere, and the gases are drawn 
off and consumed. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion, what I claim as new, and desire to Secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, in a sewage filter, of 
the main tank or structure, a filter structure 
centrally positioned therein having an open 
cylindrical center, a pipe leading off whereby 
the noxious gases are exhausted, and connec 
tions from said pipe both to said filter and to 
the main tank direct, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. The combination, in a sewage filter, of 
the main hopper-shaped tank provided with 
a closable top, a fluid drain-pipe passing 
through said tank with which a central filter 
may be connected, and said central filter com 
posed of an inner and outer shell with filtering 
material between them, the outer shell being 
tapered at the bottom and united to the inner 
shell, a support for said filter upon said drain 
pipe, and means for readily disconnecting and 
removing said filter through the top of the 
main outer tank, substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. The combination, in a sewage filter, of 
the main structure or tank A, a central filter 
composed of perforated cylinders B and C 
with filtering material between them, the pipe 
D to which the lower end of the filtering cyl 
inder is connected, continuation pipes con 
nected to said discharge pipe, a main dis 
charge pipe E connected to the bottom of the 
tank and provided with a valve e, and a gas 
exhaust pipe F connected to the upper end 
of the apparatus, substantially as shown and 
described. 
In witness whereof I have here unto set my 
hand and seal, at Indianapolis, Indiana, this 
20th day of February, A. D. 1895. 
FREDERICK G. WISE LOGEL. 
L. s. 
Witnesses: 
CHESTER BBADFORD, 
JAMES A. WALSH. 
55 
65 
7 o 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545130.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. McKECHNIE, 
FOOTWEAR, 
No. 545,130. 
Patented Aug. 27, 1895. 
KK 
3v Uevitov 
 
7 
53 45 to trio 
46%. 23.4- 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. McKECHNIE, OF GRANBY, CANADA. 
FOOTWEAR 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 545,130, dated August 27, 1895. 
Application filed March 19, 1895, Serial No. 642,432, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES HENRYMCKECH 
NIE, of Granby, in the county of Shefford and 
Province of Quebec, Canada, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Foot 
wear; and I do hereby declare that the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the same. 
This invention relates to footwear of the 
class known to the trade as cardigan over 
shoes, and has for its object to provide an 
easily and cheaply constructed article, and 
one that will allow that part of the leg por 
tion located inside the top of the rubber foot 
portion to be quickly dried should it become 
dampened. 
It consists in the method of connecting the 
rubber foot portion to the leg portion, so that 
such leg portion will be entirely free from the 
sides or top of such rubber foot portion or 
connected only at certain points thereto, as 
hereinafter described, and more particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
For full comprehension, however, of the in 
vention, reference must be had to the annexed 
drawings, in which like symbols indicate the 
same parts, and wherein 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section, 
partly broken away, of a cardigan overshoe 
constructed according to my invention; Fig. 
2, an enlarged transverse vertical section of 
Same, taken on line 22, Fig. 1; and Fig. 3, a 
side elevation thereof. 
To carry out my invention I first place the 
usual insole a upon the last, then the edges 
b' of the leg portion b are lasted to the insole, 
overlapping sane sufficiently to be secured 
firmly between suchinsole and the lower edges 
of the usual lining c of the rubber top, which 
is now cemented to the insole and attached 
to the leg portion, preferably at the heel por 
tion only, although it can be connected also 
O 
2 
25 
35 
at other points, if desired. The remainder of 
the rubber foot portion, consisting of filling 
e, outer coveringf, and outsole g, is then set 45 
and cemented in place in the usual manner. 
This method of connecting the leg portion, 
which is preferably made from knitted stock, 
to the sole and back of heel or counter por 
tion only of the rubber foot portion allows 5o 
such leg portion to be adjusted or straight 
ened out by simply drawing upon it if it hap 
pens to become stretched and folded between 
the rubber foot portion and the boot of the 
wearer when it is being put on. The leg por- 55 
tion being free from the sides of the top and 
within the toe also allows it, if wet, to dry 
after it has been removed in a very Short 
time, thereby lessening the chances of its be 
coming rotted, as well as the likelihood of rot- 6c 
ting the lining of the rubber foot portion. 
What I claim is as follows: 
1. In the manufacture of foot wear of the 
class described, -first placing the insole upon 
the last, lasting the edges of the leg portion 65 
thereto, attaching the edges of the lining of 
the rubber top to such insole and to the edges 
of the leg portion and then securing such rub 
ber top to said lining and the rubber sole to 
such top. 
2. In the manufacture of foot wear of the 
class described,-first placing the insole upon 
the last, lasting the edges of the leg portion 
thereto, attaching the edges of the lining of 
the rubber top to such insole, attaching the 
back of the heel or counter of the leg portion 
to the lining and then securing such rubber 
top to said lining and the rubber sole to such 
top. 
- 
Montreal, Quebec, March 13, 1895. 
In presence of - 
JAMES H. MCRECHNIE. 
WILL P. McFEAT, 
FRED. J. SEARS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545230.txt	(No Model.) 
G, T, JANWRIN & F. J. CONL, ON. 
AUTOMATIC SWITCH FOR ELECTRIC OR, CABLE RAILWAYS, 
No. 545,230, 
Patented Aug. 27, 1895, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE T. JANVRIN AND FRANK. J. CONLON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
AUTOMATIC switch FoR ELECTRIC OR CABLE RAWAYS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 545,280, dated August 27, 1895. 
Application filed December 12, 1894, Serial No. 531,564 (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGE. T. JANVRIN 
and FRANKJ. CONLON, citizens of the United 
States, and residents of Brooklyn, in the 
county of Kings and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Automatic Switches for Electric or 
Cable Railways, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Our invention comprises improved means 
for automatically operating the switch by 
lineans on the car subject to the control of the 
engineer, whereby it is designed to provide 
imore efficient, simple, and cheaper switch ap 
paratus of this kind, as hereinafter fully de 
Scribed, reference being made to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of part of a track 
having a branch with a switch arranged in 
accordance with the invention. Fig. 2 is a 
side view of the apparatus of Fig.1 and a 
section of the walls of the pit below the rails, 
in which some of the apparatus is arranged. 
On each side of the main tracka, and pref 
erably outside of the rails, but in close prox 
imity to them, is a vertical push-stud b, suit 
ably arranged in a vertical guideway c for 
vertical movement of about an inch, more or 
less, and so that the head will be level with 
the top of the rails when at the limit of the 
down movement and will otherwise project 
above the rails, so as to be thrust down b 
rolls carried on the car and adapted to be let 
down on the rails by the engineer when the 
switch is to be shifted, the car being provided 
with such a roll on each side, adapted to be 
operated independently of each other. In 
the space below the rails these push-studs 
connect with rock-levers, through which and 
suitable rods the switch-points, as d, having 
studs, as f, pendent in the space, are to be 
shifted by thrusts imparted to said pendants. 
The stem of the push-stud b is connected 
with one arm of the elbow rock-lever h, piv 
oted at i and having its other arm coupled 
with the connecting-rodi, which is also cou 
pled with one arm of an elbow rock-lever k, 
pivoted at land having its other arm bearing 
against the pendent studfof the switch-point, 
So as to shift the point in one direction when 
the push-stud b is thrust down, each push 
stud b being similarly connected with the 
pendent stud fof the switch-point, but on op 
posite sides, respectively, so as to shift the 
d 
25 
40 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
- 
point in opposite directions and so that when 
one push stud is thrust down to shift the 
point one way the other push-stud will be 
thrust up by the reverse action of the point 
pendent on it, ready for reversing the point 
when required. 
The pendent stud f of the switch-point 
swings with the point and a short slot O has 
to be made in the base, on which the point 
rests to allow such movement. 
We are aware that push-studs to be actu 
ated by rolls carried on the car are not new 
as a means of automatically actuating such 
switches, and we do not claim them, broadly, 
the novelty of our invention being in the ap 
paratus employed in connection with them 
and the switch-points. 
It will be seen that the arrangement of 
rock-levers and the convergent connecting 
rods is such that, while the push-studs are on 
opposite sides of the track and the switch 
point at one side, the connections are effected 
with very simple and inexpensive, but effect 
ive, apparatus. 
We claim 
The combination with the switch point hav 
ing a rigid pendent studfprojecting into the 
space below the rails, and with a push stud 
b located at each side of the main track and 
adapted to be thrust down independently by 
rolls on the car subject to the control of the 
engineer, of an elbow lever h connected to 
each push stud, a connecting rod f coupled 
with each rock lever, and a rock lever k, cou 
pled with each rod respectively, and respect 
ively located on opposite sides of the pend 
ent stud and bearing on it, suitably to push 
the switch point either way according as one 
or the other of the push studs is actuated, the 
said rods connecting the rock levers of the 
push-studs with the point actuating levers, 
being suitably convergent to connect directly 
with the push stud levers at the opposite 
sides of the track and with the point actuat 
ing rock levers located relatively thereto all 
substantially as described. 
Signed at New York city, in the county and 
State of New York, this 21st day of Novem 
ber, A. D. 1894. 
GEORGE. T. ANWRN. 
FRANK. J. CONLON. 
90 
95 
d 
Witnesses: 
W. J. MORGAN, 
S, H. MORGAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545330.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 545,330. 
M. B. BAIRD, 
GATE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
Patented Aug. 27, 1895, 
K 
r 
WZZZZZ 
22, & 62 (4-4-2-r 
T f 
A WA ZWZZ 
/A 7%. 64aea, 
?'/'4, 24.242. 
 
(No Model.) 
M. B. BARD, 
GATE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 545,330, 
Patented Aug. 27, 1895. 
 
TWZZWZ247 
- c.411-04-7.10.1-4-(a 
Czyz 32%az- 
ZVZVZ7. 
2. /3. (3 elag 
%22&a 2-4ezz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MELVILLE B. BAIRD, OF TULSA, INDIAN TERRITORY. 
GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 545,830, dated August 27, 1895. 
Application filed August 22, 1894, Renewed July 26, 1895. Serial No. 557,251 (No model.) 
To all Zwho, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MELVILLE B. BAIRD, of 
Tulsa, Creek Nation, Indian Territory, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Gates; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, which will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the fig 
ures of reference marked thereon, which form 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to a gate, and has for 
its object to provide a gate which shall open 
or close upon either side by gravity; and it 
consists in a gate having a vertical movement 
which shall automatically tilt a cradle upon 
which the gate rests to throw the same either 
open or closed. 
- 
The invention further consists in the parts 
as shown, described, and claimed. 
In the drawings, in Figure 1, I have illus 
trated a perspective view of a section of fence 
having a gate constructed in accordance with 
my invention. Fig. 2 is an enlarged view of 
a portion of the same, illustrating more par 
ticularly the cradle. Fig. 3 is a sectional ele 
vation through the cradle. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tional view of a modified form of hinge. 
1 designates the gate-post, to the front side 
of which is secured a vertical guide 2, com 
prising a rod secured to the post at the upper 
and lower ends thereof, the guide being pref 
erably round in cross-section, upon which is 
pivotally secured the gate 3 by hinges 4, the 
hinges having a vertical movement upon the 
rod either by sliding or by the help of anti 
friction-rollers 4. 
To the post at the lower end thereof is se 
cured the cradle 5, comprising a lower section 
8, which is stationary and is secured to the 
post by bolts 7 passed through slots 8 in the 
Cross-piece 9 into the gate, by which means 
the lower section of the cradle may be ad 
justed vertically. The cradle is formed semi 
circular, and at a point upon each side of the 
Same, midway between the front and back, is 
a pivot iO, extending upwardly from the same, 
and secured upon the pivot is a section 11 of 
the cradle, which tilts upon the pivot. There 
- 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
fore as the front end is lowered the rear end 
is raised, and vice versa. 
Secured upon the gate in a vertical line with 
the cradle is a roller 12, which rests upon the 
upper section of the same and travels thereon. 
Therefore when the gate is closed, if the cradle 
is tilted to raise the front side, inclining the 
same, the roller will have a tendency to ride 
down the incline and the gate moving there 
with will be opened, and vice versa. 
I will now describe the means of raising 
the gate and tilting the cradle. One side of 
the box 13 of the roller 12 extends below the 
roller and is formed with a fange 14, which 
at all times rests beneath a flange 15 upon 
the upper section of the cradle. At the rear 
end of the lower section of the cradle, upon 
each side of the same and at a point midway 
the width of the same at the front portion, 
are lugs 16, in which are secured catches 17 
and 18 at the front and rear portion of the 
same, respectively. Secured upon the top of 
post 1 is a cross-piece 19, braced by braces 20, 
and upon the ends of the cross-pieces are se 
cured pulleys 21, over which pass ropes or 
cables 22 and 23, respectively, one end being 
secured to the gate at 24, the opposite end 
passing to posts 25 and provided with hand 
holds 26. 
In operation, the gate being closed, as shown 
in Fig. 1, it being desired to open the same, 
the operator grasps the hand-hold 26 of the 
cable 23. Pulling upon the same raises the 
gate. The catch 27 being raised out from en 
gagement with the post 28, the gate is free to 
move. As the gate is raised flange 14 of the 
bearing 13 raises the upper section of the 
cradle, tilting the same until the catches 18 
engage in the same, holding the cradle in a 
tilted position. The tendency of the pull 
upon the cable 23 is to throw the gate away 
from the operator, as shown by the arrow, 
Fig.1. Therefore, the cradle being tilted, the 
roller 12 will ride down the incline of the upper 
section of the cradle, carrying the gate, and 
thereby opening the same away from the op 
erator. To close the gate the operator pulls 
upon the hand-hold of the cable 22, which 
raises the gate, and consequently the rear end 
of the cradle. The roller striking the catch as 
55 
fo 
75 
So 
95 
do 
2 
545,330 
O 
the gate is opened disengages the same, the the track moves there with and is tilted, and 
catches 18 upon each side being connected by a catch for holding the same in a tilted posi 
a rod 30, whereby they move in unison. The tion. 
front catch 17 will hold the cradle tilted, the 
3. In a gate, a gate post, a gate hinged 
roller sliding down the incline closing the thereto having a vertical movement, a cradle 
gate. 
comprising a lower Section, an upper tilting 
29 designates a stop secured upon the post section pivotally secured thereon, a roller 
1, which limits the vertical movement of the pivoted to the gate normally resting upon the 
upper section of the cradle, catches pivotally 
gate. 
What I claim is- 
sired to the lower section of the cradle, 
1. In a gate, a gate post, a gate hinged ropes or cables secured to the gate at one end, 
thereto, having a vertical movement, and nor- whereby when the opposite end is pulled the 
mally supported upon a tilting track, means gate is raised, and means for automatically 
whereby when the gate is raised the track is tilting the cradle simultaneous to raising the 
tilted automatically, and catches for holding gate, whereby the gate is opened or closed by 
the track in a tilted position until the gate is gravity. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
opened or closed. 
2. In a gate, a gate post, a guide secured 
my own I hereby affix my signature in pres 
thereto, a gate hinged to the guide having a 
ence of two witnesses. 
vertical movement, a roller pivotally secured 
to the gate normally resting upon a tilting 
track, a flange upon the track, and a projec 
tion upon the gate for engagement beneath 
the flange, whereby when the gate is raised, 
MIELVII.E. B. BAR). 
- 
S. G. KENNEDY, 
J. I. KENNEDY. 
, 
. Witnesses: 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545430.txt	D. T. LEWIS. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR COATING FIFB, 
27, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
N0?545,430 
%  ? 
 
 
 
I 
- - - -), 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID TREVOR LEWIS, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF FIVE 
EIGHTEIS TO WILBUR. F. McKELVY AND JAMES D. GLOVER, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
M ETH O D O F A N D APPA RATU S FOR COA T N G P P E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent N o, 545,430, dated August 27, 1895. 
Application filed July 25, 1894, Serial No. 518,573, No model.) 
I5 Salle. 
{{To all uphi??, i?; ??? ???????"?"; 
Be it known that I, DAVID TREVORLEWIS, 
a resident of Pittsburg, in the county of Alle 
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
5 vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Methods of and Apparatus for Coating Pipe; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description thereof. 
Myinvention relates to the coating of pipes 
to and bars with metal or with other material, 
such as asphaltumortar, &c., its object being 
to reduce the manual labor of such Work and 
provides for the even coating of the pipe or 
bars and for the more rapid coating of the 
The usual process in coating pipe has been 
to insert the pipe in the coating-bath in an 
inclined position for something over one-half 
its length, manipulating it by the other end 
2 o of the pipe, then to withdraw it and insert 
the other end, and in this way to coat the en 
tire pipe, the coating material, however, be 
ing twice applied to the central portion of the 
pipe and double coating the same, which, be 
25 sides leaving the coating irregular, causes un 
necessary waste of coating material. The la 
bor of coating is also heavy, especially in 
heavy pipe, and the work is slow, because the 
pipe is inserted and withdrawn from one end 
3o of the bath. By my invention the coating of 
pipe is made easy, as the pipe is both inserted 
and withdrawn by machinery, and is with 
drawn at the opposite end of the bath to that 
at which it enters and the work is made much 
It consists, generally stated, in passing the 
pipe longitudinally and at an incline into the 
bath and carrying it in the same direction 
through the bath and longitudinally out of 
4o the bath at an incline, so that as the pipe en 
ters the metal the air and gases can be driven 
out of the pipe and the metal enter the same, 
and as the pipe is withdrawn the metal can 
be drained from it, while at the same time the 
45 pipes can be fed in rapid succession, one after 
the other, through the bath, and the work per 
formed much more rapidly, as one pipe is car 
ried out of the way and leaves a place for the 
one following it. 
35 more rapid. 
 
55 
75 
? 
It also consists in the combination of a pot 
or tank containing coating material, inclined 
guideway's leading from each end toward the 
center, and vertical plain-faced feeding-rolls 
in the pot between the inclined guideways, 
so that the pipe is fed at an incline longitudi 
nally into the bath, and is fed through the 
bath by the feeding-rolls and is forced by the 
feed-rolls upwardly over the inclined guide 
vat at the opposite end and delivered from 
the bath. 
It also consists in certain other improve 
ments, which will be hereinafter more particu 
larly described and claimed. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe the same 
more fully, referring to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of the 
apparatus, and Fig. 2 is a plan view thereof. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section of line 33, Fig. 1, and 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged view of the mechanism 
for driving the rolls. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in each. 
For the purpose of coating the pipe or bar 
I employ a pot or tank Ct, which is somewhat 
longer than the pipe or bar, so that the pipe 
may be entirely submerged therein. This pot 
or tank is made of plate metal, and when em 
ployed for galvanizing or coating with other 
molten metals is supported in the furnace b, 
which is built around it and may be heated 
in any desirable way. In said pot are in 
clined guideways c d, and between the same 
are the vertical plain-faced feeding-rolls ef, 
while at the ends of the tank respectively are 
entrance and delivery rolls which force the 
pipe into and withdraw it from the bath, the 
feeding-rolls within the bath carrying it along 
from the entrance-rolls to the delivery-rolls. 
The entrance-rolls are shown at 9, the deliv 
ery-rolls ath, and in front of the feeding-rolls 
are the guide - rollers i i, like guide - rollers - 
(not shown) being arranged at the delivery 
end. 
I will now describe the separate parts more 
in detail. The guide-troughs c dextend from 
the ends of the pot at a downward incline 
9 o 
95 
7 o 
75 
9o 
2 5 
5 
I. ? 
545430 
2 
toward the center and are supported in any gear t, which engages with the bevel-pinion 
suitable way, and may be either formed of t' at the upper end of the shaft f' of the roll 
plate metal curved into trough shape or, if f. The two bevel-gears S and t are set on op 
posite sides of the respective pinions and so 
preferred, may be made of open-work, such 
drive the rolls in opposite directions. When 
as bars, so as to permit the coating material 
the roll f is adjusted by the movement of the 
to pass through them. The entrance-rolls g 
sliding bearings k ic' above referred to, the 
are Supported in Suitable housings close to 
bevel-gear ti, having a sliding connection with 
entrance end of the tank and are adapted to 
the shaft p, moves with the roll fand holds 
force the pipe into the pot and feed it along 
in gear with the pinion t. From this same 
the said trough. The guide-rollers i are 
shaft p power is carried to the entrance-rolls 
grooved and are supported in their bearings 
and discharge-rolls through the pulleys gll 
at about the proper incline for feeding into 
on said shaft driving the beltsg' h", by means 
the pipe through the entrance-rolls into the 
of which said rolls are operated. 
pot, it being understood that the workmen 
In the coating of pipe or bars with the ap 
simply place the forward end of the pipe in 
paratus above described in accordance with 
the entrance-rolls or place the pipe in the 
the method above indicated, the pot or tank 
guide -rolls in line there with, and the pipe 
a is filled with the coating material, and for 
will pass by its own gravity along the said 
galvanizing or coating with molten metal is 
guide-rolls and engage with the entrance-rolls, 
filled with spelter or other metal or alloy, 
which will carry it into the pot. It is only 
which is melted by heat generated in the fur 
necessary to drive one of the entrance-rolls, 
naceb, surrounding the pot. The diameter of 
which is done by a simple belt or chain, as g, 
the pipe or bar to be coated being known, the 
from the power mechanism located at the 
driving-rolls ef, the entrance-rolls g, and the 
center of the tank. The delivery-rolls h are 
delivery-rolls n are adjusted to suit that di 
constructed substantially the same as the en 
a meter, and this can easily be arranged so 
trance-rolls and are driven in the same way 
that the width of the feeding-pass can be in 
by a belt or chain h", and it is to be under 
dicated by a dial, if desired, it being under 
stood that like guide-rolls are placed beyond 
stood that the feeding-pass can be arranged 
the delivery-rolls, so that the coated pipe may 
to receive any desired size of pipe from the 
be received by the workmen and lifted off 
smallest to the largest adjustment of the rolls. 
them. The housing i for the central feeding 
The entrance-rolls g, the feeding-rolls ef, 
rolls is supported on the pot about the center 
and the discharge-rollsh are all driven in the 
thereof, and one of said rolls, such as the 
same direction. The pipe to be treated is 
roll e, has its upper part or shaft e' in sta 
brought to the apparatus in such position that 
tionary bearing in the housing, and may, if 
it can easily be lifted upon the guide-rolls 
desired, also have a bearing at the base of 
and directed into the entrance-rolls g, and 
the pot, though this is not necessary, the act 
when so directed no other work is required 
ual strain on the rolls not being heavy. The 
except to withdraw the pipe after it leaves 
said roll f has its upper part or shaft f' 
the rolls h, and even this can be accomplished 
mounted in adjustable bearings k k', sliding 
by an inclined guideway. The pipe is then 
in the housing and connected at the threaded 
forced forward by the entrance-rolls longi 
shafts ll, which engage with the threaded 
tudinally and in a downward incline, passing 
seats or nuts in the housing, said shafts be 
into the metal, so that the air contained in 
ing threaded in opposite direction and carry 
the pipe and any gases or steam which may be 
ing at their ends the gear-wheels m. m., one 
generated from the liquid coating of the pipe 
of which is provided with a handle m, by 
may have free escape from the pipe from its 
which said threaded shafts may be turned to 
upper end when the pipe is entering the bath. 
move the roll f within the pot and regulate 
The pipe continues to descendalong the guide 
the width of pass between the rolls, according 
way c, and before it leaves the entrance-rolls 
to the diameter of the pipe to be carried 
g its forward end passes between the feeding 
through the bath. The power for driving 
rolls ef in the bath. These rolls then carry 
these rolls may be applied in any suitable 
the pipe forward, so that its rear end passes 
way, the drawings, Fig. 3, illustrating that 
preferred by me, the power-shaft n, being 
out from the entrance-rolls and down the in 
clined guideway, the whole pipe being then 
driven by a belt which engages with either 
submerged within the coating material. As 
of the pulleys n', according to the speed de 
it continues in its course through the bath it 
sired, this shaft in being mounted in bearings 
will be apparent that the portion thereof en 
n in and carrying the fly-wheel m'. Above 
gaging with the feeding-rolls ef will be raised 
the shaft n, and mounted in bearings p' in 
or lowered according to the respective posi 
the housing j, is the shaft p, which is driven 
tions of the ends of the pipe resting on the 
from the power-shaft through the gearing r r'. 
guideways cd, and that besides the forward 
This shaft carries the bevel-gear S, which en 
gages with the bevel-gears' at the upper end 
feeding movement of said rolls there will nec 
essarily be Some vertical movement of the 
of the shaft e' of the rolle, and sliding on the 
65 shaft p by a feather connection is the bevel- 1 pipe in the rolls. As, however, these rolls are 
55 
45 
40 
Cd 
LI 
LI C 
I I5 
I 25 
 
545,430 
3 
65 
75 
at it, Fig. 1, and in dotted lines, Fig. 2, the 
flux-box at being formed at the forward end. 
What I claim by my invention, and desire 
to obtain by Letters Patent, is as follows: 
1. The herein-described method of coating 
pipe, consisting in passing the pipe longitudi 
nally and at an incline into the bath, entirely 
submerging the pipe in the bath and while it 
is so submerged carrying it longitudinally 
along therein, and finally carrying it through 
and out of the bath at an incline and at the 
opposite end, substantially as set forth. 
2. A combination of a pot or tank for con 
taining coating material, inclined guide-Ways 
leading from the ends toward the center 
thereof, and vertical plain-faced feeding rolls 
in the pot between the inclined guide-ways, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of a pot or tank for con 
taining coating material, and vertical plain 
faced feeding rolls in the pot, adapted to 
grasp the pipe and move it longitudinally 
through the bath and permit of the vertical 
motion therein, substantially as Set forth. 
4. The combination of a pot or tank for con 
taining coating material, vertical plain-faced 
feeding rolls in the pot and entrance rolls at 
the forward end of the pot adapted to force 
the pipe forward into the vertical rolls within 
the pot, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of a pot or tank for coin 
taining coating material, Vertical plain-faced 
feeding rolls in the pot, entrance rolls at the 
forward end of the pot adapted to force the 
pipe forward into the vertical rolls within the 
pot, and discharge rolls at the other end of 
the pot adapted to receive and carry the pipe 
therefrom, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination of a pot or tank for con 
taining coating material, inclined guide-ways 
leading from the ends toward the center, ver 
tical plain-faced feeding rolls in the pot be 
tween the inclined guide-ways and entrance 
rolls at the forward end of the pot adapted to 
force the pipe along the forward inclined 
guide-ways into the vertical feeding rolls, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
7. The combination of a tank or pot for con 
taining coating material, vertical plain-faced 
feeding rolls in the pot, and a cover extend 
ing over the pot and having receiving and 
discharge openings leading from the ends to 
ward the center of the same, substantially as 
set forth. 
8. The combination of a pot or tank for con 
taining coating material, inclined guide-ways 
within the pot leading from the ends toward 
the center, vertical plain-faced feeding rolls 
in the pot between the guide-ways and a series 
of guide-rolls in front of the forward end of 
the pot, arranged to hold the pipe at the same 
incline as the forward guide-way and direct 
it into the vertical feeding rolls in the pot, 
substantially as set forth. 
plain-faced they permit this vertical move 
ment and yet act to carry the pipe forward, 
feeding it in its course while the pipe is en 
tirely submerged in the bath, and finally feed 
ing its forward end up along the inclined 
guideway and out of the bath into the dis 
charge-rolls h. As soon as the upper end of 
the pipe passes out of the bath the coating 
material contained within the pipe will of 
course commence to drain out, and as the pipe 
is held in an inclined position during all the 
time that it is being delivered from the bath, 
either by the feeding-rolls operating in the 
bath or the delivery-rolls operating on it as it 
is withdrawn from the bath, the pipe is thor 
oughly drained of all surplus coating mate 
rial and passes from the bath evenly and 
properly coated. In the course of the pipe 
through the bath the longitudinal movement 
will cause a current of the coating material 
through the pipe itself, bringing fresh coat 
ing material in contact with the interior of 
the pipe, and where the apparatus is used for 
coating with molten metals aiding materi 
ally in the heating of the pipe, so as to bring 
it to the most desired heat for coating; and 
the speed of the pipe through the bath may 
be regulated so as to cause the desired heat 
ing of the bath and enable it to take on a per 
fect coating of the metal, and yet a thin coat 
thereof, which is accomplished by bringing 
the pipe to the desired heat at which such pe 
culiar thin and perfect coating is obtained. 
In the coating of the pipes it is evident 
that one pipe can follow the other in rapid 
succession through the coating-bath, it only 
being necessary that one pipe shall be deliv 
ered from the entrance-rolls, when another 
pipe can be inserted therein and the opera 
tion repeated. The actual output of the ap 
paratus can therefore be very materially in 
creased over the present hand manipulation 
in coating. It is also evident that the coat 
ing accomplished is even throughout, and that 
for this reason a considerable saving in coat 
ing material is obtained as compared with 
the method of coating where the coats are 
lapped over each other, as above described. 
The metal can also be held in better condi 
tion and a greater portion of its surface can 
be protected from contact with the atmos 
phere and So kept free from Scum, so that an 
evener, brighter, and handsomer coating can 
be produced. 
It is evident that the bath can be covered 
by any suitable protecting covering hung 
from the sides of the pot or tank, leaving only 
a long opening at each end for the entrance 
and delivery of the pipe, so that in coating 
with metals the metal may be prevented from 
rapid oxidation and the heat retained in the 
pot, while, if desired, a suitable flux-box may 
be formed at the forward end of the pot, 
The cover above referred to is illustrated 
15 
2 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
95 
{ 
9o 
? ? ?? 
o 
II 5 
?20 
I 25 
4 
545,430 
9. The combination of a pot or tank for con- second vertical roll depending into the pot Id 
taining coating material, vertical plain-faced and mounted in sliding adjustable bearings 
feeding rolls in the pot, and means for ad- in the housing, substantially as set forth. 
justing the same laterally, substantially as 
In testimony, whereof I, the said DAVID 
TREVOR LEWIS, have hereunto set my hand. 
10. The combination of a pot or tank for con- 
taining coating material, a housing above the 
pot, a vertical roli depending into the potand 
mounted in bearings in the housing, and a 
L. DIE. B. LITTLE, 
ROBERTC. TOTTEN. 
DAVID TRE WOR LEWIS. 
5 and for the purposes set forth. 
Witnesses: 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545530.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 545,530. 
 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
A. D. PENTZ, 
LINOTYPE MACHINE, 
Patented Sept. 3, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
A. D. PENTZ, 
LINOTYPE MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 545,530, 
Patented Sept. 3, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
A A. 
 
 
H 
 
 
4 
va 
'XML 
a 223 
T. 
- - - - 
Eyes 
S 
I 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
ENS 
Z2 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT D. PENTZ, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO THE MERGENTHALER 
LINOTYPE COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
LIN OTYPE-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 545,53, dated September 3, 1895. 
Application filed April 8, 1895, Serial No. 544,905, (No model.) 
w 
S. 
to all, whom, it may concert: 
- 
Be it known that I, ALBERT D. PENTZ, of 
Brooklyn, county of Kings, and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Linotype-Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the Mergenthaler linotype - machine of the 
character represented in Letters Patent of 
the United States No. 436,532, dated Septem 
ber 16, 1890. In the machine named the se 
lected matrices are delivered one after an 
other from the magazine and assembled or 
composed in line in a vertically-movable as 
Sembling-block, designated by I in the origi 
nal patent. In the machine of the patent 
and those of later construction this assem 
bling-block was connected with a hand-lever, 
by Which it was elevated at the completion 
of each line of composition preparatory to 
the transfer of the line to the casting mech 
It is the aim of the present invention to re 
lieve the operator of the labor of lifting the 
elevator; and to this end it consists in com 
bining With the elevator power-driven de 
vices under the control of the operator for 
effecting its vertical motion. 
The operating devices may be widely varied 
in construction and arrangement in the ways 
which will suggest themselves to the skilled 
mechanic without departing from the scope 
of my invention. 
In the accompanying drawings I have rep 
resented the improvement in a form found 
satisfactory in practice, the drawings being 
limited to such parts of the machine as are 
necessary to the understanding of the present 
invention. 
In the drawings the old parts of the ma 
chine are represented by the same letters and 
numerals as those of the original patent. 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of the 
assembling-elevator, keyboard, and adjacent 
parts With my improvement applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is an end elevation of the same. Fig. 
3 is a perspective view showing the driving 
clutch and connections through which the 
assembling-elevator is actuated. Fig. 4 is a 
So longitudinal section through the same parts. 
Fig. 5 is a view of a detail. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents 
In applying my improvement 
the frame of the machine; D, the keyboard 
through which the matrices are designated 
and caused to pass to the assembler. 
Irepresents the assembling-elevator, slotted 
at the top to receive the matrices as they are 
delivered thereto, one after another, and 
mounted in guides in the frame, so that it 
may rise from the position shown in Fig. 1 to 
a position in which its matrices may be trans 
ferred horizontally to the stationary guide or 
channel M. 
L' represents one of the horizontally-nov 
ing carriage-fingers, by which the line of mat 
rices is carried out of the elevated assembler 
through the passage M in the course to the 
casting devices. 
The foregoing parts are all constructed and 
arranged to operate in the ordinary manner, 
except as to the means for raising and lower 
ing the assembler I. 
extend 
through the base of the keyboard, from right 
to left, a rotary shaft 1, provided on one end 
with a crank 2, which is connected by a pit 
man 3 to the lower end of the assembler I, so 
that the half-revolution of the shaft and crank 
from the position shown in Fig. I will-ele 
wate the assembler and the next half-revolu 
tion lower the assembler to its first position. 
The pitman may be connected directly to the 
assembler; but to facilitate the accurate ver 
tical adjustment of the latter I prefer to con 
nect the upper end of the pitman by a pivot 
4 to the lower end of a slide 5, such as shown 
in Fig. 5, seated in a vertical dovetailed 
groove in the assembler and provided with a 
vertical set-screw 6, by which a slight verti 
cal adjustment may be effected. In relation 
to the pitman the upper end of the slide 5 is 
provided with a hook it, corresponding to 
that of the original patent, No. 436,532, which 
automatically engages with the frame when 
the assembler is elevated to maintain it in 
the elevated position. This hook is auto 
matically disengaged, as usual, by the car 
riage, which shifts the line to the left, and its 
function is to prevent the assembler from de 
scending until the line has been transferred. 
therefrom. At its right-hand end the shaft 
1 is provided with a loosely-turning pulley 7, 
driven by a belt 8 from a grooved hub on the 
shaft a, used to drive the keyboard connec 
ICO 
545,530 
tions, as in the original machine. The pull 
ley 7 is driven constantly, but motion is trans 
mitted thence to the shaft and crank inter 
mittingly through the clutch devices now 
about to be described. 
The clutch proper consists of a hub or col 
lar 9, provided at its outer end with pins or 
teeth to engage corresponding pins on the 
hub and slotted longitudinally to receive a 
pin 10, affixed to the shaft, this arrangement 
permitting the hub to slide endwise into and 
out of engagement with the driving-pulley 
while it is prevented from turning on the 
shaft. A spiral spring 11, seated within the 
hub, acts to throw it into engagement with 
the driving-pulley whenever it is released. 
In order to disconnect the parts and hold 
the shaft at rest under normal conditions, the 
hub of the clutch is provided with a rigid arm 
12 having a lateral stud or projection 13. A 
finger-lever 14, pivoted to the arm 15 and lift 
ed by spring 16, is provided, near its middle, 
with an uprising shoulder 17, inclined or bev 
eled on the left-hand side. The parts stand 
normally in the position shown in Figs. 3 and 
4, the clutch being held to the left out of en 
gagement by the contact of its arms with the 
side of the finger-lever and being prevented 
from rotating by the contact of the stud 13 
with the projection on the lever. If, now, the 
lever is depressed so as to throw this projec 
tion out of engagement with the clutch, the 
latter will be thrown to the left by the spring 
into engagement with the driving-pulley. The 
clutch will now turn the shaft and crank, and 
the pitman will elevate the assembler to the 
required point. The hook I will engage and 
prevent the assembler from descending, and, 
as the parts can turn no farther, the driving 
belt will slip. When the hook 11 is disen 
gaged and the assembler released, the parts 
Will continue their rotation and the assem 
bler will descend. The finger-key having been 
relieved from pressure and lifted to its former 
position by the spring will present its pro 
jection 17 in the path of the projection on the 
revolving clutch. As the clutch-arm rides 
Id 
25 
45 
SO 
55 
o 
against the inclined side of the projection it 
will be forced to the left until it disengages 
from the pulley, and its motion will be there-- 
after arrested by the contact of the pin 13 
with the lever. Thus it will be seen that the 
momentary depression of the finger-key is fol 
lowed by the immediate elevation of the as 
sembler without further effort on the part of 
the operator, and that the assembler is in due 
time returned automatically to its first posi 
tO. 
It is manifest that the clutch devices here 
in shown may be replaced by any other form 
of automatic stop - clutch known to those 
skilled in the art and that the other details 
may be varied at will, provided only that the 
automatic elevation and depression of the as 
sembler is effected. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In allinotype machine the movable assem 
bler in combination with mechanism power 
driven for moving the same and means for 
controlling the movement. 
2. In a linotype machine the movable assem 
bler in combination with a crank shaft and 
pitman, a driving clutch and finger lever con 
nections for controlling the clutch. 
3. In allinotype machine, the assembling ele 
vator, the crank shaft and pitman, the con 
stantly driven pulley, the clutch for connect 
ing the shaft and pulley, the pulley actuating 
spring and the finger key lever arranged to 
disengage and hold the clutch. 
4. In a linotype machine, the combination 
of the movable assembler the crank and pit 
man, the bar connected to the pitman and 
carrying the hook and an adjustable connec 
tion between said bar and the assemble'. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 19th day of March, 1895, in the 
presence of two attesting witnesses. 
- 
ALBERT D. PENTZ. 
Witnesses: 
BENJAMIN G. BLOOM, 
JOHN C. MCCAUSLAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545631.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 545,631, 
I, KNOWLDEN. 
BICYCLE STAND, 
Patented Sept. 3, 1895. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC KNOWLDEN, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE POPE 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE, AND HARTFORD, 
CONNECTICUT. 
BICYCLE-STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of retters Patent No. 545,631, dated September 3, 1895. 
Application filed May 7, 1895, Serial No. 548,422, (No model.) 
... 
/ 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ISAAC KNOWLDEN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings, 
in the State of New York, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Bicycle 
Stands, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, annexed hereto 
and forming a part hereof. 
This invention relates to devices which are 
intended to support bicycles in an upright po 
sition and are commonly called stands, 
whether attached to a vertical wall or to the 
floor; and it has for its object the production 
of a device of this character which shall be 
exceedingly simple and inexpensive. in con 
Struction, neat and compact, easily secured in 
the desired position, and capable of holding a 
bicycle with sufficient firmness without mar 
ring its finish. 
The construction of the improved device 
will be fully described hereinafter, and its 
novel features will be pointed out in the claims 
which follow. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a front elevation of an approved form of the 
device, one of the rollers being shown partly 
in Section. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
same in position for use. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
of the same. 
The improved device, as represented in the 
drawings, is preferably made from a continu 
ous piece of wire bent into the required form, 
and this description will proceed upon the 
assumption that it is so made, although it will 
be obvious that it may be made in two or more 
separate pieces. The device comprises two 
vertical members A and A', which are suit 
ably supported, as hereinafter described, to 
receive the rim of the bicycle-wheel between 
them, and are of sufficient length to hold the 
Wheel steady. The two vertical members A 
and Aare supported, preferably at each end, 
by arms BB' and C C, which are substan 
tially at right angles to the respective verti 
cal members, and are also substantially at 
right angles to the wall to which the device 
is to be secured. The arms are of such length 
that they may not only support the verti 
cal members at a proper distance from the 
wall, but preferably may have a sufficient de 
gree of elasticity to permit them to yield . 
slightly as the wheel is introduced and then 
to grip the rim thereof snugly. The elasticity 
of the arms is not, however, essential, as the 
bicycle would be properly held if the vertical 
members were rigidly supported, provided the 
space between them were about equal to the 
width of the wheel rim or tire. 
The supporting-arms at one or at both ends 
of the vertical members are adapted to be 
secured to the wall, and for this purpose may 
be provided with feet or socket-pieces. As 
shown in the drawings, each arm B and B' 
has a foot-piece b and b', bent at right angles 
thereto and parallel with the wall, and each 
foot-piece has an eyeb' for the reception of a 
screw or nail by which the device may be se 
curely fastened to the wall. The arms C and 
C are shown as having a common foot-piece 
c, which Serves to unite the two vertical mem 
bers and to hold them at the proper distance 
apart, and which may also have an eye c' for 
a screw or nail. 
To increase the grip of the device upon the 
wheel, as well as to facilitate the introduction 
of the wheel and to guard against possible 
injury, it is desirable to apply to the vertical 
members A and A' rollers D and D', which 
may be of any suitable material-such, for 
example, as vulcanized rubber. 
In the use of my device it is secured to the 
Wall at about the height of the axle of the bi 
cyle from the floor. The wheel of the bicycle 
is run in between the vertical members or the 
rollers thereon, and by them is held in an up 
right position. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A bicycle stand comprising two vertical 
members, and horizontal arms to support said 
members in substantial parallelism and at a 
proper distance from the wall, each of said 
arms having a foot bent at rightangles thereto 95 
and parallel with the wall and provided with 
an eye, substantially as set forth. 
2. A bicycle stand formed of a continuous 
piece of wire bent to form vertical members, 
horizontal supporting arms for said vertical CO 
9o 
75 
al 
. 
. 
. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
545,681 
an eye, and rollers mounted on said vertical 
members, substantially as set forth. 
5. A bicycle stand formed of a continuous 
piece of wire bent to form vertical members, 
horizontal supporting arms for said vertical 
members, a single foot for each of the arms at 
one end of the vertical members and a com 
mon foot connecting the horizontal arms at 
the other ends of the vertical members, and 
rollers mounted on said vertical members, 
Substantially as set forth. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
6th day of May, A.D. 1895. 
ISAAC KNOWLDEN. 
Y 
25 
In presence of - 
W. B. GREELEY, 
ALFRED W. KIDDLE. 
members and a foot to bear against the wall 
and connecting the horizontal arms at one end 
of the vertical members, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. A bicycle stand comprising two vertical 
members, horizontal arms to support said 
members in substantial parallelism and at a 
proper distance from the wall, means to se 
cure Said arms to the wall, and rollers mounted 
on said vertical members, substantially as set 
4. A bicycle stand comprising two vertical 
members, and horizontal arms to support said 
members in substantial parallelism and at a 
proper distance from the wall, each of said 
arms having a foot bent at right angles thereto 
and parallel with the wall and provided with 
forth. 
- 
CU 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545731.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 545,731, 
 
J. SARVER. 
PORTABLE DERRICK, 
Patented Sept. 3, 1895. 
WITNESSES; 
4&ac6, 
 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB SARVER, OF LA JUNTA, COLORADO. 
PORTABLE DERRICK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 545,731, dated September 3, 1895. 
Application filed May 9, 1895, Serial No. 548,744. (No model.) 
55 
75 
Stacks. 
- 
. 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JACOB SARVER, of La 
Junta, in the county of Otero, State of Colo 
rado, have invented a new and Improved 
Portable Derrick, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to an improved port 
able derrick, that is particularly well adapted 
for the elevation and proper disposition of 
forkfuls of hay or straw that are to be han 
dled for the formation of such material into 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
novel simple device of the indicated char 
acter, which may readily be transported to a 
desired point, and erected for use, be opera 
tive by horses or other power, and that in 
Service Will be adapted to automatically swing 
its load-carrying arm laterally for the deposi 
tion of Said load and then automatically re 
turn the arm to its normal position for engage 
ment of the fork with another quantity of 
material that is to be moved. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts, as hereinafter de 
Scribed, and indicated in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar figures and letters of refer. 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
WieWS. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the improved 
derrick erected for use. Fig. 2 is a plan view 
of the machine, having some of the minor 
details broken away. Fig. 3 is a partly-sec 
tional rear view of the lower portion of the 
derrick substantially on the line 33 and in 
direction of arrow 3 in Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 is a 
transverse sectional view of parts of the der 
rick substantially on the line 4 4 in Fig. 1. 
For the stable support of other portions of 
the derrick a base-block 10, having suitable 
dimensions, is provided, the said block that 
may be of Wood or metal, being preferably 
elongated and notched at the ends to receive 
the bodies of headed stakes 11, which, when 
driven into the soil, will secure the base-block 
temporarily in place where the derrick is to 
be stationed for service. The block 10 is 
vertically perforated to produce a socket or 
otherwise adapted to loosely receive the jour 
naled lower end 12 of the derrick-post 12, 
which post is afforded a proper height to 
adapt it for effective service when in an erect 
position on the base-block, as shown in Fig. 
1. The post 12 is maintained upright by 
guy-ropes or other flexible connections 13, 
that extend from a radial flange or guy-ring 
14, on the post to stakes in the ground, the 
said flange being preferably adapted to swivel 
on the postata proper distance from the base 
block 10, so that the guy-ropes having their 
upper ends attached thereto may be projected 
therefrom in any desired direction to have 
their outer ends attached to the stakes 13", 
which are firmly driven into the soil, so as to 
render the wire ropes 13 taut and preserve 
the post upright but free to turn on its pivot 
and in the loose guy-ring 14. 
On the upper end of the post 12 an elon 
gated carrier-arm 15 is pivoted to rock, and 
this may be effected by the loose insertion of 
the arm in a vertical slot of the post, as shown 
in Fig. 2, so as to permit the arm alld post to 
be loosely connected by a pivot-bolt 12, or 
by any other available means which will 
adapt the arm to receive a rocking movement 
on the post. ... The point of pivotal connection 
of the arm 15 and post 12 is intermediate of 
the ends of said arm, and the thickness of 
what may be termed the front end portion 
of the arm is preferably reduced between the 
upper and lower sides of the same for a cor 
rect distance from the front terminal of the 
arm, producing an inclined shoulder, as at 
15, and the use of which will be hereinafter 
described. 
On the reduced forward portion of the arm 
15 the traveling frame 16 is mounted, which 
is constructed to loosely embrace the sides 
of the arm, and its upper portion is adapted 
to rest on top of the latter. While the frame 
16 may be formed in several ways to adapt 
it for longitudinal movement on the carrier 
arm 15 it is preferred to construct it as shown, 
and it comprises two upper side bars a, and 
two similar lower side bars b, these bars being 
spaced apart at their ends by two blocks c, 
that are respectively located above and below 
the arm 15, the said spacing-blocks having 
such a relative thickness that when the frame 
16 is completed it may receive a longitudinal 
movement on the arm. Four link-plates d 
e are members of the frame 16, these being 
95 
CO 
IO 
30 
45 
So 
 
545,731 
introduced between the side bars a, and blocks 
C and are thereto secured, the rear plates e 
having greater length than the front plates d. 
To facilitate the sliding movement of the 
frame 16, the antifriction-rollers g may be 
introduced and pivoted in slots produced to 
receive them in the ends of the spacing-blocks 
c, as indicated by dotted lines, there being 
three of said rollers having the same diame 
ter, and a fourth larger roller g', which is to 
serve as a pulley and is located at the rear 
and lower corner of the traveling frame. 
Two of the rollers g are adapted to have con 
tact with the upper side and one with the 
lower side of the arm 15, so as to reduce 
frictional contact cf the frame 16 with the 
said arm when longitudinally moved thereon. 
The larger roller or pulley g is pivoted at 
the side of the traveling frame, as shown in 
Fig. 3 and 4, for a free engagement with a 
pulling-rope, as will be hereinafter described, 
to freely rotate at any point of longitudinal 
adjustment given to the traveling frame. 
Two similar lifting-bars i are introduced be 
tween the side bars a, and arm 15, the said 
lifting-bars being located intermediate of the 
slide-plates d and e, and the lifting-bars are 
Spaced apart at their ends so as to be held 
parallel and free to work in a vertical plane 
by a filling-block ', introduced and secured 
at their upper ends, and the buffer-lblock 18 
at the lower ends of said lifting-bars, as 
clearly shown in Fig. 4. 
It is essential that the carrier-arm 15 be fur 
nished with means for rocking it on the pivot 
bolt 12' and retaining the outer end of the 
arm at any desired inclination with regard to 
the post 12. To this end a rope or other flexi 
ble connection 17 is secured at one end on 
the rear of the post 12 a short distance below 
the arm 15, as at 17 in Fig. 1, and thence 
extends up and over the grooved pulley 18, 
that is pivoted on the side of the carrier-arm 
near its rear end. From the pulley 18 the 
rope 17 is returned to the post 12 for an en 
gagement with the grooved pulley 19, which 
is pivoted on the post on the same side of the 
derrick as the pulley 18 and below the point 
of connection 17 of the rope on said post. 
The rope 17trends from the pulley 19 through 
a slot in the guy-ring 14 down to and beneath 
a similar pulley 20 pivoted on the same side 
of the post as the pulley 19, and after passing 
from the pulley 20 extends upward over a 
pulley 20 and thence downward and is fas 
tened by its remaining end on the post, as at 
17, and should be in a taut condition when 
the arm 15 is horizontal, or nearly so. It will 
be seen that if the rope 17 is pulled down 
Wardly the rear end of the arm 15 will be 
correspondingly depressed, and if weight is 
hung on the front end of said arm and the 
rope 17 is slackened that arm will be down 
wardly inclined in front of the post 12 at any 
desired angle thereto, and the frame 16 will 
be prevented from leaving the arm 15 by a 
stop-pin 15'. 
On the front portion of the traveling frame 
16, one end of the hoisting-rope 21 is secured 
at 21 and thence hangs in a loop from the 
loose pulley 22, which is pivoted between the 
lower ends of the link-plates e. From the 
pulley 22, the hoisting-rope trends toward and 
has contact with the upper surface of the pull 
ley 23 that is pivoted on the post 12 near the 
arm 15, and thence extends down in the post 
to contact with the lower pulley 24 on its lower 
edge and thence rearwardly over an idler 
pulley 25, which is rotatably supported on a 
bracket-frame 26 that projects from the rear 
side of the post when the latter is in normal 
position. The hoisting-rope 21 is afforded 
sufficient length to permit its attachment at 
the end which projects from the pulley 25 to 
a source of power and progressive movement, 
which may be an animal or any other motive 
force that can be conveniently applied to 
draw on the rope, and also to slacken it, as 
occasion may require. 
In the loop or bight of the hoisting-rope 21, 
which is provided between its secured end 21 
and pulley 22, a sheave-block 27 is hung, and 
grooved sheave 27 of said block resting on 
the looped portion of said rope, as indicated 
in Fig. 1. The upper end of said block is 
level, and may have contact with the buffer 
block -that is, the lower end of a sliding 
jack, which is composed of the bars i, filling 
block i' and buffer-block i, the use of which 
jack will presently be explained. A link or 
ring 27 is loosely secured in the lower end of 
the sheave-block 27, and to the link any pre 
ferred style of hay-fork which is adapted to 
grapple, hoist, and release a quantity of hay 
or straw is hung, and as this is not a part of 
the invention it is omitted from the drawings. 
One feature of the improvement comprises 
means to hold the carrier-arm 15 extended di 
rectly forward to allow the hay or straw on a 
wagon or on the ground below the arm to be 
lifted by a fork hung from the block 27, and 
after the loaded fork is elevated a sufficient 
distance by draft on the hoisting-rope 21 to 
automatically release the arm and swing it 
laterally by the pull of the hoisting-rope so 
as to transfer the lifted forkful of hay to a 
point at one side of the derrick where a hay 
or straw stack is to be formed. 
The preferred means for effecting the lock 
ing of the post 12 and arm 15 in the position 
indicated in Fig. 2 and its automatic release 
as well as lateral swinging movement in di 
rection of arrow 1 in said figure comprises 
the following-described parts and method of 
operation: A latch-piece 2S is pivoted in a 
transverse slot or other support on the base 
block 10, so that one end which has most 
weight will project at the side of the derrick 
toward which the arm 15 is to swing, the op 
posite end portion of the latch-piece being re 
duced on the upper side to provide a latch 
ing-shoulder thereon. From said shoulder of 
the latch 28 toward the lighter end of the 
latter an incline is formed on the upper sul 
IO 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
5 O 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
I Od 
IO5 
IO 
I I5 
2 
I 25 
 
545,731 
7 o 
75 
face thereof, which will adapt the said latch 
to have a latched engagement with the lower 
bar of the bracket-frame 26 when said frame 
is swung toward the shoulder mentioned or 
in direction of arrow 2 in Fig. 2. On the up 
per end of the sliding jack that is mounted in 
the traveling frame 16 one end of the arm 
pulling rope 29 is secured, and thence extends 
down under the loose pulley g, from which 
the said rope trends toward and over the 
pivoted pulley 30 that is on the side of the 
post nearer the heavy end of the latch-piece 
28, toward which the rope 29 is drawn, first 
passing through a slot in the guy-ring 14, the 
lower end of the pulling-rope being secured to 
the Weighty end of the latch-piece, as shown 
clearly in Fig. 3. For efficient action the pull 
ing-rope 29 should be adjusted without slack 
ness, when the latch-piece 28 is depressed at 
its heavy end and the sliding jack to which 
one end of said rope is connected is in pend 
ent condition. It will be seen that the appli 
cation of draft force on the lower end of the 
hoisting-rope 21 will first raise the sheave 
block 27 and its load until a nearly sufficient 
height is attained, and at this elevation of 
the block it contacts with the buffer-block i 
of the jack, which latter will then commence 
to move upwardly, drawing on the rope 29, so 
as to release the bracket-frame 26. When the 
latching end of the latch 28 is fully depressed 
and is arrested by contact with base-block 10, 
the continued pull of rope 21, acting on the 
jack to further slide it upward, will pull on 
rope 29 and cause the arm 15 to SWing in di 
rection of arrow 1 until a correct point of lat 
eral movement is reached, when the load on 
the sheave-block 27 may be dropped. 
In operating the derrick it is of consider 
able advantage to provide for the automatic 
return of the carrier-arm 15 to its normal po 
sition after having been swung laterally to 
deposit a load on a stack that is being built 
at one side of the derrick. To effect such a 
return movement a rope 31 is furnished, hav 
ing a weight 32 attached to one of its ends. 
This rope passes over the grooved pivoted 
pulley 33, which is located on the front side 
of the post 12 below and near the guy-ring 
14. The rope 31 trends down to the grooved 
pulley 34 that is also pivoted on the front of 
the post 12, and after passing under and upon 
the said pulley 34 the rope 31 is drawn over 
the idler-pulley 35 on post 12, and thence is 
extended to the latch-piece 28, whereon this 
end of the weighted rope is preferably secured. 
It will be evident that if by operation of 
the hoisting apparatus, as previously de 
scribed, the arm 15 has been laterally swung 
in direction of arrow 1 in Fig.2 and the hoist 
ing-rope 21 is slackened after a load has been 
dropped from a fork on the sheave-block 27, 
the weight 32 that has been carried around to 
face the stack which is being formed and is 
elevated by the swinging movement of the 
arm 15 toward said stack, will now by its 
gravity draw on the rope 31, which will in 
turn press on the upper pulley 33, whereby 
the stress of the rope named will swing the 
post 12 and arm 15 back to normal position 
for reception of another load, the weight mov 
ing down as the post resumes the position in 
dicated in Fig. 2, and the latch-piece 2S has 
engagement with the frame 26, SO as to re 
tain the arm 15 forwardly extended until a 
proper elevation is given to the load on the 
fork. (Not shown.) 
As the building of a stack of hay or straw 
requires that the increments of such material 
be deposited in different positions so as to 
give proper form to the stack, it will be seen 
that the provision for inclining the arm 15 is 
of advantage, as if the front end of said arm 
is depressed below a horizontal position the 
traveling frame 16, with the load suspended 
from it, will move toward the forward ex 
tremity of said carrier-arm, and by elevating 
the front end of the latter, so as to incline the 
arm rearwardly, the traveling frame will auto 
matically move toward the post 12 until ar 
rested by the inclined shoulder 15, which pre 
vents the suspended fork and its load from 
contacting with the guy-ropes 13. 
The construction of the improved portable 
derrick enables its convenient use at any de 
sired point, whereby hay or straw is to be 
formed into stacks in a field or other place; 
and as the device may be dismembered so as 
to pack the post and carrier-arm closely on. 
a wagon, the derrick can be easily moved to 
place for use or be taken to a shed and stowed 
away for preservation from the elements 
when not needed for service. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In combination with the swinging arm of 
a derrick, a traveling carriage comprising a 
frame, anti-friction rollers carried by the 
frame to engage the upper and lower sides of 
the derrick-arm, the jack comprising bars 
movable with relation to the carriage, the buf 
fer block between the lower ends of said bars, 
a sheave block adapted to engage said buffer, 
a latch for securing the derrick post and a 
flexible connection between said latch and 
jack substantially as specified. 
2. In a portable derrick, substantially as 
described, the combination with an upright 
rotatably supported post, of an automatically 
operated locking device for the post, a carrier 
arm pivoted on said post intermediate of the 
ends of said arm, a flexible connection 
adapted to change the inclination of the arm 
and hold it as adjusted, a traveling frame on 
the forward part of the arm which will change 
position as the arm is inclined, a hoisting rope 
on the Said frame and post, and a sheave block 
engaging a bight of the hoisting rope below 
the traveling frame, as specified. 
3. In a portable derrick, substantially as 
described, the combination with an upright 
rotatably supported post, a carrier arm piv 
oted on the upper end of the post between the 
9o 
95 
OC 
I o5 
To 
I 5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 
4. 
- 
545,781 
25 
35 
device, and adapted to release said latching 
device so that the arm may be swung later 
ally, as specified. 
5. In a portable derrick, substantially as 
described, the combination with an upright 
rotatably supported post, a pivoted arm there 
on, means to hold the arm forwardly extended, 
and a device adapted to release said arm and 
laterally swing it, of a device to automatically 
return the arm from a laterally swung posi 
tion, comprising a pulley pivoted on the front 
side of the post, another pulley near the lower 
end of the post, an idler pulley at right an 
gles to the lower pulley and also supported 
on the post, a flexible connection engaging 
said pulleys and fast at its lower end on a 
fixture at the base of the post, and a weight 
hung at the other end of the flexible connec 
tion, as specified. 
JACOB SARWER. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES J. YOHE, 
THOMAS F. CLARK. 
O 
ends of said arm, and a flexible connection 
between the rear end of the carrier arm and 
post, adapted to alter the inclination of the 
arm, of a traveling frame on the forward 
part of the arm, a jack slidable vertically 
On the said frame, a hoisting rope hung 
from the frame to produce a bight in said 
rope, and thence extended over pulleys on the 
frame and post, a sheave block in the bight 
of the hoisting rope, and a pulling rope ex 
tending from the top of the jack to a latch 
ing device at the base of the post, as specified. 
4. In a portable derrick, substantially as 
described, the combination with an upright 
rotatable post, a pivoted arm thereon, and 
lmeans to sustain the arm and incline it from 
a horizontal plane, of a latching device adapt 
ed to hold the arm on the post forwardly ex 
tended, and a device adapted to release the 
latching device, comprising an upwardly slid 
able jack on a traveling frame that is on the 
forward part of the arm, and a normally taut 
rope extending from said jack to the latching 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545831.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 545,831. 
H. B. TIBBITTS, 
ORGAN REED MILLING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 3, 1895, 
(No Model.) 
w 
No. 545,831, 
H, B, TIBBITTS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
ORGAN REEDMILLING MACHINE. 
Patented Sept 
1895. 
 
  
E. 
  
 
 
CA Syz74 
 " r V 
 
7-9.4s, 
A. 
ir-2 EN3 AA 
22 H2. A 
" 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY B. TIBBITTs, OF GENEVA, OHIO, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO CHARLES N. RAND, OF SAME PLACE, AND EMERY 
GALEN WETHERBEE, OF PAINES VILLE, OHIO. 
ORGAN-REED-MILLING MACH NE, 
SPIECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 545,831, dated September 3, 1895. 
Application filed December 19, 1894, Serial No. 532,879, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY.B. TIBBITTs, of 
Geneva, in the county of Ashtabula and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Machines for Milling 
Organ-Reeds, of which the following is a speci. 
fication. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in machines for milling the tongues of 
organ-reeds, having for its object to greatly 
facilitate and perfect the work; and it con 
sists in, first, providing a means for over 
coming the effects of expansion and con 
traction of the parts of the machine affected 
by rapid movement; second, in providing a 
means whereby, when the machine is set for 
milling any given size of reed the work shall 
proceed to the end without any variation in 
the work performed; third, in providing for 
the dropping and quick return of the reed 
carriage, avoiding a second cut and a liability 
of breaking the tongue of a reed; fourth, in 
providing a reed-tongue bed-plate, which ex 
tends beyond the end of the tongue and pre 
25 vents the end of the tongue being bent at the 
point while being milled. 
In the accompanying drawings, Sheet1, Fig 
ure 1 is a perspective view of my new reed 
milling machine. Sheet 2, Fig. 2 is a top or 
plan view of same. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of the upper portion of the machine 
with the pulley and reed-carriage removed 
to show the reed-clamp and the adjusting 
plate on the Spindle-bearing Support. Fig. 4 
is a longitudinal section of the reed-carriage, 
showing the reed-holder and reed-bed piece. 
Fig. 5 is a detached perspective view of the 
reed-carriage. Fig. 6 is a vertical section of 
one of the posts or pillow-blocks and bearing, 
showing the spindle and milling-tool, also 
showing in section the adjustable plate hav 
ing a guide-pin for guiding the movements of 
the reed-carriage relative to the milling-tool. 
Fig. 7 is a detached view of a reed-bed piece. 
A is the table or bed of the machine, sup 
ported on suitable legs. 
B B are posts or pillow-blocks mounted at 
one side of the table, having the boxes or bear 
ings for a spindle-shaft upon which is placed 
35 
45 
40 
. 
. 
. 
- 
55 
a small pulley B and balance-wheel B, the 5o 
projecting spindle C carrying the milling-tool 
C, rapid motion being imparted to the same 
by a belt from a suitable power source con 
nected with said pulley B. 
D is the reed-carriage fixed to ride back 
and forth beneath the milling-tool in the 
guide-posts did at the front side of the table 
and the guide-posts d' d' at the opposite or 
rear side of the table. 
d is a sliding plate movably set in grooves 
in the inside faces of said guide-posts d and 
projecting down through a hole in the bed or 
table A. 
d is a pin fixed in the plated beneath the 
table or bed, and said pin rests on a spring D', 
(seen in Figs. 1 and 4) which normally holds 
the plated up, with said pin bearing against 
the under side of the table. The front part 
of the carriage D rests upon the top end of 
said plate d' between the said guide-posts did. 
The rear end of the carriage is broader than 
the front end and rests on the shoulders of 
the guide-posts d' d'. Set-screws are provided 
in these guide-posts for the nice adjustment 
of the ways in which the carriage rides. To 
the top of the carriage is fixed the bed for hold 
ing the reed, and consists of a movable plate 
E, having a slot e, Fig. 5, in which a tongue 
bed F (seen detached in Fig. 6) is placed and 
held by set-screws. 
G is a clamp-hook for holding the heel of a 
reed, and consists of a bar placed in a perpen 
dicular hole through the carriage and through 
a slot in the table-top, having a cross-pin 9, 
(seen in Figs. 3 and 4) which whenever the car 
riage is depressed allows said bar G to be 
supported by the ping, lying on the table, 
there being a little space between the under 
side of the carriage and the table or bed A, 
as seen at g, Fig. 4. To the lower end of said 
bar is connected a strap h, carrying a weight 
H, and having its other end attached to the 
rear part of the under side of the carriage 
and passing through a slot H in the table. 
The purpose of the weight is to bring the 
carriage quickly forward whenever the for 
ward end is depressed by the pulling down of 
the aforesaid sliding plated, which frees the 
95 
75 
9o 
545,83i 
O 
rack-bar I from the pinion N, as will be ex 
plained farther on in the workings of this 
machine. 
Movements are imparted to the carriage for 
5 carrying the reed under the milling-tool by 
means as follows: Upon the side of the car 
riage is attached a rack-bar I. JJ are posts or 
pillow-blocks secured to the table, having 
bearings which support a driving-shaft IX, 
upon the end of which is attached a pulley 
wheel, K. Lisa driving-wheel mounted on the 
end of a shaft.*, fixed to the two rear legs of the 
inachine, midway down from the table, and 
joined to the hub of said wheel L is a small pull 
leyl, from which a beltM connects with the pull 
ley-wheel IX', by means of which a slow mo 
tion is imparted to the shaft K for propelling 
the carriage. On the inner end of said shaft 
K is provided a pinion N, meshing with the 
rack-bar I on the carriage. The teeth on the 
pinion N and rack-bar I are made on a diag 
onal line relative to the axis of the pinion, 
the object of which is to make a continuous 
bearing of the teeth between the pinion and 
The rack-bar to insure a steady movement of 
the carriage. The return movement of the car 
riage is performed through the medium of the 
Weight II and strap h, as hereinafter shown. 
O is a foot-treadle fulcrumed at the rear 
end to a cross-rod P near the foot of the rear 
legs of the table, the forward end supported 
by a spring Q, attached to its under side and 
resting on a front cross-rod P', said spring 
being stiff enough to bear the weight of the 
operator's foot. 
R is a rod connecting the treadle with the 
sliding plate d', by means of which said plate 
may be pulled down when required by a press 
lire of the operator's foot. 
S is a screw set in a side lug S9 at the side 
of the broad part of the carriage, and is de 
signed for a stop to the forward movements of 
the carriage, the end of the screw striking 
against the post B. Said screw is adjustable 
for regulating the distance the carriage should 
go in accordance with the length of reed being 
milled. 
T. Figs. 1, 2, and 3, is an adjusting-plate at 
tached to the side of post IB by means of a 
Screw it at one side of the spindle C, the other 
side of said plate having a top flange lying 
on the top of the post and bearing B and a 
side flange resting against the front side of 
the post. Through the top flange a screw t? 
holds the plate onto the post, and a set-screw 
ti, also fixed in said flange, serves for accu 
rately adjusting the plate. On the plate very 
near to the spindle is provided a pin W. On 
the side of the carriage next to the plate T 
is attached a guide-strip W, which rides up 
against the said pin W. The purpose of the 
adjustable plate T with its pin W is as fol 
lows: The spindle-shaft has very rapid revo 
lutions which are liable to generate heat in 
65 the bearings and thereby cause expansion in 
the metal. This would have a tendency to raise 
So 
55 
45 
35 
40 
the milling-tool slightly from the carriage 
and result in a non-uniformity of cutting on 
the reed-tongues, so that there would be a 
variation of the thickness of tongues. To 
guard against this and provide for strict 
uniformity of work under all conditions of 
temperature, the adjustable plate T is fixed 
on the side of the bearing-post B, so that the 
pin V, which accompanies any such derange 
ment of position of the spindle and milling 
tool, serves as a certain guide for the plate 
W on the carriage to bear against as the car 
riage moves forward under said tool. 
The working of the machine is as follows: 
The carriage being at the front and the foot 
treadle depressed, a reed is placed on the bed 
piece F, the forward hook-point of which ex 
tends sufficiently through the forward end of 
the reed - aperture to support the point of 
the reed-tongue. Now by releasing the press 
ure of the foot on the treadle the carriage 
is raised by the spring D. This brings the 
heel of the reed under the clamp-hook G and 
firmly holds the reed down upon the bed, as 
well as brings the former plate W up against 
the guide-pin W, at the same time, too, the 
rack-bar I is thrown into mesh with the pin 
ion N, and the carriage is then carried along 
under the cutting-tool until the carriage ar 
rives at the offset D, when the end of the 
carriage will drop. This will lower the reed 
from the cutting-tool, and also lower the rack 
bar away from the pinion N. Now by de 
pressing the treadle the sliding plate d' is 
pulled down, releasing the carriage at the 
offset, and the downward pull of the weight 
II upon the straph draws the carriage back 
again toward the operator, the strap sliding 
on the edge of the slot II in the table. The 
carriage also carries the clamp-hook G. with 
it, said hook-bar riding on its ping on the 
top of the table. 
The reed may now be re 
moved from the carriage and another one 
applied and the same operation repeated. 
It will be seen that a full set of reed-bed 
pieces F corresponding with thesizes of reeds 
are to be employed in the performance of 
milling a full set of reeds. 
IIaving described my invention, I claim 
1. In a reed milling machine the combina 
tion with the spindle, spindle bearing and 
cutter head C of the adjustable plate T, pro 
vided with pin V, mounted on the side of the 
bearing poston a screw i, and the screws l? 
and i in the top flange of said plate, adapted 
for adjustment as a guide for the reed car 
riage relative to the cutting tool, as described. 
2. In a reed milling machine the combina 
tion with spindle C cutter C and the adjust 
ing plate T having guide pin W and mounted 
on the post and bearing B, of the reed car 
riage, lhaving the off-set D and the guide 
strip W, bearing against said guide pin V, the 
reed holder E mounted on said carriage, and 
slotted at e, the reed bed F held in said slot e, 
the rack bar I on side of the carriage and 
o 
75 
95 
I o5 
TO 
i is 
 
545,831 
3 
means for moving the carriage forward under 
said cutting tool, substantially as described 
and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a reed milling machine the combina 
tion with the carriage D mounted to ride on 
the lugs d. d, d. d, and having the off-set 
D of the clamp hook G fixed in the vertical 
hole in the carriage D and holder E, the strap 
h having one end attached to said hook bar 
G, and the other end attached to the under 
side of the carriage, said strap depending 
through slot H in the table, and carrying the 
weight H, adapted for clamping the hook upon 
the reed, and for drawing the carriage back 
for quick return, substantially as described. 
4. In a reed milling machine, the combina 
tion with the table of the treadle O, full 
crumed to rear cross-rod P, the spring Q at 
tached to under side of treadle and resting 
IO 
15 
on front cross-rod P, the rod R. connecting 
the treadle with the sliding plate d, the 
spring D supporting said sliding plate, the 
reed carriage D, hook bar G held in a hole 
in said carriage, strap h having one end at 
tached to the carriage, and the other end at 
tached to the lower end of hook bar G, the 
weight H supported on said strap, the ar 
rangement of the parts being such that when 
the treadle O is depressed, the carriage is re 
leased by the pulling down of the plated, 
and the weight quickly draws the carriage 
backward for return of same substantially as 
described. 
HENRY B. TIBBITTS. 
30 
Witnesses: 
H. GOULD, 
E. E. MARTIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US545931.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 545,93 l. 
 
Patented Sept. 10, 1895. 
J. W0RNER, 
BALL AND SOCKET HANGER FOR SIEVES, &c. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. . 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J, WRNER, 
BALL AND S00EKET HANGER FOR SIEWIES, &c, 
No, 545,93l, 
Patented Sept. 10, 1895. 
 
625 
20?Z 2 e6 5.e5 
(L- 26. % a 6. 
Maud43K//(2,04% u 
| 
| 
| 
| 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB WRNER, OF BUDA-PESTIH, AUSTRIA-HUNGARY, ASSIGNOR TO CARL 
HAGGENMACHER, OF SAME PLACE. 
BALL-AND- SOCKET HANG ER FOR si EV Es, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 545,931, dated September 10, 1895. 
pplication filed January 9, 1894. Serial No. 496,277, (No model.) 
I O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
It was 6o 
sufficient to provide the necessary clearance 
for the pivotal or angular motion of the rod 
under the gyrating motion of the sieve, and 
the central portion of the ball member of each 55 
joint was occupied by the stem or body of the 
rod extending therefrom. Moreover, in view 
of the fact that the socket members had their 
central portions cut away, the joint was nec 
essarily open and would not hold oil. 
therefore difficult to supply the necessary lu 
brication, and the attempt to do so involved 
a large waste of oil. 
My invention overcomes the above-noted 
objections by providing a construction where- 65 
by I am able to utilize the central and most 
effective parts of both half-bearings, and in 
such a way in my preferred construction that 
the so?ket members become available as oil 
cups for supplying abundant lubrication with- 7o 
out waste. Briefly stated, I accomplish this 
result by extending the hanger-brackets and 
the terminal portions of the rod out of the 
direct line of strain, so that the full half-bear 
ings may engage with each other throughout 75 
their entire surfaces in the direct line of strain, 
and by placing the sockets below at both the 
upper and the lower joints. 
In the accompanying drawings I have illus 
trated my invention as applied to the gyrat- 8o 
ing sifters or chop-graders of the class above 
referred to, wherein 
Figure 1 is an end elevation showing my im 
proved hangers as applied to one of the said 
sifters; and Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 85 
same, with some parts shown in section and 
others broken away. Figs. 3 and 4 are detail 
views showing modified and comparatively 
undesirable forms of the hangers. 
To all avhom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB WRNER, a citi 
zen of Austria - Hungary, residing at Buda 
Pesth, in the Empire of Austria-Hungary, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Ball-and-Socket Hangers for 
Sieves, &c.; and I do hereby declare the follow 
- ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as wiil enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention has for its object to provide an 
improvedball-and-socket hanger for suspend 
ing movable bodies. My improved hanger 
is especially adapted for suspending bodies 
which are to be given horizontal or substan 
tially horizontal motion, and is particularly 
designed to meet the requirements for sus 
pending sieves or chop-graders which are to 
be operated with a gyrating motion in the 
horizontal plane. In its especial application 
the invention is designed as an improve, 
ment in the form of hangers used for suspend 
ing chop-graders or sifters of the class de 
Scribed in United , States Letters Patent is 
sued to Carl Haggenmacher of date June 28, 
1892, under Reissue No. 11,252, and gener 
ally known to the trade as the Haggen 
macher plansifters. 
As may be seen by reference to the said 
patent or the machines in use, hangers for . 
this class of work have hitherto been com 
posed of a pair of socket-brackets extended 
in the direct line of strain and secured one 
to-the overhead support and the other to the 
sifter or other movable body and a straight 
hanger-rod with ballends or terminals extend 
ing in the direct line of strain and engaging 
Like letters refer to like parts throughout. 9o 
with the said sockets to form ball-and-socket 
joints for suspending the sifter with freedom 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, which illustrate 
for the required motion. Hence with this 
the preferred form of my invention, a repre 
prior construction the sockets were neces 
sents a suitable overhead support, such as the 
sarily perforated or cut away at their central 
ceiling or overhead beam in a building. b 
portions to permit the outward passage of 
represents the sifter or sieve-frame; c, a shaft 95 
the stem or body portion of the ball-carrying 
pedestal or bearing; c', a vertical driving-shaft 
hanger-rod extending therefrom. The cen 
mounted in said bearing and provided with a 
driving-pulley c and a crank-disk c, having 
tral or most efficient portions of the half 
bearings in each joint weire therefore ren 
a crank-pin c, engaging with a suitable seat 
dered unavailable. The central portion of the 
in th? bottom of the sifter-frame for impart- Ioo 
ing a gyrating motion thereto. d represents 
socket had to be cut away not only enough 
to permit the outward passage of the rod, but I the upper hanger-brackets, curved or other 
 
35 
45 
2 
545,931 
I O 
5 
2 Cu 
2 5 
35 
4 o 
45 
55 
wise formed so as to project out of the direct 
line of strain on the hanger-rod and provided 
at their outer ends with removable sockets d', 
enlarged at their upper portions to afford 
space for holding oil. The upper brackets are 
secured in any suitable way to the overhead 
support a. g represents the lower hanger 
brackets, secured in any suitable way to the 
sifter-frame and constructed of angular or 
other form, so as to project out of the direct 
line of strain on the hanger-rod, and provided 
at their outer ends with depending balls g'. 
h' h h represent one of the hanger-rods, of 
which parts h' represents the body portion or 
central section, and the parts h h represent, 
respectively, the upper and lower end or ter 
minal sections of the rod. Of these parts the 
upper terminal section h is curved or other 
wise formed so as to project out of the direct 
line of strain on the rod and overreach the pro 
jecting or bearing part of the upper bracket dl, 
and is provided at its upper end with a depend 
ing ball h, which engages from above with the 
socket d', carried by the upper bracket d, and 
the lower terminal section h is also curved or 
otherwise formed so as to project out of the 
direct line of strain on the rod and under 
reach the projecting or bearing part of the 
lower bracket g, and is provided at its lower 
end with a removable socket h, which en 
gages from below with the depending ball g', 
carried by said bracket g. This socket h is 
exactly similar to the socket d' and is en 
larged at its upper end to form an oil-space. 
As shown, the terminal sections hhare in the 
form of open elliptical rings extending trans 
versely to the brackets overreached and un 
derreached thereby and have screw-threaded 
engagement with the central section h and 
may be secured thereon in any desired ad 
justment by jam-nuts h. These ring-like 
terminal sections h h are a convenient form 
of construction; but of course it will be un 
derstood that the same result might be se 
cured in other ways. All that is essential in 
respect to the rod is that its terminal por 
tions should be projected in some way out of 
the direct line of strain, so as to render the 
whole of the half-bearings carried thereby 
effective for bearing purposes, and that the 
upper terminals should carry a ball and the 
lower terminal a socket for co-operation, re 
spectively, with a socket carried by the up 
per bracket d and a ball carried by the lower 
bracket g, so as to render the sockets avail 
able as oil-cups. The sockets d and h are 
constructed, as shown, in separate pieces re 
movable from the respective parts by which 
they are carried for convenience in making 
and the ready substitution of new sockets 
when the old Ones become worn. The screw 
threaded engagement between the terminal 
sections h h and the body-section h of the 
rod affords a convenient means of shorten 
ing or lengthening the hanger-rod, as may be 
required. 
With the construction above described it 
M 
is obvious that the whole central surface of 
each half-bearing is rendered available for 
bearing-surfaces at each joint, and, in virtue 
of the underneath position of the socket mem 
ber of each joint and the en largement there 
of, that an abundance of lubrication may al 
ways be supplied. 
Springs ke are secured, as shown, to the op 
posite sides of the upper brackets d and bear 
at their free ends against the inner vertical 
faces of the upper terminal sections h of the 
hanger-rod and operate to prevent the hanger 
rod from turning on its axis under the gyrat 
ing motion of the sifter. Of course the springs 
k might be carried by the terminal section of 
the rodi and bear against fixed lugs on the 
bracket, and it is equally obvious that the 
springs k might be interposed between the 
lower terminal section h of the rod and the 
lower bracket g, fixed to the sifter. All that 
is necessary is that a pair of said springs k 
should be interposed at some point between 
the hanger-rod and the hanger-brackets to 
prevent the hanger-rod from turning on its 
axis. . 
Referring to the modifications, Fig. 3 shows 
a half reverse and Fig. 4 a full reverse, as com 
pared with the form shown in Figs. 1 and 2, 
in respect to the relative locations of the half- i 
bearings carried, respectively, by the brack 
ets and the hanger-rods. In Fig. 3, for exam 
ple, the rod p p p has sockets p at both ends, 
and both of the brackets have balls p for co 
operation with said sockets p on the rod, one 
from below and the other from above. The 
terminal sections p p are formed integral 
with the central section p' of the rod, and 
the upper terminal section p is made in the 
form of a hook for projecting out of the di 
rect line of strain and overreaching the half 
bearing of the upper bracket. This form 
would utilize the central portions of each half 
bearing; but the upper joint would not hold 
oil, and the construction would therefore be 
less desirable. 
In the form shown in Fig. 4 the rod is in 
the form of a longitudinally-extended open 
link with its parallel sides ir outside the direct 
line of strain and its terminal sections formed 
by the cross-bars or end portions r' of the said 
link; and the rod thus formed carries a socket 
r* at its upper end and a ball r at its lower 
end, engaging, respectively, the former with 
a ball r on the upper bracket and the latter 
with a socket r on the lower bracket. This 
form also utilizes the central bearing-surfaces 
of both half-bearings at each joint; but the 
socket members are above each joint, and 
hence neither joint will hold oil. 
The forms shown in Figs. 3 and 4 are so 
much inferior to the forms shown in Figs. 1 
and 2 that I do not recommend their use in 
practice. They are not the full mechanical 
equivalent of my preferred form for the rea- . 
son that they will not hold oil. They have 
been shown more especially to illustrate dif 
ferent ways of projecting the terminal sec 
W 
75 
95 
C. O 
I C 
II 5 
I 2 O 
I 25 
 
545,931 
engaging the socket of the upper bracket and 
having, at its lower end, a socket engaging 
the ball of the lower bracket, with said brack 
ets and said rod projected out of the direct 
line of strain, to secure umbroken bearing sur 
faces in the direct line of strain, at both of 
said joints, substantially as described. 
5. A series of hangers, for suspending a 
movable body, comprising each a socket 
bracket securable to an overhead support, a 
ball bracket securable to said movable body, 
and a hanger-rod provided above with a ball 
engaging the socket of the upper bracket and 
provided below with a socket engaging the 
ball of the lower bracket, with said sockets 
enlarged to form oil cups, and both the brack 
ets and the rod projected out of the direct 
line of strain, to secure unbroken bearing 
surfaces, in the direct line of strain, at said 
joints, substantially as described. 
6. The combination with a hanger-rod and 
hanger-bracket, of springs interposed be 
tween the rod and the bracket to prevent the 
rod from turning on its axis. 
7. The combination with the bracket d se 
cured to support a and having the socket d' 
and lower bracket g secured to the movable 
body b and having the ball g, of the hanger 
rod hi' h h, as described, having the ball h 
engaging the socket d from above and having 
the socketh, engaging the ball g from below, 
and the pair of springsk carried by the upper 
bracket d, and bearing against the inner faces 
of the rod section h, all substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
- 
JACOB WORNER. 
Witnesses: 
II. GOTHILE, 
WILLIAM MRIASSY. . 
45 
55 
75 
O 
v 
tions of the hanger-rod out of the direct line 
of strain. 
By actual usage I have demonstrated the 
efficiency of my improved hanger in the form 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is as follows: 
1. A hanger, for suspending a movable body, 
comprising an upper hanger-braeket Secur 
able to an overhead support, a lower hanger 
bracket securable to the movable body, and a 
hanger-rod connected with both of said brack 
ets by balland socket joints, with both of said 
brackets and said rod projected out of the 
direct line of strain, to secure unbroken bear 
ing surfaces, in the direct line of strain, at 
said ball and socket joints, substantially as 
described. 
2. A hanger, for suspending a movable body, 
comprising a hanger-bracket and a hanger 
* rod connected with each other by a ball and 
socket joint, with the bracket and the rod both 
projected out of the direct line of strain, to 
secure unbroken bearing surfaces, in the di 
rect line of strain, at said joint, and with the 
socket arranged to form the under member of 
said joint for holding oil, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. A hanger, for movable bodies, compris 
ing a hanger-bracket and a hanger-rod con 
nected by a ball and socket joint, with both 
the bracket and the rod projected out of the 
direct line of strain, to secure unbroken bear 
ing surfaces in the directline of strain, at said 
joint, and with the socket half bearing ar 
ranged underneath the ball half bearing and 
enlarged to form an oil cup, substantially as 
described. 
4. A hanger, comprising a socket bracket 
Securable to the overhead support, a ball 
bracket securable to the suspended body, and 
a hanger rod having at its upper end a ball 
I 5 
2 5 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546031.txt	(Model.) 
J. D. SCHOONMAKER, 
CURLING IRON, 
No. 546,031, 
Patented Sept. 10, 1895. 
 
Vizeau ea-1, 
fe 2/e72-Ao, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. SCHOONMAKER, OF CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS, ASSIGNOR TO CHARLES B. 
GOURLAY, OF SAME PLACE. 
C U R N G a RON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 546,031, dated September 10, 1895. 
Application filed August 4, 1894, Serial No. 519,451. (Model.) 
25 an idler. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN D. SCHOONMAKER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
5 nois, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Curling-Irons, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to a novel construc 
tion in curling-irons for curling hair. The 
Io device shown comprises a handle and a man 
drel rotatably journaled therein. The man 
drel is provided with a shoulder at the point 
of union thereof with the handle, the portion 
of the mandrel that is within the handle be 
15 ing reduced. At the shoulder portion of the 
mandrel a pinion f is secured. Upon the in 
ner face of the handle is provided a cap-like 
ring which has its edge turned over the end 
of the handle, and is provided at said edge 
2o With a Series of outwardly-projecting wings 
to be engaged by the thumb of the operator. 
The inner edge of the ring is provided with 
cogs or teeth. Meshing with these teeth of the 
cap-ring and with the teeth of the pinion is 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal elevation of the 
curling-iron complete. Fig. 2 is a detailed view 
showing the mandrel with the clamp open; 
also, the shank and pinion on the same. Fig. 
3o 3 is a plan view of the operating cap-ring; 
also, a sectional view on line 4 4. Fig. 4 is a 
plan view of the retaining-plate. Fig. 5 is a 
detailed plan view with part broken away, 
showing a part of the operating cap-ring, the 
35 idler, and part of pinion on shank of mandrel. 
In the drawings, A indicates a cylindrical 
mandrel made of any kind of suitable metal 
formed so as to present a smooth, even, and 
an accurately cylindrical surface. Said man 
4o drel is formed with a rearwardly-extended 
shanka, which penetrates the handle about 
two-thirds its length. Said handle may be 
made of Wood or metal, preferably of Wood. 
B indicates a clamp or concave opposing 
45 jaw, which is formed so as to closely and ac 
curately fit upon the adjacent convex surface 
of the mand reland bear upon the same from 
the pivotal point to the end of the mandrel. 
The clamp is made of metal of suitable thick 
5o ness, which is preferably struck up by dies, but 
 
C indicates the operating cap-like ring, 65 
findicates the pinion on the shanka, which 75 
which may be given shape by other conven 
ient or preferred means. The clamp B is 
bent or deflected at or near the pivot-pin l' 
and extends back and is so bent as to form 
a flat surface at its end, on which to place the 55 
thumb when operating the same. (See Fig. 
1.) Under said deflected portion of said 
clamp is a flat spring b' of suitable size, so 
bent as to press upward. One end of said 
spring rests upon the mandrel near the pivot- 6o 
pin b. The other end is riveted to the end 
of the clamp B. (See Fig. 1.) The action of . 
said spring serves to hold the mandrel and 
clamp together. 
which has its edge turned over the end of the 
handle, and is provided at said edge with a 
series of outwardly-projecting wings c to be 
engaged by the thumb of the operater. The 
inner edge of the ring is provided with cogs 7c 
or teeth. 
e indicates an idler of suitable size and 
thickness, provided with cogs or teeth on its 
edge. 
is of suitable size, through which the shank C. 
passes, and is secured to the same. (See Fig. 
2.) The cogs or teeth of the pinion mesh with 
the cogs or teeth of the idler, and the cogs or 
teeth of the idler mesh with the cogs or teeth. So 
of the cap-ring. 
D indicates the retaining-plate, made of 
suitable size and thickness of metal and pro 
vided with a hole in the center of suitable 
size to receive the mandrel A; also, with three 85 
holes of suitable size to receive the necessary 
screws to fasten the same to end of the han 
dle. 
H indicates the handle, made of suitable 
material and of suitable shape and size to be 90 
conveniently held in the hand, and is provided 
with a suitable hole to receive the shank a, 
which revolves loosely therein. 
To put the whole together, first put the 
shank C. of the mandrel in the handle, the pin- 95 
ion f resting on the end of the handle, then put 
the cap-ring Cin place, then put idlere between 
the pinion and cap-ring, put the retaining 
plate on, and put the screwsd in their places, 
one of which passes through the idler and Ioo 
2 
546,031 
holdsitin place. The retaining-plate holds the 
cap-ring, idler, and pinion in their respective 
places, after which the clamp B is put in 
place and held in place by means of the pivot 
pin d. 
Having described the several parts compos 
ing my invention, I will indicate the mode of 
operating the same. Take the handle of the 
curler in either hand you may desire, put 
your thumb on the rear end of clamp B at b, 
and press down on the same sufficient to raise 
the front end of the clamp, and then place 
the end of the hair between the clamp and 
mandrel, remove the thumb, which will let 
the clamp down on the hair, then place your 
thumb on one of the Wings c, and rotate the 
same either way you may desire, and so on 
until you have rolled up the hair as far as 
desired, and then press gently on the clamp, as 
O 
5 
before, which will loosen the clamp so the 2 o 
hair can be removed. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
A curling iron comprising a mandrel with 
a clamp pivoted thereto, provided with a 
Spring, said mandrel provided, with a shank 
on which is secured a pinion, said shank be 
ing inserted in a handle, the pinion on said 
shank engaging an idler, which in turn en 
gages, With the cogs of an operating cap-like 
ring, and all being held in place by a retain 
ing plate, Secured to the end of the handle by 
screws, substantially as described for the pur 
poses set forth in the specification. 
25 
JOHN D. SCHOONMAKER. 
Witnesses: 
R. B. STILES, 
B. SCHOONMAKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546131.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 546,131. 
 
W. C. DOWNWARD. 
GAS REGULATOR, 
Patented Sept. 10, 1895. 
A. 
 
269 
s 
a. 
S. S 
3. 
 
 
22 
NE 
NE EN 
, W . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
% 
 
 
 
 
  
 
% N: 
2 3 N&S 
  
 
 
  
 
(JNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. DOWNWARD, OF WILMINGTON, DELAWARE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO ALFRED DOWNWARD, OF SAME PLACE. 
GAS - REGULATOR. 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 546,131 dated September 10, 1895. 
Application filed July 13, 1895. Serial No. 555,876, (No model.) 
O 
25 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. Dow N 
WARD, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Wilmington, in the county of New Castle 
and State of Delaware, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Gas-Regu 
lators; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in gas-regulators, the purpose of which is to 
regulate or govern the supply of gas under 
pressure. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
construction which will afford great steadi 
ness in the action of the valve, whereby a 
uniform pressure of gas is attained through 
out the entire system and one which will 
automatically shut off the gas when the press 
lure becomes too great. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts as hereinafter fully 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a central verti 
cal section of my improved device, and Figs. 
2, 3, and 4 are detail views of parts of the 
Sale. 
Referring to the drawings, the numeral. 1 
represents the casing which is secured to the 
end of the supply-pipe or gas-main 2 and has 
its upper end flared or enlarged, as shown at 
3. Rising within the casing is a tube 5, which 
is Secured in the lower end of the same and 
terminates just below an internal annular 
flange 4 of the casing. The external diame 
ter of the tube is less than the internal di 
a meter of the casing, so that a chamber 6 is 
provided for the free circulation of gas from 
the tube through the outlet-pipe 7, extending 
from the side of the casing below the flange 
4 and the end of the tube 5. A pipe or noz 
zle 8 is Screwed into the opening in the flange 
4, and its upper end projects into the flared 
portion of the casing. Within the flared por 
tion of the casing is a reservoir-float 10, the 
To prevent the mercury entering the pipe 6o 
upper end of which extends over the end of 
the nozzle and the lower end of which is open 
and contracted and extends downward be 
tween the tube and the casing. Mercury or 
its equivalent is poured in the chamber 55 
formed around the lower end of the pipe S, 
as clearly shown at 11, and forms a liquid seal 
around the lower end of the float, providing 
an absolutely air-tight joint. 
8 in case the regulator should receive a shock 
or jar, I provide an annular guard or shield 
12 around the upper end of the pipe, which 
will retain the liquid in place under such cir 
cumstances. An internal annular shoulder 55 
is formed at the upper end of the easing and 
is designed to accolin modate a ring or support 
13, to which I secure the upwardly-projecting 
arms or supports 14, the upper ends of which 
are secured to the upper edge of a cup 15, 7 o 
provided with a hollow central cone-shaped 
boss 16. An annular cork float 17, about the 
same shape and somewhat smaller than the 
cup, is seated within the cup and floats in the 
mercury 18, placed therein, as shown. A 75 
cross-head 19 is secured to the upper side of 
the cork float and has a central perforation, 
through which a valve-rod 20 is passed. The 
rod is screw-threaded, as at 21, and nuts 22 
are placed one above and one below the cross- 8o 
head to adjustably secure the float on the 
rod. The rod passes downward through the 
cone-shaped boss 16, the float 10, and the 
tubes 8 and 5, and is secured to the said float 
10 by nuts 23, one above and one below the 85 
top of the same. To the lower end of the rod 
is secured a ball-valve 24 by adjusting-nuts 
25, which is adapted to fit against the lower 
end of the tube 5 and close the same in the 
operation of the device. A dome or cover 26 9c 
is placed over the upper portion of the regula 
tor and is provided with slots or notches 27, 
adapted to fit over lugs 28 on the sides of the 
casing, and thereby hold the cover in posi 
tion. 
The operation of the device will be readily 
understood. Under normal conditions the 
gas passes from the main or supply pipe up 
through the pipe 5 and thence out through 
the outlet-pipe to the burners; but should the roo 
95 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
SO 
55 
valve rod, and means for retaining the valve 
rod centrally within the gas regulator. 
3. In a gas regulator, the casing having an 
annular fange at its lower end, and an inner 
annular flange about midway its length, a 
receiving chamber between said flanges, an 
outlet in the side of the casing, a pipe pro 
jecting upwardly from the lower flange, a 
pipe projecting upwardly from the upper 
flange and provided at its upper end with a 
concave guard, said pipe and guard fitting 
within a gas reservoir float, the lower portion 
of which is seated on the upper flange and 
surrounded by a liquid seal, and a valve rod 
adjustably sectured to the reservoir float alad 
having a valve at its lower end, and means 
for retaining the valve rod centrally within 
the regulator when operated by the pressure 
of gas. 
4. The combination of the casing having an 
internal annular flange at its upper end, Sup 
porting arms resting on and rising from said 
flange, a cup Secured to the upper ends of the 
said arms, a guiding float in said Cup, a rod 
secured to and depending from said guiding 
float, and provided at its lower end with a 
valve adapted to close the inlet to the casing, 
and a reservoir float adjustably secured to 
an intermediate point of said rod. 
5. In a gas regulator the combination with 
a casing having upper and lower chambers, a 
pipe projecting into the lower chamber, an 
outlet pipe, a pipe projecting upwardly from 
an annular flange midway the casing into 
the upper chamber and having an annular 
concavo-convex guard near its upper end, 
said pipe fitting within a gas reservoir float, 
a valve rod having a valve at its lower end, 
the reservoir float adjustably secured to sail 
rod and a governor float secured to the upper 
end of said rod and floating a cup supported 
by braces projecting from an annular shoul 
der at the upper end of the casing. 
. In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAMI C, DOWNWARD. 
7 O 
7 5 
So 
90 
2 
546,131 
supply be too great, and thus create a back 
pressure, the reservoir-float will be forced up 
ward and with it the valve-rod, bringing the 
valve against the seat 29 and cutting off the 
flow of gas until the pressure is reduced to 
the proper point. As the pressure is reduced, 
the reservoir-float returns to its former posi 
tion. 
Heretofore great difficulty has been expe 
rienced in arranging a gas-regulator wherein 
By hav 
the Valve-rod is free from friction. 
ing the upper end of the rod secured to a 
governor-float, as described, I am enabled to 
provide a device, which reduces the friction 
to the lowest possible degree, and at the same 
time. I provide a construction which will re 
fain the working parts directly in alignment. 
It will be seen that I have provided a gas 
regulator which is very inexpensive and sim 
ple in its construction and one that is not lia 
ble to get out of order. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a gas regulator, the combination of a 
Substantially cylindrical casing having a re 
ceiving chamber in its lower portion provided 
with an outlet on its side, internal annular 
flanges at the upper and lower ends of the 
receiving chamber, a pipe rising from the 
lower flange within the receiving chamber 
and extending beyond the outlet, a pipe ris 
sing from the upper flange, a valve stem pass 
ing through the said pipes and provided at 
its lower end with a valve adapted to close 
the lower end of the lower pipe, and a float 
adjustably Secured to the valve stem, extend 
ing over the upper end of the upper pipe and 
having its lower end immersed in a liquid 
Seal between the said pipe and the casing. 
2. In a gas regulator, having upper and 
lower chambers, the upper chamber accom 
modating the gas reservoir or float and being 
provided with a liquid seal around the lower 
end of the float, a pipe projecting from the 
lower to the upper chamber a guard secured 
around said pipe just below its upper end, 
said pipe and guard fitting within the gas 
reservoir or float, the float secured to the 
IO 
IS 
2. 
25 s 
35 
45 
 
Witnesses: 
J. JACKSON PEIRCE, 
GEO. B. MICCLEES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546231.txt	(No Model.) H. FRONEFIELD & S. K. &. J. F. MAXWELL. 
No. 546,231. 
I,00KING STAND FOR UMBRELLAS. 
Patented Sept. 10, 1896. 
   
 
 
Khy. 
s i. gy" 
77 h 
a 
It EEE still Hill, 
Lit if 72 
1 
: 
r 
* 
fif 
IEEE 
St: 
-:A 
O 
---> a. a. a- - - - - - 
a 
1. 
 
I, 
A 
9, Azeez.22% 
lossos, N.Y. Togo. a 
: 
x 
: 
SN 
ES 
N 
NASCANaeesh Si 
3. 
KW 
Al 
FIS 
26aos. Suawek 
8 
: 
 
Rey E.G.Raam.photo-th.washington. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HORACE FRONEFIELD, OF CLIFTON, PENNSYLVANIA, AND STACY K. MAX 
WELL AND JOSEPH. F. MAXWELL, OF MERCHANT WILLE, NEW TERSEY; 
SAID STACY R. MAXWELL ASSIGNOR TO SAID FRONE FIELD. 
O CK N G a STAND FOR U / BR SAS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 546,281, dated September 10, 1895. 
Application filed September 22, 1894, serial No. 523,845, (No model.) 
Figure 
To cold, twf.on, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, HORACE FRONEFIELD, 
residing at Clifton, in the county of Dela 
Ware, State of Pennsylvania, and STACY K. 
MAXWELL and JOSEPH. F. MAXWELL, resid 
ing at Merchantville, in the county of Cam 
den, State of New Jersey, citizens of the 
United States, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Locking-Stands for Um 
brellas, Canes, &c., which improvement is 
fully Set forth in the following specification 
and accompanying drawings. 
Our invention consists of improvements in 
locking-stands for umbrellas, canes, &c., the 
novel features of which will be hereinafter set 
forth, and pointed out in the claims. 
represents a side elevation of a 
locking-stand for an umbrella, cane, &c., em 
bodying our invention. Fig. 2 represents a 
plan view of the same. Figs. 3 and 4 repre 
sent plan views of detached portions. Fig. 5 
represents a section on line a ac, Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
drip-pan, and B designates a standard pro 
vided with feet placed in said pan. C desig 
nates a horizontally-arranged spider or frame 
secured to the lower portion of said stand B 
and having the eyes or rings D formed on the 
outer end of radiating arms thereof. Edes 
ignates a frame or spider which is secured to 
the upper portion of said standard B, the con 
struction of which is best seen in Fig. 2, said 
frame consisting of the central portion F and 
the radial arms G, at the ends of which are 
the segmental or other shaped faces II, which 
are joined by the pieces J, which, with said 
faces H, form a rim for said spider E, it being 
noticed that said faces H are over the rings 
D of the spider C. 
IX designates shackles which are pivotally 
attached to the rim of the frame E, and adapt 
ed to close the faces H, they being provided 
with holes L for the reception of suitable 
keys for the operation of the locks L', a form 
of one of which is shown in Fig. 5; but it is 
desired to construct the locks or keyholes in 
Such manner that when the keys are operated 
to unlock the shackles they cannot be with 
drawn, whereby loss of the same is prevented, 
- 
the keys thus acting as handles for conven 
iently opening said shackles. 
M. designates a plate which is secured to 
the standard B. above the spider E and pro 
vided with the guards N, which are in align 
ment with handles of umbrellas, canes, &c., 
when the latter are in position on the Stand, 
as shown at P and Q, Fig. 1. 
The operation is as follows: When an um 
brella, or cane is to be placed on the stand, the 
key of the desired shackle is operated so as 
to unlock the same, and said umbrella or cane 
may then be inserted in the proper ring D of 
the spider C and rested against the corre 
sponding face II, the handle being under the 
guard N. The shackle is then closed and 
locked and the owner of the umbrella, or cane 
removes the key, it being evident that the 
article is reliably held on the stand in locked 
condition at both its ferrule and handle ends 
and prevented from being abstracted. When, 
however, the key is again inserted and oper 
ated, the shackle may be unlocked and opened, 
whereby the article is free to be removed from 
the stand. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to Secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A locking stand for umbrellas, consist 
ing of a central standard, a lower spider Se 
cured thereon having rings on its periphery, 
an upper spider with pivoted shackles having 
openings for keys, and a plate with guards 
above said shackles, said parts being con 
bined substantially as described. 
2. The standard B, the bottom spider C, and 
the upper spider E with the locking shackles 
K thereon, in combination with the station 
ary top plate Y, said spiders and plate being 
parallel and secured centrally to said stand 
ard, said plate having the peripheral guards 
N and said shackles having key holes therein 
receiving keys as handles for moving the 
shackles in opposite directions, substantially 
as described. 
. 
HORACE FRONEFIELD. 
STACY R. MAXWELL. 
JOSEPH F. MAXWELL. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEM, 
R. H. GRAESER, 
55 
6 5. 
75 
85 
95 
O 
25 
35 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546331.txt	(No Model.) G. A. JOHNSTON & H. M. CARR0LL, 
No. 546,331. 
ARTIFICIAL TEETH 
Patented Sept. 17, 1895. 
pierpi s 
Geoze/Z/62/272.2072. 
76.5%z/2Z.O2772 
37627A ffarpeys. 
(262-56. 
Airesses 
&6.4% 
(2 37% a 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. JOHNSTON AND HOUSTON M. CARROLL OF SAN ANTONIO, 
TEXAS. 
ARTIFICIAL TEETH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 546,331, dated September 17, 1895. 
Application filed June 4, 1895, Serial No, 661638, (No model.) 
So 
55 
65 
o 
75 
To all, whom it may concern 
Be it known that we, GEORGE A. JoHNSTON 
and HOUSTON M. CARROLL, citizens of the 
United States, residing at San Antonio, in the 
county of Bexar and State of Texas, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Ar 
tificial Teeth, of which the following is a speci. 
fication. 
This invention relates to artificial dentures, 
and particularly to lower sets, and aims to 
provide retainers and combine them with the 
plate, so as to hold the denture in place 
against accidental displacement during the 
process of articulation, prehension, mastica 
tion, and deglutition. 
Dentures of this character have been pro 
vided with clasps to engage with the jaws, the 
alveolar process, or gums, and have been 
found objectionable because of the discomfort 
attendant upon their wearing and because the 
clasps do not give satisfactory results, 
The present invention provides retainers 
which fill a vacuum in the mouth never here 
tofore utilized in the construction of artificial 
teeth and which form a rest for the muscles 
in their contraction incident to the movements 
of the jaws, and these retainers render a lower 
set of artificial teeth as comfortable and serv 
iceable as if they were natural. 
The improvement consists of the novel fea 
tures which hereinafter will be more fully set 
forth and claimed, and which are shown in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a lower 
set of artificial teeth, showing the application 
of the invention. Fig. 2 is a side elevation, 
and Fig. 3 a rear view thereof. Fig. 4 is a de 
tail view of a retainer, . Figs. 5 and 6 show, 
respectively, the obverse and reverse sides of 
a modified form of retainer. 
The numerall designates a plate for a lower 
set of artificial teeth, and 2 the teeth attached 
thereto, and this plate 1 may be of any desired 
pattern common in the construction of lower 
dentures. 
The retainers 3 may be made of any suit 
able material, either metal or a plastic com 
position, and are separate and independent 
of the plate and are attached thereto in any 
convenient manner, and may be attached to 
either side of the plate, according to the con 
These retainers com-- 
venience of the wearer. 
prise a curved shank portion 4, by means of 
which the retainers are attached to the plate, 
and an expanded portion 5, the latter curv 
ing upwardly and outwardly and convexed 
on the side designed to come opposite to the 
cheek. The expanded portion 5 is concaved 
on its inner side to conform to the convexity 
of the outer side, thereby attaining a light 
structure, and this expanded portion 5 is par 
tially twisted at 6 and inclines outwardly and 
sets at an angle to the shank 4, so as to con 
form to the shape of the mouth and secure 
ease and comfort to the wearer. When the 
retainers are properly positioned, the ex 
panded portions 5 project vertically from the 
rear ends of the plate and serve to secure the 
latter in position and prevent tipping and 
loosening thereof during the several move 
ments of the jaws. 
The retainer may be wide at the point of 
juncture of the upwardly-extending portion 
5 with the shank 4, as shown most clearly in 
Figs. 2 and 4, or the said juncture may be 
contracted to form a comparatively small 
neck portion, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6, the 
latter construction being preferred in some 
instances. In every case the expanded por 
tion 5 will be concavo-convex, so as to attain 
the best possible results in the accurate and 
proper fitting of the denture within the mouth. 
The invention is readily adapted for dent 
ures now in use, as well as those to be con 
structed, and in adapting the same to the par 
ticular requirement it is to be understood 
that changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction may be resorted 
to without departing from the principle or 
sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
vention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. In an artificial denture, a lower plate have 
ing retainers extending vertically from its in 
ner or rear ends, and above the plane of the 
biting edge of the teeth substantially as de 
scribed for the purpose set forth. 
95 
o 
25 
35 
45 
 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures to 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
GEORGEA. JOHNSTON. 
HOUSTON M. CARROLL. 
Witnesses: 
J.E. TAYLOR, 
CLAUDE WRIGHT. 
546,331 
; 
: 
: 
: 
" 
2. The combination with a lower set of arti 
ficial teeth, of retainers having curved shank 
portions which are attached to the inner ends 
of the plate, and having expanded portions 
which extend vertically and are concavo-con 
vex, said expanded portions standing at op 
posite angles, substantially as set forth for 
the purpose described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546432.txt	C. H. PRUST & J. WAT KINS, 
ANNEALING FURN ACE. 
Patented Sept. 17, 1895, 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 546,432, 
 
928)ibviossos 
26%. 4-4- 
w 7.afzeze 
-6% 46.224 
2-ee-72z-a/ 
'eeega?, 
. . 
 
(No Model.) 
C, H, PRUST & J. WAT KINS, 
ANNEALING FURNACE, 
No. 546,432, 
Patented Sept, 17, 1895, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
 
 
 
R 
--arror 
2% 
2 
212ANS4 a 
G2.642 
2NZ 
N % 
3 N 
N62, 
* - % 
% N- = 
NW, 
%, NNN 
NN 
N2 
NN 
SNS 
%. 
N % g 
% N 
NNN 
SN 
% 
% 
SNS 
SiN 
in N % 
% N. 
NS 
NS 
NN 
N2 
ENNN 
2 N 
9Ns. SNS 
NSN see:N39 
is 
E.T. E.W. 
B SSSSSS 
142 
Tr 
% 
F. 
22 
& 
2 
22 
% 
%Z% 
lot. It 
W 
2 
a 
EE 
REE 22 
"...H., 
A 
E 
Y 
E 
 
- 
C 
2NNNNNNNNSNSNNNNNNNNNSNSYNNS 
NYSSRNRNRSSRYNXSYSSESSORSSNYSSRNSSAYS 
NNN 
s S N 
K 
E. 
O 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
7 
 
2 
ENSNS 
y 
a 
 
 
 
928), two-yoos 
A2.5 
21 
c 4-(Z-4- 
2yeeega. 
 
1, Z - ZZ 
N N 
N| |||| 
| 
N 
, NOENSE ( 
`S 
N. S. 
NNNN SE 
N 
% 
N N N 
NA 
N N N`T`` NT " | 
No. | || ||||||| 
| S 
"||| || || S ||||||, & | 
 | || 
N N 
SN   N N 
}}||||||| 
||||||| 
| || 
(No Model.) 
- 
C. H. PRUST & J. WAT KINS, 
ANNEALING FURNACE, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 546,432, 
Patented Sept. 17, 1895 
NN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. PRUST AND JAMES WATKINS, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
ANNEALING-FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 546,432, dated September 17, 1895. 
Application filed February 27, 1895, Serial No. 539,852, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that we, CHARLES H. PRUST 
and JAMES WATKTNS, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Columbus, in the county 
of Franklin and State of Ohio, have invented 
a certain new and useful Improvementin An 
nealing-Furnaces, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Our invention relates to the improvement 
of annealing-furnaces, and has particular re 
lation to that class of furnaces designed for 
the production of malleable iron castings. 
The objects of our invention are to provide 
an improved furnace of this class of superior 
construction and arrangement of parts; to 
provide improved means for producing a uni 
form distribution of heat throughout the in 
terior of the furnace; to provide improve 
ments in the arrangement and construction 
of the furnace-flues, and to produce other im 
provements which will be more fully pointed 
out hereinafter. These objects we accom. 
plish in the manner illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of our im 
proved furnace. Fig. 2 is a central vertical 
transverse section of the same. Fig. 8 is a 
central vertical longitudinal section, and Fig. 
4 is a longitudinal sectional view taken on 
line acac of Fig. 1. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several views. 
In the construction of our improved fur 
nace We provide the same with a suitable 
foundation or base a. From the foundation 
a rise the side walls a, the upper sides of the 
latter being connected by an arched roof a. 
a represents the rear end wall, in which 
are provided the usual fire-box feed-openings 
a' and ash-pit openings a. 
Within the furnace-body and at a desira 
ble distance from the rear end thereof we 
provide a transverse vertical bridge-wall b, 
the latter rising to within a short distance of 
the furnace top or roofing and having its upper 
side, preferably, slightly arched, as indicated 
in Fig. 2 of the drawings, to conform to the 
arch of the roof a. 
Between the bridge-wall and rear end wall 
care provided a horizontally-arranged grate 
bar frame b', the latter extending, as shown, 
throughout the width of the interior of the 
furnace and resulting in the formation of a 
fire-box babove and an ash-pit to below the 
Sale, 
In the upper portion of the furnace-base a 
are provided parallel flue-walls or partial 
partitions c, which extend alternately from 
the front of the furnace and bridge-wall. 
The flue-walls c, which extend from and are 
connected with the front of the furnace, ter 
minate a short distance from the bridge-Wall, 
while the remaining flue-walls c, which ex 
tend forward from the bridge-wall, terminate 
a short distance from said furnace front, thus 
resulting in the formation of parallel flues c', 
which are connected alternately at their for 
ward and rear ends. 
As indicated in Fig. 4 of the drawings, the 
two central flue-walls, which are indicated at 
c, are preferably both connected with the 
furnace front, thus forming a central flue c. 
with which the ?lues c' on either side thereof 
connect at their inner ends. From this cen 
tral flue c. may lead outward through a suit 
able opening c' a conduit to a smokestack. 
Upon the flue-walls c care supported a floor 
ing consisting of flat tiles d, the flooring thus 
formed serving to cover the base-flue open 
ings c' c. Upon this tile-flooring d are sup 
ported, as indicated, transverse parallel rows 
of bricks or blocks d", resulting in the forma 
tion between the same of transverse parallel 
flues or channels d. Upon the upper sides 
of these bricks or blocks d and extending at 
right angles there with are supported two hol 
low walls e, which are arranged respectively 
on opposite sides of the center of the width 
of the furnace-body and which extend up 
Ward to meet the roof-arch, as indicated more 
clearly in Fig. 2 of the drawings. These walls 
e serve, as indicated in the drawings, to sep 
arate the space within the furnace and above 
the tile-flooring into longitudinally-arranged 
compartments f. The two outer side compart 
ments foommunicate at their upper ends with 
the upper open ends of vertical side wall 
flues f', which are formed on the inner sides 
of the side walls a, and which at their lower 
ends communicate with the ends of the chan 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
5 
9 O 
95 
Od 
2 
546,432 
 
nels or flues d. These side wall ?lues f' also 
have their lower end portions communicating 
at intervals with the outer side bottom flues 
'c' by means of ports or conduits g, which are 
formed in the side Walls. 
On the inner sides of the hollow walls e and 
at a short distance from the latter we provide 
vertical lining-walls h, which, as shown in the 
drawings, preferably terminate below the line, 
of the bridge-wall top. The upper sides of 
these walls h are connected by a suitable cow 
ering h, which, as indicated in the drawings, 
may consist of tiling-plates arranged to meet 
over the center of the central compartment 
f. Above this cover 7 and at a distance 
therefrom is supported a similar cover h. 
Between the cover portions h and hand be 
tween the vertical lining-walls h, and the in. 
ner sides of the hollow walls e we provide a 
packing or filling of iron ore or similar ma 
terial. In this manner the central compart 
ment f is provided with a secondary or inter 
nal compartment.f. At the rear end of this 
internal compartmentif we provide a verti 
cal end wallf, between which and the inner 
surface of the bridge-wall is provided a suit 
able packing f. The forward end portion of 
this internal compartment f is also provided 
with a vertical end wall f, between which 
and the front furnace-walls is provided a hol 
low wall resulting in the formation of a ver 
tical fluef, which extends upward to the top 
of the furnace. The lower end of this fluef 
communicates with flue-openings g formed 
in the forward end wall and the lower ends 
of which communicate with the base-flues c' 
c. The upper portion of the fluef commu 
nicates through suitable openings f1 with the 
upper portions of the compartments f. Be 
tween the inner wall of the fluef and the 
wall fisprovided a suitable packingfio. The 
wallf and the hollow wall forming the flue 
f' and packing fare, however, of a tempo 
rary nature-that is, said walls and packing 
are only employed during the heating or an 
nealing process and are removed to gain ac 
cess to the compartments which they cover. 
Above the cover-plates h the inner section 
of each of the side walls e is provided with 
ports c, which communicate with the hollow 
of Said Walls. In operation the heat rises 
from the fire-box b, and, following the direc 
tion of the arrows, passes over the top of the 
bridge-Wali b and thence into the compart 
ments f. From the upper portion of the cen 
tral compartments f the heat passes through 
the ports le, down through the hollows of the 
walls e, thence into the channels d, from which 
the heat may rise within said compartments 
f, or, passing through the side flues g and end 
fluef', be drawn downward into the flues c 
c', from which the Smoke and other products 
of combustion may escape to the stack through 
the opening c'. 
From the operation and construction which 
We have described it will be seen that a thor 
ough and uniform circulation of heat will be 
attained throughout the various compart 
ments and that a substantially equal distri 
bution of heat is obtained both in the upper 
and lower portions of the furnace. 
It is evident that the internal compartment 
formed by the use of the lining-walls l and 
cover-plates h' will serve as a safe repository 
for such castings as are readily affected by a 
direct heat and that the packing or lining 
which is contained about the walls of Said 
compartments will operate to prevent a direct 
heat being imparted to the contents of the 
same. It is evident that the outer compart 
ments.fmay be employed for the support of 
such articles as are adapted to withstand a 
direct or intense heat. In the use of these 
outer compartments f we do away with the em 
ployment of pots or other receptacles for the 
support and proper separation of the castings 
to be annealed and support said castings in 
an ore or similar packing placed directly 
within the compartments. 
By causing the fire-box to extend completely 
across one end of the furnace-body, as herein. 
shown, it will be seen that the various coma 
partments of said furnace will be supplied 
with heat directly over the bridge-wall. It 
will be observed that our improved furnace is 
of simple, substantial, and reliable construc 
tion. 
Having now fully described our invention, 
what we claim, and desire to Secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an annealing furnace the combination 
with the base, external Walls and cover, a fire 
space extending across one end of said fur 
nace and a bridge wall in front of said fire 
space, of communicating heat circulating flues 
arranged in the furnace base, two or more 
compartments formed within said furnace, 
the upper portions of said compartments com 
municating with the fire box over the bridge 
wall, the lower portions of said compartments 
communicating with each other and a com 
munication between said compartments and 
the circulating flues, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
2. In an annealing furnace the combination 
With the base, external Walls and cover, a fire 
space and a bridge wall in front of said fire 
Space, of transverse channels or ways d ar. 
ranged as described on the floor of the fur 
nace and compartments within said furnace 
Supported above said channels and communi 
cating there with, said compartments being 
Separated by hollow walls and communicat 
ing with the fire space in their upper portions 
and with each other through said fire chan 
nels in their lower portions, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
3. In an annealing furnace the combination 
With the base, external walls, a cover and fire 
Space, a bridge Wall in front of the same and 
5 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
O 
75 
90 
iod 
I 25 
546,432 
3 
heat flues arranged in said base, of ways or between said compartments and base flues, 
channels diformed above said base heatflues, substantially as and for the purpose specified. Io 
compartments arranged above said channels 
and at right angles therewith as described, 
one of said compartments having hollow side 
walls and internal side and end lining walls 
inclosing a packing and a communication be- 
tween said fire space and compartments and 
CHARLES H. KRAMER, 
C. M. WooRHEES. 
In presence of - 
- SEERAERS ST. 
x 
& 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546532.txt	(No Model.) 
J. D. HEMPHILL, 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING KNITTED FABRICS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 546,532, 
Patented Sept. 17, 1895, 
N 
SY 
R 
7ze-zel 
 
(No Model.) 
J. D. HEMPHILL. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING KNITTED FABRICS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 546,532, 
 
Patented Sept. 17, 1895. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING KNITTED FABRIOS, 
No. 546,532, 
Patented Sept. 17, 1895. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSHUA. D. HEMPHILL OF SHIELTON, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO GEORGE 
H. RADCLIFFE, OF DERBY, CONNECTICUT. 
MACHINE FoR cutting KNITTED FABRICs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 546,582, dated September 17, 1895. 
Application filed April 22, 1895. Serial No. 546,671. (No model) 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
. 
to all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JoSHUAD. HEMPHILL, 
of Shelton, in the county of Fairfield and 
State of Connecticut, have invented a new 
ImprovementinMachinesfor Cutting Knitted 
Fabrics; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing, when taken in connection with the accom 
panying drawings and the letters of reference 
marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same, and which said draw 
ings constitute part of this specification, and 
- 
represent, in- 
Figure 1, a plan view of a machine con 
structed in accordance with my invention; 
Fig. 2, a side view thereof; Fig. 3, a view of 
the machine in vertical transverse section on 
the line a b of Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a similar view 
on the line c d of the same figure; Fig. 5, a 
detached plan view of the work-table, show 
ing the lateral adjustable horizontal guide 
plates mounted thereupon. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
machines for cutting knitted fabric, and is 
particularly designed for cutting up the ma 
terial from which collars and cuffs for under. 
Wear are made, the object being to produce 
a simple, conveniently-operated, and effect 
ive device. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in a machine having certain details of 
construction and combinations of parts, as 
will be hereinafter described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In carrying out my invention I employ two 
disk-shaped cutters A and B, located, one 
above the other, and respectively above and 
below the horizontal work-table C, which is 
constructed with a longitudinally-arranged 
elongated clearance - opening C, through 
which the lower cutter B extends upward 
into position to overlap and bear against the 
flat face of the upper cutter A. The said 
upper cutter A is rigidly secured by bolts a 
to a grooved pulley D, while the lower cutter 
B is secured by bolts b to a grooved pulley 
E. The said pulleys D and Ereceive a round 
belt F, driven from a driving-pulley F, lo 
cated at the rear end of the machine. The 
Said belt also passes over an idle pulley F, 
w 
located in rear of the work-table C, but for 
ward of the pulley F, and by the use of which 
I am enabled to drive the cutting-edges of 
both of the cutters in the same direction from 
a single belt, but they may be driven inde 
pendently by separate belts, if preferred. 
The pulley D is constructed with a long hub 
D', and journaled upon the outer end of a 
horizontally-arranged stud G, mounted to 
ward the forward end of the long horizontal 
arm H of the machine-frame H', the said arm 
being arranged longitudinally with the length 
of the machine-frame, and extending longi 
tudinally over the work-table, very slightly 
to one side of the center thereof. The said 
stud is constructed with a squared head G', 
preventing it from turning, and located in a 
vertically-arranged slot H, formed in the arm 
H, the said head being vertically adjustable 
within the length of the said slot for the pur 
pose of raising and lowering the stud, and 
hence the upper cutter A. The said stud is 
also constructed with an annular shoulder 
G, which bears upon the inner face of the 
arm, against which it is drawn by means of 
a nut G, applied to the threaded inner end of 
the stud, and bearing against the outer face of 
the arm, as clearly shown in Fig. 3. The flat 
face of the cutter A bears against the outer 
face of the shoulder G, and the cutter A and 
the pulley D are maintained in place upon 
the stud by means of a washer G', bearing 
against the outer end of the stud and the 
outer end of the hub D', and secured by 
means of a screw G passing through the 
washer into the said end of the stud. The 
pulley E is constructed with a long hub E', and 
journaled upon a horizontal stud I, mounted in 
one of the two posts C, which support the work 
table C, the other not being shown. The said 
stud is constructed at itsinner end with an an 
nular shoulder I bearing against the said post 
C and drawn against the same by means of a 
nut I, applied to its extreme inner end, which 
is threaded. The edge of the cutter Bispressed 
yieldingly against the edge of the cutter A, 
by means of a spring J, mounted in a head or 
block J', applied to the outer end of the hub 
E' of the pulley E, which carries the said cut 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
o 
75 
go 
95 
2 
546,532 
15 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
ter B. The block J is secured to the outer greatly assist in the convenient and speedy 
end of the stud by means of a screw J, and, 
feeding thereof; but when the device is em 
as required, adjusted back and forth, so as to 
ployed for cutting up plain knitted goods the 
vary the influence exerted by the spring. I 
guide-plates and guide may be dispensed with, 
do not, however, limit myself to the particul 
for I conceive that the machine may be used 
to excellent advantage in cutting up plain 
lar means shown and described for mounting 
and driving the two cutters. I wish particu 
knitted goods-for instance, in accordance 
larly to point out that by arranging the cut 
with a pattern placed upon them, or in accord 
ters to do their work in the longitudinal plane 
ance with marks drawn or printed on them. 
of the work-table, my device becomes very 
I would have it understood that I do not limit 
convenient in use, inasmuch as the arm Sup 
myself to the exact construction shown and 
porting the upper cutter is then located also 
described, but hold myself at liberty to make 
in the longitudinal plane of the table, and 
such changes and alterations therein as fairly 
does not interfere with the handling of the 
fall within the spirit and scope of my inven 
work. 
tion. 
As herein shown, two laterally-adjustable 
I am aware, however, that a trimming de 
horizontal guide-plates LL are mounted upon 
vice employing two disk-shaped cutters re 
the table, being thereto constructed with elon 
spectively located above and below the work 
gated slots l l receiving screws L' L'. These 
table is old, and that it is old to adjust one 
plates have their inner edges slightly sepa 
of the cutters in such a machine toward and 
rated from each other, and are arranged in 
away from the other, 
line with the opening C' formed in the work 
I am further aware that trimming devices 
table, as clearly shown in Fig. 5, the forward 
have been provided with adjustable guides. 
inner corners of the plates being cut away for 
I do not, therefore, broadly claim any of the 
clearness. The inner edges of these plates co 
constructions referred to. 
operate to form a guideway L. receiving the 
I?aving fully described my invention, what 
ribs of the material commonly made for work 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
ing up into collars and cuffs for underwear, 
Patent, is 
whereby the ribs are utilized in guiding the 
1. In a machine for cutting knitted fabric, 
material in being cut on a line close to the 
the combination with a work-table constructed 
ribs. The machine is also provided with a lat 
with a longitudinally arranged clearance open 
eral and vertically-adjustable vertical guide, 
ing, of two disk-shaped cutters respectively 
consisting of a plate M, having a long for 
located above and below the said table in the 
Wardly-projecting horizontal finger M and a 
longitudinal plane thereof, one of them pass 
rearwardly-projecting finger M. The said 
ing through the said opening and overlapping 
plate is secured by its upper end by screws in 
the other, means extending parallel with the 
in to a circular head M, formed at one end of 
length of the table for driving the cutters to 
a heavy stud M, which is mounted in the ex 
move their cutting edges in the same direc 
treme forward end of the arm H of the ima 
tion, two parallel guides mounted upon the 
chine-frame H'. To permit the plate to be 
table with a space between their inner edges 
vertically adjusted, it is constructed with ver 
to form a guide-way in line with the edges of 
tically-elongated slots n' m', through which 
the cutters, and a vertical guide located above 
the ScreWS in n, before mentioned, pass. A 
the said space, substantially as described, and 
set-screw MP, mounted in the said arm, im 
whereby the work may be fed directly in 
pinges against the stud and holds it in any 
ward away from the operator and with the 
desired position of lateral adjustment in which 
length of the table. 
it may be set. A rib or shoulder M', horizon 
2. In a machine for cutting knitted fabric, 
tally arranged upon the inner face of the 
the combination with the frame thereof pro 
lower end of the vertical plate M, provides for 
vided with a horizontal arm, of a work-table 
the attachment of a leaf N, which co-operates 
mounted upon the said frame below the said 
with the plate M in guiding the fabric, the 
arm, extending parallel with the length thereof 
outer end of the leaf being flared outward, as 
and constructed with a longitudinally ar 
at N. The passage N formed between the 
ranged clearance opening, two disk-shaped 
leaf and plate, as seen in Fig. 6, is located di 
cutters respectively located above and below 
rectly above the guideway L*, formed between 
the said table in the longitudinal planethereof, 
the inner edges of the plates L, forming the 
one of them being mounted in the said arm, 
lateral guides. By providing for the vertical 
and one of them extending through the said 
adjustment of the plate M, I am enabled to 
opening to overlap the other, means located 
shift the same up or down, as may be required, 
in the longitudinal plane of the table and 
by variations in the thickness and the char. 
arm for driving the cutters to move their cut 
acter of the fabric to be operated upon. 
ting edges in the same direction, two later 
When my improved device is used for cut 
ally adjustable guides located upon the table 
ting up ribbed fabric into collars and cuffs 
and having their inner edges separated to 
for underwear, I shall, by preference, employ 
form a guide-way between them in line with 
the lateral plates and the vertical guide, for 
the cutters, and a vertical guide located over 
by engaging with the ribs of such fabric they 
the said guide-way, provided upon its inner 
75 
90 
95 
I oo 
to5 
IO 
IIS 
I 25 
3 
face with a vertically arranged leaf co-operat- 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
ing With it to form a passage for the work, specification in the presence of two subscrib 
and connected with the outer end of the said ing witnesses. 
arm, substantially as described, and whereby 
Witnesses: 
the work may be fed directly inward away 
from the operator and with the length of the 
table. 
FRED C. EARLE, 
LILLIAN ID, KELSEY. 
546,532 
JOSHUA ID. EIEMPHILI. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546632.txt	(No Model.) 
L. WOJIDKOW, 
ALCOHOL LAMP, 
No. 546,632, 
3 
Patented Sept. 17, 1895, 
  
 
  
2S As 
X % 25S2) N 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
SYNN 
s 
 
 
  
 
ATTORNEY, 
 
ANDREW agraham. Photo-utho.wash N6th N.d.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS WOJIDKOW, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
ALCOHOL-LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 546,632, dated September 17, 1895. 
Application filed November 14, 1894, serial No. 528,718, (No model.) 
15 
25 
35 
To all whom it may concern; 
Be it known that I, LOUIS WoJIDKow, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Alcohol-Lamps, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
alcohol-lamps, the object being to provide an 
article of this kind or character the flame or 
heat from which may be regulated at will; and 
with this and other ends in view my inven 
tion consists in certain novel features of con 
struction and combinations of parts, as will 
be hereinafter fully described, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a top plan view of the lamp, the regulator 
being partly opened. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
view of the lamp with the regulator closed. 
Fig. 3 is a similar view with the regulator in 
its open adjustment. Figs. 4 and 5 are de 
tailed views. Fig. 6 is a plan view with the 
regulator closed, a portion thereof being 
broken away to show the regulating mechan 
ism. Fig. 7 is a detail sectional view taken 
on the line 77 of Fig. 1. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
outer shell, made up of the upper section a, 
the lower section b, and the inner vertical 
side c, secured at its lower end to the section 
b, a space d being left between said inner 
side c and the sections a b, as shown in Figs. 
2 and 3. 
B represents the body proper of the lamp, 
to which is secured at a short distance above 
the bottom thereof the plate or side c of the 
outer shell, a space e being left between them 
for conducting the air from the lower end of 
the lamp to and over the flame, as indicated 
by the arrows. Within the body B is con 
tained the hollow cone or receptacle C, the 
lower portion of the latter fitting tightly in 
the bottom of the body and the upper-end or 
portion extending a short distance above the 
top of the body and outer shell. Within the 
body and surrounding the lower half or por 
tion of the cone is also contained a filling or 
packing of asbestos sponge or other material 
f, over which is placed the Wire-gauze g, an 
opening being left in the center of the latter 
for the passage of the neck or upper end of 
7 O 
the cone C, and also to allow of the protru. 
sion of a small portion of the asbestos filling, 
as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, for facilitating the 55 
lighting of the lamp. 
The lower portion of the cone C is adapted 
to contain the alcohol, the upper end of said 
being removable, 
cone forming the cap 
whereby the cone may be filled or partially 
so as easily and readily as in other forms of 
lamps. The lower portion of the cone is pro 
vided with the openings h, through which the 
alcohol passes into the asbestos or other fill 
ingf, the cap being also perforated, as shown 
at k, to allow of the escape of any gas which 
might be generated within the cone. 
Into the upper portion or end of the space e 
is fitted the perforated ring or deflector l, 
which directs the air passing up through the 
flue e into and over the flame. 
To the upper section a of the outer shell is 
secured a bracket m, into and through which 
passes a shaft n, the outer end of which has 
formed or secured thereon a disk or handle 
o, the opposite end of said shaft passing 
through the shell a and bracket p, the latter 
being secured to the inner side of section a, 
as shown in Fig. 6. 
The extreme inner end of the shaft in has 
secured thereon the ratchet-wheel or pinion 
q, meshing or engaging with a similar pinion 
r, pivoted to the inner side of the bracket p. 
To the inner side of the section a and oppo 
site the bracket p is secured another bracket 
p', to which brackets p p' are pivoted the 
two sections D E of the regulator, made in 
the form of sectors of hollow spheres and hav 
ing a portion of their adjacent edges cut 
away, as shown at S, for the purpose of fitting 
around the top or cap of the cone C. 
In the sections D E are formed the slotst, 
into and through which project studs or pro 
jectionst', secured to or formed on the ratchet 
wheels q r. By forming these slots on a slant 
and at an angle with each other it will be 
seen that by turning the handle o', Fig. 1, in 
one direction the studs t t on the ratchet 
wheels q r are carried downwardly, forcing 
the sections D E of the regulator apart and 
carrying them downwardly into the space 
within the outer shell, as shown in Fig. 3. If 
the handle o is turned in the opposite direc 
tion, the sections D E will be raised and 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
45 
SO 
 
546,632 
5 
O 
25 
35 
brought toward each other, as shown in Fig. 
2, thereby completely closing or covering the 
top of the lamp. To further regulate the 
flaume of the lamp, I secure to these sections 
D E the plates at it, preferably made in the 
form shown and of such size that when the 
regulator is entirely opened to give the larg 
est flame said plates will be entirely separated. 
By use of these plates it will be seen that in 
separating the sections DE the opening in 
stead of allowing a narrow or flat frame will 
more nearly approach a circular opening, 
thereby giving a finer adjustment than is pos 
sible with the sections D E alone. 
In order to prevent the regulators from 
dropping or separating by their own weight, 
I place a piece or strip of spring metal w over 
the shaft n, as shown in Figs. 1 and 7, and 
bend the ends thereof over and against the 
lower edges of the bracket in to retain it in po 
sition. This spring by bearing on or against 
the shaft in prevents the shaft from revolving 
and thereby holds the regulators in any de 
sired adjustment. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An alcohol lamp constructed with a body 
proper, a perforated cone, or inner receptacle 
for receiving the alcohol, and a packing of as 
bestos or similar material contained within 
said body, and around said cone, substan 
tially as described. 
2. An alcohol lamp constructed with a body 
proper for containing asbestos, or other ma 
terial, an outer shell surrounding and secured 
to said body proper, and a perforated cone or 
inner receptacle located within said body 
proper for receiving the alcohol, substantially 
as described. 
3. An alcohol lamp constructed of a body 
proper, an outer plate or shell, secured to and 
surrounding said body, leaving an air space 
between them, and a perforated deflector fit 
ting between said plate and body proper and 
extending above and over said body proper, 
for directing the air to the flame, Substantially 
as described. 
4. An alcohol lamp constructed with a body 
proper, containing an inner perforated cone 
or receptacle for receiving the alcohol, and 
having a removable perforated cap extending 
above said body, substantially as described. 
5. An alcohol lamp constructed with a body 
proper for containing asbestos or similar ma 
terial, a perforated cone or receptacle, located 
within and extending above said body, and a 
wire gauze or netting extending over said as 
bestos, and having its center removed for the 
protrusion of said cone, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. An alcohol lamp constructed with a regul 
lator consisting of the sections D, E, having 
secured thereto plates u, u, substantially as 
described. 
7. An alcohol lamp, constructed with a body, 
located within an outer shell, a regulator, a 
shaft, connected with the latter, and passing 
through a bracket attached to said shell, and 
a strip of spring metal bearing on said shaft 
and against said bracket for holding the regu 
lator in its different adjustments, substan 
tially as described. 
8. An alcohol lamp constructed with a body 
proper and containing an inner cone or re 
ceptacle, extending above said body, and a 
regulator adapted to be opened or closed above 
said body, and fitting around the upper end 
of said cone, substantially as described. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 2d day of 
November, A. D. 1894. 
LOUIS WOJIDIKOW. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE COOK, 
JOHN F. FLAGG, Jr. 
55 
65 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546732.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 546,732. 
J. DESSERICH, 
PACKING DEVICE FOR BEER FAUCETs, 
Patented Sept. 24, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
33 hua) atto 
4-4. 
e6 
M. Pict.WASFNGON. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACO B D ESSERICH, OF DEN WER, COLOR ADO. 
PACKING DEVICE FOR BEER-FAUCETs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 546,732, dated September 24, 1895. 
Application fled April 27, 1895, Serial No. 547,407, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JACOB DESSERICH, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Denver, in the county of Arapahoe 
and State of Colorado, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Devices for 
Packing Air-Pipes of Beer-Faucets; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters and figures of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
beer-faucets, and the objects of my invention 
are, first, to provide an improved method of 
packing the air-pipe of the faucet; second, to 
provide a method of packing which admits of 
quick and easy manipulation when changing 
the faucet from one keg to another; third, to 
provide a packing which does not absorb the 
beer, and is therefore free from poisonous 
acids, like the packing at present in use for 
this particular purpose does; fourth, to pro 
vide a packing with a double bearing on the 
air-tube, each bearing of which is indepen 
dent of the other; fifth, to provide an im 
proved packing and gland, having an external 
connection to the faucet which allows it to be 
quickly and easily cleansed, instead of an in 
ternal one, as at present in use. 
I attain these objects by the mechanism 
illustrated and described in the accompany 
ing drawings and specification, in which 
Figure 1 represents an elevation, partially 
in section, of a beer-faucet embodying my im 
proved packing device. Fig. 2 represents a 
plan view of the gland and a spanner-wrench 
adapted to the same. Fig. 3 represents a 
fragment of the faucet and gland and packing 
on a larger scale than that shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 represents two views of my improved 
double independent bearing packing-ring. 
Fig. 5 represents a fragment of a faucet, show 
ing the method at present in use of packing 
the air-pipe. Fig. 6 represents an elevation 
of the curved portion of the air-pipe. 
Similar letters and figures of reference refer 
to similar parts throughout the several views. 
Referring to Fig. 1, A designates the upper 
part of the body of the faucet, B the lower 
part. 
D designates the air-pipe with the extreme 
end broken off. The full curved end, how 
ever, is shown in Fig. 6. The ends of the 
pipe are provided with several small holes 
through which the air escapes. The lower 
part F of the faucet is designated its bung' 
and is adapted to be driven into one end 
of the keg. The air-pipe extends through 
it in a semicircular curve to the upper part 
of the keg, which lies on its side when beer 
is being drawn from it through the faucet 
to above the body of the beer. The faucet 
is hollow to the outlet G, which is controlled 
by the bib H. The top flat portion H" is ex 
tended higher above the outlet G than is usual 
in order that when hammering the bung into 
a keg the mallet will not strike the outlet. 
A projection I is formed on the faucet just 
above the bung, which stands at a suitable 
angle to guide the air-pipe through it. The 
projection is also made hollow to allow ample 
space for the pipe to move into and through 
the bung portion of the faucet. Adjacent to 
the end of the projection the opening through 
it is reduced to but a trifle larger than the 
diameter of the air-pipe. The external por 
tion J of the projection is threaded far enough 
to make a good support for the gland K. The 
top edge of this gland projects beyond its 
body. Through this extending edge are cut 
a radial circle of notches M, which enables 
the operator to hold it firmly while turning 
it by hand and also enables a spanner-Wrench 
L to be applied to it, if necessary from any 
cause to tighten the packing tighter than is 
usually required, such as a short dent or kink 
in the air-pipe at one of the points where the 
packing bears, which might otherwise cause 
a leak. The air-pipes are usually about three 
eighths of an inch in diameter. They are hol 
low, the metal being quite thin, and as they re 
ceive very frequent and rough handling they 
are continually getting nicks, dents, and kinks 
in them. The gland has a hole N through its 
top opening into a larger opening O, which 
extends into it from the opposite end. The 
larger opening is interiorly threaded and fits 
the outside J of the projection. In the par 
tition P of the gland, which is formed by the 
bottom of this opening and the top of the 
95 
OO 
Id 
25 
30 
45 
So 
 
2 
546,782 
gland and also in the top of the projection, I 
counterbore a hole concentric to the hole 
through which the pipe passes in each of 
these pieces, which in form is preferably an 
ellipse or oval. Thus the center of the curve 
Q of the gland and the curve R of the projec 
tion is approximately at a point S, while the 
center of the curves T and U is approxi 
mately at the point S. Consequently the coun 
terbore in the top of the projection and in the 
partition of the gland would have to be cut 
by a tool whose point would have an oval or 
elliptical outline. A semicircular counter 
bored hole can be used; but it requires so 
much more power to turn the gland by hand 
to make a tight joint, as it compresses the 
washer vertically rather than concentrically 
to the axis of the pipe, as the oval and ellip 
tical forms do. Consequently I preferably 
use the first named forms, as with them the 
gland can be tightened by the hand and a 
tight joint secured without the use of a 
wrench, except when the pipe has received 
sharp dents, like W and W' in Fig. G. 
W designates, preferably, a rubber sleeve 
of peculiar form, which constitutes a double 
bearing packing-sleeve. (See Fig. 4.) EX 
ternally it has an elliptical shape. It is pro 
vided with a hole W' through its center, 
adapted to fit freely on the air-pipe. This 
hole is enlarged intermediate of the ends of 
the ring at X in order that the central por 
tion of it may not touch the pipe. It is 
adapted to fit nicely in the oval or elliptical 
counterbores in the projection and gland at 
the ends; but its external central portion has 
no external support until the ends are slightly 
compressed by screwing the gland on the pro 
jection, when it is expanded or thrown out 
at the central portion against the walls of the 
gland. The packing-ring then has three exter 
inal independent bearing-points on the gland 
and projection and two independent internal 
points of bearing on the pipe. Under action 
of the counterbore in the gland and the pro 
jection the packing-ring is compressed tightly 
around the air-pipe at each end, and in a 
plane alumost at right angles to the axis of the 
pipe, while the slight direct compression of 
the ring forces the central portion away from 
the pipe against the walls of the gland, which 
forms an abutment at this point. This allows 
that part of the ring between its bearing 
parts to accommodate the disposition of the 
ring to fold. I am thus enabled to make two 
perfectly-tight independent joints around the 
pipe with one packing-ring. In Fig. 3 the 
packing-ring is shown under pressure. The 
portions intermediate of the center and the 
ends are bulged out and are free from con 
tact of either the gland or the pipe. The 
conditions met with are entirely different 
from those found in packing straight round 
Smooth tubes or rods. It must be remem 
bered that the tubes to be packed are bent in 
a semicircular curve and consequently con 
tinually change their course. They do not lie 
in the glands straight, but always lie eccen 
tric to it and the projections axis, and if par 
tially rotated in either direction while being 
withdrawn or inserted moves in the gland 
with an eccentric motion. Consequently it is 
a difficult thing to pack and keep tight, as 
the packing has to be loosened every time the 
faucet is removed from a keg. When in use 
the faucets are changed daily and Sometimes 
oftener. 
In Fig. 5 I show in section a fragment of a 
faucet and air-pipe as commonly made and 
packed. In this view Y designates the pro 
jection. It is formed with an internal stuff 
ing-box Z, which is internally threaded part 
of its depth. A gland 1, formed with a wrench 
receiving hub 2, is threaded to screw into said 
box. The chamber is packed usually with 
lamp-wicking or similar material. The gland 
must be tightened with a wrench, as it has to 
be screwed in very tight to make the packing 
hug the pipe. It is impossible to keep pack 
ing of this character tight, as the pipe is more 
or less wholly or partially rotated by handling 
it, either in one or the other direction while 
withdrawing and inserting it, which churns 
the packing and loosells and forces it against 
the outer walls of the stu?ling-box. Again, 
the gland has to be unscrewed quite a dis 
tance in order to loosen the packing, so that 
the pipe can be withdrawn. Packing of this 
character is saturated by the beer, which 
sours in it, and the acid formed thereby at 
tacks the copper of the brass and forms a ver 
digris, which mixes with the acids and makes 
a deadly and obnoxious poison, which taints 
the good beer and emits an objectionable 
odor. My improved packing-rings are en 
tirely free from these objections, as they do 
not absorb the beer and can be easily rinsed 
and cleansed. They should be made in molds 
arranged to separate axially in order to prop 
erly mold the enlarged space in the center of 
the hole. 
Consumers having a number of kegs on tap 
at a time are obliged to change the faucets 
frequently, and the utility of the invention to 
them is that it enables the bar-tender to re 
lease the pipe by turning back the gland with 
the fingers in a few seconds. It cannot absorb 
beer or collect verdigris, and consequently 
does not throw off a bad odor. It also makes 
two independent joints on the pipe, which is 
double security against leakage, and the pack 
ing-sleeves seldom have to be replaced. Con 
sequently the device makes a simple, effect 
ive, and durable method of packing the air 
pipes of beer-faucets. 
IHaving described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by JLetters 
Patent, is 
1. A packing device for air pipes of beer 
faucets comprising a projection on the fau 
cet externally threaded at its end, a gland 
threaded to said projection, and a packing 
sleeve comprising a frustum of an elliptical 
sleeve having a hole therein through which 
- 
25 
45 
So 
55 
7 o . 
75 
3. 
9 O 
I o5 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
546,732 
3 
5 
o 
the pipe slides, and an enlarged space in the 
walls of said hole intermediate of the ends of 
the sleeve, whereby the ends of the sleeve are 
compressed by said gland against the pipe and 
the internal central portion is removed from 
contact with it, substantially as described. 
2. A packing device for air pipes of beer 
faucets comprising a projection having its 
end externally threaded, a gland having a 
flanged top provided with a circle of radially . 
disposed recesses therein, an opening through 
the top of Said gland and projection through 
which said air pipe passes, an oval or ellipti 
cal counterbore arranged opposite each other 
in said gland and projection, and a rubber 
packing sleeve fitting said gland and shaped 
to fit said elliptical or oval counterbores in 
i said gland and projection, substantially as 
specified. 
3. A packing device for air pipes of beer 
faucets comprising a projection on the faucet 
externally threaded to receive a gland, a 
gland, having a packing chamber, internally 
threaded thereto, a milled or recessed flanged 
outer end on Said gland adapted to receive a 
spanner wrench and afford a frictional grip 
ping surface for the hand, a hole through 
said gland and projection adapted to receive 
said air pipe, counterbores in the partition of 
said gland and in the top of said projection 
oppositely arranged and preferably of oval 
or elliptical form, a step between the edges 
of the counterbore of the gland and the side 
walls of its packing chamber, and a cylindri 
cal, elliptical shaped rubber sleeve fitting 
Said gland chamber and said counterbores 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
in the gland and projection, a hole through 
said sleeve adapted to said air pipe and a 
circumferential recess in the walls of said 
hole intermediate of the ends of said sleeves, 
whereby the central portion is prevented 
from contacting with said air pipe and the 
ends by manipulation of the gland make two 
independent joints around it, substantially 
as herein described. 
4. The combination in an air pipe packing 
device for beer faucets of a projection cast 
integral with said faucet having its end ex 
ternally threaded, a gland having a packing 
chamber therein threaded thereto, oppositely 
arranged oval or elliptical counterbores con 
Centric to the Openings for the air pipe, and a 
rubber packing sleeve substantially as herein 
described arranged and adapted to bear at 
its external center against the side walls of 
said gland and at the ends in said counter 
bores, and to compress and pack said air pipe 
at two independent points, substantially as 
specified. 
5. In an air pipe packing device for beer 
faucets the combination of the faucet and 
the air pipe, the gland and the rubber pack 
ing having the enlarged space Surrounding 
the air. pipe intermediate of the ends of the 
sleeve, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
m 
JACOB DESSERCII. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES D. MCKENZIE, 
CHAS, T. CALVERT, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546832.txt	( No Model.) 
J. H. STEWENSON, 
CURTAIN SUPPORT, 
No. 546,832, 
Patented Sept. 24, 1895, 
A 
Z/6 
 
& N 
Escale 
- N N. Ne- ASAYSSYSSESS 
Egelese 
-4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
Na 
N 
 
w 
/1277 vesse 
(...) 
Z7/re-2 afoa 
e/o/e-22//7. 57e-real-voa2/ 
Z5 
-ay %3% 
 
Andrew B.GRAHAM.PHoro-LTHowAshingtoc 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. STEVENSON, OF ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO THE ANN 
ARBOR MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CURTAN-SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 546,832, dated September 24, 1895, 
Application filed February 26, 1895, Serial No, 539,808, (No model.) 
Be it known that I, JOHN H. STEVENSON, a by striking up the metal. 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at Ann Arbor, in the county of Wash 
tenaw and State of Michigan, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Cur 
tain-Supports, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying dra Wings. 
The invention consists in the construction 
of a curtain-support, and in particular in the 
construction of a plate or Socket with which 
the bracket on the pole is adapted to be de 
tachably engaged, so that the entire pole may 
be quickly and readily removed. 
The invention further consists in the con 
struction of a pole whereby its manufacture 
is cheapened and simplified, and made so that 
it can be more easily put together or dis 
mounted, all as more fully hereinafter de 
scribed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion of my improved device, showing the 
bracket arranged in line with the pole. Fig. 
2 is a perspective view of one end thereof, 
showing the bracket arranged at right angles 
to the pole. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of 
the bracket-head and pole-section detached, 
illustrating the construction of the connection 
between the pole and head. 
In the prior art curtain-poles and brackets 
therefor have been made in which the pole 
was made in two sections telescoping at their 
meeting ends and detachably engaging with 
end heads, such heads having pivoted thereto 
brackets adapted to be turned in line with or 
at an angle to the heads. In such previous 
constructions, however, the brackets have 
been constructed to be attached directly to the 
woodwork by screws. In order to detach the 
bracketit was necessary to remove the screws. 
My present construction is intended an as 
improvement upon such prior devices. 
The pole I make in two tubular sections A 
A", preferably split tubes, telescopically en 
gaging together at their meeting ends, as 
shown in Fig. 1. At the outer end the tubes 
are provided with the slot B, (shown in Fig. 3) 
and one lip of the tube beside the slot is 
formed with the boss or tooth C, preferably 
D are the heads or end caps for the tube 
Sections, having the tubular socket D at one 
end, in which the Outer ends of the tubes are 
adapted to be engaged. In engaging a tube 
in a socket the end is slightly contracted, 
narrowing the slot B until the boss or tooth 
Centers the aperture E in the socket, in which 
it springs, and thus detachably locks the tube 
in the socket. This lock is sufficient to prop 
erly hold the parts against accidental dis 
placement, but permits the withdrawal of the 
tube by a sharp pull at any time. This con 
nection is cheaply made, is amply secure, and 
yet the parts can be engaged and disengaged 
longitudinally without turning or twisting 
the parts, as in a Screw-thread engagement. 
The head has a split or bifurcation, as shown 
at G, to receive one end of the bracket H, 
Which is preferably an angular piece of sheet 
metal, one artin H' having screw-holes, by 
imeans of which the device may, if desired, be 
secured to the Woodwork. This I deem ob. 
jectional, as the pole (with such construction) 
can only be detached by removing the screws, 
To overcome this objection I form a plate I 
With the flanges J, in which the securing-arm 
of the bracket is adapted to detachably en 
gage. This plate is provided with means for 
permanently securing it in position on the 
Woodwork, such as screws Kpassing through 
Screw-holes in the plate. 
The lips or flanges J are of a length corre 
sponding to the length of the securing-arm of 
the bracket, while the plate has the upper ex 
tension L of corresponding length, which 
gives a finished appearance to the device. It 
is evident that the pole-brackets can be lifted 
out of the sockets or flanges on the plates 
and the plates be left permanently in posi 
tion, if desired; also that the use of the piates 
does not in any Way affect the utility of the 
bracket, With all the advantages which such 
construction has. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a curtain support, the combination 
With the pole and heads thereon, of brackets 
pivotally secured to the head comprising flat 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
2 
546,832 
metal strips of uniform thickness having their 
outer ends bent at right angles, the securing 
plates having parallel edge flanges formed 
with inwardly turned edges and of uniform 
size throughout, substantially as described. 
2. In a curtain support, the combination of 
the telescoping tubular pole section, having 
a slot B at its outer end, the boss C on one 
lip of the slot, the heads, and the tubular 
sockets on the heads, having an aperture E Io 
adapted to receive the boss C, substantially 
as and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN II. STEVENSON. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. BULLIS, 
J. B. BULLIS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US546932.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 546,932 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547032.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 547,032. 
 
J. ROSS. 
FOLDING DECOY. 
Patented 00t, l: 1895. 
  
 
S.2% 
2 
 
Azz/7/2/ 
e/os2/ /7oss. 
ANREW 8.RAAMPiToth. WASINGOM...C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH ROSS, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE TO SETI 
CURLIN, OF SAME PLACE. 
FOONG DECOY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 547,032, dated October 1, 1895. 
Application filed February 6, 1895, Serial No. 537,524 (No model.) 
Io it appertains to make and use the same. 
2O Which can be manufactured cheaply. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH Ross, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Louisville, in 
the county of Jefferson and State of Kentucky, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Folding Decoys; and I do here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
My invention relates to improvements in 
foldable decoys and analogous collapsible arti 
cles of that class which are adjusted for serv 
ice mechanically as distinguished from an in 
I5 flatable decoy; and the object that I have in 
view is to provide means whereby the decoy 
can be distended or adjusted for use by the 
single movement of an adjuster, and, further, 
to provide a simple and durable construction 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in making the decoy of a suitable pliable 
material, and having stiffeners or braces 
united to said material to give the body, head, 
25 and neck the proper appearance or shape, com 
bined with a bottom or float to which the body 
is united or fastened, and an adjuster sup 
ported on the float within the body and ar 
ranged to contact with the body to raise or 
3o distend the latter, the head, and neck into po 
sition for use. 
In the preferred embodiment of my inven 
tion I make the body of the decoy of textile 
fabric and strengthen the back, neck, and 
35 head by metallic braces, which are arranged 
to give to the body, back, and head the de 
Sired form or shape. The fabric decoy is fas 
tened or united in a suitable way to the float, 
and on this float, within the decoy, is arranged 
4o the adjuster. This adjuster preferably con 
Sists of a bail arranged across the float and 
journaled or pivoted thereon, and said bail 
has a crank which limits its upward move 
ment and is furthermore provided with an 
45 operating-crank that extends outside of the 
decoy-body, so as to be accessible for the pur 
pose of operating said adjuster-bail either to 
distend the body or to allow it to collapse. 
The invention further consists in the con 
5o struction and combination of parts which will 
be hereinafter fully described and claimed. 
7o 
To enable others to readily understand my 
invention, I have illustrated the preferred em 
bodiment of it in the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of this specification, in which - 55 
Figure I is an elevation of my collapsible 
article embodied as a decoy-duck. Fig. 2 is 
a longitudinal central sectional view thereof. 
Eig. 3 is a vertical transverse sectional view 
on the plane indicated by the dotted line at a 6o 
of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a view of the bracing for 
the body, neck, and head of the decoy-body. 
Fig. 5 is a detail view of the bail-adjuster. 
Fig. 6 shows by perspective and sectional 
views details of the sheath for uniting the 65 
stiffening-wires to the fabric forming the col 
lapsible body. 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in all the figures of the drawings, 
referring to which- 
A designates the bottom board, which serves 
as the float when the article is used as a decoy. 
B is the bail-like adjuster, and C is the body 
of the article. 
In the embodiment of my invention shown 75 
in the drawings I have illustrated it and will 
hereinafter describe it as adapted for a decoy; 
but I Would have it ulnderstood that I do not 
strictly limit the use of the invention to de 
coys, because I am aware that the collapsible 8 o 
article may be used for other purposes. 
The bottom board A is shaped according 
to the configuration it is desired to give to the 
collapsible article, and in the drawing of the 
decoy the ends and sides of the board are 85 
made rounding to conform to the breast and 
tail of the decoy. The body C of the decoy 
is made of pliable material, either of textile 
fabric or other material suitable for the pur 
pose, and to the body is united the neck c and 9o 
head c' of the decoy. The material forming 
the neck and head is properly cut to the de 
sired pattern in two or more pieces and suit 
ably united to the pieces of material of which 
the body C is made, and the lower edges of the 95 
body material are folded down over the sides 
of the bottomA and beneath the lower surface 
of said bottom in a neat manner, said lower 
edges of the body material being fastened to 
the bottom A in a suitable manner. I have Ioo 
shown the body material tacked to the lower 
face of the bottom A; but it is evident that 
 
547,032 
other fastenings can be used without depart 
ing from the spirit of my invention. 
In order to give to the body C, the neck, 
and head of the decoy the proper shape when 
it is distended and also to impart sufficient 
strength thereto to resist and stand the press 
ure of the adjuster-bail B, Istiffen the pliable 
body by means of the braces. (Shown more 
clearly by Fig. 4.) I use a series of these braces, 
preferably made of wire. The middle brace E 
is bent to provide the two strandsee, which ex 
tend parallel to each other along the middle 
part of the back, and these strands of the 
middle brace-wire E are extended upward 
and forward through the neck and head c c' 
of the decoy to impart the desired appear 
ance and stiffness to the head and neck of 
the decoy. This extension e' of the middle 
brace-wire E is bent to conform to the shape 
of the neck and head, and to strengthen the 
parts e e' of the wire at the points where the 
wire is curved or deflected from the body 
into the neck I twist the two strands of wire 
together at e' to produce a stiff shank. The 
parallel strands e e of the middle brace-wire 
E are carried rearward a suitable distance 
along the back of the decoy, and the rear ex 
tremities of the strands e e are united or 
twisted together. In addition to the middle 
brace-wire I use the series of wires indicated 
at FG H I, which are arranged outside of the 
middle brace-wire E and lie substantially par 
allel therewith and with each other, as shown. 
Each brace-wire is made of a single piece bent 
to form strands extending longitudinally of 
the decoy and curved at the front part thereof. 
Thus the brace-wire F, next to the middle 
wire E, has the frontif thereof curved around 
the fabric at the base part of the neck. Its 
longitudinal strands are carried alongside the 
strands e a suitable distance, and its ends are 
brought together between the strands e, as 
shown. The other brace-wires G H I are dis 
posed similarly to the wire F with their front 
curved portions to stiffen the breast of the 
decoy and their side Strands to stiffen the 
sides or back of the fabric forming the de 
coy-body. 
To prevent the wires from abrading or cut 
ting the fabric material and to provide a con 
venient method of uniting the wires and de 
coy fabric together, I have provided the 
sheaths J, one of which incloses each wire 
and is adapted to be stitched or otherwise 
united to the fabric forming the decoy-body. 
The sheath preferably consists of a strip of 
fabric or other suitable material, which is 
folded around the stiffening-wire and its 
lapped edges laid against the inside face of 
the fabric forming the decoy-body, said edges 
of the sheath being stitched to the decoy fab 
ric during the process of making the body 
and before it is assembled with the bottom 
and bail to form the complete article. The 
body, neck, and head of the decoy may be 
treated in any suitable way to render it wa 
terproof, and it is painted or finished, as de 
sired, in imitation of a fowl, &c. 
The adjuster B is preferably made in the 
form of a bail or loop and from a single piece 
of wire. The bail has its ends bent to form 
the journals b b', which are fitted in the sta 
ple-like bearings a a, provided on the bottom 
A, near the sides thereof, so that the bail is 
arranged transversely across the bottom and 
body of the decoy. One of the journals b of 
the bail is further bent to provide the crank 
stop lic, which is adapted when the bail is 
lifted to bear upon the bottom A and thereby 
limit and arrest the upward movement of the 
bail when it is turned up to distend the body. 
The other journal b' of the bail is extended 
and bent to provide the crank-handlel, which 
extends through the body fabric and beyond 
the edge of the bottom, so that the crank 
handle is readily accessible at all times for 
operating the bail. 
With the decoy I have combined an anchor 
L, the line of which is adapted to be com 
pactly wound or coiled upon a stem m, at 
tached to the rear edge of the float A below 
the tail of the decoy-body. The anchor-line 
7, is carried from this stem along the bottom 
of the decoy, thence passed through a staple 
like guide n', fastened to the bottom A at the 
breast of the decoy, and to the free end of 
this line is fastened the anchor L, as shown 
by Fig. 1. 
The adjuster-bail B is adapted to be turned 
down to lie flat upon the bottom A, and the 
body can then be folded down compactly upon 
the bottom, the head and neck, however, be 
ing raised up somewhat. To adjust the decoy 
for service it is only necessary to grasp the 
crank-handle land turn the bail up, thereby 
bringing the bail to press against the braced 
back of the body and lifting the body, head, 
and neck to their distended positions at one 
adjustment of the bail. When lifted, the bail 
assumes a slightly inclined position, because 
the crank-stop is so formed that the bail can 
be moved to a position slightly beyond the 
vertical line of the bearings, which pivotally 
connect the bail to the bottom, and as the 
stiffened flexible decoy-body affords consid 
erable resistance and pressure on the bail 
when the parts are distended the bail is prac 
tically locked in place when it is raised to dis 
tend the decoy. 
As shown by Fig. 2 of the drawings, the 
sheath J is extended along the middle brace 
E up into the neck of the decoy-body, and the 
pieces of this sheath are passed and folded 
between the strands of the brace E and in 
close the twisted shank e' of the brace E, 
said ends of the sheath being united together 
or to the fabric decoy-body by stitching or in 
any suitable way. By this arrangement of 
the sheath the twisted upright shank of the 
middle brace is prevented from rubbing the 
decoy fabric and the sheath on the middle 
brace will not be displaced and loosened by 
2d 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
7 O 
95 
OO 
I o5 
IO 
I I5 
2 O 
I 25 
547,032 
IO 
25 
35 
the adjuster-bail rubbing thereon when turn 
ing the bail to distend or collapse the decoy. 
Although I have described the braces for 
the decoy-body as made preferably of wire, 
yet I do not limit myself to the use of this 
material, because the braces may be made of 
rattan, willow, whalebone, or any other mate 
rial suitable for the purpose; nor do I limit 
myself to the peculiar form and arrangement 
of the longitudinal braces, nor to the details 
of construction and form and proportion of 
parts herein shown and described as the pre 
ferred embodiment of my invention, because 
I am aware that changes and alterations 
therein can be made by a skilled mechanic 
without departing from the spirit or sacrific 
ing the advantages of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a collapsible article, the combination 
with a bottom, of a pliable body attached 
thereto, and an adjuster supported on the bot 
tom and arranged within the body, to be 
brought into contact therewith when said ad 
juster is raised and thereby distend the body, 
substantially as and for the purposes de 
Scribed. 
2. In a collapsible article, the combination 
With a bottom, of an adjuster pivotally mount 
ed on the bottom, and a collapsible body con 
nected to said bottom and arranged to be 
lifted or distended by said adjuster, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
3. A collapsible article comprising a body of 
pliable material having the stiffening braces, 
and a pivoted adjuster disconnected from the 
body and arranged transversely within the 
Same, to preSS against and distend the body, 
substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
4. The collapsible body made of pliable ma 
terial and having the stiffening braces at 
tached thereto, combined with a bottom, and 
an adjuster to distend the body, substantially 
as described. 
5. A decoy having its neck and head stiff 
ened by a metallic brace, and provided with 
a series of stiffener braces along the body 
g 55 
75 
thereof, combined with a bottom to which the 
body is fastened, and an adjuster supported 
by the body in position to press and distend 
the body, substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
6. In a decoy, the pliable material formin 
the head, neck and body, the middle brace E 
extending along the body and into the neck 
and head, and the series of braces united to 
the body, combined with a bottom to which 
the material is fastened, and a transverse ad 
juster movably supported on the bottom, Sub 
stantially as described. 
7. The combination with a collapsible body, 
of an adjuster bail pivotally supported with 
in the body and at its base and arranged to 
press against the body, for the purpose of 
holding the same in its distended position, 
Substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination with a collapsible body, 
and a bottom, of an adjuster bail pivoted to 
the bottom within said body and provided 
with a crank stop for limiting the upward 
movement of said bail, substantially as and 
for the purposes described. 
9. A collapsible article having its body 
made of suitable pliable material, stiffening 
braces, and sheaths which inclose the braces 
and united to the pliable material, combined 
with a bottom, and an adjuster arranged with 
in the body, for the purposes described, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
10. A collapsible decoy having its body, 
neck and head composed of pliable material, 
the brace E formed with the upright shank, 
the series of braces arranged longitudinally 
of the body and around the breast thereof, 
and the sheaths, J, which inclose the braces 
and are united to the pliable material of the 
body, combined with a suitable bottom, and 
an adjuster to distend the body, as and for 
the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH ROSS. 
Witnesses: 
J. H. ROSS, 
C. B. GUTHRIE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547132.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 547,132, 
C. H. REID, 
HAT IRONING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Oct. 1, 1895. 
- - - 
- - - 
--- 
WITNESSES: 
}?ian, 
Sidek 
77 4. 
BY 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM. Photo-LTHowAshingtoric 
 
INVENTOR 
Czas. 77.Aleza 
f 
t 
a 
ATTORNE 
(No Model.) 
No. 547,132, 
 
C. H. RED. 
HAT IRONING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented 00t. 1, 1895, 
WITNESSES 
9ff-R s 
M.74%deo- 
. 
w 
NVENTOR 
Czas. 77. 
a 7 fronz 
"2.47 
ATTORNEY 
Now B.RAAM, proto-Ho-WAS 
so.d, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES II. REID, OF DANBURY, CONNECTICUT. 
HAa R O N N G WACH NE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 547,182, dated October 1, 1895. 
Application filed November 23, 1894, Serial No, 529,752, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whon, it malf conceria: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES H. REID, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Danbury, 
in the county of Fairfield and State of Con 
necticut, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Hat-Ironing Machines; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, Such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Sae. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
inents in hat-ironing machines, but is espe 
cially intended as an improvement upon the 
Construction shown and described in Letters 
Patent No. 420,961, issued to me February 11, 
1890, and in my pending application for Let 
ters Patent, filed September 21, 1894, Serial 
No. 523,730. 
The object of my present invention is to pre 
vent the burning of the hat by the iron, to 
prevent the iron from coming in contact with 
the stiffening of the hat and thereby smouch 
ing the Same, and to produce a neat and fin 
ished appearance, such as is indispensable in 
hats of the first quality. 
My invention is especially applicable in the 
instance of hats which are treated with what 
is termed a wine stiff, since in such hats 
the heat from the iron will draw the stiffen 
ing to the surface of the hat, where it will be 
come quickly dried and smeared by the hot 
iron when the latter is in direct contact with 
the hat. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in the details of construction and com 
bination of elements, such as will be herein 
after fully set forth, and then specifically des 
ignated by the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of my specification, Figure I is a side 
elevation of a hat-ironing machine equipped 
With my improvement; Fig. 2, a front eleva 
tion of the same, and Fig. 3 a detail perspec 
tive of my improved attachment. 
Similar numbers of reference denote like 
parts in the several figures of the drawings. 
have shown my invention as attached to 
a machine precisely like that shown and de 
Scribed in my pending application above re 
ferred to, and I will therefore enter into no 
description of the hat-ironing machine proper, 
since the same forms no part of my present 
inventions 
1 is the swinging bar, 2 the hat-iron pivoted 
at the inner end of said bar, and 9 the ro 
tary chuck for supporting the hat, precisely 
as is shown and described in my aforesaid ap 
plication. 
3 is a frame provided at its extremities with 
journals 4 and having ears 5, which latter are 
securely bolted to the bar 1, whereby the frame 
is fixed in position. Swiveled within said 
journals are stirrups 6, within which are jour 
naled band-wheels 7. S is an endless belt, of 
cloth or other suitable material, carried by 
said wheels, which belt also incloses the iron 
above and below the same. 
When the iron is in use, the revolving hat 
will, by friction, cause the belt to travel in 
unison therewith, so that there can be no chaf 
ing between said belt and hat. As the iron 
travels from the sides of the hat to the tip 
thereof, the journals of the stirrups will swing 
around, thereby causing the belt to always 
present a flat surface to the hat. In other 
words, the belt partakes of the movements of 
the iron along the sides and around the tip 
of the hat, this being of course due to the fact 
that said belt is carried by the bar which sup 
ports the iron. 
It is immaterial whether the belt be sup 
ported upon the iron or upon the part which 
carries the iron, the gist of my invention in 
this respect resting in the broad idea, in ar 
ranging and supporting the belt so that it will 
move in harmony with the iron and will al 
ways be interposed between the latter and the 
hat to be ironed. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a hat ironing machine, the combina 
tion of the rotatory chuck, the hat iron and 
the bar to which said iron is connected, with 
an endless belt of cloth interposed between 
said iron and chuck and Supported by said 
bar, said belt being caused to revolve in uni 
son with the chuck by frictional contact with 
the latter, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a hat ironing machine, the combina 
tion of the rotatory chuck, the iron and the 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
547,132 
said frame, the band wheels journaled within 
said stirrups, and the endless belt of cloth car 
ried by said wheels and inclosing said iron, 
Substantially as set forth. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature I5 
CHARLES II. REID. 
Witnesses: 
EUGEN C. DEMPSEY, 
JOHN R. BOOTH. 
bar to which the latter is connected, with the 
frame secured to said bar, the band-wheels 
journaled within said frame, and the endless 
belt of cloth carried by said wheels and in 
5 closing said iron above and below, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. In a hat ironing machine, the combina 
tion of the chuck, the hat iron and the bar to 
which the latter is connected, with the frame 
Io secured to said bar, the stirrups swiveled to 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547232.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 547,232. 
W. W. THRELFALL. 
STOP MOTION FOR RAILWAY HEADs, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented 00t, l, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
T-R 
6SI a!N 
AS2S 
s 22 is 7 
E2 
. 
S. 7th Stre 
if 
% 
2 3) 
II 
A. 
2 
S. 
SY 
6Y 
 
 
SN 
SS N 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM. Photo-LithowAshtiron, D. 
(No Model.) 
W. Y. THRELFALL. 
STOP MOTION FOR RAILWAY HEADS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 547,232, 
Patented 0ct, l, 1895. 
 
  
Saar - 
 
 
a 
EE 
A * x 
. 
E. 
EE 
It tal 
E 
s 
( 
X 
| 
Elli? 
axy 
r 
Ap 
NiCAFC 
yaw I EEE 
WitNesses 
%09-24. 
As z1 &aa 
INVENtor 
v 
%2:42 
ce-1. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 547,232. 
Patented Oct. 1, 1895. 
W. W., THRELFALL. 
STOP MOTION FOR RAILWAY HEADS, 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 547,232, 
Patented Oct. 1, 1895. 
W. Y. THRELFALL. 
STOP MOTION FOR RAILWAY HEADS, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
vow 
L. Witt 
 
 
le 
% S 2S 
ErAEU's 
N AETI 
witNesses 
/4 -6 24, 
INVEN to F, 
ce-le. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. THRELFALL OF NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
PETTEE MACHINE WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
STOPa VOT ON FOR RAWAY HEAD S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 547,282, dated October 1, 1895. 
Application filed August 1, 1894, 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM W.THRELFALL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
ton Upper Falls, in the county of Middlesex 
5 and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Stop-Motions 
for Railway-Heads, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
Io forming a part of this specification, in explain 
ing its nature. 
In drawing-frames the action of the draw. 
ing-rolls upon the sliver is regulated by means 
of the evener, through which the sliver is 
I5 drawn by a pair of drawing-rolls located in 
front of it. This evener is in the form of a 
tunnel or trumpet having a flaring mouth 
Opening toward the drawing-rolls, and at its 
inner end a small hole through which the 
2O strands of sliver are passed, the trumpet serv 
ing to gather together the various strands and 
the hole to govern or control or even the size 
This trumpet is 
of the collected strands, 
Supported upon or connected with a lever and 
25 SO as to be movable toward and from the draw 
ing-rolls in front of it, and as the sliver which 
runs through the hole varies in thickness it 
produces more or less tension or strain upon 
the trumpet, causing it to be moved toward 
3o the outer drawing-rolls as the sliver thickens, 
and as the strain lessens the trumpet returns 
to its normal position and the sliver runs of 
the rightgage and moves. If the gage becomes 
Small the trumpet moves backward or away 
35 from the drawing-rolls. These movements of 
the trumpet, caused by variations in the size 
of the sliver passing through the hole, effect 
through mechanism well understood varia 
tions in the drawing action of the main draw 
4o ing-rolls, causing them to draw more if the 
sliver is thick and less if it is not, the result 
being produced in part by means of a belt, 
which is caused to be moved laterally upon a 
cone-pulley or drum. It happens occasion 
45 ally, however, that the sliver in passing 
through the hole in the trumpet bunches up 
to such an extent as to fill the trumpet and 
cause imperfect operation of the device, and, 
finally, the sliver to break; but, so far as I am 
5o aware, there has never been employed in con 
 
Serial No. 519,153, (No model.) 
tion with a trumpet any means actuated by 
it whereby the machine is stopped when this 
difficulty or wrong action occurs, and my in 
vention relates to means whereby the move 
ment of the trumpet is utilized in causing the 55 
stop-motion of the machine to be actuated 
that is, a movement beyond that in which it 
operates to make perfect or substantially per 
fect sliver, toward the outer drawing-rolls 
will cause it to be operated, or, if the sliver is 6o 
broken and the trumpet thereby permitted to 
return to a position beyond its normal work 
ing position, the stop-motion is then actuated 
by it. The mechanism which I have intro 
duced into the machine for accomplishing 65 
this purpose acts with that already used for 
moving the belt in relation to the cone and 
with the same stop-motion and is very sim 
ple, consisting of but few parts. 
partly in side elevation and partly in section, 
of a drawing-frame having the features of my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a view in front elevation 
thereof. Fig. 3 is a view principally in hori 
Zontal section upon the dotted line of acac 75 
and in plan of the parts below said line. Fig. 
4 is a view principally in rear elevation of 
many of the parts shown in Fig. 2. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
group of main drawing-rolls, by which the 8o 
strands of sliver passing over the spoons a 
from the cans a? are drawn. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents a view, 7o 
B is the front pair of drawing-rolls. 
C is the trumpet having the open or flaring 
mouth c and the gage-hole c'. This is lo- 85 
cated closely to the meeting point of the draw 
ing-rolls B, and it is Supported by a rock-le 
ver c, which communicates by familiar mech 
anism the movement to the belt-shipper D. 
It is obvious that when the machine is prop- 9o 
erly working the belt-shipper D has but a 
limited range of lateral movement in shifting 
the belt upon the drum d, and that any ex 
cess of such movement can be utilized in act 
uating a stop-motion, and I have availed my 95 
self of this fact to use in connection with the 
shipper the slide-rod E, upon which I have 
placed stops e, one upon each side, and ad 
justable upon the rod by set-screws or in any 
other desired way, and with one of which the Iod 
2. 
547,232 
O 
25 
shipper comes into contact when there is 
cause for the operation of the stop-motion. 
The rod E has suitable bearings at e' in the 
frame of the machine, and has springs e to 
return it and hold it in normal position. 
When moved by the contact of the shipper D 
with either stop, its bent ende, which engages 
a lever F, causes said lever to be moved upon 
the fulcrum fand its upper end f' to be moved 
into the path of one of the two forks g g of 
the vibrating arm g on the vibrating shaft 
g, and when the vibrating arm g is thus ar 
rested the stop mechanism of the machine is 
caused to be actuated to stop its further op 
eration. 
This stopping mechanism is like that in 
common use upon drawing-frames having 
spoons a, the spoons a serving upon their re 
lease by the breaking of sliver to cause the 
actuation of the said stop, and I have utilized 
the same mechanism by simply extending an 
arm from the vibrating shaft to a position 
where it can be arrested by the stop-lever F 
when the trumpet C, by the imperfection of 
the sliver, causes the belt-shipper to be moved 
beyond its normal and safe range of action. 
As the construction and operation of this 
stop mechanism is well understood, it is not 
necessary that it be further described here. 
The operation of the apparatus has been 
given in connection with the description of 
its parts, and its advantages are too obvious 
to need comment. 
It will be understood that the trumpet serves 
to stop the machine only at an extreme of a 
movement toward or from the rolls B, and 
that at one extreme the end of the lever F is 
moved into operative relation with the fork 
g, and at the other extreme into operative re 
45 
lation with the fork g', but that normally it 4o 
is held in inoperative relation. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. In a machine of the character specified 
the combination of the following instrumen 
talities, the trumpet evener and drawing 
rolls, a cone belt shipper actuated by the 
trumpet evener, the spoons, a stopping mech 
anism with which the spoons are connected 5o 
and by which it is adapted to be actuated, 
and mechanism intermediate the cone belt 
shipper and the said stopping mechanism to 
actuate the latter upon an excessive move 
ment of the cone belt shipper, all as and for 55 
the purposes described. 
2. The combination of the trumpet evener 
C, the drawing roll E, the belt shipper, means 
connecting the shipper and trumpet evener 
as specified, stop motion devices, the vibra 
tory arm g having the forks g, g, and the 
stop lever F connected to and actuated by 
the belt shipper, as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
3. The combination in a machine of the 
character specified of the trumpet evener, the 
belt shipper, means connecting the shipper 
and trumpet evener, as specified, a sliding 
rod having stops e and returning springs e, 
the stop lever F connected with said slide rod 
and adapted to be moved thereby, the stop 
ping mechanism and the vibrating arm g 
having forks g, g' connected thereto, as and 
for the purposes described. 
65 
7 o 
WILLIAM W. THIRELFALL. 
Witnesses: 
F. F. RAYMOND, 2d, 
J. M. DOLAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547332.txt	(No Model.) 
F. W. CLARK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
DISTILLATION AND BREAKING UP OF LIQUID HYDROCARBONs 
AND APPARATUS THEREFOR, 
Patented Oct. 1, 1895, 
No. 547,332, 
(No Model.) 
F. W. CLARK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
DISTILLATION AND BREAKING UP OF LIQUID HYDROCARBONS 
AND APPARATUS THEREFOR. 
No. 547,332. 
Patented Oot. 1, 1895. 
 
  
S.ENS, 
S. 
S 
N2 
N 
N N 
e/ 
% 
S3 
s 
N 
N 
 
 
  
 
 
 
i 
N 
N 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK W. CLARK, OF LONDON, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE FRANK 
W. 
CLARK & COMPANY, LIMITED, OF SAME PLACE. 
DISTILLATION AND BREAKING UP OF LIQUID HYDROCARBONS, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of letters Patent No. 547,332, dated October 1, 1895. 
Application filed May 31, 1894, Serial No. 513,063, (No model.) Patented in England March 1, 1893, No. 4,510, and in Bel 
gium February 26, 1894, No. 108,750. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANK WILLIAM CLARK, 
engineer, a subject of the Queen of Great Brit 
ain, residing at London, England, have in 
Vented new and useful Improvements Relat 
ing to the Distillation and Breaking Up of 
Liquid Hydrocarbons and Similar Substances 
and to Apparatus Therefor, (for which I have 
obtained patents in the following countries: 
Great Britain, No. 4,510, dated March 1, 1893, 
and Belgium, No. 108,750, dated February 26, 
1894) of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the distillation and 
breaking up of liquid hydrocarbons and other 
Volatile liquids or spirits, and its object is to 
provide simple and efficient means for sepa 
rating and collecting the different grades or 
specific gravities of such liquids. 
An important feature of my said invention 
is the use of a carrier--such as air or other 
gas-Which is passed over thin or shallow 
streams of the liquid in an evaporator or re 
tort and is then conducted into one of more 
condensers for the purpose of conveying into 
the same the vapor from the said evaporator. 
My said invention comprises an improved 
method or process which consists, essentially, 
in introducing the liquid in the form of thin 
or shallow streams into a suitable evaporator 
and Vaporizing the more volatile portion or 
portions of the said liquid therein by the ap 
plication of heat or by reduction of pressure, 
or by both the application of heat and reduc 
tion of pressure, conveying the vapor from 
the said evaporator by means of a carrier, 
Such as air, into a condenser, in which it is 
cooled or subjected to pressure, or is both 
cooled and subjected to pressure, so as to in 
sure the condensation of the said vapor, the 
air or other carrier preferably being kept cir 
culating through the apparatus and used over 
and over again for conveying or carrying the 
vapor from the evaporator to the condenser. 
In someinstances I convey the vapor success 
ively through two or more condensers, in 
which it is subjected to different degrees of 
cold or of pressure, or both. The heavier or 
less volatile portions of the liquid, which are 
not vaporized in the evaporator, are collected 
therein and are run into a tank or drawn off 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
from time to time. The products of conden 
sation are also from time to time drawn off 
By this 
from the condenser or condensers. 
treatment the said liquids may be effectually 
broken up or separated into different grades 
or specific gravities; and by varying the tem 
perature or the pressure or vacuum in the 
evaporator or condenser or condensers, and 
other conditions under which the process is 
carried on, I can obtain products of conden 
sation or distillation of higher or lower spe 
cific gravity or boiling or evaporating point 
from the evaporator and condenser or con 
densers, as required. In some cases it is nec 
essary to create a vacuum or partial vacuum 
in the evaporator. 
My said invention also comprises improved 
apparatus wherein an evaporator, provided 
with means for supplying the liquid in suit 
ably - regulated quantities thereto, is con 
nected with a condenser or condensers and 
with a pump or equivalent device for circu 
lating the air or other carrier through the 
said evaporator and condenser or condensers. 
My said invention also comprises other im 
provements hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan of one arrangement of the said appa 
ratus. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal central sec 
tion of the evaporator. Fig. 3 is a longitudi 
nal central section of the condenser. Fig. 4 
is a plan, partly in horizontal section, show 
ing another arrangement of my said appara 
tus. Fig. 5 is a front elevation, partly in ver 
tical section; and Fig. 6, a transverse Section 
showing a modified arrangement of the feed 
regulating boxes hereinafter described. 
A is the evaporator, which is divided into 
compartments A' A' A', Fig. 2, by means of 
plates a. a'. In the central and larger com 
partment A are arranged tubes b, which ex 
tend at their upper end through the plate a, 
into the compartment A and at their lower 
end through the plate a' into the compart 
ment A. Steam, hot Water, or other Suitable 
heating medium is to be introduced into or 
circulated through the compartment A* out 
side the tubes b, while a suitable carrier, such 
as air, is circulated through the Said tubes, 
as hereinafter described. The compartment 
55 
6 o 
o 
75 
90 
95 
Oce 
g 
547,332 
A' is divided by a horizontal plate or parti 
tion a, so that there are as many tubes b 
above as there are below the Said partition. 
B is a reservoir for containing the liquid to 
be distilled and broken up. This reservoir 
is connected by a pipe C and branch pipes d 
with a regulating-boxe. The regulating-box 
e is divided up into compartments or sections 
by means of walls or partitions e' in such 
manner that the opening of each branch pipe 
d and that of each pipe flies within the cor 
responding compartment. There are as many 
of these branch pipes d as there are tubes b 
below the partition a' in the evaporator, and in 
combination with each branch pipe d is pro 
vided a pipe f, extending from the space in 
the upper part of the regulating-box e into 
one of the said tubes b, so that the liquid, 
which enters the regulating - box through 
either branch pipe d, will flow through the 
corresponding pipe f into the corresponding 
tube b. The pipe c is provided with a cock 
or valve c' for regulating or controlling the 
flow of the liquid from the tank B, and each 
of the branch pipes d is provided with a cock 
or valve d' for regulating the flow of the 
liquid through the corresponding compart 
ment or section of the box e. 
The evaporator A is preferably inclined, as 
shown in Fig. 2, so that the liquid entering 
the tubes b will flow by gravity toward or 
into the compartment A. 
C is the condenser, which, like the evapo 
rator, is divided into compartments C" CC 
by means of plates gg, the central and larger 
compartment C* having arranged therein 
tubes h, which extend at their upper end 
through the plate g into the compartment C 
and at their lower end through the plate g 
into the compartment C9. The condenser C 
is also preferably inclined, as shown in Fig. 
3. Cold water or other suitable cooling me 
dium is to be introduced into or circulated 
through the compartment C outside the tubes 
h, the carrier, with the hydrocarbon vapor, 
being passed through the said tubes. The 
compartment C is divided by a horizontal 
partition g in such a manner that there are 
as many tubes above as there are below the 
said partition. The said partition may have 
one or more holes formed therein to permit 
the flow into the space below it of any liquid 
that may be carried over into the space above 
it. 
D is an air-pump of any suitable descrip 
tion, the suction-pipe D of which is connected 
with the compartment A of the evaporator 
below the partition d', the delivery-pipe D. 
of the said pump D being connected with the 
compartment C of the condenser C below 
the partition g. The space above the said 
partition g in the condenser is connected 
with the compartment A of the evaporator 
above the partition a' by a pipe E, which is, 
if necessary, provided with a loaded or spring 
valve F, so constructed that the load on the 
valve can be readily adjusted or regulated at 
will. The valve F serves to produce a re 
sistance to the passage of the air or other 
carrier out of the condenser C, and thus 
causes a condensation or rise of pressure in 
the said condenser and a rarefaction or dimi 
nution of pressure in the pipe E and in the 
evaporator A as the said air or other carrier 
is circulated through the apparatus by the 
pump D, a low pressure being, as is well 
known, advantageous for evaporation, and a 
high pressure for condensation or liquefac 
tion. A by-pass G, having a stop-cock or 
valve G', is provided around the said valve 
for the purpose hereinafter explained. 
The compartment A of the evaporator is 
provided with a pipei and a draw-off cocki', 
and the compartment C of the condenser is 
provided with a pipelic and a draw-off cockle. 
If necessary or desirable, the evaporator A 
is provided with a suitable vacuum-gage and 
the condenser C with a suitable pressure 
gage. 
In the arrangement, shown in Fig. 4, I pro 
vide an equalizer or temperature-exchanger II, 
consisting of a cylindrical chamber provided 
with tubes l, supported in tube-plates m, n, 
which divide the said chamber into compart 
ments H. 
H. H. The compartment II' is 
connected by a pipe D with the compartment 
A? of the evaporator below the partition a', 
while the compartment His connected by the 
suction-pipe D with the pump D, the delivery 
pipe D* whereof is connected with the com 
partment C of the condenser below the par 
tition g. The compartment H of the equal 
izer is connected at one end by the pipe E to 
the compartment C of the condenser above 
the partition g, and at the other end by a 
pipe E with the compartment A of the evap 
orator above the partition a. 
Therefore the 
heated air and Vapor from the evaporator 
will be drawn through the tubes l, while the 
cooled air from the condenser passes through 
the compartment Houtside the said tubes l, 
and an equalization or exchange of tempera 
ture will take place, the air and vapor from 
the evaporator being somewhat cooled before 
passing into the pump D and condenser C 
and the air from the condenser being warmed 
before passing into the evaporator. 
My improved method or process is carried 
into effect in the apparatus above described 
and shown in the drawings as follows-that is 
to say: The compartments A' A' of the evap 
orator A and the compartments C C of the 
condenser, and the pipes and tubes connected 
there with are first charged with a suitable 
carrier, such as air or other gas. The pump 
D is then started and draws the air or other 
carrier from the evaporator and forces it into 
the condenser. At the same time steam or 
hot water is caused to circulate through the 
compartment A* of the retort and cold water 
or other cooling medium through the com 
partment C of the condenser. The cock c' 
and the cocks d are then opened to admit 
liquid from the tank B to the regulating-box 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
Oc 
Io5 
to 
30 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
6 o 
547,382 
3 
O 
2 
25 
3 ) 
35 
45 
50 
55 
. 
ble equal quantities of the liquid shall flow 
through the several pipes f into the corre 
My improved apparatus may, if desired, be 
so constructed that air Will be drawn into the 
evaporator from the external atmosphere and 
will be forced through the condenser and al 
lowed to escape through a suitably-loaded 
valve. It is, however, preferable to charge 
the apparatus in the first instance with air or 
other gas and to circulate this air or gas con 
tinuously through the apparatus, as above de 
scribed, because loss of the hydrocarbon va 
por is thus avoided. 
Instead of employing tubes in the evapora 
tor and condenser, as above described, I some 
times use suitable plates, over which the liq 
uid will flow in thin or shallow streams and 
beneath which the heating medium may be 
circulated; or I provide other suitable heating 
surfaces, over which the streams of liquid may 
be caused to flow; or in cases where only reduc 
tion of pressure is required to effect the vola 
tilization of the liquid, I dispense with the 
means for applying heat to the liquid. 
In some instances I evaporate the whole of 
the liquid in a suitable retort and convey the 
vapor, by means of the air or other carrier, 
successively through a series of condensers, 
in which it is subjected to different degrees 
of cold or pressure, or both, so that the differ 
ent grades or specific gravities will be con 
densed and collected in the several con 
densers. 
I sometimes use coal or other gas as the car 
rier for conveying the vapor from the evap 
orator or retort. In this case I can, if de 
sired, conduct the gas enriched by the hydro 
carbon vapor directly from the evaporator or 
retort through a pipe or main to be used for 
lighting or other purposes, instead of con 
ducting it through a condenser or condensers, 
as above described. 
e, and the said cocks d' are so adjusted that 
the flow of the said liquid through the several 
compartments of the box e is equal or about sponding tubes b. 
equal, and a thin or shallow stream of the 
liquid will flow through the tubes if into each 
of the tubes b below the partition a. The 
supply of the liquid to all of these tubes can 
then be simultaneously increased or dimin 
ished by means of the cock c', the supply to 
either of the said tubes being regulated inde 
pendently, if necessary, by means of the 
corresponding cock d'. As the liquid passes 
through the said tubes, the lighter or more 
volatile portion or portions of such liquid are 
vaporized by the heat of the steam or hot 
Water surrounding the said tubes and the 
vapor is drawn or carried out of the evapo 
rator by means of the dry air or other carrier 
and forced into the condenser by the pump 
D. The heavier or less volatile portions 
of the said liquid pass through the tubes b 
into the compartment A. The vapor thus 
forced into the condenser in passing through 
the tubes h thereof is condensed by the press 
ure therein, combined with the cooling effect 
of the cold water surrounding the said tubes, 
and the liquid of condensation collects in the 
compartment C. The air or other carrier is 
forced from the condenser through the pipe 
E, the loaded valve F controlling or govern 
ing its flow through the said pipe in such a 
manner as to maintain the desired low press 
ure or vacuum in the retort and the desired 
higher pressure in the condenser. 
It is evident that liquids of different spe 
cific gravity or boiling or evaporating point 
will be collected in the compartments A and 
C. These liquids are drawn off from time to 
time into barrels or other receptacles through 
the pipes i k. To facilitate this drawing off 
the cock G' in the by-pass G may be opened, 
So as to equalize the pressure throughout the 
apparatus and thus prevent the rarefaction 
in the evaporator A. from impeding the flow 
of the liquid from the compartment Athrough 
the pipei. 
In the arrangement shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 
3 each pipe dextends downward in a separate 
compartment of the boxe and is turned up 
Ward at its extremity. The various compart 
ments of the said box are filled nearly up to 
the orifices of the pipes f with water, through 
which the liquid, eutering through either pipe 
d into the boxe, will rise and can be seen ris 
ing, a window of glass or other suitable ma 
terial being provided for the purpose, as 
shown, for example, at e, Figs. 5 and 6. 
In the modification of my regulating-box 
shown in Figs. 5 and 6 the branch pipes d 
are connected through the cocks d' with the 
top of the box. e. and deliver the liquid into 
shallow compartments in the lower part of 
the said box. With each of these compart 
ments is connected a pipe f for conducting 
the liquid into one or other of the tubes b of 
the evaporator or retort. The cocks c' and d' 
should be so adjusted that as nearly as possi 
: 
What claim is-. 
1. The method or process of distilling and 
breaking up liquid hydrocarbons or similar 
substances, which method or process consists 
in causing the liquid to flow in numerous thin 
or shallow streams in one direction over the 
operative surfaces of an evaporator or retort, 
circulating a carrier such as air first in con 
tact with heating surfaces and then over said 
streams of liquid in the reverse direction and 
conveying the vapor therefrom by means of 
said carrier through a condenser and then 
conducting the carrier together with any un 
condensed vapor from the condenser back 
into the evaporator or retort, the unvolatil 
ized liquid in the evaporator or retort and the 
liquid of condensation in the condenser be 
ing drawn off as required, substantially as 
hereinbefore described and for the purposes 
specified. 
2. The method or process of distilling and 
breaking up liquid hydrocarbons or similar 
substances, which method or process consists 
in causing the liquid to flow in thin or shal 
90 
95 
Co 
O 
I I5 
(25 
547,882 
low streams over the operative surfaces of an 
evaporator or retort, drawing the vapor from 
the evaporator or retort by means of a carrier 
Such as air, and forcing it into a condenser, 
and then conducting the carrier together with 
any uncondensed vapor from the condenser 
back into the evaporator or retort, the mix 
ture of vapor and air being heated on its Way 
from the condenser back into the evaporator 
or retort, and the unvolatilized liquid in the 
evaporator or retort and the liquid of conden 
sation in the condenser being drawn off from 
time to time, substantially as and for the pur 
poses above specified. 
3. The method or process of distilling and 
breaking up liquid hydrocarbons or similar 
substances, which method or process consists 
in causing the liquid to flow in thin or shal 
low streams over the operative surfaces of an 
evaporator or retort, conveying the vapor 
from the evaporator or retort into a condenser 
by means of a carrier such as air, and forc 
ing the carrier together with any uncondensed 
vapor from the condenser back into the evap 
orator or retort, under a pressure less than 
that maintained in the condenser, the unvola 
tilized liquid in the evaporator or retort and 
the liquid of condensation in the condenser 
being drawn off from time to time, substan 
tially as hereinbefore described and for the 
purposes specified. 
4. The method or process of distilling and 
breaking up liquid hydrocarbons or similar 
substances, which method or process consists 
in causing the liquid to flow in thin or shal 
low streams over the operative surfaces of an 
evaporator or retort, drawing the vapor from 
the evaporator or retort by means of a carrier 
such as air, and forcing it into a condenser, 
and then forcing the carrier together with any 
uncondensed vapor back into the evaporator 
or retort under a pressure less than that main 
tained in the condenser, the mixture of vapor 
and air passing from the evaporator or retort 
to the condenser being caused to impart some 
of its heat to that passing from the condenser 
back to the evaporator or retort, and the un 
volatilized liquid in the evaporator or retort 
and the liquid of condensation in the con 
denser being drawn off from time to time, 
substantially as hereinbefore described and 
for the purposes Specified. 
5. In a distilling apparatus, the combination 
with an evaporator or retort having a series 
or group of tubular or other heating surfaces, 
and a series or group of tubular or other evapo 
rating surfaces, pipes provided with control 
ling valves or cocks for the Supply of the liq 
uid in regulated quantities to the said sur 
faces, one or more condensers, a pump or its 
equivalent for circulating a suitable carrier 
for the vapor through the said evaporator first 
in contact with the heating and then in con 
tact with the evaporating surfaces thereof and 
through the said condenser or condensers, and 
pipes or conduits connecting the said pump, 
evaporator and condenser or condensers one 
with another, substantially as hereinbefore 
described and for the purposes specified. 
6. In a distilling apparatus, the combination 
of an evaporator or retort, a condenser, a pipe 
or passage connecting the said evaporator with 
the condenser, a loaded or spring valve in the 
Said pipe or passage, a pump or its equivalent, 
and pipes or passages connecting the Same 
respectively with the said evaporator and con 
denser, substantially as and for the purposes 
above specified. 
7. In a distilling apparatus, the combination 
of an evaporator, a condenser, a pipe or pas 
sage connecting the said evaporator with the 
condenser, a loaded or spring valve in the said 
pipe or passage, a pipe or by-pass around the 
said valve, a controlling valve or cock in the 
said pipe or by-pass, a pump or its equivalent, 
and pipes or conduits connecting the same re 
spectively with the said evaporator and con 
denser, substantially as and for the purposes 
above specified. 
S. In a distilling apparatus, the combination 
of an evaporator or retort, a condenser, an 
equalizer or temperature-exchanger, a pump 
or its equivalent, and pipes or conduits con 
necting the said pump, the evaporator, the 
condenser and the equalizer or temperature 
exchanger one with another, substantially as 
and for the purposes above specified. 
9. In a distilling apparatus, the combination 
with an evaporator, of a box divided into com 
partments, a pipe connected with a tank or res 
ervoir and provided with a controlling valve 
or cock, branch-pipes provided with control 
ling valves or cocks and connecting the said 
pipe with the several compartments of the 
said box respectively, and pipes connecting 
the said compartments with the respective 
vaporizing surfaces of the said evaporator, 
substantially as and for the purposes above 
specified. 
FRANK W. CLARK. 
Witnesses: 
CLEMENT W. IIAYDEN, 
J. E. PROCTOR. 
7 o 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
IQ 5 
o 
5 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547432.txt	ES 
a 
Eise 
So tries. 
 
NY 
() 
R's 
R-r- 
s 
W w s 
al 
N 2W N. F. 
w 
(No Model.) 
No. 547,432, 
J. A. HAUSER, 
SAWMILL 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oot. 8, 1895. 
es s 
Eers 
 
nuous s 
(69) 
8 
W 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 547432, 
J. A. HAUSER. 
SAWMILL 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Oct. 8, 1895. 
 
 
t 
\ 
ra 
-----------iss 
ea 
a 2 2. 
- r " 
- - - 
- 
site 
is 
$3 t 
s s2. stW2 
 
se Sl 
st 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. HAUSER, OF AUGUSTA, GEORGIA. 
SAWMLL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 547,432, dated October 8, 1895. 
Application filed April 26, 1895, 
Serial No. 547,285, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
Zo aid, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN A. HAUSER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Augusta, 
in the county of Richmond and State of Geor 
gia, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Sawmills; and I do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to a circular-saw mill 
for manufacturing rift, edge-grain, or quarter 
sawed boards. Heretofore in the manufacture 
of rift flooring it has been necessary to cut the 
log into square or flat deals or cants on a large 
circular or band mill before they could be 
passed to a rift machine for cutting them into 
rift flooring. In doing this latter work the 
log has to be turned a number of times, and 
only certain parts of the log would make rift 
boards, (about forty percent.) the balance of 
the log making low-grade lumber of but lit 
tle value. In a large mill the constant hand 
ling and turning of the logs on the head 
blocks of the carriage consumes valuable 
time. This, with the Waste of lumber, makes 
the cost of producing rift flooring far in ex 
cess of the cost of flat-grain boards, and hence 
the market value of rift flooring is about 
thirty-three per cent, higher than flat-grain 
boards, and most of the large sawmills find 
it not profitable to make it, even at the ad 
vanced price. In making quartered oak it is 
customary to quarter the log, then place one 
quarter at a time back on the head-blocks of 
the carriage with the center of the log toward 
the saw, and cut one board at a time. In this 
mode of operation the quarter is hard to dog 
to head-block knees, so as to be held rigidly 
in position, and it consumes a great deal of 
time and the capacity is limited, and when 
the boards leave the saw both edges are bev 
eled. Now, to overcome the defects men 
tioned above, I have invented a machine that 
will manufacture rift, edge-grain, or quarter 
sawed boards at a smaller cost and in greater 
quantity, as my machine requires the mate 
rial to be handled less than on the large cir 
cular or band mill, and everyboard in the log 
- 
is rift, edge-grain, or quarter-sawed, and one 
edge of every board square. 
To the above end the invention consists 
in the novel arrangements and combinations 
of parts which are recited in the appended 
claims. 
The drawings which accompany and form 
part of this specification illustrate an embodi 
ment of the invention. 
In said drawings, Figure 1 is a top view of 
my complete device; Fig. 2, a side elevation, 
and Fig. 3 an end elevation thereof, and Figs. 
4, 5, and 6 are detail views of the saw-guide. 
In the drawings, the letter a designates the 
Supporting framework, which is of any suit 
able construction and supports a table for the 
lumber to traverse. As it is the intention 
that two pieces of lumber shall be under treat 
ment at the same time, but moving in oppo 
site directions, the table may properly be said 
to be divided longitudinally. It is here shown 
as composed of two side bars b, a central longi 
tudinal bar b', and cross-bars b, and loose 
rollers or idlers c and c' are arranged between 
the central longitudinal bar and the side bars, 
there being one set of such rollers for each 
longitudinal half of the table, and those of 
one set being rotatable independently of those 
of the otherset. The two tables may be said 
to be divided from each other by the central 
longitudinal bar. I show two circular saws 
d and e, mounted upon parallel shafts or ar 
bors d' and e', respectively, journaled in bear 
ings on the frame and projecting at the same 
side of the table, where they carry pulleys 
d and e for receiving power. The two saws 
are located near together, one being on one 
side of the central longitudinal bar of the 
table and the other being on the opposite side 
of said bar. Thus the shaft or arbor d ex 
tends partially across one half of the table, 
whereas the shaft or arbore' extends entirely 
across that half of the table and for a short 
distance into the other half of the table. This 
arrangement of the Saws brings them near 
together and reduces the amount of handling 
or turning of the lumber to the minimum, for 
after a board has been sawed from a quarter 
by one saw, the latter has only to be given a 
quarter-turn and moved slightly to position 
for treatment by the other saw. 
Another advantage of the arrangement i 
95 
OO 
IO 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
---, -. 
2 
547,432 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
45 
50 
simplification of driving mechanism, for with 
the pulleys of both saws at the same side of 
the table a single belt can be used to drive 
both saws. The letter f designates this driv 
ing-belt, which it will be seen by reference to 
Fig.2 engages a large driving-pulley g', which 
may be on a counter-shaft above or below the 
machine. Said belt passes over the pulley d 
and under the pulley e, so as to impart mo 
tion to the saws in opposite directions. It may 
be here stated that the saws are set reversely 
i. e., the teeth of one extend oppositely to the 
teeth of the other. There are two tightening 
pulleys applied to the belt f, one of them f' 
pressing against the belt in its stretch be 
tween the pulley g and the pulley d, while the 
other one fengages the belt above the pulley 
e', and this latter tightening-pulley is hung in 
a swinging frame f. By moving this frame 
through connections provided for the conven 
ience of the Sawyer the tension on the belt 
can be varied at pleasure and altogether re 
moved when necessary. In the arrangement 
here shown the counter-shaft is below the mill. 
When the counter-shaft from which power is 
derived is above the mill, the tightening-pull 
ley's are simply reversed. Each saw is con 
fined at its margin in guides of special con 
struction. (Best illustrated in Figs. 4, 5, and 
Castings h, of inverted U shape, are 
6.) 
erected on the table, one spanning each half 
of the table, and each casting is formed with 
a split-socket h", extending through its up 
per side and designed to receive and hold the 
shank hof the bifurcated saw-guide h9. This 
shank is formed in one side with a series of 
teeth or notches h" and a clamping-bolt h, 
passed through the ears of the split-socket, 
and is formed with a tongue h' to engage any 
one of the notches. It will be seen that this 
construction provides for adjusting the guide 
up or down, and at the same time there can 
be no possibility of its dropping upon the saw 
after being once locked in position. The 
arms of the bifurcated guide are formed at 
their lower ends with split-sockets i, which 
receive and hold the screws i', between the 
squared inner ends of which the saw is con 
fined. These screws are adjusted to the thick 
ness of the saw. Guides i, of similar form, 
embrace the edges of the saws at the front. 
(See Fig. 1.) There is a weighted roller lear 
ranged to bear down and in Ward against the 
lumber opposite each Saw, so as to hold the 
lumber in its proper place. Each of these 
weighted rollers is mounted on the end of a 
stem or arbor k', which is pivotally supported 
on one of the castings hand connected by a 
rope to a lever k, swung from an overhead 
beam and controlled by the Sawyer by means 
of a pendent rope. 
It is evident from the nature of the machine 
that there must be a feed mechanism for each 
half of the table, but I have arranged to oper 
ate both feeds from one belt, the arrangement 
being of the following description: 
A pair of Spiked feed-rollers m n' is ar 
ranged on each table, and the journals of the 
rollers of one pair in are extended at one side 
of the machine to receive pulleys in and the 
journal n' of the left-hand pulley in is ex 
tended to the opposite side of the machine, 
where it carries a bevel-gear m, in mesh with 
a similar gear in on a shaft o, extending 
longitudinally of the machine in bearings 
fastened to the side of the same. The jour 
nal n' is provided with a loose sleeve, which 
constitutes one of the series of rollers c'. 
The end spiked roller n' is reduced and ex 
tended to receive a loose sleeve which forms 
one of the rollers c. This shaft carries two 
other bevel-gears m, which mesh with simi 
lar gears m'on the journals of the rollers m'. 
A belt p, passing around the pulleys n, drives 
them in the same direction, producing cor 
responding motion in the feed-rollers 77. The 
motion transmitted to the other feed-rollers m' 
is the reverse, however, by reason of its trans 
mission through the bevel-gearing above de 
scribed. The belt p in its lower stretch is 
carried around a small pulley q on the saw 
arbor d", and a tightening-pulley q' is ar 
ranged to engage the belt below said pulley 
q. This tightening-pulley is supported in a 
swinging frame g, and connections are made 
in any suitable manner, whereby the sawyers 
can operate this frame from either end of the 
machine, so that the feed-belt can not only 
have its tension changed at the will of the 
sawyer, but the feed can be instantly stopped 
at any time and through the above described 
means. The connections here shown for ad 
justing the frame g comprise a bar g, ex 
tending the length of the table and connected 
at the center with the frame and having at 
each end a ratchet-rack q for engagement 
with a keeper and also provided with a han 
dle q. 
Along the center-beam of the table I ar 
range two sets of guiding devices, each com 
posed of a series of bell-crank levers, and each 
lever composed of a spindler, extending ver 
tically through the beam 9, (see Fig. 2.) an arm 
r', fastened to the upper end of the said spin 
dle and carrying a roller r to bear against 
the lumber, and an arm r, fastened on the 
lower end of the spindle. There is a set of 
these bell-crank levers on each side of the 
longitudinal center of the table, and in one 
set the roller-equipped arms project on one 
side of the center beam, while in the other 
set the roller-equipped arms extend on the 
other side of the said beams. There is an 
operating-rods for each set of bell-cranks, 
the rod being jointed to the lower arms and 
extending to the end of the machine, where it 
passes through a collars' under the table, 
and is provided beyond this collar with a 
hand-nuts. 
The general operation of the machine may 
be stated as follows: The logs, having first 
been quartered on a large circular or other 
sawing-machine, are delivered at one side of 
my machine and one of the operators passes 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
to 
II5 
I 25 
 
547,432 
55 
Cd 
one of these quarters through the machine 
in the direction of the arrow in Fig. 1, the 
weighted roller k having first been raised 
and then allowed to drop on the quarter. 
The operator passes the quarter to the feed 
rollers at that side of the machine and they 
feed it to the opposite end of the machine, 
causing a board to be cut off of the quarter 
from one square face, while the other square 
face rests on the table. It is to be noted that 
the quarter is between the saw and the outer 
edge of the table and the board is sawed off 
between the saw and the center of the table. 
Therefore, but a slight movement of the 
quarter is necessary to bring it into position 
for engagement with the other saw. So when 
the quarter reaches the operator at one end 
of the table he gives it a quarter-turn and 
shifts it slightly to bring it in proper relation 
to the other saw. In the meantime another 
quarter is placed on the table by the other op 
erator, and thereafter two quarters are kept in 
the machine and both are sawed at once. The 
boards are sawed alternately from the two 
squared faces of the quarter, so that each 
board will be quarter-sawed. 
Those skilled in the art cannot fail to rec 
ognize the great saving in time and labor ef 
fected by my invention, and also the reduc 
tion in width of the machine, allowing for 
economy of space in the mill. 
The guide devices arranged along the cen 
ter-beam of the table provide for accurate 
adjustment to the proper thickness of board 
to be produced. The usual board-splitters t 
are erected behind the saws. 
It is obvious that I am not limited to the 
particular means here shown for embodying 
my invention, for it might be carried out in 
other ways. 
It should be distinctly understood that I do 
not herein claim a longitudinally double saw 
table having each half provided with an op 
positely-driven saw co-operating with feed 
rollers and an overhanging guide-roller adapt. 
. 
ed to rest upon and hold the quarter-log, as 
herein described; but 
What I claim as my invention is as follows: 
1. In a saw-mill, the combination of a lon 
gitudinally double table, oppositely set cir 
cular saws adjacent to the inner margins of 
the table-halves respectively, means for feed 
ing different pieces of lumber in opposite di 
rections over the table, and means for driv 
ing the saws in opposite directions. 
2. In a saw-mill, the combination of a lon 
gitudinally double table, parallel saw-arbors 
extending transversely of the table, saws op 
positely set on said arbor respectively, and 
positioned in proximity to the inner margins 
of the table halves respectively, means for 
feeding the lumber oppositely over different 
halves of the table, pulleys on the saw-arbors, 
a belt passing over one pulley and under the 
other, a driving pulley engaging said belt, 
and tightening pulleys applied to the latter. 
3. In a sawmill, the combination of a lon 
gitudinally double table, parallel saw-arbors 
extending transversely of the table, saws op 
positely set on said arbors respectively, and 
positioned in proximity to the inner margins 
of the table halves respectively, means for 
feeding the lumber oppositely over different 
halves of the table, pulleys on the saw-arbors, 
a belt passing over one pulley and under the 
other, a driving pulley engaging said belt, 
and a tightening pulley applied to the latter 
and carried in a SWinging frame. 
4. In a circular saw-mill, the combination 
of a bracket or yoke spanning the table, a 
weighted roller on a stem pivoted to said 
bracket, and a saw-guide adjustably fastened 
in said bracket. 
In witness whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
JOIN A IAUSER. 
Witnesses: 
R. G. DU Bots, 
GEO. R. HAMLIN, 
3O 
55 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547532.txt	No Model.) 
No. 547,532, 
D. WRIGLEY. 
ADDRESSING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet, l, 
Patented Oct. 8, 1895. 
WITNESSES: 
7 ic A.e. 
 
zoo's 6-4, 
ATTORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 547,532, 
  
 
 
 
 
 
D, WRIGLEY. 
ADDREssing MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 8, 1895. 
s 
SS 
SSs. 
325iS 
&El . 
  
l W 
A/VAW72/ 
Areze/A24% 
By 22.4% 
ATTORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 547,532, 
 
D. WRIGLEY. 
ADDRESSING MACHINE, 
Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Oot, 8, 1895 
WITNESSES: . 
. 
-- ser 
1N WEATOR P 
Z%zee/2%% 
R 
ATTOREYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 547,532, 
D. WRIGLEY. 
ADDRESSING MACHINE. 
Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
Patented Oot. 8, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES; 
INVENTOR. 
ATTORNEY 
'(No Model.) 
No. 547,532, 
 
D. WRIGLEY. 
ADDRESSING MACHINE. 
7 sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Oct. 8, 1895, 
27 
WITNESSES. 
// ea? 
22 
INVENTOR 
"%rov. 4. 
ATTORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 547,532, 
Z77/7 
 
D. WRIGLEY. 
ADDRESSING MACHINE, 
7. Sheets-Sheet 7 
Patented. Oct. 8, 1895. 
INVENTOR 
Zezzed ArY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL WRIGLEY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ADDRESSING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 547,532, dated October 8, ... < 
Application filed February 25, 1895, Serial No. 539,710, (No model.) 
To all willon, it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, DANIEL WRIGLEY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
5 State of New York, have invented a certain 
- new and useful Improved Addressing-Ma 
chine, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to machines for print 
'Io ing addresses upon wrappers for various 
things, but particularly upon wrappers for 
newspapers and periodicals. This machine 
is designed to print the addresses upon the 
wrappers before they are placed upon the ar 
IS ticles to be wrapped, and, though I prefer to 
do this printing upon a web of wrapping-pa 
per as it is fed through the machine from a 
roll, yet I may print upon sheets previously 
cut to the required length. 
The machine is specially intended for use 
in conjunction with the great presses on which 
the enormous editions of the modern papers 
are printed, which editions it is necessary to 
get out in as short a space of time as possible. 
25. An edition generally includes, with the local 
circulation, a large number of papers which 
must go through the mails, and it is essential 
that the mail edition should be gotten off 
with the greatest dispatch. 
Automatic Wrapping - machines have al 
ready been produced which greatly facilitate 
the work of getting off said mail edition, and 
addressing-machines have been suggested for 
use in conjunction there with: So far as known 
35 to me, however, no such addressing-machine 
has yet been successfully operated in connec 
?tion with a wrapping-machine and a great 
modern press and it a manner to take care 
of the product thereof as fast as produced. 
My machine is made to carry a sufficient 
number of addresses to address the entire 
mail edition of each issue in one continuous 
run, and to deliver the addressed wrappers 
to a wrapping-machine which takes the pa 
45 pers from the press, so that by the conjoint 
operation of the press, the addressing-ma 
chine, and the wrapping-machine the papers 
issue ready for the mail. 
My machine is also constructed so that by 
so the use of. inks of different colors batches of 
papers intended for different cities or to go 
over different routes may be readily distin 
3o 
4. . 
" 
7 o 
75 
65 
My invention consists in an addressing-na- 55 
guished from each other and separated as 
they issue from the wrapping-machine. 
chine for printing addresses directly upon the 
wrapping-paper from address-forms mounted 
upon a movable form-carrier in a manner to 
be successively reciprocated by means within 
the carrier to and from the printing position 6o 
predetermined position in the 
as they reach a 
line of travel. . 
My invention also consists in an addressing 
machine having a carrier in which are mount 
ed a series of drums, each carrying a number 
of addresses and each drum individually mov 
able until all the addresses thereon have 
been used, when the carriage is advanced and 
the addresses on the next drum are printed. 
My invention further consists in an ad 
dressing-machine having a carrier provided 
with a series of rotary drums carrying ad 
dress-forms, in combination-yvith ink-foun 
tains nounted on said carrier and means for 
inking a number of forms on a drum as the 
carrier advances into the printing position. 
My invention also consists in an ink-foun 
tain for addressing-machines constructed to 
retain the supply of ifkin whatever position 
it may be and to return to the fountain any 
surplus ink left on the inking-wheel. 
My invention further consists in the con 
struction of the various features of my ad 
dressing-machine and in the arrangement 
and combination thereof, as hereinafter set 
forth in the description and specified in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure I represents 
im 
in elevation the operator's side of 
proved addressing-machine. Fig.2 represents 
in like manner the opposite or gear side. Fig. 
3 represents a plan of the machine. Fig. 4 
represents a vertical transverse medial sec 
tion showing some of the parts in full and 
onnitting nearly all that is back of the plane 
of section. Fig. 5 represents a plan of one 
half of one of the address carriers or drums. 
Fig. 6 represents in transverse section a por 
tion of said drum, showing address-forms and 
Fig. 7 is a 
form holders or seats in place. 
similar representation with the address-forms 
removed. Fig. 8 is a similar representation 
with the address-forms and form-holders e. 
85 
IOC 
8 
. 
. 
547,532. 
 
. 
O 
25 
moved. Fig. 9 represents one of the form 
holders in side and edge view, respectively. 
Fig. 10 is a like representation of an address 
form. Fig.11 is a plan of an address-form 
5 with an address indicated thereon. Fig. 12 
shows a tool of convenient form for removing 
any one of the address-forms. Fig. 13 is a 
detail view of the tripping mechanism for the 
rack, which causes the inking of the first few 
forms as a form-carrier is moved into print 
ing position. Figs. 14, 15, and 16 are full 
size views of the ink-fountains, the latter fig 
ure being a section taken in the plane of the 
ink distributing and returning wheels. . 
In the preferred form of my addressing-ma 
(S chine, as illustrated in the drawings, I use a 
number of form-carriers mounted upon a suit 
able rotary support and locate the propell 
... ing apparatus for the form - carriers upon a 
2 o framework, which also carries the roll of 
wrapping-paper, the guiding-rolls therefor, 
the impression-wheel, and other necessary 
parts co-operating in feeding the wrapping 
paper through the machine. Each form-car 
rier is in the form of a cylinder or drum, the 
heads of which are indicated at 1, and the 
surface of which is provided with slots ex 
tending lengthwise thereof for the reception 
of the address-forms. These slots, as shown 
in Figs. 5 to 8, are formed by means of bars 2, 
connected at their ends by plates 3, the bars 
and platesforming frames, which are mount 
ed removably upon said heads. The ends of 
said frames rest upon a shoulder formed on 
35 the inner faces of the heads, as indicated in 
Figs. 4 and 5, and are held in place by means 
of screws 4. In these frames are mounted the 
form holders or seats 5, which are constructed 
substantially as indicated in Figs. 6,7, and 9. 
At their upper ends are formed projections, 
by which they rest upon the bars 2, and at 
their lower ends they are provided with pro 
jections, to which are connected plate-springs 
6, that bearpon the under sides of the bars 
45 2. The holders are formed of spring metal 
and their side are bent slightly toward each 
other, so that they may firmly hold the forms. 
As indicated in Figs. 4 and 5, the form 
holders or seats are located side by side in 
so the slots of the drum, and the address-forms 
7, which are of the shape shown in detail in 
Figs. 10 and 11, are inserted in said holders, 
as indicated in Fig. 6. The forms are pro 
vided with suitable means for withdrawing 
them-as, for instance, by tapping into the 
fac thereof in any convenient location a 
socket, as 8, Fig.11, in which a suitable tool, 
as indicated in Fig. 12, may be inserted. 
The forms, as clearly indicated, are placed 
end to end in a spiral about the form-carriers 
and occupy the entire space from one head to 
the other of said carriers, To provide the 
proper support for the forms nearest the 
heads, the plates 3, forming the ends of the 
removable frames, vary successively in thick 
ness from the width of the shoulder at the 
start to the width of the shoulder plus the 
width of a form at the finish. I prefer to at 
range the forms in the manner shown, as in 
that way more of the surface of the cylinder 
can be utilized than if the forms were placed 
side by side in their spiral succession, though 
I do not intend to limit myself to placing 
them end to end. From this manner of mount 
ing the form-holders it will be seen that they 
75 
are capable of being moved from the interior 
of the cylinder or drum so as to protrude one . 
form beyond the others, the springs 6 acting 
to return them to place. Any number of the 
form-carriers just described may be operated. 
together or the machine may be constructed 
with but one of them. 
The support for the form-carrier in the ma 
chine, as illustrated, consists of the axle 9, 
journaled at its ends in suitable brackets 10 
and having rigidly mounted thereon end 
plates 11 and 12. Upon these plates the form 
carriers are mounted in a manner to allow a 
rotary and a longitudinal progressive motion. 
This is accomplished in respect to each drum 
by mounting a shaft, as 13, in each head and 
about one end of this shaft placing a hollow 
screw-threaded shaft 14, which is keyed or 
otherwise rigidly fixed in a suitable bearing 
in the end plate 12, and placing upon the 
other end of said shaft I3 a hollow shaft 15, 
which is mounted to rotate in a suitable bear. 
ing upon the head 11. Upon this compound 
=shaft a form-carrier is mounted by means of 
a nut in one of its heads engaging with the 
screw-threaded shaft, while the other head 
engages the rotary shaft 15 by means of a 
groove and spline. The groove I have shown 
formed in said shaft and the spline 16 fixed 
in the head of the drum. Obviously, the parts 
of this sliding connection may be reversed, if 
desired. 
To provide a rotary motion for the form 
carrier, a gear consisting of a pinion 17, asso 
ciated with a ratchet-wheel 18, is mounted 
upon the end of the hollow shaft 15, as indi 
cated in Fig. 4, and during the printing op 
eration the ratchet-wheel is turned, which, in 
causing the shaft 15 to rotate, carries the 
drum about with it, causing the latter to: 
crawl along the shaft 14. It may here be said 
that the thread of the shaft 14 is identical in 
pitch with the spiral formed by the address 
forms upon the drum. 
To accomplish the reciprocation of the ad 
dress-forms, a calm is located within the drum . 
in such a manner that as the drum is rotated 
and each form approaches a certain point 
said cam shall act upon the form-carrier and 
cause the form to be protruded beyond the 
surface of the other forms. Such a cam, as 
19, I preferably mount, as indicated in Figs. 
1 and 4, upon the shaft 13. I also provide 
for the adjustment of this cam preferably by 
extending the shaft 13 beyond the ratchet 
wheel 18 and attaching thereto an adjusting 
sector 20, which may be rigidly held in any 
adjusted position by means of a screw pass. 
ing therethrough into an arm, as 21, attached 
55 
40 
lo. 
85 
95 
Ou 
fo5 
O 
If 5 
(25 
547,582 
25 
o 
. 
. 
. 
to the end plate 11. The arms 21 are prefer 
ably integrally connected with one another 
and constitute a spider located about the hub 
of the end plate 11, as indicated in Figs. 1 
and 4. I have shown six of these form-car 
riers mounted, as above described, upon the 
support, of which the essential features are 
the end plates 11 and 13. 
The powerfor-operating my addressing-ma 
chine may be applied in any suitable manner; 
but when said machine is used in connection 
with a wrapping-machine and printing-press 
it is preferred to drive it from the press 
mechanism by means of the shaft 22, carrying 
at its end a bevel-gear 23, meshing with a bevel 
gear 24, mounted upon the end of shaft 25, 
upon which is also mounted a pinion 26, 
meshing with the main motor-gear 27, which 
is loose upon the shaft 9. 
When the machine is to be used alone or 
when it is desired to drive it from some other 
power than that above mentioned, it may be 
belted to any suitable power by extending the 
shaft 25, as indicated in Figs. 2 and 4, and 
mounting thereon the usual fixed and idle 
pulleys 28. The ratchet-wheel 18 is driven 
from the motor-gear 27 by means of a pinion 
29, mounted upon a shaft 30, which is jour 
nated in suitable bearings in the sides 3 land 
32 of the frame of the machine and carries at 
its other end a double box cam 33. In the 
raceway of this cam is located a roller 34 
upon the end of a lever 35, which is pivoted 
on a stud projecting from the frame 32 and 
engages, by means of a slot at its other end, a 
stud upon the bar 36, mounted to slide in suit 
able hearings 37, connected to the frame 32. 
To this bar 37 is pivoted a pawl 38, which en 
gages with the ratchet-wheels 18 for the rota. 
tion of the form-carriers. Each form-carrier is 
rotated step by step by means of this ratchet 
mechanism until all its forms have been 
. printed from, at which time, in its progressive 
movement, it has reached the end plate 12, 
and as the last form leaves its impression 
upon the wrapping-paper a cam projection 39 
upon the advance head of the drum strikes 
the head of a pin 40, mounted in a sliding bear 
ing in the end plate 12. There are as many 
of these pins as form-carriers, and the outer 
head of each rests in a notch or Space in a de 
tent-ring 41, formed upon or secured to the 
outer surface of the end plate 12. 
In the 
notches or spaces in this ring a projection or 
detent upon the end of the clutch-lever 42 is 
adapted to rest. This lever 42 is pivoted or 
hinged at its lower end to the base of the ma 
chine and is connected in the usual manner 
by ring and pins 43 to a clutch member 44, 
splined or feathered upon shaft 9. A suit 
able spring-as, for instance, that shown at 
45-is provided for forcing the detent portion 
of said lever into the notches of ring 41 and 
for holding the clutch members apart. As 
will be seen, when the pins 40 are forced out 
ward by the cams 39 on the drums the gear 
27 will be coupled to the shaft 9 by means of 
its clutch member 46 being engaged by the 
clutch-member 44, and the support for the 
form-carriers will be rotated until the lever 
42 drops into the next notch of the ring 41, 
when the clutch will release the gear 27 and 
stop the rotation of said support. This mo 
tion of the support brings another form-car 
rier into the printing position. 
The inking of the forms constitutes an im 
portant feature of my invention, since it is 
desirable, for reasons hereinafter set forth, 
that the fountains should be mounted upon 
the form-carrier Support, and fountains so 
mounted must be specially constructed to 
prevent the ink from flowing or dripping 
therefrom as they assume the different posi 
tions during the rotation of said support. 
Upon the end plate 11 in proximity to each 
form-carrier is mounted a bracket 47, in which 
and in a bracket 48, mounted upon the end 
plate 12, as indicated in Fig. 2, is fixed a 
shaft 49. To this shaft is rigidly secured a 
bracket-bearing 50, in which and in the brack 
ets 47 are journaled shafs 51 and 52. Upolu. 
the shaft 49 the ink-fountain 53 is mounted. 
The shafts 51 and 52, which carry, respect 
ively, the ink-distributing wheel 54 and the 
inking-wheel 55, are rotated in unison by 
means of the pinions 56 and 57, mounted, re 
spectively, upon their outer ends at the out 
side of the bracket 47. The details of the 
ink-fountain will be hereinafter fully set 
forth. In the present stage of the descrip 
tion suffice it to say that the inking-wheel 55 
is of the same breadth as the forms and is so 
located with respect to the form-carriers as 
to rest in the initial position of the latter upon 
the first or just in advance of the first form, 
so that as the form-carriers are rotated and 
advance said wheel shall roll over the forms 
in succession. . 
The inking-wheel receives its rotation dur 
ing the printing operation through the gear 
57, which is in mesh with the gear 17, and its 
rotation is imparted through gear 56 to the 
ink-distributing wheel. It is necessary to 
provide for inking the initial forms upon 
each form-carrier as said carrier is moved by 
the rotation of its support from its idleposi 
tion into the printing position. As one means 
and as I consider it the preferable means for 
accomplishing this purpose, I mount upon 
the frame 32 a rack 58 in a position such 
that it will engage a pinion 59, mounted upon 
the shaft 52, just inside of the 
pinion 57, as 
seen in Figs, 3 and 13. IBy this construction, 
as indicated in Fig. 1, the gear 59 upon the 
advance movement of the form-carrier sup 
port will roll along rack 58, thereby rotating 
the inking-wheel and imparting rotation 
through its associate gear 57 to the form-car 
rier through its gear 17 and to the ink-distrib 
uting wheel through its gear 56. The rack 5S 
is made of such length that upon the inking of 
the proper number of forms the pinion 59 will 
leave it, so that the first form thus freshly 
inked will be in the proper printing position 
. 
35 
45 
55 
55 
o 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
O 
5 
2 
I 25 
A3 
547,532 
 
2d 
4 
upon the arrival of the form-carrier at the 
printing position. This rack may be mounted 
in many ways; but I prefer to so mount it 
that as the last form-carrier passes it it will 
"5 be thrown out of the path of the succeeding 
gears 59, thereby preveriting the useless ink 
ing of the forms in the event of the machine 
being allowed to rotate after the printing has 
been completed. I have shown said rack as 
to pivoted at 60 to the frame 32 and held in op 
erative position by means of a pin 61 spring 
seated in the fraime, 32, as indicated in Fig. 
13. To the rack is also pivoted a rod 62, 
which passes through a puppet-head 63, lo 
15 cated in said frame; and is provided with a 
head, between which and the puppet-head is 
located a spring for retracting said rack. 
Forreleasing therackIprovide acam projec 
tion 64 upon the gear 59, as indicated in Figs. 
3 and 13. This projection engages with an ex 
tension 65 of the pin 61, which lies behind the 
rack 58, as indicated in Fig. 13. The cam 64 
for acting upon the pin 61 to allow the re 
lease of rack 58 is located upon that pinion 
59 which is associated with the last one of the 
2 
5 series of form-carriers. A suitable handle, as 
indicated, is formed upon the rack 58 for plac 
ing it under the retaining projection of pin 61 
... when the machine has been fitted for printing. 
To warn the attendant of the movement of 
C 
3 the form-carrier, a bell, as 66, is mounted 
upon one of the brackets 10, as indicated in 
Eigs. 1 and 4, the hammer of which is actu 
ated by suitable projections, aspins 67, fixed 
35 in the end of shaft,9. As one form-carrier is 
replaced by another in the regular operation 
of the machine, one tap only upon the bell is 
produced, and as the last form upon the last 
form-carrier is printed from the lastone of the 
4o pins 40 is forced outward to fill the last notch 
in the ring 41, so that the form-carrier sup 
port is then free to rotate until the operator 
throws the machine out of gear. This stage 
of the operation will be indicated to the at-. 
45 tendant by two or more taps upon the bell 66. 
In resetting the form-carriers they may be ro 
tated back to starting position in any suitable 
manner, and I simply show one means which 
may be adapted to this end. 
As indicated in Fig. 13, the gear 57 may be 
counterbored and the end of shaft 22 squared 
for the reception of a suitable crank by which 
the shaft 15 may be readily rotated in the re 
verse direction. . 
In the drawings I have indicated the ad 
dressing-machine as associated with a wrap 
ping-machine, a portion of which is indicated 
at 68. When thus associated, the paper-feed 
ing mechanism of said wrapping-machine is 
utilized for drawing the wrapping-paper 69 
from its roll; but when the machine is to be 
used independently of a wrapping-machine 
similar feeding-rolls will be mounted upon 
the frame of the addressing-machine. 
65. The roll of wrapping-paper is indicated as 
supported in suitable open brackets upon the 
frames 31 and 32, while the web extends from 
s 
. 
70 
, 
said roll over the guide-rolls 70,71, 72,73, and 
74 to the feeding-rolls. As the paper passes 
from the guiding-roll 71 to 72, it passes under 
the impression-roller 75. This roller may be 
mounted in a rigid manner in the frame of . 
the machine, though I prefer, for the sake of 
producing clearer and more perfect impres 
sions, to mount this roller so that it will have 75 
a slight reciprocating movement. The roller 
may also be idle and have only such motion 
as it partakes from the moving web; but it is 
preferable to rotate this roller positively and 
at the same speed as that of the forms co-op 
erating there with. The preferred manner of 
mounting and operating said roller is clearly 
indieated in the drawings, which illustrate it 
as carried by a shaft 76, journaled in the ends 
of arms 7778, mounted upon a rock-shaft 79, 85 
journaled in the frames 3132. Upon the outer 
end of the shaft 76, which passes through a 
suitable aperture in the frame 31, is secured 
a pinion 80, which meshes with the gear 27. 
To the arms 77 are connected rods, as 81, which 9o 
pass through suitable puppet-heads in the 
frames 31 and 32 and are provided withheads, 
between which and the puppet-heads are lo 
cated refracting springs 82, as indicated in 
Figs. 1 and 2. Upon the studs projecting 95 
from the frames 31 and 32 are journaled roll 
ers 83, against which, under the influence of 
springs 82, are held wheels mounted upon the 
shaft 76 and bearing cams 84. These cams 
are of the same length as the address-forms, oc 
and as an address-form is protruded the said 
cams ride under rollers.83 and force the im-, 
pression-roller and the paper down into en 
gagement with the protruded form, and as 
the printing from that form is completed the Io 
cams pass from engagement with the rollers 83. 
and the inapression-roller recedes. The re 
ciprocation of the impression-roller is not 
sufficient to withdraw the gear 80 frem en 
gagement with the gear 27, 
In starting up the machine it is necessary 
or desirable in order to locate the address.in 
the proper position upon each wrapper to be 
formed from the web to provide a regulating 
or gage roller, as 74, by which the distance r 
between the point of printing and the point 
of perforating or severing the wrappers from 
the web may be varied. This roller 74 is 
mounted in arms pivoted upon the frames 31 
32, to one of which arms or to the stud bear 12c 
ing the same is connected a sector 85, pro 
vided with means for retaining it in any ad 
justed position. It is also advisable to regu 
late the rotation of the paper-roll, which may 
be done by any suitable form of retarder, as 
the strap-brake indicated at 86. In such an 
addressing-machine some means should be 
provided for stopping its operation imme 
diately upon the breaking of the paper, and 
I have illustrated one of the manyways in 
which this may be done. 
In suitable arms, 
such as 87, pivoted to the frames 31 and 32, 
mount a rocking roller 88, which shall rest 
lightly upon the web of paper between guid 
I3C 
I 25 
f 
A. 
547,582 
70 
75 
85 
90 
95 
Io 
3O 
ing-rolls 70 and 71. To one of the arms 87 
or to the stud bearing the same, I attach an 
arm 89, from the free end of which a cord 90 
is passed over suitable pulleys, as indicated 
5 in Figs. 1, 3, and 4, to the pawl 38. Upon the 
breaking of the paper the roll 88 will rock 
forward and draw the pawl from engagement 
with the ratchet-wheel, thereby stopping any 
and all movement of the form-carriers and 
their support. The tripping of the pawl may 
be signaled to the operator in any suitable 
way; but as one convenient way of so doing I 
have shown a bell, which may be sounded by 
the engagement of a pin 92, projecting from 
the arm 89 into engagement with the spring 
support of the bell 91. 
The operation of the machine may be briefly 
stated as follows: The machine having been 
Once started, the gear 27 is in constant rota 
20 tion, likewise the cam 33 and the impression 
roller 75. As the cam 33 rotates, the bar 36 
is reciprocated, and the pawl 38, being carried 
thereby, rotates the form-carrier with whose 
ratchet-wheel it is engaged step by step until 
25 the last form thereon is printed, from, when 
the cam 39 on the advance head of said car 
rier forces the pin 40 against the lever 42, 
thereby engaging clutch member 44 with the 
one 46, carried by the gear 27, when the shaft 
9 will be rotated until lever 42 drops into the 
next notch in the ring 41, when the clutch be 
comes uncoupled and the rotation of shaft 9. 
is stopped, bringing a fresh form-carrier into 
printing position. As shaft 9 starts into ro 
tation, gear 59 rolls along rack, 58. The ink 
ing-wheel and the ink - distributing wheel, 
together with the form - carrier associated 
therewith, are rotated to ink the initial forms 
upon the new form - carrier. Once in the 
printing position, the pawlinmediately acts 
to rotate it. step by step, and as each new 
form approaches the printing-point the lower 
I end of its support or seat rides upon the sur 
face of eam 19 into co-operation with the im 
pression-roller, depressed at that instant by 
means of the cams 84, the movement of the 
form-carrier due to the ratchet mechanism be 
ing uniform with that of the impression-roller. 
The parts of the machine are so constructed 
and their operation with relation to one an 
other so timed that a definite length of wrap 
ping-paper, sufficieut fr one or more wrap 
pers, passes through the machine while one 
form-carrier is being replaced by another. 
Therefore, if the machine is operating in con 
nection with the wrapping-machine, there will 
be one or more papers without addresses to 
indicate the interval between successive 
form-carriers. I also propose to make this in 
60 terval more easily perceivable by using dif 
ferent-colored inks in the different fountains, 
so that the addresses printed from one cylin 
der being in a certain color indicate that the 
papers printed from that cylinder are in 
65 tended to go in a certain direction or to a cer 
tain place and must be separated from those 
papers printed from the succeeding cylinder 
with a different-colored ink, which ink indi 
cates that the papers on which it appears are 
to go in another direction or to another place. 
The bell 66 also indicates the shifting from 
one drum to another. Where it is desired to 
use but one kind of ink, but one fountain may 
be employed and that located upon the frame 
of the machine in suitable position for its ink 
ing-wheel to roll upon the successive form 
carriers as they are brought into printing posi 
tion; but for the purpose of using different 
colored inks and to provide a fountain for 
each form-carrier, so as to insure perfect co 
operation between the inking-wheels and the 
forms, I mount the ink-fountains upon the 
form-carrier support, substantially as shown 
and described above. 
I prefer, also, to mount 
the ink wells Qr fountains upon the rods 49 
in such a manner that they may be readily 
removed for cleaning and refilling. One way 
of doing this is illustrated in Figs. 14 and 15, 
wherein a suitable seat consisting of two 
brackets 93, keyed or otherwise secured to the 
rod 49, is provided, and upon this seat, by 
means of studs and thumb-screws 94, I mount 
the ink-well 53. This ink-well consists of a 
prismatic-shaped receptacle, in one wall of 
which a slit is formed for the reception of the 
ink-distributing wheel 54 and theink-return 
ing wheel 95. These wheels are supported 
upon short shafts journaled in bearings at the 
sides of said slit and provided with gears 96 
and 97, respectively, which mesh with one an 
other. Associated with the gear 96 is a clutch 
member consisting of a notched hub 96', which 
co-operates with a corresponding member 51' 
upon the end of shaft 51 having a projection . 
51 fitting into said notch. By means of this. 
clutch or slipjoint the fountain is rendered 
easily removable from the shaft operating 
the wheels running in the slit, as described. 
The inking-wheel 55 has no direct connection 
to the fountain, but it is so located as to co 
operate with the distributing-wheel to receive 
its supply of ink. The fountain should be 
sealed in a manner to prevent the ink from 
escaping therefrom no matter what the posi 
tion of the fountain may be. One means of 
sealing it is illustrated in detail in Fig. 16. 
In the bottom of the fountain is placed the 
usual form of regulating-plate 98, seated in 
the ordinary way in grooves in the side walls 
of the fountain; but this plate in my improved 
fountain, instead of bearing upon the distrib 
uting-wheel, bears upon the. supplemental 
returning-wheel 95, in substantially the same 
manner, however, as it has heretofore been 
used in connection with the ink-distributing 
wheel. This plate may be set at the desired 
proximity to the wheel 95 by means of set 
screw 99. To regulate the amount of ink 
which shall be carried from the 'well upon 
the wheel 54, I provide a gage-plate 100, which 
shall rest against the under side of the cover 
of the fountain and have projecting through 
a slot in said covera, nut, as 101, through which 
set-screw 102, located upon said cover, shall 
5o 
55 
40 
45 
OO 
Ios 
o 
I I5 
I 25 
547,532 
7 d . 
pass. By this set-screw the gage-plate 100 
may be moved backward and forward, as de 
sired. It is preferably notched at the end 
bearing upon the wheel 54. Wheels 54 and 
95 fit closely the sides of the slit in which. 
they turn. Any excess of ink left upon the 
wheel 54 after engagement with the inking 
wheel is returned to the fountain by the 
wheel 95. This wheel, as shown, rotates at 
the same speed as the wheel 54; but with thin 
inks it is desirable to rotate it faster. The 
cover of the ink-well is shown as-screwed in 
place, but obviously it might be clamped in 
place by any usual removable clamp. 
In constructing an addressing - machine 
with but one cylinder or form-carrier, said 
form-carrier may be mounted substantially as 
the one shown in operation and mounted on 
a fixed support, the remaining form carriers 
being simply omitted. The machine, as rep 
resented, is so constructed that each form-car 
rier shall bear fourteen hundred and forty 
forms or addresses, making the capacity of the 
machine eighty-six hundred and forty, which 
is sufficient for most of the mail editions of 
our daily papers. 
The capacity of such a ma 
chine, however, is unlimited, since the form 
earriers may be made of any length desired 
and any number of them may be mounted 
upon the same rotary support. 
The forms from which the printing is done 
I have shown as stereotype-forms, provided 
with some suitable means for securing them 
in the reciprocating form holders or seats 5. 
They may, however, be of any other form and 
may consist of type clamped in a suitable 
holder such as can be held in a reciprocating 
seat. At any time when an address is to be 
dropped from the list it is an easy matter to 
withdraw the form bearing it and insert an 
other, in its place by the use of the tool shown 
in Fig. 12, or by some other suitable means, 
and if anything should happen to the form 
holders or seats, or it should be necessary to 
replace one or more of then, the frames car 
rying the same may be easily removed from 
the drums by withdrawing the screws 4. 
Many changes may be made in the construc 
tion, formation, and arrangement of the sev 
eral parts constituting my addressing ma 
chine without departing from the spirit of my 
invention, which is exemplified in the appara 
I 
tus illustrated and described. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a rotating reciprocating impression 
roller, of progressively moving address forms 
reciprocating laterally as to the line of move 
ment. , 
2. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a rotating reciprocating impression 
roller, of address forms, and means for feed 
ing wrapping paper between said platen and 
forms. 
3. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a rotating intermittently recipro 
cated impression roller of address forms in 
/ 
90. 
termittently reciprocated and advanced while 
in co-operation with said roller. 
4. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with the frame thereof, of arms pivoted 
thereon, a shaft journaled in the free ends of 
said arms, an impression roller on said shaft, 
springs for swinging said arms in one direc 
tion, cams upon said shaft, and rollers mount 75 
ed upon the frame of the machine and co-op 
erating with said cams to move the impres 
sion roller in opposition to said springs. 
5. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a rotary form carrier having a pro 
gressive longitudinal movement, of a succes 
sion of forms arranged in a spiral line thereon 
and each individually movable, means for au 
tomatically rotating said carrier and means 
located within it for successively reciprocat 
ing said forms, as the carrier progresses. 
6. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a cylindrical for in carrier or drum 
having a progressive longitudinal movement, 
of a series of forms arranged in a spiral line 
about it from end to end thereof and eachin 
dependently movable, a spring for returning 
each to its normal position, and means fixed 
within the carrier for successively protruding 
each form beyond the others. 
7. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a rotating drum having an auto 
matic progressive longitudinal movement, of 
individually movable address forms mounted 
thereon, and means within the drum and fixed 
upon the shaft thereof for successively recip 
rocating said forms as each arrives at a fixed 
point. 
8. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a fixed screw-threaded shaft, of a 
drum mounted to rotate thereon as a nut, 
means for rotating the drum, address forms 
in the periphery of the drum each individu 
ally movable beyond the surface of the others, 
and means upon said shaft for successively 
protruding each form beyond the others as 
the drum rotates. 
9. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a shaft having a can thereon, a hol 
low screw-threaded shaft fixed in a suitable 
bearing and serving as a bearing for the eam 
carrying shaft, a rotary drum having a nut in 
one end turning upon the screw-threaded 
shaft, and address forms movably mounted 
in the surface of said drum and provided with 
means for successively engaging said cam for 
the purpose specified. 
. 
10. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a fixed screw-threaded shaft, a hol. 
low drum mounted thereon and provided with 
a nut fitted to said thread, theans for rotating 
the drum, address forms spirally and movably 
mounted in the surface of the drum, and an 
adjustable cam within the drum for success 
ively protruding each form 
face of the others. 
11. In an addressing machine, the combia. 
tion with a screw-threaded shaft fixed in a 
suitable bearing, another shaft in line there 
w 
- 
C. 
Ios 
I Io 
I I5 
beyond the sur 130 
I 25 
Io 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
547,532. 
O 
15 
25 
30 
35 
So 
55 
 
. 
with mounted to rotate in a suitable bearing, 
a drum mounted upon said shafts, and having 
a nut engaging the screw-threaded shaft and 
engaging the rotary-shaft by means of a groove 
and spline, address forms mounted upon said 
drum, and means for printing therefrom suc 
cessively. 
J2. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a shaft provided with a cam, a hol 
low screw-threaded shaft on one end of the 
cam-shaft and fixed rigidly in a suitable bear 
ing, another hollow shaft on the other end of 
the cam shaft and mounted to rotate in a suit 
able bearing, a drum mounted upon said 
shafts and engaging the screw-threaded shaft 
by means of a nut. and the rotary-shaft by 
means of a groove and spline, and address 
forms movably mounted in said drum and suc 
cessively protruded by means of said can. 
13. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a shaft provided with a cam, means 
for adjusting said cam, a hollow screw-thread 
ed shaft upon one end of the cam-shaft and 
fixed in a suitable bearing, a hollow shaft 
upon the other end of the cam-shaft and 
mounted to rotate in a suitable bearing and 
provided with a ratchet mechanism for inter 
hittently rotating it, and an address carry 
ing drum mounted by a screw-thread upon 
the threaded-shaft and by a groove and spline 
upon the rotary-shaft. 
14. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a rotating longitudinally progress 
ing drum, of address forms mounted therein 
in close proximity to one another on all sides 
and extended end to end in a close spiral 
about the drum from one head thereof to the 
other, and means within the drum and fixed 
upon the shaft thereof for successively pro 
truding each form beyond the others and re 
taining it in that position while the drum ro 
tates the length of a form. 
15. The combination with the drum pro 
vided with slots extending longitudinally of 
its periphery, of a series of reciprocating seats 
in each slot located side-by-side against one 
another afid so arranged that they shall suc 
ceed each other in successive slots in a spiral 
about the drum, each seat being adapted to 
hold an address form, and springs for holding 
the seats in the slots. 
18, The combination with the drum heads, 
of a Series of raeks extending from head to 
head and provided with end pieces of varying 
thicknesses, as and for the purpose set forth. 
17. The combination with the drum and the 
clamping seats secured therein, of the address 
forms held in said, seats and provided with 
screw-threaded sockets to receive a tool for 
removing them. 
18. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion of a series of form carriers mounted upon 
a common support, a number of address forms 
mounted in succession upon each carrier, 
mechanism for automatically moving said 
support intermittently to bring each carrier 
successively into the printing position, and 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
; 
means for automatically moving each carrier 
while in that position until its forms have 
been successively printed from. 
19. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a movable support, of rotary form 
carriers mounted thereon, means for rotating 
each form carrier until all its forms have been 
printed from, and means for automatically 
shifting said support to replace the carrier 
just printel from by another. 
20. In an addressing machine, the combilla 
tion with a rotating support, of longitudinally 
movable rotating 
form - carriers mounted 
thereon. 
21. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a rotating support provided with lon 
gitudinally, extending screw-threaded shafts, 
a rotating cylinder on each shaft provided 
with a nut turning on said screw-thread, and 
address forms mounted upon said cylinders. 
22. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion of a rotating support provided with 
screw-threaded shafts fixed in one end there 
of and with rotary shafts in alignment there 
with mounted in bearings in the other end 
thereof, cylindrical form carriers mounted on 
said shafts and each provided with a nut en 
gaging a Screw-threaded shaft and engaging 
a rotary shaft by means of a groove and 
spline, and means for printing from each form 
as they arrive successively at a certain point. 
23. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a rotary support, of rotary cylin 
drical form carriers mounted thereon to move 
longitudinally while rotating, and mechanism 
automatically operated by the movement of 
each cylinder to throw into gear the mechan 
ism for rotating said support. 
24. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with a rotary support, of rotary form car 
riers mounted thereon, step-by-step mechan 
ism for rotating the carriers in succession, a 
detent for holding the support rigid while the 
carriers are in operatiou, and means operated 
by the carriers for releasing said detent and 
throwing into gear the rotating mechanism of 
said support. . 
25. The combination with the rotary sup 
port and its rotating longitudinally movable 
carriers, of the step-by-step mechanism for 
operating the carriers, the clutch mechanism 
for coupling said support to the motive power, 
and the detent operated by said mechanism 
to release the support as the coupling goes 
into operation. 
26. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with the form carriers and their. rotary 
support, of the clutch for throwing the latter 
into and out of rotation, reciprocating pins lo 
cated in one head of said support, a detent ring 
upon said head whose notches coincide with 
said pins, a detent upon the clutch lever 
adapted to enter said notches and rest upon 
said pins, and cams upon the form carriers. 
for operating upon the pins to throw the de 
tent out of engagement with the ring and the 
clutch into gear. 
Y 
8 
547,532 
. . 
To co-operation with said pawl. 
27. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with the rotary support and the form 
carriers mounted thereon, of a ratchet wheel 
seeured to threshaft of each carrier, a pawi. s 
5 mounted upon the frame of the machine, con 
tinuously operating mechanism for driving 
said pawl, and intermittently operating mech 
anism for rotating said support and bringing 
each of said ratchet wheels successively into 
28. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with the rotary support and its rotary 
form carriers, of the motor gear idle upon the 
shaft of said support, a shaft mounted in the 
15 frame of the machine and carrying at one 
end a gear in mesh with the motor gear and 
a cam upon the other end, a lever, pivoted to 
the frame of the machine and rocked by said 
cam, a rod reciprocated by said lever, and a. 
... 20 pawl carried by said rod for rotating the form 
carriers. 
29. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with the rotary support and the rotary 
form carriers mounted thereon, of ink foun 
25 tains and inking wheels also mounted on said 
support, and means for producing co-opera 
tion between the inking wheels and the initial 
forms upon each carrier as the support rotates. 
it into printing position. . 
, 30 30. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with the rotary support and the rotary 
form carriers inouited thereon, of ink foun 
, s: tains provided with inking wheels mounted 
3, in said support, gears connecting the wheels 
35 of each fountain to the gear on a shaft of the 
carrier and a rack upon the frame of the ma 
24 
chine for rotating said gears as each carrier 
w 
is moved into printing position. 
31. In an addressing machine, the combina 
40 tion with the rotary support, its form carriers 
and co-operating inking mechanism, of a rack 
for rotating each carrier as it moves into 
printing position, and means. for throwing 
said rack into an inoperative position as the 
4S last carrier is moved into printing position. 
32. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with the automatically and intermittently 
movable rotary support and its form carriers, 
of projections upon the shaft of the support, 
5o and a bell whose hammer is operated by said 
projections as the form carriers are moved 
into printing position. 
'1'. 33. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with the support for the form carriers, of 
55 a rodextending from head-to-head thereof, an 
ink fountain secured to said rod, a bracket 
secured to the rod at the side of the fountain, 
and shafts journaled in bearings in said 
bracket and upon one of the heads of the sup-l 
. 
. 
 
DANIEL WRIGLEY. 
. 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. CAPEL, 
HENRY T. HIRSCH. 
- 
a - 
75 
8o 
port, inking wheels at one end of said shafts, 6o 
and gears at the other rotated from a gear on 
the shaft of a form carrier. 
34. In an addressing machine; the combina- - - 
tion with the support for the form carriers, of 
a rod extending across said support, a seat 
65 
clamped thereto, an ink fountain containing 
an inking wheel and clamped to said seat, a 
clutch member upon the shaft of the inking 
wheel, and an operating shaft for said wheel 
journaled in bearings. on said support and 
carrying a clutch inember for engagement 
with the other clutch member. 
35. In an addressing machine, the combina 
tion with the rotary support and a form car 
rier thereon, of an invertible sealed ink foun 
tain fixed to said support, an ink distributing 
wheel rotating therein and partially protrud 
ing therefrom, and means cooperating with 
said wheel for returning to the fountain the 
surples ink left on said wheel: ; 
36. An invertible sealed ink fountain hav 
ing an ink distributing wheel rotating in the 
wall thereof, and means cooperating with said 
wheel for returning to the fountain the sur 
plus ink left upon said wheel in whatever 85 
position the fountain may be. 
37. An ink fountain, having a distributing 
wheel rotating in a slit in the wall thereof, 
and an ink returning wheel also rotating in 
said slit at the return side of the distributing 
wheel. . 
38. An invertible sealed ink fountain hav 
ing an ink distributing wheel rotating in a 
closely fitting slit in the wall theredf, and a 
second wheel also mounted to rotate in said 95 
slit and co-operating with the returning side . 
of the distributing wheel to return to the 
fountain any ink remaining upon the latter. 
39. An invertible sealed ink fountain hav 
ing a distributing and a returning, wheel 
mounted in a wall thereof, and provided with 
adjustable gages for regulating the amount . 
of ink carried out by said wheels. 
40... The combination with a form carrier 
and its ratchet wheel, of the cam 33, the rod 
reciprocated thereby, the pawl pivoted to said 
rod, the rocking roll resting upon the web of 
paper passing through the machine, and a 
connection from said roll to the pawl for with 
drawing the same from the ratchet wheel rio 
when the paper breaks. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 23d day of 
February, A.D. 1895. 
ics 
C 
f 
. 
. 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547632.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 547,632, 
W. F. DIAL, 
SEWING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 8, 1895, 
%-ay/e-re-4 
ever 77 a. 
 
a Nof BigAHAMPHOTO-O, was Nix.c. 
(No Model.) 
W. F. DIAL 
SEWING MACHINE. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 547,632. 
Patented 00t, 8, 1895. 
S.p2S 
   
 
 
 
 
 
Sle 
Q}S 6. 
N) 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILBUR. F. DIAL OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WHEELER & WILSON MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SEWING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 547,632, dated October 8, 1895. 
Application filed May 8, 1894, serial No. 510,470. (No model.) 
Io 
To att, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILBUR. F. DIAL, of 
Bridgeport, county of Fairfield, State of Con 
necticut, have invented an Improvement in 
5 Sewing-Machines, of which the following de 
scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters 
and figures on the drawings representing like 
parts. 
In the use of a sewing-machine by an oper 
ator, the Work has frequently to be removed 
from under the presser-foot, and it is custom 
ary for the operator to lift the presser-foot, 
then breakoff the thread, and pull the work out 
15 from under the foot. Operators are instructed 
to see that the take-up is at its highest point 
when the work is removed; but frequently this 
feature is overlooked, and as a result when the 
machine is started and not enough thread has 
2 o been drawn through the tension device and 
needle-eye the take-up unthreads the needle. 
To obviate this trouble and avoid the waste 
of time of the operator, as well as to lessen 
the care in running the machine, I have de 
25 vised and combined with the stitch-forming 
mechanism an auxiliary independent shaft 
turning device, whereby when the machine 
has come to rest and the work is to be re 
moved, the said shaft, and with it the take-up 
3o actuating mechanism, may be moved suffi 
ciently to put the take-up in substantially its 
highest position, said auxiliary moving de 
vice being inactive during the operation of 
sewing and being active only after the ma 
35 chine has been stopped and between the time 
the machine is stopped and is again to be 
started for stitching, my device not in any 
way controlling or measuring the throw of the 
take-up according to the thickness of the ma 
In the mannerin which I have herein chosen 
to illustrate my invention in this particular 
I have made the usual presser-foot lifter as 
the actuating device for the means employed 
45 to move the take-up-actuating mechanism, 
that being a simple form of my invention. 
Figure 1 in side elevation, partially broken 
out, shows a sewing-machine of well-known 
construction with my improvements added; 
5o Fig. 2, a front end elevation with the cap 
plate removed, the take-up being down. Fig. 
4o terial under the presser-foot. 
 
3 shows the same parts above the bed-plate, 
but in a different position; Fig. 4, a partial 
section at one side of the presser-bar. Figs. 5 
and 6 show a modification, and Fig. 7 shows 
the lever e' detached. 
The framework A, having the rotatable 
needle-actuating shaft A', provided at itsfront 
end with a hub or plate having a crank-pin C, 
connected by linkb to a projection on a block 
connected with the needle-bar b' and having 
a cam-groove bin its periphery to receive the 
roller or other studb of the take-up b, pivoted 
at b, the presser-bar C, having the presser-foot 
c, the connection d, joined at its upper end to a 
crank on the needle-bar-actuating shaft and 
sliding on a fulcrum d' and having at its 
lower end a crank-pin d to enter a slot in an 
arm d, attached to the loop-taker shaft d", 
said shaft having imparted to it by said con 
nection a variable rotary motion, a loop-taker 
d, connected to said shaft, and the bobbin 
holderd, having a cross-bard and held in po 
sition by a screw d, connected to a portion of 
the framework, and the latch d to keep the 
bobbin-holder in place, and the tension de 
vice t are and may be all as common in the 
Wheeler & Wilson machine, style No. 9, ex 
cept as to the link b, which is somewhat dif 
ferently shaped along one edge. 
I have provided the presser-bar C (see Figs. 
2 to 4) or a part moving in unison there with 
with an actuatore, which when elevated acts 
against a lever or auxiliary independent 
shaft-moving device e', represented as piv 
oted at e and normally held down by a 
spring e, said lever having a projection 3 and 
being shown as located between the usual 
needle-bar and the link b referred to for actu 
ating the same, said link being slightly 
changed, however, in shape so as to enable 
said projection, when the lever is operated as 
will be described, to slide freely upwardly 
along and off over the top of the link into the 
osition shown by dotted lines, Fig. 3, which 
it could not do if the link were of usual shape 
that is, if its end having the hole for the re 
ception of the stud a were nearly circular and 
of greater diameter than the width of the link. 
dle is represented as above the work-plate or 
throat, it will be seen that when the presser 
In Figs. 1 to 3, where the point of the nee- Ioo 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
547,632 
7 o 
75 
according to the thickness of the work under 
the presser-foot, and it does not so work, and 
the independent auxiliary shaft-moving de 
vice operates only after the machine has been 
brought to rest with the crank-pin a at or 
above the center of the shaft A. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A needle-bar having an eye-pointed nee. 
dle, a rotating needle-bar actuating shaft, a 
link connecting said shaft and needle-bar, a 
take-up constructed and arranged independ 
ently of the needle-bar, and take-up actuating 
devices deriving movement from the needle 
bar actuating-shaft during the sewing opera 
tion, combined with an auxiliary shaft-mov. 
ing device to at times engage a portion of the 
needle-actuating mechanism and thereby 
turn the shaft after the machine has ceased 
sewing, such turning of the shaft effecting an 
independent and supplementary movement 
of the take-up and causing it to pull off 
enough needle thread to prevent the un 
threading of the needle, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a sewing machine, the following in 
strumentalities, viz;-a presser-bar; an actu 
ator e, means to move it; a take-up; a shaft, g 
a take-up actuating cam thereon, the needle 
bar, and link b, combined with the lever e' to 
engage the link band effect the movement of 
the said take-up actuating mechanism to put 
the take-up in substantially its highest posi 
tion and thereby draw off sufficient thread to 
prevent unthreading of the needle when be 
ginning to sew, the thread in the mean time 
having been broken, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. A needle-bar having an eye-pointed nee 
dle, a rotating needle-bar actuating shaft, a 
link connecting said shaft and needle-bar, a 
take-up, and take-up actuating devices de 
riving movement from said shaft during the 
Sewing operation, combined with an actuator 
and means to raise it, an auxiliary shaft-mov 
ing device arranged between the needle-bar 
and the connecting link and operated by the 
raising of the actuator after the sewing op 
eration ceases, to give further movement to 
the shaft and thereby actuate the take-up and 
cause it to pull off enough needle thread to 
prevent the unthreading of the needle, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILBUR. F. DIAT. 
Witnesses: 
ISAAC IIOLDEN, 
A. E. PORTER, 
95 
Od 
I C5 
to 
I 5 
bar is lifted by the action of the usual presser 
bar lifter h the finger h' of said lifter will 
move the actuator e, and the latter in turn 
will act against and move the lifter e', consti 
5 tuting the auxiliary independent shaft-mover, 
causing it to engage the link b, occupying a 
position, it may be, substantially as in Fig. 
2, or a position with the stud a. at or above 
the center line of the shaft A', and will cause 
1o the said shaft, the machine having been pre 
viously stopped, to be turned for a part of a 
revolution, thus causing the take-up-actuat 
ing means, herein shown as a cam and having 
the groove b, to move into a position to put 
I5 the take-up into substantially its highest po 
sition in case it had not been left in such po 
sition when the machine was stopped, the 
putting of the take-up in substantially its 
highest position after the machine has been 
20 stopped and before starting it again insuring 
the pulling off from the usual thread supply 
for the needle of a sufficient quantity of 
thread, so that when the machine is again 
started the movement of the needle-bar and 
25 the take-up will not effect the unthreading of 
the needle. This invention is not limited, 
however, to the particular construction shown 
for the lever or devices employed for partially 
rotating the shaft independently of its usual 
3o driving mechanism after the machine has 
been stopped and thus move with it the actu 
ating means for the take-up in order that it 
may put the take-up in proper position to 
avoid unthreading the needle, as stated, and 
35 instead 1 may employ any other usual or suit 
able devices, and it will be readily seen that the 
shape and construction of the devices may be 
changed by the exercise of only the skill of 
the mechanic and without invention, accord 
4o ing to the particular mechanism to which my 
invention is to be applied, and this invention 
is not limited to the particular shape of the 
take-up or to the particular shape of the take 
up-actuating means. While I prefer that the 
45 actuator, for simplicity, be connected directly 
to the presser-bar, yet this invention is not 
limited to mounting said actuator on the 
presser-bar, as, instead, the actuator (marked 
e, Fig. 5) may have an independent guide or 
5C support which may be actuated by a lifter g, 
which may be the usual lever or may be an 
independent lever or device suitably located 
for that purpose. In Fig. 6, showing this 
modification, it will be understood that the 
lever e' may be moved by the leverg even 
when the presser-foot is down, and conse 
quently the take-up-actuating mechanism 
may be lifted independently to draw off a 
proper amount of thread. 
This machine is not devised or intended to 
vary the throw of the take-up automatically 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547732.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 547,732. 
 
G. W. MARBLE, 
WOODEN RIM BICYCLE WHEEL, 
Patented 00t, 8, 1895. 
7&z-esses . 
2-6 awa 
T 
M 
Z72 z e 7 ca?ez 
Georye 7-Zarzze 
-454...d7 2.12%-6, 
223 422%27aee/ 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. MARBLE, OF PLYMOUTH, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO THE INDIANA 
NOVELTY MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
WOODEN-RIM BICYCLE-WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 547,732, dated October 8, 1895. 
Application filed December 22, 1893, Serial No. 494,417, (No model. Patented in England April 9, 1894, No. 7,062, 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. MARBLE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in 
Plymouth, in the county of Marshall and 
5 State of Indiana, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Wooden - Rim Bicycle 
Wheels, (for which I have obtained British 
patent, dated April 9, 1894, No. 7,062,) of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
bicycle-wheels, and to that particular class of 
bicycle-wheels having wooden rims. Hereto 
fore Wooden rims for bicycle-wheels have 
usually been made from a continuous or single 
I5 strip of Wood curved into the proper circular 
form and having its meeting ends skived off 
at an angle and overlapped, forming an ordi 
nary lap-joint, secured together by glue and 
Sometimes by wrapping with thread or fabric, 
2O or else the wooden rims have been built up of 
a number of thin strips glued one upon an 
other. Owing to the necessary curved-cross 
section of the rim to form the annular chan 
nel to receive the tire serious objections have 
25 been found in practice to the composite or 
built-up rim composed of a series of thin 
Strips, and as the bicycle-wheel is of the ten 
sion-spoke character, so that its strength and 
Stiffness depends upon the rigidity of the 
3o continuous or circular arch formed by the 
rim of the wheel, it is obvious that where the 
Wooden rim is made of a single solid strip of 
wood with its meeting ends skived off and 
lapped together the whole strain or tension 
35 of the wheel must necessarily come upon this 
lap-joint and tend to loosen the same and de 
stroy the wheel or cause the two skived and 
lapped parts to slip toward each other. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
4o Wooden-rim bicycle-wheel wherein the rim 
may be made of a single solid strip of wood, 
and which will be of a strong and efficient 
as well as simple and cheap construction, 
and wherein the joint at the meeting ends of 
the solid strip will not tend to weaken or 
diminish the natural strength of the circular 
arch, and wherein, also, the tension and 
strain of the wheel upon the arch will not 
tend to loosen or weaken the joint forward 
between the two or more meeting ends of the 
strip. 
To this end my invention consists in a 
bicycle-wheel having a wooden rim composed 
of one or more solid strips of wood, and pre 
ferably a single solid strip, and having its or 
their meeting ends joined together by a series 
of interlocking tongues and grooves extend 
ing longitudinally of the strip or strips. The 
meeting ends of the strip thus abut Squarely 
together end to end, so that the arch of the 
rim is in fact as strong at the joint as else 
where, and the strain or tension of the wheel 
upon the arch also of course simply tends to 
compress the meeting and abutting ends 
more firmly together, so that the strain or 
tension has no tendency whatever to Weaken 
or loosen the joint. The interlocking or in 
terfitting tongues and grooves are preferably 
formed with parallel sides, though this of 
course is not an absolute essential. The 
abutting ends of the interlocking tongues and 
grooves are also preferably square, but this 
likewise is not necessary. The interlocking 
tongues and grooves are likewise preferably 
formed of the same length, although the con 
struction may be varied in this regard, if de 
sired. The joint as a whole or the series of in 
terlocking tongues and grooves are also pref 
erably arranged to extend in a band trans 
versely or at right angles across the rim, but 
it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that 
the series of interlocking tongues and grooves 
might be arranged to extend otherwise than 
square across the rim-as, for example, diag 
onally. It will thus be seen that the tongued 
and grooved meeting ends of the rim abut one 
against the other, so that the full natural 
strength of the circular arch is preserved at 
the joint and so that the strain or tension of 
the wheel upon the circular arch has no 
tendency to weaken or loosen the joint. By 
means of these interlocking tongues and 
grooves extending longitudinally or in the di 
rection of the rim at the meeting ends of the 
strip I have discovered that an exceedingly 
firm, strong, and durable Wooden rim may be 
formed, having no tendency to work loose or 
become weakened at the joints when under 
strain or in use, and Wherein, also, the joint 
formed in the rim is perfectly water-tight, so 
that no moisture can work in or through the 
rim at the joint, and wherein the form of the 
 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
547,782 
joint in no way tends to weaken or diminish 
the natural strength of the arch, and wherein, 
too, the compressing strain or tension upon 
the arch has no tendency to weaken or loosen 
the joint. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, and in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate like parts 
throughout all the views, Figure l is a side 
elevation of a bicycle-wheel embodying my 
invention. Fig.2 is an enlarged cross-section 
taken on line 22 of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is an 
enlarged detail view showing in plan the joint 
formed at the meeting ends of the wooden rim. 
In the drawings, A represents the hub of a 
bicycle-wheel; B, its tension-spokes; C, itselas 
tic tire, and D its wooden rim. The rim D is 
preferably made of a single solid continuous 
strip of wood curved into proper circular 
shape and furnished with the annular chan 
nel or groove D', constituting the seat for the 
pneumatic or other elastic tire C. This 
Wooden rim is furnished at its meeting ends 
with a series of interfitting or interlocking 
tongues and grooves d d", extending longi 
tudinally or in the direction of the rim. The 
opposite sides d d of each of the tongues d 
and of the grooves d' are preferably parallel 
to each other and to the plane of the wheel, 
though the construction may be varied in this 
regard. The ends d of each of the tongues 
d and of the grooves d' are preferably square 
or at right angles to the direction of the 
rim, as they thus have a better abutment the 
One against the other, and produce no tend 
ency to spread apart or split the rim, though 
the construction may be varied in this re 
gard. The series of interlocking tongues and 
grooves did d' d' are arranged, preferably, to 
extend transversely or at right angles across 
the rim, although the construction may be va 
ried in this regard. The preferable construc 
tion is also to make all the tongues and their 
corresponding grooves of the same length, al 
though the construction in this respect may 
likewise be varied. The interfitting tongues 
and grooves d di', when properly interlocked 
or fitted together under pressure, are secured 
together by glue or other suitable cement, 
thus forming a firm, strong, and water-tight 
joint. 
Another advantage secured by my im 
proved form of wooden rim and construction 
of joint is that the joint may be so short as 
to avoid the necessity of making any of the 
spoke-holes or other holes through it. Here 
tofore the length of the joint has been nec 
essarily such that one or more spoke-holes 
must be formed through it, and, as is well 
known to those skilled in the art, wherever 
there is a hole made through the joint the 
tendency is for moisture to work in and in 
time loosen or injure the glued or cemented 
joint. 
I claim 
1. In a bicycle wheel, the combination with 
a pneumatic or elastic tire and suspension 
spokes, of a wood rim consisting of a solid 
strip of wood bent to circular form, channeled 
on its outer periphery to receive said tire, and 
having its meeting ends each provided with 
a series or multiplicity of long narrow inter 
fitting tongues and grooves, glued together, 
extending longitudinally of the rim and in the 
plane of the wheel, the ends of the tongues 
on one end of the rim strip fitting or abutting 
against the end or bottom of the correspond 
ing grooves on the other end of the rim strip, 
whereby said rim is furnished with means for 
performing the triple functions of resisting 
collapse or compression due to the tension of 
said suspension-spokes, of acting tensilely to 
bind or hold the parts of the wheel together, 
and of resisting breakage, flexure or displace 
ment, as required in its combination with said 
pneumatic tire and suspension-spokes, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. In a bicycle wheel, the combination with 
an elastic tire and suspension spokes of a 
wood rim serving to resist collapse or com 
pression, tensile strains, and also breaking or 
flexure strains, and consisting of a solid strip 
of wood, channeled on its outer periphery to 
receive said tire, and having its meeting ends 
furnished with a series or multiplicity of in 
terfitting tongues glued together, the glued 
side surfaces of said interfitting tongues af 
fording an extended glue surface lying sub 
stantially in the plane of the wheel and lon 
gitudinally of the rim so as to resist tensile 
and breakage or flexure strains, substantially 
as specified. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE W. MARBLE. 
H. M. MUNDAY, 
EMMA. HACK. 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9) 
95 
I Od 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547832.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 547,832. 
J. H. AND RUS. 
GATE, 
Patented 00t. 15, 1895, 
 
 
w 
tags. 
w 
 
: 
I72 veztor: 
-:3 t 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. ANDRUS, OF BELVIDERE, ILLINOIS. 
GATE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 547,832, dated October 15, 1895. 
Application filed February 20, 1895, Serial No. 539,149. (No model.) 
15 gate. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN H.ANDRUS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Belvidere, 
in the county of Boone and State of Illinois, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Gates, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to construct 
a gate with a section having a hinge connec 
Io tion with a supporting post and a section hav 
ing a sliding connection with the hinged sec 
tion. 
In the accompanying drawing I have shown 
an isometrical representation of my improved 
The hinged section is composed of two sets 
of uprights land 2, held separated by the 
lengthwise bars 3 and diagonal braces 4. A 
roller 5 is supported by the uprights 1, and a 
2c roller 6 is supported by the uprights 2. This 
section of the gate is connected to the sup 
porting-post 7 by the hinges 8. The sliding 
section of the gate is composed of the length 
wise bars 9, connected at their ends by the 
25 vertical cleats 10. The roller 6 supports the 
upper lengthwise bar of the sliding section, 
and the roller 5 supports the second bar from 
the top. Between the uprights 2 of the hinged 
section is secured a stop 11, and to the upper 
face of one of the lengthwise bars of the slid 
ing section is secured a spring-catch 12, which 
engages the stop. The hinged section is con 
nected at its front or free end to the station 
ary base-block 13 by the hook and eye 14. In 
5 use the hinged section is connected to the 
base-block, which will hold it in the length 
 
wise direction of the fence, and by depressing 
the spring-catch 12 the sliding section may be 
moved upon the roller of the hinged section 
in its lengthwise direction, which will admit 4c 
of an opening about one-half of the length of 
the gate and will permit the passage of ani. 
mals, and when it is desired to permit a ve 
hicle to pass the hinged section is released 
from its connection with the base-block and 45 
the entire gate Will Swing upon the hinge con 
nection with the supporting-post 7. The post 
15 receives the ends of the lengthwise bars of 
the sliding section of the gate when in its 
closed position. 
I claim as my invention 
In a gate, the combination of a section hav 
ing a hinged connection with the supporting 
post, consisting of four uprights 1 and 2 held 
separated by two lengthwise bars 3, and bars 55 
4 extending diagonally from one set of up 
rights to the other set, a roller 5, supported 
between the uprights at the hinged end of the 
frame, and located between the second and 
third lengthwise bar of the gate, a roller 6, 
Supported between the uprights at the free 
end of the frame and located between the first 
and second lengthwise bars of the gate from 
the top, a projection 11, secured between the 
uprights 2, and a spring latch 12, secured to the 65 
upper face of one of the lengthwise bars 9 of 
the gate. 
A. 
JOHN H. ANDRUS. 
Witnesses: 
H. C. DEMUNN, 
E. H. REYNOLDS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US547933.txt	(No Model.) 
P. MAUSER. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
SAFETY LOCK FOR BREECH BOLTS OF GUNS. 
: 
No. 547,933. 
Patented 0ct, 15, 1895. 
Ayz 
 
NSS 
sS - - - eas 
2s2%. % 
2s2 
 
- 
 
 
wy try esses: 
77-ead3.07. 
 
3.42. 
/3, 4a areaareer, 
: 
career (SSreau res 
(No Model.) 
P. MAUSER. 
SAFETY LOCK FOR BREECH BOLTS OF GUNS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 547,933, 
Patented 00t, 15, 1895. 
 
 
7%g 5. 
23224 a 
6 
2. 
2'? al, 
N 22.2% 
SNSS3 
 
2s2 
AAyya M7 to a: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL MAUSER, OF OBERNDORF, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO THE WAFFEN 
FABRIK MAUSER, OF SAME PLACE. 
SAFETY-Lock FOR BREECH-BOLTS OF G UN S. 
SPECfFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 547,933, dated October 15, 1895. 
Application fled April 26, 1894, Serial No. 509,075, (No model.) Patented in England April 13, 1894, No. 7,400, and in 
Belgium July 16, 1894, No. 110,627. 
To all, whom it may concern, 
Be it known that I, PAUL MAUSER, a sub 
ject of the King of Wrtemberg, residing in 
Oberndorf-on-the-Neckar, in the Kingdom of 
Wilrtemberg, Germany, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Safety 
Locks for Breech-Bolts of Guns, of which the 
following is a specification, which invention 
is the subject of Letters Patent in Great 
Britain, No. 7,400, dated April 13, 1894, and 
in Belgium, No. 110,627, dated July 16, 1894, 
This invention relates to safety devices for 
breech-loading bolt-guns such, for example 
as the device shown in my United States Let 
ters Patent No. 449,352, dated March 31, 1891, 
in which an oscillatory lock is provided for 
locking the firing-pin against movement. 
The invention aims to provide certain im 
provements in this class of safety devices. 
The object of the invention is to produce 
by means of certain improvements a very 
simple lock which shall perform its locking 
function well, and which can with little 
trouble be either loosened and disconnected 
from, or fastened and secured to, the proper 
parts of the lock and the bolt without using 
any special tools for either proceeding. 
To this end in carrying out the invention 
I provide certain features of improvement, 
which will hereinafter be fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which I 
have shown the preferred form of my in 
vention, Figure 1 is a fragmentary vertical 
axial Section of those parts of the lock mech 
anism of a gun to which my invention relates, 
showing the firing-pin and the bolt in eleva 
tion, the former cocked and locked by the 
safety device, which is shown in the mid-posi 
tion, and the pin-nut and small lock being in 
ax. l section. Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of 
the parts shown in Fig. 1 fitted on a gun 
stock, which is shown in fragmentary section. 
Fig. 3 is a rear elevation of the small lock 
alone, the handle of the safety-lock being 
shown in dotted lines. Fig. 4 comprises a 
rear and a front elevation of the safety-lock. 
Figs. 5 and 6 are views similar to Figs. 1 and 
2, but showing the safety device in the firing 
position; and Fig. 7 is a diagrammatic section 
at rear of the bolt. 
As shown in my said Letters Pat- 6o 
Referring to the drawings, A is the receiver 
of the gun; a, the bolt working in this case; b, 
the firing-pin; c, the firing-pin nut thereof; d, 
the small lock in which the firing-pin nut c 
is guided, to which, as usual, the firing-pin 55 
and its nut, and the bolt are removably 
coupled, and in the upper part d of which is 
carried or moved the safety device, (lettered 
E.) having the handle e and the collar or 
flange e. 
ent, the safety device E here shown consists 
of an oscillatory cylindrical shafte', mounted 
in a cylindrical hole in the upper part of the 
small lock d, preferably in the ridge at the 
upper side thereof, and extending in an axial 65 
direction parallel with that of the bolt and 
firing-pin. The periphery of the shafte"Iro 
jects within the peripheral plane of the end 
of the bolt a, and the shaft has a forward end 
e', which is recessed or cut out at one side to 70 
form a recess e. The end of the bolt is re 
cessed at e opposite the shaft, into which re 
cesses the ende of the shaft enters when the 
shaft is turned to the locked position, so that 
then the bolt cannot oscillate. 
shaft is turned to the unlocked position, the 
ende will pass above the bolt and the recess 
e be opposite the latter, which will permit the 
oscillation of the bolt relatively to the shaft 
e', as shown in my said ILetters Patent No. 8o 
449,352. In contradistinction to the arrange 
ment shown in my said patent, the shaft is fit 
ted or pushed loosely into its hole in the upper 
part of the small lock, and there is no spring 
catch or snap and no corresponding groove in 85 
the periphery of the ridge of the small lock 
for fastening the two parts together. This is 
accomplished according to my present inven 
tion in the manner shown, in which the han 
dle e extends forwardly, overhangs the ridge 9o 
of the small lock, and is constructed on its 
inner edge or face with a recess or cavity e^, 
and the ridge is formed with a projection or 
ring-shaped collard, entering, fitting, or pro 
jecting in rear of the recess e' of the handle 95 
e, which handle overlaps this collar, and by 
the interlocking of the reciprocal shoulders 
formed by their respective faces the with 
drawal of the shaft of the safety device from 
its socket in the small lock is ordinarily pre- Ioo 
When the 75 
15 
25 
35 
45 
50 
2 
547,938 
vented. Furthermore, when in the locked 
position, and also when in the middle rest or 
middle position, the flange e of the safety 
deyice abuts against the front face of the 
firing-pin nutc, by reason of which the firing 
pin is locked against forward movement, and 
also the safety device is fixed in its hole and 
Secured against rearward withdrawal. The 
collard of the ridge of the small lock is con 
structed on its right-hand side with a cross 
hole or groove or cross-cut cavity d", which is 
disposed to give free passage to the handle e 
when this handle is turned to coincide with 
this groove, which is done when the safety 
device is to be applied to or removed from 
its position on the small lock. In this man 
ner the safety device can be instantly applied 
or removed by simply turning its handle to 
the extreme right-hand position and then 
pushing it in through or drawing it out 
through the grooved. When applied after 
the inwardly-projecting portion of the han 
dle has passed entirely through the grooved, 
the handle is turned toward the left, which 
immediately brings this portion opposite the 
ridged and thereby locks the device to the 
small lock. 
When it is desired to fire the gun, the safety. 
device, which has previously been in position 
to lock the firing-pin cocked, is unlocked by 
throwing its thumb-piece or handle e to the 
left-hand side, thereby turning the shafteso 
that its forward recessed end will permit the 
oscillation of the bolt and removing its rear 
flange e from in front of the firing-pin nutc. 
This flange or collar e has two slight depres 
sions eande in its rear face, preferably ar 
ranged the one diametrically opposite the 
handle e and the other at an angle of ninety 
degrees therefrom and on its right-hand side, 
into which the front of the firing-pin nut en 
ters into the notch e. when the safety device 
is in the fully-locked position-that is, when 
the handle e is turned fully down to the right 
and into the notch e when the device is in 
the middle-rest position-that when the han 
dle stands vertically. In either position the 
front of the firing-pin nut enters into the re 
cess in the flange of the safety device and re 
sists accidental movement thereof. The re 
cess e traverses the flange eat its left and 
allows free passage of the firing-pin nut when 
firing or cocking. 
When the safety device is in its middle po 
sition or middle rest, the handle e is standing 
vertically and the cocked firing-pin is locked, 
the firing-pin nut c entering the depression 
e on the collar e of the safety device E, Figs. 
1 and 2. The middle rest or position is pro 
vided for the purpose of enabling a facile 
loosening or disconnection of the parts of the 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
lock and the firing mechanism when the gun 
is to be inspected, repaired, or cleaned. To 
so disconnect the parts the gun is cocked and 
the safety device turned into its middle posi 
tion, whereby the firing-pin is locked, where 
upon the bolt may be taken out of the breech 
case, and the small lock being in connection 
with the firing-pin can be screwed off or un 
coupled from the bolt by the usual uncoup 
ling operation. After this the firing-pin and 
its spring and nut can be disconnected from 
the small lock in the usual manner. To as 
semble the loosened parts they may by the 
reverse of the procedure for disconnecting be 75 
easily again connected together, and in no 
case, neither when the parts are to be either 
separated or assembled, is the use of any tool 
necessary. 
: It will be seen that this invention provides 
improvements in safety devices which can be 
advantageously and conveniently availed of, 
and it will be understood that the invention 
is not limited to the precise details of con 
struction and arrangement set forth as its 
preferred form. 
What I claim is, in safety devices for bolt 
guns, the following-defined novel features and 
combinations, substantially as hereinbefore 
specified, namely: 
1. The combination with the receiver, a bolt 
working therein, a firing pin working in said 
bolt, and a small lock connected to said pin 
and to said bolt, of a lock carried by said 
small lock consisting of an oscillatory cylin 
drical shaft e' mounted in said small lock and 
having a handle e constructed with a cavity 
e, overhanging said small lock, and said: 
small lock constructed with a collar dat its 
ridge entering the cavity of said handle, and 
with a grooved through which said handle 
may pass, said cavity and collar interengag 
ing and locking said lock to said small lock. 
2. In a breech loading boltgun, the receiver, 
a bolt therein, a firing pin carried by said 
bolt, and a small lock connected with said 
firing pin and to said bolt, in combination 
with a safety lock carried by said small lock 
and having a flange e constructed with a re 
cesse for the unlocked position of the safety 
lock and permitting the forward movement 
of the firing pin, and having two depressions 
e' and ereceiving the front of the pin nut in 
the locked position and in the middle rest po 
sition respectively of said safety lock. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
95 
PAUL MAUSER. 
too 
O 
tI5 
Witnesses: 
HENRY M. REYNOLDs, 
ISAAC GANS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548034.txt	(No Model.) 
    
No. 548,034, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
N. CARTUS. 
WINDOW FRAME, 
Patented Oct. 15, 1895, 
 
 
 
S. 
(No Model.) 
No. 548,034, 
  
- 
N. CARTUS, 
WINDOW FRAME. 
8 sheets-Sheet 2. 
m 
Patented Oct. 15, 1895. 
a W.6 79.6. A s/ 
O 
N57. 
SPN 
KS 
s 
S eag' 
a. 
SRN 
es.S7 N2. 
S4SEN 
as 
at TerS 
1 22 
a. 
{AHS 
ISS SS N 
NAE 
'A 
N 
SAGE) 
S. 
2N. 
2 SN 
al vr, NYN 
ty is to s' 
23v-223 
\ 
N. CARTUS. 
WINDOW FRAME. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Oct. 15, 1895. 
Y 
R 
A 
  
S. 
(No Model.) 
No. 548,034, 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
a 
 
 
AZ w 
3. 
32. 
W 
6 
IESSES 
22-226-2. 26 
aft 
SN2 
22-16 
W W 43 
Ss. 
5 
2 
v 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NICHOLAS CARTUS, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WINDOW-FRAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,034, dated October 15, 1895. 
Application filed March 26, 1895. Serial No. 543,219. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NICHOLAS CARTUS, a 
resident of Pittsburg, in the county of Alle 
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Win 
dow-Frames; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description thereof. 
My invention relates to window-frames and 
has special reference to the beads which sepa 
rate the window sash. 
As is well known, it has been exceedingly 
difficult to remove the sash in the window 
frames for the purpose of cleaning or repair 
ing the same, especially in large buildings, 
where the window-sash are heavy and cum 
bersome, it generally being necessary to take 
off the strips or beads for the purpose of re 
moving the sash, which was very inconven 
ient and occasioned considerable loss of time. 
It was also very inconvenient to clean these 
windows, especially on the outside surface, 
and, besides being very dangerous, it required 
the greatest caution to prevent loss of life and 
injury. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
these difficulties and to provide a window. 
frame in which the sash therein can be re 
moved or tilted for the purpose of cleaning or 
repairing the same without any great incon 
venience or loss of time. 
My invention consists, generally stated, in 
a window-frame having seats therein, mov 
able strips or beads fitting within said seats, 
openings within the body of said strips or 
beads, a shaft in said window-frame passing 
through the strips or beads, lugs on said shaft 
engaging with the openings in said strips or 
beads and adapted to project the strips or 
beads to and from said seats, and a cylinder 
or casing surrounding said shaft. 
It also consists in certain other details and 
combination of parts, all of which will be more 
fully hereinafter set forth and claimed. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe the same 
more fully, referring to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a face view of the window-frame 
embodying my invention and showing the 
beads in their normal position. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal central section thereof. Fig. 3 
is a cross-section on the line 33, Fig. 1. Fig. 
7 o 
75 
55 
4 is an enlarged cross-section on the line 4 4, 
Fig. 1, showing the beads in their normal po 
sition. Fig. 5 is a like view showing the 
beads drawn back into the window - frame. 
Fig. 6 is an enlarged face view of one side of 
the window-frame with the inside casing re 
moved, and showing the beads drawn back 
into the window-frame. Fig. 7 is a like view 
with the inside beads removed and the lower 
sash taken out of the frame. Fig. 8 is an en 
larged face view of the lower end of one side 
of the window-frame, showing the beads in 
their normal position. Fig. 9 is a cross-sec 
tion on the line 99, Fig. 5. Fig. 10 is a cross 
section on the line 10 10, Fig. 5. Fig. 11 is a 
view of the key or wrench employed. Fig. 12 
is a side view of another form of my inven 
tion. Fig. 13 is a vertical central section 
thereof. Fig. 14 is a cross-section, through 
the shaft. Fig. 15 is a detail sectional view. 
Figs. 16 and 17 are detail views of other forms 
of my invention, and Fig. 18 is a detail plan 
view of one of the cylinders removed. 
Like letters here indicate like parts in each 
of the figures of the drawings. 
My improved window-frame is shown at A 
and has the sash a a fitting or sliding there 
in, said sash being counterbalanced in each 
side of the window-frame by the weights b b', 
attached to the cords c c', which travel over 
the pulleys c and connected to the sash a a? 
in the ordinary manner. 
The window-frame A is provided with the 
frame jamb d, which extends on each side 
thereof and against which the sasha, a bears 
so as to be movable therein. At the top of 
the window-frame A is the top piece e and at 
the bottom is the sillf, the top piece e having 
inserted therein the stationary strips or beads 
e' e. Fitting within the openings or seatsg 
in the frame-jamb don each side of the win 
dow-frame A are the movable inside strips or 
beads g', and between the sash a a' and fit 
ting within openings or seatsh on each side of 
he window-frame A in the frame-jamb d are 
the movable parting strips or beads i. An 
outside strip or bead i is also rigidly secured 
in the jamb d and top piece e, and these beads too 
e', e.g., i, and fact to form the guides lick' for 
the sash a a' to move up and down therein 
when they are placed in position in the win 
95 
dow-frame. 
- 
Io 
15 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
t 
 
2 
548,034 
65 
 
The window-frame A has the inside casing 
the window-frame A is the pockett, leading 
lon each side thereof, which, with the back 
into the chambers m, said pockett being for 
the purpose of inserting or repairing the 
frame l' and jamb d, forms the chambers m, 
which contain the weights bb', moving up and 
weights b b' in the chambers in and having the 
down in the said chambers m, according to 
covert therein to close the same. The movable 
parting-beads are cut away, as at t, in order 
the position of the sash. In order to move 
the beads g' and i, there is provided the shafts 
to enable the more convenient handling or re 
pairing of the weights b U' in the frame. The 
in on each side of the window-frame A, Said 
shafts being journaled within cylinders or 
openings d' in the jamb d are elongated and 
casingsn', mounted in the jamb d and casingl 
the cylinders or casings n' are longitudinally 
and having the lugs n n thereon. These 
slotted for a portion of their length, as at d, 
shafts in are located about midway on the 
for the reception of the lugs an in the inser 
sides of the window-frame A, one on each side, 
tion and withdrawal of the shaft from the win 
although any number may be employed, as 
dow-frame. 
desired. The lugs n on the shafts in engage 
The operation of my improved window 
with the openings o in the bead g, and the 
frames is as follows: After the parts are all in 
lugs 
on the said shafts in engage with the 
position and the sash have been put in the 
openings o' in the beads i, as shown in Figs. 
window-frame A and balanced therein by the 
5 and 6, and act to move said beads g and 
weights b b', in order to draw back the mov 
backward and forward, as desired. The open-able strips or beads g and i all that is nec 
ings o o' in the beads g and i have the curved essary is to apply the key or wrench q to one 
portions o' on their front faces and the verti 
of the Square portions in on one of the shafts 
cal portions o' on their rear faces, and the 
in and turn the same rearward, which causes 
curved portions o are provided with the wear 
the lugs n n on the shaft in to travel up the 
ing-plates o' for taking up the wear in said 
curved portions o' in the openings O o' of the 
openings oo'. The cylinders or casings in.' 
beads g and until the said lugs n 7' reach 
have their rear ends threaded, as at , and are 
the vertical portions o' in the openings oo', 
adapted to be screwed into the frame-jamb 
and traveling down the same will act to draw 
d, while the forward ends of said cylinders m' 
back the beads g and i in their seats g and h. 
are threaded, as at , to receive the hollow 
into the window-frame. The beads g and 
caps p, which engage with the cylinders in at 
in moving back act to compress the springs r 
the point where said cylinders enter the in 
against the window-frame A, and also causes 
side casing l. The shafts in are journaled in 
the tongue S on the bead g to strike against 
the rear of the cylinders m' by means of a pin 
the stops. After this is accomplished the key 
7", and their outer ends extend into the hol 
or wrench q can be applied to the other shaft 
low caps or escutcheons p, and are provided 
in and turned in like manner to operate the 
with the square portions in, onto which a key 
beads g' and on the opposite side of the win 
or wrench q-such as shown in Fig. 11-is 
dow-frame, and the shafts in being held in this 
adapted to be placed, in order to operate the 
position the sash at a can be taken out for re 
pairing or tilted for cleaning purposes. In 
movable beads g and i in the window-frame. 
The casings or cylinders in are cut away at 
order to return the beads g and to their nor 
ni, in order to permit the free movement of 
mal position after the sash a dare put in the 
the lugs n 7' on the shafts in against the 
window - frame, the key or wrench q, which 
openings oo' within the beads g and . The 
is on one of the shafts in, is turned forward 
rear ends r r' of the beads g and i engage 
or toward the sash a a?, which causes the 
with springs '', located in the chambers m. 
lugs n non said shaft in to travel up the ver 
Said springs r may be attached to the win 
tical portions o' of the openings o o', in the 
dow-frame A or to the beads g and i, as de 
beads g and i, until they reach the curved 
portions o' of the openings oo', said lugs n in 
sired. 
traveling down said curved portions o' un 
In order to limit the movement of the beads 
g', a tongue S is provided at the bottom thereof, 
til they assume a horizontal position, which 
which fits within a grooves' in the sillf, said 
throws or moves forward the beads g and 
groove having the stops ss at each end to 
i and causes their tops to strike against the 
limit the forward and backward movement 
stops sand u on the stationary beadsee' and 
of the beads g. 
the tongue S on the bottom of the bead g' to 
The stationary bead e' at the top of the win 
strike against the stop s, while the lug u? on 
dow-frame is cut away on each side so as to 
the bottom of the bead strikes against the 
form a stops to limit the forward movement 
jamb d, so allowing the beads g and to as 
of the beads g at the top thereof, and the sta 
sume their horizontal position. The beadsg' 
tionary beade' at the top of the window-frame 
and , being in this position, form the guides 
A is also cut away in a like manner to limit 
lc k for the sasha a', and the beads g and in 
the movement of the beads . A lug u' is 
moving forward are assisted by the springs 
provided on the bottom of the beads , which 
r", which have been relieved from the press 
strikes against the jamb d to further limit the 
ure thereon. In Figs. 12, 13, 14, and 15, I have 
movement of the beads i' in their forward po 
shown another form of my invention, in which 
sition. 
the movable inside beads g are the only ones 
At the bottom of the jamb don each side of 
movable and that only for a short distance 
IO 
(5 
25 
35 
49 
45 
55 
60 
7 O 
75 
95 
I OO 
IO 
II5 
I 3 
548,034 
3. 
above the lower sash a', as at the parting g, 
above which point the stationary inside beads 
extend to the top of the window-frame. The 
shafts in in this case are located about midway 
of the length of the lower sash and only hav 
ing the one lug in thereon working in the 
openingso in the beads g' to operate the same. 
The movable inside beadsg' are provided with 
the lugs g and the inclined portions gg, in 
order that the beads g can be tilted and taken 
out when desired. The parting strips or beads 
i only extend from the upper part of the win 
dow-frame down to a short distance below the 
parting g, from which point down to the bot 
tom of the window-frame a strip of rubberi" 
is inserted. The upper sash a is not so wide 
as the lower sash a', and each has the grooves 
or recesses a formed on its side face for the 
cords c c', which connect with the pulleys c, 
attached to the weights b b' in the frame 
jamb d. A flexible strip d' separates the 
weights b b. 
In Figs. 16 and 17 I have shown, in connec: 
tion with my improved window-frame, the 
manner of attaching the cords or chains c c' 
to the sash a a', so that when the sasha a' are 
taken out of the window-frame, the cords or 
chains c c' can assume any position taken 
by the windows and prevent the twisting of 
the same. The sash is provided with the seat 
v', within which is inserted the bottom v' of 
the box v, said box v having the cap v fitting 
therein, and the said box v being held to 
gether and within the sash by the screw v', 
which passes through the box v into the sash 
and allows the box v to pivot itself and swing 
thereon. The box v is provided with the open 
ing v, through which passes the link v, which 
connects with the cord or chain c. This mech: 
anism allows the box to turn around, so en 
abling the cords or chains to assume any po. 
sition of the windows. 
My improved devices can be applied to the 
operation of a window-frame having only one 
sash therein instead of two, as shown, without 
materially changing or departing from my in 
vention. 
It will thus be seen that the parts compos 
ing my improved window-frame can be easily 
adjusted in the frame and operated by any 
unskilled person and are not liable to get out 
of order. They can easily be repaired and 
are positive in their movement. They are not 
expensive and can be applied to any window 
frame and are not in the way of the shutters, 
&c. The sash can be easily taken out when 
necessary and without any inconvenience, 
thereby saving a great almount of time and 
possible injury to the housekeeper in clean 
ing or repairing the windows. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A window frame having seats therein, 
movable strips or beads fitting within said 
seats, openings within the body of said strips 
or beads, a shaft in said window frame pass 
ing through the strips or beads, lugs on said 
9 o 
75 
shaft engaging with the openings in said 
strips or beads and adapted to project the 
Strips or beads to and from said seats, and a 
cylinder or casing surrounding said shaft, sub 
Stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. A window frame having seats therein, 
movable strips or beads fitting within said 
seats, openings within the body of said strips 
or beads, a shaft in said window frame pass 
ing through the strips or beads, lugs on said 
shaft engaging with the openings in said 
strips or beads and adapted to project the 
Strips or beads to and from said seats, a cyl 
inder or casing surrounding said shaft having 
a longitudinal slot therein, and cut away por 
tions within said cylinder or casing to permit 
the free movement of the lugs on the shaft 
within the openings in the strips or beads, 
substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. A window frame having seats therein, 
movable strips or beads fitting within said 
seats, openings within the body of said strips 
or beads, a shaft in said window frame pass 
ing through the strips or beads, lugs on said 
shaft engaging with the openings in said 
strips or beads and adapted to project the 
strips or beads to and from said seats, a cyl 
inder or casing surrounding said shaft having 
a longitudinal slot therein, cut away portions 95 
within said cylinder or casing to permit the 
free movement of the lugs on the shaft within 
the strips or beads, and elongated openings 
within the window frame for the cylinder or 
casing and to permit the insertion and with 
drawal of the shaft from the frame, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
4. A window frame having seats therein, 
movable strips or beads fitting within said 
seats, openings within the body of said strips 
or beads, a shaft in said window frame passing 
through the strips or beads, lugs on said shafts 
engaging with the openings in said strips or 
beads and adapted to project the strips or 
beads to or from said seats, a cylinder or cas 
ing surrounding said shaft having a longi 
tudinal slot therein, cut away portions within 
said cylinder or casing to permit the free 
movement of the lugs on the shaft within the 
strips or beads, elongated openings within the 
window frame for the cylinder or casing and 
to permit the insertion and withdrawal of the 
shaft from the frame, and hollow caps or es 
cutcheons connected to the end of the cylin 
der and the inside of the frame, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
5. A window frame having seats therein, in 
side strips or beads fitting within said seats 
and movable for a portion of their length, an 
opening within the body of the strip or bead, 
a shaft within the frame and passing through 
the strip or bead having a lug thereon for en 
gaging with said opening to project the Strip 
or bead to and from its seat and a cylinder or 
casing surrounding said shaft, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
6. A window frame having seats therein, in 
side strips or beads fitting within said seats 
I 25 
132 
CO 
Io5 
IIC 
I 15 
I5. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
548,034 
O 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
75 
85 
opening or cut-away portion therein, a longi 
and movable for a portion of their length, an 
tudinal slot in the cylinder or casing an elon 
opening within the body of the strip or bead, 
gated opening in the frame opposite said lon 
a shaft within the frame and passing through 
the strip or bead having a lug thereon for gitudinal slot, and projections or stops on the 
top and bottom of said strip or bead adapted 
engaging with said opening to project the 
to come in contact with the fixed portion of 
strip or bead to and from its seat, and a cyl 
said strip or bead and the lower end of the 
inder or casing surrounding said shaft hav 
window frame, substantially as and for the 
ing an opening or cutaway portion therein to 
purposes set forth. 
permit the free movement of the lug on the 
11. A window frame having seats therein, 
shaft within the opening in the strip or bead, 
strips or beads fitting within said seats and 
Substantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
movable for a portion of their length, an open 
7. A window frame having seats therein, in 
ing in the body of the strip or bead, a shaft 
side strips or beads fitting within said seats 
journaled within the frame and passing 
and movable for a portion of their length, an 
through the strip or bead having a lug thereon 
opening within the body of the strip or bead, 
for engaging with said opening, a cylinder or 
a shaft within the frame and passing through 
casing surrounding said shaft having an open 
the strip or bead having a lug thereon for 
ing or cut-away portion therein, a longitudi 
engaging with said opening to project the 
nal slot in the cylinder or casing, an elongated 
Strip or bead to and from its seat; a cylinder 
opening in the frame opposite said longitudi 
Or casing surrounding said shaft having an 
nal slot, projections or stops on the top and 
opening or cut away portion therein to per 
bottom of said strip or bead adapted to come 
mit the free movement of the lug on the shaft 
in contact with the fixed portion of said strip 
Within the opening in the strip or bead, and 
a longitudinal slot in the cylinder or casing 
or bead and the lower end of the window go 
frame, and an inclined portion on the top of 
for the insertion and withdrawal of the shaft 
said strip or bead extending from said pro 
from the frame, substantially as and for the 
jection or stop to the rear to the strip or bead, 
purposes set forth. 
substantially as and for the purposes set 
S. A window frame having seats therein, in 
side strips or beads fitting within said seats 
forth. 
12. A window frame having sash therein, 
and movable for a portion of their length, an 
weights and pulleys within said frame, cords 
opening within the body of the strip or bead, 
or chains connected to said weights and pass 
a shaft within the frame and passing through 
ing over said pulleys to and connected to the 
the strip or bead having a lug thereon for 
sash, said sash having a recess or seat formed 
engaging with said opening to project the 
in the side thereof, a box fitting within said 
strip or bead to and from its seat, a cylinder 
seat, a cap fitting on said box having an open 
or casing surrounding said shaft having an 
ing therein, a screw bolt passing through the 
opening or cut-away portion therein to per 
box arid cap to form a bearing therefor and 
mit the free movement of the lug on the shaft 
rigidly secured in the sash, and a link on the 
within the opening in the strip or bead, alon 
end of the cord or chain passing through the 
gitudinal slot in the cylinder or casing, and 
opening in the cap and fitting around the 
an elongated opening in the frame opposite 
bolt, substantially as and for the purposes set 
said longitudinal slot to permit the insertion 
and withdrawal of the shaft, substantially as 
forth. 
13. A window frame having sash therein, 
and for the purposes set forth. 
weights and pulleys within said frame, cords 
9. A window frame having seats therein, 
or chains connected to said weights and pass 
strips or beads fitting within said seats and 
ing over said pulleys to and connected to the 
movable for a portion of their length, an open 
sash, said sash having a recess or seat formed 
ing within the body of the strip or bead, a shaft 
in the side thereof, a box fitting within said 
within the frame and passing through the 
seat having a ?lange thereon, a cap fitting on 
strip or bead having a lug thereon for engaging 
said box having a flange thereon fitting against 
with said opening, a cylinder or casing sur 
the flange on the box, said cap having an open 
rounding said shaft having an opening or 
ing therein, a screw bolt passing through the 
cut-away portion therein, a longitudinal slot 
in the cylinder or casing, an elongated open 
box and cap to form a bearing therefor and 
rigidly secured in said sash, said bolt having 
ing in the frame opposite said longitudinal 
a head thereon to fit against the cap, and a 
slot, and hollow caps or escutcheons connect 
split link on the cord or chain passing through 
ed to the end of the cylinder or casing, sub 
the opening in the cap and fitting around the 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
bolt within the box and cap,-substantially 
10. A window frame having seats therein, 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
strips or beads fitting within said seats and 
In testimony whereof I, the said NICHOLAS 
movable for a portion of their length, an open 
CARTUS, have hereunto set my hand. 
ing within the body of the strip or bead a 
shaft journaled within the frame and passing 
through the strip or bead having a lug there 
on for engaging with said opening, a cylinder 
or casing surrounding said shaft having an 
ALBERT YORK SMITH, 
J. N. COOKE. 
NICHOLAS CARTUS. 
Witnesses: 
95 
2 
OC 
Io5 
IIC 
II5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548134.txt	(No Model.) 
ELECTRICAL ILLUMINATION BY PHOSPHORESCENT FLAME, 
D. McF. MOORE, 
No. 548,134, 
Patented 00t, 15, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
| - 
 
  
 
 
 
O 
 
s 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
WITNESSES; 
23.4. 
 
 
s 
Q) ille 
INVENTOR 
BY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL McFARLAN MOORE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRICAL ILLUMINATION BY PHosphoRESCENT FLAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,134, dated October 15, 1895. 
Application filed January 25, 1895, Serial No. 536,387, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DANIEL McFARLAN 
MOORE, a citizen of the United States, and a 
resident of New York, county and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Electrical Illumina 
tion by a Phosphorescent Flame, (Case No. 
14) of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates in general to a pro 
duction of an electric light by means of the 
interruption of an electric current within a 
Vacuum and the charging of electric conduc. 
tors thereby located in the vacuum. 
the formation of phosphorescent light, which 
I find is produced by a peculiar disposition of 
the electrical conductors, as hereinafter de 
Scribed. 
Figure 1 is an exterior elevation of a device 
representing my invention. Fig. 2 is an ele 
Vation of modified means for producing a 
phosphorescent flame which has a white light 
and appears to be incandescent and yet with 
Fig. 3 shows a modification of that 
out heat. 
which is set forth in Fig. 2, partially in sec 
tion. Fig. 3 is a cross-section of the frame 
r, which may be compared in shape to an un 
dershot Water-Wheel. It should be noticed 
that not only are the little wiress luminous 
independently of the proximity of the same 
to the glass, but this light is accompanied by 
the phosphorescent flame. Fig. 4 shows in 
elevation a modification of the invention. 
Referring to Fig. 1, the device consists of 
a transparent tube a, usually constructed of 
glass and hermetically sealed, having been 
previously exhausted of air, hydrogen, or the 
vapors of any liquids which it may have con 
tained, so that it is what is conmonly called 
a vacuum,' but consists of a residual atmos 
phere. Within the inclosure are vibratory 
terminals b and c, one of them being provided 
with an armatured. Within inductive action 
of the armature is an electromagnet e. The 
terminal c is extended by a conductor h. A 
large conductorf, which I had made of alu 
minum, passes through and out of the inclos 
ure and is provided with a circuit-conductor 
to the electric generator g. A conductor h. 
follows the conductorf, but it may terminate 
in the end of the tube at land have no return 
circuit. 
i is to indicate loops of wire electrically con 
nected with the conductor h. The conductor 
fpasses through the loops, and if the generator 
g is of comparatively low electromotive force 
the conductors fare in loose contact at One 
or more points each with the larger conduc 
torf. If the electromotive force of the gen 
erator g is moderately high-say, a few hun 
dred volts or more-the loopsi need not act 
ually touch the conductorf 
The operation consists in the automatic 
rapid alternate opening and closing of the 
terminals c and b. The effect produced is 
The invention relates more particularly to that within the loops j the intensity of the 
light is so great as to make it appear like a 
burning flame and impresses an observer So 
that he would think that the wirei was burn 
ing. The aggregate number of flames pro 
duces a proportional quantity of light. In 
practice the tube a stands vertical longi 
tudinally. 
The armature is shown, as before, by the 
letter d, the magnet by e, the generator by g, 
the terminals by b and c. The terminal c is 
made of radial conductors or metallic barsk, 
the ends of which just escape the glass, and 
they are each extended by fine wires l, which 
either touch the glass very lightly or else just 
escape it. When the armature is vibrated by 
the magnet, the terminals b and c are not 
only rapidly interrupted, but a close approach 
to an appearance of incandescence by heatis 
effected without heat by the interruptions of 
the touching of the wires l and the inner 
walls of the glass tube m. As a great many 
flames of phosphorescent light occur simul 
taneously, the average effect is a continuous 
luminosity. Those wires which may be set 
in motion by the vibrating armatured, which 
actually come in contact here and there with 
the glass, produce the flame and are at the 
same time accompanied by an envelope of 
light, while the wires l, which may not at in 
tervals touch the glass, are also luminous. 
The wire l'increases all the effects by being 
extended from the other terminal b to the 
other end of the tube, and it may be inde 
pendent of a return-circuit. This wire lis 
also luminous. 
In Fig. 3, as before, d is an armature, b and 
c the terminals, and these, it will be noticed, 
are duplicated, and there need be, however, 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
2 
548,134 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
55 
but one magnet e. When the tube a is ro 
tated by means of an electric motor o, the re 
spective pairs of terminals are alternately in 
terrupted, causing, as set forth in other ap 
plications of mine, a luminosity throughout 
the tube. For the purpose of rotating the 
tube around its axis it is held in rotary Sock 
ets p, driven by the motor O through the pull 
ley q or in any other well-known manner.  
represents a wire frame supporting a cloth 
made of very fine woven wire, which may be 
assisted in its tensile strength by weaving it 
in combination with fibrous material, the 
wires being short pieces of wire, so as to form 
fringe, (represented by the numerous dots and 
short liness,) and which just escape the glass. 
The terminal b is extended so as to support 
this frame r and passes on through to the col 
lecting-ring t, which in its turn is connected to 
the main line it, while the other terminal of 
the magnet e is connected to the main line 
t'. The motor o, of course, may be driven 
from the same main line. This fringe of fine 
wires S becomes luminous, and also by means 
of its touching the glass, or almost touching 
it, incandescent effects are produced, which, 
being numerous, cause an average and con 
tinous luminosity. 
In Fig. 4 the construction is the same as 
far as the reference-letters correspond to the 
construction of the vibrator shown in the 
other figures. 
represents pieces of con 
ducting material having conical ends, which 
touch at their points loosely. They simply 
rest upon each other, or if the tube is tipped 
they rest on each other more and more loosely 
until they are only in contact, without prac 
tically any pressure when the tube is about 
horizontal. They are also of such diameter 
as to be loose in the tubes and yet forming 
contact there with, or they may be a little 
Smaller, just so that the contact does not ex 
ist. It is evident that from the construction 
Some of them will be a little more pressed 
against the glass than others and some of 
them will not touch at all, or at least at only 
One or two points. 
The circuit may be connected up with these 
carbon pieces, either as shown by letting 
them form an extended conductor of the ter 
minal c, or they may form a portion of the 
circuit of one of the poles of the generatorg. 
The current having been turned on and 
the vibrator set in action, the tube a becomes 
a mass of light, for reasons understood in 
view of the description of the preceding de 
W1GeS 
It is evident that my invention may be 
modified without departing from the spirit 
thereof. 
L represents a conductor located within 
the evacuated inclosure and insulated from 
both of the terminals by not being connected 
with either of the terminals or with any other 
conductor whatever. It may be held in the 
inclosure by embedding the ends in the walls 
of the transparent inclosure. The object of 
placing this conductor as represented and as 
described is to produce additional light by 
electrical action or disturbance that exists 
within the inclosure. The conductor is closed 
upon itself by connecting the ends outside of 
the inclosure. . 
I claim as my invention 
1. An electric phosphorescent flame pro 
ducer consisting of the combination of an 
evacuated inclosure, movable terminals of an 
electric circuit therein, and electric conduc 
tors of similar polarity and connected to one 
of the terminals and extending through the 
evacuated space and in loose contact with 
each other at points. 
2. An electric phosphorescent flame pro 
ducer, consisting of the combination of an 
evacuated inclosure, movable terminals of an 
electric circuit therein, electric conductors of 
similar polarity connected to one of the ter 
minals and extending through the evacuated 
space, one of the conductors being larger 
than the other and surrounded by wire loops 
which are connected to the other conductor 
of the same polarity. 
3. The combination with an evacuated in 
closure, of a conductor located therein and in 
an electric circuit and divided up into parts 
which are in loose contact with one another, 
and means for opening and closing the said 
circuit within the vacuum. 
4. An electric phosphorescent flame pro 
ducer consisting of the combination of an 
evacuated inclosure having electrodes there 
in, one of which is divided up into parts which 
are in loose contact. 
5. An incan descent phosphorescent electric 
illuminator, consisting of the combination of 
an evacuated inclosure, terminals of an elec 
tric circuit therein, between which an electric 
spark may beformed and means for bringing 
one of the terminals in and out of contact 
with the inner walls of the inclosure. 
6. An incandescent phosphorescent electric 
illuminator, consisting of the combination of 
an evacuated inclosure, terminals of an elec 
tric circuit therein, between which an electric 
spark may be formed, and means for bringing 
one of the terminals in and out of contact with 
the inner walls of the inclosure at a multitude 
of points. 
7. An incandescent phosphorescent electric 
illuminator, consisting of the combination of 
an evacuated inclosure, terminals of an elec 
tric circuit therein, and means for bringing 
an extension of one of the terminals in and 
out of contact with the inner walls of the in 
closure at a multitude of points. 
8. An incandescent phosphorescent illumi 
nator, consisting of the combination of an 
evacuated inclosure, electric terminals there 
in, between which an electric spark may pass 
and one of which has vibratory flexible con 
ductors extending from the vibratory termi 
nals in loose contact at a multitude of points, 
with the inner walls of the inclosure, and 
means for vibrating the vibratory terminals, 
90 
95 
do 
I O5 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
548,134 
- 
9. An incandescent phosphorescent illumi 
nator consisting of the combination of an 
evacuated inclosure, electric terminals there 
in, between which an electric spark may pass 
and one of which has vibratory flexible con 
ductors extending from the vibratory termi 
nals in loose contact at a multitude of points 
with the inner walls of the inclosure, means 
for vibrating the vibratory terminals and an 
extension from the other terminal parallel to 
the first named extended terminal and lo 
cated within the inclosure. 
10. The combination of an evacuated in 
closure having vibrating electric terminals 
therein and located in an electric circuit, of 
a conductor T. located within the inclosure 
within inductive action of the terminals or 
one of them and insulated from said circuit. 
11. The combination of an evacuated in 
closure having vibrating electric terminals 
therein and located in an electric circuit, of 
a conductor L. located within the inclosure 
within inductive action of the terminals or 
one of them and closed upon itself and in 
sulated from said circuit, 
12. The combination of an evacuated in 
closure having vibrating electric terminals 
therein and located in an electric circuit of a 
conductor L. located within the inclosure and 
Within inductive action of the terminals or 
one of them and insulated from said circuit. 
13. An incandescent phosphorescent illu 
minator consisting of the combination with 
an evacuated inclosure, of a vibratory ter 
minal, an electric circuit within sparking dis 
tance of the terminal of opposite polarity and 
flexible wires suspended from the vibratory 
terminal and extending parallel to the wall 
of the inclosure. 
14. The combination with an evacuated 
tube, of electric terminals within sparking 
distance of each other, and pieces of carbon 
having pyramidal ends in loose contact with 
one another and connected electrically with 
one of the electric terminals. 
15. The combination with an evacuated in 
closure, of electric terminals within sparking 
distance of each other, pieces of carbon hav 
ing pyramidal ends in loose contact with one 
another and connected electrically with one 
of the electric terminals, and means for Wi 
brating the terminals to and from each other. 
16. An incandescent phosphorescent illu 
minator, consisting of the combination of an 
evacuated tube having pieces of carbon in 
loose contact with one another and with the 
tube and connected in the circuit of an elec 
tric generator, and means for producing in 
terruptions or partial interruptions of the cir 
cuit within the tube. 
17. The combination with an evacuated in 
closure of electric terminals therein within 
sparking distance of one another, a Woven 
wire having its ends cut at the surface and 
edges and within sparking distance of the Wall 
of the inclosure, and means for rotating the 
inclosure. 
18. The combination with an evacuated in 
closure, of electric terminals therein within 
sparking distance of one another, a Woven 
wire having its ends cut at the surface and 
edge and within sparking distance of the wall 
of the inclosure, and means for jarring the 
inclosure. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 22d day of Jan 
uary, 1895. 
Witnesses: 
D. McFARLAN MOORE. L. s. 
EDWARD P. THOMPSON, 
ROBERT S. CHAPPELL. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
70 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548234.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
No. 548,234, 
E. S. SMITH. . 
. 
GARMENT SUPPORTER I,00P, 
. 
Patented Oct. 22, 1895. 
WITNESSES 
37.1 ?6-7. 
INVENTOR 
Azov: no. 
- 
- 
ATTORNEY 
adRWEGRAAM.PT-To-WASHINGTod.. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD S. SMITH, OF WATERBURY, CONNECTICUT. 
GARMENTSUPPORTER LOOP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,284, dated October 22, 1895. 
Application filed August 14, 1894, Serial No. 520,248, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
Zo (all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD S. SM1TH, of 
Waterbury, county of New Haven, State of 
Connecticut, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Garment-SupporterLoops, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
Specification. 
My invention relates to an improved gar 
ment-fastener; and it consists, essentially, in 
improving the loop shown and described in 
my prior patent, No. 500,353, dated June 27, 
1893, 
My invention has for its object the forma 
tion of a loop to be used in connection with 
the stud ordinarily used with garment-fas 
teners of this description which will securely 
hold the stud and the portion of the garment 
carried by the same in such a manner that 
accidental disengagement will be practically 
impossible, and which will be simple in ap 
plication, and which will, by the presence of 
the Smooth lining-piece around the lower in 
ner edge of the loop, prevert the garment 
from being unduly worn at this point, the 
said lining-piece performing in addition the 
function of preventing the stud-shank from 
escaping from the loop, as hereinafter de 
My invention is illustrated by the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of one of the 
details of my invention. Fig. 2 is a front ele 
vation of the completed article, and Fig. 3 is 
a vertical section on the line aca, Fig. 2. 
AA are curved arms meeting at the upper 
end of the loop and separated at their lower 
ends, as shown. The space between arms AA 
is broadest toward its upper end to admit the 
stud-head ordinarily used with garment-fas 
teners of this description and shown in my 
prior patent above referred to. At an inter 
mediate point in the length of the arms AA, 
which constitute the sides of the loop, the 
said arms approach each other, so as to form 
an intermediate narrowed throat through 
which it is necessary to pass the shank of the 
stud. The distance between these arms at 
this point is substantially the same, or less, 
than the diameter of the stud-shank, so that 
scribed. 
w 
when said shank and the garment around the 
same is passed therethrough the arms spring 
apart slightly, being permitted to do so by the 
separation at their lower ends, and the stud 
passes into the seat at the lower end of the 
loop, 
A curvedlining-piece B, corresponding sub 
stantially to the curve of the lower inner edge 
of the arms AA, is provided for the purpose 
of affording a smooth seat for the stud-shank. 
This lining-piece also acts as a sheath for the 
lower ends of the arms AA and prevents the 
stud-shank from being pulled through the 
space between the said lower ends of the arms 
AA. The particular feature of my inven 
tion consists in the novel way in which this 
lining-piece is held in place. 
Recesses D D are provided in the inner 
edge of the arms AA, toward the lower ends 
thereof, to a depth corresponding substan 
tially to the thickness of the lining-piece B. 
The ends of the curved lining-piece rest in 
these recesses, which, as Will be readily seen, 
prevent it from slipping from engagement 
with the loop unless the side arms A A are 
forced apart to an entirely unnecessary de 
gree. To obviate this emergency an addi 
tional means for securing the lining-piece may 
be afforded, which consists in bending the 
two lower edges of the lining-piece toward 
each other into a recess formed in the lower 
end of the loop, (indicated by the dotted line 
in Fig. 2 and clearly shown in Fig.1) so that 
the ends of the arms AA are sheathed there 
in. This forms a very satisfactory and de 
sirable article and prevents the garment from 
being pinched between the ends of said arms 
and torn thereby, 
In addition to the above it will be clearly 
seen that the upper ends of the lining-piece 
cannot wear the garment for the reason that 
they lie in the recesses DD so that the up 
per surface of the lining-piece is flush with 
the inner edge of the loop. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
In a garment fastener a loop, the side arms 
of which meet at one end of said loop and 
55 
o 
75 
9o 
95 
 
2 
548,234 
are disunited at the opposite end of said loop, lining piece loosely rest therein, the lower op 
with a lining piece shielding the disunited posite edges of the lining piece being pinched 
ends of the Said side arms, said lining piece toward each other underneath said loop. 
being loosely held in position by recesses 
5 formed in the inner edge of said side arms to 
a depth equal substantially to the thickness 
of the metal lining piece-the ends of which 
R. H. SMITH, 
CHARLES F. BRONSON. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD S. SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548334.txt	4. 
(No Model.) 
W. WEBBER 
00IN 00NTROLLED GAS WENDING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet . . 
No. 548,334, 
Patented Oct. 22, 1895, 
Yssssss SSN 
R- 
\ 
 
IIS 
S 
Ruira?mum 
is 
t 
III, 
U 
a 
R. R. 
S 
. 
zzzzzazzazatasaataazaccitatazratasaaczza22 
7A Air 
 
  
SWSYSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSASVMSWSAx 
  
sy 
s 
 
 
KITNESSES 
assasasasasaasaasaasasasawasasahasasasasawaxaavarasahasarasara 
4 T 13.3% 
 
ATORNEY 
(No Model.) 
No. 548,334. 
Patented Oct. 22, 1895, 
W. WEBBER. 
COIN CONTROLLED GAS VENDING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
 
treeterate 27treet attaataaaaaaaaaaaa2 
t 
1. 
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa 
- 
WITNESSES: 
e22ses 
747%. 24.24 
INVENTOR 
1%-174/u 
Pr4(a.o. 
 
ATTORNEY 
NREw sham. Phoo-ho.WASNND.c. 
(No Model.) 
W. WEBBER. 
COIN CONTROLLED GAS VENDING MACHINE. 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 548,334, 
Patented Oct. 22, 1895. 
2. 
AZYZZYZZ 
Z 
Z Z Z 2 
2 
  
M Z Z Z Z Z M C M M L Z 
 
Y 
What 22 
2 
 
Y a a. 
a. 
a 
ta es ea 
a. 
a. 
a 
 
if IEEIHL. He 
g". ELIII 
B 
s: 
a-- 
2 
Zaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa. 
Y 
2 2ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
3. 
A 
7 
Yaaaaaaaaaaaaaaazaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaawaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaay 
7 
L 
C 
2 
s 
Z Z 
M t 
C 
T 
. 
, 
2 
. 
 
WITNESSES 
/ 
. . 
%22,444,724.7z $42 4/ 
L 
C 
S 
1 
( a 42-46 
% 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEY 
ANDREW B.GRAAM. Ho-Lo. Washigo.c. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WESLEY WEB B ER, OF PITTSBURG, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
CON CONTROLLED GAS VENDING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,384, dated October 22, 1895. 
Application filed April 16, 1895, Serial No. 545,908. (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WESLEY WEBBER, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Coin-Controlled Gas-Vending 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
In the accompanying drawings, to which 
reference is made, Figure 1 is a sectional ele 
vation of my new coin-controlled gas-vending 
machine, taken on line acac of Fig. 2, showing 
the parts in the position they assume when 
the meter is locked thereby. Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse sectional elevation on line y y of Fig. 1, 
showing in diagram the connection of the ma 
chine with the meter. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
of the main (rank detached. Fig. 4 is a front 
elevation of the vending-machine, a portion 
of the main casing being broken away and 
showing in sectional elevation a portion of 
the inclosed mechanism. Fig. 5 is a detailed 
sectional elevation showing the mechanism 
arranged for operating a valve or cock in the 
service-pipe. Fig. 6 is a sectional elevation 
showing a modification, and Fig. 7 is a sec 
tional plan view of the same on line a 2 of 
Fig. 6. 
My invention consists mainly in a coin-con 
trolled gas-vending machine wherein is em 
ployed a main gear driven by the power of 
the meter, which main gear operates a rod, 
plate, or arm or other pusher designed to dis 
lodge a coin in the machine from a support 
or table, which dislodgment of said coin either 
brings another coin into position or allows a 
locking device or pawl to intercept the pro 
gress of the pusher, and thus acts to lock the 
meter or operate a cock for cutting off the 
flow of gas. 
The invention also consists of the construc 
tion, arrangement, and combination of parts, 
all as hereinafter described and claimed. 
A represents the main casing of my new 
coin - controlled gas-vending machine, de 
signed to be attached to or held in close prox 
imity to a gas-meter B of the usual or of any 
approved construction. 
Crepresents a shaft reaching from the main 
casing A into the meter B and connected by 
a gear-wheel a to another gear-wheel b, so as 
to be turned by the meter mechanism. The 
gear-wheelb may be in addition to the usual 
meter mechanism or it may be one of the 
usual gears used for operating the indices of 
the meter. The opposite end of the said shaft 
C is provided with a gear-wheel or pinion c, 
which may be used to revolve the main gear 
wheel D directly, or it may be arranged to re 
-volve it indirectly through a pinion d and an 
other gear-wheele when it is desired to adapt 
the machine to deliver more or less gas for 
the coin deposited; in other words, to adapt 
the machine to a change in the price of gas. 
The main gear-wheel D is secured on a shaft 
f, which is journaled in the main casing, and 
which, for the sake of economy and to adapt 
it also to carry an index-pointerg, is bent to 
form a crankf'. This crank operates a lever 
E, pivoted at h. The said lever may be va 
riously arranged and variously constructed 
to be engaged by the crankf'. As here shown, 
it is formed with a sloth' to accommodate the 
vertical movement of the crankf' when the 
same is revolved by the wheel D. 
F represents a meter-locking and coin-dis 
lodging plate or pusher, which is reciprocated 
by the lever E-as, for example, in the con 
struction shown, by a link or pitman connec 
tion F-and slides in a support or box F, 
formed upon or attached to the back of the 
main casing, and it serves, first, when inter 
cepted by the pawl L, as hereinafter described, 
as a lock to the lever E, crank f', wheel D, 
gear and pinion de, (if used,) gear c, shaft C. 
and gears ab for cutting off the supply of gas, 
and, secondly, when said pawl is depressed by 
the presence of a coin between the plunger J 
and the table K, as hereinafter described, to 
ush such coin out from contact with the 
pawl, and if more than one coin at a time has 
been delivered into the primary coin-recepta 
cle G to push them out therefrom one by one 
as each successive coin's equivalent in gas is 
consumed. 
The primary coin-receptaele G is connected 
with a chute H, which conducts the coins de 
posited into its outer open end down to the 
said receptacle. In said receptacle Gisplaced 
a plunger J, provided with a rod or stem J', 
which passes through a flange J and out 
through the top of the main casing, where it 
projects sufficiently to form an end by which 
the purchaser may lift it, or it may be pro 
75 
95 
OO 
 
548,834 
o 
3o 
25 
15 
5 
O 
4, or otherwise, and then to place the coins, 
vided with a lifting device-as, e.g., the lever 
one or more, in the open end of the chute, and 
J8-for lifting the plunger to clear the delivery 
then return the lever to the former position, 
end of the chute II, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 
whereupon the spring J will force the plun 
On the stem J' is placed a coiled spring J, 
ger and the coins against the finger i'. The 
which acts between the head J and plate J 
number of coins in the receptacle G will be 
to normally hold the plunger down, so as to 
constantly indicated by a scalei', formed in 
rest upon any coins in the receptacle G, or, 
the rod or stem J, the surface of the casing 
in case said receptacle be empty, to rest upon 
H serving as the gage. 
the stop or limit pin i, which comes in con 
In Fig. 5 the pusher F is caused to cut off 
tact with the plate J, as shown in Fig. 1, and 
the gas by turning a valve or cock N in the 
prevents the plunger from descending be 
service-pipe N and thus prevent the further 
yond bounds. 
- 
K represents a table placed beneath the delivery of gas after the value of the coin or 
coins deposited has been consumed. In this 
coin-receptacle G, a space i the width of the 
construction the pusher F is intercepted and 
thickness of a coin being formed between the 
locked by a plate O, adapted to be depressed 
said table and the lower end of the said re 
by the coin or coins and plunger in the re 
ceptacle. Protruding through the said table 
ceptacle G, and connected in this instance to 
into the said space is a finger ", formed upon 
a pivoted rod O' and sustained by a spring 
or attached to a lever and pivoted at , so 
o, attached to said rod O'. The plate O is 
that its end may fulcrum on or beneath the 
connected to the arm in of the cock or valve 
pusher F. The lever iis pivoted to the pawl 
by a link n', so that the pressure of the pusher 
I, which is formed with a projection it at its 
on O will cause the latter to close the cock 
free end to intercept the pusher F, as shown 
and cut off the gas. When the plate O is de 
in Fig. 1. Said pawl is held up by a spring l. 
pressed by the depositing of a coin and re 
When a coin enters the receptacle G, it dis 
leases the pusher F, the cock will be opened 
poses itself flatwise upon the finger '. Said 
by a spring N, arranged to act upon the said 
coin may serve by its weight or impact to re 
arm in of the cock, as will be clearly under 
lease the pusher F; but for greater certainty 
stood from the drawings. 
it is deemed preferable to employ a plunger 
In Figs. 6 and 7 the coins are pushed out from 
to press against the coin and finger and re 
the coin-receptacle G by a rotating pusher 
lease the said pusher F. When the pusher F 
or arm P, which is attached to the main gear 
is thus released, the power of the meteracting 
D. In this arrangement the main casing A 
through shaft C and gear-wheel c, or c, d, and 
is placed upon the top of the meter B and 
e, will slowly turn the main gear-wheel D. 
the gearing is placed in horizontal position, 
and crankf', causing the latter to swing the 
as shown, and connected to the meter by a 
lever E to its opposite position and back to 
vertical in place of a horizontal shaft. Figs. 
the position shown in Fig. 1. In moving from 
6 and 7 also show a modification of the coin 
the position shown in Fig. 1 to the said oppo 
controlled stop or locking pawl L. As here 
site position the pusher F will push the coin 
shown, it is not provided with a pivoted trip 
lying next to the table or plate K out of the 
lever; but its upper end, which reaches up 
primary receptacle G, from which it will drop 
through the table K, is flattened to receive 
into the cash-box M. The return of the lever 
the coin upon it, and its outer end extends 
E will withdraw the pusher F from contact 
slightly beyond the walls of the coin-recep 
with the projection , whereupon (if there be 
tacle G. 
no other coin in the receptacle G) the spring 
+5 l will project said projecting end of the pawl 
As above stated, if it is not desired to adapt 
the machine to be changed for varying prices 
L into the path of the said pusher F, and thus 
in gas the gear-wheele and pinion d may be 
again lock the meter as before and prevent 
dispensed with and the wheel c made to mesh 
further delivery of gas. 
directly with the main gear-wheel D; but 
If more than a single coin be delivered into 
when the said gear and pinion are used the 
the coin-receptacle at one time, the coins fol 
pinion d will be journaled on a gudgeon d', 
lowing the first will, by their own weight or 
attached to a slotted and adjustable plate d', 
under the pressure of the plunger, prevent 
which may be firmly set against the wall of 
the projecting end of the pawl I from be-, 
the main casing by a screw d. The said pin 
ing projected by the spring l, as just described, 
and will thus delay its interference with the ion will be provided with a pair of dowel-pins 
or equivalent device, on which or by which a 
pusher F and the consequent locking of the 
larger or smaller gear e may be attached to 
meter, thus producing the effect that the op 
the pinion d to revolve there with and to mesh 
eration of dislodging the coin and delivering 
with the main gear D. The adjustability of 
the gas will be repeated automatically so long 
the plate d'permits the ready attachment of 
as the coin remains between the table and the 
interchangeable gears e, so that by simply 
plunger-i. e., until the last coin's worth of 
changing this one gear the machine may be 
gas has been consumed. 
made to deliver more or less gas to correspond 
The operation of supplying the receptacle 
with any change in price that may take place. 
G with a coin or coins is simply to retract the 
While I have shown and described my in 
plunger by turning the lever J from the po 
vention as applicable for the sale of illumi 
sition shown in Fig. 1 to that shown in Fig. 
6 5 
- 
35 
40 
95 
OO 
I o5 
I O 
I 5 
25 
E43,334 
3 
nating-gas, I do not limit myself to such use, 
as it may be used for the sale and delivery of 
water, gas for heating purposes, steam for 
heating and power, and other liquids or fluids. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a coin-controlled gas vending machine 
a main gear wheel driven by the power of the 
meter, a coin receiving table, a pusher oper 
ated by the main gear wheel for pushing the 
coins off from said table, and a coin controlled 
locking device arranged for detaining the 
pusher and cutting off the gas, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a coin-controlled gas vending machine, 
a main gear wheel driven by the power of a 
meter, combined with a pusher operated there 
by, and a coin controlled locking device for 
locking the coin pusher, from movement when 
the coin's value in gas has been delivered, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a coin-controlled gas vending machine 
a primary coin receptacle, a table to support 
the coin beneath the said receptacle and 
spaced therefrom, a locking pawl adapted to 
reach into said space, a pusher arranged to 
pass through said space, and means for oper 
ating said pusher by the power of the meter, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a coin controlled gas vending machine 
a primary coin receptacle, a table or support 
for the coin beneath the said receptacle and 
spaced therefrom, and a pusher for dislodg 
ing said coin operated by the power of the 
meter, substantially as described. 
5. In a coin-controlled gas vending machine 
a primary coin receptacle, a table beneath the 
said receptacle and spaced therefrom, a lock 
ing pawl reaching into said space, a plunger 
placed in said receptacle, and a pusher for 
dislodging the coin from said table operated 
by the power of the meter, substantially as 
described. 
6. In a coin controlled gas vending machine, 
a primary coin receptacle, a table beneath 
said receptacle and spaced therefrom, a lock 
ing pawl reaching into said space, a plunger 
placed in said receptacle, a device for limit 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
So 
ing the downward movement of said plunger, 
and a pusher for dislodging coin from said ta 
ble operated by the power of the meter, sub 
stantially as described. 
7. In a coin-controlled gas vending machine, 
a primary coin receptacle, a table beneath 55 
said receptacle and spaced therefrom, alock 
ing pawl reaching into said space, a plunger 
placed in said receptacle, a spring for de 
pressing said plunger, a lever for lifting the 
same and a pusher for dislodging coins from 
said table operated by the power of the meter, 
substantially as described. 
8. In a coin-controlled gas vending machine 
a main gear wheel operated by the power of 
the meter, a coin pusher operated by said 
main gear-wheel, and a locking device for 
said pusher, and a cock or valve fitted in the 
service pipe arranged to be closed by said 
locking device, substantially as described. 
9. In a coin-controlled gas-vending machine 
a main gear wheel operated by the power of 
the meter, a crank connected to said gear 
wheel, a lever connected to said crank, a 
pusher connected to said lever, a coin receiv 
ing table and a locking device arranged to be 
acted upon by a coin and to intercept and 
lock the said pusher, substantially as de 
scribed. 
10. In a coin controlled gas vending machine 
a main gear wheel D, operated by the power 
of the meter and provided with an arm P, in 
combination with a table for the coin and a 
pawl I, arranged to reach above said table 
and to intercept the arm P, substantially as 
described. 
11. In a coin - controlled gas vending ma 
chine, the combination with the main gear D, 
and gear c, attached to a shaft which reaches 
into and is operated by the meter, of an ad 
justable plate formed or provided with a 
gudgeon, a pinion journaled thereon and in 
terchangeable gear wheels adapted to be at 
tached to and revolved by said pinion, sub 
stantially as described. 
75 
WESLEY WEBBER, 
Witnesses: 
EMILE RIESER, 
H. A. WEST. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548434.txt	(No Model.) 
L. EHRLICH, G. REIN & E. CATLIN. 
FARE REGISTER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 548,434, 
Patented 00 t, 22, 1895. 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
112 frzesses. A ye 
2.2% 
t 
-u Gill, 7%. % 
s.S. N 
  
. // 2'ev Za/s: 
. 
z i? a 2-4, 
*RS Czec. 2.f 
%a. (62.dll/ 
SS, 
d 
w 
 
 
(No Model.) 
L, EHRLICH, G. REIN & E. CATLIN. 
FARE REGISTER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 548,434, 
Patented Oct. 22, 1895. 
D 
i $2: 
124. 
E J 414 
2O2 
Af 
Aa2 
- 27 SO 
a4. a6 35 A. 
NeN 
f 
2.ES BSN 
E2 2 SA 
  
  
figgs, ty 
 
Miffiliff 
 
 
e 
7/ 
63 S. 
...' S 53 
3O 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
ETSE 
zzzzzyz2 
 
x \\\\\\\\\ 
EfzS2-4) 
ZZ ZSZZ 
 
- a 4s NSS 
 
 
A& 
Z722'ezzors, 
%. 4. 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM, PHOTO-liko. was HN GroN, d.c. 
(No Model.) 
L, EHRLICH. G. REIN & E. CATLIN. 
FARE REGISTER 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 548,434, 
Patented 00t, 22, 1895, 
 
 
 
WWWWWWW 
7772'eva Zo/s. 
(24-et Gee. 
74.6%. 4. 
4ez. 
L. EHRLICH, G. REIN & E. CATLIN. 
FARE REGISTER 
Patented Oct. 22, 1895, 
G 
e 
48 
e 
23 
a 
EE 
s 
a 
essessessesses 
Espa 
es 
o: 
e 
SaaS 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
77, 5. 
No. 548,434. 
1?t tza esses. 
476, 7-4---- 
kuo. 6 fully 
 
(No Model.) 
L, EHRLICH, G. REIN & E. CATLIN. 
FARE REGISTER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 548,434, 
Patented 00t, 22, 1895. 
gae 
O 
- 
s 
1?tra 6SS6S 
ex, & 6-4, 5, c.6: ..." 
A722'era fos. 
2 a. 
At Rey B.GRAAM. PHOTO-THO.washington,b;c. 
 
L, EHRLICH, G. REIN & E. CATLIN, 
FARE REGISTER, 
Patented Oct. 22, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 548,434, 
 
a 
E. 
FARE/ 
e 
1. 
r 
C s Y S $9 
CS C 
ssss SS 
s 
s s s 
11a/viesses." s 
* 
/a vezzo-s: 
, 2-(4.6. 
 
ADRew B.GRAHAM, PHOTOUTHO.WASHINGTON, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEO EHRLICH, GUSTAVUS REIN, AND EPHRON CATLIN, OF ST. LOUIS, MIS 
SOURI, ASSIGNORS TO THE ST. LOUIS REGISTER COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
FARE-REGISTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 548,484, dated October 22, 1895. 
Application filed October 12, 1892, Serial No. 448,660, (No model.) 
Go (222 whon, it nucly concern: 
Beit known that we, LEO EHRLICH, GUSTA 
VUS REIN, and EPHRON CATLIN, citizens of the 
United States, residing in St. Louis, State of 
5 Missouri, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Fare-Registers, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of reg 
isters and indicators commonly called street 
Io car or fare registers, wherein is employed 
a trip-register formed by a step-by-step revo 
luble index moving over a fixed dial and a 
permanent register formed by a set of adding 
wheels that are moved in unison with the in 
I5 dex of the trip-register to preserve the sum of 
the operations of the register while said index 
may be returned to zero. 
The present invention is more particularly 
an improvement in certain portions upon that 
2o set forth and shown in the Letters Patent to 
Leo Ehrlich, dated January 24, 1893, No. 
490,342, but in addition thereto embraces an 
automatic resetting device for the trip-regis 
ter, the combination of two permanent regis 
25 ters with a single trip-register, whereby dif 
ferent classes of fares may be distinguished 
and accounted for, and also novel construc 
tions and arrangements of parts, as will be 
fully hereinafter set forth. 
As a more ready understanding of the im 
provements may be had from a detailed de 
scription thereof, such description will now 
be given with reference to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the register 
with the glass front and dial of the trip-reg 
ister removed. Fig. 1 is a sectional view of 
the push-piece g and a portion of the rod f'. 
Fig. 2 is a croSS-Sectional elevation on the line 
4o 22 of Fig. 1, certain parts being in elevation. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional elevation on the 
Fig. 4 is a detail sectional 
line 33 of Fig. 1. 
elevation, taken on the line 4 4 of Fig. 2, of 
the carrier and bar for actuating the auxil 
45 iary permanent register. Fig. 5 is a detail ele 
vation of the Zero-stop and a portion of the 
bevel-wheel. Fig. G is a sectional elevation 
on the line 6 6 of Fig. 1, showing the pawland 
pawl carrier of the permanent register, the 
5o bell and hammer, and the fare-indicating sig 
35 
nal. Fig. 7 is an elevation of the false plate 
removed from the machine, showing the two 
reciprocating slides for operating the register. 
Fig. 8 is a front elevation similar to Fig. 1, 
showing the same construction with the use 55 
of only one permanent register, as is common. 
Fig. 9 is a front view similar to Fig. 8, show 
ing a modified form of the means for return 
ing the index of the trip-register to Zero and 
of the manner of releasing the trip-register, so 6o 
that it may be returned. Fig. 10 is a sectional 
elevation of the same, showing particularly 
the manner of releasing the pawl, so that the 
trip-register may be returned to Zero. Fig. 
11 is a front elevation of a register with a por- 65 
tion of its dial removed to disclose the under 
lying auxiliary permanent register and illus 
trating a slight modification of that shown in 
Fig. 1. Fig. 12 is an elevation of the pawl 
and pawl-carrier for the auxiliary permanent 7o 
register; and Fig. 13 is a detail elevation par 
ticularly of the pawl-carrier of the main per 
manent register, showing a means for locking 
it against movement during the returning of 
the trip-register to gero, 
The improved fare-register is supported by 
a back or base plate A and inclosed by a cir 
cular casing B, with a glass front, as usual, the 
whole being carried by a false back C, that is 
intended to be secured in place as against 8o 
the end of a street-car or other vehicle by 
SCI'eWS. 
The base-plate A, carrying the mechanism 
of the register, is removably connected to the 
false back C in any suitable manner, and both 85 
the base-plate and false. back may be secured 
together by a bolt and padlock, as in said 
patent. 
The complete register, as shown in Fig. 1 
and as modified in Fig. 11, contemplates the 9o 
use of two permanent registers, as will be 
hereinafter described; but as many of the 
novel features are applicable where only one 
permanent register is used such simpler form 
of register, as seen in Fig. 8, will first be de- 95 
scribed, reference being also had to other fig 
ures showing the same parts. 
The register includes a trip-register and a 
permanent register. The trip-register con 
sists of the usual dial D, as in Figs. 2, 3, and Ioo 
75 
 
2 
548,434 
11, supported by and secured to posts h, (seen 
in Figs. 5 and 8.) projecting from the back 
plate A, and an index i, arranged above the 
dial, and the permanent register E consists 
of the usual series of adding-wheels with 
their carrying-pinions, as will presently ap 
pear. The index i is fixedly secured to the 
hub 80 of a bevel-gear 20, that is supported 
to rotate loosely on a central bearing-stud 21, 
projecting from the back plate. The step-by 
step indicating movements of the index are 
imparted by the oscillations of an actuating 
device (best seen in Fig. 6) consisting of a 
pawl 23, that engages with a ratchet 24, fast 
to a bevel-pinion 22, which meshes with the 
gear 20. The ratchet 24 and bevel-pinion 22 
(see Fig.2) are both fast to the shaft 25 of the 
permanent register E, the units-wheel j of 
which is also fast to said shaft. The pawl 
23 is carried by a pawl-carrier 26, (see Figs. 
2 and 6,) that is hung loosely on the shaft 25, 
and said pawl-carrier has a finger 27, that pro 
jects rear wardly through an opening in the 
back plate A and is engaged by a reciprocat 
ing slide 28, (see Figs. 2 and 7.) which is sup 
ported in bearings 29 on the face of the false 
back C. The slide 28 is moved between a 
pair of limiting-stops 31 against the force of 
a spring 30 by an Operating-cord 32, extend 
ing within reach of the operator. The cord 
is secured to a stud 32, projecting from the 
slide 28, and its end passes outward around 
or between grooved guide-wheels 33 233, car 
ried by the false back. The slide 28 carries 
a toothed portion or ratcheta, that co-operates 
with the yielding detent y, that is pivoted to 
the false back C, and serves to compel a com 
plete movement of the slide 28 on each recip 
rocation. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that each 
time the operating-cord 32 is pulled upon the 
slide 28 is reciprocated, which in turn oscil 
lates the pawl - carrier 26 in one direction 
against the force of the spring 30, Fig. 7, 
so that the pawl 23 in thus moving backward 
engages with the succeeding tooth of the 
ratchet 24. Upon releasing the operating-cord 
32 the spring 30 causes the slide 28, pawl 23, 
and pawl-carrier 26 to return to their normal 
ositions, feeding the ratchet 24 forward one 
step, which in turn through the pinion 22, and 
gear 20, similarly moves the index over the 
dial one step. 
The permanent register E, as before stated, 
consists of the usual series of adding-wheels, 
representing units, tens, hundreds, thousands, 
&c., all carried by the shaft 25, that is mounted 
in frame 35, the said adding-wheels having 
carrying-pinions, as usual. This frame 35 is 
hinged upon a pin 36 at its outer side to the 
back plate A, (see Fig. 2,) so that the frame 
may be rocked and ihe bevel-pinion 22 moved 
out of mesh with the bevel-gear 20. 
As the ratchet 24 and the units-wheel j of 
the adding-wheels are fast to the same shaft 
25, it results that each time the pawl-carrier 
26 is oscillated, as before described, the add 
ing wheel or wheels of the permanent register 
E is or are moved forward a step simulta 
neously with the step movement of the index 
of the trip-register. The rear side of the 
pawl-carrier 26 is formed with an oppositely 
extending flange 17, (see Figs. 2, 6, and 13.) 
that overlies the opening in the back plate, 
through which the finger 27 extends, and pre 
vents access to the interior of the register 
through said opening. When the frame 35, 
which, as before stated, also supports the pawl 
carrier 26, is rocked to disconnect the bevel 
pinion 22 from the gear 20, it is necessary to 
lock the permanent register against movement 
to preserve the count. The trip-register, being 
then out of connection, cannot be moved for 
ward at all, and only backward by the devices 
hereinafter set forth. For this locking of the 
permanent register E when the frame 35 is 
moved to the in operative position one or more 
projections 19 (seen in Fig. 13) on the rear 
surface of the pawl-carrier 26 meet or coincide 
with a stop or abutment 18, that is formed by 
a finger connected to the bell-standard I. 
This stop-finger 18 is mounted so as to yield 
in one direction for the passage of either or 
both of the projections 19, but is fixed in the 
opposite direction. Thus in Fig. 13 the stop 
finger 18 is pivotally connected to the stand 
ard h' and is held rigid in one direction by 
an adjustable screw-stop i', that comes against 
said standard h' and yielding in the other 
direction against a spring . 
The setting device or the mechanism by 
which the trip-register is returned to zero or 
its starting-point without disturbing the per 
manent register consists, incidentally, of a 
disengaging device F for releasing the trip 
register or disconnecting the permanent reg 
ister from the trip-register, and particularly 
of an automatic motor, such as a contractile 
spring K, (see Figs. 1 and 8.) for rotating the 
index of the trip-register rearwardly to its 
starting-point. Thus with the index or its 
bevel-wheel 20 (see Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 8) there 
is combined a pinion 3S, integral or fixed so 
as to rotate with said bevel-wheel 20, and in 
mesh with said pinion 38 is a toothed segment 
39, that is loose upon a posth, projecting from 
the back plate A. This segment 39 is con 
nected to one end of the motor-spring K, the 
opposite end thereof fixed either to the base 
plate or to some other part of the register. 
The parts are so arranged that as the index i 
is moved step by step forward in the usual reg 
istrations of the register the motor-spring IK 
is gradually placed under tension by the rota 
tion or partial rotation of the segment 39. As 
soon, therefore, as all opposition to backward 
or return movement of the index i and its 
connected parts shall be removed, the motor 
spring will act to effect this return. With 
the use of the segment 39 it will be evident 
that there may come a time during the step 
by-step operation of the trip-register-say in 
nearing or at the completion of a complete 
rotation-when the segment 39 will become 
2 
35 
45 
7 o 
75 
9 o 
95 
CO 
IO5 
O 
I 25 
I 3G 
55 
 
548,434 
8 
... O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
disengaged from the pinion 38. This, how 
ever, will make no difference in the effective 
operation of the motor-spring K, as in such 
case it continues to hold the last tooth of the 
segment 39 constantly against the pinion 38, 
ready as soon as the trip-register is released 
or unlocked to engage with said pinion and 
return the trip-register to zero. This con 
struction also results in only enabling the 
motor-spring IK to be placed under a prede 
termined tension, no matter how many com 
plete rotations of the trip-register may take 
place before being returned backward to zero. 
In the present instance the only impediment to 
this free backward movement of the index is 
the fact that the trip-register and the perma 
nent register E, that is normally in gear with 
the bevel-wheel 20 of the trip-register, are se 
cured against all backward motion by a stop 
pawl 10, (see Fig. 6,) that engages with the 
ratchet 24, which thus holds both the perma 
nent and the trip register against backward 
movement so long as the permanent register 
is in active position. The stop-pawl 10 is held 
to duty by a spring 10. As soon as the per 
manent register is temporarily disconnected 
from the trip-register by rocking its frame 35, 
the motor-spring K will thereupon be free to 
return the trip-register to zero. 
The means for effecting the disengagement 
or release of the trip-register, whether it be 
by the actual disconnection of the permanent 
register E therefrom or broadly the release of 
a stop-pawl, such as the pawl 10, either acting 
directly on the trip-register or indirectly, as 
in this instance, is conveniently embodied in 
the disengaging device F, before referred to. 
This device F in its most complete embodi 
ment, as herein illustrated, serves, mainly, a 
twofold function-viz., to rock the frame 35, 
carrying the permanent register E, so as to 
disconnect and connect its bevel-pinion 22 
fron and to the bevel-wheel 20 and to set the 
direction-indicator H, and incidentally the de 
vice carries means for preventing a fraudu 
lent manipulation thereof. 
The device F (see Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 8) is 
formed partly by a frame f, sliding on the 
back plate A in a guide 41', Fig. 2, and partly 
by a radially-disposed rod f', that is mounted 
in bearings provided by the inner portion of 
the stud 21, and by a bracket 40, extending 
from the back plate A. The frame f and rod 
f' are connected rigidly together, and the 
outer end of the rod f' is provided with a push 
piece g, that extends to the exterior of the 1n 
closing case C, so as to be conveniently pushed 
inwardly in operating the slide. The greater 
portion of the push-piece g consists of a sleeve 
mounted in an opening in a post h, project 
ing from the base-plate A, and loosely sur 
rounding the end of the rod f and in a meas 
ure aiding in supporting said rod. A set-screw 
g' prevents the entire removal of the push 
piece. (See Figs. 1 and 1.) The frame f is 
provided with an inclined slot 12, Fig. 3, that 
is engaged by a pin or stud 11 projecting from 
 
the inner end of the permanent-registerframe 
35, said stud also carrying the stop-pawl 10, 
Fig. 6. In the normal active position of the 
register with the permanent and trip regis 
ters connected the stud 11 occupies the higher 
part of the inclined slot 12, and as the disen 
gaging device F is pushed inwardly, as indi 
cated by the arrows, Fig. 3, the inclined slot 
moving over the stud gradually moves it in 
ward or nearer the back plate A, which con 
sequently rocks the frame 35 inward, as indi 
cated by the arrow, Fig. 2, and thus discon 
nects the bevel-pinion 22 from the wheel 20. 
On the return of the device F the reverse 
motion takes place and the pinion 22 and 
wheel 20 are re-engaged. The inner end of 
the stud 11 may be guided in its back and 
forward movements by extending it between 
the walls of a slot 13, formed in the guide 41. 
(See Fig. 1.) 
In order to prevent the immediate return 
of the disengaging device F to avoid the ne 
cessity of holding it in its inward position, 
preserving the disconnection of the perma 
nent register from the trip-register until the 
trip-register has been returned to its zero po 
sition, and to compel a complete movement of 
the disengaging device, there is provided a 
lock consisting of two engaging parts, one rep 
resented by a circular flange 41 on the outer 
surface of the wheel 20, and a hook-ended 
latch 42, pivotally connected to a bracket f, 
carried by and arranged immediately above 
the rod f' and spring-pressed in one direc 
tion, as in Figs. 1" and 3. The circular flange 
41 is cut away or provided with a recess 9, (see 
Fig. 8,) that lies coincident with the latch 42 
when the index i of the trip-register stands 
at zero, so that should the device F, with said 
latch, be moved inwardly while the trip-regis 
ter stands in this position no engaging of the 
latch 42 with the circular flange 41 will occur, 
and this recess also permits the release of the 
latch from the flange, and thus allows the re 
turn of the device F to its normal outward 
position at the completion of the return of 
the trip-register to its zero position. 
As the trip-register represented by the in 
dex i has been moved step by step one or 
more times in the ordinary registering opera 
tion, the releasing-recess 9 for the device F 
has been moved a distance away from coinci 
dence with the latch 42 corresponding to the 
number of step-by-step movements of the in 
dex, and hence a portion of the flange 41 is 
presented in front of the latch 42 and is en 
gaged thereby. When the device F is pushed 
inwardly to effect the temporary disconnec 
tion of the permanent register or to release 
the backward-preventing stop represented by 
the stop. pawl 10, the latch 42 is moved over 
the wheel 20 and finally engages with the cir 
cular flange 41, and thereby temporarily pre 
vents the return of the device F. As soon as 
this occurs, the permanent register E being 
then disconnected and the stop-pawl 10 re 
moved from action, the motor-spring K is free 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IC5 
7 o 
75 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
: 548,434 
O 
2 C. 
25 
35 
SO 
s 
s 
to act and immediately rotates the index and 
wheel 20 back to the zero position and brings 
the recess 9 in coincidence with the latch 42, 
which, no longer being restrained by the cir 
cular flange 41 is free to pass through said 
space and allow the device F to return to its 
normal outward position, causing the recoil 
nection of the trip and permanent registers. 
To prevent only a partial in Ward movement 
of the device F with a view to a fraudulent 
manipulation of the trip-register and to com 
pel a full movement thereof, the bevel-wheel 
20 is provided with a second or supplemental 
circular flange 41, concentric with the flange 
41, with which the latch 42 may engage and 
be prevented from withdrawal should the de 
vice F be only partially moved inwardly. As 
the register is constructed in the present in 
stance, this partial movement of the device F 
is sufficient to have rocked the permanent 
register frame 35 in ward, so as to place One 
of the projections 19 in front of the stop 18, 
so that even should an attempt be made to 
operate the register by pulling the cord 32 it 
will be prevented. The index i and bevel 
wheel 20 are stopped at the Zero position by a 
zero-stop 64, (see Figs. 1, 5, and 8,) adapted 
to meet a projection 1 on said wheel 20. This 
stop 64 is a yielding one in one direction, SO 
that should the wheel 20 be turned more than . 
a complete revolution in its step-by-step 
movement the projection 1 may be free to pass 
said stop. 
The return of the device F to its Out Ward 
normal position may be effected by hand; but 
as herein embodied it is done automatically 
in one instance by the motor-spring K (see 
Figs. 1 and 8) through the means of a lever 
l', pivoted to the back plate A, one end con 
nected to said spring and the other end at 
tached to the rod f' through a pin k, as in 
Fig. 3. Another means, as in Fig. 9, is by an 
individual spring 16, surrounding the rod f', 
between the bearing 40 and a shoulder on the 
rod. The spring IK or 16, acting on the de 
vice F to return it outwardly, tends to cause 
the hooked end of the latch 42 to bear with 
some friction on the flange 41 should the 
hand be removed from pressing the slide in 
wardly, so that the latch acts as a brake to 
the sudden return of the index i to zero un 
der the force of the spring K. 
The wheel 20 in the structure shown in Fig. 
S carries a yielding pawl 50", having a slight 
movement limited by a pin 6, projecting 
from said wheel 20, that enters a slot in the 
pawl, and which pawl is held in position by 
a spring 7. This pawl is situated in advance 
of the recess 9 of the circular flange 41, and 
is in position as the index i and wheel 20 re 
turn to the Zero position under considerable 
momentum to meet the end of the latch 42 
and partially stop such movement of the 
wheel 20 until the latch may retire slightly, 
which is allowed by the recess or cut-away 
portion 5 in the flange 41 directly opposite the 
curved end of the pawl 50. 
Allusion has heretofore been made to the 
fact that the disengaging device F in effect 
releases the trip-register from the influence 
of a stop-pawl 10, that normally prevents its 
backward movement. In Figs. 9 and 10, and 
best seen in Fig. 10, there is shown a modifi 
cation wherein the device F actually operates 
to release a stop-pawl 10 from engagement 
with the teeth of the bevel-wheel 20, and thus 
permits said wheel and the trip-register to be 
returned to Zero either by the motor-spring 
K, before described, or, as in this particular 
construction, by the act of the hand through 
a knob 201, fast to the hub of the bevel-wheel 
20. The stop-pawl 10 is pivoted to a bracket 
10, projecting from the base A, and is held 
normally in engagement with the teeth of the 
wheel 20 by a spring 10. One end of the 
pawl is slotted at 10 to receive the stud 11, 
before referred to, that also projects into the 
inclined slot 12 in the frame f of the device 
F. When the device F is moved inwardly, 
as before described, the rocking of the Stud 
11 rearward also draws the stop-pawl 10' rear 
ward and frees it from the wheel 20, so that 
said wheel may be rotated back to the Zero 
position. 
As thus far described, only one permanent 
register E, in connection with the trip-regis 
ter, as in Figs. 8 and 9, has been referred to. 
In some instances it often happens that two 
or more classes of fares are collected by the 
conductor, such as half-fares or transfers, or 
both, in which case a single permanent reg 
ister is not capable of distinguishing between 
the several classes, and hence the returns of 
a dishonest conductor are liable to be ficti 
tious by including more of the lesser class of 
fares or transfers than were actually col 
lected by him. In order to avoid this, the 
register is provided, as in Figs. 1, 2, and II, 
with a second or auxiliary permanent regis 
ter E, arranged in any suitable position, pref 
erably in the hitherto vacant space directly 
opposed to the permanent register E upon 
the other side of the wheel 20 of the trip-reg 
ister. This auxiliary register E is shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2 of substantially the same con 
struction and arrangement as the permanent 
register E, composed of a series of adding 
wheels with their respective carrying-wheels 
mounted in a rocking frame 135, the units 
wheeli' being secured to the shaft 125, that 
carries at its end and secured thereto a bevel 
pinion 122, adapted to mesh at the proper 
time with the bevel-wheel 20. The same shaft 
also carries, secured thereto, a ratchet 124, 
that is engaged by a stop-pawl I.10, the func 
tion of which is simply to prevent any back 
ward movement of the ratchet 124. In this 
embodiment of the auxiliary register and its 
coaction with the trip-register the actuated 
bevel-pinion 122 is normally out of gear with 
the wheel 20, so that during the ordinary op 
erations of the register the trip-register and 
the permanent register E will only be oper 
ated; but said pinion 122 is adapted at the 
75 
95 
CC 
O 
II5 
I25 
I 30 
55 
 
uttoiu't 
w 
proper time to be placed in gear with said bevel-wheel 20. Thus the frame 135, pivoted 
at 136 in substantially the same manner as 
wheel 20, so as to likewise be moved a step 
the frame 35, is provided with an extended 
When the trip-register is moved to indicate a 
stud 111, overlying and resting upon a cam or 
fare, and such connection of the auxiliary 
sustaining bar 112, that is carried by a recip 
register E' occurs without disturbing the po 
rocating carrier 113, which has a finger 114 
sition of the other permanent register E, and 
projecting through a slot in the back plate A 
hence both registers will be simultaneously 
into the forked end of an arm 115, extending 
operated. Thus the totals of the permanent 
from the slide 128. The carrier 113, with its 
register E will show the complete totals of all 
cam-bar, is reciprocated in bearings on the 
the operations of the trip-register, while the 
surface of the back plate, as in Fig. 4, and 
auxiliary register E' will simply show the to 
said bar is provided with a depression v at 
tal operations of the trip-register for the 
one point in its length that in the normal 
other or unusual class of fares collected, so 
idle position of the parts lies immediately in 
that in order to arrive at the number of full 
rear of the stud 111 of the frame 135 and 
fares collected at any one time the total of the 
allows the pinion 122 of the auxiliary register 
auxiliary register E should be subtracted 
to stand out of gear with the wheel 20. AS 
from that of the register E. In the two modi 
soon as the slide 128 is reciprocated, impart 
fications of this part of the invention illus 
ing a like movement to the carrier 113 and bar 
trated herein the one already partially de 
112, the depression v is removed from in rear 
Scribed and shown in Figs. 1 to 4 embraces 
of the stud 111 and the high part of the bar 
means for rocking the pinion 122 of the aux 
iliary register into gear with the wheel 20, and 
112 forces the frame 135 outward, SO as to 
cause the pinion 122 and wheel 20 to mesh. 
thus actuating said auxiliary register through 
This meshing of said pinion and wheel occurs 
the medium of the trip-register, while in the 
at the commencement of the movement of the 
form shown in Figs. 11 and 12 the auxiliary 
slide 128, and the bar holds them in Imesh dur 
register is actuated directly without the inter 
ing the remainder of the movement of Said 
position of the trip-register wheel 20; but in 
slide and until just before it returns to rest 
both cases, as will appear hereinafter, the op 
in its normal position, when the carrier 113 
eration of the auxiliary register is effected by 
and bar 112 are brought back to their idle po 
an individual actuating-cord or other equiva 
sition and the frame 135 allowed to rock back 
lent means separate from that which alone 
to its rear position, carrying the pinion 122 
actuates the trip-register and permanent regis 
out of mesh with the wheel 20. To hold the 
terE in the ordinary operations of the register. 
carrier 113 and bar 112 against accidental 
For this purpose the false back C, Fig. 7, in 
movement, a spring w (see Fig. 4) is arranged 
addition to the reciprocating slide 28, before 
to bear upon the end of the carrier. 
described, is provided with an auxiliary re 
So that the passenger and conductor may 
ciprocating slide 128, that is actuated by a sec 
know that the auxiliary permanent register 
ond cord 132, passing outward around a guide 
E has been duly operated, there is provided 
wheel 133. This slide 128 is guided by bear 
an indicating-signal I, Figs. 1, 3, and 6, and ar 
ings 129 and the bearing 29 and is provided 
ranged just beneath the dial D in position to 
with an extended arm 131, that lies against 
expose its indication through an opening d. 
the upper end of the slide 28. The construc 
Fig. 11, in the said dial. 
tion is such that when the slide 28 is recipro 
The indicating-signal I consists of a plate 
cated by a pull upon the cord 32 no motion of 
connected to one end of a postd, Fig. 12, that 
the other slide 128 will occur; but when the 
is mounted to rock a pin d', projecting from 
slide 128 is reciprocated by a pull upon the 
the base-plate A. The post supports a coil 
cord 132 the slide 28 is moved also, the spring 
spring d?, which tends to hold the signal-plate 
30 and ratchet and detent a y thus serving for 
in one position-say with the words Five 
both slides, the spring to return them after 
cent fare or Ten - cent fare exposed 
reciprocation and the ratchet and detent to 
through the opening d in the dial D-and it 
compel a complete stroke in each direction. 
is also provided with a toed (see Fig. 1) in 
The slide 128 is provided with a frictional 
position to be struck by the arm d of the car 
spring it, that holds it against accidental move 
rier 113. To lessen the blow of the arm d on 
ment while the slide 28 is moved, and to pre 
the toe d, the operative face of the arm is 
vent the movement of the slide 128 while the 
covered by a yielding flat spring d. The 
slide 28 is moving or before it has returned 
free end of the indicating-signal plate is 
to its normal position there is provided a de 
guided and steadied by the slotted end of a 
tent 140, (see Fig. 7) held out of operation 
postd, (see Figs. 1 and 6,) that embraces the 
while the two slides are contiguous by bear 
edge of said plate. 
ing against their plain surfaces; but when the 
During the usual operation of the register, 
slide 28 is moved the detent 140 drops below 
when the permanent register E, with the trip 
the arm 131 of the slide 12S and prevents any 
register, is alone operated, the indicating 
movement thereof. On the return of the slide 
signal Istands with its indication Fare' ex 
28 the detent is raised out of action. 
posed; but when the auxiliary register E' is 
In the structure shown in FigS. 1 to 4 the 
operated and the carrier 113 reciprocated, as 
reciprocating slide 128 is made the means of 
rocking the pinion 122 into mesh with the before explained, its arm distrikes the toe d' 
75 
95 
IOO 
IoS 
C 
II5 
I25 
IC) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
548,434 
IO 
25 
35 
and rocks the signal I, so that the indication 
Transfer or other indicating-mark is ex 
posed. It is obvious that the signal may only 
remain in this position during the reciproca 
tion of said carrier 113; but, as herein em 
bodied, the signal I has an ear d punched in 
Ward from its surface in position when the sig 
inal is in its changed position, as in Figs. 1 
and 6, to meet a pin n, projecting from a rear 
wardly-yielding sleeve n' on the post, d. As 
the signal I is moved by the arm d to its 
changed position, the ear drides idly over the 
pin n, which, with the sleeve, yields to permit 
lhe ear to pass and when past noves up to 
catch the ear and hold the signal. The pin n. 
is tripped to release the signal I, so that it 
lmay return to its normal position under the 
force of its coil - spring d by the action of 
the bell-hammer 55, which when rocked, as 
will presently appear, to strike the bell J 
bears against a projection n on the sleeve 
n' and depresses it sufficiently to remove its 
pin in from the ear di. 
The bell J is sounded at each operation of 
the register by the movement of the actuat 
ing-pawl 23, (see Fig. 6,) whose outer surface 
rides over a portion of the bell-hammer 55 to 
depress it against its spring 3, and as soon as 
the end of the pawl ceases to bear the ham 
mer rearward the latter is suddenly released 
and Strikes the bell. In the modification of 
the auxiliary permanent register E' shown 
in Figs. 11 and 12, or, more strictly, in the 
means for moving said register, the shaft 125 
lacks the pinion for immediate engagement 
with the bevel-wheel 20, and in its place is 
provided with a pawl-carrier 126, provided 
with an actuating-pawl 123, that engages with 
the ratchet 124, and each time said pawl-car 
rier is oscillated moves the adding-wheels of 
the register E' one step, as will be readily un 
derstood. This movement of the pawl-car 
rier 126 is had through the reciprocation of 
the slide 128, Fig. 7, as in the other structure 
before described, the finger 127, Fig. 12, of 
Said pawl-carrier projecting through the back 
plate A and engaged by the forked end of the 
arm li3, Fig. 7, of said slide 128. Although 
there is no direct connection between the trip 
register and this auxiliary register E, the trip 
register is Operated just as before, because of 
the simultaneous reciprocation of the slide 28, 
as is also the permanent register E. 
The improved register is also provided with 
a direction-indicator H, which consists of a 
revoluble roll 50, bearing indications such as 
East, West, or the like, said indications 
being duplicated one or more times around 
the roll. The roll 50, Figs, 1, 3, 8, and 9, is 
mounted to rotate in bearings in a pair of 
posts hagainst the friction of a flat spring 71 
and carries on One side a star-wheel 51, that is 
engaged by two detents 52 of an anchor-lever 
carried by an arm 53, projecting from the dis 
engaging device F. When the device F is 
reciprocated in one direction, one detent 52, 
engaging With the star-wheel 51, rotates the 
latter and the roll 50 one-half of a complete 
forward step, moving the direction-plate show 
ing East through the opening of the dial D, 
Fig. 11, behind the dial and bringing a blank 
space on the roll fo coincide with said open 
ing. On the rearward or return reciproca 
tion of the device F the other detent 52 moves 
into engagement with the star - wheel and 
moves it and the roll another one-half step 
and completes the step movement, bringing 
the direction-plate bearing West to view 
through the opening in the dial. 
What is claimed is 
1. The combination with the trip register, 
the permanent register and means for actuat 
ing said registers step by step, of a disengag 
ing device for releasing the trip register so 
that it may move backward to zero, a motor 
spring for automatically returning the trip 
register to zero after having power stored up 
in it by the step by step actuation, and toothed 
gearing connecting said spring with the trip 
register, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the trip-register, a 
pinion movable in unison there with, a seg 
ment in gear with the pinion, a motor Spring 
connected to the segment, means for actuat 
ing the registers step by step and placing the 
spring under tension, and means for releasing 
the trip-register, so that the motor spring may 
act, substantially as described. 
3. The combination with the trip-register 
and the permanent register, and means for 
moving the registers step by step, of a disen 
gaging device for releasing one register from 
the other, and a single spring for returning 
the trip register to zero and for returning the 
disengaging device to its inactive position, 
substantially as described. 
4. The combination of an index and its car 
rying wheel, the permanent register geared 
with said wheel, a disengaging device for dis 
connecting Said register from said wheel, a 
spring constantly tending to hold said device 
in its inactive position, a circular flange on 
the wheel, a non-rotating engaging latch car 
ried by the device, and a motor for returning 
said wheel to Zero, Substantially as described. 
5. The combination of a step by step rotat 
able index and its carrying wheel, a stop-pawl 
engaging with and normaliy preventing back 
Ward rotation of said wheel, a disengaging de 
vice for releasing said stop-pawl, a spring con 
stantly tending to hold said device in its in 
active position, a flange on the carrying 
wheel, and a non-rotating engaging latch on 
the device for holding the stop-pawl in its re 
leased position against the tension of said 
Spring, and means for turning the index and 
carrying wheelbackward, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
6. In a fare register the combination of the 
wheel 20 having a circular fiange with a re 
cess, a slide having a non-rotating lateh for 
engaging said flange, automatic means for ro 
tating said wheel until the recess in the flange 
coincides with the latch and a spring free to 
75 
9 O 
95 
ICO 
I o5 
ITO 
E 15 
25 
65 
 
548,434 
14. The combination with the registers, of 5o 
returning the trip register to zero without dis 
turbing the condition of the permanent reg 
isters, substantially as described. 
13. The combination with the registers, of 
tWO actuating slides therefor, a projection. On 45 
one slide to bear against the other, and a sin 
gle spring and connections with the slides for 
returning one slide or both slides when moved, 
substantially as described. 
two actuating slides therefor, and a locking 
pawl for preventing the operation of one slide 
while the other is being moved and permitting 
both slides to be moved simultaneously, Sub 
stantially as described. 
15. The combination with the registers and 
the fare indicating signal I, of an arm for 
moving it in one position, a yielding pin for 
holding it in such position, and means con 
nected with one of the registers for moving 6o 
the pin to release the signal, substantially as 
described. 
16. The combination with the registers and 
the fare indicating signal I, of an arm for 
moving it in one direction, a longitudinally 65 
yielding pin for holding it in such position, 
and an Oscillating pawl for depressing the 
pin to release the signal, substantially as de 
scribed. 
our hands in the presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 7o 
55 
LEO EEERLICH. 
GUSTAVUS REIN. 
EPHRON CATLIN. 
Witnesses as to Ehrlich and Rein: 
Witnesses as to Catlin: 
W. PALMER CLARKSON, 
J. C. BOWMAN. 
E. LACKLAND, 
E. M. LACKLAND. 
move the latch from the recess, substantially 
as described. 
7. The combination with the wheel 20, hav 
ing the broken circular flange, of a latch for 
5 engaging the flange, and a brake pawl car 
ried by said wheel and adapted to meet the 
latch, substantially as described. 
S. The combination with a pawl-carrier 26, 
having two projections, of an engaging stop 
Io as 18, and means for moving the pawl-carrier 
to place the projections in line with the stop, 
substantially as described. 
9. The combination with a pawl-carrier 26, 
having two projections, of an engaging stop 
I5 18, fixed in one direction and yielding in the 
other, and means for moving the pawl-car 
rier to place the projections in line with the 
stop, substantially as described. 
10. The combination with the normally ex 
2o posed trip-register and the permanent regis 
ter, of an auxiliary permanent register, means 
for actuating the said first two registers con 
tinuously step by step, another means for act 
llating all three registers, step by step, and 
25 means for returning the trip register to zero 
without disturbing the condition of the per 
manent registers, substantially as described. 
11. The combination with the trip-register, 
the permanent register and gearing connect 
3o ing the two registers, of an auxiliary perma 
nent register having a gear adapted to be 
geared with and ungeared from said two reg 
isters, substantially as described. 
l2. The combination with the trip-register 
35 and permanent register, of an auxiliary per 
manent register, an actuating slide for said 
first two registers, another actuating slide 
for said auxiliary register, and adapted to 
operate the first named slide, whereby the 
4o three registers are operated, and means for 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548534.txt	(No Model.) 
J. D. FOSTER & J. L. RISON, 
DELIVERY CABINET, 
No. 548,534, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Patented Oct. 22, 1895. 
 
7. 
7" 
4 1. 
/ 
2 
 
s 
 
O 
y 
- 
2N 
a 
af far gazes A.A.2s/er & 
- 
C2/o/7/7Z. As of a - 
as a ez-fair 
at are 77ters 
- 
/77%. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A. 
JAMES D. FOSTER AND JOHN L. RISON, OF HUNTSVILLE, ALABAAIA. 
DELIVERY-CABINET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,534, dated October 22, 1895. 
Application filed July 5, 1895, Serial No. 555,018, (No model.) 
. 
. 
25 
C 
To add whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, JAMESD. FosTER and 
JOHNL. RISON, citizens of the United States, 
residing at Huntsville, in the county of Miadi. 
Son and State of Alabama, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in De 
livery-Cabinets; and we do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
store-furniture articles of that class known 
as delivery bins or cabinets, designed more 
especially for the purpose of storing and de 
livering powder and shot, although the cabi 
net may be used for storing other substances 
than those herein mentioned. 
The objects that we have in view are, first, 
to provide a simple and inexpensive cabinet 
in which quantities of different substances 
can be stored until it is desired to withdraw a 
part or the whole of certain of the contents 
in any one of the compartments; second, to 
provide convenient means for conveying the 
substance from any one of the compartments 
to a central spout for directing the substance 
into a scale-pan; third, to provide a simple 
valve or gate mechanism for each compart 
ment of the cabinet, and, finally, to provide a 
locking contrivance adapted to lock all the 
valves of the series of compartments when the 
valves are closed. 
With these ends in view our invention con 
sists in the combination of devices, and in the 
novel construction and arrangement of parts, 
which will be hereinafter fully described and 
claimed. 
To enable others to understand our inven 
tion we have illustrated the preferred em 
bodiment of our cabinet in the accompany 
ing drawings, forming a part of this specifi 
cation, in which 
Figure l is a front elevation of a cabinet 
constructed in accordance with our invention. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical transverse sectional view 
thereof on the plane indicated by the dotted 
line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail perspec 
tive view of one of the valves and its oper 
SO ating-stem. 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of the 
locking-bar. 
45 
40 
35 
 
55 
65 
o 
75 
Like letters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in all the figures of the drawings, re 
ferring to which 
A designates the inclosing shell or casing 
of the cabinet. We prefer to make this cas 
ing of substantially rectangular shape, and to 
mount it upon the legs a, although the shape 
and the way of supporting the cabinet are 
not material and may be varied at pleasure. 
This case A is divided into a series of com 
partments B C by means of the transverse 
partitions b b, and each compartment has a 
sloping false bottom c, which inclines down 
ward toward and below a discharge-port d, 
provided in the solid front rail a of the cabi 
net. We prefer to provide a glass front e to 
the series of compartments to enable the store 
keeper to readily ascertain the quantity of 
powder and shot or other substances con 
tained in the compartments of the cabinet; 
but the use of this glass front e is optional 
and may be ommitted. 
To the solid front rail a of the cabinet is 
secured a metallic facing strip or strips F, 
which may be fastened in place by screws or 
in any other suitable way, and in said fac 
ing-strip is provided a series of openings or 
notches f, which coincide with the series of 
discharge-ports d from the series of compart 
ments BC. In the drawings we have shown 
two of these facing-strips with their contig 
uous ends spaced to provide an opening in 
line with the port d from the central com 
partment C; but it is evident that a single 
continuous strip may be used with an open 
ing or recess to coincide with the port of the 
compartment C. 
GH designate the sloping conveyer troughs 
or chutes, and I is the central spout by which 
the contents of the several compartments B C 
may be conveniently discharged into a scale 
pan or other receptacle. These chutes and 
the spout are suitably secured to the front 
rail a of the cabinet below the series of ports 
d from the compartments, and we prefer to 
arrange the spout I below the central com 
partment C, while the chutes GH are below 
the side compartments B B. The chutes are 
closed at their outer ends at the sides of the 
cabinet, and said chutes are inclined or ar 
ranged in sloping positions from the sides of 
85 
go 
95 
O 
548,534 
2 (d 
35 
45 
O 
7 o 
75 
90 
scales. 
- 
the cabinet toward the central spout I, where 
by the substances deposited into the chutes 
from either of the compartments B will be di 
rected by the chutes into the central spout. 
The ports d from the compartments BC 
are normally closed by the series of gates or 
valves J K, which are pivoted to the front 
rail a of the cabinet and are adapted to fit 
between the facing-strip F and the front rail 
a' across and over the ports d. The valves J 
are arranged to close the ports d to the com 
partments B and are provided with verti 
cally-disposed operating -stems i, while the 
valve K is arranged to close the port to the 
central compartment C and it has a horizon 
tal operating-stem k. 
In the cabinet shown and herein described 
as an embodiment of our invention we in 
tend to use the central compartment C for the 
storage of powder, while the side compart 
ments B are for storing shot of different sizes. 
Hence we arrange the stem for the valve of 
the powder-compartment C in a different po 
sition from the valve-stems of the side com 
artments, so that the storekeeper will not be 
so liable to make a mistake in vending pow 
der for shot, or Vice Versa, as when all the 
stems are arranged in the same positions. 
Each valve J has two lugs i'j', one extend 
ing horizontally and the other vertically be 
yond the edge of the valve-plate, and through 
the lateral lugi' is passed the pivot-pin or 
screw that fastens the valve to the front rail 
a', while a pivot-pin passes through the verti 
cal lugi' and the lower end of the valve-stem 
i to partially connect the valve and its stem to 
gether. These vertical valve-stems fare fitted 
and guided in notches l, formed in the front 
overhanging edge of the top of the casing A, 
and they are held in place by a strip l', fas 
tened to the cabinet top over the notchesl, the 
protruding ends of the valve-stems having 
suitable pull-pieces for their convenient ma 
nipulation. Each vertical stemi is provided 
with a notch n, near its upper end, and into 
these notches are adapted to take the lips in 
on the horizontal locking-bar N. This lock 
ing-bar is fitted beneath the overhanging 
front edge of the top of the casing, and it has 
a series of longitudinal slots n', through which 
are passed the screws in', that serve to con 
nect the locking-bar to the top of the casing 
in a manner to permit said bar to have a lim 
ited sliding movement. Said locking-bar has 
a series of notches p cut in its outer edge, 
forming the shoulders or lips in, and at one 
end this bar N has a suitable pull-piece ofor 
its convenient manipulation. The vertical 
stemsi of the valves J are fitted in the notches 
6op of the pull-bar, and when all of the valve 
stems are lowered to close the valves J across 
the ports d of the compartments B the bar N 
can be pulled out to force the lips in into the 
notches m, thereby locking all the stems i 
and the valves J across the ports of the side 
compartments. 
If desired, each valve-stemi may be pressed 
normally downward to keep the valve J 
closed across the port from the compartment 
B by means of the coiled spring Q (shown 
by Fig. 1) said spring having one end rest 
ing upon a pin, shoulder, or lug on the valve 
stem and its other end bearing against the 
overhanging edge of the top of the cabinet or 
against the locking-rod N. 
The valve K is pivoted at an intermediate 
point of its length to the front rail a by the 
pin or screw k', and the horizontal stemic of 
said valve is guided in a suitable fixed keeper 
ic', the free end of the valve-stem k having 
a suitable finger-piece, as shown. 
It is intended that our cabinet shall. b 
placed in a store-counter in convenient posi 
tion to a scales, so that the contents of the 
compartments may be discharged directly 
into the scale-pan; but if it is not conven. 
ient to so place the cabinet a flexible tube 
may be connected to the spout in order that 
the substance may be easily directed to the 
If the storekeeper desires to sell a quan 
tity of powder, the stem k is pulled to raise 
the valve K and permit, the powder to flow 
from the compartment C, through the port d, 
into the spout I, and thence to the scale-pan, 95 
after which the stem k is shoved back to close 
the port of said compartment C. To withs 
draw shot from either of the compartments 
B the rod N is forced in to release its shoul 
diers n, from the notched valve-stems, the 
proper valve-stem is lifted to raise the valve, 
and the shot can now flow into the chute G 
or H, thence to the spout I, and thence to the 
scale-pan, after which the valve-stem is 
shoved down and the rod N pulled out to lock 
all of the vertical valve-stems. 
Ef desired, a suitable locking contrivance 
may be provided for the horizontai stem e of 
the valve K. 
We are aware that changes in the form and 
proportion of parts and in the details of con 
struction of the devices herein shown and de 
scribed as an embodiment of our invention 
can be made by a skilled mechanic without 
departing from the spirit or sacrificing the 
advantages of our invention; and we there 
fore reserve the right to make such changes 
and alterations as fairly fall within the scope 
of our invention. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is-a- 
1. The combination of a casing having a 
series of isolated compartments and with ver 
tical guides, a series of gates across the dis 
charge ports from said compartments, the 
valve stems connected to the gates and fitted 
in the vertical guides, and a locking rod slid 
ably supported on the casing and having 
means adapted to engage With, or be disen 
gaged from, the series of the valve stems, sub 
stantially as described. 
65 
50 
55 
Iot 
Io. 
... I 
I 
2 
12 
 
548,584 
3 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa- 15 
5 inclined chutes, arranged below the ports, to tures in presence of two witnesses. 
2. A delivery cabinet comprising a casing ously and a horizontal stem connected to an 
divided into a series of isolated compartments other of the series of gates, substantially as 
and having the discharge ports and the ver- described. 
tical guides, the central spout, the reversely- 
deliver to the spout, the pivoted gates, the 
vertical valve stems fitted in the vertical 
guides and connected to certain of the gates, 
a locking rod common to all of said vertical 
ro stems and adapted to be engaged therewith, 
and to be disengaged therefrom, simultane- 
JAMES D. FOSTER. 
JOHN T. RISON. 
Witnesses: 
J. O. ROBINSON, 
J. S. ALLISON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548634.txt	(No Model.) . 
No. 548,634, 
C. T. FISHER 
TRACK CLEANER, 
Patented Oot. 29, 1895. 
3v-uc-vitov 
au/f 
& Fitovic 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEST. FISHER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
TRACK CLEAN E.R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,634, dated October 29, 1895. 
Application filed May 31, 1895. Serial No. 551,244. (No model.) 
55 
65 
o 
75 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLEST. FiSHER, a 
resident of Baltimore, in the State of Mary 
land, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Track-Cleaners; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
track-cleaners, and more particularly to such 
as are adapted for use on street railroads, tile 
object of the invention being to so construct 
a track-cleaner that it will operate to effectu 
ally remove dirt, &c., from the tread and 
groove of the rails either on straight or curved 
track. 
A further object is to produce a track 
cleaner adapted to be so connected with the 
car as not to be affected by the vibrations 
thereof. 
A further object is to construct a track 
cleaner in such manner that it can be applied 
to the brake-shoes. 
A further object is to so construct a scraper 
plate for a track-cleaner that it can be readily 
placed in position or removed when worn, and 
to so mount and support said scraper-plate 
that it can be raised when desired. 
A further object is to produce a track 
cleaner which shall be simple in construction, 
cheap to manufacture, not easy to get out of 
order, which can be easily, cheaply, and 
quickly applied to any car, and which shall 
be effectual in all respects in the performance 
of its functions. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion and combinations and arrangements of 
parts, as hereinafter set forth, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
view showing the application of my improved 
track-cleaner to a brake-shoe. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional view of the device. Fig. 3 is a sepa 
rate view of the scraper-plate. Figs. 4 and 5 
are views illustrating modifications. 
A represents a brake block or shoe, to 
which a bracket or holder B is secured by 
means of set-screws, bolts, or in any other 
suitable manner, said bracket or holder being 
adapted to project somewhat beyond the edge 
of the brake block or shoe. 
The bracket or holder B may consist of 
two side plates 1 1 and a horizontal plate 2, 
connected at its edges to the lower edges of 
said side plates, the latter preferably termi 
nating at their upper ends in narrow portions 
or arms 33, which are secured to the brake 
block or shoe in the manner above explained; 
or, if desired, the entire bracket or holder 
may be made in a single casting. 
If desired, one of the side plates 1 may be 
omitted and the bracket or holder inade L 
shaped in cross-section. 
The bottom or horizontal plate 2 is made 
with an elongated slot 4 for the accommoda 
tion of a scraper-plate C, the walls of said 
slot being made beveled, so that the scraper 
plate will be normally disposed in a diagonal 
position in front of the car-wheel and at right 
angles to the axis of the latter. The upper 
end of the scraper-plate is made with ears or 
shoulders 5, adapted to bear on the upper 
face of the plate 2 to limit the downward 
movement of said Scraper-plate and prevent 
its escape. The lower end of the scraper 
plate C is made to conform to the tread and 
groove of the track-rail, so as to remove any 
ice, snow, dirt, or other substance or article 
on the track or in the groove thereof. It is 
particularly desirable to remove foreign mat 
ter from the tracks of electric railways when 
the track forms a part of the electric con 
ductor, as it frequently happens that the 
presence of foreign substances on the track, 
and especially in the grooves of the rails on 
curves, prevents the proper and continuous 
electrical contact of the wheels with the track, 
and thus more or less seriously interferes with 
the supply of current to the motor, which 
would result in the uneven running of the 
car. My improved scraper most effectually 
prevents the occurrence of such evils by thor 
oughly removing all foreign matter which 
might constitute an insulating medium from 
the track and groove therein. 
The scraper-plate C may be made of wood, 
gum, pressed paper, metal, or any other de 
sired material. 
85 
95 
CC 
d 
25 
35 
45 
 
E43,634. 
40 
45 
55 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination with a bracket having 
a substantially horizontal bottom having a di 
agonal slot formed therein, of a scraper plate 
fitted to slide up and down in the slot and 
provided with lateral projection to prevent it 
from dropping out of the slot, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. The combination with a holder having a 
slot, of a scraper plate adapted to scrape the 
track rail, ears adapted to engage the holder 
to prevent the escape of the scraper plate, 
said scraper plate having a hole between its 
ends and a pin adapted to pass through said 
hole and rest on the holder to sustain the 
scraper plate in an elevated position, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a track cleaner, the combination with 
a holder comprising side plates and a horizon 
tall plate connecting said side plates and hav 
ing an elongated slot with inclined walls, of 
a scraper plate adapted to pass loosely through 
said elongated slot and become disposed in a 
diagonal position in proximity to the car 
wheel, the lower end of said scraper plate be 
ing adapted to scrape the tread and groove of 
the track rail, and means for preventing the 
escape of said scraper plate, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof. I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLEST, FISHER, 
JOSEPH DUNN, 
C. A. BANDELL. 
o 
25 
5. its functions. 
The device is exceedingly simple in con 
struction, can be manufactured and applied 
to any car at a very small cost, and is very 
effectual in all respects in the performance of 
A cleaner such as above described will pref 
erably be applied in proximity to each wheel 
of the car. When the car is running in one 
direction, the scraper-plates at the rear end of 
the car will be raised off of the track and held 
in their raised position by means of a pin a, 
passed through perforations bin said scraper 
plates. When the car runs in the opposite 
direction, these pins will be removed to allow 
the scraper-plates to engage the track-rails, 
and the scraper-plates at the opposite end of 
the car will be raised and held up in the same 
manner as above explained. 
Instead of securing the device to the brake 
blocks or shoes, as above described, it may 
be secured to a cross-bar c under the car, in 
which case the elongated slot 4 in the hori 
zontal plate 2 of the holder B will be disposed 
at right angles to said cross-bar and axis of 
the car-wheel. 
The device might be secured to the car-bot 
tom, if desired; but in that case I prefer to at 
tach it by means of a spring e, one end of 
which is secured to the car and the other end 
to the holder. 
Various slight changes might be made in 
the details of construction of my invention 
without departing from the spirit thereof or 
limiting its scope, and hence I do not wish to 
limit myself to the precise details of construc 
tion herein set forth; but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548734.txt	(No Model.) 
4 She ets-Sheet 1. 
MEANS FOR PRODUCING COPIED EFFECTS ON WRITTEN OR PRINTED 
... C. E. ADAMSON. 
MATTER, 
No. 548,734. 
a 
 
Patented Oct. 29, 1895. 
few-6aeauy 
avaz 
77 falo 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MEANS FOR PRODUCING COPIED EFFECTs 0N WRITTEN OR PRINTED 
Patented Oct. 29, 1895. 
No. 548,734. 
C, E, ADAMSON. 
MATTER 
 
l -------- 
WZZWZSSAS 
42.4%-4- 
s 
so 
Inverto 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet. 3. 
MEANS FOR PRODUCING COPIED EFFECTS ON WRITTEN OR PRINTED 
C. E. ADAMSON. 
MATTER, 
No. 548,734, 
|N 
Patented Oct. 29, 1895. 
 
6 
N 8 
t 3 
S 
| 3 
2 
r" Y 
ls Ns 
SO 
s 
 
  
 
s 
N 
N 
.NS 
 
 
s 
A. 
\\ls E. 
WN: 
s E. S. 
S. 
N 
s 
$ 
- 
l 
s 
s 
R 
A. 
. 
R 
S. 
A 
S = 
O 
I' 
le 
M 
r 
WZZMASSAS 
2 4 : - 
- Inventor 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
MEANS FOR PRODUCING COPIED EFFECTS ON WRITTEN OR PRINTED 
Patented Oct. 29, 1895. 
C. E. ADAMSON. 
MATTER, 
 
 
(7 (27 
// ::: 
~~~~ 
Zraverazor 
y 
s  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES ELLSW ORTH A DAMS ON, O F MUN CIE, INDIAN A. 
MEANS FOR PRODUCING COPIED EFFECTS ON - WRITTEN OR PRINTED MATTER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,734, dated October 29, 1895. 
Application filed December 13, 1894, Serial No. 531,626. (No model.) 
S 
O 
2 o 
25 
35 
45 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES ELLSWORTH 
ADAMSON, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Muncie, in the county of Delaware and 
State of Indiana, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Machines for Pro 
ducing a Copied Effect on Written or Printed 
Matter; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to a new and useful 
improvement in machines for producing a 
copied effect on written or printed matter; 
and the objects of my improvements are to 
construct a machine that will moisten the pa 
per and then dry it at one continuous opera 
tion by first passing the paper into the ma 
chine between moistened rollers, then carry 
ing the moist sheets around a heated drying 
drum, so that the paper will be delivered from 
the machine perfectly dry. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
duce the copied effect on the printed matter 
by passing the sheets with their printed sur 
faces down in direct contact with one or more 
cloth-covered rollers, the lower portion of the 
said rollers extending down into the water, 
which is kept in a pan arranged below the 
w 
said rollers. 
I obtain these objects by the construction 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, 
wherein like letters and figures of reference 
indicate corresponding parts in the several 
views, and in which- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my com 
plete machine. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal verti 
cal section taken on the line a ac of Fig.1. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged sectional view of the 
mechanism for producing the copied effect, 
Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section of one end of 
the impression-roller. Fig. 5 is a longitudi 
nal section of one end of one of the copying 
rollers. Fig. 6 is a detail perspective view of 
one end of the water-pan and the two copy 
ing-rollers. Fig. 7 is a detail view of the sup 
porting-block; and Fig. 8 is a detail perspec 
tive, partly in section, of the delivery side of 
In constructing my machine Imake a frame 
. 
" 
- 
described. 
consisting of four corner-posts A, two upper 
side bars A', and two lower side bars A' and 
the necessary cross-braces at the front and 
rear ends of the frame. ... I also use an in 
clined brace A' at each side of the frame, 
serving to brace the same and support the 
drying-drum, all as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
To the under side of each upper side bar 
and at the front end of the machine is se 
cured a supporting-block B, each block being 
held in position by a bolt B', passing through 
a vertical aperture in the block and secured 
to the upper side bars. 
C represents the copying-rollers, which are 
placed transversely on the supporting-frame. 
These rollers are provided with the journals C 
at their opposite ends and are free to revolve 
by having their journals C passing through 
transverse apertures in the block B. One 
of the journals of the rear roller is provided 
with an extension G', which extends out be 
yond the block B, for a purpose hereinafter 
I use two rollers and secure them parallel 
with each other and about one inch apart, as 
most clearly shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 6. These 
rollers are preferably made of wood and are 
each covered with a soft cloth, such as felt or 
flannel. Such material I find will retain but 
little, if any, of the ink-stains when in use. 
Below the copying-rollers is supported the 
water-pan B, which is held in position by the 
hooks D', which are secured to the pan and 
to the side bars A'. This pan is made some 
what wider than the length of the copying 
rollers, so that the rollers may be placed and 
revolve within the pan. The said pan is kept 
full of water and the lower portions of the 
rollers are submerged therein, the upper por 
tions being above the water-level, for a pur 
pose hereinafter described. The pan is also 
provided with an overflow-spout and a faucet 
for emptying the water when desired. 
E represents the feed-table, which is se 
cured to the front portion of the frame and 
on which the printed sheets are placed before 
being fed into the machine. A feed-belt E is 
arranged to move between the table E and 
the front copying-roller C, as shown in Figs. 
1, 2, and 3. The belt E passes around two 
rollers, one of which E' is located at the lower 
5o the copying mechanism. 
55 
75 
9o 
OO 
 
548,784 
7 o 
75 
95 
edge of the feed-table and the other one E.' 
is located in the main frame near the copying 
roller. 
H represents the impression-roller, which 
rests on and is supported directly by the copy 
ing-rollers C. This roller is kept in its place 
on the rollers C, and is prevented from hav 
ing a longitudinal movement on the frame by 
placing the rollers C a short distance apart, 
so that the periphery of the roller H will rest 
hetween the rollers C and on the adjacent 
sides thereof, as plainly shown in the draw 
ings. The roller H is shorter than the width 
of the frame and will rest between the cross 
bars and be thereby prevented from any trans 
The impression-roller is 
Verse in O Venent. 
closed at each end, as shown in Fig. 4, and is 
provided with the studs H", which extend out 
beyond the cross-bars for convenience in lift 
ing the roller from the frame when desired. 
This roller, as before described, rests directly 
on the rollers C, and is preferably made of a 
hollow iron pipe, and is sufficiently heavy to 
exert considerable pressure on the rollers C 
and an even pressure on the sheets which 
pass between them, and it is covered with a 
soft cloth, such as velvet or flannel. Around 
this roller are placed threads I, preferably of 
silk, which pass around a small roller 1, which 
is journaled in the frame in the rear of the 
copying-rollers. These threads are placed a 
suitable distance apart and prevent the 
printed sheets from sticking to the impres 
sion r roller. Similar threads J' are placed 
around the two lower rollers and around a 
Small roller 2, which is journaled in the frame 
in the rear of the copying-rollers, preventing 
the sheets from sticking to the said rollers 
and guiding the sheets out upon the drying 
belt K, all as indicated by the dotted arrows 
in Fig. 3. 
The hollow drying-drum K is located back 
of the copying-effect mechanism and is jour 
naled on a hollow shaft K', which is sup 
orted on the inclined bars A'. The said 
shaft is provided with a series of apertures 
K' within the drum and a gas-pipe and stop 
cock on one end of the pipe outside of the 
bar A', as shown in Fig. 1. Gas is admitted 
into the pipe, as desired, burning from the 
small apertures and heating the drum to dry 
the sheets when the machine is in operation. 
J and L. represent the drying-belts, which 
are made of some firm material which will 
not be injured by heat, and they may be solid 
cloth or strips of tape or threads, as desired, 
as they simply carry the sheets against and 
around the drying-drum. These belts arear 
ranged on the rollers and drum as follows: 
The inner belt L. passes around and directly 
against the drum K, passing up and partly 
around the roller 3, which is journaled on the 
frame, then over and around the roller 4, 
which is also journaled on the frame, then 
down to and around the drum. The outer or 
long belt J passes over the roller 5, where the 
wet sheets drop upon it, then down over the 
roller 6, then against the belt L, around the 
drum, coming up on top between the rollers 
3 and 4, at which point the dry sheet is deliv 
ered over on the delivery-board M, which is 
placed on top of the machine. The belt J is 
then carried onto the rear of the machine, 
where it passes over the roller 7, then down 
around the roller 8, then forward to the roller 
9, then up to the roller 5. These rollers 5, 6, 
7, 8, and 9 are supported on and journaled in 
the frame. 
Motion is imparted to the various belts and 
rollers by placing a sprocket-wheel F and a 
driving-pulley F' on the extension G' of the 
journal of the rear copying -roller C. A 
sprocket-wheel F.' is secured to one end of 
the roller 3 and a similar sprocket-wheel F is 
secured on the end of the roller E', 
and 
around these sprocket-wheels F, F, and F' a 
sprocket-chain G is passed. It will readily 
be seen that when motion is imparted to the 
extension G' by means of the drive-pulley F' 
the rollers C and H will revolve and that by 
means of the sprocket-chain and wheels mo. 
tion will be imparted to the various belts and 
rollers, as indicated by the arrows in Figs. 2 
and 3. 
The operation of my machine is as follows: 
The letters, circulars, or other matter are 
printed in the ordinary way in a copying-ink, 
and after they have come from the printing 
press they are laid on the feed-table E, and 
then the copying-machine is started by a driv 
ing-belt (not shown) working on the pulley 
F'. The gas is turned on and lighted in the 
drum, the sheets are then fed one by one with 
the printed side down onto the belt E', and 
the sheets are carried over the two copying 
rollers C and under the impression-roller H, 
out over the rollers 5 and 6 onto the belt J, 
and around the drum between the belts J and 
L and delivered on top the delivery-board M 
from between the belts J and L at the point 
where the two belts separate. 
It will be seen that when the copying-roll 
ers C revolve they will impart a certain de 
gree of moisture to the impression-roller H. 
In passing over the copying-rollers and under 
the impression-roller the printed matter is 
subjected to dampness on each side, which 
produces a slight tinge or copied effect on 
the printing. A slight stain from the ink is 
washed into the water in the pan, and this 
water is changed when it becomes too heavily 
colored. The copying-rollers and impression 
roller are covered with a soft cloth-such as 
felt, velvet, or flannel-which I have discov 
ered will not offset or reprint any color or 
stain on the sheets, absorbing but little if any 
amount of ink therefrom and giving them the 
copied effect. 
Any ink-stains which remain in the copy 
ing-rollers will be washed out as the rollers 
revolve through the pan of water and the 
rollers will become saturated with the water 
from the pan. The impression-roller being 
heavy and resting directly on the copying 
IIO 
II5 
I 30 
O 
3O 
35 
45 ) 
55 
65 
 
O 
rollers will, by its weight, press nearly all of 
the water out of the copying-rollers, and very 
little if any of the water is transferred to the 
impression-roller. This surplus Water will be 
forced out of the copying-rollers just in ad 
vance of the point of contact of the copying 
and pressure rollers and the printed sheets 
will pass directly through this pressed-out 
water and become thoroughly saturated and 
will then pass between the rollers where the 
water will be pressed out of the printed sheets. 
This operation is repeated when the printed 
sheets pass between the second copying-roller 
and impression-roller. It will be seen by this 
construction that immediately after the 
printed sheets have been saturated with wa 
ter and pressed they are passed around the 
drying-drum and dried. This I regard as an 
important feature of my invention, for the 
reason that unless the sheets were at once 
dried the wet ink would soak through the 
paper, thereby making the copied effect im 
perfect and one easily distinguished from an 
original type-written letter. 
I am aware that many minor changes can 
be made in the construction and arrangement 
of parts without in the least departing from 
the nature and principle of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a machine for producing a copied ef 
fect on written or printed matter, the combi 
nation with a supporting frame, of a damp 
ened copying roller on the frame for produc 
ing a copied effect, means for dampening the 
copying roller, a drier on the frame, means 
for exerting pressure on the copying roller, 
and means for passing the printed sheets be 
tween the copying roller and pressure mech 
anism and through the drier, while the sheets 
are damp and after having been passed 
through the said dampening and pressure 
mechanisms, substantially as described. 
2. In a machine for producing a copied ef 
fect on printed or written matter, the combi 
nation with a supporting frame, of a damp 
ened copying roller, having a cloth surface, 
journaled on the frame, means for dampening 
the roller, a pressure roller resting on the copy 
ing roller, a drying drum journaled on the 
20 
25 
35 
40 
45 
548,734 
3 
frame, and mechanism for passing the printed 
matter between the copying and pressure roll 
ers and around the drying drum, Substantially 
as described. 
3. In a machine for producing a copied ef 
fect on printed or written matter, the combi 
nation with the supporting frame, of a copy 
ing roller journaled on the frame, a water tank 
secured to the frame surrounding the lower 
portion of the roller, a pressure roller resting 
on the copying roller, a drying drum jour 
naled on the frame and means for passing the 
printed sheets between the copying and press 
ure rollers and around the drying drum, Sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a machine for producing a copied ef 
fect on printed or written matter, the combi 
nation with the supporting frame, of a pair of 
parallel copying rollers journaled on the 
frame and out of contact with each other, a 
water tank secured to the frame below the 
rollers and in which the rollers are partly Sub 
merged, a pressure roller resting between and 
supported directly by the copying rollers and 
means for rotating the rollers, Substantially 
as described. 
5. In a machine for producing a copied ef 
fect on printed or written matter, the combi 
nation with a supporting frame, of a copying 
roller supported on the frame, means for re 
volving the roller, a drying drum on the frame 
at the rear of the copying roller, belts passing 
around the drum and between which the 
printed sheets are carried and a delivery table 
supported on the frame over the drying drum, 
substantially as described. 
6. In a machine for producing a copied ef 
fect on printed or written matter, the combi 
nation with a supporting frame, of a copying 
roller journaled on the frame having a water 
retaining surface, a water tank secured to the 
frame surrounding the lower portion of the 
roller, and a pressure roller for exerting press 
ure on the upper portion of the copying roller, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARIES ELISWORTH ADAMSON. 
Witnesses: 
E. E. DAUGHERTY, 
W. A. RICH ISON. 
55 
7 o 
75 
9 O 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548834.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT M. LAFFERTY, OF DAVENPORT, IOWA; STANLEY B. LAFFERTY, AD. 
MINISTRATOR OF SAID ROBERT M. LAFFERTY, DECEASED, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE RED JACKET MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PU PPET-VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,834, dated October 29, 1895. 
Application filed December 30, 1887. Serial No. 259,366 (No model.) 
- 
25 valve proper. 
To all wh???, i? ??? ???-????: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT M. LAFFERTY, 
of Davenport, Scott county, Iowa, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
5 in Puppet-Valves, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
My invention is more especially adapted 
Io for use in lift-out pumps, and is designed to 
avoid by a simple construction the displace 
ment of the valve from its seat when subject 
to Ordinary usage and to permit its removal 
therefrom when necessary without employing 
I5 extraneous appliances ortheremovalofscrews 
and bolts, substantially as hereinafter fully 
described, and as illustrated in the drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 shows a lift-out pump in vertical 
20 central section having my improved puppet 
Valve applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a side eleva 
tion of the body of the valve. Fig. 3 is a view 
showing the under side of the valve-seat ring, 
and Figs. 4, 5, and 6 show modifications of the 
Referring to the drawings, A is a circular. 
or other desirable shaped plate composing the 
body of the valve, and it is provided with a 
central boltB, projecting upward from its up 
3o per surface. Held concentrically with said 
bolt Bupon the plate Aby a nut Cisa pack 
ing ring or disk D. The diameter of disk D 
is greater than plate A, and its projecting 
edges are adapted to rest upon the valve-seat 
35 edges or upon the valve-seat ring F. Ring F 
rests upon the inner annular ledge b of the 
pump-pipe, as shown, forming the valve-seat, 
and it is provided with a flange extending ver 
tically downward from its inner edges, which 
4o are concentric with said pump-pipe, and fits 
Snugly within the contracted opening made 
by the said ledges b. 
Secured to and depending down from the 
under surface of plate A are the wire yokes 
45 E. The ends of each of these wire yokes or 
loops E are secured to said plate A at such 
distances from the center that they come 
within the radius of the contracted opening 
of the valve-seat. From thence they pursue 
5o a straight downward course a suitable dis 
tance, whereupom theyare bentoutward radi 
ally to form the shouldersee. It is thus ob 
vious that the vertical movement of the valve 
is limited to the distance between the plate 
A and said shoulderse e, and it is equally ap- 55 
parent that this distance must be sufficient to 
permit the water to pass up through the con 
tracted opening of the valve-seat. 
Theyokes E, being made of spring-wire, may 
by the exertion of a little force be caused to 6o 
pass down through the contracted opening of 
the valve-seat ring, and when they have been 
so crowded through they are sufficiently rigid 
to prevent the pressure of the water as it 
rushes into the cylinder from below from forc- 65 
ing them back through the opening. Thus 
the valve is a perfect puppet-valve and can 
not during the ordinary process of pumping 
be displaced, but can, when necessary, be re 
moved from off the valve-seat without remov- 7o 
ing any bolts or screws. 
In order to withdraw said puppet-valve 
when used in a lift-out pump without going 
to the necessity of using extraneous appli 
ances, I make a nut G, preferably integrant 75 
with the head of the plunger or piston, which 
by screwing it down onto bolt B will, when 
lifted, remove said valve from its seat. To 
prevent the valve turning while the nut G is 
being screwed onto said bolt B, I provide ring 8o 
F with one or more inwardly-projecting lugs 
ff, which when the valve begins to rotate 
meets one of the yokes and prevents further 
rotation thereof. 
tical non-rotating movement of the valve, I 
can provide guides e', of wire, which are pref 
erably secured to the shoulders of the yokes 
and arising vertically move in suitable re 
cesses made in the valve-seat With reference 9o 
to them. 
Other well-known mechanical expedients 
can be used for holding the packing-disk in 
position. I prefer that shown, however. 
or equivalents thereof that I desire to cover 
as well as that shown. For instance, in Fig. 
5 I cast integrant with or secure to the under 
surface of plate A the staples c c, and by 
bending the ends of the yokes at right angles Ioo 
There are several constructions of theyokes 95 
If desired, in order to insure the perfect ver- 85 
548?834 
to that stretch thereof between the shoulders 
e thereof and plate A in toward the center 
of the plate can pass them through said sta 
ples, from which I prevent their withdrawal 
by bending the extremities of said yoke later 
ally, as shown. When a yoke or loop is se 
cured in this manner to plate A, the upper 
ends are pinched in toward each other when 
forced through the valve-seat opening, where 
as in the construction shown in Fig. 2 the 
yokes under similar circumstances elongate 
vertically. I prefer when using the construc 
tion of these yokes as shown in Fig. 5 to ex 
tend a suitable stud I centrally downward 
from said plate, through which the bends of 
said yoke pass. 
In Fig. 4 I show how the yokes can be dis 
pensed with. I substitute in lieu of each 
yoke two spring-wires gg, each of which pro 
jects down from said plate in substantially the 
Same manner as the ends of yokes E and curves 
downward from the shoulders h thereof in 
toWard each other. Just before these wires 
g touch they bend centrally upward into the 
Common central pocket of the stud H, depend 
ing vertically and centrally down from said 
plate A. 
In Fig. 6 is shown a yet simpler construc 
tion of the springs g. Instead of wire springs 
they are shown as being made of flat spring 
metal. They are preferably riveted to plate 
A, and they extend downward similar to the 
shape of the sides of the yokes. They ter 
minate, however, before their lower ends 
meet, and being more flexible are not as well 
adapted for my purpose as the yokes or the 
springs g shown in Fig. 4. All of these springs 
g or yokes E are, it will be observed, pro 
vided with the outwardly-projecting shoul 
ders, which limit the upward movement of the 
Valve and are yet sufficiently flexible to per 
mit the valve to be removed from off its seat 
upon the application of sufficient force. This 
is one of the most important features of my 
invention, and being entirely new I desire to 
cover the same broadly. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination with a well-pipe having 
a circumferential flange or ledge projecting 
in Ward from the inner circumference so as 
to reduce the diameter of the bore and fur 
nish a valve-seat, of a valve resting on said 
valve-seat, which is of a diameter too great to 
pass through the restricted opening thereof, 
and flexible yokes E depending down from 
said valve at points an equal distance from 
the center thereof coming within the radius 
of the restricted opening of said valve-seat; 
said yokes depending down through said 
opening, and at corresponding distances from 
said plate bent radially outward beyond the 
circumference of the annular edges of the 
valve-seat to form shoulders, which when 
said valve is lifted, strike against the under 
surface of the valve-seat, and limit the move 
ment of and prevent the displacement of the 
valve; said yokes then extending downward 
and inward toward the return bend thereof, 
as set forth. 
2. In a puppet valve the plate A and the 
downwardly extending frame-work having an 
elastic enlarged portion of a diameter greater 
than the opening in the valve-seat, and a con 
tracted portion of less diameter than said open 
ing, the frame work consisting of a series 
of loops, each loop beginning at one edge of 
the valve, and extending continuously down 
and up, and to the edge of the valve opposite 
? Yere the loop began, substantially as set 
Orth. 
3. In a puppet valve, the plate A and the 
downwardly extending framework having an 
elastic enlarged portion of a diameter greater 
than the opening in the valve seat, and a 
contracted portion of less diameter than said 
opening, the framework consisting of a series 
of continuous loops, each loop beginning at 
one edge of the valve and extending continu 
ously down and up and to the edge of the 
Valve opposite to where the loop began, and 
guides e', substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of plate A provided 
with bolt B, elastic yokes E having shoulders 
e and guides e', valve ring D, plate C and 
valve seat ring F having inwardly projecting 
lugs, as set forth. 
5. The combination with a well pipe and 
valve seat therein plate A, bolt B, project 
ing inward concentrically therefrom, springs 
depending downward therefrom, passing 
through Said Valve seat, and at correspond 
ing points below said plate A, provided with 
shoulders e, and guides e' connecting said 
shoulders and plate A of the piston and nut 
G, on the lower end thereof, as set forth. 
R. M. LAEFEFERTY, 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. B. DICK, 
FRANK. D. THOMASON. 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
I. ? 
30 
35 
4 O 
45 
So 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US548935.txt	(No Model.) 
W. W. WALLACE & R. C. PENFIELD, 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
- 
No. 548,935. 
 
BRICKPRESS, 
Patented Oct. 29, 1895. 
SN 
22 
F' 
, 
Fl 
S 6. 
2S 6. 
g r 
11 ?eese 1 
1. 
As 
PA g l 
- - 
- 
r 
linesses, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 548,935, 
W. W. WALLACE & R. C. PENFIELD. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. . 
BRICK PRESS 
Patented 00t, 29, 1895, 
are JJeo 
Yf 
(562.6 
62. 
Zazz/ez-z do y 
322 
P 
. 
fa- - - - %e2, 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.Photo-tho, wAshington, D.c. 
W. W. WALLACE & R. C. PENFIELD. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
BRICKPRESS, 
(No Model.) 
No. 548,935, 
a. 
an 
Witnessed p 
tage? 
W 
2 
, 
 
 
C area 
A Tieill 
5 
S 
S7 
E 
 
1-Zeael 
77vezzors 
5.Etz 
W. W. WALLACE & R. C. PENPI. 
BRIOK PRESS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
Patented Oot, 29, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 548,935. 
 
 
 
2 . 
Y. 
 
 
. 
HS ASE 
al 
| A 
N 
N S 
32 N 
r NESN 
 
NSS 
N SSR 
 
 
 
 
Del SNS 2 
% 
  
 
  
7ft 67 essuse 
8 
2.462/ 
?--~62.-- 
* 34.7% 
47 Zeze (or 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.PHOTO-Tho...washington.cc 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. WALLACE AND RAYMOND C. PENFIELD, OF WILLOUGHBY, 
OHIO, ASSIGNORS TO J. W. PENFIELD & SON, OF SAME PLACE. 
BRICK-PRESS. 
SP3CIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 548,935, dated October 29, 1895. 
Application filed September 28, 1893, Serial No. 486,721 (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM W. WAL 
LACE and RAYMOND C. PENFIELD, of Wil 
loughby, in the county of Lake and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Brick-Presses; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it pertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
brick-presses, more especially what are known 
as dry-brick' presses; and it consists in cer 
tain features of construction and in combi 
nation of parts hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front side elevation of a brick-press embody 
ing our invention, portions being broken 
away and in section to more clearly show the 
construction. Fig. 2 is a right-hand side ele 
vation relative to Fig. 1, partly broken away 
to more clearly show certain features in the 
construction. Fig. 3 is an elevation in detail, 
partly in section, showing the means em 
ployed for adjusting the toggle-arms verti 
cally and the means employed for securing 
the same in the desired adjustment. 
Fig. 4 
is a front side elevation of the feed-box and 
feed-hopper, showing, also, the means em 
ployed for supporting said hopper; and Fig. 5 
is a right-hand side elevation of the same, 
showing, also, and partly in section, the mech 
anism for reciprocating the feed-boxin under 
the hopper, portions being broken away in 
Fig. 4 to reduce the size of the drawing. Fig. 
6 is a top-plan of the feed-box and mechanism 
for actuating the same, portions being broken 
away to reduce the size of the drawing. Fig. 
7 is a right-hand side elevation, mostly in ver 
tical section, of a portion of the machine, show 
ing, among other things, the mechanism for 
actuating the lower plunger and the mech 
anism for gaging the vertical position of the 
lower plunger, as will hereinafter more fully 
appear. Fig. 8 is a section in detail on line 
88, Fig. 7. Fig. 9 is a top plan in section on 
line 99, Fig. 7. 
The supporting structure of the machine 
comprises a base A and two heavy side frames 
B B, rigidly mounted upon the base. The 
side frames are provided with suitable boxes 
that afford bearing, respectively, for shafts 
C, D, E, and F. 
C designates the driving-shaft, (see Fig. 2.) 
that is supported at the rear extremity of the 
supporting structure, said shaft being pro 
vided with a driving-pulley C. On shaft C 
(see Fig.2) is also operatively mounted a pin 
ion C, that meshes with a gear D' on shaft D. 
A pinion D is also operatively mounted upon 
shaft. D and meshes with a large gear E, op 
eratively mounted upon shaft E. Shaft D is 
located a suitable distance forward, but pref 
erably in the same horizontal plane with the 
driving-shaft, and shaft E is, of course, sup 
ported a suitable distance above and some 
what forward of shaft D. A cam E that op 
erates the mechanism for reciprocating the 
feed-box hereinafter described is mounted 
upon or rigid with gear E, and a cam E, that 
operates the mechanism for actuating the 
lower plunger hereinafter referred to, is also 
operatively mounted upon shaft E. Shaft F 
is located a suitable distance above and some 
what forward of shaft E, and shaft F is oper 
atively connected with shaft E by means of a 
pair of elliptic gears f. 
I represents the die or mold in which the 
material is compressed, said die or mold being 
suitably supported from and between the up 
right side frames of the supporting structure. 
K and L represent the upper and lower 
plungers, respectively, the upper plunger K. 
being adapted to compress the material into 
the die or mold from above, and lower plun 
ger L being adapted to compress the material 
from below and elevate the pressed material 
or bricks from the die or mold flush with the 
top surfaces of the die or mold and table M, 
suitably supported in front of the die or 
mold. The plungers comprise, respectively, a 
series of heads kl, that are adapted to fit the 
respective compartments of the die or mold, 
which it is not considered necessary to illus 
trate in detail. The upper plunger Kis actu 
ated by toggle-arms N N', suitably connected 
with each other and operatively connected by 
means of a link f' with the crank Fof crank 
shaft F. The lower end of the lower toggle 
arm is suitably pivoted to the upper plunger, 
and the upper end of the upper toggle-arm is 
95 
IOO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
548,98 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
pivotally connected with vertically-movable 
side hars O O by means of the cam or eccen 
tric shaft or rod P, (see Figs. 1 and 3,) the 
upper toggle-arm suitably embracing the cam 
or eccentric portion P' (see Fig. 3) of said 
shaft or rod. Said shaft or rod is journaled in 
vertically-sliding boxes P, adapted to move 
up and down in slots b in the side frames of 
the supporting structure. Cap-plates Q are 
Secured to the ends of cam or eccentric shaft 
or rod P, preferably by means of one or more 
bolts or screws Q', and are preferably keyed 
to the shaft or rod, as at Q, said keys engag 
ing opposing slots in the respective end of 
the shaft or rod and cap-plate, as shown very 
clearly in Figs. 1 and 3. 
By the construction just described, it will 
be observed that cap-plates Q and the eccen 
tric or cam shaft or rod to which they are se 
cured must turn together, and that by adjust 
ing said shaft or rod circumferentially the 
toggle-arms are elevated or lowered as re 
quired in making the different sizes of brick. 
Caps Q are preferably provided with one or 
more holes Q for receiving a wrench or lever 
(not shown) for turning the eccentric shaft 
or rod in adjusting the toggle-arms up or 
down. Cap-plates Q overlap the side bars O 
and are secured to the latter in the desired 
adjustment of the cam or eccentric shaft, pref 
erably by means of a bolt or screw Q, the 
bolt-holes Q in the cap-plates for receiving 
bolts or screws Q being elongated concentric 
with the axis of the aforesaid shaft or rod to 
accommodate the aforesaid circumferential 
adjustment of the shaft or rod, that is held in 
the desired adjustment by tightening the 
bolts or screws Q. 
If desired, suitable means (not shown) 
might also be employed for securing the le 
ver (not shown) employed for turning said 
shaft or rod to the adjacent side bar O, and 
thereby assist the bolts or screws that secure 
the cap-plates to the side members in holding 
the cam or eccentric shaft or rod in the de 
sired adjustment. 
An important feature of our invention con 
sists in the employment of elliptic gears to 
establish operative connection between crank 
shaft F and shaft E, and such an arrange 
ment of the parts that a very slow movement 
is given to the upper plunger during the com 
pression of the material in the die or mold by 
Said plunger, and that said plunger is caused 
to dwell or come to a short stand after the 
compression of the material by said plunger, 
and to move comparatively rapidly upon its 
return stroke. By this construction and ar 
rangement of parts the machine possesses 
both great efficiency and capacity. Prefer 
ably there is a little lost motion left between 
the pin that pivotally secures the upper plun 
ger to the lower toggle-arm and its seat. 
The front table M, as already indicated, re 
ceives the pressed bricks as the latter are ele 
vated from the die or mold, and from said ta 
ble the bricks are supposed to be removed by 
hand. Another table R is suitably supported 
at the rear of the die or mold, the top surface 
of said rear table being flush with the top sur 
faces of the die or mold and forward table. 
On the rear table operates the reciprocating 
feed-box S, (see Figs. 4,5, and 6,) and over this 
feed-box is suitably supported a feed-hopper 
T, that discharges into the feed-box. 
The feed-hopper is preferably supported in 
the following manner: The rear table at op 
posite sides has rigidly secured thereto two 
upright brackets r, respectively, (see Figs. 4 
and 5,) said brackets being slotted laterally, 
as at r", with the slots open at their upper 
ends, the upper portion of said slots being en 
gaged by laterally-projecting ears or flanges 
T on the feed-hopper. Brackets rare flanged 
laterally at the lower end of slots 1', as at r", 
and said flanges are provided with vertical 
screw-threaded perforations for the reception 
of screw-threaded rods or studs r, that ex 
tend upwardly through holes T in the lat 
erally - projecting members T of the feed 
hopper, a spring U being confined upon each 
stud or rod r between the lower side of the 
laterally-projecting member T of the feed 
hopper and a nut r, mounted upon the stud 
or rod a suitable distance below member T', 
and a spring U' is confined upon each rod or 
stud r between the upper side of said later 
ally-projecting member and a nuts, mounted 
upon the stud or rod a suitable distance above 
said projecting member of the feed-hopper. 
By the construction just described, it will 
be observed that the lower set of springs U 
sustain the weight of the hopper, and that the 
upper set of springs U' permit the hopper to 
rise in case of any hard substance or obstruc 
tion finding ingress between the feed-box and 
lower edge of the hopper, and thereby relieve 
the hopper without doing any damage. 
The feed-box has a series of compartments 
S', corresponding with the compartments of 
the die or mold. The feed-box rests upon the 
rear table and is adapted to be reciprocated 
upon said table, in under the feed-hopper, 
preferably by the following mechanism: V 
(see Figs. 2, 5, and 6) represents a rock-shaft 
suitably supported from the side frames of 
the supporting structure a suitable distance 
forward of shaft E. Said rock-shaft bears a 
rock-arm V and a double rock-arm or rock 
ing frame V*. The free end of arm V' car 
ries a roller V, adapted to be engaged by cam 
E, and the free end of double rock-arm or 
frame V* is operatively connected with the 
feed-box, preferably as shown in Figs. 5 and 
6, wherein the feed-box has a cut-off plate S, 
flush with the top surface of the box and ex 
tending a suitable distance rearwardly of the 
box proper, the function of said cut-off being 
to retain the material in the hopper during 
the time that the feed-box moves from under 
the hopper in supplying the die or mold. The 
cut-off of the feed-box carries a shaft S, and 
a collar S is rigidly mounted upon each end 
of said shaft, said collars extending beyond 
75 
9 O 
95 
OC. 
d 
T c 
II5 
I 25 
548,935 
3. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the ends of the shaft, and the parts of the col 
lars thus extending beyond the shaft ends are 
perforated laterally, as at S, for the reception 
of links or rods S, operatively connected with 
rock-arms or rocking frame W. Links S, at 
the end connected with collars S', are screw 
threaded, and nuts S are mounted upon said 
screw-threaded portion of the links at either 
side of the collars, whereby said links are ad 
justable endwise. 
The depth of the feed-box is such that it 
will hold ample material for the bricks to be 
pressed at each operation of the machine. If 
there is more material in the feed-box than is 
needed, the surplus is carried back with the 
feed-box in under the hopper. The feed-box 
having received the discharge from the hop 
per, is thrust forward over the die or mold, 
where the material discharges into the die or 
mold by gravity, and as the feed-box is thrust 
forward to deliver the material into the die 
or mold it pushes forward the bricks already 
pressed onto the table M, where they are sup 
posed to be removed by hand or otherwise, 
the pressed bricks being elevated from the 
die or mold by the lower plunger. 
The lower plunger, as already indicated, is 
adapted to elevate the bricks flush with the 
top surface of the mold, subject to the action 
of the front side of the feed-box, that pushes 
the bricks onto the front table. The mech 
anism employed for actuating the lower plun 
ger is preferably as shown in Figs. 2, 7, and 
8, and comprises a lever W, that near its lon 
gitudinal center has axial trunnions W, jour 
naled in eccentric-boxes W, suitably sup 
ported by the upright side frames of the sup 
porting structure. Lever W is operatively 
connected with the lower plunger by means 
of a link or pitman W, and at its opposite 
end is provided with a roller W, that at the 
proper time is engaged by cam E, that actu 
ates the lever to lift the lower plunger, result 
ing in the elevation of the bricks from the die 
or mold. Upon the disengagement of said 
cam and lever, the latter reverses by gravity 
of the lower plunger. It will, of course, be un 
derstood that the axial trunnions of the lower 
plunger must be adjusted with accuracy, so 
that the plunger, when elevated, shall always 
be brought flush with the top surface of the 
die or mold; hence the employment of eccen 
tric-boxes W for the trunnions of lever W. 
aforesaid. Said boxes are cylindrical blocks 
of metal journaled in suitable holes in the 
side frames of the supporting structure, and 
these blocks are bored eccentric with their 
axes to receive the trunnions of the aforesaid 
lever. By turning these eccentric-boxes the 
axis of the lever is raised or lowered to adjust 
the upward movement of the lower plunger. 
Said boxes have flanges W, that overlap the 
side frames of the supporting structure, and 
said flanges have holes W in which a bar of 
metal or lever (not shown) can be inserted for 
turning them. A screw or bolt Wisecures the 
boxes, respectively, to the supporting-frame 
and holds the respective box in the desired 
adjustment, the hole W in the flange W of 
the box for the passage of said screw or bolt 
being elongated concentrically with the axis 
of the box to accommodate the circumferen 
tial adjustment of the box. 
Side bars O are connected below with a 
heavy bar O', that is arranged transversely 
of the machine. The parts are so arranged 
and timed that while the upper plunger is be 
ing thrust downwardly by the action of the 
toggle arms, the lower plunger engages the 
top side of transverse bar O'. The descent of 
the upper plunger in compressing the ma 
terial in the die or mold is limited by stops 
B', formed upon the inner side of the upright 
side frames of the supporting structure, and 
the arrangement of parts is such that the up 
per plunger, during its descent, shall engage 
the aforesaid stops before the toggle-arms are 
entirely straightened, or so that the further 
movement of the toggle-arms in the direction 
to straighten shall, through the medium of 
the aforesaid side bars O, with which the up 
per toggle-arm is operatively connected, as 
hereinbefore described, lift the aforesaid 
transversely-arranged bar O', and thereby ele 
vate the lower plunger, so that the bricks shall 
be pressed partly from below as well as partly 
from above, by means of which two pressures 
the compression of the bricks throughout will 
be more uniform, the parts being preferably 
so arranged and timed that the compression 
by the lower plunger immediately follows the 
compression by the upper plunger, whereupon 
the lower plunger lifts the pressed bricks 
from the die or mold subject to the action of 
the feed-box, that is thereupon actuated to re 
move or push the pressed bricks onto table M 
and to re-supply the die or mold. 
ac (see Figs. 7 and 9) designates a lever hav 
ing a forked rear end where it is fulcrumed 
to eyebolts ac', that connect with the support 
ing-base. This lever a has a transverse mem 
ber ac, and upon the lever at the ends of 
member ac is seated a frame as, that is pro 
vided with four upright pins or members ac, 
suitably cushioned at their upper ends, as at 
ac, and the lower plunger is adapted to de 
scend upon the elastic upper extremities of 
the aforesaid upright pins or members. To 
the forward end of lever ac are pivoted bolts 
Y, and these extend up loosely through holes 
in a plate Y' and are provided with nuts Y, 
engaging said bolts above the plate. Bear 
ing upward against plate Y is a spring. Z, 
that is carried by a lower plate Z'. This 
lower plate has a centrally - located screw 
threaded hole engaged by a screw Z, that is 
provided with a hand-wheel Z for turning 
the same. By turning screw Z in one direc 
tion or the other the lower plunger will be 
raised or lowered, as desired, to gage the 
amount of material fed into the mold. Of 
course as soon as the pressure of the toggle 
arms is applied spring Z is compressed and 
the lower plunger is forced down on member 
95 
1 Oc 
TO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
548,935 
55 
trunnions, said trunnions being journaled in 
boxes supported in the aforesaid side-frames, 
whereby the axis of the lever is elevated or . 
lowered according as the journal-boxes are 5o 
turned in the one direction or the other, said 
journal-boxes having flanges overlapping the 
side - frames and screws or bolts extending 
through said flanges into the supporting 
frames, the screw or bolt-holes in the flanges 
being elongated to accommodate the circum 
ferential adjustment of the journal-boxes, 
Substantially as set forth. 
- 
2. In a brick-machine, the combination of 
the supporting-structure comprising a Sup 
porting-base and two upright side-frames lo 
cated a suitable distance apart, a die or mold 
suitably supported from and between the side 
frames, upper and lower plungers for com 
pressing the material within the die or mold, 
the lower plunger being adapted to elevate 
the bricks or compressed material from the 
die or mold, toggle-arms for actuating the up 
per plunger, two rotating shafts, E and F, a 
pair of elliptic gears establishing operative 
connection between said shafts, suitable 
means for driving shaft E, suitable mechan 
ism operatively connecting the toggle-arms 
with shaft F, suitable mechanism for actuat 
ing the lower plunger, a vertically-movable 
horizontal bar or beam located below the lower 
plunger, links or bars operatively connected 
with the upper toggle-arms and operatively 
connected with the aforesaid horizontal beam 
or bar, a stop for limiting the downward move 
ment of the upper plunger before the straight 
ening of the toggle-arms, and the arrangement 
of parts being substantially as shown, for the 
purpose specified. 
cation, in the presence of two witnesses, this 
2d day of September, 1893. 
In testimony whereof we sign this specifi- 85 
75 
WILLIAM W. WALLACE. 
RAYMOND C. PENFIELD. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. DORER, 
WARD HOOVER. 
O. Screw Z is supported by a hollow 
bracket Z", the rod of course having a suit 
able shoulder or equivalent to rest on the 
bracket. The cavity in this bracket forms a 
5 Suitable case for spring Z. This spring 
mechanism just described is merely to gage 
the vertical position of the lower plunger 
While the material is being fed in. In com 
pressing bricks from dry material the press 
Io ure must be applied somewhat slowly to give 
the air a chance to escape; otherwise the brick 
Would burst or crack when the pressure was 
removed. Hence this class of machines is 
necessarily limited to comparatively slow 
5 movements. 
f By means of the elliptic gears hereinbefore 
| described a very slow movement is given to 
the plungers while the heavier part of the 
i/pressure is being applied, and the plungers 
26 are allowed to dwell for a little while after 
compression; but during the time that the 
pressure is not being applied the movement 
of the parts is comparatively fast. 
The advantage accruing from the use of 
25 elliptic gears in the place indicated is a large 
increase in the efficiency and capacity of the 
machine. 
What we claim is 
l. In a brick-press, the combination with 
3o the Supporting-structure comprising a base 
and tWO upright side-frames mounted a suit 
able interval apart upon the base, a die or 
mold Suitably supported from and between 
the side-frames, upper and lower plungers for 
35 compressing the material in the die or mold 
and elevating the pressed bricks therefrom, 
respectively, of suitable mechanism for ele 
Vating and lowering the upper plunger, a tilt 
ing roller-bearing lever suitably supported 
4o between the aforesaid side-frames and oper 
atively connected with the lower plunger, a 
rotating shaft suitably supported by said side 
frames and a cam on the shaft adapted to en 
gage the roller of said roller-bearing lever and 
45 thereby actuate the lever to cause the lower 
plunger to be elevated, said lever having axial 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549035.txt	H. A. TOBEY. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
THERMOSTAT REGULATOR, 
- 
s 
Patented Oct. 29, 1895. 
L. 
is: : : 
S: 
s 
- 
- 
'' 
H 
N 
S. 
a. 
(No Model.) 
No. 549,035, 
Q) 
R 
is 
is: 
UIEGE 
& 
t0itnesses. 
& 6 2.4. 
1. Rs 
k 
 
, 
" M , 
Inventor. 
74-7 or 6% 
(No Model.) 
No. 549,035. 
 
 
N. 
N. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
 
H. A. TOBEY, 
THERMOSTAT REGULATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented 00t, 29, 1895, 
s 
S SS 
S 
SS 
W. 
 
S. 
 
5. 
N. 
6S 
SSN 
S. S& 
SN 
S 
NS-2 
NS 
SAPAN 
2. SNSS 
N 
N22 
sy 
Sy 
N 
Z - ZZ H 
%zz3 
Z0 itnesses. 
azz 244 
4-4- 6a-64 
sfy 
Inventor. 
u% s2 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM, PHOTO-LTHO.WASHGTON, DC 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY ARCHIBALD TOBEY, OF TOLEDO, OHIO. 
THERMO STAT. REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,035, dated October 29, 1895. 
Application filed September 4, 1894, Serial No,522,124 (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, HENRY ARCHIBALD 
TOBEY, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Toledo, in the county of Lucas and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Thermostat-Regulators; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
My invention relates to an improvement 
in thernostatic devices. 
The object of my device is to mix hot and 
cold Water or other liquids so that the mixture 
may be discharged at a uniform temperature 
regardless of the variations in temperature of 
either the hot or cold liquid entering the de 
W1C0. 
Figure 1 is a top plan of the device. Fig. 
2 is a side view of one of the bars supporting 
a lever. Fig. 3 is a front view with valves 
and lever removed. Fig. 4 is a vertical sec 
tion on line ac ac of Fig. 1. Fig. 5 shows an 
external end view of one of the castings C 
for supporting an expansive member. 
Referring to the drawings, A and Aare two 
tubes or pipes, made of brass or copper or a 
material having a large ratio of expansion by 
heat, and which are fastened rigidly at oppo 
site ends into castings or boxes C and C. 
Box C has a chamber C, with which the tubes 
A and A' communicate. Box Chas a cham 
ber C, with which the tubes A and A' also 
communicate, and is provided with a dis 
charge-pipe. 
E and E' are bars, made of cast-iron or 
some material having a low ratio of expansion 
by heat, and are united one with the other by 
end straps a and a'. They are supported in 
the respective boxes C C by being provided 
at their opposite ends with lugs f and f', 
which fit loosely into sockets at m in the boxes. 
The bars E E constitute a stationary frame, 
on which is mounted a lever B, pivoted at one 
end on a pin b between the bars E. E. The 
lever B extends at its opposite end through a 
central opening e in box C and is bifurcated 
at that end to embrace a valve-rod J outside 
of box C. Box C has fitted onto it at c and 
c' valve-chambers, in which are seated valves 
D and D'. The valve-chambers communicate 
with the chamber C of water-box C through 
ports d and d', respectively. Into the center 
of box C'extends a screw G, which is in con 
tact with the inner end of a rod H. The outer 
end of rod His provided with a knife-edge h, 
which is adapted to engage with a shoulder 
on the head of lever B. The rod H is held 
from turning by means of a screw g, which 
enters a slot made in the side of the rod, while 
at the same time the rod is free to reciprocate. 
The bifurcated end of lever B presses 
against a disk n, which is rigidly fastened to 
rod J. The valve D is on rod J and the valve 
D' on rod J. 
K is a cylinder or barrel closed at both ends 
and inclosing spiral spring k. Within the 
cylinder K is a disk rigidly fastened to the 
top of valve-stem J. The stem J' is rigidly 
fastened to the upper end of barrel or cylin 
der K. 
L is a weight supported on barrel K, which 
tends to hold valve D' closed and valve D open. 
M is an inlet for cold water, and N is an in 
let for hot water. 
Having thus described the various parts of 
my device, the operation is as follows: When 
cold water enters valve D and hot Water en 
ters valve D', they mix in chamber C of box 
C and pass through pipes A and A to the 
discharge or outlet from the box C at F. 
Should the Water passing through said pipes 
A and A' cool, said pipes will contract or 
shorten, and the motion thus obtained will be 
imparted through rod H to the shoulder of 
lever Bath, the fulcrum of said lever being 
fixed in stationary bars E and E'. The outer 
or right-hand end of lever B will belifted up 
ward, overcoming the pressure of weight L. 
and carrying with it valve-stems J and J', 
which movement opens wider valve D', ad 
mitting more hot water and tending to close 
valve D, lessening the amount of cold Water. 
When the temperature of the mixed hot and 
cold water again becomes Warmer, said pipes 
A and A will expand or lengthen and allow 
the outer or right-hand end of lever B to de 
scend, thus tending to close valve D', lessen 
ing the amount of hot water admitted, and 
open wider valve D, increasing the amount of 
cold water admitted, thereby maintaining a 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
Od 
SO 
 
549,035 
35 
45 
So 
55 
tubes, and said valves operated by said lever, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination with the receiving and 
discharging chambers and the connecting ex 
pansion tubes, of the connected stationary 
rods between said tubes, said rods being of 
less expansive quality than the tubes, and 
on which rods the opposite chambers are free 
to move, a fulcrumed lever provided with a 
shoulder and connected to said stationary 
rods, a rod connected to said discharging 
chamber and adapted to engage the shoulder 
of said fulcrumed lever, a valve rod to which 
said fulcrumed lever is connected, and valves 
operated by said valve rod, substantially as 
described. 
3. A regulating apparatus consisting of ex 
pansible members forming a loop, a support 
for said loop, in combination with an adjust 
able rod connected with said members, a sta 
tionary frame between the said members, a 
lever fulcrumed to the said frame and in con 
tact with said rod, said lever operated through 
said rod by the expansion and contraction of 
said members, and a valve operated by said 
lever controlling the medium which affects 
the expansible members, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY ARCHIBALD TOBEY. 
Witnesses: 
H. C. HAYS, 
F. D. ELMER. 
uniform temperature of the water discharged 
from the apparatus. Spiral spring k in bar 
rel K is for the purpose of guarding against 
breaking or straining the apparatus when 
the temperature gets below the point where 
valve D would be closed. Should the tem 
perature get below this point, the spring 
would be compressed as lever B is lifted up 
ward and prevent straining or breaking. It 
is obvious that the farther screw G is screwed 
inward the more pipes A and A must expand 
before lever B will allow valve D' to close; 
therefore the warmer the water must be that 
is being discharged. 
Although not shown, Ianticipate that screw 
G could be connected with a dial or hand for 
indicating the temperature of the water dis 
charged by a similar mechanism to that shown 
in connection with another device of mine, de 
scribed in my application, Serial No. 512,898. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A regulating apparatus consisting of a re 
ceiving and a discharging chamber, in combi 
nation with two valve chambers and valves 
therein for supplying said receiving chamber 
with liquids of different temperatures, expan 
sion tubes connecting said receiving and dis 
charging chambers and through which tubes 
the liquid is conducted, a stationary frame 
between the said chambers and the said 
tubes, a lever pivoted to said frame and con 
nected to the valve rod, said lever operated 
by the expansion and contraction of said 
is 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549135.txt	(No Model.) 
L, KING, 
LINK BET. 
No. 549,135, 
Patented Nov. 5, 1895. 
7%. Z. 
e 
AIIII 
SIRH. 
 
 
e Z. 
SSN 
BS3N ef 
o 
 
 
  
 
I 
HRH 
HIE I 
III 
HHHH 
III 
 
  
 
i 
S 
3. 
2/ 
 
2 
He . 
in HH 
(N 
N 
N 
 
6 
2. 
Zzzavezza27 
23. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
d- 
e- 
Jzzvesses 
2P - 3: 
AREW B.GRAAM.PHoo-ho. WASNGTONo.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LINCOLN KING, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
LINK BELT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,135, dated November 5, 1895. 
Application filed July 5, 1894, Serial No. 516,636. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LINCOLN KING, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, and a 
resident of New York, in the State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Link Belts, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to sprocket-chains 
or metallic link belts; and it consists in 
certain novel combinations of peculiarly-con 
structed parts, as hereinafter set forth and 
claimed. 
The primary object of this invention is to 
produce a link belt of great strength and 
durability for heavy work, as in large bucket 
elevators, adapted to utilize as nearly as prac 
ticable the full tensile strength of the metal of 
which it is composed, and at the same time 
to be composed of a single series of inter 
changeable links and to be readily opened 
and closed at any point, while free from lia 
bility to unfasten itself. The links are, fur 
thermore, adapted to be drop-forged of steel, 
which adds materially to their strength as 
compared with cast links, and can be made 
reversible, as well as interchangeable, and 
with bars as close together as may be desired, 
to reduce the distance between the sprockets 
on sprocket-wheels. 
A sheet of drawings accompanies this speci 
fication as part thereof. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a face view, 
partly in section, of a portion of a link belt 
constructed according to this invention. Fig. 
2 is an edge view of the same, partly in sec 
tion, on the line 22, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a plan 
view of one of the links detached. Fig. 4 is 
an end view projected from Fig. 3. Fig. 5 
is an enlargement of the section within the 
circle correspondingly numbered in Fig. 1; 
and Figs. 6 and 7 are plan views of link belts, 
illustrating modifications of the same inven 
tion. 
Like letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. . 
Each of the improved link belts is composed 
of a single series of interchangeable one-part 
links A, B, or C, interlocked with each other 
or unlocked and separated by bringing suc 
cessive links into an angular locking position, 
as in dotted lines in Fig. 2, and theninserting 
or withdrawing them edgewise, each link hav 
. 
ing a pair of inwardly-projecting recessed 
pins a and a pair of eyes b, together with a 
cross-bar or cross-bars c, side bars d, and pin 
supports e, in line with said side bars, said 
eyes and pin-supports being preferably and 
conveniently circular or round, the stud-pins 
and eye-holes being concentric therewith, and 
the elongation of the eye-holes toward the 
body of the link or in the line of strain, as in 
Fig. 2, and said side bars and pin supports 
forming smooth outer edges when the links 
are connected, as in Figs. 1, 6, and 7. Fur 
thermore, in each of the Species said stud 
pins a have lateral projections forming shoul 
ders a, which interlock with the solid metal 
of the eyes b when the links are in line with 
each other or in working position, as in full 
lines in Fig. 2, and resist the lateral separation 
of the links, except when they are in said 
locking position (represented in dotted lines 
in Fig. 2), and also the withdrawal of the stud 
pins by bending strains should the tensile 
strain on the belt be sufficient to bend the 
stud-pins. To further resist the withdrawal 
of the stud-pins by excessive strain, they are 
preferably extended so as to come in contact 
with each other at mid-width of the belt, as in 
Figs. 1 to 6, inclusive, the two stud-pins of 
each link being provided, respectively, with 
an end projection a and an end socketa", mag 
nified in Fig. 5. Such end projections and 
end sockets are necessarily concentric with 
the axes of articulation between successive 
links and are preferably conoidal in shape, 
as in Fig. 5. The stud-pins at each articula 
tion are thus securely interlocked with each 
other and the tensile strength of the belt is 
very greatly increased, the tendency of the 
stud-pins under excessive strain on the belt 
being to yield in opposite directions in the 
plane of the belt, as represented by the ar 
rows f and g in Figs. 1 and 5, which tendency 
is practically neutralized by interlocking their 
extremities with each other, as above. 
In the species represented by Figs. 1 to 5, 
inclusive, each of the links A, being other 
wise of the construction above described, has 
a pair of the cross-bars c, forming, in connec 
tion with the side bars d, clear rectangular 
openings to receive the sprockets. In the 
species represented by Fig.6 shorter links B 
are constructed with a single cross-bar c in 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
549,185 
each other at each articulation, each link 
having at each end a stud-pin projecting in 
wardly from a lateral edge of the link and an 
eye to receive a like stud-pin on an adjoining 
link, and said stud-pins having withdrawal 
resisting shoulders which engage with solid 
metal around the eye-holes when the belt is 
stretched, substantially as hereinbefore speci 
fied. 
4. The combination, in a link-belt, of inter 
changeable one-part links interlocked with 
each other at each articulation, each link 
having at each end a stud-pin projecting in 
wardly from a lateral edge of the link and an 
eye to receive a like stud-pin upon an adjoin 
ing link, the extremities of said stud-pins be 
ing interlocked with each other by means of 
an end-projection on One and an end-socket 
in the other concentric with the axis of articu 
lation, substantially as hereinbefore specified. 
5. The combination, in a link-belt, of inter 
changeable one-part links interlocked with 
each other at each articulation, each link 
having at each end a stud-pin projecting in 
wardly from a lateral edge of the link, an eye 
to receive a like stud-pin on an adjoining 
link, and a cross-bair parallel with the axis of 
articulation, said stud-pins being provided 
in common with withdrawal-resisting shoul 
ders and having respectively an end-projec 
tion and an end-socket to interlock the stud 
pins of successive links with each other, sub 
stantially as hereinbefore specified. 
45 
55 
65 
LIN COLN KING. 
Witnesses: 
LAVINIA. JACKSON, 
C. M. WHITNEY. 
O 
25 
each link. With this form of link (B, Fig. 6) 
the sprockets may be brought very close to 
gether, which is sometimes desirable. In the 
species represented by Fig. 7 the respective 
links C have shortened and button-headed 
stud-pins (t. They are otherwise of the con 
struction represented by Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4 
and above described. Links of this form (C, 
Fig. 7) are individually reversible, end for 
end, as well as interchangeable, both ends of 
each link being alike. Other like modifica 
tions will suggest themselves to those skilled 
in the art. 
Having thus described the said improve 
ment, I claim as my invention and desire to 
patent under this specification 
1. A link-belt composed of one-part links 
interlocked with each other at each articula 
tion by a pair of stud-pins projecting in 
Wardly from the lateral edges of the links and 
eyes through which said stud-pins extend, 
the projecting inner portions of said stud 
pins forming withdrawal-resisting shoulders 
which engage with solid metal around the 
eye-holes when the belt is stretched, substan 
tially as hereinbefore specified. 
2. The combination in a link-belt of one 
part links interlocked with each other at each 
articulation by a pair of stud-pins projecting 
inwardly from the lateral edges of the links 
and eyes through which said stud-pins ex 
tend, the extremities of said stud-pins being 
interlocked with each other by means of an 
end-projection on one and an end-socket in 
the other concentric with the axis of articu 
lation, substantially as hereinbefore specified. 
3. The combination in a link-belt of inter 
changeable one-part links interlocked with 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549235.txt	(No Model.) 
count ERACTING, DEFLECTING AND DistriBUTING GASES AND FLAMEs. 
No. 549,235. 
Patented Nov. 5, 1895. 
F. E. GATCKE. 
%2 at 2 
3 
E 
*s 
2 2 
%2 2 
--62 
  
%2 
% 
 
e 
: 
 
 
WZZzedae), 
(63d? (24e^- 
 
Abrew B.GRAAM. Photo-Tho. WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRIED RICH ERN ST GAT CKE, OF A L T ON A, (GERMANY. 
 
COUNTERACTING, DEFLECTING AND DISTRIBUTING GASES AND FLAMES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,285, dated November 5, 1895. 
Application filed March 6, 1895, Serial No. 540,725. (No model.) 
55 
7o 
75 
25 
- 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRIEDRICH ERNST 
GATCKE, a subject of the German Emperor, 
and a resident of Altona, in the German Em 
5 pire, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Counteracting, Deflecting, 
and Distributing Gases and Flames in Chemi 
cal Works, Furnaces, &c., of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
In Smelting Works, glass manufactories, 
and chemical Works the operators, as is well 
known, are greatly inconvenienced and their 
health more or less endangered by the intense 
heat or the flame or deleterious gases issuing 
I5 from apparatus Whenever a door or gate clos 
ing an opening thereof is opened for any 
purpose, thereby inducing an outflow or out 
rush of gases, flame, or radiated heat. 
My invention has for its object to protect 
the operator from intense radiated heat or 
the outflow or outrush of flame or deleteri 
ous gases from any apparatus on opening a 
door or gate thereof for any purpose. 
The object aimed at I attain by interpos 
ing a protective screen formed by a suitable 
fluid, as steam. Or gas or a gaseous body, be 
tween the operator and an opening in an ap 
paratus in which deleterious gases may be 
generated, or in which intense heat exists, or 
from which flame may issue when such open 
ing is uncovered, or by diverting the flow of 
such gases or flame by means of such fluid. 
To this end the invention consists in a 
novel means for attaining the objects of my 
invention and at the same time enable me to 
regulate the temperature within a smelter, 
furnace, or other like apparatus, as will now 
be fully described, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which - 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section, 
and Fig. 2 a horizontal section, of a well 
known construction of glass-furnace provided 
with means for carrying out my invention, 
given as an example only; and Fig. 3 is a de 
tail view. 
The furnace h is encompassed exteriorly 
by a pipe, flue, or other suitable conduit Cl, 
arranged proximate to and in front of the in 
terior edge of the furnace-openings O, at 
which points the conduit is provided with a 
plurality of ports or nozzles a, either circular 
or oblong, so as to cause a fluid, as a gaseous 
fluid-air, for instance-or steam, supplied to 
the conduit under suitable pressure to issue 
in the form of jets and form an intercepting 
screen in front of said opening that will pre 
vent the escape of radiated heat, or flame, or 
gases. The issuance of gases or flame from 
openings O may also be prevented by di 
verting the flow thereof from the openings 
by means of a conduit a', Fig. 1, arranged 
above the openings O and having its outlets 
within the furnace and at such an angle 
relatively to the openings O that the fluid - 
issuing from the jet-nozzles a will form an 
oblique shield or screen within the furnace, 
thereby diverting the flow of gas, heat, or 
flame through such openings, and in certain 
class of apparatus both devices may be em 
ployed conjointly. It is obvious that by 
means of the jet-pipe (t' the temperature 
within the furnace can be controlled within 
certain limits, particularly when cold air is 
employed, while in other cases, where the in 
troduction of steam into the apparatus is of 
advantage or required, steam may be slap 
plied to conduit al. Furthermore, by means 
of the pipe a deleterious gases generated 
within a closed chamber may be so admixed 
With another gas or gaseous body as to coun 
teract their deleterious influences, and they 
can be so distributed and acted upon by the 
injected fluid as to force them to flow out of 
the apparatus through some other channel 
provided for their escape, while in cases where 
heated gases are to be kept in motion within 
a closed chamber this can also be accom 
plished by means of the jet-pipe a' and such 
gases uniformly distributed within the ap 
paratus. 
It will of course be understood that the 
arrangement of the jet device and its con 
struction will necessarily vary according to 
the nature or construction of the apparatus in 
conjunction with which it is to operate; but 
in all cases care should be had to give the 
jets of fluid the proper direction, so as to de 
flector intercept, or deflect and intercept, the 
flow of gases through an opening or openings 
in the apparatus through which access is had 
thereto, and so that the jets will form a suf 
ficiently compact screen, shield, or curtain 
through which neither gas, flame, nor radi 
ated heat can pass. In many cases it may 
90 
95 
OO 
35 
45 
549,235 
O 
2 
not be found practicable to give proper di 
rection to the jets, and in this case I employ 
directing-plates l, Fig. 3, that are so arranged 
relatively to the jet-nozzles as to give the jets 
of fluid a proper direction. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. Means for preventing the diffusion, flow 
or passage of gases, heat or flame from one 
portion of a confined space to another, con 
sisting of a screen or curtain of a fluid as a 
gas or gaseous compound or steam, for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. Means for preventing the issuance of 
heat, flame or gas from an uncovered open 
ing of an apparatus, consisting of a curtain 
or Screen of a fluid, as a gas or gaseous com 
pound or steam, extending across the inside 
of such opening, for the purpose set forth. 
3. Means for preventing the issuance of 
heat, flame or gas from an uncovered open 
ing of an apparatus, consisting of a screen or 
25 
curtain of a fluid, as a gas or gaseous colm 
pound or steam, extending across the inside 
and outside of such opening, for the purpose 
set forth. 
4. The combination in an apparatus Such 
as described with the opening or openings 
thereof, of a jet pipe adapted to project jets 
of fluid across such opening, for the purpose 
set forth. 
5. The combination in an apparatus such 
as described with the opening or openings 
thereof, of a jet pipe adapted to project jets 
of fluid diagonally or obliquely across such 
opening, for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in 
presence of two witnesses, this 15th day of 4o 
February, 1895. 
35 
FRIEIDRICH ERNST GATCKE. 
Witnesses: 
ALEXANDER SPECHT, 
DIEDRICH PETERSEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549335.txt	(No Model.) 
E. L. SNADER. 
ROUGHBOXFOR, COFFINS, 
No. 549,335, 
 
Patented Nov. 5, 1895, 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD L. SNADER, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ROUGH BOX, FOR COFF NS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,335, dated November 5, 1895. 
Application filed September 21, 1894, Serial No. 523,680. (No model.) 
- 
- 
Sale. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD L. SNADER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Rough Boxes; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
My invention has reference to the subject 
of rough boxes or portable vaults for receiv 
ing coffins; and it has for its objects theim 
provement of such boxes or vaults in respect 
to the matter of the simple and easy attach 
ment of the box-head and a quick and effect 
ive sealing of the whole structure, such im 
provement involving, also, an advantage in 
the way of increased cheapness. 
My box-head may be applied either with or 
without a hermetical seal, although in most 
instances the seal will be used. 
Where I apply my box-head to boxes other 
than my own make, I prefer to provide a 
frame of steel or other strong material to 
be set into the end of a rough box and serve 
as a help for attaching the head. 
My invention will be clearly understood by 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is an end view of a rough box hav 
ing my box-head attached thereto. Fig. 2 is 
an elevation of the box-head itself, interior 
view. Fig. 3 is an elevation of one side of 
the steel frame; Fig. 4, an elevation of the 
opposite side thereof. 
Fig. 5 is a side eleva 
tion of my box-head, together with a brace to 
which it is attached; and Figs. 6 and 7 are 
detail views. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A is a 
rough box made of iron, steel, or wood, or any 
other suitable or preferred material. In the 
end of the said box I set a frame. D, prefer 
ably of steel, the same being secured in place 
by screw-bolts ccc. The said frame is formed 
with a shoulder C on its inner side, against 
which shoulder a head d is adapted to rest. 
As shown in Fig. 2, the said head has secured 
to itsinner side a strip or strips of gum or rub 
ber or similar sealing material E. In Fig. 1 
this strip appears as a seal between the frame 
D and the box-head d. The strip E may be 
dispensed with, in which case the head d will 
be made large enough to fit the opening in 
the frame D, as will be readily understood. 
In the center of the head dis a perforation 
e, through which a thumb-screw Fis adapted 
to pass. I provide a square washer G of 
metal outside the box-head, and inside the 
same I provide a thick rubber. Washer of cy 
lindrical form, the same being marked H. 
Now the frame D on its rear side is notched, 
so as to admit the ends of a brace I. The 
said brace when in place presents a perfora 
tion i in line with the perforation e in the 
head d. The bore of the said perforation is 
screw-threaded to correspond to the screw 
thread upon the bolt or thumb-screw F. At 
K, I show a latch or catch for holding the brace 
in place. The manner of attaching the head 
to the boxwill now be easily understood. The 
brace being in place, and being held there by 
the latch K, the head is pressed into position 
and the thumb-screw is turned. Thereupon 
the head is drawn tight, the tendency being 
to pull the brace against the frame on one 
side and the head against the frame on the 
other side. The presence of the rubber strip 
insures the proper sealing of the head at the 
edges, while the rubber Washer around the 
thumb-screw performs the same office at the 
center of the head. 
It should be stated that the washer His put 
On the inner end of the thumb-screw before 
the head is set in, and that its thickness is 
such that when the head has been screwed on 
tight the said washer will be firmly com 
pressed between the head and the brace. 
It is obvious that I save a great deal of 
trouble by securing the head in place through 
the operation of a single screw. The ad 
vantages of this part of my invention are not 
affected by the material of which the box is 
made. It may be of iron, steel, Wood, or a 
composition of matter. I am aware, however, 
that for many reasons it is often desirable to 
have the rough box of light material, and I 
will therefore describe the material which I 
prefer to employ for making a rough box. 
This material is wood covered with a paint 
made up of the following materials, to wit: 
Trinidad asphalt, residuum oil, coal-tar 
pitch, and what is commercially known as 
EO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
ICO 
549,835 
o 
dead-oil. The proportions in which these 
parts are combined are substantially ten parts 
each of Trinidad asphalt and coal-tar pitch, 
and one part each of residuum oil and dead 
oil. In preparing the paint, I commonly 
make a mixture of the Trinidad asphalt and 
the residuum oil in the proportions stated, 
and then a mixture of the coal-tar pitch and 
the dead-oil in same proportions, and after 
ward combine the two mixtures in about 
equal parts. 
While I have described my box as specially 
adapted for use as a rough box or portable 
vault, it is evident that the same box may be 
used for packing furs or feathers or any 
other articles whose packings must be moist 
ure-proof. When used as a rough box, my 
device is calculated not only to exclude moist 
ure from the interior of the box, but also to 
resist decay for a very long period. 
What I claim is 
A rough box or portable vault comprising 
in its construction the metallic frame D hav 
ing the shoulder C and having notches in its 
rear side, the removable cross brace I adapted 
to fit said notches and having a screw-thread 
ed hole, means for temporarily holding the 
brace with its ends in the notches, the head 
d adapted to fit the frame D and rest against 
the shoulder Cand provided with an opening 
e, the screw Fadapted to pass through the 
opening e into the hole of the brace I, and 
means for sealing the opening for the screw 
and the edges of the head, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name, in the presence of two witnesses, this 
19th day of September, A. D. 1894. 
EDWARD L. SNAIDER. 
Witnesses: 
C. L. BELCHER, 
CHARLES MI. CATLIN. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549435.txt	(No Model.) 
S. G. CABELI. 
. 
. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FOR FREEING WATER FROM SCALE PRODUCING IMPURITIES, 
No. 549,435, 
Patented Nov. 5, 1895, 
 
or/zwa'ssa's 
2.5 
W 
6-4 64 
C4, ves- Azzorney 
Ay/AW702 
ANDREW BRAAM.Photo-uto...washi GTO.N.E.C. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
S. G. CABELL. 
APPARATUS FOR FREEING WATER FROM SCALE PRODUCING IMPURITIES. 
No. 549,435, 
Patented Nov. 5, 1895. 
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
i 
: ::RS 
Allis''' 
FEEI EE III it 
...Ellil 
ERE 
ESM II 
Elli 
E. H | SH: H 
SEKill 
El. 
3:13; | 
Ell 
L 
Hill 
 
Alle 
Zovizzvesses: 
77% sai. 
 
ANDREWB, GRAHAM. Photo-utho.washingroti, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL G. CABELL, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
APPARATUS FOR FREEING WATER FROM SCALE-PRODUCING IMPURITIES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,435, dated November 5, 1895. 
Application filed November 30, 1894, Serial No. 530,410. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL G. CABELL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Apparatus for Freeing Water from Scale 
Producing Impurities; and I do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
Which form a part of this specification. 
This invention has relation to that class of 
means for preventing the formation of scale 
in steam-boilers in which the scale-producing 
elements are eliminated from the water by 
galvanic action, but particularly to that type 
thereof in which the galvanic action is pro 
duced by Zinc balls or cylinders movable upon 
copper. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
an apparatus for the purpose stated which 
Will have a maximum efficiency, and this ob 
ject is accomplished by so constructing the 
apparatus that, first, the strength of the ac 
tion produced is materially increased and 
more efficiently maintained; second, the cor 
rosive action upon the balls is more efficiently 
retarded; third, the impurities of the water 
Will be collected into a chamber before the 
Water reaches the boiler and may be easily 
and quickly discharged from said chamber 
to the atmosphere whenever desired, and by 
otherwise improving the construction of the 
apparatus. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
the invention, Figure 1 is a sectional eleva 
tion showing my improved apparatus applied 
to a boiler and pump and connected with both 
of the same, said apparatus being drawn to 
a larger scale than the boiler and pump. Fig. 
2 is an enlarged sectional plan view of the 
apparatus with one-half of the balls upon the 
plate removed to more clearly disclose the 
position of the water-passages through the 
plate; and Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation of 
the purifier connected with a pump and boiler 
and shows the arrangement of pipes when 
the water is to flow downward through the 
pile, and also shows the return-pipe termi 
nating at a place in the boiler higher than is 
shown in Fig. 1. 
The same letters of reference designate the 
same parts in all the figures. 
A designates a steam-boiler, B a pump, 
and C a cylinder that contains the electro 
positive and the electronegative metals, 
which when immersed in water produce the 
galvanic action by which the water is freed 
from scale-producing elements previous to 
entering the boiler. This cylinder is between 
the pump and boiler, and receives its supply 
of water from the former and supplies the 
latter. It has in its bottom a chamber D, 
into which the mud and other impurities of 
the water are collected and from which said 
impurities may be blown out by the steam 
from the boiler by a proper manipulation of 
cocks or valves with which the pipes connect 
ing said chamber or the cylinder with the 
boiler may be provided and by opening the 
cock E in the bottom of said chamber. 
Within the cylinder and above the collect 
ing-chamber D are horizontal copper parti 
tions or plates F, and upon each of said plates 
is a series of zinc balls G, which balls and 
plates when immersed in Water produce a 
galvanic action, the effect of which is to free 
the water from scale-producing impurities, 
as is well known. 
The copper plates are of greater diameter 
than what may be termed the tread of the 
balls, so that in whatever direction the balls 
turn a constant contact, and that throughout 
a maximum amount of surface, is maintained, 
and a constant galvanic action of maximum 
strength is thereby produced. 
While the plates are described as being of 
copper and the balls of zinc, it is obvious that 
an equivalent construction is produced by 
forming the plates of zinc and the balls of 
copper and that this change may be made 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
It will be observed that the plates or par 
titions are arranged horizontally One above 
another and that they are formed With per 
forations, through which the Water passes, so 
arranged in the respective partitions that an 
opening of one partition will register with a 
closed part of the partition or partitions im 
mediately adjacent to it. By this arrange 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
549,435 
O 
3. O 
45 
55 
ment of perforations the water is caused to 
flow in a circuitous path from one end of the 
cylinder to the other and is subjected to gal 
Vanic action of maximum strength constantly 
maintained during its travel through the cyl 
inder. This maximum strength of the gal 
Vanic action is produced and maintained not 
merely by duplicating the zinc and copper ele 
ments and lby constructing the former so that 
they will rotate upon the latter, but is due to 
the use of copper partitions arranged one 
above another in a cylinder into which the 
Water is first fed and of substantially the 
Salme diameter as the inner diameter of said 
cylinder and having perforations through 
them arranged to cause the Water to traverse 
a circuitous course from end to end of the 
cylinder. 
By the construction and arrangement de 
scribed the body of water is subjected to a 
Series of successive galvanic actions and very 
effectually and rapidly freed from scale-pro 
(lucing elements, as is obvious, and by caus 
ing the water to traverse a circuitous path it 
causes the balls to roll in every direction upon 
the copper partitions without breaking com 
plete engagement of the balls with the cop 
per, as hereinbefore stated, and by thus caus 
ing them to roll in various directions against 
the partitions and themselves they are more 
effectually kept clean and bright than in the 
construction heretofore proposed, whereby 
Weakening of their action by the formation 
of a scale upon them is very efficiently re 
tarded. Furthermore, by providing the cyl 
inder within which the water is purified with 
an impurity-collecting chamber all of theim 
purities of the Water are prevented from en 
tering the boiler, which is of manifest ad 
antage. 
IIaving thus described the main features of 
my invention, I will proceed to describe the de 
tailed construction preferred by me; but I do 
not wish to be understood as limiting myself 
to the details of construction herein described, 
as many of them may be varied without de 
parting from the spirit of the invention. 
Entering opposite sides of the collecting 
chamber are pipes II and H', which respect 
ively connect the cylinder with the pump and 
boiler, and said pipe II is provided with a 
vertical extension II, which extends centrally 
of the cylinder through openings in the par 
titions F. The water is fed to the cylinder 
through pipe II and takes the circuitous up 
Ward course, above described, to the top of 
the cylinder, and thence through pipes Hand 
II' to the boiler. If desired, however, the ar 
langement may be changed so that the water 
Will flow downward through the cylinder in 
stead of upward, as shown in Fig. 3, in which 
the pipe extending vertically within the cas 
ing is connected with the pipe leading from 
the pump instead of with the pipe leading to 
the boiler; but I prefer the first-named ar 
rangement. The upper part of the boiler is 
connected with the cylinder by a pipe H3. 
When the Water in the boiler is at its nor 
mal level, (indicated in Fig. 1) heated water 
is conveyed from the boiler to the cylinder to 
raise the temperature of the water in the lat 
ter through pipe II, and when desired or nec 
essary quickly and yet efficiently to free the 
cylinder from the impurities collected said 
impurities may be blown out by steam taken 
from the boiler through pipe II, when the 
water in the boiler is at the level indicated in 
Fig. 3 relative to the receiving end of the pipe. 
It will be understood that the same pipe will 
answer to convey either water or steam to the 
cylinder by regulating the depth of water in 
the boiler or that the end of the return-pipe 
may terminate always in the steam-space of 
the boiler or always in the water of the boiler, 
so as to convey only steam or water, respect 
ively, to the cylinder, whichever is desired. 
The upper end of the cylinder may be pro 
vided with cocks or valves II, through which 
oil or other matter lighter than the water may 
be drawn or forced out of the cylinder. 
It will, of course, be understood that it is 
within the ability of the mechanic skilled in 
this art to provide various arrangements of 
feed-pipes and to provide said pipes with all 
necessary valves, if there be any required, to 
cause the Water to circulate properly and pro 
duce the results sought, and for this reason I 
do not consider it necessary to more particu 
larly describe this part of the system; nor (lo 
I wish to be understood as limiting myself to 
this or any particular arrangement of pipes. 
The bottom partition is supported upon 
flanges surrounding openings in the top of the 
collecting-chamber, and each succeeding par 
tition is supported from the one immediately 
beneath it upon vertical rims 1, projecting 
from the circumferences of the partitions, and 
upon rings 2, encircling the pipe II and rest 
ing upon the pan beneath. By means of this 
construction the partitions may be readily in 
serted and removed and their number varied 
to adapt the device to the size of the boiler 
to be fed or to the character of water to be 
purified. The openings in the partitions, 
through which the water flows, are so arranged 
as to not register with each other for the pur 
pose above stated. 
To afford easy access to the interior of the 
cylinder for insertion or removal of the par 
titions and balls or for any other purpose, the 
cylinder is provided with a removable cap J, 
bolted or otherwise suitably secured to it. 
The bottom of the cylinder rests upon the top 
of the collecting-chamber, and is fastened 
thereto by any proper means. 
I do not wish to be understood as limiting 
myself to the use of copper and zinc as the 
metals for producing galvanic action, as any 
other relatively electropositive and electro 
negative metals may be employed in lieu 
thereof without departing from the spirit of 
my invention. 
From the above it will be seen that I have 
provided an apparatus having many advan 
75 
95 
CO 
O 
II 5 
125 
 
549,435 
3 
tages over those heretofore proposed and 
which will purify water to a maximum extent 
The collecting-chamber 
in a minimum time. 
is also provided with suitably arranged hand 
holes having proper means for covering the 
same in order that the sediment collected 
therein and not discharged by blowing out 
may be removed by a proper instrument. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I believe to be new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In an apparatus for freeing Water from 
Scale-producing impurities, the combination 
with the cylinder having inlet and outlet 
ports, of perforated partitions, arranged One 
above another in said cylinder, and balls 
upon said partitions, said partitions and balls 
being of electro-negative and electro-positive 
metals, substantially as described. 
2. In an apparatus for freeing Water from 
scale-producing impurities, the combination 
of the cylinder, having means for the ingress 
and egress of Water, perforated copper parti 
tions in said cylinder, said partitions being 
arranged one above another, and zinc balls 
upon said partitions, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In an apparatus for freeing water from 
scale-producing impurities, the combination 
of the cylinder, having means for the ingress 
and egress of water, copper partitions in said 
cylinder, said partitions being located one 
above another and having perforations ar 
ranged to give the Water a circuitous course, 
and Zinc balls upon said partitions, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In an apparatus for freeing Water from 
scale-producing impurities, the combination 
with the cylinderprovided with means for the 
ingress and egress of Water, and having an 
impurity-collecting chamber in its base, of a 
series of copper partitions arranged One above 
another in said chamber, said partitions hav 
ing perforations for the passage of the water, 
and zinc balls upon said partitions, substan 
tially as described. 
IO 
45 
5. In an apparatus for freeing Water from 
scale-producing impurities, the combination 
with the cylinder, having means for the in 
gress and egress of water, and a removable 
cap for said cylinder, of a series of partitions 
in said cylinder, arranged one above another 
and perforated to permit the Water to pass 
through them, said partitions having Verti 
cally-projecting rims, whereby One is Sup 
ported by another, and balls upon said pal 
titions, said balls and partitions being re 
spectively of electro-positive and electro-neg 
ative metals, substantially as described. 
6. In an apparatus for freeing water from 
scale-producing impurities, the combination 
with the cylinder, having means for the in 
gress and egress of Water, and a removable 
cap for said cylinder, of a series of partitions 
in said cylinder, arranged horizontally one 
above another and perforated to permit the 
water to pass through them, said partitions 
having vertical rims, a vertical water tube ex 
tending through said partitions, lings encir 
cling said tube and engaging the partitions, 
and balls upon the partitions, said partitions 
and balls being respectively of electro-nega 
tive and electro-positive metals, substantially 
as described. 
7. The combination with the steam boiler 
and a pump, of a purifier between the same, 
said purifier embodying a casing having pu 
rifying means therein, a mud collecting cham 
ber in the base of said casing, a pipe con 
necting said casing with the pump, an egress 
pipe extending from the casing to the Water 
chamber of the boiler, a return pipe extend 
ing from the upper part of the boiler to said 
casing, and a blow-off cock in said chamber, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two Witnesses. 
55 
75 
SAMUEL G. CABELL. 
Witnesses: 
EMILY E. PARISH, 
CHAS. J. STOCKMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549535.txt	(No Model.) 
, 
No. 549,535, 
E. E. RITCHIE. 
WASHING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
E. E. RITCHIE. 
WASHING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 549,535, 
Z3 
Wilpesscs YZ24. 
22T2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ENOCH E. RITCHIE, OF HOWARD LAKE, MINNESOTA. 
WASHING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,535, dated November 12, 1895. 
Application filed June 28, 1895, Serial No, 554,349, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ENOCH E. RITCHIE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at How 
ard Lake, in the county of Wright and State 
Of Minnesota, have invented a new and use 
ful Washing-Machine, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
Washing-machines. 
The object of the present invention is to im 
prove the construction of Washing-machines, 
and to provide a simple and inexpensive one 
which will enable the operation of Washing 
to be rapidly and thoroughly effected without 
injuring the fabrics and at the expenditure 
of a minimum amount of labor. 
A further object of the invention is to im 
prove the construction of that class of Wash 
ing-machines which are provided with rock 
ers and which oscillate during the operation 
of Washing and to enable them to be main 
tained stationary while the wringer is in use. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts, hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
Out in the claim hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of a Washing-machine constructed in ac 
Cordance with this invention. Fig. 2 is a cen 
tral longitudinal sectional view. Fig. 3 is a 
transverse sectional view. Fig. 4 is a detail 
perspective view of the pivoted legs for sup 
porting one end of the Washing-machine when 
the Wringer is in use. 
Like numerals of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
ings. 
1 designates a Washing-machine mounted 
on rockers 2 and composed of similar sides 
3, constructed of Wood or any other suitable 
material, and a continuous strip of corru 
gated sheet metal secured between the sides 
and forming a bottom 4 and ends 3. The 
bottom 4 is arched and the ends are con 
cavely curved, the concave faces being in 
ward. The corrugations are transversely dis 
posed and provide a rubbing-Surface through 
out the entire length of the machine, and 
during the operation of the latter the clothes 
are continually rubbed and are caused to ro 
tate or turn to bring the different portions of 
O 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
the fabrics successively in contact with the 
rubbing-surfaces. 
The sides 3 are connected at intervals by 
transverse rods 6, provided at their ends with 
nuts 7 and arranged in depressions or grooves 
formed by the corrugations of the sheet metal 
constituting the bottom and ends of the wash 
ing-machine, and the sides are connected at 
the top of the machine, at the ends of the 
sheet-metal piece, by transverse bars or strips 
8, arranged to form between them an opening 
to permit access to the interior of the wash 
ing-machine. 
At one side of the opening is arranged a 
transversely - disposed Wringer - receiving 
board 9, upon which is designed to be 
mounted in the ordinary manner a Wringer 
of the ordinary construction, as Will be readily 
understood, and the Wringer is conveniently 
located to receive the clothes as they are 
taken from the washing-machine body. 
Within the opening at the top of the wash 
ing-machine are secured horizontal strips or 
cleats 10, forming a support for a cover 11, 
which is arranged in the opening during the 
operation of Washing to prevent the contents 
of the Washing-machine from Splashing out 
when the washing-machine is being oscillated. 
The washing-machine is provided at one 
end with a handle 12, located above the ma 
chine and connected. With the same by bars 
13, and at each end the Washing-machine is 
provided with a transverse rod 14, forming a 
supplemental handle to facilitate the moving 
of the machine from one place to another, the 
handle 12 being employed for Oscillating the 
machine. The sides of the Washing-ma 
chine project beyond the sheet metal form 
ing the ends, and the transverse rods are lo 
cated between the projecting portions of the 
sides. Vertical cleats 5 are secured to the 
Outer faces Of the sides and are located at the 
ends thereof, and are preferably constructed 
of hard Wood. These cleats serve to Support 
the sides and to prevent them from Warping, 
and they are perforated for the reception of 
the transverse rods, which connect the sides 
of the Washing-machine. 
The rockers 2 are secured to the outer faces 
of the sides of the Washing-lmachine and are 
supported by a transverse brace 15, disposed 
centrally of the Washing-machine and located 
95 
CO 
549,535 
40 
45 
labor, and that it is capable of thoroughly 
and rapidly Washing clothes. 
It will also be apparent that as the con 
tents of the Washing-machine are thrown 
from one end thereof to the other they will 
be rotated, thereby causing the different por 
tions of the fabrics to be successively carried 
in contact with the rubbing-surface, and that 
after the operation of Washing has been com 
pleted the machine is held stationary to form 
a convenient support for a Wringer. 
Changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction may be resorted 
to without departing from the principle or 
sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
vention. 
What I claim is 
In a washing machine, the combination with 
a body provided with rockers, legs pivotally 
mounted on the rockers and arranged to fold 
above the lower edges thereof, when not in 
use, and provided with perforations, a rung 
connecting the legs, and springs mounted on 
the rung and engaging the legs and forcing 
the latter outward into frictional engagement 
with the rockers, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
ENOCI E. RITC III E. 
Witnesses: 
F. E. LATHAM, 
CARL LUHMANN. 
directly beneath the lower edges of the sides 
thereof. 
After the operation of Washing has been 
completed the Washing-machine is held sta 
tionary during the operation of wringing by 
means of legs 16, pivoted at their upper ends 
to the inner faces of the rockers and located 
at one end of the Washing-machine and 
adapted during the operation of the latter to 
be folded upward against the lower edges of 
the sides 3. The downward and upward 
SWinging of the pivoted legs is limited by 
stops 17, secured to the inner faces of the 
rockers and adapted to maintain the legs in 
an inclined position, as illustrated in Fig. 2 of 
the accompanying drawings. The pivoted 
legs are connected by a rung 1S, having its 
ends fitting loosely in perforations of the legs 
and connected with them by springs 19. The 
springs 19 are secured intermediate of their 
ends to the rungs and project from opposite 
sides thereof, being disposed longitudinally 
of the legs, and the ends of the springs en 
gage the inner faces of the legs and force the 
latter outward, whereby the legs are caused 
to engage frictionally with the inner faces of 
the rockel's. This frictional engagement of 
the legs with the rockers maintains the legs 
in their folded position and prevents them 
from accidentally swinging downward during 
the Oscillation of the Washing-machine. 
It will be seen that the Washing-machine is 
exceedingly simple and inexpensive in con 
struction; that it is adapted to be oscillated 
at an expenditure of a minimum amount of 
2 5 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549635.txt	(No Model.) 
 
No. 549,635, 
J. A. GRIFFITHS. 
PLEASURE COASTING COURSE. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 12, 1895, 
(No Model.) 
No. 549,635, 
  
J. A. GRIFFITHS. 
PLEASURE COASTING COURSE. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Nov. 12, 1895. 
 
 
s w 
 
ci 
sy 
y 
 
22-11-c-3-3-cas 
%r vesse HESEs 
 
- Aridrew B.GRAHAM.PhoTo-Litho.washsenge. 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A. GRIFFITHS, OF MERIDEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO ABRAHAM 
A. LANDIS, OF COLLEGEVILLE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PLEASURE COASTING - COURSE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,635, dated November 12, 1895. 
Application filed August 14, 1895, Serial No. 559,247, (No model.) 
- 
fication. 
To all, whon, it may concern 
Be it known that I, JAMES A. GRIFFITHS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Meri 
den, in the county of New Haven and State 
5 of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Pleasure Coast 
ing-Courses, of which the following is a speci 
My invention has relation to pleasure 
Io courses for summer and other resorts for cars 
or similar appliances, adapted to travel on 
wheels over the same to convey perSons from 
a starting-point again to the same point with 
out change of cars, and my invention relates 
15 in such connection to means for permitting 
of the shifting of the car at the end of each 
of a series of parallel undulating outgoing 
courses to a series of undulating incoming 
courses to complete by gravity a round-trip 
2O and without passengers having to alight from 
the cars, so that time and expense are saved, 
and the avoidance of accident thereby in 
handling passengers participating in the ex 
hilarating sport or amusement is insured. 
25 The principal object of my invention is to 
provide in a coasting structure a car-shift 
ing appliance for readily and quickly trans 
ferring a loaded car or other passenger-con 
veyer from an incoming course to an outgo 
ing course of the structure Without passengers 
having to alight from a car in the making of 
a round-trip. 
Myinvention consists of a pleasure coasting 
course, consisting of two substantially parallel 
35 undulating tracks terminating at One end of 
the structure in a horizontal plane lower than 
the horizontal plane on which said trackster 
minate at the opposite end of the structure 
and provided with means at each end for 
shifting a car from one track to the other, so 
that the same may travel continuously from 
end to end of the structure in a substantially 
elliptical course, and my invention further 
consists of the improvements in pleasure 
45 coasting structures, hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
The nature and scope of my invention will 
be more fully understood from the following 
description, taken in connection with the ac 
Companying dra Wings, forming part hereof, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a top or plan view of a structure 
comprising a series of straight parallel incom 
ing and Outgoing undulating courses of dif 
ferent altitudes at the respective ends there. 55 
of, and provided with car-shifting means lo 
cated at said ends for transferring readily 
and quickly a loaded car or other conveyance 
from one course to the other to complete a 
trip or trips. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevational view 
of the structure with the end of a lower alti 
tude at the right-hand end than at the left 
hand end thereof. Fig. 3 is a top or plan view, 
enlarged, of the car-shifting means which is 
located at the horizontal plane at each end 65 
of the structure; and Fig. 4 is a vertical cen 
tral section through said car-shifting means, 
showing the detailed construction and ar 
rangement thereof and in elevation the end 
pivotal connection of said means with the to 
Structure. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
stilted structure, consisting of a series of 
Straight parallel undulating courses provided 
with tracks C, and af, and guards a and a 75 
located adjacent thereto for safety in the 
rapid travel of the cars of the respective 
courses of the structure by gravity over the 
said tracks. 
of the structure is lower by a foot, more or 
less, than the horizontal plane or end A at 
the left-hand end of the structure, as illus 
trated in the drawings. By such provision 
the cars on an outgoing course from the start- 85 
ing-point A* Will travel by gravity to the end 
A of that course and thereat the passengers 
Without alighting from the car can be readily 
transferred, by means to be hereinafter fully 
explained, onto the return course to travel 
by gravity to the starting-point A* again for 
another trip. By giving each car an ener 
getic push, as practice has demonstrated, from 
the starting and return points at the respect 
ive ends it will accumulate in its travel by 95 
gravity over the straight parallel undulating 
The horizontal plane or end A at the right 8o 
 
2 
549,685 
IO 
course sufficient momentum to reach and 
climb the last inclination of the structure 
and pass onto the car-shifting device C at 
that end to permit of its transfer to complete 
a trip, without occasion for the occupants of 
the car to alight therefrom at either end, 
should they desire to take other trips. 
At both ends of the structure are provided 
entrances b and exits l' for passengers. 
The car-shifting device C is set into an 
opening c, formed at each end of the plat 
form of the structure, and this device con 
sists of a platform c', provided with rails c. 
This platform is supported by an end-recessed 
pivot c, set into the structure A. This plat 
form c is also provided with front and back 
traveler-rolls d and d, engaging rails d and 
(lin the opening c. There is also provided 
an operating-lever C', connected with the 
platform c' of the device for shifting the same, 
so that a car by the momentum acquired in 
its travel by gravity is caused to pass onto 
the said device C and by means of the said 
lever C' is readily shifted while loaded with 
passengers onto the return tracks to complete 
the excursion or trip afforded passengers by 
25 
 
35 
the particular arrangement of the structure, 
as hereinafter fully described. 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
A pleasure coasting course, consisting of 
two substantially parallel undulating track 
courses, the respective ends of which are 
formed into horizontal planes of different alti 
tudes, and onto each of which a car is run by 
gravity and propulsive force applied at the 
opposite end of the course for shifting the 
same so as to permit of its return to the op 
posite horizontal plane of the structure and 
so on continuously back and forth, and a 
shifting device provided on each of said hori 
Zontal planes for shifting the car from the 
tracks of one course to those of another, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof. I have hereunto set 
my signature in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES A. GRIFFITIES. 
J. WALTER DOUGLASS, 
THOMAS MI. SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549735.txt	J. F., MOLLOY & J. H. CONDON. 
- - - 
BUCKLE. 
(No Model.). 
No. 549,735. 
Patented Nov. 12, 1895. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. MOLLOY AND JOHN H. CONDON, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 
BUCKLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,735, dated November 12, 1895. 
Application filed November 19, 1894, Serial No. 529,278. (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES F. MOLLOY 
and JOHN H. CONDON, of New Haven, in the 
county of New Haven and State of Connecti 
cut, have invented a new Improvement in 
Buckles; and we do hereby declare the follow 
ing, when taken in connection with the ac 
companying drawings and the letters of ref 
erence marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, and which said 
drawings constitute part of this specification, 
and represent, in 
Figure 1, a view in front elevation of one 
form which a buckle constructed in accord 
ance With Our invention may assume; Fig. 2, 
a reverse view thereof; Fig. 3, a detached view, 
in front elevation, of the frame with the tube 
removed; Fig. 4, a similar view of the lever; 
Fig. 5, a view in elevation of the blank from 
which the clamping-plate is formed. 
Our invention relates to an improvement 
in wire suspender-buckles of that class in 
which One member of the buckle is con 
structed with a central depending hook and 
another with a central depending loop or 
equivalent device arranged to coact with the 
hook for retaining the ring of a suspender-en 
thereon. 
The object of our present invention is to 
produce at a low cost for manufacture a sim 
ple, strong, effective, convenient, and attract 
ive buckle which is composed of few simply 
formed and readily-assembled parts. 
With these ends in View our invention con 
sists in a bucklehaving certain details of con 
struction and combinations of parts, as will 
be hereinafter described, and pointed out in 
the claim. 
In carrying out our invention we form deep 
indentations A A in the ends of the Wire 
buckle-frame, so as to produce corresponding 
aligned horizontal journals a Cl. As herein 
shown, the said frame is composed of a single 
piece of wire bent to form indented ends, as 
described, an upper side bar A', in the center 
of which the ends of the Wire are abutted, and 
a lower side bar A, from which the loop A 
depends. A sheet-metal tube B receives the 
abutted ends of the wire forming the side bar 
A'. If desired, the buckle-frame might be 
formed by dispensing with the said tube and 
utilizing the middle portion of the wire to 
form the upper side bar A', in which event the 
ends of the wire would terminate in the loop 
A. We do not illustrate this construction 
because it is well known in this art. The le 
wer of our improved buckle is made, as herein 
shown, of a single piece of wire bent to form 
ends C C, having their upper extremities 
turned inward, a lower side bar C and a hook 
C depending centrally from the said bar. It 
is not essential, however, that the lever be 
formed exactly in the manner shown, as its 
shape may be varied. 
With a frame and lever constructed, sub 
stantially as described, from wire we employ 
a clamping-plate D, formed from a single piece 
of sheet metal and provided at the opposite 
ends of its upper edge with two aligned tubul 
lar bearings D'D', which respectively re 
ceive the two journals a, a of the lever, which 
is thus pivotally connected with the plate. 
As herein shown, the bearings are made in 
tegral with the plate, the blank for which is 
furnished with fingers, from which the bear 
ings are formed. The lever is rigidly con 
nected with the plate, which, as shown, is 
thereto provided with two integral fingers D' 
D, which are clasped over the ends C C of 
the lever, so as to firmly connect the same 
with the plate. These fingers are located, as 
shown, at right angles with the tubular bear 
ings D'D', but that arrangement is not nec 
essary. Their integral formation with the 
clamping-plate is shown in Fig. 5. As herein 
shown, also, the middle portion of the lower 
edge of the clamping-plate is serrated and 
turned forward to form a gripping-edge D, 
which co-operates with the lower side bar A 
of the frame in gripping the Web; but it is not 
essential that this edge be serrated, for it 
would grip the webif made straight. Further 
more, a sheet-metal gripping-edge, whether 
serrated or not, might be added to the lower 
side bar of the frame to coact with the clamp 
ing-plate in gripping the Web. 
It will be seen from the foregoing that un 
der our invention. We make the clamping-plate 
perform the threefold function of carrying the 
frame and lever and of co-operating With the 
latter to grip the Web. Our construction is 
therefore extremely simple both as regards 
the formation and assemblance of the parts, 
and the article when completed is not only 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
549,735 
upper members or bends of the said indenta 
tions, and having its lower edge arranged to 
co-operate with the lower side-bar of the 
frame for gripping the web; and a wire lever 
having a lower side-bar, a coupling member 
depending centrally therefrom and co-act 
ing with the coupling member of the frame, 
and ends located in front of the plane of the 
plate, and rigidly connected with the ends 
thereof at points below the pivotal connection 
of the frame there with, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed this 
Specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
25 
35 
JAS. F. MOLLOY. 
JOIN E CONDON. 
Witnesses: 
ROBT. LYNN, 
ABRAHAM GOLDFIELD. 
O 
durable and convenient, but attractive in ap 
pearance and may be produced at a Very low 
cost for manufacture. 
We would have it understood that We do 
not limit ourselves to the exact construction 
herein shown and described, but hold our 
selves at liberty to make such changes and 
alterations as fairly fall within the spirit and 
Scope of our invention. 
Having fully described our invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
In a buckle, the combination with a wire 
frame having an upper and a lower side bar, 
ends in which are formed corresponding in 
Wardly extending indentations the upper 
members or bends of which form journals, 
and a coupling member depending from the 
lower side-bar; of a clamping-plate located 
back of the said frame, which is pivotally con 
nected with its upper portion through the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549835.txt	(No Modell:) 
W. WAN BENTHUYSEN. 
RAIN WATER, 00N0 UT. 
Patented N0 v. 12, 1895. 
? pi 
?iji-i-i-i-i)-tiffig 
\||||||||||| 
WITWESSES: 
 
 
 
 
M 
--Mwww. f6 
ATTORNEYS. 
BY 
A&M. HOO-TH3.WASHINGTON.}. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER VAN BENTHUYSEN, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA. 
RAIN-WATER co ND UIT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,835, dated November 12, 1895. 
Application filed May 21, 1895, 
M 
To all avho7m, it mvay concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER VAN BEN 
THUYSEN, of New Orleans, in the parish of Or 
leans and State of Louisiana, have invented 
a new and Improved Rain-Water Conductor, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
rain-Water conductors; and it has for its ob 
ject to provide a device of that description 
Which will be automatic in its action and 
which will also conduct the first wash of wa 
ter from the roof into a vessel Other than the 
tank or cistern, and whereby when the first 
installment Of water from the roof has been 
disposed of the conductor will assume Such 
a position as to deliver the remaining portion 
of the rain fall to the cistern or tank, thereby 
preserving the water therein free from im 
purities, which ordinarily collect on the roof 
of a dwelling. 
The invention consistS in the novel Con 
struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming apart of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a partial side elevation and par 
tial sectional view of the improved device, 
and Fig. 2 is a similar view of the device in 
a slightly-modified form. 
In carrying out the invention the rain 
spout 10 from the eaves-trough 11 is adapted 
to be received by one end of a gutter 12, 
the Said gutter being pivoted in suitable ears. 
or bearings 13, formed upon the upper end 
of a receptacle A, which receptacle may be 
and preferably isin the nature of a pipe, its up 
per end being funnel-shaped or flaring. The 
dimensions of the receptacle or pipe are such 
as to receive and hold for a predetermined 
time the first installiment of water that runs 
from the roof. The gutter 12 is so placed that 
when in one position it will engage with the 
exit end of the rain-spout 10, and also With a 
second gutter 14, secured upon the tank or 
cistern B, adapted to receive the drinking-wa- || 
ter. The stationary gutter 14 may be placed 
anywhere upon the cistern. Usually, how 
ever, it is located on the top, havinga decided 
Serial No. 550,086, (No model.) 
downward slant, and the pivoted gutter will 
rest upon the upper surface of th? stationary 
gutter when engaging with the under surface 
of the rain-spout. 
The receptacle A may be in the nature of 
a pipe, as shown in Fig. 2, of even diameter 
below its funnel portion, or it may be made 
in two diameters, as shown in Fig. 1, and the 
pivoted gutter 12 may be normally held With 
one end within the funnel end of the recep 
tacle A by means of a float 15, as shoWn in 
Fig. 2, connected with one end of the pivoted 
gutter by means of a link 16 or its equivalent. 
The receptacle A in any event is provided 
With a petcock 17, or its equivalent, at Or 
near the bottom, or it may have instead a 
Small Outlet-aperture at that point; Or, aS 
illustrated in Fig. 1, the pivoted or movable 
gutter 12 may have a chain or cable 18 at 
tached to it between its pivot-point and the 
end adapted to rest upon the stationary gut 
ter, whereas the link 16 is secured to the gut 
ter 12 at that end which is adapted for con 
tact with the rain-spout. The chain or cable 
18 is made to pass downward through a guide 
19, located on the receptacle A, and carries 
a bucket 20, in which a short spout 21 enters, 
connected with the interior of the receptacle. 
The bucket is formed with a small outlet-Ori 
fice, from which water may slowly flow, pro 
ducing a hereinafter-described effect. 
In both forms of the device the pivoted gut 
ter normally extends at one end within the 
receptacle A, and when the rain first com 
mences to fall sufficiently to carry with it the 
impurities on the roof the water is received 
from the rain-spout by the said pivoted gut 
ter and conducted into the receptacle A. 
Under the form of the device shown in Fig. 
2, when sufficient water has accumulated in 
the receptacle A the float will be raised to 
such am extent as to carry the movable Or 
pivoted gutter in engagement With the sta 
tionary gutter and the rain-spout, as shown 
in dotted lines, and the pure water will then 
pass directly from the eaves-trough into the 
cistern. 
The pivoted gutteris provided with a small 
opening 12 at that end which is over the 1re 
ceptacle A, so that during the continuance of 
the rain sufficient water will enter the recep 
tacle A to maintain the floatin the upper po 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
O 
I 5 
22 O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
549,835 
that escaping from the bucket 20 by way of 
the orifice therein. Thus the bucket 20 is 
kept constantly filled and the gutter 12 held 
in place. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
The combination, with a spout, a tank or 
cistern, a fixed gutter carried by the tank or 
cistern and aligned with the discharge end of 
the spout, a receptacle directly below the dis 
charge end of the spout, a pivoted gutter car 
ried by the edge of the receptacle and having 
its pivot between the spout and the fixed gut 
ter, and means for controlling the pivoted 
gutter, the same being actuated by the water 
in the receptacle, substantially as described. 
WALTER VAN BENTHUYSEN. 
Witnesses: 
E. W. PETERSON, 
WW. WW. CRAWFORD. 
25 
35 
I O 
sition, as the petcock is opened to a greater 
or less extent to permit the escape of the wa 
ter in the receptacle A, so as to prepare for 
another rain in an automatic way, it being 
underStood tlhat the float will draw the mov 
able gutter to its normal position when the 
rain shall have stopped. 
Under the construction shown in Fig. 1 
the water in the receptacle A, when said re 
ceptacle has received a sufficient amount of 
the first water, will overflow into the bucket 
20, and the weight of the water in the bucket 
will in this event draw the pivoted spout 
downward to an engagement with the fixed 
gutter and the rain-spout, whereupon the 
water will be delivered to tlhe cistern in the 
Ilmanner heretOfore set forth. The water con 
tinuously dripping through the opening 12* 
in the gutter 12 will keep the receptacle A 
full to the point of the spout 21, and from 
this point water will slowly flow to replace 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US549935.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 549,935, 
J. W. RIDDLE. 
CAR COUPLING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 19, 1895. 
 
 
 
R 
 
 
 
J. W. RIDDLE, 
CAR COUPLING, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
Patented Nov. 19, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
No. 549,935, 
 
. t 
k s 
A. M S 
se as se 
s e 
se 
: 
IN . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. RIDDLE, OF PRINCETON, ILLINOIS. 
CAR COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 549,935, dated November 19, 1895. 
Application filed October 24, 1894, Serial No. 526,813, (No model.) 
O 
... 
 
shown. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES W. RIDDLE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Prince 
ton, in the county of Bureau and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Car-Couplings; and Ido de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to car-couplers. Its 
object is to provide a device of this charac 
ter which shall be entirely automatic in its 
action. 
The invention consists of a draw-bar hav 
ing an upwardly-projecting tongue or hook, 
and a link having a transverse bar at one end 
for engaging the hook of the draw - bar and 
adapted to support the link in an upright po 
sition, so that the concussion, as the cars to 
be coupled come together, will throw the link 
forward and over the corresponding hook 
upon the draw-bar of the other car. 
It consists, further, of the peculiar form of 
the link, and of a gravity-latch for prevent 
ing the accidental disengagement of the link, 
and of such other parts and arrangement of 
parts as are hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a pair of draw-bars, showing 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudi 
nal section of the same on the line 22 of Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the link. Fig. 4 
is a plan section on the line 44 of Fig. 2. Fig. 
5 is a view similar to Fig. 1, showing a modi 
fied form of construction. Fig. 6 is a verti 
cal longitudinal section on the line 6 6 of Fig. 
5. Fig. 7 is an end elevation of the draw-bar, 
the linkbeing in section. Fig. 8 is a plan view 
of a modified form of link. 
At 12 are shown a pair of draw-bars ex 
actly alike in every particular and in the rela 
tive position which the draw-bars of adjacent 
cars in a train occupy. The lower portion of 
the draw-bar extends forwardly, and its up 
per surface is flat, forming a level table, at 
the sides of which are vertical flanges 56, 
which may, as shown, taper downwardly to 
ward the outer end of the bar. Projecting 
upwardly and centrally from the forward end 
of this table is a tongue or hook 34, which, 
as shown, is a separate piece of metal set into 
a suitable recess in the draw-bar and secured 
by a transverse bolt 34", thoughitis obvious 
that the tongue and draw-bar may be castin 
tegrally. The inner or rearward face of the 
tongue 3 4 is inclined backwardly and up 
wardly and is preferably slightly concave, as 
The link X is of the ordinary form, except 
that one of its ends is in the form of a straight 
transverse bar Y, whose ends J J project be 
yond the sides of the link. The length of 
the bar Y is such that it is adapted to fit. 
loosely between the flanges 55 or 66, thereby 
preventing material lateral play of the link. 
The bar Y being straight, the link is adapted 
to swing vertically upon it as it rests upon the 
table of the draw-bar. 
At the rearward end of the table of the draw 
bar a transverse abutment 7 8 rises Verti 
cally and is such distance back of the tongue 
34 that ample space is provided for the entry 
of the link and to provide for the necessary 
longitudinal play of the link essential to the 
proper handling of the train. The rearward 
side of the abutment 78 and the top of that 
portion of the draw-bar lying behind it are 
adapted to the beam ordinarily lying across 
the end of the car. 
The abutment 7 8 is vertically apertured. Or 
slotted, and within this slot is pivoted a grav 
ity-latch 9 10, adapted normally to hang over 
the space between the abutment and the 
tongue 34, its end being at such altitude as 
to clear the link. An arm 1112 extends up 
wardly from the latch 910 for convenience 
in withdrawing the latch for the purpose of 
uncoupling the cars. 
The counterweight of 
the latch is in the form of a rearwardly-ex 
tending arm 9 10', housed within a suitable 
aperture within the body of the draw-bar and 
being curved downwardly, so as to strike the 
floor of this aperture and thus limit the for 
ward movement of the latch. The lower end 
of the latch 9 10 is beveled backwardly, so 
that the longitudinal play of the link does not 
tend to open or throw back the latch. 
The bar Y, forming one end of the link, is 
provided with a tail piece or stem Z, project 
- 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
549,935 
5 
O 
ing backwardly and longitudinally with ref 
erence to the body of the link and along its 
median line. The Outer end of this stem is 
curved so that as the link lies in the position 
it assumes in service this stem projects down 
Wardly, a suitable aperture being provided 
in the draw-bar to accommodate it. 
When the link X is in its upright position, 
as indicated by dotted lines, Fig. 2, the outer 
end of the stem Z projects beyond the end of 
the draw-bar, and I prefer to provide it with 
a lateral projection 2, which shallextendabove 
the lower line of the draw-bar, so that as the 
cal's come together this projection will be 
struck by the draw-bar of the other car, there 
by throwing the link down. 
The aperture provided for the stem Z is of 
such width as to admit of very slight lateral 
play of the stem, thereby guiding the link 
and insuring its engagement with the hook 
or tongue of the approaching car. The inner 
end of the aperture within which the stem Z. 
is located is curved to correspond with the 
curvature of the stem, so that should the link 
be accidentally thrown down before the cars 
come together the contact of the approaching 
draw-bar with the outer end of the link will 
force the stem Z against this curved wall, 
Which will act as a cam and raise the outer 
end of the link so as to facilitate its engage 
The rearward 
ment with the hook or tongue. 
end of the arm 9 10' is in Y form, so as to 
straddle this aperture. The outer or forward 
face of the tongue 34 is inclined backwardly, 
so that the link, if down as the cars come to 
gether, will slide up this inclined face, which 
may start from a point below the surface of 
the table, as shown in the drawings. 
The space between the tongue 34 and the 
abutment 7 S being greater than the thick 
ness of the link, the latter, when in its up 
right position and resting against the tongue, 
is inclined slightly backward, resting against 
the top of the abutment. When in this posi 
tion, however, the link is so evenly balanced 
that a very slight concussion will throw it 
down, and in practice it will not be necssary, 
Ordinarily, to use the extension 2 at the end 
of the stem Z. 
The stem 1112 of the latch910 is provided 
with a radial flange 1112 immediately above 
the abutment 7S, thereby preventing dirt from 
falling into the aperture within which the 
latch is pivoted. 
The stem Z may, if desired, be wholly dis 
pensed with, giving the link the form shown 
in Fig. 8, and in that event the aperture in 
the draw-bar provided for this stem becomes 
unnecessary, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6. 
It will be seen that in practice it will be 
wholly unnecessary for the brakeman to ma 
nipulate the coupling as the cars come to 
gether. By being sure that there is a link 
in one of the draw-bars only, and especially 
by placing the link in its upright position, 
he may be certain that the coupling will be 
55 
65 
25 
35 
45 
7 O 
75 
So 
85 
: 
effected by the concussion as the car's come 
together. 
The link is of such form that a car provided 
with my coupling is adapted to be coupled up 
with cars provided with the prevailing style 
of link-couplings without change or additional 
appliances. 
- 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a car coupler, the combination with a 
draw-bar having a flat upper face, a trans 
verse abutment at the rear of the face, a hook 
or tongue projecting upwardly from such 
face in advance of and spaced apart from the 
transverse abutment, and an abutment rising 
at each side of such face between the trans 
verse abutment and the hook, of an oblong 
link having one of its ends prolonged beyond 
its sides and adapted to fit between the side 
abutments of the draw-bar, the whole being 
so constructed and arranged that the link will 
stand upon its prolonged end behind the hook, 
and be thrown forward by the impact of the 
cars, substantially as described and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. In a car coupling the combination with 
a draw bar having its upper surface of its 
outer end flat and provided with an upwardly 
projecting tongue or hook and a vertical ap 
erture back of the hook, with an oblong link 
having one of its ends in the form of a straight, 
bar, and a curved guide stem projecting from 
such bar adapted to rest and turn upon the 
upper surface of the draw-bal' and adapted 
to slide within the aperture of the draw-bar. 
3. In a car coupling the combination with 
a draw bar, having the upper surface of its 
outer end flat and flanked by vertical flanges, 
and a tongue or hook projecting upwardly 
from this flattened surface, of an abutment 
back of and spaced apart from the hook, the 
abutment and draw-bar being vertically ap 
ertured, and an oblong link having one of its 
ends in the form of a straight bar adapted to 
enter the space between the hook and the 
abutment and having a curved guide stem 
projecting from such bar and adapted to slide 
in the aperture of the drawbar and abutment, 
whereby the link may stand loosely upon the 
draw-bar and fall forwardly, turning upon its 
straight end and guided by its stem. 
4. In a car coupling the combination with 
a draw bar having an upwardly projecting 
tongue or hook and an aperture behind the 
hook having its rearward wall backwardly 
and downwardly inclined, of a link for engag 
ing the tongue and adapted to co-operate with 
another similar draw-bar and having a curved 
stem adapted to the aperture whereby press 
ure upon the outer end of the link causes it 
to be tilted upwardly. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES W. RDDLE. 
95 
IOO 
I o5 
I IO 
I 15 
I 25 
Witnesses: 
E. E. BARTHOLOMEW, 
LOUIS IS. GILLSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550035.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 550,035. 
H. A. WHEELER. 
EXTRACTING AND DRYING APPARATUS, 
Patented Nov. 19, 1895. 
 
ANREW BGRAAM.PHOTO-ho), WAShMGTON.O.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
H E R B E R T A. W H E E L ER, OF ST. LOUIs, MIss O U R I. 
EXTRACTING AND DRYING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,035, dated November 19, 1895, 
Application filed April 2, 1895, Serial No. 544,141 (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, HERBERTA. WHEELER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at St. 
Louis, State of Missouri, have invented an 
Improvement in Extractors and Driers of 
Refuse Material, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention is especially intended for 
extracting the oil and grease from refusema 
terial, such as garbage, tankage, &c., and by 
these means the oily and greasy materials are 
taken out by a solvent such as naphtha, while 
the refuse materials are subjected to the ac 
tion of heat and agitation and conveyed from 
the place of reception to the place of delivery, 
and the naphtha and greasy materials in solu 
tion are conveyed away in a direction oppo 
site to that of the motion given to the solid 
materials, and the apparatus is inclosed in 
Such a manner that the naphtha vapors are 
Saved and condensed and the refuse mate 
rials are carried off and the liquid drained 
from the same, and then such solid materials 
are dried previous to delivery, so that by the 
condensation of the vapors there is but little 
loss of the solvent. 
In the drawing I have represented the pres 
ent improvement by diagrammatic sectional 
elevation, 
The materials to be treated are delivered into 
a Spout Or pipe Win any suitable manner 
such, for instance, as by the endless chain-con 
Weyer Y, by which such materials are deliv 
ered with sufficient regularity to be properly 
treated-and such materials slide down the 
Spout V and pass a swinging valve or door T 
Which is closed by a weight or spring, so as to 
prevent the escape of the naphtha vapors at 
this point as far as possible, and the materials 
slide down the spout V into the feed-hopper 
A, and at the bottom of this feed-hopper Aisa. 
trunk or pipe F, that is advantageously hori 
Zontal, or nearly so, and surrounded with a 
steam-jacket G, to which steam is admitted 
by the pipe 3, and the Water of condensation 
passes off by the pipe 4, there being cocks or 
valves to regulate the admission of steam and 
the heat applied by the jacket G to the trunk 
or pipe F. Within this trunk or pipe F is a 
shaft S, suitably supported and passing out at 
one end through a stuffing-box and driven by 
a pulley S' and suitable power, and upon this 
shafts are blades C, forming a screw-conveyer 
and rakes or arms band agitators or cutters 5, 
which, by the rotation of the shaft, act upon 
the refuse material to subdivide and agitate 
the same in a very thorough Inanner and at 
the same time to move the material along 
from the hopper A to the elevator H, which is 
in a closed trunk H', and liquid, such as naph 
tha, is supplied by a pipe W and runs into the 
trunk H' and fills the pipe or trunk F. and 
the lower part of the hopper A, so that the 
material treated is agitated and conveyed 
along in the liquid solvent and in the pres 
ence of the proper degree of heat applied by 
the steam in the jacket G, and the solvent 
runs from the supply-pipe W and passes off 
by the delivery-pipe F, which pipe F is near 
the upper part of the vessel B in which are 
screens 6 and 7, that are interposed between 
the materialin the hopper A and the delivery 
pipe F, so that light or floating substances 
are kept from passing into the liquid-deliv 
ery pipe F, and there is a vapor-pipe Qpass 
ing away from the closed spout W to a suit 
able condenser, so that thenaphtha vapors will 
be conveyed away and saved and a greater or 
less vacuum or minus pressure may be main 
tained in the apparatus to prevent the naph 
tha Vapors passing out from such apparatus. 
The cover B' to the vessel B should be re 
movable to give access to the screens 6 and 7 
whenever necessary to clean the same, and it 
is now to be understood that by the portion 
of the apparatus thus far described the oily 
or greasy substainees contained in refusemate 
rials can be extracted by the naphtha or other 
solvent flowing in the opposite direction to 
the movement of the solid materials, and that 
such solid materials. from which the greasy 
materials are extracted are discharged by the 
elevator H, and it is advantageous to make 
this elevator sufficiently long to allow the 
liquid solvent to run from the solid material 
into the lower part of the trunk H', and to 
still further promote the separation of the 
liquid solvent from the solid materials a 
drainage-plate I is provided at an inclination 
for the solid materials to be discharged upon 
as they are dumped from the elevator, and 
the liquid passing through the drainage-plate 
is returned to the trunk H' by the inclined 
inclosure or pipet, 
95 
Od 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
2 
550,035 
O 
35 
45 
It is advantageous to provide doors hand 
h' in the trunk H' to give access to the top 
and bottom pulleys of the elevator H, and also 
to provide a drain-pipe k for drawing off 
liquid from the bottom of the trunk H'. 
In order to dry the materials discharged 
from the elevator H and to save the naphtha 
or other solvent, I provide a steam-jacket J 
around the trunk K, through which the solid 
materials are delivered as they pass from the 
drainage-plate Idown to the trunk L, in which 
is a shaft and screw-conveyer and rakes and 
cutters similar to those before described and 
marked with corresponding letters of refer 
(ence, there being around the trunk La steam 
jacket M with a steam-supplypipe an and pipe 
in for the water of condensation, and the solid 
materials are exposed to the agitation of the 
Screw-conveyer, and the rakes as these are re 
Volved, and the material is also heated, so 
that the naphtha or other solvent is driven off 
through the vapor-pipe R to a suitable con 
denser, thereby saving such naphtha and dry 
ing the refuse materials, and the apparatus 
is kept as tightly closed as consistent with 
the circumstances of its use-that is to say, 
there is a door P that closes automatically 
and is opened by the pressure and accumu 
lation of materials that are moved along by 
the screw-conveyer and revolving shaft S. 
The trunk L should be much larger in di 
ameter than the screw-conveyer on the shaft 
S, SO that there may be ample space above 
the screw-conveyerfor the vapors to pass away 
from the solid materials under the action of 
heat, so that the same are not liable to become 
obstructed, but escape freely to the pipe R. 
I am aware that screw-conveyers are com 
mon and also that liquid solvents have been 
employed in extracting grease and oils from 
refuse materials. 
It will be apparent that any liquid-such as 
alcohol, carbon-bisulphide, water, or naph 
tha-maybe employed, according to the char 
acter of the material acted upon, and that the 
stream of fresh solvent liquid running upon 
the Solid materials as they are carried away by 
the elevator H serves to wash off any oily mate 
rials, so as to avoid waste, and the vessel B is 
sufficiently large to allow the materials to re 
main comparatively quiescent, so that the 
Solid substances may subside, and, if desired, 
a strainer may be applied adjacent to the de 
livery-pipe F, and the speed of rotation of the 
conveyer-screw can be regulated according to 
the length of time required for the solvent to 
act upon the solid materials as carried along 
by such screw. 
It is advantageous to make the trunk adja 
cent to the door P of about the same size as 
the revolving screw, so that the dried mate 
rials will accumulate immediately behind the 
door and such door will only be forced open by 
such materials, thereby aiding in excluding 
'atmosphere. 
By making the screw in the trunk F to fit 
said trunk reasonably close and providing 
holes in the screw, as represented, the solvent 
liquid will be mixed with the solid material 
very thoroughly and pass through such open 
ings in the opposite direction to the move 
ment of such solid materials. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination with a screw conveyer 
and agitators and the trunk for the same, of 
a surrounding steam jacket for heating the 
contents of the trunk, a supply spout, and feed 
hopper and a delivery elevator and a tight 
case for the same, a pipe for supplying naphtha, 
or other solvent into the case of the delivery 
elevator, a vessel adjacent to the feed hopper 
and a pipe for the delivery of the solvent and 
the greasy and oily materials taken up by the 
same, and screens for preventing solid mate 
rials passing off with the oily materials and 
the solvent, and a vapor pipe to a condensel 
for the vapors of the solvent, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. The combination in an apparatus fol' ex 
tracting oily materials from refuse and a drier 
for the solid materials, of a supply spout and 
hopper, an automatic swinging valve or door 
opened by the passing materials, a closed 
screw conveyer and agitator and a surround 
ing steam jacket, a delivery conveyer and a 
closed case for the same, a pipe for supplying 
thereinto naphtha or similar solvent, a drain 
age plate for receiving the material from the 
elevator and returning liquid solvent to the 
elevator case, a discharge trunk screw con 
veyer and agitator, and steam jackets for heat 
ing the same and drying the solid waste ma 
terial, and an automatic door for allowing the 
solid materials to be delivered and for aiding 
in retaining the vapors of the solvent, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
Signed by me this 28th day of March, 1895. 
HERBERT A. WIEELER 
Witnesses: 
A. S. LOOMIS, 
II. M. THOMPSON. 
65 
75 
So 
95 
CO 
IO5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550135.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 550,135, 
 
W. H. RAMSEY. 
DISPLAY FORM. 
Patented Nov. 19, 1895, 
zS-47FNZ 
ENS. 
72 NAS 
22ESN 
 
Attorneys. 
 
ANDREw B.GRAHAM. Phoro-Tho. WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WIELIAM. H. RAMSEY, OF SIOUX FALLS, SOUTHDAKOTA. 
DISPLAY-FORM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,135, dated November 19, 1895. 
Application filed April 27, 1895. Serial No. 547,316, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMH. RAMSEY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Sioux Falls, Minnehaha county, State of 
South Dakota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Display-Forms; and 
my preferred manner of carrying out the in 
vention is setforthin the followingfull, clear, 
and exact description, terminating with 
claims particularly specifying the novelty. 
This invention relates to store furniture, 
and more especially to that class thereof 
known as display-forms; and the object of 
the same is to produce a device of this char 
acter adapted to be removably placed within 
a slipper, shoe, or boot, so as to distend the 
same fully as it stands within the show-win 
dow or at some point on exhibition. 
To this end the invention consists in the con 
struction of the display-form hereinafter de 
scribed, as well as in the use of a card-holder, 
which is adapted for both connecting the 
parts of the form and holding a price-card, 
all as set forth below and as shown in the ac 
companying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a shoe dis 
tended by this display-form, the parts of the 
whole being connected by a card-holder and 
the latter carrying a card. Fig. 2 is a section 
of the display-form removed from the shoe, 
showing the use of a wedge. Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view of the two parts of the form, 
and this view shows the card-holder turned 
at right angles. Fig. 4 is a perspective de 
tail of the card-holder. 
This display-form is made in three parts, 
which we will call the front' part, rear 
part, and the key,' and the latter may, if de 
sired, be of the shape shown in Fig. 4, so as to 
constitute a card-holder as Well as serve as a 
key. All parts are of light metal and of the 
desired sizes, shapes, and proportions; but the 
drawings show about the proper relative sizes 
and shapes to fit into an Ordinary shoe S, as 
seen in Fig.1. However, it will be understood 
that by making the parts shorter they may be 
fitted into a low-quarter shoe or slipper, Or by 
making them longer they may be fitted into 
a boot, all without departing from the Spirit 
of my invention. 
The front part F comprises a body shaped 
to conform with the interior of the shoe when 
buttoned, extending from the toe of the shoe 
upward and curving slightly to the rear, as 
seen in Fig. 3, to its upper end, where it 
makes an angle and extends straight to the 
rear in a flat piece f. 
In this flat piece are 
made incisions or cuts, so as to produce an 
oblong hole, and the metal at the rear end of 
this hole is bent straight up into a lug L, 
while the metal at the front end of the hole 
is bent up and then turned to the rear over 
the hole to form a hook H. 
The rear part R is about the size and shape 
shown in Fig. 3 and comprises a substantially 
upright body terminating at its upper end in 
a flat piece r of a size and shape to lie over 
the flat piecef, which piece is provided with 
a rectangular hole O of suitable size to re 
ceive the lug L and hook H. 
K" is a small metal key, which may be laid 
upon the piece r just for Ward of the lug, and 
then moved forward under the hook H to lock 
the two parts together. By preference, how 
ever, I use the key K in most instances in 
place of the small metal key or Wedge K", and 
this key Kcomprises a flatlower end, (marked 
K",) because it is of about the same size and 
serves the same function as the Wedge K", 
from the front edge of which piece the body 
K of the card-holder rises vertically, this 
body being provided with a hole Kjust above 
the foot or piece K", which hole is of a proper 
size to receive the hook H, and the upper end 
of this body being provided with a number 
of spring-fingers K or equivalent devices for 
receiving and holding a card. 
To put the form into the shoe, the front 
piece F is first passed down and pressed for 
ward into the toe of the shoe and held there. 
The rear piece R is then passed down against 
the rear of the shoe until the angle between 
its body and its flat upper portion r rests 
upon the rear end of the flatpiecef. The front 
end of the piece r is then borne down until 
the opening O passes over the lug and hook 
and the piece r lies flat upon the piece f, and 
finally the key is inserted under the lug H to 
hold the parts firmly in this position. If the 
Wedge K" is used as a key, the top of the shoe 
may then be stuffed with fancy-colored tissue 
or cotton to hide the form from sight; but 
usually the form of key shown in Fig. 4 will 
be employed, and this is inserted by passing 
90 
95 
CO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
y 
550,135 
O 
the hole Kunder the rear of the hook Hand 
moving the whole forward, so that the end of 
the foot K' will pass under the hook as did the 
similar part K', just described. When this 
device is used, the fingers K will stand up 
right, as seen in Fig. 1, and a price-card may 
be held therein, as shown. 
It will be obvious that when the shoe stands 
with its side toward the street one end of the 
foot K' of the card-holder can be passed un 
der the hook instead of passing the hole K 
over it, and the card-holder will then lock 
the parts together and yet hold a card in posi 
tion to be read from the side of the shoe in 
stead of the front. 
This display-form distends all parts of the 
shoe, so that it presents a neat appearance in 
the window, and the key which is preferably 
used also serves as a card-holder. The form 
is easily put in place or taken out and can 
be quickly and cheaply manufactured. 
What I claim as new is 
1. In a display form for shoes, the combi 
nation with one member having a body fit 
ting within the shoe, a flat upper end, a lug 
rising from the latter, and a hook also rising 
from the latter and projecting toward the lug; 
of a second member having a body fitting 
within the shoe and a flat upper end pro 
vided with a hole adapted to pass over said 
lug and hook, and a key removably engaging 
beneath the hook, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. In a display form for shoes, the combi 
nation with one member having a body fit 
ting within the shoe, a flat upper end, and a 
hook rising from the latter and projectingto 
3O 
35 
 
49 
45 
ward the rear; of a second member having 
a body fitting within the shoe and a flat upper 
end provided with a hole adapted to pass 
over said hook, and a key removably engag 
ing beneath the hook, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
3. In a display form for shoes, the combi 
nation with one member having a body fit 
ting within the shoe, a flat upper end, and a 
hook rising from the latter; of a second mem 
ber having a body fitting within the shoe and 
a flat upper end provided with a hole adapted 
to receive said hook, and an upright card 
holder having a horizontal foot adapted to be 
engaged beneath said hook, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
4. In a display form for shoes, the combi 
nation. With one member having a body fit 
ting within the shoe, a flat upper end, a hook 
rising from the latter; of a second member 
having a body fitting within the shoe and a 
flat upper end provided with a hole adapted 
to receive said hook; and a key consisting 
of a flat piece adapted to engage under said 
hook, an upright member connected with one 
edge of said flat piece and having a hole for 
the passage of the hook, and cardholding de 
Vice carried by this upright member, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my signature on this the 24th day of 
April, A. D. 1895. 
55 
65 
WILLIAM II. IRAMSEY. 
Witnesses: 
W. L. BAKER, 
CURTIS IBECR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550235.txt	(No Model.) 
E. S. LENOX, Dec'd, 
S. E. LENOX, Administratrix. 
ADJUSTABLE BALE TIE, 
No. 550,235, 
Patented Nov. 19, 1895. 
 
 
iZn2 
2. 
 
928)w-cosea 
R St. 
64. S. ?oonox &vuovo. 
AORE B.GRAAM.Photo-uro, washingo, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN. S. LENOX, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS; SARAH.E. LENOX, 
ADMINISTRATRIX OF SAID EDWIN. S. LENOX, DECEASED, ASSIGNOR 
TO THE WASHIBURN & MOEN MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. . 
ADJUSTABLE BALE-TE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,285, dated November 19, 1895. 
Application filed June 29, 1894, Renewed Septemberll, 1895, Serial No. 562,217, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWIN S.LENOX, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Worces 
ter in the county of Worcester and Common 
Wealth of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Adjustable Bale 
Ties, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of bale 
ties known as adjustable ties, in which a 
clasp is Secured to One end of the tie and is 
adapted to engage and secure in place the 
other or free end of the tie, whereby the tie 
may be quickly and easily adjusted to bales 
varying in size, and at the same time may be 
securely held in place at any required point. 
My invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction and adjustment of the clasp. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
myimproved tie. Fig.2 is a side view in which 
the free end of the tie is shown in section as 
it passes through the clasp, in order that the 
peculiar construction of the clasp may be 
clearly seen. Fig. 3 is an enlarged view of 
the clasp on a line 33, Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an 
enlarged sectional View of the clasp on the 
line 4 4, Fig. 3; and Fig. 5 is a sectional view 
of the clasp on the line 55, Fig. 4. 
1 is the main Wire of the tie, which is se 
cured at one end to the metal clasp A by be 
ing passed through a hole in the rear of both 
members 2 and 3 of the clasp, bent back upon 
itself and twisted, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, 
when the tie is applied to a bale. The other 
or free end 3 of the tie is passed through the 
claspbent back upon itself and secured to the 
main Wire 1 by being bent around it, and is 
securely held in place by being firmly wedged 
into the tapering recess in which the clasp 
terminates, which is somewhat smaller at its 
apex than the diameter of the wire. 
The peculiar construction of the clasp con 
sists in the depression of its exterior face at 
the tapering end, which produces a corre 
sponding elevation 4 upon the interior face 
of both members of the clasp, between which 
the free end of the tie is securely held when 
pressure upon the bale is released and the 
tie is under strain. 
The elevation of the interior face of the two 
w 
attached. 
members of the clasp not only creates bearing 
Surfaces between which thefree end of the tie 
may be firmly wedged, but the metal of which 
the clasp is composed is rendered stiff by rea 
son of the compression to which it is sub 
jected, so that much thinner and lighter metal 
can be used in the construction of the clasp 
than would otherwise be possible. 
The rear ends 5 of both members of the 
clasp are cut hollowing, as shown in FigS. 1 
and 3, so that the twisted part of the Wire may 
have a bearing against the lowest part of the 
depression thus formed, holding the claspsub 
stantially in line with the wire to which it is 
The operation of the tie is as follows: The 
tie is passed around the bale under pressure 
and the free end 3 is run through the clasp 
and bent upon itself, as indicated in Fig. 1. 
When the strain upon the bale is released, 
tension upon the tie begins, and the Wire is 
wedged into the tapering recess of the clasp. 
Imay prefer to reduce the width of the clasp 
intermediate the tapering end and the rear 
of the clasp, as indicated in dotted lines, Fig. 
1. This construction may be used, if it is de 
sired, to bring the members of the loop nearer 
together and thus produce a pinching as Well 
as a Wedging action. 
It is not essential to the successful Working 
of this tie that the members of the loop should 
approach each other under strain, as the Wedg 
ing of the free end of the tie into the tapering 
recess will effectually prevent the tie from 
slipping under Strain. 
I am aware that ties of this general con 
struction have been made heretofore, and I 
do not claim such broadly. 
What I do claim as new, and desire to Se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A wire bale-tie having at One end a clasp 
formed from a single piece of metal, the exte 
rior face of the tapering end of said clasp be 
ing depressed, whereby bearing surfaces are 
raised upon the interior faces of the members 
of the clasp, between which the free end of 
the tie may be firmly held in place substan 
tially as shown and described. 
2. A wire bale tie, having at One end a flat 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
2 
550,235 
scribed. 
metal clasp, the exterior face of the tapelring 
end of said clasp being depressed whereby 
bearing Surfaces are raised upon the interior 
faces of the members of the clasp between 
which the free end of the tie may be firmly 
held in place, substantially as shown and de 
3. A wire bale tie having at one end a flat 
metal clasp, the exterior face of the tapering 
end of said clasp being depressed, whereby 
bearing surfaces are raised upon the interior 
faces of the members of the clasp, between 
which the free end of the tie may be firmly 
held in place, the rear ends of the members 
of the clasp being hollowed, whereby the 
- 
O 
clasp is prevented from moving freely upon 
the wire to which it is attached, substantially 
as shown and described. 
4. A wire bale tie having at one end a flat 
metal clasp, said clasphaving its exterior face 
depressed at its tapering end, and having the 
ends of both members hollowed, and a point 
intermediate the extremities of the clasp 
where the metal is diminished in cross-sec 
tion, substantially as shown and described. 
EDWIN. S. LENOX. 
Witnesses: 
C. G. WASHIBURN, 
R. M. WASHIBURN. 
2 O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550335.txt	 
T. 
T. L. SNNNR 
as as a 
E 
less assass 
a. 
L. C. THIELE, 
GAS BURNER, 
F. 
on 
s. 
Patented "229, 1898, 
grass=s 
SSNNNINY 
a 
SS N 
A. 5. 
5s sa 
2 2 
RS 
As 
A. 2 
III, a 
wiseese. 
71 ---- 
LWB ?tor. 
Avaig 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS C. TIIIELE, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO STUMPF & 
TIIIELE, OF SAME PLACE. 
GAS-BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,385, dated November 26, 1895. 
Application filed March 7, 1895, Serial No. 540,819, (No model.) 
Io it appertains to make and use the same. 
To all uhon, it noty concern: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS C. THIELE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Indian 
apolis, in the county of Marion and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Gas-Burners; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact deseription of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
My said invention consists in various im 
provements in the construction and arrange 
ment of parts of gas-burners of that class de 
signed to burn both gas and coal either at the 
I5 same iime or independently, as will be here 
inafter fully described and claimed. 
Referring now to the drawings, in which 
similar letters of reference refer to like parts 
throughout the several views, Figure 1 is a 
2O view in perspective and partly in section of 
a hot-air furnace with fire-brick lining pro 
vided with gas-burners of my improved con 
struction. This is a stationary brick-set fur 
nace of well-known form. Fig. 2 is a trans 
25 verse section on the dotted line 22 in Fig. 1, 
which is on the line where the pipes enter the 
brick wall. 
showing one of the sections of the burner de 
tached; and Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section of 
3o a furnace having a cast-iron fire-pot instead 
of the sheet-metal construction lined with 
fire-brick shown in Fig. 1. 
A represents the fire-pot of the furnace, and 
B the ash-box. 
Bis a horizontal table between the fire-pot 
and the ash-box. The table B is provided 
with a large central opening, within which the 
grate-bars C, of any usual construction suit 
able for burning coal, are located. The fire 
4o pot is constructed of the sheet-metal retain 
ing-wall A and the fire-bricklining A. Or 
dinarily the fire-brick are made to rest upon 
the table B', and are supported by said table; 
but in my improved construction in order to 
45 find room for the gas-burners without displac 
ing the grate-bars or covering them up I ele-, 
vate the fire-brick above the table B' a suit 
able distance and insert my improved gas 
burner between the fire-brick and the table, 
5o allowing the burner to rest upon the table and 
the fire-brick to rest upon the burners, 
35 
 
Fig. 3 is a detail in perspective, p 
D represents my burner, which will pref 
erably be made in independent sections for 
greater convenience in manufacture and in fit 
ting into place, and also to facilitate the regu- 55. 
lation and control of the fire by operating one 
or all of the sections, as may be desired. The 
drawings represent tile burner as made in 
three sections. The upper and lower plates 
of the burner are preferably parallel and hori 
The upper plate C is less in width 
ZOntal. 
than the thickness of the fire-brick in order 
that the brick will project beyond the top of 
the burner and act as a shield to prevent the 
coal and ashes from crowding onto the burner. 65 
The lower plate C will be considerably wider 
than the plate C", preferably equal to the width 
of the table B', in order that no horizontal 
Surface be allowed to remain exposed to 
catch ashes, &c. The outer wall C8 will be 
cast integral with the top plate C and will 
stand at right angles to the plate C-that is, 
vertically-so as to allow the burner to be fit 
ted close against the fire-pot wall A'. The 
front wall C of the burner will also be inte- 5 
gral with the top plate 'C' and will slope from 
the plate C to the plate C, terminating op 
osite the inner edge of said plate. Inside 
lugs will be cast along the lower edges of the 
plates C and C and threaded openings 8o 
formed therein to engage screws, which will 
be projected through suitable openings in the 
plate C, and whereby the plate C will be fas 
tened to the balance of the burner. Open 
ings d, through the inside wall C next to the 
plate C, will be made for the escape of the 
gas into the fire-pot. 
Dare vertical guards cast integral with the 
plate C and placed at frequent intervals 
along said plate and projecting into the fire 
pot. As shown, said guards are wide at their 
top and narrow at their lower ends, their in 
mer edges being vertical and substantially in 
line with the inner surface of the fire-pot, 
forming practically, a continuation of said 
inner surface down over the burner. The 
purpose of these guards is to hold the coal 
and cinders back from the face of the burner 
as they slide down onto the grate-bars and 
thus assist the overhanging fire-brickinkeep 
ing the outlet from the burners into the fire 
box open. 
95 
Oc 
2 
550,835 
E represents the pipe through which the 
gas is to be supplied to the furnace: but be 
fore connecting with the burners the pipe is 
separated into as many branches as there are 
separate sections of the burner, and a section 
of the burner will be connected with each 
branch of the pipe. There being three sec 
tions to the burner shown in the drawings, 
the pipe E is therefore divided into the 
branches e, e', and e, each of which is pro 
vided with a valvef, by which the supply of 
gas through any one of the branches can be 
controlled independently of that through any. 
of the others. These branches before being 
coupled up with the burners are provided 
with independent mixers f' of usual con 
struction and for the purpose of supplying 
air in the usual manner. Suitable openings 
will be made through the walls A to allow 
the pipes to reach the burners, and at the 
points of attachment with the burners the 
walls C will be made extra thick to hold the 
threads necessary to make a good joint. For 
greater convenience a number of reinforced 
laces will be provided in each section in 
order that the connection may be made with 
out carrying the pipes further around. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 4 the fire 
pot, instead of consisting of a thin outer wall 
lined with fire-brick, as shown in Fig. 1, con 
sists of a single wall of cast metal, and the 
burner is formed with a recess at its inner 
top edge to receive and support the lower end 
thereof. This may be the fire-pot of a fur 
nace or of a stove and may be varied in size 
and shape to suit the special design or re 
quirements. 
By the construction as here described the 
gas-burners are placed where they do not in 
terfere in any way with the free use of the 
grate-bars. The gasis introduced at the bot 
25 p 
35 
t 
--- 
tom of the fire-pot, and where coal and gas 
are burned at the same time the gas will 
greatly assist in igniting and in keeping up 
the combustion of the coal. The openings 
from the burners into the fire-pot are guarded 
so the cinders and coal cannot crowd-upon 
and close them, and the force of the escaping 
gas issuing through the openings has been 
found amply sufficient to blow the finer ashes 
out of the way. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and wish to secure by 
Letters Patent, is-, ... 
In a stove or furnace, the combination, of 
a gas-burner formed to be set into the wall of 
the fire-pot thereof, the same being mounted 
on a table or ledge provided therefor under a 
portion of the lining or inner wall of said fire 
pot, said lining or inner wall mounted on the 
top of said burner and overhanging its front 
face wherein are formed the openings for the 
escape of the gas, vertical guards projecting 
out from the face of said burner at frequent 
intervals, the tops of which are of sufficient 
width to extend out substantially in line with . 
the inner surface of the fire-pot, their inner 
edges being vertical and practically an ex 
tension of said inner surface of the fire-pot, 
whereby they assist the overhanging portion 
thereof in guiding the coal and cinders down 
and holding them beyond and free from the 
gas escape openings, the grate and the gas 
supply pipes connected with the gas-burner, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony, whereof I-affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
LOUIS C. THIELE. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPHA. MINTURN, 
F. WOERNER. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550435.txt	(No Model.) 
C. C. BOY KIN, 
BILL FILE, 
No. 550,435, 
Patented Now, 26, 1895. 
  
 
 
SS 
W 
Ipiapiap 
 
 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTOPHER C. BOY KIN, OF BLACKSBURG, VIRGINIA. 
BLL FLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,435, dated November 26, 1895. 
Application filed November 17, 1894, Serial No. 529,155. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHRISTOPHER C. BOY 
KIN, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Blacksburg, in the county of Montgomery 
and State of Virginia, have invented a new 
and useful Bill-File, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to that general class 
of bill-files wherein a rod or wire is provided 
and made capable of having the bills success 
ively strung thereon, and it is specifically re 
lated to that class in which the rod or wire 
is associated With means for perforating the 
bills, so that they may be more easily and reg 
ularly attached to the file, and so that they 
Willinot be unnecessarily torn or mutilated in 
effecting such attachment. 
This invention consists in certain novelfea 
tures and details of construction and arrange 
ment of parts, as hereinafter fully described, 
illustrated in the drawings, and finally em 
bodied in the claims. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a 
bill-file embodying the essential features of 
my invention and showing a series of bills 
thereon; Fig. 2, a longitudinal section taken 
through one of the rods; Fig. 3, a horizontal 
Section taken through the base-plate and 
showing the means for holding the rods in 
place, and Fig. 4 a detail perspective of one of 
the terminals of the filing-rods, showing the 
cutting devices thereof. 
Two perforating devices are embodied in 
my invention in consequence of the use of 
two filing-rods, as will be understood, and 
the reference-numeral 1 indicates the said 
filing-rods, which comprise vertically-extend 
ing portions a bent at their upper ends to 
form the downwardly-extending portions b, 
the extremities of whichterminate in cutting 
devices, as will be described hereinafter. The 
filing-rods are each secured to the base-plate 
2, which is formed, preferably, of wood and 
substantially rectangular in shape. 
The securing of the filing-rods is effected by 
means of the arms 3, which are formed one 
at each side of the base-plate by slotting the 
same, as shown. The slots are one for each 
arm and are located at each side of the base 
plate, they being extended first inwardly and 
transversely from the outer sides or edges 
thereof and thence rearwardly and longi 
IO . 
25 
35 
45 
So 
tudinally. This forms two spring-arms which 
lie inward of the edges or sides of the base 
plate and which are integral therewith, this 
fact being responsible for a spring tendency 
which said arms have to extend in alignment 
with the sides of the base-plate. 
4 indicates a bolt which is passed horizon 
tally and transversely through the base-plate 
2 and through the free ends of the arms 3, the 
purpose of said bolt being to draw the arms 
inwardly and toward the center of the base 
plate, causing them to move against their 
tendency and to decrease the width of the 
respective slots which form them. By these 
means the lower ends of the filing-rods 1 may 
be respectively clamped between the arms 3 
and the adjacent portions of the slots which 
form the arms, whereby the filing-rods are 
held in proper position as securely as may be 
desired and with the capability of being re 
moved when the exigencies of the occasion 
may require. 
5 indicates the bill-receiving plate afore 
said, which is formed of rigid sheet metal 
and Substantially rectangular in shape, and 
which has its front edge turned up, as shown, 
so as to hold the papers raised above the re 
mainder of the plate. This plate is of such 
a size that it will occupy the major portion 
of the base-plate forward of the free ends of 
the arms 3, and is secured to the base-plate 
so as to be capable of a limited movement 
thereon by means of the headed pins 6, which 
are two in number, and which are driven 
into the base-plate at points just forward of 
the arms 3, and one near each side of the 
base-plate. These pins pass through open 
ings in the rear edge of the plate. The open 
ings in the bill-receiving plate are slightly 
larger than the pins 6, to the end that the 
plate may have the requisite movement there 
on, and this movement consists in a slight 
vertical swing, making the plate capable of 
moving up to and above the extremities of 
the downwardly-extending portions b of the 
filing-rods. Formed by striking up from the 
metal composing the plate 5, and One at each 
side thereof, are the lugs 7, which are conse 
quently two in number and which are trans 
versely aligned with each other. The forma 
tion of the lugs 7 will decrease to a slight de 
gree the width of the plate 5 rearward of said 
95 
TOO 
 
550,435 
s 
lugs. This decrease in the width of the plate 
will not, however, affect the substance there 
of, all of which will be understood, and it 
might further be added that these lugs could 
be formed by other means, such as casting 
integral or by riveting them in place, all of 
which will be understood Without further de 
scription. 
Formed in the bill-receiving plate 5, and 
at points directly under the extremities of 
the downwardly-extending portions b of the 
filing-rods 1 are the circular openings 8, 
which are two in number and which are pro 
vided for co-operation with the perforating 
devices, as will now be described. Rigidly 
secured to, preferably by soldiering, the ex 
tremities of the downwardly-extending por 
tions b of the filing-rods are the tubes 9, which 
are provided to cut the paper and which have 
their lower ends shaped with two trans 
versely-aligned points 10, forming substan 
tially a V-shaped indentation in the lower 
ends of the tubes. The lower ends of the 
partsb of the filing-rods are similarly formed, 
as indicated at 10, so as to conform to the 
shape of the tubes 9, and the tubes are pro 
jected slightly out from the rods so as to leave 
their cutting-edges free to operate. These 
tubes are of such a size that they will be 'ca 
pable of passing through the openings 8 of the 
receiving-plate, and they are greater in di 
ameter than the diameter of the filing-rods, 
which of course is essential, owing to the fact 
that the tubes embrace or receive the filing 
rods. 
The free or forward edge of the plate 5 is 
formed with a bead 12 thereon, which adds to 
the appearance of the device, and which is 
provided to make the manipulation of the 
plate easy. This is so by reason of the fact. 
that the bead furnishes convenient means for 
grasping the plate, as is necessary in the op 
eration thereof. 
the respective ctitting-tubes is bent forwardly 
and longitudinally so as to extend in a line 
approximately conforming to the are of the 
circle described by the plate 5 whenit'swings 
in its operation. Thusas the plate 5 is moved 
upward the parts are so gaged that the open 
ings 8 will pass over the cutting-tubes, or 
rather so that the cutting-tubes will pass 
through the openings, and it is this operation 
by which the perforation of the paper is ef 
fected. 
It will be observed that as the plate 5 is 
raised the points 10 of the cutting-tubes will 
first pierce the paper and that as the raising 
of the plate is continued the points will pass 
into and through the paper, thereby com 
pletely severing a circular disk at each cut 
ting-tube. 
As the diskis severed at each cut 
ting-tube it is first forced up between the 
points of the same, but the elasticity of the 
paper immediately reacts against the points 
and causes the disks to be expelled almost 
instantly after they have been lodged between 
the points. The return of the plate 5 also as 
sists in the removal of the disks, which, to 
gether with the fact that the rods 1 extend 
down into the tubes very nearly to their cut 
ting edges, makes it absolutely impossible for 
the perforating apparatus to be clogged with 
paper. 
E. the use of my invention the bills to be 
filed are placed face downward upon the re 
ceiving-plate and with their front edges in en 
gagement with the lugs 7 of said plate. By 
these means the position of the paper may be 
gaged. When this has been done, the plate 5 
should be moved upwardly until the cutting 
tubes 9 pass through the respective openings 
8, whereupon the paper will be perforated and 
strung upon the downwardly-extending por 
tions b of the filing-rods. The operation is 
completed by releasing the plate 5 and allow 
ing the same to return by gravity to its nor 
mal position, and by moving the bill up the 
parts b of the filing-rods around the bends 
thereof and finally down the vertically-ex 
tending portions a thereof, where they may 
rest upon the base-plate, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The lower tends of the vertical portions a 
of the filing-rods are slightly reduced in size 
and perforated to form the eyes 13, the pur 
pose of which is to permit securing a cord or 
wire to the lower end of each filing-rod, so 
that the bills of the latter may be readily 
transferred to the cords or wires for perma 
nent filing or for storing-away. This removal 
of the bills is effected by koosening the bolt 
4, which permits the arms-3 to move outwardly 
and which makes it possible to easily remove 
the filing-rods. When this removal of the 
rods has been effected, the wires or 'cords 
aforesaid may be connected to the eyes 13 and 
the bills transferred, as explained. It is also 
possible to remove the filed bills by passing 
a wire up through the openings in the bills 
when they are in place and then removing 
That portion of each filing-rod which carries the filing rods and bills by way of the slots 
in the base-plate 2. This avoids the possi 
bility of separating the bills and destroying 
their relative arrangement, 
It will be observed that owing to the con 
struction of my device it will be easy to refer 
to the bills filed thereon without necessitat 
ing their removal, all of which will be under 
stood. The inventionis particularly adapted 
for the filing of druggists prescriptions, but 
is, of course, applicable to all other mercan 
tile purposes andlindeed to all uses which en 
tail the filing of papers of any kind. 
'Changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction may be resorted. 
to without departing from the principle or sac 
rificing any of the advantages of this inven 
tion. 
Having described the invention, I claim 
1. A bill file comprising in its construction 
a base plate having an arm formed integral 
there with and by cutting a slot in the base 
plate, the arm having a spring tendency 
whereby the slot is held open when said tend 
- 
: - 
- -a - a 
. 
- 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IG 
II5 
125 
550,435 
3 
O 
ency is not overcome, a filing rod having its 
lower end inserted in said slot, and a bolt 
passing through the arm and into the main 
portion of the plate, whereby the filing rod 
may be removably clamped in place, substan 
tially as described. 
2. A bill file comprising in its construction 
a base plate rectangular in form and having 
in opposite sides thereof two slots which ex 
tend inwardly and thence longitudinally at 
right angles to the sides, whereby two arms 
are formed integral with the base plate, a bolt 
passing horizontally through the arms and 
base plate, whereby the arms may be drawn 
inwardly, and a filing rod for each slot, each 
rod having its lower end arranged in one of 
said slots and secured in place by clamping 
the corresponding arm against it, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a bill file, a base plate, a filing rodse 
cured thereto and extending upwardly there 
from and thence downwardly so as to have 
two parallelportions, the free end of the filing 
rod having a cutting edge thereon, and a 
spring plate mounted on the base plate and 
having an opening therein capable of receiv 
ing the free end of the filing rod as the plate 
is moved into engagement therewith, substan 
tially as described. 
4. A perforating device consisting of arod 
having a V-shaped notchin its end, a cutting 
tube affixed to and surrounding said end and 
projecting slightly beyond the same and also 
having a V-shaped notch conforming to the 
notch in the rod, whereby the diameter of the 
cutting end of the filing rod is greater than 
its shank, and a plate having an opening 
therein and capable of moving into engage 
ment with the cutting tube and of having the 
same passed through its opening, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
CHRISTOPHER, C, BOYKIN, 
35 
40 
Witnesses: 
HENRY S. HUBBERT, 
R. N. MCCLAUGHERTY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550535.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 550,535. 
1. 
  
 
J. G. SCHREUDER. 
RAILWAY SIGNAL. 
8 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 26, 1895. 
9 w 
W 
WNESSES 
of 244 
INVENToR, 
Ciao. Atty. 
No. 550,535. 
FIG.7. 
 
Patented Nov. 26, 1895. 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. G. SCHREUDER. 
RAILWAY SIGNAL. 
F.B. a 
WITNESSEs 
-64ae. 77 & 
INVENTor, 
a 4&kuli 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 550,535, 
FIG.l. 
J. G. SCHREUDER. 
RAILWAY SIGNAL. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 26, 1895. 
 
(e) 
 
 
 
I 
f 
2? 
2. Olae 22 
e 
- 
e 
17 
WITNESSES: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JENS G. SCHREUDER, OF EDGEWOOD, ASSIGNOR TO THE UNION SWITCH 
AND SIGNAL COMPANY, OF SWISSVALE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAILWAY-SIGNAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,535, dated November 26, 1895. 
Application filed April 20, 1895. Serial No. 546,482. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JENS G. SCHREUDER, a 
subject of the King of Sweden and Norway, 
residing at Edgewood Park, in the county of 
Allegheny and State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented or discovered certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Railway - Signals, of 
Which improvements the following is a speci 
fication. 
The invention described herein relates to 
Certain improvements in signals, and has for 
its object a construction whereby the signals 
Will be more distinctly visible at all times 
and the signaling-disks more easily shifted. 
The invention is hereinafter more fully de 
Scribed and particularly claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figures 1 and 2 are 
side elevations of my improved signal, the 
front plate of the case or shell being broken 
away in Fig. 2 to show the movable disks and 
their operating mechanism. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tional elevation, the plane of section being 
indicated by the line III III, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 
is a top plan view, portions of the shell being 
broken away. Fig. 5 is a sectional view, the 
plane of section being indicated by WW, Fig.1. 
Figs. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 are similar 
to Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively, and illus 
trate modifications of my improvements, the 
planes of section of Figs. 8 and 12 being taken 
on the lines VIII VIII and XII XII of Figs. 
6 and 10, respectively. 
The case or shell is formed by stamping or 
otherwise shaping sheet iron or steel or other 
suitable material and is preferably made cir 
cular in contour, as shown. The two por 
tions of the shell are made cup-shaped, one 
portion somewhat deeperthan the other, form 
ing the body 1 of the shell, while the back 2 
of the shellis shallow and is made of a diame 
ter to fit tightly into the body portion. In 
order to render the shellmore rigid, the body 
portion is formed with radiating corrugations 
3, as clearly shown in Figs. 1, 6, and 10. This 
shell is secured to a frame 4, which in turn is 
mounted in any suitable manner upon a post, 
as is customary. 
In the front wall of the body portion is 
formed an opening 5, preferably circular in 
outline, which is closed by glass or other 
transparent material, hermetically sealed at 
its edges to the wall of the shell. In the back 
2 is formed an opening 6, concentric with the 
opening in thefront wall, but of smaller diam 
eter and similarly closed with glass or other 
transparent material. Two openings 7 and 
8, also closed with glass, are formed through 
the front and back walls at one side of the 
main opening, as clearly shown in Fig. 1. A 
disk 9, preferably formed of aluminum and 
strengthened by concentric corrugations 10, 
is attached to a stem 11, secured on a shaft 
12, having one end mounted in a bearing 13 
on the inner face of the front wall, while its 
opposite end is mounted in a bearing in the 
yoke of the electromagnets 14. These mag 
nets are attached to the back Wall outside of 
the case or shell by means of bolts 15, pass 
ing through the Walls of the shell, and a base 
plate 16, to which the magnets are secured. 
The walls are braced where the bolts pass 
through them by sleeves 17, bearing at their 
ends against said walls. The armature 18 of 
the magnets is secured on the shaft 12 out 
side of the case or shell, and the magnets are 
protected by an auxiliary shell 19, detach 
ably fastened to the back 2 of the main shell 
O CaSe. 
A plate 20, provided with a pivot-pin 21, 
is attached to One of the sides of the main 
case or shell in such relation to the openings 
7 and 8 that a spectacle-frame 22, provided 
With two contrasting glasses or lenses and 
mounted on the pin 21, maybe shifted on said 
pin so as to bring the contrasting glasses or 
lenses alternately in line with the openings 
7 and 8. The spectacle-frame is provided 
with a stem or shank 23, having its outer end 
connected by a rod 24 to an arm. 25, secured 
to the shaft 12 in such relation to the stem 
11 of the disk 9 that when the latter is in line, 
with the opening 5 one of the lenses in the 
spectacle-frame will be inline with the open 
ings 7 and 8, and when the disk 9 is shifted 
the spectacle-frame Will be shifted so as to 
bring the other lens thereof into line with 
said openings. It is preferred to form a 
socket or hub on the stem 11 and to secure 
the arm 25 to said socket or hub. 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
IOC 
s 
e 
550,535 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
A counter balancing-weight 26 is adjust 
ably mounted on the stem 11, so as to facili 
tate the movement of the disk and spectacle 
frame by the magnets 14; but said Weight 
should be so adjusted that in case of accident 
to any part of the operating mechanism the 
disk and spectacle-frame will automatically 
move to a position to indicate danger. 
A lantern 27 is so mounted on a bracket 28 
outside of the case or shell as to be capable 
of being swung or turned so as to permit ac 
cess to its front glass without removal from 
its supporting-bracket 28, which is so attached 
to the back 2 that when the lantern is turned 
to normal position its light will be thrown 
through the openings 7 and S. 
The sides of the aluminum disk are painted 
red or some other color indicating danger, 
so that when the disk is moved into line with 
the opening 5 a danger indication will be 
given. As the light is reflected from the sur 
faces of the disk during cloudy days or to 
ward evening to give a clear distinct indica 
tion, an opening is formed in the center of 
the disk, and in the opening is placed trans 
lucent matelial of the same coloras the surface 
of the disk 9, so that light entering through 
the back opening 6 will pass through the 
translucent disk and illuminate the signal. 
While a suitably-colored glass may be em 
ployed as the translucent part of the disk 9, 
it is preferred to use oiled paper, properly 
colored, as being much lighter than glass, 
and which Will not absorb moisture, as the 
silk or other fibrous material usually em 
ployed in this form of signals. 
The disk 9 is employed for day indications, 
night signals being given by the light from 
the lantern passing through the openings 7 
and S and one or the other of the lenses in 
the spectacle-frame 22. The glass of one of 
the lenses is colored red or some other color 
to indicate danger and the glass of the 
other lens is clear or colored to indicate 
safety. It will be understood that when a 
white light is employed to indicate safety 
only one lens colored to indicate danger 
need be employed. 
In Order to give a distant day signal, the 
opening in the case through which the disk 
is seen needs to be comparatively large, while 
the opening through which the night indica 
tion is given should be small, so as to appear 
sharp and distinct. Hence it has heretofore 
been customary to employ a double signal for 
day and night indications, for the reason that 
if the disk day signal be formed of translu 
cent colored material, as silk, the light shin 
ing through it gives a diffused and blurred 
appearance, which cannot be seen at any con 
siderable distance. By employing a disksimi 
lar to that hereinbefore described-i.e., with 
an Opaque outer portion, having its surfaces 
colored in accordance with the indication to 
be given, and with a translucent central por 
tion, also colored, so that the light passing 
through the translucent portion will give the 
same indication as the colored opaque circum 
ferential-the same disk, movable into and 
out of line with the openings 5 and 6 in the 
front and back walls of the case or shell, can 
be employed for day and night indications. 
In Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9 is shown a signal 
wherein a single disk is employed. The disk 
is constructed and connected to the operating 
shaft 12, as hereinbefore described. The 
shell or case is constructed in the same man 
ner as that shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, ex 
cept that the openings 7 and S for night indi 
cations are omitted. The bracket 28 is ar 
ranged so as to support the lantern 27 in line 
with the openings 5 and 6. In this form of 
signal a single disk suitably colored is em 
ployed to indicate danger, and safety is 
indicated by white light reflected from the 
white inner face of the back piece 2 and the 
light admitted through the opening 6. 
In order to admit the signal having a single 
opening for day and night indications for use 
on roads where a color, such as green, is used 
to indicate safety, an additional disk, as 29, 
is employed, as shown in Figs. 10, 11, 12, and 
13. In this construction both disks 9 and 29 
are constructed as hereinbefore described 
i. e., with an opaque circumferential portion 
and a translucent central portion. The faces 
of the circumferential of one of the disks, as 9, 
is colored red or other suitable color to indi 
cate danger, while the corresponding part 
of the disk 19 is colored to indicate safety. 
The translucent central portions of both disks 
are colored, so that light passing through them 
will have the same color as the surfaces of the 
opaque circumferential portions, respectively. 
The stem 30 of the disk 29 is pivotally mounted 
on pin 31, so secured on one of the walls of 
the case or shell that the disk can be swung 
into and out of line with the openings 5 and 
6. The stem 30 is provided with an arm. 31, 
arranged at an angle thereto and having its 
end connected by a rod 32 to the end of the 
arm 25 of the stem of the disk 9, which is 
mounted as hereinbefore described. The 
arms 25 and 31 are so arranged and connected 
that when the disk 9 is in line with the open 
ings 5 and 6 the disk 29 is moved to one 
side thereof, and vice versa, as clearly shown 
in Figs. 10 and 11. A weight 33 is adjustably 
mounted on the stem of the danger-indicat 
ing disk, as 9, so as to cause the latter to go 
automatically to danger in case of the rupt 
lure of the circuit of the operating-magnets. 
When the signal is constructed as shown 
in Figs. 1 to 5 to employ separate and dis 
tinct apertures and disks for day and night 
signals, the translucent central portion of 
the day signal-disk may be colored to strongly 
contrast with the circumferential outer por 
tion, So as to render the day indication more 
clear and distinct under all conditions. 
The placing of the disk-operating mechan 
ism outside of the case or shell permits of 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
IG 
II5 
I 25 
550,535 
3 
the arrangement of the lamp, the glass in the 
sides of the case or shell, and the movable 
disk in such proximity to each other that a 
more clear and distinct indication or signal 
is obtained, especially at night. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. In a railway signal, the combination of a 
casing having day signal apertures and night 
signal apertures in its front and back walls, 
the day signal aperture in its back wallbe 
ing smaller than that in its front Wall, a day 
signal disk and a night signal disk mounted 
on independent pivotal supports, an electric 
motor for simultaneously shifting both disks 
into and out of register with their respective 
apertures, the inner surface of the back wall 
around the day signal aperture being colored 
to give an indication the reverse of that given 
by the day signal disk, and alantern arranged 
in line with the night signal apertures, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a railway signal, the combination of a 
casing having day signal and night signal 
apertures in its front and backwalls, the day 
signal aperture in its back wall being smaller 
than that in its front wall, a day signal disk 
having a translucent central portion and a 
translucent night signal disk, an electric 
motor for simultaneously shifting both disks 
into and out of register with their respective 
IO 
2O. 
25 
 
35 
45 
apertures, the inner surface of the back Wall 
around the day signal aperture being colored 
to give an indication the reverse of that given 
by the day signaldisk, and a lantern arranged 
in line with the night signal apertures, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a signal, the combination of a case or 
shell having its front and backwalls arranged 
in close proximity to each other, said walls 
being provided with apertures, the aperture 
in the back Wall having a diameter materially 
less than that of the aperture in the front 
wall, the inner face of the portion of the wall 
around the back aperture being colored to 
give a suitable indication when seen through 
the front aperture, a movable disk colored 
to give anindication different from that given 
by the colored back Wall, and mechanism ar 
ranged outside of the case or shell and hav 
ing a connection to the disk passing through 
the wall of the shell for shifting the disk into 
and out of line with the apertures, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
JENS G. SCHEREUDER. 
Witnesses: 
DARWIN S. WOLCOTT, 
F. E. GAITHER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550635.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 550,635, 
J. MOWRER. 
PLANE AND CHISEL GRINDER. 
Patented Deo, 3, 1895, 
s 
S. 
H 
 
ZAZZzzesses 
taea-r 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM, PHOTO-LTHO. viAshington, DC 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES MO WR ER, OF CAS PER, WY OMING 
PLANE AND CHISEL GRINDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,635, dated December 8, 1895. 
5 
fo 
Application filed April 27, 1895, 
r 
Sae. 
To all, whom, it may concern 
Beit known that I, JAMESMOWRER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Casper, 
in the county of Natrona and State of Wyo 
ming, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Plane and Chisel Grinders; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
My invention relates to improvements in 
devices for holding tools or implements, such 
as sheep-shearing tools, while they are being 
ground or sharpened; and its novelty and ad 
vantages will be fully understood from the 
following description and claims when taken 
in connection with the annexed drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a plan view illustrating the holder 
of my improved device with a pair of shears 
secured in position. Fig. 2 is a section taken 
on the plane indicated by the line & 2 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the upright of 
the device, which is designed to be arranged 
on the frame of a grindstone or the like. Fig. 
4 is a detail plan view of the holder in an in 
verted position; and Figs. 5 and 6 are detail 
sections taken in the planes indicated by the 
lines y and acac, respectively, of Fig. 1. 
Referring by letter to the said drawings, B 
indicates the upright of my improved device. 
This upright is connected at its lower end to 
a base C, designed to be arranged on the 
frame of a grindstone, and it is provided at 
intervals in its length with apertures b, de 
signed to receive the end of the tool-holder D', 
said plurality of apertures being provided in 
order to permit the tool-holder to be arranged 
at various distances above the base C to suit 
grindstones of various diameters. 
The tool-holder D, as best shown in Figs. 
1, 2, and 4 of the drawings, comprises the 
body c, which is provided with the reduced 
portion d at one end, having its end shaped 
to enter the apertures of the upright B, and 
the reduced portion g' at its opposite end, 
forming a convenient hand-grasp. The hold 
er D' also comprises a loop f, and it is pro 
vided on the under side of one of the side 
bars m of the loop f with a clip in, which is 
riveted or otherwise fixedly connected to said 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
55 
75 
Serial No. 547,397, (No model.) 
side bar and bears at one end against an an 
gular shoulder formed thereon, as indicated 
by p, and is also provided on the under side 
of its other side bar q with a movable clip r, 
which also has one of its ends arranged against 
an angular shoulder on the bar, as indicated 
by S. This movable clip r is connected to a 
screw u, which extends loosely through the 
bar q and is threaded to receive a wing-nut 
y, while the fixed clip n is designed to serve 
in conjunction. With a set-screw v, taking 
through the bar m of the loop f', as shown, 
for a purpose presently described. 
y indicates a piece of brass or other soft 
metal, which is connected to and depends 
from the bar q of the loop f and is provided 
at its lower end with a lip 2, as shown. This 
piece y is designed and adapted to hold one 
blade of a pair of shears while the other is 
being sharpened, and is made of soft metal, 
as above stated, in order not to injure the 
edge of said blade. 
In using my improved device the blade to 
be sharpened is placed between the clips ?, ?" 
and the bars of the loopf, as illustrated, and 
the screw v is turned so as to bind the blade 
against the clip in, while the nut u is turned 
to clamp the blade between the clip r and 
the bar q. The other blade of the shears 
is placed in engagement With the piece?, by 
which it is securely held. When the shears 
have thus been placed and secured in the 
holder D', said holder is placed in engage 
ment with the upright B, which, as before 
stated, is arranged on the frame of a grind 
stone, and through the medium of the holder 
the blade secured by the clips is pressed 
against the grindstone and sharpened. When 
one blade has been sharpened, the position of 
the shears in the holder may be conveniently 
reversed and the other blade sharpened, the 
sharpened blade being held and protected 
from injury by the soft-metal piece f. 
I have in some respects specifically de 
scribed the construction and relative arrange 
ment of the parts of my improved device in 
order to impart a full and clear understand 
ing of the same; but I do not desire to be 
understood as confining myself to such con 
struction and arrangement, as such changes 
or modifications may be made in practice as 
fairly fall within the scope of my invention. 
ICO 
550,685 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. A device for holding tools while they are 
being sharpened, comprising an upright and a 
holder adapted to be connected or placed in 
engagement with the upright and having the 
fixed clip and the movable clip for engaging 
a blade of a pair of shears or the like and also 
having screws for binding the movable clip 
and the fixed clip against the blade and fur 
ther having a soft metal piece ly, adapted to 
engage and hold one blade while the other is 
being sharpened, Substantially as specified. 
IO 
2. A device for holding tools while they are 
being sharpened, comprising a holder having 
means for engaging and holding a blade of a 
pair of shears or the like and also having a 
device adapted to hold the other blade with 
out dulling or injuring the edge thereof, sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES MOWRER, 
Witnesses: 
JAMES ALMOND BAILEY, 
JAMES HART. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550735.txt	(No Model.) 
0 008 
No. 550,735, 
W. C. WENDTE. 
COLOR PRINTING PRESS, 
Patented Deo, 3, 1895, 
w 
AAA 
Tama-mura 
ar Sail 
S. 
WITNESSES; 
ZQ73&tae& 
64., (zac% 
 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. C. WENDTE, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
CoLoR-PRINTING PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,735, dated December 8, 1895. 
Application filed September 3, 1895, Serial No. 56,273, (No model.) 
55 
. 
. 
. 
. 
make clear. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. WENDT, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented an Improved 
Two - Color Printing-Press, (designated Case 
M.) of which the following is a specification. 
This invention is related to a large class of 
multicolor presses, and its special object is 
to secure the advantages derivable from a 
compact arrangement, by which a second ink 
ing is accomplished without waste of time, as 
well as a delivery face up, and other benefits 
to be hereinafter set forth. 
In the drawing that forms part of this speci 
fication the figure shows from the near side 
my pressin elevation, With part of one of the 
frames of an inking apparatus removed and 
the other shifted back. In it the essential 
details are represented in diagrammatic out 
line, which the following description will 
Two form-cylinders of equal size (marked 
10 and 12, respectively) are supported in bear 
ings near together, but not in close contact. 
In gear with both of these is the impression 
cylinder 14, also of the same diameter. This 
cylinderis supported in bearings which admit 
of being raised and lowered to a small extent, 
(about one-eighth of an inch,) for which pur 
pose they are carried by the sliding bars 16, 
one on each side of the press. This machine 
receives the power necessary to drive it 
through the pinion 18, which meshes into a 
gear on the form-cylinder 10. On the axis of 
the latter a small gear is keyed, (marked 20,) 
which drives the intermediate 22 and the cam 
wheel 24, (the last-named at half the speed 
of the impression and form Vinces of 
which there are two, one on each end of a com 
mon shaft 25. The cam-rods 26, one at each 
side of the machine, operate the toggles 28 
(of which there are also two) and in conjunc 
tion with the heavy springs 27 raise and lower 
theimpression-cylinder at propertimes. The 
springs 27 for this purpose raise the sliding 
bars 16, while the toggles, Working against 
the fixed abutments 29 and the lower ends of 
the bars, force the latter downward and With 
them the cylinder into operative contact so 
soon as the toggles are straightened by the 
cam 24 and the thrust of the springs thereby 
overcome. 
In the drawing the impression-cylinder 14 
is shown in gear with both the cylinders 10 
and 12 as it always remains, but out of opera 
tive contact, though the distance separating 
their surfaces can hardly be seen on so small 
a scale. 
When a sheet of paper from the feed-board 
30 is taken on the impression-cylinder 14, the 
grippel's in the gap upon the latter carry it 
down to the first form-cylinder 10, where (the 
impression-cylinder having been depressed) 
it begins to receive its first color and imme 
diately afterward its second color from the 
second form-cylinder 12. The sheet, which 
has thus been twice printed, is carried direct 
to the delivery-fingers 32, where, after being 
released by the grippers, it is thrown out face 
up upon the tapes 34 and carried to the de 
livery-board in the usual way. As soon as 
the tail of the sheet reaches the line of con 
tact on 12, the toggles 28 are relaxed and the 
cylinder 14 is immediately thrown up by the 
springs 27, whereby the blanket on the impres 
sion-cylinder in revolving past the freshly 
inked forms escapes the same altogether and 
takes no ink while the sheet is being deliv 
ered. The forms receive in this way a first 
inking from the form-rollers 36 and 38, and 
by the time the leading edge of the next sheet 
fed from the feed-board 30 reaches the form 
cylinders the forms thereon will each have 
been inked again from the same rollers and 
print accordingly after a double roll. In this 
Way my invention Secures the advantages in a 
continuously-running press of a very perfect 
application of ink to the form within the time 
that must in any case be spent in printing 
and in making a face-up delivery of the sheet. 
Persons conversant with printing will rec 
ognize the importance of adding to the num 
ber of form-rollers in a press when it can be 
conveniently done, with a view to securing 
the most uniform inking, and the second roll 
in my press, while it is equivalent to such an 
increase-that is, to doubling the number of 
rollers-is at the same time much better and 
more manageable than such an addition would 
be, for a thorough distribution and solid ap 
plication of the coating of ink is thereby ob 
75 
95 
IOC 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
--" 
N 
2 
550,735 
75 
O 
tained with the smallest possible number of 
riders and other distributing apparatus, which 
must be kept in order, cleaned up, and han 
dled continually. 
In the figure the group of rollers 36, which 
constitutes the inking apparatus for the first 
form, is shown in its proper place against the 
first cylinder 10. One side of the frame sup 
porting this group is removed in the drawing, 
so that the ends of the rollers may be seen in 
elevation. To facilitate access by the press 
man to the forms for the purpose of fixing 
and adjusting them and to the rollers them 
selves, I embrace each group in a separable 
piece of framing 40, which rests upon truck 
rollers 42 and ways in the bed-plate of the 
press. With the help of the horizontal racks 
44 and the small cogged wheels 46 on a cross 
shaft, adapted to receive a winch-handle on 
either side of the press, the frames above re 
ferred to can be racked to or from the main 
frame 48, (indicated in general outline only,) 
and free access thereby had to both form 
cylinders. 
In the figure the group of form-rollers which 
ink the forms on the second cylinder 12, it 
Will be seen, is not shown inits place for print 
ing, but has been racked out to the end of the 
bed to illustrate the construction I have de 
scribed. 
The size of the gaps in the three cylinders 
I employ is Subject to a certain limitation. 
If all three cylinders were in actual contact, 
which they obviously cannot be, the length of 
the cap, circumferentially, could be not less 
than sixty degrees; but as the two form-cylin 
ders are necessarily separated from each other 
the gaps must exceed that length by a small 
quantity, dependent, essentially and chiefly, 
on the distance apart of the lines of contact 
measured on the circumference of the im 
pression-cylinder, to which length should of 
course be added, in practically constructing 
the press, the short distance traveled during 
the act of shifting the impression-cylinder, 
allowance for margins, &c. 
The forms fitted for use in this press must 
be curved and may consist of electrotypes or 
stereotypes or of etched zinc, &c., bent into 
the required curve and attached to the cyl 
inder in Well-known ways, and although I 
have hitherto considered my invention with 
reference to relief-printing only it is clearly 
quite as adaptable for surface-printing of the 
Zincographic kind, requiring therefor only 
the addition of the usual damping apparatus 
in advance of the inking-rollers, as in other 
presses employing stone or zinc, &c., or col 
lographic Surfaces. 
In the foregoing I have set forth the man 
her I believe to be best adapted for the suc 
cessful embodiment of my invention; but I 
do not wish it understood that I confine my 
self to the specific details herein given, inas 
much as other means can certainly be suc 
cessfully employed for the practical applica 
tion of the principles underlying the same. 
It is obvious, for instance, that the means 
used to bring down the impression-cylinder 
might be modified and substitutes for the 
toggle might be devised; also, instead of lift 
ing the impression-cylinder the separation 
could be effected by giving the bearings of 
the form-cylinders a lateral movement apart, 
the same to be accomplished simultaneously 
or in sequence, so as to remove them at proper 
times from operative contact with the im 
pression-cylinder. 
The great productiveness of this press is 
dependent on the fact that the rotation is 
continuous and is always in the same direc 
tion, on the considerable length of the forms 
in relation to the circumference of the form 
cylinders, and for the reason that the two 
forms are printing together during much of 
the time required to produce and deliver the 
two-color impression. 
What I claim is 
1. In a two-revolution color press, the come 
bination of an impression-cylinder having 
grippers adapted for taking sheets; With two 
form-cylinders each of diameter equal thereto 
and geared together through the same; with 
two groups of form rollers in continuous op 
erative contact with their respective forms; 
and with means for holding first in and then 
out of operative contact the impression-cyl 
inder with the two form-cylinders during and 
after the printing of the sheet carried by the 
former; substantially as described. 
2. In a two-revolution color press, an im 
pression-cylinder with grippers in combina 
tion with and geared to two form-cylinders 
each of diameter equal thereto; means for 
holding the impression-cylinder in operative 
contact with the form-cylinders while the 
sheet is passing between them and the im 
pression-cylinder, and of then separating the 
same to unmake said contact while the sheet 
is not passing; With inking apparatus for 
each form; and with delivery fingers and 
tapes adapted to convey the printed sheet 
face up from the grippers when the latter 
have released it; substantially as described. 
3. In a two-revolution color press, an im 
pression-cylinder in combination and in op 
erative contact with two form-cylinders of 
like size; with form rollers adapted for con 
tinuous rolling; with grippers on the impres 
sion-cylinder adapted to take a sheet at the 
beginning of every alternate revolution of the 
cylinders, and to release each sheet for de 
livery face up after one revolution has been 
completed; with springs to throw the impres 
sion-cylinder out of operative contact, and 
cams and toggles to overcome the spring ac 
tion and return the impression-cylindertoits 
place, immediately before and while the sheet 
is being printed by the form-cylinders; sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a two-color rotary press, two form 
cylinders provided with gaps or blanks, each 
in combination and in operative connection 
With an impression-cylinder having a gap 
95 
IOC 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
25 
35 
45 
55 
550,785 
3 
equal in size to those on the form-cylinders, 
each gap subtending an angle not less than 
that included by two radii of the impression 
cylinder to its lines of contact with the form 
cylinders; with color rollers for each form 
cylinder held in constant functional relation 
thereto; and with means for holding the print 
ing cylinders in operative contact when the 
impression surface is protected by the sheet, 
and of separating them while still in gear 
when said surface is unprotected and exposed 
in passing the inked form in the absence of 
said sheet; substantially as described. 
5. In a two-revolution two-color press, an 
impression - cylinder with grippers to take 
sheets in combination and in gear with two 
form - cylinders each of size equal thereto; 
O 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL JENNISON, 
S. BOWEN PIERCE. 
with sliding bearings for said impression-cyl 
inder actuated by toggles and springs, timed 
to shift the impression-cylinder into and Out 
of operative contact with the two form-cylin 
ders during and after the printing of the 
sheet, respectively; with inking apparatus 
adapted to ink both forms twice in the same 
direction previous to printing from the same; 
and with delivery fingers and tapes to receive 
and convey the sheet face up from the im 
pression-cylinder after the completion of its 
second revolution; substantially as described. 
WILLIAM C. WENDT. 
25 
 
It is hereby certified that in Letters Patent No. 550,735, granted December 3, 1895, 
upon the application of William C. Wendt, of Boston, Massachusetts, for an improve - 
ment in Color-Printing Presses, an error appears in the printed specification requir 
ing correction, viz: In line 35, page 2, the word cap' should read gap; and that the 
said Letters Patent should be read with this correction therein that the same may 
conform to the record of the case in the Patent Office. 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 10th day of December, A. D. 1895. 
SEAL. 
- 
Countersigned: 
JoHN S. SEYMoUR, 
Commissioner of Patents. 
JNO. M. REYNOLDS, 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550835.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 550,835, 
 
J. F. MUNSIE. 
RAILWAY CAR, 
Patented Deo, 3, 1895, 
 
ay as 
Mdorneys, 
e/azzas.A7%tasze, 
/2/2/27ve 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. MUNSIE, OE BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE MUNSIE 
COLES ELECTRIC RAILWAY EQUIPMENT COMPANY, OF NEW JERSEY. 
RALWAY. CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,835, dated December 3, 1895. 
Application filed April 1, 1891, Serial No. 387,291. (No model.) 
25 spondingly less length. 
20 the passage of the axles therethrough. 
Io it appertains to make and use the same. 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES F. MUNSIE, a 
British subject, residing at Brooklyn, in the 
county of Kings and State of New York, have 
5 invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Railway-Cars; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
Myinvention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in railway-cars designed 
especially for use in underground railways. 
The main objects of the invention are to 
I5 provide a car which will readily accommodate 
itself to the curvatures of the track and which 
may be used in tunnels exceeding but slightly 
the height of the car-body, while at the same 
time leaving the car interior unobstructed by 
My invention also contemplates securing 
the maximum passenger-carrying capacity 
with the minimum length of car-body, so that 
that the station-platforms may be of corre 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a side elevation of a car embody 
ing my improvements. Fig. 2 represents a 
partial plan view thereof, and Fig. 3 repre 
Similar numerals of reference indicate simi 
lar parts throughout the several views. 
Referring to the drawings, 5 indicates the 
body portion of a car forming part of the roll 
The 
car-body is provided With a central door 6 
for the entrance and exit of passengers, the 
lower edge of said door being on a level With 
the car-flooring. It will be noted that the car 
4o flooring clears the road-bed but slightly, and 
in order to diminish the danger from possible 
vertical oscillations of the car-body I connect 
to the under side thereof a number of fric 
tion-rollers 7, for the purpose of protecting 
45 the car-body itself from actual contact with 
the road-bed should the vertical oscillation 
be excessive. 
From the car-body the stringers 8 are curved 
upward and connect with the platforms 9 at 
35 ing-stock of an underground railway. 
3o sents an end elevation. 
55 
75 
85 
front and rear of the car, said platforms con 
stituting a part of the truck-frames. The 
platforms 9 are connected by a king-bolt 10 
with the subjacent platforms 11, mounted 
upon axles, and are provided at their forward 
ends with the usual coupling draw-bars 12. 
The inner axle 13 of each truck and its 
wheels pass beneath the corresponding end of 
the car-body, which is correspondingly cut 
away, as shown. This, however, does not 
diminish the seating capacity of the car, but 
permits seats to be located directly above said 
axles and wheels at the car ends, where they 
will not interfere with the convenience of the 
passengers in going in and out, which Would 
be the case if the axles or wheels projected 
into or through the car-body at some distance 
from its ends. 
It will be observed that the axles 13 are pro 
vided with flangeless wheels 14, running upon 
the track-rails 15, and that said axles are 
longer than the axles 16, which are provided 
with the flanged wheels 17 and which run 
upon the track-rails 18. This construction 
and arrangement is designed to lessen the 
friction in passing around curves by provid 
ing one set only of the wheels with flanges, 
while the other set acts simply as bearers or 
trailers for the trucks. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
A railway car, provided with trucks at its 
ends, and a main body portion suspended be 
tween the trucks, the trucks having pivotal 
connection with the car at points beyond the 
ends of the same, and the car body being cut 
away to permit the rear wheels of the truck 
to turn thereunder, said trucks carrying tWO 
axles one shorter than the other, the shorter 
axle having a flanged wheel at each end and 
the longer axle having a flangeless wheel at 
each end, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES F. MUNSE. 
- 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT WATT, 
ORMID. PERSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US550935.txt	wa 
G, A, AENCHBACHER, 
CAR TRUCK. 
(to Model.) 
No. 550,935, 
i. 
 
Patented Dess 1895, 
y WACS Ng2 
Za 
y 
SSN 
 
  
  
As 2 
F71, st 
titles A.AEYC BACHEA 
'42 
twvewtg 
sessionalises 
2ecial 
 
 
retail 
isiase 
w 
Arai 
(W22222 
 
 
 
 
 
S2 
S2 
SS s 
R 
3S s 
sa 
Y 
  
 
 
 
2 
y is 
S. Ws 
cu? 2.7%/ 
s 
 
AN Risa.g.RAF.A.PHoratewashston.pc. 
...; 
- 
A 
1 
::: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GOTLIEB ALFRED AENCHBACHER, OF ATLANTA, GEORGIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
AENCHBACHER & PRINCE, OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR-TRUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 550,935, dated December 3, 1895. 
Application filed September 1, 1894, Serial No. 521,928, (No model.) 
To all, whon it may conce7n 
Be it known that I, GOTLIEB ALFRED 
AENCHBACHER, a citizen of the United States, 
and a resident of Atlanta, in the county of 
Fulton and State of Georgia, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Car 
Trucks; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
This invention has for its object the con 
struction of a car-truck that will adapt itself 
to curves without unnecessary friction and 
that will be automatic and easy of action and 
that will be efficient in all its other functions, 
as well as so improving the axle-box as to 
render it practically dust-proof and to pre 
vent to the desired extent the dripping from 
the axle-box of oil or grease used as a lubri 
cant therein, the details of all of which will 
be hereinafter fully specified and are shown 
in their preferable form in the accompanying 
drawings, in which like reference characters 
are employed in the designation of corre 
sponding elements in all the figures, which 
said figures are briefly described as follows: 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a pair of trucks 
from outside the track, showing also by a re 
moval of the front half of one of the said trucks 
the construction and arrangement of the in 
ternal parts and how the desired relative 
movement of the pedestaland axle is provided 
for. 
Fig. 2 is a plan of the device as to in 
ternal elements and a sectional view of the 
pedestal horizontally cut about midway ver 
tically. Fig. 3 is a vertical section through 
the grease-box centrally and longitudinally 
of the axle-bearing, further showing the in 
closed parts comprising the bearing-brass, 
abutting-plate, and dust-plates. Fig. 4 is a 
vertical cross-section of the grease-box on the 
line ac ac, Fig. 3, further showing the dust 
plates and their seat and the means for their 
pressure against the axle-bearing. Fig. 5 is 
a perspective view of one of the dust-plates, 
clearly showing its preferable construction. 
The pedestal Pis composed of guides p, ver 
tically arranged and connected at their tops 
by a base of the proper form to be secured to 
the side sills of the car, braces for strength, 
of proper construction and, if desired, of fan 
ciful design, being added, if requisite, con 
necting the said guides intermediately. Ob 
viously the connection between the pedestal 
and the sill of the car may be rigid, or to the 
desired extent elastic, the latter being shown, 
however, in common form. 
A grease and oil box carrying and guiding 
structure is formed of the bridge-bars F and G, 
respectively, the upper curved and the lower 
straight bridge-bars fastened together and 
held rigidrelatively at their ends by blocks K, 
which said blocks have motion vertically 
within the guides of the pedestal P, as best 
shown in Figs. I and 2, the said guides be 
ing preferably thickened at their edges and 
the blocks K being of such form as to fit 
upon said guides and move freely thereon, 
the bridge-bars F and G holding them apart 
and in said guides. Guide-pins M, passing 
through the base of the pedestal, extend 
downwardly through the bridge-bars F and 
Gand the blocks K, asbest shown in Fig. 1, and 
thereupon said elements as an entirety have 
vertical motion, said pins assisting the guides 
p in their functions, and reliable action is 
thereby doubly insured, stops consisting of 
pins, nuts, or other suitable construction 
upon the lower ends of said pins M prevent 
ing the blocks K and attached parts from 
separating themselves from the pedestal on 
the inversion or jerking up of the car. Seated 
on top of the bridge-bar F and under the 
base of the pedestal, the pins Mpassing cen 
trally through them, are the buffers l, of rub 
ber or other suitable material, and seated 
upon these buffers or otherwise surrounding 
the pin M is a coiled spring L, of the desired 
form. Said springs L give resilience to down 
ward movement of the car and the buffers l 
elastically and noiselessly limit movement 
due to the said depression of the car. Should 
the springs L be compressed to their limit, 
bringing their spirals into contact, the force 
of said contact will be relieved by the end 
seating of the springs upon the Washers or 
annular extensions l of the rubber buffers l, 
and hence said springs will not be so readily 
55 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
Io 
45 
2 
550,935 
H, thickened and perforated in the center, 
whereby a perforated truncate-conical sleeve 
h' is formed, which surrounds the axle and 
abuts against the hub of the wheel and makes 
a gland thereabout, which will effectually 
prevent the entry of dust, assisting the 
guards e' and e in their functions both as 
to the prevention of the entry of dust and 
the passage of grease to the wheels. 
The washer H obviously has play in the 
requisite directions within its casing in order 
that the end of the casing D may move rela 
tively to said axle. 
The motion hereinbefore mentioned of the 
grease-boxD laterally upon the guides formed 
by the parallel portions of the bars F and G 
is resisted elastically and in a greater degree 
in ratio to the distance from a normal posi 
tion by the springs N, seated upon lugs in 
upon the sides of the casing D and upon the 
blocks K, as shown in Fig. 1, which said lugs 
are in the construction shown utilized as 
sockets for the rubber buffers O by hollow 
ing them out, as clearly shown in the left end 
of Fig. 1. The function of these said buffers 
is to form elastic motion-limiting stops fo) 
the casing D upon the guides F and G. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In combination the cheek pieces or hang 
ers, supporting the beam of the car having 
vertical guide flanges or edges, a bridge com 
posed of the upper and lower bars and end 
blocks, said end blocks being fitted to slide 
on the guiding flanges or edges of the cheek 
pieces, an axle box having guiding connec 
tions with the said upper and lower bars and 
arranged to move thereon, springs interposed 
between said axle box and said end pieces, 
said springs being Supported on the box and 
end pieces, and vertically arranged springs in 
terposed between the end block and the cal', 
with guide rods therefor extending through 
said pieces, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
GOTLIEB ALFRED AENCHBACHER, 
Witnesses: 
A. P. WOOD, 
EDWD. P. WOOD. 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
85 
95 
broken as is commonly the case upon Sud 
den incidental depressions of the car. 
Carried between the bridge-bars F and G 
and having motion laterally therein is a cas 
ing D, which forms a grease-box, and the 
construction of which is best shown in Fig. 
3. Said casing is provided with flanges.f, as 
shown, which operate to prevent end motion 
of said casing in its bridge, and the said cas 
ing is provided With openings in its front and 
real ends for the admission of Waste and 
glease and for access to the interior and for 
the introduction of the axle A, and is inter 
nally chambered, substantially as shown, for 
the reception of the operative parts. The 
front opening is closed by a cover d", which 
hooks over the flange d on the casing D, be 
ing secured at its lower end by the bolt d 
passing through and securing the two flanges 
d and d together. The removal of said bolt 
alone Will hence, allow the cover to be re 
moved and give access to the interior. 
Set in grooves or guides in the sides of the 
grease-box is a plate B, against which the 
OValled Or lounded end of the axle A abuts to 
prevent end-play with as little fiction as 
possible, Substantially a pivot-bearing being 
thus obtained. Depending from the under 
side of the casing is a projection d, which 
has its lower end shaped to enter or receive 
a corresponding projection c on the upper 
side of the bearing-brass C, the construction 
being essentially a ball-and-socket joint and 
allowing a universal movement of the bear 
ing-brass relative to the casing. The axle 
runs in the said bearing-brass in the ordi 
nary manner. In a recess e, forming essen 
tially vertical guides, are set the dust-guards 
e' and e, which are made in the form sub 
stantially as shown in Fig. 5, their manner 
of setting and movement, as shown in Figs. 
3 and 4, being overlapping in their halved 
portions, their bifurcated ends bestriding 
the axle, the upper guard being held down 
by its gravity and the lower one by the 
springs e, of form and arrangement as shown 
in Fig. 4, preferably by reason of its isola 
tion from dirt, dust, and accidental derange 
ment. A second recess h, of like character 
with the recess e, is provided, and seated 
within this recess is a rectangular washer 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551036.txt	(No Model.) 
H. A. KINGSLAND & J. S. SANGER. 
EXPOSION MOTOR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1 
No. 551,036, 
Patted De0, 10, 1895. 
  
 
m 
TZers. 
46 Zift, T214 
(No Model.) 
H. A. KINGSLAND & J. S. SANGER. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 551,036 
EXPLOSION MOTOR, 
Pate 
 
inted Dec. 10, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N N!! 
s h;I, 
 
 
 
 
AS 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
S i N 22( ON w 
 
 
 
2 s % 
(No Model.) 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
H. A. KINGSLAND & J. S. SANGER. 
- 
EXPLOSION MOTOR. 
NO, 551,036, 
Patented Dec. 10, 1895, 
n 
Y 
- - 
W 
N 
 
 
w 
-Q). 
 
 
 
 
 
| 
 
  
Y 
f 
|MIyavi 
2S 
W2 
W 
B 
L iZ 
2 yN 
N 
 
s GEs 
O 
n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
H. A. KINGSLAND & J. S. SANGER. 
EXPOSION MOTOR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
(No Model.) 
No. 551,036, 
 
Patented Deo, 10, 1895. 
57ES 
NEFEREI 
Aiella 
Ele 
... 
2 
es 
H 
E1 
e 
Zzza/eazaars. 
4 as esz. 
(24-4-2.2 4.2%-46%-44%. 
A-6. a? (2.2e2, 
. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HUGH A. KINGSLAND, OF BELLEVILLE, AND JOHN S. SANGER, OF ORANGE, 
NEW JERSEY. 
- 
EXPLOSION-MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551,036, dated December 10, 1895. 
Application filed March 12, 1895, 
O 
To all, whon, it invay concern: 
Beit known that we, HUGH A. KINGSLAND, 
of Belleville, and JOHN S. SANGER, of Orange, 
Essex county, New Jersey, citizens of the 
5 United States, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Explosion-Motors, 
fully described and represented in the follow 
ing specification and the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of the same. 
This invention relates especially to that 
class of motors in which explosives of high 
power, like gunpowder and fulminate, are 
employed, the mechanism embracing a power 
cylinder or gun, a piston-rod fitted to the bore 
I5 of the same, feeding mechanism for supplying 
a series of charges to the base of the gun 
through a feed-duct, means for closing such 
feed-duct before each explosion, and means 
for firing the charge. The piston-rod is pref 
2O erably checked in its forward motion by an 
air-cushion which operates to return it to its 
initial position. The reciprocating motion of 
the piston-rod is converted into a continuous 
rotary motion by means of an intermittently 
25 acting clutch, which is applied to the power 
shaft and Oscillated by a link having a cam 
connection to the rod, such connection being 
adapted to greatly reduce the violent intermit 
tent movement of the rod. Aheated needleis 
3o shown hereinforfiring the charge, and mech 
anism adapted by the tension of a spring to 
operate voluntarily when released is provided 
to actuate the feed mechanism, the gate in the 
feed-duct, and the firing-needle. A setting 
35 lever arranged obliquely at the side of the 
piston-rod is moved by a pin upon the latter 
during its forward stroke, and such lever op 
erates to set and lock these voluntary mech 
anisms, which are subsequently released in 
4O successive Order by an actuating-spring which 
is simultaneously compressed by the lever. 
A fluid-regulator or other suitable brake con 
trols the reaction of the spring, and thus de 
termines the velocity of the movements. 
45 Means for varying the effect of the brake or 
regulator serves to determine the rapidity of 
the explosions. 
These improvements are embodied in one 
form in the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure I is a plan of an explosion-motor. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same; Fig. 3, 
55 
65 
75 
Serial No. 541,484, (No model.) 
a plan, partly in Section at the center line 
where hatched, of the charging and firing ap 
paratus with the piston-rod wholly projected. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical section, where hatched, of 
the power-cylinder and its feeding mechan 
ism with the piston-rod retracted within the 
cylinder. Fig. 5 is a side elevation of the 
parts shown in Fig. 3 with the feeding mech 
anism set and locked by the positive motion 
of the setting-lever and the actuating-spring 
cylinder partly in section where hatched. 
Fig. 6 is an elevation of the rotary carrier for 
feeding the charges with its actuating mech 
anism unlocked, the parts being shown in 
Section where hatched at the centerline of the 
locking-pin. Fig. 7 is a rear elevation of the 
motor, excepting the lower part, where broken 
away for want of room, the needle and its 
carrier being retracted. Fig. 8 shows the un 
der side of the parts exhibited in Fig. 5, with 
the frame and the spring-cylinder removed 
and the stop-lever S omitted to expose the le 
verk. Fig. 9 is an end elevation of the needle 
carrier retracted and its attachments. Fig. 
10 is an end elevation of the same with the 
needle-carrier guide in section at the dog for 
securing the carrier. 
A designates the frame of the motor, which 
may be of any suitable character; B, the 
power - cylinder; B', the piston - rod, fitted 
loosely to the cylinder; C, a guide adjacent 
to the same, carrying a hollow shield C'; D, 
guides for the piston cross-head D'; E, an air 
cushion cylinder into which the outer end of 
the rod B'extends when discharged from the 
power-cylinder. The cushion-cylinder is ad 
justably closed at its outer end by cap E" to 
vary the effect of the air-cushion. 
The breech of the cylinder Bis clamped in 
a bearing Band is formed with projection 
Bbehind the bearing to sustain a round sup 
port H, containing a rotary carrier F, which 
is provided with a series of powder-chambers 
F'. These chambers are supplied in succes 
sion from a hopper F. 
The breech of the cylinder B is closed by a 
plug G, which is formed upon its front end 
With a nippleb, containing an explosion-cham 
ber b'. A passage c' is formed in the top side 
of the nipple to admit the charge, and a nee 
dle-hole cis formed in the side of the nipple to 
9 O 
95 
OO 
2 
551,036 
O 
admit a heated needle for firing the same. A 
feed-duct d extends from the passage c'up 
ward through the breech and support H into 
coincidence with the Chambers F. The butt, 
of the piston-rod is fitted loosely to the cyl 
indler B, as shown in Fig. 4, and is recessed 
to fit the exterior of the nipple, preferably 
with a taper-joint, as shown in said figure. 
The butt thus serves to close the passage c' 
and to confine the charge in a closed cham 
ber when exploded. The needle-inlet or nee 
dle-hole C extends laterally through the re 
cessed butt of the piston, as shown in Fig. 7, 
to receive the firing-needle. A plug-valve e 
is inserted in the duct d and provided with 
arm cl to close the same, as shown in Fig. 4, 
prior to the explosion. Such arm is moved 
by an actuating-spring, which is set by the 
setting-lever. 
A ratchet-wheelf is attached to the spindle 
F of the rotary carrier F, and a pawlf and 
arm fare provided to shift the chambers in 
succession over the duct. Altoothfupon the 
arm-f' engages a notch in a slide. I, mounted 
upon the projection B. (See Figs. 5, 7, and 8.) 
The slide is pressed by a spring i, so as to nor 
mally actuate the pawl f and voluntarily 
turn the carrier F. A stop-leversis pivoted 
adjacent to the outer end of the rotary plug 
e, and when the slide I is retracted and the 
spring under tension the stop engages a stud 
s' upon the slide, as shown in Fig. 5. The 
pluge is furnished with a camg, (shown in 
Fig. 6,) which when the plug is turned, as 
shown in Fig. 4, engages a tooth upon the le 
vers and turns the stop away from the stud 
s', thus unlocking the slide and permitting 
the spring i to project the slide forward, and 
thus actuate the lever and pawlf to turn the 
rotary carrier F. The carrier is provided 
with a series of latch-holes s, and when thus: 
turned a locking-pin his pressed by a spring: 
s', Figs. 6 and S, into one of said, holes. A 
l'atchet-pin having beveled end q is also in 
serted through the support H to engage the 
holes S* in succession. Both pins are fitted 
through bushings r", inserted through the sup 
port H, as shown in Figs. 6, 7, and 8, and the 
ratchet-pin r is pressed normally upward by 
a spring r, Fig. 8, the end of which plays in 
a notch in the outer end of the bushings. A 
lever k, pivoted to the support H, adjacent to 
the locking-pin h, Figs. 5 and 6, has one arm 
arranged to rest upon the studs' and the op 
posite arm engaged with the pin or head o of 
the locking-pin h. When the slide I is: re 
tracted, as shown in Fig. 5, the studs' actu 
ates the lever k to retraet the locking-pin, and 
thus permits the rotation of the carrier F 
upon the Subsequent automatic movement of 
the slide, which is effected by the shifting of 
the stop-lever S by the rotation of the plug 
e, as above described. The setting-lever, 
which is pivoted by the side of the piston-rod, 
has its rear arm J extended in proximity to 
the arm d' and its front arm J'inclined up 
Wardly, so that a pin K upon the cross-head 
D' depresses the outer end of the lever when 
the rod is projected. A slotted arm e', at 
tached to the valve-plug e, is actuated by a 
pin e' upon the arm J, which thus turns the 
plug to open the duct, as indicated by the 
dottedlines d in Fig. 5. Such movement also 
operates to retract and lock the slide I by 
means of a pinion l, with teeth arranged to 
engage a toothl upon the under side of the 
slide. The pinion is secured to a ratchet 
wheell, which is rotated intermittingly by an 
arm and pawl l, which are connected by link 
l, with the arm d". The slide is shown un 
locked and projected forward in Fig. 6 with 
a tooth of the pinion in readiness to retract 
the slide, while such retraction is shown com 
pleted in Fig. 5 and the slide locked by the 
stop-lever S. A springs", Figs. 7 and S, is 
provided to raise the stops, the upper half 
only of the spring being shown in Fig. 8, and 
only the hole by which its end is fitted to the 
stop being shown in Fig. 5. The pinion re 
mains.stationary during the movement of the 
slide and its teeth are made a sufficient, dis 
tance apart to clear the lugli when the latter 
is carried forward by the slide, as shown in 
Fig. 6. 
The pawll rotates the pinion inter 
mittingly, in conjunction with the rotation of 
the plug-Valvee, by means of its connection 
through linkt with the arm d". The arm. J is 
connected by linki to a plunger L, having a 
piston L' fitted to a cylinder M. A. spiral 
spring.L* is confined between such piston and 
the upper head of the cylinder, and the move 
ment of the arm. J, effected by the pink, op 
erates to compress, the spring, as shown in 
Fig. 5. 
The cylinder Mis provided at itslower end 
with an escape-valve im, which connects by a 
passage n' with an adjacent cylinder M'. The 
cylinder M below the piston, is filled with 
fluid ma', which extends through the passage 
m and upward a suitable distance into the 
cylinder M', and the valve n is held slightly 
open by an adjustable screw into permit the 
fluid to escape from the cylinder Mata regul 
lated velocity. 
A shaft P is connected by arm p and a link 
p' to the arm J to set the firing device for all 
tomatic operation. Such device consists of 
a needle u, held by carrier U in a guide U' 
at the side of the breech. 
The carrier is 
shown held in a retracted position by a pawl 
u", with the needle surrounded by the flame 
u of a spirit-lamp U. The needle is formed 
with a tapering shank ', and a socket v' is 
formed in the side of the breech, which is 
plugged by such shank when the needle is 
projected into the explosion-chamber, as in 
dicated by the dotted lines v. A roll U is 
projected from one side of the needle-carrier 
to engage a spirally-faced cam W., fitted to 
the rear end of the shaft P. A spring wis 
attached to the support of the needle-carrier 
and operates to press the carrier forward, as 
indicated by the arrow ac, and is thus adapted 
to project the needle automatically into the 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
So 
95 
OO 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
551,036 
8 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
explosion - chamber. Such projection is ef 
fected, after the charge is in the chamber and 
the plug-valve closed, by means of a lever N, 
Figs. 5 and 7, which is connected at one end 
with the pawl by a link y and at the other 
end is provided With a toe n, to engage a col 
lar Lupon the plunger L. The collar is made 
adjustable by means of a set-screw and is so 
set as to actuate the lever N at the extremity 
of the plunger's spring movement. Anotch 
at is formed in the needle-carrier, and when 
the same is projected the notch is engaged by 
a dog i. The dog is formed with a tooth ad 
jacent, to its pivot to engage a spring it and 
swings above and below its point of contact 
therewith as the dog is raised and lowered. 
The latch is formed in its Outer end With a 
notch v', and the cam W is formed at its up 
per end with a tooth Uto fit such notch and 
to give the dog a limited movement in either 
direction. 
In Fig. 10 the cam is shown turned in the 
reverse position to that shown in Figs. 7 and 
9, which show the needle-bar retracted and 
locked. In such reverse position the tooth 
av turns the dog down into contact with the 
needle-bar, against which it is Subsequently 
pressed by the spring it until the notch it 
comes beneath the dog, which immediately 
falls into the notch and Secures the needle in 
the hole C during the explosion. The first 
movement of the cam caused by the first mo 
tion of the setting-lever after the explosion 
lifts the dog from the notch u and then re 
tracts the needle-carrier, as shown in Fig. 7. 
The power generated by the explosion is 
transmitted to the shaft I' by a clutch-wheel 
J', which is intermittingly impelled by dogs 
a, attached to a clutch-plate C. The plate 
is oscillated by an arm P', to which a gradu 
ally-accelerated motion is imparted from the 
piston-rod by a curved bar T, attached tan 
gentially to the rod and acting upon a roller 
Such rider is connected by a link 
or rider t. 
S with the arm P' and by a link S with a fixed 
center S. The bar T is curved backwardly 
and upwardly, and the rider at the beginning 
of the discharge-stroke rests upon the lowest 
point of the bar, where its curve is nearly par 
allel with the piston-rod. The rider is car 
ried by the link S around the center S', and, 
as the bar is forced forward with the piston 
rod, moves upward around such center, being 
raised with accelerated velocity as the bar 
curves gradually at a greater angle to the rod. 
The parts are shown in Fig. 2 in dotted lines 
at the extreme of their movement. The ro 
tary power-shaft is thus protected from the 
primary shock of the explosion, and a motion 
which is slow at first and afterward rapidlyin 
creased in velocity is imparted to the power 
shaft by the curved bearing-bar and its rider. 
The curved bearing-bar and the rider thus 
forman intermediate mechanism which trans 
mits the violent motion of the piston-rod with 
gradually-increasing velocity to the power 
shaft and avoids the danger of shocks and 
concussions which would result from a direct 
connection. 
The cap E", when loosened, permits a par 
tial or graduated escape of the air, and the 
compression of the air in the cushion-cylin 
der E may thus be regulated by the cap to 
secure the return of the piston-rod to the 
proper point within the power-cylinder B, 
and means is provided to prevent the rebound 
of the rod from such cylinder when thrown 
into contact with the charging-nipple in the 
base of the same. Such means consists of a 
catch. C', hinged upon the frame A, to engage 
the front end of the hub, which connects the 
bar T to the piston-rod when such rod is in 
the bottom of the power-cylinder. Aleverg 
is pivoted to the frame adjacent to a pin O' 
upon the setting-lever and is extended over 
a lug a upon the end of the catch a'. When 
the setting-lever is depressed by the forward 
movement of the pin.K, the catch springs up 
Ward, as indicated by dotted lines a in Fig. 
2, to lock the piston-rod in the cylinder B; 
but when the setting-lever is reversed by the 
auxiliary actuating-spring L, as indicated in 
Fig. 2, the pin o' operates upon the lever g' 
to retract the catch, as shown in full lines C.' 
in Fig. 2. The piston-rod is thus unlocked 
prior to the explosion and is free to move for 
Ward, as required. 
The hollow shield C before the power-cylin 
der serves, with the guide C, adjacent thereto, 
to intercept the products of the explosion and 
to prevent the fouling of the mechanism be 
yond such shield. 
In practical operation the firing of the 
charge sets and locks the slide I and the 
needle-carrier U and opens the plug-valve e. 
The expansion of the auxiliary actuating 
spring L, controlled by the fluid m, first re 
tracts the stops from the slide I by means of 
the camg, (see Figs. 5 and 6,) thus turning 
the powder-carrier F and depositing a charge 
in the duct d. The locking-pin h, when the 
slide moves forward, is pressed upward by 
the spring s", (see Fig. 6,) and thus arrests 
the motion of the carrier at the proper point 
by springing into the latch-hole s. The 
ratchet-pin, having beveled end r, (see Fig. 
7,) is forced downward by the forward rota 
tion of the carrier and by its automatic en 
gagement with the succeeding hole prevents 
any reaction of the carrier. The valve e is 
next closed and the latch a depressed, as 
shown in Fig. 2, and finally the collar Len 
gages the toe in upon the lever N, thus releas 
ing the needle and permitting it to fire the 
charge. The forward movement of the pis 
ton-rod produces the same effects upon the 
setting-lever, and the rapidity of the charges 
is regulated by adjusting the valve n by the 
screw m. The impulses of the piston-rod are 
transmitted successively to the rotary power 
shaft, which is shown in Fig. 1 provided with 
a fly-wheelW to maintain the motion between 
suchimpulses. The cross-head of the piston 
rod is preferably provided with a spring or 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
551,086 
O 
15 
35 
40 
55 
air-cushion, as claimed in United States-Pat 
ent No. 497,246, dated May 9, 1893, by which, 
in conjunction with the curved tangential bar 
and its rider, power may be generated with 
very great economy from gunpowder and a 
continuous rotary motion obtained without 
shock or jar. The fluid which is forced past 
the valve in by the piston beneath the spring 
l'operates as a brake upon the reaction, move 
ment of the spring, and it is obviously imma 
terial what form of brake be used to perform. 
this function. 
Many of the improvements described here 
in-as, for instance, the means of firing the 
charge and of controlling the automatic move 
ments of the feeding and firing mechanisms 
may be applied to gas-moto's or motors of 
other descriptions than that shown herein, 
and we do not, therefore, limit ourselves to 
the precise application shown herein for the 
improvements described. 
IIaving thus set forth the nature of the in 
vention, what is claimed herein is 
1. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with the power cylinder, the piston rod and 
an air cushion to arrest and return the rod, of 
a catch to lock the piston rod. On its rebound, 
and means for unlatching such catch. 
2. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with the power cylinder, the piston rod and 
an air cushion to arrest and return the rod, 
of a catch to lock the piston rod on its re 
bound, automatic mechanism for charging 
the power cylinder, for unlatching such catch, 
and firing the charge. 
3. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with the breech of the power cylinder, of a 
hollow nipple to hold the charge, and a piston 
rod having its butt recessed to cover such 
nipple. 
4. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with the breech of the power cylinder, of a 
hollow nipple having a charging-hole in the 
upper side and a piston rod having its butt 
fitted to the exterior of the nipple to cover 
such charging-hole, 
5. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with the breech of the power cylinder, of a 
hollow nipple having a charging-hole in the 
upper side, and a piston rod. With Socket to 
fit over the nipple and having a firing-hole 
formed through the same. 
6. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with a power cylinder and a piston rod with 
suitable guides, of a rotary carrier for feeding 
successive charges to the cylinder, spring 
mechanism for shifting the carrier, a lock to 
restrain Such mechanism, and means actu 
ated by the forward movement of the piston 
rod for compressing the spring and locking 
the Spring mechanism. 
7. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with a power cylinder and a piston rod with 
suitable guides, of a rotary carrier for feeding 
successive charges to the cylinder, spring 
mechanism for shifting the carrier, a lock to 
restrain such mechanism, a lever arm inclined 
to the path of the piston rod, with a pin car 
ried by the rod to press the lever, a connec 
tion from the lever to set andlock the spring 
feeding mechanism, and an actuating Spring 
set by the lever, with brake or fluid regulator 
to control the reaction of the same, for sub 
sequently unlocking the spring feeding mech 
anism. 
8. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with a power cylinder and its piston rod, of 
automatic means for feeding a series of 
charges and firing the same, means actuated 
by the piston to set and lock the feeding and 
firing devices, and means independent of the 
piston rod to subsequently unlock the same. 
9. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with a power cylinder and a piston rod with 
suitable guides, of a rotary carrier for feeding 
successive charges to the cylinder, mechan 
ism for shifting the carrier, a lock to restrain 
such mechanism, aheated needle with carrier 
and imeans, to move the same to and from the 
explosion chamber, a lock to engage the cal 
riel when the needle is retracted, and means 
actuated by the forward movement of the pis 
ton rod for setting the needle and feeding 
mechanism, an actuating Spring Set by the 
forward movement of the piston rod, and a 
regulator to control the reaction of the same, 
with connections for subsequently releasing 
in suitable, order the feeding mechanism and 
the firing needle. 
10. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with a power cylinder and its piston rod, of 
automatic means for feeding a series of 
charges to the explosion chamber for closing 
the feed duct to such chamber after feeding 
each charge, and for firing each charge, means 
actuated by the piston to set and lock such 
automatic means, and an actuating means in 
dependent of the piston rod to subsequently 
unlock the said automatic means in Success 
ive order. 
11. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with a power cylinder and its piston rod, of 
automatic means for feeding a series of 
charges to the explosion chamber for closing 
the feed duct to such chamber after feeding 
each charge, and forfiring each charge, means 
actuated by the piston to set and lock such 
automatic means, and an actuating Spring 
compressed by the discharge movement of the 
piston rod to subsequently unlock the said 
automatic means in successive Order, With a 
fluid regulator to control the reaction of such 
actuating spring. 
12. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with a power cylinder and its piston rod, of 
automatic means for feeding a Series of 
charges and for firing the same, a lever actu 
ated by the piston rod upon its forward move 
ment to set and lock such automatic means, 
an actuating spring provided With connec 
tions to the said lever, and with connections 
to the said automatic means to release them. 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
551,036 
5 
in succession upon its reaction, and a regul 
lator or brake to control the subsequent move 
ment of the spring. 
13. In an explosion motor, the intermediate 
mechanism for transmitting the violent mo 
tion of the piston rod gradually to a rotary 
shaft, consisting of the arm Oscillated upon 
the said shaft, means for clutching the arm 
intermittingly to the shaft, a curved bearing 
bar attached tangentially to the piston rod, 
and a rider actuated by the bearing bar to 
oscillate such arm, substantially as set forth. 
14. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with a power cylinder, its piston rod and the 
rotary power shaft for transmitting the mo 
tion, of an intermediate mechanism for trans 
mitting the motion of the rod to the shaft, 
consisting of an arm oscillating upon the 
power shaft, means for automatically clutch 
ing the arm to such shaft, a curved bearing 
bar attached tangentially to the piston rod, 
and a roller riding upon the bearing bar with 
connection to the oscillating arm, Substan 
tially as herein set forth. 
15. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with a power cylinder, its piston rod, and ro 
tary power shaft for transmitting the motion, 
of the oscillating arm P', means for clutching 
it intermittingly to the shaft, the curved bear 
ing bar T attached tangentially to the rod, 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
the guide link S with fixed center S to link 
S connecting with the arm P', and the rider 
tfitted to such curved bar, substantially as 
set forth. 
16. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
with the power cylinder, of a rotary carrier 
provided with the ratchet wheelf, the series 
of charging pockets, and the series of latch 
holess, the slide I, spring i and stops, the 
lever and pawl factuated by the slide, the 
locking pin h, and the studs' arid lever k for 
actuating the same, the Whole arranged and 
operated substantially as set forth. 
17. In an explosion motor, the combination, 
With the power cylinder, of a rotary carrier 
provided with the ratchet wheelf, the series 
of charging pockets, and the series of latch 
holess, the locking pin h, with means sub 
stantially as described for retracting the same 
when the carrier is moved, and the ratchet 
pin r spring pressed toward the latch holes, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
HUGE A. KINGSTAND. 
JOHN S. SANGER. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS GORMAN, 
THOMAS S. CRANE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551136.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 551,136, 
H. F. MORSBACH. 
SKATE WITH AUTOMATIC FASTENING, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Deo, 10, 1895. 
 
titlesses: 
26 o/6%4 
2%~~2-22-era 
inventor: 
fervov c 4-6 
72 2J Azzorney.. 
69a 7teazzez u?terface 
year 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
H. F. MORSBACH. 
SKATE WITH AUTOMATIC FASTENING 
No. 55ll36. 
 
Patented Deo, 10, 1895. 
itresses: 
e21-02a2a2- 
tes 424 
Figh 
Inventor: 
tiego (7fealez/dors act 
Joar (7ersong ce,se 
J2 is Az 2or-2 eye?. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HUGO FRIEDLIEB MORSBACH, OF SOLINGEN, GERMANY. 
SKATE WITH AUTOMATIC FASTENING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551,136, dated December 10, 1895. 
Application filed June 8, 1895. Serial No. 552,182. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, HUGO FRIEDLIEBMORS 
BACH, a subject of the Emperor of Germany, 
residing at Solingen, in the Empire of Ger 
many, have invented a new and useful Skate 
with Automatic Fastening Arrangement, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The purpose of this arrangement is to se 
curely fasten the skate to the boot by down 
ward pressure of the foot. 
Figure 1. On the drawings shows the skate in 
top view, and Fig. 2 shows the same in bot 
tom view, while Figs. 3 and 4 show side views 
in two different positions. 
The skate consists of the skate iron or run 
ner A, upon which the two rests B and C for 
the toes and heel of the foot are fastened. On 
the part Care two hinges a a, in which two 
plates bb, lying one above the other, can move 
upward and downward. The hinges are so 
Wide as to admit of a lateral movement of the 
plates b b. The plates b b are of the form 
shown in Fig. 1, each having slots c, which 
are in slanting position to each other. The 
two plates b b, carrying the cheek-pieces ff 
and gg, are held together by a pin d, which 
is in the slots c c. Over the front end of the 
plates a plate h is arranged in the two slots 
ii, of which the plates b b receive the proper 
IO 
25 
guidance by the pinsk le. At the lower end 30 
of the pin d are pivoted two single-armedle 
vers l l on the right and left, and which are 
pivoted near the other end to a nut m, through 
which passes the adjustable screw n. 
If the skate in its position as shown in Fig. 
2 is brought into the position as shown in 
Fig. 1 by downward pressure of the foot, 
then the pin d in the slots c c is pushed to 
Ward the front by the levers l l turning on 
their axle O. Through the slanting position 
of the slots to each other the plates b b are 
drawn together, whereby the cheek-pieces ff 
and g g are pressed against the boot, thus 
firmly and securely fastening the skate. In 
this position the plates b b are prevented from 45 
lifting by the hook p, which is subject to the 
influence of the spring q. 
The skate can easily be set to suit any 
width of boot by the adjustable screw m. 
What I claim is- 
In a skate the combination of the two plates 
bib lying one above the other, the two levers 
ll, hinged to the nut m, the pin d moving in 
the slots c c of the plates b b, as set forth. 
HUGO FRIEDLIEB MORSBACH. 
C. REMNEY, 
K. HOLLWEG. 
Witnesses: 
35 
5O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551236.txt	E. No Model.) 
No. 551,236, 
 
J. SMITH. 
SICKLE BAR. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented DeC, l0, 1895, 
S-- '.. 
a WA222 
23-a. 
7. Diff 
Itality 
- 
- 
w 
P 
- 
ca 
I 
272 a Z 
SS 
7, IIS 
H 
| z 
2 m 
12 
A. 
a. 
4 
ATTORMEYS, 
AKCREW.G.A.H.A.M. Photo-HOWAShadNldC. 
(No Model.) 
J. SMITH, 
SICKLE BAR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 551,236, 
A 
 
Patented Dec. 10, 1895. 
1227-7. 
  
6 
 
 
 
  
  
25gga 
ffiliff 2. 
s 
San 
a 
 
 
22 
 
WITNESSES 
22 
2. 
- - - INVENTOR 
A3. 
(77. ATTORNEYS. 
ANDREW B, GRAHAM.PHOTO-triho. WASHINGTON, DC 
H 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES SMITH, OF GRANITE CANON, WYOMING. 
SCKLE BAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551,236, dated December 10, 1895. 
Application filed January 26, 1895. Serial No, 536,308, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
. 
able bearings upon the truck of the mower, 
To cult, whon, it may concern: 
and the finger-bar is raised and lowered by 
Beit known that I, JAMESSMITH, of Granite 
connecting suitable levers on the truck with, 
Cafion, in the county of Laramie and State of 
for example, an eye 14 placed upon the inner 
Wyoming, have invented a new and useful 
shoe, as shown in the drawings. 
Improvement in Sickle-Bars, of which the 
The cutter-bar C is mounted upon the fin 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
ger-bar A, and, as shown especially in Fig. 5, 
tion. 
the cutter-bar consists of a lower plate-sec 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
tion 15, which rests upon the finger-bar, an 
sickle or cutter bars for mowers; and it has 
upper plate-section 16 and a front section 17 
for its object to so construct the cutter or 
connecting the upper and lower plate-sec 
sickle bar as to materially lighten the draft 
tions, together with suitable standards or tie 
in mowing grass and halvesting grain. 
plates 18, connecting the upper and lower 
Another object of this invention is to so 
plates at the back, the tie-plates being placed 
construct the bar that it may be used as well 
at Suitable distances apart. The front plate 
for trimming hedges as for cutting grass. 
17 of the cutter-bar is made undulating or 
The invention consists in the novel con 
scalloped to correspond to the front contour 
struction and combination of the several 
of the finger-bar, as shown in Fig. 1. The 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
front plate of the cutter-bar is provided with 
and pointed out in the claims. 
a longitudinal opening 19, which extends 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
practically from one shoe to the other. The 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
Cutter-bar is pivoted or fulcrumed at the lower 
in which similar figures and letters of refer 
edge of its rear portion in the said shoes, as 
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the 
shown at 20 in Fig. 5, and in the top plate 16 
views. 
of the cutter-bar a depression or pocket 21 is 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the improved 
formed, extending longitudinally and trans 
sickle-bar. Fig. 2 is an end view thereof. 
Versely, adapted to receive a pad 22 of an ab 
Fig. 3 is a front elevation. Fig. 4 is a hori 
Sorbent material corresponding to the lower 
zontal section taken through the cutter-bar. 
pad 12, and this pocket is covered by means 
Fig. 5 is a transverse section taken Substan 
of a cap-plate 23, which extends from end to 
tially on the line 55 of Fig. 4, and Fig. 6 is a 
end of the cutter-bar, and from front to rear. 
rear elevation of the sickle-bar. 
The cutter-bar is held horizontally upon the 
In carrying out the invention the finger 
finger-bar preferably through the medium of 
bar A is provided with the usual guards 10, 
a spring-latch 24 located in the outer shoe B', 
and the front of the said finger-bar is scal 
as shown in Fig. 6, together with a latch 25, 
loped or rendered undulating, a guard being 
fulcrumed upon the Outer portion of the inner 
located at the apex of each scallop-section. 
face of the inner shoe B, and the said latch 
The finger-baris provided upon its upper sur 
is made to extend over the inner end portion of 
face with a depression forming a pocket 11, 
the cutter-bar and is held normally in clamp 
the said pocket or depression extending lon 
ing engagement with said bar by means of a 
gitudinally and transversely a major portion 
catch 26, and the catch 26 is preferably pro 
of the bar, and in this pocket 11 a pad 12 is 
vided with a guard-plate 27, extending up 
placed, made of an absorbent material, the 
Wardly from the latch, being adapted to shield 
said pad being adapted to be kept moist with 
the driving mechanism of the cutters of the 
a lubricating liquid. 
One end of the finger-bar A is secured in a 
Cutter-bar. 
In the forward portion of the cutter-bar a 
shoe B, the said shoe being adapted to be lo 
line of vertical shafts or spindles 28 is jour 
cated next to the machine or truck to which 
naled, and the said spindles or shafts 28 are 
the team is attached, and the opposite end 
located opposite the apexes or points in the 
of the finger-bar is secured to a parallel shoe 
front portion of the bar, as shown bestin Fig. 
B'. The inner shoe B is fitted with trunnions 
13 at its ends whereby it is journaled in suit-4, and at the rear of the first line of spindles 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
3 5 
SO 
 
g 
551,236 
O 
3O 
35 
49 
or shafts 28 a second line of spindles Ol' shafts 
29 is journaled in the said cutter-bar, the 
rear line of shafts 29 being between the front 
line 2S as well as to the rear of them. It will 
be understood that the shafts Ol' Spindles ex 
tend through the top and bottom plate-Sec 
tions of the cutter-bar, being kept constantly 
lubricated through the medium of the pads 
12 and 22 saturated with a lubricating com 
pound, as Show in in Fig. 5. 
Upon each shaft 2S and 29 a disk cutter is 
mounted, the said disk cutters being desig 
nated in the drawings as 30, and preferably 
all of the said cutters are provided with 
notches or recesses in their periphery, Where 
by said periphery is made up of series of wide 
teeth. 
The disk cutters in the front row Ovellap 
those in the real row; but while the front and 
rear cutters are made to revolve quite close 
together they do not touch one another, and 
thus are prevented from becoming heated. 
The cutters are likewise adapted to travel in 
opposite directions-that is, the front row of 
cutters will travel to the right and the rear 
row to the left. The front Cutters are raised 
above the rear cutters, and the said front cut 
ters are ground or sharpened upon their up 
per edges, while the lowe' or reai cutters are 
ground upon their lower edges. Thus it will 
be observed that the cutters act with relation 
to each other in like malnier as a pail of 
shears; but the fiction present in a shear 
action is not present in the Operation of the 
aforesaid cutters, since they are not actually 
brought in contact. 
The cutters are preferably secured upon 
their spindles by forning Square shoulders 
on the spindles and producing Square Open 
ings in the cutters. Each spindle 28 of the 
front row has a pinion 2S secured thereon, 
and each spindle 29 of the real' row is pro 
vided with a like pinion 29*. 
At the outer end of the cutter-bar, prefer 
ably somewhat near the rear edge, a shaft 31 
is vertically jollinaled, carrying a Sprocket 
gear 31, and the shaft 31 simply extends 
through from top to bottom of the cutter-bar, 
while at the opposite or inner end of the said 
cutter-bar a drive-shaft 32 is journaled and 
extends well upward above the top of the ca 
plate 23, being provided within the cutter 
bar with a spocket-gear 32, firmly secured 
theireon. 
The two gears 31 and 32 carry an endless 
chain belt 33, and this chain belt likewise 
meshes with the teeth of all of the pinions of 
the front, and of the rear row of cutter-shafts. 
Since the gear 31 and shaft, 31 at the outer 
end of the shoe occupy considerable room at 
this point, the outermost and last cutter will 
necessarily be smaller than the others, and 
therefore the gear upon that cutter-shaft 2S 
will be larger, as shown in Fig. 4, in order to 
have all of the cutters move at the same speed, 
and, as illustrated in Fig. 6, the gear 31 will 
be cut away or grooved on its under face to 
permit the outermost forward cutter to be of 
the largest possible diameter. 
The upper end of the shaft 32 is provided 
with two beveled gears 34 and 35 adjustable 
thereon. The gears face in opposite direc 
tions, one being located at the top and the 
other near the cap-plate 23, as shown in Fig. 
2. Only one of these geal's is brought into ac 
tion at One and the same tine. The lower 
gear 35 is held up to an engagement with a 
driving-gear 37, preferably by means of a 
latch 36, pivoted upon the cap-plate, the latch 
being made to loosely surround the shaft 32, 
and by an intervening washer hold the lower 
gear 35 up to Working position. When the 
latch is disengaged, the gear 35 is readily 
moved out of working position. The upper 
gear 34 is held upon the shaft either in Work 
ing position or Out of Working position by 
means of pins, Set-screws, or their equiva 
lents. 
The gear 37 is mounted upon a suitable 
shaft placed at right angles to the vertical 
shaft 32 and journaled in a standard 3S, erect 
ed upon the cap-plate, and the rear end of 
the shaft upon which the gear 37 is secured 
is provided with a sprocket-wheel 39, since a 
chain is employed for driving the cutters of 
the cutte-bar from the driving mechanism 
of the truck instead of the pitman ordinarily 
used, and the shaft on the truck employed to 
drive the chain, which is in driving connec 
tion with the sprocket-wheel 39, is on a true 
line with the bearings on the foot of the ma 
chine, by which the bar is raised and lowered, 
and being thus on a line the raising and low 
eling will not affect or change the length of 
the chain even when carried to a perpendicul 
lar position, so that hedge fences may be 
tiihimed and the nachine may be immedi 
ately lowered to cut the grass. 
desire it to be distinctly understood that 
if in practice it is found desirable only the 
front line of cutters may be notched and the 
ieal line hay be made of plain disks. 
The lower lubricating box or pocket 11 may 
be readily filled by releasing the cutter-bar 
from its catches and throwing it back on its 
hinges, exposing the said box, and at the 
same time the cap 23 may be removed from 
the cutter-bar and the upper box. 22 be like 
Wise replenished. 
it will be observed that by placing the shaft 
31 and the gear 31 in the cutter-bar, all of 
the cutter-gears will be acted upon alike by 
the driving-chain 33. 
By reason of the shifting device shown in 
Fig. 2 the cutters will be revolved in one di 
rection when the gear 37 is in mesh with the 
lower shifting-gear 35, and in the event the 
cutting-edges of one side of the teeth of the 
cutting-disks become dull, the edges at the 
opposite side of the teeth may be brought 
into action by simply dropping the lower gear 
35 out of mesh with the driving-gear 37 and 
75 
IO5 
IC 
9 O 
ICO 
551,236 
3 
bringing the upper gear into mesh with the 
said driving-gear. 
It will be understood that the cutters may 
have plain peripheries, and also that a differ 
ent form of reversing mechanism may be sub 
stituted for that shown in the drawings. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a sickle bar, a Series of Overlapping 
disk cutters, means for rotating adjacent cut 
ters in opposite directions and means for re 
versing the direction of rotation of the cut 
ters, whereby each of the alternate cutters is 
adapted to co-operate with either of the cut 
ters between which it is located, substantially 
as shown and described. 
2. In a sicklebar, disk cutters arranged in 
staggered order, adjoining cutters being made 
to overlap, the rear cutters being each ar 
ranged between pairs of front cutters, means 
for rotating the front and rear cutters in op 
posite directions, and means for reversing the 
rotation of the cutters, whereby the rear disks 
may each be caused to co-operate with either 
of the front disks between which it is located, 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a sickle bar, a series of disk cutters 
mounted to revolve over the guards of the 
bar, a rear series of cutters arranged between 
the forward cutters, the front and rear cut 
ters overlapping, and each rear cutter being 
arranged to co-operate with either of the front 
cutters between which it is located, one set of 
Cutters having their upper edges sharpened. 
and the other set their lower edges, gears 
connected with the various cutters, and an 
endless driving belt Operating the said gears, 
the gearing being so arranged that adjoining 
cutters will be revolved in opposite directions, 
as and for the purpose specified. 
4. In a sickle bar, the combination with a 
finger bar, and the shoes to which said finger 
bar is Secured of a cutter bar fulcrumed at 
its rear portion in the said shoes and adapted 
to rest upon the finger bar, and latches se 
cured to the said shoes and adapted to engage 
With the Cutter bar to hold it, in position, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a sickle bar, the combination with a 
finger bar, and the shoes to which said finger 
bar is secured, of a cutter bar fulcrumed in 
the said shoes at the rear of the finger bar 
and resting on said finger bar, the said cut 
ter bar being provided with a series of rotary 
Cutters and a driving mechanism therefor, 
O . 
IS 
25 
35 
55 
and means for holding the said pivoted cut 
ter bar in position on the finger bar, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. The combination, with a sicklebar and 
a guard and support therefor, of a series of 
disk cutters mounted to revolve over the 
guards of the said support, a second series of 
disk cutters located at the rear and between 
the forward series, the forward disk cutters 
being above the rear cutters and out of con 
tact there with, the several cutters being pro 
vided with toothed peripheries, the teeth hav 
ing cutting edges on both sides, gears con 
nected with the various cutters, an endless 
driving belt connected with all of the gears, 
the gearing being so arranged that adjoining 
cutters will be revolved in opposite directions, 
a driving mechanism connected with the driv 
ing belt, and mechanism, whereby the direc 
tion of rotation of the disks may be reversed, 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
7. In a sickle bar, the combination, With a 
finger bar having a pocket in its upper face 
adapted to receive a lubricating material, of 
a cutter bar pivoted at the rear of the finger 
bar and resting thereon, the said cutter bar 
being provided with series of rotary cutters 
and a driving mechanism therefor, the spin 
dles of the said cutters and driving mechan 
ism extending from top to bottom of the cut 
ter bar, the said cutter bar being provided 
upon its upper face with a receptacle for oil, 
and a cap covering the same, whereby the 
shafts in the cutter bar will be lubricated at 
top and bottom from the said receptacles or 
pockets, substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination, with a finger bar hav 
ing a pocket formed upon its upper face, and 
an absorbent material located in the pocket, 
of a cutter bar located over the finger bar 
and removable therefrom, the said cutter bar 
being provided with a series of rotary cutters 
and With a Socket upon its upper face con 
taining an absorbent material, the spindles 
of the cutters extending through to the ab 
sorbent material at the top of the cutter bar 
and at the top of the finger bar, an endless 
chain operating the disk cutters, a driving 
shaft operating the said chain, and means, 
substantially as shown and described, for ro 
tating the driving shaft with a chain, as and 
for the purpose specified. 
JAMES SMITH. 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
m 
Witnesses: 
J. D. HURD, 
ED. J. HURD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551336.txt	No. 551336, 
r 
 
BOTTLE STOPPER, 
Patented Dec. 10, 1895. 
 
 
 
AWITWESSES; 
| Wi/EN/TOR 
Nortws GaAHAM, PHOTO-uthe. WASHINGTON, DC 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERIC STANTON PERRIN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BOTTLE-STOPPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551,336, dated December 10, 1895. 
Application filed February 6, 1895, 
Serial No, 537,470, No model.) 
55 
?? 
65 
75 
To a LZ twh???, it, 7??? ????eer?: 
Be it known that I, FREDERIC STANTON 
PERRIN, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at the city of New York, in the county of 
New York and State of New York, have in 
vented a new and useful Bottle-Stopper, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to stoppers that are 
to be used in bottles, jugs, demijohns, or any 
vessel for holding liquids, which, while per 
mitting the free discharge of their contents, 
prevents the refilling thereof without destroy 
ing the effectiveness of the stopper, which is 
to be attached within the vessel. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
device of this character which may be readily 
applied to any vessel by inserting it in the 
open mouth thereof, from which it shall be 
incapable of removal, and shall, by its pres 
ence, prevent the vessel from being refilled, 
although the contents may at any time be ob 
tained by pouring them out of the vessel in 
the ordinary manner. It is my object, also, to 
provide a stopper which may be made wholly 
of glass, china, or similar material of a vitre 
Ous nature, when necessary, or Wholly or par 
tially of mineral, vegetable or animal matter, 
where it is better adapted, by which the exit 
passage therein is opened by the weight of 
the liquor and closed by the tension of the 
material used, be it mineral, vegetable, ani 
mal or a combination thereof. 
Many devices for closing vessels containing 
liquo's have been proposed with a view of 
preventing the refilling of the same; but, in 
fact, it has been always possible, with certain 
precautions, to introduce liquor. It is suffi 
cient for this purpose to incline the vessel 
within the liquor and with movements to and 
fro to force the liquid within, or it may be 
introduced by pressure. It is these defects 
which I have overcome by my invention, and 
to accomplish my object my invention con 
sists in the features of construction and the 
combination or arrangement of devices here 
inafter described and claimed, reference be 
ing made to the accompanying drawings, 
which form part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of an ordinary 
bottle containing my improved stopper. Fig. 
2 is an underneath view of the plug; Fig. 3, 
a side view; Fig. 4, a view of the valve and 
its tension-spring, and Fig. 5 a front view of 
the plug. Fig. 6 is an enlarged partial sec 
tional view of the air-tube, its cup-valve and 
the guard-cap. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts throughout the several views. 
Referring to the drawings, Fig. 1, A rep 
resents a section of a bottle, flask or other 
similar receptacle, having in its neck C the 
plug B provided with the apertures O, P and 
Q. (Better shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 5.) The 
sides L of the plug are ground off flat about 
the aperture O and have valves M pressing 
against the plug and covering the apertures. 
The valves M, small pieces of rubber, glass 
or any non-corrosive substance, are cemented 
to the flat strip N of mica or any flexible ma 
terial, and this strip is cemented to the plug 
AI at the shoulder Tin such a mannel that the 
tension of the strips press the valves against 
their seats and constitute liquor-tight covers 
for the aperture O. The plug B is rigidly 
fastened to the neck C either by cement or 
the cork bushing W in the shoulder R, and 
through its central aperture passes the taper 
ing air-tube D, which is fastened to the sides 
of the aperture Q. The air-tube D extends 
Within the bottle from its botton to a short 
distance below the top of the neck and be 
yond the top of plug B. Its lower end has a 
very small opening E which increases in size 
as it extends upward to K. At its top the air 
tube is enlarged to form a valve-seat H for 
the cup-valve J, and this enlargement is pro 
longed into two or more posts S to sustain the 
perforated disk or cap F, and prevent the cup 
valve J from moving too far from its seat H, 
within the open space I. The disk F is per 
forated with as many ZigZag holes G as possi 
ble to allow the liquor to flow out freely and 
also allow the air to enter the air-tube D at 
the opening I, and yet prevent the introduc 
tion of instruments to tamper with the valves. 
This disk F is cemented to the sides of the 
neck C, and rests upon the small posts S at 
a sufficient distance above the cup-valve J to 
allow the valve to move freely from its seat 
II, within the space I, when the bottle is in 
verted. It not only acts as a shield to the 
valves M and J but as a stop for the move 
ment of the cup-valve J. 
90 
95 
CO 
IO 
2 ? 
45 
 
2 
551336 
After the bottle is filled with its original 
contents the plug B is inserted in the neck 
and firmly secured thereto by any suitable 
means, then the air-tube Disinserted through 
the top aperture of the plug until its taper 
ing sides fill this aperture entirely, where it 
is retained by cement, or any other means, 
and made air-tight. Then the cup-valve J is 
placed upon its seat H, and the perforated 
disk F is forced down into the neck below 
where the sealing-cork will extend until it 
rests upon the studs or posts Sextending up 
ward from the enlargement of the air-tube at 
Kand is cemented to the neck of the bottle 
in any suitable manner. 
In order to be able to pour out the contents 
at will it is only necessary to tilt the bottle 
up and allow the liquor within the air-tube 
D to run down against the cup-valve J and 
force it away from its seat H and at the same 
time the liquor within the bottle will enter. 
the aperture P of the plug B around the air 
tube D and by its weight force open the valves 
M and pass out into the neck C through the 
zigzag holes G in the disk F. As the liquor 
is passing through the lower zigzag holes G, 
the air is entering the upper holes and pass 
ing through the open space I into the air-tube 
D, to replace the discharged liquor. 
If it is attempted to refill the bottle by the 
vacuum process or otherwise the first effect 
will be to force the valves tighter against 
their seats, and should an attempt be made 
by moving the bottle to and fro, within a tub 
of liquor, the liquor will enter the cup-valve 
J and cause: it to move against its seat H. 
Before this valve J reaches its seat H, it might 
be supposed that liquor will enter the air-tube 
D and rush into the bottle, but on account of 
the small aperture at the lower end E of the 
air-tube, no liquor can be introduced by such 
movements, owing to the air-pressure inside 
of the bottle. 
The cup-valve J and the small aperture E 
at the bottom of the tube D completely pre 
vent the entrance of any liquor into the bot 
tle through the air-tube D. 
By placing the valves M upon the sides of 
the plug B, at L, I utilize a greater amount 
of space within the neck and secure larger 
apertures O and P, in the plug, to allow the 
free passage of the liquor about the air-tube 
D in the aperture P and also obtain more room 
for the valve-supports N, that their action 
maybe more elastic and offer the least obstruc 
tion to the liquor while passing from the bot 
tle, and also prevent the movement of the 
valve M when shaking the bottle to introduce 
liqulOr". 
It will be understood that I can have One 
valve or more upon the plug B, and I may 
place the air-tube D without the aperture P, 
but I prefer to place it within, as shown in 
Fig. 1, as it is more symmetrical and presents 
a, better appealrance. 
In practice the air-tube D and the plug B 
may be made in one piece of glass or porce 
lain, and secured to the neck of the bottle 
at W by any suitable means to hold it firmly. 
Then the cap or guard F can be placed in its 
proper position and secured to the posts S or 
to the side of the neck by cement or otherwise. 
An important point to be noticed is that re 
lating to the tapering of the air-tube D. When 
the bottle is full of liquor the air-tube is also 
filled to the level of the liquor in the bottle, 
and as the bottle is tilted to pour out its con 
tents the liquor within the air-tube has an in 
creasing area to run through as its flow to 
ward the exit H. When this liquor has 
reached the cup-valve J, What air that may 
be in the bottle has passed up to the elevated 
bottom of the bottle and surrounds the aper 
ture E, and immediately the cup - Valve J 
leaves its seat H, by the action of gravity aided 
by the pressure of the liquor upon its sides. 
At the same time the first few drops of liquor 
that pass through the valves M form a par 
tial vacuum within the bottle, and this causes 
air to rush through the air-tube over the top 
of the flowing liquor. 
Owing to the increasing area of the tube the 
flowing liquor does not have time to fill the 
orifice and choke up the inlet before the air 
rushes in and clears the tube of the Small 
quantity of liquor that may adhere to the 
sides of the small aperture E, and opens the 
way for a continued supply of air to replace 
the discharged liquor. Not only does this ta 
pering tube aid the air-supply, but the Small 
aperture E at its lower end most effectually 
prevents the sudden introduction of liquor, 
and its larger aperture offers a more suitable 
valve-Seat for the cup-Valve J. Another im 
portant point is that of extending the air-tube 
some distance beyond the valve-plug B. By 
so doing I prevent the cup-valve J from be 
ing flooded by the liquor flowing through the 
valve M. If it were not for this it would be 
impossible for air to enter through the air 
tube D, and no liquor would flow from the 
bottle. 
It will be seen that by inverting the bottle 
the contents will readily pass through the 
stopper, as heretofore described; but that it 
will be impossible after the bottle has been 
once emptied to refill the same without break 
ing the bottle or destroying the guard cap or 
disk F. 
I am aware that modifications may be made 
in the device without departing from the 
spirit or scope of the invention. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. A stopper for bottles, flasks and like re 
ceptacles, for preventing the refilling, con 
sisting of a hollow plug with apertures upon 
its sides connecting with the central cavity, 
valves pressed against the apertures by strips 
of mica or similar non-corrosive pliable ma 
terial, a tapering air-conduit extending from 
near the bottom of the bottle through or be 
yond the plug, with a cup-valve seated in its 
upper or greater orifice, and a zigzag perfo 
I. ? 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
? ? ? 
IO 
II 5 
551,836 
3 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
tube extending from above the stopper to the 
bottom of the bottle, or nearly so, having a 
valve-seat in its upper or enlarged orifice and 
a very small aperture at its lower extremity 
to admit air within the bottle; and a ZigZag 
perforated disk attached within the neck of 
the bottle above the air-tube to prevent tam 
pering with the valves and limit the move 
ments of the air-tube valve; to prevent refill 
ing the bottle; all substantially as described. 
4. In a means for preventing the refilling 
of bottles and other containers, the combina 
tion of one or more tension-valves adapted to 
close openings in the sides of a hollow plug 
tightly secured within the neck of the bottle, 
with a tapering tubular air-conduit carrying 
a cup-shaped gravity valve in its larger Orifice 
above the hollow plug, and extending into 
the bottle to within a short distance of its 
bottom, and a plate with zigzag perforations 
rigidly secured within the neck of the bottle, 
above the gravity valve, to limit the valve's 
movements and prevent the introduction of 
instruments for opening the valves, while per 
mitting the pouring out of the contents of the 
bottle; as described. 
In witness whereof Ihave hereunto attached 
my signature, in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses, this 4th day of February, 1895. 
Witnesses: 
FREDERIC STANTON PERRIN. 
GEORGE W. WHITTEMORE, 
WALTER II. EFREEMAN. 
? ? 
rated disk attached in the neck of the bottle, 
above the cup-valve, limiting the movements 
of said valve and preventing the introduction 
of instruments to tamper with the stopper and 
said valves; substantially as described. 
2. A stopper for bottles, flasks, and like re 
ceptacles, for preventing the refiling, con 
sisting of a plug, held tightly in the neck, 
having a central cavity extending partially 
through it; apertures connecting with the cen 
tral cavity and opening upon the longitudi 
nal outside surfaces of the plug; one or more 
non-corrosive valves pressed against the out 
side surfaces by the tension of the material 
supporting the valves, and covering the aper 
tures; a prolongation of the central cavity 
through the plug; a tapering air-conduit, ex 
tending from the bottom of the receptacle and 
passing through the central cavity and its 
prolongation, beyond the plug and its valves, 
and fitting tight within the prolonged cavity; 
a cup-shaped valve seated in the top or larger 
orifice of the air-conduit; and a disk with zig 
Zag perforations secured in the neck above 
the orifice of the air-conduit to limit the move 
ments of the cup-shaped valve, and to pre 
vent the tampering with the valves; all sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination with a bottle, of a stop 
per held in its neck provided with one or more 
Valve-Seats On its Outer sides, One Or more 
valves upon the seats and adapted to close 
against the same by the tension of the mate 
rial supporting the valves, of a tapering air 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551436.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 551,436, 
1-Q 
 
Sheets-Sheet i. 
T. DUNCAN, 
ELECTRIC METER, 
Patented Deo, 17, 1895. 
Fig. 1 
50 AMPERE 
I 
000 
QG 
lo 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RECORDING 
AMPERE HOUR YETER 
A a Estees 
y 
Estasis 
El 
E. 
s 
28)ilt-1 c33ao 
-4/7.wu 
/6 Aaaa.co/ 
3K-2 c4-------- 341 uc. 11 tot 
)f-r 46.4 (o 
sy fis &ltiovvic 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.PHOTO-inho washington, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
T. DUN CAN 
ELECTRIC METER, 
7. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
28) it 1.cssos 
et4/ue. 
47%.----- ol 
534 ?o eltovic 3-he 
341.u.c. v. to 
M 
1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 551,436. 
T. DUNCAN. 
ELECTRIC METER, 
7. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Deo, 17, 1895. 
 
   
 
(H3 
OONOOOO 
33/ Y2 
23.4 
 
 
f3 
41. 
 
28itvesses 
e/4/hus 
y & date 
2\) 
3f. 
33 ?ula elttovacy 3/2. 
3v-u.c. vitov 
-or 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 551,436, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
T. DUN CAN. 
ELECTRIC METER. 
Patented Dec. 17, 1895. 
2.-- C4-e--e- 34uc14 bot 
f/2. 46 ye 
33 this 8ttov vic 
 
Aliote 3. GRAHAM. Photo-THo Washigoric 
No Model.) 
T. DUN CAN. 
ELECTRIC METER, 
7. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 551,436, 
Patented Dec. 17, 1895. 
98tv-coco 
e/44aca 
J.A.-------, -)-----e- 31 verto 
asy fia attorney Jr. 16-cy co 
 
aNae s.GRAAM.P3-ric, washes 
(No Model.) 
T. DUNCAN, 
ELECTRIC METER, 
Sheets-Sheet, 6. 
N0, 551,436, 
Patented Dec. 17, 1895. 
At 18 
 
6 
O-40)4 
H 
 
ga 
sis 
i 
e 
A. 
a 
2 
 
H 6 
Hall "(eIC) 
S& 40 
g7 
s 
A. 
e 
4 
A 23 
H 
-- 
- 
4. 
III 
6A. 
iIII it 
e 
 
E. 
2. 
Af 
i 22 
- 
4. 
Si. 
4. 
ca A 
Xid-11 go as 
c/4.//ze 
% - a v-e-e au- 3v-uc, viboz 
24/2- 4-ft--. Co 
sy %. &lttovic. 
 
asRay 8.GAA-To...Asists,c 
(No Model.) 
, DUN CAN. 
ELECTRIC METER, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 7, 
No. 551,436, 
Patented Dec. 17, 1895, 
2Witvicesco 
e/z/hw. 
y  laz 
% - a ve-cov 341.u.c.14 Eot 
53 (wo &ltov ve 2/r- 46-7- 
 
ANS B. GRAHAntrasouTHowAshington, oc 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS DUNCAN, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIANA. 
ELECTRIC METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551 486, dated December 17, 1895. 
Application filed July 11, 1895, Serial No. 555,638, (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all, Luhon, it inay concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS DUNCAN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Fort 
Wayne, in the county of Allen, in the State 
of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Electric Meters, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of me 
ters known as induction motor-meters, for 
measuring or integrating the number of coul 
lombs consumed or used on alternating-cur 
rent systems of distribution. Its object is to 
overcome a defect that is present in all meters 
known to me of this type at the present time. 
This defect is the dissipation of too much en 
ergy as CR loss in the series field-coils which 
usually carry the current to be measured. 
In my improvement I have shown a method 
of obtaining a torque equal to the best meter 
upon the market of this induction type, and 
only use about one-half the length of wire 
and one-half the number of turns in the se 
ries coils to accomplish it, thereby reducing 
the loss in the meter to the smallest possible 
an Oulnt. 
My improvement, also reduces the choke or 
impedance set up in the said series field-coils. 
The reduction of this impedance in said se 
ries coils will prove valuable by its allowing 
the incandescence of the lamps to remain con 
stant, and not dim them down as the meter 
is loaded, as is too often the case with other 
meters. Since this impedance varies directly 
as the current and as the square of the num 
ber of turns in the series coils, it is at once 
evident that its influence as compared with 
other meters is negligibie when the number 
of turns have been reduced to one-half. 
I also find that my improvement eliminates 
the humming noise so troublesome with al 
tel'nating-current meter's, being a fault, that 
has caused central-station men to remove me 
ters from private dwellings in many cases. 
This reduction of noise is due to the density 
of field-flux being only one-half that of any 
other meter, or in other words, my improved 
metel when upon full load has only the same 
density of flux as the best induction-meter 
upon the market at one-half load. 
Figures 1 to 40, inclusive, serve to show 
the manner in which I carry out my inven 
tion, and in which similar characters refer to 
similar parts throughout the Several sheets. 
Fig. 1 is a front elevation of my improved 
meter, while Fig. 2 shows the same in sectioja, 
with another sectional plan view shown in 
Fig. 3. 
Figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, and 21 illustrate some of 
the various methods of connecting and oper 
ating my improvement. 
Figs. 22 and 23 show 
a disk employed in lieu of a cylindrical arma 
ture. Fig. 25 shows a cylindrical arnature 
in the form of an inverted cup, with a sec 
tional view of same shown in Fig. 26. Figs. 
27 and 33 show another form of cylinder which 
is provided with a spider 59. 
Fig. 24 is a side 
elevation, and Fig. 28 a plan view, of the di 
verter. Figs. 29, 30, 31, and 32 show various 
forms of the sheet-iron punchings which may 
be used in building up the core of the di 
verter 40. The recess upon the periphery of 
the hole at the center and into which a pin 
fits is to prevent slipping of the diverter 
when in place upon the upright tube which 
carries said pin and connects it with the lever 
arm. Fig. 30 is a side view of the stamping 
shown in Fig. 29. Figs. 34 and 35 show the 
jewel post or stud upon which rests the spin 
dle of the meter. Figs. 36 and 37 are views 
of the clamp used to hold the series coils in 
position. Fig. 38 shows a form of armature 
which consists of a spiral of iron wire 44 
placed upon the bent arms of a spider 43, 
while Fig. 39 show's rings of the same metal 
placed upon the spider or vertically-support 
ing arms of same. Fig. 40 is a series coil in 
section showing the form of winding which 
I have found to give the best result. 
The principal elements employed in the 
construction of my improved meter are a se 
ries coil or coils of insulated wire connected 
in the main circuit and through which the 
amain portion or all of the current passes for 
the translating devices; a diverter which con 
sists of one or more coils of finer wire wound 
upon a laminated iron core and placed within 
the field of said series coil or coils, and hav 
ing the terminals or ends of its coil connected 
in shunt to the terminals of the said series 
or thick-wire coils; a cylindrical armature 
mounted upon a suitable spindle and revolu 
ble between the said series coils and diverter; 
3 5 
45 
90 
95 
O 
2 
551,436 
; 
: IO 
. 
- 
- 
a winged fan secured to the same spindle as 
the revoluble armature, and a registering 
train for recording the number of revolu 
tions made by the said armature. 
In constructing my improved meter. I em 
ploy a cast base 31, which is provided with 
strengthening-ribs 2S and 29, a boss 20 for 
supporting the jewel-post 57, the lugs 56 and 
the back 9. Resting upon this base is also a 
cast arch 5, which is secured upon bosses by 
the screw's 52. This arch carries upon its two 
brackets 14 a cast part 11 for supporting the 
series coils and diverter, a bearing at the top 
into which the upper end of the spindle en 
ters, and the registering train or dial. The 
thick-wire or series coils are shown to be con 
nected in multiple, Fig. 3, and their terminals 
7 and 24 secured to the binding - posts 37, 
which also comprise the clamping-plate: 36 
and the screw's 34 for tightening said coil-ter 
minals between the parts 36 and 37. The 
connections with the circuit are made through. 
the base of the meter and enter the hole 54 of 
the binding-post, in which the leads are se 
cured by the screws. 34. These binding-posts 
are insulated from the back 9 by the blocks 
of porcelain 8, and are screwed thereto by the 
screws 38. The heads of these screws are 
counter'sunk to preveat their touching the 
back 9. The porcelain blocks S are screwed 
to the back 9 with the screws 39, which must 
also be countersunk or have a piece of mica 
cemented upon their heads to prevent their 
making contact with the binding-post 37. 
Underneath these binding-posts is placed a 
punched sheet of insulating material 35, and 
having a hole through which the inleading 
wire from the circuit passes, which prevents 
it from coming in contact with the base. This 
insulating-punching is screwed to the base 
with the screw 46. 
The series coils 4 are secured to the cast. 
ing 11 by the punched clamps 21, with their 
upright gripping extensions 26, which hold the 
coils firmly in place. The slot 27 in this clamp 
allows the coils to be adjusted to the proper 
position when they are rigidly fastened to the 
bosses 23 of the casting 11 by the set-screws 
and Washel's 22. 
The armature 6 which is located within the 
series coils 4 is mounted upon the spindle3, 
said spindle resting upon the jeweled bearing 
58, which is at the top of the stud 57 and 
placed within the cap 17, which prevents the 
entrance of dust, as well as serving to raise 
said spindle up out of the said jewel when not 
in use. The four-winged fan 13 is of the or 
dinary construction with the exception of the 
beveled part 16 which is for the cap 17 to en 
gage with for raising the spindle. The spiral 
spring 18 is to keep the cap in any position 
in which it may be placed upon the threaded 
part on top of the post 57 and upon which it 
tlinS. 
The space 53 which is directly underneath 
the jewel-post 57 is for filling with wax or 
other suitable material to prevent customers 
from tampering with said post. After ad 
justing the jewel-post it is tightened in the 
boss 20 with the jam-niut 19. 
The lugs 56 are provided with suitable holes 
30 for securing the meter to its support when 
being installed. 
For transmitting the revolutions of the 
spindle to the registering-train 2 a Worm 51 
is used which meshes into the Worm-wheel 50. 
The jam-nut 49 holds the upper bearing 48 
in the cast arch 5. 
The diverter 40 which is placed within the 
armature 6 is mounted upon a tube 25 which 
is soldered to the lever-arm 10 and adjustable 
for varying the angle of the diverter. When 
the proper angle has been obtained this lever 
arm is screwed fast to the extension 33 With 
the set-screw and washer 12. 
In order that 
the diverter and its tube which connects it 
with the lever-arm for adjustment may be 
kept in a vertical position, a second tube 55 
is used and which is soldered or otherwise . 
suitably secured to the cast plate or support 
11. This tube extends upward into the di 
verter and makes an excellent bearing upon 
which to adjust it until the requisite speed 
or torque has been obtained by varying the 
angle of the lever-arm 10 which controls it. 
The registering-train 2 may be made to read 
in either lamp-hours or ampere-hours, 
Said 
train has two pins 1 which extend out from 
the face of the dial to about the same dis 
tance as the hands or pointers, to prevent the 
cover of the meter from striking and bending 
said pointers, which often results in their 
stopping the meter, this being a source of con 
siderable annoyance in handling a great many 
meters. 
Fig. 6 shows the method of connecting the 
series coils 4 in the main circuit C and b, the 
current being received from the transformer 
g and feeding the lamps e. The diverter 40 
in this figure is shown to be at about an an 
gle of thirty degrees, but gives the best re 
sults when said angle is forty-five degrees. 
This diverter consists of two coils of insul 
lated wire, one placed upon each end of the 
laminated iron core 40, and connected in Se 
ries with each other, the remaining or Outer 
terminals being connected in shunt or paral 
lel to the series field or thick-wire coils 4. 
When an impulse of current comes from the 
transformerg, it is divided, the greater part 
flowing through the series coils 4 and the re 
mainder through the diverter-coils. Since 
there is practically no impedance in the Series 
coils 4, as hereinbefore mentioned, the flow 
of current from g will be instantaneous or in 
step with the electromotive force; but the cur 
rent which traverses the diverter-coils will 
lag behind the current in the coils 4, thereby 
producing a difference of phase betweenthese 
two fields which causes the aluminum cylin 
der or closed secondary 6 to revolve in a di 
rection which is counter-clockwise, due to the 
well-known shifting-field effect. This would 
also be true if the iron core was removed 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
. 
. 
. 
. 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
551,436 
& . 
from these diverter-coils and placed in a sepa 
rate coil in series with them, so as to give this 
diverter-circuit the necessary lag or impe 
dance; but by so doing the speed would be, 
very perceptibly reduced; but by using the 
iron core it develops another force which is 
added to that produced by the aforemen 
tioned shifting-field effect-viz., a repulsive 
force set up between the series coils 4 and 
the aluminum drum 6 which drives or repels 
said drum around in the same direction as that 
in which the shifting-field drives it, thereby 
increasing the efficiency to a very percepti 
ble degree. This repelling force is estab 
lished by the flux from the coils 4 cutting 
obliquely through the aluminum drum 6 in 
its path through said iron core of the diver 
ter, causing it to revolve in the manner 
stated. When the flux of the Series or thick 
wire field passes through the coils of the di 
verter, it also develops a secondary current 
in these coils, which will be in step with and 
have the same direction of flow as the current 
shunted from the terminals of the coils 4 on 
the side of the circuit Ct. The torque is zero 
when the diverter is in the same axial plane 
as the series coils and at a maximum when 
at an angle of forty-five degrees. If moved 
around to ninety degrees, it still rotates, but 
with diminished speed, due to the repulsive 
force between the series coils 4 and the closed 
secondary 6, having disappeared. For this 
reason it gives the best results when the di 
verter is at the angle of forty-five degrees, 
since the repelling force moves toward the 
axis of rotation when the angle is varied on 
either side of forty-five degrees, being ex 
actly through the center when at zero and 
ninety degrees. Another reason why the 
torque is reduced when the diverter stands 
at right angles is that the diverter-coils are 
not cut by the series field-flux, therefore do 
not have the secondary current induced in 
them which works in conjunction with the 
current derived from the terminals of the 
series coils 4. 
Fig. 7 shows the same arrangement of the 
coils 4, the diverter-terminals being connected 
or shunted around only one of the series coils. 
Fig. 8 is similar to Fig. 6 in that its diverter 
terminals are connected to the terminals of 
the coils 4, but has also another wire connect 
ing the center of said diverter-coils with the 
center of the series coils in the manner shown. 
This arrangement is for balancing the forces 
acting upon the drum 6, in case that either 
the two coils 4 or the diverter-coils respect 
ively should happen to have or acquire a dif 
ferent impeditive value from each other, 
which would produce resulting complex shift 
ing fields that might interfere with the regul 
lation and accuracy of the device as a meas 
uring-instrument. 
In Fig. 9 the series coils 4 are connected in 
multiple to each other, as are also the termi 
has of the diverter-coils. 
Fig. 10 has an impedance-coil connected 
3 5 
45 
 
7 O 
5 
CC 
in series with the diverter-coils for varying 
the speed of the armature by the adjustment 
of the iron core contained and shown. Within 
the coil or winding surrounding it. 
I have 
also made use of this arrangement in meas 
uring the watts consumed by connecting One 
of the terminals of this diverter-circuit to the 
other or b side of the mains. Finding that 
the best results are obtained when the l'esist 
ance of these diverter-coils and their impe 
dance bear a certain relation to each other I 
use an adjustable resistanced in series with 
them, as shown in Fig. 11, also a combina 
tion of both the said resistanced and the in 
pedance-coil c of Fig. 10. 
In Fig. 12 is shown one of the diverter 
coils connected in series with a variable re 
sistance d, while the other is connected or 
shunted around only one of the coils 4. 
Fig. 13 is similar to Fig. 7 with the excep 
tion of showing the series coils in multiple to 
each other. 
For the purpose of overcoming the friction 
of the moving parts of the meter I have used 
the method shown in Fig. 14, in which a Sup 
plemental coil 4* is used to produce an initial 
field or torque. This coil or supplemental 
exciting-field is connected in series with a 
non-inductive resistanced and the remaining 
terminals connected to the mains C, and b in 
multiple, as shown. It is necessary for the 
successful operation of the meter that there 
be little or no self-induction in this Supple 
mental coil 4. 
Fig. 15 shows another method of connect 
ing the diverter 40 by shunting the termi 
nails of one of the coils around the series 
field-coils, while the remaining coil is placed 
in series with a variable reactive coil c, the 
ends being connected across the mains C, and 
b. By varying the amount of impedance in 
the coil c the speed of the cylinder 6 is ad 
justed until it is correct, thereby making this 
arrangement very simple and effective in cali 
brating the meter. 
Fig. 16 is much similar to Fig. 15, but has 
added the supplementary exciting-coil 4' of 
Fig. 14. The adjusting of C may be accom 
plished by either moving the core in or out. 
For measuring the output of central sta 
tions the series coils may be connected in the 
main line, as shown in Fig. 17, between the 
dynamo g and the transformers or other 
translating devices e. 
Fig. 18 shows the diverter-coils at rightan 
gles and where only the shifting field afore 
mentioned causes the aluminunn drum or cy 
lindrical secondary 6 to rotate. However, if 
I employ an iron cylinder with the series 
coils and diverter, as shown, obtain the best 
torque with this magnetic metal at this angle. 
Another distinction between the two arma 
tures is that they will revolve in opposite di 
rections. This is due to the poles of the two 
armatures differing in the following manner: 
When an iron armature or cylinder is used, 
its induced magnetic poles will be opposite 
IC5 
O 
I 25 
. 4 
551,436 
7 O 
. 
. 
. 
75 - 
so 
. 
ICC 
O 
25 
35 
9 O. 
O 
15 
in sign to that of the poles producing - or in 
bination no metallic: connections with the 
The coils 
ducing them, while if a cylinder of non-mag 
coils 4 or lines a, and b are used. 
of the diverter 40 are connected in series with 
netic metal-Such as copper, aluminum, or 
the coils 4, all three of which act as a single . 
silver-be used the induced poles which re 
closed secondary circuit, through the adjust 
Sult from the flow of secondary currents de 
veloped in the cylinder will have signs simi 
able resistance cl. In Fig. 4 these coils 4 
lar to those of the magnetic poles which de 
and those of the diverter 40 have their ter 
veloped these secondary currents and of which 
minals shunted around the coils 4, and may 
be connected in series with the impedance C. 
they are the result, thereby setting up a re 
if necessary, as shown by the dotted lines. 
pulsive force between the induced current 
The arrangement of coils shown in Fig. 18. 
poles and their inducing-poles, in contradis 
I find to workwell with the armatures shown 
tinction from the attractive' force dis 
in Figs. 38 and 39. 
played between the direct-induced mag 
One of the improved mechanical features 
netic poles in the iron cylinder and said in 
dulcing-poles, they being opposite in sign. of my invention is in the construction of the 
jewel-post, Fig. 35, which consists in having 
Therefore, it is very evident that if rotation 
a separable part 58 in which is set the jewel, 
is produced in one direction with an alumi 
and can be screwed in or out of the stud 57 
num armature it will be reversed if an iron. 
very easily. This will fill along-felt want to . 
one is substituted. Notwithstanding thefore 
2O going, the iron cylinder can be made to re 
users of electric meters who have to change 
damaged jewels very often, either on account 
volve in the same direction as the aluminum 
of their wearing out or cracking in handling. 
one by reversing the terminal connections of 
If a new jewel is to be inserted in a meter, 
the diverter-coils, thus changing the direc 
all that is necessary is to loosen the jam-laut 
tion of the current through them from the 
19, (see Fig. 2,) holding it with the spring 18 
line Ct at the terminals of the cois 4... I have 
and cap 17 between the fingers and thumb, 
also used this form for measuring the watts 
expended in single-phase alternating-current 
when the post 57 may be easily removed with: 
work by placing the terminals of the diverter 
a screwdriver from the bottom at the recess 95 
53. After removal, the setting 58 can be ex 
40 across the mains a and b and subjecting 
changed for a new one and returned in a few 
them to the drop of same, thereby represent 
sing the electromotive force by the field pro 
In Olments, 
Fig. 40 represents in section the form of 
duced. In its application to this use I em 
ploy a reactive coil c of any suitable form to - 
coil with which I am enabled to obtain the 
obtain the proper phase and speed. 
It is Wound so that the num 
best results. 
In two 
ber of turns per layer is equal to the number 
phase work I have also used this form by 
of layers, thereby giving a square section or 
passing the currents flowing in the common 
that of a rectangle with all its sides equal, as 
return through the coils 4 and joining the 
shown. It will be noted that in Figs. 1, 2, 
terminals of the diverter-coils to the Outer 
and 3 the field-coils 4 have only sixteen turns, 
leads of the system, with a variable resistance 
this being a much lower number than that 
in series there with to determine the speed. 
used by any other meter of equal capacity 
It is not necessary that the iron core be used 
in two-phase work, since the angle of lag be 
now known to me at the present time. The 
cover which fits upon the meter fits tightly 
tween this diverter and the series coils is es 
tablished and maintained at ninety degrees by 
around the outside of the rib 29 and is fas 
the generator. 
tened upon the lower side of the base 31 by a 
Fig. 19 has one of the diverter-coils closed 
suitable nut which is screwed to the exten 
sion of the cover that passes through the hole 
upon itself, the other being connected in the 
41 in the front part of the meter-base. 
usual manner. 
My improvement also includes the manner 
Fig. 20 shows a condenserf and impedance 
of proportioning the axiallength of the series 
coil cin series with the coils upon the diverter 
coils 4, which consists of making or adjusting 
40, while in Fig. 21 a variable resistance d is 
them so that their greatest axial length will 
used in combination with the condenserfin 
be equal to the outside diameter of the cylin 
stead of a reactive coil c, as in Fig. 20. 
der, when the records of the meter follow an 
I do not wish to be understood as limiting 
absolutely-straight line law. This fact, to 
myself to the methods of applying condensers 
my knowledge, has never before been made 
and impedance-coils as herein shown or de 
known or applied in practice, and is one of 
scribed, as other methods are well known to 
most importance in the construction of elec 
those versed in the art. 
tric meters, since it has been impossible to 
Fig. 22 shows an aluminum disk 6 mount 
produce them so that their rate of rotation 
ed so as to rotate between the series coils 4, 
would vary in absolutely the same ratio as 
the upper of which has a laminated iron core 
the current passing through them, but would 
placed within it. 
vary say two per cent. fast on One load, three 
In Fig. 23 the lower coil is in series with 
per cent. slow on some other load and possi 
the main feeder, the upper one being closed 
bly four per cent. fast again on another. 
upon itself. 
Another method of obtaining rotation of 
the drum 6 is shown in Fig. 5. In this com 
What I claim is 
1. The combination with an electric meter' 
5 O 
45 
55 
551,436 
5 
5 
IC 
3O 
3 5 
AO 
45 
of a vertical spindle carrying an armature 
and retarding fans, a vertical post adjustable 
in its bearing and having a jewel setting in 
a removable or separable part at its upper 
end upon which the said spindle rotates, and 
a cup shaped nut Surmounting or covering 
said jewel and adjustable upon the said ver 
tical post for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination with an electric meter, 
of a separable jewel setting 58, a jewel post 
or stud provided at its upper end with an ad 
justable inverted cup shaped nut 17, having 
a hole 60 on top through which the spindle 
passes, and mounted upon a suitable threaded 
portion of said stud, so that by raising it, it 
engages with the lower end of the spindle, 
thereby lifting it up out ofthe jewel in the said 
separable part 58 for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination with an electric meter, 
of a jewel post or stud 57, having a spiral 
spring 18 which presses against the cup nut 
17 on top, and preventing it from moving 
when subjected to any vibration after being 
set or adjusted as herein set forth. 
4. The combination with the field coils of 
an electric meter, of the punching, which con 
sists of the extension fingers 26 for gripping 
said coils, and the slot 27 for adjusting said 
coils as herein set forth. 
5. The combination with the motive part of 
an electric meter, for alternating currents, of 
a diverter consisting of a core of laminated 
sheet iron or steel, having at its center a hole 
through Which passes the spindle, and pro 
vided With a coil of insulated wire at each 
end or pole as herein shown and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
6. The combination with an electric meter, 
of a diverter core built up from thin sheet 
iron punchings, and having a recess upon the 
periphery of the hole at its center into which 
fits a suitable pin or rod to prevent the di 
verter from turning as herein set forth. 
7. In an electric meter the combination of 
the diverter coils 40, the energizing coils 4, the 
section of whose winding is that of a square 
or rectangle having all four sides of equal 
length and a vertical shaft passing between 
said coils which carries a closed revoluble cy 
f 
5 5 
So 
lindrical secondary armature of aluminum 
which is acted upon by the magnetism of said 
coils, and a retarding device for opposing the 
motion produced by said cylinder as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
8. The combination in an electric meter of 
the Series energizing coils 4, the section of 
whose winding is square or that of a rectan 
gle having all four sides equal in length, the 
diverter coils, an armature mounted upon a 
vertical spindle and revoluble there with and 
having a diameter equal in length to that of 
the axis of said energizing coils for the pur 
pose set forth: a winged fan of aluminum 
mounted upon the same spindle as the said 
armature, and a registering train for indicat 
ing the amount of current or energy used. 
9. In an electric meter for alternate cur 
rents, the combination with the motive part, 
of the series or energizing coils 4, approach 
ing from opposite sides the cylindrical arma 
ture 6 within which is a diverter 40 and ad 
justable concentrically there with, and an en 
ergizing circuit C. b as herein shown and for 
the purpose set forth. 
10. The combination in an electric meter 
for alternating currents of the inducing coils 
4, the armature 6 revoluble between said coils 
4, the diverter coils 40, and animpedance coil, 
which is connected in series with said di 
verter coils, the remaining terminals being 
shunted around the coils 4 as set forth. 
11. In an electric meterfor alternating cur 
rents, the combination with the vertical spin 
dle, of an aluminum drum or cylinder, and 
two sets of magnetizing coils; said cylinder 
being revoluble between said coils and closely 
embraced by Same, so that all the flux gen 
erated by these two coils, 4 and 40 will effi 
ciently cut said drum for the purpose set 
forth. 
Signed by me, at Fort Wayne, Allen county, 
State of Indiana, this 6th day of July, A. D. 
1895. 
THOMAS DUN CAN. 
Witnesses: 
ELTON J. KING, 
BURLEIGH CURRIER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551536.txt	(No Model.) 
F, C, ESMOND. 
CLOSED CONDUITELECTRIC RAILWAY SYSTEM. 
No. 551,536, 
Patented Dee, 17, 1895, 
Fig. 
Witnesses- 
43&Cleanua dely. 
/3%2%.e. 
INve Tor 
full-cek C. 
i - '" 
 
AERW s.GRAAM. Photo-TOWAS NGO.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK. C. ESMOND, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO TIIE 
ESMOND ELECTRIC TRACTION COMPANY, OF WEST VIRGINIA. 
CO SED CON DUT ELECTRIC RALWAY SYSTEV. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551,586, dated December 17, 1895. 
Application filed April 26, 1895, Serial No. 547,230. (No model.) 
O 
AO 
- 
fication. 
To all who, it nuclf concei'i. 
Beit known that I, FREDERICK C. ESMOND, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Brooklyn, county of Kings, State of New York, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Closed-Conduit Electric-Rail 
way Systems, of which the following is a speci 
My present invention relates to an electric 
railway system in which there are exposed 
working conductor sections or points which 
are normally disconnected from the supply 
conductor or feeders, but are brought into 
electrical connection there with by electro 
magnetically - operated switches whenever a 
car happens to be over or near a given sec 
tion or sections. Railways of this general 
description are well known in the art, but 
have not heretofore been adopted in practical 
commercial use. The chief difficulty has been 
in seculing reliable means of making the nec 
essary temporary connection between the 
Working sections and the supply-conductor, so 
that on the one hand there will be no break 
in the motor-circuit through failure of the 
switches to work, and on the other hand no 
failure to disconnect the sections, so as to 
leave them electrically dead after the car has 
passed. 
The present invention provides certain 
novel features which I have designed in the 
belief that the system will operate satisfac 
torily in actual service. The system will be 
explained and the invention defined herein 
after. I may say, however, briefly, that the 
working conductor-sections are divided into 
sets of three, preferably arranged one after 
the other in the direction of the line of travel. 
A switch is provided for each set of sections 
and an electromagnet for connecting the sec 
tions with the supply-conductor and main 
taining the connection during the proper in 
terval, while a special arrangement of col 
lector's on the car forms a branch circuit 
through the magnet of an advance set of sec 
tions, so as to close the switches successively 
and insure the intended operation of the 
system. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
illustrates a railway system in diagram. Figs. 
2 and 3 similarly illustrate somewhat modi 
fied forms of the invention, and Fig. 4 illus 
trates diagrammatically the way in which the 
switch-boxes are arranged with reference to 
the track. 
Referring first to Fig. 1, A is a supply-con 
ductor or feeder on which the desired poten 
tial is maintained by the generators at the 
station. The Supply-conductor may be insu 
lated and located in any desired manner and 
at any convenient distance from the track. 
Working conductor - sections are provided 
which ordinarily, in a street-railway, will be 
exposed on the surface of the street, though 
they may be arranged in a number of differ 
ent ways known in the art. The sections are 
arranged in sets of three. The sections of 
one such set are marked in the drawings a, b 
c, while the sections of an adjacent set are 
marked a U' c'. Current passes from the 
working sections to the motor M and returns, 
as illustrated, through the car-wheels B and 
The return-circuit is therefore like . 
rails R. 
that of the ordinary single-trolley system: 
but this is not essential to the invention, and 
may be formed in a variety of other ways. 
Switches S S are provided, one for each sec 
tion, and adapted to connect the Working sec 
tions with the supply-conductor when closed 
and to disconnect them when open, as will be 
understood. The switches normally stand 
under the influence of gravity, or a springs, in 
the position shown at S" with the working sec 
tions disconnected from the supply-conduc 
tor. When the switch is closed, circuit to the 
working sections is established through a con 
tact t. For each set of sections there is an elec 
tromagnet n n', having a winding connected 
at one end to the central conductor-section of 
each set, as at U' and at the other terminal 
joined to the remaining sections of the set, as, 
for example, C. c. A special arrangement of 
collectors is used on the car for connecting 
the working sections with the motor, which, 
as will be hereinafter explained, forms the 
necessary circuit through the magnet of an 
advance set of Working sections, so as to close 
the line-switches at the propel time. In re 
ality the parts used for this purpose consti 
tute a single collector connected to one pole 
of the motor, but for convenience in defini 
tion and in explaining the invention. I de 
o 
90 
CO 
. 
. . 
. 
- 
ra 
- 
2 
551,536 
scribe them as double collectors, of which one 
comprises the rollers or slidel's DD", so spaced 
that when the parts are in the position seen 
in Fig. 1 they bridge the adjacent end sec 
tions c a' of two adjacent sets of Working sec 
tions. The other collector, or other part of 
the double collector E. E", bridges under the 
same conditions the central sections b b' of 
the like sets of sections. The parts are shown 
in Fig. 1 in the position which they occupy 
just after the circuit is completed through 
the magnet 
of an advance set of sections, 
though the corresponding switch S is shown 
open in order that it may be better contrasted 
with the showing at S. In this position the 
current is fed from the supply - conductor 
through the switch S, and then divides through 
lmultiple paths of substantially equal resist 
ance leading to the motor. One path may be 
traced through the magnet m, section lb and 
collector E. The other path passes through 
the remaining three working sections on 
which rest the rollers D D, E in series, in 
cluding also the magnet m between the work 
ing sections at l'. The result will be to close 
the switch. S. The collectors DD" are shown 
connected to the motor through a switch S 
and a l'esistance of comparatively small 
amount 7", preferably about equal to the re 
sistance of one of the magnets. As soon as 
the switch S is closed, the line-current will 
be fed to the motor through it, and in pass 
ing through the magnet in the switch will be 
maintained closed until the collectors leave 
the Section b'. Before this happens, however, 
as Will be understood, still another switch 
will have been thrown in the manner already 
explained. 
For closing the line-switches at any time, 
as, for example, when the main circuit has 
been broken so as to de-energize the mag 
nets, a storage-battery H or other source of 
electromotive force is usually carried on the 
car. The switch S is arranged to close the 
circuit of the battery through the collectors 
D D' joined to one terminal and the collec 
tors E E to the other terminal. The battery 
may be charged when necessary by the line 
Current. 
The modification in Fig. 2 demands only 
brief explanation, since it corresponds in all 
respects with Fig. 1, except that the working 
conductors C. l c, &c., are shown as short 
contact-points which will be mounted on 
Switch-boxes along the line of travel, set the 
necessary interval apart. The arrangement 
of the pick-up magnets and switches is the 
Same as before. The collectors are formed of 
sections of Some considerable length as com 
pared With those in Fig. 1, and as indicated 
in dotted lines I) D' may form a single sec 
tion. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 3 there is 
present the same arrangement of working 
Sections divided into sets a, b c, a b' c', and 
collector-bars, as shown in Fig. 2. In this 
case, however, one terminal of the magnets 
I 
O 
5 
2 
O 
25 
45 
5 
5 
Go 
6 5 
is connected to the end section of each set, as 
at c, while the section b is connected to all 
intermediate point in the coil. With the 
parts as shown, with the switch S closed, the 
main circuit divides as before, one path in 
cluding a portion of coil in, contact-point , 
contact-point b', a part of coil na', contact 
point a', and to the motor. The other path 
includes the whole of magnet in, contact 
point c, and to the motor. In this case the 
resistance of the magnets is divided substan 
tially equally between the two paths, as in 
Fig. 1, though in a somewhat different man 
ner. This change is the only material diffel 
ence from the modification of Fig. 1, and the 
operation will be readily understood. 
: In Fig. 4 the rails R of a double-track road 
are shown. The supply-conductor A is ar 
ranged between the tracks and at the proper 
intervals are switch-boxes P, each of which 
will contain one switch and magnet for a sin 
gle-track road, or two switches and magnets 
for a double-track road. To the Switch-box 
lead connections o O'o', which connect the 
working-conductor sections or points, as more 
fully described in explaining Fig. 1. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination in an electric railway 
of a supply conductor, Working - conductor 
sections or points arranged in sets of three, 
switches and magnets for operating the 
switches with double collectors so arranged 
and spaced with reference to the conductor 
sections that One Spans the adjacent end sec 
tions of adjoining sets of conductors, while 
the second spans the central sections of the 
said sets for establishing a circuit through the 
magnet of an advance set of sections, as set 
forth. 
2. The combination in an electric railway 
of a supply conductor, working conductor 
sections or points arranged in sets of three, 
a switch adapted to connect all three sections 
making up each Such set to the supply con 
ductor when closed, and an electro-magnet 
for each switch having an energizing coil con 
nected between at least two of such sections 
when the SWitch is in the open position, as 
set forth. 
3. The combination in an electric railway 
of a Supply conductor, a series of working sec 
tions or points arranged longitudinally one af 
ter the other in the direction of the line of 
travel, and divided into sets, each of which 
comprises three successive sections, switches 
adapted to connect the different sets of work 
ing conductors to the supply conductor, mag 
nets for actuating the switches having a coil 
connected between two at least of the sections 
of each set when the Switches are open, and 
collectors on the car arranged to form a circuit 
from a live section of one such set through the 
magnet of an advance set of sections for clos 
ing the corresponding advance switch, as set 
forth. 
4. The combination in an electric railway 
5 
S 5 
90 
5 
OO 
IO 
i I 5 
2 O 
551,536 
8 
5 
Io 
of a supply conductor, working conductor sec 
tions arranged insets of three, a magnet and 
switch for each such set, and collectors on the 
carforming multiple paths to the motor at the 
time when an advanced switch is to be closed, 
One path including the magnet operating the 
switch of a rear set of sections, and the other 
the magnet of an advance set of sections for 
closing the corresponding switch, assetforth. 
5. The combination in an electric railway 
of a supply conductor, working conductor sec 
tions or points arranged in sets of three, mag 
nets and switches for connecting the sets of 
working conductor sections with the supply 
conductor, and collectors on the car resting 
on four sections and forming multiple circuits 
from the supply conductor at the time when 
the magnet of an advance set of sections is 
energized, one such circuit leading direct 
from one section to the motor, and the other 
circuit including the remaining three sections 
in series, as set forth. 
6. The combination in an electric railway 
of a supply conductor, working conductor sec 
tions or points arranged in sets of three, 
switches for connecting the said sets of sec 
tions with the supply conductor, and electro 
magnets for operating the Switches, the cen 
tral section of each set being normally con 
nected to the end sections of the said set 
through coils on the corresponding magnet, 
as set forth. 
7. The combination in an electric railway 
of an insulated supply conductor, working 
conductor sections or points arranged in sets 
of three, a switchbox for each set of sections, 
located outside the track, connections lead 
ing from the three sections of a setto a switch 
box, and a switch for connecting the sections 
with the supply conductor, as set forth. 
8. The combination in an electric railway 
of a supply conductor, working conductor sec 
tions or points arranged in sets of three, double 
collectors arranged as described, and a bat 
tery or other source of current adapted to be 
connected to the different collector's, as set 
forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 20th day of April, 1895. 
FREDERICK C. ESMOND. 
Witnesses: 
B. B. HULL, 
A. F. MACDONALD. 
35 
4C. 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551636.txt	G. M. HINKLEY & E. E. FITZGERALD. 
SAWMILL APPLIANCE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1, 
. . 
. 
Patented Deo, 17, 1895. 
(No Model.) , 
No. 551,636, 
 
22 
2 
i. 
{7-aa-7.4% 
2.7%, 
2-ucC 
&vvue-vitov. 
- 
eliteracy. 
928). Evlooses 
(6. 2 3.4% 
(No Model.), 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
G. M. HINKLEY & E. E. FITZGERALD, 
SAWMILL APPLIANCE, 
No. 551,636, 
 
Patented De0, 17, 1895. 
7 
elittowica, 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
G. M. HINKLEY & E. E. FITZGERALD. 
SAWMILL APPLIANCE, 
No. 551,636, 
Patented Deo, 17, 1895. 
\ E. Ris 
 
 
 
  
H 
H O ES 
RSS 
saE s 
S S  v 
e 
SN NS 
Z' & 
S 
 
outness 727. 
46%. 34. 
 
 
&ltto vied 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE M. HINKLEY AND EDWARD E. FITZGERALD, OF MILWAUKEE, 
WISCONSIN, ASSIGNORS OF ONE-HALF TO THE EDWARD P. ALLIS 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SAVWML APPAN CE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551,686, dated December 17, 1895. 
Application filed April 9, 1895, Serial No. 545,057, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To aid, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that we, GEORGEM. HINKLEY 
and EDWARD E. FITZGERALD, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Milwaukee, in the 
county of Milwaukee and State of Wisconsin, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Sawmill Appliances, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to the knees of Saw 
mill-carriages, and consistS in providing the 
knee With one or more, preferably two, later 
ally-extending dogs, which, to distinguish 
them from the dogs usually carried by the 
knees, are termed Wing-dogs. After a log 
has been almost entirely sawed, the remaining. 
portion is apt to spring toward Or away from 
the face of the knee and thereby prevent its 
being properly held by the usual dogging 
mechanism of the knee, and to avoid this dif 
ficulty We employ the supplemental dogging 
mechanism comprising the Wing-dogs which 
are designed to be turned or rotated, on a 
horizontal axis, toward and from the lumber. 
These dogs are designed to be automatic in 
their action-that is to say, they are normally 
held out of action-but when the knee is fed 
forward by any suitable mechanism, to pre 
sent the thin piece of lumber to the sawing 
line, a trip device comes into action, releases 
the wing-dogs, and allows them to engage the 
lumber, drawing it toward the carriage if it 
is sprung away from the latter, or shoving it 
outward in case it is sprung to Ward the cal 
riage, the Wing-dogs in either case holding 
the lumber firmly against Springing at either 
side of the knee. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a head-block and knee of common 
form with our improvements applied thereto; 
Fig. 2, a side view showing only such parts 
as are necessary to illustrate our invention, 
the Wing-dogs being in their normal or in Op 
erative position; Fig. 3, a sinilar view show 
ing the Wing-dogs in use and also showing by 
dotted lines the parts in a position just prior 
to the operation of the trip mechanism; Figs. 
4 and 5, sectional views through the head of 
one of the Wing-dogs; Fig. 6, a top plan view; 
Fig. 7, a longitudinal Sectional view through 
one of the wing-dogs on the line 77 of Fig. S; 
Fig. 8, a transverse sectional view on the line 
88 of Fig. 7, and Fig. 9 a perspective view of 
the pivoted trip-pawl. 
A indicates a head-block, and B a knee, 
both of which may be of any usual construc 
tion. Bolted or otherwise rigidly secured to 
the side of the knee is a plate D, having a hol 
low boss C, to which is rigidly secured by a set 
screw (shown by dotted lines in Fig. 7) or in 
any other suitable manner a fixed shaft or 
axle E which, as shown, projects horizontally 
from the side face of the knee. It is obvious 
that this supporting-bOSS, instead of being 
separate from the knee and bolted thereto, 
may be cast on the side of the knee, but We 
prefer the construction shown, because We 
are thereby enabled to apply the present in 
vention to knees now in use. 
F, Fig. 7, indicates the Wing-dog as a whole, 
comprising a head b, which is journaled on 
the outer end of the shaft E, a thick collar c 
encircling the boss C, an ear or ears d on said 
collar, and a longitudinally-extending arm or 
member e connecting the head b with the col 
lar. A coiled spring f, encircling the shaft, 
is secured at one end to the Wing-dog head b 
and at the other end to a collar g, adjustably 
secured to the shaft or axle E. The front 
face of the head b is curved on the arc of a 
circle, and is slotted to receive a tooth h, 
which is conveniently held in place by a 
transverse key i, as shown in detail in Figs. 
4 and 5. These parts are so constructed and 
arranged that the Wing-dog may rock or OScil 
late freely upon its shaft or axle to throw its 
tooth h forward to engage the lumber, as in 
Fig. 3, or back in rear of the face of the knee, 
as in Fig. 2, the spring tending to throw the 
dog forward and to maintain it in such posi 
tion. 
G indicates a lever secured to a shaft i, 
journaled in the knee, said lever being con 
9 O 
45 
2 
551,636 
O 
35 
45 
nected by a link II with the ear cl, formed on 
the wing-dog. Pivoted to the lever is a pawl 
k, of the form shown in Fig. 9, which is de 
signed to engage a stop l, adjustably Secured 
to the head-block, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 
and 6. When the lever is thrown down, as 
in Fig. 2, the pivots an and in are in line with 
the shaft i, as shown in Fig. 2, the pawl 
hanging downward from the lever. It will 
be noticed that when the lever is thus thrown 
down the wing-dog will be held out of ac 
tion, against the force of its spring, by reason 
of the alignment of the pivots m, i, and 1. 
The knee is advanced a predetermined dis 
tance after each cut, as usual,during which ad 
vancement the Wing - dog and its operative 
mechanism remain in the same relative posi 
tion they occupied previous to such advance. 
Just before the knee reaches the position 
shown in full lines in Fig. 3 the pawl will be 
brought up against the stop l, as indicated by 
dotted lines in said figure, whereupon, on the 
continued advance of the knee, the pawl will 
ride up onto the stop and raise the lever, throw 
ing the three pivots , i, and 7 out of line and 
permitting the spring to throw the dog and 
its lever into the position shown in full lines 
in Fig. 3. The pawl I, made as shown in 
Fig. 1, and embracing the lever, cannot yield 
when it comes into contact with the stop by 
the knees advancing toward the saw - line, 
and hence insures the raising or lifting of the 
lever, but readily yields, so as to pass ovel 
the stop without raising the ever when the 
knees recede. In order to reset or to throw 
the Wing-dog out of action, it is only neces 
sary to take hold of the lever and bring it to 
the position shown in Fig. 2. To prevent the 
parts from being carried too far forward, we 
alralnge a projection O on the collar c to come 
into contact with the under side of the link 
II, said projection being advisably provided 
with an elastic cushion p. In practice we 
employ two of these wing-dogs, one on each 
side face of the knee, and in order that they 
may both be actuated automatically both op 
erating-levers are keyed to the shafti. 
The setting-lever, which we have desig 
nated C in Fig. 1, is mounted loosely upon 
the shaft i and is not affected by and does 
not affect the shaft or the levers G keyed to 
said shaft. 
Ilaving thus described our invention, what 
We claim is 
1. In combination. With a knee provided 
With the usual dogging mechanism; a second 
alry dog projecting from the side of the knee 
to engage and hold thin lumber; automatic 
means for throwing said secondary dog into 
engagement. With the lumber; mechanism for 
normally holding said dog out of action; and 
automatic means for releasing the witlilhold 
ing mechanism and permitting said dog to go 
into action, Substantially as set forth. 
2. In combination with a knee, a dog to en 
gage and hold the lumber thrown into action 
automatically by the forward movement of 
the knee. 
3. In combination. With a knee, a dog to en 
gage and hold the lumber thrown into action 
automatically at a predetermined point by the 
forward movement of the knee. 
4. In combination with a knee; a shaft or 
Support projecting horizontally and laterally 
therefrom; a rocking dog carried by said sup 
port; and means, operated through the ad 
ance of the knee, whereby the dog will be 
automatically rocked forward to engage and 
hold the lumber at One side of the knee. 
5. In combination with a knee; a shaft or 
support projecting laterally therefrom; a 
rocking dog mounted on said support; a spring 
for throwing the dog forward; a lever for re 
tracting the dog; and devices for automati 
cally releasing the lever. 
6. In combination with a lead block; a 
knee; a dog carried by the knee and urged 
forward by a spring; a lever connected with 
the dog for retracting the same; a pawl car 
ried by the lever and a stop to be engaged by 
the pawl to effect the release of the dog. 
7. In combination with a knee, a dog car 
ried thereby, a lever for retracting the dog 
adapted to lock or hold the same out of action; 
a pawl carried by said lever; and a stop 
adapted to engage the pawl as the knee ad 
Vances, to move the lever, and thereby to re 
lease the dog and permit it to go into action. 
8. In combination with a knee; a dog car 
lied thereby; a lever connected with the dog 
by a link; a pawl carried by the lever; a stop 
to be engaged by the pawl, whereby when the 
pawl strikes the stop the pivots of the level 
and link will be thrown out of line; and a 
Spring to rock the dog when the lever is re 
leased. 
9. In combination with a knee and its usual 
dogging mechanism; supplemental dogs car 
ried by Supports projecting laterally from the 
sides of the knee; a rock-shaft is and a pair 
of levers secured to said shaft and connected 
with the respective supplemental dogs. 
10. In combination with a knee; a shaft or 
Support secured thereto; a rocking dog com 
prising head b, collar c and connecting arme, 
and spring f for rocking the dog in one direc 
tion. 
11. In combination with a knee; a shaft, or 
Support Secured thereto; a locking dog com 
prising head b, collar c and connecting arme, 
Spring f for rocking the dog in one direction, 
and a hand lever connected with the dog by a 
link. 
12. In combination with a knee and the 
shaft or support thcreon; a rocking dog 
In Oulted on Said support; hand lever G and 
link II for rocking the dog; and a stop on the 
dog to engage the link. 
13. In combination with a knee; a verti 
cally rocking dog on the side thereof; and 
95 
IOC 
O 
I 15 
I 25 
55 
65 
 
means for automatically releasing the dog, 
and also for rocking the same to cause the dog hands in the presence of two Witnesses. 
to engage and hold the lumber. 
14. In combination with a knee; a verti- 
cally-rocking dog On the side thereof; a Spring 
to cause the dog to rock to engage and hold 
the lumber; a lever for retracting the dog and 
putting the spring under stress; and means 
for automatically releasing the spring. 
B. T. LEUZARDER, 
FRANK W. GREENLEAF. 
GEORGE M. HINKLEY. 
EDWARD E. FITZGERALD. 
551,636 
s 
In Witness Whereof We hereunto set our Io 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551736.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. PIT KIN. 
DISPLAY HOOK. 
No. 551,736, 
Patented De0, 17, 1895. 
 
. 
. 
2227/722z. 
199pter 
Wilifiesses 
6 (22ezee, 
y 
3y 2-A ftrpeys. 
 
. . . 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.Photo-utho.washington.pc. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER J. PITKIN, OF CORINTII, NEW YORK. 
D IS PAYaH O OK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551,786, dated December 17, 1895. 
Application filed August 20, 1895, Serial No. 559,924 (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER J. PITKIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cor 
inth, in the county of Saratoga and State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Display-Hook, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in display-hooks, and has for its object to pro 
vide a simple, inexpensive and convenient 
article of the nature referred to, wherein pro 
vision is made for clasping a card having 
printed thereon the price of the article or the 
name or any descriptive matter in relation to 
the article to which the hook is applied. 
To the above end the invention consists in 
a display hook or hanger comprising a hook 
member, a pivoted member hinged thereto 
and operating as a movable jaw for adapting 
the hook as a whole to engage and support 
any desired article, a pin or pivot connecting 
said members, and an actuating-spring dis 
posed around said pin or pivot and bearing 
at one end against the pivoted jaw member 
and having its opposite end extended up 
Wardly and then reversely bent to form an 
Open loop which bears Snugly against the hook 
member and between which and the hook 
member a price or display card may be in 
troduced and clasped. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of an improved display 
hook constructed in accordance with this in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
same with a price-card shown applied thereto. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section through the same. 
Similar numerals of reference designate 
corresponding parts in the several figures of 
the drawings. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates the 
hook member of the improved device which 
is formed with a hook 2, adapted to be passed 
over and engaged with a rod, cord or other 
overhead support. The main body of the 
hook member is extended downwardly any 
desired distance, and formed at its lower end 
with a row of teeth, which extend laterally 
therefrom upon the opposite side to that upon 
which the hook is formed. Between the hook 
and the teeth is a pair of perforated ears 3, 
- 
disposed upon the same side of the hook mem 
ber as the teeth referred to. A designates the 
other member of the device, which is mate 
rially shorter than the hook member and is 
also provided with a pair of perforated ears 
5, corresponding to the ears 3 of the hook 
member. The two members are united by 
means of a horizontal pin or pivot 6, which 
passes through the ears 3 and 5 thereof, thus 
hinging the members together and adapting 
the member 4 to be rocked relatively to the 
hook member. The member 4 is provided at 
its lower end with teeth, which project to 
Ward and are arranged to intermesh with the 
teeth on the hook member, the upper end 
thereof being bent outwardly to facilitate the 
rocking of the same by the finger. 
7 designates a piece of spring-wire, which 
is given one or more coils around the pin or 
pivot 6, and has one extremity arranged with 
in and bearing outwardly against the upper 
end of the member 4 in such manner as to 
force the lower end of such member against 
the corresponding end of the hook member 
for the purpose of clasping an article in a 
manner Well understood. The other terminal 
of this spring is extended upwardly some dis 
tance above the plane of the upper end of the 
member 4, where it is given a semicircular 
bend and extended downwardly and termi 
nated to form an open loop S, of substantially 
inverted-U shape, which is adapted to press 
Snugly against the hook member and to re 
ceive and firmly hold a price-card between 
the same and the hook member in the man 
ner shown in Fig. 2. 
In operation, the article to be displayed is 
clamped between the toothed lower ends of 
the two members, after which the price-card 
is inserted between the spring-loop 8 and the 
hook member, when the device is ready to be 
engaged with an overhead support. By ex 
tending one of the terminals of the usual 
spring upwardly, and forming the clamping 
loop described, a very simple and inexpen 
sive device is produced, as compared with 
similar devices in which the card-holder is 
formed separately. In addition to this it will 
be seen that by the particular arrangement 
of the card-holding device the member 4 may 
95 
IOC 
EO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
551,736 
be manipulated for engaging or releasing an 
article without interfering with or rendering 
it necessary to remove the card. 
IIaving thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new, and desired to be secured 
by Letters Patent, is 
A display hanger comprising a hook mem 
ber, a pivoted jaw member hinged thereto, 
and a Spring disposed between said members 
in such manner as to force their extremities 
together, one of the terminals of said spring 
being extended to form a clasp which lies be 
tween the hook member and the pivoted jaw, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as I5 
WALTER J. PITKIN. 
Witnesses: 
HERBERT II. SMITH, 
ELMER. G. BOGLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551836.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. PROWAN. 
TRIPSLING, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 551,836, 
Patented Dec. 24, 1895. 
 
3. 
g|A und:5) 
y 
JVCz (cass eas 
/2 (J-e-Z (O/- 
2 
ad 
a gaz, 
-67 
2. arzezi 
"(No Model.) 
No. 551,836. 
 
J. W. PROWAN, 
TRIP SING 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented De0. 24, 1895, 
VVc(Z (esses 
ZZ (J-e-Z-Coz 
Ceeee-e/Y-27 e2ee 
 
 
 
 
 
 
JYZ (esses 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.PHOTO-UTHO.WAshtNGTON.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES W. PROVAN, OF OSHAWA, CANADA. 
TRIPS LN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551,886, dated December 24, 1895. 
Application filed Marchill 1895, 
Serial No. 541,281 (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it nay concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES WHITE PROVAN, 
manufacturer, residing in the town of Oshawa, 
in the county of Ontario and Province of On 
tario, Canada, have invented a certain new 
and Improved Trip-Sling, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
tripping device for carrying and dumping 
hay, grain sheaves, or other produce, and com 
prising two or more slings, each of which may 
be automatically and simultaneously tripped 
at the center, as Specified, and in which de 
vice the several ropes comprising the slings 
may be spread out on the load to the desired 
width as they approach the center, thereby 
affording greater lifting capacity while re 
taining the principle of the center trip and 
by means of which the cross-slats usually em 
ployed in slings of this nature may be dis 
pensed with, and in which each sling is suit 
ably supported at each end and is formed in 
two parts detachably connected together, and 
is in combination with a trip-line connected 
to one of the points of support and adapted 
to break the connection between the two parts, 
when the weight of the load is transferred 
from one of the parts of the sling to the ad 
jacent trip-line, substantially as hereinafter 
described. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my trip 
sling, partly broken away, and its connections 
in the act of raising a load from the wagon. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of my trip-sling, 
partly broken away, in the act of dumping 
the load on the mow. Fig. 3 is a perspective 
view of a plurality of slings disconnected from 
their pulley-blocks. 
Like letters of reference indicate similar 
parts in the different figures. 
In Fig.1.A A' are pulley-blocks which have 
been lowered so as to be over the ends of the 
Wagon. 
B is the hoisting-rope for hoisting the load 
to the carrier by which it is conveyed to the 
part of the mow where it is to be dumped. 
Cl is an eye formed on the pulley-block A, 
through which passes the tripping-cord C to 
its connection through the hole d with the 
pivoted catch. D. This pivoted catch. D is 
pivoted at d to the bracket F, which is con 
nected to the pulley-block. 
Y 
- 
d is a catch-hole formed in the pivoted 
catch. D with which the lug or teate on the 
pivoted trigger E engages when the trigger is 
locked. This trigger E is pivoted at e' to the 
bottom of the bracket F. 
f is a spring which keeps the catch.D down 
on the lug formed on the end of the trigger 
when the trigger is locked. By pulling on 
the tripping-cord C the pivoted catch. D is 
raised against the power of the spring f from 
its seat on the end of the trigger E. 
G is a hook formed on one end of this piv 
oted trigger, on which the loopM (hereinafter 
referred to) is hung, and g is a keeper to pre 
vent this loop from becoming displaced from 
the hook when the sling is operated. This 
hook G, instead of being on the trigger, may 
be on the bracket or pulley-block. 
II' are connecting-rings connected respect 
ively with the trigger E and the hook Hwhen 
the load is being lifted, as shown in Fig. 1. 
These connecting-rings comprise suspending 
holes J, by which the connecting-rings are at 
tached to the trigger E and hook H, respect 
ively, and K are sling-holes, preferably three 
in number, to which the ends of the slings 
are attached. 
L are loop-holes through which the loop M 
is passed and then placed over the hook G, 
formed on the end of the pivoted trigger E. 
O is a trip-line which is connected at one 
end to the loop M, and at its other end to the 
trip-hook P, as indicated. The several trip 
lines used are all fastened to this loop M. 
N N are two parts of which the sling is 
composed, the part N being connected at one 
end to the trip-hook P and at the other to 
one of the sling-holes K in the connecting 
ring I. The part N' of the sling is connected 
to the ring q'formed on the eye Q, which en 
gages with the trip-hook P before the trip 
hook has been tripped, and the other end is 
connected to the connecting-ring I. 
It will be seen that while the load is being 
carried by the sling, as shown in Fig. 1, the 
weight of the load is borne by the parts NN' 
of the sling, and that the trip-line O is com 
paratively slack, and that the trip-line is con 
nected with the trip-hook P at the hole p, 
which is farther away from the point of sup 
port on the connecting-ring I than is the 
end of the part N of the sling which is con 
55 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
551,886 
5 
O 
75 
nected to the trip-hook by means of the hole 
q, and that the seat for the eye r is centrally 
located between the holes p and q, the hole 
p being farther from the point of support 
than the hole q. 
When the load is being dumped, it will be 
seen by Fig. 2 that the weight of the load is 
transferred from the part N of the sling to 
the trip-line O, by reason of the fact that on 
pulling the tripping-cord C the pivoted catch 
D is raised so as to allow the pivoted trigger 
E to release the connecting-ring I, the con 
necting-ring I falling into the position shown 
in Fig. 2 and being held up merely by means 
of the loop MI, which has been passed over the 
hook G on the other end of the trigger. The 
part N of the sling which has thus been 
tripped becomes loose and the weight falls 
onto the trip line O, thus causing the trip 
hook P to turn on the seat r as a center and 
be canted over into the position shown in 
Fig. 2, so that the eye Q becomes at once dis 
engaged from the hook P, and the load is 
dumped on the portion of the mow selected 
immediately beneath the sling. 
In Fig. 2 it will be: seen that the hoisting 
rope B has been pulled on, and the pulley 
blocks A A' are brought together in position 
for being hooked onto the carrier by means 
of the bail on top of the pulley-block for the 
purpose of being carried to the place in the 
mow where the hay is to be dumped. These 
slings, which are preferably made of two 
equal parts, are preferably three in number, 
although two might suffice for the purpose of 
lifting a load. The parts being hooked to 
gether by the trip-hook P and eye Q the sling 
is laid under such layers of load in the wagon 
as may be desired, and on being carried to 
the barn the ends are connected respect 
ively by means of the connecting-rings II 
to the hook Hand the pivoted trigger E, which 
is locked to the pivoted catch D, and the loop 
M is placed in position on the hook G, as in 
dicated in Fig. 1. The sling is then in posi 
tion to do its work, as already indicated. 
The relative lengths of the trip-line O and 
of the adjoining parts N of the sling can be 
readily adjusted, as well as the length of loop 
MI, which it is necessary to have in order to 
secure the proper amount of slackness for the 
part N and of tautness for the trip-line O 
when the trigger is tripped and the load 
dumped. 
In Fig. 2 the load is just about leaving the 
sling, the parts having been just disconnected 
and the load is being dumped immediately 
below the sling. Of course the parts N and 
N' will hang vertically from their respective 
hooks when clear of the load. 
By my invention I have been able to dis 
pense with the cross-slats which are usually 
employed in slings of this description and 
which necessarily are short so as to fit into 
the Wagon-box, thus decreasing the capacity 
of the sling for raising loads. 
By my device I am able to raise a larger load 
and to more readily dump it than is usual, my 
device being readily made to employ a small 
space and being both cheap and effective in 
operation and adapted to any size of Wagon 
that may be employed inhauling the produce. 
When three slings are employed, the central 
sling of the three may preferably be slightly 
longer than the outer ones, but as a matter 
of length of parts can be readily ascertained 
and adjusted no specific directions are neces 
sary. 
Although I have shown the specific form of 
trip hook and eye for connecting the two parts 
of the sling together, I do not wish to confine 
myself to this special form, but any other 
form of connection which may be disconnected 
by means of transferring the weight of the 
load from the sling to, the trip-line is within 
the scope of my invention. It will also be 
noticed that when the connecting-ring I is re 
leased from the trigger E, as shown in Fig. 2, 
the weight is thrown onto the several trip 
lines employed and which are tied to the loop 
M, so that the part N of each sling which has 
an appropriate trip-line is disengaged from 
the part N' and the several slings which carry 
the load are automatically and simultaneously 
tripped at the centerimmediately after releas 
ing the connecting-ring I from the trigger E 
by pulling on the tripping-cord C. 
I am aware of the United States Patent of 
Louden, No. 541,281, and do not attempt to 
claim anything therein, as Iregard my inven 
tion as essentially different therefrom and 
much Superior thereto, inasmuch as my pecu 
liar and novel construction enables me to con 
nect a plurality of slings to the connecting 
rings, whereby they can all be successfully 
and simultaneously tripped by the operation 
of a single tripping-cord which releases said 
connecting-ring, throwing the loads. On said 
plurality of slings and thus simultaneously 
uncouples them and drops the load. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a device of the class described, a sling 
suitably supported at each end and formed in 
two parts, means for detachably connecting 
said two parts together, a trip-line as O con 
nected with said detachable connecting means 
and with one of the supports of the sling, and 
a tripping device, connected with one of the 
parts of the sling and arranged when tripped 
to throw the weight of the load from the sling 
to the trip-line, substantially as described. 
2. A device of the class described compris 
ing pulley blocks, a sling normally support 
ing the load and formed in two parts, a trip 
hook and eye detachably connecting said two 
parts together, a supplemental line as O con 
nected with said trip hook, a double hookin 
terposed between one of said pulley blocks 
and the sling and line O, and mechanism for 
tripping said hook to shift the load from said 
sling to said line O, thereby disengaging the 
trip hook and eye and making the dump, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. A trip-sling comprising a pulley block, a 
45 
55 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
IO 
IIS 
125 
551,836 
3 
main trip-sling formed of two parts as N N' combination of the pulley blocks A, A, the 
arranged to normally support the load, trip 
hoisting rope B, the eye a, tripping cord C, 
hookP and eye Q detachably connecting said 
the pivoted catch.D, provided with the hole d' 
parts NN' together, supplemental trip line O 
and catch hole d, the pivoted trigger E, pro 
Suitably connected with the hook P, said part 
vided with luge, the bracketF, spring f, hook 
O and one of the parts N N having a con 
G, keeper g, hook H, connecting rings I, I, 
nection. With the pulley block, and mechanism 
provided with suspending holes J, sling holes 
arranged to shift the load from the part N to 
K, and loop holes L, the loop M, the sling 
the supplemental tripline O, substantially as 
comprising parts N, N'; the trip line O, the 
described. 
trip hook P, provided with holes p and q and 
eye seat r, the eye Q, provided with ring q', 
4. In a device of the character described, 
the combination of a pulley block A, a piv 
substantially as described and specified. 
oted catch. D provided with a catch-hole d', a 
7. In a device of the class specified, a plu 
pivoted trigger E forming a double hook and 
rality of slings each of which is suitably sup 
having a lug on One of said hooks engaging 
ported at each end and formed in two parts, 
With said catch-holed, a tripping cord C con 
means for detachably connecting said two 
nected with said pivoted catch.D., a sling rope 
parts together, a trip-line as O for each of 
N having a connection with the hook engag 
said slings, said trip-line being connected 
ing with the catch D, and a trip line O hav 
With said detachable connecting means and 
ing a connection with the other of said hooks, 
with one of the supports of the sling, and a 
whereby when the pivoted catch. D releases 
tripping device connected with said plurality 
the trigger upon the operation of the tripping 
of slings and arranged when tripped to throw 
cord, the weight of the load will be trans 
the weight of the load from the plurality of 
slings to the plurality of trip-lines, substan 
ferred from the sling rope N to the trip line 
O, substantially as described. 
tially as described. 
5. In a device of the character described, 
8. In a device of the class specified, a plu 
rality of slings normally supporting the load 
the combination of the pulley blocks A, A', 
the pivoted trigger supported from block A 
and each formed in two parts, means for de 
tachably connecting said two parts together, 
and having two hooks thereon, means for nor 
mally holding said trigger in a normal posi 
a plurality of trip lines as O connected with 
tion and adapted to be released, connecting 
the detachable connecting devices, pivoted 
rings I, I, one of which is supported from the 
double hook E having the plurality of slings 
upper hook and the other by the opposite pull 
connected with one of its hooks and the plu 
ley block, sling ropes N, N' supported from 
rality of trip lines connected with its other 
said rings.I., I', trip hook P and eye Q con 
hook, and tripping mechanism arranged when 
necting said ropes N, N', and a trip line O 
tripped to tilt said hooks and shift the load 
forming a connection between the lower hook 
from the plurality of slings to the plurality 
of the trigger E. and said hook P, whereby 
of trip lines, substantially as described. 
the hook P and eye Q are disconnected when 
the trigger E is released through the weight 
of the load on the trip line O, substantially 
as described. 
6. In a device of the class specified, the 
Toronto, March 4, 1895. 
In presence of - 
A. M. NEFF, 
FRED CLARKE. 
. JAMES W. PROWAN. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US551936.txt	(No Model.) 
P, SELER 
WRINGER STAND, 
No. 551936, 
Patented Dec, 24, 1895, 
% 
32......., 77 / 
6, 
ity 
setset& 
----- 
S 
 
Y. 
S 
 
  
 
(zzzzz esses. 
14, well-4- 
Zevezezer 
ZZ 2/33 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- 
PHILIPP SEILER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
WRNGER-STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 551,936, dated December 24, 1895. 
Application filed August 24, 1895, Serial No. 560,352, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, Luhon, it invay conce77. 
Beit known that I, PHILIPP SEILER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Wringer-Stands; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to a novel construc 
tion in a Wringer-stand, the object being to 
provide a device of this kind in which the 
wringer can be turned without removing the 
Same from the stand; and it consists in the 
features of construction and combinations of 
parts hereinafter fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a transverse verti 
cal section of a Wringer-stand constructed in 
accordance with my invention, taken on the 
line 11 of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
vertical section of the same with the Wringer 
removed and the supports for the tubs broken 
off, taken on the line 22 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is 
a detail view of the devices for clamping the 
bar supporting the Wringer firmly in position 
in the stand. 
Referring now to said drawings, 1 and 2 
are uprights supported on the bases 3 and 
firmly held in their relative positions at each 
side of the stand by cross-pieces 4 and 5. 
The upper ends of said uprights 1 and 2 are 
provided with recesses 6, in which the bar 7, 
to which the wringer S is secured, is held. 
Recesses 9, Smaller than said recesses 6, are 
cutin said uprights and extended downwardly 
from the bottom of said recesses 6. 
Bolts 10 
extend through said uprights near the upper 
ends of said recesses 9 and run transversely 
across the same. Said bolts 10 carry eccen 
trics 11 at one end, which are adapted to en 
gage the sides of said uprights to contract 
said recesses 9 and 6, and thus clamp the bar 
7 firmly in position. 
A sleeve 12, adapted to receive the end of 
a vertical shaft 13, is secured to the lower 
face of said bar 7, said shaft, 13 passing through 
openings 14 and 15 in said cross-pieces 5 and 
4, respectively, and being pivoted at its lower 
end to a lever 16, by means of which it is raised 
when it is desired to raise said bar 7 and turn 
the same to turn the Wringer, as shown in 
dotted lines in Fig1. Said lever 16 is pivoted 
to arms 17, which are pivoted at their other 
ends to said cross-piece 4, and extends through 
a recess in said upright 2 below the cross 
piece 4, its outer end being adapted to be en 
gaged by the foot to depress the same and thus 
raise the bar 7 and wringer S. 
When it is desired to turn the wringer, it 
is necessary only to release the eccentrics, 
press upon the end of the lever 16 with the 
foot and raise the Supporting-bar 7 and the 
wringer, then turn the same, drop the bar 
back into place, and turn the eccentrics to 
fasten the bar in place. 
My stand is provided with the usual fold 
ing supports for the tubs, which are hinged 
to said uprights 1 and 2 and extend on each 
side of the same in the usual manner. 
I claim as my invention 
I. In a Wringer stand, a supporting bar fit 
ting within recesses in the ends of the uprights 
of said stand, and devices for raising said sup 
porting bar consisting of a vertical shaft hav 
ing pivotal connection with said supporting 
bar and pivotally secured at its lower end to 
a lever pivotally mounted upon said stand, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a Wringer stand, a supporting bar fit 
ting within recesses in the ends of the uprights 
of said stand, and means for raising and turn 
ing said bar consisting of a vertical shaft piv 
otally secured at its lower end to a lever piv 
otally mounted upon said stand, the upper 
end of said shaft entering a sleeve on said 
ball 7, substantially as described. 
3. In a Wringer Stand, a Supporting bar fit 
ting within recesses in the ends of the uprights 
of said stand, means for raising and turning 
said bar consisting of a vertical shaft pivot 
ally secured at its lower end to a lever pivot 
ally mounted on said stand, the upper end of 
said shaft entering a sleeve on said bar 7, and 
means for clamping said bar within said re 
cesses, substantially as described. 
4. In a Wringer stand, a supporting ball fit 
ting within recesses in the ends of the uprights 
of said stand, means for raising and turning 
said bar consisting of a vertical shaft pivot 
ally secured at its lower end to a lever pivot 
IOO 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
551,986 
ally mounted on said stand, the upper end of 
said shaft entering a sleeve on said bar 7, and in presence of two witnesses. 
means for clamping said bar within said re 
cesses consisting of bolts passing through said 
5 uprights and provided at one end with eccen- 
trics adapted to engage said uprights to con- 
tract said recesses, substantially as described. 
RUDOLPH. W. LOTZ, 
FRANZ ANTON HINSKY. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
Witnesses: 
PHILIPP SEILER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552036.txt	(No Model.) 
te. 
"...is 
's 
L. K. BHM. 
MATERIAL FOR INCANDESCENT CONDUCTORS, 
No. 552,036, 
Patented Dec, 24, 1895. 
Awi Aata Mary/Cyra. 
CO/fzaesses 
fy 627 
7 V% 8-2/ 
Z22 (/evador, 
Zzzzvez AZio/w), 
% - P42: 
 
- - ---a 
- 
. . . are 32- - ... " 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUDWIG. K. B. HM, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MATERAL FOR incAND EscENT conductors, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,036, dated recember 24, 1895. 
Application aled November 5, 1891, serial to, 410,837, cho spotment.) 
. 
65 
To all uphon it may concerra: 
Beit known that I, LUDwIG. K. BHM, of 
New York, county of New York, State of New 
York, have invented an Improvement in Fila 
ments for Incandescent Lamps, of which the 
gllowing description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
This invention relates tomaterials for con 
ductorsforineandescent electrical lamps; and 
it consists in makingfilamentimaterials differ 
ent from any heretofore used and having in 
portant advantages which will be hereinafter 
pointed out, and the invention also consists 
in the process by which these materials are 
produced, 
It is essential that the material employed 
for filaments should possess some degree of 
electrical conductivity, and should also be 
highly refractory, so as not to become E. 
fused or yolatilized when subjected to the hig 
temperature produced by the passage of the 
electrical current through it. 
The material 
anost commonly employed for fianeats has 
been carbon, usually of as high a degree of 
25 purity as attainable. In my present inven 
tion, however, the material employed for fla 
ments is not pure carbor. It consists of ear 
bon in combination with a metal, as will be 
fully described farther on. 
L 
The present invention is based on the dis 
covery that carbon maybe made to chemically 
combine with some of the earth alkali metals 
or iron, &c., forming a carbide of the Isetas, 
which carbide is the main or sole.inaterial of 
which the filament is composed, although in 
some cases carbon may be employed in excess 
of that which will combine, so that tie re 
sulting incandesceat. conductor will crisist 
of a homogeneous compound or mixture of 
the metal carbide and of pure carbon. The 
metal carbide has staficient electrical cone 
ductivity to reader it a suitable and efficient 
materialiforincaidescent conductors, and has 
the advantage to possess higher specific rea 
sistance than pre carbor. 
With the term esirth alkali netals,. 
designated that group of netals comprising 
baliun, strontium, calcium, and raagnesiuan. 
Further, iron or other metals may also be used 
to. form the carbides by an electric process 
consisting simply in applying the electile car 
rent to the eon pounds out of which the ca's 
bide is made-that is, the metal oxide and 
carbon-when the metallic oxide will be de 
composed and the retail therein will chemi- 55 
cally combine with the carbon, thus forming 
the carbide of the metal. This process differs 
substantially from those heretofore proposed, 
inasmuch as no coating of the metal oxide is 
produced; but, on the contrary, there is first 6d 
formed a uniform or homogeneous composi 
tion of the carbor and oxide of the metal, and , 
thereafter a chemical combination of the car 
bon and metal by the action of the electric 
current. 
The carbon and the metai oxide may be 
mixed, or the carbon filameat or carbon may 
be incorporated with metal oxide in any suit 
able way, and the quantity and electromotive 
force of the current will vary in accordance 7o 
with the lengths and size of the conductor be 
ing treated. 
in order to effect the chemical 
union of the carbon aid the Crets which are 
uncombineti in the coalitictor, the metal in 
for of oxide and the carbon as stich, the con- 75 
ductorisheated toineaniescence when by the 
heat of the cirrent chemical combination 
takespises, the cagbon uniting with the metal 
and forming a carbide of calcium, iron or 
whateverinetal is employed. The fact that 8o 
such chemical coalination has taken place 
may be shown by subjecting the resultingcon 
duction to tie action of the fame of a Bunsen 
burner, when it will be found that the carbon 
is not coastinaed, but the compound retains 85 
its dark color'snd is not decomposed, while a 
mechanicallixture' of carbon aid metal ox 
ider-say calcitimor magaesiuinoxide-leaves 
the aetal oxide when subjected to a Bunsen 
flame, the carbon burning out. 
Inlietters?alento. 464,719, dated Decem 
er 8, 1891, aid issued tone, have described 
iianents for iraeandescArtiaraps composed of 
carbon and of the oxie of calcin or magae 
siuin. It is obvious that the conductor.com 95. 
posed of carbon and theoside of calcium or " 
magnesiana as produced by the process de- | 
scribed in any patent maybe subjected to the 
final stepal 
the conductor to 
incandescence, when the compound conductor op 
will be produced forming the subject of this 
invention, the same consisting then of the ear 
bids of the metals calcium or magnesium. 
Eiving thus described try invention, what 
that is, heating 
99 
35 
40 
50 
20 
, 
-- 
is 
558,036. 
claim therein as new, and desire to secure 
ity Letter's Patent, is 
d. As a new article of manufacture, a coin 
bia is sistance for electrical codiletters 
: Besisting of a homogeneous mass of carbon 
a death alkalimetaisforning a carbide, sub 
staitially as describe. 
2. Richaereibefore described process of 
furnilag cletical 'oldietors censisting of 
2)aixing together carbor &nd the oxides of the 
eart alkali retais to for a .au togeneous 
closiii, at thereafter effecting & chemi 
falconiisatia of the carbor &ndanetary the 
S 
is 
action of an electric carrent, substantially as 
15 
described. 
3. As a new article of manufacture, it coal 
potani or substance for electricai conductor's 
consisting of a homogeneous mass of carbol 
and calcium forming the carbide of calcium. 
have signed iny 
mains to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
in testiano ay whereof 
EUDWIG K. BHM. 
Witnesses: 
(SEPE L. LEWS, 
His Re:ERe DURBN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552136.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 552,136, 
C. W. MoDANIEL, 
FEED WATER, HEATER. 
Patented Dec. 31, 1895. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
    
 
 
  
 
 
(Witnesses 
 
 
 
 
 
al 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM. Photo-Lithd. washingtoN, DC 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. MCDANIEL, OF LACONIA, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
FEED - WATER HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,136, dated December 31, 1895. 
Application filed May 8, 1895, Serial No. 548,520, (No model.) 
- 
Sale. 
To all ? h ?? it ??? ???????: 
Beit known that I, CHARLEs W. MCDANIEL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at La 
conia, in the county of Belknap and State of 
New Hampshire, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Feed - Water 
Heating Apparatus for Steam-Boilers; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
This invention relates to improvements in 
the construction of feed-Water heating appa 
ratus for steam-boilers, and to the connec 
tion of such apparatus to the boiler, whereby 
the proper circulation is obtained. Among 
the many and various devices which have 
been heretofore put into practical use for 
this purpose difficulties have been encoun 
tered-such, for instance, as unequal expan 
sion and Superheating, the first named caus 
ing the apparatus to crack and the second to 
seriously interfere with if not to wholly de 
stroy the circulation. These difficulties 
prompted subsequent inventors to turn their 
attention to constructions which, while in a 
more or less degree overcoming the defects 
above cited, added increased cost to such 
apparatus, which itself is an element to be 
avoided. Hence the objects of my present 
invention are to produce a feed-Water heater 
or furnace-mouth protector in which the ex 
pansion or contraction shall be as nearly as 
possible equal throughout, and to simplify 
the boiler connection and provide for the cir 
culation in such manner as to avoid any 
trouble arising from the making of Steam in 
any portion of said apparatus. 
The invention will be readily understood 
by reference to the following specification 
and claims, and to the drawings accompany 
ing and forming a part of the same, of which 
Figure I is a broken elevation showing an 
5 end of a boiler, its furnace, and my improved 
feed-water heater or furnace-mouth protector 
in proper position. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal 
section of my improved heater as when de 
tached, Fig. 3 being a cross-section of the 
25 
35 
Same. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the construc 
tion shown in Fig. 2, and Fig. 5 is a modified 
form of construction showing lateral corru 
gations. 
Similar letters of reference demote corre 
sponding parts in all the views. 
A represents a steam-boiler, and B a steam 
boiler furnace having two feed-doors b, and C 
is my improved feed-Water heater or furnace 
mouth protector, which is supported in the 
usual manner, and which, of course, in the 
present instance is of a form adapted to a 
double-door furnace; but my improvements 
are equally Well adapted to furnaces having 
a, single door. 
This improved feed-water heater may be 
made of Wrought or cast metal, as may be 
preferred, the essential features in its con 
struction being its corrugations longitudi 
nally or laterally or both combined, or, in 
other words, its corners are all to be rounded, 
thus providing that its metal will be at all 
points as nearly as possible equal in thick 
ness in order to equalize its expansion and 
contraction. 
The heater C is provided with one or more 
partitions D, which run longitudinally, and 
when formed of cast-iron these partitions 
represent the metal between the cored por 
tions, and a cross-section of the heater so 
formed has the appearance of pipes arranged 
parallel and attached together, as seen in 
Fig. 3, each chamber or passage Ebeing con 
nected with another by perforations at in 
tervals, as at d, Figs. 2 and 3, formed for the 
purpose in the partitions D. The supply to 
the heater may be taken at either end at or 
near its bottom, as seen at F, and at a simi 
lar point at the Opposite end, as at G, I attach 
a large pipe H, which in service combines the 
discharge and the boiler circulation and forms 
a single connection between the feed-Water 
heater and the boiler. By making this sin 
gle connection H sufficiently large it will 
readily take care of not only the Water-cir 
culation but the steam which might form in 
the heater when the pump is shut off as well. 
However, by connecting the heater C at a 
point near its top With the pipe H by a small 
55 
75 
95 
2 
552,136 
- 
larly located at the opposite end for the dis 
charge, and a pipe connecting the latter with 
the boiler. 
2. A furnace mouth protector or feed-Water 
heater having a corrugated surface, rounded 
corners, and partitions running longitudi 
nally therein, water-ways formed by said par 
titions, perforations in the latter whereby 
the Water may freely circulate from one to 
another of the said Water-Ways, an opening 
at or near the bottom at one end for the Sup 
ply and one similarly located at the opposite 
end for the discharge, and a pipe connecting 
the latter with the boiler. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two Witnesses. 
CHARLES W. MCDANIEL, 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
J. B. THURSTON, 
GEORGE: I. MCALLISTER, 
5 
I. ? 
pipe h any extraordinary accumulation of 
steam will rise through the pipe H and find 
its way to its place in the boiler. 
It is essential, in order that the circulation 
may be as nearly as possible uniform through 
out the chambers or passages E, that the per 
forations d shall be in alignment or opposite 
to each other, especially so with relation to 
those nearest the Supply-pipe or opening, 
thus increasing the efficacy of my improved 
apparatuS. 
Having described my improvements, what 
I claim is- 
1. A furnace mouth protector or feed-water 
heater having a corrugated surface, and one 
Or more partitions running longitudinally 
therein, water - ways formed by said parti 
tions, means substantially as described where 
by circulation is maintained between said 
Water-Ways, an opening at or near the bot 
tom at one end for the supply and one simi 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552237.txt	J. DARBY. 
HYDROCARBON BURNER, 
Patented Dec. 31, 1895. 
 
 
a ge 
In 
 
  
   
 
m 
NS 
2 
  
R 
N 
N 
Soul/S CuS 
Snys s s e SNS S. 
sa- 
S 
auSou SSS 
N 
NSN 
S N N 
SSS . Ni 
SIESIS 
ns 
R 
N 
N 
N 
A 
N 
 
 
 
  
 
 
SS SNS 
N SNS 
NIN IN C-NC-S 
NSN NS 
 
 
S 
s 
2 s 
y 
SS NNSN 
N 
is 2 
N N N N N N N N 
SSusanabah. 
(No Model.) 
No. 552,237. 
737, 7 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
///e3Z 
772 vezzar 
Vosep / darby 
22.2 
Zy 
y 
u/7/47s 
 
ANbRew 8.GRAHAM, Pro-Tho-WASHINGTON.D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH DARBY, OF SPRINGFIELD, OHIO; HARMON S. FAIRCHILD, ADMINIS 
TRATOR OF SAID DARBY, DECEASED, ASSIGNORS TO ELIJAH F. DARBY, 
OF SAME PLACE. 
HYDRO CARBON - BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,237, dated December 31, 1895. 
Application filed December 28, 1894, Renewed November 29, 1895, Serial No, 570,540 (No model.) 
Io hereinafter set forth and claimed. 
I5 a different adjusted position. 
2O sity of the flame may be easily regulated. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH DARBY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Spring 
field, in the county of Clark and State of Ohio, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Hydrocarbon - Burners, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to hydrocarbon-burn 
el's; and it consists of the novel construction 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my improved burner; Fig. 2, a verti 
cal sectional view; and Fig. 3, a similar view 
of a portion of the burner, the parts being in 
The object of my invention, aside from pro 
ducing a cheap and safe burner, is to prevent 
the roaring sound incident to most burners, 
and also to provide means whereby the inten 
A designates the retort, provided with the 
usual tortuous passage C, the inlet-pipe b, 
and the outlet-pipe c. Below the retort Ise 
cure a plate or disk B, provided at its center 
25 with a depending conical mixer or funnel C, 
the walls converging upwardly or toward the 
discharge end. Between this plate and the 
retort and over the mouth of the mixer there 
is suspended a deflector or spreader D, the 
3o stem d of which passes up through a square 
openinge in the retort. The lower portion of 
the stem is square, and it is thus prevented 
from turning. Adjustably attached to the 
upper end of the stem is a cam-faced Washer 
35 f, while below it and encircling the stem is a 
handle E, also provided with a cam-face, 
which takes against the similar face on the 
washer. By turning this handle the deflector 
or spreader will be raised or lowered, it be 
ing shown in its lowest position in Figs. 1 and 
2 and in its elevated position in Fig. 3. 
Findicates the valve, the needle-point g of 
which is made tapering and extended out be 
yond the valve-seat, as will be seen upon ref 
erence to Figs. 1 and 2. This construction. 
insures the easy regulation of the flow of the 
gas and also aids in keeping the exit clear of 
any obstruction, for when the valve is closed 
foreign matters will be forced out of the way. 
So Between the handle of the valve and the exit 
I provide a cup G, which is used as a primary 
combustion-chamber to start the burner. A 
Series of holes or openings h is provided 
around the mixing-funnel to admit air to the 
space between the retort and the plate B to 55 
provide for the proper combustion of the gas 
or vapor. 
The operation of the burner is as follows: 
Oil is admitted to the retort and passes down 
to the valve, which is opened slightly to allow 6o 
the oil to flow out and down into the cup G, 
where it is ignited. In the meantime the 
spreader or deflector has been raised to its 
highest position, as shown in Fig. 3, to admit 
of the flames having a free passage through 65 
the mixing-funnel and to allow them to come 
into direct contact with the retort. The oil in 
the retort becomes vaporized and is ejected 
from the valve into the mixing chamber or fun 
nel where itintermingles with the air, and as it 7o 
issues into the space below theretortitignites. 
If not enough air is taken up in the funnel, 
then the air passing in through the openingsh 
supplies the deficiency. When the retort be 
comes thoroughly heated, the spreader or de- 75 
flector is lowered. This affects the burner in 
several particulars. First, it retards the pas 
sage of the gas through the funnel or mixer, 
and in so doing does away with any and all 
roaring sound which may arise and insures 8o 
complete combustion, and, secondly, it pro 
tects the base of the retort from the direct ac 
tion of the flame, an object much to be desired. 
The intensity of the flame I find may be easily 
regulated through the medium of this 85 
spreader without changing the regulation of 
the valve. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1. In a hydro-carbon burner, the combina- 9o 
I claim is 
tion of a retort; a plate or disk below said 
retort provided with a mixing funnel; and a 
retarder or spreader adjustably secured to the 
retort over the mixing funnel in the space 
formed between the bottom face of the retort 95 
and the plate. 
2. In a hydro-carbon burner, the combina 
tion of a retort; a plate or disk below said 
retort provided with a mixing funnel; a re 
tarder or spreader adjustably secured to the IOO 
45 
 
2 
552,287 
25 
35 
tion of a retort having a central opening; a 
retarder or spreader having a stem passing 
up through said opening; means for adjusting 
the position of the spreader relative to the re 
tort; a plate or disk located below the spreader 
and retort, and provided with a mixing fun 
nel, and a series of openings around the mouth 
of said funnel; a valve below the funnel, and 
a cup below the valve exit. 
6. In a hydro-carbon burner, the combina 
tion of a retort; a plate or disk below said 
retort provided with a depending mixing fun 
nel or chamber, and a series of openings 
through the plate around the mixing funnel; 
and an adjustable spreader or l'etarder se 
cured to the retort over the mixing funnelin 
the space between the bottom face of the re 
tort and the plate. 
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH EDAR3Y. 
Witnesses: 
W. S. B. RAND ALL, 
CHAS. A. COLES. 
IO 
retort over the mixing funnel in the space 
formed between the bottom face of the retOrt 
and the plate; and means for adjusting the 
spreader toward and from the mouth of the 
funnel. 
3. In a hydro-carbon burner, the combina 
tion of a retort; a plate or disk below said 
retort provided with a depending mixing fun 
nel or chamber; an adjustable retarder or 
spreader secured to the retort over the mix 
ing chamber in the space formed between the 
bottom face of the retort and the plate; a 
valve below the mixing funnel; and a cup be 
low the valve exit. 
4. In a hydro-carbon burner, the combina 
tion of a retort; a plate or disk below said 
retort provided with a depending mixing fun 
nel or chamber; and a series of openings 
through the plate around the mixing funnel; 
an adjustable spreader or retarder secured to 
the retort over the mixing funnel; a valve 
located below the funnel, and a cup below the 
valve exit. 
5. In a hydro-carbon burner, the combina 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552337.txt	(No Model.) 
A. W. SMITH, 
ELECTRIC MOTOR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet l, 
No. 552,337, 
Patented De 0, 31, 1895, 
 
 
sex &raryx2. 
t 
w 
saac 
2 - - - 
42 N, 74. 
strees 
 
 
a. 
t 
Sara - 
asse-all 
eaway Waxaawasa 
A 
- 
 
3%za . 
%2%-34 
. 
. 
is 
ot, 
e24.7% 
 
ANREW 8.3RAAMOTO.T.C.WASNSORC, 
(No Model.) 
A. W. SMITH, 
ELECTRIC MOTOR, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 552,337, 
 
Patented DeC, 31, 1895, 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAMPHOTO-lift.WASHINGTON, D.C 
(No Model.) 
A. W. SMITH. 
ELECTRIC MOTOR. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 552,337, 
Patented Dec. 31 1895. 
 
ANDRw B.GAHAMPHOTO.LTHC. WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT W. SMITH, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
ELECTREC WOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,337, dated December 31, 1895. 
Application filed July 23, 1895, Serial No. 556,855, (No model.) 
5 
O 
To aid twhon, it Invictly concern: 
JBe it known that I, ALBERT W. SMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, in the District of Columbia, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Electric Motors, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
The object of this invention is to produce 
an efficient, simple, and cheap alternating 
current induction-motor employing both the 
principles of attraction and repulsion in its 
operation, and one that will be self-starting 
With several times its normal load. Without 
the need of extraneous or auxiliary Starting 
devices, and may be run at either a synchro 
nizing or a variable speed, as desired, and be 
capable of being economically operated by a 
single high-pressure alternating current of 
high or low frequency Without the usual in 
termediary of pressure-reducing transformers 
and with an electrical efficiency equal to that 
of the best stationary induction-transformers. 
To these several ends my invention consists 
in the employment of a fixed and a movable 
magnetic system, One of which systems is 
wound with non-commutable primary and 
secondary coils angularly displaced from each 
other, and the other system of which is Wound 
with two or more independent and angularly 
displaced sets of commutable coils having 
their working or torque-producing portions 
wound in parallel direction with and in in 
ductive relation to the non-commutable coils 
On said other magnetic system, and a COm 
mutator adapted to place Said commutable 
coils in the primary circuit during those por 
tions of each revolution during which attrac 
tion in the direction of rotation exists between 
them and the non-commutable primary coils, 
and to place said commutable coils in the 
secondary circuit during those portions of 
each revolution during which repulsion in 
the direction of rotation exists between then 
and the non-commutable primary coils. 
It also consistS in other details to be here 
in after more fully described. 
In the drawings here with, Figure i is a con 
ventional diagram of my invention. Figs. 2 
and 3 show modifications thereof. Figs. * 
and I are detail views. 
In all the views the same letters refer to 
like or corresponding parts. 
C is the fixed magnetic system, and d is the 
movable magnetic system. 
lb b are primary coils, and C C are secondary 
coils on the fixed magnetic System. Ct. 
In Fig. 1 the movable magnetic System d 
has two sets of coils. The Set e e are for the 
time being primaries, and set f fare seconda 
ries. All the coils in Fig. 1 are shown as ring 
coils of one and One-half turns each. In prac 
tice, however, each coil consists of many 
turns. The form of cross-section and angular 
width of those portions of the primary coils 
which are in the air-gap is shown by the cross 
hatched spaces 22, and the form of cross-sec 
tion and angular width of the secondary coils 
is shown by the full black Spaces / / /. The 
spaces if y if and 2 22 also serve to graphi 
cally indicate the character of the coils, the 
black spaces / / / indicating secondary coils 
and the light or cross-hatched Spaces 2 2 2 
representing primary coils. 
In Fig. 1 the commutator g has twelve seg 
ments connected in four groups of three in 
each group. Each group forms one terminal 
of one set of commutable coils, alternate seg 
ments being connected to opposite terminals 
of the same set of coils. 
hand h are primary brushes, and landi are 
secondary brushes. The switchi is adapted 
to close the primary circuit, and Switch k is 
adapted to close the secondary circuit. Linkl, 
of insulating material, mechanically connects 
switches j and k. The two sets of non-com 
mutable coils b b and c care each connected 
in a separate series, as shown by full lines on 
the front and dottedlines on the back. Like 
Wise the two sets of commutable coils e e and 
f fare each connected in a separate series. 
In Fig. 1 the circuit through the motor is 
as follows: Starting at the Supply-Wire m, it 
passes through the non-commutable primary 
coils b b in series to brush h, then througii. 
commutable coilsee in series to brush h", and 
avia, switchi out to supply-Wire in'. The sec 
ondary circuit starting at Switch k passes 
through non-commutable coils C C in series to 
brush i, then through commutable coils.ffin 
series to brush and out to terminal-plate l'. 
If the supply-Wires in and in are assumed 
to have for the time being a current of the 
polarity indicated by arrow-heads thereon, 
and Switchesi and k are assumed to be closed, 
Co 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
2 5 
45 
 
2 
552,837 
then a primary current will flow through all 
the primary coils in series, as shown by arrow 
heads thereon, and a secondary current Will 
flow through all the secondary coils in series, 
as shown by arrow-heads thereon. The cur 
rentis simultaneously reversed in all the coils 
when the polarity of the current in the mains 
is reversed. 
The operation of the motor is as follows: 
Assuming the motor to be at rest with the 
movable magnetic system in the position 
shown in Fig. 1, then the circuit through the 
commutable coils has just been commutated 
and the coils e e, which for the time being are 
in the primary circuit, are angularly displaced 
backward from those of the non-commutable 
primaries l) b, having the same direction of 
current therein. When in this position the 
non-commutable and commutable primary 
coils jointly generate the circular magnetic 
fluxes in n, which, as shown in Figs. 1, 2 and 
3, cut across those portions of the primary 
and secondary coils lying in the air-gap, and 
also thread through some of the titurns of the 
primary and secondary coils. When the coils 
are in this position the self-induction of the 
motor is small, because the entire magnetic 
flux cannot thread through all the turns of 
the primary coils, and also because currents 
of opposite and counter inducing direction 
are flowing in the non-commutable and com 
mutable secondary coils. A large current is 
therefore permitted to flow through the mo 
tor, producing a powerful torque always in 
the same direction, because the non-commulti 
able and commutable primaries in their effort 
to inclose the entire magnetic flux and thus 
obtain greater self-induction tend to move 
into alignment with each other, thus produc 
ing attraction; and the non-commutable and 
Commutable Secondaries in their effort to 
avoid the magnetic flu N and obtain positions 
of less Or no self-induction tend to move Out 
of alignment with the primary coils, and thus 
produce repulsion, the commutable second 
aries tending to move out of line with the non 
commutable primaries, and the non-commut 
able secondaries tending to move out of line 
With the commutable primaries, but being 
fixed, reacting against and repelling the com 
mutable primaries. 
It will thus be seen that all the coils jointly 
tend to produce motion in the direction of the 
arrow p until they reach the relative positions 
shown in Fig. 1", which is a diagram showing 
the fixed and movable magnetic systems a 
and cl developed. In this position the non 
commutable and commutable primary coils 
coincide in angular position with each other, 
and therefore the motor is producing no 
torque, but has the greatest possible self-in 
duction, and Only a small magnetizing-current 
in the primary coils is required to produce the 
necessary counter electromotive force, be 
cause the entire magnetic flux now threads 
through all the turns of the primary coils, and 
also because no currents are being induced in 
the secondary coils for the reason that they are 
being threaded in opposite directions by ad 
joining magnetic fluxes. When this position 
is reached the circuit through the commutable 
coils is again commutated, coils,ff becoming 
primaries and coils e e becoming secondaries. 
While the motor is being started and is ac 
celerating in speed there is very little or no 
sparking at the moment of commutation, be 
cause even when the commutation happens to 
coincide with the highest point on the current 
wave the sparking can only be slight, as there 
is during the commutating positions of the 
coils only a small magnetizing-current flowing 
through the motor, and when the commuta 
tion happens to coincide with the Zero-point 
on the current-wave there is no sparking What 
eVe. 
When the motor is running at synchronism 
the commutation always coincides or nearly 
coincides with the Zero or no-current point on 
the current-wave, and hence no sparking 
whatever is possible when running at syn 
chronism. 
It will be seen by comparing the position 
of magnetic fluxes in 72 in Fig. 1: With those 
in Fig. 1 that the fluxes n n in Fig. It have 
moved forward with relation to the non-colm 
mutable coils b l) and cc, and that the com 
mutable coils e e and if f have moved forward 
with relation to the fluxes in 7. 
It is there 
fore obvious that all the non-commutable and 
commutable coils are subject to translation 
induction, or that induction resulting from 
the relative mechanical movement between 
the coils and fluxes in , and also to self-induc 
tion, or that induction resulting from an in 
crease and decrease of the magnetic fluxes in n. 
The translation induction in all the pri 
mary coils is in the same direction as the self 
induction and co-operates with or adds itself 
thereto, and they together oppose the flow of 
the primary current through the motor. It 
Will thus be seen that the counter electro 
motive force in the primary coils is produced 
by combined and co-operating self and trans 
lation induction, and not by self-induction 
alone, as is the case in transformer's. 
The electromotive force of self-induction 
in each of the secondary coils has the same 
direction as in those of the primary coils to 
whose flux they are subject; but as the mag 
netic fluxes have in those positions where they 
are being cut by the secondary coils oppo 
site directions to that where they are being 
cut by the primary coils, therefore the trans 
lation induction in the Secondaries is oppo 
site in direction to and opposes their self-in 
duction. This fact makes it possible to place 
the secondary coils on short circuit, their 
self-induction and the currents due thereto 
being limited by their opposing translation 
induction, and thus the secondary coils are 
prevented from being destroyed by excessive 
current flow therethrough, as would be the 
O 
25 
35 
55 
Co 
7 O 
9 O 
IOC 
I O5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
552,337 
3 
O 
case in a transformer if its secondary coils 
were short-circuited, because no opposing 
translation induction is present therein. 
To minimize self-induction the primary and 
secondary coils have their active or torque 
producing parts which pass through the air 
gap wound in parallel direction with each 
other, as shown in all the views. Referring 
to Fig. 1, which shows the relative positions 
of the coils just after the moment of com 
mutation, and when producing the greatest 
torque, it will be seen that the commutable 
Secondaries ff coincide in angular position 
with the non-commutable primaries b b, and 
that the commutable primaries e e coincide 
in angular position with the non-commutable 
Secondaries C C, and as the induced currents 
in the secondaries are opposed in direction 
to and inductively counteract the currents 
in the primaries the self-induction in the 
primaries is minimized and a large current 
is permitted to flow through the motor-coils. 
The motor is, however, in no danger of being 
destroyed by excessive current flow there 
through, as would be the case with a trans 
former if its secondary were short-circuited, 
because when running all the coils are when 
in these positions subject to translation in 
duction, and thus the current flow therein is 
limited. 
It Will thus be seen that when the coils are 
in the relative positions shown in Fig. 1, and 
the self-induction is at its lowest, as above 
explained, then the translation induction in 
all the coils is at its highest, and the motor 
depends almost entirely upon translation in 
duction for its counter electromotive force; 
but when the coils are in the relative posi 
tions shown in Fig. 1" there is no translation 
induction in the primary coils and the motor 
depends altogether upon self-induction for 
its counter electromotive force. It is there 
fore obvious that while the motor is being 
Started its counter electromotive force is 
Small and inadequate, because its coils are 
then not Subject to the full amount of trans 
lation induction and its normal self-induction 
alone is adequate only in the commutating 
positions of its coils. It is therefore desir 
able to temporarily increase the self-induc 
tion of the motor until partial or full speed 
has been reached and translation induction 
becomes available and adequate to limit the 
current flow. To attain this result the pri 
mary circuit only is closed while starting by 
moving the Switches i and k until switch i 
closes against the extended contact-point j', 
the Secondary circuit being left open until 
partial or full speed has been reached. In 
this condition the motor has sufficiently aug 
mented self-induction, due to the fact that 
the Secondary coils are inoperative by reason 
of being open-circuited and the consequent 
absence of secondary currents therein, to pre 
vent destructive current flow therethrough. 
Its torque is, however, directly proportional 
to the current flowing, as is the case in a di 
rect-current series motor, and several times 
the normal load can be started with the pri 
mary coils alone. 
When partial or full speed has been reached 
and translation induction becomes available 
and adequate for limiting the current-flow 
through the coils, then the secondary circuit 
is closed by moving the switches i and k until 
switch k contacts with switch-terminal le". 
When the motor is intended to run in One 
direction only its coils are wound for mini 
mum self-induction, as shown in Fig. 1, which 
is a diagram of a portion of the fixed magnetic 
systema and the movable magnetic system d 
developed. In Fig. 1 the cross-hatched spaces 
2. 2 and black spaces / / show the form of 
cross-section and the angular area of those 
portions of the motor-coils which are wound 
through the air-gap. 
It will be seen that the non-commutable 
coils b b and c c are wound thickest at their 
front portions in the direction of arrow p, and 
the commutable coils e e and f f are Wound 
thickest at their back portions. Therefore 
the centers of mass of coils b b and c c are 
situated forward in advance of their geometri 
cal centers and the centers of mass of coils 
ee and f fare situated backward from their 
geometrical centers. It will thus be seen that 
any two co-operating primary coils b b and ee 
have their centers of mass farther removed 
from each other than have the two correspond 
ing secondary coils c C and ff. 
It is a well-known fact that the ampre 
turns in the secondary coils of any inductive 
apparatus are nearly equal to those of the 
primary coils. It follows, therefore, that if 
the centers of mass of the secondary coils are 
placed closer together than the centers of mass 
of the primary coils, as is the case in Fig. 1, 
and the magnetic fluxes n n are prevented 
from threading through all the turns of the 
coils by adjacent and opposing fluxes, then 
the secondary coils, although having a less 
number of ampere turns than the primary 
coils, but being more advantageously placed 
relatively to the magnetic fluxes, are nearly 
as effective as the primary coils, and thus the 
self-induction of the motor is greatly reduced. 
This method of Winding can also be applied 
to Fig. 2, but in Fig. 3 can only be applied to 
the non-commutable coils, because the com 
mutable coils do not move as a Whole With re 
lation to the non-commutable coils, but are 
progressively commutated by sections, as in 
direct-current machines. 
When the motor is running at synchronism, 
its several sets of commutable coils are suc 
cessively and alternately placed in the pri 
mary and secondary circuit synchronously 
With the current alternations, the sets of coils 
being commutated each time the current 
wave reaches its zero-point. It follows, there 
fore, that a slower speed is obtained than has 
heretofore been realized With synchronizing 
motors. 
When running at synchronism with a fre 
3 5 
45 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
TIO 
II5 
I 25 
- 
IOO 
 
4. 
552,337 
7 O 
So 
IO 
25 
3 5 
45 
quency of eight thousand per minlite, a six 
pole motor having twelve commutable coils 
in two sets, as shown in Fig. 1, makes thir 
teen hundred and thirty-three and one-third 
turns per minute. The motor tends very 
strongly to maintain synchronism, and must 
be very much overloaded before it falls out 
of synchronism, which it immediately regains 
when the overload is reduced. 
The motor can be run at variable speed by 
placing a variable inductive resistance in the 
primary circuit, thus supplying a portion of 
the counter electromotive force, which before 
had to be generated in the motor-coils, and 
thus permitting a reduced speed of the motor. 
The motor can be reversed by reversing the 
circuit connections of either the non-commut 
able coils or the commutable coils. 
In Fig. 2 all the coils are shown as drum 
Wound coils. Each coil consists of a single 
lap or crossing in the air-gap. The movable 
magnetic system clhas four sets of coils. The 
two sets e e and e'e' are for the time being in 
the primary circuit, and sets.ff and f'f'' are 
in the secondary circuit. The commutator 
g has twenty-four segments connected in 
eight groups of three in each group. The sev 
eral brushes each contact with two segments 
of the commutator, thus placing the two sets 
of commutable primary coils in parallel cir 
cuit relation With each other and in Series with 
the non-commutable primary coils. Likewise 
the two sets of commutable secondary coils 
aire in parallel circuit relation with each other 
and in Series with the non-commutable sec 
ondary coils. 
It is obvious that at the mo 
ment of commutation but one set of primary 
and one set of secondary coils is commutated, 
the other set remaining in circuit. It fol 
lows from this that the circuit through the 
motor is never interrupted, as is the case in 
Fig. 1. This motor is therefore well adapted 
to be l'un at variable speed, because its de 
mand on the supply-circuit is under these 
conditions more uniform than that of Fig. 1. 
On a circuit having a current frequency of 
eight thousand per minute this motor will 
make six hundred and sixty-six and two 
thirds turns per minute. To run this motor 
at variable speed an inductive resistance in 
the primary circuit must be used. Otherwise 
the motor tends very strongly to maintain 
Synchronism. 
it is obvious that if a still greater number 
of coils is placed on the movable magnetic 
system a still slower synchronizing speed can 
be obtained 
In Fig. 3 the fixed magnetic system C, is 
shown Wound With drum-wound coils l l and 
C. C having each a single lap or crossing in the 
air-gap. The movable magnetic system is 
wound with a closed-circuit-ring Winding. 
The commutator g is cross-connected, as 
shown bylines ' ', thus requiring but a single 
pair of brushes h. and h'. The brushes 7 and 
h' each cover an angle of the commutator 
equal to the Secondary coils or sections, and 
 
are adapted to individually short-circuit the 
commutable coils or sections to form second 
aries, and they also form primary circuit-ter 
lminals for the movable magnetic system. The 
field secondaries are short-circuited on theim 
selves, as shown at t. 
In this motor the self-induction is constant 
and quite small, because the commutable 
primaries do not as a Whole move into align 
ment with the con-commutable primaries, but 
are progressively commutated by sections as 
in direct-current machines. The motor there 
fore depends almost entirely upon transla 
tion induction for its counter electromotive 
force. 
This motor does not synchronize, but will 
run at a nearly constant speed with variable 
load, regulating similar to a shunt-Wound 
notor. 
This motor is especially adapted fol' Vari 
able-speed work if a variable inductive re 
sistance is placed in the primary circuit. 
To start the motor it is necessary to use an 
inductive resistance in the primary circuit, 
as otherwise the current flow would be too 
large, and the torque, which is directly pro 
portional to the current, whether at l'est or 
in motion, would be so great as to endanger 
the motor itself or the machinery with which 
it is connected. With small moto's, however, 
having littleinertia, and being therefore able 
to accelerate quickly in speed, the inductive 
resistance at may be dispensed With. 
Having described my invention in detail, I 
will now briefly summarize its principal fea 
tures and point out their advantages. 
fill or 
permeate, when the coils are in their greatest 
torque positions, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, 
the entire circumference of the air-gap, thus 
both threading through and cutting across the 
primary and secondary coils, and therefore 
rendering every turn of Wire on the motor 
active both in the production of magnetic 
fluxes 7 
and in the production of rotary ef 
fort or torque, the primary coils directly pro 
ducing fluxes in , and producing torque by 
reason of their attraction for each other, and 
the secondary coils, by reason of the contrary 
direction of currents therein, lowering the 
self-induction in the primary coils and thus 
permitting an increased current flow there 
through, and so conducing to the production 
of fluxes 7 n., and also producing torque, by 
reason of their repulsion for the magnetic 
fluxes in 7. The magnetic fluxes 1 in, being 
circular in form, are of the shortest possible 
length, and therefore require for their produc 
tion the fewest possible ampre turns, thus 
obtaining the lowest possible self-induction 
and consuming the least possible magnetizing 
energy. 
As the motor is adapted to Work with a sin 
gle current, and as all its primary coils can 
be placed in a single series, moto's of quite 
small size can be directly connected to high 
pressure mains, and pressure-reducing trans 
In practice the magnetic fluxes 
9 O 
95 
IOC 
IOS 
C 
II 
I 2 
552,337 
5 
formers can be dispensed with, thus enhancing 
the efficiency of power transmission by the 
amount otherwise lost in the transformers, 
as well as saving the first cost and mainte 
nance of transformers. 
As the torque is directly proportional to the 
current flowing through the motor, whether 
the same is at rest or in motion, therefore the 
motor is self-starting from a state of rest with 
Several times its normal load, and has a high 
electrical efficiency under all operative con 
(litions. 
As the self-induction of the motor is very 
Small, owing to short-length magnetic circuits, 
the entire absence of magnetic leakage, and 
the consequent small number of ampere turns 
necessary to generate the magnetic fluxes, as 
Well as to the inductive action between the 
parallel- disposed primary and secondary 
coils, therefore it is wel ladapted to be oper 
ated with higher current frequencies than 
have heretofore been used, and the output 
or weight efficiency is therefore very high. 
Having now specifically described my in 
Vention, I desire to state that many modifica 
tions thereof are possible without departing 
from the spirit or essential principle of the 
invention, which consists in the employment 
of fixed and movable non-commutable and 
colmnutable primary and secondary coils hav 
ing their active or torque-producing portions 
Wound in parallel direction with each other 
and the method of and means for maintain 
ing the commutable coils in torque-producing 
circuit relation with the non-commutable 
coils. 
In the drawings and specification here with 
I have shown and described what, I believe to 
be the best organization of the elements of 
my invention, viz: a circular fixed magnetic 
system (t, without pole-pieces, wound with 
coils, and a movable magnetic system d, also 
of circular form and wound with coils, all of 
said coils being arranged where they pass 
through the air-gap at right angles both to 
the direction of rotation and to the direction 
of flow of the magnetic fluxes. It must be 
understood, however, that my invention can 
also be used with other magnetic structures. 
What I therefore claim as my invention, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an alternating current motor, a fixed 
magnetic system and a movable magnetic 
system, both having circularly arranged pri 
mary elements, and both also having circu 
larly arranged secondary elements, a portion 
of said total number of elements being com 
mutable, and a commutator for maintaining 
the commutable elements in effective or 
torque producing circuit relation with the 
non commutable elements, as set forth. 
2. In an alternating current motor, a fixed 
magnetic System and a movable magnetic 
System, both having circularly arranged pri 
mary elements, and both also having circu 
larly arranged secondary elements, one half 
of said total number of elements being com 
mutable, and a commutator for maintaining 
the commutable elements in effective Ol' 
torque producing circuit relation with the 
non commutable elements, as set forth. 
3. In an alternating current motor, a fixed 
magnetic system wound with wire having 
those of its portions which pass through the 
air gap disposed at substantially right angles 
both to the direction of rotation and to the 
direction of flow of the magnetic fluxes, and 
a movable magnetic system wound with wire 
having its air gap portions disposed in paral 
lel direction with and in inductive relation to 
the air gap portions of said wire on said fixed 
magnetic system, alternate coils or Sections 
of said wire on both the fixed and movable 
magnetic systems being placed in the primary 
circuit, and the alternate coils or sections be 
tween said primaries on both the fixed and 
movable magnetic systems being placed in 
the secondary circuit, the coils on one of said 
systems being commutable, and a commuta 
tor whereby the commutable coils are main 
tained in effective or torque producing cir 
cuit relation with the non-commutable coils, 
as set forth. 
4. In an alternating current motor, a cir 
cular fixed magnetic system without pole 
pieces, and Wound with equally spaced and 
angularly displaced primary and Secondary 
coils alternating with each other, and having 
their air gap portions disposed at Substan 
tially right angles to the direction of rotation 
and to the direction of magnetic flow, in colm 
bination with a movable magnetic system 
wound with two or more sets of independent 
and angularly displaced sets of commutable 
coils, as set forth. 
5. In an alternating current motor, a mov 
able magnetic system wound with two or more 
independent sets of commutable coils, said 
sets of coils being angularly displaced from 
each other, and a commutator for placing Said 
sets of coils in the primary circuit during 
positions of attraction, and in the secondary 
circuit during positions of repulsion, as set 
forth. 
6. In an alternating current motor, a fixed 
magnetic system and a movable magnetic sys 
tem, one of said systems being Wound with 
non commutable coils having their air gap 
portions disposed at substantially right angles 
to the direction of rotation, and the other 
magnetic system being Wound with commut 
able coils having their air gap portions dis 
posed in parallel direction with and in in 
ductive relation to the air gap portions of said 
non commutable coils on said other magnetic 
system, and a commutator for placing said 
commutable coils in the primary circuit dur 
ing positions of attraction, and in the second 
ary circuit during positions of repulsion, as 
set forth. 
7. In an alternating current motor, a fixed 
magnetic system and a movable magnetic sys 
5 
TO 
2 5 
45 
 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
6 
552,387 
o 
tem, one of said systems being Wound with 
non commutable coils having their air gap 
portions disposed at Substantially rightangles 
to the direction of rotation, and the other 
System being wound with two or more angu 
larly displaced sets of commutable coils hav 
ing their air gap portions disposed in paral 
lel direction with and in inductive relation 
to the air gap portions of said non-commut 
able coils On said other magnetic system, and 
a commutator for placing said sets of colm 
mutable coils in the primary circuit in those 
positions of each revolution where their self 
induction is east, and their attractive torque 
is greatest, and to take them out of the pri 
mary circuit in those positions where their 
Self induction is greatest, and their torque is 
nil, as set forth. 
S. In an alternating current motor, a fixed 
magnetic system and a movable magnetic sys 
tem, One of said systems being wound with 
angularly displaced non commutable primary 
and secondary coils having their air gap por 
tions disposed at substantially right angles 
to the direction of rotation, and the other sys 
tem being Wound with commutable coils hav 
ing their air gap portions disposed in parallel 
direction with and in inductive relation to 
the air gap portions of said non commutable 
coils on said other magnetic system, and a 
coin mutator for placing said commutable coils 
in the primary circuit during positions of at 
traction, and in the secondary circuit during 
positions of repulsion, as set forth. 
9. In an alternating current motor, a fixed 
magnetic system and a movable magnetic sys 
tem, one of said systems being wound with 
angularly displaced non commutable primary 
and Secondary coils having their air gap por 
tions disposed at substantially right angles 
to the direction of rotation, and the other 
system being wound with two or more angu 
larly displaced sets of commutable coils hav 
ing their air gap portions disposed in parallel 
direction with and in inductive relation to 
the air gap portions of said non commutable 
coils on said other magnetic system, and a 
commutator for placing said sets of commut 
able coils in the primary circuit in those po 
sitions of each revolution where their self in 
duction is least, and their attractive torque 
is greatest, and to take them out of the pri 
mary circuit in those positions of each revo 
25 
45 
 
lution where their self induction is greatest 
and their torque is nil, as set forth. 
10. In an alternating current motor, a fixed 
magnetic system and a movable magnetic sys 
tem, one of said systems being Wound with 
angularly displaced non commutable primary 
and secondary coils having their air gap pol'- 
tions disposed at Substantially right angles to 
the direction of rotation, and the othel' mag 
netic system being wound With two or more 
angularly displaced sets of commutable coils 
having their air gap portions disposed in pa2 
allel direction with and in inductive relation 
to the air gap portions of said non commut 
able coils on said other magnetic System, and 
a commutator for placing said sets of Com 
mutable coils in the secondary circuit in those 
positions of each revolution where their self 
induction and repelling torque are greatest, 
and to take them out of the secondary circuit 
in those positions where their self induction 
and torque are nil, as set forth. 
11. In a synchronizing alternating current 
motor, a movable magnetic system wound 
With two or more sets of commutable coils 
angularly displaced from each other, and a 
commutator for successively and alternately 
placing said sets of coils in the primary and 
secondary circuit synchronously with the cur 
rent alternations, as set forth. 
12. In an alternating current motor, a fixed 
magnetic system wound with coils whose cen 
ters of mass are displaced forward in the di 
rection of rotation from their geometrical cen 
ters, as set forth. 
13. In an alternating current motor, a mov 
able magnetic system wound with coils whose 
centers of mass are displaced inversely to the 
direction of rotation from their geometrical 
centers, as set forth. 
14. In alternating current motor, the coin 
bination with a fixed and a movable magnetic 
system, each of said magnetic Systems having 
both primary and secondary coils thereon, Of 
means for closing the circuit through said 
primary coils only while starting, and render 
ing the secondary coils in operative until pal 
tial or full speed has been reached, as set 
forth. 
ALIBERT W. SMIITII. 
Witnesses: 
H. N. JENKINS, 
II. S. WETMORE. 
55 
7 O 
So 
9 O 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552437.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 552,437, 
F. HEATHER, 
FOLDING B OAT 
Patented DeC. 31, l895. 
 
Witnesses 
6.-6%-44 
w 
w 
Inventor, 
$ $ $ 
ANDrew e.grA 
hAM.PhOTO-Tho, WASN 
GTOhic 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK HEATHER, OF YONKERS, NEW YORK. 
FOLDING B OAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,437, dated December 31, 1895. 
Application filed July 31, 1895, Serial No. 557,716, (No model.) 
O 
3O 
To aid, whon, it invay conce17. 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK HEATHER, 
a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, re 
siding at Yonkers, county of Westchester, 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Folding Boats, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My boat has a framework composed in the 
main of a number of Suitable Sections which 
are flexibly or detachably connected to each 
other at their meeting edges. Each of the 
sections is a frame of Wooden rods. A flexi 
ble covering of waterproof canvas formed in 
one piece in the shape of the boat is drawn 
over the framework. The construction of the 
framework and its combination. With the cov 
ering, as hereinafter described and claimed, 
are believed to be new. 
In the accompanying sheet of drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, Figure 
1 is a perspective view of the finished boat in 
the water. Fig. 2 is a perspective view taken 
at the same angle and showing the frame 
work, the canvas covering being removed. 
Fig. 3 is an isometric view showing how the 
several sections of the framework are folded 
upon each other when the boat is made into 
a package for carrying. Fig. 4 is a cross-sec 
tion through the middle of the boat. 
Around the circumference of the boat is a 
chain of sections hereinafter called upright 
sections. These are sections B and E to form 
the sides, sections C and D to form the bow, 
and a section. F to form the Stern. Each of 
these sections is connected to the adjoining 
section by hinges h. h, with the exception of 
one meeting place where the sections are 
joined by straps and buckles bb, so that they 
can be detached from each other. This 
buckled joint is between a section for one of 
the sides and the section for the Stern. The 
hinges are formed by Wrapping strips of 
leather around the adjoining rods of the ad 
joining sections. The rods are round and the 
leather hinges are loose on both, so that the 
sections can be folded onto each other. 
When the straps b b are unbuckled the up 
light sections can be straightened out into a 
flat chain. The Section B which forms. One 
of the sides will be a terminal section. Next 
to this will come the section C, which forms 
one side of the bow, then the section D for 
the other side of the bow, the section E for 
the side opposite the section B, and lastly the 
Section F which forms the stern. This section 
for the Stern is also a terminal section. A 
section. A to form the bottom is hinged to the 
lower edge of the terminal section B. 
The framework is brought into the shape 
of the boat by arranging the sections as 
shown in Fig. 2. The section B for one of the 
Sides and the section F for the stern are 
buckled together, and the section for the bot 
tom is buckled to the lower edge of the 
Section E. A triangular strip of canvas G 
is attached to one end of the bottom section, 
and is tied in the bow of the boat, Slats g of 
are attached to this canvas and rest on the 
lower rails of the bow-sections. All of the 
Sections have rungs or braces r r to stiffen 
them. The bottom section has two rungs 
about equidistant from each other and the 
ends. These divide the bottom section into 
three panels. Light bottom boards at a are 
laid across two of these panels and canvas 
is stretched over the middle panel. 
The canvas is to serve as a seat for the oc 
Cupant. The two bottom boards C C, and the 
Slats g g are enough to brace the bottom of 
the boat and afford places on which to step 
in getting in or Out. Canvas is used for the 
rest of the bottom because it is lighter than 
the Wood. Pockets pp of canvas are stretched 
between rungs in the side frames. These are 
Convenient for holding ammunition and bait. 
A top bracet braces the top of the framework. 
To complete the boat a waterproof flexible 
COvering of canvas H is stretched over the 
framework. Loops of ropell are on the up 
per edge of the covering. These are caught 
over buttons k.k on the upper rails of the up 
right sections which form the gunwale of 
the boat. Air-chambers c care attached to 
the covering and inflated. They are on the 
bOW, sides and stern. Those on the bow and 
sides are preferably placed at the water-line 
and not low enough down to be completely 
submerged. By thus locating them they will 
strike the Water upon any unbalancing of the 
boat, and preventit from overturning. There 
is a further element of safety in the employ 
ment of these air-chambers because they will 
keep the boat from sinking in event of its 
filling with water through puncture of the 
55 
6) 
65 
7 O 
75 
85 
9 5 
IOO 
45 
 
3 
552,487 
canvas or otherwise. The strap 77, which is 
buckled to the sides, serves as a back-rest. 
In the construction of my boat, lightness 
and portability have been the principal ob 
jects in view. It is intended especially for 
use in hunting and fishing. For the former 
purpose-as, for example, in duck-hunting 
narrowness and lightness of draft are partic 
ularly needed so that the boat can pass among 
reeds where boats which are Wider or of 
deeper draft could not go. The occupant sits 
on the bottom of the boat instead of on a seat 
so that the weight will be lower down and 
give more stability. 
To fold the frameworkinto a compact pack 
age the chain of upright sections is turned 
over so that the terminal section B will lie 
upon the section. A Which forms the bottom. 
The section C is then folded back upon Band 
section D is folded forward upon C. Section 
E is likewise folded back upon D and section 
Fforward upon E. They are thus folded upon 
each other in alternately opposite directions. 
In order that the upright sections may fold 
compactly together, it is necessary that no 
intermediate section in the line be of different 
length from those hinged to it at either end. 
It is not necessary, however, that the sections 
be all of equal length, for if one of the sec 
tions-as, for example, section F-is shorter 
than the others, it will not interfere with the 
compact folding together of the framework, 
provided that it can be made a terminal Sec 
tion. 
Suitable dimensions for the boat are six 
feet in length, twenty-one inches in width, 
and twelve inches in height. Such a boat can 
be folded into a package thirty-seven inches 
long by twenty-one inches wide by nine inches 
thick. This includes both framework and cov 
ering and a case or bag in which these are con 
tained. The case, which is not shown, can 
be used as a deck-cover when the boat is in 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
use. Within the dimensions of the package 
given there is also space for a gun-case and 
gun, game-bag, and other articles that a sports 
man may need to carry. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a framework for a folding-boat, sec 
tions to form the sides, sections to form the 
bow, and a section to form the stern, the sev 
eral sections being connected to each other at 
their meeting edges, and a bottom Section. 
which is hinged to one of the side sections, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a folding-boat, the combination with 
a removable flexible covering, of a framework 
consisting of a chain of upright sections 
hinged together at their ends so that they can 
be folded together in alternately opposite di 
rections, and a bottom section which ishinged 
to one of the upright sections, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a folding-boat, the combination with 
a removable flexible covering, of a frameWork 
consisting of a chain of upright Sections 
hinged to each other at their ends so that they 
can be folded together in alternately opposite 
directions, and a bottom section which is 
hinged to a terminal section of the chain of 
upright sections, substantially as described. 
4. In a folding-boat, the combination with 
a removable flexible covering, of a framework 
consisting of sections to form the sides, sec 
tions to form the bow, and a section to form 
the stern, the several sections being con 
nected to each other at their meeting edges, 
and a bottom section which is hinged to one of 
the side sections, substantially as described. 
Signed by me, in Yonkers, this 27th day of 
July, 1895. 
FREDERICIK IIEATHER. 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL W. BALCH, 
GALUSHA. B. BALCH, 
75 
So 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552537.txt	H. L. MARLETT. 
CAR. MOVER. 
Patented Jan. 7, 1896, 
- 
 
 
  
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 552,537. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
life e 
 
N/ 
Lz 
4. f 
a-y" 
 
Zzzerver: 
17zazer 
67%r- a 2.7. Arvy 446-4- 
- ANDREW B.GRAHAM, PHOTO-Tho...washington, D.c." 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARVEY L. MARLETT, OF ALPENA, SOUTH DAROTA. 
CAR-MOVER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,537, dated January 7, 1896. 
-- 
Application filed August 15, 1895, Serial No. 559,329, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, HARVEY L. MARLETT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Alpena, in the county of Jerauld and State of 
South Dakota, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Car-Movers; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make an 
use the same. 
- 
My invention has for its object to provide 
an improved machine especially adapted for 
moving cars, but also capable of use for mov 
ing other objects. 
To this end my invention consists of the 
novel devices and combination of devices 
hereinafter described, and defined in the 
claims. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, wherein like notations re 
fer to like parts throughout the several views. 
Figure 1 is a left side elevation of the ma 
chine in working position with some parts 
broken away. Fig. 2 is a vertical section on 
the line ac' a' of Fig. 1, looking from the left. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view of the machine in work 
ing position, and Fig. 4 is a detail in plan 
View. 
C. represents one of the 
ties of a railway-track. 
b b'bb represent a strong wheelbarrow 
like frame or support, of which parts b rep 
resents the body portion, b' the forward and 
downward extensions therefrom to serve as 
the bearings for the wheel b, b the legs, and 
b the handles of the said frame or support. 
The said frame is made of metal throughout 
and of the requisite strength for the heavy 
strain to which it is liable to be subject in 
the service. The wheelb is a broad-faced 
wheel with double flanges b, adapting the 
wheel to ride on a track-rail and prevent lat 
eral displacement of the machine. 
On the main or body portion b of the frame 
and serving to space apart and rigidly hold 
together the side bars composing the same is 
located a fixed shaft or bearing-rod c, clamped 
to the frame-bars by nuts c' and suitably 
shouldered for holding the side bars of the 
frame at the proper distances apart. On the 
said fixed shaft or rod c is loosely mounted 
the combined drum cand large gear-wheel 
c. The drum c, as shown, is assumed to be 
cast integral with the large gear-wheel c or 
to be otherwise rigidly secured thereto, so 
that the drum c' and the gear-wheel c will 
turn together. The drum cisprovided with 
a suitable cable c', having hooks c for at 
tachment to the car or other object to be 
moved. The shaft c has a spacing-collar c' 
for holding the drum in proper position. 
At the junction of the parts band b of the 
frame is mounted a shaft d, the right end of 
which extends through the frame and is an 
gular-ended for the purpose of applying there 
to a crank-handle f. The said shaft d is a 
shouldered shaft and is held by an outside 
nut d and collard. On the said shaft dis 
mounted a loose pinion d', which is held 
thereto for rotary motion therewith by a key 
or spline d', but is free to slide lengthwise of 
the shaft, so as to throw the same into or out 
of engagement with the large gear-wheel c 
at will. Near its left end said shaft dispro 
vided with a large gear-wheel d5, which is 
fixed to the shaft. 
The side bars b of the main frame are pro 
vided with bracket-like extensions b', of tri 
: angular form, which extend forward and up 
ward to a point above the level of the gear 
In the said brackets b'is mounted . 
a shaft g, which is also a shouldered shaft, 
and is secured in the said brackets by an 
outside nutg' and a collar g. The right end 
of the shaft g extends beyond the brackets 
band is of angular form in cross-section, the 
same as the shaft d, for the application thereto 
of the crank-handle f. On the said shaftg 
is loosely mounted a pinion g, which is held 
to rotate there with by a key or splineg', but is 
free for sliding motion thereon, so as to throw 
the same into or out of engagement with the 
gear-wheel d. 
The side bars b of the main frame are suit 
ably spaced apart, and rigidly tied together 
at their rear ends or points of junction with 
the handles bby a cross-bar b. In the said 
cross-bar b is formed a screw-threaded nut 
b', in which nut Works a screw h with hand 
crankh". To the lower end of the screw his 
attached the head-bar h of a toggle-lever 
grapplehh", which is adapted to engage with 
the rail ( or other fixed support as a suit 
rails, and a the wheeld. 
7o 
75 
95 
TOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
2 
552,537 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
able base of resistance. The said hand-screw 
h h', in co-operation with the said toggle-lever 
grapplehhh', therefore constitutes a power 
device anchor for securing the machine in 
Working position, properly anchored to the 
rail or other suitable base of resistance. 
From the description of the parts, as above 
set forth, it must be obvious that the side 
bars or side portions of the main frame or 
support are rigidly secured together and 
spaced apart by the shouldered shafts C dig 
and the rear end spacing-bar l'. The track 
wheel b is also preferably loose on the cross 
shaft or axle, which is preferably made as 
a shouldered shaft and rigidly secured to the 
lower ends of the parts b' of the main frame 
by outside nuts b, and is provided with suit 
able spacing-collars U for holding the wheel 
b in its proper or central position. Hence 
the shaft will co-operate with the other shafts 
c, d and g and the rear-end cross-bar b' to 
brace the parts of the main frame. It is 
also obvious from the foregoing statements 
that the machine may be moved from one 
position to another like an ordinary wheel 
barrow; that the machine is especially well 
adapted to be moved on a rail of the track, 
and to be anchored thereto by the power-de 
vice anchor in proper Working position for 
the pull required. The double flanges lon 
the wheel b serve not only to hold the ma 
chine from lateral displacement in either di 
rection, when moving the same lengthwise of 
the rail, but serve the same function against 
lateral strain under the pull on the windlass. 
Hence the said flanged wheel, together with 
the power-device anchor, will securely hold 
the machine to the rail, or in its anchored po 
sition, under any pull to which it may be sub 
jected. It is also obvious from the foregoing 
statements that the Windlass is equipped 
With interchangeable power and speed gear 
ing. With the parts as shown in Fig. 3 the 
windlass would be capable of its greatest 
pull under power applied to the crank-handle 
f, but in the slowest time; but by shifting the 
crank-handle f to the intermediate shaft d, 
either with or without shifting the pinion g 
out of engagement with the gear-wheeld, in 
creased Speed may be readily obtained with 
the corresponding loss of power. 
For unwinding the drum or running out 
the cable the pinion d may be shifted on its 
shaft d out of gear with the wheel c, so as to 
leave the drum free to turn easily on its axle 
c under the OutWard movement of the cable. 
The relative proportions of the different. 
members making up the train g did cof 
gearing for Operating the windlass may be 
varied at the Will of the maker of the machine. 
I prefer to make the members g and d as 
one to six, and the members d and c as one 
to six, and to make the drum-gear c as two 
to One With respect to the drum. This will 
give a pull of seventy-two to one, with the 
crank-handlef applied to the shaftig, as shown 
in Fig. 3. This Will afford an abundance of 
power to enable an Ordinary Workman to move 
the heaviest car on the level or any Ordinary 
grade such as would appear in an ordinary 
yard. When the crank-handle is applied to 
the shaft d, the power is of course reduced 
six times, with a corresponding increase in 
Speed. 
A car - mover constructed as herein de 
scribed is a great convenience in railway 
yards. It can be readily moved to any point 
desired, always find a solid anchorage, and 
be easily operated by one man to move a car. 
Hitherto, so far as I am aware, no such con 
venient or efficient device has been provided 
for this purpose. 
It will of course be understood that some of 
the details of the construction shown could 
be varied without departing from the spirit 
of my invention. For example, while the 
hand-screw and toggle-lever grapple is the 
most convenient and desirable form of power 
device anchor, it will be understood that other 
forms of power-device anchors might be sub 
stituted instead. 
It should also be noted that 
the flanged wheel b. b, together with the 
wheelbarrow-frame and Windlass, Would be 
a serviceable device even without the power 
device anchor, and, on the other hand, that the 
wheelbarrow-like frame and power-devicean 
chor could be made to co-operate With a 
broad-faced wheel without flanges, provided 
the strain on the Windlass was substantially 
in line with the rail or the center line of the 
machine. Both the power-device anchor and 
the double-flanged wheel blare, however, 
desirable for all work, and are a necessity for 
rendering the machine adapted to sidewise 
strain-such, for example, as pulling a car. On 
a laterally-adjacent track instead of on the 
same track. 
Of course it will be understood that this 
machine will operate to pull a car in either 
direction without changing or shifting the 
machine end to end. 
It is of course obvious that this machine is 
portable on the ground, although not quite 
so well as on the track, and that the same 
might be applied to move any other object 
as well as cars. It may also be noted that 
the head of the hand-screw h might be made 
of the same size as the heads of the shafts d 
and g, which would make it possible to use 
the single crank-handlef to operate the hand 
screw has well as the windlass. The sepa 
rate crank-handle I' for the hand-screw his 
shown in the drawings for the sake of dis 
tinctness of illustration. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is as follows: 
1. A car mover, involving the combination 
With a Windlass, of a wheelbarrow like frame 
or support for the same, bearing a double 
flanged wheel adapted to ride a trackrail and 
prevent lateral displacement of the machine 
in either direction, substantially as described. 
2. A car mover, involving the combination 
With a windlass, of a wheelbarrow like frame 
7 O. 
75 
So 
85 
95 
TOC) 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
552,537 
3. 
IO 
or support therefor, having a double flanged 
wheel adapted to ride a track rail and resist 
lateral displacement of the machine, and an 
anchor for rigidly securing said support to 
said track rail or other fixed base of resist 
ance, substantially as described. 
3. A car mover, involving the combination 
with a windlass, of a wheelbarrow like frame 
or support therefor, having a double flanged 
wheel adapted to ride the track rail and pre 
vent lateral displacement of the machine, and 
a power device anchor carried by said sup 
port and engageable With the track rail to se 
cure the machine in Working position, sub 
4. A machine for moving cars or other ob 
jects, involving the combination with a wind 
lass, of a wheelbarrow like support for the 
same, and an anchor comprising a hand screw 
on said support, and a grapple carried by said 
I5 stantially as described. 
hand screw and engageable with a track rail 
or other fixed base of resistance, substantially 
as described. 
5. The car mover described, comprising the 
wheelbarrow like support or frame, having 25 
the double flanged wheel for riding the rail 
and preventing lateral displacement of the 
machine, the Windlass thereon equipped with 
interchangeable speed and power gearing, and 
the anchor consisting of the hand screw Work- 3o 
ing through a nut on said support, and the 
toggle action grapple carried by said Screw 
for engagement with the track rail, substan 
tially as described. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 35 
HARVEY L. MARLETT. 
Witnesses: 
L. N. LOOM IS, 
DALE WALLACE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552637.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 552,637, 
A. FLAHAUX, 
AutoMAT10 CLEANER FOR RAILS OF TRAMWAYS, 0. 
Patented Jan. 7, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
sks. 
AS y 
& = &ll= sy N N 
Y 
'' 
O "YO s 
al 
-- 
 
 
2%r. 
NVENTOR 
44.1 cl44-4, 
place&r " 
- 
New . . granam. Picro-urio. WASHINGTON,tc. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR FLAHAUX, OF LAEKEN, BELGIUM. 
AUTOVATIC CLEAN ER FOR RAILS OF TRAMWAYS, &C. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,637, dated January 7, 1896. 
Application filed May 9, 1895, Serial No. 548,653, (No model.) 
95 
IOO 
55 
75 
. 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ARTHUR FLAHAUX, a 
subject of the King of the Belgians, residing 
at Laeken, near Brussels, Kingdom of Bel 
gium, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Automatic Cleaners for the 
Rails of Tramways and other Railroads, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
Myinvention relates to automatic cleaning 
devices for the rails of railroads, and particu 
larly of tramways operated by draft-animals, 
or by mechanical or electrical means. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this description, Figure 1 is a view in 
elevation of my apparatus with the box A in 
section. Fig. 2 is a side view, and Fig. 3 a. 
horizontal sectional view. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in the several views. 
My cleaning apparatus, as shown in the an 
nexed drawings, comprises an oblong box with 
solid walls placed vertically upon each longi 
tudinal girder of the carriage-frame between 
the two wheels, so as to be in line with the 
transverse axis of said carriage. Said box A, 
Figs. 1, 2 and 3, terminates at its lower end 
in a triangular platform. a. Within the space 
in said box a block B is so placed as to be 
capable of playing up and down thereinfreely. 
This block at its lower end terminates in a 
platform C, which is also triangular, and which 
is made to carry a brush.D of the same shape. 
As will be readily understood from an ex 
amination of the drawings, the block B, when 
brush.D encounters uneven obstructions upon 
the rail which it is designed to clean, will rise 
while sliding in box. A. To facilitate such 
movement the block B is provided with fric 
tion - rollers E, which travel upon the inner 
sides of the walls of Said box. 
A tramway-carriage provided with appli 
ances of the character described above Will, 
while employed in the usual Way, clean the 
rails as may become necessary. 
- 
The platform C of block B may be weighted 
with weights more or less heavy to increase the 
friction upon the rail. Thus, under ordinary 
conditions, when it is only desired to remove 
the dry dust from the depression in the rail, a 
weight of four to five kilos will be sufficient, 
while in cases of Snow-storms double that 
weight should be applied. Such application 
of weights can be accomplished in various 
ways--for instance, by providing depressions 
in platform C within which the weights may 
be placed, if desired. Care must be taken that 
the play allowed between A and C be not in 
terfered with. 
I do not wish to limit myself to the particu 
lar means described for obtaining the neces 
sary friction upon the rail. Thus, a suitable 
spring might be employed instead for obtain 
ing such necessary frictional contact. 
When the apparatus is to be placed out of 
action, the block B is elevated and a pin G is 
placed in the openings F which pass through 
the box A and the block. 
I am aware that attempts have been made 
heretofore to automatically clean the rails of 
railroads, and that various devices have been 
employed, from the simple brush placed in 
front of the carriage to the rotary brushes 
propelled from the axle; but all these systems 
are objectionable, the former because the 
brushes, being placed in front of the carriages, 
When they pass over curves and switches do 
not operate properly, as Owing to the SWing 
ing movement of the carriage it frequently 
happens that they do not properly takehold, 
and the latter because their complicated con 
struction is apt to cause their stoppage when 
their operation is particularly required, the 
mud lodging between its parts and rapidly 
clogging the same up. These disadvantages 
do not occur in connection. With my appli 
ances, as the platform which carries the brush 
prevents the mud from entering box A, owing 
to its being placed in the line of the transverse 
axis of the carriage. Further, the triangular 
form given to the brush insures the throwing 
in uniform manner of dust and mud to Ward 
the outside of the track and withoutsplashing. 
Ilaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination with a car, of a box at 
tached to the underpart of the car and a block 
substantially filling, transversely, said box, 
and thereby guided by it, adapted to operate 
vertically within said box and to be weighted 
down, and provided with a platform, to the 
under side of which is attached a triangular 
shaped brush, the apex of said brush point 
O 
I5 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
552,637 
ceive a block, provided with a triangular plat 
form to the under side of which is attached a 
brush of substantially similar shape, the apex 
of said triangular shaped platform and brush. 
pointing in a direction at right angles to the 
rails to be cleaned, the said block capable of 
Vertical movement. Within said box and of be 
ing Weighted down to give any desired degree 
of pressure to the brush, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR FLAHAUX. 
LONCE TANMART DE BROUILLOT, 
ACHILLE MOREL. 
ing in a direction at right angles to the rails 
to be cleaned, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with a car, of a box at 
tached to the under part of the car and a block 
Substantially filling, transversely, said box, 
and thereby guided by it, sliding vertically 
Within said box and adapted to be weighted 
doWn and provided with friction rollers and 
With a platform to the under side of which is 
attached a triangular shaped brush, the apex 
of said brush pointing in a direction at right 
angles to the rails to be cleaned, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination with a car, of a box hav 
ing Solid Walls, attached to the under part of 
the car. On each side, said box adapted to re 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552737.txt	(No Model.) 
F. D. WINKLEY. 
OIL CUP. 
No. 552,737, 
Patented Jan. 7, 1896. 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM. Photo-LTHowASHINGTON, C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK DREW WINKLEY, OF MADISON, WISCONSIN. 
Oil-CUP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,737, dated January 7, 1896. 
Application filed August 10, 1895, Serial No. 558,90l., (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
the body and the cap; and to this end I form 
a groove in the periphery of the upper end of 
the body, as shown at e, and sink a hole cen 
trally of this groove above the oil-opening C. 
The cap is provided with a like groove f. 
which when in position with the body regis 
ters with the groove e. In order to hold the 
parts together, I take a piece of spring metal 
9, curved into a circular form and having one 
end bent at right angles, as shown ath. This 
end I insert in the hole With the curved por 
tion extending to One side, and then place the 
cap over the body with its cut-away portion in 
line with the hole containing the bent end of 
the wire spring. The cap is then turned, and 
this lays the wire in the groove in the body, 
and as soon as the end of the Wire disappears 
in the groove the cap is pressed down to its 
full extent, with the result that the spring 
engages with its groove and thus holds the 
parts together. By this arrangement one end 
of the spring is attached to the cap, and the 
resiliency of the free portion thereofwill cause 
it to press against the Wall of the groove in the 
cap, and thereby prevent the accidental rota 
tion of the same. 
What I claim is 
In combination, an oil cup provided with 
a groove, a cover therefor having an opening 
therein registering with a filling opening in 
the cup, and being provided With a groove 
registering With the groove in the cup, and a 
spring secured at one end to the cup fitting 
Said grooves, the resiliency of the spring keep 
ing its free portion pressed against the wall 
of the groove in the cover, whereby a frictional 
restraint is exerted by said spring to prevent 
the turning of said cap, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
FRANK DREW WINKLEY. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT WOOTTON, 
DORA BEWICK. 
To CZZ tuhon, it inclity concern. 
Beit known that I, FRANKDREW WINKLEY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Mad 
ison, in the county of Dane and State of Wis 
consin, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Oil-Cups, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention is an oil-cup for bicycles and 
the like, and is an improvement over the cup 
shown in Letters Patent granted to me March 
15, 1892, No. 470,734. 
My invention includes abody which is made 
tubular to hold the oil, and a cap covering the 
body and provided with a cut-away portion 
adapted to register with or to cover the open 
ing for the oil in the body, the cover and body 
being held together by means of a spring, 
which While preventing the parts from becom 
ing detached also operates to place a sufficient 
amount of friction on the cap to prevent too 
free movement on the body, but at the same 
time the detachment of the parts may be ac 
complished when desired. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows a sectional 
view of the cup; Fig. 2, an elevation, and Fig. 
3 a detail of the parts detached and separated. 
In the drawings, A represents the body or 
post, which is screw-threaded at its lower end 
for attachment to the part to be lubricated, 
having a notch at its upper end for use of a 
screwdriver, and this is provided with an oil 
opening C, leading to the interior of the body. 
It is desirable to cover this opening a, so as 
to prevent dust or like material from passing 
to the interior, and for this purpose I provide 
a cap b, which fits over the body. This cap 
has a flange which extends down below the 
oil-opening except at One point Where the cap 
is cut away, and when this cut-away portion 
registers with the oil-opening the oil may be 
injected into the opening. When turned out 
of register, the flange of the cap completely 
covers and protects this opening. 
It is the object of the present invention to 
provide a simple form of connection between 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552837.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 552,837, 
Patented Jan. 7, 1896. 
? 
ATTORNEYS, 
ANDREW 8.5 RAHAM 
. Photo-utho.washriston, DC 
(No Model.) 
A HENLEY, 
MACHINE FOR MANUFACTURING BATE TIES, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 7, 1896, 
 
N 
 
A477 OAFAWEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
A HENLEY. 
MACHINE F0IR MANUFACTURING BAIE THES, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
No. 552,837. 
(No Model.) 
MACHINE FOR MANUFACTURING BATE TIES, 
No. 552,837. 
Patented Jan. 7, 1896, 
Z 
it 7-7- 
NSN 
| 
W 
| 
 
 
 
 
 
 
?? 
p? 
INVENIOR 
/444 w{2) 
AffOAFWEYS, 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT HENLEY, OF 
LAWRENCE, KANSAS. 
MACHINE FOR MANUFACTURING BALE-TES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,837, dated January 7, 1896. 
Application filed August 14, 1895, 
To (t/Z ?;/u???, ?? ??? ???ucer??: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT HENLEY, of 
Lawrence, in the county of Douglas and State 
of Kansas, have invented a new and Improved 
Machine for Manufacturing Baie-Ties, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved machine for manufactur 
ing wire bale-ties for baling hay, straw and 
other materials, and which is arranged to 
properly form the ties of a uniform length 
without waste of the material and without 
undue strain or wear on the various mechan 
isms of the machine. 
The invention consists principally of a 
traveling head provided with a revoluble 
spindle for forming the twist in the end of the 
wire and a pair of gripping-jaws for holding 
the wire in place during the twisting of the 
loop by the spindle. 
The invention also consists of certain parts 
and details and combinations of the same, as 
will be fully described hereinafter, and then 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar claracters of reference indi 
cate correspondling partis in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 
3 is an enlarged side elevation of the travel 
ing head. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 5 is a cross-section of the same on the 
line 55 of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 6 is a similar view 
of the same on the line 6 6 of Fig. 3. Fig. 
7 is an enlarged rear elevation of one of the 
chains. Fig. S is an enlarged side elevation 
of part of the head with the dogs in position 
for feeding the wire to the twisting-spindle. 
Fig. 9 is a plan view of the same. Fig. 10 is 
a side elevation of the same with the parts 
in position for bending the end of the wire to 
form the loop. Fig. 11 is a plan view of the 
same with parts broken out. Fig. 12 is a 
side elevation of the same with the gripping 
jaws holding the wire for forming the twist 
by the revoluble twisting-spindle. Fig. 13 is 
a sectional plan view of part of the head 
with the device for pushing the twisted loop 
of the spindle. Fig. 14 is a cross-section of 
the head on the line 1414 in Fig. 3, and show 
2 ? 
3. 5 
Serial No. 559,280 (No mode.) 
ing the cutting mechanism in elevation and 
the means for operating the cutters. Fig. 15 
is a plan view of the cutting mechanism. 
Fig. 16 is a plan view of the device for oper 
ating the cutting mechanism, and Fig. 17 is 
a cross-section of the Wire-guide. 
The improved machine is provided with a 
suitably-constructed frame A, in the ends of 
which are journaled the vertically-disposed 
shafts B and B carrying sets of sprocket 
wheels B and B, respectively, over which 
pass the sprocket-chains B", supporting two 
traveling heads C and C", both alike in con 
struction and each containing a wire-feeding 
mechanism, a gripping device, a bending de 
vice, a twisting device and a cutting mech 
anism for cutting the bail-ties to the proper 
length. The shaft B receives a continuous 
rotary motion from the main driving-shaft D, 
which latter is journaled in the front end of 
the frame A, and provided with fast and loose 
pulleys D', connected by belt with otherma 
chinery for imparting a rotary motion to the 
main driving-shaft D. 
On the main driving-shaft D is secured a 
pinion D in Inesh with a gear-wheel. E', se 
cured on a calm - shaft E extending trans 
versely and likewise journaled in suitable 
bearings in the main frame A. On this cam 
shaft E is secured a beveled gear-wheel E in 
mesh with a pinion B, secured on the lower 
end of the shaft l3, so that the rotary motion 
transmitted from the main driving-shaft D to 
the cam-shaft E is transmitted by the said 
beveled gear-wheel E to a pinion B to rotate 
the shaft B. The sprocket-wheels B on this 
shaft B impart a traveling motion to the two 
sprocket-chains B, so that the heads C and 
C are carried along, each of the heads being 
arranged to form a complete bale-tie, as here 
inafter more fully described, the said heads 
being located at opposite ends of the chains, 
as will be readily understood by reference to 
Fig. 1. Each head C or C is provided with 
a frame C''', fitted to slide longitudinally on 
guideways A attached to a beam A' of the 
The sliding motion of the 
main frame A. 
frame C'takes place during the tinae the heads 
travel on the front rulns of the chains B. 
The wire F to be formed into a bale-tie un 
winds from the usual spool and passes through 
a wire-straightening device G of any approved 
7 5 
So 
?. ? ? 
2 
552,83? 
? ? 
f 
5 
7 ? 
75 
proper p 
construction, to then pass over a guide-lever 
H mounted to swing laterally and fulcrumed 
at H on the front end of the frame A. This 
lever H. extends with its free end to the front 
of the sprocket-wheels B and midway be 
tween the same to guide the wire F to the 
heads as the latter pass to the front of the ma 
chine, coming around the sprocket-wheels B*. 
The lever H is provided on its top with 
guide-loops H*, through which passes the end 
of the wire, (see Figs. S and 9,) to hold the 
wire away from the heads until the latter have 
passed to the front of the machine, the lever 
then swinging inwardly to deliver the project 
ing end of the wire to the corresponding head. 
For this purpose the lever EI is pivotally con 
nected at its under side with a downwardly 
extending arm H', fulcrumed at its lower end 
at H to the main frame A. (See Fig. 2.) 
This 
lever H is engaged by a cam-face E of a cam 
E", secured on the shaft E, to hold the said 
lever Hnormally in the position shown in dot 
ted lines in Fig. 9 and also to bring the lever 
Hinwardly to deliver the projecting end of 
the Wire to the head C or C as the same moves. 
to the front of the machine. (See full lines 
in Figs. 8 and 9.) 
In swinging the end of the wire F trans 
versely upon the corresponding head C or C', 
it is engaged thereon by a pair of dogs I and 
I", arranged opposite each other to engage the 
top and bottom of the wire F, as is plainly 
shown in Fig. S, to carry the wire along for a 
short distance as the head C or C" moves for 
Ward on the front of the machine in the di 
rection of the arrow Ct'. The dogs I and I" are 
held adjustable in levers I and I, respect 
ively, fulcrumed at I and I on the frame C 
of the head C or C", and the rear ends of the 
said levers I and I are formed with lugs or 
projections I and I", adapted to be engaged 
by the cam-arms II and II", secured to the 
free end of the lever H'. Thus as the latter 
Swings laterally, the said cam-arms H and 
H' move in position for engagement with the 
lugs I and I, and as the head C or C'moves 
to the front of the machine the said lugs 
travel up the incline of the cam-arms Hand 
H' to impart a swinging motion to the levers 
I and I to close the dogs I and I upon the 
wire F. As the head C or C now moves for 
ward, the wire F is drawn along by the said 
dogs with the free end of the wire extending 
in front of the lug J' of the spindle J, mounted 
to revolve in suitable bearings C* secured on 
the frame C. The spindle J receives an in 
termittent rotary motion for forming the loop 
and twisting the latter a number of times, as 
hereinafter more fully described. The spindle 
J is for this purpose provided with a toothed 
wheel J, adapted to engage a longitudinally 
extending rack-bar J, attached to the beam 
A between the guideways A* of the frame 
A. (See Fig. 2.) The rack-bar J is provided 
at its forward end with an inclined tooth J. 
to give a quarter-turn to the lugJto move it 
from its horizontal forward position down 
ward to permit the wire to be laid alongside 
the lug. Next to this inclined tooth J is ar 
ranged a second tooth J inclined in the op 
posite direction to give a quarter-turn to the 
spindle J to turn the lug J'upward, backinto 
a horizontal position with the Wire on top of 
the lug J'. The wire is now bent to form the 
loop, as hereinafter more fully described. The 
tooth J is of sufficient length to hold the lug 
J" in the proper position during the bending 
operation, and at the end J of the tooth J. 
the rack-bar J8 is formed with a number of 
diagonal teeth J for imparting a continuous 
rotary motion to the wheel J to give the 
desired number of twists to the loop, the last 
tooth Jof the rack-bar being straight with 
the forward and rear ends curved upwardly 
and downwardly, respectively, for turning 
the spindle J back to its forward position 
that is, with the lug J'horizontally forward- - 
so as to be in the proper position for again en 
gaging the wire when the head C or C ?????a??? 
go 
moves to the front at the wheels B. 
spring J is coiled on the spindle J to permit 
the spindle to yield longitudinally, so as to 
compensate for the shortening the wire dur 
ing the process of forming the twists. 
- The end of the wire F when passed to the 
head C or C also passes under a gripping 
jawK fixed on the frame C, and located sone 
what in front of the lug J' of the spindle J. 
Opposite this fixed gripping-jaw Kisarranged 
agripping-jaw K", attached to a lever K, 
fulcrumed at K on the frame C, and pivot 
ally connected by a link K with a lever K? 
also journaled on the frame C', and carrying 
at its free end a friction-roller K, adapted to 
engage a fixed cam-arm K", secured on the 
main frame and adapted to impart a SWing 
ing motion to the said lever K in an upward 
direction, to cause the lever Kand the grip 
ping-jaw K'to move in a like direction. The 
gripping-jaw K' is thus finally moved in en 
gagement with the wire opposite the jaw IV, 
so that the wire is securely clamped in posi 
tion between the fixed jaw K and the mov 
able jaw K". This latter movement, however, 
does not take place until the end of the Wire 
is bent around the lug J" by the bending-arm 
L, having a lug L for engagement with the 
end of the wire. (See Figs. 10, 11 and 12.) 
The arm L is secured on a short shaft L', 
journaled in the frame C above the spindle 
J, and on this shaft Lis secured a gear-wheel 
L* in mesh with a gear-wheel L', secured on 
a shaft L also journaled in the frame C. 
On the outer end of this shaft L is secured an 
arm L', pressed on by a spring L', and adapted 
to be engaged by a fixed arm L, secured on 
the main shaft A. (See Fig. 16.) Now when 
the head C moves along, the arm L' finally 
engages the fixed arm L, so that the shaft L 
is turned and the gear-wheel L', by meshing 
with the gear-wheel L, causes a revolution of 
the shaft L', so that the bending-arm L. Swings 
downward in the direction of the arrow b' (see 
Fig. 10) to engage with its lug L" the end of 
Ioo 
I. O 
II5 
25 
: 35 
45 
?? 
 
552,837 
3 
So 
9o 
95 
?. ? ? 
II 5 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
the wire F, and bend the latter, around the 
lug J' of the spindle J and double up the 
wire to bring the extreme end under the grip 
ping-jaw K to be then engaged by the grip 
ping-jaw K" as the latter moves into its final 
uppermost position, as shown in Fig. 12. A 
loop is thus made in the wire, and the wire 
is now twisted by the spindle J being revolved 
a number of times by the wheel J engaging 
the teeth J of the rack-bar J. Previous to 
this movement, however, the spindle J re 
ceives a quarter-turn by the wheel J engag 
ing the tooth J, so that the lug J is turned 
from its downward position into a horizontal 
position to permit the arm L to form a loop 
by bending the end of the wire downward 
and forward around the lug J', the wheel J 
traveling during this operation along the 
straight part of the tooth J, so that the wheel 
and spindle remain at a standstill. When 
the operation of bending is completed the 
wheel J engages the end J and is given 
another quarter-turn to bring the lug J" into 
an upright position. 
When the arm L' leaves the fixed bar L. 
(see Fig. 12) after the wire is clamped be 
tween the jaws K and K", the spring L" forces 
the said arm L back to its normal position, 
thereby returning the bending-arm L to the 
position shown in Fig. 8. After the wire is 
twisted and carried forward at the same time 
by the forward movement of the head C or C 
until the desired length of tie is reached, then 
the wire is cut by a cutting mechanism to form 
a tie of the desired length. This cutting 
mechanism (shown in detail in Figs. 14, 15, 
and 16) is provided with a fixed knife N, se 
cured on an extension-frame A, forming part 
of the main frame A, and located opposite 
the front wheels B directly in the rear of the 
free end of the lever H, as will be readily un 
derstood by reference to Figs. 1 and 2. On 
the fixed cutting-knife N operates a movable 
knife N' for cutting off the wire passed be 
tween the two knives. The movable knife 
N" is secured on a blockN having an arm N8 
fitted to slide in suitable bearings A held on 
the extension-frame A. The block N is also 
provided with a longitudinally-extending arm 
N", engaged by one end of a rope N extend 
ing upwardly and passing over a pulley N. 
journaled in the upper portion of the exten 
sion-frame A. The rope N then extends 
downward to connect at its lower end with 
the free end of a lever N, fulcrumed at N on 
the frame A, the said lever being adapted to 
be engaged by a cam E secured on the shaft 
E. A spring N is connected with the block 
N, so as to press the latter normally down 
ward, the said spring being extended at the 
time the cam E swings the lever N down 
ward to raise the block N', and consequently 
the knife N'. 
In the upper end of the bar N is formed a 
notch N' adapted to be engaged by a lug O' 
formed on a lever O fulcrumed at O' on the 
top of the extension-frame A, so as to engage 
the lug O' with the notch N9 when the block 
Nis drawn downward by the rope Nat the 
time the cam E presses on the lever N. The 
free end of the lever O is connected by a link 
or rope O with a tripping-lever Ofulcrumed 
at O on the main frame. A near the wheels 
B, and this lever O is adapted to be engaged 
by an extension-arm C forming part of the 
frame C of the head C or C". Now it will 
be seen that when the head C or Chas moved 
to the wheels B at the front of the machine, 
and the desired length of wire has been drawn 
for forming a tie of the proper length, then 
the projection C comes in contact with the 
lever O', and swings the latter to the right 
and causes the link O' to pull on the lever O 
and move the lug O' out of engagement with 
the notch N. As soon as this takes place 
the spring N' in pulling on the block N' draws 
the latter suddenly downward to cause the 
knife N' to shear of the wire and form a bale 
tie of the proper length. 
In order to push the twisted loop F of the 
wire F out of the lugJ' of the spindle J, the 
latter is turned into a horizontal and outward 
position, as shown in Fig. 3, by the action of 
the wheel J on the tooth J located on the 
right hand of the rack-bar J. The lug P in 
the rear of the loop F now receives a swing 
ing motion, to engage the loop F and push 
the latter off the lug J', so that the finished 
bale-tie drops and falls in a trough Q sup 
ported on the main frame A. (See Fig. 2.) 
The pushing-lug P extends vertically, and is 
formed on an arm P' secured or formed on a 
shaft piournaled in suitable bearings C of 
the frame C. This shaft p is pressed on by 
a coil-spring Pto hold the arm Pand lug P 
in a rearmost position during the time the 
gripping and twisting of the wire takes place. 
as previously described. 
On the upper end of the shaft A is secured 
or formed an arm P', adapted to be engaged 
by a lug P forming part of the main frame, 
and arranged near the wheels B, so that the 
arm P4 engages the fixed lug P at the time 
the cutting off of the wire takes place be 
tween the knives N and N', and consequently 
a swinging motion is given to the arm P' in 
the direction of the arrow c' (see Fig. 13) to 
cause the lug P to engage the loop F and push 
the same off the lug J', now extending hori 
Zontally and forwardly, as shown in Fig. 13. 
The head C or C', after the wire is released 
and has dropped into the trough Q, passes 
around the wheels B, and at this time the 
otherhead C" or C has passed around the front 
wheels B to receive the cut-off end of the 
wire F by the action of the lever H, as pre 
viously explained. 
The operation is as follows: When the head 
C or C passes to the front of the machine on 
the wheels B, then the lever H swings in 
wardly to bring the end of the wire F in front 
of the lugs J' and P and between the dogs I 
and I and the jaws K and K', of which the 
two latter are both in an open position. The 
45 
?? 
4. 
552,83? 
... O 
dogs I and I" are now closed by their levers 
I and I traveling on the cam-arms H and 
II, as previously explained, so that the wire 
now moves with the head C or C". The wheel 
J now comes in contact with the end J', so 
that the spindle J, is given a quarter-turn 
(see Figs. 8 and 12) to bring the lug J" under 
the end of the wire F. The arm Lnow moves 
in contact with the fixed arm L, so that on 
the forward movement of the head the arm 
L' receives a Swinging motion, and by the gear 
wheels L and Limparts a swinging motion 
to the bending-arm , IL, tio force : the lug L 
thereof to bend the end of the wire downward 
against the under side of the remaining piece 
of Wire and against the fixed jaw K, over 
which the bending-arm L is returned by the 
action of the spring L, and as soon as the arm. 
L' leaves the end of the bar L8 the friction 
roller IX travels up the inclined end of the 
cam-arm K', so that the jaw IK' closes upon 
the extreme end of the wire to clamp the dou 
bled-up wire in position between the two 
jaws Kand K'. A further quarter-turn is 
given to the spindle J, to bring the lug Jinto 
a vertical position and out of the way of the 
cam L, to permit the latter to return, as pre-. 
viously explained, and after the wire is 
gripped between the jaws K and K then the 
Wheel Jengages the rack-teeth J and re 
ceives a number of revolutions, so that the 
previously-formed loop of the wire is given a 
number of twists to form the loop, as shown 
in Fig. 13. When the wheel J leaves the 
rack-teeth J on the further forward motion 
of the head C or C", the said wheel finally 
comes in contact with the tooth Ji, to give a 
quarter-turn to the spindle J, and swing the 
lug J" thereof into a forward horizontal posi 
tion. The head C on its further forward 
movement engages the arm C with the lever 
O', so that the cutting-knife N' is released, as 
previously explained, to cut off the wire by 
the spring N pulling the block N downward, 
the knife N" acting in conjunction with the 
knife N, as before explained. At the same 
time the arm P engages the fixed bar P, so 
that the loop F is pushed out of the lug J' of 
the spindle J, to permit the finished bale-tie 
to drop into the trough Q. The wheel J, 
when leaving the downwardly-curved rear 
end of the tooth J, receives a final quarter 
turn to move the lug J' outward into the po 
sition shown in Fig. 10. 
It is understood that the gripping-jaws K 
and K" remain closed until the time the wire 
is cut off, and at this time the friction-roller 
IX of the lever IX travels down the right-hand 
end of the cam-arm IK and swings the jaw K 
downward into an Open position, to release 
the wire F. By the arrangement described 
a positive motion is given to each of the sev 
eral devices, so that bale-ties are produced of 
a uniform length, without the slightest varia 
tion, and all undue strain or wear on the 
individual mechanisms is reduced to a mini 
mum, owing to the positive movement. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A machine for manufacturing bale ties, 
comprising a traveling head provided with a 
revoluble spindle for forming a twist in the 
end of the wire, and with a pair of gripping 
jaws for holding the wire in place during the 
twisting operation and means for Operating 
said spindle and jaws during the travel of 
said head, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
2. A machine for manufacturing baleties, 
comprising a traveling head, a revoluble spin 
dle in the said head and formed with a pro 
jection, a bending arm also in the head for 
bending the end of the wire around the said 
projection of the spindle and means for op 
erating the spindle and arm during the travel 
of the head, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
3. A machine for manufacturing bale ties, 
comprising a traveling head, a pair of dogs 
for holding the wire on the said head, a rev 
oluble spindle in the head and provided with 
a projection over which is passed the wire, a 
bending arm also in the head having a swing 
ing motion for bending the wire around the 
said projection and means for operating the 
dogs, spindle, and arm during the travel of 
the head, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
4. A machine for the manufacture of bale 
ties, comprising a traveling head, a clamping 
device held on the said head and adapted to 
engage and hold the wire to carry the latter 
along with the said head, and means Substan 
tially as described, on the head for forming the 
end of the wire into a loop and then twisting 
the same all during the travel of the head, 
substantially as shown and described. 
5. A machine for the manufacture of bale 
ties, provided with a traveling head, dogs 
held on the said head for gripping the Wire, 
a spindle having an intermittent rotary mo 
tion and provided with a lug for engagement 
with the wire, and a pair of gripping jaws 
held on the said head, to securely clamp the 
wire in place after the end is bent, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
6. A machine for manufacturing bale ties, 
comprising a traveling head, a spindle hav 
ing an intermittent rotary motion in the said 
head, and formed with a lug around which 
the wire is bent to form a loop, a pair of grip 
ping jaws for engaging the bent end of the 
wire, and means for closing the said gripping 
jaws, substantially as shown and described. 
7. A machine for the manufacture of bale 
ties, provided with a traveling head, and a 
spindle mounted to revolve in the said head 
and om which the loop is formed, the said 
spindle being mounted to turn and fitted to 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
7 ? 
75 
??? 
II. ? 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
552,887 
5 
? ? 
2 ? 
45 
slide longitudinally and means for operating 
the spindle during the travel of the head, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
8. A machine for the manufacture of bale 
ties, provided with a traveling head, a spin 
de mounted to turn and fitted to slide in the 
Said head, and a spring engaging the said 
spindle, to permit the latter to yield longitudi 
nally, substantially as shown and described. 
9. A machine for the manufacture of bale 
ties, provided with a wire guide lever having 
a lateral swinging motion, and a traveling 
head provided With gripping dogs adapted to 
engage the wire carried laterally by the said 
lever, substantially as shown and described. 
10. A machine for the manufacture of bale 
ties, provided with a wire guide lever having 
a lateral swinging motion, a traveling head 
provided with gripping dogs adapted to en 
gage the wire carried laterally by the said 
lever, and cam arms on the said lever for 
closing the said dogs upon the wire, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
11. A machine for manufacturing bale ties, 
provided with a traveling head, a revoluble 
spindle carried by the said head and having 
a projection on which the wire is bent and by 
which the wire is twisted, and a pushing arm 
mounted to Swing on the said head, and adapt 
ed to engage the twisted loop and push the 
latter over the said spindle, substantially as 
shown and described. 
1:2. A machine for manufacturing bale ties, 
comprising a traveling head having gripping 
jaws for drawing the Wire along to the proper 
length, and a cutting mechanism for cutting 
off the wire after the proper length of tie is 
reached, the said cutting mechanism being 
provided with a fixed knife, a spring-pressed 
movable knife, and a releasing device for 
tripping the said movable knife, substantially 
as shown and described. 
13. A machine for manufacturing bale ties, 
the combination with a fixed cam arm, of a 
traveling head carrying a fixed gripping jaw, 
a movable gripping jaw, and levers for actu 
ating the said movable jaw and controlled 
from the said fixed cam arm, substantially as 
shown and described. 
14. In a machine for manufacturing bale 
ties, the combination with a wire guide lever, 
and means for imparting a lateral movement 
thereto, the said guide lever carrying cam 
arms, of a traveling head, and dogs pivoted 
thereon and formed with lugs, and adapted 
to engage the said cam arms, to close the dogs 
upon the wire, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
15. A machine for manufacturing bale ties, 
comprising a main frame provided with guide 
ways, heads having frames mounted to slide 
on the said guideways, each head carrying a 
wire feeding device, a gripping device,a bend 
ing device and a twisting mechanism, endless 
chains for carrying the said heads, sprocket 
wheels over which pass the said chains, and 
means for imparting motion to the said 
sprocket wheels, substantially as shown and 
described. 
16. In a machine for manufacturing bale 
ties, the combination with a head mounted to 
travel and provided with a revoluble spindle 
carrying a toothed wheel, of a fixed rack bar 
formed at its ends with arms having curved 
ends, and adapted to engage the said toothed 
wheel on the spindle, substantially as shown 
and described. 
17. A machine for manufacturing bale ties, 
provided with a bending mechanism compris 
ing an arm having a projection for engaging 
the wire, a shaft carrying the said arm and 
provided with a gear wheel, a second shaft 
carrying a gear wheel in mesh with the first 
named gear wheel, a second arm held On the 
said second shaft, a spring pressing on the 
said second shaft, and a bar adapted to en 
gage the said second arm, to impart a SWing 
ing motion thereto, substantially as shown. 
and described. 
18. A machine for manufacturing baleties, 
comprising a traveling head adapted to en 
gage the wire, to form a twisted loop thereon 
and to feed the wire along, and a cutting 
mechanism for cutting off the wire and com 
prising a fixed knife, a spring-pressed mov 
able knife, means for drawing the movable 
knife into an uppermost, open position, a 
spring-pressed lever for locking the knife 
in an uppermost position, a tripping lever 
connected with the said locking lever, and a 
lug on the said head for engaging the said 
tripping lever, to move the locked lever out of 
engagement and release the spring-pressed 
movable knife, substantially as shown and 
described. 
ALBERT HENLEY. 
Witnesses: 
--- 
J. H. NEWLIN, 
A. H. SYMONS. 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US552938.txt	No. 552,938, 
A. WIERT. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1 
SSELS, 
Patented Jan, l4, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
A WIERT 
PROPELLER FOR, WESSELS, 
No. 552,938. 
 
Patented Jan. 14, 1896. 
12  
29 N 
Ysrs. < 
/2 
/ 
2S Eas 
f. Af<& 
 
 
 
 
 
Y 
22 
% 
\ ea. 
NY 
|Y Z27, 9. 
W 
7. 
-29 (26-2-2. -72% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT VIERT, OF CHICAGO, IILLINOIS. 
PRO PELLER FOR WESSELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 552,988, dated January 14, 1896. 
Application filed May 18, 1895, Serial No. 549,766, (No model.) 
55 
To all choir, it may conce77: 
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Propellers for Vessels, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
propellers for vessels, and it consists in cer 
tain peculiarities of the construction, novel 
arrangement and operation of the parts there 
of, as will be hereinafter more fully set forth 
and specifically claimed. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to pro 
vide a propeller which shall be simple and in 
(expensive in construction, strong and durable, 
yet effective in operation; second, such a pro 
peller which may be easily repaired in the 
event of damage to its blades, and, third, a pro 
peller which may be employed for reversing 
the movement of the vessel, and which will 
cause the same to attain great speed. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art, 
to which my invention pertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe it, 
referring to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a view in elevation of a portion 
of the stern of a vessel, showing my propeller 
and the rudder attached thereto. Fig. 2 is a 
view in elevation of the propeller detached 
from the vessel. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sec 
tional view taken on line 33 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 
is a cross-sectional view taken on line 4 4 of 
Fig. 2, looking in the direction indicated by 
the arrows; and Fig. 5 is a detail view of one 
of the blades detached from the body of the 
propeller. 
Similar letters refer to like parts through 
out the different views of the drawings. 
A represents the stern or rear portion of the 
vessel, to which is secured a bracket B hav 
ing bearings b, within which the propeller is 
journaled. To the rear portion of the bracket 
B is secured the rudder C, which forms no part 
of my invention, but is illustrated to show that 
the same does not interfere with the operation 
of my propeller. 
The internal body of the propeller is colm 
posed of a hollow piece D, preferably formed 
of sheet-metal, such as tin or other non-corro 
sive substance, and it may be painted or oth 
erwise covered so as to render it non-corrosive 
Beit known that I, ALBERT VIERT, a citizen or subject to the deleterious effects of the 
water. This piece is preferably made sub 
stantially oval or elliptical in form, as shown 
in Fig. 3 of the drawings, and is air-tight, thus 
forming a buoyant and strong support for the 
exterior portions of the body of the propeller, 
which are of two conical-shaped mantles E 
and E", the former of which is provided at its 
base or greatest diameter with a screw-thread 
ed projection e to engage screw-threads e' on 
the cone-shaped piece E, which threads are, 
as shown in Fig. 3, at the base or largest diam 
eter of said piece. The mantles or cone-shaped 
curves E and E' are hollow, so as to fit over 
the internal piece D, and are made preferably 
of steel, aluminum, or other suitable mate 
rial, and are provided on their exterior sur 
faces with a series of dovetailed grooves e, 
arranged at an angle in respect to the axis of 
the propeller to receive and retain the blades 
F and F, which are provided at their surfaces 
adjacent to the mantles with broadened bases 
or shoulders f to engage the dovetailed 
grooves, which grooves extend from the base 
of each of the cone-shaped mantles E and E' 
toward their apexes, and are, as before stated, 
arranged at an angle in respect to the axis of 
the propeller. 
The blades F of the mantle E 
are slid into the grooves etherefor from the 
base of said piece, and the blades F are like 
wise inserted in the grooves therefor in the 
mantle E", in which position the ends of the 
blades will be flush with the base of their re 
spective mantles, so that when the mantles 
are united by means of the screw-threads e 
and e' the blades will be firmly held in po 
sition. 
IBy reference to the drawings it will be seen 
and readily understood that the blades are 
flaring at their rear portions and are narrower 
and lie closer to the body of the propeller at 
their front parts, thus admitting of their easy 
progress through the volume of water, and as 
the cone-shaped mantle E is driven horizon 
tally in the water, the enlargement or increase 
in its diameter rearwardly will have the effect 
on the volume of water to compress it, and 
the blades being angularly set, as before 
stated, will throw the water rearwardly with 
great force, thus propelling the vessel with 
much speed. It is also apparent that the rear 
5 
3 5 
4. 5 
 
So 
92 
I Od 
552,938 
2 5 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of two cone-shaped 
pieces or mantles having screw-threaded por 
tions at their bases to unite them, and pro 
vided with dove-tail grooves extending from 
their bases toward their apexes, with a series 
of blades fitted in said grooves and held in po 
sition by the mantles, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. The combination of the hollow Ovai 
shaped piece D, with the hollow cone-shapel 
pieces E, and E", provided with screw-threati 
ed portions e, and e, at their bases and dove 
tail groovese, on their outer surfaces, a series 
of blades having shoulders f, fitted in said 
grooves, substantially as described. 
ALBERT VIER. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. C. TILLMIAN, 
E. A. DUGGAN. 
3. 
ends of the blades F will project somewhat 
over the front ends of the blades F, and that 
as the shape of the mantle recedes rearwardly 
the Water will close thereon and have a tend 
ency to advance the forward movement of 
the vessel. 
It is obvious that my propeller will operate 
effectually when it is desired to back the ves 
sel or reverse its movement by simply revers 
ing the movement of the shaft on which the 
propeller is mounted. 
The blades of my propeller are substantially 
triangular in cross-section, as shown in Fig. 4 
of the drawings, with the shorter side of the 
angle in the direction in which the propeller 
is to be rotated when driving the vessel for 
Ward. This construction of the blades affords 
greater strength, as the longer side of the angle 
braces the blade against the force of the vol 
ume of Water. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553038.txt	(No Model.) 
A METZGER. 
IRONING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-sheet 1. 
No. 553,038, 
Patented Jan, 14, 1896. 
Wizzeszs: 
62%-44 
 
 
Rew B. GRAHAM. PriorouTHowAshgro. 
(No Model.). 
No. 553,038, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
A. METAGER 
IRONING MACHINE, 
Patented Jan, l 4, 1896. 
Wigrss Es: 
Aff2A672/R. 
 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM. Photo-ri Ho, WAsh GTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 553,038, 
A. METZGER, 
IRONING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Jan. 14, 1896, 
Far: 4 
A. 
2) Af 
A Cy 
Z- 
   
   
2 M171716;S 2 
2, S3 
% Tz'izizi A% 
  
Z. 
Az 
: Z 
2. 
 
 
Z2 
A. 
 
 
 
Z. 
Z. 
WITNESSES 
1 MWEAFOR 47-4 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.P CTO-C-Ashisto. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST METZGER, OF HOMBURG, GERMANY. 
RON ING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,038, dated January 14, 1896. 
Application filed July 14, 1894, Serial No. 517,513. (No model.) Patented in England June 5, 1894, No. 10,878; in Belgium 
June 15, 1894, No, ll0,256 in Hungary June 24, 1894, No. 665; in Austria September 3, 1894, No,-44/4,58l; in France 
October 8, 1894, No. 238,904; in Germany December 19, 1894, No. 79,657, and in Canada May 13, 1895, No. 48,936, 
O 
2C) 
- 
tion. 
To all twhom it naty concern. 
Be it known that I, AUGUST METZGER, a 
subject of the King of Prussia, Emperor of 
Germany, residing at Homburg-Vor-der-Hhe, 
Germany, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Ironing-Machines, (for 
which I have obtained Letters Patentin Ger 
many, No. 79,657, dated December 19, 1894; 
in Austria, No. 44/4,581, dated September 3, 
1894; in Hungary, No. 665, dated June 24, 
1894; in England, No. 10,878, dated June 5, 
1894; in France, No. 238,904, dated October 8, 
1894; in Belgium, No. 110,256, dated June 15, 
1894, and in Canada, No. 48,936, dated May 
13, 1895,) of which the following is a specifica 
This invention relates to that class of iron 
ing-machines in which the polished ironing 
plate is heated and oyer which the articles to 
be ironed are passed under the action of press 
ure-rollers; and the object of the invention is 
to provide a simple and practical construction 
having a great working capacity. 
Ayinvention consists of certain features of 
construction and combinations of parts, to be 
fully described hereinafter and finally pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a front elevation of my improved ironing-ma 
chine. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same, 
partly in section, online acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 
is a plan view of the central part of the ma 
chine, the feeding and collecting tables being 
broken away and the endless band omitted. 
Fig. 4 is a section on line 4 4 of Fig. 3, show 
ing the bearing plate, rollers, and endless 
band in lowered position; and Fig. 5 is a simi 
lar section showing the same parts in raised 
position. . 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
On a suitable frame A a suitable device A 
is suspended and which may be either a char 
coal, coke orgas heater. The heating device 
is arranged in such a manner that the heat 
ing-gases in order to escape into the chimney 
flue (not shown) must pass through the cham 
ber k of a hollow casting B, which forms a 
heating-box provided with a polished top or 
ironing-plate B", and through the tubular 
exit-flue R located at one side of said box in 
the direction of the arrow p, as shown in Fig. 
J. In this manner the greatest part of the 
heat generated is absorbed by the polished 
ironing-plate B", which serves as the ironing 
surface of the machine, whereby the polish is 
imparted to the article being ironed. An end 
less band ID, of felt or other similar flexible 
material, moves over and in uniform contact 
with this ironing-plate B", and is driven by 
means of a pair of rollers C C, which are 
journaled in the ends of opposite bearing 
plates P P, and are rotated by means of a 
gear-wheel G.' mounted on the shaft Z of the 
roller C, and by a gear-wheel G which inter 
meshes with said gear-wheel G', said gear 
wheel G being mounted on a shaft g which 
is journaled in opposite sides of the frame of 
the machine and which may be turned by 
means of a hand-crank G. The side bearing 
plates of the said mechanism are supported 
at one end by means of a pair of arms H', 
which at their lower ends are pivoted on the 
shaftg, and which at their upper ends receive 
the ends of the shaft Z of the roller C, and at 
the other end by a pair of arms H, which arms 
H at their upper ends receive the ends of the 
shaft Z of the roller C", said arms H being 
fulcrumed intermediately of their ends-that 
is to say, at or about the mid-length thereof 
on a transverse shaft g'. The shaft Z' which 
carries the roller C is provided at one end 
with a sprocket-wheel F, over which runs a 
sprocket-chain F, which also runs over a 
sprocket-wheel Farranged at the correspond 
ing end of the shaft Z, which carries the other 
roller C. Said rollers C C may be adjusted 
to and from each other, so that the endless 
band D may be held at the proper degree of 
tension by means of Suitable shifting devices, 
consisting of screw-threaded shanks S oper 
ated by turn-nuts S', which are arranged be 
tween the forks of forked brackets S', said 
shanks being connected with the bearings of 
the shafts ZZ of rollers CC', and said shafts 
passing through longitudinal slots S8 of the 
plates P. As shown, shaft Z is provided at 
one end only with a shifting device. 
For the purpose of ironing articles of dif 
ferent thicknesses it is necessaly that the 
40 
45 
 
5 5 
65 
o 
So 
90 
95 
ICC 
558,038 
rollers should press upon the same with a cer 
tain amount of resiliency, so that they will 
not press upon the articles too stiffly and in 
too unyielding a manner. At the same time 
it is necessary that the rollers should be capa 
ble of being brought into close proximity to or 
of being separated from the ironing-plate B'. 
Both of these purposes are attained in the 
simplest and at the same time in the most 
practical manner by means of the mechanism 
comprising oscillating arms EIII", which hold 
the rollers in position. The extended lower 
endsh, of the arms Hare connected by means 
of chains J or other suitable connections to 
the arms K on the rock-shaft.K., draw-bars 
M, and treadle L. pivoted at L to the lower 
end of the frame of the machine in such a 
manner that the arms II and with them the 
arms EI can be rocked on their shaftsgg'. 
The endless band D can be, by means of these 
devices, moved to or from the ironing-plate 
B; but this movement is accomplished by 
the arms HEI in such a manner that the said 
band and the rollers are carried and the same 
are always maintained in parallel position 
with respect to said ironing-plate when the 
parts are in the relative position shown in the 
drawings. 
After the machine has been used for sonae 
time the endless band D may require stretch 
ing to take up the slack. This is accomplished 
by the shifting devices S, by which the shaft 
Z is moved the required distance away from 
the shaft Z, but this destroys the parallelism 
between the arms H. H." and also between the 
endless band and the ironing-plate B'. 
It is 
only necessary in this connection that, when 
the endless band is in contact with the iron 
ing-plate, this contact be uniform throughout 
the bearing-surface of the endless band, as 
before. This is permitted by constructing 
the arms H each of two sections respectively 
h and h', both of which sections are provided 
with longitudinal flangesh'h', through which 
pass the headed connecting-bolts h" that are 
retained in place by the nuts h, and one of 
said Sections having longitudinal slots for the 
passage of the bolts, so that said section h" 
may be slightly lowered by first loosening the 
nuts of the bolts, and then tightening the same 
after the desired adjustment is obtained. 
While this adjustment enables the endless 
band to form parallel contact with the iron 
ing-plate, it will be understood that when it 
is raised off of the plate the parallelism will 
not exist; but this parallelism is not neces 
sary excepting when the endless band is in 
contact with the ironing-plate. Mounted in 
the said bearing-plates PP, between the end 
rollers C C, which carry the endless band D, 
are a number of pressure-rollers C, which are 
of the same diameter as are the rollers C. C. 
These rollers C, in connection with the end 
rollers, C C, press the endless band against 
the ironing-plate B'. When placing these 
rollers C' in position, care must be taken to 
arrange them at suitable intervals apart, as 
shown in Fig. 2, so that the steam caused by 
the heat of theironing-plate B'upon the damp 
articles and which passes through the endless 
felt band should not be retained by said roll 
ers, but be allowed to escape freely into the 
surrounding atmosphere. 
In order to prevent the ironing-plate IB'be 
coming overheated, the chamber k which is 
provided Within the heating-box B should 
have at a suitable distance from the ironing 
plate B' a parallel horizontal partition or baf 
fle-plate W, as shown clearly in Fig. 4 and in 
dotted lines in Fig. 1, which is located mid 
way between the top and bottom of the heat 
ing-box, so as to divide it into an upper anci 
lower portion. The hot gases strike against 
the partition-plate: W and are caused to pass 
from the lower portion of the chamber i: 
through the exit-pipe R and directly into the 
chimney-flue, while by reason of the fact, that 
the partition-plate ends short of the side Wail 
of the heating-box, from which the exit-pipe 
extends, some of the gases pass through the 
opening formed and into the upper portion 
of the chamber, so that the ironing-plate is 
not subjected to the high degree of heat OI 
the gases in the lower part of the chamber. 
In front of the machine a feeding-table O is 
fitted to the frame Athereof at approximately 
the same height as that of the ironing-plate B", 
and at the opposite side of the machine a dis 
charge and collecting table O' is also fitted. 
These tables are preferably of the same width. 
as that of the ironing-plate B'. 
The construction of the heating device A 
is of Secondary importance so long as care is 
taken to conduct the hot gases in the manner 
above stated. 
The operation of the machine is exceedingly 
simple and is as follows: The heating device A 
is fired, so that the heat arising from the same 
will be imparted in a sufficient degree to the 
ironing-plate B'. The articles to be ironed 
having been prepared upon the feeding-table 
O, the treadle Lis depressed and the rollers and 
the endless band lifted from off the ironing 
plate. The clothes or other articles are now 
pushed forward from the feeding-table until 
they are seized by the endless band. The 
crank-handle Gis now turned in the direction 
of the arrow II, Fig. 2, and the endless band 
caused to travel in the direction of the arrow 
III, same figure. The pressure on the treadle L 
is now released, and the rollers and endless 
band are allowed to rest upon the article be 
ing ironed, SO as to press the same uniformly 
against the heated ironing-plate B", while said 
article is being drawn rearward by the end 
leSS band, in the direction of the arrow I un 
til it reaches the collecting-table O'. 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In an ironing-machine, the combination, 
with a frame provided with an ironing-plate, 
of Oscillating-arms fulcrumed to the frame, 
bearing plates pivoted to said arms, a pair of 
Having thus described my invention, 
25 
35 
45 
55 
(jo 
7 O 
So 
90 
95 
OC 
TO 
II5 
I25 
558,038 
3 
rollers mounted in said bearing-plates, a flexi 
ble endless-band arranged on said rollers, 
means connected with said arms for oscillat 
ing the same and moving the endless-band to 
and from the ironing-plate and means for ro 
tating the rollers, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an ironing-machine, the combination 
with a frame provided with an ironing-plate, 
of bearing-plates arranged above said iron 
ing-plate, a plurality of rollers mounted within 
said bearing-plates, an endless-band passing 
over said rollers, upwardly and downwardly 
movable supports for the bearing-plates, roll 
ers and endless-band, said bearing-plates and 
O 
endless band being always supported in par 
allel relation to the ironing-plate when the 
band is pressed against the same, sprocket 
wheels on the ends of the outer rollers, a 
sprocket-chain passing over said wheels, gear 
wheels and means for rotating said rollers 
through said gear-wheels, substantially as set 
forth. 
Frankfort-on-the-Main, the 20th day of 
June, 1894. 
AUGUST METZGER. 
Witnesses: 
ALVESTO S. Hog UE, 
JEAN GRUND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553138.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 553,138, 
J. F. SHEPARD. 
WAGON BRAKE. 
Patented Jam, 14, 1896. 
 
}Widresses: 
AW. A. 77%. 
self- 
z. z 7, 
- 
3. 
SS 
M72/e7ador: 
Johv 7.5/ze/Zara 
34%i, 
 
Aitore s.GRAAM hoto-Ho, WASNN.d.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. SHEPARD, OF JACKSON, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR TO STEPHEN H. 
- 
CARROLL AND THOS. J. BIRNEY, OF SAME PLACE. 
WAG ON - BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,138, dated January 14, 1896. 
Application filed April 22, 1895, Serial No. 546,654. (No model.) 
5 
O 
- 
To all whon, it may concern: 
- 
Beit known that I, JOHN F. SHEPARD, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Jackson, 
in the county of Jackson and State of Michi 
gan, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Wagon - Brakes, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
lugs. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction of the actuating or setting mechan 
ism for the brake designed to be used with 
or Without a box, and particularly in the con 
struction of such mechanism whereby the 
setting or holding ratchet is arranged upon 
the brake-beam. 
The invention further consists in the pecu 
liar construction, arrangement and combina 
tion of the various parts. 
The invention is shown as applied in con 
nection with brake-actuating mechanism de 
scribed in my patent No. 518,928, of April 
24, 1894. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the rear wheels of a wagon, showing 
my improvement applied thereto. Fig. 2 is 
a side elevation of the attachment. Fig. 3 
is a top plan view thereof without the ratchet 
attachment. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical section 
through the ratchet-lever and ratchet-plates. 
Fig. 5 is a detached perspective view of the 
ratchet-plates. Fig. 6 is an elevation of a 
modified form of holding device on the brake 
beam, and Fig. 7 is a section through a por 
tion of the brake-beam. 
A represents the wheels, B the axle, and C 
the reach of a wagon of usual construction. 
D is the brake-beam slidingly secured on 
the cross-bar E", having guide-brackets E on 
its under side, engaging over the guide-flange 
E on the cross-bar. This beam is provided 
with the usual brake-shoe F, adapted to bear 
upon the periphery of the wheel. Centrally 
of the brake-beam is secured the draft-bar 
G, which at its rear end is provided on each 
side with rack-bars II. This bar is guided 
between the plates I, which are secured upon 
a cross-bar Snear the rear end of the hounds. 
These plates are separated a sufficient dis 
tance to permit of the engagement between 
them of the lever J, which is pivoted at K 
and at its inner end is provided with the 
notched segment L, adapted to engage with 
the rack on the draft-bar. These parts last 
described are substantially of the construc 
tion described and claimed in my prior pat 
ent referred to. 
The end of the lever J en 
gages in a slot M in the lever N. 
This lever 
at its lower end is pivoted on the bracket O, 
which is secured to one end of the cross-bar 
S and is sufficiently long to give the proper 
leverage. 
The upper end of this lever is pro 
vided with a socket P to receive the pole P. 
To the rear of the lever N is secured a spring 
Q, connected to any suitable stationary part 
of the wagon-such, for instance, as the bol 
Ster. 
The parts thus constructed and described 
are intended to be used as follows: In moun 
tainous countries, where such brakes are used 
in freighting over the mountains, the driver 
of the team usually rides the wheel-horse, 
and he is provided with a suitable rope R, 
which extends from the upper end of the pole 
P. When it is desired to brake the wheels 
the driver leans forward and applies power 
through the rope and the pole to the lever N, 
which rocks the lever J and draws upon the 
brake-beam through the draft-bar G, the lev 
erage being such that even a slight pull will 
firmly set the brakes. It is evident that the 
lever may be operated as well from the Wagon 
box or from beside the wagon, if desired. 
Now in case it is desired to set the brakes 
when the box is off, I apply a holding device 
for the lever upon the brake-beam and con 
nect this with the brake-lever. The holding 
device I have shown in Figs. 2, 4 and 5 com 
prises a segmental notched or ratchet plate 
a, the complementary plate b having a plain 
face, the lever c journaled at its lower ends 
centrally of these plates and provided at one 
side with a spring d adapted to bear against 
the face of the plate b and on its opposite 
side with a flange e adapted to engage in the 
teeth on the ratchet-plate. This lever is con 
nected with the brake-lever by means of a 
link f. Now in the ordinary use of this de 
vice the brake may be set in the manner de 
scribed. When the pole P is used or if the 
pole is not used the driver or other person 
walking beside the Wagon can set the brake 
2 5 
35 
45 
5 O 
 
55 
7 O 
75 
CO 
g 
558,188 
a holding device on the brake beam for re 
taining the brake lever in its adjusted posi 
tion, comprising a vertical lever pivoted to 
the beam and a clutch mechanism for holding 
the same in different position, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a wagon brake, the combination of 
the brake beam, a rigid cross-bar a draft bar 
on the Wagon adapted to draw upon the brake 
beam, a vertical brake lever for operating 
said draft bar pivoted on said cross-bar, a 
ratchet plate on the brake beam, a lever en 
gaging said plate, and a connection between 
the brake lever and said ratchet lever, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a Wagon brake, the combination of 
the brake beam, a cross bar on the hounds, a 
draft baron said crossbar centrally connected 
to the brake beam, a rack bar on the side of 
the draft bar, a toothed segment at one end 
of an actuating lever, engaging said rack bar, 
a bracket at the end of the cross bar and a 
brake lever pivoted to said bracket and with 
which the end of the actuating lever engages, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN F. SHEPARD. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
M. B. O'DoGHERTY, 
O. F. BARTHEL. 
by drawing forwardly upon the lever, which 
will apply the brake and which will-oelocked 
in its adjusted position. 
It will be noticed that the draft is applied 
to the brake-beam centrally by the mechan 
ism described, so that there is no uneven fric 
tion upon the shoe. To release the brake the 
operator simply rocks the lever c laterally, 
compressing the spring d and disengaging the 
flange e from the notched plate a, when the 
spring Q will draw the brake-shoes free from 
the wheels. 
Instead of the ratchet-plates and spring, as 
described, I may use other holding devices 
for the brake-lever, such as the chain V, ex 
tending from the lever M and engaging a pin 
V' on the brake-beam. 
What I. claim as my invention is 
1. In a wagon brake, the combination of 
the running gear of a wagon, the crossbar S, 
the brake lever pivoted at the end thereof, 
the brake beam connection from that lever 
centrally to the beam, and connection from 
that lever to the end of the brake beam, and 
means carried by the brake beam for holding 
the brake lever in its adjusted position, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a wagon brake, the combination of 
the brake beam, a draft bar on the wagon 
adapted to draw upon the brake beam, a ver 
tical brake lever operating said draft bar, and 
O 
25 
30 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553238.txt	(No Model.) 
I. HARRISON & A. M. KILBERG. 
AUTOMATIO OPENING OR CLOSING DEVICE FOR GAS BURNERS: 
No. 553,238. 
p 
Patented Jan. 2l, 1896, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
ANOREW 8.GRAAM.PHOTO-ITHO.W Ashington.D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC HARRISON AND ALBERT M. KILBERG, OF SCRANTON, PENNSYLVANIA; 
SAID HARRISON ASSIGNOR TO BENNO C. LEWI, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMATIC OPENING OR CLOS NG DEVICE FOR GAS - BURNERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,238, dated January 21, 1896. 
Application filed July 25, 1895, Serial No. 557,076, (No model.) 
To (till u?ion, it invay concern: 
Be it known that we, ISAAC HARRISON and 
ALBERT M. KILBERG, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Scranton, in the county of 
Lackawanna and State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Automatic Opening and Closing De 
Vices for Gas-Burners; and we do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to that class of auto 
matic opening and closing devices for gas 
burners in which a strip or coil of two metals 
of varying expansibility opens the flow of gas 
When it becomes heated and cuts off the same 
When it becomes cooled to ordinary tempera 
te. 
The object of the invention is to afford a 
simpler and more reliable device of the kind 
than those heretofore in use, as a common 
gas-jet tube may be made with or fitted out 
with our device attached at but little extra 
trouble or expense, and there are no parts 
which will stick or readily get out of order. 
Referring to the drawings, Figures 1 and 2 
are each a side elevation of a gas-jet tube 
having our device attached, the parts of the 
device being shown in views taken at right 
angles each to each, the valve being closed 
in both views. Fig. 3 shows the position of 
parts when the gas is lighted and the flow is 
opened, the position of the flame and tube 
and also the position of the parts of our de 
vice when closed being shown by dotted lines. 
Fig. 4 is a top view of Figs. I and 2, and Fig. 
5 is a cross-section cutlengthwise of the same. 
Fig. 6 is a cross-section cut crosswise of the 
tube above or below the valve and giving a 
view of the valve which is automatically 
opened and closed in and by our device. Figs. 
7 and 8 show details of the Valve in cross 
sections thereof, enlarged to a scale of about 
four times the ordinary size. 
Similar letters of reference irefer to similar 
parts throughout the several views. 
In the drawings, A designates an ordinary 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
jet-tube, to the upper end of which is attached 
the coil B by means of the small rivet or screw 
e and the small lug l. 
The coil B is properly a flat spiral con 
structed of an inner strip 2 of brass and an 
outer strip of steel, the said strips soldered 
together into a single solid strip and coiled 
into a flat spiral, as shown, having its inner 
end fastened to the lug l and its other end 
pivotally connected to the upper end of the 
lever bat.f. The lever b swings on the fixed 
pin or fulcrump and is provided with a small 
arm b', to which maybe attached the pendant 
ac. The posta, on which the lever is pivoted, 
is firmly soldered to the jet-tube A. The 
lower end of the lever b is provided with a 
pins' extending through and sliding loosely 
in the slot S of the small arm or crank c', 
which is rigidly attached to the rotary part 
of the valve in the diskD. The valve is sim 
ply constructed of the disk having the slot d 
and the cock or rotary part C having a cor 
responding slot C. 
In Fig. 7, which is a cross-section of the 
valve on the line t t of Fig. 6, the dotted 
lines show the valve fully closed, and the 
full lines show it fully open. The valve is 
not liable to be turned beyond the fully-Open. 
position, because the parts are so adjusted 
that the lever b has just fully opened the 
valve when the pins' has reached the Outer 
end of the slots in the crank c'. 
In Fig. 8, which is a view of the valve in 
cross-section on the dotted line : ) of Fig. 6, 
the valve is shown in the open position, the 
tube Aisremoved, and the Small burr or other 
fastener c' which holds the cock C in place 
is shown. When the valve is placed, by Se 
curely fitting the disk D into the lower part 
of the tube A, the ends of C of course ex 
tend out through holes in the sides of the 
tube. 
The operation of our device is now readily 
explained. The coil B at ordinary tempera 
ture holds the lever bin a perpendicular and 
the valve closed. If a lighted match be held 
under the coil B so as to heat it, its coils en 
large by reason of the inner strip of said coil 
being made of metal of greater expansibility 
than that of the outer strip. The expansion. 
of the coil thus causes the leverb to take the 
85 
9 O 
95 
OO 
2 
553,238 
coil B returns the ever band the slotted arm 
to the vertical position substantially as shown 
and described. 
3. In an automatic Opening and closing de 
vice for gas burners the combination of the 
lever b having the arm b' and the pendant a 
appended thereto, the upper end of the said 
lever pivotally attached to a bi-metallic ex 
pansible coil, adapted to actuate said lever, 
and the lower end of the lever having a fixed 
pin adapted to slide in the slot S of the arm 
c' which said arm is rigidly attached to the 
rotary part of the valve controlling the flow 
of gas, in Such relation that when the pin is 
pushed by the lever b to the oute end of the 
slot S, the valve is fully open, and the said 
slot, adapted to prevent the valve from turn 
ing beyond the fully open position, Substan 
tially as specified. 
4. The combination in a device of the kind 
described of a rotary valve for controlling the 
flow of gas, consisting of the cock C seated in 
the disk D, the slots did in the said disk and 
the corresponding slot c in the said cock, and 
the longitudinally slotted arm c', the pin of 
an operating lever sliding in the slot thereof 
and adapted to open and close the said Valve, 
the said arm c' being rigidly attached to the 
cock C, and the parts so adjusted that the 
slot C of the cock is turned in line with the 
slots d of the disk D when the pins' reaches 
the outer end of the slot in the arm c', sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
5. The combination in a device of the kind 
described, of the jet tube A having a bime 
tallic flat spiral coil B of one and one half 
circumferences, encircling the tip of said 
tube, and the inner end of said coil attached 
by means of the lug l to the upper part of 
said jet tube; with the disk D fitted in the 
lower part of said jet tube and having a ro 
tary Valve seated therein, a slotted arm ex 
tending from the rotary part of said valve to 
the outside of the said tube, and a lever hav 
ing its upper end attached pivotally to the 
movable end of the aforesaid spiral coil, and 
a pin on the lower end of said lever sliding 
in the slot of the valve arm, the lever full 
Crumed intermediate of the said coil and the 
said disk, and the said valve adapted to be 
turned open by means of the said lever when 
the said coil is expanded by heat, and adapted 
to be closed as the coil is contracted again 
by cooling, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
ISAAC HARRISON. 
ALBERT M. KILBERG. 
Witnesses: 
E. F. MERRIAM, 
W. S. NEFF. 
7 O 
75 
So 
90 
95 
IOC 
IO5 
O 
- 
position shown in Fig. 3, thus holding the 
Valve open as long as the coil remains heated. 
As the jet is thus immediately lighted by the 
Same match that heats the coil, the flame of 
the burning jet keeps the coil heated and the 
valve open; but should the flame of the jet 
be in any Way extinguished the coil B imme 
diately commences to contract and close the 
Valve. If the adjustment is as it should be 
the valve will be fully closed in ten to fifteen 
Seconds after the flame is extinguished. The 
Valve may also be opened by pressing down 
Ward. On the small armb' or pulling downward 
by the pendant ac. The jet them being lighted 
Will immediately so heat the coil that when 
the pressure on U' is released the valve will 
be retained in the open position, as before ex 
plained. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The herein described automatic opening 
and closing device for gas burners, consisting 
of the spiral coil B constructed of an inner 
and an outer strip of metal, the said inner 
Strip having a greater expansibility than the 
said outer strip whereby the coils of the spiral 
are enlarged by heating; the one end of said 
spiral being rigidly attached to the tube A 
and the other end pivotally attached to the 
upper end of the lever b, the said lever being 
fulcrumed intermediate of its ends, the lower 
end of said lever being provided with the 
pins' adapted to slide in the slots of the rigid 
arm c' of the gas cock Cand adjusted thereon 
in Such position as is adapted to fully turn 
On the flow of gas when the pin s' of the lever 
is pressed to the outer end of the slots by 
means of heating the coil B, and to fully 
turn off the flow of gas when the cooling of 
the coil B returns the lever U and the arm c' 
to the Vertical position, substantially as shown 
and specified. 
2. An opening and closing device for gas 
burners consisting of a bimetallic coil, in the 
shape of a flat spiral, encircling the tip of the 
jet tube, and having one of its ends rigidly 
attached to the upper part of the said jet tube; 
a rotary valve having an arm rigidly attached 
to the rotary part thereof, a slot running 
lengthwise of the arm, a pin attached to the 
lower end of the simple leverb fulcrumed on 
the pin p attached to the side of the jet tube 
A, the upper end of said lever being pivotally 
attached to the outer end of the coil B and 
the lower end thereof being provided with the 
pins' adapted to slide in the slots of the arm 
c' of the valve-cock and adapted to open the 
said valve when the heating of the coil presses 
the pin to the Outer end of the said slot thus 
turning the cock to the open position, and to 
close the valve again when the cooling of the 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553338.txt	G. S., & R. J. DORNEY. 
WIRE STRETCHER, 
Patented Jan. 21, 1896. 
Z27.7, 
8 
(9 2. 
47 a '9 
l 
a 22- - 
i 
. 
z - 
2 is 
| 
9 s 
-Z 2 or 
i 
: 
s 
. 
as Z 22- 
H 
Assissana 
go/ 
(No Model.) 
No. 553,338. 
| 
d 
- | 
| 
resear-art. 
acces 
a set 
Hill 
II) 
AE 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE S. DORNEY AND ROBERT. J. DORNEY, OF FINDLAY, OHIO. 
WIRE-STRETCHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,338, dated January 21, 1896. 
Application filed January 2, 1895. Serial No, 533,681 (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GEORGE S. DORNEY 
and ROBERT J. DORNEY, citizens of the 
United States, and residents of Findlay, in 
the county of Hancock and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Mid-Wire Take-Ups, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to devices to which 
may be attached the meeting ends of fence 
wires, and after one meeting end of the wire 
is wound upon the device to take up the slack 
the device is secured to prevent unwinding 
and forms a permanent means of attachment 
for the meeting ends of the wires, or may hold 
them until they are otherwise secured. 
Our invention consists in certain details of 
construction of such a device whereby its cost 
of manufacture is greatly reduced and it is 
rendered more convenient in use, as will here 
inafter be more fully described, and particu 
larly pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents the manner of using our invention; 
and Fig. 2 is a detail view, on an enlarged 
Scale, illustrating the construction thereof. 
The device comprises a frame 1 which is 
formed with the straight arm 2 adapted to lie 
approximately in the line of the Wire and an 
inclined or outwardly-curved bracing-arm 3. 
The arms 2 and 3 are preferably made to pro 
ject at a small angle so as to form a loop 4 at 
the inner side of the frame, to which the end 
of one wire is attached, approximately in line 
with the wire, as shown in Fig. 2. The free 
ends of the arms 2 and 3 are provided with eyes 
5 which form bearings for removable winding 
pin.6, which is inserted in the eyes of the frame, 
as shown, and is provided with a radial orifice 
7 through which is threaded the other end of 
the wire in such a way as to cause it to hold 
while being wound upon pin 6. Formed inte 
grally with the winding-pin 6 is a crank-arm 
8, which is bent substantially at right angles 
So as to lie alongside of and close up to 
straight arm 2, and which carries at its outer 
endan integral locking-hook 9, which is down 
bent, in-bent and up-bent to provide a pocket 
9 transverse of the crank-arm and presented 
inwardly in such a manner as to engage, Seat 
the wire in its pocket 9 and prevent unwind 
ing of the pin 6. The hook 9 being presented 
in the opposite direction to that in which the 
crank-arm 8 is turned in Winding avoids in 
convenient entanglement of the wires during 
the winding operation, but readily engages 
upon movement in the opposite direction. 
As stated, the end of one wire is connected 
at the loop 4 while the other wire is threaded 
through the radialorifice 7 of the winding-pin 
6, and the crank-arm Sisturned until the slack 
in both wiresistaken up by the winding of the 
pin 6, after which the hook 9 is engaged on the 
fixed wire, as shown. The ends of the arms 
of the frame being free so as to provide a frame 
With an open end, there is not anything to in 
terfere with the winding of the wire on the 
winding-pin. The Winding-pin being remov 
able, one end of the wire can be connected 
with the frame before the Winding-pin is in 
serted, which is an advantage in applying the 
take-up. 
The pocket in the hook prevents any acci 
dental displacement of the Wire sideWise. 
As will be obvious from Fig. 1, the device 
makes a neat appearance and it will likewise 
be seen that it is economical in construction 
and durable in use. 
We are aware that it is old in stretching 
wires to have a clevis provided with a wind 
ing shaft and pawl or other means for engag 
ing same to prevent unwinding. We are also 
aware that it is not new to form the Winding 
and engaging and retaining portions of the 
device in a single piece, but such are not the 
equivalents of our improvements and we do 
not claim the same. 
What we do claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
As a new article of manufacture, a mid-wire 
take-up for wire fences comprising an ap 
proximately V-shaped frame 1 open at its 
outer end and formed with a straight arm 2, 
with an outwardly bent curved arm 3 and with 
a loop 4 connecting the curved arm. With the 
straight arm at the inner end of the frame, to 
one side of the latter, and the detachable wind 
ingpin 6 located at the open end of the frame, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
95 
4. 
2 
553,338 
and formed with a diametric orifice 7 adjacent hands, this 18th day December, 1894, in the 
to the straight arm, and with a crank-arm 8 city of Findlay, State of Ohio. 
having a down-bent, in-bent, and up-bent 
hook 9, providing a pocket 9 located trans- 
5 versely of the crank-arm for the reception of 
the Wire; substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we hereunto set our 
In presence of.- 
JoHN POE, 
R. A. BLACKFORD. 
GEORGE S. DOERNEY. 
ROBERT. J. DORNEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553438.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H., TURBUSH, 
DRAFT DEVICE FOR, CARS OR OTHER WEHICLES, 
No. 553,438, 
Patented Jan. 2l l896. 
 
N 
in 
is 
R 
WITNESSES : 
42.7% 
2% 
- 
 
1/WWEMTOR 
aly&%.2%-4.1% 
" -flux de 
AITORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. TURBUSH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
DRAFT DEVICE FOR. CARS OR OTHER WEHICLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,438, dated January 21, 1896. 
Application filed October 1, 1895, Serial No. 564,254, (No model.) 
5 
Io 
55 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES H. TURBUSH, 
of New York city, in the county and State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Draft Devices for Cars or 
other Vehicles, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to supports especially 
adapted for Sustaining the inward and out 
Ward thrust of the draw-bars of car-couplers, 
and the object of this invention is to provide 
a Support simple, durable and economic and 
capable of convenient attachment to any car 
or like vehicle, which supports will be rigid 
and constitute travelers upon which the fol 
lowers of the draw-bar or like draft device 
may have movement and upon which they 
Will be sustained, the supports being of such 
nature and so arranged as to relieve the con 
fining strap or tie for the springs from the 
severe strain which under the ordinary con 
struction they must necessarily Sustain. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this Specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section through 
a portion of the bottom of a car, illustrating 
the device in side elevation. Fig. 2 is a bot 
tom plan view of the device and a portion of 
the bottom of the car; and Fig. 3 is a detail 
side elevation of one of the followers of the 
draw-bar. 
In carrying out the invention two main 
supports or brackets A are employed. The 
brackets are of like construction, and each 
preferably consists of an upper horizontal 
member 10, extending over the end sill d of 
the car and along the top of one of the lon 
gitudinal beams a', a front vertical member 
11, which is carried downward at the front 
of the end sill a predetermined distance be 
low the same, and an upwardly-arched mem 
ber 12 engaging with the aforesaid beam (' 
at or near the bottom, being connected with 
the upper member 10 by bolts 13, passed 
through both of these members and through 
said longitudinal beam a', the rear end of the 
arched member being provided with an up 
Wardly or in Wardly extending or angular 
member 14, the upper section whereof is also 
connected with the longitudinal beam a' and 
the upper member 10 of the support by means 
of bolts 15 or their equivalents. These sup 
ports or brackets A are placed one at each 
side of the center of the car, as shown in 
Fig. 2, or one at each side of the draw-bar B. 
of the coupler C. 
The extreme lower members of each sup 
port or bracket are provided with openings 
15, the Openings in each Support or bracket 
being in longitudinal alignment. A bolt D 
is passed through all of the openings of each 
Support or bracket, being provided at each 
end with a lock-nut 16 and a jam-nut 17, the 
lock-nuts engaging With the vertical end sur 
faces of the brackets or supports. At each 
side of the center of each bolt an enlarged 
threaded surface 18 is provided, each surface 
being adapted to receive a lock-nut 19. Two 
followers 20 are held to slide on the said bolts 
between the intermediate lock-nuts 19. Each 
follower is therefore provided with an open 
ing 21 at each end, of greater diameter than 
the diameter of the bolt, and each follower 
has furthermore a central recess 22 made in 
its top and in its bottom edge to receive the 
Strap Oryoke 23 which is attached to the draw 
bar and which confines the spring 24 on the 
said bar, the forward follower abutting, as 
usual, against a shoulder on the draw-bar, 
and the rear follower having bearing against 
the rear end of the strap, the spring being be 
tween the two followers. If in practice it is 
found desirable, the spring 24may be omitted 
from the draw-bar and be placed one around 
each of the bolts between the followels. Thus 
it will be observed that when the draw-bar is 
forced inward or outward, compressing the 
spring 24, the strap 23 is relieved from the 
strain which it ordinarily has to sustain, the 
said strain being received and sustained by 
the supports A and their bolts D. It will be 
observed that the bolts D, while specifically 
such, are essentially and more broadly rods. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent- 
1. In a draft device for cars and other ve 
hicles, brackets or supports adapted for at 
. 
7 o 
75 
So 
90 
ICO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
558,438 
depending portions, a rod supported in the 
depending portions of each bracket, perfo 
rated follower plates receiving the rods in 
their perforations and movable on the rods 
and adapted to have connection. With the draw 
bar, the follower plates being below the 
brackets and a spring for actuating the fol 
lower plates, substantially as described. 
5. Abracket for uses herein described, the 
Same consisting of a horizontal upper portion 
bent downwardly at its forward end to form 
a forward portion transverse to the longitudi 
nal upper portion, the lower end of the for 
ward portion being arched and the bracket 
being thence extended rearward and parallel 
With the horizontal upper portion and finally 
downward to form a secondarch, said second 
arch being approximately longitudinally 
aligned with the first arch, substantially as 
described. 
6. In a draft apparatus, the combination of 
two brackets adapted to extend longitudinally 
with the vehicle to which they are to be at 
tached, each bracket having two depending 
portions, rods respectively supported by the 
depending portions and longitudinally below 
the brackets, two follower plates slidably car 
ried by the rods and out of contact with the 
brackets, and a spring for actuating the fol 
lower plates, the followerplates being capable 
of connection with the drawbar, Substantially 
as described. 
JAMES H. TURIBUSH. 
55 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES E. DOUGLASS, 
ROBT. QUINTLAN. 
O 
tachment to the under portion of the car or 
vehicle, having arched lower ends, the brack 
ets being arranged side by side, a bolt extend 
ing longitudinally through each bracket, fol 
5 lowers having sliding movement on the said 
bolt, and means, substantially as described, 
for limiting the movement of the followers in 
a forwardly or in a rearwardly direction, as 
and for the purpose specified. 
2. In a draft device for cars, vehicles and 
the like, the combination, with supports or 
brackets adapted for attachment to a car or 
vehicle and having an arched lower end, 
bolts passed through the arched lower ends 
I5 of the brackets, being secured in position 
thereon, adjusting nuts located at each side 
of the center of each bolt, followers held to 
slide upon the bolts between the inner nuts, 
a spriagintervening the followers, and a draw 
2O bar arranged to slide the followers on the said 
bolts when pressed inward or drawn outward, 
as and for the purpose specified. 
3. Abracket for use asherein described, the 
same consisting of a horizontal upper portion 
25 bent downwardly at its forward end to form 
a forward portion transverse to the longitudi 
nal upper portion, the lower end of the for 
Ward portion being arched and the bracket 
being thence extended rearward and formed 
3o with a second and rear arch longitudinally 
aligned with the first arch and the terminal 
of the bracket being bent up over the second 
and rear arch, substantially as described. 
4. In a draft apparatus, the combination of 
35 two brackets adapted to be held longitudinally 
with the car, each of said brackets having two 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553538.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. MORGAN. 
RHEOSTAT, 
No. 553,538, 
Patented Jan. 28, 1896. 
13 Le 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM IIENRY MORGAN, OF ALLIANCE, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF THREE 
FOURTHS TO THOMAS R. MORGAN, SR. THOMAS R. MORGAN, JR., AND 
JOHN R. MORGAN, OF SAME PLACE. 
RHEO STAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,538, dated January 28, 1896. 
Application filed November 21, 1891, Serial No. 412,627, (No model.) 
O 
To all, Luhon, it nay conce77: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM HENRY MOR 
GAN, of Alliance, in the county of Stark and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Rheostats; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
rheostats, the object being to provide a sim 
ple, compact, and effective device that can 
be manufactured at a cost considerably less 
than the rheostats now generally employed; 
I5 and it consists in a base, a resistance medium 
carried thereby, plates partly embedded in 
said resistance medium, and a movable con 
tact carried by the base and adapted to en 
gage the plates. 
Myinvention further consists in certain de 
tails Of construction and combinations of 
parts, as Will be more fully described and 
pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
25 a view in plan of a rheostat embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a view in section of the 
Same, and Fig. 3 is a sectional view of a modi 
fication. 
A represents a base, preferably of non-con 
3O ducting material, provided with a groove or 
gutter b, preferably curved in the arc of a 
Circle concentric with the axis of the switch 
ing-arm B. The base can be made of metal 
and the groove or gutter lined with a non 
35 conductor, as shown at c', and instead of 
making the groove or gutter curved it can be 
in the form of a rectangle, of sufficient width, 
however, that the resistance material therein 
will always be in contact with the contacts 
4O of the Switching-arm throughout the move 
ments of the latter. The groove or gutter b 
is filled with a composition C, composed of 
carbon or plumbago and any suitable resist 
ance-Such as asbestos fiber or cement, Port 
The plumbago or carbon and the asbestos, 
cement, or mica are thoroughly mixed with 
Sufficient Water or a suitable binder to make 
a plastic mass, and the latter is then molded 
45 land cement, ground mica, &c. 
 
55 
under pressure into the proper shape to fit 
the groove or gutter and allowed to harden 
before being secured within the groove or 
gutter, or the plastic mass can be placed di 
rectly into the groove and allowed to harden 
therein. The sides of the frame at the oppo 
site sides of the gutter are grooved or slotted, 
as at d, for the reception of the metal con 
tact-plates e, the latter being insulated from 
the frame, but in intimate contact with the 
composition. The upper ends of the contact 
plates are preferably turned over or bent, as 
shown, to increase the contact-surfaces. 
Secured to the base A are the brackets F, 
carrying the switching-arm B, the latter car 
rying at its free end metal contacts adapted 
to move in contact with the surface of the re 
sistance medium, or with the bent ends of the 
metal contact-plates embedded in the compo 
sition or resistance medium. This switching 
arm and the contacts carried thereby can be 
of the Well-known forms now commonly em 
ployed, and hence forms no part of my pres 
ent invention. One Wire, L, of the exterior 
circuit is connected with the traveling con 
tact through the switching-arm B, the other 
wire, L', of said circuit being connected with 
one end of the resistance medium. The plate 
or rest M is insulated from the resistance ma 
terial, and the contact on the switching-arm 
B rests thereon when it is desired to open the 
circuit or disconnect it entirely from the re 
sistances. 
In operating the device the contact travels 
in contact with the metal plates embedded 
therein progressively in series with each other 
in the circuit of the wires T. and L or cutting 
them progressively out of the circuit, accord 
ing to the directionin which the armis moved. 
The plumbago, instead of being applied in 
a plastic State, can be used in loose or pow 
dered form, and, if desired, can be used with 
out asbestos, mica, cement or other resistance 
medium. When so employed, as shown in 
Fig. 3, I prefer to slot the lower frame, and 
provide a cover v, which not only prevents 
the blowing away of the carbon, but also pre 
vents the plates from coming together, due to 
the sliding of the contact over them. The 
75 
85 
90 
95 
553,538 
5 
frame and cover, if made of conducting ma 
telial, are insulated from the plates. 
Ilaving fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
IPatent, is 
In a rheostat the combination. With a base, 
a resistance medium carried thereby and a 
selries of metal plates partly embedded in said 
l'esistance medium, of a movable contact, car 
ried by the base and adapted to engage the 
plates, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subseil)- 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
ENRY MOR (AN. 
WILLIAM 
F. E. DUSSEL, 
II. W. IIARRIS. 
IC 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553639.txt	E. O. BENNETT, 
BUTTONHOLE MECHANISM FOR SEWING MACHINES, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 553,639, 
Patented Jan. 28, 1896, 
7774.55a5. 
-c/ya. es. 
...a4.2%e2.- 
Arbrew BGRAHAM. Photo tho. WAshingtoN.O.C. 
 
E. O. BENNETT, 
BUTTONHOLE MECHANISM.FOR SEWING MACHINES, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 553,639, 
Patented Jan. 28, 1896. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
en 
  
 
 
  
 
() hy2. 
 
S. 
26SS 
Wwww.v. 
S. 
SS 
 
 
\SSWnesot's. 
-3%.2%. 
-S-4%azz - - - - - -- 
f r 
snuweva, 
- 4cess-6.6nez 
by &otia. Settiak. 
ANDREW B GRAMAM PhorouTHowAshington.pc. 
E. O. BENNETT. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3 
(No Model.) 
BUTTONHOLE MECHANISM FOR SEWING MACHINES, 
No. 553,639, 
 
Patented Jan. 28, 1896. 
centerline 
I 
Altese first 
II 
E. 
--- 
2 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
- 
 
 
MEI 
H Enterri 2% 
24. 
 
IW 
d 
SIG 
..&ee( 4.22eeze-, 
ANDREW 8.GRAHAM, PHoro-uTHO.washington.pc. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD O. BENNETT, OF HAY WARDS, CALIFORNIA. 
BUTTONHOLE VECHANISM FOR SEWING MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,639, dated January 28, 1896. 
Application filed September 26, 1893, Serial No. 486,51l, (No model.) 
IO 
6 
To (t/l, whon, it natzy concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD O. BENNETT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in Hay 
Wards, in the ?ounty of Alameda and State of 
California, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Buttonhole Mechan 
ism for Sewing-Machines, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates generally to that 
class or description of sewing-machine attach 
ments for stitching buttonholes in which the 
mechanism is actuated from the feed mechan 
isin of the sewing-machine; and my invention 
embraces the mechanical structure of an at 
tachment that is adapted for use on most all 
the different makes of family sewing - ma 
chines at the present time on the market and 
that has the capacity to produce a finished but 
tonhole either with or without an eye at one 
end and to Work several different sizes of but 
tonholes. 
Among the novel points and features in this 
mechanism attention is called, more particu 
larly, to the construction of the work-carrying 
clamp and the means of vibrating or moving 
the same; to the mechanism by which the an 
gular direction of the vibratory movements of 
the cloth-carrying clamp at the end of the 
buttonhole is changed on radiating lines to 
form the eye; also to the means for produc 
ing a buttonhole-stitch composed of two suc 
cessive stitches or interlocking of the upper 
and lower threads upon the cut edge of the 
buttonhole-slit to one stitch or interlocking 
in the cloth back of the slit; also to the spe 
cial mechanism for actuating all the working 
parts of the attachment from the feed-point 
or feed-bar of the sewing-machine. 
These improvements and the manner in 
which I proceed to construct, combine, and 
embody them in an improved attachment for 
producing buttonholes with the sewing mech 
anism of a Sewing-machine are fully explained 
in the following description, in which refer 
ence is had by figures and lettel's to the draw 
ings that accompany and form a part of this 
specification. 
In such drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of the complete attachment in position 
under the needle of a sewing-machine. Fig. 
2 is a view in perspective of the main actu 
ating-shaft and the parts connecting it with 
the feed mechanism of the machine. Fig. 3 
is a detail view in perspective of the cloth 
clamp and the stripper-foot removed from the 
machine. Fig. 4 is a top view of the princi 
pal part composing the bed-plate and the car 
riage of the attachment, the top plate of the 
carriage and some of the parts being removed. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the attachment 
with portions of its bed-plate at the front and 
rear shown in section. Figs. 5 and 6 are dia 
grams illustrating the two different styles of 
buttonholes made by this attachment. Fig. 
7 is a diagram intended to illustrate the char 
acter of the stitch produced by this attach 
ment. Fig. 8 is a front view on an enlarged 
scale showing the cloth-clamp and stripper 
foot in cross-section on a vertical line just in 
front of the stripper-foot as it is seen in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 9 is a top view of the bed-plate and the car 
riage, with the top plate of the carriage re 
moved, showing parts of the mechanisms that 
produce the progressive movement of the 
cloth-clamp and also the parts that change the 
angular direction of the vibrations. Figs. 10, 
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 show such parts in 
detail. Fig. 17 is a plan of the bed-plates. 
Fig. 18 is a top view of the parts that connect 
the actuating-shaft of the attachment with 
the feed-bar of the machine. Fig. 19 is a top 
view of the carriage. Figs. 20 and 21 are 
details in top view of the compound slide or 
that part of the mechanism to which the cloth 
clamp is connected and by which its several 
movements are produced. Fig. 22 shows one 
of the slides of this mechanism in perspective. 
Figs. 23 and 24 are top views of the parts com 
posing the cloth-clamp. Figs. 25, 26, 27, and 
2S are elevations, in detail and on an enlarged 
scale, of the parts that give vibratory move 
ment to the cloth-clamp. Fig. 29 is a vertical 
section taken through the center of the turn 
post M, with those parts omitted that are car 
ried by the turn-post. Fig. 30 is a view of 
the turn-post M from the right-hand side of 
Fig. 25, with the parts thereof separated but 
in their relative positions. FigS. 31, 32, 33, 
34, 35, and 36 are views in detail of the turn 
post and the several parts that are mounted 
on and carried by it. 
Fig. 37 is a top view 
of the circular guide that produces and regul 
lates the widening of the line of stitches along 
the curved edges of the buttonhole-slit. Fig. 
9 O 
95 
OC) 
25 
35 
45 
2 
553,639 
O 
25 
45 
55 
38 is an elevation of the same part. Fig. 39 
shows in top view the turn-post MI, the cir 
cular guide, and parts of the stationary bed 
plate with the switch-pieces or means that 
adjust and control the curved guide. Fig. 40 
is a top view of the principal parts that feed 
or move the carriage progressively and also 
rotate the turn-post M to change the angular 
direction of the vibrations. Figs. 41 and 42 
show in detail the parts of the switch-piece 
that control the circular guide and also regul 
late the length of travel of the carriage to 
produce buttonholes of different sizes. 
The principal parts of the stationary bed 
plate of the attachment consist of the flat 
base-plate A, the tubular projection A'at the 
front and the perpendicular standing part A* 
at one side. This stationary part is secured 
on the bed of the sewing-machine in position 
under the needle-arm by means of the gage 
screw that is used to hold in place the hem 
mer and other attachments of the sewing-ma 
chine. A hole or slot is provided for such 
screw in the front part A'; but as the position 
of the hole provided in the sewing-machine 
bed for this screw will be found to vary in 
different machines with relation to the needle 
hole in the machine throat-plate the hole for 
such screw in my attachment would not, in 
some cases, lie in proper position if it were 
fixed or unchangeable, and therefore to fur 
nish suitable scope or degree of adjustability 
in this respect I set in an opening in the part 
A a circular turn plate or disk C*, in which 
is a curved slot C for the fastening-screw, and 
thus by revolving such disk in the bed-plate 
its curved slot can be brought into a position 
wherein some portion of the slot will set di 
rectly over the screw-hole in the machine-bed 
beneath and the clamp-screw can be inserted 
and screwed down against the disk. In connec 
tion with this means of fastening the attach 
lment in place I employ an adjustable clamp 
ing-dog II in the extension A' to hold the 
bed-plate A down at the front. This part II is 
composed of a threaded nut fitted to move in 
the slotted recess provided for it in the under 
side of the part A', and threaded to work on 
a screw-shaft II" extending through the recess 
and exposed at the front end of the part A', 
so that the screw-shaft can be turned from 
the outside to move the nut longitudinally in 
the slot. From the bottom of the nut pro 
jects the dog II, which being curved back 
Ward is made to engage the edge of the ma 
chine-bed by turning the screw-shaft. This 
fastening serves to hold the attachment 
against either lateral or perpendicular move 
ment out of place under the needle. 
An extension on the rear side of the bed 
plate similar to the extension A' at the front, 
with a slotted recess, a sliding dog and a set 
ting-shaft of the same construction can be 
added to the attachment, as indicated by the 
dotted lines in Fig. 17 of the drawings; but 
for all ordinary sizes of these attachments 
which it may be practicable to manufacture 
I consider the single adjustable dog at the 
front of the bed-plate in connection with the 
clamp-screw a sufficient holding means. 
B indicates a sliding carriage mounted on 
and movable in the bed-plate in a longitudi 
nal direction only. In this movement it starts 
from the extreme position on the real' end of 
the stationary bed-plate A to the extreme for 
ward position at the front, and thence back 
again to the starting-point. In this move 
ment it carries the cloth-clamp D or that part 
in buttonhole attachments of this kind which 
grip or confine and move the cloth under the 
sewing mechanism with the progressive and 
vibratory movements. The step-by-step pro 
gressive movements of the carriage space the 
stitches along the slit, and the same are pro 
duced by the following parts, shown in de 
tail in Figs. 2 to 16, inclusive. 
The rock-shaft I is supported in bearings 
provided on the front end of the bed-plate, 
and at the left-hand side of the attachment 
the forked arm 3, secured on the end of the 
shaft, embraces a pin 2 on a horizontal slide 
bar I, extending forward at the side of the 
cloth-clamp. To the end of this bar 1 is con 
nected the reciprocating slide-plate G, that 
engages with the feed-bar of the sewing-mil 
chine, and thereby produces reciprocations of 
the bar I from the feed mechanism of the ma 
chine. A coil-spring on the rod behind the 
slide-plate G acts to produce return move 
ment of the plate after every throw produced 
by the feed-bar. 
The pinion T is fixed on the top face of a 
horizontally-set disk T', that is formed with 
a bottom flange, as seen in Fig. 12, and is 
mounted to rotate on the screw-studt', fixed 
in the top of the support A on the bed-plate, 
and on such flange is supported a ring T', 
loosely fitting and turning on the disk. To 
such ring is pivoted at t a dog T, having a 
tooth or pointed end that sets against the lim 
of the disk and grips the same by friction 
when the opposite end of such dog is moved 
in one direction, but slips on the disk without 
biting when movement in the contrary direc 
tion takes place. The outer end of the dog 
is attached to the vibrating angle-piece U, 
which is centered to turn on an upright stud 
V on the top of the standing part of the bed 
plate at the front, and to such piece U the end 
of the dog is attached by a stud U' and a slot 
in the dog. The other arm or member of the 
part U is attached by means of a knuckle 
joint or a ball-and-socket joint V V to the 
end of the upright rocker-arm V, that is fast 
on the rock-shaft I. Thus the rock-shaft by 
its vibrations moves the piece U in a horizon 
tal arc and throws the outer end of the clog 
T first in one direction, whereby it grips 
and turns the disk T, and then in the op 
posite direction, when it slips and takes a 
fresh grip on the disk for the next step. 
The pinion rotated by these parts gives the 
carriage intermittent progressive movement 
through the medium of the lack S, which is 
75 
95 
Od 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
 
558,639 
3 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
a frame having internal toothed portions S* 
SS on the two sides and across one end, and 
having, also, a central guide-bar S extend 
ing longitudinally across the top. The rack 
is pivoted at b on the carriage B, and swings 
in an arc on that part as a center. The 
Straight portions of the rack set at equal an 
gles on both sides of the bar S, and each ver 
tical face of that bar is parallel with the 
pitch-line of the rack opposite. In the space 
between such guiding edge of the bar and the 
teeth of the rack opposite the pinion T moves 
along in mesh with the rack, and a roller is 
set on the stud of the pinion to bear against 
and travel along the side of the bar S. The 
toothed portion S at the end of the rack is 
struck on an arc from the pivot bas the cen 
ter, whereby the rack is moved over to the 
opposite side when the pinion leaves the 
straight portion S and engages the curved 
portion. Thus the pinion T, starting at the 
outer end of the rack S*, will draw the car 
riage forward step by step to the front of the 
stationary bed-plate, and then being shifted 
over to the opposite side the pinion T will en 
gage the opposite rack S and draw the car 
riage back step by step to the starting-point. 
By these movements of the carriage the cloth 
clamp is fed forward to lay the stitches along 
one side of the buttonhole-slit, and thenback 
again to stitch the opposite side of the slit. 
The function of the guide-bar S is to hold 
the pinion in mesh with the racks on both 
sides, and the bar is cut away at S on the 
under side to let the roller on the pinion-stud 
pass under the bar from one side to the other 
of the frame. 
The guide-bar S is hinged at S, Fig. 16, 
and is lifted at the outer end when a button 
hole is completed, in order to set the rack S 
back by hand and thus bring the pinion T 
into gear with the rack S* in starting another 
buttonhole. 
It should be noticed that the reverse move 
ment of the rack-frame Stakes place at the 
end of the buttonhole where the eye is formed, 
and consequently the carriage has no pro 
gressive movement at such time, and the 
cloth-clamp is acted on only by that part of the 
mechanism which gives the vibratory move 
mentS. 
The cloth-clamp in attachments of this kind 
is composed generally of two jaws connected 
at the rear end and opening at the front end 
to receive and clamp the cloth between them, 
and having an open center for the needle to 
work in. These two parts should so coact, 
especially when the slit is cut in the cloth be 
fore the buttonhole is worked, that the cloth 
is firmly seized and confined all around the 
edges of the slit; and the best work is ob 
tained when the upper jaw moves as nearly 
as possible parallel with the plane of the lower 
jaw under the cloth, and presses uniformly 
upon the cloth. It is also essential in the con 
struction of these clamps that the cloth should 
lie as closely as possible to the surface of the 
needle throat-plate in the sewing-machine 
bed, in order to bring the interlocking of the 
two threads uniformly on the edges of the 
cloth and produce an even stitch. All these 
features and results are secured in and by my 
construction of cloth-clamp. Its bottom jaw 
is a plate D, with standing sides slightly 
curved on their inner face, and a flat cloth 
carrying surface around a central opening for 
the needle to work in. This plate is consid 
erably thicker at the back part than such 
cloth-supporting portion, and the sides are cut 
away, as shown in Fig. 3, to receive the side 
bars of the upper jaw, D*. 
The upper jaw is 
a plate of spring metal with an open center 
for the needle and a narrow rim or portion of 
metal extending around the sides and on the 
ends of such opening. Its side bars D* are 
cut integral with the metal of the bottom and 
bent up to form parallel arms standing back 
ward, as shown in Figs. 3 and 22. Such arms 
are attached by screws d to the back end of 
the jaw D, so that the upper jaw opens and 
shuts on these screws as pivots. The lower 
jaw is formed of thin steel, and its opening 
conforms in outline to the shape of a button 
hole, but somewhat larger than the largest 
size which the attachment is capable of mak 
ing. The edges of this opening should lie just 
outside of the line on which the needle enters 
the cloth, and the corresponding opening in 
the upper jaw should be somewhat smaller, 
so that its edges just overlap the edges of the 
lower opening. The side bars of the upper 
jaw are turned up on a curve where they join 
the body of the clamp near the front end, and 
from that point they are cut away to lie over 
the raised sides of the bottom plate, D, as seen 
in Figs. 1 and 3. These clamping-surfaces are 
flat and lie closely together around the button 
hole-opening; but along the sides of the clamp 
they extend upwardly in a curve, in conse 
quence of which the cloth is firmly gripped 
lengthwise of the buttonhole along both sides, 
besides being held down smoothly around the 
opening in which the needle works. By vir 
tue of this construction, also, the upper jaw 
presses firmly upon the cloth at the rear and 
front ends of the buttonhole-slit. This con 
struction is especially adapted for the thin 
ner kinds of fabrics, such as linen and muslin, 
which are found difficult to stretch smoothly 
and to clamp firmly. To open and close the 
upper jaw an eccentric d, turning freely in a 
recess in the thickportion of the lower jaw, is 
arranged to work at both ends in slots in the 
side bars of the upper jaw, Figs. 3, 4, 23, and 
24, so that the eccentric when turned in these 
slots will move the jaw. 
The lever Dis fixed 
to one end of the eccentric for turning it. 
L is a thin metal plate, on which the bot 
tom plate of the cloth-clamp slides smoothly 
when in motion. Such plate is fixed to the 
front of the bed-plate A to cover the feed 
points of the sewing-machine, and it has a 
hole L' for the needle. When the cloth is 
held in the clamp this plate is practically the 
IIC 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
IO 
25 
45 
5 5 
only thickness of metal that intervenes be 
tween the cloth and the Surface of the needle 
throat-plate of the machine, and consequently 
the cloth in the clamp is not raised materially 
above the normal plane or position in which 
it would be if it were being sewed in the ma 
chine. This is an important point in the con 
struction of these clamps, as the proper in 
terlocking of the threads and the formation 
of the stitches are disturbed when the cloth. 
is raised materially out of the plane in which 
it is intended to move under the needle. 
F is a device which I term the stripper 
foot, the function of which is to prevent the 
cloth from rising with the needle and the cut 
edges of the buttonhole from being drawn up 
by the thread during the formation of the 
stitches on the edge. The foot of this piece 
is not allowed to rest directly upon the cloth, 
but sets in the opening of the clamp across 
the slit and in such close relation to the sur 
face of the cloth and to the path of the needle 
that it strips the cloth from the needle and 
holds it down whenever there is any tendency. 
to rise or be drawn up as the needle leaves 
the cloth and the stitch is tightened. It is 
adjusted therefore to hold the cloth down 
without actually pressing upon it during the 
movements of the cloth-clamp. The acting 
portion of the foot on the side next the needle 
has a turned-down lip F, corresponding in 
breadth to the space between the edges of the 
opening on the upper jaw and setting in the 
opening between the edges, so that in the 
vibratory or sidewise movements it travels 
with the clamp; but it is not affected by the 
progressive movements of the clamp. It re 
mains therefore in position in front of and 
close to the needle and bridges the opening 
in the clamp just at that point. This foot, F 
is fixed to a sleeve F ?itted to slide on the 
rock-shaft I across the front of the frame, so 
that it moves sidewise with the clamp, but it 
is capable also of turning on the rock-shaft 
so that the foot can be raised up out of the 
way to inspect the work or to adjust the cloth 
in the clamp. A set-screw F in the upper 
end of the foot bearing against the front, cross 
bar of the frame limits the upward movement 
of the stripper-foot, and by its adjustment 
serves to regulate the working position of the 
end F* with reference to the thickness of the 
cloth in the clamp, and in such manner that 
the foot shall exert no pressure upon the 
workin the clamp, but shall prevent the cloth 
from rising with the needle. The screw there 
fore controls the length of such lifting move 
ment of the foot. The cross-bar of the frame 
is cut away, as shown in Figs. 1, S, and 17, to 
let the set-screw back into it, so that the foot 
can be turned up and thrown back out of the 
way when the needle is raised, and the bar F. 
that is pivoted at f and turns up and down 
on that point can be set across the frame to 
close the opening A and form a bearing for 
the set-screw F. By pressing on its outer end 
such bar E is thrown above the slot in the 
frame, as indicated in dotted lines, Fig. S, and 
the stripper-foot can be turned up out of the 
way. I do not confine myself to this manner 
of supporting the stripper-foot, however, as 
it may be found necessary in some cases to 
attach it to or support it from some other part 
of the attachment. 
The cloth-clamp is attached to the carriage 
by the compound slide P P^, and such slide 
also connects the cloth-clamp with the mech 
anism that imparts the vibrations or sidewise 
movements, and by the combined action of 
one part on the other peculiar angular move 
ments of the carriage are produced by which 
the stitches are laid substantially perpendicul 
lar at right angles to the cut edges of the but 
tonhole around the curved or circular por 
tions as well as on the straight portions of the 
opening. All the vibratory movements of the 
clamp are produced from an eccentric K. On 
a counter-shaft k mounted in bearings BIB 
on the rear end of the carriage and geared 
into the principal shaft E by gears 9 10. Gear 
9 has a bearing B on the carriage, but it is 
fitted to slide on the shaft E and remains in 
gear with the wheel 10 while turning with the 
shaft. 
The eccentric Koperates a pivoted lever 12 
through the medium of a strap or sleeve Sur 
rounding the eccentric and provided with 
arms 11 between which is pivoted one end of 
the lever 12. The inner end of the lever is 
forked at 14 to take a sliding collar 17 and is 
attached to that piece by screw-pivots. The 
collar 17 is fitted to slide upon an upright 
turn-post M, the upper end of which has a 
bearing in the top plate of the carriage, while 
a circular plate MX, formed integral with the 
lower end of the post, is secured to a circular 
block or turn-table M. Such part M forming 
the bottom of the turn-post is fitted into a cir 
cular recess B in the bed of the carriage, and 
the turn-post being centered in this mannel' 
in the top plate and in the bed of the cal'riage 
it turns smoothly on these bearings. The 
block M is recessed horizontally from end to 
end, Figs. 29 and 34, and has also a long slot 
30 in the bottom. In Sulch recess is fitted a 
slide-plate 22 having a slot 21 in the top face 
near one end, and the Oscillating motion of the 
lever 12 gives reciprocating movement to this 
slide 22 through the agency of the collar 17 and 
a pivoted lever N attached to the collar by a 
link 18. The lever N is pivoted at 19 between 
lugs M! on the top of plate M*, and its lower 
end sets into a slot 21 in a slide 22, so that the 
movement of the lever on its pivot19 produces 
reciprocating movement of the slide in the 
guide-block M. A movable shoe 23, fitted into 
the grooved bottom face of the slide 22, is 
locked in that piece by a pivoted tumbler 26 
and is carried by the slide. To this shoe or 
piece 23 the slide-plates P, that carry the 
work-clamp, are connected by a socket 25 on 
the plate and a stud 24 projecting from the 
bottom face of the shoe. This stud works 
through theslot 30. These parts connect part 
OO 
IIC) 
I 25 
 
558,639 
5 
O 
P of the compound slide with the lever 12 and 
produce vibratory motions of the clamp by 
which the stitches are laid from the edge of 
the buttonhole backward into the cloth. 
I use an eccentric to actuate the lever 12 and 
so adjust the lever that the forked ends shall 
vibrate in an arc of greater or less length the 
center of which is the fulcrum 13, (indicated 
in Fig. 26,) for the purpose of producing a pe 
culiar buttonhole-Stitch of the character illus 
trated in the diagram Fig. 7, Sheet 1. In 
this stitch the needle makes two stitches or 
interlocking of the threads in the slit to one 
stitch in the cloth back from the edge, thus 
forming a pearl finish directly on the edge 
of the slit around the buttonhole of a strong 
and substantial character that will not ravel 
when cut or worn at any point. 
The shaft K* is geared into the shaft E, 
and the eccentric is moved and timed with 
respect to the carriage-feed to produce two 
vibrations simultaneously with two progress 
ive steps of the carriage followed by one pro 
gressive step without a vibration, so that 
while the eccentric is passing over the center 
the needle takes one stitch in the cloth and 
lays the threads aca, Fig. 7, from the edge of 
the slit into the cloth and back again; but 
while the eccentric is passing under the cen 
ter no vibrations of the clamp are produced 
and the feeding movement above acts on the 
cloth-clamp during that time to cause the 
needle to make two stitches in the slit. 
The three acting points at which the stitches 
are formed in every complete revolution of 
the eccentric are indicated at y a 2, Fig. 26. 
In passing from y to ac, and then from ac to 2, 
the two long stitches on the cloth are made, 
but in passing from 2 to if the eccentric pro 
duces no vibration of the forked lever 12, 
and the short stitch is made in the slit while 
the eccentric is passing under the center be 
tween the two points 2 y. 
ty. Thus the long 
stitches laid from the edge into the cloth be 
ing produced from the vibrations of the lever 
12, the length of these stitches is determined 
by the length of the vibrations of the outer 
or forked end of the lever, and such vibra 
tions are changed in length by shifting the 
fulcrum-block 3 nearer to or farther from 
the turn-post M. This block 13 slides in a 
slot in the top plate B*, and is threaded to 
work on a screw-shaft W, supported in lugs 
at the front and rear ends of a rectangular 
opening in the top plate, and provided with 
a capstan-head on the outer end. The full 
crum for the lever 12 in this block is formed 
of a cross-pin n, loosely fitting the block and 
having a transverse aperture through it for 
the level, so that while the pin itself is con 
fined in the block it is free to turn or rock in 
it, and at the same time the pin will slide 
along the lever when that partis being shifted 
forward or backward in the opening of the 
top plate to change the position of the lever's 
fulcrum. 
It will be noticed that the screw-shaft w 
has an inclined position in the frame of the 
carriage and at the front end is higher than 
at the rear end instead of being horizontal. 
This is done for the purpose of making the 
forked end 14 of the lever start from the same 
point in beginning its downward stroke, at 
which time the opposite end of the lever is at 
the lowest point, of course, and the eccentric 
is passing from 2 to y, and during such time 
the needle is making the stitch in the slit of 
the buttonhole. If the fulcrum-block were 
shifted on a horizontal line it will be seen that 
the change in the position of the fulcrum 
would vary the length of throw of the end 14 
of the lever in such manner that the starting 
point at the top of the arc described by such 
end 14 would be changed as the length of the 
arc described was changed, and consequently 
the needle would not start always from the slit 
of the buttonhole in laying the long stitches 
into the cloth, such stitches as already before 
described being produced by the movements 
of the outer end of the lever 12 from y to ac and 
from a to 2, but by dropping the fulcrum 13 
as it is moved back or raising it as it is moved 
forward in any change of position I am en 
abled to make the lever 12 start from the same 
point in beginning its downstroke in all ad 
justments of the fulcrum-block. 
The slide P, as before described, sets in the 
part P*, Figs. 20, 21, and 22, in the longitudi 
nal groove in that piece, and an intersecting 
groove crossing at a right angle in the same 
piece takes the guide-ribs b on the bottom of 
the carriage. The part P* therefore can slide 
transversely on the carriage, but cannot move 
lengthwise, and the part P is free to move 
lengthwise only in the other part. The com 
bined sliding movements of these two pieces 
acted on by the reciprocating shoe 22 control 
and change the angular direction of the vibra 
tions according as the position of that piece 22 
is changed by rotating its actuating-lever N 
above a vertical axis. 
At the beginning of the operation to stitch 
abuttonhole the postM that forms such axis is 
set in the position represented in the top view, 
Fig. 39, the plane of oscillation of the lever 
N standing at a right angle to the line of the 
buttonhole-slit, so that the slide 22 recipro 
cates across the carriage and not lengthWise. 
In this position of the post M the slide Phas 
no movement, but the other plate P* being 
moved transversely on the guide-ribs gives 
lateral movement to the part P that rests in 
it, and consequently vibrations of the cloth 
clamp are produced in the direction of the 
straight arrow, Fig. 30, at right angles to the 
buttonhole-slit and from one side of the cen 
ter line of the slit outward and back again. 
By these vibrations the stitches are laid along 
one side of the buttonhole from the inner 
end to the eye, at which point the angular 
direction of the stitches are changed by the 
rotary movement of the post M in the direc 
tion of the curved arrow, Fig. 39, and the 
center 19 on which the lever N Vibrates is 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
5 9 
CO 
I o5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
G 
558,639 
7 O 
75 
So 
rotated about the post as a center until the 
same has made a complete half turn or revo 
lution from ac to 1, Fig. 39. At such time the 
movements of the slide 22 act upon both parts 
of the compound slide P PX and the com 
bined movements of one slide in the other 
have the effect to lay the stitches radially 
around the circular edge of the eye into the 
When the lever N in its rotation 
cloth. 
comes to the opposite side of the center, as 
seen in Fig. 1 and indicated at ty, Fig. 39, the 
vibrations will take place in a direction at 
right angles to the line of the buttonhole 
slit, and the stitches will be laid along the 
opposite sides of the button-hole from the eye 
back to the starting-point. 
IBy referring to Figs. (3 and 7 of the drawings 
it will be seen that in forming a buttonhole 
with an eye at one end the line of the slit 
where its straight edge joins the eye recedes 
gradually on a curve or widens on both sides 
to join the half-circle that completes the eye, 
So that it is necessary to shift the line of vi 
brations away from or back of the center line 
at these points. These two divergent lines 
of stitches, as from y to 2, Figs. 6 and 7, on 
both sides are produced by simply moving 
the shoe 23 in the slide 22 a small amount to 
throw the stud 24 away from its normal cen 
ter position under the center line of the turn 
post, and by this means the starting-point of 
such vibratory movement of the slide P is 
shifted to one side of the center, while the 
length of the vibrations remains practically 
the same. 
Referring to Figs. 30 to 36, it will be seen 
that the shoe 23 sets into the grooved bottom 
of the slide 22 and that piece in turn sets into 
the recessed block that forms the bottom of 
the turn-post M. Consequently the length of 
the vibrations of the slide produced by the 
lever N are not affected by shifting the shoe 
in the slide, although the starting-point of the 
cloth-clalaap in each vibration will be set back 
from the center line to conform to the widen 
ing of the slit. The parts that shift the shoe 
to produce this widening of the buttonhole 
at the eye consist of the tumbler 26, the 
grooved keeper-plate 38 and the lifting-pin 
36 mounted on the turn-postM, and the curved 
guide R mounted on the carriage. 
The guide R embracing the base-block of 
the turn-post is fixed on a post R' supported 
at top and bottom ends in the bed and top 
plate of the carriage and capable of limited 
vertical movement in its supports. The face 
of the curved guide next to the turn-post is 
grooved to receive a collar 37 fast on the lift 
ing-pin 36. The guide R has limited vertical 
movement, but otherwise it is stationary in 
the carriage. Both the grooved plate 38 fixed 
On the end of the lifting-pin 36 and the tum 
bler 26 set in a recess in the side of the slide 
22. The lifting-pin, which is supported in a 
socket in the block M and is movable up and 
down therein, acts on the shoe 23 when moved 
up or down to shift that part in the slide 
22 through the medium of the grooved plate 
and the tumbler 26 before mentioned, for the 
tumbler, which is pivoted at 27, connects the 
shoe 23 to the lifting-pin, and as that last 
mentioned piece is raised or lowered by the 
curved guide R, before described, the tumbler 
is caused to set the shoe 23 either forward or 
backward in the slide 22. This last-men 
tioned piece is recessed for the tumbler and 
the grooved plate 38, as seen in Figs. 31 and 
35 of the drawings. 
The function of the curved guide R is to 
raise and depress the pin 36 and to hold it at 
rest when the turn-post is rotated on its cen 
ter. When the guide is raised it moves the 
shoe to One side or backward from the centel', 
or when it is lowered it brings the shoe back 
to the center again. Figs. 37, 38 and 39 show 
the shape and the position of this guide on the 
carriage. 
The guide R is raised and depressed by a 
pin 31, fixed in the post R', and a slotted 
switch-piece composed of two grooved or slot 
ted plates 3233, Figs. 41 and 42, in a recess in 
the standing sides A* of the bed-plate. The 
end of the pin 31 travels in the slot formed 
by the switch-piece for the entire movement of 
the carriage, from its extreme position at the 
back to its farthest position forward on the 
bed, and controls the length of movement of 
the carriage and also lifts and depresses the 
circular guide. The two parts 32 33 of the 
switch-piece on the stationary frame A* are 
adjustable to form a guide-slot of greater or 
less length and either with or without a rise 
or upward inclination at the front end. One 
piece 33 is movable horizontally in the recess 
and is held by a clamp-screw 34, working 
through a slot in the part A. The other piece 
32 is movable in an arc in the recess in such 
part A* and is held by a clamp-screw 35. Its 
inner face is grooved or recessed, as shown in 
Figs. 41 and 42, so that in all positions its slot 
is a continuation of the slot formed by the 
piece 33. The pin 31 traveling along these 
pieces is guided by and necessarily follows the 
direction of the slot which they form, and the 
guide R is held at rest by the straight portions 
of the slot and is either elevated or depressed 
by the inclines at the ends of the slot during 
the travel of the carriage in the bed. As I 
have before described, the office of the guide 
R is to raise and lower the lifting-pin 36 and 
by moving that piece up or down it throws the 
stud 24 on the bottom of the reciprocating 
piece 22 either away from or back to the cen 
ter line of the turn-post, and thus shifts the 
starting-point of the vibrations either away 
from or toward the straightline of the button 
hole-slit. This divergence of the line of 
stitching in sewing from the end of the but 
tonhole toward the eye must begin when the 
straight line meets the curve, as at ac, Fig. 6, 
and must continue until the line has widened 
sufficiently to form the eye, and then from 
that point 2 the stitches are laid in a semi 
circle around to the opposite side. That point 
OO 
IO 
II5 
2 d 
I 25 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
558,639 
75 
95 
OO 
I O5 
TIO 
O 
2 is the point, therefore, at which the circular 
guide ceases to move the sliding shoe 23 and 
the turn-post M begins to turn on its center, 
making a half-revolution. The change in the 
angular vibrations thus produced has the ef 
fect to lay the stitches around the half-circle 
to the point 2, and when that point is reached 
the turn-post has carried the lever N around 
to the outer side, as shown in Fig. 1 and by 
broken lines in Fig. 39. In this position the 
turn-post then remains while the carriage 
moves back step by step to finish the other 
side of the buttonhole. The rotation of the 
turn-post M is produced by the pinion 29 on 
the upper part of the post and the curved 
rack S', which is a part of the carriage-moving 
rack S, the curved rack being always in mesh 
with the pinion 29. These parts are so ad 
justed that when the driving-pinion Ten 
gages the teeth Sat the end of the frame and 
swings the frame on its pivot b the carriage 
has completed its forward travel and one side 
of the buttonhole from the end to the half 
circle of the eye has been finished, and then 
the turn-post is rotated by the movement of 
the rack-frame Son its pivot, but the carriage 
itself has no progressive movement while that 
takes place. Before this rotative movement 
of the turn-post begins, however, the pin 31 
has reached the end of the inclined groove in 
the piece 32 and has elevated the guide R, 
throwing the shoe 23 off the center and there 
by shifting the starting-point of the vibrations 
back of the center line. After this, the ex 
treme front end of the slot having been 
reached by the pin 31, the carriage has no 
farther movement forward, and the rack S 
turns the post Maround one half-revolution 
step by step to lay the stitches in radial lines 
around the half-circle of the eye. At the 
completion of the half-circle the carriage be 
gins to feed backward step by step and the 
pin 31 moves backward and down the incline 
until it strikes the straight portion of the 
guide-slot in the piece 33. The line of stitch 
ing is then converged or thrown in from the 
end of the half-circle by the gradual drawing 
down of the guide Rim the same manner as it 
was thrown out during the divergence or 
widening of the line by the lifting of the guide 
R, and the stitches are laid in the cloth and 
on the straight line of the buttonhole-slit. 
In the operation of stitching a buttonhole 
the length of the slot formed by the switch 
piece 3233 determines the length of the but 
tonhole, and the pitch of the incline at the 
front end determines the form of the button 
hole at the end. Therefore these pieces are 
made adjustable, as described, to enable sev 
eral different sizes and styles of buttonholes 
to be made in the same attachment. The 
straight piece 33 sliding in the frame A* is 
set forward or back according to the length 
of the buttonhole to be made, and the piece 
32 is turned to set its slot at greater or less 
pitch above the horizontal according to the 
size of the eye to be formed in the button 
hole. If a buttonhole without an eye is to 
be stitched the piece 32 is set straight, as 
shown by the full lines, Fig. 41. 
It will be noticed that the groove of the 
switch-piece is inclined downwardly at the 
rear end, in which the pin 31 rests when the 
carriage begins to move forward. The pur 
pose of this incline is to depress the curved 
guide R and thereby set the starting-point of 
the lateral vibrations directly upon the cen 
ter line of the slit as the work begins, and 
then throw several stitches gradually back 
from the line on an angle until the slit in the 
cloth is reached. This incline on the rear 
end of the piece 32 therefore gradually ele 
vates the guide R and causes the shoe 23 to 
draw toward the center axis of the turn-post, 
gradually shifting outward the starting-point 
of the vibrations in the cloth-clamp. Several 
stitches are thus laid at the inner end of the 
buttonhole, as indicated in Fig. 5, to stay the 
end of the slit. As the pin 31 leaves the in 
cline and runs into the straight portion of the 
switch-piece it holds the guide R stationary 
until the straight line of the slit is finished 
and the incline at the front end is reached. 
In the return movement of the carriage the 
pin 31 controls and moves the guide R in the 
same manner, and the inner end of the but 
tonhole is finished with several stitches laid 
gradually inward by the depression of the 
guide R on the carriage. Both ends of the 
buttonhole are stitched and finished, there 
fore, by shifting the starting-point of the vi 
brations of the cloth-clamp away from the 
center line of the buttonhole-slit for One side, 
and toward such center line for the opposite 
side of the buttonhole. 
By referring to Figs. 2, 4 and 4, it will be 
seen that all the movements of the carriage 
and the cloth-clamp attached to the carriage 
are obtained from the rock-shaft I, which may 
be termed, therefore, the principal shaft,' 
and that the other shafts deriving their move 
ment from it thus have motion of rotation in 
one direction, and there are no abrupt revers 
ing movements in these drivers. This has 
the effect to produce smooth, even and uni 
form vibrations of the cloth-clamp, and en 
ables short or fine stitches to be sewed suc 
cessfully especially in thin fabrics. The 
shaft I is actuated directly from the feed-bar 
of the sewing-machine itself through the me 
dium of the reciprocating plate G and the 
spring-rod 1 that causes the plate to follow 
the movements of the feed-bar back Ward as 
well as forward. The plate G is fitted to 
slide in the bed-plate A and has a catch g 
that engages the front end of the feed-bar; 
but as the position of the feed-bar is found 
to vary sometimes in machines of different 
makers it is necessary to change this catch g 
to accommodate the feed-bar. For this pur 
pose I form the catch g in one piece with a 
disk G' centered on a pivot g in the plate 
and movable on that point as a center. This 
allows sufficient lateral adjustment of the 
45 
55 
S 
558,639 
O 
catch g to meet any variation in the position 
of the feed-bar. The rod 1 plays in a long 
recess in the bed-plate and a coil-spring 15 
sets behind it to hold the slide-plate G in con 
tact with the feed-bar in such manner that 
when in operation the plate is practically 
connected to the feed-bar and does not break 
or separate from it during its reciprocations. 
The force of the spring is regulated by a set 
screw 16 placed behind the rear end, as shown 
in Figs. 2 and S. 
The parts that operate the eccentric K con 
sist of the rock-shaft I, the rocker-arm 4, and 
the toothed segment, E on the end of that 
arm, the shaft E, which is geared into the 
eccentric-shaft by the bevel-gears 9 10 and 
the latchet - drum 5 on the shaft E. The 
toothed segment E engages a bevel-gear E 
On the drum, and that part, being fitted to 
turn loosely on the shaft E, surrounds the 
ratchet-tooth portion E formed on that part 
of the shaft E which is covered by the drum. 
That part which I have termed the ratchet 
drum has a recess in one end containing a 
pivoted pawl, Fig. 11, that engages the ratchet 
teeth. On the shaft, and thus as the arm 4 is 
vibrated by its shaft I the drum is turned on 
the shaft F alternately forward and back, 
producing intermittent rotary motion of the 
shaft, E, and through that movement turning 
the eccentric-carrying shaft in one direction 
with intermittent motion. The gear 9 is 
mounted on the carriage, and the shaft E is 
lmounted on the stationary frame, but is fitted 
to slide through that gear to which it is con 
nected by a groove and feather. The shaft 
E also forms a guide for the carriage in its 
movements backward and forward in the sta 
tionary frame. The two blocks or posts B 
B slide on the shaft and are a part of the 
carriage. 
The length of feed or longitudinal move 
ment of the calliage IB to which the cloth 
clamp is attached is varied by changing the 
throw of the lever T that rotates the disk. T', 
Figs. 9 and 12, and thus the number of 
Stitches produced by the mechanism in any 
given length of buttonhole is increased or 
reduced by changing the feed or length of 
movement that takes place at every stroke 
of the needle. The length of stroke of the 
lever T is regulated by changing the throw 
of the pivoted piece U, and that is done by 
loosening the set-screw in the piece V, which 
is held by the screw on the rock-shaft I and 
then shifting that piece longitudinally on the 
rock-shaft either toward or away from the 
center of vibration of the piece U, which is 
On the post or stud W on the frame. As be 
fore mentioned the pin V of the piece V8 
sets into the slot in the lower side of the lat 
eral arm of the piece U, the lever T8 being 
attached to the rearwardly-extending arm of 
that piece, and therefore by shifting the 
piece V farther from the center V the length 
of vibrations of the arm moving the level T 
will be increased while a contrary adjust 
ment of the piece on the rock-shaft will re 
duce the vibrations. 
Referring to Figs. 9 and 17, it will be seen 
that the cloth-clamp sets and is moved upon 
a thin plate instead of setting directly upon 
the cloth-plate of the machine. This plate 
prevents the feed-bar from acting on the 
cloth and forms a smooth level Surface for the 
cloth-clamp to work on. It also supports the 
cloth directly around the needle in the open 
part of the clamp. The slide G that connects 
with the feed-bar is located beneath this plate, 
as shown in Fig. 17. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In an attachment for sewing-machines 
the combination of a stationary bed-plate, 
a carriage having longitudinal movement 
therein, a cloth-clamp receiving longitudinal 
movement from said carriage, and mechan 
ism mounted on the carriage for vibrating 
the cloth - clamp, consisting, essentially, of 
the pivoted lever N, eccentric and eccentric 
shaft IK IX* means connecting such shaft 
with the feed-bar of the sewing machine to 
rotate said eccentric intermittently, means 
connecting the lever N with said eccentric 
whereby the same is vibrated from the feed 
bar of the machine, and the compound slide 
composed of the parts P P^ connecting the 
cloth-clamp to the carriage, and the carriage 
with said lever k, constructed for operation 
as described. 
2. The combination, with the cloth-clamp, 
of the carriage having longitudinal movement 
to space the stitches, the compound slide con 
necting the cloth clamp with the carriage, and 
mechanism for vibrating said slide, consist 
ing essentially of a pivoted lever moving in 
a vertical plane and having vibratory move 
ment on its center and means for turning said 
center of vibration around a vertical axis to 
change the angular direction of the vibra 
tions without affecting the length of such vi 
brations. 
3. The combination, with the cloth-clamp, 
of the compound slide consisting of the slid 
ing-piece having longitudinal movement, and 
the sliding piece having transverse move 
ment only, a lever vibrating in a vertical plane 
and capable of rotation about a central axis 
to change the angular direction of such vibra 
tions, and means connecting said lever with 
one sliding-piece, the other sliding-piece be 
ing attached to the carriage: 
4. The combination, with the cloth-clamp, 
of the compound slide PP, the turn-post M, 
the pivoted vibrating lever N mounted in the 
turn-post, the reciprocating slide 22, the shoe 
23, tumbler 26, keeper-plate 3S, lifting-pin 
36, curved guide IR and means of elevating 
and depressing such curved guide, con 
structed for operation as described. 
5. The combination, with a cloth-clamp, of 
the eccentric K, pivoted vibrating lever N ca 
pable of rotation about a vertical axis, the le 
35 
45 
65 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I25 
 
558,639 
9 
55 
ver 12 connecting said vibrating lever with one of the parts of said slide with the eccen 
the eccentric and having an adjustable full 
tric, comprising a rocking-lever B and a piv 
crum for varying the length of stroke of the 
oted lever N vibrating in a vertical plane 
lever, and means connecting the vibrating 
which is rotatable about a central axis to 
lever with the cloth-clamp; the said eccen 
change the angular position of said plane with 
tric being connected and timed with relation 
respect to the longitudinal movement of the 
to the step by step progressive movement of 
carriage in the bed-plate, and means connect 
the cloth-clamp as described to produce one 
ing said rotatable vibrating lever with one 
complete vibration of the cloth-clamp forward 
part of the compound slide, the other part of 
and back again when passing over the center, 
the said slide being arranged to slide on the 
and none while passing under the center. 
carriage in a direction at right angles to the 
6. In a button-hole attachment the combi 
movement of the other part to which said vi 
nation, of a cloth-clamp, a carriage to which 
brating lever is attached. 
said clamp is attached having longitudinal 
9. The combination with the turn-post M, 
movement only that feeds the cloth-clamp 
reciprocating plate 22, shoe 23 and vibrating 
under the needle from end to end of the but 
lever N, of the lifting-pin 26 means connect 
ton-hole, and means producing said move 
ing said pin. With the shoe 23, the adjustable 
ment step by step from the sewing mechan 
switch-piece 3233 curved guide R having a 
ism of the machine consisting of the slide 
pin engaging the switch-piece and means for 
plate Gadapted to engage the feed-bar of the 
rotating the turn-post. 
machine, the spring rod, rock-shaft I con 
10. The combination, with the vibrating 
nected with said rod, Swinging rack-frame S 
lever N capable of rotative movement about 
attached to the carriage having toothed por 
a vertical axis to change the angular direc 
tions along two sides and acroSS One end, 
tion of its vibrations, of the slide 22, shoe 23, 
guide-bar Spinion T and means connecting 
stud 24 adapted to connect the shoe with the 
said pinion. With the rock-shaft and producing 
part to be vibrated by the lever, and means 
intermittent rotative movement of the pinion 
for shifting the shoe in the slide and thereby 
changing the starting points of its reciprocat 
from the vibrations of the rock shaft, con 
structed for operation as described. 
ing movements without affecting the length 
7. In a button-hole attachment, the recip 
of such movements. 
rocating plate G having an adjustable catch 
11. The combination, with the cloth-clamp 
piece g to engage the feed-bar of a sewing 
having vibratory movements under the needle 
machine and a Spring to hold the same against 
of the machine, of the stripper-foot F having 
the feed-bar, said catch piece being adjust 
the foot-piece F^, the slide Ffitted to turn 
able laterally on its plate, constructed for op 
and slide on the shaft I whereby the foot can 
eration as described. 
be turned up clear of the work in the cloth 
clamp, and the adjustable stop adapted to 
8. In a button-hole attachment, the combi 
nation, of a stationary bed-plate principal 
limit the upward movement of the foot when 
shaft I, counter-shaft E, the carriage B mov 
at Work, 
able on said bed-plate, means for imparting 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
step-by-step movement to the carriage from 
have hereunto set my hand and seal. 
EDWARD O. BENNETT. (L. s.) 
the movements of the rock-shaft E, the eccen 
tric shaft geared into the shaft and receiv 
ing rotative movement therefrom in one di 
rection, the eccentric K, cloth-clamp D com 
EDWARD E. OSBORN, 
pound slide PP and mechanism connecting 
CHAS. E. KELLY. 
Witnesses: 
75 
85 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553739.txt	(No Model.) 
... " 
T. H. ROY CE. 
BLOOMERS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 553,739, 
Patented Jan. 28, 1896. 
| 
% 
WITNESSES 
AA-46 
-g 
aua-?s (2) 
ANDREW B. GRAHAM.PHOTO-LITHowASH1NGTON, D.C. 
 
INVENTOR 
o,a.a. 
Tu-4unull f 
AITORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
No. 553,739, 
T. H. ROY CE. 
BOOMERS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
Patented Jan. 28, 1896, 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
of 8%. %-ee 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS II. ROY CE, OF BROOKLYN, ASSIGNOR TO BENJAMINALTMAN, 
OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
BLOOMERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,739, dated January 28, 1896. 
Application filed August 14, 1895, Serial No. 559,275, (No model.) 
O 
To all, Luhon, it inctly concer'7. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS H. ROY CE, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Bloomers, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
bloomers which will appear as nearly like a 
skirt as possible, and this end I attain by 
means of a peculiar pattern or cut which pro 
duces a graceful fullness at the lower portion 
Of the bloomers and causes the same to hang 
With increased fullness. 
The invention will be fully described here 
inafter and finally embodied in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 represents a front elevation of my 
improved bloomers, showing them dropped as 
far as their length will permit. Fig. 2 is a 
real View of the bloomers in the same extend 
ed position. Fig. 3 is a partial section and 
perspective, showing the bloomers spread as 
far as possible and in illustration of specific 
features of construction. Fig. 4 is a section 
taken Vertically through the bloomers and 
showing the inner side of one-half thereof. 
Fig. 5 is a diagrammatic view of the cut or 
pattern, and Fig. 6 is a view showing the in 
Vention applied to a person. 
The cut or pattern illustrated in Fig. 5 
forms one-half of the material composing the 
bloomers, and from this pattern two duplicate 
sheets of clothare, therefore, taken. The pat 
tern comprises an approximately arc-shaped 
or curved outer edge a directly contiguous to 
radial sides b and c, which are in turn con 
tiguous to an inner edge e, the same compris 
ing a gore e' next to the side c, and a serpen 
tine edge enext to the side b, together with a 
plain and curved edge e lying between the 
gOre and Serpentine edge and sloping toward 
the edge C. as it nears the edge Ct. In con 
structing the bloomers from these patterns 
the edges b and c are sewed to each other to 
35 
45 
55 
75 
form a seam 1, (best shown in Fig. 4.) the edge 
Ct being gathered equally throughoutits length 
and confined by a band 2 having a suitable 
fastening-strap 3. 
The seam 1 merges into a 
seam A, (best illustrated in Fig. 3,) which ex 
tends from the rear side of the Waistband 5 
downwardly and forwardly to the front side 
of the bloomers, where it ends at the point 6, 
the same being immediately below the fly 7, 
which is provided with the usual fastening 
devices and also with a strap 8, which serves 
to draw the folds of the bloomers together at 
the front and makes the same hang grace 
fully, as best shown in Fig. 1, the strap being 
illustrated by dotted lines. The waistband 
5 has a securing-strap or terminal 9. 
In Figs. 1, 2, 3 and 4 the bloomers are 
shown extended to a length as great as possi 
ble, and this is done solely for the purpose of 
illustration. It will be understood, however, 
that in use the bloomers are arranged as in Fig. 
6, and reference to this figure will show the 
exceedingly gracefulfolds of the garment, and 
there it will be seen that it has almost exactly 
the appearance of a skirt because of the con 
tracted and neat appearance at the waist and 
because of the increased material at the bot 
tom which causes the gathering of the edge C. 
and a fullness which produces the above-de 
Scribed advantages. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by TLetters 
Patent 
As a new article of manufacture, bloomers, 
the same being formed of two duplicate pat 
terns or cuts, each comprising a curved edge 
C. contiguous to inwardly-converging sides b 
and C, the sides being in turn contiguous to 
an edge e which comprises a gore e', a serpen 
tine portion e', and an intermediate curved 
part e, the said patterns or cuts being joined 
to each other to produce the bloomers, sub 
stantially as described. 
THOMAS I. ROY CE. 
Witnesses: 
SAML. OPPENHEIM, 
E. SHANAHAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553839.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 553,839, 
F. W. COLE. 
NON-INTERFERENCE SIGNAL BOX, 
Patented Feb. 4, 1896. 
zza 
N 
Ea 
%ENN, N 
2NZF's N 
32(NS 3& 
63S2 SN 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
w 
A2. 
6 
40 
& N2 
SM4 
Im-ITIAA-4AT III 
filliL || || LIII"T" in ILLIHEAf 
-r 
a 
4.--Lill 
A 
 
 
IELEyly LIHELIHero, 
ITTED 
Hall 
a/o E. 
7 Wilt 
Aw s 
56 
I-IIIHE 
III Elli 
Bill 
/8 H 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK W. COLE, OF NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE UNITED STATES FIRE AND POLICE TELEGRAPII 
COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE, AND BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
N ON - INTERFERENCE SIGNAL - BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,839, dated February 4, 1896. 
Application filed March 7, 1891. Serial No. 384,072, (No model.) 
Io 
To atta Luhon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK W. COLE, 
of Newton, county of Middlesex, State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented an Improvement 
5 in Non-Interference Signal-Boxes, of which 
the following description, in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters and figures on the drawings repre 
senting like parts. 
This invention has for its object to improve 
the construction of signal-boxes, being es 
pecially applicable to that class of signal 
bOXes known as Successive non-interference 
boxes. 
I5 The invention consists in the combination, 
With signaling mechanism, a non-interference 
magnet and its armature adapted to move out 
of its magnetic field, of signal-controlling and 
retaining mechanism operated to retain a set 
2O signal by the said armature when moved out 
of its magnetic field and to release said re 
tained signal when said armature is restored; 
also in the combination, with signaling mech 
anism, a non-interference magnet and its ar 
25 mature adapted to move out of its magnetic 
field, of signal controlling and retaining mech 
anism operated to retain a set signal by the 
said armature when moved out of its mag 
netic field and to release said retained signal 
3o when said armature is restored, and timing 
mechanism holding the signal-circuit closed 
alonger time than the longest closure in any 
signal before giving the control of the line to 
the signal-wheel; also in the combination, 
35 With Signaling mechanism, a non-interference 
magnet and its armature adapted to move 
out of its magnetic field or field of force, of a 
signal-controller governed by said armature, 
and means controlled by the train in running 
4o for holding the signaling-key with its circuit 
contacts closed during one round of the sig 
nall-wheel at each operation of the box; also 
in the combination, with signaling mechan 
ism, a non-interference magnet, and its arma 
45 ture, of a signal-controller governed by said 
armature, and a stopping device for the train, 
one of the co-operating members of which is 
governed by the said armature, and a restor 
ing device operated by the train in running 
So for "c storing said armature; also in the com 
7 O 
bination, With a signaling-train, of a stopping 
device consisting of two members, one of 
which is controlled by the non-interference 
magnet and the other by a hand-operated pull 
or equivalent signaling-lever; also in the com- 55 
bination of parts which, by their co-opera 
tion, enable the signaling-train to be wound 
at each operation of the pull or signalingle 
ver more than sufficient for the operation of 
the signaling-train in the transmission of one 6o 
complete signal, whereby a force may be ac 
cumulated; also in many details of construc 
tion to be hereinafter pointed out. 
Figure 1 shows in side view a successive 
non-interference signal-box embodying this 65 
invention, the pull being omitted; Fig. 2, a 
plan view of the signal-box shown in Fig. 1, 
the non-interference magnet and a portion of 
the frame being omitted; and Figs. 3 and 4, 
sectional details to be referred to. 
The signaling mechanism herein shown con 
sists of a toothed wheel C, loosely mounted 
On a shaft Ct. and engaging a pinion Ci', secured 
to a shaft Ci, which carries a toothed wheela', 
engaging a pinion a, secured to a shaft Ct', 75 
carrying a toothed wheel C, which engages a 
pinion C, secured to a shaft Ct', carrying an 
escape-wheel C", which is engaged by a suit 
able pallet C. The signal-wheel displaced 
on the shaft Ct', with which co-operates a sig- 8o 
maling-key a', pivoted at Ct and carrying one 
of the circuit making and breaking contacts 
2. A block C is secured to the framework, 
which supports a yielding pin or arm Ct, car 
rying the other circuit making and breaking 85 
COntact 3. 
The non-interference magnet bis supported 
by the framework, its armature b' being car 
ried by a lever b, pivoted at b to the frame 
work, said lever being extended, as at b', and 9o 
carrying a pen b. 
A locking-barb', sleeved on the shaft cland. 
lying diametrically across the toothed wheel 
Ct', has at each end a locking projection, as 
b", said projections extending through holes 95 
in the said toothed wheel Cl", and said bar is 
pressed into its forward position, as repre 
sented in Figs. 2 and 4, by a spring b. 
When the armature is attracted, the outer 
end of the leverb' will lie in the path of move- too 
 
3 
558,839 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
5 5 
ment of the pins to to engage one or the other 
of them and thereby stop the train, such mem 
bers constituting the stopping device for the 
train. 
The sleeve to of the barly has on it two pro 
jections blo', extending in opposite direc 
tions and at right angles with relation to the 
bar l'. The faces of each projection are bev 
eled or inclined, and on the shaft Ct a disk to 
is fastened which has several beveled-faced 
projections l' on its periphery, one or an 
other of which will engage one of the projec 
tions l', and as the beveled faces act one upon 
the other the barb' will be moved rearwardly 
against the tension of the spring land will 
thereby withdraw its projections or pins to 
from engagement with the lever b to release 
the train when the disk is revolved. 
The disk liforms part of a barrell, which 
receives the main spring, one end of which is 
attached to said barrel and the other end to 
the hub c on the toothed wheel Ct. The bar 
rel b is fixed on the shaft a', and the toothed 
Wheel C is mounted loosely on the said shaft. 
A pawl c' is pivoted to the diskl'', and is held 
pressed into engagement with a ratchet 
toothed wheel c' by a spring c'. The ratchet 
toothed wheel c' is held in fixed position by 
pins or studs c', secured to the framework. 
The ratchet-toothed wheel c (shown in dotted 
lines, Fig. 1, and full lines, Figs. 2 and 3) is 
also fixed to the shaft at', and the winding arm 
or pull c' is pivoted to the door of the box or 
face-plate c, which carries a spring-pressed 
pawl c', which engages the said ratchet 
toothed wheel. As the pullcis depressed, the 
ratchet-wheel C will be rotated a distance 
equal to one or more teeth, the shaft a corre 
spondingly rotating the disk biso that one of 
its pins or projections to engages one of the 
projections land moves the bar blongitudi 
nally on the shaft Ct to thereby release the 
train. By this means it will be seen that the 
main spring may be wound and the train re 
leased, and the parts are so proportioned that 
the main Spring may be wound at each opera 
tion of the pull c'enough for several signals, 
on which account said pull will be known as 
an accummulative pull' or winding de 
wice. 
There is arranged on the wheel ( a flange 
c', which engages a projection c' on the 
Spring-pressed pawl c' when the disk has been 
moved a certain distance independently of the 
toothed wheel Cl-as, for instance, when the 
spring has been completely Wound-and when 
so engaging the pawl c' holds said pawl and 
prevents it from entering the next tooth of 
the ratchet-wheel C. A stopping device c1 is 
also arranged on the barrell'', which acts as 
a stop for the wheel C, it being in the path of 
the flange c as the spring runs down. This 
winding mechanism may be applied to any 
other form of signaling mechanism than that 
herein shown. 
An arm dextends from the circuit-chang 
ing lever a having a shouldered end d", with 
- 
netized. 
which the pint on the arm U of the al'mature 
carrying lever co-operates. 
The signal-wheel herein shown is made to 
maintain the signaling-circuit closed all the 
time except during short intervals for the sig 
mal impulses-that is to say, during the inter 
vals of time between the several groups of 
numbers on the signal-wheel the signaling 
circuit, will be closed, and said wheel is herein. 
shown as having on it one round, although 
a wheel having several rounds on it may be 
employed. 
When the signaling-train is let off Ol' Oper 
ated and the armature remains attracted, as 
represented in Fig. 1, the signal will be trans 
mitted without interruption, the pin b occul 
pying a fixed position in a recess or space just 
above the shoulder d of the arm d at the time 
the circuit is open at the home box, so as to 
mechanically hold the armature in its at 
tracted position when the magnet is demag 
The home box is intended to mean that 
box which is being operated, in contradis 
tinction to the other boxes in the circuit. If 
the signaling-circuit is opened during the time 
the circuit is closed at the home box, the al'ma 
ture will be retracted and the pin b will pass 
down over the shoulder d of the arm d to 
thereby mechanically hold the circuit-chang 
ing lever a from operating. The retractile 
spring is designed to move the armature l' 
out of the magnetic field when the magnet is 
demagnetized and the armature released, and 
when so moved it will there remain until 
positively restored, and during such time the 
signaling-circuit will be kept closed at the 
home box, although the signaling-train and 
signal-wheel may be operated. 
The lever b carrying the armature has a 
projection b, (see dotted lines, Fig. 1) and 
pins 4 are placed on the toothed wheel C, two 
such pins being herein shown, located sub 
stantially diametrically opposite each other, 
one or the other of which will strike the said 
projection t0 and restore the armature to its 
attracted position immediately after the lock 
ing-pin U has passed by the outer or engag 
ingend of the armb'. These pins are arranged 
to restore the armature prior to the beginning 
of a round of the signal, and as it is very in 
portant that the armature should be restored 
and the line under the influence of the non 
interference magnet only for a longer time 
than the longest closure in any signal, and as 
the closures in the signaling-circuit by the 
signal-wheel herein shown are exceedingly 
long, I have provided means for accomplish 
ing this result, which herein consists of short 
arms or holders e e, fixed to the shaft (t, One 
or the other of which will engage a projection 
e' of the circuit-changing lever Ct' and hold 
the said lever against vibration and with the 
circuit-contacts closed such a length of time. 
In lieu of the holders e e, which operate 
mechanically to hold the circuit-changing 
lever or signaling-key, said holders may close 
75 
So 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
 
558,839 
3. 
a shunt for the signal-wheel or otherwise pre 
vent the signal being transmitted, and at the 
same time keep the non-interference magnet 
in circuit. As herein shown, the arm e will 
hold the lever C14 during a complete round of 
the signal-wheel Ct, and it is during this time 
that the pin 4 operates to restore the arma 
ture b'. 
While I do not desire to limit my invention 
to this particular means for holding the cir 
cuit-lever from vibrating this predetermined 
length of time, similar means controlled by 
the train in running may be employed. 
If, when the box is pulled, the line is found 
to be opened, as by the transmission of a sig 
nal from a distant box, the armature Willim 
mediately retract and moves out of the mag 
netic field, but is immediately restored by 
the pin 4, and as Said pin passes by the short 
arm b the armature will again retract if the 
line continues to remain open, and moves out 
of the magnetic field, where it remains, hold 
ing the circuit-lever a from vibrating, and 
with the circuit-contacts closed by means of 
the arm b'. The parts will remain in this 
condition until the opposite pin 4 on the 
wheel C. arrives in position to engage the 
short arm b and restore the armature; and 
When said pin 4 arrives in position to accom 
plish Such result the arm or holder e also 
arrives in position to again hold the arm a 
with the circuit-contacts 23 closed, independ 
ent of the arm b. The time consumed by 
the train in running after the said pin 4 has 
restored the armature, and before the begin 
ning of the next succeeding round is longer 
than the longest closure in any signal, and if 
the armature remains attracted during this 
length of time the signal can then be trans 
mitted. It is during this time that the arm. 
e acts to hold the arm Ct, and to keep the 
circuit-contacts 23 closed. The arme, how 
ever, passes by the lug or projection e' just 
before the beginning of the next succeeding 
round. This arm b carried or moved by the 
armature adapted to be moved out of its mag 
netic field, and the arm d, having the shoul 
dered end portion d co-operating with the 
pin b on the armb', herein constitute the sig 
nal controlling and retaining mechanism; but 
I do not desire to limit my invention to the 
particular form of signal controlling and re 
taining mechanism herein shown, as it is ob 
vious that it may be changed and yet come 
within the spirit and scope of this invention; 
also this group of elements may be made to 
simply cut out or render inoperative the sig 
nalling mechanism, in which instance said 
mechanism Will operate only as a signal-con 
troller, and the arm b will constitute the es 
Sential element. 
I do not desire to limit my invention to its 
application to a signaling mechanism having 
a circuit-changing lever with contacts, as 23, 
and a signal-wheel for operating the said le 
ver, as it is obvious that any other well 
known Or Suitable form of box-number cir 
O 
25 
45 
55 
Go 
 
cuit-changing device may be employed, and 
furthermore I do not desire to limit my in 
vention to the application of signaling mech 
anism wherein the aforesaid circuit-changing 
lever is held positively from vibrating, as the 
signal- wheel may be otherwise prevented 
from transmitting its signal. 
I claim 
1. In a non-interference signal-box, a sig 
naling mechanism, a non-interference magnet 
and its armature adapted to move out of the 
field of force, a signal-controller governed by 
said armature, and a stopping device for the 
train, one of the co-operating members of 
which is governed by the said armature, and 
a restoring device operated by the train in 
running for restoring the said armature Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a non-interference signal-box, signal 
ing mechanism, a non-interference magnet 
and its armature adapted to move out of the 
field of force, a signal-controller governed by 
said armature, and a stopping device for the 
train, one of the co-operating members of 
which is governed by the said armature, and 
a restoring device operated by the train in 
running for restoring the said armature, and 
means controlled by the train in running for 
holding the signaling - circuit closed for a 
longer time than the longest closure in any 
signal just before giving the control of the 
said circuit to the signal-wheel substantially 
as described. 
3. In a successive non-interference signal 
box, signaling mechanism, a non-interference 
magnet and its armature adapted to move 
out of its magnetic field, combined with sig 
nal controlling and retaining mechanism for 
retaining and thereafter permitting the trans 
mission of the set signal, said signal-retain 
ing device being adapted to retain the set sig 
nal by the retracting-armature, and to permit 
the transmission of the retained signal When 
in its attracted position, and a restoring de 
vice operated by the train in running for re 
storing said retracted armature, Substantially 
as described. 
4. In a successive non-interference signal 
box, signaling mechanism, a non-interference 
magnet and its armature adapted to move 
out of its magnetic field, combined with sig 
nal controlling and retaining mechanism for 
retaining and thereafter releasing the set sig 
nal, said mechanism being operated to retain 
the set signal by the retracting-armature, and 
to release it when said armature is in its at 
tracted position, and a restoring device Oper 
ated by the train in running for restoring 
said retracted armature, and means controlled 
by the train in running for holding the sig 
naling-circuit closed for a longer time than 
the longest closure in any signal just before 
the beginning of a succeeding round, Sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a successive non-interference signal 
box, signaling mechanism, a non-interference 
magnet and its armature adapted to move 
9 O 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
558,839 
IO 
2Cd 
25 
35 
45 
out of its magnetic field, combined with sig 
nal controlling and retaining mechanism, op 
erated to retain a set signal by the said ar 
mature when moved out of its magnetie field, 
and to release said retained signal when said 
armature is restored, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
6. In a non-interference signal-box, a sig 
naling-train combined with a stopping device 
consisting of two members one of which is 
controlled by the non-interference magnet, 
and the other by a hand-operated pull, sub 
stantially as described. 
7. In a signal-box, a signaling-train com 
bined with a winding mechanism therefor, 
consisting of a barrel and toothed driving 
Wheel, a main Spring connected at one end to 
the barrel and at the other end to the wheel, 
a fixed ratchet-wheel, a pawl carried by said 
barrel, and means for rotating said barrel to 
Wind the Spring and a stop projection, as c, 
On the barrel, which engages the stop projec 
tion, as c, on the driving-wheel, substantially 
as described. 
8. In a non-interference signal-box, signal 
ing mechanism, a non-interference magnet 
and its armature, a signal-controller governed 
by said armature, a bar as U carried by one 
of the moving parts of the train having a pin 
engaged by Said signal-controller, means for 
moving the said bar to disengage it from the 
signal-controller and release the train sub 
stantially as described. 
9. In a signal-box, a signaling-train, com 
bined with a winding mechanism therefor, 
consisting of a barrel and toothed driving 
wheel, a main spring connected at one end to 
the barrel and at the other end to the wheel, 
a ratchet-wheel, a pawl carried by said bar 
rel, a cam projection carried by the toothed 
wheel, which co-operates with said pawl when 
the spring is wound up substantially as de 
scribed. 
10. In a signal-box, a signaling-train, com 
bined with a stopping device comprising an 
independently-movable member carried by 
One of the moving parts of the train and a co 
Operating member, and a hand-operated pull 
for moving said independently-movable mem 
ber into and out of co-operation with the said 
co-operating member substantially as de 
scribed. 
11. In a non-interference signal-box, sig 
naling mechanism having a signal-wheel and 
signal-key, a non-interference magnet and its 
armature, a signal-controller governed by said 
armature, and means controlled by the train 
in running which holds the signal-key with 
its circuit-contacts closed for a predetermined 
length of time just before the beginning of a 
round of the box-number, during which time 
the signal-controller is free to act to mechani 
cally lock the signal-key with its circuit-con 
tacts closed, substantially as described. 
12. In a signal-box, a signal-train, a non 
interference magnet and its armature, com 
bined with a signal-key having two parts or 
 
portions, one of which is governed by the sig 
mal-wheel and the other by the train in run 
ning, said train co-operating with said key to 
prevent its co-operation with the signal 
wheel, and also to maintain the circuit closed 
for a predetermined length of time just before 
the beginning of a round of the box-number, 
substantially as described. 
13. In a non-interference signal-box, signal 
ing mechanism comprising a signal- wheel 
and signaling-key, a non-interference mag 
net and its armature, and a signal-controller 
governed by said armature, and also by two 
members of the train in running, one of 
which members, as the signal-wheel, allows 
said signal-controller freedom of action on 
closures of the circuit during the transmis 
sion of the signal, and the other, as the holder 
e, allows said signal-controller freedom of 
action for an interval of time longer than the 
longest closure in any signal, after the pull 
has been operated and before the transmis 
sion of the first impulse of the signal, sub 
stantially as described. 
14. In a successive non-interference signal 
box, signaling mechanism, a non-interference 
magnet and its armature adapted to move 
out of its magnetic field, combined with sig 
nal controlling and retaining mechanism, 
operated to retain a set signal by the said 
armature when moved out of its magnetic 
field, and to release said retained signal When 
said armature is restored; timing mechanism 
for holding the signaling - circuit closed a 
longer time than the longest closure in any 
signal before giving the control of the line 
to the signal- wheel, substantially as de 
scribed. 
15. In a non-interference signal-box, a sig 
nal-train, a non-interference magnet and its 
armature, combined with a stopping device 
for the train, one member of which operates 
to hold the said armature in its attracted po 
sition, substantially as described. 
16. In a signal-box, a train, a main actuat 
ing-spring therefor, a driving-wheel for the 
train connected with one end of said spring, 
a winding-disk connected with the other end 
of said spring, a locking lever or stop for the 
train, a pull for simultaneously winding the 
spring and releasing the locking-lever to set 
the train in condition to transmit its signal, 
a pawl and ratchet for holding the winding 
disk against backward rotation, and a disen 
gaging device for said pawl which prevents 
overwinding of the spring, but does not in 
terfere with the action of the pull, substan 
tially as described. 
17. In a signal-box, a signaling - train, a 
main actuating-spring therefor, a stop for the 
train, and operating device for winding the 
spring and setting the signaling-train in con 
dition to transmit its signal, a pawl and 
ratchet for preventing the backward action 
of the spring, and a disengaging device for 
said pawl, operating when the spring is Wollind 
up, substantially as described. 
95 
OO 
Io5 
IO 
II.5 
558,839 
5 
1S. In a signal-box, a signaling-train, and 
stop therefor, a main actuating-spring for said 
train connected at one end with the driving 
wheel of the train, and at the other end with 
a winding device, a hand-lever for turning 
said winding device and also for setting the 
signaling-train in condition to transmit its 
signal, a pawl and ratchet to prevent back 
ward action of said spring, and a disengaging 
device for said pawl operating when the spring 
is wound up, to prevent overwinding of the 
spring without interfering with the action of 
the hand-lever, substantially as described. 
19. In a signal-box, a signaling-train, and 
stop therefor, a main actuating-spring for said 
train connected at one end with the driving 
wheel of the train, and at the other end with 
a winding device, a hand-lever for turning 
said winding device and also for setting the 
signaling-train in condition to transmit its 
signal, a pawl and ratchet to prevent back 
ward action of said spring, and a disengaging 
device for said pawl carried by said driving 
wheel. 
20. In a non-interference signal-box, a sig 
mal-train, a main actuating-Spring therefor, a 
locking-lever for said train governed by the 
armature of the non-interference magnet, a 
hand-operated pull for setting the signaling 
train in condition to transmit its signal, a 
connection between said pull and the main 
spring whereby the spring may be wound by 
said pull when operated, and a disengaging 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
device which prevents overwinding of the 
spring without interfering with the operation 
of the pull, substantially as described. 
21. In a signal-box, the combination of a 
signaling-train, a signal-key, a non-interfer 
ence magnet, and its armature, which When 
ever retracted mechanically locks the signal 
ing-key with its circuit-contacts closed, sub 
stantially as described. 
22. In a signal-box, the combination of a 
signaling-train, a signal-key, a non-interfer 
ence magnet, and its armature, which When 
ever retracted mechanically locks the signal 
key with its circuit-contacts closed, and said 
key whenever operated to open the circuitme 
chanically locks the armature in its attracted 
position, substantially as described. 
23. In a non-interference signal-box, a sig 
naling mechanism having a signal-wheel, a 
signal-key, a non-interference magnet and its 
armature, a signal-controller governed by said 
armature, which is free to retract on closures 
of the circuit at the home box, and whenever 
it retracts locks the signaling-key with its 
circuit-contacts closed, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
FREDERICK. W. COLE. 
Witnesses: 
BERNICE. J. NOYES, 
EDWARD F. ALLEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US553940.txt	G. J. R.0LL ANDET & W. B. GRAY. 
(No Model.) 
NOZZLE HOLDER AND SPRAYING ATTACHMENT FOR GARDEN HOSE. 
Patented Feb. 4, 1896. 
No. 553,940, 
- 
 
S 
 
Y. 
-33S 
- 
/7G.7 
INVENTOR S.. 
G.e/. Apo//77oye7. 
/76.8 pyrragray f 
/A ATTORNEY 
ARY GRAhA. PHOTOLITHOWASHINGto.N.D 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GERRIT J. ROLLANDET AND WILLIAM B. GRAY, OF DENVER, COLORADO, 
ASSIGNORS OF ONE-ELALF TO FRED S. LACK AND WILLIAM E. STONE, 
OF SAMIE PLACE. 
NOZZLE-HOLDER AND SPRAYING ATTACHMENT FOR GARDEN-HOSE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 553,940, dated February 4, 1896. 
Application filed April 11, 1895, Serial No. 545,415, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it invay concern: 
Beit known that we, GERRIT.J. ROLLANDET 
and WILLIAMB. GRAY, citizens of the United 
States of America, residing at Denver, in the 
county of Arapahoe and State of Colorado, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in a Nozzle-Holder and Spraying 
Attachment for Garden-Hose; and we do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the figures of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to an improved noz 
zle-holder and spraying attachment for gar 
den-hose; and it consists of the features here 
inafter described and claimed, all of which 
will be fully understood by reference to the 
accompanying drawings, in which is illus 
trated an embodiment thereof. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of the device, showing the hose-nozzle in 
place. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the nozzle 
holder with the spraying-shoe detached. Fig. 
3 is a fragmentary view of the device, the po 
sition of the spraying-shoe being reversed 
from that shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a ver 
tical cross-section taken on the line aca, Fig. 
1, looking toward the left. Fig. 5 is a verti 
cal longitudinal section of the device, the rear 
part of the nozzle-holder being broken away. 
Fig. 6 is a detail view in perspective illustrat 
ing the spraying-shoe. Fig. 7 is a Section 
taken on the line y), Fig. 5, the spring-plate 
being shown in elevation. Fig. S is a front 
view of the device partly broken away. 
Similar reference characters indicate corre 
sponding parts in the views. 
Let the numeral 5 designate the base, com 
prising the central forwardly-extending arm 
5' and the Wings 5 projecting laterally from 
the arms rear extremity. 
To the arm 5 is 
attached the spring 6. As shown in the draw 
ings, this spring is composed of a piece of 
spring-wire having its extremities bent up 
wardly and inwardly toward each other and 
fashioned to embrace and support the hose 
nozzle. The spring 6 is preferably secured 
to the arm 5 by brazing or soldering, the arm. 
being provided with lateral projections 5' to 
give the spring a better bearing-surface and 
to facilitate its attachment to the arm. The 
forward extremity of the arm 5 is provided 
with a depending projection 55 bent at right 
angles, or approximately at right angles, to 
the body of the arm. This part 55 is adapted 
to raise the forward extremity of the device 
sufficiently to give the nozzle the proper in 
clination. It is also adapted to Stick into the 
ground whereby the device may be firmly 
anchored and the inclination of the nozzle 
changed at pleasure. To this end the part 
55 is forked and its free extremities sharp 
ened, whereby they are adapted to be pressed 
easily into the earth. In the drawings, the 
base of the device is, for convenience, shown 
in a horizontal position. In use, however, 
this arm will be more or less inclined to the 
plane of the surface upon which the device 
rests, unless the part 55 is pressed into the 
earth to its full length. 
To the arm 5 is slidingly attached the for 
ward extension 7, comprising the arm 7 and 
the inclined forked extremity 7. The arm 
7 is parallel with the arm 5 and is provided 
with clasps 7 engaging the arm 5, whereby 
the two parts are adjustably connected. The 
part 7 also carries a spring 6 of substantially 
the same construction as that already de 
scribed and attached to the arm 5 of the base. 
The spraying-shoe 8 consists of a plate 
widest in the center and tapering toward its 
extremities. This shoe is formed by bending 
the plate so that its extremities nearly touch 
each other. The shoe is thus deepest, as Well 
as widest, at the bend S. The shoe is so 
attached to the fork or extension 7 that its 
two portions S and 8 are unequally inclined 
when presented to the water. These parts of 
the shoe, as shown in the drawings, are sym 
metrically inclined, and the unequal inclina 
tion when in use results from the manner of 
attaching the shoe to the forked extension. 
It will be observed that this extension is 
always attached to the part 8 of the shoe. 
Hence the part S has a greater inclination 
when in use (see Figs. 3 and 5) than the part 
8, the inclination of the last-named part being 
the same no matter which partis used to spray 
the Water. 
If the extension 7 were attached to the shoe 
midway between the parts 8 and 8, the incli 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
553,940 
nation of these parts when in use-that is, 
when presented to the water-would be the 
same. The extension being, however, always 
attached to the same part of the shoe, the re 
sult stated must necessarily follow. These 
two parts S and 8 have laterally - inclined 
flanges S5, adapted to facilitate the spreading 
or spraying of the water as it issues from the 
nozzle 9. To the inner surface of one part of 
the shoe, as S', is attached, as by soldering, 
a spring-plate 8", having side flanges 8" and 
a small projection Si. The function of this 
Spring-plate is to grasp the forked extremity 
7 of the part 7 and thus maintain the shoe 
in place. The flanges S" prevent lateral dis 
placement of the forked part 7. The projec 
tion 8 facilitates the raising of the spring 
plate when it is desired to attach the spraying 
shoe to the nozzle-holder. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
understood that the spraying-shoe is detach 
able and reversible. Its position, when the 
Surface of less inclination is presented to the 
Water, is illustrated in Fig. 1. 
Its position, 
When the opposite surface or that having the 
greater inclination is presented to the issuing 
Stream, is illustrated in Figs. 3 and 5. 
The device is shown full length in Figs. 1 
and 2. It may be shortened by sliding the 
part 7 toward the left, or so as to bring the 
Springs 6 and 6 of the parts 5 and 7 nearer 
together. IBy virtue of its adjustability the 
device is adapted for use with nozzles of all 
sizes. 
The use of the device will be readily under 
stood from the foregoing description. 
The hose-nozzle is grasped and held in place 
by the springs 6 and 6*. As the stream of 
Water issuing therefrom engages the inclined 
face of the shoe 8, the stream is converted 
into Spray whose jets are directed upward by 
the shoe on an incline depending upon the 
portion of the shoe with which the water comes 
in contact. If it is desired to throw the jets 
or sprays quite high, the side 8 is placed in 
the path of the water, while if it is desired to 
throw the jets to a less height the opposite 
side, S', is employed. The shoe may be easily 
O 
25 
35 
45 
and quickly changed from one position to an 
other. If it is not desired to convert the stream 
into a spray, the shoe S is not used, in which 
event the device serves simply as a holder for 
the nozzle. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim is 
1. A combined nozzle-holder and spraying 
de Vice comprising the base carrying a spring 
adapted to embrace the nozzle, a forward ex 
tension and a reversible spraying-shoe com 
prising a bent plate having inclined sides, the 
shoe being so attached to the extension that 
the two sides are unequally inclined when 
presented to the Water, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. A combined nozzle-holder and splaying 
device comprising the extensible body part 
having Springs adapted to embrace the noz 
zle, and the reversible spraying-shoe having 
two inclined sides, said shoe being so attached 
to the body part that the two sides are un 
equally inclined when presented to the wa 
ter, substantially as described. 
3. A combined nozzle-holder and spraying 
device comprising the body part having a 
spring adapted to embrace the nozzle, the in 
clined forward extension, and the shoe com 
prising a bent plate having two taperingfaces 
provided with inclined lateral flanges, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. A combined nozzle-holder and spraying 
device comprising an extensible body part 
having Springs adapted to embrace the noz 
zle, a depending projection and a forward ex 
tension and a reversible spraying-shoe com 
posed of a bent plate, said shoe being so at 
tached to the extension of the base that its 
two sides are unequally inclined when pre 
sented to the Water, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof We affix our signa 
tures in the presence of two witnesses. 
GERRIT J. ROLLANDET. 
WILLIAM B. GRAY. 
55 
65 
75 
So 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. E. DAWSON, 
F. S. LACK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554040.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 554,040, 
G. M. STRATTON. 
LIGATURE RECEPTACLE. 
Patented Feb. 4, 1896. 
  
17. 
 
& 
 
O 
set S 
D 
wa, 
as , . 
s 
%2 
s 
s 
-2 a 
a -- 
/7 
R 
SNs 
 
%u. 
fate 
2. 
4. 
lar 
%, We?. 
"a za zy. 
/ (//)ala fA 
- 
 
ANorew B.GRAHAM. Phore-jo. WASHINGTON, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
--st 
GEORGE M. STRATTON, OF BRIDGEPORT, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE AMERICAN SURGICAL COMPANY, OF PENNSYLVANIA. 
LGATURE RECEPTACLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 554,040, dated February 4, 1896. 
Application filed March 18, 1895, Serial No. 542,140, (No model.) 
To all whom, it nually concer'7. 
Beit known that I, GEORGEM. STRATTON, of 
Bridgeport, county of Montgomery, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Ligature-Recep 
tacles, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming part of 
this specification. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in surgical ligature-receptacles, and has as 
its chief characteristic, in combination with 
an open-mouth ligature-receptacle, having a 
removable cap, a removable spool-shaped sup 
port having upper and lower flanges of a di 
ameter about equal to the inner diameter of 
the casing and a Vertically-disposed spindle 
formed integral with Said flanges, a rotat 
able spool axially provided upon said spin 
dle and between the upper and lower flanges 
of the spool-shaped device, and a rubber disk 
with its outer edges impinging upon the in 
ner walls of the mouth of the receptacle is 
provided to press upon the outer face of the 
upper flange of the support to hold the same 
in position, and at the same time to retain the 
antiseptic fluid. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a sectional elevation of a ligature-receptacle 
constructed in accordance with my invention; 
and Fig. 2 is a sectional plan view of the same 
on the line 22, Fig. 1. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents an 
open-mouthed cylindrical vessel formed of 
glass, and provided at its upper end with 
screw-threads, on which may screw a metallic 
or other covering-cap B, provided with an in 
ner disk b of rubber, or similar elastic mate 
rial, which, when the cap is screwed into po 
sition, firmly presses against the open mouth 
of the bottle and prevents all danger of leak 
age of the antiseptic fluid with which the bot 
tle is filled. 
In the center of the bottle is placed a spin 
dle C, provided at top and bottom with inte 
gral flanges C of a diameter nearly equal to 
the inner diameter of the bottle, so that it 
will be impossible for the spindle to move any 
considerable distance from its proper posi 
tion in the center of the bottle. 
The spindle C is to some extent held in 
proper position in the center of the bottle or 
receptacle A by means of a circular disk D, 
formed of rubber or some equivalent mate 
rial, which fits closely within the neck of the 
bottle and presses firmly upon the upper 
flange c of the spindle, such upper flange be 
ing, as before described, of a diameter nearly 
equal to the inner diameter of the neck of the 
bottle, so that the area of rubber exposed to 
the action of the antiseptic fluid will be quite 
small and any deteriorating chemical action 
will be prevented. 
On the spindle C is mounted a spool E, on 
which the ligatures are Wound, the ends of 
the ligatures being drawn out of the bottle 
between the edge of the rubber disk D and the 
inner wall of the bottle. 
In mounting the spool upon the spindle C, 
the spool being first formed with a central 
opening of a diameter Somewhat greater than 
the diameter of the spindle C, I take a rod or 
tube of glass to form the spindle, and, after 
heating the end of the rod, upset said end to 
form the lower flange c. The spool is then 
placed on the rod and the rod heated at its 
opposite end, and this end is also upset to 
form the upper end flange, when the spindle 
and its spool are complete, and in readiness 
to be supplied with the ligature. 
In upsetting the ends of the rod care is 
taken to form the end flanges c of a diameter 
nearly equal to the inner diameter of the bot 
tle, so that the spindle is prevented from mov 
ing laterally to an extent sufficient to bring 
the flanges e of the spool E into contact with 
the inner wall of the bottle and but a small 
area of the rubber disk D will be exposed 
when the parts are assembled in the bottle A. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
The combination in a ligature-receptacle, 
of an open-mouthed glass bottle, A, a closing 
cap therefor, ligature-holding spool, E, a sup 
porting-spindle, C, therefor, said support 
5 
IC 
35 
45 
 
55 
6 o 
65 
7 o 
75 
9 O 
95 
554,040 
in witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this Sth day of March, A. D. 1895. 
GEORGE MI. STRATTON. 
Witnesses: 
EDMUND S. MILLS, 
J. ENDERSON. 
ing-spindle having integral top and bottom 
flanges, c, of a diameter nearly equal to the 
inner diameter of the bottle so as to keep the 
Spindle in a central or nearly central posi 
tion and keep the flanges of the ligature-hold 
ing spool from contact with the inner wail of 
the bottle, substantially as specified. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554140.txt	
/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554240.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BUR KE. 
METHOD OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION, 
-- 
No. 554,240, 
Patented Feb, ll 1896, 
I' 
I' 
140 
w 
1&0. 
77 
B 
to it, 
(/r 
s 
/40 
M2O 
5 
R, 
R 
R 
f 
6/ 
Rf 
WITNESSES: 
6%264-ee. 
 
INVENTOR 
- - - 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES BURIKE, OF SCHENECTADY, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE THOMSON 
IIOUSTON ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
METHOD OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 554,240, dated February 11, 1896. 
Application filed December 24, 1894, Renewed January 6, 1896, Serial No. 574,561 (No model.) 
55 
IO 
To all tufton, it notty concern. 
3e it known that I, JAMES BURKE, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at Schenectady, county of Schenectady, State 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Methods of Electri 
cal Distribution, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The present invention comprises a method 
and certain novel means for supplying from 
a Single generator or group of generators Cur 
rent of different potentials in two or more 
electric circuits, or to such portions of a com 
mon distribution system as require a differ 
ent potential on the feeders at the central sta 
tion in order to compensate for the different 
amounts of drop in the feeders, which arise 
from causes well known to electrical engi 
e.S. 
In central-distribution systems as now in 
stalled it is customary to employ bus-bars, 
maintained at any desired difference of po 
tential, from which the feeders lead to differ 
ent portions of the system. In such cases it 
25 often occurs that one or a group of feeders 
require more current than is supplied by the 
regular generators, so that a reserve machine 
must be used to supply the emergency. It 
has been impracticable heretofore to supply 
current from a single reserve machine or 
group of machines to more than a single bus 
bar at a time, owing to the different poten 
tials at which the bus-bars are normally main 
tained. 
I have designed the present invention es 
pecially with a view to meeting this emer 
gency and rendering it possible to divide the 
current from a single machine, supplying 
part of the current to one bus-bar or set of 
4o feeders at one potential, and the remainder 
of the current to other bus-bars or feeders at 
a different potential. 
The invention will be described as applied . 
to such a system of distribution, though it 
45 Will also be found useful in many other con 
nections, as will be understood by electrical 
engineers. 
To illustrate a simple typical embodiment 
- of the invention, assume a two-wire distri 
5o bution system in which the positive feeders 
are connected to two bus-bars maintained at 
different potentials by generators of corre 
spondingly different voltages, or other Well 
known means. If, then, it becomes desirable 
to supply additional current to these bus-bars 
from a supplementary or reserve machine the 
machine will be connected to the bus-bars 
through intermediate variable sources of elec 
tromotive force, whereby substantially all the 
current of the reserve machine may be Sup 
plied to either bus-bar at the proper potential, 
or the current may be divided between the two 
bus-bars at different potentials, correspond 
ing to the normal values maintained thereon. 
To effect this division of the current I employ, 
preferably, a pair of dynamo-machines, With 
their armatures connected in series acroSS 
the bus-bars and running in unison. One 
terminal of the reserve machine is then Con 
nected between the two armatures, while the 
negative terminal will be connected to the 
common negative bus-bar. The fields of the 
regulating-machines are energized with cur 
rent from any suitable source of Supply, and 
means are provided for regulating the elec 
tromotive forces of the machines inversely, 
so that the potential of the current supplied 
to one bus-bar. may be raised and that Sup 
plied to the other bar may be lowered in any 
desired ratio. 
The accompanying drawing shows in dial 
gram a distribution system embodying the 
invention, such as has just been described. 
A B represent the positive bus-bars of a 
two-wire distribution system, and C is the 
common negative bus-bar. I will assume 
that the standard potential maintained on 
the bus A is one hundred and forty volts and 
that on bus B is one hundred and twenty 
volts. 
G. G. are the main generators normally Sup 
plying current to the respective bus-bars. 
G represents an additional or reserve ma 
chine which may be used to help out either 
of the main generators or both of them at 
the same time. For this purpose its nega 
tive terminal is connected to the negative 
bus C, and its positive terminal is connected 
to the bus-bars AB through Variable Sources 
of electromotive force, comprising two dy 
35 
3O 
65 
7 O 
75 
85 
95 
TOO 
 
2 
554,240 
TO 
5 5 
namo-lmachines FF', arranged in tille follow 
ing malnine'. 
The armatures if f' of the machines are 
coupled in series between the bus-bal's A 3, 
and the generator G' is connected to a point 
between the arnatures, as indicated. The 
field windlings e e' of the machines may be 
energized by current derived from any suit 
able source. For this purpose I have shown 
then connected in multiple between the bus 
bar B and the negative lous C. Resistances 
R. Rare included respectively in the field 
circuits e e', and a rheostat-arm II is so ar 
l'anged as to cut l'esistance into one circuit 
simultaneously with cutting it out of the 
othel circuit. 
The generato's G. G.' (; are shown as shunt 
wound and provided with rheostats R for reg 
ulation in the ordinary manner. The con 
struction of these machines is, however, in no 
sense a material part of the invention. Feed 
el's I and I" are shown leading from the re 
spective bus-bal's Al3. By opening the switch 
and closing the switch ' upon one or the 
other of contacts if the generator G may be 
thrown wholly upon either of the bus-bars 
When desired. 
In a practical installation I should prefer 
to couple up the generator's so that any one 
of the machines may either be connected to 
One of the common station bus-bars directly 
or coupled to both sets of busses through the 
machines F. F. This can be readily accom 
plished by suitable switches, as an electrical 
engineer Will readily understand. The al'ma 
tures of machines F E will be mounted on the 
Same shaft or SO geared as to run in unison. 
The operation of the invention will now be 
described. 
If the conditions are such that substantially 
the total current of the dynamo G' is needed 
upon the bus B, the rheostat-arm II will be 
So thrown as to introduce a maximum amount 
of resistance in the field-circuit e, or prefer 
ably to break the circuit altogether. The 
machine F will then run idle, and except for 
ohmic losses there will be no difference of po 
tential between its terminals, while, on the 
other hand, the field strength and counter elec 
tl'Olmotive force of machine F is at a maxi 
lmllm, and the machine will absorb substan 
tially all of the twenty volts normal diffe 
ence of potential between the bus-ba's A 3. 
The generator G will now be delivering cur 
rent to the bus B at one hundred and twenty 
Volts, it being understood that the machine 
is so regulated that its voltage is of substan 
tially this value. If the ilheostat-arm II be 
thrown to the other extreme position the con 
ditions will be reversed. The machine F. 
Will then run idle, and there will be practi 
cally twenty volts difference of potential be 
tWeen the terminals of the machine F. 
If 
the voltage of the generator G is then raised 
to one hundred and forty it will deliver cur 
rent to the bus-bar A at the properpotential. 
If it is desired to divide up the current of 
the generator G between the bus-ba's Al3, 
the rheostat-arm II will be so placed as to di 
vide the total twenty volts clifference of po 
tential between the two armatures ff" in the 
proper ratio. 
Assume that it is placed in the 
central position. Then there will be ten volts 
difference of potential between the terminals 
of each of the armatures.ff', and if the gener 
ator G' is properly regulated its current will 
divide equally between the bus-ba's A3, the 
electromotive force in al'mature f' acting to 
assist or boost up the voltage of the cultrClt 
delivered to bus A to one hundred and forty 
volts, and the clectromotive force in al'mature 
facting to reduce or boost down the electro 
motive force of the current going to bus I3 to 
one hundred and twenty volts. In a similar 
manner, well understood, the current of the 
generator G' may be divided between the bus 
ba's in any desired latio, and Will be alway's 
supplied to the bal's at the propel' potentials. 
The invention of course may be applied to 
more extended systems of distribution thall 
that herein shown, comprising any number 
of bus-bal's necessary in a given installation. 
It is also equally applicable to three-wire dis 
tribution systems, in which the only addition 
required would be to duplicate the arrange 
ment described on the two sides of the Sys 
tem. For example, what is herein illustrated 
would, in a three-wire system, be proper for 
one branch of the system between the posi 
tive busses and the neutral bus, and the ar 
rangement would be duplicated between the 
neutral bus and the negative busses. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of two or more circuits 
or portions of a distribution system, with 
means for maintaining thereon clifferent po 
tentials, sources of electromotive force con 
nected between such circuits in Series, whose 
sum is substantially equal to the difference 
of potential between the circuits, a generator 
connected at a point between the said sources 
of electromotive force, and feeding current 
through them respectively to the said first 
named circuits, and means for regulating in 
versely the values of the said electromotive 
forces, as set forth. 
2. The combination of two or more circuits 
or portions of a distribution system, with gen 
erators maintaining different potentials in 
Sutch circuits, a number of dynamo-machines 
running in unison and coulpled in series bc 
tween the different potential circuits, and a 
Source of current-Supply connected at a point 
between the armatures of said machines all (l 
adapted to feed current to the first-named 
circuits at their respective potentials, as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination of a number of electric 
circuits or portions of a distribution system, 
at which different potentials are normally 
So 
95 
OO 
I o5 
C. 
 
554,240 
s 
the electromotive force in the other machine, 
as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 22d day of December, 1894. 
O 
JAMES BURKE. 
Witnesses: 
B. B. HULL, 
GENEVIEWE HAYNES. 
maintained, with a pair of dynamo-lmachines 
running in unison and connected across said 
circuits in series, a generator connected be 
tween the armatures of Said machines and 
adapted to supply current to the circuits at 
their respective potentials, and means for 
simultaneously increasing the electromotive 
force in one such machine, and decreasing 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554340.txt	J. L. HEALD, 
CONTROLLING MECHANISM FOR ENGINES, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 11, 1896. 
 
N 
No. 
(No Model.) 
No. 554,340. 
 
 
 
 
 
Witnesses: 
(2%.S2% 
(No Model.) 
J. L, HEALD. 
CONTROLLING MECHANISM FOR, ENGINES, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 554,340. 
Patented Feb, ll, 1896, 
K2 2 2 22 
 
r 
N 
 
 
 
l 
SNSS 
s 
SS)NSN 
e1S,222 
A. P 
s S 
i 
 2 2 2 N 
3H, NJ SF2: 
2. 2 F. 
s S 
N  
 21 
N NSG k 
NeNet) 
N 
N 
SY 3 
B S Z %.S33 
in 3 
3. 
S 
3 
 
 
 
z 
 
 
 
- 
 
2 
2. A N2 Y S. 
K 3. 
 
 
 
  
& 
 
2. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(92. K3 
Y KK 
. 
H 
Z 2 
Dur 
Wr 
M. 
F94. 
Witnesses: 
C4-S-> 76-77, 
6-4.2%. 
Invenlon 
3.2% 
 
AN2REW B.GRAAM. Photo-LTHowAssingtoNDC 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J, L, HEALD. 
CONTROLLING MECHANISM FOR ENGINES, 
No. 554,340, 
Patented Feb. ll, l896, 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
J OHN L. 
HEALD OF CR O CKETT, CA LIFORN A. 
CONTROLLING MECHANISM FOR ENGINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 554,840, dated February 11, 1896. 
Application filed April 6, 1895, Serial No. 544,804, (No model.) 
55 
7 O. 
So 
O 
15 
25 
35 
To all whon it invay conce77. 
Be it known that I, JOHNL. HEALD, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Crockett, 
Contra Costa county, State of California, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Controlling Mechanism for Steam 
Engines; and I hereby declare the following 
Specification and the drawings there with to be 
a complete description of my improvements. 
My invention relates to apparatus for the 
control of reciprocating steam - engines, in 
stopping, starting, and reversing the motion 
of Such engines, also to their regulation and 
the point at which steam is cut off by adjust 
able, self-contained and detachable mechan 
ism, not constituting an integral portion of 
the engine itself, and applicable to any sin 
gle-valve engine of ordinary construction 
adapted for regulation by variable valve 
gearing. 
My improvements consist in variable, ex 
pansive, regulating and reversing gearing, 
operating by centrifugal force, by hand, and 
also by the inertia and momentum of revolv 
ing weights, and capable of adjustment, while 
an engine is in motion, the whole attachable 
to and separable from the engine. 
My improvements also include the con 
struction and arrangement of the different 
elements constituting the apparatus, as here 
inafter specified and pointed outin the claims. 
The objects of my invention are to attain 
complete control of an engine in respect to 
its speed of revolution, power generated, and 
the direction of its motion by a single device 
or apparatus, also to provide, when required, 
for sensitive regulation by a combination of 
centrifugal action and inertia, and to consti 
tute such controlling apparatus, as a whole, 
an article of separate manufacture, the same 
as in the case of centrifugal throttling gov 
ernors for steam-engines. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view 
showing the main parts of a common steam 
engine fitted with my improved controlling 
apparatus. Fig. 2 is a front view of the ec 
centric-disk from which the engine-valve is 
operated, with the covering-plate removed. 
Fig. 3 is a section through my improved en 
gine-controlling device, taken on the line aca 
in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a section in a plane at a 
right angle to Fig. 3 and on the line y if in 
Fig. 2. Fig. 5 shows a detail of Fig. 4 in two 
planes. Fig. 6 is a cross-section on the line 
2. 2 of Fig. 4. Figs. 7 and S show a detail of 
Fig. 6. 
Fig. 9 is a detail view showing the 
Weights having stops to limit their range of 
movement. 
Similarletters and numerals of reference are 
employed to designate corresponding parts in 
the different figures of the drawings. 
Referring first to Fig. 1, 1 is the cylinder, 
2 the valve-chamber, 3 the crank-shaft, 4 the 
connecting-rod, 5 the valve-rod, and 6 the 
rock-shaft, of a common single-valve steam 
engine arranged for control by one of my im 
proved devices. (Represented at 7, and to 
be hereinafter fully described.) 
Referring next to Fig. 2, A is a main disk 
or plate, on which is mounted a sliding plate 
A, moving in angular guideways, as seen in 
Fig. 3, and having a crank or eccentric pin 
B', that moves on the line 2, 2 across the cen 
ter line a to give the required angle of ad 
vance for running the engine in either direc 
tion, and a tintermediate points determine the 
point of cut off for speed and power regula 
tion in the usual manner of eccentrics for va 
riable cut-off slide-valve engines. 
The main disk A' is driven by teeth formed 
on its periphery engaging a tooth-wheel D on 
the crank-shaft 3 of the engine, both wheels 
having the same number of teeth and remain 
ing in the same relative position one to the 
other. 
A link C connects the eccentric-pin B to 
the pin B, rock-shaft 6 and the valve-rod 5, 
as seen in Fig. 1. By referring to the sec 
tions, Figs. 3 and 4, it will be seen that the 
element referred to as the eccentric-disk 
A' is formed integrally with a chamber A and 
a sleeve of square section F, the latter sup 
ported in a collar F and a movable bearing 
G, the main end or members A' A' being sup 
ported in a fixed bearing G' of large diame 
ter, as shown in Figs. 1, 3 and 4. 
The eccentric-disk A" and sliding plate. A, 
the extension or chamber A, the sleeve F", 
and the collars FF, with the elements at 
tached to each, all revolve together in the 
bearings G' G', driven by the gear-wheel D, 
as before explained. 
Through the axis of the controlling device 
and sliding within the sleeve F is a cylindri 
so 
 
y 
95 
OO 
() 
554,840 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
cal bar ol' stem i, the longitudinal movement 
of which controls the position of the slide A 
and the eccentric-pin B in the following man 
ner: The front of the disk A is preferably 
inclosed by a plate A, as shown in Figs. 3alid 
4, having a slot for the pil B', but otherwise 
close, so as to retain a quantity of oil for lll 
bricating the moving parts inclosed. 
At the back of the sliding plate A is a di 
agonal slot I", its lear face formed by a pro 
jecting bar I, that passes through an oblique 
mortise or slot in the end of the sliding bar 
II, as seen in Figs. 3 and 4, so that end move 
ment of this bar II slides the plate A across 
the face of the disk A" on the line 22, Fig. 2. 
This longitudinal movement of the central 
bai, I, and consequently that of the plate A 
and the pin 3' at a right aingle to the bal' H, 
are the principal operative movements, or is 
the medium through which the engine is con 
trollied and reversed. This longitudinal move 
ment of the bar II is performed or controlled 
in three different ways or by three different 
forces-namely, by centrifugal weights J'J', 
by the inertia and monentum weights JJ, 
and by the movement of the bearing G, the 
latter being employed only in reversing an 
engine. 
Referring first to the centrifugal weights J' 
J and their connection to this central bar, II, 
and to Fig. 6 of the drawings, these Weights 
J" Jare pivoted at IS 
IS to the arms LL, 
formed integrally with a rectangular collar 
F ?itting loosely on the sleeve F". These 
swinging centrifugal weights J. J* are held 
against centrifugal force by means of coiled 
centripetal springs S S adjustably attached 
to the ends of the arms LL by means of the 
screw-nuts TT and made strong enough to 
resist the centrifugal strain due to a prede 
termined rate of speed for the engine. These 
weights J" J have teeth or extensions LL", 
that fit into and move laterally the blocks M' 
M, which fit loosely and slide through the 
members N' N, as seen in Figs. 3 and 6, so 
that when the weights J J are moved out 
ward or inward the blocks M'M' and the mem 
bers N' N are moved accordingly away from 
or toward the cente' or axis of rotation. This 
radial movement of the members N' N is con 
verted to longitudinal movement of the bar 
II in the following manner: The split toggle 
links (marked O in Fig. 3) connect these mem 
be's N' N at One side with the collar F and 
at the other side with the studs PP, the lat 
ter rigidly fasteiled in the bar II, as shown in 
Fig. 3, so that any movement outward or in 
ward by the weights J" Jacts upon the blocks 
Mi' AI, the members N' N and the toggle 
links O moving the studs P, the bar I, slid 
ing plate A', and the eccentric-pin 3 accord 
ingly, so the point of cutting off steam is de 
termined by the positio of the centriftig 
weights J" J. 
The elements thus described have the func 
tions of a common cut-off shaft-governor for 
single-valve steam-engine, the range of the 
valve or point of cut-off being as the radial po 
sition of centrifugal weights revolving about 
the crank-shaft. As, however, action of these 
elements is dependent upon time as well as 
speed, the control of the point of cut-off or 
regulation of the engine's Speed is too tardy, 
and I attain a more sensitive action by means 
of the weights JJ, arranged to act upon the 
bar H by inertia and momentum without in 
terfering with the before-described centrifu 
gal elements in the following manner: 
The members N' N and the toggle-links O 
being the medium through which the cen 
trifugal weights J J'act upon the bar H, it 
follows that any mechanism that changes the 
relation between these weights J J' and the 
bai II will move the latter in the same de 
gree. This is done by the Weights JJacting 
upon and sliding the blocks M M by means 
of the levers or links LL" and the cranks U, 
which pass through slots V in the blocks y 
M, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 6. The 
cranks U are supported in brackets G. G", 
bolted to the sleeve F, as seen in Fig. 6. 
These inertia weights being connected almost 
radially by the levers or links LL', it follows 
that if the rate of rotation is suddenly dimin 
ished these weights will by their momentum 
go on at their attained Velocity, sliding the 
blocks M' M outward, and by reason of the 
diagonal slots WW cause an outward move 
ment of the members N' N* independent of 
the centrifugal weights J J', thus causing a 
corresponding backward movement of the bar 
II and a later cut off of the engine-valve. If, 
On the contrary, the speed of revolution is 
suddenly increased, these weights J J lag 
behind by their inertia and by means of the 
crank U move the blocks M' Minward, pro 
ducing a backward or inward movement of 
the bar II, causing an earlier cut off by reason 
of shifting the slide-plate A* and the eccen 
tric-pin B inward, in the manner already 
described. 
The weights J J are shown equally dis 
posed on each side of the links LL; but it 
is evident by changing the mass of these 
weights to the side of the lever's or links, as 
shown by dotted lines at E. E., the centrifugal 
force will fall in a radial line from the cen 
ter a. The weights J8 J4 or the links Li. 
are provided with stops to regulate the range 
of movement in either direction, as shown in 
Fig. 9. The construction of such stops is ob 
vious, and can be varied in any manner. in 
this Inanner initial in ovements of the bar I 
and of the eccentric-pin B" are derived fron 
the momentum or inertia of the weights JJ 
independent of and not interfering with the 
action of the centrifugal weights J'J', which, 
however, follow and complete the adjustment 
of the bar H. 
Referring now to the means for adjusting 
the point of cut-off or speed of all engine 
while in motion, apply to the centrifugal 
Weights J J supplementary springs S. S. 
(Shown in Fig. 6.) These springs act in uni 
75 
9 O 
IOC 
IO 
II5 
I 2 5 
 
554,840 
3 
7 O 
75 
son with the main springs S' S, but are at 
tached at their inner ends to adjustable bell 
cranks XX that vary the tension and conse 
quent position of the weights J J', or of the 
bar II and the point of cut-off or speed of the 
engine. These bell-cranks XX are attached 
to brackets Y, bolted to the member A' by 
the screws b, as shown in Fig. 4. The springs 
SS are attached to the hooks c c, Fig. 5, and 
two adjusting or tension rods d dare attached 
to the hooks e e at right angles to c c, so the 
tension of the springs SS falls on these rods 
did and on the cross-barf, as seen in Figs. 3 
and 4. This cross-bar f is formed integrally 
with a cylindrical shell g that slides loosely 
in the bar H, as seen in Fig. 3, a feather or 
key h causing the shell to revolve with the 
bar H. Screwed into the outer end of this 
shell g is a plug i, through which passes a 
bolt or stem k, having a collar-head l and 
friction-washers in bearing against the inner 
end of the plug i. 
The stem k passes through a stationary 
bracket or support in, attached to some part 
of the engine-framing, as seen in Fig. 1, a 
pin or feather O being provided to keep the 
stem k from turning in the bracket in. On 
the end of this stem k is a thumb-nut or hand 
wheel p, by means of which the stem k, the 
sleeve g, and rods d d can be drawn outward 
while the engine is in motion, increasing the 
tension on the springs SS, causing the 
weights J J to move inward, and thus in 
crease the speed of the engine by means of 
these devices. 
If it is desired that the engine run at di 
minished speed the hand-nut p is turned the 
other way, the stem k, sleeveg, and rods did 
moving inward, reducing the tension on the 
spring S S', permitting the weights J J to 
move outward, and thus cause the engine to 
run at a slower rate., 
The chamber in the shell g can be filled 
with oil or grease to lubricate the washer m. 
Referring next to the method of reversing 
an engine by means of my improved control 
ling devices, this is performed by lateral 
movement of the bearing G", producing at 
the same time an inward movement of the 
bar Hindependent of the regulating mech 
anism hereinbefore described, shifting the ec 
centric-pin B' to the opposite side of the cen 
ter C, and reversing the engine. This bear 
ing G" can slide upon a base-plate moving in 
guides, or in any other suitable manner. In 
the present case I show it in Fig. 1 mounted 
on a sliding bar q, which extends across to 
the opposite side of the engine, where this bar 
is operated by a lever r, having a notched 
sector and detent at t, in the usual manner. 
Referring to Fig. 3, the collar F, which 
moves with the bearing G', is connected to the 
sliding bar H by means of the screws it it, 
which extend loosely through a slot it in the 
side of the sleeve F and into a slot v in the 
bar H, this slot - being long enough to per 
mit independent movement of the bar H by 
the speed-regulating elements hereinbefore 
described, but not more, and when the bear 
ing G and the collar F are moved outward 
or backward these screws at draw the bar II 
inward from the slide A*, causing that, and the 
pin B to move to the opposite side of the cen 
ter Ct, or to a corresponding angle of advance 
for running the engine in a reverse direction. 
In this movement all the regulating elements, 
including the sleeve F, slide on the sleeve F", 
slots if being provided, as seen in Fig. 3, to 
permit lateral movement of the studs PP. 
To reverse the speed-regulating elements in 
my improved controlling device, so the engine 
may in common service be run in either direc 
tion, I reverse the bar Hor turn half around, 
arranging the slide-plate A* and the pin Bac 
cordingly. In this manner it may be seen 
provision is made in a single device or appa 
ratus for all functions required in controlling 
single-valve steam-engines; also that these 
various functions are independent in so far 
that they can be combined or segregated, as 
the nature of the duty of one engine may re 
quire. 
If an engine is to be reversed only, the 
speed-controlling elements can be omitted. 
If, on the contrary, ordinary regulation only 
is required, the reversing andlinertia elements 
can be omitted. If accurate regulation is re 
quired, as in the case of driving dynamos, the 
centrifugal and inertia elements can be em 
ployed together and the reversing elements 
omitted, such changes not impairing the op 
eration of whatever of the several elements 
are employed in any case. 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a steam-engine-controlling device, a 
sliding plate or eccentric provided with a pin 
to operate the engine-valve, a slotted diago 
nal bar A* to move and control the same, op 
erated by a central shaft or stem. H passing 
through the axis of the main eccentric-shaft, 
actuated by means of revolving weights SS 
SS, moving the eccentric-pin B in the man 
ner described, thus permitting either hand 
or automatic control of the engine, in the 
manner substantially as described. 
2. In a steam-engine-controlling device, a 
movable slide and eccentric-pin mounted on 
an axis separate from the main engine-shaft, 
but driven positively thereby, the eccentric 
pin moved by a diagonal bar or guide con 
trolled for regulation by centrifugal weights 
in the manner described, and in connection 
there with a hand lever and adjusting devices 
to regulate, stop, start, and reverse the en 
gine,in the manner substantially as described. 
3. In a steam-engine-controlling device, the 
eccentric-pin B", sliding plate, diagonal bar 
A, adjustable bar H, and in combination 
there with the sliding collar G, operated by 
centrifugal weights J J for the regulation of 
IOC 
lo5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
4. 
554,840 
O 
15 
speed, and by a hand-lever for reversing the 
engine, in the mannel Substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a steam-engine-controlling device, a 
movable slide and eccentric-pin in the man 
ner described, a central moving bar H and a 
diagonal guide A*, the studs P, links O, and 
collars C operated by the centrifugal weights 
JJ and springs in the manner described, 
also by the inertia-weights JJ for acceler 
ating or retarding the action of the main cen 
trifugal weights, in the manner substantially 
as described. 
5. In a steam-engine-controlling device, a 
movable slide and eccentric-pin B' capable 
of movement across the center to operate an 
engine in either direction, a diagonal slotted 
extension A and a movable bar H to control 
the position of the eccentric-pin, an annular 
collar connected to this bar II operated by 
a slide g and lever to reverse the engine 
by hand, in the manner substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. In a steam-engine-controlling device, the 
revolving and separately-geared hollow wheel 
 
25 
A provided with an inclosing slotted plate 
A, a movable slide A* and eccentric-pin B", a 
central moving bar H having a diagonal slot 
I actuating the sliding member A, the whole 
in cased and capable of retaining a Supply of 
lubricating - oil, in the manner and for the 
purposes substantially as described. 
7. In a steam-engine-controlling device, a 
movable slide and eccentric-pin, a diagonally 
slotted bar to move the slide and pin, cen 
trifugal Weights to adjust this bar, and con 
nected thereto by means of the toggle-links O 
and the slotted blocks M'M', in connection 
there with the main springs SS to resist cen 
trifugal force and the auxiliary springs SS, 
the latter adjustable by links and a screw 
when the engine is in motion, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto af 
fixed my signature in the presence of two 
Witnesses. 
JOHN L, IEALD. 
45 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED A. ENQUIST, 
WILSON. D. BENT, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554440.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 554,440, 
 
Wilpesscs 
74zae, 
 
G. A. & E. R. CROOKER. 
CLOTHES POUNDER. 
Patented Feb. 11, 1896. 
13v 76er. s v. George cooker 
By2%ir 2.7% E. 
yg' s 
Z72Ze 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE A. CROOKER AND EDWIN R. CROOKER, OF CROWLEY, LOUISIANA. 
COTHE SPO UNDER. . 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 554,440, dated February 11, 1896. 
Application filed April 17, 1895, Serial No. 546,083, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it inctly conce77: 
Be it known that we, GEORGEA. CROOKER 
and EDWINR.CROOKER, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Crowley, in the parish of 
Acadia and State of Louisiana, have invented 
a new and useful Clothes-Pounder, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of wash 
ing appliances which operate by a vertical re 
ciprocatory movement and force the water 
back and forth through the clothes in the pro 
CeSS of Washing; and the object of the same 
is to provide a device of this type which will 
obviate Splashing of the Water to the incon 
venience of the operator and the soiling of 
the floor, and which will lessen the effort and 
energy usually required of the operator to the 
efficient Working of similar prior machines, 
and which will possess durability and struc 
tural features for effecting the Washing in a 
rapid and efficient manner, and which will 
obviate rusting and the accumulation of for 
eign matter, as the parts will be disposed with 
Special reference to drain themselves of all 
Water and possible accumulation. 
With these and such other ends in View as 
may appertain to the Special organization of 
the device, the improvement consists of the 
novel features which hereinafter Will be more 
particularly set forth and claimed, and which 
are shown in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure I is a central vertical section of a 
Washing - machine embodying the essential 
features of the invention. Fig. 2 is a view 
similar to Fig. 1, but taken at right angles 
thereto. Fig. 3 is a bottom plan view of the 
device, a portion of the body or cone being 
broken away to show the manner of securing 
the ends of the cross-brace. 
The body 1 is formed of sheet metal, pref 
erably tin, and is constructed in the form of 
a cone. The tube 2 projects a short distance 
beyond the apex of the cone and has its lower 
end terminating in about a plane passing 
through the base of the body. This tube is 
centrally disposed with respect to the cone 
body, and its upper-end portion forms a socket 
to receive the lower end of the operating-han 
dile 3, the latter being limited in its inward 
movement when thrust into the tube by a 
cross-bar 4, which forms a stop. Ventilating 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
55 
yo 
tubes project in opposite directions from the 
lower-end portion of the tube 2 and connect 
at their outer ends with the body 1. These 
Ventilating-tubes serve to brace the tube 2 
and strengthen the body 1, and at the same 
time admit air to the interior of the body to 
obviate a too great suction when lifting the 
device in the efficient working of the machine. 
These ventilating-tubes incline downwardly 
from the tube 2 and communicate with the 
latter a short distance from its lower end. 
By giving the ventilating-tubes 5 a downward 
inclination they will drain themselves of any 
Water and foreign matter, which would other 
Wise have a tendency to remain therein if the 
Said tubes occupied any other position. 
A cross-brace 6 extends at approximately 
right angles to the ventilating-tubes 5 and has 
attachment at its middle point to the lower 
end of the tube 2 and at its ends to the sides 
of the body 1. This cross-brace is composed 
of two similar members 7, which are prefer 
ably strips of tin and which have their end 
portions Soldered or otherwise secured to 
gether, the middle portion being oppositely 
curved, so that unitedly said middle portions 
Will form a socket 8 through which the lower 
end of the tube 2 extends, the ends of said 
members 7 being extended through slits in the 
sides of the body 1 and bent in opposite di 
rections and soldered to the said body. This 
construction is shown most clearly in Fig. 3. 
This cross-brace 6 forms a stay for the lower 
end of the tube 2 and at the same time 
strengthens the body I. 
A series of air-passages 9 is disposed around 
the inner side of the body and extends from 
the base thereof to within a short distance 
of the apex and forms air-chambers to fa 
cilitate the Washing process and result in 
lessening the labor of the operator. These 
air-passages 9 gradually decrease in capacity 
from the lower to the upper end and are 
formed by tapering strips of tin or other sheet 
metal, which are curved between their edges 
and placed with their concaved sides against 
the body 1, to which they are soldered or oth 
erwise firmly attached, so as to secure tight 
joints between the edges of the strips and the 
sides of the body. These air-passages, con 
structed in the manner set forth, besides Serv 
ing to increase the operation of the device also 
9 O 
IGO 
2 
554,440 
O 
serve to strengthen and brace the body, there 
by enabling the parts to be made of lighter 
material than is possible with similar prior 
constructions and providing a comparatively 
light device which can be operated without 
fatiguing the user. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
A clothes-pounder comprising an approxi 
mately conical-shaped body having a cen 
trally-disposed tube constructed to receive a 
handle at its upper end, the lower end of the 
said tube terminating in about the plane of 
the base of the body, ventilating-tubes com 
municating at their inner ends with the lower 
end portion of the central tube and inclining 
downwardly in opposite directions, and at 
tached at their outer ends to the body at dia 
metrically-opposite points and opening there 
through, a cross-brace disposed at right an 
gles to the ventilating-tubes, and composed 
 
of similar members which have their end poli 
tions secured together, and which have the 
middle portions oppositely curving to form a 
socket to receive the lower end of the said cen 
tral tube, the extremities of the said members 
passing through slits in the sides of the body, 
and bent in opposite directions and attached 
to said body, and air-passages disposed about 
the inner sides of the body and extending 
from the base thereof to within a short dis 
tance of the top, Substantially in the manner 
set forth for the purpose described. 
In testimony that We claim the foregoing as 
our own We have hereto affixed our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
25 
35 
GEORGE A. CROOKER. 
EDWIN. R. CROOKER. 
Witnesses: 
A. C. LORMAND, 
VALSIN VALIER, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554540.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRITZ SAHL FELD, OF HAN OVER, GERMANY. 
METHOD OF MAKING EXTRACT OF FISH 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 554,540, dated February 11, 1896. 
Application filed December 27, 1894, Serial No. 533,139, (No specimens.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, FRITZ SAHLFELD, a sub 
ject of the King of Prussia, German Emperor, 
and a resident of Hanover, in the Kingdom 
of Prussia, German Empire, have invented a 
new and useful Method of Manufacturing an 
Extract of Fish, of which the following is an 
exact specification. 
This invention relates to the manufacture 
of an extract of the meat of all sorts of fish 
suitable for that purpose. 
In carrying my method into practice, I first 
free the dead fish from their skins, as well as 
from Scales, heads, tails, fins, entrails, and 
the like, and I then clean the remaining meat 
by means of warm water. The removal of 
the said parts, as well as the washing of the 
remaining useful parts, is of importance, as 
otherwise the quality of the extract produced 
might be greatly impaired, or the extract, per 
haps, be rendered perfectly useless. The re 
moved parts may be used up as manure. 
The cleaned meat is reduced to small pieces, 
and the said pieces are mixed with as much 
Water as necessary for their being properly 
extracted. I have found that it is for the 
most sorts of fish-meat sufficient to use only so 
much water that the meat is just covered by 
the same. The mixture is boiled within a 
closed iron vessel having a steam-coil or 
Steam-jacket, the temperature being kept 
below 300 Fahrenheit, as a higher tempera 
ture might result in the formation of pro 
ducts impairing the quality of the extract. 
In order to obtain at that temperature the 
greatest yield possible, the pressure within 
the said iron vessel is increased up to seven 
atmospheres by the introduction of heated 
compressed air. If that pressure were to be 
produced solely by the steam formed out of 
the Water containing the meat, the tempera 
ture would become too high a one; and if, on 
the other hand, the compressed air would be 
introduced in a cold state (with its natural 
temperature or that of the Outer air, respect 
ively,) into the vessel, it would become heated 
and strongly expand within the latter, so that 
the pressure would become far stronger than 
intended. These difficulties are avoided by 
the use of heated compressed air, the tempera 
ture of which is equal to that existing within 
If the meat is to be properly ex 
said vessel. 
hausted and the extract is to be a perfectly 
good one, the temperature should be near to 
300 Fahrenheit and the pressure should be 
about seven atmospheres. Both these condi 
tions can simultaneously be attained solely 
by the employment of heated compressed air. 
The process may be accelerated by agitating 
the mass during the cooking by means of a 
suitable stirring device. After the mass has 
been properly cooked it is led over into a res 
ervoir, whereafter the liquid portion of the 
mass containing the dissolved parts of the 
latter is separated from the other portion con 
taining the non - dissolved parts. This is 
preferably performed by a filter-press. The 
brown liquor containing the extract is poured 
into an iron vessel having a steam-jacket, 
and being preferably of funnel-like shape in 
order to afford a better separation of the fat. 
The liquor is heated within said vessel, and is 
left therein until all the fat has been Sepa 
rated. The latteris thereafter skimmed, and 
the remaining liquoris concentrated by means 
of a vacuum-pan or the like until the required 
consistency has been reached. The extract 
is now finished. 
Having thus fully described the nature of 
this invention, what I desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States is 
1. The method of manufacturing an extract 
of fish-meat, consisting in mixing the chopped 
or reduced meat with Water, cooking the miX 
ture under pressure produced by heated com 
pressed air, separating the liquor with its dis 
solved parts from the non-dissolved parts, 
freeing the liquor from fat, and concentrating 
it in the requisite degree, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The method of manufacturing an extract 
of fish-meat, consisting in mixing the chopped 
or reduced meat with water, cooking the mix 
ture at a temperature of about 300 Fahrenheit 
under pressure produced by heated com 
pressed air, separating the liquor with its dis 
solved parts from the non-dissolved parts, 
freeing the liquor from fat, and concentrating 
it to the requisite degree, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The method of manufacturing an extract 
of fish-meat, consisting in mixing the chopped 
or reduced meat with water, cooking the mix 
ture at a temperature of about 300Fahrenheit 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
554,540 
at a pressure of about seven atmospheres pro- specification in the presence of two subscrib 
duced by heated compressed air, separating ing witnesses. 
the liquor with its dissolved parts from the 
non-dissolved parts, freeing the liquor from 
5 fat, and concentrating it to the requisite de- 
gree, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
OTTO MAULL, 
HERMANN PAPE. 
Witnesses: 
ERITZ SAILFELD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554640.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 554,640, 
 
Zza, Z. 
W. S. ANDREWS. 
SAFETY ENVELOPE, 
Patented Feb. 18, 1896, 
 
-4 ser 
INVENTOR 
t/u/. // M24-1 
-66-2. p 
N- 
%ati, 
ATTORNE 4 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER, SIDNEY ANDREWS, OF MONTAGUE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SAFETY - ENVELOPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 554,640, dated February 18, 1896. 
Application filed April 10, 1895, Renewed January 16, 1896, Serial No, 575,816, (No model.) 
To all whon, it nagy concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER SIDNEY AN 
DREWS, a citizen of the United States, and a 
resident of Montague city, county of Frank 
lin, and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Safety-Envelopes, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part thereof, 
in which similar figures of reference indicate 
corresponding parts. 
This invention relates to the manufacture 
of envelopes, and the object thereof is to pro 
duce an envelope which, having been once 
sealed, cannot be opened without destroying 
the envelope. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the foll 
lowing specification, of which the accompa 
nying drawings form a part, in which 
Figure 1 represents a blank from which my 
improved envelope is formed; Fig. 2, said 
blank partially folded, and Fig. 3 the com 
pleted envelope. 
In the practice of my invention I cut from 
a sheet of paper from which the envelopes 
are manufactured a blank of the form shown 
in Fig. 1, having a body-piece 2, end pieces, 
3, a main side piece, 4, and the usual flap 5. 
I next cut longitudinal slots or recesses 6 in 
each end piece, as clearly shown in Fig. 1, 
near the upper part thereof, the corners of 
the end pieces being preferably cut a Way, as 
indicated, and in the side piece, 4, near the 
outer edge thereof, a longitudinal slot 7. The 
outer side of one of the end pieces is then 
gummed in the usual manner, as shown at 8, 
Fig. 2, and also the ends and outer side of the 
side piece 4, as shown at 9, and the lower in 
ner portion of the sides of the flap 5, as shown 
at 10, and the outer side and the edges thereof, 
as shown at 11, Fig. 2, for about halfits width. 
In folding the ends and sides of the envel 
ope the end piece 3 having the gummed Outer 
surface is first folded down, as shown in Fig. 
2, after which the outer end piece, 3, is folded 
thereon and sealed thereto, the longitudinal 
slots 6 registering with each other. The side 
piece, 4, is then folded over the end pieces 
and sealed along the ends and the inner side 
thereof, in which position the longitudinal 
slots or recesses 6 in the end pieces and the 
longitudinal slot 7 in the side 4 will register, 
as will be readily understood, and the envel 
ope will be ready for use. 
When it is desired to close or seal the flap 
5, the same is folded over, as clearly shown 
in Fig. 3, and the inner sides thereof sealed 
in the body of the envelope, and before the 
outer end portion is inserted through the lon 
gitudinal slots 7 and 6 in the side and end 
pieces the outer gummed side and edges there 
of are moistened, and after the insertion the 
sides of the envelope are pressed down in the 
usual manner, the form of the back of the en 
velope when sealed being clearly shown in 
Fig. 6. 
As thus constructed and sealed, it will be 
absolutely impossible to open this envelope 
without destroying the same, and I thus ac 
complish the object of my invention by means 
of a device which is simple in construction. 
and operation, which does not materially 
change the construction or form of the en 
velopes as now made, and which is perfectly 
adapted to accomplish the result for which it 
is intended. 
If desired, I may gum one side of the slot 7 
in theside A on the inner side thereof, as ShoWn. 
at 12, though this is not absolutely necessary. 
I prefer, however, that it should be done, as 
when thus provided and sealed the lines 13, 
14, and 15 of the envelope are each sealed, 
and the end pieces, the side 4, and the flap 
are also sealed on the inner sides, as Will be 
readily understood. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to Secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. An envelope, consisting of a blank hav 
ing the usual end pieces provided with longi 
tudinal slots or recesses in the ends thereof 
adapted to register when the ends are folded, 
the main side of the envelope being also pro 
vided with a corresponding longitudinal slot 
adapted to register with the slots in the end 
pieces when the three are folded, the end of 
the outer side of one of the end pieces, the 
side edges of the inner side of the flap for 
about half their lengths, beginning at the side 
adjacent to the body of the envelope, and the 
side edges on the outer side thereof at the free 
edge, and also the ends and sides of the op 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
7 O 
75 
85 
OO 
 
e 
554,640 
side edges on the outer side thereof at the free 
end, and also the ends and sides of the main 
side of the envelope on the inner side, and 
also the inner side of the main side of the 
envelope below the line of the longitudinal 
slot therein, being gummed, substantially as 
shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 8th day of April, 
1895. 
WALTER, SIDNEY ANDREWS. 
R. W. HuNTER, 
FRANK. J. LAWLER. 
Witnesses: 
25 
posite or main side of the envelope on the in 
nel side, being gummed, substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. An envelope, consisting of a blank havi 
ing the usual end pieces provided with longi 
tudinal slots or recesses in the ends thereof 
adapted to register when the ends are folded, 
the main side of the envelope being also pro 
vided with a corresponding longitudinal slot 
adapted to register with the slots in the end 
pieces when the three are folded, the end of 
the outer side of one end of the end pieces, 
the side edges of the inner side of the flap for 
about half their lengths, beginning at the side 
adjacent to the body of the envelope, and the 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554740.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 554,740, 
J. SPYER. 
ADHESIVE PLATE FOR ARTIFICIAL DENTURES, 
Patented Feb. 18, 1896. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH SPYER, OF MEXICO, MEXICO. 
ADHESIVE PLATE FOR ARTIFICIAL DENTURES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 554,740, dated February 18, 1896. 
 
Application filed August 4, 1894, Serial No. 51948l. (No model.) Patented in England May 24, 1895, No. 10,288; in France 
May 24, 1895, No, 247,754 and in Germany May 31, 1895, No, 84,120, 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH SPYER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Mexico, 
in the Republic of Mexico, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Adhe 
sive Plates for Artificial Dentures, (for which 
patents have been granted in Great Britain, 
No. 10,288, dated May 24, 1895; in France, No. 
247,754, dated May 24, 1895, and in Germany, 
No. 84,120, dated May 31, 1895;) and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates generally to artificial 
dentures, and particularly to an adhesive 
plate or blank formed of gutta-percha and 
gum-tragacanth, said plate or blankbeing cut 
approximately the shape of an artificial dent 
ure, to which it is adapted to be attached by 
Vulcanization. 
The object of my present invention is to 
provide a soft and adhesive plate or blank 
composed of the ingredients abovementioned, 
which is adapted to be sold to dentists inde 
pendent of the hard-rubber plate and after 
Ward attached to said hard plate by the den 
tist. 
Heretofore it has been attempted to 
provide a soft or elastic base for hard-rubber 
plates in order to render said plates more ad 
hesive; but it has been found that the soft 
rubber lining or base soon rots, thus leaving 
the plate practically worthless. 
Now the object of my invention is to over 
come this objection, and this I do by the em 
ployment of an adhesive plate composed of 
gutta-percha and gum-tragacanth, inasmuch 
as I have discovered that a plate composed 
of these ingredients is not only permanent, 
but also adheres strongly to the gums and 
provides a soft and elastic connecting medi 
um, which will soothe and not irritate the mu 
Cous membranes. 
My invention therefore consists in the de 
tails hereinafter referred to, and pointed out 
in the claim. 
In the drawings hereto annexed and form 
ing a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a 
view showing an upper denture provided with 
my improved adhesive plate composed of 
gutta-percha and gum-tragacanth. Fig. 2 is 
a view of the plate or blank to be attached to 
an upper denture, and Fig. 3 shows the form 
of a blank plate to be attached to a lower 
denture. 
As before stated, these plates are cut ap 
proximately the size and shape of the upper 
and lower dentures, and in preparing said 
plate I dissolve One part of gutta-percha in 
chloroform, bisulphide of carbon, or other 
Solvents, and then add about an equal amount 
of gum-tragacanth, which becomesthoroughly 
incorporated with the gutta - percha. The 
compound thus formed is rolled out into a 
thin sheet and cut into the plates or blanks 
shown in Figs. 2 and 3. 
While Ihave referred to chloroform and bi 
sulphide of carbon as solvents, it will be un 
derstood that the gum-tragacanth can be in 
corporated by soaking the gutta-percha in 
hot water, and then incorporating the traga 
canth there with while said gutta-percha is 
still in a soft state. After the plates are fin 
ished I preferably cover the upperface thereof 
With a sheet of tin-foil, which is intended to 
remain until the adhesive plate is vulcanized 
to the hard-rubber denture. 
The mode of using my adhesive plate is as 
follows: After the case is flasked and packed 
the adhesive plate is placed on the palatal 
surface of the plaster model, and it is then 
Vulcanized in the usual Way, and after the 
case is vulcanized my adhesive plate will be 
found to be incorporated with the rubber on 
the palatal side. The sheet of tin-foil is then 
removed. 
A denture having my adhesive plates com 
posed of gutta-percha and gum-tragacanth is 
found to be peculiarly adhesive, soft, and 
soothing to the membranes of the mouth, 
and, furthermore, such soft and adhesive sur 
face will not rot or deteriorate. 
It will of course be understood that I do not 
wish to limit myself strictly to the proportions 
stated, but only substantially thereto. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
2 
554,740 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH SPYER. 
Witnesses: 
A. C. VERDUGO, 
WALTER B. MURRAY. 
As a new article of manufacture, an adhe 
sive plate or blank composed of gutta-percha, 
and gum - tragacanth, thoroughly incorpo 
rated, formed into a sheet, and cut into the 
shape of a hard-rubber denture to which it is 
adapted to be attached by Vulcanization, Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554840.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 554,840, 
- 
J. F. SCPULTZ, 
UTENSIL FOR HOLDING SWEEPINGs. 
Patented Feb. 18, 1896. 
 
 
2 
 
 
 
Z72//e72O7. 
24, c/ ef. 
ty 7, 62. 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.PHOTO-Tho...washingto.pc 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
& 
JOHN F. SCHULTZ, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
UTENS FOR HOLDING SWEEP NGS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 554,840, dated February 18, 1896. 
Application filed May 6, 1895, Serial No. 548,207. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN F. SCHULTZ, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Utensils for 
Holding Sweepings; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the figures of 
reference marked thereon, making a part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to utensils for gather 
ing, holding, and porting sweepings, Waste 
papers, &c., usually found in streets and other 
localities. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
for single sweepers an easily-portable utensil 
with which conveniently to gather Small 
heaps of Sweepings into large enough heaps 
for horse-carts, to Save much labor in SWeep 
ing them together in the customary way, often 
over clean parts of pavements. 
My invention is a rectangular oblong box 
receptacle, when standing on end in proper 
position about the size of a large carpet or 
hand bag. It can be carried as such. Only 
about one-third of one side, termed its 
front side, is left open at the bottom. 
Under the opening is a projecting lip or pan 
fixed at rightangles to the oblong box. Above 
the opening is a downward-sliding parti 
tion-board dividing the box into two com 
partments, a closed upper One and an open 
lower one. The box is therefore an original 
two-story or double-deck sweepings-holder. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of the invention. Fig. 2 is a front 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a section on the 
line if y of Fig. 2. 
The invention is a Substantial box 1, made 
preferably of wood. It may be provided with 
a pair of small truck-wheels 2, located near the 
bottom, on which is the projecting lip or pan 
3. This lip may be part of the box, the 
upper front sides being cut off enough to 
leave lips with upward-slanting sides. The 
lip is, however, made preferably of thin 
metal, its sides turned up to form sides 5 to 
guide the sweepings into the opening 6. Be 
tween the lower open space, 7, and the upper 
inner space, 8, of the box is the sliding parti 
tion-board 9, provided with a catch or strap 
10. The partition-board slides in guide-strips 
11. On the top end of the box is handle 12 
for carrying the box about and to hold chain 
13, ending in a hook. 
To truck the box, it must be tilted on its 
back, the chain being passed under catch 14. 
The operator alongside the box then lifts its 
top end by the chain off the ground and trucks 
it full of sweepings easily along to form large 
heaps. Truck-wheels for the top end are 
thus dispensed with. The chain 13 also serves 
to hold the broom 15 in position, as shown by 
dotted lines in Fig. 1. The broom-handle can 
then serve as apole or shaft of the box to push 
or pull it long distances. For carrying sala 
ble Waste paper frames 16, preferably made 
of bent wire, are provided. They are act 
uated by common Spring-hinges 17, whose 
rigid plates 18 are screwed on the box. 
Further operations of my invention are as 
follows: Street-sweepers keep the box gen 
erally on the edge of sidewalks, out of the 
Way of teams, till they have swept together 
small heaps in different places. To gather 
them, they place the box in position, front 
ing aheap, and with the broom push or sweep 
the heap on the lip and into the open com 
partment. When that is filled the sweeper 
tips the box on its back, withdraws the parti 
tion-board, and stands the box on its upper or 
handle end to make its contents fall to that 
end. The partition-board must then be re 
placed and the box turned back to its origi 
nal proper standing position, with its lower, 
then again empty, compartment on the 
ground. 
If desired, the whole or part of the top of 
the box and also the Whole front of the same 
above the opening may be hinged doors or 
lids, fastened with common spring-holds. 
Instead of the upright standing grip or han 
dle shown in drawings an ordinary bucket 
handle of bent wire may be fastened to the 
sides of the box. The top of it then furnishes 
a seat for the house or storekeeper who owns 
it to hold sidewalk-sweepings, &c. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The sweepings-holder comprising an ob 
95 
IOO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
554,840 
5 ments substantially as specified. 
long box having a lip projecting therefrom 
on a line with its lower end, when the box is 
placed in its upright position, and a sliding 
partition dividing the box into two compart 
2. A sweepings-holder comprising an ob 
long box provided with a lip projecting there 
from, a sliding partition, truck-wheels, a han 
dle and chain, substantially as specified. 
3. A sweepings-holder, comprising an ob 
Io 
 
long box and spring-actuated frames sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN F. SCIIULTZ. 
Witnesses: 
A. N. JESBERA, 
E. M. SHUSTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US554940.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 554,940. 
A. C. LIEBEND ORFER, 
DRILLING MACHINE, 
Patented Feb. 18 l896. 
N. SS 
SSan SS N El 
RINHEImp 
  
  
 
  
 
 
Ille 
 
3. 
ae 
i 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT C. LIEBENDORFER, OF OTT AWA, ILLINOIS. 
DRILLING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 554,940, dated February 18, 1896. 
Application filed May 6, 1895, Serial No. 548,320, (No model.) 
IO 
55 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT C. LIEBEN 
DORFER, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Ottawa, in the county of La Salle and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Drilling-Ma 
chines; and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
drilling-machines, and has more particular 
relation to machines for drilling wells. 
It consists of certain novel constructions, 
combinations, and arrangements of parts, all 
of which will be hereinafter more particularly 
set forth and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a side elevation of a machine embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 represents a transversever 
tical section through the same. Fig. 3 repre 
sents a detail side elevation, partly in section, 
of the spring-controlling devices. Fig. 4 rep 
resents a horizontal section through the same, 
and Fig. 5 represents a detail section of the 
cam and mountings for operating the friction 
wheel. 
A in the drawings represents the truck, of 
any suitable construction, by which the ma 
chine may be moved to the different fields of 
operation. B is the vertical frame mounted 
on this truck, Cthe hollow operating-drill, and 
D the spring devices for controlling the opera 
tion of said drill. 
The frame B is mounted on the forward end 
of the truck, and consists of two vertically and 
forwardly inclined standards b, attached to 
the side beams of the truck and held firmly 
in position by the inclined braces b', also at 
tached to the respective side beams of the 
machine. A walking-beam b is pivotally 
mounted between the standards b and is pro 
vided at its rear end with a pitman b pivot 
ally pendent therefrom. The lower end of 
said pitman is mounted upon a crank-pin b 
of a crank-disk b. This disk is mounted on 
the inner end of the main operating-shaft b, 
which is mounted transversely of the truck 
and under the rear end of the walking-beam 
by journal-boxes b, attached to the longi 
tudinal beams of the truck. This shaft car 
ries a belt-wheele, a fly-wheele', and a fric 
tion-wheele, the latter being composed of a 
suitable hub or wheel covered about its pe 
riphery with leather or some like frictional 
material. 
The spring devices D for controlling the ac 
tion of the drill consist of an inverted-yoke 
shaped frame d, having lateral lugs d", by 
which it is attached to the transverse beams 
of the frame of the truck. The vertical arms 
of this yoke are provided upon their inner 
faces with vertical guides d', upon which the 
grooved head dis adapted to slide and be 
guided. This head, as shown in Figs. 3 and 
4, is provided upon its upper surface with 
three circular spring-retaining projections d', 
the middle one of which is apertured to per 
mit the end of a connecting-rodd to be passed 
therethrough and secured by a suitable lock 
ing-nut. 
The under side of the horizontal portion of 
the yoke is provided with three tubular pend 
ent projections d adapted to support the 
upper ends of the spiral springs d", which are 
interposed between the head dand said hori 
zontal portion of theyoke. The rodd passes 
through the middle one of said projections d 
and is formed with an eye dat its upper end. 
A rod d having a turnbuckle d0 connects 
said rod d and the pitman b. An auxiliary 
shaft F is mounted on the frame A in the 
rear of the shaft band is provided with a 
reel or drum f, a friction-wheelf' adapted to 
engage the wheel e' and a cam-disk f', the 
latter being shown in Fig. 5 with the shaft 
passing loosely through it to one side of its 
true center. This cam is provided with an 
operating-arm f which passes through a slot 
f' cut in the top half of the divided bearing 
box f. mounted on the truck-beam and in 
which the cam is set. The arm f is con 
nected to an operating-lever if pivoted at the 
front of the machine by a connecting-rod f', 
said lever being provided with rack and pawl 
securing devices f for holding it in the de 
sired adjusted position. 
It will be seen from the foregoing that when 
it is desired to rotate the drumf the lever f' 
is pushed forward and the shaft F thus forced 
forward as the cam f revolves. This action 
will bring the wheel f' in contact with the 
35 
45 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
554,940 
25 
35 
45 
55 
O 
wheel e, and thus the shaft F will be re 
volved and wind the rope f" upon the drum, 
the Said rope passing over a pulley at the top 
of the frame B and being provided with a 
suitable hook.f. 
The drill C is provided with a suitable hol 
low drill-rod c having two twisting-handles 
c' rigid therewith and is screw-threaded at its 
upper end to Work in the temper-screw c, the 
latter being attached at its upper end to the 
forward end of the Walking-beam by a swivel 
joint, and a clamp clbeing provided at the 
lower end of the temper-screw to bind the 
same in any desired adjusted position on the 
rod c. Apertures care formed in the lower 
end of the drill-rod, so that the water, sand, 
&c., can pass upward through said rod. When 
it is desired to rotate the rod c to move it 
downward as the drilling progresses, the same 
is accomplished by turning the handles c'. 
When it is desired to raise or lower the 
drill from or into the well to affix a new point 
or the like, the temper-screw c is uncoupled 
from the walking-beam and the hook f 
hooked in the same. The drum f is then ro 
tated, as before described, and the rope f7 
wound thereon, which will elevate the drill. 
If desired, when raising the drill the pitman 
l' and rod d" may be uncoupled from the 
crank-disk and the rodd respectively, so that 
the spring device D will not operate. 
By means of the spring device D, I am en 
abled to produce a sharp quick stroke of the 
drill, which is more like a rebounding tap 
than a steady downstroke as the springs are 
compressed as the drill descends, thus slightly 
decreasing the force of the stroke and causing 
the drill to strike with a quick jerking action, 
which I find produces the best results. 
The drillings pass up through the rod cand 
discharge through the handles c'. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a drilling-machine, the combination 
of a portable truck carrying a suitable frame, 
a Walking-beam mounted on said frame, a 
drill detachably mounted on the outer end of 
said beam, mechanism for reciprocating said 
beam, spring devices for restraining the 
movements of said beam mounted on the 
frame and comprising a yoke having inter 
nal vertical guides and pendent cylindrical 
Spring-supporting projections one of which 
serves as a guide for a connecting-rod, a head 
sliding on said guides, a bar passing through 
one of said projections and connecting said 
head with the walking-beam, and a plurality 
of coil-springs mounted on said projections 
and engaging said head, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a drilling-machine, the combination 
of a portable truck carrying a suitable frame, 
a walking-beam mounted on said frame, a 
drill detachably mounted on the outer end of 
said beam, mechanism for reciprocating said 
beam, spring devices for restraining the 
movements of said beam mounted on the 
frame and comprising a yoke having inter 
nal vertical guides and pendent cylindrical 
spring-supporting projections one of which 
serves as a guide for a connecting-rod, a head 
sliding on said guides, a bar passing through 
one of said projections and connecting said 
head with the walking-beam, and a plurality 
of coil-springs mounted on said projections 
and engaging said head, a turnbuckle for 
increasing or decreasing the length of said 
bar, whereby the tension of the springs is de 
creased or increased at will and a tackle and 
winding-drum for raising the drillindepend 
ently of the walking-beam, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a drilling-machine, the combination 
of a portable truck carrying a suitable frame, 
a walking-beam mounted on said frame, a 
drill detachably mounted on the outer end of 
said beam, mechanism for reciprocating said 
beam, spring devices for restraining the 
movements of said beam mounted on the 
frame and comprising a yoke having inter 
nal vertical guides and pendent cylindrical 
spring-supporting projections one of which 
serves as a guide for a connecting-rod, a head 
sliding on said guides, a bar passing through 
one of said projections and connecting said 
head with the walking-beam, and a plurality 
of coil-springs mounted on said projections 
and engaging said head, a winding-drum and 
tackle and means for moving said drum into 
or out of engagement with the moving parts 
of the machine at will, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
ALBERT C. LIEBENDORFER. 
Witnesses: 
W. II. HINEBAUGH, 
D. B. SNOW. 
75 
So 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555040.txt	(No Model.) 
J. J., FAULKNER, 
COTTON SEED DELINTER. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
A?DREW B.GRAHAM, Photo-uTHO.wAsh NGTON.bc. 
(No Model.) 
. 
No. 555,040, 
 
J. J. FAULKNER, 
COTTON SEED DELINTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 18, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
???. 
?lventov 
???res JZzZe: 
????( 
&lttozwe? 
????%7-?%? 
???? 
?? 
 
(N0 M0 del, ) 
J. J. FAULKNER, 
COTTON SEED DELINTER. 
3 sheets-Sheet, 3. 
No. 555,040. 
Patented Feb. 18, 1896. 
 
???v??utor 
???7res ZZZ/ez 
a No RErw (3, GRAIR AM. Photo-intaigh.w AS hi i NG TORs. 2'.* 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES.J. FAULEXNER, OF MEMPHIS, TENNESSEE, ASSIGNOR TO THE STANDARD 
COTTON SEED COMPANY, OF ARKANSAS. 
COTTO N - SEED D EL INTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,040, dated February 18, 1896. 
V 
Application filed January 2, 1896, Serial No. 574,002, (No model.) 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mem 
phis, in the county of Shelby and State of Ten 
5 nessee, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Cotton-Seed Delinters; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
?o to which it appertains to make and use the 
S????1?. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
machines for treating cotton-seed, and par 
ticularly to improvements in that class there 
I5 of known as delinters; and it consists in 
theimproved block-holding device whose con 
struction will be hereinafter described, and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
2O improved form of fastening for securing an 
abrading-block upon the revolving surface of 
a cotton-seed delinter. 
Heretofore prominent among the difficulties 
which have been experienced in the practical 
25 operation of that class of delinters to which 
the cotton-seed delinter which forms the Sub 
ject-matter of my present application be 
longs-namely, a delinter having a revoluble 
delinting-cylinder, with abrading-blocks re 
3o movably secured to its periphery, and a cas 
ing therefor-has been that of providing 
means for preventing the blocks being un 
seated or torn from their fastenings by the 
intense strain to which they are are subjected 
35 in the operation of the machine. This diffi 
culty has up to the present time been insur 
mountable, and is all the more important 
because the loosening of a single abrading 
block is apt to result in the tearing of the en 
4o tire machine to pieces before the same can be 
stopped and the injury repaired. 
In accomplishing the object of my inven 
tion I bevel the ends of the abrading-blocks 
which I provide for the revolving surface of 
45 a cotton-seed delinter, the beveled portion be 
ing at the base of the block, and make use of 
two-faced holding devices, each face being 
formed with a dovetailed groove or recess to 
enable it to receive the beveled end of the 
~~ 
block. These recesses are opposite in direc 
tion, and an abrading-block is held between 
the recesses formed in adjacent holding de 
vices; and I bevel one side of the block near 
its base and form the delinting-cylinder of 
a series of disks, each disk being only wide 
enough to receive a single block and being 
formed on one side With a peripheral beveled 
flange or projecting rim, against which the 
beveled face of the block may be pressed and 
held. Cement or plaster may then be used 
to hold the blocks perfectly rigid in their po 
sition upon the disks. 
In order to still further facilitate the pas 
sage of the seed through the machine, Isome 
times form on One side of the block at the base 
a projecting flange and bevel the outer face 
of the flange, instead of beveling the side of 
the block itself. In this case I insert the 
blocks between the edges of the block-holders 
and force them in until the beveled-faced 
flange firmly contacts with the peripheral pro 
jecting rim. In this manner a space is formed 
between adjacent blocks, which provides a 
free channel for the passage of the seed 
through the machine, while the beveling of 
the face of the block or of the flange, as the 
case may be, enables the block to be forced 
against the projecting rim and thus be se 
curely seated and at the same time minimize 
the amount of inactive surface-i.e., that of 
the flange upon the delinting-cylinder. 
Myinvention is fully illustrated in the draw 
ings which accompany and form a part of this 
application, in which the same reference-let 
ters refer to the same or corresponding parts. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section showing the 
location of the parts. Fig. 2 is a detail per 
spective view of the central shaft with two 
disks or cylinder-sections thereon. Fig. 3 is 
a detail perspective view of one of the disks. 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of one of the abrading 
blocks. Fig. 5 is a central transverse section 
of an abrading-block, showing the depth of 
the central groove. Fig.6 is a detail view of 
an abrading-block provided with a side flange, 
a section orportion of one of the disks being 
shown in connection therewith. Fig. 7 is a 
detail view of an abrading-block formed with 
55 
?? 
95 
555,040 
7 ? 
75 
So 
85 
95 
ICO 
5 
O 
25 
45 
beveled corners, a correspondingly-formed 
holding device being shown in connection 
there with. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
machine-frame. In this frame are formed 
suitable bearings for the central power-shaft 
l, upon which is mounted a delinting-cylinder 
B, and by the frame is supported the casing 
C. The scouring or abrading surfaces of the 
macline consist of the abrading-blocks ID, se 
cured to the surface of the delinting-cylinder, 
and the emery-lined inner surface of the de 
limting-cylinder casing. 
Seed is fed into the machine through a feed 
pipe E, formed at the head end of the machine, 
and is discharged at the opposite or tail end 
of the machine through any suitable and well 
known discharge - pipe. The conveying of 
seed through the machine is effected in part 
by the natural gravitation of the seed when 
subjected to the influence of a revolving 
abrading-Surface and in part by the spiral 
formation of the abrading-blocks upon that 
portion of the delinting-cylinder nearest the 
feed-opening, which will hereinafter be de 
scribed in detail. The dirt separated from 
the seed by the action of the machine is re 
moved from the inclosure in which the abrad 
ing action is taking place through suitable 
perforations IF, formed in the bottom of the 
delinting-cylinder casing. The lint which is 
scoured from the seed by the action of the 
machine is withdrawn from the inclosure by 
the joint action of the lint-removal saws G, 
which project through suitably-spaced open 
ings in the delinting-cylinder casing, and of 
an exhaust-air current generated by the ex 
last-fan. It stationed in the air-flume I. 
It 
is in this air-flume that the lint-removal saws 
G. are journaled, and Such saws are so placed 
that their peripheries will project a short dis 
tance into the delinting-cylinder casing, so 
that they will seize and remove the long fibers 
of lint as rapidly as they are separated from 
the seed under treatment. A doffing-brush 
J is used to keep the lint-Iremoval saws clean 
and to prevent the gathering of lint there 
upOn. 
My present invention resides in the means 
used to secure the abrading-blocks in posi 
tion on the surface of the delinting-cylindel'. 
As the form of the abrading-blocks, however, 
has been modified with special reference to 
the character of the holding devices employed, 
I will describe such blocks in detail. 
The abrading-block which I now use is 
formed, as shown in the drawings, with in 
clined sides (l, an upper surface d', which 
slopes upward from the front to the rear of 
the block, and a groove d extending longi 
tudinally of the block on its upper surface, 
the bottom of such groove being parallel to 
the base of the block. The incination of the 
sides of the block results in a rounded active 
abrading-Surface, which is the most favorable 
form for effecting the desired scouring of the 
Surface of the Seed undlel' treatment, while 
yet preventing injury to such seed. The 
slope of the upper surface of the block is 
very sharp at the front end of the block, until 
the height of the block nearly equals that 
which the block possesses at its rear end, the 
slope thereafter being very gradual. This 
formation enables the intensity of the Scour 
ing action of the abrading-surface to increase 
as the block passes over the seed undler treat 
ment, while the almost perpendicular forma 
tion of the rear end of the block allows the 
seed which has just been subjected to the 
abrading action to spring outward and change 
its position, so that a new surface may be pre 
sented to the abrading action of the next 
block. The groove which is formed upon the 
upper surface of the block effects the double 
purpose of enabling a larger extent of abrad 
ing-surface to be utilized than would other 
Wise be available and of affording a channel 
through which the seed may pass. 
It must be remembered that in this type of 
machine the distance between the delinting 
cylinder and the inner surface of the casing 
does not usually exceed five-eighths of an 
inch, so that some outlet or channel-as, in 
this case, the groove d-must be provided for 
the Seed under treatment. 
The ends of the block ale beveled, asshow'?n 
at d, in order to enable the blocks to be held 
by the double-faced holding devices IK, se 
cured to the surface of the delinting-cylinder, 
and on one side of the blocks, at their base, 
there is formed a longitudinal downwardly 
and inwardly sloping beveled face d', which 
enables the blocks to be fitted snugly against 
the peripheral projecting rim L', formed upon 
each of the disks or cylinder-sections L, and 
thus to be securely seated. I sometimes, in 
order to form additional channels through 
which the seed under treatment may pass, 
form on one side of the block at its base a 
projecting flanged and bevel the outer face 
cle of the flange. Either construction may 
be used. 
The abrading-blocks thus described are se 
cured to the surface of the delinting-cylinder 
by the two-faced holding devices IX, which 
are formed, as shown, on both sides with 
dovetailed recesses ke, and are secured by 
screws or otherwise to the surface of the de 
linting-cylinder. The delinting-cylinder it 
self is made up of a number of disks or cyl 
inder-sections L, each such section being of 
the width of a single block and having a num 
ber of holding devices secured to its periphery. 
On one side of such disks there is formed a 
projecting rim L', which is beveled so as to 
enable the beveled face of the abrading-blocks 
to fit Snugly thereagainst. In this manner I 
am enabled to firmly seat the blocks upon 
the cylindrical surface, and especially to re 
move the lateral Strain to which they are Or 
dinarily subjected by reason of their violent 
action. A suitable cement or plaster, Diref 
O 
I 15 
4 O 
I 30 
555,040 
3 
erably plaster-of-paris, is used after the blocks 
are in position to assist in holding the blocks 
firmly in position and preventing any move 
ment thereof. 
Instead of using the ordinary form of hold 
ing devices, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, I 
Sometimes bevel the corners of the abrading 
block, as shown at d, and form the holding 
devices With corresponding-extended corners 
k', thus enabling such corners to grasp and 
hold the beveled corners of the abrading 
block. This fastening is somewhat more se 
cure than the ordinary form. 
As indicated in Fig. 2, the abrading-blocks 
at the head end of the machine are set om a 
slight spiral, so as to facilitate the feeding 
or conveying of the seed through the machine. 
This means I have found to be quite effectual 
Without resorting to any additional element 
of construction. 
When a number of disks are used upon a 
central shaft, it is necessary to provide means 
for balancing the cylinder formed thereby in 
order to obtain the proper movement of the 
same. This Iaccomplish in my present con 
struction by forming the feather b' upon the 
shaft, and providing on the inner surface of 
the openings through which the shaft passes 
through the various disks or cylinder-sec 
tions a number of recesses l, through any one 
of which the feather l' of the central shaft 
may pass. By a suitable choice of the recesses 
through which the feather passes through the 
various disks the cylinder may be perfectly 
balanced and a proper revolution thereof se 
Cuired. 
I do not herein claim the use of a moving 
lint-removing device, stationed in an air-flume 
in free communication with the inclosure in 
which the delinting operation is taking place 
and formed to permit free passage of air 
therethrough, as this is claimed in a separate 
application for Letters Patent filed by me 
May 20, 1895, Serial No. 549,980. 
I do not herein claim the novel features of 
the abrading-block which is shown and de 
scribed, except so far as they assist in en 
abling the block to be held in place upon the 
periphery of the revolving abrading-surface; 
nor do I claim the construction by means of 
which I am enabled to balance the disks form 
ing the cylinder-surface upon the central 
shaft, as these matters are claimed in a sep 
arate application for Letters Patent filed by 
me January 28, 1896, Serial No. 577,166; but 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination with a casing, and a 
shaft extending through the same, of a revolv 
ing surface mounted thereon formed to pre 
sent holding-faces, block-holding devices on 
said surface, and a series of blocks formed to 
fit against said holding-faces and adapted to . 
be held in position by said holding devices, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a cotton-seed delinter, the combina 
- 
tion with a casing and a shaft extending 
through the same, of a series of disks having 
peripheral projecting rims formed on one side 
thereof mounted on said shaft, block-holding 
devices on said disks, and a series of abrad 
ing-blocks formed with faces adapted to fit 
closely against said projecting rims, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a cotton-seed delinter, the combina 
tion. With a casing and a shaft extending 
through the same, of a series of disks having 
peripheral projecting rims provided with in 
clined inner faces, on one side thereof, block 
holding devices on said disks, and a series of 
abrading-blocks formed on one side with cor 
respondingly-inclined faces adapted to fit 
against said projecting rims, substantially as 
described. 
4. In a cotton-seed delinter, the combina 
tion with a casing and a shaft extending 
through the same, of a series of disks having 
peripheral projecting rims, provided on their 
inner surfaces with downwardly-inclined, in 
Wardly-sloping beveled faces, formed on one 
side thereof, block-holding devices on said 
disks, and a series of abrading-blocks formed 
on one side with correspondingly-inclined 
faces adapted to fit against said projecting 
rims, substantially as described. 
5. In a cotton-seed delinter, the combina 
tion. With a casing and a shaft extending 
through the same, of a series of disks having 
peripheral projecting rims, provided on their 
inner surfaces with beveled faces, block-hold 
ing devices thereon, and a series of abrad 
ing-blocks, formed on one side with project 
ing flanges having correspondingly-inclined 
outer faces, adapted to fit against said pro 
jecting rims, substantially as described. 
6. In a cotton-seed delinter, the combina 
tion with a casing and a shaft extending 
through the same, of a series of disks having 
on one side thereof peripheral projectingrims, 
holding devices formed on either side with 
oppositely-inclined beveled-faced jaws, and 
abrading-blocks formed with oppositely-in 
clined beveled-faced ends, and on one side 
with faces adapted to fit against said project 
ing rims, adapted to be held between said 
holding devices, substantially as described. 
7. In a cotton-seed delinter, the combina 
tion with a casing, and a shaft extending 
through the same, of a series of disks having 
on one side peripheral projecting rims mount 
ed thereon, holding devices formed with op 
positely-inclined beveled-faced jaws thereon, 
and abrading-blocks, formed with oppositely 
inclined beveled-faced ends and on one side 
with projecting flanges provided with faces 
adapted to fit against said projecting rims, 
adapted to be held between said holding de 
vices, substantially as described. 
8. In a cotton-seed delinter, the combina 
tion. With a casing, and a shaft extending 
through the same, of a revolving surface 
mounted thereon, a series of abrading-blocks 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
 
75 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II 5 
I 25 
?55,040 
having beveled ends and formed with beveled- 
faced cornel's, and holding devices formed in presence of two witnesses. 
with dovetail grooves and with projecting 
dovetailed ends, whereby the blocks are se- 
5 cured to said revolving surface and the hold- 
ing devices engage said beveled-faced cor- 
ners, substantially as described. 
J. F. HUDSPETH, 
IIUGH |3. CULLEN. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
Witnesses: 
JAMES J. FAULKNER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555141.txt	(No Model.) 
N0, 555, 14l, 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
E. M. WIESC 0 TT. 
GAS BURNER, 
Patented Feb. 25 
1896. 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EUGENE M. WESCOTT, OF CIIICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
GAS-BU RN ER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,141, dated February 25, 1896. 
Application filed September 3, 1895, Serial No, 561,382, (No model) 
O 
2O. 
? 
" 
2 s 
To all who?, it, 7??? ??? ??r?: - . 
Beit known that I, EUGENEM. WESCOTT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have inyented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Gas-Burners; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and the letters of reference marked thereori, 
which form a part of this specification. 
The invention relates more particularly to 
the application of the Bunsen burner to gas 
lamps, especially of the class known as the 
Welsbach incandescent gas-lamp, in which 
the flame is located within a non-combustible 
mantle which is rendered incandescent. 
The object of the invention is to adapt such 
burner for the use of hydrocarbon gas, as well 
as to increase its efficiency when gas of greater 
buoyancy is used. 
. 
?. 
The invention consists in forming the mix 
ing-chamber in the upper end of the Bunsen 
tube so that it is not necessary to raise a 
heavy gas any considerable distance after it 
is freed from the direct pressure within the 
service-pipes. . 
It consists further in a peculiar form of 
regulating-valve for controlling the delivery 
of the gas into the mixing-chamber of the 
Bunsen tube, whereby the advantage is se 
cure? of discharging the gas in a number of 
fine jets, and consequently with very consid 
erable velocity, the discharge-apertures being 
of such form that their area may be varied 
at pleasure. 
It consists further of means for varying the 
- 
air-supply as the flow of gas is varied. 
In illustrating my invention Ishow in Fig 
lure 1 an elevation of the burner complete and 
ready for use; Fig. 3, a central vertical sec 
tion on the line 22 of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a plan 
45 section on the line 33 of Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a plan 
Section on the line 4 4 of Fig. 2; Fig. 5, a de 
tail of the burner, partly in section; Fig. 6, a 
detail of the governing-valve. 
In burners of this character it is necessary. 
that the gas be discharged into the mixing 
chamber with considerable velocity to pro 
(lice the necessary suction to draw in the air. 
In order to secure this velocity it luas been 
the practice to introduce the gas in one or 
more jets, using a tube with a closed end and 
puncturing the end to admit the required 
quantity of gas. 
If the quantity of gas was 
found to be too small more was secured either 
by increasing the size or number of the holes. 
If the quantity proved to be too great it was 
reduced by plugging one or more of the holes 
or reducing their area. 
In my improved burner.Isecure the requi 
site velocity and provide means for complete 
control of the quantity of gas by the use of a 
plug-valve having ports in the form of grooves 
running back from its end and diminishing 
in area, until they run to the surface. By 
withdrawing this valve from its seat these 
ports are gradually opened. 
It has been found impracticable to usehy 
drocarbon gas in a burner of this kind except 
under great piussure, for the reason that this 
gas is too heavy to rise in the tube and must 
be forced out. By placing the mixing-cham 
berin the upper end of the tube Iavoid form 
ing this iong column of free gas and throw 
the jets beyond the mouth of the tube. 
The oute frame of my burner may be of 
the usual construction, as shown at A, and 
carry a chimney Band a shade-supporta. At 
b I show the rod used in burners of this type 
for supporting the non-combustible mantle. 
The upper end of the Bunsen tube C is se 
cured within the frame of the lamp, and its 
air-ports.c are located adjacent to such end, 
$the air being conducted to these ports by a 
tubular casing E extending downwardly and 
open at its lower end. A transversepartition 
c' is located within the tube C immediately 
below the ports c and is centrally apertured. 
The lower end of the tube C is externally 
screw-threaded, as shown. 
Anipple D, internally screw-threaded from 
both ends to adapt it to the tube C and for 
attachment to the gas-fixture, has a partition 
d' crossing it intermediate of its ends, which 
carries a stemi di projecting beyond the upper 
end of the nipple and adapted to enter the 
aperture in the partition c' in the tube C and 
form there with a gas-tight joint. 
The stem 
dis of less diameter than the interior of the 
tube D, and around it the partition d is per 
forated, as indicited at d, for the free pas 
. 
. 
- 
55 
?? 
75 
9 5 
I oo 
555,143. 
40 
45 
- 
Sage of the gas. A plurality of small grooves 
are cut in the sides of the stem d, starting 
from its upper end and tapering downwardly 
until they run out or disappear. 
??????????? 
The nipple D. should be secured firmly to 
the gas-fixture, so that when the burner is 
turned the tube C will turn within this nip 
ple, thus raising and lowering the partition 
c with reference to the end of the stem d. 
By turning the tube C down into the nipple 
D from the position shown in Fig. 2 the 
grooves fare closed, and in this manner the 
gllantity of gas delivered can be accurately 
and easily regulated 
A. collar Gis fitted upon the nipple D, pref 
erably screYY-threaded thereon, for conven 
ience of vertical adjustment, and has an ex 
ternal diameter equal to that of the casing E. 
The collar may be so adjusted upon the nip 
ple.D that as the tube C is turned down the 
casing E will approach it sufficiently to cut 
of or materially reduce the air entering it. . 
By this means both the air and gas supply 
can be regulated by simply turning the burner 
around. 
claim as my invention 
1 in an incandescent gas-lamp the combi 
nation with a frame, a transparent chimney, 
a non-combustible mantle within the chim 
ney, and a gauze burner within the mantle, 
of a Bunsen tube discharging immediately 
below ihe gauze burner and having its gas 
and air induct... ports exclusively at its up- - 
per end, substantially as describedand for 
the purpose specified. 
2. n an incandescent gas-lamp the combi 
nation with an attaching-nipple and a Bun 
sen tube screwed into the nipple and having 
a centrally-apertured transverse partition, of 
a plug-valve, having side ports tapering back 
from its end, set centrally in the nipple and 
adapted to close the aperture in the Bunsen 
tube partition, a casing secured to the tube 
and inclosing its air-ports and having its lower 
end open, and a collar mounted upon the nip 
ple and adapted to close the open end of the 
easing when the tube is turned down into the 
nipple, the several parts being so propor 
tioned that vinen the ports of the plug-valve 
are fully open the casing is sufficientiyre 
moved from the collar te admit a full supply 
of air, substantially as described and for the 
purpose specified. 
3. In a jiu insen buriei the coni)ination 
with an attaching-nipple having a centrally 
projecting stem with longitudinal tapering 
groove-ports extending backwardly from its 
end, of a Bunsen tube having a transverse 
partition with a central aperture adapted to 
the end of the stem, said tube being in screw 
threaded engagement with the nipple, sub 
stantially as described and for the purpose 
In testimony whereof affix my signature 
specified. 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
: 
. 
* 
EUGENE M. WESCOTT. 
Witnesses: - 
LOUIS K. GILLSON, 
MILO B. GILLsoN. 
I. ? 
15 
2 ? 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555241.txt	( No Model.) 
C. W. GLIDDEN & A. D. ELLIOTT. 
HEEI, NAILING MACHINE. 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 555,24l, 
Patented Feb. 25, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
 
es %cesses. 
Z7e/e7262s. 
age 77. Zazzave. 
scRAAM. PHOTO-LTHOWASH". C - 
No Model. ) 
C. W. GLIDDEN & A, D, ELLIOTT, 
HEEL NAILING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 555,241, 
 
Patented Feb. 25, 1896. 
Ceee-tesses. 
6-a-ad &4%, - 
f 
- 
- - 
- - - 
CZaz-\es (e. Czezze. 
Ozyor/ ZZ Z0Zeaz. 
ANbRef B.GRAHAM.Photo-H.G.washingtoc 
h 
- 
No Mode.) 
C. W. GLIDDEN & A, D, ELLIOTT, 
HEEL NAILING MACHINE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 555,241. 
- 
Patented Feb. 25, 1896. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. GLIDDEN, OF LYNN, AND ALVIN D. ELLIOTT, OF LAWRENCE, 
ASSIGNORS TO JAMES W. BROOKS, TRUSTEE, OF PETERSHAM, MASSA 
CIU SETTS, 
HEEL-NALING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,241, dated February 25, 1896. 
Application filed July 27, 1894, Serial No. 518,731, (No model.) 
So 
55 
Io parts. 
15 attached to the shoe and then the top lift. 
?o Call, Luhon, it nucully concer'72: 
Be it known that we, CHARLES W. GLID 
DEN, of Lynn, and ALVIN D. ELLIOTT, of Law 
rence, county of Essex, State of Massachu 
5 setts, have invented an Improvement in Heel 
Nailing Machines, of which the following de 
Scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters 
and figures on the drawings representing like 
This invention has for its object to improve 
and simplify the devices co-operating with 
the nail-driving mechanism to bring into po 
sition in proper time and order the heel to be 
In Our invention we have mounted along 
side the nail-box a carrier or plate, one arm 
of which has an opening for the reception of 
the heel to be applied to a shoe mounted upon 
2O a last carried preferably at one end of a last 
holding spindle, a second arm of said lever 
plate receiving upon it the top lift and acting 
as a Spanker to spank said top lift onto the 
nails exposed at the tread end of the heel, 
25 both said arms, as shown, having suitable 
holders, one for the heel and the other for the 
top lift. 
We have chosen to illustrate our inven 
tion in connection with a machine of the 
3o kind illustrated in United States Patent No. 
415,670, dated November 19, 1SS9. 
Figure 1 represents, in side elevation, a suf 
ficient portion of a machine of the class re 
ferred to with our improvements added to en 
35 able our invention to be understood, some of 
the parts-such as the gear 12 and one of the 
guidesh' and its weight-being broken out to 
better illustrate the construction of the parts. 
Fig. 2 is a top or plan view of the parts shown 
4o in Fig. 1 with the loose pulley and the roller 
carrying clutch-collar with its hub in section, 
the holders for the heel and top lift being 
omitted. Fig. 3 is a section to the right of the 
dottedline ac, Fig. 1, the cam-hub being broken 
45 out to fully show the lever actuated by it. 
Fig. 4 is an under side view enlarged of the 
carrier or plate for carrying the heel and top 
lift; Fig. 5, a top view of said carrier or plate 
 
v. 
. 
. 
with the holders for the heel and top lift in 
place, the figure also showing the shank of 
the arm on which it is pivoted. Fig. 6 is a 
detail showing the arm e and the rest for the 
lower end of the heel as it is applied to the 
space in the plate. Fig. 7 shows the cam 
plate 17 detached. Figs. 8, 9, and 10 show the 
clutch-collar Cin detail. Fig. 11 shows part 
of the clutch-gear A* with the parts in its hub 
in section. Figs. 12 to 14 show the clutch-box 
a with its two toes; Figs. 15 and 16, the cam 
faced collar splined on the end of shaft 15. 
Figs. 17 and 18 show the collar ct, having pins 
C. to enter the grooves a in the clutch-collar 
a of Fig. 12. 
The framework. A has suitable bearings for 
a hollow sleeve B, provided with an eccen 
tric Bembraced by the eccentric-strap of a 
link N' connected to the pin D, which joins 
together the two links D D' of a toggle-joint 
attached at one end to the die-bed spindle B, 
which is to slide in the guides B of the frame 
Work. 
One end of the sleeve B", (see Fig. 2,) where 
the same is broken out, has fixed to it a hub 
C, provided at its periphery with a hardened 
steel ring, the face of which is provided with 
cams or inclines, against which may rest cer 
tain rolls (not shown) held between the pro 
jecting fingers of a clutch-collar C, having at 
its periphery a shoulder or projection (shown 
by dotted lines in Fig. 1) which is engaged at 
times by a controlling-lever B, the engage 
ment being while the sleeve and the die-bed 
spindle are at rest, and having at one side a 
groove C for the reception of springs 44, 
which act at one end against pins of a collar C. 
The shaft A", extended through and having 
its bearings in the sleeve B", has fast on it a 
pulley A, the hub of which is chambered to 
fit over the clutch-collar C, so that the rolls 
carried thereby but not shown (said rolls be 
ing such as shown in Fig. 11) may be made 
to grasp the interior of said hub and cause 
the pulley A, in constant rotation, to carry 
the sleeve C with it whenever the clutch-con 
troller Bis moved to release the clutch-collar. 
The shaft A", which is rotated continuously, 
7 O 
75 
9o 
95 
) 
555,241 
7 O 
75 
So 
9o 
95 
CO 
IO5 
O 
O 
25 
has fast on its opposite end a gear A, but the 
sleeve B is rotated intermittingly one rota 
tion at a time. 
The die-bed spindle has suitably connected 
with it a link it', attached to a lever AS. 
The parts so far described are common to 
said Patent No. 415,670, and are designated 
herein by like letter, and need not, therefore, 
be further described other than to say that in 
practice the upper end of the spindle will 
have a head 100, and that the upper end of 
the frame A may have mounted in it a walk 
ing-beam or lever, to which will be attached 
a last-carrying spindle upon which will be 
placed the shoe to be heeled, all as provided 
for in United States Patent No. 446,383, dated 
February 10, 1891; but as said spindle and 
last and their operative parts form no part of 
this invention they have not been herein 
shown. 
The gear A, through intermediate gears 12 
and 13, effects the rotation of a clutch-gear 
A loose on shaft 15, said clutch-gear having 
its hub suitably chambered to receive a clutch 
collar ?t', the said collar surrounding a cam 
faced hub a fast on the shaft 15, said clutch 
collar having co-operating with it a control 
ling-lever E to be operated by the foot of the 
operator. 
The clutch-gear A* is in practice applied 
to the shaft 15, just as the gear designated 
by like letter in said Patent No. 415,670 is 
applied to the shaft therein marked A', and 
in practice the gear A* will be rotated con 
tinuously, as provided for in said patent. 
The shaft 15 has fast on it at its left-hand 
end, as shown in the drawings, a two-toed 
cam-plate 17, (see also Fig. 7,) which acts 
upon the clutch-controller B to cause it to 
free or stop the clutch-collar C, as desired, 
as when the die-bed spindle is to be moved or 
is to be left at rest, as shown in Fig. 1 of the 
drawingS. 
The shaft 15 has fast upon it a cam-grooved 
hub 16, the shape of which is best shown by 
full and dotted lines in Fig. 2, it being a two 
throw cam, one throw working through half 
a rotation of the shaft 15 and the other throw 
through the other half. Into the grooved 
cam-hub 16 is entered a roller or other stud 
1S carried by a lever 19 pivoted at 20 on a 
part of the framework, said lever in this 
present instance of our invention serving to 
move the carrier or plate lI to be described, 
it in this instance of our invention being 
swung in one and then in the opposite direc 
tion by or through a cord h Wound about a 
pulley h fixed to said plate in suitable man 
ner-as, for instance, by screws-as shown in 
Fig. 5, said pulley being also fixed to a spin 
dile h having a lateral bearing in an arm h, 
and stepped in an adjustable manner upon a 
step h, shown as a screw. (See Fig. 1.) The 
cord h is led over sheaves hand attached at 
its ends to weights h; h", extended through 
suitable guides h" and provided at their lower 
ends with suitable antifriction pulleys or 
rolls, which rest on or roll over the lever 19 
as the latter is moved by the calm 16, said 
lever serving to lift one weight and then the 
other, the weight which is permitted to de 
scend actuating the carrier or plate. 
The peculiar devices for actuating the car 
lier or plate work admirably and are very 
simple and durable; yet this invention is not 
limited to the exact devices shown for mov 
ing said lever-plate, and instead we may use 
any other suitable devices for such purpose, 
or any known mechanical equivalent for the 
devices shown. 
The arm his extended from a convex Sup 
port b mounted in a concaved seat C. bolted 
to the head 100 of the die-bed spindle, the 
said head being slotted to receive the rod d, 
on which is secured in usual manner the nail 
box d", adapted to receive the nails which are 
to be driven therefrom during the ascent of 
the die-bed spindle after the nail-box has 
been arrested by the series of drivers drest 
ing on the top of the arm of the convex Sup 
port. 
Mounting the support b for the nail-box as 
described enables it to tip longitudinally of 
the heel about a center substantially coinci 
dent with the horizontal plane occupied by 
the tread end of the heel. 
The drivers and nail-box are and may be 
all as in Patent No. 409,637. 
The arm hi has a stop 20*, against which 
may strike one or the other of two adjusting 
stop-screws 21 21*, carried by the arm. 22, 
shown as attached to the pulley h", (see Fig. 
4,) the said screws enabling the carrier or 
plate to be stopped in exactly the right posi 
tion with relation to the nail-box in each di 
rection of its movement. 
The spindle his surrounded loosely by the 
hub of an arm e fixed to the arm h, said alrlm 
e having a heel-seat e', which is located im 
mediately below the open space ein one arm 
of the carrier or plate H, said space being 
made for the reception of the heel into which 
the nails are to be driven, the small end of 
the heel meeting the upper side of the seat 
e', which latter occupies a position slightly 
below the under side of the plate H. 
The plate His provided at its upper side 
with a heel-holder composed of two like fin 
gers e adapted to be opened and closed in 
usual manner to thereby engage and release 
at suitable times a heel-blank, another arm 
of said plate having a pair of top-lift-holding 
fingers e', both of usual or suitable construc 
tion; but it will be seen that that end of the 
plate is left as a plane surface to constitute 
a spanker and act upon one side of the top lift 
to spank the same upon the protruding heads 
of nails left at the ti'ead end of the heel. 
The heel and top-lift holders may be of any 
usual or suitable shape commonly used in 
heeling-machines. 
The carrier or plate II, having been pro 
vided with a heel and with a top lift, will be 
swung intermittingly horizontally just above 
 
555,241 
3 
5 
C. 
3 5 
and close to the top of the nail-box, and the 
plate and the nail-box maybe tipped in unison 
about the concaved seat C1, as provided for in 
United States Patent No. 409,637. 
In practice let it be supposed that the die 
bed Spindle is in its lowest position, and that 
the carrier or plate His in its normal posi 
tion, and that a heel-blank has been put into 
the Opening e between the heel-holders e, 
and that a top lift has been put between the 
arms of the top-lift holder e", and that the 
shoe to be heeled has been applied to a last 
On a movable last-spindle, all as provided for 
in said United States Patent No. 446,383. 
The operator will now depress the treadle E, 
which constitutes a clutch - controller, and 
thus release the clutch-collar Cli, so that the 
clutch-gear A* will be coupled with and so 
as to rotate the shaft 15. This will cause the 
can 16 to move the lever 19 quickly in the 
direction of the arrow on it, (see Fig. 3,) thus 
causing the carrier or plate H to be moved to 
place the heel carried by it correctly over the 
nail-box, the stop 21 meeting the stop 20*, 
this being done with but a slight rotation of 
the cam-hub 16, and thereafter as said cam 
hub continues to rotate the roller-stud 1S 
stands for a little time in the annular part of 
the cam-slot, and during such time the car 
lier or plate remains at rest, it remaining at 
rest while the nails are being driven. Imme 
diately after the operator moved the control 
ling device E to enable the shaft, 15 to be 
Started in rotation, the cam-plate 17 fast to 
Said shaft acted to move the cam-controller 
B', so that it released the clutch-collar C, thus 
enabling the constantly-driven pulley A to 
be engaged with and rotate the sleeve B10 to 
start the die-bed spindle upwardly. In the 
upward movement of said spindle the heel 
held by the heel-holder immediately above 
the nail-box is borne against the heel of the 
sole, the nail-box being in contact with the 
Small end of the heel, and as the heel meets 
the sole the nail-box is stopped; but the die 
bed Spindle continues to rise, and in its as 
cent forces the drivers dinto the nail-box 
and drives the nails therefrom into the heel, 
thus attaching the latter to the heel of the 
Sole, after which the die-bed spindle in the 
further rotation of the sleeve B10 descends, 
and at the end of One rotation of the sleeve 
the clutch-controller B8, it being in proper 
position for that purpose, is struck by the 
clutch-collar C, which immediately releases 
the sleeve B from the pulley A and stops 
the machine, and immediately thereafter the 
shaft 15 completes its half-rotation and car 
lies the second toe of the clutch-collara, said 
clutch-collar in this instance of our inven 
tion having two toes rather than one toe, as 
provided for in the patent referred to, and 
the Second toe is engaged by the clutch-con 
troller E, so that said clutch - collar Cl* is 
stopped and the clutch-gear A* runs loose on 
the shaft 15, the die-bed spindle, as stated, be 
ing down. Now to attach the top lift the oper 
ator will again put his foot on the clutch-con 
troller E and will again release the clutch-col 
lar a, and at this starting of the shaft 15 the 
carrier or plate will be moved quickly in the 
direction of the arrow upon it in Fig. 2, to thus 
bring correctly over the nail-box and properly 
below the heel then attached to the shoe the 
top lift, and the die-bed spindle will be again 
raised, the nail-box at this time acting against 
the under side of the carrier or plate below 
the top lift, and the top lift will be pushed 
upon the ends of the nails left exposed or not 
fully driven at the previous ascent of the die 
bed spindle, and the top lift having been 
applied the die-bed spindle will be lowered 
and the machine again stopped, as before de 
Scribed. 
By adjusting the step h the spindle con 
taining the carrier or plate which carries the 
heel and the top lift may be adjusted verti 
cally with relation to the top of the nail-box, 
Supported in any yielding manner. 
It Will be noticed that when the die-bed 
spindle is down in its normal position and the 
sleeve B0 is at rest the carrier or plate occu 
pies a position with that arm thereof which 
carries the heel-blank at one side the longi 
tudinal center of the nail-box and the arm 
thereof which caries the top lift at the other 
side of the longitudinal center of the nail 
bOX, so that the operator has within his con 
trol both the heel-blank and the top lift, and 
may put One On Ortake One off, as he pleases, 
and may Supply first one and then the other 
With a heel or with a top lift without any dan 
ger of having his fingers or hands injured. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A heel-nailing machine containing the 
following instrumentalities, viz: a nail-box, 
a separate heel-rest, a carrier or plate pivoted 
at One side of the longitudinal center of the 
nail-box and having at one end an opening to 
receive the tread end of a heel-blank, as the 
latter is placed on said rest, and having its 
other end shaped to constitute a spanker to 
act upon the top lift, combined. With a heel 
blank holder, and with a top-lift holder, both 
mounted on said carrier, and devices to im 
part movement to said pivoted carrier and 
cause it to present in succession to the mail 
boxa heel-blank and then the top-lift spanker 
provided with a top lift, and devices to effect 
the stopping of said carrier when both of its 
holders are removed from above the nail-box 
to thus leave the top of the latter and both 
the said holders accessible, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a heeling-machine, a nail-box, its sup 
port, an arm extended therefrom and provided 
with a spindle, a movable two-armed plate 
connected thereWith and provided at one of 
its ends with a heel-blank holder, and at its 
other end with a top-lift holder; combined 
With suitable stops to determine the extent 
of movement of said plate when coming into 
7 o 
75 
So 
90 
95 
ICO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4 
555,241 
position with relation to the nail-box to put 
a heel-blank or a top lift in place, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a heel-mailing machine, a nail-box, 
a support therefor which is adapted to tip in 
an arc having its center substantially in the 
plane of the tread end of the heel, combined 
with a pivoted carrier mounted on said tip 
ping Support, and provided With a heel-blank 
holder and also with a top-lift holder, to op 
erate, substantially as described. 
4. In a heel-nailing machine, a nail-box, 
and its support, combined with a swinging 
arm having mounted on it a carrier or plate 
provided with a heel-blank holder and with a 
top-lift holder, and a cord and weights, con 
nected with and to swing said arm and devices 
to effect the movement of said weights, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a heel-mailing machine, a nail-box, 
and its support, and a movable plate having 
devices to hold a heel-blank and a top lift, 
combined with a spindle to which said plate 
is attached, and its bearing, and means to 
adjust said spindle vertically, substantially 
as described. 
6. In a heel-mailing machine, a nail-box, 
a support therefor, and a carrier or plate hav 
ing a heel-blank holder and a top-lift holder, 
a heel-rest adjacent the path of movement of 
said heel-blank holder and adapted to receive 
upon it and to position vertically the end of 
a heel as the latter is being put in place in 
Said holder, and means to move said carrier 
or plate and take with it the heel-blank away 
from said rest and put it into position at the 
end of the nail-box, substantially as described. 
. 
IO 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
7. In a heel-nailing machine, the following 
instrumentalities, viz: a plate or arm having 
an opening for the reception of a heel-blank 
and a connected Spanker-plate; a heel-holder, 
and a top-lift holder carried by said plate or 
arm; and a nail-box; combined with a rest 
for the heel-blank located in line with said 
opening when the said plate Or arm is in its 
normal inoperative position, the said restpo 
sitioning the said heel-blank properly within 
said holder, substantially as described. 
S. In a heel-nailing machine, the following 
instrumentalities, viz: a nail-box; a plate 
constituting a heel-holder, and having a con 
nected top-lift spanker; combined with de 
vices to normally retain the said heel-holder 
and top-lift spanker in position at opposite 
sides the said nail-box, and means on the 
starting of the machine to put the heel-holder 
with its heel in line with the nail-box and 
after attaching the heel to automatically re 
move the heel-holder from the nail-box, leav 
ing the heel at the nail-box, and to put the 
top-lift spanker in line with the heel then on 
the nail-box to spank on the heel a top lift, 
and then to move said plate into its normal 
position with its heel-holder and top-lift 
Spanker at Opposite sides the said nail-box, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
CHARLES. W. GLIDDEN. 
ALVIN D. ELIOTT. 
Witnesses: 
ARETAS R. SAN BORN, 
WILBUR. E. ROWELL, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555341.txt	(No Model.) 
H. H. SEAM.A.N. 
PENCIL, 
No. 555,341, 
Patented Feb. 25, 1896. 
22. 
ZZ 
7. 
   
  
  
22 
 
 
 
  
 
 
SSS2 
2 
SS32 
 
    
 
 
WITNESSES: 
-66-6.4% 
INVENTOR: 
Verdut 4.xfeasilau 
Ay 7as 4ttorney 
Andred B.AHAMPHOTO.H.WASH fisc 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIERIBERT II. SEAMAN, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
PEN CL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,341, dated February 25, 1896. 
Application filed November 21, 1895, Serial No. 569,648, (No model,) 
IO 
To all avhon, it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, HERBERT H. SEAMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvementsin Pencils, &c., of which 
the following is a specification. 
MIy invention has for one object to provide 
an improved construction of self-sharpening 
pencils-that is to say, pencils in which suc 
cessive portions of the lead may be exposed 
for use by removing from time to time, as re 
quired, the separable portions comprising the 
sheath or holder which contains and supports 
the lead, crayon, or other analogous device; 
and my invention consists in certain features 
of construction and combinations of devices, 
all as will be hereinafter more fully described, 
and particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
In carrying out my invention I employ a 
series of hollow conical devices which nest to 
gether or inter match and surround or incase 
a preferably continuous or unbroken stick 
of lead, crayon, or other marking device. 
Around the series of conical devices is 
wrapped a piece or sheet of paper or other 
suitable material to bind the said Series of 
conical devices together. Between successive 
conical devices is formed a circular indenta 
tion or groove to facilitate the cutting or 
breakage of the outside sheath or wrapper 
and the removal of the conical sections. In 
order to aid or guide the user in the removal 
of the conical sections, the outside wrapper 
or sheath is slotted or perforated in such a 
manner that the said circumferential notches 
or grooves may be readily observed from the 
outside of the pencil. One end of the lead 
or crayon is cemented or otherwise secured 
to a conical base-piece and at the other end 
the pencil is preferably provided with a coni 
cal cap. Between these two devices the re 
movable conical sections are strung upon the 
lead and nested together, and over or around 
the whole is secured the retaining-Wrapper. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a lead-pencil embodying 
my improvements. Fig. 2 is an enlarged cen 
tral vertical section thereof, broken away at 
its middle to condense the view and to afford a 
better illustration of the construction. Fig. 3 
is an enlarged side elevation with a large por 
tion of the wrapper removed to show several of 
the conical members in side elevation and to 
show also the mode of forming the pencil, the 
lead being broken away between its ends to 
condense the view. Fig. 4 is a plan of the 
Wrapper detached. Fig. 5 is a longitudinal 
section of one of the conical members; and 
Figs. 6, 7, and 8 are similar views of slightly 
modified forms thereof. 
In the various views the same part will be 
designated by the same numeral of reference. 
I designates a continuous stick of lead, 
crayon, or the like, which is preferably ce 
mented at One end in a cylindrical aperture 
2, formed in a base-piece 3, which at its for 
Ward or inner end is made conical or taper 
ing, as at 4, and Which at its opposite Outer 
end is made cylindrical, as at 5. 
66 designate a series of conical devices, 
sections, or members, all of the same size, 
shape, and construction and arranged to sur 
round and support the lead and nest together. 
These conical sections 6 may be made of any 
Suitable material-as paper, compressed pa 
per - pulp, compressed Wood - pulp, papier 
mach, card or paste board, wood or metal, or 
any other suitable substance or material. 
Each individual section or member 6 may be 
made of any desired or suitable thickness of 
stock-for example, one-sixteenth of an inch. 
Each is made hollow to encompass the lead 
and to receive its adjacent section. At the 
base of each conical section is formed or pro 
vided a circumferential notch or indenta 
tion 7. 
At the forward or lower end of the lead is 
preferably provided a cap-piece S, having a 
cylindrical aperture 9 to receive the end of 
the lead, and having also a conical seat 10 to 
receive the foremost conical section 6, and 
the said cap-piece is formed cylindrical exte 
riorly, as at 11. 
Surrounding the base-piece, cap-piece, and 
the series of individual nested lead-support 
ing conical sections or members is a wrapper 
or cover 12, which is preferably of paper and 
which is glued or otherwise secured to the 
said several devices, and by which, more es 
pecially, the plurality of conical sections 6 
are maintained firmly in their nested con 
dition upon the centrally-disposed lead. The 
3 5 
 
55 
75 
95 
IOC. 
2 
555,341 
O 
25 
35 
said wrapper or cover is preferably provided 
for substantially its whole length with a se 
ries of slots or openings 13, which may be ob 
liquely arranged, as shown at Figs. 1 and 3, 
so that one slot or opening overlaps the next 
adjacent slot or opening, considered circum 
ferentially of the pencil. By this construc 
tion and arrangement of slots or openings in 
the wrapper it is insured that all of the cir 
cumferential notches or indentations 7 are 
exposed to view, and hence little or no care 
need be taken in the application of the Wrap 
per. If the slots or openings 13 extended cir 
cumferentially of the Wrapper or at right an 
gles to its axis or length, it might be difficult 
to so apply the wrapper as that such slots or 
openings would register exactly with the 
notches or indentations formed by the over 
lapping series of conical sections. While 
this difficulty would be presented with the 
slots formed as last described, it would not 
be impossible to employ such circumferential 
slots in the Wrapper in place of the parallel 
oblique overlapping slots preferred, and for 
this reason I do not wish to be limited, so far 
as this feature of my invention is concerned, 
unless specifically recited in the claims, to 
any particular form or arrangement of slots 
or openings in the wrapper. 
From the foregoing and from the drawings 
it will be plain that the pencil as a whole is 
formed or constructed by first inserting the 
upper or rear end of the lead into the open 
ing in the base-piece, and by then slipping 
the conical Sections 6, one after the other, or 
in the series, down upon the lead and caus 
ing them to seat one upon the other or nest 
together, as shown, until the required num 
ber of conical sections have been so applied. 
After this operation, if the cap-piece is to be 
employed, it is slipped upon the lower or fore 
most end of the lead and upon the outermost 
conical member. After this step the sheath 
or strip of paper or other material constitut 
ing the wrapper of a length equal to that of 
the pencil to be formed, and of a width suf 
ficient to surround the sectional devices and 
to slightly overlap at its edges, is then ap 
plied and secured to the several devices, pref 
erably by means of glue or some other adhe 
sive substance. This completes the making 
of the pencil, and when finished it will pre 
sent the appearance shown at Fig. 1 of the 
drawings. 
While I prefer to make pencils of this ap 
pearance and supply them in this manner to. 
consumers, it will be understood, of course, 
that so far as some of the features of myim 
provements are concerned the cap-piece S 
and the Wrapping portion thereof may be 
omitted, and the pencil supplied with the 
front end of the lead exposed for immediate 
lS0. 
Pencils having the cap-piece S require, of 
course, the removal of the same before the 
pencil can be used, but this may be readily 
accomplished by cutting or otherwise break 
ing the Wrapper at the circumferential notch 
14, whereupon the said cap-piece may be read 
ily slipped off or detached. As the project 
ing end of the lead wears away and it becomes 
necessary to expose more lead for use, the 
first or foremost conical section 6 is then re 
moved by running a knife or the finger-nail 
or any sharp instrument around the Wrap 
per at the first notch 7, thus rupturing the 
paper and freeing said conical section from 
the main body of the pencil, and enabling 
its ready removal by a mere endwise sliding 
movement in the direction of the point of the 
pencil. In this manner the remaining coni 
cal sections are successively removed as re 
quired, such removal being greatly facilitated 
by reason of the circumferential notches or 
grooves and the slotted or perforated Wrap 
per, the perforations in the Wrapper enabling 
the user to locate he circumferential notch 
at a glance, and the notch itself permitting 
the Wrapper to be readily cut or broken, the 
presence of the notch leaving the paper un 
supported at this locality, and hence easily 
severed or disjoined. 
Referring now more particularly to Figs.1 to 
5, inclusive, it will be observed that each coni 
cal section or member is peculiarly made 
that is to say, it is formed or provided at its 
apex or pointed end with a cylindrical or par 
allel-sided bore 15 for about one-third of its 
length, and that the remainder of the interior 
of the section is tapering or frusto-conical, as 
shown at 16. The cylindrical portion 15 is 
provided more especially to afford to the mem 
ber a comparatively-long bearing upon or 
about the lead, while the flared or tapering 
portion 16 is provided to permit the insertion 
of an adjacent section, which likewise affords 
an extended bearing for the preceding sec 
tion. It will be observed that the cylindrical 
portions 15 form a practically continuous or 
uninterrupted bearing for the whole length 
of the pencil, and hence that the lead is sup 
ported for substantially its whole length, 
whereby a structure of great strength is con 
sequently produced. In these views it will 
also be observed that the outside of the coni 
cal section tapers down to substantially a 
knife or thin edge, as at 17, while the base 
or rear end of the conical section is formed 
or provided with a cylindrical portion 18; or, 
in other words, this end of the conical device 
for an appreciable distance is cut away par 
allel with its axis to produce a cylindrical or 
parallel-sided portion 18, and by reason of 
which the diameter of the pencil as a whole 
may be reduced; but a still more important 
function is performed by this portion 18, to 
Wit: it selves to afford a wide or extended 
surface for the support of the wrapper and 
for its firm adhesion to the conical sections 
as a whole, so that there is no liability what 
soever of any of the members of the series be 
coming loose or of rotating or moving longi 
tudinally during use of the pencil. The large 
pasting-surfaces afforded by the series of cy 
75 
So 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
555,341 
. 
75 
95 
IOC 
IO 
3 5 
lindrical portions 18 are therefore useful not 
only to reduce the diameter of the pencil and 
enable the formation of pencils of practically 
continuous cylindrical form, but to also en 
able the wrapper to be firmly pasted to the 
conical sections for practically its whole 
length, and in consequence keep the series of 
nested conical sections firmly down one upon 
the other, so that there Will be no break in 
the continuity of the structure, and so that 
it will be rendered as rigid and as solid prac 
tically as the ordinary wood-incased lead-pen 
cil of commerce. It will also be observed in 
these views that the base or rear end of each 
cylindrical portion 1S is beveled or chamfered 
inwardly, as at 19, and that this portion as 
sists in the formation of the circular notch or 
indentation 7, the remaining portion of the 
notch or indentation being formed by the 
beveled or tapering exterior of the adjacent 
conical member. 
While I prefer to make the conical sections 
or members in the specific manner shown at 
FigS. 1 to 5, inclusive, I do not, however, 
wish to be limited altogether to this particu 
lar construction or formation, inasmuch as 
the main features of my improvements may 
be employed with conical sections differing 
Some in details of construction, as shown, for 
example, in the remaining figures of the 
drawings. 
Referring now to Fig. 6, the conical sec 
tion there shown is substantially the same 
as that exhibited in the previous views, the 
only difference being that the smaller end of 
the section does not taper to a knife or sharp 
edge, but to a thicker or duller edge, and in 
consequence thereof the circular shoulder 20 
is provided at the junction of the cylindrical 
portion 15 and tapering portion 16 for the 
abutment thereagainst of the thickened end 
of the corresponding conical member to be 
associated there with. 
Referring now to Fig. 7, it will be seen that 
the conical section is provided with the cy 
lindrical portion 15 tapering to a knife edge, 
but that the base or wider end of the struct 
ure is unprovided with a cylindrical portion 
corresponding to 18 in the previous views 
and likewise lacks the beveled or chamfered 
end 19. 
Referring now to Fig. 8, the device there 
exhibited will be found to consist of a frusto 
conical section purely and of uniform thick 
ness of stock. 
The Wrapper or envelope may be made of 
paper, Vellum, cloth, or any other pliable and 
frangible substance which is thin and strong, 
and it may be polished, glazed, varnished or 
painted either before or after its application 
to the conical sections. The lead or mark 
ing-crayon may be such as is commonly used 
in pencils of commerce, or the marking sub 
stance may be of slate or soapstone or any 
material used by architects, artists, drafts 
men, painters or artisans. The inclosed sub 
stance may also be a caustic, drug, or chemi 
a 
ments. 
cal for use by physicians, Surgeons, &c., and 
in the subjoined claims I desire to be under 
stood as covering the use of any marking 
material or substance used for purposes other 
than marking, so long as the same is con 
tained in a structure embodying my improve 
From the foregoing it will be apparent that 
various changes may be made in the details 
of construction of the conical sections or mem 
bers and in the Wrappers or envelopes with 
out departing from the spirit of my inven 
tion. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. A pencil or the like consisting of a con 
tinuous lead, &c., a block or base-piece to 
which the lead or the like is secured, a series 
of individual, nested conical members, and 
an outside Wrapper or covering; substantially 
as set forth. 
2. A pencil or the like consisting of a mark 
ing or other substance, a block or base-piece 
to which the lead or the like is attached, a 
series of individual, nested conical members, 
a cylindrical cap-piece having a tapering in 
terior and a cylindrical bore, and an outside 
wrapper or covering; substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In a pencil or the like, the combination 
with the lead, &c., of a base-piece to which 
one end of the lead is secured, a series of coni 
cal members surrounding and supporting the 
lead longitudinally and entering one another, 
and a longitudinal Wrapping-Strip pasted or 
gummed to said base-piece and to said series 
of conical members; substantially assetforth. 
4. In a pencil or the like, the combination 
with the lead, &c., of a base-piece to which 
one end of the lead is secured, a cap fitted over 
the other end thereof, an intermediate series 
of individual, conical members, and a longi 
tudinal Wrapping - strip pasted or gummed 
around the base-piece, cap-piece, and the se 
ries of conical members; substantially as set 
forth. 
5. A pencil or the like comprising a con 
tinuous central marking or other device, a se 
ries of individual, nested conical members, a 
series of circumferential grooves or indenta 
tions, and a longitudinal Wrapping-strip se 
cured to said members and bridging over the 
said series of circumferential grooves or in 
dentations, whereby the Wrapping-stripis left 
unsupported at these localities and hence may 
be easily severed; substantially as set forth. 
6. A pencil or the like consisting of a cen 
tral marking or other device, a series of indi 
vidual, nested conical members, a series of cir 
cumferential grooves or indentations, and a 
perforated Wrapper or covering secured to said 
members and adapted to disclose the series of 
grooves or indentations; substantially as set 
forth. 
7. A pencil or the like consisting of a cen 
tral marking or other device, a series of indi 
vidual, nested conical members, a series of cir 
O 
II5 
I25 
4. 
555,341 
out the series and supporting therein the con 
tinuous lead or other material, and having a 
practically-continuous cylindrical exterior, 
with a series of narrow intervening circum 
ferential grooves or indentations, and a Wrap 
ping-strip pasted or gummed around and to 
said practically-continuous cylindrical exte 
rior and bridging over the said series of 
grooves or indentations, and thereby leaving 
a series of circular spaces beneath said strip 
to enable it to be readily severed; substan 
tially as set forth. 
Signed at New York city, in the county of 
New York and State of New York, this 18th 
day of November, A. D. 1895. 
HERBERT H. SEAAAN. 
25 
Witnesses: 
CORNELIUS P. McLAUGHTLIN, 
K. W. DONO WAN. 
cumferential grooves or indentations, and a 
Wrapper or covering having a series of oblique 
Or diagonal perforations; substantially as set 
forth. 
S. A pencil or the like consisting of a base 
piece to which one end of the lead or other de 
vice is secured, a series of individual, conical 
members supported upon said base-piece and 
within one another, and surrounding said 
lead, &c., a cap-piece embracing the point of 
the lead, and seated upon the foremost conical 
member, a series of circumferential grooves or 
indentations, and a slotted or perforated Wrap 
per pasted or gummed to said cap and base 
piece, and to said series of individual conical 
members; Substantially as set forth. 
9. In a pencil or the like, a series of indi 
vidual, nested conical members having a prac 
tically-continuous cylindrical bore through 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555441.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 555,44l, 
J. D. ENNES, 
FOLDING BED, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
Patented Feb. 25, 1896, 
 
 
b 
AY 
- ZNK DXCC w"S 
O ags 2Use 
le. 
as 
2. 
a 
 
 
 
Isaac. 
2,3- 
t/?3.2, 
ATTERNEY 
| 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 555,441. 
assae askee 
2. 
taxare 
FOLDING BED, 
Patented Feb. 25, 1896, 
-2A-a-r 
SSPssss 
-Alsacraessers-sur-lessees 
 
7 
6. 
- 
ress asser sease it 
s 
ressessee e. 
No. 
Drew BGAtami. PHOTO-Th9, Ash GT5. C 
(No Model.) 
No. 555,44l, 
J. D. ENNES, 
FOIDING BED 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 25, 1896. 
 
T-sis. 1.2% / 
(44%/3.3.4. 
Arioli.e. 
NREW B.GRAHAM, PHOTO THowashington.pc. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. ENNES, OF NORFOLK, VIRGINIA. 
FOLDING B E D. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,441, dated February 25, 1896. 
Application filed July 28, 1894, Serial No. 518,880, (No model.) Patented in England November 1, 1893, No. 20,689, 
55 
75 
To all whom it nually concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN D. ENNES, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Norfolk, in 
the county of Norfolk and State of Virginia, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Folding Beds, (for which were 
granted me British Letters Patent No. 20,689, 
dated November 1, 1893;) and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of a bed em 
bodying my improvements. Fig. 2 is a front 
view when the parts are folded up. Fig. 3 is 
a plan view of the top. Fig. 4 shows several 
of the parts in the position occupied when the 
bed is packed for transportation. 
Fig. 5 
shows the bed folded. Figs. 6 to 15 show de 
tails. Fig. 16 is a side view of a modification, 
and Fig. 17 is a front view of the same when 
folded up. Fig. 18 shows the shelf, and Figs. 
19 and 20 details of Figs. 15 and 16. 
In the drawings I have shown a backframe 
consisting of rear corner - uprights A A. 
These are formed of tubing, for lightness, 
cheapness and strength. They are connected 
by an intermediate framework formed of a 
top bar, B, a lower bar, B', and a supplemen 
tal cross-bar B. The cross-bars B and B' are 
connected by vertical stays or braces b b, 
which are rigidly fastened to the cross-bars 
by rosette-like clamps or binders b', which are 
applied by casting them in place after the 
bars have been put in the sand. 
CC indicate the parts of the main frame 
which extend forward from the corner-up 
rights A A. Each is composed of a vertical 
portion c, a short horizontal arm c', a leg c, 
and longer horizontal arm c, which connects 
the leg c with the vertical part c. The up 
per arm, c', is joined to the corner-upright A, 
not rigidly, as has been the custom hereto 
fore, but by a pivotal or swiveling joint at c. 
By having them thus loosely connected at 
these points the parts of the beds can be so 
placed and packed together that a large num 
ber of the beds can be stored in a small space 
during transportation. 
25 
35 
45 
 
The frame parts CC can be turned around 
so as to lie substantially in the common plane 
of the backframe, as is shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 
Then in order to hold the four leg parts a, a 
c crigidly in the required places when the 
bed is set up and in use I employ the peculiar 
bracing-frame shown at D. It comprises two 
bars d cl, which are crossed one upon the 
other and are rigidly joined at the center, as 
shown in Fig. 14. In the ends of each of 
these bars d there is an aperture d', by which 
the bar can engage with one of the frame 
legs. Preferably the parts are so related 
that the bars d can be placed below the lower 
ends of the tubular legs and have the verti 
cal pintles e of the casters E passed upward 
through the apertures d' into the interior of 
the tubes, as shown in Fig. 15. 
When a brace or binder similar to that at 
D is used, the four legs, notwithstanding the 
presence of the pivotal or swiveling joints, 
are held with firmness. In fact, the lower 
portion of the main frame is in such case bet 
tered to a great extent, even when the joints 
at care made rigid, as by Welding, in the Or 
dinary way now followed. 
The place of Weakness in these beds, re 
sulting from the tendency of the lower ends 
of the legs to spread, is in this bottom por 
tion of this main frame. This I effectually 
overcome by constructing them in the way 
described. Upon this framework is pivotally 
supported the mattress-frame. This is shown 
as having the end bars, F, the side bars, F, 
and the rails or guards Eat the head and foot. 
The end bars or rails, FF, lie close to the 
frame parts C C and have passing through 
them a pivot-rod G. The ends of this rod are 
journaled in bearings at H, each formed of a 
heavy wire or rod bent to provide an eye h 
with a vertical bar h' which can be bent, as 
ath, after being passed through the arm c 
of the frame. The rod G can be fastened in 
the bearings in any suitable way. I prefer 
one like that shown, there being a nut at g 
engaging with the journal g', the latter being 
seated in a thimble garound which the bear 
ing H fits. 
It will be seen that the bed proper or mat 
tress-support F F cannot only be readily 
rocked around the axis of the rod G, but also 
that it can be easily lifted out of place when 
95 
IOO 
g 
555,441 
75 
So 
ever required, as its pivotal parts lie not be 
low, as has been customary, but above the 
frame-arm cupon which it rests. The nuts 
and thimbles can be easily withdrawn, after 
which the mattress-support can be taken out 
without requiring the withdrawal of the pivot 
rod G. 
In order to limit the vertical motion of the 
bed when folding, I introduce bracing and 
stop-rods I. These are passed through or se 
cured to the legs a c, and are each formed 
with a shoulder or offset at , located at such 
place that the downward-swinging parts of 
the mattress-frame impinge upon them and 
hold them in the desired place vertically. 
The outer part of the swinging portion of 
the bed is supported upon legs JJ which are 
pivoted ati to the bars F, and are connected 
by links J to the legs c'. The parts are so 
constructed and the pivotal points ati, j', f' 
and II are so related that when the bed is 
folded up the axis ati shall lie somewhat in 
side of the line which connects the axes at 
i and j', there being thus provided a toggle 
lock which holds the bed up until it is re 
leased by the application of considerable force 
to one of the parts J or J' to move them out 
Ward. 
To hold the bedding in place, as well as to 
give the structure a pleasing appearance, I 
employ a scroll grating or grid, (indicated by 
Ix.) It is connected by straps or loops c' to 
the rear edge of the mattress-frame and by 
loose sliding rings k to the upright bars l of 
the back frame. 
While the bed is being folded up toward 
the position shown in Fig. 5 the slide-guides 
k slip down along the back frame-bars b and 
the holder K takes the position shown in that 
figure. When the mattress is down the holder 
K is moved up and makes an ornamental clos 
ing for the open part of the back frame. 
The canopy or curtains are suspended from 
a support at L having a main transverse part 
l, and carrying-arms l', which are pivotally 
connected to the rear corner-uprights A A. 
By pivoting them in this manner they can be 
readily turned over when the bed is packed 
for transportation; but when the bed is in 
use this curtain - holder is supported and 
stayed by legs l, which rest upon the arms c' 
of the frame. I secure rigidly to this curtain 
holder rosette-like stopsi at the rear corners, 
which prevent the rings l that support the 
curtains from slipping beyond the corners, 
which, as is well known, is a source of great 
annoyance. At the center I place a stop l 
for a similar purpose, to limit the inward 
movement of the rings. 
In order to insure sufficient stiffness and 
strength in that part of the tube C which car 
ries the Weight of the mattress-frame I insert 
therein a rod M prior to subjecting the tube 
to the bending or Swaging action. Thereafter 
the rod occupies the position shown in Fig. 
6, it filling the supporting-arm cand extend 
ing into the vertical parts c and c sufficiently 
far to insure sufficient rigidity and strength 
at the bends in the tube. 
In order to prevent the bed from acciden 
tally swinging toward the folded position I 
employ a lock or stop, as at N. As shown, it 
comprises a bent bar having an arm in and 
two end parts m', which are pivoted on the 
cross-bar B of the back frame. By examin 
ing Fig. 1 it will be seen that the bar a, 
of this lock can lie under the inner side of 
the mattress-frame and prevent it from mov 
ing downward. When it is desired to fold 
the bed up, the lock is thrown back by draw 
ing on the cord or equivalent N', which ex 
tends to the front side of the bed, such draft, 
thereon releasing the bed from the lock and 
permitting it to be moved upward. 
In order to hold the above-described lock 
N in its normal position use may be made of 
a spring, as at N in Fig. 4, and to prevent 
it from moving too far a stop N can be em 
ployed. When the cord N' is pulled the lock 
N moves away from the stop Nagainst the 
tension of spring N. 
I" is a tube or pipe placed around the stop 
and stay-rod I to strengthen it and give a 
symmetrical appearance to the end of the 
frame. 
P is a mantle shelf and cover. It is placed 
at the top of the bed and may be secured in 
any suitable way. As shown, it is clamped 
in place below the ornamental balls or top 
pieces on the rear corner-legs A. Preferably 
it is formed of sheet metal, which is japanned 
or colored so as to be ornamental in appear 
ance, and has an upwardly-turning flange at 
2) at the rear, and a downwardly - turning 
flange at p' at the front which comes outside 
of the front ball of the canopy-support L. 
As shown in Figs. 3, 5, and 9, it is made in 
two parts hinged together, so that one of them 
can be folded back, as shown in Fig. 5, when 
the bed is to be packed. This part P serves 
not only as a support for books and other ar 
ticles as are commonly placed on a mantel, 
but also serves to cover up or close the open 
ing at the uppel' end of the bed to prevent 
the access of dust and other foreign material 
during the time that the bed is folded up. 
I have above described my improvements 
as applied to a side-folder; but it will be un 
derstood that many of them are just as ap 
plicable to end-folding beds. In Figs. 10 and 
17 such a construction is illustrated. In such 
case there will not, ordinarily, be any neces 
sity for the positive lock N above described, 
as so much of the weight is outside of the piv 
otal line; but the features above set forth can 
be embodied which pertain to making and re 
lating the parts so that they can be compactly 
arranged for transportation and can be held 
strongly in proper place when the bed is set 
up fol' use. 
I am aware of course of the fact that fold 
ing beds having tubular frames have been 
heretofore made or proposed in several forms. 
I have myself constructed and patented such 
45 
55. 
90 
95 
OO 
IO 
I i5 
I 25 
IO 
 
555,441 
3 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I25 
75 
articles. In my earlier patent, No. 444,064, 
rectly to the horizontal parts cof the frame 
dated January 5, 1891, a structure of this gen 
tubes C, substantially as set forth. 
eral classisillustrated; but in my said earlier 
2. In a folding bed, the combination with 
bed there were marked differences in com 
the rear corner-uprights, the back frame-bars 
parison with the present construction in the 
secured thereto, the forward-extending side 
devices and method for supporting, manipu 
frames formed of tubes CC each bent to have 
lating, and fastening the parts. In that ear 
the vertical parts c cand the horizontal part 
lier bed the mattress-frame was connected to c, of the metallic strengthening-rods Min 
the stationary frame by three links, the two 
serted respectively into the said tubes and 
at the rear end of the mattress-frame being 
bent there with each rod extending from the 
so related that when the mattress was down 
vertical part c through the horizontal part c 
the links had one position relative to each 
and into the vertical part c, the swinging 
other, and when the mattress was folded up 
mattress-frame, and the hinge devices for the 
they were both swung into new positions and 
mattress-frame secured to the horizontal 
tubes c and to said rods M, substantially as 
then had such relation to each other that the 
longer or outer link and its pivot were outside 
set forth. 
of the center of gravity of the mattress and 
3. The combination of the rear corner-up 
mattress-frame and effected the locking of the 
rightsformed of hollow tubing, theside frames 
latter in their upright position. While under 
hinged to the said uprights and formed of 
Some circumstances that construction had ad 
tubes each bent to have the front vertical 
vantages, I have found it desirable for many 
tubular leg c, the mattress-frame hinged di 
purposes to provide a simpler and cheaper 
rectly to said tubing of the side frames, the 
construction, which shall be strong and du 
detachable caster-wheels having their pintles 
rable and yet possess the least possible num 
inserted into said tubing, and the locking 
ber of parts. In the present case the mat 
brace D having bars each surrounding the 
tress-frame is supported upon a fixed pivot, 
axis of one of the said caster-pintles and de 
and its weight is taken entirely by the lower 
tachable from the tubular leg, substantially 
part of the forward-projecting end frames in 
as set forth. 
stead of being distributed over the entire 
4. The combination of the rear corner-up 
back frame from the upper to the lower end. 
rights formed of hollow tubing, theside frames 
Then in order to strengthen and brace the 
formed of tubes each bent to have the front 
lower part of the end frames which must carry 
tubular leg c, the mattress-frame hinged to 
all the load, and must receive all the strain 
the side frames, the detachable caster-wheels 
of the locking device, (which strain is severe 
having their pintles inserted into said tubing, 
because of the downward pressure caused by 
and the locking-brace D having its members 
forcing the pivot) beyond the line of the piv 
provided with passages for the said caster 
ots fandi,) I construct these end frames in 
pintles, whereby said brace is clamped be 
the way and provide them. With bracing and 
tween the lower ends of the legs and the 
strengthening devices of the sort shown. Nor 
body of the caster-wheels, substantially as 
do I claim broadly a toggle-lock, as I am also 
set forth. 
aware that a holding mechanism embodying 
5. The combination of the rear tubular up 
that principle has been used in many ways; 
rights A, the frame-bars secured thereto, the 
but I believe myself to be the first to have 
forwardly-projecting side frames eachformed 
provided a metallic tubular framework for a 
of a tube C bent to form the vertical parts c 
folding bed of the character herein shown and 
c' and the horizontal part c, the mattress 
to have supported the Swinging mattress 
frame, the laterally-projecting hinge arm or 
frame thereon on a fixed axis, together with 
bar g', and the hinge-eye secured directly to 
legs and leg-links so arranged in relation to 
the horizontal tubing c, substantially as set 
each other, to the said fixed axis, and to the 
forth. 
frame that the pivots of the legs and links 
6. The combination of the rear corner tubu 
can be so arranged as to lock the mattress in 
lar uprights, the side frames formed of bent 
the upright position and at the same time 
tubes, the rotary collars or eyes connecting 
prevent the severe strain from injuring the 
the said side-frame tubes with the back 
tubular uprights, the SWinging mattress-Sup 
lower part of the frame. 
port, the fixed collars or couplings secured 
to the rear corner-uprights, and the canopy 
supporting rod l bent to have its ends piv 
oted in the said fixed couplings and provided 
with the rests lifor engaging with the side 
frames, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a folding metallic bed, the combina 
tion of the tubular back frame extending to 
points above the mattress-frame whenfolded, 
the swinging mattress-frame, the tubular end 
frames secured to the tubular back frame, 
each end frame having a tube bent to form 
What I claim is 
1. A folding bed having the rear tubular 
corner-uprights A, the back frame-bars rig 
idly secured thereto, the forward projecting 
tubular frame-bars C C, the hinge-eyes or 
swivel-joints c' loosely surrounding the rear 
tubes A and rigidly secured to the tubes C, 
said tubes C being bent to form the vertical 
parts c and c and the horizontal parts c' c', 
the locking-brace D having arms detachably 
secured to each of the four tubular legs, and 
the mattress-frame detachably pivoted di 
w 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
555,441 
which joins the legs c' to each other, and the 
pivoti' being arranged to pass the line of the 
pivots j and f' when the mattress is folded, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
I5 
JOHN D. ENNES. 
Witnesses: 
W. B. BARTON, 
L. M. STURGIS. 
the leg c' and a horizontal bar c secured to 
the tubular back frame, a supplemental sep 
arately-formed horizontal bar joining the 
lower part of the tubular leg c to the back 
5 frame, a fixed pivot connecting the mattress 
frame to each end frame around which pivot 
it Swings on a fixed axis, a bar or frame join 
ing and bracing together the front tubular 
legs c, the legs J, the links J' pivotally con 
Io nected to the legs J and to the front frame 
legs c, at points above the brace or frame 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555541.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 555,541. 
E, TERRY. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 3, 1896. 
Oc 
 
 
 
 
2 
 
2 M & 
(i. 
Witnesses: 
29-y 
0.44% 
Fey, 2. 
Cua 
6, 2%ice 
 
AN DREW B, GRAHAM, PHOTO-uTHowish NGTON, Dic 
(No Model.) 
E. TERRY. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 555,541, 
Patented Mar. 3, 1896. 
 
 
 
al 
 
 
 
 
VVitnesses: 
7. 
 
(S) 
V1 iwi. 
S. 
T. If: 
f at) 
Hit- a - 
f 
Ea 
4. 
 
 
WAWS 
A444 Zaaaaaaaar 
244, 
S 
Inventor. 
'Et, 
Attorney, 
AMCREB, GRAHAM.PHOTOTHO.WASHINION, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EUGENE TERRY, OF ITHACA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO CHARLES H. 
DUELL, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK. 
TYPE-WRTNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,541, dated March 3, 1896. 
Application filed March 5, 1895, Serial No. 540,596, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EUGENE TERRY, of 
Ithaca, in the county of Tompkins, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Type-Writing Ma 
chines, of which the following, taken in con 
nection. With the accompanying drawings, is 
a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in type-Writing machines; and the ob 
ject is to provide a construction whereby the 
space between words may be made when the 
terminal letter of a word is made, thereby 
saving time and labor. It will be obvious 
that if the spaces between words are made 
without taking up time a much greater speed 
may be attained in the operation of a type 
Writer, or, in other words, a greater number 
of words may be Written or printed in a given 
length of time. 
My invention is applicable to that class of 
type-writing machines in which the success 
ive depression and release of a series of key 
levers vibrate and throw a series of types 
against an inked substance or ribbon and the 
paper to be written upon, and after each de 
pression and release of any key and while the 
type and key-lever are resuming their origi 
nal position move the paper a type-space dis 
tance, and thus print or Write one letter at a 
time. 
My invention is shown as applied to a ma 
chine which has a paper-carriage adapted to 
move on guide-rails transversely to the vibra 
tory rods of the key-levers, as a Smith-Pre 
mier' machine, but may be applied to other 
similar machines. The carriage is moved by 
a spring-wheel and strap and reversed by 
hand, as usual, after each line has been Writ 
ten, or the carriage may be moved by any 
suitable and Well-known means, as these fea 
tures do not appertain to my invention. 
To this end my invention consists in the 
combination, in a type-Writing machine hav 
ing a rack-bar and an escapement comprising 
an oscillating detent and a pivoted pawl 
working-in said rack and adapted to be oper 
ated by the said oscillating detent, of a slot 
in the pawl, a spring to shift the pawl on its 
5o pivot, and suitable means to engage and re 
lease the said pawl, to allow it to shift, con 
45 
35 
 
55 
7 O 
75 
nected to and operated by the spacing key or 
keys; and my invention consists in certain 
other combinations of parts hereinafter de 
scribed and Specifically set forthin the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional plan 
view of a Smith-Premier type-writing ma 
Fig. 2 is 
chine, taken on line if y of Fig. 2. 
an incomplete vertical longitudinal sectional 
view of the same, taken on line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a top plan View of a portion of the 
Writing-machine with my improvement there 
on shown in full size. Fig. 4 is the rear side 
elevation of the same. Fig. 5 is an enlarged 
detail view of the shifting-pawl engaging a 
portion of the rack. Fig. 6 is an enlarged 
detached side elevation of a detent herein 
after referred to. Fig. 7 is an enlarged side 
elevation of the releasing means in its normal 
position or when it is locking the shifting 
pawl to prevent its shifting longitudinally; 
and Fig. 8 is a similar view of the same in its 
operative position or when the pawl is re 
leased to allow the rack-bar to move the dis 
tance of two teeth instead of one. 
Referring specifically to the drawings, A 
is the frame of the machine, and B is a por 
tion of the rack-bar fixed to the paper-car 
riage. (Not shown in the drawings.) The un 
feathered arrows in the different views indi 
cate the direction of movement of the car 
riage and rack after the printing of each let 
ter and the release of each key. 
In Fig. 1 I have indicated the keys for print 
ing the letters by dottedlines, but their levers 
and oscillating rods, running from front to 
back of the machine, are omitted for the sake 
of clearness. 
CC are the spacing-keys, C'C' are their 
levers, and C'C' are the oscillating rods of 
the levers, pivoted, actuated and connected 
to the type-levers in a manner well known 
and common in this style of machine and not 
necessary to be herein specified. Springs D 
restore the keys to their normal position after 
being depressed. 
E is the universal sliding space-bar adapt 
ed to engage and be operated by any and all 
of the keys, and E' is the connecting-rod be 
tween the lever h, operated by the space-bar, 
and the crank-arm e of the oscillating detent 
e', working in the rack-bar B. As usual in 
95 
Od 
g 
555,541 
25 
35 
55 
75 
machines of this design the oscillating detent 
e' is provided with a shoulder e", Fig. 3, which 
engages a stop-screw (, carried on a pawl b, 
pivoted to a part f, secured rigidly to the 
frame of the machine to allow the paper-car 
riage with its rack B to move in the direction 
of the arrow, under the tension of its spring, 
one notch at each operation of a key-lever. 
The rod E is drawn downward when a key is 
depressed, the detent e' is oscillated, and the 
shoulder e' of the detent e' lifts the free end 
of the pawl b to allow the rack to move in 
the direction of the arrow, and the said detent 
e', as the pawlis raised, enters the next notch, 
holding the rack B while the letter is printed. 
Upon the release of the key the pawl is per 
mitted to descend into the notch occupied by 
the detent e', and at the same time the detent 
is removed from the notch in the rack. 
The above - described operation is well 
lknown and common in this class of 1machines, 
and for this reason need not be more fully ex 
plained. 
Now, in order to move the rack-bar B a dis 
tance of two notches, when desired, or after 
the last letter of a word is printed, I strike 
either of the space-keys C C simultaneously 
with the key which prints said letter. Upon 
the simultaneous release of both keys two 
spaces are made, one for the space between 
two words, and the second space for the first 
letter of the second word to occupy, and 
which it does occupy when its corresponding 
key is depressed. This double space is ob 
tained by the following-described means: 
F is a lever preferably formed of a bent 
wire and provided at its ends with eyes which 
encircle the rod A', extending between the 
sides of the frame A, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2 of the drawings. 
g 9 are arms mounted on the oscillating 
rods C'C' of the space-keys to engage the 
sides of the lever F to depress the same when 
either of the space-keys C C is depressed. 
F is a connecting-rod extending upward 
from the lever F to a small lever c, which may 
be termed the releasing-lever. The said 
lever c is pivoted intermediate of its length to 
an upright post c', on the end of and integral 
With a plate c', secured rigidly in place on the 
frame by a screw d and hook d', as shown 
clearly in the drawings. A bifurcated spring 
plate G is secured at one end above the detent 
e' and bears with its free ends, one upon the 
upper edge of the lever c and the other upon 
the top side of the pawl b, to force the said 
part downward after they are raised. 
In order that the rack-bar B may move in 
the direction of the arrow the distance of two 
of its teeth simultaneously or at one opera 
tion of a space-key C, I provide the pawl b 
With a slot i instead of the usual circular 
perforation and also provide said pawl with 
a longitudinal bore to contain a coil-spring 
''. The spring i' extends between the end 
of the said bore and the screw or pivot i in 
the slot and is of sufficient tension to for 3e 
the pawl to the left when it is released from 
the rack B, but, when it is engaged by the 
said rack which is under a greater pressure 
in the opposite direction, the pawl is forced 
to the right or carried with the rack the length 
of the slot i minus the diameter of the pivot, 
which is equal to the distance between two 
teeth. Therefore when the pawl b is free to 
move or shift longitudinally, the paper-car 
riage and the rack thereon will move the dis 
tance of two teeth upon the depression of any 
lkey. As this double movement should only 
be effected when a space-key is depressed, I 
have provided the releasing-lever c, which, as 
before described, is connected with and oper 
ated only by the space-keys. When the re 
leasing-lever c is in the position shown in 
Figs. 4 and 7-that is, with its free end bear 
ing against the heel of the pawl-the latter 
can move only one tooth; but when the lever 
c is moved to the position shown in Fig. 8, 
which is effected by the operation of one of 
the space-keys, the pawl can move upon the 
release of said key two teeth. Upon the cle 
pression of another key after a space-key has 
been operated the pawl b will move auto 
matically to the left under the tension of its 
spring i", thus allowing the lever c to resume 
its normal position, as shown in Fig. 7. 
In order to hold the lever c in its raised 
position, as slown in Fig. 8, after it has been 
operated so that it cannot descend too quickly 
upon the release of the space-key and pre 
vent the free movement of the pawl b, I pro 
vide the pivoted detent l with its spring lbe 
neath its free end, so that when the level" (: 
is raised, as shown in Fig. 8, the detent l, 
being pivoted on the screw lic, will pass be 
neath the lever c and hold it raised until the 
pawl b has moved or shifted to the right suf 
ficiently to strike the detent l and force it 
from beneath the lever c. In practice the 
pawl is made of sufficient width and placed 
sufficiently near the said detent to act directly 
upon it, but for the sake of clearness and in 
order to separate the parts I have shown a 
pin b on the side of the pawl b to engage the 
detent l. 
n is a pin projecting horizontally from the 
upright c' and adapted to enter the notch . 
in the detent l to form a stop for the latter. 
* is a hole in the end of the shifting-pawl 
which is made when the bore i' is drilled. 
I do not desire to be limited to the precise 
means shown for accomplishing my invention, 
as it will be obvious that it may be accom 
plished by various equivalent means and de 
vices without departing from my invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion with the movable rack-bar provided with 
teeth. On its top side, and the escapement com 
prising an oscillating detent and a pivoted 
pawl engaging said rack-bar and adapted to 
be operated by the detent, of a slot in the pawl 
IOO 
II d 
II5 
I25 
O 
- 
at its pivoted end, a spring to shift the pawl 
longitudinally on its pivot toward the detent, 
and suitable means to engage and release the 
said pawl connected to and operated by a 
spacing-key only, as set forth. 
2. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with the movable rack-bar and the es 
capement comprising an oscillating detent 
and a pivoted pawl engaging Said rack-bar, of 
a slot in the pawl at its pivoted end, a spring 
to shift the pawl on its pivot, a lever to en 
gage the pawl to hold it from shifting, and 
suitable means connected to the said lever to 
operate the same to release the pawl, and a 
space-key connected to said means, as set 
forth. 
3. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with the movable rack-bar, the printing 
keys and the escapement therefor, compris 
ing an oscillating detent and a pivoted pawl 
lying substantially parallel with the rack-bar 
adapted to shift longitudinally, and in opposi 
tion to the direction of movement of the rack 
bar, a spring to shift the pawl, a lever to en 
gage the pawl to prevent it from shifting, a 
space-key adapted to be depressed independ 
ently of the printing-keys, and suitable con 
nections between the space-key and the said 
lever whereby it may be operated to release 
the pawl, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
4. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with the movable rack-bar and the es 
capement therefor, comprising an oscillating 
detent and a pivoted pawl adapted to shift 
longitudinally, a spring to shift the pawl, a 
lever to engage the pawl to prevent it from 
shifting, a space-key, Suitable connections be 
tween the space-key and the said lever where 
by it may be operated to release the pawl, 
and a pivoted stop for the said lever, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
5. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion with the movable rack-bar and the es 
capement therefor, comprising an Oscillating 
detent and a pivoted pawl adapted to shift 
35 
45 
555,541 
3 
longitudinally, a spring to shift the pawl, a 
lever to engage the pawl to prevent it from 
shifting, a space-key, suitable connections bes 
tween the space-key and the said lever where 
by it may be operated to release the pawl, a 
pivoted stop movable in a plane at right an 
gles to the said lever, a stationary pin to en 
gage the stop, and a spring to force the stop 
toward the pin, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
6. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion With a movable rack-bar mounted on the 
paper-carriage, and the escapement therefor 
comprising an oscillating detent and a piv 
oted pawl operated by said detent, of a slot 
in the end of the pawl containing the pivot, a 
coil-spring in the pawl and bearing upon the 
pivot to shift the pawl, a lever pivoted inter 
mediate of its length, to a standard integral 
with a plate secured to the frame of the ma 
chine, to prevent the pawl from shifting, a 
space-key, Oscillating rod, arm, g, lever, F, 
connection-rod, F, a pivoted stop, l, pin, m, 
and a spring to force the said pivoted stop 
toward the pin and the said pivoted pawl, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
7. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with the movable rack-bar and the es 
capement therefor, comprising an oscillating 
detent and a pivoted pawl adapted to shift 
longitudinally, a spring to shift the pawl, a 
lever to engage the pawl to prevent it from 
shifting, a bifurcated spring bearing with one 
of its free ends upon the pivoted pawl and 
with its other free end upon the lever engag 
ing the said pawl, a space-key, and suitable 
connections between the space-key and the 
said lever whereby it may be operated to re 
lease the pawl, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name. 
- 
EUGENE TERRY. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR. G. MARION, 
TRUMAN NOBLE. 
50 
55 
75 
So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555641.txt	(No Model.) 
A, H, DEAN. 
SWAGINC MACHINERY, 
  
No. 555,641, 
T I 
S.H. 7 a 27- 
STSAT-4 
Hi 
Patented Mar. 3, 1896. 
win a Rurn what Homurauma rare hea 
II 
---, 
(, 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
an 
s NESS 
 
 
2 
/avezzor, 
Cleu - Daaw 
7er geoat. Guw 
Maiorney. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT H. DEAN, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WIRE GOODS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SWAGING MACHINERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,641, dated March 3, 1896. 
Application filed May 2, 1894, Renewed November 4, 1895, Serial No, 567,958, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ALBERTH.DEAN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Worces 
ter, in the county of Worcester and Common 
Wealth of Massachusetts, have invented cer 
tain new and usefullmprovementsin Swaging 
Machinery, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
a machine in which metallic rods may be 
swaged. 
The machine is one in which the rod while 
being swaged is turned while it receives a 
series of blows upon its surface between prop 
erly-constructed dies. In this respect it is to 
be distinguished from that class of swaging 
machinery in which the stock is not turned, 
but in which the swaging-dies are placed in 
a revolving head and act toward a common 
Center. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
the machine. Fig. 2 is a front view, in partial 
section, showing the swaging - dies and the 
manner in which they are mounted and their 
relation to the other parts of the machine. 
Fig. 3 shows the means for connecting the two 
shafts of the machine, as will be more par 
ticularly explained hereinafter. Fig. 4 is a 
transverse sectional view through the line 44, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a rear view of the power 
carriage, referred to hereinafter; and Fig. 6 
is a detail view of the supporting device, re 
ferred to hereinafter. 
In Fig.1, Ais the bed of the machine, which 
may be mounted upon a table or upon suit 
able legs, as may be found most convenient. 
I is a pulley which receives power by means 
of a belt from the main shaft. The belt is 
shown at 2, Fig. 2. 
3, Fig. 1, is the main shaft of the machine, 
mounted in suitable stationary boxes 555 and 
carrying the eccentric 6, which actuates the 
swaging-die 7, mounted in the movable car 
riage 8, which has a reciprocating motion in the 
ways indicated by solid and dotted lines. 
The die-carriage and eccentric are con 
nected by the Wrist-pin 9. (Shown in dotted 
lines, Fig. 1.) A front view of the die and 
die-carriage is shown in Fig. 2. 
It will be noted that the shaft 3 is provided 
with a thread for part of its length and that it 
passes through the power-carriage 10. (Shown 
This power-carriage is so 
in detailin Fig. 4.) 
constructed that by means of the lever 11 
pressure may be brought to bear upon the nut 
13, which is secured to the lever-arm by the 
screw 12. The thread of the nut conforms to 
the thread on the main shaft 3, so that when 
the lever 11, pivoted at 38, is pushed up the 
thread in the nut engages with the thread of 
the shaft, so that when the shaftis revolved the 
power-carriage is moved positively upon it. 
When it is desired to move the power-car 
riage rapidly from one end of the shaft to the 
other, which occurs when a rod is taken out 
of the machine and a new one put in, the 
power-carriage and the shaft can be discon 
nected by depressing the lever 11, thus rais 
ing the nut 13 out of contact with the thread 
of shaft 3. The carriage may then be moved 
to and fro at pleasure, entirely independent 
of the shaft, 3. 
The power-carriage is mounted on away 14, 
and is prevented from any lateral movement 
by the downwardly-projecting sides 15, which 
embrace the way upon which the carriage 
moves, as shown in Fig. 4. 
The shaft 3 at the end opposite the driv 
ing-wheel 1 is provided with a disk 16, upon 
the circumference of which is the Wrist-pin 
17, (shown partly in dotted lines,) upon which 
the rod 18 is loosely pivoted, while the oppo 
site end of the rod 18 is connected in the usual 
manner with pawl and ratchet-wheel 1920, 
whereby motion may be communicated from 
the main shaft 3 to what may be termed the 
secondary shaft 21. The secondary shaft 
21 has a bearing at the end toward the ratchet 
wheel in the stationary box. 22, and at its op 
posite end in the box 23, which is mounted 
upon the movable chuck-carriage 24, which 
is capable of being moved to and fro in the 
ways 25. The secondary shaft 21 is provided 
with a chuck 26, which is capable of receiving 
the metallrod 27 to be swaged. (Shown in dot 
ted lines.) The rod is secured and held in 
place by means of the screw 28, which acts 
upon a common split bushing, as shown. The 
secondary shaft 21 is provided through part 
of its length with a groove 29, while the 
ratchet-wheel 20 is provided with a key 30, 
which has a seat in the groove 29, so that the 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
2 
555,641 
shaft 21 may freely slip through the ratchet 
wheel 20 and at the same time be rotated by it. 
In order that the chuck-carriage 24 may not 
move too freely, it is provided with a friction 
device (shown in Fig. 4) consisting of two bolts 
31 31, connected by a bridge 32, beneath the 
center of which a spring 33 has a bearing upon 
a proper base 54, so that the required friction 
may be secured upon the ways in which the 
carriage moves. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 is shown a stop 34 attached 
to the bed of the machine, which may be 
moved in a line parallel with the main shaft 
3 and securely fixed at any desired point, and 
so placed that when the carriage 10 arrives 
at the desired point the lower end of lever 35 
(shown in Fig. 5) will strike against the stop 
34. This will throw the hook end 36 of the 
lever 35 out of its normal position, in which 
it is held by the spring 46, thus releasing the 
end 37 of lever 11, (shown in Figs. 1 and 4) 
which is pivoted at 3S. The spiral spring 39 
is then free to act and pulls down the lever 
11, which throws the nut 13 out of contact 
with the thread on shaft 3. The progress of 
the power-carriage 10 may thus be automati 
cally stopped at any desired point. 
The carriage 10, which, for the sake of con 
venience, I have referred to as the power 
carriage, is provided with a curved arm 40, 
which at its outer end presses against a pro 
jecting part 41 of the chuck-carriage 24 in 
such manner that as the power-carriage 10 
travels along the shaft 3 it carries with it the 
chuck-carriage 24, the secondary shaft 29, and 
consequently the metal rod secured in the 
chuck and in process of being swaged. 
The movable swaging-die is shown in sec 
tion in Fig. 2, and it will be noted that its 
face is hollowed somewhat to conform to the 
shape of the rod to be reduced. 
The movable carriage S which carries the 
die is also shown in Fig. 2, together with the 
ways in which it moves, formed in the bed of 
the machine. 
The die 7 strikes upon a stationary fellow 
die of similar shape, 43, which is secured to 
the bed of the machine by a screw 44. 
It is evident that when the die 7 is with 
drawn from contact with the rod which is being 
swaged the rod must be held in place; other 
wise it would drop out of the groove in the 
die 43 and out of reach of the swaging-die. 
To effect this I provide a supporting device 
45. (Shown in detail in Fig. 6.) 
I also indi 
cate its position in Fig. 1. This supporting 
device is located between the swaging-dies, 
which it just clears, and the holding-chuck, 
and consists of an arm secured to a projection 
on the bed of the machine by the pin 47, on 
which it can oscillate. The arm is held in 
place and against the rod by the spring 46, 
which is secured to the bed of the machine by 
a screw, as shown. 
The lod to be swaged is placed in the groove 
across the face of the die 43, where it is held 
by the arm 45, which acts on the opposite side 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
of the rod, one end of the rod being secured 
in the chuck 26. The rod is thus held firmly 
in place until the process is completed. 
Having described the details of my im 
proved machine, I will proceed to describe its 
mode of operation. 
The rod 27 is placed in proper position be 
tween the Swaging-dies, where it is held by 
the supporting-arm 45, and One end is se 
cured in the chuck 26. Power is then applied 
to the driving-wheel1, and thence imparted to 
the main shaft 3, which, through the recipro 
cating rod 18, imparts a rotary motion to the 
shaft 21. The power-carriage, which at the 
beginning of its journey is nearly in contact 
with the box 5, travels a little distance before 
the arm 40 comes in contact with the project 
ing elbow 41 upon the chuck-carriage 24, the 
result being that the rod being treated is 
turned upon its axis and evenly swaged the 
width of the die around its entire circumfer 
ence before longitudinal motion is imparted 
to the carriage 24, which then draws the rod 
27 slowly along between the swaging-dies, 
while at the same time the rod has a rotary 
motion, so that every part of the circumfer 
ence of the rod is treated alike and an even 
surface is thus produced. The necessity for 
this arrangement is apparent upon a state 
ment of the fact, for if the chuck-carriage 
were to move longitudinally as soon as rotary 
motion were imparted to the rod the first 
end of the rod would receive a rough and un 
even finish. The ratchet, which turns the 
secondary shaft 29 is so timed that the sec 
ondary shaft, and consequently the rod which 
is being swaged, is turned while the movable 
reducing-die is returning after delivering a 
blow; but when the blow is delivered the rod 
remains stationary. 
Theoretically the longitudinal movement 
of the secondary shaft 21 does not cease dur 
ing the Swaging operation; but, practically, 
of course, the rod must remain stationary 
While the blow is being struck, and does so, 
as there is sufficient spring in the arm 40 and 
the connections between the main shaft 3 and 
the secondary shaft 21 to permit of it. 
When the swaging operation is completed 
the machine may be stopped by use of an or 
dinary clutch connection between pulley 1. 
and shaft 3, or by shipping the belt on the 
counter-shaft overhead, or in any other well 
known Way, the swaged rod removed, another 
put in its place, and the operation repeated. 
It will be observed that a metallic rod may 
be so treated as to have one or two enlarged 
heads of any desired length, with the inter 
vening part of the rod swaged to any required 
size and for any required length. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a SWaging-machine the combination 
of a shaft, threaded for part of its length, and 
carrying an eccentric which actuates a swag 
ing-die, With a carriage adapted to engage 
7o 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
555,641 
3 
whereby rotary and longitudinal motion may 
be imparted to said last-named shaft, and 
mechanism whereby said carriage may be 
disengaged from the thread upon the first 
named shaft, and the longitudinal motion of 
the second shaft automatically stopped, Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
ALBERT H. DEAN. 
Witnesses: 
R. M. WASHIBURN, 
W. O. BEMENT, 
with said thread, a second shaft adapted to 
hold a rod, and intermediate mechanism, 
Whereby rotary and longitudinal motion may 
be imparted to said last-named shaft, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
2. In a SWaging-machine, the combination 
of a shaft, threaded for part of its length, and 
carrying an eccentric, which actuates a SWag 
ing-die, With a carriage adapted to engage 
Io with said thread, a second shaft adapted to 
hold a rod, and intermediate mechanism 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555741.txt	(Model.) 
No. 555,741, 
Z(72/7zesses. 
%a 426 (622-24. 
6, &c. 
 
S. J. SHIMER. 
PLANER, KNIFE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 3, 1896, 
Zzzezz2: . 
a2zzzzzez-Mazzzzze; 
2-6-6. 6. 
(27% 
(Model.) 
S. J. SHIMER. 
PLANER, KNIFE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
- - is still 
- 
Patented Mar. 3, 1896. 
| 
f r 
| 2 | 1 
II I 
() | 
| 
|: 
-- - - - 
 
- - - 
- 
- 
SeaSaaS Sea 
 
 
(627esses. 
7%zeeee-C6Zerzelc 
". 
. 
Aarzee VZ2%free, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL JOHNSTON SHIMER, OF MILTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PLANER - KNIFE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,741, dated March 3, 1896. 
Application filed November 27, 1895, Serial No. 570,287, (Model.) 
IO 
To cell, Luhon, it may conce7n. 
Be it, known that, SAMUEL JOHNSTON SHI 
MER, a citizen of the United States, and a resi 
dent of Milton, in the county of Northumber 
land and State of Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Planer-Knives; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
planer-knives for the heads of Wood-planing 
machines, and which are formed with a convex 
or curved cutting-edge extending across the 
head in a diagonal line or in a line at angle 
to the axis of the lhead, so as to produce a 
draw-cut and also cut a plane surface. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
an improved construction of planer-knife, so 
3. that the same will seat squarely on the head, 
and whereby the Work of sharpening the same 
may be brought within the limit of a straight 
25 
bevel on the knife, so that the average me 
chanic may keep the knife in order. 
The invention consists essentially in a 
planer-knife having a convex or curved cut 
ting-edge, the same being a segment of an 
ellipse such as would be described by the knife 
cutting the cylinder of revolution at an angle 
to the axis of rotation, and the under or in 
ner side of the knife made convex or thinner 
at the ends than at the center and provided 
with a facing or coating of soft metal on such 
convex side, which gradually increases in 
thickness from the center to each end, so as to 
form aflat surface, as Will be hereinafter fully 
described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a cutter-head, showing 
one of my improved knives applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the knife. Fig. 3 is a 
longitudinal section of the knife on the line 
ac ac, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section on 
the line y), Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a similar section 
on the line a ac, Fig. 2. 
In the said drawings the reference-numeral 
I designates a planer-knife provided with 
slots 2 for the passage of bolts by which it is 
secured to a cutter-head. The outer edge of 
35 
45 
this knife is beveled, as shown, forming a cut 
ting-edge 3, which is curved or convex, the 
curve being the segment of an ellipse which 
lies in the cylinder of rotation, so as to cut a 
true plane surface. The knife is secured to 
the cutter-head on a line at an angle to the 
axis thereof so that the cutting-edge will pro 
duce a draw-cut. The inner or under side of 
the knife is ground or cut away from the cen 
ter toward each end, forming a convex sur 
face 4 corresponding with the curvature of 
the edge. The said grooved or cut-away por 
tions are then filled up with a facing 5 of soft 
metal, and the outer side of which is flat or a 
true plane, so as to seat squarely on the cut 
ter-head. 
In making the knife I first take a flat rect 
angular plate of steel and lay off the curva 
ture of the knife-edge on the bevel surface 
upon which the knife is sharpened, and such 
curved line is made permanent by grinding 
the under side of the knife to line with said 
curvature. When this is done it will be 
found that the under face of the knife will 
have become convex and Will not fit upon the 
flat side of the planer-head. To compensate 
for this I replace the metal which has been 
ground off the under side of the planer-knife 
with a metal which Will Wear away as the 
knife is being used up and at the same time 
furnish the knife with a flat seating-surface 
to fit the side of the head just as well as the 
ordinary knife, which it resembles both as to 
shape and dimensions, except that it is made 
up of hard and soft metal. The knife-edge 
carries its curvature on the line of union be 
tween the hard and soft metal, which is sol 
dered or otherwise caused to adhere thereto 
and spread itself over the entire under sur 
face of the knife, to the right and left of the 
center line, to restore that part of the knife 
which was cut away to produce the edge 
curvature. The knife, after receiving the soft 
metal facing, is planed up and given its origi 
nal shape, having a flat bottom of Soft metal, 
concave on its inner surface, which is secured 
to the convex inner side of the knife. By 
this construction, as the knife Wears away by 
use and is set out of line of cut, it presents 
the same edge curvature to the work until it 
is used up. 
The sharpening of the knife is accomplished 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
 
555,741 
by filling or grinding the bevel edge just as 
an ordinary planer-knife would be sharpened. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. As an improved article, a planer-knife 
having a continuous cutting-edge in the form 
of a segment of an ellipse extending from end 
to end, and convexed on its under side from 
the center to each end, substantially as speci 
fied. 
2. As an improved article, a planer-knife 
having a continuous convex cutting-edge in 
the form of a segment of an ellipse extending 
5 
O 
 
from end to end, and convexed on its under 
side from the center to each side and provided I5 
on said convexed under side with a soft-metal 
facing, permanently secured thereto, and the 
outer surface flat or straight, substantially as 
specified. 
. . 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 20 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL JOHNSTON SHIMER. 
H. E. ANGSTADT, 
E. S. SHIMER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555841.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 555,841, 
T. E. ADAMS, 
ELECTRIC ARC LAMP, 
Patented Mar. 3, 1896. 
 
A/ 
2 
2. 
 
 
s 
WITNESSES. 
52.7. 
INVENTOR, 
Z72 onzes Z-4oza/72s 
'72 azafa-4 
A T TOA NA. Y. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TI IOMAS E. ADAMS, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE ADAMS 
BAGNALL ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF SAME PIACE. 
EECT RC-ARC LAW P. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,841, dated March 3, 1896. 
Application filed June 6, 1895, Serial No. 551,826, (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
IBe it known that I, THOMAS E. ADAMS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State of 
5 Ohio, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Clutches for Arc Lamps, of 
which the following is a specification that 
will enable those skilled in the art to which 
my invention pertains to make and use the 
Sal(0. 
My improvement relates to the contact or 
gripping surfaces of friction-clutches for elec 
tric-arc lamps. Its objects are to provide 
clutching-surfaces of a character that will not 
be affected by humidity, corrosion, or the de 
positions of gases or oil; that will remove such 
depositions if formed from the object to be 
clutched, keeping its surface bright and clean, 
and that will therefore always be in condition 
to instantly clutch or release the object, 
responding quickly and accurately to all re 
quirements. 
It consists of lining or facing the clamping 
or gripping members of a clutch with graph 
ite, preferably in solid blocks, which are suit 
ably attached to said members and shaped to 
fit upon the diametrically-opposite surfaces 
of the object to be clamped. 
My improvement is particularly designed 
for use in mechanisms where lubrication of 
the frictional contact-faces is difficult or un 
desirable and where these surfaces should be 
kept clean and free from sticky or rough de 
positions in order that the action of the clutch 
should be positive and unvarying. It is ap 
plicable to and particularly useful in electric 
arc lamps in which the rods that carry the 
moving carbon sticks are held by clutches 
which release their hold at frequent intervals 
to permit the minute step-by-step feed of the 
carbon as required at the arc or point of com 
bustion. 
The continuity and steadiness of an arc light 
is absolutely dependent upon the promptness 
and accuracy of this feeding mechanism, for 
failure to respond quickly leaves the carbon 
points too far apart, while too great a move 
lment of the carbon will bring the points to 
gether and close the arc, either of these con 
Many of the metallic clutches now in gen 
So ditions being detrimental to the light. 
35 
45 
 
55 
eral use in arc lamps will operate reasonably 
Well when all the parts are clean and bright, 
but become defective and irregular in action 
when the parts become corroded through ex 
posure to the elements or coated by deposi 
tions from impurities in the atmosphere or 
by the gases and fumes arising from the com 
bustion at the arc immediately below them. 
I have found that by the use of graphite in 
the frictional contact-surfaces of clutches the 
coating of the parts to an injurious extent is 
prevented, such deposits having no detri 
mental effect on the graphite surface, which 
will prevent permanent deposits upon or re 
move them from a metallic surface to which 
it is opposed. 
The prevention of permanent injurious de 
posits or coatings upon metal surfaces op 
posed to the graphite surfaces of clutches 
is due to the fact that the minute pores and 
indentations in the Surface of the metal soon 
become filled with a fine graphite dust, or 
powder which is rubbed off from the opposing 
graphite block and into the interstices of the 
metal, which is thus kept smooth and bright 
by the action of the graphite shoe. Any de 
posit which might form upon the clear sur 
face of the metal is largely prevented from 
close adhesion thereto by this underfilling of 
graphite powder, which is constantly being 
renewed by the graphite block. For these 
reasons my improvement is particularly val 
luable in mechanisms the proper performance 
of whose functions is dependent upon the 
delicacy and accuracy of the operations of 
clutches or brakes. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows a Well-known form of clutch mechan 
ism employed in electric-arc lamps for con 
trolling the carbon-rod, with the gripping 
faces of the clutch lined or faced with graph 
ite blocks in accordance with my invention, 
the clutch members being in holding contact 
With the rod, Some of the parts being broken 
away for purposes of better illustration. Fig. 
2 is a sectional view of the same on the line 
22 of Fig. 3 and shows the clutch members 
having released the rod. Fig. 3 is a plan or 
top view of the same, showing the parts in the 
same position as in Fig. 2. 
The rod A, which carries the movable car 
So 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
r 
555,841 
In an electric-arc lamp, the combination 
with the carbon-rod and a clutch having jaws 
disposed at diametrically-opposite sides of 
said carbon-rod, of graphite facings on said 
jaws, said graphite facings being thus adapted 
to receive the carbon-rod between then a (l 
engage the same at diametrically-opposite 
points, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in the presence of two witnesses, this 4th day 
of June, 1895, at Cleveland, Ohio. 
THOMAS E. ADAMIS. 
2 5 
Witnesses: 
A. E. WEINBERG, 
R. I. IOILMES. 
bon in an arc lamp, is held between the mem 
bers B B of a clutch, said members being 
connected by pivots c and c' to a lever C, the 
free end of which is rocked up and down by 
suitable mechanism in the lamp to cause it 
to force the clutch members into contact with 
or to release the rod A, as required. 
The members B B' are lined or faced with 
graphite blocks b b', which come into contact 
with and clamp upon the rod A. These blocks 
ale attached to the members in any suitable 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new and useful, and desire to se 
cure by Iletters Patent, is 
0. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US555941.txt	(No Model.) 
O, S, FELLOWS. 
CAN OPENING DEWICE, 
No. 555,94l, 
Patented Mar. 10, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
Z24 
7%, i. 
2 3 - 123 
(2 See 2 
722, 4, 
t A (2/ 
M 
l-iba Ila 
-6 
$42se 222 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z27, 3. 
II at , 2. 
-H 
ZP 
a 
krerer & 
w 
 
 
Y 
 
y 
R 
N 
N R 
R 
1. 
e 
 
AN REW 8,GRAAM.PhOT0-0. WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIN S. FELLOWS, OF MIDDLETOWN, NEW YORK. 
CAN OPENING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 555,941, dated March 10, 1896. 
Application filed March 21, 1895, Serial No. 542,618, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it naily COF-Cerf: 
Be it known that I, OLIN S. FELLOWs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mid 
dletown, in the county of Orange and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Can-Opening De 
vices, of which the following is a specification 
Sufficient to enable others skilled in the art 
to which the invention appertains to make 
and use the same. 
My improvements relate to strip-winding 
devices, known as keys, for opening sheet 
metal cans in which the portion of the can 
Stripped off is Wound around the shank of the 
implement. Heretofore these strip-winding 
keys have been formed with slots in their 
Shanks for the reception of the tongue or end 
of the strip to be wound off, and have hence 
been detached or detachable parts liable to 
become misplaced or lost, so as not to be avail 
able for use when needed for the opening of 
the can. 
My present invention consists primarily in 
a strip-Winding key having a stripping-tongue 
forming an integral part thereof, the strip 
ping-tongue being designed for attachment 
to the portion of the can that is to be stripped 
off. I am aware that stripping-tongues have 
heretofore been formed separately and sub 
sequently inserted under or attached to the 
portion of the can to be stripped off, but in 
such cases the tongues have been designed 
simply for engagement with a slotin the strip 
winding key, whereas the essential feature 
of my present invention consists in making 
the key and stripping-tongue integral for per 
manent attachment to the portion to be 
stripped from the can. 
My combined key and stripping-tongue may 
be applied to a stripping-section consisting of 
either an inside or an outside flange, or of a 
portion of the can-body, or the tongue itself 
may be made of sufficient length to circum 
scribe the can and unite by solder two opposed 
edges of the can, as those of the cap and can 
body. In either case the novelty consists in 
making the stripping tongue and key inte 
gral, to be afterward attached to the can. 
A secondary feature of my invention con 
sists in making the stripping-tongue in one 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
o 
75 
piece with the special form of sheet-metal key 
described in my Patent No. 543,004, dated 
July 23, 1895, as hereinafter set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional elevation of a portion of a can from 
which it is designed to strip, the inside flange 
of the cap. Fig. 2 is a section upon plane of 
line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section 
upon plane of line 33, Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a simi 
lar view illustrating the stripping operation. 
Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are detail views of the com 
bined key and stripping-tongue shown in the 
first three figures. Fig. 8 is a sectional ele 
Vation of the end of a can from which it is 
designed to strip the edge of the body from an 
end cap having an inner flange; Fig. 9, a sec 
tion upon line 99, Fig. 8; and Fig. 10, a sec 
tion uponline 1010, Fig8; Fig. 11, a sectional 
elevation showing my combined key and strip 
ping-tongue as applied to the stripping off of 
an exterior flange of an end plate; Fig. 12, an 
elevation of the same; Figs. 13 and 14, de 
tails of the key and stripping-tongue shown 
in Figs. 11 and 12; Fig. 15, a view illustrat 
ing the use of my combined key and stripping 
tongue where the tongue is used to join the 
cap and can-body together. 
The key A may be made integral with the 
stripping-tongue C in any suitable or conven 
ient manner, the parts being made separately 
and then attached firmly to each other if de 
sired. I prefer, however, to make both key 
and stripping-tongue out of one piece of metal, 
and in illustration of this I herein show my 
improvements as embodied in and with the 
form of sheet-metal strip-winding key set 
forth in my prior application hereinbefore re 
ferred to, although I do not confine myself to 
the identical form and structure of parts 
shown, since it is obvious that modifications 
may be made from the spirit and intent of 
my invention. 
As shown in the drawings, the tongue O, is 
struck up out of the same piece of sheetmetal 
from which the key-blank is formed in such 
manner that when the blank is folded upon 
itself to form the key Asaid stripping-tongue 
will project laterally from the shanka' of the 
key. The lateral extension of the tongue a 
is sufficient to afford a suitable contact-sur 
95 
OO 
2 
555,941 
face for soldering or otherwise fastening it 
to the position, p, of the can which is to be 
stripped off. 
Its edge Cl-, which is to start the 
Stripping operation, is preferably curved or 
inclined so as to extend diagonally across the 
stripp, which maybe weakened on this line if 
necessary to facilitate the operation. 
The tongue C is inserted between the flange 
f of the end-cap C and the edge e of the can 
body B prior to the soldering of the said cap 
and can-body together, so that the tongue be 
comes to all intents and purposes a part of 
the can. 
Where an outer flangef of the end cap C 
is to be stripped off, as in Figs. 11 and 12, the 
tongue is bent over, substantially as shown, 
so as to bring the handle a' of the key into 
position beyond the edge of the can. 
By reference to Figs. 3 and 4, it will be un 
derstood that the lower end C of the Shank 
Cl' is immediately available as a fulcrum or 
spindle upon starting to wind off the stripp, 
aiding and reinforcing the tongue C, and pre 
Venting undue strain upon the latter. 
Where it is designed to use the tongue c. 
as a medium for Soldering two parts of the 
can together, as in Fig. 15, to be afterward 
Separated by the Stripping off of the same, 
the tongue C is simply made long enough to 
extend around the can, overlapping the su 
perpOSed edges of the cap and can-body, as 
indicated by the line l in said figure. 
The usual annular incision or other cir 
cumscribing line of weakness may beformed 
upon the can to facilitate the stripping off 
O 
25 
35 
of the portion p to be removed in opening 
the can. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. As an article of manufacture a strip 
Winding key consisting of a handled shank 
which is formed with a lateral tongue or ex 
tension for connection with the stripping por 
tion of a sheet-metal can, Substantially in the 
manner and for the purpose described. 
2. As an article of manufacture a strip 
winding key consisting of a handled shank 
which is formed with a lateral tongue or ex 
tension for connection with the stripping por 
tion of a sheet-metal can, said key-handle, 
Shank and lateral extension being formed in 
One piece substantially in the manner and 
for the purpose described. 
3. As an article of manufacture a strip 
windling key consisting of a blank of sheet 
metal doubled upon itself to form a handled 
Shank With a lateral tongue or extension for 
connection with the stripping portion of the 
can substantially in the manner described. 
4. As an article of manufacture a strip 
Winding key consisting of a blank of sheet 
metal embossed and doubled to form a hollow 
cylindrical shank one-half of which has a lat 
eral tongue or extension for connection to the 
Stripping portion of the can, substantially in 
the manner and for the purpose described. 
OILIN S. FELLOWS. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE WILLIAM MIATT, 
D. W. GARDNER. 
15 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556041.txt	(No Model.) 
0, ANDERSON. 
MOVABLE DISTRIBUTING SPOUT FOR PUMPS, 
No. 556,041, 
Patented Mar, 10, 1896, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ODIN ANDERSON, OF DES MOINES, IOWA. 
MOVABLE DISTRIBUTING-SPOUT FOR PUMPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,041, dated March 10, 1896. 
Application filed April 16, 1894, Serial No. 507,803, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ODIN ANDERSON, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Des Moines, in the county of Polk and 
State of Iowa, have invented a Movable Dis 
tributing-Spout for Pumps, &c., of which the 
following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
spout adapted to be attached to pumps oper 
ated by wind-power or the like, so that the 
flow may be directed into different vessels 
without moving the vessels or shutting off the 
power that operates the pumps. 
My invention consists in the construction 
of a device for supporting a trough directly 
beneath the spout of a pump, and be capable 
of swinging in either direction so that the flow 
from the pump may be directed into various 
receptacles without shutting of the flow of 
water from the pump, as hereinafter set forth, 
pointed out in my claim, and illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the device 
applied to a windmill pump. Fig. 2 is a front 
view of the same applied to a Wooden pump, 
its movement being indicated by dotted lines. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the reference-letter A is used to indicate an 
iron pump adapted to be operated by a wind 
mill or other suitable power. 
Bindicates a curved bracket detachably se 
cured to the pump-stock by means of a rod B 
O 
25 
 
screw-threaded atits ends and passed through 
the base of the bracket and around the pump 
stock, nuts B being provided to secure the 
bracket to said rod. The top of said bracket 
is rounded at C to form a journal for purposes 
hereinafter explained. 
D indicates a trough of any suitable ordi 
nary construction having a blockD*atits rear 
under side provided with an opening adapted 
to receive the journal C, so as to support the 
spoutin an approximately-horizontal position 
beneath the pump-spout, and to permit it to 
be readily turned in any direction. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States there 
for, is 
A movable distributing-spout for pumps 
comprising a bracket designed to be secured 
to a pump-stock and extended upwardly to a 
point beneath the pump-spout, a vertical 
journal On its upper end, a suitable distribut 
ing-spout and a block secured to the inner un 
der surface of the spout having a bore therein. 
to admit said journal to a sufficient depth to 
support the trough in a horizontal plane, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes stated. 
ODIN ANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
J.RALPH ORWIG, . 
THOMAS G. ORWIG. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556141.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 556,141, 
- 
F. P. G-EYER 
SHUTTER, OR DOOR FASTENER, 
Patented Mar, 10, 1896. 
Z267.2. 
4. 
s 
- 
C 
4 
ZD 
6 
e 
- c 
-w-ran - 
- 
e - c 
22 
-- - - - - 
v 
M 
1 -c. 
2. : 
7, A: 
l/ 
aaa... elbovoys. 
 
NREw s.GRAHAM. Phoro-LTHOWASHINGTON, DC 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK. P. GEYER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SHUTTER OR DOOR FAST ENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,141, dated March 10, 1896. 
Application filed May 13, 1895, Serial No. 549,086, (No model.) 
75 
95 
55 
To all, whon, it hay concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANKP. GEYER, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Philadel 
phia, in the county of Philadelphia, and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Shutter-Fasten 
ers; and Ido declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in shutter and door fas 
teners, the object being to provide a cheap, 
simple and secure device for this purpose 
which cannot be opened from without and 
which is easily applied to window-shutters 
and doors already in place. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my device. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view of the same, showing it attached to 
two closed Window-shutters or doors. 
Similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts in both figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A A' represent 
two window-shutters, doors, or the like. To 
the shutter A is secured, by screws or other 
wise, a flat metal plate D, provided with one 
or more notches e, extending from the upper 
edge of the plate to the middle thereof. A 
similar plate D', preferably shorter than the 
plate D, is secured by screws to the shutter 
A', and it has a notche' similar to the notches 
e in the plate D. The bolts C C have each a 
head c, a reduced portion or neck d, and an 
opening d passing transversely through the 
body of the bolt near the neck. The distance 
between the head of the bolt and the neck d 
is equal to the thickness of the shutter or 
door, for a purpose to be described herein 
after. The bolts C C pass through the shut 
ter from the outside, and also through the 
notches in the plates D D'. 
In assembling the parts the bolts are driven 
from the outside through holes bored in the 
shutters at suitable distances from the meet 
ing edges, care being taken to keep the open 
ings d'in the bolts in a horizontal plane. The 
plates D D' are then put in place by engag 
ing the necks d of the bolts (which necks ex 
tend just within the inner face of the shutter) 
with the notches e e' of the plates. The 
plates are then slipped upward until they are 
in the position shown in Fig. 1, after which 
they are fastened to the shutters by screws. 
The necks d of the bolts thus entering the 
notches e e' of the plates secure the bolts 
firmly in place and prevent them from being 
withdrawn. 
A locking bar or rod G for fastening the 
shutters is provided at one end with a head 
g, while at the opposite end is a hole g", in 
which a key or securing-ping is placed. A 
stop d on the plate D limits the backward 
movement of the bolt G. 
The fastening device being secured in place 
on the Window-shutters, as above described, 
and the shutters closed, it is only necessary 
to move the locking-bolt G across the adjoin 
ing edges of the two shutters and through the 
opening d in the bolt C", thus firmly and se 
curely fastening them against outside manip 
ulation. The key or ping is inserted in the 
hole g' to prevent any accidental movement 
of the bar G. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The combination, in a fastening device 
for shutters, and the like, of headed bolts 
provided with openings, said bolts passing 
through the parts to be secured, plates at 
tached to said parts, a bar or rod adapted to 
pass through the openings in the bolts, and a 
securing-pin, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. The combination, in a fastening device 
for shutters, and the like, of headed bolts pass 
ing through the parts to be secured, said bolts 
being provided with reduced portions, plates 
attached to said parts and engaging the necks 
of the said bolts, a locking-bar, and a secur 
ing-pin, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
FRANK P. GEYER. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD J. FROST, 
CHAS. C. COLLIER. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556241.txt	(No Model.) 
S. BARN WELL, 
SMALL WARE I,00M, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 556,241, 
Patented Mar, 10, 1896. ? 
s 
 
AS 
AN orew B.GRAHAM.Phco-Lithd.WAS Eri GTON.C. 
(No Model.) 
S. BARN WELL, 
SMALL WARE LOOM, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 556,241, 
Patented Mar, 10, 1896. 
a. 
?o 
m 
L. 
 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - 
--- 
- - - - - - ----- 
3. 
, 
- a m r -a -- a- - - - 
S/Y (Y. 
-- Rs. 
3-- 
- 
f 
: 
i.T. - 
No 
(9 
... 
s-it?- 
sists Seizaii 
--J- 
- - 
---- 
sa 
is is 'ST : 
-- 
 
 
- - - - - 
-- 
N 
- 
. NS 
a N 
QY 
n 
 
 
1477%RY 
ALES 
--SWS3 
SSXS3 
O 
5 
ANDREW BGRAHAM. PhorouTHowASHINGTON, D.C. 
S. BARN WELL, 
SMALL WARE I,00M, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Mar, 10, 1896, 
(NO Model.) 
No. 556,241. 
 
Abrews.grapots-HowAssoc: 
(No Model.) 
5 sheets-sheet 4. 
small, WARE loor. 
Patented Mar. 10, 1896, 
(No Model.) 
No. 556,241, 
S. BARNWELL, 
SMALL WARE LOOM, 
5 sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Mar. 10, 1896. 
r 
p T 
E. 
F. G. I. 
FIG. Io. 
ZZzzerfees 
Az-vez267 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN BARNWELL, OF MANCHESTER, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
IBARNWELL MACHINE COMPANY, LIMITED, OF SAME PLACE. 
SMALL-WARE LOOM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,241, dated March 10, 1896. 
Application filed February 12, 1895, Serial No. 538,lli, (No model.) Patented in England February 25, 1892, No, 8,711, and 
in Germany March 18, 1893, No. 73,070, 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN BARN WELL, 
a subject of the Queen of Great Britain and 
Ireland, and a resident of 118Everton Road, 
Manchester, county of Lancaster, England, 
have invented certain. Improvements in 
Small-Ware Looms, (for which I have ob 
tained a British patent, No. 3,711, dated Feb 
ruary 25, 1892, and a German patent, No. 
73,070, dated March 18, 1893,) of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of looms 
in which ribbons, tapes, and similar narrow 
articles are woven and known as small 
Ware looms, and is designed with the object 
of increasing the production of the loom by 
providing means whereby two, three, or more 
rows of separate and continuous fabrics can 
be woven superimposed or one above the 
other at the same time, instead of or in addi 
tion to a single fabric, Such as at present pro 
duced, so that a greater amount of Workmay 
be turned out with the same expenditure of 
labor. 
The invention consists, essentially, in con 
structing the loom with a combination of 
parts arranged to receive two, three, or more 
sets or lows of warp-threads drawn through 
to form as many rows of sheds, one above the 
other; two, three, or more rows or sets of 
shuttles Weaving independent fabrics; a sley 
or reed to separate or divide the warps and 
beat up the wefts; apart of the batten which 
carries the shuttles movable or detachable, 
and the healds constructed to carry the Warps 
in two or more sheds, one above the other. 
It will be fully described with reference to 
the accompanying drawings, in which suffi 
cient of a Small-Ware loom is shown to illus 
trate my invention. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of one end of 
a loom with the breast-piece removed. Fig. 
2 is an end elevation of the same; Fig. 3, a 
front elevation of part of the sley or batten, 
on enlarged scale; Fig. 4, a transverse sec 
tional elevation of Fig. 3 on the line aca, as 
seen in the direction of the arrow. Fig. 5 is a 
Sectional plan. Of Same on the line if y of Fig. 
3. Fig. 6 is a view showing a single heald or 
so leash. Fig. 7 is an enlarged sectional view 
w 
45 
25 
35 
of some of the parts shown in Fig. 2. Fig. S 
is a front view of part of the removable part 
of the batten. Fig. 9 is an end view of Fig. 
8. Fig. 10 is an elevation, as seen from the 
inside of the loom, of the guides for the re 
movable part of the batten. Fig. 11 is a sec 
tion through line ZZ of Fig. 10. 
The framework A, which supports the va 
rious parts of the loom, the shuttles B, and 
the mechanism. Whereby the healds and other 
parts of the loom are actuated, are of ordi 
nary construction, and consequently the 
Crank, Shaft-cranks, cams, and mechanism 
at the end of frame for driving the shuttles . 
are not shown in the drawings. 
The batten or sley is constructed with two, 
three or more (preferably three) shuttle-races 
b to receive two, three or more sets or rows of 
shuttles B, placed one above the other, the 
number of sets of warps or sheds correspond 
ing there with, all the shuttles being propelled 
forward through their respective sheds simul 
taneously. The batten is further constructed 
in three separate parts: a removable part C 
in the center, which carries or supports the 
shuttles B, and in which the shuttle-races b 
are formed in rows one above the other; a 
front sliding frame, D, with upright arms or 
brackets d, which engage with the shuttles 
and propel them backward and forward 
through the Sheds, and a fixed frame Eat the 
back, which carries or to which the reeds F 
are affixed. 
The removable part C of the batten can be 
lifted up and removed and replaced without 
disturbing or disarranging the other parts, 
the bottom part being left open so as not to 
come in contact with the Warps when being 
removed from or placed in position. I pre 
fer to supply each loom. With two of these re 
movable shuttle-frames or parts and attach 
to each a cord G, whereby they can be lifted 
up into a position above the operative parts 
of the loom, so that when the quills or pins 
in one lot of shuttles become empty the re 
movable part carrying the shuttles can be 
lifted out of the batten and another one with 
full shuttles can be inserted to take its place, 
thus obviating any lengthy stoppage of the 
loom to supply fresh quills, the empty quills 
90 
Od 
2 
556,241 
O 
25 
35 
being removed and replaced while the shut 
tles are out of operation. The cords G pass 
over pulleys II, and I prefer to place guides 
at each end of the framing for guiding the 
movable part C when being raised and low 
ered. These guides, Figs. 10 and 11, consist 
of channels, one, r', of which is fixed at each 
end of the batten and swings therewith. The 
batten is operated in the usual well-known 
way. For instance, it may be attached to 
swinging arms S, caused to oscillate by links 
S' connected to a crank-shaft. Fixed to the 
inside of each side frame of the loom is a 
frame containing two channels ' ' opening 
into each other and having a common outlet 
at 7', which is in line with the top of the 
guide-channel 1' when the batten is in its fore 
most position, at which point the removable 
part C may be raised or lowered. It will of 
course be understood that one of the movable 
parts Cis lifted into whichever of the channels 
' or ' is vacant before the other is brought 
down. 
The sliding frame ID is actuated at one or 
both ends by the usual mechanism and is 
held in position when in operation by the piv 
oted catches C. The catches c are removed 
and the frame ID drawn forward when it is 
desired to remove and replace the part C. 
The reed F is divided into two, three or 
more divisions corresponding with the num 
ber of superimposed rows of shuttles and 
sheds by narrow bars f, extending across the 
dents, for the purpose of dividing the differ 
ent sets of warps and also of strengthening 
the reed or rendering it sufficiently strong to 
beat up weft in the several sheds at the same 
time. 
The healds J are each formed with two or 
more eyesi, so that two or more rows of warp 
threads are carried by each, one above the 
other. Each heald thus changes the three 
Superimposed sheds at the one time. 
The breast-piece IX is provided with two, 
three, or more wires k, over one of which each 
of the separate fabrics passes when woven. 
The Woven fabrics pass from the wires k over 
a roller L and from thence over a second roller 
M to a receiving-box N. The roller M is 
driven from the roller I, by the strap l, and 
the fabrics are held in contact with the roller 
M by pivoted levers or weights an, each pro 
vided with a pulley or runner n. 
The rolls of warps I prefer to mount, in a 
creel O at the back of the loom, and pass the 
threads forward over the guide-rollers oo', as 
shown. Instead of placing the creel O at the 
back of the loom, it may be placed in any 
other convenient position. 
The invention may be applied with small 
Ware looms with any ordinary driving mech 
45 
55 
 
65 
75 
anism for the shuttles, such as rack and pin 
ion, peg-shot, and other descriptions of mo 
tions commonly employed in this class of 
loom. 
I wish it to be understood that I am well 
aware that two or more sets of superimposed 
shuttles with the usual rise-and-fall action 
operated by jacquards have been employed 
for weaving fabrics with colou's or patterns 
and also for weaving ladder-tapes for Vene 
tian blinds, but such do not constitute any 
part of my invention. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a small-ware loom, the combination 
of a sley or batten having a horizontally-slid 
ing frame for simultaneously operating two 
or more vertically-superposedlines of shuttles 
with a vertically-withdrawable frame resting 
freely in guides and carrying all the shuttles, 
whereby all the shuttles of the loom can be 
simultaneously and collectively withdrawn 
and another similar shuttle-frame be dropped 
into the same guides, reeds divided into two 
or more vertically-superposed compartments, 
healds, the separate leashes of which have 
two or more eyes each, and a creel for sup 
porting two or more rows or sets of vertically 
superposed warp-threads,substantially as de 
scribed, for the purpose of weaving simul 
taneously two or more separate and continu 
ous fabrics, one vertically over the other. 
2. In a small-ware loom, a sley or batten 
for simultaneously operating two or more ver 
tically-superposed lows of shuttles, a verti 
cally-displaceable shuttle-frame carrying two 
or more vertically-superposed shuttle-races, 
guides fixed to each end of, and swinging with, 
the batten, in which guides the shuttle-frame 
freely rests, with frames provided with two 
guide-grooves opening into each other and 
having a common outlet inline with the sail 
guides on the batten, for facilitating the Je 
placement of one shuttle-frame for another, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a small-Ware loom, the combination 
with a sley or batten of a detachable vertically 
Withdrawable shuttle-frame common to all 
the shuttles, guides in the batten for holding 
the shuttle-frame and corresponding guides 
in the loom-frame for receiving the shuttle 
frame when lifted up and for holding a sec 
ond shuttle-frame to replace the first one, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
STEPIEN 3ATRN WEII. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN IIALL, 
JOSEPH BENTON. 
95 
OO 
IIo 
1 I5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556341.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
No. 556,341, 
J. & W. D. EYNON. 
WHEEL TIRE. 
- Patented Mar, 17, 1896. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
d 
s 
Es, 
e 
Ns 
E s 
s 
7 
4 
 
NE 
late Ee se Ea se 
as 
es 
e C2 e 
a 
WITNESSES: 
G2 z s4-76. 
e2%46-4 
ANDREW B GAHAMPHOTorrho washington pc 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES EYNON AND WILLIAMD. EYNON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WHEEL-TRE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,341, dated March 17, 1896. 
Application filed October 22, 1895, Serial No. 566,513, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES EYNON and 
WILLIAM. D. EYNON, citizens of the United 
States, residing in the city and county of 
5 Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Wheel-Tires, which improvement is fully set 
forthin the following specification and accom 
panying drawings. 
Io Our invention consists of a novel construc 
tion of tire for use on Wheels of Wagons, car 
riages, carts or other vehicles, said tire being 
rolled to conform to the novel shapes herein 
after referred to for facilitating the movement 
I5 of said wheels in turning out of or leaving 
railroad-tracks. 
It further consists of novel details of con 
struction, all as will be hereinafter set forth. 
Figures 1 and 2 represent side elevations, 
2O partly in section, of a wheel-tire embodying 
our invention. Fig. 3 represents a similar 
view of the same, the tire being provided with 
a flange. Figs. 4 and 5 represent side eleva 
tions, partly in section, of a wheel-tire having 
25 its beveled face provided with a wavy or ser 
pentine groove or ridge respectively. Figs. 
6 and 7 represent side elevations, partly in 
section, of wheel-tires having their beveled 
portions provided with ribs and grooves re 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings, Adesignates the 
felly of a wheel, and B the tire mounted 
35 thereon, the same having the tread C, of uni 
form diameter, and a beveled outer edge or 
face D, which is provided with the annular 
grooves or channels E. 
In Fig. 3 the tread C is of uniform diame 
4o ter, as before, while the edge of the tire is 
projected a short distance beyond the edge of 
the felly, so as to form a flange F, said flange 
being provided with a stepped surfaceformed 
by the annular ridges or corrugations G. 
3o spectively, to be hereinafter referred to. 
In Figs. 4 and 5, C designates the tread of 45 
uniform diameter, as before, and ID designates 
the beveled portion thereof, the same being 
provided in the first instance with the serpen 
tine or wavy depression or groove H, while in 
Fig. 5 the beveled face D is provided with the 5o 
serpentine ridge or tongue J. 
In Figs. 6 and 7, C designates the tread of 
uniform diameter, as before, while the bev 
eled face D is provided with ridges or ribs K 
in the case of Fig. 6, and with the similarly- 55 
located grooves L in the case of Fig. 7. 
It will be apparent from the foregoing that 
by the employment of our novel construction 
of tires the wheels to which the same are 
attached can readily leave car - tracks on 6o 
turning in either direction, to the right or left, 
since the beveled faces D, provided with the 
annular ridges or corrugations, Will enable. 
the tires to leave said tracks much easier and 
readily ride over the shoulders of the rails 65 
than if a rectangular shoulder was formed on 
the outer periphery of the tire, as heretofore. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Ilet 
ters Patent, is- 
1. A wheel-tire having a tread of uniform 
diameter, and an outer beveled or inclined 
face, said face being provided with annular 
ridges or projections, whereby a stepped sur 
face is produced, substantially as described. 75 
2. A wheel-tire having a tread of uniform 
diameter, one side thereof being beveled and 
having a depending flange adapted to project 
beyond the edge of the felly of the wheel upon 
which said tire is mounted, said flange being 
provided with annular grooves or ridges, 
thereby forming a stepped surface, substan 
tially as described. 
- 
7o 
JAMES EYNON. 
WILLIAM D. EYNON. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
E. HAYWARD FAIRBANKS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556441.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 556,441, 
J. SEBEL. 
THILL COUPLING. 
Patented Mar, 17, 1896. 
  
ra 
WITNESSES: 
zigzag, 
22.5 
 
N 
H 2. I 
IS I y 
U 
l Z 
/MVENTOR 
f6seeAe) 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPII SEIBEL, OF ONTONAGON, MICHIGAN. 
THILL COUPLN G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,441, dated March 17, 1896. 
Application filed June 10, 1895, Serial No. 552,338, (No model.) 
55 
65 
o 
75 
95 
O 
To add, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH SEIBEL, of On 
tonagon, in the county of Ontonagon and State 
of Michigan, have invented a new and Im 
proved. Thill-Coupling, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved thill-coupling which is 
simple and durable in construction and ar 
ranged to permit of quickly, conveniently, 
and securely connecting the shafts to the axle 
or removing them therefrom. 
The invention consists principally of a hook 
On the shaft engaging a pivot-pin, and a bolt 
held to slide on the shaft and adapted to close 
the hook on the pin. The invention further 
consists of a block mounted to turn on a fixed 
pivot and adapted to be engaged by the shaft. 
The invention also consists of certain parts 
and details and combinations of the same, as 
will be fully described hereinafter and then 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is 
a side elevation of one of the shafts detached. 
Fig. 4 is a sectional side elevation of the pivot 
pin and clip supporting the same from the 
axle, and Fig. 5 is a transverse section of the 
shaft on the line 55 of Fig. 3. 
The axle A is provided with the usual clip 
B, having the forwardly-extending lugs B 
supporting a pivot-pin or bolt C on which is 
mounted to turn loosely a block D, preferably 
made triangular in cross-section, as plainly 
indicated in Fig. 4. Upon the two sides of 
this blockDisadapted to hook an inverted-V- 
shaped hook E on the shaft-iron E attached 
to the vehicle-shaft F in the usual manner by 
a clip G. 
On the clip-plate of the clip G is formed a 
guideway Gin which isfitted to slide a spring 
bolt H, formed at its inner end with a handle 
H' and at its outer end with a doubled-up por 
tion or lug H to prevent the bolt from being 
drawn out of the guideway G'. The forward 
end of the bolt H is adapted to be pushed 
outwardly by the operator after the hook E' 
is hooked upon the block D, so that the for 
ward end of the said bolt closes the lower 
open end of the hook E on the under side or 
base of the block D. (See Fig. 2.) Now it 
will be seen that when the bolt His in an open 
position, as shown in Fig. 3, the hook E' can 
be conveniently attached to or detached from 
the block D, and when the said hook is en 
gaged with the block and it is desired to lock 
the shaft in place then the operator takes 
hold of the handle H' and pushes the bolt H 
forward over the somewhat projecting base 
of the block D to securely hold the hook E' 
on the block D, as indicated in Fig. 2. Now 
as the block D is loose on the pivot-pin C the 
shaft can freely swing, with the said pivot as 
the fulcrum. 
A spring I is attached to the clip-plate of 
the clip B to engage the top of the hook E' 
whenever the shafts F are swung into an up 
permost position, so as to securely hold the 
shafts in a folded position. 
By the arrangement described the shafts 
can be readily attached or detached from the 
axle whenever it is desired. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A thill, comprising a clip adapted to be 
secured to the axle, a block rotatably held in 
the clip, a hook carried by the thill and em 
bracing the block, a clip on the thill and hav 
ing a passage extending longitudinally there 
with, and a bolt slidable through the passage 
of the clip and capable of holding the block 
in the hook, substantially as described. 
2. Athill-coupling, comprising a clip adapt 
ed to be secured to the axle and having two 
forwardly-projecting arms, an angular block 
rotatably mounted in said arms, a correspond 
ingly-shaped hook carried by the thill and 
embracing the block, a clip embracing the 
thill and holding said hook, and a bolt slid 
ably mounted in said clip and lying alongside 
of the hook and capable of holding the same 
engaged with the block, substantially as de 
scribed. 
JOSEPH SEBEL. 
Witnesses: 
W. WoRTH WENDELL, 
THOS. N. CARMICHAEL. 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556541.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 556,541, 
Patented Mar, 17, 1896, 
FG. 
FG.E. 
ZZZ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
*zzzzzzz??? 
BS 
ZZ 
ZZZZ 
T III 
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 
FIG.3. 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
? 
-------.-- - - -% 
?Y? 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER J. JOECKEN, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE AMERICAN 
WASIIBOARD COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
WAS HBOARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,541, dated March 17, 1896. 
Application filed February 26, 1895, Serial No. 539,737. (No model.) 
2O claimed. 
To all whom it nay conce77. 
Beit known that I, PETER J. JOECKEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cleve 
land, in the county of Cuyahoga and State of 
5 Ohio, have invented or discovered certain new 
and useful Improvements in Washboards, of 
which improvements the following is a speci 
fication. 
The invention described herein relates to 
IO certain improvements in Washboards wherein 
provision is made by means of a movable 
protector for the formation, in connection 
With the brand-board, of a soap box or recep 
tacle in such relation to the rubbing face or 
I5 faces that the soap will be protected, as well 
as the clothes of the operator. 
In general terms the invention consists in 
the construction and combination substan 
tially as hereinafter more fully described and 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a view 
in side elevation of a washboard having my 
improvement applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a 
sectional elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a 
view similar to Fig. 2, showing a modification 
in the lock for the protector. Figs. 4 and 5 
are sectional elevations showing the applica 
tion of the improvement to double-faced 
Washboards. Fig. 6 is a view similar to Fig. 
4, showing the protectors provided with side 
pieces, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of 
the folding protectors, showing the construc 
tion of the trunnions at the ends thereof. 
The Washboard is formed as usual, consist 
ing of the head-piece 1, cross-bar 2, side bars 
3, rubbing-face 4, and brand-board 5. The 
protector 6 is provided at its inner corners 
with trunnions adapted to fit in suitable 
Sockets formed in the side bars and located 
at such a distance from the head-piece as 
will permit of the protector being folded up 
against the brand-board and when adjusted 
to position for protector use Will form, in 
connection with the brand-board, a soap box 
or receptacle. The protector is held in op 
erative position to form the Soap-box and 
perform its function as a protector by means 
of a spring 7 attached to the frame of the 
board in such manner that its free end Will 
25 
35 
7? 
bear upon the protector When turned down 
and prevent its being turned up, and can be 
pressed inwardly, so as to allow the protector 
to be folded up against the brand-board for 
transportation and storage. The protector 55 
is prevented from turning down sufficiently 
far to allow the escape of the soap from the 
receptacle by the bearing of the rear end of 
the protector against the brand-board, the 
trunnions being located a short distance from 6o 
the rear edge of the protector. 
In lieu of the means described for holding 
the protector in operative position a groove 
8 may be formed in one of the side bars in 
such position that when the protector is 65 
turned down to operative position it can be 
moved longitudinally, so that one of its edges 
will engage said groove and be held thereby 
until moved longitudinally in the opposite 
direction. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 4, show 
ing the application of my improvement to a 
double-faced washboard, two independently 
movable protectors 9 and 10 are employed. 
These protectors are provided with trunnions 75 
fitting within suitable sockets in theside bars, 
and are so arranged in relation to each other 
that their rear edges will bear one against the 
other when one of the protectors, as 9, is ad 
justed to position for protector use, and the 8o 
other protector, 10, is folded up against the 
brand-board, so that the folded protector 10 
will serve as a stop to prevent the protector 9 
from dropping down beyond operative posi 
tion. This construction will permit of both 85 
protectors being folded up against the brand 
board, one on each side thereof, but when one 
of the protectors is shifted to operative posi 
tion the other protector cannot be shifted to 
corresponding position on its side of the Wash- 9o 
board without at the same time causing the 
first protector to turn up against the brand 
board. 
The construction shown in Fig. 5 is a modi 
fication of Fig. 4 and one in which one of the 95 
protectors will serve as a brand-board while 
the other is in position for protector use. In 
this construction the protector which isfolded 
up will serve as a lock for the other protector, 
preventing its being turned down far enough ICO 
 
2 
556,541 
to permit the soap to drop out, and the pro 
tector which is in operative position will pre 
vent, by reason of its rear edge bearing 
against the lower edge of the folded protector 
below its pivotal point, the latter from being 
turned down to operative position until the 
first protector has been folded up. In this 
construction, wherein one protector operates 
as a brand-board, a stop 11 is attached to the 
under side of the head-piece to prevent the 
protectors when being folded up from pass 
ing entirely through the brand-board space. 
If desired, the protectors may be formed 
with V-shaped end pieces 12, so as to entirely 
inclose the soap, as shown in Fig. 6, in which 
case the protectors will not fold flat against 
the brand-board, but will move inwardly suf 
ficiently to permit of the soap-receptacle be 
ing protected by another washboard when 
packed for transportation. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. The combination, with a washboard, of 
a protector pivotally mounted in side bars at 
such a distance below the head-piece as to 
form, in conjunction with the brand-board, a 
receptacle for the soap above the protector, 
and to be capable of being folded into the 
brand-board space, and av stop formed by the 
brand-board for holding the protector above 
I. ? 
25. 
the rubbing-face in position for use, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with a double-faced 
washboard, of two pivotally-mounted protec 
tors arranged to form a receptacle for soap 
in connection with the brand-board, when 
shifted to position of use above the rubbing 
faces, said protectors being arranged in such 
relation to each other that one protector will 
be held in operative position by the other 
protector, Substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination in a double-faced wash 
board, of two pivotally-mounted protectors 
arranged to be adjusted to position for pro 
tector use above the rubbing-faces, and, when 
SO adjusted, to form, in connection with the 
brand-board, a Soap box or receptacle, and to 
be folded into the brand-board space, said 
protectors being so arranged with relation to 
each other, as to lock each other, the one in 
operative position and the other in its folded 
position, Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
45 
PETER. J. JOIECKEN. 
Witnesses : 
J. M. GORHAMI, 
I. II. TLOCKWOOD, Jr. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556641.txt	(No Model.) E. A. POR CHER & J. WINTERFLOOD 
AUTOMATIC WATER HEATING APPARATUS, 
No. 556,641. 
Patented Mar, 17, 1896. 
zy 
a SS2zz 
223 
as SSSSZ, 
6 
 
 
 
 
 
2. 
2. 2 2 3% 2 
 
2. A 
se 
f 
(r TR 
 
wif 
72sses: 
24a 32. 
%345 
Z72222222s, 
Z22222 2%:22). 
25% 772z4%ocz. 
24%. 3%. 42 
"w BGRAHAMP4ato-utho washington.ac. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMILE ALEXANDRE PORCHER, OF PARIS, FRANCE, ANI) JOSEPII WINTER 
FLOOD, OF LONDON, ENGILAND. 
AUTOMATIC WATER HEATING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,641, dated March 17, 1896. 
Application filed July 27, 1895. Serial No. 557,376, (No model.) Patented in England March 19, 1895, No. 5,746, 
--- 
25 
To all whom, it naily concern: 
Be it known that we, EMILE ALEXANDRE 
PORCHER, a citizen of the Republic of France, 
residing at 52 Rue d'Hauteville, Paris, France, 
5 and JOSEPH WINTERFLOOD, a subject of the 
Queen of Great Britain, residing at 39 Thorn 
hill Road, Bainsbury, London, England, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
lments in Automatic Water-Heating Appara 
Io tus, (patented in Great Britain, No. 5,746, 
dated March 19, 1895,) of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to an autonatic wa 
ter-heating apparatus, and has for its object 
I5 to provide improved means for obtaining a 
constant supply of heated water; and to this 
end our invention consists in the features and 
in the construction or arrangement of parts 
hereinafter described and pointed out in the 
2O claims following the description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawing, form 
ing a part of this specification, which illus 
trates a vertical central section of our in 
proved device. 
Referring to said drawing, the letter Ain 
dicates an outer casing, and B a cistern ar 
ranged in the upper portion thereof. 
C is a float arranged in the cistern B and 
connected to one end of a pivoted bell-crank 
3o lever c, which is connected at its other end to 
the stem of a reciprocating valve D that con 
trols the outlet of a service-pipe E. Leading 
from the outlet end of the service-pipe E is a 
pipe G, that communicates at its lower end 
35 with a cylinder II, in which latter is arranged 
a piston J, the stem V of which carries at its 
lower end a valve W, that controls the pas 
Sage in a gas-supply pipe X for Supplying gas 
to a burner Yarranged beneath the casing A. 
4o The gas-supply pipe X is also provided with 
a stop-cock g adapted to be operated by hand. 
A spring is employed to normally hold the 
valve W to its seat. A flexible tube e sur 
rounds the piston-stem V and is attached at 
45 its upper end to the collar of the piston J and 
at its lower end to a plug e' inserted in the 
lower end of the cylinder H, the said tube 
operating to prevent the escape of gas into 
the cylinder H. 
5o Arranged upon the upper end of the cylin 
der II is a bulb K, that communicates with 
the space between the outer casing A and an 
inner casing L, said space communicating by 
an overflow with circular depending vessels 
MM and two boxes NN, which are connected 55 
by a cross-pipe P. Each of the boxes N is 
provided with a baffle-plate Q to check a sud 
den inrush of Water into the boxes, as will 
more fully hereinafter appear. An inner ves 
sel R. communicates with one of the boxes N 6o 
by a pipe S and is provided at its lower end 
With a draw-off cock T. The water enter's 
from the service-pipe E through the pipe G, 
raises the piston J and thence passes into the 
space between the outer casing, A, and inner 65 
casing, L, into the vessels M, boxes N and 
inner vessel, R. A branch pipe Z leads from 
the draw-off pipe of the vessel R to a valve 
casing b, which in turn communicates by 
means of a pipe F with the cistern B. A pipe 7o 
c" also communicates with the valve-casingb 
and leads off to a point, remote from or at a 
higher level than the heater. 
In the valve-casing l is arranged a three 
way valve C, which is adapted to put the 75 
pipes Z and F in communication or to cut off 
the pipe F and place the pipe c' in communi 
cation with the pipe Z. 
The lower part of the casing L terminates 
in a cone-shaped barrell having a contracted So 
neck i for concentrating the heat from the 
burner Y lindel' the bottom of the vessel R. 
The heated products thence spread outwardly 
and in ascending heat the vessels M M, as 
well as the vertical sides of the vessel R and 85 
the vertical walls of the casing L, and thence, 
after striking the bottoms of the boxes N N 
and the connecting-pipe P, the fumes pass 
out by the fluef into the atmosphere. 
condensation of the vessels M M and central 
vessel R into the trough l, from which it is 
conducted off by the pipe in. 
The operation of our improved apparatus 
is as follows: Let it be assumed that all the 95 
vessels and their connections are filled with 
water to the normal level. The float C will 
then be in its elevated position and will hold 
the valve D closed against its seat, cutting 
off the pressure from the service-pipe E. Ioo 
Under these conditions the valve W will be 
held to its seat, cutting off the supply of gas 
The letter k indicates a pipe for leading the 9o 
 
2 
556,641 
; 
: 
: 
; 
: 
: 
O 
I5. 
from the burner Y. If now water be drawn 
from the vessel R., water will flow from the 
cistern B through the pipes F and Z to take 
the place of the water withdrawn, upon which 
5 the float C will fall and open the valve Dand 
permit a fresh supply of water to flow from 
The water flows down 
the service-pipe E. 
the pipe Ginto the cylinder II, lifts the pis 
ton J and flows into the inner vessels and 
their connections. The piston.J. will remain 
in its lifted position until the water regains 
its normal level, when the float C will again 
raise and close the valve D, cutting off the 
pressure from the service-pipe E, upon which 
the piston will be forced down, closing the 
piston is raised by the 
valve W. When the 
inflowing water, the valve W is raised, per 
mitting a flow of gas to the burner Y to heat 
the water that is cooled by the inflowing Sup 
ply, and when the supply ceases said valve 
Wautomatically closes and shuts off the sup 
: 
ply of gas. 
In practice a small auxiliary burner is kept 
constantly burning to ignite the burner Y; 
but as such an arrangement forms no part of 
our invention and is well known in the art, 
we have not deemed it necessary to show or 
particularly describe the same. . 
. 
. 
For the purpose of permitting water to be 
drawn from the heater at a point below or 
remote from the same we provide a pipe U 
it that leads from the discharge-pipe of the ves 
sel R to the desired point. 
. 
By turning the cocka in the proper direc 
tion water may be conducted to a higher level 
through the pipe c'. 
Constructed as above described the appara 
tus is relieved from all strain of the pressure 
of a head of water, as the inlet-Water can only 
flow in when the float lowers to open the valve 
D, as when the water is being drawn off from 
the vessel R. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim is 
1. In a Water-heating apparatus the com 
bination with a reservoir and a gas-burner 
arranged beneath the same, of a service-pipe, 
a valve for controlling the same, a cistern 
connected with the reservoir, a float-valve 
arranged in said cistern and operating said 
valve, a cylinder communicating with the 
reservoir, a pipe leading from the service 
pipe to said cylinder, a gas-supplypipe lead 
ing to the burner, and a piston arranged in 
said cylinder and operating a valve control 
ling the gas-supply pipe, whereby when water 
is withdrawn from the reservoir the float in 
iii. 
45 
55 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
the cistern opens the service-pipe and the 
pressure of the inflowing water opens the gas 
valve and furnishes gas to the burner, sub-so 
stantially as described. . 
2. In a Water-heating apparatus, the GOlal 
bination with a reservoir and a gas-burner 
arranged beneath the same, of a service-pipe, 
a valve for controlling the same, a discharge 
pipe for said reservoir having a stop-cock, a 
cistern, a pipe leading from said cistern it 
the discharge pipe, a float-valve arranged i 
the cistern and operating the said valve, a 
cylinder communicating with the reservoir, a 
pipe leading from the service-pipe to sai 
cylinder, a gas-supply pipe leading to th 
burner, and a piston arranged in said cylin 
S. 
cistern opens the service-pipe and the press 
ure of the inflowing Water opens the gas-valve 
and furnishes gas to the burner, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a Water-heating apparatus, the com 
bination with a reservoir and a gas-burne' 
arranged beneath the same, of a service-pipe, 
a valve for controlling the same, a discharge 
pipe for said reservoir having a stop-cock, 
, all 
cistern, a pipe leading from said discharge 
pipe to a point above the level of the heater, 
a branch pipe connecting said last-named 
pipe. With the cistern, a three-Way cock al 
ranged at the junction of said branch pip 
and the pipe leading from the discharge-pipe, 
a pipe leading from the discharge-pipe to a 
point below the heater, a float-valve arranged 
in the cistern and operating the service-pipe . 
. 
. 
valve, a cylinder communicating with the 5 
reservoir, a pipe leading from the service 
pipe to said cylinder, a gas-supply pipe lead 
ing to the burner, and a piston arranged in 
the cylinder and operating a valve controlling 
the gas-supply pipe, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In witness whereof we have hereto signed 
our names in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
EMILE ALEXANDRE PORCER. 
JOSEPH WINTEREFLOOD. 
Witnesses to the signature of Emile Alex 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
OO 
andre Porcher: 
CLYDE SHROPSHIRE, 
A. J. HERON. 
terflood: 
ARTHUR SAINSBURY, 
GEORGE ELVART. 
Witnesses to the signature of Joseph Win 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556742.txt	( No Model.) 
No. 556,742, 
 
C. B. EASTY. 
TRACE FASTENER, 
Patented Mar, 24, 1896. 
Spe 
N 
712 Czged as es. 
($27.64.2/ 
se-to-e-N 
- Z 7 vert (op. 
G2a4. (a &6. 
(24'?, Av6 
A. a-Zozza/ 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIIARLES B. EASTY, OF GLEN WILLE, OHIO. 
TRACE. FASTEN E. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,742, dated March 24, 1896. 
Application filed February 27, 1895, Serial No, 539,878. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it inctly concert 
Be it known that I, CHARLES B. EASTY, of 
Glenville, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Trace-Fasteners; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it pertains to make and use 
the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
trace-fasteners for attaching the rear ends of 
traces to the whiffletree; and it consists in 
certain features of construction and combi 
nations of parts hereinafter described and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
is a top plan showing a trace-fastener em 
bodying my invention and a trace secured 
to the same. Fig. 2 is a top plan, in central 
longitudinal section, of the same. 
My improved trace-fastener comprises a 
stationary jaw A and a movable jaw B. Jaw 
A is arranged in line and integral with the 
metallic socket or body portion C of the fas 
tener, that is adapted to fit over the end of a 
whiffletree. Jaws A and B are arranged in 
the same horizontal plane, and jaw B is piv 
oted, at or near its inner end, at b, to a lug 
or ear C of body portion C, in such a manner 
as to render it capable of movement toward 
and from the stationary jaw in a horizontal 
plane. 
A spring C, composed preferably of a piece 
of stiff wire, acts in the direction to retain 
jaw B separated from jaw A. Spring C pref 
erably engages the inner side of jaw B, that 
is preferably recessed or grooved longitudi 
nally upon said side, as at B', to receive the 
spring and accommodate the closing of said 
jaw B against jaw A, as required to slip the 
trace over the outer ends of jaws A and B. 
Spring C is preferably externally screw 
threaded at its inner end, as at C", and said 
threaded end of the spring engages a corre 
spondingly screw-threaded hole a in body 
portion (t. Groove or recess B does not ex 
tend to the free end of jaw B, but is just long 
enough to accommodate the location of the 
spring in the closing movement of the jaw, 
and the end wall or shoulder B at the outer 
end of said recess or groove Yould, therefore, 
limit endwise displacement of the spring that 
25 
40 
45 
50 
would occur if spring C should turn in the 
direction required to effect said displace 
ment; and the spring is screwed into body 
portion a such a distance relative to the lo 
cation of wall or shoulder B that it (the 
spring) cannot become entirely displaced 
from the device and lost. 
A trace D is shown engaging the trace-fas 
tener. The trace has a lateral hole d to ac 
commodate the slipping of the trace over the 
outer end of the trace-fastener when jaw B 
is closed against jaw A, as shown in dotted 
lines, Fig. 1, against the action of spring C. 
The trace is slipped onto the trace-fastener, 
as already indicated, into engagement with 
a recess or depression A' formed in and trans 
versely of the forward side of stationary jaw 
A, upon which engagement jaw B will be 
separated from jaw A by the action of spring 
C, resulting in a close engagement of the for 
ward wall of hole d in the trace with the 
wall of depression A', and in a correspond 
ingly close engagement between the rear Wall 
of said hole d and rear side of jaw B. 
What I claim is 
1. A trace-fastener comprising the body 
portion (t, jaw. A rigid with the body portion 
and provided with the recess or depression 
A'; jaw B pivotally supported from the body 
portion and provided, upon its inner side, 
with the groove B' and shoulder B, and the 
spring C screwed at its inner end into the 
body portion, all arranged and operating, Sub 
stantially as shown, for the purpose specified. 
2. A trace-fastener comprising a body por 
tion a, jaw. A rigid with the body portion and 
provided with a recess or depression A; jaw 
B pivotally supported from the body portion 
and provided, upon its inner side, with a 
groove B' extending longitudinally of said 
jaw, and a piece of spring-wire C engaging 
and extending longitudinally of said groove, 
and said Wire, at its inner end, being suit 
ably secured to the body portion, all ar 
ranged and operating substantially as shown, 
for the purpose specified, 
In testimony whereof Isign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 
15th day of November, 1894. 
CHARLES 13. EASTY. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. DoRER, 
ELLA. E. TILDEN. 
75 
So 
9o 
95 
CO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556842.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 556,842, 
J. D., BROWNING, 
BUSINESS DIRECTORY, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 24, 1896. 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
46/zz-Z). Zirou'7zz/467. 
INVENTOR 
Br//zzezer (S 
AT TORNEYS. 
ANDREW -8.cRAAM. Photo-Tho-Wast gTo.c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. BROWNING, OF LOUIS WILLE, KENTUCIKY. 
BUSINESS - DIRECTORY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,842, dated IMarch 24, 1896, 
Application filed July 12, 1895. Serial No. 555,794, (No model.) 
5 
O 
3O 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN D. BROWNING, of 
Iouisville, in the county of Jefferson and 
State of Kentucky, have invented a new and 
Improved Business-Directory, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in busi 
ness-directories in general, but is more par 
ticularly an improved telephone-list and busi 
ness-directory combined. 
The invention consists in the arrangement, 
on the sheets or boards constituting the body 
of the directory and carrying the names of 
subscribe's arranged in alphabetical order, of 
the names and addresses of other parties hav 
ing various occupations, while on the margin 
of such sheets or cards are printed the titles 
which indicate such occupations and whose 
initials are the same as those of the subscrib 
el's names on the same sheet Or page thereof. 
Thus the directory affords a convenient and 
ready reference to parties carrying on differ 
ent kinds of business-such as architects, 
builders, caterers, druggists, &c.-and all ar 
ranged in the same alphabetical order as the 
names of subscribers, so that no separate 
marginal index is required. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a face view of my improved directory repre 
sented open, and thus exhibiting the first and 
second pages. Fig. 2 is a face view of a por 
tion of one of the pages on which the names 
of subscribers are arranged in numerical in 
stead of alphabetical order. Fig. 3, Sheet 2, 
is a cross-section of the directory. 
The sheets or cards (, composing the body 
of the directory are bound loosely to a back 
ing or board adapted to be suspended from a 
nail or screw set in a Wall, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The cards a are made of thin pasteboard 
and will remain flat and lie in any position 
desired, and may also be turned one way or 
the other with great facility. 
The directory is composed of two parts or 
divisions, the main part, A, having the sub 
scribers' names arranged alphabetically, while 
in the smaller part, B, they are arranged nu 
merically. I will first describe part A. On 
the margin of the cards Ct. are printed alpha 
betical indices A, B, C, &c., corresponding 
to the alphabetical order of the subscribers 
names printed on said cards in the usual way. 
Each page of the directory bears, in addie 
tion to such ordinary alphabetical name-list 
of subscribers, the names of several individu 
als, firms or corporations and a statement of 
their business, all properly spaced and visu 
ally quickly distinguishable. These are ar 
ranged by classes in alphabetical order, as 
illustrated in Fig. 1. Thus on the pages bear 
ing the subscribers surnames beginning with 
a particular letter I print in addition thereto 
other names of business men, firms, or corpo 
rations the names of whose business, occupa 
tion, or function also begin with the same 
letter as the subscribers names. For exam 
ple, on the first page, bearing names of sub 
scribers having the initial A, I print also 
in separate places or spaces the names a' of 
three parties the initials of the names of whose 
occupations also begin with said letter A. 
Thus the first of such parties is the firm of 
Alsup & Johnson, who are architects. The 
second is Doe Bros., who manufacture 
tents, awnings, &c., and the third party is 
Richard Roe, an attorney-at-law. Thead 
dresses of these several parties are given with 
On the margin of the sheet or 
the names. 
board, directly opposite the respective names 
of the said parties, are printed the titles Ar 
chitects, Awnings, and Attorney-at 
Law. 
Again, for further illustration, on the op 
posite page, bearing subscribe's names hav 
ing the initial B, appeal also the names of 
three parties the names of whose occupations 
have the same initial B. Thus the title 
** Brick-yard' appears in the margin opposite 
the name of John Cube, a brick manufac 
turer, and the title Builders' opposite the 
name of Pritchard Bros., carpenters and 
contractors,' and the title Bottling Works 
opposite the name of Bluff City Bottling Co. 
These several titles indicate the respective 
occupations of the said parties opposite which 
they are printed. 
Thus throughout the directory on each 
page appear several-say three-names of 
parties whose business occupations have the 
same initial letters as the subscribers names 
on the same page, and on the margin are the 
titles of such businesses or occupations di 
rectly opposite the names of Said parties. 
The names and titles are preferably printed 
CO 
2 
556,842 
in a color (say red) different and distinguished 
from the color (say, black) in which the sub 
Scribers names appear, so that they are 
readily distinguished and no confusion can 
arise. Besides this the subscribers names are 
printed in letters of a different size, and a 
horizontal division-line appears betweenthem 
and the names of the parties whose business 
is indicated by marginal titles. 
The marginal titles have the same initial 
as the indices' A, B, C of subscribers names, 
so that reference to the titles is easily and 
quickly made by the same means as to the 
subscribers' names. Thus any one wishing 
to find the address of an attorney-at-law refers 
first to the page bearing the alphabetical in 
dex A, and then to the marginal businessin 
dication--to wit, Attorney-at-Law -- and 
Opposite the latter he finds the desired refer 
ence, or supposing one desires to find the ad 
dress of a dentist he opens the directory at the 
letter D and then refers 
to the title Den 
tist in the margin. 
In connection with the list of telephone 
Subscribers names alphabetically arranged, 
as before described, I employ a numerical list 
In this (see Fig. 2) the numbers appropri 
B. 
ated to the different subscribers are printed 
in columns, in regular order, on successive 
pages from I upward opposite the respective 
names, and on the margin of each page are 
printed the two numbers between which the 
d 
25 
. 
. 
. 
, 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
" 
. 
. 
, 
subscribers numbers on said page are includ 
ed. Thus on page 6, Fig.2 shows names whose 
numbers range numerically from 415 ' to 5 
**626. Thus one may quickly find the name, 
of any subscriber whose number is known; or 
if a subscriber be called on the telephone dur 
ing his absence from home or place of busi 
ness and told to callup a certain number on O 
his return he may, if he desires, ascertain who 
called him by reference to the number in the 
numerical directory B. . 
, 
What I claim is- 
The improved telephone index or directory 45 
. 
; 
composed of a series of sheets, or cards, bound 
together and having printed thereon, sub 
scribers' names arranged in alphabetical 
order, and also the names and addresses of 
parties having Various occupations, and on 5 O. 
their margins a series of letters indicating 
the alphabetical order of the subscribers 
names as ordinarily printed in a directory, 
and also a series of business titles or names 
s 
of business occupations whose initials are the 35 
same as the aforesaid letters, the said titles 
being arranged directly opposite the afore 
said names and addresses of the parties whose 
occupations correspond to the titles, as shown 
and described. 
Witnesses: . 
JOHN D. BROWNING. I. 
. 
. . 
AMOS W. HART, , , , , 
JAS.A. RYAN. . 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US556942.txt	(No Model.) 
G. H. TALBOT. 
ENVELOPE SEALER. 
No. 556,942, . 
Patented Mar. 24, l896. 
 
 
 
2) 
A-3 
 
7 ty225SeS 
s Xavid & 
 
P 6.ador) - 
aw 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE IIENRY TALBOT, OF NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
ENVELOPE SEAL ER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 556,942, dated March 24, 1896. 
Application filed April 12, 1895, Serial No. 545,446. (No model.) 
TO 
40 
5 5 
Go 
To all tufton, it Tazy conce7n 
Beit known that I, GEORGE IIENRY TALBOT, 
physicialn, of Newton, Massachusetts, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Envelope-Sealers, of which the following is a 
description, referring to the accompanying 
drawings, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
The object of the invention is to produce 
an envelope-sealer which, by a simple ma 
nipulation of the envelope, may moisten the 
gum or glue upon the flap and press the flap 
firmly in position against the rear folds of the 
envelope in the usual manner, effectively 
sealing it. 
To these and certain other more incidental 
ends and purposes my invention is embodied 
in the appalatus and its several parts, con 
structed, arranged, combined and operating 
substantially in the manner hereinafter de 
scribed, illustrated and claimed. 
The invention is of so simple a nature that 
it will be readily understood from the accom 
panying drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the complete ap 
paratus; Fig. 2, a front elevation; Fig. 3, a 
vertical section of the base on the plane 33 
of Fig. 2, showing the moistening device in 
full; and Figs. 4, 5 and 6 are views illustra 
tive of the motion of an envelope in passing 
through moistener and sealer. 
Throughout the drawings like letters of ref 
erence indicate like parts. 
The apparatus is mounted upon a heavy 
cast-metal base B, the weight being designed 
to keep the apparatus in position upon the 
desk while in use. This heavy base is cast 
with the post or stud to which the presser 
device is secured and with a cup or well ID for 
the water or othel fluid, which in some in 
stances may be an adhesive solution enabling 
the device to be used with ungummed en 
velopes. 
A smooth metallic plate M of the form 
clearly shown in the figures is secured in po 
sition by a thumb-screw m, the upper or hori 
zontal portion of the plate lying from one 
sixteenth to one-eighth of an inch above the 
upper face of the base 3 and covering the 
well or cup D. Along the under face of this 
plate Missecured the upper portion of a wick 
or moistener at, of flannel or other capillary 
substance. The Yvel I) and the wick at are 
shown in dotted lines in Figs. 1 and 2. The 
free end of this wick extends down, as shown, 
into the well D, and is kept moistened by the 
liquid within the well. This wick should be 
so mounted and Secured upon the lower face 
of the plate M that the edge of the flap of the 
envelope will not catch in passing under it. 
This may be attained by either beveling the 
flannel or wick, or by sinking its edge slightly 
into a suitable depression in the lower sur 
face of the plate M. 
To the post is secured by suitable means, 
as a screw and clip or clamp F, the bar G 
carrying the upper presser-plate, P. This is 
preferably made of thin spring metal, and the 
bar G may be riveted directly to it. The bar 
G is secured in the clip F by means of a set 
screw or thumb-screw f. The under presser 
plate, P, is secured directly to the upper sur 
face of the base B and the two plates are in 
clined to each other, as clearly indicated in 
the figures, their parallel and meeting edges 
lying in an inclined position to the edge of 
the base, as shown. The pressure between 
the edges of the two plates may be adjusted 
by pressing the plates firmly together by hand, 
turning the bar G, and then setting the parts 
firmly in place, when adjusted, by means of 
the Set-screw f. The angular position of the 
bar G may be also changed by swinging the 
clip F upon its support, the screw by which 
it is held readily permitting this. 
All these details may be somewhat modi 
fied and still lie within my invention, which 
will be more fully understood from a descrip 
tion of its operation, as follows: 
The envelope is shown in three successive 
positions in Figs. 4, 5, and 6. 
It is inserted 
from the left, as shown in Fig. 4, the flap be 
ing opened slightly and lying beneath the 
moistener-plate M, while the upper face of the 
envelope lies above the plate. The envelope 
is drawn partly through in approximately the 
direction of the right-hand inclined portion of 
the flap until it reaches the position shown in 
Fig. 4 when the cornel of the envelope enter's 
between the two presser-plates PP. The en 
velope is then drawn in a curved direction to 
the position shown in Fig. 5, and by this ac 
tion the portion of the flap which passes be 
tween the pressure-plates is pressed firmly 
7 5 
So 
90 
ICC 
2 
556,942 
35 
45 
55 
1. In combination, in a sealing apparatus, 
the cup or well D, the moistening-plate M pro 
vided with a textile or other moisture-hold 
ing surface upon its under surface, a wick or 
capillary continuation of the said moisture 
holding surface extending into the said cup 
or well, and the pair of opposed spring presser 
plates, substantially as setforth, whereby the 
folded flap of an envelope may be received be 
neath the said plate M and thereafter pressed 
by the said presser-plates. 
2. In combination in a moistening device. 
the base or support B, the thin plate M lying 
above the said base with a small interval be 
tween for receiving the folded flap of an en 
velope, a well or cup D, and a capillary body 
or wick extending over and secured upon a 
portion of the lowerface of the said plate and 
terminating in the said well or cup, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. In combination, the well or cup D, the 
plate M, and the capillary body or wick 2' ex 
tending from the said well up to the lower sur 
face of the said plate and forming a facing or 
moisture-holding surface, secured thereon, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand, at Newton, Massachusetts, this 7th 
day of April, A. D. 1895. 
GEO. HENRY TALBOT, 
Witnesses: 
FRANK. I. BRIGHAM, 
N. T. SHIELDON. 
O 
against the envelope while the remainder of 
tie flap is drawn through the moistener de 
vice. In passing through the moistener de 
vice the gummed edge of the envelope comes 
directly in contact with the moist under sur 
face of the upper end of the wick or flannel 
at, and as this lies closely above the upper 
surface of the base the gum upon the envel 
ope is brought well into contact with the 
moist wick and effectively moistened. On 
passing between the presser-plates the mois 
tened gummed surface is pressed between the 
flap and the envelope and the envelopese 
curely sealed. The final position of the en 
velope as it leaves the presser-plates is shown 
in Fig. 6. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that 
my device consists of two suitably-arranged 
and co-operating devices, the one serving to 
moisten the flap of the envelope and direct 
and guide the envelope into the second or 
sealing device and the sealing device serving 
to firmly press the moistened flap into place. 
Many slight modifications may be made in 
each of these devices without greatly affect 
ing the action of the other; but the shape of 
the moistening and guiding plate M, in combi 
nation with the presser-plates P, I have found 
very successful in operation. 
IIaving now fully described the construc 
tion and operation of my invention in one of 
its preferred forms, I claim as my own and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
States as follows: 
25. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557042.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. WOOD COCK, 
ROLLER BEARING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 557,042, 
Patented Mar. 24, 1896, 
77.2. N sia 2N. 2S Ny 
2Eeeees 
Perce Bees 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4. 
a 3. 
, 
 
 
 
 
SS). 
NSE e2W2 
Szaste 
A.44kadeeee 
E A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
W. H. WOOD COCK, 
ROLLER BEARING. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 24, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 557,042. 
 
 
//reesses:- 
-A 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HUGH WOODCOCK, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
ROLLER BEARNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,042, dated March 24, 1896. 
Application filed November 8, 1895, Serial No,568,370. (No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
To all, Luhon, it mazy concern: 
Beit, known that I, WILLIAMHUGHWOOD 
COCK, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain 
and Ireland, residing at 25 Auckland Hill, 
West Norwood, London, in the county of 
Surrey, England, have invented new and use 
ful Improvements in Roller-Bearings, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to roller-bearings; 
and it consists in the novel construction and 
combination of the parts hereinafter fully de 
scribed and claimed. 
Figures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 represent an ap 
plication of my improvements to a railway 
axle-box, the left half of Fig. 1 being an end 
elevation, and the right a cross-section online 
X Y, Fig. 2, Fig. 2 being a part sectional 
elevation, Fig. 3 being a half-plan on top of 
box, Fig. 4 being a plan of cradle formed 
of one piece of metal, with the rollers and 
their bearing-pieces in position ready for in 
sertion into the casing, Fig. 5 being an end 
elevation of roller and bearing-piece, and Fig. 
6 a cross-section of same online WW, Fig. 5. 
Referring to the drawings, C is the journal 
at the end of the axle of a railway-vehicle. 
b is the sleeve of hardened steel, Wrought 
iron case-hardened, chilled cast-iron, or other 
suitable material, which is shrunk on or oth 
erwise fastened to the axle-journal a. 
cis the casing or axle-box, preferably made 
of cast-steel. 
d is the front cover of axle-box. 
e is a disk of gun-metal, phosphor-bronze, 
or other suitable material, to take the end 
pressure of the axle. 
ff are the rollers placed between the jour 
nal-sleeve and the casing. 
g is the metal cradle, and h h are the bear 
ing-pieces for the roller ends f", Fig. 2, these 
bearing-pieces being fitted into the ends 
g' and between the arms g of the cradle g. 
The roller end bearing-piecesh h are provided 
with lips or projections h' which fit over the 
endsg' of the cradleg, and by this means the 
cradleg is maintained in its concentric posi 
tion with the journal, the lateral movement 
of the cradleg with reference to the rollers f 
being prevented by the body of the bearing 
pieces h. h. 
i are projections on the sleeve to prevent 
the rollers f and cradleg from moving lat 
erally. 
What I claim is 
The combination. With a circular casing, a 
shaft journaled concentric with the said cas 
ing, and projections i connected with the said 
shaft; of a cradle provided with arms extend 
ing between its ends and bearing-pieces h. 
carried by its ends; and rollers interposed 
between the said casing and shaft, engaging 
with the said projections on the shaft, and 
journaled in the said bearing-pieces of the 
cradle, Substantially as set forth. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM HUGH WOODCOCK. 
FREDERICKPURDON, 
CHAS. ROCHE. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557143.txt	DEVICE FOR SPLITTING OR BREAKING DOWN COAL ROCK, &0. 
W. A. McKINLAY, 
( No Model.) 
No. 557, 143, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 31, 1896, 
2t2t 
A. S.Eesis sty 
WSEEAEAEEES. 
Syettes 
2622&2 
rece eaeacetter 
tip" 
:-- 
7, 
f 
Y 
O 
 
  
 
IT 
li 62/ 
- Hea. 
Ear-N- 
542, 
(w& S. N.W 
YEs N S. 
AAAAAAAAay2 Kyby Ry 
S O 
2 
2 
 
es. 2x 
33% (24 
ca. 7%. 
ANDREW 8.GRAAM. Photo-uro, WASNSION.d.c. 
(No. Model.) 
W. A. McKINLAY, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
DEVICE FOR SPLITTING OR BREAKING DOWN COAL ROCK, &c. 
No. 557,143, 
Patented Mar, 31, 1896. 
 
3. 
 S. 
SS SSSS 
se 
Sla 
Aziziti, 
SNSZZ zza27,27227 
25S 
Za Eea 
SSSSS2Eisesa 
f scalayasa 
S 
S. 
S SNN 
NC SN 
2t23 
NNNN, 
N A 75 7. A2.2 6. 
NN 
Sz1 
Nessees 
NNNNN 
Z 
AJ 
A. 
S 
22A 
w 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A. 
A 
Ai 
 
2 
m 
were 
. 
N 
. 
. 
. 
S ZzzazzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzS ta 
SR 
Nsas Sess 
iseases 
. 
S 
Svyasawwas 
- SNEC K 
- 
yS 
awaaaaa 
 
E. 
N N 
 
Psil I 
 
A. G. f. 
E. p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7 27. S 
Witnesses: 
7.62t SyriSE, 
Te?/2-4- m SS 2-74&ege 
Invent 
2. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. McKINLAY, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
DEVICE FOR SPLITTING OR BREAKING DOWN COAL ROCK, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,143, dated March 31, 1896. 
Application filed April 8, 1886, Renewed August 30, 1895, Serial No. 561,039, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whon, it inval? conce77. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMA. MCKINLAY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Den 
ver, in the county of Arapahoe and State of 
Colorado, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Devices for Splitting or 
Breaking Down Coal, Rock, &c., of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section through 
the wedging device. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
of the inner end of the wedge-rod in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a partial plan view of the outer end 
of that in Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a section on lineac 
ac, Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a central vertical section, 
and Fig. 6 is a central horizontal section, of a 
slightly-modified form, it being similar to that 
in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, except that the wedge 
rod is not provided with lateral webs. Fig. 
7 is a partial section, on a larger scale, of the 
inner wedge or rod, the outer wedges or shells, 
and the interposed rollers. Fig. 8 is a plan 
view of a Wedge-rod. Fig. 9 is a cross-section 
on the line y J, Fig. 7. 
Fig. 10 is a partial 
longitudinal section of the outer end of the 
wedge-rod and the adjacent parts in Figs. 5 
and 6. 
Fig. 11 is a rear end view of that in 
Fig. 5. 
Fig. 12 is a section on line ac' ac', Fig. 
Fig. 13 is a perspective of one of the in 
5. 
ner shells, and Fig. 14 is a perspective of the 
wedge-rod in Figs. 5 and 6. Fig. 15 is a sec 
tion on line 2 2, Fig. 5, and Fig. 16 is a sec 
tion of the four-way cock and of the connec 
tions by which the water is introduced into 
and withdrawn from the cylinders. 
I will describe one form of apparatus for 
wedging containing my improvements which 
I have selected for illustration, and will set 
forth the details thereof in order that those 
acquainted with this art mayfully understand 
the mode of construction and operating the 
same; but I wish it to be understood that in 
many respects either the whole or any or all 
of the various parts may be modified without 
departing from the essential features of the 
invention. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, A A repre 
sent cylinders adapted to hold pistons and 
piston-rods and to receive the hydraulic or 
other agent. In many respects these cylin 
ders may be of any well-known form; but I 
have constructed and arranged them in some 
respects in such a manner as to attain cer 
tain ends not attainable with those hereto 
fore in use. They have heretofore been so 
constructed and arranged that the piston-rods 
pass through the front walls of the cylinders. 
This necessitates glands or stuffing-boxes in 
said front end walls of the cylinders, and 
these are very objectionable inasmuch as the 
driving agent cannot be advantageously em 
ployed at high pressure. 
I so construct and arrange the parts that 
the driving agent can bear against the piston 
without reacting on any stuffing-box. It will 
be seen that the front enda of each cylinder 
A is tight. (See more particularly Fig. 6.) 
The piston-rods B B pass through the rear 
end walls a' of the cylinder, (see Fig. 3 and 
others,) a being the glands or stuffing-boxes. 
The piston-rods B B are united with a cross 
head or bar G, which in turn is connected, 
mediately or immediately, with the rod which 
pulls the wedge. In the machine shown in 
Figs. 1, 2, and 3 the Work of the pistons is 
effected while they move outwardly-that is, 
away from the coal-and as the hydraulic 
or other motive agent is, during this move 
ment of the pistons, between them and the 
front walls a of the cylinders, the stuffing 
boxes are relieved of pressure at the time of 
the greateststrain. If it is necessary to drive 
the pistons in an opposite direction, by means 
of the hydraulic or other motive agent, it can 
be done at a pressure so much lower that the 
presence of the stuffing-boxes on the side 
where the pressure is applied does not offer 
any difficulty. To attain this object-namely, 
the avoidance of the presence of glands or 
stuffing-boxes where the greatest pressure is 
being exerted-use can be made of devices 
considerably modified, some of which are 
illustrated in the drawings, and which will 
be more fully referred to hereinafter. 
Irepresents the rod or shank, which carries 
the wedge part I. This rod, and the Wedge 
also, may be of any suitable form, though for 
some reasons I prefer to employ one or another 
of the forms which I have shown. 
In Figs. 1, 3, and 4 the wedge and the rod 
and shank are integral or in one piece. 
i are webs or flanges projecting laterally 
from the rod and Wedge part for purposes to 
be described; but if the rod or wedge part be of 
90 
95 
ICO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
e 
557,143 
O 
35 
45 
55 
some other angular or non-circular form than 
that shown, it will attain the ends aimed at. 
The wedge part I, Figs. 1 and 2, is formed 
with the thicker parts i and the reduced parts 
i", the reducing being preferably effected by 
forming recesses i with inclined bottoms ". 
(See Figs. 1, 2, and 7.) In these recesses are 
placed antifriction-rollers . That part of 
the metal which lies between the inclined Sur 
faces i. i* is of the shape of a wedge, and when 
drawn outward it acts to expand or drive 
apart opposing wedges, plates, or shells FF, 
to be more fully described. The part I" can 
be directly connected with the cross-head G. 
or its equivalent, but under some circum 
stances I prefer to combinetherewith a sleeve 
or tube B' of such length that it shall extend 
some distance into the bed of the material, 
whereby a firmer bracing or support for the 
outwardly-projecting parts is provided, and 
whereby also other ends can be attained. The 
said tube or sleeve B can be united with a 
cross-head or its equivalent in any preferred 
way-as, for instance, by a stop G', which is 
a key or pin adapted to fit one or anotherse 
ries of apertures or recesses G'. By these the 
tube B' can be adjusted relatively to the cyl 
inder and the pistons, and when the latter 
move outward they form the tube or sleeve 
in the same direction. The wedge rod or bar 
I' is also provided with a stop, (here shown as 
a key or pin C,) against which the sleeve or 
tube B' can abut, and thus the wedge-rod I' 
will be pulled outward. The key or pin C 
can be fitted into one or another of a series 
of apertures, (see Figs. 10 and 14,) and thus 
the rod I' can be adjusted either in relation 
to the tube or sleeve B, or in relation to the 
cylinders, or the pistons, either or all. 
It will be seen that there are two cylinders 
A, one on each side of the wedge-rod. They 
may be connected together in any suitable 
Way, plates O being shown for this, one at 
each end of the cylinders. These plates are 
provided with apertures through which pass 
the Wedge-rod and the sleeve B'. When 
these latter are angular or non-circular in sec 
tion the holes in plates o should be corre 
spondingly shaped, and when the parts are 
thus constructed the cylinders and wedges 
are so held relatively to each other that neither 
shall turn. By having these plates o, one at 
each end of the cylinders, the latter are firmly 
Supported upon the wedge-l'od at their ends, 
and the rod can be drawn out in such way 
that all of the parts shall be held uniformly 
and rigidly in position. 
When employing two cylinders, I can bring 
to bear a great increase of pressure, although 
the pressure in each cylinder can, as said, be 
much increased by reason of the features 
above described-namely, the absence of 
glands or stuffing-boxes, and by not having 
the area of piston-pressure decreased by the 
presence of a piston-rod in the pressure 
chamber. 
Under some circumstances I prefer that the 
piston-rods IB should not be like the ordinary 
solid rods, but hollow and of a diameter much 
enlarged in respect to the diameter of a solid 
rod. This enlarged hollow piston not only 
provides a much firmer and steadier guide 
for the piston proper when subjected to the 
great pressure requisite in these machines, 
but it also reduces the area of the piston upon 
the returning side to such an extent that the 
hydraulic or other motive agent can be used 
for returning with a pressure equal to that 
for advancing, without danger of too great 
rapidity or force. The hollow pistons are 
shown as being closed by plugs, each having 
a transverse aperture for attaching the cross 
head G. 
The outside Wedging-pieces FF may be flat 
or of other suitable shape, and the Wedge I 
correspondingly shaped. Whatever their 
form in cross-section, the wedges F may ex 
tend continuously to the outer end of the aper 
ture in the coal, or they may be made sepa 
rately from the outer parts FF". The parts 
F' are so arranged as to provide suitable 
abutments at f', against which the cylindlers 
can press inwardly. 
The parts FF in Fig. 1 are constructed with 
inclined faces ff, which lie adjacent to the 
antifriction-rollers ii. When the wedge-rod 
is drawn outward the parts FF are forced 
apart, the result of which is to break down 
the mass of coal or other material lying below 
the wedges. 
The flanges i. i* in Fig. 1 at the inner end 
of the wedge-rod, lie between the shells F F 
and act to prevent the wedge-rod from turn 
ing, and insure that they shall exert the ex 
panding force in vertical planes. 
In mining coal the mass to be broken down 
is generally undercut, as is indicated at M'. 
Having now described in detail the con 
struction and method of operation of one form 
of mechanism embodying my improvements, 
I will call attention to the fact that various 
modifications can be made wherein some of 
the parts above described can be dispensed 
with or can be somewhat changed, without 
departing from the characteristic features of 
the invention. 
In Figs. 5 to 15, inclusive, there is shown 
a machine substantially similar to that in 
Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, the flanges 
being dis 
pensed with. In this case the rod I" and the 
sleeve B' are circular in section. Instead of 
the key G, Fig. 7, use is made of a nut at G, 
Figs. 9, 10, and 14, as an abutment for the 
cross-head G, which nut or abutment can be 
secured and adjusted by means of threads on 
the periphery of tube B'. All of the details 
shown in these views, Figs. 5 to 15, can be 
understood as being present in the construc 
tion in Fig. 1, the latter having one or two 
additional ones, as above mentioned. 
Figs. 5 and 16, taken together, indicate the 
method of supplying the water to the cylin 
ders and exhausting it therefrom, though it 
will be understood that any suitable mech 
7 O 
So 
95 
OO 
EC) 
II5 
I 25 
 
557,148 
3. 
75 
O 
anism can be substituted for that shown. The 
flexible coupling-pipe B is united to a four 
Way cock by a coupling D", the cock having 
a supply-port D and an exhaust D. did are 
pipes extending laterally from the cock and 
united with cross-pipes d', and the latter com 
municate with the ports t of the cylinders. 
When the valve of the four-way cockis turned 
into one position, water will be let onto both 
cylinders at one end, and at the same time 
the ducts will be so related that there can be 
an exhaust from the other end, and vice Versa. 
The coupling and uncoupling of the flexible 
pipe B can be speedily accomplished, and 
with these devices I can with great rapidity 
apply the pressure and cut it off without hav 
ing to wait for the generating of it. 
It will be seen that with either of the ma 
chines above described the reaction from the 
cylinders is brought to bear against the out 
side wedges or shells F, either directly or me 
diately, through the parts F. With a mech 
anism having the parts arranged in the Way 
I have devised, I obviate the necessity of 
what have been called distance-pieces, and 
can bring the front end of the engine or mo 
tor parts into direct proximity to the wall of 
the coal or material to be treated, and can 
therefore shorten up the whole apparatus, or 
can get a much longer pull relative to the 
whole length of the machine. Again, I can 
so arrange the parts that the cylinder shall 
be mainly or even entirely supported upon 
the Wedge-rod without the appliances hereto 
fore used-such as a car, column, posts, or 
their equivalent-one or the other of which is 
necessary when the aforesaid distance-pieces 
are employed. 
I am aware of the fact that use has been 
heretofore made of an outwardly-moving 
Wedge, in combination with a stationary pres 
Sure-cylinder, and an outwardly-moving pis 
ton therein; but in the earlier construction 
the cylinder and piston were so arranged in 
respect to the other parts that it was impossi 
ble to employ a Wedge-rod extending along 
the longitudinal central or axial line of the 
whole apparatus. The wedge proper was car 
ried by two eccentric bars, which have to be 
introduced into the drilled aperture and in 
Serted to the inner end thereof. Outside of 
the aperture, they were carried eccentrically 
along the sides of the cylinder and piston. 
In order to have the parts sufficiently strong, 
the cross dimensions must be large, and the 
drilling of a large aperture is necessary, as 
the aperture must be as wide as the cylinder 
and the two rods outside thereof which draw 
the Wedge. 
Moreover, this arrangement of 
the wedge-rods eccentrically along the outer 
sides of the apparatus increases largely the 
frictional resistance to the movements of the 
parts. I reduce the relative dimensions of 
the parts which enter the drill-aperture and 
provide for employing a pressure apparatus 
of any desired diameter, and also greatly re 
duce the frictional resistance of the Wedge 
rod as concerns contact with the Wall of the 
drilled aperture by placing the Wedge-rod 
and drawing it outwardly on the central lon 
gitudinal line of the aperture. Then in or 
der to provide for the central arrangement of 
the wedge-rod I arrange the pressure-exert 
ing mechanism, such as the cylinders A A, 
eccentrically-i.e., one on each side-as it is 
not practicable to pass the Wedge-rod through 
the pressure mechanism if the latter be cen 
trally placed. 
An important advantage incident to hav 
ing the wedge-rod, or the rod which exerts 
draft on the wedge, at the central longitudi 
nal line, lies in the fact that I can employ 
outside wedge-pieces as long as may be de 
sired-that is, I can apply the expanding 
pressure over as long a surface as is desired 
whereas the dimensions of the outside Wedge 
pieces and of the pressed surface are limited 
when draft-rods are carried around or along 
the sides of the apparatus. By having the 
draft-rod thus arranged, not only can the 
pressure-cylinder be made of any desired di 
ameter, but I make it possible to employ mul 
tiple cylinders, so that I provide for an indefi 
nite increase in energy and provide for Such 
increase at a much lower pressure. 
By hav 
ing two cylinders such as shown, they can be 
made of thinner and lighter parts, as the 
pressure-area is increased and the danger of 
bursting or breakage is reduced. The tube 
or sleeve B', as above said, greatly increases 
the strength of the parts on the central line 
in comparison with that attainable when use 
is made of a solid rod of the total thick 
ness of rod I and tube B'. Again, this tube 
can be so adjusted as to properly support the 
cylinders under given conditions, and at the 
same time it permits an adjustment of the 
wedge-rod independently of the relative po 
sitions of the piston, the cylinder, and the 
tube or sleeve. Therefore provision is made 
for inserting the wedge-rod a greater or less 
distance without altering the relations of the 
tube B' to the pressure-cylinder. 
What I claim is 
1. In a mechanism for wedging or breaking 
down coal or other material, the combination 
of a Wedge-rod, pistons for operating said rod, 
cylinders on either side of said rod containing 
said pistons, and an adjustable connecting 
piece for connecting together the wedge-rod 
and the pistons, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a mechanism for splitting coal the 
combination with the wedge-rod, the pistons 
and the cylinders disposed outside the longi 
tudinal lines of the said rod, of the Wedge 
pieces adapted to be forced outward by said 
wedge-rod, and the sleeve or tube supple 
mental to the cylinder, surrounding said rod 
and connected thereto and projecting into 
Ele breast of the coal, substantially as set 
Orth. 
3. The combination with the wedge-rod and 
the outside Wedges or bars, of means for mov 
ing the Wedge-rod, a tube or sleeve around 
2 ) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
95 
IOC 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
4. 
- 
557,143 
and connected to the Wedge-rod and project 
ing into the material and lying between the 
aforesaid wedges or bars, and the tube or 
sleeve F inclosing the aforesaid sleeve and 
Wedge-rod, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the wedge, the wedge 
rod, the piston which operates said rod, the 
cylinder which contains the piston, and an 
adjustable connecting device outside of the 
cylinder for connecting the piston with the 
Wedge-rod at either of several places, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of the Wedge, the wedge 
rod having a series of apertures, the piston 
which operates it, the cylinder containing 
said piston, and a connecting device outside 
of the cylinder consisting of a cross-bar and 
a key, said key being detachably inserted in 
Said apertures, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination of the wedge, the wedge 
rod having a series of apertures, a pin or key 
in one of said apertures, a sleeve on said rod 
abutting against Said pin, a cylinder, a pis 
ton in said cylinder, and a cross-bar, connect 
ing said piston and said sleeve, substantially 
as set forth. 
7. In a mechanism for splitting or wedging 
coal, the combination of a wedge-rod, piston 
heads, cylinders inclosing said piston-heads, 
IO 
25 
and a tube B' for communicating power to 3o 
the wedge-rod, said tube having a front bear 
ing and a rear bearing relatively to the cylin 
der, substantially as set forth. 
8. In a mechanism for splitting or wedging 
coal, the combination of a Wedge-rod, pistons 3 
w O 
operating said rod, cylinders containing said 
pistons, and the tube B' extending from a 
point in front of the cylinders to a point in 
rear thereof, substantially as set forth. 
9. The combination of the wedge, the wedge 
rod I", the tube B' connected with the wedge 
rod, and the piston-head D connected with 
the tube B', substantially as set forth. 
10. The combination of the wedge, the 
wedge-rod, cylinder A, piston D, tube B', and 45 
stop C, substantially as set forth. 
11. The combination of a sliding wedge 
rod, the twin cylinders A situated opposite 
each other, the plate adjoining the cylinders 
provided with apertures through which can 
pass the Wedge-rod, the cross-head G, and 
the stop C, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM A. MCKINIAY. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. SHACKELFORD, 
E. A. CLARK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557243.txt	(No Model.) 
F. THUMAN. 
GAS CENERATOR, 
5. Sheets-Sheet i, 
No. 557,243, 
Patented Mar, 3ll 896, 
 
  
R.E.E. 
gy 
2EEGE2. 
\\ EEE -7 
XEE Stitt 
Afity (& E9:2 
Wn 
X62. 
hases 
2 
 
 
7 
b-23 
  
 
SSSNS 
Zaza 
2 
y 
SS E3 Sri 
SS Sy 2 
 
 
 
-TS 
- it. 
71, f. 
Gy 
MYanyor 
222' 
(No Model.) 
No. 557,243. 
F. THUMAN. 
GAS GENERATOR. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Mar. 31, 1896. 
Eli REA 
lit. 
EEE 
Sassal 
4--. AE 
  
32 
i 
 
fMWE N7 OF 
-%.32T 
47 a- Z7. 
witnesses; 
star-- 
 
f No Model.) 
F. THUMAN. 
GAS GENERATOR, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 557,243, 
Patented Mar, 3l l896, 
witnye s sas 
6.a sn-1. 
AVMANTO 
v-374---- 
NZ. C242---- 
 
(No Model,) 
No. 557,243, 
F THUMAN. 
GAs GENERATOR, 
5 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Mar. 3l 1896. 
 
 
 
 
  
I/SEE 
3. SSS 
3raom 
a u 
SSSSSS 
-a is 
t. A 
2 3 
7 
(No Model.) 
No. 557,243, 
F. THUMAN. 
GAS GENERATOR, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Mar, 31, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
A 
 
--------- 
SU-T- 
CINIT. 
1 
: 
TT 
1 III '' 
El 
II 
2xYSSY w y s 
Wu try essa's 
26 S 7. 
- 
/ MW a ryoA: 
24 
s: 32. 
ANbREW B.GRAHAM.PhOTO-TC), WASH NGON. D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERIC THUMAN, OF EVANSVILLE, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO IIUMPHREY 
& GLASGOW, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., AND LONDON, ENGLAND. 
GAS GENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,243, dated March 31, 1896. 
Application filed December 13, 1895, Serial No. 571,989. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, FREDERIC THUMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Evansville, in the county of Wanderburg, 
in the State of Indiana, temporarily residing 
in London, England, have invented a certain 
new and useful Improvement in Gas-Gener 
ators, of which the following is a true and 
exact description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to gas-generators of 
the kind in which gas is generated by passing 
air or steam through a previously-heated mass 
of carbonaceous fuel, and it has particular 
reference to the construction of the grates 
upon which the fuel mass is supported in the 
generator and to the combination of the grates 
With the generator. 
As heretofore constructed generators of 
the kind referred to have been provided with 
cleaning-doors extending through the Walls 
above the level of the grate-surface. Usually 
these doors open both above and below the 
grate-surface, so as to give access at the same 
time to the ash-chamber and to the top of the 
grate, access to the grate being necessary for 
the introduction of the cleaning-tools and the 
extraction of the clinker and ash. Much 
trouble has been found to ensue from this 
construction, particularly in Water-gas gen 
erators, in which steam is from time to time 
reversed in its direction of passage through 
the fuel. The principal mischief is the tend 
ency to fuse away the fire-brick lining of the 
generator immediately over the cleaning 
doors, and this is caused by unequal distribu 
tion of the air-blast and steam and by the 
lodgment of fuel in the fire-door openings. 
The object of my invention is to avoid the 
mischief and mischievous tendencies men 
tioned, and this Iaccomplish by Supporting my 
grate normally substantially at the level of the 
top of the cleaning-doors, and at the same 
time so constructing the grate that it can be re 
tracted or removed in such a manner as to give 
passage through the cleaning-doors to tools 
and clinker. It is not obviously necessary to 
move the entire grate-surface for this purpose, 
and I therefore preferably construct the grate 
in sections, some of which, registering with 
The further purpose of my invention is to 55 
the cleaning-doors, can be moved in such a way 
as to give the necessary opening through the 
doors to the top of the grate. 
provide a means of removing all the clinker 
and ash from the fuel-bed with the removal 
of the least possible amount of valuable fuel 
from the generator. As grates have heretofore 
been constructed large quantities of valu- 6o 
able fuel have been allowed to fall through 
the Spaces of the grate-bars into the ash-cham 
ber during the process of cleaning the fire 
and were subsequently withdrawn with the 
ash, thus decreasing the fuel economy. To 65 
avoid this, have in my invention provided a 
means of closing at Will the spaces between 
the grate-bars of the fixed portions of the 
grate. 
This I accomplish by means of a sec 
Ondary movable grate or grid so constructed 7o 
that its bars can be made to close the spaces 
of the upper primary grate during the period 
of cleaning the fire and can be retracted dur 
ing the time that the generator is in action. 
Descriptions of this movable secondary grid 75 
are given in the accompanying specification. 
Reference is now had to the drawings, 
Which illustrate convenient and practicable 
constructions embodying my invention, and 
in which- 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the lower part 
of a Water-gas generator embodying my in 
Vention in what I believe to be its most con 
Venient form and taken on the cross-sectional 
line 22 of Fig. 2; and Fig. 2 is an elevation 85 
Of the same part of the apparatus, taken on 
the section-line 11 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view of One of the pockets B'shown 
in Figs. I and 2. Fig. 4 is an elevation, on a 
small scale, of a water-gas generator having 9o 
connections for the reversal of the steam. 
Fig. 5 is a plan view on the section-line 33 
of Fig. 6, showing the bottom of a modified 
form of apparatus; and Fig. 6, an elevation 
on the section-line 4 4 of Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a 95 
cross-section on line 6 6 of Fig. 8 of a modi 
fied construction, Fig. 8 being a section on 
line 55 of Fig. 7, and Fig. 9 a section online 
77 of Fig. 7. Fig. 10 is a section on line 99 
of Fig. 11 of another modification, Fig. 11 be- Ioo 
ing a section on line 88 of Fig. 10, and Figs. 
12 and 13 details of construction. Fig. 14 is 
8o 
25 
3 5 
45 
557,243 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
a section on line 1111 of Fig. 15 of still an 
other modification, and Fig. 15 is a section 
on line 10 10 of Fig. 14. 
A in each of the figures indicates the gen 
erator, and in Fig. 4 the generator is shown 
as provided with air-blast inlet G situated be 
low the grate, (indicated at B.) Gas-take-off 
pipes lead from both the bottom and top of 
the generator, and are indicated at J and J', 
valves K and K" being provided in each pipe 
and both pipes connecting With a common 
take-off J. 
H and H indicate steam-pipes connecting, 
respectively, with the conduits J and J'and 
by which steam can be turned in at the bot 
tom or top of the generator. This is the type 
of apparatus in which my improvements are 
peculiarly valuable; but it will be understood 
that my invention is also adapted for use and 
is to be advantageously used with water-gas 
generators in which the air and steam is 
passed through the fuel only in one direc 
tion and also with fuel-gas generators. 
FF, &c., indicate cleaning-doors leading 
into the ash-chamber below the normal work 
ing position of the grate, and which doors, as 
I have above explained, usually extend for 
some distance above the grate to give passage 
to cleaning - tools and for the removal of 
clinker and ash. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 the grate is shown as made 
up of parts or sections B, B, and B', in Figs. 
5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 as made up of the sections B 
and B', in Figs. 10 and 11 of sections B and 
B', and in Figs. 14 and 15 of sections B, B 
in all cases indicating a fixed grate-section, 
while the portions marked B', B, B, B, and 
B are movable. 
The normal level of the grate, at least when 
it registers with the cleaning-doors, and pref 
erably throughout, should in all cases be sub 
stantially that of the top of the cleaning 
doors F, so that in operation the fuel-charge 
lies above the level of the tops of these doors, 
and in order to permit of the insertion of 
cleaning-tools and the extraction of clinker 
and ash the grate must be retractable to such 
an extent as will secure an opening of the re 
quired size for this purpose through the doors 
and onto the upper surface of the grate. I 
accomplish this in the construction shown in 
Fig. 1 by making the portion of the grate in 
dicated at B fixed, while the portions register 
ing with the cleaning-door are made retract 
able. As shown, I provide supporting-bars 
CC, extending across and below the station 
alry grate-surface B, and on these bars I rest 
the inner ends of grate-sections B, the outer 
ends of which extend into the cleaning-doors 
and are supported on cross-bars E' resting on 
ledges Eformed in the sides of the door-open 
ings. Of course any convenient means may 
be employed for Supporting the outer ends of 
the sections B'; but the use of removable 
cross-bars. E", as shown, is desirable, because 
by drawing these bars backward out of the 
lugs. E the outer ends of the sections B are 
allowed to fall down, giving at Once access to 
the fire above the grate over the top of the 
sections B through the door-openings. The 
portions of the grate-sections B which extend 
within the generator-chamber are made up of 
grate-bars, as indicated at b, while the Outer 
portion, which normally lies in the door-open 
ing, should consist of a flat plate, as shown. 
When, as in the construction shown in Figs. 
1 and 2, I make the movable grate-section re 
movable, it is advisable to supply supple 
mental means for sustaining the portion of the 
charge normally lying above the removable 
sections when they are withdrawn, and what 
I may call the pockets B' are provided for 
this purpose. These pockets rest at their in 
ner ends b upon the cross-bars Cand at their 
outer ends b on cross-bars. D', supported on 
ledges D formed or fixed to the sides of the 
cleaning-doors. The bottoms b' of the box 
slope downward, as shown, and are prefer 
ably provided with slots, as shown at b, and 
with side walls, as indicated at b. It will be 
obvious, of course, that these pockets will 
support the fuel when the sections B are 
withdrawn and that cleaning-tools can read 
ily be passed through the door over the tops of 
the pockets and clinker and ash removed from 
the grate through them. After the grate has 
been properly cleaned the bars E are replaced 
in position and the sections B can then be 
driven over the bars to their normal Opera 
tive position, as indicated in Fig. 2. The 
portion of the fuel lying in the pocket below 
the removable section being withdrawn before 
the doors F are secured over the openings, it 
will be seen that the sloping bottomb' of the 
pockets will guide the front ends of the mov 
able sections to position, while the side walls 
b' will also serve as guides, preventing a lat 
eral displacement. It will also be evident 
that as the air has free access to the back of 
the pocket B", and thence to the under side of 
the movable sections B, the draft will be 
evenly distributed over the entire grate-sur 
face even if the slots b are not provided in 
the bottoms of the pockets. 
N indicates a device for closing the open 
ings through the grate while it is being 
cleaned. It is a grid-like device having open 
ings corresponding to those of the grate and 
is movable by means of a screw N' and han 
dle N upon slides, here formed on bars C, 
so as to close the grate-openings while the 
operation of cleaning is going on and so pre 
vent the loss of valuable fuel through the 
grate. 
G in all the figures indicates the air-blast 
opening below the grate, and FI in FigS. 2 
and 6 indicates a steam-pipe leading below 
the grate. 
I is an opening in the ash-chamber into 
which a gas-take-off pipe J may lead. This 
take-off would normally be higher up in the 
ash-chamber. 
Referring to Figs. 5 and 6, B, as in the 
other figures, indicates the stationary por 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
 
w 
557,243 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
tions of the grate, while Bindicates the va 
rious retractable sections of the grate. In 
this construction a single transverse support 
ing-bar C extends across the middle of the 
generator, and to it are clamped hinge-bars 
C by means of a clamp Such as shown, the 
inner ends of the section B' being hinged to 
the bars c, while their Outer ends extend into 
the cleaning-openings F. In operative posi 
tion the outer ends of the sections B are 
thrust upward against the top of the clean 
ing-door openings, as shown at the right-hand 
side of Fig. 6, Wedge-blocks L being a con 
venient means of holding them firmly in this 
position. On the withdrawal of these wedge 
blocks or other supporting devices the outer 
ends of the sections B will fall down to the 
bottom of the openings F, as indicated at the 
left-hand side of Fig. 6, permitting the entry 
of tools and the withdrawal of clinker. The 
entire section of grate on each side of the 
cross-bar C may behinged, but it will be suf 
ficient to hinge only those portions which 
register with the cleaning-doors, as shown in 
the drawings. 
M" indicates a movable cross-bar in the 
upper portion of the cleaning-door, supported 
on brackets M, the function of the bar in 
this construction being to afford a rest to the 
cleaning-tools. 
Referring next to the modification shown 
in Figs. 7, 8, and 9, it will be seen that sta 
tionary portion B of the grate is Supported 
upon tWO cross-bars C C, as in Figs. I and 2. 
The movable portions Cf. the grate (indicated 
at B B, &c.) are substantially like the simi 
lar portions indicated in Figs. 5 and 6 by the 
same letter, but rather shorter, being hinged 
to rods c Secured to the two cross-bars C. C. 
An advantage of this construction is that it 
permits of the use of the grate-closing device 
N shown and described in connection with 
Figs. 1 and 2, such a use being obviously in 
convenient, if not impracticable, with the 
construction indicated in Figs. 5 and 6. 
Referring next to the construction shown 
in Figs. 10 to 13, in this modification I have 
indicated stationary grate-sections B B con 
structed and placed with regard to the clean 
ing-doors F substantially as is usual with 
the grates heretofore used, the grate-bars be 
ing supported on a central cross-bar Cupon 
a flange extending out from the body of the 
generator and indicated at C, while the por 
tions extending into the cleaning-bars are 
supported on cross-bars C. The advantage of 
my invention is imparted to this construction 
of grate by the use in connection with it of re 
tractable portions BB, &c., which are thrust 
in through the openings Fover the top of the 
grate-bars, forming in themselves at their 
outer ends a supplemental series of grate 
bars which incline upward from the level of 
the stationary portion of the grate to the top 
of the cleaning-bars, as shown in the draw 
ings. While I much prefer to raise the whole 
level of the grate to the top of the cleaning 
bars, the use of these retractable grate-sec 
tions B permits the advantage of my inven 
tion to be secured in great measure without 
changing existing apparatus. 
Obviously the use of the unbroken station 
ary grate-surface permits of extended use of 
the grate-closing deviceN, which in this con 
struction can practically close the entire 
grate, the sliding grid being here shown as 
supported on cross-bars C. C. 
In Figs. 14 and 15I have shown still another 
modification embodying my invention, the 
grate-surface being here divided into two sec 
tions BB, each supported upon cross-bars 
C, which in turn rest upon the top of ver 
tically-movable supports indicated at OO 
and here constituting piston-rods extending 
into the cylinders P and provided with pis 
tons situated inside of the cylinders, Pindi 
cating conduits through which fluid under 
pressure is introduced into the cylinders or 
permitted to flow out therefrom, with the re 
sult of either raising or lowering the grate 
section resting on the rod Obelonging to the 
cylinder which is in operation. In the lower 
position, as shown at the right-hand side of 
Fig. 15, the grate-section is, lowered to the 
bottom of the cleaning-bar F, and a cross-bar 
S may be conveniently supplied for sustain 
ing the weight of the grate-bar section at that 
point. On the left-hand side of Fig. 15 the 
grate-bar section B is shown as elevated to 
the top of the cleaning-opening, and in order 
to support it there independently of the pres 
sure in the cylinder P, I have shown cross 
bars R resting at one end of the bottom of 
the cleaning-bar F and at the other end in 
slots Q', formed in a cross-bar Q, which lies 
across the center of the generator between 
the two grate-sections BB. Any other suit 
able means can be employed for lowering or 
lifting the portions of this form, such as steam 
power, screws, or a combination of levers. In 
this modification of my invention it is ob 
vious that the closing device previously re 
ferred to as N will not be necessary, as the 
grate or portions of the grate lowered to be 
cleaned will rest substantially upon the bot 
tom of the ash-chamber, thus making it im 
possible for any of the fuel to fall through 
the bars. It offers the advantage of allowing 
one section of the grate to be lowered at a 
time. Thus the inner portion of the lowered 
section is as accessible for the purpose of re 
moving clinker as the Outer portion adjacent 
to the cleaning-doors. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In combination with a gas-generator hav 
ing cleaning-doors as F, a grate situated in 
said generator and having the portions of its 
surface which correspond with the cleaning 
openings normally flush with the tops thereof 
but retractable therefrom in order to give ac 
cess to the top of the grate through said clean 
ing-openings. 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
557,243 
to be removed and inserted through the clean 
ing-doors and pockets Bhaving inclined bot 
toms b' extending up to or near the level of 
the fixed grate-section, situated below said 
sections B and adapted to support the fuel 
when said sections are Withdrawn. 
9. In combination with a water-gas gener 
ator having cleaning-doors as F, a grate-sec 
tion B supported at or about the level of the 
tops of the doors, grate-sections B adapted 
to be removed and inserted through the clean 
ing-doors, and pockets Bhaving inclined bot 
toms b' extending up to or near the level of 
the fixed grate-section, and side walls bex 
tending to or about the same level. 
10. In combination with a water-gas gener 
ator having cleaning-doors as F, a grate-sec 
tion B supported at or about the level of the 
tops of the doors, grate-sections B adapted 
to be removed and inserted through the clean 
ing-doors, removable supports as E' adapted 
to support the rear of the sections B* and 
pockets as B' adapted to support and guide 
to position the inner ends of said sections. 
11. In combination. With a Water-gas gener 
ator having a grate and cleaning-doors F for 
the removal of clinker and ash from the top 
of said grate, a movable grid situated below 
the grate and adapted to open or close the 
grate-openings at Will. 
12. In combination with a gas-generator 
having cleaning-doors as F, a grate situated 
in said generator and having the portions of 
its surface which correspond with the clean 
ing-openings normally flush with the tops 
thereof but retractable therefrom in order to 
give access to the top of the grate through 
said cleaning-openings, and a movable grid 
situated beneath all or a portion of the grate 
whereby the grate-openings can be opened or 
closed at will. 
London, December 2, 1895. 
EREDERICTEIUMAN. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM SKEATE, 
A. W. LOVELL. 
55 
75 
85 
2. In combination with a gas-generator hav 
ing cleaning-doors F, a grate normally Sup 
ported at or about the level of the tops of 
said doors and arranged to be retractable be 
low the level of the door-tops in order to give 
passage to cleaning-tools and clinker. 
3. In combination with a gas-generator hav 
ing cleaning-doors F, a grate normally sup 
ported at or about the level of the tops of 
said doors and having sections thereofretract 
able as described, to give passage to cleaning 
tools and clinker between the grate and the 
tops of the doors. 
4. In combination with a gas-generator hav 
ing cleaning-doors F, a grate normally sup 
ported at or about the level of the tops of 
said doors and having retractable sections, 
the inner ends of which are sustained at said 
level by fixed supports, and removable Sup 
ports for the outer ends of saidsections where 
by said outer ends can be dropped at will to 
a lower level. 
5. In combination with a Water-gas gener 
ator having cleaning-doors as F, a grate hav 
ing a fixed portion B supported at or about 
the level of the tops of the doors and movable 
portions registering with the doors and capa 
ble of being retracted to admit the withdrawal 
of clinker from the grate. 
6. In combination with a water-gas gener 
ator having cleaning-doors as F, a grate-sec 
tion B supported at or about the level of the 
tops of the doors and grate-sectionsB adapted 
to be removed and inserted through the clean 
ing-doors. 
7. In combination with a water-gas gener 
ator having cleaning-doors as F, a grate-sec 
tion B supported at or about the level of the 
tops of the doors, grate-sections B adapted 
to be removed and inserted through the clean 
ing-doors, and pockets B' situated below said 
sections B and adapted to support the fuel 
when said sections are withdrawn. 
8. In combination with a Water-gas gener 
ator having cleaning-doors as F, a grate-sec 
tion B supported at or about the level of the 
tops of the doors, grate-sections B adapted 
C) 
25 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557347.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. STIMS ON. 
SAFETY PIN, 
No. 557,347, 
Patented Mar, 31, 1896. 
{ 
yet. 
34-4 (24-y 27. 
4 (3 & 4. 
A man E. 
7-y an -OZZ7725 (2/2/ 
Y -ee ATTORNEY. 
Andrew B.GRAHAM.PHOTO-LITHO.WASHINGTON.d.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. STIMSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SAFETY PIN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,347, dated March 31, 1896. 
Application filed January 28, 1896, Serial No. 577,124, (No model.) 
55. 
O 
To all, Luhon it may concern. 
bowed side arms D D connected at one end of 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. STIMSON, a 
the frame and disunited and hooked at the 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
opposite end, as and for the purpose herein 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
after described. 
have invented a new and useful Safety-Pin, 
E is a loop formed in the lower end of the 
of Which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
frame, as shown in Fig. 1. 
act specification. 
F is a loop formed at the blunt end of the 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
pin B and linked through said loop E. The 
Safety-pins, bag-fasteners, and the like; and 
disunited extremities of the bowed side arms 
it consists in the novel mechanical construc 
D D are provided with hooks G. G., so that 
tion and arrangement of parts hereinafter 
in operation, when the pin B has been 
fully described. 
thrust through the material of the garment 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
or article to be secured, as shown in Fig. 1, 
Safety-pin which is particularly well adapted 
the disunited end of one side arm D may be 
for general use, simple in construction, and 
hooked around one side of the pin near its 
which, when in operation, cannot become ac 
point, as shown. The disunited end of the 
cidentally disengaged by reason of the unique 
other side arm D is then moved toward the 
arrangement of the parts, which securely re 
parts thus assembled and hooked around the 
tain both ends of the pin proper. 
opposite side of the pin. 
In addition to the present numerous uses 
From the above it will be seen that the 
to which safety-pins are commonly appro 
blunt end of the pin is held in the frame per 
priated this device may be used for fasten 
manently, while the opposite end, when in 
ing bags, blankets, ladies belts, and in gen 
operation, is held in an equally secure man 
eral may be appropriated to a class of work 
ner by means of the hooks at the extremities 
ordinarily too heavy for the safety-pin com 
of the bowed side arms, said hooks grasping 
monly in use and in which an extra degree 
the pin from opposite sides, thus completely 
of security is particularly to be desired. 
encircling said pin and preventing its disen 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
gagement until the proper time. 
panying drawings, in which 
The hooks G. G. are by preference formed 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my invention in 
by right-hand turns; but it is obvious that the 
operation. Fig. 2 is a similar view of the de 
same may be both left hand, or one right and 
tached safety-pin, showing a slightly-modified 
one left, the latter being shown in Fig. 5, the 
construction. Fig. 3 is a similar view illus 
hooks being indicated by the letters G' G'. 
trating another modification. Fig. 4 is an 
The normal tendency of the disunited ends 
enlarged sectional view on line aca, Fig. 2, 
of the bowed side arms D D, by preference, 
showing in perspective the inner surfaces of 
should be to spring apart, as illustrated in the 
the upper portion of the invention illustrated 
dotted line shown in Figs. 2 and 3, so that 
in Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 5 is a similar view 
when the parts are assembled, as indicated in 
illustrating another modification. Fig. 6 is a 
the solid lines in Figs. 1, 2 and 3, the hooked 
similar view of the opposite end of the pin, 
extremities of the side arms will engage the 
the section being taken on the line if y, Fig. 3. 
pointed end of the pin from opposite sides 
Similar letters refer to similar parts. 
under constant tension. 
In Fig. 1 is illustrated one of the simplest 
If it is not desired to attach the pin B", Fig. 
and most effective forms of my... invention 
2, to the frame by the loop connections shown 
when it is desired to appropriate the same to 
in Fig. 1, it is obvious that a hinged connec 
ordinary use. In the said figure, AA repre 
tion H may be substituted. 
sent thicknesses of material pinned together. 
In Fig. 3 a modification is illustrated in 
B is a pin penetrating said material. The 
which not only is the pin B' connected to the 
said pin B is hung in a frame composed of frame by a hinged connection, but the side 
95 
75 
25 
35 
45 
2 
557,847 
arms D'D' are also hinged on a common bear 
ing with the pin B". In this case it may be 
desirable to provide a separate spring I to 
normally cause the side arms D'D' to spring 
apart, as indicated in the dotted lines in Fig. 3. 
It is obvious that it is not absolutely essen 
tial that the side arms be formed so as to nor 
mally spring apart, for the reason that the 
desired end would be accomplished in any 
event should the bulk of the material which 
lies between the sides of the pin and the ad 
jacent inner sides of the side arms be suffi 
ciently great to require the bowed side arms 
to be sprung together in order to hook the 
disunited extremities around the pin. 
In Fig. 3, instead of forming the hooks G* 
G' by simply bending the wire side arms, the 
ends Of the same are first flattened and then 
bent, and may engage the pin at points di 
rectly opposite or at points above and below, 
as indicated in said figure, the outer bend 
protecting the point of the pin. 
In Figs. 1 and 2, J is an additional bend ex 
tending over and protecting the point of the 
pin B; but it is obvious that any equivalent 
means may be substituted to accomplish the 
Same end. 
It is apparent that in carrying out my in 
Vention some changes in the particular con 
struction shown and described may be made. 
For instance, instead of wire the article may 
be formed of sheet metal and provided with 
any suitable ornamentation or design, and I 
Would therefore have it understood that I do 
not limit myself to the specific form shown, 
but hold myself at liberty to make such 
changes as are fairly within the spirit and 
scope of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
d. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A safety-pin comprising side arms con 
Inected together at one end, and a centrally 
arranged pin member between said side arms, 
and independent means at the free end of 
each of said side arms for detachably engag 
ing the free end of said pin. 
2. A safety-pin comprising spring side arms 
connected together at one end and a centrally 
arranged pin member between said side arms, 
and independent means at the free end of 
each of said side arms for detachably engag 
ing the free end of said pin, substantially as 
described. 
3. A safety-pin comprising side arms con 
nected together at one end and a centrally 
arranged pin member hinged between said 
side arms, and independent means at the free 
end of each of said side arms for detachably 
engaging the end of said pin, substantially as 
described. 
4. Asafety-pin comprising side armshinged 
together at one end, and a centrally-arranged 
pin member hinged between said side arms, 
and independent means at the free end of 
each of said side arms for detachably engag 
ing the free end of said pin, substantially as 
described. 
5. Asafety-pin comprising spling side arms 
hinged together at one end, and a centrally 
arranged pin member hinged between said 
side arms, and independent means at the free 
end of each of said side arms for detachably 
engaging the free end of said pin. 
WILLIAM II. STIMSON. 
7 O 
Witnesses: 
R. C. MITCHELL, 
J. S. OSWALD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557447.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F. STEWARD 
BUTT ADJUSTER FOR GRAIN BINDERS, 
No. 557,447, 
Patented Mar. 31, 1896, 
 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.?oro-Trewston.c. : 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J O LIN F. STEWARD OF CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS. 
BUTT. ADJUSTER FOR GRAN-BINDERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,447, dated March 31, 1896. 
Application filed June 10, 1895, Serial No. 552,245. (No model.) 
O 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN F. STEWARD, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Butt-Adjusters for Grain 
Binders, of which the following is a full de 
scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation showing as 
much of an automatic grain-binder as is nec 
essary to describe my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view; Fig. 3, a sectional elevation on the 
line 33 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a sectional view 
on the line 4 4 of Fig. 2. 
My invention relates particularly to the 
butt-adjuster extension of the kind shown in 
a patent granted to me February 20, 1883, and 
numbered 272,598, and this invention may be 
considered as an improvement upon the de 
vice shown in the above-mentioned patent. 
D is the binder attachment, which may be 
of any of the well-known kinds, and is shown 
as having packers D' carried upon the packer 
shaftDin the usual manner, the said packers 
operating to pack the grain against the re 
sistant F. The butt-adjuster A is located 
upon the front edge of the binder-deck d and 
is supported upon a bracket A", which is se 
cured to the harvester-frame, parts of which, 
A*, are shown. It is driven in the usual man 
ner from the harvester-gearing and is adapted 
to be swung, upon the shaft of its driving 
roller as an axis, fore and aft for the purpose 
of securing central binding, and to be held 
in various positions of adjustment by means 
of the usualadjuster-lever C. The said lever 
C preferably terminates in a casting C, hav 
ing a hub c, by which it is pivoted upon the 
adjuster, and having an extension b', upon 
which is pivoted the butt-adjuster extension 
B, the office of which is the same as the office 
of the extension shown in the above-men 
tioned patent-namely, to provide a surface 
against which the butts of the straws of the 
forming gavel may accumulate in order that 
a square end may be given to the bundle. 
Heretofore, and especially when aggressive 
lugs are used, straws and Weeds are carried 
in between the adjuster and the extension, 
as shown in Fig. 2, and accumulate there in 
certain conditions to an extent sufficient to 
make the adjuster-canvas slip. By so pivot 
ing the extension, as at b, that it can be swung 
away from the adjuster by the accumulations 
spoken of above the slipping of the adjuster 
canvas can be overcome. Again, when the 
adjuster extension is so pivoted the accumu 
lations can be carried away by each bundle 
when being discharged. By these means an 
adjuster with more aggressive lugs (such as 
those a shown in the drawings) can be used, 
and the adjuster can be driven at a slower 
rate of speed, which is very desirable, thereby 
rendering the said adjuster more effective in 
its operations, and the difficulty caused by 
the lugs carrying in short straws and trash is 
overcome, because everybundle discharged is 
thus allowed to carry with it the accumula 
tion made during the forming of that bundle, 
and the parts are thus always kept clear of 
trash, short straws, grass, &c. 
Gravity is found sufficient to return the 
plate B to position after being raised when 
the pivot is placed as shown. Any force that 
is the equivalent of gravity may be depended 
upon to bring the plate into position. 
The preferred method of pivoting the ex 
tension upon the lever Cis shown in the draw 
ings, where the pivot b may be simply a rivet 
through the vertical flangeb' and the said ex 
tension B, the said flange having a broad face 
to hold the said extension in its proper posi 
tion. A ribb' upon the lever C serves as a 
stop to prevent the board B from Swinging 
toward the adjuster when in its normal posi 
tion. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Tetters Patent, is 
1. In a grain-binder the combination. With 
a traveling butt-moving device adapted to be 
adjusted fore and aftat its lower end relative 
to the line of advance of the harvesting-ma 
chine, a loosely-pivoted board Blocated ad 
jacent to the butt-moving device and extend 
ing stubbleward, said board so supported as 
to be capable of movement away from the end 
of such butt-moving device, and thereby pre 
vent straws of grain from choking the space 
between the said butt-moving mechanism and 
said board substantially as described. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOC 
2 
557,447 
2. The combination of the butt-moving anism by a substantially horizontal axis sub 
mechanism A, the board B and the connect- stantially as described. 
ing mechanism C'; said mechanism loosely 
pivoted to the butt-moving device by an axis 
5 vertical to the plane of adjustment of the said 
butt-moving device, and the extension B 
loosely pivoted to the said connecting mech- 
CECIL. N. SMITH, 
ARTHUR JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
JOIN F. STEWARD. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557547.txt	(No Model.) 
W. BRANDT. 
SHUTTLE FOR SEWING MACHINES 
No. 557,547, 
Patented Apr. 7, 1896. 
 
 
// AES5 
2 
2 
2 
 
& 2 
2 
s 
: 
S 
S. 
4 
a. 
 6 
32 2 
 
N. 
N& 
N. 
: 
N 
WITNESSES: 
- 6-6 2% 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM photo-urho.washingtol.0C 
 
INVENTOR: 
"362 
uses 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM BRANDT, OF ELIZABETH, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
SINGER MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF NEW JERSEY. 
SHUTTLE FOR SEWN GMACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,547, dated April 7, 1896. 
Application filed July 15, 1895, Serial No. 555,985, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM BRANDT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Eliza 
beth, in the county of Union and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Sewing-Machine Shuttles, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had thereinto the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in the sewing-machine shuttle covered by 
United States Patent No. 435,924, dated Sep 
tember 9, 1890. In the shuttle shown by said 
patent the bobbin-case is locked to a pin or 
stud on the shuttle by a spring-pressed slide, 
and to remove the bobbin-case from the shut 
tle said bobbin-case is seized between the 
thumb and finger nails of the operator, SO 
that pressure on said slide against the stress 
of its spring will release it from engagement 
with the said stud or pin, and then the bob 
bin-case, held by the thumb and finger nails, 
can be withdrawn from the shuttle; but when 
the shuttle is in the machine, and particu 
larly if the nails of the operator be very short, 
more or less difficulty has been experienced 
in removing these bobbin - cases from the 
shuttles, and this difficulty I have obviated 
by providing a small lever or pivoted latch, 
having a portion constructed and arranged 
to engage a fixed part of the bobbin-case, so 
that when the free end of said ever or latch 
(which is readily engaged by the finger of 
the operator) is lifted or swung outward said 
slide will be forced out of locking engage 
ment with the shuttle pin or stud, and the 
said lever or latch will then serve as a han 
dle by which the bobbin-case can be conven 
iently removed from the shuttle and by which 
it can be held while the bobbin is being re 
moved Or inserted. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a face view of 
a shuttle embodying my invention. Figs. 2 
and 3 are sections of the same on line 23 Of 
Fig. 1, the lever or latch being lifted in Fig. 
3 to show the slide disengaged from the pin 
Fig. 4 is a detail view 
or stud of the shuttle. 
of the slide. 
A denotes the shuttle provided with the 
pin or stud b, having a reduced portion or 
neck formed by an annular groove in said 
pin or stud, and beyond said neck is a head 
b', the outer surface of which is rounded. 
B is the bobbin-case having a central sleeve 
fitting over the pin b of the shuttle and hav 
ing in its outer face an undercut recess re 
ceiving a locking-slide c and a lever or latch 
d, which may be pivoted to said slide by be 
ing hooked thereto and which has adjacent 
to its pivot a small projection or portion d", 
which enters a slot or recessbin the bobbin 
case. The slide c has an openinge of proper 
size to admit of the easy passage of the head 
b' of the pin b, said opening being made 
Smaller at One end, So as to cause said slide 
to engage the neck or reduced part of the 
said pin when the slide is forced forward into 
locking position by the spring g, which is 
housed in a recess in the shuttle and which 
presses against a lugf on said slide. 
When the bobbin-case is to be removed 
from the shuttle, the operator, by the pres 
sure of the finger on the free end of the latch 
or lever d, turns the latter outward or up 
ward to the position shown in Fig. 3, and the 
part d of said latch or lever bearing against 
the inner wall of the slot b forces the slide 
backward against the stress of the spring g 
and brings the larger part of the opening e 
in said slide into register with the head b' of 
the pin b, so that the bobbin-case is now free 
to be removed from the shuttle, the latch or 
lever d serving as a handleby which the said 
bobbin-case may be conveniently pulled out 
and held. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Tetters Pat 
ent 
1. The combination. With a sewing-machine 
shuttle provided. With a pin or stud, of a bob 
bin-case having a slide, a Spring which forces 
said slide into engagement with said pin or 
stud to lock said bobbin-case to the shuttle, 
and a lever or pivoted latch which is oper 
atively connected with said slide and which 
serves, when lifted, to disengage the latter 
from said pin or stud and thus permit said 
bobbin-case to be removed from the shuttle. 
2. The combination with the shuttle A 
having the pint, of the bobbin-case having a 
55 
75 
95 
Od 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
557,547 
gagement with said pin, said latch or lever Io 
also serving as a handle for said bobbin-case. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM BRANDT. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP DIEHL, 
JOSEPH F. JAQUITH. 
recess in its outer face and provided with a 
sleeve loosely fitting said pin, the spring 
pressed slide c housed in said recess and 
adapted to engage said pin to lock the bob 
bin-case to the shuttle, and the latch or lever 
d and having a portion d' received in a re 
cess in the bobbin-case and serving, when 
said latch or lever is lifted or turned out 
ward, to force said slide out of locking en 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557647.txt	(No Model.) 
R. L. BOULTER. 
BICYCLE BOAT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet l. 
 
 
 
6 ?????? ?. 
torgey. 
????? 
YYCLL0 LLL0YDS LLLLLSLLLLLSLELLLLLLLLSS 
(No Model.) 
No. 557,647. 
 
R., L. BOULTER, 
BICYCLE BOAT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 7, 1896. 
R., L. BOULTER. 
BICYCLE BOAT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 7, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 557,647, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROYAL L. BOULTER, OF GRAND FORKS, NORTH DAKOTA. 
B|CYCLE-BOAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,647, dated April 7, 1896. 
Application filed September 21, 1895, Serial No. 563,164, (No model.) 
I. ? 
To all. It'/?07?, it ??? ??? ??/*?: 
Be it known that I, ROYAL L. BOUILTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Grand 
Forks, in the county of Grand Forks and State 
of North Dakota, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Bicycle-Boats; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as Will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the samme. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
an improved bicycle-boat. 
To this end my invention consists of the 
novel features of construction hereinafter de 
scribed, and defined in the claims. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, wherein, like letters and 
numerals referring to like parts throughout 
the Severall yie WS 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved boat. With some parts broken away. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view with some parts shown in 
horizontal section and othel's broken away. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical section on the line acac of 
Fig. 2, looking toward the front of the boat. 
Fig. 4 is a skeleton view, chiefly in section, in 
a plane through the crank-shaft and the pad 
dle-shaft bearings, with some parts broken 
away and others removed. Fig. 5 is a detail 
showing connection of a frame to one of the 
boats; and Fig. 6 is a detail, partly in section, 
showing connection for adjusting the paddle 
wheel shaft in respect to the frame. 
The numeral 1 represents a pair of boats, 
which are preferably of the canoe type. 
The numerals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 represent 
the principal parts of the rigid or main frame. 
Of the said parts the members 2 are tubular 
pieces or rods arranged lengthwise of the 
boats 1 and secured to bed-pieces S in the 
bottoms of the said boats by means of trun 
nion-bealings (t, fixed to the tubes, and boxes 
a', which are fixed to the bed-pieces S, as best 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 5. The bed-pieces 
S are preferably made of wood and are fixed 
to the ribs of the boat-body. The lower 
halves of the boxes C. are permanently fixed 
to the bed-boards S, and the upper halves of 
the said boxes are removably secured to the 
lower halves by screw-bolts a, or in any other 
suitable way. The trunnion-pieces C. are set 
into the ends of the tubes 2 in any suitable 
way. The frame-pieces 3 are composed of 
tubular rods bent into yoke-like form, with 
their vertical sections extending downward 
into the boats and brazed fast to the bottom 
tubes 2, as shown, so as to be rigid therewith. 
The frame members 4 are composed of tubes 
which have their lower ends brazed fast to 
the horizontal sections of the yoke-like pieces 
3 and converge to a junction with the cap 5 
at their upper ends, to which caps the upper 
ends of the said tubes 4 are brazed or other 
wise made rigid there with. The caps 5 are 
hollow and serve to afford seats for the ends 
of the backbone or top piece 6, which is pref 
erably composed of wood, and is secured to 
the caps 5 by bolts a, or in any other suitable 
way. The frame member 7 is preferably a 
wooden bar extending centrally between the 
boats and supported by stirrups 9, fixed to 
the horizontal sections of the frame members 
3. The said bar 7 may also be braced in any 
suitable way by means, (not shown,) in addi 
tion to the stirrups 9, for rendering the same 
perfectly rigid with the other parts of the 
main frame. The vertical sections of the 
yokes 3 are braced by diagonal stays 10, which 
connect the same to the bottom tubes 2, as 
best shown in Fig. 1. The horizontal and 
vertieal sections are also braced by the stays 
11, connecting the two sections near their cor 
ners, as best shown in Figs. 1 and 3. 
With the construction above described it is 
obvious that the parts marked with the nu 
merals 2 to 11, inclusive, constitute a rigid 
frame, which is supported by the boats 1, and 
to which frame the said boats are independ 
ently pivoted by the parts C. C., with freedom 
for lateral rocking motion, in respect to the 
frame. 
It must be noted that the pivotal connec 
tions between the boats and the frame Sulp 
ported thereby are made at points below the 
centers of buoyancy of the said boats. This 
feature of construction is of the UtmOst im 
portance, as in virtue of the same, the weight 
from the frame being thereby applied to said 
boats below their said centers of buoyancy, 
said boats will under the action of their own 
buoyancy seek and tend to remainin upright 
positions. In case the boats were pivoted to 
the frame at points above their centers of 
So 
9 O 
95 
IOC 
2 
557,647 
I. ? 
2 ? 
45 
55 
75 
So 
9 O 
buoyancy it would require auxiliary devices 
to prevent said boats from turning upside 
down. It is also obvious that by the removal 
of the upper halves of the boxes Cl' the frame 
and the boats may be readily separated at will. 
On the backbone or upper frame-bar 6 is 
adjustably mounted a rider's seat 12, which 
is securable in any desired vertical adjust 
ment by clamping-screw Ct. On the lower 
bar 7, in proper position in respect to the seat 
12, is properly mounted the crank-shaft 13 
with crank-arms 14, which have pedals 15 at 
their outer ends. The bearings for the said 
crank-shaft are afforded by the yoke or fixed 
sleeve member 16, cast integral with the plate 
17, which is bolted to the frame-piece 7. The 
said sleeve-casting 16 is provided with con 
cave flanged ends, as shown at b, which serve 
as the cups for coperation with the comes 1S 
to hold the ball-bearings 19. The cones 18 
have screw-threaded engagement with the 
crank-shaft 13 for effecting their proper ad 
justments in respect to the cups and are held 
wherever set by jam-nuts 20. 
The peripheries of the cup-flangest on the 
sleeve-casting 16 are grooved, and in the same, 
as Seats, are mounted the strap or yoke ends 
of a pair of radius bars or rods 21, which are 
connected by a cross-bar 22 and carry at their 
outer ends the paddle-wheel shaft 23, having 
fixed to its opposite ends the paddle-wheels 
24. The Outer ends of the radius-bars 21 are 
screw - threaded, as shown at l', and pass 
through enlarged holes b in a bearing-casting 
25. On the said screw-threaded portion b' of 
Said radius-bars work shouldered or stepped 
nuts 26, the stepped or reduced portions of 
which engage in the ends of the passage t and 
clamp the radius-bars to the casting 25 while 
spacing the radius-bar apart from the walls 
of the passage b in the casting. 
The castings 25 have enlarged passages to 
transversely of the passages b, through which 
passages b extends the paddle-wheel shaft 
23. The casting 25 is properly formed with 
concave surfaces b* at the ends of the pas 
sage b to form the cups for coperation with 
the cones 27 to hold the ball-bearings 28. 
The cones 27 have screw-threaded engage 
ment with the shaft 23 and may be secured, 
wherever set thereon, by jam-nuts 29. In 
this way the paddle-shaft 23 is mounted in 
ball-bearings and is vertically adjustable 
With the radius-bars 21 in the arc of a circle 
for a limited distance up and down in re 
spect to the main frame. A yoke-like hanger 
30 straddles the backbone or top bar 6 of the 
main frame, with its arms working through 
clamp-action keepers 31 on said bar and piv 
otally secured at their lower ends to the cast 
ings 25. By means of this hanger 30 and the 
clamps 31 the radius-bars 21 and the paddle 
wheel shaft 23 may be suspended from the 
??????bone 6 of the main frame at any desired 
Wel. The paddle-wheels 24 are adjustable length 
wise of the shaft 23 and securable in any de-l 
sired position thereon by means of set-screws 
32, which adjustment of the paddle-wheels 
enables them to be so set on the shaft 23 as 
to make the boats run true under the pro 
pelling action thereon. 
In respect to the details of the paddle-wheels 
24, it is probably sufficient to note that the 
paddles or blade c thereof are so set in the 
paddle-wheel rims c' that they will not carry 
the Water back upward under the movement 
of the wheel. 
On the crank-shaft 13 is fixed a sprocket 
wheel 33, connected by chain 34 with a rela 
tively small sprocket-wheel 35 on the pad 
dle-wheel shaft 23. Hence under the pedal 
ing action the paddle - wheel shaft Will be 
turned in the same direction as the crank 
shaft and will impart the same motion to the 
paddle-wheels 24. 
The rudder-blade 86 is pivoted to the rud 
der head or shaft, 37, which is mounted in the 
rear end of the bar 7, and a bearing-brace 3S 
secured thereto. The cross-arms 39 of the 
rudder are connected by cross-wires or other 
flexible connections 40 to the cross-bar or 
lower arms 41 of a steering-shaft 42, which 
is journaled in the lower frame-bar 7 and ex 
tends upward through a slot d in the upper 
frame-bar 6 and is provided at its upper end 
with handle-bars 43. A cross-bolt 44, ex 
tending through the slotted part of the top 
frame-bar 6, serves as a means to set the 
steering-shaft under sufficient friction, So as 
to remain wherever set. With this arrange 
ment of the steering mechanism, it is obvi 
ous that the rider can operate the rudder by 
manipulating the handle-bar 43 in the same 
way as the handle-bar of an ordinary bicycle. 
The boats 1 are connected by chains 45 
with the horizontal sections of the yoke-pieces 
3 of the main frame for limiting the inward 
rocking motion of the boat. The outward 
rocking motion of the boat is limited by the 
gun Wales of the boats striking the said hori 
Zontal sections of the said frame-pieces 3. 
Suitable buffers (not shown) could be pro 
vided on the said frame-pieces 3 or on the 
gun Wales of the boats to avoid injury to the 
boats when striking the said frame-pieces in 
their rocking action. 
The operation must be obvious from the 
description already given. The boats are 
properly spaced apart by the rigid or main 
frame to afford the requisite clearance be 
tween the boats for the action of the paddle 
wheels. The hanger 30 may be set to permit 
the paddle-wheels to dip in the water to any 
desired depth or to raise the same above the 
level of the water at Will. Supposing the 
boats to be in the water, the operator rides on 
the seat 12 and operates the crank-shaft with 
the pedaling action exactly in the same way 
as if riding a bicycle. Motion will thereby be 
imparted to the paddle-wheels at an increased 
speed, depending upon the relative propor 
tions of the sprocket-wheels 33 and 35. Un 
der the action of the paddle-wheels the boats 
OO 
IO 
I25 
 
557,647 
3 
5 
O 
2 ? 
2 5 
3 5 
5 5 
?? 
will be moved forward, and may be steered 
in any desired direction by the proper manip 
ulation of the rudder through the handle-bar 
43 and its connections. The rudder, however, 
will not require constant attention, inasmuch 
as the shaft 42 will be held by the clamping 
action of the bolt 44 in whatever position it 
may be set. The fact that the rudder-blade 
36 is pivoted to the rudder-head 37 permits 
the said blade to rise when meeting an obstruc 
tion, thereby adapting the same for action in 
shallow water. 
The pivotal connections of the boats to the 
main or rigid frame, for permitting the lateral 
rocking motion, is an important feature, in 
as much as it enables the boats to adapt then 
selves to the action of the Waves with little or 
no tilting motion of the main frame. 
The relative arrangement of the screw 
threaded ends of the radius-bars 21 to the 
bearing-castings 25 and the stepped nuts 26 
is an important feature, inas much as this con 
struction affords a convenient means for ad 
justing the paddle-wheel shaft 23 in respect 
to the radius-bars 21, and thereby affords a 
means of tightening or loosening the sprocket 
chain 34. 
The ball-bearings for the crank-shaft and 
the paddle-wheel shaft render the driving 
shaft comparatively free from friction, and 
therefore comparatively easy to the operator 
for any given load. 
By actual experience with this form of boat 
I have found that one person can readily pro 
pel the machine, when loaded with four per- || 
Sons in the boats besides the rider on the 
frame, at the rate of eight miles per hour in 
still water. Otherwise stated, a much larger 
load can be carried at a much higher speed 
than when the boats are manipulated by oars, 
and this machine is also much safer than an 
ordinary boat, because it is much less liable 
to be overturned by the waves. 
The machine is also comparatively cheap 
to make and has an artistic appearance. 
Having regard to the main or rigid frame 
of the machine, I preferably add to the main 
parts thereof, hitherto noted, additional parts 
consisting of the spacing gas pipes or Spools 
40 and tie-rods 47, for spacing apart and rig 
idly connecting the upper and lower frame 
beams 6 and 7, as shown in Fig. 1 of the draw 
ings. By the addition of the said spacing 
spools 46 and said tie-rods 47 the said beams 
6 and 7 are not only spaced apart and tied 
together, but are rendered rigid with each 
other and reinforced for withstanding the 
weight of the rider and the downward thrust 
on the crank-shaft under the pedaling action. 
This same result might, of course, be accom 
plished by braces otherwise constructed and 
arranged with respect to the said upper and 
lowerframe-beams 6 and 7; but the said spools 
46 and tie-rods 47 afford convenient devices 
for the purposes had in view. 
In practice the main or rigid frame would 
preferably be made of Wood, so as to have no 
sinkable material about the boat. The braces 
46 would also, preferably, be arranged diago 
nally sloping upward and outward from the 
lower beam 7 to a junction with the upper 
beam 6, and the tie-rods 47 would retain Ver 
tical positions, but be independent of the 
braces 46. This would make all parts of the 
frame coperate with a trussing action. 
It will be understood, of course, that many 
of the details of the construction of the ma 
chine herein shown and described might be 
changed without departing from the spirit of 
my invention. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is as follows: 
1. The combination with a bicycle-like 
frame and drive, of a pair of boats support 
ing and pivoted to said frame at points be 
low the centers of buoyancy of said boats, 
and one or more paddle-wheels carried by 
said frame and operated through said drive, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination with a bicycle-like 
frame and drive, of a pair of boats support 
ing and pivoted to said frame at points be 
low the centers of buoyancy of said boats, 
one or more paddle-wheels carried by said 
frame and operated through said drive, and 
a rudder on said frame with steering connec 
tions involving a handle-bar within reach of 
the rider on said frame, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination with a pair of boats, 
of a frame to which said boats are attached, 
a rider's seat and a pedal-action crank-shaft 
mounted on said frame, radius-bars pivoted 
on the fixed bearing box or yoke for the crank 
shaft, a pair of paddle-wheels on a common 
shaft mounted in the outer ends of said ra 
dius-bars, and a hanger depending from the 
frame for suspending the outer ends of said 
radius-bars and the paddle-wheels at any de 
sired height, substantially as described. 
4. In the machine substantially as de 
scribed, the combination with the crank-shaft, 
paddle-wheel shaft and sprocket and chain 
drive, of the radius-bars 21 having their in 
ner ends pivoted on the fixed bearing-yoke of 
the crank-shaft, and having screw-threaded 
portions at their outer ends, of the castings 
25 with radius-rod passages b and paddle 
wheel shaft b, at right angles to each other, 
and the nuts 26 working on the screw-threaded 
portions of said radius-bars against the op 
posite ends of the said casting 25, for adjust 
ably connecting the said radius-bars and pad 
dle-wheel shaft, whereby the chain may be 
tightened or loosened at Will, Substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ROYATL L. BOULTER. 
WWitnesses : 
TLEWIS FOSTER, 
WWINTHROP B. BOULTER. 
75 
95 
IOC 
IIC) 
II 5 
I25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557747.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. YORK, 
WEHICLE BRAKE, 
No. 557,747, 
Patented Apr. 7, 1896. 
  
I 
( Y "I He 
SOer 
aut H 
NWEATOR 
hilly 
t 
G. I = 4-2-242 vey - - 
WITNESSES: 
 
r 
S. 
32 2 aca- - - - g 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIN WESILEY YORK, OF NOLENS VILLE, TENNESSEE. 
WEHICLE - BRAKE. 
IO 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,747, dated April 7, 1896. 
Application filed December 26, 1895, Serial No. 573,263, (No model.) 
city concern: 
To C.77, Zvuot, it 
Beit known that I, JOHN WESLEY YORK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at No 
lensville, in the county of Williams and State 
of Tennessee, have invented a new and useful 
Brake for Vehicles, of which the following is 
a specification. 
Yly invention relates to improvements in 
brakes for vehicles, in which two supporting 
brackets are secured to the rear axle and two 
compensating coupling-rods are pivoted into 
the blackets at a point above the axle and 
are connected near their forward end to the 
brake-beam. A cam-shaft is journaled in 
said compensating rods in front of the brake 
beam. Said cam - shaft is provided with a 
lever by which it may be vibrated and cause 
the cams to force the brake-beam back against 
the wheels. Two springs are secured to the 
tlinder side of the brake-beam and rest with 
their free ends on top of the projecting brack 
ets. By this arrangement the brake-shoes 
are applied at some distance above the line 
of the axle center, and, by reason of the po 
Sition of the pivots of the compensating coup 
ling-rods and the said springs, the brake be 
connes automatic as Soon as the shoes come 
in contact with the wheels. I attain these 
objects and others by the mechanism illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a top view complete with the 
running-gear of a wagon and in the position 
when locked to the wheels. Fig. 2 is a side 
view of same with portion of the spokes re 
moved to better show the position of the parts. 
Fig. 3 is a front view with the front gear of 
the wagon removed. Fig. 4 is a side view of 
one of the apparatus detached from the 
wagon; and Figs. 5 and 6 are sectional end 
views of the brake-beam and cam-shaft, show 
ing the two positions of the latter when both 
in and out of action. 
Similar letters refer to similar parts through 
out the several Views. 
The lettel's A A represent the two hind 
wheels, and B the axle for the same. 
is a saddle-clip, of which there are two, 
which are secured to the axle B, as shown 
in Fig. 4. A bracket G is secured to this 
saddle by the bolts and nuts fifl land thus 
becomes rigid with the axle. There are two 
rods II II pivoted into the said saddle at N, 
which is above the axle. The other ends of 
these rods are in the form of a stirrup, into 
which are secured the eyebolts F F by the 
nuts C. b. These eyebolts pass transversely 
through the brake-beam C, which latter can 
move freely on said bolts. 
There are two springs M M secured to the 
under side of the beam C, as is clearly shown 
in Fig. 3. The free ends of these springs rest 
on the projecting ends of the brackets G. G., 
as shown, and thus supports the brake-bealm. 
There are detachable brake-shoes J J bolted 
to the ends of the beam C, and wear-plates 
R K are secured on the ends on the front side 
of the said beam, each of which is provided 
with a stop k. A brake-shaft D is journaled 
into the eyebolts, as shown, and a hand-lever 
E is rigidly secured on this shaft, and four 
cams d clij and two cam-plates LL, are secured 
on the brake-beam C, which overhang the 
said cam-shaft D. Now when the shaft D is 
vibrated by the lever and in the position as 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 6 the cams did force 
the beam C with the shoes J J up against the 
tires of the wheels AA, and the friction of 
the shoes on the wheels will carry down the 
brake-beam C and upon the Springs M. M. 
Now note the position of the pivot N of the 
rods H H and the dotted lines O O in Fig. 2, 
and it will be seen that the brake becomes at 
once automatic as soon as the brake-shoes 
come in contact with the wheels, as the Wheels 
are eccentric to the pivots N N of the con 
necting-rods H. H. Now when the lever E is 
pushed back the cams did move down and 
away from the stops k and wear-plates K, and 
the camsii come in contact with the cam 
plates L. L., and thus draw the brake-beam C. 
away from the wheel AA, as is shown in Fig. 
5, and the springs M M raise the beam up to 
its normal position, and thus allow the brake 
to be again applied at a point eccentric to the 
axis of the wheels to the pivots on which the 
brake is hinged. 
By the nuts a b the eyebolts FF can be 
shortened and the wear of the shoes J J 
taken up. 
It will be seen that this brake is not at 
tached to the body or box of the Wagon and 
can readily be removed from the Wagon by 
taking off the nuts ff from the rods H II 
 
2 
557,747 
where they connect the saddles II. The 
brackets G. G. would not be in the way to use 
the wagon without the brake. 
Having thus fully described the construc 
tion and operation of my invention, what I 
therefore claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an eccentrically-acting brake for vehi 
cles, the combination with the wheels and 
their axle, of two clip saddles or brackets rig 
idly secured to said axle and projecting for 
Ward on the inside of the wheels, a brake 
beam having two springs and supported on 
said brackets by the springs, connecting-rods 
pivoted in said brackets or saddles at a point. 
above the axle and movably connected to the 
brake-beam, and a cam-shaft having an op 
erating or hand level journaled in said rods 
and operating in conjunction with the brake 
beam, Substantially as described. 
2. In an eccentrically-acting brake for vehi 
cles, the combination with the wheels and the 
axle of the same, of two brackets rigidly con 
nected to said axle, a brake-beam having two 
springs Supporting the beam on said brack 
ets, connecting-rods passing transversely and 
loosely through said beam and having their 
rear ends pivoted into said brackets at a point 
above the axle, a cam-shaft having a hand 
lever and journaled in the forward end of said 
connecting-rods, and means connecting the 
cams of said shaft with the brake-beam and 
cause said brake to operate, substantially as 
described. 
3. In an eccentrically-acting brake for vehi 
cles, the combination with the wheels and the 
axle of said wheels, of two brackets secured 
to said axle next to the inside of said wheels, 
and projecting forward beyond the wheels, a 
brake-beam supported on said brackets on 
yielding devices, two rods having compensat 
ing devices, and passing transversely through 
said brake-beam and pivotally connected to 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
said brackets at a point above said axle, and 
a brake-operating shaft provided with cams 
operating in conjunction with said beam and 
alternately move the beam to and from the 
said wheels as said shaft is vibrated, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In an eccentrically-acting brake for vehi 
cles, the combination with the wheels and the 
axle for the same, of two brackets secured to 
said axle, a brake-beam yieldingly mounted 
On Said brackets, two rods connected to said 
beam and having their rear ends pivoted into 
Said brackets at a point above said axle, a 
cam-shaft having a hand-lever for vibrating 
it cams on said shaft and means connecting 
said cams and shaft with said connecting-rods 
and the brake-beam, whereby said beam is 
With its brake-shoes thrown in and out of con 
tact with the said wheels, as said shaft is vi 
brated, and compensating means connected 
with said rods, whereby they may be shortened 
as the brake-shoes wear down, all substan 
tially as described. 
5. The combination with the axle and the 
wheels of the same, of two clip-saddles I, sup 
porting-brackets G, secured to said saddles 
and said axle, a brake-beam C, having the 
brake-shoes J, the wear-plates K, with the 
stops k, the cam-plates L., and the supporting 
SpringSM, two compensating rods H, movably 
connected with said brake-beam and pivoted 
in said saddles or brackets at a point above 
said axle, a vibrating shaft D having a hand 
lever E, journaled into said rods in front of 
said brake-beam cams d, and ion said shaft, 
and operating in conjunction with said cams 
as said shaft is vibrated, substantially as 
shown and described. 
JOHN WESLEY YORK. 
Witnesses: 
L. W. BUFORD, 
WyI. IOUSE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557847.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAMI B. MIANN, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
D) EN TA C HAR 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,847, dated April 7, 1896. 
Application filed December ll, 1895, Serial No. 571,815, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To (t/l, it hon, it inctly concer'72: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM 13. MANN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Balti 
more, in the State of Maryland, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Den 
tal Chairs, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
elevating dental chairs, and has for its object 
to provide means in a chair of this character 
whereby a liquid, such as Water, under pres 
sure may be employed to elevate the chair 
body without exertion on the part of the op 
eratOr. 
I propose to SO embody my invention and 
combine its parts that the chair-body will be 
elevated by the operator actuating a valve 
handle in one direction, whereupon the action 
of the liquid will raise the chair-body auto 
matically, and to have the chair-body lowered 
by actuating said valve-handle in another di 
rection. As, however, the use of a single valve 
for performing both of these functions is not 
essential, I may employ two independent 
valves, one for the admission of the liquid 
and the other for exhausting the liquid. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical section of the base or pedestal of a 
chair, a head mounted on the plunger, and 
the base of the chair-seat frame carried there 
by. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the split friction 
ring which clamps the chair-seat frame to the 
plunger-head. Fig. 3 is a perspective view 
showing one of the overlapping ends of the 
clamping-ring. Fig. 4 is a side view of the 
water-relief valve. Fig. 5 show's two views 
of the inverted cap on the lower end of the 
piston. 
Fig. 6 is an inverted plan view of 
the bottom head of the cylinder and its pipe 
connections. Fig. 7 is a side view of the 
same. Fig. S is a vertical section view of the 
chair-base, illustrating a modification, parts 
being broken away in order that the figure 
may be shown within the prescribed limits on 
the drawings. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter A des 
ignates the base, which is cylindric and may 
be supported on feet or an annular rim ly, 
which forms a hollow space or chamber b' on 
the floor below it. This cylinder has vertical 
position and contains a piston C, and plunger 
F, which supports the chair-seat frame. The 
upper end of this cylinder is closed by a head 
e, which has a collar e', through which the 
plunger moves. This collar has at its upper 
end a circumferential groove e around the 
plunger. A ring e' screws into the wall of 
the collar around the groove; but as the 
threaded part of the ring is of less depth than 
the groove a space is left below the ring in 
which grease or other lubricant may be placed 
to lubricate the plunger as the latter raises 
and lowers. The lower end of the cylinder 
is closed by a head G, which is provided with 
a central concavity h and an integral bottom 
part i, extending horizontally from a point 
below said concavity, and its end project 
ing beyond the line of the cylinder-wall into 
the space b'. This part i i' contains a longi 
tudinal passage i, which opens at one end 
into the central cavity and extends to the 
said end i'. This end of the passage i has 
two side branches, and supply and exhaust 
pipes 
k", respectively, connect there with. 
Thus both the supply-water and the exhaust 
Water flow through the passage j. The sup 
ply-pipe k may lead from any source of sup 
ply-such as the water-main in cities, or a res 
ervoir elevated on the roof of a house, or oth 
el'Wise. 
A three-way valve L, in the form of a key 
plug having an angle-passage l, has a han 
dle l' at one end, which projects through an 
opening in the rim b to the exterior, where it 
is accessible to the hand or foot of the oper 
atol'. This valve has position in the end 
part i' at the intersection of the passage j 
and the two side branches which connect 
With the supply and exhaust pipes : A', so 
I that when the valve-plug is in one position 
water under pressure will pass from the sup 
ply-pipe is to the cylinder A to elevate the 
chair-body, and when the valve is in another 
position the liquid will exhaust from the cyl 
inder and discharge through the pipe l' to 
lower the chair-body, as will be readily under 
stood, and when the valve is in an interme 
diate position the water in the cylinder will 
be confined and the piston and plunger will 
be kept at the elevated position that may be 
desired. This valve therefore constitutes a 
three-way cock having two operative posi 
tions governing three passage-ways and a 
blank position in which liquid will not pass 
in either direction. 
The plunger F has a vertical groove , and 
I. ? 
2 ? 
3 5 
So 
95 
IOO 
2 
557,847 
a block, pin, or screw 7", secured to the collar 
e', projects into this groove and prevents the 
plunger from turning in the cylinder, while 
allowing it freedom to raise and lower. 
In the upper head e of the cylinder is an 
air-vent t, which allows the air in the cylin 
der to escape when the piston moves upward 
and allows air to enter when the piston moves 
downward. This vent has a hood t overit to 
prevent dust or dirt from getting into the cyl 
inder. 
A spiral spring C. is seated in the central 
concavity h of the lower cylinder-head, which 
confines it in position and serves as a cushion 
to make an easy stop when the piston is low 
ered to its limit. Another spiral spring Ct 
surrounds the plunger F above the piston C, 
and when the piston makes its upward move 
ment to its limit this spring serves as a cush 
ion to check its ascent. 
The water or other liquid is liable to leak 
up between the piston-packing and cylinder 
wall and thereby get above the piston-head, 
and this leakage will increase proportionately 
with the wear on the packing and will ac 
cumulate above the piston, so that when the 
piston is raised this water or liquid will be 
forced out through the openings or crevices in 
the top head of the cylinder and thence trickle 
down the outside onto the floor. It is im 
portant to obviate this difficulty. In Fig. 1 
I have shown one form of construction for 
overcoming this objection. The lower end of 
the plunger F screws into the piston-head C 
and projects a short distance below the same. 
The piston-head is provided with a chamber 
or cavity q around the plunger, and the top 
surface of the head inclines from the outer 
edge to the said cavity q, in order that the 
water of leakage heretofore referred to will 
drain to the said cavity. A cross-passage g' 
is in the plunger and opens at two opposite 
sides into said cavity q and is adapted to re 
ceive the Water therefrom, and said cross 
passage is also in communication with a ver 
tical port in the plunger, whereby the water 
from the opening q will first pass into the 
cross-passage and thence through the said 
port into the cylinder below the piston-head, 
where it may drain out through the passage 
j, as will now be described. 
The port 'has a check-valves in it, adapted 
to close upward and open by downward move 
ment. The stems' of this valve extends up 
Ward into the port, and a springs, bearing 
lightly on the upper end of the stem, serves 
to press the valve normally off its seat in 
order to allow the leakage-water above the 
piston-head to exhaust, as above described. 
When water or liquid under pressure is ad 
mitted into the cylinder to raise the piston, 
the pressure of said liquid keeps the valves 
seated, so that no liquid can pass up that 
way; but when that pressure is removed, as 
in the case when the liquid has been exhausted 
to lower the chair-body, the spring s will 
- 
force open the check-valve and allow the 
water of leakage to exhaust. It will be seen, 
therefore, that by this provision of valve the 
accumulation of liquid above the piston is 
prevented, and hence that the objection here 
tofore referred to is obviated. 
An inverted cap discrews onto the lower 
most projecting end of the plunger. This 
cap has a central opening to allow the Water 
inlet and outlet and serves to limit the down 
ward movement of the check-valve S. This 
inverted cap is provided on its bottom. With 
cross-grooves d". When the piston and plun 
ger are at the limit of their downward move 
ment, the spiral spring Ci is completely com 
pressed, the several spirals being in close con 
tact with each other. As the liquid-passage 
j opens through the lower head of the cylin 
der at the center of this spiral spring, it Will 
be seen that the liquid would be prevented 
from flowing into the cylinder-space below 
the piston by the closed coils of the Spring 
were it not for the cross-grooves d' in the in 
verted cap, through which the Water can 
readily pass. 
Fig. 6 shows a modification of the means 
for exhausting the leakage-water above the 
piston. IIere the vertical wall of the cylin 
der A at one side is provided with a vertical 
passager', whose upper end opens into the cyl 
inder and through which the leakage-Water 
exhausts when the piston-head is raised. . 
The liquid exhausted through this vertical 
passage ' discharges through a pipe r", and, 
if desired, this pipe may connect with the ex 
haust-pipe is at any point beyond the valve 
L. The plunger F is prevented from rotat 
ing by the groove n and block, pin, or screw 
n', as before described; but I have made pro 
vision for turning the base N of the chair 
body and the said body (not showm) in a hori 
Zontal plane, so as to permit the chair-body 
to be adjusted on the plunger F to suit the 
convenience of the operator and clamped in 
any desired position. This provision is shown 
in Fig. 1 and comprises a circular head V, 
provided with a circumferential flange' and 
a center opening in which the upper end of 
the plunger is rigidly secured. A chair-seat 
base N rests loosely upon and revolves on the 
circumferential flange l' of the fixed head. 
As the chair-body is to rest on this base, it 
may be turned. This chair-seat base N may 
be clamped rigidly to the head in order to 
hold the chair in any desired position by 
means of a split ring W. This ring is made 
of metal and is capable of springing or yield 
ing a little and has a hole v' diametrically 
opposite its split ends, through which a screw 
ac is passed to secure it to the chair-seat base 
N. The ring thus secured has its inner edge 
resting under the circumferential flange ' 
and engaging the circular surface of the fixed 
head W loosely enough to permit the chair 
seat base N to freely revolve, but yet snug 
enough to insure that a slight contraction of 
I. ? 
2 ? 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
II 5 
I 25 
 
557,847 
3. 
the ring will cause it to closely grip the said 
circular Surface of the fixed head and there 
by hold the chair-seat base immovable. 
Each end of the split ring is halved and 
one end overlaps the other, and each of said 
ends has a lateral projection it beyond the 
Outer edge of the ring, and said projections 
are Spread apart or separated by a compara 
tively narrow space f between them. By 
forcing these two projecting ends U' farther 
apart the Split ring may be made to contract, 
With the result above stated. In order to 
cause this contraction, have provided a screw 
Z, having a cone-pointed end 2' adapted to 
enter the space if and force the two ends of 
the split ring apart and thereby contract the 
ring. The screw is mounted on the chair 
Seatbase N and is turned by means of a Crank 
handle 2'. The split ring has two additional 
holes ac', larger than the screw's ac' through 
them, So as to allow for contraction of the 
split ring. These screws at are to support 
the split ring without interfering with its 
contraction and engage the chair-seat base N 
like Screw ac. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a dental chair, the combination of a 
chair-base provided with a cylinder and Sup 
ported on an annular rim forming a space or 
chamber, b', between said cylinder and the 
floor; a plunger in said cylinder and Sup 
porting the chair-body; a head closing the 
lower end of the cylinder and said head hav 
ing in its lower side an enlarged part i, which 
occupies the said space, b', and has its end, 
i", projecting laterally beyond the cylinder 
Wall and said head, and provided with a pas 
Sage, i, opening into the cylinder; a supply 
inlet at one side and an exhaust-outlet at the 
opposite side and intersecting said passage at 
the said laterally-projecting end; and a valve 
at the intersection of the said passage and 
Supply and exha,LISt and having a handle pro 
jecting through an opening in the annular 
rim to the exterior, said valve controlling all 
three passages. 
2. In a dental chair, the combination of the 
chair-base provided with a cylinder; a plun 
ger in said cylinder provided at its lower end 
With a piston-head, and said plunger support 
ing the chair-body; means to control the ad 
mission and exhaust of liquid under pressure 
to and from the said cylinder below the pis 
ton-head; a central chamber or cavity, q, on 
the top of the piston-head; a central port, I, 
in the plunger; a cross-passage, q', in the plun 
ger connecting the said cavity and central 
ports; a check-valve controlling said port; 
and an inverted cap, d, on the lower side of 
the piston serving to limit the down move 
ment Of the Check-valye. 
3. In a dental chair, the combination of a 
chair-base provided with a cylinder; a plunger 
in said cylinder and supporting the chair 
body; a head closing the lower end of the cyl 
inder and said head having on its lower side 
an enlarged part, i, with its end, i, projecting 
laterally beyond said head and provided With 
a passage, i, opening into the cylinder; a Sup 
ply-inlet at one side and an exhaust-Outlet at 
the opposite side and intersecting said pas 
sage at the said laterally-projecting end; and 
a valve at the intersection of the said passage 
and supply and exhaust, said valve control 
ling all three passages. 
4. In a dental chair, the combination of a 
chair-base provided with a cylinder; a plunger 
in said cylinder and supporting the chair 
body; a circular head rigidly mounted on the 
plunger; a chair-seat base mounted to revolve 
on said circular head; a split ring secured at 
one point to the said chair-seat base and sur 
rounding the said circular head; and means 
mounted on the chair-seat base and acting 
on the split ends of the ring to cause the con 
traction of the ring and clamp the chair-seat 
base immovably. 
5. In a dental chair, the combination of a 
chair-base provided with a cylinder; a plunger 
in said cylinder and supporting the chair 
body; a circular head rigidly mounted on the 
plunger; a chair-seat base mounted to revolve 
on said circular head; a split ring Secured at 
one point to the said chair-seat base and Sur 
rounding the circular head, the ends of Said 
ring overlapping and projecting laterally be 
yond the ring; and a screw mounted on the 
chair-seat base and provided with a cone 
pointed end to spread the Said Overlapping 
ends of the ring apart and thereby contract 
the ring and cause it to clamp the chair-seat 
i base immovably. 
6. In a dental chair, the combination of a 
chair-base provided with a cylinder having a 
bottom head with a central concavity, h. a. 
plunger and piston in said cylinder and Sup 
porting the chair-body; a spiral spring, Ct, 
seated in said concavity in the bottom head 
of the cylinder; and an inverted cap, d, on 
the end of the plunger below the piston and 
provided on its bottom surface with cross 
grooves, d", as and for the purpose described. 
7. In a dental chair, the combination of the 
chair-base provided with a cylinder; a plunger 
in said cylinder provided at its lower end with 
a piston-head, and said plunger Supporting 
the chair-body; means to control the admis 
sion and exhaust of liquid under pressure to 
and from the said cylinder below the piston 
head; a central chamber or cavity, q, On the 
top of the piston-head; a central port, , in 
the plunger; a cross-passage, q', in the plun 
ger connecting the said cavity and central 
port; and a check-valve controlling said port, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM B. MIANN. 
WWitnesses : 
C. CAILVERT HINES, 
LEE II. WAN HORN. 
O 
3O 
3 5 
40 
5 5 
?? 
75 
95 
I OG 
IO5 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US557947.txt	(No Model.) 
T. G., BENNETT, 
FORESTOCK FOR FIRE ARMS, 
No. 557,947, 
Patented Apr. 7, 1896, 
 
 
 
2ZZ 
4 NW) 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS G. BENNETT, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WINCITESTER REPEATING ARMS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
FORE - STOCK FOR FIREARMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 557,947, dated April 7, 1896. 
Application filed January 18, 1896, Serial No. 575,937, (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
To c.77 uhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS G. BENNETT, 
of New Haven, in the county of New Haven 
and State of Connecticut, have invented a new 
Improvement in Fore-Arm Stocks for Fire 
arms; and I do hereby declare the following, 
when taken in connection with the accompa 
nying drawings and the letters of reference 
marked thereon, to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the same, and which said 
drawings constitute part of this specification, 
and represent, in 
Figure 1, a view in side elevation of a gun 
provided with a fore-arm stock constructed 
in accordance with my invention; Fig. 2, a 
plan view thereof; Fig. 3, a detached view in 
inside elevation of one of the members of the 
fore-arm stock; Fig. 4, an enlarged view in 
transverse section on the line a b of Fig. 1 
through the two members of the fore-arm 
stock and barrel of the gun; Fig. 5, a similar 
view on the line cd of the same figure, show 
ing one mode of securing the rear band to the 
gun-barrel; Fig. 6, a similar view on the line 
ef of the same figure, showing one mode of 
Securing the forward band in place. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
sectional fore-arm stocks for guns. 
Heretofore sectional fore-arm stocks have 
generally consisted of an upper and a lower 
member joined in a horizontal plane-which 
is to Say, a plane passing through the arm at 
a right angle to its plane, which for conven 
ience may be called a vertical plane. The 
upper member of such a stock is compara 
tively short and virtually forms a cap fitting 
over the rear portion of the gun-barrel, while 
the lower member constitutes the main or 
body portion of the stock and extends from 
the frame of the arm forward beyond the up 
per member or cap and to a point near the 
muzzle of the gun-barrel. Such fore-arm 
stocks were fairly satisfactory in use, for the 
reason that they were applied to barrels of 
large caliber, and consequently well adapted 
to resist deflection from a right line conse 
quent upon the warping, from whatever cause, 
of the long heavy lower member or body por 
tion of the stock. With the introduction, how 
ever, of smokeless powder, and the consequent 
reduction in the caliber and weight of gun 
barrels, Sectional fore-arm stocks joined hori 
Zontally are open to the grave objection that 
the lower member is liable, when warped, to 
deflect the barrel. 
The object of my present invention is to 
produce a simple, compact, convenient, and 
effective fore-arm stock constructed with par 
ticular reference to use upon small-caliber 
Smokeless-powder guns having small and 
light barrels. 
Further objects of my invention are to pro 
duce a sectional fore-arm stock, the tendency 
of which when warped to deflect the barrel 
will be reduced to the minimum, and also to 
give a wider range in the selection of the 
Wood from which the stock is formed, as to 
quality and grain, by reducing the size and 
changing the form of the members of the 
stock. 
With these ends in view my invention 
consists in a fore-armstock having two cor 
responding or substantially corresponding 
members joined in the vertical longitudinal 
plane of the arm. 
My invention further consists in certain 
details of construction and combinations of 
parts, as will be hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
As herein shown, my improved fore-arm 
stock is composed of two corresponding mem 
bers A and A', at their rear ends joining the 
forward end of the frame B of the arm and 
at their forward ends extending nearly to the 
muzzle of the gun-barrel C, as clearly shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2. Each of these members is 
worked out from a single piece of wood, and 
when applied to the arm the joint between 
them lies in the vertical longitudinal plane 
thereof. The upper portion of the inner face 
of each member has a longitudinal groove A 
formed in it and extending throughout its 
length to adapt the member to fit around half 
of the gun-barrel. The upper edge of each 
member is constructed, as shown, With a long 
notch A, for the clearance of the rear sight D, 
which is applied to the rear end of the gun 
barrel. The rear ends of the respective mem 
bers are set into or connected with the for 
Ward end of the frame B, or held in place in 
some other effective way. As herein shown, 
the two members are clamped together and 
9 O 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
45 
SO 
---- 
- - - - - 
- 
--------- - - 
557,94? 
55 
o 
75 
So 
IO 
25 
5 
upon the gun-barrel by means of a rear band 
E and a forward band E', of which the former 
is somewhat larger than the latter. 
The band E is secured in place by means of 
a transverse screw E, mounted in the bands, 
passing through the stock and taking into a 
transverse notch e, formed in the lower face 
of the gun-barrel, as shown in Fig. 5, whereby 
the band is prevented from rotary or longi 
tudinal movement thereupon. 
If desired, the set-screw E might be re 
placed by a spring or other means of holding 
the band in place. 
The band E' is secured in place by a screw E 
passing transversely through it and through 
the two members of the fore-arm stock, but 
at a point below the plane of the lower face 
of the barrel, as shown in Fig. 6; but the 
screw E may also be replaced by a spring or 
other means of holding the band in place with 
respect to the barrel and the members of the 
stock. 
It is apparent that the two membel's may 
vary inform, according to the dictation of cir 
cumstances, and also that they may be varied 
in details of construction to correspond to 
Variations in the construction of the various 
arms to which they may be applied. I do not 
therefore hold myself to the exact construc 
tion and form shown. 
By constructing the members so that the 
joint between them lies in the vertical longi 
tudinal plane of the arm the danger of de 
flection of the barrel by the warping of the 
fore-arm stock is reduced to the minimum, 
inasmuch as the warping of the two members, 
if they should Warp, can hardly be in the 
same direction, so that the warping of one 
member will often counteract the warping of 
the other, and, furthermore, the two members 
warping independently cannot bring the same 
deflecting force upon the barrel as though 
they were in one piece. In this respect my 
fore-arm stock is a marked improvement over 
sectional fore-arm stocks of prior construc 
tion, the two members of which are joined in 
a horizontal plane, as before described. 
By constructing the fore-arm stock as de 
scribed I am also enabled to select clhoice 
5o pieces of Wood as to quality and grain, as the 
blank pieces from which the members are 
formed are smaller than the pieces ordina 
45 
35 
rily required for the construction of fore-arm 
stocks. Furthermore, the form of the mem 
bers enables them to be made comparatively 
light and compact without undue loss of 
strength. The members are conveniently ap 
plied and assembled, form a compact and ef 
fective fore-arm stock, and one of elegant and 
workmanlike appearance. I have spoken of 
forming the two members of wood, which will 
be the material generally employed, but Icon 
ceive that they might be formed of other ma 
terial-Such, for instance, as aluminium. 
In view of the changes suggested, and of 
others which may obviously be made, I would 
have it understood that I do not limit myself 
to the exact construction herein shown and 
described, but hold myself at liberty to make 
such changes as fairly fall within the spirit 
and scope of my invention. Thus it will be 
noted that in the drawings the upper edges of 
the rear ends of the two members do not quite 
come together, but leave a portion of the bar 
rel exposed between them. This gives the 
arm a finished and light appearance, and de 
tracts nothing from the serviceability of the 
fore-arm stock, inasmuch as in handling the. 
gun that particular portion of the barrel can 
not be touched by the hand. If desired, how 
ever, the edges may be brought together so 
as to form a close joint at this point. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A fore-arm stock for firearms, comprising 
two members constructed and adapted to be 
joined in the vertical longitudinal plane of 
the arm, Substantially as described. 
2. In a firearm the combination with the 
frame and barrel thereof, of a fore-arm stock 
comprising two members divided in the ver 
tical longitudinal plane of the arm, and 
adapted at their rear ends to extend upward 
over the rear end of the barrel, and means for 
holding them thereupon, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS G. BENNETT. 
DANIEL II. WEADER, 
A. W. EARLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558049.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 558,049. 
0. E. DUBOIS. 
ROPE CAMP. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 14, 1896. 
 
3vvue vitov 
cot G. Se-tee-ca. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 558,049, 
0. E. DUBOIS. 
ROPE CLAMP, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 14, 1896. 
u1 = (S N 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OTIS E. DUBOIS, OF FALL RIVER, MASSACHUSETTS, 
ROPE. CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,049, dated April 14, 1896. 
. 
Application filed May 22, 1895, Serial No. 550,245, (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OTIS E.DUBOIS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Fall 
River, in the county of Bristol and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Rope-Clamps; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. . 
My invention relates to rope-clamps, and 
especially to those which have a cam action, 
so as to tighten automatically when the rope 
is subjected to strain. 
- The object of the invention is to improve 
the construction and enable the clamp to be 
opened so as to release the rope without re 
quiring the tension to be slackened. This is 
often desirable when the rope gets jammed 
in a block or for Some other reason it becomes 
impossible to take up or slacken enough rope 
to enable the clamp to beloosened in the usual 
Tallel. 
The clamp is provided with a fixed or sta 
tionary abutment and a clamping cam or ec 
centric suitably pivoted adjacent thereto, so 
as to engage with and hold a rope when pulled 
through between these parts in one direction, 
but to release it when pulled in the other di 
rection. The cam is preferably forced by a 
spring toward the abutment and has a tail 
piece or lever, by which it can be withdrawn 
at will against the tension of the spring. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a clamp embodying myimprovements. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional plan view thereof. Fig. 
3 is a similar view showing the clamp open. 
Fig. 4 is a bottom plan view showing the spring, 
Fig. 5 is an edge view of the cam. Fig. 6 is 
a perspective view of a modification. Fig. 7 
is a sectional plan thereof, and Fig. 8 is a per 
spective view of the cam. 
The clamp has a base-plate A, on which is 
secured the stationary abutment B, which 
may have projecting arms b to confine the 
rope. Near this abutment is pivoted the cam 
C, covered by a plate or housing D, which 
may, if desired, have a cleat-like arm d. The 
Working edge of the cam is of such a shape 
as to give the best clamping effect. It may 
be long to correspond With a complementary 
abutment, as in Fig. 2, or circular, as in Fig. 
7. In any case it is hollowed somewhat to 
conform with the shape of the rope and is 
provided with teeth, such as serrations c, 
which may be armed with metal, if desired, 
when the clamp is made of Wood, by insert 
ing metal plates c' radially or thereabout to 
the edge of the cam and coinciding with the 
vertical faces of the serrations c. 
In the case of long cams, as Fig. 2, I pre 
fer to connect them pivotally with the base 
plate by means of two links E F, hinged at 
one end to the cam by pins ef and at the 
other end to the base-plate by pintles e'f'. 
This construction gives the cam a parallel 
ruler movement toward and away from the 
abutment B. One of the pins, as e, projects 
down through a slot a in the base-plate into 
a recessa'in the under side thereof, in which 
is housed a spring G, bearing against the pin 
e and acting to force the cam toward the abut 
ment. 
In order to operate the cam positively, one 
of the links, as F, has an extension or tail 
piece f* projecting out beyond the housing. 
By means of this the cam can be withdrawn 
from the abutment when desired. If it is 
stuck or clogged, a lever H can be inserted 
into holesfin the tailpiece f. 
The cam is preferably hollowed, so as to in 
close the links partially. The modification 
shown in Figs. 6, 7, and 8 has a circular 
edged cam provided with metal-faced serra 
tions and pivoted on the pin I. In the cam 
is a slot to receive the helical spring K, one 
end of which seats against the end of the slot 
and the other end against the flattened post 
L, passing through the plate D and the slot 
into the base-plate. 
The cam has a tailpiece c, which is held 
by the spring against a block d', forming one 
of the supports for the housing-plate D. . By 
pressing the tailpiece away from the block 
the cam is moved away from the abutment 
and the rope is released. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters-Pat 
ent, is 
1. A rope-clamp having its clamping-cam 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
558,049 
provided with serrations, and metallic plates 
inserted radially or thereabout and coinci 
dent with the vertical faces of said serrations, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a rope-clamp, the combination with 
a base-plate having a recess in its under side, 
and a slot communicating there with, of a 
clamping-cam connected with said base-plate 
by parallel links, the hinge-pins of which ex 
tend down into the recess, and a flat spring 
engaging with said hinge-pins to actuate the 
cam, substantially as described. 
3. In a rope-clamp, the combination with 
the base-plate, abutment and clamping-cam, 
of two links hinged at one end to the cam and 
at the other end to the base-plate, a spring 
acting to force the cam toward the abutment, 
IO 
and a tailpiece on One of said links, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In a rope-clamp, the combination with 
the base-plate A, of the abutment B, the hol 
low cam C, the housing D for the same, the 
links E, F, hinged at e,f, to the cam, and at 
e'f'' to the base-plate, the Spring G engaging 
with the pin e, and the tailpiece f having 
the holes f to receive a lever H, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
OTIS E. DUBOIS. 
Witnesses: 
ARBA. N. LINCOLN, 
CHARLES L. FOOTE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558149.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
BUNCHING ATTACHMENT FOR MOWING MACHINES. 
C. T. BOYER. 
No. 558,149. 
 
Patented Apr. 14, 1896. 
A 8 
i 
 
 
  
 
Sg 
US 
WITNESSES: 
sk, s.r.o. 4. 
e - 1. 
ser 
CSNVENTOR 
C7-a-7&es 7 Agz/ez, 
4%izi, 7.4%f 
ITORNEY, 
ANDREW B.GRAHAI1. Photo-urho.washington 
 
BUNCHING ATTACHMENT FOR MOWING MACHINES. 
 
 
WTWESSES 
/WWEAVTOR 
CZazzazes Z -2.2% elzer, 
TeRNEY. 
ApRew s.GRAHAM.PHOTO-lth OWASHINGTON.D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEST. BOYER, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR TO THE AMERI 
CAN BUNCHER MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
B UN CHING ATTACHMENT FOR MOWING-MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,149, dated April 14, 1896. 
Application filed May 9, 1895, Serial No. 548,760, (No model.) 
25 scribed and claimed. 
To all, whom it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLEST. BOYER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at In 
dianapolis, in the county of Marion and State 
5 of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Bunching Attach 
ments for Mowing-Machines, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of my said invention is to pro 
Io Wide a convenient and efficient means where 
by hay, in being cut, can be deposited in 
bunches directly from the mowing-machine 
instead of being distributed entirely over the 
surface of the field, as has been common with 
I5 ordinary mowers. This is especially useful 
in cutting clover where it is desired to save 
the seed, it being desirable, as is well known, 
to leave such clover in bunches and subject 
to the action of the Weather for a time, dur 
2O ing which period it should be disturbed as 
little as possible. 
Said invention consists in an attachment 
whereby the above object is carried out, as 
will be hereinafter more particularly de 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which are made a part hereof, and on which 
similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts, Figure 1 is a perspective view illus 
3o trating a mowing-machine in use, which is 
provided with an attachment embodying my 
said invention; Fig. 2, a top or plan view of 
said attachment, together with the cutting 
apparatus and other immediately-adjacent 
35 portions of the mowing-machine; Fig. 3, a 
perspective view of a fragment of said at 
tachment on a larger scale, illustrating the 
principal parts, the upper plate or cover of 
the frame of said attachment being removed, 
4o exposing the mechanism; Fig. 4, a longitu 
dinal sectional view on the dotted line 4 4 in 
Fig. 2, and Fig. 5 a transverse sectional view 
on the dotted line 55 in Fig. 2. 
In said drawings the portions marked. A 
45 represent the framework of the mowing-ma 
chine, B the finger-bar thereto, and C the 
frame of my improved attachment. 
The mowing-machine A and finger-bar B 
are or may be of any ordinary or desired 
So form, and will not, therefore, be further de 
scribed herein, exceptincidentially in describ 
ing my said invention. 
The frame C is hinged to the finger-bar B 
by hinges c, and is positioned directly in 
rear thereof. Mounted in bearings therein 55 
are a number of rods C, which extend to the 
rear, the direction being preferably on some 
what of an inclination toward the mowing 
machine and away from the standing grass, 
so that in manipulation, as will be presently 6o 
more fully explained, the grass which has 
been cut shall be thrown away from rather 
than against the Standing grass. At the rear 
end these rods are bent upwardly, as shown 
most plainly at c' in Fig. 5, so that in their 65 
normal position they will hold the grass from 
being pulled off by contact with the ground 
or stubble until the position is shifted and the 
bunch of cut grass thus purposely released. 
They are also preferably curved somewhat to 
from the point of bearing in the frame C to the 
point where they are bent upwardly, as just 
stated, so that, as indicated by the dotted lines 
in Fig. 2, when the upwardly-projecting ends 
are thrown down the body is thrown back 75 
slightly, thus aiding in throwing the bunch of 
cut grass away from the standing grass. At 
their forward ends these rods have cranks, as 
shown most plainly in Figs. 3 and 5, and these 
are all connected to a sliding bar C, by which, 8o 
as will be readily understood, all said rods 
may be simultaneously operated. The longi 
tudinal movement of this bar C* may be ef 
fected in any desired manner and is generally 
effected by means of a treadle, as A", oper-85 
ated by the driver. The connection may be 
in any form desired. I have shown a cord C8 
running over Suitable sheaves to said treadle 
A", the latter being mounted on the frame A 
at a suitable point for the driver to place his go 
foot thereon, as best shown in Fig. 2. A 
spring C is shown as interposed between 
shoulders on the bar C and the inner surface 
of the frame C, and said spring is of sufficient 
strength to actuate said bar C and tip the 95 
rods C connected thereto. The spring may 
of course operate in either direction, but I 
have shown it as operating to tip the rods flat, 
in the position shown by the dotted lines in 
Fig. 2, said rods being held to their other po- Ioo 
sition by the force of the driver's foot on the 
treadle. 
The top of the frame C is in the form of a 
plate C, which extends back over and covers 
 
2 
558,149 
the bearings of the rods C and the mechan 
ism by which they are operated, and is se 
cured in place by hinges c. This cover also 
serves to momentarily impede the grass as it 
falls during the time the bunches of grass are 
being discharged. Normally, while the bent 
up points care raised to their greatest height, 
as shown most plainly in Fig. 5, the cranks 
on the other ends of the rods, which are con 
nected to the bar C*, are in their lowermost 
position. The forcing of said bar Cendwise 
not only rocks the rods C", but is, through 
the instrumentality of the cranks on the ends 
of said rods, also the means of raising the 
cover C to the position shown by the dotted 
lines in Figs. 4 and 5, and said cover in this 
position forms a dam or impediment, which 
will cause the grass as it falls to pile up for 
the brief period while the rods Care rocked, 
so that their points c' lie flat. As the device 
is released and the points c' thrown up to 
their normal position the cover C falls flat 
again, as shown by the full lines in Fig. 5, 
and the grass passes on freely over it, as be 
fore, to against said bent-up points c', where 
a new bunch is formed. 
The operation is as follows: The driver 
holds his foot on the treadle A", keeping the 
rods C with their outer bent ends c' standing 
upright, as shown most plainly in Fig. 5, until 
a sufficient quantity of the grass has, in the 
operation of mowing, been thrown onto said 
rods to make the desired size of bunch. He 
then releases the pressure of his foot on said 
treadle, when said rods are thrown down to 
the position shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 
2, when the friction on the ground and stub 
ble draws the bunch off said rods and leaves 
it at the point where this operation is had. 
The rods are then thrown up to their former 
position by renewing the pressure on the 
treadle, and so on continuously as long as the 
machine is in operation or as long as it is de 
sired to perform this work. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion, what I claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a mowing-ma 
chine, of a bunching attachment secured be 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
hind the finger-bar and consisting of a suit 
able frame with a series of rods journaled 
therein and provided with cranks on their 
forward ends and bent or divergent portions 
on their rear ends, and mechanism for Oper 
ating said rods, whereby bunches of grass may 
be accumulated as said grass is cut, and then, 
by throwing the rods flat by means of said 
mechanism, discharged, substantially as Set 
forth. 
2. The combination, with a mowing-ma 
chine, of a bunching attachment consisting 
of a framework secured behind the finger-bar, 
a series of bent bars journaled in said frame 
work and extending rearwardly and at an in 
clination toward the mowing-machine struc 
ture and having upwardly-turned rear ends, 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. The combination, with a mowing-ma 
chine, of a bunching attachment secured in 
the rear of the finger-bar, and consisting of a 
framework, a series of rods journaled in said 
framework and provided with divergent ends 
at the rear and cranks at the forward ends 
thereof, a bar C to which the cranks of said 
rods are all connected, a foot-lever mounted 
on the mowing-machine, a connection between 
said foot-lever and said bar, and a spring act 
ing oppositely to the pull from said foot-lever, 
substantially as shown and described. 
4. The combination of a mowing-machine; 
and a bunching attachment, secured in the 
rear of the finger-bar, and consisting of a 
frame C, rods C" mounted therein and pro 
vided with angular ends c', a bar C connected 
to cranks on the forward ends of said rods 
whereby they are operated, and a plate C 
covering said operating mechanism, includ 
ing said bar C, and adapted to be raised by 
said mechanism as the rods C are rocked to 
deposit the bunch of grass thereon, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal, at Indianapolis, Indiana, this 
7th day of May, A. D. 1895. 
CHAS. T. BOYER. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
CHESTER BRADFORD, 
JAMES A. WALSH. 
55 
7 O 
75 
9 O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558249.txt	(No Model.) 
I, W. ALLYN. 
DEWICE FOR ATTACHINGHARNESS TO WEHICLES, 
No. 558,249. 
 
Patented Apr. 14, 1896, 
7St. N 
WITNESSES: 
aa... ". 52' 3. INVENTOR 
age. 
 
 
. 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.PHOTO-urho.washington, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC. W. ALLYN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
DEVICE FOR ATTACHING HARNESS TO VEHICLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,249, dated April 14, 1896. 
Application filed Januaryll 1893, Serial No, 575,103, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whom it nucly concern. 
Beit known that I, ISAAC W. ALLYN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
and county of Philadelphia, State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Devices for Attaching and De 
taching Horses Harness to or from Vehicles, 
which improvementis fully set forthin the fol 
lowing specification and accompanying draw 
IngS. 
My invention consists of a device for at 
taching and detaching the harness of horses 
and other animals to the shafts of a vehicle, 
avoiding the use of traces and singletrees, as 
Will be hereinafter set forth. 
Figure I represents a perspective view of 
a harness attaching and detaching device em 
bodying myinvention. Fig. 2 represents a top 
Orplan view thereof. Fig. 3 represents a side 
elevation, the parts being separated. Fig. 4 
represents a longitudinal section. Fig. 5 rep 
resents partial side elevation and partiallon 
gitudinal Section of a modification. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates the 
shaft of a vehicle, the same being formed in 
sections B C. Connected with the forward 
end of the section C is the sleeve D, which 
receives the rear end of the section B. In 
terposed between the adjacent ends of said 
Sections B and C is the spring E, whose tend 
ency is to advance the section IB or press the 
same in forward direction. 
In the front end of the sleeve D are the L 
shaped slots F, which are adapted to receive 
the pins G, which project radially from the 
section B near the end thereof, forming to 
gether a bayonet-joint, it being evident that 
When Said pins G are seated in the limbs H 
of said slots F the two sections are firmly 
coupled, as will be most clearly shown in Figs. 
1 and 4. 
Freely fitted on the sleeve D are the collars 
J J', to which is attached or with which en 
gages the Spring K, which in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 
and 4 freely encircles said sleeve D. The for 
Ward motion of the front collar J is limited 
by the pins G, and the rearward motion of the 
other collar J is limited by the pins L, which 
project from the section C of the shafts near 
the front thereof. To the collars J J' are at 
tached the straps M, which are also attached 
to the hames of the collar N or a breast-strap 
When employed. To said collars are also at 
tached the holdback or breeching strap P, the 
straps Q, which are connected with the sad 
die, and the straps R, with which the belly 
band is connected. 
It Will be seen that when the parts are in po 
sition (shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 4) the draft of 
the animal is transmitted through the harness 
to the shafts, the effect of which is evident, 
it being noticed that traces and singletrees 
are dispensed with. When, however, the ani 
mal is to be taken out of the shafts, the sec 
tions B are pushed back, so as to place the 
pins G in position, permitting said section to 
be turned, thus unlocking the bayonet-joint, 
after which the sections are drawn forward, 
and thus entirely removed from the sleeves D. 
As the pins G are on the sections B, there 
is no obstacle to the forward motions of the 
collar J and the connected parts or the rear 
Ward motions of the sleeves D with the Sec 
tions C, whereby said collars are stripped from 
said sleeves, and the harness is accordingly 
detached from the shafts. 
When the collars are reapplied to the 
sleeves D and the pins G of the section B 
interlocked with Said sleeves, the sections B 
and C are coupled or united as One, and the 
vehicle may be drawn by the animal, as be 
fore, it being noticed that the spring E pro 
vides a yielding connection for the harness 
with the shafts, so that the draft is easy and 
strain. On the parts prevented. 
In Fig. 5 I show a rubber spring K' on the 
sleeve in lieu of the coiled metal spring K 
shown in the other figures without producing 
different results. 
The pins G are made removable in cases 
where it is not desired to uncouple the sec 
tions of the shaft, in which case, when said 
pins are withdrawn, the collars J J' and their 
connections and Springs K may slip forwardly 
over the sleeves ID and front ends of the 
shafts, thus detaching the animal from the 
vehicle. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A shaft formed of separable sections, and 
provided with means for detachably connect 
ing harness there with, and means for coupling 
said sections, substantially as described. 
r 
O 
25 
35 
45 
9 O 
95 
OO 
2 
558,249 
for coupling and uncoupling the Sections, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. A shaft formed in sections, a sleeve con 
nected with one of said sections and freely re 
ceiving the end of the other section, a joint 
for locking or coupling the last-named section, 
and said sleeve, a spring interposed between 
the sections for closing said joint, a movable 
collar on said sleeve, stops on the sections of 
the shaft, and means for connecting the ad 
jacent parts of the harness with said collar, 
whereby when sections of the shaft are un 
coupled the collar and connected harness may 
be entirely removed from the other section of 
the shaft, substantially as described. 
25 
ISAAC. W. AILYN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
R. H. GRAESER. 
O 
2. A shaft, formed in sections, detachably 
connected, a sleeve on one section adapted to 
receive the end of the other section, collars 
on said sleeve, parts of harness attached to . 
said collars, and means for retaining said col 
lars on the shaft, substantially as described. 
3. A shaft provided with a detachable pin, 
a movable collar on said shaft limited by said 
pin, and harness attachments secured to said 
collar, said shaft being formed insections with 
means for coupling and uncoupling the sec 
tions, the parts being combined, substantially 
as described. 
4. A harness-attaching device consisting of 
collars movable on the shaft of a vehicle, a 
spring interposed between said collars, stops 
on the shaft for controlling said collars, and 
means for connecting the adjacent parts of 
the harness with said collars, said shaft being 
2O formed in sections and provided with means 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558349.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 558,349, 
A. BRUNKA. 
CUFF BUTTON, 
Patented Apr. 14, 1896. 
 
17WESSES; 
4%M 
efe. (e----2, 
 
/WWEW7OA 
u176-la 
BY 
We 
ATTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTON BRUNKA, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CUFF-BUTTON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,849, dated April 14, 1896, 
Application filed July 6, 1895, Serial No. 555,162, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ANTON BRUNKA, of New 
York, in the county and State of New York, 
have invented a new and Improved Cuff-But 
tion, of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description. 
This invention relates to animprovement in 
that class of cuff-buttons wherein two buttons 
proper are connected by a link or bar; and it 
has for its object to provide an improved con 
struction of this link or bar, and such as will 
permit of more readily connecting and placing 
the buttons proper and such as will also be 
capable of easy removal. 
To this end the invention consists in pro 
viding one of the buttons with a peculiarly 
constructed socket or tube receiving a simi 
larly-constructed bar projecting rigidly from 
the other button, and in the peculiar con 
struction of these parts and their arrangement 
and connections lies the novelty of my inven 
tion, as will be hereinafter explained, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a cuff-button 
constructed after the manner of my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a sectional view of the same. Fig. 3 
is a dissociated view of the several elements, 
and Fig. 4 is a section on the line 44 of Fig. 2. 
The cuff-button embodying my invention 
comprises two buttons proper, a and a', which 
may be of any construction or form. Soldered 
or otherwise secured to the button a, and by 
means of a base-flange b, is the socket c, the 
same being oval shape in form, as best shown 
in Fig. 4, and provided with an opening d 
and diagonal or bias outer edge e, the said 
outer edge being parallel with the plane of 
the base-flange b. Soldered to the button Ci', 
and having also a base-flange f to facilitate 
this operation, is a short socket 9, the same 
being formed with a diagonal or beveled face 
h, which is extended at an angle of about 
forty-five degrees from the inner face of the 
button a', and which has the bar i arranged 
therein and secured by means of a rivet k, 
passing through the socket g and through the 
bar i. 
The bar i is constructed of spring metal and 
provided with a slotl, which extends from one 
edge of the bar inwardly and thence longitu 
dinally to a point directly inward from the 55 
outer extremity thereof and which forms a 
spring-arm m. This arm m is formed with a 
projection in thereon, which is adapted to snap 
into the opening d, as shown in Figs. I and 2, 
and which has a notch O formed therein, the 6o 
same being designed to receive the finger-nail 
of the user, or other instrument which may 
be employed to press the arm m in. 
In the use of the device all that will be 
necessary is to project the bar i through one 65 
hole of a cuff and the socket c through a sec 
ond hole and guide the parts so that the bar 
will pass into the socket, whereupon the arm 
m will be compressed and Subsequently per 
mitted to return to its normal position, so that 7o 
the projection in will be fitted into the opening 
d, as Figs. 1 and 2 show. The parts will now 
be connected with all possible security, and, 
owing to the diagonal position which the but 
tons a, and a' have to the socket c and bar i, 75 
the inner faces of the buttons will lie Snugly 
against the cuffs and present a very neat ap 
pearance. It will also be seen that OWing to 
the elongated or oblong shape of the socket c 
the same may project readily through the 8o 
buttonhole of the cuff. 
In disengaging the sections of the device 
all that will be necessary is to press the arm 
m inward, so that the projection in thereof 
will disengage the opening d, whereupon the 85 
two sections may be readily withdrawn. This 
pressing inward of the arm m. may be easily 
effected by one's thumb or finger nail. If, 
however, this cannot be done, the Operation 
may be very readily performed with the help 9o 
of a coin or any such instrumentality. 
I have described the flanges b and f as sol 
dered to the respective buttons Ct. and a' but 
it will be obvious that this connection may 
be effected by any known means, and in many 95 
cases different means will have to be resorted 
to because of the impossibility of soldering 
Some metals. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Ioo 
Patent 
1. The combination of two button-sections, 
a tubular socket secured to one button-sec 
tion, the socket being longitudinally elon gated 
- 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
 
2 
558,849 
t 
second tubular socket having a base-flange 
secured to the remaining button-section, and 
a flattened arm having one end secured in 
the second tubular socket and having its re 
maining portion completely received in the 
first tubular socket, the said arm having a 
slot extending longitudinally with its outer 
portion and communicating with one side of 
the arm whereby a free portion is formed, 
said free portion having a tendency to project 
through the opening in the first tubular socket 
whereby the sections are held in place, sub 
stantially as described. 
25 
ANTON BRUNKA. 
Witnesses: 
F. W. HANAFORD, 
C. SEDGWICK. 
and having an opening therein located at a 
point between the ends of the socket, the open 
ing extending through the sides of the socket 
and a solid spring-arm carried by the remain 
ing section, said arm being adapted to fit 
within the socket and having a slot cut therein 
to form an integral free portion which projects 
through and beyond the opening in the socket 
when the arm is received in the socket, said 
free part being capable of locking the two 
button-sections and of being received com 
pletely within the socket so as to pass in and 
out thereof, substantially as described. 
2. A cuff-button, the same consisting of two 
button-sections, a tubular flattened socket 
having a base-flange secured to one section 
and having an opening in one edge and at 
approximately the middle of the socket, a 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558449.txt	(No Model.) 
A. L. COOMBS, 
NEEDLE BAR FOR SEWING MACHINES, 
No. 558,449, 
Patented Apr. 14, 1896. 
 
28-Evossos 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAM L. COOMBS, OF CLIFTONDALE, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
UNION SPECIAL SEWING MACHINE COMPANY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
NEEDLE BAR FOR SEWING-MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,449, dated April 14, 1896. 
Application filed February 26, 1896, Serial No. 580,822, (No model.) 
2O 
to erence marked thereon. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ABRAM. L. COOMBs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Clif 
tondale, in the county of Essex, State of 
5 Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Sewing-Machine 
Needle-Bars, of which the following is a de 
Scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings and to the letters of ref 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
Sewing-machines, and especially to a machine 
using two or more needles set at distances 
apart to make a plurality of rows of stitch 
I5 ing. The needles are usually set in a clamp 
or collar on the needle-bar, and when it is 
desired to change the distance apart of the 
needles, or the gage, as it is called, a new 
needle-bar or new collar must be furnished. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
needle-bar and coperating collar, whereby 
the same needle-bar may be used and have 
needles set at varying distances apart-that 
is, the gage of the machine or the space be 
25 tween the needles, and consequently the dis 
tance apart of the rows of stitching, may be 
varied, making the same machine therefore 
convertible into a One, two, three, &c., gage 
at will. 
The invention consists, therefore, of a 
needle-bar having at its lower end sockets 
for the reception of needle-shanks, said sock 
ets being arranged in pairs, the sockets of 
each pair diametrically opposite one another 
35 and the depth of said sockets varying to vary 
the distance apart at which the needles are 
arranged, with means for clamping the needles 
in the sockets. 
Furthermore, the invention includes, in ad 
4o dition to the above, a collar or ring having 
diametrically-placed sockets adapted to reg 
ister with any of the needle-holding sockets, 
and means for securing said collar and 
needles in place. 
Finally, it consists of means for holding the 
collar from movement when the needles are 
set, and in the other matters as hereinafter 
described, and referred to in the appended 
claims. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying dra Wings, in which 
45 
3O 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
needle-bar of a sewing-machine constructed 
in accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a longitudinal section thereof; Fig. 3, a sec 
tional end view; Fig. 4, a sectional end view 
of a modification. 
In the drawings, A represents the needle 
bar, provided at its lower end with a series of 
grooves or sockets (herein shown as six in 
number) C C, b b, c c, the sockets or grooves 
designated by the same letter being arranged 
diametrically opposite each other, and the 
grooves are cut of different depths, so that 
the solid portion of the lower end of the 
needle-bar is of varying thickness, the dis 
tance between the inner Walls of the socket 
a being equal to the distance apart of the 
shanks of the needles on a one-gage machine, 
b b of a two-gage machine, and c c of a three 
gage machine. 
B represents a clamping-collar having two 
oppositely-placed grooves or sockets d, and by 
rotating the needle-bar any pair of the sock 
ets C C, bb, c c may be made to register with 
said sockets d, and in the annular space 
formed by the walls of the sockets d and any 
of the sockets a, b, or c the shanks of the 
needlese are inserted, being held securely in 
position by the clamping-screws D passing 
through the collar B into the socket d. 
A collar E is rigidly fixed to the needle-bar 
above the collar B and it acts as a stop for 
the upper ends of the needle-shanks. This 
collar E is provided with notches g, adapted 
to receive the upper end of a hook h, attached 
to the collar B, so that when said hook en 
gages any one of the notches rotary move 
ment of the needle-bar within the collar is 
prevented. These notches are so arranged 
on the collar D that when the hook engages 
any one the socket d will be registering with 
one set of sockets a, b, or c and the needle 
bar can only be turned by taking out the 
needles and disengaging the hook from its 
notch. A suitable thread-guide is provided 
on the collar B, and to avoid twisting the 
upper thread when the gage of the needles is 
changed the upper end of the needle-bar is 
provided with a screw-threaded socket in 
which is adjustably secured by means of a 
screw a thread-eyelet k, which may thus be 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 
2 
558,449 
35 
45 
with the pairs of needle-holding sockets, and 
means for securing the collar and needles in 
place; substantially as described. 
3. A needle-bar provided at its lower end 
with sockets for the reception of needle 
Shanks, which Sockets are arranged in pairs, 
the diametrical distances between the sockets 
of the respective pairs varying, a collar em 
bracing the needle-bar with means for clamp 
ing the same to hold the needles in position, 
a hook attached to said collar and notches on 
the needle-bar with which said hook engages; 
substantially as described. 
4. A needle-bar provided with a horizon 
tally-adjustable eyelet on its upper end and 
with a series of pairs of sockets on its lower 
end, the diametrical distances between the 
sockets of the respective pairs varying, a col 
lar embracing the lower end of the needle-bar 
and provided with means for clamping the 
needle-shanks, and means carried by said 
collar for engaging the needle-bar, whereby 
the collar and needle-bar may be held from 
relative rotary motion; substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ABRAM. I. COOMBS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES W. BEASLEY, 
E. C. LAWRENCE. 
adjusted to be always in proper position with 
respect to the guiding-eyelet i on the collar B. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown a modification of 
this device, in which the hook and notches 
are dispensed with and the needle-bar is pre 
vented from rotating when the proper adjust 
ment has been made by means of screws l 
passing through the collar and adapted to en 
gage false shanks m, fitting two proximate 
sockets bc, the collar B having registering 
sockets d". 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A needle-bar for sewing-machines pro 
vided at its lower end with sockets for the 
reception of needle-shanks, said sockets being 
arranged in pairs with the sockets of each 
pair diametrically opposite each other and 
with the sockets of the respective pairs of 
Varying depths, and means for clamping the 
needle-shanks in the sockets; substantially as 
described. 
2. A needle-bar for sewing-machines pro 
vided at its lower end with sockets for the 
reception of needle-shanks, said sockets being 
arranged in pairs with the sockets of each 
pair diametrically opposite each other and 
With the sockets of the respective pairs of 
varying depths, a collar or ring having dia 
metrically-placed sockets adapted to register 
io 
IS 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558550.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 558,550, 
 
R. A. DUNN, 
FOLDING STRETCHER 
Patented Apr. 21, 1896, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT ALEXANDER DUNN, OF McKEESPORT, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FOLDING STRETCHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,550, dated April 21, 1896. 
Application filed January 18, 1895, 
Serial No, 535,328, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ROBERTALEXANDER 
DUNN, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at McKeesport, in the county of Alle 
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Folding Stretchers; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as Will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improved fold 
ing stretcher; and it consists of certain de 
tails of construction and combination of parts, 
as will be fully described hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of an improved stretcher 
which is constructed and arranged in accord 
ance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation of the stretcher folded to occupy but 
little space. Fig. 3 is an inverted plan view 
of the same. Fig. 4 is an enlarged detailed 
side elevation of the rear end of the stretcher, 
showing the same insection and the arrange 
ment of the braces. 
To put my invention into practice I pro 
vide an oblong or rectangular frame 1 of a 
suitable size and form of construction, and 
stretch a canvas or other fabric 2 over the 
same to form the bed and attach the said 
canvas rigidly to the frame 1. This frame 1 
is supported at the front and rear by means 
of legs 3, each of which is attached to the 
frame 1, by means of pivoted braces 4 and 5, 
in a manner that the said legs may be folded 
beneath the stretcher, as shown at Figs. 2 and 
3. One of the braces 5 of each legisformed 
to project Some distance from the leg and 
thereby form handles 6, by means of which 
the stretcher may be carried from place to 
place. The legs 3 are extended upward to 
form head and foot sections. Arranged at 
the head of the stretcher is a head-rest 8, 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
made adjustable by means of slots 9, formed 
in the head-sections, together with clamps 10 
and set-screWS 11. Connected to the top of 
each of the head and foot sections is a cross 
piece 12, to which a cord 13 is connected to hold 
the parts in position, as shown at Fig. 1 on 
the drawings. This frame 1 is divided at the 
center and hinged together in a manner that 
will permit the bed to be further folded from 
the position shown at Fig. 2. Arranged be 
neath the canvas 2 are a series of pockets 14, 
in which blankets and other useful articles 
may be placed to be used when necessary. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a folding stretcher, the combination 
of the frame, the front and rear legs extended 
above to form head and foot sections, with 
the upper cross bars or pieces of the head 
and foot sections connected together, the two 
sets of braces for each of the front and rear 
legs, each brace being pivoted to said frame 
and each four or set of braces being pivoted 
to each pair of legs, and two braces of each 
set being formed or terminating in handles, 
said legs having no other connection with 
said frame, Substantially as set forth. 
2. In a folding stretcher, the combination, 
with the frame and its legs, the legs at the 
head extended above to form a head-section, 
of the head-rest having clamp-bolts passing 
through the normally upper ends of its side 
pieces and through vertical slots in the head 
Section and apertured clamp-plates engaging 
said head-section, and fitted with nuts bear 
ing against said plates, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
hereunto affix my signature this 3d day of 
September, A. D. 1894. 
ROBERT ALEXANDER DUNN. 
L. s. 
55 
65 
75 
8) 
85 
In presence of - 
M. E. HARRISON, 
JAS. J. MCAFEE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558650.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
P. KENNEDY. 
MEANS FOR CONTROLLING ELECTRIC CURRENTs, 
No. 558,650, 
Patented Apr, 21, 1896, 
 
AZG. Z. 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR; 
2/3-942-4----4-27-r 
Ta V/ azz /a/6r 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM. Photo-ro. WASHINGTOND.C. 
| No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
P. KENNEDY. 
MEANS FOR CONTROLLING ELECTRIC CURRENTS, 
No. 558,650, 
Patented Apr, 2l l896, 
 
ANDREw 8.GRAHAM, Phoro-Linho, wash NGTON.O.C. 
(No Model.) 
P. KENNEDY. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
MEANS FOR CONTROLLING ELECTRIC CURRENTS, 
No. 558,650. 
Patented Apr. 21 l896. 
WITNESSES 
CAAza Aeonary- NVENTOR; 
26, e.A.A. 
25.3.2. 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.PHOTo-LTHO. washington.pc. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PATRICK KENNEDY, OF BRO OKLYN, NEW YORK. 
EANS FOR CONTRO LIN G ELECTRC CURRENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,650, dated April 21, 1896. 
Application filed June 27, 1895, Serial No. 554,283, (No model.) 
O 
To cell, uhon, it inctly concer'7. 
Be it known that I, PATRICK KENNEDY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Brooklyn, Kings county, in the State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Means for Control 
ling Electric Currents, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to electric currents 
which connect a dynamo or other source of 
electric energy with an apparatus or series of 
devices to be operated by such energy, and 
especially to circuits in which are included a 
Series of lamps. 
In the practical operation of circuits of this 
character it is desirable that the strength of 
the current should bear a fixed given relation 
to the requirements of the apparatus or de 
vices operated, and that it should be accu 
rately automatically controlled or governed, 
so as to be lessened when it has been unduly 
increased by supply beyond the needs of the 
operated devices in the circuit-as, for in 
stance, when a number of the devices are cut 
Out of operation, or when the dynamo or gen 
erator produces excess of current-and so as 
to be increased when an increased number 
of the devices to be operated are placed in 
the circuit, to the end that the devices to be 
operated shall receive with precision the pre 
determined quantity of current necessary. 
This is especially desirable in the case of lamp 
circuits, owing to the fragile character of the 
lamps and their liability to destruction by 
excess of current and the necessity for caus 
ing them to burn with (uniform and unvary 
ing radiance. 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
means to control or regulate the current of an 
electric circuit to maintain it at a given pre 
determined strength proportioned to the re 
quirements of the operated devices within the 
circuit. 
\ly invention is especially designed and in 
tended for use in connection with dynamos 
employed to operate the lamps upon moving 
vehicles, such as railroad-trains, and driven, 
through Suitable connective gearing, by a 
moving part of the vehicle, such as the wheel, 
axle, and the irregularity in the speed of which 
moving part rendel's especially desirable the 
provision of means to regulate the electric 
current produced by the irregularly-driven 
dynamos. 
In the accompanying drawings I show and 
herein i describe a good form of a convenient 
embodiment of my invention, the particular 
subject-matter claimed as novel being here 
inafter definitely specified. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view, partially diagrammatic, of conductors 
and other devices embodying a good form of 
my invention, the parts being shown and in 
dicated in Such manner as to render their re 
lation and Operation more easy of explanation 
rather than to illustrate the precise form and 
arrangement resorted to in their practical con 
struction for use. Fig. 2 is a view in side ele 
vation, and Fig. 3 a view in front elevation, 
of the annulus and Solenoid and their asso 
ciated devices employed in the preferred em 
bodiment of my invention. 
Similar letters and numerals of reference 
indicate corresponding parts. 
Referring first to the diagram of Fig. 1, A 
is the generator, (shown as a dynamo,) prefer 
ably of the shunt-Wound variety. B are the 
line-wires in circuit there with, Care lamps, 
and D a solenoid included in said circuit. 
H is a hollow annulus of non-conducting 
material, filled to the line 22 with mercury 
or other conducting fluid. 
E are a series of resistance-coils, one end of 
which series is in electrical connection at the 
point if with a shunt-conductor g, being one 
branch of the field-circuit which leads to and 
connects with the main line-Wire B conven 
iently at a point between the dynamo and the 
Solenoid. 
F are a series of conductors, the lower ex 
tremities of which, hereinafter for conven 
ience termed the lower terminals, lead at 
regular intervals apart into the annulus II, 
and the upper extremities of which are con 
nected with a corresponding series of termi 
nals 12345, &c., hereinafter termed the up 
per terminals, of which terminals that des 
ignated 1 is in electrical connection with the 
conductorg, while the remainder are in elec 
trical connection with the Series of resistance 
coils at regular intervals along the length of 
the latter. 
The field-magnets C C of the dynamo are 
connected by a shunt-conductor g', which con 
55 
7 O 
So 
9 O 
OO 
2 5 
3 5 
 
2 
558,650 
O 
25 
45 
55 
stitutes the other branch of the field-circuit, 
and which leads from the main line-wire B to 
and about said magnets, and thence to the 
annulus, within the interior of the lower por 
tion of which it terminates. 
The annulus II is so mounted or supported 
as to be capable of rotatory oscillation. The 
solenoid D is as to its hollowinterior provided 
with a core longitudinally movable therein 
and connected to the annulus by suitable 
gearing, with the result that movement of the 
core occasions corresponding Oscillation of the 
annulus, all as hereinafter more fully de 
scribed. 
As will be understood from an examination 
of the diagram as thus explained, the line 
wires B form the main or working circuit in 
which the lamps or other instrumentalities to 
be operated are placed, while the branch con 
ductor g', annulus II, with its contained mer 
cury, the conductors F, the resistance-coils, 
and the branch conductor g form the field 
circuit, or circuit of control, as it may be 
more broadly termed. 
The dynamo A of course supplies through 
the main line-Wires B the necessary energy to 
the lamps or other electro-receptive devices 
to be operated, and the current set up in the 
circuit of said line-wires, passing through the 
Solenoid, controls the set of its movable core. 
The strength of current passed through the 
main-line conductors will depend upon the 
amount of current generated by the dynamo 
and Will be proportional to the amount of cur 
rent in the said field-circuit. 
As will be understood, the conductors F, the 
the lower terminals of which are beneath the 
surface of the mercury within the annulus, 
will be in circuit with the conductor g', lead 
ing from the dynamo, while those the lower 
terminals of which are above said surface 
will be insulated and for the time being out 
of operation. 
The upper terminals of the conductors F 
are, as described, in electrical communication 
with resistance-coils at intervals along the 
length of the latter, that conductor the lower 
terminal of which is highest in the series of 
lower terminals within the annulus being, as 
to its upper terminal, the nearest of the series 
of the upper terminals to the point y, and so 
On through the series, the conductor F which 
is as to its lower terminal lowest of the series 
of lower terminals within the annulus being, 
as to its upper terminal, connected to the re 
sistance coils at a point the farthest of any of 
the upper terminals from the point y. As a 
result of this arrangement the current pass 
ing through the field-circuit will pass through 
those conductors F the lower terminals of 
which are for the time being beneath the liq 
uid-level in the annulus, but the greatest pro 
portion of the current will pass through such 
of Said conductors as are, as to their upperter 
minals, connected to the resistance-coils at 
points nearest the point y. The resistance 
is thus Varied by any change in the number 
of short-circuiting conductors F beneath the 
liquid-level in said annulus. When, now, a 
number of the lamps are switched out of cir 
cuit or when the current from the dynamo be 
comes excessive, the additional strength of 
the current will cause a corresponding move 
ment of the core of the solenoid, which, being 
connected, as stated, to the annulus, OScillates 
said annulus slightly to the right, SO that One 
or more of the conductors will be carried above 
the liquid-level and thereby insulated, with 
the result that the current of said field-circuit 
is compelled to pass through the remaining 
conductors F, which are in communication 
with the resistance-coils at a considerable dis 
tance from the point y, and hence said cur 
rent of the field-circuit meets a correspond 
ingly-increased resistance and correspond 
ingly diminishes the operation of the dynamo. 
The degree of movement of the annulus will, 
of course, be governed by the degree of move 
ment of the core of the solenoid, and one, two, 
or any number of said conductors may in Said 
movement be carried above the liquid-level 
of the mercury according to the strength of 
the current in the main line-wires. When, on 
the other hand, by the switching in of an in 
creased number of lamps, or otherwise, the 
strength of the current in the conductol's B 
falls below the necessities of the lamps, a cor 
responding movement of the core d is occa 
sioned, and thereupon the annulus is oscil 
lated or moved upon its axis to the left with 
a result correspondingly opposite to that just 
described. 
Such being a description of the principle of 
Operation of my improved arrangelment, it 
Will be understood that a quick and precise 
adjustment of the strength of the current is 
automatically effected each time the current 
in the main line-wires becomes, by increasing 
or decreasing, out of proportion to the needs 
of the lamps to be fed, the arrangement de 
scribed being simple, not liable to get out of 
order, and inexpensive. 
I now proceed to describe with greater par 
ticularity the construction and arrangement 
of the annulus and Solenoid and their asso 
ciated parts. 
The annulus II is, as shown in Fig. 2, mount 
ed upon arms h, extending radially from a hub 
mounted upon and keyed with respect to a 
shaft h", supported for rotative oscillation 
upon standards 7, projecting from a support 
ing-bracket L. 
IXIX' are a pair of wheels mounted and 
keyed upon said shaft l', and provided as to 
a portion of their rims each with a series of 
inclined rack-teeth h, the teeth of the re 
spective wheels facing in opposite directions. 
Within the hollow interior of the solenoid 
is mounted, free for longitudinal reciproca 
tion therein, a cored, provided as to one ex 
tremity with an extension d, which is screw. 
threaded and extends through an opening 
formed in a permanent standard cl, mounted 
on the bracket L. Nuts d', mounted upon 
. 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
558,650 
3 
75 
So 
90 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
O 
the extension d and existing upon opposite 
sides of the standard d', operate, by contact 
with said standard, to limit the movement of 
the core. 
d is a spiral pull-spring, one extremity of 
which is connected to the free end of the ex 
tension d, and the other to a permanent 
standard d', which spring operates or tends 
to draw the core away from the solenoid and 
against the pull or attraction of the latter. 
The other extremity of the core d is pro 
vided with a pawl-carrying bar M, hingedly 
connected to it and extending past the tooth 
provided rims of the wheels KK'. 
A pair of links m m, hingedly connected to 
the bar M and to studs in m^, mounted upon 
the supporting-bracket E, maintain said bar 
in operative relationship with respect to said 
Wheels. 
in mare a pair of pawls carried by the bar 
M, mounted, respectively, upon oppositesides 
of Said bar, and in position to engage, respec 
tively, with the teeth of the respective wheels 
KIX'. These pawls, which face in opposite 
directions, so as each to be in position to meet 
the inclined teeth of the wheel with which it 
is associated, are governed by Springs which 
tend to force them into engagement with the 
teeth. 
2 * are a pair of plates permanently mount 
ed upon the supports h, and interposed, re 
spectively, between the body of the pawl in 
and the rim of the wheel IX' and the body of 
the pawl n' and the rim of the wheel K, the 
free extremity of the pawl na', when the parts 
are in their normal position, extending only 
slightly past the upper edge of the plate n*, 
and the free extremity of the pawl n extend 
ing only slightly past the lower edge of the 
plate 7. 
The wheel IX is, as to a portion of its rim, 
not occupied by the inclined teeth described, 
provided with a series of sharp A-shaped teeth 
k', between which a V-shaped guardP, mount 
ed upon the free extremity of a spring-arm p, 
conveniently supported upon one of the stand 
ards D* of the solenoid D, is adapted to en 
gage. 
The set or arrangement of the parts illus 
trated in Figs. 2 and 3 may for convenience 
of description be referred to as the normal 
adjustment when the current of the proper 
strength in relation to the work to be done is 
passing through the circuit. 
When for any reason the current becomes 
cxcessive, the increased attraction exerted by 
the solenoid draws the core downward against 
the stress of the spring d, and thereupon the 
pawl n is carried against the crest of one of 
the teeth of the wheel IX' and said wheel ro 
tated to the right, Fig. 2, with the result, as 
already fully described in connection with the 
diagram of Fig. 1, of throwing into the field 
circuit or circuit of control an increased re 
sistance and thereby diminishing the action 
of the dynamo and consequently the strength 
of current in the conductors B. When, on 
the other hand, the current in the conductors 
B becomes insufficient, the attraction exerted 
upon the cored weakens, and the spring di 
draws it away from the solenoid, carrying the 
pawl nu' into engagement with one of the 
inclined teeth of the wheel K and rotating 
said wheel slightly to the left, with the result, 
as already explained, of lessening the resist 
ance in the circuit of control. 
The guard P, as the annulus begins to move 
to the right or left, ascends the side of the 
adjacent tooth of the series of teeth k', the 
spring-arm p} yielding, and after reaching its 
crest is, under the stress of said spring-arm, 
forced down the opposite side of said tooth, 
thus assisting the action of the pawl to effect 
the movement of the annulus and hastening 
the immersion in or emergence from the mer 
cury of the conductor, so as to prevent spark 
illg. 
The plates n n, as will be understood, op 
erate, when the parts are in the normal posi 
tion as shown in the drawings, to hold both 
pawls m' n out of positive engagement with 
the respective wheels KK", so that when the 
bar MI is moved in one direction or the other 
the action of the pawl thereby brought into 
operation upon its wheel is not impeded by 
any engagement of the other pawl with the 
other wheel. Thus when, for example, the 
bar M descends and the pawl n operates to 
rotate the wheels to the right one tooth or 
notch, and said wheels are by the guard P 
lightly locked, so to speak, in the new posi 
tion, the bar M is thereupon free to rise again 
to its normal position, because the plate n* 
maintains the pawl n' Out of engagement with 
the teeth of the wheel K. After each move 
ment of the wheels, therefore, the bar M-the 
current being supposed brought to its re 
quired strength by the movement of the an 
nulus-is returned to its ordinary position, 
and ready upon any further derangement of 
the current to move again in either the same 
or the opposite direction. 
The proportioning of the parts, the number 
of conductors F, the relative arrangement of 
the electro-receptive devices, the form of the 
generator and of the solenoid or electro-mag 
nectic coil are all matters within the prov 
ince of the constructor, and may be varied at 
Will, as convenience of manufacture, economy 
of space, or other considerations may dictate, 
without departure from the spirit of my in 
Vention. 
IIaving thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In combination with a main circuit, an 
electrical generator adapted to supply cur 
rent thereto, a circuit of control adapted to 
govern said generator, and comprising a 
branch in circuit, through resistances of un 
equal strength, with a series of conductors, 
one extremity of each of which conductors is 
situated within a movable vessel containing 
conducting fluid, said extremities being situ 
ated at different levels, with which fluid the 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
 
4 
558,650 
IO 
2C) 
35 
45 
55 
other branch of the circuit of control is in cir 
cuit, an electromagnetic device included in 
the main circuit and operated by its current, 
and suitable mechanical connections between 
said electromagnetic device and said vessel 
by which movement of the former is trans 
mitted to the latter, substantially as set forth. 
2. In combination with a main circuit, an 
electrical generator adapted to supply cur 
rent thereto, a circuit of control adapted to 
govern said generator and comprising a 
branch in circuit, through resistances of un 
equal strength, with a series of conductors, 
one extremity of each of which conductors is 
situated within a movable vessel containing 
conducting fluid, said extremities being situ 
ated at different levels, with which fluid the 
other branch of the circuit of control is in cir 
cuit, an electromagnetic device included in 
the main circuit and operated by its current, 
and suitable mechanical connections between 
said electromagnetic device and said vessel 
by which movement of the former operates 
to effect a change of relation between the ex 
tremities of the series of conductors and the 
fluid, substantially as set forth. 
3. In combination. With a main circuit, an 
electrical generator adapted to supply cur 
rent thereto, a circuit of control adapted to 
govern said generator, a Series of resistance 
coils connected with a branch conductor of 
said circuit of control, a series of conductors 
connected with said coils and terminating at 
intervals apart in a rotatable non-conducting 
vessel containing conducting fluid, and a 
branch conductor of the circuit of control 
leading from said vessel, an electromagnetic 
device included in the main circuit and oper 
ated by its current, and suitable mechanical 
connections between said electromagnetic de 
vice and said vessel, by Which movement of 
the former is communicated to the latter, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In combination. With a main circuit, a dy 
namo adapted to Supply current thereto, a so 
lenoid provided With a movable core and in 
cluded in said main circuit, a field-circuit in 
which are included a rotatable non-conduct 
ing vessel partly filled with conducting fluid 
with which fluid the terminal of one branch 
of the field-circuit wire is connected, one or a 
series of resistance-coils connected to the 
other branch of the field-circuit, a series of 
conductors leading from different points of 
the interior of the rotatable vessel to differ 
ent points in the length of the resistance coil 
or coils, and mechanism connective of the 
core of the Solenoid and said vessel, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. In combination with a main circuit, a dy 
namo adapted to supply current, thereto, a so 
lenoid provided With a movable core and in 
cluded in said main circuit, a field-circuit in 
which are included a rotatable non-conduct 
ing annulus partly filled with conducting fluid 
with which fluid the terminal of one branch 
of the field-circuit wire is connected, one or a 
series of resistance-coils connected to the 
other branch of the field-circuit, a series of 
conductors leading from different points of 
the interior of the rotatable annulus to dif 
ferent points in the length of the resistance 
coil or coils, an axle upon which said annulus 
is mounted for rotation, a toothed. Wheel 
mounted upon said axle, and a bar extending 
from the solenoid-core and provided with 
means for engaging with said toothed wheel, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. In combination with a main circuit, a dy 
namo adapted to Supply current thereto, a So 
lenoid provided with a movable core and in 
cluded in said main circuit, a field-circuit in 
which are included a rotatable non-COInduct 
ing annulus partly filled with conducting fluid 
With which fluid the terminal of one branch 
of the field-circuit Wire is connected, one or a 
Series of resistance-coils connected to the 
other branch of the field-circuit, a series of 
conductors leading from different points 
of the interior of the rotatable annulus to 
different points in the length of the resist 
ance coil or coils, an axle upon Which said 
annulus is mounted for rotation, a toothed 
wheel mounted upon said axle, and a bar ex 
tending from the solenoid-core and provided 
with means for engaging with said toothed 
wheel, and a spring connected with said core 
which tends to carry it away from said so 
lenoid, substantially as set forth. 
7. In combination. With a main circuit, a dy 
namo adapted to supply current thereto, a so 
lenoid provided with a movable core and in 
cluded in said main circuit, a field-circuit in 
which are included a rotatable non-conduct 
ing annulus partly filled with conducting fluid 
with which fluid the terminal of one branch 
of the field-circuit wire is connected, one or 
a series of resistance-coils connected to the 
other branch of the field-circuit, a series of 
conductors leading from different points of 
the interor of the rotatable annulus to differ 
ent points in the length of the resistance coil 
Or coils, an axle upon which said annulus is 
mounted for rotation, a toothed wheel mount 
ed upon said axle, and a bar extending from 
the solenoid-core and provided With means 
for engaging with said toothed wheel, a spring 
connected with said core which tends to carry 
it away from said solenoid, and means for 
limiting the end movement of said core, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
8. In combination. With a main circuit, a dy 
namo adapted to Supply current thereto, a so 
lenoid provided with a movable core and in 
cluded in said main circuit, a field-circuit in 
which are included a rotatable non-conduct 
ing annulus partly filled with conducting fluid 
With which fluid the terminal of one branch 
of the field-circuit wire is connected, one or 
a series of resistance-coils connected to the 
other branch of the field-circuit, a series of 
conductors leading from different points of 
the interior of the rotatable annulus to differ 
ent points in the length of the resistance coil 
75 
90 
95 
IO) 
IO 
Il 5 
558,650 
5 
55 
65 
7 O 
9 O 
95 
O 
or coils, an axle upon which said annulus is having each a series of inclined teeth the teeth 
mounted and keyed, a pair of wheels mount 
of the respective wheels being inclined in op 
ed and keyed upon said axle and having each. 
posite directions, a bar extending from the 
core and provided with oppositely-facing 
a series of inclined teeth the teeth of the re 
spective wheels being inclined in opposite 
pawls adapted to engage respectively with the 
directions, a bar extending from the core and 
teeth of the respective wheels, one of said 
provided with oppositely-facing pawls adapt 
wheels being provided with a series of pointed 
ed to engage respectively with the teeth of 
teeth, a guard mounted upon a spring-arm 
the respective toothed wheels, substantially 
and adapted to engage between said teeth, 
as set forth. 
and plates interposed between the bodies of 
9. In combination with a main circuit, a dy 
the pawls and the faces of the wheels with 
llamo adapted to Supply current thereto, a So 
which they are associated, substantially as 
lenoid provided with a movable core and in 
set forth. 
cluded in said main circuit, a field-circuit in 
11. In combination with a main circuit, a 
dynamo adapted to supply current thereto, a 
which are included a rotatable non-conduct 
ing annulus partly filled with conducting fluid 
solenoid provided with a movable core and 
with which fluid the terminal of one branch 
included in said main circuit, a field-circuit in 
of the field-circuit wire is connected, one or 
which are included a rotatable non-conduct 
ing annulus partly filled with conducting 
a Series of resistance-coils connected to the 
other branch of the field-circuit, a series of 
fluid, with which fluid the terminal of one 
conductors leading from different points of 
branch of the field-circuit wire is connected, 
the interior of the rotatable annulus to differ 
One or a Series of resistance-coils connected to 
ent points in the length of the resistance coil 
the other branch of the field-circuit, a series 
or coils, an axle upon which said annulus is 
of conductors leading from different points of 
mounted and keyed, a pair of wheels mounted 
the interior of the rotatable vessel to different 
and keyed upon said axle and having each a 
points in the length of the resistance coil or 
series of inclined teeth, the teeth of the re 
coils, an axle upon which said annulus is 
spective wheels being inclined in opposite di 
mounted and keyed, a pair of Wheels mounted 
lections, a bar extending from the core and 
and keyed upon said axle and having each a 
provided with oppositely-facing pawls adapt 
series of inclined teeth, the teeth of the re 
ed to engage respectively with the teeth of the 
spective wheels being inclined in opposite di 
respective toothed wheels, one of said wheels 
rections, a bar extending from the core and 
being provided with a series of pointed teeth, 
provided with oppositely-facing pawls adapt 
a guard mounted upon a spring - arm and 
ed to engage respectively with the teeth of the 
adapted to engage between said teeth, sub 
respective wheels, one of said wheels being 
stantially as set forth. 
provided with a series of pointed teeth, a 
guard mounted upon a spring-arm and adapt 
10. In combination, with a main circuit, a 
dynamo adapted to supply current thereto, a 
ed to engage between said teeth, plates inter 
solenoid provided with a movable core and 
posed between the bodies of the pawls and the 
included in said main circuit, a field-circuit 
faces of the wheels with which they are asso 
in which are included a rotatable non-con 
ciated, a spring which tends to carry the core 
ducting annulus partly filled with conduct 
away from the solenoid, and means for limit 
ing fluid with which fluid the terminal of one 
ing the movement of said core, substantially 
branch of the field-circuit wire is connected, 
as Set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
One or a Series of resistance-coils connected 
to the other branches of the field-circuit, a 
my invention have hereunto signed my name 
series of conductors leading from different 
this 13th day of June, A. D. 1895. 
points of the interior of the rotatable annu 
lus to different points in the length of the re 
sistance coil or coils, an axle upon which said 
annulus is mounted and keyed, a pair of 
Wheels mounted and keyed upon said axle and 
F. NORMAN DIXON, 
THOMASIK. LANCASTER. 
PATRICR. KENNEDY. 
In presence of - 
2 5 
O 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558750.txt	( No Model.) 
No. 558,750, 
E. H. WRIGHT. 
MULTIPLE CONTACT SWITCH. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 21, 1896. 
772/72 esses 
&ze-Z4.4- 
(%.4, (? (2a-la-A- 
- 
a 
AZ 
2Z. 
 
SS Avezzer 
2:42:2% 
-- 
11 
s 
(2/ 
(No Model.) 
E. H. WRIGHT 
MULTIPLE CONTACT SWITCH. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 558,750, 
Patented Apr. 21, 1896. 
 
-6eczete z7%-46% 
Zaze?zcz 
(2A%2-a-cer 
- 
Arez/777-zz/47 
Ay4. r14. A 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELMER II. WRIGHT, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE - THIRD TO 
JAMES J. HECKMAN, CIIARLES C. CARNAHAN, AND ALBERT II. GRAVES, 
OF SANIE PLACE. 
MULTIPLE CONTACT SWITCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,750, dated April 21, 1896. 
Application filed November 28, 1894, Serial No, 530,257, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
3 5 
AO 
To cell, tufton, it in City concern: 
IBe it known that I, ELMER. H. WRIGHT, a 
resident of Chicago, in the county of Cook 
and State of Illinois, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Multiple 
Contact-Switches; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description thereof, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
electric Switches, and more specifically to an 
improved multiple contact-switch especially 
adapted for simultaneously effecting a change 
of polality or circuit in a plurality of con 
ductors connected with or controlled by said 
Switch. 
I am aware that it is not new to provide a 
SWitch having a plurality of circuit-control 
ling contacts operating to simultaneously 
change Ol' Shunt one or more circuits to dif 
ferent lines, or a Switch adapted to simulta 
neously reverse the polarity of a plurality of 
lines; but neither of these constitutes my in 
Vention. 
A principal object of my invention con 
sists in providing a switch adapted to control 
a plurality of circuits (at least three) of dif 
ferent character or potential, and by means 
of which their relation to one another may be 
changed at pleasure. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
simple and efficient device of the character 
referred to; and the invention consists in the 
matters hereinafter described, and more par 
ticularly pointed out in the appended claims. 
The invention will be readily understood 
from the following description, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a switch 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a detail 
of one of the pairs of contact-tongues. Fig. 
3 is a perspective view of a switchboard pro 
vided with six fixed contact-points. Fig. 4 
is an enlarged detail in perspective of an end 
portion of the contact-carrying bar shown in 
Fig. 3, inverted. 
The invention is herein shown as applied 
to the Edison three-wire system of incandes 
cent electric lighting, a switch embodying my 
invention being specially adapted for readily 
accomplishing the changes of circuit with re 
lation to each other necessary to secure proper 
polarity in the conductors, as will hereinafter 
more fully appear; but it is to be understood 
that the use of the Switch is not limited to 
this particular purpose, the invention obvi 
Ously being capable of use in various other 
Ways, and either in its present embodiment 
Or in other forms adapted to the particular 
use to which it is applied. 
In the Edison three-wire system the triple 
arrangement of conductors extends through 
out the entire System, each branch compris 
ing a positive, negative, and neutral con 
ductor. In practice the main distributing 
branches or underground leads are laid in 
metal pipes, the three insulated wires being 
packed together and inserted into a pipe only 
large enough to receive them. The interstices 
between the conductors and pipes are usually 
filled with a solid composition of insulating 
material. In wiring for this system of light 
ing it is the uniform practice, and one of the 
requirements of the board of under Writers, 
that a switch or cut-out (technically called 
the service cut-out) be provided immedi 
ately adjacent to where the secondary branch 
enters each individual building, so that when 
necessary the circuit in the entire building 
may be instantly cut out. From this switch 
or cut-out the Secondary branch leads to the 
various floors and points in the building from 
which it is desired to distribute to the indi 
vidual lamps, each of these latter distribut 
ing-points being provided with a branch 
cut-out. 
Notwithstanding the care taken in the prep 
aration and laying of the conductors forming 
the main leads, owing to the powerful current 
which they carry, the insulation is frequently 
destroyed and the current grounded. 
When this happens, the current usually burns 
and melts both the pipe and the conductors 
therein, so that the ends of the conductors or 
leads will be separated by a considerable 
space, which must be filled in with new con 
ductOS. 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
558,750 
O 
35 
45 
55 
Upon the discovery of a break the lineman 
first proceeds to the building where the lights 
have failed and tests at the service cut-out. 
If no current comes to the building, it is cer 
tain that the trouble is in one of the main or 
street leads, and he thereupon throws out or 
opens all of the service-cut-out switches of 
the buildings affected by the break. Having 
done this, he proceeds to locate the break and 
repair the same. 
Owing to the manner in which the conduc 
tors are insulated and embedded within the 
piping, and the fusing and shortening of the 
ends of the leads, as hereinbefore described, 
it is usually impossible to determine certainly 
which is the neutral and which the positive 
and negative leads of the dead end of the 
branch, and even were it possible or practica 
ble to determine how the ends should be prop 
erly connected it would in many instances be 
extremely difficult or inconvenient to do so 
owing to the difficulty of manipulating the 
wires thus covered. For this reason it is the 
general practice of line-repairers to pay no 
attention whatever to the identity of the leads, 
but to simply connect the ends in whatever 
way is most convenient. The chances are, 
therefore, two out of three that the conduc 
tors will be connected in such a manner as to 
change or cross the circuits. 
The line having been repaired the lineman 
proceeds to the service cut-out, tests the live 
ends of the conductors or those leading to the 
street-main, thus determining which is the 
neutral and which the positive and negative, 
and if he finds that the conductors have been 
crossed or their relative polarities changed 
by the repairing of the break he thereupon 
proceeds to disconnect the conductors and re 
arrange them in their proper relation. This 
is a work of considerable difficulty, owing to 
the relatively large size of the conductors and 
the difficulty of manipulating them, and more 
especially so because it must usually be per 
formed in inconvenient locations-usually in 
the basement of the building, closely adjacent, 
to the outer Wall thereof, and in many in 
stances in some inconvenient recess or angle 
where the conductors will be least in the way. 
It will be obvious, furthermore, that this work 
of testing, disconnecting, and rearranging the 
conductors must be performed at each service 
cut-out affected by the break, and with an 
easy possibility of making a Wrong connec 
tion not Withstanding the tests made. It is 
absolutely necessary that these connections 
be correctly made before the current is turned 
On, because if otherwise connected the effect 
is to increase the Voltage on the lamps on one 
side of the neutral to such an extent as when 
thrown into circuit to instantly disable and 
in many instances completely destroy every 
lamp on that side. 
It is the object of the present invention to 
provide a switch by means of which the proper 
relations of the circuit-conductors may be 
readily and certainly established, the particu 
lar device herein shown being designed to be 
used in lieu of the Service cut-out. 
Referring now to Fig. 1, in which is illus 
trated a switch embodying my invention, I 
designates the base or Support of insulating 
material, usually of slate or hard rubber, 
upon which is mounted a plurality of contact 
points, for the present use of the Switch Seven 
in number, as K K K IX KIK K'. In the 
present instance the switch is constructed 
with what are commonly known as knife 
contacts-that is to say, each of the contact 
points comprises a blade or lnale member 
adapted to enter between two resilient 
tongues comprising the female member of 
the contact-points. The blades KIK", &c., are 
arranged to stand at uniform intervals apart 
in parallel vertical planes, in a row or series 
across one end of the base I, being to this end 
secured upon or made integral with metallic 
base portions k, suitably mounted upon the 
base I. The contact-points IX' IX and K IX 
are electrically connected in pairs, as herein 
shown, by means of metallic base portions k' 
Ic', while the two outer contact-points IX and 
IX are electrically connected with each other 
and with the central blade IS by means of a 
conductor k. 
L., L', and L are three binding-plates pro 
vided at each end with binding-screws ll', 
mounted upon the base I and electrically con 
nected with the base portion l of the contacts 
IK", IX, and IV, respectively. In the present 
instance these connections l'll are in the 
form of fusible strips, for the purpose of pro 
tecting the lamps from any sudden excess of 
Current. 
M, M', and Mare three pairs of spring con 
tact-tongues adapted to fit upon and embrace 
the contact-blades of the switch. These con 
tact-tongues are secured in a vertically-de 
pending position upon a suitable insulating 
bar N, at a distance apart exactly equal to 
twice that of the intervals between the blades 
Ix K', &c., so that when in contact the spring 
tongues will engage alternate ones of the said 
blades. From each pair of tongues M. M' M 
extends a flexible conductor O O' O, respec 
tively, having connection at their opposite 
ends with Suitable terminals or binding-studs 
P, P', and P. Preferably, and as hercin 
shown, these flexible conductors will be con 
nected with the tongues and binding-studs 
by soldering, thereby forming a perfect me 
tallic union, and may conveniently be con 
structed of ordinary insulated conducting 
wire. It will be noted that each of the flexi 
ble conductors is somewhat longer than is 
necessary for it to reach between the tongues 
and binding-studs when the former are in 
their central position, as herein shown, such 
extra length being provided in order that the 
switch-bar may be shifted laterally in either 
direction and placed in contact with the alter 
nate blades K*, K*, and IX or IX, K, and IX', or 
reversed by turning the bar around in a hori 
Zontal plane end for end and placing it in 
75 
So 
85 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
I C5 
EO 
II5 
I 30 
558,750 
8 
5 
O 
contact in the central position or shifted to 
either side, as before described. 
Each of the binding-studs is provided with 
a binding-Screw, as p p' p', by means of which 
the conductors leading from the street-leads 
may be connected with the switch. For con 
Venience of manipulation the bar N is pro 
vided upon its upper side with a suitable 
knob N', by means of which the Switch-bar 
may be lifted up and replaced, as desired. 
Preferably a pair of insulated rests or blades 
Q Q will be provided upon the base I, upon 
which the tongues M M may be placed when 
it is desired to leave the switch open. 
The use of the switch thus described is as 
follows: Normally, or when the currents are 
not crossed, the movable member of the switch 
Will be arranged in contact with the central 
contact-blades-that is to say, the central 
pair Of Spring contact-tongues will be in con 
tact with the centralblade K, while the outer 
pail's Of tongues will rest in engagement with 
the blades IX' and K, respectively. In this 
position of the Switch the circuits will be in 
direct lines across the Switchboard. Should 
a break in the main lead occur, the lineman 
Will throw the local system of the building 
Out of circuit while the break is being repaired 
by simply withdrawing the movable mem 
ber from the contact-blades and placing it 
upon the insulated rests. After the break 
has been repaired and the current turned on 
the lineman will proceed to the switch and, 
applying his instrument to the tongues of 
the movable member, determine whether or 
not the Wires have been crossed in repairing 
the break. If he finds that one of the outer 
conductors-as, for instance, O-has become 
the neutral line he will, in closing or replac 
ing the Switch-bar, shift it from its normal 
central position to that side of the switch 
board On. Which the neutral line is found to 
exist-that is to say, if he finds that the con 
ductor O has become the neutral line he will 
place the barin such position that the tongues 
MI Will be in engagement or contact with the 
blade K, the tongues M with the blade IX, 
and the tongues M with the blade K'. If 
now the circuit be traced, it will be seen that 
the neutral line O leads from binding-stud P 
to tongue M, thence through the blade K, 
conductor I, and to lamp-circuit through 
plate L', no other exit or circuit existing and 
the neutral being therefore transposed to its 
proper central relation. Similarly, assuming 
O' to have become the positive conductor, the 
Current will pass through the tongue M", 
blade K, from thence through the basek' to 
blade IX' and out to lamps through plate L. 
The circuit in negative O' Will be transmitted 
across the board precisely similar to that of 
O'. On the other hand, should the test dis 
close that Ohas become the neutral, then the 
lineman will shift the Switch to that side of 
the board, with the same result of properly 
transmitting the several circuits across to the 
lamps. If, however, it be found that the 
neutral has been properly connected and re 
mains central, but the negative and positive 
lines have been transposed, the operator Will 
reverse the bar by turning it end for end and 
replacing it, and similarly if the neutral has 
been changed to either side and the other 
two transposed, the bar in its reversed posi 
tion may be shifted to one side or the other, 
as required. 
The foregoing is a description of What Icon 
sider a preferred form of embodying my in 
Wention and a Sufficient illustration for a full 
comprehension of the same. It is to be noted, 
however, that various modifications may be 
made without departure from the invention 
and Without the exercise of more than ordi 
nary mechanical skill. 
It will be obvious, for 
instance, that a switchboard having but six 
contact-points, as shown in Fig. 3, may be 
constructed which will serve to transpose the 
neutral line to the center in the same manner 
as in the former construction. 
In said figure J'designates the base; R', R*, 
R, R, R, and R", the fixed contact-studs, 
four of which are mounted upon three par 
allel embedded bars TTT, each provided 
at its end With a binding-screw it t, respec 
tively. Each of the two contact-studs R. R. 
not mounted upon one of the embedded bars 
is electrically connected with one of those 
that is, the stud R5 with RandR with R', by 
means of conductors embedded in the under 
side of the base, as indicated in dotted lines 
2. 
' 
S' designates the contact-carrying bar, SS' 
sthe tubular bifurcated contacts thereof, and 
s'ss the three flexible conductors extending 
from the respective contacts to binding-studs 
U U U2. 
It is also clear that the flexible connections 
may be of various forms; or pivoted, sliding or 
other forms of connections may be employed 
in combination with bars or other inflexible 
conductors. It will be obvious, furthermore, 
that the device may be placed in line at any 
desired point other than in lieu of the service 
cut-out. These and other analogous modifi 
cations I claim as being within the scope of my 
invention. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A three-Wire-system switch comprising 
a Switchboard provided with two sets of ter 
minals, each of which sets of terminals em 
braces three binding-screws or connecting de 
Vices, a plurality of contact-points on said 
Switchboard, arranged in three electrically 
connected groups, each of which groups is 
electrically connected with one of the termi 
nals of One of the said sets, and a movable 
member provided with a plurality of contact 
points each electrically connected with one 
of the terminals of the other set of the switch 
board, the contact-points of the movable 
member being adapted for Various engage 
ment with those of the switchboard, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. A three-wire-system switch, comprising 
3 5 
45 
SO 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
 
A. 
558,750 
7 O 
So 
90 
OO 
IO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
a switchboard provided with two sets of ter 
minals, each of which sets embraces three 
binding-screws or connecting devices, a mov 
able member, contact-points thereon, each 
electrically connected with one of the termi 
nals of One set by means of a flexible con 
ductor and a number of contact-points on the 
Switchboard in excess of those on said mov 
able member, arranged in three electrically 
connected groups, each of which groups is 
electrically connected with one of the termi 
inals of the second set, the contact-points of 
the movable member being adapted for vari 
ous contact with the contact-points of the 
switchboard, substantially as set forth. 
3. A plurality-contact permutation-switch, 
comprising two sets of terminals, each of 
which sets embraces a terminal for each line 
conductor of a system composed of an odd 
number of line conductors, two contact-car 
lying members one of which is movable with 
relation to the other, one of said members be 
ing provided with a contact-point for each 
line conductor and the other member being 
provided With a number of contact-points in 
excess of the number of line conductors, ar 
ranged in electrically-connected groups equal 
in number to the number of line conductors, 
each group electrically connected with one of 
the terminals of one set, and each contact 
point of the other member being electrically 
connected with one of the terminals of the 
other set, the contact-points of one member 
being adapted for various contact with those 
of the other member, whereby the relations 
of currents of different character carried by 
said line conductors may be changed at will, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. A three-wire-system switch comprising 
a switchboard provided with two sets of ter 
minals of three each, a plurality of contact 
points arranged upon said switchboard in 
three electrically-connected groups, each of 
which groups is connected with one of the 
terminals of One Set, a contact-carrying mem 
ber provided With three contact-points adapt 
ed for various engagement with those of the 
Switchboard and flexible conductors connect 
ing each of the contact-points of the movable 
member With One of the terminals of the sec 
ond set, substantially as set forth. 
5. A three-wire-system switch comprising 
a Switchboard provided with two sets of ter 
minals of three each, seven contact-points, ar 
ranged in a series at uniform intervals apart 
across said Switchboard and electrically con 
nected in three groups, each group electrically 
connected with one of the terminals of one 
Set, one of Said groups comprising three con 
tact-points and the other groups two each, 
and a contact-carrying switch-bar provided 
With three contact-points spaced at a distance 
apart equal to twice the distance between 
those of the switchboard and adapted for va 
rious engagement with the latter; said con 
tact-points of the Switch-bar each having elec 
trical connection with one of the terminals of 
the second set by means of flexible conduc 
tors, substantially as set forth. 
6. A three-wire-system switch comprising 
a switchboard provided with two sets of ter 
minals of three each, Seven contact-points ar'- 
ranged in a series at uniform intervals apart 
across said switchboard and electrically con 
nected in three groups, each group electrically 
connected with one of the terminals of One 
set, one of said groups comprising three coll 
tact-points and the other groups two each, 
and a contact-carrying switch-bar provided 
with three contact-points Spaced at distances 
apart equal to twice the distance between 
those of the switchboard and adapted for va 
rious engagement with the latter; said con 
tact-points of the switch-bar each having elec 
trical connections with one of the terminals of 
the second set, by means of flexible conduc 
tors and fusible strips interposed in each cir 
cuit between the terminals of the switch. Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
7. A plurality-contact permutation-Switch 
comprising two sets of terminals, each of 
which sets comprises a terminal for each line 
conductor of a system composed of an oddl 
number of line conductors, two sets of con 
tacts, one of which sets comprises a contact 
for each line conductor, each connected with 
one of the terminals of one set, and the other 
of which sets of contacts comprises a number 
of contacts in excess of the Inuimber of line 
conductors, said last-mentioned contacts be 
ing electrically connected in a number of 
groups equal to the number of line conduc 
tors, each of which groups is electrically con 
nected with one of the terminals of the other 
set, and means for bringing the contacts of 
one set into various electrical connection with 
those of the other, substantially as set forth. 
S. A plurality-contact permutation-switch 
comprising two sets of terminals, each of 
which sets comprises a terminal for each line 
conductor, of a system comprising an uneven 
number of line conductors, two sets of con 
tacts, one of which sets comprises a contact 
for each line conductor, each connected with 
one of the terminals of one set, and the other 
of which sets of contacts comprises a number 
Of contacts in excess of the number of line 
conductors, said last-mentioned contacts be 
ing electrically connected in a number of 
groups equal to the number of line conduc 
tors, each of which groups is electrically con 
nected with One of the terminals of the other 
Set, and means for bringing the contacts of 
one set into Various electrical connection with 
those of the other, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I affix my signature in the pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
ELMER II. WRIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES J. IECKMAN, 
CHARLES C. CARNAHAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558851.txt	(No Model.) 
H. SCUDDER. 
RIB TIP HOLDER FOR UMBRELIAS OR PARASOIS, 
No. 558,851, 
Patented Apr. 21, 1896. 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
BY 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIEY WARD SCUD DER, OF N OR THP ORT, NEW YORK. 
RB-TIP HOLDER FOR UMBRELLAS OR PARASOLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,851, dated April 21, 1896. 
Application filed September 28, 1895, Serial No. 564,002, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HEYWARD SCUDDER, of 
Northport, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of New York, have invented a new and Im 
proved Rib-Tip Holder for Umbrellas and 
Parasols, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
superior clamp for removably holding the tips 
of umbrella -ribs snugly against the stick. 
This end is attained by means consisting, 
specifically stated, of two semicircular clamp 
sections adapted to jointly embrace the stick, 
and each having at its respective ends ashank, 
which is formed with a resilient eye, and the 
eyes being adapted to receive the terminals 
of a pin, the arrangement of the parts being 
such that the eyes will yield to permit the 
movement of the sections on the pins and will 
contract to hold the sections at the desired 
adjustment. 
The invention will be fully described here 
inafter and its scope defined in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a portion of 
an umbrella-stick having my improvements 
applied. Fig. 2 is a sectional view on the line 
22 of Fig.1, and Fig. 3 is an elevation show 
ing the Sections in the act of adjustmeht. 
In carrying out my invention the stick C is 
provided with a transversely-extending pinb, 
the ends of which are respectively projected 
from opposite sides of the stick and are 
squared, as best shown in Figs. 1 and 3. 
Each terminal of the pin b performs the func 
tion of a separate pin, as Will be seen. 
Each section of the clamp comprises a semi 
circular body portion c, the terminals of which 
are respectively formed with shanks d, and 
these shanks terminate in eyes e. Two of the 
eyese coperate with each terminal of the pin 
b, and the eyes are constructed of resilient 
material, so that they may yield and return 
O 
- 2 O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
according to the requirements of the opera 
tion of the device. The arrangement of the 
parts is such that when the sides of the eyes 
are parallel with the sides of the pin the 
eyes will be contracted on the pin and will 
hold the clamp-sections firmly, as shown in 
Fig. 1. When, however, the sections are 
moved, as shown by full lines in Fig. 3, the 
inner sides of the eyes being moved with di 
agonal relation to the sides of the pin, the 
first-named sides will forcibly bind against 
the corners of the pin and the eye will be 
enlarged to permit the movement of the sec 
tions, and as this movement continues and 
the sides of the eyes become parallel with the 
sides of the pin the eyes will be permitted to 
return to their normal size and to snugly en 
gage the rod, which engagement Willhold the 
sections in the position shown by full lines in 
Fig. 1 or that shown by dotted lines in Fig. 2. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a rib-tip clamp, the combination with 
an umbrella-stick, of a pin projected from the 
stick and having a plane side, and a clamp 
proper having a resilient eye embracing the 
pin and having a plane side yieldingly held 
against the plane side of the pin, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a rib-tip clamp, the combination with 
an umbrella-Stick, of a pin projecting through 
the same and extending from opposite sides 
thereof, the terminals of the pin having plane 
sides, and two clamp-sections, each having a 
body portion adapted for engagement with 
the ribs and having two shanks, each shank 
having a yielding eye, the eyes receiving the 
terminals of the pin and conforming to the 
cross-sectional shape of the terminals of the 
pin, substantially as described. 
HEYWARD SCUDDER. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD M. SCUDDER, 
EMMA WILLARD SCUDDER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US558951.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
No. 558,95l, 
G. W. HODGES. 
CARWING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 28, 1896. 
M9 
NaN 
ifts SS 2E 
 
7tezzasses 
 
yet?'... 
 
 
 
 
   
   
(No Model.) 
No. 558,951, 
G. W. HODGES. 
CARVING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
. . 
" 
. 
. . 
Patented Apr. 28, 1896, 
 
  
as 
N SN 8 
. 8 
C till 
6 
  
a 5 
3 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
O AAA 
4. 
  
 
 
  
l 
N 
N 1. N 9 
30S 
O 
O 
O 
O 
..., 7.4% 
(heteur 2, 
- 
 
O 
St. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. HODGES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
CARVING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 558,951, dated April 28, 1896, 
Application filed November 16, 1895, Serial No. 569,218, (No model.) 
To all whom it may conce77. 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. HODGES, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Carving 
Machine, of which the following is a specifica inner ends thereof the cutters or tools 14. 
. . 
. 
. 
55 
- 
tion. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
This invention relates to carving-machines, 
and particularly to machines for carving seats 
for ornamental figures in the sides of knife 
handles. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
machine which is simple and effective, easily 
understood and operated, for forming seats 
for ornaments in the sides of knife-handles 
and similar articles. 
The invention consists, substantially, in the 
Construction, combination, location, and rel 
ative arrangement of parts, all as will be 
more fully hereinafter set forth, as shown in 
the accompanying drawings and finally point 
ed out in the appended claims. 
Referring to the accompanying sheet of 
drawings and to the various views and ref 
erence-signs appearing thereon, Figure 1 is a 
plan View of a machine embodying my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of the same 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
on the line 22, Fig. 1. 
detail sectional view of a portion of the ma 
chine on the line 33, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a broken 
detail view in plan of the work-holder. Fig. 
5 is a central longitudinal section of the same. 
Fig. 6 is a broken detail view in plan of a 
modified form of pattern which in many in 
stances I prefer to use. Fig. 7 is an end view 
of the same, and Fig. S is a transverse sec 
tional view of the same. 
The same part is designated by the same 
reference-sign wherever it occurs. 
I will now describe my invention as applied 
to forming seats for ornaments in knife or 
similar handles, though it will be evident that 
the principles of my invention may be ap 
plied for other purposes. 
In the drawings, 4 designates a suitable 
framework, in which is journaled a shaft 5, 
adapted to be rotated from any suitable source 
of power through pulleys 6, one of which pull 
ley's may be loose. Upon each end of shaft 
6 is mounted a speed gear or pulley 7, each 
pulley 7 adapted to be geared in any suitable 
manner, as by crossed and open belts S9, with 
- 
Io 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
corresponding gears or pulleys 1011, mounted, 
respectively, upon shafts 1213. These shafts 
12 13 are mounted to slide longitudinally 
through their bearings and their respective 
drive pulleys or gears, and they carry on the 
... From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that when shaft 5 is rotated the shafts 
12 and 13 are also rotated in opposite direc 
tions; but, as will be seen from the drawings, 
and as will be presently more fully described, 
since the work to be operated upon is between 
the cutter or tool carrying ends of shafts 1213, 
and hence, as the cutters operate on opposite 
sides of the Work-holder, it will be understood 
that the cutters revolve in the same direction 
with reference to the work-holder. 
Each shaft 1213 is arranged to be engaged 
by bell-crank or other suitable levers 1516, 
respectively, and by means of a suitable 
treadle 17. Said levers may be rocked to 
move the shafts 12 13 longitudinally through 
their bearings to be advanced to or retracted 
from the work. The depth of cut may be 
readily regulated by adjusting the effective 
throw of level's 1516, as by means of the ad 
A suitably-arranged 
justable nuts 1819. 
rack, as 20, may be provided to hold treadle 
17 in any desirable position to which it may 
be depressed, as will be readily understood. 
I will now describe the work-holder and 
the manner of its manipulation, whereby any 
predetermined design may be carved in the 
work. 
In suitable bearings 2122 in the main frame 
4, loosely mounted to rock and to slide longi 
tudinally, is a spindle 23, upon opposite sides 
of which the sections of knife-handle 2425 are 
mounted. In the particular form shown, to 
which, however, I do not desire to be limited, 
the spindle 23 is provided with flat sides, upon 
which the work to be operated upon is secured, 
and which are arranged in the space between 
bearings 2122 and also between the adjacent 
or tool-carrying ends of the shafts 12 13. 
In Figs. 4 and 5 I have shown a simple and 
efficient clamp for the work, wherein I pro 
vide clamping-jaws 26 27, oppositely faced 
and adapted to engage the respective ends of 
the work. A right and left screw-threaded 
rod 28 is arranged to pass longitudinally 
through spindle 23 and to actuate the clamp 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
2 
558,951 
 
. 
ing-jaws 26 27 toward and from each other to 
clamp or to release the Work, said rod being 
actuated by any suitably or conveniently ar 
ranged thumb-nut 29. From this construc 
tion it will be seen that pieces of the mate 
rial operated upon are firmly held and cen 
tered with reference to each other and to the 
cutting-tools. 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 3 I have shown one form 
of arrangement of pattern wherein I provide 
a bracket, 30, which may form part of or may 
be bolted to the main frame and in which is 
formed a bearing 31 for spindle 23. The pat 
tern or templet plate 32, in which are formed 
the particular designs and outlines to be in 
laid in the work, and the seats for which are 
adapted to be formed by the cutters, is piv 
oted at one end in bearing 22 and held at its 
opposite end in bearing 31. Of course this 
templet-plate may be permanently attached 
to or may form part of the cap-plates of bear 
ings 2231, and which cap-plates may be piv 
oted to rock on or swing laterally or to be re 
movable, as will be readily seen. A pin 33, 
Carried by Spindle 23, is adapted to engage 
the pattern, as seen most clearly in Figs. 1, 
2, and 3, and to follow the outline thereof as 
the operator grasps the hand-wheel 34 of the 
Spindle and suitably rotates the same and 
moves the same longitudinally. The loose 
mounting of the spindle 23 permits of this 
Operation. 
It will be understood, of course, that the best 
results are secured when the templet or pat 
tern plate is curved or cylindrical in outline 
to correspond With the outline of the work 
Operated On, and also when the curvature of 
the templet-plate is on the same radius as the 
circumference of the work operated on. 
It is important that the templet or pattern 
plate be held rigid against movement in order 
that the tools may make a smooth cut, and 
at the same time it is desirable to provide an 
arrangement whereby the guiding-pin 33 may 
be readily and quickly changed from one de 
sign Or pattern of the pattern-plate to another 
or the pattern-plate itself removed or replaced 
by another. 
have shown in Figs. 6, 7, and 8 a construc 
tion whereby these results are accomplished, 
and Wherein a frame 35 is formed with or car 
lies the cap-pieces 3637 of bearings 22 31, 
which cap-pieces are pivoted to the lower 
halves of said bearings, whereby the entire 
frame 35 may be rocked or swung up to un 
cover the spindle 23 or to free the pin 33 of 
said spindle from engagement with the pat 
tern of the templet or pattern plate. 
The 
frame 35 is provided with side grooves or 
guides adapted to receive the side flanges 3S 
39 of the templet or pattern plate 32, the end 
Cap-piece 36 being provided with a passage 
through which the pattern - plate may be 
passed endwise into the guide-grooves of 
frame 35. The set-screws 40 or other suit 
able devices may be provided to retain the 
pattern-plate in position. Any suitable form 
of lock or catch may be provided for locking 
frame 35 in closed position-as, for instance, 
a bolt 41, pivoted to the bracket 30 and adapt 
ed to enter an open-sided slot 42, formed in 
the frame 35, a set-nut 43, carried by said 
bolt, serving as the lock. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The work is mounted upon the work-holder 
and power is applied to rotate shafts 12 13. 
The pin 33 is arranged to engage the particu 
lar pattern of the pattern-plate which is to be 
cut. The treadle 17 is then depressed to ad 
vance the cutters to their work. When the 
desired depth of cut is attained, the operator 
grasps the handle-wheel 34 of the work-car 
rying spindle and moves said spindle, and 
hence also the work, in a direction for the pin 
33 to follow the outlines of the pattern. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that the Work is always revealed to the 
Workman. 
In the practical operation of my invention 
for knife-handle ornamentation it will be un 
derstood that the cutters form the seats in 
the handles to receive the ornaments, the 
knife-handle when completed presenting an 
inlaid surface. In this work it is important 
that the seats for the ornaments be so made 
as to retain the ornaments and prevent the 
Same from becoming loose or detached. This 
purpose is accomplished in the construction 
above described by reason of the fact that 
the cutters always actin a rightline in a hori 
Zontal plane with the center of the work, while 
the material operated on is rocked or rotated 
relative to the plane in which the cutters op 
erate, thereby forming an undercut or dove 
tailed groove, which securely holds the orna 
ment when it is inserted therein, and this I 
consider an important feature of my inven 
tion. 
It will be seen that by arranging the work 
to be simultaneously operated upon by the 
cutters from opposite sides, and that by ro 
tating the cutters in opposite directions with 
respect to each other, and hence in the same 
direction with reference to the line of cut in 
the material, said material is steadied by the 
action of the cutters and is thereby prevented 
from unduly vibrating during the cutting op 
eration. 
In case it is desired to operate on solid knife 
handles it will be understood that the spin 
dle 23 may be readily replaced by a suitable 
holder and a complete rotation of said spin 
dle effected, if desired. 
In the usual manner of forming seats for 
ornaments in knife-handles made in sections 
or halves, as heretofore practiced, it was cus 
tomary for each section or half of the handle 
to be operated on separately. It will be seen 
that in my machine two sections or halves 
are simultaneously operated on, thereby dou 
bling the amount of finished work of the op 
erator. 
No special care or attention is required to 
Operate the machine, and hence unskilled 
O 
15 
25 
35 
43 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
558,951. 
- 
workmen may be employed to manipulate the 
work-holder to cause the pin carried thereby 
to follow the outline of the pattern. 
Many variations and changes in the con 
struction, details, and arrangements of parts 
would readily suggest themselves to persons 
skilled in the art and still fall within the 
spirit and scope of my invention. While, 
therefore, I have shown and described a spe 
cific embodiment of my invention and have 
explained the construction and mode of op 
eration thereof, I do not desire to be limited 
or restricted thereto; but 
What I claim as new and of my own inven 
tion, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States, is- 
1. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, a rotary 
spindle arranged in a plane containing the 
axis of said holder and carrying a cutter, 
adapted to cut laterally, means for relatively 
moving said spindle and Work-holder to cause 
said cutter to penetrate the work endwise, a 
pattern and a tracer, arranged to govern the 
rotary and longitudinal movements of the 
work, the one by the other; as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, rotary 
spindles mounted on opposite sides thereof 
and in a plane containing the axis of Said 
holder and carrying cutters adapted to cut 
laterally, means for relatively moving said 
spindle and work-holder, to cause said cut 
ters to penetrate the Work endwise, a pattern 
and a tracer arranged to govern the rotary 
and longitudinal movements of the work 
holder, the one by the other; as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, a rotary 
spindle arranged in a plane containing the 
axis of said work-holder and carrying a cut 
ter adapted to cut laterally, means for ad 
vancing said spindle toward the work-holder, 
whereby said cutter is caused to penetrate the 
work endwise, a pattern and a tracer arranged 
to govern the rotary and longitudinal move 
ments of the work, the one by the other; as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, rotary 
spindles mounted on opposite sides thereof. 
and in a plane containing the axis of said 
holder, and carrying cutters adapted to cut 
laterally, means for simultaneously advanc 
ing said spindles toward the work-holders, 
whereby the cutters carried thereby are 
caused to penetrate the Work endwise, a pat 
tern and a tracer arranged to govern the ro 
tary and longitudinal movements of the work 
holder; as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, spindles 
mounted on opposite sides thereof and in a 
plane containing the axis of said Work-holder, 
means for rotating said spindles in opposite 
- 
- 
3. 
directions, cutters carried by said spindles 
adapted to cut laterally, means for relatively 
moving said spindles and holder to cause said 
cutters to penetrate the work endwise, a pat 
tern and a tracer arranged to govern the ro 
tary and longitudinal movements of said 
holder, the one by the other; as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
6. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, spindles 
mounted on opposite sides of said holder, and 
in a plane containing the axis of said holder, 
means for rotating said spindles in opposite 
directions cutters carried by said spindles 
adapted to cut laterally, means for advanc 
ing said spindles toward the Work-holder, 
whereby said cutters are caused to penetrate 
the work endwise, a pattern and tracer ar 
ranged to govern the rotary and longitudinal 
movements of said holder, the one by the 
other; as and for the purpose set forth. 
7. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, a rotary 
spindle arranged in the plane containing the . 
axis of said holder, a laterally-operating cut 
ter mounted thereon, means for advancing 
said spindle toward said holder, whereby said 
cutter is caused to penetrate the work end 
wise, means for retaining said spindle in ad 
Vanced position, a pattern and a tracer air 
ranged to govern the rotary and the longitul 
dinal movements of the holder, the one by the 
other; as and for the purpose set forth. 
8. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, a rotary 
spindle arranged in a plane containing the 
axis of said holder and carrying a cutter 
adapted to cut laterally, means for relatively 
moving said holder and spindle whereby said 
cutter is caused to penetrate the work end 
Wise, a tracer carried by said holder, and a 
stationary pattern adapted to be engaged 
by said tracer to govern the rotary and longi 
tudinal movements of said holder, the one by 
the other; as and for the purpose set forth. 
9. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, a rotary 
spindle arranged in a plane containing the 
axis of said holder, and carrying a cutter 
adapted to cut laterally, means for relatively 
moving said holder and spindle whereby said 
cutter is caused to penetrate the work end 
wise, a tracer carried by said holder, a pivot 
ally-mounted pattern adapted to be engaged 
by said tracer to govern the rotary and longi 
tudinal movements of said holder; the one by 
the other; as and for the purpose set forth. 
10. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable Work-holder, a rotary 
spindle arranged in a plane containing the 
axis of said holder, and carrying a cutter 
adapted to cut laterally, means for relatively 
moving said holder and spindle, whereby said 
cutter is caused to penetrate the work end 
wise, a tracer carried by said holder, a piv 
otally-mounted frame carrying a pattern, 
means for securing said frame in position to 
7 O 
75 
IOO 
I ICs 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
45 
55 
 
4. 
558,951 
be engaged by said tracer, to govern the ro 
tary and longitudinal movements of the work 
holder, the One by the other; as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
ll. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, a rotary 
Spindle arranged in a plane containing the 
axis of said holder, and carrying a cutter 
adapted to cut laterally, means for relatively 
moving said holder and spindle, whereby said 
Cutter is caused to penetrate the work end 
Wise, a tracer carried by said holder, a piv 
otally-mounted frame, a pattern removably 
mounted therein, means for securing said 
frame in position for the tracer to engage 
said pattern to govern the rotary and longi 
tudinal movements of the holder, the one by 
the other; as and for the purpose set forth. 
12. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, a rotary 
spindle arranged in a plane containing the 
axis of Said holder, and carrying a cutter 
adapted to cut laterally, means for relatively 
moving said spindle and holder, whereby said 
Cutter is caused to penetrate the work end 
Wise, a tracer carried by said holder, a piv 
otally-mounted frame provided with ways, a 
pattern-plate provided with flanges adapted 
to be received in said ways, and means for 
Securing said frame in position for the tracer 
to engage said pattern, whereby the rotary 
and longitudinal movements of said holder 
are governed, the One by the other; as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
13. In a carving-machine, a longitudinally 
and rotarily movable work-holder, compris 
ing oppositely-faced clamping-jaws, means 
O 
25 
35 
for advancing and retracting said jaws toward 
and from each other, a rotary spindle ar 
ranged in a plane containing the axis of said 
holder and carrying a cutter adapted to cut 
laterally, means for relatively moving Said 
spindle and holder, whereby said cutter is 
caused to penetrate the Work end Wise, a pat 
tern and a tracer arranged to control the ro 
tary and longitudinal movements of the 
holder, the one by the other; as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
14. In a carving-machine, a framework, a 
driving-shaft mounted therein, a longitudi 
nally and rotarily movable work-holder, ro 
tary spindles mounted in said framework on 
opposite sides of said holder, and in a frame 
containing the axis of said holder, cutters 
mounted on said spindle, adapted to cut later 
ally, gearing connecting said driving-shaft 
and adapted to rotate said spindles in oppo 
site directions, means for advancing said 
spindles toward said work-holder, whereby 
said cutters are caused to penetrate the work 
endwise, means for maintaining said cutters 
in advanced position, a tracer carried by said 
holder, and a pattern adapted to be engaged 
by said tracer, whereby the rotary and longi 
tudinal movements of said holder are gov 
erned the one by the other; as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 13th day of November, 1895. 
45 
SO 
55 
GEORGE W. HODGES. 
Attest: 
S. E. DARBY, 
M. I. CAVANAGH, 
0. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559051.txt	( No Model.) 
M. ANDERSON. 
METHOD OF PRODUCING PHOTOGRAPHS IN COLORS, 
No. 559,05l. 
Patented Apr. 28, 1896. 
0. 
Z 
122 7. 
- 
Z 2 z 
)) 
WITNESSES: 
2.222?2-/ 
4/4- 
8-all 
NVENTOR 
Z.4.4.4.4- 
"2%.49% 
AT for NEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
w M A C F A R LANE ANDERSON, OF, NORTH PORT, WASHINGTON. 
METHOD OF PRODUCING PHOTOGRAPHS IN COLORs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 559,051, dated April 28, 1896. 
Application filed May 1, 1895, Serial No. 547,718, (No specimens.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MACFARLANE ANDER 
SON, a citizen of the United States, and a resi 
dent of Northport, in the county of Stevens 
and State of Washington, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Meth 
ods of Producing Photographs in Colors, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention, generally stated, relates to a 
method or process of producing photographs 
in colors; and it consists, essentially, in ex 
posing to the action of light on any applica 
ble photographic apparatus a sensitized sur 
face, which may be of any suitable form, and 
at each exposure certain parts of the sensi 
tized surface are protected against the action 
of light, while other parts are exposed, and at 
such exposure the rays of light are made to 
pass through a colored glass plate or equiva 
lent device whereby the light-rays are cut off 
or absorbed, excepting those particularly de 
sired to affect the sensitive surface at that ex 
In this Way I procure upon the same. 
posure. 
sensitive plate or surface, by means of the 
successive exposures through differently-col 
ored glass plates or the like and attendant 
protections, the desired color value for the re 
production of the color value in the subject. 
Referring to the drawings accompanying 
this specification, Figure I illustrates a dia 
grammatical side view of the parts of a pho 
tographic apparatus, showing the features 
which are immediately connected with my in 
vention. Fig. 2 illustrates a front view of 
the color-value screen and the half-tone 
screen, both so called by me, superposed on 
each other. Fig. 3 illustrates a front view of 
the color-value screen separate by itself. Fig. 
4 illustrates a front view of the half-tone 
Screen separate by itself. 
To construct these devices, wire or other 
suitable material is taken, which may be 
round, flat, or of any other cross-section and 
of aluminium, silver, or other suitable ma 
terial, and stretched over or fastened to a 
light frame, preferably of metal. The wire 
is arranged in parallel lines, and clear spaces 
are left between the adjacent wires propor 
tionate to one-half the thickness, or, as an 
equivalent, (or modified construction,) Itake 
a glass plate and rule upon it opaque lines 
having the same relation to the clear spaces 
between them as the wires to the clear spaces 
above described. This device forms the col 
or-value screen, so called. 
Referring to the drawings more specifically 
for a description in detail, A, Fig. 1, illus 
trates the lenses of the camera; B, Fig. 1, the 
colored plate or filter, which may be located, 
as shown, between the lenses or in any other 
suitable position. 
C, Fig. 1, is the frame which supports the 
(It may be 
wires of the color-value screen. 
taken to represent the ruled glass plate, if 
such be used in the color-value screen.) 
D, Fig. 1, illustrates the wires themselves; 
E, Fig. 1, the frame which supports the fine 
wires of the half-tone screen, and F, Fig. 1, 
the sensitive surface, which, as above stated, 
may be a coated-glass, celluloid, paper, or 
other support, either in sheet or roll form; G, 
Figs. 2 and 3, the spaces between the wires 
D; H, Fig. 4, the fine wires of the half-tone 
SGee. 
When paper or other material in the roll is 
used, the apparatus may be so arranged that 
it shall move behind the color-value screen, 
which will remain stationary instead of that 
screen moving in front of a fixed plate or 
other stationary support. In this case, if de 
sired, the half-tone screen and the color-screen 
may be in one and the same structure. To 
produce negatives giving the true color values 
from any desired subject, I use this screen in 
front of an orthochromatic plate or other suit 
able sensitive surface. The first exposure 
may be made for the red values. The second 
exposure may be, say, for the green. In mak 
ing this second exposure the Wire or glass 
screen, as the case may be, is moved across 
the face of the sensitive plate to a sufficient 
extent to cover the parts previously exposed 
to the action of the light for the production 
of the red values, thus protecting those parts 
from further light action and exposing equal 
adjacent portions to the action of light for 
the greenvalues. The third exposure for the 
blue color value is proceeded within a similar 
manner, the screen moving across the sensi 
tive film a like distance as in the two previous 
exposures and presenting the remaining un 
exposed parts of the sensitive surface to the 
O 
I5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
2 
559,051. 
for the production of the several color values 
that I can get the full development of each 
color. This I deem important, because the 
exposures for a complete production of certain 
colors are necessarily much longer than that 
for other colorsas, for instance, red requires 
an exposure from fifty to one hundred times 
greater than blue; and the same fact, al 
though in different degree, pertains to other 
colors. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The method above described, consisting 
in successively exposing different portions of 
the same sensitive surface to the action of 
light, protecting the parts previously exposed, 
from the action of light, and interposing be 
tween the lens and the sensitive surface, at 
each exposure, a colored filter of the color de 
sired at such exposure, for the purposes set 
forth. 
2. The method above described, consisting 
in successively exposing different portions of 
the sensitive surface to the action of light, 
protecting the parts previously exposed from 
the action of light, continuously protecting 
the sensitive surface against the action of 
light in lines transverse to the portions which 
are exposed, and interposing between the lens 
and the sensitive surface, at each exposure, 
a colored filter of the color desired at such ex 
posure, for the purposes set forth. 
3. The method above described, consisting 
in interposing between the lens and the sen 
sitive surface, a movable device adapted to 
protect successively certain portions of the 
sensitive surface, and to expose successively 
other portions of the sensitive surface, the 
protected parts being not less than the ex 
posed parts, and said device being stationary 
during such exposure, for the purposes set 
forth. 
Signed at Northport, in the county of 
Stevens and State of Washington, this 19th 
day of April, A. D. 1895. 
MACEARLANE ANDERSON. 
Witnesses: 
M. F. HULL, 
G. M. WELTY. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
action of the blue rays, the opaque lines or 
Wires again protecting the parts previously 
exposed from further light action. 
It is desirable that the movement of the 
screen should be secured by suitable and ac 
curate mechanical devices. Coacting with 
the color-value screen in the reproduction of 
the true color value in each exposure I use 
suitable color-filters-that is to say, colored 
plates of glass, which cut off or absorb all 
light-rays excepting those particularly re 
quired to impress the sensitive plate. The 
movement of the screen across the face of the 
sensitive plate is of course made simultane 
ously with the change of the color-filters. 
Transparencies made from negatives obtained 
in this manner will give an exact color render 
ing of subjects photographed when said trans 
parencies are placed upon paper ruled with 
alternate lines of the primary colors and reg 
istering with the same. 
To apply this invention to the production 
of color-value negatives in cameras now in 
use with a roll of the sensitive film, the screen 
is permanently held in front of the film in the 
roll-holder or camera, and the sensitive film 
may be made to travelacross and behind the 
same, the degree of movement in each ex 
posure being regulated by any proper device. 
To produce half-tone pictures, I place im 
mediately in front of the color-value screen 
a frame having tightly stretched across it 
very fine wires, which are parallel with each 
other and so fine and close together that a 
stippled or half-tone effect will be produced. 
The wires in this half-tone frame should 
preferably lie at substantially right angles to 
those of the color-value screen, and the frame 
Supporting them is stationary. 
Should four or more exposures be desired 
or necessary, or if a less number than three 
be desired, then the color-value screen may 
be made in any other desired proportion of 
Wire to the spaces between them or the opaque 
lines to the clear spaces in the glass screen, 
as the case may be; also, the wires or lines 
may run in any other preferred direction than 
that Suggested above. 
It will be observed that by my improve 
ment Such range of exposure can be given 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559153.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 559,153. 
C. s. UPTON. 
IAMP STOWE. 
Patented Apr. 28, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
 
faf AREN 
i; Cl f g 
  
 
  
 
 
lil A Li 
El: A. Y. rim. We 
serg 
gi 
 
 
 
w T N ESSES. 
26/3227a. 
NV Ento R 
6%-ea -/-2%. 
acAcci 
a e? 
zy -- - - Azas lazyvaey. 
aly. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLEs S. UPTON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
LAMP. Stove. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 559,153, dated April 28, 1896. 
Application filed February 4, 1893, 
Serial No. 460,966, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may conce77. 
Beit known that I, CHARLES S. UPTON, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
the city of New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Tamp-Stoves, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of this invention is to produce 
a convenient and economical lamp-stove, one 
simple in construction and operation, and 
which can be used either as a stove or heater 
for various articles and for cooking under cer 
tain circumstances or as an ordinary lamp 
for illuminating purposes; and the invention 
consists in applying to an ordinary lamp a 
heating attachment which can be quickly and 
easily placed in position for use after the lamp 
chimney has been removed, the heating at 
tachment and chimney being simply inter 
changeable whenever desired. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the fol 
lowing specification, of which the accompa 
nying drawings form a part, wherein similar 
numerals of reference designate like or equiv 
alent parts wherever found throughout, the 
several views, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of an ordi 
nary central-draft-lampreservoir, burner,and 
chimney-holder, together with the supportfor 
aheating attachment. Fig. 2 is a view in ele 
vation of the device shown in Fig. 1, with an 
ordinary lamp-chimney applied thereto; and 
Fig. 3 is a similar view of the device shown 
in Fig. 1, provided with a heating attachment. 
Referring to Fig. 1 of the drawings, the ref 
erence-numeral 2 designates the reservoir; 3, 
the burner-body, perforated for the admis 
ision of air in the usual manner; 4, the annu 
lar chimney-support provided with the usual 
spring-holders 5, and 6 the annular wick 
chamber surrounded by the usual annular 
space 7. In the construction shown a perfo 
rated thimble or air-distributer 8 issupported 
by the central tube of the lamp, through which 
the airpassing through said tube is distributed 
to the inner mantle of the flame. All these 
parts are of well-known construction and form 
no part of this invention, being in all particu 
lars substantially the same as the ordinary 
Rochester lamp, and their illustration in 
section and detailed description is not deemed 
necessary. 
Attached to or sustained by the reservoir 
2 is a support 9, consisting of an annular 
plate provided with legs or stays 10, which 
rest upon and are preferably secured to the 
reservoir, and upon this support the heating 
attachment is placed whenever it is desired 
to use the lamp as a heater. This heating 
attachment consists, as shown in Fig. 3, of a 
frame composed of a chimney 11, side rods or 
bars 12, a top plate 13, and braces or stays 14. 
These braces or stays 14 are secured to the 
lower part of the chimney, as shown, in any 
desired manner, and extend downward and 
outward, and are preferably so arranged as 
to rest, when the heater is in position, upon 
the upper flat portions of the legs or stays 10 
of the support 9. The side rods or bars 12 
rest upon the lower portions of the braces or 
stays 14, and a pin or projection 15, formed 
on the lower end of each rod, passes through 
a corresponding perforation in the lower por 
tion or foot of the corresponding stay or brace. 
The top plate 13 is preferably secured to the 
chimney 11 and the upper ends of the rods or 
bars 12 in any desired manner, and this plate 
is of the ordinary spider form and pro 
vided with a central passage through which 
the hot gases or products of combustion read 
ily pass. 
The lower portion of the chimney of the 
heating attachment is smaller than the main 
body thereof, as shown in Fig. 3, and is so 
formed as to fit exactly upon the chimney 
holder of the lamp within the springs 5 in the 
same manner as the chimney 11. (Shown in 
Fig. 2.) 
As thus constructed, the heating attach 
ment consists in its entirety of a single in 
strumentality, which, as will be seen, is in 
use readily interchangeable with an ordinary 
chimney, such as that shown in Fig. 2. 
When the heating attachment is placed in 
position upon the lamp, the projections or 
pins 15 on the lower ends of the rods 12 pass 
through the perforations 16, formed in the 
upper flat portions of the legs or stays 10, and 
are preferably of such length as to extend 
- 
55 
Go 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
559,153 
down to and rest upon the top of the reser- with an ordinary burner and chimney-sup- 45 
yoir or blocks placed thereon, as shown in 
Fig. 3, and hold the heater firmly in position. 
In operation the vessel or article to be 
heated is placed upon the plate 13 in the 
usual manner, and the wick of the lamp (not 
shown) is adjusted by raising or lowering the 
bars 17, a portion of the plate 10 being pref 
erably cut away, as shown at 18, to permit of 
this operation of the wick-adjuster, and in 
the class of lamps referred to as the Roches 
ter the burner and wick-holding band which 
surrounds the central tube of the lamp, to 
gether with the bar 17, are all removable from 
the reservoir, and because of this fact I pre 
fer that the plate 9 be cut in two, as shown 
in Fig. 1, or provided with an opening to per 
mit of this operation, though this is not es 
sential to the invention, as another form of 
Wick-adjuster may be employed. 
It is evident that many changes may be 
made in the construction of this device with 
out departing from the scope of my invention, 
and I do not limit myself to the exact form 
shown; but, 
Having fully described my invention, its 
construction and operation, I claim, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, the follow 
ing: 
1. The combination with a lamp provided 
with an ordinary burner and chimney-holder 
of the support 9 and a heating attachment 
adapted to rest upon said support and to be 
held in place thereon and provided with a 
chimney, the lower end of which is adapted 
to fit upon said chimney-holder, substantially 
as shown and described. 
2. The combination with a lamp provided 
With a removable burner and wick-adjuster 
of an annular support as 9, for a heater, said 
support being cut away, or provided with an 
opening as 18, substantially as shown and de-: 
scribed. 
3. The combination, with a lamp provided : 
port, of a heating attachment consisting of a 
chimney adapted to enter said chimney-sup 
port and having a spider at its upper end, a 
support 9, and side bars 12, attached to said 
spider and resting upon said support 9, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination, with a lamp provided 
with an ordinary burner and chimney-sup 
port, of a heating attachment consisting of a 
chimney adapted to enter said chimney-sup 
port, and having a spider at its upper end, a 
support 9 for the heating attachment, side 
bars 12 attached to the spider and resting 
upon said Support 9, and braces 14, for said 
side bars, substantially as described. 
5. The combination, with a lamp provided 
with an ordinary burner and chimney-sup 
port, of a heating attachment consisting of a 
chimney adapted to enter said chimney-sup 
port and having a spider at its upper end, a 
support 9 for carrying the weight of said heat 
ing attachment, side bars 12, attached to said 
spider and resting upon said support 9, and 
sockets in said support 9, for receiving said 
side bars, substantially as described. 
6. The combination, with a lamp provided 
with an Ordinary burner and chimney-sup 
port 4, of a heating attachment consisting of 
a chimney 11, adapted to enter said chimney 
support, and having a spider 13, at its upper 
end, an auxiliary Support 9, concentric with 
the burner and supported by the body of the 
lamp for holding the Weight of said heating 
attachment, and side bars 12, attached to said 
spider and resting upon said auxiliary sup 
port, substantially as described. 
Signed at the city of New York, in the 
county of New York and State of New York, 
this 2d day of February, A. D. 1893. 
L. E. CARMAN, 
CHAS. WIRTH. 
CHAS. S. UPTON. 
Witnesses: 
55 
7 O 
75 
O 
3O 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559254.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 559, 254. 
Patented Apr. 28, 1896. 
J, A. BLAIR. 
- 
- 
- 
- - . ' 
ELECTRIC HEEL AND T0E PROTECTOR. 
PVZeegreer 
4z???YezSD - 
- ZZezvezeZo7? 
Z Vezezeze AZ. ZGZazz7: 
AzZz 
 
UNITED STATES 
- - 
- 
- 3 -a- 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JENNIE A. BLAIR, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRIC HEEL AND ToE PROTECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 559,254, dated April 28, 1896. 
Application filed February 27, 1896, Serial No. 580,947, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all avhom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ?ENNIE ABLAIR, a citi 
zen of the United States, residingat New York, 
in the county of New York and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Electric Heel and Toe Protectors, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improved elec 
tric heel and toe protector, constructed and 
adapted for the generation and application 
of a mild current of electricity to the foot for 
prevention and cure of rheumatism, chilblain, 
frost-bite, and other ailments, and useful also 
as a protection against cold and dampness 
and for prevention of wear and tear to hosiery. 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
a heel and toe protector comprising soft flexi 
ble sockets to receive the heel and toes re 
spectively and separately provided with in 
closed electropositive and electronegative elle 
ments, such as copper and zinc, preferably 
in the form of filings that when moistened 
will generate a gentle current of electricity 
adapted to the prevention and treatment of 
disease, the said elements being connected 
by a copper wire and the entire device so 
arranged that a circuit will be completed 
through the body of the wearer. 
It is another purpose of my invention to 
connect the heel and toe sockets of the 
pro 
tector by means of flexible and elastic bands 
so arranged as to extend over the arch of the 
foot and hold the protector securely in place 
without interfering with the proper fit of a 
shoe or a free movement of the footin walk 
ing, andin one of these bands may be inclosed 
the wire that connects the elements or elec 
trodes. 
The invention is illustrated in the annexed 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view of my improved heel and 
toe protector. Fig. 2 shows the same on the 
foot. Fig. 3 is a sectional view showing the 
pockets or receptacles for the zinc and cop 
per filings and the connecting wire or con 
ductOr. 
The heel-socket 1 and the toe-socket 2 may. 
each be made from sheepskin or other suit 
able soft material. It is preferable to make 
the rear upper portion of the heel-socket with a 
reinforcing-layer 3 or of double thickness, as 
shown, the said reinforcement being stitched 
| or otherwise secured in place. There is also 
provided in the front lower portion or bottom 
of the heel-socket a reinforcing-layer or dou 
ble thickness of material 4, suitably secured 
or stitched, and at this point there is placed 
between the two thicknesses of material one 
or more small bags or pockets 5, containing, 
say, the zinc element 6, that may be in the 
form of filings or coarse powder. 
The construction of the toe-socket 2 is simi 
lar to the heel-socket. At the toe end there 
is preferably a double thickness of reinforc 
ing material 7, and the socket is extended 
rearward beneath the ball of the foot andre 
inforced by a layer or thickness of material 
8, beneath which is secured one or more bags 
or pockets 9, in which the copper element 10 
is inclosed. It is obvious that the zinc and 
copper elements may be reversed in position 
with relation to the heel and toe sockets, if 
preferred. The reinforcing-pieces and the 
pockets or receptacles for the separated zinc 
and copper filings or other electropositive and 
electronegative elements may be stitched or 
otherwise secured in place. For the purpose 
of connecting the electropositive and electro 
negative elements a copper wire 11 is pro 
vided. 
In order to hold the heel and toe protector 
on the foot it is provided with elastic side 
bands 12, extended from the rear portion of 
the toe-socket to the upper front portion of 
the heel-socket, and an elastic cross-band 13 
is arranged to connect the said side bands 
across the arch of the foot. The wire or con 
ductor 11 is preferably inclosed in one of the 
side bands. 
The device is preferably worn over the 
stocking, as shown in Fig. 2, and will fitneatly 
and smoothly, without tendency to wrinkling, 
there being no connections between the heel 
and toe sockets except the elastic bands and 
inclosed wire. 
Besides protecting the foot against cold, 
dampness, and frQst, the device affords a con 
venient means for the application of elec 
tricity in the treatment of rheumatism, neu 
ralgia, sprains, frost-bite, chilblains, and other 
ailments, and will also prevent wear and tear 
of hosiery. Being worn always within the 
shoe and applied only to the heel and toes it 
offers no obstruction to the bend of the foot 
. 
. 
O 
I 5. 
2 CO 
25 
35 
45 
 
95 
Ioo 
2 
559,254 
O 
in walking and will not interfere with the fit 
of a shoe. 
The protector has no sole portion or con 
nection between the bottom of heel and toe 
sockets, and consequently there is no cramp 
ing or wrinkling when worn within a shoe, 
and the foot is allowed perfect freedom of 
m?Vement. 
The electropositive and electronegative elle 
ments may be slightly moistened before the 
protector is adjusted to the foot, but this is 
not always necessary, for with the heat and 
moisture of the foot a mild current of elec 
tricity will be generated through the sepa 
rately located but connected elements and be 
thereby applied to the body through which a 
circuit is completed. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. As an improved article of manufacture, 
the herein-described electric heel and toe pro 
tector, consisting of the heel-socket and the 
toe-socket connected by elastic bands adapted 
to extend over the arch of the foot and pock 
ets located in said sockets and separately con 
taining electropositive and electronegative 
elements connected by a conductor, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. As an improved article of manufacture, 
the herein-described electric heel and toe pro 
tector, consisting of the heel-socket and the 
toe  socket, each having located therein a 
pocket, electropositive and electronegative 
elements, separately inclosed in the respec 
tive pockets of the heel and toe sockets, bands 
connecting said sockets, and a wire inclosed 
3 
in one of Said bands and connecting the elec 
tropositive and electronegative elements, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit 
60:SS@S. 
4 
JENNIE A. BILAHIR. 
Witnesses: 
WINSTON II. HAGEN, 
MALCOLM W. CLEPHANIE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559354.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 559,354, 
J, P, BIR, 0HALL, 
FLAX THRASHER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
w 
Patented May 5, 1896, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z z 
.5 
???. 
?????? 
? ? 
9 
غ 
Inze7ctor: 
-- Jaco FAirc/a/2. 
?er ! ??torney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB P. BIRCHALL OF FARGO, NORTH DAKOTA. 
FAX-THRAS HER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 559,354, dated May 5, 1896. 
Application filed October 16, 1894, Serial No. 526,893, (No model.) 
To all whon, it nucly conce77. 
Be it known that I, JACOB P. BIRCHALL, of 
Fargo, Cass county, North Dakota, have in 
vented certain Improvementsin Flax-Thrash 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
thrashing-machines, its object being to pro 
vide an improved form of machine adapted 
especially for the thrashing of flax in such 
manner as to remove the seed therefrom with 
out Seriously injuring or breaking the fiber. 
To this end my invention consists in the 
combination of an inclined feed-board hav 
ing gangs of dogs projecting through slots in 
the same, adapted to tear loose and carry 
with them small quantities of the flax from 
the bundle lying in a mass upon the board; 
a pair of crushing-rolls, preferably having an 
elastic covering, positioned to receive the flax 
from the feed-board; an endless belt with 
teeth or projections for carrying the flax from 
the rolls over a thrashing table or floor, and 
a gang of flails arranged to strike the flax as 
it passes over this floor, so as to beat out the 
seeds remaining in the bolls. I also prefer to 
arrange in connection with the thrashing-ta 
ble a series of suitable separating-shoes and 
cleaning-sieves and a self-binding attach 
ment to receive and bind into bundles the 
straw as it comes from the sieves. 
My invention further consists in the con 
struction and combination hereinafter more 
particularly described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation of a separator fitted with my in 
proved attachments, consisting offeed-board, 
crushing-rolls, thrasher, and binder, the side 
walls of the machine being partially broken 
away to show the interior mechanism. Fig. 
2 is a partial side elevation of the same, show 
ing the means for driving the Yarious oper 
ating parts. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the same. 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged plan view of the feed 
board. Fig. 5 is a side elevation of the same, 
a part of the frame being broken away to 
show the pivoted dogs. 
Fig. 6 is an enlarged 
detail of part of the same. Fig. 7 is an end 
view of one of the crushing-rolls, and Fig. 8 
is a detail central longitudinal section of the 
Sale. 
In the drawings, A represents convention 
ally an ordinary separator, from which the 
thrashing-cylinder has been removed and my 
improved attachments substituted. These 
consist of an inclined feed-board B, which is 
made up of a frame 2, between the bars 3 of 
which are arranged reciprocating gangs of 
compound bars 4, made up of similar strips or 
pieces 5, with intermediate blocks 6, leaving 
slots in which are pivoted series of dogs 7. 
One end, 8, of each dog projects above the 
top of the bars, the other end, 9, being held 
between pins 10 and 11, permitting slight 
oscillation. These gangs of compound bars 
and dogs are secured upon cross-bars 12 and 
13 alternately, and these cross-bars are con 
nected by pitmen 14 and 15 with a double 
crank-shaft 16, driven by means of a belt 17 
and running over the wheel 18, keyed upon 
the shaft 16, whereby the two gangs of dogs 
are reciprocated alternately. Near the bot 
tom of the feed-board is hung the adjustable 
brace 19, the space between which and the 
feed-board being adjusted for the work to be 
done by means of the link 20, adjustably se 
cured to the standards 21. 
At the bottom of the feed-board is arranged 
the pair of crushing-rolls 22 and 23, so posi 
tioned as to receive the flax as it is carried 
by the dogs underneath the stop 19. The 
upper roll 22 is mounted in suitable bearings 
upon cross-bars 24, which have a vertical 
sliding movement controlled by cushion 
springs 25, interposed between them and the 
fixed bars 26, the springs thus determining 
the amount of pressure of the roll upon the 
While these rolls may be 
one underneath. 
of any desired construction, I prefer that 
shown in detail, Figs. 7 and 8, in which 
the cylinder 27 is covered with an elastic en 
velop or tire 28, made preferably of soft 
rubber, this being inclosed and protected by 
the cover 29, of canvas or other material, to 
protect it from injury and undue wear. The 
rolls 22 and 23 are driven by means of the 
common belt 17, running over their pulleys 
30 and 31, as shown best in Fig. 2. Arranged 
on the oppositeside of the crushing-rolls is the 
platform 32, upon which the flax is delivered 
after passing through the crushing-rolls. 
Thence it is carried over the downwardly-in 
clined thrashing-floor 33 by means of the end 
lessfeed-belt 34, having projections or prongs 
2 ? 
25 
35 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
45 
 
2 
559,354 
35 and carried upon suitable rolls 36 and 37, 
driven by the belt 17 through the medium of 
the wheel 38. The prongs 35 of the belt pro 
ject through slots 39 in the thrashing-floor 
and engage the flax. (See Fig. 3.) 
Above the thrashing-floor is arranged a 
gang of fails 40, secured at one end to the 
rock-shaft 41, and so positioned as to stand 
above the slats of the floor. The flails are 
operated by means of the arm 42, fixed to the 
rock-shaft 41, and connected by means of the 
pitman 43 to the crank-shaft, 44, driven by 
means of the common belt 17 running over 
the wheel 45. 
From the thrashing device the straw is de 
livered onto the shoes 46 and other cleaning 
devices. (Not shown.) From the rear of the 
separator the straw is delivered onto the end 
less belt 47 and carried between it and the 
endless belt 48 to the binder attachment 49, 
of any suitable construction, the features of 
which are not necessarily shown. 
In operation the flax bundle, the band of 
which has been severed, is laid transversely 
upon the feed-table and against the stop 19, 
which is adjusted with its lower edge in such 
position above the feed-table as to permit the 
proper quantity of flax to be carried under 
neath. The gangs of dogs alternately recip 
rocated in the manner described in their up 
ward movement are depressed as they pass 
under the flax, but in their downward move 
ment engage alld tear away Small quantities 
of the flax and carry it underneath the stop. 
Thence the flax is delivered sidewise to the 
crushing-rolls in a continuous stream, in pass 
ing between which the bolls are crushed and 
a portion of the seeds freed. Thence the 
straw passes over the intermediate table and 
I CD 
2 ? 
25 
35 
onto the thrashing-floor, where the remainder 
of the seeds are beaten out, thence passing 
through the separator and the binding at 
tachment, by which it is rebound into bun 
dies, so that it may be treated for the remov 
ing of the fiber. 
As the result of this improved mechanism 
and process the stalks, being carried trans 
versely of the feeding, crushing, and thrash 
ing mechanism, are practically unbroken, and 
are kept with their tips and butts in aline 
ment, so as to be as readily bundled as when 
delivered from the harvester cycle-bars. The 
bundles of thrashed straw can then be read 
ily treated for removing the woody matter 
and cleaning the fiber with the least possible 
Waste. 
I claim 
In a flax-thrasher, the combination with the 
feed-board, of the bundle-stop adjustably ar 
ranged above the same, the series of dogs for 
subdividing the bundle lying against said 
stop and carrying the stalks in a thin layer 
transversely of the path of their movement, 
the crushing-rolls, the longitudinally-slotted 
thrashing-floor, the endless toothed carriers 
arranged under said thrashing-floor with their 
teeth projecting through the slats thereof, the 
series of pivoted flails arranged above the 
slats of said floor and adapted to thrash the 
stalks while passing over the same, and the 
self-binding attachment. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JACOB P. BIRCHALL. 
Witnesses: 
R. A. SHATTUCK, 
Y. IRVIN. 
- 
45 
55 
7 O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559454.txt	(No Model.) 
C. KELLNER, 
PROCESS OF AND MEANS FOR PRODUCING BLEACHINGAGENTS, 
No. 559,454. 
 
Patented May 5, 1896. 
SaaSAA 
rar 7-zi-22, 7 z. z. 
wresses. - 
467 a.4) 
zeczor, 
CE.7series 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL KELLNER, OF WIE 
NNA, AUSTRIA-HUNGARY. 
PROCESS OF AND VEANS FOR P 
RODUCING BLEACHING AG ENTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Lette 
Application filed November 1, 1892, Serial No. 450,605, (No 
in Austria-Hungary October 12, 
rs Patent No. 559,454, dated May 5, 1896. 
specimens.) Patented in England May 28, 1892, No. 10,200, and 
1892, No. 26,679 and No. 42,114, 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARL KELLNER, a sub 
ject of the Emperor of Austria-Hungary, re 
siding at Vienna, in the Province of Lower 
Austria, in the Empire of Austria-Hungary, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in the Processes of and Means 
for the Production of Bleaching Agents, (for 
which I have obtained Letters Patent in Aus 
tria-Hungary, No. 26,679, and No. 42,114, 
dated October 12, 1892, and in England, No. 
10,200, dated May 28, 1892;) and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters of reference marked there 
On, which form a part of this specification. 
This invention has relation to the produc 
tion of liquid bleaching agents by electroly 
sis; and it consists in the method of and in the 
means for producing the said agents. 
Liquid bleaching agents have heretofore 
been obtained by electrolysis in two ways, 
either by decomposing a chlorid of a metal 
of the alkalies or alkaline earths, as mag 
nesium or sodium chlorid, or a combination 
or mixture thereof, and in causing the result 
antions or ions formed by a secondary proc 
ess to act upon one another in the decompos 
ing cellor vesselitself in order to form hypo 
chlorites, or by causing the chlorin separated. 
from a chlorid of an alkali or of an alkaline 
earth to be absorbed by milk of lime. 
In the first method the hypochlorites formed 
are in part decomposed by the hydrogen lib 
erated at the cathode, and as the hydrogenis 
liberated under evolution of heat the hypo 
chlorites are liable to be converted into chlo 
rates, which have no bleaching properties, as 
is Well known. 
The second mode of obtaining liquid bleach 
ing agents by electrolysis by passing or forc 
ing the chlorin into milk of lime is not only 
inconvenient but comparatively expensive, 
for the reason that irrespective of the cost of 
the milk of lime the products formed at the 
so cathode cannot be utilized, except in very 
rare instances, and for the further reason 
that an equivalent quantity of dilute solu 
35 
3O 
id 
45 
According to my invention the ions- 7o 
- 
The object of this invention is to provide 55 
tion of caustic alkali remains useless, while 
the electrolyte cannot be returned into the 
cycle of bleaching operations. 
means whereby the difficulties and disadvan 
tages just referred to are obviated, and 
whereby advantages are obtained, the essen 
tial ones of which are the following: First, 
bleaching solutions of any desired strength 6o 
can be obtained; second, the electric cur 
rent is completely utilized-that is to say, 
the electrochemical equivalent is absolutely 
attained; third, there is no outlay for a base 
for the formation of hypochlorites; fourth, 65 
the electrolyte can be used over and over 
again, and, fifth, the apparatus necessary to 
carry out the process is of a very simple and 
at the same time durable character. 
namely, the chlorin and alkaline solutions 
resulting from the electrolytical decomposi 
tion of a chlorid of a metal of the alkalies-are 
brought in contact and mixed with each other 
outside of the decomposing-vessel (electro- 75 
lytic apparatus) in order to produce hypo 
chlorites. This can be done in two ways, 
first, by allowing the chlorin liberated at 
the anode to pass off in a gaseous state into 
a mixer and combining the same with the So 
alkaline solution obtained at the cathode 
namely, the Solution of the hydrate of the 
metal-or by drawing or forcing the chlorin 
gas through said Solution, or by causing the 
gas to flow into the sprayed or otherwise 85 
finely - divided cathode solution, the two 
fluidsflowingin opposite directions; secondly, 
the anode solution containing chlorin may 
also be combined with the cathode hydrate 
solution in a separate vessel in order to form go 
hypochlorites; but I prefer to combine the 
gaseous chlorin. With the cathode solution by 
absorption. In either case it is not only desir 
able but necessary that the alkaline hydrate 
formed at the cathode be freed from hydrogen 95 
before the ions are combined in order to avoid 
the formation of chlorates. 
In the accompanying drawings I have illus 
trated apparatus of suitable construction for 
carrying out the above-described process, in Ioo 
which drawings 
Figure 1 shows the apparatus by a sectional 
2 
559,454 
TO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
elevation. Fig. 2 is a like view of an appa 
ratus wherein the operation of bleaching may 
be carried out simultaneously with the pro 
duction of bleaching agents, and Fig. 3 is a 
detail plan view of the combining or mixing 
and bleaching Vat. 
I have deemed it unnecessary to show the 
electrolytic apparatus in detail, inasmuch as 
an apparatus may be employed of a Well 
known construction and containing a series 
of anode and cathode cells arranged in a Well 
known manner, so that the chlorin liberated 
at the anodes and the alkaline solution formed 
at the cathodes may be separately drawn 
off-as, for instance, an apparatus Such as 
shown in my British patent, No. 9,346, of 1892. 
In the above drawings, Aindicates the tank 
that contains the solution of a chlorid or chlo 
rids of the metals of the alkalies or alkaline 
earths, said tank being connected by a valved 
pipe C, with the electrolytic apparatus R, 
which, as above stated, may be of any Well 
known and suitable construction. The chlo 
rin liberated at the anode or anodes flows 
through a valved pipe R' to an absorption 
tank or tower C, said pipe R' being connected 
with the tank or tower near the bottom there 
of, and said tank being partially filled with 
any suitable material whereby the entering 
gas is divided into numerous streams-as, for 
instance, pieces of brick or stone or glass 
balls or other equivalent material-as shown 
at C". The alkaline solution obtained at the 
cathodes flows through a pipe R' into a vator 
tank D, wherein it is agitated by means of 
agitators g g for the purpose of liberating 
any hydrogen carried over with the solution. 
The tank or vessel D is connected by a pipe 
R. With the upper end of the absorption 
tower C, said pipe projecting into the tower 
and terminating in a downwardly-discharg 
ing rose-head E, whereby the alkaline solu 
tion is delivered in a finely-divided state into 
an atmosphere of chlorin, the absorption of 
the gas being thus greatly facilitated, while 
the hypochlorite or bleaching solutions 
formed by the combination of the chlorin 
with the alkali-hydrate solution flows through 
a siphon-pipe c at the lower end of the ab 
sorption-tower C into a vesself. The chlorin 
gas not absorbed is drawn from the tower C 
into a vessel or tank J, partly filled with al 
kaline solution, the necessary suction being 
obtained through the medium of a pump H, 
connected with vessel J and with an ejector 
g, by suction and force pipes h h', respec 
tively, and to the casing G of said ejector the 
upper end of the tower C is connected by 
pipe R', said ejector-casing G having con 
nected thereto a pipeg', terminating in a bell 
mouth and extending down near to the bot 
tom of vessel J. By means of the ejector 
the liquid is sprayed or finely subdivided, 
While the excess of chlorin is drawn from tower 
C into the finely-divided liquid and is ab 
sorbed thereby. 
The material to be bleached-as, for in 
stance, paper-pulp-may be introduced into 
vessel J for the purpose of partially bleaching 
the same by the action thereon of the weak 
bleaching liquor; but, if desired, the process 
of absorption and the production of bleaching 
liquor may be carried out in the same vessel 
in conjunction with or independently of the 
absorption-tower C, in which case the Vessel 
D is connected with the suction-pipe of the 
pump by a valved pipe R', and the anode-cells 
of said apparatus with the ejector-casing by 
pipe R, the tank J being further connected 
by a valved pipe p with the vesself, said con 
nections prR being shown in dotted lines. 
In the production of bleaching liquor in 
tank J the latter should be supplied in start 
ing the operation with just sufficient liquid 
to work the injector, so as to produce the nec 
essary suction to draw the chlorin from the 
electrolytic apparatus. In order to increase 
the conductivity of the electrolyte, a suitable 
quantity of acid, as hydrochloric acid, may 
be mixed there with, and if it is desired to pro 
duce hypochloric acid the absorption-tower is 
filled with limestone. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown, instead of the ves 
sel or tank J, a paper-pulp vat K of any usual 
or preferred construction, said vat being di 
vided by a partition K", that does not extend 
from end to end of the Vat, as shown in said 
figure and in Fig. 3. The suction-pipe of the 
pump is connected with the vat on one side 
of said partition, and the ejector-pipeg' ex 
tends into said vat on the opposite side of said 
partition, so that a constant circulation of the 
bleaching liquor is maintained, as shown by 
arrows, Fig. 3. 
In the bleaching of textiles a vat without a 
partition and having a perforated bottom will 
be employed, as will be readily understood. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The herein-described process of produc 
ing liquid bleaching agents, which consists in 
subjecting a solution of a chlorid or chlorids 
of the metals of the alkalies or alkaline earths 
to the action of an electric current and com 
bining the chlorin liberated at the anode with 
, the alkaline hydrate formed at the cathode in 
a separate vessel by causing the gasliberated 
at the anode to flow in an upward direction 
and the alkaline Solution formed at the cath 
Ode in a downward direction through said ves 
Sel, for the purpose set forth. 
2. The herein-described process of produc 
ing liquid bleaching agents, which consists in 
Subjecting a solution of a chlorid or chlorids 
of the metals of the alkalies or alkaline earths 
to the action of an electric current and com 
bining the chlorin liberated at the anode with 
the alkaline hydrate formed at the cathode in 
a separate vessel, by causing the chlorin to 
flow in a divided state in an upward direction 
and the alkaline hydrate in the form of spray 
in a downward direction through said vessel, 
for the purpose set forth. 
75 
95 
IOC) 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
559,454. 
B 
vessel provided with agitating devices, sep 
arate pipes connecting said vessel with the 
cathode cell or cells of the electrolytic appa 
ratus and with the upper end of said tower, 
respectively, a tank or Vat, an ejector having 
its casing extended to project into the vat, a 
pump connected with the ejector and vat, and 
a pipe connecting the upper end of the ab 
sorption-tower with the ejector-casing, for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses, 
CARL KELLNER. 
25 
Witnesses: 
W. B. MURPHY, 
PAUL BERGER. 
3. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination with the electrolytic appa 
ratus, of an absorption tank or tower, sepa 
rate pipes connecting the anode and cathode 
cellor cells of said apparatus respectively with 
the lower and upper ends of the tower, a tank 
or vat, an ejector having its casing extended 
to project into the vat, a pump connected with 
the ejector and Vat, and a pipe connecting the 
upper end of the absorption-tower with the 
ejector-casing, for the purpose set forth. 
4. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination. With the electrolytic appa 
ratus, of an absorption tank or tower, a pipe 
connecting the anode cell or cells of said ap 
paratus with the lower end of the tower, a 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559554.txt	- 
H. A. WEBSTER, 
r 
NAIL, BLOCK OR PLATE FOR HEEL ATTACHING MACHINES, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 559,554, 
Patented May 5, 1896, 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
222222222 
2222222222 
 
36.2% 
7-2 
 
 
Fi G-6- 
S 
 
 
 
 
 
A. F-7. s 
2 22 
222222222 
2 
Wi-t- Ne S S E S : 
%27%-ol. risis. 
in Ven to R: 
Qalael Q. 4 e6-(e. 
4, 4-, 24-ruza 
 
No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
H. A. WEBSTER, 
NAIL, BLOCK OR PLATE FOR HEEL ATTACHING MACHINES, 
No. 559,554, 
Patented May 5, 1896, 
N. 
Fig.11. 
FG-12. 
 
Fig.13. 
Fig.14. 
MTN ESSE Si. 
-%-24%e2-e- a- 
INVENTOR 
4; T. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIAROLD A. WEBSTER, OF HAVERHILL, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO 
JAMES W. BROOKS, TRUSTEE, OF CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
NAL BLOCK OR PLATE FOR HEEL-ATTACHING MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 559,554, dated May 5, 1896. 
Application filed January 30, 1889, Serial No, 298,097, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may conce77. 
lBe it known that I, HAROLD A. WEBSTER, 
a citizen of the United States of America, and 
a resident of the city of Haverhill, in the 
county of Essex and State of Massachusetts, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Nail Blocks or Plates for Heel 
Attaching Machines, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to heel plates or 
blocks of the machine for attaching boot or 
shoe heels constituting the application, for 
Letters Patent of the United States which I 
filed February 18, 1888, Serial No. 264,538, 
and which are used in that machine to bend 
the projecting nail-points outwardly in a ra 
dial direction as the top lift is being forced 
Over the projecting heads of the nails of and 
thus attached to the heels, the object of such 
bending being, first, to prevent the displace 
ment of the heel while it is being attached to 
the boot or shoe by the bending or yielding 
of the projecting points of the nails, which 
bending would be liable to occur if the points 
were straight and parallel with each other, 
and, Secondly, to cause the nails to turn or 
clench outwardly or toward the margin of the 
heel-seat, thus making the attachment of the 
heel more secure and effecting a tighter joint 
between the heel and the heel-seat than would 
be possible if the nails were turned or clenched 
at random. 
This invention consists of a heel plate or 
block in upper and lower sections or parts 
suitably attached together. The upper part 
has a series of round holes through its thick 
ness and arranged in the outline of a boot or 
shoe heel and corresponding to the location 
of the nails in the boot or shoe heel. The 
lower part has a series of anvil-blocks seated 
in it, preferably so as to be removable at 
pleasure. Each anvil lies across a hole of 
the upper part of the heel-plate and has a 
groove or channel from side to side of the 
hole, having walls at diametrical opposite 
sides of the hole which extend down Ward into 
the anvil and meet at their lower end in an 
acute angle, all substantially as hereinafter 
described. 
In the drawings forming part of this specifi 
cation, Figures 1 and 8 are top face views, 
X. 
and Figs. 2 and 9 are edge views, of the lower 
part of the heel plate or block, the upper part 
being detached. Fig. 3 is a top face view, 
and Figs. 4 and 5 are edge views, of the upper 55 
part of the heel-plate, the lower part being 
detached. Fig. 6 is a transverse section of 
the heel-plate, line 6 6, Fig. 1; and Fig. 7 is 
a similar section enlarged and in detail. 
Figs. 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 are views, enlarged, 6o 
of modifications of the anvil-blocks, as here 
inafter appear. Figs. 15 and 16 are vertical 
sectional views hereinafter referred to. 
In the drawings, A and B are the upper and 
lower parts or sections of the heel plate or 
block secured together by dowel-pins C. a. and 
rivet b. 
CC are a series of round holes through the 
thickness of upper part. A and arranged in 
the outline of and corresponding to the loca- 7o 
tion of the nails in a boot or shoe heel. 
D D are a series of anvil-blocks, each en 
tered in a socket E of the lower part B and 
lying across a hole C of the upper part. 
F is a groove or channel in each anvil-block 
D at its face opposite to the hole C. Each 
groove or channel F of the anvil-blocks ex 
tends diametrically across from side to side 
of the hole C, and the walls fg at its opposite 
ends extend downward into the block and 
meet in an acute angle h, which, laterally, is 
beyond the vertical plane of the correspond 
ing side of the hole C. 
In the use of the heel plate or block de 
scribed and in the machine referred to, Figs. 
15 and 16, the projecting points of the nails 
of the heel are forced through the holes C of 
the upper part A of the heel-plate into and 
against the downwardly-inclining walls g of 
the grooves or channels of the anvil-blocks 
of the lower part B and thereby bent laterally 
and in a corresponding downwardly-inclining 
direction. 
In bending the nail-points, as described, the 
opposite side walls k l of the channels or 
grooves of the anvil-blocks hold the nail 
points in position for the walls g to Work on 
them, as stated. 
Figs. 1, 7, and 4 show the sides k l of the 
grooves or channels of the anvil-blocks as 
straight and parallel. The grooves or chan 
nels F may be round, Figs. 10, 11, 12, and 13, 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
I5 
2O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
559,554 
and formed by boring inclined holes H, Figs. 
10 and 11, in the lower part B, and then in 
serting plugs G, Figs. 12 and 13, in the holes 
to close them, shaped, as at m, to give inclin 
ing walls g for securing the bend of the nail 
points. 
Straight and parallel side walls k l for the 
grooves or channels F of the anvil-blocks are 
most preferable, for the reasons stated. 
The anvil-blocks D are preferably made 
tapering, as also the sockets E of the lower 
part B to receive them, all so that an accu 
rate and close fit and seating of the blocks 
may be secured. Furthermore, to facilitate 
the removal of the anvil-blocks a hole J is 
made through the lower part of each socket 
for the insertion of a proper tool to force the 
anvil-block out of its seat. 
As the anvil-blocks obviously can be turned 
in their sockets, their grooves or channels can 
be placed in different lines or directions, ac 
cording to the direction in which it is desired 
to bend the nail-points. Although the heel 
plate or block of this invention has been de 
scribed, particularly in relation to the heel 
attaching machine stated, it is not intended 
to limit it thereto. 
It will be seen that by arranging the anvil 
blocks so that they will turn the points of the 
nails outwardly, so that said points will radi 
ate or approximately radiate from the center 
of the heel, the nails are caused to bend or 
clench outwardly toward the margin of the 
heel-seat and thereby finally unite the mar 
gin of the heel to the heel-seat. The turning 
of the points also insures the correct position 
of the heel when it is attached by preventing 
the nails from bending all in one direction 
while they are being forced into the bottom 
of the boot or shoe. 
When the nail-points have been bent as de 
scribed, the block B will be removed, and such 
IO . 
25 
35 
Having thus described my invention, what 55 
of the anvil-blocks D as adhere to the bent 
nail-points may readily be removed by a slight 
lateral movement in the directionin which the 45 
nail-point has been bent. 
When the said blocks B and D have been 
removed, the block A may be removed from 
the nail-points by inserting any suitable tool 
between the heel-lifts and the block A and 5o 
forcing the latter off. The bent ends of the 
nails will yield sufficiently to permit this op 
eration, and will still remain bent sufficiently 
to cause the final radial clenching. 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A heel plate or block, composed of an 
upper part Ahaving holes C through its thick 
ness, and a lower part B held on the upper 
part in combination with removable anvil 
blocks D of lower part B opposite to hole C of 
upper part A and each having a groove or 
channel F with parallel side walls k, l, and 
opposite walls f,g, downwardly extending and 
meeting in an acute angle, substantially as 
described, for the purpose specified. 
2. A heel plate or block, composed of an 
upper part Ahaving holes C through its thick 
ness, and a lower part B held on the upper 
part in combination with removable anvil 
blocks D of lower part B opposite to holes C of 
upper part A and each having a groove or 
channel F with opposite walls f,g downwardly 
extending and meeting in an acute angle, sub 
stantially as described, for the purpose speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
75 
H. A. WEIBSTER. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT W. BROWN, 
EDWARD HAMILTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559654.txt	(No Model.) 
A. J., WOLFF, 
BICYCLE OR TRICYCLE WHEEL. 
No. 559,654, 
Patented May 5, 1896. 
 
 
 
  
5% 2Z. 
P 
ZZZZZZZZ 
 
AVd 2 esses: 
(2/(2zae- 
czeez/ 92 (2- 
. 
6 
2Z22E 
GS2 -2 
;S6 34 
sia NE329 
2v6 
et 
 
Azavetzaor, 
477/7ZervMey. 
2. aes aozae 
ANDiew s GRAHAM, Proto-unio WAshta GTON, OC 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTIIUR J. WOLFF, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
BCYCLE OR TRCYCLE WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 559,654, dated May 5, 1896. 
Application filed January 9, 1896, Serial No. 574,890, (No model.) 
55 
To call, whon, it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, ARTHUR J. WolFF, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hart 
ford, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Bicycle or Tricycle 
Wheels, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to wheels, but more 
especially, however, to that class of wheels 
known in the art as bicycle and tricycle? 
wheels, and more particularly relates to the 
hubs and hub-bearings thereof; and the ob 
ject of the invention is to provide a wheel in 
which the interior of the hub and its bearings 
will be protected from dust and dirt and in 
which the bearings will be regularly and con 
stantly supplied with a suitable lubricant. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide means, simple in construction, which 
will accomplish the objects above stated and 
which will also constitute an additional means 
for securing and holding the inner ends of the 
spokes in position relatively to the hub. 
In the drawings accompanying and forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a dia 
metrical partly-sectional view of a portion of 
a wheel, showing this improved dust and 
dirt protecting and lubricating means in con 
nection therewith. Fig. 2 is an end view of 
the hub; and Fig. 3 is a vertical partly-sec 
tional view of the hub, showing a somewhat 
different construction of means for securing 
the dirt-protecting means in position. 
Similar characters of reference designate 
like parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
In the preferred form thereof herein shown 
and described the hub (designated in a gen 
eral way by B) has a suitable annular or cup 
shaped flange 4 at each end thereof, opening 
in opposite directions to each other and sur 
Each of these 
rounding the axle or shaft 6. 
flanges has an annular runway 7 in its inner 
wall for the reception of suitable bearings, 
such as ball-bearings 8, said wall thereby 
constituting one member of the bearing. Se 
cured adjacent to each annular flange 4, and 
preferably forming an extension thereof, is a 
spoke-flange 15, and which spoke-flanges are 
herein shown in the nature of cup-flanges, also 
5.o opening in opposite directions to eaglh other. 
and having the rims 16thereof encircling the 
flanges 4. Each of these spoke-flanges 15 has 
a series of slots 17 in the rim 16 thereof, each 
slot preferably having differential diameters 
and shown herein in the nature of keyhole or 
buttonhole slots opening at the free edge of 
the rim 16. These slots are disposed in any 
suitable way-such, for instance, as in pairs 
as shown and described in my prior patent, 
No. 556,123, dated March 10, 1896, as the 
present construction is in the nature of an 
improvement on the hub portion of the wheel 
therein shown and to which application ref 
erence is therefore made for a more explicit 
description of those parts not particularly 
embraced in this improvement. 
A cap 21, having a flange or rim 22, is re 
movably secured in position on each annular 
flange 4, whereby the flange or rim 22 will fit 
over the rim 16 of the spoke-flange 15 and close 
the slots 17 thereof, said cap 21 and spoke 
flange 15 thus forming between them a cham 
ber 20, surrounding the annular flange 4 and 
adapted to receive a suitable lubricant, and 
which chamber will therefore, for the purposes 
of this specification, be herein designated 
as a lubricating-chamber. This flange or 
rim 22 preferably has a series of notches or 
recesses 23 in its free edge corresponding 
with the number of spokes held by the spoke 
flange, whereby the rim 22 will be permitted 
closely to engage the spokes and not only 
close the slots in the rim 16, and thus prevent 
the dust and dirt from entering the lubricat 
ing-chamber 20, but also constitute an addi 
tional holding means for the spokes. 
The other member of each bearing is pref 
erably shown consisting of a conically-shaped 
nut 24, adjustably and removably Secured on 
the shaft or axle and having its conical por 
tion extending within the annular flange 4, 
and thereby holding the balls 8 in place. By 
this construction of flange 4 and nut 24 a. 
chamber 5 is formed between them for the 
reception of the antifriction-balls 8 and the 
lubricant received from the lubricating-cham 
ber 20, surrounding said chamber 5, and said 
chamber 5 will, for the purposes of this speci 
fication, be herein designated as a bearing 
chamber. This conically-shaped nut may 
be secured in place by any suitable means 
such, for instance, as by having interior 
threads engaging with threads 9 on the shaft 
75 
OC 
O 
3o 
45 
 
. 
. . . . . . 
Io 
20 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. . . 
. . 
. 
- 
. 
559,654 
. 
- 
be easily removed. 
. 
or axle, (see Fig. 3,) or may be secured in place 
by a check-nut 10, if desired, (see Fig. 1) in 
which latter case the bearing member 24 cala 
Any suitable fastening means may be used 
for securing the caps 21 in position, and one 
means thereof herein shown comprises suit 
able fastening devices, such as screws, 25, 
(see Fig. 3,) extending through apertures in 
the caps and having their threaded ends en 
gaging threaded apertures 26 in the spoke 
flanges 15. 
According to another form of means for Se 
curing each cap 21 in position, each annular 
flange 4 of the bearing-chamber 5 has its ex 
terior wall provided with screw-threads 27, 
with which a nut 28 is adapted to engage and 
securely hold the cap in position. 
Within each lubricating chamber 20, 
formed by the spoke-flange 15 and the cap 
21, suitable lubricating material- such, for 
instance, as Waste 
or a disk of suitable felt 
29-is disposed. 
Extending through each annular flange 4 
of the bearing-chambers 5 and connecting 
each bearing-chamber and lubricating-cham 
ber is a suitable oil duct or passage 30, pref 
erably inclined, and by means of which the 
bearings will be lubricated by the lubricant 
fed from the lubricating-chamber. Each cap 
21 is provided with a suitable oil-inlet port, 
(see Fig. 2.) by means of which the lubricat 
ing-chambers 20 may be supplied with oil, 
and which port may be closed in any suitable 
way-such, for instance, as by a spring-cap 
or by means of a headed screw 31, as herein 
shown. 
In order to retain the lubricant within each 
bearing-chamber, when fed thereto, and pre 
vent the exit thereof between the outer edge 
of the wall of said chamber and the conic 
ally-shaped nut, a suitable packing is dis 
posed and held in position by any suitable 
means. In the construction shown in Fig. 3, 
however, the annular wall of each chamber 
5 is provided with a suitable recess 32, fitting 
within which is a suitable disk of packing 33, 
secured therein by means of a flange 37 on 
the bearing member or conical nut 24. 
According to anotherform of construction, 
(shown in Fig. 1,) the conically-shaped nut 
is cut a Way, as at 34, and a suitable disk of 
packing 35 fits around the same and is se 
cured in position by means of an inwardly 
extending circular flange 36 on the nut 28. 
In assembling the parts of this improved 
hub the spokes 40, which may be of any suit 
able construction, but which are preferably 
provided with enlarged heads 41, are placed 
in position relatively to the slots 17 of the hub. 
The waste or disk of felt 29 is then placed in 
each cup-shaped flange 15 and the cap placed 
in position on the flanges 4, thus forming the 
lubricating-chambers 20, and secured thereon 
by the fastening devices. The lubricating 
chambers are then supplied with oil, whereby 
the waste or disks of felt will become satu 
. 
rated and furnish a constant supply to the 
bearings by means of the oil ducts or passages 
30, connecting the bearing and lubricating 
chambers. It will be understood, however, 
I that any other means for supplying or con- 
ducting oil from the lubricating-chamber 20, 
to the bearing-chamber 5 might be used. For 
instance, each oil duct or passage might be 
provided with a wick or projection extending 
from the oil-holding disk for directly convey 
ing the oil to the wearing surfaces. 
in operation the interior parts of the mech 
anism ordinarily become heated owing to the 
friction of the working surfaces, while the 
outer parts thereof will remain cool, so that 
if the oil held in the disk or waste be normally 
of a low grade of fluidity it will naturally be 
come heated on the inner edge of the disks S5 
s 5 
or waste, and thus be made to flow more freely 
to the wearing surfaces, and thus cause the 
I supply of oil to be gradually and regularly 
supplied to the wheel-bearings, whereby the 
necessity of constantly oiling the bearings by po 
the rider is obviated. 
By means of this improved construction 
the bearings and the interior of the hub are 
kept free at all times from dust and dirt, and 
the bearings also kept constantly supplied 15 
with a lubricant. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim-- 
1. A bearing comprising a pair of cup 
shaped flanges, one encircling the other, the 
inner cup-shaped flange having an oil-duct 
extending therethrough; closure means in 
position relatively to the inner flange, and 
forming there with a bearing-chamber, anti 
friction devices in said chamber; and closure 
means in position relatively to the outer 
cup-shaped flange, and forming there with a 
lubricating-chamber encircling the bearing 
chamber. 
2. A bearing comprising a pair of cup 
shaped flanges, one encircling the other, the 
inner cup-shaped flange having an oil-duct 
extending therethrough; a conically-shaped 
nut in position relatively to said inner flange, 
and forming therewith a bearing-chamber, 
antifriction devices in said chamber; and a 
flanged cap encircling said inner cup-shaped 
flange, and having its flange or rim overlap 
ping the rim or flange of said outer cup 
shaped flange, and forming therewith a lull 
bricating- chamber encircling the bearing 
chamber. 
3. A wheel comprising a rim and a hub; 
said hub having a pair of cup-shaped flanges, 
one encircling the other, the inner cup-shaped 
flange having an oil-duct extending there 
through, and the outer cup-shaped flange 
having its rim provided with a series of spoke 
receiving openings; spokeshaving their outer 
ends connected to the wheel-rim, and their 
inner ends seated in said openings; and a 
flanged cap secured in position relatively to 
said outer cup-shaped flange, and forming 
therewith a lubricating-chamber, the flange 
Cy 
too 
... 3O. 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
 
559,654 
3 
or rim of said cap overlapping the rim of said 
outer cup-shaped flange, and engaging the 
inner ends of the spokes. 
4. A wheel comprising a rim and a hub; 
said hub having a pair of cup-shaped flanges, 
one encircling the other, the inner cup-shaped 
flange having an oil-duct extending there 
through, and the outer cup-shaped flange 
having its rim provided with a series of slots; 
spokes having their outer ends secured to said 
Wheel-rim, and their inner ends seated in said 
slots; and a flanged cap secured in position 
relatively to said outer cup-shaped flange, 
and forming there with a lubricating-chamber, 
and having its flange or rim overlapping the 
rim of said outer flange, and provided with a 
series of slots also adapted to receive the in 
ner ends of the spokes. 
5. A wheel comprising a rim and a hub; 
said hub having a pair of cup-shaped flanges 
adjacent to each end thereof, one cup-shaped 
flange of each pair encircling the other cup 
shaped flange thereof, and each pair of said 
flanges opening in opposite directions to each 
other, the inner cup-shaped flange of each 
pair having an oil-duct extending there 
through; and the rim of each outer cup 
shaped flange having a series of slots therein; 
25 
means engaging the inner cup-shaped flange, 
and forming there with a chamber for the re- 3o 
ception of antifriction-balls; spokes having 
their outer ends secured to said wheel-rim, 
and their inner ends seated in said slots; 
and a cap secured to each outer cup-shaped 
flange, and forming therewith a lubricating- 35 
chamber, and adapted to hold said spokes in 
position. 
6. A wheel comprising a rim and a hub, 
said hub having a spoke-flange having an an 
nular rim or flange with a series of elongated 
slots having differential diameters and open 
ing at the free edge thereof; a series of spokes 
having their outer ends connected to said 
wheel-rim, and their inner ends seated in the 
slots of said annular rim; and a spoke-secur 
ing cap having an annular rim or flange over 
lapping the annular rim or flange of Said 
spoke-flange and that portion of the slots 
having the smallest diameter and engaging 
the spokes, whereby dust is prevented from 5o 
entering said hub. 
45 
ARTHUR. J. WOLFF. 
Witnesses: 
FRED J. DOLE, 
BENTON N. PARKER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559755.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 559,755, 
C. L. SHOLES. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 5, 1896. 
Yearaesses: 
5kae Stige 
 
ity agrahi. Pigoth. Easts...C. - 
(No Model.) 
No. 559,755, 
C. L. SHOLES 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 5, 1896, 
& 5 A-6 
|- 
w 
V 
2 
2. 
7 
722 
4. 
ir 
a z \t. 
S 
R 
ag' 
g 
E-Z 
A 
E 
- 
ty' 
r 
e 
- G 
S 
JA 
sesses 
S. 
estate 
7 HE 
A? 
e 
 
Q 
O 
Ews 
O ... O O 
------ 
O O. O. 
9. 
O 
vi\ 
42 s 
ANDREw B. GRAHAM. Photo-urho.washington, DC 
C. L. SHOLES. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented May 5, 1896, 
"No Model.) 
No. 559,755, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
/ 
A. 
a ?i 
FraX33 E. 
- 
& 
SYSZ 
2. W 
E 
Y. 
 
 
 
its 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
ag. 
.. (S 
I Hall, 
liyy All 
 
 
AE 
(&, 
 
Tzzzzesses: 
Save $3942-g N1. 
(Salace? sage 
- 
Akai Ew 8. GRAkkM. PHOTOrthowkshaw Grox.D. 
(No Model.) 
No. 559,755, 
C. L. SHOLES. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented May 5, 1896, 
Zzzesses. 
527. 9. 
-- . 
P 
(7. 2r - 
Z72 vez26oz. 
 
C. L. SHOLES. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented May 5, 1896. 
Azaz. // 
No Model.) 
No. 559,755. 
 
 
 
 
EC 
WZZzze55es. 
&c. &44& 
 
ANDREW 8 GRAHAM. Photo-utho.washistop 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CIIRISTOPIIER LATIIAM SIOLES, OF MILWAUREE, WISCONSIN, ASSIGNOR, BY 
MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO TIIE WYCKOFF, SEANIANS & BENEDICT, OF NEW 
YORK. 
TYPE - WR TNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 559,755, dated May 5, 1896. 
Application filed February 18, 1890, Serial No, 340,920, (No model.) 
I5 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the machine sides, the forward or inward ends of which 65 
20 platen-roll shifted from its normal position an elongated opening d to permit the passage 7 o 
to chines; and it consists in various features, and adjustment. 
To all tw?on, it inctly conce772. 
quired to travel the same distance in rising 
Be it known that I, CHRISTOPHER LATHAM to the platen, and consequently if each key 
SHOLES, a citizen of the United States, residing lever be given the same leverage all the keys 
at Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee will require a like stroke, a feature very de 
tain new and useful Improvements in Type- The basket E may be held in place by screws 
Writing Machines, of which the following is or otherwise and may be readily removed 
a specification. 
from the frame with all the type-bars in it, 
This invention relates to type-writing ma- if desired, thus giving great facility of repair 
details, and combinations hereinafter set 
The clips F are stamped from thin metal, 
forth, having for their object the simplifica- preferably sheet-steel, and are of the form 
tion and improvement of the machine, and shown in Fig. 7-that is to say, cach consists 
particularly increase in efficiency. 
of a horizontal body or plate having upturned 
complete; Fig. 2, a top pian view; Fig. 3, a ver- rise to form ears b, which are provided with 
tical section in the direction of travel of the perforations c to receive the pivots or the 
paper-carriage; Fig. 4, a side or end eleva- journals of the type-bar G. 
tion; Fig. 5, a perspective view showing the 
The body or plate of the clip is formed with 
to a position in which the line being printed of a fastening-screw e through it, by which 
may be viewed by the operator; Fig. 6, a bot- to secure it to the top ring of the basket, the 
tom plan view; Figs. 7 to 11, detail views | size of opening d permitting adjustment of 
hereinafter referred to. 
suitable construction, but is here represented curved to conform to the curvature of the 
as consisting of a top plate or table A, sus- upper ring of basket E and is slotted to re 
tained by four legs or uprights B, a bar C, ceive the upright sides of the clips F. The 
extending across the front and ends of the portions between the slots are perforated to 
platform D below the top or table A. The which secure a firm bearing upon the washer 
top or table A is formed with a large opening plate, and thus a firm clamping of the clips 
of circular form, and below the top or level is insured. 
The platform D is furnished on its upper 
of the table there is formed an inwardly-pro- 
in the top. 
is mounted a lever K, one end of which con 
Within the opening, resting upon and sup- nects with a type-bar G and the other end of 
ported by the ledge a, is a basket E, which which connects with the key-lever belonging 
may be conveniently cast in one piece, and to such type-bar. The manner of and means 
type-bal's G with the type-bars pivoted in levers and transmitting motion from one to 
them, as best shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. 
the other through the intermediate levers IX 
Within the basket and at or near its lower is illustrated in Figs. 1, 3, and 4. As shown 
end is placed a pad or cushion II, against in said figures, each type-bar is formed with 
they fall after a stroke, the purpose being to ots, which studs enter sockets or eyes in the 
deaden the sound and, at the same time, two members of a bifurcated spring-yoke 
cause all the type-bars to assume the same forming the upper end of a stem or rod f, 
position when down. By thus causing each which stem constitutes the upper section of 
the clip longitudinally and laterally. 
45 which the type-bars G strike and rest when laterally-projecting studs e' in rear of its piv. 95 
35 jecting ledge C. concentric with the opening side with a series of posts J, in each of which 85 
4o which bears the clips or brackets F of the for thus connecting the type-bars and key- 9o 
25 The frame of the machine may be of any 
I, Fig. 8, indicates a washer-plate which is 75 
3o machine, as shown in Figs. J. and 6, and a permit the passage of the fastening-screws e, 8o 
5 and State of Wisconsin, have invented cer-sirable to secure in this class of machines. 55 
6o 
5o type-bar to fall to the same level, each is re- a three-part connecting-rod L. The lower Ioo 
 
559,755 
o 
IS 
35 
45 
55 
section g of rod L has its lower end jointed 
in any convenient manner to the lever K be 
low it, and its upper end is joined to the 
lower end of the upper section f by means of 
a turnbuckle or swivel h, either tapped to re 
ceive the reversely-threaded ends of partsf 
and g or swiveled upon one part and tapped 
to receive the other. These constructions 
are substantial equivalents and are both com 
mon in mechanical structures wherever, as 
in the present instance, it is desirable to pro 
vide for varying the length of the rod or link 
connecting two parts. From the end of lever 
IK, opposite that to which the link or con 
necting-rod L is attached, another link or 
connecting-rod MI passes to and connects with 
a key lever or bar N, of which latter there is 
one for each type-bar, each pivotally sup 
ported in a slotted post Orhanger i, extending 
downward from the under side of platform 
D, as shown in Fig. 3. Each key-lever N may, 
if desired, be furnished with a finger-button, 
and so connected with the spacing mechanism 
of the machine as to cause the advance of the 
platen one space for each depression; but I 
prefer to adopt a somewhat different plan of 
construction and operation, which is illus 
trated in Figs. 1, 2, and 4. Upon referring 
to these figures it will be seen that a board 
or flat bar O extends across the front of the 
machine from side to side, and is perforated 
to permit the passage through it of a series 
of stems P, the lower ends of which are con 
nected with the front ends of the key-levers 
N, one to each lever. The upper ends of the 
stems P are headed to prevent the board or 
bar O from being lifted above them, and op 
posite the head of each stem there is placed 
upon the board or bar O a character to indi 
cate what printing-character answers to or is 
controlled by such stem. The board O is car 
lied upon the forward ends of two arms or 
bars Q, which, at their rear ends, are made 
fast upon a rock-shaft R, carried upon pointed 
screws or other pivots in the main frame of 
the machine. 
Rising from the rock-shaft R, at or about 
its mid-length, is an upright arm S, which car 
ries a head j of the form shown in Figs. 2 
and 9. 
A spring T (shown in Fig. 4 and secured 
to the rear side of the main frame of the ma 
chine) bears upon the upright arm S, and 
throws the same backward, and holds it nor 
mally against a stop k. (Shown in Fig. 2.) 
This stop is represented in the drawings in 
the form of a spring-arm projecting laterally 
from an upright U, which rises from the rear 
of the main frame and bends forward hori 
Zontally over the spacing-rack of the platen 
carriage, as shown in Figs. 2 and 4. The 
Spring T, bearing against the arm S, causes 
the rock-shaft to be turned and the aems Q 
and board O at the front of the machine to 
be raised and normally held in an elevated 
position, so that the board is brought up di 
rectly beneath the heads of the pins or stems 
P and kept normally in such position. The 
heads of the pins or stems P, whether merely 
enlarged sufficiently to prevent the board 
from rising above them or provided with fin 
ger-buttons, cannot be depressed from their 
normal positions without also depressing the 
board O and thereby actuating the Spacing 
dog or headi, nor can the board itself be de 
pressed independently of the stems without 
thus actuating the feed dog or head. It will 
therefore be seen that whenever a stem is de 
pressed for the purpose of printing a charac 
ter, or whenever the board is depressed inde 
pendently of the stems, the carriage, which 
is permitted to advance one tooth each time 
the feed-dog is thrown forward, will advance 
one space. The board, extending from side 
to side of the frame of the machine, and there 
being a considerable blank space at each end 
of the board, and also from end to end thereof 
between the rows of stems T, the operato!' 
may readily depress the board without mov 
ing his hand from the position which it occu 
pies in Striking the keys or Stems. 
While in the drawings I have represented 
the indicators by which to select the particu 
lar character or characters desired as applied 
to the board O, opposite the particular stem 
corresponding with such indicator, it is mani 
fest that the indicator lettel's or characters 
may be applied directly to the heads of the 
stems. 
V and W represent, respectively, flat and cy 
lindrical rods or bars extending parallel with 
the board O at the top of the main frame of 
the machine, which rods or bars serve as sup 
ports and guides for the traveling platen 
carriage X. (Shown in Figs. 1, 2, 4, and 5.) 
As represented in said figures, this carriage 
consists of a rectangular frame of metal Sup 
ported at its forward side upon a roller or 
roller's land at its rear side by perforated ears 
or lugs in, which encircle and slide upon the 
guide-rod W. 
Secured to and carried by the ears or lugs 
n is a bar Y, parallel with the guide-rod W, 
and provided with a series of vertical slots 
extending transversely through the bar from 
front to rear. In each of said slots is loosely 
mounted a slide or tumbler Z, having at each 
end an ear or lip in, by which its longitudinal 
movement through the bar Y in each direc 
tion is limited. The sliding dogs or tumble's 
Z are free to move back and forth through the 
bar Y, and are moved forward through the 
same by the feed dog or headione at a time, 
and are restored to their normal position or 
moved rearward by a guard or plate A", which 
inclines from a central point toward the front 
of the machine at each end and is carried by 
the overhanging end of the upright or stand 
ard U. 
When the line has been completed, or it is 
desired to recede the carriage preparatory to 
starting a new line, or for any other pur 
pose, the forward ends of the dogs or tumblers 
come into contact with the incline face of the 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
ICO 
I O5 
o 
II5 
I 25 
559,755 
3. 
guard A', are by it moved backward through 
the bar Y, and are then in position to be 
alternately engaged and moved forward by 
the headi. This action will be readily un 
derstood by referring to Figs. 2 and 9, in 
which it will be seen that the head j is formed 
with two upright faces o and p, connected by 
a third upright face q, formed by cutting 
away the forward corner of headi; as shown 
in said figures, to an extent equal or some 
what more than equal to the thickness of one 
of the slides or tumblers Z. The face p forms 
a stop, by which the foremost slide or tumbler 
Z is arrested, whereby the carriage is held 
against advance. When, however, the head 
i is thrown forward by the depression of board 
O, the face q bearing directly against the rear 
end of such slide or tumbler carries it for 
ward through the bar Y until its rear end is 
forward of the normal position of headi. As 
the head i recedes or returns to its normal 
position, the face p passes out of contact 
with the slide or tumbler just advanced, the 
face O preventing the advance of the carriage 
during this backward movement of the head, 
by reason of its being directly in the path of 
the next slide Z and bearing against the side 
face of such slide until face q reaches the 
rear end of the slide or tEmbler, whereupon 
the carriage moves forward again until the 
slitle rests against face p. These several op 
elations are repeated at each depression of 
board O and a step-by-step advance of the 
carriage is thus secured. 
For the purpose of moving back the slides 
or tumblers Z. preparatory to their actuation 
by the head i, the doubly-inclined guard A' 
is furnished. This guard being held in a 
fixed position, the forward ends of any of the 
slides or tumblers Z, that may be forward or 
in advance of their normal positions, will ride 
upon one or the other incline of the guard, 
according to the direction in which the car 
liage is moved, and will be thereby forced 
back to their first or usual position. The 
front face of head i is beveled, as shown, so 
that when the carriage is receded the slides 
or tumblers inay not lock against the same, 
but may be moved forward sufficiently to 
pass the head, being at once moved back 
again by the guard A'. The carriage is ad 
vanced by a spring B", secured to the bar C 
of the main frame, and preferably coiled or 
bent into the form indicated in Fig. 6, which 
is a bottom view of the machine, or of so 
much thereof as belongs to the carriage-ad 
Vancing mechanisia. 
Cindicates a bar or sweep, one end of which 
is pivotally attached to the bar C of the frame 
and the other end of which extends upward 
at the rear side of the machine and is coin 
neeted by a link D' with the bar Y or other 
part of the carriage. This bar C is formed 
With two lateral branches 7" and is near its 
pivot end, the former provided with a series 
of notches at different distances from the 
pivot of the bar C", in one or another of which 
notches will be seated one end of a link t, by 
which the arm r and the free end of spring 
B' are connected. By moving the link toward 
or from the end of arm a the leverage may be 
varied and the spring calised to act with 
greater or less force, as required. From the 
end of arms a bar or link it extends to and is 
pivotally connected with a flat bar E", the two 
ends of which project through slots or open 
ings in the side portions of bar C of the main 
frame, as shown in FigS. 1, 2, 4, and 6. 
As will be readily understood upon refer 
ence to Fig. 6, the spring B' tends to swing 
the bar or sweep C' about its pivot or center 
of motion, and as this action takes place the 
outer end of arms will swing toward the front 
of the machine, and as the bar is returned to 
its starting-point by the recession of the car 
riage the arm S will move backward or away 
from the front of the machine. In thus mov 
ing back and forth the arms will, through 
link at, impart a forward and backward move 
ment to the bar. E", the two ends of which are 
caused by a guide-rod F, Fig. 6, to move 
alike. 
Rising from each end of the bar E' is an 
upright or standard G', (well shown in Figs. 1, 
3, and 4,) each of which carries a horizontal 
stem or spindle EI below the table A to re 
ceive a ribbon-spool I and each of which 
has above said table a lateral arm J', which 
serves as a ribbon support and guide to raise 
the inking-ribbon above the type-bars and to 
hold it in proper relation to the platen-roll. 
A nut , screwed upon the end of each stem 
or spindle II", prevents the spool from work 
ing off. 
The ribbon spools and guides being carried 
by and moving with the bar. E", it follows that 
as the bar is moved back and forth the ribboil 
will be moved transversely to its length across 
the printing-point, and that as a consequence 
the entire width of the libbon will be utilized 
instead of merely a narrow line thereof, as is 
usually the case. 
To cause the longitudinal travel of the rib 
bon the spools are both made with a ratchet 
wheel or disk at at one end with which en 
gages a dog or pawl ac, carried by a SWinging 
arm or lever 21, pivoted, one to each upright, 
or standard G', as shown in Fig. 3. A spring 
2 serves to normally draw and holdback each 
of the arms or leversy or to return each after 
a forward movement. A throw-out lever K. 
is pivoted to each standard or upright G' and 
engages beneath a projection on the dog or 
pawl ac, serving to lift and hold the same out 
of engagement with its ratchet wheel or disk 
when desired, only one pawl and disk being 
in engagement at any one time. The upper 
ends of the levers if bear against oblique 
guides or ways d', whereby as the bar Emoves 
toward the rear of the machine the levers if 
are thrown inward, the springs by returning 
them to their first positions as the bar E 
again moves forward. Each ratchet-wheel at: 
is revented by a click-spring or detent b' 
25 
Go 
95 
OO 
ITO 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
- 
- 
559,755 
TO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
- 
from being turned backward by the pawl or 
dog ac on its backward movement. This de 
tent must be thrown out of engagement. With 
its ratchet-wheel whenever the pawl is, so as 
to permit backward rotation and allow the 
ribbon to be drawn off and wound upon the 
Spool being actuated, or else the ribbon-spools 
must be transposed when the direction of 
travel is to be reversed. It is preferred to 
disengage the detent from the ratchet-wheel, 
as handling of the ribbon is thereby obviated. 
Referring now to Figs. 1, 2, 4, 5, and 11, 
the construction and arrangement of the 
platen and its supporting and controlling de 
vices will be explained. 
As already mentioned, the carriage X con 
sists, essentially, of a rectangular frame of 
metal, supported at the front by a roller or 
rollers l and at the rear by lugs or arms in, 
respectively, traveling upon ways or guides 
and v. Rising from each end of the frame 
of carriage X is a post or standard L', having 
a slot or opening c", of the form best illus 
trated in FigS. 1, 4, and 5-that is to say, of 
increasing width toward the top-and having 
its rear wall curved (advisably, though not 
necessarily) upon an arc of a circle of which 
the centeris the axis of a rock-shaft MI, seated 
in suitable bearings or boxes at the rear side 
of the frame of the carriage X. The rear 
wall of the slot or opening c' has at its upper 
end a seat or depression c, above which is an 
overhanging arm or portion c'. The rock 
shaft Misformed or furnished with two for 
Wardly - extending arms d' and e", each of 
which passes close to the outer face of one of 
the standards L and beyond or in front of the 
slot or opening therein, as shown in Fig. 2. 
One or both of these arms is or may be ex 
tended somewhat in advance of the carriage 
X or to other convenient point, and there 
fashioned into a lift or thumb-piece f", by 
which to lift the same and cause the rock 
shaft to turn in its bearings. Obviously, the 
two arms being rigidly connected to or made 
integral with the rock-shaft, they must rise 
and fall in unison. 
N' indicates a rotatable platen, which is 
represented in the form of a cylinder, but 
which may be polygonal in cross-section, if 
preferred. This platen or roll is advisably 
made in the form of a light wooden shell, 
covered on its outer surface with rubber, as 
usual, and it is furnished at each end with a 
metallic bushing-ring g', which at one end of 
the roll is formed with teeth or cogs, as shown 
in Figs. 1, 4, and 5. The rings g rest and 
turn upon shouldered disks or heads O', 
(best seen in Fig. 11,) which disks are car 
ried by a flat metallic bar P', the ends of 
which project beyond the disks and beyond 
the ends of the roll or platen and pass into 
and through the slots c' of the posts or stand 
ards L', the ends resting upon the arms (l 
and e' of the rock-shaft M', as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2. From this construction and arrange 
ment of parts it follows that if the arm d" or 
- 
e' be thrown up the bar P' will be caused to 
rise with them, and owing to the increasing 
inclination of said arms the bar will fall 
against and ride upon the curved rear Wall 
of the slot c' until the upper edge of the bar 
enters the seats c and is arrested in its rise. 
The further elevation of the arms de' will 
then cause the bar P' to turn upon its upper 
edge as a center, thus carrying its face from 
a vertical to a horizontal plane, or, in other 
words, the elevation of the arms carries the 
bar P from its normal position (indicated in 
Figs. 1 and 2) into the position indicated in 
Fig. 5. 
Pivotally attached to one of the disks ol 
heads O' of the platen is a dog or pawl Q', 
the forward end of which is inclined both ways 
from its lowest point, said doubly-inclined 
end being arranged to overhang and to en 
gage with the teeth of the toothed bushing or 
ring g', as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 4, being 
held in engagement there with by a spring l'. 
The pawl or dog, while yielding and permit 
ting the platen to be turned forward or back 
ward upon the application of slight force, 
holds it firmly enough to cause it to maintain 
at all other times a fixed relation to the heads 
or disks O', and inasmuch as the heads or disks 
are incapable of rotation upon bar P', it fol 
lows that the platen-roll turns through about 
one-quarter of a revolution with bar P as the 
latter is lifted. 
The printing-point is at the 
lower side of the platen when the latter is in 
Hence upon the lifting 
its normal position. 
and turning of bar P' it will be brought up 
to the front of the roll as the latter stands in 
its elevated position. 
To retain the parts in the elevated position 
for the purpose of permitting corrections to 
be made, &c., a rest or lug i", beveled on its 
lower side, is made to project from post or 
standard L' in such position that as the arm 
cl of rock-shaft MI' rises, said arm, which is 
made somewhat elastic, shall ride over the 
beveled face and rest upon the top face of the 
rest or lugi', the parts remaining in such po 
sition until the arm d is sprung outward and 
allowed to descend again with the platen. 
Tofacilitate removal of the platen the open 
ing or slot c' is left open at the top, or may 
be so left, though this is not essential. 
R' indicates a pointer or index attached to 
the main frame of the machine and extend 
ing to Ward the platen, approaching close to 
the same at a point midway between the sides 
or ends of the machine, or directly in line 
with the printing-point, as shown in Figs. 1 
and 2. This index or pointer, which prefer 
ably rises from the guide-bar V, but which 
may be elsewhere attached, is so curved or 
shaped that its upper end bears upon or very 
nearly touches the platen or the paper thereon 
when the platen is thrown up to the position 
shown in Fig. 5, and at the point to which 
the printing-line is brought by such elevation 
of the platen. It will therefore be seen that 
if it be desired to make a correction it is only 
7 O 
75 
95 - 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
559,755 
& 
necessary to elevate the platen to bring the 
line to view, erase the misused character, if 
there be one, limove the carriage in one or the 
other direction until the pointer R' covers 
the point where a character is to be printed, 
then drop the platen and strike the appro 
priate key. In this manner and without the 
use of any scale whatever, corrections may 
be made with celerity and certainty. It is of 
course necessary to provide a paper clamp or 
holder which shall permit the proper line 
spacing or feeding of the paper, and which 
shall preserve the paper in proper position 
under the different adjustments of the platen. 
To this end the disks or heads O' are both 
provided with a rearwardly-projecting arm 
fi', which arms are connected by a cross-rod 
K", so mounted as to prevent rotation. Hung 
or hinged upon this rod is a curved plate or 
shield S', which extends from the rear side 
of the platen downward beneath the platen 
to a point somewhat in rear of the printing 
line, carrying at its lower and forward edge 
a small roller T of a length nearly equal to 
that of the guard or plate S". This roller is 
free to turn in eyes formed upon the plate or 
guard S', and by bearing against the paper 
justin real of the printing-lineholds it closely 
against the paten. Extending forward from 
the plate or guard S and upward in front of 
the platen are two curved arms U', which sup 
port and give direction to the paper as it is 
advanced or fed forward, said arms serving to 
turn the sheet back over the top of the platen. 
A spring or springs V', coiled about the rod 
IX', secured at one end thereto, and bearing 
at the other end against the rear face of plate 
or guard S', serves to press the guard toward 
the platen and to hold the roller T against 
the platen or against the platen between the 
roller and the platen, as will be readily un 
derstood. 
To turn the platen for line-spacing, I pro 
vide an arm or lever W.", which is pivoted at 
one end to one of the disks O', and at its 
other end fashioned into a thumb-piece, as 
shown in Fig. 5. This lever carries a dog or 
pawl i, which engages with the teeth of bush 
ing or ring g', and as the lever is thrown for 
ward turns the platen a distance correspond 
ing to the swing ol' throw of the lever. 
The throw of the lever is determined by a 
turn-button or stop in', having two stop 
faces at different distances from the screw or 
pivot about which it turns, the lever being 
normally drawn backward or outward by a 
Spring ', Fig. 5. 
I do not broadly claim in this application 
the combination of a supporting-bar, disks 
or heads carried by said bar, and a platen or 
roller mounted and arranged to rotate upon 
the heads or disks, as that constitutes the 
subject-matter of application, Serial No. 
340,922, of even date herewith, nor do I 
broadly claim in the present application a 
paper-clamp provided with arms extending 
upward from the clamp in front of the roll, 
as that constitutes a feature of another ap 
plication of even date here with, Serial No. 
340,921. 
It is particularly to be noted that under 
the construction herein set forth there is no 
necessity for moving the paper upon the 
platen relatively to the pressure device Or 
clamp by which the paper is held against the 
platen in order to bring the printing-line to 
the proper point or position for inspection. 
On the contrary the platen, paper, and clamp 
move as one in making this exposure of the 
work, and there is consequently no liability 
of disarranging the paper or interfering with 
alinement, as is the case where it is attempted 
to attain the result by rotating the platen rel 
atively to the paper-clamp first in one and 
then in the other direction. It will also be 
observed that the fixed pointer or indicator 
is so located that it closely approximates the 
printing-point of the printing-line, when, with 
out disturbance of the printing relation of 
the platen, paper, and clamp, the printing 
point is exposed to view. 
No claim is made herein to the mechanism. 
herein shown and described fol' feeding and 
shifting the inking-ribbon, but said subject 
matter is distinctly reserved for and is en 
bodied and claimed in application, Scrial No. 
444,925, filed August 29, 1892, as a division 
of this application, for purposes of an inter 
ference Contest. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a main frame, a series of type-bar's 
mounted therein, a series of key-levers for ac 
tuating said type-bars, a carriage movable 
upon the main frame, a platen mounted in the 
carriage and bodily movable apart from and 
independently of said carriage from its nor 
mal resting-place therein to a position ill 
which the printing-line may be readily in 
spected, a paper - clamp movable with the 
platen, and a stop to limit the movement of 
the platen away from the printing position 
and relatively to the carriage, whereby the 
level or plane of inspection is determined and 
made uniform. 
2. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a main frame, type-bars and key 
levers, of a traveling carriage a platen and 
ways or guides in said carriage in or upon 
which the platen may be shifted and partially 
rotated in the act of shifting. 
3. In combination with the main frame and 
the carriage of a type-writer, a platen or pa 
per-roll, a central supporting shaft or axle 
therefor normally held against rotation, and 
guides or ways upon the carriage, in or upola 
which the ends of the axle l'est, and in or upon 
which they may be shifted to carry the platen 
to and from the printing position. 
4. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a main frame, a carriage provided with 
Ways or guides, and a platen having its Sup 
porting-axle extended to and alralged to trav 
25 
3 5 
So 
55 
So 
go 
CO 
IC5 
IO 
I 1.5 
6 
559,755 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
erse said guides, and adapted to perform a par 
tial revolution in so doing; whereby the 
printing-line is turned to view when the platen 
is shifted, and restored to the printing posi 
tion when the platen is moved back to place. 
5. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a main frame, a traveling carriage pro 
vided with guides or ways, a platen having 
projections at its ends extending to said 
guides or Ways, and arms or levers bearing 
against the said projections and serving to 
move them along the guides or ways, where 
by the platen may be moved from its normal 
position to One in which the printing-line may 
be inspected. 
6. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a main frame, a traveling carriage pro 
vided with guides or ways having overhang 
ing ends to form stops, and a platen provided 
With a central axle or Supporting-rod, the 
ends of which extend to and rest upon the 
guides or ways. 
7. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion. With a main frame, type-bars and key 
levers, of a traveling carriage provided with 
uprights L', having slots or openings c', a 
platen and an axle or central support for said 
platen, having its ends extended into the slots 
c" and arranged to bear against the wall or 
face thereof. 
8. In combination with the main frame, 
type-bars and key-levers of a type-writing 
machine, a platen-frame provided with posts 
L', slots c', in said posts, having depressions 
c, platenN' and bar or axle P provided with 
heads O', the ends of said bar extending into 
the slots c'. 
9. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a platen-frame having uprights or 
posts L' provided with slots c', having de 
pressions c' and overhanging ends c, of a 
platen N', provided with supporting bar or 
axle P. 
10. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a tubular platen provided at its ends 
with metallic rings or bushings, a central rod 
or bar passing longitudinally through the 
platen, and heads or disks secured in fixed 
position upon said rod or bar, fitting said 
bushings, and Serving as bearings or supports 
upon which the platen may turn. 
11. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a paper-carriage provided with guides, 
and a platen provided at its ends with arms 
or projections to traverse said guides and 
thereby to bring the point of print to view 
upon a bodily moveument of the platen. 
12. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a paper-carriage provided with guides 
or Ways, and a platen provided at its ends 
with arms or projections to traverse said 
guides Or Ways, the platen being adapted and 
arranged to fall by gravity and to carry its 
arms or projections to the lower ends of the 
guides or Ways and retain them there, whereby 
proper printing adjustment is insured. 
13. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a platen N', central bar P', heads or 
disks O', mounted upon said bar and forming 
Supports for the platen, toothedring g' secured 
to the platen, pawl or dog Q' carried by head 
or disk O', and spring l', to hold the pawl in 
engagement with the toothed ring. 
14. In combination with a roll or platen, a 
central supporting-bar therefor, arms carried 
by said supporting-bar, a rod connecting said 
alms, a paper-clamp carried by said rod, and 
a Spring acting upon Said clamp and Serving 
to hold it against the roll. 
15. In combination with a platen a guard 
supported in rear of the platen, and extending 
downward and partially around the same, and 
a roller carried by said guard and located 
slightly in rear of the printing line or point, 
and adapted to bear against the platen Ol' 
against the paper thereon. 
16. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a main frame, a platell-carriage, a 
platen mounted in said carriage and bodily 
shiftable relatively to and independently of 
said carriage from its normal resting place to 
a position in which the printing-point is ex 
posed to view, a paper-clamp movable with 
the platen, and a fixed indicator attached to 
a stationary part of the machine and reaching 
to such point as to indicate upon the platen 
the printing-point, when the platen is moved 
to position to expose the printing-line. 
17. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a platen-carriage, a platen movable 
from its normal position to a position in which 
the printing-point may be readily viewed, a 
paper-clamp movable with the platen, and a 
pointer located in such position relatively to 
the platen that as the platen is bodily moved 
to expose the print, the printing-point and 
the pointer are brought into close proximity. 
1S. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a suitable printing mechanism, of 
a pointer, a platen, and a paper-clamp, Said 
platen and paper-clamp being movable in 
unison from their normal position to one in 
which the printing-line may be viewed, and 
the location and a trangement of the pointer 
being such that the printing-point and pointer 
shall be brought into close proximity by the 
movement of the platen to position to expose 
the printing-line. 
19. In combination. With a Suitable Support 
provided withways or guides, a platen having 
projections at its ends mounted in said Sup 
ports, said platen being adapted and arranged 
to make a partial revolution as it is moved 
over the ways or guides; and an index or 
pointer applied to the body of the machine in 
position to indicate the printing-point upon 
the platen, when the latter is moved ovel the 
ways or guides from its normal position. 
20. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a carriage, means for moving the same, 
a series of tumblers or plates movable in a 
direction at an angle to the line of travel of 
the carriage, a stop located in the path of said 
tumblers, and a pusher adapted to act upon 
7 5 
So 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IO 
I 5 
I 25 
559,755 
the tumblers one at a time and to move them 
out of reach of the stop. 
21. In combination with the traveling car 
riage of a type-writing machine, a series of 
plates or tumblers carried thereby and mov 
able at substantially right angles to the line 
of travel of said carriage, a stop with which 
said tumble's engage, and means for moving 
the tumblers successively to permit them to 
clear the stop. 
22. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a frame, a traveling carriage, a stop 
callied by one of Said parts, a series of tum 
blers carried by the other of said parts, and 
means for moving said tumblers successively 
out of engagement with the stop. 
23. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a main frame, and a traveling car 
riage; of a series of tumblers; a stop; and 
means whereby the tumblers are caused to en 
gage the stop successively to give to the car 
iriage a step-by-step movement. 
24. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a traveling carriage provided with a 
series of slides or tumblers, movable trans 
versely to the line of travel of the carriage, 
and a reciprocating head or block arranged 
to bear against the slides or tumblers, one at 
a time, all to move them lengthwise succes 
sively. 
25. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a traveling carriage, provided with a 
longitudinal bar having a series of transverse 
slots, a series of slides or tumblers mounted 
in said slots, a rock-shaft mounted in the 
framework of the machine, an arm carried 
by said rock-shaft and provided with a head 
or block, a second arm extending from said 
rock-shaft toward the front of the machine, 
a board or finger-piece carried by said for 
Wardly-extending arm, and a spring serving 
to elevate the board or finger-piece and throw 
back the head ol' block. 
26. In combination with the traveling car 
riage of a type-writing machine, a bar Y, car 
ried thereby, a series of slides or tumblers, Z, 
movable transversely through said bar, a rock 
shaftlik moutinted in the framework of the na 
chine, an upright arm Scarried by said rock 
shaft and provided with headi, and a board 
or finger-piece O, carried by an arm or arms 
Q extending forward from rock-shaft R. 
27. In combination with the traveling car 
riage of a type-writing machine, a bar carried 
thereby parallel with the line of travel, a se 
ries of slides or tumblers Z, movable trans 
versely through said bar, and a reciprocating 
head or blocki, having faces O, p, and g, 
whereby it is adapted to push the slides or 
tumblers one at a time before it, and thus to 
permit the step-by-step advance of the car 
riage. 
28. In combination with the traveling car 
riage of a type-writing machine, a series of 
slides or tumblers carried thereby and mov 
able at right angles to its line of travel, and 
a doubly-inclined guard A' in front of the 
slides or tumblers to return them to their nor 
mal position as the carriage is moved. 
29. In a type-writing machine, the combi 
nation of a series of type-bars, G, a series of 
lkey-levers, N, and an intermediate connec 
tion between each type-bar and its key-lever, 
consisting of links L., M., and levers K, ar 
ranged substantially as shown and described, 
whereby each key-lever and type-bar is given 
the same leverage and movement, and power 
is applied to each and every type-bar directly 
in the plane of its movement. 
30. In combination with shiftable platen N' 
provided with arms or projections at its ends, 
and guides therefor substantially as shown, a 
rock-shaft provided with arms to bear against 
the arms or projections of the platen and to 
move them cordinately. 
31. In combination with a platen-frame hav 
ing posts L', provided with slots c' rock-shaft, 
M' provided with arms d, e' and platen N' 
having the ends of its shaft or axle P' ar 
ranged to rest upon the arms d", e'. 
In witness whereof hereunto set my hand 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
CRISTOPHER, LATHAI SOLES, 
Witnesses: 
H. G. UNDERWooD, 
FRED SHOLES, 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
EO 
2 C. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559855.txt	(No Model.) 
C. KREUTZIGER. 
WASHING MACHINE, 
No. 559,855. 
Patented May 12, 1896, 
 
  
  
SaSaSSSSSSS2 
2 
 
  
 
4. 
 
ANbRev. B.GRABAM.Phcro-urto...washirtstos.st. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIIARLES KREUTZIGER, OF WATERILOO, CANADA. 
WASHING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 559,855, dated May 12, 1896. 
Application filed May 20, 1895, Serial No. 549,867, (No model.) 
55 
o 
To all, whon, it invaly concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES KREUTZIGER, 
manufacturer, of Waterloo, Province of On 
tario, Canada, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Washing-Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
washing-machine which will allow the clothes 
to be washed in the middle zone below the 
grease which rises to the surface of the water 
and above the dirt which sinks to the bottom 
of the tub, and which will allow the clothes 
to be pressed or squeezed only, to be swung 
only, to be rubbed or to be squeezed, rubbed 
and Swung, as may be desired, by a simple 
manipulation of the handle, as will herein 
after appear. 
My invention consists, essentially, in a tub 
or box having a semicircular upper station 
alry washboard and a lower washboard piv 
oted to oscillate within the tub and be lifted 
by pressure upon the handle to bear the 
clothes upward against the under side of the 
stationary washboard and rub them against 
the said washboard by the oscillation of the 
handle, as will appear with reference to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side sectional elevation of a 
machine embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a sectional end elevation thereof in line Z, Z. 
of Fig. 1. 
The Washbox or tub. A of the machine com 
prises side pieces A', supported on legs A, 
horizontal end ledges A, end cross-pieces A", 
and semicircular sheet-metal bottom A. A 
discharge-aperture a, and spout Cl' at the bot 
tom of the tub and in the central line thereof 
provide means for emptying the water from 
the tub. A lower swinging washboard, B, 
having semicircular sides D, connected by 
parallel bal's C, arranged to provide open 
spaces S between them, is suspended by metal 
arms E, having upright slots etherein, which 
receive pivot-bolts F, secured to and project 
ing inwardly from the box A, and allow the 
said lower washboard to be oscillated and 
also raised and lowered by means of rocking 
handle-arms J, connected by cross-bar II and 
pivoted to the upper ends of said Washboard 
arms E at K. The rocking handle-arms J 
are pivotally supported upon the upper Oscil 
lating ends of bracket-bars L, pivoted at M 
to the cover N of the washtub or box uprightly 
and substantially parallel to the washboard 
arms E. 
The cover Nishinged to the top end ledge 
A of the tub at O and is securely connected 
to semicircular sides P, having triangular 
cross-bars Q, suspended from the under side 
of the said cover N to project into the tub or 
box between the sides D of the lower oscillat 
ing washboard B, thus allowing the latter to 
swing or oscillate freely beneath and around 
the upper washboard P, to hold the clothes 
between them and rub, squeeze, and pound 
the clothes while allowing a circulation or 
vent for the steam, air, water, and Suds at 
all sides. 
The method of suspending the washboards 
and manipulating the handles constitute my 
invention. By bearing down upon the handle 
cross-bar II the lower movable washboard B 
is raised to bring the clothes with any re 
quired pressure to bear against the under 
side of the upper fixed washboard, and by 
oscillating the handles at the same time the 
rubbing action or movement of the arms 
closely resembles that exerted upon the ordi 
nary washboard in handwork, and a vari 
able action may thus be exerted upon the 
clothes with the greatest ease and freedom of 
movement. When the dirt has been removed 
from the clothes, it will fall through the open 
ings between the bars of the lower washboard 
and accumulate in the lower portion of the 
tub, where it may be removed through the 
aperture C, in the side of the tub. As the 
articles to be washed are laised from the bot 
tom and fully surrounded by water, it both 
rubs, squeezes, and swings the articles in the 
rater at one and the same time and allows 
the dirt to settle below the articles. 
The inner working parts and the clothes, 
hot water, and steam are completely inclosed 
by the tight-fitting hinged cover, and the lat 
ter, being fixedly secured to the upper rub 
board, will allow the latter to be lifted up on 
its hinges O and thrown back, as shown by 
dotted lines in Fig. 1, to allow articles to be 
put in or taken out of the lower washboard, 
and when closed will keep the water in a warm 
state, will prevent it from splashing out, and 
at the same time keep the steam from escap 
ing into the person's face who is operating the 
90 
95 
CO 
O 
35 
53 
 
g 
- 
559,855 
5 
Io 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
- 
water. 
machine, and also prevent the steam from 
dampening the room where the machine is 
operated. 
The operation of my invention in its gen 
eral and novel principles is briefly as follows, 
a few well-known facts being first presented: 
It is well known that the dirt washed from 
clothing is heavy and will settle to the bot 
tom of any washing-machine and that the 
grease is light and will rise to the top of the 
To successfully wash the clothing, it should 
be held and washed in an intermediate zone. 
To accomplish this with my improved ma 
chine above described, it is only necessary 
to lift the cover of the tub to which is secured 
the stationary washboard and place within 
the lower suspended oscillatory washboard 
the clothing to be washed. 
The water is then 
raised to the proper height in the tub, the sta 
tionary Washboard closed down and secured to 
the tub, and the handles of the machine ma 
nipulated. If it is desired simply to squeeze 
the clothes between the upper stationary and 
lower movable washboards, it is only neces 
sary to raise and lower the handle-bar. If it 
is desired to swing the clothes backward and 
forward in the water a sufficent distance be 
low the stationary board to clean the same, the . 
grease will rise upward through the open slats 
of the upper board to the top and the dirt 
will settle through the slats of the lower board 
to the bottom of the tub. When the clothes 
have thus been freed from the loose dirt with 
out rubbing it into the fabric, the more tena 
cious stains and soiled portions of the cloth 
ing are removed and cleansed by bearing with 
any required pressure lipon the handle, which 
I 5 
25 
35 
lifts the clothes up against the upper station 
ary washboard, and by oscillating at the same 40. 
time the handle-bar the clothes are rubbed, 
with the required pressure to suit the sort or 
quality of the goods to be cleaned, coarse and . 
very dirty garments requiring harder rub 
bing than fine goods. A machine thus con 
structed may be handled with great skill and 
various manipulation not possible with other 
machines, and may be successfully and easily. 
performed, the work being all done in the 
middle or cleaner part of the Water within the 
tub. The clothes may first be swung back 
ward and forward, then lifted and squeezed 
against the upper stationary board until the 
rough dirt is squeezed out of them, and then 
gently pressed and rubbed against the upper 
stationary board by both bearing upon and 
swinging the handle of the lower swinging 
Washboard. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent- 
A Washing-machine comprising a box, an 
upper fixed washboard secured to the box, and 
a lower vertically-movable swinging wash 
board secured to handle-bal's pivoted to the 
box and adapted to be both raised and lowered 
beneath said fixed board and to be moved 
backward and forward beneath the same, sub 
stantially as described, 
the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
. 
. . 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. . 
In testimony that I claim. 
Go 
. . . . . . 
55. 
- - - 
. . . 
- 
. . . 
. 
. . 
CHARLES KREUTZIGER. 
Witnesses: 
- 
JoSEPHHAUCK, 
CHAS. PRAST. . . 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US559955.txt	(N 0 Model.) 
R. T. SMITH, 
CAN MAKING TOOL 
No. 559,955. 
Patented May 12, 1896. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT TYNES SMITH, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
CAN MA KING TO O. L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 559,955, dated May 12, 1896. 
Application filed May 8, 1895, Serial No. 548,591. (No model.) 
5 
C. 
To (td. lth On it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT TYNESSMITH, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of the city of Baltimore, in the State of Mary 
land, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Can-Making Tools, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an apparatus for 
making can-bodies. It is designed to be used 
for a peculiar form of blank, which is made 
the Subject-matter of a concurrent applica 
cation, Serial No. 539,085. Can-bodies have 
been heretofore made somewhat in the man 
lner of my invention, but employing a tapered 
draw-die by which the edges of the blank 
Wei'e Culled Onto One another in such a man 
her as to form a union. This form of die has 
many disadvantages. The friction developed 
by the drawing of the edge of the tin or other 
thin metal through the die is so great, as to 
heat and wear the die very rapidly and to 
cause it to become destroyed in operation. I 
accomplish a result Somewhat similar to that 
accomplished by the draw-die by employing 
a draw-die so constructed as to give the edge 
of the metal an initial bend sufficient to per 
mit it to be clenched by a roller and having 
mounted in the same block with the draw-die, 
but beyondit, a roller provided with a groove 
On its periphery so formed as to bend and in 
terlock the edges of the blank already curled 
by the draw-die, SO as to make a secure and 
tight joint. 
The patent to E. Small, No. 355,10S, dated 
December 28, 1886, is an example of the draw 
die method of forming can-bodies. In that 
patent the edges of the can-body blank are 
described as bent at right angles with the 
body, and when folded together, as shown 
in Figure 2, these edges are radial to the cir 
cle of the can-body. The die is compelled to 
bend Over first the higher of the two edges 
and then both together. I have found that 
even. When using a tool like that of E. Small 
great advantage is derived in the reduction 
of friction and also in the facility of hand 
ling the blank and turning it around the 
mandrel on which it is bent by bending the 
turned-up edges of the blank back toward 
the center of the blank at an angle of about 
fifty degrees, and in addition to that bending 
the edge of the higher of the two turned-over 
edges of the blank in a reverse direction, so 
as to give the blank the shape shown in Fig. 
5 of the drawings shown in this case. In 
using the Small tool it has been found, as 
woTild be expected, that the principal wear 
of the tool is at the narrow throat of the 
groove. I have designed my new form of 
tool to employ the tapered groove of the Small 
draw-die to the extent of about half its length, 
using the larger portion of the groove and 
performing the work of the smaller throat of 
the groove by introducing the roll to clench 
the Seam. 
In the drawings, Fig. 1 is a perspective view 
of a tool combining a tapering groove and a 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the sec 
roll. 
ond roll, being the one by which the edges 
are clenched into a tight joint. Fig. 3 is 
an edge view of a can-body blank, showing 
the form in which the edges are bent. Fig. 4 
is an edge view of the can-body blank bent 
in circular form, but before the tool has be 
gun to work. Fig. 5 is an edge view of the 
can-body blank, showing the position of the 
edges after the roll shown in Fig. 3 has passed 
over the higher edges of the blank. Fig. 6 
is an edge view of the can-body blank when 
finished, showing the final position of the 
edges produced by the clenching-roll shown 
in Fig. 4. 
In the dra Wings, 4 is a can-body blank 
having a turned-over edge at each side. 
5 is a short edge turned over and backward 
to an angle of about fifty degrees to the plane 
of the blank. 
6 is the other edge turned backward like 
the first one at an angle of about fifty degrees, 
but somewhat longer than the first, and then 
reversed or turned outward, as shown at G' in 
Fig. 5. 
Referring to Fig. 1, 7 is a tapered groove 
in one end of the draw-die block of such a 
size as to fit the curve 6' of the edge of the 
can-body blank and turn it into a position 
where the roll 8, which is the same shape as 
the roll 3, may clench it into a tight joint. 
It is not essential that a can-body blank hav 
ing its edge turned over in the manner shown 
in Fig. 6 should be employed with this tool, 
as it may be used with efficiency upon a can 
body blank having Vertical edges, as shown 
in the Small patent, but the bending of the 
2 5 
3 5 
SO 
7 O 
75 
95 
CO 
2 
559,955 
edges of the can-body blank reduces the fric 
tion and facilitates the operation of making 
a tight joint. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A tool for seaming can-bodies consist 
ing of a block having in its face a tapering 
groove partly circular in cross-section and 
extending through a part of said face adapted 
to engage and curl the edges of the blank, 
and a roller adjacent to the mouth of the 
Ye which compresses the seam as set 
Orth. 
O 
2. A tool for seaming can-bodies consisting 
of a block havingin its face a tapering groove 
partly circular in cross-section and extending 
through a part of said face adapted to engage 
and curl into interlocking engagement the 
edges of the blank and a roller adjacent to 
the mouth of the groove which compresses the 
seam as set forth. 
Signed at Baltimore, in the State of Mary 
land, this 4th day of May, A. D. 1895. 
ROBERT TYNES SMITIT. 
- 
Witnesses: 
A. N. WILEY, 
THEO. H. NAGLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560055.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 560,055, 
 
D, AMBR O SE, 
CAR FENDER. 
Patented May 12, 1896. 
...) 
WITNESSES 
c 4. Z2-/6. M 
2234- 
IMWENTOR 
zzlea-Z724e 
-6-4 r 
6%. 22% 
A TTORE YS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID AMBROSE, OF NEW YORK, N.Y. 
CAR-FENDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,055, dated May 12, 1896. 
Application filed August 1, 1895, 
Serial No. 557,817, (No model.) 
55 
75 
So 
To all, 7th OT, it Tictly CO7 ce/'72: 
Beit known that I, DAVID AMBROSE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Car Fenders 
or Guards, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, forming a part thereof, in 
Which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts. 
This invention relates to car fenders or 
guards; and the object thereof is to provide 
a device of this class which may be readily 
connected with a tramway-car of the ordi 
nary construction; and it involves a swinging 
fender or guard which is pivotally connected 
With the car and which is simple in construc 
tion and effective in operation, and which 
When in use will prevent the serious and 
Sometimes fatal results which follow the strik 
ing of a person or object by a car when in 
motion. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the fol 
lowing specification, of which the accompa 
nying drawings form a part, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of one end of a 
car provided with my improved fender or 
guard, and Fig. 2 an end view thereof. 
In the practice of my invention I secure 
below the platform A, at each side of the for 
Ward end thereof, hangers B, in the lower. 
ends of which is mounted a rod or shaft C. 
Pivotally connected with the outer ends of 
Said rod or shaft are bars D, to the lower ends 
of which are secured the segmental side bars 
E of my improved fender-frame. These side 
bars E are connected at the front ends by 
means of a rod F, on which is mounted a 
roller G, of rubber or similar material, and 
the inner ends thereof are connected by a 
transverse rode, on which are mounted in 
Wardly-directed hooks or projections II. 
Mounted on the rod or shaft C are a plu 
l'ality of angular bars K, to the upper ends 
of which is secured a transverse buffer L, and 
the lower ends of which are bent inwardly 
and provided at their ends with upwardly 
directed hooks or projections M, and which 
are adapted to operate in connection with 
projections or hooks H, which are connected 
With the rode of the fender-frame. 
The hangers B are provided with down 
wardly-directed extensions N and the bar's D 
with pins O, which project from the upper 
inner sides thereof and are adapted to oper 
ate in connection with said downwardly-di 
rected extensions N to prevent the fender 
from swinging too far forward, and I also 
connect with the ends of the rod or shaft C 
and with said bars D springs P, which are 
also designed to prevent too great movement 
of the fender or guard, and between the up 
right portion of the bars K and the dash 
board of the car or the forward end of the 
platform are arranged or secured springs R., 
which are adapted to hold said bars K and 
the buffer L in the normal position, or that 
shown in Fig. 1, and the body of the fender 
or guard frame is composed of Wire mesh or 
similar materials, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The operation will be readily understood 
from the foregoing description when taken 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings. The fender or guard is normally sup 
ported in the position shown in full lines in 
Fig. 1 by means of the upwardly-directed 
hooks or projections on the inner end of the 
ends of the bars K, which operate in connec 
tion with the inwardly-directed hooks which 
are mounted on the rode. If a person or 
object should be struck by the roller G, said 
person or object would be received upon the 
fender or guard frameor upon the wire-mesh 
body thereof, as will be readily understood, 
and the passage of Such person. Or object un 
der the car would be prevented. If said person 
or object should also be struck by the buffer 
T, the connection between the bars K and 
the inner upper side of the fender or guard 
frame would be broken or released, and the 
fender or guard frame would swing forward, 
so as to receive such person or object thereon, 
as before described, and said fender or guard 
frame would constitute a cradle or support 
for such person or object. In either event 
the passage of a person or object beneath the 
car would be prevented and the serious and 
sometimes fatal results which follow such ac 
cidents would be avoided. 
It will thus be seen that I accomplish the 
object of my invention by means of a device 
which is simple in construction and opera 
tion and one which is comparatively inex 
95 
IOO 
3 5 
2 
- 
560,055 
25 
bars and provided with a rubber roller, the 
bar connecting the rear end of Said Segmental 
side bars, the wire mesh Secured to said Seg 
mental side bars and the end bars, the angle 
bars pivotally secured to said horizontal shaft 
and provided at one end With hooks adapted 
to engage the hooks upon the rear bar of the 
fender, and having a transverse buffer Se 
cured to the other ends thereof and the splings 
to keep Said hooks in engagement, whereby 
contact with said buffer releases the fender 
to receive the object in contact there with, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
lmy invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two Witnesses, this 30th day of July, 
LS95. 
TD AWD AMBEROSE. 
Witnesses: 
E. WAN DEURSEN, 
I. A. MULLER. 
TO 
pensive and which can readily be attached to 
a tramway-car without altering the construc 
tion thereof. 
It is evident that changes in and modifica 
tions of the construction described may be 
made without departing from the spirit of 
my invention or sacrificing its advantages, 
and I therefore reserve the right to make all 
such alterations therein as fairly come within 
the scope of the invention. 
Having fully described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Lettel's Pat 
elat 
The combination with a car, of the hori 
Zontal shaft journaled in depending hangers 
secured upon the under side of the front 
platform of the car, the depending side bal's 
secured to each end of said shaft, the seg 
lmental side bars secured midway of their 
length to said depending bars, the lod con 
lecting the front end of said segmental side 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560155.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 560,155, 
 
E. A. CURTIS, 
CAR TRUCK 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 12, 1896, 
 
  
(No Model.) 
E. A. CURTIS. 
CAR TRUCK 
No. 560,155, 
 
Patented May 12, 1896. 
 
  
-S 
???-------, ?? 
M.PT-the-WASHINet N.C. 
(No Model.) 
E. A. CURTIS, 
CAR TRUCK, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
1896, 
 
anew scrahAM.PHOTO-UTho. WASHINGTON. 
(No Model.) 
No. 560,155, 
  
 
 
 
E. A. CURTIS. 
CAR TRUCK. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented May 12, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
"? 
f A? 
a 
s 
. ? 
???? 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDMUND A. CURTIS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
CAR-TRUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,155, dated May 12, 1896, 
5 
2 5 
3 5 
Application filed January 8, 1895, 
To all typhi, ??, it, 7??? ??? ?????: 
Be it known that I, EDNIUND A. CURTIS, of 
Chicago, Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Car-Trucks, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
lments in car-trucks and is particularly adapt 
ed for use in street-cars, such as cable, elec 
tric, and hourse cars. 
The object of the invention is to so mount 
the car-body upon the trucks as to avoid as 
far as possible oscillations, shocks, and jars, 
which tend to the discomfort of passengers 
and Wear and lack the car-bodies. 
To this end the invention consists in the 
means of mounting the car-body, which means 
comprise equalizer-bars, which are pivoted in 
the vertical plane of the axles, projecting 
transversely thereto and on each side thereof 
and carrying at their outer ends Springs upon 
which the car-bodies are mounted either di 
rectly or indirectly. 
The invention further consists in certain de 
vices and combinations of parts for effecting 
the objects above stated. 
In the accompanying drawings I have shown 
my invention embodied in a truck having two 
pairs of wheels, each pair being provided with 
the equalizel's of my invention. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view showing the preferred form of construc 
tion. Fig. 2 is a plan view thereof. Fig. 3 is 
a perspective, and Fig. 4 a plan, showing a 
different form of springs. Fig. 5 is a side ele 
Vation of the pedestal axle-box, a yoke elm 
bracing the pedestal, and one of the connect 
ing-bars, the latter and a portion of the ped 
estal being broken away. Fig. (3 is an eleva 
tion, partly in Section, showing the manner 
of pivoting the equalizers to the pedestal, the 
view being at right angles to that shown in 
Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 is a sectional view showing the 
equalizer - Spring, its housing, and Support. 
Fig. 5 is a side elevation of the pedestal, 
showing springs on which the pedestal rests 
and a yoke embracing the pedestal and show 
ing the axle-box in end elevation. Fig. 6 is 
a plan view of the pedestal, axle-box, and a 
portion of the axle broken away, the Springs 
Fig. 7 is a 
plan view of the axle-box, a broken portion 
5o being shown in dotted lines. 
Serial No, 534,220, (No model.) 
of the axle, and showing spring-supporting 
lugs on the axle-box. 
In the drawings, Sand 9 represent the two 
pairs of truck-wheels, which are journaled in 
a truck-frame comprising the pedestals 10, 
the connecting-bars 11, and the transverse 
arch-bars 12. The pedestal and truck-frame 
may be of different form, or the truck-frame 
may be omitted. 
A represents the axle-box having the lat 
eral spring-Supporting lugs C. C., upon which 
are mounted Springs S. Said springs are in 
closed by the offset hollow portions p of the 
pedestal 10, the latter having a bearing upon 
the upper ends of said springs and being 
relatively movable to the axle-box. 
13 represents the equalizers, which are flat 
bars slightly curved longitudinally at their 
middles and which are pivotally mounted 
upon the pedestals in the vertical plane of the 
truck-axles. The precise manner of making 
this pivotal connection is immaterial; but I 
have shown in Fig. 6 a pivot-pin 14 passing 
through the bifurcations 10 of the pedestal 
and transversely through the bar, the pin hav 
ing a sleeve 15, which may be replaced when 
WWO'. 
In the construction shown in Figs. 1 and 2, 
the equalizer-bars are provided at their outer 
ends with cylindrical spring-cups 16 to receive 
coiled springs 17, having caps 18 at their up 
per ends, which are grooved to receive bars 19, 
the latter in turn being secured to the car 
body. (Not shown.) The spring-cups 16 have 
hollow bosses 20, perforated for the passage 
of a bolt 21, which has a head fitting an aper 
ture in the bar 19 and its stem sliding freely 
in a socket in the ends of the equalizer-bars 
13. The bolt 21 preferably has a threaded 
collar or spring-stop 22, and a spring 23 sur 
rounds the body of the bolt and is seated at 
its lower end on the spring-stop 22 and at its 
upper end on an abutment or ledge of the 
boss 20. A spring 23 serves to prevent the 
bolt 21 from being lifted out of its socket, but 
is much weaker than the spring 17. 
In order to limit both longitudinal and lat 
eral oscillations of the car-body, I prefer to 
employ the yokes 24. (Shown particularly 
in Figs. 1, 5, and 6.) These yokes are of suit 
able form to embrace the narrow upright por 
OO 
2 
560,155 
tion of the pedestal, and may be connected 
directly to the car-body or to the bars 19 when 
the latter are employed. As they are intended 
as limiting devices they should not work 
tightly against the sides or the pedestals; but 
a yoke being mounted to embrace each pedes 
tal they will prevent undue movement of the 
car-body either longitudinally or laterally 
with reference to the truck. 
In the construction shown in Figs. 3 and 4 
the ends of the equalizers are connected by 
the cross-pieces, and elliptical springs 25 are 
employed instead of the coiled springs in the 
preceding figures. 
In use it will be found that while the car 
body is evenly mounted upon the springs vio 
lent oscillations will be prevented by the in 
terposition of the equalizers. Thus if one end 
of the car-body rises or falls the springs at 
that end will be extended or compressed, while 
the springs at the opposite ends of the equal 
izer-bars will be compressed or extended. The 
springs thus working in opposition to each 
other tend to limit the vertical oscillation, 
while the pivoting of the equalizer-bars them 
selves obviates the jerking motion which 
would ensue upon the movement of one end 
of the car if said equalizers were rigidly con 
nected to the truck. This improvement there 
fore conduces to the comfort of the passen 
gers and prevents racking strains upon the 
car-body itself. 
It will be observed that in my improved 
truck the car is mounted upon the springs 
and the latter are carried by the equalizer 
bars alone. The pedestals are not extended 
to nor connected with the car-body; but the 
lugs are carried by the car-body and embrace 
the pedestals, so as to restrain and limit the 
oscillation. This is a materially different ar 
rangement from the common one wherein the 
pedestals extend up to and are connected 
with the car-body, as thereby the structure is 
rendered more rigid and the spring effect is 
minimized. In this construction it will be 
seen that the two sets of equalizer-bars are 
not connected at their inner or adjacent ends, 
but that the equalizers for one pair of trucks 
I5 
2 ? 
O 
25 
45 
are entirely independent of and disconnected 
from the equalizers of the other pair of trucks. 
Each end of the car-body is therefore sepa 
rately mounted upon its own set of equalizers, 
and each set of equalizers act in restraint of 
oscillation independently of the other. 
I claim 
1. A car-truck comprising the combination 
with the truck-wheels and their axles, of a 
truck-frame having pedestals in which the 
axle-boxes move, equalizer-bars two for each 
pair of truck-wheels pivotally mounted on 
the pedestals in the vertical plane of the axles 
and projecting transversely of the axles and 
on each side thereof and provided at their 
ends with springs for carrying the car-body, 
substantially as described. 
2. A car-truck comprising the combination 
with the truck-wheels and their axles, of a 
truck-frame having pedestals in which the 
a Nile-boxes move, equalizer-bars two for each 
pair of truck-wheels pivotally mounted on the 
pedestals in the vertical plane of the axles 
and projecting transversely of the axles and 
on each side thereof and provided at their 
ends with springs for carrying the car-body 
and lugs secured to the car-body and embrac 
ing the pedestals whereby to restrain oscilla 
tions of the car-body, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. The combination with a car-truckhaving 
a truck-frame carrying pedestals, and axle 
boxes movable within the pedestals, of two 
pairs of equalizer-bars pivotally mounted 
upon the pedestals and socketed at their outer 
ends, spring-cups mounted over said sockets, 
Springs adapted to said cups, bars for con 
necting the upper ends of the springs, bolts 
connected with said bars and projected 
through the sockets and coiled springs sur 
rounding and bearing on said bolts and nor 
mally tending to hold them in their sockets, 
substantially as described. 
65 
7 ? 
85 
9 O 
EDIMUNID A CUIRTIS. 
VWitnesses: 
N. M. BOND, 
L. T. MIANIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560255.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 560,255. 
T. H., BR, ADY. 
HANGER FOR ELECTRIC ARC LAMPS, 
Patented May 19, 1896. 
  
 
 
SHER II 22. 2 36 
As s S. 
 
772. 
 
 
ANDREW 8. GRAHAM.PhiOTO-LTHO.washington, c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS II. BRADY, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT. 
HANGER FOR ELECTRIC-ARC LAMPs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,255, dated May 19, 1896. 
Application filed January 4, 1896, Serial No. 574,327, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, THOMAS H. BRADY, of 
New Britain, in Hartford county, Connecti 
cut, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Hangers for Electric-Arc 
Lamps, which improvements are described 
in the following specification and are illus 
trated by the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to those hangers for 
electric-arc lamps which perform the double 
function of supporting the lamp and of main 
taining an electrical connection between the 
lamp and the line connections which are out 
side of the lamp. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
hanger of the specified class which shall take 
hold of the lamp easily and let it go with dif 
ficulty and which shall at the same time pre 
serve a superior electrical connection between 
the hanger and the lamp. To accomplish 
these objects I use two dependent-hooks, one 
to engage each terminal ring or hook of the 
lamp, and provide each of said dependent 
hooks with an electrically conductive spring, 
Which is seated within the base of the hook 
and mechanically closes the mouth of the 
hook in a peculiar manner. 
The best manner in which I have contem 
plated applying the principles of my inven 
tion is illustrated by said drawings, which 
include three figures. 
Figure 1 is an under side view of a hanger 
board supplied with hangers, which are con 
Structed in accordance with those principles. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged longitudinal Section 
through one of said hangers on the section 
line ac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged plan 
view of the same hanger right side up. 
The numeral 1 in Figs. 1 and 2 denotes a 
hanger-board of any ordinary or convenient 
description to which the lamp is to be at 
tached. This board may be secured in the 
hood of a lamp in a horizontal position and 
With that side down which is presented to 
the observer in Fig. 1. Such a board is usu 
ally supplied with binding-posts or termi 
nals 2 and 3 for line connection, with cut-out 
mechanism 4, with hangers 6 and 7, and with 
appropriate electrical connections between 
Such binding-posts, hangers, and cut-out. 
These connections being located principally 
on the reverse side of the hanger-board are 
- 
IO 
I 5 
35 
45 
 
65 
not shown in the drawings. The hanger 7, 
which is a duplicate of hanger 6, is made of 
copper or other conductive material, and con- 55 
sists of a hollow base 8, an upturned hook 9, 
a flat spring 13, and a binding-post 10 for the 
line-wire. The base 8 of this hanger, as 
shown in Figs. 2 and 3, has a longitudinal 
cavity 12 and two inwardly-projecting lips 14 
and is attached to the hanger-board by screws 
11. Spring 13 is inserted in cavity 12 and is 
normally held in the oblique position, which 
is shown in Fig. 2, by means of lips 14 and the 
contiguous screw 11. This spring stretches 
obliquely across the mouth of hook 9, and 
being perforated near its free end by a hole 
5, which fits over the outer end of hook 9, 
effectually closes the mouth of that hook, as 
shown in Figs. 2 and 3. 
Such being the construction of my im 
proved hanger, its mode of operation requires 
but little explanation. The two terminal 
hooks of the lamp-frame (not shown in the 
drawings) are inserted in hooks 9, respec 
tively, by being pushed upward against the 
Outer end portion of springs 13 and over the 
outer ends of hooks 9. In this operation 
spring 13 is momentarily raised to the posi 
tion in which it is shown by dotted lines in 
Fig. 2. At all other times this spring presses 
down over the point of hook 9, and when that 
hook is occupied by one of the said terminal 
hooks of the lamp-frame this spring also 
presses downward upon that terminal hook, 
holding it securely in place and completing, 
the electrical connection between such termi 
nal hook and the base 8 of the hanger. This 
structure and mode of operation present two 
important advantages. The first advantage, 
already indicated, arises from the circum 
stance that the hook 9 and the spring 13 are 
in electrical contact with each other within 
base S. From this circumstance it follows 
that the electrical connection from the ter 
minal lamp-hook, which is placed in hook 9, 
to the base of hook 9 is complete by the way 
of that hook and also by the way of spring 13, 
and this is accounplished without any inter 
mediate conductor. The second of these ad 
vantages is mechanical, and arises from the 
described relative positions of spring 13 and 
hook 9. In hanging up the lamp less pres 
sure is necessary to be exerted upward against 
95 
OO 
560,255 
made of like material, is seated within said 
hollow base, and in electrical contact there 
with, extends across the mouth of the hook, 
and is provided with a hole, located near the 
free end of said spring, and fitting over the 
point of said hook, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
2. A hanger for an electric-arc lamp, con 
sisting of a pair of dependent hooks, each of 
which is provided with a hollow base, and is 
composed of electrically conductive material, 
in combination with a spring, which is made 
of like material, is seated within said hollow 
base, and in electrical contact there with, ex 
tends obliquely across the mouth of the hook, 
and is provided with a hole, located near the 
free end of said spring, and fitting over the 
point of said hook, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof. I hereunto set my 
name in the presence of two witnesses. 
TIOMAS II. BRADY. 
45 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD H. MATHER, 
WILLARD EDDY. 
spring 13 than in the reverse operation of un 
hooking the lamp, for the reason that in the 
former case the pressure is exerted at a 
greater distance from the attached end of the 
spring. From this peculiarity it results that 
the lamp is more easily placed in position 
than displaced. In other words, the termi 
nal hooks or rings of the lamp are more easily 
hooked onto the hangers than unhooked from 
them, which is the reverse of the ordinary 
construction. By reason of the described pe 
culiarities the hanger takes hold of the lamp 
easily and lets it go with difficulty, and at 
the same time preserves a superior electrical 
connection between the terminal rings or 
hooks of the lamp and the bases of the hang 
ers into which they are respectively hooked. 
Such being the construction and operation 
of my improved hangers for electric-arc 
lamps, I claim as my invention 
1. A hanger for an electric-arc lamp, con 
sisting of a dependent hook, which is made 
of electrically conductive material, and is 
provided with a hollow base, of like material, 
in combination with a flat spring, which is 
5 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560356.txt	(No Model.) 
E. E. HULL. 
SASH HOLDER. 
No. 560,356, 
Patented May 19, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
   
K 
1 
s 
2 
w 
s 
2 
-2 S3 
N AAA 
Y 
K 
 
C^2/72 esses. 
3.22, %2. 
Z722/e72227 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EUGENE E. HULL OF SILVER CLIFF, COLORADO, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS 
TO JOHN FEIST AND JESSE FORNEY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SASH HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,356, dated May 19, 1896. 
Application filed February 13, 1896, Serial No. 579,109, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EUGENEE. HULL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Silver 
Cliff, in the county of Custer and State of 
Colorado, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Window-Sash Holders; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
Myinvention has relation to improvements, 
in Window-sashholders whereby the sash may 
be moved to any position in the window and 
Stand; and the object is to make and con 
struct a sash with spring-cushions of particul 
lar construction disposed on the edges of the 
grooves in the Window-frame, as hereinafter 
specified. 
I have fully and clearly illustrated the in 
vention in the accompanying drawings, form 
ing a part of this specification, wherein 
Eigure 1 is a front view of a window, show 
ing the holders applied to the sash, the stiles 
of the sash being shown as broken away at 
the points where the holders are inserted and 
secured. Fig. 2 is an edge view of the sash 
and holder. Fig. 3 is a detail view of the 
holder parts arranged in relative positions. 
Fig. 4 is alongitudinal central section through 
a part of a sash and the holder. 
A designates a Window-sash, and B the 
Window, both of the usualconstruction, where 
in the sash moves up and down in guides or 
Ways in the side pieces of the frame. In the 
outer edge of each stile of the Window-sash is 
formed a mortise 1 of such size as to take and , 
hold the holders substantially as shown. A 
holder is placed in each mortise and bears 
against the face of the groove in which the 
sash slides. The holders are duplicates in 
construction and therefore the description of 
One applies to the other, and, referring to the 
drawings, C designates the base-plate, fitting 
the bottom of the mortise and formed with 
circular projecting studs 2 2*, constituting 
seats for holding the inner ends of the spring 
cushions. On each end of the base-plate C 
is detachably placed a metal block 33, in the 
inner faces of which is formed a recess 4, in 
which the ends of the movable plate are dis 
posed and slide. 
D designates the movable plate, which is 
pushed outward by the springs. This plate 
is formed with inclined ends 5 5*, terminat 
ing in rectangular projections 66, which fit 
loosely in the recesses 4 and are held and 
limited in their upward movement by the up 
per wall or flange of the recesses in the end 
blocks 33*. On the under side or face of the 
plate D are formed studs 77, standing di 
rectly in alinement with the lower studs 22*, 
and arranged on these studs are two spiral 
springs 88*, the force of which pushes the 
plate D outward, and when the holder is se 
cured in place holds it in constant frictional 
contact with the surface of the guides in the 
window-frame. 
To assemble the parts in their operative re 
lation, the bottom plate Cisfitted in the mor 
tise and the springs placed thereon on the 
seats intended for them. The movable plate 
is then placed on the springs and the end 
blocks on the movable plate, and then screws 
are projected through the blocks and ends of 
the bottom plate into the sash-stile, and the 
holder is in properposition for use. The sash 
with the holders thereon is inserted in the 
usual manner, the movable plates being 
pushed inward even with the face edge of the 
stiles, and then the outward force of the 
Springs pushes the plates into contact with 
the Window-frame, and the sash will be held 
in any position to which it is moved. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
A Window-sash holder, comprising a bottom 
plate having projections thereon to take the 
ends of springs, an upper plate having in 
clined end portions and projections from the 
foot of the inclines, and formed with seats 
to take the ends of springs, spiral springs 
arranged on the seats on the plates, end 
blocks on the ends of the bottom plate formed 
With Ways or recesses to take and hold the 
ends of the upperplate, and fastening-screws 
projecting through the end blocks and the 
ends of the bottom plate. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
EUGENE E. HULL. 
Witnesses; 
JNO. A. FEIST, 
JESSE S, FORNEY. 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560456.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 560,456, 
A. W. H. WOLTERS 
w 
TABLE, 
Patented May 19, 1896. 
. . 
5 
 
-1255 
4 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST W. H. WOLTERS, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO THE LEROI 
FURNITURE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,456, dated May 19, 1896. 
Application filed May 27, 1895, Serial No. 550,825, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUST W. H. WOL 
TERS, of the city of St. Louis, in the State of 
MissOuri, have invented certain new and use 
5 ful Improvements in Tables, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
dra Wings, forming a part hereof. 
My invention relates to an improved table; 
I O and it consists in the novel construction, com 
bination, and arrangement of parts herein 
after described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of my improved table. Fig. 2 is an en 
I5 larged sectional view taken approximately 
on the indicated line 22 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is 
a sectional view taken approximately on the 
indicated line 33 of Fig. 2, the table top and 
leaf being shown in this view. Fig. 4 is a 
2O view in perspective of one of the hinge-plates 
of which I make use in carrying out my in 
Vention. 
Referring by numerals to the accompany 
ing, drawings, 1 indicates the rectangular 
25 frame of a table, the same being of the usual 
construction and supported on suitable legs 
or standards 2. Said frame 1 is provided 
With an ordinary table-top 3, the edges of 
which extend past the sides of the frame 1. 
44 indicate Ordinary table-leaves, the same 
being connected by hinges 5 to the side edges 
of the table-top 3. Formed in the top and 
bottom edges of the side rails of the frame 1 
and at the centers thereof are slight recesses 
77 indicate hinge-plates of which I make 
use in carrying Out my invention, the same 
being constructed of ordinary metallic straps 
and having end portions 8, that extend at 
4O right angles to the body portions. In the 
ends of said end portions S are formed aper 
tures 9. These right-angled extending por 
tions 8 are located in the recesses 6, and 
Screws 10 pass through the apertures 9 and 
45 thus pivotorhinge said plates to the side rails 
of the frame I. 
11 II indicate leaf-supports, the ends 12 of 
which are cut or formed at slight angles rela 
tive to the top and bottom edges thereof. 
So Formed in the top and bottom edges of said 
leaf-supports adjacent the rear ends 12 
35 or depressions 6. 
thereof are recesses or cut-away portions 13, 
in which the body portions of the hinge-plates 
7 are located and held by means of screws 14, 
passing through suitable apertures formed in 55 
said plates. When said supports 11 are prop 
erly located and hinged to the side rails of 
the frame 1, the lower rear ends of said sup 
ports will, when said supports are moved at 
right angles to the side rails of the frame, 6o 
engage against the lower faces of the side 
rails of the frame 1, while the upper rear 
edges of said supports will be a very slight 
distance from the upper faces of said side 
rails, this being by reason of the peculiar 65 
formation of the rear edges of said supports. 
By reason of this construction the lower por 
tion of the inner end of each support 11 will 
first come in contact with one of said side 
rails, (when said support is placed in a posi- 7o 
tion to support the table-leaf,) so that the in 
Ward movement of said lower portion is first 
arrested but the upper part is left free to 
continue its movement in Ward, whereby the 
outer end of the support will have a tendency 75 
imparted to it to be thrown upward as the 
pressure exerted by the operator's handisin 
creased. A reference to Fig. 2 will show that 
the said supports are substantially in the 
form of a rectangle, so that when their inner 8o 
upper corners are forced inward and their 
lower inner corners are in contact with the 
side rails of the table the Outer upper corners 
must necessarily be thrown upward in accord 
ance with the movement of similar devices 85 
in the form of the Well-known bell-crank and 
angular levers and bars. The support 11 will 
be held in such elevated position by means of 
frictional contact of its upper outer corner 
With the under surface of the table-leaf, the 9o 
friction generated at such point, as I have 
found, being amply sufficient for such pur 
pOSe. 
When it is desired to lower the leaves 4, 
the Supports 11 are swung laterally, as indi- 95 
cated by the arrow and dotted lines in Fig. 2, 
and until said supports lie immediately 
against the side rails of the frame 1. When 
in this position, they are beneath the protrud 
ing edges of the table-top 3, and the leaves 4 Ioo 
may be now swung downwardly and into ver 
tical planes. 
angle relative to the top and bottom edges 
thereof, whereby the lower portion of said 
end will contact first with the said side rails 
when said support is placed in a position to 
support the table-leaf and the upper part left 
free to move inward to elevate the outer end 
of said support as the pressure exerted by 
the operator's hand is increased and con 
tinued, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
AUGUST W. H. WOLTERS. 
25 
Witnesses: 
MAUD GRIFFIN, 
JOHN C. HIGDON. 
2 
560,456 
A table of my improved construction is 
simple and inexpensive. The leaf-supports 
thereof are so constructed as to prevent the 
outer ends of the leaves from sagging or low 
ering into planes below the plane occupied by 
the table-top when said leaves are in proper 
position, and said leaf-supports may be folded 
against the sides of the frame and beneath 
the protruding edges of the table-top when 
the leaves are not in use. 
The improved table having the usual side 
rails, top and hinged leaves, a leaf-support 
11 made of wood and provided on its inner 
end with angular metallic hinge-plates 7 and 
thereby hinged to one of said side rails, and 
the inner end 12 of said support cut off at an 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560556.txt	(No Model.) , 
No. 560,556, 
 
C. A. WILLIAMSON. 
CORSET. 
Patented May 19 
1896. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CATHERINE A. WILLIAMSON, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
CO RSET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,556, dated May 19, 1896. 
Application filed March 1, 1895, Serial No. 540,192, (No model.) 
To aii whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CATHERINE A. WIL 
LIAMSON, of the city of St. Louis, in the State 
of Missouri, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Corsets, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming part of this specifica 
tion. 
The object of my invention is to guard 
against the breakage of the ribs of a corset 
at the Waist, and at the same time to prevent 
the ribs, if broken by long use or by reason 
of their being of inferior quality, from pro 
jecting through the innerlining or fabric ply 
of the corset and annoying the Wearer. 
My invention consists in a corset provided 
With One or more sections or sheets forming 
shields of light resilient substance between 
the ribs and the inner fabric ply of the cor 
Set at the waist-line, these sections or sheets 
being stitched into and made part of the cor 
Set and being of such material as not to be 
punctured by the ribs should they become 
broken, While at the same time yielding read 
ily to the form of the body and adding to 
rather than detracting from the symmetrical 
Curvature of the corset. 
Figure I is a perspective view of my im 
proved corset, part broken away. Fig. II is 
a detail vertical section enlarged. Fig. III 
is an enlarged detail horizontal section. Fig. 
IV is a detail side view with part of the outer 
fabric ply broken away. Fig. V is an en 
larged detail horizontal section of the meet 
ing edges of the corset. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents the 
ribs of the corset; 2, the stitching between 
the ribs; 3, the outer fabric ply; 4, the in 
ner fabric ply, and 5 the steels. 
6 represents sections or sheets of thin yield 
ing material placed along the waist-line be 
tween the ribs 1 and the inner lining or fab 
ric ply 4 of the corset. These sections or 
sheets are of such material as will not be 
punctured by the ribs should they become 
- 
broken, and I prefer to use thin sheets of 
phosphor-bronze, though other materials may 
be used. The rows of stitches 2 pass through 
these sections, and they are as much a part 
of the corset as the ribs and steels. I have 
shown the corset provided with a number of 
these sections; but the ones most important 
are those directly over the hips, and my in 
vention can in a measure be carried out by 
using these and omitting the rest. 
As shown 
in Fig. II, these sections add to rather than 
interfere with symmetrical curvature of the 
corset and protect the ribs against abrupt 
bends. 
One of the sections 6 at each edge of the 
corset overlaps and supplements the steel 5 
at the edge of the corset, as shown in Fig. V. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A corset having the inner and outer fab 
rics, the stiffeners or bones therebetween, and 
the series of guard-strips at the waist portion 
of the corset and between each stiffener or 
bone and the inner fabric of the corset, each 
guard-strip being in itself a stiffening plate 
or section; substantially as specified. 
2. The combination of inner and outer cov 
ering-plies, the stiffeners between said plies 
and the herein-described protecting-plate 
consisting of the thin piece of resilient sheet 
metal interposed between the stiffeners and 
the inner one of the covering-plies along the 
waist-line, substantially in the manner and 
for the purpose set forth. 
3. A corset comprising outer and inner fab 
ric plies and intermediate vertical stiffeners, 
and a series of short, thin resilient sheets in 
corporated within the body of the corset be 
tween the stiffeners and the inner ply at and 
along the waist-line of the corset, and secured 
in place by the stitches that form the pockets 
for the vertical stiffeners, substantially as 
described. 
CATHERINE A. WILLIAMSON. 
In presence of 
STANLEY STONER, 
W. FINLEY. 
55 
65 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560656.txt	(No Model.) 
W, T, SMITH 
SECTIONAL PIANO. 
No. 560,656, 
Patented May 26, 1896. 
 
 
Hitpasses 
464 47 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM.Photo-Litho.washingtoN.de 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM T. SMITH, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE WM. 
KNABE & CO. MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SECTIONAL PIANO. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,656, dated May 26, 1896, 
Application filed September 16, 1895, Serial No. 562,703, (No model.) 
50 
2O. 
To all tuhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that, I, WILLIAM. T. SMITH, of 
Baltimore, in the State of Maryland, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
5 in Sectional Pianos; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
Io My invention relates to an improvement in 
Sectional pianos, the object being to provide 
means for effectually dismantling an upright 
piano so as to leave no lateral projections, 
such as the arms or feet, to form obstructions 
I5 to the passage through a doorway, hall, or 
stairway; and it consists in certain novel 
features of construction and combinations of 
parts which will be hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in front elevation, a part of the front 
of the piano being removed to show the back 
of the frame or case. Fig. 2 is a viewin side 
elevation of one of the detachable sides, and 
25 Fig. 3 is a front view of one of these sides. 
A represents the back frame of the piano 
body or case, and B B are the sides. The 
sides are just alike, and each comprises the 
main upright, the arm1, and the foot 2. These 
3o three parts are all in one piece, they being 
either integral or secured together, as the case 
may be, so that when the sides are removed 
the arms and feet are removed at the same 
time. As a convenient means of securing 
35 these sides to the frame the inner face of each 
of these sides is provided with the plates 33, 
which are secured by screws or otherwise. 
These plates have the angular projections 4 
projecting therefrom, and sockets 55 are 
4o formed in the Outer side edges of the frame 
to receive these projections. In the center of 
each projection a threaded hole 6 is formed, 
and a bolt 7 is inserted through each hole 8 
opening into the sockets 55, and its threaded 
 
It is evident that some slight changes might 65 
end 9 screws into the threaded hole 6, the 45 
bolt being turned from its head on the inside 
end. Three or more of these bolts may be 
employed. When these bolts are screwed up 
tight, the sides become as rigid as any other 
part of the frame or case, and they are in no 
danger of working loose due to moving the 
piano or the natural vibration of the piano 
resulting from playing it. In addition to the 
sides, including the arms and feet, being re 
movable of course the keyboard and other 55 
parts which have hitherto been detachable 
in other upright pianos are also removable in 
this piano, so that the width may be reduced 
half or to that of the side uprights, which 
renders it possible for this piano to be carried 
straight into the narrowest doorway, through 
the narrowest hallway, or up or down any 
staircase without difficulty or the further dis 
memberment of the parts of the piano. 
be resorted to in the form and arrangement 
of the several parts described without de 
parting from the spirit and scope of my in 
vention, and hence I do not wish to limit my 
self to the exact construction herein set forth; 7o 
but, 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
sectional-piano case, and removable ends, of 
plates secured to the removable ends and pro 
vided with projections which enter recesses 
in the back frame, and bolts passed through 
the back frame and screwed into the plates 
on the ends, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
The combination with the back frame of a 75 
WILLIAM T. SMITH. 
VERNON E. HoDGES, 
GEO, F. DOWNING. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560756.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMII. PAUL SCHOENFELDER AND EMIL KEFILE, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
SELF-TONING SENSITIVE PHOTOGRAPHIC PAPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,756, dated May 26, 1896. 
Application filed October 25, 1895, 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, EMIL PAUL SCHOEN 
FELDER and EMIL IXEHLE, citizens of the 
United States, residing in Newark, county of 
Essex, and State of New Jersey, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Chemical Compositions for Photographic 
Purposes; and we do hereby declare the foll 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
Our present invention is an improvement 
on the chemical compound or composition 
covered by our application for United States 
Letters Patent, Serial No. 558,783, filed 
August 9, 1895. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
chemical compound or composition for the 
preparation of paper, especially glazed paper, 
porcelain, or any other suitable material on 
which photographic prints are to be made 
from a negative plate, whereby a uniform 
toning of the picture is accomplished simul 
taneously with the printing, and thus the ton 
ing, after the print is made, is fully avoided. 
Our composition consists of the following 
ingredients, combined in the proportions 
stated, and which we will call stock or 
ground solution, viz: 
Stock solution A, (collodion:) pyroxylin, 
three hundred grains; ether, (United States 
Pharmacopoeia, 1880,) one pound; alcohol, 
absolute, one pound. 
Stock solution B: fifteen grains of a chlorid 
of a metal of the platinum class, such as irid 
ium chlorid, rhodium chlorid, osmium chlo 
rid, palladium chlorid, or platinum chlorid, 
said fifteen grains of chlorid being dissolved 
in one-half ounce of alcohol. Forty per cent. 
gold chlorid is not mentioned, as it is covered 
by the application above referred to. 
One and one-half ounces of stock solution 
Aare thoroughly mixed with ten drops of stock 
solution B, and the following ingredients are 
added in the proportions stated, viz.: (a) tar 
taric acid, three grains, which are dissolved 
before mixing with the other ingredients in 
three drops of alcohol; (b) fifteen grains of 
silver nitrate, first dissolved in fifty drops of 
Serial No. 566,896. (No specimens.) 
forty per cent. alcohol; (c) one and one-half 
grains of a chlorid, such as strontium chlorid, 
or barium chlorid, or of zirconium chlorid, 
dissolved before mixing with the other ingre 
dients in three drops of forty per cent. alco 
hol, and (d) two drops of a softening chem 
ical, such as glycerin. 
The above emulsion is applied to the Sur 
face of the material on which the picture or 
photo is to be printed. The surface must be 
thoroughly dried before using. After the 
print has been made it is given a bath in a 
solution of sodium hyposulfite one part to 
fifteen parts of water, in which bath it re 
mains until all superfluous chemicals have 
been removed from the picture, (about five 
minutes,) when it is taken out and thor 
oughly washed in clean Water. The picture 
is then ready for mounting, and as the toning 
has been accomplished simultaneously with 
the printing it does not require any addi 
tional toning and has a superior finish that 
will not fade or turn yellow by being exposed 
to light. 
In place of stock solution A a solution can 
be used composed of gelatin one palt and 
water three parts, in which case the ingre 
dients mentioned under (Cl), (b), and (c) are 
dissolved in water instead of in alcohol. 
It should be understood that we waive in 
the present application all claim to gold chlo 
rid and citric acid, as these are covered by 
the application above referred to. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A chemical composition to be used for 
preparing the surface of suitable material for 
photographic prints, consisting of chlorid of 
platinum, of silver nitrate, a holding sub 
stance, and tartaric acid, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. A chemical composition to be used for 
preparing the surface of suitable material for 
photographic prints, consisting of a salt of 
platinum, of silver nitrate, a holding Sub 
stance, such as collodion, tartiaric acid, and 
glycerin, substantially as described. 
3. A chemical composition to be used for 
preparing the surface of suitable material for 
5 
O 
25 
35 
- 45 
SO 
75 
So 
95 
ICO 
3. 
560,756 
photographic prints, consisting of a holding 
Substance, such as collodion, a salt of plati 
num, of silver nitrate, a chlorid, such as stron 
tium chlorid, a softening ingredient, such as 
5 glycerin, and tartaric acid, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing 
we have hereunto set our hands this 19th day 
of October, 1895. 
EMIT, PAUL SCHOENFELDER. 
EMIL IKEIILE. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED GARTNER, 
WM. D. BELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560856.txt	W. A. KONEMAN. 
ORE scourING APPARATUS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 26, 1896. 
: 
s N 
ls, 
---, 
-H - - - - - - - s 
(No Model.) 
No. 560,856. 
S. 
N. 
|- 
st 
S 
s 
5 
& 
|. 
ill 
t 
|-- 
S 
s 
SN 
& 
f 
9:" 
s 
in 
Z47zzesses, 
zvez2%r: 
/2ZZzz7%/22e27%22 
22-432-ya-4 
ta2/S --- 
(No Model.) 
wn 
No. 560,856. 
W. A. KONEMAN. 
ORE SCOURING APPARATUS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 26, 1896 
 
SySSSSSSSSSSS SS K 
a 
 
 
 
  
N 
NN y 
S&NSSY s 
S 's 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
o 
g 3) 
c 3. 
 
NS A Z722/ez2227 
//zero://6remar 
24.2% 
ta2/3-- 
p 
63%, 
(27. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 560,856. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
W. A. KONEMAN, 
ORE SCOURING APPARATUS, 
Patented May 26, 1896. 
Sicial 
s 
t 
2 s's TN 
SNS TI meA 11 HSN N fi 
NS N 
IIII 
SY 
SS 
Xa sis 
 
 
 
NSNSNNSNSSS 
EUlar 
III 
2S . 2 2 
2 HS1 
A. 
SNSSNSS2 & S2A 
s 
s Ny st 
SSS2 
R 
2 
 
 
 
3||13 
2% A W 
2 
s 
SY 
n 
T 
R 21.31 Z2 
 
 
 
2 
2 
 
  
 
 
22 
2 
a 2.. 
S. 
2 2 2 2 
mis is 
R SS 
2 2 2 2 
Hills SI It 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Z722/e7zZ27, 
M. /2Zaz77. A /Zorzezzazz 
A2/(S --- 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. A. KONEMAN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ORE-SCOURING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,856, dated May 26, 1896. 
Application filed March 6, 1894, Renewed October 24, 1895, Serial No, 566,783, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMA. KONEMAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Ore - Scouring Apparatus, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my improvement is to pro 
vide an apparatus of novel construction, ren 
dering it peculiarly effective in its purpose 
for Scouring pulverized ore, particularly of 
the variety bearing precious metal (gold or 
silver) after it has been subjected to roast 
ing, and thereby cleanse the contained atoms 
of gold or silver of any substance or coating 
film tending to hinder or retard amalgama 
tion or interfere with any other treatment to 
which the ore is subsequently subjected for 
recovering from it the precious metal, and as 
an incident of the construction and manner 
of operation of my improved apparatus it is 
my further object to provide for a tendency 
of its reducing the pulverized ore, while un 
dergoing the scouring operation, to a condi 
tion of greater fineness. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a view representing my improved 
apparatus in side elevation. Figs. 2 and 3 
are sections taken, respectively, at the lines 
2 and 3 on Fig. 1 and viewed as indicated by 
arrows. Fig. 4 is a broken section taken at 
the line 4 on Fig. 3 and viewed in the direc 
tion of the arrow; and Fig. 5 is a broken sec 
tion taken at the line 5 on Fig. 1, viewed in 
the direction of the arrow and enlarged. 
As the generally-stated construction of my 
improved apparatus, it may be described as 
involving a drum rotatably supported in re 
cumbent position and divided by internal 
screen-diaphragms into a series of intercom 
municating chambers provided at intervals 
about the inner wall of the drum with trans 
Versely-extending ribs for raising and drop 
ping, and thereby thoroughly agitating the 
ore by the rotation of the drum, there being 
interposed between the ore-feed and inlet 
end to the drum a mixer and the outlet from 
the drum, involving a construction whereby 
the discharge is directed from a side of the 
final chamber to the center of the drum-head, 
Whence it is emitted in a stream. 
A is the drum, shown as of cylindrical shape 
and as formed in annular flanged sections fas 
tened together at the circumferential flanges 
r, at some of which the drum rests between 
the flanges of rollers g on shafts q, journaled 
in bearings on the bed B of the apparatus to 
extendlengthwise of the drum along opposite 
sides of its longitudinal center. At one end 
of the shafts g they carry gear-wheels q, be 
tween which is interposed to mesh with them 
a pinion p on the drive-shaft p", provided with 
a tight and loose belt pulley p. Within the 
drum at desired intervals, preferably corre 
sponding with the flanges r, are fitted the 
perforated or screen-like diaphragms C, which 
divide the interior of the drum into chambers 
C', by preference eight in number, and across 
which at intervals on the inner wall of the 
drum extend radially inward the ribso. The 
head A' of the drum has a central tubular 
trunnion extension in, which enters the up 
right trough - shaped case D' of a mixer D 
through one of its sides, and which trough 
may be built of wood and is surmounted by a 
hopper D, and through the hollow trunnion 
extends from the opposite side of the trough, 
where it is journaled in a bearing t, a rotary 
shaft m, preferably hollow, and having its 
inner bearing, as shown in Fig. 4, at the cen 
ter of the first of the series of diaphragms C. 
At the entrances of the hollow trunnion and 
shaft in into the mixer-case are provided the 
stuffing-boxes l and l. 
E and E are disk-shaped heads, formed of 
boiler metal and surrounding the trunnion in 
to revolve with it, being to that end riveted 
to the annular flanges c' at opposite ends of 
a sleeve k, formed in two flanged sections fas 
tened together on the trunnion. (See Fig. 3.) 
The two heads are rigidly united by a num 
ber of interposed metal blades i, and at in 
tervals about the peripheries of the heads are 
provided rigid paddles E. 
The shaft m carries a conveyer h and a 
sprocket-wheel m', connected by an endless 
chain m with a sprocket-wheel m on the 
shaft p'. 
The head A at the discharge end of the 
drum has an outlet-opening g between its cen 
ter and periphery, (see Fig. 5,) from which 
proceeds on the outer face of the head a snail 
like housing F, bolted in place and affording 
a passage f, leading to the center of the head 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
95 
OO 
2 
560,856 
and there terminating in a forwardly-protrud 
ing discharge-spout e. 
In the chambers C', I provide chilled-iron 
balls d, about, say, one and one-half inch in 
diameter, or broken pieces of hard rock or the 
like, to afford attrition - pieces, in sufficient 
Quantity to fill each chamber about one 
fourth full. 
The operation is as follows: The pulver 
ized Ore mixed with Water to reduce it to the 
consistency of a pulp is fed through the hop 
per D* to the mixer D while the shaft p", and 
consequently the drum, the heads EE", and 
the Worm-shaft n, is revolving. The amount 
of material fed into the mixer should be suf 
ficient to keep the level therein somewhat 
above the point of discharge at the outlet 
Opening g. The action of the mixer thor 
Oughly agitates and Works the pulpy mass, 
Which enters the trunnion , and is therein 
Worked into the drum by the conveyer h, 
which is geared to rotate at a somewhat higher 
speed than the drum to tend to prevent sedi 
ment in the hollow trunnion. On entering 
the first chamber C the mass is subjected 
to the attrition action of the balls d by the 
showering through it produced by the lifting 
and dropping action upon them of the ribso, 
to which treatment the mass in each chamber 
is subjected, the chambers becoming succes 
sively supplied by percolation of the material 
through their screen - walls. In the final 
chamber C the discharge takes place at the 
opening g and is directed through the snail 
like passagef to the central spoute, whence 
the outflow is in the form of a regular stream. 
When a run of the apparatus is completed, 
the drum should be brought to a standstill 
with its series of manholes c, with one of 
which each chamber C' is provided, at the bot 
tom, so that on removing the manhole-covers 
at the end of a run the contents of the cham 
bers may be readily dumped. 
by Letters Patent, is 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
1. In an Ore-Scouring apparatus, the com 
bination of a rotatably-supported drum Adi 
vided internally by perforated partitions C 
into chambers C and having a discharge-out 
let in One head, and a hollow trunnion in on 
its opposite head, and an ore-mixer D com 
prising a trough and heads E and E' secured 
on said trunnion, connected by blades i, and 
carrying paddles E on their periphery, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In an Ore-Scouring apparatus, the com 
bination of a rotatably-supported drum. A di 
vided internally by perforated partitions C 
into chambers C and having a discharge-out 
let in One head and a hollow trunnion in on 
its opposite head, an ore-mixer D comprising 
a trough and heads E and E' secured on said 
trunnion and connected by blades carrying 
paddles E on their periphery, and a worm 
conveyer h. in the trunnion on a rotatably-sup 
ported shaft n, geared to the driving-shaft of 
the apparatus, Substantially as described. 
3. An ore-Scouring apparatus comprising, 
in combination, the rotatably-supported drum 
A divided internally by perforated partitions 
C into chambers C', ribs O extending trans 
versely of the chambers at intervals about 
the inner Wall of the drum, attrition-pieces d 
in the chambers, an outlet-opening g in the 
drum-head A and a snail-like discharge-pas 
Sage if on said head, a hollow trunnion in lead 
ing centrally from the drum-head A', an ore 
mixer D comprising a trough D' surmounted 
by a hopper D, heads E and E' fastened on 
the trunnion, connected by blades i and car 
rying paddles E on their periphery, and a 
Worm-conveyer h in the trunnion on a rotata 
bly-supported shaft in geared to the driving 
shaft of the apparatus, the whole being con 
structed and arranged to operate substan 
tially as described. 
WILLIAM A. KONEMAN. 
In presence of 
M. J. FROST, 
W. N. WILLIAMS. 
55 
65 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US560956.txt	(No Model.) 
W. T. WILLIE. 
WIRE STRETCHER 
No. 560,956, 
Patented May 26, 1896, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM T. WILLIE, OF INDEPENDENCE, TEXAS. 
WIRE-STRETCHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 560,956, dated May 26, 1896. 
Application filed October 26, 1895, Serial No. 666,889, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. T. WILLIE, of 
Independence, in the county of Washington 
and State of Texas, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvementsin Wire-Stretchers; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it pertains to make and use 
it, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, which form part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention has reference to improve 
ments in wire-stretchers; and it consists in 
the novel features of construction hereinafter 
fully described and claimed, and illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the 
stretcher shown in position on and in the act 
of stretching a wire. Fig. 2 is a detailed per 
spective view of the stretcher. Figs. 3 and 
4 are views taken on opposite sides of the 
stretcher. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
device which will grip the wire and maintain 
a permanent hold thereon while the same is 
being stretched. 
A designates the body of the stretcher or 
clutch, which is here shown with an aperture 
at its outer end to attach an operating-level 
or other device, and at its opposite end the 
same is bifurcated to constitute the forks B 
and C. The forkB is turned backward upon 
itself to form a clutch-hookID, while the fork 
C is formed with the V-shaped notchE, which 
also constitutes a clutch, the said last-named 
notch and the notch or depression of the hook 
being disposed in opposite directions, as 
shown. However, both clutches or notches 
extendin planes longitudinal with the handle 
or body portion. 
In operation the wire strand F is lodged in 
hook D, and the handle or body portion is 
turned downward or in line with the wire 
- 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
strand, so as to engage the same with the 
clutch or notch E, and a continuation of said 
downward movement forms akink or bendin 
the wire, which, together with the wedging 
hold gained thereon by the V-shaped notches, 
prevents the wire or clutch from slipping. 
The device is formed of a single integral 
piece of metal and is very cheap of manufac 
ture and at the same time effective in opera 
tion. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. A wire-stretcher comprising the body 
portion, extensions B and C therefrom, the 
latter being inwardly notched at its extrem 
ity, and hook D at the extremity of fork B, 
said hook being disposed laterally or in a 
plane substantially parallel with the plane of 
the notched extremity of fork C, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
2. A wire-stretcher comprising a body por 
tion, the rigid projecting forks B and C in 
tegral with the body portion, fork C being 
notched inward at its extremity, and back 
Wardly-turned hook D on fork B, said hook 
being projected laterally from the fork and 
in a plane parallel with the plane of fork C, 
Substantially as shown and described. 
3. As a new article of manufacture, a wire 
stretcher comprising a body portion bifur 
cated at one end with the rigidintegral forks of 
the bifurcation oppositely notched with said 
notches arranged in line substantially trans 
verse of the body portion, whereby the de 
vice is adapted to operate in holding the wire 
for stretching in the manner set forth and 
shown. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM T. WILLIE, 
Witnesses: 
WM. G. THORNHILL, 
T. C. HAIRSTON, 
o 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561056.txt	C. KUHLEWIND 
GLASS PRESS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1 
Patented May 26, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 561,056, 
 
WTNESSES 
1N VENTOPR 
NDREW B. GRAHAM. PH0f0 - THO. WASHINGTON, DC 
(No Model.) 
No. 561,056, 
C. KUHLEWIND, 
GLASS PRESS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented May 26, 1896, 
O 
 
WITNESSES 
 
?? 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 561,056. 
Patented May 26, 1896, 
 
WITNESSES 
?? 
SANs, Yr 
NWENTOR 
ffExt BGRAHAM.PHOTO-trio.WASHRSTOR.D.C. . 
(No Model.) 
. -- 
C. KUHLEWIND, 
GLASS PRESS, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 561,056. 
Patented May 26, 1896. 
2 
- 
; /did ??d 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 561,056, 
 
C. KUHLEWIND, 
GLASS PRESS, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented May 26, 1896, 
 
 
ANDREw a GRAHAM.PHOTO-LTHO, WASH:NGTON, DC. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CORNELIUS KUHLEWIND, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF 
THREE-FOURTHS TO EDWARD G. WATERS, JULIUS C. CALISCH, AND 
LEO R. ISENTHAL OF SAME PLACE. 
GLASS PRESS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 561,056, dated May 26, 1896. 
Application filed December 5, 1895. Serial No. 571,147, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
To all, ??h???, it may concer?: 
Be it known that I, CORNELIUS KUHLE 
WIND, of Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Glass 
Presses, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure I is a side elevation of my improved 
preSS. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the same, 
the motor-shield being removed. Fig. 3 is an 
enlarged front elevation showing the cross 
head in the same position as in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 
4 is a similar view showing the actuating 
cam and connections. Fig. 5 is a cross-sec 
tional view on the line V V of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 6. 
is an enlarged inner elevation of the cam and 
its connections. Fig. 7 is a cross-section on 
the line VIII VIII of Fig. 2. Fig. 8 is an end 
elevation, partly in section. Fig. 9 is a side 
elevation, partly in section. Fig. 10 is a 
modified form of cam-plate, and Fig. 11 is a 
detail view of one of the automatically-open 
ing valves of the piston-head. 
My invention relates to the type of glass 
presses set forth in my former patent, No. 
543,154, granted on July 23, 1895, and is de 
signed to improve the action thereof by giv 
ing a motion more nearly approximating that 
where the machine is operated by hand, as 
Well as to apply a rotary motor thereto and 
to improve the general structure and arrange 
ment of the parts. 
In the drawings, 2 represents the frame 
forming the base portion of the machine, 
which is carried upon wheels 3 and supports 
the base-plate 4. Upon this base-plate are se 
cured the upright posts 55, which are joined 
at their upper ends by cross-piece 6. Between 
these uprights moves the cross-head 7, guided 
by its collars 8, which encircle the posts, this 
cross-head having centrally secured therein 
the vertical screw-threaded rod 9, which is 
adjustably fastened at its upper end to the 
plate 10 by nuts 11 and 12. Through the 
plate 10 pass four depending rods 13, which 
at their lower ends carry the presser-plate 14, 
they being normally held in depressed posi 
tion by Springs 15, bearing against the lower 
face of the plate, and shoulders or collars 16 
upon the rods. The screw-threaded rod 9 is 
provided with an adjustable nut or tappet 17, 
which, in the downward movement of the 
cross-head 7, contacts with a cross-bar 1S 
through a hole in which the rod loosely passes. 
Secured in the cross-bar 18 are rods 19, which 
pass through the cross-head 7 and the head 
of a hydraulic cylinder 20, and are secured to 
a piston-head 21 therein. Spiral springs 22 
encircle the rods 19 and bear against the 
lower face of the cross-head, and collars 23 
upon these rods, thus giving a yielding pres 
sure upon the piston-head. 
To the lower face of the cross-head.aire se 
cured two frames or braces 24, preferably 
formed by the protruding ends of a single 
plate, these ends or braces carrying adjust 
able screw-threaded tappets 25 and 26, re 
spectively. The piston-head 21 of the hy 
draulic cylinder is provided with a central 
aperture closed by an upwardly - opening 
valve 27, having side ports 28 and a stem 29, 
which extends up through the piston-head and 
is pivotally connected with a lever 30, the end 
of which is pivoted to a standard 31, also se 
cured in the piston-head. Pivotally con 
nected to the outer end of the lever 30 is a 
depending tube 32, within which telescopes 
a second tube 32', a spiral spring being placed 
within the tubes and secured thereto by pins, 
as shown in Fig. 9. To the lower end of the 
inner tube is pivoted a depending link 33, 
the lower end of which is screw-threaded, and 
passing through a hole in a cross-bar 34 is 
engaged by a thumb-nut 35. The cross-bar 
34 is supported by rods 36, depending from 
the cross-head, as shown. Any desired ten 
sion may thus be brought upon the lever. 
Through the upper cylinder-head extend 
the stems 37 of downwardly-opening valves 
38, the ends of these stems being adapted to 
engage the tappets 25 after the Cross-head 
has moved downwardly a determined dis 
tance. The piston-head is also provided with 
four downwardly-opening valves 39, the stems 
of these valves being short and provided with 
springs which press against collars on the 
stems and normally hold the valves to their 
seats. When an upward pressure is applied 
to the piston in the cylinder, these valves 
95 
IOO 
15 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
2. 
561,056 
open automatically and allow the fluid above 
the piston-head to flow through it as it rises. 
To prevent the upward movement of the 
piston-head beyond a certain point, I provide 
collars 40, surrounding the rods 19, within 
the cylinder, these collars being arranged to 
abut against the upper cylinder-head. The 
lower cylinder-head is provided with exten 
sions having collars 41 surrounding the stand 
ard 5, and guiding the cylinder in its move 
ments, and centrally secured to this head is 
the screw-spindle 42, to which is adjustably 
fastened a cross-bar 43 by means of the ad 
justable nuts 44. Rigidly secured to the 
lower end of the screw-spindle is a cross-head 
45, having collars 46, which take about the 
standards 5, and within suitable holes in this 
cross-head move the guiding-rods 47, which 
are secured in the ends of the cross-bar 43. 
Through other holes in this cross-head move 
the guide-rods 4S, secured to the pressure 
plate 14, and pivoted within it are the usual 
clamp-levers 49, which take under a collar at 
the upper end of the plunger and support it, 
they being operated and secured by the con 
ical nut 50, working upon the screw-spindle. 
Upon opposite sides of the upper end of the 
cylinder are secured the ratchet-bars 51, the 
teeth of which in certain positions are en 
gaged by the lower pawl-shaped ends of bell 
crank levers 52, which are pivoted to the 
cross-head. The upper ends of these bell 
crank levers are loosely pivoted to rods 53, 
which extend up through the cross-head and 
are normally held in elevated position by 
springs 54. With the upper ends of these 
rods 53, when the cross-head reaches the up 
per limit of its movement, engage depending 
adjustable tappets 55, secured to the upper 
cross-piece 6. This pawl-and-ratchet mech 
anislm just described is provided for the pur 
pose of positively moving the plunger up 
wardly before the presser-plate is retracted, 
the pawls moving over the ratchet-teeth as 
the piston descends in the cylinder, while 
upon the upward movement the pawls, en 
gaging certain of the teeth, move the cylinder, 
and consequently the plunger, upwardly in a 
positive manner, thus affording a mechanical 
connection between the cross-head and the 
cylinder during the upward movement and 
until the guide-rods strike the upper tappets, 
when the pawls will be disengaged from the 
ratchet-teeth. A suitable pressure-gage is 
provided upon one side of the cylinder, as 
shown, to indicate the pressure upon the oil 
or other fluid in the cylinder. 
The cross-head 7 is actuated by the de 
pending links 56 pivoted thereto, these links 
being pivotally connected at their lower ends 
to cam-plates 57, secured to the opposite ends 
of a shaft 58. Each cam - plate, as shown 
more clearly in Fig. 6, is provided with an 
inner curved slot or groove 59, the opposite 
faces of which form the cam-surfaces, which 
are acted upon by a roller 60, projecting out 
Wardly from an arm. 61, secured to the coun 
ter-shaft (32. The cam-plates are provided 
upon the opposite sides of the shaft with 
counterweights 63, which are connected by a 
bar 64. Counterweights 65 are also provided 
upon the counter-shaft 62, and this shaft is 
centrally provided with a worm-wheel 66, 
which is driven by a worm or screw C7 upon 
the main driving-shaft (38. The wheel 66 re 
volves loosely upon the shaft, and to couple 
it to the shaft I employ an ordinary clutch 
69, which is actuated by a lever 70, which is 
operated by means of the hand-lever 71. 
Projecting through the hand-lever 71 is a 
post 72, which is secured at the end of a small 
spring-pressed lever 73, this post being adapt 
ed to be engaged by a curved lever 74, piv 
oted to the frame and adapted to be engaged 
by a pin 75 upon one of the counterweights 
65, the lever 74 being normally held in re 
tracted position by a spring 76. IBy reason 
of this mechanism if the hand-lever is pushed 
rearwardly and the clutch thrown into gear, 
the machine will make one revolution, and 
then, by the lever 74, the clutch is thrown 
out of gear and the machine stops, while by 
pressing the hand upon the small lever car 
rying the post 72 the machine will operate 
continuously. 
The main driving-shaft GS is driven by a 
suitable electric motor 77, secured at its front 
end, this shaft having also at its rear end a 
fly-wheel 78 and a small pulley 79, which is 
belted to the pulley upon the shaft of a blower 
80, from which leads a pipe 81 to supply air 
for cooling the molds. 
The peculiar actuating connections for the 
links 56 are provided for the purpose of giv 
ing to the plunger and presser-plate a mo 
tion very closely approximating that where 
it is worked by hand, it affording a slow 
downward movement, a short retention of 
the cross-head in the depressed position, and 
then a quick upward movement. Thus at 
the starting of the motion the roller 60, mov 
ing along the outer surface of the cam-slot, 
draws the cross-head slowly downward, and 
after it has reached the lowermost position 
it travels along in the slot which is then con 
centric with the center of motion, after which 
the roller travels along the inner face of the 
slot and gives a quick upward motion. 
In operating the machine the mold coal 
taining a suitable amount of glass is placed 
upon the base-plate 4, and the clutch being 
thrown into gear the rods 56 draw down the 
cross-head 7 with a slow downward move 
ment, and the plunger is forced down with 
an easy yielding pressure to start the flow of 
glass in the mold. As soon as the nut 17 
strikes the bar 18, however, the plunger is 
forced positively downward, the cylinder act 
ing as a solid connection, thus pressing the 
glass into shape. If too much glass is placed 
in the mold, so that the pressure rises above 
a certain amount, the valve 27 is lifted 
against the spring - pressure, allowing the 
fluid to flow upwardly through the piston, so 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
I II Cd 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
? ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
561,056 
. 
3, 
that on further downward movement the pis 
ton moves downwardly in the cylinder, the 
cylinder and plunger remaining stationary. 
Ata determinedpoint im the downwardmove 
ment the tappets 25 and 26 open the valves 
38 and allow the fluid to rise in the cylinder. 
On the return movement of the cross-head 
the oil flows through the downwardly-open 
ing valves in the piston, which resumes its 
former position in the cylinder. 
In Fig. 10 I show a slightly-modified form 
of cam-plate, wherein the outer end of the 
slot is enlarged somewhat, as shown at 82, 
the pivot being moved toward the other end 
of the slot. This gives a slightly longer re 
tention of the cross-head in the depressed po 
sition and affords a better leverage for begin 
ning the quick upward motion. 
The advantages of my invention will be ap 
parent to those skilled in the art, since a ma 
chine is afforded which gives a movement 
similar to that of an operation by hand. The 
upward movement of the plunger before the 
presser-plate rises is insured by the action of 
the ratchet-plates upon the cylinder and their 
coaction with the pawls upon the cross-head. 
The screw-gear enables a rotary motor to be 
employed which moves at a high rate of speed, 
thus enabling the blower to be used upon the 
motor-shaft. The peculiar cam connection 
between the depending rods and the driving 
shaft forms a material part of my invention 
and gives a better movement than is provided 
in the press of my former patent. 
By the words two-part former' in the 
claims I intend to cover any reciprocatory 
forming element in a press one part of which 
is movable relatively to the other. This two 
part former in the machine shown herein con 
sists of the cylinder secured to the plunger 
and the piston movable within the cylinder 
and actuated by the cross-head. 
Many changes may be made in the form 
and arrangement of the parts Without depart 
ing from my invention, since 
What I claim is 
IO 
IS 
2 ? 
45 
55 
75 
1. In a press, a reciprocating two-partform 
er, one part being secured to a cylinder, and 
the other part being connected to a piston 
within the cylinder, the parts having also a 
mechanical separable connection, and means 
for operating said connection; substantially 
as described. 
2. In a press, a two-part former, one part 
being secured to a cylinder, and the other 
part being connected to a valved piston within 
the cylinder, and having also a pawl-and 
ratchet connection with the cylinder; sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a press, a reciprocating two-partform 
er, one part being secured to a cylinder, and 
the other to a piston therein, a valve in said 
piston, having a yieldingly-pressed stem, the 
partishavingalso a mechanical separable con 
nection, and means for operating said con 
nection; substantially as described. 
4. In a press, a two-part former, one part 
being secured to a cylinder and the other 
connected to a valved piston within the cyl 
inder, pawls upon the latter part arranged to 
engage ratchets upon the first part, and tap 
pets arranged to disengage the pawls upon 
the return stroke; substantially as described. 
5. In a press, a two-part former, one part 
being secured to a cylinder, and the other to 
a valved piston within the cylinder, depend 
ing rods pivotally connected to one of said 
parts, a pivoted cam-plate pivotally connected 
with said rods, and an actuated shaft, having 
an arm provided with a roller bearing upon 
said cam-plate, the cam-plate being arranged 
to give a slow downward movement, a short 
retention in the depressed position, and a 
quick upward movement; substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
CORN ELIUS KUHLEWIND. 
Witnesses: 
G. I. HoLDSHIP, 
H. M. CORWIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561156.txt	(No Model.) 
W. I. BUNKER, 
FLOOR, ROCKING CHAIR, 
N0, 561,156. 
Patented June 2, 1896, 
 
ZAZ ze, eS,' 
3. '-/ 
Z222/e7272/ 
Z4/Zzz / Zizzy 
422/0s-, - 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM I. BUNKER, OF LA GRANGE, ILLINOIS. 
FOOR ROCK N G CHAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 561,156, dated June 2, 1896. 
Application filed March 19, 1895, Serial No. 542,348, (No model.) 
- 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMI. BUNKER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at La 
Grange, Cook county, Illinois, have invented 
Certain new and useful Improvements in Floor 
Rocking-Chairs, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple, economical, and efficient floor rock 
ing-chair; and the invention consists in the 
features and combinations hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows a side elevation of my improvement; 
Fig. 2, a plan view of the attachment here 
inafter described; Fig. 3, a side elevation of 
a portion of a rocking-chair, showing a modi 
fication; Fig. 4, a plan view of the attach 
ment shown in Fig. 3 with the springs re 
moved; Fig. 5, an elevation of a second modi 
fied form of attachment, and Fig. 6 a per 
spective view of a third modified form of at 
tachment. 
It is well known in the use of ordinary rock 
ing-chairs that they creep and to a greater 
or lesser extent injure the pile of the carpets, 
and where they are placed upon the bare floor 
they are susceptible to all the irregularities 
of the floor. 
The principal object of my invention, there 
fore, is to obviate the above objections and 
provide a simple, economical attachment for 
the Ordinary floor rocking-chair. 
In constructing my improvement I provide 
what Iterm a flat wear-plate or attachment 
A, which is placed under each rocker and 
upon which the rockers will rock. These at 
tachments may be made of any desired ma 
terial and are secured to the rockers by means 
of the springs B, preferably one on each side of 
the rockers, to balance the plates equally and 
prevent displacement. These spiral springs 
have their upper and lower ends, respectively, 
rigidly connected to brackets b, that are se 
cured, preferably, the upper to the rocker 
and the lower to the attachment. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 I have illustrated a modi 
fied form of my attachment, in which I use 
two springs b' b', secured at each side of the 
rocker to balance the attachment equally. 
These springs have their upper and lower 
ends rigidly connected to brackets b, which 
O 
25 
35 
45 
are respectively connected to the rockers and 
to the attachment. 
In Fig. 5 I make the wear-plate or attach 
ment in two plates C and C, between which 
are interposed yielding members, preferably 
formed of spiral springs c'. To these attach 
ments, as in the preceding forms, the brack 
ets band springs b'may be secured to engage 
the rockers of the floor rocking-chair and 
properly position the parts. 
In Fig. 6 I have shown a third modification 
of the attachment, in which I use a strip of 
metal E, bent back double on itself to form 
substantially the letter S in cross-section. 
To this strip or plate the lower end springs 
may be attached and the upper end springs se 
cured to the rocker, as shown in Fig. 1, which 
will balance the parts equally and prevent dis 
placement of the attachment. 
The advantages attached to the use of my 
improvement are that the rockers are kept in 
a substantially fixed line of motion, an even 
rocking-surface is provided, the chair can 
not be rocked over backward, and it may be 
readily and easily attached to any of the or 
dinary rocking-chairs without unduly elevat 
ing the seat. This advantage will be appre 
ciated by people using rocking-chairs, as it 
is a well-known fact that in the opinion of 
many the most satisfactory rocking-chair is 
what is known as the ordinary common floor 
rocking-chair. 
I claim 
1. An attachment for the rockers of floor 
rocking-chairs, comprisingindependent Wear 
plates adapted to rest on the fioor, their up 
per surfaces arranged to receive the rockers 
of a chair, and springs provided with end 
brackets adapted to connect the rockers and 
the plates together at or near their longitudi 
nal center to balance the plates equally on 
the rockers in all positions of the chair, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. An attachment for the rockers of floor 
rocking-chairs comprising independent wear 
plates adapted to rest on the floor their up 
per surfaces arranged to receive the rockers 
of a chair, and springs at least one on each 
side of each rocker provided with end brack 
ets and adapted to connect the rockers and 
the plates together at or near their longitudi 
nal center to balance the plates equally on 
55 
So 
I do 
2 
561,156 
the rockers in all positions of the chair, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In combination with a floor rocking 
chair, independent cushioned wear-plates 
resting on the floor, rockers resting upon the 
Wear-plates, and vertical coiled springs se 
cured at their ends by brackets to the rock 
ers and wear-plates at or near their longitudi 
nal center, whereby the rockers and plates 
are secured together and the plates balanced 
equally on the rockers in all positions of the 
chair, substantially as described. 
4. In combination with a floor rocking 
chair, a cushioned wear-plate under each 
rocker, and connecting-springs of equal ten 
sion at least one arranged on each side of each 
rocker to balance the plates equally on op 
posite sides of their longitudinal center, sub 
stantially as described. 
WILLIAM. I. IBUNIKER. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS A. BANNING, 
THOMAS B. MCGREGOR. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561256.txt	(No M 
el.) 
C. A. BUR, R & H. P. EWELL, 
DEWICE FOR TYING MAIL, PACKAGES, 
No. 561,256. 
Patented June 
2, 1896. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. BURR AND HERBERT P. EWELL, OF ROCHESTER, MICHIGAN. 
DEVICE FORTYING MAL-PACKAGES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 561,256, dated June 2, 1896. 
Application filed February 19, 1896, Serial No. 579,852, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it invay concern 
Beit known that We, CHARLESA.BURR and 
HERBERT P. EWELL, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Rochester, in the county of 
Oakland, State of Michigan, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in De 
vices for Tying Mail-Packages; and we do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to a device for tying 
packages of mail, and is especially designed 
for Securing packages of letters in transit; 
and it consists in a certain construction and 
arrangement of parts hereinafter fully set 
forth, and pointed out particularly in the 
claims. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
simple and inexpensive device in which the 
arrangement is such as to enable the operator 
to quickly tie and secure a package of letters 
in such manner as to firmly retain them in 
the package and to enable them to be readily 
untied when desired, obviating the necessity 
of cutting the string which confines the pack 
age and enabling the same string to be used 
many times, thereby effecting a great saving 
in the cost of string and providing for more 
quickly and securely retaining the package 
of letters, which object is obtained by the de 
vice illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing a 
package of letters secured by our improved 
device. Fig. 2 is a plan view showing the 
string-retaining button in horizontal section 
and by stippled lines the position of the string 
when secured or tied. Fig. 3 is a transverse 
section on line 33 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a like 
section on line 4 4 of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is an in 
verted perspective of the button detached 
from the base-plate. 
Referring to the letters of reference, Ades 
ignates a circular plate, preferably of thin 
metal, which is slightly concavo-convex to 
cause the edges thereof to lie closely to the 
surface of the package. Attached in an ap 
erture a, near the edge of said plate, is a cord 
B of suitable quality and of such length as to 
pass around the package of letters to retain 
them in place. 
Mounted upon the plate A, at or near the 
geometric center thereof, is a button C, hav 
ing a stem b, provided with an extended pin 
or rivet c, which passes through an aperture 
in said plate A and is riveted therein, as shown 
in FigS. 3 and 4, to secure the button to said 
plate. 
Formed in the end of the stem of said 
button, On opposite sides of the pinc, are two 
groovese, in which the ends of the looped 
spring Dare secured. The ends of said spring 
extend parallel for some distance, but at d 
are provided with a return-bend, from whence 
they extend forward on each side of the but 
ton and unite at the looped point f, which is 
bent slightly upward to enable the cord to be 
more readily drawn therethrough. This form 
of Spring affords great strength and resiliency 
and provides a greater length of action, as 
the bearing, when the point of the spring is 
raised, is brought at the bends d, which causes 
the spring to stand at a less angle when the 
cord is drawn thereunder and obviates the 
raising of the pointf thereof too high. 
In the employment of this improved device 
the plate A is placed upon the package of let 
ters to be tied and the cord B first passed 
around said package endwise, thence partly 
around the button and transversely around 
the package, when the cord is passed once 
around the button and drawn under the 
looped end f of the spring D, as clearly shown 
by solid and stipple lines in Fig. 2, thus firmly 
securing the string around the package and 
in such manner as to enable it to be readily 
removed therefrom by simply withdrawing 
the free end of the cord from under the spring 
D and unwinding it from the button, as will 
be readily understood. 
By means of this improved device a pack 
age of letters may be more quickly and firmly 
tied than in the ordinary practice, enabling, 
as well, the package to be readily untied with 
out cutting the cord, which may be used many 
times, thereby effecting a great saving in the 
cost thereof. 
This device also enables a package of a few 
letters to be more easily and perfectly tied, 
as the area of the plate A bearing upon 
the package tends to stiffen it, enabling the 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
around said button, the looped spring Secured 
at the base of said button and extending on 
oppositesides thereof having a projecting end 
under which the cord may be drawn. 
2. In a device for tying packages of mail, 
the combination of the base-plate, a button 
having a flaring head secured centrally to 
said plate, the cord attached at one end to said 
plate and adapted to be passed under the head 
of said button, the looped spring having its 
ends secured in the stem of said button and 
extending rearwardly therefrom thence by 
return-bends passing forward on each side of 
said button and uniting in the loopf, as set 
In testimony whereof we affix (). 11' signal 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
forth. 
- 
CIIARTIES A BURR. 
IERBERT P. EWEL. 
25 
35 
Withosses: 
ALICE REIMER, 
JOSEPH REIMER. 
2 
561,256 
string to be more readily passed around said 
package. 
In practice, to enable the plate to be read 
ily retained in place while passing the string 
around the package of letters, the operator 
may place his thumb over the aperture E in 
said plate, which aperture is also adapted to 
l'eceive a pin upon which said plates may be 
Strung When not in use. 
While We have shown and described this 
improved device as serving to tie packages of 
mail, We do not wish to be limited to this use 
of it alone, as it is evident that it may be 
used for tying any and all packages that are 
Secured by a confining cord or string. 
Iaving thus fully set forth our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In the device for the purpose set forth, 
the combination of the plate, the button there 
on, the cord attached at one end to the mar 
gin of said plate and adapted to be passed 
IO 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561356.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. STEFFENS, 
BOTTLE STOPPER, 
No. 56,356, 
Patented June 2, 1896 
WTNESS es: 
usy. 42-222221/. 
InVENTOR: 
-(2-73/4, 9 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. STEFFENS, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
BOTTLE-STOPPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 561,356, dated June 2, 1896. 
Application filed November 1, 1895, Serial No,567,596, (No model.) 
r 
To Cult, whon, it naily concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE W. STEFFENS, 
of Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Bottle-Stoppers, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to stoppers or appli 
ances to prevent the refilling of bottles; and 
it has for its object, first, to provide a simple 
device of this character adapted to be firmly 
engaged with the bottle by the action of the 
liquid contained therein, and of such con 
struction that it. cannot be refilled when the 
bottle is placed in either a horizontal or a 
vertical position. 
The invention consists in the improvements 
which I will now proceed to describe and 
claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a vertical section showing my improved bot 
tle-stopper applied to a bottle. Fig. 2 repre 
sents a perspective view of the valve-guard 
removed from the stopper-casing. Fig. 3 rep 
resents a side view of the stopper-casing, 
showing by dotted lines the compression of 
the neck of the stopper preparatory to plac 
ing it in the bottle and expanding it therein. 
The same letters and figures of reference 
indicate the same parts in all the figures. 
In carrying out my invention, I provide a 
hollow casing ct, made of any suitable Wood 
and constructed to serve as a passage or out 
let for liquid from a bottle, the casing being 
rovided with a neck C.", adapted to be insert 
ed in the bottle b. The casing is provided 
internally with a convex valve-seat a, and 
above said seat With a valve-guard C, con 
structed to permit the outward flow of liquid 
through the casing and to prevent the inser 
tion of a wire or other device into the casing 
for the purpose of tampering with the valve, 
said guard being preferably constructed as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2-that is to say, com 
posed of a disk having an outwardly-project 
ing lip or flange 2, the margin of which may 
be engaged with a groove 3, formed in the in 
ternal wall of the casing, and orifices 4 4 
formed in the flange 2, the arrangement be 
ing such that the guard a prevents a wire 
inserted in either of said orifices from gaining 
access to the valve. 
C. represents the valve, the under side of 
which is concave to fit the convex seat a, the 
valve being formed so that it can rock or 
slide freely on the seat. 
Ct represents a rod which is secured to the 
valve a, said rod extending downwardly 
through the valve into the neck of the bottle. 
a represents a sliding weight or hammer 
which is movable between stops as a on the 
rod Ci and serves not only as a weight to hold 
the valve against its seat in all positions 
of the bottle, excepting when the bottle is 
inverted and held vertically, but also as a 
hammer to dislodge the valve from its seat 
When the bottle is inverted, thus preventing 
the valve from sticking, as it might be liable 
to do, particularly if the contents of the bot 
tle contain a considerable proportion of su 
gar. The weight a may be made of glass 
and has sufficient freedom of motion between 
the stops Ca' to enable it to strike the stop as. 
with considerable force when the bottle is in 
verted. 
It will be seen that when the bottle is held 
horizontally the weighted arm will drop to 
the under side of the bottle, the valve mov 
ing on but not leaving its seat, so that the 
valve will not open until the bottle is in 
verted. 
d represents a stopper, of cork or any suit 
able material, inserted in the outer end of 
the casing C, above the guard Cl, said stopper 
closing the outer end of the casing liquid 
tight. The stopper d may be held in place 
by a metallic capsule or cover e, the edge of 
which maybe turned downwardly over a bead 
formed on the outer end of the casing, as 
shown in Fig. 1. 
At a suitable stage in the manufacture of 
the casing C, and preferably before the neck 
a' is internally bored to form the opening 
therethrough, I subject the said neck to pow 
erful compression by any suitable means, so 
as to reduce its diameter. The wood of which 
the casing and neck are made is Well sea 
soned, and the compression, reducing the di 
ameter of the neck from its normal diameter, 
enables the neck to be readily inserted in the 
bottle, but causes a greater expansion when 
the liquid in the bottle saturates the neck 
than would have been the case without the 
compression. The neckistherefore expanded 
55 
65 
o 
75 
95 
IOC 
23 
25 
35.) 
45 
 
2 
561,356 
to such an extent that a locking member Or 
shoulder 5 formed thereon interlocks with a 
corresponding member or shoulder 6 in the 
bottle and prevents the casing from being 
withdrawn from the bottle except by break 
age. This statement is made With due re 
gard for the fact that the neck may shrink 
to some extent after its insertion in the bot 
tle, particularly if the bottle is left standing 
in an upright position for a considerable pe 
riod. I have found, however, that all the 
shrinkage possible will not reduce the diame 
ter of the neck beyond its original normal 
diameter and Will not restore the neck to the 
diameter caused by the compression. Iience, 
while the pressure of the neck on the inte 
rior of the bottle may be somewhat reduced 
by shrinkage, the neck cannot be disengaged 
from the bottle. In Fig. 3 Ishow in full lines 
the diameter of the neck after the compres 
sion thereof, the dotted lines indicating the 
diameter of the neck before compression. 
The swelling of the neck after it is inserted 
in the bottle would expand it to a diameter 
in excess of that indicated by the dottedlines 
if the neck of the bottle would permit. The 
result is that if the interior of the bottle is 
formed to somewhat closely fit the compressed 
neck of the casing the engagement of the 
two parts Will be permanent and will be un 
affected by any shrinkage of the neck of the 
Casing. 
I am aware that corks have been compressed 
prior to their insertion in bottle-necks; but 
Owing to the elasticity of cork that material 
cannot be utilized for the purpose of my in 
vention. Furthermore, cork not being a 
grained Wood and being unaffected by liquid, 
it is not, even when compressed, caused to 
expand by the action of liquid. 
My invention involves the use of a stopper 
made of seasoned wood having a grain and 
capable of absorbing moisture, said stopper 
being provided With a shoulder which is com 
pressed prior to insertion in the bottle-neck, 
whereby said shoulder, when expanded by the 
action of liquid, is forced outwardly into im 
movable engagement with a shoulder in the 
bottle With a force that cannot be obtained by 
the use of cork, rubber, or celluloid. 
That portion of the stopper containing the 
valve and valve-guard is entirely above the 
top of the bottle, and among the advantages 
of this construction it may be mentioned that 
it permits of the chamber being made large 
enough to accommodate a valve considerably 
larger than if located within the neck. This 
projecting portion of the stopper might be 
grasped with sufficient force to remove the 
stopper if the latter were made of rubber, cel 
luloid, or non-compressed wood; but owing 
to the wood being compressed before inser 
tion in the bottle-neck it expands sufficiently 
to prevent such removal without breakage. 
I prefer to impregnate the outer portion of 
the casing a with some composition which 
will make it impervious to liquid, said com 
position saturating all parts of the casing ex 
cepting the neck Cl'. 
I do not limit myself to the details of con 
struction herein shown and described nor to 
the particular form of the parts, as the de 
vice may be varied in all its particulars with 
out departing from the spirit of my invention. 
The casing having the compressed neck may 
be used in connection with any other Suitable 
closing means and is not limited to the closing 
devices here shown. 
I claim 
1. Abottle-stopper comprising a hollow cas 
ing of absorbent and expansive material and 
formed to serve as a conduit and provided 
with suitable closing means and with a neck 
of substantially uniform diameter which is 
compressed and adapted after its insertion in 
a bottle to expand and form a shoulder caused 
by the absorption of the liquid. 
2. A bottle-stopper comprising a hollow 
Wooden casing provided with a valve-seat, a 
valve, and a valve-guard having at its lower 
end a neck of substantially uniform diameter 
which is compressed and adapted after its in 
sertion in a bottle to expand and form a shoul 
der caused by the absorption of the liquid. 
3. Abottle-stopper comprising a hollow cas 
ing provided with a neck capable of expand 
ing when moistened, a convex valve-seat with 
in said casing, a concave valve formed to rock 
on said seat and provided with a downwardly 
projecting rod, having stops rigidly secured 
thereto, a weight or hammer independent of 
and fitted to slide on said rod between the 
stops, and a valve-guard above the valve. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 26th day of 
October, A. D. 1895. 
GEO. W. STEFEENS. 
Witnesses: 
THEODORE SEUTZ, 
C. F. BROWN. 
O 
25 
35 
45. 
55 
65 
75 
So 
95 
IOC 
Io5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561456.txt	J. C. WALKER. 
LIFE BOAT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 2, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 561,456, 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
1 WWEMTOR 
777tes OJ)27Zeyr 
- ATTORNEYS 
ANDREW BGRAHAM Photo-Lito.washington, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 561,456, 
J. C. WALKER. 
LIFE BOAT. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 2, 1896. 
 
WITNESSES: 
Zer 
ATTORNEYs 
Andrew B. GRAHAM, PHOTO-LITHQ.WASHGTON.d.c. 
J. C. WALKER. 
LIFE BOAT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented June 2, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 561,456, 
  
 
a 
La 
Sasas Sasas SYS 
Sax 
EN Z2 
, 
SE 
P1G 
---E 
ZZ 
M 
a. 
4. 
essessee 
RW 
S. 
   
WITNESSES: 
 
INVENTOR 
Z77zes O. 7222ey 
TORNEYs 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES C. WALKER, OF WACO, TEXAS. 
LFE-BOAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 561,456, dated June 2, 1896. 
Application filed May 3, 1895, Serial No, 548,019, (No mode.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all, whon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES C. WALKER, of 
Waco, in the county of McLennan and State 
of Texas, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Life-Boats, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My present invention relates more particu 
larly to improvements on the hydraulic pro 
pelling means shown and described in my Pat 
ent No. 512,591, dated January 9, 1894, and it 
primarily has for its object to adapt the jet 
propulsion system to the life-saving service. 
My invention also has for its object to pro 
vide, in connection with the jet propulsion 
means, a peculiar arrangement of the several 
parts of the vessel whereby the same will be 
rendered more safe for use and whereby when 
one section or compartment is crushed in the 
others will not be affected thereby and where 
by the influx of water into the stove or 
crushed in compartment can be utilized as a 
propelling means. 
Furthermore, the invention has for its ob 
ject to provide, in connection with the propul 
sion means, a system of bulkheads or air-tight 
compartments, each arranged independent 
and each connected by valved pipes with the 
main tubes or pipes and Supplemented by air 
tight compartments on the top or roof part of 
the boat so arranged that in case the vessel 
should be upset it would immediately right 
Another object of my present invention is 
to provide, in connection with the hydraulic 
propelling means, a series of oil-holding tanks 
or compartments, each independently con 
nected by valved pipes with the hydraulic 
main pipes, and also provided with valved dis 
charge-nozzles projected to the outside of the 
vessel, the whole being so arranged that in 
case of a very rough sea, or where a vessel is 
Wrecked a boat constructed and propelled in 
accordance with my invention can take a cir 
cuit to the windward or seaward around the 
Wrecked vessel and pour oil on the troubled 
waters, forced out from the life-saving ves 
sel by hydraulic force. 
With other objects in view, which herein 
after will be particularly referred to, my in 
vention consists in such novel features of 
construction and peculiar combination of 
parts as will be first described in detail, and 
itself. 
. 
" 
. 
IC 
it 5 
25 
45 
SO 
then specifically pointed out in the appended 
claims, reference being had to the accompany 
ing three sheets of drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a diagrammatic longitudinal sec 
tion of a vessel constructed in accordance with 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a similar horizontal 
section taken on the line 22 of Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a similar view taken on the line 33 of 
Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section of the 
vessel, taken on the line 4 4 of Fig. 1. Figs. 
5 and 6 are enlarged detail views of the steer 
ing mechanism at the stern of the vessel. 
Figs. 7, 8, and 9 are detail views of the jet 
nozzle devices at the sides of the vessel with 
their attached parts. Fig. 10 is a detail view 
illustrating one of the oil-chambers with its 
discharge-nozzle and its valved connecting 
pipe attached to the main hydraulic pipe. 
Fig. 11 is a view illustrating the automatic 
closing devices for the stacks hereinafter re 
ferred to. Fig. 12 is a view showing the op 
eration of the stack-closer when said stack 
becomes inverted. Figs. 13 and 14 are detail 
views of the novel form of rudder. Figs. 15 
and 16 are detail views illustrating the pre 
ferred form of pump or propeller wheels used 
in the main hydraulic pipes hereinafter re 
ferred to. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
A indicates the vessel, which in the practi 
cal construction is covered in the whale-back 
form, so as to provide for conveniently form 
ing in the upper part of such vessel a num 
ber of water-tight compartments BB, which 
extend down to the beam or Outer edge of 
the hull, where they connect with water-tight 
compartments C C in the sides of the hull, 
but are separated therefrom by a Water-tight 
partition b. 
The compartments C extend from about 
the beam to just below the Water-line, as 
shown. By referring to Fig. 4 it will be seen 
these compartments C do not have their outer 
sides formed by the hull, but have independ 
ent sides c c, spaced apart a slight distance 
from the hull. 
It should be stated that a set of compart 
ments B and C are arranged at each side of 
the boat and all the compartments in each 
set are connected by tubes B and C, having 
valves b' and c', respectively, with the tubes 
D D, one at each side of the boat, which ex 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
561,456 
o 
75 
tend longitudinally thereof, as shown most 
clearly in Figs. 1 and 2, from the rear com 
partments B and C toward the prow of the 
boat, and which enter the main tubes E. E.' 
in front of the pumps therein. These main 
tubes E E in their general arrangement and 
construction are substantially like that shown 
in my other patent above referred to, and such 
tubes are in the nature of two tapering hori 
Zontal pipes running through the bottom of 
the boat and opening at the fore and aft ends 
into the water. These pipes have propeller 
wheels FF of a suitable construction, prefer 
ably, however, of the form shown in Figs. 15 
and 16. By reference to Figs. 1 and 2 it will be 
seen such wheels have their shafts provided 
with gears f', connected in practice with suit 
able motive power to drive the water through 
the tubes E. E' toward the stern at a high 
rate of speed. 
By referring now more particularly to Fig. 
2 it will be observed the pipes E E have lat 
erals G. G., which extend through the sides of 
the boat and terminate in nozzles G', through 
which a series of jets of water are made to 
issue to propel the boat, such nozzle being 
curved, as shown at g g, and provided with 
swiveled cuff portions g'g', with which en 
gage the packing-lings gg, and such cuffs 
have teeth which are adapted to mesh in 
teeth formed on the horizontal slide-bars g. 
g, which are held in guides and arranged 
substantially in the manner shown in Figs. 
7 and 8. 
The bars g are connected with levers g, 
supported by fulcrums gand arranged to be 
conveniently manipulated by the pilot or en 
gineer, who can thereby move the bars g. 
backward or forward to set the nozzles G' as 
desired to drive the boat in either direction. 
Hindicates the air and drain tube, which 
lies close to the keel, and extends from the 
open air in front of the bow to the well or 
reservoir I, such tube H being forked, as 
shown in Fig. 2. 
The object of the tube II is to admit and 
keep constantly a strong draft of fresh air 
into the lowest part of the hold. 
By referring again to Fig. 1 it will be seen 
the tubes D enter the pipes E E at a point 
in advance of the propellers, and just in ad 
vance of such point of entrance the said pipes 
E E' have valves EXEX. 
So far as described it will be readily seen 
that as the pipes E E have valves or cut-offs 
E* E* and valves ' near the rear end and as 
the tubes D D connect with the said pipes E 
E and have in turn independent valved con 
nections with all of the compartments Band C 
should any one or more of the compartments 
B and C be stove in by collision of the vessel 
or otherwise it would not materially affect 
the passage of such vessel or cause it to sink, 
as the Water which passes into the stove-in 
compartment or compartments can in such 
case be utilized as a motive power by open 
ing up a communication between the tube D. 
at the stove-in side and the stove-in com 
partment, By closing off the entrance of 
the water through the front end of the pipes 
E E' it follows that the water as it rushes 
through the side of the vessel will pass into 
the tube D and pipe E and be forced back 
ward by the propellers, the same as in the 
case when the Water is allowed to feed in 
from the front end of the pipes E. E. 
In case the side of the vessel should be 
stove in at any point without injuring any of 
the compartments B and C the water Would 
rush down at the side of the hull into the 
well or reservoir I, which well, it will be no 
ticed, connects with the main tubes E E by 
the pipes J J, which discharge into the said 
pipes EE' at a pointin advance of the pump 
or propeller wheels. By connecting the Well 
with the main propeller-tubes, as shown, it 
is manifest that by closing off the valves at 
the front of the propellers the Water which 
would run in through the side of the boat 
would, as it passes down into the reservoir, be 
drawn up into the main pipes E and E' and 
utilized as the motive or propulsion power. 
The water-tight compartments in the roof 
top covering are intended, in case the vessel 
should be upset, to right the vessel, and to 
this end the entrance of persons into the hull 
of the vessel would be through the hatch 
ways in the roof. Astrong iron railing around 
the edge of the roof protects persons from 
falling overboard. 
I, indicates the Smoke-stack or ventilator, 
which has a cover or cap plate which is ar 
ranged to close automatically in case the ves 
sel should upset. To this end I provide the 
ventilator or stack with a self-closing device, 
the construction of which is most clearly 
shown in Figs. 11 and 12, by reference to 
which it will be seen the same consists of a 
hinged cover-plate 1, which fits closely over 
the rim of the stack, to which is pivotally 
connected a rod 3, the lower end of which is 
pivotally connected to a rock-lever 4, full 
crumed at 4 and having its end connected to 
a plunger-rod 10, which extends into a sub 
chamber 8, adjacent the stack and connects 
with a weight 7. 
When the vessel is in an 
upright or normal position, it will be readily 
seen, by referring to the said Fig.11, the Weight 
causes the plunger-rod 10 to rock the lever 4 
in such a manner that the rod 3 will push up 
and hold open the cover-plate 1. When, how 
ever, the vessel upsets, it follows that the 
weight 7 will descend in the chamber 8 and 
in consequence draw down the plunger-rod 
10 and thereby pull, through the rod 10 and 
lever 4 and rod 3, the cover-plate down tightly 
over the stack or ventilator-top, and close 
off entrance of Water therein. 
Although not positively required or deemed 
necessary, yet to render the course of the ves 
sel the more positive and readily attained I 
provide a peculiar form of steering or rudder 
devices, the construction of which is clearly 
shown in Figs. 5, 6, 13, and 14, and which 
5 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
6 o 
95 
OC 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
561,456 
g 
IO 
3o 
45 
SO 
55 
consist of two convex blades united at the 
longitudinal centerline of their length, which 
rudder-blades are fixedly connected to a rud 
der-post H^. II" H are stays formed with 
apertures to receive and form bearings for 
the aforesaid rudder-post. 
The blades H are made convex, and in 
practice are placed just aft of the stern dis 
charge-nozzles Ct and in the center space be 
tween, so that the Water from the nozzles a 
will spurt with the longitudinal center line of 
the blades when the rudder is in line with the 
keel; but when turned to the right or left the 
current from the near nozzle will strike the 
longitudinal center line of the blades, and as 
such blades are convex greater force will be 
concentrated thereon, and in consequence 
the vessel will turn. The blades are fixed 
together on the centerline of the concave sur 
faces back to back, as shown in Fig. 14. 
H', II, H', and Hare search-lights, the two 
H' and EI being fixed permanently to cast 
their rays of light fore and aft in line of the 
keel to assist the pilot in steering in darkness 
or rough seas, it being obvious that by intro 
ducing different colors in the light-rays to dis 
tinguish the bow from the stern the course of 
the vessel can be readily determined by ad 
jacent vessels in darkness or at night. 
Four additional search-lights, one at each 
corner of the pilot-box, are also provided, as 
indicated by II and II", which are arranged 
to cast their rays of light generally at right 
angles to the keel, they being capable, how 
ever, of being turned by the pilot or captain 
to different points. These lights Hand II are 
in practice made to cast signal-colors, so that, 
if the vessel becomes disabled, signals in 
darkness and rough seas may be cast ashore 
or to a distant vessel. Manifestly with these 
search-lights it is practicable to forman alpha 
bet by which full messages can be sent ashore. 
The pilot-box X, which is placed on top 
near amidship, has its upper portion incased 
in strong glass, and while I have not shown 
the same in detail all the mechanisms for the 
movement of the several nozzles and valves 
therefor and for the rudder terminate in the 
pilot-house, as also in the engineer's room in 
the hull, so that if the pilot-box is stove in or 
washed or blown away the vessel could still 
be operated from the engine-room. 
The front ends of the main pipes EE have 
(in the present construction) their ends in ad 
vance of the front cut-off valves turned down 
to take in Water from the bottom of the boat, 
so that during the pitching of the boat at no 
time will the entrances of the said pipes be 
above Water. 
O O' indicate two sets of oil-holding tanks, 
(one set at each side of the vessel,) which are 
provided each with a pipe O, having a valve 
o', which connects with the main pipes E. E", 
such tanks also having outlet-pipes o, which 
project through the sides of the hull at a point 
above the water-line. Any desired number of 
these tanks as may be conveniently placed at 
suitable points aboard the ship can be used. 
In all cases, however, they are each independ 
ently connected with the main or hydraulic 
pipes EE' and have discharge-pipes, as stated. 
The object of such tanks, discharge-pipes, 
and hydraulic connecting means is to spray 
oil on the troubled sea by hydraulic pressure. 
It will be readily observed that by opening 
the valves in the pipes connecting the tanks 
with the main pipes E E the water in such 
pipes E E will rush with a great pressure into 
the tanks and by such pressure force the oil 
through the outlet-tubes of the said tanks 
with such force as to carry the oil from the 
immediate sides of the vessel to a considerable 
distance seaward, and thereby cover the sur 
face of the water with a thin layer of oil, so 
that when a vessel is Wrecked a boat con 
structed in accordance with my invention 
may take a circuit to the Windward or sea 
Ward around the wrecked vessel and pour 
oil on the troubled waters. 
The tubes which extend from the well to 
the prow will keep the vessel supplied with 
fresh air when the hatches are closed. These 
tubes, however, need not enter the Well, but 
may extend up into the hull, as shown at g. 
Similarly-arranged air-tubes may be also ar 
ranged in the stern of the vessel, as indicated 
by dotted lines in Fig. 1, which tubes, as well 
as the forward tubes, in practice have a fan 
or suction wheel connected there with to draw 
in air from the outside, such wheel being run 
by gearing from the power-dynamo or other 
Wise located in the engine-room. 
R indicates a cabin for rescued passengers, 
which is disposed along the longitudinal cen 
ter of the vessel, with the floor laid as clear 
above the main pipes E. E' as the machinery 
connected therewith will allow. Closets and 
store-rooms can be fitted in the end spaces, 
(indicated by , and f.) 
The remaining partsillustrated in the draw 
ings and nothere described being constructed, 
arranged, and operated in the manner shown 
in my patent above referred to, a detailed de 
scription is not deemed necessary. 
IFrom the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the drawings, it is thought 
the advantages of a vessel constructed in ac 
cordance with my invention will be readily 
apparent. 
It will be observed that a vessel constructed 
as described can be readily controlled in such 
a manner as to reduce the danger of collision 
therewith to a minimum. Furthermore, its 
structure is such that should either side be 
stove in only the particular compartment 
crushed would suffer, and as all the com 
partments are connected with the main pipes 
E E it will be impossible for the vessel to 
fill up, as the water as it pours in the side of 
the boat is utilized to propel the boat and 
forced out through the nozzles at the rear or 
sides thereof. 
If deemed expedient, extra tubes connect 
ing with the tubes E E and extra pumping 
- 
7 O 
75 
Od 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
561,456 
IO 
45 
55 
65 
75 
85 
apparatus may be provided, so that if the 
machinery connected with the pump-wheels 
hereinbefore referred to should become de 
ranged or prove insufficient for great emer 
gencies the extra set may be used. 
The pump-wheels in the preferred con 
struction have their hub or boss portion in 
diameter and length proportionate to the size 
and number of revolutions of the wheel re 
quired, the diameter. of the rim being such 
that it will revolve close to the inner perim 
eter of the tube, but not in contact there 
with, such rims being slightly wider than the 
hubis long. The vanes of the wheels concave 
upward, the concavity extending through 
their width about the center of the vanes, 
and such vanes are fixed at both edges of the 
hub and rim and are of sufficient width to 
reach the rear end of the hub, and increasing 
in width to the outer edge, so as to reach the 
lower or rear edge of the rim, they widening 
around the hub as an auger-blade. This op 
erates so that all the water that comes Within 
touch of the fore edges of the vanes will be 
forced through the tubes and nozzles, so that 
notwithstanding the back pressure of the 
water after passing the vanes none of it can 
regurgitate or escape back through and about 
the center of the wheel. 
In the practical arrangement of parts the 
number of the vanes are regulated according 
to the size of the wheel, though never less 
than four. 
So far as I know, water-wheels constructed 
on the above plan have heretofore not been 
used for propelling or other purposes. The 
main object in constructing it in the manner 
stated is to prevent regurgitation about the 
center under great back pressure. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. An improved vessel, having a series of 
independently-disposed water-tight compart 
ments, and longitudinal pipes communicating 
with the sea, having hydraulic propulsion 
means for forcing the water to the outside of 
the vessel connected with such compartments, 
as specified. 
2. In a vessel of the kind described, the 
combination with the main tubes E, E, of a 
series of water-tight compartments, having 
each a valved outlet-pipe and a single tube 
connecting all of the said valved pipes with 
the main tubes E, E, all arranged substan 
tially as shown and described. 
3. In vessels of the kind described, the main 
tubes extending longitudinally of the vessel 
and open at the front and having discharging 
laterals and nozzles, propeller-wheels held 
therein to force the Water out through the 
nozzles, and a cut-off valve in front of the 
propeller-wheel, a series of Water-tight com 
partments and a series of valved discharge 
pipes connected with such compartments ar 
ranged to discharge into the main tube at a 
point between the propeller-wheel and the 
cut-off valve, all substantially as shown and 
described. 
4. In a vessel as described, the combination 
of the well and the main tubes having pro 
peller-wheels and cut-offs in advance of the 
wheels, pipes connecting the well with the 
main tubes, at a point between the propeller 
wheels and the cut-offs, substantially as shown 
and described. 
5. In a vessel, as described, the combina 
tion with the main tubes E, E' and means for 
forcing water therethrough to propel the ves 
Sel, of oil-holding tanks having discharge 
nozzles projected through the sides of the ves 
sel at a point above the Water-line, and having 
valved pipes connected with the main tubes 
whereby water from said tubes can be utilized 
to force oil from the tanks, substantially as 
shown and for the purposes specified. 
6. In a vessel of the kind described, the 
combination with the main tubes and adjust 
able discharge-nozzles act at the rear ends 
of tubes, and a rudder arranged midway the 
discharge-nozzles, said rudder consisting of 
two concavo-convex plates arranged with the 
convex faces together, thereby exposing the 
concave faces to receive the jet from the dis 
charge-nozzle, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
7. In a vessel of the class described, the 
combination with the longitudinal tubes, of 
the propelling - Wheels arranged therein, a 
Water-well, and a suction-pipe leading from 
the well to the tubes in advance of the pro 
pelling-wheels, substantially as shown and 
described. 
JAMES C. WALIXER. 
Witnesses: 
I. IB. COINER, 
C. S. JOHNSON. 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561556.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 561,556, 
J. W. BEEKMAN, 
THROTTLE WALWE. 
Nist's 
 
 
N 
N N N 
IN, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN V. BEEKMAN, OF PIAINFIELD, NEW JERSEY. 
THROTTLE-VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 561,556, dated June 9, 1896. 
Application filed October 29, 1894, Serial No. 527,398, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it inctly conceria: 
Be it known that I, JOHN V. BEEKMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Plainfield, in the county of Union and 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Throttle 
Valves, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
Figure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
a sectional plan view of an apparatus em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is an end view 
of the same with the bonnet removed. Fig. 
3 is the valve proper and stem detached. 
of the same. 
A is the valve-case. 
B is the bonnet or removable cap at one end 
C is the valve proper. 
The construction of the case A may be de 
Scribed as follows: 1 is the steam-entrance 
opening. 2 is the steam-exit opening. 3 is 
the valve-cylinder, which is open at one end 
and tapers convergingly from the open end 
toward the closed end. 4 and 5* (shown in 
dotted lines in Fig. 2 and the form of one of 
which is shown in cross-section in Fig. 1) are 
tWO steam-passages leading from the inlet 
passage 1, respectively to ports 5* and 6 in 
the cylinder 3, diametrically opposite to each 
Other and of the oblong form shown in Fig. 1. 
7 is a port connecting the cylinder 3 with the 
exit-passage 2. The ports 5, 6, and 7 are not 
as long as the Valve-cylinder, so that they 
leave an unbroken circular bearing 8 and 9 
at each end of the valve-cylinder for the 
valve proper. The port 7, as shown in Fig. 
2, is so arranged that its central line is sub 
stantially equidistant between the ports 5 
and 6. 10 and 11 are clearance-spaces. A 
hole extends from the clearance-space 11 
through the end of the valve-case to receive 
the valve-stem. The clearance-spaces 10 and 
11 constitute steam-passages around the ends 
of the valve. 
The bonnet or cap B covers the open end 
of the valve-case and is provided with a cen 
trail bearing, in which the end of the valve 
stem fits. 12 is a set-screw, which is screw 
threaded to the bonnet and bears against the 
end of the Valve-stem with which it is con 
centric. A jam-nut, 13 is provided on this 
set-Screw. 
The valve proper, C, is fixed (by being cast 
in one piece there with or otherwise) upon the 
valve-stem 14 15, and this valve proper, C, 
consists of the wings or plates 1617, project. 55 
ing radially on opposite sides of the center 
and terminating, respectively, in the T mem 
bers 18 and 19. These T members. or valve 
faces are formed to fit the interior of the Valve 
case 3, so as to revolve freely and accurately 6o 
therein. The lines bounding the bearing-sur 
face 18 are inclined in one direction with re 
Spect to a plane passing through the axis of 
the valve proper and the lines bounding the 
bearing-Surface 19 are inclined in the oppo- 65 
site direction, as shown in the drawings, giv 
ing each bearing-surface 18 and 19 a certain 
amount of pitch. With respect to the ports 5 
and 6. 20 is a spiral spring tending to thrust 
the valve proper in antagonism to the set- to 
Screw 12. 21 is a lever for moving the valve 
Stein. 
When the Valve is in the position shown 
in full lines in Fig. 2, the steam is cut off; but 
when it is moved out of that position-as, for 75 
instance, into the position shown in dotted 
lines-the steam passes freely from the port 
6 to the port 7 and from the port 5 around the 
ends of the valve proper to the port 7. The 
Valve is thus surrounded by steam and always 8o 
balanced. 
The valve proper, as already described, is 
tapered and fits into the Valve-case, also ta 
pered. It is poised between the spiral spring 
20 and the set-screw 12 at opposite ends, so 85 
that it can be adjusted from the outside and 
set while in use or at Work by the adjustment 
of the Set-screw 12. A perfectly accurate and 
Steam-tight adjustment can thus be main 
tained with very little friction between the go 
bearing-Surfaces of the valve proper and of 
the valve-cylinder. The adjustment can be 
Varied for different pressures. Thus it can be 
adjusted for forty, sixty, eighty, one hundred, 
or two hundred pounds, &c., as each pressure 95 
Inakes Some slight difference in the relations 
of the bearing-surfaces due to expansion. 
The pitch of the valve-bearing surfaces 
causes the ports to be opened more gradually, 
the Opening of One port commencing at one Ioo 
end of the valve-cylinder, while the opening 
of the other port commences at the opposite 
end. This gives the operator a finer control 
of the steam and enables the engine to be 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
2 
561,556 
run more steadily, whether it be handled by valve-cylinder, provided with ports substan- Io 
an expert or by the average man of less in- tially diametrically opposite to each other, 
telligence. Thus the engine is particularly the said bearing-faces being set at a pitch 
adapted for handling loads, as in the case of relatively to the axial plane of the valve, Sub 
hoisting or conveying engines. 
stantially as described. 
. 
JOHN W. BEERMAN. 
What I claim is- 
Abalanced throttle-valve containing valve- 
bearing faces, substantially diametrically op- 
posite to each other in combination with a 
Witnesses: 
M. WILSON, 
HARRY LYDECKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561657.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 561,657. 
H. B. COX. 
THERMO-ELECTRIC GENERATOR. 
Patented June 9, 1896. 
 
 
2%IA II 2. e 
is a t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
W77/A55A5. 
M%zee 4. 622, 
a 
iSS 
Bill 22E. 3E 
6 
%. 
2 E. is 
% 3. 
H2A 
y xiii 
(4 
y 
///v47/70/. 
/76ry Aarrayer Cor. 
C9 (-96) 
eye-gza 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY BARRINGER COX, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, 
THERMO-ELECTRIC GENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,657, dated June 9, 1898, 
Application filed February 13, 1895, serial No. 538,262, (No model.) 
55 
" 
. 
. 
To all, whom it may conce7n 
Beit known that I, IIARRYBARRINGER Cox, 
of Iartford, in the county of IIartford and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
iew and useful Improvements in Thermo 
Electric Generators; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, which will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the saune, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form part of this specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in thermo-electric generators. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
animproved thermo-electric generator where 
in the aetive Working current-generating 
element, per se, is easily removable from the 
supporting parts and framework, so that the 
active part can be easily removed and re 
placed at a minimum cost without in any way 
injuring or marring the frame supporting or 
inclosing parts. 
- A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide certain improvements in details of con 
struction and arrangements of parts whereby 
a highly efficieht and practically and econom 
ically successful thermo-electric generator. 
can be produced and maintained at a mini 
mum cost. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction and in combinations of 
parts more fully and particularly described 
hereinafter, and pointed out in the claims, 
Referring to the accompanying, drawings, 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of the casing 
and supporting part of athermo-electric gen 
erator, the active element of the generator 
being removed. Fig. 2 is a similar view of the 
generator complete with the active element 
clamped in place therein. Fig. 3 is a detail 
elevation of an active element, perse, re 
moved from its casing and such as is shown 
in place in the casing and in section in Fig. 2. 
. In the drawings, a is a supporting-bracket 
formed to be secured to the side of a vertical 
support and extend laterally therefrom. At 
its outer end this bracket is provided with 
the radiating and upwardly-extending arms 
U. At the center from which these arms ra 
diate the bracket has the central vertical 
opening and clamping-screw c to receive the 
gas-burner d, of any suitable and desirable 
construction, 
Although I have thus specifically described 
a satisfactory forni of supporting device for 
the parts hereinafter set forth, yet I do not. 
limit myself to any particular form of stup-. 
support 
port, as any suitable and desirable 
can be employed, 
e is the bottom ring or annulus of the in 
, closing and supporting casing for the active 
element of the generator. 
This annulus rests. 
on and is securely bolted to the upper ends. 
of said radiating arms of the brackat. Around . 
its open center this annulus is provided with 
the upturned annular flange f. , 
The inclosing cylindrical outer wall or 
jacket g extends up from the outer edge of 
this annulus-bottom, and is rigidly and tightly 
secured at its lower edge around the outer 
edge of said bottom or can be formed inte 
gral therewith, if desirable. At its upper 
edge this inclosing wall has the ring or an 
nulus-top h extending in from its top edge 
and forming a tight joint or formed integral 
with the top end of the inclosing wall. The 
central opening of this top is larger in diam 
eter than the central opening of the bottom 
of the case-that is, the bottom opening is 
less, while the top opening is greater, than 
the diameter of the active element. 
i is a gasket or ring of packing material, 
such as rubber or other suitable material, 
resting on the upper surface of the bottom of 
the casing, embracing the central flange there 
of around the central opening. 
is an approximately similar gasket or pack 
ing-ring resting on the upper surface of the 
annulus-top of the casing when the active ele 9. 
ment is therein and projecting over the same 
k is the active or generating element of the 
generator formed in the shape of a hard open 
eylinder built up of the rings of thermo-cou 
pes, the rings being arranged one above the 
other with insulating material between, all the 
rings being properly electrically connected. 
is tertake?lexible condietor from the 
bottom ring, and m is the offtake from the 
top ring and opposite pole of the generator. 
This top conductorisproperly connected with 
the end element of the top ring and brought 
down through the generator between the op 
w 
. 
95 
Io. 
Io 
15 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
56,652. 
o 
7 5 
go 
95 
& 
s 
5 
- 
i. 
. 
. 
mopile. 
ors, is lifted from the casing and cylindrical 
posite poles of each ring and insulated there. 
active element, the screws q are loosened, and 
from, so that both conductors extend out 
the clamping-ring p and the gasket d are 
through the bottom of the generator. 
in building the thermopile- or active ele 
lifted from the device. The terminal Wires 
lm are loosened from the binding-posts 7, 
feat after the lings have been properly ar 
ranged and connected the entire cylinder is 
and the active element can then be lified 
bodily from the casing out through the open. 
coated and filled in between the elements and 
rings with a plastic refractory compound 
top thereof with the terminal wires hanging 
which can be hardened, so that a hard rigid cyl 
loosely therefrom. 
It will be readily understood that the oute 
inderisfornied. A covering m, of sheet metal, 
metal-coated wall of the active cylinder and 
is placed around the cylinder and intimately 
united there with or secured thereto, with its 
the casing forms the water-jacket arolind the 
generator-cylinder, the casing having the war 
ends o O projecting slightly beyond the ends 
of the cylinder and slightly turned, beaded, 
ter inlets and outlets, and the opposite ends 
of the active cylinderform water-tight joints 
-or spun in, as shown, if desired, but not neces 
sarily, This removable thermopile, complete 
with the casing ends. 
The heat from the gas-burner passes ceh 
in itself, constitutes the active element men 
trally up through the open center of the cyl 
tioned therein. 
The active element is placed in the casing 
inder, and is equally diffused and distriated 
throughout the inner surface thereof by the 
with the lower end thereof resting on the 
flange of the casing-bottom and extending in 
deflectors, as is well understood without fir 
Wardly beyond the same, so that the bottom 
ther minute description, while the outer Sui 
projecting metal edge Opasses into the bot 
face of the pile is maintained at a practically 
Eoin packing-gasket and presses the same 
even temperature throughout and the heat, 
against said flange, casing-bottom, and cyl 
is rapidly diffused by the water to produce 
inder, so as to form a most water-tight joint. 
the fall in thermic potential within the ther 
The upper end of the cylindrical active ele 
linent fits snugly within the top of the casing 
In the practical construction aid tainte 
with the top gasket on its upper projecting 
nance of thermo-electric generators it is de 
edged. Atop clamping-ring pisprovided ex 
sirable to have the active element (the gen 
tendiag partially over the casing-top and the 
erating-cylinder) removable and renewable, 
Ypper end of the cylinder and resting on the 
so that it will not be necessary to injure the 
top packing-gasket, Removable screwsgpass 
casing, which is comparatively expensive, 
through this ring and into the casing-top. 
every ime a machine needs repairs or renew 
ing. The active element, is a comparatively 
Whe said screws are screwed into the cas 
ing, the top gasket is compressed and ex 
inexpensive device and the only part that 
paided between the clamping-ring and cas 
ever needs renewing within the life of the 
ing top and is pressed down around edge o, 
casing. Hence the importalice and tility of 
exibedded in the same, and thereby forms a 
this invention will be appreciated, as the a,c- 
'Eater-fight joint between the active element. 
tive elements can be made to standard size:S 
aidi top of the casing, while 
and supplied separately and kept on hand. 
the cylinder is. 
y the user, and it will not be necessary to 
also secured and held. 
r is a light spider-frame to rest on the cas 
really destroy a machine to get at the active 
ing-top and having vertical sockets in the 
element, as heretofore, which really short 
5 ends of its arms to removably rest on the ver 
ened the life of the entire machine to the life 
tical pins S from the casing-top. This spider 
of its particular active element; but accord 
has the central depending rod extending down 
ing to the present invention one casing will 
into the center of the generator-cylinder and 
last indefinitely and the active elements can 
carrying the graduated deflectors t. This 
be renewed as desired. By this means the 
Spider is placed in position after the active 
practical and commercial success of thermo. 
cylinder has been properly set and secured 
electric generators is greatly enhanced and 
by the clampingering p and is easily lifted 
their utility established. 
from its position and laid to one side when 
It is evident that various changes might be 
the cylinder is to be removed. 
made in the forms, arrangements, and con 
On its upper side the supporting-bracket 
structions of the parts described without, de 
is provided with two double binding-posts in 
parting from the spirit and scope of my in 
(one only can be seen in the drawings,) in 
vention, Hence I do not wish to imit my 
self to the exact construction herein set forth, 
Sulated from each other and from the bracket, 
so that the two terminal conductors pass from 
but consider myself entitled to all such 
the bottom of the cylinder out through the 
changes as fall within the spirit and scope of 
open botton of the casing and are removably 
my invention. 
secured to their respective binding-posts, 
Having thus fully described Iny invention, 
which also have the exterior openings and 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
clamps for the wires of the working lines. 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. A thermoselectric generator comprising 
When it is desired to remove the active 
element, for any reason, from the complete a supporting-casing forming a water-jacket, 
device, the spider-frame , with the deflect- and theremovableactive element forming the 
40 
Sc. 
I 15 
I 25. 
561,657 
3 
. 
Io 
inner wall of the water-space and removable 
from the casing without disturbing the same, 
substantially as described. . 
2. The active generating clement, as an arti 
cle of manufacture, comprising the hard cyl 
5 
inder of refractory material inclosing the 
properly-connected thermo couples and hav 
ing the end projecting metal jacket around 
the same, and the terminals extending through 
the refractory material to the exterior of the 
cylinder, substantially as described. 
3. A thermo-electric generator having a 
supporting-casing with a top opening to per 
mit insertion or removal of the active gener 
I5 ating element, and the removable active. ele 
ment in said casing and forming a tight joint 
therewith so that the casing can contain wa 
ter surrounding said element, substantially 
as described. 
4. A thermo-electric generator comprising 
a supporting-casing having a bottom opening 
for the source of heat and a top opening to 
permit insertion or withdrawal of the cylin 
drical active element, the electrical terminals 
of the active element passing out through the 
bottom opening and removably secured so 
that they can be removed with the element, 
and packing and clamping means to form 
tight joints at the ends of the active element 
m 
25 
so that the casing can contain water surround 
ing the element, substantially as described. 
5. A casing of a thermo-electric generator 
having a bottom annulus with a central open 
ing less in diameter than the active remov 
able element, and inclosing side wall, a top 
having its top opening of such diameter as to 
permit insertion or removal of the active ele 
ment therethrough, and a support for the cas 
ing, substantially as described. 
6. A thermo-electric generator comprising 
the casing having the bottom opening with 
upturned flange, the top opening, the remov 
able hollow active element resting on said 
flange, and having a metal jacket with pro 
jecting edges, packing into which said edges 
bite, packing at the upper end of the element, 
a top clamping-plate confining the parts and 
compressing the packing, and the top remov 
able frame carrying the deflectors in the ac 
tive element. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I affix my signature in presence of 
two witnesses. 
HARRY BARRINGER COX. 
35 
40. 
45 
Witnesses: 
O. E. DUFFY, 
C. M. WERL), 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561757.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 561757, 
J. A., BRACKBILL, 
WIRE FENCE, 
- 2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 9, 1896. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSIAH A. BRACKBILL, OF KINZERS, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WRE FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 561,75?, dated June 9, 1896. 
Application filed January 28, 1896, Serial No. 577,156, (No model.) 
55 
To all twhor, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JoSIAHA. BRACKBILL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Kinzer's, in the county of Lancaster and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain Im 
provements in Wire Fences, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
devices for securing wires to the pickets and 
posts of wire fences and to the construction 
of said posts; and the object of the improve 
ment is to construct a light portable fence 
which can readily be put up and taken down, 
so that temporary inclosures, so frequently 
needed on a farm, can be constructed with 
ease and rapidity. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and combination of the various parts, as here 
inafter fully described, and then pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification, Eigure 1 is a front 
elevation of a picket embodying my invention, 
showing the locking-bar in position to be en 
gaged by the fence-wire; Fig. 2, a side view 
of a section of the picket shown in Fig. 1; 
Fig. 3, a second front view, but showing the 
fence-wires locked in the picket; Fig. 4, a 
side view of a section of the picket shown in 
Fig. 3; Fig. 5, a face view of a detached por 
tion of the locking-bar, and Fig. 6 a similar 
side view of a section of the locking-bar. 
Fig. 7 is a top view of one of the supporting 
plates. Fig. S is a perspective view of a 
modified construction of the picket. Fig. 8: 
is a face view of a modified construction for 
Fig. 9 is a vertical 
raising the locking-bar. 
section of the base and the lower end of a 
post embodying any invention; and Fig. 10, 
a top plan view of the base, the post being 
shown in section. Fig. 11 is a horizontal sec 
tion of a triangular post embodying my in 
vention. 
Similar letters indicate like parts through 
out the several views. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, and 10, Ain 
dicates an upright tubular case having hori 
zontal slots C, in the periphery thereof and 
recesses ca', forming vertical extensions of 
said slots. In the case is a vertically-mov 
able locking-bar B, having notchest, arranged 
to register with horizontal slots (i. One end 
of locking-bar B is threaded, and the bar is ad 
justed in one direction longitudinally of the 
case by a nut b', engaging the threaded end 
of said bar and bearing on the end of the case, 
as illustrated in Figs. 1 and 3. In operating, 
the locking-bar is so set that bearing-shoul 
ders b of notches b range with the sides of 
The wires D are 
slots C, opposite recesses at'. 
then pushed sidewise into slots a until they 
register with said recesses C', as shown at d, 
Fig. 2, when the locking-bar is drawn upward 
by turning nutt', thus forcing wires D into 
recesses a', as shown at d', Fig. 4, and locking 
them there. To secure wires D more firmly in 
recesses a', the bearing-shoulderstof notches 
b may have their sides beveled, as seen at 
b', Fig. 3, so that the ridges on bearing-shoul 
ders b form bends in wires D after the lock 
ing-bar draws them into recesses a'. When 
bearing-shoulders bare flat, the supporting 
surfaces for wires D may be lengthened by 
placing plates D' on said shoulders before or 
at the time of inserting wires D, as illustrated 
at d, Figs. 1 and 3. When it is desired to 
release the fence-wires, nut l' is loosened and 
the locking-bar is pushed into the case. 
In Fig. 8 is represented a rectangular case 
E, having one face open, the slots e and re 
cesses e' being formed in the edges of the sides 
E' adjacent to said open face. The locking 
bar F, having notches f, corresponds with 
the shape of case E and has a reduced end f', 
threaded and engaged by a nut F", bearing 
on a cap-plate F, resting on an end of case 
E. The Wiresin this construction are secured 
and released in the same manner as in the 
construction shown in Figs. I and 3. 
Figs. 9 and 10 illustrate my invention ap 
plied to a post. Here the case A is inserted 
in the tubular post G of the base, and is pre 
vented from dropping to the bottom of post 
G by an annular flange g on the case engag 
ing the top of said post, or by the bottom of 
the post engaging an annular shoulder g' in 
the post, so that there is space, if necessary, 
for the lower end of the locking-bar to be de 
pressed below the bottom of case A. Stops, 
as the annular shoulder g, may be employed 
to limit the downward movement of the lock 
ing-bar to insure the registering of the notches 
therein with the grooves in the case. The 
foot of the base is formed of horizontally-flar 
75 
So 
85 
95 
OC 
Io 
I 5 
25 
45 
50 
 
561757 
O 
15 
25 
35 
ing Wings. G', so that for temporary use the 
post can be set on the ground and, if neces 
Sary, Weighted, or, if it is to be a permanent 
erection, the foot can be buried beneath the 
Surface of the ground and the wings G-cov 
ered with earth to preserve the post in an 
erect position. The case may be engaged 
With the post in any other suitable manner, 
as I do not restrict myself to the connection 
shown and herein described, for there are 
many other. Ways in which the same result 
may be attained. 
Fig.11 shows a horizontal section of a tri 
angular case and locking-bar, which latter, 
With the free edges R of the case, are notched 
and slotted in a manner similar to that shown 
in Fig. S. 
In the pickets any well-known device may 
be employed to limit the downward move 
ment of the locking-bar-as, for instance, an 
annular shoulder, such as is shown at g, Fig. 
9, may be located in the case, or a stud in 
the case may be engaged with a groove in the 
locking-bar, said groove being open at the 
free end of the locking-bar, as is common. 
As it is evident that many changes in the 
construction and relative arrangement of 
parts might be resorted to without depart 
ing from the spirit and scope of my inven 
tion, I Would have: it understood that I do 
not l'estrict myself to the particular construc 
tion and arrangement of parts shown and de 
scribed, but that I reserve the right to make 
such changes, and that 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
fence, of a 
1. The combination, in a wire 
picket or post having 
a channel lengthwise, 
thereof and an open-ended slot extending 
through a side thereof inward through oppo 
site Walls of said channel, so that a wire may 
be inserted sidewise in the slot, said slot hav 
ing recesses opening into its inner ends and 
at an angle there with, a longitudinally-mov 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
45 
so 
able locking-bar in said channel, and a shoul 
der on the locking-bar, constructed to regis 
ter with the side of said slot opposite to that 
into which said recesses open, said shoulder 
being adapted to force the wire into said re 
cesses, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
2. The combination, in a wire fence, of a 
picket or post having a channel lengthwise 
thereof; and an open-ended slot extending 
s 
through a side thereof inward through oppo 
site walls of said channel, so that a wire may 
be inserted sidewise in the slot, said slot hav 
ing recesses opening into its inner ends and 
at an angle there with, a longitudinally-mov 
Go 
able locking-bar in said channel, and a shoul 
der on the locking-bar, constructed to regis 
ter with the side of said slot opposite to that 
into which said recesses open, the edges of 
the shoulder parallel with the sides of the 
65 
slot being beveled, and said shoulder being 
adapted to force the wire into said recesses, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. The combination, in a wire fence, of a 
picket or post having a channel lengthwise 
thereof and an open-ended slot extending 
through a side thereof inward through oppo 
site walls of said channel, so that a wire may 
be inserted sidewise in the slot, said slot hav 
ing recesses Qpening into its inner ends and 
at an angle there with, a longitudinally-mov 
able locking-bar in said channel, a shoulder 
on the locking-bar, constructed to register 
with the side of said slot opposite to that into 
which said recesses open, the shoulder being 
adapted to force the wire into said recesses, 
and a bearing-plate on said shoulder and ex 
tending beyond the sides of the picket or post, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
75 
JOSIAH A. BRACKBILL. 
Witnesses: 
C. G. BASSLER, 
WM. R. GERHART. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561857.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
 
W. E. BAXTER, 
FOLDING STAND. 
Patented June 9, 1896, 
- 
WITNESSES: 
- 
r 
- 
- ". 
INVENTOR 
V 
V 
e/324cc. 
By 772-22-4-2-2-Y (6 
AITORNEYS. 
 
RoREW scratia. Photout 
washi NGON.00. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. BAXTER, OF FRANIKFORT, IKENTUCKY. 
FOLDING STAND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 561,857, dated June 9, 1896. 
Application filed February 18, 1895, Serial No. 538,852, (No model.) 
5 5 
65 
75 
So 
C. 
To all athlon, it Jactly conce7n 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM E. BAXTER, of 
Frankfort, in the county of Franklin and 
State of Rentucky, have invented a new and 
5 useful Improvement in Folding Stands, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in folding 
stands, and especially in stands for use in and 
forming parts of camping kits, which may be 
employed efficiently for supporting a coffee 
pot, boiler, or cooking utensils on a fire when 
/in use, and when not in use can be folded 
compactly for storage; and the invention con 
sists in certain novel constructions and com 
bination of parts, as will be hereinafter de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a stand ready for use. Fig. 2 shows 
the said stand folded for packing; and Fig. 3 
is a perspective view of a somewhat differ 
ently-constructed stand with the parts in full 
lines in position for use and in dotted lines in 
folded position, all of which will be described. 
The stand comprises a top frame A and 
legs B. The top frame A is composed of 
wings a, arranged at angles to each other, 
rigidly connected at the corners, and prefer 
ably open at top and bottom, as shown. It 
is also preferred to make this frame triangu 
lar, as shown, this form securing strength and 
rigidity and also facilitating the close pack 
ing of the stand when folded. In the con 
struction shown in Figs. 1 and 2 the legs B 
are pivoted one to each side or wing ct, of the 
top frame and may be folded into a plane 
with said top frame, as shown in Fig. 2, or 
down, as shown in Fig. 1, to support the top 
frame in an elevated position. When so 
turned, as will be seen from Fig. 1, the legs 
3 do not stand vertically, but incline out 
ward toward their lower ends, such arrange 
ment giving greater firmness and strength to 
the stand, as will be readily understood from 
said Fig. J. The top frame is preferably 
made in a single strip bent to form the wings 
ct, the meeting ends of said wings forming the 
corners, and the extremities of the strip be 
ing secured by one, two, or more rivets C, as 
shown, or the said ends may be secured in 
other suitable mannel'. 
In specifically describing the legs and their 
connections they may be said to be pivoted 
at D near their upper ends to the inner sides 
of the wings near the corner E, so that they 
fold alongside the wings (t, and within the top 
frame when the parts are folded. It will be 
seen from Fig. J that the legs are stopped 
when turned to position for use by abutting 
at 1 with the frame, and in folded position 
the legs abut at 2 with the frame and are 
stopped in their folded position. Thus it will 
be seen the legs are stopped both in position 
for use and in folded position. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 3 the top 
frame is provided at its corners with out 
wardly-projected keepers F, the space f with 
in which communicates with the interior of 
the frame, and the legs are pivoted within 
the space f to the keepers F, such construc 
tion furnishing a bracing on both sides of the 
joints of the legs. 
In the constructions shown in both Figs. I 
and 3 the upper corners of the legs next the 
corners of the frame are cut away or rounded 
at G, permitting the pivoting of such legs 
close to the corners and yet providing for the 
pivotal movement or swinging of such legs 
from folded position to position for use, and 
vice versa. 
The construction is simple, easily folded 
and adjusted for use, inexpensive, strong, and 
firm in use. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A folding stand comprising the open 
frame top, the legs pivoted near their upper 
ends to said top and foldable into the plane 
of said top or down to form legs and stopped 
in both adjustments by abutment with the 
top frame all substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. A folding stand comprising the angular 
top frame provided at its corners with out 
wardly-projected keeper portions the space 
within which communicates with the interior 
of the frame, and the legs pivoted to Said top 
frame within the said projecting keeper por 
tions, substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
3. A folding stand substantially as de 
scribed, comprising a top frame formed of a . 
vertically edgewise strip, the flat legs equal 
in width to the strip forming the top frame 
ICC 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
2 
561,85? 
folded into the frame will coincide at their 
edges with those of the said frame substan- Io 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
WILLIAM E. BAXTER. 
Witnesses: 
D. W. LINDSEY, Jr., 
JOHN B. LINDSEY. 
and pivoted to the inner sides of the top 
frame at a point between the upper and lower 
edges thereof whereby the portions of the top 
frame above and below the pivots will form 
stops to limit the movement of the legs in 
both directions, and the pivots being equi 
distant from the corresponding edges of the 
top frame and legs whereby the latter when 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US561957.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 561,957, 
L. D. BALL. 
COMBINATION T00L. 
Patented June 16 l896. 
Andrey B.Graha M. Photo-THC, WASHMGOM.0 C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LORENZO D. BALL OF CANTON, OHIO. 
COMBINATION - TO O. L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 561,957, dated June 16, 1896. 
Application filed March 13, 1896, Serial No. 583,010, No model.) 
To aid (whon it 1720g? coice.77: 
Be it known that I, LORENZOD. BALL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Can 
ton, in the county of Stark and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful In 
provements in Combination-Tools; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, refer 
ence being had to the annexed drawings, mak 
ing part of this specification, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing the 
different parts properly connected. Fig. 2 is a 
Fig. 3 
cross-section through linea: a, Fig. J. 
is a view showing a portion of the inner cross 
bar and illustrating the same attached to the 
shank or bar. Fig. 4 is a view showing the 
outer cross bar or arm and illustrating the 
same connected to the outer end of the shank 
or bar. Fig. 5 is a view showing a portion of 
one of the blades and illustrating the aper 
ture for attaching the blade to the cross bar 
O' 3. 
The present invention has relation to a com 
bined tool; and it consists in the different 
parts and combination of parts hereinafter 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claim. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
ings. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the handle, which may be constructed 
in the ordinary manner, to which handle is 
attached in any convenient and well-known 
manner the shank or bar cit, which shank or 
bar is formed of a length to correspond sub 
stantially with the length of the tool designed 
to be constructed. To the inner or handle 
end of the shank or bara is securely attached 
in any convenient and well-known manner 
the cross bar or arm b, the ends of said cross 
bar being provided with the hooks c, which 
hooks are for the purpose hereinafter de 
scribed. To the outer end of the shank or 
bar at is adjustably attached the cross bar or 
arm d, which cross bar or arm is provided 
with the hooks cl. The outer end of the shank 
or bar C, is screw-threaded for a short distance, 
upon which screw-threaded portion is located 
2 5 
35 
40 
the nute, said nut being located upon the inner 
side of the cross bar or arm d. To the outer 
ends of the cross-bars l and d and upon the 
hooked ends thereof are attached the blades B 
and C, said blades being located and arranged 
as illustrated in Fig. 1. 
The blade Bisprovided with saw-teeth upon 
one of its edges and is especially designed as 
a meat - saw. The blade C is corrugated, 
which corrugations extend through a portion 
of the width of the blade, said corrugations 
terminating in the teeth f. 
The blade C is especially designed for a 
bread-knife or like use. 
For the purpose of tightening the blades B 
and Cafter they have been properly attached 
to the cross bars or arms the Inute is rotated 
so as to force the cross bar or arm cloutward 
and away from the cross bar or armb, thereby 
giving the blades C and B the desired amount 
of tension. 
It will be understood that by connecting 
the ends of the blades B and C and holding 
said blades at a tension thin blades can be 
used without danger of the blades springing 
or bending out of position. Each of the blades 
B and C is provided with apertures, such as 
g, which apertures are for the purpose of con 
necting the blades to the cross bal's or arms. 
For the purpose of bringing the cutting 
edge of the right-hand blade down, or, in 
other words, bringing the right-hand blade 
in proper position for use, the cutting edges 
of the blades are reversed, one being up and 
the other dow}n. 
It will be understood that the shank or bar 
a will act as a guide for the blades, thereby 
gaging the thickness of the slices of bread or 
meat to be cult. 
It will be understood that by providing the 
adjustable cross bar or arm d the blades B 
and C can be easily detached for the pur 
pose of filing or sharpening, and at the same 
time new blades can be substituted for old 
ones without any increased cost, except the 
cost of the new blade. 
IIaving fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination of the handle A, provided 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
2 
561,957 
with the shank or bar C, having a fixed cross 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
bar or arm connected to the bar C, and an hereunto Subscribed my name in the presence 
adjustable cross bar or arm located upon the of two Witnesses. 
bar Ct, the blades B, and C, connected to the 
5 cross-arms and the cutting edges of Said 
blades reversed, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
J. A. JEFFERS, 
F. W. BOND. 
Witnesses: 
LORENZO D. BALL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562057.txt	(No Model.) 
C. E. WINTERROS, 
HAT BEATING AND CLEANSING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 562,057. 
Patented June l6, l896. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. E. WINTERROS, 
HAT BEATING AND CLEANSING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 562,057, 
Patented June 16, 1896, 
  
 
aW a-2 s2g as2M &2 
(No Model.) 
C. E. WINTERROS, 
HAT BEATING AND CLEANSING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 562,057, 
Patented June 16, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
- 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
C. E. WINTERROS, 
HAT BEATING AND CLEANSING MACHINE, 
No. 562,057. 
Patented June l6, l896, 
ass 
  
 
 
 
 
i 
f 
E 
: 
; 
i 
w 
W 
A. 
ae, 
B 
ecat 
Ness 
SS2E 
O 
CE 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
72 
 
 
 
N 
SABRHA 
t 
frS 
Sye-le 
al- 
d 
22--1-los-3-o-st 
4a 7%. 424 
7-97a 729 a .7% A7 
6/ 
7. 
62.e4 42%2. 
S11-v-c.11-vol 
C. E. WINTERROS, 
HAT BEATING AND CLEANSING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
C. E. WINTERROS, 
HAT BEATING AND CLEANSING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 6. 
No. 562,057, 
Patented June 16, 1896, 
 
 
 
in Y 372 A 
. A 
 
a Zs 
B 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIAES ERIC WINTERROS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR 
TO THE JOIN B. STETSON COAIPANY, OF SAMIE PLACE. 
-AT BEATING AND CLEAN SNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,057, dated June 16, 1896. 
Application fied February 24, 1896, Serial No. 580,325, (No model.) 
55 
To (t/l, it'? O7, ii. 7] (ty concern: 
Beit known that I, CLAESERICWINTERROs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Philadelphia, in the county of Phila 
delphia and State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Iat Beating and Cleansing Aachines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Yy invention has relation to a machine 
adapted to beat and thoroughly cleanse felt 
hats, and in such connection it relates par 
ticulally to the general construction and ar 
rangement of such a machine. 
The principal objects of my invention are, 
first, to provide a machine of simple construc 
tion, adapted to more quickly and thoroughly 
beat and cleanse felt hats than has heretofore 
been possible manually; second, to provide 
in such a machine a block having a pilose 
Outer Surface consisting, preferably, of bris 
tles or analogous brush-like material, upon 
which the hat is mounted preparatory to the 
beating and cleansing operations; third, to 
provide in such a machine reciprocatory beat 
er's adapted to beat against the brin and 
crown of the hat while the same is upon the 
block; fourth, to provide in such a machine 
}'otary brushes adapted to brush the brim 
and crown of the hat when upon the block; 
fifth, to provide in Stich a machine means for 
rotating the block and the hat mounted there 
On; sixth, to provide in such a machine a 
block adapted to be removably secured to a 
l'otating shaft and means for intermittently 
revolving said shaft and block when the same 
are l'Otating, and, Seventh, to provide in such 
a machine means for stopping the rotation of 
the block and shaft when the same reach a 
predetermined position in their revolution to 
permit of the removal and replacement of the 
hat upon the block. 
\ly invention, stated in general terms, con 
sists of a machine for beating and cleansing 
hats, when constructed and arranged for op 
eration in Substantially the manner herein 
after described and claimed. 
The nature and Scope of my invention will 
be more fully understood from the following 
description, taken in connection with the ac 
companying drawings, forming part hereof, 
and in which 
Figure 1 is an elevational view of the right 
hand side of the machine embodying features 
of my invention. Fig. 2 is a similar view of 
the left-hand side of the machine. Fig. 3 is a 
front end elevation of the machine. Fig. 4 is a 
rear end elevation of the same. Fig. 5 is a 
front elevational view, enlarged, of one of the 
revoluble and rotating shafts carrying the 
block for the hat. Fig. 6 is a similar view, 
partly sectioned, to more clearly illustrate the 
construction and arrangement of the same. 
Fig. 7 is a sectional view, enlarged, of the 
mechanism for braking the upper end of said 
shaft to stop the rotation of the block at a 
determined position in the revolution of the 
same. Fig. S is a top or plan view, enlarged, 
illustrating in detail the mechanism for beat 
ing the hat and the auxiliary brush Support 
ing the brim of the hat during the beating 
operation. Fig. 9 is a longitudinal sectional 
view, enlarged, of the block, illustrating the 
means for Seculing the Same to the upper end 
of the revoluble shaft. Fig. 10 is an under 
neath plan view, enlarged, of said block re 
moved from the shaft; and Fig. 11 is a side 
elevational view, enlarged, illustrating in de 
tail the universal joint for one of the Sup 
ports or arms in which rotate the brushes for 
cleansing the brim and the crown. 
Referring to the drawings, CL represents the 
base of the machine upon Which is Supported 
the upright or standard C.", forming a bearing 
at its upper end for a shaft a*. The shaft a 
is provided at one end with a driving-pulley 
C and at its other end With a miter-gear U. 
Upon the shaft Ct' is loosely mounted a frame 
l', consisting, as shown, of three radially-dis 
posed brackets, although the frame may con 
sist of more or less brackets without depart 
ing from the spirit of my invention. Each 
bracket is provided with bearings), in which 
rotates a radially-disposed shaft ly, the lower 
end of which is provided with a miter-gearb, 
meshing with a miter-gear b of the shaft Ct, 
the arrangement being such that while the 
shaft Ct' is rotating the frame l' may be re 
volved by hand, and the shaft blimay, while 
rotating in the bearings b of said frame, be 
revolved with said frame. Each shaftly con 
sists of two members or sections, each termi 
nating in disks band b", respectively, the disks 
7 O 
75 
So 
IO 
5 
3 5 
O 
IOd 
2 
562,05? 
75 
So 
90 
Od 
I o5 
O 
O 
being frictionally clamped together by means 
of a plate band washer b, as more particu 
larly illustrated in Fig. 6. The upper mem 
ber or section of each shaftlis provided with 
a head b', upon which is adapted to be secured 
a block d, on which the hat is to be mounted. 
This block d consists of a frame of suitable in 
flexible material, preferably wood, having a 
pilose outer face or surface of bristles d', or 
similar brush-like material, shaped to con 
form to the interior of the crown of the hat 
mounted upon the block. The block disse 
cured to the headt of the shaft b, preferably 
in the following manner: The block d is re 
cessed, as at d, and in the top of this recess 
is provided a springb', projecting to the lower 
end or base of the block. This spring bicar 
ries a catch or latch b', the end of which is 
adapted to enter one of a series of notches b, 
formed in the sides of the head b', as clearly 
illustrated in Figs. 9 and 10 of the drawings. 
By withdrawing the catch or latch bit from 
the notches b the block d may belifted from 
off the head O'. This spring-catch b1 and 
notched head balso constitute a means of ad 
justment up and down of the block dupon said 
head to compensate for varying heights of the 
crown of the hat to be supported on the block. 
At a certain position during the intermittent 
revolution of the shafts bit is necessary to 
prevent the upper member of the shaft land 
its block d from rotating to permit of the re 
moval and replacement of a hat upon the 
block. To accomplish this, use is made of 
the following preferred mechanism, with ref 
erence particularly to Figs. 5, 6, and 7 of the 
drawings. As above explained, the two mem 
bers of each shaft bare united by friction 
disks, which ordinarily will clamp the two 
members sufficiently together to permit of the 
rotation of the shaft bin its entirety. To 
prevent the rotation of the upper member, 
there is secured a collar e, having an inden 
tation or recesse' in its periphery. Opposite 
this collar and adapted to bear upon the pe 
riphery is provided a pine', having a sliding 
movement in the frame b' and projecting en 
tirely through and on either side thereof. 
Upon the bearing for the shaft at is secured 
an upwardly-projecting spring-arm e, carry 
ing a calm projection e', arranged in the path 
of the pine and adapted, when said pin strikes 
against said projection, to force the pin in 
Ward against the periphery of the collar e and 
into the recess e' thereof. The pin will thus 
act as a brake upon the upper member of the 
shaft b, the lower member and washer bicon 
tinuing to rotate upon the disk b at the lower 
end of the said upper member. 
To the upper end of each bracket of the 
frame b is secured an upwardly-projecting 
brush f, adapted, when a hat is mounted on 
the blockd, to rest against and form a sup 
port for the under surface of the brim A of 
the said hat, while the same is rotating with 
the block d. As indicated in the drawings, 
the shafts bare adapted to be revolved with 
the framel)', so as to occupy three positions. 
The first is that in which the upper member 
of the shaft b is at rest, as above described, 
in which position the hat may be mounted 
upon or removed from the block. The sec 
ond position of the shaft, its block, and the 
hat carried thereby is that in which the 
beating of the hat is accomplished and is in 
dicated in the drawings by that position in 
which the shaft bis substantially horizontal. 
In this position the top of the crown B of the 
hat rests against a concave brush g or other 
guiding-piece secured to the upper end of a 
vertically-disposed armg', hinged at its lower 
end, as at g, upon a shaft k, supported above 
the base of the machine, the hinged connec 
tion being such that the upper end of the 
arm g' is adapted to move toward or away 
from the crown B of the hat in an arc de 
scribed from the shaft lc as a center. The 
arm g is supported in its normal position with 
the brush g resting with required pressure 
upon the crown by means of springs or their 
equivalents. (Not shown.) Arranged on one 
side of the brush gis a beater which is pivoted, 
as atg', to the armg', so as to have a reciproca 
tory movement toward or away from the crown 
B. This beater consists of a rigid arm h, of 
Wood of other suitable material, to the upper 
end of which is secured a thin flexible strip h", 
preferably of steel, concavely curved to ap 
proximate the convex shape of the top of the 
crown B. This strip h' is normally pressed 
against the hat-crown by means of a spring 
h', one end of which is secured to the rigid 
handle h below the pivot g, while the other 
end is secured to the arm g', all as clearly 
illustrated in Figs. 1 and S of the drawings. 
The handle h is adapted to be struck by one 
or more fingers or triggers , revolving with 
a shaft h", rotating in a suitable bearing in 
the arm g', which shaft his rotated by means 
of a grooved pulley h, secured to one end of 
the said shaft and connected by means of a 
belt hand pulley h" with a driving-shaft k, 
rotating in suitable bearings g of the ma 
chine. The handle h, thus reciprocated by 
the fingers or triggers h", causes the flexible 
strip h' to beat upon the top of the hat-crown 
to thereby free the same from dust, sand, 
loose fur, and other extraneous matter. 
For the side and a portion of the crown of 
the hat is arranged a similar beaterl, actuated 
in the same manner as the beater above de 
scribed and similarly arranged upon an arm l, 
which is pivoted at its lower end in a bearing 
l, substantially at right angles to the shaft k, 
in such a manner that said beater l, carried 
by said arm, is permitted to move toward or 
away from the hat. The arm l is normally 
held under the tension of a spring l, as illus 
trated in Fig. 4. The driving-shaft l', carry 
ing the triggers l, adapted to operate the 
beaterl, is mounted in suitable bearings lin 
said arm l' and is driven by pulley l, belt 
l, and pulley l'. 
This latter pulley l is 
driven by a shaft l', rotating in the pivotal 
3O 
45 
55 
562,057 
8 
5 
O 
2 5 
3 5 
75 
bearing li of the arm, and motion is conveyed 
to said shaft l' by a miter-gear l', meshing 
with a miter-gear le" of the shaft (i. 
To beat the brim of the hat is arranged a 
third beater ), the flexible portion in of which 
is provided with an upwardly-extending end 
ni, resting in the corner formed between the 
clown and brim of the hat. This beater n is 
operated by mechanism similar to that used 
to actuate the other beaters, and it is mounted 
upon an arm in, hinged, as at ni', to a sup 
port 1), projecting from the base C in such a 
manner that the arm and beater may move 
automatically toward and away from the el 
liptical side crown. The arm ) is held to 
Ward the hat-crown by means of a spring or 
its equivalent. (Not shown.) 
The mechanism for reciprocating the beater 
in is operated by means of a shaft in", Sup 
ported at its lower end in an extension 1) of 
the arm 
and provided with a miter-gear 
in, meshing with a miter-gear le", secured to 
the shaft le. The beater n is adapted to beat 
li).On the upper surface of the hat-brim di 
rectly over the brush f on the framel', which 
is located under the brim, all as illustrated in 
Fig. S of the drawings. This brush fisthere 
fore adapted not only to support the brim of 
the hat, but to receive the dust from the same 
while it is being beaten by the beater n. 
During the operation of the machine-as, 
for instance, while the blocks cl are being 
brushed or cleansed by the brushing mech 
anism, hereinafter explained, and no hats are 
in Ounted upon said blocks-it is necessary 
that this beating mechanism shall be stopped, 
and for this reason the shaft k, which oper 
ates all of the beatel's, is thrown into and out 
of connection with the main driving-shaft 
(not shown) by means of the following pre 
ferred mechanisin: On the shaft is secured 
a driving-pulley k", connected with a pulley 
upon the main driving-shaft by means of a 
loose belt S. Upon this belt is adapted to rest 
a tension roll or wheel (;, carried at the free 
end of an angle-lever k", pivoted, as at k", to 
the Support Cl' of the machine. The free end 
of the angle-lever is counterweighted, as at 
k, to normally depress the tension-rollk upon 
the belt S. The other end of the angle-lever 
le' is pivotally secured to a vertically-disposed 
arm k", passing through a recess 
in the top 
of a box k', and adapted to be depressed to 
raise the roll (; by lowering with the feet or 
otherwise a cross-bar I, to which the verti 
cal arm k" is secured. The arm his provided 
with a catch or projection lic, fitting under 
the top of the box kit, and adapted to thereby 
maintain the arm le" in a depressed position. 
This catch is shifted under the top of the box 
to catch there under by means of the spring 
'', as shown in Fig. 1. To release the arm 
l", the cross-bal' ' is pushed toward the ma 
chine to release the catch (; from the box, 
When the counterweight is will depress the 
tension-roll is upon the belts and laise the 
Said vertical arm and cross-bar. When the 
roll is rests upon the belts, it tightens the 
belt sufficiently to transmit motion from the 
main driving-shaft to the shaft k, and when 
the roll k is elevated from the belt no motion 
is conveyed to the said shaft le. 
The third and last position of the shaft b 
and its block dis that in which the arm rests 
in its lowermost position to bring the hat in 
contact with a series of rotary brushes. These 
brushes are three in number, two of which, 
in and n', are designed, respectively, to brush 
the under side of the brim A and to brush the 
upper side of the brim and a portion of the 
crown of the hat. The brushes in and n' ro 
tate in suitable bearings in, carried at the 
end of an arm in, which is supported by a 
chain or cord n' from one end of a lever-arm 
n, pivoted, as at 7', in an extension in of the 
support Ct', the other end of the lever being 
counterweighted, as at n, sufficiently to main 
tain the brush-arm and lever-arm 
in a 
state of equilibrium, as illustrated in Fig. 1. 
The other end of the brush-arm n' is con 
nected to a support n' on the base n' by 
means of a universal joint in, the construc 
tion of which by preference is that illustrated 
in Fig. 11. By means of this joint in and of 
the counterbalancing-lever in the two brushes 
in and n' are permitted to move toward or 
away from the brim and toward or away from 
the crown in order that varying sizes and 
shapes of hats placed upon the block cl may 
all be thoroughly brushed. The third brush 
O is adapted to brush the entire top of the 
crown B and that portion of the side of the 
crown not brushed by the brush n'. For this 
reason the brush O is shaped, preferably, as 
illustrated in Figs. 1 and 3-that is to say, it 
consists of a portion O', partially conical in 
shape, terminating or merging in a substan 
tially cylindrical portion o. This brush oro 
tates in a suitable bearing at the end of all 
arm. O', counterbalanced in the same manner 
as the brush-arm in-that is to say, the arm. 
O' is supported by a chain or cordin' from one 
end of a counterweighted lever-arm n', piv 
oted, as at n', to an extension or standard , 
supported upon the support Ct. The exten 
sion in is connected to the extension in by 
means of a connecting-rod n'. The lower 
end of the arm O is universally jointed, as at 
o, to a support o' of the base 
in the same 
manner as said arm in, and substantially as 
illustrated in Fig. 11. 
The three brushes n, n., and O are all driven 
from a common shaft p, to which the same 
are connected by belts and pulleys, and this 
shaft p is driven by the main driving-shaft 
(not shown) by means of the belt p' and pull 
ley p. The supports or arms in and O' of the 
brushes are pressed inward to bring the 
brushes against the hat by means of the an 
gle-levers t and t, pivoted in the base of the 
machine, the free arms f and f of which are 
weighted. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
The blocks d are first placed upon the heads 
w 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
I I5 
2C) 
562,05? 
O 
l' of the shafts band a hat placed upon the 
block, which is in the uppermost position. 
The frame b' is then revolved by hand until 
the hat and block are brought into position 
for the beaters to operate upon the hat, being 
as before described-that position in which 
the shaft b is substantially horizontal. The 
hat is guided to this position by the follow 
ing preferred mechanism: The concave brush 
or guiding-piece g is continued upward into 
an oblique arm , against which the crown B 
of the hat strikes and thereby moves the arm 
g' and beater carried thereby sufficiently to 
permit the crown entering the concave brush 
and the concave beater-strip h". The crown 
B also strikes at its side upon a flexible guid 
ing-strip r", secured to the arm in, carrying 
the beater in for the brim of the hat, thus 
moving said arm sufficiently to permit the 
brim and crown of the hat to rest in proper 
position with respect to the beater n. After 
the hat has reached this position the beaters 
are set into operation by allowing the tension 
roll h to rest upon the loose belt S, which 
drives the beater mechanism. The shaft ly 
and block d are also set in rotation, since the 
shaft a, which rotates the arm and block, is 
preferably driven by the shaft I, which oper 
lates the beaters, said shaft a being connected 
to the shaft k by a belt a, substantially as 
shown. The next succeeding arm and block 
now reaches a position in which, as hereto 
fore explained, the upper member of the arm 
and block are braked to prevent rotation. 
In this position another hat is placed upon 
the second block. After the first hat has 
been sufficiently beaten the frame b'is again 
turned and the crown B of the hat strikes 
against a flexible guide 
on the arm l to 
throw said arm and particularly its beater 
mechanism out of the path of the hat. The 
guide r serves also to guide the hat to the 
brushes n, n', and O. The brim of the hat 
enters between the brushes in and n' and the 
crown rests against the conical and cylin 
drical portions of the brusho. The firsthat is 
thereby thoroughly brushed and cleansed. 
During the brushing operation the second 
hat is being beaten and the third arm has 
reached the position in which a hat may be 
mounted upon the block. By now again 
turning the frame b' the first block with the 
hat thoroughly beaten and cleansed is brought 
to a position where it can be removed and 
replaced by another hat, the second hat un 
dergoing at the same time a brushing opera 
tion and the third hat the beating operation. 
These operations are continued until all the 
hats have been operated upon. By stopping 
the beating mechanism and sending the 
blocks through the brushing mechanism all 
dust, dirt, or other extraneous matter settling 
in the brush-like surface of the block (being 
forced therein by the action of the beaters) 
may be thoroughly and quickly removed 
therefrom. During the rotation of the hat in 
the beating operation it is preferable that the 
brim be held flat, and to assist the brush fon 
the frame b' in supporting the brim is placed 
upon the upper end of the arm la flat pro 
jecting strip , preferably of Wood. 
It will be manifestly obvious that as to some 
of the details of arrangement of parts of the 
machine modifications may be made without 
departing from the spirit or scope of my in 
vention, and hence I do not wish to be un 
derstood as limiting myself to the precise con 
struction and arrangement of all the parts as 
illustrated and hereinbefore explained; but, 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine of the character described, 
a solid block having an outer surface com 
posed of bristles upon which the hat is mount 
ed preparatory to the beating and cleansing 
operations and means for beating the hat 
while upon the block, substantially as and 
for the purposes described. 
2. In a machine of the character described, 
a solid block having an outer surface com 
posed of bristles upon which the hat is mount 
ed preparatory to the beating and cleansing 
operations, means for beating the hat while 
upon the block, and means for rotating the 
block, Substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
3. In a machine of the character described, 
a solid block having an outer surface com 
posed of bristles upon which the hatis mount 
ed preparatory to the beating and cleansing 
operations, means for beating the hat while 
upon the block, means for rotating said block 
and means for revolving the block while ro 
tating, Substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
4. In a machine of the character described, 
a block, a shaft carrying said block and con 
sisting of two members having frictional con 
tact, upon the upper member of which said 
block is mounted, means for rotating said 
shaft, means for revolving said shaft while ro 
tating, and means for braking the rotation of 
the upper member of the shaft to stop the ro 
tation of the block, during a certain portion 
of the revolution of said shaft and block, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
5. In a machine of the character described, 
a block having a flexible pilose outer surface 
upon which the hat is mounted, reciprocatory 
beaters adapted to beat against the brim and 
crown of the hat, while the same is upon the 
block, and means for operating said recipro 
catory beaters, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
6. In a machine of the character described, 
a block having an outer surface of bristles 
upon which the hat is mounted, a series of 
reciprocatory beaters adapted to beat against 
the brim and crown of the hat, while the same 
is upon the block, and means for operating 
said beaters, substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
7. In a machine of the character described, 
25 
40 
45 
55 
75 
So 
90 
OO 
O 
II5 
f 
562,05? 
& 
IO 
a block having an outer surface of bristles 
upon which the hat is mounted, a series of 
reciprocatory beaters adapted to beat against 
the brim and crown of the hat, while the same 
is upon the block, means for operating said 
beater's, and means for rotating said block and 
hat, during the operation of the beaters, sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
S. In a machine of the character described, 
a block having a flexible pilose outer surface 
upon which the hat is mounted, rotary brushes 
adapted to brush the brim and crown of the 
hat, while the same is upon the block, and 
means for operating said rotary brushes sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
9. In a machine of the character described, 
a block having an outer surface of bristles 
upon which the hat is mounted, a series of 
rotary brushes adapted to brush the brim and 
crown of the hat, while the same is upon the 
block, and means for Operating Said rotary 
brushes, substantially as and for the purposes 
(lescribed. 
10. In a machine of the character described, 
a block having a flexible pilose outer surface 
upon which the hat is mounted, a series of 
rotary brushes adapted to brush the brim and 
crown of the hat, while the same is on the 
block, means for operating the rotary brushes, 
and means for rotating said block and hat, 
during the rotation of said brushes, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
11. In a machine of the character described, 
a block upon which the hat is mounted, two 
rotary brushes adapted to brush the upper and 
lower faces of the hat-brim While the same is 
upon the block, a rotary brush consisting of 
a comical portion merging into a cylindrical 
portion adapted to brush the crown of the hat, 
means for rotating said brushes, and means 
for rotating the block and hat, during the ro 
tation of the brushes, Substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
12. In a machine of the character described, 
a Series of lreciprocating beaters, a frame con 
sisting of a series of radially-disposed brack 
ets, radially-disposed shafts each rotating in 
one of said brackets, a block having a flexi 
ble pilose outer surface upon which the hat is 
mounted adapted to be secured to each shaft, 
2 5 
3 5 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
means for rotating said shafts and blocks, and 
means for revolving said frame, during the 
rotation of said shafts to bring successive 
blocks and hats into and out of engagement 
With said beaters, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
13. In a machine of the character described, 
a block having an outer surface, consisting 
of bristles or similar brush-like material upon 
which the crown of the hat is supported, re 
ciprocatory beaters adapted to beat upon the 
crown of said hat, an auxiliary brush adapted 
to rest under the brim of the hat and a recip 
rocatory beater adapted to beat upon the up 
per surface of the hat-brim directly over said 
auxiliary brush, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
14. In a machine of the character described, 
a block having an outer surface, consisting 
of bristles or analogous brush-like material 
upon which the crown of the hat is supported, 
reciprocatory beaters adapted to beat upon 
the crown of said hat, an auxiliary brush 
adapted to rest under the brim of the hat, a 
reciprocatory beater adapted to beat upon the 
upper surface of the hat-brim directly above 
the auxiliary brush, means for rotating said 
block and hat, and means for operating the 
reciprocatory beaters during the rotation of 
the block and hat, substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
15. In a machine of the character described, 
a block having an outer surface of bristles 
upon which the hat is mounted, a series of 
rotary brushes adapted to brush the hat while 
the same is upon the block, means for oper 
ating said brushes, means for rotating said 
block and hat, and means for constantly Sup 
porting the rotating brushes against the brim 
and crown of the hat during the rotation of 
said hat, substantially as and for the pur 
poses described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my signature in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
CIAES ERIC WINTERROS. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS M. SMITH, 
RICHARD C. MAXWELL, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562157.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 562,157, 
 
W. E. SEANOR & D. A MoCASKILL. 
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
patented June 16, 1896. 
- - 
195eplers 
/Jova?a /10*CasACC 
af7%a- 3yt/eur Airpys. 716.40am // Seanor 
17%-41, 
62-6 
AMDREW s, GRAHAM.Photo-lito...washingto..bc. 
(No Model.) 
w 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. E. SEANOR & D. A. McCASKILL, 
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP, 
No. 562,157, 
 
Patented June 16, 1896. 
FG-3- 
SS :s 
e 
-ad.7%ao- Byz/?evi. A Flrpeys, 72077v AVASeavor 
papters 
Zezezed-A WSCzs/tz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM ELIHU SEANOR AND DONALD ANGUS McCASKILL OF LYTTON, 
CANADA. 
CENTRFUGAL PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,157, dated June 16, 1896. 
Application filed February 2, 1895, Serial No, 537,115, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM ELIHU 
SEANOR and DONALD ANGUSMCCASKILL, citi 
Zens of the United States, residing at Lytton, 
in the Province of British Columbia, Canada, 
have invented a new and useful Centrifugal 
Pump, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to centrifugalpumps; 
and it has for its object to provide a new and 
useful construction of pump of this character 
having a large capacity and powerful suction, 
whereby the same shall be especially adapted 
for use in connection with suction dredging 
and similar apparatus. 
With this and other objects in view, which 
will readily appear as the nature of the in 
vention is better understood, the same con 
sists in the novel construction, combination, 
and arrangement of parts hereinafter more 
fully described, illustrated, and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a top plan view 
of a centrifugal pump constructed in accord 
ance with this invention. Fig. 2 is a central 
vertical sectional view thereof. Fig. 3 is an 
enlarged detail sectional view of the valved 
outer end of one of the tubular wheel-arms. 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail sectional view of 
the foot-valve attachment for the suction 
pipe. Fig. 5 is a bottom plan view of the con 
struction illustrated in Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 is an 
enlarged detail sectional view of the tension 
regulating device. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 1. 
designates a supporting frame or stand con 
sisting of a series of inclined standards 2, pro 
vided at their lower ends with feet-flanges 3, 
that are adapted to be secured to a suitable 
supporting-base on which the pump is oper 
ated. The inclined supporting-standards 2 
of the frame or stand I support at their up 
per ends a horizontal stationary bearing-plate 
4, that is provided therein with a central bear 
ing-opening 5, and in its upper side with a cir 
cular groove or recess 6, to removably receive 
a grooved bearing-ring 7, that is arranged di 
rectly opposite and below an opposing ring 7, 
that is removably seated in the circular groove 
or recess S, formed in the lower side of the 
revolving bearing-collar 9, which works di 
rectly above the bearing-plate 4, and is Secured 
exteriorly on the vertical hub-pipe 10 of the 
revolving pump-wheel 11. A series of bear 
ing-balls 12 are interposed between the oppo 
site rings 7 and 7, and work in the grooves 
13 of said rings, and thereby complete a ball 
bearing supportfortherevolving pump-wheel 
11, that provides for the elevation and dis 
charge of liquids under the suction induced 
by the centrifugal action incident to the re 
volving of the wheel. 
The revolving pump-wheel 11 consists of a 
vertical hub-pipe 10 and diametrically oppo 
site tubular wheel-arms 14, projected outward 
from opposite sides and the upper end of the 
hub-pipe 10, with which said arms communi 
cate, and the latter, as well as the hub-pipe, 
is preferably truly cylindrical in shape, it 
being noted at this point that the hub-pipe 
10 of the wheel works in and extends below 
the central bearing-opening 5 of the stationary 
bearing-plate 4. The diametrically opposite 
tubular wheel-arms 14 are elliptically curved 
outward and upward from the upper end of 
the hub-pipe 10, and the sharpest curvature 
of the elliptic curve of said wheel-arms is at 
the inner ends of said arms where they merge 
into the upper end of the pipe 10, and by rea 
son of this curvature of the wheel-arms no 
material resistance is offered to Solid matter, 
such as stones and the like, as such solid mat 
ter passes from the central hub-pipe of the 
wheel into the wheel-arms to be discharged 
from the wheel as the said arms are revolved. 
In addition to the upward and outward el 
liptical curvature of the diametrically oppo 
site tubular wheel-arms 14 the said arms are 
radially curved horizontally with respect to 
the vertical disposition of the pipe 10, and in 
this disposition the said wheel-arms are re 
versely curved with respect to each other. 
The horizontal radial curvature of the Wheel 
arms provides for the discharge of the Water 
in a direction that will produce the greatest 
centrifugal action and insure a powerful suc 
tion within the wheel for the elevation and 
discharge of large quantities of Water, to 
gether with rock and any other foreign solid 
substances that are sufficiently small to pass 
through the pipe 10 and the arms 14. 
The wheel-arms 14 are preferably provided 
at their outer ends With a detachable tubular 
section 15, which admits of short sections of 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
75 
So 
90 
o 
35 
45 
piping being added to the arms 14, for the pur 
pose of regulating the length thereof, as may 
be found necessary or desirable; but whether 
the wheel-arms are or are not provided with 
the detachable end sections 15, one of which 
is illustrated in Fig. 3 of the drawings, the 
said wheel-arms are provided at their extreme 
outer discharging ends with the inclined 
alve-seats 16, provided in their faces with 
the packing-grooves 17, to receive suitable 
packing-rings 18, that project Out of the 
grooves and form air and water tight joints 
with the self-adjusting flap-valves 19, that 
are arranged to work automatically over the 
Outer inclined valve-seats 16, so as to raise 
and lower to accommodate the discharge of 
the pump to the flow of water, rock, or other 
material passing through the pump. 
The self-adjusting flap-valves 19 consist of 
Suitable plates of a size sufficient to inclose 
the Outer discharging ends of the wheel-arms, 
and said valves 19 have extended from the 
upper edges thereof the hinge-straps 20, that 
are connected at their ends to the pintles 21, 
fitted in the lugs 22, arranged at the upper 
side of the inclined valve-seat 16, at the outer 
end of the arms 14, and this hinge connection 
for the flap-valves allows the same to readily 
rise and lower over the inclined seats to ac 
Commodate the Water and other substances 
that are being discharged by the pump. The 
Said flap-valves are normally held closed on 
their seats by means of the valve-adjusting 
Springs 23. The valve-adjusting springs 23 
are secured fast at one end to the outer sides 
of the valves 19, by means of screws 24, and 
the free ends of said springs extend over the 
hinges for the valves and bear on the verti 
cally-adjustable rollers 25. The vertically 
adjustable rollers 25, that are arranged under 
the free ends of the springs 23, are mounted 
in bearing-frames 26, that are provided with 
socketed lower sides 27, loosely fitting over 
the upper ends of the stationary exteriorly 
threaded posts 28, that are also provided with 
Squared longitudinally-disposed sockets 29, 
to loosely receive the square sliding stems 30, 
projected from the under side of the bearing 
frames 26. Interiorly-threaded adjusting 
nuts 31 are arranged to work on the exteriorly 
threaded posts 28, under the bearing-frames 
26, to adjust the rollers 25 and provide for 
regulating the tension of the valve-adjusting 
springs 23. 
The pump-wheel II is given the necessary 
rotation through the medium of a drive-shaft 
32, Suitably attached at its lower end, as at 
33, to the center of the wheel at the top there 
of, and is mounted in suitably-arranged bear 
ings 34, between which is preferably located 
the band-pulley 35, that is mounted on the 
shaft and is adapted to receive the belt for 
transmitting motion to the wheel. The lower 
end of the vertical hub-pipe 10 of said pump 
Wheel is located below the stationary bear 
ing-plate 4, and turns within a stuffing-box 36, 
that is fitted on the upper end of the station 
ary suction-pipe 37. The upper end of the 
stationary suction-pipe 37 fits within the lower 
end of the hub-pipe 10, to provide a direct coln 
nection between the two pipes, and said sta 
tionary Suction-pipe 37 has fitted thereon an 
attaching-collar 3S, that is bolted or otherwise 
suitably secured to a supporting-bracket 39, 
arranged within and secured to the standards 
2 of the supporting frame or stand 1. 
The stationary suction-pipe 37 is extended 
by means of suitable pipe-sections, in the 
usual Way, to the point desired, and at its 
lower end the said pipe is provided with the 
attaching-flange 40, onto which is detachably 
bolted the upper flanged end of the foot-valve 
box. 41. At its upper end the interior diame 
ter of the foot-valve box. 41 agrees with the 
interior diameter of the suction-pipe 37, and 
at its lower inlet end 42 the interior diameter 
of the foot-valve box. 41 is slightly less than 
the interior diameter of the Suction-pipe, SO 
that rock and other substances too large to 
pass through the pump cannot enter into the 
suction-pipe. The foot-valve box. 41 is pref 
erably squared intermediate of its upper and 
lower ends to accommodate for movement 
therein the inwardly-opening foot-valve 43, 
that is hinged at one edge, as at 44, at one 
side of the box near the lower inner end 
thereof, and at the same side of the box to 
which the valve is hinged is located an in 
Wardly-projecting stop-lug 45, that forms a 
stop for the valve 43, when opened, and pre 
vents the valve from reaching a position from 
which it could not be returned to its seat. 
From the above it is thought that the con 
Struction, Operation, and many advantages 
of the herein-described centrifugal pump will 
be readily apparent without further descrip 
tion, and it will be understood that changes 
in the form, proportion, and the minor de 
tails of construction may be resorted to with 
out departing from the principle or sacrific 
ing any of the advantages of this invention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed, and desired to be secured by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a centrifugal pump, a revolving pump 
Wheel consisting of a central vertical hub 
pipe, and separate tubular wheel-arms pro 
jected outwardly from the upper end of said 
hub-pipe and provided at their outer ends 
With Valve-seats, self opening and closing flap 
Valves hinged to the wheel-arms and working 
Over the Valve-seats thereof, springs secured 
at One end to the valves and extending over 
the hinges of the latter, and adjusting de 
vices mounted on the wheel-arms and carry 
ing rollers bearing under the free ends of the 
Springs, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a centrifugal pump, a supporting frame 
or stand having an elevated stationary bear 
ing-plate provided with a bearing-opening 
therein, a revolving pump-wheel having a 
Vertical hub-pipe Working in and projected 
below the bearing-opening of said bearing 
plate, a stationary suction-pipe mounted with 
75 
So 
85 
O 
IO 
II5 
2 
562,157 
55 
 
562,157 
8 
in the frame or stand below the bearing-plate 
and having its upper extremity loosely fitting 
in the lower extremity of said hub-pipe, and 
a stuffing-box fitted on the upper end of the 
suction-pipe and loosely receiving the lower 
end of said hub-pipe, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. In a centrifugal pump, a revolving pump 
wheel consisting of a central hub-pipe, and 
separate tubular wheel-arms projected out 
wardly from said hub-pipe and provided at 
their outer ends with detachable sections hav 
ing inclined grooved valve-seats, packing fit 
ted in and projecting beyond the grooves in 
said valve-seats, self opening and closing 
hinged flap-valves arranged to Work over the 
inclined valve-seats, Valve-adjusting Springs 
secured fast at one end to the outer sides of 
the valves and extending over the hinges at 
the upper edges of the valves, stationary ex 
teriorly-threaded posts fitted on the wheel 
arms and provided with longitudinally-dis 
posed sockets, vertically-adjustable bearing 
frames carrying rollers bearing under the free 
ends of the springs, said bearing-frames work 
ing over said stationary posts and provided 
with stems sliding in the sockets of the posts, 
and adjusting-nuts mounted on the station 
ary posts under said bearing-frames, substan 
tially as set forth. 
IO 
25 
4. In a centrifugal pump, the combination 
of a supporting frame or stand having a sta 
tionary bearing-plate, a grooved bearing-ring 
removably fitted in said stationary bearing 
plate, a revolving pump-wheel having a ver 
tical hub-pipe projecting below the station 
alry bearing-plate, a bearing-collar fitted on 
said hub-pipe above the stationary bearing 
plate, a grooved bearing-ring removably fit 
ted in said collar opposite the bearing-ring 
of said bearing-plate, bearing-balls arranged 
in the grooves of and between said bearing 
rings, a stationary suction-pipe supported 
Within said frame or standinalinement with 
and fitting in the hub-pipe of the wheel, and 
a stuffing-box fitted on the upper end of said 
suction-pipe and receiving the lower end of 
said hub-pipe, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAMELIHU SEANOR. 
DONALD ANGUS MCCASKILI. 
Witnesses as to the signature of William 
35 
45 
Elihu Seanor: 
Witnesses for D. A. McCaskill: 
WM. C. HAYWOOD, 
W. L. LEONARD. 
E. E. SHERWOOD, 
C. H. PURCELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562257.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 562,257, 
2A 
ser-21 
O. H. P. G., SPENCER, 
CURTAIN OR SHADE FIXTURE, 
Patented June 16, 1896, 
| 9,14 
see 
| 
| 
23-, 
| 
| 
| 
|| || 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
2.2% 
Arwa. GRAAM.PhorchOWASiiri GTON.D.C. 
INVENTOR 
aew 
ATIORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIVER H. P. G. SPENCER, OF MOUNT CARMEL, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TQ WILLIAM GRANT BAYLEY AND WILLIAM MORRISON 
QUINN, OF SAME PLACE. 
CURTAN OR SHADE FIXTURE. 
SPECIEICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,257, dated June 16, 1896. 
Application filed January 28, 1896, Serial No. 577,163, (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
35 
window. The lower bracket A comprises a 
To a ZZ whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, OLIVER H. P. G. SPEN- base 10, having a web 11 extending practically 
CER, of Mount Carmel, in the county of Wa- from its outer face, the web being at a right 
angle to the base; and preferably both the 
bash and State of Illinois, have invented a 
upper and the lower edges of the said web are 
new and useful Improvement in Curtain or 
inclined in opposite directions, whereby the 
Shade Fixtures, of which the following is a 
web is rendered more or less triangular, and 
full, clear, and exact description. 
the base is provided with openings 12 for the 
The invention relates to curtain and shade 
reception of screws or otherfastening devices. 
fixtures; and the object of the invention is to 
At opposite sides of the upper portion of 
provide a fixture which will consist of two 
the web 11 preferably dovetail-shaped slide 
separable brackets, one adapted for support 
ways 13 are formed, the said slideways hav 
ing the shade-roller and the other for sup 
porting a curtain-pole or the equivalent there 
ing a downward and in Ward inclination, and 
being located ordinarily adjacent to the base, 
of; and a further object of the invention is 
as shown in Fig. 4. At the apex of the Web 
to provide a means whereby the bracket for 
11 a knob 14 or its equivalent is usually 
the curtain-pole may be placed in such posi 
formed, or an arm may be substituted for the 
tion over the bracket adapted for the shade 
said knob; and this knob is provided with a 
roller that the curtain will naturally fall out 
longitudinal opening 15, extending through 
side of the shade-roller and will therefore not 
from side to side, while a set-screw 16 is lo 
interfere with the shade. 
cated in the top of the knob, entering the re 
Another object of the invention is to con 
cess 15. 
struct a combined curtain and shade fixture 
The bracket A is adapted to support a fix 
in a simple, durable, and economic manner, 
ture for the Window - shade roller. The 
and whereby also the fixture may be applied 
bracket B (shown in detailin Fig. 3) is adapted 
to any window-frame, whether plain or orna 
to carry the fixture intended to support one 
mental. 
end of a curtain-pole. The bracket B pref 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
erably comprises an upwardly and forwardly 
vide for the adjustability of the fixtures, so 
curved body 16, having its under face 17 in 
that a shade or a curtain-pole, whether of 
clined to correspond to the inclination of the 
greater or of lesslength than the width of the 
top of the Web 11 of the lower bracket A, 
window, may be readily utilized without cut 
with which surface the base of the upper 
ting or building up the shade-roller or the 
bracket is adapted for engagement; and at 
curtain-pole. 
the base or lower portion of the aforesaid up 
The invention consists in the novel con 
per bracket tWO studs or tongues 18 are down 
struction and combination of the several 
Wardly projected, being so arranged that when 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
the base of the bracket Bisin proper position 
and pointed out in the claims. 
upon the top of the web of the lower bracket 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
A the tongues 18 will enter the grooves 13 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in the aforesaid Web, as shown in Fig. 2. 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
The upper end of the body 16 of the upper 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
bracket is preferably made to terminate in a 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a portion of 
knob 19 or its equivalent, in which an open 
a window-frame, illustrating the application 
ing or recess 20 is made, extending through 
of the improved fixture thereto. Fig. 2 is an 
from side to side, and a set-screw 21 is located 
end view of one of the improved fixtures; and 
in the upper end of the said knob 19, entering 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the two brack 
ets of a fixture, illustrating the said brackets 
the slot 20 in the same. 
A curtain-fixture 22, adapted to receive a 
as separated one from the other. 
trunnion of the curtain-roller 25, is preferably 
In carrying out the invention two brackets 
secured upon one end of a rod 23, and the 
A and B are employed for each side of the 
o 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
562,257 . 
if the curtain-bracket is not needed it may be 
quickly disengaged or disconnected from the 
shade-bracket without detracting from the 
appearance of the fixture as a whole. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
The combination, with a bracket adapted 
for attachment to a widow-frame, the bracket 
having slideways formed in its sides and a 
socket at one of its ends, and an upper bracket 
having tongues adapted to enter the slides in 
the first or lower.bracket, the upper bracket 
being provided with a socket adapted to ex 
tend over and beyond the socket of the lower 
bracket, of a slide having movement in the 
socket of the lower bracket, and provided 
with a shade-roller fixture, a second slidehav 
ing movement in the socket of the upper 
bracket, and provided with a fixture adapted 
for the support of a curtain-pole, and locking 
devices carried by the brackets and engaging 
with their slides, substantially as shown and 
for the purpose specified. 
35 
45 
OLIVER II. P. G. SPENCER. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE P. RAMSEY, 
LYMAN LEEDS. 
- 
said rod is held to slide in the opening 15 
made in the knob of the lower bracket A; and 
the said opening is ordinarily made rectangul 
lar or polygonal in cross-section, as is like 
wise the rod 23. 
Ahanger 24, preferably of segmental form, 
is secured to the end of the rod 25, and this 
rod is made to enter the opening 20 in the 
upper end of the upper bracket B, the fix 
tures being adjacent to the outer face of each 
of the brackets. 
The rods of the fixtures are held in the 
proper position in the brackets by the set 
screws 16 and 21, so that after the brackets 
are placed in position the rods may be shifted 
inward or outward according as the length of 
the curtain-pole or the shade-roller may de 
mand. The shade 26 drops down from the 
roller 25 in the usual manner, and the cur 
tain 28 is secured to the curtain-pole by rings 
or any other desired way, and drops from the 
pole 27 against the inner surface of the shade 
or curtain on the shade -roller, and hangs 
some distance from the shade, as shown in 
Fig. 2. 
Only the lower brackets. A need be secured 
to the Window-frame, and consequently the 
frame will not be lacerated or marred by the 
insertion of numerous fastening devices, and 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562357.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
F, G, DAWIS, 
WEHICLE AXLE, 
No. 562,357. 
Patented June 16, 1896. 
 
SSS S 
SS 
& S> b 
 
AZZZZZZZZZZZZZ % 
N 27 N N 
Z 
2% NS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS G. DAVIS, OF WATERTOWN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE H. H. 
BABCOCK COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
VEHICLE-AXLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,357, dated June 16, 1896. 
- 
Application filed July 14, 1894. Serial No. 517,526, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, FRANCIS G. DAVIS, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at War 
tertown, in the county of Jefferson and State 
5 of New York, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Vehicle-Axles, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to that class of ve 
hicle-axles which are provided with a sand 
Io band or collar which projects into an annu 
lar groove formed in the rear end of the hub. 
The invention has the object to provide sim 
ple and efficient means for excluding, so far 
as possible, dirt, sand, &c., from said groove 
I5 and from the bearing-surfaces of the axle 
and box and for removing from said groove 
any dirt, sand, &c., which may enter the 
Sale. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
20 a vertical longitudinal section of the end por 
tion of an axle provided with my improve 
ments and the hub mounted thereon. Fig. 2 
is a bottom plan view thereof. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
A represents the body of the axle, B the 
axle arm or spindle, and C the annular sand 
band or collar formed integrally with the axle 
and axle-arm at the junction of these parts. 
3o D represents the hub provided with the usual 
bearing-box. d, and E represents the screw 
nut which is applied to the threaded ende of 
the axle-arm and holds the hub on the latter. 
The sand-band C has an outwardly-over 
35 hanging annular flange c, which projects into 
an annular groove f, formed in the rear end 
of the hub outside of the inner end of the 
bearing-box d. This annular flange c is cy 
indrical on its outer and inner sides and the 
groove fin the hub has the same form and is 
4O entirely filled by said flange, whereby the 
latter excludes sand, dirt, water, &c., from 
the groove and from the bearing-surfaces of 
the box and axle-arm as far as possible. This 
45 flange c is provided on its under side with a 
25 in both figures.. 
. 
I claim as my invention 
The combination with the axle and the 75 
spindle, of a sand-band formed integrally 
therewith, having an outwardly-overhanging 
cylindrical flange which has a vertical outer 
face and in its lower portion a clearing-notch, 
the latter extending obliquely inwardly from 8o 
said vertical face and having its inner por 
tion flaring downwardly and its vertical rear 
edge projecting outwardly beyond the flat 
face of the band, substantially as set forth. 
Witness my hand this 3d day of July, 1894. 85 
clearing-notch g, through which any sand or 
dirt which works into the groove if 
can be 
discharged therefrom. This notch is ar 
ranged obliquely in the vertical face of the 
flange.c, so as to slaintforwardly, and the rear 5o 
edge h of the notch, toward which the hub 
turns when the wheel turns forwardly, pro 
jects slightly beyond the front edge h", so as 
to form a cutter or scraper which detaches 
any dirt or other solid matter in the groove 55 
and causes the same to be discharged through 
the rear portion of the notch which opensbe 
yond the inner end of the hub. This cutter 
Will also cut its own way into the hub and 
form the annular groove in the same, if de- 6o 
sired. The sand-band being formed integrally 
with the axle and spindle, and the clearing 
notch and cutter being formed in this sand 
band, these devices are securely and perma 
nently attached to the axle and not liable to 65 
change their position or become loose. 
The inner or discharge end portion of the 
clearing-notch is made flaring downwardly, 
as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, so that the sand or 
other material is readily moved toward this 7o 
end of the notch by the oblique side of the 
notch and can readily drop out when it 
reaches this portion of the notch. 
FRANCIS G. DAVIS. 
Witnesses: . 
W. R. SASSER, 
LOUISE SEIPEL. 
- 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562457.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM CHRISTIAN, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
THIRD TO ISAAC GASTON, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. 
CAR-FENDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,457, dated June 23, 1896, 
Application filed 0ctober 7, 1895,  Serial No, 564862, (No model.) 
To all avhom, it 7may concern: 
Be it known that II, WILLIAM CHRISTIAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
East Orange, in the county of Essex, in the |} 
State of New Jersey, have invented certain 
meW and useful Improvements in Car-Fen 
ders, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming partithereof, in which simi 
lar letters of reference indicate correspond 
ing partS. 
This invention relates to fenders or guards 
for tramway-cars, and the object thereof is 
tO provide an effective device of this class 
Which is simple in construction and operation, 
and Well adapted to accomplish the result for 
which it is intended. 
My improved fender or guard comprises a 
stationary frame, which is suitably supported 
below the platform of a car, and a sliding 
frame or fender, which is mounted thereon 
and adapted to be projected in front of the 
car, and to be withdrawn beneath the plat 
form thereof, when desired, and the invention 
is fully disclosed in the following specifica 
tion, of Which the accompanying drawings 
form a part, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of a portion of one 
end of a car and the platform thereof, show 
ing my improved fender or guard connected 
therewith, parts of the construction being 
shown in section; Fig. 2, a plan view of my 
improved fender or guard, showing also the 
means for connecting it with the truck-frame 
of the car; and Fig. 3, a section on the line 
3 3 of Fig. 2, the platform of the car and the 
rods by which the stationary frame of the fen 
der is supported being omitted. 
In the drawings forming part of this appli 
cation, A represents the platform of a car, 
B the dashboard thereof, and C the part of 
the truck-frame which preferably comprises 
the side bars C and the end cross-bar C', as 
shown in Fig. 2. 
In the practice of my in vention, I pivotally 
COnnect With the for Ward end of the truck 
frame a statio?ary frame D, which comprises 
side bars d and a rear cross-bar d'. The side 
bal's d, are composed, preferably, of angle-iron, 
and the frame D is pivotally connected with 
the truck-frame at E, and the forward end 
 
I 5 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
thereof is supported by means of cross-rods 
IF, which are pivotally connected therewith, 
and connected with the * end of the truck 
frame, as clearly shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
Mounted in the side bars d of the station 
alry frame D is a cross-rod or shaft G, on which 
is mounted a pulley g, and mounted in hang 
ers at the rear end of the platform and above 
the rear connection of the frame D is a pul 
ley g, and a similar pulley g is mounted be 
low the forward end of the platform and im 
mediately under or within a slot g4, formed 
therein. 
The sliding frame H, or fender proper, is 
composed of sidebars hand cross-barsh', and 
said side bars are provided with longitudinal 
slots h, adapted to receive the base-plate d 
of the side bars d of the stationary frameD, 
as clearly shown in Fig. 3, and the said slid 
ing frame H is proyided at the forward end 
thereof with an enlarged section IK, the sides 
thereof being extended, as shown at ki, and 
curved in any desired manner, the object of 
the en larged or widened portion being to ex 
tend the frame even with or beyond the sides 
of the car. 
The central portion L of the front end K 
of the sliding frame H is composed of wire 
mesh, or similar material, and I also prefer 
ably secure to the forward-end of the platform 
a frame M, the back of which is composed of 
wire mesh or similar material, and the front 
of which is provided with upholstery m, or 
otherwise padded, as may be desired. 
Secured to the forward cross-rod h of the 
sliding frame HI is a strong spiral spring N, 
one end of which is secured to the rear cross 
rod d' of the stationary frame D, and secured 
to the rear cross-rod h of the sliding frame II, 
and preferably, near the middle thereof, is a 
cord, rope, cable, or chain O, which passes 
around the pulley g, backwardly around.the 
pulley g, and thence forward and around the 
pulley g, and upwardly through the slot g 
in the platform of the car, and the end thereof 
is provided with a ring or loop O', which is 
adapted to be connected with a hook or projec 
tion O, connected with the platform of the 
car, and pivotally connected with the dash 
board of the car, and adjacent to the dash 
board B, is a crank-lever P, which extends 
. 
95 
COCO 
562,457 
upwardly and is provided with a Slot (not 
shown) through which the hook, or projection 
passes, and the other end of said crank-lever 
IP projects backwardly, as shown at P", and 
is adapted to be operated by foot, So aS tO 
cause the lever P to throw off the ring Orloop ; 
O' from the hook or projection O in the eop 
eration of the device, as hereinafter described. 
The operation will be readily understood 
from the foregoing description when taken 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ingS. 
The sliding frame HI or fender proper 
is projected in front of the car by pitulling On 
the rope or chain. O from the platform thereof, : 
and it is retained in the projected position by 
means of thering orloop O', whichis connected 
with the hook or projection 0 for this pur 
pose,and wheneveritis desired that the sliding 
frame H be withdrawn beneath the platform : 
the said ring or loop 0 is - detached from the 
hook or projection "O, either by hand or by : 
the "crank-lever P, and the spring N Will at 
once withdraw the "sliding frame beneath the 
platform, as will be readily understood. 
The lower part of the forward end K of the 
sliding frame H is provided at each side with . 
a curved plate-spring 'K', said spring being 
adapted to come in contact with the ground 
or with the rails of the track, and to form i 
buffers or supports for the "sliding frame if a 
person or object should be struck thereby 
when the caris in motion, and it will be readily 
understood that if a person - or object should : 
be struck by my improved fender or guard 
When the car is in motion said person or - ob 
ject will be received upon the projected end 
K' of the Sliding frame I, and the passing of 
said person or object beneath the car will be 
thus prevented. 
The object of the upholstery or packing fm, . 
is to prevent the injury of the person, if 
thrown against the end of the platform, and 
it Will thus be seen that I accomplish the ob 
ject of my invention by means of a device 
Whichis simplein construction and operation, 
While being at the same time comparatively 
inexpensive. 
My invention is not limited to the exact 
form, construction, andarrangement of parts 
shown and described, and I therefore reserve 
the right to make allsuch alterations therein 
and modifications thereofas fairly come with 
in the scope of the invention. 
Having fully "described my invention, I 
claim and - desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The combination with the platform of the 
car- of a guard or fender consisting of a sta 
tionary frame formed of side bars having 
flanges and a rear cross-bar, and which is piv 
oted to the truck of the car, the "same being 
supported by cross-rods connecting the front 
thereof With "said truck, a sliding fender se 
i cured to said stationary frame composed of 
side and cross bars, the former having longi 
tudinal slots to : engage the flanges upon the 
O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
45 
55 
65 
side bars of the stationary frame, saidfender 
| being provided at the forward end thereof 
with an enlarged section, the side bars of 
} which are extended beyond the sides of the 
car, the centralportion of which is composed 
of Wire mesh and means for moving the fen 
der before or beneath the -car, substantially 
aS described. 
2. The combination with the platform of a 
car of a guard or fender consisting of a Sta 
tionary frame formed of side bars having 
flanges and a rear cross-bar and Which is piV 
oted to the truck of the car, the same being 
supported by cross-rods connecting the front 
thereof with said truck, a sliding fender Se 
cuired to said stationary frame composed of 
side and cross bars, the former having longi 
tudinal slots to engage the flanges upon the 
side bars of the stationary frame, said fender 
| being provided at the forward end thereof 
with an is enlarged section, the side bars of 
which are extended beyond the sides of the 
car, the central portion of which is composed 
| of wire mesh and a frame, the back composed 
of wire mesh, the front being padded, secured 
to the platform above the fender and means 
for moving the fender before or beneath the 
car, Substantially as described. 
3. The combination with the platform Of a 
car of a guard or fender-consisting of a sta 
tionary frame formed of side bars having 
fianges and a rear cross-bar, and which is piv 
oted to the truck of the car, the same being 
supported by cross-rods connecting the front 
thereof with said truck, a sliding fender Se 
cuired to said stationary frame composed of 
side and cross bars, the former having longi 
tudinal slots to engage the flanges upon the 
side bars of the stationary frame, said fender 
being provided at the forward end thereof 
with an i enlarged section, the side bars of 
which are extended beyond the sides of the 
car, the central portion of which is composed 
of wire mesh and a frame the back composed 
of wire mesh, the front being padded, secured 
to the platform above the fender said frame 
having a cross-rod carrying a pulley, a pulley 
mounted in hangers upon the rear end of the 
platform, another pulley upon the forward 
end of the platform beneath a slot formed 
therein, a cord connected to the rear cross-rod 
of said frame and passing over said pulleys 
and removably connected to the dashboard of 
the car, a spring connected to the cross-rod 
of the fender and to the rear CrOSS-rod of the 
frame to draw the formerbeneath the car and 
a crank-lever to release the cord, Substan 
tially as i described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 2d day 
of October, 1895. 
WWIITLILIAM CHRISTIAN. 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
CC 
I O 
I 2 O 
I 25 
Witnesses: 
JOHN M. ARTHUR, 
CHAS. E. METZ. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562557.txt	(No Model.) 
O. W. SCHAUM. 
SHEDDING MECHANISM FOR LOOMS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1 
No. 562,557, 
A. 
Patented June 23, 1896. 
14 Yi 
a Baaaaaaz 
- 
HE ill it 
zyggyTyuya 
AIELIHEH 
t NT H. I Tintinuit 
Hist 
 
    
 
 
  
 
      
22 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
Arzasses/ 
6a, 7 (0.4. 
4, 
2. 
26-27 
s 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 562,557. 
O. W. SCHAUM. 
SHEDDING MECHANISM FOR LOOMS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented June 23, 1896. 
6-7 a. 
32C. 
M22A772/7/ 
G2a4- (2) &eAaaaad 
 
ANDREW a GRAHAM Photo-Litho.washington oc 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OTTO. W. SCHAUM, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SHEDDING MECHANISM FOR LOOMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,557, dated June 23, 1896, 
Application filed March 5, 1894, Serial No. 502,365. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, OTTOW. SCHAUM, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Phila 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia, in the 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Shedding 
Mechanism for Looms, of which the following 
is a true description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part thereof. 
My invention relates to shedding mechan 
ism for looms, and has for its object, first, to 
provide an apparatus of the dobby type 
wilerein the needles for actuating the hooks 
will be supported on broad bearings without 
necessitating any increase in the breadth of 
the machine; also, to guide the levers with 
which the machine is provided, so as to keep 
them exactly in place, and in general to im 
prove the construction of this class of devices. 
To these ends my invention consists in pro 
viding the levers which support the needles 
with platforms which are of greater width than 
the normal width of the levers, and prefer 
ably so arranged that the platform. On one le 
ver is behind the platform on the next lever 
of the series; also, in arranging guides at both 
the front and the back of the levers, and also 
in various improvements in the construction 
of the machine, which will be more particu 
larly pointed outin claims which areappended 
to and form part of this specification. 
Myinvention will be best understood as ex 
plained in connection with the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a shedding 
mechanism or dobby provided with my im 
provements. Fig. 2 is a frontelevation of the 
apparatus shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an en 
larged side view of one of the jacks, showing 
my improved means of securing the levers 
thereto. Fig. 4 is a front view of several of 
the jacks shown in Fig. 3, showing them ar 
ranged side by side and illustrating the im 
proved bearing. Fig. 5 is a section on the 
line at ac of Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a view of the 
usual mode of pivoting the levers and jacks 
together, taken on a section-line correspond 
ing to that on which Fig. 5 is taken, to be 
used in comparison with that figure. Fig. 7 
is a top view of several of the needle-levers 
on an enlarged scale. Fig. 8 is a side view of 
one of these levers. Fig. 9 is a top view of 
one of the guide-boards for the needles, show 
ing the mode of arranging the guide-holes. 
Fig. 10 is a top view of levers similar to those 
shown in Fig. 7, illustrating a modification; 
and Fig. 11 is a side view of several of these 
levers. 
T is a frame on which is supported the op 
erative parts of the shedding mechanism or 
dobby. 
A are jacks having notches a, by which 
they are pivoted on studs t, secured to the 
frame, and having notches a', in which are 
secured cords c, which connect the jacks with 
the harness. 
'B are jack-levers pivoted to the jacks A. 
H' Hare hooks connected to the top and 
bottomb' b of the levers B. 
K" Kare reciprocating knives which are 
adapted, when the hooks are in the proper 
position, to engage thereWith and operate the 
jacks, and through them the harness. 
G' G are guides for the knives K. K. 
These knives may be operated in any conven 
ient way. I have shown them connected by 
means of rods k to levers K, which are se 
cured to a shaft k', which is pivoted in the 
frame of the machine. 
k is an arm connecting one of the levers K 
to some operative part of the machine by 
means of a rod k. An arm K, I have also 
shown as pivoted to one of the levers K, which 
arm is provided with a pawl k. This arm is 
adapted to engage with a ratchet K'. 
K is a cylinder connected to and operated 
by the ratchet K and carries the pattern 
blocks or cards K, which constitute the indi 
cator mechanism. 
It is, of course, evident that any other 
means for operating the knives may be used, 
if desired. 
To decrease the wear of the pivotal connec 
tion between the levers B and jacks A, and 
also to insure that these levers cannot be 
pulled out of their place, I provide the piv 
otal connection with a wide bearing. 
a is a pivot-hole, preferably formed in the 
arm A', as shown, and B'is a pivot-stud adapt 
led to have a bearing in the hole a'. 
In Fig. 6 I have illustrated the usual mode 
of arranging the pivot and pivot-hole, (here 
lettered B" and ES it will be seen that the 
- 
9o 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
562,55? 
O 
bearing for the 
width of the arm A', and that any force, as 
that of the hooks which draw the lever in the 
direction indicated by the arrow, will have a 
tendency to pull the lever out of engagement 
With the jack. 
In my improved arrangement I make the 
pivot B of a width equal to the sum of the 
Widths of the jack and lever, and provide a 
bearing-piece A, which, with the pivot-hole, 
forms a bearing-surface of a width equal to 
that of the pivot-studB'. The bearing-piece 
A is placed in the construction shown in 
front of the pivot-hole a, so as to increase 
the bearing on the side of the hole which is 
pressed against the supporting-pin B' by the 
Weight of the harness. 
When the jacks are arranged side by side, 
as shown in Fig. 4, the bearing-pieces A*sub 
stantially fill up the space between the jacks, 
So that the levers will have no tendency to 
rattle loose, and the wear, of course, will be 
reduced on account of the increased surface 
and there will be no tendency to pull out. I 
also prefer to arrange wings a on one or both 
sides of the jacks A to space them. These 
Wings I prefer to make curved and as parts 
of a circle whose center is the pivot-rod i. 
To guide the levers E, which are adapted 
to raise and lower the needles N and through 
them the hooks H'H', which are connected to 
the needle by means of eyes in n, I provide 
a series of guides , both at the front end e 
and at the rear end e' of said levers. These 
guides I preferably form as a reed R, 7' r be 
ing tWO rods in which are secured strips of 
thin metal r, which serve to space and guide 
the levers. 
I preferably secure the lower rod in a clamp 
R", which is secured to the frame T. 
By having the guides secured together by 
the rods r'n', which form a frame for the 
strips r, the guides can be shifted one Way 
or the other to adjust the position of the le 
Vers, as may be necessary. 
It Will be noted that by securing the needles 
and hooks positively together, as by passing 
the hooks through eyes in the needles, the 
hooks will be better operated and prevented 
from jumping, and also that the weight of the 
needle Will aid in drawing down the hook to 
its normal position when released by the indi 
cator mechanism. 
Heretofore, in devices of this class, where 
needles or rods were operated by a series of 
levers, it has either been necessary to use 
very small needles or provide comparatively 
broad levers, so that the needle or rod will 
always be engaged by the one lever which is 
adapted to operate it. 
If broad levers are employed, a dobby 
having the usual number of jacks is of ne 
Cessity made very broad and becomes un 
Wieldy. By my invention, however, a narrow 
dobby can be employed while the needles, 
which can be made of sufficiently large wire 
to be stiff, are provided with an ample bear. 
pivot-stud B7 is simply the ling on the levers. This I accomplish by pro 
viding the levers with platforms of greater 
width than the thin pieces of metal of which 
said level's usually consist, and in order that 
the levers may be arranged close together I 
prefer to arrange the platform on One lever 
behind the platform of the next lever of the 
SeleS. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 7, the 
platforms are formed by turning the metal 
of the lever obliquely, as shown, and forming 
a platform e' of a width substantially double 
the normal width of the lever. 
The next lever of the series has its plat 
form arranged farther front than the plat 
form on the first lever, and so on for a cer 
tain number of levers, four in the arrange 
ment shown, the part e of the platform and 
the rear end e' of one lever being behind the 
main front part e of the next lever and so on, 
whereby a bearing of twice the width is pro 
vided and yet the thickness of the levers is 
the same as before. 
In Figs. 10 and 11 I have illustrated another 
mode of constructing the levers E, so that the 
broad bearing will be afforded the needles 
and so that the levers can be assembled, if 
anything, more compactly than in the air 
rangement shown in Figs. 7 and S. The 
platforms e are formed of small pieces, cast 
with or otherwise secured to the levers, and 
may be, as shown, three times the width of 
the levers, thus permitting very narrow le 
vers to be used and still provide ample bear 
ings for the needles. 
To provide a space on which the platforms 
on neighboring levers can move freely, I cut 
out suitable spaces ein the levers, as shown, 
to accommodate the platforms on neighbor 
ing levers. 
The needles N are of course arranged in 
oblique lines corresponding to the position of 
the platforms, and to guide the needles I pro 
vide two boards or plates DD", having holes 
d, through which the needles are adapted to 
pass, as seen in Fig. 2. These holes d are ar 
ranged in oblique lines N', as shown in Fig. 9. 
To prevent the needles from jumping up out 
of place, a plate or board Disarranged over 
the upper board D and serves as a stop for 
the needles. 
In operation the arm IK is constantly being 
reciprocated by means of the rodland crank 
l, and reciprocates the knives KIK and op 
erates the indicator mechanism. K. The in 
dicator raises the front end of certain of the 
levers E, which are pivoted at e on a rod i, 
and so operate to drop the corresponding 
needles and move their hooks into the path 
of the knives. 
The levers E can be adjusted by shifting 
the reeds R, if necessary, and are guided 
very exactly by these reeds. The needles N 
are provided with a broad bearing on the le 
vers and are held in place by the perforated 
boards D and D' and prevented from jump 
ing out of their place by the plate D. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
9o 
95 
OO 
IIC) 
II5 
I 25 
 
562,55? 
- 
3. 
provided with a platform of greater width. 
than the normal width of the lever, said plat 
forms being arranged at different relative po 
sitions on adjoining levers so as not to inter 
fere with each other, a series of needles each 
of which is adapted to rest on one of the plat 
forms and be actuated by the lever to which 
its supporting-platform is secured and a suit 
able indicator mechanism for controlling the 
movement of the levers. 
5. In a shedding mechanism of the dobby 
type the combination with a series of needles, 
of a series of levers, each provided with a plat 
form, e, of greater width than the normal 
width of the lever, the platforms on adjoining 
levers being arranged at different relative po 
sitions thereon so as not to interfere with each 
other, and each serving to support a needle, 
a guide end e' extending back from the plat 
form and a suitable indicator mechanism for 
controlling the movement of the levers ex 
tending back from the platform on each lever. 
OTTO. W. SCHAUM. 
Witnesses: 
ARF. H. FABER, 
EDWARD F. AYRES. 
35 
45 
- 
- 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In shedding mechanism for looms, a jack 
A having a lever B pivoted thereto, the pivot 
connecting the jack and lever having a bear 
ing of a width, substantially equal to the 
sum of the widths of the jack and lever. 
2. In shedding mechanism for looms a jack 
A having a pivot-hole C, a lever B having a 
pivot B adapted to fit in the pivot-hole a, 
and a bearing-piece A* on the jack A of sub 
stantially the same width as the lever B, 
whereby an extended bearing of substan 
tially the same width as the combined width 
of the jack and lever is provided. . 
3. In shedding mechanism for looms a jack 
A, an arm A' extending from said jack, a 
pivot-hole ain said arm A', a lever Bhaving 
a pivot B adapted to fit in the pivot-hole a 
and a bearing-piece A* on the arm. A? of the 
jack of substantially the same width as the 
lever B, whereby an extended bearing of sub 
stantially the same width as the combined 
width of the jack and lever is provided. 
4. In a shedding mechanism of the dobby 
type the combination of a series of levers each 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562657.txt	(No Model.) 
J. PHILIPPSOHN. 
CIOTH CUTTING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet l, 
No. 562,657, 
Patented June 23, 1896. 
 
I 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
i 
2W2aesses : 
aer W2ae. 
'u fawe- 
/ec ?32.tra, 
6/4, 
%22%26 
a/Zelazee/ 
AN REW B.G.Ratank. Photo-urid. Washingtoxic 
(No Model.) 
No. 562,657. 
J. PHILIPPSOHN, 
CLOTH CUTTING MACHINE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 23, 1896, 
/2 
Nzzzzzzzzzzz? 
2% esses. 
Adeer 
/22/ear: 
%code/22erve ge/27 
 
zeerage 
ANDREW 3.GRAHAM, Photo-utiowash NGod.bc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB PHILIPPSOHN, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
CLOTH- CUTTING MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,657, dated June 23, 1896. 
Application filed August 9, 1895, Serial No, 558,750, (No model.) 
o 
To all, Luhon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JACOB PHILIPPSOFIN, a 
subject of the IKing of Prussia, German Em 
peror, and a resident of Berlin, in the King 
dom of Prussia, German Empire, have in 
vented a new and useful Improved Cloth-Cut 
ting Apparatus, of which the following is an 
exact specification. 
This invention refers to cloth-cutting ma 
chines in which a number of superposed layers 
of stuff is cut by means of a rotary cutter. 
My improvements in machines of said sort 
relate to the combination of said rotary cut 
ter with a vertically-reciprocating cutter hav 
ing its cutting edge on its lower end. This re 
ciprocating cutter is arranged adjacent to the 
rotary cutter and moves in a plane parallel 
to the plane of rotation of said rotary cutter. 
The purpose of my improvements is to do 
away with the necessity of raising the layer 
of stuff against the vertical front portion of 
the rotary cutter at the end of each cut, and 
to effect in lieu thereof the cutting of the re 
maining uncut portions (which, in conse 
quence of the circular shape of the rotary 
cutter, increase in length from the top layer 
to the bottom layers) by means of said second 
cutter. 
In order to make my invention more clear, 
Irefer to the accompanying drawings,in which 
similar letters denote similar parts through 
out the different views, and in which 
Figure I is a front view of my improved 
cloth-cutting apparatus. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
section through the same and showing the left 
hand portion thereof; and Fig. 3 is an outer 
view of a portion of the handle, also seen 
from the right-handside with regard to Fig.1. 
The tube ct, which connects the upper cas 
inga' with the lower casing a, embraces a ring 
l, furnished with an inner flange b'. Said 
flange takes into a corresponding groove of a 
sleevec, carrying at its upper end the bevel 
wheel d, and at its lower end the bevel-wheel 
e. The sleeve c may be displaced upon the 
shaft, f, with which it is connected by feather 
and groove. For that purpose the ring b is 
furnished with a pin b', which takes through 
a cut-out C of Z-like configuration provided 
in the tube Ct. and the handle g. Owing to 
the special configuration of said cut-out, the 
pin b, and with it the sleeve c, with its two 
bevel-wheels, may be adjusted and fixed in 
two positions. 
If the ring b is in the position shown in the 
drawings, the bevel-wheele gears with a simi 
lar wheel i, secured to the shaft k. The lat 
ter carries, moreover, a cog-wheel l, which is 
in gear with a cog-wheel m, fixed to the shaft 
in. This shaft projects through the front 
wall of the casing a, and operates the ro 
tary cutter o. 
If, however, the sleeve c is 
in its upper position, the bevel-wheel d gears 
with a similar wheelp, fixed to the shaft q. 
The latter carries at its front end the crank 
disk r, which is connected with the lever S by 
the connecting-rod i. Said lever is at One end 
hinged to the link it, attached to the cap o' 
for the rotary cutter, and is at the other end 
connected with the vertically-reciprocating 
cutter n, which latter is arranged within a 
guide it, hinged to a projecting arm ac of the 
casing a'. The pin or bolt connecting the 
levers with the vertically-reciprocating cut 
ter passes through a slot of the guide l'. 
It will thus be seen that there is a coupling 
established either between the bevel-wheels 
e and i, or between the bevel-wheels d and p, 
and that there is operated in the first case the 
rotary or main cutter o, and in the second 
case the reciprocating or auxiliary knife 2. 
As the shaft f does not cease rotating dur 
ing the shifting of the sleeve c, there is a pos 
sibility that the teeth of one or the other pair 
of wheels may get broken on coming in con 
tact with each other. In order to obviate 
such an occurrence, I have devised the fol 
lowing arrangement: 
The naves of the bevel-wheels in question 
are furnished with frictional disks p', d', e', 
and i', respectively, one or the other pair of 
which comes on the displacement of the sleeve 
c in contact prior to the contact between the 
respective bevel-wheels, and the bevel-wheels 
to be driven are thus caused to rotate before 
said latter contact occurs. The frictional 
disks to be driven are, as a matter of course, 
of greater diameter than the driving-disks, 
and the rotation of the former commences 
thus with a comparatively slow velocity, but 
becomes quickly faster and faster on the grow 
ing approach of the respective two bevel 
wheels. In a short time the rotary velocity 
of these two wheels is exactly the same, and 
they may then be brought into gear with each 
other without any fear of break. 
The frictional disks need not indispensably 
be fixed to, or made integrally with, the naves 
40 
So 
55 - 
to 
90 
CO 
IOS 
562,657 
O 
of the bevel-wheels, but may be loosely ar 
ranged upon said naves, and combined with 
a loose or fast india-rubber disk, such as , 
Supported by an auxiliary frictional disk *. 
The latter is firmly connected with the nave 
of the respective bevel-wheel, and, further, 
the frictional surface of the disks p', &c., 
need not be perfectly even, but may have an 
annular groove, such as p, annihilating the 
friction as soon as the respective bevel-wheels 
are in proper gear. 
Having thus fully described the nature of 
this invention, what I desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States is 
1. In a cloth-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the rotary cutter, and means for 
operating the same, of a vertically-recipro 
cating cutter having its cutting edge on its 
I lower end; such reciprocating cutter being 
adjacent to, and moving in a plane parallel 
to the plane of rotation of the rotary cutter, 
and means for operating Such reciprocating 
cutter independently of the rotary cutter, as 
set forth. 
2. In a cloth-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the rotary cutter, and means for 
operating the same, of a vertically-recipro 
cating cutter having its cutting edge on its 
lower end; such reciprocating cutter being 
adjacent to, and moving in a plane parallel 
to the plane of rotation of, the rotary cutter, 
and means for connecting said reciprocating 
cutter with, and disconnecting it from, the 
driving mechanism for said rotary cutter, as 
set forth. 
3. In a cloth-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the rotary cutter, and means for 
operating the same, of a vertically-recipro 
cating cutter having its cutting edge on its 
lower end; such reciprocating cutter being. 
adjacent to, and moving in a plane parallel 
to the plane of rotation of the rotary cutter, 
and means for connecting each of said cut 
ters with, and disconnecting each of them 
from, their common driving mechanism, as 
set forth. 
4. In a cloth-cutting machine, the combi 
nation. With the rotary cutter, and means for 
operating the same, of a vertically-recipro 
cating cutter having its cutting edge on its 
lower end; such reciprocating cutter being 
adjacent to, and moving in a plane parallel 
to the plane of rotation of the rotary cutter, 
and means for connecting said reciprocating 
cutter with, and simultaneously there with 
disconnecting said rotary cutter from, the 
common driving-shaft for said two cutters, 
as set forth. 
5. In a cloth-cutting machine, the combi 
nation. With the rotary cutter, and means for 
operating the same, of a vertically-recipro 
cating cutter having its cutting edge On its 
lower end; such reciprocating cutter being 
adjacent to, and moving in a plane parallel 
to the plane of rotation of the rotary cutter; 
said two cutters being connected by Suitable 
intermediate mechanisms to horizontal shafts 
35 
45 
55 
75 
So 
95 
CO 
O 
II5 
carrying each a bevel-wheel; a vertical sleeve 
arranged between said shafts, said sleeve elm 
bracing, and being coupled by feather and 
groove with, the main shaft of the apparatus; 
means for displacing said sleeve upon said 
main shaft, and for fixing it in either of its 
end positions, as set forth. 
6. In a cloth-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the rotary cutter, and means for 
operating the same, of a vertically-recipro 
cating cutter having its cutting edge on its 
lower end; such reciprocating cutter being 
adjacent to, and moving in a plane parallel 
to the plane of rotation of the rotary cutter, 
and being connected by suitable intermediate 
mechanisms to a horizontal shaft carrying a 
bevel-wheel; a longitudinally - displaceable 
sleeve arranged rectangularly to said hori 
Zontal shaft upon the vertical main shaft of 
the machine, and carrying also a bevel-wheel 
adapted to gear with said first bevel-wheel; 
each of said bevel-wheels being combined 
With a frictional disk, for the purpose as de 
scribed. 
7. In a cloth-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the rotary cutter, and means for 
operating the same, of a vertically-recipro 
cating cutter having its cutting edge on its 
lower end; such reciprocating cutter being 
adjacent to, and moving in a plane parallel 
to the plane of rotation of the rotary cutter; 
said two cutters being connected by suitable 
intermediate mechanisms to horizontal shafts 
carrying each a bevel-wheel; a sleeve ar 
ranged between said shafts, and carrying also 
at each end a bevel-wheel adapted to gear 
with the bevel-wheels of the said shafts; 
each of said bevel-wheels being combined 
with a frictional disk, as set forth. 
8. In a cloth-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the rotary cutter, and means for 
operating the same, of a vertically-recipro-. 
cating cutter having its cutting edge on its 
lower end; such reciprocating cutter being 
adjacent to, and moving in a plane parallel 
to the plane of rotation of the rotary cutter, 
said two cutters being connected by suitable 
intermediate mechanisms to horizontal shafts 
carrying each a bevel-wheel; a vertical sleeve 
arranged between said shafts, and carrying 
at each end a bevel-wheel adapted to gear 
with the bevel-wheels of the said shafts; 
each of said bevel-wheels being combined 
with a fictional disk; said sleeve embracing, 
and being coupled by feather and groove 
With the main shaft of the apparatus; means 
for displacing the said sleeve upon said main 
shaft, and for fixing it in either of its end 
positions, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification...in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
JACOB PHILIPPSOHN. 
Witnesses: 
R. HERPICH, 
C. BROCKHAUS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562757.txt	(No Model. ) 
No. 562,757. 
J. A. CLARK, 
,00M REED, 
Patented June 23, 1896, 
Zze a 66-71. 
2 - 's-y- aeas. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. CLARK, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
CROMPTON LOOM WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
OOM - REED. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,757, dated June 23, 1896. 
Application filed June 1 l895, Serial No, 551.344 (No model.) 
O 
20 with any loom. 
To all, whon, it invaly concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN A. CLARK, of 
Worcester, county of Worcester, State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
5 ment in Loom-Reeds, of which the following 
description, in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification, like let 
ter's and numerals on the drawings repre 
senting like parts. 
This invention in looms has especial refer 
ence to the reed, and while the invention may 
be used to advantage in connection with any 
loom, it is particularly useful in looms for 
Weaving tufted fabrics, in connection with 
5 which I shall herein particularly illustrate 
and describe the same, it being understood, 
however, that said invention is not limited in 
its application to tufted looms alone, for it 
may be applied to and used in connection 
Each space in the reed of a loom usually 
contains two or more warp-threads, and if 
these spaces, heretofore made uniform in 
width from top to bottom, be made of suffi 
5 cient width, as they must be, to permit their 
threads to be freely passed by each other or 
crossed in shedding, any single thread, at 
either end of its reed-space, must have con 
siderable side play or vibration. In practice 
3o I have found that this side play and vibration 
of the warp-threads in a loom are present to 
such an extent as to, in some kinds of fabric, 
injure the uniformity of the product. Par 
ticularly is this side play or vibration of the 
35 warp-threads objectionable in looms for weav 
ing tufted fabrics, wherein tuft-yarns must 
be regularly inserted between the warp 
threads across the entire width of the fabric, 
for if any warp-thread is out of its proper 
4o a lined position it is liable to be struck and 
unduly stretched or broken by one of the de 
scending tuft-yarn tubes, or it is apt to cause 
improper insertion of one or more of the tuft 
yarns. To obviate this side play or vibration 
45 of the individual warp-threads, I have, in ac 
cordance with this invention, produced a 
reed, wherein the spaces, of a normal width 
sufficient to permit free crossing of the warp 
threads in shedding, as heretofore, are at one 
5o or both their ends contracted to a width just 
sufficient for a single thread, so that as the members r", and is held by screws r. 
threads are opened in shedding, those threads 
which are moved to the contracted ends of 
their reed-spaces are thereby centered or regu 
larly spaced and held against objectionable 
side movement ol' vibration. 
My invention further comprehends a novel 
reed construction adapted for any reed, 
whether or not the ends of its spaces be con 
tracted as described. 
In the drawings illustrating one embodi 
ment of my invention, Figure 1 is a detail 
showing a sufficient portion of a usual loom 
for weaving tufted fabrics to enable my in 
vention to be understood; and Fig. 2 is an 
enlarged isometric detail, partially broken 
away, showing the particular reed construc 
tion. 
In the embodiment of my invention se 
lected for illustration and shown in the draw 
ings, the arms 18, the tuft yarn beams or 
spools d, their carriages c, the tuft-yarn 
quills or tubesc, and means for operating 
the same to insert tuft yarns between the 
warp-threads are and may be of usual con 
struction and operation, common to looms for 
weaving tufted fabrics, such a loom being 
shown and described in United States Pat 
ent No. 490,237, dated January 17, 1893, to 
which reference may be had. 
The lay d, as herein shown, has mounted 
upon it a bar '', shown as provided at its front 
side with a series of closely-arranged vertical 
slots r, intersecting which is a longitudinal, 
preferably V-shaped groove , to be re 
ferred to. 
The reed r is made up of a series of inde 
pendently-removable, preferably ?h-shaped, 
members '', shown as formed from flat metal 
strips, and arranged with their legs in the slots 
*, each slot preferably receiving adjacentlegs 
of two of the ?-shaped members, as shown. 
The legs of these ?h-shaped members ?", as 
herein shown, are notched at their front edges 
to correspond and register with the W-shaped 
groove . The reed members 7 are herein 
shown locked or clamped in position by a 
clamping-plate , applied to the face of the 
bar r", and having a A-shaped longitudinal 
rib r", which enters the groove and corre 
sponding notches in the legs of the ?-shaped 
5 5 
So 
95 
OO 
 
2 
562,757 
of their ends to form warp receiving and cen 
tering spaces to prevent lateral movement of 
and to uniformly center or space the threads 
moved thereinto, substantially as described. 
2. The described reed composed of a series 
of like independent ?-shaped members, and 
a support to which they are secured, said 
?h-shaped members at or adjacent their 
rounded or crown ends being bent in Wardly 
to contract the adjacentends of the reed- 5 
spaces, to thereby form warp receiving and 
centering spaces to uniformly center or space 
the threads moved thereinto, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a loom, the combination with tuft 
inserting devices, of a reed, containing warp 
receiving spaces uniformly of a normal width 
sufficient to permit free crossing of two or 
more warp-threads, and contracted at or near 
their ends adjacent said warp-inserting de 
vices to thereby form warp receiving and cen 
tering spaces to uniformly center or space 
the Warp-threads moved thereinto, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The combination with a support pro- 5 
vided with a series of slots and an intersect 
ing groove, of a plurality of reed members 
arranged in said slots, and notched to regis 
ter with said groove, a clamping-plate having 
a projection to enter said groove and notches 
and means to hold said clamping-plate in 
position, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
Do 
JOHN A. CTLARK. 
Witnesses: 
JUSTIN A. WARE, 
SAMUEL B. SCHOFIELD. 
IO 
By removing the clamping-plate , any 
single reed member may be removed for any 
necessary purpose, as for substitution of a 
member. 
Referring to Fig. 2, each pair of vertical 
legs in any single vertical slot r* constitutes a 
l'eed-dent, and each space i, formed by and 
within a ?n-shaped reedmember, a reed-space. 
The reed-spaces rare of a normal width suffi 
cient to permit two or more warp-threads, 
passed therethrough, to be freely crossed in 
shedding. At one of their ends, herein the 
upper ends, I have shown said reed-spaces 
as contracted at ' in suitable manner, as by 
crimping or bending metal from which the 
members rare made, to a width preferably 
such as will receive but a single thread each, 
so that when the threads are opened in shed 
ding, those threads moved into the upper 
plane of the shed will be moved into their 
contracted ends of the reed-spaces, and will 
be thereby properly centered or spaced, one 
from another, and restrain from lateral vibra 
tion or play. The uniform distribution or 
laying of the warp-threads in the fabric is 
thus assured, and when used in connection 
with tuft-yarn-inserting devices, as herein 
shown, there is practically no chance of a 
tuft-yarn to be incorrectly inserted nor for a 
tube to strike and stretch or break a warp 
thread. 
My invention is not limited to the particu 
lar embodiment herein shown and described, 
for the same obviously may be varied within 
the spirit and scope of my invention. . 
I claim 
I. A loom-reed containing uniform warp 
receiving spaces of a normal width sufficient 
to permit free crossing of two or more warp 
threads in shedding, and contracted at one 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562857.txt	W. L. SHEPARD & E. W. WHITLOCK, 
HOT WATER HEATER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 562,857, 
Patented June 30, 1896, 
W 
t 
suses 
2% 
& 34% 
2. 
HH A 
seas 
-ystwyers 
22% - 24-2/62% e-za of 
(3.aaza 27, 226262/6 
By C4ao. 3, 5:25, 
 
ANDREW is GRAHAM.PkoTo-Litho-AsHINGTON, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WLBUR. L. SHEPARD AND ERASTUS W. WHITLOCK, OF ELMWOOD, 
CONNECTICUT. 
HOT - WATER HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,857, dated June 30, 1896. 
Application filed March 30, 1892, Serial No. 427,08, (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all whom it may concern 
Beit known that we, WILBUR L. SHEPARD 
and ERASTUSW. WHITLOCK, of Elmwood, in 
the county of Hartford and State of Con 
necticut, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Hot-Water Heaters, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, whereby any one skilled in the 
art can make and use the same. 
The object of our invention is to provide 
an apparatus for heating buildings by the cir 
culation of a current of hot water from a cen 
tral heater through connecting pipes and coils 
or radiators of a heating system, and to pro 
vide a heater in which water can be economic 
E. and rapidly heated and effectively circu 
ated. 
To this end our invention consists in the de 
tails of the several parts making up the heater 
as a whole and in the combination of such 
parts as more particularly hereinafter de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claim. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a de 
tail view, in vertical central section, through 
our improved heater, showing the construc 
tion. Fig. 2 is a view in elevation of the 
heater, with parts broken away to show con 
Struction. 
In the accompanying drawings the letter a 
denotes the base of the heater, that may be of 
any convenient construction, but usually of 
metal cast to shape, and having an ash-pit, 
provided with a door a, having the usual 
damper. At the top of the base is supported 
a grate b, and above this is a flangea, that 
supports the upright walls of the heater, that 
are preferably cylindrical in form. This in 
closing Wall is made up, preferably, of an in 
ner layer b' of asbestos, next to which is a 
layer b of metal; next to this a layer b, 
made up of Wooland asbestos. Outside of this 
is a space band the jacket b. Surrounding 
the whole is a metal drum. A number of 
bolts c extend lengthwise from the flange a 
to the top piece or cover d and serve to hold 
by means of the usual nuts and threaded ends 
the several parts of the heater-body together. 
Within the walls is arranged a fire-boxe, that 
is made up of close coils of the water-pipef, 
that ente's the chamber by the bottom and 
is arranged in a series of close coils to form 
the fire-box, and then within the combustion 
chamber is another series of close coils, pref 
erably staggered, as shown in the drawings, 
to enable the water to be still further heated 
in its passage up and through the heater. 
This heater-pipe is composed of a single piece 
of pipe bent and coiled to the proper shape 
to form the fire-box e and the heating-drum 
f', and this pipe is preferably made of seam 
less tubing. 
The heating-drum, as that part of the coil 
that is arranged in a somewhat close series of 
bends in the upper part of the combustion 
chamber has been termed, may be made in 
any convenient form, staggered as shown, in 
beehive shape, or in successive layers with 
greater or less intervals and so arranged as 
to interrupt the heated products of combus 
tion as they pass from the fire-box up and 
around the coils and out through the uptake 
g. (Shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings.) 
From the heater pipes h. in any convenient 
number branch to the radiators or coils ar 
ranged in one or more rooms in the building 
and a return-pipe extends from the radiators 
of the system back to the pipe f, the usual 
valves and attachments common in a hot-Wa 
ter system being used. A peculiar feature 
of our invention resides in the construction 
and arrangement of the equalizer i, into 
which the water flows from the heater-coil 
within the heater and from which it is dis 
tributed in an even manner and in an equal 
degree to the several branches that may be 
connected with the upper part of the equal 
izer. This device consists of a body part 
having, preferably, conical or equivalent 
form, smaller at the bottom than at the part 
from which the branches extend and with a re 
entrant part extending within the body of 
the equalizer, and terminating, preferably, 
opposite what may be termed the inlet 
opening. It has been found by practice that 
by the use of this equalizer the difficulty ex 
perienced in old devices of this class of pro 
viding for an equal and uniform flow of the 
water through different branches is obviated 
and an equal and uniform flow is established. 
In the uptake or smoke-pipeg there is al 
ranged a damper k, pivoted at One side of an 
opening g', and comprising a damper proper 
o 
Od 
d 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
2 
562,857 
heating-drum, ... and this provides sufficient 
room for supplying fuel to the fire. 
This ill 
termediate branch or pipe having the sharp ; 
rise, as is shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings, is 
the pipe which is from its location firstheated. 
and, owing to the fact that the tendency of 
the heated column in that pipe is to rise, a 
circulation is started in the proper direction 
and is thoroughly established as the contents 
By the 
of successive pipes become heated. 
use of this intermediate branch any back 
flow is prevented. 
We claim as our invention 
In a hot-water heater in combination with 
the base and top, side Walls comprising an in 
ner layer of asbestos an intermediate layer of 
metal a layer of asbestos and Wool, an air 
space and an outer jacket, a single length of 
Water - pipe extending through the heater 
chamber within the drum With a series of 
closed coils forming the walls of the fire-box 
and a series of irregular coils in the combus 
tion - chamber above the fire-box, and an : 
5. 
equalizer interposed between the heater-coii 
and the distributing-pipes of the system, all 
substantially as described. 
J.C. 
so 
WILBUR. L. SIEEPARD. 
ERASTUS W. WHITLOCK. 
Witnesses: 
CHAs. T. BURDETT, 
A. B. JENKINS. 
d 
that extends completely across the flue and 
has a wing lic' curved on the arc of a circle 
struck on the pivot from which the damper 
Swings and with side walls so as to extend 
Completely across the opening through the 
wall of the uptake or flue. Through the Wing 
or the side parts are formed portsk, that pro 
vide for the inflow of air from the outside of 
the heater through the flue to the chimney 
when the damper is closed or but partly 
opened. When the damper is swung to the 
position denoted by the dotted outline, a 
draft will be established through the heater 
and the greater part of the air-portsk closed. 
A lever l is secured to the damper-spindle 
and is preferably connected as by means of 
a cord or chain l with an upper room, so that 
the position of the damper may be controlled 
from an upper apartment by a proper ma 
nipulation of this cord. 
The usual doorway through the wall of the 
heater is provided for the introduction of fuel 
into the fire-box. 
An important advantage in securing a posi 
tive circulation of the water in the right di 
rection resides in the arrangement of the in 
termediate coil that extends, in a sharper rise 
than is used in the coil of the fire-box, from 
the top of the latter to the bottom of the coils 
forming the heating-drum. A considerable 
space is thus left between the top of the fire 
box and the bottom of the lower coil of the 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US562957.txt	F. C. COFF 
RADIATOR, WALWE, 
Patented June 30, 1896. 
Cl 
(No Model.) 
No. 562,957. 
W2 
A 
Az Z, 
se 
 
W 
N 
S 3 
N 2 
(QA per, a 
id 
af a 
Sls S, 
EEN 
NN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
A 
 
S2 
%22132 
Af 
A. 
A. 
A. 
Y 
a 
a 
A 
2 
2 
A. 
a 
A. a 
3%tz 
 
SS 
^ 
22 s2 
  
 
2 S 
av 
& SSZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
22%a Sws 
as 
%ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
Zzzez267-7; 
Z72a 77%. C. 6 oz7. 
WZZZzesses: 
// 6624./ 
3-684- ra. 
ANDREW B.GRAHAM, PHOTOLTHO WASHINGTON, DC. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK C. GOFF, OF DEN VER, COLORADO. 
RADIATOR-VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 562,957, dated June 30, 1896. 
Application filed April 10, 1894. Serial No. 507,002, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANK C. GoFF, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Denver, 
in the county of Arapahoe and State of Colo 
rado, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Radiator-Valves, which is 
fully set forth in the following specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical central sectional view 
of my valve, showing a portion of the radiator 
and main pipe. Fig. 2 is a sectional view 
taken at the line 22, Fig. 1, looking down. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view taken at 
the line 33, Fig. 1; and Fig. 4 is a perspec 
tive view of the valve with a portion of the 
Valve-stem. 
My invention relates to radiator-valves in 
Which there is a single pipe connection to the 
radiator as a supply for steam or hot water 
and for the exhaust. 
My invention is an improvement on the in 
vention shown and described in my Patent 
No. 510,420, issued December 12, 1893, for 
hot-water valves; and it consists in the con 
struction of the two-way passages in the short 
pipes connected to the valve-seat which has 
two passages through it, and the construction 
and application of the valve seated in one of 
the passages of the valve-seat, all as herein 
after described and made the subject-matter 
of the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents a portion of the radiator. 
IB represents a coupling in the main supply 
pipe. 
C is a short pipe screw-threaded at both 
ends and connected to the pipe-coupler B. 
C is a short pipe or tube, which is rigidly 
attached to the interior of the pipe C or to the 
valve-seat, one end of Said pipe extending be 
low the end of the pipe C into the coupler B, 
as clearly shown in Fig. 1. 
D is a Valve-seat having interior passages 
E and F. This valve-seat is secured to the 
upper end of the pipe C, as clearly shown. 
G is a hollow cylindrical valve, open at one 
end and closed at the other end, as shown at H. 
I is a valve-stem, carrying at its upper end a 
hand-wheel J, by which said valve is rotated. 
The valve G has an opening on one side, as 
shown at K. 
25 
35 
45 
 
Lisa screw-threaded cap, which is attached 
to the two-way valve-seat D to hold the valve 
G in place. Mis also a screw-threaded pack- 55 
ing-cap, which is attached to the upper end 
of the cap L. 
N is a removable nut attached to the upper 
end of the valve-stem. I to hold the hand 
wheel J in place on the valve-stem. When 6o 
it is desired to place the valve G in the valve 
seat D, the hand-wheel J is removed from 
the valve-stem and the screw-threaded caps L. 
and Mare slipped onto the valve-steam, and 
the hand-wheel J is then attached to the 65 
valve-stem and secured thereto by the nut M. 
The valve is then secured in position by 
means of the screw-threaded cap L being 
screwed to the valve-seat, as shown in Fig. 1. 
O is a short screw-threaded pipe in which 
there is an interior pipe P, the ends of which 
project beyond the ends of the short pipe O, 
as clearly shown in Fig. 1. The pipe P is 
rigidly secured in position in the pipe O, pref 
erably by soldering, or to the valve-seat. One 
end of the pipe P projects into the radiator 
farther than the pipe O, while the other end 
of said pipe Pregisters with the passage F in 
the valve-seat When the Valve-seat and pipe 
O are connected together, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The pipe O has an annular rib Q, against which 
the end of one arm of the valve-seat strikes, 
and the coupling-cap R, which is screw 
threaded to the valve-seat, holds the pipe O 
securely connected to the valve-seat D in posi 
tion so that the pipe P will register with the 
passage F in the valve-seat. 
When the valve Gis turned in the position 
shown in Fig. 1, it is closed, so that steam or 
hot, water cannot pass into the radiator, but 
when it is turned partly around, so as to bring 
the opening IK in the cylindrical valve op 
posite the opening leading into the pipe O, 
steam or hot water passes then through the 
valve into the radiator. The condensed steam 
or cold water passes through the pipe P, pas 
sage F in the valve-seat, and down through 
the interior pipe C' into the main pipe, as in 
dicated by the arrows. In this construction 
of my valve-seat and valve, and by securing 
the interior pipes C and P within the interior 
of the short pipes C and O, so that they each 
register with the passage Fin the valve-seat, 
I am able to have my inlet into the radiator 
75 
OO 
9 O 
95 
2 
562,957 
necting the coupling-pipe to the main supply: 
pipe, said short pipe having two passages 
through it which also register with the pas 
sages in the coupling-pipe; and a hollow cy 
lindrical valve closed at one end and having 
an opening On One side placed in one of the 
passages of the coupling-pipe and made ro 
tatable therein to open and close said passage, 
as specified. 
3. The short pipe C, having an interior pipe 
C' secured therein, and projecting beyond 
one end of the short pipe into the coupling of 
the main supply-pipe, the opposite end of 
said interior pipe registering with the passage 
F in the coupling-pipe ID; the coupling B of 
the main supply-pipe; the radiator stub-pipe 
O, having an interior pipe P, one end of which 
projects into the radiator beyond the end of 
the pipe O, while the other end registers with 
the opening Fin the coupling-pipe D, all con 
stituting an independent outlet of water from 
the radiator into the main supply-pipe, as 
specified. 
FRANK C. GOFF. 
35 
40 
45 
Witnesses: 
B. M. CARR, 
N. Q. TANQUAY. 
O 
from the main supply-pipe and my outlet 
from the radiator to the main supply-pipe 
through single pipe connection to the radiator 
and Supply-pipe, and at the same time assem 
ble parts in the most simple and efficient 
lane. 
Having fully described the construction 
and operation of my invention, what I claim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A pipe having a longitudinal diaphragm 
to form direct and return passages, and pro 
vided with a valve-seat formed in part by a 
portion of the diaphragm and in part by a 
portion of the wall of the pipe; a hollow cy 
lindrical valve, open at one end and closed at 
the other, provided with an opening on one 
side and seated in One of the passages of the 
valve-seat, which passage is opened and closed 
by turning in the valve-seat, while the other 
passage remains Open. 
2. A radiator provided with a single open 
ing; a stub connected with the opening in the 
radiator and having two passages through it; 
a coupling-pipe having two passages through 
it connected with said stub, the passages in 
the coupling-pipe registering with the pas 
Sages in the radiator-stub; a short pipe con 
5 
2 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563057.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 563,057. 
 
 
J. M. PATTERSON, 
SCREW PULVERIZER OR HARROW, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented June 30, 1896. 
 
E777 (7 (AHIEIAI 
t 
 
WZ2 is 7. if III life 
 
3O 
y 
/zzezzz7/ 
72727-14. Zza/sa/2- . 
 
Andrew B.GRAHAM.Photo-lmo...washsonic 
(No Model.) 
No. 563,057, 
J. M. PATTERSON, 
sCREW PULVERIZER OR HARROW, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 30, 1896. 
 
 
-Z 23. 
  
A. 
Z27, 2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SS 
Y7. 
St. E31 
4, Nimits 
SEig Elefa 
SS 
a Rs N. 
2 
 
ANst serAHAM. Peo-TO.WASN Co., 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN M. PATTERSON, OF LA FAYETTE, GEORGIA. 
SCREW PULVERIZER OR HARROW, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,057, dated June 30, 1896, 
Application filed September 20, 1895. Serial No. 563,122. (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JOHN M. PATTERSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at La 
Fayette, in the county of Walker and State of 
Georgia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Screw Pulverizers or 
Harrows; and I do hereby declare that the 
following specification, taken in connection 
with the accompanying drawings, is a full, 
clear, and exact description of my invention, 
such as will enable those skilled in the art to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the form of pulverizers or harrows compris 
ing, essentially, one or more spiral or screw 
cutters adapted to be rotated in contact with 
the ground to be broken up. 
Myinvention consists, essentially, of a suit 
able sulky-frame from which is supported the 
spiral or screw cutters, suitable mechanism 
being provided for rotating the cutters while 
in contact with the ground, and suitable mech 
anism being provided for holding the cutters 
to their work and for raising them out of con 
tact with the ground and holding them in ele 
wated position when not in operation. 
In order that my invention may be fully 
understood, I will first describe the same with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, and 
afterward particularly point out the novelty 
in the annexed claims. 
In said drawings, Figure 1 is a top plan 
view of my improved pulverizer. Fig. 2 is a 
side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is an in 
side sectional elevation of the same, taken on 
the line 33 of Fig. 1. Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7 are 
detail views showing the structure of the 
clutch mechanism located in the hubs of the 
supporting-wheels for throwing the spiral cut 
ters in and out of operation. Figs. 8 and 9 
are detail views illustrating the construction 
of the spiral cutters. Fig. 10 is a detail view 
showing one of the pivoted standards in which 
the roller-bearing on the spring is carried. 
The sulky-frame comprises a tongue 1, the 
cross-bars 23, to which the tongue is secured, 
theside bars 45, extending between the cross 
bars 2 and 3, and the pairs of auxiliary side 
bars 66 and 7 7", which are rigidly secured to 
the side bars 4 and 5 and cross-bar 3 at their 
forward ends, and which are formed with 
journal-openings in their rear ends. 
8 is the main supporting-axle, which passes 
through the journal-openings in the rear ends 
of the auxiliary side bars 66 and 77. 
9 are the supporting-wheels loosely jour 
malled on the outer ends of the axle 8. Each 
of the wheels 9 isformed withinternal ratchet 
teeth 10 in its hub, with which engages a piv 
oted spring-pawl 11. The pawl 11 is pivot 
ally mounted upon the outer face of the hub 
section 12, which is keyed to the axle 8 close 
up against the hub of the wheel 9. 
13 is a small spring having a hook end 14, 
which is adapted to engage the shoulder 11 
of the pivoted pawl 11 and hold the same out 
of engagement with the internal ratchet-teeth 
10. The spring 13 normally forces the pawl 11 
outwardly into engagement with the ratchet 
teeth 10, but when the pawl is forced back 
by means of the pin 15, which projects 
through the curved slot 16 of the hub-section 
12, the hook end 14 of the spring 13 will en 
gage the shoulder 11 and hold the pawl out 
of engagement with the ratchet, so that the 
wheels 9 will be allowed to revolve in either 
direction without rotating the axle 8. 
When 
the pawl 11 is in engagement with the ratchet 
teeth 10, it will be observed that the forward 
movement of the wheels 9 will rotate the axle 
8, whereas the backward movement of the 
wheels 9 will merely cause the ratchet-teeth 
to slip past the pawl and will not rotate the 
axle 8. 
Pivotally mounted upon the axle 8 between 
the frame-pieces 6 6 and 77 are the rear 
wardly-extending side bars 20, which are cen 
trally connected by the cross-bar 21 and have 
journaled in their outer ends the cutter-shaft 
22. Extending around the cutter-shaft 22 
are two spiral ribs 23 and 24, which extend 
in opposite directions, and upon these ribs 
the screw-blades or spiral cutters are mount 
The spiral cutter-blades are formed of 
ed. 
sections or flights 25, having radial arms 25, 
which are secured to the spiral ribs 23 and 
24, and tongue-and-groove joints 26 at their 
contiguous edges. Plates 27 overlap the join 
ing edges of the sections or flights and are se 
cured in place by rivets. 
Keyed to the outer end of the shaft 22 is a 
sprocket-wheel 30, and keyed to the axle 8 in 
line with the sprocket-wheel 30 is a large 
sprocket-wheel 31. A sprocket-chain 32 ex 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
75 
9o 
OO 
 
2 
563,057 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
... 
- 
tends around the sprocket-wheels 30 and 31 
for communicating motion from the latter to 
the former. 
35 are bifurcated standards journaled upon 
the axle 8 and carrying near their upper ends 
the rollers 36. 
37 are long curved leaf-springs pivoted at 
their forward ends to the frame-sections 4 and 
5 and extending over and having their rear 
ends resting upon the side bars 20 and exert 
ing pressure thereon for holding the spiral 
cutters to their work. The springs 37 pass 
through standards 35 under the rollers 36, 
which bear on the springs for holding them in 
position. 38 are U-shaped crank-arms jour 
naled upon the upper face of the cross-bar 2 
and connected to the upper ends of the stand 
ards 35 by means of the links 39, and to an 
operating hand-lever 40 through the link 41. 
43 is a rack in which the hand-operated 
spring-pawl 44 engages for holding the hand 
lever in any desired position. By this means 
the position of the standards can be changed 
and the amount of pressure of the rollers 36 
upon the springs 37 regulated. 
45 is an arm pivoted upon the axle 8 and 
connected through chain 46 to the bar 21 of 
the rear frame, and through link 48 with the 
hand-lever. By means of this connection the 
frame carrying the spiral cutters can be raised 
or lowered out of or into operative position, 
and When the cutters are lowered the rollers 
36 will press upon the springs 37, whereas 
when the cutters are raised the pressure will 
be removed. 
50 is the driver's seat. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
the following is what I claim as new therein 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
1. In a harrow or pulverizer, the combina 
tion of a sulky-frame, a rotatable pulverizer 
screw suitably supported from the sulky 
frame, suitable means for rotating the screw 
from the axle of the sulky-frame, the support 
ing-Wheels loosely journaled upon the axle 
and formed with ratchet-teeth in the hub, 
Separate hub-sections keyed to the axle close 
up against the Supporting-wheels, spring 
paWils carried by Said separate hub-sections 
and adapted to engage the ratchet-teeth of 
the Supporting-wheels, and suitable catches 
for holding the pawls out of operative posi 
tion, Substantially as set forth. 
2. In a harrow or pulverizer, the combina 
tion of the Sulky-framehaving a rotatable axle 
and loosely-journaled supporting-wheels, a 
rotatable pulverizer-screw suitably supported 
from the sulky-frame, suitable means for ro 
tating the screw from the rotatable axle; and 
ratchet-clutches between the supporting 
Wheels and axle, each comprising ratchet 
teeth. On the supporting-wheel, a separate hub 
Section keyed to the axle, a pivoted pawl car 
ried by the separate hub-section and adapted 
to engage the ratchet-teeth, a spring adapted 
to hold the pawl to its work, a hook on the 
Spring adapted to hold the pawl out of oper 
ation, and an arm extending from the pawl 
through a slot in the separate hub-section by 
means of which the pawl can be pushed back 
into engagement with the hook, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination of a suitable frame or 
carriage having a rotatable Supporting-axle 
and loosely-journaled supporting - wheels, 
With a clutch between the axle and wheels 
comprising Suitable ratchet-teeth, a pivoted 
pawl adapted to engage the ratchet-teeth, a 
shoulder formed On the pawl, a Spring engag 
ing the pawl and formed with a hook end and 
adapted to engage the shoulder of the pawl, 
and an armby which the pawl can be moved, 
substantially as set forth. 
- 
4. In a harrow or pulverizer, the combina 
tion of a suitable supporting-frame, with a ro 
tatable spiral cutter or screw constructed of 
a rotatable shaft having a spiral rib extend 
ing around it, and a series of spirally-set sec 
tions or flights formed with radial arms which 
are secured to the spiral rib and having their 
meeting ends secured together by tongue-and 
groove and overlapping securing-plates riv 
eted to the sections, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of the sulky-frame, the 
pulverizer mounted in a suitable frame piv 
oted to the sulky-frame upwardly-curved 
leaf-springs connected at one end to the 
sulky-frame and bearing at the other end upon 
the pulverizer-frame, and a pressure device 
adapted to bear on the curve of the spring 
for regulating the pressure of the springs, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. The combination of the sulky-frame, the 
pulverizer-frame pivoted thereto and carrying 
the pulverizer leaf-springs secured to the 
Sulky-frame and eXtending over and engag 
ing the pulverizer-frame, pivoted standards 
embracing the springs and carrying rollers 
which engage the Springs, and means for 
moving the standards for imparting more or 
less pressure through the spring to the pull 
verizer, as set forth. 
7. The combination of the sulky-frame, the 
pulverizer-frame pivoted thereto and carrying 
the pulverizer leaf-springs secured at their 
ends to the sulky-frame and extending over 
and engaging the pulverizer-frame, pivoted 
standards embracing the springs and carry 
ing rollers which bear upon the springs and 
hold them to their work, a hand-lever having 
a pawl and rack, and suitable lever connec 
tions between the standards and hand-lever, 
substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination of the sulky-frame, the 
pulverizer-frame pivoted thereto and carrying 
the pulverizer, leaf-springs secured at their 
ends to the Sulky-frame and extending over 
into engagement with the pulverizer-frame, 
bifurcated standards pivoted to the support 
ing-axle and embracing the leaf-springs and 
carrying rollers which bear upon the springs 
and hold them to their work, crank-levers 
journaled upon the cross-bar of the sulky 
frame and having suitable link connection 
75 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I25 
563,057 
with the standards, a hand-lever, and suit 
able connections between the hand-lever and 
the crank-lever, substantially as set forth. 
9. The combination of the sulky-frame, the 
pulverizer-frame pivoted on an axis and car 
rying the pulverizer, an arm pivoted upon the 
said axle, a chain connecting the pulverizer 
frame to said arm, a hand-lever, pawl and 
rack, and a link connecting the pivoted arm 
to the hand-levers, substantially as set forth. 
10. The combination of the sulky-frame, the 
pulverizer-frame pivotally connected thereto 
and carrying the pulverizer, leaf-springs se 
cured to the sulky-frame and extending over 
O 
into engagement with the pulverizer-frame, I5 
means controlled by a hand-lever for apply 
ing pressure to and removing pressure from 
said springs, and independent connection 
between the pulverizer-frame and hand-lever, 
whereby the pulverizer-frame can be lifted 20 
when the pressure is removed from the 
springs, and vice versa, substantially as set 
forth. 
- 
JOHN M. PATTERSON. 
Witnesses: 
W. M. SCOTT, 
J. P. SHATTUCK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563157.txt	(No Model.) 
J. G. ARDNER, 
PAPER SHELL CARTRIDGE, . 
No. 563,157, 
Patented June 30, 1896, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
JOHN GARDNER, OF NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WINCHESTER REPEATING ARMS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PAPER SHELL CARTRIDGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,157, dated June 30, 1896. 
Application filed March 16, 1896, Serial No,583,356, (No model.) 
- 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN GARDNER, of New 
Haven, in the county of New Haven and State 
of Connecticut, have invented a new Paper 
5 Shell Cartridge; and I do hereby declare the 
following, when taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawing and the letters of ref 
erence marked thereon, to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same, and which 
Said drawing constitutes part of this specifi 
cation, and represents a view, partly in ele 
Vation and partly in section, of one form 
Which a paper-shell cartridge containing my 
invention may assume. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
that class of cartridges known as paper 
shell cartridges, and consisting, in part, of a 
paper tube and a drawn sheet-metal cap ap 
plied to one end thereof. 
The object of my present invention is to 
prevent the tube from breaking, when the car 
tridge is in the gun, at or near the inner edge 
of the metallic cap, and thus avoid the neces 
sity of manually extracting the main portion 
of the tube from the gun-barrel in which it 
is left when the operation of extracting the 
spent cartridge in the usual manner takes 
place. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
long the life of the paper-shell cartridges in 
case it is desired to reload them and use them. 
over and over again. 
With these ends in view my invention con 
sists in a paper-shell cartridge composed, in 
part, of a paper tube and a drawn sheet-metal 
cap, which is continuously upset around its 
circumference, so as to be yielding at or near 
the point where the tube enters it, so that the 
said portion of the cap may yield sufficiently 
to and take the strain from the tube. 
Myinvention further consists in certain de 
tails of construction, as will be hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the claims. 
It is obvious that in carrying out my in 
vention the inner or open end of the cap may 
be adapted in a great variety of ways to yield 
sufficiently to prevent the paper from being 
torn at the point where the tube enters it. 
Thus the cap may have annular circumfer 
5o ential grooves rolled in it or longitudinally or 
45 
3o 
35 
 
55 
7 O 
75 
diagonally arranged crimps formed in it, or 
it may be upset to form a band of letters or 
characters, whether significant or arbitrarily 
chosen, the only requirement being that the 
metal shall be upset in some form that will 
permit it to yield a little at or near the point 
where the tube enters it. 
For illustration of my invention I have 
chosen to illustrate a paper-shell cartridge 
having a paper tube A and a drawn sheet 
metal cap B, the inner end of which is formed 
With several annular circumferential grooves 
b, which, as it were, take into the paper, and 
Which are located in planes at a right angle 
to the longitudinal axis of the cartridge. 
These grooves permit the cap to yield longi 
tudinally and diametrically at or near the 
point where the tube enters it, sufficiently to 
prevent the paper from being abruptly broken 
or torn at that point. The grooves b, it will 
be noted, extend continuously around the cap, 
which would not yield, as described, if they 
were interrupted. I may here remark that if, 
as above suggested, I employ crimps or -let 
ters or characters in the place of Such grooves 
they must all be connected or joined together, 
so as to have the effect of a continuous up 
setting of the metal. My observation is that 
the chief yielding of the caps is longitudinal, 
for the firing of the cartridges straightens 
out the grooves enough to permanently in- . 
crease the length of the caps. 
In view of the various modes suggested of 
making the cap yielding and of other modes 
which may be obviously resorted to, I would 
have it understood that I do not limit myself 
to the exact form set forth, but hold myself 
at liberty to make such changes as fairly fall 
within the spirit and scope of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A paper-shell cartridge having a paper 
tube, and a drawn sheet-metal cap which is 
continuously upset aroundits circumference, 
whereby the said cap is permitted to yield, 
when the cartridge is exploded, so as to pre 
vent the paper tube from breaking at or near 
the point where it enters the cap, Substan 
tially as described. 
95 
OO 
2 
568,157 
2. A paper-shell cartridge having a paper ing at or near the point where it enters the Io 
tube, and a drawn sheet-metal cap which is cap. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
constructed with one or more annular cir- 
cumferential gooves located in a plane or in specification in the presence of two subscrib 
axis of the cartridge, substantially as de- 
scribed, and whereby the said cap is permit- 
ted to yield, when the cartridge is exploded, 
so as to prevent the paper tube from break- 
5 planes at a right angle to the longitudinaling witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN GARDNER. 
DANIEL H. WEADER, 
THOS. C. JOHNSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563257.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
T. L., CARLETON, 
LIGHTNING ARRESTER AND AUTOMATIC FUSE BLOCK, 
No. 563,257, 
Patented July 7, 1896, 
 
 
 
  
f 
42 
( SE () 
IS) 
S212, Sle 
222s2 
 
Eela 
  
  
(2)2 
28SS ve, S 2 S&S 2SEIS2 2 
M 
Z5 
 
3 
24 sea 
WITNESSES 
(e...4% 
% -2 
BY 
INVENTOR 
tw. 6 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
T. L. CARLETON, 
LIGHTNING ARRESTER AND AUTOMATIC FUSE BLOCK, 
No. 563,257, 
Patented July 7, 1896. 
 
HSS) -e ss 
 
(SIE 2. 
Rue 
. 
WITNESSES 
 
 
ATTOFWEYS. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS L. CARLETON, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA, ASSIGNOR TO HIM 
SELF, AND WILLIAM. H. BELT, OF SCRANTON, AND EDWARD G. BURKLIN, 
OF BILOXI, MISSISSIPPI, AND FRANKL, LOWIS, OF AUBURNDALE, OHIO. 
LIGHTNING ARRESTER AND AUTOMATIC FUSE BLOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,257, dated July 7, 1896, 
Application filed February 28, 1894, Serial No. 501,835, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS L. CARLETON, 
of New Orleans, in the parish of Orleans and 
State of Louisiana, have invented a new and 
S Improved Lightning-Arrester and Automatic 
Fuse-Block, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the annexed 
drawings, forming a part thereof, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
Io lightning-arrester and automatic fuse-block. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is 
a Vertical transverse section taken on line 33 
in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of a modi 
fied form of my improved lightning-arrester 
I5 and automatic fuse-block. Fig. 5 is a plan 
view of the same. Fig. G is a vertical trans 
verse section taken on line 6 (5 in Fig. 4, and 
Fig. 7 is a perspective view of another modi 
fication of my invention. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the views. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a superior lightning-arrester and automatic 
fuse-block of that class in which the parts 
25 after one operation will automatically place 
themselves in position for another operation, 
thus always maintaining the circuit complete, 
except at the instant of rupture by lightning 
or other causes. This end I attain by a con 
3o struction which comprises in its organization 
a pair of curved bars secured to a base, one 
of the ba's being of insulating material, the 
other of conducting material, a series of shunts 
connecting the curved bar of insulating ma 
35 terial with the curved bar of conducting ma 
terial, and an actuating-arm resting against 
one of the shunts and capable of automat 
ically passing to the next in series upon the 
destruction of the first, the metallic bar be 
Aoing connected With the line and the spring 
pressed arm with the ground or line. The 
construction also embodies a contact for en 
gaging With the arm after it has completed 
contacts with and destroyed all of the shunts, 
45 as will be hereinafter more fully described. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction and combinations that 
will fully appear hereinafter, and be finally 
the subjects of the claims. 
To the base-board Aare secured the curved 
The instrument being placed in the line by 75 
bars BC, the curved bar B being made of 
metal and the bar C being formed of insulat 
ing material, such as vulcanite. The said 
bars are parallel with each other and are 
formed on circles, of which the stud D is the 55 
center. The said stud D is secured to a me 
tallic strip E, attached to the base A, and on 
the said stud is placed a sleeve F, which car 
ries an arm G. The said arm G is held nor 
mally in contact with one of the wires (1, 6o 
stretched across from the curved bar 3 to the 
curved bar C by a spiral spring e, surround 
ing and attached to the sleeve F at one end 
and secured to the strip E at the opposite end. 
The wires ct are held in place by screw's b, in- 65 
serted in the curved bars B. C. 
The strip E is provided at its outer extrelm 
ity with a binding-post II, and the curved 
bar B is furnished with a binding-post I. 
Near the binding-post. His placed a binding- 7 O 
post J, which supports a contact-piece c. In 
the base A is inserted a right-angled Spring 
d, for holding the spring-pressed arm G while 
the shunts CL are being put into place. 
connecting the binding-posts II I with the 
line-wire, and the binding-post J being con 
nected with the ground and the shunt-Wires 
C. being in place, the current passes from the 
binding-post. I through the bar B, the first of So 
the wires (t, the arm G and its pivot, the strip 
E to the binding-post II. Should the line be 
struck by lightning or short - circuited, the 
heavy charge would cause the fusion of the 
wire C, thus momentarily interrupting the S5 
circuit. The spring-pressed arm G moves 
forward to the next wire Ct. and restablishes 
the circuit. Should the line be struck a Sec 
ond time, the second wire Will be melted, and 
so on until the entire series of shunt-Wires is 9o 
melted. After the last one of the series gives 
way the arm G strikes the contact c, thus 
grounding the line. Should a continuous 
heavy current be delivered to the line-wire, 
the shunt-wires (L will be fused in quick suc- 95 
cession and the line will be grounded on the 
contact C. 
In the modified form shown in Figs. 4, 5, 
and 6 the arm G', instead of being attached 
to the stud D, is attached to the spring-arbor loo 
 
2 
568,257 
IO 
3O 
35 
D' of a spring-actuated train of gearing e, 
which terminates in an escapement-wheelf", 
whose motion is limited by the pallet g' and 
the weighted arm attached thereto. As the 
spring-actuated train of gearing is of the 
usual well-known form, no special description 
will be required. The spring-arbor in this 
case is provided with a thimble I', which is 
in electric communication with the arm G', 
and the said thimble is pressed by a brush i, 
formed on the end of a copper strip con 
nected electrically with one branch of the 
main Wire through the binding-post II". The 
arm G' normally rests upon one of the wires 
CI, and when the wire is fused by a strong 
current or discharge of lightning the spring 
of the train of gearing causes the arm to move 
forward to the next fuse-wire, but on account 
of the escapement its movement is smaller 
than that of the arm G. (Shown in Figs. 1, 
2, and 3.) When the arm G' passes the last 
fuse-wire, it comes to rest upon the ground 
contact c', which is electrically connected 
with the ordinary lightning-arrester plate d' 
at the opposite end of the base-board A and 
having binding-posts I" and J". By retarding 
the movement of the arm G' in the manner 
described time is given for the complete dis 
charge of the line-wire, and it also prevents 
a blow upon a fuse-wire, and thus avoids a 
possibility of injury to the wire or its con 
nections. 
It will be seen that the spring in Figs. 4, 5, 
and 6 while specifically such is more broadly 
a motor or means for actuating the arm G'. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 7 the 
fuse-wires C. are stretched from a metallic 
post, B' to a post C of insulating material. 
The post B' is connected with the binding 
post I, and the ground contact-wire C is 
stretched from the post B' to the post C", but it 
is insulated from the binding-post B and con 
nected electrically through the ground-wire 
with the binding-post J. In front of the 
Wires supported by the postsB'C' there is a 
tubular standard D', which is slotted longi 
tudinally on the side next the series of wires 
and contains a follower j', carrying an arm 
G', provided on its free end with a contact 
piece k', which rests upon the fuse-wire. As 
the fuse-wires are melted one after the other, 
as described in connection with Figs. 1 and 
4, the arm G drops into contact with the fuse 
Wires in Succession, and when the last fuse 
Wire is melted it comes into contact with the 
45 
 
55 
ground-wire c, thus connecting the line-wire 
With the ground. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In an automatic fuse-block and light 
ning-arrester, the combination of a conduct 
ing-bar, a non-conducting bar, fuse-wires ex 
tended across from one bar to the other, a 
contact-arm mounted to successively engage 
the fuse-wires, a motor connected to move 
the arm, and mechanism capable of regulat 
ing the operation of said motor and making 
the movement of the arm regular and uni 
form, substantially as described. 
2. In an automatic fuse-block and light 
ning-arrester, the combination of a conduct 
ing-bar, a non-conducting bar, a series of con 
tact-wires extended across from one ball to 
the other, a contact-arm mounted to Succes 
sively engage the contact-wires, spring-con 
trolled gearing for moving the contact-arm 
at a regular speed, and a brush making sliding 
contact With the contact-arm, substantially 
as described. 
3. An automatic fuse-block and lightning 
arrester, the same consisting of a base, two 
arc-shaped bars mounted on the base, one be 
ing of a conducting and the other of a non 
conducting material, fuse-wires extended 
across from one bar to the other, a contact 
arm mounted on an axis concentric to the 
arcs of the bars and capable of successively 
engaging the contact-wires, a contact-point 
adapted to be engaged by the contact-arm 
when all of the fuse-wires have been severed, 
spring-controlled gearing for driving the con 
tact-arm at a regular speed, and a brush mak 
ing sliding engagement with the contact-arm, 
substantially as described. 
4. In an automatic fuse-block and light 
ning-arrester, the combination of a conduct 
ing-bar, a non-conducting bar, fuse-wires ex 
tending across from one bar to the other, a 
contact-arm mounted to successively engage 
the fuse-wires, a motor for moving the con 
tact-arm, said motor having a tendency to 
operate continually and mechanism capable 
of partly restraining said motor and of mak 
ing regular and uniform the movement thereof 
and of the arm, substantially as described. 
TIOMIAS L. CARLETON. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS ROSENTHAL, 
JAMES J. LEMON. 
75 
95 
ICO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563357.txt	(No Model) 
No. 563,357, 
Fig! 
| W. F. BRYANT. 
RADIATOR, 
Patented July 7, 1896. 
* 
ww 
?Z?. ?ZAN, 
: 
/ ? 
Z Z 
 
Witnesses. 
w 
Max42 /?zlnventor, 
***R* Petersco. Proro-Ir. waskingror. p. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER F. BRYANT, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
BRYANT IRON WORKS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
RADIATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,857, dated July 7, 1896. 
Application filed January 25, 1893, Serial No. 459,637, (No model) 
55 
65 
75 
To a/Z whom it may 007C8772: 
Beit known that I, WALTER F. BRYANT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Buf 
falo, in the county of Erie and State of New 
York, have inwented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Radiators, of whichthe fol 
lowing is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to animproved means 
for securing the sections of a radiator to 
gether, and will be fully and clearly herein 
after described and claimed, reference being 
hadto the accompanying drawings, inwhich 
Figure 1 representsa, series of radiator-sec 
tions put together by my improved means. 
Fig 2 is an endelevation of Fig. 1, showing 
a side elevation of a radiator-Section. Fig. 
3 representsanenlarged portion ofa radiator 
section, showing the opening with an iron 
packing-ringin place preparatoryto securing 
anothersection to it. Fig. 4 is a transverse 
central section through the lower portion of 
a radiator-section, cutting also through the 
packing-ring. Fig. 5 is a central section 
through the lower portion ofone and through 
a portion of the lower part of another ra 
diator-section, showing the mode or means 
for connecting two radiator-sections rigidly 
together. Fig. 6 representsa, side elevation 
of a packing-ring. 
The object of my invention is to providea 
cheap and effectual means for rigidly Secur 
ing the sections of steam-radiators together, 
and to that end I employa packing-ring ofa 
material as hard, or substantially So, as the 
material of which the radiator-sections are 
made. 
Referring to said drawings, 1 represents 
the radiator-section, having an Opening 2 On 
one side provided with a surrounding inner 
recess 3, into which an iron ring 4 is placed. 
This ringis roundlin cross-section. (Common 
iron wire may be used.) The objectim mak 
ing this ring of round wire is that a tight 
jointisformed by it, wherea flat ring Of even 
softer metal could not be made to operate. 
The opposite side of the section is provided 
with anotheropening:5, havingan outwardly 
projecting nipple 6, which is made tapering, 
so that the outer end is adapted to pass into 
thering and opening of an adjacent section 
and is then forced into place, as shown in 
Fig: 5, by hydraulic force or other Suitable 
means, whereby the iron ring is compressed 
and flattened by the pressure, so that the 
parts are held firmly together. The project 
ing nipple is cast as smoothlyaspossible, as 
wellas the other portions of the section, and 
Without any furtherfinishing they are allse 
curelyfastened together, asabovementioned. 
i To insure the nipple 6 being suficiently 
hard and smooth, it is cast in a chill (ofiron) 
at the same time the body is cast. The iron 
ring, being of round wire or substantially 
round in cross-section, rendersit possible to 
use two similar metals of substantially the 
same hardness for this purpose, whereas a 
comparatively wide flat ring of similar ma 
terial and of the same hardness could not be 
used to forma good joint without so great an 
increase of pressureas Would beliable to in 
jure the parts desired to be put together. 
The packing-ring and section being of the 
same material, the expansion and contraction 
is the same, so that the joint is very durable 
as Wellas strong. This is an important fea 
ture in my device. When the packing-ring 
is of soft metaland the parts to be joined are 
of hard metal, the joint cannot be as strong 
asit Would beif the packingwas of a similar 
metal of the same hardness. 
Itiswell known that two dissimilar metals 
expand and shrink differently by such 
changes of temperature asa radiatoris sub 
jected to. Consequently the joint is liable 
by continued. heating and cooling to become 
leaky and unfit for the use it was intended 
for. By making the parts to be joined to 
getherand the packing-ring of the same metal 
and substantially round in cross-section, the 
objections above mentioned are a Voided. 
I am aware that tapering nipples and cor 
responding tapering Sockets have heretofore 
been used with a comparatively wide and filat 
packingring of Softer materialthan the point 
to bepacked and the parts puttogether with 
heavypressure. Itherefore do not claim such 
construction; but 
What I do claim is 
A radiator-section having on one side, a 
tapering nipple and On the other sidea cor 
90 
95 
I00 
| 0 
- 20 
30 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563457.txt	(No Model.) 
E. N. DICKERSON, 
ACETYLENE GAS PRODUCER 
No. 563,457. 
Patented July 7, 1896. 
Ivector 
22-4- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD N. DICKERSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ACETYLENE-GAS PRODUCER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,457, dated July 7, 1896. 
Application filed January 3, 1896, Serial No. 574,205, (No model.) 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWARD N. DICKERSON, 
of No. 253 Broadway, in the city, county, and 
State of New York, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Gas-Producing Appa 
ratas, of which the following is a full, true, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in apparatus designed for the purpose of form 
ing gas by the combination of a liquid and a 
Solid, and is especially applicable to the for 
mation of acetylene gas by combining calcium 
carbid with water. It is especially applicable 
to the filling of holders or receptacles at in 
tervals, and its especial advantage is that no 
valve-opening is required to introduce the 
calcium carbid into the generator, the gen 
erator being so arranged as that it is sealed 
by the water-pressure in process of genera 
tion, while when it is to be charged it is open 
to the atmosphere. 
My invention will be readily understood 
from the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a plan view; Fig. 2, a 
section through Fig. 3 on the line y y, and 
Fig. 3 a cross-section through Fig. 2 on the 
line aca. 
The apparatus consists generally of a mov 
able receptacle 2 for receiving the calcium 
carbid, located in a suitable tank 1. The 
said receptacle is pivoted on the shaft 3, by 
means of which it can be elevated above the 
Water or depressed into the position shown in 
the drawings. It is provided with a grating 
19 and a pivoted grating 20. The receptacle 
2 may be of any suitable shape, but, as shown, 
is U-shaped in cross-section. The shaft 3 is 
preferably made square, though it may be of 
any suitable construction, and the receptacle 
2 is carried upon it by lugs 4, provided with 
suitable set-screws. When the apparatus is 
of considerable size, the counterbalance 7 may 
be employed and the receptacle may be ele 
vated by means of a Worm 6 and gear 5, mesh 
ing therewith. The gear is provided with 
stop 8, which engages in its elevated position 
with stop 9 on the frame supporting the Worm. 
Of course in Small apparatuses a Worm-gear 
is not required, but a suitable stop should be 
conveniently arranged to hold the vessel in 
its upper position, the said stop not being 
2C) 
25 
35 
 
55 
75 
necessary where a worm is employed. The 
pivoted grating 20 is locked in its closed po 
sition in any suitable Way, as shown, by bell 
crank bolts 21, pivoted at 22. When these 
bolts are thrown out of the Way, as, for in 
stance, by the connecting-bar 24, the grating 
20 can be raised parallel to the side of the ves 
sel in which it is pivoted. Thisis, of course, 
done when the vessel is raised, so that the U 
stands upright. When, however, the bar 24 
is swung to the left, as shown in Fig. 2, it is 
arrested by the fixed stop 25, and is held in 
position by the spring 23. The receptacle or 
generating vessel 2 is provided with a drain 
cock 10, by which it can be emptied when 
raised, and which cock also serves when the 
vessel is lowered to allow the escape of any 
air when the gas is generating and before it 
passes to the service-pipes. . 
A flexible gas connection 11 connects with 
the upper part of the generator 2, as shown 
in Fig. 2, and also connects with the box 12, 
from which at another part the gas passes 
through the condensing-coil 13, which con 
nects with the water-receptacle 14, from which 
the gas passes again to the holder or other 
service by pipe 19. 
In the generation of acetylene gas consid 
erable water is carried off with the gas. This 
will then pass into the box. 12, closed at the 
top and open at the bottom, and sealed, of 
course, by the water in the vessel 1. Any re 
maining vapor will be condensed in the con 
denser 13 and received in the vessel 14, from 
which it can be drawn out at times through 
the drip-cock 15. 
The lime which falls to the bottom of the 
vessel 1 can be removed through the hand 
hole 16 or otherwise, and the vessel itself can 
be emptied when desired through the drain 
COck 17. 
The operation of my device will now be 
readily understood. The generator 2 is raised 
to the upper position either by the Worm-gear 
or by a suitable handle. The grating being 
raised, the chamber between the grating 19 
and 20 is filled with carbid, any water in the 
vessel lying at that time in the lower bend of 
the U. The generating-chamber is then low 
ered to the position shown in Fig. 3, and the 
water-level being properly adjusted the gen 
eration of gasimmediately commences. If de 
9o 
95 
IOO 
2 
563,457 
n 
described. 
in its upper position it is turned with its water 
opening upward and in its lower position with 
its Water-opening downward, substantially as 
2. In a gas-producing apparatus, the com 
bination with a tank, of a pivoted receptacle 
mounted to move in the tank, the receptacle 
being provided with a grating 20, and with a 
gas-outlet 11, connected with that part of said 
pivoted receptacle which is upward when the 
Said receptacle is in its operative position and 
mechanism for moving the receptacle into its 
inoperative position in the tank, substantially 
as described. 
3. The combination with the water-tank 1, 
of a receptacle 2, containing a fixed grating 
19, and a movable grating 20, and mechanism 
for turning the same, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
E. N. DICKERSON. 
Witnesses: 
H. CouTANT, 
ERNEST M. WELCH. 
O 
sired, the air may first be purged through the 
purge-cock 10. Then the gas passes, as be 
fore indicated, to the holder. This action 
Will continue until the carbid is exhausted 
if the difference in the water-level between 
the outside and the inside of the generating 
chamber exceeds the pressure of the holder. 
The Water-level will be lowered within the 
generating-Vessel as the pressure in the holder 
increases and the generation will be, to that 
extent, automatically controlled. 
I hereby disclaim the combination of the 
condenser with the apparatus herein shown, 
having filed a separate application therefor 
on the 25th day of May, 1896, Serial No. 
592,980. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a gas-producing apparatus the com 
bination with a tank for containing water, of 
a pivoted receptacle mounted to move in said 
tank, the said receptacle being closed at its 
top and provided with a connection for the 
escape of gas and having an opening for the 
entry of Water, mechanism for supporting a 
Solid material in said pivoted receptacle and 
mechanism for turning the receptacle so that 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563557.txt	J. BUCKLEY, 
TUBUTAR STEAM GENERATOR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet, l. 
Patented July 7, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
RAW 
El 
R. 
R 
IEER 
IZVI A. AEA 
AWE) A2. 
A 
R. 
WWE 
W 
A. 
R. 
  
 
 
IWhy W.H.W. 
AAZ 
IEEE 
 
  
S9, 
Z2.T 
a 76eae 
y 
(No Model.) 
No. 563,557. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
czest: 
/.4. Zzazzazazz. 
 
(No Model.) 
J, BUCKLEY. 
TUBUIAR STEAM GENERATOR. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 563,557, 
 
Patented July 7, 1896. 
s 
& E 
s 
saysEas 
-S 
S 
N 
cAzes f: 
e/G 3, 20-ezzazz. 
2. G2 7z 
s 
S 
s 
EU, KUU 
L S2 S4 
essay E 
= e de 
sists 
ld 
| 
Q) 
sHZ 
Boys 
R 
Z72 ve.72 for: 
6-c1667 
7a, 8, 6.7%rez, caz. 
--- 
J. BUCKLEY. 
TUBULAR STEAM GENERATOR, 
4. Sheets 
Sheet 3, 
Patented July 7, 1896. 
No Model.) 
No. 563,557, 
 
age 4 
Z722/e7ctor; 
-764 
7/42.2%t; 
THe MoRRIS 
o-LTHO. Washi NGTON. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 563,557. 
 
 
 
(RSSONRSSRSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 
J. BUCKLEY. 
TUBULAR STEAM GENERATOR, 
4. Sheets 
Sheet 4, 
Patented July 7, 1896. 
77 10 
- Z Z. 77 
- Zaver tor: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BUCKLEY, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
ROCHESTER MACHINE TOOL WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
TUBULAR STEAM - GENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,557, dated July 7, 1896. 
Application filed December 9, 1896, Serial No. 571,514. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom, it naily concern. 
Beit known that I, JOHN BUCKLEY, of Roch 
ester, in the county of Monroe and State of 
New York, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Tubular Steam-Generators, 
Which improvement is fully set forth in the 
following specification and shown in the ac 
Companying drawings. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
an improved tubular steam-generator which 
shall contain no large, solid, or unbroken 
bodies of Water and which shall be of conven 
ient construction, and a generator in which, 
on account of its peculiar construction, all of 
its interior parts, including those exposed to 
the direct action of the heat from the furnace 
and liable to give out, are readily accessible 
for examination and repairs. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
duce a steam-generator in which the different 
relative expansions and contractions of the 
Various parts from variations or differences 
in the action of the heat are provided for to 
the end that the joints shall remain tight and 
perfect. 
The object of the invention is, further, to 
produce a steam-generator having large evap 
orating - surface within a relatively small 
Space and consequently be a quick steamer, 
and One that shall be comparatively proof 
against foaming, and will furnish dry steam 
at the top. 
The invention comprises, in addition to 
mud-drums, two parallel series of stand-pipes 
made up in part of steam-generating sections 
each having a series of horizontal evaporat 
ing tubes or pipes of peculiar construction, 
each of which sections, with its retinue of 
tubes or pipes and return-bends, being 
adapted to be readily removed from the stand 
pipe for the purpose of examination and re 
pairs. " 
The invention consists in other novel fea 
tures and advantageous combinations of 
parts, allhereinafter fully described and more 
particularly pointed out. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
plan of the steam-generator with the jacket 
horizontally sectioned. Fig. 2 is a plan of 
parts at the base of the device, parts being 
horizontally sectioned as on the dotted line 
22 in Fig. 5. Fig. 3 is a front end view seen 
as indicated by arrow 3 in Figs. 1 and 5, the 
jacket and shoes or sills being vertically sec 
tioned. Fig. 4 is a rear end view seen as in 
dicated by arrows 4 in Figs. 1 and 5, the 
jacket and sills being vertically sectioned. 
Fig. 5 is a side elevation seen as indicated by 
arrow 5 in Fig. 1, the jacket being vertically 
sectioned. Fig. 6 is a side elevation of an 
evaporating-section detached. Fig. 7 is a 
central longitudinal section of a stand-pipe, 
the plane cutting the mud-drum transversely. 
Fig. 8 is a plan of the end of the barrel of a 
stand-pipe. Fig. 9 is an axial section of the 
upper part of the barrel, taken on the dotted 
line 99 in Fig. 8. Figs. 10 and 11 show, respec 
tively, a plan and an edge View of a packing 
ring. Figs. 7 to 11, inclusive, are drawn to 
Scales larger than that of the other figures. 
Referring to the parts shown, A A are two 
parallelhorizontalmud-drums, preferably cy 
lindrical inform, usually placed in horizontal 
metallic shoes or sills B B, as of gutter-iron. 
From these mud-drums rise two series of 
stand-pipes C C, as shown the number and 
the height of the stand-pipes depending upon 
the size or steaming capacity of the generator 
to be produced in any given case. These 
stand-pipes are composed in part of vertical 
T connections or Ts'aa, at their upperends, 
which T's are connected in pairs by horizon 
tal cross-pipes b. Over the whole is a longi 
tudinal steam-drum D, connected with each 
of the cross-pipes b by a T connection c and 
a nipple d, which form continuous connec 
tions between the stand-pipes and the steam 
drums. Between the two rows or series of 
stand-pipes is the furnace-space G., Sheet 2, 
and a floor E of ordinary grate-bars, Figs. 2 
and 3. A sheet-metal jacket F, substantially 
of common construction, is placed in position 
to cover and inclose the whole generator, open 
ings being formed therethrough for furnace 
doors, inlet and exit pipes, Smoke-pipe, Steam 
The stand-pipes are 
and Water gages, &c. 
further composed in part of independent sec 
tions e, Fig. 6, each provided with a series of 
horizontal evaporating tubes or pipes f with 
Each section e is provided 
return-bends g. 
With an upper and a lower T connection h i, 
respectively, at which two points the series 
, 
75 
85 
95 
ICO 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
g 
568,557 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
of evaporating-tubes communicate with the 
stand-pipe, these being the only communica 
tions between the evaporating-tubes and the 
stand-pipe. In making up the generator 
these sections are alternated, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 5, the evaporating-tubes flapping upon 
each other and extending wholly across the 
furnace-space over the grate-bars. 
Below the sections e the stand-pipes consist 
of cylindrical parts or barrelsk, joined to the 
mud-drums by nipples l, as clearly shown in 
Fig. 7. To hold the various parts of the stand 
pipes together, axial longitudinal bolts in are 
employed, headed above the T connections Ct. 
and threaded into parts O, Sheet 4, in the up 
per ends of the barrels k. The threaded parts 
O are connected with the outer shells of the 
barrels k, as shown in Figs. 8 and 9, in a man 
ner to leave vertical openingsp, which admit 
of a free communication for the water and 
steam between the mud-drums and all parts 
above them, including the steam-drum D. 
The adjacent ends of the T connections a 
and h, Fig. 7, are made plain and flat, be 
tween which are placed flat packing-rings r, 
preferably of copper. Likewise the ends of 
the T connections i and the ends of the adja 
cent parts e and k are made plain and flat, 
there being employed between them flat cop 
per rings S. (Shown in Figs.10 and 11.) Now, 
On account of the plain surfaces or joints be 
tween the parts at and h and and k, and from 
the construction of the parts generally of the 
generating-sections, as above described, it 
will be understood that by withdrawing a 
bolt in at any time upward out of the stand 
pipe any steam-generating section may be 
withdrawn or slipped out horizontally from a 
stand-pipe in the direction indicated by the 
arrow in Fig. 6 without in any way disturb 
ing any other part of the generator. Thus 
the parts of any section may be readily ex 
amined and repaired and the section be re 
placed with very little loss of time. 
The evaporating-sections are purposely 
made with continuous tubing f and return 
bends, having only two connections with the 
vertical part or stand-pipe, that is to say, at 
the bottom at i and at the top ath. Thus a 
continuous uninterrupted passage for the 
Water and steam is provided between the two 
points i and h through said tubing. On ac 
collint of this construction of the section there 
is little shifting of the water in the vertical 
part between the points i and h, the upward 
flow between those points being mainly 
through the tubes f. Through these tubes 
the flow of Water and steam is rapid, the water 
being kept more constantly in the furnace 
space directly over the fire, resulting in a 
lnuch more rapid evaporation than if the flow 
was a considerable part of the time by way of 
the vertical part of the section; or, to further 
explain, the tubes if take water from the 
stand-pipes at i and deliver it, largely con 
verted into steam, back into the stand-pipes 
at h, from which points the steam quickly 
- 
passes into the drum D. This is a matter of 
great importance in the plan and construc 
tion of the generator, for, on account of it, 
the comparatively cool water drawn from the 
lower part of a stand-pipe is caused to pass 
many times backward and forward through 
the furnace-space without becoming again 
mingled with the cooler water in the stand 
pipe. As a consequence the water in the sec 
tions becomes most wholly converted into 
steam before it is reintroduced into the stand 
pipe on its way to the steam-drum. 
The final discharge of the mingled steam 
and water from the upper pipes f of the sec 
tions into the stand-pipes is above the Water 
line, as appears in Fig. 3, and as the contents 
of the small pipes fare discharged into the 
stand-pipes of large relative diameters the 
velocity of the flow is instantly checked, which 
results in an easy separation of the water from 
the steam. The water readily drops down 
onto the water at the water-line while the 
steam passes onward to the drum. 
So far as the matter of generating steam 
itself is concerned the upper pipef of the 
section, Fig. 3, instead of rentering the 
stand-pipe at h, might make a return-bend at 
that point and lead thence directly into the 
steam-drum; but such a construction would 
tie the section to place in the structure and 
render its removal inconvenient. Further 
more, by causing said upper pipef to lead 
back into the upper end of the stand-pipe and 
thence through a different pipe to the steam 
drum much drier steam for the drum is in 
sured, as will be hereinafter fully explained. 
Now, regarding said Fig. 3, it will be observed 
that the right-hand T connection a, for in 
stance, and the contiguous pipe b, with the T 
connection candinippled, secured to the drum, 
together constitute a rigid self-sustaining 
arm, so that if the evaporator-section e be re 
moved said arm will maintain its place and 
be in position to receive the section again 
when replaced. Thus a free removal and re 
placing of the section is facilitated. 
The horizontal steam-pipes b, extending 
between the opposing T connections at of op 
posite stand-pipes, are made larger in diam 
eter than that of the pipes or tubes f, so as to 
further provide for a flow of dry steam to the 
drum D. These pipes b, being of large di 
ameter, cause the flow of steam through them 
to be less rapid and violent than it is through 
the smaller pipes.f, on account of which any 
Water that might at any time be carried into 
said pipes b by the onflowing steam easily 
becomes separated from the latter by gravi 
tation and drops back into the still larger 
stand-pipes through the Ts C, the dry steam 
only flowing into the drum D; and it will be 
observed that the steam-passages all the way 
from the upper pipes.fof the sections to the 
drum are large in cross-section compared 
with that of the pipes.f, on account of which 
the Water becomesthoroughly separated from 
the steam before the latter enters the drum. 
75 
9o 
IOO 
IId 
II5 
 
568,557 
3. 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
Steam is taken from the drum D in the or 
dinary manner from an opening f", Figs. 1 
and 3, as may be convenient. 
In case it should be wished to have the evap 
orating-tubes extend downward to form a 
backfor the furnace-space the two rear stand 
pipes are shortened by Omitting the barrelsk, 
as shown in Fig. 4, the nipples l connecting 
directly with the T connections i. In this 
construction of the two rear sections the de 
pressed T connections a are connected with 
the T connections cunder the steam-drum by 
means of nipplest u v and elbows at ac. These 
parts together make communication complete 
between the mud-drums and the steam-drum 
and intermediate parts. 
The water supply for the generator enters 
through a pipe y, Figs. 1 and 5, and passing 
through a series of horizontal pipes 2, above 
the sections and beneath the steam-pipes b, 
finally passes down through a pipe a', Figs. 1 
and 4, thence through a pipe b' into the mud 
drums A. The pipes 2, collectively, consti 
tute a heater for the feed-water. I also pre 
fer to connect the opposite ends of the mud 
drums, Figs. 1 and 3, with a pipe c', provided 
with T's dande', for the convenience of at 
taching blow-off pipes for clearing said mud 
drums, and for other purposes. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A steam-generator consisting of a steam 
drum and mud-drums, and two series of stand 
pipes, each stand-pipe comprising a barrel, a 
generator-section and a T connection, with 
means for connecting the barrels with the 
mud-drums, said generator-sections being 
formed of laterally-extending steam-generat 
ing pipes and return-bends, and pipes, b, 
above the generator-sections connecting said 
T's and the steam-drum, said pipes b being 
larger in diameter than the generating-pipes 
of the sections, substantially as set forth. 
45 
55 
2. A steam-generator consisting of a steam 
drum and mud-drums, and two series of stand 
pipes, each stand-pipe comprising a barrel, a 
generator-section and a T connection, with 
means for connecting the barrels with the 
mud-drums, said generator-sections being 
formed of laterally-extending steam-generat 
ing pipes and return-bends, and pipes b con 
necting said Ts and the steam-drum above 
the generator-sections, and a series of hori 
Zontal pipes between the sections and said 
pipes b, connected with the mud-drums, sub 
stantially as shown. 
3. A steam-generator comprising mud 
drums and a steam-drum, and series of par 
allel stand-pipes supported by the mud 
drums, each stand-pipe comprising a steam 
generating section removable from the stand 
pipe, the parts of said sections and the other 
parts of the stand-pipes adjacent to the sec 
tions being made plain so the sections may be 
readily slipped out of or withdrawn from the 
stand-pipes, substantially as shown. 
4. A tubular steam-generator comprising 
mud-drums and a steam drum or space, and 
series of stand-pipes comprising a series of . 
steam-generating sections above the mud 
drums, and pipes connecting the stand-pipes 
with the steam-space, and longitudinal pipes 
over the steam-generating sections and below 
the steam-drum, connected with the mud 
drums, and furnace-space beneath the steam 
generating sections, with grate-bars, and a 
jacket or a casing inclosing the whole, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose Specified, 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 2d day of December, 1895, in the 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN BUCKLEY. 
65 
7 O 
75 
Witnesses: 
ENOs B. WHITMORE, 
MI. L. WINSTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563657.txt	(No Model.) 
s 
No. 563,657. 
D. F. CARWER, 
SWITCH AND MATE, 
Patented July 7, 1896. 
\SY 
WINESSES 
7%. Y&e4ee. 
4.z822-64 
If WEATOR 
g) of -6.2 ele, \ 
By -?ul V6 
ATIOREYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID FREDERICK CARVER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO JOHN CROSBIE BRACKENRIDGE, OF RICIIMOND HILL, 
NEW YORK. 
SWITCH AND MATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,657, dated July 7, 1896. 
Application filed October 16, 1895, Serial No. 565,848, (No model.) 
To cell athlon, it nudity conceri. 
Beit known that, DAVID FREDERICKCAR 
VER, of Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
5 and useful Improvements in Switches and 
Mates, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
The present invention is an improvement 
on the invention forming the subject of 
To United States Patent No. 538,098, granted 
April 23, 1895. In said patent there is a 
SWitch-tonguehaving a certain novel arrange 
ment of flanges, which, to quote from the pat 
ent in question, preferably are given such 
I5 a length and breadth as give the tongue a con 
tact along its whole length with either the 
guard-rail or the running-rail' of a switch. 
I find it desirable to modify the switch hav 
ing the above-mentioned characteristics, to 
20 the end that proper provision may be made 
for the entrance of the ordinary switch-iron 
or any equivalent device, mainly with the ob 
ject of permitting dirt to be removed from be 
tween the opposing side edges of the tongue 
25 and rails adjacent to the pivoted end of the 
tongue. 
The invention consists in the novel features 
hereinafter particularly described, and de 
fined in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a broken plan view of a switch 
35 embodying my improvements. Fig. 2 is a 
fragmentary perspective view on a larger 
scale, showing a portion of the tongue and 
guard-rail; and Fig. 3 is a cross-section on 
line 33, Fig. 1, but drawn to a somewhat 
The tongue A is pivoted, as at Cl, between 
the running-rail B and guard-rail C, and it 
has side flanges C. a'at its base, running from 
the pivoted end of the tongue toward the 
45 point, the tongue shown having the flange a', 
which is adjacent to the guard-rail, extending 
almost to the point of the tongue, while the. 
opposite flange a terminates considerably 
short of the point. 
In order that the switch-iron may be en 
4o larger scale than the latter. 
So 
30 
5 
65 
tered between the flanged tongue and the side 
rails for removing dirt, I form adjacent to 
the pivot of the tongue openings of a width 
to readily receive such iron. These openings 
I preferably form as shown, that is, partly in 
the tongue-flanges and partly in the adjacent 
rails. Thus the tongue-flanges are cut out, 
as at a, in a manner that the side wall at of 
Such opening ranges Outwardly from the real 
end, and the bottom wall a inclines down 
Wardly from the top of the flange and extends 
only for part of the length of the opening, the 
flange being cut completely through vertically 
at its forward end, as at (t", whereby the switch 
iron may pass downward through the open 
ing to the bed- d of the switch-casting, as 
will be readily understood. Similar openings 
b careformed in the running-rail Band guard 
rail C. Thus the side walls b'c' range diag 
onally. The bottom walls b c are inclined 
downwardly and terminate short of the front 
end of the respective openings bc, said open 
ings at the front extending vertically com 
pletely through the rails, all as described with 
reference to the tongue, except that the side 
walls b' c' by this arrangement converge in 
directions toward the side walls C of the 
tongue-openings. The bottom walls of all the 
openings have the same inclination. With 
this construction the Switch-iron or other tool 
or device may readily be entered between the 
adjacent sides of the tongue and rails and 
will be guided to the bed d, and the dirt will 
readily be forced out at the forward ends of 
the openings to the wider spaces at the for 
ward end of the tongue and readily removed. 
It will be understood that the openings or re 
cesses in the tongue and the rails extend lat 
erally from the longitudinal passages between 
the rails and the tongue which are adapted to 9o 
receive the car-wheel flanges, so that said re 
cesses or openings give access to the bed (l, 
even at that side of the tongue which is in con 
tact with the rail-for instance, the rail B 
in the position illustrated by Fig. 1. It will 
be furtheir observed that the said recesses are 
open at the top, so as to permit of the down 
ward insertion of a switch-iron or the like, 
and they range longitudinally of the tongue, 
thereby forming guideways permitting the Ioo 
75 
7 O 
So 
9 
45 
side wall of said base and adjacent to the 
pivot end, with alongitudinally-extending lat 
eral recess open at the top, Substantially as 
described. 
6. A switch having recesses open at the top, 
said recesses extending laterally from the 
space or passage between the tongue and rails 
and adjacent to the pivot end of the tongue, 
said recesses having diagonally-ranging side 
Walls, leading to the space between the tongue 
and rails, substantially as described. 
7. A switch having recesses open at the top, 
said recesses extending laterally from the 
Space or passage between the tongue and rallis 
and adjacent to the pivot of the tongue, Saldi 
recesses having inclined bottom walls at their 
rear ends, said bottom Walls terminating short 
of the forward ends of the recesses, substan 
tially as described. 
S. A switch having side openings in the 
tongue and in the side rails, at a point adja 
cent to the pivot end of the tongue, substan 
tially as described. 
9. A switch having side openings in the 
O 
tongue and the side rails, the side walls. E . 
adjacent openings ranging diagonally anot 
converging toward each other at the front, 
substantially as described. 
10. A switch having side openings in the 
running-rail and guard-rail at the inner sides 
of the same, at a point adjacent to the pivot 
end of the tongue, substantially as describet. 
DAVID FREDERICK CARVER. 
s 5 
65 
2 
563,65? 
switch-iron or other tool to be readily moved 
along the tongue and rail. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Tetters 
Patent 
1. A switch or mate provided, adjacent to 
the pivot end of the tongue, with recesses 
open at the top and extending laterally from 
the longitudinal passage between the tongue 
and rails, to permit entrance of a switch-iron 
or the like between the tongue and the rails 
adjacent to the pivot end of the tongue, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A switch or mate having its tongue pro 
vided With a flange at the base, and a recess 
Open at the top and extending laterally from 
the longitudinal passage between the tongue, 
flange and rails, to permit entrance of a 
switch-iron or the like between the tongue, 
flange and the rails adjacent to the pivot end 
of the tongue, substantially as described. 
3. A switch or mate provided, adjacent to 
the pivot end of the tongue, with recesses 
open at the top and extending longitudinally 
of the tongue at the sides of the longitudinal 
passages between the tongue and rails, to per 
mit entrance and longitudinal movement of a 
switch-iron or the like between the tongue 
and the rails adjacent to the pivot end of the 
tongue, substantially as described. 
4. A tongue for Switches and mates, having 
its side. Wall provided near the pivot end, with 
alongitudinally-extending lateral recess open 
at the top, substantially as described. 
5. A tongue for Switches and mates, having 
a side flange at the base and provided in the 
15 
25 
 
Witnesses: 
J. L. MCAULIFFE, 
JAMES MI. HENLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563757.txt	No Model.) 
No. 563,757. 
 
A. C. ESTABR00K. 
DEVICE FOR ASSEMBLING EYEETS. 
Patented July 14, 1896. 
 
7. 
 
 
 
 
/2 
/9 
23 L.A.' 
33.33.3% 
Z2 ... 
-/9 . 
s 
-Zzeievereiaz v. 
J?eevesove-C.2s2azzwo 
297 - ?eeke 6, &-colk 
Uley, 
o 
) 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALANSON C. ESTABROOK, OF NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
DEVICE FOR ASSEMBLING EYELETs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,757, dated July 14, 1896; 
Application filed July 13, 1895, Serial No. 555,864, (No model.) 
. 
 
7o 
. 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, ALANSON C. ESTA 
BROOK, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Northampton, in the county of Hamp 
shire and State of Massachusetts, have in 
Verited certain new and useful Improvements 
in Devices for Assembling Eyelets, of which 
1.he following is a specification, reference be 
ing had therein to the accompanying draw 
lingS. 
In Some cases eyelets for use on boots and 
shoes and in other places have applied to one 
df the ends of each thereof a covering or fin 
isk of plastic material or the like. In order 
1so facilitate the application of the said cov 
ering or finish, it is usual to arrange. the eye 
lets in a series in a perforated plate forming: 
(Sme part of a mold, the ends of the eyelets : 
which are to be covered or finished being ex 
posed in position to receive the covering or 
finish. As is well known, eyelets commonly 
have one end thereof expanded or larger than 
the other, and when this is the case the cov 
ering or finish aforesaid is applied to the: 
Aerlarged or expanded end of each. In the 
operation of assembling the eyelets having 
enlarged or expanded ends, as just men 
tioned, the latter ends must all be presented 
in positign for the reception of the covering 
or finishing material. 
My present invention has for its object to 
provide inaproved means for assembling a 
series of eyelets in proper position and in 
readiness for subsequent transfer to the per 
forated molds, plates, or the like, to which it 
is necessary to apply them for the covering 
or finishing operation. 
The invention consists in devices of novel 
character and construction for performing 
this work, all as will first be described with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, and 
afterward will be more particularly pointed 
?alt, and elearly defined in the claims at the 
close of this specification. 
ligure 1 of the accompanying drawings is 
a serspective-of-assembling devices embody 
ing tiny invention. Fig. 2 is a view in side 
elevation of what I am accustomed to call the 
assembling - plate,' showing it detached 
'from the other devices which are represented 
Fig. 3 is a view in section of a part 
in Fig. 1. 
of the said assembling-plate, showing the 
holes which are provided therein for the re 
ception of the eyelets, with the said holes 
occupied by the eyelets, and also showing 55 
portions of a transferring device with pro 
jections thereon that extend into the holes 
through the eyelets. This view shows the 
parts in the position which they occupy When 
the transferring device is first applied to the 6o 
assembling-plate. Fig. 4 is a similar view 
showing the same parts, but representing 
them as inverted as required for the discharge 
of the eyelets from the assembling-plate onto 
the transferring device, the assembling-plate 65 
being represented as raised above the trans 
ferring device, and the eyelets being shown 
as disengaged from the assembling-plate Onto 
the projections or pins of the transferring 
device. 
At 1 is what I term the assembling plate 
or device. It is formed with a series of holes 
2, at spaced distances apart, and it has around 
its edges raised sides or flanges 3, 3, 4, and 4. 
The sides 3 3 are fixed, while each of the 75 
sides 4 4 is hinged, as at 5, to the plate , SO 
as to enable it to be turned down. When de 
sired into the dotted-line position which is 
Each 
represented in the case of one thereof. 
of the said sides 4 is normally held in its up- 8o 
right position by means of a spring 6, one end 
of which is connected to the edge of the plate 
at 7, while the other end thereof is connected 
to the end of the hinged side 4 as at S. When 
one of the hinged sides 4 is swung down- 85 
wardly into the dotted-line position in Fig. 2, 
the point of connection 8 passes below a 
straight line passing through point 7 and the 
axis on which the said side 4 turns, and hence 
in the dotted-line position of the hinged side 9o 
the spring 6 operates with a tendency to main 
tain the side in its open condition. While I 
have shown two sides hinged, only one side 
may be hinged, if preferred. The holes in 
the bottom of plate 1 correspond closely in 95 
diameter with the eyelets, but are enough 
larger to permit the latter to pass leadily into 
the same, and when in place in the said holes 
2 the eyelets stand as in Fig. 3 with their 
cylindrical portions in upright position. The Ioo 
2 
563,757 
 
fit between the holes and the eyelets is as 
close as is practicable, in order that the holes 
may serve to determine with accuracy the 
positions of the eyelets and thereby facilitate 
5 the transfer of the eyelets as hereinafter de 
scribed. To provide for the enlargement 
Which is formed at one end of each of the 
eyelets, the upper portion of the hole 2 is or 
may be enlarged as shown clearly in Figs. 3. 
Io and 4. This enlargement of the upper por 
tions of the holes facilitates the entrance of 
the eyelets into said holes. 
The assembling of a series of eyelets in the 
holes 2 of the plate 1 is effected by placing a 
quantity of eyelets on top of the said plate, 
and then giving a shaking motion to the lat 
ter. This shaking motion will cause the eye 
lets speedily to find their way into the holes 
2, in which they will stand in the position 
that is indicated in Fig. 3, with the enlarge 
ments uppermost. The 
plate 1 may be 
shaken by hand, but preferably in practice, 
for the purpose of giving a shaking motion 
to the said plate 1, Ishall provide a shaking 
table 9, upon which the plate is to be placed. 
The said table 9 is or may be provided with 
Suitable retaining devices for keeping the 
plate in position thereon. For example, I 
have illustrated projections 10 10 adjacent 
to the edges of the table, the plate being 
placed between these projections, as will be 
obvious. Any convenient means for sup 
porting the table may be employed. I have 
represented the table as supported by means. 
of links 11 11, the upper ends of which are 
pivotally connected with the table, while the 
lower. ends thereof are applied to brackets or 
stands 12 12. Any convenient means of ac 
tulating the table may be employed. I have 
shown a rotating crank 13, which is connected 
by means of a link or rod 14 with the table. 
In the use of the assembling-plate, it is first 
placed on the shaking-table in proper posi 
tion between the retaining devices or projec 
tions 10. A quantity of eyeletsis then placed 
45 
: On top of the same, the said eyelets being re 
tained from falling off by the sides or flanges 
3, 3, 4, and 4. As above indicated, the shak 
ing motion causes the eyelets to find their 
Way into the holes. The holes will speedily 
become filled, after which one of the hinged 
sides 4 Will be turned down into the dotted 
line position in Fig. 2, and the excess of eye 
lets will be brushed or poured off into a suit 
able receptacle. 
For the purpose of taking the eyelets from 
the assembling-plate 1 and applying them 
properly to the holes in the perforated mold 
plate hereinbefore mentioned, I may employ 
6o a transferring device on the order of that 
designated in Figs. 3 and 4, the said trans 
ferring device consisting of a plate having 
applied to one side thereof a series of pins or 
projections 18, that are adapted to enter the 
65 holes in the eyelets which are contained in 
So 
55 
the holes in the assembling-plate. 
Fig. 8 
shows this transferring device applied to the 
assembling-plate 1 preparatory to l'elnoying 
the eyelets from the latter. The parts hav 
ing been put together as in Fig. 3, cithel'be 
7 
fore or subsequent to the removal of the 
assembling-plate 1 from the shaking-table, 
they are then inverted and are separated by . 
raising the assembling-plate 1 from the trans 
ferring device 17, as indicated in Fig. 4, leavi 
ing the eyelets 19 upon the projections 18 of 
the transferring device. The eyelets are now 
in position to be applied to the holes of the 
perforated mold-plate. The said mold-plate 
then has applied thereto the coperating 
mold-plate used in the art, the desired com: 
position being applied in proper mannel, and 
the molding of the covering is effected in ob 
vious mannel. 
As will be obvious, the spacing apart and 
arrangement of the holes in the assembling 
plate 1 and mold-plate correspond with those 
of the pins or projections on the transferring 
device 17. In other words, the said pins Ol' 
projections register with both the holes 2 in 
the assembling-plate 1 and the holes in the 
mold-plate, as is necessary in order to enable 
the transferring device to coperate with the 
assembling-plate and the mold-plate Succes 
sively, in the manner hereinbefore described. 
Ihave described my devices as intended for 
usein assembling eyelets as aforesaid. While 
in fact they are more especially designed for 
use.in connection with eyelets, it Will be ob 
vious that by slight and obvious adaptation 
they may be utilized without change in the 
principle thereof, in connection with other 
articles as well which require to be arranged 
in series like unto the arrangement of the 
eyelets which is set forth and indicated here 
in before. I wish it to be understood, there 
fore, that I regard such adaptation and use 
as within the scope of my present invention. 
and claims. 
9 
I claim as my invention 
1. The assembling-plate adapted to be re 
moved from the support, provided therefor, 
and having a series of holes 2 at spaced dis 
tances apart for the reception and retention 
of a series of eyelets, and also having upright 
sides or flanges around the said series of holes 
to retain the eyelets from falling off, one or 
more of the said upright sides or flanges be 
ing hinged to enable the same to be turned 
into position to permit the surplus eyelets to 
be brushed or poured off the surface of the 
said plate and having means for holding the 
same in normal position to prevent the es 
cape of eyelets at the edge of the plate, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination with an assembling 
plate having a series of holes at spaced dis 
tances apart for the reception and retention 
of a series of eyelets and also having upright 
'sides or flanges, one or more of which is 
563,757 
3. 
- 
hinged and is provided with means for hold 
ing it in upward-turned position, of a table 
or support to which the said assembling-plate 
may be removably applied, and means for 
shaking the said table or support to cause the 
eyelets to work their way into the holes in 
the said assembling-plate, substantially as 
described. 
 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ALANSON C. ESTABROOK. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. O. PARSONS, 
JENNIE. C. STAHL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563857.txt	 
(No Model.) 
0, HETILESAETER 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
 
0, HELES AETER. 
 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
STEAM SHOWEL, DITCHING MACHINE, AND DREDGE. 
Patented July 14, 1896, 
No. 563,857, 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Modeli.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
- 
0. HETILESAETER, 
STEAM SHOWEL, DITCHING MACHINE, AND DREDGE. 
No. 563,857, 
Patented July 14, l896, 
  
 
Scissista 
|i - | - |E. 
linicit 
 
2Ww) vs. 
???????, " 
?? 
82 
??? 73 ?????????, 
, " *\??? 
 
The CRRIS peters co. Pheto-THO. WaShikiGON, d. t. 
- 0. HET LESAETER, 
STEAM SHOWEL, DITCHING MACHINE, AND DREDGE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
(No Model.) 
No. 563,857, 
Patented July l4, 1896. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
OLAF HIEITLES AETER, OF 
MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN. 
STEAM S H OVEL, DITCH IN G -- MACH INE, AND DREDGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,857, dated July 14, 1896. 
Application filed December 21, 1893, Renewed May 21, 1896, Serial No. 592,487. (No model.) 
T",o Gu.ZZ tu:homn, i; 7mn,tg/ c072,6ce77?,-? 
Be it known that I, OLAF HETLESAETER, of 
Milwaukee, in the county of Milwaukee and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented a new and 
5 useful improvementin Steam Shovels, Ditch 
ing-Machines, and Dredges, of which the fol 
lowing is a description, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which are a 
part of this specification. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in steam shovels, ditching-machines, and 
dredges. It has for its primary object to pro 
vide a machine wherein, through improved 
means for raising the dipper, suspending, and 
I5 thrusting the same, the greatest possible 
power, Speed, and durability are obtained, 
(lead strains are entirely avoided, and the full 
power of the hoisting-engines, less friction, is 
made available at each and every part of the 
2o dipper travel. From the improved construc 
tion also arises otherincidental objects, among 
which may be mentioned, first, the certainty 
with which the dipper may be placed where 
it is Wanted at the start of the cut, due to the 
25 positive hanging of the dipper by stiff links 
instead of loose chains, and also to the bal 
ancing of the dipper-handle and connecting 
parts, as Well as the hoisting-chain, on a cen 
tral pivot or shaft, thus allowing the dipper 
3o itself, part of its weight being extra and over 
balancing, to drop freely and rapidly to any 
desired point, and also to the reduction of the 
friction caused by the hoisting-chain to the 
minimtm. 
Another incidental object is due to the form 
of construction of the machine, whereby no 
part of the machine is over fourteen feet six 
inches above the rails, thus allowing the ship 
ping of same completely mounted or erected. 
With the above and other objects in view 
the invention consists of the devices and 
parts as hereinafter described and claimed 
or their equivalents. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
45 a side elevation of my machine in connection 
with a fragment of a car. Fig. 2 is a plan view 
with the top plate of the oscillating lever re 
HOVed. Fig. 3 is a transverse section on the 
line 33 of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a plan view of 
5o the turn-table and the guide-rolliers carried 
theleby, showing a fragment of the hoisting 
chain passing between said rollers. Fig. 5 is 
35 
493 
 
55 
a side elevation of the pocket-sheave for the 
hoisting-chain and the mounting thereof on 
the boom, showing the mechanism for operat 
ing the friction and brake bands, a portion 
of said roller being broken away for clearer 
illustration of certain parts. Fig. 6 is a plan 
view of Fig. 5, looking down upon the same 
at right angles to the upper edge of the boom. 
Fig. 7 is a transverse section on the line 7 7 
of Fig. 6, and Fig. 8 is a side elevation of my 
device as applied to a float for dredging pur 
poses, also showing a modification in the con 
nection between the oscillating lever and the 
bucket, and also a modification in the air 
rangement of the hoisting-chain. 
Like numerals of reference denote like 
parts throughout the se veral views. 
In the drawings, the numeral 9 indicates a 
car (shown in Figs. I and 2) to which my im 
provements are applied. On this car is 
mounted an engine provided with friction 
drums of any approved type, a boiler, and a 
water-tankfor supplying steam to the engine. 
As all the parts just mentioned, however, are 
common in steam-shovels as ordinarily con 
structed, it is not deemed necessary to spe 
cifically describe or show the same herein. In 
the front end of the car are also provided two 
guide-pulleys 10 10, and forward of these 
pulleys are pivoted, at opposite edges of the 
car, two legs 11 11, which are converged so 
that their upper adjacentends will be in a line 
Over the center of the turn-table 5. These 
upper ends of the legs are united by a cast 
ing 12. The frame formed by the inclined 
legs is held to the position shown in the draw 
ings by means of a third leg 13, which runs 
back to the rear of the car (not shown) and 
is secured to the floor in any desirable man 
ner directly over the rear truck center. 
On the extreme forward end of the car is 
thoroughly bolted to the floor-beams a pivot 
14, and resting and Swinging horizontally on 
this pivot is a turn-table 15, on which the 
forward overhanging machinery is swung and 
stipported. This turn-table is operated by 
means of a chain or cable 16, which has its 
two ends fastened thereto at opposite points, 
and is then extended back between the guide 
pulleys 10 10 to its operating-drum. (Not 
shown.) 
The numerals 17 17 indicate two parallel 
6 5 
o 
75 
95 
OC 
2 
568,857 
? ? 
25 
35 
40 
45 
. 
. 
. 
. 
inclined beams, which constitute the boom 
of the machine. The lower ends of these 
beams are secured to the turn-table, one at 
each side of the center thereof, preferably 
entering and secured in recesses formed in 
said turn-table. 
The numerals 1818 indicate two guy-rods, 
which, at their rear ends, are connected by 
means of a collar 19, provided with an aper 
ture 20, which receives the casting 12, uniting 
the upper ends of the legs 11.11, whereby the 
rods are permitted to swing horizontally on 
the casting 12. The forward ends of these 
rods are apertured to form bearings for a 
transverse shaft 21, which shaft also passes 
through eyes or apertures in the upper ends 
of the boom-bealms. 
Above the upper end of the boom is an 
oscillating lever, which consists of beams 22 
22, preferably of heavy channel-irons, hav 
ing tilheir top flanges united at the center by 
a short plate 23, which prevents the beam 
from buckling or spreading out. Secured to 
and depending from the center of the under 
flanges are bearing-castings 24 24, which are 
provided with eyes to receive the shaft 21. 
The lever 22 22 is made of such width as to 
fit inside of the top of the boom ends 1717, 
the bearings 2424 being located on the shaft 
21 inside of said boom ends. 
About medially one of the beams 22, form 
ing part of the oscillating lever, is inclined 
inward, as indicated at 25, for a short dis 
tance, and then runs rearward to its terminus 
parallel with the other beam, whereby the 
space between the two beams at the rear ends 
permits of the 
thereof is diminished. This 
passage of the channeled chain-guide past 
the thrusting-chain. This chain-guide con 
sists of two channels 2626, connected together 
by means of two plates 27 27, one on each 
side, one of said channels being curved to 
the form of a segment of a circle, and the 
other merely serving to strengthen the former. 
The upper ends of these plates and channels 
pass into the contracted space at the rear of 
the oscillating lever and are securely attached 
to the beams composing said lever. 
At the forward end of the oscillating lever 
are provided two eyed castings 2828, secured, 
respectively, to the beams 22 22, composing 
said lever. In these castings a pin 29 is fitted. 
From opposite ends of this pin are hung stiff 
suspension links or rods 3030, preferably com 
posed of heavy Wrought-iron. 
The numeral 31 indicates a bucket, from 
the lower rim of which project rearwardly two 
lugs 3232, provided each with an inward-ex 
tending trunnion 33, which receive the lower 
ends of the links 30 30. This bucket is pro 
vided with the usual hinged bottom 34, con 
trolled by means of a chain 35, passing through 
the eye of a guide-arm 36 and extending rear 
Ward for convenient manipulation in the cus 
tomary manner. 
The dipper-handle consists of two arms 
37 37, each preferably constructed of double 
channel-irons, the outer, in practice, being 
twelve inches wide and the inner ten incihes 
wide. They are so placed together that the 
flange of the smaller channel-iron fits within 
the fange of the outer, while a cast-iron filler 
38 is placed in the longitudinal space. By 
thus constructing the arms composing the 
dipper-handle, they are strengthened to such 
a degree as to make them capable of With 
standing the greatest possible strain. The 
channel-iron and the fillers composing each 
arm 37 are provided with registering elon 
gated slots 3939, through which the shaft 21 
passes. The arms 37, therefore, respectively 
are arranged on the shaft so as to lie adjacent 
to the inner sides of the bearing-castingS24, 24. 
The outer ends of the arms of the dipper 
handle are rigidly secured to the upper rim 
of the circumference of the bucket, as clearly 
shown in the drawings, and a brace 39' is se 
cured at its upper end to the dipper-handle, 
and extends down obliquely and is secured 
at its lower end to the bottom rim of the 
bucket, thereby forming an additional means 
of firmly uniting the dipper-handle to the 
bucket. 
on the shaft 2:1, between the dipper-arms 
3737, are two loose sheaves. 40 and 41. Shaft 
21 is held against rotation by means of feath 
ers or keys 42.42, arranged in the apertures 
of the upper ends of the beams 1717, which 
feathers or keys, fit into complementary 
grooves 4343 in the shaft. Said shaft is also 
held against endwise movement by the head 
44, at one end thereof, and a pin 45 intersect 
ing the opposite end, both of which also serve 
to keep the guy-rods 1818 in proper position 
with relation to the shaft. 
Near the lower ends of the beams 1717 con 
stituting the boom, and secured to the upper 
edge of each beam, are bearings 46 46 for a 
transverse shaft 47. On this shaft are two 
sheaves 48 and 49, the former keyed or other 
wise secured thereon, and the latter loose on 
the shaft. On each side of the central pocket 
portion of sheave 49, and integral with said 
sheave, are two rims 50 and 51. Extending 
laterally from one of the beams 17, the lower 
one with respect to Fig.6, is a fixed pivot-pin 52. 
Turning freely on this pivot is a hub or collar 
53. A curved arm. 56, rigid with the collar, 
projects rearward therefrom and terminates 
at its free end in a suitable handle. Near 
the forward end of arm 56 is pivoted a con 
necting-link 57, the opposite end of said link 
articulating with one end of a crank 5S, the 
opposite end of said crank connecting with a 
short vertical shaft 59, which turns in a bear 
ing 60, secured to the beam 17 adjacent. The 
upper end of this shaft has projecting there 
from, and at right angles thereto, a second 
crank 61, which has its end forked or bifur 
cated to engage an annular recess 62 in a rod 
63. It will be seen that the two cranks 5S and 
61, rigidly connected to and extending, re 
spectively, from opposite ends of the vertical 
shaft 59, form a bell-crank lever. Shaft 47 
?? 
75 
go 
95. 
; ? ? ?. 
TI I O 
II 5 
I 25 
563,857 
3. 
? ? 
is bored out longitudinally, as indicated at 
64, to receive rod 63, and said rod near its in 
ner end is provided with an opening 65 to re 
ceive one crank of a bell-cranklever 66, which 
5 bell-crank lever is pivoted to a lug 67, pro 
jecting laterally from the sheave 4S. The 
other crank of the ever connects with a short 
link 68, which in turn connects medially with 
a lever 69, said lever having one end pivoted 
to the side of the sheave, and its opposite end 
connected, through a link 70, with a bell 
crank lever. This latter lever is composed 
of the two cranks 71 and 72, the former lo 
cated on the outer face of the sheave and con 
nected to the link 70, as above described, and 
the latter on the inner face of said sheave, 
the two being connected rigidly together by 
means of a short shaft 73 running transversely 
through the sheave 48. Crank 72 has extend 
ing laterally therefrom a pin 74, to which one 
end of a friction-band 75 is connected. This 
band surrounds the rim 50 of sheave 49, and 
is connected at its opposite end to a pin 76, 
projecting laterally from the inner side of 
sheave 48. Also turning freely on the fixed 
pivot-pin 52 is a second collar 77. This collar 
is provided with a rigid rearward-extending 
arm 54, having a counterbalance-Weight 55, 
and the collar is also formed or provided with 
a rigidfoot-operated lever 78, to whichis con 
nected medially a link 79, said link in turn 
having pivotally connected thereto a second 
link S0, the lower end of which connects rig 
idly with the end of a shaft S1, which shaft 
5 is journaled in the two beams 17 17 of the 
boom. This shaft carries thereon a bell 
crank S2, the two cranks of which connect, re 
spectively, with the two ends of a brake-band 
S3, which encircles the rim 51 of sheave 49. 
The numeral 84 indicates the thrusting 
chain or cable, which is connected at one end 
to a loop or eye 85, secured to the upper rim. 
of the bucket at the rear thereof. This chain. 
is then extended back between the arms of 
the dipper-handle to and over sheave 40, 
thence down to sheave 49, and around and 
underneath the same, and thence up again 
and around sheave 41, and thence extended 
back to the rear of the dipper-handle, where 
it is connected to a transverse pin S6. 
The hoisting chain or cable is indicated by 
the numeral 87, and is fastened at its extreme 
end in the end of the rear channel of the 
chain-guide farthest from the hoisting-drum. 
The chain is then extended along this chan 
nel and around sheave 48, and thence back 
between guide-pulleys SSSS, mounted hori 
Zontally on pins 89 89, projecting up from 
the turn-table, the chain finally extending 
back to the drum (not shown) for winding 
the same. 
In the operation of my machine after the 
engine is started the hoisting-drum is caused 
to revolve in the usual manner. As the hoist 
65 ing-chain S7 is wound around said drum, 
- power is applied to the inner end of the os 
cillating lever, which will be forced to re 
 
7 O 
So 
volve on shaft 21. As the oscillating lever is 
actuated by means of power applied to the 
hoisting-chain lying in a curved chain-guide 
of the form of the segment of a circle whose 
center is the pivotal shaft 21, it is evident 
that the pull is always tangential to this cir 
cle and at right angles to the dipper-handle, 
which is a normal to said circle. The move 
ment of the hoisting-chain, causes the pocket 
sheave 48 to revolve, thus making it possible 
to transmit power to the thrusting-chain by 
means of the friction-gearing, whose opera 
tion is next described. The cranesman, who 
takes his position on the turn-table, now de 
presses the operating arm or handle 56. This 
has the effect of operating crank 61, which in 
turn exerts a lateral pull on rod 63, the lat 
ter operating the bell-crank lever 66, which 
in turn, through intermediate connections, 
operates the crank 72, to which one end of 
the friction-band 75 is attached, thus tightly 
clamping said band around the rim 50 of 
sheave 49, and thereby causing said sheave 
to rotate with its companion pocket-sheave 
48, which is rotated by the hoisting-chain 
passing under it. As sheave 49 is rotated, it 
will cause the thrusting-chain 84 to pay out or 
slacken at One end and haul in at the other. 
In regard to sheave 4S it will be seen that 
said sheave, by hoisting in on chain S7, Will be 
rotated in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 6, 
and thereby through the chain exert a pull on 
the end of the operating-lever and rotate the 
same on the shaft 21 and cause the uplifting 
of the bucket or dipper. Now if the force of 
the fiction-band 75 is insufficient to hold the 
dipper to the bank, the brake-band S2 is ap 
plied to the rim 51 by operating the foot-le 
ver 7S, as will be readily understood by ref 
erence to the drawings. When the dipper or 
bucket has been filled, the Swinging chain 
16 is put in operation by the appropriate 
winding drum or drums therefor, and the 
dipper thus swung around to either side of 
the car on which it is desired to dump into 
cars run on parallel side tracks. 
In the ordinary form of steam-shovels the 
dipper-handle works on the boom through a 
rack-and-pinion mechanism. It is evident 
that that portion of my improvement relating 
to the oscillating lever actuated by means of 
power applied to the hoisting-chain lying in 
a circular chain-guide maybe used in con 
nection with a dipper having its handle op 
erated by said rack-and-pinion mechanism, 
and I therefore do not wish to be understood 
as limiting myself to the application of the 
portion of my invention referred to to a dip 
per having its handle mounted on the end of 
the boom, as shown in the accompanying 
drawings. 
In Fig. 8 of the drawings my improvements 
are shown as applied to a float for dredging 
purposes, the arrangement and disposition of 
the parts being such as to afford a deeper 
thrust of the dipper, which, of course, is nec 
essay in dredging-machines. In this form 
95 
CO 
O 
II 5 
?63,857 
... "I'O 
I5 
- 
x 
. 
. 
a slight modification in the hoisting-chain is 
provided, consisting in attaching one end of 
the chain to one of the beams 17 by means 
of an eyed lug 90 or equivalenti device and 
then extending said chain upward over a pull 
ley 91 at the upper end of the channel of the 
chain-guide and thence downward around 
and beneath the sheave 4S, and finally back 
By this arrangement 
to the winding-drum. 
double the purchase or power for raising the 
: oscillating lever is secured over the construc 
tion shown in the other form with the same 
sized engine and gearing. In Fig. S is also 
shown a slight modification in the manner of 
connecting the bucket or dipper to the for 
ward end of the oscillating lever. The sus 
pension-links 30 30, instead of extending 
down from the forward end of the oscillating 
lever to connect to the bucket at the lower and 
rear portion thereof, merely extend to the up 
per rima of said bucket. 
- From the foregoing description the opera 
tion, advantages, and construction of my im 
proved steam-shovel, it is thought, will be 
readily understood. 
it will be seen that by this construction the 
effective power is the same at the lowest point 
of digging as at any other point, or, in other 
words, the machine will dig to the full power 
of the engines, less the fiction, at each and 
every part of the dipper travel. In other 
forms of machines the greatest loss of power 
occurs at the commencement of the digging 
operation, due to the great angularity (small 
angle) formed by the hoisting-chain with the 
dipper-handle at the commencement of the 
digging, While, as above stated, in my ma 
chine the full power of the engine, less friction, 
is effectively exerted at the start, as well as at 
all other points of the dipper travel, owing 
to the fact that the power is always applied at 
right angles to the dipper-handle, as explained 
more fully before. It combines rapidity to 
the maximum, owing to the method of sus 
pending the dipper by stiff links and to the 
ease with which the dipper and connected 
parts Oscillate around the fixed central shaft. 
It possesses greater reach of movement, being 
capable of being raised higher, thrust deeper, 
and extended farther horizontally than other 
machines now in common use. 
Owing to the shortness of the boom and to 
the fact that the dipper, when freely sus 
pended by its links, constantly approaches 
nearer to the central shaft 21 as the Outer end 
of the oscillating lever is raised above the 
horizontal, the dipper can be dumped closer 
to the machine than in other shovels, whereby 
tracks may be laid on each side of the track 
of the shovel and in closer proximity thereto, 
thereby providing for loading cars on both 
sides in Very narrow excavations. 
Another important advantage is the fact 
that an unnecessary length of chains and 
number of sheaves and shafts are dispensed 
with, resulting in a saving in this respect and 
also decreasing the liability of stoppage of the 
work through breakages. By decreasing the 
number of chains and sheaves also a freer 
drop of the bucket is secured and a more poS)- 
tive underreach attained. In fact, the na 
chine has a positive movement throughout. 
The machine also provides for decreasing the 
length of the boom to about one-third of that 
of the present existing machines of the same 
capacity, with the result that the strain on 
the whole machine is reduced to the mini 
mum, and at the same time it can be shipped 
completely mounted or erected, as no part of 
the machine or boom is over fourteen feet six: 
Furthermore, in the 
inches above the rail. 
ordinary form of shovels a man is compeiled 
to stand in a dangerous position on a plat 
form, located on the side of the boom, whereas 
in my construction he can stand directly on 
the turn-table in a protected position and 
still be in convenient position to manipulate 
and observe the working parts. . 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
1. In a steam-shovel, the combination of a 
boom, a bucket provided with a handle work 
ing on the boom, a pivoted chain-guide ill the 
form of a segment of a circle, connections be 
tween the guide and the bucket, a hoisting 
chain held at the upper end of, and lying in, 
the circular chain-guide, and means for ap 
plying power to said chain, whereby the pull . 
is always exerted tangential to the circle, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
boom, a bucket provided with a handle work 
ing on the boom, a pivoted circular chain 
guide, connections between the guide and the 
bucket, and a hoisting-chain lying in the circle 
of the chain-guide, and connected thereto in 
such manner that when power is applied to 
said chain, the pull will always be exerted 
tangentially to the circle, substantially as Set 
forth. 
3. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
boom, a dipper having its handle longitudi 
nally movable on the end of the boom, a lever 
pivotally connected at a medial point to the 
upper end of the boom, and adapted to rock 
or oscillate thereon, said lever provided at its 
rear end with a chain-guide curved to the are 
of a circle, links connecting the forward end 
of the lever with the dipper, and a hoisting 
chain held at the upper end of the circular 
chain-guide, and arranged along the length 
of said guide, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a steam-shovel, the combination. Of a 
boom, a dipper having its handle pivoted to 
the end of the boom, a lever pivotally con 
nected at a medial point to the upper encil of 
the boom, and adapted to rock or Oscillate 
thereon, connections between the forward end 
of the lever and the dipper, and a hoisting 
chain operated on the end of the oscillating 
lever, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
boom, a dipper longitudinally movable on the 
boom, an oscillating lever provided with bear 
: 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
? ? ? 
IO5 
I I C 
II 
I 2 c. 
 
568,857 
? 
ings at a medial point to receive the trans 
verse shaft, and formed or provided at its rear 
end with a partly-circular chain-guide, and 
having connection at its forward end with the 
dipper, a chain having one end attached to 
the end of the dipper-handle, and adapted to 
be operated for imparting a thrust movement 
to the dipper, and a hoisting-chain lying in 
the circle of the chain-guide, and constructed 
to exert a pull at the upper end of said chain 
guide, whereby an oscillating or rocking move 
ment is imparted to the lever, substantially 
as set forth. 
6. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
boom, a dipper having its handle working on 
the boom, a lever rocking or oscillating on the 
upper end of the boom, said lever provided 
at its rear end with a partly-circular chain 
guide, and having connection at its forward 
end with the dipper, a sheave journaled in 
bearings at the lower end of the boom, a chain 
held at the upper end of the circular chain 
guide, and arranged along the length of said 
guide, and passed beneath the sheave at the 
lower end of the boom, and extended rear 
ward for operation, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
turn-table, a boom projecting therefrom, a 
dipper having its handle working on the boom, 
a lever rocking or oscillating on the upper 
end of the boom, said lever provided at its 
rear end with a partly-circular chain-guide, 
and having connection at its forward end with 
the dipper, a sheave journaled in bearings at 
the lower end of the boom, pins projecting 
vertically from the turn-table, and having 
sheaves mounted horizontally thereon, and a 
chain held at the upper end of the circular 
chain-guide, and arranged along the length 
of said guide, and passed beneath the sheave 
at the lower end of the boom, and then ex 
tended rearward between the horizontally 
mounted sheaves, substantially as set forth. 
S. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
boom, a dipper having its handle Working On 
the boom, a lever rocking or oscillating on the 
upper end of the boom, said lever provided 
at its rear end with a partly-circular chain 
guide, and having connection at its forward 
end with the dipper, a sheave journaled in 
bearings at the lower end of the boom, and a 
chain having one end attached to the swing 
ing framework, and then extended up over a 
pulley located at the upper end of the chain 
guide, then around said pulley and down and 
beneath the sheave at the lower end of the 
boom, and then extended rearward for oper 
ation, substantially as set forth. 
9. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
boom, consisting of parallel inclined beams, a 
fixed shaft connecting the upper ends of said 
beams, a dipper the handle thereof composed 
of two parallel beams, each constructed of 
two channel-irons, the flanges of one iron fit 
ting within the flanges of the other, filling 
strips or blocks for the spaces formed by the 
registering channel-irons, said filling-blocks 
and the channel-irons provided with register 
ing elongated slots through which the shaft 
passes, and a chain connecting with the dip 
per-handle for imparting a thrusting move 
ment thereto, substantially as set forth. 
10. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
truck, a frame secured thereto, a turn-table, 
a boom projecting forward from the turn-ta 
ble, said boom consisting of parallel inclined 
beans united at their upper ends by a trans 
verse shaft, a dipper having its handle pro 
vided with an elongated slot to receive the 
shaft at the end of the boom, rods connected 
at their ends by a collar, said collar receiv 
ing the upper end of the frame, and adapted 
to swing on the latter horizontally, and the 
forward ends of the rods provided with eyes 
to receive the extremities of the shaft, an os 
cillating lever provided centrally with de 
pending bearings through which the trans 
verse shaft passes, connections between the 
forward end of said lever and the dipper, a 
hoisting-chain for operating the oscillating 
lever, and a chain connected to the end of 
the dipper-handle, and adapted to impart a 
thrusting movement to the dipper, substan 
tially as set forth. 
11. In a steam-shovel, the combination of a 
boom consisting of two paral del beams united 
at their upper ends by a transverse shaft, a 
bucket having its handle pivoted on the shaft, 
a lever consisting of two parallel channel 
irons having their flanges extending outward, 
the upper flanges connected by a plate, and 
the lower flanges having bearings depending 
centrally therefrom through which bearings 
the transverse shaft passes, a chain for Op 
erating the oscillating lever, and a chain con 
necting with the dipper-handle, for impart 
ing a thrusting movement to the dipper, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
12. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
truck, a frame secured thereto, a turn-table 
on the forward end of the truck, means for 
revolving said turn-table, a boom consisting 
of parallel inclined beams projecting forward 
from the turn-table, and connected at their 
upper ends by a transverse shaft, rods con 
nected at their rear ends by a collar receiving 
the upper end of the frame, whereby said rods 
are free to swing horizontally on the frame, 
and the forward ends of the rods apertured 
to receive opposite ends of the transverse 
shaft which extend laterally beyond the ends 
of the boom-beams, an oscillating lever colm 
prising two parallel beams having bearings 
through which the shaft passes, and which 
are located on said shaft adjacent to the inner 
sides of the boom ends, said lever provided 
at its rear end with a partly-circular chain 
guide, a dipper having its handle consisting 
of two arms which are provided with regis 
tering elongated slots through which the shaft 
passes, said arms located on the shaft adja 
cent to the bearings of the lever, loose sheaves 
carried centrally on the shaft between the 
arms of the dipper-handle, a transverse shaft 
75 
90 
95 
I OO 
Io5 
? I. ? 
II 5 
40 
5 5 
 
?563 
857 
turning in bearings at the lower end of the 
boom, said shaft carrying two sheaves one 
loose and the other fixed, a chain having one 
end attached to the dipper, then extended 
rearward over one of the loose sheaves of the 
shaft at the upper end of the boom, thence 
down and around the loose sheave at the 
lower end of the boom, thence up and around 
the other loose sheave at the upper end of 
the boom, and finally back to the rear end of 
the dipper-handle for attachment thereto, 
and a second chain held at the upper end of 
the circular chain-guide, and then extended 
down to and around the fixed sheave of the 
shaft at the lower end of the boom, and clutch 
mechanism for throwing the loose sheave on 
the shaft at the lower end of the boom into 
and out of clutch with said shaft, substan 
tially as set forth. 
13. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
boom, a dipper provided with arms pivoted 
to the boom, a pivoted chain-guide in the 
form of a segment of a circle, connections be 
tween the chain-guide and the bucket, a shaft 
journaled in bearings at the lower end of the 
boom said shaft carrying a fixed and a loose 
sheave, the latter provided with an integral 
laterally-disposed rim, a friction -band suur 
rounding said rim, and having one end se 
cured thereto, a bell-cranklever, having one 
of its cranks disposed on the side of the fixed 
sheave adjacent to the rim of the loose sheave 
and having the other end of the band attached 
to said crank and having the other crank dis 
posed on the opposite side of said sheave, a 
second bell-crank lever having one of its 
cranks extending into a longitudinal recess 
in the shaft carrying the sheaves, connections 
between the other crank of this leveland the 
adjacent crank of the first-named lever, a rod 
entering the longitudinal recess of the shaft, 
and provided with an opening to receive the 
arm of the bell-crank, means for moving this 
rod longitudinally, a chain having one end 
attached to the dipper and then extended 
rearward over one of the loose sheaves of the 
shaft at the upper end of the boom, thence 
down and around the loose sheave at the lower 
end of the boom, thence up and around the 
other loose sheave at the upper end of the 
boom, and finally back to the rear end of the 
dipper-handle for attachment thereto, and a 
Second chain held at the upper end of, and 
lying in, the circular chain-guide, said chain, 
when power is applied thereto, exerting a pull 
tangential to the circle, substantially as set 
forth. 
14. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
boom, a dipper provided with arms pivoted to 
the boom, a pivoted chain-guide in the form 
of a segment of a circle, connections between 
the chain-guide and the bucket, a shaft jour 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
; 
; 
; 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
; 
 
naled in the bearings at the lower end of the 
boom said shaft carrying a fixed and a loose 
sheave, the latter provided with two integral 
rims, a friction-band surrounding one of the 
rims, and having one end secured thereto, a 
bell-cranklever, having one of its cranks dis 
posed on the side of the fixed sheave adjacent 
to the rim of the loose sheave, and having the 
other end of the band attached to said crank, 
and having the other crank disposed on the 
opposite side of said sheave, a second bell 
crank lever having one of its cranks extend 
ing into a longitudinal recess in the shaft car-75 
rying the sheaves, connections between the 
other crank of this lever, and the adjacent 
crank of the first-named lever, a rod entering 
the longitudinal recess of the shaft, and pro 
vided with an opening to receive the arm of 8o 
the bell-crank, means for moving this rod 
longitudinally, a brake-band surrounding the 
other rim of the loose sheaye, a pivoted bell 
cranklever having opposite ends of this band 
secured to the cranks thereof, means for oper 
ating the bell-crank lever, a chain having 
one end attached to the dipper, and then ex 
tended rearward over one of the loose sheaves 
of the shaft at the upper end of the boom, 
thence down and around the loose sheave at g 
the lower end of the boom, thence up and 
around the other loose sheave at the uppel' . 
end of the boom, and finally back to the rear 
end of the dipper-handle for attachment there 
to, and a second chain held at the upper end of, 
and lying in, the circular chain-guide, said 
chain, when power is applied thereto, exert 
ing a pull tangential to the circle, substan- 
tially as set forth. . 
15. In a steam-shovel, the combination, of a 
boom, a dipper provided with arms working . 
on the boom, a pivoted chain-guide, in the 
form of a segment of a circle, connections be 
tween the chain-guide and the bucket, a shaft 
journaled in the bearings at the lower end of 
the boom, said shaft carrying a fixed and a 
loose sheave, a chain having one end attached. 
to the dipper, and then extended to and 
around the loose sheave of the shaft, and then 
up and back for attachment to the rear end 
of the dipper-arms, a second chain held at the 
upper end of the circular chain-guide, and 
then extended down to and around the fixed 
sheave of the shaft, and clutch mechanism 
for throwing the loose sheave on the shaft into 
and out of clutch with said shaft, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
: 
??? 
. 
. 
. 
. 
IO5 
O 
II5 
OTAF IHETITLESIAETER. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR. T. MORSELL, 
WM. J. KNOX. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US563958.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 563,958, 
 
R, GRILLI, 
BICYCLE 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented July 14, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 563,958, 
 
R. GRILLI, 
BICYCLE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 14, 1896, 
(No Model,) 
No. 563,958, 
 
- 
R. GRILLI, 
BICYCLE. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented July 14, 1896. 
MA2072. 
- 34' 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROMEO GRILLI, OF CHARKOFF, RUSSIA. 
BICYCLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 563,958, dated July 14, 1896. 
Application filed April 27, 1896, Serial No. 589,194, (No model.) Patented in England September 21, 1895, No. 17,668, 
To all whom it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, ROMEO GRILLI, a sub 
ject of the King of Italy, residing at 15 Sum 
scalia, Charkoff, Russia, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in or re 
lating to Bicycles, (patented in Great Britain, 
No. 17,668, dated September 21, 1895,) of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to special appliances 
affixable to bicyclesin order that two persons 
may occupy seats on either side of the bicycle 
frame, which, according to my invention, is 
not in any way altered if it be desired to use 
the bicycle in the ordinary way for a single 
rider sitting above the frame in the well 
known manner, except perhaps the shifting 
of the ordinary seat for use by one of the two 
riders when my apparatus is affixed to the 
frame. 
For the purpose of my invention I employ 
a number of tubes or rods With permanent 
sockets, or with clipping devices of Special 
formation, to constitute a frame capable of 
attachment to either end of the axle of the 
hind or drive wheel and to the center stay; 
also to the pedal-pins, there being a series of 
branch tubes or rods leading to other perma 
nent sockets or clipping devices for support 
ing a distinct set of cranks and pedals, the 
inner of which cranks on each side are readily 
connectable to the existing pedal-pins for dul 
plicating the action, so that each rider has 
the power of exercising his or her feet for 
propulsion purposes, the power being com 
municated by the existing chain and gear, 
the two persons sitting abreast and having an 
unbroken view in front while traveling, as is 
not the case with what is known as tandem 
bicycles, in which one person sits behind the 
other. I provide sockets or clipping devices 
On a cross tube or rod for the adjustment of 
the saddle-pillar or L-pins and seats to ac 
commodate varying Weights of the riders for 
balancing purposes, and I clip on the front 
frame-tube a transverse bar for carrying dul 
plicate handle-bars and handles. 
My invention is represented in the accom 
panying drawings, in which the Ordinary bi 
cycle is shown in thinlines and my additional 
double-seated frame in shaded lines. 
Figure 1, is a plan of a rear-driving safety 
bicycle with my additional double-seated 
15 
25 
45 
frame attached; Fig. 2, a side elevation of 
same; Fig. 3, an elevation from the front of 
machine, and Fig. 4, a detached plan of part 
of my additional double frame with my ad 
justable clips in lieu of the fixed sockets 
shown on the previous figures. 
A represents the front or steering wheel of 
a single safety rear-driver bicycle; B, rear 
drive-wheel, on the hub C of which wheel the 
chain D operates from the sprocket E, this 
being on the pedal-crank axle in the well 
known manner. 
E F are tubes or rods with flattened lower 
ends holed for engaging over the extremities 
of the hind axle, on which they are secured 
by lock-nuts G, and which otherwise retains 
the hind wheel B within the back fork FI. 
The tubes or rods FF are set at an angle up 
wardly, outwardly, and forwardly, where they 
are secured to sockets or clipping devices II, 
attached to the cross-bar J, there being other 
tubes or rods IK K from the same Sockets Or 
clipping devices II leading downwardly, for 
wardly, and inwardly, where their lower ends 
are connected to other sockets or clipping de 
vices LL, within which duplicate pedal-axles 
MMI are carried, the cranks M'M' being at 
tached to the ordinary pedal-pins by a lock 
nut. 
N N N N are other tubes or rods from 
the sockets or clipping devices LL leading 
upwardly, rearwardly, and inwardly to other 
sockets or clipping devices PP on the cross 
bar J and to the rods F F, respectively, the 
three tubes or rods KKN N N N of the 
additional frame constituting an irregular tri 
pod for rigid connection to the axle of the 
hind wheel B by the stay-rods FF and the 
cross-bar J and additional pedal-axles M. M. 
The central part of the cross-bar's length has 
another socket or clipping device Q, With a 
curved spur R extending from it, the opposite 
forwardly-projecting end having depending 
piece S for entering the center stay Tand from 
which the ordinary saddle-pillar had been re 
moved, said depending piece Sbeing clipped in 
said center stay by the same clip which other 
wise fixed the saddle-pillar. The cross-bar J 
has also clipping devices UU adjustable there 
on for carrying the two saddle-pillars WV and 
seats WW for the two riders, which clips can 
be moved along the bar J toward or from the 
95 
Oc 
55 
75 
85 
go 
3. 
568,958 
center of the machine to suit the different 
weights of the riders, and so balance them for 
keeping the machine upright. 
With two ladies sitting abreast on my dupli 
cated machine very little, if any, adjustment 
of the saddles would be required, but if very 
unequal weights, such as between that of a 
lady and gentleman, the lady being probably 
the lighter weight of the two, would require to 
be set farther from the center or the gentle 
man be adjusted nearer to the center of the 
bar for balancing purposes, there being no 
more trouble in doing this than in adjusting 
the saddle-pillar of a single-seated machine 
for a fresh rider. 
I have shown for sake of convenience on my 
drawings a double set of handles a a and han 
dle-bars bb, secured to the front frame-tube c, 
said handle-bars b l being jointed to short 
l'ods C C, leading to and connected with a spur 
d, attached to and projecting forwardly from 
the stalk of the steering-post e, the original 
handle-bar having been previously removed. 
This, however, can be affixed and employed 
with the machine in which my additional 
frame is fitted if desired, or the ordinary han 
dles without removing them can be used by 
the two riders, but such arrangement forms 
no part of my present invention and I make 
no claim thereto. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. An attachment for bicycles, comprising 
two sets of irregular tripods, a crank support 
ed in the apex of each tripod, a pedal on the 
Outer section of each crank, a cross-bar con 
necting two legs of one tripod with the two 
corresponding legs of the other tripod, a rod 
projecting downwardly and rearwardly from 
each end of said cross-bar and connected with 
the third leg of the tripod and adapted to en 
gage with its lower free end the axle of the 
rear wheel, a curved spur projecting upward 
and forward from the center of said cross-bar 
and provided with a downwardly-projecting 
pin, adapted to engage the center stay of an 
Ordinary bicycle, and a saddle-pillar adjusta 
bly arranged on the cross-bar and on each side 
of the curved spur, all said parts, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
2. An attachment for bicycles, comprising 
two distinct yet oppositely-arranged irregular 
tripods, each of said tripods being connected 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
75 
85 
at its apex by a combination-socket, into which 
the respective legs of the tripod are adjusta 
bly arranged, a crank in each socket, a pedal 
on the outer section of each crank, a sleeve 
or clip at the outer end of each tripod-leg, a 
cross-bar connecting two of those clips of one 
tripod with the two corresponding ones of the 
other tripod, a rod projecting rear and down 
wardly from each end of said cross-bar and 
adjustably arranged in the respective clips, 
said rod penetrating the clip at the free end 
of the third leg, and adapted to engage with 
its lower portion the axle of the rear wheel of 
an ordinary bicycle, a curved spur adjustably 
arranged on the cross-bar and substantially in 
its center and adapted, with its downwardly 
projecting forward portion, to engage the cen 
ter stay of the bicycle, and a saddle-pillar ad 
justably arranged on the cross-bar and on each 
side of the curved spur, all said parts, substan 
tially as and for the purposes described. 
3. An attachment for bicycles, comprising 
two distinct yet oppositely-arranged irregular 
tripods, each of said tripods being connected 
at its apex by a combination sleeve or socket, 
a crank in each socket, a pedal on the outer 
section of each crank, the inner section of 
each crank being adapted to engage the axle 
pin of the pedal of an ordinary bicycle, a cross 
bar connecting two legs on one tripod with the 
two corresponding legs of the other tripod, a 
rod projecting downwardly and rearwardly 
from each end of the cross-bar, said rod being 
connected in about its middle with the third 
leg of the said tripod, and being adapted to en 
gage with its lower free end the axle of the 
bicycle, a curved spur projecting upward and 
forward from the center of the cross-bar and 
provided at its free end with a downwardly 
extending pin adapted to engage the center 
stay of the bicycle, a sleeve adjustably al 
ranged on the cross-bar and on each side of 
the spur, and a saddle-pillar vertical adjust 
ably arranged in each of said sleeves, all said 
parts substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit 
eSSeS. 
ROMEO GRILLI. 
Witnesses: 
PERCY E. MATTOCKs, 
EDMUND S. SNEWIN. 
95 
Od 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564058.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 564,058. 
J. M. DODGE. 
APPARATUS FOR HANDLING COAL. 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 14, 1896. 
S 
  
23:est 
Y we e 
 
ye/ezee, AZarage 
zar-42a2zeez. 
(No Model.) 
No. 564,058, 
 
 
 
J. M. DODGE, 
APPARATUS FOR ANDEENG COAL 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 14, 1896, 
 
 
 
  
- G 
G 
G 
  
s 
1. 
N: 
 
1. 
s N 
1s 
N 
N N IH N 
1 
- E/E- 
- 
 
s 
----- 
His Hi H------- it 
- 
S. 
A472 esses 
%2)a? -eeee-- 
62.272 es/Z, A226 e 
/ 22:42, 
2z/zz-ZZZta. 
J. M. DODGE. 
APPARATUS FOR, HANDLING COAL, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Jul 
14, 1896, 
N 
(No Model.) 
No. 564,058, 
SS 
RS 
N s 
 
 
Azee esses. 
17.2-2-2-02- 
P 
----- 
- 
Zave ear. 
c1:222 
-2. 27.22%ar 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 564,058, 
. 
. 
J. M. DOD GE, 
APPARATUS FOR HANDLING COAL. 
. 
. . 
. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented July 14, 1896. 
(ZG, 4. 
 
 
C P 1. 
ave 
$22 
 
/2 22e 72 Moz' 
c/aze es/ZZoage 
2. /72e22-e e2/(r 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. DODGE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
LINK-BELT ENGINEERING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
APPARATUS FOR HANDLING COAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,058, dated July 14, 1896. 
Application filed July 31, 1895, Serial No. 557,774, (No model.) 
25 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMESM.DODGE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Phila 
delphia, Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
Improvements in Apparatus for Handling 
Coal or other Material, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
an apparatus for handling coal and other 
granular material which can be used either 
to pile the material or remove it from the 
pile, as fully described hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
aside elevationillustrating my improved coal 
piling apparatus. Fig. 2 is a plan view. Fig. 
3 is a view illustrating more clearly the appa 
ratus for removing the coal from a pile. Fig. 
4 is a transverse sectional view on the line 4 
4, Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional view on the 
line 55, Fig.1. Fig. 6 is an enlarged sectional 
view of a portion of Fig. 1. Fig. 7 is a detail 
view, partly in section, of the truck and 
bucket; and Fig. 8 is a modification showing 
an endless bucket elevator in place of the 
single bucket. 
My invention is especially adapted for use 
in forming large and extended storage piles 
of coal. The coal can be stored in a long 
quadrangular pile to a certain height, over 
which can pass a traveling frame adapted to 
tracks at each side of the pile and having con 
veying mechanism, and at one side of the 
track is a conveyer which can deliver coal to 
or receive coal from the conveyer on the trav 
eling frame, and this conveyer can receive 
coal from a tower or other source of Supply 
and can deliver coal through a chute to the 
boats or cars. On the traveling frame are 
movable hoppers or chutes, into which me 
chanically - operated buckets discharge the 
coal after scooping the coal from the pile, the 
parts being so arranged that as the mechan 
ism controlling the buckets is adjusted to en 
able the buckets to properly attack the pile 
the hoppers are also adjusted to an advance 
point on the frame. Thus the loading move 
ment of the buckets is regular. 
By this invention I am not limited in the 
length of the pile by the loading-frame, as the 
So frame is mounted on tracks. Consequently 
the pile can be extended by simply extending 
45 
35 
- 
the tracks and extending the fixed conveyer 
at the side, which is a very simple matter. 
Referring in the first instance to Figs. 1 and 
2, a. a. are the tracks upon which the travel 
ing frame A is mounted. The frame has two 
standards A* with extended bases, as shown 
in Fig. 5, and a single-span truss A' extends 
from one standard to the other, leaving a clear 
space underneath for the pile of coal. The 
standards are supported on a series of trucks 
a', Fig. 5, and One of the standards may carry 
the motor and driving mechanism for driv 
ing the conveyer-chain, the ribbon-feed for 
closing the bottom of the conveyer, and the 
ropes for operating the buckets or scoops, 
also the driving mechanism for laterally mov 
ing the traveling frame. 
At one side of the tracks C is a frame B, 
supporting the conveyer-troughs b b'. Be 
tween these troughs extends a portion A of 
the frame A', Fig. 6, carrying the receiving 
chute at and delivery-chute a, so that the 
conveyer of the traveling frame may receive 
coal from the upper conveyer b' or deliver 
coal to the lower conveyer b. 
The conveyer-chain bpasses around wheels 
at each end of the structure Band has double 
flights which travelin both conveyer-troughs 
b b'. The conveyer-chain can be driven in 
either direction and can be used either to 
carry coal in the upper trough and deliverit 
to the conveyer on the traveling frame or 
carry coal in the lower trough and receive it 
from the conveyer on the traveling frame. 
The frame B is a fixed frame and extends 
the full length of the pile, but if the pile is 
to be increased the frame can be readily ex 
tended. 
In the present instance beyond the frame 
B are tracks c for a traveling tower C, upon 
which is mounted bucket mechanism C and 
a chute c', so that the coal can be removed 
from a boat at the wharf and discharged into 
the conveyer b' on the frame B. This tower 
and mechanism connected there with forms 
no part of my invention. 
Referring particularly to Figs. 3 and 4, on 
the girder A' of the frame A are suspended 
guideways did for a movable apron d', form 
ing the bottom of the conveyer-trough D. 
Adapted to this trough is a conveyer D', con 
. 
. 
. 
55 
65 
75 
IOC 
2 
564,058 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
sisting of a series of flights connected to 
gether by side chains. The carrying-section 
of the conveyer travels upon the trough ID, 
while the return-section travels over idlers d, 
arranged at intervals along the frame. The 
chain is driven from the motor mounted on. 
One of the standards A. 
At intervals throughout the length of the 
girder A" are chutes D*, arranged on each side 
of the conveyer-trough D. EE are trucks 
adapted to rails a, suspended from girders 
Ct, extending on each side of the truss A", 
and hung from these trucks are movable 
hoppers E", which can be brought into line 
With any one of the chutes D* and locked in 
position, so that coal received by the hopper 
will be discharged through chute D* with 
which they aline into the conveyer-trough D 
to be carried by the conveyer D' to the point 
of discharge, which in the present instance is 
at the end of the truss A, directly above the 
Conveyer-trough b on the frame B. 
The truck E, supporting the hopper. E", has 
four carrying-wheels e e and four wheelse', 
adapted to the under side of the track a, so 
as to prevent the tilting of the truck. Clamps 
Eare adapted to the rails, one infront of and 
in the rear of the truck, so that when the 
hopper E is adjusted in position it can be 
locked there by the clamp E. 
The hoppers are made in a peculiar man 
ner, (shown in Figs. 3 and 4) each having 
an Open top and cut away at the front to al 
low for the free discharge of the buckets G, 
and they are open at one side near the bot 
tom, so that the coal will be discharged read 
ily into the chutes D. 
F is a truck adapted to the rails a and 
having traction-wheels f. Suspended by a 
rope g is a hooked block G', to which is hung 
the Scoop-bucket G. This bucket is open at 
the top and has a hinged door g' at the back, 
adapted to be locked to the bucket by bolts 
g. These bolts are connected to a leverg, 
the long arm of which strikes a plate e on 
the hopper-frame when the bucket is drawn 
backloaded, so that the door will be unbolted 
and the contents of the bucket discharged 
into the hopper E'. 
The rope g is fixed to the truck F at one 
end and passes around a pulley f' to the op 
erating mechanism at one end of the frame 
A. Attached to the opposite end of the truck 
is a rope g, which is used to draw the truck 
forward in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 3. 
This rope also extends to the operating mech 
anism. Carried by the truck is a catch h, 
pivoted at 7', which engages with a stop i, 
adjustably Secured to one of the rails. This 
Stop limits the forward movement of the 
truck and allows the catch to engage with 
it, so as to hold the truck in its forward po 
Sition during the loading of the bucket. As 
the bucket is raised by the ropeg an exten 
sion g of the block G' is engaged by a lever 
f, which locks the bucket in the raised po 
sition, and as the catch I is connected to this 
lever the weight of the bucket on the lever 
raises the catch 7 and frees it from the stop 
i. As the draft upon the rope g is continued 
the truck will be carried back from its stop 
i to the position shown in Fig. 3, and the 
swinging door g' of the bucket will be tripped 
and the coal discharged. The bucket is then 
ready to receive another load and by moving 
the truck forward by the rope g in the di 
rection of the arrow, Fig. 3, it reaches a 
point where a trigger h will strike a stop ". 
This stop is set on the frame sufficiently far 
from the hopper that the bucket is clear of 
the hopper when it is released by the trigger 
which unlatches the lever f', and the bucket 
is then free from the truck and will descend 
by its own Weight to the base-line of the 
pile. The truck in the meantime continues 
to move forward until it comes to the stop 
i with which its catch h, engages, locking the 
truck to the stop, so that when power is ap 
plied to the rope g the bucket will be drawn 
up against the bank of coal, as shown in Fig. 
1, scooping sufficient coal until it reaches the 
top, where it is engaged by the catch on the 
truck and carried by the truck to the hop 
per to be discharged. 
As shown in Fig. 4, I preferably arrange a 
duplicate of the bucket and hopper on the 
opposite side of the frame, so that two buck 
ets may be used at once; but it. Will be un 
derstood that a single bucket may be used 
: without departing from my invention. 
Thus it will be seen that coal can be piled 
by my improved apparatus in a mass by 
using the upper conveyerb' on the frame B 
and moving the conveyer D'in the trough D 
and using the movable ribbon d to gradually 
close the bottom of the conveyer as the coal 
is piled, and coal can be removed from the 
pile by using the buckets and movable hop 
per and reversing the conveyer D', so that it 
will act as a carrier for the coal from the hop 
per to a point directly above the conveyer 
troughb. 
The coal can then be carried along 
this conveyer-trough to suitable chutes to be 
loaded either upon vessels or cars. 
It will be understood that I do not claim 
the construction of the buckets shown, and 
in Some instances an endless bucket elevator 
(shown in Fig. 8) may be substituted for the 
bucket, also dispensing with the ropes and 
driving mechanism therefor. The elevator 
in this instance will travel forward with the 
hopper and may be suspended from the same 
truck. 
While I have described the apparatus as 
particularly adapted to handle coal, it will be 
understood that it may be used for handling 
any material capable of being conveyed and 
piled. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination in apparatus for piling 
material and removing material from a pile 
consisting of the traveling frame, conveyer 
trough thereon, a conveyer adapted to carry 
material from or toward one end of the frame, 
7 o 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
55 
65 
 
564,058 
3. 
O 
a fixed frame, with two conveyel-troughs, 
conveyers therein, one of said troughs 
adapted to discharge into the conveyer on the 
traveling frame and the other adapted to re 
ceive material from the conveyer. On the 
traveling frame, Substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the traveling frame, 
conveyer thereon, a movable hopper On the 
frame, a truck, buckets suspended from the 
truck, and means for raising the buckets to 
the hopper so that the buckets will discharge 
into the hopper, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the frame, adapted 
to span the pile, a conveyer on said frame, a 
movable hopper carried by the frame and 
adapted to feed the conveyer, a track, a 
truck adapted to travel on said track between 
the hopper and a stop, a bucket carried by 
the truck and means for locking the bucket 
to the truck in the raised position and releas 
ing the truck from the stop, means for dis 
charging the bucket whenitis above the hop 
per and means for releasing the bucket from 
the truck as it is moved away from the hop 
per, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of the movable frame 
adapted to span the pile, conveyer thereon, 
a movable hopper at each side of the frame 
discharging into the conveyer, rails on the 
frame, trucks adapted to said rails, Scoop 
buckets carried thereby, with a trough ar 
ranged at one end of the traveling frame, con 
veyerin said trough so that material received 
from the pile by the scoop-buckets will be 
delivered at any point along the fixed trough, 
Substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
25 
35 
JAMES M. DODGE. 
Witnesses: 
WILL. A. BARR, 
JOS. H. KLEIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564158.txt	C. E. PERKINS, 
MECHANISM FOR OPERATING CHURNING APPARATUS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 564,158, 
Patented July 14, 1896, 
 
a -6.6%24r4. 
4ZZ2772-eefs. 
C. E. PERKINS, 
MECHANISM FOR OPERATING CHURNING APPARATUS, 
(No Model.) , 
No. 564,158, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 14, 1896. 
 
/7 ye/ (o/ 
C/azyrenee Z-Z%zs, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLARENCE E. PERKINS, OF WESTFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF 
SHARP AND THOMAS DYSON, OF SAME 
TWO-THIRDS TO GEORGE H. 
PLACE. 
MECHANISM FOR OPERATING CHURNING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,158, dated July 14, 1896. 
Application filed February 17, 1896, Serial No. 579,500, (No model.) 
5 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CLARENCEE. PERKINS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Westfield, in the county of Hampden and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Mechanism for 
Operating Churning Apparatus, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to mechanism for im 
parting a reciprocally-rotating movement to 
a shaft, with which may be connected a churn 
or other similar apparatus, the object being 
to provide an improved mechanism or me 
chanical movement whereby said recipro 
cally-rotating movementis induced by a con 
tinuous rotary movement of the driving-shaft 
in one direction; and the invention consists 
in the peculiar construction and arrangement 
of the several parts of the devices, all as here 
inafter fully described, and more particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawingsforming part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a front elevation, partly 
in section, illustrating the construction em 
bodying my improvements. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view, partly in section. Fig. 3 is a sectional 
view on line 33, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a perspec 
tive view of detail parts hereinafter fully de 
scribed. 
In the drawings, 2 
indicates the frame of 
the machine. 
3 is the driving-shaft of the machine, adapt 
ed to rotate in the bearings 4 in said frame, 
and to be actuated in any convenient man 
ner, or by a crank 5. A clutch 6 is adapted 
to slide longitudinally on shaft 3, and to be 
given a rotary motion coincident with that 
of said shaft, by means of a series of clutch 
pins e, fixed in and projecting from the sur 
face of said shaft, as shown. The said clutch 
6 is provided with an annular groove B, cen 
trally between its ends, and extending in op 
posite directions from said annular groove 
are clutch-pin bearing-faces C. on said clutch, 
With which faces the said clucth-pins ein shaft 
3 engage. Thus the clutch 6 may have a free 
sliding movement on shaft 3, but is subject 
to the rotary movement of said shaft. 
On the under side of and at each end of the 
clutch 6 is a clutch projection c for engage 
55 
65 
ment, alternately, with one of the gears 77, 
which gears are hung loosely on shaft 3. The 
clutch projections b b on the faces of said 
gears 7, adjoining the ends of said clutch 6, 
provide means for the engagement of said 
clutch with said gears, as aforesaid. A gear 
9, which is engaged by said gears 77, is con 
nected to the upper end of shaft 8, which is 
supported in suitable bearings in the frame 2 
of the machine, and has the clutch projections 
did on its face, adjoining the clutch-lever 10. 
It being desirable that said shaft 8 be re 
movable from the gear 9 for the attachment 
thereto of different devices that are to be op 
erated by the machine herein described, the 
shaft Sand gear 9 are secured one to the other 
by a pin 13 or other suitable means, (see Fig. 
1,) which may be removed therefrom for said 
operations, in connection with the shaft 8. 
Thus the gear 9, when disconnected from 
shaft S, is left in the position shown in Fig. 
2, wherein the said two projections did there 
on are shown in proper operative relations to 
the pivoted clutch-lever 10. The proper re 
ciprocating movement of the gear 9, Whereby 
said projections did thereon shall alternately 
act upon said lever 10, and through the latter 
upon said clutch 6, whereby the latter shall 
alternately engage with said gears 77, requires 
care at the outset, and hence it is desirable that 
care be taken to keep the three gears 7,7, and 
9 in mesh or engagement when shaft 8 shall 
be disconnected from the gear 9, as aforesaid. 
To that end the said clutch-lever 10 is pro 
vided with the depending arm h, which is op 
posite the border of said gear at one side of 
the machine, and at the opposite side of the 
latter is the curved support 12, to which said 
clutch-lever is pivoted. The inner face of 
said support 12 and the opposite inner side 
of said arm h constitute guards against the 
movement laterally of said gear 9 from its 
operative position between the gears 77, and 
thus the displacement of gear 9, above re 
ferred to, when said shaft 8 shall be discon 
nected therefrom, is presented. The lever 
10 extends over gear 9 and is provided with a 
clutch projection f on its under side for alter 
nate engagement with said projections did on 
said gear, whereby said lever 10 is vibrated ICO 
95. 
85 
75 
2 
564,158 
and clutch 6 is engaged alternately with each 
of said gears 77. The said lever-support 12, 
to which one end of said clutch-lever 10 is 
pivoted at 15, is bolted adjustably to a lat 
eral extension of frame 2 by a bolt 14, Fig. 3. 
For said adjustment the part of the frame 2 
to which said support is bolted is slotted, as 
shown in Fig. 4, and the foot 16 of said sup 
port is likewise slotted, but transversely of 
the slot in said frame part, to the end that 
said support may be moved in different direc 
tions, as may be demanded by the necessity 
of bringing the pivoted end of said lever 10 
to a proper operative position over part of 
said gear 9. 
The operation of the above-described de 
vices is as follows, understanding that the 
several parts of the machine occupy the posi 
tions shown in Fig. 2: If, now, the crank 5 
be turned in the direction indicated by the 
arrow on the hub of said crank, the clutch 6 
will be rotated in like direction, and will carry 
with it the adjoining loose gear 7 at the right 
in said figure. Said movement of gear 7 will 
cause the rotation of the gear 9 and its con 
nected shaft S in the direction indicated by 
the arrow on the face of said last-named gear, 
and the consequent movement of the projec 
tion d, at the right of lever 10 in that figure, 
around under shaft 3 and against the clutch 
projection f on lever 10, thereby causing said 
lever to swing in the direction of said arrow 
and to slide clutch 6 out of engagement with 
said first-named gear 7, and into engagement 
with the opposite gear 7, and to rotate the 
latter in a direction opposite to the first-named 
One, thereby causing movements in the gear 
9 and in the clutch-lever 10 opposite to those 
just described. Thus by the continual ro 
tation of the shaft 3 the clutch 6 and lever 
10 and the gear 9 are caused to have the 
movements described, whereby the shaft 8, 
connected with said gear 9, is made to rotate 
reciprocally. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In an apparatus for imparting a recip 
rocally-rotating movement to churning or 
analogous devices, a suitably-supported driv 
ing-shaft, two beveledgears supported loosely 
face to face on said shaft, and each having a 
clutch projection on its inner face, a vertical 
shaft suitably supported in the frame of the 
machine, a beveled gear 9, secured on said 
vertical shaft and engaging with said two 
first-named beveled gears having two clutch 
lever projections d, d, on its face adjoining 
said driving-shaft, a clutch on said driving 
shaft having a portion of each of its ends cut 
away and provided with projections c and 
having a longitudinally-sliding movement on 
said shaft for alternate engagement with said 
two beveled gears, projections on said shaft 
for engaging said clutch whereby the latter 
is caused to rotate with said shaft, combined 
with a clutch-lever support attached to the 
frame of the machine, a vibratory lever piv 
oted to said support and extending over said 
gear, and engaging with said clutch, and a 
clutch projection on said lever for engage 
ment, alternately, with each of said two pro 
jections on said gear 9, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. In an apparatus for imparting a recip 
rocally-rotating movement to churning or 
analogous devices, a suitably-supported driv 
ing-shaft, two beveled gears 7, 7, supported 
loosely face to face on said shaft, and each 
having a clutch projection on its inner face, 
a clutch 6, having a sliding movement on said 
driving - shaft for engagement alternately 
with the projections on said gears 7, 7, and 
having a portion of each of its ends cut away, 
projections on said shaft for engaging said 
clutch whereby the latter rotates in conso 
nance with said shaft, combined with a vil 
bratory clutch-lever 10, extending under said 
shaft and engaging with said clutch, a clutch 
projection f, on said lever, a shaft 8, sup 
ported vertically to the axis of said driving 
shaft, a gear 9, secured to said shaft 8, and 
engaging with said two gears 7, 7, having 
projections thereon for alternate engagement 
with said clutch-lever, whereby the latter is 
given a vibratory motion, and said clutch is 
alternately engaged with each of said gears 
7, and a reciprocating rotary motion is im 
parted to said gear 9, and shaft S, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. In combination, the gear 9, and the gears 
7, 7, Supported in engagement therewith, of 
the curved lever-support 12, the lever 10, ex 
tending over said gear 9, having the depend 
ing arm h, extending across the border of 
Said gear 9, and pivotally connected to said 
Support and the clutch, substantially as set 
forth. 
CLARENCE E. PERIKINS. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. CHAPIN, 
IX. I. CLEMONS. 
TO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
yo 
75 
95 
OO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564258.txt	- G. ROSSBACH. 
ELECTRIC MASSAGE APPARATUS, 
Patented July 2l l896, 
- - 
(No Model.) 
No. 564,258. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAV ROSSBACH, OF LICHTENFELS, GERMANY. 
ELECTRIC MAS SAGE APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,258, dated July 21, 1896. 
Application filed January 14, 1896. Serial No. 575,532, (No model.) 
O 
To a 2Z Luhon, it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, GUSTAV ROSSBACH, a 
subject of the King of Bavaria, residing at 
Lichtenfels, in the Kingdom of Bavaria and 
German Empire, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Ball-Shaped Ap 
pliances for Self-Massage and Electrical Mas 
sage, fully set forth in the following descrip 
tion and represented in the accompanying 
drawings. 
The object of the present invention is a 
massaging device, which can be operated with 
or without electrodes, and which acts in both 
cases automatically, as hereinafter described. 
The object of the invention is shown in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of the massaging 
device provided with the electrodes and With 
a guide-rod. Fig. 2 shows the device partly 
in cross-section. 
The massaging device consists substan 
tially in a casing C, made of polished Wood, 
eventually coated with a thin metal lining on 
the edge. In the casing C is a sleeve c, Which 
is screw-threaded and has at one end inside 
of the casing a plate b, said sleeve serving to 
receive an electrode d, either directly or 
through the medium of a guide-rod?, which 
is provided with a handle e. To this end the 
rod f is perforated at g above the casing, the 
holeg being provided for the reception of the 
electrode or a part d, connected there with. 
In the casing a, which is hollowed out, is a 
metal ball h, or a ball made of Wood, having 
its surface coated with graphite or with cop 
per. The shape of the casing C is such that 
the ball h projects almost one-half its body 
from out of the opening of the casing, but 
cannot fall out. 
The massage-ball h, serves as well for a self 
massage as in combination. With a device for 
an electric massage. It is grasped in the first 
case with the hand fully surrounding the 
casing a, and is then moved to and fro and 
25 
35 
in circular directions over the part of the body 45 
to be massaged, under any desirable pressure, 
so that the ball h rolls upon such places and 
produces quite an agreeable pressure upon the 
part of the body under treatment. For the 
massage of the back the guide-rod f is used, 
which can be stiff or flexible and which is 
Screwed into the sleeve C. 
In electric massaging the patient takes the 
electroded of the inducting apparatus in One 
hand and the casing a, which is connected 
with the electroded through the pin d", into 
the other hand, massaging in circular motions 
any part of the body. 
For the electric massage of back and loins 
the rod with the electrode in it is secured in 
the casing in such a manner that the pin d' 
isin the holeg of the rod?, and the massaging 
is executed as above described. By this 
means the patient is enabled to effect a mas 
sage either by pressure alone or with electric 
induction. 
65 
55 
What is claimed is 
1. A massaging device for self-massage and 
electric massage composed of the casing Cl, 
lined with metal and inclosing loosely a ball 
coated with a metal or other conducting sub 
Stance. 
2. A massaging device composed of a casing 
having on the back, a screw-threaded sleeve 
c, adapted to receive a rod f, for massaging 
the back of the human body, and containing 
a ball. 
3. A massaging apparatus having a rod?, . 
for the back provided with a holeg, for the 
reception of a pin d' of the electroded, com 
bined with a loose ball in said apparatus, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
GUST. ROSSBACH. 
75 
Witnesses: 
FRANZ SCHMAUSS, 
NEUMAN FRANK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564358.txt	A, ANGELL, 
FIAX BRAKE, 
Patented July 21, 1896. - 
A 7, 1. 
ol 
Usin 
Y3 
(No Model.) 
- 
. 
No. 564,358, 
v. B 
ss 
s 
s 
 
 
 
 
s 
E. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
ALBERT ANGELL, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY. 
FLAX- BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,358, dated July 21, 1896, 
Application filed October 17, 1895, 
Serial No. 565,931, (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
To Cull, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERTANGELL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at West 
Orange, Essex county, New Jersey, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements. 
in Flax-Brakes, fully described and repre 
sented in the following specification and the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of the 
Sle 
The object of this invention is to furnish 
an improved means for separating the fiber 
from the stalks of flax, hemp, and analogous 
vegetables. 
In the present invention a stationary brake 
bar is used, with a rotary beater having bars 
provided with backwardly-projecting flaps, 
which operate in a peculiar manner, as here 
inafter described. A shield is placed under 
and over the revolving beater, with an open 
ing adjacent to the brake-bar through which 
the beater-bars operate upon the stalks and 
an opening at the opposite side through which 
is discharged the pith and dirt which fall 
within the beater. Laterally-inclined guides 
are arranged adjacent to such discharge-open 
ing to throw the dirt laterally, so that it may 
not fall upon the fiber when delivered. A 
shaker is arranged below the brake-bar to 
strike the fiber and stalks as they are moved 
down Ward from such bar and dislodge the 
pith and bark therefrom. The shaker is pro 
vided with a vibrating guide which directs 
the fiber upon a delivery-apron. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 is a lon 
gitudinal section of an apparatus embodying 
my improvements, with some of the gearing 
represented diagrammatically by dottedlines. 
Fig. 2 is a front elevation with the feed-table 
and guard above the feed-rolls removed. Fig. 
3 is a rear elevation, and Fig. 4 a plan, of the 
beater detached from the frame. 
In Fig.1 the eccentric-bar J is shown at one 
side of its shaft, but is shown above the shaft 
in Fig. 2. 
w 
In Fig.2 the belts Kand cross-barsk', which 
form the apron, are omitted, so as to exhibit 
the eccentric-bar J more clearly. 
A represents the side bars of the machine, 
provided with feed-table B, feed-rolls C, and 
roll-guard B'. The brake-bar c is arranged 
adjacent to the lower feed-roll, and a clamp 
w 
roll e is placed immediately over the brake 
bar to make the stalks S break off short when 
struck by the beaters D. The beaters are 
formed of square bars attached at their op 
posite ends to head Dupon a transverse shaft 
E. A shield F is arranged below the revolv 
ing beater and curved eccentric with the shaft 
E, and inclined guide-boards G are sloped up 
wardly in the direction of their length and 
downwardly in the direction of their width 
from the forward end of such shield. The 
guide-boards thus form a ridge upon the cen 
ter line of the machine, as shown in dotted 
lines in Fig. 3, and slope downwardly from 
such ridge, so that the pith and dirt discharged 
from the drum may readily slide from their 
surface. 
The upward inclination of the guide-boards 
serves to arrest the forward motion of the 
dirt and to divertit laterally and downwardly. 
A transverse opening is formed at the lower 
edge of the brake-bar c, through which the 
fiber passes to the exterior of the shield F, as 
is clearly shown in Fig.1, the discharge of 
the fiber through such opening being effected 
by the flexible flaps d, which press the fiber 
outwardly as soon as the ends are bent over 
the brake-bar. 
A shield F is extended from the feed-roll 
e over the top of the beater, and is provided 
with a cover G', extending over the guides G. 
Adjacent to the opening between the lower 
side of the brake-bar c and the shield F a 
shaker-bar his arranged to knock the fiber as 
it passes outwardly through such opening. 
The shaker is attached by arms to a rock 
shaft I, and arms I are projected downward 
from the rock-shaft and provided with forks 
i upon their lower ends to receive a bar J, 
which is extended between the frames A, and 
provided with eccentric shaft bearings or 
journals J', supported in the frames A. The 
bar J is thus eccentric to its bearings and 
serves to vibrate the arms I and the parts at 
tached thereto. The part J is provided be 
tween the arms I' with wheels k, carrying 
belts IK with cross-bars le", adapted to form all 
apron which delivers the fiber at the rear end 
The belts and cross-bars are 
of the machine. 
omitted in Fig. 2 to show the Wheels k. 
The eccentric bar J is attached at its oppo 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
564,858 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
IO5 
II5 
I 25 
O 
site ends to the journals J by crank-plates 
in a manner common in such constructions, 
and the wheels ic, which carry the belts K, 
are applied eccentrically to such bar so that 
their true centers are inline with the centers 
of the journals J', which causes the wheels to 
revolve concentric with such journals and 
thus carry the belts at a uniform speed. 
A deflector i is attached to the shaker-arms 
I' and inclined to the downward path of the 
fiber, as shown in Fig. 1, to direct the same 
upon the apron. Arms S are attached to the 
shaker-arms I", adjacent to the deflector i, 
and support a transverse bart, against which 
the fibers are drawn as they move forward 
with the apron, and as such bar oscillates 
with the shaker it beats the fibers upon the 
upper side and thus serves to dislodge the 
remaining pith and bark. 
The beater-bars D are provided with back 
wardly-projecting flaps d, made of leather or 
stiff india-rubber cloth, and such flaps per 
form four functions. First, they press out 
wardly under centrifugal force against the 
fiber which is bent downward over the brake 
bar, and thus rub and loosen the bark and 
pith most effectively. Second, they serve to 
throw the fiber forcibly against the shaker 
bar, as is plainly shown in Fig. 1. Third, as 
they project backwardly from the beater 
bars, each of them serves to form a pocket 
in which a greater part of the pith and bark 
is caught, which is beaten from the stalk by 
the succeeding beater-bar D, as is clearly 
shown in the beaters adjacent to the brake 
bar c in Fig. 1. The dirt which is caught in 
such pocket is temporarily held therein by 
the contact of the flaps with the curved shield 
F, but the dirt is thrown from such flaps as 
soon as they pass beyond the restraint of the 
shield F. Fourth, they serve to produce a 
strong blast adjacent to the guides G, which, 
owing to their inclination, discharge the dirt 
laterally, and thus prevent it from falling 
upon the fiber which is delivered at the rear 
end of the machine. 
The feed-rolls C are, in practice, mounted 
about five-eighths of an inch apart, and the 
clamp-roll e is also mounted about the same 
distance above the brake-bar c. The rolls C 
are connected by cog-wheels l and driven by 
gears n, from the beater-shaft E, which is ro 
tated by pulley N. The shaker-shaft is driven 
by wheels and belt or chain o from the lower 
feed-roll, and the clamp-roll e is driven by 
wheels and a belt or chain o' from the shaft.E. 
The shaft, J', which rotates the brake-bar J 
and the wheels k, is geared so as to vibrate 
the shaker rapidly, and the wheels k may be 
proportioned to drive the apron at sufficient 
Speed to rub the fiber and clean the bark there 
from. 
The machine operates as follows: The stalks 
of hemp or flax are fed between the rolls C 
and under the roll e, and are thrown down 
Wardly upon the edge of the bar c by the beat 
ers D. As it moves downwardly the fiber is 
struck upon the under side by the shaker-bar 
h, and is also beaten upon the upper side by 
the revolving flaps d. As it moves down 
wardly to the deflector i it is again beaten 
upon the under side, after which it is drawn 
by the apron in contact with the bar t and 
beaten again upon the upper side. It thus 
receives a thorough knocking and shaking 
until the entire length of the fiber passes out. 
While one bar of the beater is breaking the 
hemp the flap upon the bar below it catches 
what is broken by the upper bar. The Space 
below the brake-bar, where the beater-flaps 
operate upon the fiber, is closed alternately 
by the Successive flaps, and the Woody pieces 
which are beaten from the stalk are thus pre 
vented from falling down upon the apron 
with the fiber. Those pieces that adhere to 
the fiber are knocked and beaten off by the 
shaker, and are permitted to fall upon the 
ground by the open-slatted construction of 
the apron, and are removed from time to 
time. The pith and dirt dislodged by the 
beaters is indicated by the letter ' in Fig. 1, 
and is thrown with a blast of air upon the 
guides G, by which it is discharged in a lat 
eral direction from the openings G in the side 
of the casing, thus enabling the operator to 
stand at the rear end of the machine to re 
ceive the fiber, which is delivered clean from 
: the apron. 
The clamp-roll e can be brought much 
nearer to the beaters than the upper feed 
roll, as the lower feed-roll is necessarily be 
hind the brake-bar, and the clamp-roll thus 
prevents the stalks from bending upwardly 
when pressed by the beater-bars, and secures 
the breaking of the stalks much shorter than 
Would otherwise be effected. 
It has been common heretofore to hinge 
radial beater-bal's upon a drum, and to sus 
itain a shield concentric with the drum, 
against which such hinged beater-bars could 
rub the fibers to clean the same. I find that 
Such rubbing of the material operates to 
shorten the fiber, and I therefore discharge 
the fiber immediately below the brake-bar e 
from contact with the flaps d by passing it 
through the opening at the forward end of 
the shield F. The fiber is not therefore sup 
ported by the shield in any manner, but the 
shield prevents the escape of the dirt from 
the pockets within the ?laps d until they 
reach the outer side of the drum, where the 
dirt is permitted to discharge from such 
pockets upon the guide-boards G. My shield 
E thus differs radically from those construc 
tions which support the fiber during the 
beating or cleaning operation. The flexible 
flaps, combined with the rigid beater-bars D, 
perform a very different function from the 
hinged beater-bars heretofore used, as my 
rigid bars serve to positively break the stalks 
upon the bar c, while the flaps serve to form 
pockets in which the dirt is carried to the op 
35 
45 
55 
 
564,858 
s 
opening between the lower side of the brake 
bar and the forward edge of such shield, the 
flexible flapsd upon the brake-bars for driv 
ing the fibers outwardly through such open 
ing, and a vibrating shaker arranged beneath 
the brake-bar to beat the fibers upon the 
outer side, substantially as herein set forth. 
4. A flax or hemp brake having a brake 
bar with a rotary beater adjacent thereto, 
feed-rolls to propel the stalks across the 
brake-bar, the shield F arranged below the 
beater with opening adjacent to the lower 
side of the brake-bar, the shaft I having a 
shaker hinged upon the same and provided 
above the shaft with the shaker-bar h and 
below the shaft with the deflectori and the 
shaker-bart, and an apron for conveying the 
fibers from the deflector, substantially as 
herein set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
35 
45 
ALBERT ANGELL. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS S. CRANE, 
EDWARD F. KINSEY. 
posite side of the drum. Neither of these 
functions is performed by the hinged beater 
bars heretofore used. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A flax or hemp brake having a brake 
bar with feed-rolls adjacent thereto, a revolv 
ing beater with transverse beater-bars D, 
and flexible flaps d attached to such beater 
bars and extended backwardly, the trans 
verse bars serving to positively break the 
stalks over the brake-bar, substantially as 
herein set forth. 
2. A flax or hemp brake having a brake 
bar with feed-rolls adjacent thereto, a revolv 
ing beater with transverse beater-bars D, a. 
shield F below the beater with opening be 
tween the lower side of the brake-bar and 
the forward edge of such shield, and the 
flexible flapsd projected backwardly upon the 
beater-bars for driving the fibers outwardly 
through such opening, substantially as herein 
set forth. 
3. A flax or hemp brake having a brake 
bar with feed-rolls adjacent thereto, a revolv 
ing beater with transverse beater-bars D, a 
shield F below the revolving beaters with 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564460.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 564,460, 
H. TRAUN. 
COMB, 
Patented July 21, 1896. 
s N N 
WITNESSES, 
7% zzar 
tyEnron. 
2 year? 
ATTORWEYS 
the 3RRS PETERs co. PHoTo-LirHo, washington, c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HEINRICH TRAUN, OF HAMBURG, GERMANY. 
COMB. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,460, dated July 21, 1896. 
Application filed December 23, 1895, Serial No. 573,086, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To aid, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HEENRICHTRAUN, a sub 
ject of the King of Prussia, Emperor of Ger 
many, residing at Hamburg, in the Empire of 
Germany, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in or Relating to Combs, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in or relating to combs; and it consists in a 
device for protecting the teeth of the comb. 
This device is formed by a bow which is ro 
tatable and arranged on the comb in such a 
manner that when placed in one position it 
allows of the free use of the comb, while 
placed in another position the teeth are pro 
tected againsthooking in and breaking when 
the comb is put into a case, box, or the like. 
The improvement is shown in the accom 
panying drawings. 
Figure 1 represents the comb with the bow 
in the position ready for use. Fig. 2 shows 
the bow in its protecting position. 
As illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, the arrangementis made in Such a man 
ner that a bow A, having the shape of the 
comb-back B and being a little larger than 
the latter, is secured to the two end teeth B 
and B of the comb, so that it can be turned 
on the pins C and C, i. e., round the longi 
tudinalaxis of the comb. To theside branches 
A' and A* of the bow or to the teeth Band B 
of the comb are fixed small buttons E and E, 
which, when the bow is in the position shown 
in Fig. 1, as Well as in that shown in Fig. 2, 
engage into corresponding notches arranged 
in the opposite teeth or branches and hold 
fast thereby, in combination with the elas 
ticity of the bow, the latterin its correspond 
ing position. To disengage the bow, it is 
sufficient to apply a strong pressure by hand. 
In general the hold is sufficiently strong to 
retain the bow in its position for use as well 
as in its protecting position. 
In manufacturing the comb it is advan 
tageous to give the comb a larger back than 
usually is the case and to separate the boW 
from the comb by cutting it off with a special 
Cutter. 
The comb and the protecting-bow are man 
ufactured therefore advantageously by one 
sole pressure; but this is, of course, not ab 
solutely necessary, and the protecting-band 
may also be made separately from the comb. 
The essential feature of the improvement 
is that the comb has a protecting-band of a 
form adapted completely and exactly to the 
shape of the comb and lying, as long as the 
comb is used, above the back of the latter, 
while for protecting the teeth it is turned 
through one hundred and eighty degrees. 
The protecting-bow can be applied to any 
kind of combs, such as dressing-combs, pocket 
combs, dandruff-combs, and the like, and it 
is not limited to any determined shape or 
size of the comb. In addition to the protec 
tion afforded to the teeth the bow is also of 
excellent use in Washing and cleaning the 
comb, where it is turned through ninety de 
grees, holds the comb clear off from its sup 
port, and permits a quick drying of the same. 
I claim 
1. A comb having a back and teeth project 
ing from the back, the teeth being approxi 
mately rigid with the back, a bow pivoted to 
the end teeth and swinging on an axis longitu 
dinal with the comb, and meansforlocking the 
bow on the comb, the means consisting of a 
tooth carried by one part and adapted to en 
ter a notch in the opposite part, substantially 
as described. 
2. A comb having a back and teeth project 
ing laterally from one side of the back and a 
protective bow for the comb, the bow com 
prising a part extending parallel. With the 
back and a part at each end of the first part, 
the latter parts extending transversely to the 
back and respectively lying outside of the 
end teeth, said latter parts being pivotally 
connected to the respective end teeth on axes 
longitudinal with the back, the bow being 
capable of Swinging on such axes so that the 
first-named part of the bow will lie directly 
adjacent to the back or at the outer ends of 
the teeth, substantially as described. 
3. As a new article of manufacture, a comb, 
a guard-bow and pivoted connections between 
the comb and bow, the comb having pivotal 
movement on its longitudinal axis within the 
bow on such connections, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
HEINERICH TRAUN. 
Witnesses: 
HERMANN COLPE, 
FRITZ GUNDELACH, 
95 
OO 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564560.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 564,560, 
G. F. FLODMAN. 
DIAPHRAGM PUMP, 
Patented July 21, 1896, 
- 
 
 
 
22 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
55. 
Na 
 
2ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
i siz 
N N 
THE Norris PETERs co., ProTo trio. washington. D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GUSTAF FERDINAND FLODMAN, OF STOCKHOLM, SWEDEN, ASSIGNOR TO 
FRITZ SYBERG, OF SAME PLACE. 
- 
DIAPHRAGM-PUMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,560, dated July 21, 1896. 
Application filed May 31, 1895, Serial No. 551,121. (No model.) 
O 
To aid tufton it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, GUSTAF FERDINAND 
FLODMAN, a subject of the King of Sweden 
and Norway, and a resident of Stockholm, 
Sweden, have invented certain Improvements 
in Diaphragm-Pumps, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in diaphragm-pumps driven by steam. 
Or other gaseous motive fluid, the admission 
and exhaust of which are regulated by a slide 
valve or corresponding contrivance. 
The most important improvement is that 
the inner wall of the diaphragm vessel, in 
Which the steam or vapor acts, is lined with 
material Such as caOutchouc, which is a bad 
conductor of heat, thereby reducing the loss 
of temperature and condensation of the act 
ting fluid, for the purpose of economizing the 
expenditure of steam or other vapor em 
ployed. 
Anotherimportant improvement is that the 
diaphragm is Weighted, so that it is forced in 
One direction by the pressure of the steam 
when the Water or other fluid which is to be 
pumped is driven upward and the weight 
raised, and after the steam outlet is opened 
the Weight carries the diaphragm in the op 
posite direction when fresh water or fluid is 
Sucked up in the pump. 
On the accompanying drawing the inven 
tion is shown as applied to a steam diaphragm 
pump With a horizontal diaphragm and boiler 
of its own, which is heated by a petroleum 
lamp, though any other source of heat may 
be used at Will. The pump is shown in sec 
tion. 
1 is the boiler, and 2 the steam-pipe leading 
the slide-box 3, with the slide-valve 4, the to 
latter controlling the inlet-channel6, leading 
to the chamber under the diaphragm 5, as 
also the Outlet-Channel 7. This last-men 
tioned channel is prolonged by the pipe 8, 
which is connected with the upper end of the 
spiral or coil 10, placed in the chamber 9, 
which spiral is cooled by the water forced up 
by the pump, and the other end of which 
spiral is connected with the descending pipe 
11, the lower end of which is above the up 
per open end of the vertical vessel 14, that 
communicates by a pipe 12 with the suction 
valve of the feed-pump 13. 12* is the feed 
pipe of the boiler. 5* is the lining. On the 
diaphragm 5, which is not weakened by rivet 
holes through it or otherwise, there lies a 
metal plate 20, and in the apparatus shown. 
there is a somewhat larger intermediate plate 
21, made of flexible material, in order to pro 
tect the diaphragm. 
The plate 20 is attached to a guided rod 18, 
which passes up through the pump-chamber 
and out through a stuffing-box. 19. 
Outside the pump-chamber the rod 18 is 
jointed by means of a link to the weighted 
arm 16 (Weight marked 17) of a beam oscil 
lating on the pivot 15. 
The suction-pipe of the pump is 31, and 32 
its discharge-pipe, while 33 is the suction 
valve, and 34 the discharge-valve. 
The valve-motion (represented in the draw 
ing in its middle position) is of the following 
construction. On the left-hand side of the 
pivot 15 of the beam this is jointed to the rod 
22, which operates both the slide-valve and 
the plunger 23 of the feed-pump. Pivoted 
upon a fixed axis 25 there is a double-armed 
lever 26, which, with its one arm, suitably 
shaped for this purpose, embraces the rod 22 
between its tWO adjustable tappets 24, 24*, 
While the Second arm traverses an elongated 
groove in the slide-valve rod 4. The lever 26 
also has an arm 27 extending upward, which 
is hinge-jointed to a rod 30, influenced by a 
spring (not visible in the drawing) placed in 
the case 29, Swinging upon the fixed pivot 28, 
and thus forming with 27 a sort of toggle 
joint. 
The pump Works in the following manner: 
When there is no pressure of steam on the 
under side of the diaphragm, this sinks un 
der the action of the weight 17, and the wa 
ter is sucked in through the Suction-pipe. At 
the same time the rod 22 rises, carrying with 
it the lower tappet 24, that strikes against 
the arm of the lever 26 above the tappet, 
which arm is lifted. The toggle-joint 27 30 
is thereby made to pass the center line, and 
no sooner has it done so than the spring in 
the case 29 throws the other end of the ever 
26 against the lower edge of the groove in the 
slide-valve rod 4, when the slide-valve is 
rapidly drawn down and opens the inlet-chan 
55 
Go 
65 
7 O 
90 
OC 
25 
45 
 
2 
564,560 
be differently arranged, but it is preferable 
to operate it from the beam, as shown. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a diaphragm-pump Worked by steam 
or other gaseous motive fluid, the combina 
tion of a diaphragm, a weighted lever and 
connections between the weighted lever and 
the diaphragm to cause the weighted lever to 
press on One side of the diaphragm, with means 
for distributing the motive fluid to and from 
the steam-chamber on the other side of the 
diaphragm, and a non-conducting lining cov 
ering the inner wall of said steam-chamber, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a diaphragm-pump Worked by steam 
or other gaseous motive fluid, the combina 
tion of a diaphragm, a weighted lever and 
connections between the weighted lever and 
the diaphragm to cause the weighted lever to 
press on one side of the diaphragm, with a 
Steam-chamber on the other side of the dia 
phragm, a slide-valve controlling the inlet 
and outlet to the steam-chamber, and con 
nections between the slide-valve and the 
Weighted lever to operate the slide-valve, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
GUSTAF FERDIN AND FLODIAN. 
Witnesses: 
CARL P. GERELL, 
FREDRIK L. ENQUIST. 
45 
so 
55 
65 
nel 6. 
If there be steam in the boiler J and 
the steam-valve (not shown in the drawing) 
is open, the steam enters the chamber under 
the diaphragm, driving the latter upward 
and forcing the water out through the pipe 32. 
The rising of the diaphragm also causes the 
rise of the rod 18 and the weight 17 and the 
sinking of the rod 22, when the plunger 23 
forces the water into the boiler, and the up 
per tappet 24 of the rod 22 reverses the slide 
valve, as previously described, so that the 
slide-valve places the chamber under the 
diaphragm in connection with the outlet 
channel 7. The steam under the diaphragm 
now passes through the refrigerating-spiral 
10 and is condensed. The Weight 17 then 
presses down the diaphragm and the Water 
is sucked in by the pipe 31, while at the same 
time the plunger of the feed-pump, which 
sucks in the condensed water collected in 
the vessel 14 through the pipe 12, is raised, 
and the lower tappet 24* on the rod 22 re 
verses the slide-valve at the proper moment, 
so that the steam is again admitted under 
the diaphragm, when the action is repeated. 
The cooling of the spiral 10 may be accom 
plished in any other convenient manner in 
stead of as shown. Thus it may be located 
in the suction-pipe, if desired, or it may be 
cooled otherwise. 
The pump may also be applied to existing 
steam-boilers and be driven by the steam 
therefrom, in which case the boiler 1, with 
its feed-pump, is not required, nor is the con 
denser needed. The rod 22 must in that case 
be guided below. The valve motion may also 
O 
5 
25 
5 
3 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564660.txt	(No Model.) 
J. THOMAS & J. M. TRUBY, 
REIFRIGERATOR CAR. 
2 Sheet S 
Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
He Norris PETERSto. Photo-THo...washington... c. 
f No Model.) 
No. 564,660, 
J. THOMAS & J. M. TRUBY. 
REFRIGERATOR CAR. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented July 28, 1896. 
 
 
 
Z 
  
s 
SKA 
I 
 
s 
 
 
 
 
?? 4I I I IT 
s 
s 
 
O 
? M 
EEEEE 
O 
-- 
?@ 
 
 
SM SL LSSuA uSLLLLS uuSS 
 
LSSSH HHH 
SJkJYJJLLSSL LLLLS Sk0JSLYJheeSS 
L S LL S LL L SS SSqSSYSS HH 
 
  
... 
e s 
 
2 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL 
I 
C??-?. 
The Morris PerERsco. Photo-Lyra, waashaworow. d. c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH THOMAS AND JACOB M. TRUBY, OF STARKE, FLORIDA. 
REFRGERATOR-CAR. 
???? 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,660, dated July 28, 1896. 
Application filed August 6, 1895, Serial No. 558,406. (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOSEPH THOMAS and 
JACOBM.TRUBY, citizens of the United States, 
residing at Starke, in the county of Bradford 
and State of Florida, have invented a new 
and useful Refrigerator-Car, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
refrigerator-cars. 
The object of the present invention is to 
improve the construction of refrigerator-cars, 
to facilitate the handling of fruit and similar 
articles of a perishable nature, and to enable 
the ice to be economically distributed, and 
to produce a continuous circulation of cold 
air through all of the fruit or other contents 
of the car. 
A further object of the invention is to en 
able a portion of a car to be loaded or un 
loaded or supplied with ice without admitting 
the warm exterior atmospheric air to the other 
portions of the car. 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
vide an ice pan or receptacle in which ice 
may be arranged so as not to interfere with 
the free circulation of air through it, and to 
cushion fruit or the like to prevent the same 
from being bruised or otherwise injured dur 
ing its transit from one place to another. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a horizontal 
sectional view of a portion of a refrigerator 
car constructed in accordance with this in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal sec 
tional view taken centrally through one of 
the refrigerator-compartments. Fig. 3 is a 
transverse sectional view of a portion of the 
car online ac ac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a horizontal 
sectional view of a portion of the car on line 
y y of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a perspective view of 
one of the ice-receptacles. 
Like numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the 
drawings. 
1 designates a car provided with a pair of 
longitudinal partitions 2, disposed centrally 
of the car at the end portions thereof at op 
posite sides of the car-door openings, and 
forming four refrigerator- compartments 3. 
Each compartment has arranged in it at the 
top thereof an ice pan or receptacle 4, which 55 
is provided with a central longitudinal open 
ing 5 and having a flange 6 surrounding the 
same, and the bottom of the panis further pro 
vided with a depression or gutter 7, adapted 
to collect the water resulting from the melt- 6o 
ing of ice, and the bottom of the pan has a 
slight lateral inclination from its sides to the 
groove or gutter, and inclines from its inner 
end to the end of the car. This arrangement 
causes the Water to flow down the gutter to a 65 
discharge pipe or tube 8 located at the end of 
the car. 
In order to prevent the ice from closing or 
partially closing the longitudinal opening 5 
and interfering with the circulation of air, 7o 
the pan is provided with screens 8, arranged 
parallel and extending vertically upward 
from the flanges 6 at the sides of the opening 
5. The screens 8 may be wire-netting or any 
other foraminous material, and they are Sup- 75 
ported at their upper edges by longitudinal 
rods 9. Within the space between the screens 
8 are located vertically-disposed posts 10, 
arranged at intervals and Supporting the 
screens and connected with the same by metal 8o 
straps 11, secured to the tops of the posts and 
to the outer faces of the screens. The rods 
9 may be formed integral with each other, 
and they are secured to the outer end of the 
pan, and as the inner end of the pan or re-85 
ceptacle 4 is provided with a hinged door 12, 
the innermost post extends vertically, and is 
suitably secured to the top of the car in order 
to afford the proper support for the screens. 
in the pan from getting over or directly above 
the longitudinal opening 5 and prevent any 
interference with the circulation of the air, 
and at the same time fully expose the ice to 
the action of the air circulating through the 95 
- 
refrigerator-compartment. 
The icepanor receptacle 4 is supported upon 
the platform 13, having oppositely-inclined 
sides to conform to the configuration of the 
bottom of the pan or receptacle 4, and it is Ioo 
provided with a longitudinal opening 14 reg 
istering with the opening of the pan or recep 
tacle 4. The platformisprovided with trans 
verse bars 15, which have their terminals se 
The screens prevent the ice contained with- 9o 
2 
564,660 
cured in recesses of spacing-cleats 16, and 
which are centrally supported by vertically 
disposed uprights 17, stepped in suitable sock 
ets Of the bottom of the car. The recesses of 
the Spacing-cleats 16 are located at opposite 
edges thereof, as shown in the accompanying 
drawings, and the ends of the transverse bars 
are retained in the recesses by the sides of 
the platform, to which they are secured. The 
spacing-cleats, which are interposed between 
the sides of the compartment and the sides of 
the pan form spaces to permit a circulation 
of air around the pan. 
The refrigerator-car is especially designed 
for shipping fruit, but of course may be em 
ployed for transferring any other perishable 
products, and when shipping fruit the latter 
is packed in baskets, boxes, or other recep 
tacles, which are placed on a yieldingly-sup 
ported rack or platform 17, composed, pref 
erably, of central and side longitudinally 
disposed bars, supported at intervals by 
springs 18 and connected by transverse bars 
19. The springs 18 are coiled or spiral, and 
are suitably supported upon the bottom or 
floor of the car, and they permit an upward 
movement of the rack or platform 17 and 
cushion the fruit and prevent the same from 
being bruised or otherwise injured. 
The platform or rack 17 is provided at its 
sides with vertical spacing-bars 20 and at its 
ends with spacing-bars 21 and 22. The side 
spacing-bars 20 are arranged adjacent to the 
side walls of the compartment and are pref 
erably located below the upperspacing-cleats, 
the bars 20 terminating a sufficient distance 
directly below the same to provide an inter 
vening space to allow for the vertical play of 
the yieldingly-supported platform in cush 
ioning the contents of the refrigerator-com 
partment; and the said spacing-bars 20 are 
supported by a horizontal rod 23 extending 
longitudinally of the compartment at oppo 
site sides thereof and arranged adjacent to 
the inner faces of the bars 20. 
The outer end bars 21, which are located 
adjacent to the end of the car, are provided 
With Cushions 24, located at the ends of the 
bars and interposed between the same and 
the end of the car, and consisting, preferably, 
of Spiral springs. The inner end bars 22 are 
removable, and are provided with cushions 
25, consisting, preferably, of spiral or coiled 
Springs, and arranged to engage the top and 
bottom of the door-frame 26, and as the fruit is 
stored in the compartment, removable trans 
verse bars 27 are interposed between the fruit 
receptacles and the bars 22. These end bars 
21 and 22 form end cushions for the rack or 
platform 17 and prevent the fruit or other 
contents of a car from being bruised or in 
jured When cars come in contact. 
In Order to prevent the contents of the 
compartment from coming in contact with 
the uprights 17, vertical bars 28 are located 
in front and in rear of the said uprights, and 
are connected near their upper ends by lon 
gitudinal bars 29, and have their lower ends 
suitably secured to the adjacent transverse 
bars of the yieldingly-mounted rack or plat 
form. These bars 28 form a guard and pre 
vent the contents of the compartment from 
coming in contact with and binding against 
the central supports of the ice pan or re 
ceptacle. 
The compartment is provided at its inner 
end with upper and lower doors 30 and 31, 
which are preferably hinged and arranged to 
swing downward, but which may be con 
structed to open in any suitable manner. 
These doors are hinged at their lower edges, 
and when closed have their upper edges en 
gaged by a pivoted button or any other suit 
able fastening device. 
The door 12 at the inner end of the ice pan 
or receptacle 4 is hinged at its lower edge to 
the bottom of the pan, and is supported in a 
horizontal position by pivoted braces 32, lo 
cated at opposite sides of the pan at the Outer 
faces of the sides thereof, and provided with 
notches or shoulders 33 and 34, arranged to 
engage projections 35 of the side walls of the 
compartment. The recess or shoulder 33 is 
located adjacent to the hinged end of the bar 
32, and is adapted to hold the door of the pan 
in its closed position, and the shoulder 34 is 
located adjacent to the other end of the bar 
32, and is adapted to support the door in a 
horizontal position. When the door is in a 
horizontal position, it forms a shelf or sup 
port to facilitate the introduction of ice into 
the pan or receptacle, and any suitable hoist 
ing apparatus may be employed for raising 
the ice from the bottom or floor of the car to 
the ice-pan. 
In the accompanying drawings horizontal 
rods 36 are shown at opposite sides of the car, 
and each is provided with a pulley adapted 
to be shifted from one compartment to the 
opposite one, and over which may be thrown 
a rope for hoisting the ice. 
It will be seen that the refrigerator-com 
partments are adapted to be loaded or un 
loaded or supplied with ice separately with 
out exposing the entire contents of a car to 
the action of the warm atmospheric air when 
access is desired to only a portion of it. It 
Will also be apparent that the entire contents 
of the car may be thoroughly subjected to 
the action of the cool currents of air caused 
by ice in the ice pans or receptacles, and . 
that the openings of the latter cannot become 
accidentally closed or partially closed. The 
gutter surrounding the opening of each ice 
pan. Or receptacle receives the water result 
ing from the melting of the ice and conveys 
the same away from the ice to the discharge 
pipe or tube, and as the latter is provided at 
its upper end With a sponge or other absorb 
ent material it prevents the outside atmos 
pheric air from entering the car and raising 
the temperature of the same. 
The yieldingly-supported platform or 
rack is capable of vertical and longitudinal 
- 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
564,660 
s 
45 
55 
movement, and is cushioned therein, and is 
adapted to prevent fruit and the like from 
being bruised or otherwise injured. 
Changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction may be resorted 
to without departing from the principle or 
sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
vention. 
What we claim is 
1. A refrigerator provided at its top with 
an ice pan or receptacle, comprising vertical 
sides and ends and a bottom having a longi 
tudinal opening and provided with an up 
wardly-extending flange surrounding the 
opening, combined With screens disposed 
vertically above the flange and extending the 
entire length of the pan or receptacle and 
forming an intervening air-space open at the 
top to permit an unobstructed circulation of 
air through the pan, said screens having their 
upper edges arranged in the same plane as 
the upper edges of the sides of the pan, ver 
tically - disposed posts arranged within the 
space between the screens and extending 
from the upper edges of the latter to the 
lower edges of the flanges of the bottom of 
the pan, and means for securing the screens 
to the posts, substantially as described. 
2. In a refrigerator, the combination of a 
platform provided with a longitudinal open 
ing and inclined at opposite sides of the 
opening, transverse bars 15 supporting the 
platform and extending across the opening 
thereof, an ice pan or receptacle comprising 
vertical sides and ends, and a bottom having 
a longitudinal opening registering with the 
opening of the platform and sloping at oppo 
site sides of the opening to fit the platform, 
IO 
I5 
2 ? 
25 
3o 
said bottom being provided at opposite sides 
of the opening with depressions or gutters 7 
arranged in the opening of the platform and 
supported upon the transverse bars 15, 
screens extending upward from the bottom 
of the pan at opposite sides of the opening 
from one end of the pan to the other, and 
vertical posts arranged at intervals beween 
the screens, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a car, provided with 
a refrigerator-compartment, a rigid platform 
arranged at the upper portion thereof, an 
ice-receptacle mounted on the platform, up 
rights supporting the center of the platform, 
a yieldingly-mounted platform arranged at 
the bottom of the compartment and Sup 
ported by springs, the vertically-disposed 
bars 28, mounted on and movable with the 
yielding platform and located at intervals ad 
jacent to the uprights and suitably connected 
and forming a shield to prevent the contents 
of the compartment from coming in contact 
With the uprights, and the end bars 21 and 22 
carried by the platform and provided with 
springs interposed between them and the 
Walls of the compartment, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing 
as our own we have hereto affixed our signa 
tures in the presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPH THOMAS. 
JACOB M. TRUBY. 
Witnesses for Joseph Thomas: 
Witnesses for Jacob M. Truby: 
JOHN H. SIGGERs, 
W. B. HUDSON. 
W. ELLERY DAVIS, 
ANDREW FLORENS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564760.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 564,760. 
W. H. PERRY. 
DRIVE CHAIN. 
Patented July 28, 1896. 
A fa e 
C of EN 
% 2 Ip?opter 
ArAAerve/, 
Wilness.cs 
y 
22 3y-Zzis offippeys. 
the Norts Peters co. Poro-to, was:INGto...c. 
 
JNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
VER. H. PERRY, OF STORM LAKE, IOWA. 
DRIVE CHAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,760, dated July 28, 1896. 
Application filed March 30, 1895, 
Serial No. 543,899, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
55 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, VER.H.PERRY, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Storm Lake, 
in the county of Buena Vista, and State of Iowa, 
have invented a new and useful Drive-Chain, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to drive-chains; and 
it has for its object to effect certain improve 
ments in endless drive-chains of that class 
composed of detachable links. 
To this end the main and primary object 
of the present invention is to provide certain 
improvements in drive-chains, which, while 
consisting of readily-detachable links, at the 
same time will allow the greatest possible 
amount of play, so as to be readily adapted 
for use in connection with endless elevators, 
conveyers, and in factin all kinds of gearing 
employing endless drive - chains; and with 
these several objects the invention contem 
plates a chain having exceptional strength 
and desirability for the several uses to which 
the same may be adapted. 
With these and other objects in view, which 
will readily appear as the nature of the in 
vention is better understood, the same con 
sists in the novel construction, combination, 
and arrangement of parts hereinafter more 
fully described, illustrated, and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
side elevation of a section of a drive-chain con 
structed in accordance with this invention, 
showing the same arranged on a sprocket 
wheel of a construction especially adapted for 
the use of such a chain. Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
detail sectional view of a short section of 
drive-chain, showing the simple form thereof. 
Fig. 3 is a similar view showing the hollow 
construction of link-balls. Fig. 4 is a simi 
lar view showing spheroidal or double-cone 
... shaped link-balls. 
Fig. 5 is a similar view 
showing a slightly-modified construction of 
chain as adapted for elevators and analogous 
purposes. Fig. 6 is a similar view showing 
a modified form of link connection. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
A represents a drive-chain composed of a se 
ries of loosely and detachably connected 
chain-links B. The chain-links B primarily 
consist of the connecting link-bars C and 
the rounded or spherical link balls or knobs 
D, made fast at one end of the said link 
bars. The rigid connection between the 
link-bars and the ball or knob of each link is 
made in any suitable manner, or by casting 
the same together, if found expedient or de 
sirable. The outer ends of the link-bars C 
are provided with the double connecting 
hooks E, consisting of reversely- disposed 
hook extremities e, which provide for a se 
cure and not readily detachable connection 
with the link bails or loops F, projected from 
one side of the balls or knobs D in front of 
the bail-recesses G, which admit of the free 
play of the hook ends of the link-bars C. By 
reason of the hook-and-bail connection E 
and F between the links of the chain A it 
will be seen that the chain will not only 
readily adapt itself to passing over sprocket 
or other wheels, but may be twisted and 
turned in any direction to cross the chain or 
to curve it in any direction, as the require 
lments of the particular gearing may demand, 
without in any way affecting the connection 
between the links, which links are connected 
by passing the bails or loops F between the 
hooks e and then turning the bail or loop 
into the eye of said hooks, as shown in the 
drawings, and the disengagement is effected 
in the same manner. 
The construction of chain just described is 
the most substantial of the several forms 
illustrated in the drawings, and is usually 
employed in connection with a sprocket-wheel 
H, of the construction illustrated in Fig. 1 of 
the drawings, and this sprocket-wheel is pro 
vided with the side peripheral flanges I to 
confine the chain thereon, and directly in its 
periphery is provided with a regularly-spaced 
series of ball-sockets J and the link-slots K, 
connecting the same, the sockets Jaccommo 
dating the link balls or knobs D and the slots - 
Kaccommodating the link-bars C. 
Certain kinds of gearing will necessarily de 
mand an exceptionally strong chain, such as 
illustrated in Fig. 2 of the drawings, in which 
the balls or knobs D are made solid; but in 
other kinds of work a hollow ball or knob will 
be found more desirable as making a chain 
of much lighter Weight than the chain illus 
trated in Fig. 2, and to provide for this the 
balls or knobs D may be made entirely hol- - 
low, as clearly illustrated in Fig. 3 of the draw 
ings, the other construction of the chain be 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
564,766 
g 
o 
75 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
ing substantially identical with that already 
described, and in Fig. 4 of the drawings an 
other modification is observed, in which the 
shape of the ball or knob D is changed and 
a spheroidal or double-cone-shaped link-knob 
D' is employed to provide a chain much 
stronger than either the constructions shown 
in Figs. 2 or 3. In the modification just re 
ferred to as employing a spheroidal or double 
cone-shaped knob D' the link connections are 
also substantially like those already de 
scribed; but in connection with this modifi 
cation it may be observed that instead of pro 
viding the link-bars C with a double hook E 
a single hook E may be employed, and which 
is adapted to be placed in engagement with 
the bail or loop F by slipping the same over 
the reduced or notched portion L, with which 
the bail or loop is provided, when a single 
connecting-hook is adapted to be engaged 
there with. The reduction or notch L is lo 
cated near one end of the bail or loop, the 
remaining portion of which is wider than the 
entrance-opening into the hook E", so as to 
prevent the disengagement of the said hook 
therefrom except at the reduction or notch L. 
In adapting the chain for elevator or other 
similar uses I employ hollow balls or knobs 
M, similar in general construction and ap 
pearance to the balls or knobs shown in Fig. 
3 of the drawings; but in this modification a 
more direct pull or strain is placed on the 
link-bars C, which are extended through and 
into the hollow body of the linkballs or knobs 
M and terminate at their extremities within 
the said balls or knobs in the bail-eyes N, 
which correspond to the bails or loops F, which 
in the other modifications are extended di 
rectly from one side of the balls or knobs, 
and said bail-eyes N at the ball or knob ex 
tremities of the link-bars C are adapted to 
be engaged by the connecting-hooks E in the 
Same manner as already described; but, as 
indicated, the last modification just described, 
while providing the enlargement or ball to 
engage in the Sockets of the sprocket-wheel 
to Secure a strong and firm connection be 
tween the chain and wheel, at the same time 
provides a chain in which all of the strain is 
placed directly on the link-bars. 
While in all the forms of the chain illus 
trated and described the link-bars have been 
rigidly connected with the link balls or knobs, 
it Will be obvious that a flexible or loose con 
nection between the bars and the balls or 
knobs may be made. 
As illustrated in Fig. 6 of the drawings, the 
inner or ball ends of the link-bars C may be 
bifurcated, as at O, and pivotally connected 
to the lug P of the pivot-pin Q, the extremi 
ties of which pivotally engage in opposite 
sides of the opening or recess R, formed at 
one side of the ball or knob, whereby the 
link-bars and the balls or knobs connected 
therewith may have a variety of different in 
dependent movements so as to properly ad 
just themselves to different kinds of gear 
ing. The connection just described forms 
substantially a swivel connection of the link 
bars with the balls or knobs, and I have illus 
trated this connection with a hollow ball or 
knob, but by recessing one side of the ball or 
knob the connection could be used in connec 
tion with a solid ball or knob. 
It is to be noted that when the link-bars C 
are provided with the double hooks Eat one 
end thereof said link-bars are made of 
wrought-iron or malleable cast-iron, either of 
which metals possesses a sufficient spring to 
admit of a spreading of the reversely-disposed 
hook extremities e, comprising the double 
hooks E, whereby said double hooks may be 
engaged with the link bails or loops F, or 
with the bail-eyes N, which correspond to 
such bails or loops in the construction illus 
trated in Fig. 5 of the drawings. 
It will also be noted that the link-balls in 
the construction illustrated in Fig. 6 are pref 
erably made in duplicate halves or sections 
suitably riveted or bolted together, so as to 
provide means for the proper fitting of the 
pivot-pin Q within the balls when the drive 
chain is being constructed, and it will be 
further noted that in the construction illus 
trated in Fig. 6 the link-bar C is provided 
with the double hook E. (Illustrated in Figs. 
2, 3, and 5 of the drawings.) 
The particular shapes of the enlargements 
or balls forming a part of each link of the 
chain may be varied to suit particular kinds 
of gearing, and other changes or modifica 
tions may be observed without affecting the 
generic principle embodied in the connec 
tions shown in the several figures of the 
drawings, and changes in the form, propor 
tion, and the minor details of construction 
may be resorted to without departing from 
the principle or sacrificing any of the advan 
tages of this invention. At this point it is 
to be noted that the link balls or knobs may 
be made of any suitable material other than 
metal, such as wood, leather, or any soft ma 
terial that is suitable for the purpose, and 
the different link-bar connections described 
in connection with the different forms of 
balls or knobs are to be understood as being 
different means of connecting the balls or 
knobs that can be employed with any form 
illustrated, although the preferred form of 
connections with the particular forms of 
balls or knobs are shown and described to 
gether. 
Referring again to the hollowballs or knobs, 
it is to be observed that such balls or knobs 
act in the capacity of elevator-cups for the 
elevation or conveying of material, and may 
be either cast with or separately secured on 
the bars C. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed, and desired to be secured by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A drive-chain consisting of a series of 
detachable links, each comprising a straight 
link-bar provided at one end with a hook and 
95 
OO 
O 
IIS 
I 25 
564,760 
3 
carrying a link-enlargement, said link-en 
largement being provided at the side oppo 
site the hook end of the link-bar with a re 
cess, and a bail projecting out of said recess 
and adapted to be engaged by the hook of an 
adjacent link-bar, substantially as set forth. 
2. The herein-described drive-chain con 
sisting of a series of detachable links com 
prising link-bars with double connecting 
hooks at One end, and carrying link-balls 
provided at one side with recesses and with 
link-bails projecting out of said link-recesses 
for engagement with said hooks, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. A drive-chain consisting of the links 
comprising link-balls provided at one side 
with link bails or loops, and the link-bars 
provided at one end with a hook and at their 
O. 
other ends having a double pivotal connec 
tion with one side of the link-balls, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. A drive-chain consisting of the links 
comprising link-balls provided at one side 
with link bails or loops, and at opposite sides 
with turning pivot-pins, and the link-bars 
pivotally connected at one end to said turn 
ing pivot-pins and provided with hooks at 
their other ends, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
- 
25 
WER. H. PERRY. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. PLANALP, 
GEORGE L. READER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564861.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 564,861, 
s 
  
 
S 
S 
 
 
 
D. L. BARNES. 
ELECTRIC RACK I,000MOTIVE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet i. 
Patented July 28, 1896. 
  
Y 22 
- - - 
 
 
 
 
s 
 
 
\ 
Ry 2 
ZarzessenS N & Irzverzeer 
(22.96S-- 
232 a 132-141 
\e/TE 
y 2. 
N2/2 
y 
 
re Nathis per's co, P-40TclTMd., WASHN3TON. c. 
No. 564,861, 
ELECTRIC RACKLOCOMOTIVE. 
Patented July 28, 1896. 
 
 
42 2. 12 
as crers ca. Porc-litrio. was: 
e 
Zrzz/e7eatory; 
Zozzza Z.Zarvees 
2% azis a 22e2/s 
evow r: 260az 
(No Model.) 
D. L. BARNES. 
w 
ELECTRIC RACK OCOMOTIVE, 
3 sheets-sheet 3. 
No. 564,861, 
 
Patented July 28, 1896. 
s 
   
N S5, 
t R. 
E2, 2 
N 
SS2 2 
4--as we arra- as arr Y, 
S 
 
Edgigi E2.. 
aga ?tatists 2 22 
tells 
2 
Zrzverzor, 
Zzz/21 A. Zarzzes 
Ay?es. 4.6/or 7zezas 
2-wavr 7zeau 
is perers co. Photo-urho. was 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
YezveSoey. 
y 
(72)-6-4---- 
22, a 42-w, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
DAVID L. BARNES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
ELECTRIC RACK-LO COMOTIVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,861, dated July 28, 1896. 
Application filed March 19, 1896, Serial No. 583,937, (No model.) 
O 
3 5 
40 
To Cult, Luhon, it inctly concern 
Beit known that I, DAVIDL. BARNES, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Chicago, Illinois, have invented certain Im 
provements in Electric Rack-Locomotives, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
an electric rack-locomotive in which the mo 
tors are supported partly by the axles and 
partly by the frame. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal sectional view of my improved 
rack-locomotive. Fig. 2 is a sectional plan 
view. Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view. 
Fig. 4 is a detached side view of the motor 
and its bearings. 
AA are the side frames of a locomotive, on 
which is the body or car-frame B' of any suit 
able design. On the frames A are the pedes 
tals Ct. Cl, for the journal-boxes C. 
B are axles adapted to the journal-boxes C, 
as clearly shown in Figs. 1 and 3. Yokes c 
are supported by each box C, and suspended 
from the end of these yokes by the links c' 
are carriers c for the springs c, which sup 
port the frames A, Fig. 1. 
D are electric motors of any suitable con 
struction, and on each motor are frames D', 
having boxes d and d". The boxes d are 
adapted to the axles B, while an intermediate 
shaft E is adapted to the boxes d". 
On the motor-shaft dis a pinion e, meshing 
with the gear-wheel e' on the intermediate 
shaft E, and on this intermediate shaft, E is a 
gear-wheel E", which meshes with the gear 
wheel F on the axle B. The gear-wheel F is 
adapted to mesh with a rackf, Fig. 3, mounted 
between the rails of the track. 
It will be noticed that the wheels E and F 
are double wheels. One half, e, of the wheel 
E" has teeth which are opposite the spaces in 
the other half, e, of the wheel. The same con 
struction is carried out on the wheel F. The 
teeth of the half fare opposite the spaces of 
the halff. This form of gear-wheel is com 
mon in rack-locomotives. 
have shown in the drawings two bearing 
frames D for each motor, but a single frame 
may be used without departing from my in 
vention. 
On that side of each motor D opposite to 
m 
 
55 
65 
the side carrying the bearing-frame is a lug 
d', which rests upon a bracket a' on the cross 
bar A' of the frame A. Thus the motor is 
partly supported by the frame and partly by 
the axle B. The motor rests loosely upon the 
bracket Cl", so that it will accommodate itself 
to the axe. 
In the drawings, Figs. 1 and 2, I have shown 
the locomotive having two independent mo 
tors, each motor geared to an axle, one motor 
being a duplicate of the other, so that each 
axle is driven by its own motor. 
In Some instances a single motor may be 
used, either on a single driving-shaft, or the 
driving-wheels may be coupled in the ordi 
nary manner by connecting-rods, 
One or both of the intermediate shafts E 
may be provided with friction-drums or other 
brake mechanism. 
More than two motors may be used and more 
than two axles, and the axles may be coupled 
together when the motors are independently 
arranged without departing from my inven 
tion, the essential feature of my invention 
being the arrangement of the parts so that the 
rack-gear can be driven by an electric motor. 
The controller-box G is made in any suit 
able manner. The controller - wheel g is 
mounted on the shaft g', which is coupled to 
the mechanism in the box, this shaft being 
Supported in any appropriate manner and ar 
ranged within easy access of the operator. 
I claim as my invention-- 
1. The combination in a rack-locomotive, 
of the rack-wheel and its axle, a motor having 
a frame supported by said axle and also hav 
ing a bearing on the frame of the locomotive 
and gearing between the armature-shaft of 
the motor and the axle, one of the elements 
of said gearing being the rack-shaft, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination in a rack-locomotive, 
of the main frame, the driving-axle, a gear 
wheel mounted on the axle and adapted to 
engage a rack, a motor, a bearing-frame se 
cured to or forming part of the motor and 
having journal-boxes adapted to the axle, an 
intermediate shaft and a motor-shaft, the said 
intermediate shaft being supported by the 
said frame and having gear-wheels, one mesh 
ing with the gear-wheel on the axle and the 
75 
95 
Od 
2 
564,861 
 
rack, a gear-wheel on the intermediate shaft 
meshing with the rack gear-wheel, a second I5 
gear-wheel also on the intermediate shaft, the 
motor-shaft and a pinion on said motor-shaft 
engaging with the said second gear-wheel, 
substantially as described. 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 20 
DAVID T. BARNES. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES G. KEYS, 
HENRY. HOWSON. 
other meshing with the pinion on the motor 
shaft, the motorresting loosely on the frame, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination in an electric rack-lo 
comotive, of the mainframe, the driving-axle, 
journal-boxes mounted in the pedestals of the 
frame, springs interposed between the frame 
and the axle, a motor having a lug loosely 
resting on the frame, bearing-frame secured 
to or forming part of the motor and resting 
upon the axle, an intermediate shaft jour 
naled in bearings on the said frame, a gear 
wheel on the axle adapted to mesh with a 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US564961.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 564,961, 
B. W. ANNIN, 
MECHANICAL TOY, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896. 
 
B. W. ANNIN. 
MECHANICAL TOY, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896. 
. (No Model.) 
No. 564,961. 
 
re-recurity 
... 
- 
22. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BRYANT W. ANNIN, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO CHARLES A. PHELPS, OF SAME PLACE. 
MECHAN CAL TOY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 564,961, dated August 4, 1896. 
Application filed February 12, 1895. Serial No. 538,141, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that 3, BRYANT W. ANNIN, of 
the city of Minneapolis, in the county of Hen 
nepin and State of Minnesota, have invented 
a certain new and Improved Mechanical Toy, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to mechanical toys, 
and particularly to a toy row-boat having 
oars to be operated by a toy man or figure 
actuated by a suitable motive power. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
toy row-boat and an automaton adapted to 
move the oars thereof through the water and 
to lift and return the oars after each stroke 
thereof. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide means for the easy regulation of the de 
wice. 
My invention consists generally in a me 
chanical toy of the construction and combi 
nation of parts hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claim. 
The invention will be more readily under 
stood by reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, and 
in which 
Figure I is a perspective view showing an 
automatic or toy row-boat embodying my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view 
thereof on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an 
enlarged longitudinal side elevation of the 
mechanical parts. Fig. 4 is a front view 
thereof. Fig. 5 is a detail view showing the 
inner side of the crank-wheel. Fig. 6 is a 
plan view of the fly-wheel and brake-lever. 
As shown in the drawings, 2 represents a 
small boat of any suitable or preferred con 
struction and made of any suitable material, 
but preferably of tin, and having air-tight 
compartments 3 in its opposite ends, the same 
being adapted to float the boat in case it fills 
with water. 
4 represents a suitable seat, whereon the 
rower is represented as sitting. Beneath this 
seat and in front of the same I arrange the 
clockwork. This consists of a train of wheels 
5, adapted to be driven by a strong spring 6, 
secured upon a winding-stem 7. The train 
ends in a bevel-gear 8, provided upon a trans 
verse shaft 9, on the outer end of which is a 
crank-wheel 10, provided with the crank-pin 
11. This pin extends from the outer side of 
the wheel, while upon the inner side of the 
wheel a small cam 12 is provided, the same 
to engage the lever-arm 13. A comparatively 
heavy fly or balance wheel 14 is preferably 
introduced into the clock-train to overcome 
the momentum of the automaton at the end of 
each stroke. On the seat 4 are small brackets 
15 to receive a small crank-shaft 16, on the 
end of which the main lever or body part 17 
is pivoted. This main lever is preferably 
made up of a loop of flat sheet metal, as shown, 
the same conforming to the shape of the body 
and shoulders of a person. Upon the straight 
upper portion 18 of this loop the bust 19 is 
firmly secured. The remainder of the mech 
anism is covered by the coat 20, preferably of 
cloth, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The part 17 is provided with the lever ex 
tension 21, secured upon one side thereof, 
and for stability may be pivoted on the outer 
end of the crank-shaft 16. The lower end of 
this extension 21 is provided with a long slot 
22, equal in length to the throw of the crank 
pin on the wheel 10, which pin is confined 
within the slot. As the crank-wheelrevolves 
it is obvious that the main lever will be 
thrown alternately forward and back, thereby 
accomplishing the main movement of a per 
son rowing. In the upper part of the loop 17 
I provide a crank-shaft 23, rotatable therein 
and having in its ends fixed arms 24, extend 
ing outwardly and downwardly. The outer 
ends of these arms 24 are provided With Small 
loops or eyes 25, which are to receive the up 
wardly-turned ends 26 of the lower arms 27, 
which are thus pivoted therein and adapted 
for a return movement, The arms 27 termi 
nate in loops or small hands 28. The in 
ward and forward throw of the hand as of 
a person rowing is obtained by the use of the 
links 29, extending from the shoulder por 
tions of the main loop of the lever to the in 
wardly-extending parts 30 of the lower arm 
portions, these links forcing the hands out 
wardly along the handles of the oars 31 as 
the figure moves forward or drawing them 
inwardly as the figure returns. The oars are 
provided with small lugs 32, thesbanks 33 of 
which are accommodated in sockets 34 in the 
edges of the boat, Two movements required 
65 
75 
85 
95 
Od 
d 
20 
25 
45 
 
2 
564,961 
brake-lever 38, adapted to engage the fly 
wheel 14, and which may be released when 
the boat is placed in the water. A small 
rudder is preferably provided on the boat to 
control the direction of its movement. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent-- 
The combination, with the boat and the 
oars thereof, of a motor provided in said boat, 
an upright pivoted lever, arms 24, forearms 
27, and connecting-links 29 carried by said 
main lever, and connecting the same with 
said forearms, said forearms engaging the 
oars, and crank and rocking shafts provided 
in connection with said motor, and whereby 
the described movements are imparted to 
said lever and to said arms, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 28th day of January, A.D. 1895. 
BRYANT W. ANNIN. 
O 
45 
In presence of - 
C. G. HAWLEY, 
FREDERICK S. LYON. 
IO 
are thus attained. The third movement, 
namely, the vertical drop and lift of the oars, 
is provided for in the connecting-link 35, ex 
tending from the backwardly - extending 
crank 36 on the shaft 16 to the crank-arm 37, 
projecting from the shaft 23. The crank 
shaft is free from connection with the main 
lever and is controlled by the arm 13. 
Hence 
as the arm 13 is moved in or out by its en 
gagement with the cam-section 12 on the 
crank-wheel the crank-shaft 16 will be oper 
ated to lift or drop the link 35 and thus par 
tially rotate the shaft 23 and either depress 
or lift the arms and thereby raise or lower 
the Oars. This movement is accommodated to 
the main movement of the figure, the oars 
being depressed or dropped to the water-level 
at the end of the forward movement and 
lifted at the instant the main lever accom 
plishes its full return. Thus the movements 
of a human rower are precisely imitated. 
The lower part of the body may be repre 
Sented in any suitable manner. To prevent 
the action of the clockwork except when de 
sired, I preferably provide the same with a 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565061.txt	(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
H. M. WILSON & H. CLEMENTSON. 
MACHINE FOR MOLDING SPOOLS, 
No. 565,061, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896. 
c4 Z ?es a: 
3.6% 
Zzz are a de rs. 
2%ary -6 (222222zee, 
22, 22%are, 7% 
 
(No Model.) 
H. M. WILSON & H. CLEMENTS ON, 
MACHINE FOR MOLDING SPOOLS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 565,061, 
- 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896. 
III. 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
2, 
Az. 6. 
G-Sgo) 
4 Zzesz. 
Z7. vectors. 
 
(No Model.) 
H. M. WILSON & H. CLEMENTSON. 
MACHINE FOR MOLDING SPOOLS, 
- 
4 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 565,061, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
Za 2/ez, Zo 2's. 
H. M. WILSON & H. CLEMENTS ON, 
MACHINE FOR MOLDING SPOOLS. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896, 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 565,06l. 
 
e-Azzes Z: 
Zze were ?ers. 
40-67 sizza, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HENRY M. WILSON, OF SOMERSET, MASSACHUSETTS, AND HENRY 
CLEMENTSON, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
MACH NE FOR MOLDING SPOOLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 565,061, dated August 4, 1896. 
Application filed March 16, 1896, 
Serial No. 583,323, (No model, 
55 
65 
o 
75 
So 
85 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, HENRY. M. WILSON, 
residing at Somerset, county of Bristol, State 
of Massachusetts, and HENRY CLEMENTSON, 
residing at Brooklyn, county of Kings, State 
of New York, citizens of the United States, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Machines for Molding Spools, 
fully described and represented in the follow 
ing specification and the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of the same. 
The object of this invention is to furnish an 
automatic apparatus for molding spools from 
plastic composition composed in part of wood 
fiber or analogous substance; and the inven 
tion consists, essentially, in a longitudinally 
divided mold with a mandrel movable therein 
to form the bore of the spool, combined with 
mechanism for moving the semimolds and 
mandrel and the plunger which compresses 
the material. 
In the present invention we preferably fur 
nish a clamp to embrace the semimolds when 
arranged to form the spool, and thus relieve 
the mold-shifting mechanism of all strain 
during the pressing operation. 
Our apparatus is especially adapted for use 
with compositions which are softened by heat, 
as those in which shellac is an ingredient, the 
blanks being warmed to soften them before 
their insertion in the mold, and allowed to 
cool after they have been pressed into the 
shape of the spool. Such compositions con 
tain sawdust and analogous substances, and 
are already used in the manufacture of door 
knobs and cabinet-ware trimmings, and the 
Wood fiber or similar element, when used, is 
combined with any suitable ingredients to 
form the desired composition. 
The special means for operating the clamp 
ing-jaws and for reciprocating the semimolds, 
the mandrel, and the plunger will be under 
stood by reference to the annexed drawings, 
in which - 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the appara 
tus with the end of the frame cut away. Fig. 
2 is a similar elevation with the end of the 
bed cut away and the nearer semimold and 
mold-lever removed. Fig. 3 is a rear eleva 
tion of the machine, and Fig. 4 a plan of the 
same in section on line 4 4 in Fig. 1. Fig. 5 
is a side elevation of the rack-bar and plun 
Fig. 6 is a plan of the rack 
ger detached. 
bar detached. Fig. 7 is a front view of the 
mandrel detached, and Fig. 8 a side view of 
the same. Fig. 9 is a front elevation of the 
apparatus with the mold closed, in section 
where hatched at the center line of the mold. 
Fig. 10 shows the under side of the bed re 
moved from its supporting-frame. 
We will first describe the construction 
shown in the drawings, and then point out 
the essential features of the invention. 
A designates a horizontal bed supported 
upon a box-frame A'. The semimolds Brest 
vertically upon the bed with feet fitted to 
parallel guides B". A standard Cisprojected 
upward from the bed in the rear of the mold 
with bearing C at the top to receive the ver 
tically-movable plunger D. A centering-plug 
C is fixed upon the bed midway between the 
guides, centrally below the plunger, and the 
mold is counterbored at the bottom to accu 
rately fit the sides of such plug and the mold 
when centered exactly beneath the plunger. 
The lower part of the mold, as shown in 
Figs. 2 and 9, is suitably shaped to form the 
spool, and the upper part is formed with a 
chamber b, adapted to receive a tubular 
blankb' of compressible material. 
A mandrel d is fitted to the center of the 
plug at and is provided with a slotted head d", 
by which it is moved upwardly within the 
mold when closed, the blank being dropped 
upon the tapering point of the mandrel before 
compression, as shown in Fig. 2. 
A rock-shaft E is pivoted in bearings E 
upon the rear of the standard, and provided 
with a segment F. A rack-bar G is fitted to 
a vertical groove in the standard and meshes 
with the teeth of the segment F, and a head 
G' is extended from the rack-bar to embrace 
the top of the plunger D. A mandrel-lever 
His pivoted to a bearing h, with its forward 
end extended beneath the bed into the slot of 
the mandrel-head d, and the rear end of the 
mandrel-lever is provided with an upwardly 
projecting toe h' to engage an arm I upon the 
rock-shaft E and with a spring 1 to press 
the mandrel normally upward. A treadle 
lever J is shown attached to the rock-shaft 
with connecting-rod J', which, by connection 
with a treadle, may be pressed upward to 
force the plunger into the mold, the same 
95 
ICO 
O 
3 5 
53 
565,061 
Cy 
movement of the rock-shaft operating the 
other parts in conjunction there with. Slots 
K are formed in the bed beneath the semi 
molds, and pinsk are projected from the 
semimolds through the slots into the forked 
ends of mold-levers I, which are pivoted upon 
the under side of the bed and provided with 
a springs to press them together, thus nor 
mally closing the mold. The rear ends of the 
levers extend backwardly beneath the rock 
shaft E, and are provided with reversely-in 
clined seats l, which are engaged, when the 
treadle-lever is moved downward, by pins m, 
carried by the arm I. The lower end of the 
arm is formed with a cross-bar I to sustain 
the pins at a suitable distance apart. The 
rotation of the pins toward the fulcra of the 
levers, as indicated by the arrow b in Fig. 1, 
operates, as shown in Fig. 10, to press the 
rear ends of the levers together, and to thus 
separate the pinsk and the mold-sections, as 
shown in Fig. 4. 
Slots l are formed in the rear ends of the 
mold-levers L adjacent to the seats l to hold 
the pins an in contact with such seats; but 
such slots are not absolutely essential, as the 
springs performs the same function. The 
joint operation of the arm I in retracting the 
mandrel d and opening the mold is indicated 
in Figs. 2 and 3, where the rear ends of the 
levers Hand L are shown in proximity to one 
another and actuated the one by the middle 
of the cross-bar I and the other by the pins 
in upon such cross-bar. 
The pins in are ar 
ranged to contact with the seats, and slightly 
separate the mold-sections, before the cross 
bar I contacts with the toe h' to retraet the 
mandrel, and the mold -sections are thus 
stripped from the compressed spool before 
the mandrel is withdrawn from the same. 
The withdrawal of the mandrel, as shown in 
Fig. 2, would leave the spool standing isolated 
upon the centering-plug a, from which it is 
removed before the succeeding operation of 
the parts. 
It will be observed that the semimolds are 
brought together chiefly by the spring S, 
(shown in Fig. 10,) which is wholly inade 
quate to support them in position during the 
pressing of the spool, and I therefore provide 
a clamp adapted to embrace the opposite sides 
of the semimolds and hold them firmly dur 
ing the pressing operation. Such clamp is 
shown herein with two jaws c, hinged upon 
opposite sides of the bearing C' and provided 
each with arm c', extended to opposite sides 
of the rack-bar G. Pinse are projected from 
the rack-bar, one of each into a vertical slot 
e' in each of the arms c', and a slot f is formed 
transversely to the slot e' at the top of the 
Same. Lateral slots g are formed in the 
standard at the sides of the rack-bar to per 
mit the protrusion of the pinse into the slots 
e'. The plunger stands elevated above the 
mold when inserting the blank of material, 
as shown in Fig. 2, and its downward move 
ment, with that of the rack-bar, carries the 
arm I away from the outer ends of the man 
drel-lever H and mold-levers Li before the 
plunger is pressed upon the material. The 
pins e are so arranged as to move the clamp 
ing-jaws, during this interval, to the outer 
sides of the semimolds, as shown in Fig. 1, 
the continued movement of the rack-bar then 
pressing the plunger upon the material. 
To sustain the clamping-jaws in gripping 
the semimolds together, each jaw is provided 
with a brace i, which, as the jaw is moved to 
the outer side of the mold, slides along the 
inner face of a ribi, which is fixed at the end 
of the bed and resists any outward thrust 
upon the jaw during the compressing of the 
material. The inner face of the jaw is pref 
erably inclined a little, as shown in Fig. 4, 
so that the brace may wedge against the 
same and crowd the clamp into tight contact 
with the mold. At the close of the compress 
ing operation (shown in Fig. 1) the arm I is 
at a considerable distance from the mold-le 
vers II, and the latter therefore remains sta 
tionary while the rack-bar is moved upward 
by the segment F, which movement retracts 
the jaws c from the mold before the levers are 
operated to separate the semimolds. 
The blanks b may be inserted in the mold 
by hand, or by automatic feeding mechan 
ism, and the machine may be operated by 
power if suitable means be provided to recip 
rocate the rod J', which oscillates the rock 
shaft, E. 
It will be observed from the above descrip 
tion that all the movements of the machine 
after the blanks are inserted are automatic, 
as the mechanism which connects the semi 
molds, the clamp-jaws, the mandrel, and the 
plunger operates, first, to bring the semi 
molds into contact and to advance the man 
drel within the mold; second, to lock or 
clamp the semimolds together; third, to force 
the plunger within the mold to compress the 
material; fourth, to withdraw the clamps and 
retract the plunger; fifth, to separate the 
semimolds from the spool upon the mandrel, 
and, finally, to retract the mandrel from the 
Spool. 
It will be observed that the mandrel-lever 
His provided at its rear end with a springh, 
adapted to hold the mandrel normally ele 
wated; but such spring would not be adapted 
to resist the thrust which is caused during the 
pressing operation, by the compression of the 
material, and notches dare therefore formed 
in the sides of the mandrel-head d", and keys 
L' are attached to the jaws L to enter such 
notches when the mandrel is elevated, as 
shown in Fig. 9. The mandrel is thus held 
positively within the mold during the com 
pressing of the material, and serves to form 
the bore of the spool which fits it for use in 
the Spooling-machine. 
A notch H" is formed in the rear end of the 
lever H by providing a toe hupon the outer 
side of the toe h", and the arm I engages such 
outer toe during its reverse movement, as in 
; 
: 
25 
35 
45 
55 
: 
: 
do 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
565,061 
3. 
O 
20 
2 5 
40 
dicated by the arrow b in Fig. 2, and thus through the bed into the mold, the mandrel 
lever H connected at its forward end With the 
positively forces themandrel within the mold. 
mand reland provided at its rear end with the 
The notch and the toe h are not, however, 
toe h' and normally depressed by spring h, 
essential, as the springs h perform substan 
and the arm carried by the rock-shaft to press 
tially the same function. It will be observed 
upon said toe to retract the mandrel, the 
that the mandrel-lever in Fig. 3 is shown 
whole arranged and operated substantially as 
broken away adjacent to the bearing E, so as 
herein set forth. 
to fully expose the arm I and its connections 
5. In a spool-molding machine, the combi 
with the cross-bar I and pins in. 
nation, with a bed. A having the standard C 
Flaving thus set forth the nature of our in 
carrying the rock-shaft E and provided at its 
vention, what we claim herein is 
opposite sides with the ribs i, of the semi 
1. A machine for automatically molding 
molds movable upon the bed to and from such 
spools when supplied with suitable material, 
ribs, the rack-bar G movable vertically upon 
comprising a longitudinally-divided mold, 
the standard with the segment F to recipro 
guides supporting the semimolds movably 
cate the same, the plunger fitted movably to 
upon a bed, a movable clamp for locking the 
the standard and connected with the rack-bar 
semimolds together when closed, a mandrel 
by head G', the clamping-jaws chaving braces 
lmovable longitudinally within the mold, a 
thereon, and pivoted upon the opposite sides 
plunger for compressing the material within 
of the standard and provided with the slots 
the mold, and mechanism connecting the said 
e', f and fitted between the semimolds and 
parts and operated first to bring the semi 
the ribs, as set forth, and pins upon the rack 
molds into contact and to advance the man 
bar adapted to enter the slots and to retract 
drel within the mold, second, to lock the semi 
the jaws from the sides of the mold when the 
molds together, third, to force the plunger 
plunger is raised, as and for the purpose Set 
within the mold to compress the material, 
fourth, to retract the plunger, fifth, to sepa 
forth. 
6. In a spool-molding machine, the combi 
rate the semimolds from the spool upon the 
nation, with the bed. A provided with the par 
mandrel, and finally to retract the mandrel 
allel guides B and the centering-plug Ci inter 
from the spool, substantially as herein set 
mediate to the same, with mandreld movable 
forth. 
through such plug, of a plunger movable cen 
2. A spool-molding machine comprising a 
trally over such plug and mandrel, semimolds 
suitable bed, a longitudinally-divided mold 
movable in the guides, means for holding the 
with guides upon the bed for the semimolds, 
semimolds in contact with the plug and ad 
a mandrel projected through the bed within 
vancing the mandrel within the mold, and 
the mold when closed, a standard carrying a 
means for forcing the plunger into the mold 
plunger movably over the mold, clamping 
to compress the material, substantially as 
jaws movable to and from thesides of the semi 
herein set forth. 
mold when closed, and a rock-shaft with suit 
7. In a spool-moiding machine, the combi 
able connections to the mold parts, the man 
nation, with the bed Aprovided with the par 
drel, the clamping-jaws and the plunger, to 
allel guides B and the centering-plug C, inter 
operate them successively, as and for the pur 
mediate to the same, with mandrel dimovable 
pose set forth. 
through such plug, of a plunger movable cen 
3. In a spool-molding machine, the combi 
trally over such plug and mandrel, the clamp 
nation, with the bed. A provided with the par 
ing-jaws c having braces i thereon, and piv 
allel guides B and intermediate slots K, of 
oted upon the opposite sides of the standard, 
the semimolds B fitted to such guides with the 
semimolds movable in the guides, and suit 
pinsk projected through the slots, the stand 
able connections to first move the seminolds 
ard C carrying the rock-shaft E and movable 
in contact with the plug and advance the 
plunger D with suitable connections from the 
mandrel within the mold, second, to move the 
rock-shaft to reciprocate the plunger, the le 
jaws c to the outer sides of the semimolds, 
vers L pivoted beneath the bed with their for 
third, to force the plunger within the mold 
Wardends embracing the pins l and provided 
to compress the material, fourth, to retract 
With a Spring S to normally close the mold, and 
the plunger and separate the semimolds from 
formed at their rear ends with the reversely 
the spool upon the mandrel, and finally to 
inclined seats l, and the arm upon the rock 
withdraw the mandrel from the spool leaving 
shaft carrying the prongs an adapted when 
it supported by the plug, substantially as 
pressed upon the seats of the levers to open the 
shown and described. 
mold, the whole arranged and operated sub 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
stantially as herein set forth. 
our hands in the presence of two subscribing 
4. In a spool-molding machine, the combi 
nation, with the bed. A provided with the par 
witnesses. 
allel guides B", of the semimolds B fitted to 
such guides, the standard with rock-shaft piv 
oted thereon and suitable connections with 
the rock-shaft to moye the semimolds in the 
guides, the plunger reciprocated by connec 
tion to the rock-shaft, the mandreld inserted 
Witnesses: 
L. LEE, 
THOMAS S. CRANE. 
HENRY M. WSON. 
HENRY CLEMENTSON. 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
2C) 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565161.txt	(No Model.) 
r 
M, N, FREDERICK. 
BICYCLE LOOK, 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 565,161, 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896. 
  
  
34 
B Ef 
 
 
 
Wifr, ess ks 
NNNWWYY 
4.5%- 
the Norris Peters co, PHoro-LTHo. WSHINGron, D.C. 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
M, N, FREDERICK, 
BICYCLE LOCK. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 565,161. 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896. 
 
 
R212 % S; 2As394 
(7M 9 
 
%. SL2 32 ZZ2/S25 
2 
 
&: 
2.7%. 
4444.2% 
8-23 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARSHALL. N. FREDERICR, OF CANTON, OHIO. 
BiCYCLE-LOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 565,161, dated August 4, 1896. 
Application filed November 25, 1895, Serial No. 569,970. (No model.) 
To cit, thon it, nuary Corder: 
Be it known that I, MARSHALL. N. FRED 
ERICK, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Canton, in the county of Stark and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Bicycle-Locks; and 
I do hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref 
erence being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to the 
letters and figures marked thereon,in which 
Figure I is a view showing the lock properly 
attached to the steering-head. Fig. 2 is an 
enlarged view of the steering-head, showing 
the lock properly attached thereto. Fig. 3 is 
a view showing portions of the steering-post 
and illustrating the locking-apertures. Fig. 
4 is a detached view of the lock-cover. Fig. 
5 is a vertical section of the lock case and 
cover, showing the different parts of the lock 
properly assembled. Fig. 6 is a detached view 
of the locking-spindle and its different parts. 
Fig. 7 is a top view showing the cover removed 
and a portion of the counting-disk broken 
away. Fig. Sis a detached view of one of the 
spacing-collars. Fig. 9 is a view showing a 
portion of the locking-spindle and illustrat 
ing the locking-plate placed in position to lock 
the spindle at its extreme inward movement 
to lock the fork. Fig. 10 is a similar view 
showing the locking-plate in position to hold 
the spindle out of locking position. Fig. 11 
is a detached view of the base-plate, showing 
a bottom or under side view of the locking 
plate, also showing the position of the lock 
ing-spindle and its collar with reference to 
the locking-plate. Fig. 12 is a detached view 
of the counting-disk and its hollow post or 
shaft. Figs. 13, 14, and 15 are detached views 
of the tumblers. Fig. 16 is a transverse sec 
tion of the lock and steering-post, showing 
the same placed in proper position with ref 
erence to each other. Fig. 17 is a detached 
view of the locking-plate and its post and 
cover-locking tongue. 
The present invention has relation to bicy 
cle-locks; and it consists in the different parts 
and combination of parts hereinafter de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
The object of the present invention is to 
lock the front or forward wheel at an angle 
to the rear wheel, or, in other words, to lock 
the two wheels of the bicycle one at an angle 
to the other, thereby providing a means for 
bringing the bicycle out of operative position. 
Similar letters and figures of reference in 
dicate corresponding parts in all the figures 
of the drawings. 
In the accompanying drawings, 1 represents 
the steering-head, which is constructed in the 
ordinary manner and has no particular refer 
ence to the present invention, except that 
when the invention is applied to the bicycle it 
is located upon the steering-post, as illustrated 
in Figs. I and 2. The steering-post 1 is pro 
vided with the casing or housing 2, which is 
preferably formed integral with the steering 
post, but it may be made separately and at 
tached in any convenient and well-known 
manner. To the housing or casing 2 is at 
tached the cover 3 by means of the screw 4 
and the flange 5, said flange being for the pur 
pose hereinafter described. 
The locking-spindle 6 is substantially of the 
form shown in Fig. 6, and its outer end is pro 
vided with the operating-knob 7, which knob 
is attached in any convenient and well-known 
manner to the locking-spindle G. The lock 
ing-spindle 6 is provided with the disk or col 
lar 7, which disk or collar is securely attached 
to the locking-spindle 6, or, if desired, said 
disk may beformed integral with the spindle. 
Upon the locking-spindle G is located the 
coiled spring S, which coiled spring is for the 
purpose hereinafter described. 
To the housing or casing 2 is attached by 
suitable screws or otherwise the base-plate 9, 
which base-plate is provided with the aperture 
10, said aperture being for the purpose of re 
ceiving the locking-spindle 6, and at the same 
time forms a guide for the longitudinal move 
ment of said locking-spindle. For the purpose 
of automatically forcing the locking-spindle 6 
inward or toward the steering-post the spring 
8 is provided, which spring is held in proper 
position by means of the base-plate 9 and the 
socket, 11. The base-plate is provided with 
the thimble or hollow shaft 12, (best seen in 
Fig. 16,) which thimble forms a bearing or 
post for the tumblers C, b, and c, said tum 
blers being properly spaced by means of the 
spacing-collars 13. Upon the locking-spin 
dle 6 is located the counting-disk 14, which 
7 O 
7 5 
95 
I Co 
5 
O 
25 
SO 
 
2 
565,6i. 
So 
counting-diskis provided with the notches 15, 
said notches being located upon the periphery 
of the counting-disk 14, said counting-disk 
being held at the desired point against rota 
tion by means of spring 16, which spring is 
so arranged that it will click at the time the 
portion of the spring enters or is received 
into one of the notches 15. The notches 5 
and the spring 16 are so formed that said 
spring will only temporarily hold the count 
ing-disk against rotation. The counting-disk 
14 is provided with the hollow shaft 17, which 
shaft is located in the thimble 12, as illus 
trated in Fig. 16. The counting-disk 14 and 
the tumblers a, b, and c are each provided 
with the apertures 18, which apertures are 
preferably screw - threaded, said apertures 
being for the purpose of receiving and hold 
ing the screws 19, 20, 21, and 22, said screws 
being located in different apertures for the 
purpose of changing the combination. 
For the purpose of describing the portion 
of the lock with reference to its tumblers and 
bringing said tumblers into a position so that 
the master-notches 23 will register, I will say 
that the lock is set to the combination of 1, 
2, and 3. The counting - disk 14 is 
turned one notch to the right, then two 
notches to the left, then three to the right, 
which completes the above-mentioned com 
bination. This movement of the counting 
disk brings all of the master-notches 23 into 
alinement. At the moment the master 
notches 23 are brought into alinement the 
locking-plate 24 is forced to the center by 
means of the post 25 and the spring 26, thereby 
causing the aperture 27 to come directly in 
line with the disk 7 and allow said disk to 
pass through the aperture 27 as the locking 
spindle is moved longitudinally in either di 
rection. For the purpose of securing the 
Cover Ol' cap 3 upon the housing 2, independ 
ent of the screw 4, the cap or cover is pro 
vided with the flange 28, which flange is lo 
cated upon the inner periphery of said cover 
and extends nearly around the inner periph 
ery of said cover, the ends of said flange be 
ing located a short distance apart, thereby 
forming the gap or space 29. To the block 
30, or its equivalent, is attached the pin 31, 
said block being securely attached to the base 
plate 9. The pin 31 is so located that it will 
come on top of the flange 2S when the cap or 
cover 3 is properly adjusted, said pin being 
shown in proper position in Fig. 16. 
The steering-head 1 is provided with the 
aperture 32, which aperture receives the in 
ner end of the locking-spindle 6. When the 
lock is open, the disk 7 is located upon the 
top or upper side of the locking-plate 24, as 
illustrated in Fig. 10, thereby holding the 
locking-spindle out of contact with the aper 
tures 33, said apertures 33 being located so 
as to register with the aperture 32 and per 
mit the locking-spindle 6 to enter one of the 
apertures 33 and thereby lock the post 34 
against rotation. It will be understood that 
the apertures 33 are to be so located that the 
fork 35 and its wheel36 can be locked at any 
desired angle. 
It will be understood that the 
handle-bar 37 is to be attached to the top or 
upper end of the post 34 in the ordinary man 
ner. It will be understood that by the use 
of the spring S the locking-spindle 6 will be 
automatically forced into the proper apertill re 
33 when the locking-plate 24 is brought into 
position, so that the disk 7 will pass through 
the aperture 27, formed in said locking 
plate 24. 
For the purpose of setting the lock so that 
the spindle G will not be allowed to enter any 
of the apertures 33, the disk 7 is placed upon 
the upper side of the locking-plate 24, and 
when it is desired to lock the bicycle the disk 
7 is located upon the under side of the lock 
ing-plate, as illustrated in Fig. 9. 
It will be understood that as the post 34 is 
rotated by means of the handle-bar the aper 
ture 33 will pass the apertures 32, and when 
one of the apertures 33 comes into proper 
alinement with the apertures 32 the locking 
spindle 6 will enter the aperture registering 
with the aperture 32, thereby locking the 
front or forward wheel at an angle to the rear 
wheel, which puts the bicycle in such a con- g 
dition that it cannot be used. 
The post 25, located upon and attached to 
the locking-plate 24, is provided with the 
tongue 25, which tongue will engage the 
flange 28, as illustrated in Figs. 5 and 16, when 
the locking plate and post is forced to one 
side by means of the rotation of the tumblers, 
thereby locking the cap 3 upon the housing 
2, independent of the screw 4. 
I have described the lock as especially ap 
plied to a bicycle, but it will be understood 
that the lock proper can be used independent 
of a bicycle without departing from the na 
ture of my invention. 
In order to bring the locking-plate 24 into 
position to lock the spindle against longitu 
dinal movement, the counting-disk 14 is ro 
tated, which in turn rotates one or all of the 
tumblers C, b, and c, as the case maybe, which 
rotation lifts the post 25 out of the notch or 
notches into which it has been forced by 
means of the spring 26, thereby throwing or 
forcing the locking-plate 24 out of center and 
thereby locking the spindle and its disk at 
the point it may be located at the time the 
swinging disk or locking-plate is turned out 
of center. 
The tumblers a, b, and c are rotated with 
the counting-disk by means of the screws 19, 
20, 21, and 22. The screw located upon the 
counting-disk will come in contact with the 
screw located upon the tumbler adjacent to 
the counting-disk, thereby causing the tum 
bler to rotate with the counting-disk. After 
the counting-disk has been rotated until all 
Of the ScreWS have come in contact with each 
other, all of the tumblers will be rotated in 
unison with the counting-disk. 
It will be understood that when the count 
OO 
O 
II 
I 2 S 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
 
565,161. 
3 
3. In a lock of the class described, a case 
or cover having located therein, a series of 
tumblers, a counting-disk having notches 
upon its periphery, a spring to engage the 
notches, a reciprocating locking-spindle pro 
vided with a disk, and a swinging or vibrat 
ing locking-plate, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
4. The combination of a case, a cover and 
a counting-disk provided with a hollow spin 
dle, a reciprocating locking-spindle provided 
with a disk, the swinging locking-plate pro 
vided with a post, said post provided with a 
lip or tongue and a spring bearing against 
said post, and a series of tumblers provided 
with detachable pins or screws and the master 
notches located upon the peripheries of the 
tumblers, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony that I claim the above I have 
hereunto subscribed my name in the presenc 
of two witnesses. 
MARSHALL. N. FREDERICK. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
F. W. BOND, 
BERTHA FINCH. 
5 
ing-disk is rotated in the opposite direction 
from the direction to bring the tumblers into 
rotation, said tumblers will remain stationary 
until they are brought into proper engage 
ment with the screws or pins. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of a lock-case provided 
with a detachable cover, a swinging lock 
plate pivotally attached to the base-plate 9, 
or its equivalent, a series of tumblers pro 
vided with apertures and screws or pins lo 
cated in a given number of apertures, and 
the locking-spindle 6, provided with the disk 
7, and spring 8, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
2. The combination of a case, a cover and 
counting-disk provided with a hollow spin 
dle, a reciprocating locking-spindle provided 
with a disk, a swinging locking-plate pro 
vided with a post, said post being provided 
with a lip or tongue and a series of tumblers 
provided with detachable pins or screws, and 
the master-notches located upon the periph 
eries of the tumblers, substantially as and 
for the purpose specified. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565262.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS DOHERTY, OF SARNIA, CANADA. 
METAL-FOUND ING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 565,262, dated August 4, 1896. 
Application filed June 7, 1895, Serial No. 551,955, (No model.) 
through which steam is conducted into the 
twyers and mingled with the air-blast. 
I have found that the superheated steam 
and air thus thrown into the molten metal 
converts it into a form of iron greatly supe 
rior to ordinary cast-iron, and closely analo 
gous to some forms of steel or wrought-iron. 
I am aware of what is known as the Besse 
mer' and kindred processes, but in refining 
iron by these processes, so far as I am aware, 
the iron must be taken from the cupola and 
placed in a converter, which is heavy work, re 
quiring time and attended with some danger, 
whereas with my process the iron is cleaned 
of impurities and converted directly in the 
cupola. Furthermore, in the Bessemer proc 
ess only atmospheric air is used and not 
steam, and the ores to be employed must be 
carefully selected. With my process nose 
lection of iron, ores, or of special pig-iron 
need be selected. 
What I claim is 
In combination with a cupola, an annular 
pipe located within the cupola and about 
midway between the top and bottom thereof, 
having an outside source of steam supply, 
and outside connections with the twyers, an 
air-blast, and means formingling the air and 
steam and forcing the combined blast into 
the molten iron, substantially as described, 
In testimony whereof Isign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS DOHERTY. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
J. O. WEST, 
JAS. MOFFAT, 
O 
15 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS DOHERTY, a 
citizen of Canada, residing at Sarnia, in the 
county of Lambton, Province of Ontario, Can 
ada, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Metal-Founding; and I de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to metal-founding, 
and has for its object improvements to be 
used in connection with the cupola or melt 
ing-furnace in which iron is melted, by which 
a large portion of the impurities usually 
found in iron can be burned out and expelled 
and the remaining iron is rendered softer, 
malleable, and workable. 
To produce these results, I force into the 
molten iron while in the cupola, a stream of 
mingled superheated steam and air, and I 
utilize the heat of the cupola itself for the 
purpose of superheating the steam. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion of the cupola. Fig. 2 is a horizontal 
cross-section online XX of Fig. 1. 
A indicates a cupola provided with twyers 
BC for the introduction of an air-blast, which 
is forced in from a fan D. 
Within the cupola and above the place of 
the molten iron is an annular pipe C, hav 
ing an outside connection for the introduc 
tion thereinto of steam and having outside 
connections leading into the twyers B C, 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565363.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 565,363, 
H. E. MOOMAN, 
COMBINATION LOCK, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
w 
Patented Aug 4, 1896. 
 
928)ilvios 
j, 
26%-44% 
 
the Norris peteRsco, photo-LTHO. WASHINoon, d. c. 
 
H. E. MOOMAN, 
COMBINATION LOOK. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896, 
 
 
 
. 
1. 
2, 
(NN 
7. % A. 
%. 2 
30 
SS 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 565,363, 
 
SNAN 
SYS 
AS 
N 
 
  
  
ses 
S % %t 
N 
2 
  
 
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
% 
SS 
23 
s A. 
NS N s 
& 
N 
SY 
ARN 
N R 
N 
I 
NS 
2Ny 
2WSYNN 
 
 
2%. 
(No Model.) 
 
No. 565,363, 
-Z'ez. A 
H. E. MOOMAN. 
COMBINATION LOCK, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 4, 1896, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY E. MOOMAN, OF SALEM, VIRGINIA, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO 
O. L. STEARNES AND JAMES WYLIE, OF SAME PLACE. 
COMBINATION-LOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 565,363, dated August 4, 1896. 
Application filed April 22, 1896, Serial No. 588,655, (No model.) 
O 
. 
tuhon, it nailf concern. 
To a 
Beit known that I, HENRY E. MooMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Salem, 
in the county of Roanoke and State of Vir 
ginia, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Combination - Locks, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
permutation or combination locks; and it has 
for its object to provide a simple and durable 
lock of that character adapted for use on 
house-doors, trunks, and similar receptacles. 
The invention consists in the novel com 
bination, arrangement, and construction of 
the various parts, as will be more fully here 
inafter described, and particularly pointed 
out in the claims appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of the Outer side of a portion of a door; 
and Fig.2 a similar view of the inner side there 
of, showing my lockinplace. Fig. 3 is a rear 
view of the house-door lock, the casing being 
in section. Fig. 4 is a similar view showing 
the parts in a different position. Fig. 5 is a 
vertical section of the lock. Fig.6 is a similar 
view showing the tumbler in its drawn-out 
position. Fig. 7 is a perspective view of one 
of the notched disks and its supporting and 
operating parts. Figs. 8, 9, and 10 are details 
of modifications of the knob for operating 
the notched disks. Figs. 11 and 12 are re 
spectively a face and rear view of the lock 
adapted for use on trunks or chests. Figs. 
13 and 14 are similar views of another form 
of the lock adapted for use on drawers and 
desks or closets. Fig. 15 is a detail view 
showing the lock used as a mortise-lock. 
Referring to the various parts by numerals, 
I designates the lock-casing, which may bese 
cured to the inner side of the door, as shown 
in Fig. 2, or it may be set in a mortise in the 
door, if desired. Passing through the casing 
near its rear end is the bolt-operating spindle 
2, which carries on its outer ends any suit 
able form of knob. On this spindle within 
the casing is a sleeve 3, which carries an up 
Wardly-extending arm 4 and a downwardly 
extending arm 5, Said arms being in different 
vertical planes, the arm 5 being nearer the 
inner side of the casing 1. Pivoted within 
the casing at the rear of the spindle 2 is a de 
pending lever 6, whose lower end extends be 
low the operating-spindle and is pivotally 
connected to the rear end of the latch-bolt 7. 
A spring 8 is connected to the lever above its 
pivot and bears against the rear wall of the 
casing 1 and forces the lower end of the lever 
6 and the latch-bolt 7 normaliy forward. The 
lower arm of sleeve 3 is adapted to bear against 
the lever 6 and force the same rearwardly. 
Mounted approximately in the center of 
the casing on a stud 9 is a pivoted tumbler 
10. This tumbler has a tubular bearing 
upon the stud and is adapted to slide back 
and forth upon it. The pivot of the tumbler 
is approximately at its center between the 
forwardly-extending arm i and the rear 
Wardly-extending arm 12. Each of these arms 
is provided with a dog or lug 13, which is 
adapted to engage a notch in the rotatable 
disk 14, mounted adjacent each arm of the 
tumbler 10. The rear arm of the tumbler is 
formed with a downwardly-extending lug 15, 
which is adapted to engage any one of a se 
ries of notches 15, formed in the latch-bolt. 
A spring 16 is connected to the upper side of 
the arm 11, and normally forces the lug 15 
down into one of the notches in the latch 
bolt. From the rear side of the arm 12 a stud 
or projection 17 extends into the path of the 
arm 4 of sleeve 3, said arm being adapted 
to engage said projection and turn the tum 
bler upon its pivot. 
To indicate the position of the notch in 
each disk 14 in relation to the lug on the ad 
jacent arm of the tumbler and to rotatably 
support each disk 14, I secure a dial 18 to 
the outer side of a door and mount On Said 
dial a horizontal tubular shaft 19, which ex 
tends through the door and is provided on 
its outer end with an operating-knob. 20. This 
dial is suitably marked and is formed with 
indentations 21, into Which a Spring-pressed 
dog 22, carried by the knob, clicks as the 
knob is rotated. Secured Within the shaft 
19 is a square extension 23, Said Square ex 
tension being capable of a rotative and lon 
gitudinal adjustment within the shaft 19. 
On the inner end of this extension of shaft 
19 is removably fitted a Square cap or sleeve 
24, which is capable of a rotative adjustment 
thereon. Formed on the rear edge of said 
55 
65 
75 
So 
95 
OO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
565,363 
cap is a radial flange 25, which fits against 
the outer side of the lock-casing, the forward 
end of the cap extending into the lock, its 
extreme forward end being reduced and 
threaded. Each notched disk is formed with 
the sleeve 26, which fits over the square 
portion of the cap 24, the rear end of said 
sleeve being reduced to pass through the lock 
casing, its rear face bearing against the 
flange 25. The reduced part of the sleeve 26 
forms a shoulder 27, which abuts against the 
inner side of the lock-casing. A nut 28, 
screwed on the threaded end of cap 24, which 
extends beyond the face of disk 14, holds the 
parts in position. The disk 14 is rotatably 
adjustable upon the cap 24 by means of the 
eight-cornered opening therein, the corners 
of the cap entering four of the corners of the 
opening. The cap 24 is adjustable around 
the square extension 23 of the shaft 19, and 
the extension is adjustable within the shaft 
19 by similar arrangements. A pin 30 se 
cures the extension 23 within the shaft 19. 
It is manifest that these parts may be rota 
tively secured to each other in any suitable 
manner, and I do not wish to limit myself to 
the means described and shown. 
The operation of this portion of my inven 
tion is as follows: The disks 14 are placed 
upon the operating-shafts in such a position 
that the desired combination will bring the 
notches in the disks in line with the lugs on 
the tumbler. To open the door, the knobs 
20 are turned until the dogs 22 indicate the 
proper combination, the operating-spindle is 
then turned and arm 4 of sleeve 3 engages 
part 17 of the tumbler and raises it, the dogs 
13 of the arms 11 and 12 enter the notches of 
disk 14, and dog 15 is raised from the notch 
in the latch-bolt. Arm 5 of sleeve 3 now con 
tacts with lever 6 and swings it rearwardly 
and withdraws bolt 7. Arm 4 now passes part 
17 and the spring 16 springs dog 15 into an 
other notch in the latch-bolt and holds the 
bolt in its rearward position. 
The combination may be varied, as desired, 
by rotatively adjusting the parts 23, 24, and 
26 as described. 
In order to adapt the lock for use as an or 
dinary catch, the tumbler is slidably mounted 
on its pivot, and is provided with a stem 31, 
which projects through the lock-case, its outer 
end being provided with a knob 32. In this 
stem are formed on each of its sides two par 
allel vertical grooves 33, and slidably mounted 
in Ways 34 upon the outer side of the lock is 
a catch 35, which fits on the stem 31 and en 
gages the grooves 33. 
When it is desired to disengage the tumbler 
from the bolt 7 and the arm 4 of the sleeve 
to adapt the lock for use as a catch, the stem 
31 is drawn out and the latch 35 is slid down 
into the innermost set of grooves 33, as shown 
in Fig. 6, and the tumbler will then be held 
out of the path of the arm 4. In this posi 
tion the bolt may be drawn back by simply 
turning the Operating-spindle, as is manifest. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
75 
So 
When the catch is slid into the outermost set 
of grooves, the tumbler will be held in the 
path of the arm 4 and bolt 7, as shown in 
Fig. 5. 
Suitable stops 37 are secured to the casing 
to limit the movement of lever 6 and tumbler 
10. The bolt 7 is formed with notches 15 on 
its upper and lower edges, in order that the 
bolt may be turned over to reverse the bev 
eled head of the bolt and adapt the lock for 
use on doors swinging in different directions. 
In place of the dogs 22 for use on the dials 
a flat spring 38 may be secured on the knob. 
The end of this spring is turned inwardly 
and is passed through a notch in the edge of 
the knob, said inner end engaging the re 
cesses in the dial, as shown in Fig. 8. In 
Figs. 9 and 10 is shown another modification 
of the indicator. In this construction a spring 
pressed bolt 40 is slidably mounted in a slot 
in the knob, the dog 41, formed thereon, en 
gaging the recesses formed in the dial or in 
the face of the lock. If desired, projections 
41 may be formed on the dial at certain 
points to enable a person to Work the combi 
nation at night by feeling the projections and 
thereby ascertaining the exact location of the 
marks on the dial. 
In Figs. 11 and 12 is shown a form of my 
lock adapted for use on trunks, chests, and 
similar receptacles. In this form the oper 
ating-spindle is provided with a knob having 
the appearance of a dial, and said knob and 
the dials and knobs for operating the notched 
disks are countersunk in the supporting 
plate in order to protect them. One of the 
arms carried by the operating-spindle en 
gages one end of a horizontally-sliding bolt 
45, and the other arm engages an extension 
of the tumbler. Instead of the dog 15 of the 
tumbler engaging recesses in the latch-bolt 
it engages a projection 46 on the bolt, and 
holds it in either of its positions. The latch 
boltis formed with one arm 47, which engages 
the loop 48 of the hasp, which may be fas 
tened to the trunk-lid, as shown in Fig. 12. 
The notched disks are rotatively adjusted 
upon their supporting-spindles by loosening 
their securing-nuts, turning them to the de 
sired point, and then again screwing home 
the securing-nuts. The hasp and plate car 
rying the mechanism are secured to the re 
ceptacle by screwing screws from the inner 
side of the receptacle into the threaded lugs 
50, formed on the plate and hasp. 
In Figs. 13 and 14 is shown a form of my 
lock adapted for use on desks, drawers, 
closets, and similar places. In this form the 
operating-spindle is also formed with a knob 
and dial similar to the knobs and dials of the 
notched disks. This arrangement is used in 
order to add to the confusion of an evil 
disposed person who, not knowing the 
proper combination, shouldi try to operate 
the lock. In this form one of the arms car 
ried by the operating-spindle engages one 
end of a short horizontal bolt 52, and con 
95 
IOO 
Id 
II5 
I25 
565,368 
3. 
O 
nected to the other end of said bolt is one 
arm of an angle-lever 53. This lever is piv 
oted on the same pivot with the tumbler, and 
its other arm engages one end of the vertical 
latch-bolt 54. The other arm on the oper 
ating-spindle engages an extension on the 
tumbler, and the dog 15 of the tumbler en 
gages a projection on the bolt 52,and holds said 
bolt in either of its positions. The notched 
disks may be adjusted upon their operating 
spindles in any suitable manner. 
It will thus be seen that I provide an ex 
tremely simple and efficient combination 
lock, which, with slight changes in some of 
the unimportant details of construction, tmay 
be adapted for use in a great variety of 
places, and while being extremely simple, 
yet affords the greatest degree of safety. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a lock, the combination of a casing, 
an operating-spindle carrying a pair of arms, 
a latch-bolt, spring actuated and adapted to 
be withdrawn by one of the arms of the op 
erating-spindle, a pair of notched rotating 
disks mounted on separate spindles, means 
for indicating the position of the notches in 
said disks, and a tumbler pivoted in the 
lock-casing and provided with a pair of dogs 
adapted to engage the disks and another dog 
adapted to engage the latch-bolt and a cam 
projection adapted to be engaged by the other 
arm on the operating-spindle, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination of a lock - casing, 
notched rotating disks, a tumbler provided 
with dogs adapted to engage the disks, a re 
versible latch-bolt notched on its opposite 
edges, a dog carried by the tumbler and 
adapted to engage the latch-bolt in both its 
positions, and means for operating the tum 
bler and the latch-bolt, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a permutation-lock the combination 
of a casing, an operating-spindle, a latch-bolt 
adapted to be operated by the spindle, a piv 
oted tumbler adapted to lock the latch-bolt 
and to be operated by the operating-spindle, 
said tumbler being mounted to slide upon its 
pivot whereby it may be moved bodily out of 
the path of the arm on the operating-lever, 
and means which may be adjusted to lock 
the tumbler against pivotal motion or to per 
mit it to have such motion when in the path 
of the arm on the operating-spindle, substan 
tially as described and for the purpose set 
forth. 
4. In a permutation-lock the combination 
25 
35 
45 
55 
of a casing, an operating-spindle, a latch-bolt 
adapted to be operated by the spindle, piv 
oted tumbler adapted to lock the latch-bolt 
and be operated by the operating-spindle, 
said tumbler being mounted to slide upon its 
pivot as described, a stem on said tumbler in 
line With the pivot and projecting out of the 
casing, a catch to engage said stem and hold 
the tumbler in its inner or outer position, 
and means which may be adjusted to lock 
the tumbler against pivotal motion when it 
is in the path of the arm on the operating 
spindle or to permit it to have such motion, 
substantially as described and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
5. In a permutation-lock the combination 
of a casing, a tumbler pivoted therein and 
having a plurality of dogs, a notched disk 
adjacent each dog, means for supporting and 
for rotatively adjusting said disks, said 
means consisting of a revoluble shaft, a cap 
rotatively adjustable upon the inner end 
thereof and extending into the lock-casing, a 
sleeve rotatively adjustable upon said cap 
within the lock, and means for securing said 
sleeve upon the cap, said sleeve carrying 
the notched disk, means for indicating the 
position of the notches in the disk, a latch 
bolt, and means for operating it and for oper 
ating the tumbler, substantially as described 
and for the purpose set forth. 
6. A combination-lock comprising a casing, 
a latch-bolt, an operating-spindle, a tumbler, 
means for permitting said tumbler and latch 
bolt to be operated, said means consisting of 
a plurality of rotatable disks, each disk be 
ing mounted upon an adjustable shaft formed 
on the tubular part 19 and extension 23, cap 
24 formed with flange 25, sleeve 26 carrying 
the notched disk, and securing-nut 28, means 
for indicating the position of the notch in the 
disk consisting of spring-dog carried by the 
shaft, and adapted to engage a recessed dial, 
substantially as described and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
7. In a dial and indicator for combination 
locks the combination of a knob, a flat spring 
secured thereto, its end being bent and passed 
through a notch in the edge of the knob, a 
dial formed with recesses in its face adapted 
to be engaged by the projecting end of the 
spring as the knob is revolved, substantially 
as described and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY E. MOOMAN. 
65 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
Witnesses: 
SAM. D. SHORT, 
D. D. BLAZIER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565463.txt	(No Model.) 
W. L. KELLOGG. 
HEADING CHIPPER. 
5 Sheets-Sheet l, 
No. 565,463, 
Patented Aug. ll, 1896. 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
S 
w 
t 
2 
 
1. SN 
SN/ 
 
s 
5 
S. 
N siggle 
sy, 
t 
S. 7 
A. 
C 
4. 
NS 
QSitv.cssos- % 
. 
- 
311 Ueviot 
2442-4-2- 
& attetricy 
 
(No Model,) 
W. L. KELLOGG. 
HEADING OHIPPER, 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 565,463, 
... . 
Patented Aug. ll, 1896. 
s ve 
. 
8. 
b 
's st 
s 
It 
N 
III 
G (G. 
R 
H. 
| 
SS 
. Y 
r 
X 
S 
h R. 
s 
AWs. 
le 
S NS 
S 
 
s 
Earl 
SE HP 5 
as 
E; 
: 
E 
EP, si 
it. 
w EEEH - 
Mills 
SS 
ad 
E. 
l 
  
Ex& 0. 
| 
BE 
E 
 
 
n 
his 
as a 
 
 
assa 
V 
28&vesses 
(, Z. 44-2-4 
%23. 
R. 
3v ucifot. 
tall, a 72477. 
747 
7 
 
(No Model.) 
W. L. KELLOGG. 
HEADING CHIPPER. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 565,463, 
- 
Patented Aug. 11, 1896. 
 
 
 
TREETEEE 
t 
larii 
IESIP 
 
 
 
28)tv 22/ 
3. C. 
 
In 
344-uevitov 
24- 47%7. 
S3 &lftevvict:0 a 7246-44 
(No Model.) 
- 
W. L. KELLOGG, 
HEADING OHIPPER. 
sheets-sheet 4. 
No. 565,463, 
Patented Aug. ll, l896, 
 
 
 
C 
East 
s 
S 
sa 
NS 
E. 
ST 
ZZZZZZZazzaZZZa. 
L 
A. 
ity, - 
8-v-uovtov 
S3 4 eltto victa 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 565,463, 
W. L. KELLOGG. 
HEADING CHIPPER. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
Patented Aug. ll, l896. 
 
 
I 
T 
Honor 
OCOOOCCOOCs 
OleOCOCCOONE 
'I Cl 
-------EC 
E. 
42 
35 
42 
34 
42 
NSN /40 
Zyyyyyy; 77-44 
 
 
28i-tv cases 
af 
8-2- 
8vuovtov 
33 elitov victa 
- 
-67, 16-va\-Yaz 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM L, KELLOGG, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
HEADING-CHIPPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 565,463, dated August 11, 1896. 
Application filed January 20, 1896, Serial No. 576,160, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To ?ii/ 7:/on, it 7 (t1/ CO7 ce772. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM L. KELLOGG, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Indianapolis, in the county of Marion and 
State of Indiana, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Heading-Chippers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
machines for chipping or dressing material 
to be used in the manufacture of barrel 
heads. 
The object of my improvement is to pro 
vide means whereby a series of rough blocks 
of heading material may be automatically 
seized by feed mechanism and carried be 
tween a pair of rotating cutter-heads so as 
to dress both sides of the heading material 
simultaneously and reduce it to the required 
thickness at one operation. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
invention. 
Figure I is a view in perspective of my ma 
chine, showing more particularly the receiv 
ing end thereof and showing the carriages in 
their extreme outward position. Fig. 2 is an 
elevation, on a larger Scale, of the discharge 
end of the machine. Fig. 3 is a plan view, 
the upper plate on one of the carriages being 
removed. Fig. 4 is a central longitudinal 
section on line 4 4 of Figs. 2 and 3. Figs. 
5 and 6 are details, on a larger scale, of the 
heading-carrying dogs; and Fig. 7 shows the 
rough block from which the heading is made. 
In the drawings, 8 and 9 indicate a pair of 
base-frames, each of Said frames being pro 
vided with an inward flange 10. Bolted to 
flanges 10 and connecting frames 8 and 9 are 
a pair of side plates 11, and the upper edges 
of said plates are connected by means of a 
pair of transverse rods 12. Secured to rods 
12 are two pairs of standards 13 and 14, the 
upper ends of each pair being connected by 
a head-piece 15, and between each pair of 
standards is mounted a vertically-adjustable 
journal-box 16. Each of said boxes is held 
in place by means of an adjusting-screw 17, 
which passes through suitable threaded open 
ings formed in the head-piece 15. Each box 
16 is adapted to support and carry One end 
of the upper knife-shaft 18, which extends 
transversely across the machine and carries, 
near its center, a cutter-head 19, provided 
- 
with adjustable knives 20 in the usual Well 
known manner. 
One end of shaft 18 is extended beyond the 
side plate 11 and is provided with a suitable 
driving - pulley 21. Mounted immediately 
below shaft 18 is a similar shaft 22, provided 
with a cutter-head 23 and knives 24. Shaft 
22 is supported by the adjustable journal 
boxes 25, which in turn are supported by 
means of the adjusting-screWS 26 On Ways 
formed in plates 11, and one end of said shaft 
is extended beyond one of the side plates 11 
and is provided with pulley 27. 
2828 indicate a pair of screw-shafts extend 
ing from one side plate 11 to the other and 
mounted so as to turn therein. Said shafts 
28 lie parallel to rods 12, but at a greater 
distance from the knife-shaft and in a plane 
beneath said rods. Near one end of each Of 
shafts 28, outside of plate 11, is mounted a 
sprocket-wheel 29, which sprocket-wheels 
are connected by a chain-belt 30, and one of 
said shafts 28 is provided with a hand 
Wheel. 31. 
For the purpose of feeding the rough head 
ing continuously through the machine be 
tween the cutter-heads, I provide two feed 
carriages 32 and 33, each of said carriages 
being formed of the upper and lower plates 
34 and 35 and adapted to pass between the 
upper and lower cuttr-heads. Each carriage 
is suspended from rods 12 by means of bear 
ings 36, which are free to move longitudi 
nally along said rods, and may be secured in 
place by means of set-screw's 37. 
Carriage 32 is provided with a pair of 
downwardly-extending bearings 3S, which are 
adapted to receive the plain or unthreaded 
portion of the shafts 28, and carriage 32 is 
provided with a similar pair of bearings 39, 
said bearings 39 being provided with screw 
threads suitable to receive the threaded por 
tions of the shafts 28. Each carriage carries 
a series of dogs 40, which are adapted to en 
gage the ends of the rough blocks 41 and 
carry them between the upper and lower 
knives. Said dogs are provided upon their 
working edges with projecting teeth adapted 
to sinkinto and engage the ends of the head 
ing-block. The dogs are formed into an end 
less chain by means of links 42, and the chain 
so formed is carried around a pair of sprocket 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
3O 
35 
 
565,468 
95 
Ocd 
O 
II5 
I 30 
7 o 
75 
wheels 43, each of said sprocket-wheels be 
ing mounted between plates 34 and 35, one 
near each end thereof, so as to turn in a 
horizontal plane. 
Plates 34 and 35 are held the proper dis 
tance apart by means of a block 44, the inner 
edge 45 of which serves as a guide for the 
dogs. The Working edges of dogs 40 project 
beyond the inner edges of plates 34 and 35, 
but are held in a horizontal plane by Said 
plates, and are held in positive engagement 
with the heading by means of block 44. 
One of each pair of sprocket-wheels 43 is 
carried by a short stub-shaft carried by the 
plates 34 and 35, and serves merely as an 
idler; but the other sprocket of each pair, 
preferably that one at the discharge end of 
the machine, is secured to the upper end of 
a short vertical shaft 46, upon the lower end 
of which is secured a worm-gear 46", carried 
in a Suitable casing 47. Casing 47 carries a 
Suitable casing 48, in which is mounted a 
Worm 48, so as to engage with the worm-gear 
wheel, and said worm is keyed to a shaft 49 
SO as to revolve there with, but so as to slide 
longitudinally thereon. 
To the under side of casing 47 is secured a 
Standard 50, the under side of which rests 
upon flange 10 of base-frame S, and is pro 
vided with a projecting rib which engages 
with the upper portion of a longitudinal slot 
51, formed in said flange. Standards 50 may 
be secured in any position along the flange 
by means of suitable bolts 52. 
One end of shaft 49 is extended beyond 
side plate 11, and is provided with any well 
known form of driving mechanism, in the 
present case the said mechanism being a pull 
ley 53, which may be thrown into and out of 
engagement with a friction - clutch 54 by 
means of an Operating-lever 55. 
For the purpose of presenting the rough 
headling-block to the feeding-dogs, I mount 
upon the receiving end of each carriage a 
pair of downwardly-extending rods or guides 
36, and upon these guides is carried a verti 
cally-movable feed-table 57, each of said 
tables being provided with projecting lugs 
58, through which guides 56 may freely pass. 
To the bottom of each table 57 is pivotally 
Secured a link 59, which passes down through 
slot 60 in flange 10 of base-frame 9, and the 
lower end of said link is pivoted to the outer 
end of an arm 61, which is adjustably se 
Cured to a rock-shaft 62, mounted in suitable 
bearings on the base-frame 9 and provided 
with a foot-lever 63. 
The rough blocks from which the heading 
is formed are generally in the form of a seg 
ment of a cylinder, and these blocks are pre 
sented edgewise to the cutters, so as to pass 
transversely of their grain between the cut 
ter-heads; and to place them between the 
dogs 40 in such a position that the upper and 
lower knives may each do an equal amount 
Of Work a plate 64 is secured at its forward 
or inner end to the forward end of table 57 
by means of a bolt 65, passing through said 
plate and table. 
At the rear end of the table a set-screw 66 
is mounted in suitable screw-threads in such 
a position that its upper end may be forced 
against the under side of plates 64 and there 
by hold it at any desired angle to the top of 
the feed-table. 
Feed-table 57 may be limited in its upward 
and downward movements by means of the 
collal's 67 and 68, adjustably secured to 
guides 56. 
For the purpose of pushing the rough blocks 
Squarely forward, so as to bring them into 
position to be gripped at the ends between 
the dogs 40 of the feed-chains, I mount upon 
the front edge of the base-frame a rock 
shaft, 69. Secured to said rock-shaft are 
a pair of upwardly - extending arms 70 70 
and an Operating-lever 71. Arms 70 extend 
upward past the edge of the feed-table and in 
position to engage the outer edge of the 
block, so that when the block is placed on the 
feed-tables the operator, seizing the lever 71 
and tilting arms 70 forward, pushes both ends 
of the block evenly and simultaneously for 
Ward into position to be gripped between the 
dogs of the pair of feed-chains. 
In operation, pulleys 21, 27, and 53 being 
connected with a suitable source of power, 
they are driven so as to drive the various 
parts in the directions indicated by the arrows 
thereon, and the upper and lower knife 
heads are then set the proper distance apart 
to form the thickness of the heading by 
means of the adjusting-screws. The operator 
then grips hand-wheel 31 and rotates by it 
and sprocket-wheels 29 and chain 30 the 
screw-shafts 28 in a proper direction to draw 
carriage 33 toward or from carriage 32 until 
the dogs 40 are a proper distance apart to 
engage and hold securely between them the 
particular length of heading-block which is 
to be operated upon, when set-screw's 37 and 
bolts 52 are set down and the carriage there 
by held securely in position. The move 
ment of the carriage 33 also causes the move 
ment of the feed-table secured thereto, the 
Worm-gear 46', and its inclosing casing 47, 
and also causes the worm 48", carried by 
shaft 49, to move along said shaft. Plates 64 
are next set at a proper angle by adjusting 
bolts 65 and set-screw 66, and collars (37 and 
6S properly placed. The operator places one 
foot upon ever 63 and forces both feed-tables 
57 upward until stopped by collars 67. The 
rough heading-block 41 is placed with its thick 
edge forward and the ends of one of its sides 
resting upon plates 64, and is then pushed 
forward until its ends are caught by the dogs 
40 as they come around the idler-sprocket 43, 
and as said dogs come into engagement with 
guide 45 they are forced into the ends of the 
block 41, and the said blockis carried into en 
gagement with the upper and lower knives. 
The surplus material is thereby chipped off, 
and when the discharge end of the machine. 
35 
45 
55 
 
565,463 
3. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
is reached the dogs, as they pass around driv 
ing-sprocket 43, are withdrawn from the fin 
ished block, and it drops upon the floor. The 
rough heading-blocks are fed continuously 
into the machine, and in case a block of un 
usual thickness is found the operator allows 
lever 63 to rise slightly, in that way dropping 
tables 57, so that the dogs 40 will engage the 
block at about the center of the ends and 
thereby cause each set of knives to do an ap 
proximately equal amount of work. 
It Will be seen that the above-described ma 
chine is easily adjusted and is capable of a 
wide range of work. 
The dogs 40 project but slightly from the 
plates 34 and 35, and are consequently very 
stiff in whatever position the carriage may be 
placed and whatever length of heading is be 
ing operated upon. 
claim as my invention 
1. In a heading-chipper, the combination 
Of a pair of cutter-heads mounted one above 
the other, a pair of carriages mounted on suit 
able ways between said cutter-heads, one of 
said carriages being adjustable along said 
ways, a pair of endless-belt feed- chains 
mounted Opposite each other on said car 
riages, the arrangement being such that the 
heading-stock may be gripped by and between 
said chains, and means for driving the op 
posed edges of said feed-chains in the same 
direction, all combined and arranged to cop 
perate substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
2. In a heading-chipper, the combination 
of a pair of cutter-heads mounted one above 
the other, means for adjusting said cutter 
heads toward and from each other, a pair of 
carriages mounted on suitable ways between 
said cutter-heads, one of said carriages being 
adjustable along said Ways, a pair of endless 
belt feed-chains mounted opposite each other 
On Said carriages, the arrangement being such 
that the heading-stock may be gripped by and 
between said feed-chains, and means for driv 
ing the opposed edges of the said chains in 
the same direction, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. In a heading-chipper, the combination 
With the main frame, of a pair of cutter-heads 
mounted one above the other, Ways rotatively 
mounted in the main frame and provided 
With screw-threads, a pair of carriages mount 
edbetween the cutter-heads upon said ways, 
One of Said carriages being provided with nuts 
adapted to engage the screw-threaded por 
tions of said Ways, means for rotating said 
Ways, a pair of endless-belt feed- chains 
mounted opposite each other on said carriages, 
the arrangement being such that the head 
ing-stock may be gripped by and between 
said feed-chains, and means for driving the 
Opposed edges of said chains in the same di 
lection, Substantially as described. 
4. In a heading-chipper, the combination 
With the main frame, of a pair of cutter-heads 
mollinted One above the other, means for ad 
justing said cutter-heads toward and from 
each other, ways rotatively mounted in the 
main frame and provided with screw-threads, 
a pair of carriages mounted between the cut 
ter-heads upon said ways, one of said car 
riages being provided with nuts adapted to 
engage the screw-threaded portions of said 
Ways, means for rotating said ways, a pair of 
endless-belt feed-chains mounted opposite 
each other on said carriages, the arrangement 
being such that the heading-stock may be 
gripped by and between said feed-chains, 
and means for driving the opposed edges of 
said chains in the same direction, Substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a heading-chipper, the combination 
with the main frame, of a pair of cutter-heads. 
mounted one above the other, Ways rotatively 
mounted in the main frame and provided 
with screw-threads, means for simultaneously 
rotating said ways, a pair of carriages mount 
ed between said cutter-heads upon said ways, 
One of said carriages being provided with nuts 
adapted to engage the screw-threaded por 
tions of said Ways, a pair of endless-belt feed 
chains mounted opposite each other on said 
carriages, the arrangement being such that 
the heading-stock may be gripped by and be 
tween said chains, a shaft rotatively mounted 
in the main frame, a gear longitudinally 
movable on said shaft and rotated thereby, 
intermediate connecting mechanism between 
said gear and the feed-chain of the adjustable 
carriage whereby the said chain may be 
driven and whereby the said gear may be 
moved longitudinally upon its shaft by the 
movement of the said carriage, and means 
for driving the other feed- chain, all com 
bined and arranged to coperate substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a heading-chipper, the combination 
With the main frame, of a pair of cutter-heads 
mounted one above the other, means for ad 
justing said heads toward and from each 
other, Ways rotatively mounted in the main 
frame and provided with screw - threads, 
means for simultaneously rotating said Ways, 
a pair of carriages mounted between the cut 
ter-heads upon said Ways, One of said car 
riages being provided with nuts adapted to 
engage the threaded portions of said Ways, a 
pair of endless-beltfeed-chains mounted op 
posite each other on said carriages, the ar 
rangement being Such that the heading-stock 
may be gripped by and between said chains, 
a shaft rotatively mounted in the main frame, 
a gear longitudinally movable on said shaft 
and rotated thereby, intermediate connecting 
mechanism between said gear and the feed 
chain of the adjustable carriage whereby the 
said chain may be driven and whereby the 
Said gear may be moved longitudinally upon 
its shaft by the movement of the said car 
riage, and means for driving the other feed 
chain, all combined and arranged to coper 
ate substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
7 O 
75 
95 
CO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
55 
 
4. 
565,463 
tions of said ways, a pair of endless-belt feed 
chains mounted opposite each other on said 
carriages, the arrangement being such that 
the lheading-stock may be gripped by and be 
tween the said feed-chains, means for driving 
the opposed edges of the said feed-chains in 
the same direction, the means for driving the 
feed-chain of the adjustable carriage consist 
ing of a wheel adapted to engage said chain, a 
shaft secured to said wheel, a gear secured to 
said shaft, a gear adapted to engage said geal 
mounted so as to rotate with and to slide lon 
gitudinally upon a shaft rotatively mounted 
in the main frame, and means attached to 
said adjustable carriage whereby a movement, 
of said carriage will cause the said last-men 
tioned gear to slide longitudinally upon its 
driving-shaft, substantially as described. 
9. In a machine for dressing heading 
blocks, the combination with the pair of car 
riages adjustable relatively to each other and 
a feed-table carried by each of said carriages, 
of intermediate connecting mechanism coln 
necting said feed-tables whereby they are 
raised and lowered simultaneously, all sub 
stantiaily as set fourth. 
10. In a machine for dressing heading 
blocks, the combination with the pair of rela 
tively-adjustable carriages, of a vertically 
movable feed-table carried by each of said 
carriages, each of said feed-tables being pro 
vided with an upper surface one end of which 
is vertically adjustable, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
WILLIAM L. KELLOGG. 
. 
Witnesses: 
A.M. HoOD, 
W. R. MERCER. 
45 
55 
7 O 
7. In a heading-chipper the combination 
with the main frame, of a pair of cutter-heads 
mounted one above the other, a pair of ways 
rotatively mounted in the main frame and pro 
vided with screw-threads, means for simul 
taneously rotating said ways, a pair of car 
riages mounted between the cutter-heads 
upon said ways, one of said carriages being 
provided with nuts adapted to engage the 
screw-threaded portions of said ways, a pair 
of endless-belt feed-chains mounted opposite 
each other on said carriages, the arrangement 
being such that the heading-stock may be 
gripped by and between said feed-chains, 
means for driving the opposed edges of said 
feed-chains in the same direction, the means 
for driving the feed-chain of the adjustable 
carriage consisting of a sprocket-wheel 
adapted to engage said chain, a shaft secured 
to said sprocket, a gear secured to said shaft, 
a gear adapted to engage said gear mounted 
so as to rotate with and to slide longitudi 
inally upon a shaft rotatively mounted in the 
lmain frame, and means attached to said ad 
justable carriage whereby a movement of said 
carriage will cause the said last-mentioned 
gear to slide longitudinally upon its driving 
shaft, substantially as described. 
S. In a heading-chipper the combination 
with the main frame, of a pair of cutter-heads 
lmounted one above the other, means for ad 
justing said cutter-heads toward and from 
each other, a pair of ways rotatively mounted 
in the main frame and provided with screw 
threaded portions, means for simultaneously 
rotating said Ways, a pair of carriages mounted 
between the cutter-heads on said ways, one 
of said carriages being provided with nuts 
adapted to engage the screw-threaded por 
IC) 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565563.txt	(no Model.) 
No. 565,563, 
H. C. PHILLIPS, 
LUGGAGE CARRIER, 
Patented Aug, ll, 1896, 
W\vvesses, 
77%-ea----- 2-2-1-2-6 
photo-uITHo., WASHINGTON, D.C. . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY C. PHILLIPs, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
ROCHESTER BICYCLE COMBINATION HOLDER COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
LUGGAGE-CARRIER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 565,563, dated August 11, 1896. 
Application filed January 20, 1896, Serial No. 576,201 (No model.) 
55 
70 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HARRY C. PHILLIPs, of 
Rochester, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Luggage- Carriers; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming apart of this specification, 
and to the reference-letters marked thereon. 
My present invention has for its object to 
provide animproved luggage-carrier adapted 
particularly for use on bicycles or similar ve 
hicles, which is not only light but is capable 
of being folded or knocked down into small 
compass when not in use; and it consists in 
certain improvements hereinafter described, 
and the novel features pointed out in the 
claims at the end of this specification. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a carrier constructed in accordance 
With my invention applied to the front tube 
or frame of a bicycle; Fig. 2, a similar view 
of the same partly folded; Fig. 3, a side ele 
vation showing the carrier folded; Fig. 4, a 
longitudinal sectional view; Fig. 5, a plan 
view of the base frame or support. 
Similar reference letters in the several fig 
ures indicate similar parts. 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
support or base A, preferably in the form of 
a curved plate or support, adapted to partially 
embrace the head, front tube, or other con 
venient portion of a cycle-frame, and ar 
ranged upon this base or Support and extend 
ing, preferably, radially therefrom are suit 
able arms or strips B, pivoted to said base and 
arranged to turn up in a plane at right angles 
to the plane of the semiannular base and 
against the tube or head, said arms having 
pivoted to their outer ends suitable arms B", 
the upper ends of which latter are connected 
by flexible connections, preferably in the form 
of links C, pivoted to each other by suitable 
fastenings, such as eyelets or tubular rivets 
c, and to the ends of the vertical arms or strips 
B' by similar rivets c'. 
The connections between the strips B and 
B' are preferably eyelets or tubular rivets b, 
but it will be understood that otherforms of 
hinged connections could be employed be 
tween the arms B and B and between the 
arms B' and the flexible connections between 
them. 
The inner ends of the arms B may be piv 
oted to the support Ain any suitable manner, 
but I prefer to form said support of a plate 
more or less flexible, so as to conform to the 
shape of the tube or support to which the 
carrier is to be applied, and having suitable 
lugs a. a', the former being located beneath 
the space between the upper lugs a', and be 
tween the lugs passes an encircling band D, 
preferably of wire, extending around the sup 
port A, and upon which the perforated or 
looped ends of the arms B are pivoted. This 
band D extends around the rear of the base 
A, and is adapted to form a means for the at 
tachment of the holder to the bicycle-frame, 
the ends being provided with eyes through 
which is passed a bolt E, having a securing 
nut E' thereon, and it is preferably offset at 
d, as shown in Fig. 5, which not only pre 
vents its displacement on the base or support 
A, but serves to bring the rear portion thereof 
in close contact with the head or front tube 
of the bicycle; but it will be understood that 
instead of this form of pivotal connection be 
tween the arms B, said arms could be other 
wise pivoted and also the means of attach 
ment to the bicycle-frame could be varied, 
but I prefer the construction shown on ac 
count of its simplicity and cheapness. 
The rear arms B of the series extend Sub 
stantially in the same plane on opposite sides 
of the support A, and instead of making the 
arms B of wire, as are the others, I prefer 
ably form them of steel strips having the ears 
Bon their ends, to which are pivoted the ends 
of the last of the series of links C, connecting 
the upper ends of the arms B". 
In order that the receptacle or holder 
formed by the arms B and B may be held ex 
tended and as a means for causing the proper 
folding of the device, and further, to prevent 
articles in the holder from falling out at the 
rear, I provide suitable toggles upon the rear 
sides, formed of a long arm F, (pivoted to the 
support A and preferably upon the band Dat 
one end,) and shorter links F", pivoted to the 
outer end of these strips F, and also at e to the 
uprights B', as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. These 
9o 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
565,568 
arms F are preferably about the same length 
as the arms B", but the links F are prefer 
ably slightly shorter than the distance be 
tween the pivotal point e and the point of con 
nection between the arms B and the first or 
end arms B, so that When the arms F are 
folded up against the bicycle-frame in the 
position shown in Fig. 3 the pivotal point or 
connection between the toggle-arms may be 
sprung toward the bicycle head or tube and 
hold the parts folded. 
The extreme ends of the arms F are pref 
erably provided with lugs f, extending over 
the links F, forming stops for preventing the 
downward movement at the point of connec 
tion between the toggle-arms F and F and 
maintaining them in the position shown in 
Fig. 1, when the folding carrier is open, 
thereby forming collapsible ends for the re 
ceptacle or carrier. 
The operation of the device will now be 
readily understood, a reference to Fig. 1 
showing the device in position for use and 
adapted to receive and retain any article or 
packages placed within it and to safely trans 
port them, the lugs a on the support A serv 
ing to retain the arms B substantially hori 
zontal. When, however, the carrier is not to 
be used, it may be folded to the position 
shown in Fig. 3 by raising the outer ends of 
the links F by means of suitable knobs G for 
the purpose and folding inward the arms B' 
on the pivots b to the position shown in Fig. 2. 
Then said arms B' are turned substantially 
parallel with the arms B and the latter are 
folded up against the bicycle head or tube to 
the position shown in Fig. 3, the links C turn 
ing on the pivots between them and the arms 
B', and also the pivots between each other. 
The upper ends of the strips l8 may be se 
cured together by any suitable band or fas 
tening in the position shown in Fig. 3 when 
not in use, thus occupying very little room. 
It is obvious that any suitable form of 
flexible connections can be arranged between 
the upper ends of the arms B to prevent the 
outward movement of the latter and to de 
fine the upper edge of the carrier when open, 
and in some instances I prefer to employ a 
light chain instead of the links C shown, par 
ticularly on bicycles which have a brake bar 
or link extending parallel with the head or 
front tube, as this would allow the carrier to 
be folded up to the position shown in Fig. 3, 
and the chain or flexible connection would 
permit the proper movements of the pivoted 
supports close against the bicycle-head. 
This attachment can be made very light 
and strong, and its capacity of folding into 
a Small compass enables the rider to have a 
bundle-carrier for use in emergencies that 
will not render the machine unsightly under 
Ordinary circumstances. 
Though I have shown the arms B and B' 
as made of Wire, it is obvious that flat strips 
could be used if desired, and while it is pre 
ferred that the arms B extend radially from 
the support, this is not essential. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a luggage-carrier, the combination 
with a support, of the arms pivoted thereto 
having the arms pivoted at their outer ends, 
and flexible connections between the latter, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a luggage-carrier, the combination 
with a support, of a series of radial sup 
porting-arms pivoted at One end to the Sup 
port and occupying substantially the same 
plane when extended and arranged to fold in 
planes radiating from the Support, and Se 
curing devices for attaching said support to 
a cycle-frame, substantially as described. 
3. In a luggage-carrier, the combination 
with the support, of the radial Supporting 
arms pivoted thereon, the arms pivoted to the 
ends of the radial arms and adapted to fold 
down upon them, and securing devices for 
attaching said support to a cycle-frame, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. In a luggage-carrier, the combination 
with the support, of the radial Supporting 
arms pivoted thereon, the arms pivoted to 
the ends of the latter, the connecting-links 
pivoted to arms and to each other, and se 
curing devices for attaching the Support to a 
cycle-frame, substantially as described. 
5. In a luggage-carrier, the combination 
with the support, of the radial supporting 
arms pivoted thereon, the arms pivoted to 
the ends of the latter, and flexible connec 
tions between them, the toggle-arms pivoted 
to the support and to the arms on the radial 
arms, substantially as described. 
6. In a luggage-carrier, the combination 
with the support having the spacing and 
supporting lugs, the radial arms having piv 
oted extensions on their outer ends, of the 
encircling band on which the radial arms are 
pivoted, and detachable connections between 
its ends, substantially as described. 
7. In a luggage-carrier, the combination 
with the support, of the radial arms pivoted 
thereon, the arms pivoted to the ends of the 
radial arms, and the links pivoted to the arms 
on the radial arms, and to each other, the arms 
B having the ears B, the toggles pivoted to 
the arms Band the support, substantially as 
described. 
S. In a luggage-carrier, the combination 
With the support, of the arms pivoted there 
on having the vertically-extending arms piv 
oted to their ends, flexible connections be 
tween the latter and the toggles connecting 
two of the vertical arms with the support, 
substantially as described. 
HARRY C. PIIILLIPS. 
Witnesses: 
F. F. CHURCH, 
G. W. RICH, 
15 
25 
45 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
EO 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565663.txt	; H. S. BACON, 
METAL BANDING IMPLEMENT, 
- 
Patented Aug. 11, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 565,663. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY S. BACON, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, 
METAL-BANDING IMPLEMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of fetters Patent No. 565,663, dated August 11, 1896, 
Application filed November 18, 1895, Serial No. 569,239. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, HENRY S. BACON, of 
Worcester, in the county of Worcester and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Metal-Banding 
Implements, which will, in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, be hereinafter 
fully described, and specifically defined in 
the appended claim. 
In said drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
a banding implement embodying my present 
invention. Fig. 2 is a view the reverse of 
Fig. 1, the outer part of the levers being 
broken away. Figs. 3 and 4 show details to 
be described. 
My present invention relates to the band 
ing implement heretofore invented by me 
and patented July 12, 1887, No. 366,293, to 
which reference may be had; and it consists 
in divers devices and the combinations there 
of, as Will be next herein described, and then 
defined in the appended claim. 
Referring again to said drawings, A rep 
resents a lever having at one end a suitable 
handle C, and at the opposite end a wire-grip, 
to be described. 
B represents a shorter lever pivoted at b 
to lever A and at its opposite end provided 
with a wire-grip, to be described. 
Cis a lever provided with a suitable handle 
if at its outer end, while its opposite end is 
pivoted to lever B at c, and a link D is at one 
end pivoted to lever A, while its opposite end 
is pivoted to lever C at d, as shown. 
For the purpose of gripping the Wire em 
ployed for banding boxes and other packages 
I form the outer ends of levers A and B with 
a stud g at right angles thereto. I also pivot 
upon said levers, adjacent to stud 9, a grip 
O 
2O. 
25 
35 
ping-plate h, secured by screw i, and pro 
vided with thumb-ears for manipulating it. 
Mounted upon screw i is the coiled spring k, 
one end of which is secured in plate h and 
the other to the lever on which said plate is 
mounted. Said plates h are at the end next 
to studg, formed oblique to the line of the 
axis and so that as they swing inward their 
end approaches studg, as is shown in Fig. 1, 
and said spring k tends constantly to move 
said plates inward, and as the Wire from the 
right is held by the grip at the left and that 
at the left held by the grip at the right there 
fore the constant tendency of the wire is to 
swing platesh close to studsg, and the Springs 
k are so formed that they have the same tend 
ency. Hence plates h are swung away from 
studs g to introduce the wire between them, 
and the springs grip the wire as soon as plates 
hare released from the hand of the operator. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination with levers A, B, C, and 
link D, arranged to operate substantially as 
described, said levers A and B each formed 
with a rounded stud g projecting at right 
angles from the planethereof, gripping-plates 
h formed with ears secured upon levers A, 
B, actuated by a spring k arranged upon the 
pivot-bolt i of said plates, and with said 
plates formed with an oblique toothed face 
adjacent to studs.g., to hold the Wire in place, 
substantially as specified. 
45 
55 
65 
HENRY S. BACON. 
Witnesses: 
T. W. PORTER, 
A. F. STOWE, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565764.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 565,764, 
 
J. S. LYNCH, 
WINDOW CLEANING CHAIR 
Patented Aug. ll, 1896. 
 
WITNESSES: 
A/ 2 
a 
-7 (WVENTOR . 
BY 3, . 
. 
ATTOAMEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMESS. LYNCH, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
WNDOW. CLEANING CHAIR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 565,764, dated August 11, 1896. 
Application filed April 11, 1895, Serial No. 545,363, (No model.) 
55 
(c. 
7 O . 
75 
To all who, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES S. LYNCH, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and Im 
proved Window-Cleaning Chair, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
My invention relates to a window-cleaning 
chair, and the object of the invention is to 
provide a chair for such purposes which will 
be as simple in its construction as a chair for 
ordinary use and as readily manipulated; 
and a further object of the invention is to 
provide an exceedingly simple and economic 
locking device for securing the chairin posi 
tion for use on the outside of the window. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming a part of this specifi 
cation, in which similar figures and letters of 
reference indicate corresponding parts in all 
the views. 
Figure 1 is a vertical section through a por 
tion of the window-frame and its sill, illus 
trating the chair as secured on the sill, the 
chair being in side elevation; and Fig. 2 is a 
perspective view of the chair. . 
In carrying out the invention the chair con 
sists of the bottom A and the back B. The 
front edge of the bottom is straight, and 
preferably the entire bottom is of somewhat 
semispherical shape in outline, (although it 
may be given other contour,) and the back B 
is made of corresponding shape. The back 
may be of any character, that shown in the 
drawings comprising a series of vertical bars 
10 and a rail 11, connecting all the bars at 
the top. 
The back of the chair is provided with a 
front vertical bar 12, round in cross-section, 
located at each side, these front bars being 
secured to the ends of the rail 11, and the 
aforesaid front bars are of metal, and are 
preferably each provided with a stop 13, in 
the nature of a shoulder, at a predetermined 
point imits length; but the stop may be omit 
tied if desired. 
In connection with the body of the chair 
clamping devices Care employed. These de 
vices are two in number and are of like con 
struction, each comprising an angled bar con 
sisting of a horizontal member 14 and a ver 
tical member 15, the latter being at the inner 
end of the horizontal member, the outer end 
of the said member terminating in an eye 14", 
through which one of the front metal bars 12 
of the chair-body passes. This angle-bracket 
is therefore capable of sliding freely on or 
of swinging on the front bar 12, and at the 
lower end of the vertical member 15 of the 
angle-bracket an eye 15 is formed threaded 
to receive a horizontal adjusting-screw 16, 
having a head at its outer end, preferably 
having attached to it or being covered by a 
Cushion 17. 
In operation the chair is placed with the 
bottom of its body on the outside window-sill 
of the window-frame, the front straight por 
tion of the said bottom bearing against the 
outer riser of the lower sil of the Window 
frame proper, as shown in Fig. 1, the brack 
ets of the clamping devices being immedi 
sately slid up on their supports until their ver 
tical members are in front of the Wall-space 
below theinside edge of the window-sill. They 
are then permitted to drop to an engagement 
with the stop 13, and the adjusting-screws 16 
are manipulated until their cushioned ends 
firmly bind against the wall-surface beneath 
the inside window-sill. The brackets and 
the clamping devices are made of a size to 
readily receive any window-frame, the dif 
ference in width being provided for by the 
manipulation of the adjusting-screws 16. 
This device is exceedingly simple, durable, 
and economic, and when attached to a win 
dow provides a perfectly safe seat for a per 
son. When cleaning a Window. 
By the construction of the device as above 
described it will be seen that when the im 
proved chair is not required for use the clamp 
ing devices C may be slid up on the vertical 
bars 12 of the chair, and when slid up may 
be folded inwardly inside the back of the 
chair, so that the device will occupy compar 
atively little space. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a window-cleaning chair, the combi 
nation of a back and seat having at its for 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
 
565,764 
prising angular bars arranged to slide and 
turn on the Vertical bars of the back, and I5 
set-screws carried in the Outer ends of the an 
gular bars and arranged to engage the inner 
side of a window-sill, said clamping devices 
being arranged to turn on the vertical bars 
of the back whereby they may be folded 20 
within said back, substantially as set forth. 
JAMES S. LYNCH. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN H. MCGOEEF, 
JOHN S. LYNCH. 
Ward part vertical bars, and clamping devices 
having their outer ends provided with means 
to engage the window-sill, said camping de 
vices having their inner ends arranged to 
slide on the vertical bars and being adapted 
when slid upward to be folded within the 
back of the chair, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a window-cleaning chair or the like, 
the combination of a seat, a back comprising 
a series of vertical bars secured at their lower 
ends to the upper part of the seat, and a 
curved rail connecting said vertical bars at 
their upper ends, clamping devices com 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565864.txt	E. P. PEACOCK. 
LETTER, FILE, 
Patented Aug. ll 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 565,864. 
. 
Z 24 2 
 
7/2zzesses. 
rene S.62. 
A4, a 4 far 
ZZZZZZZZZZ) /7ZZezz7 
a. 
-6.6%t. 
The ORFS PETERS CO PHOTO-LTH), WASHf NGTON, O. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIJAH P. PEACOCK, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE AMBERG 
FILE AND INDEX COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
LETTER-FILE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 565,864, dated August 11, 1896. 
Application filed February 8, 1896, Serial No. 578,609. (No model.) 
. 
. . . 
::...'. 
To call, whom t may concern: 
Beit known that I, ELIJAHP. PEACOCK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Letter-Files, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings,in which 
Figure is a plan view. Fig. 2 is a verti 
cal section online 22 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a 
detail, being a partial plan view, showing a 
modification; and Fig. 4 is a vertical section 
on line 4 4 of Fig. 3. 
My invention relates to letter-files or tem 
porary binders, and particularly to that class 
of binders in which a suitable caseisprovided 
With a Series of index-sheets between which 
the material to be filed is inserted, said in 
dex-sheets being held down by a spring-bail, 
one form of such file or binder being shown 
in patent to Louder, No. 395,158, dated De 
cember 25, 1888. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
certain improvements in binders of this class 
by which they may be more cheaply con 
structed and Will be more durable as well as 
more efficient. I accomplish this object as 
hereinafter specified and as illustrated in the 
drawings. 
That which I regard as my invention 
Will 
be set forth in the claims. 
In the drawings, 5 indicates the file, of which 
6 is the bottom, 78 the sides, and 9 the back. 
In the back, near its ends, are provided re 
cesses or sockets 1011 formed by boring up 
into the back from below, such sockets ter 
minating a short distance below the upper 
edge of the back, forming shoulders 12, as 
shown in Fig. 2. 
13 indicates springs, one of which is placed 
in each of the sockets 1011, being inserted 
from below, their upper ends bearing against 
the shoulders 12, which form stops for them. 
14 indicates rods, which pass down through 
the springs 13, and are provided at their lower 
ends With caps 15, adapted to support the 
springs, as shown in Fig. 2. The upper ends 
of the rods 14 pass through suitable passages 
in the back of the file and are provided with 
hooks 16, by which they are connected to the 
bail17. That portion of the bail which bears 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 . 
upon theindex-sheets is Of any suitable form, ... 
and its ends are pivoted to the back.9 by insert 
ing the ends of the bailin suitable sockets in 
the back, formed by channeling out a por 
tion of the back, as shown at 18 in Fig. 3, thus 
providing vertical portions into which the 
ends of the bail may be inserted after being : 
bent at an angle, as shown. This construc 
60 
tion is such that the bail may be very readily 
putinplace, as its ends may be sprung slightly 
apart and then fitted into their respective 
sockets, where they will be retained by the 
spring of the bail. The hooks 16 are secured 
to the bail by means of shoulders 1920, formed 
by bending the ends of the bail at rightangles, 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
When the bail is raised for the purpose of 
permitting access to the index-sheets, the 
rods 14 will also be raised, thereby compress 
ing the springs 13. When the bail is raised 
to a vertical position, the shoulders 16 will 
move back of the pivots of the bail, the re 
sult being that the springs will tend to hold 
the bailin its upright position. The back of 
the file-case serves as a stop to prevent ex 
cessive backward movement of the bail. By 
this construction the springs 13 not only serve 
to hold the bail 17 yieldingly in contact with 
the index-sheets, but also hold its ends more 
firmly in their sockets, preventing them from 
becoming displaced. 
The construction above described is a very 
simple and effective. One, the parts being as 
sembled without the use of screws, and there 
being practically no wear upon any of the 
parts. 
They may also be very readily as 
sembled, as all that is necessary is to slip the 
ends of the bail into their sockets and insert 
the springs with the retaining-rods and hook 
the ends of the rods over the shoulders of the 
bail. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 I have shown a modified 
construction by which the same arrangement 
of springs is utilized with a different mount 
ing for the bail. In the construction shown 
in Figs. 3 and 4 the ends of the bail 17 are 
fitted in bearings 21, secured to the back by 
screws or other suitable means, and the ends 
Of the rods. 14 are hooked over the ends of 
the bail, which are bent into a suitable po 
sition, as shown in Fig. 3. Ledges 22 are 
95 
75 
OO 
2 
565,864 
upper end of said Spring, a rod adapted to 
support the lower end of said spring, and a 
bail to which said rod is connected, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a file, the combination with a case 
having a back, and a socket in said back, of 
a shoulder 12 at the upper end of said socket, 
a spring adapted to be fitted into said socket 
from below, a rod 14 having a cap to support 
the lower end of said spring, and a bail to 
which said rod is connected, substantially as 
described. 
6. In a file, the combination with a case 
having a back, and sockets in said back, of 
shoulders 12 at the upper ends of said sockets, 
springs adapted to be fitted into said sockets 
from below, rods 14 having caps to support 
the lower ends of said springs, and a bail 
having its ends bent and pivoted to the back 
and having shoulders 1920 to which said rods 
are connected, substantially as described. 
7. In a file, the combination with a case 
having a back, of a bail pivoted to said case, 
a Spring, a stop for the end of the spring 
nearest said bail, and a device connecting the 
opposite end of said spring with said bail, 
whereby when said bail is lifted the spring 
will becompressed, substantially as described. 
ELIJAH P. PEACOCK. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT H. ADAMS, 
THEODORE J. AMBERG. 
35 
45 
55 
O 
provided opposite the ends of the bail to form 
stops to limit the backward movement of the 
bail, as shown in Fig. 4. 
I do not wish to limit myself to the specific 
details of the construction illustrated and de 
scribed, as many modifications may be made 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
That which I claim as my invention, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a file, the combination. With a case the 
back of which is provided with a spring-socket 
open from below, of a spring in said socket, 
and a bail connected to the Spring, Substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a file, the combination with a case 
having a back, and a spring, of a spring-re 
ceiving socket, a stop which resists upward 
movement of the spring, a bail, and a con 
necting device connected to said bail and to 
said spring whereby when said bail is raised 
upward pressure will be applied to said spring, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a file, the combination with a case, of 
a bail having its ends pivoted directly to the 
back of the case and having shoulders 1920, 
springs 13, and rods 14 connected to said 
springs and adapted to be connected to said 
shoulders, substantially as described. 
4. In a file, the combination with a case 
having a back, and a socket in said back, of 
a spring fitted into said socket, a stop for the 
- 
. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US565964.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 565,964, 
 
L. COONEY, Jr. 
CASH REGISTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1896. 
 
Witnessess: 
In LIgntor, 
(No Model.) 
L., COONEY, Jr. 
CASH REGISTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 565,964, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
it is 
filming 
D (D-21 (DR 
HN-R Sulli 
EE suit 
ETT 
HERU Sumit 
Null EPs Still st 
LIVIII Esm RTM NILILL 
Du C 
(D - As - it's 
D-2 16B 
IEIt 
R 
sis 
NIT 
unnu 
lili 
Sill 
H- us 
Lill Film 
H =GIM 
- III ES" 
II 
m 
ES 
ERIM HIT to 
Witnesses : 
- - 2%az. 26%-24 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 565,964, 
 
L. COONEY, Jr. 
CASH REGISTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1896. 
 
Witnesses: 
II Liegnitor, 
(No Model.) 
L. COONEY, Jr. 
CASH REGISTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 565,964, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1896, 
 
 
 
s 
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
w 
O 
s: 3. 
M. 
s", - 
v 
d 
a 
im 
 
a SSS 
WSS: 
eart Haz74. 
Ellal 
 
 
 
 
TENNINITILITIll 
awa A 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUKE COONEY, JR., OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGN 
MENTS, TO VERNON T. BARKER, TRUSTEE, OF KALAMAZOO, MICHIGAN. 
CASH - REGISTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 565,964, dated August 18, 1896. 
Application filed December 5, 1895, Serial No. 571,100, (No model.) 
55 
65 
To all LUh O7, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LUKE COONEY, Jr., a 
citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
5 State of Illinois, have invented a certain uew 
and useful Improvement in Cash-Registers, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
cash-registers, and in certain particulars is 
O an improvement on my cash-register shown 
in my application for a patent filed October 
23, 1895, Serial No. 566,668. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to 
simplify the construction of cash-registers 
5 generally; Second, to make them positive in 
their action by an improved means; third, to 
provide a cash-register in which there are dif 
ferent groups of keys and indicators corre 
sponding to the denominations of money so 
2O arranged that all will register in one complete 
registering apparatus which will indicate the 
Sum total at a glance without any calculation; 
fourth, to provide a cash-register in which 
there are different groups of keys and indi 
25 cators corresponding to the different denomi 
nations of money so arranged that all will 
legister in one complete registering appara 
tus which will indicate the sum total at a 
glance without any calculation and so ar 
3o ranged that an indicator will be sustained for 
each denomination where it is desired to reg 
ister a sum which will require the use of all 
the different denominations; fifth, to provide 
an improved register mechanism which shall 
35 be actuated by groups of keys of different 
denominations and will yet register the sum 
total in Such a manner without the necessity 
of mathematical calculation; sixth, to pro 
vide improved means of locking all the keys 
4o of all the groups of the machine whenever a 
single key of any group is struck up; sev 
enth, to provide improved means of positively 
uniting a key with the register mechanism 
during the operation of the key; eighth, to 
45 provide an improved register mechanishm 
consisting of trains of geared number-wheels 
so constructed that the gears can be operated 
independently without actuating those lower 
in the Scale and only operating those of a 
5o higher order when necessary; ninth, to pro 
Yide an improvement in register mechanism 
which will prevent, the possibility of the same 
overregistering from the inertia of the ma 
chine; tenth, to provide an improved con 
struction of register mechanism for cash-reg 
isters for carrying the registration from all 
parts of the machine to a single legistering 
device; eleventh, to provide improved lock 
ing devices for locking the unoperated wheels 
of the register mechanism during its opera 
tion, and further objects appearing definitely 
in the detailed description. I accomplish 
these objects of my invention by the mech 
anism shown in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan view of the register 
ing and indicating mechanism of my improved 
machine, the outer casing being removed. 
Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of the same. Fig. 
3 is a detached detail view of a pair of the 
bodies R. R. for actuating the key-arresters.-- 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the same machine. 
Fig. 5 is an enlarged detail sectional view on 
line 55 of Fig. 6, showing a detail view of the 
improved means of locking the key-graduat 
ing bar and register gear-wheel together. 
Fig. 6 is a detail sectional view on line 6 (5 
of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7 is an enlarged detail view 
of the register mechanism or adder with the 
number and gear-wheels of the lower denomi 
nation exposed. Fig. S is an inverted plan 
view of the register or adding mechanism 
shown in Fig. 7. 
Fig. 9 is an enlarged detail 
broken view showing the transfer mechanism 
for bringing the registered amounts from the 
various parts of the machine to the register 
mechanism. Fig. 10 is an inverted detail 
plan view of the three lowest wheels of the 
register mechanism, showing their relation 
and construction from the lower side. 
All the sectional views are taken looking 
in the direction of the little arrows at the ends 
of the section-lines, and similar letters of ref 
erence refer to similar parts throughout the 
several views. 
Referring to the lettered parts of the draw 
ings, A represents the base, which contains 
the drawer and drawer mechanism, which I 
preferably construct in the form shown in 
my last application above referred to, Ol' in 
other suitable form, though as far as this in 
vention is concerned it is not material. The 
So 
95 
Ioo 
 
2 
565,964 
O 
25 
35 
55 
o 
IOU 
IO 
registering and indicating parts of this ma 
chine are supported in a frame A', made up 
of sections similar to those shown in my last 
invention. The keys B' are levers pivotally 
supported on the shaft B to the front of the 
machine. Indicator-slides F, bearing indica 
tors F at the top corresponding to each of 
the keys, are above the keys to the rear of the 
machine to be actuated by them. There is a 
trailer N, with a rack at the rear therec?, on 
each key, the same as described in my former 
application, and a common pawl, extending 
across the machine, operates upon all of the 
racks the same as before to compel the colm 
pletion of the stroke. 
The keys are in sections, as before, with 
key-arrester bodies P to prevent the raising 
of more than one key at a time. Between the 
key-arrester bodies of each group are pivot 
ally supported downwardly-depending bodies 
R. R. for transferring the motion from one 
group or division of key-arresters to the next 
when any key of the machine is operated, 
thus making it impossible to operate more 
than one key on the entire machine at once. 
These bodies R. R. are made large, and are re 
cessed out to accommodate the intervening 
construction. 
The detaining-bars to the rear of the indi 
cator-slides are divided, so that there is a bar 
from each section of the machine, the same as 
before, with overlapping ends, which enables 
all of the bars to be actuated by the union 
key at the beginning of each registration, as 
before. After the registration is begun a 
key in each division can be operated and its 
indicator-slide retained. The union-key B' 
operates in the same manner as before, with 
the exception that the hook portion extends 
above the common bar E above all the keys 
to insure its actuation when any key is oper 
ated. 
Above and across the keys extends a shaft 
C above and to the rear of the shaft, B, and 
on this shaft is a gear-wheel C", which may 
be actuated from a graduated bar and mech 
anism, as shown in my application above re 
ferred to, so fal' as the remaining parts of 
this machine are concerned. That construc. 
tion is shown on the two divisions of this ma 
Chine corresponding to the two higher denomi 
nations. I show, however, an improved and 
simplified construction for actuating and 
uniting the register mechanism and key on 
the lowest section of the machine, or the di 
vision at the left in which there is but a sin 
gle key. In connection with the graduating 
bar at that point is a pawl D', pivoted on the 
pivot Cl, adapted to engage between the cogs 
of the gear-wheel for that section. A por 
tion D", extending across the section parallel 
With the graduating-bar, is in position to 
be actuated by keys on the upward stroke, 
Which will hold the pawl securely in mesh 
with the gear-wheel C when the key is actu 
ated. A part e', extending across the sec 
tion and hook portions e, corresponding to 
each key of the section, projects below. 
This 
is pivoted below at Cl, the same as the part 
D'. A laterally-projecting lug is on the key, 
and when the key is struck up swings the 
hook to One side and becomes engaged by it, 
and thus securely locked with the graduat 
ing-bar through the remainder of its stroke. 
This locks the key against the portion D", 
which retains the pawl D' securely in mesh 
with the gear-wheel C". When the key has 
completed its stroke, the hooke slides off from 
the lug, allows the key to separate from the 
bar, which allows the pawl ID' to disengage 
from the gear-wheel C", and permits the same 
to return. A suitable stop, as the wire , is 
provided to limit the downward stroke of the 
graduated bar and support it above the key 
or keys to permit a proper actuation of the 
Sal G. 
Supported in a suitable plate or casing II 
on the frame A' of the machine is the adding 
or registering mechanism. This consists of 
a train of number-wheels beginning at the 
lowest denomination at f, passing to the regis 
ter-wheel at h, to the wheel n, to the wheels 
S, and so on to the train indefinitely. These 
Wheels are constructed on the scale of one to 
ten, and that is ten revolutions of the lower 
wheel are required to one revolution of the 
next higher. This machine is made to regis 
ter only amounts of five cents and upward; 
consequently, the lowest wheel is actuated 
an entire half-revolution on the stroke of the 
lowest key, and has only the register-figures 
5 and 0 upon it, as every second stroke 
is transferred to the next higher wheel. 
If the register registered from one cent up, 
this wheel would register from one to ten 
cents. There would be a one-cent key, a two 
cent key, and SO on up to nine cents, and the 
lowest, wheel would be actuated in that man 
nel'. A spur cog or pawl is on each wheel to 
engage in Suitable notches or gears on the next 
wheel above it to move it one step forward on 
each revolution. There are three divisions or 
sections to this machine, and the keys of each 
division actuate independently the three 
lowel wheels of the train of number-wheels. 
The division to the left is connected to ae 
tuate the number - wheel f, corresponding 
thereto through its gear-Wheel G, meshing 
with the gear-wheel C" of that division, which 
transmits its motion through the shaft G' to 
the beveled gear I, meshing with the bevel 
gear J, which is on the shaft it, which actuates 
the number-wheelf above. The central sec 
tion actuates through its gear-wheel C" the 
bevel gear K, which is on the shaft ly, which 
carries the wheel h, and the right-hand or 
dollar group actuated from its gear-wheel C", 
the gear G, which transmits its motion 
through the shaft G' to the bevel-gear I", 
which meshes with the bevel-gear J' on the 
shaft, it', which carries the number-wheel in. 
It is thus clear that each group of keys or 
division of the machine actuates its appro 
priate number-wheel in the train. As none 
 
565,964 
3 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
of the number-Wheels above the Wheel n are 
actuated except by the number-wheels be 
low, nothing specially is required in their 
construction, as only an Ordinary train of 
number-wheels is required. On the under 
side of the wheel h, an arm t projects out and 
carries a pawl t. This pawl is held outward 
or in the engaging position by the spring , 
and is adapted to engage toothed wheel m' 
beneath the number-wheel m, and move the 
wheelone step at each revolution of the wheel 
h. A bar I, carrying a dog L', positioned to 
engage between the teeth. On the gear-wheel 
m', extends across the under side of the case 
H and is adapted to reciprocate on two carry 
ing-screws at that point, which pass through 
little slots in the same. A spring b holds the 
dog L" normally out of engagement from the 
gear-wheel m'. A lug ac, on the shaft 21, is in 
position to engage a lug ac' on the bar L, when 
the pawl t actuates the gear-wheel m' one 
step or notch and throws the dog L' momen 
tarily into engagement with the gear-wheel 
and prevents overregistration. The lug 
at appears very clearly in Figs. S and 10. 
In Fig. 8 a part of the gear-wheel K is 
broken away to show it. The pawl t is piv 
oted to swing in the direction of the motion 
of the wheels n. m., and allows them to be 
actuated without actuating the lower wheel 
h. As the number-wheelf carries but one 
tooth and rotates half-way around at each 
stroke of the key of the lower division, no such 
construction is there necessary. A locking 
leverg is provided, however, pivoted atg', to 
engage and lock the gear-wheel h, as soon as 
it has been actuated one step by the pin f' 
engaging against the same. The pin f' 
passes the end of the lever at the end of the 
stroke and so permits a free motion of the 
wheel h independent of the wheel f. It is 
thus clear that each division of the machine 
will actuate the register mechanism exactly 
in proportion to the amount of the key struck 
up in that division. The key-arresters and 
the common paw acting on the trailers of all 
the keys to the rear of the machine compels 
the operation of but a single key at a time. 
The dividing of the sustaining-bar for the 
indicator into lengths corresponding to the 
divisions of the machine permits an indicator 
to be raised and supported in each division 
of the machine for each registration. This 
permits a registration in which an indicator 
slide shall be supported in each division, and 
secures complete registration of all accounts 
indicated. 
Having thus described my improved cash 
register, I desire to state that it is capable of 
considerable variation in its details without 
departing from my invention. To secure 
many of the effects of my machine, it would 
not be necessary to divide the frame of the 
machine into sections, and so the bodies R. R. 
might be dispensed with. Other sustaining 
devices could, no doubt, be employed for the 
indicator-tablets than the bars F and F, &c., 
and other styles of adders or registers could 
be used with the remaining parts; and the 
adder or register I have shown is adapted for 
use in a great variety of cash-registers. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a cash-register the combination with a 
suitable base of the frame A', and the shaft B, 
toward the front thereof; register-keys in sec 
tions or divisions pivoted on said shaft and 
projecting to the rear of the machine with 
trailers N, with racks thereon; the common 
reversible pawl extending across said trailers 
to compel the complete operation of each key; 
key-arrester bodies P, P, for each section to 
prevent the operation of but a single key; 
downwardly-depending pivoted bodies R., R., 
between the sections of arrester-bodies for 
transferring the motion from One set of key 
arresters to the other so that but a single key 
of the entire machine can be operated at a 
time; indicator-tabletsF"; indicator-slides F, 
for supporting the same; sustaining-bars F, 
F, F, for said indicator-slides lapping over 
each other at a little distance apart so that 
they may be operated independently; a union 
key B", actuated by suitable connections with 
the register-keys of the machine to operate a 
trip-lever to release the indicator-slides and 
let the tablets fall at each registration; a reg 
ister mechanism consisting of a train of num 
ber-wheels the three lower wheels of which 
correspond to the divisions of the machine 
and positioned to be actuated independently 
from the graduated bar of each division by 
suitable gear connections therefrom; a spring 
pawl on the second number gear-wheel in po 
sition to actuate the third and allow the in 
dependent forward movement of the third; 
a dog L', to engage the third wheel in position 
to be tripped by the second wheel to prevent 
overregistration of the third; a detaining-dog 
g, for locking the second wheel a pin f', on 
the first wheel to actuate said dog to prevent 
overregistration of the second wheel when the 
first wheel is operated all coacting together 
substantially as described for the purpose 
- 
specified. 
2. In a cash-register the combination of a 
supporting-frame; groups or sections of reg 
ister-keys the groups corresponding to the 
denominations of money an indicator-tablet 
for each key in groups corresponding to the 
groups of keys; indicator-sustaining devices 
for each group of keys adapted to operate in 
dependently; suitable key-arresters to pre 
vent, the operation of more than one register 
key on the entire machine at a time; a lever 
connected to be actuated by any of said reg 
ister-keys to trip all of the tablet-sustaining 
devices at the beginning of a registration; a 
total-register mechanism and a transfer mech 
anism for transferring the amount registered 
by each key to the total-register as specified. 
3. In a cash-register the combination of the 
indicator-tablet slides F; and register-keys in 
OO 
Id 
II5 
I 25 
 
565,964 
75 
So 
CO 
I C5 
IO 
I I5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
groups for actuating the same; key-arresters 
P, for preventing the operation of more than 
One key at a time in each group; and bodies 
R. R., pivoted at 2, 2, to the casing to transfer 
the motion from One group of key-arresters 
to the remaining groups to prevent the oper 
ation of more than one register-key at a time 
On the entire machine. 
4. In a cash-register the combination of the 
indicator-tablet slides F, keys B", for actuat 
ing the same; key-arresters P, for preventing 
the Operation of more than one key at a time 
in each group; and an intervening body to 
transfer the motion from one group of key 
arresters to the remaining groups to prevent 
the operation of more than one register-key 
at a time on the entire machine. 
5. In a cash-registen' the combination of a 
group of keys B", pivoted on a shaft toward 
the front of the machine; a shaft above and 
to the real' of said key-shaft; a graduated bar 
pivotally supported from said rear shaft; a 
dog D", pivoted thereto and projecting rear 
Wardly to be held in mesh with the gear by 
ally key actuated; and a bar e', with down 
Waldly-projecting hooks e, pivoted to said 
graduating bar and adapted to engage upon 
a lug upon each key and lock the key to the 
dog D", into the geal' to actuate the same and 
lorevent ovellegistration as specified. 
(5. In a cash - register the combination of 
groups of register-key's B, pivoted on a shaft 
toward the front of the machine; a shaft 
above and to the rear of said key-shaft; a 
gear-wheel on said rear shaft; a graduated 
bar pivotally supported from said rear shaft; 
a dog D", pivoted thereto and projecting rear 
Wardly to be held and locked by any key act 
lated in mesh with the gear to actuate the 
same and prevent overregistration as speci 
fied. 
7. In a cash - legister the combination of 
register-keys B", in groups corresponding to 
the denomination of money; a gear-wheel to 
each group actuating amounts corresponding 
to the amount marked on each key of the 
group; a total-register mechanism consisting 
of trains of numbered gear-wheels f, h, n, S, 
the lower wheels of said train registering in 
dependently amounts of the denomination 
corresponding to the groups of keys and con 
nected to transfer said amounts to the higher 
indicator-wheels by a ratchet mechanism; a 
transfer mechanism connecting the gear 
Wheel of each group to the wheel of the reg 
istering mechanism corresponding thereto to 
transfer all of the amounts from each group 
of keys to the total-register as specified. 
S. In a cash-register the combination of a 
train of number-wheels f, h, In, and S, in train 
successively; independent connections from 
the number-wheels to actuate the same inde 
pendently; a lock-lever (/, pivoted at g', to 
lock the wheel h; a pin f', for actuating the 
lever 9, to lock the wheel h, whenever it is 
moved one step by the wheelf: a spring-pawl 
t", connected to the wheel h, to actuate the 
wheel n, one step at each revolution of the 
wheel h, and permit the wheel n to revolve 
past it in the same direction; a shaft it, 
through wheel in 
a gear-wheel m', on said 
shaft at a guided bar L, carrying the dog L', 
to engage the gear-wheel 7' and a tooth a', 
on the shaft?, of the gear-wheel h, positioned 
to actuate the bar L, by striking a lug a', 
thereon to throw the dog L', into the gear 
wheel 9)', to prevent overregistration; and a 
spring b, to hold the dog L", normally out of 
engagement all coacting togethel' for the pur 
pose specified. 
9. In a cash-register, the combination of 
number-wheels f, h, in and S, in train; suit 
able cogslugs Ol' pawls on each of said num 
ber-wheels meshing directly with the next 
higher wheel in the train to actuate the next 
higher number-wheel; a locking-lever extend 
ing between the number-wheels f, and h, to 
lock the wheel h, when it is moved one step 
from the action of wheelf the dog L', act 1 
ated from the wheel h, to lock or stop the 
wheel m, when it is moved one step by the 
Wheel h, as specified. 
10. In a cash-register the combination of 
number-wheels f, h, 
, and S in train; suit 
able gear connections on each of said number 
wheels meshing with the next higher; pin 
or pins f', on the side of number-wheel f, 
corresponding to the actuating cog or cogs 
thereon; a stop-lever 9, pivoted at g' between 
wheels f and h with one end in a plane to en 
gage with the teeth of number-wheel h, and 
the other end offset to contact with a pin f' 
and be actuated thereby only when the wheel 
factuates wheel h, so that the wheel f in 
actuating wheel I, also operates lever i? to 
lock the wheel has soon as one space is moved, 
and prevent inaccuracy, as specified. 
11. In a cash-register the combination of 
number-wheelsh, n, and S in train, Supported 
in a suitable frame; suitable ratchet connec 
tions between said wheels l and in to permit 
the operation of the higher wheels independ 
ent of the lower, an axley for wheel h; a slide 
Lacross said frame in close proximity to the 
axle y of wheel h. a lug ac' on said slide, a 
dog L' On slide L to serve as a stop to wheel 
in a lug a on axle if positioned to actuate 
slide L to stop wheel ), at each step of its 
actuation; a spring b to hold the dog L' nor 
mally out of engagement, as specified. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal in the presence of two witnesses. 
LUKE COONEY, JR. 
L. s. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER. S. WooD, 
W. E. CHAPPELL. 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566064.txt	(No Model.) 
G. B. DAMON. 
INSULATION PROTECTOR. 
No. 566,064, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1896. 
 
 
WITNESSES 
NVFNTR 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE B. DAMON, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO GARDNER W. PEARSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
NSULATION PROTECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 566,064, dated August 18, 1896. 
Application filed July 8, 1896, Serial No. 698,412, (No model.) 
55 
The application is as follows: The two parts 
are placed. On opposite sides of the portion of 
insulated wire C to be protected. The ears of 
the second part are drawn through the corre 
sponding slots of the first part to bring the 
two parts close to the insulating-covering and 
are then bent back and down flat, as shown 
in Fig. III, clenching the two parts together 
and in place. The flared ends serve to pre 
vent the ends of the device from cutting or 
Wearing the insulation. It Will be seen that 
this affords a metal covering over practically 
the whole circumference of the Wire and pro 
tects the insulating-covering from abrasion. 
What I claim for my invention, and desire 
to cover by Letters Patent, is 
1. A device for protecting the insulating 
covering of insulated electric wires, consist 
ing of two shells of thin flexible metal, one of 
which is pierced with four or more slots and 
the other of which has corresponding ears 
adapted to pass through said slots, when the 
two parts are adjusted around the insulated 
Wire, and then bent over and back to hold the 
device in place and together, as described and 
for the purpose specified. 
2. A device for protecting the insulating 
covering of insulated electric wires, consist 
ing of a shell of thin flexible metal of such 
dimensions as to cover the length of wire to 
be protected and somewhat less than half the 
circumference of the insulating - covering, 
curved to fit such insulating-covering, hav 
ing flared ends and pierced with four or more 
slots, combined with a shell of the same metal 
of similar dimensions and similarly curved, 
having flared ends and having ears corre 
sponding with the slots in the other shell pass 
ing through said slots and bent over and back 
to hold the device in place as described and 
for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 6th day of 
July, A. D. 1896. 
GEORGE B. DAMON. 
Witnesses: 
GARDNER W. PEARSON, 
MILLARD F. DAVIS. 
75 
95 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE.B. DAMON, a 
citizen of Germany, and a resident of Lowell, 
in the county of Middlesex and State of Massa 
5 chusetts, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Insulation-Protectors, of which 
the following, taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification. 
My invention consists of a device for pro 
IO tecting the insulating-covering of electric 
wires from being Worn away by contact with 
certain classes of insulators. It is more par 
ticularly applicable to that form of insulators 
shown in Figure IV, which consists of a forked 
I5 framework D, between the prongs of which 
are loosely mounted two grooved rollers E and 
F, of some hard insulating material, whose 
faces form a grooved channel through which 
the insulated Wire or cable passes. This form 
2O of insulator is generally used on trees, and 
the SWaying of the branches causes the insu 
lator to move and thus gradually to Wear away 
the insulating-covering of the Wire. 
I attain the desired result by the appliance 
25 illustrated by the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figs. I and II show the two shells of the 
device separate. Fig. III shows it applied to 
an insulated wire, and Fig. IV shows the ap 
3o plication to a tree-insulator of the form men 
tioned. 
My device consists of two parts, the shell 
A, of sheet brass or other suitable thin flexible 
metal, (see Fig. I,) of such dimensions as to 
35 cover the length of wire to be protected and 
Somewhat less than half the circumference of 
the insulating-covering of the wire. This 
shellispierced with four or more rectangular 
holes or slots b c cle, is curved along its en 
4o tire length to fit outside the said covering, and 
preferably has its ends at A and A flared. 
The other part consists of a shell B, of similar 
material, of corresponding dimensions, (see 
Fig. II,) but instead of slots provided with 
45 corresponding ears fgh, i, which are slightly 
narrower than the length of the slots and long 
enough to operate, as ShoWn hereinafter. 
This second shell is also curved along its en 
tirelength to fit the outside of the insulating 
5o covering of the Wire, and preferably has its 
ends at B and B flared, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566164.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY GLANZ, OF LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY. 
PRESSURE-REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 566,164, dated August 18, 1896. 
Application filed February 29, 1896, Serial No. 581,291, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern 
Beitknown that I, HENRY GLANZ, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Louisville, in 
the county of Jefferson and State of Ken 
tucky, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Steam-Pressure Regulators; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvementsin steam-pressure regu 
lators, and it has for its object, among others, 
to provide a simple and cheap construction 
readily applied and which shall be automatic 
in its action, positive and reliable, and not 
liable to get out of order. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear, and the novel 
features thereof will be particularly pointed 
out in the appended claims. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a substantially central section 
through my improvement. Fig. 2 is a view 
of a slight modification. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in the views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates the upper portion, 
formed with a screw-threaded opening a upon 
one side for the reception of the supply-pipe 
and upon the opposite side with a screw 
threaded neck or nipple a' for the connec 
tion of another pipe. The part A is formed 
with a valve-seat A', against which is adapted 
to be seated the valve B. 
C is the lower part, being preferably of 
brass and secured to the upper part by screw 
threaded engagement, as shown, and pro 
vided with a detachable end B'. 
Within the 
cylinder formed by the lower part is a dia 
phragm b, having a depending portion b', 
leaving a passage-Way D for the steam down 
the one side and in the cylinder beyond the 
piston E, which is carried by the stem. E", 
which is limited in its downward movement 
by the stud or pin e, carried by the head or 
end B', the said stem moving through a stuff 
ing-box e' and at its upper end detachably 
connected with the valve B. This valve car 
ries the projection or pin B, around which 
is a spring F, the upper end of which is held 
around the boss g of the coupling G, which is 
connected with the screw-threaded stem H, 
having screw-threaded engagement with the 
cap H", and having its outer end made po 
lygonal or otherwise, as seen at h, to engage 
a Wrench or other tool by which it may be 
turned in or out to regulate the pressure on 
the spring. The connection between the stem 
and the coupling G is preferably a pivotal 
one formed by means of the pin h", passed 
through ears on the coupling and through the 
lower end of the stem, as shown. 
The operation will be readily understood, 
and is, briefly stated, as follows: The valve 
B is opened by the spring above and closed 
by the delivery-pressure below as the steam 
passes through the side passage-way D be 
neath the piston and forces the same upward 
and seats the valve. The piston is provided 
with suitable packing-rings to render it 
Steam-tight. 
Modifications in details may be resorted to 
without departing from the spirit of the in 
vention or sacrificing any of its advantages. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown two valves K and L, 
carried by the stem and adapted to be seated 
upon suitable seats c l, formed in the upper 
portion A and connected with the stem or 
piston-rod by means of the pins in a similar 
manner to the connection between the stem 
H and the coupling G in the form shown in 
Fig. 1. 
The opening in the upper end of the cylin 
der and controlled by the valve is for the 
purpose of letting compressed air out of the 
cylinder when not in operation. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. The combination of the upper and lower 
parts detachably connected together, the 
lower part being formed with a diaphragm 
with integral depending portion and side pas 
sage, a piston-rod working through said dia 
phragm, a piston carried by the rod below 
the diaphragm and a valve carried by the 
piston-rod above the diaphragm fitted to a 
seat in the upper part, said piston-rod being 
disconnected at its upper end and a spring 
IO 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
95 
2 
566,164 
acting upon the upper face of the valve to 
normally force it downward, a coupling con- I5 
nected with the upper end of said spring and 
a rotatable stem pivotally connected with 
said coupling and means for adjusting said 
stem vertically, substantially as described. 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 20 
HENRY GLANZ. 
E. E. SPIES, 
ROBT. B. SPITIES. 
acting upon the upper face of the valve to 
normally force it downward, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination of the upper and lower 
parts detachably connected together, the 
lower part being formed with a diaphragm 
With integral depending portion and side pas 
sage, a piston-rod working through said dia 
phragm, a piston carried by the rod below 
the diaphragm and a valve carried by the 
piston-rod above the diaphragm fitted to a 
Seat in the upper part, said piston-rod being 
disconnected at its upper end and a spring 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566264.txt	(No Model.) 
A. B. WYBURN, 
B00T BLACKING APPLIANCE, 
No. 566,264, 
Patented Aug. 18, 1896, 
E 
E 
-ESF 
3i, 
f 
f 
A 
A. 
AA 
A 
3. 
N SS 
elsea 
-- 
s 
WITNESSES: 
|NVENT OR; 
the NORRIS PETERs co, PHoro-Litho...washington, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALONZO B. WYBURN, OF ONSET, MASSACHUSETTS, 
BOOT - BLACKING APPLIANCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 566,264, dated August 18, 1896. 
Application filed April 28, 1896, Serial No. 589,413, (No model.) 
55 
75 
O 
To all, uhon, it Tally concern: 
Beit known that I, AllONZO B. WYBURN, of 
Onset, in the county of Plymouth and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Boot-Blacking Appli 
ances, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a combined reservoir and brush for applying 
liquid blacking or dressing to boots and shoes, 
and adapted to be packed or carried in a trunk 
without liability of leakage of the contents. 
The invention consists in the improvements 
which I will now proceed to describe and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figurel represents a 
perspective view of my improved boot-black 
ing appliance, and Fig. 2 represents a longi 
tudinal section of the same. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in both the figures. 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
reservoir to contain liquid blacking or dress 
ing, said reservoir comprising a tubular body 
portion a, a removable bottom piece b, which 
is engaged with the body portion C. by means 
of a screw-threaded flange b', engaging a cor 
responding thread on the body a, said bottom 
piece having a packing disk or piece b, which 
forms a tight joint between the body C, and 
the bottomb, and a conical mouthpiece c, se 
cured to the opposite end of the body a. The 
outer end of the mouthpiece c forms a con 
tracted outlet for the reservoir, which outlet 
is normally closed by means of a valved, lo 
cated within the mouthpiece and pressed 
outwardly by a Spring against the tapering 
inner surface thereof. To the valve is affixed 
a rod or stem d", which projects outwardly 
beyond the mouthpiece c. 
e represents a spring which bears at one 
end on the head of the stem d and at the other 
end on the mouthpiece c, said spring nor 
mally holding the stem and valve in the posi 
tion shown in Fig. 2, the valve being thus 
caused to tightly close the mouthpiece. The 
stem d'passes through a guidef, affixed to the 
mouthpiece c. 
g represents a brush which is affixed to the 
mouthpiece c and is so formed and arranged 
that all liquid escaping from said mouthpiece 
necessarily passes through the brush. The 
brushis preferably bag-shaped, and composed 
of a suitable absorbent and porous material, 
such as felt. The mouth or neck of the bag 
is firmly attached to the outer portion of the 
mouthpiece c and clamped thereon by a wire 
or other fastening. 
The cavity formed by 
the interior of the bag is of sufficient size to 
accommodate the springe and valve-stem d", 
as shown in Fig. 2. 
It will be seen that when the brush is 
pressed against an external object, such as a 
boot or shoe, pressure is imparted through 
the brush to the stem d", the latter, with the 
valve, being thus moved in Ward and caused 
to liberate a portion of the blacking, which 
saturates the brush, the latter being then 
used to spread the blacking upon the surface 
of the boot or shoe. 
It will be seen that to open the valve a di 
rect inward pressure lengthwise of the stem 
d' must be exerted on the stem, and that when 
the side portions of the brush are being ap 
plied to the boot or shoe to spread the black 
ing thereon there is no displacing pressure 
exerted upon the valve-stem. The device 
may therefore be freely used without liabil 
ity of liberating an excess of blacking, a spe 
cial movement being required to liberate 
blacking, which movement differs from the 
ordinary movements naturally employed in 
spreading the blacking. 
h represents a cap or cover removably se 
cured to the outer end of the reservoir C. and 
formed to inclose the brush g. 
It will be seen that this appliance may be 
held in any position without liability of re 
leasing the blacking. Hence it can be safely 
packed in a trunk. 
I do not limit myself to the details of con 
struction here shown, and may variously 
modify the same without departing from the 
spirit of my invention. 
I claim 
An appliance of the character specified, 
comprising a tubular body screw-threaded at 
one end; a bottom piece having a screw 
threaded flange formed to detachably engage 
the threaded end of the body, said bottom 
piece having a packing-piece which is pressed 
against the end of the body by the engage 
ment of the bottom piece therewith; a con 
9o 
95 
OC 
2C) 
SO 
 
'3. 
ical mouthpiece secured to the other end of attached to the mouthpiece and inclosing said 
the body, the outer end of said mouthpiece stem. 
constituting the outlet of the reservoir formed 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
by the said body, bottom, and mouthpiece; a name to this specification, in the presence of 
outside the said outlet; a valve within the April, A. D. 1896. 
mouthpiece having a stem projecting out- 
Wardly through said guide; a spring arranged 
to press the valve and its stem outwardly; 
Ic and a bag shaped brush of absorbent material 
5 guide affixed to the mouthpiece and located two subscribing witnesses, this 18th day of 15 
ALONZO B. WYBURN. 
566,264 
Witnesses: 
C. F. BROWN, 
E. BATCHELDER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566365.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 566,365, 
27. / 
E32 
 
ar 
A. C. WILSON. 
PITMAN, 
- 
Patented Aug. 25, 1896, 
2. a 
3. 
s 7 
? 
y 
2. 
6 
a 
z 
a 1 
Z 
22, 2. 
S & 
   
2, 6, 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AMOS C. WILSON, OF BUTLER, PENINSYTLVANIA, 
PTMAN 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 566,365, dated August 25, 1896. 
Application filed October 29, 1895, Serial No. 567,260, (No model.) 
55 
75 
85 
O 
3O 
35 
To all, whom it may conce7n: 
Beit known that I, AMOS C. WILSON, a citi. 
Zen of the United States, residing in Butler, 
in the county of Butler, and in the State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and origi 
nal Imp1'ovement in Pitmen Used in Drilling 
and Operating Oil, Gas, and Water Wells; and 
Idohereby declare that the following is a full 
and exact description thereof, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
My invention relates to an improved pit 
man, and has for its object to provide a sim 
ple construction whereby the parts can be 
readily attached and detached by those not 
skilled in the art. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of my improvement. Fig. 2 is an end 
view. Fig. 3 is a detail perspective view of 
a yoke used in the construction of my device. 
Fig. 4 is a detail of the adjustable nut. Fig. 
5 is a cross-section of the same. Fig. 6 is a 
detail of the lower bearing-block. Fig. 7 is a 
detail. 
The same nulnerals refer to like parts in all 
the figures, 
The numeral 1 represents my improved pit 
man as a whole; 2, the pitman-rod, provided 
with screw-threads 3 at its upper end. 
The pitman is passed through a slot 4 in 
the outer end of a walking-beam 5, and is se 
cured thereto by a cross-bar 6, which is pro 
vided with a screw-threaded perforation 7, 
with which the screw-thread 3 engages. A 
short distance from the bottom of the pitman 
rod I securely bolt a yoke 8, on the lower 
cross-arm of which is mounted a bearing 
block 9. The block is placed in the lower 
portion of the yoke and against the front face 
of the crank-wheel 10, after which a plate 
11 is bolted to the front of the yoke by bolts 
12. It will be thus seen that only one plate 
is necessary to retain the block in position, 
the front face of the crank-wheel taking the 
place of a plate in the rear of the yoke. 
Should it be necessary to take out the block 
and insert a larger or smaller one, the front 
plate is removed and the block and the other 
one inserted. The lower end of the pitman 
rod is screw-threaded and is designed to en 
gage a screw-threaded opening in the uppel 
end of a nut 13. This nut is provided on its 
lower face with a hole 14, in which a bearing 
block 15 is seated. 
In practice the average length of the pit 
man is secured by adjusting the pitman-rod 
in the upper cross-bar, then the yoke is placed 
around the crank-pin, and the final adjust 
ment is made by turning the nut 13, causing 
the block 15 to bear down on the crank-pin. 
Should the distance between the bottom of 
the nut and the top of the crank-pin be too 
short, the bolts 17, which secure the yoke to 
the pitman-rod, are withdrawn and the rod 
moved up and the bolts inserted in any of a 
series of perforations 16 in the pitman-rod. 
By this means I am enabled to provide a third 
adjustment in attaching the pitman. 
From what has been said it will be seen 
that I have provided a pitman that can be 
quickly and conveniently put up or taken 
down and one that can be adjusted. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
The combination of a pitman-rod having 
screw-threads at both ends, a Walking-beam, 
a cross-bar journaled on the end of the Walk 
ing-beam and engaging the Screw-threads at 
the upper end of the pitman-rod, a nut ad 
justably mounted on the lower end of the 
pitman-rod and carrying a bearing-block at 
its lower end adapted to engage the crank 
pin, a yoke adjustably mounted on the pit 
man-rod, a bearing-block in the lower end of 
the yoke to engage the crank-pin and resting 
against the face of the crank-wheel, and a 
retaining-plate secured to the outer side of 
the yoke and bearing against the outer face 
of said last-mentioned bearing-block. 
AMOS C. WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
S. F. BowsER, 
G. T. HEYDRICK, 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566465.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 566,465. 
a 3 
J. C. McINTYRE 
00RN SILKING MACHINE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 25, 1896, 
3 
 
 
 
3-4 || 
1 
Rae 
  
dire 
| It 
H 
|| 7%. 
2. 
s 
s 
/C2/344 
-Zavez?-, 
I, III 3. 
- 
 
EEEEEEEC 227 erres . 
a { 
2. 2. ) 
2-6-4-4 
translaminaseoisease. 
52 
Z 
S 
y 
r 
 
772. 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
(No Model.) 
 
J. C. McINTYRE. 
CORN SILKING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Aug. 25, 1896, 
sn 27 
a 
a 
2 2 
Z % a. 
77a zepzzo 
--2. 
/ZZoze?-r 
424. 71272e3 ves. 
/2, 
 
 
 
27. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. McINTYRE, OF FARNHAM, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF THREE 
FOURTHS TO THE SPRAGUE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME 
PLACE. 
CORN-SILKING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 566,465, dated August 25, 1896. 
Application filed March 6, 1895, Serial No. 540,719, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN C. MCINTYRE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Farn 
ham, in the county of Erie and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provementin Corn-Silking Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to corn-silking ma 
chines whereby the silk is removed from the 
ears after husking the same and before cut 
ting off the kernels. 
Among other devices a hand-brush has been 
employed for this purpose; but this practice 
is slow and requires a subsequent separation 
or screening of the kernels after being cut off 
the cob in order to completely remove the silk. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
an efficient machine whereby the silk is thor 
Oughly and expeditiously removed from the 
ears by the use of brushes. 
In the accompanying drawings, consisting 
of two sheets, Figure 1 is a rear view of my 
improved machine. Fig. 2 is a top plan view 
thereof with a portion of the feed-trough and 
feed-chain broken away. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
cross-section of the machine. Fig. 4 is a ver 
tical longitudinal section thereof in line 4 4, 
Fig. 2, with a portion of the feed-trough and 
feed-chain broken away. Fig. 5 is a frag 
mentary longitudinal section showing the 
front bearings of the brush-shafts. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the several figures. 
A represents the upright end frames of the 
machine, which are connected together at 
their lower portions by longitudinal rods A" 
and at their upper portions by longitudinal 
bars A A. 
B is alongitudinal feed-trough which is ar 
ranged at the front end of the machine and 
which receives the husked ears of corn to be 
silked. 
C is a feed device or carrier whereby the 
ears are propelled through the feed-trough. 
This carrier preferably consists of an endless 
horizontal chain running around sprocket 
wheels did and having its upper portion ar 
ranged in the bottom of the feed-trough, so 
that the ears placed in the trough rest upon 
The sprocket-wheel disjournaled 
the chain. 
at the front end of the feed-trough, while 
the Sprocket-wheel d is mounted on a trans 
verse shaft d, journaled in bearings secured 
to the adjacent end frame. 
E is the main driving-shaft, which is mount 
ed in bearings secured to the upper portions 
of the end frames A, and E' is the driving 
pulley Secured thereto. The shaft of the 
rear sprocket-wheel d is driven from the 
main shaft by an intermediate inclined shaft 
F, turning in bearings secured to the adjacent 
end frame and provided at opposite ends 
with bevel-wheels fif', which mesh, respec 
tively, with bevel-wheels g g', secured to the 
adjacent ends of the main shaft and the 
Sprocket-wheel shaft d. 
The lower portion of the feed-chain passes 
through openings formed in the end frames 
of the machine, as shown in Fig. 4. 
K represents a pair of supporting-rollers, 
which are arranged lengthwise in front of the 
feed-trough B and on opposite sides of the 
upper portion of the feed-chain and which 
form a longitudinal guide channel or support 
for the ears as they pass through the machine. 
These supporting-rollers are separated or out 
of contact With each other, but at the same 
time are preferably arranged so closely to 
gether as to prevent the ears from resting on 
the adjacent portion of the feed-chain, as 
shown in the drawings. These rollers are ro 
tated in the same direction so as to impart a 
rotary movement to the ears. They are 
mounted in bearings Secured to the end 
frames of the machine and are driven by an 
endless chain l, running around a sprocket 
wheel m, secured to the rear portion of the 
driving-shaft, similar wheels n' m, secured 
to the projecting rear ends of the roller 
shafts, and an idler m, journaled upon a 
standard m'. 
H represents a series of rotary brushes ar 
ranged at intervals above the longitudinal 
guide-channel formed by the rollers K and 
adapted to remove the silk from the ears of 
corn and at the same time feed the same 
toward the delivery end of the machine. 
These brushes are mounted on the outer ends 
of transverse shafts h, which are capable of 
yielding vertically to permit the brushes to 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55, 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
566,465 
adapt themselves to ears of various sizes. In 
the construction shown in the drawings the 
rear portion of each brush-shaft is supported 
in a bearing or opening h", formed in the ad 
jacent longitudinal bar A8 and flared toward 
both ends, as shown in Fig. 3, to allow the 
shaft to swivel, while the front portion of the 
shaft is supported in an upright slot or open 
bearing h, which confines the shaft against 
lateral displacement, but allows the necessary 
vertical play thereof. The slotshare formed 
in an upright longitudinal bar h, secured at 
its ends to the stationary end frames. Each 
brush-shaft is yieldingly held in its depressed 
position by a spring i, attached at one end to 
the shaft and at its other end to a longitudi 
nal rod I, which is secured to the end frames. 
The brush-shafts are driven from the main 
shaft by bevel-wheelsi, mounted on the lat 
terandmeshing with similar wheels f', secured 
to the brush-shafts. The brushes are rapidly 
rotated in the direction in which the ears pass 
through the machine and remove the silks 
from the ears and at the same time propel or 
brush the ears forwardly by the friction of 
their bristles against the upper sides of the 
ears. The frictional contact between the ears 
and the supporting-rollers K is sufficient to 
prevent the bristles of the brushes, which are 
comparatively soft, from rapidly sweeping 
the ears toward the delivery end of the ma 
chine. The brushes are preferably arranged 
SO closely together that the advancing ears 
pass under one brush before being fully out 
of the reach of the preceding brush, so as to 
insure an uninterrupted feed of the ears past 
the series of brushes. 
As both of the ear-turning rollers rotate in 
the same direction their opposing sides, which 
run in contact with the ears, move in oppo 
site directions. The roller whose contacting 
side ascends has a tendency to lift the ears 
and discharge the same over said roller be 
fore they complete their course through the 
machine. To prevent this, a guard N is ar 
ranged adjacent to that portion of the periph 
ery of said roller which faces the ears. An 
ear, when lifted by said roller, rides up the 
edge of the guard N and is thus temporarily 
held out of contact with the roller, allowing 
the ear to roll back upon the roller and pre 
venting the same from being carried over the 
top of said roller. The guard N preferably 
consists of a sloping longitudinal board ex 
tending from end to end of the adjacentroller 
and Supported by standards n, which are se 
cured to the longitudinal bar A*. 
In the use of my improved machine the 
ears of corn after being stripped of their husks 
are placed into the feed-trough, whence they 
are carried forward underneath and in con 
tact with the first rotary brush by the end 
less chain C, after which they are propelled 
through the machine by the succeeding 
brushes in the manner hereinbefore de 
scribed. At the same time that the ears pro 
gress through the machine they receive a 
rotary movement about their axis by the roll 
ers K. The ears are thus subjected to the 
cleaning action of the brushes from end to 
end and on all sides thereof, thus effectually 
detaching the silk therefrom. The ears after 
passing the last brush drop upon the tail 
portion C" of the endless carrier, whereby 
they are discharged upon the floor or into a 
bin or receptacle. 
By arranging the ear-turning rollers to 
bear against the under side of the ears and 
the silking-brushes to bear against the upper 
side thereof the brushes perform the double 
function of silking the ears and holding them 
down upon the turning-rollers, and the latter 
perform the double function of supporting 
the ears and turning the same. 
By extending the carrier C from end to 
end of the machine, as shown, it serves both 
as a feed-apron for carrying the ears of COrn 
from the feed-trough to the silking-brushes 
and as a delivery-apron for discharging the 
silked ears from the machine. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination with a guide or Sup 
port for the ears of corn, of rotary silking and 
propelling brushes arranged above said guide 
or support, with their axes crosswise thereof 
and adapted to run in contact with the ears 
and driving mechanism for turning the 
brushes in the direction in which the ears 
pass through the machine, whereby the ears 
are silked and at the same time propelled 
through the machine by the frictional contact 
of the brushes there with, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination with a pair of rollers 
arranged to face each other and driven to ro 
tate with their opposing surfaces in opposite 
directions, said rollers supporting the ears 
upon the upper downwardly-converging por 
tions of their opposing surfaces and turning 
the ears while supporting the same, of a silk 
ing-brush which is arranged above said roll 
erstand whereby the ears are held down upon 
the supporting-rollers, while it removes the 
silk from the ears, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination with a pair of rollers 
arranged to face each other and driven to ro 
tate with their opposing surfaces in opposite 
directions, said rollers supporting the ears 
upon the upper downwardly-converging por 
tions of their opposing surfaces, and turning 
the ears while supporting the same, of a 
silking-brush which is arranged above said 
rollers and transversely to the latter, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. The combination with a pair of rollers 
arranged to face each other and driven toro 
tate with their opposing surfaces in opposite 
directions, said rollers supporting the ears 
upon the upper downwardly-converging por 
tions of their opposing surfaces and turning 
the ears while supporting the same, of a silk 
ing-brush which is arranged above said roll 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
105 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
566,465 
3 
ers, a feed-trough arranged in line with the 
upper opposing surfaces of said rollers, and 
a carrier running along the bottom of said 
trough and conveying the ears to said rollers, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination with a pair of rollers 
arranged to face each other and driven to ro 
tate with their opposing surfaces in opposite 
directions, said rollers supporting the ears 
upon the upper downwardly-converging por 
tions of their opposing surfaces and turning 
the ears while supporting the same, of a silk 
ing-brush which is arranged above said roll 
ers and an endless carrier arranged between 
said rollers and extending beyond both ends 
thereof, whereby the receiving portion of 
said carrier serves to feed the ears to the roll 
ers and the tail portion of said carrier serves 
O 
to remove the ears from the roller, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. The combination with a pair of longi 
tudinal ear supporting and turning rollers 
driven to rotate in the same direction, of ver 
tically-yielding shafts arranged transversely 
above said rollers, brushes mounted on said 
shafts and adapted to run in contact with 
the ears of corn, and a carrier for delivering 
the ears of corn to said brushes, substantially 
as set forth. 
Witness my hand this 24th day of Decem 
ber, 1894. 
3O 
JOHN C. MCINTYRE, 
Witnesses: 
JNO. J. BONNER, 
KATHRYN ELMORE, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566567.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 566,567, 
I. L., ELL WOOD, 
WOWEN WIRE FENCE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet, i. 
Patented Aug. 25, 1896, 
Z 
Sease 
AS 
R seas 
AA2C 
Esta 
asye 
 
 
aestaWe 
S. As Sis 
Z3 /\ 
WA Af 
Ease AA/ 
225 
e 
as: 
f// 
- AAAA. 
Eir 
AAAAAA 
7/2tegies, 
Zaeedoe; 
 
(No Model.) 
I. L. ELLWOOD, 
WOWEN WIRE FENCE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 566,567, 
Patented Aug. 25, 1896, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC L. ELLWOOD, OF DE KALB, ILLINOIS. 
WOWEN-WIRE FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 566,567, dated August 25, 1896. 
Application filed August 17, 1894, Serial No. 620,549, (No model.) 
To all thon, if inay conce7n: 
Beit known that I, ISAAC L. ELLWOOD, of 
De Kalb, Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Woven-Wire 
Fences, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to a woven-wire fab 
lic intended for field - fences, and has for 
its object to furnish a woven-wire or mesh 
fence sufficiently rigid to prevent its distor 
tion in stretching up or in use, and sufficiently 
strong to prevent the enlargement of its open 
ings to permit the passage of stock or the 
breaking of the fence. 
A feature of the invention relates to the 
provision of a fence fabric having a close 
mesh at one side thereof, with a wider or 
larger mesh at its opposite margin, so when 
erected on the posts the bottom of the fabric 
will be provided with a mesh sufficiently close 
to turn Swine, sheep, and other small stock 
without waste of material or the addition of 
Weight by making the fence of equal mesh 
throughout. The construction may be some 
what varied, but in the preferred form the 
fence fabric is composed of a series of cables 
arranged parallel to each other and constitut 
ing the longitudinal strands of the fence, 
these cables being equal distances apart and 
adjoining cables being connected by a mesh 
wire extending diagonally across the space 
between adjacent cables and also intersect 
ing and interwoven. With an adjacent mesh 
wire at the point of connection to the same 
cable, the mesh-wires thus forming diamond 
shaped openings; and in order to reduce the 
size of the openings in the lower portion of 
the fence an additional mesh-wire is coiled 
about adjacent cables at points between the 
interlocking coils of the mesh-wires before 
described. In some cases plainstrand-wires 
alternate with the cables and are supported 
by coiling the mesh-wires around them, thus 
again reducing the size of the openings one 
half when spaced equidistant from the cable 
wires. In this way the plain wires pass 
through the axis of the mesh-wire coils. 
The modification consists in the omission 
of the plain wires and in the substitution for 
round mesh-wires of flat strips which form 
the linesh. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a section of the fence, showing the preferred 
form of construction. Figs. 2 and 3 are simi 
lar views showing modified constructions, 
Fig. 2 showing a fabric in which the plain 
wires are omitted and Fig. 3 showing the 
mesh formed of flat metal strips. 
In the drawings, A represents a series of 
cables, each composed of two wires twisted 
together, and which cables constitute the lon 
gitudinal strands of the fabric. 
B C represent mesh-wires which are inter 
woven with adjacent cables crossing back and 
forth diagonally between them and also in 
tercoiled with each other at the points where 
they intersect the same cable, as indicated at 
b c. These mesh-wires which thus connect 
the series of cables and also cross each other 
form diamond-shaped openings and tend to 
brace the structure, rendering it rigid. Being 
coiled about the cables their coils will not 
slip along the cables as they would along a 
plain wire. 
Instead of using round wires for the mesh, 
I may employ flat strips, as shown in Fig. 3, 
for these mesh-wires. 
In order to reduce the size of the openings 
or to make the fabric of lighter mesh, I em 
ploy additional mesh-wires D, which are coiled 
about the cables A at one side of the fabric, 
as shown at d. For example, as shown in 
Fig. 1, the five cables at the bottom of the 
figure are connected by these additional mesh 
Wires, and there are also employed the plain 
strand-wires E, which are connected with the 
cables by means of the additional mesh-wires 
D, through the coils of which the plain wires 
pass, and also by engagement there with of 
the mesh-wires B and C. There is thus pro 
duced a fabric having a small mesh at the 
bottom of the fence, which is therefore adapt 
ed to turn all kinds of small stock, while a 
very rigid, strong, and durable fence is pro 
vided. The mesh being small and a constitu 
ent part thereof wires twisted into cables its 
separation by stock is well-nigh impossible, 
and this rigidity is further increased by the 
angular bracing of the cable-wires by the 
mesh - wires. It will be observed that the 
principal mesh-wires and the additional mesh 
wires D are intercoiled at the points where 
their strands cross each other, such points 
being coincident with the axis of the inter 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
o 
 
& 
1 
566,567 
O 
mediate plain wires E where such wires are 
used. This intercoiling of the mesh-wires 
at their points of crossing produces the re 
quired rigidity and the angular bracing above 
alluded to. This fabric maybe woven of any 
desired width. The plain wires may be ex 
tended throughout the fabric, alternating 
with the cable-wires, the object of employing 
them being to reduce the size of the mesh 
without adding much weight. The size of 
the mesh will vary according to the purpose 
for which the fabric is to be used, and I do 
not, therefore, limit my invention to these 
exact details. 
I claim 
1. A woven-wire fence fabric comprising in 
combination a series of cables forming the 
longitudinal strands of the fence and mesh 
wires crossing the space between and con 
necting adjacent cables diagonally, saidmesh 
2C) 
 
wire strands being intercoiled with each other 
at their points of crossing and coiled about 
the cables at their points of intersection with 
the latter, Substantially as described. 
2. In a Woven-Wire fabric, the combination 
With a series of longitudinal cable-strands, of 
two sets of mesh-wires crossing the space be 
tween and connecting adjacent cables diago 
nally, plain wires arranged between and alter 
nating with the cables at one side of the fab 
ric and the mesh-wire strands being inter 
coiled with each other at their points of cross 
ing and also coiled about the plain wires and 
cable-strands at the points of intersection 
therewith, substantially as described. 
ISAAC L. ELLWOOD, 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD. C. LOTT, 
ARTHUR W. SPINZELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566667.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 566,667, 
J. D. CUTTER. 
- 
DENTAL FLOSS HOLDER. 
Patented Aug. 25, 1896. 
WITNESSES: 
a 2. 
HE as pets c, HitQ-LT33. WAS-808. 3, 
. 
 
INVENTOR 
a  6-z-z- 
BY 
ATTORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. CUTTER, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO ADELAIDE C. 
CUTTER, OF SAME PLACE. 
D ENTA FOSS is HO DER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 566,667, dated August 25, 1896. 
Applioation filed June 12, 1896, Serial No. 595,3il (No model, 
To all thon, it inctly concein. 
Be it known that I, JOHN D. CUTTER, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and Im 
proved Floss-Holder, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates particularly to floss 
holders for tooth-cleaning purposes; and the 
object is to provide a simple and convenient 
device by means of which a small stretch of 
floss or similar material may be held rigidly 
and in such a position as to be easily inserted 
between the teeth. 
will describe a foss-holder embodying my 
invention, and then point out the novel fea 
tures in the appended claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the views, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a device em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a top plan. 
view thereof, drawn on an enlarged scale and 
with certain parts broken away; and Fig. 3 
is a section through the lime 33 of Fig. 1, and 
drawn on an enlarged Scale. 
The device comprises a frame 1 of suitable 
metal, such, for instance, as Wire, bent to 
form a handle portion 2, and having the end 
of each member turned upward, as at 3. 
These upwardly-turned portions 3 are paral 
lel one with the other, and each one at its 
endisprovided with a kerf 4, and also, as here 
shown, with a kerf 5, extended at right angles 
to the kerf 4. Preferably the end will be 
flared outward to form a head, as shown at 6, 
the purpose of which will be hereinafter 
stated. Attached to the base of each portion 
3 is a lug or button 7, around which the floss 
may be turned. 
Within the body or handleportion is mount 
ed to rotate a bobbin 8, designed to hold a 
supply of floss or similar material 9. As here 
shown, this bobbin S is mounted to rotate be 
tween spring yielding arms 10, extended from 
the body or handle portion and having in 
Wardly-extended bosses 11, which project into 
a central opening in the bobbin, forming 
trunnions therefor. 
In use the floss 9 is carried from the bob 
bin 8 and given one turn around the first but 
ton or lug 7. Thence the floss is carried 
through the kerf 4 of the projection 3, thence 
through the kerf 4 of the other projection 3, 
O 
3 5 
45 
So 
 
55 
65. 
o 
9o 
95 
OO 
and then the end is turned once or twice 
around the Second button 7. 
It may sometimes happen under undue 
pressure that the floss when inserted through 
the kerfs, as described, will slip off the end 
of the projections. To prevent this, or to 
provide means for more firmly securing the 
floss, the said floss may be first passed through 
the kerf 4, then turned once or twice around 
the projections underneath the headportion, 
and then through the kerf 5 to the button. 7, 
as indicated at the right-hand end of the en 
larged view, Fig. 2. 
I have mentioned floss in connection with 
this device because it is a preferred material, 
as it may be inserted in very narrow Spaces 
between teeth. In fact it may be inserted 
where it would be impossible to insert cotton 
or linen thread. It is to be understood, how 
ever, that the invention is not limited to the 
use or employment of floSS. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patient 
1. A foss-holder, comprising a frame con 
sisting of a single strip of wire bent to form. 
a handle portion and two outwardly-extended 
portions, the end of each outwardly-extended 
portion being flared outward and provided 
with a transverse kerf, a lug attached to the 
base of each outwardly-extended portion, and 
a bobbin removably supported within the 
handle portion of the frame, Substantially as 
specified. 
2. A device of the class described, com 
prising a frame having outwardly-extended 
portions each provided at its end with two 
kerfs, one kerf being transverse to the other, 
buttons or lugs on said portions, and a holder 
for floss or similar material Supported in the 
frame, substantially as Specified. 
3. A floss-holder, comprising a frame bent 
to form a handle, spring-arms extended from 
said handle portion and having inwardly-ex 
tended bosses, a bobbin between said arms 
and having a central opening to receive the 
bosses of the arms, and the Outwardly-ex 
tended ends of the frame provided with means 
to engage foss or the like, Substantially as 
specified. 
JOHN D. CUTTER, 
Witnesses: 
JNO. M. RITTER, 
C. R. FERGUSON, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566767.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 566,767. 
F. O. JERRAM. 
TAKE-UP FOR SEWING MACHINES. 
lyve/for 
A Zezezic (7.767 rezze. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERIC O. JERRAM, OF LIVERPOOL, ENGLAND. 
TAKE UP FOR SEWiNG MACH NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 566,767, dated September 1, 1896. 
Application flea February 3, 1892, Serial No. 420,181 (No model.) Patented in England June 18, 1891, No. 10,350, 
5 
C 
To atti, ution, it ju?tif concei'i. 
Beit known that I, FREDERIC OLDERSHAW 
JERRAM, a subject of the Queen of Great Brit 
ain, and a resident of No. 14 Lower Breck 
Road, Liverpool, in the county of Lancaster, 
England, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Take-Ups for Sewing 
Machines, (for which a patent was obtained 
in Great Britain, No. 10,350, dated June 18, 
1891) of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to an attachment for 
sewing-machines, and has more especially for 
its object a take-up device to draw upon the 
thread and take up its slack to tighten the 
stitch while the needle is rising or resting at 
its highest point. 
By my invention I take up the slack be 
tween the needle and the top of the work or 
the presser-foot, and thereby overcome the 
disadvantage of having to draw the thread 
backward and forward through the eye. 
My improvement consists in novel features 
of construction hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In order that my invention may be fully 
understood, I will proceed to describe it with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
which the invention is shown applied, by way 
of example, to a sewing-machine of the rota 
tory hook lock-stitch type, but it must be un 
derstood that the invention is not limited to 
this type of sewing-machine alone, as it may 
also be used in Connection with a shuttle or 
other lock-stitch sewing-machine. 
Figures 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are elevations of the 
forward end of a sewing-machine, showing the 
various positions the take-up device assumes 
during the cycle of its operations, Fig. I also 
showing the cam and lever mechanism by 
which such device may operated. Fig. 6 is a 
perspective view of a part of the arm and the 
head of a sewing-machine, showing a rear 
view of the take-up device. Fig. 6 is a detail 
enlarged view of the dart-shaped claw and 
part of the right-angle extension of the take-up 
arm. Fig. 7 is a detail perspective view of 
the needle-guide. 
A is the cloth-plate; B the head, and B the 
arm, of the framework; B', the main shaft; 
C, the presser-foot; D, the needle; D", the 
complementary stitch - forming mechanism, 
and E the pivoted vibratory or Swinging 
take-up arm, having a right-angle extension 
E", formed with a dart-shaped claw e above 
the work, but below the point of the needle 
D when the latter is raised, through which 
passes the needle-thread. The take-up arm 
is pivoted at b to the inner side of the head. 
The extension has a tapered or sloped outer 
edge e', so that the thread shall slide along the 
extension into the dart-shaped claw with the 
arm Eon the inner side of the thread, as shown. 
in Fig. 4. Fis the vertically-reciprocating nee 
dle-bar; G, the disk, formed with a cam-groove 
g in its inner face and mounted on the main 
shaft and operating the Swinging take-up arm 
E through certain connections to be herein 
after described. The cam-groove is so formed 
that during a part of the movement of the 
needle the take-up arm Eremains stationary, 
while during the remaining part of the nee 
dile's movement the motion of the take-up arm. 
is accurately timed to give out the needle 
thread for the rotating hook I to carry over 
the bobbin of the complementary stitch-form 
ing mechanism and afterward to draw upon 
the thread to take up the slack and complete 
the stitch. 
II is a lever pivoted at b' to the inner side 
of the head, and H" is a link connecting the 
lever H with the take-up arm beneath it for 
communicating the motion of the disk to the 
take-up arm E, the lever II having a pin h 
working in the cam-groove g of the disk, and 
the link II providing a connecting-bar be 
tween the lever H and the take-up arm E. 
J is a tension-disk arranged to rise and fall 
in unison with the needle-bar. 
I is the point of the revolving hook for seiz 
ing the needle-thread and throwing its loop 
over the circular bobbin containing the un 
der thread, the dotted lines showing the cir 
cular path of the hook. 
JK is a vertical guide-bar secured to the head 
for preventing the needle from being bent by 
the tension of the thread when the take-up 
arm E is swung sidewise. The end of this 
guide-bar has a horizontal U-shaped piecek, 
(see Fig. 7,) through which the needle and its 
thread are adapted to pass. The guide-bar 
is secured to the head B of the machine or to 
the presser-bar C. 
It will be seen, by reference to Fig. 5, that 
the thread passes through this U-shaped 
90 
2 
566,76? 
pass beneath the needle, as shown in Fig. 4, 
in which position the dart-shaped claw of the 
arm Stands clear of the thread. The needle 
has now passed its highest point and is be 
ginning to descend. While in this position 
the loop is ready to be cast off the hook I. As 
Soon, therefore, as the loop is cast off the hook 
and passed over the bobbin or spool the take 
up arm E moves rapidly back as the needle 
descends, drawing the loop upward and com 
pleting the stitch, as shown in Fig. 5. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
A sewing-machine comprising a swinging 
take-up arm E, having a right-angle exten 
sionE' formed with a tapered or sloping outer 
edge e' and a dart-shaped clawe, the vertical 
guide-bar Khaving a horizontal U-shaped 
piecek and a heelk' beneath which the needle 
thread is drawn downward and laterally by 
said claw, and mechanism for operating the 
take-up arm to swing it back and forth be 
neath the needle-bar; substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
FREDERIC O. JERRAM. 
35 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
G. C. DYMOND, 
W. H. BEESTON. 
O 
piece, and the tendency is for the thread to 
pull the needle downward under the heel k' 
of the guide rather than laterally. The 
guide K, therefore, resists the lateral pull of 
the take-up arm and overcomes whatever 
tendency may exist to bend the needle. The 
bobbin is not shown, and certain other parts 
common to sewing-machines are omitted in 
order not to complicate the drawings. 
The mode of action is as follows: The ma 
chine being put into motion, the needle de 
scends, passing through the material and car 
rying the bight of the thread through the ma 
terial. The positions of the various parts 
with the needle at its lowest dead-point and 
beginning to rise are represented in Fig. 1, in 
which the take-up arm E is raised to its high 
est position, having taken up the slack in the 
thread, and the point of the rotating hook I 
is approaching to enter the loop of the needle 
thread. As the needle rises and the rotating 
hook rotates, the take-up arm Ebegins to move 
toward the needle-bar and in doing so slack 
ens the thread to form the loop, which is im 
mediately engaged by the point of the hook 
I, as shown in Fig. 2. The hook now pulls 
and expands the loop of the needle-thread, 
which the take-up arm E still further moves 
forward and gives a relative amount of thread 
(see Fig. 3) to be carried over the bobbin. A 
little further motion causes the take-up arm 
E to give out the whole of the slack thread 
and its dart-shaped claw and extension to 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566867.txt	(No Model.) 
E. PR, AEGER. 
m 
YARDSTICK CAICULATOR, 
No. 566,867, 
Patented Sept, l, 
 
 
 
Q 
SY S. 
s. 
S. 
Yaap 
376es Attorneys 
3y 
prpcys, 
 
SiskonkSSS 
love plor 
Azeeze/Z 22e2e.7 
 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EWALD PRAEGER, OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS. 
YARD ST CK - CALCUATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 566,867, dated September 1, 1896. 
Application filed November 29, 1895, Serial No. 570,515, (No model.) 
25 
claims. 
O 
- 
- 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, EWALDPRAEGER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at San An 
tonio, in the county of Bexar and State of 
Texas, have invented a new and useful Yard 
stick-Calculator, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to a calculating-yard 
stick adapted for use in connection with the 
dry goods or any other business in which 
goods are sold by linear measurement, the 
object in view being to provide, in connec 
tion with a linear measuring scale or rule, an 
indicating device provided with a plurality 
of price-scales having relation to the measur 
ing-scale and adapted to indicate the price of 
a given length of an article at a given price 
per unit of measure, and also adapted to in 
dicate the length of an article of a given 
price which may be sold for a given amount. 
Further objects and advantages of this in 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a measuring device constructed in 
accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
transverse sectional view of the same. Fig. 
3 is a partial longitudinal section. Fig. 4 is 
a perspective view of a portion of a measur 
ing device, showing a slightly-modified con 
struction. Fig. 5 is a transverse section of 
the device shown in Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is a plan 
view of a portion of the adjustable indicator. 
The same numerals of reference indicate 
the same or corresponding parts in all the fig 
ures of the drawings. 
1 designates a measuring scale or rule, 
which, in the construction illustrated, consists 
of a yardstick recessed to form a hollow case, 
in the cavity or interior of which is arranged 
an indicating device 2. In one of the longi 
tudinal walls of the hollow casing, contigu 
ous to the measuring scale or rule, is formed 
an inspection-slot 3, through which the indi 
cating device may be viewed, and whereby 
the numerals on said indicating device, which 
represent different prices per yard or other 
unit of measurement, may be brought con 
tiguous to the measuring scale or rule. 
In the construction illustrated in Figs, 1 to 
3, inclusive, the indicating device consists of 
rollers or drums 4 and 5, mounted at their ex 
tremities in bearings 6 in the end walls of 
the casing and provided contiguous to the 
end walls with milled thumb-wheels 7, or 
other means for turning the rolls or drums, 
said thumb-wheels projecting through short 
transverse slots in the upper side of the cas 
ing and extending sufficiently above the outer 
surface of the casing to enable them to be 
moved by sliding a finger transversely across 
the surface of the casing. To these rolls or 
drums are secured the opposite edges of a 
continuous web 8, provided upon one or both 
surfaces with a plurality of parallel longitu 
dinal lines, between which are arranged nu 
merals in progressive order and disposed at 
different intervals in the different spaces. 
Either one of the price-scales thus formed be 
tween two contiguous parallel lines on the 
webbing may be exposed through the inspec 
tion-slot in the casing adjacent to the linear 
measuring-scale, the opposite edges of the 
web being reeled upon either roller or drum, 
as necessary to bring the required price-scale 
into view. 
Various systems of arranging the numer 
als in the several price-scales may be adopted, 
but that which I have shown in the drawings 
is as follows: In Fig. 6 I have shown a plu 
rality of different scales designated a b c, &c., 
and located, respectively, between contiguous 
parallel lines, whereby contiguous scales are 
distinguishably separated. Each scale is 
prepared for a given price per yard, and the 
yard is divided into a number of intervals 
corresponding with the units of currency in 
that price. For instance, a scale prepared for 
articles sold at twelve cents a yard is formed 
by dividing a yard represented by the length 
of the web shown in Fig. 6 into twelve equal 
intervals, the intervals being distinguished 
by numerals from 1 to 11, arranged 
progressively or consceutively upon the web 
bing between two contiguous parallel lines, 
as shown at f. Thus the length of a yard is 
divided into twelve equal spaces, and the 
length of an article, of which the price is 
twelve cents per yard, equal to one of these 
spaces, or equal to the interval between two 
consecutive numerals in the Scale, is Worth 
one cent. Thus when eight cents Worth of 
55 
75 
95 
do 
35 
45 
 
$66,887 
50 
55 
an article of which the price is twelve cents 
per yard is to be sold the length of that ar 
ticle at the given price will be designated by 
the mark upon the measuring scale or rule 
opposite the numeral8 on the price-scale, or 
from the left-hand end of the scale 1 to the 
numeral S. In the same way, if a length of 
an article at a given price, as, for instance, 
twelve cents per yard, is required, said length 
being less than a yard, as one-half a yard, the 
desired length of the article will be indicated 
by the numeral 6 on the price-scale. In the 
same way a price-scale prepared for articles 
sold at fifteen cents per yard is formed by 
dividing the length of the yard into fifteen 
equal parts designated, respectively, by nul 
merals arranged progressively in the space 
between two contiguous parallel lines on the 
web, and by bringing the desired price-scale 
into view through the inspection-slot in the 
casing of the rule the desired length of an 
article for a given amount which is sold at a 
designated price per yard and the price of an 
article measuring less than a yard at a given 
rate per yard may be determined without cal 
culation. 
In the modified form of my invention, which 
is illustrated in Figs. 4 and 5, the price-indi 
cating web is reeled in opposite directions 
upon the two rolls or drums, and both sides 
or surfaces of the web are utilized for price 
Scales, thus multiplying the number of scales 
which it is possible to employ in connection 
with a yardstick. When both sides of the 
web are provided with price-indicating scales, 
it is necessary to employ a longitudinal slot 
for each roll or drum, as indicated at 9 and 
10, respectively, in Figs. 4 and 5. 
Various changes in the form, proportion, 
and the minor details of construction may be 
resorted to without departing from the spirit 
or sacrificing any of the advantages of this 
invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. A linear measuring device or rule com 
prising a hollow bar, and a price-indicating 
device having parallel longitudinally-dis 
posed rolls or drums approximately equal in 
length with the bar and a continuous web 
secured at its opposite edges to the rolls or 
drums and provided with a plurality of price 
indicating scales arranged in accordance with 
different prices per unit of measurement and 
disposed parallel with the linear measuring 
device, either price-scale being adapted to be 
exposed by the rotation of the rolls or drums, 
substantially as specified. 
2. A linear measuring device or rule com 
prising a hollow bar and provided contiguous 
to its measuring-scale with a longitudinal 
inspection-slot, a price-indicator arranged 
within the bar and consisting of parallel lon 
gitudinally-disposed rolls or drums approxi 
mately equal in length with the bar and a 
connecting flexible web secured at its oppo 
site edges, respectively, to the rolls or drums, 
said web carrying a plurality of price-indi 
cating scales prepared in accordance with 
different prices per unit of linear measure 
ment and disposed parallel with the rolls or 
drums whereby either price-scale may be ex 
posed through said inspection-slot, and means 
for adjusting the rolls to expose the desired 
price-scale, substantially as specified. 
3. A linear measuring device or rule hav 
ing a hollow bar, a price-indicating device con 
sisting of parallel rollers or drums mounted 
in the cavity of the bar and connected by a 
continuous flexible web bearing price-scales, 
either of which may be exposed through an 
inspection-slot in one wall of the casing, and 
means for turning the rolls or drums to ex 
pose the desired price-scale, said means con 
sisting of thumb-wheels 7 fixed to the rolls 
or drums and exposed at their upper sides 
through transverse slots in a wall of the cas 
ing, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
EWALID PRAEGEER. 
Witnesses: 
E. C. REICH, 
J. W. RICHARDSON. 
o 
75 
9o 
1cd 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US566967.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 566,967. 
C, G, CURTIS, 
ELASTIC FLUID TURBINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Sept. 1, 1896, 
sa 
. 
E 
 
'Tis s 
 
S 
SN 
N N 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
 
NVENTOR: 
/S' / is 4/orneys 
(No Model.) 
No. 566,967. 
C. G. CURTIS, 
ELASTIC FLUID TURBINE. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept, l, 1896. 
N 
Sawaa 
d 
SNU 
 
S 3 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
3 
 
WITNESSES: 
at 64 
(No Model.) 
C. G. CURTIS, 
ELASTIC, FIUID TURBINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
No. 566,967. 
Patented Sept, l, 1896, 
- - -nnamma------......A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
% N 
 
 
o 
--Test s 
& 2 
SS 
A 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
W 
NN 
 
 
 
NNY 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
-6 af.-64 
w 
 
NVENTOR: 
C4-4, & 6-7: 
Ay his 4ttorneys 
THE NORRIS PETERS co. PHOTO-LITHo...washington, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
C. C. CURTIS. 
5 Sheets-Sheet, 4. 
No. 566,967, 
ELASTIC FLUID TURBINE. 
Patented Sept, l, 1896, 
 
 
WITNESSES : 
- 6 -64, 
/z <2% 
Z-Ren 
2 z12ASW 
2 
R2 
2 
NVENTOR: 
6-4, & 6 a. 
17- 6 - - - 
Ay his 4ttorney 6 
 
 
 
 
 
PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo...washingtoN.D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES G. CURTIS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE CURTIS 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELASTIC - FLUID TURBNE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 566,967, dated September 1, 1896. 
Application filed January 2, 1896, Serial No. 574,031, (No model.) 
55 
To (till tufuoi), it inctly conceiv. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES G. CURTIS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York city, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a certain new and useful 
Improvement in Elastic-Fluid Turbines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to apparatus for de 
veloping power from steam or other elastic 
fluid under pressure, wherein the energy of 
pressure is converted into energy of velocity 
Or - is vict, and is transformed into mechan 
ical power by being directed against a portion 
of the Vanes of a complete circular range of 
rotating vanes or by being directed succes 
sively against a portion of two or more sets of 
such vanes. In all elastic-fluid turbines me 
chanical power is developed by utilizing the 
vis vil'C of the fluid to impart motion to the 
blades or vanes of the turbine. The princi 
ples underlying the successful solution of the 
problem of developing mechanical power by 
means of such turbines in an efficient, prac 
tical, and commercially-satisfactory manner 
have been embodied by me in methods and 
apparatus upon which I propose to apply 
for Letters Patent, Serial Nos. 575,244 and 
575,679. In all successful mechanical com 
binations by which this result can be obtained 
with steam or other elastic fluid the size, 
form, and relative proportions of all the parts 
which unite to form the passage-way through 
which the fluid passes from the source of sup 
ply under maximum pressure to the exhaust 
are necessarily adapted to permit expansion 
of the fluid and conversion of its pressure 
into Velocity and to convert the maximum 
amount of ; is vival into rotary motion of the 
Vanes during its passage from inlet to ex 
haust. Having planned and constructed such 
an apparatus in a manner to produce the 
greatest possible mechanical power when the 
maximum volume of fluid is admitted thereto, 
the problem of governing such a machine effi 
ciently presents itself, that is to say, of in 
Suring the same relatively high efficiency un 
der all variations of load. This has nothere 
tofore been accomplished. My invention has 
for its object the solution of this problem. 
For the majority of commercial purposes re 
quiring a stationary plant an elastic-fluid tur 
bine, like a steam-engine, must be made to 
maintain a practically constant speed under 
all variations of load. My new method of 
and apparatus for governing is based upon 
the principle that if the volume of the jet of 
the elastic fluid flowing through a turbine is 
made to vary, and at the same time the ve 
locity of the jet remain constant, the mechan 
ical power developed will vary as the volume 
of the jet varies, and therefore the efficiency 
of the turbine will be substantially the same 
at all loads. Furthermore, if the volume of 
the jet is made to vary substantially as the 
load varies, but the Velocity of the jet is con 
stant, the speed of rotation of the turbine will 
remain constant. On the other hand I have 
found that if both the velocity and volume of 
the jet at the point or points where it strikes 
the vanes of the turbine are varied the speed 
of rotation of the turbine will vary, or if the 
speed of rotation is under these conditions 
maintained constant a relatively larger vol 
ume of jet will be required to maintain this 
speed of rotation at light than at heavy loads, 
and in either case there will be a loss in effi 
ciency. 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
governing mechanism which is so designed as 
to vary the volume of the jet to any desired 
extent without varying its velocity at the 
point or points where it acts upon the mov 
able element or elements of the turbine, that 
is to say, where this velocity is converted into 
mechanical power. This I do by maintain 
ing the same relative ploportions between 
the parts of the expansion passage-way while 
varying the size of the steam-inlet, i.e., the 
go 
volume of the jet at its entrance to the appa 
ratus from the source of supply. With the 
oldest and best-known form of expansion-noz 
| 
zle, i.e., one having diverging sides and grad 
ually-enlarging cross-sections, variation of the 
size of the smaller end only, i. e., of the vol 
ume of the jet admitted to the nozzle, will be 
attended with variation of the velocity of the 
jet at the larger end, for the velocity of the 
jet at the larger end will depend upon the 
amount of expansion that has Occurred at 
that point, and if the nozzle is designed to 
permit full expansion at the larger end when 
the smaller end is wide open full expansion 
95 
7 O 
75 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
566,967 
O 
25 
35 
45 
will occur before the jet reaches that point, if 
the smaller end is partly closed, and the con 
sequence will be that the cross-section of the 
larger end will be too large to convey the re 
duced volume of fluid at the proper velocity 
and a reduced velocity at this point will foll 
low. As the 'is viva or energy contained in 
the moving fluid varies as the square of its 
velocity, a comparatively slight loss of ve 
locity results in a very considerable loss of 
power. In order, therefore, that the degree 
of expansion and therefore the velocity of the 
jet may be constant at the larger or delivery 
end under variations in the size of the smaller 
end, it is essential that the cross-section of the 
larger end shall at all times bear the same 
proportion to the cross-section of the smaller 
end and the rate of cross-sectional increase 
between the two remain constant. Whether 
this or some other form of expansion-nozzle 
is used, or whether the expansion is allowed 
to take place partly in the stationary pas 
sages and partly in the movable or secondary 
elements of the apparatus, the essential thing 
is that variation in the fluid-inlet, i.e., in the 
volume of fluid admitted from the source of 
supply, shall be accompanied by such varia 
tion in the controlling parts of the expansion 
passage-way through which the fluid-jet 
passes to the exhaust (i.e., those parts where 
the fluid acts upon the movable elements of 
the turbine and where for that reason it is 
important to maintain the proper Velocity or 
velocities) as shall maintain at all times the 
same proportions between the various parts 
and the fluid-inlet. Under these conditions 
the volume of the jet will vary, but its effect 
ive or virtual velocity at each point where it 
acts will remain substantially constant under 
variations in volume. The apparatus con 
structed by me embodying these principles 
of governing show the marked improvement 
in efficiency, economy, and commercially-sat 
isfactory practice which is a condition prece 
dent to any extensive use of steam or elastic 
fluid turbines as prime movers. 
In carrying out my invention in connection 
with a turbine having only one set of vanes 
or buckets to which motion is imparted by 
the is vival of the fluid-jet the conversion of 
the pressure of the fluid into velocity should 
preferably precede its impact with that por 
lion of each vane which is designed to con 
vert such velocity into mechanical power. 
The means for obtaining such conversion may 
be either the old diverging nozzle or an im 
proved expansion-nozzle devised by me, in 
which the fluid issues from a contracted in 
let or nozzle into a larger passage whose cross 
section may be constant and equal to the 
volume of the jet when the desired expansion 
has taken place. Describing this part of the 
apparatus as the expansion passage or noz 
zle, I make it adjustable, so that the cross 
section of the fluid-inlet may be varied and 
so that every variation thereof shall be ac 
companied by simultaneous variations in the 
other parts of the expansion-passage and the 
propolitions between them remain constant. 
The adjustable element may be moved by 
hand, but of course an automatic adjustment 
by means of a speed-governor or otherwise is 
necessary for most purposes. The adjust 
ability may be obtained in different ways. In 
the case of the diverging form of nozzle one 
side thereof may be adjustable toward and 
away from the other side, or both sides may 
be adjustable toward and away from each 
other, or the single nozzle may be divided into 
a number of separate expanding-passages, 
more or fewer of which may be closed by a 
movable gate. In case one side of the noz 
zle is made adjustable, this adjustable side 
may be a piece having a movement in a right 
line, in which case the proportion between 
the inlet and the discharging ends will be 
roughly maintained, but only within narrow 
limits of inlet variation, unless the nozzle be 
made with its movable side parallel to the one 
opposite and the other two sides diverging, 
(but so that the cross-section of the nozzle 
shall be a parallelogram,) the increase of cross 
section being thus obtained and the propor 
tions maintained regardless of the adjusted 
distance between the parallel sides; or the 
proportion may be maintained with precision 
by pivoting the adjustable element of the 
nozzle or moving it in curved guides, so that 
it will have a greater rate of motion at the 
discharging end than at the inlet end of the 
nozzle, the rate of motion being proportional 
to the respective cross-sectional areas at these 
points. 
In applying my invention to the case of an 
expansion-passage of other than the diverg 
ing form I make my expansion-passage prac 
tically of two parts, (one being a contracted 
inlet or nozzle and the other a larger dis 
charge end,) and Iconstruct these parts so that 
by means of movable walls or parts the cross 
sectional areas of both the inlet and discharge 
may be caused to vary simultaneously and 
proportionally. 
In applying my invention to a turbine hav 
ing two or more sets of rotating vanes in which 
the vis viva is utilized and an inlet nozzle or 
passage and One or more stationary or rotat 
ing intermediate expanding - passages the 
principle underlying correct governing is the 
same. The whole passage-Way through which 
the fluid is passing at any instant from the 
supply to the exhaust may be considered as 
made up of sections or portions in which (1) 
pressure is converted into vis viva, (2) the di 
rection of flow of the jet is changed, as re 
quired, and (3) the is viva is converted so 
far as possible into mechanical power. Any 
Section may perform only one of these func 
tions or it may combine two or more of them. 
With reference to governing in accordance 
with my invention it is necessary that all 
controlling cross-sections of the passage-Way, 
considered as a whole, should vary simulta 
neously with every change at the inlet end 
75 
95 
ICO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
566,967 
8 
O 
and maintain at all times the same propor 
tions to each other. With respect to any por 
tion of the passage-way which is made up of 
Spaces between vanes or buckets, the adjust 
able element of the passage-way which im 
mediately precedes will determine the num 
ber of Vanes to which the jet is admitted at 
any instant by the cross-section of its dis 
charge end at that instant. Every portion 
of the passage-Way not made up of spaces be 
tween vanes will have an adjustable side 
whose movement, whether on a pivot or slid 
ing, &c., will effect the proportionate varia 
tion required, and simultaneity of variation 
will be obtained by connecting all the adjust 
able sides to appropriate mechanism, where 
by all will move with every movement, given to 
the adjustable side at the inlet, whether by 
an automatic speed-controlling device or oth 
erwise. Another class of turbines may be 
considered, in which the passage-way through 
which the steam or fluid passes may be re 
garded as divided into a series of passage 
Ways each in some sense complete in itself, 
the first beginning at the inlet from the main 
steam supply and ending at an exhaust-pipe 
leading from the first shell to the beginning 
of the second passage-Way, this exhaust-pipe 
Serving as a Supply-pipe to the second pas 
Sage-way, and so on, the apparatus being di 
vided up into parts, each operating under a 
lower initial pressure than the one before it. 
In this case my invention does not require any 
variation in the various exhaust-pipes thus 
described, but only that each of the series of 
passage-ways shall be varied throughout si 
multaneously and proportionally with each 
variation of its own inlet, and that all the in 
lets after the first shall vary simultaneously 
and proportionally with the one opening from 
the main steam supply. The application of 
my invention to this case is similar to that 
described above, except that what I have 
called the exhaust-pipes' (regarding them 
now as portions or sections of the entire steam 
passage) are not varied, but remain constant, 
the Velocity of the steam or fluid being at 
such points trifling and unaffected by them 
in any Way. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part hereof, Figure I is a side elevation of 
a simple or non-compounded turbine having 
my invention applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a 
sectional view of the same apparatus through 
the nozzle and exhaust-passage with the 
Vanes developed in a horizontal plane and 
showing the well-known diverging nozzle 
With my invention applied thereto. Fig. 3 is 
a diagram indicating a new construction of 
expansion-nozzle or expansion intermediate 
Stationary passage. Fig. 4 is a section simi 
lar to Fig. 2, showing a different construc 
tion of the adjustable element of the nozzle 
and illustrating the invention applied to a 
compound turbine having a divided or sec 
tional adjustable intermediate stationary 
passage. Fig. 5 is a view similar to Fig. 4 
and of the same character of apparatus, show 
ing a different method of adjusting the noz 
zle. Fig. 6 is a sectional view similar to Fig. 
5, illustrating the employment of a divided 
or sectional nozzle and a single or undivided 
adjustable intermediate stationary passage. 
Fig. 7 is a sectional view of an expansion 
nozzle or stationary passage, showing a dif 
ferent method of adjustment. Fig. 8 is a 
side elevation illustrating the construction 
of Fig. 7 applied to the nozzle and inter 
mediate passages of a compound turbine hav 
ing a series of connected movable elements 
located in separate shells; and Fig. 9 is a 
radial section of the apparatus of Fig. 8, 
taken on a line running through the center 
of the steam-passages. 
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, A is a steam 
tight shell, within which is mounted, upon a 
shaft B, a disk C, carrying on its periphery a 
complete circular range of curved vanes a. 
Entering one side of the shell A is the de 
livery-nozzle D, and from the other side of 
the shell leads the exhaust-opening E, which 
may open into the air or be connected with a 
condenser or other means for producing less 
than atmospheric pressure. Leading to the 
nozzle D is the pipe F from the steam-boiler or 
other source of elastic fluid under pressure. 
The nozzle Dis of the well-known type having 
diverging sides and gradually-enlarging cross 
sections between its throat or receiving end 
b and its discharging end c. The purpose of 
this nozzle is to convert the energy of pressure 
into energy of velocity or vis viva. The rela 
tion between the discharging end c and the 
receiving end b is determined by the condi 
tions of velocity which it is desired to obtain 
at the delivery end of the nozzle. It is highly 
important that the velocity at which the 
steam is designed to be delivered to or to act 
upon the vanes should be maintained practi 
cally the same, whatever volume of steam is 
passing, because it is by means of the Veloc 
ity that the machine does its work, and to do 
this it is necessary that the proportions be 
tween the two ends of the nozzle, whatever 
they are in the particular design of the ma 
chine, should be maintained substantially 
constant, and it is this which my invention 
is designed to accomplish. In order to di 
minish the volume or quantity of steam flow 
ing, and at the same time obtain approxi 
mately the same efficiency in the operation 
of the apparatus, one of the diverging sides 
of the nozzle D is formed by a plate G, which 
slides in suitable ways d within the auxiliary 
shelle, an opening e' being made from the 
steam-pipe F into the space within the shell 
e to more nearly balance the pressure on the 
plate G. The sliding movement of the plate 
G is secured by means of a rod f, passing 
through a stuffing-box. g. This rod may be 
connected by a link h, with a bell-crank lever 
H, which lever is connected at its other end 
with the sliding collar i of a centrifugal 
governor located within the wheel I, so that 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
- 
566,967 
IO 
25 
45 
the adjustment of the plate G will be pro 
duced automatically by a small percentage 
of variation in the speed of the turbine. It 
will be understood that by making one of the 
diverging sides of the nozzle adjustable from 
end to end of the nozzle the relations be 
tween the points b and C will be roughly 
maintained within narrow limits of inlet va 
riation and the velocity of the steam as it is 
discharged from the nozzle will be approxi 
mately the same for all volumes of the steam 
jet within a limited range of adjustment of 
the nozzle. If, however, the adjustable side 
be made parallel with the opposite side of 
the nozzle and the expansion is obtained by 
the divergence of the other two sides, (the 
form in cross-section being a parallelogram,) 
any degree of adjustment can be obtained 
without changing the desired relations. The 
nozzle, instead of having regularly-diverging 
walls and gradually-increasing cross-sections, 
as illustrated in Fig. 2, may be made in a dif 
ferent form, such as, for example, the con 
struction illustrated diagrammatically in Fig. 
3, in which there is a contracted inlet or noz 
zle b of proper size and a larger discharging 
end c of proper size to give the desired ex 
pansion, the walls between these points be 
ing parallel; and it should be understood 
that I consider such construction to be an 
expansion nozzle or an expansion' in 
termediate passage within the meaning of 
that word as applied to such nozzles and pas 
This special form 
sages in this specification. 
of expansion-nozzle or intermediate station 
ary passage I propose to make the subject of 
a separate application for patent. 
Instead of adjusting the nozzle by means of 
a plate moving in a right line, as in Figs 1 
and 2, the end of this sliding plate may be 
a pivoted piece IK, having a curved tailpiece 
k, held to its curved seat by a spring l, and 
balanced by a steam-opening e', so that as the 
piece IK is pushed forward it will be turned 
on its pivot sufficiently to preserve with pre 
cision the relations between the receiving and 
discharging ends of the nozzle by giving it a 
greater rate of movement toward the other 
side of the nozzle at the discharging end c 
than at the receiving end b, these different 
rates of movement being proportional to the 
different cross-sectional areas at those points; 
or, as illustrated in Fig. 5, the adjustable 
piece K may be pivoted at a point sufficiently 
removed from the nozzle to preserve the 
proper relation by a pivotal movement of the 
piece. The somewhat different construction 
shown in Fig. 7 I consider an excellent form. 
In this the movable piece K slides on a curved 
seat and is moved forward and backward by 
means of a rack in, With which engages a pin 
ion in on a spindle O, extending through the 
side of the nozzle, or it may be moved by a 
sliding rod, as in other constructions shown. 
In Fig. 6 a construction of adjustable nozzle 
is shown wherein the nozzle is divided into a 
number of diverging sections by partitions 2), 
more or less of the sections of the nozzle being 
closed by a sliding gate L. 
In applying my invention to a compoundled 
turbine, the stationary intermediate passage 
(or each of them, if the compound turbine 
has more than two movable elements) is di 
vided into a number of sections by curved 
Vanes q, as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. This con 
struction secures an adjustment of the sta 
tionary passage simultaneously and propor 
tionally with the adjustment of the nozzle, 
because the number of the Sections of the sta 
tionary passage occupied by the steam-jet in 
passing from one set of movable vanes to 
another will depend upon the number of mov 
able vanes from which the jet is discharged, 
and that numberis in turn dependent upon the 
adjustment of the nozzle. I prefer, however, 
to provide a single or non-sectional interme 
diate passage M, and have one of its sides N. 
adjustable toward and away from the other 
side throughout the length of the passage, as 
shown in Fig. 6, or only at the discharging 
end of the passage, as shown in Fig. 8. In 
Fig. 6 the adjustable side N of the stationary 
passage Mis a separate piece, closing one side 
of the passage and moving between the par 
allel side walls toward and away from the 
other side of the passage, the movement being 
secured by a sliding rod which is preferably 
adjusted simultaneously with the adjustment 
of the nozzle. The construction illustrated 
in Figs. 8 and 9 is a compound turbine com 
posed of three movable elements O O' O, con 
tained in separate shells and connected to re 
ceive the flowing jet in succession by means 
of intermediate stationary passages P P', 
which are provided with adjustable discharg 
ing-nozzles of the character illustrated by 
Fig. 7. 
Q is the inlet-pipe from the steam-boiler, 
and Q is the exhaust - opening discharging 
into the air or connected with a condensel. 
The steam passes from the inlet Q to the vanes 
of the first turbine through a nozzle having 
an adjustable element like that illustrated 
in Fig. 7. The nozzle and the discharging 
ends of the intermediate passages are adapted 
to successively convert different portions of 
the pressure into velocity. The spindles O, 
whose inner ends carry the pinions for ad 
justing the movable pieces IK, as illustrated 
in Fig. 7, have on their outer ends pinions r, 
engaging with rack-bars R, which in turn 
engage with pinions S, connected together in 
any suitable Way, as by a single rack-bar S, 
whereby the adjustable elements of the ex 
pansion-mozzle and the expansion intermedi 
ate stationary passages may all be moved si 
multaneously and to the same extent. 
What I claim is 
1. In an elastic-fluid turbine, a governing 
or regulating mechanism causing variations 
in the volume of the fluid jet unaccompanied 
by Substantial variations in its velocity at the 
7 O 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II 5 
566,967 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
point or points where it acts upon the moving 
parts to develop mechanical power, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. In an elastic-fluid turbine, the combina 
tion. With one or more sets of moving vanes, 
and a passage delivering a fluid jet to such 
Vanes, of means for varying the volume of 
the fluid jet without substantial variation of 
its velocity at the point or points where it 
acts on the vanes, substantially as set forth. 
3. In an elastic-fluid turbine, the combina 
tion with one or more sets of moving vanes, 
and an eXpansion-passage converting pres 
sure into velocity and delivering a fluid jet 
to such vanes, of means for varying the Vol 
ume of the fluid jet without substantial Val 
riation of its velocity at the point or points 
where it acts on the vanes, substantially as 
Set forth. 
4. In an elastic-fluid turbine, the combina 
tion with a set of rotating vanes, of an ex 
pansion-nozzle or stationary passage deliver 
ing a fluid jet to a part of the vanes and act 
ing to convert pressure into velocity, such 
nozzle or passage being adjustable to vary 
the volume of the fluid jet while maintain 
ing approximately the relations between its 
receiving and discharging ends, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. In an elastic-fluid turbine, the combina 
tion with a set of rotating vanes, of an ex 
pansion nozzle or passage delivering a fluid 
jet to a part of the vanes and acting to con 
vert pressure into velocity, and an adjustable 
part forming one of the sides of the expan 
sion-nozzle at both its receiving and discharg 
ing ends, whereby the cross-sectional areas of 
the nozzle at its receiving and discharging 
ends may be varied while maintaining ap 
proximately the relation between such cross 
sectional areas, substantially as set forth. 
6. In an elastic-fluid turbine, an expansion 
delivery nozzle or passage, adjustable simul 
taneously at its receiving and discharging 
ends, substantially as Set forth. 
7. In an elastic-fluid turbine, an expansion 
delivery nozzle or passage, adjustable simul 
taneously at its receiving and discharging 
ends with a rate of variation proportional to 
the cross-sectional areas at Such ends, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
S. In an elastic-fluid turbine, the combina 
tion with a set of rotating vanes, of an ex 
pansion-nozzle or stationary passage deliver 
ing a fluid-jet to a part of the vanes and act 
ing to convert pressure into velocity, such 
expansion nozzle or passage being simultane 
ously adjustable at its receiving and dis 
charging ends with a rate of variation pro 
portional to the cross-sectional areas of such 
ends, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
9. In an elastic-fluid turbine, the combina 
tion with a set of rotating Vanes and an ex 
pansion nozzle or passage delivering a fluid 
jet to a portion of the vanes and acting to 
convert pressure into velocity, of an adjust 
able part for varying the cross-sectional areas 
of the expansion nozzle or passage simultane 
ously at the receiving and discharging ends 
thereof, which adjustable part has a different 
rate of variation at the two ends toward and 
away from the other side of the nozzle, such 
different rates of variation being proportional 
to the Cross-sectional areas at the two ends of 
the expansion nozzle or passage, substantially 
as Set forth. 
10. In a compound elastic-fluid turbine, the 
Combination. With movable Vanes and means 
for delivering the elastic fluid to the vanes 
tWO or more times in succession, of a govern 
ing or regulating mechanism causing varia 
tions in the volume of the elastic fluid unac 
companied by substantial variations in its 
Velocity throughout the fluid-passage of the 
turbine, substantially as set forth. 
ll. In a compound elastic-fluid turbine, the 
combination With two or more sets of rotat 
ing Vanes, of a nozzle and one or more inter 
mediate stationary passages, whereby a fluid 
jet is presented to a part only of the vanes of 
the sets in succession, said nozzle and inter 
mediate passage or passages being simultane 
Ously and proportionately adjustable in their 
cross-sectional areas, substantially as set 
forth. 
12. In a compound elastic-fluid turbine, the 
combination with two or more sets of rotat 
ing vanes, of an expansion-nozzle delivering 
a fluid-jet to a part of the vanes of the first 
Set, and One or more stationary intermediate 
passages conveying the fluid-jet from one set 
of rotating vanes to another, the area of the 
expansion-nozzle and of the intermediate pas 
sage or passages being simultaneously and 
proportionately adjustable, substantially as 
set forth. 
13. In a compound elastic-fluid turbine, the 
combination of a series (two or more) of ad 
justable expansion nozzles Ol' passages, re 
ceiving the fluid-jet successively and con 
verting pressure into Velocity, and two or 
more sets of rotating vanes to which the fluid 
jet is delivered successively by such nozzles 
or passages, substantially as set forth. . 
14. In a compound elastic-fluid turbine, the 
combination with two or more sets of rotat 
ing vanes, of an adjustable expansion-nozzle, 
one or more intermediate stationary passages 
having adjustable expansion discharging 
ends, and a connection between the adjust 
ing devices of the nozzle and intermediate pas 
sages whereby the adjustment of the nozzle 
and of the one or more intermediate passages 
will be effected simultaneously and propor 
tionately, substantially as set forth. 
15. In an elastic-fluid turbine, a governing 
or regulating mechanism acting to vary auto 
Imatically according to changes in load or 
speed the volume of the fluid unaccompanied 
by substantial variations in its Velocity at the 
point or points where it acts upon the mov 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
6 
566,96? 
ing parts to develop mechanical power, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
16. In an elastic-fluid turbine, an expansion 
delivery nozzle or passage adjustable simul 
taneously at its receiving and discharging 
ends, in combination with speed-governing 
mechanism controlling the adjustable ele 
ment of such nozzle or passage and effecting 
such adjustment automatically, substantially 
as set forth. 
This specification signed and witnessed 
this 31st day of December, 1895. 
CHARLES G. CURTIS. 
O 
Witnesses: 
EUGENE CONRAN, 
JOHN R. TAYLOR. 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567068.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE M. BERGEN, OF LEADVILLE, COLORADO. 
MINE RS KNFE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 567,068, dated September 1, 1896. 
Application filed March 27, 1896, 
Serial No. 585,078, (No model.) 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE M. BERGEN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Leadville, in the county of Lake and State of 
Colorado, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Miners' Knives; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, . 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a side view of 
a knife embodying the invention. Fig. 2 is 
an edge view of the same; and Fig. 3 is a 
side view with the blade partly closed, as in 
Operation. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
convenient pocket-knife for use by miners 
and others for the purpose of cutting the fuse 
employed in blasting and for securing there 
on the fulminate or exploding caps, which are 
necessary where giant-powder or other ex 
plosive is used which cannot be exploded by 
an ordinary fuse. 
It is the common practice among miners at 
present to cut the fuses to the desired length 
with ordinary knives, and after placing the 
cap thereon to secure it in place by indenting 
it upon the fuse. This is commonly done 
with the teeth or with the candlestick. 
The present invention is designed to pro 
vide a knife which, while adapted for gen 
eral use, is also provided with means for fa 
cilitating the cutting of the fuse and also for 
indenting the cap thereon to secure it in 
place. 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists in the novel construction and combina 
tion of parts, all substantially as hereinafter 
described, and pointed out in the appended 
claim. 
In the accompanying drawings the letter 
A designates the handle, and B the hinged 
blade, of a pocket-knife, which in general is 
similar to ordinary knives. 
45 
 
55 
?? 
65 
Formed in the upper edges of the handle, 
at each side of the groove or seat which re 
ceives the blade and a short distance from 
where the bladeishinged, are two transverse 
semicircular grooves or notches d b, while in 
the blade in position to register with the notch 
b is a notch c of similar form. Extending 
through the blade into the said notch e is a 
pin or punch pointf, and extending up into 
the groove or seat of the handle opposite the 
notches b and in line with the pin or punch 
pointf is a similar pin or punch point g. 
The knife is used as follows: The fuse to 
be cut is laid in the groove or notch a, and 
the knife-blade is closed down upon and 
through it. The cap is then placed upon the 
fuse, the blade is opened, and the cap is laid 
in the notches b. The blade is closed down. 
upon the cap and the two pins or punches f 
and g inset or indent the cap at opposite 
points against the fuse, which secures it in 
place. Owing to the fact that the notch c of 
the blade is very near the heel thereof it does 
not interfere with the use of the knife for 
general purposes. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
The herein - described pocket-knife for 
miners' use, the same consisting in a handle 
having in its upper edges, upon each side of 
the knife seat or groove, the transverse semi 
circular notches a and b, the notches a being 
of less diameter than the notches b, and a pin. 
g projecting into said knife seat or groove in. 
line with the notches b, in combination with a 
hinged blade having near its heel a semicircu 
lar notch c, adapted to register with the slots 
b and the pinfprojecting through the blade 
into the said notch, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
wn 
75 
85 
GEO. M. BERGEN. 
Witnesses: 
T. O'CoNNELL, 
A. S. WESTON, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567168.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 567,168, 
L. R. ROBERTS, 
AXLE LUBRICATOR, 
Patented Sept. 8, 1896, 
WITNESSES 
1 
INVENTOR 
% a ?ea-la. 
. 
-, 2'-6 7-4----- 
4-667 - 
RRS PETERs co, PHOTO-tTH). Ash NGON. D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LYMAN R. ROBERTS, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
AXLE LUBRICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Tetters Patent No. 567,168, dated September 8, 1896. 
Application filed August 8, 1895, 
Serial No, 558,638, (No model.) 
its periphery, leading to the oil-cup C. In 
this channel D is inserted a tube D', the outer 
end being closed, as shown at d. 
A wick E is inserted in the tube D' to af 
ford even distribution of the oil through the 
opening b. 
It will be readily understood that the oil, 
feeding from the oil-cup C by means of the 
wick, will pass out through the opening d 
and be distributed thinly and evenly over the 
entire Surface to be lubricated. 
What I claim is 
In an axle-lubricating device, the oil-cup 
located on the axle, the journal of the axle 
provided with a channel leading from said 
oil-cup near the periphery, and a slot through 
out the length of the journal opening said 
channel to the surface, a cylindrical tube 
provided with a narrow slot throughout its 
length inserted in said channel, the Walls of 
the chamber retaining the tube in position, 
and a wick held in Said tube with its free 
edges extending out through the slot in said 
tube, and the slot in the journal throughout 
the length of said journal, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
35 
45 
55 
LYMAN R, ROBERTS. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. FISK, 
S. E. THOMAS. 
To all, whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, LYMAN R. ROBERTS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at De 
troit, county of Wayne, State of Michigan, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provementin Axle-Lubricators; and I declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as willenable 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to axle-lubricators, 
and has for its object a cheap and efficient 
method of distributing the oil evenly over 
the entire surface which is to be lubricated. 
In the drawings which accompany this ap 
plication, Figure 1 is a perspective View of 
a portion of the axle, showing the bearing 
broken away, exposing the wick through the 
slot in the axle. Fig. 2 is a detail of the tube 
in perspective, one end of the tube being 
closed. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a por 
tion of the axle, showing the tube in position. 
Fig. 4 is a perspective view of a portion of 
the axle, showing the tube and Wick in posi 
tion. Fig. 5 is a side elevation of the axle with 
the bearing in section, showing the opening 
through which the oil passes by means of the 
Wick to the parts to be lubricated. 
In the drawings, A represents the axle; B, 
the box or bearing; C, the oil-cup. 
The axle is provided with a channel D near 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567268.txt	 
 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
M. B. FOY & F. M. LEAVITT. 
PAPER FEEDING MAOHINE, 
(No Model.) 
No. 567,268, 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
N 
B5. SL 
y i. ISOE 
ILI: 
 
2 S. HU 
GSS 
Ma' 
N. 
is 
III) "u. 
 
 
Azorveys 
4 sheets-sheet 2. 
M. B. FOY & F. M. LEAVITT. 
PAPER FEEDING MACHINE. 
Patented Sept. 8, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 567,268, 
 
 
s 
NS 
N 
Ny 
 
's SSS NEE 
4. ?a SE l S. 
s 
\ 
Is GTi, 
le 
esses : 
V, 
w Z C/27%- 
2%ty-& 4-4 
 
o 
2. 
c 
/ Z 424-26 
/7orveys, 
- Zvezzars. 
 
No. 567 
268, 
Patented Sept. 8, 1896. 
 
2? 
 
 
  
 
/2273. 
Zvenors 
Zy 424-v-2%--> Azzorreeys. 
(No Model.) 
4 sheets-sheet 4. 
M. B. FOY & F. M. LEAWITT, 
PAPER FEEDING MACHINE. 
No. 567,268. 
 
Patented Sept. 8, 1896. 
K. NE 
1. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL B. FOY, OF NEW YORK, AND FRANK M. LEAVITT, OF BROOKLYN, 
NEW YORK, ASSIGNORS TO THE ECONOMIC MACHINE COMPANY, OF NEW 
YORK, N. Y. 
PAPER-FEEDING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 567,268, dated September 8, 1896. 
Application filed September 23, 1895, Serial No. 563,414, (No model.) 
55 
75 
: 
- 
25 
15 erated upon. 
To all whom, it may concern: . 
Be it known that we, MICHAEL B. FOY, of 
the city and county of New York, and FRANK 
M.LEAVITT, of Brooklyn, Kings county, State 
5 of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvementsin Paper-Feeding Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. . 
This invention relates to a paper-feeding 
machine which is more particularly designed 
Io for feeding sheets of paper automatically from 
a pile to a lithographic printing-press, al 
though the improvements herein described 
may also be used for feeding sheets of paper 
to other machines in which sheet-paper is op 
In feeding to a lithographic press sheets 
which have previously been printed upon in 
One or more colors only the marginal portions 
of the sheets can be operated upon for feed 
2O ing the sheets, in order to avoid injuring the 
imprint on the same or causing the sheets to 
stick together, which otherwise would occur 
if the bodies of the printed portions of the 
sheets were pressed or rubbed. 
One object of our invention is to provide 
efficient and reliable feeding devices which 
operate only on the marginal portions of the 
sheets and whereby the sheets are properly 
carried from the pile to the tape mechanism. 
3o Another object of our invention is to pro 
vide means for keeping the roller of the buck 
ling-finger clean and preventing said roller 
from becoming smooth or glazed. 
Another object of our invention is to im 
35 prove the front guides against which the pile 
In the accompanying drawings, consisting 
... of four sheets, Figure 1 is a fragmentary 
transverse section of our improved paper 
4o feeding machine, looking at the front side of 
the same. Figs. 2 and 3 are vertical longitu 
dinal sections thereof in lines 2 2 and 33, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a fragmentary transverse 
Section of the buckling-finger and the abra 
45 sion-plate, taken in line 44, Fig. 2, and show 
ing the finger in contact with the plate. Fig. 
5 is a vertical longitudinal section, on an en 
larged scale, in line 55, Fig. 1, showing the 
position of the gripper preparatory to grasp 
5o ing the front edge of the sheet. Fig. 6 is a 
of sheets is placed. 
- 
. 
 
fragmentary elevation of the gripper, show 
ing the same closed upon the sheet. Fig. 7 
is a vertical longitudinal section of the grip 
per, showing the gripper opened for releasing 
the sheet. Figs. 8 and 9 are vertical trans 
verse sections in lines 88 and 99, Fig. 5, re 
spectively. Fig. 10 is a horizontal section in 
line 10 10, Fig. 5. 
Fig. 11 is a sectional top 
plan view of the buckling mechanism of our 
improved paper-feeding machine. Fig. 12 is 
a vertical transverse section in line 1212, Fig. 
11. Fig. 13 is a vertical section in line 1313, 
Fig. 11, showing the cam for moving the front 
guides. Fig. 14 is a detached front elevation 
of the buckling-finger, its elevating rock-arm, 
and the cam for actuating same. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the several figures. 
A. A represent the side standards of the 
main frame; b b', a pair of longitudinal Sup 
porting-bars secured to the standards; b, the 
brackets connecting the front ends of each 
pair of longitudinal supporting-bars; b, the 
intermediate brackets or cross-heads connect 
ing the longitudinal supporting-bars between 
the standards and the front brackets; b, a 
transverse supporting-bar connecting the 
front brackets, and b a transverse bar con 
necting the upperportions of the intermediate 
C represents the vertically-movable feed 
table which supports the pile of sheets, and 
which is raised automatically in the usual 
manner as the sheets are fed off from the top 
of the pile. 
D represents the tape-roller, arranged in 
front of the feed-table, and d the tapes, which 
pass around the tape-roller and carry the 
sheets deposited upon the same from the pile 
to the press. 
E represents the transverse driving-shaft, 
journaled in the upper portions of the inter 
from any suit 
mediate brackets and driven 
- 
able source. 
FF represent two buckling devices where 
by the front corners of the sheets are simul 
taneously buckled inwardly, as shown in Fig. 
1, and which may be of any suitable construc 
tion. Each of these buckling devices is pref 
erably constructed as follows: 
brackets. 
- 
- 
- 
. 
90 
95 
TOO 
2 
567,268 
o 
25 
G represents alongitudinal shaft journaled 
with its front end in a bearing formed in a 
bracket g, which latter is mounted on the 
transverse supporting-barb. Motion is trans 
mitted from the transverse shaft to the lon 
gitudinal shaft by means of a pair of Spiral 
gear-wheels g g, secured, respectively, to 
these shafts. 
G' represents a Supporting-rod arranged 
parallel with the longitudinal shaft and se 
cured with its front end to the bracket g. 
FI represents a carrying-head Supporting 
the buckling mechanism and mounted on the 
longitudinal shaft and the supporting-rod G'. 
Irepresents the reciprocating buckling-fin 
ger, pivoted to the lower arm of a rock-lever 
and provided at its free inner end with a 
buckling-roller ", which rests on the corner 
of the pile of paper. The rock-lever is piv 
oted between its upper and lower arms upon 
a horizontal arbor , secured to the front side 
of the carrying-head. The forward move 
ment of the buckling-finger is produced by a 
cami, secured to the longitudinal shaft and 
engaging with a rolleri on the upper arm of 
the rock-lever. 
f is a guide-rod pivotally connected at its 
lower end with a lug on the outer side of the 
rock-lever and passing with its upper portion 
through a stud or arbor i, arranged on the 
front side of the carrying-head. The back 
ward movement of the buckling-finger is pro 
duced by a spring j, Surrounding the upper 
portion of the guide-rod and bearing with its 
ends against the top of the stud and a screw 
nut j', arranged on the threaded upper end 
of the guide-rod. The backward movement 
of the buckling-finger may be regulated by 
means of a thumb-nut j', arranged on the 
guide-rod and adapted to bear against the un 
der side of the stud. At the end of the for 
ward movement of the buckling-finger the 
latter is raised from the pile and retained in 
an elevated position until it reaches the end 
of its backward movement by means of a 
rock-arm k, which is pivoted at its outer end 
on the studi and connected at its inner end 
by a rod Ic" with the buckling-finger and a 
cam k, secured to the longitudinal shaft and 
bearing against a roller lc on the rock-arm. 
The buckling-finger is raised slightly near the 
end of its forward stroke and then lowered 
again upon the pile at the end of its forward 
stroke for the purpose of freeing the lower 
sheets from the top sheet, if more than one 
sheet has been buckled, the lifting-cam lebe 
ing constructed to produce this effect, as 
shown in Fig. 14. While the buckling-finger 
is slightly raised it still retains a sufficiently 
firm grip on the top sheet to preserve the 
buckle in the same; but the pressure is re 
moved from the lower sheets, so that if more 
than one sheet has been buckled all the sheets 
below the top sheet will slip along the un 
65 der side of the top sheet and straighten out 
again. 
represents an abrasion-plate whereby the 
45 
55 
 
75 
9 O 
face of the rubber buckling-roller is kept 
clean and prevented from becoming smooth 
or glazed. This plate is arranged above the 
buckling-roller with its toothed or roughened 
under side in that portion of the path of the 
buckling-roller which the latter traverses dur 
ing its backward movement while in an ele 
vated position, as shown in Fig. 4. As the 
buckling-roller rolls along the toothed lower 
face of the abrasion-plate the latter digs into 
the surface of the roller and removes any 
grit, fibers, or other matter adhering to the 
roller, and also roughens the same, thereby 
preventing the roller from becoming smooth 
and insuring a firm grip of the same upon 
the paper. The inner end of the abrasion 
plate is curved upwardly, so as to direct the 
buckling-roller to the under side of the same. 
The plate is supported so as to be capable 
of vertical adjustment toward and from the 
buckling-roller by means of a stem c, ar 
ranged on the upper side thereof and secured 
in a lug lc on the front side of the carrying 
head by a set-screw k". 
By shifting the bracket g on the transverse 
supporting-rod the buckling device may be 
adjusted transversely in the machine for feed 
ing different sizes of sheets. 
L represents two vertically-movable buck 
ling or gage feet which bear upon the pile 
in front of the buckling-fingers and which 
serve the double purpose of abutments against 
which the top sheet is buckled by the fingers 
during the forward movement of the latter 
and also as gage-feet. Whereby the upward 
movement of the feed-table is regulated and 
controlled. This regulating mechanism forms 
no part of this application for patent and can 
be of any suitable and well-known construc 
tion, and Only a portion of the same is shown 
in the drawings to illustrate the means for 
raising and lowering the buckling or gage 
feet. These feet are arranged at opposite 
ends of a transverse barl, which latter is con 
nected with its central portion to the lower 
end of a vertical guide-rod l. This rod is 
guided in upper and lower eyes ll, connected 
with the front supporting-bar by an arm l. 
The buckling or gage feet are depressed by 
a spring l, interposed between the upper eye 
land a collar I, Secured to the guide-rod l. 
lf is a horizontal shifting rod connected at 
its front end with the upper end of the guide 
rod and connected. With its rear end to the 
transverse regulating-shaft li by an arm l'. 
The buckling orgage feet are raised from the 
pile by an elbow-lever M, provided in its 
lower arm with a pin m, which bears against 
the under side of the shifting rod and a cam 
m", arranged on the transverse shaft, and en 
gaging with a roller n on the upper arm of 
the elbow-lever. The elbow-lever is pivoted 
loosely on a transverse rock-shaft N, which 
is journaled with its ends in bearings in, ar 
ranged on the rear portions of the interme 
diate brackets. 
After the front corners of the top sheet have 
O O 
O 
II5 
I 25 
567,268 
3 
been buckled the sheet is carried from the 
pile to the tape-roller by two gripping-car 
riers, each of which is constructed as follows: 
O, Figs. 1 and 5, represents a reciprocating 
actuating-rod arranged lengthwise over the 
pile between one of the buckling-fingers and 
the adjacent buckling-foot. This rod is piv 
otally connected at its rear end with a de 
pending rock-arm O', secured to the transverse 
O rock-shaft N and sliding with its front por 
tion in front and rear eyes oo, formed on a 
supporting-yoke o. The latterishung loosely 
on the transverse supporting-bar b and is 
held against sliding lengthwise thereon by 
means of two connected collars o, Fig. 9, ar 
ranged on the supporting-rod on opposite 
sides of the yoke, and a set-screw o', arranged 
in one of the collars. The forward move 
ment of the reciprocating rod is produced by 
an upper rock-arm p, secured to the rock 
shaft N, and a camp', secured to the trans 
verse shaft and engaging with a roller p on 
the rock-arm p. The backward movement 
of the reciprocating rod is produced by a lower 
rock-arm p, secured to the same rock-shaft, 
and a cam p', arranged on the transverse 
shaft and engaging with a roller p on the 
lower rock-arm. 
Qrepresents agripper-head which is mount 
ed on the actuating-rod and which carries the 
gripping devices whereby the sheet is grasped 
and carried from the pile to the tape-roller. 
q represents the upper jaw of the gripper, 
35 which is arranged horizontally and connected 
at its rear end with the lower portion of the 
gripper-head, whileitsfrontend is bifurcated. 
R represents the lower jaw of the gripper, 
which is L-shaped and pivoted at its upper 
end by a transverse pin r to the lower portion 
of the gripper-head. The lower portion of 
the lower jaw is adapted to pass through the 
space in the bifurcated portion of the upper 
jaw and to bear against the lower face q' of 
the upper jaw, as shown in Fig. 6. 
r' is a gear-segment formed concentrically 
With the pivot on the upper end of the lower 
gripper-jaw, and S represents a gear-rack ar 
ranged to slide in a horizontal sockets, formed 
in the gripper-head above the gripper-jaws 
and engaging with the gear-segment of the 
lower jaw, so that upon moving the gear-rack 
lengthwise in the gripper-head the lower jaw 
will be opened or closed. 
The rear portion 
of the gear-rack is provided with a contracted 
stems', which forms a shoulders in rear of 
the rack and which is guided in a hollow 
screw-sleeves', arranged in the screw-thread 
led rear portion of the socket. The gear-rack 
is moved forwardly for the purpose of closing 
the lower jaw by means of a spring s, sur 
rounding the stem s' and bearing with its 
ends against the shoulder on the rack and 
the front end of the screw-sleeve. The ten 
sion of the springs may be regulated by screw 
ing the screw-sleeve into the socket more or 
less. 
45 
55 
rack strikes during the last portion of the 
forward movement of the gripper-head and 
whereby the gear-rack is shifted for opening 
the gripper and releasing the sheet. This 
stop consists, preferably, of a screw arranged 
in a depending lug tom the front eye of the 
gripper-head, so that by adjusting this screw 
the time of opening the gripper can be regul 
lated. 
U, Figs. 8 and 10, represents a spring bolt 
or catch whereby the lower jaw is held in an 
open position preparatory to closing upon the 
sheet. This spring-bolt is arranged to slide 
at right angles to the gear-rack in a socket it, 
formed, preferably, on the outer side of the 
gripper-head, and is adapted to engage its in 
ner end with a shoulder u', formed on the 
outer side of the gear-rack for holding the 
same against forward movement in the grip 
per-head. 
'u' is an elbow-lever whereby the spring 
bolt is retracted for releasing the gear-rack. 
This lever is pivoted on the gripper-head in 
rear of the spring-bolt and extends with One 
of its arms into a notch u, formed in the rear 
side of the spring-bolt. 
it is a stop against which the other arm of 
the elbow-lever engages during the last por 
tion of the backward movement of the grip 
per-head for withdrawing the spring-bolt and 
permitting the gear-rack to close the lower 
gripper-jaw. This stop consists, preferably, 
of a screw u, arranged in a depending lug 
'u' on the rear eye of the gripper-head, so that 
by adjusting this screw the closing of the 
gripper can be regulated. 
For the purpose of thoroughly separating 
the top sheet from the pile the grippers of 
both heads are swung first outwardly and 
then inwardly after they have grasped the 
sheet. The simultaneous Outward move 
ment of both grippers raises the middle por 
tion of the sheet from the pile, thereby al 
lowing air to enter between the top sheet and 
the next lower sheet and effectually separat 
ing these sheets. The subsequent inward 
movement of the grippers permits the cen 
tral portion of the sheet to descend loosely 
upon the pile. This outward and inward 
movement of each gripper is effected by the 
following mechanism: 
?u, Figs. 2, 11, and 12, is a cam which is 
secured to the longitudinal shaft in front of 
the carrying-head. u is a rock-lever which 
is pivoted on the supporting-rod G' adjacent 
to the front side of the carrying-head and 
engages with its short Outer arm against said 
cam while its long inner arm engages against 
the under side of a lug ui on the outer side 
of the gripper-head. The rock-lever is held 
against the face of the cam by a spring u. 
The gripper-head is so mounted on its actu 
atting-rod that it can rock on the same and 
the cam and lever just described produce a 
rocking movement of the gripper-head in the 
direction in which the gripper-jaws swing 
As the gripper-head moves for 
T, Fig. 7, is a stop against which the gear outwardly. 
 
75 
95 
OO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
t 
567,268 
Wardly in feeding off the sheet the lug at 
slides off the inclined or curved front face 
it, Fig. 11, of the rock-lever, which latter 
does not partake in this forward movement, 
and the gripper is swung inwardly by a flat 
spring u', secured to the yoke and bearing 
against the gripper-head below the actuating 
rod. The inclined or curved face of the rock 
lever allows the gripper-head to leave the le 
wer gradually. When the gripper - head 
makes its backward stroke, the cam has de 
pressed the inner arm of the rock-lever and 
the gripper-head takes position with its lug at 
above the inner arm of the lever. The extent 
of the rocking movement of the gripper-head 
is limited by a cross-pin it, which is secured 
in the actuating-rod and projects into slots 
it in the hub of the gripper-head. 
If desired, only one of the gripper's may be 
provided with mechanism for producing said 
lateral movement, in which case the other 
gripper holds one side of the sheet, while the 
other gripper moves outwardly to lift and 
loosen the sheet. 
During the forward movement of each 
buckling-finger the adjacent buckling-foot 
bears upon the pile, the adjacent carrying 
gripper is open and stands with its upper jaw 
over the front edge of the pile, as represented 
in Fig. 5, and the corner of the sheet is buckled 
against the lower face of the upper jaw, as 
represented in Fig. 1 by dotted lines. At the 
end of the forward movement of the buck 
ling-finger the latter and the buckling-foot 
remain upon the pile, so as to preserve the 
buckle in the sheet. At this time the grip 
per-head completes its backward movement, 
which causes the elbow-lever to strike the 
rear stop u?, thereby withdrawing the spring 
bolt, releasing the gear-rack, and closing the 
lower jaw upon the sheet, as represented in 
Fig. 6. The buckling-finger and buckling 
foot are now raised and the gripper is swung 
outwardly and inwardly for loosening and 
separating the central portion of the sheet, 
and the gripper is moved forward in this 
closed position until the front end of the 
sheet arrives over the tape-roller. The front 
end of the gear-rack now strikes the front 
stop, whereby the forward movement of the 
gear-rack is arrested, while the gripper-head 
continues its forward movement independ 
ently of the gear-rack, thereby causing the 
lower gripper-jaw to be turned on its pivot 
in the proper direction to open the jaw and 
release the sheet, as shown in Fig. 7. The 
lower jaw is turned to Such an extent in open 
ing that it passes above the face of the upper 
jaw, thereby preventing the edge of the sheet 
from being caught by the lower jaw upon 
withdrawing the sheet from the pile. While 
the sheet is being withdrawn from the pile 
the buckling-finger moves backward to the 
place of beginning, and when the sheet has 
been wholly withdrawn from the pile the 
buckling-finger and buckling-foot are again 
lowered upon the pile, and the gripper-head 
moves backwardly almost to the end of its 
backward movement until its elbow-level 
stands close to the real stop. During the 
forward movement of the gripper-head inde 
pendently of the gear-rack the Spring-bolt is 
carried in front of the shoulder of the gear 
rack, so that the latter upon being projected 
by its spring during the subsequent back 
ward movement of the gripper-head will catch 
with its shoulder against the spring-bolt, 
thereby permitting only a partial downward 
movement of the lower gripper-jaw and hold 
ing the same in an oblique position, but Sufi 
ciently open to permit of buckling the sheet 
properly against the upper jaw, as repre 
sented in Fig. 5. 
The face of the lower gripper-jaw is smooth, 
so as to offer only slight resistance to the pa 
per, while the upper gripper is preferably 
provided in rear of its bifurcated portion with 
a facing 
of rubber or similar material 
which offers considerable resistance to the 
paper. When two sheets have been buckled 
accidentally at the same time, this construc 
tion of the jaws causes the upper jaw to grasp 
the upper sheet, while the lower jaw slips on 
the second or lower sheet, so that the latter is 
left behind and only the top sheet is carried 
to the tape-roller, thereby preventing more 
than one sheet from being fed at a time. 
It has been found in practice that the grip 
pers do not always close upon the sheet prop 
erly and often miss a sheet when the two 
jaws stand vertically in line, because the 
buckled portion of the sheet is generally pre 
sented to the jaws at an angle thereto. In 
order to avoid this difficulty, the two jaWS 
are preferably placed obliquely and at right 
angles, or nearly so, to the buckled portion 
of the sheet on that side of the croWI) of the 
buckle nearest the buckling-foot, as ShoWn. 
in Figs. 1 and 8, thereby better enabling the 
jaws to grasp the sheet. 
After the sheet has been deposited With its 
front edge upon the tape-roller and tapes it 
is pressed against the tape-roller by tWO Ver 
tically - movable pressure -rollers V, which 
bear upon the longitudinal margins of the 
sheet. Each of these pressure-rollers is raised 
and lowered by the following mechanism: 
() is a lower elbow-lever pivoted. On the 
front side of the head carrying the buckling 
mechanism so as to swing vertically and pro 
vided on its front arm with a transverse arbOl 
'' on which the pressure-roller is journaled. 
is is a follower-rod extending horizontally 
through openings in the carrying-head and 
a bracket v8, secured to the rear side of the 
head and provided at its front end with a 
head v'. The upper arm of the elbow-lever 
is provided with a screw v', which engages 
with a seat formed in the front Side of the 
head on the follower-rod. 
is is a spring which tends to depress the 
pressure-roller and which bears with its ends 
against the head of the follower and the 
bracket of the carrying-head. 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
2 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
567,268 
5 
95 
Od 
Io5 
IIo 
II5 
I25 
O 
25 
30 
35 
w is an upper elbow-lever pivoted on the 
arbor i at right angles to the lower elbow 
lever and having its lower arm connected 
with the lower arm of the lower lever by a 
link up'. The upper elbow-lever is turned in 
the proper direction for raising the pressure 
roller by a cam u', mounted on the longitu 
dinal shaft and engaging with a roller von 
the upper arm of the upper elbow-lever. 
While the sheet of paper is being carried 
with its front edge by the grippers upon the 
tape-roller and tapes the pressure-rollers are 
elevated by the cams w. After the grippers 
have released the sheet and deposited the 
same on the tape-roller and tapes the springs 
?lower the pressure-rollers, so that they press 
the sheet against the tape-roller, whereby the 
sheet is carried away upon the tapes to the 
press. By mounting the pressure-rollers on 
the head which carries the buckling devices 
these parts are always adjusted together for 
different-sized sheets, whereby the relative 
position of the buckling devices and pressure 
rollers is always preserved. 
When comparatively stiff or heavy paper 
is being fed, the corner portions of the sheets 
bear against the under sides of the buckling 
rollers and pressure-rollers with considerable 
fiction while being carried off from the pile 
by the grippers, and sometimes the resistance 
of these rollers causes the sheet to be pulled 
out of the jaws of the grippers. 
In order to . 
avoid this, a guard 2U is arranged in rear of 
each buckling-finger in such a position that 
the marginal portions of the sheets are thereby 
depressed below the buckling and pressure 
rollers as the sheets are carried away by the 
grippers and prevented from coming in con 
tact with said rollers. These guards are pref 
erably composed of bent rods or heavy wires 
and supported at their rear ends on the Sup 
porting-rod, as shown in Fig. 2. 
X represents the stationary guides against 
which the front of the pile is placed and 
whereby it is kept in position while being 
elevated. These guides are mounted loosely 
on a transverse rock-shaft ac, which is jour 
nailed in bearings on the front brackets, and 
extend to within a short distance from the top 
of the pile. 
ac' represents movable front guides which 
have a movement toward and from the upper 
front side of the pile for the purpose of re 
moving the resistance from the sheets dur 
ing the buckling operation and straightening 
the pile after the buckling operation. These 
movable guides are secured with their lower 
ends to the guide rock-shaft and extend with 
their upper ends a short distance above the 
top of the pile. These guides are swung for 
Ward, away from the front of the pile, by a 
spring ac, secured at one end to the tape-frame 
ac and with its other end to an upwardly-ex 
tending rock-armac, secured to the guide rock 
at is a rock-lever pivoted on one of the in 
- termediate brackets and connected with its 
shaft. 
S. 
w 
- 
d 
lower arm by a rod act with the rock-arm of 
the guide rock-shaft. The movable front 
guides are moved backwardly against the 
front side of the pile by a cam ac", secured to 
the transverse driving-shaft E and engaging 
with the upper arm of the rock-levera. 
During the forward movement of the buck 
ling-fingers the movable front guides are 
swung forwardly out of contact with the top 
portion of the pile, as shown in Fig. 2, where 
by the front edge of the top sheet is relieved 
from resistance and the top sheet is left free 
to be buckled. The upper ends of the mov 
able front guides are arranged in front of the 
points where the buckles in the sheet are 
formed and extend a short distance above the 
pile, as shown in Fig. 1. This enables the 
grippers which are arranged adjacent to these 
movable guides to carry the top sheet Over 
the same, but the latter intercept any lower 
sheets which may be pulled forward by fric 
tion and prevent them from leaving the pile. 
After the buckled top sheet has been 
grasped by the grippers and before the latter 
begin their forward movement the front 
guides are moved rearwardly against the pile, 
so as to prevent the following sheets from be 
ing pulled forward and displaced to any con 
siderable extent. After the greater portion 
of the top sheet has been carried from the 
pile to the tape mechanism the front guides 
are vibrated back and forth several times in 
quick succession, whereby any lower sheets 
which may have been displaced are loosened 
and pushed back in line with the front side 
of the pile and returned to the proper posi 
tion. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The combination with the feed-table Sup 
porting the pile of sheets and a buckling de 
vice having a transverse movement with ref 
erence to the pile of sheets and adapted to pro 
duce a transverse buckle in the front portion 
of the top sheet of a longitudinally-recipro 
cating carrying-gripper arranged in front of 
the point where the sheet is buckled and 
adapted to seize the margin of the buckled 
portion of the sheet and remove the sheet 
from the pile, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with a transversely 
moving buckling-finger adapted to engage 
with the front portion of the top sheet and 
form a transverse buckle in the same and a 
buckling - foot against which the sheet is 
buckled, of alongitudinally-reciprocating car 
rying-gripper arranged between the buckling 
finger and the buckling-foot and adapted to 
seize the front margin of the buckled portion 
of the sheet and remove the same from the 
pile, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination with a transversely 
moving buckling device adapted to engage 
with the front portion of the top sheet and 
form a transverse buckle in the same, of alon 
gitudinally-reciprocating carrying-gripper, 
having its upper jaw arranged over the top 
sheet, and forming a stop against the under 
45 
so 
is 55 
 
6 
567,268 
side of which the buckled portion of the sheet 
abuts and having its lower jaw adapted to 
clamp the buckled portion of the sheet against 
the upper jaw preparatory to removing the 
sheet from the pile, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination with the gripper-head 
having a forward and backward movement 
and provided with a fixed gripper-jaw, of a 
movable gripper-jaw pivoted on said head and 
provided with a gear-segment, a gear-rack 
having a reciprocating movement in said head 
independent of the fixed gripper-jaw and en 
gaging with the segment of the movable jaw, 
and mechanism whereby said gear-rack is ac 
tuated, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination with the gripper-head 
having a forward and backward movement, 
of a fixed gripper-jaw arranged on said head, 
a movable gripper-jaw pivoted on said head 
and provided with a gear-segment, a gear 
rack arranged on said head and engaging with 
Said Segment, a Spring whereby the gear-rack 
is moved forwardly in said head, and a stop 
whereby the gear-rack is moved rearwardly 
in said head, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination with the gripper-head 
having a forward and backward movement, 
of a fixed gripper-jaw arranged on said head, 
a movable gripper-jaw pivoted on said head 
and provided with a gear-segment, a gear 
rack arranged on said headland engaging with 
Said segment, a Spring whereby the gear-rack 
is moved forward in said head, a stop whereby 
the gear-rack is moved rearwardly in said 
head, a spring-bolt whereby the forward move 
ment of the gear-rack is arrested for holding 
the gripper open, and a stop whereby the 
spring-bolt is withdrawn, substantially as 
set forth. 
7. The combination with the gripper-head 
having a forward and backward movement, 
of a fixed gripper-jaw arranged on said head, 
a movable gripper-jaw pivoted on said head 
and provided with a gear-segment, a gear-rack 
arranged on said head and engaging with said 
segment, a spring whereby the gear-rack is 
moved forwardly in said head, a stop whereby 
the gear-rack is moved rearwardly in said 
head, a spring-bolt whereby the forward move 
ment of the gear-rack is arrested for holding 
the gripper open, an elbow-lever engaging 
With the spring-bolt, and a stop adapted to 
engage With the elbow-lever for disengaging 
the Spring-bolt from the gear-rack, substan 
tially as set forth. 
8. The combination with the feed-table sup 
porting the pile of sheets, of two buckling de 
vices whereby the front portion of the sheet 
is buckled at two points, two longitudinally 
movable grippers adapted to seize the buckled 
portions of the sheet, and mechanism whereby 
One gripper is moved laterally with reference 
to the other, before beginning the forward 
stroke of the grippers whereby the front por 
tion of the sheet between the buckled por 
tions is raised from the pile and the sheet is 
thoroughly loosened before being removed 
from the pile, substantially as set forth. 
9. The combination with the feed-table sup 
porting the pile of sheets, of two buckling 
devices whereby the front portion of the sheet 
is buckled at two points, two grippers hav 
ing a reciprocating forward and backward 
and a lateral movement and adapted to seize 
the buckled portions of the sheet while the 
same rests on the pile and a cam and rock 
lever whereby each gripper is moved away 
from the other gripper before the grippers 
begin their forward movement, substantially 
as set forth. 
10. The combination with the feed-table 
supporting the pile of sheets, of two buck 
ling devices whereby the front portion of the 
sheet is buckled at two points, two gripper 
heads having a longitudinally-reciprocating 
and a laterally - Oscillating movement and 
provided with gripping-jaws which grasp the 
buckled portions of the sheet while the same 
rests on the pile, and rock-levers which are 
held against longitudinal movement with the 
gripper-heads and which are adapted to en 
gage with the gripper-heads before the latter 
begin their forward movement and move the 
gripper-jaws of one head away from the grip 
per-jaws of the other head, substantially as 
set forth. 
11. The combination with the feed-table 
and the tape-roller arranged in front of the 
table, of a carrying-head arranged above the 
feed-table and capable of transverse adjust 
ment in the machine, a buckling mechanism. 
arranged on said head, and a vertically-mov 
able pressure -roller also mounted on said 
head and adapted to bear against the tape 
roller, substantially as set forth. 
12. The combination with the tape-roller 
and the carrying-head of the buckling mech 
anism, of a vertically-movable pressure-roller 
adapted to move toward and from the tape 
roller, a lower elbow-lever pivoted on said 
head and supporting the pressure-roller, a 
Spring engaging with the lower elbow-lever 
for lowering the pressure-roller, an upper el 
bow-lever pivoted on said head and connected 
with the lower elbow-lever, and a lifting-cam 
mounted on said head and engaging with the 
upper elbow-lever, substantially as set forth. 
13. The combination with the feed-table 
and the buckling-finger arranged over the 
front portion of the pile, of a gripper ar 
ranged over the front portion of the pile and 
a guard arranged over the pile in rear of the 
buckling-finger and adapted to hold the sheet 
out of contact with said finger while the sheet 
is being removed from the pile by the grip 
per, substantially as set forth. 
14. The combination with the buckling-fin 
ger and its roller, of an abrasion-plate ar 
ranged in the path of said roller, substantially 
as set forth. 
15. The combination with the carrying-head 
and the buckling-finger mounted thereon, and 
75 
95 
CO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
T25 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
567,268 
O 
having a buckling-roller, of an abrasion-plate 
arranged above the buckling-finger and made 
vertically adjustable on the carrying-head, 
substantially as set forth. 
16. The combination with the feed-table 
supporting the pile of sheets, of a buckling 
finger having a forward and backward move 
ment and a cam constructed to hold the finger 
down upon the pile during the first portion of 
its forward movement, slightly raising the 
finger near the end of its forward movement, 
and then lowering the finger upon the pile at 
the end of its forward movement, substan 
tially as set forth. 
17. The combination with the feed-table 
and the buckling device, of stationary front 
guides which do not extend to the top of the 
pile, a movable front guide which extends 
above the stationary guides, and mechanism. 
whereby the movable guide is moved toward 
and from the pile, substantially as set forth. 
18. The combination with the feed-table 
and the buckling device, of stationary front 
guides which do not extend to the top of the 
pile, a movable front guide which extends 
above the stationary guides, and a rock-shaft 
upon which the stationary guides are loosely 
hung and to which the movable guide is se 
cured, substantially as set forth. 
19. The combination with the feed-table 
and the tape mechanism arranged in front of 
the table, of a transversely-movable buckling 
device whereby a transverse buckle is formed 
in the front portion of the sheet, a carrying 
gripper adapted to carry the sheet from the 
35 
 
pile to the tape mechanism and arranged in 
front of the point where the sheet is buckled, 
and a front guide bearing against the front 
side of the pile adjacent to the gripper and 
extending with its upper end above the top 
of the pile, substantially as set forth. 
20. The combination with the feed-table 
and the tape mechanism arranged in front of 
the table, of a transversely-movable buckling 
device whereby a transverse buckle is formed 
in the front portion of the sheet, a carrying 
gripper adapted to carry the sheet from the 
pile to the tape mechanism and arranged in 
front of the point where the sheet is buckled, 
a front guide bearing against the front side 
of the pile adjacent to the gripper and extend 
ing with its upper end above the top of the 
pile, and mechanism whereby the front guide 
is moved away from the pile during the Op 
eration of buckling the top sheet and pressed 
against the pile while the top sheet is be 
ing carried from the pile, substantially as set 
forth. 
Witness my hand this 31st day of August, 
MICHAEL B. FOY. 
1895. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD WILHELM, 
THEO. L. POPP. 
Witness my hand this 5th day of Septem 
FRANK M. LEAVITT. 
ber, 1895. 
Witnesses: 
BRAINERD W. CHILD, 
FRED T. BENSON, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567368.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 567,368, 
W. A., WALLING FORD, 
WASHING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 8, 1896. 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
N E. 
IN 
 424 
If a 
ae 
teas 
V SE1 
O O 
f 
N 
S 
S 
N 
SS 
i 
2 
 
 
 
7 1 
 
 
22%22a2a2zizza as Yaaaz 
N 
 
the noRRS PETERS co. Photo-Litho, wasteron, c. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. A. WALLING FORD. 
WASHING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 567,368. 
Patented Sept. 8, 1896. 
  
 
--- 4. 
22% A4 
2 
2 
2 
2 
as ill. 
it. 
 
| 
N 
 
  
NS 3 s N N 
& 
eaeae 22a32 eaceael22 
sacres N. 
E. E. 
E. 
SNNNYYYSSNSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSNNNay 
28;weeeee 
z. 
33 fir? 
 
3vvuovo 
267e 
-7C2%jL\le-C-C-ex44C 
W*A2%/6razzazz 
-- 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. A. WALLINGFORD, OF BLOOMINGTON, INDIANA. 
WASHING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 567,368, dated September 8, 1896. 
Application filed August 5, 1895, Serial No,558,811. (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
Io 
25 
same. 
To all whom it may CO72,Cer. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMA. WALLING 
FORD, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Bloomington, in the county of Monroe and 
State of Indiana, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Washing-Ma 
chines; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as Will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
My invention relates to washing-machines. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
Washing-machine of the pounder type which 
shall be simple in construction, durable in 
use, and comparatively inexpensive of pro 
duction. 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists of certain features of construction and 
combination of parts which will be herein 
after described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, IFigure 1 is 
a longitudinal vertical sectional view of my 
improved Washing-machine. 
Fig. 2 is a top 
plan view of the same; and Fig. 3 is a verti 
call transverse sectional view through the 
machine, showing one of the pounders in full 
lines and showing, also in section, the out 
wardly-projecting concavo-convex dents 11 
in section-lines. 
In the drawings, 1 denotes the clothes tub 
or vessel, which is provided with the perfo 
rated false bottom 2, a vertical partition 3, 
and cover 4, provided with longitudinal 
slots 5. 
6 denotes standards secured to the sides of 
the tub and projecting upward therefrom and 
bent in Ward, as shown at 7, between the up 
per ends of which are circular jaws 8, which 
are spaced apart by stops 9. 
10 denotes open-ended cylinders which are 
placed within the compartments of the tub 
at each side of its partition and which have 
formed in their inner peripheries dents or re 
45 
cesses 11 to form rubbing-surfaces. Hand 
bars 10 project from the sides of the cylin 
i-ders between the upper edge of the walls of 
the tub and the tops of the lids. 
13 denotes openings formed in the parti 
tion near its upper end, and 14 denotes open 
ings formed in the upper end of the cylinders 
adjacent to the partition. 
30 
35 
. 
. 
. 
- 
- 
. . 
ards. 
aforesaid. 
15 denotes the operating-levers, the inner 
ends of which are cut away and lap each other 
and are pivoted to the upper ends of the stand 
16 denotes clips embracing the cut-away 
ends of the levers to hold them together. 
17 denotes the pounders, which fit within 
the cylinders and are provided with down 
wardly-opening flap-valves 18, the downward 
movement of which is limited by the cage 19, 
secured to the under side of the pounders. 
19' denotes the pounder-rods, which are 
provided with vertical rows of apertures 20 
and which are pivoted to the operating-levers 
21 denotes segmetal rows of registering 
apertures formed in the circular jaws, and 
22 denotes pins which are adapted to engage 
said apertures. 
In operation the clothes to be washed are 
placed within the cylinders and the tub is 
filled with water. Now by reciprocating the 
operating-levers the pounders will alternately 
be depressed and raised. This movement of 
the pounders will cause the water contained 
within one of the compartments to be forced 
downward through the clothes in that com 
partment, through the perforated false bot 
tom, up into the cylinder of the other com 
partment, and through the clothes. Should 
there be too much Water in the tub, it will 
escape through the openings at the upper 
ends of the cylinder and through the open 
ings in the partition back into the compart 
ment from which it has been forced, and on 
the upstroke of the pounder the downwardly 
opening valve will allow the water which is 
passed into that cylinder to escape from above 
the pounder back into the tank that it has 
left. In this operation the stops of the cir 
cular jaws will prevent the handles striking 
the edge of the tub. Now when it is desired 
to Work but one of the operating-handles, the 
clips are swung back out of engagement with 
the ends of the operating-levers to which they 
have been attached, and this will allow the 
operator to work but one pounder as he de 
sires. Now by partially rotating back and 
forth the hand-bars of the cylinders the 
clothes will be more thoroughly cleansed, as 
the dents or recesses of the interior of the 
cylinder will rub against the same. After 
9o 
95 
IOO 
 
 
2 
567,368 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States, is 
In a washing-machine, the combination 
with a tub provided with standards, circular 
jaws secured to said standards and spaced 
apart, stops arranged between said jaws, Op 
erating-levers which lap each other and are 
pivoted to said standards, clips to lock the 
levers together, pounders connected with said 
levers and pins to be inserted in the segmen 
tal rows of apertures formed in said jaws, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM. A. WALLING FORD. 
25 
Witnesses: 
SAML. A. TRURY, 
A. B. SUIT. 
EO 
the clothes have been thoroughly cleansed 
and it is desired to remove them for the pur 
pose of Wringing them, the operating-levers 
are elevated to their highest point and pins 
are inserted through the segmental rows of 
apertures in the circular jaws and will hold 
the operating-levers and pounders above the 
tub, it being understood that the covers have 
first been removed. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
the operation and advantage of this inven 
tion will be readily understood without re 
quiring further explanation. 
Although I have described my preferred 
construction, I would have it distinctly un 
derstood that I reserve to myself the right to 
make such changes in the construction as fall 
within the scope of my claim. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567470.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 567,470. 
H. S. HALE, 
SEAT CUSHION AND BACK, 
Patented Sept. 8, 1896. 
Witnesses. s 
26.-2, 
C7. 
a" 
cert: 
6. 
Inventor. 
%g (5 Wael 
7% aac 
Attorney. 
the NORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHo. washinoro.o. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY S. HALE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
SEAT CUSHION AND BACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 56,470, dated September 8, 1896. 
Application filed April 17, 1896, Serial No. 587,903, (No model.) 
IO 
. 
. 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that iHi.Nry's. HALE, of the 
city and county of Philadelphia and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented an Improve 
5 ment in Seat Cushions and Backs, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to cushions and backs 
for car-seats, &c.; and it consists of the im 
provements which are hereinafter described 
and claimed, and which are shown in the ac 
companying drawings. 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
a seat cushion or back of improved construc 
tion, which shall possess increased strength 
and durability, and shall have great elas 
ticity. 
It is also an object of my invention to pro 
vide a reversible seat-cushion either face of 
which may be turned uppermost, 
In carrying out my invention I provide the 
wooden frame with an elastic base or support 
for the usual coiled springs which are ar 
ranged below the face or body portion of the 
cushion, whereby these springs are elastic 
ally supported and the usual wooden cross 
pieces are dispensed with. This elastic base 
or support is preferably composed of a series 
of broad metallic spring-bands extending 
across the Wooden frame and secured thereto. 
By forming both faces of these broad metallic 
bands and covering them with suitable up 
holstery I obtain a reversible seat-cushion of 
which each face possesses the same charac 
teristics of elasticity and firmness. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a transverse section of a seat-cushion 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view of the cushion with the upholstery partly 
broken away. Fig. 3 is a transverse sec 
tional view of the frame of the cushion, illus 
trating a modification. Figs. 4 and 5 are sec 
tional views of parts of the frame, illustrating 
modifications. 
AA are wooden rails of the usual rectan 
gular frame. 
B B are broad metallic spring-bands ex 
tending transversely across the upper face 
of the frame and secured to the rails AA, 
preferably by the downwardly-bent extremi 
5o ties inserted in grooves a, in the upper face of 
the opposite rails A. 
extending across the lower face of the frame 
and secured at their ends to the rails A, pref 
erably in the same manner as the bands B B 
are secured. These bands CC constitute an 
elastic base to support the usual coiled springs 
D, which are interposed between the bands 
B and C, to each of which they are fastened 
at their extremities. The face of the cushion 
is covered by the usual upholstery E, fastened 
along the edge to the Wooden frame. 
The principal advantages of forming the 
base-support of the broad metallic bands in 
stead of the usual cross-pieces of Wood are, 
first, they afford an elastic support for the 
coiled spring, thus relieving the strain upon 
them and rendering the seat more elastic; 
second, they occupy less vertical space and 
therefore permit longer coiled springs to be 
employed; third, they may be made suffi 
ciently broad to provide a support for the 
entire base of the coiled springs. 
The ends of the pieces B C may be nailed 
to the outside of the rails A, but I prefer to 
insert them in grooves or notches, as de 
scribed, so that there may be a continuous 
face c, of Wood, along the edge of the seat, 
over which the upholstery extends and to 
which it is secured. If desired, this outer 
wooden edge may be formed by an independ 
ent piece G, as shown in Fig. 5. 
Instead of employing separate upper and 
lower bands BC, as in the construction shown 
in Fig. 1, a single continuous metallic band 
may be used, as shown in Fig. 3. This con 
tinuous band is shown secured to one rail A 
at one of its ends, then stretched transversely 
to the opposite rail, bent about it and fas 
tened, and then stretched transversely back 
to the first rail and there secured. In this 
case I prefer to use the outer wooden strips 
G to provide the outer face for attachment 
of the upholstery or covering. A covering 
of suitable material may be placed over the 
metallic bands C C and fastened at its edges 
to the frame. I prefer, however, to cover 
them with suitable upholstery F, thus pro 
ducing a seat-cushion upholstered on both 
faces and reversible. I prefer also to uphol 
ster the faces with different material, using, 
for example, plush on one face and rattan on 
the other. A beading or strip b, of wood, rat 
C Care similar broad metallic spring-bands tan, leather, or other suitable material, may 
45 
- 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOC 
 
2 
567,470 
35 
45 
tirely across the lower face of the seat and 
Secured at their ends to the frame, a series 
of coiled springs interposed between said sets 
of metallic bands, and suitable coverings 
Over Said bands. 
3. In a Seat-cushion, the combination of a 
Substantially rectangular Wooden frame, a 
series of broad metallic bands extending en 
tirely across the upper face of the seat and Se 
cured at their ends to the frame, a series of 
similar broad metallic bands extending en 
tirely across the lowerface of the seat and se 
cured at their ends to the frame, a series of 
coiled springs interposed between said sets 
of metallic bands, and suitable coverings of 
upholstering material over both said series of 
bands whereby said-seat is made reversible. 
4. A frame for a seat-cushion consisting of 
a Wooden frame; and a series of broad metallic 
bands, stretched across both faces of wooden 
frame from one side to the other in One Con 
tinuous piece and secured to the Wooden 
frame. 
In testimony of which invention. I hereunto 
set my hand. 
TIENERY S.FALE. 
Witnesses: 
ERNEST IIoWARD. HUNTER, 
WM. I. EVANS. 
O 
be fastened along the edge of the cushion to 
conceal the edges of the upholstery. 
When the seat-cushion is made reversible, 
it may be provided with cleats II H., (dotted 
lines in Fig. 2.) adapted to rest on the frame, 
and thus support the seat-cushion without 
bringing the upholstered face in contact with 
the supports. 
The details of construction which have been 
shown may be varied without departing from 
the invention. 
What I claim...as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a seat-cushion, the combination of a 
substantially rectangular wooden frame, a 
series of broad metallic. bands extending en 
tirely across the upperface of the seat, and Se 
cured at their ends to the Wooden frame, a 
:covering of suitable material arranged over 
said bands, an elastic base carried by the 
iframe, and a series of coiled-springs sup 
ported by said: elastic base and sustaining 
the series of broad metallic springs at their 
upper ends. 
2. In a seat-cushion, the combination of a 
: substantially rectangular Wooden frame, a 
-series of broad metallic bands extending: en 
tirely across the upperface of the seat and se 
cured at their ends to the frame, a series of 
3o similar broad metallic: bands, extending en 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567570.txt	(No Model.) 
O. T., SPRINGER 
SLIDING OR FOLDING, DOOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 567,570, 
Patented Sept. 8, 1896. 
A 
/ 
. 
-- 
N7 
Xe i? 
--(z) - 
, 
C 
--- 
- 
ZZ 
72- 
-/e X 
C ( ; 3. z y 
T NE 
A 
LA 
4. 
4 
4. 
/27/. 
A. 
Z 
3. 
2 
a 
 
{{ar 4s. 
W/2. 
(ha-7% Aarzak 
. 
fuertfair 
Ouevo? e?see 
6% Wve 
O. T. SPRINGER. 
SLIDING OR FOLDING, DOOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
Patented Sept. 8, 1896. 
Z 
(No Model.) 
No. 567,570. 
233Ny 
..., Y 
NENIN ESES 2. 7 
4-HINI 
3-le e 
NZ) 
(a t ( 
z/ 
A 7.9 
Newcase 
(he #4 4. - & 
 
31ueritae 
(24 -?e/uiz 
2. % V%rer/ .///7 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OLIVER TIFFANY SPRINGER, OF BURLINGTON, CANADA. 
SLIDING OR FOLDING DOOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 567,570, dated September 8, 1896. 
Application filed February 23, 1894, Serial No. 501,291. (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, OLIVER TIFFANY 
SPRINGER, a citizen of the Dominion of Can 
ada, residing at Burlington, in the county of 
Halton, in the Province of Ontario, Canada, 
have invented certain new and useful Im. 
provements in Sliding and Folding Doors, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to suchimprovements 
in folding or sliding doors or movable parti 
tions which will always be perpendicular, can 
not sag, easily operated to open or close, can 
be moved to either side of a room or left in the 
center, are particularly adapted for schools, 
churches, private houses, or any building 
where folding or sliding doors or movable par 
titions are required. 
The invention consists in, first, a series of 
doors, frames, or panels hinged together on 
oppositesides. Each one has a pivot-pin in the 
center of the bottom portion which slides in 
a groove or track in the floor or frame. The 
top of each dooris provided with a swivel-pin 
The lower part of each pin is 
let into each. 
round and the upper part flat-shaped, with a 
hole through each for a pin to carry two roll 
ers for each door, and made to run on a hori 
zontal track above the doors. One end of the 
track being movable allows the doors to be 
instantly folded side by side out of the way. 
Side friction-rollers attached to the said pin. 
remove side friction of the track. I attain 
these objects by mechanism illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of three doors and 
frame. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the top track. 
Fig. 3 is a plan of the bottom track. Fig. 4 
is a top view of the doors without frame. Fig. 
5 is a top view showing doors folded to one 
Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the top 
side. 
swivel-pin. Fig. 7 is a cross-section of bottom 
pivot-pin track and door. Fig. 8 is a cross 
section of upper track with rollers, &c. Fig. 
9 is a side view of movable section of track. 
Fig. 10 is a side view, detached, of one roller, 
pivot-pin, socket-plate, and track. Fig. 11 is 
a sliding block and fastening, being a slight 
modification in lieu of the rollers. Fig. 12 is 
a top view. Fig. 13 represents the end view 
of the sliding block, Fig. 14 is a side view 
of doors closed as a partition. Fig. 15 repre 
sents the same folded back. - 
AAA, Fig. 1, represent doors hinged to 
gether on each side alternately by hinges B. 
Each door has a plate 2, secured to the cen 
tral bottom portion, having a circular open 
ing through which is made to pass a round 
spin C, having a flat head 3 above the plate 2. 
The said pin slides in the groove D, which may 
be made in the floor or between the bottom 
rails D', coyered with metal strips ff, as shown 
at Fig. 3. The lower portion of the pin C may 
have a flange or disk 4 attached thereto or the 
pin passed through it and a nut 5 screwed on 
the threaded end of the pin C, as shown at 
Fig. 7, or riveted, allowing each pin C to slide 
horizontally with its door and prevent them 
from being raised out of place. 
The device for hanging each door at the top 
maybe described as follows: Eisa swivel-pin, 
shown at Fig.6 detached, and attached at Fig 
1, to the center top of each door, and made to . 
pass through a metal plate F, having a central 
boss 6 countersunk in the top of each door. 
The said swivel-pin is screw-threaded at the 
bottom and held in place by a nut 7. The upper 
end of the said pin has a hole a through it to 
receive a spindleb, which carries two rollers 
c c for each door. The said rollers run on the 
upper track Habove the doors, and may be 
covered with rubber to prevent noise. 88 
are two projections on the sides of the said 
swivel-pin for a bearing on the plate F, and 
the flat portion of the swivel-pin E slides in 
the spaced between the two portions of the 
track H. Two friction-rollers, w w are held 
in the swivel-pin E to prevent side friction 
when the doors are opened or closed. g g are 
metal strips screwed on the top of the upper 
trackfor the rollers c to run upon. his a cover 
for the chamber above the upper track to al 
low room for the rollers to operate. A portion 
H' of the top track Hwill be movable between 
the dotted lines v v, Fig. 1, to allow the doors 
when pushed back to slide at or about right 
angles to the main track to make the doors 
flush with the frame A' on either side, slots m, 
being made on both sides of the bottom track 
to admit the pins Cat the bottom of the doors 
to allow them to be placed in the position as 
shown at Figs. 5 and 15, when they are out of 
the Way. 
Fig. 8 shows a section of one end of the mov 
able portion H" of the track to allow the doors 
. . 
. 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
55 
2 
O 
25. 
35 
45 
to be moved sidewise at the end of the track, 
S representing a metal plate, 
-shaped, fas: 
tened to the track on both sides, and t a top 
plate Secured to the frame as most convenient. 
at at are two separate grooved plates into 
which the plate islides and carries the mov 
able portion II" of the track and doors to either 
side of the partition, as desired. . 
In operating the doors it will be seen that 
assuming them all closed, as in Fig. 1, in a 
straightline forming a partition, to open them 
they are pressed sidewise at their hinged por 
tions, which causes them to fold together flat, 
when they may be moved to any desired side 
of a room, as seen at Fig.15, the slots m m. m. 
(as many as are pinned doors) in the side ex 
tensions of the lower track and the movable 
portion of the top track between the dotted 
lines 
enabling the pin C at the bottom of 
each door to slide in the said slots m, and make 
the edges of the doors flush with the frame A 
On one side, as in many cases so desired to be 
... out of the way in one portion of a room, or as 
in front of a stage, &c.; otherwise the slots in 
may not be needed, and the doors willfold in 
the center of the frame or in a recessina par 
tition against which they abut. 
To close the doors, they are moved out to the 
line of partition and closed together. To make 
tight joints on their edgesfor a tightpartition, 
each door will be alternately tongued and. 
grooved, which fills up the space between the 
doors. 
The doors can be made of woodin any man 
ner with paneling, &c., or frames with glass, 
I have shown the doors operated on a double 
track, but do not confine myself to that con 
struction, as they could be operated on a single 
track by ommitting one of the rollers cover 
each door and using the same pins or slightly 
altering them to suit the requirements, but. 
I prefer two rollers c c.to each swivel-pin, as 
balancing the doors more effectually. 
It will be observed that if a recess is made 
in the wall or partition against...which the 
doors fold, corresponding in width, to the 
width of the doors and in depth to the thick 
ness of the doors; the whole general width of 
the room may be-preserved, as the doors could 
. 
. 
be folded in the recess. 
It willfurtheribe observed that Ihave shown 
the doors capable of being moved along the . . 
as desired. 
- 
. 
track by means of the swivel-pins and rollers, 
but the rollers could be replaced by a double 
grooved slide block p and made to slide upon 
corresponding projections on the track, as 
shown at Figs. 11, 12, and 13, the latter be-, 
ing an end view. The upper end of the pin 
E in this case would be screw-threaded, upon 
which, after passing through the slide block 
p, would be screwed a pronged nut g, having 
two vertical projections r r, and held from 
turning by means of a split pin O, passing 
through a hole in the swivel-pin E and the 
ends of the split pin pressing on opposite 
sides of the prongs rr. The said swivel-pin 
in this case would be attached to the plate F, 
secured to the top of each door. . 
. It will be understood that the said appa 
ratus is capable of modification in various 
ways other than described. The modifiedra 
rangement, as shown in Figs. 11, 12, and 13, 
which correspond to Figs 8 and 10, does not 
materially change the operation of the sev 
eral details; but I prefer, to use the rollers 
instead of the slide-block device in practical 
operation. For private houses or places 
where the bottom track would be van objec 
tion, about eighteen inches of track only may 
be laid, and bolts may be used at the bottom 
of the other doors to render them rigid when 
drawn out, and one door may be left free, as 
in Fig. 14, without attachment at either bot 
tom- or top, and be operated - as an ordinary 
door. ... 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is- 
The combination with the sliding doors A, 
of the upper track H, 'suitable means for 
hanging and guiding the doors thereon, the 
lower trackD'having the longitudinal groove 
D, the lateral grooves in communicating there 
with, the guide-pins.c operating therein, the 
construction and arrangement, being such 
that the doors. A may be moved out of the 
: way after having been slid to one side, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
123d day of January, 1894. 
OLIVER TIFF ANY SPRINGER. 
. In presence of - . 
WM. BRUCE, 
C. RIGGS. 
- 
75 
85 
95 
Dated at Hamilton, Ontario, Canada, this Ioo 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567671.txt	\mmymu 
#- og -6- 
~~262/ 
The NRS i. 
i: t. iio)-Li Ho. washingtoN. E. c. 
No Model.) 
No. 567,671, 
J. D. WILLIAMSON 
MECHANISM FOR OPERATING waiv 
Jr. 
ES OF ENGINES 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 
   
 
 
 
  
 
NSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS$?  
(No Model.) 
4 sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. D. WILLIAMSON, Jr. 
MECHANISMFOR OPERATING WALVES OF ENGINEs. 
No. 567,671. 
Patented Sept. 15, 1896. 
See 
III 
y 
R 
\ 
  
 
E 5ii 
III.iii 
& 
P 
: 
INVENTOR 
W. 22.T.A. 
ATTORNEY 
J. D. WILLIAMSON, Jr. 
MECHANISM FOR OPERATING WALWES OF ENGINES, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 567,671, 
 
Patented Sept. 15, 1896. 
WITNESSES: 
4-7. 2.- 
IWWEWOR 
...i.e. 
copiato-LTHO. washine. 
J. D. WILLIAMSON, Jr. 
MECHANISM FOR OPERATING WALWES OF ENGINES, 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
(No Model.) 
No. 567,671, 
Patented Sept. 15, 1896. 
 
 
VIII -- 
Ac 
Elm W 
z, 
A 
-ele--( 
WITNESSES: 
(2-234.4- 
4. J. e. 
WWEWTOR 
8.7%.A. 
fa. G z 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. WILLIAMSON, JR., OF PHILADELPHIA, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
MECHANISM FOR OPERATING VALVES OF ENGINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 567,671, dated September 15, 1896. 
Application filed May 15, 1894, Serial No. 5ll,344 (No model.) 
6o 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JOHN D. WILLIAMSON, 
Jr., of the city and county of Philadelphia, 
in the State of Pennsylvania, have invented 
5 a new and useful Improvementin Mechanism 
for Operating Valves of Steam and other 
Engines, which invention is fully set forth 
and illustrated in the following specification 
and accompanying drawings. 
Io The object of this invention is sufficiently 
indicated by its title above given. 
The invention will first be described in de 
tail, and then set forth in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
I5 a sectional view of a valve-operating mech 
anism embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical cross-section taken through Fig. 1 at 
the line (, b. Fig. 3 is a vertical cross-section 
taken through Fig. 1 at the line cd. Fig. 4 
2O is a side elevation showing my invention as 
applied to a steam steering-engine. Fig. 5 is 
a view in plan of Fig. 4. Figs. 6 and 7 show 
in side and end elevation, respectively, en 
larged views of the valve-operating mechan 
25 ism shown in Figs. 4 and 5, certain parts of 
the steering-engine being omitted. Fig. 8 
shows a modified form of valve-operating 
mechanism hereinafter described. 
In said figures the several parts are respec 
The number 1 indicates a shaft carried in 
bearings in standards 2, Figs. 4 and 5, and 
provided for a portion of its length with 
screw-threads 3. Fitted to and surrounding 
35 this screw-threaded shaft is a long sleeve or 
hollow rod 4, preferably provided with a 
grooved surface 5. At or near the central 
part of said sleeve or nut the projections 
forming the grooves are cut away and two 
4o half-rings 6 are fitted in, as clearly shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3. An annular casting or flanged 
ring 7, which derives movement from the 
sleeve 4, is held in position between two 
fixed collars 8, secured to the sleeve 4, by 
45 springs 9, Supported and sliding upon rods 10, 
secured to movable collars Ti. The collars 11 
are grooved so as to fit into the grooves in the 
sleeves 4. The ring 7 can move laterally over 
the entire grooved surface of the sleeve 4 
3o tively indicated by numbers, as follows: 
55 
until the springs 9 on One side of said ring 5o 
are fully compressed. The collars 11 are 
held by said springs against the two half 
rings 6, and said collars can move no further 
in Wardly than their central positions of origi 
nal adjustment. 
Any desired number of the springs 9 may 
be used, distributed circumferentially. 
In Figs. 4 to 7 the device above described 
is shown applied to a steam steering-engine 
for operating the controlling-valve of the 
same. Connected to the ring 7 is a forked 
lever or pair of arms 12, Figs. 4, 6, and 7, 
mounted upon a short shaft 13, two stops 35 
being provided for limiting the movement of 
this lever. Connected to the lever 12 are two 65 
connecting-rods 14, the other ends of which 
are connected to a forked lever 26, which cor 
responds to the lever 12 and is mounted upon 
a long shaft 16. Secured to the shaft 16 are 
the upper ends of two arms 15, the lower 7o 
ends of which are connected, by means of 
links 27, to the valve-rod 28 of the valve 29 
of the steering-engine, as shown in Figs. 6 
and 7. Said engine is provided with a drum 
shaft 17, carrying the usual chain-drum 18, 75 
and operated from the cylinders 19 by con 
necting-rods 20, crank-shaft 21, and worm 
gearing 22. Said drum-shaft 17 has secured 
to it a gear-wheel 23, which meshes with a 
spur-pinion 24, secured to the sleeve or nut 8o 
4 surrounding the shaft 1. 
The shaft 1 may be provided with a hand 
wheel, Fig. 6, for operating the same, or said 
shaft may be operated by any shafting or gear 
ing, or by any telemotor mechanism, whether '85 
mechanical, electric, hydraulic, or pneumatic. 
The operation of the mechanism above de 
scribed is as follows: If the shaft 1 be rotated 
by the hand-wheel 30, or any other suitable 
means connected thereto, the screw-threads 3 9o 
thereon will cause the sleeve or nut 4 to slide 
laterally, carrying with it the ring 7. This 
movement of the ring 7 will, through the in 
strumentality of the lever 12, connected there 
to, and the shaft 13, rods 14, arms 26, shafts 16, 95 
arms 15, links 27, and valve-rod 28, open the 
controlling-valve 29 of the steering-engine, 
and thus cause said engine to move the rudder 
2 
567,671 
- 
IO 
25 
into the desired position. The valve is held 
open until the movement of the steering-en 
gine causes the gear-wheel 23 on the drum 
shaft 17 to revolve the pinion 24. This rev 
olution of the pinion 24 will cause the sleeve 
4, to which it is secured, to rotate on the screw 
threaded shaft I and move backward, thus 
returning the flanged ring 7 and lever 12 to 
their original pusitions and closing the valve 
of the engine. The springs 9 are made strong 
enough to effect the movement of the ring 7 
in either direction. 
It is obvious that if the shaft 1 be rotated 
in the opposite direction to that above de 
scribed the valve of the engine and also the 
rudder will be moved in the opposite direction. 
The mechanism herein described presents 
the important advantage of preventing break 
age of any of the valve connections should 
the lever 12 bring up against either of the stops 
35, or should the valve of the engine stick on 
its seat or reach the end of its stroke while 
the shaft l is revolving, as in such case the 
ring 7 will cease its lateral movement, the 
sleeve or nut 4, however, continuing to slide 
laterally until the springs 9 on one side or the 
other of said ring, as the case may be, are 
compressed. Said springs will thus prevent 
breakage of any of the valve connections. 
This construction also provides for the steer 
ing-wheel being put hard over to either side 
when the rudder has been put hard over by 
the engine, should the engine in thus acting 
have moved the rudder in advance of the 
hand steering-wheel; or should the action 
of the hand-wheel hold the valve open after 
the rudder gets hard over and before the hand 
wheel has turned its full number of turns to 
either side the hand-wheel can still be re 
volved until it completes its full number of 
turns by compressing the springs. In this case 
the hand-wheel can be reversed from ** hard 
over, in unison with a hard-over helm, to 
amidships or any other reverse point de 
sired. 
In Fig. S a modification of my invention 
is shown in which the screw-threads on the 
shaft 1 and also the hollow sleeve or nut 4 
are dispensed with. The shaft 1 is shown in 
5o said figure as a plain rod, to which are keyed 
the fixed collars 8. Connected to said shaft 
or rod is one end of a lever 36, Fig. 8, full 
crumed at the point 37. This lever may be 
Operated by hand, or it may be connected to 
a rod leading from a telemotor or other ac 
tuating device, so as to impart reciprocating 
motion to the shaft 1. A floating lever 31 
has one end connected to the ring 7, its other 
end being connected to the piston-rod 19 of 
the cylinder 19. The valve-rod 28 is con 
nected to the lever 31 at the point 32, two 
stops 35 being provided to limit the move 
ment of said lever. If the operating-lever 36 
be moved so as to impart reciprocating mo 
tion to the shaft 1 in the direction of the ar 
row f, the lever 31 will effect the movement 
of the valve-stem in the same direction and 
open the valve to admit steam into the cylin 
der 19'. The piston-rod 19 will thus be forced 
in the direction of the arrow g, carrying with 
it the lever 31 and valve-stem 28, and thereby 
closing the valve. If in opening the Valve 
the lever 31 should bring up against one of 
the stops 35 and the shaft 1 be still kept in 
motion by the lever 36, one set of springs 9 
will compress and hold the valve open until 
the engine has moved the required distance 
to close the valve. For example, With the 
parts moving in the direction of the arrows, 
Fig. 8, the continued movement of the lever 
36 after the lever 31 has impinged against 
the stop 35 will result in compressing the 
springs 9 at the right-hand side, thus pre 
venting breakage of any of the parts. 
It is obvious that the lever 36 may be sub 
stituted for the wheel 30, (shown in Fig. 6,) 
in which case the movement of said lever 
will impart reciprocating motion to both the 
shaft 1 and the sleeve 4, and thus effect the 
opening of the valve, the closing of the Valve 
being effected by the revolution of the pin 
ion 24, which will, as hereinbefore described, 
cause the sleeve 4 to rotate on the Screw 
threaded shaft 1 and move backward, thus , 
closing the valve of the engine. 
The groove shown on the sleeve 4 and col 
lars 11 may be omitted, in which event the 
spring-rods 10 may be provided with collars 
25, Fig. 1, to prevent twisting of the springs 9. 
I do not confine myself to the use of the 
valve-operating mechanism herein described, 
in conjunction with a steering-engine, as said 
mechanism may be used on engines employed 
for other purposes, and in particular where 
the motion for the work required is of an in 
termittent character. If it be used in con 
junction with a steering-engine, such engine 
may be of any desired construction, operated 
by any motive power. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim 
1. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a reciprocating rod; a ring or 
annular casting loosely mounted on said rod 
so as to slide thereon, and connected with the 
valve; and a spring or springs on both sides 
of said ring. 
2. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a reciprocating rod; a ring 
loosely mounted on said rod so as to slide 
thereon and connected with the valve; fixed 
and movable collars; and a spring or springs 
between said collars on both sides of said 
ring. 
3. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a reciprocating rod; a ring 
adapted to slide thereon, and to be connected 
with the valve; a spring or springs on both 
sides of said ring; a pinion secured to said 
rod; and a gear-wheel secured to a shaft and 
meshing with said pinion. 
4. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
45 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
567,671 
3. 
IO 
- 
combination of a reciprocating rod; a ring 
adapted to slide thereon and to be connected 
With the valve; fixed and movable collars; a 
spring or springs on both sides of said ring; 
a pinion secured to said rod; and a gear 
wheel secured to a shaft and meshing with 
said pinion. 
5. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a reciprocating rod; a ring 
adapted to slide thereon and to be connected 
with the valve; a spring or springs on both 
sides of said ring; a lever connected to said 
ring; a rod connected to said lever; and a 
double-armed lever having one arm con 
nected to said rod and its other end to a 
valve or valve-rod. 
6. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a reciprocating rod; a ring 
adapted to slide thereon and to be connected 
With the valve; a spring or springs on both 
sides of said ring; a pinion secured to said 
rod; a gear-wheel secured to a shaft and 
meshing with said pinion; a lever connected 
to said ring; a rod connected to said lever; 
and a double-armed lever having one end 
connected to said rod and its other end to a 
valve or valve-rod. 
7. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft; and a 
ring or annular casting adapted to slide on 
said sleeve and to be connected with the 
Valve. 
8. In a Valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft and 
provided with a grooved surface; and a ring 
adapted to slide on said sleeve and to be con 
nected with the valve. 
9. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft; a 
ring adapted to slide on said sleeve and to be 
connected with the valve; and springs on 
both sides of said ring. 
10. In a valve-operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft; a 
ring adapted to slide on said sleeve and to be 
connected with the valve; fixed and movable 
collars; and springs between said collars on 
both sides of said ring. 
ll. In a Valve-operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft and 
provided with a grooved surface; a ring 
adapted to slide on said sleeve and to be con 
nected with the valve; and two half-rings 
between said ring and said sleeve. 
12. In a Valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft and pro 
vided with a grooved surface; a ring adapted 
to slide On Said sleeve and to be connected 
With the valve; a spring or springs on both 
sides of said ring; and two half-rings between 
said ring and said sleeve. 
13. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft and pro 
vided with a grooved surface; a ring adapted 
to slide on said sleeve and to be connected 
with the valve; fixed collars secured to said 
sleeve; movable collars provided with grooved 
surfaces; and springs between said collars on 
both sides of said ring. 
14. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft; a ring 
adapted to slide on said sleeve and to be con 
nected with the valve; a pinion secured to said 
sleeve; and a gear-wheel secured to a shaft 
and meshing with said pinion. 
15. In a valve-operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft and pro 
vided with a grooved surface; a ring adapted 
to slide on said sleeve and to be connected 
with the valve; a pinion secured to said 
sleeve; and a gear-wheel secured to a shaft 
and meshing with said pinion. 
16. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft; a ring 
or annular casting adapted to slide on said 
sleeve and to be connected with the valve; 
springs on both sides of said annular casting; 
a pinion secured to said sleeve; and a gear 
wheel secured to a shaft and meshing with 
said pinion. 
17. In a valve - operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft; a ring 
adapted to slide on said sleeve and to be con 
nected with the valve; fixed and movable col 
lars; springs between said collars on both 
sides of said rings; a pinion secured to said 
sleeve; and a gear-wheel secured to a shaft 
and meshing with said pinion. 
18. In a valve- operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft and pro 
vided with a grooved surface; a ring adapted 
to slide on said sleeve and to be connected 
with the valve; fixed collars secured to said 
sleeve; movable collars provided with grooved 
surfaces; springs between said collars on both 
sides of said ring; a pinion secured to said 
sleeve; and a gear-wheel secured to a shaft 
and meshing with said pinion. 
19. In a valve- operating mechanism, the 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft; a ring 
adapted to slide on said sleeve and to be con 
nected with the valve; springs on both sides 
of said ring; a lever connected to said ring; 
a rod connected to said lever; and a double 
armed lever having one arm connected to said 
rod and its other arm to a valve or valve-rod. 
20. In a valve-operating mechanism, the 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
ICC 
O 
II5 
I 25 
i. 
567,671. 
combination of a rotary screw-threaded shaft; I double-armed lever having one arm connected 
a sleeve or nut surrounding said shaft; a ring to said rod and its other arm to a valve or Io 
adapted to slide on said sleeve and to be con- valve-rod. 
nected with the valve; Springs on both sides 
of said ring; a EE to said sleeve; 
a gear-wheel secured to a shaft and meshing 
with said pinion; a lever connected to said 
ring; a rod connected to said lever; and a 
C. WESLEY RUFFELL, 
WILLIAM D. CLOUDS. 
JOIIN D. WILLIAMSON, JR. 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567771.txt	(No Model.) 
A PUNTENEY. 
SWEEP RAKE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 567,771, 
Patented Sept, 15, 1896. 
 
(No Model.). 
No. 567,771, 
 
A PUNTENEY. 
SWEEP RAKE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 15, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
 
'S 
 
 
 
(YR 
 
  
S 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Z/Zizes.62% 
46.7- . . 
. 
ZZZZezzaz 
4ZzZezez 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARCHIBALD PUNTENEY, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI. 
SWEEP RAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 567,771, dated September 15, 1896. 
Application filed February 17, 1896. Serial No. 579,622, (No model.) 
55 
75 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
To all, whon, it nucly concern: 
Beit known that I, ARCHIBALDPUNTENEY, 
of Kansas City, Jackson county, Missouri, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Sweep-Rakes, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming a part thereof. 
My invention relates to rakes, and more 
particularly to improvements in that class 
known as sweep-rakes; and the object of 
the invention is to generally improve the 
mechanism for raising or lowering the rake. 
A still further object of the invention is to 
produce a rake embodying these improve 
ments which is of light draft and strong, 
durable, and comparatively inexpensive O 
manufacture. 
To these ends the invention consists in 
certain novel and peculiar features of con 
struction and arrangement, as hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
In order that the invention may be fully 
understood, reference is to be had to the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents in perspective a sweep 
rake constructed in accordance with my in 
vention. Fig. 2 represents, on a larger scale, 
a side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 repre 
sents in section the upper end of the caster 
wheel standard and shows the same em 
braced by one half or one section of the coup 
ling block or casting, and shows also a bear 
ing-pin journaled loosely in said' standard 
and said coupling-section. Fig. 4 represents 
a vertical section of the coupling-block and 
of the pin, taken at right angles to the sec 
tion shown in Fig. 3; and Fig. 5 is a hori 
Zontal section taken on the line aca: of Fig. 3, 
these three figures being shown on a much 
larger scale in Figs. 1 and 2. 
In the said drawings, 1 designates a trans 
verse bar, to the under side of which the 
rear ends of a number of rake-teeth 2 are 
bolted, said rake-teeth being arranged par 
allel with each other and at right angles to 
the bar 1. A suitable distance forward of 
and parallel with the bar 1 is a second trans 
verse bar 3, which is bolted to the under side 
of said teeth. 
4 designates bars which are bolted to the 
opposite ends of the bar 1 and project out 
ward and very slightly to the rear, prefer 
ably, and 5 designates draft-bars or tongues 
which diverge slightly to the front and are se 
cured upon bars 4 by bolts 6, which bolts serve 
also as a means of securing together the bars 
1 and 4 and the end teeth of the rake. Said 
tongues or draft-bars 5 are braced from out 
Ward movement by means of the rods 7, 
which connect them with the bars 4. 
S designates clips which are pivoted to the 
outer ends of the bars 4 and are coupled 
loosely to the singletrees 9 in the customary 
manner. To these singletrees the draft-ani 
mals are hitched in the usual manner. 
10 designates bars which are bolted rigidly 
to the under side of the rake-frame and cen 
trally thereof and converge at equal angles to 
the rear, where they are united by parallel 
cross-beams 11, and bolted in turn to the up 
per side of said cross-beams and centrally 
thereof is the longitudinal bar 12, upon the 
rear end of which is secured a reinforcing me 
tallic sleeve 13, provided with an upwardly 
projecting boss or lug 14, in which is loosely 
journaled the vertical cylindrical standard 
15 of the caster-wheel 16. 
17 designates a casting or metallic coup 
ling which is cylindrical in form and com 
prises two similar halves or sections, from 
the rear upper ends of which project the lugs 
18 and from the front lower ends the simi 
lar lugs 19. The sections are secured to 
gether by bolts 20 and 21, which extend 
through the lugs 18 and 19. 
Each section is 
formed with a semicylindrical cavity, which 
conjointly form the cylindrical hole or open 
ing 22, in which the upper end of the caster 
standard 15 is loosely journaled, and said 
sections are also provided with semicircular 
grooves or channels, which together form the 
single circular groove or channel 23, into 
which the opposite end of the hardened 
steel pin 24 loosely projects, said pin being 
loosely journaled also in the opening 25 of 
said standard, as shown clearly in Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5. 
26 designates a short link which is pivot 
ally mounted at its rear end upon the bolt 21 
and is pivotally bolted at its opposite end to 
one end of the lever 27, which leveris pivotally 
connected to the upper end of a SWinging link 
28, pivotally mounted in turn upon the bolt 
29, secured to the longitudinal bar 12. Ad 
jacent to said lever and bolted rigidly upon 
the bar 12 is the frame 30, provided with the 
notches 31 and 32 for engagement at times 
95 
IOO 
% 
567,771 
with the ever 27, which ever, it may be ob 
served, is preferably of spring metal, so that 
when it is thrown into one of said notches it 
will hold such position until the operator dis 
connects it, as will be readily understood. 
l3olted to the end rack-bars above the bar 
3 are standards 33, and said standards brace 
and are braced in turn by the tongues or 
draft-bars 5, to which they are bolted. Said 
standards 33 provide a support for a Swing 
ing hay-discharge frame which is constructed 
as follows: 34 designates a transverse bar 
which is pivotally connected at its opposite 
ends to the upper ends of said standards, and 
35 a number of depending teeth which are se 
cured at their upper ends to said bar. 36 des 
ignates a handle, which is bolted also to said 
bar near its middle, whereby said hay-dis 
charge frame may be pivotally operated. 
Depending from the rake a suitable distance 
from its rear end are the bearing-blocks 37, 
in which are secured the axles 38 of the sup 
porting-wheels 39, and said supporting-wheels 
are inclosed at their upper sides by the guards 
40, so as to prevent the hay being caught and 
entangled with the said wheel. The driver's 
seat 41 is arranged within convenient dis 
tance of the levers 27 and 36 and is supported 
in the customary manner by a standard of 
the framework. 
In the practical operation of the machine 
as it is drawn across the field the lever 27 is 
in engagement with the notch 32. In mov 
ing to such position, because the rear end of 
the lever is fulcrumed to the link 26, carried 
by the substantially-?ixed coupling 17, the 
link 28, together with the rear end of the 
machine, is lifted until the bearing-lug 14 is 
adjacent to the lower side of said coupling, 
and the front end of the rake, which tilts 
upon the front wheels, is depressed to the po 
sition indicated by the head of the arrow C. 
Occupying this downwardly and forwardly 
inclined position, it is obvious that in the 
travel of the machine the hay encountered is 
caused to roll or pile upon the rake, and 
each fresh charge of hay gathered by the 
rake forces that already accumulated farther 
to the rear, until finally, when the machine 
is fully loaded, the hay is packed thereon to 
the rear as well as forward of the axis of the 
wheels, so that the load is practically bal 
anced upon the machine. As it accumulates 
in such quantity upon the rake its natural 
tendency is to move rear Ward and over the 
rear end of the same, but this is prevented 
by the swinging frame hereinbefore described. 
When a sufficient quantity of hay is gath 
ered upon the rake, the driver grasps the le 
ver 27, disengages it from the notch 32, and 
forces it forward into engagement with the 
notch 31, thereby lowering the rear end of 
the machine to the position shown in Figs. 1 
and 2 and raising the front end of the lake 
until the teeth 2 occupy a horizontal plane. 
The driver needs to exert himself only 
slightly in this operation, because of the fact 
25 
45 
55 
of a part of the load being rearward of the 
axis of the front wheels, which form the pivot 
or balancing point of the rake, and it is evi 
dent that the draft-animals are also relieved 
in a considerable degree. When the stack 
is reached, the lever is again thrown rear 
ward to its original position, so as to tilt the 
front end of the rake downwardly, and the 
machine is trailed rear Wardly, and at the 
same time the swinging frame is moved in 
the direction indicated by the arrow, Fig. 2, 
so as to accelerate the discharge of the hay 
from the rake, which saves considerable time 
and inconvenience in that it is delivered at 
the precise point desired. The hinged frame 
being located and arranged as described pre 
vents hay from falling over the rake When 
fully loaded and when traveling to the stack, 
and as a result cleaner and better work is 
done. 
As a means both for relieving the draft 
animals of considerable Work and of increas 
ing the durability of the machine I have pro 
vided the connection between the operating 
lever and the caster-standard illustrated 
clearly in Figs. 3, 4, and 5. The method of 
securing said coupling and said standard to 
gether provides a simple, strong, and durable, 
and yet practically an antifriction connec 
tion between the coupling and standard, and 
the pin 24, which bears most of the work and 
strain at this point, is mounted loosely in the 
standard and groove of the coupling. 
From the above description it is obvious 
that I have produced a sweep-rake which will 
be found of great service and by which the 
work may be expedited and the draft-ani 
mals relieved in a considerable degree. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The combination, in a sweep-rake, of a suit 
able frame mounted upon wheels, rearwardly 
converging bars secured to said frame, trans 
verse bars connecting the rear ends of said 
converging bars, a short longitudinal barse 
cured upon the transverse bars, a notched or 
rack frame secured to said bar, a bearing 
boss also secured to the same, a caster-carry 
ing standard journaled in the said boss, a 
cross-pin carried at its upper end, a cylindrical 
coupling mounted upon the upper end of said 
caster-carrying standard, and provided with 
an annular horizontal groove engaged by the 
projecting ends of said cross-pin, a link piv 
oted to said coupling, a lever pivoted at its 
lower end to said link, and adapted to en 
gage said rack-bar, and a link uniting said 
lever outward of its pivotal point with the 
said longitudinal bar, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ARCEIBALO PUNTENEY. 
Witnesses: 
M. R. REMLEY, 
G. Y. THORPE. 
75 
95 
ICO 
Io5 
O 
II 5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567871.txt	(No Model.) 
S. W. WARDWELL, Jr. 
APPARATUS FOR WINDING COPS, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 567,871. 
Patented Sept, l5, 1896. 
 
(No Model.) 
S. W, WARDWELL, Jr. 
APPARATUS FOR WINDING COPS, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 567,871, 
Patented Sept. 15, 1896. 
Ziy.2 
 
28itv.co.8-cy 
% (24%-21/ 
3v-uovo 
co-a2,... 
eltovoo 
 
S. W. WARDWELL, Jr. 
APPARATUS FOR WINDING COPS, 
3 Sheets 
Sheet 3, 
Patented Sept, 15, 1896. 
N 
" 2 96 
94| __ ______| 
|_____________?f 
(. 
-{ -- - 
(No Model.) 
No. 567,871. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMON. W. WARDWELL, JR., OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE UNIVERSAL WINDING COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
APPARATUS FOR WIND N G COPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 567,871, dated September 15, 1896. 
Application filed December 8, 1894, Serial No. 531,242, (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SIMON W. WARDWELL, 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Winding Cops, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to that class of cop 
Winding machines, such, for instance, as illus 
trated in my Letters Patent Nos. 480,157 and 
506,959, in which there is a rotating cop 
holder, a reciprocating guide, and means for 
varying the relative movements thereof; and 
my invention consists in the details of con 
struction of such machines, fully set forth 
hereinafter, and illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an end view of a winding-ma 
chine embodying my improvements, Fig. 2 
showing an elevation of devices at the oppo 
site end; Fig. 3, a front elevation in part 
section. 
The frame A is suitably constructed to sup 
port the Operating parts, including a spindle 
C, and means for rotating it, a thread-guide 
C, having an eye ac, and means for recipro 
cating the Said guide, and appliances for Wa 
rying the relative action of the guide and 
spindle, so that at the end of each reciproca 
tion the guide Will occupy a different position 
as regards the holder or cop, that is, it will 
be opposite a point on the periphery of the 
cop back of Orin advance of the point to which 
the guide Was Opposite at the previous re 
ciprocation. 
As shown, the spindle a is the end of the 
driving-shaft 9, but any other suitable form 
of support for a holder (solid or tubular) may 
be used. As shown, the spindle projects from 
the side frame to receive a tubular holder 10. 
The shaft 9 for rotating the holder is driven 
by a driving-pulley 12, receiving a driving 
belt, turning loosely on the shaft 9, and hav 
ing an inner beveled face to engage the outer 
beveled face of a clutch-pulley 13, turning 
with but sliding on the shaft 9, the pulley 13 
being pressed into engagement by a spring 15 
and carried Out of engagement by the down 
Ward pressure of a beveled projection 20 upon 
an arm 19, extending from a rock-shaft 21, 
 
55 
75 
when the said projection 20 is brought against 
the beveled face of a collar 22 on the pulley. 
A spring 18 tends to turn the shaft to throw 
downward the arm 19 and carry the pulleys 
out of engagement. A suitable detentisem 
ployed for maintaining the shaft 21 in posi 
tion to keep the projection 20 out of contact 
with the collar 22. Thus the shaft 21 carries 
at one end an arm 45, Figs. I and 3, with a 
cross-shoulder 46, that engages a cross-shoul 
der 43 upon the arm 42 of a lever E, actuated 
in one direction by a spring S', thereby pre 
venting the rocking of the shaft 21 under the 
action of the Spring 18 so long as the shoul 
ders 43 46 are engaged, when the pulley 12 
Will drive the shaft. 
As the guide in this class of machines must 
be reciprocated very rapidly, it has been 
found that unless the guide is very light in 
weight the momentum from the rapid move 
ment will tend to carry it out of position and 
interfere with that nice and regular operation 
which is necessary in order that the thread 
as it is brought to each end of the cop may 
be laid across one of the preceding threads 
with a sharp bend and carried back at one 
side of said preceding thread. Therefore the 
guide C moves on a carrier-frame F, the guide 
being of very thin light metal and sliding 
upon the frame, which is of heavier material 
and which is pivoted or otherwise supported 
so that it can be carried outward as the cop 
increases in size, it being necessary to the 
formation of a cop of the character desired 
to maintain that portion of the guide which 
has the guiding-eye in close contact with the 
cop throughout the entire Series or operations 
of building up the cop. 
Thus the guide, in 
which is the guide-opening ac, consists of a 
thin blade of metal with an opening receiv 
ing a porcelain or other vitreous stud i, in 
which is a notch, while the frame F, Figs. 1 
and 3, consists of an arm 4, with a hub 4 
swinging on a stud 26 at one side of the main 
frame, a horizontal rib 34, having two paral 
lel slots, receiving the arms of a guiding 
bracket 35, secured to the guide C. From 
the lower arm of the blacket 35 a stud 40 ex 
tends into the groove at of a cam-wheel D, 
secured to a shaft 25, extending through the 
hollow bearing or sleeve 27 of the frame and 
90 
CO 
567,871 
5 
O 
driven by devices hereinafter described from 
the shaft 9, so that the rotation of the shaft 
25 and its cam reciprocates the guides during 
the rotation of the spindle and holder. As 
the spindle and its holder must be turned 
generally two or more times to each recipro 
cation of the guide, the shaft 9 is rotated 
more rapidly than the shaft 25, and this is 
effected through the medium of suitable in 
termediate gears. As shown, a grooved pull 
ley F. upon the shaft 9 carries a belt u, pass 
ing to a grooved pulley D' upon a shaft 29, 
carried by an eccentric c, turning and Secured 
in the split hub 5 of an arm or frame 27, 
swinging upon the projecting end of the 
shaft 25, its weight tending to depress the outer 
end of the said arm, so as to maintain the 
belt at taut to prevent any possible slipping. 
A detachable pinion 30 on the shaft 29 gears 
with a detachable toothed wheel 31 on the 
shaft 25, and it will be seen that by the use 
of interchangeable gears 30 31 of different 
diameters the spindle A may be caused to 
revolve any desired number of revolutions to 
each reciprocation of the guide, and an in 
crease in the number of windings does not 
reduce the speed at which thread is wound. 
The hub 33 of the frame 27 is secured detach 
ably to swing freely upon the end of the shaft 
25 by a nut 32, so that the gear 31 can be readily 
renewed and replaced, and as a change of gears 
might necessitate carrying the axis of the gear 
30 from or to that of the gear 31 the stud S2 
of the gear 30 is placed eccentrically on the 
eccentric c, which, after loosening the screw 
81, binding the split hub 5, may be turned to 
bring the stud to its desired position. As 
before stated, however, the spindle C, must 
revolve not only a sufficient number of times 
to effect the desired number of winds at each 
rotation of the guide, but it must also have 
either a slightly less or slightly greater move 
ment, so that a point on the cop which at the 
end of one reciprocation of the guide is oppo 
site the eye of the lattershall at the end of the 
next reciprocation be a distance beyond or 
back of the eye of the guide equal to the dis 
tance between two adjacent bends following 
each other at the periphery of the cop, thus 
laying successive coils in different positions. 
In the construction shown the relative incre 
ment of movement of the cop spindle and 
guide is secured by making one of the pulleys 
F D'an expansion-pulley. As shown, the pull 
ley Fis an expansion-pulley consisting of two 
disks 79 84, each having one side beveled, 
with means for carrying the disks to and from 
each other, so as to increase or decrease the 
diameter of the channel in which the belt it, 
(which is triangularin cross-section) lies. A 
spring 83 tends to separate the disks, while 
they may be brought together against the ac 
tion of the spring, turning the disk 84 and 
securing it by means of a nut 87. To permit 
these parts to be readily applied to the shaft, 
the disk 79 has a hub fitting the shaft and se 
cured to the same by a screw 87, and a thread 
for the threaded hub of the disk S4, cut on 
this hub-wheel, also receives this nut 87. 
By adjusting the disks to increase or de 
crease the working diameter of the pulley F. 
it is not only possible to secure the added or 
decreased movement necessary to cause the 
thread of one coil to be laid beyond that of 
the other, but it is also possible to secure that 
nice adjustment necessary to this end under 
variations of operations resulting from dif 
ferences in the characters of the threads and 
from different conditions of the same thread 
from variations in the atmospheric condi 
tions. To take up any slack of the belt and 
prevent vibration of the frame 27, an eccen 
tric L, Figs. 2 and 3, is hung loosely on the 
shaft 9 and is Weighted to bear on the frame 
27, permitting the latter to swing outward, 
but preventing it from swinging inward. 
In order to stop the machine by hand, the 
the lever E, Fig. 1, is mounted loosely on the 
shaft 21 and is provided with two lugs 1313, 
the arm 45 projecting from a hub secured to 
the shaft 21 and having two lugs 13139, while 
a horn 13", extending from the arm 42 of the 
lever E, is in position to make contact with 
the projection 13. 
When the handle E' is swung in the direc 
tion of the arrow, Fig. 1, the contact of the 
projection 13 with the horn 13 swings out 
the arm 42 of the lever E", disengages the 
shoulders 43 46 and the spring 18, Fig. 3, 
then turns the shaft 21, and arrests the ma 
chine. When the arm is swung in a reverse 
direction, the contact of the arms 13 13 rocks 
the shaft 21 to put the machine in operation 
and SWings the arm 45 so as to again engage 
the shoulders 4346. 
To arrest the motion of the machine if the 
thread should break, a stop-actuating device 
of suitable construction is used. As shown, 
the said stop-actuating device consists of a 
lever 51, pivoted to the lever E, its long arm 
52 carrying the guide 56 and its short arm 
having a curved cam-face adapted to engage 
the periphery of a slightly-eccentric disk 53 
on the shaft 9. The draft of the thread nor 
mally holds the lever in the position Fig. 1, 
but if the thread breaks the short arm of the 
stop-lever swings downward, is brought 
against the eccentric 53, and the latter forces 
out the lever 51, and with it the lever E, thus 
disengaging the shoulders 43 46, when the 
shaft 21 will be turned by the spring 18 and 
the clutch-wheel22 will be drawn back, stop 
ping the machine. 
It is desirable in many instances to prevent 
knotted threads from being wound onto the 
cop, and a knot-catcher 58, Fig. 1, is there 
fore provided to operate in connection with 
the stop device to arrest the motion of the 
machine whenever a knot approaches the 
guide. The knot-catcher may be of any suit 
able character. As shown, it consists of a 
lever 58, pivoted to a pin 61 at the end of the 
arm 44 of the lever E and having at the op 
posite end a fork or notch through which the 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9 O 
Ioo 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
567,87. 
3 
65 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
To5 
IIO 
II5 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
thread passes toward the guide 56. At the 
pivoted end of the lever 58 is a cam 59, which 
bears against a set - screw 63, extending 
through a stud on the frame of the machine, 
and an adjustable spring 65 tends to hold the 
lever 58 against any suitable bearing. When 
a knot upon the thread is brought against 
the lower edge of the lever 58, the latter is 
lifted and the cam 59, bearing on the screw 63, 
depresses the end of the arm 44 of the lever 
E, rocking the latter and carrying the shoul 
der 43 away from the shoulder 46, so that the 
stop-motion is put into operation to arrest 
the movements of the machine. 
In other machines which I have made the 
eXpansion-pulley has been carried by the 
SWinging frame 27; but this has been attended 
With disadvantages and interference with 
nice adjustment, which I avoid by placing 
the expansion-pulley upon the driving-shaft 
9. In order to facilitate and cheapen the con 
Struction, Imake one section of the expansion 
pulley adjustable upon the other, which lat 
ter, therefore, may be bored, so as to be readily 
connected to a driving-shaft without any turn 
ing or cutting of the latter. By making the 
belt V shape in cross-section, in combination 
with an expansion-pulley having two beveled 
Sections, I secure a flat bearing for each face 
of the belt and a more accurate working of 
the device in securing minute variations in 
the increment of movement. 
While I have shown a cylinder with an ec 
centric shaft 29, rotatably adjustable in the 
frame 27 to vary the distance between the 
axes of the gears 30 31, I do not limit myself 
to this means, as other adjustable bearings 
for the shaft 29 may be used. 
It Will also be evident that other means 
than those described may be employed for 
preventing the frame 27 from swinging to 
Ward the shaft 9, while permitting it to swing 
outwardly therefrom. 
While I have shown the arm 58 with its slit 
for receiving the thread as combined with 
certain appliances which operate to stop the 
machine, it will be evident that such a swing 
ing arm may be combined with stop devices 
of a different construction with like effect. 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
struction and arrangement of parts shown, I 
claim as my invention 
1. The combination of the rotating spindle 
C, of a grooved Swinging frame F, a guide C 
consisting of a blade of metal, and a guide 
bracket 35 connected there with and sliding in 
the frame, a projection extending from said 
bracket, and a driving-cam having a groove 
to receive such projection, substantially as 
Set forth. 
2. The combination of a Swinging frame, a 
reciprocating guide carried thereby, and a 
driving-cam D, with a gear 31 detachably con 
- 
nected with said cam, a gear 30, its shaft and 
stud therefor carried by the frame, and means 
for adjusting the said stud to different posi 
tions to shift the shaft of the gear 30 to and 
from the axis of the frame, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. The combination of the rotating spindle 
and reciprocating guide, the cam D operating 
the guide, and gear 31 connected detachably 
therewith, and a swinging frame 27 carrying 
a cylinder c, rotatably adjustable in said 
frame, and a shaft passing through said cyl 
inder eccentrically thereto and carrying a pin 
ion 30, and means for operating the same, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of the shaft 9 and its 
pulley F, the shaft 29 and its pulley D', a 
swinging frame carrying the shaft 29, and an 
eccentric L bearing upon said frame to pre 
ventit from swinging toward the shaft 9, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. The combination with the stop-shaft 21 
of a cop-Winding machine, of an arm 45 ex 
tending from the shaft, having a shoulder 46, 
a lever Epivoted to the frame and having a 
shoulder 43 to engage the shoulder 46, a piv 
oted arm 51 pivoted to the lever E, and also 
a guide for the thread, a winding-shaft 9 and 
an eccentric thereon arranged to engage the 
opposite end of the arm 51, all substantially 
as set forth and for the purpose specified. 
6. The combination with the shaft 21 of a 
cop-winding machine, of an arm 45 on said 
shaft, a lever E pivoted to the frame of the 
machine, and having an arm 42, engaging 
shoulders upon the said arms 45, 42, and a 
lever E' having a projection arranged to make 
contact with a projection on the lever E, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
7. The combination with the stop devices 
carried by the frame of a winding-machine, 
and with a hand-lever E", of a detent-lever E 
for holding the stop devices out of operation, 
arm 58 pivoted to the lever E having a slot at 
the end and provided with a cam, and a bear 
ing for the cam on the frame of the machine, 
substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination with the shaft 21, of an 
arm 45 connected to said shaft and having a 
shoulder 46 and projections 13, 13, a detent 
lever E having the shoulder engaging the 
shoulder 46, and a lever E having projections 
13 and 13, and an arm extending from the 
lever E in position to make contact with the 
projection 13, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
SIMON. W. WARDWELL, Jr. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP E. BRADY, 
G. N. CRANDALL, 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US567971.txt	(No Model.) 
G., J. G. ALBRAITH, 
ELECTRICHAND LIGHTING GAS BURNER 
 
No. 567,971. 
Patented Sept. 22, 1896. 
iSEE 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE J. GALBRAITH, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
ELECTRIC GAS LIGHTING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRIC HAND - LIGHTING GAS-BURNER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 567,971, dated September 22, 1896. 
Application filed June 25, 1896, Serial No. 596,868, (No model.) 
To all, uhon, it invally conce77. 
Beit known that I, GEORGE.J. GALBRAITH, 
of Boston, Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Electric Hand 
5 Lighting Gas-Burners, and particularly in 
that variety thereof known as candle-burn 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of elec 
tric hand-lighting gas-burners in which the 
Io movement of the thumb-piece serves to oscil 
late the gas-valve and also to vibrate an 
electrode at the top of an elongated gas-pillar, 
such as is necessary in the case of what are 
called candle-burners, such burners re 
I5 quiring a very much more extended burner 
pillar, in order to carry the burner-tip up to 
the top of a porcelain or similar tube repre 
senting a candle. The construction of these 
burners, of course, requires a different kind 
2O of apparatus from that required in the ordi 
nary form in which the burner-tube is of 
Only ordinary and much less height. 
My invention consists in new devices in 
this variety of candle-burners and a new 
25 combination of devices, all so adapted as to 
avoid making a spark when turning off the 
gaS. 
My invention will be easily understood by 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
Figure I is a front view of the entire com 
bination, omitting the porcelain candle-shade 
and its support, with the gas turned off. 
Fig. 2 is a similar view with the gas turned 
35 on. Fig. 3 is a side view with the gas turned 
on. Fig. 4 is a view of the entire combina 
tion when the support for the porcelain can 
dle and the porcelain itself are in place. Fig. 
5 is a section through the line 55, Fig. 1. 
4o Fig. 6 is a detail. Fig. 7 is a top view in 
horizontal section through y y. 
A is a bracket Supporting the burner-tube, 
and also the handle a, which has the cam 
plate a cut away so as to operate against 
45 the stop 1, and having also the toothed plate 
a; above the bracket held in place by the 
ScreW 2. 
B is the Oscillating gas-Valve, having rig 
idly fixed upon its stem the toothed plate b, 
5o having the teeth b', and held in place by the 
3o which 
D (best shown twice enlarged in Fig. 7) is 6o 
screw U*, and perforated at b to admit the 
connecting-rod X. 
C is the elongated gas-pillar, having the 
fixed electrode c, preferably set in a metal 
collar c', insulated from the burner-pillar C 55 
and connecting with one of the circuit-wires 
c, and upon opposite sides of which body C 
are two flexible springs c for holding in po 
sition the porcelain candle. 
a vibrating plate whose center is cut away 
eccentrically, and which is pivoted at dupon 
an arm d", which is loosely pivoted to the 
burner-pillar C by means of the screw-pivot 
3, which, for the sake of strength, preferably 65 
passes through the burner-pillar C and is 
turned over or soldiered at 4. About the head 
of the pivot 3 rotates the plate D, said plate 
having also a pin 5, to which is attached the 
other end of the connecting-rod X, and con- 7o 
nected with said plate at d is a bit of plati 
num wired, serving as the movable electrode. 
The arm d is retained from the pillar and 
against the head of the screw 3 by the fric 
tion-spring d". The purpose in this friction 75 
or retaining spring is to exert sufficient pres 
sure upon the arm d to hold it stationary 
during the elevating of the rod X until the 
plate D bears against the lower part of the 
pin 3 instead of the upper part, from which 8o 
time on, until the electrode assumes the posi 
tion shown in Fig. 2, it is necessary that the 
arm d should revolve with the plate D. 
E is a guide through which passes the 
movable electroded. 
Having described the construction of my 
improvement, its operation will now be evi 
dent. The support F for the porcelain can 
dle G and the candle being understood to be 
in place, as in Fig. 4, when the apparatus is go 
in the position shown in Fig. 1, with the gas 
turned off, a quarter-rotation of the thumb 
key will, by means of the toothed plates a 
and b, cause the gas-Valve to partially rotate 
until it is open. The extent of rotation is de- 95 
termined by the cam on the plate a' and the 
stop 1. At the same time the connecting 
rod X will be elevated to the position shown 
in Fig. 2. In the course of assuming that 
position the connecting-rod will cause the Ioo 
85 
2 
567,971 
O 
plate D to partially rotate, together with the 
arm d", which is pivoted upon it at d, and 
thereby the movable electrode d', passing 
through the guide E, will be slightly elevated, 
oscillated into and out of contact with the 
fixed electrode, and then slightly depressed, 
lighting the gas. In turning the gas off the 
rod X, pulling down upon the pin 5, will, by 
reason of the cut-away portion of the plate D, 
slightly depress the same, and thereby so de 
press the movable electrode d that, as it 
passes back to the position shown in Fig. 1, 
it will not make contact with the fixed elec 
trode C. It will be seen, therefore, that bat 
tery power is saved by avoiding any spark, 
except to light the gas, which result will be 
seen to be brought about by the plate D and 
its accessories, as described. It will be un 
derstood that, considering the length of the 
burner-tube which is necessary in candle 
burners, the gas-valve must be slightly opened 
long enough to enable some issuing gas to 
reach the burner-tip before the two electrodes 
are brought into and out of contact. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In an electric hand-lighting gas-burner, 
in combination with the burner-pillar having 
a fixed electrode, a plate D, its center cut 
away as described, having the projections d, 
d', and 5, an arm d", both said plate and said 
arm being loosely pivoted to the burner-pillar 
and to each other, a friction-spring d", a mov 
able electrode hung in the projection d, a 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
guide E, and mechanism to properly OScillate 
said plate and arm so as to cause said mov 
able electrode to make and break contact 
with the fixed electrode, at the ignition but 
not at the extinguishment of the gas, Sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In an electric hand-lighting gas-burner, 
as a device for operating the movable elec 
trode, the plate D and the arm d", both loosely 
pivoted to each other and to the burner-tip 
by the pin 3, the spring d", a guide E to hold 
the movable electrode, a movable electrode 
d, the connecting-rod X, and mechanism for 
lifting and lowering the same so as to Oscil 
late the plate D and thereby vibrate said 
movable electrode, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
3. In an electric hand-lighting gas-burner, 
in combination with a burner-pillar and a 
supporting-standard therefor, and a fixed 
electrode thereon, the thumb-cock A, having 
the toothed plate C, and cam-plate C", the gas 
valve B, having the toothed plate b, the con 
necting-rod X, the plate D, arm d, headed 
screw 3, and the movable electrode d, all 
Substantially as described and shown. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 24th day of June, A. D. 
1896. 
GEORGE J. G-ALBRAITH. 
In presence of 
FRED C. CHAMBERLIN, 
W. H. LEONARD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568071.txt	(No Model.) 
RAIL CLAMP FOR, HOISTING AND CONWEYING APPARATUS, 
P. R. ASCH, 
No. 568,071, 
Patented Sept. 22, 1896, 
 
  
 
 
2 
2. 
 
  
 
 
  
  
S. 
 
 
2 , 
WITNESSES 
22. 
Inventor: 
* 16 x 2. attorneys. 
 
the NORRIS PETERS co, Photo-LITHb.washington.D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER RASCH, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
RAL CLAMP FOR HO STING AND CONVEYING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,071, dated September 22, 1896. 
Application filed October 25, 1895, Serial No. 566,825. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER RASCH, a sub 
ject of the King of Denmark, and a resident 
of Cleveland, county of Cuyahoga, and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Rail-Clamps for Hoist 
ing and Conveying Apparatus, of which the 
following is a specification, the principle of 
the invention being herein explained and 
the best mode in which I have contemplated 
applying that principle, so as to distinguish 
it from other inventions. 
The annexed drawings and the following 
description set forth in detail one mechan 
ical form embodying the invention, such de 
tail construction being but one of various 
mechanical forms in which the principle of 
the invention may be used. 
In said annexed drawings, Figure I repre 
sents a side elevation of one truck for a hoist 
ing and conveying apparatus, illustrating 
the application of my invention; Fig. II, a 
section on the line IIII in Fig. I, illustrating 
the clamping device; and Fig. III, an edge 
view of the clamping device, showing the 
Outer frame portions broken away. 
In hoisting and conveying apparatus which 
is Supported upon upright frame structures 
traveling upon rails, for the purpose of ren 
dering the apparatus transportable to the 
places where the apparatus is to be employed 
it is of importance to have the truck-bases 
of such upright structures secured to the rails 
in such manner that the structures may be 
restrained from moving along the rails and 
may be prevented from tilting on account of 
the strain upon the upper portions of the 
structures. Clamps of various kinds have 
been provided for such structures, which 
clamps engage the rails and thus prevent the 
structure from tilting and traveling. Inas 
much, however, as the truck-bases of such 
structure are rigid, the wheels of the trucks 
are usually formed with broad treads and 
with flanges at both edges of the treads, so 
that the wheels may remain upon the rails 
when the truck-base is moved over a curve 
of the rails or if an inequality in the aline 
ment of the rails occurs. A rail-clamp for 
Such a truck is usually arranged so as to have 
the gap of its jaws center with the tread of 
the wheel, which arrangement will bring the 
clamp out of line with the railwhen the truck 
is placed upon a curved or unevenly-alined 
rail portion, as the clamps with which I am 
acquainted have usually been rigidly Sup 
ported in the truck, such as, for example, the 
clamp in the hoisting and conveying tram 
way mechanism for which United States Let 
ters Patent No. 505,638 were granted to me 
as assignor to the King Bridge Company. On 
the 26th day of September, 1893. 
It is the object of the present invention to 
improve upon such form of rail-clamp and 
to provide a clamp which may at all times be 
capable of engaging and clamping the rail. 
In the drawings are illustrated portions of 
the sills or beams A, which form the base of 
the upright frame structure, and which are 
movably supported upon the rails B by 
wheels, one, C, of which is illustrated in Fig. 
I. The clamp has a frame D, which is pro 
vided with trunnions d upon its sides, near 
the upper edge, and said trunnions project 
fore and aft in their relation to the frame 
structure and rest in bearings e, formed in 
transverse plates E between the sills. . The 
jaws d of the clamp are like the jaws of the 
clamp set forth in the above-referred-to pat 
ent and have links d' pivoted to their upper 
arms. Said links are pivoted to a nut d 
upon an actuating-screwd, which is jour 
naled in the clamp-frame and provided with 
a hand-wheel dat its upper end. The screw 
has a knob d upon its lower end, which bears 
against the tread of the rail when the screw 
is turned down and the jaws forced against 
the rail, and which bears against the lower 
journal-bearing for the screw in the clamp 
frame when the screw is turned upward and 
the jaws opened. This knob performs the 
office of the collar upon the screw in the for 
mer patent and dispenses with a rigid bear 
ing in the truck for the screw, which bearing 
would interfere with the free transverse 
swing of the clamp upon its trunnions. When 
the screw is screwed down and strikes the 
tread of the rail, the further rotation of the 
screw will raise the nut and thus spread the 
upper arms of the jaws, causing the lower 
arms to clamp the rail. When the screw is 
screwed up and the knob stops against the 
lower screw-bearing, the screw cannot be fur 
ther raised, and the nut will be lowered, loos 
95 
IOO 
O 
I5 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
568,071 
O 
ening the clamp. The clamp may be swung 
to either side, so that it will be capable of 
clamping the rail regardless of curve or a line 
ment of the rail. 
Other modes of applying the principle of 
my invention may be employed for the mode 
herein explained. Change may therefore be 
made as regards the mechanism thus dis 
closed, provided the principles of construc 
tion set forth respectively in the following 
claims are employed. 
I therefore particularly point out and dis 
tinctly claim as my invention 
I. The combination with a wheeled truck 
formed with fore-and-aft bearings, of a rail 
clamp having trunnions upon its sides jour 
naled in said bearings to admit of the clamp 
having lateral swing, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. The combination of a clamp-frame formed 
with a bearing, jaws pivoted in said frame, a 
screw journaled to rotate in the bearing of 
 
the frame and provided with a knob at its 
end, a nut upon said screw, and links piv 
oted to the nut, and to the jaws, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. The combination of a wheeled truck 
formed with fore-and-aft bearings, a clamp 
frame having trunnions in said bearings and 
having vertical bearings, a screw journaled 
in said latter bearings and provided with a 
hand-wheel at its upper end and a knob at 
its lower end, jaws pivoted in the clamp 
frame, a nut upon the screw, and links piv 
oted to the jaws and to the nut, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing to 
be my invention I have hereunto set my hand 
this 22d day of October, A. D. 1895. 
25 
35 
PETER RASCH. 
Witnesses: 
WM. SECHER, 
DAVID T. DAVIES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568171.txt	. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. SCHILUTTER. 
DOOR, HANGER. 
Patented Sept. 22, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 568, 171, 
O 
VVitnesses. 
J. C. 
 
Inventour. 
7%. 5%az 
(No Model.) 
No. 568,171. 
 
J. SCHLUTTER. 
DOOR, HANGER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 22, 1896. 
 
 
| 
 
 
E: 
va. 
:3ts 
- 
 
x 
-66 yenor 
22. Attorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN SCHILUTTER, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
DOOR-HANGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,171, dated September 22, 1896. 
Application filed April 25, 1896, Serial No, 589,009. (No model.) 
To all whon, it nay conce77. 
Be it known that I, JOHN SCHILUTTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Baltimore, State of Maryland, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Sliding-Door Mountings, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to sliding doors, and 
has for its object to provide means for mount 
ing and operating sliding doors that shall 
present little frictional contact, that shall be 
capable of adjustment. When desired, and that 
shall be simple of construction and adapted 
to be easily removed for repairs or otherwise; 
and to these ends my invention consists, first, 
in providing a cylindrical or semicylindrical 
track mounted in open brackets and adapted 
to be easily removed therefrom and adjust 
able vertically therein; second, in wheel-car 
riers suitably mounted in pairs and provided 
with dependent open brackets which hug 
the track-rod and which bracket is adapted 
to receive and support the door-hanger; and 
myinvention finally consists in details of con 
struction, and in the complete combination 
of the several parts, as hereinafter set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a front elevation, 
With part of the Wall broken away, showing 
my improved sliding-door mounting in posi 
tion. Fig. 2 is a section on the line a. a. of 
Fig. 1, showing the cylindrical track-rod, the 
wheel-carriers, the open bracket secured to 
the wheel-mounting, the hanger, the door, 
and the adjusting central bracket for the 
track-rod. Fig. 3 is a section on the linebb 
of Fig. 1 of the central adjusting-bracket for 
the track-rod. Fig. 4 is a like view on the 
line C C of Fig. 1 of one of the end adjusting 
hangers for the track-rod. Fig. 5 is a front 
elevation of the other end adjustable open 
bracket for the track-rod; and Fig. 6 is a lat 
eral section thereof on the line d d of said 
Fig. 5, while Fig. 7 is a side elevation of the 
said bracket, showing the track-rod and ad 
justing-screw. 
Referring to Fig. 1, A represents the hol 
low partition-walks, and B the door sliding 
therein. Within the hollow partition-walls 
20 
25 
35 
45 
so 
 
. 
and secured to the studding C are the end 
open bracket D, the central open bracket E, 
and the end-bracket pin F. The track-rod, 
adjustably supported in these brackets, is 
designated by the letter G, and is preferably 
cylindrical in form or semicylindrical, with 
the curved side upward. Upon the track-rod 
is mounted the wheel-carriers, which consist 
of a pair of wheels II, having concave faces 
to fit the curved surface of the track-rod, 
journaled in a two-sided frame H', to which 
is secured a depending bracket H, which is 
open and hugs the track-rod, and having an 
extended ear-piece II", recessed ath, to admit 
the pin h" of a hanger h, secured to the top of 
the door and whereby the latter is suspended 
and indirectly moved on the track-rod. 
The central bracket E is open and is pro 
vided with a lateral adjusting-screw e' and a 
vertical adjusting-screw e, the latter operat 
ing to move the former in a slot e in the 
bracket (see Fig. 3) and be locked therein by 
nuts e. 
The end bracket D (see Figs. 5, 6, and 7) 
is an open bracket, and is also hollow to en 
able it to receive a set-screwd, which passes 
through the end of the track-rod and thereby 
enables one to adjustably raise or lower the 
track-rod when desired. 
The opposite end-bracket pin F (see Fig. 
4) is centrally screw-threaded at f' to receive 
the end of the set-screw f, which passes 
through the other end of the track-rod and 
whereby the latter is adjustably raised or 
lowered when desired. The nutsf will lock 
it in position. The track-rod is by this means 
held from endwise movement. The track 
rod may be removed, the doors having been 
unshipped, by giving it an endwise move 
ment sufficient to enable the screw d to clear 
the bracketID, the screwe' to clear the bracket 
E, and the recessed end of the rod to clear 
the screw-pin f'. 
It may then be lowered 
and moved endwise to permit access to the 
screw d for its vertical adjustment. The 
screw cis accessible for adjustment from the 
door-opening. The rod can then be elevated 
and replaced in the brackets, while the con 
struction of the wheel-carriers, with depend 
ent bracket and ear-piece, the former hugging 
the track-rod and the latter recessed to admit 
of easy insertion of the hanger-pin, provides 
55 
75 
95 
TOO 
2 
568,171 
5 
O 
a very desirable and economically constructed 
and operated sliding-door mounting. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A mounting for sliding doors, compris 
ing a track-rod, a pair of end supporting 
brackets therefor adapted to be secured to 
the studding, one of said brackets being ver 
tically screw-threaded to receive a support 
ing-pin passing through the track-rod, and 
the other of said brackets being hollow and 
open at its side and adapted to receive within 
its interior a set-screw passing through the 
track-rod; with means to provide central ad 
justment of the rod; in combination with 
wheel-carriers and hangers arranged between 
the same and the sliding doors to be carried 
thereby; substantially as described. 
2. A mollinting for sliding doors, compris 
ing a track-rod, and Wheel-carriers, said car 
riers consisting of a frame provided with a 
depending open bracket H, which embraces 
said track-rod upon its under and outer sur 
faces and which is formed with an extended 
ear-piece which projects below the said rod, 
and is recessed to receive a journal-pin of a 
door-hanger, and a pair of wheels journaled 
to said frame and adapted to run on said rod, 
substantially as specified. 
3. A mounting for sliding doors, compris 
ing the end brackets D and F, central bracket 
E, track-rod D, wheel-carriers having wheels 
II, open extension-bracket H and earpiece 
H' and a hanger provided with journal-pin 
h' said parts being constructed, combined 
and arranged substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto af 
fixed my signature this 23d day of April, A. 
D. S96. 
25. 
35 
JOHN SCIILUTTER. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. RELL BRADFORD, 
A. W. BRADFORD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568271.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 568,271. 
G. M. PARSONs. 
, SKYLIGHT FASTENER AND RAISER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Sept. 22, 1896, 
 
 
S. 
% 
 
WITNESSES 
2 4/242 
2772- 
By 
INVENTOR 
22/427ts 
fus? 
s: 
 
(No Model.) 
G. M. PARSONs. 
SKYLIGHT FASTENER AND RAISER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 568,27l. 
a's , a 
as 
Y 
  
 
  
& 
2222222x22222222 llls . 
22> 2441412 
NZ 
S 
Patented Sept. 22, 1896, 
S 
A. 
W 
w 
 
 
S N N 
S. 
  
  
 
WITNESSES: 
4%. 4/a4. 
... -- 
INVENTOR 
22.2 
BY 
w 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE M. PARSONS, OF CARSON CITY, NEWADA. 
SKYLIGHT FASTENER AND RA SER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,271, dated September 22, 1896. 
Application filed September 24, 1895, Serial No. 563,469, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
AO 
To Cull, Luhon, it inval? concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGEM.PARSONS, of 
Carson City, in the county of Ormsby and 
State of Nevada, have invented a new and Im 
proved Skylight-Raising Device, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved skylight-raising device 
which is simple and durable in construction 
and arranged to enable the operator to con 
veniently and safely raise and lower a sky 
light and lock it in a desired position. 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
details and combinations of the same, as will 
be fully described hereinafter, and then point 
ed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the improve 
ment as applied With the skylight in section 
and in a closed position. Fig. 2 is a similar 
view of the same with the skylight in a raised 
position. Fig. 3 is an enlarged sectional side 
elevation of the improvement on the line 33 
of Fig. 5. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the 
same with parts removed. Fig. 5 is a sec 
tional plan view of the same on the line 55 
of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 6 is a cross-section of the 
same on the line 6 6 of Fig. 3, and Fig. 7 is a 
similar view of the same on the line 77 of 
Fig. 4. 
The improved device is provided with a le 
ver A, pivotally connected at its lower end 
at B to the skylight-casing C, as is plainly 
illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2. The upper end 
of the lever A is formed with a disk A", car 
rying in its center a pivot D, engaging tWO 
disks E", projecting from about the middle of 
a lever E, connected by a hinge F with the 
skylight C". The two disks E' engage oppo 
site sides of the disk A', and the lever E, car 
rying the said disks, turns on the pivot D as 
a fulcrum to open and close the skylight. C', 
as hereinafter more fully described. 
A portion, E of the lever E is made hollow, 
and on the same is fitted to slide a sleeve G, 
adapted to engage with its forward edge one 
of a series of notches A, formed on the pe 
riphery of the disk A', to lock the said lever 
45 
 
55 
E in position. The sleeve Gis provided with 
a transversely - extending pin G', passing 
through a longitudinal slot E in the part E 
of the lever E, and on this pin G' is fastened 
one end of a rope H, extending through the 
hollow part E and passing at the Outer end 
thereof over a pulley I and hanging down 
Ward a suitable distance to be within conven 
ient reach of the operator. A spring J is 
coiled in the hollow part E of the lever and 
has one end connected with the pin G' and its 
other end with a pin J', secured in the hol 
low part E. The spring J serves to push the 
sleeve G forward in engagement with one of 
the notches A*, and the spring yields suffi 
ciently so that when pressure is exerted in 
an outward direction on the sleeve G by the 
operator pulling the rope II it disengages the 
sleeve from the notch. 
On the faces of the disks E are formed bear 
ings E", engaged by a safety-pin K, made U 
shaped and having its middle part extending 
75 
through slots in the disks E and also in a 
ZigZag groove A, formed in the disk A', as 
plainly shown in Fig. 3. Now in case the 
rope H should break while the skylight C is 
raised then the Safety-pin K, by dropping in 
one of the arms of the ZigZag groove A, locks 
the disks E' and A' together. 
The operation is as follows: When the sky 
light C is in a closed position, as shown in 
Fig. 1, then the lever Astands in an oblique 
direction, with the lever E approximately 
parallel with the skylight C". The sleeve G 
now engages the uppermost notch A in the 
disk A', so that the skylight cannot acciden 
tally rise, on account of being locked in place 
by the device. Now when it is desired to raise 
the skylight then the operator pulls on the 
rope H, so that the sleeve Gis withdrawn from 
the notch. A to unlock the disks E' and A', 
and a further pull on the rope H causes the 
lever E to swing on its fulcrum at the pivot 
D, so that the skylight C" swings upward, and 
a further pull on the rope H causes the lever 
A to swing upWard into a vertical position, as 
shown in Fig. 2, the lever E then also assum 
ing a vertical position. When this position 
is reached, the rope H permits the spring J 
to push the sleeve Gupward to engage the 
said sleeve with the lowermost notch Ain the 
disk A. Thus the two disks are again locked 
85 
95 
OO 
2 
568,271 
light-casing, and carrying at its free end a 
notched disk, a second lever provided at or 
near its middle with disks pivotally connected 
with the disk of the other lever, a sleeve fitted 
to slide on the second lever and adapted to 
engage one of the notches in the disk of the 
first lever, a rope for operating the said sleeve, 
and a spring pressing on the said sleeve, Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
4. A device of the class described, compris 
ing two levers having disks pivotally connect 
ed with each other, one of the levers being 
fulcrumed to the skylight-casing, and the 
other to the skylight, and a safety-pin fitted 
to slide on the outer disks, to engage with its 
middle portion a zigzag groove in the other 
disk, substantially as shown and described. 
5. In a device of the character described, 
the combination of a lever adapted to be piv 
oted to the skylight-casing, a second lever 
pivotally connected at its central portion to 
the free end of the first-mentioned lever and 
having one end connected to the skylight, a 
locking device for locking the levers against 
in ovement, and a flexible connection secured 
to said locking device and loosely engaging 
the end of the second lever opposite to the 
connection thereof with the skylight, said 
connection when actuated being adapted to 
disengage the locking device and tip the sec 
Ond lever pivotally, substantially as set forth. 
GEORGE. M. PARSONS. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. FITZSIMMONS, 
A. E. PINE. 
45 
55 
65 
O 
in place, and consequently the levers A and 
E, as well as the skylight C". If it is desired 
to raise the skylight C into an intermediate 
position, then the above-described operation 
is repeated, the only difference being that the 
rope H is released whenever the skylight is 
in the desired position, so that the sleeve Gen 
gages the intermediate notch Ain the diskA'. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A device of the class described, compris 
ing a lever adapted to be fulcrumed on the 
skylight-casing, a second lever pivotally con 
nected to the free end of the first-named lever, 
one end of the second lever being pivotally 
connected with the skylight, and a locking 
device under the control of the operator said 
locking device being arranged to slide on one 
lever and being adapted for engagement with 
the other level to lock the two levers together, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. A device of the class described, compris 
ing a lever fulcrumed at one end in the sky 
light-casing, and carrying at its free end a 
notched disk, a second lever provided at or 
near its middle with disks pivotally connected 
with the disk of the other lever, a sleeve fitted 
to slide on the second lever and adapted to 
engage one of the notches in the disk of the 
first lever, and a rope for manipulating the 
said sleeve, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
3. A device of the class described, compris 
ing a lever fulcrumed at one end in the sky 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568371.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 568,371, 
J. E. REYBURN. 
RAILWAY BRAKE, 
Patented Sept. 29, 1896, 
 
  
 
N % %E2 
 
st CD4 
AITORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIN E. REYBURN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAILWAY-BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,871, dated September 29, 1896. 
Application filed November 12, 1895, Serial No. 568,668, (No model.) 
6) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
IBe it known that I, JOHN E. REYBURN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Railway-Brakes, which 
improvement is fully set forth in the follow 
ing Specification and accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to railway-brakes; 
and it consists of a novel construction of ap 
paratus in which the revolution of the axle 
of a car-wheel is caused to supply the energy 
whereby friction is applied to an eccentric 
mounted on said axle, so as to retard and 
eventually. cause a cessation of rotation of 
the same, by the proper manipulation of a 
Suitable cock or valve. 
It further consists of novel details of con 
struction, all as will be hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a 
brake apparatus embodying my invention, a 
portion of the same being shown in section. 
Fig. 2 represents on an enlarged scale a detail 
E. pf a valve employed in the piston seen in 
19. I. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
Sponding parts in the two figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates 
the axle of a car, upon which the wheel B of 
the usual construction is mounted. 
C designates an eccentric which is attached 
to Said axle A and which is engaged by the 
eccentric strap or yoke D, to which the ec 
centric-rod E is attached. 
F designates a cross-head which is mounted 
upon Said eccentric-rod and which has an ex 
tension or arm G attached thereto, which 
has a hole therein through which the rod H 
passes, which latter is attached to the head J 
of the cylinderM, said rod and arm thus serv 
ing to guide and support the cross-head F. 
K designates a piston-rod which has one 
end attached to said cross-head, while the 
Other end is secured to the piston L, which 
reciprocates in the cylinder M. 
N designates the outer head of said cylin 
der, upon which the valve P is mounted, 
which is normally open and through which 
the air is discharged when the apparatus is 
ordinarily running, the air being admitted to 
the cylinder through the passage P", which is 
us 
always open and communicates with the 
lower portion of the cylinder. 
Q designates the valve apparatus employed 
in the piston L, the same consisting of the 
valve proper, R, which seats upon the shell 
S, which is mounted in the piston L, said 
shell having a shoulder or ledge T at one ex 
tremity, against which one end of the spring . 
U is adapted to abut, its other end being in 
contact with the adjacent portion of said 
Valve R. 
V designates a valve-stem which depends 
from said valve R and has a head Wattached 
thereto. 
The operation is as follows: The revolution 
of the axle A causes the rotation of the ec 
centric C, and by reason of the intermediate 
connections the eccentric-rod E, cross-head 
F, piston-rod K, and the piston L are actu 
ated, the latter being thus reciprocated with 
in the cylinder M. The reciprocation of the 
piston L will draw in air through the suction 
or inlet P, and if we assume the valve P to 
be open the pressure on either side of the 
piston will be equal and the piston normally 
in equilibrium, and the air Will be discharged 
through the valve P. If now it is desired to 
cause a cessation of the rotation of the wheel 
B and axle A, and thus stop the train, it is only 
necessary for the operator to close the valve 
P by any suitable mechanism, whereupon it 
will be seen that the air at each revolution of 
the axle will be compressed in the right-hand 
portion W' of the cylinder M and will in 
stantly act as a cushion and tend to retard 
the rotation of the eccentric, and this re 
tardation Will be communicated to the axle 
upon which said eccentric is mounted, thus 
establishing a reciprocal pressure which will 
alternately check and release as the speed 
increases or decreases, thereby effectively 
stopping the car or cars without sliding the 
wheels on the rails, thereby reducing to a 
minimum, if not entirely preventing, the lia 
bility of the flattening of the wheels. 
The efficiency of the above-described ap 
paratus constituting my invention can be 
seen at a glance if we investigate graphically 
the effects produced by compressing air as 
described, starting at the fundamental law 
governing the operation of the same. Boyle's 
95 
ICO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
2 
568,871 
O 
566 
I 
? 
72 
b 
735 - if 
V.P. 
W 
law for air (for other gases and vapors, it be 
ing not exact) is as follows: The tempera 
ture remaining the same, the volume of a 
given quantity of a gas is inversely as the 
pressure which it bears, from which I deduce: 
- 
W.P. - . ). OP 
IP. = ... 1). or 
In the example before us, assuming that We 
have a cylinder nineteen inches diameter, 
then the area of the piston is * =983 square 
inches. A pressure of fifteen pounds per 
square inclh is being exerted on this piston in 
its position in the drawings. Therefore We 
have 2S3X15 - 4,245 pounds total pressure 
on the piston, both before and behind it, Ol' it 
is neutralized. Now let the axle A revolve 
one hundred and eighty degrees or to the full 
extent of the crank movement of the eccen 
tric, taking the throw at four inches, we have 
283x2='. Substituting these values in the 
V.P. 1,698X4,245 
above formula we have p= 
= 12,735 pounds total pressure on the pis 
P 
tOln, Ol 
5s: =45 pounds per square inch 
pressure on the piston. This pressure per 
square inclh is increased to ninety on the Sec 
ond revolution of the axle A, and so on, pro 
vided the theoretical conditions are main 
tained. Ithus obtain a powerful force acting 
against the crank motion of the eccentric, 
which constitutes the brake action, and to 
which especial attention is called. 
When it is desired to take off the brake, it 
is only necessary to open the cock P, it being 
understood that the moving of said cock is 
controlled by suitable rods or connections op 
erated by the train-hands. It will thus be 
evident from the foregoing that a simple and 
effective brake is produced, and one from 
which positive and effective results are ob 
tained. 
In ordel' to get the best results, I provide 
the inlet P with a check-valve P', adapted to 
open inwardly, in which case suitable relief 
valves may be attached to the proper portions 
of the cylinder, if desired, while the accumu 
lation of pressure within said cylinder may be 
regulated with great exactness by the proper 
Imanipulation of the valve P, as is evident. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a device of the character described, a 
cylinder with a piston therein, an eccentric 
mounted on a rotating axle, a stem on said 
piston connected with said eccentric, air inlet 
and outlet valves in said cylindler, and a 
check-valve in a passage in said piston, said 
parts being combined substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a device of the character described, a 
cylinder, a piston therein, an axle, an eccen 
tric mounted thereon, an eccentric-strap, con 
nections from the latter to said piston, where 
by the latter reciprocates in unison with the 
rotation of said eccentric, a valved outlet at 
one end of said cylinder, an inlet at the othel 
end of the same, a check-valve in said inlet 
and a valve mounted in said piston, Substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a brake system, a cylinder, a piston 
therein, a suction and discharge pipe for said 
cylinder, a check-valve in said suction-pipe 
a valve mounted in said piston having a head, 
a seat, a valve-stem and a spring holding said 
valve normally in the desired position, an ec 
centric mounted on a car-axle, an eccentric 
strap and connections from the latter to said 
piston, substantially as described. 
4. The cylinder M, the piston L therein, a 
valve R in said piston, the shell S, the stem. 
V, the spring U, and the head W, the suction 
and discharge openings Pand Pfor said cylin 
der, said openings being provided with check 
and cut-off valves, respectively, the piston 
rod K, cross-head E, arm G, guide II, and the 
eccentric-rod E having one end attached to 
said cross-head, and the other end attached 
to the eccentric-strap D, the latter being 
mounted on the eccentric C, in combination 
with the axle N to which said eccentric is at 
tached, substantially as described. 
5. In a device of the character described, a 
cylinder having air inlet and outlet valves at 
opposite ends, a piston in said cylinder hav 
ing a passage in its head, a check-valve in 
said passage, an eccentric connected With a 
rotating car-axle, a stem on said piston con 
nected with said eccentric, a cross-head con 
nected with said stem, and having an alm 
with an opening therein, and a rod secured 
to said cylinder and passing through said 
opening, said parts being combined substan 
tially as described. 
JOHN E. REYBURN 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
E. I. FAIRBANKS. 
o 
75 
So 
95 
IOO 
25 
y 
35 
SO 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568471.txt	(NO Model. 
No. 568,471. 
A, BALL, 
DRILL COLUMN, 
Patented Sept. 29, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
 
aa M 
n 
2 
- N23 
3. 
A. 
N 
N 
&NN 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT BALL, OF CLAREMONT, NEW HAMPSHIRE, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
SULLIVAN MACHINERY COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE AND CHICAGO, 
ILLINOIS. 
DRILL-co Lu MN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,471, dated September 29, 1896. 
Application filed January 30, 1896, Serial No. 577,362, (No model.) 
55 
- 
thereof. 
To ali, whom it, Taif concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT BALL, a resi 
dent of Claremont, in the county of Sullivan 
and State of New Hampshire, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Drill-Col 
umns; and I do hereby declare. the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof. 
My invention relates to columns or posts 
for supporting rock or other drills. 
The invention comprises certain details of 
construction, all of which will be fully here 
inafter set forth and claimed. 
To enable others skilled in the art to make 
and use my invention, I will describe the 
same more fully, referring to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of my im 
proved column, and Fig. 2 is a modified form 
The main portion of the column consists of 
the hollow body portion a, which has at the 
upper end thereof the head a'. Within the 
hollow body portion a is the piston, said pis 
ton consisting of the head c and the exten 
sion c'. This extension is threaded exter 
nally and internally. 
The head c of the pis 
ton has a threaded opening d therein, with 
which a threaded neck don the extension c' 
engages. The leather or other packing e is 
inserted between the head and extension, and 
serves to make a tight joint to prevent the 
air passing by the piston-head. The spring. 
e' is interposed between the head c and the 
packing to force said packing against the in 
ner wall of the hollow body portion. 
The threaded bar if engages with the in 
ternal threads of the extension c', while the 
nut gengages the external threads of said ex 
tension. In order to prevent the turning of 
the piston, a screw h passes through the hol 
low body portion a into a longitudinal groove 
h' in the extension c' of said piston. 
The threaded barf has a ring Air enlarge 
ment if thereon, with an opening f therein 
to receive a bar for turning said threaded 
bar. At the end of said threaded barf is the 
spherical headf, which fits within a corre 
spondingly-shaped recess formed in the foot 
. 
. 
block i. A locking-plate i is bolted down to 
the block i to retain said spherical head fin 
its recess. In this manner the foot-block 
can conform to the blocking. . 
The compressed air, steam, or other force 
employed to extend the column is admitted 
by the pipel, controlled by a suitable. Valve 
l". This valve is preferably a two-way valve, 
so that the air can be discharged readily from 
the column should the blocking prove to have - 
been wrongly situated and it should be de 
sired to change the position of the column. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown a modified form of 
my invention in which the piston carries the 
head a' to be forced into the blocking, and 
in which the air is admitted to the hollow 
space in said piston. The nut g engages the 
extension c' of the piston, as before, but in 
this case its position is reversed and it bears 
against the top instead of against the lower 
end of the hollow body portion. 
The threaded barfengages with a threaded 
opening in the body portion a, and in Order 
to prevent the air from escaping down around 
the said bar fa partition m is formed in said 
body portion, whereby all possibility of leak 
age around the threaded bar is removed. 
The hollow space in the piston communicates 
with the hollow body portion by means of the 
passage 72. 
When it is desired to adjust my improved 
column, constructed in accordance with Fig. 
1, in position, the blocking, usually a block. 
of wood, is placed beneath the foot-block on . 
the floor of the mine, while the blocking is 
held up against the roof of the mine above 
the top head a'. The compressed air is ad 
mitted by the pipel, whereupon the column 
will be extended until the head a' is forced 
While the . 
into contact with the blocking. 
compressed air holds the column in its ex 
tended position the nut, g is turned until it is 
brought into contact with the lower. end of 
the hollow body portion, whereupon the air 
may be discharged and the nut g will hold 
said column in its extended position. The 
threaded barf may also be turned to aid in 
strengthening the position of the column. In 
the same manner when it is desired to lower 
p 
- 
o 
25 
35 
20 
45 
75 
95 
2 
568,471 
O 
the column the operator turns on the com 
pressed air, which holds the column in posi 
tion until he lowers the nut the required 
amount, whereupon by discharging the air 
the body portion descends. 
The operation of the form illustrated in 
Fig. 2 is practically the same. The air is 
admitted into the piston and passes through 
the opening n' into the hollow body portion, 
whereupon the piston is forced up withE. 
head a' in contact with the blocking. 
he 
nut g is lowered until it comes in contact 
with the upper end of the body portion and 
holds the column in its extended position 
without the aid of the compressed air. . 
My improved column may be used in a hori 
Zontal position, if desired. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a column for supporting drills, a hol 
low body portion, a threaded piston within 
said hollow body portion, a threaded bar 
supporting said hollow portion and piston, a 
nut engaging said piston adapted to hold the 
column in its extended positien, and means 
25 
for supplying compressed air to raise said 
column, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a column for supporting drills, a hol 
low body portion, a threaded piston within 
said hollow body portion, a threaded bar en 
gaging said piston, a nut engaging said pis 
ton, and means for supplying compressed air 
to said hollow body portion to raise same, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a column for supporting drills, a hol 
low body portion, a cup-piston within said 
hollow body portion, said piston being inter 
nally and externally threaded, a threaded bar 
engaging the interior of said piston, a nut 
engaging the exterior of said piston, and 4o 
means for supplying compressed air to said 
hollow body portion to raise same, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I, the said ALBERT 
BALL, have hereunto set my hand. 
------ 
35 
ALBERT BALL. 
Witnesses: 
H. W. PARKER, 
E. J. TENNEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568571.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 568,571. 
 
 
F. E. HERDMAN. 
BRAKE MEOHANISM FOR ELECTRIC ELEWATORS, 
Patented Sept. 29, 1896. 
Fae!!!!!!!! 
the soars persus ero.aaoroured weaporos. c. 
Inventor. 
t2-c. 4 24a2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK E. IIERDMAN, OF WINNETRA, ILLINOIS. 
BRAKE MECHANISM FOR ELECTRIC ELEVATORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,571, dated September 29, 1896. 
Application filed October 5, 1895. Serial No. 564,736. No mice. 
5 
20 
2 5 
o 
To all clon. it invay concert: 
Be it known that I, FR 4.N.R.E. HERD3I4N, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Win 
netka, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented a new and usefulnprovement 
in Srake Mechanism for Electric Elevators, 
of which the following is a fall, clear, and 
exact description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, which form a part 
of this specification. 
The brake used in my invention is a fric 
tion-brake, and it is known that the time in 
making a stop with a frictional brake is pro 
portional to the speed and load. If the car 
be descending, if the velocity or load is greater, 
it takes more time to bring the mechanism 
to rest, while, on the other hand, if the ve 
locity be less or the load be light, the stop is 
uade nuclu. quicker. The purpose of this 
invention is to obviate this and to make the 
application of the brake vary as the condi 
tions of speed and load vary, so as to make 
the stop constant. 
I will first describe the construction as illus 
trated in the drawings and then particularly 
point out the invention in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an electrical 
diagram. Fig. 2 is a detail section on the 
line I 1 of Fig. 1. 
Q is the brake-wheel on the shaft of the 
notor. 
E is the motor; e, the shaft of the motor. 
Q is the brake-lever. 
P is the operating-shaft through which the 
operator controls the machine. 
4 is a double-wound magnet. 
1 is the brake-weight, and 72 is a spring 
interposed between the connection of the 
brake-weight with the brake-lever. The core 
of the magnet 74 is attached directly to the 
fork, which is connected to the brake-lever 
Q. This fork has a slot in it, giving a move 
ment to the fork up and down around the pin 
111, which passes through the brake-lever. 
Between the brake-lever and the core of 
the solenoid 74 is placed a spring, this spring 
being of such length and strength that when 
the pin through the brake-lever is at the bot 
ton of the fork in the slot this spring is but 
little or not compressed. When the fork has 
dropped so that the pin is at the top of the 
slot, this spring is compressed to the amount 
- 
- 
of the entire brake-weight, thus giving a 
gradual application of the brake. 
X is a snapswitch controlled by the oper- 55 
ating-shaft P. 
a'a'aa'are brushes on this switch, brushes 
a and a' being in electrical connection with 
each other by means of the conductive por 
tion c'. Brushes a and a are insulated 6o 
from each other by means of the insulation 
a', and brushes a and at are insulated from 
brushes (and a by the insulation cle. 
100, SS, Sr., and 97 are a series of contacts 
above the Snap-switch, and below are corre- 65 
sponding contacts 99,90, S9, and S. In the 
movement of the switch in one direction from 
the center, brush a makes contact with con 
tact 100, in the other direction with contact 
99. So in reference to brush a', which makes to 
contact with contact SS and contact 90; brush 
a, with contacts S7 and S9; brush a', with 
contacts 97 and 98. Contacts SS and S9 are 
cross-connected, and contacts S7 and 90 are 
cross-connected. The contacts 100 and 99 are 75 
also in electrical connection. 
The current from one pole of the source of 
current supply runs to the conductive por 
tion a' of the hub of the snap-switchX, so 
that the brushes a and a' are in direct elec- 8o 
trical connection with one pole of the source 
of current supply, and from thence the cur 
rent passes either to the contacts 100 and SS 
or 90 and 99. The contact 100 is in electri 
cal connection with the resistance-arm solen- 85 
oid 73. From said solenoid, a wire passes to 
the current-controlling solenoid 85, and from 
the solenoid S3 a wire runs to the other pole 
of current supply. 
oid 101, and from the solenoid 10 a wire 
passes to one side of the field of the motor 
From the other side of the field a wire passes 
to the contacts 97 and 9S. From contact 90 
a wire passes to one side of the armature, and 95 
from the other side of the armature the wire 
returns to contact S9. From thence current 
passes to brush a, and from thence through 
the wire to one winding of magnet 74, and 
the return-wire from that winding goes to the roo 
armature-resistance 105, from thence through 
the arm 79 to the contact300, and from thence 
to the wire leading from the solenoid 73 to 
the solenoid S3, through which it returns to 
From contact 99 a wire passes to the solec- go 
2 
568,571. 
25 
30 
35 
O 
IS 
the other pole of the source of current sup 
ply. Thus we have one winding of the mag 
net 74 in series with the armature-circuit. 
From the other winding of the magnet 74 a 
wire passes to and connects with the wire 
leading from contact 39 to solenoid 101. The 
other wire from that winding leads to the 
wire leading from the solenoid 73 to the solen 
oid S3. We therefore have this other wind 
ing of the magnet 74 in shunt with the arma 
ture. The two wires leading from the upper 
winding of the magnet 74 are connected to 
the contacts 102 and 103, which are adapted 
to be connected by the contacts104, controlled 
by the core of solenoid 101, and, when so con 
nected, to cut off the current from that wind 
ing of the magnet 1. The return-wire of 
the field of the motor passes to the contact 97 
or 9S, and from the brush a'a wire leads to 
the field-resistance 90, and through the arm 
9 and contact 300 connection is made with 
the wiring to the solenoid S3, and from thence 
to the other pole of the main source of cur 
rent supply. 
When the snap-switch is operated in either 
direction, the following occurs: Speaking first 
of the magnet 7-4 and supposing the switch to : 
be turned in a direction so that the brushes : 
act act make contact, respectively, with i 
the contacts 99,90, S9, and 98, the turning of 
the switch in the other direction would make 
no difference from which will hereinafter be 
described except in the direction of the cur 
rent passing to the armature. Under these 
conditions the shunt-winding of the magnet 
74 will be in direct electrical connection with 
the source of current supply and will be at 
once energized. 
solenoid 73, which is connected with the coll 
tact 100, So that the current passes to it from 
said contact. From the other end of the wind 
ing of the solenoid 3 the current passes 
through the contact 300 to the solenoid SS, 
and from thence directly to the other source 
of current supply. The solenoid 73, being 
energized, moves its core, which is connected 
with the Solenoid-arm 79, to move it so as to 
cut out the resistances in the arunature-cir 
cuit and cut in resistances in the field-cir 
cuit. The purpose of the regulating-solenoid 
SS is to regulate the speed with which the 
solenoid 3 acts, and its operation is clearly 
described and claimed in a certain patent is 
sued to nue, No. 550,773, dated December 11, 
As the arunature-resistances are cut 
S9. 
out, and proportionately to the extent with 
which the armature takes up its current, so 
is the series circuit of Solenoid 74 energized. 
We thus see that when the current is first 
thrown onto the machine the shunt-winding 
of solenoid 4 is excited and the series wind. 
ing is not excited. The shunt-winding of 
said solenoid in itself is only of sufficient 
strength to partially relieve the brake, still 
holding sufficient brake on the machine un 
til the armature takes up sufficient current 
to operate the machine and raise the load. 
When the armature is in this condition, there 
is sufficient current admitted through the 
series winding of solenoid 74 to energize the 
same, and the combination of the shunt and 
series windings of the solecoid 74 excites said 
solenoid sufficiently to raise the brake of the 
brake-wheel. 
If, with the construction shown in-the fore 
going drawings and description,the car should 
So far as the passage of the current to the be descending with a heavyload, in that case 
4o field is concerned, it will pass from contact the motor would be turned into a dynamo and 
99 to solenoid 101, from thence to one side of the series winding of the solenoid 74 would 
the field, from the other side of the field to thus lose its strength, which would result in 
contact S, from thence to brush a', from a tendency for the brake to be applied to a 
thence to the field-brush tc.', and from thence certain extent. To prevent this, I place on 
45 along the resistance-arm 78 to the contact 300, the operating-shaft a segment 200, having at 
from thence through the regulating-solenoid each side a projection 20 and 202. On the 
S3 to the other pole of the source of current- rod 203, connecting with the brake-lever and 
supply. The passage of current through the having a slot initaround the operating-shaft, 
solenoid 101 will energize it, lifting the con- (acting as a means of guide,) is placed a 
5o tact 104, so that the connection between the ratchet 204. When the operating-shaft is 
contacts 102 and 10S is broken. 
thrown to the right or left, either the projec 
The current to the armature passes from tion 201 or 202 is thrown in the path of the 
contact 90 directly to one side of the arma- ratchet S04. When this movement of the op 
ture, from the other side of the armature to erating-shaft is made, the current is thrown 
the contact S, from thence to brush a, from on the machine and the magnet 74 is excited, 
thence to the series winding of the solenoid thereby lifting the brake-lever Q and caus 
4, and from the otherside of the series wind-ing the ratchet 904 to pass by whichever pro 
ing of Solenoid 4 to the armature-resistance ijection 201 or 202 is in the path of the ratchet. 
105, from thence along the resistance-arm 79 When this ratchet has passed this projection, 
6o to contact 300, and thence through the solen- it locks with it. The result is that when the 
oid S3 to the other pole of source of current lever is held in that position the brake is also 
supply. 
held in that position, and, even though the 
As the resistance-arm of the armature-re- current consumed by the armature of the 
sistance is initially upon the highest resist- notor should fall, the weakening of the solen 
65 ance, but slight current, if any, passes to the oid does not allow the application of the 
series winding of the solenoid 74. The re-brake. 
sistance-arm 79 is operated by means of the i The length of projections 201 and 202 is 
85 
go 
Cd 
Ios 
O 
IIS 
ISO 
568,571. 
20 
2 5 
O 
such that when the operating mechanism is 
the amount of power used in operating the 
brought toward its central position when the 
motor, so that the amount of power which 
rheostat-arm reaches a point when it is about 
this device has to expend upon the brake 
to pass on the armature-resistance, the pro 
lever bears a certain relation to the amount 
jection 201 or 202 is passed from under the 
of power expended in operating the motor, 
ratchet 204, thus permitting the action of the 
and, as the amount of power expended in op 
brake from this point according to the con 
erating the motor bears a fixed relation to the 
ditions of solenoid 74. When the projection 
speed and load of the device operated by the 
has released the ratchet, then the brake acts 
motor, so the amount of the power which the 
according to the conditions of solenoid 74. 
device controlling the lever can expend is 
If the car is lifting an excessive load, and in 
therefore proportional to the speed and load 
consequence consuming a great deal of cur 
or weight of the device with its carried load or 
rent, this current keeps solenoid 74 so ener 
weight operated by the motor, and therefore 
gized as to hold the brake off until the cur 
the brake is applied and regulated in the 
rent is finally cut off the machine, this being 
amount of its application by the speed and 
with the idea that the load will reduce the 
weight of the device operated by the motor. 
speed of the car rapidly enough without the 
Furthermore, by the use of the deviceipon 
use of the brake until the last moment. On 
the brake-lever which interlocks with the mo 
the other hand, if the car is practically lift 
tor-controlling mechanism, when the motor 
ing to load then the armature is consuming 
controlling mechanism is moved from the cen 
little or no current, and in consequence the 
ter, prevents the brake, after having been 
series coil on solenoid 74 has little or no 
once taken of the wheel, from being again 
strength. As a result, the only power by 
applied until the operating mechanism is 
which the brake is held off is due to the 
brought to a point near the central position, 
shunt-coil of the solenoid 74, this being only 
where it is desired that the brake shall assist 
sufficient to partially relieve the brake. As in the control of the motor, which prevents 
a result, the brake is partially applied and the brake being applied when for any reason 
the mechanism gradually stopped until the during the operation of the motor or the 
final breaking of the circuit throws on the movement of the device operated by the mo 
full strength of the brake. If the elevator tor the power applied to the device control 
is overcounterbalanced and going up light, ling the brake-lever shall fall below a point 
so that the counterbalance tends to run away sufficient to hold the brake-lever off. This 
with it, then the motor will be acting as a 
might occur, as is described in the specifica 
dynamo, and in consequence the current in 
tion, in case the car were descending with a 
armature-circuit passes in an opposite direc 
heavy load. Then, in that event, the power 
tion from that from source of current sup 
being supplied to the brake-operating device 
ply. As a result, the series coil of solenoid 
through the motor and the motor not expend 
4 would be acting in opposition to the shunt 
ing any power, the device operating the lever 
coil, thus still further weakening solenoid 74 
would receive no power, and therefore the 
and giving a stronger action of the brake. 
brake would be applied were it not for this 
This is in accordance with the results de 
locking device. 
sired, and thereby gives an accurate stop with 
Having now fully described my invention, 
or without load. 
what I claim, and desire to protect by Letters 
The purpose of the solenoid 101 and the 
Patent, is 
contact 104 and contacts 102 and 103 is clearly 
1. In combination, a source of current sup 
and fully described in a certain application 
ply, an electric motor, a brake-wheel for said 
filed by meOctober 5, 1S95, Serial No. 564,735, 
motor, a brake-lever to operate the brake, a 
and may generally be stated here to be that 
solenoid having two windings, one in shunt 
in case the field-circuit should become de 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
ranged the solenoid 101, which is in said cir 
the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
cuit, will no longer be excited. As a conse 
said brake-lever being operated by means of 
quence the contact 104, connected to the core, 
the solenoid a reversing-switch, the electric 
will fall so as to connect the contacts 102 and 
connections to the series winding being in 
103, and thus short-circuit the current from 
. 
dependent of the reversing-switch. 
the series winding of the solenoid. 
: 2. In combination with a source of current 
Speaking generally in reference to the in 
Supply, an electric motor, a switch device for 
vention as described in this specification, it 
ng the admission of current from the 
controlli 
consists, as may be seen from the specifica 
the otor, an operative mechanism 
tion, in controlling the brake upon a brake- if 
rolling said switch, a brake-wheel for . 
wheel of a power-driven motor by the use of 
saidiotorialirake-levertooperate the brake, . 
a device which, as described in this specifica 
a solenoid having two windings one in shunt. . . 
tion, has a solenoid which is connected with 
With the main current supply to the motor, 
the source of power which operates the motor, 
the other in sries with thearinature-circuit, 
which in this case is an electric motor, through 
the brake-lever being connected to the core 
the motor itself, so that the amount of power 
of the solenoid, and a spring interposed be. . . 
which is supplied to the device controlling 
tween the core of solenoid and brake-lever. 
the brake-lever bears a certain relation to 
3. In combination, a source of current sup 
- . 
 
 
40 
5 5 
io 
5 
75 
90 
OO 
Io5 
O 
IIS 
125 
4. 
568,571 
O 
2 5 
3. 5 
40 
ply, an electric motor, a switch device for with the main current supply to the motor, 
the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
controlling the admission of current from the 
a slot-and-pin connection between the core of 
supply to the motor, hin operative mechanism 
the solenoid and brake-lever, a spring inter 
for controlling said switch, a brake-wheel for 
posed between the core of the solenoid and 
said motor, a brake-lever to operate the brake, 
brake-lever, and a brake-weight connected to 
a solenoid having two windings, one in shunt 
the solenoid-core. 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
9. In combination, a source of current sup 
the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
ply, an electric motor, a switch for control 
a slot-and-pin connection between the core of 
ling the admission of current from the sup 
the solenoid and the brake-lever. 
ply to the Inotor, an operating-shaft for con 
4. In combination, a source of current sup 
trolling said switch, a brake-wheel for said 
ply, an electric motor, a switch device for 
motor, a brake-lever, to operate the brake, a 
controlling the admission of current from the 
solenoid having two windings, one in shunt 
supply to the motor, an operative mechanisum 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
for controlling said switch, a brake-wheel for 
the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
said motor, a brake-leverto operate the brake, 
the brake-lever being connected to the core 
a solenoid having two windings, one in shunt 
of the solenoid, a segment on the operating 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
shaft having at each side a projection, a rod 
the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
connected with the brake-lever, said rod hav 
a slot-and-pin connection between the core of 
ing a pawl in alinement actuating to the 
the solenoid and the brake-lever, and a spring 
movement of the operative shaft, with one or 
inter 
between the core of the solenoid 
other projection when the rod is down, but 
and brake-lever. 
out of alinement when the rod is up, whereby 
5. In combination, a source of current sup 
when the pawl has passed beyond the projec 
ply, an electric motor, a switch device for 
tion it locks with it, the length of the projec 
controlling the admission of current from the 
tions being such that when the operating 
supply to the motor, an operative mechanism 
shaft is moved toward the center sufficiently 
for controlling said switch, a brake-wheel for 
so that the resistances are thrown in the ar 
said motor, a brake-leverto operate the brake, 
mature-circuit, the projections have passed 
a solenoid having two windings, one in shunt 
from under the rod and no longer lock it. 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
10. In combination with a source of current 
the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
supply, an electric motor, a switch device for 
the brake-lever being connected to the core 
controlling the admission of current from the 
of the solenoid, a brake-weight connected to 
supply to the motor, an operating-shaft for 
the solenoid-core. 
controlling said switch, a brake-wheel for 
6. In combination with a source of current 
said motor, a brake-levertinoperate the brake, 
supply, an electric motor, a switch device for 
a solenoid having two winding one in shunt 
controlling the admission of current from the 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
supply to the motor, an operative mechanism 
for controlling said switch, a brake-wheel for the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
the brake-lever being connected to the core 
said motor, a brake-leverto operate the brake, 
of the solenoid, a spring interposed between 
a solenoid having two windings, one in shant 
the core of solenoid and brake-lever, a seg 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
the other in series with the armature-circuit, ment on the operating-shaft, having at each 
the brake-lever being connected to the core side a projection, a rod connected with the 
brake-lever, said rod having a pawl in a line 
of the solenoid, a spring interposed between 
Inent, actuating to the movemert of the op 
the core of Solenoid and brake-lever, and a 
erating-shaft, with one or the other projec 
brake-weight connected to the solenoid-core. 
tion when the rod is down, but out of alline 
7. In combination, a source of current sup 
ment when the rod is up, whereby when the 
ply, an electric motor, a switch device for con 
pawl has passed beyond the projection it locks 
trolling the admission of current from the sup 
with it, the length of the projections being 
ply to the motor, an operative mechanism for 
such that when the operating-shaft is moved 
controlling said switch, a brake-wheel for said 
toward the center sufficiently so that the re 
motor, a brake-lever to operate the brake, a 
sistances are thrown in the armature-circuit, 
solenoid baving two windings, one in shunt 
the projections have passed from under the 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
rod and no longer lock it. 
the other in Series with the ar nature-circuit, 
11. In combination, a source of curren sup 
a slot-and-pin connection between the core of 
ply, an electric notor, a switch device for coin 
thesolenoid and the brake-lever, and a brake 
: trolling the admissioniof current from the sup 
weight connected to the solenoid core. 
8. In combination, a soire of current sup-ply to the motor, an operating-shaft for con 
ply, an electric motor, a switch device forcoil-trolling said switch, a brake-wheel for said 
trolling the admission of current from the sup-motor, a brake-lever to operate the brake, a 
ly to the notorian operative mechanisinfor. Solenoid having two windings, one in shunt 
controlling said switch, a brake-wheelforsaid- with the main current supply to the motor, 
motor, a brake-lover to operate the brake, a the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
a slot-and-pin connection between the core of 
solenoid having two windings, one in shunt 
o 
95 
OO 
Ios 
O 
II5 
I25 
568,571 
5 
the solenoid and the brake-lever, a segment 
ture-circuit, the projections have passed from 
on the operating-shaft having at each side a 
under the rod and no longer lock it. 
projection, a rod comected with the brake 
14. In combination with a source of current 
lever and guided on the operating-shaft, said 
supply, an electric motor, a switch device for 
5 rod having a pawl in alinement, actuating to 
controlling the admission of current from the 
the movement of the operating-shaft, with 
supply to the motor, an operating-shaft for 
one or the other projection when the rod is 
controlling said switch, a brake-wheel for 
down, but out of alinement when the rod is 
said motor, a brake-lever to operate the 
up, whereby when the pawl has passed be 
brake, a solenoid having two windings, one 
Io yond the projection it locks with it, the length 
in shunt with the main current supply to the 
of the projections is such that when the op 
motor, the other in series with the armature 
erating-shaft is moved toward the center 
circuit, the brake-lever being connected to 
sufficiently, so that the resistances are thrown 
the core of the solenoid, a spring inter 
in the armature-circuit, the projections have 
posed between the core of solenoid and 
I5 passed from under the rod and no longer 
brake-lever, a brake-weight connected to the 
lock it. 
solenoid-core, a segment on the operating 
12. In combination, a source of current sup 
shaft, having at each side a projection, a rod. 
ply, an electric motor, a switch device for con 
connected with the brake-lever and guided 85 
trolling the admission ofcurrent from the sup 
on the operating-shaft, said rod having a 
20 ply to the motor, an operating-shaft, for con 
pawl in a linement, actuating to the move 
trolling said switch, a brake-wheel for said 
ment of the operating-shaft, with one or the 
motor, a brake-lever to operate the brake, a 
other projection when the rod is down, but 
solenoid having two windings, one in shunt 
out of alinement when the rod is up, whereby go 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
when the pawl has passed beyond the pro 
25 the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
jection it locks with it, the length of the pro 
a slot-and-pin connection between the core of 
jections being such that when the operating 
the solenoid and the brake-lever, a springin 
shaft is moved toward the center sufficiently 
ter 
between the core of solenoid, and 
so that the resistances are thrown in the 95 
brake-lever, a segment on the operating-shaft 
armature-circuit, the projections have passed 
3o having at each side a projection, a rod con 
from under the rod and no longer lock it. 
nected with the brake-lever and guided on 
15. In combination, a source of current sup 
the operating-shaft, said rod having a pawl 
ply, an electric motor, a switch device for 
in alinement, actuating to movement of op 
controlling the admission of current from the 
erating-shaft, with one or the other projec 
supply to the motor, an operating-shaft for 
35 tion when the rod is down, but out of aline 
controlling said switch, a brake-wheel for 
ment when the rod is up, whereby when the 
said switch, a brake-wheel for said motor, a 
beyond the projection it 
pawl has 
brake-lever to operate the brake, a solenoid 
locks with it, the length of the projections 
having two windings, one in shunt with the 
being such that when the operating-shaft is 
main current supply to the motor, the other 
ionoved toward the center sufficiently so that 
in series with the armature-circuit, a slot-and 
the-resistances are thrown in the armature 
pin connection between the core of the solen 
circuit, the projections have passed from un 
oid and the brake-lever, a brake-weight con 
der the rod and no longer lock it. 
nected to the solenoid-core, a segment on the 
13. In combination, a source of currents up 
operating-shaft having at each side a projec 
45 ply, an electric motor, a switch device for con 
tion, a rod connected with the brake-lever 
trolling the admission of current from the sup 
and guided on the operating-shaft, said rod 
ply to the motor, an operating-shaft for con 
having a pawl in alinement, actuating to 
trolling said switch, a brake-wheel for said 
movement of operating-shaft, with one or the 
motor, a brake-lever to operate the brake, a 
other projection when the rod is down, but 
5o solenoid having two windings, one in shunt 
out of allinement when the rod is up, whereby 
with the main current supply to the motor, 
when the pawl has passed beyond the pro 
the other in series with the armature-circuit, 
jection it locks with it, the length of the pro 
the brake-lever being contected to the core 
jections being such that when the operating 
of the solenoid, a brake-weight connected 
shaft is moved toward the center sufficiently 
55 to the solenoid-core, a segment on the op 
so that the resistances are thrown in the 
erating-shaft having at each side a projec 
armature-circuit, the projections have passed 
tion, a rod connected with the brake-lever 
from under the rod and no longer lock it. 
and guided on the operating-shaft, said rod 
having a pawl in alinement, actuating to 
ply, an electric motor, a switch device for con 
6o movement of operating-shaft, with one orthe trolling the admission of current from the 
other projection when the rod is down, byt supply to the motor, an operating-shaft for 
out of alinement when the rod is up, whereby controlling said switch, a brake-wheel for 
when the pawl has passed beyond the projec-i said motor, a brake-lever to operate the 30 
tion it locks with it, the length of the projec-brake, a solenoid having two windings, one 
65 tions being such that when the operating- ia shunt with the main current supply to the 
shaft is moved toward the center sufficiently n 
Illuor, the other in series with the armature 
so that the resistancesarethrown in thearina- circuit, a slot-and-pin connection between 
tha 
16. In combination, a source of current Sup- (25 
TI5 
do 
o 5 
O 
6 
568,571. 
core of the solenoid and brake-lever, a spring trolled by the motor-controlling mechanism, 
interposed between the core of the solenoid and devices connected with said brake-lever 
and brake-lever, a brake-weight connected 
and controlling mechanism adapted to inter 
to the solenoid-core, a segment on the oper 
lock when said operating mechanism is moved 
ating-shaft having at each side a projection, 
to allow said electrical device to act, and said 
a roll connected with the brake-lever and 
device acts on said brake-lever. 
guided on the operating-shaft, said rod hav 
21. The combination with a motor brake 
ing a pawl in alinement, actuating to move 
wheel and a weighted brake-lever for the 
ment of operating-shaft, with one or the 
same, of a source of power supply for the 
other projection when the rod is down, but 
motor, and connection between said motor 
and source of power supply, a device for op 
out of alinement when the rod is up, whereby 
when the pawl has passed beyond the pro 
erating said brake-lever to lift the brake from 
jection it locks with it, the length of the pro 
the wheel, said device being in connection 
jection being such that when the operating 
with the motor source of power through the 
shaft is moved toward the center sufficiently 
motor. 
So that the resistances are thrown in the 
22. The combination with a motor brake 
arinature-circuit, the projectionshave passed 
wheel and a weighted brake-lever for the 
from under the rodandiolonger lockit. 
saune, of a source of power supply for the 
motor, and connection between said motor 
it. In combination, a source of current 
and source of power supply, a device for op 
supply, an electric motor, a brake-wheel for 
erating said brake-lever to lift the brake from 
said motor, a brake-leverto operate the brake, 
an electric device having two windings, one 
the wheel, said device being in connection 
in shunt with the main current supply to the 
with the motor source of power through the 
motor, controlling mechanism for the motor 
anofor, the other in series with the armature 
circuit, said brake-lever being operated by 
and devices connected with the brake-lever 
and controlling mechanism, adapted to inter 
means of the electric device, a reversing 
lock when the controlling mechanism is moved 
switch, the electric connections to the series 
winding being independent of the reversing 
from the center and the brake is off the brake 
wheel. 
switch. 
23. In combination a source of current 
1S. In combination, a source of current 
supply, an electric motor, a reversing-switch 
supply, an electric motor, a brake-wheel for 
said motor,a brake-lever to operate the brake, 
device, an operative mechanism for control 
ling said switch, a brake-wheel for said motor, 
a solenoid in shunt with the main current 
supply to the motor, and a solenoid in series 
a brake-lever to operate the brake, a solenoid 
with the armature-circuit, said brake-lever 
in series with the armature-circuit and inde 
being operated by means of said solenoids, a 
pendent of the reversing-switch, said brake 
reversing-switch, the electric connection to 
lever being operated by means of the solenoid. 
the series solenoid being independent of the 
24. In combination with a source of cur 
reversing-switch. 
rent supply, an electric motor, a reversing 
switch device, an operative mechanism for 
19. In combination, a source of current 
supply, an electric motor, a brake-wheel for 
controlling said switch, a brake-wheel-for 
said motor, a brake-lever to operate the brake, 
said motor, a brake-lever to operate the brake, 
an electric device in shunt with the main cur 
a solenoid, in series with the armature-cir 
rent supply to the motor, and an electric de 
cuit, a solenoid in shunt with the main cur 
rent supply, the brake-lever being connected 
vice in series with the armature-circuit, said 
brake-lever being operated by means of said 
with and operated by both the solenoids, the 
electric devices, a reversing-switch, the elec- electric connection to the series solenoid be 
ing independent of the reversing-switch. 
tric connections to the series device being in 
dependent of the reversing-switch. 
In testinhony of which invention I lave 
20. In combination with an electric motor, 
hereunto set my hand. 
a source of current supply, and controlling 
Inechanism for the motor, a brake-wheel and 
brake for the same, an electric device adapted 
when energized to release said brake, the 
current to said electric device being con 
FRANK F. EIERDMAN. 
Witnesses: 
C. D. Ioy T, 
J. J. OMEARA. 
So 
OO 
o 
25 
-40 
SS 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568671.txt	5. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
" 
MACHINE FOR MAKING HOOPS, HANDLES, AND CARRIAGE MATERIAL. 
No. 568,671. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1896. 
J. FOWLEY. 
 
s 
S is 
k 
A. 
WITNESSES: 
. 
2%.3%ae. 
yocyon 
 
Eis (e 
/772evey. 
7%, G. 
ATTORNEYS. 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
MACHINE FOR MAKING HOOPs, HANDLES, AND CARRIAGE MATERIAL 
No. 568,671. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1896, 
J. FOWLEY, 
. 
  
 
L - 
 
-s -: tes --FINOs N 
  
 
 
 
Epplit 
s see sea 
 
JD O 
i 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
7%3784ag 
I 
s 
INVENTOR 
7, Zoe Zey. 
"74- G 
AITORNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
5 sheets-Sheet 3. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING HOOPs, HANDLEs, AND CARRIAGE MATERIAL, 
Patented Sept. 29, 1896, 
No. 568,671, 
J. FOWLEY. 
III 
 
E E 
sals 
N 
f s^ 
& 2 
EE 
% A. NSR 
t ESEastEE 
- - -HSNI Hills. - 
Premrers 
E. 
el 
I2 2. 
Sit's 
4H--- 
ty 
R. - 
a 
k 
- 
st---- 
Y S 
". 
. 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
R 
s 
S 
M 
S SSSS 
Rs. 
S 
N 
2 SS 
NE NSSE 
27 NSYE 
Ness 
 
E l 7R 
P 
% % E 
 
 
  
WITNESSES 
7. Zaev 
e 
 
 
 
 
R 
m 
mild 
E 
. (No Model.) 
5 sheets-Sheet 4, 
MACHINE FOR MAKING HOOPS, HANDLES, AND CARRIAGE MATERIAL, 
No. 568,671. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1896, 
J. FOWLEY. 
- 
s 
267.4. 
A N 
 
 
... f. 
Stas a 
J1 N 
WITNESSES 
7%67&aa 
,3- 
 
INVENTOR 
172&v2e. 
By T. ATTORNEYS. 
5 sheets-Sheet.5. 
(No Model.) 
MACHINE FOR MAKING HOOPs, HANDLES, AND CARRIAGE MATERIAL 
No. 568,671. 
Patented Sept. 29, 1896. 
J. FOWLEY. 
- 
   
  
 
  
p 
-/ 
As 22.2 
I 
 
H t 
" ::IRV 
S 
o 
NNNN. 
 
. RRR 
 
. 
 
INVENTOR 
7. Zgovaez. 
BY /7Zzzzzzly G. 
ATIORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES FOWLEY, OF COBDEN, ILLINOIS. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING HOOPS, HANDLES, AND CARRIAGE MATERAL, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,671, dated September 29, 1896. 
Application filed March 21, 1896, 
Serial No. 584,265, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
w 
To all, Luhon it may concert: 
Be it known that I, JAMES FOWLEY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Cobden, 
in the county of Union and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Machines for Making Hoops, 
Handles, and Carriage Material, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a perspective of the machine, 
the carriage being broken away. Fig. 2 is a 
plan view of the machine with the carriage re 
moved. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section through 
same. Fig. 4 is a vertical cross-section on 
line 4 4, Fig. 3, the carriage being in place. 
Fig. 5 is a detail perspective of the lap-planer 
feed mechanism. Fig. 6 is a detail cross-sec 
tion to further illustrate said feed mechan 
ism. Fig. 7 is a side elevation of one of the 
shaping-planer bits. Fig. 8 is a similar view 
of a lap-planer bit or cutter. 
Fig. 9 is a trans 
Verse section through the shaping-planer 
head. Fig. 10 is a side elevation and detail 
section of the pointing-cutter head. Fig. 11 
is a detail perspective of one of the spring 
guides. 
Myinvention relates to a combination wood 
Working-machine. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
machine capable of forming hoops and other 
articles directly from the logs or saplings 
without having to first saw the logs in one 
machine and then treat the material in sev 
eral other machines. 
A further object is to so construct the ma 
chine that the logs may be flitched or cut up 
longitudinally by a combined saw and planer 
after having first moved the first two planer 
heads and gang-saws back out of operative 
position; also to provide a machine which 
Will not only cut and shape the hoops, but 
which will also plane them by means of 
planer teeth or bits carried by the gang and 
lmain Saws. 
The further objects will be brought out in 
the specification. 
The invention will be hereinafter fully de 
scribed and claimed. 
A represents a suitable bed or main frame 
having three transverse guideways A' A' A', 
Fig. 3, across its upper side, in which are 
mounted to slide the lower ends of the three 
standards B C D, the front edges of which 
are provided with upper and lower bearings 
b c. d, respectively, (see Figs. 1 and 4,) in 
which are journaled the shafts B CD'. The 
right-hand shaft B is provided with fourlon 
gitudinally-extending outwardly-projecting 
straight-edge planer bits or blades B B, Figs. 
1, 8, and 9, having slots land securing-bolts . 
b', and the planer-head thus formed I term, 
for convenience, the lap-planer. The mid 
dle shaft C' is provided with a gang of circu 
lar saws C, some of the teeth of which are 
bent laterally to form planer-bits, so that the 
saws will plane the material as it saws 
therethrough. This gang-saw and planer 
will be referred to as a gang kerfing and 
planing saw. The inner shaft D', Fig. 3, is 
provided with four shaping-planer bits B, 
Figs. 4 and 7, to give the rounding shape to 
the sides of the material being treated. These 
bits are provided with concave cutting edges 
d and end and middle tongues di. These 
tongues d are in horizontal alinement with 
the respective kerfing-saw's C, and the con 
cave cutting edges are in line with the spaces 
between the kerfing-saws. The three above 
described shafts are provided with drive-pull 
leys l' cd on their upper ends, the pulley c' 
being in a lower plane than the other two. 
The standards C D are rigidly connected 
within the base or bed. A by means of trans 
verse bars E, Fig. 3, and the rear bar E is 
provided with a bracket e, Fig. 5, in which 
the inner end of an adjusting-screw E is 
swiveled. This screw E" passes through the 
rear one of the longitudinal bars or sills of 
the main frame, Fig. 4, and through a screw 
threaded aperture in the same, and is pro 
vided at its outer end with an operating han 
dle or wheel E' and with a ratchet-wheel E, 
Figs. 2, 3, and 4, with which engages the 
elongated tooth e' of a pawl e, pivoted to 
the frame. By turning the wheel E to the 
right the screw will be forced inward and the 
transverse bars E with standards B C D will 
be moved toward the front side of the ma 
chine to bring the lap-planer, kerfing-saws, 
and shaping-cutter head into operative posi 
tion, and vice versa. One of the bars E ex 
tends under the standard B and is trans 
versely slotted, as at e, Fig. 6, to receive a 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
2 
568,671 
TC) 
25 
35 
4.O 
55 
pin U, projecting down from the base of said 
standard. The rear end of the lower face of 
the base of said standard B is provided with 
a transverse slot l', into which projects the 
upper edge of a calm-wheel F, Figs. 5 and 6, 
mounted on a transverse shaft F, journaled 
in the base and provided beyond the front 
side thereof with a pinion f. A collar f", 
Fig. 4, is mounted on the shaft F adjacent 
to the inner side of the front of the base A, 
and is provided with a set-screw or pin f', 
by which it may be held fast to the shaft or 
loosened thereon. When the collar f' is held 
fast, the shaft F will be held against longitu 
dinal movement, so that when rotated back 
and forth it will cause the lap. planer B to be 
moved in and out with its standard B, the pin 
and-slot connection be', Fig. 6, allowing the 
standard B to move in and out independent 
of the standards CD; but when all three 
standards are to be drawn back or held out 
of operative position the screw E" will be 
turned to the left to bring back bars EE, and 
when pint, Fig. 6, is acted on by the front 
gend of slot e the standard will also be held 
back or prevented from moving forwardly, 
the sleeve or collar f' being at this time 
loosened on the shaft F", so that its cam F 
will not be able to force the standard B out 
Wardly. 
In order that the standard C may have an 
independent adjustment from that given it 
by the adjusting-screw E' for the purpose of 
adjusting the saw-shaft C" outwardly as the 
saws wear down, I form this standard C in 
two sections placed face to face, (see Fig. 3,) 
the section c' carrying the shaft C' and con 
nected to the section c by interlocking upper 
and lower ratchet - teeth c" and transverse 
bolts c, which pass through holes in section 
c and slots c' in the section c'. By loosen 
ing the bolts and moving the section c' out 
Wardly or toward the saw - table and then 
tightening the bolts the proper adjustment 
may be given the kerfing-saws C. 
G, Figs. 2 and 3, is the main driving-shaft, 
journaled beyond the shaping-cutter head D 
in bearings g g on the base A, and provided 
with a power-pulley g' on its rear end and 
With a combined rip and planer saw G' on its 
front end. This saw G' will cut the log at 
right angles to the kerfing-saws C, and will 
be of a diameter to cut through the log at 
the bases of the kerfs and thus sever the por 
tions between the kerfs, as will be more fully 
described hereinafter. This saw G' will also 
have planer teeth or bits G' at intervals, so 
that the use of a separate planer will not be 
necessary. The saw G' may be a circular or a 
band saw, as may be desired. 
II", Figs, 1, 2, and 3, is a vertical power-trans 
mitting shaft journaled in bearings in a fixed 
standard II and belted at its lower end to the 
drive-shaft G, and provided at its upper end 
with two pulleys l'h', the lower pulley h", 
Fig. 1, being belted by belt li to the pulley 
c' on saw-shaft C', and the upper pulley h 
being belted by belt h' to the pulleys d' l'. 
The outer runs of these belts ful pass be 
hind idle-pulleys i. i., mounted on a vertical 
axis I, so that as the standards B C D are 
moved forward the belts will be forced against 
these pulleys i i and tightened thereby. 
J. Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, is a transverse table 
operating shaft mounted in the base and to 
the right of the shaft G, and provided at its 
outer end with a pinioni. The shaft, J is 
driven in any suitable manner from the 
shaft G. 
IX, Figs. 1 and 4, is the saw-table, which 
may be provided with any suitable log ad 
justing and turning devices. This table Ix 
has wheels k, which run on the tracks L, 
parallel with the front side of the base A, 
and one of the longitudinal sills of the table 
is provided with a feed-rack IX", meshing with 
the pinioni, so that the table will be moved 
back and forth thereby. K, Fig. 4, is a sec 
ond rack, much shorter than rack IX' and 
mounted on the under side of the right-hand 
end of the saw-table, (see dotted lines, Fig. 
3,) to mesh with the pinion f on the cam feed 
shaft F of the standard B, so as to rotate 
shaft F as the table K is fed forward and 
cause said shaft and its calm E to feed the 
standard B outward just as the rear end of 
the log reaches the lap-cutter head B', so as 
to bevel that portion of the log which will 
form one end of the hoops. Then as the ta 
ble is retracted the rack IX will reverse the 
movement of the shaft F and cam F, which 
will cause standard B to be retracted and 
withdraw its planer-head B. 
M, Figs. 1, 2, and 3, is a vertical guide-cas 
ing beyond the rip-saw G', and it has as many 
guideways M' as there are gang-saw's C', the 
bottom of these guideways M' being formed 
of the plate-springs in'. (See Fig. 11.) 
MMI, Figs. 1, 2, and 3, represent a pair of 
drawing-rolls mounted in a framework adja 
cent to the guide M, one roll being fixed to 
a vertical shaft driven through suitable bevel 
gears and a horizontal shaft from the shaft 
J, as seen in Fig. I. The other rollis mounted 
in spring-seated bearings, as seen in Figs. 1, 
2, and 3, so as to allow of a yielding move 
ment for hoops of different thicknesses. 
As the log is fed forward by the table the 
strips or hoops severed will enter the guide 
ways M', which will support them when fully 
severed. Beyond the guide MI about the 
length of a hoop is mounted a transverse 
shaft N, belted to the drive-shaft G. 
O is a circular pointing-cutter head formed 
of a concavo-convex disk of sheet metal, the 
convex face being the working face. From 
this disk a series of radial cutter-bits o are 
punched up, as clearly shown in Fig. 10 of the 
drawings. 
The operation is as follows: The saw-table 
is retracted and a log placed thereon, the three 
standards B C D all being retracted. When 
everything is ready, the wheel E is turned so 
that the screw E will feed the standards BC 
- 
95 
OC) 
IO 
II5 
as 
568,671 
3. 
O 
35 
45 
55 
- 
. 
D forwardly to bring their bits and saws into 
Operative position. As the saw-table moves 
to the left that end of the log will first be pre 
sented to the kerfing and planer saws C, 
which will cut a series of longitudinal kerfs 
and plane the Walls thereof, the depth of the 
kerfs being regulated to correspond to the 
thickness of the hoops or strips desired. Then 
the log is brought along to the shaper-head, 
the bits of which shape the portions between 
the kerfs to agree with the shape of the bits. 
Then the end of the log reaches the rip and 
planer saw G', which severs all of the hoops or 
strips, the end of which will now pass into the 
guides and between the two rolls M, and as 
the table moves forward the strips will be re 
moved by a boy, who will point them on the 
cutter-head O. Just as the rear portion of 
the log comes opposite to the lap-cutter the 
rack K. Will cause the cam-shaft to feed the 
standard B outward and bring the cutters 
or bits against the log to bevel the log and 
form the lap for that end of the series of 
hoops. 
Any short strips caused by breaking of the 
long strips or hoops owing to knots or other 
imperfections, may be afterward pointed and 
lapped by the Workman upon the cutter-head 
O for use on half-barrels, kegs, &c., so that 
nothing will be lost. 
If it is desired simply to flitch up a log into 
cross-ties, bridge-timbers, &c., then the three 
standards B C D and parts carried thereby 
will be retracted out of the way and the com 
bined saw-planer G' only will be used. 
It will be seen that not only hoops, but ma 
terial for handles and for carriage and wagon 
makers and carpenters use may be formed 
on this machine. There will be no ragged 
edges or faces on the hoops or strips, as both 
the saw G' and saws C are provided with 
planer-bits, and hence the material will last 
much longer than if merely sawed. . 
P, Fig. 2, is a horizontal brace bolted to the 
upper end of the standard C with its ends 
bearing against the inner sides of the upper 
ends of the standards B and H, but not posi 
tively connected thereto. The brace Pis pro 
vided with a slot p to receive the upper end 
of the standard D. Thus the upper ends of 
the standards will be braced apart against the 
strain of the driving-belts, and yet allow the 
movable standards to be moved in and out. 
The kerfing-saws may be spaced apart any 
desired distance on their shaft by suitable 
Washers, and the shaping cutters or bits may 
be made in patterns to suit the adjustment 
of the kerfing-saws, so that hoops or pieces of 
any desired widths may be worked out by 
removing and changing the shaping-cutters 
and properly spacing the kerfing-saws. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination with the main frame or 
base, and the saw-table; of the gang of hori 
. 
Zontal kerfing-saws arranged about a vertical 
axis, a shaping-cutter head arranged in rear 
of the kerfing-saws about a separate vertical 
axis, and means for adjusting said kerfing 
saws and shaping-cutter heads at right angles 
to their axis independently of each other to 
vary the thickness of hoops, and a vertical 
rip-saw arranged in rear of the shaping-cut 
ter head to sever the strips at the base of the 
kerfs substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with the main frame or 
base, and the saw-table; of the vertical lap 
cutter head arranged at the front end of the 
main frame and upon One side of the log to 
act upon the log before the strips are severed, 
mechanism for feeding said lap-cutter head 
in or out, the gang of horizontal kerfing-saws 
in rear thereof, the shaping-cutter head in 
rear of the kerfing-saws, and the vertical main 
or rip saw in rear of the shaping-cutter head, 
substantially as and for the purpose described. 
3. The combination with the main frame or 
base, and the saw-table; of the Vertical lap 
cutter head arranged at the front end of the 
main frame and upon one side of the log to 
act upon the log before the strips are severed, 
means for feeding said lap-cutter head in and 
out, the gang of combined horizontal kerfing 
saws and planers, in rear of the lap-cutter 
head, the vertical shaping-cutter head in rear 
of the kerfing-saws to shape the material be 
tween the kerfs, and the main combined rip 
saw and planer arranged in a vertical plane 
behind the shaping-cutter head to sever the 
strips from the log substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
4. The combination with the main frame or 
base and the saw-table of the three Vertical 
standards; the inner two of which are con 
nected for simultaneous adjustment toward 
the saw-table, and the outer one of which has 
an independent feed mechanism, a vertical 
lap-planer or cutter-head carried by the last 
named standard, a gang of horizontalcircular 
kerfing-saws mounted on the middle standard, 
a shaping-cutter head mounted on the inner 
standard, and a vertical rip-saw to sever the 
strips from the log after it passes the shaping 
cutters, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination with the main frame or 
base and the saw-table having an operating 
mechanism, of the outer standard having a 
feed mechanism geared to the saw-table, a lap 
cutter mounted on said standard, a middle 
standard, the kerfing-SaWS mounted thereon, 
the inner standard, the shaping-cutter head 
mounted thereon, a horizontal bar positively 
connecting the middle and inner standard 
and having a pin-and-slot connection with 
said outer standard, a feed-screw for feeding 
the inner standards in and out, and the main 
or rip saw for severing the strips after they 
have passed the shaping-cutter head, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. The combination with the base or frame 
and the saw-table having an operating mech 
95 
OO 
I o5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
568,671 
anism, of the vertical standard carrying a 
cutter-head, a transverse feed-shaft opera 
tively connected with the lower end of said 
standard and having a pinion on its outer end 
and a short lack on the saw-table to mesh 
with said pinion, substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination with the base or frame 
alnd the saw-table having a short rack and an 
operating mechanism, of the vertical stand 
ard carrying a cutter-head and provided with 
a groove in its under side, and a transverse 
feed-shaft having a cam-wheel entering said 
groove and a pinion engaging said short rack, 
substantially as set forth. 
S. The combination with the base or main 
frame and the saw-table, of two transversely 
sliding connected standards mounted on the 
base or frame, a feed-screw mounted in the 
frame and having a swiveled connection at 
its inner end with the lower ends of said 
standards, a gang of kerfing-saws mounted on 
one standard and a shaping - cutter head 
mounted on the other standard to shape the 
material between the kerfs, substantially as 
set forth. 
9. The coln bilation. With the base and the 
saw-table, of the gang of kerfing-saws, ar 
ranged about a vertical axis, the vertical rip 
saw in rear thereof to sever the material into 
strips at the bases of the kerfs, a vertical 
guide arranged beyond and next to the rip 
saw and having a vertical series of guideways 
alining the severed strips, substantially as set 
forth. 
10. The combination with the base and the 
saw-table, of the vertical lap-cutter head, the 
gang of kerfing-saws in rear thereof arranged 
upon a vertical axis, the shaping-cutter head 
ill lear of the said saws also arranged about 
a vertical axis, the rip-saw in rear of the 
shaping-cutters, and the vertical guide be 
yond and next to the rip-saw and having a 
Vertical selries of guide Waysalining the spaces 
between the kerfing-saws, substantially as 
set folrth. 
11. The vertical strip-guide provided with 
a series of transverse guideways for the strips, 
and springs forming the bottoms of the guide 
O 
25 
45 
ways, combined with and arranged next to 
the vertical rip-saw, substantially asset forth. 
12. The vertical strip-guide provided with a 
series of transverse guideways having Springs 
combined with and arranged next to the ver 
tical rip-saw, and guide-rolls adjacent to the 
guideways, substantially as set forth. 
13. The herein-described machine compris 
ing the base or bed, the saw-table, having an 
operating-shaft and gearing, a short rack at 
the rear end of the saw-table, a standard at 
the rear end of the frame and provided with 
a feed-shaft geared to said short rack, a lap 
cutter head journaled in said standard, a 
middle and innerstandard adjustably mount 
ed on the base and carrying a gang of kerfing 
saws and a shaping - cutter respectively, a 
drive-shaft geared to the table - operating 
shaft, and carrying a rip-saw at its outer end, 
to sever the shaped strips at the base of the 
kerfs, a vertical transmitting-shaft having 
two pulleys, belted to the pulleys of the shafts 
of said cutter-heads and gang-saw respec 
tively and also belted to the drive-shaft, a 
guide beyond the rip-saw and a pointer-cut 
ter head beyond the guide and belted to the 
drive-shaft, Substantially as set forth. 
14. The combination with base and the end 
and intermediate adjustable standards, of 
the horizontal brace connected to the upper 
end of one of the intermediate standards and 
slidingly engaging at its ends the two end 
standards, Substantially as set forth. 
15. The combination with the base, and the 
saw-table and its operating mechanism, of 
the three adjustable standards having verti 
cal shafts carrying the lap, kerfing and shap 
ing tools, pulleys on the upper ends of the 
shafts, a drive-shaft, a vertical transmitting 
shaft having two pulleys belted to said first 
named pulleys as described, and idler-pulleys 
engaging the Outer runs of the belts to tighten 
them when the standards are adjusted out 
wardly, substantially as set forth. 
JAMES FOWLEY. 
Witnesses: 
ELI MULL, 
EDWARD P. HARMON. 
55 
75 
90 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568771.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 568,77l, 
A. S. LAMBERT & E. HOFFMAN. 
CLOSURE, 
Patented Oot, 6, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
S. 
S. 
22a star 
?erize 
aga AE 
%l 
g 
xix.6% 
fi, if 
 
Witnesses. 
> z 
OY 722. 
Inventor.5 
a%2 46 42-4-6 
2:32-. 
e MoRris Perers co. ProTottho...washingren, to c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT S. LAMBERT AND EDMUND HOFFMAN, OF BRIDGETON, NEW 
JERSEY, ASSIGNORS, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE PRACTICAL 
CLOSURE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
COSURE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,771, dated October 6, 1896. 
Application filed September 27, 1895. Serial No. 563,847. (No model.) 
IO 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that we, ALBERT S. LAMBERT 
and EDMUNDHOFFMAN, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Bridgeton, in the county 
of Cumberland, in the State of New Jersey, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Closures, of which the follow 
ing specification is a true and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part thereof. 
Our invention relates to closures for bot 
tles, cans, or other receptacles, and has for 
its object to provide a new and simple lock 
ing closure, the nature of which will be best 
understood as described in connection with 
the drawings, in which it is illustrated, and 
in which- 
- 
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal sectio 
through a bottle-neck in which our closure is 
inserted, the section being taken through the 
closure also. Fig. 2 is a similar section taken 
at right angles to the section shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a view of the bottom of the closure. 
Fig. 4 is a sectional perspective view of the 
bottle-neck shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 5 
is a bottom view of a modified form of closure 
embodying our invention, and Fig. 6 a cross 
section on the line acac of Fig. 5. 
Aindicates the bottle-neck adapted for use 
With the closure shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. 
It is provided with downwardly-extending 
grooves A", oppositely disposed and terminat 
ing in circumferential grooves A*, having in 
clined upper walls A, as shown in Fig. 4. 
B is the closure, which is formed of sheet 
metal with a depressed central portion B, at 
the lower end of which is formed a series of 
downwardly-extending beads, as indicated 
at B, the number of beads depending on the 
number of locking flanges or lugs with which 
the closure is to be provided, and the distance 
between the beads being such as will permit 
the passage of the locking-lugs. These open 
ings between the ends of the beads are indi 
cated at B, while B' indicates the flat bottom 
end of the depressed portion B9, lying inside 
of and between the beads. 
Bindicates an outwardly-extending part 
of the sheet-metal closure, between which 
5o and the top of the bottle or other receptacle 
45 
35 
 
55 
65 
o 
75 
85 
is secured a washer E, and preferably, where 
the form of the receptacle closed permits it, 
we form the extreme outer flange of the sheet 
metal closure in the form of a corrugated 
downwardly - extending flange, as indicated 
at B'. 
C is a metal plate provided with down 
Wardly - extending lugs C". In the device 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, two lugs C" are 
employed, extending out of the openings B 
between the ends of the beads B, the plate 
C of this construction being held to the cap 
piece by a single rivet D, the engagement of 
the lugs with the beads preventing the possi 
bility of the plate turning. In the modified 
construction shown in Figs. 5 and 6 the plate 
C is made in the form of an annular ring 
and provided with six lugs C, extending out 
of a corresponding opening B, between the 
depending beads B, a number of rivets B 
being used to hold the ring in position. 
In using the closure a washer is placed 
either against the portion B of the closure 
or against the corresponding portion of the 
receptacle, such a washer being indicated at 
E in Figs. 1 and 2. The closure is then in 
serted in the receptacle by bringing the lugs 
C to register with the grooves A and push 
ing it down into the mouth of the receptacle. 
When the lugs C" register with the grooves 
A', the closure is turned, the lugs then press 
ing against the Walls A of the grooves A*, 
and, by reason of the inclination of these 
walls, drawing the closure down into the neck 
of the receptacle and against the washer E. 
Having now described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
A closure-cap formed of sheet metal having 
a depressed central portion B and an inter 
mitted depending flange B in combination 
with a metal plate C riveted to the bottom of 
the depressed portion B and having out 
wardly-extending lugs C' extending between 
portions of flange B. 
ALBERT S. LAMBERT, 
EDMUND HOFFMAN. 
Witnesses: 
THOMAS W. TRENCHARD, 
J. WARD RICHARDSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568872.txt	(No Model.). 
J. C., NORTON. 
HOT WATER HEATINGAPPARATUS. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 568,872, 
Patented 00t, 6, 1896. 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHOTo-LTHo. washington.o. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 568,872, 
 
J. C. NORTON. 
HOT WATER HEATING APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 6, 1896. 
(6feeveesses: 
a 4-4. 
Zeave/edor. 
-- (y-4----, r%r 7 y 
 
the Norris PeTERS co, PHOTO-To...washington, D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. C. NORTON, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS. 
HOT - WATER HEAT N G A PPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,872, dated October 6, 1896. 
Application filed July 13, 1896, Serial No. 598,974. (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all twhom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. C. NORTON, of 
Lynn, county of Essex, State of Massachu 
setts, have invented an Improvement in Hot 
Water Heating Apparatus, of which the fol 
lowing description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters on the drawings representing like 
parts. 
This invention has for its object the pro 
duction of a novel and efficient apparatus for 
rapidly and thoroughly heating water, the 
construction of the apparatus being strong 
and durable and convenient to set up and op 
erate, means being provided for regulating 
the heat and for running the apparatus with 
One or more substantially independent fire 
pots. 
The various features of construction em 
bodying my invention will be hereinafter de 
scribed in the specification and particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view of a 
hot-Water heating apparatus embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a transverse section 
thereof on the line ac ac. Fig. 3 is a similar 
section on the line ac' ac', Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 
is a top or plan view of the fire-pots with the 
reservoir omitted. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 3, and 4, I have shown 
the Water-shell A as a casting comprising an 
outer wall a. a', the former of which is ellipti 
cal in cross-section, but upright, while the 
part a slopes inwardly and upwardly to form 
a substantially elliptical cone. The inner 
Wall b b' corresponds in general contour to 
the outer wall, but I have herein shown two 
such walls within the outer wall to thus make 
a water-space A", which divides the water 
shellinto two firepots or chambers FF', open 
ing at ff at their upper ends into the space 
within the external casing C of the heater. 
Suitable grates g and g' are provided for 
the fire-pots, the water-shell resting upon a 
base B, divided by a partition B' into com 
partments, one for each of the fire-pots, and 
each provided with a suitable door B*, through 
which the ashes may be withdrawn and the 
draft regulated in usual manner. 
As best shown in Fig. 1, each of the fire 
pots or chambers is provided with a feed 
opening f* f', respectively, so that one or 
more of the fire-pots may be used, as desired. 
Owing to the inner separating part a' of 
the shell the various fire-pots are independ 
ent one of the other, and if only a small fire 
is required one may be used, and more in 
proportion to the heat desired. 
While I have shown herein the exterior of 
the shell as elliptical in form, it will be ob 
vious that it may be made otherwise, and by 
making the dividing portion of the shell to 
correspond more than two fire-pots may be 
provided. 
The products of combustion pass from the 
fire-pot, through the openings ff', into the 
general combustion - chamber C*, and pass 
thence to the chimney by means of the main 
outlet C', communication being effected there 
with by a two-way outlet CC, respectively. 
A damper c in the main outlet C" regulates 
the draft, and I have also provided dampers 
c and c in the part C'C' for a purpose to be 
described, the outlet C being at or near the 
upper end of the combustion-chamber C and 
the outlet, C near its base. 
The wall portion a' of the water-shell is 
provided with an annular upturned flange C, 
provided at suitable intervals with headed 
bolts or screws a, (see Fig. 1,) upon which 
rests the lower edge of the water-reservoir R, 
the upturned flange preventing lateral dis 
placement of the reservoir, while the bolts 
provide means for properly leveling in the 
erection of the furnace. 
The water-reservoir consists of a cylinder 
main or body portion having a series of ver 
tical flues r extended therethrough from its 
lower to its upper side and controlled by a 
suitable damper R*, having openings r there 
in, (see Fig. 2,) which may be brought to 
register with the flues to permit free passage 
of the products of combustion through the 
main part of the reservoir, or the flues may 
be more or less closed by properly moving 
the damper. As shown in Fig. 2, the damper 
is suitably guided between ribs or ridges.r. 
on top of the reservoir-body. The lower part 
of the reservoir depends from the main or 
body portion to form an annular outwardly 
flaring extension R', which is supported by 
the bolts a described, the said extension 
55 
75 
85 
- 
95 
IOO 
4-5 
 
- 
568,872 
 
projecting over the upper part of the water 
shell, as clearly shown in Fig. 1. The water 
shell A is provided with suitable water-inlets 
Ct, and inlets r convey the water to the 
5 reservoir, entering the latter at the lower 
part of the extension R", while the inlets a 
enter the shell at or near its base. 
The reservoir is cored out at to admit 
the passage therethrough of pipes a, which 
Io connect the upper end of the water-shell. A 
With a water-head H, above the apparatus 
and exterior to its casing, from which head 
hot water is distributed, as desired, by means 
of pipes c', c, and c. 
I5. A pipe r connects the top of the reservoir 
R. With the head H, the damper being shown 
in Fig. 2 as slotted at 10 to permit the pas 
Sage of said pipe without interfering with the 
operation of the damper. Now, if the dam 
2O per R* is open, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the 
products of combustion will pass from the 
fire-pots or other flues r, heating the water 
in the reservoir, and out at the top of the lat 
ter, and thence normally through the outlet 
25 C and main outlet C", the dampers c c' being 
at such time open and the damper c closed. 
If it is desired to cause the products of 
combustion to pass not only up through the 
body portion of the reservoir, but also down 
about the exterior of its extension R', the 
damper c is closed and the damper c' open, 
and it will be obvious by an inspection of 
Fig. 1 that the desired path of the products 
of combustion will be thus attained. 
By shutting the damper R* the products of 
combustion must pass up out of the fire-pots 
and then down between the extension R and 
the inclined water portion of the shell A', and 
then up and out through either the outlet C 
4o or C, as desired, thus providing for various 
regulations of the heat. 
The water-shell is continuous and the Water 
can circulate entirely around the fire-pots and 
between them, and passing thence, as heated, 
45 to the head H, while the water entering the 
bottom of the reservoir is heated before it 
reaches its upper part on its way to its head. 
A very convenient, simple, and effective 
apparatus is thus attained, and one wherein 
5o the Water is thoroughly and rapidly heated. 
My invention is not restricted to the pre 
cise construction and arrangement herein 
shown, as the same may be modified or rear 
ranged without departing from the spirit and 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an apparatus of the class described, 
6o a plurality of independent fire-pots, a con 
tinuous water-shell surrounding and sepa 
rating said pots, and a separate feed-opening 
for each pot, extended through the water 
shell, whereby any or all of the fire-pots maybe 
55 Scope of my invention. 
65 used as desired, substantially as described. 
35. 
90 
2. In an apparatus of the class described, 
a water-shell comprising an outer Wall and a 
plurality of inner walls, to form a plurality 
of independent fire-pots, the said inner walls 
extending between and forming the dividing 
water-space between the fire-pots, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In an apparatus of the class described, 
a water-shell having its exterior elliptical in 
cross-section, and forming with its inner wall 75 
a plurality of independent fire-pots separated 
by a water-space, a grate in each pot, a feed 
opening for each pot, whereby one or all of 
the fire-pots may be used, and inlet and out 
let openings for the water, substantially as 
described. 
4. In an apparatus of the class described, 
a water-shell comprising an outer Wall and a 
plurality of inner walls, to form a plurality 
of independent fire-pots, and a separate grate 85 
and feed-opening for each pot, the said inner 
walls extending between and forming the di 
viding water-space between the fire-pots, and 
also extending below the grates to separate 
the ash-pits, substantially as described. 
5. In a hot-Water heating apparatus, a fire 
pot, a surrounding, externally-conical water 
shell, a water-reservoir having flues there 
through above, said fire-pot, a depending flar 
ing base for said reservoir, a head, and con- 95 
nections between it, the reservoir and water 
shell, substantially as described. 
6. In an apparatus of the class described, 
a water-shell, an inclosed fire-pot, a water 
reservoir, means to support it on said shell, Ioo 
flues extended through the reservoir, a dam 
per therefor, a water-head, and connections 
between it, the shell and reservoir, substan 
tially as described. 
a Water-shell, a plurality of fire-pots therein, 
an exterior casing, a water-reservoir within 
it and having an annular, depending exten 
sion surrounding the upper part of the shell, 
a two-way outlet for the products of combus- IIo 
tion, and means to regulate the passage of 
said products, substantially as described. 
S. In an apparatus of the class described, 
a water-shell, a plurality of fire-pots therein, 
an exterior casing, a water-reservoir within II5 
it and having an annular, depending exten 
sion surrounding the upper part of the shell, 
a series of flues in the central portion of the 
reservoir, a regulator therefor, means to ad 
justably support the reservoir on the shell, a 120 
water-head, and connections between it, the 
water shell and reservoir, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of I25 
two subscribing witnesses. 
7. In an apparatus of the class described, Io5 
. 
JOSEPH. C. NORTON. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD F. ALLEN, 
FREDERICK L. EMERY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US568972.txt	 
C. ENGEL. 
TOY, 
Patented Oct. 6, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 568,972, 
 
WITNESSES 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLEMENT ENGEL OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TOY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 568,972, dated October 6, 1896. 
Application filed June 13, 1896, Serial No. 595,495, (No model.) 
To ?t77, athlon, if in?t,7/ concern: 
Be it known that I, CLEMENTENGEL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Toys, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part thereof, in which similar 
numerals of reference indicate corresponding 
parts. 
This invention relates to toys, and the ob 
ject thereof is to provide an improved device 
of this class which is simple in construction 
and operation and which is designed to inter 
est and amuse the young. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the foll 
lowing specification, of which the accompa 
nying drawings form a part, in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional side view of my im 
proved toy, and Fig. 2 a plan view thereof. 
In the practice of my invention I provide a 
base plate or board 5, in the bottom of which 
is formed a chamber 6, above which is a stand 
ard 7, which is provided with a central bore 
or passage 8, which opens at the bottom, and 
said standard is provided near the top with 
side openings or slots 9, which communicate 
there with. I also provide a rod 10, which is 
placed vertically in the central bore or pas 
sage 8, and the bottom of which is curved 
outwardly and upwardly to form an arm 11, 
on which is placed a button or head 12, and 
Said arm 11 passes through an opening 13, 
formed in the base plate or board 5, adjacent 
to the standard 7, said opening being shown 
in dotted lines in Fig. 2. 
I also provide a 
figure 14, which is intended to represent a 
man, and said figure is provided with arms 
15, and said figure and the rod 10 are con 
nected by a yoke of wire or similar material, 
provided with a cross-head 16, having a crank 
17, which is pivotally connected with the rod 
10 at 18 by means of a loop or yoke formed 
On Said rod, and the sides 18 of the yoke are 
passed through the arms 15 of the figure and 
pivotally connected with said figure at 19, 
the ends thereof being bent inwardly at right 
angles and passed into a transverse bore or 
passage 20, formed in the body of the figure, 
and the sides of the cross-head 16 are passed 
through the sides of the standard 7 near the 
top thereof. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
In the normal position the man represented 
by the figure 14 is standing upon the base 55 
plate or board 5, and by pressing sharply and 
quickly on the button or head 5 the figure 
will be caused to turn a handspring, in which 
position said figure will be standing on the 
side of the standard 7, opposite the position 
occupied in Fig. 1, and then by pressing again 
on the button or head 11 said figure will be 
caused to turn a handspring backward, and 
this operation may be continued as often and 
as rapidly as desired. 
This device is simple in construction and 
operation and comparatively inexpensive, 
and it is evident that changes in and modifi 
cations of the form, construction, and ar 
rangement of the various parts thereof may 
be made without departing from the spirit of 
my invention or sacrificing its advantages. 
Having fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
The combination in a toy, of a base plate 
or board, a vertical standard mounted there 
on, a rod or wire which passes through said 
standard, and is provided at its lower end 
with an outwardly-curved and upwardly-di 
rected arm, on which is mounted a button or 
head, said standard being also provided at its 
upper end with slots or openings in its oppo 
site sides, and with a yoke of wire or similar 
material, which is connected with the upper 
end of said wire or rod, and the sides of which 
are pivotally connected with a figure, said 
figure being designed to represent a man, and 
provided with arms through which the sides 
of said yoke pass, and said base plate Or 
board being provided beneath said standard 
with a chamber into which the lower end of 
the rod projects, and said base plate or board 
being provided in the upper side thereof, 
with an opening through which the arm pro 
vided with the button or head passes, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing aS 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 11th 
day of June, 1896. 
CLEMENT ENGEL. 
95 
75 
Witnesses: 
W. W. HILL, 
CHARLES S. ROGERS. 
Od 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569072.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 569,072. 
J. A. TACKABERRY. 
TRUCK. 
Patented Oct. 6, 1896. 
s 
S. 
Oy 
Q &n 
N. 
V. 
is 
O 
cry 
N 
i. 
r 
E Oil & 
 
 
 
N Qa s A. 
N 
n 
s 
& 
WS 
: s 
i 
: 
H S 
 
 
& 
 
 
EOE 
E s 
O 
w 
A N 8 s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. TACKABERRY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
TRUCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,072, dated October 6, 1896. 
Application filed September 5, 1893, Serial No. 484,864, (No model.) 
IO 
15 
To all, Luhon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN A. TACKABERRY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Trucks, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to the trucks of tram 
cars, and more especially to that class of trucks 
which are used in connection with motor and 
cable cars; and my invention consists in con 
structing the truck-frame, spring-supports, 
and braking appliances as fully set forth here 
inafter, and as illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of sufficient of a 
truck-frame to illustrate my invention. Fig. 
2 is a side elevation illustrating different 
forms of pedestals at the opposite end. 
The frame H of the truck is supported by 
the boxes C, which receive the journals of the 
axles a, having the wheels b, the frame being 
suspended from the boxes, as shown. 
The side pieces E E of the frame instead 
of being made as heavy as usually required 
when such side pieces are of wood are made 
lighter, but are reinforced by a straight-sit 
ting plate 13, which is of the width or verti 
cal height of the narrower portions of the 
side pieces and extend through slots in the 
wider portions, as illustrated in the drawings. 
As shown, the said plate occupies the posi 
tion about midway between the two faces of 
the side pieces and is secured in place by 
transverse bolts 14; but the said plate may 
be placed upon the outside or the inside of 
the side piece, if desired. By this means with 
the use of wooden side pieces of compara 
tively little thickness I am enabled to secure 
the requisite support for the heavy motors 
and other appliances now used upon some 
classes of cars. 
Generally the body of the car is supported 
by the spring interposed between the pedes 
tal and bearings upon the boxes, and this de 
mands that the entire support shall be con 
centrated within a comparatively-limited area 
adjacent to each box and does not with heavy 
cars secure the requisite stability. In order 
to overcome this defect, I interpose One or 
more of each set of springs adjacent to each 
box between the body of the car and the side 
piece E. The springs may be arranged in dif 
ferent ways. Thus, as illustrated at the right 
in Fig. 2, the pedestal A is supported upon the 
usual springs 77, having their bearings at the 
sides of the box C, while supplemental springs 
7 rest upon the truck-frame, as, for instance, 
upon brackets 8. The sill X of the body bears 
upon the top of the pedestal and also upon a 
bearing-plate 20 at the top of the springs 7. 
In the construction shown at the left in Fig. 
2, which is the preferable construction, the 
pedestal A is provided with an arm or exten 
sion 5, which projects over the springs 7. In 
either case there is a much wider base or 
bearing for the spring-supports than is usu 
ally obtained, and there is an increased sta 
bility. 
Where increased elasticity is desired, sup 
plemental springs 6, preferably flat rubber 
springs, may be interposed between the top 
of the pedestal and the bottom of the sill of 
the body, as shown at the left in Fig. 2. 
Each pair of brake-shoes 99 is secured at 
the end of a brake-beam 22, which instead 
of being suspended from the body of the car, 
as is common, is pivoted to links 10, each. 
pivoted at the lower end to a bracket 12 upon 
the truck-frame, so that, as the said frame 
always occupies an invariable position as re 
gards the wheels, there will be no movement 
of the brake-shoes except to and from the 
wheels, as permitted by the swinging of the 
links. The links 10, when the brakes bear 
against the wheels, are so pivoted as to bring 
them in vertical positions, whereby when the 
shoes are withdrawn from the wheels the 
tendency of the link is to fall outward with 
the brake-beam and maintain the shoes from 
contact with the edges of the wheels, so that 
they will not wear by such contact and so 
that there is no necessity of using springs to 
keep them normally out of contact with the 
said edges or rims. 
In order to avoid the frequent adjustments 
that are ordinarily required where the brake 
levers have comparatively little play, I make 
use of the construction best illustrated in 
Fig. 1, where there are two brake-levers 1516, 
the former pivoted at y to a brake-bar 20, 
which is connected by links 21 21, having 
any usual or suitable means of longitudinal 
adjustment, to the bar 20 at the opposite end 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
569,072 
 
of the truck. From one end of the lever 15 
extends the reel-rod 23, which connects with 
the brake-chain, and the other end of the 
lever 15 is connected by a link 17 with the 
end of the lever 16, the latter being pivoted 
at X to the brake-beam 22, near the center 
thereof, and also being connected by a link 
18 with the bar 20. A guide-link 19 is also 
pivoted to the brake-beam 22 and the bar 20, 
as shown. 
When by winding up the chain a draft is 
exerted upon the reel-rod 23 and one end of 
the lever 15, the latter, swinging upon its 
fulcrum. /, thrusts inward the lever 16 and 
carrying inward also the pivot X of the lat 
ter, so as to force inward the brake-beam 22 
and bring the shoes against the wheels, while 
at the same time the lever 15 tends to swing 
upon the end connected with the link 17 as a 
pivot and to carry outward the fulcrum. /, 
thereby drawing out the bar 20, together 
with the links 21, and pulling in the bar 20 
at the opposite end of the truck, bringing it 
against the brake-beam 22 at such end and 
forcing the shoes against the rims of the 
Wheels at that end. 
When the long end of the lever 16 is thrust 
inward by the power applied to the link 17, 
the short end of said lever 16 is thrust out 
ward with the link 18, which also tends to act 
upon the bar 20 and carry it outward. I have 
found that by the combination of levers shown 
and described it is possible to apply the brakes 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
with sufficient force and rapidity, and at the 
same time it is not necessary to have such 
nice adjustment as is ordinarily required. 
Ilay no claim herein to the brake devices 
shown and described, since they are to form 
the subject of a separate application which 
I intend to file. 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
struction and arrangement of parts shown, I 
claim as my invention 
1. The combination in a car-truck, of a side 
piece E having its middle portion of greater 
vertical width than its end portions, said 
piece being vertically and uniformly grooved 
or recessed from end to end, a reinforcing 
plate of a vertical width not exceeding that 
of the end portions fitted in said groove or 
recess, and suitable devices to secure the parts 
together, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of the truck-frame sus 
pended from the car-axles and provided with 
the brackets 8 at or near the ends, pedestals 
having each at one side an extension 5, and 
Supporting-springs between said extensions 
and brackets, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN A. TACKABERRY. 
Witnesses: 
WALLACE E. KNIPE, 
A. Y. ERICSSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569172.txt	(No Model.) 
J. W. CARNS & E. FAILOR. 
BICYCLE TRE. 
No. 569,172. 
Patented Oct. 13, 1896. 
 
 
e 
e-R 
S. 
N Z27 at SSS 
SN O 
SSN Cu 
S 
w 
SS 
AW 
NN sans 
n 
  
SN 
A 
y 
B-NYSN 
f- 
as 2 25 
'25. 2. . N. N 
 
Witezzez 
 
The Norris Peters co. Photo-ITHo, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. CARNS AND EDWARD FAILOR, OF PIERCE, OHIO. 
BICYCLE-TRE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,172, dated October 13, 1896. 
Application filed December 30, 1895, Serial No. 573,691 (No model.) 
55 
- 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN W. CARNs and 
EDWARDFAILOR, citizens of the United States, 
residing at Pierce, in the county of Stark and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Bicycle-Tires; and 
we do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the annexed drawings, 
making a part of this specification, and to 
the letters of reference marked thereon, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a view showing the different 
parts of the tire properly connected, also 
showing a transverse section of the tire. Fig. 
2 is a view showing the tire properly located 
upon the felly, also showing a transverse sec 
tion of the tire. Fig. 3 is a detached view 
of one of the disks to be attached to the outer 
end of the spring. Fig. 4 is a view showing 
a portion of the tire - retaining band, also 
showing two of the springs located thereon. 
Fig. 5 is a detached view of the retaining 
band. 
The present invention has relation to bicy 
cle-tires; and it consists in the different parts 
and combination of parts hereinafter de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lings. 
In the accompanying drawings, A repre 
sents the tire proper, and is preferably formed 
of rubber or like material and is provided 
with the outer solid portion a, from which 
outer solid portion extend the sides b, which 
sides are formed thin enough to be easily bent 
to partially close the inner portion of the tire, 
which side portions are stitched together, 
substantially as illustrated in Fig. 1. 
The tire-springs B are substantially of the 
form shown and are located at intervals 
around in the tire proper. 
It will be understood that a sufficient num 
ber of springs, such as B, should be employed 
to give to the tire proper the desired amount 
of rigidity, and at the same time provide a 
tire that will have the desired amount of 
elasticity. 
For the purpose of providing a means for 
protecting the tire A from injury by reason 
. 
. 
. 
of the springs B coming in contact with said 
tire, the outer ends of the springs are pro 
vided with the plates C, which plates are at 
tached to the outer ends of the springs in any 
convenient and well-known manner. 
The springs B are preferably formed of flat 
bars, said bars being bent to form the convo 
lutions of the springs, substantially as illus 
trated in the drawings, the number of convo 
lutions corresponding with the length of the 
springs designed to be constructed. The in 
ner ends of the springs B. are provided with 
the hooks c, which hooks are for the purpose 
hereinafter described. 
The retaining-band D is formed of such a 
diameter that it will correspond substantially 
with the diameter of the felly upon which it 
For the purpose of tighten 
is to be placed. 
ing the retaining-band after it has been placed 
upon the felly the right and left hand screw 
threaded bar d is provided, which screw 
threaded bar is passed through the angled 
portions d of the retaining-band D. For the 
purpose of providing means for rotating the 
screw-threaded bard the felly E is provided 
with the opening F, which opening may be 
properly covered with a plate after the retain 
ing-band D has been properly tightened. Be 
fore the retaining-band D is placed upon the 
felly the springs B are attached to said band, 
substantially as illustrated in Fig. 4, and, as 
illustrated in said figure, the band is placed 
over the lower convolution of the spring and 
the hooks c so adjusted that they will em 
brace the edges of the retaining-band. 
In use all of the springs are attached to the 
band D, after which the tire A is placed over 
the springs and the sides of the tire brought 
under the retaining-band and stitched to 
gether. It will be understood that the springs 
B can be slipped into position upon the re 
taining-band laterally, thereby bringing the 
hooks c into proper position to engage the 
band and hold the springs. 
It will be understood that the plates C are 
to be properly attached to the springs before 
the tire is placed in position with reference 
to the spring. After the tire Ahas been prop 
erly connected it is placed, together with its 
different parts, upon the felly of the wheel, 
and the screw-threaded bar d turned in the 
direction that it will tighten the retaining 
93 
OO 
5 
IO 
3O 
3 5 
45 
 
2 
569,172 
"... 
band upon the felly, thereby securely holding 
the tire in proper position. It will also be un 
derstood that the felly E should be provided 
with the flanges e, which flanges are for the 
5 purpose of preventing any lateral displace 
ment of the tire proper. 
For the purpose of preventing the tire from 
cracking when it is compressed the side mem 
bers b are each provided with the creases f, 
Io which creases are so arranged that the tire 
Will collapse at the creases without danger of 
breaking or cracking the material composing 
the tire A and its side members b. 
Having fully described our invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the tire A provided 
with the side members b, having the creases 
f, the springs B provided with the hooks c, 
2O the retaining-band D located above the lower 
5 
 
'... 
2. The combination of the tire A provided 25 
convolutions of the springs, and seated in 
hooks c, and means for clamping the band D 
upon the felly substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
with the side menbers b, stitched together. 
the springs B, provided upon their outer ends 
with the plates C, the retaining-band D loca 
ted over the lower convolutions of the springs, 
and the right and left screw-threaded bard, 30. 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that we claim the above we 
have hereunto set our hands in the presence 
of two witnesses. 
 
: 
JOHN W. CARNS. 
EDWARD FAILOR. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN F. MILLER, 
SIMON RICE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569272.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 569,272. 
S. M. BRIGGS, 
ORE CRUSHING MIL, 
Patented Oot, 13, 1896. 
 
EEE 
 
 
 
  
S 
  
  
 
 
  
5 LZ 
N 7 
s 
  
 
N 
N 
 
Witnesses. 'V' 
6 city& 
 
("Z 
7.6 
freedo: 
Sagell/Arts 
 
is PETERS CO, PHOT-TMC., WAS INgrom. ... c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL M. BRIGGS, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
ORE - C R U SHING M . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,272, dated October 13, 1896. 
Application filed July 3, 1895, Serial No, 554,904, (No model.) 
o 
To all livhon it may concer'72: 
Beit known that I, SAMUELMI.BRIGGS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
and county of San Francisco and State of Cali 
fornia, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Ore-Crushing Mills; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to manufacture and use 
the same. 
My present invention relates to stamp-mills 
for the crushing of ores preparatory to con 
centration, and more particularly to a novel 
construction of particular parts as well as 
their peculiar manner of assemblage, With the 
primary aim at general economy, portability, 
ready assemblage of parts, durability, and 
incidentally general efficiency. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will appear in the following specification, 
in which I have set forth clearly the manner 
of construction and operation of my inven 
tion, and in the appended claims have par 
ticularly specified the novel combinations of 
features thereof. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this specification, I have employed 
likeletters of reference to designate like parts 
in the several views. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of my complete 
mill. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the mill. 
Fig. 3 is a section through the line aca, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a section through the line if y, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the casting for 
holding the sieves. Fig. 6 is a perspective 
view of the plate for adjusting the elevation 
of the dies. 
I will now explain in detail the construc 
tion and operation of my invention, reference 
being had to the above views by letter. 
A represents the mortar-block, whose ver 
tical edges are cut away, as shown, to admit 
the vertical posts B C D E of the framework 
of the mill, and are bolted to the block Aby 
means of the bolts F, which run entirely 
through the block in both directions, making 
a very rigid structure. Near the upper ex 
tremities of the posts B C D E are the mor 
tised cross-braces G. H., through which and 
the posts extend the bolts IJ. 
Held longitudinally on bearings K is the 
shaft. L, to which are keyed the two single 
armed cams MN, which are adapted to oper 
ate the shoes O P through the intervention 
of the tappets Q Q' and stems R. R', the lat 
ter being guided in the bearings SS". 
Situated on the upper surface of the mor 
tar-block A and covering the entire space be 
tween the inner corners of the posts BCDE 
is the cast-iron mortar T, which is formed 
with the flange U, the corners being cut away 
to correspond with the cut-away corners of 
the mortar-block. The mortar is secured to 
the block. A by means of the bolts V. 
Extending around and bolted to the two in 
ner faces of each of the posts B C D E, at a 
point just above the mortar T, is a casting W, 
(shown in perspective in Fig. 5,) which is con 
structed with the slanting grooves W'W', 
the latter being to admit the four screens X. 
As a means for elevating the dies Z, as they 
become worn, I have provided a number of 
plates Y, (shown in perspective in Fig. 6,) 
which are adapted to be placed in the mortar 
under the dies. To facilitate their ready re 
moval, I have chamfered their corners Y to 
admit a bar for the purpose of prying them 
from the bottom of the mortar. 
The operation of the millis similar to others 
of its class and needs no explanation, my in 
Vention lying in the peculiar construction 
and combination of particular parts. 
It will be seen that by the employment of 
a mill such as shown the pulp is ground to a 
uniform fineness, the capacity is large, dis 
charging from all four sides, the screen-sur 
face has a maximum area, the mortar is low 
and so constructed as not to interfere with 
the discharge, the usual jar is greatly 
lessened by the frame being directly attached 
to the mortar-block, the parts are readily 
duplicated, capable of being easily taken 
apart for purposes of transportation and re 
pair, and the cost of manufacture is greatly 
Eter that of the ordinary stationary stamp 
I. 
It is also manifest that the cams, being 
relatively positioned as shown, cause the 
shoes to revolve in opposite directions, con 
sequently distributing the pulp evenly and 
causing the loading of one die from the other. 
I have constructed the guides S S of iron 
instead of Wood, as usually employed, and 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
go 
95 
Od 
2 
569,272 
- 
two inner faces of each post and having in 
clined grooves for the reception of sieves, 
said posts being flush with the vertical sur 
face of said block and arranged to not inter 
fere with the discharge from all four sides of 
said mortar, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. In an ore-crushing mill, the combination 
with a shaft, calms, dies, shoes and tappets, 
of a mortar-blockhaving its corners cut away 
to admit the Vertical posts of the framework, 
a mortar having Vertical Walls and a flange 
extending at right angles from the lower edge 
of said walls, the corners of said flange being 
cut away to admit the vertical posts of the 
framework of the mill, and one or more plates 
Y having their corners chamfered off and 
adapted to be placed between said shoes and 
the bottom of said mortar substantially as 
shown and for the purpose set forth. 
In Witness whereof I have hereto, set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
SAMUEL.M., BRIGGS. 
Witnesses: 
E. H. THARP, 
J. W. PAYNE. 
35 
45 
... and dies exactly meet. 
by so doing make it absolute that the shoes 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
What I claim, and desire to secure by TLetters 
Patent, is 
1. In an ore-crushing mill the combination 
With a shaft, cams, dies and shoes of the 
mortar-block cut away at the corners to ad 
mit the vertical posts of the framework, said 
posts being secured to said block by bolts 
passing entirely through said block, and a 
mortar secured to said block and having a 
flange with its corners cut away to correspond 
With the cut-away edges of said block, said 
posts being flush with the outer surface of 
said block, substantially as described and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In an ore-crushing mill, the combination 
With a shaft, cams, dies, shoes and tappets 
of a mortar-block having its vertical edges 
cut away to admit the vertical posts of the 
framework, bolts passing entirely through 
said block and said posts and adapted to bind 
them together, a mortar formed with an Outer 
flange having its corners cut away to admit 
said posts, and a casting extending about the 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569372.txt	(No Model.) 
E. CUNNINGHAM, 
WRENCH, 
No. 569,372. 
 
Patented Oct, l3, 1896, 
s 
7 y Es 
S2S a 
N.VENOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD CUNNINGHAM, OF HORTON, KANSAS. 
WREN CH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,372, dated October 13, 1896, 
Application filed March 23, 1896, Serial No. 584,470, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
To (t2(, it'? O7, it 7 victly conce77: 
Beit known that I, EDWARD CUNNINGHAM, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Hor 
ton, in the county of Brown and State of Kan 
sas, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Wrenches; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable other's skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same. 
Yly invention relates to an improvement in 
clamping-Wrenches; and it consists in the pe 
culiar construction, arrangement, and combi 
nation of parts hereinafter described, and 
more specifically pointed out in the claims. 
The object of my invention is the provision 
of a simple, inexpensive, and practical clamp 
ing - Wrench, more particularly adapted for 
tightening nuts on rail-joints or other struc 
tures where it is desired to overcome the 
tendency of the bolt to turn. 
Another object is the provision of a wrench 
Of the character described which shall be re 
versible in its action without the necessity of 
removing the same from the nut. 
By the construction hereinafter described 
it will be apparent that a wrench constructed 
according to the principles of my invention 
will effectually accomplish the objects sought 
without adding very materially to the cost of 
the same. These objects are attained by the 
mechanism shown in the accompanying draw 
ings, wherein like letters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in the several views, 
in which 
Figure 1 is an end view of my invention, 
partly in section. Fig. 2 is a front elevation, 
partly in Section. Figs. 3, 4, 5, and Gare detail 
views of the slide-bars and their several forms 
of head, and Fig. 7 is a horizontal Section of 
the stud-bolt U. 
In the drawings, A is the handle, bifurcated 
at its upper end to form a slot B. A ratchet 
C is held within the slot B of the handle Aby 
means of a hollow stud-bolt b, to which it 
is coupled, and which passes transversely 
through Said handle and through One arm of 
the frame E. The stud-bolt b is provided 
with a square chamber b', passing longitudi 
nally through the same. A slide-bar F, with 
a head F, which latter is formed with a re 
cessed inner face or pocket f to receive the 
nut, is inserted within the chamber b' and is 
secured therein by a cotter-pin f', passing 
through a suitable openingfin the end of the 
slide-bar F. Owing to the fact that the shape 
of nuts vary, some being square and others 
hexagon-shaped, it is difficult to provide a 
head which will meet the requirements of the 
different shapes without sacrificing its sim 
plicity. To meet this requirement, I provide 
several slide-bars which are identical in all 
respects save the formation of the head. The 
latter are made in different forms. For a 
Square nut the opening in the head is Square 
and for a hexagonal nut the opening or pocket 
is of a slightly different construction, so as 
to conform to the difference in the shape of 
the nult. 
To remove one form of bar and substitute 
the otherform, it is only necessary to withdraw 
the cotter-pin and slide the bar out of the 
chamber in the stud-bolt and replace it by 
the other form. 
A right-and-left pawl G, having inclined 
sides, is pivotally secured within the slot B 
and is controlled by a pivot-dogg, having a 
wedge-shaped head mounted within the slot 
B. A retracting-springg' is coiled about the 
shank of the dogg for the usual purpose. 
By this form of construction it will be appar 
ent that by pressing upon the pawl at One 
side the dog g is depressed sufficiently to al 
low the pawl to engage with the correspond 
ing side of the ratchet. The spring glimme 
diately forces the dog g into its normal posi 
tion against the inclined side of the pawl 
and holds the same in position against the 
ratchet, while the peculiar construction of 
the head of the dog permits the necessary 
movement of the pawl while the ratchet is 
being rotated. This insures a ready means 
for reversing the ratchet. 
The frame E is provided about midway of 
its outer arm e with a shoulder e', rigidly se 
cured to the frame, and to which is pivoted 
the lever II, the said shoulder e' acting as a 
fulcrum for the said lever, which is also piv 
oted at its lower end to the slide-bar I, which 
passes through the frame at and terminates 
in a head ', which is recessed to receive the 
head of the bolt J. The same reasons which 
necessitate a plurality of slide-bars F govern 
as to the slide-bars I, and they are likewise pro 
O 
25 
3 5 
45 
90 
OO 
 
2 
569,872 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
vided with heads to suit the formation of dif 
ferently-shaped bolts. To remove one form 
and substitute another, it is only necessary 
to remove the pivot-bolt at the lower end of 
the lever H and pull the slide-bar out of the 
frame E and replace it with the form de 
sired. 
A spiral spring is sleeved upon the slide 
bar I, one end of which abuts against the in 
ner face of the outer arm of the frame and 
the other end against the shoulder i on the 
head of the slide-bar I. 
K designates the rail, k is the fish-plates 
or angle-bars, and L the nut. 
In operation the lever H is pulled down 
until the slide-bar I is drawn backfar enough 
to permit the head F to receive the nut L. 
The head of the bolt J is then inserted in the 
cavity of the head it of the slide-bar I. The 
lever His then released and the spiral spring 
* forces the slide-bar against the bolt J, 
which is held in the cavity of the head in 
such manner as to prevent its turning. As 
the bolt J is drawn closer to the rail by the 
turning of the nut the slide-bar is forced by 
the relaxation of the spring in the same di 
rection at the same ratio of speed, thus re 
taining the head of the bolt within the cavity 
and thereby preventing any turning of the 
bolt by the rotation of the nut. 
The pocket f of the head F is deep enough 
to provide room for the threaded end of the 
bolt J, thereby permitting the nut I to be 
forced close home to the fish-plate and to 
bring the bolt J to its head on the other side 
of the rail. To release the clamping mech 
anism, the lever H is pulled down as before 
and the head of the bolt J released, and the 
head F is withdrawn from contact with the 
nut L, when the device may be readily lifted 
free of contact with the rail. 
It will be seen that a wrench constructed 
according to my invention will give greater 
power and purchase than those heretofore in 
use and will permit of increased strain upon 
the wrench proper without danger to the 
latter. 
I am aware that certain features of my in 
vention are not broadly new, and I do not 
claim the same broadly. 
I am also aware that many minor changes 
in the construction and arrangement of the 
several parts can be made without departing 
from the spirit and principle of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a wrench, the combination, with a 
ratchet, of a pivotally-secured right-and-left 
pawl having inclined sides, a pivot-dog hav 
ing a Wedge-shaped head, a retracting-spring 
65 
75 
85 
for said dog, a stud-bolt provided with an an 
gular chamber, a slide-bar with a recessed 
head inserted within said chamber, a frame 
mounted upon said stud-bolt, said frame hav 
ing arms to one of which is secured a shoul 
der, a lever pivoted to said shoulder and, at 
its lower end, to a slide-bar passing through 
said arm of said frame, a spring for said slide 
bar, and a recessed head upon the inner end 
of said slide-bar, substantially as described. 
2. In a wrench, the combination, with a 
handle having a bifurcated upper end, of a 
ratchet coupled to a hollow stud-bolt passing 
transversely through said handle, a slide-bar 
with a recessed head secured within the cham 
ber in said hollow stud-bolt, a right-and-left 
pawl having inclined sidespivoted within said 
handle, a dog having a Wedge-shaped head 
mounted within said handle, said dog having 
a retracting-spring coiled upon its shank, a 
frame carried by the stud-bolt and having 
arms, the outer arm provided with a shoul 
der to which is pivoted a lever, said shoulder 
acting as a fulcrum for said lever, a slide-bar 
passing through said arm and connected to 
the lower end of said lever at its outer end 
and its inner end terminating in a head hav 
ing a recessed outer face and provided with 
a shoulder against which one end of a spring 
upon said slide-bar abuts, the other end of 
said spring abutting against the inner face 
of said arm of the frame, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a Wrench, the combination, with the 
handle, of a ratchet and pawl, the hollow stud 
bolt b, the slide-bar F with recessed head F", 
the frame E, the lever II pivoted on the full 
crum e and to the slide-bar I passing through 
said frame E, said slide-bar provided with 
the recessed head adapted to receive the 
head of the boltJ and to retain the same inits 
normal position, Substantially as described. 
4. In a Wrench, the combination, with the 
handle, of a ratchet, pawl and pivot-dog, a 
stud-bolt supporting said ratchet and the 
frame E, a slide-bar F having a recessed head 
F' adapted to receive the nut L and the 
threaded end of the bolt J, a lever fulcrumed 
to said frame and pivoted to a slide-bar pass 
ing through one arm of said frame, said bar 
carrying a spring and terminating in a shoul 
dered head whose outerface is recessed to re 
ceive the head of the bolt J, substantially as 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
described. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
95 
O) 
IIO 
- 
II5 
EDWARD CUNNING-AM. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY W. CADOTT, 
P. E. MCCOIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569472.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 569,472. 
J. P. REILY. 
SLEEWE PROTECTOR, 
Patented Oct. 13, 1896, 
the Nor RIS PETERS cop-To-Si-O. washiston, t. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN P. REILY, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO 
WILLIAM B. ADDINGTON AND CHARLES W. BLOCK, OF SAME PLACE. 
SLEEVE-PROTECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,472, dated October 13, 1896. 
Application filed April 27, 1896, Serial No. 589,311. (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To ?till livhon, it inctly conce71. 
Be it known that I, JOHN P. REILY, of the 
city of St. Louis, State of Missouli, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Sleeve-Protectors, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part hereof. 
My invention relates to a sleeve-protector; 
and it consists in the novel construction, com 
bination, and arrangement of parts herein 
after shown, described, and claimed. 
My present invention is an improvement 
upon the invention shown in my former ap 
plication, filed March 10, 1896, Serial No. 
582,670, and pending concurrently here with. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a sheet of mate 
lial cut or stamped into a shape to form my 
improved sleeve-protector. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective of my completed sleeve-protector. 
Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 are transverse sectional 
views showing the details of the fastening de 
vices and the method of attaching the same 
to the sleeve-protector. 
The blank 1 is cut or stamped from card 
board, stiff paper, linen paper, or other suitable 
material, in approximately the form shown in 
Fig. 1. The end 2 of said blank above the 
line aca' is substantially semicircular in form, 
while the opposite end 3 below the line if y 
is substantially straight on itslower edge, and 
the side edges 4 and 5 of the portion 3 be 
tween the lines y if and 2 2 are irregular, be 
ing nearly parallel for a short distance above 
the line y J. Below said line y if the corners 
of the blankare rounded. The upper ends of 
the lines 4 and 5 below the dotted line 2, 2 are 
considerably flared outwardly and the border 
lines of the blank from the line 2, 2 to the line 
acac are much less flared or more nearly par 
allel than are the border lines immediately 
below said line 2, 2. 
The blank I is rolled into a tube, as shown 
in Fig. 2, and the end 3 of said blank below 
the dotted line y y is terned outwardly and 
backwardly and pasted to the portion 3 of the 
blank, thus forming the Wristband 3. 
An eyelet 6 is inserted near one end of the 
wristband 3 and a hook 7 is fixed to the op 
posite end. An ordinary elastic band 8 is 
tucked through the eyelet 6 and one end of 
the band is tucked through the loop formed 
by the other end of the band and is left free 
to be looped around the hook 7, thus forming 
an elastic connection between the meeting 
edges of the Wristband of the sleeve-protec 
tor. At approximately the longitudinal cen 
ter of the sleeve-protector, or about on the 
line ac ar, and a slight distance inside of the 
edge of the blank 1 an eyelet 9 is inserted, 
and a stud 10 is fixed in the opposite edge of 
the blank and in alinement with said eyelet 
and designed to be engaged by said eyelet. 
One end of an elastic band 11 (shown in dotted 
lines in Fig. 2) is tucked through the eyelet 
9 and then tucked through the loop formed 
at the other end of said band and is free to 
engage the hook 12, which is inserted in said 
blank some distance from the stud 10 and in 
transverse a linement there With. 
An eyelet or a rivet may be inserted in place 
of the glove-fasteners 9 and 10 through both 
edges of the sleeve-protector and left loose 
enough so that Said edges may Operate as On a 
pivot, as before described, and thereby the 
necessity for the eyelet 9, the stud 10, the band 
11, and the hook 12 is obviated. 
When it is desired to place the sleeve-pro 
tector in position upon the arm of the Wearer, 
the elastic band S may be unhooked and the 
hand inserted in the upper end of the device 
and down through the wristband without re 
moving the eyelet 9 from the stud 10, and 
during this operation the eyelet acts as a 
bearing upon said stud, forming a pivotal con 
nection between the two edges of the sleeve 
protector, thus allowing the wristband to open 
up as required to allow the hand to pass 
through and then to contract again around 
the wrist as required to allow the device to 
assume its natural position upon the arm. 
The pivotal connection formed by the eyelet 
and the stud 10 is of special convenience and 
importance in this connection, as it renders 
the unhooking or opening up of the device 
unnecessary when it is desired to place it in 
position upon the arm. Any device which 
forms a pivotal connection between the meet 
ing and overlapping edges of the blank 1, and 
thus allows of the expansion and contraction 
IO 
25 
30 
35 
45 
95 
Od 
2. 
- 
569,472 
paper and rolled into the form of a tube; said 
blank consisting of the end 2 which is sub 
stantially semicircular in form, the end 3 
which is substantially straight with rounded 
corners and turned outwardly and back 
wardly to form the Wristband 3, and the por 
tion 3 connecting the said end 2 and said end 
3 and having the irregular edges 4 and 5, in 
combination with the eyelet 6 inserted near 
one end of the wristband 3, the hook 7 in 
serted near the opposite end of said Wrist 
band and the elastic 8 inserted in said eye 
let 6 and connecting said eyelet with said 
hook, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN P. REILY. 
Witnesses: 
S. G. WELLs, 
MAUD GRIFFIN. 
25 
35 
of the Wristband, as heretofore suggested, 
maybe substituted for the connections herein 
shown and described. 
Should the device prove too small for the 
wearer, or too large, the stud 10 may be re 
moved from the eyelet 9 and the elastic band 
11 used in place thereof, as before described, 
and as shown in detail in Fig. 5. 
The glove-fastening may be entirely omit 
ted, and the elastic band 11 will fulfil all of 
the requirements in most instances. In some 
cases it may be found desirable to omit the 
stud 10 and to have the eyelet 9 engage the 
hook 12, as shown in Fig. 6. The only es: 
sential in this respect is that the connection 
upon the line acac between the two edges of 
the sleeve-protector shall be of the nature of 
a pivot, as hereinbefore described. 
I claim 
In a sleeve-protector, the blank 1 cut from 
23 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569572.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 569,572. 
W. A. BOURNE. 
WENTILATOR FOR LANTERNS, &c, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 13, 1896. 
(No Model.) 
No. 569,572, 
 
W. A. BOURNE. 
WENTILATOR FOR LANTERNS, &c. 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 13, 1896. 
the NORS PEERs co, Photo-ir-cy, Washimos, ), c 
 
W. A. BOURNE. 
VENTILATOR FOR LANTERNS, &c. 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented 00t. l 3, 1896, 
(No Model.) 
No. 569,572, 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILL ARD A. BOURNE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
VENTILATOR FOR LANTERNS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,572, dated October 13, 1896. 
Application filed June 20, 1898, Serial No. 596,231 (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 O 
So 
To ?till ution, it in-?ty concer'7. 
Be it known that I, WILLARD A. BOURNE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Ventilators for Lanterns, Lamps, 
&c., of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part hereof. 
My invention relates in the main to venti 
lators, which are intended to promote com 
bustion at a source of heat or heat and light 
below the ventilator and to assistin carrying 
off the products of combustion, and although 
my improvements have been designed and 
are illustrated herein with especial reference 
to their adaptation to lanterns it will be 
readily understood as the details of construc 
tion are explained that my improvements are 
no less applicable to other special purposes, 
such, for example, as the ventilation of a 
room or a car which is lighted artificially by 
a centrally-disposed chandelier. 
In part, also, my invention relates to de 
vices employed in connection with the ven 
tilating devices in lanterns and lamps to regul 
late the shape of the flame. One cause of 
the low efficiency of a lamp or gas flame as 
compared with the theoretical results which 
should be obtained from the use of a given 
quantity of an illuminant of standard quality 
is the failure to remove immediately and com 
pletely the products of combustion, which, 
espeeially in lanterns, are returned sometimes 
and to some extent to the point of combus 
tion, thereby interfering with the proper sup 
ply of oxygen and occasioning imperfect com 
bustion. Another cause not only of low effi 
ciency, but also of the frequent extinguish 
ment of the flame altogether in any structure, 
whether it be a lamp or a lantern or a room 
in which there is a ventilating-opening above 
the flame, is the back draft which is some 
times established, especially in the case of 
lanterns which are exposed to currents of 
air. It is the object of my invention, pri 
marily, to remove both of these causes of 
trouble by effecting the immediate removal 
of the products of combustion and by pre 
venting the possibility of back drafts. Inci 
dentally to the attainment of these main ob 
jects I promote the supply of oxygen to the 
flame, so that the combustion shall be of the 
proper character and a maximum of light ob 
tained, prevent the accumulation of the prod 
ucts of combustion in the globe of a lantern 
or lamp, and consequently the deposit of Wa 
tery and other vapors on the inside of the 
globe, which has hitherto been a serious dif 
ficulty, especially in the use of railroad, ma 
rine, and other signal lamps or lanterns in 
cold weather, prevent the flame from being 
drawn out of that shape which will give the 
best results and protect the oil-fount from con 
tact with cold air, thereby avoiding the chill 
ing of the oil. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which I 
have illustrated my improvement as adapted 
to an ordinary lantern, Figure 1 is a vertical 
central section of a lantern to which my im 
provement is applied, the direction of the 
currents within the globe being indicated by 
arrows and the fount and burner being shown 
in elevation. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
upper portion of the fount and burner with 
a portion of the globe shown in section to 
illustrate the deflector attached to the burner 
to protect the flame. Fig. 3 is a side eleva 
tion of the fount and burner with deflector 
at right angles to the elevation of the lamp 
in Fig. 2, the position of the deflector when 
turned back being indicated by dotted lines. 
Fig. 4 is a plan view of the fount and burner 
with deflector. Fig. 5 is a detail view of the 
deflector shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 4. Figs. G 
and 7 are vertical central sections of the up 
per part of the lantern, illustrating different 
forms of the back-draft deflector. 
The chamber to be ventilated is represented 
in the embodiment which I have chosen for 
illustration of my invention by an ordinary 
antern-globe A, which is shown as supported 
by a base B, preferably without openings for 
the admission of air, and protected by a wire 
framework B', the latter, as usual, supporting 
the hood B and the dome or cap, which is 
fully described hereinafter. As the source 
of light and heat I have represented an ordi 
nary lamp or oil-fount C. 
The ventilating dome or cap embodies in 
its construction the principal features of my 
invention. As shown in Fig. 1, it comprises 
an outer shell D, which is perforated, as at 
did and at d' d', an inner tube or cylinder E, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
OO 
2 
569,572 
O 
25 
45 
to which is secured an imperforate annular 
diaphragm e, which completely closes the 
space between the shell D and the cylinder, 
and is located between the upper perfora 
tions d d and the lower perforations d' d". 
The tube or cylinder E is also provided with 
a perforated diaphragm e', which may rest 
upon the globe A, but allows free passage of 
air from the perforations d' d' downward into 
the globe in proximity to the inner wall there 
of. The cylinder E rises within the shell D 
above the highest perforations did therein, 
while allowing free passage over its upper 
edge, but standing as a solid wall in the path. 
of any direct current inward through the per 
forations did. Centrally within the cylinder 
Eis Supported by any suitable means, as by 
arms ff, a deflector F, the same being sup 
ported at some distance below the upper edge 
of the cylinder E and being far enough there 
from to permit free passage of the heated air, 
gases, and vapor as they rise from the globe. 
A second deflector G is formed with or sup 
ported by the top of the cap or shell D, being 
disposed in a linement with the deflector F. 
The function of the two deflectors E and G 
is to direct any back draft or currents of air 
which may enter from the outside of the shell 
ID on one side outward over the edge of the 
cylinder E on the other side, preventing such 
back drafts from reaching the flame of the 
lamp. The deflector G is substantially con 
ical in shape with its apex downward, and 
the upper surface of the deflector F is adapted 
to receive the currents of air as they enter on 
one side and are deflected downward against 
it by the deflector G and direct them upward 
on the other side of the deflector G, so that 
they shall pass out on the other side over the 
edge of the cylinder E and through the per 
forations did in the shell D. As the deflector 
F is necessarily interposed in the path of the 
heated air, gases, or vapor as they rise from 
the globe, its under surface should be so 
shaped as to afford the least possible obstruc 
tion to the free upward movement of such 
heated air, gases, or vapor and be the least 
likely to create eddies in the rising currents. 
For this reason the most desirable and effect 
ive form of the deflector F is that of a hollow 
cone, supported with its apex downward and 
its open mouth upward, such a deflector di 
viding the rising currents most easily and 
offering the least obstruction to their passage; 
but it will be understood that the same func 
tions may be performed by deflectors of other 
shapes, such, for example, as those referred 
to hereinafter. The deflector G is also pref 
erably a cone with its apex downward, but 
not necessarily a true cone. It will be under 
stood, moreover, that the cone G operates as 
an additional Safeguard to insure the depres 
sion of Such currents as may enter against 
the deflector F in a proper manner to be de 
flected by it and turned upward on the other 
side, as otherwise some portions of such cur 
rents, as they pass across the top of the cylin 
der E, might strike the cylinder at the oppo 
site side from that at which they entered and 
so be turned down into the globe sufficiently 
to interfere with the normal currents therein. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 6 the 
shell D and cylinder Eare arranged substan 
tially as before. The deflector G' is repre 
sented as having the shape substantially of 
the frustum of a cone. With its base upWard, 
while the deflector F" is a hollow body with 
flaring sides, supported with its small end or 
apex downward and its open base upward, 
being represented as substantially a hemi 
sphere. It is represented as supported by arms 
f'f'. In the construction shown in Fig. 7 the 
deflector G' is substantially conical in shape, 
as before, while the deflector F is a hollow 
body with curved sides, somewhat as shown 
in Fig. 6, but shallower, and is supported by 
being secured directly to the apex of the de 
flector G', as by a rivetf'. 
If the fresh air to supply the oxygen neces 
sary to combustion is admitted over the top 
of the globe A, as I prefer, such air descends 
within the globe close to the inner Wall there 
of, and being cool and descending rapidly 
protects the globe from the condensation of 
such vapors as are not carried off completely 
through the ventilator. In this manner I 
have been able to bring about as a result that 
there is no appreciable condensation on the 
globe even when the lantern is exposed to 
very low temperatures. Moreover, the cold 
air in this manner is kept from coming in con 
tact with the oil-fount and therefore is pre 
vented from chilling the oil, which frequently 
happens in lanterns in which the air enters 
at the bottom and is continually absorbing 
heat from the oil-fount and oil. When the 
enveloping current of fresh air has descended 
nearly to the bottom of the globe, it turns in 
wardly toward the flame of the lamp to sup 
ply thereto the necessary. oxygen. As the 
heated air and products of combustion rise 
above the flame of the lamp they strike and are 
divided by the under side of the lower deflec 
tor and pass upward on all sides of the same 
between it and the imperforate cylinder E and 
then pass over the upper edge of said cylinder 
and downward and outward through the per 
forations in the shell. As the descending por 
tion of this current outside of the cylinder E is 
short as compared with the ascending portion 
thereof within the cylinder the outward flow 
of the products of combustion is very free, 
and consequently all gases and vapors are 
quickly and thoroughly removed from within 
the globe, there is practically no accumula 
tion of carbonic-acid gas to smother the flame 
When the lantern is shaken, and the supply 
of Oxygen to the flame is so well maintained 
that the usual incrusting of the wick, which 
reduces the light-giving power, proceeds very 
much more slowly than in ordinary lanterns, 
as has been demonstrated by repeated com 
parisons with lanterns of standard makes em 
ploying standard illuminants. 
75 
95 
IOO 
IC) 
II5 
I 25 
569,572 
3. 
supported above the first-named deflector in 
line there with and with its smaller end down 
ward, substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a ventilator, the combination of an 
outer perforated shell, an inner, imperforate 
tube or cylinder having its upper edge above 
the perforations in the outer shell, and a hol 
low deflector with flaring walls supported cen 
trally within said tube or cylinder and free 
therefrom, with its apex downward and its 
open base upward and below the upper edge 
of said cylinder. 
4. In a ventilator, the combination of an 
outer perforated shell, an inner, imperforate 
tube or cylinder having its upper edge above 
the perforations in the outer shell, a hollow 
deflector with flaring walls supported cen 
trally within said tube or cylinder and free 
therefrom, with its apex downward and its 
open base upward and below the upper edge 
of said tube or cylinder and a substantially. 
conical deflector supported by said shell above 
the first-named deflector and in line there with 
and with its smaller end downward, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
5. In a ventilator, the combination of an 
outer perforated shell, an inner, imperforate 
tube or cylinder having its edge above the 
perforations in the outer shell, and a hollow 
cone supported centrally within said tube or 
cylinder and free therefrom, with its apex 
downward and its open base upward and be 
low the upper edge of said tube or cylinder, 
substantially as shown and described. 
6. In a ventilator, the combination of an 
outer perforated shell, an inner, imperforate 
tube or cylinder having its edge above the 
perforations in the outer shell, a hollow cone 
supported centrally within said tube or cyl 
inder and free therefrom, with its apex down 
ward and its open base upward and below the 
upper edge of said tube or cylinder, and a 
second cone supported by said shell above 
the first-named cone and in line therewith 
and with its point downward, substantially 
as shown and described. 
7. In a lamp or lantern, the combination 
with the wick-tube of a plate hinged to one 
side of said wick-tube and cut out to fit around 
the edges of said wick-tube, the end portions 
of said plate being turned upwardly to pro 
tect the edges of the flame from air rising 
from below, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
19th day of June, A. D. 1896. 
WILLARD A. BOURNE. 
In presence of 
W. B. GREELEY, 
A. N. JESBERA. 
75 
95 
OC) 
IO 
II5 
The supply of fresh air to the flame of the 
lamp is so copious that the tendency of the 
flame is to become narrow and high, with the 
result that the combustion at the apex of the 
flame is not so complete as it should be and 
there is an increase in the amount of smoke 
and a reduction in the light-giving power of 
the flame. I have therefore provided a de 
flector or flame-guard, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
3, 4, and 5. This comprises, essentially, two 
wings h, h, which project upwardly and out 
wardly below the edges of the flame, as clearly 
represented in Fig. 1, and prevent the rising 
currents of fresh air from striking directly 
against the edges of the flame. The wings 
h h are preferably formed as parts of a plate 
H, which is hinged at one side of the wick 
tube c, as at h", and is cut out, as ath, to 
spring around the edges of the wick-tube 
when the deflector or guard is turned from 
the position shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3, 
in which position it offers no obstruction to 
the trimming of the wick, to the operative 
position shown in full lines in said figure. 
It will be understood that I do not intend 
to limit myself to the precise relations and 
proportions I have represented in the accom 
panying drawings, nor to the particular use 
I have referred to herein for the ventilator, 
as it is obvious that such relations and pro 
portions may be varied and that the ventila 
to is capable of use in other structures than 
that ShoWn. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a ventilator, the combination of an 
outer perforated shell, an inner, imperforate 
tube or cylindler, having its upper edge above 
the perforations in the outer shell, and a de 
flector supported centrally within said cylin 
der and free therefrom, said deflector having 
its upper surface formed to deflect upwardly 
on the opposite side such currents of air as 
may pass over the edge of said tube or cylin 
der on the one side and strike the deflector, 
and having its under surface formed to di 
vide the rising currents of heated air and 
gases, substantially as shown and described. 
2. In a ventilator, the combination of an 
outer perforated shell, an inner, imperforate 
tube or cylinder having its upper edge above 
the perforations in the outer shell, a deflector 
supported centrally within said tube or cyl 
inder and free therefrom, said deflector hav 
ing its upper surface formed to deflect up 
wardly on the opposite side such currents of 
air as may pass over the edge of the tube or 
cylinder on the one side and strike the de 
flector, and having its under surface formed 
to divide the rising currents of heated air and 
gases, and a substantially conical deflector 
O 
25 
35 
40 
5 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569672.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 569,672. 
T. WON QUERFURTH. 
OIL ENGINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented 00t, 20, 1896, 
(No Model.) 
T. WON QUERFURTH. 
OIL ENGINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Torris Peters co, PHoro-litto. AASH!Noron, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 569,672. 
T. WON QUERFURTH. 
OIL ENGINE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
Patented 0ct, 20 l896. 
7%. 
eva-E 4. 
Zam Z. 
SS 
SS S 
S 
St S 
 
 
 
 
 
68)itivvco-323 
7aa (27% 
--w 
** "44-ia, 
the Norris reteps co, PHoro-LTHO. wishington, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THURSO VON QUERFURTH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
OL- ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,672, dated October 20, 1896. 
Application filed January 10, 1895, Serial No, 534,477, (No model.) 
To cell avion, it inctly concei'i: 
Be it known that I, THURSO VON QUER 
FURTH, mechanical engineer, a subject of the 
Emperor of Germany, residing at New York, 
county and State of New York, have invented 
new and useful Improvements in Oil-Engines, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
power-motors, more particularly to oil-en 
gines, and comprises the construction of a 
combined oil and steam engine wherein new 
contrivances are combined with such parts as 
are used in steam and in oil engines, the ad 
vantages of both the steam and the oil en 
gines being secured and their disadvantages 
avoided. 
Petroleum - motors were heretofore con 
structed on the same principle as gas-engines, 
the driving power being produced by explod 
ing a charge of carbureted air or of a mixture 
of volatile oils and air in the working cylin 
der. These engines have also the same dis 
advantages as gas-engines, the most impor 
tant of which is that very high temperatures 
produced by combustion of the charge in the 
working cylinder cannot be avoided or util 
ized, and that consequently a constant circu 
lation of cold water around the working cyl 
inder must be provided to absorb this excess 
ive heat, in order to prevent its evil effects 
on the working parts of the engine. The 
heat so absorbed is absolutely lost and so is 
the greatest part of all heat produced. It is 
proven by practical measurements that of the 
heat developed by combustion of an explosive 
charge in the working cylinder of a gas or of 
an oil engine not over twenty-three per cent. 
is utilized in work, about thirty-three per 
cent, being absorbed by radiation and cool 
ing and over forty per cent. being carried off 
with the exhaust. 
Another disadvantage of burning an ex 
plosive charge in the working cylinder is the 
impossibility of completely utilizing all ex 
pansive energy of the gases produced, even 
in such engines where the charge is ignited 
at the moment when the piston reaches the 
dead-point. Neither does a practically com 
plete combustion take place when the charge 
is exploded in the working cylinder, and a 
considerable part of the constituents of the 
25 
35 
40 
The 7o 
charge is carried off, not evolved at all, this 
being also proven by the fact that the actual 
pressure obtained upon the piston of such an 55 
engine is seldom in excess of one-half of the 
pressure calculated. Led by these consider 
ations I constructed an engine having a sep 
arate chamber for combustion of the charge 
(evaporated oil mingled with air) and a com- 6o 
partment into which cooling-water is deliv 
ered. The expansive gases produced by the 
combustion, before being admitted into the 
working cylinder, pass through this cooling 
chamber, wherein their excessive heat is ab- 65 
sorbed and utilized in converting the cool 
ing-water into steam, which together with the 
expansive gases pass through a jacket and a 
valve-chest into the working cylinder, where 
they are used for driving the engine. 
great advantages of such an arrangement are 
apparent. All heat produced by the com 
bustion of the charge is converted into en 
ergy, and all expansive power of the gases and 
of the steam produced by the cooling process 75 
is utilized for driving the engine, the excess 
ive heat of gases which must be guarded 
against in such engines as heretofore con 
structed being converted into steam having 
even a higher expansive energy than the gases 8o 
themselves, thus increasing the volume and 
power of the expansive fluid admitted through 
a valve-chest into the working cylinder of the 
engine in proper proportion to its load. 
of the parts of my improved oil-engine are 
shown in the accompanying drawings, where 
1 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the engine; 
Fig. 2, a vertical longitudinal section; Fig. 3, 90 
a cross-section 22 of Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a hori 
zontal longitudinal section through the work 
ing cylinder, showing also the slide-valve and 
the valve-chest; Fig. 5, a vertical longitudinal 
section through the feed-pumps; Fig. 6, a top 95 
view of these pumps, showing also arrange 
ment for working them. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
The engine comprises a working cylinder Ioo 
A with piston P' and piston-rod Pr, valve 
chest C with slide - valve V, valve-rod V, 
cylinder-jacket B, inclosing also cooling 
chamber D, burner IX with oil- evaporating 
The construction and general arrangement 85 
- 
2 
569,672 
O 
25 
35 
45 
pan II and igniting-tube I, the combustion 
chamber E and flues F, f, and f', the oil 
pump O with delivery - pipe li, and Water 
pump W with circulating-pipes Z and Z' to 
and from the jacket L of the air-compress 
ing cylinder G, compressed-air receiver N, 
connecting-pipe M, and air-delivery pipe M 
with a puppet-valve MI, and the not espe 
cially described parts, bed, cross-head, con 
necting-rod, crank-shaft, bearings, fly-wheel, 
eccentric, &c., which are such as usually em 
ployed in engines. Belt-pulley) and the gov 
ernor attached to it, will be described here 
inafter. 
Working cylinder A is cast in one piece 
with jacket B and valve-chest C. Its head is 
extended into an intermediate piece Act, to 
which the air-compressing cylinder is bolted. 
Piston p' of the working cylinder is similar 
to those used in steam-engines. Piston-rod 
Pr' projects through the head of the working 
cylinder and carries also piston P'of the air 
compressing cylinder. 
Air-compressing cylinder G is equally as 
long as the Working cylinder, but propor 
tionally smaller in diameter. Air is admit 
ted and the compressed air expelled at each 
stroke. Valves i and i' open alternately by 
suction of the piston P', admitting air into 
the cylinder, and the compressed air is then 
On the end of each return stroke driven 
through valves l and linto the passage in and 
from there through pipe Minto the receiver N. 
The air-compressing cylinder is surrounded 
with water-jacket L, into which cooling-water 
is delivered by the pump W through pipe Z. 
The flow of the water is regulated by the 
length of the stroke of the water-pump W 
and circulates around the compressing-cyl 
inder, and passes then through pipe Z into 
the lower part of the jacket B of the working 
cylinder, designated as cooling - chamber 
D. This jacket B incloses also the apparatus 
for developing the power for driving the en 
gine. Burner K, comprising the air-passage 
k, oil-evaporating pan H, and igniting-tube 
I, is bolted to the bottom of the jacket B. 
Pipe M conveys air under pressure into the 
passage k from receiver N, valve Mu being 
provided to prevent combustive fluids from 
entering pipe M when the pressure of the air 
should not be sufficient to carry them into 
the combustion-chamber E, as the case might 
be, when the engine is started. Pipe R de 
livers the oil from pump O into the evaporat 
ing-pan H. Igniting-tube Iis screwed in the 
burner, so that it may be heated from below 
when the engine is started. 
Combustion-chamber E, an iron tube lined 
With clay, is screwed to the burner K and 
connected by a curved joint Ei with the main 
flue F, branching by a tripartite jointfi into 
sections.ff and f'f'', laterally ascending to 
Ward the hull of the working cylinder A, as 
shown in Fig. 3. 
Upper sections f' of the flues are closed on 
end and perforated by a row of small holes 
d. The combustion-chamber E, the main 
flue F, and partly, also, the lower sections 
fare submerged in the cooling-water flowing 
into the cooling-chamber D from the jacket 
of the air-compressing cylinder. Flues F, f, 
and f have no pressure to withstand. The 
expansive gases produced by the combustion 
of oil-vapors mingled with air escape through 
the holes d into the cooling-chamber D, where 
they pass over the surface of the cooling 
Water, evaporating it and converting the va 
pors into steam, and uningled with this steam 
pass through jacket B around the Working 
cylinder into the valve-chest. 
Valve-chest C is cylindrical in shape. The 
sliding valve V, operated by an eccentric, 
opens and closes ports po and po', one on 
each end of the working cylinder, both for 
inlet and exhaust, the latter escaping through 
channels and pipe U. 
Below valve-chest C, on plate p, screwed 
to the jacket B, are set the oil-feedpump O and 
the water-pump W. (Shown in Figs. 5 and 
6.) The areas of the plungers p0 and put are 
calculated in proportion to the area of the 
piston P of the working cylinder and in pro 
portion to the supply of oil and water re 
quired for driving the engine. The plungers 
of both pumps are connected and operated 
by rode, attached to the valve-rocking arm. 
g, and thus their stroke corresponds con 
stantly with the stroke of the sliding valve 
V, and the delivery of oil and water to the 
engine is regulated according to its load. 
To avoid a possible disturbance in govern 
ing of large engines, Consequent to the Work 
ing of the pumps O and W from the valve 
rocking arm. I devised the governing ar 
rangement shown in Fig. 1. The construc 
tion of this governing arrangement I have 
made the Subject of a separate application 
for a United States Letters Patent, filed March 
7, 1896, Serial No. 582,227, and shall there 
fore not describe it here more in detail only 
as is necessary for the understanding of the 
engine described in this specification. On 
crank-shafts, closely adjoining fly-wheel 
Fly, belt-pulley y is set, having a limited 
swing on the shaft. Spring SS connects col 
lar n, rigidly keyed to the shafts by the ad 
justable eye-rod er, with belt-pulley /, and 
transmits to it the power developed by the 
engine, yielding and bending under the strain 
exerted by the load on belt-pulley?. When 
this load increases or the power of the engine 
decreases, belt-pulley i? will be accordingly 
retarded and its position on the shafts, in 
relation to the fly-wheel Fly, changed. The 
movable arm of an eccentric, set on the shaft 
adjoining the fly-wheel, is connected through 
a stud to a spoke of belt-pulley ) and its 
other arm to a spoke of fly-wheel Fy. Thus 
when the belt-pulley y deviates from its nor 
mal position in relation to the fly-wheel Fy 
the eccentric will be swung across the shaft 
and its lift increased. 
To compensate for differences in the pres 
So 
95 
IOC 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
55 
 
569,672 
3 
O 
2C) 
sure of the expansive fluids and for the fic 
tional resistance in the moving parts of the 
engine, the movable arm of the eccentric may 
be, as shown in Fig. 1, connected to crank 
set on a spindle passing through the Stud and 
cranklg' to a centrifugal shaft-governor of 
the type used on high-speed engines. In the 
construction shown in the drawings the gov 
ernor, attached to the belt-pulley ty, consists 
of a weighted lever lu, oscillating on bolt by 
and carrying on its longer arm the ball buy. 
This weighted lever is suspended on spring 
sp, and its shorter arm is linked by the ad 
justable rod et to the crank lig'. The cen 
trifugal power developed by revolving of the 
belt-pulley will drive the weighted-lever arm 
outward, according to the speed, and when 
ever the pressure of the expansive fluids will 
decrease in the working cylinder, or the fric 
tion in the moving parts of the engine in 
crease, the speed of the engine will be re 
duced, the weighted-lever arm liv will recede 
outward on the shaft, and thereby the lift of 
the eccentric will be increased. 
In this specification only the principles of 
my invention are described as applied to a 
certain type of the motor and the arrange 
ment of parts selected for the purpose of 
showing their practical use. It is apparent 
that the several parts may be differently ar 
ranged and also combined in other construc 
tions than the one described. Instead of the 
single working cylinder compound systems 
of low or high pressure may be employed with 
any of the known systems of valve - gear. 
Other devices for driving the feed-pumps 
may be used. The engine may be arranged 
in upright position. The power-generating 
apparatus-viz., burner, combustion - cham 
ber, flues, and cooling-chamber-may be ar 
ranged within the bed or within the founda 
tion of the engine and connected with the 
jacket of the working cylinder. The arrange 
ment of the flue-tubes and of the cooling 
chamber may be changed to suit different 
types of construction involving the funda 
mental parts and combinations described in 
this specification and for the purpose sought 
to be attained in my invention. 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent-- 
1. The combination, with an engine, adapted 
to be driven by expansive fluids, and having 
a working cylinder with a piston and a pis 
ton-rod, with ports for inlet and exhaust of 
the expansive fluids at each stroke, a valve 
chest with a sliding valve and a valve-gear 
driven from an eccentric, set on the crank 
shaft, of apparatus for developing the expan 
sive fluids comprising a burner with an oil 
evaporating pan, an oil and an air delivery 
pipe and an igniting -tube, a combustion 
chamber attached to the burner and connect 
40 
45 
5o 
 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
ing with flues, arranged in the jacket, Sur 
rounding the working cylinder, in sections 
laterally ascending, the uppermost section of 
these flues being closed on end and perforated 
on sides by a row of small holes, admitting 
the hot combustion-gases into direct contact 
with cooling-water, pumps attached to the 
engine and operated by a connecting-rod from 
the valve-gear and delivering continuously 
the supply of oil and water; an air-compress 
ing cylinder, joined to the working cylinder 
and worked with the same piston-rod; a com 
pressed-air receiver connected with the dis 
charge-valve of the air-compressing cylinder, 
and with the air-delivery pipe attached to 
the burner. 
2. In an engine, adapted to be driven by 
expansive fluids, the combination with a 
burner with an air and a fuel delivery pipe, 
an oil-evaporating pan and an igniting-tube, 
of a combustion - chamber attached to the 
burner and connecting with flues, for the pur 
pose of producing expansive fluids by con 
tinuous combustion of evaporated oilmingled 
With air. 
3. In an engine, adapted to be driven by 
expansive fluids and provided with an appa 
atus for producing such expansive fluids by 
continuous combustion of evaporated oil min 
gled with air, the combination with a com 
bustion-chamber, offlues, connected with the 
combustion-chamber and arranged within a 
cooling-chamber, in sections laterally ascend 
ing, the upper section being closed on end 
and perforated on sides by a row of small 
holes, for the purpose of conducting the hot 
gases through cooling-water, and utilizing 
their excessive heat for developing of stealm 
to be used together with the gases for driving 
the engine. 
4. In an engine, adapted to be driven by 
expansive fluids, produced by continuous 
combustion of evaporated oil, and by steam 
produced from the cooling-water, used in the 
process of reducing the excessive heat of the 
combustion-gases, the combination with an 
oil and a water supply pump, secured to the 
engine in suitable position, and having plun 
gers of proportionate areas, with rods coupled 
together in a block, of a gear, comprising a 
rocking rod, pivoted on one end, and having 
its other end adjustably secured to the valve 
gear, and a connecting-rod, adjustably at 
tached to the rocking rod, and secured to the 
coupling-block of the plunger-rods of the 
pumps, for the purpose of working the sup 
ply-pumps and regulating the supply of oil 
and water to the engine, according to its load. 
THURSO VON QUERFURTH. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER F. WoLF, 
WILLIAM MUESER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569773.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 569,773, 
J. W. SIMONS. 
SEWING MACHINE ATTACHMENT, 
Patented Oct. 20, 1896. 
Wit 72 esses 
(u/(2%azz- 
THE NORRS PETERS co, Photo-IT-to, was HINGTON, D.c. : 
 
77zzie 27 (or 
oves.g 2/22zors 
A52 
J12 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES WALKER SIMIONS, OF PORT CHESTER, NEW YORK. 
SEWNG MACH NE ATTACHMENT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,773, dated October 20, 1896. 
Application filed February 26, 1896, Serial No. 580,808, (No model.) 
O 
To cult, tv hon, it n(ty concert: 
Be it known that I, JAMES WALKER SI 
AIONS, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Port Chester, in the county of Westchester 
and State of New York, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Sewing 
Machine Attachments, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
This invention relates to attachments for 
sewing-machines, and particularly to what 
are known as foid-gages. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
the defects inherent in constructions now 
known to me and to provide a fold-gage hav 
ing a vertical adjustment preferably on the 
face-plate or head of the sewing-machine 
frame, although it may be located on any 
other convenient part of the frame, and com 
prising a long stem or body to be adjustably 
fitted in a clamp of suitable construction on 
said head and two right-angular bent por 
tions at its operative end, one of said bent 
portions serving to smooth out Wrinkles, &c., 
from the material and the other operating as 
the fold-gage proper. 
In the drawings accompanying and form 
ing part of this specification, Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of part of a sewing-ma 
chine frame, showing the fold-gage in posi 
tion thereon. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
clamp by which the fold-gage is adjustably 
supported. Fig. 3 is a detail view of the 
guide for the stem of the fold-gage, a portion 
of the frame being shown in section. Fig. 4 
is a perspective view of one of the inter 
changeable fold-gages; and Fig. 5 is a sec 
tional view showing how the gage operates 
with the usual hemmer, which may be sub 
stituted for the presser-foot shown in Fig. 1. 
Similar characters designate like parts in 
all the figures of the drawings. 
The numeral 1 represents the usual head 
part of the frame of a sewing-machine, 2 the 
needle-bar, and 3 the presser-bar of such ma 
The numeral 4 represents the improved 
fold-gage, comprising a long stem or exten 
sion 4', a right-angular bent portion 4', and 
another portion 4, bent at right angles to the 
art 4, 
The numeral 5 represents a clamp having 
a stem 5' secured by a screw or other fasten 
chine. 
ing device G to the head of the machine and 
also having a thickened split portion 5*, per 
forated at 5' to receive the stem of the fold 
gage, Said perforation being large enough to 
accommodate different sizes of gages having 
stems of varying diameters. A screw 7 is 
provided which bears against the gage, and 
another screw 8 is employed for adjusting the 
jaws of the clamp, and by means of these 
screws the fold-gage is fixedly secured in po 
sition. An additional clamping and guiding 
means for the stem of the fold-gage is shown, 
consisting of a bracket 9, secured to the ma 
chine-head or face-plate by a screw 10, said 
bracket being provided with two perforated 
ears or lips 9', through which the stem passes. 
The perforations in said ears are shown as 
somewhat larger than necessary to fit the 
stem of the fold-gage in position for the pur 
pose of guiding and holding fold-gages hav 
ing stems of different diameters. The screw 
10 engages with a thread or mult in bracket 
9 and passes loosely through the head or 
front plate of the machine, thereby serving 
two purposes-one of clamping the bracket 
to said head or front plate and the other of 
securing the fold-gage above the lower clamp 
5, so that said gage will be fixedly held in the 
desired adjusted position to suit the thick 
ness of the material being sewed. The point 
of screw 10 bears on that portion of stem 4 
located between the arms of the bracket, and 
hence tends to slightly deflect or bend the 
same between said arms, thereby holding said 
stem fixedly in position above the lower 
clamp and rendering the fold-gage secure 
against displacement. 
While the guiding and holding bracket is 
shown as located about midway the face 
plate, yet, as is obvious, it may be placed 
near the top of Said plate or at any other con 
venient point thereon either above or below 
the clamp 5. 
It is also obvious that other 
forms of clamps and guides may be employed 
for guiding and holding the fold-gage in po 
sition at two different points on the machine 
head without departing from my invention. 
At Fig. 4 is shown a fold-gage of greater 
dimensions than that represented in Fig. 1, 
and it is to be understood that a series of in 
terchangeable fold-gages are to be provided 
to suit any width of fold desired. 
- 
- 
3O 
3. 5 
95 
CO 
569,778 
In Fig. 5 is represented a common form of 
hemmii gpresser-foot11, which may be placed 
on the presser-ball as a substitute for the 
presser-foot shown in Fig. 1, if deemed nec 
essary or advisable. The hemming presser 
foot is provided with the usual needle-hole, 
curling-finger 12, passage-way 13, and solid 
Separator 15, and other common features un 
necessary to mention, and with a shank 16, 
corresponding with that of the other presser 
feet of the machine on which the attachment 
is to be used, and this may be any type of 
sewing-machine. 
At 17 is represented the cloth or other ma 
terial being sewed, 17 representing the fold 
thereof. 
A fold-gage to suit the fold or hem desired 
having been placed in position, the cloth or 
other material is placed under the presser 
foot and a fold of the desired width is turned 
over the effective portions 48 and 4 of said 
gage. The presser-foot is then lowered and 
the material is passed beneath the needle 
and is stitched in the usual manner, the part 
4 of the gage serving to guide the fold and 
the part 4 to level and smooth the material 
On the plate of the machine as it passes be 
neath the needle. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
d 
25 
1. The combination with a sewing-machine, 
of two guiding devices detachably connected 
to said machine at points one above the other; 
and a fold-gage vertically adjustable in said 3 
guiding devices. 
2. The combination with a sewing-machine 
head, of a fold-gage having a relatively long 
stem; and clamping means for said stem, lo 
cated at different points on the head, whereby 
the device is maintained in vertical aline 
ment. 
3. A fold-gage comprising an elongated ver 
tical bar bent at its lower end to form two 
right-angular portions, one extending trans 
versely to the elongated bar and the other ex 
tending transversely to said elongated bar 
and to its other angular portion. 
4. The combination with a sewing-machine 
head, of a perforated split clamp attached to 
said head; a pair of clamping devices car 
ried by said clamp; a fold-gage having a per 
pendicular stem extending through said per 
foration and secured therein by said clamp 
ing devices; and a second clamp also secured 
to the head and engaging the stem at another 
point in the length thereof. 
JAMES WALKER, SIMONS. 
Witnesses : 
LEONARD GAMONG, 
FRANZ P. SANDERSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569873.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 569,873. 
W. B. HOWE. 
MACHINE FOR, CUTTING AND SCORING PAPER, 
Patented 00t, 20, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
SS 2 e 
2S2x32 
/ H / 
 
C 
Z e  e Z 
. 
HA-1 
Azzizz, 
% 7 2SSSSSSSSS22 
2ZZZ 2Z2 zz. ZZ 2. 
 
72zzeyyes 
(N& A 5&u. 
27, 
Zzzazz7. 
71%rvez-Z/2Ze: 
the NaARS PETERS co, ProToto. washingto.o. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WARREN B. HOWE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MACH NE FOR CUTTNG AND SCORNG PAPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,873, dated October 20, 1896. 
Application filed June 17, 1895, Serial No. 553,038, (No model.) 
5 5 
To call tufhof) it incy conce77. 
Be it known that I, WARREN B. How E, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Apparatus for Cutting 
and Scoring Paper; and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description thereof, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
apparatus employed in cutting and scoring 
strawboard or paper for making paper boxes 
and the like. 
The invention consists in the matters here 
inafter described, and pointed out in the ap 
pended claim. 
In the cutting or scoring of paper or straw 
board for making folding paper boxes and 
shells or bodies for strawboard boxes a print 
ing-press is commonly used of that kind em 
bracing a revolving impression-cylinder and 
a reciprocating horizontal bed, which passes 
beneath the cylinder and in which is placed 
a form containing cutting and scoring knives, 
against which form the paper or strawboard 
is pressed by the action of the impression 
cylinder as the reciprocating bed passes be 
neath the same, the impression-cylinder be 
ing lifted free from the form at each back 
stroke of the latter in a familiar manner. 
The cutting or scoring has commonly been 
accomplished heretofore by the use of metal 
strips or rules, preferably of soft steel, which 
are arranged within a chase similar to those 
used by printers for holding a form of type, 
and held in place therein by blocks or strips 
of wood, the rules used for scoring being like 
those used for cutting, but somewhat lower 
or narrower, so that they will indent or crease 
the paper without cutting it, at the same time 
that the cutting-rules are operating to sever 
the same. 
The impression-cylinders and bed of the 
machines employed are commonly provided 
with bearing-surfaces to maintain the surface 
of the cylinder at a proper distance from the 
top surface of the bed in printing, the cylin 
der usually being provided at its ends with 
marginal flanges and the bed with raised ribs 
or flanges at its side edges adapted for contact 
with the end flanges on the cylinder. In this 
construction the raised ribs or thanges on the 
bed afford the required ledges or shoulders 
between which the form is clamped in secur 
ing it to the bed. 
In carrying out my invention I employ in 
addition to the apparatus above described de 
vices constructed as follows: I cover the en 
tire working part of the impression-cylinder 
with a layer or covering of sheet-steel of uni 
form thickness and of soft quality. I also 
attach to the top surface of the bed adjacent 
to the form and at opposite sides thereof sup 
plemental bearing-bars made of approxi 
mately the same height as the cutting-knives, 
and therefore very slightly higher than the 
scoring-knives. Said bearing-bars are made 
of metal and are adapted to act on the sheet 
metal covering of the impression-cylinder ad 
jacent to the form with a pressure greater 
than is required to do the cutting at any part 
of the form, so as to take all spring or lost 
motion from the parts, it being of course un 
derstood that the impression-cylinder is held 
down to its work with such pressure that it 
cannot rise or yield when the heaviest cut 
ting is being done. 
The advantages of the construction de 
scribed may be understood from the follow 
ing: The employment of a sheet-metal cov 
ering for the impression-cylinder is highly 
desirable, for the reason that the same af 
fords a surface against which the cutters may 
act without injury to the latter, while at the 
same time it preserves the surface of the cyl 
inder from injury by the action of the cut 
ters, and may be easily renewed when it is 
itself cut or scored by the action of the cut 
ters to such extent as to make it too rough 
for further use. The bearers arranged at op 
posite sides of the form act to press or hold 
the sheet-metal covering of the impression 
cylinder closely and firmly against the sur 
face of said cylinder at the part of said cov 
ering between the bars and at the place where 
the cutting and scoring is being done. This 
function of the bars is highly important, be 
cause it is found in practice to be practically 
impossible to draw or hold the covering so 
tightly around the cylinder as to entirely 
avoid springing or yielding of the covering 
under the pressure of the form thereon. Ob 
o 
So 
3o 
40 
9 O 
CO 
5 
 
569,873 
7 5 
95 
OC 
I IO 
O 
viously the bearers arranged as described 
press the said covering against the cylinder 
and thereby take up all spring or lost motion 
therein which in the absence of said bearers 
Would give inequality or unevenness of action. 
It will be readily seen that the covering will 
be held tightly against the cylinder and pre 
vented from springing between the bearing 
bars by reason of the fact that the covering 
is bent into cylindric form, which gives it 
Such rigidity or capacity of resisting flexure 
between the bearing-bars as to prevent any 
appreciable springing or yielding thereof 
along the line of contact with the form. 
Aside from their function of holding the 
sheet-metal covering tightly against the cyl 
inder said bearing-bars also act to take up all 
lost motion due to the springing or yielding 
of the bed and other parts of the press during 
the cutting and scoring operation. By the 
employment of said bearing-bars therefor the 
action of the cutting and scoring knives is 
made absolutely uniform and equal through 
Out. 
The advantages gained by the employment 
of said bearing-bars in connection with the 
sheet-metal covering described will be better 
understood from consideration of the fact, 
that any unevenness of action or pressure 
upon the cutters will result in the parts of 
the cutters subjected to the greatest pres 
sure being forced to a considerable distance 
into the sheet-metal covering, while the parts 
subjected to a less pressure may fail to make 
contact with the cylinder or will act so lightly 
thereon as to cut or score insufficiently. 
The best results will obviously be obtained 
when the edges of the cutters are brought in 
contact with the sheet-metal covering, so as 
to properly accomplish the cutting, without 
any possibility of any yielding or springing 
of the parts, and at the same time without 
any excess of pressure on the cutters which 
Would tend to force the same into the sheet 
metal covering and thus dull or destroy the 
knives and injure the covering. This desir 
able result is secured by employment of the 
bearing-bars arranged as described, for the 
reason that such bearing-bars in themselves 
take the pressure of the impression-cylinder, 
instead of the same being allowed to come 
upon the cutting edges of the knives which, 
as will be readily seen, are not adapted to 
sustain such pressure. In other words, the 
pressure conning on the said bearing-bars is 
greater than that required to do the cutting 
and scoring at any part of the form, so that 
the cutting and scoring knives at no time act 
upon the impression-roller in a manner to 
raise or lift the same away from the bearing 
bars, While at the same time said bars pre 
vent any outward springing or advance of 
the covering of the impression-cylinder when 
the latter is acting on the parts of the form 
where the cutting or scoring may be accom 
plished with slight pressure. 
It follows from the above that the bearing 
bars are necessarily made of such height or 
thickness as to take all spring or lost motion 
from the parts, and at the same time relieve 
the cutting and scoring knives from pressure 
in excess of that required for their work. 
The invention may be more readily under 
stood by reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view in central section of the 
impression-cylinder and reciprocatif.g. bed of 
a machine embodying my invention. Fig. 2 
is a cross-section of the bed, showing the cyl 
inder in side elevation. Fig. 3 is a plan of 
the bed, showing a cutting and scoring form 
thereon. 
As shown in said drawings, A indicates the 
impression-cylinder, and B the reciprocating 
bed, of an ordinary printing-press. The cyl 
inder Ainstead of being provided with an or 
dinary blanket has a sheet-metal layer or cov 
ering C, which is attached to the working sur 
face of the cylinder in any suitable manner. 
In the particular construction illustrated the 
sheet-metal covering C is turned inwardly at 
one end through a lateral slot of the cylinder, 
and secured to the cylinder by tap-bolts c, 
while at its opposite end its free edge is ex 
tended past the edge of the bearing-surface of 
the cylinder into the said slot, and is engaged 
by a series of hooked bars c', the inner ends 
of which engage a suitable supporting-bar 
within the cylinder, and which are provided 
with turnbuckles c, by which the sheet or 
metal layer may be drawn tightly over the 
surface of the cylinder. 
The bed B is provided with the usual raised 
ribs or flanges Baltits side edges, which flanges 
are adapted for contact with the flanges A on 
the ends of the cylinder A. D indicates a 
chase resting on the bed B and containing a 
form E, such, for instance, as that used for 
making a strawboard box-body, the same hav 
ing cutting strips, rules, or knives e e and 
scoring rules or knives e' e'e'. The cutting 
rules are arranged in a familiar manner to 
sever the blank from the surrounding sheet, 
while the scoring-rules are arranged to make 
creases or scores along which the projecting 
parts or flaps of the blanks are folded in set 
ting up the boxes. Secured upon the table 
outside of and adjacent to the chase D are 
two bearing - bar's F F, which are made of 
about the same height as the cutting-knives, 
but of greater length than the form, so that the 
impression-cylinder will rest or bear against 
said bearing-bars before the form reaches or 
leaves the cylinder as the said form passes 
beneath the same. Said bars Fact in a man 
ner herein before described to hold the surface 
of the bed accurately parallel with the sur 
face of the impression-cylinder notwithstand 
ing the springing or yielding of the parts 
which, in the absence of the bars, would oc 
cur in the passage of the form beneath the 
cylinder, but which, when said bars are pres 
ent, takes place as soon as the bars engage 
the cylinder, the said bars maintaining all 
35 
45 
55 
6 o 
 
5 
O 
the parts under such tension or pressure that 
practically no further yielding can take place 
when the form itself reaches and is acted upon 
by the cylinder. 
While I have shown in the accompanying 
drawings a device for straining or drawing 
the sheet-metal covering tightly around the 
cylinder, yet it is to be understood that such 
devices are not themselves sufficient to hold 
the said covering in such close or intimate 
contact with the cylinder as to prevent some 
springing or yielding under the pressure re 
quired for the operation of the cutting and 
scoring knives, it being found in practice that 
unless the bearing-bars be so arranged as to 
act on said sheet-metal covering the same will 
spring or yield to an extent sufficient to greatly 
affect the accuracy of the action of said cut 
ting and scoring knives, and that very minute 
differences in the position of the edges of the 
cutting or scoring knives with respect to the 
opposing surface against which they act will 
produce a great difference in the action of 
the knives, especially in acting on relatively 
thin paper, such as the partially-flexible pulp 
board or thick paper used for making the finer 
qualities of folding boxes or cartons. 
As hereinbefore set forth, the construction 
described has advantages over devices previ 
ously used in two important respects, namely: 
The bearing-bars act on the metal covering to 
hold the same against the cylinder in a man 
ner to prevent any springing or yielding of 
said covering in its part between said bear 
ing-bars, while at the same time said bear 
ing-bars take or receive the pressure of the 
impression-cylinder, so as to relieve the cut 
ting and scoring knives of any pressure 
greatly in excess of that required for doing 
the cutting and scoring, and to thereby avoid 
injury to the knives which would result from 
excess of pressure thereon. In other words, 
the pressure of the impression-cylinder upon 
the bearing-bars is so much in excess of the 
resistance offered by the cutting and scoring 
knives that such resistance will be relatively 
45 
569,878 
3 
so slight as to be practically of no impor 
tance, the greater part of the pressure com 
ing upon or being carried by said bearing 
bars, as above described. As a result of this 
construction there will be no yielding what 
ever of the sheet-metal covering away from 
the bed during the heaviest cutting, and no 
approach of said covering toward the bed 
when no cutting is being done at all. 
It is an important feature that the bearing 
bars afford the sole support for the cylinder 
during its operation, and the cutting and 
scoring form is not relied upon to sustain the 
cylinder at all, the result being that the work 
is at all times accurate and uniform, while the 
durability of the cutting and scoring knives 
is greatly increased. 
I claim as my invention 
A machine for cutting and scoring paper 
blanks comprising an impression-cylinder, a 
separate sheet-metal layer or covering of uni 
form thickness applied to cover the entire 
working surface of the cylinder, a recipro 
rocating bed provided with bearing-fanges 
at its side margins which engage the ends of 
the cylinder, a cutting or scoring form rest 
ing on the bed and acting against said sheet 
metal covering, and bearing-bars also resting 
on the bed at opposite sides of the form, said 
bars being adapted to act upon the sheet 
metal covering of the impression - cylinder. 
and operating to hold or press the same against 
the cylinder at the time the form is acting on 
said sheet-metal covering, said bars being 
constructed to take the pressure of the im 
pression-cylinder in excess of that required 
E. the operation of the cutting or scoring 
Ol. In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I affix my signature, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 14th day of June, 
A. D. 1895. 
WARREN. B. HOWE. 
Witnesses: 
C. CLARENCE POOLE, 
ALBERT H. GRAVES. 
55 
65 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US569973.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 569,973, 
N 
J. M. LANSDOWNE. 
BLANK CHECK, DRAFT, &c., 
Patented Oct. 20, 1896. 
Swooshiyoosas, rssssssswar---V--Sv. 
R 
VS 
(S t 
N 
A. 
R 
A. S. 
3v-ue-vitov 
J.76. Zarzsaozze. 
7%.4%a. 
6.3. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. LANSDOWNE, OF GREEN VILLE, OHIO. 
BLANK CHECK, DRAFT, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 569,973, dated October 20, 1896. 
Application filed July 25, 1896, Serial No. 600,518, (No specimens.) 
55 
To all, whom, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES M. LANSDOWNE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Greenville, in the county of Darke and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Blank Checks, Drafts, or 
other LikeMonetary Instruments, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had therein to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to an improved blank 
check, draft, or other similar monetary in 
strument; and it has for its object the pro 
vision of means whereby fraudulent raising 
of the amount inserted in the check or other 
instrument...is rendered impossible. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings, and 
then pointed out in the claims. 
Figure 1 of the drawings illustrates a blank 
draft constructed in accordance with my in 
vention. Fig. 2 shows the draft filled out 
and cut to prevent raising. 
In the drawings, A represents the draft 
blank proper-that is to say, that portion of 
an ordinary draft bearing the required word 
ing. On the left-hand end of the blank there 
are several series of spaces formed by verti 
cally and horizontally ruled lines, in the first 
series of which (reading from right to left) 
are printed in a vertical column figures B, 
ranging from 1 to 9, both included, these 
being what I term initial-figure indicators. 
Next after the initial-figure indicators follow 
several series of spaces for amounts, begin 
ning with cents a, the spaces for units, tens, 
hundreds, thousands, and tens of thousands 
of dollars being indicated by the letters b, c, 
d, e, and f, respectively. On the right-hand 
end of the draft-blank is a vertical row of 
spaces, in which are printed numbers C from 
1 to 9, both included, and preferably 
spelled out, these being termed the initial 
figure duplicates. On the draft-blank, pref 
erably along the upper right-hand edge, is a 
series of horizontal spaces, in which are 
printed figures D, ranging from 0 to 9, 
both included, these being what I term the 
second-figure indicators. 
In filling out the check or draft the amount 
is written on the line for that purpose in the 
usual manner, and in addition it is inserted 
in figures horizontally in the spaces to the left 
of and opposite to the initial-figure indicator 
corresponding with the first figure of the 
amount, as seen in Fig. 2, when the columns 
of blank spaces to the left of the figures thus 
inserted are cut off, thus preventing the 
amount from being raised by the insertion 
Then all the initial 
of an additional figure. 
figure duplicates higher than the initial fig 
tire of the amount of the check or draft are 
detached, thereby preventing shifting of the 
a mount in figures to a position opposite a 
higher initial-figure indicator and raising the 
first figure of the amount. Finally all of the 
second-figure indicators after the one corre 
sponding to the second figure in the amount 
are cut off, which prevents raising of that 
figure. 
A check or draft thus guarded as to the 
first and second figures fully answers in ordi 
nary business transactions, as there would be 
but little inducement for fraudulently chang 
ing any figure after the second. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
Iclaim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A blank check, draft, or other like mone 
tary instrument having the usual blank por 
tion A, several series of spaces formed by ver 
tically and horizontally ruled lines adjoining 
said blank portion at one end, and a vertical 
row of initial-figure indicators ranging from 
l to 9 in the series of spaces next to said 
blank portion, the remaining ruled spaces be 
ing adapted to receive in horizontal a linement 
with either of said indicators the respective 
figures representing the amount for which the 
check or draft is drawn. 
2. A blank check, draft, or other like mone 
tary instrument having the usual blank por 
tion A, several series of spaces formed by ver 
tically and horizontally ruled lines adjoining 
said blank portion at one end, a vertical row 
of initial-figure indicators ranging from 1 
to '9'in the series of spaces next to said blank 
portion, the remaining ruled spaces being 
adapted to receive in horizontal alinement 
9o 
95 
IO 
23 
35 
45 
3 
569,973 
with either of said indicators the respective 
figures representing the amount for which the 
check or draft is drawn, a vertical row of 
initial-figure-indicator duplicates at the other 
5 end of the blank portion, and a horizontal 
row of numerals ranging from 0 to '9' on 
one of the side edges of the instrument. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES MI. LANSDOWNE. 
Witnesses: 
L. E. CHENOWETH, 
J. C. ELLIOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570073.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 570,073, 
W. B. WAN SICKLE. 
AIR VALVE FOR HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS. 
Patented Oct. 27, 1896. 
 
 
  
S. | 2 
7, 2 
-A2 % 
% % % 2 
a Z& 
7faz. Goa ea. 
teles?- 
A-cup-s- sers 
... --4-7 CzzCo M 
6tee (3/2. Sce/(62. 
(2.4% ar 
The citris Peters co. Photo-Lithe... washristic, c. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM B. VANSICKLE, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
AR-VAVE FOR HOT - WATER HEAT N G SYSTEMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,073, dated October 27, 1896. 
Application filed October 26, 1895, Serial No. 566,950, (No model.) 
55 
To ?till, whom, it mat? concern: 
tremity of annular shoulder B' and being in 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM B. WANSICKLE, 
open relation with chamber Ct. The surround 
of Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and 
ing conical Wall b' of chamber b, at its apex, 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
is provided with an orifice b, located cen 
useful Improvements in Air-Valves for Hot 
trally of the top of the cap. The surround 
Water Heating Systems; and I do hereby de 
ing wall b' of conical chamber b is polygonal 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
externally, as shown in Fig. 3, to accommo 
act description of the invention, such as will 
date the application of a wrench for screw 
enable others skilled in the art to Which it 
ing the cap onto or removing it from case A. 
pertains to make and use the same. 
P 
A combined pneumatic float and valve D. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
is provided within case A. 
air escapes and vents for hot-water heating 
Member D comprises, preferably, a closed 
systems; and it consists in certain features 
rubber bag inflated with air or other suitable 
of construction and combinations of parts 
aeriform fluid, so that said member will be 
hereinafter described, and pointed out in the 
as light as possible. The central portion of 
claims. 
member D is cylindrical in cross-section and 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1 
a trifle smaller in external diameter than the 
and 2 are side elevations, mostly in vertical 
internal diameter of case A to form a narrow 
section, of an air escape and vent embodying 
annular passage-way between member D and 
my invention. The combined float and valve 
the surrounding Wall of the chamber of case 
is shown in its upper extreme position in Fig. 
A. The lower end of the inflated member D 
1 and in its lower extreme position in Fig. 2. 
has, preferably, the shape of a segment of the 
Fig. 3 is a top plan. Fig. 4 is a top plan, in 
globe or sphere, and the upper end of mem 
horizontal section, on line 4 4, Fig. 1. 
ber D is preferably conical. The conical por 
I would here remark that the drawings 
tion of memberD constitutes the valve proper. 
show a full-sized device. 
The operation of the combined float and 
My improved air-escape and air-vent for 
valve is as follows: As the hot Water (marked 
hot-Water heating systems comprises an up 
W in Fig. 1) rises within the pipe system of 
right chambered cylindrical metallic case A, 
the hot-water heating system and enters case 
and a designates the chamber of said case. 
A and rises within said case, float D will be 
The surrounding Wall of chamber Cat itslower 
elevated, and the valve formed upon the up 
end is provided with a lateral hole or open 
per end of said float will, upon its elevation 
ing Ci', that communicates with a laterally-ex 
into its extreme upper position, engage the 
tending tube A', that is preferably integral 
lower edge of the surrounding wall of dis 
With case A and is screw-threaded externally 
charge and vent orifice b, as shown in Fig. 1, 
at its Outer end for engaging a correspond 
and thereby close said orifice. The conical 
ingly-threaded hole (not shown) in the radi 
shape of the valve and the conical Wall b' of 
ator or hot-water pipe to which the device is 
the chamber in cap B are instrumental in 
to be attached. Case A at its upper end is 
centering the Valve during the movement of 
screw-threaded externally and is engaged by 
the latter to close the aforesaid orifice. As 
a correspondingly internally threaded and 
the water recedes within case A member D 
removable cap or head B. IIead or cap B a 
of course descends and air enters at the dis 
suitable distance from its lower extremity is 
charge and vent orifice. To prevent the cy 
provided with an internal annular shoulder 
lindrical portion of member ID from expand 
B', that presses an elastic washer C, composed, 
ing diametrically and obstructing the up-and 
preferably, of rubber and confined within said 
down movement of the same, I provide a re 
cap, against the upper end of case A, and 
taining-ring E, that embraces said cylin 
thereby renders the joint between the cap and 
drical portion and is arranged between two 
case positively Water-tight. Cap B is pro 
annular shoulders D', formed upon and exter 
vided centrally thereof with a conical cham 
nally of opposite ends, respectively, of the 
ber b, extending upwardly from the inner ex- cylindrical portion of member D. The re 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
370,078 
taining-ring is composed of any light mate 
lial, such, for instance, as vulcanized rubber, 
that Will not be affected by the heat or water. 
It is obvious that any expansion of mem 
5 ber D or the retaining-ring by the construc 
tion hereinbefore described will be in the di 
rection of the length of said members and 
that the retaining-ring will effectually pre 
vent diametrical expansion of the inflated 
Io lmember. I Would also remark that the re 
taining-ring is provided with a smooth exter 
nal Surface, so that there are no fins or rough 
ness upon said surface that might interfere 
With the free movement of the combined float 
I5 and valve in the operation of the device, and 
I Would also remark that the retaining-ring 
is preferably somewhat larger in external di 
ameter than the adjacent portions of the men 
ber D that extend beyond the ends of the re 
2O tailling-ling. 
What I claim is 
1. A device of the character indicated, com 
prising an upright cylindrical chamber or 
case A provided, at its lower end, with an 
2S opening Ct', a cap or head Bengaging the up 
per end of said case and provided with an 
orifice b, an inflated float located within and 
somewhat smaller diametrically than the 
aforesaid case, a valve formed upon the up 
3o per end of said float and arranged in line with 
the aforesaid orifice, and the retaining-ring 
embracing the float, substantially as shown, 
for the purpose specified. 
2. A device of the character indicated com 
35 prising an upright cylindrical chambered case 
A provided, at its lower end, will an opening 
C': a cap or head engaging the upper end of 
said case and provided centrally with all air 
discharge and air-vent orifice; a combined in 
flated float and valve located within and some- 4o 
what smaller diametrically than the aforesaid 
case, said combined float and valve compris 
ing a cylindrical portion and a conical valve 
forming member projecting above the cylin 
drical portion, and a retaining-ring embracing 45 
the cylindrical portion of the combined float 
and valve, substantially as shown, for the 
purpose specified. 
3. A device of the character indicated com 
prising an upright cylindrical chambered case 5o 
A provided, at its lower end, with an opening 
a? a cap or head Bengaging the upper end of 
said case and provided centrally with the ori 
fice l; the inflated float D having a valve 
formed upon its upper end, said float having 55 
a cylindrical portion that is diametrically 
smaller than the chamber of the aforesaid 
case and is provided with the two external 
annular shoulders D', and the retaining. ring 
E embracing the float between said shoul- 6o 
ders, and having a smooth external surface, 
all arranged and operating substantially as 
shown, for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 3d 65 
day of October, 1895. 
WILLIAM 13. WAN SCIN.I.E. 
Witnesses: 
C. II. DORER, 
ELLA. E. TILDEN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570173.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
No. 570,173. 
L. J. HIRT, 
CABLE RAILWAY GRIP, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1, . 
. 
N 
Patented Oct. 27, 1896. 
N 
&Z % 
SC% 
II. 
-st 
AN's Sei's SN 
N 
- - - - 
(S 
N 
Q - 
Azzesses 
2* 
 
es s 
SC 
s 
& 
at 
(No Model.) 
No. 570,173, 
L. J. HIRT, 
CABLE RAILWAY GRIP, 
5 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct. 27, 1896. 
l 
g 
(S) N 
N 
O 
s 
Ef as 
S. O 
- 
N 
R 
s 
Azesses. 
-6.6%-726 
 
Zzzeezezz 
7.2.12s. 
w 
9. 
L. J. HIRT, 
CABLE RAILWAY GRIP. 
w 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented 00t, 27, 1896, 
(No Model.) 
No. 570,173. 
 
 
(No Model.) 
L. J. HIRT, 
CABLE RAI, WAY GRIP. 
No. 570,173. 
 
Patented 00t 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
27, 1896. 
2 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
||||||||||| | 
as | 
Aa 
| 
Z267/6 
72 
HE NORRIs ETers co, Photo-it-c., washingtoN. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 570,173. 
L. J. HIRT, 
CABLE RAILWAY GRIP, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Oct. 27, 1896. 
/2M/zesses:- 
64/6% //226. 
 
726, 23. 
- 
 
2 
 
the Norris PETERs co. PHOTo-LTHo, washingtoN. D. c. 
/zz 27, (or: 
. . 2/ 1 - 
44-0. 
2-4 
ce-2-3 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS J. HIRT, OF BROOKLINE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
CABLE, RALWAY GRP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,173, dated October 27, 1896. 
Application filed November 12, 1894, Serial No. 528,462, (No model.) 
95 
OO 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it may conce/7 
Be it known that I, LOUIS J. HIRT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brookline, in the county of Norfolk and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Cable-Railway 
Grips, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
mechanism for operating and controlling grips 
for cable-railways, whereby I am enabled to 
readily grip and ungrip the cable, and also 
throw out the cable from the grip from either 
end of the car, and also to cause the cable to 
be automatically released and thrown out 
from the grip at any point of the road desired 
without reference to the gripman; and my 
improvements consistin certain combinations 
of levers and mechanism connected with the 
grip by which the grip may be opened and 
closed While the cable-ejector is held locked 
in a fixed position; and also consists in cer 
tain combinations of mechanism for operat 
ing the cable-ejector whereby as the ejector 
is moved to throw out the cable, either from 
the car or automatically, it operates the grip 
mechanism and opens the grip; and it further 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion of the several parts as hereinafter de 
Scribed and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation of the grip and mechanism operat 
ing the same in the position occupied when 
the cable is gripped. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
cross-section through the line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a side elevation of the grip and mechan 
ism with the grip open to free the cable. 
Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the same with the 
grip open and the ejector raised to throw out 
the cable. Fig. 5 is an end elevation of Fig. 
4. Fig. 6 is a plan view of the grip mechan 
ism. Fig. 7 is a sectional plan at the line 7 
7, Fig. 4. 
Fig. 8 is a bottom view of the grip. 
Fig. 9 is a vertical cross-section through the 
line 99, Fig. 7. Fig. 10 is a vertical cross 
section through the line 1010 of Fig. 7. Figs. 
11 and 12 are a side and end elevation, re 
spectively, of the ejector-plate; and Fig. 13 
is a vertical cross-section of the bottom grip. 
Fig. 14 is a side elevation of the upper jaw 
of the grip with the cheek-piece removed. 
Fig. 15 is a detached view of the cheek-piece. 
Fig. 16 is a plan of the under side of the up 
per jaw of the grip in Fig. 14. Fig. 17 is a 
cross-section of Fig. 14 through the line 17 
l7. Fig. 18 is a cross-section of the same 
through the line 1818. Fig. 19 is a cross 
section of the cheek-piece through the line 19 
19. Fig. 20 is a side elevation of the lower 
jaw of the grip with the cheek-piece removed. 
Fig. 21 is a plan view of the upper side of 
the lower jaw. Fig. 22 is a detached view of 
the cheek-piece; and Fig. 23 is a cross-sec 
tion of the lower jaw through the line 23 23, 
showing the jaw without the cheek-piece d. 
A is the frame, supported from the car 
truck, carrying the grip and its operating 
mechanism. 
B B are the slot-rails on the road between 
Which the grip is suspended. 
C and D are the upper and lower jaws, re 
spectively, of the grip. 
E is the ejector, and F the ejector-bar by 
which the latter is operated. 
On the frame A are hangers A' A', from 
which are suspended the vertical plates G. G., 
to the bottom of which is bolted or otherwise 
fastened the fixed lower jaw D of the grip. 
Between these stationary plates G. G. are mov 
able plates or shanks H H, to the lower ends 
of which is secured the upper and movable 
jaw C of the grip, and in the center, between 
the plates H. H., is the movable plate I, to 
which is fastened the ejector-bar F. The 
plates H. Hand consequently the movable jaw 
of the grip are suspended from the horizontal 
cross-plates K, reaching between the station 
ary plates G. G. The outer ends of these 
cross-plates extend over the edges of the plates 
G: G and serve to guide and steady the cross 
plates as they move up and down in gripping 
and ungripping the cable, and the plates 
bulge outward at the center in order to clear 
the central plate I. 
The cross-plates K and consequently the 
plates H H and the movable jaw of the grip 
suspended by them are raised and lowered by 
the following mechanism: Within the open 
frame A is the rock-shaft L, and to the center 
of this rock-shaft is connected the leverl, the 
upper end of which is forked and which is 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
570,178 
O 
connected by any suitable means with the 
operating mechanism at the end of the car. 
On the rock-shaft are locker-arms 777, placed 
in such a position that when the lever l is 
drawn back the arms 17, are raised. The 
rocker-arms in are joined by the pin n' to the 
link n, and the link is connected to the link 
O by the joint 
in such a manner that the 
joint between the links 1 and O forms a tog 
gle-joint. The lower end of this link O lies 
between the cross-plates IK and is attached to 
the latter by the pin . The rocker-arms in 
are thus connected with the cross-plates IX, 
Supporting the movable jaw of the grip, and, 
as Will be understood from Fig. 3, when the 
lever l is drawn back and thus the rocker 
arms raised the cross-plates, and with them 
the vertical plates II II and jaw C, are slid 
upward and the grip opened. 
To close the 
grip, the lever l is thrown in the position 
shown in Fig. 1, when the arms in are turned 
down Ward and the jaw C of the grip pushed 
down on the cable. 
I Will now describe the mechanism which 
Operates the ejectors and throws out the ca 
ble. These ejectors EE (shown more particu 
larly in Figs. 5 and 9) are suspended at each 
end of the grip from the ejector-bar F, bolted 
or otherwise connected to the movable plate 
I. On standards A' A', at one end of the 
frame A, is mounted the rock-shaft P, to 
which is connected the armp, extending down 
Ward within the frame. The lower end of 
this arm p is pivoted to the link p', the other 
end of which is pivoted by the pin p, Fig. 2, 
to the toggle-joint', between the links in and 
O. Any movement of the arm p therefore op 
erates this toggle-joint and moves the links . 
and O. Within the frame A and between the 
arill 1) and the rock-shaft L is the rock-shaft 
R, to which is connected the lever , by which 
the rock-shaft is operated through any suit 
able mechanism from the car. On this rock 
shaft R are arms a' and ', extending in op 
posite directions. The end of the arm q' is 
pivoted to the links, the other end of which 
link is pivoted to the arm p. The arm p on 
the rock-shaft R is pivoted to the linki, which 
extends downward and is pivoted by the pin 
t" to the prolongation i of the plate I. The 
shape of this plate is shown in Fig. 11, and 
as there seen the prolongation is at one side 
of the plate and in such position as to clear 
the link O and its connecting-pivots and thus 
permit the plate to slide freely up and down. 
The edges 
of the plate I project over the 
adjacent sides of the plates IIII and serve to 
guide and steady the plate I in its movement 
up and down. 
As Will be understood from Fig. 4, when the 
lever r is thrown back in the position shown 
in that figure the arm is raised, and the lat 
ter, by means of the link t, slides the plate I 
up and raises the ejector-bar F and the ejec 
tors E. At the same time the arm r" on the 
rock-shaft is turned down and by means of 
the link S Swings the arm p in Wald. As the 
latter arm moves it pushes the link to", to 
which it is pivoted, in the same direction, and 
this link being attached to the toggle-joint be 
tween the links 7, and Othese links are turned 
at an angle with each other, and thus their 
outer joints an and an are brought closer to 
gether, as shown in Fig. 4, and hence, as Will 
be understood from that figure, the cross 
plates IX, to which the link O is connected, 
are drawn up, and with them the plates IIII 
and the movable jaw C of the grip, and this 
without disconnecting any part of the grip 
operating mechanism which opens and closes 
the grip at other times, and at the same time 
permits the leverage afforded by the link O to 
be utilized the same as when the same is op 
erated from the lever l. The grip is thus 
opened by the direct action of the ejector 
mechanism, and the arrangement of the arms 
7' and p and the links S and p' is such that the 
links 1 and O are acted upon and the grip-jaw 
raised just immediately before the plate I and 
ejector-bar F and ejectors E are moved up, 
and hence it follows that the cable is always 
ungripped and released when the ejector 
moves to throw it out of the grip. 
With the mechanism above described it is 
not necessary for the operator to first release 
the cable by the lever land the regular grip 
mechanism; but by merely operating the ejec 
tor mechanism through the lever ?" the cable 
is both directly released and ejected; and, 
moreover, when the jaw C of the grip is oper 
ated by the regular grip mechanism, as the 
toggle-joint is not acted upon, the end of the 
link p' is merely raised and lowered and the 
link is not pushed in either direction so as to 
operate the ejector mechanism, but the lattel' 
mechanism remains in a fixed and locked po 
sition, as will be understood from Figs. 1 and 
3. When, however, the cable has been re 
leased and ejected by the ejector mechanism, 
and the parts are in the position shown in 
Fig. 4, the ejector may be moved back into 
the recesses in the grip and the grip thus put 
into position to grip the cable directly through 
the action of the lever land the grip mechan 
ism without first reversing the ejector mech 
anism by means of the lever ?'. To accom 
plish this, the lever l is thrown back in the 
position occupied in Fig. 3. This action of 
the lever straightens the toggle-joint and 
brings the links 7 and O in line with each 
other, as shown in the figure, and thus pushes 
the link p' outward. This link swings the 
arm p, and the latter, by means of the links, 
raises the arm ' and turns down the arm ', 
pushing the plate I down, and with it the 
ejector-bar F and ejectors E, and bringing all 
the ejector mechanism in the position shown 
in Figs. 1 and 3. The grip is thus closed by 
the lever land by the grip mechanism, asbe 
fore described. 
To cause the grip to open with greater fa 
cility and quickness, I mount a spring U in 
45 
55 
 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
OC 
I IO 
I25 
570,173 
3 
O 
25 
the grip-frame so that it bears against the 
cross-plates K K and forces them upward. 
The ends of this spring pass through the ribs 
C. on the hangers A of the frame and the cen 
ter of the spring passes through the swinging 
bearings V, pivoted to the plate K by the 
pin v. As will be understood from Figs. 1 
and 3, when the grip is closed the center of 
this spring is pressed down and when the 
grip is released the force of the spring assists 
it, raising the cross-head K. K. 
. The ejector mechanism is operated auto 
matically by the ejector-bar F. As shown in 
the drawings, the bottom of this bar is formed 
with the inclined surfaces ff, and within the 
trench at the point where it is desired to eject 
the cable is placed an inclined surface up, cor 
responding with the incline f and of such a 
height that its highest part is above the bot 
tom of the bar F when the ejectors are down 
in their recesses below the cable. 
As the grip, and of course with it the bar 
F, moves along in the trench the incline fon 
the bar strikes the inclined surface at and 
slides along on the latter, and as it does so 
the bar F is raised and raises the ejectors E, 
suspended from it. At the same time the bar 
F lifts the plate I, to which it is bolted or oth 
erwise attached, and the latter sliding up, by 
means or the prolongation and link t, oper 
ates the arms and r" and the ejector mech 
anism and, through the toggle-joint in', raises 
the plates H H and opens the grip, as before 
described, and hence whenever the operator 
or gripman neglects to open the grip and 
throw out the cable at the points along the 
road where it is required the compact of the 
bar F with the incline U, situated at such 
points, opens the grip and ejects the cable 
Without regard to the gripman. 
The sides and inner cable-engaging sur 
faces of the grip-jaws are formed by detach 
able cheek-pieces c and d, which are bolted 
onto the sides of the jaws. The cheek-pieces 
On each side of the jaws are separate and 
distinct from each other, and are separately 
connected to the jaws, so that the piece on 
one side of the grip may be removed without 
disturbing that on the other side. To en 
able the cheek-pieces c and dto be bolted sep 
arately to the jaws, they are formed as shown 
in Fig. 19, which is a view of the piece c for 
the upper jaw, and the jaws are constructed 
with recesses c' and d. By reason of these 
recesses, as will be understood from Figs. 17 
and 19, it is possible to bolt each cheek-piece 
on separately, the bolt passing through one 
side of the jaw only and terminating in the 
recess, as shown in Fig. 13 in the case of the 
lower jaw. By reason of this construction, 
if through any accident the jaw of the cable 
is caught. Only one side is torn off and not 
the whole shoe. Furthermore, it is possible 
to repair the grip more readily. In construct 
ing these cheek-pieces it is intended to form 
the sides of very hard metal or composition 
to stand the wear and form the inner cable 
surface of a softer metal. 
The ejectors E are provided with retaining 
forks e e, intended to lock the cable in the 
grip as the ejector is lowered down in its re 
CeSS. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a grip for cable-railways, in-combina 
tion, a stationary grip-jaw, a movable grip 
jaw, a cable-ejector, grip-jaw-actuating mech 
anism, cable-ejector-actuating mechanism, 
and means permanently connecting the tWO 
actuating mechanisms so as to render the jaw 
actuating mechanism positively actuated 
from the ejector-actuating mechanism for the 
purpose of releasing the cable, the ejector 
actuating mechanism operating the ejector to 
throw out the cable after it has set into oper 
ation the jaw-actuating mechanism, the con 
nection between the two actuating mechan 
isms permitting the jaw-actuating mechanism 
to operate the grip and release the cable With 
out operating the ejector-actuating mechan 
ism when the latter is in its normal position, 
substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
2. In a grip for cable-railways, in combina 
tion, a stationary grip-jaw, a movable grip 
jaw, a cable-ejector, grip-jaw-actuating mech 
anism, cable-ejector-actuating mechanism, a 
lever for operating the same, and means per 
manently connecting the two actuating mech 
anisms so as to render the jaw-actuating 
mechanism positively actuated from the 
ejector-actuating mechanism for the purpose 
of releasing the cable, the ejector-actuating 
mechanism operating the ejector to throw out 
the cable after it has set into operation the 
jaw-actuating mechanism, and the connec 
tion between the two actuating mechanisms 
permitting the jaw-actuating mechanism to 
throw the ejector into its normal position 
without first restoring the ejector-actuating 
mechanism to its normal position through the 
instrumentality of its operating-lever, Sub 
stantially as and for the purposes described. 
3. In a cable-grip mechanism, in combina 
tion, a movable grip-jaw, mechanism for op 
erating the same, a toggle-joint interposed 
between the grip-jaw and its operating mech 
anism, an ejector for throwing out the cable, 
mechanism for raising and lowering the 
ejector connected with the toggle-joint where 
by the ejector mechanism operates the toggle 
joint and opens the grip, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. In a cable-grip mechanism, the combi 
nation with the movable jaw C, plates H, H, 
cross-plate K and toggle-joint in, n., O, of the 
ejector E, the bar F, plate I, rock-shaft R, 
rocker-arms rand * and link it for operating 
the ejectors, and the rock-shaft P, rocker-arm 
p and link p' connected with the toggle-joint, 
whereby the toggle-joint is operated and the 
grip opened as the ejector is raised, substan 
tially as described. 
45 
55 
 
75 
OO 
IO 
II5 
125 
4. 
570,173 
5. In a cable-grip for railways, the grip 
jaws provided with the recesses c', d', and the 
cheeks c, d, on each side of such recesses, 
substantially as described. 
6. In a cable-grip mechanism, the ejector's 
E provided with the retaining - forks e, e, 
whereby the cable is guided into the grip by 
the descent of the ejector, substantially as 
described. 
Signed at New York city, in the county of To 
New York and State of New York, this 2d 
day of November, A. D. 1894. 
LOUIS J. HIRT. 
Witnesses: 
AMBROSE F. MCCABE, 
FRED S. KEMPER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570273.txt	(No Model.) 
J. S. WOOD, Sr. 
NON-REFILLABLE BOTTLE. 
No. 570,273, 
Patented Oct. 27, 1896. 
 
 
 
z I 
WFTNESSES 
%-224. 
373 
 
 
s 
 
naz 
/.../ 9%a 
6%6- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH S. WOOD, SR, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
NON-REFiLLABLE BOTTLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,273, dated October 27, 1896. 
Application filed February 11, 1896, Serial No. 578,960, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOSEPH. S. WooD, Sr., a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Non-Filling Bottle Devices; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
This invention relates to a non-filling de 
vice for bottles for preventing the fraudulent 
refilling of the same with a factitious liquid. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and effective valved device which may 
be readily inserted into the neck of a bottle 
after it has been filled with liquid and will 
permit the ready outflow of the liquid, but 
will prevent the bottle from being refilled with 
liquid. 
The details of construction of my improved 
device are illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a vertical section of a 
portion of the bottle and the cup-valve, show 
ing myimprovements. Fig. 2represents aver 
tical section of the neck of a bottle with the 
cup-valve removed. Fig. 3 represents a ver 
tical section of the cup-valve detached. Fig. 
4 represents an elevation of a short open 
ended tube which may be used in the cup 
valve. 
The bottle A is constructed with the usual 
neck Cl, and at the base of said neck with 
an in Wardly-projecting annular shoulder C.', 
forming a valve-seat. This annular shoulder 
may be formed in any suitable manner when 
the bottle is blown or molded and while the 
glass is still soft. Above the shoulder at there 
is formed in the interior of the neck of the 
bottle an annular recess or channel C.', which 
may be termed the liquid-channel,' as it 
permits the liquid to flow from the interior of 
the bottle into the cup-valve when the latter 
is off from its seat. 
The cup-valve B is made with a closed bot 
tomb and open at the top, and the cylindrical 
shell is provided near the lower end with a 
circle of orifices d, arranged to form passages 
between the channel d' and the interior of 
the cup. To the wall of the cup, on the in 
side and near the upper edge thereof, are se 
cured two or more retaining-springs C, hav 
ing lower bent ends c, which project through 
the orifices b'. The springs Care preferably 
made of flat metal and are secured near their 
upper ends by brazing or rivets or in any 
other suitable manner to the shell of the cup. 
The springs C will normally lie flat against 
the interior surface of the cup with their out 
Wardly-bent ends c projecting through the 
orifices b', so that when the cup-valve is forced 
into position into the neck of the bottle said 
ends c will project into the channel a' and pre 
vent the cup from being withdrawn. These 
bent ends of the springs, however, will per 
mit the cup-valve to slide up and down or 
back and forth in the neck of the bottle a dis 
tance equal to the height of the channel a', 
so that when the bottle is inverted the cup 
will slide off from its seat and permit the liq 
uid contents of the bottle to flow out through 
channel a' and orifices b'. Though but two 
springs are shown in the drawings, three or 
four or any other desired number may be used, 
as found expedient, 
The cup B is preferably made of white metal, 
but may be made of hard rubber or other suit 
able material. 
For the purpose of closing the orifices blin 
the cup-valve B, Imay use a short open-ended 
tube E of suitable size to slide in the cup B. 
Since the orificesb' are slightly above the lower 
end of cup B, the tube E, when in position, 
will cover said orifices and prevent liquid 
passing through them. When the bottle is 
tilted or inverted for pouring out the liquid, 
the tube E will slide toward the mouth of 
the bottle and permit the liquid to flow out 
through the orifices b', and thence out through 
the mouth of the bottle. 
The tube E may be held in the cup B by 
turning over a tooth or other portion of the 
top edge of cup B. The tube E is sufficiently 
shorter than the cup B to clear the orifices b' 
when it is slid to the upper edge of said cup. 
The bottle having been constructed as 
above described and as shown in Fig. 2, liq 
uid may be readily poured into it through 
the mouth and the opening 2 in the valve-seat 
until it is filled to the desired height. The 
cup-valve may now be inserted by pushing 
inward the springs C, so that the bent ends c 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
570,278 
O 
shall pass along the interior surface of the 
neck until they reach the channel C.', when 
the springs will retract and force said ends 
into said channel. The springs now retain 
their normal position against the interior Wall 
of the cup and their outwardly-projecting 
ends c will permit the cup to slide back and 
forth in the neck to the limits of the channel 
C'. The cup having been inserted will now 
rest at its lower end upon its annular valve 
seat or directly upon the washer b on said 
seat. The tube Emay now be inserted in the 
cup B, and a tooth (one or more) cut in the 
upper edge of the cup then turned inward to 
prevent said tube from sliding out. The cup 
Valve B, resting upon its annular seat, will 
prevent the liquid from flowing into the bot 
tle, but the tube E may be used as an addi 
tional safeguard to close the orifices 0'. The 
parts having been attached as above de 
scribed, the bottle may be corked in the usual 
manner. Since the valve B will seat itself it 
will prevent access of air to the contents of 
the bottle if the cork or other stopper should 
be left out of the neck and also prevent evap 
oration of the liquid. 
When it is desired to pour liquid from the 
bottle, it is tilted, mouth downward, in the 
usual manner, and the cup-valve B then slides 
outward toward the mouth, thus leaving a 
passage between its closed bottom and the 
seat and permitting the liquid to flow out, 
through the channel Cland the orifices b', 
into and through the cup and thence through 
the mouth into the receptacle. 
IIaving described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination with a bottle having an 
3O 
interior annular Valve-seat and an annular 4o 
channel above the same, of a cup-valve hav 
ing a closed bottom and orifices in its cylin 
drical wall, and means extending through the 
orifices into said channel for retaining said 
valve in the neck of the bottle, but permit 
ting it to slide outward and inward therein, 
substantially as described. 
2. The combination with a bottle having an 
interior annular valve-seat and an annular 
channel above said seat, of a cup-valve hav 
ing orifices in its cylindrical wall and springs 
projecting through said orifices into said 
channel for holding said cup in the neck and 
permitting it to move back and forth above 
its seat, substantially as described. 
3. The combination with a bottle having an 
interior annular Valve-seat and an annular 
channel above said seat, of a cup-valve hav 
ing orifices in its cylindrical wall and springs 
secured to the Wall of said cup, and having 6o 
outwardly-bent ends projecting through said 
orifices into the channel, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
4. In combination with a bottle having an 
interior annular valve-seat and an annular 
channel in the body of the bottle above said 
seat, of a cup-valve having orifices in its Wall, 
means extending through the orifices into 
said channel for retaining the valve in the 
neck, but permitting it to slide outward or 
inward and an interior tube adapted to slide 
in said cup, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
55 
JOSEPII S. WOOD, SR. 
Witnesses: 
J. STORY WOOD, 
TD. M. WEBSTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570373.txt	(No Model.) 
W. S. BROWNE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet l, 
ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED SWITCH MECHANISM, 
No. 570,373, 
A 22, 7 
-- 
% 
3 
Patented 00t. 27, 1896. 
Azaz. 2 
- A 
R 
1. 
WITNESSES: 
4. 
//WWEMTOR 
-z- 
By 
ATTORNEYS 
THE NORRIS PETERS Cd. PHOTO.THO., WASHINGTON, ), c 
 
(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
W. S. BROWNE. 
ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED SWITCH MECHANISM, 
No. 570,373. 
Patented Oct. 27, 1896. 
WITNESSES 
473 . (/ue-6-/ 
Sess-re- . 
grg 
"-?low. v6 
ATTORNEY.5 
He worris PETERs co, PHoro-LITHowashingtoN, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALRAM. S. BROWNE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
ELECTRICALLY-ACTUATED SWITCH MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,373, dated October 27, 1896, 
Application filed December 5, 1895. Serial No. 571,131. (No model.) 
C 
To Cld whom it invazy concern: 
Beit known that I, WALRAM. S. BROWNE, of 
Brooklyn, in the coun 
ty of Kings and State of 
New York, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Electrically-Actuated Switch 
Mechanism, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in electrically-actuated switch mech 
anisms such as are adapted for use on electric 
railways, and has for its object to provide a 
device of this character of a simple and inex 
pensive nature, which shall be adapted, when 
applied to the various cars running over a line 
of railway, to automatically switch the cars 
from one loop to another without necessitat 
ing any action on the part of the motorman. 
The invention consists in a switch mechan 
ism having means to actuate it from a current 
of electricity, two series of contacts arranged 
along the line of railway, one contact of each 
Series being adjacent to each switch, a con 
tact carried on a car in position to engage 
each contact of one of said series and but one 
contact of the other series, and circuit con 
nections between the contacts and switch 
mechanism. 
The invention also contemplates certain 
novel features of the construction, combina 
tion, and arrangement of the improved switch 
mechanism, whereby certain important ad 
vantages are attained and the device is made 
simpler, cheaper, and otherwise better adapt 
ed and more convenient for use than other 
similar devices heretofore employed, all as 
will be hereinafter fully set forth. 
The novel features of the invention will be 
carefully defined in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure1 is a diagraphic view showing a line 
of railway having various loops adapted to 
45 be controlled by electrically-actuated switch 
mechanism constructed in accordance with 
myinvention. Fig. 2 is a transverse sectional 
view taken through the line of railway, show 
ing the position of the various parts of the 
improved mechanism. Fig. 3 is a perspec 
tive view drawn to an enlarged scale and 
showing the contact devices arranged along 
35 
the track. Fig. 4 is a somewhat diagraphic 
view showing a modified form of said contact 
devices in connection with switch-operating 
magnets and conductors such as are employed 
in my improvements. Fig. 5 is a plan view 
showing the preferred form and arrangement 
of the switch-magnets. Fig. 6 is an end view 
of the same. Fig. 7 is a detached view show 
ing the armature of the switch-magnets, the 
switch-point being shown in connection with 
said armature in dotted lines. Fig. S is a side 
view of the switch-magnets as shown in Fig. 
5. Fig. 9 is a side view showing the pre 
ferred form and arrangement of the contact 
carried on the car. Fig. 10 is an end view of 
the same. Figs. 11 and 12 are similar per 
spective views showing modified forms of the 
contact devices located on the track and 
adapted for operating different switch-points. 
Fig. 13 is a section taken through the casing 
of the contact devices shown in Figs. 11 and 
12, and Fig. 14 is a fragmentary view drawn 
to an enlarged scale and showing a section of 
the track at one of the switches. 
Referring, primarily, to Fig. 1, the line of 
railway therein shown is in the form of an 
elongated loop having tracks or ends 1, 2, 3, 
and 4. A switch 5 is located in the side 
track 2 of the loop and communicates with a 
branch line 6, wherein is also located a switch 
7, communicating with a branch line 8, which 
extends across the main loop and communi 
cates with the side 4 thereof, while the branch 
line 6 communicates with the side 3 of the 
main loop. By this arrangement of the 
switches it will be understood that there are 
three different routes comprised in the sys 
tem, one route comprising the sides 1, 2, 3, 
and 4 of the main loop, a second route com 
prising the side 1 of the main loop, the lower 
portion 2 of the side 2, the branch line 6, 
and the portions 3 and 4 of the main loop, 
and a third route comprising the side of the 
main loop and the lower portion 2 of the said 
track, the portion 6 of the branch line 6, the 
branch line 8, and the lower portion 4" of the 
side 4 of the main loop. 
Referring to Fig. 2, 99 indicate the track 
rails, and 10 indicates a car having a trolley 
pole 11. 1212 indicate the posts for support 
ing the trolley-wire 14 in place, said posts 
being connected by brace-wires 13 at their 
55 
75 
95 
ICO 
 
2 
570,873 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
upper ends and said Wires being provided 
with hangers of ordinary construction for 
supporting the said trolley-wire 14 in position 
to be engaged by the trolley-wheel 11, (seen 
in Figs. 9 and 10,) carried on the trolley-pole 
11 of the car. 
The stationary contact device comprises a 
frame or casing 15, as seen in Fig. 3, having 
an angular upper portion 14", extending from 
One of its sides and provided at its edge with 
a clamp 14, adapted to engage the trolley 
wire 14, and on said casing are carried con 
tact-plates 17 and 17, preferably constructed 
to move in recesses or openings formed in the 
said frame when engaged by the contacts 
carried by the car. 
The contacts carried on the car comprise 
lugs 16 and 16, bent outwardly from one 
side of a plate 16, formed of metal and se 
cured to the end of the trolley-pole 11 in 
electrical communication with the trolley 
wheel, whereby the current from the trolley 
Wire is utilized to operate the switch mech 
anism, as will be hereinafter described. 
As shown in Fig. 4, the respective contact 
plates 17 and 17 are provided with springs 
17 and 17 for holding them normally pressed 
OutWard in position to be engaged by the con 
tacts on the car, and said springs are con 
nected with circuit-wires 18 and 19, which 
are carried transversely, as indicated at 20 in 
Fig. 2, from the lower portion of the angular 
frame or casing to one of the poles 12 in such 
a manner as to form a brace or guy to pre 
vent lateral movement of the lower end of 
the easing 15, whence said conductors extend 
down to the ground and are connected, as 
indicated at 21 and 22 in the drawings, to the 
switch-operating magnets 23 and 24. These 
magnets 23 and 24 are arranged in a suitable 
frame with their poles adjacent, and between 
them is pivotally mounted at its lower part 
an armature 25, adapted to be attracted to 
the respective magnets, and having an up 
Wardly-extending arm or stem 25, as seen in 
Fig. 7, the upper end of which is in engage 
ment with the switch-point 26, whereby when 
either of said magnets 23 and 24 is excited 
the switch-point will be correspondingly 
moved. 
As shown in Figs. II, 12, and 13, the cas 
ing 27 of the stationary contacts is hollow, 
and the contacts 28 and 29 are hinged at the 
edges of openings in said casing in such a 
Way that their outer faces are held inclined 
to the face of the casing, said contacts being 
provided with stems 30, projecting from their 
rear faces and Working in slots in the opposite 
wall of the casing 27, between which wall and 
the rear face of the contacts springs 31 are 
coiled on the stem. The stems 30 are screw 
threaded to receive lock-nuts 32, whereby the 
contacts are held against projecting too far 
outside the face of the casing. 
In operation as the car moves along the 
track and approaches one of the switches one 
of the contacts 16 and 16 comes into elec 
trical communication. With the stationally Coll 
tacts carried on the trolley-wires and closes 
the circuit through the switch-magnets so as 
to actuate the switch-point and set the switch. 
The contact 17 is arranged in electrical com 
munication with the magnet 24 of the Switch 
actuating device, and said magnet serves to 
hold the switch-point 26 in its closed position, 
as indicated in Fig. 14. . The contact-point 17 
is connected to the magnet 23, and said mag 
net serves to hold the switch-point initS Open 
position, as indicated in dotted lines in Fig.14. 
As shown in the drawings, the contacts of 
the series 17 are made wider than the Con 
tacts of the series 1717, and in setting up the 
switch mechanism the different switches of 
the system indicated at 5 and 7 in Fig. 1 Will 
have their contacts 17. arranged at different 
elevations, as indicated in FigS. 11 and 12, 
the contact 29 in Fig. 1 being higher than 
the contact 29 in Fig. 12. The contacts 16" 
and 16 on the car are arranged to engage 
each contact 17 and are so arranged as to 
pass the contact, 17 of the switch or switches 
which are not designed to be actuated by 
them, but to engage the contact 17 of the par 
ticular switch or switches controlling the route 
along which the car passes, to accomplish 
which the said contacts 16 and 16 will be 
arranged at different elevations on the differ 
ent cars, as will be readily understood. 
In the operation of the device as the car 
approaches the switch the contact 16 first 
engages the contact 17 and closes the circuit 
through the magnet 24, so as to set the Switch 
point 26 at its closed position, this operation 
occurring some little time before the car 
reaches the Switch. After having passed out 
of engagement with the contact 17 the con 
tact 16 on the car engages the contact 17 SO 
as to close the circuit through the magnet 23 
and open the switch, so that the car may pass 
upon the branch line. As the car approaches 
the next switch it will act in a similar Way to 
first close the switch, and then if it is not de 
sired that the car shall be switched onto the 
branch line at this point the contact. On the 
car will not engage the contact 17, but will 
pass the same without actuating the corre 
sponding Switch-magnet. 
From the above description it will be under 
stood that the device is of an extremely simple 
and inexpensive construction and is of such a 
nature as not to beliable to become deranged 
or broken while in use, whereby traffic would 
be interfered with along the line of road, and 
it will also be obvious that the invention is 
susceptible of considerable modification with 
out material departure fromitsprinciples and 
spirit, and for this reason I do not wish to be 
understood as limiting myself to the exact 
form of the device herein set forth. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
An electrical-railway system, comprising a 
main line and a branch line, a switch-point 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
570,878 
8 
carried by a call for engaging successively 
with the first-named contacts, and operating 
first to place or hold the switch-point in en 
gagement with the main-track line and then 
operating to move the switch-point into en 
gagement with the branch line, substantially 
as specified. 
Witnesses: 
WALRAM. S. BROWNE. 
A. PAGENSTECHER, Jr., 
C. E. CORTIS. 
at the junction of the branch line With the 
main line, electrically-operated devices for 
moving the switch-point in opposite direc 
tions, two series of contacts supported by the 
trolley-wire, one contact of each series being 
adjacent to the switch-point, the contacts of 
one series being of less width than and being 
arranged at different elevations with respect 
to the contacts of the other series, circuit con 
Io nections between the contacts and the devices 
for operating the switch-point, and contacts 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570475.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. HANCE. 
TROLLEY. 
 
No. 570,475. 
Patented Nov. 3, 1896. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A. HANCE, OF ST.LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
ANDREW B. LAIL, OF SAME PLACE. 
: 
{ 
TROLLEY. . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,475, dated November 8, 1896. 
Application filed February 26, 1896, Serial No. 580,891. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon it inctly conceriv, 
Beit known that I, JAMES A. HANCE, of the 
city of St. Louis, State of Missouri, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Trolleys, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part hereof. 
My invention, relates to an improved trol 
ley-truck; and it consists in the novel con 
struction, combination, and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of my improved trolley-truck. Fig. 2 is a top 
plan view. Fig. 3 is a sectional detail show 
ing one side of the frame and the central trans 
verse connection between the frames. Fig. 
4 is a sectional detail of a grooved roller or 
wheel and spindle used in my improved trol 
ley-truck. Fig. 5 is a perspective of a part 
of the swivel used in my truck. Fig. 6 is a 
perspective of the king-bolt. Fig. 7 is a dia 
grammatic view illustrating the use of my im 
proved trolley-truck where two electric trol 
ley-wires cross, 
As shown in Fig. 2, my improved trolley 
truck is a four-wheel truck designed for use 
on electric cars and On the upper end of a 
trolley-pole and in contact with the trolley 
wire. There are two large grooved wheels 1 
and 2 mounted on the spindles 3 and 4. These 
spindles are mounted in and connected by a 
frame comprising the side bal's 5 and 6, which 
side bars are connected at the center by a 
plate 7. (Shown in plan in Fig. 2 and in sec 
tion in Fig. 6.) Between the wheels 1 and 2 
inside of said frame and in the same running 
line are mounted two small grooved wheels 8 
and 9. A bifurcated truck-support 10 con 
nects the truck with the pole of the car. Be 
tween the bifurcated ends of this support is 
journaled an axle 11, having an aperture 12 
in its center, as shown in Fig. 5. The plate 
7 rests upon the axle 11 and is swiveled thereto 
by the king-bolt 12. (Shown in perspective 
in Fig. 6.) Depending from the spindle 4 is 
a link 13, to which may be attached a cord for 
controlling the truck. 
s 
- 
In Fig. 7 is shown the crossing of two trol 
ley-wires 14 and 15 in the ordinary way for so 
the purpose of illustrating one of the princi 
pal advaitages of my device. From an in 
spection of this view it will be apparent that 
my truck will cross a wire arranged as in Fig. 
7 without breaking the circuit, and electri- 55 
cians Will recognize this as a decided advan 
tage over the old device. 
In the operation of my improved trolley 
truck the Wheels 1 and 2 are pressed against the 
trolley-wire in the ordinary way. The rock- 6o 
ing SWivel connection between the truck and 
the trolley-pole gives an almost universal mo 
tion to the truck, thus enabling it to follow 
crooks and turns and make crossings, such as 
shown in Fig. 7, without the liability of jump- 65 
ing from the Wire and breaking the electric cir 
cuit. The wheels 8 and 9 are used only in mak 
ing a crossing, the object being that while the 
front wheel is out of contact with the trolley 
wire the smaller wheel behind said front wheel to 
Will be in contact and keep the circuit closed. 
My trolley-truckis so constructed that when 
a wire crossing, such as is shown in Fig. 7, is 
approached the front wheel is prevented from 
flying upwardly and contacting with the cross- 5 
wire by One of the wheels 8 or 9 contacting with 
the line-Wire until the front wheel has passed 
under the cross-wire. In other Words, when 
one of the large wheels runs off of the end of 
the conductor, the truck willraise slightly and 8o 
the smallwheelimmediately behind the wheel 
which has run off will contact with the con 
ductor and prevent the wheel ahead of it from 
flying up and striking the cross-wire. The 
object in such a case is to make a continuous 85 
contact during the act of crossing and at the 
same time do away with the necessity of 
manipulating the trolley-pole by the depend 
ing cord, as is the case in the old devices. 
tion possesses many advantages over a truck 
having a single wheel. 
A trolley-truck of my improved construc- 9o 
I claim 
In a trolley-truck, two grooved wheels 
mounted for rotation in a frame, two smaller 95 
grooved wheels mounted for rotation in said 
25 
35 
40 
45 
2 
570,475 
frame and between the first two wheels, all of 
said wheels being in a running line and the in presence of two witnesses. 
top of the two intermediate wheels being 
slightly below the line of the top of the two 
5 outer wheels, and a rocking and swivel con- 
nection between said frame and the trolley- 
pole. 
M. P. SMITH, 
MAUD GRIFFIN. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
Witnesses: 
JAMES A. IANCE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570575.txt	 
(No Model.) 
C. T. WIAU. 
CHOC0LATE COATING APPARATUS, 
No. 570,575, 
Patented Nov. 3, 1896. 
%. 
SS IdSIdS 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
SLLSAaL aLaLLLLL LGLLLLLuD LLJS 0ESEDLJeSaSLtLCLSDEELDLCLLLLLLL0SSSSJS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES THEODORE VIAU, OF MIONTREAL, CANADA. 
CHO C O LATE COATING APPARATU S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,575, dated November 3, 1896. 
Application filed November 18, 1895, Serial No. 569,368, (No model.) 
y 
55 
?? 
75 
5 
25 
To cut (, tw/07 it inctly concern: 
view of one of the screw-threaded bolts used 
in the construction of my improved carrier. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES THEODORE 
The dipping-frame section in the main pref 
VIAU, of the city of Montreal, in the district 
erably consists of an oblong rectangular 
of Montreal and Province of Quebec, Canada, 
frame made up of side and end bars 55 and 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Chocolate-Coating Apparatus; 
66, respectively, and the space inclosed by 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
the frame is divided into any desired number 
of Subdivisions or spaces by longitudinal and 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same. 
My invention, although relating particu 
transverse dividing-bars 7 and 8. From these 
longitudinal and transverse dividing-bars 
Io larly to the coating of cream drops with 
project a series of Supports, preferably one 
chocolate, is equally applicable in any like 
kind of work, such, for instance, as coating 
from each side of each of the subdivisions or 
gelatinous or gum drops with sugar, &c.; and 
spaces formed by the dividing-bars 7 and 8, 
it has for its object to produce an apparatus 
and these supports are preferably formed and 
supported in the following manner: Each sup 
that will be novel, more simple in operation, 
port consists of a slightly-curved short length 
more durable, less costly to construct, and 
of wire 9, having its projecting end turned 
produce a better-finished article in a much 
shorter space of time than the apparatus and 
downward, as at 10 10, and two of such sup 
ports may be formed of a single piece of wire 
machines that have been in use heretofore, 
having its ends curved inward toward one an 
2d and, furthermore, a machine that does not 
other and passed through a perforation 11 in 
necessarily require the use of steam or other 
the carrying-bar therefor, in which perfora 
power other than manual in the operation 
thereof, although, if desired, steam-power 
tion it is set rigidly about midway of its length 
with its convex side uppermost, thus forming 
may be applied. 
Myinvention may be said to consist briefly, 
tWO supports, one to project on either side of 
the carrying-bar. 
first, in a special construction of the dipping 
A number of the supports just described 
frame, whereby the contact of the cream drop 
will provide holders for supporting the drops 
there with will be confined to a small number 
to be dipped, the supporting-surface of which 
of minute supporting-points instead of to the 
will be exceedingly diminutive and thereby 
3o extensive surface of an encircling band, as 
insure the coating of the entire drop' with 
heretofore, and, secondly, in the construction 
chocolate or any other coating substance in 
of the cover and the tray receiving the fin 
which it may be dipped. 
ished drops and in the special arrangement 
The drops to be dipped are placed one in 
of the means for agitating the carrier after 
each holder, resting upon the supports or fin 
dipping and the particular combination and 
gers 9 thereof, and in order to guard against 
arrangement of these several parts. 
For full comprehension, however, of the in 
their floating to the surface when immersed 
in the liquid chocolate or whatever substance 
vention reference must be had to the acCOm 
panying drawings, forming a part of this 
they are to be coated with I provide a cover 
4o specification, in which like symbols indicate 
preferably constructed as follows: 
An oblong rectangular frame correspond 
the same parts, and wherein 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved dip 
ing in length and breadth to the dipping 
ping-frame in place upon the agitator Over 
frame has longitudinal bars 12 and transverse 
bracing-bars 12, the longitudinal bars being 
the chocolate-dipping trough and With the 
set such a distance apart that they will cross 
cover in place; Fig. 2, a detail perspective 
view of the tray reduced in size; Fig. 3, an 
the centers of the holders of the carrier, while 
auxiliary bars can be added, if desired, by. 
enlarged detail perspective view of one of the 
stretching a series of lengths 12 of wire trans 
holders of the dipping-frame; Fig. 4, an en 
versely across the longitudinal bars 12 and 
larged detail elevation of one of the Support 
securing such auxiliary bars to such longitu 
ing legs or posts; Fig. 5, a similar view of 
one of the latches, and Fig. 6a detailenlarged dinals in order to be flush with the bearing 
45 
35 
go 
95 
i bo 
 
IO 
2 
570,575 
surface thereof by setting them in grooves 12 
and securing them therein by soldering or the 
like. 
The cover is held in place slightly above 
the dipping-frame by means of corner-posts 
13 13 and 14 14, carried by such dipping 
frame, the ones 13 13 extending upward Sufi 
ciently to provide shoulders 13", a recess 13, 
and an overhanging portion 13, the recess 13 
being of sufficient width to accommodate the 
end frame-bar of the cover. The other posts 
1414 extend upward only a sufficient distance 
to provide shoulders 14 and a localizing por 
tion 14, the lower end of each of these posts 
1313 and 14 14 being of sufficient length to 
support the dipping-frame a short distance 
above the table or on whatever it may be set 
to be filled. 
A pair of spring-actuated latches 16 are 
fulcrumed (one at each of the corner-posts 
1414 of the dipping-frame) at their lower ends 
upon bolts 1717, passed through the side bars 
55, posts 14 14, and bracket-pieces 1818. 
These bolts (one of which is shown in detailin 
Fig. 6) are screw-threaded to take into such 
bracket-pieces, and each carries a spring 19, 
coiled thereon, having one end bearing upon 
the inside face of the end piece 6 adjacent 
thereto and its other end bearing upon the 
latch and exerting a pressure tending to cause 
it to normally stand vertical and with its up 
per shoulder extending over one end bar of 
the cover-frame. 
The tray that I prefer to use to receive the 
completed drops consists of a rectangular. 
plate 20, corresponding in size to the dip 
ping-frame, but with its corners cut away, as 
at 20, to accommodate the corner-posts 13 
131414. 
The trough 21, in which the coating sub 
stance is contained and in which the filled 
dipping-frame is dipped, is preferably of ob 
long form slightly longer and wider than the 
carrier and set in a table 22. This table also 
carries a frame 2323, perforated, as at 23:23, 
to receive the lower ends or legs of the posts 
13, 131414 of the dipping-frame, and this 
frame is agitated through any desired means 
(not shown) by either hand or steam power. 
In the use of my apparatus a drop or other 
article to be coated is placed in each of the 
holders of the dipping-frame, the drops being 
preferably placed with their apices downward 
and their sides resting upon the curved ends 
of the pieces. The cover is then placed upon 
the dipping-frame and set with one of its 
transverse end frame-bars in the recesses 13 
13 of posts 1313, the forward end being then 
pressed down over the latches 16 16, which 
will through the action of springs 1919 auto 
matically give way and return to their nor 
mal position, thus allowing the transverse 
bar of such forward end of the cover to be 
located beneath the shoulders of such latches. 
The dipping-frame with the cover held there 
on is then lifted by handles 2525 (carried by set forth. 
the dipping-frame) and the whole immersed in . 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the coating material contained in the trough 
21, after which the dipping-frame is set with 
its legs 13 1314 14 taking in the openings in 
the agitator-frame, which is then agitated by 
any desirable and well-known means, (not 
shown,) thus shaking any superfluous coat 
ing material from the drops back into the 
trough again. After the agitation the cover 
is removed (the latches 16 16 being first 
pressed back against their springs to allow 
of such removal) and the tray is substituted 
therefor, after which the dipping-frame can 
be lifted from the agitator-frames and turned 
upside down, (the tray meanwhile being held 
in place by hand,) when the coated articles 
will be deposited upon the tray, thus empty 
ing the dipping-frame, when the foregoing 
can be repeated. 
It will be preferable to spread a sheet of 
paper, preferably of a size equal to the tray, 
over the coated articles before such tray is 
placed thereon, in order when the dipping 
frame is removed from the agitator-frame 
and reversed that the coated article will be 
deposited upon such sheet of paper instead 
of the tray. 
It will be obvious that various parts can 
be changed or varied without departing from 
the spirit of my invention, as, for instance, 
the contacts, although of similar construc 
tion, can be set cornerwise of the holders in 
the carrier or a less number used and be 
equally effective. 
- 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
What I claim is as follows: 
1. In combination with the dipping-frame 
of a coating apparatus, such dipping-frame 
being formed of a rectangular frame having 
longitudinal and transverse bars disposed to 
provide subdivisions or open spaces through 
out the frame, a series of supports formed in 
pairs each pair of a separate piece of curved 
wire having its ends bent toward each other 
and such supports being carried by the longi 
tudinal and transverse bars of such frame, 
so that one support of a pair will project on 
one side of a bar into one space and the other 
support of such pair, into another space, for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. In coating apparatus, a dipping-frame 
provided with corner-posts and holders to re 
ceive the articles to be coated, a cover for 
such dipping-frame, adapted to receive such 
corner-posts and means for detachably con 
necting said cover to said corner-posts, for 
the purpose set forth. 
. . 
3. In coating apparatus, a dipping-frame. 
adapted to receive and support the articles to 
be coated, and provided with posts at the 
corners thereof, two of which posts are re 
cessed to receive one end of a cover, the other 
two posts being each provided with a shoul 
der to receive the other end of such cover 
thereon and means carried by said last-men 
tioned posts for detachably retaining such 
cover against displacement for the purpose 
4. In coating apparatus, a dipping-frame, 
- 
- 
. 
. 
II. ? 
I 15 
12o 
I 25 
I 30 
 
570,575 
3 
adapted to receive and support the articles 
to be coated, and provided with posts at the 
corners thereof, two of which posts are re 
cessed to receive one end of a cover, the other 
two posts being each provided with a shoul 
der to receive the other end of such cover 
thereon, and a spring-operated latch carried 
by each of said last-mentioned posts, for de 
tachably retaining such cover against dis 
placement, for the purpose set forth. 
5. In coating apparatus, a rectangular dip 
ping-frame adapted to receive and support 
the articles to be coated, and provided with 
posts at the corners thereof, two of which 
posts are recessed to receive one end of a 
cover, the other two posts being each pro 
vided with a shoulder to receive the other 
end of such cover thereon, a bracket-piece. 
carried by the end frame-bar of said dipping 
frame in close proximity to each of such last 
mentioned posts, a bolt carried between each 
bracket-piece and the side frame-bar adja 
cent thereof of the dipping-frame, a latch 
pivoted upon each of said bolts and provided 
with a shoulder adapted to engage the end of 
the cover, and a coiled spring carried by said 
bolt, having one end bearing against the end 
frame-bar of the dipping-frame and its other 
end bearing against said latch to keep same 
normally in a position to engage the end of 
said cover, for the purpose set forth. 
6. In coating apparatus, a dipping-frame 
having a number of holders each composed 
of a number of supports carried by such frame 
and extending partially across openings there 
in and having their ends rounded, adapted to 
receive and support the articles to be coated; 
and such frame being provided with posts at 
the corners thereof, two of which posts are 
recessed to receive one end of a cover, the 
other two posts being each provided with a 
shoulder to receive the other end of such 
cover thereon, and means, carried by said 
last-mentioned posts, for detachably retain 
ing such cover against displacement, for the 
purpose set forth. 
7. In coating apparatus, a dipping-frame, 
having a number of holders each composed 
of a number of supports carried by such frame 
and extending partially therein and having 
their ends rounded, adapted to receive and 
support the articles to be coated; and such 
frame being provided with posts at the cor 
ners thereof, two of which posts are recessed 
to receive one end of a cover, the other two 
posts being each provided with a shoulder to 
receive the other end of such cover thereon 
and a spring-operated latch carried by each 
of said last-mentioned posts, for detachably re 
taining such cover against displacement, for 
the purpose set forth. 
S. In coating apparatus, a rectangular dip 
ping-frame having a number of holders each 
composed of a number of supports carried by 
such frame and extending partially across 
openings therein and having their ends round 
ed, adapted to receive and support the arti 
cles to be coated, and such frame being pro 
vided with posts at the corners thereof, two 
of which posts are recessed to receive one 
end of a cover, the other two posts being each 
provided with a shoulder to receive the other 
end of such cover thereon, a bracket-piece 
carried by the end frame-bar of said dipping 
frame in close proximity to each of such last 
mentioned posts, a bolt carried between each 
bracket-piece and the side frame-bar adjacent 
thereto of the dipping-frame, a latch pivoted 
upon each of said bolts and provided with a 
shoulder adapted to engage the end of the 
cover, and a coiled spring carried by said bolt, 
having one end bearing against the end frame 
bar of the dipping-frame and its other end 
bearing against said latch to keep same nor 
mally in a position to engage the end of said 
cover, for the purpose set forth. 
9. In coating apparatus, a rectangular dip 
ping-frame having longitudinal and trans 
verse bars disposed to provide subdivisions 
or holders throughout the frame, a series of 
supports formed in pairs, each pair of a sepa 
rate piece of curved wire having its endsbent 
toward each other and such support being 
carried by the longitudinal and transverse 
bars of such frame, so that one support of a 
pair will project on one side of a bar into one 
space and the other support of such pair into 
another space, and such frame being provided 
with posts coated at the corners thereof and 
having their lower ends extending below such 
dipping-frame, two of such posts are recessed 
to receive one end of a cover, the body por 
tion of which is formed with bars adapted 
when placed upon such dipping-frame, to 
coincide with the centers of the holders there 
of, the other two posts being each provided 
with a shoulder to receive the other end of 
such cover thereon, a bracket-piece carried 
by the end frame-bar of said dipping-frame 
in close proximity to each of such last-men 
tioned posts, a bolt carried between each 
bracket-piece and thesideframe-bar adjacent 
thereto of the dipping-frame, a latch pivoted 
upon each of said bolts and provided with a 
shoulder adapted to engage the end of the 
cover, and a coiled spring carried by said 
bolt, having one end bearing against the end 
frame-bar of the dipping-frame and its other 
end bearing against said latch to keep same 
normally in a position to engage the end of 
said cover, for the purpose set forth. 
Montreal, November 8, 1895. 
In presence of 
CHARLES THEODORE VIAU, 
FRED. J. SEARS, 
RUPT. C. KIMBER. 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
75 
95 
?. ? ? 
?? 5 
TI I O 
II 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570675.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 570,675. 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
APPARATUS FOR BLEACHING. 
Patented Nov. 3, 1896. 
He hierRS PEERS co, PH-Li wast-stos. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 570,675. 
H. G. McKERROW. 
APPARATUS FOR BLEACHING. 
3 Sheets-Sheet2. 
Patented Nov. 3, 1896. 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
% % 
s 
a.a. 
3 
N S. 
WTNasses- 
|NW2 N7 OF 
The RRs Peter: go. PHistolio washtigton. ... c. 
ax. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 570,675. 
H. G. McKERROW. 
APPARATUS FOR BLEACHING. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Nov. 3, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
WiT NessF5 
le 64 
MW2A/TOR - 
/a. 6-4...Quest-ce 
rts. Norisis perets co photo.To... was INXN. O. &. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HERBERT G. McKERROW, OF MEDFORD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
APPARATUS FOR BLEACHING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,675, dated November 3, 1896. 
Application filed November 20, 1895, Serial No. 569,576, (No model.) 
To all whom it inctly concern: 
ROW, a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
and a resident of Medford, county of Middle 
SeX, and State of Massachusetts, have invented 
a new and useful Improvement in Apparatus 
for Bleaching Fibers and Fabrics, of which 
the following is a specification, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention relates to an apparatus for 
bleaching fibers and fabrics, especially those 
of Wool and animal hair, the object being to 
SO construct and adapt such apparatus that 
the material may be bleached satisfactorily in 
large quantities by the use of peroxid of hy 
drogen or other bleaching liquids. 
The invention consists in an apparatus em 
bodying a vessel and trucks, or like recepta 
cles, to enter the vessel, the trucks or the 
like being Suitable to receive the material to 
be bleached and adapted and combined with 
certain devices to provide for an even distri 
bution and free circulation of the bleaching 
liquid through said material and to prevent 
said liquid from escape therefrom into the 
space between said trucks and the interior of 
said vessel, and said vessel being adapted and 
combined with certain devices to receive 
steam for heating purpose into said space, sub 
stantially as hereinafter set forth, and spe 
cifically pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, (three sheets,) Figure lis 
a side elevation of an apparatus embodying 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a transverse vertical 
section of the same on a larger scale. Fig. 3 
is a longitudinal vertical section. Figs. 4 and 
5 show details. 
The vessel A, preferably inform like a hori 
zontal cylindrical boiler, closed permanently 
at one enda, is provided at the other end with 
a door B, which maybe slid vertically to open 
or close at will the opening at this end of the 
vessel, (by well-known mechanism shown in 
part and which it is not necessary to describe 
herein.) 
In the vessel A and at the lower part thereof 
are longitudinal rails b to sustain and guide 
the wheels c of the trucks D. Two trucks 
are shown, though there may be as many as 
desired. Each truck is so formed of sides d, 
ends e, and bottom f, and provided with a 
cover E and bushingg between the upper rim 
and cover that the truck may be made liquid 
Be it known that I HERBERT G. McKER- tight. Each cover Eis raised or lowered and 
pressed down onto its truck by means of hand 
screws F. Each truckis provided with a per 
forated plate or secondary bottom G, between 
which and the bottom f there is ample space 
for the purpose hereinafter specified. Each 
truck is also provided with a perforated plate 
H, which may lie horizontally in the upper 
part of the truck, being supported by the cor 
ner-brackets i and held in position by pinsti, 
extending through these brackets and ribs of 
the plate H, as shown. When the plate H 
and the cover E are in place, there is a space 
between plate and cover ample for the pur 
pose hereinafter specified. 
Each cover E is provided with a short ver 
tical pipe k, opening into the truck. There 
is an opening in the bottom of each truck op 
posite the end of a short pipel, (when the 
truck is in position in the vessel A.) The 
pipes le may slip endwise in pipes m, secured 
to the vessel A at the top thereof, and the 
pipes l into pipes m, secured to the vessel A 
at the bottom thereof. The pipes in extend 
to one side of a pump I and the pipes in ex 
tend as one conduit J to the other side of the 
pump I. The short pipest may be raised and 
lowered by means of a yoke K and hand 
screws L. The pump I being rotary, is op 
erated by means of the shaft Mand pulley N. 
The slip-joints O are to be steam-tight. A 
pipe O extends from one side of the pump to 
a tank P for supplying the bleaching liquid. 
There is a stop-cock Q in the pipe O and also 
a stop-cock R in the conduit J. A pipe Sad 
mits steam to the vessel A, and there is a short 
pipe and stop-cockT or check-valve to allow 
the passage of the water of condensed steam 
from the vessel A. 
In operation the trucks D, being outside of 
the vessel A and open at the top, receive the 
material to be bleached. The perforated 
plate H for each truck is then secured in place 
above said material, and the trucks run into 
the vessel A (the door B having been raised) 
on the rails b the required distance, which is 
determined by means of buffers p. The door 
B is then lowered in place to close the end of 
the vessel A and make a steam-tight joint 
there with, the covers E are closed down onto 
the trucks to make a liquid-tight joint there 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
52 
55. 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
570,675 
only with the interior surfaces, (of the trucks 
and pipes leading thereto,) which I form of 
an alloy of lead, and will not come in contact 
with the interior surface of the vessel A, 
pump, and other parts of the apparatus, as 
will readily appear. 
The method of bleaching by means of per 
oxid of hydrogen, which may be carried out 
by means of the apparatus herein described, 
is possible by other means, and therefore I 
intend to make another application for said 
method. 
25 
Io 
with by means of the screws F, and the pipes 
l are slid up so as to make liquid-tight joints 
with the bottoms of the trucks by means of 
the yoke K and screws L. The cock Q being 
5 open and the cock R closed, the pump is put 
into operation so as to draw the bleaching liq 
uid from the supply-tank and force the same 
into the trucks D. When as much liquid as 
desired has been received by the trucks, the 
cock Q is closed and the cock R opened, so 
that on continued operation of the pump the 
liquid is repeatedly forced through the trucks 
After 
and material therein to be bleached. 
the trucks have been supplied with the re 
quired amount of liquid, steam is admitted 
into the vessel A, filling the space between 
the interior of this vessel and the trucks. 
Thus during the operation of repeatedly forc 
ing the liquid through the trucks and mate 
rial therein the trucks and contents are heated 
to the required degree, and are maintained at 
that heat to facilitate the process of bleach 
ing. After the material has thus been suffi 
ciently treated the cock Q is opened and the 
cock R closed, so that by reversing the op 
eration of the pump the bleaching liquid may 
be withdrawn from the trucks and forced 
back into the Supply-tank. 
Owing to each perforated plate II and the 
space between the same and the correspond 
ing cover E, the bleaching liquid is caused to 
be distributed upon and forced through the 
material to be bleached substantially uni 
formly, so that all parts of the material will 
be equally treated. 
I am WellaWare that an apparatus has here 
tofore been in use for treating materials, em 
bodying an outer vessel similar to the vessel 
A and provided with a door situated and op 
erated like the door B, and trucks for con 
taining the material to be treated run into 
said vessel on rails, as done in the present 
apparatus; but in Such apparatus heretofore 
knoWn the liquid for treating the material 
has been forced by a pump into the top of 
each truck directly onto the material, strik 
ing the latter at one place, and this liquid 
has been allowed to percolate through a per 
forated bottom of each truck directly into the 
outer vessel (corresponding to the vessel A) 
and drawn therefrom, there having been 
nothing in each truck corresponding to the 
perforated plate H above the material, nor 
any provision to prevent the liquid from en 
tering the vessel A. Now with the liquid, 
55 peroxid of hydrogen, which I propose to use 
in my apparatus, such construction would not 
be desirable, if, indeed, possible. By the per 
forated plate H, I secure much better distri 
bution of the liquid, preventing that unequal 
treatment of the material which has hereto 
fore occurred. Owing to the great oxidizing 
power of the liquid which I employ, great 
eare must be exercised to prevent the same 
65 from coming in contact With parts of the ap 
paratus which should be kept intact. 
construction this liquid will come in contact 
35 
45 
5O 
- 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a bleaching apparatus, the combina 
tion of an outer vessel and means for closing 
the same, a receptacle within said outer ves 
sel to receive the material to be bleached, and 
means for forcing liquid through said recep 
tacle, said receptacle being sufficiently smaller 
than, and closed with reference to, said ves 
sel, so that there is a space between the in 
terior surface of said outer vesseland the in 
ner receptacle into which said liquid cannot 
enter, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a bleaching apparatus, the combina 
tion of an outer vessel, means for closing the 
same, a receptacle within said outer vessel to 
receive the material to be bleached, means for 
forcing liquid through said receptacke from 
the upper to the lower part thereof, and a per 
forated plate in the upper part of said recep 
tacle through which the liquid must pass, said 
receptacle being sufficiently smaller than, and 
closed with reference to, said vessel, so that 
there is a space between said receptacle and 
the interior of said vessel into which said liq 
uid cannot enter, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a bleaching apparatus, the combiaa 
tion of an outer vessel, means for closing the 
same, a receptacle within said outer vessel to 
receive the material to be bleached, means for 
forcing liquid through said receptacle from 
the upper to the lower part thereof, a perfo 
rated plate in the upper part of said recepta 
cle and another perforated plate in the lower 
part of said receptacle, said liquid being 
caused to pass through the openings in said 
plates, and said receptacle being sufficiently 
smaller than, and closed with reference to, 
said vessel, so that there is a space between 
said receptacle and the interior surface of 
said vessel into which said liquid cannot en 
ter, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of a vessel provided 
with a door, a truck to enter said vessel 
through the doorway on ways, a coverfor said 
truck, means for closing the cover-closely onto 
the truck, a pump, pipes leading from the 
upper and lower parts of said truek to said 
pump, and clamping devices operated outside 
of said vessel to clamp said pipes to the truck, 
thus preventing any opening from the truck 
into the space outside of the truck and within 
Said vessel, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of a vessel provided 
By my with a door and ways, a truck to enter said 
vessel on said ways, means for filling the space 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
570,675 
3. 
between the interior surface of said vessel 
and said truck with steam, a cover for the 
truck, screws extending to the outside of said 
vessel for closing down said cover onto the 
truck, a perforated plate or secondary bottom 
in Said truck, a perforated plate in the upper 
part of said truck, a pump, a pipe provided 
with a slip or flexible joint extending from 
the upper part of said truck to said pump, a 
pipe provided with a slip or flexible joint ex 
5 
O 
tending from the bottom of said truck to said 
pump, and a screw extending to the outside 
of said vessel for causing the pipe leading 
from the lowerpart of the trucktomake a tight 
joint there with, substantially as described. 
HERBERT G. MICKERROW. . 
Witnesses: 
L. S. WHITNEY, 
EDW. DUMMER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570775.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 570,775, 
Z27, 7. 
  
J. SCRIMGEOUR, Jr. 
CEILING PLATE, 
Patented Nov. 3, 1896. 
727-2, 
Z 
 
2. 
S Y 
N. 
Ass 
S. 
W. 
|| || 
1. 
m 
III 16 
ifi 
 
 
 
w 
y 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
2 
2 A17 
 
  
 
WITNESSES 
64449%. 
46446 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN SCRIMGEOUR, JR., OF PITTSTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CE LING PLATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,775, dated November 3, 1896. 
Application filed November 23, 1895, Serial No. 569,954, (No model.) 
Io 
25 
35 
To all whom, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JOHNSCRIMGEOUR, Jr., 
of Pittston, in the county of Luzerne and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and Improved Ceiling-Plate, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of this inventionis to provide a 
ceiling-plate which will be capable of more ef 
fectively holding itselfin place and protecting 
the ceiling from a pipe which passes through 
the plate. 
To this end the invention consists in certain 
peculiar features of construction and eOmbi 
nations, which will be fully described herein 
after, and finally embodied in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation showing 
the ceiling-plate surrounding a pipe and in 
the position which it assumes immediately be 
fore being fastened in place. Fig. 2 is a Sec 
tional view showing the ceiling-plate in fas 
tened position. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of the 
ceiling-plate, showing it detached from the 
pipe. Fig. 4 is a plan view of one section of the 
ceiling-plate. Fig. 5 is a similar view of the re 
maining section. Fig. 6 is a plan view of the 
sections joined; and Fig. 7 is an elevation. Of 
the ceiling-plate, partly in Section. 
The ceiling-plate A is formed in two semi 
cylindrical sections b and b', the section b of 
which has lips 17 stamped or formed in its 
edges to receive the corresponding edges of 
the section b', and the former Section is pro 
vided with tongues 18, which pass under 
plates 19, and are adapted to be bent up over 
said plates, whereby to secure the sections rig 
idly together. The ceiling-plate is formed 
with a circular flange B at its lower end, 
adapted to engage the under side of the ceiling 
11, as shown in Fig. 2. This flange B carries 
the tongues 18 and plates 19. 
Formed in each section composing the ceil 
ing-plate, and in approximately the center 
thereof, is a loop 12, said loops being formed 
by stamping strips of material from the sec 
tions band b. In these loops are respectively 
secured the terminals 13 of the spring-arm.D, 
said terminals being rigidly held, and the ma 
terial of which the arms are formed being 
 
In applying the ceiling-plate the sections 6o 
passed upwardly and formed into coils 14, 
through which pins 16 are respectively passed, 
and from these coils the material extends to 55 
form arms 15, the normal tendency of the coils 
being to throw said arms downwardly into en 
gagement with opposite points on the periph 
ery of the flange B. 
b and b' are made to embrace the pipe C, the 
pipe having been passed through an opening 
10 in the ceiling 11 and upwardly through the 
floor above the same. The ceiling-plate be 
ing now below the ceiling 11 is moved up- 65 
wardly, the arms 15 having been first moved 
upward parallel with the pipe C, as shown in 
Figs. 1 and 3, so as to permit the arms to pass 
through the opening 10. When the arms 
have moved into the space between the ceil- 7o 
ing and floor and the upper portion of the 
ceiling-plate is also in this space, the coils 14 
will be permitted to throw the arms 15 down 
Ward so as to bear against the upper side of 
the ceiling 11, as shown in Fig. 2, thereby 75 
tending to raise the ceiling-plate and pressing 
the flange B against the under side of the ceil 
ing, as the second figure also shows. 
It will be seen that the arms 15 have move 
ment from the upward position shown in Figs. 8o 
1 and 3 to the downward position in Fig. 7, 
and when in this downward position the arms 
15 are spring-pressed against the flange Band 
held from the pipe C, so that they may be 
readily grasped by the person manipulating 85 
the ceiling-plate and moved to the upward 
position. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent- 
1. A ceiling-plate having a cylindrical body 
portion. With an outwardly-projecting flange 
at its lower end, and a spring-arm secured to 
the body portion and capable of movement 
from the flange upwardly to a position ap-95 
proximately parallel with the body portion, 
the tendency of the spring-arm being to en 
gagement With the flange, substantially as 
described. . 
portion and a spring-arm secured to the body 
portion, the spring-arm being capable of moves . 
ment above and below the point of its attach 
ment to the body portion and of extending 
2. A ceiling-platehaving a cylindrical body Iob 
9o 
570,775 
2 
approximately parallel with the body portion 
when moved above the said point of attach 
ment, substantially as described. 
3. A ceiling-platehaving a cylindrical body 
portion having at its lower end a flange, the 
body portion having a loop formed therein, 
a spring-arm having one terminal secured in 
the loop, the spring-arm being passed up 
Wardly from the loop and formed with a coil 
and thence extended from said coil to form a 
ceiling-engaging portion, said ceiling-engag 
ing portion being capable of movement from 
the flange upwardly to a point approximately 
parallel with the body portion, the tendency 
of the ceiling-engaging portion being to the 
flange, substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN H. RICKETTS, 
ROBERT COWAN. 
4. A ceiling-plate formed of two semicy 
lindrical sections, one section having atongue 
and the second section having a plate with 
which the tongue is capable of locking, the 
sections having a circular flange at theirlower 
portion, and a spring-arm secured to each 
section, the spring-arms having a tendency 
to the flange and being capable of moving up 
Wardly to a position approximately parallel 
with the body portion, substantially as de 
scribed. 
25 
JOHN SCRIMGEOUR, JR. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570877.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 570,877. 
J. MOREIN, 
AWNING FRAME 
Patented Nov. 3, 1896. 
y 
 
Norris Peters Co., PHoro-LTHo. wasnero. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULES MOREIN, OF NORFOLK, VIRGINIA. 
AWN ING - FRAME. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,877, dated November 8, 1896. 
Application filed August 1, 1896, Serial No. 601,343, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it nay concern: 
Beit known that I, JULESMOREIN, a citizen 
of the United States, and a resident of Norfolk, 
in the county of Norfolk and State of Virginia, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Awning-Frames; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is an end view 
showing an awning-frame embodying the in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the 
combined clamp and of the bar B detached 
from said clamp and slide. Fig. 3 is a per 
spective view of one section of a second form 
of the clamp and slide. 
This invention is designed to provide an 
awning - frame having means of improved 
character whereby it may at any time be 
easily and quiekly adjusted to any desired 
pitch, which will be strong and capable of 
supporting the weight or strain to which said 
frames are subject at times, which can be 
readily set up or taken down and moved to 
some other place, and which will be compara 
tively inexpensive. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in the novel construction and com 
bination of parts, all as hereinafter described, 
and pointed out in the appended claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the letters A A' designate a pair of support 
ing-brackets of suitable character, which are 
designed to be rigidly affixed to the wall of 
the building from which the awning is sup 
B designates the inclined end supporting 
bar, whose upper end portion is hinged or 
pivoted to the upper bracket A. This bar is 
of angular or T form, as best shown in Fig. 
2; that is to say, it has an intermediate web 
portion formed with laterally - projecting 
flanges or ribs b at both upper and lower 
edges, those at the upper edge having, pref 
erably, a somewhat greater extension than 
those at the lower edge. 
C designates a brace-rod whose inner end 
portion is hinged or pivoted to the lower 
ported. 
- 
m 
bracket A" and whose outer end portion is piv 
oted in a combined clamp and slide D, which 
engages the bar B. Said clamp is formed in 
two corresponding sections united by a bolt 
and nut E, each section having at its upper 
portion an inwardly-extending grooved lip 
or flanged, which engages one of the lower 
flanges b of said bar in the manner clearly 
shown in Fig. 1. The lower edge portion of 
each section also has an inward flanged, 
which flanges mutually abut each other to 
maintain the two sections in proper separa 
tion from each other. 
It will be apparent that by means of the 
bolt and nut Ethe two sections can be rigidly 
clamped to each other and also in engagement 
with the said bar, and that by slacking the nut 
the slide can be readily moved up or down on 
the bar B, thereby adjusting the latter to any 
desired pitch. The said bolt also forms, the 
pivot for the brace C. This facility of adjust 
ment is of considerable importance, inasmuch 
as the possessor of an awning is often desirous 
of having the pitch changed to either raise 
or lower the lower portion of the awning. 
With the above construction this can be read 
ily done without the aid of a blacksmith. The 
construction also greatly facilitates the plac 
ing of the frame in the first instance. It will 
be understood that in this operation as many 
of these frames are affixed to the building as 
may be necessary and that it is requisite that 
the bars B shall have the same degree of 
pitch. This can be readily obtained by a 
proper adjustment of the slides. The frame 
may also be quickly taken down when it is 
desired to move to another building. 
For metal awnings or other awnings of un 
usual weight it is desirable to employ an ad 
ditional brace, such as indicated at H in dot 
ted lines, Fig. 1. The inner end of this brace 
may be connected to the bracket A' and its 
upper end to a second clamp and slide, which 
is the same as that above described, except 
that the lower flanges d are cut away to admit 
the end of the brace, as indicated in Fig. 3. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an a Wining-frame, the combination 
with the upper and lower supporting or wall 
brackets, of the flanged bar Bhinged or piv 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
O 
3O 
45 
 
2 
570,877 
With uppel and lower Supporting and Wall 
brackets A, A", of the bar IB whose upper end 
is hinged or pivoted to the bracket A, and 
which is formed with lateral ribs or flanges, 
the two clamps having a sliding engagement 
With the ribs or flanges of said bar, and the 
two braces C and Hwhose inner ends are piv 
oted to the bracket A and their outer ends to 
the respective clamps, substantially as speci 
fied. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
2 y - 
25 
JULES MOREIN. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE II. PARMELEE, 
JESSIE L. LEDDON. 
Oted to the upper of said brackets, a brace C 
pivoted to the lower of said brackets, and a 
Combined clamp and slide to which the oppo 
site end of said brace is pivoted, said clamp 
and slide having lips or flanges which engage 
the flanges of the bar B, together with means 
for Securing said slide in any desired adjust 
ment, Substantially as specified. 
2. In an aWning-frame, the combination 
With the hinged or pivoted bar B, having lat 
erally - projecting flanges, of the two-part 
Clamp and slide having grooved lips or flanges 
which embrace the said flanges of the bar B, 
and are arranged to slide thereon, a clamp 
ing-bolt therefor, and a brace pivoted to said 
slide substantially as specified. 
3. In an awning-frame, the combination 
TO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US570977.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. BEL CHER. 
COMBINED TRIANGIE AND PROTRACTOR, 
No. 570,977. 
- 
Patented Nov., 10, 1896. 
 
2S 
 
9 
Wzz22esses: 
4. 7,744 
16... A. lyse?; 
ofeo/, /9.4 
Ziy Mezis accorzeg, 
722 eveza (or: 
%z//e72 - M. Zie/c/e ev. 
72%. , 
 
UNITED STATES 
WARREN J. BELCIER, OF 
PATENT OFFICE. 
II ART FORD, CONNECTICUT, 
COMBINED TRANGLE AND PROTRACTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 570,977, dated November 10, 1896. 
Application filed August 5, 1896, Serial No. 601,741. No model, 
55 
To titl, elon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WARREN J. BELCHER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in 
IIartford, in the county of Hartford and State 
of Connecticut, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in a Combined Tri 
angle and Protractor, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to combination 
tools more particularly designated as a com 
bined triangle and protractor, the object 
being to provide the ordinary draftsman's 
triangle with a protractor, whereby the in 
strument can not only be used in the usual 
Way, but can also be used as a protractor for 
obtaining different angles. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a combined tool of this character which 
will be simple in its construction and manip 
ulation and accurate in its measurements. 
In the drawings accompanying and form 
ing part of this specification, Figurel is an 
elevation of this improved combined tool, a 
part thereof being shown in section. Fig. 2 
is a sectional view taken in line 22, Fig. J.; 
and Fig. 3 is a view of the member or spring 
for retaining the protractor in position. 
Similar characters designate like parts in 
all the figures of the drawings. 
As a preface to a description of this im 
proved combined tool it will be understood 
that the triangle can be made of any suitable 
material and in any desired way. It is, how 
ever, preferably made of celluloid or some 
suitable transparent material, whereby the 
graduations need be placed only on one side 
thereof, and thus permit both sides of the 
tool to be utilized. It will also be further 
understood that while this particular con 
struction of protractor, and tho means for 
securing the same in position, is shown in 
connection with a triangle it may also be used 
in connection with other tools and placed in 
position relatively thereto in the same. Way. 
This improved combined tool comprises, in 
a general way, a triangle, a protractor secured 
theretofor adjustment, and a spring for firmly 
holding the protractor in position and retain 
ing the same throughout its adjustment. 
In the preferred form thereof herein shown 
and described the triangle, which, as before 
stated, may be of any suitable construction 
and material, has a circulair opening 5, of a 
size adapted for the purpose, intermediate its 
three plane faces (6, 7, and S, and which cir 
cular opening 5 has a groove 9 in the edge of 
the triangle-frame bounding said opening, 
and which groove may be of any suitable 
shape, but is herein shown, preferably con 
caved. Disposed for adjustment within this 
opening and occupying substantially one-half 
of the same is a protractor comprising a semi 
circular member or protractor-bar 10, con 
nected at its ends by a cross member or bar 
12, and which protractor-bar 10 has its outer 
edge 13 shaped to fit the groove 9 of the cir 
cular opening, and, as herein shown, is pref 
erably convex or curved for this purpose. 
As a means for holding this protractor in 
position firmly and also for permitting the 
desired adjustment, thereof a spring is used 
in connection there with, and is herein shown 
in the nature of a bow-spring 14, preferably 
of wire and of a shape adapted to rest within 
the groove 9 and extend substantially around 
the other half of said opening 5, its ends 15 
fitting within recesses 16 of the cross-bar 12 
of the protractor, and which recesses are con 
tiguous to the holding-groove 9, whereby said 
protractor will he held at all times firmly 
against displacement, but will at the same 
time be capable of quick and perfect adjust 
inheit. The protractor-bar 10 might be graduated 
in any desired way, but it is herein shown 
preferably graduated at both sides of its cen 
ter or index-mark 0 up to '90, each main 
mark indicating ten degrees, and which ten 
degree intervals are further divided interme 
diate thereof to indicate five degrees. 
The triangle at one portion thereof, as 17, is 
marked with an index-mark O2 to correspond 
with the index-mark 0 of the protractor-bar, 
and is also marked at each side of such index 
mark '0' with graduations 18, reading from 
0 to 5, whereby the protractor can not 
only be adjusted to indicate angles as low as 
five or ten degrees, but can also be adjusted 
to indicate angles of one degree. 
On the triangle at each side of the one-de 
gree graduations 18 are disposed a second 
series of graduations, as 19, for the purpose 
of securing adjustments equal to a half-de 
gree, these marks 19 being disposed at odd 
45 
So 
20 
25 
35 
90 
95 
Od 
2 
75 
O 
- 39 
20 
distances from the graduations 18-that is to 
Say, as herein shown, the first graduation 
mark, as 20, of each series 19 is disposed at 
a distance equal to four and one-half degrees 
from the graduations 18, shereby they will 
indicate adjustments of the protractor equal 
to a half-degree in the manner hereinafter 
set forth. It will be understood that other 
graduation-marks might be used to indicate 
adjustments of less than one-half degree by 
disposing them in substantially the same way. 
In the use of this improved combined tri 
angle and protractor, when it is desired to 
adjust the protractor to measure any desired 
angle, it is simply necessary to turn the same 
Within the circular opening 5, to thereby bring 
the desired graduated mark of the protractor. 
bar 10 adjacent to the index-mark: O' of the 
triangle-that is to say, presuming it is de 
sired to measure an angle of twenty-five de 
grees, as indicated in the drawings, it is sim 
ply necessary to bring the intermediate mark, 
as 21,' located between the graduated marks 
25 '20' and 30' of the protractor-bar into line 
with the index-mark 0 of the triangle. If 
it is desired, however, to secure an adjust 
ment equal to an angle of twenty-six degrees, 
- 
it is simply necessary to move the protractor 
to bring the mark 21 in line with the first 
graduation-mark, as  
22, at one side of the 
'index-mark 0 on the triangle. 
If it is de 
sired to Secure an adjustment equal to an 
angle of twenty-six and one-half degrees, it 
is simply necessary to bring the mark 21. 
into line with the first graduated mark, as 
. 
. oG 
at eae, side of the index-anark O of 
the triangle, and then further move the pro 
tractor to either bring the aark 23 inter 
linediate the graduated marks 10 and 20 
or the mark 24 intermediate the graduated 
marks 30 and 40 into line with one of 
the graduated marks 19 of either series of 
half-degree marks, whereby the protractor 
will indicate an angle of twenty-six and one 
half degrees. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that, 
comparatively few graduations are necessary 
on the protractor and triangle in order to se 
cure an adjustment fron) one-half of a degree 
to one hundred and eighty degrees, or one 
half of a circle, and that by this improved 
device the necessity of forming on protractors 
a large number of graduations, as has here 
tofore been found necessary, is obviated. 
This combined tool, it will be seen, can be 
used as a triangle or as a protractor or as a 
combined triangle and protractor. It will 
also be understood that the cross-bar 2 of 
the protractor can be used for sectional lin 
ing at any desired angle by simply adjusting 
the protractor to any desired position and 
then moving the combined tool in the usual 
way to secure the sectional lines. Thus the 
instrument forms a combined tool which is 
extremely simple in its construction, effective 
in use, and inexpensive to manufacture, and 
which latter advantage is quite a material 
- 
35 
. 
45 
5 O, 
55 
grooved wall; 
One in this class of instruments. It will also 
be seen that the spring not only constitutes 
a means for holding the protractor in posi 
tion against displacement when stationary, 
but also constitutes a means for, permitting 
the adjustment thereof and securing it firmly 
in such adjusted position against movement. 
It will be further seen that such spring takes 
up the wear resultant from the adjustment 
of the protractor and always holds the same. 
in proper position relatively to its holding 
groove. 
It will, furthermore, be understood 
that the graduated marks E8 and 9 need not 
necessarily be placed directly on the triangle, 
as they might be placed on a supplemental 
member secured thereto eitherfor or without 
adjustment. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The combination with a trianglehavinga 
circular opening the wall of which is grooved 
throughout its entire circumference, of a 
semicircular protractor having a eross-bar re 
cessed at each end; and a loose bow-spring 
fitted into the unoccupied part of said open 
ing and having its ends engaging the recesses 
of said cross-bar, said spring being movable 
with the protractor and serving to hold the 
same in its adjusted position. 
2. A supporting-framehaving a completely 
inclosed circular opening provided with a 
a protractor having a convex 
edge disposed in said opening and movable en 
tirely a "$32 ind the same; and a spring loosely 
engaging the protractor and movable there 
ing serving to hold the protractor 
... with, saids 
in position. 
3. A Stipoliting-i. are a vig an inclosed 
circular one sing providi with a groove in 
the edge thereof bouting said opening; a 
protractor having a part thereof shaped to fit 
said groove; and a spring fitting into the un 
occupied portion of said groove and operable 
to hold the protractor in position. 
4. A triangle having an inclosed circular 
opening having a groove in the edge thereof 
bounding said opening; a protractor having 
a semiircular protractor-bar with its outer 
edge shaped to fit within said groove; and a 
bow-spring also fitting in the unoccupied por 
tion of said groove and having its ends en 
gaging said protractor, said spring being ad 
protractor 
justable simultaneously with the 
entirely around the opening. 
5. A triangle having a circular opening and 
provided with a groove in the edge thereof . 
bounding said opening; a protractor having 
a semicircular member with its outer edge 
shaped to fit into a part of said groove; and 
a bow-spring fitting in the unoccupied part of 
said groove and having its ends engaging the 
ends of the protractor for holding the same 
in position. 
WARREN J. BELCIIER. 
. 
Witnesses: . 
- - - - 
. 
* 
w 
 
HENRY BISSELL, 
FRED. J. DOLE. 
95 
OO 
d 
I I5 - 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571077.txt	(No Model.) 
F. SHERIDAN. 
MEANS AND CONSTRUCTION FOR INSERTING FITTINGS UNDER PRESSURE, m 
No. 571,077. 
Patented Nov. 10, 1896, 
  
 
 
47%. 
al SNSS)z. 
g4% Sziz, 
%22S aS 
ZAA 
- - - 
- 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
als K2% 
SS2 
 
 
 
 
 
YSir 
et Aes 
sts SSE2 
A") SE, NS /9 
76 N a 2, 
/2 
 
2 
A0 
xxx 
/? 
12 
NY 27 
==EF a NEE 
es 
SIEEE see- e. 
s 
Ap 
28 
26 
7 
ft) 
17 E. 
25 
242. 
 
9. 
Az 4, 
s 
23 
MZZZZZzza 
-72 all- 
44- ce/4 - 
AZIZZZZZZZZZ 
More 4ezzee 
2 e Zoz/4 
 
The Norris Peters co, Photo-liigs., WashingtoN. d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK SHERIDAN, OF COVINGTON, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO WILLIAM E. YAGER, OF SAME PLACE. 
MEANS AND CONSTRUCTION FOR INSERTING FITTINGS UNDER PRESSURE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571,077, dated November 10, 1896. 
Application filed June 6, 1896, Serial No. 594,504. (No model.) 
To all whom it naily concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANKSHERIDAN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of Cov 
ington, Kenton county, State of Kentucky, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in the Means and Construction to 
Insert Fittings under Pressure; and I do de 
clare the following to be a clear, full, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
Io enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, attention 
being called to the accompanying drawings, 
with the reference-numerals marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to means and con 
struction for the purpose of inserting and re 
placing valves, cocks, and similar stop-fittings 
in general while the medium which these fit 
tings control is charged and under pressure. 
2O. Its use is more particularly intended in con 
nection with so-called stop-cocks,' as they 
occur in the service-pipes of waterworks sys 
tems, where they control the branch pipes 
leading from mains to the private consumers. 
25 Replacing or repairing of these stop-cocks 
when they become leaky and worn out is 
always a troublesome undertaking, particu 
larly for the reason that generally a part of 
the main has to be shut off, thereby depriv 
3o ing also others of the use of Water until the re 
pairs or replacing is accomplished. 
The object of my invention is therefore to 
limit this resulting inconvenience to that sup 
ply only which depends on the one pipe where 
35 the cock is located, and as to that particular 
pipe it reduces the time required to make the 
insertion or repairs considerably and simpli 
fies the whole procedure. 
It consists in part of a coupling specifically 
4o prepared for the purpose and forming a part 
of the cock and pipe system, remaining per 
manently in position, and of implements 
which work in conjunction with the parts 
first mentioned, but are only temporarily in 
45 position, assuming, therefore, more the char 
acter of tools. 
In the following specification, and particu 
larly pointed out in the claims, is found a 
full description of the invention, its proce 
So dure, parts, and construction, which latter is 
also illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1, in a longitudinal horizontal sec 
tion, shows a stop-cock of a pipe-line discon 
nected at one side and the pipe bent aside to 55 
give access to the cock. Fig. 2 shows in a 
vertical longitudinal section the next step of 
the procedure. Fig. 3 shows in a similar view 
the parts in a position which permits removal 
of the cock. Fig. 4 shows the end of the pipe 
temporarily closed and the cock removed. 
Fig. 5 shows in a top view all parts connected 
in operative position and an additional mem 
ber applied to make the procedure more con 
venient, particularly where the pipes are un- 65 
der high pressure. 
At present these cocks are usually con 
nected by so-called wiped 'joints directly to 
the leaden pipes at either side. If replacing 
or repairs are required, it is necessary after 
the Water has been shut off, generally be 
tween a whole block, to cut the pipe and make 
a new connection by similar joints. It re 
quires considerable time and skill to Wipe a 
joint of which there are at least two, and be- 75 
sides there is the waste in lead pipe which 
has to be cut out. To obviate this kind of a 
joint, I propose to connect the stop-cock 7 to 
the leaden pipes S by couplings 9, secured to 
the nipples 10 of the stop-cock by threaded 
caps or unions 11. The outer ends of the two 
couplings are permanently secured by wiped 
joints 12 to the leaden pipes 8; but these 
joints when formed once need never be dis 
turbed any more, as will be presently under- 85 
stood. 
To obtain a water-tight joint, the inner 
ends of the couplings may fit into the nipples 
10 of the cocks by a ground joint 13, or a 
washer 14 may be interposed. The inside of 9o 
the couplings near their inner end is threaded 
for a suitable distance. 
The cock itself is of the ordinary well 
known type with a round passage-way 15. 
If now in due course of time it becomes nec- 95 
essary to repair or replace one of these cocks 
for any reason whatever, its removalis accom 
plished as follows: The cock is closed against 
the pressure and the pipe at the other side 
is disconnected, which is done by simply un 
screwing the union 11 thereat and slipping it 
back on its coupling, after which the leaden 
pipe becomes free and may be bent aside to 
be out of the way, as shown in Fig. 1. Next 
OO 
I5. 
 
2 
571,077 
5 
O 
2 O 
a stop 16 is introduced into the now open nip 
ple of the cock, and a cap 17, perforated to 
admit the shank 18 of the stop, is screwed 
onto the nipple of the cock, taking the place 
of the removed union 11 and closing again 
the open end of the cock. (See Fig. 2.) A 
stuffing-box 19 may be provided where the 
shank passes through the cap. With the 
parts in this condition the cock may now be 
readily opened, because the escape of Water 
is prevented by cap 17. The cock being 
opened, stop 16 is now pushed through the 
open passage-Way 15 and put in engagement 
with the inner end of the opposite coupling, 
closing the same, as shown in Fig. 3. For 
the purpose of such engagement the stop is 
threaded externally and fits the internal 
thread at the inner end of this opposite coup 
ling. A suitable removable handle or hand 
wheel 23 is provided to operate and turn the 
stop. This connection, which thus shuts off 
the Water, being made, the whole cock may 
now readily be taken off after the union hold 
ing it yet at the other side is unscrewed, be 
cause stop 16 closes the pipe for the time be 
ing and prevents the water from pouring out. 
This leaves the parts as shown in Fig. 4. For 
replacing the new cock the procedure is simi 
lar, only that its different steps are performed 
in converse order. Thus the new cock is 
slipped over the stop and connected to the 
closed coupling. Cap 17, having been taken 
off from the removed cock, is then passed in 
over shalnik 1S of the stop, and the open nip 
ple of the new cock is closed, putting the parts 
again in position, as shown in Fig. 3. This 
permits withdrawal of stop 16 from the coup 
ling, which is kept closed until then, such 
withdrawal being sufficient to clear the pas 
sage-way of the cock and permit the latter 
itself to be closed. Cap 17 and stop 16 are 
now entirely removed, after which the end of 
the other pipe is bent back into position again 
and connected by the union, as may be read 
ily understood. 
For larger pipes or where the pressure is 
considerable a hooked brace 24 may be pro 
vided, which is engaged with projections 25 
on cap 17 and has a screw-shank 26 seated 
in the end 27. By limeans of a sliding sleeve 
28 it is connected to the end of Shank 1 S of 
the stop, and the latter may now be readily 
advanced against the pressure and into the 
Screw-threaded coupling. 
As will be seen, time, Work, and expenses 
are considerably reduced, no solder joints are 
required, no leaden pipes need to be cut out, 
and the inconveniences and disturbances re 
sulting from turning off the water are limited 
to the One pipe alone. 
Under certain conditions and when no 
leaden pipe is used couplings 9 might repre 
sent simply the ends of the pipes themselves. 
laving described my invention, I claim as 
lOW 1. In a stop-fitting adapted to be applied 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
under pressure and detachably connected to 
the pipe by unions and couplings, a stop 16 
adapted to be passed through the passage 
Way of the stop-fitting after the same is ren 
dered accessible by disconnection from the 
pipe at One side and capable of closing the 
open end of the pipe or coupling at the other 
side and a cap to close the disconnected end 
of the stop-fitting. 
2. An implement for connecting stop-fit 
tings to pipes while charged and where such 
fittings are detachably connected to the pipe 
by couplings or otherwise, such implement 
consisting of a stop 16 carried by a shank 18 
and a cap 17 both adapted to be temporarily 
connected, the first for the purpose of closing 
the open end of the pipe, the other to close 
the Open end of the stop-fitting and all to be 
applied in the manner described. 
3. In a construction to insert fittings in 
pipes while charged, the combination of a 
cock or similar stop-fitting detachably con 
nected to its pipe by couplings 9 and unions 11, 
the inner ends of the couplings being screw 
threaded, a stop 16 threaded to fit the threaded 
end of the couplings and adapted to be passed 
through the passage-way controlled by the 
Stop-fitting after the same is disconnected at 
One side and thus opened for access, a cap 
17 to temporarily close the open end of the 
stop-fitting and a shank on stop 16 and pass 
ing through cap 17 to manipulate it. 
4. An implement for inserting stop-fittings 
into pipes while charged and where such fit 
tings are detachably connected to the pipe by 
couplings or otherwise, such implement con 
sisting of a stop 16 carried by a shank 18 and 
screw-threaded to fit the correspondingly 
threaded end of one of the permanently-con 
nected couplings for the purpose of closing 
thereby the open pipe, and a cap 17 fitted to 
close the open end of the stop-fitting While 
stop 16 is being inserted to close the open 
end of the pipe and a shank passing through 
cap 17 to manipulate stop 16. 
5. An implement for inserting stop-fittings 
into pipes while charged and where such fit 
tings are detachably connected to the pipe by 
couplings or otherwise, such implement con 
sisting of a stop 10 carried by a shank 18, a 
cap 17, having projections 25, fitted to close 
the open end of the stop-fitting while stop 
16 is introduced, a shank 18 on stop 16 pass 
ing through cap 17, a brace 24 adapted to be 
temporarily connected to projections 25 On 
cap 17 and a screw-shank 20 Supported in the 
end of brace 24 and adapted for connection 
to shank 18 for the purpose of manipulating 
stop 16. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affiX my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
FRANK SERIDAN. 
Witnesses: 
W. E. YAGER, 
C. SPENGEL. 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571178.txt	(No Model.) 
G, THOMPSON. 
MICROMETER GACE, 
No. 571,178, 
Patented Nov. 10, 1896. 
N 
%22zSS 
N 
SN 
2 
re 
N 
   
SHD 
2 
2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE THOMPSON, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
MICROMETER-GAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571,178, dated November 10, 1896. 
Application filed February 17, 1888, Renewed April 10, 1896, Serial No, 587,035, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE THOMPSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Cleveland, Cuyahoga County, Ohio, have in 
vented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Micrometer-Gages, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part hereof. 
My invention has reference more particu 
larly to that familiar type of gage in which a 
threaded spindle is inserted through one end 
of a U-shaped body and the distance meas 
ured between the end of the spindle and the 
Opposite ends of the body, the spindle being 
provided at its outer end with a graduated 
sleeve, which incloses and is read in connec 
tion. With a graduated neck on the body. It 
is the universal practice bothin America, and 
Europe to graduate these instruments accord 
ing to the decimal system to readthousandths 
of an inch, the spindles being provided with 
forty threads to the inch and the circumfer 
ence of the sleeve divided into twenty-five 
parts. A further subdivision of the gradua 
tions has been found impracticable, for the 
reason that it is difficult to read them with 
the naked eye and because their fineness 
leads to confusion and error of adjustment. 
Now in modern shop practice nearly all work 
is done from drawings having dimensions 
marked thereon, and in these drawings it is 
the constant practice to indicate the dimen 
Sions in part in accordance With the decimal 
plan and in part in sixteenths of an inch. 
The latter designations are generally used 
in connection with those parts which are to 
be formed by standard tools, such as are 
commonly sold in the market and which are 
ordinarily constructed in accordance with a 
scale of sixteenths of an inch. In order that 
micrometers graduated on the decimal plan 
may be used for measuring sixteenths, it is 
the practice to stamp upon their bodies an 
extensive table indicating the decimal equiv 
alents of sixteenths. As the even numbers 
of sixteenths, such as two-sixteenths, four 
Sixteenths, six-sixteenths, &c., are repre 
sented by a whole number of thousandths 
they can be accurately measured, although 
care and trouble are required, but as the un 
even sixteenths, as one-sixteenth, three-six 
teenths, five-sixteenths, &c., are represented 
by decimals terminating in fractional thou 
sandths it is exceedingly difficult to read 
them, and as the instrumentis not graduated 
below thousandths the workman is compelled 
to rely upon the accuracy of his eye in adjust 
ing the gage. In practice this is found both 
troublesome and unreliable, the variations 
which are liable to accur being frequently 
such as to cause a misfit. 
Now the object of my invention is to pro 
vide a simple means by which the Workman 
may instantly and accurately measure the odd 
sixteenths of an inch on a micrometer grad 
uated as usual on the decimal plan; and to 
this end it consists, essentially, in providing 
the neck around which the graduated sleeve 
revolves with a second longitudinal line dial 
metrically opposite the line on which the 
thousandths are read, and also in providing 
the neck on the rear side with transverse lines 
or numbers indicating the odd sixteenths, to 
be read in connection with the end of the 
sleeve. With the exception of these gradual 
tions the instrument may be in all respects of 
the ordinary construction. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of an ordinary gage, showing the 
usual graduations on one side for reading 
thousandths of an inch. Fig. 2 is a view of the 
opposite side of the gage, showing the addi 
tionalline of graduations whichI have applied 
to facilitate the reading of the odd sixteenths 
and the subdivision of thousandths. Fig. 3 is 
alongitudinal central section of the gage. Fig. 
4 is a cross-section of the same on the line aca. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the . 
U-shaped body, provided at one end with the 
bearing-face a, and at the other with the pro 
jecting internally-threaded neck a'. 
Brepresents the measuring-spindle, thread 
ed through the neck and fixed at the outer end 
within the sleeve b, which passes with a rotary 
and longitudinal motion over the neck. The 
neck is provided on one side with the longi 
tudinalline a, known as the Zero-line, and 
with transverse graduations a, representing 
fortieths of an inch. The end of the sleeve 
is divided circumferentially into twenty-five 
equal parts by longitudinallines b', numbered 
in regular order. The above graduations en 
able the workman to read thousandths of an 
Oc 
O 
20 
35 
45 
 
2 
571,178 
inch, and are all that are usually employed. 
They do not, however, permit the exact read 
ing of uneven sixteenths or other measure 
ments including a fraction of a thousandth. 
In applying my improvement I provide the 
neck O', at a point diametrically opposite the 
Zero-line a, with a second longitudinal line, 
C., to be read in connection with the gradua. 
tions on the end of the sleeve. I also provide 
the neck with transverse graduations a, in 
tel'Secting the line a. These transverselines 
are an eighth of an inch apart and represent 
the odd sixteenths of an inch. When there 
fore it is required to measure three, five, or 
any other uneven number of sixteenths it is 
Only necessary to turn the sleeve until its end 
Coincides with the appropriate line a and its 
Zel'O-mark coincides with line Ct. In this man 
ner the necessity of consulting a decimal table 
is avoided and the instrument adjusted ac 
curately and positively to the odd half-thou 
Sandth of an inch, or,in other words, to include 
the two-thousandth part of an inch which is 
included in the sixteenth. 
The transverse lines C, although advan 
tageous, are not necessary, provided the nu 
merals indicating the number of sixteenths 
are placed at the proper points along the line 
Ct, so that the operator has only to bring the 
end of the sleeve in line with the numeral and 
the Zero-mark to the line Ct. 
The line C' is not only advantageous in the 
reading of sixteenths of an inch, but also in 
Subdivided thousandths, as the instrument 
Will always indicate an odd half-thousandth 
whenever one of the longitudinal lines on the 
sleeve coincides with the line Ct. 
I am aware that gages and other instru 
lments have been variously provided with two 
Or more independent Scales or graduations 
and that supplemental devices have been Val 
riously applied to micrometer-gages in order 
- 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
to facilitate the reading of thirty-seconds of 
an inch and other distances which involve 
the subdivision of thousandths, but I believe 
myself to be the first to provide a micrometer 
gage of the type herein shown with the two 
series of graduations on opposite sides of one 
and the same neck, both adapted to be read 
in connection with a single set of graduations 
On a sleeve. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a micrometer-gage of the type herein 
described and shown, the circumferentially 
graduated sleeve attached to the threaded 
measuring-spindle, in combination with the 
stationary neck having on diametrically op 
posite points two longitudinal lines, one 
graduated for the reading of thousandths of 
an inch, the other graduated for the reading 
of odd sixteenths of an inch. 
2. In a micrometer-gage of the type herein 
described and shown, the threaded spindle 
and its adjusting-sleeve divided circumferen 
tially into twenty-five equal parts, in combi 
nation with the frame having the neck pro 
vided with the two longitudinal lines at dia 
metrically opposite points. 
3. The micrometer-gage consisting of the 
U-shaped body, having the internally-thread 
ed neck, the measuring-spindle, the sleeve 
attached to said spindle, the circumferential 
graduations on the end of the sleeve, the two 
longitudinal lines at diametrically opposite 
points on the neck, one of said lines gradu 
ated for the reading of thousandths of an inch, 
the other graduated and numbered to indicate 
the odd sixteenths of an inch. 
- 
75 
GEORGE THOMIPSON. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT T. MORROW, 
F. D. MORROW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571278.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOEL ALEXANDER McCAWLEY, OF CANTON, KENTUCKY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO GEORGE W. COBB, OF SAME PLACE. 
CISTERN-CLEANER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571 278, dated November 10, 1896. 
Application filed June 1, 1896, Serial No. 593,909, (No model.) 
5 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
Be it known that I, JOEL. ALEXANDER. MC 
CAWLEY, a citizen of the United States, re 
siding at Canton, in the county of Trigg and 
State of Kentucky, have invented a new and 
useful Cistern-Cleaner, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to cistern-cleaning de 
vices, and has for its object to provide means 
of a simple and inexpensive construction for 
removing impurities from the bottom of a cis 
tern without agitating the sediment either by 
the introduction of the cleaner or during the 
operation thereof. 
Further objects and advantages of this in 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
a cistern-cleaner constructed in accordance 
with my invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
tion of the same. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in both figures of the draw 
lingS. 
1 designates a suction cone or cup provided 
with a peripheral series of spaced supporting 
projections 2, adapted to rest upon the bot 
tom of the well or cistern, and also provided 
with a central opening in which is threaded 
the lower end of a pump cylinder or barrel 3, 
said cylinder or barrel extending to a point 
contiguous to the plane of the base or pe 
riphery of the cup and having its bore flared 
at its lower end to facilitate the entrance of 
sediment. An upwardly-opening inlet-valve 
4 is arranged in the pump-cylinder when a 
reciprocatory plunger 5, as that illustrated in 
the drawings, is employed, it being under 
stood, however, that the means for producing 
suction in the pump cylinder or barrel form 
no part of my invention and may be varied 
as desired. 
The advantage derived from the extension 
of the pump cylinder or barrel to a point con 
tiguous to the base or periphery of the cup 
resides in the fact that during the operation 
of the plunger or means for producing suc 
tion in the cylinder the mud or other sedi 
ment receives the direct action of the suction 
. . 
In order to prevent disturbing the sediment 6o 
It is the object of my invention to act di- 55 
and the water is neither un necessarily dis 
turbed nor removed through the pump-cyl 
inder. 
rectly upon the sediment and withdraw it 
from beneath the water, and hence I carry 
the inlet end of the pump-cylinder to such a 
point as to be immersed in the sediment. 
as the lower extremity of the pump-barrel 
enters the same, I have reduced the lower 
edge of the pump-barrel by the flaring of the 
lower extremity of its bore. This extension 
of the pump-barrel to a point near the plane 65 
of the lower periphery of the cup also neces 
sitates the provision of means for allowing 
the escape of the air contained within the cup 
after its lower edge is immersed to prevent 
the agitation of the sediment as the device is 7o 
depressed thereinto. The means which Ihave 
adopted for thus facilitating the introduction 
of the suction-cup consists of a vent 6, con 
trolled by an outwardly - opening valve 7. 
Obviously, this valved vent allows the escape 75 
of air contained in the cup Without permit 
ting the influx of water or other fluid during 
the Operation of the pump mechanism. 
Various changes in the form, proportion, 
and the minor details of construction may be 8o 
resorted to without departing from the spirit 
or sacrificing any of the advantages of this 
invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is- 
A cistern-cleaner having a pump mechan 
ism including a cylinder or barrel, a suction 
cup carried by and surrounding the lower ex 
tremity of the cylinder or barrel, the latterter 
minating contiguous to the plane of the base 9o 
or periphery of the cup, and a valved vent in 
the cup to allow the escape of contained air 
during the immersion of the lower edge of the 
cup in the sediment to avoid the agitation of 
the same, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
95 
85 
JOE, AIEXANDER MCCAWEY, 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. R. LACKEY, 
ALONZO NOEL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571378.txt	2 Sheets-Sheet 1 
 
J. L., LAMPE, Jr. 
ROTARY STEAM. ENGINE, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1896. 
No Model.) 
 
No. 571,378, 
 
  
 
No. 571,378, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1896, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
+                --------- 
w 
WITNESSES 
7. 
I WWENTOR 
ATTORAEK 
67 
eEERs co. Poirot THQ., washingtoN, o, e. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHANNES LOUIS LAMPE, JR., 
OF BLOOMINGTON, ILLINOIS. 
ROTARY STEAM - ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571,378, dated November 17, 1896. 
Application filed May 21, 1896, Serial No. 592,429, (No model.) 
55 
6o 
65 
70 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that IJOHANNESLOUISLAMPE, 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, and a resi 
dent of Bloomington, in the county of Mc 
Lean and State of Illinois, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Rotary 
Steam-Engines, of which the following is a 
specification, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part there 
of, in which similar numerals of reference in 
dicate corresponding parts. 
This invention relates to rotary steam-en 
gines, and the object thereof is to provide an 
improved device of this class in which there 
is no dead-center, and the invention is fully 
disclosed in the following specification, of 
which the accompanying drawings form a 
part, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved ro 
tary engine, part of the construction being 
shown in section; Fig. 2, a plan view thereof 
With parts of the construction in section, a 
part of the frame being broken away; and 
Fig. 3, a partial section on the line 33 of Fig.1. 
In the practice of my invention I provide a 
frame which consists of a suitable base 4, 
which is angular in form and to each side of 
which are secured upwardly and inwardly 
directed braces 5, which are arranged cen 
trally of Said frame, and at each end are simi 
lar upwardly and inwardly directed braces 6, 
and the side and end braces are connected 
by a top or cross plate 7, and it will be ob 
served on reference to Figs. 1 and 2 thatboth 
the side braces 5 and the end braces 6 are in 
clined upwardly and inwardly from the base 
of the frame, and passing centrally through 
the side braces 5 is a shaft 7, on which is 
mounted centrally thereof a wheel 8, on which 
is formed a band or rim 9, which is provided 
centrally of its outer surface With an annular 
outwardly-directed flange 10, and formed at 
regular intervals on each side of the annular 
band or rim 9 of the wheel 8 are radial plates 
11, and the annular flange 10, which is ar 
ranged centrally of the rim or band 9, is pro 
vided in direct radial line with the plates 11, 
with projecting Wings or flanges 12, one being 
arranged on each side of said flange and each 
of which is beveled on one side, as shown at 
13, the sides on which the bevel or incline is 
formed being that in the direction of which 
the wheels is turned in the operation of the 
engine, as hereinafter described. 
Mounted on or secured to the inner sides of 
the end braces 6 and centrally thereof are 
two steam-chests 14 and 15, and said steam 
chests are supported by brackets 16 and 17, 
which are formed integrally there with and 
secured to the end braces 6, and said steam 
chests are segmental or arc-shaped in form, 
the arc on which they are formed being the 
same as that of the circle formed by the rim 
or band 9 of the wheel 8, and said rim or band 
9 of the wheel 8 is polished on each of its 
Outer surfaces, and the construction is such 
that these polished surfaces pass between the 
steam-chests 14 and 15, which are open on 
their inner sides and also at the top and bot 
tom, and the plates 11 on each side of said 
rim or band 9 of the wheel 8 pass through 
said steam-chests as the wheel 8 revolves. 
The steam for operating the engine is sup 
plied through a pipe 18, which may be con 
nected with any desired source of steam sup 
ply and which communicates with a steam 
chest 19, through which passes a vertically 
movable shaft 20, on the lower end of which 
is a beveled gear-wheel 21, which operates in 
connection with a corresponding gear-wheel 
22, which is mounted on the shaft 7, and the 
upper end of the shaft 20 passes through the 
steam-chest 19, and mounted thereon is a 
sleeve 24, to the upper end of which are piv 
oted rods 25, the outer ends of which are piv 
otally connected with the levers 26, which 
are pivotally connected with the upper end 
of the shaft 20, and the lower ends of which 
are weighted, as shown at 27, and this con 
stitutes the governor by which the supply of 
steam which passes through the steam-chest 
19 is regulated, it being understood that the 
sleeve 24 is provided with a valve which con 
trols the passage of the steam through said 
steam-chests. This particular construction, 
however, may be varied as desired and any 
preferred form of governor may be employed, 
and the construction therefor is not shown in 
detail. 
I also provide a steam-pipe 28, which, as 
shown in the drawings, may extend entirely 
around the upper portion of the frame or en 
gine, and said pipe is provided at each end 
of the frame with supplemental pipes. 29, 
, 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
95 
OO . 
2 
571,878 
which communicate there with, and which 
also communicate with cross-pipes 30, which 
extend transversely of the brackets 16 and 
17, by which the steam-chests 14 and 15 are 
supported, and said pipes 30 communicate 
with steam-passages 3), arranged in each of 
said brackets, and which communicate With 
the separate steam-chests; and I also pro 
vide a sliding bar or rod 32, one of which is 
employed on each side, and each of which 
passes transversely through the bracketS 16 
and 17, and each of which is provided at each 
end with a passage 33, and said rods or bars 
are adapted to control the flow of steam 
through the passages 31. In Fig. 2 but One 
of these rods or bars 32 is shown and but one 
of the passages 31, but it will be understood 
that this construction is duplicated on each 
side of the wheel S, and said rods or bars are 
each provided centrally with inwardly-di 
rected pins 34, which are adapted to move in 
a groove 35, which is formed in the perimeter 
of the flange 10, and said groove is of the 
form shown in Fig. 2, being irregular or tor 
tuous in its course and being provided with 
two bends or curves between each set of the 
flanges or projections 12, said flanges or pro 
jections being arranged in pairs on Opposite 
sides of the annular flange 10, and it will also 
be observed that the plates 11 are also ar 
ranged in pairs On opposite sides of the rim 
or band 9 of the wheel 8. 
The steam-chests 14 and 15 are provided 
with sliding covers 36, which are adapted to 
be moved back and forth, so as to cover the 
opening at the upper end of said steam-chest, 
and each of the covers 36 is provided with a 
rod 37, which is eccentrically connected with 
a balance-wheel3S, with which is also concen 
trically connected on its opposite side a rod 
39, the inner-ends of which are connected with 
sliding plates 40, which are beveled on their 
inner ends, as shown at 41, and which are 
adapted to slide back and forth through the 
brackets 16 and 17, and the balance-wheels 
38 are mounted on rods 42, which are suitably 
supported in the frame; and the operation will 
be readily understood from the foregoing de 
scription. When taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawings and the following 
Statement thereof. 
The steam is admitted, as hereinbefore de 
scribed, through the pipe 18 and passes 
through the passages 31 in the brackets 16 
and 17 into the steam-chests 14 and 15, and 
as the wheel 8 revolves the plates 11 pass 
through said steam-chests, entering the same 
at the right of the frame at the upper and 
passing out at the lower sides thereof, and in 
this operation the sliding plates or covers 36 
of the steam-chests on one side are simulta 
neously operated, but said covers on the op 
posite sides of the motor are alternatively op 
erated, and the Steam passes into the steam 
chests and acts upon the plates 11 to revolve 
the wheel in the direction of the arrow (i. 
(Shown in Fig. 1.) 
The balance-wheels 38 are revolved so as 
to operate the plates or covers 36 of the steam 
chests by means of the flanges or projections 
12, which operate in connection with the slid 
ing plates 40, and it will be understood that 
one of the plates 11 is always in each of the 
steam-chests on the oppositesides of the wheel 
8, the arrangement of these plates being such 
that when one pair thereof enters the steam 
chest on each side another is passing through 
the opposite side or end thereof, and the 
groove 35 is such that the rod or bar 32 is 
caused to move in opposite directions twice 
while one pair of the plates 11 is passing 
through the steam-chests, and the steam-pas 
sages 31 are consequently opened and closed 
twice during said intervals. 
It will be apparent that the plates 11 may 
be arranged in a different manner or that 
they may be arranged alternately on opposite 
sides and not in pairs, and this is also true 
of the flanges or projections 12, and other 
changes in and modifications of the construc 
tion herein described may be made without 
departing from the spirit of my invention or 
sacrificing its advantages. 
An ordinary power-wheel may be mounted 
on the shaft 7 and the power transmitted to 
any desired point and used for any desired 
purpose. 
In a rotary engine constructed as herein 
described it is evident that there can be no 
dead-center, and my improved engine is also 
simple in construction; and, 
FIaving fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a rotary steam-engine, the combina 
tion with a suitable frame, of a shaft passing 
transversely therethrough, a wheel mounted 
on said shaft, and provided at its perimeter 
With a band or rim on the outer surface of 
which is formed a central annular flange, said 
band or rim being provided at regular inter 
vals in each side with plates which project 
therefrom, and said frame being provided 
With Steam-chests between which said rim or 
band paSSes, said Steam-chests being Open at 
their upper and lower sides, and said plates 
which are secured to the rim or band being 
adapted to pass therethrough, each of said 
steam-chests being also provided with means 
for admitting steam thereto, and with sliding 
covers, which are adapted to close the en 
trance to the steam-chests, as the plates on 
the rim or band pass therethrough, and de 
vices connected with said plates or covers and 
With the central annular flange on the wheel 
for operating the former, so as to open and 
cover the entrance to the steam - chests 
through which the plates on the rim or band 
paSS, Substantially as shown and described. 
2. In a rotary steam-engine, the combina 
tion. With a suitable frame, of a shaft passing 
transversely therethrough, a wheel mounted 
on said shaft and provided at its perimeter 
With a band or rim on the outer surface of 
IC 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
OC 
IO5 
IO 
I25 
13O 
 
571,378 
3 
O 
which is formed a central annular flange, said 
band or rim being provided at regular inter 
vals on each side with plates which project 
therefrom, and said frame being provided at 
each end with two steam-chests between which 
saidrim or band passes, said steam-chests be-, 
ing open at their upper and lower sides, and 
said plates which are secured to the rim or 
band being adapted to pass therethrough, 
each of said steam-chests being also provided 
with means for admitting steam thereto, and 
with sliding covers, which are adapted to close 
the entrance to the steam-chests, as the plates 
on the rim or band pass therethrough, and 
devices connected with said plates or covers, 
and with the central annular flange on the 
wheel for operating the former, so as to open 
and cover the entrance to the steam-chests 
through which the plates on the rim or band 
pass, and said frame being also provided with 
a governor which is in connection with the 
central shaft on which the wheel is mounted, 
by means of suitable gearing, and also with 
the steam-supply pipe, Substantially as shown 
and described. 
3. In a rotary steam-engine, the combina 
tion with a suitable frame, of a shaft passing 
transversely and centrally therethrough, a 
wheel mounted on said shaft and provided at 
its perimeter with a band or rim on the outer 
surface of which and centrally thereof, is 
25 
 
formed a central annular outwardly-directed 
flange, said band or rim being provided at 
regular intervals on its opposite sides with 
projecting plates, and said frame being pro 
vided at its opposite ends with two steam 
chests through which the opposite sides of the 
rim or band of the wheel pass, said steam 
chest being open at each end so as to admit of 
the passage of the plates, connected with or 
formed on the band or rim of the wheel 
therethrough, and said steam - chest being 
provided with steam-passages which commu 
nicate thereWith, said passages being pro 
vided with sliding cut-offs, and said steam 
chests being also provided at the ends thereof 
into which the plates on the rim or band pass, 
with sliding covers and devices connected 
with said sliding covers and said cut-offs, and 
with the central annular flange on the band 
or rim of the wheel, for operating said covers 
and said cut-offs, substantially as shown and 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 12th 
day of May, 1896. 
JOHANNES LOUIS LAMPE, JR. 
Witnesses: 
, 
FRANKLIN DU BOIS MARQUIS, 
JAMES OSCAR WILLSON. 
35 
40 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571478.txt	(No Model.) 
M. HUTIN & M. LEBLANC, 
ALTERNATING CURRENT MOTOR 
No. 571,478, 
Patented Now, 17, 1896. 
3vvuovtova, 
772azarice 7/zzzzzz, 
772 aazrzce Zea a p2c, 
Azzie elitoevo v. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAURICE HUTIN AND MAURICE LEBLANC, OF PARIS, FRANCE, ASSIGNORS 
TO THE SOCIETE ANONYME POUR LA TRANSMISSION DE LA FORCE PAR 
LELECTRICITE, OF SAME PLACE. 
ALTERNATING - CURRENT MOTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571,478, dated November 17, 1896. 
Application filed May 25, 1895, Serial No. 550,676, (No model.) Patented in Belgium January 9, 1891, No, 93,385, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, MAURICE TUTIN and 
MAURICE LEBLANC, citizens of the Republic 
of France, and residents of Paris, in the De 
5 partment of the Seine, in the Republic of 
France, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Alternating-Current 
Motors, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, and for which we have received Letters 
to Patent of Belgium, No. 93,385, dated Janu 
ary 9, 1891. 
Our invention has reference to improve 
ments in alternating-current apparatus of the 
kind which require for their operation two or 
T5 more alternating currents of the same period, 
but differing in phase from each other. 
The invention is more particularly adapted, 
although not restricted to, alternating-cur 
rent motors of the kind known as two-phase' 
2d or multiphase motors, and is an improve 
ment upon the invention set forth in our Let 
ters Patent No. 536,032, granted on March 
19, 1895. In the said Letters Patent We have 
shown the manner of obtaining from a sin 
25 gle alternating current two or more alternat 
ing currents differing in phase by the use of 
condensers of suitable capacity; and Our pres 
ent invention has for its object to obtain the 
same result by the use of secondary batteries 
3o or polarization-cells, whereby a considerable 
saving in the expense of the apparatus is se 
cured. 
The invention is illustrated in the accolm 
panying drawings, in Which 
35 - Figures 1, 2, and 3 are diagrams showing 
different modes of applying our invention to 
alternating-current motors. 
The invention is based upon the fact that 
if a secondary battery receives only a slight 
4o charge its electromotive force is practically 
proportionate to the quanity of electricity 
which it receives. Thisis only true when the 
quantity of current received by the second 
alry battery is quite small, that is to say, the 
45 simple proportionality between the electro 
motive force of the secondary battery and 
the current received is only strictly true dur 
ing an exceedingly short time after the be 
ginning of the charge. It is therefore prac 
tically true for all alternating currents of the 5o 
short periods universally used for the opera 
tion of alternating- current apparatus and 
especially of electric motors. We have found 
that, in consequence of this property of elec 
trolytic cells or polarization-batteries, if they 55 
are included in a circuit charged with alter 
nating currents and containing self-induction 
they tend to neutralize the electromotive force 
of Self-induction, and if the number of such 
cells in series is sufficiently large the electro- 6o 
motive force of self-induction is completely 
neutralized. In addition thereto such cells 
or batteries tend to advance the phase of the 
alternating current in the circuit. This be 
ing the case, it is clear that if in two circuits 65 
charged With the same alternating current 
secondary batteries are inserted which differ 
from each other in the number of cells in se 
lies the currents in the two circuits may be 
dephased with reference to each other to any lo 
desired degree. This principle may be util 
ized for dephasing tWO currents of the same 
period in two independent circuits or two or 
more currents in two or more branches of the 
same main line carrying monophase currents, 75 
and it is for the latter purpose mainly that 
our invention finds its most practical appli 
cation. 
Referring now particularly to Fig. 1, the 
field-magnet of the motor there shown con- 8o 
sists of a laminated ring-core 1 and two sets 
of coils 2 and 3, the coils of each set being 
connected in a continuous series and the ai. 
ternate coils of each set being wound oppo 
sitely, as indicated in the drawings by the 85 
manner in which their ends are connected 
with each other. Moreover, the coils of the 
two series altel'nate, that is to say, between 
any two successive coils of one series there 
is a coil of the other series. In the drawings go 
We have shown eight coils in each series; but 
any other even number of coils may be used. 
One terminal 4 of the series of coils 2 is 
connected With One terminal 5 of the series of 
coils 3 by a bridge-wire 6, from which one of 95 
the line conductors 7 extends. The second 
terminal 4' of the series of coils 2 is connected 
with the second terminal 5' of the series of 
 
2 
571,478 
7 O 
75 
coils 3 by a bridge-wire 6', from a point S of 
which extends the other line conductor,9. In 
this bridge-wire 6' are inserted the batteries 
10 11 of storage or polarization cells, One Oll 
each side of the point S, where the line con 
ductor 9 connects. These two secondary bat 
teries have different numbers of cells con 
nected in Series, and in this instance it is a S 
Sumed that the number of cells of the Sec 
ondary battery ll is greater than that of the 
Secondary battery 10. If now an alternating 
current is conveyed to the field-magnet coils 
by the line conductors 79, and if we conceive 
the current as entering at S, it will there di 
vide into two branches, one branch compris 
ing the secondary battery 10, the bridge-wire 
(3", the terminal 4", and the series of field-coil 
2, the current passing by the terminal 4 to 
the bridge-wire 6 and returning by the line 
conductor 7 to the distant generator. The 
other branch will be by the bridge-wire 6', 
secondary battery 11, terminal 5', and the Se 
ries of coils 3, from which the current emerges 
at the terminal 5, and then returns by the 
bridge-wire 6 and line conductor 7 to the dis 
tant generator, 
By the secondary batteries 1011 of unequal 
number of cells in series the currents in the 
two branches are dephased with reference 
to each other, their periods remaining un 
changed, as hereinbefore explained. In the 
present case, where We have shown two field 
branches, the difference of phase should be 
ninety degrees in Order to produce a rotary 
field, as is well understood by those skilled in 
the art. If anore than two sets of field-coils 
are used, the difference of phase required 
will be different, and in each case the nun 
ber of cells in series in the secondary battery 
must be properly chosen With reference to the 
desired difference of phase and with reference 
to the Self-induction, resistance, and static 
capacity of the branch. In this manner we 
produce a rotary field by alternating currents 
derived from a line carrying single-phase al 
ternating currents, and it is of course imma 
terial how many reversely-wound coils there 
are in each set of field-coils, and in fact it is 
immaterial what the general construction and 
shape of the motor may be. 
We prefer to use in our motor as many in 
dependent armature - Windings, each closed 
upon itself, as there are sets of field-coils, and 
this is indicated in Fig. 1 by the two regular 
polygons 12 13, which, by their relative po 
sition, indicate that the two armature-wind 
ings are shifted with reference to each other 
in such manner that when the currents in 
duced in one of the windings are at a mini 
imum they are at a maximum in the other 
circuit. In this manner continuously-rotat 
ing polar lines are generated by the two ar 
mature-circuits, rendering the action of the 
motor practically constant from moment to 
moment instead of variable from moment to 
moment, as is the case when only a single ar 
mature-circuit is used. 
It is not absolutely necessary to place a 
secondary battery in each of the branches the 
currents of which are to be dephased, since in 
many cases a single secondary battery is Slf 
ficient, especially in the case of two branches, 
to produce the required difference of phase. 
Fig. 2 represents one of these cases, in which 
the two sets of field-magnet coils 23 are rep 
resented as connected in Series, and a Second 
ary battery 14 is in shunt around one of these 
field-magnet coils and in Series With the other. 
In this case the armature-circuits 13 are Only 
roughly indicated. By properly choosing the 
number of cells of the secondary battery the 
currents in the two sets of field-magnet coils 
may be dephased with reference to each other 
by ninety degrees. 
It is also practicable and in some cases pref 
erable to place the two sets of field-coils in 
circuits which are inductively related to each 
other in Such mannel that One of the circuits 
is charged by the other through the interme 
diary of a converter, and in Such case a sec 
ondary battery Will be used only in the Sec 
ondary circuit. This is represented in dia 
gram ill Fig. 3, where 15 represents a con 
verter, the primary coil 16 of which is charged 
by the line 79, in which is also included the 
set of field-magnet coils 2, while the circuit 
of the Secondary coil 17 includes another set 
of field-magnet coils 3 and a secondary bat 
tery 1S. The armature-circuits closed upon 
themselves are indicated at 12 13. 
It is Well 
known that in a converter the secondary cur 
rentslag behind the primary currents by ones 
half a period or less; but in this case the 
presence of the Secondary battery in the sec 
Ondary circuit Will advance the normal phase 
of the Secondary currents by one quadrant, 
So that there will be in the two field-circuits 
a difference of phase of one quadrant, 
We have herein shown and described, by 
Way of example, three different modes of 
utilizing our invention, but it will be clear to 
those skilled in the art that these examples 
lmight be multiplied and that the invention 
is applicable to an almost unlimited variety 
Of altel'nating-Current notors and other trans 
lating devices. In fact, wherever there is a 
circuit possessing Self-induction, charged with 
alternating currents, a polarization ocell or a, 
Series of polarization-cells placed in the cil 
cuit will be useful for neutralizing the self 
induction in part Ojin whole, The Small cost 
of a polarization-battely and the ease with 
which its electromotive force of polarization 
is increased and diminished to any desired 
eXtent, by the Simple addition or subtraction 
of cells, is a feature of great superiority over 
Condemisers. 
Iaving now fully described our invention, 
We claim and desire to Secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. The COilbination, with an electric cir 
cuit possessing Self-induction, charged with 
alternating currents, of an electrolytic po 
lalization-battery having a sufficient number 
95 
ICC 
iOS 
O 
II5 
I25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5 5 
 
571,478 
3. 
O 
of cells in series to neutralize by polarization 
the electromotive force of the self-induction 
in the circuit, substantially as described. 
2. The combination, with an alternating 
current motor, and in series with a circuit or 
circuits of the same, of an electrolytic polari 
zation-battery adapted to yield an electromo 
tive force opposed to that of the self-induc 
tion of the said circuit or circuits, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The combination of a feeding-circuit car 
rying monophase alternating currents, and a 
field-magnet, the coils of which are in paral 
lel branches derived from the feeding-circuit; 
with a polarization battery or batteries for 
dephasing the currents in the branches with 
reference to each other, and thereby produc 
ing a rotary field, substantially as described. 
4. A rotary-field alternating-current motor 
2O with two sets of field-magnet coils supplied 
from a source of simple alternating currents, 
 
and an electrolytic polarization battery or 
batteries connected up with the said field 
magnet circuits, whereby the currents in the 
same are displaced in phase, substantially as 
described. 
5. In an alternating - current motor, the 
combination of two sets of field-coils, eachin 
a branch derived from a single-phase alter 
nating-current circuit; with electrolytic po 
larization cells or batteries for unequally 
shifting the phases of currents in the branches 
and thereby producing a rotary field, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, 
MAURICE HUTN. 
MAURICE TLEBLANC. 
35 
Witnesses: 
CLYDE SHROPSHIRE, 
PAUL, BOUR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571578.txt	(No Model.) 
5. Sheets-Sheet , 
G. H. ROBINSON & E. F. STECK. 
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM 
571,578, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1896, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2-1/24 
 
W 
f 
YYY 
y 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- - 
- 
- 
w 
w 
- 
--- 
M 
y 
at-scorts-re 
se 
W apes 
a 
* 
w 
A. 
ES 
s 
11 
R 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
La 
d 
Still 
 
N 
assauais 
s a St. 
A. 
%24. S. 
EG 
INVENTORS, 
Galoapga///a2A/M/SW 
aAWA 45/. 7. / S7 aca. 
 
(No Model.) 
G. H., ROBINSON & E. F. STECK, 
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 571,578, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1896. 
A 
 
7.2. 2. 
N 
NN N 
R 
WNESSES 
% x (7.2 4A 
r 
v 
(h. 73----.S., 
w 
NVENTORS, 
Gaoapca ///ra/M/SOA 
aAWA2 4v; 7 A.S. 7a car, 
Y 
k 
THEIRATORNEYS. 
... 
cars pereas co. Photo-LTHo. WASr. 
A. 
(No Model.) 
No. 571,578. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
G. H., ROBINSON & E. F. STECK 
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM 
Patented Now, 17, 1896, 
areer as A22. 
INVENTORS, 
Gazaea /7 aroa/ysaw 
a/2 Araws 7 
THEIRATTORNEYs. 
 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheets-sheet 4, 
G. H. ROBINSON & E. F. STECK. 
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM, 
No. 571,578, 
Patented Nov. 17, 1896, 
32 
&23 S-49 
s 
SNss 
O 
WITNESSES : 
2. ^z/4% 
- 
INVENTORS, 
GA2476a A. Aroa/VSOMV 
awd. A ap/vs 7 - A. S7 aloa, 
S/-? 
  
HER AT TORNEYS. 
the NORRs PETERs co, Photo-uTrio. washtisaron. c 
 
(No Model.) 
G. H. ROBINSON & E. F. STECK. 
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 571,578. 
 
Patented Now, 7, 1896. 
WITNESSES; 
%24. 
%, 0. 
- 
INVENTORS, 
Galoaca //, /a/viso/y 
awa AA/Vs 7 / 57zoa, 
BY 
t 
HER AT TORNEYS, 
The acRRs peters 
Co, PHOTo-Ho., WASHancton. ... c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE II. ROBINSON, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., AND ERNST F. STECK, OF 
CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNORS TO THE FIRE EXTINGUISHER MANU 
- FACTURING COMPANY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, AND NEW YORK, N. Y. 
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXT N G USHING SYSTEM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571,578, dated November 17, 1896. 
Application filed April 10, 1896, Serial No. 586,903, (No model.) 
To add, who, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that we, GEORGE II. ROBINSON, 
residing at New York, in the county and State 
of New York, and ERNST F. STECK, residing 
at Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
of Illinois, citizens of the United States, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Automatic Fire-Extinguishing Sys 
tems, of which the following is a specification. 
The object of the present invention is to 
produce a system of fire-extinguishing appa 
ratus which will meet the double requisite of 
quickness of initial application, together with 
endurance of discharge, whereby the violence 
of the initial application, which will be gen 
erally sufficient to suppress the conflagration, 
will be aided in case of its insufficiency by a 
practically unlimited assistance through and 
by virtue of a secondary supply of extinguish 
ing fluid. 
It is a well-known fact and is conceded 
among insurance men that a sufficiency of 
initial pressure upon the extinguishing fluid 
operating and discharging through sprinklers 
will, in most cases, secure the necessary re 
sult, and it is one of the objects of this pres 
ent invention to utilize this fact, and in con 
nection with it to arrange a further or second 
ary supply in case the initial supply is in 
sufficient to discharge its functions and secure 
the desired 'esult. 
To this end the invention consists, broadly, 
in providing a chemical fire - extinguisher 
which in the present case shall be known as 
the primary source of the fire-extinguish 
ing fluid, and which may be set in operation 
by the means hereinafter shown and described 
or by any other suitable means, and in unit 
ing there with a secondary supply, which may 
communicate with a supply-tank, the city 
main, or any other source, and which in the 
present case will be referred to as the sec 
ondary source of supply, the parts being so 
connected and constructed as that when, by 
automatic means or otherwise, the chemical 
apparatus is set in operation the chemical 
action will cause the discharge of the extin 
guishing fluid through the pipe system, and 
will be followed, as will be described, by the 
discharge of the secondary supply, or in the 
d 
35 
45 
so 
 
55 
failure of the discharge of the primary sup 
ply the secondary supply will operate imme 
diately and independently. We employ one 
and the same means for bringing both sup 
plies into action either successively, simulta 
neously, or independently. The object and 
the value of Such an apparatus are apparent. 
Not only will the propulsive effect of the 
fluids which reside in the chemical apparatus 
immediately attach and become operative, 
but the secondary supply will also be imme 
diately available and will automatically foll 
low the primary supply of fluid, and, failing 
the efficacy, as from some accidental cause, 
of the primary supply, the Secondary supply 
will instantly supplant, it and flow through 
the discharging-pipes, as will be explained. 
This statement, broadly speaking, represents 
the basis of the present invention, and in the 
specification, illustrated by the drawings here 
to attached, the means and method will be 
fully disclosed and explained for carrying the 
invention into effect, but no limitation is in 
tended to be placed upon the invention by 
reason of any specific description or drawing; 
and it is to be understood that the discovery 
consists in the idea of uniting these two, or 
dinarily speaking, independent and very dif 
ferent means of extinguishing fires into one 
system, whereby the high-pressure chemical 
supply will discharge first and will be followed 
by the secondary, and in the case of accident 
to the primary source, of bringing immediately 
into action, not as a Supplement, but as a sub 
stitute, the secondary supply. 
The particular apparatus to be employed 
may be varied from time to time as new exi 
gencies present themselves, and one advan 
tage of the invention consists in its adapt 
ability to alteration without departing from 
the spirit of the invention. For instance, and 
in a general Way, fire-extinguishing appara 
tuses of different kinds may be set in opera 
tion either by manual or by automatic means, 
and the method and apparatus and system 
forming the subject of this application may 
with equal advantage be adapted to any of 
the different and various methods. It may 
be employed, as will be explained and as will 
be readily seen in connection with the draw 
w 
So 
95 
OO 
2 
571,578 
O 
25 
35 
ings hereinafter to be referred to, with any 
of the well-known means for manually Setting 
the fire-extinguishing apparatus into opera 
tion, as, for instance, by a mechanical pull 
through chain, rope, or lever, or by relief of 
fluid under pressure, taking place through a 
fusible sprinkler or otherwise. 
To simplify the description of the inven 
tion and to illustrate the same by a preferred 
method of carrying the invention into effect 
the last-named method has been employed as 
the most desirable means of accomplishing the 
results intended, and therein we have made 
several important improvements, which will 
duly appear. 
To these ends there is introduced into the 
pipe systems employed to distribute the ex 
tinguishing fluid throughout the area which 
they are intended to cover a certain amount 
of air or gas, which may be maintained at a 
pressure varying with the exigencies of the 
situation and depending upon the Water col 
umn, hereinafter referred to, that is to be 
controlled. This pressure may vary from five 
pounds upward. 
We will refer to it, herein 
as the compressible fluid, or the fluid under 
pressure. Upon the pipes for distributing 
the extinguishing fluid are arranged sprin 
klers of any desired shape, although in con 
nection with the present invention a certain 
improved form is preferred, such improve 
ment being shown, described, and claimed in 
applications filed by Ernst F. Steck, Serial 
No. 586,937, entitled Automatic sprinkler 
for fire-extinguishing systems, filed April 
10, 1896, and Serial No. 589,666, filed April 
30, 1896, entitled Automatic sprinkler for 
fire-extinguishing systems. These fusible 
sprinkling apparatuses are adapted to oper 
ate by melting and liberating the suppressed 
fluid at a temperature approximately 160 
Fahrenheit. The pressure of air in the dis 
tributing-pipe maintains the column of liquid 
under a movable float, which, when the said 
pressure is removed, as by burning out of the 
fuse and the opening of the vent or valve of 
the sprinkler, releases the liquid, permitting 
the float to drop, and this, through interme 
diate devices, throws the machine into ac 
tion. It is accomplished by any suitable 
mechanism, and the same mechanism can be 
employed to ring an alarm or blow a whistle, 
or both. 
The initial step in the active operation of 
the fire-extinguishing apparatus in the pres 
ent case consists in the starting and libera 
tion of the primary supply of extinguishing 
fluid, to wit, the fluids contained in the chem 
ical apparatus. One method of carrying this 
part of the invention into effect is shown in 
the accompanying drawings, but the inven 
tion is not limited to the use of this particul 
lar apparatus, but is intended to cover and 
refer to any chemical apparatus employing 
fluids for generating high-pressure gases, 
such as sulfuric acid and alkaline water. In 
connection. With this chemical apparatus and 
the setting in operation of the chemical ex 
tinguishing fluid-namely, the primary sup 
ply-the secondary supply may flow from the 
city water-main or from a tank under pres 
sure or upon a roof immediately, or as soon 
as the back pressure in the chemical appa 
ratus permits, into the chemical apparatus 
and therethrough into the same set of dis 
tributing-pipes. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification, Figure 
1 is a view in elevation of one embodiment of 
the system, certain parts of the apparatus be 
ing shown in section. Fig. 2 is an end eleva 
tion of the cylinder and its tripping and ro 
tating mechanism. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal 
sectional view, on an enlarged scale, of the 
cylinder. Fig. 4 is a cross-sectional view of 
the same, taken on the line 44 of Fig. 3. Fig. 
5 is a similar view showing the acid-contain 
ing jar inverted and the escape of the acid 
therefrom. Fig. 6 is a sectional detail view, 
and Fig. 7 illustrates a modified form of our 
system. 
In the drawings, 1 represents a cylinder or 
other suitable vessel for holding the alkaline 
water employed in chemical fire-extinguish 
ing apparatus. This cylinder is adapted to 
make a half-rotation and is mounted, there 
fore, upon antifriction-rollers 2, which sup 
port trunnions 3, said antifriction-rollers be 
ing held in supports 4 and working in grooves 
5 of the said trunnions. Through one of these 
This pipe is 
trunnions extends the pipe 6. 
fixedly secured upon the inside of the cylin 
der 1 and terminates at its upper end in a 
perforated cap 7, ordinarily located, as shown, 
above the surface of the contained fluid. This 
pipe 6 also extends outwardly through the 
hollow or tubular trunnion, the said tubular 
trunnion being practically a continuation of 
it, the trunnion, pipe, and the cylinder all be 
ing adapted to turn together and fixedly se 
cured to one another. 
The pipe 8 constitutes an extension of the 
pipe 6 and is formed separately from it. The 
pipe S is provided at 9 with an elbow and at 
10 with a horizontal extension, which exten 
sion enters the aforesaid tubular trunnion 3. 
This horizontal extension terminates at a 
point 11, being there slightly turned up in 
order to form a slight rim. 
Between the extensions 12 of the trunnion 
and the pipe 10 are placed packings or wash 
ers 13, and we secure the parts together by 
means of the lock-nut 14, screwed on the trun 
nion. These particular parts are shown in 
cross-section in detail view Fig. 6. The pipe 8 
connects with the pipe 15, as shown, by means 
of a gooseneck 15, the pipe 15 constituting 
what we term a standing pipe, ordinarily 
filled with water or other fire-extinguishing 
fluid. This pipe 15 dips into a tank 16, the 
latter being partially filled with the same fluid, 
as shown, and extending nearly to the bottom 
thereof. The said tank 16 is connected by 
means of the pipe 17 with the system of dis 
, 
o 
90 
95 
CO 
O 
II5 
I25 
45 
so 
55 
 
571,578 
3. 
5 
o 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
- 
tributing-pipes 18. The pipes 18 may extend 
in any direction and through any number of 
floors and be of any number, size, and shape. 
At 19 on said pipes are provided fusible sprin 
klers adapted to operate by melting the fuse 
upon the temperature of the room reaching 
approximately, say, 160 Fahrenheit. In the 
pipes between these fusible sprinklers and 
the tank 16 is placed atmospheric air or other 
gas or compressible fluid under five pounds 
pressure or thereabout or under a pressure 
desirable in the particular situation, which 
pressure serves to keep the contained liquid 
in the tank and in the standing pipe 15 back, 
as showia. 
Connected to the standing pipe 15 is a hori 
zontal pipe 20, terminating at its farther end 
in a vessel 21. The Waterin the standing pipe 
flows into this horizontal pipe 20 and into the 
vessel 21, to which it is connected. At the top 
of the vessel when the apparatus is in its nor 
mal condition is located float 22, maintained 
there by the water, which in turn is held to 
its position by the superimposed air. 
It is 
ordinarily held lander these circumstances at 
the top of the vessel, and it is so shown in the 
drawings. The float 22 is provided with a 
chain or cable 23, extending vertically up 
wardly from it and working in a sleeve or 
stand-pipe 24. This float is connected to a 
lever 25, pivoted at 26, said lever 25 being 
adapted to release the operating mechanism 
and to discharge various other functions, such 
as setting into operation the alarm-bell 25*. 
It is to be distinctly understood that the 
float 22 is maintained in its upper position by 
its own buoyancy, and sufficient space is left 
around it and between it and the inner Walls 
of the vessel 21 to effect an easy clearance. 
The operating mechanism consists of a 
weight 27, suspended by the chain 2S to an 
arm. 29 upon the lever 30, the latter being piv 
oted to and adapted to Swing on the pin 31. 
The lever 30 is also provided with a lug 32, 
over which a hook 33 of the lever 25 is ar 
ranged to catch. Adjusting screws and 
weights are shown at 34 and 35. The chain 
2S is provided with a branch chain 28, con 
nected to a whistle 2S, and also with a branch 
chain 36, which is attached to one end of a 
bell-crank lever 37, pivoted at 38. To the 
other end of this bell-crank ever is attached 
another chain 39, which serves to operate a 
tripping-lever (shown at 40.) This lever is 
ivoted at 41 and provided with a hook 42, 
which engages a pin 43 of the bottom of the 
cylinder 1. 
At 44 is provided a weight connected by a 
rope 45, Supported in pulley's 46, to the bot 
tom of the cylinder 1. When the catch-lever 
40 is withdrawn from the retaining-hook 43, 
the weight 44 serves to give the cylinder a 
half-rotation necessary in order to upset the 
containing apparatus. This apparatus con 
sists of a jar 47, supported in a frame 4S and 
suspended from the top of the cylinder 1. This 
jar contains the sulfuric acid, and the cylin 
der 1 contains the alkaline Water. The par 
ticular form of jar herein shown constitutes 
subject-matter for a separate application of 
Ernst F. Steck, entitled  Chemical fire-ex 
tinguisher, Serial No. 589,665, filed April 30, 
1896; but it may be stated that it has a liquid 
seal and a glass Sealing-cap 49 in addition to 
the lead stopper 50. 
If there is any tendency, as there always is 
more or less, for slight leakage of the acid 
jar, it will be taken up by the liquid seal and 
will be gradually absorbed by the alkaline 
water, to which it has access through the aper 
tures 51. By this means the disintegrating 
effect which such acid would have by creep 
ing over the edge or surface of the water and 
reaching the metallic sides of the containing 
cylinder 1 will be obviated and removed. 
The above specific description constitutes 
and covers what is termed herein the pri 
mary source of ?luid, which is, as stated, the 
result of the chemical apparatus. This part of 
the system operates in the following manner: 
When the fuse upon the sprinkler releases the 
contained air in the pipes, the water in the 
standing pipe 15 immediately descends as the 
pressure is released from the surface of the 
water in the tank 16. The water in the pipe 
15 descending causes the withdrawal of the 
Water in the pipe 20 and the consequent im 
mediate descent of the float 22. The descent 
of the float will, through the mediation of the 
described mechanism, release the weight 27, 
which, descending, turns the bell-crank lever 
37 and causes the tripping of the cylinder 
locking mechanism. The weight 44 imme 
diately comes into play upon the tripping of 
the lock, causing the cylinder 1, through the 
mediation of rope 45, to give a half-rotation. 
As the cylinder turns over and assumes the 
position indicated in Fig. 5 the lead stopper 
50 falls away and the contained acid escapes 
into the alkaline Water with the well-known 
result, creating the necessary high pressure 
in the cylinder 1 and causing an immediate 
and violent discharge of the chemically 
charged fluid through the conduit consisting 
of pipes 6, S, and 15, and thus on to the sys 
tem of distributing-pipes and through the 
liberating-sprinklers. This is the operation 
of the chemically-operating fluid supply re 
ferred to herein also as the primary or 
high-pressure fluid supply. 
We Will now proceed to describe the sec 
Ondary fluid Supply and its manner of con 
nection with the primary and its methods of 
operation, which may be, as before stated, 
either successive, concurrent, or independ 
ent. The farther end of the containing-cyl 
inder l is provided with a trunnion similar 
in construction to the one hereinbefore de 
scribed. The trunnions 3 are mounted upon 
antifriction-rollers 2, said antifriction-rollers 
being held in supports 4 and working in the 
grooves 5 of the said trunnions. Through 
this trunnion extends a pipe 52, elbow-shaped, 
as shown, and being provided at its lower end 
55 P. 
75 
So 
95 
Oc 
IO5 
I 5 
2 cy 
25 
13 
 
4. 
571,578 
O 
3O. 
35 
45 
with a common rubber valve 53, mounted 
upon a lever 54, pivoted at 55 to an arm 56. 
This lever has at its outer end a weight 57. 
When the apparatus is in the normal posi 
tion, as shown in Fig. I, the Weight lies near 
the bottom of the cylinder and effects the 
requisite closure of the valve and prevents 
inflow of the secondary supply of water into 
the primary supply under normal conditions. 
At 5S we show a stop-cock for shutting off the 
secondary Supply altogether or turning it on, 
as may be wished. At 59 is a check-valve 
preventing the backflow of the primary sup 
ply into the secondary supply when the former 
is in active operation. 
We will now proceed to describe the opera 
tion of the secondary supply in connection 
with the operation of the primary supply. 
When the action heretofore described has 
taken place in connection with the primary 
supply, it will be seen that upon the upset 
ting of the cylinder 1 by giving it the half-ro 
tation aforesaid and the generation of the 
high-pressure fluid the valve-controlling ap 
paratus between the primary and secondary 
supplies Will, by Operation of gravity, open 
the valve 53 between the secondary and pri 
mary supplies. The check-valve remains 
closed, however, so long as the back pressure 
of the primary supply preponderates over the 
pressure in the secondary supply. When, 
however, the chemical primary supply is par 
tially exhausted and a parity of pressures is 
established, the check-valve will, upon a slight 
succeeding preponderance of pressure in the 
secondary supply, lift the check-valve and 
cause a flow of fluid from the secondary sup 
ply through the connecting-pipe into the cyl 
inder 1, and therethrough and without ob 
struction of any kind into the latters normal 
exit and to the distributing-pipes and released 
sprinklers. 
It will be apparent from the above descrip 
tion that the supply of extinguishing fluid 
will, so far as its pressure is concerned, never 
fall below the pressure of the secondary sup 
ply, for as soon as a preponderance of pres 
sure is established in the secondary supply 
the latter will immediately become effective, 
and such pressure will thereafter be always 
constant; and also it will be seen that the 
fluid which remains in the primary source will 
be discharged into the distributing-pipes by 
the mechanical rush of the inflowing second 
ary supply and at a pressure equal to the pres 
sure of such secondary Supply, Which is Sup 
planting it and carrying it forward. 
It will be seen from the foregoing descrip 
tion that we have shown and described a 
primary source of fluid supply which is nec 
essarily of a high pressure, charged also with 
carbonic-acid gas, which under ordinary cir 
cumstances is sufficient to extinguish a fire, 
and in connection there With have arranged a 
secondary supply, which, in a Comparative 
sense, is a low-pressure supply, and which is 
adapted in case of insufficiency of the primary 
supply to operate successively, as described. 
Also the two supplies operate in a sense con 
jointly for the reason that before the primary 
supply is entirely exhausted and when he 
pressure in the secondary supply slightly pre 
: ponderates it will flow into the cylinder , 
and the two supplies will combine and flow 
through the distributing-pipes and through 
the released sprinklers, as aforesaid. Also 
when by reason of any accident the acid-con 
taining vessel fails to discharge it contents 
in the alkaline-water chamber the Secondary 
supply will, through the operation of the 
gravity-valve, flow immediately into the cyl 
inder 1 and therethrough mingled with the 
alkaline water into the common exit and 
through the distributing-pipes aforesaid. In 
this sense the secondary supply supplants the 
primary supply and is in a manner independ 
ent of it. 
When in the specification or claims we re 
fer to high pressures and low pressures or 
high-pressure supplies and low-pressure sulp 
plies, it is to be understood that the expres 
sions are merely relative and that it is not 
intended to convey the idea that the Sec 
ondary supply is really a low-pressure Sup 
ply, but simply a low pressure compared to 
the primary supply, the latter being, as is 
well known, extremely violent, especially in 
its initial application. It will also be seen that 
by the uniting of these two systems, what may 
be called the chemical and 'mechanical 
systems, a gradual and easy substitution is 
secured and in an entirely automatic manner. 
It will also be seen that whereas from the 
very nature of the case the primary supply, 
though of high pressure, is limited, the sec 
ondary supply, if it be connected to the city 
main, though of a lower pressure, is prac 
tically unlimited. It will also be seen from 
the description and drawings that the high 
pressure chemical supply automatically holds 
in check the low-pressure supply until it is 
ready, by reason of decrease in resisting 
power, to release it. It will also be seen that 
although we have shown and described our 
invention in connection with a particular 
automatic system for Setting it in opera 
tion, yet to one skilled in the art other means 
may be employed for producing like results 
either automatically or by manual operation. 
For instance, in the modified form of appa 
ratus shown in Fig. 7 the pipe 17 opens into 
a chamber 60, containing liquid, as shown, and 
provided with a valve 61, seating on the rim 
of the neck 62. The pipe 8 connects with the 
lower end of this neck. At 16 is a tank con 
taining liquid under pressure, the pipe 17 
connecting same with pipe 17. Pipe 20 con 
nects the vessel 21 with the tank 16 at a 
point near the bottom of the latter. When 
the fluid-pressure is released, the operating 
mechanism will Work as in the former case, 
the valve 61 will rise, and the extinguishing 
fluid will flow out. We therefore do not limit 
ourselves to the exact means and apparatus 
75. 
95 
Od 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
55 
 
571,578 
5 
75 
So 
90 
C. c. 
C. 
O 
I 25 
5 
O 
3O 
40 
shown and described, but desire to have it un 
derstood that our invention and the claims 
following the specification may cover any 
suitable apparatus for carrying our ideas into 
effect. 
It will be understood that the liquid col 
umn is forced backwardly by the compressed 
air or fluid between the liquid and the fusi 
ble sprinklers, and the liquid will hold the 
float 22 in its upper position. The liquid 
will thus form and constitute a counterbal 
ance for the compressed fluid-pressure in 
front of it and which resides in the distribu 
ting-pipes and between the liquid and the fu 
sible sprinklers. Thus it will be seen that 
the pressure in the distributing-pipes will 
cause the liquid in the tank 16 to maintain a 
constant upward pressure and hold the float 
in elevated position, and this pressure in the 
compressible fluid in the pipes may be so 
gaged or regulated as to raise the column in 
the pipe 15 to a point near the upper end of 
the gooseneck 15, so that any slight varia 
tion of the pressure in the piping system will 
not affect the position of the float 22, but will 
be taken by or counterbalanced by the pres 
sure of the column in the pipe 15, such pipe 
15 being a sufficient height to render it un 
necessary to gage the pressure to a nicety or 
to require inspection at short intervals. The 
gooseneck 15 provides for any overflow in a 
contrary direction. 
In order to prevent leakage of the liquid 
from the vessel 21, the upper side of the float 
is provided with a suitable gasket 22, which 
constitutes a valve, and leakage may be fur 
ther guarded against by providing the upper 
side of the vessel with a sleeve or stand-pipe 
24 of substantially equal height with the pipe 
15, so that even though the liquid should leak 
above the float 22 it would have to rise above 
the column in the pipe 15, and hence could 
not escape. With this construction it will 
be seen that the compressible fluid in the dis 
tributing-pipes 18 and in the connecting-pipe 
17 really controls the operation and releasing 
devices, while the liquid located between the 
releasing mechanism and the compressible 
fluid and which constitutes the immediate 
means of operation affords at the same time 
a counterbalance for the compressible fluid, 
as explained. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A fire-extinguishing system consisting 
of the combination of a series of fluid-distrib 
uting pipes normally free from liquid and 
containing a gas under low pressure, with a 
high-pressure primary fluid supply and a sec 
ondary fluid supply at lower pressure, means 
for throwing said primary Supply into action, 
means whereby the low-pressure supply is 
thrown into condition for action by the same 
act, and means whereby the excess of pres 
sure of the primary supply will restrain the 
flow from the secondary supply until the pri 
- 
mary supply is partially exhausted, Substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination of the dry distributing 
pipes, the chemical supply communicating 
there with, the secondary liquid supply in 
communication with the chemical supply and 
having a normally-closed valve for holding 
it in check, and a single operating means held 
in check by the air in the dry pipes, and con 
structed to simultaneously set in operation 
the chemical supply and open the said valve 
of the secondary supply, substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. A fire-extinguishing system consisting 
of the combination of a series of fluid-distrib 
uting pipes, with a primary chemically-oper 
atting fluid supply and a secondary fluid Sup 
ply constructed and arranged substantially 
as shown and described, the primary fluid 
supplying apparatus being an intermediate 
part in that system of consecutive channels 
which extends from the source of the second 
ary supply to the outlets of the fluid-distrib 
uting pipes, and means for setting the pri 
mary and secondary supply apparatus into 
action simultaneously, as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
4. A fire-extinguishing system consisting 
of the combination of a series of fluid-distrib 
uting pipes, with a primary chemically-oper 
atting fluid supply, a containing-cylinder, a 
Secondary fluid supply connected by a pipe 
to the primary supply, a valve on said pipe, 
and means for upsetting the cylinder of the 
primary apparatus and simultaneously open 
ing the valve. 
5. A fire-extinguishing system having in 
combination a partially-rotatable cylindler or 
receptacle for containing an extinguishing 
fluid and gas-producing substances held in 
separation, the piping system connected with 
said cylinder, a pipe or passage adapted to be 
connected with a head of fluid under pres 
sure and having communication with said 
cylinder, and a valve for closing communica 
tion between said cylinder and pipe, opened 
by the movement of said cylinder, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. A fire-extinguishing system having in 
combination a partially - rotatable cylinder 
for containing extinguishing fluid and gas 
producing chemicals held in separation, the 
pipe system connected there with, the second 
ary supply also communicating with said cyl 
inder and having a check-valve opening un 
der pressure from the secondary supply, and 
a second valve for closing communication be 
tween said cylinder and secondary supply lo 
cated at a point between the cylinder and 
check-valve and connected with and operated 
by said rotating cylinder, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. A fire-extinguishing system consisting 
of the combination of a series of fluid-distrib 
uting pipes, with a secondary fluid supply 
and a primary chemically-operating fluid Sup 
ply connected to the secondary supply and to 
45 
55 
 
571,578 
35 
45 
SO 
ing fluid, means for setting same in operation, 
the piping system, a gooseneck having one 
end connected with said source or sources and 
forming an overflow, a chamber into which 
the other end of said gooseneck dips and 
from the upper side of which the piping sys 
tem rises, a vessel communicating with said 
gOOSeneck and chamber and being located 
below the upper end of said gooseneck, and 
a float in said vessel connected with said oper 
atting means, substantially as set forth. 
11. A fire-extinguishing system having in 
combination a source or sources of extinguish 
ing fluid, a gooseneck connected with said 
Source: Or Sources at one end, a chamber into 
which the other end of the gooseneck dips, 
the piping system rising from said chamber, 
a vessel located below the upper end of said 
gooseneck and communicating there with, a 
float located in said vessel and having a con 
nection with said operating means, and a 
stand-pipe rising from said cylinder around 
said connection for catching leakage, Sub 
stantially asset forth. 
GEORGE. H. ROBINSON. 
ERNSTE. STECK. 
Witnesses to signature of George II. Rob 
inson: 
A. J. DUNHAM, 
WM. B. DONNELL. 
E. J. MITCHELL, 
O. T. DOOLITTLE, 
Witnesses to signature of Ernst F. Steck: 
the pipe system as shown, suitable valves be 
tween the primary and secondary supplies, 
and means for upsetting the chemical appa. 
ratus and means for opening said valves by 
the act of upsetting whereby the opening of 
Said valves will create a free channel from 
the secondary supply through the primary 
appalatus to the pipe system. 
S. A fire-extinguishing system consisting 
of the combination of a series of fluid-distrib 
ulting pipes provided with one or more fusible 
sprinklers, a source or sources of extinguish 
ing fluid or fluids, means for causing the dis 
charge of said extinguishing fluids, a float 
Connected to such means, a seat for said float 
and a liquid-retaining column extending 
above Said Seat and held to the seat by a com 
pressible fluid situate between the liquid and 
the fusible sprinklers. 
9. A fire-extinguishing system having in 
combination a source or sources of extinguish 
ing fluid, means for Setting same in operation, 
the pipe System connected with said source 
or sources charged with a liquid counterbal 
ance whereby the operative means are con 
trolled, fluid-pressure in said pipes acting as 
a counterbalance for said liquid counterbal 
ance, and a liquid-feeding column, whereby 
the elevation of the liquid counterbalance re 
mains constant under certain changes of con 
dition, substantially as shown and described. 
10. A fire-extinguishing system having in 
combination a source or sources of extinguish 
15 
2O. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571678.txt	(No Model.) 
A. A. MYERS, 
TANNING MACHINERY, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 571,678. 
Patented Nov, 17 1896. 
z) 
N 
 
5 
E 
  
--- 
 164U "ZN) - 
Er 
===ZA =sg O 
= || 
v 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
4 
 
 
|2 
EE M 
zzzzzzzzzZZZZZZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz2 a 
2 
casco 
6) 
i 
7-72------ 
gy 
g 
= 
vuotov 
4---4. te 
Yzzzze?2624 
ettozcd 
 *ORRIS PETERS. P-Oro.L., yasisto.N.B. : 
 
(No Model.) 
A. A. MYERS. 
TANNING MACHINERY, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 571,678. 
Patented Nov, l'7, 1896, 
 
EPIDEZ 
i 
&ttotic</ 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
A BRAILAM. A. MYERS, OF LANCASTER, PENINSYILVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
MARGARET G. MYE RS, OF SAME PLACE. 
TANNING MACHINERY 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571,678, dated November 17, 1896. 
Application filed December 16, 1895, Serial No. 572,337, (No model.) 
tt conce: 
are turned upward and secured to the depend 
To t vo, i 
| ing hangers F. 
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM A. MYERs, 
Grepresents the hides in the vat supported 
of Lancaster, in the county of Lancaster and 
upon the cross-poles II. 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
Depending from the ceiling of the vat-room 
| 
new and useful Improvements in Tanning 
are hangers II, and movable longitudinally 
Machinery; and I do hereby declare the fol 
therethrough is the rod or bar I, connected 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
at one end by pitman Jto crank of a power 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
shaft. 
Bell - crank Ievers IX are fulcrunned 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains 
at their angles between depending double 
to make and use it, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, which form part 
I brackets L, and the upper arm of each lever 
is secured to the upper end of rod. E, while 
of this specification. 
I the lower end of each lever is connected by 
This invention has reference to tanning 
machinery, and relates more especially to a 
| means of link Mto the slidable bar I. The 
end of the linkis formed with an openingand 
mechanism of improved form for actuating 
tan-vatagitators. 
the bar carries a studi over which the said 
linkis slipped and theresecured by a locking 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
pin M', asshown. As the bell-cranks foractu 
mechanism of improved and simple forn for 
ating the agitators of each vat have opposite 
actuating the agitators of a series of vats or 
position, it wil be seen that one agitator will 
for actuating one or more of the seriesto the 
-be raised while the other is being lowered, 
exclusion of the others. 
and vice versa. 
The invention consists in the novel features 
| 
As many vats may be arranged in line as 
of construction hereinafter fully described 
required, and any number of parallel lines 
and claimed, and illustrated by the accompa 
may be actuated by bars extended from the 
nying drawings, in which 
power-shaft. Byarranging the mechanism 
Figurelis a perspective view, shown partly 
as here shown it will beseen that some of the 
in section, of my improved mechanism. Fig. 
vats in the line may be operated while the 
2 is an elevation of the same, showing the 
actuating-rods detached from the agitators. 
mechanism for the othervats is disconnected 
for the purpose of handlingorotherwise treat 
Fig. 3 is an inverted plan view of a portion 
ing the hides. 
of the mechanism. Fig. 4 illustrates in ele 
An eccentric N, Fig. 7, may be used on the 
vation the connection between the recipro 
i power-shaft instead of the mechanism shown 
cating bar and the operating-levers. Fig. 5 
in dotted lines, Fig. 1, the bar I and link J 
is a detail view of the hinged joint in the op 
being actuated thereby through the medium 
erating-rod. Fig. 6 is a face view of one of 
of strap O. 
the hangers. Fig. 7 illustrates an eccentric 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
which may be used on the power-shaft for 
| what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
driving bar I. 
Any desired number of vats Amay be ar 
Patenti, is 
ranged in line, each vathaving the oppositely 
power-bar, the depending brackets, the bell 
hinged agitators Bat its bottom, the free ends 
crank le vers fulcrum ed at their angles to 
of the agitators being connected to the verti 
the brackets in a plane above the plane of 
cal rods C, which in turnare connected by 
the reciprocating bar, the links pivotally con 
hinges D to the depending rods E. Motion 
necting the lower arms of the levers with 
is imparted through rods E, and the hinges 
the said bar, the agitator mechanism, and the 
Dhave their pivotalpins E'headed at one end 
depending rods from the upper arms of the 
and plain at the other, as shown in Fig. 5, so 
bell - crank levers which have detachably 
that the said pins may be withdrawn and the 
hinged connections with the said agitator 
rods Cand Edisconnected when the agitators 
are not to be operated. In such case rods E mechanism, and the devices for supporting Ioo 
1. The combination of the reciprocating 9o 
65 
75 
95 
25 
3 5 
45 
 
2 
571,678 
2. The combination of a reciprocating tially as shown and described. 
5 levers fulcrumedattheir angles between said in presence of two witnesses. 
the said rods when not in use, substantially tator mechanism, and the device for support 
as shown and described. 
sing the saidrods when not in use, substan 
power-bar, dependingbrackets, the bell-crank 
In testimonywhereof I affix my signature 
brackets, the connections between the lovver 
arms of the levers and the said bar, the de- 
pendingrodspivotally connected to the upper 
arms of the bell-cranklevers which have de- 
1 o tachable hinged connections with the saidagi- . 
ABRAEIAM A. MYERS. 
VVitnesses: 
D. M. ROTHENBERGER, 
C. G. BASSLER. 
 
| 
i 
| 
| 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571778.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 571,778. 
A., F. MADDEN, 
CIGARETTE ROLLER, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1896. 
 
 
  
 
Fiz. 6. 
7Yitzesses, 
ad 
Invertor 
J22bert A. J)7&acier 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
AIBERT F. MADDEN, OF NEWARK, NEW J ERSEY. 
CGARETTE ROE.R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571,778, dated November 24, 1896. 
Application fled September 17, 1894, Serial No. 523,241 (No model.) 
5 
O 
3. 5 
5 5 
to call tufa on it. inually concevil. 
Be it known that I, ALBERT F. MADDEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
ark, in the county of Essex and State of New 
Jersey, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Cigarette-Roller, of which the following 
is a description, referring to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication. 
The purpose of my invention is the pro 
duction of a pocket cigarette -roller which 
may be extremely simple, sure and satisfac 
tory in its operation, cheap of manufacture, 
and which may take up little and indeed 
practically no space when used as an attach 
ment in conjunction with a book or block of 
cigarette-wrappers. 
To these and certain other elds, which will 
hereinafter more fully appear, my invention 
is embodied in one of its most preferred 
forms in a roller and its several features and 
parts, designed, colubined, and used in a man 
ner similar to that herein described, illus 
trated, and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure I is a perspective 
view of the roller as applied to a book of cig 
arette-Wi'apper pape1's. Figs. 2 and 3 are 
face and end views of the book and the roller 
in their closed position. Fig. 4 is a perspec 
tive view showing my roller in the process of 
making a cigarette. Fig. 5 shows ill plan the 
position of roller and cigarette when the roll 
ing is complete and the cigarette ready to be 
withdrawn from it, and Fig. 6 is the blank or 
unfolded sheet of metal that forms my roller. 
Throughout the drawings like letters of 
reference indicate like parts. 
The drawings so clearly show the form and 
action of my invention that but little need be 
said to fully explain it to those familiar with 
the making of cigarettes. 
A sheet of thin spring-brass, preferably 
about one one-thousandth of an inch in thick 
ness and of the form shown in Fig. 6, is taken. 
Accordingly I will describe the roller as made 
from sheet-brass, Without, however, meaning 
to limit myself to brass, as aluminium, cel 
luloid, or other springy materials may be em 
ployed in the same manner. It is folded upon 
the three lines C. to shown in the drawings and 
the portion B formed into the rolled or curled 
form shown in Fig. 1. The turned-over edge 
C is preferably reinforced by a piece of flat 
steel, giving a stiff strong edge to the roller. 
Enough space is left between this turned 
back edge C and the portion 3 to insert the 
edge of a cigarette-paper. The fold C. and 
the flap or portion A extend from the edge of 
the book-cover ID beneath it and form the 
means by which the roller is held in place 
upon the book. 
Fig. I shows the manner of application to 
the book, and Figs. 2 and 3 the flat position 
of the roller when confined by the rubber 
strap E. 
The operation of making a cigarette is as 
follows: One of the wrapper-papers P is 
placed upon the portion B, held flat, as in 
Fig. 2, the rubber strap being of course re 
moved. The paper is pushed back so that its 
edge passes beneath the stiff turned-back po'- 
tion C and insures the proper adjustment of 
the paper. One end of the Wrapper-paper 
should project over the end of the book, so 
that it may be grasped with ease, as in Fig. 
5, when the cigarette is finished. The por 
tion B is then allowed to curl partly up, thus 
forming a trough containing the paper. Into 
this the needed amount of tobacco is placed 
and the roller confined tightly about it, as in 
Fig. 4. A few rolling movements under pres 
sure of the fingers readily tightens the roll of 
tobacco and paper, the latter sliding easily 
over the highly-polished surface of the brass 
as the roll diminishes in size. Finally the 
cigarette is rolled up, the edge of the paper 
moistened with the tongue, and the cigarette 
drawn out from the roller, as in Fig. 5. In 
drawing out also the smooth metallic surface 
and edge C greatly contribute to the ease of 
manipulation. 
The whole process of filling, l'olling, stick 
ing, and removing takes but a fraction of a 
minute, and, if desired, the moistening may 
be omitted or accomplished after the with 
drawal of the cigarette. 
I have now described one embodiment of 
my invention and its mode of operation... I 
have purposely onnitted the enumeration of 
some minor details and modifications which 
depend upon mere choice or skill in manu 
facture, because to set these forth at length 
95 
OO 
 
2 
571,778 
would obscure rather than make clear the 
more essential features as set forth below in 
the claims; but 
I claim, and desire to secure by these Let 
tel's Patent, together with all such modifica 
tions, additions, and improvements as may 
be made by mechanical skill alone, and with 
only the limitations as expressed or by law 
implied in view of the state of the related arts, 
the following: 
1. A cigarette-roller, consisting of a stiff 
but thin and flexible sheet of highly-polished 
metal B having a turned-over and reinforced 
edge C, and of the curled or curved form de 
scribed, substantially as set forth. 
2. A cigarette-roller of thin flexible springy 
material having smooth or polished surfaces 
on both sides, whereby the edge thereof may 
be rolled into the cigarette with the wrapper 
and thereafter released substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a cigarette-roller, the culled metallic 
portion B in combination with the turned 
back edge C leaving a space between B and 
Cfor the insertion of the cigarette-paper, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. As a roller attachment, the metallic plate 
formed with the flat portion A, curled por 
tion B, and turned-back edge C, substantially 
as set forth. 
5. In a rollel' attachment, the curled me 
tallic plate B and flat portion A formed to fit 
- 
IO 
3O 
the cover of a cigarette-paper book or holder, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. As a roller attachment for a cigarette 
paper book or block, a curled metallic plate 
B and means for holding the same in position 
upon the said book or block, substantially as 
set forth. 
7. As a roller attachment for a cigarette 
paper book or block, a plate forming a retain 
ing portion or flap A, a cigarette-rolling po)- 
tion B, and an edge C, the said edge having 
space beneath for the edge of a cigarette 
Wrapper paper, Substantially as set forth. 
S. As a roller attachment for a cigarette 
paper book or block, a plate forming a retain 
ing portion or flap A, a cigarette-rolling pol'- 
tion B, and a stiff edge C, substantially as 
set forth. 
9. As a roller attachment for a cigarette 
paperbook or block, a plate forming a retain 
ing portion or flap A, a cigarette-rolling por 
tion B, and a fold C conforming to the edge 
of the cover or similar part of the said book 
or block, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 14th day of September, A. D., 
S9. 
ALBER 
MADDEN. 
- 
F. 
3. 5 
s C 
5 5 
Witnesses: 
- 
GEORGE H. SONNEBORN, 
FREDERICK H. DAVIS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571878.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 571,878, 
L. W. HEMP, 
STOWE, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1896, 
es 
-- 
of 22 
as/ 
22 
se--- 
seriessesset 
-22 
-4 - 
- 
essesse 
4-li-44: 
es 
t H 
I | 
=sld ill 
a 
a. 
sa 
26 
 
 
oras PETERS Co. PHorc-lirho. Washingto.o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS W. HEMP, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
STO VE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571,878, dated November 24, 1896. 
Application filed June 22, 1896, Serial No, 596,476, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all tufton it inctly concern. 
Beit known that I, LEWIS W. HEMP, of the 
city of St. Louis, State of Missouri, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Stoves, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part hereof. 
My invention relates to stoves; and it con 
sists in the novel construction, combination, 
and arrangement of parts hereinafter shown, 
described, and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
stove, partly in section. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
sectional view transversely through the top 
of the stove and approximately on the indi 
cated line 22. Fig. 3 is a front elevation of 
the hot-blast damper and spark-arrester of 
which I make use. Fig. 4 is a rear elevation 
of the parts shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a front 
elevation of a casting of which I make use. 
Fig. 6 is a vertical sectional view through one 
of the stove-legs, illustrating the means of 
supporting the foot-rest. 
In the construction of my improved stove 
the sheet-metal body 10 is attached to the 
sheet-metal bottom 11 in the usual manner, 
and loops 12 are attached to the bottom I1 
and form seats for the upper ends of the legs 
13. The lining 14 is inserted inside of the 
body 10 and is somewhat smaller than said 
body 10. The upper edge 15 of the lining 14 
is flared outwardly to fit tightly against the 
inner surface of the body 10, and is designed 
to engage said body 10 a slight distance be 
low the upper edge thereof. 
The sheet-metal top 16 is large enough to 
cover the opening in the upper end of the 
body 10, and a flange 17 projects downwardly 
from the edge of said top and is designed to 
fit closely within the upper end of the body 
10. The lower edge 18 of the flange 17 is 
turned inwardly and designed to fit closely 
within the upper edge 15 of the lining 14. 
In the front part of the top 16 is an open 
ing 19, in which is inserted the thimble 20, 
and said thimble is designed to receive the 
flange 21 projecting downwardly from the 
cover 22. 
In the rear part of the top 16 is inserted the 
thimble 23, designed to receive the lower end 
of the stovepipe. A piece of strap-iron 24 is 
placed transversely under the top 16, and is 
attached thereto by means of the rivet 25. 
The ends 26 of the strap 24 are turned down 
wardly inside of the flange 17, and stove 
bolts 27 are inserted through the upper edge 
of the body 10, then through the flange 17, 
and then through the downwardly-turned 
ends 20 of the strap 24 for the purpose of 
holding the top securely in position. 
In the front side of the body 10 and near 
the lower end thereof is the draft-opening 
through the lining 14 and the body 10, and 
the rear end of the thin ble 2S is attached to 
the body 10 around said opening. A cast 
iron thimble 29 is inserted in said draft-open 
ing from the inside of the Stove, and the 
flange 30 engages the edge of the lining 14 
around said opening and presses it against 
the inner surface of the body 10. Stove-bolts 
31 are inserted through the body 10, then 
through the lining 14, and then through the 
ear's 32 projecting from said flange 30, and 
hold said thimble 29 firmly in position within 
the draft-opening. 
The hot-blast damper and spark-arrester 33 
is designed to close the front end of the thim 
ble 28. In the construction of said hot-blast 
damper and spark-arrester I employ the two 
disks 34 and 35, the edges 36 and 37 of which 
are turned toward each other as required to 
form the space 38 between said disks. The 
thimble 39 is designed to fit closely within 
the front end of the thimble 28, and upon its 
outer end is a flange 40, designed to fit against 
the inner surface of the edge 37 of the disk 
35, and the extreme outer edge 41 of the disk 
34 is turned over the edge 37 and over the 
edge of the flange 40 and downwardly behind 
said flange 40, as required, to hold the disks 
34 and 35 and the thimble 39 securely together. 
Below the center of the disk 35 is an opening 
42 in said disk, and above the center of the 
disk 34 is an opening 43 in said disk 34. A 
disk 44 is designed to operate within the space 
3S between the disks 34 and 35 and has an 
opening 45 above its center and corresponds 
to the opening 43. A stove bolt or rivet46 is 
fixed in the center of the disk 34, and the disk 
44 is loosely mounted upon the inner end 
thereof. 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
45 
 
3 
571,878 
O 
2 O 
30 
O 
45 
5o 
55 
. 
. . 
The openings in the disks. 34, 35, and 44 
are circular on one edge and straight on the 
opposite edge, but they are somewhat less 
than semicircular. 
A handle 47 is attached to the disk 44 near 
one corner of the opening 45, and said handle 
projects outwardly through the opening 43 
and is designed to be manually engaged for 
the purpose of operating the disk 44, as re 
quired, to bring an imperforate part of said 
disk opposite the opening 43, thus shutting 
off the circulation of the air through said 
opening and into the stove. . . 
A handle 48 is attached to the Outer surface. 
of the disk 34 and directly below the opening 
43 and is designed to be manually engaged 
when it is desired to remove the thimble 39 
from the thimble 2S or replace said thimble. 
Upon each side of the stove is a foot-rest 
49, supported by the posts 50, Said posts are 
attached at their upper ends to the under side 
of the foot-rest 49 by means of the bolts 51. 
In the shoulders 52 of the stove-legs are ap 
ertures. 53, and upon the lower ends of the 
posts 50 are hooks54, designed to be inserted 
in said apertures 53. Upon the insides of the 
legs and above the openings 53 are strength 
ening-lugs 55, designed to be engaged by the 
points of the hooks 54, and projecting down 
wardly from the posts 50 are lugs 56, designed 
to engage against the outer surface of the 
shoulders 52 and below the apertures 53. 
In the practical operation of my improved 
stove the fuel is inserted by removing the 
cover 22. The draft is regulated by manipu 
lating the handle 47 and opening and closing 
the opening 43. I wish to call especial atten 
tion to the construction of the hot-blast 
damper and spark-arrester. 
It will be noticed that the openings 42 and 
43 are considerably out of a linement with 
each other and that the disk 35 is imperforate 
behind the opening 43. As the draft of air 
passes through the opening 43 it will strike 
the outer surface of the disk 35 and be heated 
to some extent before passing into the open 
ing 42 and into the stove. Sparks from the 
fire within the stove in flying outwardly 
through the draft-opening surrounded by the 
thimble 29 will strike against the disk 35 
above the opening 43, or if they pass through 
the opening 42 they will strike the disk 44, 
but in no event will they pass outwardly 
through the opening 43. 
Another point to which I call especial at 
tention is the construction by which the lin 
ing 14 may be removed and replaced at will. 
By removing the bolts 27 the top 16 and the 
flange 17 may readily be removed from the 
stove. Then by removing the bolts 31 the 
thimble 29 may readily be removed from the 
draft-opening, and then the lining 14 is free 
to be removed from the stove and a new lin 
ing may be substituted. 
Another point of special importance is the 
manner of supporting the foot-rest 49 by in 
. 
. 
: 
. 
serting the posts 50 into the openings 53 in 
the legs 13, as hereinbefore described. 
Astove of my improved construction pos 
sesses many points of superiority over the 
stoves heretofore in use. 
. 
. 
I claim- 
1. In a stove, a sheet-metal body 10 in a ver 
tical position, the sheet-metal bottom 11 at 
tached to said body 10, the lining 14 remov 
ably inserted inside of the body 10, said lin 
ing having the outwardly-flared upper edge 
15 fitting tightly within and a slight distance 
below the edge of said body 10, the sheet 
metal top 16 covering the upper end of said 
body10, the flange 17 projecting downwardly 
from the edge of said top and fitting closely 
within the upper end of the body 10, the lower 
edge 18 of said flange being turned inwardly 
and fitting closely within the upper edge 15 
of the lining 14, the strap of iron 24 extend 
ing transversely under the top 16 and lat 
tached thereto by means of the rivet 25 and 
having its ends 20 turned downwardly inside 
of the flange 17, and the stove-bolts inserted 
through the upper edge of the body 10, then 
through the flange 17, and then through the 
ends 26 for the purpose of holding the parts 
securelyin position, substantially as specified. 
2. In a stove, a hot-blast damper and spark 
arrester, consisting of the disk 34 having the 
opening 43 above its center, the disk 35 hay 
ing the opening 42 below its center, the edges 
36 and 37 of said disks being turned toward 
each other as required to form a space be 
tween said disks, the thimble 39, the flange 
40 projecting outwardly from the outer end 
of said thimble and engaging against the in 
ner surface of the edge 37 of the disk 35, the 
outer edge 41 of the disk 44 being turned 
over the edge 37 and over the edge of the 
flange 40 and downwardly behind said flange 
40 as required to hold the disks 34 and 35 
and the thimble 39 securely together, and the 
disk 44, having the opening 45 above its cen 
ter, pivotally mounted between the disks 3-4 
and 35, substantially as specified. 
3. In a stove, the bottom 11, the loops 12 at 
tached to said bottom, the legs 13 inserted in 
said loops, said legs having the apertures 53. 
the foot-rest 49, the posts 50 attached to said 
foot-rest by means of the bolts 51, the hooks 
54 upon the lower ends of said posts and re 
movably inserted in said apertures 53, the 
Strengthening-lugs 55 upon said legs 13 in 
position to be engaged by Said hooks, and 
the lugs 56 extending downwardly from said 
posts 50 and engaging the outer surface of the 
legs 13 below the apertures 53, substantially 
as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
75 
go 
95. 
OO 
IO 
II5 
IEWIS W. HEMP. 
Witnesses: 
S. G. WELLS, 
MAUD GRIFFIN. 
- a 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US571978.txt	(No Model.) 
F. MYERS 
SPROCKET CHAIN, 
No. 57,978. 
Patented Nov. 24, 1896. 
 
WTNE55E5: 
y R5; r 
2% 7.3% 
INVENTOR 
7-O------- 
74-3-24 
 
the Norris PETERS Co. PHOTO-FHo. Washington, c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK MYERS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SPROCKET. CHAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 571,978, dated November 24, 1896. 
Application filed June 15, 1896. Serial No. 595,539. (No model.) Patented in Canada June 23, 1896, No, 52,729, 
55 
7 o 
75 
So 
85 
d 
C 
To all twhom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICKMYERS, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
5 ments in Sprocket-Chains, (for which I have 
received Letters Patentin Canada, No. 52,729, 
dated June 23, 1896;) and I do hereby declare 
that the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same. 
This invention has relation to sprocket 
chains of the class in which the alternate 
links are similar and are connected by coup 
ling-blocks, the links and the blocks being 
detachable one from the other. 
The object of the invention is the provision 
of a strong and durable chain of the charac 
ter described, the links of which can be read- . 
ily coupled and uncoupled without the use 
of tools. 
To these ends the invention consists in the 
improvements which I will now proceed to 
describe and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a perspective view of a piece of sprocket 
chain embodying my invention. Fig. 2 rep 
resents a side view showing one of the coup 
ling-links turned to position to permit the 
removal of the stud connecting it with the 
accompanying link. Fig. 3 represents a sec 
tion on line 33 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 represents 
one of the studs. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in all the figures. 
My improved sprocket-chain is composed 
of links C, and coupling-blocks b. Each link 
Cl is composed of two side straps ct a', which 
are located side by side and parallel with each 
other, and cross-bars C. C., connecting the 
outer edges of said straps, the inner edges of 
the straps being disconnected, so that the 
straps are separated by an opening which is 
unobstructed at the inner edges of the straps 
and is obstructed only by the cross-bars (tC, 
said opening receiving the end portions of 
the coupling-blocks, hereinafter described, 
and the teeth of the sprocket-wheel, which 
enter the spaces between the ends of the 
coupling-blocks, the cross-bars a a being 
preferably separated sufficiently to permit 
the sprocket-teeth to project between them. 
Each side strap a' is provided with a longi 
tudinal slot a, which has an enlargement a 
at its central portion. 
The coupling-blocks b are formed at their 
end portions to enter the spaces between the 
side straps and are provided with outwardly 
projecting transverse pintles b'b' at their end 
portions, which pintles are formed to closely 
fit the end portions of the slots a and are 
provided with heads or flanges b of greater 
diameter than the width of the end portions 
of the slots C, said heads bearing against the 
outer sides of the side straps a' and prevent 
ing said straps from spreading. The pintles 
b' are formed upon studs b, which are re 
movably inserted in sockets bib' in the coup 
ling-blocks b. 
The diameter of the enlarged portions of 
the slots in the link-strapsis somewhat greater 
than that of the studs band heads b. Conse 
quently by adjusting a block and the accom 
panying pintle-stud so that the stud will co 
incide with the enlarged portions of the slots 
in the link, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, the 
stud may be moved endwise into or out of the 
slots a and socketsb". It will be seen, there 
fore, that the parts of the chain can be readily 
assembled and as readily separated, and that 
when the said parts are in their operative re 
lation to each other they cannot become dis 
connected. 
I prefer to make the coupling-blocks of a 
plurality of separate plates placed side by 
side, as indicated in the drawings, the plates 
being firmly secured together by any suitable 
healS. 
It will be seen that the described construc 
tion of the links enables them to be readily 
and cheaply made of sheet metal by striking 
out a suitable blank from a flat sheet and 
bending the blank into the form shown. 
The wear is sustained by the pintle-studs, 
these being separable from the other parts of 
the chain, so that they can be hardened to 
any desired extent, it being feasible to equally 
harden the studs, the coupling-blocks, and 
the links. 
The chain can be taken apart without the 
use of tools, and can therefore be very con 
veniently repaired by the rider in case of 
breakage of any of the parts, spare partsbe 
ing carried. 
The feature of the cross-bars a is essential 
95 
CO 
 
2 
571,978 
3's 
d 
to the practical success of the chain, as with 
out them the links would twist to such an ex 
tent as to render the chain unfit for use. It 
will be seen that by my construction of chain 
the disconnection of its parts is readily ac 
complished, while at the same time when the 
parts are assembled they are held firmly 
against any tendency to twist. 
I claim 
1. A chain composed of links and coupling 
blocks alternately coupled together, each link 
comprising two parallelstraps provided with 
longitudinal slots which are centrally en 
larged and cross-bars connecting the outer 
edges of said straps, their inner edges being 
disconnected, while the coupling-blocks have 
at their ends oppositely-projecting pintles to 
fit the ends of the slots and having heads 
which take over the outer sides of the straps 
the diameter of said heads being less than that 
of the enlarged portions of the slots, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
2. A chain composed of links and coupling 
blocks alternately coupled together, each link 
30 
comprising two parallel straps provided with 25 
longitudinal slots which are centrally en 
larged, and cross-bars connecting the outer 
edges of said straps, their inner edges being 
disconnected, while the coupling-blocks have 
in their end portions removable studs the 
ends of which form oppositely-projecting 
transverse pintles, which are formed to fit 
the end portions of the slots and have heads 
which engage the outer sides of the straps, 
the diameter of said studs and heads being 35 
less than that of the enlarged portions of the 
slots, so that the studs are independently 
insertible and removable when in line with 
said enlargements. 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 8th day of 
June, A. D. 1896. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 4o 
FREDERICK MYERS. 
Witnesses: 
DE WITT BUCKLER, 
RUTHERFORD M. TOSEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572079.txt	(No Model.) 
m 
S. O. TRESCOTT. 
MUCIAGE BOTTLE, 
No. 572,079, 
Patented Nov. 24, 1896. 
WITNESS s: 
4:21e 
X 
se 
wey!g 
d5 6.224ee-Z 
BY 
AT TOffeys. 
 
the nois Peters co, Porto WASHGT. b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN O. TRESCOTT, OF PITTSBURG, KANSAS. 
MUCILAGE-BOTTLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,079, dated November 24, 1896. 
Application filed January 9, 1896, Serial No. 574,823, (No model.) 
55 
OC 
O 
25 
- 
to (2, Zv/O1, it inct? concern. 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN O. TRESCOTT, 
of Pittsburg, in the county of Crawford and 
State of Kansas, have invented a new and 
Improved Mucilage-Bottle, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in bottles or receptacles for containing 
lmucilage, and particularly to that class of 
Such devices as are adapted to discharge the 
mucilage in Such a manner as to dispense 
With the employment of a brush, and the ob 
ject is to provide a device of this character 
of a simple and inexpensive construction, 
Which shall be adapted for use no matter in 
What position the bottle or receptacle is held, 
and which may be employed for applying 
mucilage with great nicety, either in the form 
of a narrow line or in the form of a broadband. 
The invention consists in a mucilage bottle 
or receptacle comprising a body formed of 
rubber or analogous flexible material and 
having a tip adapted to act as a substitute 
for a brush and formed with an outlet for the 
passage of the mucilage from said body when 
the same is compressed. 
The invention also contemplates certain 
novel features of construction, combination, 
and arrangement of the various parts of the 
improved device, whereby certain important 
advantages are attained and the bottle or re 
ceptacle is made simpler, cheaper, and oth 
erWise better adapted and more convenient 
for use than various other similar devices 
heretofore employed, all as will be hereinaf 
ter fully set forth. The novel features of the 
invention will be carefully defined in the 
claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing the 
improved mucilage bottle or receptacle in po 
sition for use. Fig. 2 is an enlarged axial sec 
tional view taken longitudinally through the 
bottle or receptacle; and Fig. 3 is a side view 
of the improved bottle or receptacle, the upper 
part thereof being broken away to show the 
interior of the bottle in section in a plane 
Substantially at right angles to the plane of 
the section in Fig. 2. 
In the views, indicates the body of the 
bottle or receptacle, composed, by preference, 
of rubber or equivalent flexible substance, 
having a hollow interior 2 to receive the mu 
cilage and provided with a slightly-concave 
bottom 3. The body 1 is slightly tapered or 
Coned from its bottom to its upper part, and 
at its upper part is made somewhat rounded 
to form a shoulder, as indicated at 3, and at. 
the central portion of the top of the bottle or 
holder is formed a circular outlet 4, extending 
in the axis of the device and communicating 
with the lower end of a mouth 5, made grad 
ually increasing in width from its lower to its 
Outer end, as clearly seen in Fig. 2, and grad 
ually decreasing in thickness from its lower 
to its outer end, as clearly seen in Fig. 3. In 
this way it will be seen that the mouth 5 of 
the Outlet is formed in the shape of an elon 
gated slit, and the Walls 6 of the neck of the 
bottle or receptacle at opposite ends of said 
elongated slit are parallel to each other and 
to the axis of the bottle or receptacle, as 
clearly indicated in Fig. 2, while the side 
Wallis 7 of the neck of the bottle or those walls 
thereof along the sides of said elongated slit 
are inclined or tapered toward each other, as 
clearly seen in Fig. 3, so as to give the neck 
a somewhat V-shaped form in cross-section. 
By this construction the walls of the neck at 
the lower part thereof and adjacent to the 
circular outlet-opening 4 of the bottle or re 
ceptacle are made of substantially uniform 
thickness, the lower portions 9 of the walls 6, 
as seen in Fig. 2, being of substantially equiv 
alent thickness to the lower portions S of the 
walls 7. (Seen in Fig. 3.) 
In using the device the body1 of the bottle 
or receptacle will be grasped between the fin 
gel's and compressed, as indicated at 10 in 
Fig. 3, and the elongated outlet-slit 5 will be 
applied to the part to be gummed, so that the 
mucilage discharged from the hollow 2 of the 
body will pass from said outlet-slit onto the 
surface to be gummed. In this way the bot 
tle or receptacle may be either held in an 
erect position, as indicated in Fig. 1, and the 
mucilage applied to the lower surface of an 
article indicated at ac in dotted lines in said 
figure, in which case the pressure of the fin 
gers on the sides of the elastic body1 will be 
sufficient to force the mucilage therefrom, or 
3 5 
 
2 
572,079 
 
the bottle or receptacle may be held in an in 
Verted position and the mucilage applied in 
the ordinary way. When the pressure of the 
fingers is withdrawn from the sides of the 
elastic body, that portion of the mucilage con 
tained in the outlet-passages 4 and 5 will be 
withdrawn therefrom into the hollow 2 of the 
body, so that said passages 4 and 5 will be pre 
vented from becoming clogged with solidified 
mucilage, whereby the proper working of the 
device would behindered, and the lower por 
tion of the walls of the neck (indicated at S 
and 9 in Figs. 3 and 2) being of substantially 
equal thickness it will be evident that an in 
creased thickness of rubber is provided at 
this point to compensate for the increased 
Wear thereon caused by the use of the neck 
as a brush. 
The walls of the tip or neck gradually in 
crease in thickness toward the body of the re 
ceptacle. The purpose of this construction 
is to prevent the tip from being bent so much 
as to close the outlet-passages 45 by bringing 
the Walls thereof in contact with each other. 
(See dotted lines in Fig. 3.) Thus the inte 
rior of the receptacle will always remain in 
communication with the outer air, and when 
pressure is discontinued the mucilage will be 
withdrawn from the tip or neck in the bottle. 
By means of the elongated outlet-slit 5 it 
will be evident that the mucilage may be ap 
plied either in the form of a narrow stripe or 
line by moving the neck along the surface to 
be gummed in a direction parallel with the 
length of said slit, or the mucilage may be 
applied to said surface in the form of a broad 
band by moving the neck across the surface 
in a direction at right angles to the length of 
said slit. 
From the above description of my improved 
mucilage bottle or receptacle it will be obvious 
that the device is of an extremely simple and 
inexpensive construction and is well adapted 
for the purposes for which it is designed, and 
it will also be obvious that the device is sus 
ceptible of considerable modification without 
material departure from the principles and 
Spirit of the invention, and for this reason I 
do not wish to be understood as limiting my 
Self to the exact form and arrangement of 
the various parts herein set forth. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A mucilage bottle or receptacle, com 
prising a compressible elastic hollow body, 
and a tip provided with a bore communicat 
ing with the interior of the body and adapted 
to serve as an outlet for the mucilage when 
the receptacle is compressed, substantially as 
described. 
2. A mucilage bottle or receptacle, com 
prising a hollow body and a flexible tip se 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
cured to said body and made with walls de 
creasing in thickness gradually toward its 
free end, forming an end portion adapted to 
Serve as a brush, said tip having a channel 
or outlet communicating with the interior of 
the body, substantially as described. 
3. A mucilage bottle or receptacle, com 
prising a hollow body and a flexible tip se 
cured thereto and made with an outlet com 
municating with the interior of the body, 
said outlet being approximately cylindrical 
at its inner end and terminating at its outer 
end in an elongated discharge-slot, and the 
walls of the tip increasing in thickness grad 
ually from the discharge end thereof, so as 
to afford flexibility for the said outlet yet 
preventing such flection thereof as will bring 
the walls of the outlet into contact with each 
other, substantially as described. 
4. A mucilage bottle or receptacle, com 
prising a compressible elastichollow body and 
a tip made with an outlet communicating 
with the interior of the body and made ap 
proximately cylindrical at its inner end, said 
outlet gradually increasing in length while 
decreasing in width to form a discharge-slit, 
substantially as described. 
5. A mucilage bottle or receptacle, com 
prising a compressible elastic hollow body, 
and a tip made with walls decreasing in 
thickness gradually toward its free end, form 
ing an end portion adapted to serve as a 
brush, said tip having a permanently-open 
outlet communicating with the interior of 
the body and made approximately cylindri 
cal at its inner end, the outlet gradually in 
creasing in width to form an elongated dis 
charge-slit, substantially as described. 
6. A mucilage bottle or receptacle, con 
prising a compressible elastic hollow body, a 
tip made with a permanently-open outlet 
communicating with the interior of the body, 
the walls of the said outlet increasing in 
thickness gradually from the discharge end 
thereof toward the body so as to afford flexi 
bility for the said outlet, while preventing 
such flection thereof as will bring the walls 
of the outlet into contact with each other, 
substantially as described. 
7. A mucilage bottle or receptacle, com 
prising a compressible elastic hollow body, 
and a tip made With Walls increasing in 
thickness gradually from its end toward the 
body, said tip having a permanently-open 
outlet communicating with the interior of the 
body and made approximately cylindrical at 
its inner end, the outlet gradually increasing 
in width to form an elongated discharge-slit, 
substantially as described. 
STEPHEN O. TERESCOTT. 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
OC 
Io5 
O 
I J5 
20 
Witnesses: 
T. J. CROWELL, 
WM. H. WOETH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572179.txt	(No Model.) 
J. PAULUS. 
BOTTLE, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
??? 
???????? 
': 
NVENTOR. 
WITNESSES 
? (, 
'?????? 
the NORR's Peters to. PHoto-LTHo, washineron... 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOIB PAULUS, OE BROOKILYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
AUGUST HARTMANN, OF EAST ORANGE, NEWJERSEY. 
BOTTLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,179, dated December 1, 1896. 
Application filed May 28, 1895, Serial No. 550,914. (No model.) 
?? 
9o 
95 
IOO 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
To all tuhon, it may concern: 
tween said tubular extension C at the bottom 
Be it known that I, JACOB PAULUS, a citi 
of the bottle are also formed on opposite sides 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
of said extension shoulders or projections C. 
Brooklyn, county of Kings, and State of New 
Secured within the tubular projection C is 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
a plate D, having four passages orports there 
Improvements in Bottles, of which the fol 
in, (designated by the letters D', D, D, and 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
D,) and the passages orports D, D, and D 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
have upwardly-directed tubular extensions, 
thereof, in which similar letters of reference 
as clearly shown in Fig. 1, and the port D' 
indicate corresponding parts. 
hasa downwardly-directed tubular extension, 
My invention relates to bottles; and the 
to which is secured a tube E, which may be 
object thereof is to provide an improved bot 
arranged vertically, as shown in dotted lines 
tle which having been once filled and emptied 
in said Fig. 1, or curved downwardly and up 
of its contents cannot be again filled or re 
Wardly, as shown in said figure. 
used, said bottle being also constructed so 
Secured to the upper end of the tubular ex 
that a predetermined amount of the contents 
tension of port or passage D is a vent-tube 
of the bottle may be discharged whenever de 
F, which extends upwardly to near the top 
sired, and this amount being always deter 
of the bottle and is open at its upper end. 
mined before the bottle is constructed, and 
Communicating with the lower end of the 
the construction and arrangement being such 
port or passage D is a tube f, the lower end 
that only such predetermined amount can be 
of which is closed, and the upper end of which 
discharged at a single operation. 
is provided with small ports or openings f", 
The invention is fully disclosed in the foll 
and within said tube fis placed a ball-valve 
lowing specification, of which the accompa 
f?. 
nying drawings form a part, and in which 
is also provided with a tubular extension, to 
Figure 1 represents a central vertical sec 
which is secured a short tube G., open at its 
tion of my improvement; Fig. 2, a similar 
lower end, as shown in Fig. 1, and which ex 
section of the bottle when first cast, independ 
tends nearly to the bottom of the chamber G', 
ent of the attachments which are afterward 
formed by a tubular extension C. The plate 
connected there with; Fig. 3, a transverse sec 
D may also be provided with a tubular exten 
tion on the line 33 of Fig. 1; Fig. 4, a plan 
sion d, if desired, which extends downwardly, 
view of the bottle-neck when filled and the 
as shown, and against which is adapted to 
attachments applied. Figs. 5 and 6 represent 
abut a plate H, (shown in Fig. 8,) provided 
sections on the lines 5 and 6, respectively, of 
with side recesses H", adapted to engage with 
Fig. 1; Fig. 7, a similar section on the line 
the shoulders or projections C on the inner 
77 of Fig. 1, and Fig. 8, a plan view of the 
walls of the tubular extension C, and the plate 
bottom plate, hereinafter described. 
Dis also provided with similar recesses adapt 
ed to engage with the corresponding lug or 
In the practice of my invention I first forma 
projection C. 
bottle of the general design shown in Fig. 2, 
in which the bottle A is provided with a neck 
The tubes E G and F and fare all secured 
B, having an inwardly-directed flange or 
to or rigidly connected with the plate D and 
shoulder B' at the bottom thereof, and on the 
are placed in position with said plate, as will 
opposite sides of the interior walls of the neck 
be readily understood. 
are formed vertical ribs B. (Clearly shown in 
Secured within the bottom of the neck of 
Figs. 2 and 4 and also in Figs. 5, 6, and 7.) 
the bottle, as shown in Fig. 1, is a circular 
The base or bottom of the bottle is provided 
disk or plate K, said disk or plate being se 
with a tubular extension C, and an inwardly 
cured in position in any desired manner and 
directed flange or shoulder C' is formed at 
having formed thereon side recesses adapted 
the top thereof, and in the opposite side walls 
to engage with the vertical ribs or projections 
at the lower end areformed inwardly-directed 
B in the neck of the bottle, as shown in Fig. 
ribs or shoulders C, and at the junction be- 7, and formed in said disk or plate are ports 
The lower end of the port or passage D. 75 
35 
45 
 
2 
572,1 
79 
* "???????????? 
or openings K'and K, with which communi 
cate tubes L and L', which are rigidly secured 
to said disk or plate and which when said disk 
or plate is inserted into position connect at 
the lower ends with the tubular extensions of 
the passages orports D* and D of the plate D. 
Above the disk or plate K in the neck of the 
bottle are arranged similar disks M, N, O, P, 
and R in the order named, each of which is 
provided with openings or passages corre 
sponding with the passages or openings K' 
and K in the disk or plate K, and of these 
plates or disks N, P, and R are rigidly secured 
in position and the disks or plates M and O 
are revoluble, being so formed as to revolve 
within the vertical ribs B, as shown in Figs. 
5 and 6, and having packing which fills the 
spaces between said ribs. 
The top plate R may be secured in position 
in any desired manner. I prefer, however, 
to extend the side openings therein, which 
correspond with the openings IX' and Kin 
the disk or plate K, as shown, and to form 
the bottom portion so that it will entirely 
close the neck of the bottle, as shown in Fig. 
1, the upper portion thereof being cut away 
annularly, so as to form the circular or seg 
mental spaces R' 
Each of the disks or plates M, N, O, P, and 
Rare provided with central openings through 
which is passed a rod S, the lower end of 
which is pivoted in the disk or plate K, and 
the upper end of which is formed into a han 
dle, as shown, and also formed at suitable 
distances apart upon said rod S are wings or 
projections S', forming keys by means of 
which the disks or plates M and O may be 
turned when desired, so that the ports or pas 
sages therethrough will not communicate with 
the ports or passages in the other disks or 
plates, and, as will be readily understood, 
the key-rod S may be inserted and employed 
to revolve said disks at any desired time and 
removed therefrom until it is again desired 
to apply the same and revolve said disks M 
and O, which is done whenever it is desired 
to discharge a portion of the contents of the 
bottle. 
In this class of devices the bottle, as will 
be understood, is always filled before the 
closing devices are applied, and with this 
fact in view the operation will be readily un 
derstood from the following statements there 
of when taken in connection with the forego 
ing description and the accompanying draw 
IngS. 
The disk or plate D, with its various at 
tached tubes, is first secured in position and 
the plate Hinserted and secured in place, 
after which the spaces below said plate Hmay 
be filled with any desired form of cement, as 
shown at T. 
The bottle is now filled with its desired 
contents, after which the disk or plate K, with 
the tubes L and L' secured thereto, is placed 
in position, when the tubes L and L' will con 
nect with the tubular extensions of the pas 
sages D* and D, as shown in Fig. 1. The 
disks or plates M, N, O, P, and R are then 
placed in position in such manner that the 
passages formed therein will communicate, as 
shown in Fig. 1, the disks or plates N, P, and 
R being rigidly secured in place when in 
serted. The key-rod Sisthen passed through 
the central opening in said plates, as shown 
in Fig. 1, and turned so as to revolve the 
plates M and O in such manner that the pas 
sages therein will not communicate with the 
passages in the adjacent plates or disks, when 
the bottle will be sealed or closed, as will be 
readily understood. 
Whenever it is desired to discharge a por 
tion of the contents of the bottle, the key-rod 
is inserted and the plates M and O revolved 
until the passages therein communicate With 
the passages K' and K and the disk K and 
with the corresponding passages in the disks 
N, P, and R. The bottle is then inverted or 
tilted in the usual manner, when all that por 
tion of the contents thereof contained within 
the chamber G' of the tubular extension C 
will flow out through the tube Land the con 
nected passages in the disks or plates within 
the neck of the bottle, and during this opera 
tion air enters the chamber G' through the 
tubeLand the tube Gatthellower end thereof, 
and when the bottle is again held in the up 
ward position the air in the chamber G will 
pass through the tube F into the top of the 
bottle above the liquid therein, and this op 
eration may be repeated as often as it is de 
sired to discharge a portion of the contents 
of the bottle, it being understood that the 
amount discharged at each operation will al 
ways depend on the size of the chamber G', 
which may of course be regulated as desired, 
and each time that the bottle is inverted in 
order to discharge the contents of the cham 
ber G' the valve f will close the lower end 
of the plug f, as will be readily understood, 
and prevent the contents of the chamber G 
from flowing back into the bottles. 
It will thus appear that I accomplish the 
object of my invention by means of a device 
which is simple in construction and operation 
and which is perfectly adapted to produce 
the result for which it is intended. 
It is evident that changes in and modifica 
tions of the construction shown and described 
may be made without departing from the 
spirit of my invention, and Itherefore reserve 
the right to make Such alterations and changes 
therein as fairly fall within the scope thereof. 
Having fully described my invention, its 
construction and operation, I claim and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent 
I. The combination with a bottle, having 
the usual neck, and a tubular extension at 
the bottom thereof, of a disk or plate secured 
in Said tubular extension, and having ports 
or passages therethrough, and means for clos 
ing said tubular extension and forming a 
chamber therein, a disk or plate secured in 
the neck of the bottle, and having ports or 
I. ? 
4 ? 
45 
53 
55 
?? 
75 
?? 
95 
Od 
o 
II5 
o 
I25 
 
572,179 
passages formed therein, tubes forming a con 
nection between the ports or passages in the 
disk secured in the neck and those formed in 
the disk or plate secured in the tubular ex 
tension, and means for admitting the contents 
of the bottle into the chamber formed in the 
tubular extension, and discharging the same 
through One of said tubes, the other of said 
tubes being adapted to admit air to said cham 
ber, Substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination with a bottle, having 
the usual neck, and a tubular extension at the 
bottom thereof, of a disk or plate secured in 
said tubular extension, and having ports or 
passages therethrough, and means for closing 
said tubular extension and forming a cham 
ber therein, a disk or plate secured in the 
neck of the bottle, and having ports or pas 
sages formed therein, tubes forming a connec 
tion between the ports or passages in the disk 
Secured in the neck and those formed in the 
disk or plate secured in the tubular exten 
Sion, and means for admitting the contents of 
the bottle into the chamber formed in the 
tubular extension, and discharging the same 
through one of said tubes, the other of said 
tubes being adapted to admit air to said 
chamber, said disk or plate within the neck 
of the tubular extension being also provided 
With a port or opening with which communi 
cates a tube secured thereto, which extends 
upwardly to near the top of the bottle, and a 
tubular extension below said port or opening 
provided with perforations, and a valve lo 
cated therein, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
3. The combination with a bottle, provided 
With the usual neck, and a tubular extension 
at the bottom thereof, of a disk or plate se 
cured in the upper part of said tubular exten 
sion, said disk or plate being provided with 
portS or Openings with which communicate 
tubes, which also communicate with similar 
ports or openings formed in the disk or plate. 
Secured in the neck of the bottle, a series of 
similar disks or plates arranged within the 
neck of the bottle, above the first-named 
plate, which are provided with ports or open 
ings which correspond, and are adapted to 
register With those in the first-named disk or 
plate, one or more of the said disks or plates 
being revoluble within the neck therein, one 
of said tubes being adapted to admit of the 
discharge of the contents of the bottle, and 
the other to Supply air thereto, and means for 
turning the revoluble disks or plates within 
the neck of the bottle, substantially as shown 
and described. 
4. The combination with a bottle, provided 
With the usual neck, and a tubular extension 
at the bottom thereof, of a disk or plate se 
cured in the upper part of said tubular ex 
tension, Said disk or plate being provided with 
ports Or Openings with which communicate 
tubes, which also communicate with similar 
ports or openings formed in the disk or plate 
Secured in the neck of the bottle, a series of 
II. ? 
2 ? 
25 
45 
55 
?? 
 
75 
8 
similar disks or plates arranged within the 
neck of the bottle, above the first-named plate, 
each of which is provided with ports or open 
ings which correspond, and are adapted to 
register with those in the first-named disk or 
plate, one or more of the said disks or plates 
being revoluble Within the neck therein, one 
of said tubes being adapted to admit of the 
discharge of the contents of the bottle, and 
the other to supply air thereto, and means for 
turning the revoluble disks or plates within 
the neck of the bottle, the disk or plate se 
cured within the tubular extension at the bot 
tom of the bottle, being also provided with a 
port or opening with which communicates a 
tube which extends upward through the bot 
tle near to the top thereof, and with another 
port or opening with which is connected a 
tube which communicates with a chamber 
formed in the tubular extension, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
5. The combination with a bottle provided 
With the usual neck and with a tubular ex 
tension at the bottom thereof, which is closed 
by a plate secured at its lower end, of a disk 
or plate secured in the upper end of said tubu 
lar extension forming a chamber therein, said 
disk or plate being provided with a plurality 
of ports or openings with two of which com 
municate tubes which extend upwardly and 
communicate with similar ports or openings 
formed in a disk secured in the bottom of the 
neck of the bottle, a plurality of similar disks 
or plates arranged within the neck of the bot 
tle above the first-named disk or plate, each 
of which is provided with ports or openings 
which correspond with those formed in the 
first-named disk or plate, and one or more of 
said last-named disks or plates being revolu 
ble and the others rigidly secured within the 
neck, one of said ports or openings in the disk 
or plate secured in the tubular extension, be 
ing also provided with a tube which extends 
upward into the bottle and a valve to control 
the entrance thereto, and another of said 
ports or openings within the disk or plate se 
cured within the tubular extension, being also 
provided with a tube which extends down 
Wardly into the chamber within said tubular 
extension, and means for turning the revolu 
ble disks or plates within the neck of the bot 
tle, substantially as shown and described. 
6. The combination with a bottle provided 
With the usual neck and with a tubular ex 
tension at the bottom thereof, which is closed 
by a plate secured at its lower end, of a disk 
Orplate secured in the upper end of said tubu 
lar extension forming a chamber therein, said 
disk or plate being provided with a plurality 
of ports or openings with two of which com 
municate tubes which extend upwardly and 
communicate with similar ports or openings 
formed in a disk secured in the bottom of 
the neck of the bottle, a plurality of similar 
disks or plates arranged within the neck of 
the bottle above the first-named disk or plate 
each of which is provided with ports or open 
95 
OO 
III O 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
I25 
572,179 
ings which correspond with those formed in 
the first-named disk or plate, and one or more 
of said last-named disks or plates being rev 
oluble and the others rigidly secured within 
the neck, one of said ports or openings in the 
disk or plate secured in the tubular exten 
sion, being also provided with a tube which 
extends upward into the bottle and a valve 
to control the entrance thereto, and another 
of Said ports or openings within the disk or 
plate secured within the tubular extension, 
being also provided with a tube which ex 
tends downwardly into the chamber within 
said tubular extension, and means for turn 
ing the revoluble disks or plates within the 
? ? 
neck of the bottle, consisting of a key-rod 
adapted to be inserted through central open 
ings formed in each of the disks or plates 
above the last, and provided with wings or 
extensions by which the revoluble plates are 
turned, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 27th 
day of May, 1895. 
JACOB PAULUS. 
Witnesses: 
L. M. MULLER, . 
MI. A. IXNOWLES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572279.txt	No. 572,279. 
W. S. SCBIR 0EDER. 
G0ND0IA GAR. 
Patented Dec, l, 1896. 
A7fcs. 2. 
A G.7. 
???? 
----m=5???????????????m=5??????????????????= 
'). 
Wanness 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. S. SCHROEDER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO IIIMSELF, 
- 
AND CHARLES A. SCHROYER, OF OAK PARK, ILLINOIS. 
GONDOLA CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,279, dated December 1, 1896. 
Application filed May 20, 1896, Serial No, 592,257, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
To all ?ph0?, i? ??? ??? ????: 
Beitknown that I, WILLIAMS. SCHROEDER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Gondola Cars, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
It is Well known that when coal or gondola. 
cars are loaded the side-boards bend outward 
at the center and top to such an extent as to 
cause frequent injury by striking other cars 
standing close to the track or other objects 
alongside the track with which ordinarily 
there will be no interference. Sometimes the 
stakes of the cars are broken in switching by 
reason of this outward deflection, to prevent 
Which is the object of my present invention; 
and I accomplish this object by combining 
With the car a metal stake-pocket having an 
inclined groove to receive a truss-bolt and also 
having a foot or down Ward extension adapted 
to rest upon the floor or sill of the car and a 
U-shaped bolt adapted to seat itself in the 
groove of such pocket and extending in a di 
agonal direction through the floor of the car 
and secured at its lower end in the cross-beam 
below the floor. 
The nature of my invention will be more 
fully understood from the accompanying 
drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a partial vertical cross-section 
of a car embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a partial side elevation of the car. Fig. 3 is 
a section on the line 33 of Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 
is a detail view showing the manner of secur 
ing the lower end of the truss-bolt. 
In said drawings, Arepresents the sill, BB 
the cross-beams, C the floor, D D the side 
boards, and E one of the side stakes of the 
car. This stake is supported at itslower end 
in a metal socket F, bolted on the sill, as 
shown. 
To one or more of the stakes E, Iapply my 
invention as follows: Around the stake E, I 
place a metal pocket G, adapted to surround 
the stake and having an inclined groove, 
which will act as a seat for the U-shaped 
truss-bolt H. The metal pocket extends some 
considerable distance above the car-floor, as 
shown, in order to support the stake against 
the outward push or force of the load, and it 
also extends downward sufficiently so that it 
may be supported upon the floor or the sill of 
the car, as preferred. At its juncture with 
the floor or sill I provide it with both a foot 
g, which rests upon the floor or sill, and a 
heel g', adapted to set against the vertical 
side of the floor or sill, and thus stay the 
pocket in a horizontal direction. The pocket 
is preferably bolted on the side of the car by 
the bolt J. 
The truss-bolt is shown at II. It is U 
shaped, so it may pass around the stake and 
seat itself in the inclined groove of the metal 
pocket, and it extends in Ward and downward, 
as shown, to the under side of the cross-beam 
B. At its lower end it is secured in a bear 
ing-plate K, which rests against the side of a 
notch cut in the cross-beam B, nuts L being 
applied to the ends of the bolt and brought 
home against the bearing-plate. 
These nuts 
may be tightened whenever necessary. Be 
tween the nuts Land the bearing-plate a thin 
plate M is interposed, and its ends are bent 
down and against the nuts, as shown at Fig. 
4, so as to lock the nuts against any tendency 
to become loose. By this construction any 
downward movement of the pocket is pre 
vented, and if the upper portion of the stake 
springs outward the heel of the pocket will 
prevent the pocket from yielding to the stake 
as long as the truss-bolt remains firm. 
I claim 
1. The combination with the side-boards 
and stake of a coal or gondola car, of a metal 
pocket G bearing upon the floor or sill of the 
car, and the U-shaped inclined truss-bolt H, 
substantially as specified. 
2. The combination with the side-boards 
and stake of a coal or gondola car, of a metal 
stake-pocket G having a seat for the truss 
bolt and also having an extension whereby it 
may be sustained by the floor or sill of the 
car, and the inclined truss-bolt, substantially 
as specified. 
3. The combination with the side-boards 
and stake of a car of the metal stake-pocket 
G having the seat for the truss-bolt and also 
95 
to 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
572,279 
having a foot and heel whereby it may be sustain the stake vertically, in combination 
stayed by the floor or sill of the car, both ver- with the floor or sill of the car, and a truss 
tically and horizontally, and an inclined U- bolt, substantially as specified. 
shaped truss-bolt H, substantially as specified. 
4. The stake having attached to it a metal 
foot projecting inwardly from the stake and 
adapted to rest upon the floor or silland thus 
- 
WILLIAM. S. SCHROEDER. 
Witnesses: 
EDW. S. EVARTS, 
II. MI. MUNIDAY. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572379.txt	(No Model.) 
F. A. SCRANTON. 
BICYCLE BELL CLAMP, 
No. 572,379. 
Patented Deo, l l 896. 
 
 
 
 
  
(AZZZZZZZ 
f a 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
FREDERICKA. SCRANTON, OF EAST HAMPTON, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE BEWTN BROTHERS MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
s 
BICYCLE-BELL CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,379, dated December 1, 1896. 
Application filed January 6, 1896. Serial No. 574,430, (No model.) 
Io the same. 
To all tuhon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK A. SCRAN 
TON, a citizen of the United States, and a resi 
dent of East Hampton, in the county of Mid 
5 dlesex and State of Connecticut, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Bicycle-Bells, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description, whereby 
any one skilled in the art can make and use 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
improved means for attaching a bicycle-bell 
to the handle-bar or like part of a bicycle; 
and to this end my invention consists in the 
15 details of the several parts making up the 
bell and its attaching means and in the com 
bination of such parts, as hereinafter de 
scribed, and more particularly pointed out in 
the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a de 
tail side view of a bell provided with my im 
proved attaching means. Fig. 2 is a bottom 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail view, in 
central vertical section, on line acac of Fig. 2. 
25 Fig. 4 is a detail view, in central vertical sec 
tion, on the line y y of Fig. 2. 
In the accompanying drawings the letter C. 
denotes a base-plate, and b the gong, within 
which is located any desired form of mechan 
A bracket d is secured to the under side 
of the base-plate in any convenient manner, 
and consists of a U-shaped piece struck up 
from sheet metal and having the side parts 
35 did. In the device herein shown a threaded 
stude extends through the bracket and base, 
a nute' being used to secure the stud in place, 
and the gong being secured to the upper end 
of the stud. 
Angular sockets f are formed in the side 
parts of the bracket d at one end thereof, in 
which is located an adjusting-studg', secured 
to the clamp g. 
The clampg is formed of thin flexible metal, 
45 as brass, and in the opposite end is secured 
a clamp-screw h. 
The side parts of the bracket clare recessed 
to fit the curved surface of a handle-bar, 
(shown in dotted outline in Fig. 4 of the draw 
5o ings,) and the clampg is located between the 
side parts of the bracket d and is of a width 
3o ism operated by a handle c. 
- 
 
less than the distance between these side 
parts, so that when the device is clamped in 
place a double bearing-surface for the han 
dle-bar is provided on one side of the latter 
and a single bearing-surface on the opposite 
side between the two bearing-surfaces, this 
affording a very effective means of clamping 
the device in place and preventing a move 
ment lengthwise along the handle-bar. 
The angular sockets f afford means of a 
coarse adjustment of the clamp, the bottom 
of one of the slots in each of the side parts 
being located at a greater distance from the 
clamp-screw h. than is the bottom of the other 
slots, measured on a line around the handle 
bar, and the clamp-screw h affords a means 
of fine adjustment and also of clamping the 
device securely in place. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination, a base, a bracket U 
shaped in cross-section secured to the base 
and having side parts with curved sockets in 
the edges thereof, angular sockets in the side 
parts of the bracket located opposite each 
other, a clamp pivoted at one end to and be 
tween the side parts of the bracket, a clamp 
screw in engagement with the base and with 
one end of the clamp, and a stud secured to 
the opposite end of the clamp, extending 
through the side parts of the bracket, and in 
engagement with the angular sockets, all sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In combination, a base, a bracket U 
shaped in cross-section located on the under 
side of the base, a stud for a gong extending 
through the bracket and base, means for 
clamping the stud and base in position, an 
gular sockets located opposite each other in 
each of the side parts of the bracket, a clamp 
pivoted to and between the side parts of 
the bracket, an adjusting-screw extending 
through the base and in engagement with one 
end of the clamp, and a stud secured to the 
opposite end of the clamp and in engagement 
With the angular sockets in the side parts of 
the bracket, all substantially as described. 
FREDERICK A. SCRANTON. 
55 
95 
Witnesses: 
MAYO S. PURPLE, 
S. MILLS BEWIN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572479.txt	(No Model.) 
G. FLORENCE, 
MACEINE FOR MAKING TWINE OR CORD. 
No. 572,479. 
Patented Deo, l, l896, 
The NORRS PETERS co. Photo-Litho...washNGTON. b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE FLORENCE, OF NEWNAN, GEORGIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
R. D. COLE, SR, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR MAKING WIN E OR CORD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,479, dated December 1, 1896. 
Application filed December 19, 1895, Serial No. 572,678, (No model) 
To all, whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, GEORGE FLORENCE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
nan, in the county of Coweta and State of 
Georgia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Machines for Making 
Twine or Cord; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
machines for the manufacture of twine, cord, 
and the like. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
an improvement on certain parts of the ma 
chine shown in my Patent No. 530,891, grant 
ed December 11, 1894; and it consists of cer 
tain novel features hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
Reference is had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which the same parts are indicated 
by the same letters throughout the several 
views. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
a plurality of bobbins mounted around a 
former-spindle and provided with superim 
posed disks and thread-guides. Fig. 2 rep 
resents a perspective view of the Superim 
posed disks with thread-guides and mounted 
on the former-spindle farther apart than in 
the above figure for the sake of clearness, 
and Fig. 3 represents a perspective view of 
Si.of the thread-guides detached from the 
SK. 
A represents the former-spindle, near the 
bottom of which is mounted the bobbin 
plate B. 
The bobbin-spindles C are mounted fast on 
the said bobbin-plate B in a circle around the 
central former-spindle A. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
a means for preventing the yarn from the 
several bobbins C" from becoming tangled 
and yet not restrict the number of bobbins 
When such devices are used, as is the case 
With those devices now in use. I accomplish 
the above result by placing a plurality of su 
perimposed disks E on the former-spindle A 
and attaching the thread-guides D to the said 
disks in such a manner that they may be 
made to overlap each other and yet not inter 
fero. 
By arranging the thread-guides so that they 
may overlap each other not only can a large 55 
number of thread-guides and hence a large 
number of bobbins be used, but the thread 
guides so used may be made of a larger size 
than otherwise. The thread-guides E are 
made in the shape of a frustum of a cone, 6o 
that shape being found advantageous. 
It will be seen that each disk carries three 
thread-guides and that the thread-guides on 
one disk are advanced forty degrees to those 
on the disk above, the thread-guides on the 65 
same disk being one hundred and twenty de 
grees apart. 
Though the above arrangement is shown in 
the drawings, it is obvious that a larger num 
ber of bobbins may be used and that the ar- 7 O 
rangement of the guides may be altered to 
suit the special cases. These thread-guides 
are provided with two pins d, which pass 
through the flanged sides of the disks E and 
are held in position by the screws d. By 75 
this arrangement the distance between the 
side of the disk and the thread-guide may be 
varied at pleasure. 
E represents a tension-plate provided with 
the tension-wires EI. These wires are bent 8o 
over at their upper ends, as shown, and the 
yarn is led up from the bobbins and around 
these tension - Wires, which are placed in 
groups of three Wires in each group, and from 
thence the yarn is led to the former-spindle, 85 
It is obvious that the form and disposition 
of the herein-described thread-guides maybe 
modified and that other minor changes may 
be made without departing from the spirit of 
my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States, is 
1. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination with a rotating former-spin- 95 
dle, of a plurality of bobbin-supports rigidly 
connected to said former-spindle and rotating 
therewith, and a plurality of superimposed 
disks each provided with guides, secured 
| above said bobbin-supports and rotating with Ioe 
9o 
w 
25 
35 
45 
 
' 2 
572,479 
said former spindle, substantially as de- in the form of inverted frustums of cones, 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
2. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination with a rotating former-spin- in presence of two witnesses. 
dile, of a plurality of bobbin-supports adapted 
to rotate with said former-spindle, and a plu- 
rality of superimposed disks secured to said 
former-spindle and each provided with guides 
II. G. MADDEX, 
W. D. BRONAR. 
GEO. IFLORENCE. 
substantially as described. 
IO 
Witnesses: 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572580.txt	(No Model.) 
P. SPITZENBER, G, 
WALWE, 
No. 572,580. 
Patented De 0, 8, 1896. 
EZ IN N 
als 
saf 
S S  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
Ya 
S. 
: 
WITNESSES 
44.2% 
  
Ne S 
RS2 S 
 
N N 
N 
N 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEY 
The NORRS PETERS Co. PHOTO-UTHO, wAs4NOTox, s.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP SPITZENBERG, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,580, dated December 8, 1896. 
Application filed March 30, 1896, Serial No. 585,328, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, PHILIP SPITZENBERG, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings, in the State 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Valves, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to valves, and is es 
pecially applicable to the class of valves 
which are used for controlling the supply or 
escape of fluids or liquids under pressure. 
My improved valve is primarily adapted 
for use in connection with the cylinder of a 
continuous Soda-Water apparatus as a blow 
off valve for the gas and carbonated water in 
such cylinder; but it can be employed gen 
erally for regulating the Supply or escape of 
gases, steam, Water, or other fluids or liquids. 
A special feature in my improved valve is 
that it can be used either as a safety or blow 
off valve or as a shut-off valve. 
The nature of my invention and the mode 
in which it is operated are fully set forth in 
the following specification and the drawings 
annexed, in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of my improved 
valve, showing the same in use as a shut-off 
valve. Fig. 2 is a like view showing the 
same in use as a safety or blow-off valve and 
the diaphragm raised by the pressure of gas 
escaping through the valve. 
In the above figures, A is a valve-chamber 
composed of two sections-viz., C, the upper 
section; a', the lower section. 
B is a spiral spring connecting two sections 
of the valve-stem-viz., C, the upper section 
of the valve-stem; D, the lower section of the 
Valve-stem. 
E is a set-screw provided with a circular 
head or handle working in the upper part of 
section C. and operating the valve-stem C. 
Fis a screw passing through the diaphragm 
G. and securing same to D. 
G is a diaphragm of elastic material se 
cured by screw F to the lower part of the 
valve-stem D. 
His a spiral relief-Spring engaging With a 
projection on the head of the screw F and 
supported by a spider I. 
J is the inlet-pipe leading to the valve 
chamber K in the exit-pipe therefrom. 
L. L are screws connecting a, and a'. 
N is a pointer attached to the head of the 
set-screw E, and so placed that as such screw 
is turned for the purpose of raising or de 
pressing the valve-stem C the end of such 
pointer Will come opposite to different marks 
or figures on a graduated scale or index placed 
On the valve-chamber section a. 
O is a detachable metal bandor collar placed 
around the upper end of section C and gradu 
ated with suitable marks or figures, so as to 
form a scale or index for the purpose of as 
certaining and regulating the pressure at 
which it is intended that the diaphragm G. 
should be lifted. In some cases I attach the 
pointer N to the upper part of the section a 
and graduate the rim or circumference of the 
handle or head of the screw E by marks or 
figures thereon, or I attach thereto the band 
O, graduated as before described. 
The mode in which my invention is oper 
ated is as follows: When used as a shut-off 
valve, as shown in Fig. 1, the stem C is de 
pressed by turning the screw E until the 
lower end of the stem C, which I make, pref 
erentially, in rounded form, as shown, engages 
with a depression or socket formed in the 
upper end of the stem D and forces it solidly 
down on the diaphragm G, thereby forming 
a rigidly - closed valve. To insure certain 
seating of this diaphragm, I form the lower 
part of the stem D of width exceeding the 
diameter of the inlet-pipe F, thereby secur 
ing the perfect closing of the orifice of such 
inlet-pipe by the pressure of the diaphragm 
G on the circumference of such inlet-pipe. 
When used as a safety or blow-off valve, as 
shown in Fig. 2, the valve-stem C is depressed 
by turning the screw E until a sufficient 
force is exerted by the compression of the 
spiral spring B on the stem D and diaphragm 
G to equalize any desired pressure that may 
be exerted by the gas or other fluid entering 
through the pipe J. The necessary depres 
sion for this purpose is readily ascertained 
and gaged by the index NM, by means of 
which the valve can be readily set to open 
at any required pressure. When such pres 
sure is reached, the pressure of the entering 
fluid raises the elastic diaphragm G, as shown 
in the drawings, and escapes through the 
exit-pipe K. For the purpose of obviating 
the possibility of the valve sticking and fail 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
50 
90 
95 
Od 
2 
572,580 
ing to act in consequence of the diaphragm. 
Gadhering to its seat, as sometimes happens 
with valves when there is not sufficient coun 
tervailing pressure exerted by the entering 
fluid, I place underneath the head of the 
screw F and engage therewith a light coil 
Spring H, supported on a spider I and So ar 
ranged as to exert a slight upward pressure 
on the screw F and, in consequence, on the 
diaphragm G. By this device I find that the 
action of the valve is assisted and accelerated 
and all possibility of sticking in its seat is 
avoided, and the valve can thereby be oper 
ated with an extremely light pressure of en 
tering fluid. 
In the above description and drawings I 
have shown a diaphragm which, preferen 
tially, is constructed of rubber or other simi 
lar light elastic material, such being most 
suitable when the valve is used for gas or 
water, whether carbonated or plain, or other 
liquids. When my improved valve is used 
as a steam-Valve or for liquids at a high tem 
perature, I construct the diaphragm of thin 
elastic steel or other suitable metal carefully 
trued and formed to fit the valve-seat. With 
a diaphragm so constructed my improved 
valve can be used either as a steam safety 
valve, for which purpose it is found to be ex 
tremely sensitive and accurate, or as a steam 
shut-off valve. 
Having thus described the nature of my 
invention and the mode in which it is oper 
ated, what I claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a Valve, the combination of a sectional 
Valve-stem composed of an upper and lower 
section, with a flexible diaphragm attached 
to and operated by the lower valve-stem sec 
45 
50 
55 
tion, such lower valve-stem section being SO 
arranged as to be operated by a Spring con 
necting it with the upper Valve-stem. Section, 
when the valve is used as a relief or blow-off 
valve, and by the direct impact of the upper 
valve-stem section, when the valve is used as 
a shut-off valve, all substantially as shown 
and described and for the purposes specified. 
2. In a valve, the combination of the valve 
chamber A, composed of two sections, Cl, and 
a connected by screws L., L, the valve-stem 
sections C and D, the set-screw E and spring 
F operating the valve-stem sections C and D, 
the diaphragm G attached to the valve-stem 
section D and held circumferentially between 
the valve-chamber sections a and a', and the 
relief-spring H placed underneath the dia 
phragm G and arranged to exert an upward 
pressure against such diaphragm. 
3. In a valve, the combination of the sec 
tional valve-chamber A, the valve-stem sec 
tions C and D, the spring B connecting such 
sections, the diaphragm G held circumferen 
tially between the sections a and a' of the 
chamber A and affixed to and operated by the 
valve-stem section D, the relief-spring H, 
placed under the diaphragm G, and a gage 
for regulating the pressure, consisting of the 
pointer N and graduated scale or index. O, all 
substantially as described and for the pur 
poses specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my Elame, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 6th day of March, 
1S96. 
PHILIP SPITZENBERG. 
Witnesses: 
- 
FRANK WAGNER, 
ROBT. P. KEELY. 
O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572680.txt	(No Model.) 
D. HURLEY. 
STOP ATTACHMENT FOR KNITTING MACHINEs. 
No. 572,680. 
Patented Deo, 8, 1896. 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
-E-2 
f 
HRHILITT 
IIIHL: 
IIIHF 
in 
es 
: IIHam II. 
a 
R 40 
ILLILLII 
Ele 
  
 
 
 
YZZYASSAS 
-57 
? 2, 24- 
3. s 
3.7rzyzoz. 
3330 
M 29 
" 22 
622 24 
/A-2 aiorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL HURLEY, OF BENNINGTON, VERMONT, ASSIGNOR TO CHARLES 
COOPER, OF SAME PLACE. 
STOP ATTACHMENT FOR KNITTING-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,680, dated December 8, 1896. 
Application filed February 28, 1896, Serial No. 581,140. (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DANIELHURLEY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Benning 
ton, in the county of Bennington and State 
of Vermont, have invented certain new and 
usefullmprovementsin Stop Attachments for 
Knitting-Machines; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form part of this specification. 
Myinvention relates to mechanism for stop 
ping a knitting-machine automatically in the 
event of a stitch being dropped or of a loose 
thread, the yarn bunching or running in 
double. 
The object of the invention is to improve 
Such mechanisms; and to that end it consists 
in the several details of construction and com 
bination of parts hereinafter fully described, 
and more particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is an 
elevation of a portion of a knitting-machine 
with myinvention attached thereto, the mech 
anism being set ready to shift the driving 
belt from the fast to the loose pulley. Fig. 
2 shows a portion of the mechanism released 
and the belt shifted to the loose pulley. Fig. 
-3 is a partial top view of the belt-shifting 
mechanism released on the section-line at a 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is an elevation, partly in 
section, of the tripping device, which is oper 
ated by defects in the work; and Fig. 5 is a 
top view of the same. 
Similar reference-numerals indicate corre 
sponding parts in each figure of the drawings. 
1 represents the frame of the machine; 2, 
the upper and lower needle-cylinders; 3, the 
cylinder-supporting rings; 4, a shelf secured 
to the frame; 5, the driving-shaft; 6, the fast 
pulley, and 7 the loose pulley, on the shaft; 
8, the driving-belt, and 9 the cams for oper 
ating the needles. 
10 is a hollow post secured to the lower nee 
dle-cylinder-supporting ring 3. Fitting with 
in the upper end of this post is a sleeve 11, 
5o the outer end of which is enlarged and milled, 
45 
35 
25 
30 
- 
 
55 
75 
as indicated at 12 in Fig. 4, to form a finger 
hold. The sleeve is adapted to turn in the 
post and be locked thereto by the set-screw 13. 
14 represents a rod passing through the 
sleeve 11, post 10, supporting-ring 3, and ex 
tending some distance below the latter. 
The 
lower portion of the rod is held in a vertical 
position by a bracket 15, secured to the sup 
porting-ring 3. At the lower end of the rod 
14 a dog 16 is adjustably secured by a set 
screw 17. Around the rod 14 a spring 18 is 
coiled, the upper end of the spring being se 
cured to the sleeve 1 and its lower end to a 
pin. 19, which passes through the rod 14 im 
mediately below the supporting-ring 3. One 
end of this pin 19 normally engages a stop, 
preferably the bracket 15, and serves to limit 
the rotary movement normally imparted to 
the rod 14 by the spring 18. The tension of 
the spring can be regulated by turning the 
sleeve 11 in the post 10, and the set-screw 13 
will hold it in the adjusted position. To the 
upper end of the rod a lever 20 is adjustably 
secured about midway of its length by a set 
screw 21. One end of the lever serves as a 
handle to operate it with when necessary, and 
its other end is upwardly and laterally ex 
tended, as indicated by 27, to form a support 
for the hook 22. The hook is provided with 
an elongated opening 23 to enable it to be ad 
justed longitudinally on its support, and it 
is clamped in position by a set-screw 24, which 
passes through a plate 25 and the opening 23 
into the upward and lateral extension 27 of 
the lever. The lever has also a lug 26 on one 
side opposite the rod 14. This lug is provided 
with a groove, and the extension 27 is also 
grooved. In these grooves a finger 28 is sup 
ported and held therein by the plate 25 and 
a plate 29, secured to the lug 26 by a set-screw 
30. A spiral spring 31 is secured at one end 
to the extension 27 and at its other end to 
the finger 28, and tends normally to draw the 
finger 28 forward and over the extension 27. 
This movement is, however, limited by the 
pin 32, which extends upwardly from the fin 
ger and engages the plate 29, as clearly shown 
in Fig. 5. The plate 29 is provided with an 
elongated opening 33, through which the set 
screw 30 passes, and the plate can therefore 
95 
IOO 
2 
572,680 
70 
75 
be adjusted on its support to thereby increase 
or diminish the movement of the finger. 
34 is a standard supported on the shelf 4, 
and on the top of this standard a bar 35 is 
pivoted midway of its length. On the upper 
face of the bar 35 two levers 36 are pivoted 
near the pivot of said bar and extend in op 
posite directions beyond the ends of the bar. 
Each lever 36 is connected at its outer end to 
the main frame by a spring 37. Pins 38 pro 
ject upwardly from the bar 35 and engage the 
levers 36, as shown in Fig. 3. The springs 37 
tend to turn the bar 35 on its pivot in the 
direction of the arrows in Fig. 3. The outer 
ends of the levers 36 are notched, as indicated 
at 39, and these notches receive the ends of 
the dogs 16, as indicated in dotted lines in 
Fig. 3, when the belt is on the fast pulley. 
The bar 35 and its levers extend across the 
machine below the cylinders, and the trip 
ping mechanism, already described, and indi 
cated by the numerals 10 to 33, inclusive, is 
duplicated on the oppositeside of the machine. 
40 represents a shaft journaled in a bracket 
41, Secured to the main frame of the machine. 
On the shaft 40 are mounted a dog 42, a trip 
ping-lever 43, and a hand-lever 44. These 
three devices are respectively secured on the 
shaft, to turn with it, by the set-screws 45. 
46 and 47 are brackets secured to the shelf 
4, and in these brackets a rod 48 is supported 
to have longitudinal movement therein. On 
the outer end of the rod 48 a belt-shipper 49 
is secured to engage the belt 8. Between the 
brackets 46 and 47 an angle-bar 50 is adjust 
ably secured to the rod 48 by a set-screw 51, 
and between the angle-bar 50 and the bracket 
46 a spiral spring 52 surrounds the rod 48 and 
tends to force the said rod lengthwise in the 
direction of the pulleys. 
53 is a rod pivoted at one end to the bar 35 
and loosely supported at its other end in a 
Standard 54, extending upwardly from the 
bracket 47. The free end of the rod 53 en 
gages the upper end of the tripping-lever 43 
When the belt 8 is on the fast pulley, as shown 
in Fig. 1. 
55 is a slotted plate secured to the top of 
the angle-bar 50 and serves as a guide for the 
dog 42. The end of the dog 42 is provided 
With a recess 56, into which the end of the 
angle-bar 50 fits when the parts are in the po 
sition shown in Fig. 1. 
57 is a stop projecting from the shelf 4 to 
limit the movement of the bar 35. 
The Operation of the device is as follows: 
When the knitting-machine is in operation, 
the parts will be in the position shown in 
Fig. 1, the spring 52 being compressed and 
held in Such condition by the dog 42, engag 
ing the end of the angle-bar 50. The dog 42 
is arranged on the shaft 40 at such an angle 
and the recess in its end is so formed that 
when in the position indicated in Fig. 1 it 
Will hold the arm 50 and the rod 48 against 
the expansive force of the spring 52. The 
tripping-lever 43 will be in engagement with 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the end of the rod 53, which latter will be in 
its retracted position. The bar 35 and its 
levers 36 will occupy the position indicated 
by the dotted lines in Fig. 3, the springs 37 
being expanded, and they will be held in 
this position by the engagement of the dogs 
16 with the notches in the ends of the levers 
36, and the dogs will be normally held in 
their position by the springs 18 on the rod 14. 
The finger 28 will be retracted against the 
force of the spring 31, as indicated in dotted 
lines in Fig. 5, and its forward end will be 
in engagement with the fabric where the 
knitting-needles have been withdrawn from 
it by the cam 9. The point of the hook 22 
will be substantially on a line with the end of 
the finger 28. Now if a stitch be dropped a 
hole will be left in the fabric and the spring 
31 will force the end of the finger 28 into it, 
and the continued movement of the cylinders 
and fabric will carry the finger with them 
and thereby turn the rod 14 and disengage 
the dog 16 from its lever 36, when the spring 
37 will pull the lever against pin 38 and then 
suddenly force the bar 35 in the direction of 
the arrows in Fig. 3 until it strikes the stop 
57, thereby causing the rod 53 to move the 
tripping-lever 43 slightly to the left. This 
will result in slightly turning the dog 43 up 
ward, so that it will no longer hold the angle 
arm 50 and rod 48 against the force of the 
spring 52, and the latter will then be free to 
eXert its force to move the bar 48 to the left 
and shift the belt 8 from the fast to the loose 
pulley and thereby stop the machine. The 
Several parts of the belt-shifting mechanism 
will then occupy the position shown in full 
lines in Figs. 2 and 3. The several parts can 
be again set in the position indicated in Fig. 
1 by moving the hand-lever 44 to the right. 
The machine can also be stopped at any time 
by moving the hand-lever 44 to the left with 
out disturbing the tripping mechanism, since 
the dog 42 can be turned by the hand-lever 
44 to the necessary angle to release the spring 
52 and permit it to act on the bar 48 to shift 
the belt. 
In the event of any loose threads or bunch 
ing of the yarn which might pass by the fin 
ger 28 such threads or bunch will be caught 
by the hook 22, and the tripping mechanism 
Will be Operated in the same manner as here 
tofore described. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a knitting-machine, the combination 
With the belt, of a spring-actuated sliding rod 
48, a belt-shipper on said rod engaging the 
belt, a shaft journaled in a suitable bearing 
On the frame of the machine, a tripping-lever, 
a dog, and a hand-lever secured on said shaft 
to turn thereWith, an angle-arm on the rod 
48 engaging said dog to lock the rod against 
the action of its spring, a spring-actuated rod 
53 engaging the tripping-lever, and a tripping 
device actuated by defects in the knitted fab 
95 
Od 
IOS 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
572,680 
3 
ric and serving to lock the rod 53 against the 
action of its spring, Substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. In a knitting-machine, a belt-shipping 
mechanism, consisting of a pivoted bar, a le 
ver pivoted at one end on said bar, a spring 
connecting thefree end of the bar to the frame 
of the machine, a projection on the bar en 
gaging said lever, a shaft journaled on the 
frame of the machine, a tripping-lever, a dog, 
and a hand-lever secured to said shaft to turn 
therewith, a spring-actuated sliding rod car 
rying a belt-shipper, an angle-bar on said rod 
with which the dog engages to hold the slid 
O 
ing rod against the action of its spring, a rod 
pivoted at one end to the pivoted bar and en 
gaging at its other end the said tripping-le 
ver, and a tripping device to engage the free 
end of the lever on the pivoted bar to hold it 
against the action of its spring, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
DANIEL HURLEY. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES HAYES, 
CHARLES S. KEHOE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572780.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. . 
R. C. ULBRICH, 
HUMIDIFIER SYSTEMAND APPARATUS, 
No. 572,780. 
f 
Patented Dec. 8, 1896. 
 
(No Model.). 
No. 572,780. 
R. C. ULBRICH. 
HUMIDIFIER SYSTEM AND APPARATUS. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Dec. 8, 1896, 
2 2 
NSNSN 
2:2 
?zzzzzzzz2zzzzzZZZZZZZZZZ 
 
2 
zzzzzzzzzzzZzZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ? 
?===eesee!======================?? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The NRus refers co. Poolio. washin-GTON, O...", 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD C. ULBRICH, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO 
WILLIAM FIRTH, OF WINCHESTER, MASSACHUSETTS. 
HUMIDI FER SYSTEM AND APPARATUS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,780, dated December 8, 1896. 
Application filed March 23, 1896, Serial No. 584,388, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may conce7n: 
able valve controlling the same to enable 
fluid under pressure, introduced through the 
Beit known that I, RICHARDC. ULBRICH, 
supply-pipe, to be passed through the latter 
of Boston, county of Suffolk, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
and the return-pipe to free both from any 
Eumidifier Systems and Apparatus, of which 
sediment or obstacle. 
the following description, in connection with 
My invention also comprehends a novel 
the accompanying drawings, is a specifica 
construction of humidifier apparatus to be 
tion, like letters on the drawings represent 
hereinafter described. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, 
ing like parts. 
This invention relates to systems for mois 
in vertical section, shows a structure or mill 
tening or humidifying the atmosphere of mills 
equipped with a humidifier system embody 
ing my invention; and Fig. 2, a vertical sec 
and the like and commonly known as hu 
midifier systems. 
tion of a humidifier, such as maybe employed 
As at present usually installed humidifier 
in the system Fig. 1. 
systems comprise a plurality of humidifiers 
In the embodiment of my invention illus 
distributed throughout the mill or building 
trated in the drawings the structure or mill 
and fed or supplied by a common water-pipe, 
A is shown as provided with the main and 
second floors at a' and roof a, and suspended 
the condensation or particles of water which 
do not pass off with the air being collected 
from the said roof and second floors, respec 
in the bottoms of the various humidifiers, 
tively, are the various humidifiers B B, the 
from which they are conducted away by or 
same being of suitable or desired construc 
through a common return-pipe. This return 
tion, such, for instance, as shown in Fig. 2. 
is usually more or less sluggish, and, as Ihave 
The humidifier herein shown and embody 
foundin practice, usually becomes clogged to a 
ing a part of my invention comprises a suit 
able casing, as k, provided at its upper open 
considerable extent with sediment, or in some 
cases completely stopped by the collection of 
end with a suitable bail , by which it may 
be suspended in suitable or desired position, 
Sediment therein. In the systems as hereto 
fore installed it has been impossible to blow 
and provided at its lower end with an out 
Wardly and downwardly flaring foot-flange ic', 
out or free the various pipes of sediment, for 
supported by suitable radial division plates 
the reason that water underpressure, which af 
or supports l, resting upon the upwardly-in 
fords the most convenient means for cleaning 
clined flange or cone m, to which flange lic' is 
the pipes, could not be forced through the 
firmly secured by suitable fastenings, as, for 
same because of the absence of any means 
instance, the bolts in. Alipac, projecting in 
for preventing the water, when forced through 
the return-pipe, backing up into the humidi 
Wardly at the bottom of the flange ic', serves 
to catch the drops of water which follow 
fiers. 
My invention has for one of its objects to 
down the interior of the casing, from which it 
overcome this defect by providing means 
Overflows or is conducted in suitable manner 
whereby fluid or water under pressure may 
to the Well formed by and within the conical 
be forced through the entire system for the 
base or flange n, from the lowest point in 
which leads the outlet t through a suitably 
purpose of cleaning the same without neces 
threaded nipple t'. 
sarily passing such fluid or water through the 
Within the casing and suitably supported 
atomizing-nozzles and Without danger of the 
upon the conical bottom n, as by the feet p', 
water backing up into the humidifiers. 
I have shown an annular cone or ring p, upon 
One part of my invention consists in pro 
which rests the cone proper, p, the latter be 
viding suitable valves, or means at opposite 
ing preferably provided at its upper end with 
sides the humidifiers, whereby passage of 
a suitable handle (shown as an eye p) by 
fluid from either the supply or return pipes 
may be blocked, and providing at a suitable: 
which it may be raised or removed from its 
seat on the ring p, it having suitable guides 
point a connection between the supply and 
the return pipes of the system with a suit- or holding devices (shown as feet p") to retain 
95 
do 
O 
3d 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
572,780 
d 
25 
35 
45 
55 
it in position upon the ring p when in use, as the returns d and d to a suitable discharge 
point. 
in Fig. 2. 
The outlet t is provided with a suitable 
When any of the pipes of the system be 
valve, herein shown as a screw-plugt, (repre 
come clogged or stopped by reason of the de 
sented in dotted lines, Fig. 2,) by which it 
posit of sediment or other obstacles therein, 
may be closed when desired, access to the 
due to the slow movement of the humidify 
outlet for closing and opening this valve be 
ing fluid therethrough, the inlet and outlet 
ing had through the top of the casing with 
valvesb" and lifor the several humidifiers may 
the cone premoved. 
be closed to prevent the fluid under pressure 
from reaching atomizing-nozzles or the inte 
The water-inlet f is shown as a suitable fit 
ting secured in or to the bail b, it carrying a 
rior of the casings and the valves e' opened, 
suitable depending filter or strainerf', shown 
when fluid, such as water, under pressure may 
be forced rapidly through the supply-pipes 
as interiorly threaded at its lower end to re 
ceive the threaded nipplef, having a spray 
and through the connections ee to and back 
through the return-pipes for the purpose of 
ing outlet or nozzle at f. Upon this nipple, 
which is shown as exteriorly threaded for its 
removing any sediment or obstacles therein. 
entire length, I have mounted the ring-like 
The pipes having been thoroughly cleaned 
yoke f", into or through which, at its lower 
the valves e' are closed and the valves b' and 
t opened and the system operated as before. 
end, is tapped a spraying device, shown as a 
screw f', having its pointed end f' directly 
My invention is not limited to the particu 
opposite and opposed to the delivery-nozzle 
lar construction or arrangementherein shown, 
f, so that water issuing through the said noz 
nor to its use in connection with any mill Ol' 
other building in particular, nor in connec 
zle will be sprayed in umbrella-like form 
downwardly and outwardly toward the inte 
tion with any particular construction of here 
rior walls of the casing, to thereby serve not 
in-defined apparatus, one part of my inven 
Only to draw air downwardly through and 
tion, broadly stated, lying in a connection in 
Within the said casing, but also to charge 
dependent of the humidifiers between the in 
Such air with moisture in desired quantity, 
let or Supply and outlet or return pipes of the 
the moistened air being directed by the cone 
system, whereby fluid under pressure may be 
p toward the opening between the flange lic' 
forced rapidly through the said pipes for the 
and base n, through which said air escapes 
purpose of cleaning the same. 
into the room. 
Having described my invention, what I 
The spraying device herein shown has a 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
capacity of wide adjustment, for the nipple 
f is adjustable vertically in the casing f' to 
1. In a humidifier system, the combination 
Vary the height of the spray, and the yoke if 
with one or more humidifiers, and inlet and 
is adjustable On the nipple, and the spraying 
return pipes for the same, of a connectionin 
screw f is adjustable in the yoke, a lock-nut 
dependent of said humidifiers, or either of 
f being herein provided to retain the yoke 
them, between the inlet and supply pipes, 
in locked position on the nipple, or it may be 
and means to control said connections, sub 
used to retain the nipple in locked position 
stantially as described. 
in the shellf'. 
2. In a humidifier system, the combination 
Referring now to Fig. 1, the several hu 
With One or more usual humidifiers, and in 
midifiers are supplied with the humidifying 
let and return pipes for the same, of one or 
fluid, usually water, through the supply-pipes 
more connections between the said inlet and 
c c, shown as leading from a common stand 
returnpipes and independent of said humidi 
pipe c', connected with a suitable supply, as 
fiers, and valves in and to control the said 
the Street-main, the returns d, connected with 
connections and to control the inlets and re 
the outletst of the several humidifiers, being 
turns for the several humidifiers, substan 
shown as joined to the common return-pipes 
tially as described. 
3. A humidifier apparatus containing a suit 
d", also shown as connected with a common 
stand or returnpipe d. Each of the humidi 
able casing, a spraying device arranged there 
fiers is shown as provided with a suitable 
in, a return or Outlet at the bottom of said 
usual inlet-valve l', controlling the supply of 
casing, and a removable cone covering said 
humidifying fluid to the same. At the ends 
outlet removal of which gives accesss to said 
of the respective lines of pipes c and d' I 
outlet, substantially as described. 
have joined the same by suitable connections 
4. A humidifier apparatus containing a suit 
e e, controlled by valves e' of suitable or de 
able casing, a spraying device arranged there 
sired construction. 
in, and an Outlet at or near the bottom of said 
In the normal operation of the system the 
casing, and a ring supported above the bot 
valves e' are closed and the valves b' and t of 
tom of Said casing, and a removable cone ar 
the several apparatus are maintained open, 
ranged on said ring and normally covering 
the humidifying fluid then flowing through 
said outlet, substantially as described. 
the supply-pipes to the several humidifiers, 
5. A humidifier apparatus containing a suit 
the condensation and particles of fluid not 
able casing, a spraying device arranged there 
taken up by the air being conducted through 
in, an outlet at the bottom of the casing, a 
IS- 
- 
- 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
2C) 
I 25 
572,780 
3. 
Valve controlling the same, and a removable ing screw or point threaded in said yoke, all 
cone normally covering said outlet and its to operate, substantially as described. 
valve removal of the cone permitting the free 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
access to said valve, Substantially as de-name to this specification in the presence of 
RICHARD C. ULBRICH. 
5 scribed. 
6. In a humidifier apparatus, the combina- 
tion. With a Suitable casing, of a support ar- 
ranged within the same, an exteriorly-thread-. 
ed nozzle tapped in said support, a support- 
Io ing-yoke threaded on said nozzle, and a spray- 
two subscribing witnesses. 
w 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK L. EMERY, 
TAURA. S. MANIX. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572880.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 572,880. 
N 
s 
SN 
NS- 
E. FLANNIGAIN. 
BALL BEARING. 
Patented Deo. 8, 1896. 
Gy 
N 
SS N Se\ 
n 
(3) N. 
&SN, 
- 
N 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD FLANNIGAIN, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO FRANK W. KLOCKE, OF SAME PLACE. 
BALL BEARNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,880, dated December 8, 1896. 
Application filed July 20, 1896, Serial No. 599,950, (No model.) 
To all tuhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD FLANNIGAIN, 
of the city of St. Louis, State of Missouri, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
5 provements in Ball-Bearings, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming a part hereof. 
My invention relates to ball-bearings; and 
Io it consists in the novel construction, combi 
nation, and arrangement of parts hereinafter 
shown, described, and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a sectional view through the hub 
of the front wheel of a bicycle and illustrat 
I5 ing the application of my invention thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of a part of a bicy 
cle-wheel, showing an end view of the hub 
With the cone of the bearing removed. Fig. 
3 is a plan view of the spider upon which the 
2O balls of my improved bearing are journaled. 
Referring to Fig. 1, the shaft or axle 5 con 
nects the free ends 6 and 7 of the front fork 
of the bicycle-frame and passes through the 
hub 8 of the front wheel of the bicycle, and 
25 the spokes 9 are attached to the flanges 10 of 
the hub in the usual way. The hub 8 of the 
Wheel consists of the tube 11, which fits 
loosely upon the center of the shaft 5. 
hemispherical cup 12 is formed integral with 
3O. One end of the tube 11, and a hemispherical 
Cup 13 is formed integral with the opposite 
end of said tube 11. The spider 14 is placed 
upon the shaft 5 within the cup 12, and the 
spider 15 is placed upon the shaft 5 within 
35 the Cup 13. The spiders 14 and 15 are essen 
tially alike and are constructed as shown in 
Fig. 3, and each consists of a ring 16 and the 
arms 17, projecting from said ring. The arms 
17 extend radially from the ring 16 and at 
4o angles between the horizontal and vertical. 
The rings 16 are placed loosely upon the shaft 
5, and the bearing-balls 18, having the cen 
tral bores 19, are placed against the inner 
Surfaces of the cups, with the arms 17 in said 
45 bores 19. The cones 20 and 21 are then placed 
upon the ends of the shaft 5 and against the 
bearing-balls 18. The cones 20 and 21 are 
essentially alike, and the surfaces 22 and 23 
of Said cones, against which the bearing-balls 
5o 18 Operate, are slightly concaved and are con 
Centric relative to the shaft 5. The inner 
A. r 
 
55 
75 
surfaces 24 and 25 of the cups 12 and 13, and 
against which the bearing-balls 18 operate, 
are also concentric relative to the shaft 5. 
The nut 26 is placed upon one end of the 
shaft 5 and against the outer surface of the 
COne 20, and a similar nut 27 is placed upon 
the opposite end of the shaft 5 and against 
the outer surface of the cone 21. A jam-nut 
28 is placed upon the end of the shaft 5 and 
against the nut 26, and a second jam-nut 29 
is placed upon the other end of the shaft 5 
and against the nut 27. 
The end 6 of the 
fork of the bicycle-frame is placed upon the 
end of the shaft 5 and against the shoulder 
30, which shoulder is outside of the jam-nut 
28. The end 7 of the fork is placed upon the 
Opposite end of the shaft 5 and against the 
shoulder 31, which is outside of the jam-nut 
29. A nut 32 is then placed upon the ex 
treme outer end of the shaft 5 and against 
the end 6 of the bicycle-frame, and a similar 
nut 33 is placed upon the opposite end of said 
shaft 5 and against the end 7 of the fork of 
the bicycle-frame. 
The bearing may be shifted upon the shaft 
5 by the operation of the nuts 26, 27, 28, 
and 29, and Said bearing may be adjusted to 
take up the slack motion caused by wearing 
of the parts by manipulation of either the 
nutS 26 and 28 or the nuts 27 and 29. 
The feature of my invention to which I 
wish to call especial attention is the use of 
the spider shown in Fig. 3, upon which the 
bearing-balls are mounted. The object of 
this spider is to hold the balls apart and to 
keep them arranged radially around the shaft 
of the bearing, and by this construction the 
bearing requires a small number of balls and 
the friction caused by the rubbing of the balls 
together is avoided. 
Another important feature of my invention. 
consists in mounting the cones for rotation 
upon the shaft. This feature is valuable as 
a safety device should the bearing stick for 
any reason, Such as the breaking of the balls. 
The cones will readily rotate upon the shaft 
and the wheel may continue to run for some 
time without injury to the parts. 
A ball-bearing of my improved construc 
tion possesses many other advantages over 
those heretofore in use which will readily 
95 
OO 
2 
572,880 
suggest themselves to those familiar with the 
construction of ball-bearings. 
While I have shown my invention in con 
nection with a bicycle-wheel, it is obvious 
that it may be used in any device in which a 
ball-bearing would be advantageous. 
I claim 
1. A ball-bearing consisting of the shaft 5, 
the tube 11 mounted loosely upon said shaft, 
the hemispherical cups 12 and 13 formed in 
tegral with the ends of said tube 11, the spi 
ders 14 and 15 upon the shaft 5 and within 
the cups 12 and 13, respectively; each of said 
spiders consisting of the ring 16 and the arms 
17 formed integral with said ring; the bear 
ing-balls 18 mounted upon said arms 17, the 
cones 20 and 21 mounted upon the ends of 
said shaft and against the bearing-balls 18, 
Said cones having concaved annular surfaces 
22 and 23 respectively, against which said 
bearing-balls operate, and means of holding 
said cones and said tube adjustably in posi 
tion, Substantially as specified. 
2. A ball-bearing consisting of the shaft 5, 
the tube 11 mounted loosely upon said shaft, 
25 
the hemispherical cups 12 and 13 formed in 
tegral with the ends of said tube 11, the spi 
ders 14 and 15 upon the shaft 5 and within 
said cups 12 and 13 respectively; each of said 
spiders consisting of the ring 16 and the arms 
17 formed integral with said ring; the bear 
ing-balls 18 mounted upon said arms 17, the 
cones 20 and 21 mounted upon the ends of 
said shaft and against the bearing-balls 18, 
said cones having concaved annular surfaces 
22 and 23 respectively, against which said 
bearing-balls operate, and means of holding 
said cones and said tube adjustably in posi 
tion; which means consists of the nuts 26 and 
27, one upon each end of said shaft and out 
side of said cones, and the jam-nuts 28 and 
29, one upon each end of said shaft and out 
side of said nuts 26 and 27, substantially as 
specified. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 45 
35 
EDWARD FLANNIGAIN. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD E. LONGAN, 
S. G. WELLS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US572980.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 572,980, 
C. A. GORDON, 
FODDER BINDER. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Dec. 15, 1896. 
 
IIIHIII 
I 
(LALIIIHHMIS) 
III. 
||||||III 
III 
All AEA AH 
6 
as 
At2 
2 
O 
 
A7 
 
  
68 
 
  
 
 
 
 
L o 
a6 
 
 
 
 
 
4. 
A52 
Ipiegfe 
Klitgesses - 
2/622,v 
?& 73744-2. 
y Zzz's of forays, (Zarzes 16oradoza 
6%-76. 
He morris PERs co, PHord-tild, WASHMCON.o, G. 
(No Model.) 
C. A. G. ORD ON. 
FOIDDER BINDER 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 572,980, 
Patented Dec. 15, 1896. 
  
Ipileptor 
A 
fy Z27s Afforty-ysOZeazzas 4627-zozz/ 
NY 
is 7 
wites 
g 6. 22 
THE Morris PETERs co, PHoyo-LTHo., washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A. GORDON, OF SCRUGGS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
CHARLES A. SULLENS, OF SAME PLACE. 
FODDER-BINDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 572,980, dated December 15, 1896. 
Application filed March 28, 1896, Serial No. 585,258, (No model.) 
O 
To Culd livhon, it u(tly concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES A. GORDON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Scruggs, in the county of Cole and State of 
Missouri, have invented a new and useful 
Fodder-Binder, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to fodder-binders, 
and has for its object to provide a device of 
this character which is portable, capable of 
folding into a compact form, effective for the 
purpose designed, and which will enable the 
farmerto firmly and securely bind the fodder, 
whereby the latter can be economically fed 
and stored for future use. 
For a full understanding of the merits and 
advantages of the invention reference is to 
be had to the accompanying drawings and the 
following description. 
The improvement is susceptible of various 
changes in the form, proportion, and the mi 
nor details of construction without departing 
from the principle or sacrificing any of the 
advantages thereof, and to a full disclosure of 
the invention an adaptation thereof is shown 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the appli 
ance as it will appear when in position for 
use. Fig. 2 shows the device folded. Fig. 3 
is a transverse section showing a bundle held 
in the embrace of the clamp-band or tempo 
rary binder. Fig. 4 is a rear elevation of the 
device, parts of the twine-box being broken 
away to show the position of the spindle. 
Corresponding and like parts are referred 
to in the following description and indicated 
in all the views of the drawings by the same 
reference-characters. 
. The framework of the appliance consists, 
essentially, of end pieces formed of corre 
sponding bars 1 and 2, crossing near their 
lower ends, a longitudinal rod 3, pivotally 
connecting the bars 1 and 2 at their point of 
crossing and at the same time joining the end 
pieces, and upper longitudinal rods 4 and 5, 
connecting the corresponding bars 1 and 2 
near their upper ends and supplementing the 
tying action of the longitudinal rod 3, the 
whole forming a light, substantial, and du 
rable structure. Linked connections 6 unite 
the rods 4 and 5 near their ends and at a point 
intermediate of their ends and serve to limit 
the outward movement or spread of the bars 
1 and 2 at their upper ends, and by having 
these connections 6 linked or flexible they 
will close, so as to admit of the folding of the 
structure when it is required to reduce the 
same to a compact form. Parallel stay-bars 
7 connect the rods 3 and 4 at a point inter 
mediate of their ends and stiffen and brace 
the same, and a corresponding stay-bar S 
connects the rods 3 and 5 at a middle point 
and comes opposite the space between the 
stay-bars 7. These bars 7 and 8 have loose 
connection with their respective rods, so as 
to admit of the structure being easily folde 
when desired. 
s 
A lever 9 is mounted upon the rod 3 be 
tween the lower ends of the stay-bars 7, and 
its outer end is supplied with a foot-rest 10 
to enable the operator to secure a firm pur 
chase upon the outer end of the lever with 
his foot when it is required to draw the clamp 
band or temporary binder tightly about the 
bundle. This foot-rest is curved upwardly 
at its outer end to prevent the slipping of the 
foot when exerting a downward pressure upon 
the lever 9 to compress the bundle. A hook 
11 is secured to the lever near its outer end, 
and is adapted to engage with One of the 
links of a short chain 12 at the free end of the 
clamp-band 13 and to engage with a staple or 
eye 14 near the upper end of the stay-bar 8, 
so as to hold the structure in folded relation. 
The clamp-band 13 is secured at one end to 
that portion of the longitudinal rod 4 coming 
between the stay-bars 7, and is provided at 
its free end with a short chain. 12, the links 
of which are adapted to be engaged by the 
hook 11 or which are adapted to engage With 
a hook 15 at the upper end of the stay-bar 
8, so as to hold the clamp-band either out 
of the way or in position when forming a 
bundle. An apron or support 16 is stretched 
between the upper ends of the bars 1, 2, 7, 
and 8 and receives the fodder during the 
formation of the bundle. This apron or Sup 
port is preferably a textile fabric and is re 
movably attached to the several bars, pref 
erably by being supplied with buttonholes to 
receive buttons 17, attached to the bars to 
which the apron or support is secured. A 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
55 
75 
95 
CU 
2 
572,980 
7 O 
75 
notch 18 is formed in the front edge of the 
apron 16 opposite the space between the 
upper ends of the stay-bars 7 and affords 
clearance for the clamp-band or temporary 
binder 13. 
A foot-board 19 has pivotal or hinge con 
nection with the lower ends of the bars 2 and 
provides a support for the operator and ob 
viates the necessity of his.standing in mud 
when the fodder is located upon low and 
marshy ground. Cords or chains 20 connect 
the Outer corners of the foot-board with the 
upper ends of the bars 1, the parts being SO 
disposed that upon folding the structure the 
foot-board will likewise close without any 
care or attention on the part of the attend 
ant and will remain folded until the appli 
ance is again set up for use. These cords or 
chains 20 also support the outer portion of 
the foot-board and prevent it from sinking 
into Wet and marshy land. 
A twine-box 2 is attached to the lower 
portion of the stay-bar S and receives the 
cord or twine by means of which the bundle 
is permanently bound, the said cord or twine 
22 passing through an opening in the box 
and through an opening near the upper end 
of the bar 8, thence through a guide-eye 23, 
and engaged at its outer end by a spring 
holder 24, applied to the upper end of one of 
the stay-bars 7. A cutter 25 is secured to the 
upper end of the stay-bar S and provides a 
convenient and ready means for severing the 
cord or twine 22 when it is required to se 
cure a length thereof sufficient to bind a 
bundle. In some instances it is desirable to 
provide the twine-box with a spindle 26, upon 
which short lengths of cord or twine are 
Wound, said lengths being tied together after 
being gathered from the thresher. 
The operation of the binder is as follows: 
The cord or twine 22 is passed across the 
apron or support 16 and its free end is en 
gaged with the spring - holder 24 and the 
clamp-band or temporary binder is similarly 
placed upon the apron or support. The fod 
del to be bound is placed upon the apron or 
Support 10 until a sufficient quantity has ac 
cumulated to form a bundle of required size, 
after which the free end of the clamp-band 
or temporary binder is passed over the bundle 
and engaged with the hook 11, when upon 
pressing the outer end of the lever 9 downward 
the clamp-band will be drawn tightly about 
the bundle, and while the bundle is held in 
the embrace of the temporary binder the cord 
Or twine 22 is drawn around tho bundle and 
its ends Secured or knotted in any convenient 
Way, after which the temporary binder is re 
leased and the bound bundle thrown aside, 
and the Operation just described is repeated. 
The several bars are held against displace 
ment or movement along the longitudinal 
rods by means of washers 27 and pins 28, the 
pins passing through openings in the rods 
and the Washers being interposed between 
the pins and the adjacent sides of the bars 
to prevent the wearing away and cutting of 
the latter by the pins, as will be readily un 
derstood. When the structure is folded, the 
hook 11 is engaged with the staple or eye 14, 
thereby holding the parts in their folded con 
dition, as most clearly shown in Fig. 2. 
For convenience in transporting the device 
from one shock to another a shoulder-strap 
29 is employed, and this strap is engaged at 
its ends with rings 30 on the longitudinal rod 
4 adjacent to the stay-bars 7, the connection 
being effected in any convenient Way, pref 
erably by means of snap-hooks, which admit 
of the shoulder-strap being readily discon 
nected, so as to be out of the way, and quickly 
applied when required for use. This strap 
29 is engaged with the shoulder or upper por 
tion of the person in any convenient way, so 
as to lessen the effort required to be exerted 
when carrying the device from one place to 
another. 
IIaving thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. In a fodder-binder, the combination of 
crossed bars, a longitudinal rod pivotally con 
necting the bars at their point of crossing, 
other longitudinal rods connecting the bars 
near their upper ends, linked connections 
uniting the longitudinal rods at their ends 
and intermediate of their ends, a flexible sup 
port or apron having connection with the up 
per ends of the aforesaid bars and a tempo 
rary binder, the parts being disposed to admit 
of the structure folding, substantially in the 
lmanner set forth for the purpose described. 
2. In a fodder-binder, the combination of 
end pieces composed of crossed bars, alongi 
tudinal rod connecting the end pieces and ex 
tending through the said bars at the point of 
crossing, upper longitudinal rods connecting 
corresponding bars of the end pieces, connec 
tions uniting the upper longitudinal rods at 
different points in their length to distribute 
the strain and admit of the structure folding, 
stay-bars connecting the lower longitudinal 
rod with the respective upper longitudinal 
rods, an apron or flexible support secured to 
the upper ends of the crossed and stay bars 
and a temporary binder, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a fodder-binder, the combination of 
end pieces composed of crossed bars, alongi 
tudinal rod pivotally connecting the bars at 
the point of crossing, upper longitudinal rods 
connecting corresponding bars, parallel stay 
bars connecting the lower and an upper lon 
gitudinal rod, another stay-bar connecting 
the opposite longitudinal rod with the lower 
longitudinal rod and coming opposite the 
space between the parallel stay-bars, a flexi 
ble support secured to the upper ends of the 
crossed and stay bars and having a notch op 
posite the space between the upper ends of 
the parallel stay-bars, and a clamp-band 
adapted to pass through the notch in the sup 
port and secured to that portion of the upper 
longitudinal rod coming between the upper 
95 
IOO 
IO5 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
O 
25 
35 
49 
45 
55 
65 
572,980 
3 
25 
holder applied to one of the parallel stay 
bars, a twine-box supported by the stay-bar 
bearing the cutter, a lever having a foot-rest 
at its outer end and mounted upon the lower 
longitudinal rod, a clamp-band having con 
nection with that portion of the upper rod 
coming between the parallel stay-bars, a hook 
near the outer end of the said lever to engage 
with the free end of the clamp-band and with 
the staple near the upper end of the stay-bar 
bearing the cutter, a flexible support secured 
to the upper ends of the several bars, a foot 
board having pivotal connection with the 
lower ends of corresponding end bars, and 
connections between the outer portion of the 
foot-board and the adjacent upper ends of the 
crossed bars, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES A GORDON. 
Witnesses: 
THOS. B. MAHAN, 
H. P. CHURCH, Jr. 
IO 
ends of the parallel stay-bars, Substantially 
as set forth. 
4. The combination with a folding fodder 
binder comprising crossed bars pivotally con 
nected at the point of crossing, of a foot-board 
having pivotal connection with the lower ends 
of corresponding crossed bars, and connec 
tions between the outer portion of the foot 
board and the upper ends of the opposite 
crossed bars, substantially as set forth for the 
purpose described. 
5. The herein-described portable and fold 
ing fodder-binder, comprising crossed bars, a 
longitudinal rod pivotally connecting the 
crossed bars, upper longitudinal rods connect 
ing corresponding crossed bars, connections 
uniting the upper rods at different points in 
their length, parallel stay-bars connecting an 
upper with the lower longitudinal rod, an 
other stay-bar connecting the opposite With 
the lower longitudinal rod and coming oppo 
site the space between the parallel stay-bars, 
a cutter, staple and hook applied to the up 
per end portion of the latter stay-bar, a spring 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573080.txt	(No Model.) 
T. DUNCAN, 
ELECTRIC METER . 
6 Sheets-Sheet, . 
No. 573,080. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1896. 
sts 
..a 
R Cord 
a g 
O 
928)iticssos 
-72 ef 
46-4-4 
 
2 
A1 A fa, 7. 
33 his eletozves 
3v-uc-vitov 
-- 
-/2/zza2S Zecazz 
2-az-8%- 
(No Model.) 
T. DUN CAN. 
ELECTRIC METER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 573,080, 
Patented Deo, 15, 1896. 
Af 
- - 6 
Z7 
E-Z" 
Af? 
7 7 
C 
s 
A/ 
| 
Y 27 
5. 
Gill 
Z 
6? 
A2 
Z 
G 
|-- 
i. 
f 
- : 
i. 
- ; it ea 7 
6 Y / 
77 / 
TE 
-- 
--- 
A74 & /3/4?. 
7 
HEATHILHA'I, 
& He 
ITI telli 
1-oc 
-7 
7 
e 
3. 
7 
2 y G 777. 2 A 2 
alser/ 
341-vov to 
E 
N. 
N 
28itvicesco 
27,a1 26-e- 
s\6-4-4-6-e 
33 hus eletovics 
- 
AzSzczz w 
6.-2,4-6. 
"f Norris PETERs co. Photo-liro, washington, d. c. 
) 
 
(No Model.) 
T. DUN CAN. 
ELECTRIC METER, 
6 sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 573,080. 
Patented Deo, 15, 1896. 
na 
R 
NEN 
N 
S 
s 
SN N 
N 
Na 
NQ 
f- 
V N 
N 
5 
RS 
o 
S 
\ 
- 
- - 
- 
T 
s 
SS W 
try 
s W\'s  
sis SEE, 
SS 2. 
=s E. 
SS Seas 
lia GE 
E 
t 
- 
Y 
s 
N 
N 
n 
SN 
N 
Ly N YS. 
SS 
S g N 
s 
- 
ill- SS 
RS SNs t 
ass 
s 
s 
r 
s - SS 
h 
S RS' 
--- 
| 
s 
F9FG R l 
is is 's 
s 
Qvitiesses 
2.72. 33 his as Z Zzcare 
f-4-4-6-e 
242-4 %-2, 
N - 
s 
3v-uc41 to 
!-- 
| 
| 
 
(No Model.) 
T, DUN CAN. 
ELECTRIC METER, 
- 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 573,080. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1896. 
 
3v-uc-vi-tet 
- Zzz Zzcz 
33 his &lteotics 
/.24-22, 2 
28itv.coco 
2,216-- 
46-7-- 4-6-4 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 573,080. 
T, DUN CAN. 
ELECTRIC METER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1896, 
  
 
OE 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
m 
28)itv cocco 
fig, 11. 
 
3v-uc:11bot 
Zazas ZZzzcz/ 
&ltrot vic 5 
(No Model.) 
No. 573,080. 
ta 
T. DUN CAN. 
ELECTRIC METER, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1896. 
A C / 
| 
28itv.cocco 
2 < 2/-, 
3vvue vitov 
S3 is sea?ovzzcz. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TIOMAS DUNCAN, OF FORT WAYNE, INDIAN A. 
ELECTRIC METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 573,080, dated December 15, 1896. 
Application filed July 22, 1896. Serial No. 600,087, (No model.) 
O 
3O 
To atti, it foil, it in?t 1/ CO7 (e11: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS DUNCAN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Fort 
Wayne, in the county of Allen and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvementsin Electric Meters, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention relates particularly to that 
class of meters having a wound armature and 
known as commutated integrating wattme 
ters, for either direct or alternating cur 
rents; but certain of its features are applica 
ble to other constructions, as will be evident 
from the ensuing description. 
There is a demand among central-station 
men, and, in fact, from every one identified 
with the care and management of electric me 
ters, for an instrument that shall be accurate, 
simple, easily adjusted, applicable alike to 
either direct or alternating current distribu 
tion, and, above all, that can be easily re 
paired and cleaned without having to be en 
tirely taken apart, as is the case with the 
present meters on the market, some of which, 
in fact, are so complicated tnat when anything 
goes Wrong the owners invariably return them 
to the makers for readjustment ol' repairs, 
thereby incurring decided expense that often 
assumes very considerable proportions during 
the year. 
To supply these Wants is the object of this 
invention; and it consists, among other things, 
in a novel form of field-coils; in combining 
with said field-coils an armature of peculiar 
winding; in providing for the ready and bodily 
removal of the spindle and parts carried there 
by, including the armature and rotary ele 
ment of the drag or brake, without disturbing 
the field-magnets or other agencies of the me 
ter; in combining with a brake-disk perma 
nent magnets of circular form, each lying 
wholly on one side of said disk and having its 
poles or ends bent or turned toward the sur 
face of the disk, and in a commutator com 
posed of an alloy of silver and nickel, all as 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
in the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of a meter embodying my invention in 
its preferred form. Fig. 2 is a side elevation 
thereof, the parts being in position for opera 
tion. Fig. 3 is also a side elevation illustrat 
ing the manner of detaching and removing 
the spindle, a rimature, and revolving drag 
from the stationary parts of the meter. Fig. 
4 is a plan view of the motive parts, including 
also the retarding-disk and permanent mag 
nets. Fig. 5 represents a form of almature 
spider to hold the armature-coils in position, 
while Fig. 6 is a detail of one of the arms of 
said spider as punched and before being sol 
dered into the hub. Figs. 7 to 12 show dif 
ferent forms of coils or methods of winding 
which may be employed in the construction 
of my improved armature. Fig. 13 is a modi 
fication or alternate construction of the mo 
tive parts in which the armature rotates be 
tween upper and lower sets of field-coils; and 
IFigs. 14 and 15 are diagrammatic views of the 
arrangement of the meter, respectively, in 
two and in three wire systems of constant-po 
tential distribution. 
The back plate A is provided with feet A' 
for attachment to a suitable support, with 
pocket A' for the reception of an insulating 
block A, of wood or other material, and with 
rib A* to center and stay the inclosing block 
or casing, and in these respects does not differ 
from others heretofore made by me. Secured 
to its face or projecting therefrom, near the 
top thereof, is a bracket B, having ears b, be 
tween which is hinged, by horizontal pivot b', 
the inner end of a bracket-arm B', which car 
tries the registering-train B at its outer end, 
and is normally held rigidly in position by 
screw U or other convenient fastening, with 
its body lying upon and a lined by the flat ex 
tension l of said bracket. Adjacent to the 
registering-train the bracket-arm receives the 
screw-bearing B' for the upper end of the me 
ter-spindle B, suitably stepped at its foot and 
driving the train through worm band inter 
meshing worm-wheel B, as usual in this class 
of machines. A jam-nut b serves to fix the 
bearing in position when once set and main 
tain its adjustment relatively to the spindle, 
and by taking out the screw U' the bracket 
arm may be thrown up, carrying with it the 
registering-train and worn-wheel, as in Fig. 
3, without disturbing such adjustment, to re 
lease the spindle for removal, or may be re 
turned when the spindle is restored to posi 
tion and instantly hold it under exactly the 
same adjustment as before. 
Care the field or series coils, haying the 
- 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
ICC) 
45 
 
2 
573,080 
O 
general outline of a segment of a circle, the 
arc of which approximates one hundred and 
eighty degrees and the chord of which is here 
in shown as centrally somewhat inset or pro 
vided with a jog ol' incurved reach c to give 
clearance for the meter-spindle, it being un 
derstood that such jog may be omitted, if de 
sired, and the necessary clearance provided 
by spacing the coils a little farther apart. 
These are held at the proper height and in a 
plane at right angles to the spindle by a cast 
ing or castings C", secured to the back plate 
by screws c' and having outstretching curved 
arms C, which grip the exposed periphery or 
curvilinear limbs of the coils, and clamping 
fingers c, which embrace them at the junction 
of the arc and the chord, as clearly shown in 
Fig. 4 of the drawings, the arrangement be 
ing such that the chordal limbs run parallel 
with each other, one on each side of the spin 
dle, and sufficiently apart to admit the lateral 
removal or introduction of said spindle be 
tween them. Should more than two sellies 
coils be desired in the same plane, they may 
be Wollind in segment form, as will be readily 
understood from the ensuing description of 
the armature and its windings, but the con 
struction described I now consider preferable. 
The series coils are traversed by the current 
Supplying the lamps, motors, or other trans 
lating devices, and are put in circuit by con 
necting their terminals cl to the lower bind 
ing-posts D and D'by screws (l', the two leads 
from the generator entering through aper 
tures d' in the casing and being connected to 
the two left-hand posts D and D'by the screws 
(l, and the wires of the work-circuit being 
clamped in the right-hand posts ID' and ID by 
screws (l' and leaving through apertures on 
that side. This arrangement gives the cliffer 
ence of potential of the circuit between the 
uppel' alld lowe' binding-posts, so that the 
necessary shunt connection for the armature 
can be made within the meter. 
A disk al'mature E is located upon the spin 
die directly underneath the series coils, and 
consists of a number of sector-shaped coils E 
of fine wire held by the spokes or radiating 
arms of the spider or support, E, secured to 
the spindle. These arms may conveniently 
be made of punchings E, having shanks e, 
by which they are soldered to their lub e' 
and teeth e'e', which are turned alternately 
above alld beneath in either direction to bind 
upon the coils and hold them in position. 
Current is Supplied to the armature from the 
upper and lower left-hand binding - posts 
through the terminals e, non-inductive re 
sistance E, covered and protected by a metal 
shield e on the back of the meter, brushes E, 
and commutator. E", thus blinging it, in shunt, 
to the Work-circuit. The armature may have 
any number of coils. For instance, in Fig. 
7 it is shown With eight, in Fig. S with twelve, 
and in Fig. 9 with six, the apexes e" of the 
Sector's being more or less acute and well 
defined, while in Fig. 10 there are four and in 
Fig. 11 three coils with injogged ol' truncate 
apexes ef to clear the hub of the armature 
frame or spider, and in Fig. 12 there are but 
two coils having a segment outline with a 
jogged or insetting reach e in the chord, as 
in the series coils herein before described. 
This peculiar winding results in the utiliza 
tion of a maximum number of lines of force 
from the series coils, or, in other words, a 
maximum effective area of force, and brings 
the armature-coils constantly within the in 
fluence of practically the entire field of the 
series coils, since, as shown in Fig. 4, the 
arcal limbs of the series coils coincide with 
the arcal limbs of the armature-coils, the jogs 
or curved reaches of the chordal sides of the 
series coils (or apexes, if they are sector 
wound) with the apexes of the al'mature 
coils, and the chordal or radial limbs of said 
series coils with the radial limbs of Said ar 
mature-coils. 
When a current traverses the series coils, 
a magnetic field is established that varies in 
the same ratio as the current. IIence it cal) 
be said that the field strength is at all times 
proportional to the current passing through 
them. The disk armature, (shown in Fig. I 
as placed underneath the series coils, but 
which may be placed above them or dupli 
cated, one above and one beneath, or arranged 
between upper and lower groups of selries 
coils, as in Fig. 13,) being in shunt or paral 
lel, will be supplied with a current depend 
ing upon its resistance and the pressure to 
which it is subjected. I lowever, since its re 
sistance is constant, the current flowing 
through it will vary with the electromotive 
force or pressure of the generator. This pro 
duces a field in the armature the intensity of 
which will be proportional to the electromo 
tive force at any instalt. We have then a 
torque produced by these two fields, one rep 
resenting the current strength, the other the 
electromotive force, and which is cqual to 
the product of their strengths. 
The Watts or energy being equal to the procl 
lict of the current C and the clectromotive 
force E, or E X C, it is obvious that the torque 
of the series field and tho amature-field is 
also equal to the watts. The instrument will 
therefore register the true energy at all times, 
even though the current in the series coils and 
that in the armature be clhanging in strength, 
i. e., the torque present will always be equal 
to the watts. 
Upon the meter-spindle is secured a me 
tallic disk F, of aluminium, for example, which 
lotates between the poles of the permanent 
magnets F and thereby generates a load or 
brake force upon which the motor does Work 
in order that its speed may be proportional 
to the watts, as is well understood in the art. 
In the present instalnce the magnets are con 
structed and arranged in such manner that 
the disk and spindle may be readily removed 
or withdrawn without disturbing their normal 
position. Each magnet is complete by itself 
7 O 
So 
IOO, 
I O5 
Cy 
3 5 
55 
 
578,080 
3. 
On its own side of the disk and is circular in 
outline, as at f, with its poles f', turned or 
dipped in or down toward the disk from the 
plane of the body portion, which is or may be 
parallel with the disk. This form is easily 
made, easily placed in position, removed with 
ease When necessary, easily magnetized, much 
stronger for a given weight of steel than any 
other form, and with less leakage between its 
limbs, since it is the ideal form, circular. 
In the magnetic brake most commonly in 
lse horseshoe-magnets are so arranged that 
their limbs embrace opposite sides of the 
brake-disk and their yokes are necessarily 
outside of the periphery thereof. In this con 
Struction when the disk is set in rotation the 
eddy-currents tend to push and do push the 
lines of force of the magnet from the pole 
pieces back toward the neutral part or yoke, 
So that when the disk is in motion many of 
these lines entirely escape it, passing through 
the air-gap between the yoke and the edge of 
the disk. This condition is such that it does 
not allow a constant number of lines of mag 
netic force to cut the disk at any and all 
Speeds, the result being that the quicker the 
(lisk rotates the Weaker, apparently, will the 
magnets become, resulting finally in over 
speed of the metor on any load. Again, when 
these lines of force are pushed back many 
times it in the end weakens the strength of 
the magnet as a whole, because it changes 
the molecular setting from its original state. 
Pushing back the lines also causes them to 
cut another and new part of the disk having 
a different surface speed from that which 
should be, or, as it were, for every speed the 
majority of lines will have no definite place 
to cut through. In the employment of mag 
nets according to the present invention these 
conditions cannot occur. The leakage toward 
the yoke When the disk rotates between the 
magnets is imperceptible, since the air-space 
is so large that the lines of force must cut 
through the diskin order to leak at any point. 
Very few lines will pass between N and S of 
the individual magnets, because the air-gap 
is So much greater than between these poles 
and the adjacent poles of the opposing mag 
net on the other side of the disk. Therefore 
the great mass of the lines will be forced to 
cut the disk directly at the poles. 
The magnets are held firmly in place by 
the casting G, of brass, secured to the back 
plate by screws g and having upper and lower 
projecting arms G' G', supplied with clamp 
ing-fingers g'g'', whereby the magnets are em 
braced. To vary the strength of the drag, the 
lower magnet, which of course is placed with 
its poles reversed in sign to the opposite poles 
of the upper, may be moved backward and 
forward in the horizontal in any suitable man 
ner, as herein shown, and its clamping-fingers 
gare to this end formed independently of the 
table-form bracket-arm G* upon a plate G, 
which is adjustably held to said arm by screws 
gin a well-known way. 
At the present time silver is usually elm 
ployed for commutators, but it gives a con 
stant cause for trouble, since it turns black 
and roughens quickly. This causes sparking 
and results in the meter moving slowly and 
sometimes stopping altogether. I have found 
that an alloy of silver and nickel in the pro 
portion of about five to twenty per cent. of 
nickel eliminates this trouble, keeps its polish 
indefinitely, gives the best results, and admits 
of the resistance being low. The silver tends 
to keep up the conductivity, while the nickel 
hardens the alloy and prevents its turning 
black and rough. A commutator of nickel 
alone gives fairly good results, but one of 
alloy, as above, is to be given the preference. 
The meter-spindle rests upon a jewel placed 
in the top of the adjustable post H, which 
post is held firmly in a tongue h from the 
lower bracket-arm G by the nuth'. A cap 
H' raises the spindle off the jewel when being 
shipped, and a flat spring h holds this cap 
upon the jewel-post Hin any desired position, 
the construction not differing materially from 
that illustrated and described in Letters Pat 
ent No. 551,436, granted me on the 17th day 
of May, 1895, except in the substitution of 
the flat spring for the spiral spring therein 
shown and the resulting economy of space 
and greater ease of manipulation. 
If the armature, and, in fact, the entire 
moving system, is to be removed, it is only 
necessary to turn down the cap II until the 
top of the jewel-post is exposed, then release 
or remove the screw t or other fastening 
which locks the hinged bracket-arm carrying 
the registering-train, and turn up said arm, 
when the armature, spindle, commutator, and 
brake-disk are free to be bodily withdrawn, 
as shown in Fig. 3, without disturbing other 
parts or any adjustments. This can be per 
formed without moving the meter from its 
place, the armature being taken away for re 
pairs, which by this construction are very 
simply and quickly made. 
In Fig. 14 the meter is represented diagram 
lmatically as working on a two-wire system 
and in Fig. 15 as working on a three-wire sys 
tem. In the former the series coils are coln 
nected in series in the side or lead le of the 
circuit from the generator K, thence to the 
lamps IX", the other side or lead ' running 
to the lamps direct, as shown. In the latter 
each of the selries coils is connected into the 
two outside leads k' and k", respectively, 
thence to the lamps, the line k" being the 
neutral lead. 
The foregoing description has had reference 
to a constant-potential system of distribution. 
By winding the series coils with fine wire and 
connecting them in shunt around a number 
of arc-lamps and Supplying the armature with 
a current representative of the main current 
the meter Will measure the Watts on a con 
stant-current system with a variable electro 
motive force. 
I claim 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5 
55 
 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOCY 
I o5 
O 
I 25 
ai 
g 
578,080 
t. A disk a 'nature comprising a plurality 
of sector or segment wound coils lying flat 
wise in the disk. With their arcs toward the 
periphery thereof, in combination with sector 
or segment Wound series coils laid parallel 
with the plane of the disk with their arcs 
Overlying the arcs of the armature-coils. 
2. In combination. With the disk armature 
and a 'mature-spindle, the segment - wound 
series coils having an insetting jog in the 
chordal limbs. 
3. In combination with the series coils hav 
ing an arcal Outer reach and an insetting jog 
in the inner reach, the armature-coils also 
Wound With an arcal outer reach and an in 
setting jog in the inner reach. 
4. In combination with the segment-wound 
Series coils, the Supporting-clamps therefor 
having outsetting curved arms to embrace 
the arcal reaches of said coils, and transverse 
fingers to embrace them at the junction of 
the arc and the chord. 
5. In combination with the meter-spindle, 
an adjustable upper bearing there for and 
means for removing said bearing from the 
spindle and returning it thereto without dis 
turbing its adjustments. 
6. In combination. With the meter-spindle, 
a Support for the upper bearing thereof, an 
upper bearing for the spindle adjustably 
mounted in said support, and means for the 
removal of said support from its location ad 
jacellt to the end of the spindle, and its return 
thereto, carrying with it said bearing without 
disturbing its adjustment. . 
7. In combination with the meter-spindle, 
an overhanging bracket-arm movable away 
therefrom and an uppel' bearing for the spin 
dle inoll inted in Said alm. 
S. In combination with the meter-spindle, 
all Overhanging bracket-arm movable away 
therefu'om, an upper bearing for said spin 
dle mollinted in Said alm, and means for ad 
justing said bearing in the arm. 
9. In combination with the meter-spindle 
and its attachments, the removable upper 
bearing for said spilldle, and the series coils 
having all opening between them through 
which the spindle may be drawn sidewise 
bodily with its attachments. 
10. In combination With the meter-spindle 
and its attachments, the upper bearing there 
for mounted and adjustable in a blacket-arm 
movable away from Said spindle, and the se 
lies coils having an opening between them 
through which the spindle may be drawn 
sidewise. 
11. In combination with the meter-spindle, 
and the armature and brake-disk, the remov 
able upper bearing for said spindle, the series 
coils having an opening betweeen them for 
the sidewise withdrawal of the spindle and 
its attachments, and the fixed brake-magnets 
opening at the same side, for the withdrawal 
of the brake-disk with said spindle. 
12. In combination with the meter-spindle, 
the hinged overhanging bracket-arm, the up 
per bearing for said spindle mounted in said 
bracket-arm, and a fastening device for said 
arm whereby it may be rigidly fixed to hold 
the bearing against the spindle. 
13. In combination with the meter-spindle 
and its Worm, the hinged overhanging bracket 
arm, the registering-train and its worm-wheel 
mounted at the outer end of said arm, the 
upper bearing for said spindle also carried by 
Said arm adjacent to the registering-train, 
and a fastening device to lock said arm rig 
idly into position. 
14. In combination with the meter-spindle, 
removable overhanging blacket-arm and up 
per bealing mounted in said arm, the lower 
bearing set in the jewel-post, and the screw 
: cap for said lower bearing. 
15. In combination with the meter-spindle, 
the hinged overhanging bracket-arm, the up 
per bearing mounted in said bracket-alim, 
and the bracket to which said arm is hinged, 
having a prolongation beyond the pivotal 
point for the alinement and support of the 
I. 
16. In combination with the brake-disk, the 
brake-magnets having turned-down poles and 
arranged one on each side of the disk with 
both poles of each individual magnet on the 
same side of the disk. 
17. In combination with the brake - disk, 
brake - magnets having turned- down poles 
both upon the same side of the disk, and ar 
ranged with their bodies parallel with the 
plane of the disk and upon opposite sides 
thereof. 
1S. In combination with the brake-disk, the 
brake-magnets, the blacket therefol having 
OutSetting overhung arms provided with 
clamping-finger's for the upper magnet, and a 
Subtending table upon which the jewel-post 
for the lower end of the spindle is supported, 
and a plate adjustable along said table and 
carrying the lower magnet. 
19. In combination with the brake - disk, 
circular permanent magnets arranged indi 
Vidually on opposite sides of the disk, having 
their body portions parallel with the plane of 
the disk and their poles dipped or bent down 
toward the surface of the disk. 
20. In combination with the armature-coils 
the armature-spider having outsetting radial 
arms with upper and lower teeth turned alter 
nately in either direction to clamp the coils. 
21. A commutator composed of an alloy of 
silver and nickel, substantially as described. 
TIONIAS DUN CAN. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT F. IIARDING, 
CHARLES C. MIILLER. 
65 
7 O 
75 
So 
90 
IOO 
C. 
I I5 
O 
25 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573181.txt	 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 573,181. 
W. E. HAIGHT. 
NECK YOKE CENTER, 
Patented Dec. 15, 1896. 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
A 
SN Ea 
S. 
 
U20 CEN 
S 
A12 
AIS 
f|E 
 
 
2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. HAIGHT, OF NEW MILFORD, ILLINOIS. 
NEC KYOKE CENTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Ratent No. 573,181, dated December 15, 1896. 
Application filed April 15, 1896, Serial No. 587,628, (No model.) 
To all tufton, it in Ctly CO1,667'7. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. HAIGHT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
New Milford, county of Winnebago, State of 
Illinois, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Neck-Yoke Centers; and 
I declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, which form a part of this specification. 
My invention has for its object the produc 
tion of a neck-yoke center which shall be at 
once simple of construction, durable, and ef 
fective in its operation. 
It consists in a combination of devices and 
appliances hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion of my device. Fig. 2 is a plan view. 
Fig. 3 is a front elevation. 
In carrying out the invention, A represents 
the pole of the buggy or other vehicle and B 
the neck-yoke. C is a fitting provided with 
an elongated sleeve C", adapted to embrace 
the end of the pole, and C' is a ring portion, 
the plane of the ring being parallel with the 
plane of the pole. In the ring are two ori 
fices c c'. 
D ID' are pivot-pieces, each provided with 
a projection d, the projections adapted to en 
ter the orifices c c', the said orifices forming 
bearings for said pivot-pieces. The pivot 
pieces are engaged to the neck-yoke B in any 
suitable manner, as, for instance, by the screws 
d', or, if preferred, rivets may be extended 
entirely through the neck-yoke and through 
the pivot-pieces, the particular manner of en 
gaging the pivot-pieces to the neck-yoke be 
ing immaterial. It will be observed that the 
lower pivot is somewhat back of the vertical 
plane of the upper pivot when taking the pole 
as the horizontal line, so that when the back 
Ward draft is exerted on the other diagonal 
line the strain is equally distributed between 
the two pivots. 
The advantages of my construction are nu 
merous. In the first place, by providing two 
pivots, one above and one below the neck 
yoke, the wear is distributed, thereby insur 
ing longer life for the device. With theneck 
yoke passed through the ring C', even if the 
pivot-pieces should wear out or break the 
neck-yoke would still be within the ring and 
the accident of having the pole drop from the 55 
neck-yoke thus be obviated, or, in other Words, 
the user of my device can, because of the 
yoke passing through the ring, continue the 
use of it until the pivots actually wear out, 
whereas when but a single pivot without the 6o 
ring is used the device must be entirely thrown 
away or repaired before the pivot wears out, 
else an accident is liable to occur. The sleeve 
C, being elongated and having abroad bearing 
on the pole, obviates the necessity of 'leather- 65 
ing the said sleeve and also reduces the Wear 
on the pole to a minimum. Because of the 
two pivots forming a pivotal line through the 
neck-yoke the direction of the draft is imma 
terial, and the angle of the draft may be va- 7o 
ried throughout the entire arc of the circle 
without affecting the operation of the device. 
Because of the peculiar construction of the 
device the parts can all be cast complete 
without the necessity of drilling, thereby mak- 75 
ing an extremely cheap and marketable de 
vice. Again, because of the fact that there 
are but two motions-viz., the Oscillation or 
swinging of the yoke in the ring and the os 
cillation or swiveling of the fitting on the 8o 
pole-the pounding of the pole by the yoke is 
entirely obviated. 
What I claim is 
1. In a neck-yoke center the combination 
with the pole and neck-yoke of a fitting pro- 85 
vided with means for engaging the pole and 
means for engaging the neck-yoke and in 
which the neck-yoke is pivoted, the axis of said 
neck-yoke pivots being inclined forwardly so 
that it is oblique to the axis of the pole or 9o 
tongue, Substantially as described. 
2. In a neck-yoke center the combination 
with the pole and neck-yoke of a fitting pro 
vided with a sleeve for engaging the pole and 
with a ring in which the neck-yoke is piv- 95 
oted, the axis of said neck-yoke pivots being 
inclined forwardly so that it is oblique to the 
axis of the pole or tongue, substantially as 
described. 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof Isign this specifica- Ioo 
WILLIAM E. HAIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. CHAMBERLIN, 
IDE WITT W. CHAMBERLIN, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573281.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 573,28l 
J. P. MORRIS. 
VEHICLE AXE.E. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1896. 
WITNESSES 
s 
-6-a < 72-64. 
c 2-6, 42ee. 
les? In VENTOR 
Wholl-11 
"434 ey 
ATTOREY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN POKE MORRIS, OF DENMAN, TEXAS. 
VEHICLEAXLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,281, dated December 15, 1896. 
Application filed May 23, 1896, Serial No. 592,867, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN POKE MORRIs, of 
Denman, in the county of Van Zandt and 
State of Texas, have invented an Improved 
Axle, of which the following is a specification. 
The present invention relates to axles for 
carriages, Wagons, &c., and has for its object 
the construction of an axle in such a manner 
as to enable the spindle and stock to be re 
moved and replaced by a new one when worn 
out without going to the expense and trouble 
of going to a blacksmith. 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists of the details of arrangement and con 
struction which will more fully appear here 
in after. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
a part of this application, Figure 1 is a side 
elevation. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the 
axletree. Fig. 3 is a similar view of the spin 
dle and stock. 
Like numerals and letters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in the several views. 
Referring to the drawings, 2 indicates the 
axletree, and 3 the spindle, which is provided 
with a stock 4. The axletree is made sepa 
rately from the spindle and stock. 
The un 
der side of the axletree 2 has a rabbet. 5 and 
an incut 6. The extremity of the tree is pro 
vided with a male dovetail 7, and at the rear 
of the rabbet 5 is situated the dovetail re 
cess S. 
25 
 
35. 
40 
45 
The stock 4, to which the spindle is joined, 
is so constructed as to form the complement 
of the axletree 2, said stock having the male 
dovetail 9, fitting into the dovetail recess 8, 
and the dovetail recess 10 for the reception of 
the male dovetail 7. The stock also has the 
shoulder 11, fitting into the incut 6. After the 
axletree and stock are fitted together a strip 
B of the usual construction found in car 
riages and wagons is fitted upon the axle 
tree, and clips a C are placed over the parts 
to be secured, securing them. 
It will be readily seen from the above de 
scription the general utility of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The herein-described device, composed of 
an axletiree, and stock and spindle So con 
structed as to be readily removed from each 
other and consisting of an axletree 2, a rec 
tangular incut 6 situated on the under side 
of the axletree 2, circular dovetail recesses 
8 and 10, male dovetails 9 and 7, and clips 
for securing the different parts together, sub 
stantially as set forth and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN POKE MORRIS. 
Witnesses: 
W. T. HOLIFIELD, 
J. M. SIMS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573381.txt	L. E. ALLEN. 
REGISTERING MACHINE, 
* 3 Seets -- Sheet 1, 
Patented Dec. l5, 1896, 
 
Z 
Nummi 
AAAAAAAAAAYAYAAAAAAAAAAYAAN?vwv 
R 
( N 0 Model. ) 
No. 573,38. 
 
\ X 
 
ZEZ % e?rzez 2? szerz? 
********Ras PETERS Co., PHOTO.IT.-o. wassers. e 
 
(No Model. ) 
L. E. ALLEN. 
REGISTERING  ACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 573,38. 
Patented Dec. 15, 1896. 
NZZ 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
KKZZAZZAZAZA%ZZAZZZZZZZ4% 
 
V/?zaveysvey 
Z zvere velv 
* 22.- *** 7IB67-*-iz 
- Zize:7% er Z. A 7Zez 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 573,38 l. 
 
L. E. ALLEN. 
REGISTERING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented Dec. l5, 1896, 
W 
252Es, 
| 
 
-Z2:N/res 22-Zor 
 Z. Lef7ver A. Aller/ 
 bris 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUTIIER E. ALLEN, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
REG STER N G - MACH I N E. 
PECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 573,381, dated December 15, 1896. 
Application filed May 28, 1895, Serial No. 550,946, (No model.) 
55 
7 o 
75 
To Cull, av?lulo7nm, it 7mvall/ concern: 
Be it known that II, LUTHER E. AILLEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at De 
troit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
Mlichigan, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Registering-Machines, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had therein to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
My invention consists in the construction of 
a registering-machine and of the several parts 
and arrangement and combination thereof 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of my registering-machine. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical central longitudinal section there 
through, shoWing the drawer open. Fig. 3 is 
a cross-section at the rear of the machine, 
looking from the rear, the left-hand portion 
thereof being on the line ac ac of Fig. 7 and the 
right-hand portion being on line y lly of the 
same figure. Fig. 4 is a sectional perspective 
view of the upper part of the machine, illus 
trating the construction of the gate-frame, 
Switches, &c. Fig. 5 is a bottom plan view of 
the gate-fralme. Fig. 6 is a perspective view 
of a key and its gate. Fig. 7 is a section simi 
lar to lFig. 2, showing the ball-races inverted 
and the gates lifted for the purpose of dis 
charging the counting-balls into the supply 
chamber. Fig. S is a perspective view of the 
cash-drawer, its lock, and the clharge-operat 
ing arm. Fig. 9 is a plan view of a portion 
of the gate-frame and associated parts. 
A is the casing, having an inclined top or 
cover B, and in which is the money-drawer C. 
The cover B is hinged to the back of the cas 
ing by Suitable hinges, such as C", at its up 
per edge. Upon the upper face of this cover 
are formed a series of ball-races D, preferably 
substantially V-shaped in cross-section, cov 
ered by a transparent plate D'', as of glass. 
At the upper end of the cover B is formed 
a supply-chamber E for the balls E'''. On the 
cover between the ball-races and the supply 
chamber is the inclined surface F, which 
forms a continuation of the bottom of the 
ball-?aces. Supported over this surface is a 
gate-frame F". The under surface thereof is 
provided with grooves Ca, which form ball-re 
ceptacles above the gates b. These gates are 
apertured blocks sliding in the guideway c 
in the gate-frame F''' and are actuated by 
means of key-levers G, pivoted at the upper 
end of the gate-frame and having suitable 
finger-pieces d at their lower edge, by means 
of which they may be moved laterally to shift 
the gate. Each key -lever has a finger or 
spring e pressing on the top of the gate-frame 
to prevent accidental displacement when any 
other key-lever is being operated. 
II is a bar sliding longitudinally in the 
guide-groove in the top of the gate-frame and 
having a series of pins f, one for each key. 
HI' is a spring for actuating the bar H to 
hold the key normally against the stop-pins 
h on the gate-frame. 
Below the gates is a guide bar or rib II, hav 
ing a guideWay or groove i on its under face, 
into which the ball is delivered by the gate 
upon the operation of a key. This guideway 
delivers the ballinto the lhopper-shaped open 
ing or groove k on the under side of the switch 
bar l. This switch-bar is held normally in 
its middle position by means of a spring in, 
at each end, but can be moved by the oper 
ator by the switch, key or post J to either side 
of its middle position. In its normal position 
all the discharge-openings 1 from the hopper 
groove k in the switch-bar connect into the 
middle ball-races o of each series, these ball 
races being arranged in groups of three or 
more. When moved to the right, this dis 
charge  opening will communicate with the 
right ball-race p and when moved to the left . 
the left ball-race q. The gate-frame is se 
cured at its ends by means of the screw-bolts 
IK, passing through the cover B. 
Beneath the gate - frame and preferably 
around the screw-bolts are springs L, acting 
by their tension to raise the gate-frame when 
the screw-bolts are loosened, and thus raise 
the switch and gates and the frame above the 
ball-races and surface IF, as shown in Fig. 7. 
In this position such balls as have been pre 
viously delivered into the ball-races may, 
when the ball-races are reversely inclined, as 
shown in Fig. 7, run into the receptacle E. 
Then by screwing down the screw-bolts Kthe 
device will again be in operation. 
With devices of this kind it is usually cus 
tomary to take the balls directly from a sup 
ply-chamber, but in this operation the balls 
are apt to wedge or bridge across the upper 
9 O 
95 
I O GO 
O 
I 5 
2 O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
co 
573,381 
I C 
2 5 
3 5 
45 
5 O 
end of tilne ball-race, andl thus prevent tilheir 
certain acting. To overcome this difficulty, 
1 arrange the supply-chamber upon a differ- || 
ent plane from that in which the ball-races i 
are arranged and provide a chargen' for clarg 
ing the receptacles or grooves C, with balls || 
properly allined, and thus prevent this diffi 
culty. This charger II lhave slnown as oper 
ated by the cash-drawer and all operated to 
gether. 
It is obvious, however, that the 
chargers may be actuatedl through other in 
strumentalities, andl I do not wish it undler 
stood that my invention is limited to a cash 
(ll'avvoer. 
The const?'uction wylich I have show in 
Figs. Il to 8 comprises a bar O, extending 
across beneatlh the receptacle E and provided 
on its upper face witl a series of plungers 
O', having a V-shaped groove O at the top. 
This bar is guidled at its ends with rods l, 
which pass through stirrups l", securedl to 
the under sidle of the cover lB. 
(Q are springs 
on these l'ods which ct with their tension tO 
hold the chargers in their lower position. 
IR is a rock-arma on the rock-slhaft R', the 
end of which ar?m extends beneath tille bar O, 
and S is anotiler all'im on the rock-shaft R', 
eXtendling into the patlh of the drawer C. This 
drawer is preferably thrown open by means 
of a spring T. T' is a locking-le Y er for lock 
ing the drawer im its closed position. This 
lever has the upward extension T, which pro 
jects beside the endl of the bair I, which is 
provided with an inclined face " and is adapt 
ed to rock the lever T" to release the lock upon 
the operation of any key, so that the spring 
will throw it open. 
The operator closes tlhe drawer by land, in 
which no Yement the drawen, striking the ar?m 
S, Will rock the shaft R' and raise the charger, 
which will pass through the slot in the sup 
ply-chamber and elevate them to the plane of 
the surface l'F, over which they will roll in 
the receptacle (t, against the gate. This in 
sures always bringing of the ball to the gate 
in prope" aline) ment. 
WVlhat I claim as my in velution is  
1. In a l'egistcring-machine, the con loilla 
tion With a top la Ying a Series of ball-race 
ways tilherein, a supply-clhamber at the upper 
end of the race ways, and balls tilherein, of slidl 
ing gates bet Ween the lace Ways and recepta 
cle, vertically-reciprocating chargers working 
in the supply-chamber, and laving ball-re 
taining g1'oo Ves Ol' seats on tilheir upper endls, 
keys for laterally slifting the gates, and means 
actuated by the keys for controlling the move 
ment of the chargers in one direction, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In al registering-machine, the (onabilna 
tion with a frame, a series of raceways, a 
stupply-chamben, and balls the l'ein, of gatos 
bet Ween the race Ways and supply-chaumber, 
l'eciprocating charge's working in the supply 
chanl?bel', Springs fol' actuating the chargers 
in one direction, keys for shifting the gates, 
means for moving the chargers against the 
 
8. 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
85 
tension of tilne springs, andl neans coil i l'ollett 
by the keys for controlling said chargel"-nn OY 
ing means, substantially as described. 
3. In a registering-macline, the CO2 habilat 
tion with a casing, a series of race ways til e l'e- 
in, a supply-chamber, a series of receptacles, 
and balls, of gates between the race Ways al 
tilne receptacles, a series of chargel's acting S 
conveyances to lift the balls from tille Supply 
chamber to the receptacles, a series of keys 
for shifting the gates and moving tlhe clairgel's 
in one direction, and means for no ving tille 
chargers in the opposite direction, Substan 
tially as described. 
4. In a registering-machine, tille con loi) - 
tion with the ball-races, gates near the upper 
ends thereof, keys four actuatiling the galt Cs, 
ball-receptacles above the gates, a batll-Stip 
ply chamber, the balls anda series of charge's, 
one for each receptacle, and incans for actul - 
ating all the charge's upon the operation (of 
any key. 
5. In a registering-lima eline, tlie Colbia 
tion with the ball-races, gates unea 1' te tippe P 
end thereof, keys for actuating the galtes, 
plungers for carrying balls to the gates, tille 
balls andl a cash-dlrawer for actituating the 
plungers, Substantially as described. 
6. Tum a registering-machino the conubiina 
tion With a case having a, linged top, ball!-- 
raceways in the top, allad a Supply-Climan?bel', 
of gates between the chamber alul raceways, 
means for independently slhifting the gates, I O O 
means for si multaneously reno ying all of the 
gates, a serics of balls, al casa-drawer, al dl 
inneas actuated by the diraYYer for transferring 
the balls from the chamber to the Traceyyal y`s, 
substantially as describodl. 
7. Un al registering-lanacline, the con lilla 
tion of the easing, an inclined cow" cl' tereo), 
a series of ball-races formed in the top of the 
cover, balls adaptedl to move terei allid tille 
receptacle in the cover at its tipper edges be- II I o 
low the plane of the ball-races, a gate-fraine 
secured to the co y cur it to upper end of the 
races, laterally-moyable gates therein, and 
laterally-movable key's pivoted on tiu e frate 
and adaptedl to control tlic gates. 
In a registering-nuachine of tille kiludl dle 
scribedl, tlue combination of the cash-dra. YY er, 
the gate-fraine, the actuating likey-lever's G, 
the gate lo controlledl tilhereby, stop53 for limit 
ing the motion of tilne keys in olne directioill. I 2 o 
the Spring-actuatel bar il having pin S adapt 
el to cingage the keys o in the oppositio sile 
from tille stops, and the latch for tic dira, Wet' 
actuated by the bar l , Sllbstantially as de 
Scribedl. 
9. In a registering-machijne of the kindl le 
scribed, the combination of the gate-franne, 
the key - le vers pivotcd tillere on, thio gates 
tilherein actuated by the keys, the cash-drawej, 
a lock for the cash-drawyer, a spring-actuatel I 3o 
sliding bal' !! lha, ving pins (one for eacl? key) 
With Wilnicl tille key-eyers cingage and imeans 
for releasing the dra Hver-lock through, Sail 
bar I, substantially as describedl, 
I O5 
5 
I ) ; 
| 
2 
5 
573,381 
3 
10. In a registering-machine, the combina 
tion with the ball-races, the gates controlling 
the same and the receptacle a above the gates, 
of the ball-receptacle, the balls thereim, the 
5 bar O below the receptacle, the plungers O' 
On the bar, springs acting normally to hold 
the Said plungers in their lower position, a 
cash - drawer and connection between the 
cash-drawer and the plungers for actuating 
Io the same as and for the purpose described. 
11. The combination with a series Of in 
clined ball-raceways, a ball-supply chamber 
located at the upper end and below the plane 
 
of the salme having capacity for a stack or 
collected series of balls, a series of chargers I 5 
working in a portion only of the chamber, 
and having ball-receiving recesses at their 
ends, means for reciprocating the chargers, 
and gates for the raceways, substantially as 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
describedl. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
 
2 O 
ILUTIER. E. AILILEN. 
Witnesses: 
MI. B. ODOGHERTY, 
O. F. BARTHEIL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573481.txt	(No. Model.) 
No. 573,48l. 
 
C. E. PEABODY. 
RAKE TOOTH, 
-- 
Patented Dec. 22, 1896, 
Afz 2. 
af, 
WITNEssels 
14 
 
NvenTR 
Chas.A,Aadoa/7, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. PEABODY, OF LYNN, MASSACHUSETTS. 
RAKE-Tooth. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,481, dated December 22, 1896. 
Application filed January 11, 1896, Serial No. 575,112, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs E. PEABODY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
ILynn, in the county of Essex and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
usefullmprovements in Rake-Teeth; and Ido 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to figures of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
rakes, and particularly that class termed 
hay or lawn' rakes, 
Myinvention relates to the teeth, which are 
made of metal and constructed in a peculiar 
manner, whereby they are not only set fast 
in the head of the rake and prevented from 
turning or moving therein, but are very easily 
taken out when worn or injured in such man 
ner that they must be replaced with new ones. 
The drawings represent in Figure I a ver 
tical longitudinal section in part of a rake 
head equipped with rake-teeth embodying 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a central vertical 
longitudinal section in part. Fig. 3 is an ele 
Vation of a tooth before insertion in the rake 
head. 
In Said drawings, 2 represents a rake-head 
in part composed of Wood and furnished with 
a plurality of teeth. 3, arranged in a single 
row and projecting from the under side of the 
same. In a tool of this kind a long or wide 
head is desirable, and consequently lightness 
is a requisite. In order to enable the cross 
sections of the head to be made smaller, and 
thus have a less quantity of material and at 
the same time to cheapen the manufacture 
and to increase the life of the rake, I propose 
to equip the same with metallic teeth. These 
teeth are made of wire, preferably steel, and 
of any size to conform to the purposes to 
which the rake is to be put, These teeth, 
moreover, are to be cut from a straight piece 
of the desired length to form the body 4 of 
the tooth, and one end is upset to form a head5. 
The tooth is of uniform diameter throughout, 
While the upper portion for a distance equal 
to the depth of the head is furnished with 
peripheral spurs or holding devices 6. These 
are to project outwardly and also backwardly 
in the direction of the head after the manner 
of the barb of a hook. Hence in inserting 
the tooth the wood composing the head can 
readily pass over the spurs or points and then 
springing back into place firmly embed the 
spurs in the wood. These points thus serve 
not only to prevent the tooth from disengag 
ing from the head, but hold it from turning. 
This is of great importance, as will be further 
explained. 
From the above description of parts it will 
be understood that the construction of the 
holding-points 6 prevents removal of the 
teeth without tearing away the Wood which 
forms the walls of the holes, and thereby re 
moval of a tooth would so enlarge the hole 
that a new tooth could not be held firmly-in 
place. To overcome this difficulty and thus 
permit ready removal of the teeth I have 
split the tooth longitudinally at 7. The walls 
of this slot may be parallel or they may di 
verge as they approach the head of the tooth. 
The teeth are inserted in place with the slot 
in the head arranged transversely of the head 
taken lengthwise. 
In the equipment of the rake-head with 
teeth these latter, as before premised, being 
straight pieces of metal, are entered point 
down on the upper side of the head, which is 
bored in such manner to allow the head to be 
countersunk, and when the toothis in place the 
said heads are flush with the top of the head. 
After the tooth is in position a wedge is en 
tered in the seat of the tooth and forced in 
until the opposite sides of the head are spread 
apart, when the operation is completed. As 
before premised, the slots in the teeth are 
transversely of the rake-head. Hence when 
the toothis spread apart or opened at the top 
it is moved in the direction of the length of 
the fibers of the wood and not across them. 
Hence there is no liability of cracking the 
rake-head. After all the teeth are set in po 
sition the entire group of teeth is subjected 
to the action of a former and the requisite 
curvature at their lower extremities imparted 
to them. In this way the teeth are properly 
alined, and because of the points or holding 
devices 6 no axial movement of the teeth can 
OCC. 
When it is desired to remove a tooth, the 
95 
Oc 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
2 
573,481 
two portions comprising the head are drawn 
together. This disengages the points from the 
sides of the hole in which they were previously 
embedded, and the tooth can be easily and 
readily withdrawn. By my construction a 
rake can be furnished With teeth at a mini 
imum cost. They can easily be removed and 
as easily reset, and they will always remain 
Smooth and polished and in this manner more 
Io easily discharge the stuff which collects upon 
them. 
What I claim is 
 
A rake-tooth comprising a straight body 
portion, a curved lower extremity, a split, 
headed upper portion and peripheral projec 
tions adapted to be embedded in the material 
composing the head of the rake, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES E. PEABODY. 
Witnesses: 
E. E. LODGE, 
FRANCIS C. STAN WOOD, 
I5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573581.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 573,58l. 
I, T, DYER. 
ELECTRIC ENGINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 22, 1896. 
[5] ) 
`N 
  
 
 
  
Aazz esses, 
(No Model.) 
" . 
No. 578,581. 
- 
I, T, DYER 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
ELECTRIC ENGINE, 
Patented Dec. 22, 1896, 
E. NE 
 
Azzesses, 
Zaz 2 eaz Za 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC T. DYER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE, DYER POWER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRIC ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 573,581, dated December 22, 1896. 
Application filed March 30, 1896, Serial No. 585,890, (No model.) 
To (till tufuoin, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, ISAAC. T. DYER, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
5 invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Electric Engines, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
novel construction of electric motor for driv 
Io ing an engine, for use in its purpose either 
alone or supplemental to the steam or other 
motive power employed. 
Myimproved motor involves in its construc 
tion, as the essential parts, a pair of solenoid 
15 magnets having reciprocating cores connected 
With a suitably-fulcrumed lever which is oper 
atively connected with the engine to drive it 
by the Oscillatory movements of the lever pro 
duced by the longitudinal reciprocation of the 
20 Solenoid-cores under the control of an auto 
matic Switch having a shifting-lever connec 
tion with the cut-off valve of the engine, and 
which turns the current from an electric gen 
erator into the magnets alternately. 
25 My improvement may be operatively ap 
plied to engines generally, but for the sake 
of convenience I elect to describe its con 
struction and mode of operation more par 
ticularly in connection with a locomotive 
3o engine, and therefore so illustrate it in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figurel is a view in side elevation of a lo 
comotive-engine equipped with my improve 
ment; Fig. 2, an enlarged broken view,in front 
35 elevation, of the Switch device, showing one 
of the magnets connected there with; and Fig. 
3 shows the switch device by a view in side 
elevation. 
A and A are two solenoid-magnets having 
4o their cores B connected with a lever C at 
one side of its fulcrum, the lever being con 
nected at the opposite side of its fulcrum with 
the driver of the engine to be driven. 
D is the switch device, the preferred con 
45 struction of which is that illustrated as com 
prising an inverted-U-shaped yoke r, sup 
ported in a box D' and having pendulously 
Suspended from its upper end a lever q, pro 
vided with lateral projections p and O near its 
So lower end, at which it terminates in a head 
n, embraced by one bifurcated end of a lever 
n, fulcrumed between its extremities, and 
the opposite end of which is similarly bifur 
cated to engage the head of a shifting-lever 
m". In the ends of the yoke r, and in a line- 55 
ment with the projections p and O, are Sup 
ported, to be moved lengthwise with relation 
to stationary contacts land le, the contacts l' 
andle', each of which is spring-controlled, as 
by confining about it a spring S between its 6o 
head and the adjacent yoke-arm. The con 
tacts is and l are connected by an insulated 
conductor i, with which one pole of a gener 
ator (such as a dynamo-electric machine, in 
dicated at E) is connected through the me- 65 
dium of a conductor it. The contact le" is . 
connected by an insulated conductor i, which 
leads through a binding-post t, with one end 
of the magnet A, the other end of which may 
lead back to the opposite pole of the generator, 7o 
and the contact l is similarly connected by 
an insulated conductor i, which leads through 
a binding-post it, With one end of the magnet 
A", the other end of which may lead back to 
the opposite pole of the generator. 
When the lever q is swung to bear with its 
projection O against the contact k' and force 
it against the contact, k, the circuit contain 
ing the magnet A is closed over the wires 
and i, while the circuit containing the mag- 8o 
net A' is broken at the separated contacts l' 
and l. Thus the magnet A is energized and 
the magnet A' is deenergized, causing the 
former to suck its core B in one direction, 
thereby turning the lever C to actuate the 85 
driver of the engine accordingly. When the 
lever C has completed its stroke in the one di 
rection, the shifting-lever m' will have been 
turned on its fulcrum to turn the lever in in 
the direction to swing the lever 9 at its pro- 9o 
jection against the contact l', thereby re 
leasing the contact k' and permitting it to be 
retracted by the recoil of its spring S to break 
the circuit containing the magnet A, thus 
de&nergizing the latter and forcing the con- 95 
tact l against the contact l to close the cir 
cuit containing the magnet A", which is thus 
energized to suck its core B in the opposite 
direction, with the effect of swinging the 
lever C in the direction to complete the revo- Ioo 
lution of the driver and of turning the shift 
ing-lever n' to swing the lever m in the di 
75 
 
2 
578,581 
IO 
25 
3 5 
45 
55 
rection to return the level (1 at its projection leading from the generator to the Switch. I), 
0 against the contact ' and thereby again 
a cut-out switch K, of ordinary or any suit 
produce closure of the circuit containing the 
able construction, and a graduating-SWitch. 
magnet A in the manner already described. 
device L, which may be like that commonly 
In the same way the lever q will be pendu 
employed on trolley-cars. 
lously swung continuously, to alternately 
What I claim as new, and desire to Secure 
open and close the circuit containing each 
by Letters Patent, is 
magnet of the solenoid device, with the ef 
1. An electric motor comprising, ill coln loi 
?ect of longitudinally reciprocating the cores 
nation with an electric generator, a pail of 
3 and rocking the lever C to work the driver 
solenoid-magnets and their colves coupled en(l- 
of the engine. 
wise together, a lever connected with sail 
When my improvement is applied to a lo 
cores to be oscillated by their l'eciprocating 
comotive-engine F, it may be used upon the 
movement and adapted to be connected with 
latter without in any way altering or impair 
the driver of an engine, and a switch device 
ing the construction of the engine, and may 
having a pair of stationary contacts in the 
form, as shown, a Supplemental motive power 
generator-circuit and a pair of Spring-con 
to the steam. In this application of my im 
trolled movable contacts adjacent to said sta 
provement two sets of the solenoid-magnets 
tionary contacts and respectively collected, 
and their described connections with a gen 
electrically, with said magnets, a pendlulously 
erator should be provided, each set being 
supported lever extending between Said in OV 
Supported as shown of the one set in Fig. 1, 
able contacts, and shifting-lever mechanism 
namely, with the magnets A and A' on sup 
engaging said pendulous lever, substantially 
ports hand l', (which should be covered to 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
protect the magnets, though to display them 
2. An electric motor comprising, in coln bi 
the covers are omitted) secured to the side 
nation with an electric generator, a pair of 
of the boiler, with the automatic switch de 
solenoid-lmagnets and their cores coupled end 
Vice in its box ID' also secured to the side of 
Wise togethel, a lever connected with said 
the boiler and having the pendent lever ?). 
cores to be oscillated by their reciprocating 
embracing at its lower bifurcated end the 
movement, and adapted to be collected with 
head of the upper end of the lever na', which 
the driver of an engine, and a switch device 
is fulcrumed at a: between its ends and en 
comprising a frame cal' lying a pail of Still 
gages at its lower end the ordinary rocking 
tionary contacts in the generator-circuit and 
head or shifting-link device of on a locomotive 
a pair of spring-controlled movable contacts 
engine, while the low or ) is connectod from 
adjacent to said stationary contacts and re 
its upper end with some driven part of the 
spectively connected, electrically, with said 
engine, as the rod f of the slide-valve, (not 
magnets, a lever penciulously supported oil 
shown,) which controls, in the usual man 
said frame to extend toward its free end be 
lier, the Supply of steam from the steam twoel said movable contacts, a level 12 full 
chest G to opposite sides of the piston ill 
crumed betwech its ends and engaging at one 
the cylinder G'. Then, as will be seen, the 
end the lower end of the polidltilous leve)', 
reciprocating motion of the rod f effects the 
and a level 2 engaging with the opposite 
rocking of the lever 7 to rock the lever 7, 
end of said lever 7), substantially as and for 
and Swing the switch-lever q. Moreover, on 
the purpose set forth. 
the locomotive - engine the level C of each 
3. In combination with all engine, a pail of 
Set of my improved electric mechanism is 
solenoid-magnets A and A' having the cores 
fulcrumed to a bearing cl on the side of the 
l3 coupled endwise together, a lever C full 
boilel' to engage at its upper slotted cind a 
crumed to engage at one end the coupling of 
coupling c, (which may be of brass or insu 
said cores and at its opposite end a driving 
lating material,) connecting the two solenoid 
part of the engine, an electric generator, and 
cores 13, which screw into the coupling, and 
a switch device contained with the said mag 
to engage at its lower slotted end the cross 
nets in the circuit of said generator and hay 
headlib, connected in the usual manner with 
ing a shifting-lever connection with the cut 
the drivers of the engine. The generator may 
of valve of the engine, substantially as and 
be a dynamo (indicated at E) supported on 
for the purpose set forth. 
the tender F', as shown, and driven by a 
4. In combination. With an engine, a Dail' of 
steam-engine, (indicated at II,) to which steam. 
Solenoid-magnets A A' having the cores T3 
is supplied from the dome I of the boiler, or 
coupled endwise together, a lev or C full 
it may be a set of storage batteries (indicated 
crullmed to engage at one end the coupling of 
at E) and suitably connected in the circuits 
Said cores and at its opposite end a driving 
containing the solenoid-lmagnets and switch 
part of the engine, an electric generator, and 
devices D, or the current may be taken in 
a Switch device having a pair of stationary 
the Ol'dinary manner from an overhead live 
contacts, l, le in the generator-circuit and it 
wire (indicated at E) or underground wire 
pair of spring-controlled movable contacts i', 
through the medium of a trolley, (indicated 
k", adjacent to said stationary contacts and 
at E.) 
respectively connected, electrically, with said 
In the application of my improvement to 
magnets, a pendulously-supported level of ex 
any engine it should include in the line i', 
tending between said movable contacts, and 
7 5 
So 
90 
OO 
I C5 
I.O. 
I 5 
I 25 
 
578,581 
, with the 
nected, respectively by wires , 
magnets A and A, a lever q pendulously sup 
ported in said frame and having lateral pro 
jections p and O respectively adjacent to the 
contacts land c', and a head 12 at its lower 
end, a lever m bifurcated at its opposite ends 
between Which it is fulcrumed between its 
ends to engage at one end said head in, and a 
lever in fulcrumed between its ends to en 
gage at one end the adjacent end of the lever 
in and connected with the cut-off valve of the 
engine, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
ISAAC. T. DYER. 
25 
In presence of 
J. H. LEE, 
R. T. SPENCER. 
5 
O 
shifting-lever mechanism connecting said 
pendulous lever with the cut-off valve of the 
engine, substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
5. In combination with an engine, a pair of 
Solenoid-magnets A and A' having the cores. 
13 connected end to end by a coupling c, ale 
wer C fulcrumed between its ends on a bear 
ing d and engaging at one end the cores at 
Said coupling and at its opposite end a driv 
ing part of the engine, an electric generator, 
and a switch device D having its mechanism 
inclosed in a box D' and comprising the frame 
ir provided at its ends with stationary con 
tacts l, k in the generator-circuit and a pair 
of Spring-controlled movable contacts l', I' 
adjacent to said stationary contacts and con 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573681.txt	(No Model.) 
H. G. MORRIS, 
ICE CREAM MOLD AND DISHER 
No. 573,681. 
Patented Dec. 22, 1896. 
662zeesses:- 
N\mu\mu', 
2y466&4%2% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIENRY G. MORRIS, OF HOBOKEN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ICE CREAM M OLD AND DISHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 573,681, dated December 22, 896. 
Application filed September 1, 1896, Serial No. 604,546. (No model.) 
O 
ing-lever his pivotally secured, the upwardly 
To all Zwhon, it inctly concern. 
extending arm of which carries a hook m, en 
Be it known that I, HENRY G. MORRIs, a 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
gaging one end of a link n, the other end of 
siding at Hoboken, in the county of Allegheny 
said link being hooked to the crank h. The 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
horizontal portion of the operating-lever car 
tain new and useful Improvements in Ice 
ries a thumb-plate o, and secured to the han 
dile b is a spring p, the free end of which en 
Cream Molds and Dishers, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
gages the underneath face of the horizontal 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
arm of the operating-lever. 
The operation of my improved disher and 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in dishers and molds, 
mold will be readily apparent from the views 
and has for its object to construct a disher 
of the same that I have shown in the draw 
and mold that can be conveniently and easily 
ings; but in order to illustrate the same more 
operated with one hand. 
clearly I will describe it further, and assume 
The invention further aims to provide a 
for the purpose of this illustration that the 
parts have all been secured in their respec 
disher and mold of the above-referred-to class 
tive positions. 
that will be extremely simple in its construc 
tion, strong, durable, effectual in its opera 
The operator handles the disher in the or 
tion, and comparatively inexpensive to man 
dinary manner and communicates motion to 
the cutters by depressing the horizontal por 
ufacture; furthermore, a disher and mold that 
will expedite the labor in using the same by 
tion of the operating-lever, thus causing the 
upwardly-extending arm of same to move to 
reason of the rapid manner in which the same 
may be manipulated. 
a more nearly vertical position, as shown in 
Still further objects reside in the novel con 
Fig. 1 in dotted lines, thus retracting the link 
Struction, combination, and arrangements of 
and crank-arms and revolving the cutters to 
parts to be hereinafter more specifically de 
loosen the cream or other substance from the 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
mold. When the pressure on the operating 
lever is relieved, the spring p will return the 
claim. 
In describing the invention in detail refer 
same to its normal position, and the disher is 
again ready for operation. 
ence is had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of this specification, and where 
By means of the double crank-arms a suffi 
in like letters of reference indicate similar 
cient throw of the cutters is obtained, so that 
parts throughout the several views,in which 
only two of these blades need be used, each 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
blade covering one-half of the inner surface 
disher, partly in section. Fig. 2 is a top plan 
of the mold, and the parts may be readily sub 
view of the same. Figs. 3 and 4 are plan views 
stituted in case one becomes broken. 
of the crank-arms. Fig. 5 is a side elevation 
It will be noted also that various changes 
of the operating-lever. Fig. 6 is a plan view 
may be made in the details of construction 
of the connecting-link. 
without departing from the general spirit of 
In the drawings, Cl, indicates the mold, to 
my invention. 
which is secured the handle b. In the apex of 
Having fully described my invention, what 
the mold is secured a shaft c, carrying the 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
cutters d, said shaft carrying on top of the 
Patent, is 
mold a crank-arme, having a slotif. On the 
In a disher and mold, the combination of the 
top of the mold, to one side of the shaft c, is 
mold, a handle secured to said mold, cutters 
secured a ping, to which is pivotally attached 
journaled in the apex of the mold, a slotted 
a crank h, carrying a pink, engaging in the 
crank-arm secured upon the journal of the 
slot f of the crank-arm e. At the intersec 
cutters at the top of the mold, a pin on said 
tion of the handle and the mold an operat- mold, a crankpivoted on said pin, said crank 
25 
35 
45 
 
5O 
55 
75 
95 
95 
578,681 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
sm - 
- 
- 
- 
HENRY G. MORRIS. 
Witnesses: 
A. M. WILSON, 
II. E. SEIBERT. 
carrying a pin engaging the slotted crank 
arm, an operating-lever pivotally secured to 
the handle, a link connecting said lever and 
crank, and a spring secured to the handlebe 
neath the operating-lever to return same to 
its normal position, substantially as shown 
and described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573782.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 573,782. 
  
Tec. 22, l896. 
 
  
444444 ZZZZZZ% 
SNSNSNS 
S. 
A. 
sy 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES MI. GREEN, OF HIGIILAND PARIK, ILLINOIS. 
BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 573,782, dated December 22, 1896. 
Application filed July 1, 1895, Serial No, 554,534. (No model.) 
end frames A. This angle-piece E, besides 
closing the box tightly and affording a con 
venient means of fastening the same, also 
forms a lateral strengthening-brace. 
The Wood-pulp is subjected in the process 
of manufacture to chemical treatment, which 
renders it waterproof, and my box as thus 
made is very strong and durable, with a con 
tinuous smooth inner surface, as well as ex 
ternally smooth on the top, bottom, and sides, 
and, above all, is very light, which is a great 
advantage, as the Saving in freight incident 
to this lightness more than pays for the cost 
of the box, which latter, moreover, is very 
cheap. 
My Wood-pulp covering is everywhere im 
perforate and of equal thickness, and as it is 
neither scored, grooved, nor otherwise weak 
ened. Where it is bent over there is no dan 
ger of the box becomingbroken at such parts 
either from rough handling or from the con 
tact or movement of the contents during tran 
sit, as frequently happens With boxes having 
bent Wood or pasteboard bottoms, tops, and 
sides scored or grooved at the points where 
the material is bent. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
w 
A packing-box, comprising skeleton end 
frames, having sheets of Wood-pulp secured 
to the inner faces thereof, and a single sheet 
of Wood-pulp bent continuously around and 
secured to said end frames to form the sides, 
bottom and top Of the box, and an angular 
strip of sheet metal secured to the front edge 
of the top or cover portion and provided with 
holes at the ends thereof, said strip projecting 
down over the front side of the box to form 
a strengthening-brace and fastening device, 
Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand, atEighland Park, 
in the county of Lake and State of Illinois, 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
CIARLES MI. GREEN. 
Witnesses: 
F. W. BEUTEL, 
EDWIN HARRIS. 
55 
75 
90 
O 
25 
3 5 
To ?till uhon, it in-?tly coice/n: 
IBe it known that I, CHARLES MI. GREEN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Highland Park, in the county of Lake and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Boxes; and I do 
hereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description thereof. 
Myinvention has especial reference to that 
class of boxes used for packing and shipping 
merchandise; and my object is the production 
of such a box combining the greatest amount 
of strength with the least amount of weight, 
to which end my said invention consists in 
certain peculiarities of construction and com 
bination of parts, as will be fully set forth 
hereinafter and Subsequently claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a box embodying my present inven 
tion, partially broken away and with the 
brace and fastening device removed the bet 
ter to illustrate certain details of construc 
tion. Figs. 2, 3, and 4 are detail perspective 
views more especially illustrating the said 
brace and fastening device. 
Referring to the drawings, A A represent 
the frames of the end sections of my box, 
each frame made, preferably, of four strips of 
Wood, which may be simply nailed together 
to form a skeleton frame, to which frame is 
Secured, as by tacks or nails C. C. On the inner 
side, a sheet of Stout tough Wood-pulp B. 
C represents a continuous sheet of this 
wood-pulp, which is carried around said end 
sections and tacked ornailed thereto, as shown 
at bb, forming thereby continuous sides, bot 
tom, and top or cover de fg. 
D represents the front flap of the top or 
cover part 9, which is bent downward and re 
duced in width by cutting out the front cor 
ners of the said top part, as shown at C C, SO 
that the flap D will fit inside the front sided 
of the box. 
Elepresents an angular strip of sheet metal, 
such as tin-plate, which is secured to the top 
or cover plate g of the continuous sheet C, as 
by rivets h h, and provided at its ends with 
holes i, so that when the box is closed nails 
i can be readily driven therethrough and 
through the parts g d of the sheet C into the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573882.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 573,882. 
Patented Deo. 29, 1896. 
J. R. &. J. W. JONES. 
DISTANT SWITCH SIGNAL WIRE COMPENSATOR, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
928)-tv.cooes 
(7... 
 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
J. R. & J. W., JONES. 
DISTANT SWITCH. SIGNAL WIRE COMPENSATOR, 
No. 573,882. 
Patented Dec. 29, 1896. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
- 
DISTANT SWITCH SIGNAL, WIRE COMPENSATOR, 
J. R. &. J. W. JONES. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 573,882. 
Patented Dec. 29, 1896, 
seasonsecreece 
 
SS 
 
s sax sal sa W y 
. S. Ya Saara xts s a s cr 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH R. JONES, OF PHILADELPHIA, AND JOSHUA W. JONES, OF HARRIS 
BURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNORS OF ONE-THIRD TO THOMAS A. JONES, 
OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVAN 
IA. 
D STANT SWITCH. SIGN 
AL-WIRE COMPENSATO R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 573,882, dated December 29, 1896. 
Application filed February 29, 1896, Serial No, 581,325, (No model.) 
55 
To (1.7/...uflon, it inctly concern. 
Beit known that we, JOSEPH. R. JONES, of 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia, 
and JOSHUAW. JoNES, of Harrisburg, in the 
5 county of Dauphin, State of Pennsylvania, 
citizens of the United States, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvement in Dis 
tant-Switch Signal-Wire Compensators, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
to ence being had to the accompanying draw 
lingS. 
This improvement relates to that class of 
compensators in which a weight and clutch 
are employed to compensate for the expan 
I5 sion and contraction of the wires, and it is 
especially applicable to signals and switches 
to obtain accuracy in throwing signals and 
the opening, closing, and locking of switches, 
thereby insuring safety to trains, which with 
20 the appliances commonly used is impossible 
to accomplish without constant adjustment 
to suit the various states of the weather. As 
the expansion of wire from the lowest to the 
highest temperatures to which signal-wires 
25 are exposed is about seven inches to a thou 
sand feet, and as some signals are more than 
a thousand feet from the operator, and as 
the semaphore-arm only travels about five 
and a half inches at the point where the wire 
3o connects, it will readily be seen, how imper 
fect the Working of the present systemis. To 
produce accurate and positive results in mov 
ing signals or switches under all conditions 
of temperature and at any distance from the 
35 lever, however remote, by an apparatus which 
cannot easily get out of order, is the object of 
this invention; and to these ends it consists 
in the construction hereinafter more particu 
larly described and then definitely claimed 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan of part of a railroad-track provided 
with our improvement. Fig. 2 is a perspec 
tive view of part of the compensator connec 
45 tions. Fig. 3 is a plan of the compensator on 
a larger Scale. Fig. 4 is an elevation of the 
same. Fig. 5 is an elevation of the compen 
sating device and the semaphore with parts 
broken out to bring the figure within the 
so compass of the sheet. Fig.6 is an end view 
4o at the end hereof. 
of the compensating device. Fig. 7 is a side 
view of a modification, showing the compen 
sating-weight sunk in the ground. Figs. 8 
and 9 are details which will be more fully re 
ferred to hereinafter. Fig. 10 is a side view 
of the top of the semaphore at right angles 
to that in Fig. 5. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by figures, 1 represents the track-rails 
running, for example, to the West; 2, switch 
rails for the other, or second track running 
east; 3, switch-railsfor a siding or third track; 
4 4', the switch-bars connecting the switch 
rails; 55", the switch-levers; 6,6', the con 
necting-rods between the switch-levers and 
switch-bars; 77', the locking or detector bars, 
provided with cams 88" for locking the switch 
rails, and levers 99" for operating said lock 
ing-bars. 
All of the above are of the ordinary style 
or may be of any approved construction, and 
hence do not need any detailed description. 
At a suitable distance from the operating 
devices is set a semaphore-post 10, With the 
ordinary attachments in common use on sem 
aphores, and which will be more fully de 
scribed hereinafter. 
On the locking-bar 7 is mounted a single 
arm 11, to which is pivoted the curved slotted 
jaw 12, into which is screwed the rod 13, hav 
ing jam-nut 14, and whose other end is screwed 
into another jaw 15, pivotally connected to a 
lever 16, (see Figs. 1 and 3, particularly the 
latter,) fulcrumed on the base-plate 17. The 
opposite ends of this lever are pivotally con 
nected to slotted jaws 1818 on rods 1919", 
having at their other ends similar slotted jaws 
pivotally connected to the dogs 2020', (see de 
tail Fig. 8,) pivoted in the jaws 2121' of the 
slides 22 22', running on guide-rods 23 23, 
supported at each end by angle-plates 24 and 
25, which are bolted to the base-plate. The 
rods 1919" are provided with right and left 
threads, and the jaws 18 are threaded to cor 
respond, so that the acting length of the rods 
may be adjusted at pleasure. 
- 
Bolted to the base plate is a standard 26, 
carrying the bracket 27, in which are mount 
ed the pulleys 28, and on it is bolted the bear 
ing 29 for the pulleys 30. Under and over 
9o 
95 
O) 
 
2 
573,882 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
these pulleys 28 and 30 passes a chain 31 to 
a pulley 32, set in a recess in a weight 33. 
The opposite ends of this chain, after pass 
ing through the jaws 21, are connected to 
slides 34 34", running in suitable guides 36. 
Each of these slides is supplied with a pulley 
37, (see Fig. 4.) mounted on an axle 38, Sup 
ported by said slide and a bracket 39, con 
nected thereto. 
On the top of the plate 25 is mounted a pull 
ley 40, around which passes a short chain 41, 
whose opposite ends are connected to the 
slides 22 by small bolts 42, said chain being 
So arranged that as one slide 22 moves away 
from the plate 25the other slide moves in the 
opposite direction until it is stopped by com 
img in contact with the plate 25, and as the 
rod connected to the dog still keeps up its 
motion for a short distance the point of the 
dog moves away from the chain, thus releas 
ing the same, as shown in Fig. 3. 
On the locking-bar 7 nearest the compen 
sating devices is set a double-armed lever 43, 
(shown best in Fig. 9,) to which are pivoted 
the curved slotted connections 44, attached 
to the wires 45 45", both of which are con 
nected to chains 46, which, after passing 
around pulleys 47, set in suitable bearings 48, 
are connected to other wires 49, which in turn 
are connected to other chains, the under one 
of which, 50, after passing around the pulley 
37 on the slide 34, is connected to another wire 
51, attached to one end of a spring 52, (see 
Fig. 1,) whose other end is connected to a 
chain 53, passing under and around a pulley 
54 (see Fig. 5) at the base of the semaphore 
post, and connects with a wire or rod 55, at 
tached to and operating the weighted lever 
56, which raises the semaphore-blade 57 by 
means of the Wire 5S. The wire 45" is con 
nected by one of the chains 46 to the wire 59 
and passes over the wire 49 and connects with 
a chain 60, passing around a pulley 37 on the 
slide 34", connected with a wire 61, attached 
to one end of a Spring 62, whose other end is 
attached to a chain 63, passing under and 
around a pulley 64 (see Fig. 5) at the base of 
the semaphore-post, and is connected to a 
wire 65, attached to the short arm of the 
weighted lever 56, operating the blade 57. 
The operation is as follows: Supposing both 
of the switches to be closed, leaving the track 
clear, and it is desired to open the switch to 
a siding or third track, the lever 9 is thrown 
over, thereby operating the arm 11, which 
operates the rod 13 and the lever 16, which 
in turn operates the rods 1919", connected to 
the dogs 2020', and as these are connected 
to the slides 22 22' the latter, with the dogs, 
are moved in Opposite directions. As the 
dog 20 is pulled by the rod 19 it closes upon 
the chain and thus clamps it fast to the slide, 
so that as the latter moves it carries with it 
the slide 34 and its pulley 37, around which 
is the chain 50, and thus the slide 34 as it 
moves pulls down the Weighted lever 56, 
thereby throwing the blade of the semaphore 
to the danger position. At the time the 
lever 9 is thrown over, the cam S (which nor 
mally locks the switch in the closed position) 
is also thrown over, thus leaving the SWitch 
free to move, and it can now be thrown open 
by reversing the position of its lever 5, and 
this when done causes the switch-rail to move 
over the cam S, thus preventing any move 
ment of the lever 9 and locking the Sema 
phore-blade in the danger position. If 
now it is desired to also open the other switch 
to transfer a train from the west-bound track 
to the east-bound one, the lever 7' is thrown 
over and it operates the locking-bar which 
moves the cam 8', thus unlocking the Switch 
rail 3, which can now be operated by throw 
ing the switch-lever 5". The blade having 
been set at the danger' position before the 
opening of the switch to the siding, and said 
switch being still open, the blade is still at 
the danger position, and provision has 
therefore to be made so that while the mov 
ing of the lever 7" usually operates the blade 
it will now have no effect on it. For this 
purpose we use the springs 52 62, which are 
so graduated in strength that they are of Suf 
ficient power to operate the semaphore-blade 
without expanding, but when said blade is al 
ready set and the lever 7 is to be moved to 
unlock the switch to the east-bound track 
without affecting the semaphore-blade the 
springs yield sufficiently to allow of the move 
ment of said lever. 
When the switches and semaphore have 
been operated as above described, both the 
switches are open and the blade is at the 
danger position, but either of the switches 
can be closed without affecting the position 
of the blade, which will invariably remain at 
the danger position until both switches 
are closed. 
Should it be desired to open the switch to 
the east-bound track alone when the siding 
switch is closed and the semaphore-blade 
down, the switch is first unlocked by throw 
ing over the lever 9', which carries with it 
the two-armed lever 43, thus operating the 
wires 4549, and fhrough them the semaphore 
blade, setting the same at the danger po 
sition, after which the switch 2, being now 
unlocked, may be operated by throwing the 
lever 5' in the usual manner. 
Referring now more particularly to the com 
pensating devices, it will be seen that as one 
or the other of the dogs is always out of con 
tact with the chain when the apparatus is at 
rest, leaving the wire free to expand or con 
tract; any expansion or contraction of the 
wires will thus always be kept normal by said 
weight. 
We have shown at 70 in Fig. 1 a switch for 
transferring trains from the second or east 
bound track to the West-bound track, but as 
there is no claim for anything in said switch 
as being new it is unnecessary to describe it. 
Of course such a switch should be also pro 
vided with our improvement, but it is un 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
573,882 
- 
3 
necessary to describe or show the same, as it 
would be merely a duplication of what has 
already been described. 
In some places it will be advisable to sink 
the compensating-weight below the surface. 
Such an arrangement is shown in Fig. 7, in 
which 71 represents a cylinder partly sunk 
in the ground and having an enlarged part 
72, resting on the base-plate 17, which has 
an aperture to receive the cylinder. Pulleys 
30' are mounted on a shaft 72, set in the cyl 
inder, and the chain 31 passes over the pull 
ley's 30' to the compensating-weight 33, hung 
by said chain in the cylinder. Over the top 
of the cylinder is set a cap 73, by which the 
weight and pulleys are covered. 
It will be clear from the above description 
that our improvement can be used to as great 
advantage where there is either one or two 
switches, and when there are two they can 
be moved in conjunction with each other or 
singly, as the case may require. For in 
stance, side-tracking or shunting cars to the 
siding from the main track will only require 
one switch. So, also, in the case of crossing 
Over one main track to the other; but in case 
of crossing over and going onto a siding, or 
the reverse, two switches are necessary, which 
it can be seen can be connected to a single 
semaphore. 
It will also be seen that with our improve 
ment there is no danger from open switches if 
the engineer pays proper attention to the sig 
mals, as it is impossible for either switch to 
be open without the blade being at the dan 
ger position, for even if the wires from any 
cause were to break the weighted lever would 
set the blade at the danger' position. 
We regard as very important the interpo 
sition in the Wires leading to the semaphore 
of springs made of sufficient strength to op 
erate the blades, and yet yielding enough to 
allow of the movement of the locking device 
of a second switch when another switch has 
been previously opened and the blade conse 
quently already set at the danger position. 
We have shown the arms 11 and the arms 
of the levers 16 and 43 as provided with a se 
ries of holes, so that the rods, &c., connected 
thereto may have their motion changed by 
shifting the pivot-pins from hole to hole, as 
sited, to produce the required effect on the 
blade. 
On the base-plate 17 is shown a bar 71, 
which will act as a support for the rods 1919 
and the chain 31 should they sag, but we do 
not regard this as essential to our invention. 
What we claim as new is 
1. The combination of a signal and two 
switches, each switch having a shaft carrying 
locking-cams and means for operating the sig 
nal, with mechanism for operating the switch 
after the locking-shaft has been operated, in 
termediate connections between the switch. 
mechanism and the signal arranged to set said 
signal at the danger position when either 
switch is unlocked, and clutches to take up 
the slack in said connections substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination of a signal and two 
switches, each switch having a shaft carrying 
locking-cams and means for operating the sig 
nal, with mechanism for operating the switch 
after the locking-shaft has been operated, in 
termediate connections between said mech 
anism and the signal constructed to hold said 
signal at the danger position until both 
switches are closed, and clutches to take up 
the slack in said connections substantially as 
described. . 
3. The combination with two switches and 
their locking and operating mechanism, of a 
signal, wires for operating said signal con 
nected with said mechanism, and a spring 
forming part of the connection between the 
signal and locking and operating mechanism, 
to allow of the signal remaining at the dan 
ger position after one of the switches has 
been closed, substantially as described. 
4. The combination with two switches and 
the locking mechanism thereof and a signal 
common to both, of the slides 34, 34 having 
pulley's 37, the pulleys 47, connections be 
tween the signal and the locking mechanism 
passing around said pulleys 37 and 47, and a 
compensating device connected with said 
slides to allow for contraction or to take up 
the slack of the Wires in expansion, substan 
tially as described. 
5. The combination with a switch and the 
locking mechanism thereof, and a signal there 
for, of the slides 34, 34' having pulleys 37, the 
pulleys 47, connections between the signal 
and the locking mechanism passing around 
said pulleys 37 and 47, and a compensating 
device connected with said slides to allow for 
contraction or to take up the slack of the 
Wires in expansion, substantially as described. 
6. The combination in a compensating de 
vice, of the weight 33, the chain 31 passing 
around suitable guide-pulleys through the 
jaws 21, carrying the dogs 20 and connected 
with the slides 34, 34 having pulleys for the 
signal - operating Wires, the Weight 33 sus 
pended from said chain, and means substan 
tially as described for operating said dogs 
and jaws, as set forth. 
7. The combination in a compensator, of 
the lever 16, the rods 19, 19" connected to said 
lever, the dogs 20, 20' connected to said rods, 
the horizontally-moving slides 22, 22' working 
on suitable guides, and having the jaws 21, 21 
carrying the dogs 20, 20', the chain 41 passing 
around pulley 40, and having its opposite 
ends connected to the slides 22, 22, the chain 
31 having its end connected through inter 
vening devices with the wires for operating 
the signal, and the Weight 33 suspended by 
said chain 31, substantially as described. 
8. In a compensator, the combination with 
slides carrying the clutching-dogs, means for 
operating said dogs, a compensating Weight 
suspended on a chain connected with the sig 
nal-operating wires and acted on by the dogs, 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5. 
I 25 
IO 
35 
45 
55 
 
4 
58,882 
of a chain having its opposite ends connected 
to the slides, and a pulley around which said tures in the presence of two witnesses. 
chain passes, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof We affix our signal 
JOSEPH. R. JONES. 
JOSHUA W. JONES. 
Witnesses for Joseph R. Jones: 
9. In a switch-wire compensator, the com- 
5 bination of the wires or rods thereof, with a 
lever as 43 having a series of holes to allow 
of change of throw, and a curved slotted con- 
nection 44 between said Wires and lever piv- 
otally connected to the lever, substantially 
Io as described and shown. 
Witnesses for Joshua W. Jones: 
R. S. REED, 
JNO. C. KNOX. 
J. J. DRILL, 
EUGENE SNYDER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US573982.txt	(No Model.) 
E. J. KELLY. 
BALL BEARING, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
'????.??. 
ATTORMWEY. 
THE MORRIS PETERs co, PHoTourHo, washs 
misto, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD J. KELLY, OF MONONGAIHELA CITY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
BAL - B EA R N G . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 573,982, dated December 29, 1896. 
Application filed March 13, 1896, Serial No. 583,048, (No model.) 
55 
7 ? 
75 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
To all typhoon, it in??? concer?: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD. J. KELLY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mo 
nongahela City, in the county of Washington 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented or 
discovered a new and useful Improvement 
in Ball-Bearings, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming part of this application, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section through 
the crank-axle of a bicycle furnished with 
my improved multiple ball-bearing. Fig. 2 is 
a cross-section on the line II II of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a partial longitudinal section similar 
to Fig. 1, but showing an additional row of 
balls. 
Similar numerals or reference refer to like 
parts wherever used throughout this speci 
fication. 
My invention consists of an improvement 
in ball-bearings for bicycles, vehicles, ma 
chinery, or any other apparatus or device in 
which such bearings are suitable; and it com 
sists in two or more rows of balls placed be 
tween the stationary and moving parts of the 
bearing, separated by intervening dividing 
walls or bearing-plates which serve as aux 
iliary bearings on each side of the plates, 
formed to constitute circular bearing-tracks 
and pockets for the balls. When so made 
and placed in position, these plates are carried 
around with the balls, assuming a speed which 
is a mean between the stationary bearing and 
that of the main moving bearing. By inter 
posing such auxiliary bearings between the 
balls I secure a much more perfect action of 
the balls by overcoming any friction due to 
binding of the parts, and in action the bear 
ing and rotation of the parts is assisted by 
means of the plurality of rows of balls, thus 
compensating in one row for any tendency 
to bind in the others. 
Referring now to the drawings, 2 is the sta 
tionary frame of a bicycle, within the ends of 
which are secured the cup-shaped bearings 3, 
having flanges 3', in which run the rows of 
balls 4. An inner row of balls 5 rests against 
the faces of the adjusting-ring 6, screw 
threaded on the crank-axle 7 and held against 
movement by lock-nuts 8. Between the rows 
of balls 4 and 5 is an intervening bearing 
 
plate 9 of a proper shape to present its faces 
to the balls at an angle to secure the best 
results, and this plate constitutes the valu 
able feature of my invention, as by its use the 
friction is reduced to a minimum, as described. 
For the purpose of isolating each row of 
balls to facilitate putting the various parts 
together circular external flanges 10 and 
ridges 11 are formed on the plates beyond 
the first intermediate plate, which serve to 
retain the balls in proper position until the 
various parts are adjusted to position ready 
for operation, the flanges 10 serving also to 
retain the balls when in action. 
It is obvious that more than two rows of 
balls may be used, and I have illustrated in 
Fig. 3 a modified construction in which three 
rows of balls 44' 5 are employed, and an ad 
ditional intervening bearing-plate 9', made 
similar to the plate 9 and in operation serving 
the same purpose. 
By multiplying the intermediate bearing 
plates in this manner very good results as to 
reduction of friction may be obtained, each 
successive plate moving at a proportionately 
slower rate of speed and resulting in a con 
sequent reduction of fiction to a minimum. 
In the forms of construction shown in the 
drawings the opposing faces of the various 
bearing-plates are shown at an angle of forty 
five degrees, but while good results may be 
had at such an angle there are advantages of 
construction in securing compactness and 
reduction of size either in the diameter or 
length of the bearing by making such angles 
more flat or obtuse, as desired. An especial 
advantage in this mode of construction, em 
ploying several rows of balls and intervening 
plates, is that all of the balls and plates may 
be adjusted by setting in or out the outside 
plate, as in an ordinary ball-bearing. Two 
such adjustments may be had, one on each 
side, or if desired only one may be used, with 
equally good results, and this feature of ad 
justment constitutes an important feature of 
my invention. 
The advantages of my invention will be 
appreciated by those skilled in the art to 
which it appertains. It is capable of wide 
application in many forms of machinery, 
vehicles, &c., and while I have shown it as 
applied to a bicycle I do not wish to be con 
95 
OO 
2 
573,982 
al?n internal al?n?n ular" l'etining-1"ilg'e, us 11, 
constituting a non-bealing face, Substantially 
as set folth. 
2. In a ball-bearing, the combination with 
one or more rows of balls and their bearings, 
of a bearing-plate provided with an external 
annular inclosing flange constituting a bear 
ing-face, and an internal annular retaining 
ridge, constituting a non-bearing face, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony where of I lhave lhere un to set 
my hand this 4th day of February, 189 (3. 
EJ) WAHRD) J. KELT, Y", 
WWitnesses : 
PETER J. EDWARYS, 
C. M. CLARKE. 
fined to Such application, although in Such 
application its use may be extended not only 
to the main-shaft bearing but to the rear and 
front wheels as well, while good results may 
be had by employing it in the pedals. 
Changes and modifications may be made in 
the construction and operation by the skilled 
mechanic without departing from my inven 
tion, as I do not wish to be confined to the 
construction shown in the drawings, but to 
include any equivalent therefor. 
Iaving described my invention and in what 
manner it is made and Operates, Wlaat I claim, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a ball-bearing, a bearing-plate pro 
vided with an external annular inclosing 
flange, as 3", constituting a bearing-face, and 
I. ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574082.txt	(No Model.) 
C. H. YOUNG, 
TUBULAR KNIT FABRIC, 
No. 574,082. . 
Patented Dec. 29, 1896. 
  
 
N a 2 
2. 
N2 2 
2 
Witnesses. 
nven to 1. 
... , 
C26-7--&- 
4. Attorney. 
THE NORRIS PETERs co. PHOTO-LTrio, wasHINGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES HENRY YOUNG, OF LACONIA, NEW HAMPSHIRE, ASSIGNOR TO 
HIMSELF, AND RALPH EMERSON, OF ROCKFORD, ILLINOIS. 
TUBULAR-KNIT FABRIC. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,082, dated December 29, 1896. 
Application filed August 21, 1896. Serial No. 603,450. (No specimens.) 
O 
To (t/l, whol), it inctly conce71. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES HENRY 
YOUNG, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing in Laconia, in the county of Belknap, in 
the State of New Hampshire, have invented 
a certain new and useful Improvement in 
Tubular-Knit Fabrics, of which the following 
is a true and exact description, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawing, which 
forms a part thereof. 
My invention relates to tubular-knit fab 
rics formed of yarns running in opposite di 
rections, and has for its object to provide an 
improved seam where the yarns cross each 
other, and particularly an improved manner 
of widening the tubular fabric, whereby a 
Sightly, Strong, and close seam is obtained. 
My invention will be best understood as 
described in connection with the drawing, 
which represents a portion of a tubular-knit 
fabric embodying my improved seam and 
Widening construction, and in which A A', 
&c., indicate a yarn running in one direction 
(as shown, from right to left) and B B', &c., a 
yarn running in the opposite direction, the 
yarn A A', &c., being further distinguished 
by being white, while the yarn B B', &c., is 
black. The Wales of the knit fabric are 
marked C-D, E, F, G, H, and I J, said last 
mentioned Wales being, as shown, widening 
Wales thrown in between Wales E and C and 
F and D', C and D'indicating the upper and 
altered form of the Wales marked at the bot 
tom C and D. 
The seam formed in an ordinary Way be 
tween the two sides of the fabric is shown at 
the bottom of the drawing, and may be said 
to lie between the Wales C and D, while my 
improved seam, which may be said to incor 
porate the wales C and D, is shown at the 
upper part of the drawing at C. D'. In the 
ordinary seam the yarns A and B cross each 
other between the Wales C and D, each rising 
above the other at that point and being formed 
into loops drawn through those of the other 
yarn as they recede from said seam. In my 
improved seam, however, the threads A and 
B are laid together in the needles which knit 
the Wales C and D' and drawn through the 
last loops in said Wales simultaneously, or 
knit together at this point, each said thread 
rising above the other as it recedes from the 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
75 
Wales and being knit singly or independently 
into or drawn through the loops of the oppo 
sitely-running yarn, as shown. 
Where the fabric is to be widened, the Wid 
ening-Wales, such as I and J, spring from the 
sides of the wales C and D', in which the 
yarns are knit together, as shown, the new 
needles being thrown in between the needles 
which knit the Wales C and D', and, for in 
stance, the needles which knit the Wales E 
and F, and the needles on which the yarns are 
knit together-that is, those which knit Wales 
Cand D'-being advanced to proper register 
with the new needles, which knit the widen 
ing-Wales, as I and J. 
The seam may obviously be formed with a 
single wale in which the yarns are knit to 
gether or with more than two such Wales, but 
I prefer the two wales, or, as it might be said, 
double wale CD', as shown. The new seam 
is particularly desirable as a part of widened 
fabric, as the appearance and reality of a very 
strong and close seam is thus secured. 
The seam on the opposite side of the goods 
to that on which the seam formed by Wales 
C and D' is located may be formed in the 
same way as said seam or in any other con 
Venient manner. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A tubular-knit fabric composed of yarns 
running in opposite directions said yarns be 
ing knit singly on the sides of the fabric and 
knit together at their point of intersection. 
2. A tubular-knit fabric composed of yarns 
running in opposite directions said yarns be 
ing knit singly in the sides of the fabric and 
knit together for at least two Wales at their 
point of intersection. 
3. A tubular-knit fabric composed of yarns 
running in opposite directions said yarns be 
ing knit singly on the sides of the fabric and 
knit together at their point of intersection 
and said fabric having widening-Wales spring 
ing from the sides of the wale or Wales in 
which the yarns are knit together. 
CHARLES HENRY YOUNG. 
95 
Witnesses: 
FRANK HAMMOND, 
W. BARROWCLOUGH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574182.txt	 
No. 574,182, 
Paten 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL W. TROY, OF MONTGOMERY, ALABAMA. 
A U TO MATIC CAR SIG NA L. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,182, dated December 29, 1896. 
Application filed September 5, 1896, Serial No. 604,978, (No model.) 
To all, Liph???, i? ??? ??? ??fr?: 
Beit known that I, DANIEL W.TROY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Montgom 
ery, in the county of Montgomery and State 
of Alabama, have invented certain new and 
Useful Improvements in Automatic Car Sig 
nals or Alarms, of which the following speci 
fication contains a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure l is a side elevation of one end of a 
street-car provided with my improved signal 
or alarm. Fig. 2 is a side elevation, partly 
in Section, of the alarm mechanism with the 
striker thrown outward for action by the 
toothed wheel on the car-axle. Fig. 3 is a 
horizontal section on line 33 of Fig. 2, the 
striker being withdrawn by its spring. Fig. 
4 is a perspective of the base-plate or attach 
ing-frame. Fig. 5 is a perspective of the 
Striker. Fig. 6 shows a modified form of the 
same. Fig. 7 is a perspective of the gear and 
cam for setting the striker in its operative 
position. Fig. 8 is a detail of the striker 
Operating gear and its gear-operating projec 
tion or tooth. Fig. 9 is an enlarged detail of 
the stud on which the striker is mounted, a 
portion of the striker and base-plate being 
also shown. 
My invention relates to an alarm or signal 
for rapid-transit street-cars. 
The objects of the invention are to provide 
an alarm or signal which will be automatic 
ally sounded at the street-crossings; also, to 
so construct the alarm or signal that it may 
be sounded at any time by the motorman. 
The invention consists, broadly, in a car 
Signal and alarm having an automatically 
intermittently operated mechanism for giv 
ing the signal or alarm when the car ap 
proaches a street-crossing; also, in such an 
automatically-operated signal provided with 
mechanism by which it may be operated at 
any time by the motorman. 
The invention further consists in the con 
struction and combination of parts herein 
after described and claimed. 
A is a portion of a modern electric street 
car, to the axle Bof which is rigidly secured a 
toothed striker-operating wheel C, formed in 
two sections having apertured lugs co, through 
which pass the bolts c' c' for firmly clamp 
ing it to the axle. One of these lugs c is ex 
tended out beyond the periphery of the wheel 
C to form a gear-operating tooth or projec 
tion C. 
D is a base-plate formed from a T-shaped 
piece of strap-iron bent into U shape, the 
ends of its cross-piece forming apertured at 
taching-arms did, through which bolts may 
be passed to secure the base-plate to the mo 
tor box or truck of the car, as shown in Fig. 
l. The parallel arms of the base-plate are 
provided with a lined apertures d' d', and the 
free outer end of the arm D' of the base-plate 
D is provided with a longitudinal slot d. 
(See Fig. 4.) 
E is a shaft journaled in the apertures d', 
and on this shaft, within the base-plate, is 
fixedly secured a gear-wheel E", adapted to be 
engaged by the tooth or projection Cat every 
revolution of the car-wheel. On this toothed 
Wheel E", at one side, is secured or formed a 
cam-wheel E, having a single elongated pe 
ripheral cam-surface e, the remaining portion 
of its periphery describing a plain circle. 
This wheel E" bears on a stud F, (or an anti 
friction-roller f thereon,) mounted to slide in 
the slot d and forming the pivot of the gong 
striker F", adapted to strike the gong G., se 
cured on the Outer end of the shaft E. The 
striker F is V-shaped and is secured at its 
angle on the threaded end of the sliding stud 
F by means of a mutf'. The angular end f' 
of the striker forms its operating-tooth for 
engagement by the toothed striker-actuating 
wheel C on the car-axle, as will be presently 
more fully described. 
The striker F is provided between its two 
striking-arms F F with a retractile spring 
f, which is connected at one end to the aper 
ture f' in the striker, and its opposite end is 
looped around the shaft E, the tendency of 
the Spring being to retract the striker and 
hold its axis F always in contact with the 
cam-wheel E for action thereby. 
It will be seen that the tooth c' of the striker 
operating wheel C will strike the gear-wheel 
E" once at every revolution of the axle and 
turn it the distance of a single tooth. When 
the wheel E" has been given a full revolution, 
the cam-surface e' will force the striker-pivot 
5 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
g 
574,182 
IF Outwardly in the slot d against the action 
of spring f', so as to bring the end f' of the 
striker into engagement, with the rounded 
teeth of the toothed wheel C. This wheel C 
Will vibrate the striker continuously until 
the tooth Crotates the tootlhed wheel. E' a 
Sufficient distance to carry the cam-surface 
e' from behind the axis F, at which instant 
the spring f will retract the striker and the 
alarm will become silent. The cam-surface 
e' will be long enough to cause the sounding 
Of the Signaloralarm while tle carapproaches 
and crosses a street, and the teeth on the wheel 
E will be sufficient in number to cause its 
revolution once in every average city block. 
Suppose the length of a block to be three 
hulndred feet, and the car-wheel to be nine 
feet in circumference and the number of 
teeth on the wheel E' to be thirty-three, then 
thirty-three revolutions of the car-axle would 
turn the Wheel E. Once every block to bling the 
calm-Surface e' into contact with the striker 
a Nis. Of course the length of the block might 
*ary Several yards, but the number of tieeth 
on wheel E' would be arranged for the aver 
age block and the length of the cam would 
be arranged for the average width of cross 
ings plus a length to cause the signal to be 
Operated in approaching and leaving the same. 
The gong is provided with a winged nutg 
and With an indicating mark or arrow g', 
which register's with the position of the can 
e, So that by grasping the nut g the gong, the 
shaft E, gear E, and came may be rotated 
to bring the calm into proper position when 
the car is at the beginning of the run, say at 
the first Crossing, so that the gong will be 
sounded at each succeeding crossing. Thus 
the alarm or signal will be given automatic 
ally at every crossing and the motorman will 
not have to be depended on therefor, as here 
tofole. In order, however, that the alarm 
lmay be sounded at intel mediate points by the 
motorman, I provide the striker F with oppo 
sitely-projecting lever-arms E. E., which are 
operatively connected by wires H H with 
bell-crank level's I under the car-platforms, 
(only one being shown,) the said bell-cranks 
being in turn operated by the spring-retracted 
push-rods IK, mounted in the platform for ac 
tion by the foot of the motorman, as will be 
readily understood by referring to Fig. 1 of 
the drawings. If the foot-operated mechan 
ism is not used, then I employ the striker 
shown in Fig. G. 
I do not restrict myself to the particular 
mechanism shown, as it may be considerably 
Varied and modified without departing from 
the scope of my invention. 
What I claim is 
1. An automatic signai or alarm, for street 
cars, comprising an alarm or signal proper for 
attachment to a car, and an intermittently 
actuated mechanism for operating the said 
alarm or signal, automatically from the car 
axle, and provided with means for holding it 
active while the car is passing over a predo 
5 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
So 
95 
l {}{} 
termined distance, Wilhereby the signal Ol' 
alarm may be actuatcd at and across the 
Street-crossings. 
2. The combination with the going or bell 
provided with a striking device Operated all 
tomatically at stated intervals from the car 
axle, and normally held out of operative con 
nection with said axle, of mechanism actu 
ated automatically from said car - axle to 
throw the striking device into operative con 
nection there with, whereby the alarm will be 
silent between the crossings and sounded a 1 
tomatically at the crossings, substantially as 
described, 
3. The connlination with the tooth or pro 
jection and the toothed striker - operating 
wheel carried by the car-axle, of a gong or 
bell having a normally-retracted striker, a cam 
for throwing the striker into the path of the 
said striker-wheel when the car approaches a 
crossing and retaining it there till the car 
passes the crossing, and a gear-wheel for Oper 
ating said cam and located in the path of the 
said axle-operated tootlh or projection to be 
turned thereby the distance of one tooth for 
every revolution of the axle, substantially as 
described. 
4. A crossing alarm or signal linechanism 
for street-cars, comprising a gear-Operating 
tooth or projection and a toothed striker-op 
erating wheel on the car-axle, a gong or bell 
having a normally-retracted vibrating striker 
provided with a sliding axis, a cam-wheel en 
gaging said axis and having a cam-surface to 
push the axis outward and throw the striker 
into engagement with the toothed striker-op 
erating wheel, and a gear-wheel for operating 
the cam and located in the path of said gear 
operating tooth or projection to be turned 
thereby the distance of one tooth at every 
revolution of the car-axle, substantially as 
described. 
5. A crossing alarm or signal mechanism 
for street-cal's, comprising a gear-operating 
tooth or projection and a toothed striker-Op 
erating wheel for the car-axle, a gong, a V 
shaped vibrating striker under the gong and 
Secured at its angle to a pivot-stud mounted 
to slide and turn in a slotted bearing, the an 
gular end of the striker projecting toward 
said striker - operating wheel, a spring nor 
mally withdrawing the striker from said 
wheel, a shaft parallel with the striker-axis 
and forming the gong-support, a gear-wheel 
Secured to said shaft and in the path of said 
gear-Operating tooth or projection to be turned 
thereby the distance of one tooth at every rev 
olution of the car-axle, and a cam-wheel at 
one side of the gear-wheel engaging the 
striker stud or pivot and provided with a cam 
surface to project the stud and throw the 
Striker into engagement with the striker-oper 
ating wheel when the car approaches a cross 
ing, the said spring retracting the striker when 
the car passes the crossing, substantially as 
described. 
6. The combination with the toothed striker 
III. ? 
LI5 
574,182 
3 
35 
45 
gear and cam may be turned by means of the 
thumb or finger piece on the bell, substan 
tially as set forth. 
8. The combination with the alarm or signal 
and mechanism for automatically sounding 
the alarm or signal when the car approaches 
a crossing, of separate and independent mech 
anism in connection with the sounding device 
of the alarm or signal, for actuating the same 
from the ends of the car, by the motorman, 
at any time, without interfering with the 
mechanism by which the automatic sounding 
is effected. 
9. The combination with the car, a gong or 
bell thereon provided with a normally - re 
tracted striker adapted to be operated auto 
matically at Stated intervals from the car-axle, 
mechanism also operated from the car-axle to 
automatically throw the striker into operative 
connection. With the car-axle, independent 
lever mechanisms on the car-platform and 
connected to the striker, and push rods or de 
vices by Which the motorman may operate 
said lever mechanisms and sound the alarm 
at any time, substantially as described. 
DANIEL W. TROY. 
Witnesses: 
J. E. JOHNSON, 
S. W. MITCHELL. 
O 
2 ? 
Operating Wheel formed in two Sections adapt 
ed to be bolted together on the car-axle, one 
Section having a gear-operating tooth or pro 
jection extending beyond the periphery of the 
wheel, of a U-shaped base-plate adapted to be 
Secured to some portion of the car adjacent 
to the axle, a transverse gong-carrying shaft 
journaled in the two arms of said base and 
provided with a gear-wheel engaged by said 
gear-Operating tooth or projection and having 
a cam-wheel on one side, a vibrating striker 
having its pivot mounted in the slotted end 
of one arm of said base and engaged by said 
eam-wheel for movement thereby to throw the 
striker into the path of said striker-operating 
Wheel, and a spring connected to the striker 
to retract it after the cam-surface of the cam 
wheel has passed from behind its axis or pivot, 
Substantially as described. 
7. The combination with the striker having 
a sliding axis and means for operating the 
striker, of a shaft having a cam for throwing 
the striker into engagement with its operat 
ing mechanism and a gear-wheel for operat 
ing the cam, means for intermittently operat 
ing said gear-wheel, and a gong secured to the 
shaft and having a thumb-piece and an indi 
cating arrow or mark pointing in the direc 
tion of the cam, whereby the shaft and its 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574282.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 574,282. 
 
 
C. SEBASTIAN. 
CHURN 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Deo. 29, 1896. 
s 
28)itv.cosos 
O2 areer ASea as 7 a 7/. 
33, 7 zo &ltiovvies 
(No Model.) 
C. SEBASTIAN. 
CHURN. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 574,282, 
m 
Patented Dec. 29, 1896. 
 
- Z ty, 4 
28itv.cocco 
4.7 
- 
teS, 
3v-ve vitov 
C2.627(e. -9 eaayza 72 
. 
33 Mazr &ltiovved; 
-(6-6-6-y14 
-e-N 
tria. MoRRIS PETERs ce. Picro-rho. was Roton, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES SEBASTIAN, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO THOMAS J. 
CHENEY AND JAMES M. DAVIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
W 
CHURN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,282, dated December 29, 1896. 
Application filed February 24, 1896, Serial No. 580,571. (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
?o all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLESSEBASTIAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at St. 
Louis, in the State of Missouri, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in But 
ter-Churns, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part hereof. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in butter-churns; and it consists in the novel 
arrangement and combination of parts more 
fully setforthin the specification, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a middle ver 
tical section of the apparatus. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tion on acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a plan view of 
the bottom blade-disk of the air-induction 
tube. Fig. 4 is a side elevation of the same 
with the bottom of the tube attached thereto, 
the parts being broken away; and Fig. 5 is a 
perspective detail of a portion of the periph 
ery of the tube, showing the manner of the 
formation of the air-openings. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a churn which shall produce butter through 
the churning agency of air, to provide means 
Whereby the air-currents can be forced into 
the milk with a maximum agitating velocity, 
thus producing butter in a minimum amount 
of time, and to provide a simple, durable, 
economic, and highly-superior churn. 
The main feature of the present device lies 
in the specific construction of the air-induc 
tion tube and in minor details of construc 
tion to be now described. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents a 
general supporting - frame for the several 
parts. At a convenient point of the frame is 
mounted a hand gear-wheel 2, provided with 
a handle 3 and meshing with a terminal pin 
ion 4, carried at the outer projecting end of 
a shaft 5, mounted in depending bearings 6 
and 7, forming part of the frame, and having 
a collar 8, secured by a binding-bolt 9, adja 
cent to the inner wall of the bearing 6, the 
object of the collar being to prevent the shaft 
5 from shifting in its bearings. The inner 
end of the shaft 5 carries a bevel gear-wheel 
10, which meshes with a bevel-pinion 11, se 
cured at the lower end of a rotating spindle 
- 
- 
12, guided in and passing through the central 
depending tubular bearing 13, forming a part 
of the frame 1. The upper reduced exte 
riorly-screw-threaded neck 14 of the tubular 
bearing 13 extends a suitable distance above 
the bottom of the receptacle 15 of the churn, 
a washer 16 and a suitable packing-ring 17 
being passed over said neck to make a water 
tight joint at that point. Secured by a trans- 6 
verse pin 18 to the spindle 12 and embracing 
said spindle and bearing against the top sur 
face of the neck 14 is a cylindrical block 19, 
the adjacent surfaces of the block and neck 
being made to bear tightly against one an 
other by the resilient action of a spring 20, 
interposed between the pinion 11 and the 
lower surface of the tubular bearing 13 and 
encircling said spindle. The resiliency of the 
spring tends to push down on the pinion 11, 
which, being keyed to the spindle, draws the 
latter after it and insuring a tight joint be 
tween the block 19 and neck 14. 
Embracing the upper end of the spindle, 
that is, the end projecting above the block 
19, is the hub 21 of a hollow propelling-blade 
disk 22, whose periphery is connected to the 
hub portion by a series of inclined blades 23, 
the said blade-disk forming the perforated 
bottom of the rotatable air-induction tube or 
cylinder 23, located centrally within the re 
ceptacle 15 and extending up to within a suit 
able distance from the cover 24 thereof. The 
hub 21 loosely embraces the spindle 12, but 
the lower peripheral extension of said hub is 
provided with a downwardly-inclined finger 
25, having formed as a part thereof a con 
cave depression 26, which the projecting end 
of the pin 18 is adapted to engage, and in the 
rotation of the spindle the engaging end of 
the said pin 18 will revolve the hub 21 with 
it, and thus impart rotation to the tube 23'. 
The manner of effecting the rotation of the 
parts is too obvious from the gear connections, 
as shown, and needs no detailed description. 
Along the periphery of the cylinder or tube 
23', and at a slight distance from the base 
thereof, are cut the vertically-elongated (or 
practically elliptical) slots or openings 26', 
the same being formed by puncturing the 
plate of the periphery in a manner to have 
the width of the opening (or minor axis there 
d 
3O 
35 
45 
90 
ICO 
2 
574,282 
of) in a line with the radius of the cross-sec 
tional circle of the tube (see Fig. 2) and the 
length of the opening (or major axis) sub 
stantially parallel with the general axis of 
the tube. (See Fig. 5.) In addition these 
Openings are characterized in having their 
sides circumscribed exteriorly by the out 
wardly-convex terminal edge 27 of the out 
wardly-bulging wall 2S, bounding one side of 
the opening, and circumscribed interiorly by 
the inwardly-convex edge 29 of the abutting 
bulging wall 30, bounding the opposite side 
of the opening, the Wall 28 being, however, 
the larger of the two, that is, covering more 
superficial area. Of course the nearer par 
allel the major axes of the several openings 
are with the axis of rotation of the air-induc 
tion tube the greater will be the efficiency of 
the latter in drawing air into the receptacle 
holding the cream. The tube 23' being ro 
tated in the direction indicated by the arrows 
in Figs. 2 and 3, the air will be drawn in, as 
indicated by arrows in Fig. 1, thence pass 
into and through the openings 26' and into 
the cream confined within the receptacle, 
thoroughly agitating said cream and produc 
ing butter in a minimum amount of time. 
A hollow rib 31, formed along the inner wall 
of the receptacle, serves to deflect the gen 
eral rotary motion imparted to the liquid, 
and thus serves as an additional means of 
agitating the cream. As seen by the arrow 
in Fig. 2, the openings 26' tend in a direction 
opposite to the direction of rotation of the 
tube, thereby drawing the air from the out 
side into the interior of the tube and through 
the openings into the cream to be converted 
or operated on. An annular concave hood 
50, opening downward and carried by the 
outer wall of the tube 23', serves as a further 
deflector of the currents of cream, thus min 
imizing the time in which the butter can be 
produced. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a butter-churn, a suitable rotatable 
air-induction tube, having one or more elon 
gated openings formed along the periphery 
of the tube, the major axis of each opening 
being substantially parallel to the axis of ro 
tation of the tube, the minor axis of each 
opening being substantially in line with the 
radius of a cross-sectional circle of the tube, 
a large outwardly-convex wall bounding the 
Outer limit of each opening, and all inwardly 
convex and smaller wall bounding the inward 
E. of each opening, substantially as set 
fort, 
2. In a butter-churn, a suitable cream-re 
ceptacle, a spindle mounted in the same, a 
transverse pin carried by the upper end of the 
spindle, a rotatable air-induction tube lo 
cated in the receptacle, a tubular hub form 
ing part of said tube and adapted to pass over 
said spindle, and a finger formed with the 
hub and having an engaging depression with 
which the end of the transverse pin is adapted 
to engage during the rotation of the spindle, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a butter-churn, an air-induction tube 
or cylinder, having a series of peripheral 
openings formed at one end thereof, a blade 
disk having a series of blades radiating from 
a common center forming the bottom of the 
tube, and means for imparting rotation to the 
tube and disk, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a butter-churn, a suitable Cream-re 
ceptacle, a spindle projecting through the 
bottom of the same on either side thereof, a 
pinion carried at the lower end of said spin 
dle, a coiled spring encircling the spindle and 
interposed between the terminal pinion and 
the bottom of the receptacle, and a block car 
ried by the spindle above the bottom and ad 
jacent thereto and bearing down upon the 
same by reason of the resilient action of the 
spring, whereby a tight joint is made be 
tween the spindle and the bottom, substam 
tially as set forth. 
5. In a butter-churn, a suitable rotatable 
spindle, an air-induction tube having a bot 
tom provided with a hub adapted to embrace 
or pass over the upper end of the spindle, a 
circular block carried by the spindle and 
adapted to be embraced by the lower portion 
of the hub, a pin passed transversely through 
the block and spindle, and a finger forming a 
continuation of the tubular portion of the 
hub and adapted to engage the projecting end 
of the pin, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a butter-churn, an air-induction tube 
or cylinder, having a series of openings dis 
posed along the peripheral walls of the same, 
a blade-disk forming the perforated bottom 
of said tube, said disk having a series of in 
clined blades radiating from a common cell 
ter to the walls of the tube, and means for 
imparting rotation to the tube and disk, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES SEBASTIAN. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED A. MATHEY, 
EMIL STAREK. 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
95 
I do 
O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574384.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 574,384, 
F. E. BROCKETT, 
EAR TRUMPET, 
P 
Patented Jan. 5, 1897. 
WZTAvEssza. 
Aeory% 
IvvZazi oA. 
Aziz VA AZ7ZooZAZ77 
2.24%a al 
A 77 or waYa. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK E. BROCKETT, OF ROME, NEW YORK. 
EAR-TRUM PET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,884, dated January 5, 1897. 
Application filed March 6, 1896, Serial No. 582,034 (No model.) 
- 
a little removed from the face of the sounding 
board or plate 5. It will also be noted that 
the diameter of the sounding board or plate 
5 is greater than the diameter of the cone S 
and its lower open end. 
The use of the instrument is so obvious as 
not to require particular description but it 
may be noted that the acoustic properties of 
this instrument are such that the Volume of 
sound is largely multiplied or increased by 
this instrument. It may also be noted that 
this instrument may be used without the per 
forated plate 2, but I find that it works much 
more satisfactorily and increases the volume 
of sound or concentrates it much more per 
fectly than without the perforated plate 2. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In an ear-trumpet the bell, the ear-tube 
entering the side of the bell and curved down 
Referring to the reference-figures in a more to a position adjacent to the bottom of the 
bell, a sounding-plate opposite the end of the 
ear-tube in the bottom of the bell, a spring 
Supporting the sounding-plate, and a perfo 
rated plate closing the mouth of the bell, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In an ear-trumpet the combination of a 
bell, an ear-tube extending to a point adja 
cent to the bottom of the bell, a sounding 
plate and a spring supporting the same, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. An ear-trumpet having the bell 1, the 
ear-tube 3, the sounding-plate 5 mounted on 
a spring and the internal cone 8, substantially 
as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have affixed my signa 
ture in presence of two witnesses, 
To all tuhon, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, FRANK E. BROCKETT, 
of Rome, in the county of Oneida and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Ear-Trumpets; and 
Idohereby declare that the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
which will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form part of this speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
ear-trumpets. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows a perspec 
Fig.2 shows a 
tive view of my ear-trumpet. 
sectional view of a portion of the body of the 
Fig. 3 shows a longitudinal sec 
instrument. 
tion of the same. 
particular description of the device, 1 indi 
cates the bell of the instrument, provided with 
a perforated plate 2 at its large or flaring end, 
and also provided with a fixed section of ear 
tube 3, which enters the side of the bell and 
is curved down adjacent to the bottom, as 
shown, and is enlarged or flaring at its lower 
end adjacent to the bottom. Onto the external 
portion of the tube 3 is attached or slipped on 
the sectional ear-tube 4, which is a telescoping 
tube. In the bottom of the body or bell 1 and 
close to and opposite the inner end of the ear 
tube 3 is provided a sounding board or plate 
5, mounted on a weak or flexible spring 6 by 
its center, the spring being secured on the 
head of the bell at 7 7. There is also pro 
vided inside of the bell an in Wardly-inclined 
or conical flange S, the lower edge of which 
is substantially on a line with the end of the 
ear-tube 3 and stands in a position quite close 
to the edge of the end of the tube 3 and also 
P. A. TANNER, 
RICH. A. GEORGE. 
FRANK E. BROCKETT. 
Witnesses: 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574484.txt	(No Model.) 
M. E. JOHNSON, 
SHOE LACE FASTENER, 
No. 574,484. 
; 
Patented Jan. 5, 1897. 
 
WITNESSES 
67,78-y ---a 
(2% %23. 
 
INVENTOR 
7ey. di 
By 
ArTORNEYS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARY ELLA JOHNSON, OF GREEN WICII, NEW YORK. 
SHOE - LACE FAST ENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,484, dated January 5, 1897. 
Application filed May 25, 1896, Serlal No. 592,992, (No model.) 
25 
IO 
To all tufton, it natly concern: 
Be it known that I, MARY ELLA JOHNSON, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Greenwich, county of Washington, and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Shoe-Lace 
Fasteners, of which the following is a specifi 
cation, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, forming a part thereof, in 
which similar letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in shoe-lace fasteners, the object of the inven 
tion being to provide an article of this char 
acter which is adaptable for attachment to 
the bow of a shoe-lace when the same is tied 
to prevent the accidentaluntying of the lace. 
The device is inexpensive, simple in con 
struction, and durable. 
The invention will be hereinafter fully de 
Scribed, and specifically set forth in the an 
nexed claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a per 
spective view of a shoe having my improved 
device attached to the lace thereof, and Fig. 
2 is a perspective view of the device itself 
shown on an enlarged scale. 
In the practice of my invention I provide 
a metallic box A, which said box is provided 
with upwardly-extended end walls a, and a'. 
These said walls are formed integrally with 
a flat base C, and the structure is preferably 
composed of non-resilient metal. Projecting 
from the surface of the front wall a is a lug 
ca, adapted for locking the device, as will be 
hereinafter described. 
Hinged to the rear wall a is a plate B, 
which is composed of resilient sheet metal. 
This said plate is provided with forwardly 
extended side tongues b and an end wall b', 
said end wall having a recess b therein for 
engagement with the lug a of the box. A. 
The outer edges of the tongues b are turned 
up to form beads b, adapted for engagement 
with the ends of a shoe-lace, whereby said 
lace will not be cut or injured, and the wall 
b' of the said plate B is provided with an out 
... Wardly-turned projection b, which acts as a 
handle in operating the device. 
In attaching the device to a shoe the box 
or plate A may be passed under the ends of 
the shoe-lace C before said lace is tied, and 
after it is tied the lid or plate B will be 
35 
45 
clamped down upon the bow thus formed, 
the ends c and loops c' thereof being tightly 
clamped against the side edges of the plate 
A and the wall b' of the said lid being in 
tight engagement with the wall Clf of the plate 
A, whereby the bow cannot accidentally be 
come untied. When it is desired to release 
the same, it is only necessary to force the 
spring-wall U' outwardly until its socket bis 
released from the lug Ct. 
If it is desired to attach the device to the 
shoe-lace after the same has been tied, it will 
be simply necessary to collect all of the ends 
and loops of the bow together and extend 
them to one side and lay them over the up 
per surface of the plate A, whereby when the 
lid B is clamped down into engagement with 
the plate A all of the said ends of the lace will 
be clamped tightly against the plate A. 
I do not confine myself to the specific de 
tails of mechanical structure as herein de 
scribed above, as it is obvious that under the 
scope of my invention I am entitled to slight 
variations of detail. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A shoe-lace fastener comprising a non 
resilient lower plate and a resilient upper 
platehaving tongues formed integrally there 
with adapted for engaging the sides of the 
said lower plate, and means for fastening the 
two plates together and locking them to each 
other, substantially as shown and described. 
2. In a shoe-lace fastener, the combination 
of a lower plate of non-resilient metal having 
rear and front walls extended at right angles 
respectively from its front and rear edges, 
and an upper plate of resilient metal which 
has tongues projected from its two side edges 
and a wall projected from its outer edge, said 
plate being hinged to the rear wall of the 
said lower plate, and a locking device for 
maintaining the two parts in engagement with 
each other, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 22d day of May, 
1896. 
MARY ELLA JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
M. MCCLEAN, 
B. M. OAKES. 
55 
65 
75 
95 
Od 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574584.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 574,584. 
. 
- 
G, H, STATEN. 
SIGN, 
Patented Jan. 5, 1897. 
 
 
A vvuomov. 
2 
z3 7- A 7 
. 
elttovo 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. STATEN, OF PORTSMOUTH, OHIO. 
vo 
SG N. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,584, dated January 5, 1897. 
Application filed February 12, 1896, Serial No. 579,082, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
O 
To alluvhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGE H. STATEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ports 
mouth, in the county of Scioto and State of 
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Signs; and Ido hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to whichit ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in signs; and it has for 
its object, among others, to provide a simple 
and cheap sign which canbe readily changed 
at will each day, as the storekeeper or other 
person desiresto change the character of the 
advertisement. 
It embodies a suitable support from Which 
are suspended detachably and adjustably the 
signs, which also are made adjustable. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion Will hereinafter appear, and the novel 
features thereof will be particularly pointed 
out in the appended claims. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, forma part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1isa frontelevation of myimproved 
sign. Fig. 2 is a rearview thereof. Fig. 3 
is a view of a modified form. Figs. 4, 5, and 
6 are details of the hooks and supporting de 
vices. Fig. 7 is a perspective detail. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in the several views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates a suitable sign 
board, preferably of wood, of any desired 
width and length and thickness, on which it 
is designed to print a permanent advertise 
ment of some article or the name of the man 
ufacturer or other advertisement, although 
this board may be in the nature of a black 
board, so that the sign or advertisement may 
be changed at will. B are chains or cords 
supported from opposite ends of this board 
in any suitable manner and of any desired 
length. 
Care slats of any desired number provided 
at or near each end with a hole c, through 
Which the cords or chains pass. These slats 
are adjustable in the direction of the length 
of the cords and chains and may be held in 
their adjusted positions in any suitable man 
ner-such, for instance, as by the wire hook 
shown in Fig. 4, placed on the under side of 
the slat, and the point of the hook passing 
through a link of the chain and holding the 
slat in position. 
If a cord is used for the supporting device 
B, a flexible wire hook E (seen in Fig. 5) is 
employed instead of the hook seen in Fig. 4, 
the Small projecting point e being driven in 
the slat near the cord, and the curve e' of 
said hook springs the hook in tight against 
the cord, the other end engaging the slat. 
Fare double hooks screwed into the under 
sides of the slats and any distance apart. 
These hooks are made double, so that both 
sides of the holder can be used. The signs 
Gare supported from these hooks and may 
be of any desired character, being preferably 
of Wood in the nature of a blackboard, so that 
the signs can be readily placed thereon with 
chalk and erased when itis desired to change 
them. These hooks canalso be used for sup 
porting articlesina store-window, if desired. 
I also may employelastic tapes H, the same 
width as the slats and placed on the face 
sides thereof, made fast on the slats on the 
left hand, with tacks or otherwise, and se 
cured to the opposite end by means of a ring 
and a hook I and J. This is adapted for use 
when a sign made from roll-paperis continu 
ous from top to bottom of the holder. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown the signs supported 
one from the otherand theside cords orchains 
dispensed with. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. The combination with the supporting 
board and the cords or chains suspended 
therefrom, of the slats connecting the cords 
orchains and the signs supported from said 
slats, the said slatSbeing adjustable upon the 
cords or chains, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with the supporting 
board and the cords or chains suspended 
therefrom, of the slats connecting the cords 
orchains and the signs supported from said 
95 
9o 
IOO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
574,584 
slats, the said slats being adjustable upon cords or chains, and double hooks supported Io 
the cords or chains, and means for holding from the slats, substantially as described. 
the same in their adjusted position, substan- 
tially as described. 
board and the cords or chains suspended 
therefrom, of the slats connecting the cords 
orchains and the signs supported from said 
slats, the said slats beingadjustable upon the 
3. The combination with the supporting- ing Witnesses. 
VVitnesses: 
VV. D. MYERs, 
ROBERT A. CROSS. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
i specification in the presence of two subscrib 
GEORGE I. STATEN. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574684.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 574,684. 
 
H. M. HUGHS, 
HEATER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan, 5, 1897. 
e 
S. 
S 22 
Hitpasses 
-6a7631%zzi/5. 
 
- 
y 
a. f3 
Ipeptor 
WAzzazza /777/e72's 
Z. 
?y 72Zs Atforpeys, 
(No Model.) 
H. M. HUGHS, 
HEATER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 574,684. 
Patented Jan, 5, 1897. 
ad 2 la Ra-2a-2R, 
28 
3 
2 Sast 
2 
 
 
S 
 
Eas...is a SaSSSSSSOSS 
as HL 
2.222 C2a32 state a ra. a. 2 
S 
 
 
elekelelee 
N.E.2h. 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
3. 
s NNNSSSSSSS 
2. 
2C al 
s 
/22 
e 
2 2. 
Ipileptor 
2 
*"v" Harze, M//zzs 
THE NORRIS PETERS CO, PHOTO-LITH). WASH:NGTON, d. , 
N 
Witposses 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HARDIN MANN HUGHS, OF THREE MILE BAY, NEW YORK. 
HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,684, dated January 5, 1897. 
Application filed December 30, 1895, Serial No. 573,728, (No model.) 
5 
15 
25 
35 
45 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HARDIN MANN HUGHS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Three Mile Bay, in the county of Jefferson 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
and useful Heater, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
heaters. 
The object of the present invention is to 
improve the construction of heaters and to 
provide a simple and inexpensive one capable 
of use in a sleigh or other vehicle as a foot 
warmer and adapted to be employed for heat 
ing rooms and the like. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide such a device which may, when desired, 
be readily converted into a cooking appa 
ratus capable of use either indoors or out. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of a heater constructed in accordance 
with this invention. Fig. 2 is a horizontal 
sectional view. Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional 
view on line acac of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a trans 
verse sectional view on line y y of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 5 is a similar view on line 2, 2 of Fig. 2. 
Figs. 6 and 7 are detail views of the gener 
ator. Fig. 8 is a detail sectional view of one 
of the legs. Fig. 9 is a detail sectional view 
illustrating the manner of mounting the cook 
ing-Support on the casing. 
Like numerals of reference designate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
IngS. 
1 designates an inner rectangular casing 
constructed of suitable metal and supported 
by legs. 2, preferably disposed at the corners 
and provided with caps of asbestos or other 
Suitable non-conducting material to prevent 
any liability of a carpet or the like being 
scorched or otherwise injured through the 
legs of the heater becoming too hot. The as 
bestos caps are retained on the legs by bands 
4, arranged at the upper edges of the caps, 
and the casing is provided adjacent to one 
end with a transverse partition 5, and its 
bottom 6 is provided with perforations to per 
mit the necessary draft for a burner 7, which 
is located within the casing 1. 
Horizontal sheets or plates 8 and 9 are lo 
cated above and below the bottom of the cas 
ing and are suitably spaced therefrom by ver 
tically-disposed projections 10 and 11, which 
are preferably formed integral with the bot 
tom of the casing, and which extend from the 
upper and lower faces of the bottom thereof. 
| The plates or sheets 8 and 9 are secured by 
bolts or other suitable fastening devices, 
which pass through perforations of the bot 
tom of the casing and through the adjacent 
lugs, which are preferably located at the 
The lower sheet or plate 9. 
corners thereof. 
is imperforate to cause the air for supporting 
combustion to enter the heater, at the sides 
and ends, and the upper plate or sheet 8 is 
provided with perforations 12, which are dis 
posed over the intervals between the perfo 
rations 13 of the bottom of the casing to pre 
vent any direct radiation of the heat from 
the burner in order that the upward passage 
of air for supplying combustion will not be 
interrupted or disturbed. 
The burner 7 is substantially U-shaped 
and is suitably supported by enlarged lugs or 
posts 14, preferably formed integral with the 
bottom of the casing and provided at their 
upper edges with curved notches to form seats 
for the burner, and the latter is secured on 
the enlarged lugs or posts by any suitable 
clips 15. One end of the burner is closed and 
the other end is provided with an extension 
16, disposed at an angle to the adjacent side 
of the burner, passing through a perforation 
of the transverse partition 5, and arranged 
within the narrow compartment formed by the 
said partition 5 and the adjacent end of the 
casing. 
The extension of the burner is open and is 
separated a suitable distance from the re 
duced end 17 of a generator 18, communicat 
ing by a pipe 19 with a suitable reservoir of 
gasolene or other hydrocarbon. The genera 
tor is provided at the terminus of the pipe 19 
with a chamber 20, forming a receptacle for 
the gasolene, and communicating by a pas 
sage 21 with the discharge-opening 22. With 
in the discharge-opening is mounted an ad 
justing-screw 23, which forms a cock or cut 
off to regulate the supply of gas to the burner. 
- 
- 
- 
55 
65 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
OO 
2. 
 
2 
574,684 
5 
3O 
The outer terminal of the screw 23 is Squared 
for the reception of a key, and a suitable nut 
24 is mounted on the generator and carries a 
packing surrounding the screw and prevent 
ing the escape of gas or gasolene. The nut 24 
is mounted on a tubular extension of the gen 
erator. The tubular extension passes through 
a perforation of an adjacent wall of the cas 
ing 1, the body of the generator being ar 
ranged at the inner face of the Wall and a 
nut at the outer face thereof, and the nut 24 
Operates as a clamp and engages the casing 
and holds the generator firmly in position. 
The supply-pipe 19 communicates with the 
chamber 20 at one side thereof, and the outer 
end of the chamber is closed by a screw 
plug 25. 
An evaporating-dish 26 is mounted in the 
end compartment of the casing at a point 
beneath the reduced end of the generator, 
and is adapted to receive a suitable quantity 
of the gasolene and enable the same to be ig 
nited and to heat the generator preparatory 
to the generation of gas in a manner similar 
to gasolene-burners of the ordinary construc 
tion, as will be readily understood by those 
skilled in the art to which this invention ap 
pertains. 
The extension 16 is located at one end of 
the burner, and the other end of the burner 
is provided with a jet-opening 7", disposed in 
the direction of the generator for supplying 
the necessary heat for the same. 
The casing is provided adjacent to the 
evaporating-pan 26 with a foraminous por 
tion 27, which, while affording a sufficient 
draft to support combustion in the evaporat 
ing-pan, will prevent any sudden draft or 
high wind from blowing the flame from the 
generator, and this will be found particularly 
advantageous when the heater is used in the 
Open air. 
The burner is provided at the inner faces 
of its sides with perforations 28 to cause the 
jets to extend inward at an angle and to im 
pinge against a horizontally-disposed radia 
tor 29, suspended within the casing 1 from a 
perforated top 30 thereof. The radiator 29 
is suspended by bolts 31 or other suitable fas 
tening devices, and it is spaced by depending 
projections 32, formed integral with the per 
forated top 30 of the casing 1. A horizontally 
disposed sheet or plate 33, of asbestos, is se 
cured by the fastening devices 31, and is 
Spaced from the radiator and also from the 
perforated top 30 by lugs 34 and 35, formed 
integral with the radiator and the top 30 and 
located, respectively, below and above the 
sheet or plate 33. The asbestos sheet or plate 
33 is perforated, and the perforations thereof 
are disposed alternately with relation to those 
of the top 30, to prevent any direct upward 
radiation of heat from the radiator 29 in 
event of the latter becoming excessively 
heated. 
The top 30 of the casing 1 is detachable and 
is Supported upon the upper edges of the 
isides and ends of the body of the casing 1, 
and it is provided with depending flanges en 
gaging the body of the casing and prevent 
ing the top from shifting or slipping acci 
dentally. The radiator, which is suspended 
from the top, may be constructed of any suit 
able material, but is preferably made of solid 
metal beveled on its lower face at the ends, 
and presenting a lower convex face. 
The inner casing 1 is arranged within an 
open-work outer frame or casing 36, forming 
a foot-rest and supported by posts or lugs 37 
formed integral with and extending upward 
from the perforated top 30 of the inner cas 
ing, asbestos being interposed between the 
posts or lugs 37 and the top of the foot-rest, 
as shown at 3S. The foot-support is substan 
tially rectangular in cross-section, and is 
composed of an oppositely-inclined top 39, 
and sides and ends 40 and 41, secured to the 
top and to each other, the parts being prefer 
ably provided at their meeting edges with 
lugs 42 for the reception of the fastening de 
vices. The sides of the outer casing or foot 
rest are provided with inwardly-extending 
projections or flanges 43, which engage under 
and interlock with corresponding projections 
44 of the inner casing. The projections or 
flanges 44 space the sides of the outer casing 
or foot-rest, and the latter is also prevented 
from moving upward and is securely held in 
proper position. The top of the casing 36 is 
inclined, as shown, for the convenience of 
the user, and the outer casing or foot-rest is 
interlocked with the inner casing by loosen 
ing or partially removing one end of it suffi 
ciently to allow the lugs or flanges 43 and 44 
to pass each other. After these lugs, projec 
tions, or flanges 43 and 44 are interlocked 
the fastening devices are tightened and the 
engaging portions cannot become acciden 
tally disengaged. 
The outer casing or foot-rest is provided with 
a hinged door 44, and the inner casing is pro 
vided adjacent to the same with a sliding door 
46, mounted in suitable ways and adapted to 
expose an opening 47 of the inner casing and 
provided with a suitable locking device. The 
Opening 47 permits the operator to inspect 
the heating apparatus and to manipulate the 
Sale. 
The device, besides being adapted for heat 
ing rooms and operating as a foot-Warmer, is 
also capable of use for cooking, and when this 
is desired the Outel casing or foot-rest and the 
perforated top 30, with its radiator, are re 
moved and a support 48 is employed. The 
Support 48 rests upon the upper edges of the 
inner casings similar to the perforated top 30, 
and it may be constructed in any suitable 
manner to adapt it for holding the vessels 
employed in cooking or heating. 
It will be seen that the heater is simple and 
comparatively inexpensive in construction, 
that it is positive and reliable in operation, 
and that it is capable of use as a foot-warmer, 
for heating rooms, and for cooking. 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
Od 
IC) 
I I5 
I 25 
45 
5 3. 
55 
 
574,684 
3 
Changes in the form, proportion, and minor 
details of construction may be resorted to 
without departing from the principle or sacri 
ficing any of the advantages of the invention. 
What I claim is 
1. A heater comprising an inner casing, 
having a perforated bottom, a burner arranged 
within the casing, non-heat-conducting plates 
mounted on the inner casing and disposed 
above and below the bottom thereof and lo 
cated beneath the burner, a removable top 
supported on the inner casing, a radiator sus 
pended from the removable top and carried 
by the same, and an outer casing surrounding 
the inner casing and forming a foot-rest, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A heater comprising an inner casing, 
having a perforated bottom, a burner arranged 
within the casing, a non-heat-conducting plate 
located beneath the burner and mounted on 
the casing and preventing a downward radia 
tion of heat, a radiator suspended Within the 
casing and located above the burner, and a 
foot-rest mounted on the inner casing, Sub 
stantially as described. 
3. A heater comprising an inner casing, 
provided with a perforated bottom, upper and 
lower non-heat-conducting plates mounted on 
the casing and spaced from the bottom there 
of, the lower plate being imperforate, and the 
upper plate being provided with perforations 
located opposite the intervals of the perfora 
tions of the bottom of the casing, a burner 
mounted within the casing and located above 
the upper plate, and a radiator Suspended 
within the casing and mounted above the 
burner, substantially as described. 
4. A heater comprising an inner casing, a 
plate located at the bottom of the casing and 
constructed of non-heat-conducting material, 
a burner located above the plate, a perforated 
top mounted on the inner casing, a radiator 
suspended within the casing and located 
above the burner, and a non-heat-conducting 
plate interposed between the perforated top 
and the radiator and spaced from them, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
5. In a heater, the combination of an inner 
casing, a burner arranged therein, a top de 
tachably mounted on the inner casing, a ra 
diator suspended within the casing and car 
ried by the top, and an open-Work Outer cas 
ing supported upon the said top and forming 
a foot-rest, substantially as described. 
6. In a heater, the combination of an inner 
casing, a burner arranged therein, a top de 
tachably mounted on the casing and provided 
With upward-extending lugs or posts, a radi 
ator suspended from and carried by the top, 
and an outer casing supported upon the posts 
or lugs, and interlocked with the inner casing, 
and being removable therefrom, substantially 
as described. 
7. In a heater, the combination of an inner 
casing, a burner, a detachable top carrying 
a radiator and provided with upwardly-ex 
tending supports, lugs extending horizontally 
from the casing, and an outer open-work cas 
ing supported on the said top and forming a 
foot-rest and provided with lugs engaging 
under and interlocked with those of the inner 
casing, substantially as described. 
S. The combination with a heater provided 
with depending legs, of caps covering the 
lower ends of the legs and constructed of ma 
terial which is a non-conductor of heat to 
prevent a carpet or the like from being 
scorched or otherwise injured, and bands ar 
ranged at the upper edges of the caps and 
securing the same to the legs, substantially 
as described. 
9. In a heater, the combination of an inner 
casing provided adjacent to one end with 
a transverse partition, a substantially U 
shaped burner mounted within the casing 
and having at One end a jet-opening and pro 
vided at the other end with an extension 16 
located in the space between the partition 
and the adjacent end of the casing, a genera 
tor detachably secured to one side of the cas 
ing, provided with a longitudinal bore and 
having a chamber 20 communicating with the 
bore and forming a receptacle for gasolene, 
said generator being provided with a reduced 
end located opposite the end of the extension 
16, an adjusting-screw arranged in the bore 
of the generator and forming a cock or cut 
off, and a tapering evaporating dish located 
below the generator and located adjacent to 
the extension 16 and to the jet-opening of the 
other end of the burner, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
IARDIN MANN HUGHS. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN H. SIGGERS, 
HAROLD H. SIMMs. 
65 
7 o 
75 
9o 
ICO 
5 
IO 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574784.txt	J. G. 0ARLINET. 
PNEUMATIC TOOL, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan 5 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 574,784. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 574,784. 
J. G. CARLINET. 
PNEUMATIC TOOL, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 5, 1897. . 
. 
 
?I] ?? 
I 
 
- Zyry. Z z ? ? 
98)i tvtooooo 
? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN G. CARLINET, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PN E U MATIC T O O . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,784, dated January 5, 1897. 
Application filed May 19, 1896, Serial No. 592,208, (No model.) 
- 
To a LL, ?y/Lo7?, ?? ??? ???, ??/**/: 
Beitknown that I, JOHN G. CARLINET, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Philadel 
phia, in the county of Philadelphia and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in PneumaticTools; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
pneumatic tools for cutting stone, metal, and 
other substances, and has for its object the 
providing of a tool adapted to be operated by 
air or other fluid pressure in such a manner 
as to deliver a sharp quick blow to the chisel 
or cutting-tool while imparting the least pos 
sible vibration to the hand of the operator. 
This invention consists of the novel con 
struction and arrangement of parts, as will 
be hereinafter more fully explained. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a central longitudinal sec 
tional view of the tool, showing the arrange 
ment of the interior portions and also a por 
tion of a chisel or other cutting-tool carried 
thereby. Fig. 2 represents a cross-sectional 
view taken along the line 22 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 
3 represents a cross-sectional view taken 
along the line 33 of Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 repre 
sents a cross-sectional view taken along the 
line 4 4 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 represents a central 
longitudinal sectional view showing the ar 
rangement of the interior portions after the 
tool has been acted on by a charge of air or 
fluid, and Fig. 6 represents a form of handle 
adapted to be used in connection with the 
herein-described pneumatic tool to stop the 
operation of the latter at any desired time. 
Similar parts are represented by similar 
letters throughout the several views. 
The tool is provided with a casing A, one 
end of which engages the tubular screw B, 
and the rear end of the casing is closed by 
means of the plug or closing-screw D. The 
casing A is provided with a recess (t, and its 
cross-section is thickened, as at Ct', forming 
an inner flange. The tubular screw B is pro 
vided with a chamber Cand an exhaust-port 
b, or, instead of having the portb, a port b'may 
be drilled through the front of the screw, in 
which case the exhaust through port b' would 
act as a blast to remove the chips and dust. 
The closing-screw D is provided with the 
ports d, d", and d. 
MI represents an an vil held partly by the 
thickened portion a' of the casing and partly 
within the chamber C. 
L represents a portion of a chisel or other 
cutting-tool passing through one end of the 
closing-screw D and held by the anvil M. 
N represents a spiral spring within the 
chamber C and exerting a pressure on the 
face of the anvil M and on the face of the 
tubular screw B, and consequently on the 
casing, so as to normally hold the parts in 
the position shown in Fig. 1. The anvil M 
is provided with the socket m and ports m' 
and m. 
H represents a central inlet-pipe, one end 
of which is made solid and shaped to fit the 
socket m of the anvil and slightly flattened 
at that end, as ath. The said pipe is screw 
threaded, as at l', to receive a hose-coupling. 
This inlet-pipe H is provided with a central 
passage or duct h and the ports h' and hi. 
The top and bottom of the pipe His flattened, 
as ath, where it passes through the rear end 
closing-screw D, the object of which is to afford 
an exhaust-passage from the chamber F. In 
order to prevent the pipe H from sliding en 
tirely out of the tool, a pin Pisinserted, which, 
engaging the flattened portion of the pipe, 
will only allow a movement of the pipe equal 
in extent only to the length of the flattened 
portion thereof. 
E represents a plunger or striker adapted 
to fit snugly within the casing A and to move 
back and forth under pressure in such a man 
ner as to strike the anvil M and operate the 
chisel. This plunger M is provided with a 
central aperture, in which slides the pipe H, 
or the plunger may be said to slide on the 
pipe II. In the rear end of the said plunger 
is a cavity e, and near the other end are the 
ports e, e', and e. The space within the cas 
ing between the rear end closing-screw and 
the plunger forms a chamber F, while the 
space between the other end of the plunger 
and the anvil and projection a forms a sec 
ond chamber K, into both of which chambers 
65 
7 ? 
75 
9 O 
? ? ?. 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
574,784 
the ail or other fluid under pressure passes 
and imparts the requsite motion to the mov 
ing parts. 
The operator having placed the point or 
blade of the chisel against the surface to be 
cut, he holds the chisel with one hand while 
he presses the pipe II with the other until he 
feels it come in contact with the anvil. When 
so held, the parts of the tool may be said to be 
in theirinitial positions for action, and the op 
eration of the tool from this point is as follows: 
Referring to Fig. 1, which represents the 
parts in their initial positions, it will be seen 
that the parts are so arranged that the cham 
ber F is in direct communication with the 
passage h, and the chamber K is open to ex 
haust through the ports m, chamber C, and 
port b. In this position the air or other fluid 
under pressure enters the chamber F from the 
central duct h through the ports h", d, and d". 
The plunger E, then being the portion which 
presents the least resistance to the air or other 
fluid, will be driven quickly forward, striking 
a sharp blow on the anvil M. The plunger E, 
after striking the anvil, stops against the same, 
and the air in chamber F, reacting on the face 
of the closing-screw D, will force the whole 
Casing backward, compressing the Spring N 
until the parts assume the position shown in 
Fig. 5. In this position the chamber F is now 
open to exhaust through the ports d", d, d, 
and d*, and the chamber K is open to the air 
or other fluid supply from duct I through 
ports h, e, e', and e, while the exhaust to that 
chamber is closed. When the parts assume 
the above position, the air or other fluid under 
pressure entering the chamber K forces the 
plunger back, and the casing and other parts 
assume their initial positions. The motive 
fluid may now be again admitted and the op 
eration repeated. It will be seen that when 
the plunger E moves forward under pressure 
of the air or other fluid in the chamber E the 
port e comes in front of the port h, but it 
will be observed that the admission of air or 
Other fluid into the chamber Kwill not take 
place until the port e comes in front of the 
recess Ct' through the backward motion of the 
casing, as above described. 
Instead of exhausting the air or fluid from 
chamber F through ports d, d", d, and d a 
port e may be drilled through the casing, so 
that when the parts assume the position shown 
in Fig. 5 the exhaust will take place through 
e' in the same manner as it would through 
ports hi', d', &c., in supply-pipe II. 
The Small passage in', communicating with 
the Socket in and port n', acts to relieve any 
pressure that might be caused in front of the 
pipe II through lealkage of the socket-joint. 
In some cases, especially where large tools 
are used, it is advisable to employ some ad 
ditional means for arresting the motion of the 
tool when once started. I accomplish this by 
the arrangement shown in Fig. 6, which con 
stitutes a sliding handle. When Such a han 
dlle is employed, the central pipe II is modi 
fied, as represented by H'. The duct h is 
partitioned, as at h", and two ports hand h, 
drilled through the pipe H, communicate with 
the central duct, one on each side of the parti 
tion flu. 
T represents a piece of hose, and V a hose 
coupling screwed to the end of the pipe II. 
The sliding handle consists of the casing A', 
provided at one end with the closing-screw 
D'. An inner sleeve R is carried within the 
casing, and the space between the said sleeve 
and the pipe II, which it surrounds, forms 
the chamber S. 
The packing Q is provided to prevent leak 
age through the ends. It will be seen that 
in order for the air or other fluid to reach the 
tool proper, or the duct on the right of the 
partition h9, it will have to pass from the duct 
on the right through the port h, chamber S, 
and port S. The above can take place when 
the sliding handle occupies the position shown 
in the figure, but suppose the handle to be 
moved backward, or to the left, then the port 
his would be closed and the admission of air or 
other fluid to the tool will be cut off. 
When the front face of the casing A' is in 
contact with the shoulder h", then the posi 
tions of the parts will be such as to admit the 
air or other fluid into the tool, but when the 
handle is carried to the left, so that the plug 
D' strikes the portion v of the hose-coupling, 
the air or other fluid will be cut off and the 
tool will stop its operation. 
It will be seen from the above that a tool is 
provided in which a maximum velocity is im 
parted to the chisel or cutting-tool with a 
minimum amount of motion of the casing. 
This insures a heavy blow by the cutting-tool 
with small vibration of the hand of the op 
ellaltO. 
It will be further observed that the parts 
are extremely simple and that the tool may be 
easily talken to pieces and cleaned, but it is 
obvious that although I have shown only one 
form of tool the same is capable of modifica 
tion in proportion and minor changes in con 
struction without departing from the spirit 
of my invention. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a pneumatic tool, the combination, 
with a casing closed at both ends, of a plunger 
adapted to move within the said casing, an 
anvil adapted to be struck by the forward 
motion of said plunger, a cutting-tool carried 
by said anvil, and means for admitting and 
exhausting fluid under pressure at the ends 
of the said plunger through an alternate mo 
tion of the casing, substantially as described. 
2. In a pneumatic tool, the combination, 
with a casing provided with closing-screws at 
each end, of a plunger adapted to move within 
the said casing, an anvil also within said cas 
ing and adapted to be struck by the forward 
motion of the said plunger, a central supply 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
75 
85 
go 
95 
I OO 
O 
1. I5 
I 25 
574,784 
3. 
pipe and means for alternately admitting and 
exhausting the motive fluid at the ends of the 
aforesaid plunger, substantially as described. 
3. In a pneumatic tool, the combination, 
with a casing provided with front and rear 
closing-screWS having admission and exhaust 
ports, of a plunger provided with ports and 
adapted to move Within the said casing, an 
anvil also provided with ports and carried by 
the aforesaid casing and front closing-screw, 
a cutting-tool carried by the said anvil and 
passing through said front closing-screw, and 
a central supply-pipe provided with ports, 
and passing through the rear end closing 
screw, and the plunger, and engaging the said 
anvil, substantially as described. 
4. In a pneumatic tool, the combination 
with a casing provided with front and rear 
end closing-screws having admission and ex 
haust ports, of a plunger provided with ports 
and adapted to move within the said casing, 
an anvil provided with ports and carried by 
the said casing and the front end closing 
screw, a cutting-tool carried by the said an 
vil and passingthrough the said front closing 
Screw, and a central Supply-pipe having a 
solid head, provided with ports and passing 
through the aforesaid rear end closing-screw 
and plunger, substantially as described. 
5. In a pneumatic tool, the combination 
With a casing provided with front and rear 
end closing-screws having admission and ex 
haust ports, of a plunger carried within the 
said casing, an anvil provided with ports, car 
ried within the said casing and front closing 
screw and adapted to be struck by the for 
Ward motion of the plunger, a cutting-tool 
carried by the said anviland passing through 
the said front closing-screw, a central sup 
ply-pipe, made solid at one end, provided 
With ports and passing through the said rear 
closing-screw and plunger and adapted to 
engage said anvil, substantially as described. 
6. In a pneumatic tool, the combination, 
with a casing provided with a rear end clos 
ing-screw having admission and exhaust 
ports, of a second closing-screw inserted in 
the other end of the said casing and provided 
with exhaust-ports and a central chamber; a 
plunger provided with ports and adapted to 
move Within said casing; an anvil provided 
with ports and carried by said casing and 
front closing-screw; a cutting-tool carried by 
the said anvil, a central supply-pipe made 
solid at one end, provided with ports and pass 
ing through the said rear closing-screw and 
plunger, and engaging the anvil, substan 
tially as described. 
7. In a pneumatic tool, the combination, 
with a casing, of a closing-screw provided with 
a central chamber and exhaust-port and in 
Serted in One end of the casing, a rear closing 
screw provided with ports and inserted in the 
other end of the said casing, a plunger pro 
vided with ports and adapted to move within 
the said casing, an anvil provided with ports 
and carried within said casing and front clos 
ing-screw, a cutting-tool carried by the said 
anvil, means for resisting the forward motion 
of the said anvil carried by the said front clos 
img-screw, and a central Supply -pipe, pro 
vided with ports and adapted to be engaged 
by the rear end closing-screw plunger and an 
vil, substantially as described. 
S. In a pneumatic tool, the combination 
with a casing provided at each end with a 
closing-screw having admission and exhaust 
ports, of a plunger adapted to move within 
said casing, an anvil carried within said cas 
ing and front closing-screw and adapted to be 
struck by said plunger, a cutting-tool carried 
by said anvil, a spring adapted to resist the 
forward motion of the said anvil, and means 
for admitting and exhausting fluid alter 
natively to and from both ends of the said 
plunger, substantially as described. 
9. In a pneumatic tool, the combination 
with a casing provided with closing-screws at 
each end having admission and exhaust ports, 
of a plunger provided with ports and adapted 
to move within the said casing; an anvil car 
ried within the said casing and provided with 
ports and front and rear cavities or sockets, 
a cutting-tool carried by said anvil in the 
front socket, a spring adapted to resist the 
forward motion of the said anvil, and a cen 
tral supply-pipe provided with ports, pass 
ing through the said rear closing-screw and 
plunger and adapted to engage the rear socket 
of the aforesaid anvil, substantially as de 
scribed. 
10. In a pneumatic tool, the combination 
with a casing of a closing-screw having ports 
and provided with a central chamber, of a 
second closing-screw provided with ports and 
inserted in the other end of said casing, a 
plunger and ports therein carried within said 
casing, an anvil also provided with ports 
and carried within the said casing and clos 
ing-screw chamber, a cutting-tool carried by 
said anvil, a spring carried within said clos 
ing-screy chamber and adapted to resist the 
forward motion of said anvil, a central inlet 
pipe having a solid head, provided With ports 
and passing through said rear end closing 
screw and plunger and adapted to engage the 
aforesaid anvil, substantially as described. 
11. In a pneumatic tool, the combination 
with a casing, of a closing-screw provided with 
a central chamber and ports and inserted 
in one end of said casing, a second closing 
screw provided with ports and inserted in the 
other end of said casing; a plunger provided 
with ports and carried within the said casing; 
an anvil also provided with ports and carried 
within the said casing and closing-screw cham 
ber, a cutting-tool carried by one end of said 
anvil; a spring carried within said closing 
screw chamber and adapted to resist the for 
ward motion of said anvil and carried by said 
closing-screw chamber; a central supply-pipe 
having a solid head at one end and adapted 
to be connected to the source of fluid-supply 
at the other provided with ports and passing 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
7 O 
75 
95 
? ? ? 
I li O 
II 5 
I 25 
 
4. 
574,784 
Screw and provided with ports, a cutting-tool 
carried by the said anvil, a spring carried 
within the front closing-screw and adapted 
to resist the forward motion of the said anvil, 
a central supply-pipe, having a solid head at 
one end and adapted to be connected with 
the source of fluid-supply at the other end, 
passing through the rear end closing-screw 
and plunger and engaging the said anvil, 
means for limiting the motion of the said sup 
ply-pipe, substantially as described. 
14. In a pneumatic tool, the combination 
with a sliding casing closed at both ends and 
adapted to act as a valve, of a plunger car 
ried within the said casing, an anvil adapted 
to be struck by the forward motion of said 
plunger, a cutting-tool carried by the said 
anvil, and means for admitting and exhaust 
ing fluid at the ends of said plunger through 
the alternate motion of the said casing, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix ny signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOIIN. G. CARILINET. 
35 
4. ? 
45 
VWitnesses : 
ROBERT A. BEAVER, 
AILLAN J. CASSIDY. 
5 
15 
2 ? 
through the rear closing-screw and plunger 
and adapted to engage said anvil, substan 
tially as described. 
12. In a pneumatic tool, the combination 
with a casing, of a closing-screw provided with 
a central chamber and inserted in one end of 
said casing, a second closing-screw inserted 
in the other end of said casing, a plunger 
adapted to move within said casing, an anvil 
adapted to be struck by said plunger and car 
lied within sai? casing and closing-screw 
chamber, a cutting-tool carried by said anvil, 
a central supply-pipe having a solid head at 
one end and adapted to be connected with 
the source of fluid-supply at the other, pro 
vided with ports and passing through the real' 
closing-screw and plunger and adapted to en 
gage the said anvil, and ports provided for the 
admission and expulsion of the fluid at the 
ends of the said plunger, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
13. In a pneumatic tool, the combination, 
with a casing provided with closing-screws 
in each end having admission and exhaust 
ports; of a plunger provided with ports and 
carried within the said casing, an anvil car 
ried within the said casing and front closing 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574884.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 574,884. 
D. J. DAVIS. 
CENTRIFUGAL CREAM SEPARATOR, 
Patented Jan. 12, 1897. 
FIG.I. 
a 
 
3 
a? 
6. 
9. 
93s. 
a2 \t is 
O2 
| 
 
? 
A. 
A. 
Ja/ 
- 
WITNESSES 
2-6- 
3%-2-c67- 
INVENTOR 
2 / 224. 
BY-Z, 2 (7. vo, 
ATTYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL J. DAVIS OF CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS. 
CENTRFUGAL CREAM - SEPARATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,884, dated January 12, 1897. 
Application filed August 21, 1895, Serial No. 559,983, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it invally concern. 
Beit known that I, DANIEL J. DAVIS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Centrifugal Cream - Separa 
tors; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
This invention relates more especially to 
improvements in that class of devices used 
in the process of mechanically creaming milk 
by centrifugal action. 
Practical Working has demonstrated the 
fact that great care and skill must be exer 
cised in constructing and putting the differ 
ent parts together, so that the true balance 
of the separator vessel or drum may be uni 
formly maintained. 
The high rate of speed at which this class 
of machines is run makes it an absolute re 
quirement that the detachable parts may be 
readily removed and replaced without throw 
ing the separator vessel or bowl out of bal 
ance in the least. 
The object, therefore, of this invention is to 
secure the diaphragm or dome dividing the 
milk and cream walls in the process of sepa 
ration that the same may be quickly and con 
veniently removed and replaced without the 
least possibility of affecting the accurate bal 
ance of the revolving cylindrical vessel or 
bowl. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical ion 
gitudinal section of a separator Vessel and 
interior parts, and Fig. 2 a broken-away Sec 
tional detail. 
A is a separator vessel or bowl, preferably 
of the cylindrical form shown, and A' the 
usual driving-spindle, shown broken away. 
A conical cap B closes the upper end of the 
creaming vessel. This cap has sloping sides 
upwardly and terminates in a contracted top 
part a, having a vertical Wall. A detachable 
conical diaphragm. Cislocated on the inside of 
the vessel and is of such a shape as to conform 
to the contour of the sloping sides of cap B 
up to the contracted top part C. From this 
point upwardly the diaphragm is provided 
with a neck extension a', having straight 
sides and fitting closely within the correspond 
ing sides of cap B. This diaphragm divides 
the outgoing volumes of milk and cream, the 
55 
 
sloping or inclosed sides being of a less diam 
eter than that of the correspondingly-decreas 
ing diameter of the inclosing cap, and provides 
an annular space Cl for the upward flow of 
the outgoing volume of creamed milk into a 
passage a and out through a tubular plugb. 
The volume of cream as it is separated from 
the milk flows upwardly on the inside of the 
diaphragm into the throat-passage in the neck 
extension and escapes therefrom through an 
outlet (d. This neck extension has a SCreW 
threaded engagement with the inclosing Walls 
of the cap, as at g, below the milk-outlet. 
From the point of its threaded engagement 
upwardly the exterior surface of the neck is 
close-fitting in the inclosing Wall, as shown. 
In Patent No. 521,104, dated June 5, 1894, 
the neck extension is threaded to the cap 
close to the top, thus rather supporting the 
diaphragm in a suspended position. 
In the present arrangement the threaded 
connection is at the junction of the dia 
phragm and its neck extension and at the 
base of the contracted top part of the cap B, 
thus more rigidly supporting the diaphragm. 
from a central point below the milk and Cream 
outlets. By this arrangement the diaphragm. 
is much less liable to be sprung or twisted 
out of shape in removing or replacing the 
same and therefore lessening the chances. Of 
getting the vessel out of balance. 
The full milk is received into the Vessel 
through the tube D, which opens at the bottom. 
E is the usual wing attachment for impart 
ing the required motion to the liquid. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In centrifugal cream-separators, the Com 
bination with a rotatable vessel or bowl, pro 
vided with a conical closing-cap terminating 
in a contracted top part having a milk-outlet 
therefrom, of a diaphragm, corresponding in 
contour to the sloping sides of said cap but 
of a less diameter, and terminating in a neck 
extension having a cream-outlet and provided 
with a threaded connection in said contracted 
top part below the milk-outlet, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
DANIEL J. DAVIS. 
Witnesses: 
L. M. FREEMAN, 
L. B. COUPLAND. 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US574985.txt	(Model.) 
No. 574,985, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
J. DES MOND, 
INJECTOR, . 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 12, 1897. 
 
Qzz3 
 
, 
S 
 
- S ? 
the Norris Peters co, Photo-lit-to. Washiorori. D. c. 
(Model.) 
J. DESMOND. 
:INJECTOR, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 574,985, 
Patented Jan. 12, l897. 
 
 
  
 
 
SENSNSSANS 
R NS S N S W 
N 
SKENSNISKS 
 
 
 
 
2 
 
 
72??zzzesses 
. 
Z72.2/e72Zaz7. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN DESMOND, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO THE NATHAN 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
NJ ECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 574,985, dated January 12, 1897. 
Application filed September 3, 1896, Serial No. 604,707. (Model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
To a LL, ?p/L??, it ??? ????cer?: 
Beit known that I, JOHN DESMOND, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city, 
county, and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in In 
jectors, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to injectors in which 
the Water by successive impulses of two or 
more steam-jets is forced into the boiler and 
in which the final overflow is forcibly closed, 
requiring efficient means for the opening and 
closing of the overflow simultaneously with 
the closing and opening of the valve which 
admits the operating-steam into the injector. 
It is one object of my invention to so con 
struct an injector that its capacity, that is, 
the amount of water fed by the injector into 
a steam-boiler, can be readily adjusted to the 
Varying duty of a stationary or locomotive 
engine in connection with which the injector 
may be used. Ordinarily for the purpose of 
regulating the quantity of water delivered 
double-jet injectors have been provided with 
a Water-valve arranged in the Water-chamber 
or suction-pipe of the injector and operated 
independently of the steam-inlet mechanism. 
Under this arrangement the water-valve is 
kept Wide open when the maximum amount 
of water is to be delivered, and in order to 
feed smaller quantities the supply of feed 
Water is reduced by partially closing the 
water-valve. On the other hand, the volume 
of steam issuing from the different steam 
nozzles remains constant, resulting necessa 
rily in a considerable increase in the tempera 
ture of the Water and consequently in an in 
terruption of the Water-jet before the desired 
reduction in the amount of feed-water could 
be reached. This is an occurrence well known 
to those skilled in the art. The greatest 
range of delivery can be obtained by varying 
the sectional area of the lifting steam-nozzle 
and of the combined nozzle of an injector of 
the character proposed by means of an end 
wise-movable and properly-formed forcing 
steam-nozzle. Heretofore this has usually 
been done by means of steam-valve-operat 
ing mechanism and nozzle-operating mech 
anism interdependent in their action, there 
by rendering the mechanism too complicated 
for practical purposes and making it impossi 
ble to obtain a fixed position of the forcing 
steam-nozzle for maximum delivery, which 
is of course most desirable for the purpose 
of attaining the highest possible range of de 
livery. By means of my improved construc 
tion this desirable end is attained in an ef 
fective, practical, and simple manner. 
A second object of my invention is to so 
construct the lever mechanism of the injector 
that the strain upon its component parts 
should be reduced to a minimum, thereby in 
creasing the durability and efficiency of the 
device. 
These, together with other features of my 
invention and their resultant advantages, 
will be pointed out in the detailed description 
of the apparatus in connection with the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of this 
specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal axial section of 
the injector. Fig. 2 is an end view of the 
lever arrangement. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical cross 
Fig. 4 is a hori 
section on line 33, Fig. 1. 
Zontal cross-section on line 4 4, Fig. 3. 
Fig. 
5 is a horizontal cross-section on line 55, Fig. 
3; Fig. 6, a like section on line 6 6, Fig. 3. 
C is the casing or barrel of the injector, 
which at a', a, and a is provided with the 
usual threaded necks for the steam, water, 
and delivery connections. 
b is the steam-chamber, b' the water-cham 
ber, and b the delivery-chamber, of the in 
jector, which latter is provided with the usual 
backflow-valve. (Not shown in the draw 
ings.) 
Into suitable partitions of the casing are 
screwed the lifting steam-nozzle c, the inter 
mediate nozzle d, the combined condensing 
and delivery nozzle e, and the cap g. 
The forcing steam-nozzlefis longitudinally 
movable and is supported and guided partly 
in the lifting steam-nozzle c and partly in the 
cap g. Cap g forms the seat of the steam 
valve h, operated by the lever i, which valve, 
provided with a cylindrical extension h", con 
trols the admission of steam to the forcing 
steam-nozzle f, as well as to the intermediate 
steam-chamber ke, which is formed by and in 
cluded between the cap g and the lifting 
steam-nozzle c. This intermediate steam 
chamber, when valve h is partly or fully 
opened, is supplied with steam from the main 
95 
I OM O 
I. ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
574,985 
5 
C. 
5 
2 5 
4 O 
45 
chamber b tlhrough channels l in cap g. 
From the intermediate steam-chambel the 
steam enters the lifting-nozzle through chan 
nels c' in said nozzle. It will be noticed that 
the lifting steam-jet proper is formed as an 
annular opening by the inside bore m of noZ 
zle c and the outside of the forcing steam 
nozzle f. Back of the bore in the forcing 
nozzle is slightly tapered, so that by moving 
this nozzle forward increasing diameters Will 
enter the bore n, thereby reducing the all 
nular opening at n and with this the deliv 
ory capacity of the injector. The forward 
end of nozzle f is also tapered, so as to reduce 
the area of the annular water-passages in noZ 
zles d and egradually when nozzle f is moved 
forward, thereby still further decreasing the 
delivery capacity when so desired. 
n is the overflow-space for the lifting steam 
jet, n' the overflow-chamber, and n the usual 
Overflow-valve. In starting, the lifting steam 
jet passes through the space in, valve n, and 
final overflow-outlets n and n into the at 
mosphere. The final overflow-opening n is 
controlled by valve O, which is operated by 
the same ever which controls the steam ad 
mission. 
p is a check-valve interposed between wa 
ter-chamber band overflow-chamber n'. This 
valve admits an additional supply of Water 
in addition to that at the receiving end of 
nozzle d whenever the pressure in chamber 
n is lower than that in chamber b". 
Nozzle f is adjusted and moved in the fol 
lowing manner: The nozzle is provided at its 
bottom with a rack which engages with a 
pinion f' on spindlef, this latter being packed 
and guided by the stuffing-box fand capf, 
respectively. By means of the lock-nut f 
the handle f" is made fast on the conical end 
of spindle f. To this handle is pivoted by 
pinfa second handlef, to which is attached 
by means of a dovetail arrangement, such as 
shown in Fig. 6, a lock-pin f', which passes 
loosely through the upper part of handlef 
and engages with notches milled into the outer 
surface of stuffing-box plate f". A spring 
fi, placed into a recess of handle f" and press 
ing against the inner surface of handlef, 
tends to force the pin 4 into whatever notch 
it is opposite, thereby fixing the position of 
handleft and with it that of nozzle f. By 
compressing the spring in grasping the lower 
ends of handles f" and if the pin f will be 
pulled out of the notches in plate f", when 
the spindle f* and with it the pinion f can be 
oscillated and the nozzle f moved to and fro 
at will. 
It will be noticed that as the movement of 
nozzle f is entirely independent of the steam 
valve mechanism the position of said nozzle 
for maNinnum, as well as minimum, delivery 
or for intermediate delivery capacities can be 
fixed independently of the steam-valve. 
The construction of the lever mechanism 
is as follows: The spindle h' of valve h passes 
through an ordinary stuffing-box, and by 
 
75 
means of cross-piece land pin it is attached 
to lever i. To suitable lugs on the casing of 
the injectoris pivoted at r the fulcrum-bar ir', 
which is provided with an upward extension 
r, through which are passed two pins and 
q-. The upper pin 
forms the fulcrum for 
the leveri. The lowerpin 'forms the fulcrum 
for two hangers n, hung on pin l and engag 
ing by means of pin o' the rod O', to which is 
pivoted ato the spindle O of overflow-valve 0. 
It is evident that by moving the lever in the 
direction of the arrow the steam-spindle h' 
and overflow-spindle Owill move in the direc 
tion of the arrows on their center limes, pro 
ducing a perfectly-parallel motion for these 
two spindles. At the same time the power 
exercised at lever applied to valve O will be 
multiplied through the intermediate-lever 
system, making it possible to easily overcome 
the pressure against valve O in stopping the 
apparatus. 
Spindle o' is guided in stuffing-box S and 
guide-box s', which latter also closes the com 
munication between delivery-chambert' and 
water-chamber l'. 
The operation of the injector is as follows: 
The lever is moved slightly in the direction 
of the arrow, lifting valve h off its seat. 
Steam through passages l, chamber k, and 
passages c' will enter the lifting-nozzle and, 
passing through overflow-openings n, n, 7, 
and into the atmosphere, will exhaust the 
air from the Water-chamber and Suction-pipe 
and cause the atmospheric pressure to drive 
the water from a well or tank into the in 
jector in the manner usual in injectors. The 
water so raised will pass through the receiv 
ing end of nozzled and by the lifting steam 
jet will be driven partly through valve in', 
partly through nozzle e into delivery-cham 
berb, and from there through overflow n 
into the atmosphere. By moving the lever 
gradually backward the cylindrical extension 
7 of valve I will be removed from its guide 
in cap g, and stealm will gradually enter also 
the forcing-nozzle f. The water will receive 
a second impulse from the steam passing 
through nozzle if and will be driven with 
increasing velocity through nozzle e. The 
pressure in chambert will soon rise above 
that in chamber l', and the valve * Will be 
closed down by the increasing pressure in 
chamber b. When this takes place, all the 
water will be compelled to pass through noz 
zle e into chamber b* and through the over 
flow-opening n, the area of which is con 
tinually decreased by the gradual closing of 
valve o. The pressure in chamber l' will 
now rise rapidly, and when the valve h is 
fully opened and valve O fully closed the ve 
locity of the jet in e and the pressure in cham 
ber U* will have increased sufficiently to over 
come the resistance of the boiler-pressure, 
and then the water will enter the boiler. 
In Fig. 1 nozzle fand handle f are shown 
in their position for maximum delivery. To 
obtain the minimum delivery, nozzle f has to 
95 
OO 
II. ? 
I I5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
574,985 
3. 
be moved forward until a shoulder f' on it and its spindle, overflow-valve O and its spin 
brings up against the base of nozzle c. In 
dle, lever i, fulcrum-bar ir", ri and hangers ri, 
termediate positions of nozzle f will give ca 
of the link o' connecting spindle O' With hang 
pacities intermediate between the maximum 
ers r, as and for the purpose specified. 
and minimum delivery. 
8. In a double-tube injector with forcibly 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
closed overflow, a compound-lever arrange 
by Letters Patent, is 
ment for the simultaneous operation of the 
1. In a double-tube injector of the charac 
steam-valve and overflow-valve in parallel 
ter described, the combination with the mov 
but opposite directions, consisting of the le 
able forcing steam-nozzle, lifting, intermedi 
ver i, double fulcrum-bar r", r, hangers r, 
ate and delivery nozzles of the intermediate 
link o', spindlesh and o, valves hando, the 
steam-chamber ke, formed by the valve-seat 
hangers being Oscillatingly attached to pin 
cap g and the lifting steam-nozzle c, as and 
h, which connects spindle h' to lever i, the 
for the purpose specified. 
lever imparting an Oscillating motion to hang 
2. In a double-tube injector of the charac 
ers n, which transmit this motion through 
ter described, the combination with the annu 
link o' to spindle O' and valveo, substantially 
lar lifting steam-nozzle, central forcing steam 
as described and specified. 
nozzle, intermediate and delivery nozzles, of 
9. In an injector with forcibly-closed over 
the intermediate steam-chamberk, formed by 
flow the combination with the casing of the 
the Valve-seat capg and lifting steam-nozzle c 
injector, overflow-valveo, spindle of and stuff 
and supplied with steam from the main steam 
ing-box S of the guide-box s', separating the 
chamber b through passages lin cap g, as and 
delivery-chamber from the water-chambert' 
for the purpose specified. 
and serving as guide to the spindle o', sub 
3. In a double-tube injector in which both 
stantially as described. 
10. In an injector with forcibly-closed over 
sets of nozzles are located in a common barrel 
On the same axis, the combination with the 
flow, the combination with the casing of the 
annular lifting steam-nozzle, central forcing 
injector, overflow-valveo, spindle o and stuff 
steam-nozzle, intermediate and delivery noz 
ing-box s, of the cylindrical guide-box s', 
passing longitudinally through the Water 
zles of the intermediate steam-chamber k, 
formed by the valve-seat cap g and lifting 
chamberb', separating this latter from the de 
steam-nozzle c, supplied with steam from the 
livery-chamber band serving as guide and 
main chamber b through passages l in capg 
support for spindle O', substantially as speci 
and supplying steam to nozzle c through pas 
sages c' in the latter, substantially as de 
11. In an injector with forcibly-closed over 
Scribed. 
flow, the combination. With the casing, over 
4. In a double-tube injector of the charac 
flow-valve O, spindle O' and stuffing-box S, of 
ter described, the combination with the mov 
the cylindrical guide-box s', screwed at one 
able forcing steam-nozzle, annular lifting 
end into the partition which separates the 
Steam-nozzle, intermediate and delivery noz 
water and delivery chambers, and at the other 
zles of the intermediate steam - chamber k, 
end fitted piston-like into the stuffing-box S 
formed by the valve-seat cap g and lifting 
and tightly packed therein, permitting the 
Steam-nozzle C, said cap and nozzle serving also 
overflow-spindle to pass through the Water 
as supports and guides for the movable forc 
chamber, but preventing any fluid from pass 
ing steam-nozzlef, substantially as described. 
ing from the delivery-chamber b into Water 
5. In a double-tube injector of the charac 
chamber b, substantially as described. 
ter described, the combination with the mov 
12. In a double-tube injector of the charac 
able forcing Steam-nozzle, annular lifting 
ter described, the combination With the mov 
steam-nozzle, intermediate and delivery noz 
able forcing steam-nozzle, pinion f' and spin 
zles, of the cap g, provided with a seat for 
dle fof the double handle ff, notched plate 
valve h, With side passages landa central pas 
f' and pin f', all arranged, constructed and 
sage, the former communicating with the 
operated substantially as described. 
chamber inclosed between the cap and the 
13. In a double-tube injector of the charac 
lifting steam-nozzle, the latter with the nozzle 
ter described, the combination with the steam 
f, steam admission into passages l, being con 
valve-operating mechanism, of the movable 
trolled by valve h and into the central passage 
forcing steam-nozzle, an operating mechan 
by extension h of said valve, substantially as 
ism for said nozzle independent of and sepa 
and for the purpose specified. 
rate from the steam-valve-operating mechan 
6. In a double-tube injector with forcibly 
ism and means for locking said nozzle-oper 
closed final overflow, the combination with 
ating mechanism in its adjusted position, sub 
the usual steam-valve h and its spindle, over 
stantially as and for the purpose hereinbefore 
flow-valve O and its spindle, and the lever i, of 
set forth. 
the fulcrum-bar ?" ?, and the hangers r con 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
nected to the overflow-valve spindle and op 
my hand this 26th day of August, 1896. 
erated by the lever i, substantially as herein 
before set forth. 
7. In an injector with forcibly-closed over 
flow, the combination with the steam-valve h 
MORRIS STETTHEIMER, 
ADOLPH BARGEBUHR. 
JOHN DESMOND. 
Witnesses: 
fied. 
- 
7? 
75 
9o 
95 
I OO 
I O5 
O 
II 5 
I25 
IO 
2 ? 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575085.txt	(No. Model.) 
No. 575,085. 
 
 
 
P. M. WIEBE. 
SCREW THREAD CUTTING DEVICE, 
Patented Jan. 12, 1897. 
| WVENTOR 
Zazz & M2 V72 eae 
-2.6-6 
-1 
ATTORNEY. 
the NortRIS pateRS co, pro-utics, Wasaton.o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL M. WIEBE, OF ST. LOUIS, MISS O URI. 
SCREW-TH READ - CUTTING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,085, dated January 12, 1897. 
Application filed April 11, 1896, Serial No. 587,187, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, PAULM. WIEBE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at St. Louis, 
State of Missouri, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Screw-Thread 
Cutting Devices, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part hereof. 
Myinvention has relation to improvements 
in Screw-thread-cutting devices; and it con 
sists in the novel arrangement and combina 
tion of parts, more fully set forthin the speci 
fication, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a middle ver 
tical longitudinal Section taken through the 
cutting device. Fig. 2 is a top plan view of 
the tool-holder with the cutter in place. Fig. 
3 is a side elevation of the tool-holder with 
cutter in place, and Fig. 4 is a section on the 
line acac of Fig. 3 of the block which supports 
the cutter. 
The object of my invention is to construct a 
screw-thread-cutting device which is adapted 
to cut along either a tapering or cylindrical 
surface; one which is simple in construction, 
cheap, and durable; one which is positive in 
its action, reliable, and one which consists of 
a minimum number of parts for the charac 
ter of work performed by it. In detail it may 
be described as follows: 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents a 
suitable rotating chuck or cylinder having a 
central or axial opening and terminal heads 
or disks 23, the latter being peripherally 
toothed and adapted to be driven from any 
suitable source of power. 
The stationary 
frame 4 and the rotating chuck mounted 
thereon are herein shown dotted, as these 
parts are old and form in no wise any part of 
my invention. Passing through the axial 
opening of the cylindrical chuck 1 and adapt 
ed to revolve with the chuck is a sleeve 5, 
having a disk 6 passed over the screw-thread 
ed projecting end thereof and bearing against 
the outer surface of the disk or head 3. 
Bolted to the disk 6 is the open end of a cup 
7, which is adapted to receive one end of a 
tube 8, which passes through the sleeve 5 
and which projects outwardly a suitable dis 
tance from the opposite end of the sleeve. 
o 
35 
45 
SO 
A portion of the periphery of the tube 8 is 
screw-threaded, a suitable collar 9, carried by 
a standard 10, projecting from the frame 4, 
being adapted to receive the screw-threaded 
portion of the tube, the parts being so ar 
ranged as to cause the inner end of the collar 
9 to bear against the adjacentend of the sleeve 
5, projecting from the chuck. The tube 8 is 
adapted to move longitudinally through the 
sleeve 5 and at the same time to rotate with 
the latter, this being accomplished by provid 
ing the periphery of the tube with longitudi 
nal grooves or slots 11, in which operate the 
inner ends of the pins 12, driven through the 
Walls of the sleeve. The end of the tube S 
confined in the cup carries a terminal nut or 
head 13, between which and the disk 6 and 
encircling the tube is interposed a resilient 
coiled Spring 14, normally tending to expand 
and hold the parts in the position indicated 
in Fig. 1. 
Passing through the tube 8 and adapted 
to have one end firmly secured to the base of 
the cup by a tightening-bolt 15 is a guide 
rod 16, the said rod passing first through an 
opening formed in the transverse partition 
or diaphragm 17 near the inner wall of the 
hollow tool-holder 18, inserted into and held 
by the projecting end of the tube 8. The rod 
16 thence passes through an opening of the 
terminal wall 19 of the tool-holder, the open 
ing of the wall 19 being out of alinement with 
the opening formed in the diaphragm 17, so 
as to give that portion of the rod 16 which 
guides the tool-supporting block 20 a slight 
inclination to the axis of the tool-holder, for 
a purpose to be presently explained. 
That portion of the tool-holder which pro 
jects from the tube 8 is preferably oblong or 
rectangular in cross-section, the tool-support 
ing block 20 being inserted from the side wall 
of the tool-holder, the inclined groove 21 of the 
block being made to embrace the lower or in 
ner end of the inclined section of the guide 
rod 16. 
When the tool-supporting blockis in place, 
the side wall of the tool-holder, through the 
opening of which the block was inserted, is 
covered by a plate 22, having a central elon 
gated slot or cut-away portion 23, through 
which can be operated (by any suitable tool) 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
575,085 
O 
35 
45 
55 
a tightening-bolt 24, carried by the adjacent 
wall of the block 20, for tightly clamping the 
cutter or knife 25 after the latter has been 
properly adjusted within the block to the sur 
face on which the threads are to be cut. 
The shank of the cutter or knife is provided 
with a screw-threaded socket 26, into which an 
adjusting-bolt 27 is passed, the head 28 of the 
latter being provided with a peripheral groove 
adapted to receive the curved edges of the 
series of supporting-plates 29, secured to the 
top wall of the block 20. The head of the ad 
justing-bolt is thus directly supported and re 
tained in place by the plates 29, and upon the 
turning of said bolt in one direction or the 
other the cutter or knife will be properly ad 
justed within the block 20 to a position to ac 
curately set the knife against the surface of 
the pipe or die on which the threads are to be 
produced. In the present case a screw-cut 
ting die 30 is shown with the cutter in posi 
tion for recutting or sharpening the inclined 
or tapering threaded surface thereof. 
The operation is as follows: Upon rotation 
of the chuck 1 and the sleeve 5 carried by it 
rotation is imparted to the tube 8; but as the 
latter operates within the stationary collar 9 
the tube must necessarily travel forward or 
advance within the sleeve 5, the pins 12 serv 
ing to guide the tube in its longitudinal move 
ment. The die so operated on is held station 
ary, so that the cutting tool or knife, as it is ro 
tated and advanced by the tube S, cuts the de 
sired thread along the inner surface of the 
die. Of course with the rotation of the parts 
already referred to the cup 7 and rod 16 also 
rotate; but as one end of the latter is held 
rigid (being firmly secured to the base of the 
cup) the tool-supporting block 20 as it stead 
ily advances is thus caused to travel along the 
inclined section of the rod 16, (the inclina 
tion of the section corresponding approxi 
mately to the inclination of the generatrix of 
the surface on which the threads are to be 
cut,) and thus accurately cut the threads on 
the inclined surface on which the threads are 
to be disposed. The forward travel of the 
tube S compresses the spring 14, which causes 
the parts to resume their normal positions 
after the die or pipe operated on is removed. 
When occasion arises to cut the threads along 
a cylindrical surface, (as in the case of pipes,) 
instead of inclined surfaces, as shown, the end 
of the rod 16, which is normally secured to 
the base of the cup 7, is loosened therefrom, 
whereby the tool-supporting block simply car 
lies the rod With it as it advances without be 
ing obliged to travel along the inclined sec 
tion of the rod Secured against forward move 
lment. 
It is of course to be observed that the tool 
supporting block 20 freely moves between the 
Walls of the openings cut in the walls of the 
tool-holder in which the block is mounted. 
IIaving described my invention, what I 
1. In a screw-thread-cutting device, a suit 
claim is 
able rotating sleeve, a tube loosely passed 
through the same and projecting a suitable 
distance therefrom, a tool carried by the pro 
jecting end of the tube, intermediate connec 
tions between the sleeve and tube for rotat 
ing the latter with the sleeve and simulta 
neously advancing the same and the tool car- . 
ried by it, and means for restoring the tube 
75 
to its normal or original position within the 
sleeve upon the completion of the cutting op 
eration, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a screw-thread-cutting device, a suit 
able rotating sleeve, a tube loosely passing 
through the same and projecting outwardly 
from each end thereof, a head carried by one 
of the projecting ends of the tube, a coiled 
spring encircling the tube and interposed be 
tween the head and the adjacent end of the 
sleeve, the opposite end of the tube having a 
peripheral screw-threaded portion, a station 
alry collar passed over the screw-threaded por 
tion, a tool-holder carried by the tube exte 
rior to the collar, a longitudinal groove or slit 
formed along the outer surface of the tube 
and located within the sleeve, and a pin car 
ried by the sleeve, and coperating within the 
groove of the tube, whereby upon rotation of 
the sleeve, the tube is rotated therewith and 
simultaneously advanced forward, substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. A screw-thread-cutting device compris 
ing a rotating sleeve, a cup carried at one end 
of the same, a tube passing loosely through 
the sleeve and having one end projecting into 
said cup, a head carried by the end of the 
tube confined within the cup, a resilient coiled 
spring encircling the tube and interposed be 
tween the head and the adjacent end of the 
sleeve, peripheral longitudinal slots or grooves 
formed on the tube within the sleeve, pins 
carried by the sleeve coperating in said slots 
or grooves, an exterior screw-threaded por 
tion formed on the tube on the opposite pro 
jecting end thereof, a stationary interiorly 
screw-threaded collar passed over the screw 
threaded portion of the tube, a tool-holder 
carried by the tube on the side exterior to the 
collar, a cutter or knife movable freely in the 
tool-holder in a direction parallel to the shank 
of the cutter, a supporting-block forming a 
part of the cutter, an inclined groove formed 
on one of the surfaces of the block, a guide 
rod passing through the tube and having one 
end firmly secured to the base of the cup, and 
the opposite end having an inclined section 
adapted to be embraced by the groove formed 
in the side wall of the block, the inclination 
of the section or inclined portion of the rod 
corresponding approximately to the inclina 
tion of the generatrix of the surface on which 
the screw-threads are to be cut, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. In a screw-thread-cutting device, a suit. 
able tool-holder, a tool-supporting block mov 
able within the same in a direction parallel to 
the shank of the tool or cutter, a cutter adapted 
to be inserted in the block, a binding-bolt for 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
OO 
575,085 
3 
Securing the shank of the tool within the block, the adjusting-bolt, the parts operating as and 
a screw-threaded socket formed in the shank for the purpose set forth. 
of the tool or cutter, an adjusting-bolt passed 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
into said socket, a head for the adjusting-bolt, in presence of two Witnesses. 
a peripheral groove formed on said head, and 
suitable securing-plates carried by the upper 
surface of the block and having their curved 
edges passed into the groove of the head of 
EMIL STAREK, 
ALFRED A. MATHEY. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL M. WIEBE. 
O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575185.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 575,185. 
H. WEBER, 
OWEN ATTACHMENT FOR STOWES, RANGES, &c. 
Patented Jan. 12, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS<<<<<<% 
22222222222222 N. 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 22 2 a 
22a2 2 
Sansanans 
SaaSas 
the NORRIS RETERSCC), FHOT-). 
THo. washington, b, c, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY WEBER, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
OVEN ATTACHMENT FOR stoves, RANGES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,185, dated January 12, 1897. 
Application filed July 10, 1896, Serial No. 598,775, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY WEBER, of the 
city of St. Louis, State of Missouri, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Owen Attachments for Stoves, Ranges, &c., 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a parthereof. 
My invention relates to an oven attachment 
for stoves, ranges, &c.; and it consists in the 
novel construction, combination, and arrange 
ment of parts hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of a range, the same having my oven at 
tachment applied thereto as required for prac 
tical use. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view 
taken approximately on the indicated line 22 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a vertical section taken ap 
proximately on the indicated line 33 of Fig. 
2. Fig. 4 is a detail view in perspective of a 
screw-threaded shaft and a nut that I make 
use of in carrying out my invention. Fig. 5 
is a detail perspective view of an antifriction 
roller carried by the rack of my improved at 
tachment. 
Referring by numerals to the accompany 
ing drawings, 1 indicates the stove or range 
casing, and 2 the oven-door therein. 
Formed in the casing 1 immediately above 
the oven-door 2 is a boss 3, in which is formed 
a bearing 4, in which is journaled for rota 
tion a screw-threaded rod 5, the outer end of 
which projects through the boss 3 and is 
squared, as indicated by the numeral 6, in 
order that a crank-handle may be located on 
said outer end to rotate the screw-threaded 
rod 5. 
Removably located within the oven is a 
rectangular open-ended and open-topped cas 
ing 7, and extending upwardly from the bot 
tom of said casing at points adjacent the 
sides and ends thereof are pairs of parallel 
bars 8, there being horizontally - arranged 
blocks 9 connecting the upper ends of said 
bars with the sides of the casing 7. 
Located 
between the lower ends of said bars 8 and 
the side walls of the casing are blocks 10, 
upon which blocks and between the pairs of 
bars 8 and the side walls 7 are arranged to 
slide plates 11, each having the pairs of par 
allel inclined planes 12 formed on their top 
edges. Lugs 13 project from the lower rear 
ends of these plates 11, and a pair of pins 14 
project laterally from each of said lugs. 
15 indicates a rack that is arranged to move 
vertically within the casing 7 between the 
pairs of bars 8, said rack being provided on its 
adjacent ends with standards 16, the upper 
ends of which carry antifriction-rollers 17, the 
same projecting through the pairs of parallel 
bars 8 and riding directly upon the inclined 
planes 12 of the plates 11. 
Projecting laterally from the inner faces of 
the sides of the casing 7, adjacent one end 
thereof, are lugs 18, upon the outer ends of 
which are fulcrumed levers 19, the lower ends 
of which pass between the pairs of pins 14, 
the upper ends of said levers being pivoted 
upon the ends of a transversely-arranged bar 
20, in the center of which is formed an aper 
ture 21, through which the screw-threaded 
rod 5 passes. . 
22 indicates a nut that is arranged to oper 
ate in the usual manner upon the Screw 
threaded rod 5, and said nut is constructed 
with laterally-projecting pins 23, which are 
engaged by hooks 24, carried by the bar 20. 
To raise the rack and operate my attach 
ment, the operator locates the crank-handle 
upon the squared end 6 of the rod 5, as shown 
by dotted lines in Fig. 2, and manipulates 
said crank in the usual manner and in the 
proper direction. The nut 22, through which 
the rod passes, being carried by the bar 20, 
will ride along said rod toward the door of 
the oven, and this movement will necessarily 
actuate the levers 19, and the lower ends 
thereof engaging between the pins 14 will 
move inwardly away from the oven-door, and 
the plates 11 will be moved longitudinally 
upon the blocks 10 in the direction indicated 
by the arrow A in Fig. 2. As said plates 11 
thus move, the antifriction-rollers 17, carried 
by the standards 16, which are fixed to the 
rack 15, will ride up the inclined planes 12 of 
said plates 11. Consequently said rack 15 
will be elevated, this being the desired result. 
A reverse movement of the crank located 
upon the squared end 6 of the rod 5 will allow 
the rack 15 to lower. 
An attachment of my improved construc 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
ICC 
 
2 
575,185 
O 
tion is extremely efficient in use, inasmuch 
as the different articles of food while being 
baked can belocated at different planes within 
an oven, and by locating the same at differ. 
ent elevations they will be baked uniformly 
throughout and said articles can be handled 
much easier than where a series of racks are 
employed in the oven. 
The oven-door need not be opened while 
the rack is being raised or lowered, it being 
only necessary to turn the rod 5 with the 
crank-handle, as hereinbefore stated, to ac 
complish the desired result. 
My improved attachment is simple in oper 
ation and construction, is easily and cheaply 
manufactured, and can be readily applied to 
stoves or ranges of ordinary construction, and 
is easily removed to be cleaned or while the 
oven is being cleaned. 
I claim 
1. An attachment for the ovens of stoves 
or ranges, constructed with a suitable casing, 
inclined surfaces arranged for movement 
along the side Walls of said casing, a rackar 
ranged for vertical movement within the cas 
ing, sliding connections between said rack 
and said inclined surfaces, and means of 
moving said inclined surfaces, substantially 
as specified. 
2. An attachment for the ovens of stoves 
or ranges, constructed with a suitable casing, 
mating inclined surfaces arranged for move 
ment along the inner faces of said casing, a 
rack arranged for vertical movement within 
said casing, sliding connections between said 
rack and said inclined surfaces, connections 
between said inclined surfaces whereby they 
are moved simultaneously and means of mov 
3O 
35 
ing said inclined surfaces, substantially as 
specified. 
3. An attachment for the Ovens of stoves 
or ranges constructed With a suitable casing, 
a pair of plates constructed with inclined 
planes on their top edges arranged for move 
ment along the side walls of said casing, a 
rack arranged for vertical movement within 
the casing, standards carried thereby, anti 
friction-rollers carried by the upper ends of 
the standards, the same riding on the in 
clined planes and means for moving the plates 
carrying said inclined planes longitudinally 
within the casing. 
4. An attachment for the ovens of stoves 
or ranges constructed with a suitable casing, 
pairs of vertical bars located adjacent the 
side Walls of said casing, plates arranged for 
movement between said bars and the side 
walls, which plates are constructed with pairs 
of inclined planes, a rack arranged for ver 
tical movement within the casing, standards 
carried thereby, antifriction-rollers carried 
by the upper ends of said standards which 
ride on the inclined planes, a pair of full 
crumed levers, the lower ends of which en 
gage with the forward ends of the plates, a 
screw-threaded rod passing through the Wall 
of the stove or range, a nut located upon said 
screw-threaded rod, and a bar fixed to said 
nut, the ends of which bar are pivoted to the 
upper ends of the fulcrumed levers. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY WEBER. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD E. LONGAN, 
MAUD GRIFFIN. 
45 
55 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575285.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 575,285. 
W. H. MAYs. 
EXTENSION TABLE, 
Patented. Jan; 12, 1897. 
Aanesses; 
27),44. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM H. MAYS, OF LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA. 
EXTENSION-TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,285, dated January 12, 1897. 
Application filed March 29, 1895, Serial No. 543,620, (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
To all tufton, it in?t 7/ CO7 Ce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. MAYS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Los 
Angeles, in the county of Los Angeles and 
State of California, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Extension-Tables, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My improvement relates particularly to 
those extension-tables in which the end or 
marginal sections are arranged upon slides 
and are adapted to be drawn out to extend 
the table without disturbing the main body 
or frame of the table. It has heretofore been 
proposed to produce a table of this class hav 
ing a rigid middle or central section secured 
to the side rails of the table and provided in 
its end rails with a mortise or gain to receive 
square sliding bars which are secured to the 
end sections and are long enough to extend 
across the open space between the inner edge 
of each section and the opposing edge of the 
rigid middle section and to rest beneath such 
middle section, to act as a lever having the 
end rails for a fulcrum and to thus Support 
the end section while in use to prevent it from 
being tilted downward when any weight is 
placed thereupon. This construction is very 
objectionable in that when any one attempts 
to move a table he naturally grasps it by one 
of the end sections, and should this be done 
with this table the end sections will lift up 
and will precipitate to the middle of the table 
any dishes which may be upon the end sec 
tions. It has also been proposed to provide 
a table of this class having in place of the 
ordinary side rails, rails arranged to form a 
groove in which the slide-bars of the end sec 
tions are arranged to slide. By this construc 
tion, however, the slides are caused to contact 
along their entire length with the guides, and 
great friction is thus produced. This friction 
is sufficient to ordinarily prevent the opening 
of the table by one person. Furthermore, this 
construction is quite expensive, the table is 
excessively heavy, and special machinery is 
required to produce it, thus precluding its 
economical manufacture in small lots by an 
ordinary carpenter or mechanic. 
The principal object of my invention is to 
produce a table of this class which shall be 
so simple in its construction that it can be 
quickly and cheaply produced by any car 
penter having ordinary carpenter tools and 
yet will be so constructed that the table will 
be a unit and may be lifted by grasping the 
end sections without any liability of displac 
ing the end sections from their normal posi 
tion by such operation. 
A further object of my invention is to pro 
duce a table having dovetail slides and guide 
Ways and having slides of great length, but 
having very short guideways, so that the fric 
tion between the slides and the guideways 
will be comparatively slight, and one person 
can readily extend or contract the table. 
My invention comprises the various fea 
tures of construction and combinations of 
parts which I employ in accomplishing these 
objects. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate my 
invention. 
Figure l is a perspective side elevation of 
one of my improved tables, showing a portion 
of the rigid center pieces broken away to ex 
Fig. 2 is a fragmental 
pose the construction. 
end elevation of one of my improved tables. 
The legs are broken away to contract the view. 
Fig. 3 is a fragmental detail view illustrating 
the construction of the central dovetailguide 
Ways in which the sliding bars are arranged 
In the drawings, A represents the frame 
of the table, and B represents a central or 
middle section which is rigidly secured to the 
side rails C. a. of frame. 
C and C represent the end sections or imar 
gins of the table, which are rigidly secured to 
the sliding bars c c', respectively. These bars 
are each of a length sufficient to extend from 
one end of the frame A to the other end when 
the sections are closed to form a small table, 
and to extend from the end rails A' A', re 
spectively, to and across the middle section 
B when the marginal sections are extended 
as shown in Fig. 1. In order to secure sim 
plicity of construction, these bars are pref 
erably dovetail in shape, as shown in Figs. 2 
and 3, and I arrange each of such bars in two 
short separate guideways, one of each of such 
sections being formed in one of the end rails 
of the table and the other section being se 
cured to the central or rigid section of the ta 
ble. In the end rails A'A', a' represents the 
dovetail guideways arranged to receive the 
to slide. 
war. 
- 
O 
25 
35 
4) 
45 
95 
IOO 
2 
575,285 
sliding bars. To the middle section B of the 
table I secure three guide-blocks d, d", and d", 
having their opposing faces beveled, and a 
bottom piece D", fastened to the under side 
thereof, all so arranged as to form guideways 
D', in which the guide-bars slide. These 
guideways, it will be observed, are dovetail in 
shape, and while allowing the guide-bars to 
slide endwise prevent the bars from moving to 
right or left or up and down. A stop c' is pro 
vided upon the end of each sliding bar to 
prevent such bar from being drawn out of its 
respective guideway. As shown in the draw 
ings, the blocks d.d. d' are shown secured to 
a cross-piece D', which is secured rigidly to 
the side rails of the frame, but it will be un 
derstood that this cross-piece is only for the 
purpose of securing greater strength, and 
that in practice the blocks may be secured 
directly to the section B. 
In practice to extend the table the opera 
tor grasps one of the end or marginal sections 
and pulls it outward, the sliding bars slide 
easily through the short guideways a' and D'. 
Then the fill or removable section (not shown) 
is placed between the marginal section and 
the rigid middle section and the end section 
is slid back to close any cracks between the 
parts. The usual dowels and sockets are 
provided to cause the removable sections or 
leaves to be firmly held in place, so that when 
the table is extended it may be grasped by 
either the end sections or the removable sec 
tions without any fear of displacement of 
such parts. 
It will be seen that by means of a saw and 
chisel the dovetail guideways can be quickly 
made in the end rails; also, the blocks did' d', 
having plain beveled faces, can be dressed 
Out With ordinary planes, sawed into proper 
length, and secured to the rigid middle sec 
tion without difficulty. Thus my improved 
table can be produced very cheaply and ex 
peditiously in any carpenter-shop, and no spe 
cial tools are required in its manufacture, 
while its operation is superior to any other 
table of which I am aware. 
Now, having described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an extension-table, the combination 
of the frame having the central or middle sec 
tion rigidly secured thereto; the end or mar 
ginal sections each rigidly secured to slide 
bars arranged to reach, when the table is ex 
tended, from the end rails of the frame to the 
rigid middle section, each slide-bar being ar 
ranged to slide in two short guideways, one 
provided in the end rails and the otherformed 
of blocks secured to the middle section, all of 
such guideways being adapted to allow the 
slides to slide endwise therein, but to prevent 
their movement in any other direction, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination set forth of the frame 
having the middle section rigidly secured to 
its side rails, and having the dovetail guide 
ways provided in its end rails; the short dove 
tail guideways secured to the middle section; 
the dovetail slide-bars, each arranged to slide 
in one of the guideways in the end rails, and 
in one of the guideways secured to the middle 
section, and the end or marginal sections se 
cured to the slides, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of the frame having the 
middle section rigidly secured to its side rails; 
the middle guideways each formed of three 
blocks secured to the rigid middle section and 
having their opposing faces beveled, and a 
bottom piece secured to the blocks, all ar 
ranged to form two short dovetail guideways; 
the end rails of the frame having the dove 
tail guideways provided therein; the dovetail 
slide-bars, each arranged to slide in one of 
the guideways of the middle section and one 
of the guideways of the end sections, and the 
end or marginal sections secured to the slide 
bars, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
W. H. MAYS. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES R. To WNSEND, 
ALFRED I. TOWNSEND. 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575385.txt	(No Model.) 
W. THOMAS, 
PENHOLDER. 
No. 575,385, 
Patented Jan. 19, 1897. 
 
WITNESSES: 
 
7 Inventor 
Of76%- 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs co. PHOTo-LTHo, washington, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM THOMAS, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, ASSIGNOR 
. 
- 
TO MARWIN C. STONE, OF SAME PLACE. 
PENHOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,385, dated January 19, 1897. 
Application filed September 30, 1896, Serial No. 607,457, (No model) 
5 
O 
To all, Luhon, it in a 7/ conce.77: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM THOMAS, of 
Washington, District of Columbia, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in Pen 
holders, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to penholders, the ob 
ject being to produce an inexpensive article 
simple in construction, to be employed more 
particularly, but not necessarily, for adver 
tising purposes. 
With these ends in view my improved holder 
consists of a paper tube having one end filled 
with a plug of a plastic cement to hold the pen 
in place, the pen being either inserted in the 
plastic plug after the latter is placed in the 
tube or the pen may be first inserted in the 
tube and the plastic cement thereafter packed 
around it. 
The invention also consists in the details of 
construction and combination of parts here 
in after described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a sectional elevation of a penholder made in 
accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
similar view showing the holder of conical or 
tapered form. Fig. 3 is a transverse section 
on the line C. C. of the preceding figures on an 
enlarged scale. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents a 
paper tube, which may be of either truly cy 
lindrical form, as in Fig. 1, or tapering or 
conical, as in Fig. 2. This tube may be made 
in any suitable manner, either by winding a 
Strip or blank of paper or, if desired, the tube 
may be formed from paper-pulp. In the end 
of the tube I insert a plug or filling B of a 
plastic cement, either plaster-of-paris, Port 
land cement, or any other similar plastic com 
pound, Or, if desired, putty may be employed, 
the essential feature being that the plug will 
harden after it is inserted in the end of the 
tube. The pen is held by the hardening of 
the filling and is preferably pushed or set in 
the filling after the latter is inserted in the 
end of the tube and before it hardens, but it 
is obvious that the pen may first be placed 
in position in the end of the tube and the 
filling thereafter packed around it. The ce 
ment on hardening will firmly and rigidly 
hold the pen in place, so that the penholder 
Will be practically one continuous piece and 
the end of the tube where grasped by the fin 
gers will be preserved in cylindrical form and 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
IOC 
effectually prevented from collapsing. The 
pen may be removed for the insertion of a 
new one by forcibly pulling on the same, and 
when removed a perfectly-formed socket with 
rigid walls will be left, into which the new 
pen may be quickly inserted and by which it 
will be tightly held. 
By the use of putty as the filling or any fill 
ing which contains an oily ingredient the ink 
will be prevented from permeating the filling 
and paper, but for this purpose the end of 
the holder and filling may be coated with a 
waterproof covering, or the ink may be pre 
vented from permeating the holder by Water 
proofing the paper previous to its being wound 
into a tube. 
My improved penholder possesses the ad 
vantages of being light and inexpensive, and 
the plastic cement whenithardens effectually 
and firmly holds the pen in place, and when 
the pen is removed a perfectly-formed socket 
is left, into which the new pen may be in 
serted and by which it will be effectually held. 
Colored or ornamental paper may be used 
to form the tubes, and advertising-labels may 
be pasted thereon or the surface of the tube 
printed upon, the inexpensive character of 
the article and the material from it is formed 
rendering it peculiarly suitable for advertis 
ing purposes. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a pen 
holder comprising a paper tube provided with 
a holder proper for the pen, consisting of a 
filling of a plastic cement inserted in and Com 
pletely filling the end of said tube and pro 
vided with a socket for the pen. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a COm 
bined pen and penholder consisting of a pa 
per tube having inserted in one end a plug 
or filling of a plastic cement and a pen hav 
ing its rear end embedded in said filling; 
whereby on hardening, the pen will be held 
firmly in place and when removed a perfectly 
formed socket will be left. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto set my 
hand, this 30th day of September, 1896, in the 
presence of two attesting witnesses, 
- 
WILLIAM THOMAS, 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES E. RIORDON, 
F. S. ELMORE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575485.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 575,485, 
H. W. LIBBEY, 
STREET CAR, 
Patented Jan. 19, 1897, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOSEA. W. LIBBEY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
STREET CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,485, dated January 19, 1897. 
Application filed December 10, 1894, Serial No. 531,431 (No model.) 
7 O. 
To all whon it naily concei'7. 
Be it known that I, HOSEA. W. LIBBEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Street-Cars, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
electric cars; and the invention consists in a 
compartment at the front end of the car for 
the motorman, in an annex for smokers at 
the rear end, and in certain details of con 
struction, as hereinafter fully described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 represents a side view of a car em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a horizon 
tal section taken on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a view of the connection between 
the annex and the rear platform of the car. 
Fig. 4 is a side view of the annex, showing it 
inclosed. Fig. 5 is a sectional view of the 
top track for motorman's compartment. Fig. 
6 is a similar view of the lower track. Fig. 
7.is a horizontal section of the walls of the 
motormans compartment. Fig. 8 is a verti 
cal cross-section of the upper and lower ends 
of one of the sides of the motorman's com 
partment. Fig. 9 is a view showing the man 
ner of Supporting the upper track from the 
roof. 
A represents the body of the car; B, the 
front platform, having an extension b, which 
supports the motorman's compartment. This 
compartment consists of two vertical semi 
circular parts C C, preferably of metal, of 
such a size that the inner portion C is small 
enough to just fit Within the outer portion C. 
The upper and lower edges of each section 
are fitted with small wheels c c', that travel 
in tracks or ways D D', the lower track D 
being secured to the platform extension b 
and the upper one, D', from the roof of the 
car, it being connected at its central rear por 
tion directly to the roof and on each side by 
l'ods or bars d, secured at one end to the track 
D' and the other end to the roof, as shown in 
Fig. 9. 
Each portion CC' of the compartment is 
fitted with a glass or window c', (see Figs. 1 
Thus crowding is prevented, and the 75 
The portions C. C. being free to be turned 55 
and 7,) through which the motorman has a 
full view of the road before him. 
independently they can both be slid around, 
so as to have a space at the rear end of the 
compartment for the ingress and egress of 
the motorman, and when he is within the 
compartment the rear end can be closed, so 6o 
that all communication with passengers is 
prevented, and when the two portions are in 
the positions shown the motorman is entirely 
protected from the weather, and in the sum 
mer-time the portions BB' can be slid around, 65 
so that the front of the compartment is open 
and the rear portion closed. 
In the upper portion of the compartment 
is arranged a headlight E, which will show 
the condition of the track for a considerable 
distance beyond the car. 
In the body of the car are secured several 
rows of rotating seats G. Each seat being in 
dependent can be occupied by one person 
Only. 
occupant can sit in any position he desires, 
so that should two persons occupying adja 
cent seats wish to converse they can turn 
their seats so that they face each other, no 
matter what the position of the other seats 8o 
may be. 
To the rear platform B' is attached an an 
nex II, which is intended to be occupied by 
smokers. The floor of this annex is below 
the level of the platform B', and steps h are 85 
attached to the platform B' to give access to 
the annex. For summer use I prefer to have 
the annex covered by a roof I, supported by 
standards i, but for winter use I prefer to 
have an upper panel J and a lower panel J, 9o 
the space between the two panels being fitted 
with sashes if', the upper ones, i, being free 
to be pushed up into the upper panel J and 
the lower sashes i' lowered into the lower 
panel J', so that the space between the two 95 
panels J J will be open. This arrangement 
might be used for both winter and summer 
cars, but of course so much air could not cir 
culate through the annex as if the sides were 
open, as shown in Fig.1. 
I prefer to attach the annex to the rear of 
the platform by a hinge-joint K, as shown in 
Fig. 3, and when the car is intended to run 
upon a practically straight track the annex 
OC 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
s 
575,485 
IO 
may be close to the rear platform B', but 
when the car has to run upon a track with 
sharp curves then a space would have to be 
left between the annex and the rear platform 
to allow the annex to adapt itself to the re 
quired curve, in which case the steps I would 
be provided with small rollers to work on the 
floor of the annex, so as to adapt itself ac 
cording to the position of the annex in rela 
tion to the car. I prefer to cover the wheels 
L, carrying the annex, with rubber, as a sub 
stitute for springs. 
If desired, a door might be formed in the 
side, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
I claim 
1. In combination with an electric car a 
compartment for the motorman consisting of 
two semicircular sections working in tracks 
or ways, the lower track being supported by 
the platform and the upper track by bars se 
cured to the roof, one of said sections sliding 
inside the other as set forth. 
2. In an electric car a circular extension on 
the platform upon which is constructed a 
25 
35 
compartment for the motorman, consisting of 
a track or way secured thereon and a track, 
supported from the roof of the car by bars, 
above the lower track in combination with 
two semicircular pieces fitted with wheels at 
their upper and lower ends which wheels 
work in said tracks substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
3. In combination with an electric or street 
car, an annex the floor of which is below the 
level of the car-platform, steps hinged to the 
platform of the car the lower ends of which 
are fitted with rollers resting and free to work 
upon the floor of Said annex, said steps form 
ing a gangway between the car-platform and 
the annex substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, on this 29th day 
of March, A. D. 1894. 
HOSEA. W. LIBBEY. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. STEERE, 
EDWIN PLANTA. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575585.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 575,585, 
. 
W. M. BAKER, 
STATION INDICATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 19, 1897, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
a 1. 
 
 
3 
s 
% 
% e 
Zoe Z 
'a? 
 
THE NORRs PETERs co, Photo-Litho, washington, D. C. 
elebove 
W. M. BAKER 
STATION INDICATOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 19, 1897, 
 
 
 
Y:- Early 
ra,3SSSSSSSSSSSSSaaS SS 
eases 
Wifi 
y assassSaaSaaSSSSSSSSSSSSYSssss 
(No Model.) 
No. 575,585. 
N 
 
 
 
  
 
N 
N 
N % W 
  
 
 
. . 
. 
. 
Ea 2724/. 
^2-e-2- 
e/ 
 
2 
3v.u.c.14to 
Mazan tT. 
244- attorney 
eae 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. BAKER, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
STATION - IND CATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,585, dated January 19, 1897. 
Application filed July 8, 1896, Serial No. 598,435, (No model.) 
SO 
55 
7 O 
75 
To ?till uhon, it 7 votif conce7n 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM M. BAKER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cin 
cinnati, in the county of Hamilton and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Station-Indicators; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in station-indicators, 
the object of the same being to provide a de 
vice for indicating the next stop which the 
train Will make, located at a convenient part 
of the passenger-coach and to be automatic 
ally tripped into action. 
The invention consists of a framework 
mounted in a suitable casing with an opening 
therein, the said casing being located at a 
convenient part of a passenger-car, a pair of 
drums or rollers mounted in said framework, 
a roll of paper or other suitable material con 
taining the names of the stations upon its 
outer surface printed in order thereon and 
Wound upon said drums or rollers, springs for 
maintaining the tension of said roll, means for 
automatically shifting said roll for exposing 
a different station through the opening in the 
casing, and means for reversing the direction 
in which said roll is wound upon said drums 
or rollers. 
The invention also consists in other details 
of construction and combinations of parts 
which will be hereinafter more fully described 
and claimed. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 represents a front elevation 
of my device with the casing partly broken 
away to show the interior construction. Fig. 
2 is a side elevation with the casing removed. 
Fig. 3 is a similar view of the opposite side. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical section through the same, 
taken parallel to the sides of the framework. 
Fig. 5 is a longitudinal section through one of 
the drums or rollers and the shaft upon which 
it is mounted. Fig. 6 is a perspective view of 
the rail, showing means connected thereto for 
automatically tripping the device into opera 
tion. Fig. 7 is a cross-section through the rail, 
showing the trip lug or projection thereon. 
Fig. 8 is a view showing a modified form of 
the invention. Fig. 9 is a similar view of the 
same, looking at right angles thereto. 
Like reference-numerals indicate like parts 
in the different views. 
The casing 1 of my device is located at any 
convenient part of a passenger-car and has an 
opening 2 therein, through which the names 
of the different stations may be viewed one 
at a time. On the inside of the casing 1 is 
mounted a framework made up of two side 
plates 3 and 4, which are suitably braced and 
supported by means of connecting-rods 5 and 
6 at the rear thereof and similar connect 
ing-rods 7 and 8 at the front. Extending 
through the upper ends of the plates 3 and 4 
is a shaft 9, having a rectangular extension 
10 upon one end and a drum or roller 11 
loosely mounted thereon, which is connected 
to said shaft by means of a coil-spring 12, 
whereby the tension on said drum is main 
tained. Upon the outer end of the shaft 9is 
a ratchet-wheel 13, which is engaged by a 
spring-actuated pawl 14 for preventing the 
turning of said shaft to unwind the spring. 
The spring is wound up by inserting a key 
upon the rectangular extension 10 and turn 
ing said shaft. At a point near the lower end 
of the framework and mounted in the side 
plates 3 and 4 is a similar shaft 15, having a 
similar rectangular extension 16, and a similar 
drum 17, mounted thereon and connected to 
said shaft in a similar manner. 
Both of the drums or rollers 11 and 17 have 
guide plates or flanges 1818 upon their outer 
ends, and around said drums is wound a strip 
or roll 19 of paper or other suitable material, 
having the names of the different stations 
along the route of the railway printed in order 
upon the outerface thereof and adapted to be 
visible one at a time through the opening 2 
in the casing 1. The said roll of paper 19 
passes over the connecting-rod 7 adjacent to 
the drum or roller l1 and thence between two 
guide-rollers 2021, mounted in the front side 
of the framework in the side plates 34 thereof. 
The guide-roller 20 is an idle-roller, but the 
IO 
25 
45 
95 
g 
575,585 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
52 
55 
guide-roller 21 is mounted in slots 2222 in the 
side pieces 34 and has a pinion 23 upon One 
end thereof outside of the plate 3. Brackets 
2-4 24 are secured to the front edge of the side 
plates 3 and 4, respectively, and through these 
brackets project tightening-screw's 25 25, 
whose inner ends are adapted to engage the 
pintles 26 upon the outer ends of the guide 
roller 21. By this means the guide-roller 21 
may be forced into close engagement with the 
roll 20 and acts as a gripping-roll therefor. 
The pinion 23 upon the outer end of the roller 
21 meshes with an idle-pinion 27, loosely 
mounted upon the side 3 of the framework, 
as clearly shown. Connecting the two side 
plates 3 and 4 of the framework at a point be 
tween the drums or rollers 11 and 17 is a shaft 
2S, to which is secured a spiral spring 29 upon 
the outer face of the plate 4, the said shaft 
being also provided with a rectangular exten 
sion 30 upon the end which projects through 
the side plate 3. To this shaft is also keyed 
or otherwise secured a cog-wheel 31, which 
meshes with a pinion 32, mounted upon a shaft 
33, which projects through and is slidingly 
mounted in a segmental slot 34 in the side 
plate 3. Fulcrumed to the shaft 28 at a point 
between the side plate 3 and the cog-wheel 31 
thereon is a lever 35, having a laterally-ex 
tending arm 3G, which is connected to the 
shaft, 33, upon which the pinion 32 is mounted. 
IBy this construction it will be seen that by 
moving the outer end of the lever 35 up or 
down the sliding pinion 32 may be thrown into 
mesh with either the pinion 23 upon the outer 
end of the roller 21 or with the idle-pinion 27. 
The rotation of the shaft 28, therefore, in one 
direction would cause a rotation of the roller 
21 in one direction or the other, according to 
whether the sliding pinion 32 is in engage 
ment with the idle-pinion 27 or the pinion 23. 
Secured to the shaft 28 at a point adjacent to 
the inner surface of the side plate 4 is a 
ratchet-wheel 37, with which an escapement 
pawl or lever 3S, pivoted to the side plate 4, 
is adapted to engage. The outer end of the 
escapement pawl or lever 3S has a flanged arm 
39 thereon, which is connected through the 
spring 40 with the connecting-rod 6, as clearly 
shown. Pivoted to the side plate 4 is a trip 
lever 41, which is adapted to engage the un 
der side of the flanged arm 39 on said escape 
ment-lever. The outer end of said trip-lever 
41 is connected through the spring 42 with 
the upper connecting-rod 5, thereby holding 
the inlner end of said trip-lever out of engage 
ment with said flanged arm. The outer end 
of said trip-lever 41 is further connected 
through a pitman 43 with a bell-crank lever 
44, fulcrumed to the under side of the car and 
having One arm extending down along theside 
of the rail 45, as clearly shown in Fig. 6. 
This arm is adapted to engage a lug or pro 
jection 46 upon the side of the rail for the 
purpose of automatically operating to shift 
the roll or strip 19 the distance of the space 
between two of the stations printed on Said 
roll. 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
When my improved indicator is first placed 
in the car in which it is to be used, the roll 19 is 
secured to the ends of the drums or rollers 11 
and 17 and the shafts 9 and 15 turned by a 
suitable key applied to the rectangular ex 
tensions 10 and 16 on said shafts to tighten 
the springs therein to give the proper tension 
to the roll or strip 19. The lever 35 is then 
thrown upwardly or downwardly, as the case 
may be, to throw the pinion 32 into engage 
ment with the idle-pinion 27 or the pinion 23 
upon the outer end of the roller 21. The 
spring 29 upon one end of the shaft 28 is 
then wound up by turning said shaft 28 by 
the application of a suitable key to the rec 
tangular extension 29 on said shaft. When 
this has been done, the device is ready for 
operation. It should be stated, however, that 
the lugs 46 upon the rail 45 are located at 
each station at which the train is to be 
stopped. The roll 19 is so adjusted in the 
first instance that the next station at which 
the train stops is visible through the opening 
2 in the casing 1. As the train proceeds this 
remains in view as a constant indicator to the 
passengers. When the station indicated 
thereby is reached, however, the lower arm 
of the bell-crank lever 44 is brought into en 
gagement with the lug or projection 46 on 
the rail 45, and, through the pitman 43, the 
outer end of the trip-lever 41 depressed. 
This raises the inner end of said trip-lever, 
and, by engagement thereof with the flanged 
arm 39 on the escapement pawl or lever 38, 
raises said pawl and permits the shaft 28 to 
move the distance of one tooth of the ratchet 
wheel 37, the said shaft 28 being driven by 
the spiral spring 29 upon one end thereof. 
The motion of the shaft 28 is transmitted 
through the cog-wheel 31 and sliding pinion 
32 either directly or indirectly, according to 
whether said pinion is in engagement with 
the idle-pinion 27 or the pinion 23 upon the 
outer end of the roller 21. The turning of 
the roller 21, by reason of the frictional con 
nection between it and the roller 20, shifts 
said band the distance of the space between 
two of the printed stations thereon and ex 
poses the next station at which the train stops 
to view through the opening 2. This opera 
tion is repeated as each station is reached 
and passed. When the train reaches the end 
of its route, it is merely necessary, in order 
that the operation of the bell-crank lever 44 
shall shift the roll 19 in the opposite direc 
tion, for the lever 35 to be moved SO as to 
throw the sliding pinion 32 out of contact 
with the idle-pinion 27 into contact with the 
pinion 23, when the motion of the shaft 28 in 
the same direction will turn the roller 21 in 
the opposite direction. 
In Figs. 6 and 7 I have illustrated the form 
of device which will be employed for operat 
75 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
575,585 
S. 
O 
ing the bell-crank lever 44 upon an ordinary 
steam-railway. When my device, however, 
is used upon electric railways where a U-rail 
instead of a T-rail is employed, the construc 
tion and operation will be slightly different. 
This is clearly illustrated in Figs. 8 and 9. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a station-indicator for railway-cars, 
the combination with a casing having an 
opening therein, of a framework upon the in 
side of said casing, a pair of shafts mounted 
in Said casing, drums or rollers loosely mount 
ed upon said shafts, spring connections be 
tween said drums and the shafts to which 
they are respectively attached, a roll or strip 
Wound upon said drums or rollers and having 
the names of the different stations printed 
thereon in consecutive order and visible one 
at a time through the openings in said casing 
and means for automatically imparting to 
said strip or roll a step-by-step movement, 
substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
2. In a station-indicator, the combination 
with a suitable casing having an opening 
therein, of a framework on the inside of said 
casing, made up of a pair of side bars or plates 
suitably connected together, a pair of drums 
or rollers mounted to rotate in said frame 
work, spring connections between said drums 
and the shafts to which they are respectively 
attached, a strip or roll wound upon said drums 
or rollers and having the names of stations 
printed in successive order upon the outer 
face thereof, a pair of gripping-rollers between 
which said Strip or roll passes and means for 
automatically operating said gripping-roller 
to impart a step-by-step movement to said 
strip or roll, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
3. In a station-indicator, the combination 
With a suitable casing having an opening 
therein, of a framework on the inside of said 
casing, made up of a pair of side bars or plates 
suitably connected together, a pair of drums 
or rollers mounted to rotate in said frame 
work, a strip or roll wound upon said drums 
or rollers and having the names of stations 
printed in successive order upon the outer 
face thereof, a pair of gripping-rollers be 
tween which said strip or roll passes, a main 
drive-shaft connecting said side plates or 
bars located between said drums or rollers, a 
Spring for operating said shaft, an escape 
ment connected thereto and controlling the 
movements thereof, connections between said 
drive-shaft and one of said gripping-rollers 
and automatic means for tripping said es 
capement for turning said shaft and impart 
ing a step-by-step movement to said strip or 
roll, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
4. In a station-indicator, the combination 
With a suitable casing having an opening 
therein, of a framework on the inside of said 
casing, made up of a pair of side bars or plates 
suitably connected together, a pair of drums 
or rollers mounted to rotate in said frame 
work, a strip or roll wound upon said drums 
or rollers and having the names of stations 
printed in successive order upon the outer 
face thereof, a pair of gripping-rollers be 
tween which said strip or roll passes, a main 
drive-shaft connecting said side plates or 
bars located between said drums or rollers, a 
spring for operating said shaft, a ratchet 
wheel upon said shaft, an escapement pawl 
or lever acting in engagement there with, a 
cog-wheel upon the outer end of said drive 
shaft meshing with a pinion upon the outer 
end of one of said gripping-rolls and means for 
automatically tripping said escapement for 
imparting a step-by-step movement to said 
strip or roll. 
5. In a station-indicator, the combination 
with a suitable casing having an opening 
therein, of a framework on the inside of said 
casing, made up of a pair of side bars or plates 
suitably connected together, a pair of drums 
or rollers mounted to rotate in said frame 
work, a strip or roll wound upon said drums 
or rollers and having the names of stations 
printed in successive order upon the outer 
face thereof, a pair of gripping-rollers be 
tween which said strip or roll passes, a main 
drive - shaft connecting said side plates or 
bars located between said drums or rollers, a 
spring for operating said shaft, a ratchet 
wheel upon said shaft, an escapement pawl 
or lever acting in engagement there with, a 
cog-wheel upon the outer end of one of said 
gripping-rolls, a trip-lever adapted to engage 
one end of said escapement pawl or lever, re 
lease mechanism on the under side of the car 
in which said indicator is mounted and con 
nections between said trip-lever and said re 
leasing mechanism, the said releasing mech 
anism being adapted to operate from the 
track-rail, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
6. In a station-indicator, the combination 
with a suitable casing having an opening 
therein, of a framework on the inside of said 
casing, made up of a pair of side bars or plates 
suitably connected together, a pair of drums 
or rollers mounted to rotate in said frame 
Work, a strip or roll Wound upon said drums 
or rollers and having the names of stations 
printed in successive order upon the outer 
face thereof, a pair of gripping-rollers be 
tween which said strip or roll passes, a main 
drive-shaft connecting said side plates or 
bars located between said drums or rollers, a 
spring for operating said shaft, a ratchet 
wheel upon said shaft, an escapement pawl 
or lever acting in engagement there with, a 
cog-wheel upon the Outer end of one of said 
gripping-rolls, a trip-lever adapted to engage 
one end of said escapement pawl or lever, a 
bell-crank lever fulcrumed on the under side 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
5 5 s 5 8 5 
of the car in which said indicating mechan- 
ism is mounted, a pitman connecting the specification in the presence of tWO Subscrib- Io 
outer end of said trip-lever with one arm of ing witnesses. 
said bell-crank lever and a lug or projection 
5 on the track-rail with which the other arm of 
said bell-crank lever is adapted to engage, 
substantially as and for the purpose de- 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof Ilhave signed this 
IIARRY L. RU DD, 
OHN GREEN. 
Witnesses: 
y 
A 
WV. A. BASER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575685.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 575,685. 
 
A. E. BROCKETT. 
COMBINATION PIPE TOOL, 
2 
Patented Jan. 26, 1897. 
M 25 
M 
P 
1N 
SS SS 
MTN Esses 
The orris Peters co. Photo-Litho. WASHINGTON. C. 
UNITED STATES 
ATWATER. E. BROCKETT, OF EVERETT, 
PATENT OFFICE. 
HALF TO WILLIAM G. NIXON, OF BRAINTREE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
COMBINATION PIPE-TOOL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,685, dated January 26, 1897. 
Application filed April 6, 1896, Serial No. 586,330, (No model.) 
To all lufwon it invctly conce77: 
Beit known that I, ATWATER. E. BROCKETT, 
of Everett, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
5 and useful Improvement in Combination 
Pipe-Tools, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to a tool which may 
be used as a pipe-cutter, and also may be 
Io used as a vise by substituting for the cutting 
tools proper wise-jaws; and it consists, mainly, 
in a yoke-piece provided with suitable ways 
whereby to steady the tools which are con 
tained therein, and having at one end a back 
I5 rest and at the other end a post suitably 
threaded for the adjustment of the tool and 
adapted to receive either a cutting-tool or a 
pair of Vise-jaws, as may be desired. 
My invention also consists in certain de 
20 tails of construction described below. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation, 
and Fig.2 a longitudinal section, of a tool 
embodying my invention. Fig. 3 is a hori 
ZOntal Section on the line 33 of Fig. 2, and 
25 Fig. 4 a cross-section on line 4 4 of Fig. 2, 
the above figures showing the tool when in 
use as a pipe-cutter. Fig. 5 is an elevation, 
partly in section, of the essential parts of my 
device when used as a wise, Fig. 6 showing 
A is the yoke-piece, having at one end a 
back-rest C, carrying a rotary cutter B. At 
the other end of the yoke is a post C, threaded 
On its interior, in which is the screw-handle 
35 D. The yoke-piece is chambered, as indi 
cated at C', and for a portion of its length the 
walls of said chambered portion are provided 
with ways a. To the end of the screw-han 
dle D is attached a head-blockd, having con 
E is a tool-support consisting of two side 
piecese, in the frontface of which are mounted 
the tools (either rolls or cutters) F. These 
tools are carried upon spindles f, which are 
45 preferably so set into the front face of the parts 
e that they will not rotate. For this purpose 
I prefer to cut of a segment of one end of 
each spindle, so that a portion of the spindle 
shall be flat and lie flush with the front face 
5o of the Wall e of the tool-support, as will be 
seen from Figs. 1 and 3. These spindles are 
4o nected to it by the neck d a key d. 
3o one of the vise-jaws. 
held in place by means of angle-arms G, 
which are pinned at g to the upper part of 
the tool-support E, forming flanges, One of 
which rests against the front face of the tool- 55 
support E, while the other extends around to 
An ear g' projects backward and is 
its side. 
provided with a holeg, which, when the tools 
are in place, registers with a corresponding 
hole in the tool-support. A pingholds these 6o 
parts G and E together. 
By this means the 
tools F may be easily changed, the ping be 
ing first removed and the angle-arms being 
thrown up to release the spindles. I prefer 
to use two angle-arms, but one only is neces- 65 
sary, a socket of ordinary construction being 
provided at the opposite side of the tool-sup 
port to that carrying the part G. I prefer to 
attach this tool-support to the screw-handle 
in the manner described in another applica- 7 O 
tion filed by me April 6, 1896, Serial No. 
586,331, the tool-support for this purpose be 
ing provided with a deep vertical socket H, 
slotted on one side, as ath, the socket being 
adapted to receive the key dand the slot al- 75 
lowing the tool-support to pass down around 
the neck d. (See Fig. 3.) The lower part 
of this tool-support is grooved on each side 
at e' and is made sufficiently narrow to set 
down into the hollow portion Cl' of the yoke- 8o 
piece. To remove this tool-support it is only 
necessary to withdraw the screw-handle D, 
so that the head-block d lies in the opening 
c of the post, in which position the tool-sup 
port is free from the ways a. The tool-sup- 85 
port may then be lifted off from the key. 
If it is desired to use this combination-tool 
as a vise, a vise-block J is provided, cham 
bered on one side, as is indicated atj in Fig. 
5, so that it may rest against the back-rest C. 9o 
without engaging with or touching the cutter 
B and yet receive the necessary support from 
the back-rest. It is provided at its lower end 
with groovese' to slide on the ways a, and is 
so shaped at its lower end as to be dropped 95 
into the chamber a in the yoke-piece at the 
end nearest the post. It is then slid along 
upon the ways Clinto position to form the 
stationary member of the vise. A movable 
member having a corresponding face and IOO 
having its lower portion constructed in a simi 
lar manner is put into position so that it also 
575,685 
will slide along the ways a, being attached 
in some suitable way to the screw-handle D, 
for example in the same manner that the 
tool-support E was attached. If desired, an 
intermediate block may be introduced, so as 
to form a double wise, the tool when so used 
being shown in Fig. 5, where K indicates the 
intermediate block and L the block which is 
connected to and operated immediately by 
the screw-handle D. 
It is obvious that the screw-handle may be 
connected to the screw-support or adjustable 
vise-jaw in any suitable manner, but the 
manner shown and described appears to me 
to be the best for the purpose. It is very de 
sirable that the tool-spindles shall not rotate 
with the tool, as the turning of a steel spin 
dle in a malleable-iron casting wears the cast 
ing and the tools soon are unsteady. 
The tool above described is both strong and 
compact. The yoke-piece is chambered with 
out being weakened materially, as the ways 
a serve as ribs which strengthen the walls of 
the chamber at the same time that they serve 
as guides for the tool-support. As the yoke 
piece is chambered, the axes of the cutter 
tools carried by the tool-support, as well as 
the cutter-tool carried by the back-rest, may 
be lowered toward the floor of the bed-piece, 
so the lower cutter may rotate partially with 
in the Walls of the chamber, and for this rea 
son the tool as a whole may be made much 
narrower than any tool now known to me, the 
construction above described being prefer 
able to any structure wherein a tool-support 
is slotted and guided in walls in the cham 
bered ways by means of a bolt, such a con 
struction both weakening the bed-piece, upon 
which a great portion of the strain in such a 
pipe-cutter comes, and also requiring much 
time in which to make any change of tool. 
Moreover, it weakens the tool-support also. 
What I claim as my invention is 
i 
5 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
O 
45 
1. In combination with a removable sliding 
tool-support carrying one or more rotary tools, 
a yoke having a back-rest at one end and a 
post at the other end and containing a cham 
ber adapted to receive said tool-support and 
in which one of said rotary tools may par 
tially revolve, the walls of said chamber be 
ing provided with inwardly-projecting ribs 
shorter than the length of said chamber and 
serving both to strengthen said walls and 
also as ways for said tool-support and said 
post carrying a screw-handle adapted to en 
gage with and operate said tool-support, all 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
2. A support for carrying rotary tools hav 
ing two side portions e suitably connected and 
each provided on its front face with sockets 
adapted to receive a tool-spindle, in combina 
tion with an angle-piece G pivoted to said 
tool-support and forming one side of said 
spindle-socket and closing the end thereof 
and provided with means whereby it may be 
locked in position to hold said spindles in 
place, all as set forth. 
3. A combination-tool having a back-rest 
carrying a rotary tool and a post carrying a 
screw-handle, said back-rest and post being 
connected by a chamber having suitable ways 
running a portion of the length of said cham 
ber, in combination with a pair of wise-jaws, 
one of which is chambered and adapted to 
rest against said back-rest without engaging 
with its rotary tool and to slide upon and be 
removable from said ways, and the other 
adapted to engage with said screw-handle 
and be adjusted toward and from its mate 
upon said ways, all as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 24th day of February, 1896. 
ATWATER. E. BROCKETT. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE O. G. COALE, 
EWA A. GUILD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575785.txt	(No Model.) 
E. W. RICE, Jr. 
CLOSED CONDUIT ELECTRIC RAILWAY. 
No. 575,785, 
Patented Jan. 26, 1897. 
its-l- 
 
  
E 2E2 
22 
WTNesses, 
 
|NyENTOR 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWIN W. RICE, JR., OF SCHENECTADY, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF NEW YORK. 
CLOSED - CONDUT ELECTRIC RALWAY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,785, dated January 26, 1897. 
Application filed October 31, 1896, Serial No. 610,682. (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all, whom it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWIN W. RICE, Jr., a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Schen 
ectady, in the county of Schenectady, State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Closed-Conduit Elec 
tric Railways, (Case No. 444,) of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to surface-contact or 
closed-conduit systems of electric railways, 
and has for its object to provide a means of 
preventing the energizing of the street-con 
tacts at a time when they are not covered by 
the car, and to thus prevent damage to per 
Sons and vehicles crossing the line of way. 
One source of difficulty which engineers 
have sought to avoid has been leakage from 
the high-potential studs or contacts carrying 
the motor-current to the contacts which serve 
to pick up the electromagnetic switches com 
monly proposed. It is manifest that where 
leakage occurs in this way it will tend to hold 
up the SWitch and energize the contacts not 
covered by the car. By my invention this is 
prevented by interposing between the high 
potential contacts a ground adjacent to 
and Surrounding the low-potential stud, so 
that any current which may leak will not 
reach the stud, but will be diverted to ground, 
and the switch will be free to open in the 
usual Way. 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a diagram of circuits which may 
be employed, it being typical of any operative 
arrangement; and Fig. 2 is a section of the 
proper mechanical construction. 
In Fig. 1, A A are the track-rails, upon 
which the car (represented by the wheels DD') 
moves, M M are the motors, connected be 
tWeen the sliding shoes or contacts FF", car 
lied by the car. E is a storage battery con 
nected between the ground and one of the 
shoes. The high-potential studs are lettered 
B B', &c., and serve to carry current to the 
motor by Way of the shoe F. The low-poten 
tial studs, or those in circuit with the coils of 
the pick-up magnets, are lettered C C, &c., 
the coils themselves being letteredgg. The 
5o pick-up magnets serve to close the switches 
G G at the contactsg'g'', energizing the high 
9 9 
45 
35 
 
potential studs B, &c. It will be observed 
that each stud C is connected through coils 
on two switches to ground, so that energizing 
one stud picks up two switches. The high 
potential and low-potential contacts or studs 
are staggered, so that the switch is closed 
before the contact with the motor-circuit is 
made. The operation of these parts is as fol 
lows: As the shoe F touches, in succession, 
the low-potential studs the Switches pick up, 
energizing the high-potential studs and car 
rying current to the motors. The motor-cur 
rent is carried directly through the low-po 
tial studs and the coils on the pick-up mag 
nets to ground. When, however, the cur 
rent is cut off from the motors, all the Switches 
fall, and when it is desired to start the car 
the currentis passed from the storage battery 
through the low-potential studs with which 
the shoe F happens to be in contact, picking 
up the switches, which will then be held up 
by the motor-current. 
Adjacent to each of the studs C, I arrange 
a surrounding box provided with an independ 
ent ground connection. This is best seen in 
Fig. 2. In that figure, A is, as before, the 
track-rail. in is the ground connection to 
the rail from the metal box c, Surrounding 
the low-potential stud C. The connection to 
the circuits is seen passing through the box, 
being protected by an insulating-bushing. 
The contact-stud itself is carefully insulated 
from the surrounding box by insulation c'. 
It is manifest that my invention may take 
many forms. The one I have shown is well 
adapted to its exercise, and I aim to cover by 
my claims any arrangement furnishing an 
independent ground connection adjacent to 
and serving to protect the pick-up-magnet 
contacts, so that leakage-current would be 
intercepted before it reached the coils of the 
pick-up magnets. It is also manifest that 
the independent ground connection will suf 
ficiently serve its purpose if it be interposed 
at any point between the high-potential stud 
and the pick-up magnet, it being of course 
necessary to insulate it from the high-poten 
tial stud, the fundamental feature of the de 
vice being a shunt-circuit to ground for leak 
age-currents, by which such currents are kept 
aWay from the coils on the pick-up magnets. 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
575,785 
adapted to protect the pick-up-magnet coils 
from extraneous or leakage current. 
3. In a surface-contact or closed-conduit 
electric-railway system provided with sec 
tional conductors and grounded coils upon 
the pick-up magnets connected to the sec 
tional conductors, an independent shunt-cir 
cuit to ground for leakage-current, interposed 
between the high-potential studs and the con 
tacts connected to the magnet-coils. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 26th day of October, 1896. 
EDWIN W. RICE, JR. 
25 
Witnesses: 
B. B. HULL, 
E. W. CADY. 
It is further manifest that the invention finds 
its utility in those cases in which the magnet 
coils are grounded at one end. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a surface-contact or closed-conduit 
electric - railway system, an independent 
ground connection adjacent to the pick-up 
magnet contacts and adapted to protect the 
Coils on the pick-up magnets from extraneous 
or leakage currents, substantially as set out. 
2. In a sulface-contact or closed-conduit 
electric-railway system, a metal box surround 
ing the low-potential pick-up-magnet contact 
and lnsulated therefrom, with an independ 
ent ground connection from the box, the whole 
C 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575885.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 575,885. 
M. C. A. 
FOURCHOTTE. 
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING ACETYLENE (AS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 26, 1897. 
??, 
??????????: 
The Norris Peters to...-PHOTO-lifho. WASHINGTON, b. c. 
. (No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
M. C. A. FOURCHOTTE. 
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING ACETYLENE GAS, 
No. 575,885, 
Patented Jan. 26, 1897. 
Aig. 2 
El 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAURICE CHARLES ALFRDE FOURCHOTTE, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
APPARATU S FOR PRO D U CING AC ETYL EN E GAS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,885, dated January 26, 1897. 
Application filed June 27, 1896, Serial No. 597,115, (No model.) 
, 
I. ? 
55 
?? 
io (til?, 7 vi?uo7n, it 7)var!/ concern: 
Beit known that I, MAURICE CHARLES AL 
FREDEFOURCHOTTE, a citizen of the Republic 
of France, residing at Paris, in said Republic, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Self-Regulating Apparatus for the Produc 
tion of Acetylene Gas, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The apparatus which forms the subject of 
this invention is intended to produce acety 
lene gas.as fast as required for consumption 
by the decomposition by water of carbid of 
calcium or other suitable acetylene-contain 
ing substance. 
The invention is essentially characterized 
by the means employed to utilize the move 
ments of the bell of a gasometer for the pur 
pose of regulating the arrival of water upon 
the carbid in proportion to the needs. It is 
characterized, moreover, by the organization 
of its different parts and notably by the con 
struction of the generator properly so 
called, as well as by a special disposition of hy 
draulic seal, preventing the return to the gen 
erator of the gas already stored in the gasome 
ter and consequentlypermitting the recharg 
ing without interrupting the consumption. 
To utilize the movements of the gasometer 
bell to regulate the arrival of water on the 
carbid, I fix in the line of the center of the 
bell a vertical tube capable of telescoping 
upon another tube, which is elevated almost 
up to the level of the water in the center of 
the tank of the gasometer and which com 
municates with the generator, wherein it de 
bouches above a basket which contains the 
carbid. The tube of the tank is filled with 
Water. As the latter and the tube affixed to 
the bell imprison above this water a certain 
volume of air or of acetylene or some other gas, 
it results from this that when the bell de 
scends the gas becomes compressed and by 
producing pressure upon the water which is 
contained in the tube of the tank it forces 
this water upon the carbid. The acetylene is 
then disengaged, the bell rises, the pressure 
of the gas diminishes in the central tube, the 
Water rises in the tube of the tank, and ceases 
to be thrown upon the carbid. This arrange 
ment of tubes is illustrated by the two exam 
ples shown in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents in central vertical sec 
tion a complete apparatus constructed accord 
ing to my invention. Fig. 2 represents a ver 
tical section of a gasometer, showing a modi 
fication of the arrangement of the tubes, the 
bell, and the gasometer-tank. 
As may be seen in Fig. 1, the apparatus 
comprises the generator, properly so called, 
A and the regulating-gasometer BP, arranged 
in proximity to each other and connected as 
I will hereinafter explain. In the example 
represented the generator is constituted by a 
tank A, open at the top, but in which is in 
Verted a bell C, heavy enough to sink in the 
sealing-water contained in the tank A and not 
to be elevated under the influence of the pres 
sure of the acetylene at the moment of its 
formation. 
In the upper part of the tank A, under the 
bell C and above the water, is arranged a 
basket I, intended to receive the carbid of 
calcium. A tube M, which debouches under 
the bell C, passes through the bottom of the 
tank A and enters into the Water in a reser 
voir Nibelow. This tube Mforms a passage 
for the acetylene produced, which is delivered 
into the regulating-gasometer B P through a 
tube M' after having passed through the water 
in the reservoir N, which serves as a hydrau 
lic seal. 
In the center of the bell P of the gasome 
ter there is affixed a tube Q, which is opem at 
the bottom but closed at the top and which 
as the bell rises, and descends slides without 
friction upon another tube R, affixed to the 
bottom of the water tank or reservoir B of 
the gasometer. This tube R has connected 
with it a tube S for the purpose of delivering 
water from the tank of the gasometer P into 
contact with the carbid contained in the 
basket I. A tube V conducts the acetylene 
to the apparatus where it is to be used. The 
tubes R S form practically a single tube, 
95 
which will be hereinafter termed the U 
tube, one of the branches of which de 
bouches in the generator and the other isim 
mersed in the water of the gasometer-reser 
WOl. 
The operation is as follows: The bell P of 
the gasometer is represented as about half 
filled with water. In the tube Q some air is 
imprisoned and retained by the water in the 
75 
? ? ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
575,885 
I. ? 
25 
35 
tank. The petcock q in the top of the tube 
Q permits the regulation at will of the pres 
To charge the generating 
Sure of this air. 
appalatus, the bell C is raised after having 
Opened the cock U in its head in order to 
allow the entrance of air. Then the carbid 
is placed in the receiver or basket I, the level 
of water in the tank A being maintained 
constant below the bottom of this basket. 
Afterward the bell C is allowed to redescend 
in the tank to obtain a hydraulic seal. Then 
the air-cock U is closed. At this time the 
pressure in the generator is equal to the 
pressure of the atmosphere. The water cannot 
rise in the branch S of the U-tube to a greater 
height than the exterior level of the water in 
the tank of the gasometer, and if the upper 
end of the branch S stands at this level the 
Water in the tank of the gasometer cannot 
arrive in contact with the carbid. The acety 
lene will not then be produced. This condi 
tion will continue while the bell of the gas 
Ometer remains in the same position; but if 
acetylene be withdrawn from the gasometer 
its bell will descend, the air contained in the 
: tube Q will be compressed, will press upon 
the water in the branch R of the U-tube, and 
Will cause the said water to arrive through 
the branch S in contact, with the carbid. 
The acetylene will then be disengaged, will 
arrive in the gasometer of which the bell will 
rise, the pressure of the air will diminish in 
the tube Q, and the water pressed by the acety 
lene in the generator will be depressed in S, 
thus stopping the production of gas until a 
new descent of the bell of the gasometer by 
reason of some consumption. 
In these con 
ditions the production of the acetylene will 
only take place while there is any consump 
tion and will be automatically regulated ac 
COrding to this consumption. The sections 
of the tube Q and of the bell of the gasometer 
are determined in such manner that the 
Quantity of water which arrives in contact 
With the carbid gives a volume of acetylene 
sufficient to raise the bell of the gasometer 
to such a height that the water in the tank of 
the gasometer rises sufficiently in the tube Q 
to fill the branch R, of the U-tube at each ris 
ing of the bell. 
It may be understood that the reservoir N 
serves as a hydraulic seal and prevents the 
gas from escaping from the gasometer by the 
tube M when the generator is opened to the 
air for recharging it with carbid. 
Instead of employing for the timbes Q and 
R. the arrangement shown in Fig. 1, it is pref 
erable to Substitute acetylene gas for the air 
in the tube Q and to arrange the two tubes Q 
and R in such manner as to permit the acety 
lene within them to be maintained at a pres 
Sure either equal or Superior to but never 
lower than that in the gasometer. As may be 
Seen in Fig. 2, to obtain these results the tube 
Q has provided in it, at a suitable point in its 
height, openings D, and the branch R of the 
U-tube has provided in it openings E, situated 
below the level IX of the water under the belih. 
Under these conditions the gas contained ill 
the tube Q will remain at the same pressure 
as the gas in the bell, and the Water con 
tained in R will be at the same level as that 
which is under the bell while the openings D 
do not descend below the level XX. The 
water will then only pass by the branch S to 
the carbid when the openings D descend be 
low the level. XX and the openings E. When 
the bell rises again under the influence of the 
acetylene produced, as soon as the openings 
D return to the level X the gas contained in 
the tube Q will retake the pressure of the gas 
in the bell. 
It being understood that I reserve to my 
self the right to vary the form, dimensions, 
proportions, and accessory parts of this ap 
paratus and to employ for the construction 
such metals and materials as I may judge 
suitable, 
What I claim as my invention is 
II. The combination with an acetylene-gas 
generator and a gasometer consisting of a Wal 
ter-reservoir and a bell to which the gas from 
said generator is delivered, of a U-tube of 
which one of the branches debouches in the 
generator and the other is immersed in the 
water of the reservoir, and a tube having a 
closed upper end and affixed to the bell and 
inclosing the open upper end of the latter 
branch in such manner as to confine above 
the water in the said branch a volume of air 
or of gas which will be compressed and ex 
panded respectively during the descent and 
ascent of the bell to produce or stop the flow 
of water from the U-tube into the generator, 
substantially as herein described. 
2. The combination with an acetylene-gas 
generator and a gasometer consisting of a Wal 
ter-reservoir and a bell to which the gas from 
said generator is delivered, of a J-tube of 
which one of the branches debouches in the 
generator and the other branch rises through 
the water in the reservoir and is pierced. With 
holes above the level of said water, and a tube 
having a closed upper end and affixed to the 
bell and inclosing the upper end of the latter 
branchin such manner as to confine above the 
water in the said branch a volume of air or of 
gas which will be compressed and expanded 
respectively during the descent and ascent of 
the bell to produce and stop the flow of Water 
from the U-tube into the generator; Substan 
tially as herein described. 
3. The combination. With an acetylene-gas 
generator and a gasometer consisting of a Wal 
ter-reservoir and a bell to which the gas from 
said generator is delivered, of a U-tube of 
which one of the branches debouches in the 
generator and the other branch is immersed 
in the Water of the reservoir, and a tube at 
tached to the bell and having holes at a suit 
able point in its height and covering the up 
per end of the latter branch in such manner 
as to confine and compress above the Water 
in said branch during the descent of the bell 
45 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
75 
9 O 
I OO 
I I O 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
I. ? 
I5 
2 ? 
25 
a volume of air or of gas for the purpose of 
producing the flow of water from the U-tube 
into the generator; substantially as herein de 
scribed. 
4. The combination with an acetylene-gas 
generator and a gasometer consisting of a wa 
ter-reservoir and a bell to which the gas from 
said generator is delivered, of a U-tube of 
which one of the branches debouches in the 
generator and the other branch rises through 
the water of the reservoir and is pierced with . 
holes below the level of said water and a tube 
attached to the bell having holes at a suit 
able point in its height and covering the up 
per end of the latter branch in such manner 
as to confine and compress above the water 
in said branch during the descent of the bell 
a volume of air or of gas for the purpose of 
producing the flow of the Water from the U 
tube into the generator; substantially as 
herein described. 
5. The combination with an acetylene-gas 
generator and a gasometer consisting of a wa 
ter-reservoir and a bell for the reception of 
the gas from said generator, of a U-tube of 
which one of the branches debouches in the 
generator and the other branch is immersed 
in the Water of the reservoir, and a tube fixed 
in the interior of the bell to cover the upper 
end of the latter branch and having its own 
upper end closed but provided with an es 
cape-cock for confining above the water in 
the latter branch a regulated volume of air or 
of gas which will be compressed and expand 
ed respectively during the descent and ascent 
of the bell to produce and stop the flow of the 
water from the U-tube into the generator; 
substantially as herein described. 
6. The combination with an acetylene-gas 
generator and a gasometer consisting of a wa 
ter-reservoir and a bell to which the gas from 
said generator is delivered, of a U-tube of 
which one of the branches debouches in the 
generator while the other branch rises through 
the water of the reservoir and is pierced with 
holes below the level of the said Water, and a 
tube affixed in the interior of the bell to cover 
the upper end of said branch and having its 
45 
 
575,885 
55 
own upper end closed but provided with an 
escape-cock for confining above the Water in 5o 
the latter branch a regulated volume of air or 
of gas which will be compressed or expanded 
respectively during the descent and ascent of 
the bell to produce and stop the flow of Water 
from the U-tube into the generator; substan 
tially as herein described. 
7. The combination with an acetylene-gas 
generator and a gasometer consisting of a Wa 
ter-reservoir and a bell to which the gas from 
said generator is delivered, of a U-tube of 
which one of its branches debouches in the 
generator and the other branch of which is 
immersed in the water of the reservoir and a 
tube fixed to the interior of the bell and hav 
ing holes in its sides and covering the latter 
branchin such manner as to confine and com 
press above the Water in that branch during 
the descent of the bell a volume of gas for the 
purpose of producing the flow of the Water 
from the tube into the generator; substan 
tially as herein described. 
S. The combination with an acetylene-gas 
generator and a gasometer consisting of a wa 
ter-reservoir and a bell to which the gas from 
the generator is delivered, of a U-tube of 
which one of the branches debouches in the 
generator and the other branch rises through 
the water of the reservoir and has lateral 
openings below the level of the water therein, 
and a tube with lateral openings in its upper 
part fixed to the interior of the bell of the 
gasometer and covering the upper end of said 
branch in such manner as to confine and com 
press above the Water of the U-tube during 
the descent of the bell a volume of gas for 
the purpose of producing the flow of the wa 
ter from the tube into the generator, substan 
tially as herein described. 
In Witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in the presence of two subscribing wit 
eSSeS. 
75 
MIAURICE CHARLES AILFRDE FOURCHOTTE, 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD P. MACILEAN, 
ALCIDE FABE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US575985.txt	(No Model.) 
J. E. PITRAT. 
MOWABLE KEYBOARD 
No. 575,985, 
Patented Jan. 26, 1897, 
C2 
 
 
z-3 
a 
i.e. 2 E 
H. 
-- 
fa A M4 al 
 
-- 
  
772. 
t 
 
 
 
 
 
2. 2 
is - 
Z5 
l 
1/WWENTOR 
74. (P6-4. 24.e., 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS E. PITRAT, OF GALLIPOLIS, OHIO. 
MOVABLE KEYBOARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 575,985, dated January 26, 1897. 
Application filed February 11, 1896, Serial No. 578,882, (No model.) 
IO 
(5 
To all tufi O17, it tructi? CO7 ce.7'72. 
Be it known that I, JULIUS E. PITRAT, of 
Gallipolis, in the county of Gallia and State 
of Ohio, have invented an Improved Movable 
Keyboard, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention is an improved movable key 
board adapted for use upon pianos, organs, &c. 
The object of the invention is to enable a 
player to render music into any key or pitch 
desired without change of fingering, as, for 
instance, when the singer wishes the accom 
paniment pitched so as to better suit the 
voice; and the object is to lessen the labor 
and length of time necessary to enable one 
to play pieces often rendered difficult of exe 
cution from being noted in keys having many 
sharps or flats by playing them from copies 
noted in an easier key, yet l'endleling them, 
if so desired, in the key designed by the com 
poser. 
The invention is adapted to pianos now in 
use, as well as those built specially to em 
body the improvement, and the improvement 
increases the cost of the instrument very 
little. 
The invention consists in the peculiar con 
struction of the various parts and their novel 
combination or arrangement, all of which 
will be fully described, and pointed out in 
the claims. 
In the drawings forming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a top plan view; Fig. 2, 
cross-sectional view; Fig. 3, view of pinion 
and rack. Fig. 4 is a detail of the locking 
plate; Fig. 5, detail view showing the dial. 
In carrying out my invention I employ a 
permanent set of keys A, and above the same 
the movable keyboard B, said movable key 
board comprising a frame C, lectangular in 
form, and to which the keys b are attached, 
each being provided with a suitable pin b', 
whereby the keys of the permanent board are 
actuated. 
The frame C is supported at its forward 
end upon a beam C and at its rear end upon 
a beam c', said beam having a longitudinal 
groove c, in which travel the wheels c', hav 
ing double bevel or knife edges and carried 
by the rear member of frame, so that they 
serve as a fulcrum or pivot when the movable 
keyboard-frame is elevated, as hereinafter de 
scribed. 
A rack-bar D is arranged upon the rear 
member of the frame C and supported a suit 
able height by means of posts d, teeth d of 
said rack being arranged upon the inside of 
the bar, as clearly shown. 
The shaft E is journaled in the casing of 
the piano and passes through the frontboard 
thereof and carries a dial E' upon the outer 
end, said dial having letters and signs marked 
thereon to represent the twelve tones of the 
chromatic scale. Above said dial is an indi 
cator or pointer E, which points to the upper 
letter or sign and indicates the key which the 
movable keyboard is arranged to play in. 
Upon the rear end of the shaft E is mounted 
a pinion E, which meshes with the rack-bar, 
and as the frame is moved longitudinally said 
rack-bar moves there with, revolves the shaft, 
and consequently the dial. 
In order to move the frame and rack-bar 
for the purpose of changing the key, I employ 
a shaft F, parallel with the shaft E, the for 
Ward end of Said shaft having a knob or han 
dle thereon upon the outside of the front board 
of the piano, while upon the rear end of said 
shaft is arranged an elongated pinion F", which 
is adapted to engage the rack-bar, and by 
turning the handle said pinion is moved to 
the right or left, as desired, and censequently 
the entire movable keyboard, and when said 
keyboard is shifted the indicator-dial is re 
volved to bring the proper letter or sign be 
neath the indicator. 
Upon the inner face of the front board is 
arranged a locking-plate G, having twelve 
notches or recesses arranged radially about 
its center, through which the shaft F passes, 
and mounted upon said shaft adjacent to said 
notched plate is a feather or lug I, which is 
adapted to engage one of the notches after 
the movable keyboard has been shifted to the 
desired position, thus locking said movable 
keyboard against any possible movement. 
The shaft F extends some distance through 
the pinion F and passes through a timber in 
the framework, said rear end being adapted 
to engage an upwardly-extending arm K, 
mounted upon the rock-shaft L, journaled in 
the piano-casing to the rear end of the mov 
9 O 
95 
CO 
25 
35 
45 
 
5 
'5,985 
IIaving thus described my in Vention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination with the movable and 
fixed keyboards, of the frame carrying Sail 
movable board, the lack-ba mounted there 
on, the pinion and shaft for moving saidlframe, 
and the lifting mechanism operated by said 
shaft, to lift the movable keyboard-fi'anne, 
Substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination with the fixed altl 
movable keyboards of the movable fraine, the 
lack-bai' thereon, the pinions and shafts, the 
dial mounted upon the end of one shaft, the 
handle upon the end of the opposite shaft, 
the feather or lug, the notched plate, said 
shaft being longitudinally movable, the rock 
shaft, the arm carried thereon adapted to en 
gage the longitudinally-movable shaft, and 
the lifting-arms all arranged, substantially 
as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I afix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses, 
TULUS E. PIT)RA. 
Witnesses: 
A. F. MOORE, 
A. UTSINPILLER. 
ry w 
) ) 
:15 
5 
O 
able frame, said rock-shaft carrying li?ter 
arms M. near each end, which are adapted to 
engage extensions in, arranged upon the ends 
of the forward member of the movable frame, 
whereby when the shaft F is pushed inward 
to move the feather or lug Out of engagement 
with the notched plate the rear end of said 
shaft will engage the arm Ix, pushing the same 
backward, rocking the shaft, and lifting the 
movable keyboard, all of which is done prior 
to turning the shaft F to cause any longitudi 
nal movement of said lanovable keyboard. IBy 
this arrangement the keyboard is safely 
moved above the permanent keyboard and 
When shifted from one side to the other will 
not interfere in any mannel with the said 
permanent keyboard. 
After the innovable keyboard has been ad 
justed to the desired key, as shown by the 
indicator and dial, the movement of the shaft 
F is stopped, and the weight of the movable 
keyboard will cause the lifting-arms to de 
scend, throwing the arm IX forward and push 
ing shaft F forward or outward, thus forcing 
the feather or lug into one of the notches and 
securely holding all of the parts locked in 
their adjusted position. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576085.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 576,085, 
W. E. AYER 
BOTTLE OR STAND FOR MUCILAGE OR INK, 
Patented Feb. 2, 1897. 
2 
fi. 
2 SA 
  
 
rry 
S. 
S N 
S 
S 
S 
S 
S 
S 
S 
S 
S 
Nawassassasyaswaysaysayaswayawswas 
wara 
S. 
s 
ca"222. 
Olza a? 2. 
 
AT, ORNEYs 
the Norris perERs co, Proto-Litho., WASH:NGroN. d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALD O EMIERS ON A YER, OF DE LAWARE, O III O. 
BOTTLE OR STAND FOR M UCLAGE OR NK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,085, dated February 2, 1897. 
Application filed November 6, 1896, 
To all, Luhon, it Tay concern. 
Beitknown that I, WALDOEMERSONAYER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Delaware, in the county of Delaware and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Bottles or Stands for 
Mucilage or Ink, of which the following is a 
full and complete specification, such as will 
enable those skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to bottles or stands 
for mucilage and ink; and the object thereof 
is to provide an improved device of this class 
the construction and operation of which are 
such as to prevent the clogging of the neck 
When used as a mucilage-bottle or the inser 
tion of a pen too far into the ink when used 
as an ink-bottle. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the fol 
lowing specification, of which the accompa 
nying drawings form a part, in which 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of my 
improved bottle or stand, and Fig. 2. a plan 
view thereof. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication the separate parts of my device are 
indicated by the same numerals of reference 
throughout both views, and in practice I pro 
vide a bottle or stand 5, which may be of any 
desired form, but which is preferably of the 
form shown in the drawings, and which may 
also be composed of any desired material. 
The bottle or stand 5 is provided with a top 
6, at one side of which is a circular opening, 
around which is formed a neck or rim 7 and 
which is adapted to be closed by a plug or 
stopper 8, the lower end of which is provided 
With an annular band 9, on which is formed 
or to which is secured a downwardly-directed 
arm 10, to which is pivoted a lever 11, in which 
is formed a longitudinal slot 12, and I also 
provide a rod 13, which passes through the 
plug or stopper 8 and which is provided at its 
upper end with a knob or handle 14, and its 
lower end is connected with the lever 11 by 
means of a pin or similar device 15, which 
passes through the slot 12, formed therein. 
Secured to the free end of the lever 11 is a 
hollow conical or cup-shaped receptacle 16, 
and the top 6 of the bottle or stand is pro 
vided opposite the neck or rim 7 with an open 
ing 17, which is preferably provided with an 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
Serial No. 611283, (No model.) 
upwardly-directed flange or rim 18, and which 
may also be closed by a plug or stopper, if de 
sired. 
The operation will be readily understood 
from the foregoing description when taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings 
and the following statement thereof. The 
rod 13 may be held at any desired position in 
the plug or stopper 8 by friction, or it may 
move loosely therein, and when the device is 
used as a mucilage-bottle and it is desired to 
apply the mucilage the rod 13 is raised by 
the knob or head, as shown in dotted lines in 
Fig. 1, and this raises the cup-shaped recep 
tacle 16 into the opening 17. In this opera 
tion the cup-shaped receptacle 16 will be filled 
with mucilage and the brush is inserted there 
into, and the mucilage is applied in the usual 
lane. 
By means of this device the clogging or clos 
ing of the opening 17 by reason of the muci 
lage collecting or drying thereon is avoided, 
and if said opening should become partially 
closed at any time the dried or caked mucilage 
may be easily removed therefrom by a knife 
or other device without injury to the bottle or 
stand. 
If the bottle or stand is used as an inkstand, 
the operation will be the same; and when the 
cup-shaped receptacle 16 is raised into the po 
sition shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1 the pen 
is inserted thereinto, and this device prevents 
the pen from being inserted too far into the 
ink, it being understood that the cup-shaped 
receptacle 16 will be filled with ink when it 
is raised into the position shown in dotted lines 
in Fig. 1. 
It will be also understood that the cup 
shaped receptacle 16 may be made of any de 
sired depth, and it will thus be seen that Iac 
complish the object of my invention by means 
of a device which is simple in construction 
and operation and perfectly adapted to ac 
complish the result for which it is intended. 
It will also be apparent that changes in and 
modifications of the construction herein de 
scribed may be made without departing from 
the spirit of my invention or sacrificing its ad 
vantages. 
Having fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
75 
9 O 
IC C 
 
3 
576,085 
An ink or mucilage bottle, having a top the free end of said lever adapted to fit into 
thereon provided in One side with a circular an opening also formed in said top, said parts 
opening therein, a rim formed thereabout, a being combined substantially as described. 
plug or stopper adapted to be placed therein, 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
an annular band on the lower end of said my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
plug; a downwardly-directed arm secured to ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 28th 
said band, a lever pivoted to said arm and day of October, 1896. 
provided with a longitudinal slot therein, a 
rod passing through said plug and engaging 
said lever, a knob on the upper end of said 
rod, and a hollow conical receptacle secured to 
JOHN EVANS CAMPBELL, 
CHARLES ARTHUR EVANS. 
WALDO EMERSON AYER. 
Witnesses: 
15 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576185.txt	No. 576,185. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
?????? 
?????? 
Z 
WITNESSES: Y 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WWILLIAMI II. BUBB, OF BRAZIL, INDIANA. 
BUILD N G - BRCK. " 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,185, dated February 2, 1897. 
Application filed February ll, 1896, Serial No, 578,904 (No model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
To all, whom it Tival, conce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. BUBB, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brazil, 
in the county of Clay and State of Indiana, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Building-Bricks, of which the 
following is a specification. 
In the use of hollow building-brick as they 
have heretofore been made great difficulty 
has been experienced in securing strong and 
water-tight joints, as the surfaces which re 
ceive the mortar or cement are narrow and 
not well fitted to firmly grip and hold it. Wa 
rious expedients have been resorted to to ob 
viate this difficulty, among which is the form 
ing of flanges within the hollow brick and 
the inserting of tile-plates in said flanges. 
Such expedients are troublesome and expen 
sive, involving both the expense of the addi 
tional plates and of the additional labor in 
putting them in place when laying the wall. 
The object of my invention is to obviate 
these difficulties and to produce a brick in 
the laying of which strong, durable, and wa 
ter-tight joints may be made; and it consists 
in a brick having a peculiarly-formed end, 
as will be hereinafter more particularly de 
scribed and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which are made a part hereof, and on which 
similar letters of reference indicate similar 
parts, Figure 1 is a perspective view of a 
fragment of a wall laid up of my improved 
bricks; Fig. 2, a perspective view, on a larger 
scale, of one of said bricks separately; Fig. 
3, an end elevation of the same; Fig. 4, a 
fragmentary sectional view, on a still further 
enlarged scale, showing the form and char 
acter of the joints made in laying the Wall; 
Fig. 5, a view illustrating the method of pro 
ducing the end formation of my improved 
bricks, and Fig. 6 a detail view showing the 
operation of the die on the brick. 
Among the advantages of using hollow in 
stead of common bricks are lightness, imper 
viousness, the equalizing of temperature, 
economy of material, and, owing to the in 
creased size, (such bricks, according to my 
practice, being usually made with a face 
about eight by sixteen inches in size,) less la 
bor in laying up the wall, there being much 
fewer bricks to handle in building a given 
wall. 
The bricks themselves lettered A in the 
drawings (are first formed in a usual or any 
desired manner) and resemble square tile 
or flue-lining. Being of an ordinary and well 
known construction, except as to the ends 
thereof, they need no further description, ex 
cept such as relates especially to the process 
of forming of said ends and the character of 
the ends when formed. 
The brick, as they come from the brick-ma 
chine before being burned and while com 
paratively soft and pliable, are placed in some 
convenient machine (a simple press is shown 
as an example of such a machine in Fig. 5) 
armed with a suitable die, which is pressed 
into the end of the brick, as best illustrated 
in Fig. 6, forming the interior lips a thereon. 
This side B should have parallel outside sur 
faces, so that the effect is to turn the lips in 
wardly and not disturb the outer surface of 
the brick, which is left perfectly square and 
smooth. The form of the end, so produced 
and of the resulting lip is best shown in 
Fig. 4, where fragments of the ends of two 
such brick (about half size) are shown as 
brought together with the mortar or cement 
between them and filling also the clefts in the 
ends of the bricks. 
In building a wall of such bricks the end 
of the brick already laid is covered with mor 
tar or cement and the next brickforced end 
Wise against it, thus squeezing the mortar or 
cement in the crevice or cleft in the last brick 
laid and joining the two bricks firmly to 
gether. When the mortar or cement has set 
and especially when cement is used-a very 
strong joint is made, which unites the bricks 
firmly together, and which is perfectly water 
tight. In laying common hollow bricks hav 
ing the ordinary square ends it has been diffi 
cult to make the mortar or cement adhere, 
and consequently the Wall has not ordinarily 
been imperviousto dampness. With my im 
proved brick the mortar adheres perfectly 
and there is no such danger. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion, what I claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
As a new article of manufacture, a hollow 
I. ? 
2 ? 
35 
45 
So 
 
95 
? ? ? 
g 
576,185 
building-brick, having clefts formed in the 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
ends, the Outer sides whereof are parallel with hand and seal, at Brazil, Indiana, this 7th day 
the Surfaces of the brick, and the inner sides of February, A. D. 1896. 
inclined inwardly, thus forming inclined lips 
5 on the interior of said hollow brick, with 
crevices running around the end thereof, sub- 
stantially as shown and described. 
ELMER P. COLLINS, 
HARRY P. JOHNSON. 
WILILILAMI H. IBUIBIB. [L. S.] 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576285.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 576,285. 
-23 
 
... 
B. C. STICKNEY, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1897. 
Gow 
2 
'5-1 
6 
7...a 
N3. 
\ 
-4 
". is: 
| 
22 
sinue intot 
4-6-6. ze---2 
a 
'''s Peters co, wastro. C 
(No Model.) 
No. 576,285. 
- 
- - 
B. C. STICKNEY. 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1897. 
i 
ETERs co., was nortrec, 
(No Model.) 
No. 576,285, 
 
B. C. STICKNEY, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1897. 
S8--1-1-coco 
-f6. %/Onavzw 
Z(2 *%-a- 
/ 
53 A- &lbotviet 
3-1-uo.41 Ect 
-73-----...-6. Wal-/-, 
--- 57-64 e 
co 
'''s Peters co, was 
D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
... BURNIIAM. C. STICKNEY, OF ELIZABETH, NEWJERSEY. 
TYPE-WRITING MACHINE. 
Original application filed July 28, 1892, Serial No, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,285, dated February 2, 1897. 
441,464, Divided and this application filed June 17, 1895. Serial No, 
553,014, (No model.) 
- 
. 
- 
O 
. 
. 
. 
20 
25 
To all, whom it naty concern. 
mounted in the base of the machine at 14 and 
Beit known that I, BURNHAMC. STICKNEY, 
provided on each side with forwardly-extend 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
ing arms 15, the front ends of which are united 
of Elizabeth, in the county of Union and State 
by a universal bar 16, extending transversely 
of New Jersey, have invented, certain new 
of the machine parallel with said rock-shaft 
and useful Improvements in Type-Writing 
13 and arranged beneath a series of levers 17, 
Machines, of which the following is a speci 
pivoted at their forward ends to a transverse 
fulcrum-rod 18 and having a uniform motion. 
fication. 
The connecting-rods 4 incline inwardly, and 
This invention relates to that class of type 
Writing machines made the subject of an ap 
their lower ends terminate in a line trans 
plication filed by me July 28, 1892, Serial No. 
versely of the machine and are pivoted at 19 
441,464, patented April 7, 1896, No. 557,711, 
to the levers 7 in rear of the fulcrum-rod 8. 
and is a division thereof, and it also relates 
The escapement or spacing mechanism may 
to that class made the subject of an applica 
be of any usual or suitable construction. A 
tion filed by me February 17, 1893, Serial No. 
spring 20 is provided to return the universal 
462,689, but embodying a different specific 
bar of the spacing mechanism to normal posi 
tion after releasement, as will presently ap 
construction. 
It consists in the features of construction 
pear. 
and combinations of devices hereinafter more 
Above the levers 17 are arranged key-le 
fully described, and particularly pointed out 
vers 21, pivoted at their rear ends to a trans 
in the appended claims. . . 
verse fulcrum-rod 22, provided at their for 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
ward ends with keys 23 and bearing between 
a vertical longitudinal section of a type-writ 
their ends pivoted trips 24. Springs 25 are 
ing machine embodying my present improve 
provided to return the key-levers to normal 
ments. Fig. 2 shows the positions assumed 
position upon being relieved from finger 
by the parts when the type-bar and its asso 
pressure. 
The trip 24 is pivoted to the key-lever at a 
ciated mechanism have returned to their nor 
mal positions, the finger-key being still in its 
point 26 in rear of the center of the machine 
... depressed position. Fig. 3 is a vertical lon 
(considered transversely) and is provided 
gitudinal Section on a larger scale and in 
with an arm or lug 27, which normally and 
slightly-modified form, showing the position 
during the descent of the key-lever bears 
of the parts just after the tripping act has 
against a pin 28 upon the key-lever, being at 
taken place, the type-bar being in its print 
this timu held against said pin by the pressure 
ing position and the key in its depressed po 
of spring 29, arranged between the key-lever 
sition; and Fig. 4is a horizontal section taken 
and the trip. 
at the line ZZ of Fig. 3, looking in the direc 
The lower end of the trip is arranged to 
tion of the arrow and showing a portion of 
bear upon the rear end of the type-bar-cper 
the key-levers broken away. 
ating lever 17 to actuate and release the same 
In the several views the same parts will be 
and its connected type-bar and the universal 
found designated by the same numerals of 
bar. A pad 30 is provided beneath the key 
reference. 
levers to arrest their motion after releasement 
1 designates the framework of the machine; 
of the type-bars. 
2, the top plate or type-ring; 3, the type 
In operation, when a key-lever 21 is de 
bars; 4, the connecting-rods, and 5 the usual 
pressed, the trip 24 bears down upon the rear 
45 power-driven paper-carriage. The paper 
end of lever 17, depressing it and carrying 
carriage is provided with a feed-rack 6, with 
down its associated counecting-rod 4, vibrat 
which coperates a spacing-dog 7 and a de 
ing the type-bar 3 toward the platen. Dur 
taining-dog S, mounted upon a trunnion or 
ing its depression the lever 17 forces down 
rocker 9, held by a bracket 10 and actuated 
the universal bar 16, depressing the arms 15, 
rocking the shaft 13, vibrating the arm 12 
by a link 11, connected at its lower end to an 
arm 12, secured to a transverse rock-shaft 13, upwardly, and through the link 11 actuating 
35 
. 
. 
. 
- 
75. 
ge 
OC 
576,285 
I5 
3O 
35 
the feed mechanism. Through the feed mech 
anism described or any other suitable feed 
mechanism the carriage is fed the necessary 
letter-space distances as the impressions are 
made. At a predetermined time the lever 17 
and its associated type-bar, together with the 
universal bar 16 and the feed mechanism, are 
released from the control of the key-lever and 
returned to their normal positions independ 
ently and in advance of said key-lever, all as 
- will be now more specifically described. Dur 
ing said actuation of lever 17 by trip 24 the 
latter moves rigidly with the lever 21, being 
held against the stop 2S on said lever by the 
spring .29. The active lower end of the de 
pending trip 24 therefore moves in a path de 
scribed by an arc of a circle drawn from the 
pivot 22 as a center, as indicated by the dot 
ted line C, while the rear contacting end of 
the lever 17 moves in a path described by an 
arc of a circle drawn from its pivot 18 as a 
center, as indicated by the dotted line b. 
It 
Will be seen that these arcs diverge and in 
tersect cach other, and this point of intersec 
tion represents the point of disengagement 
between the trip and the lever 17 and which 
occurs just before the type strikes the paper 
On the platen. By reason of such divergence 
and intersection the..trip 24 slides off of the 
lever 17 after depressing it, and thereby re 
leases the same, Fig. 3, and permits it, to 
gether with its associated type-bar and the 
universal bar and spacing mechanism, to re 
Sume their normal positions independently 
of the key-lever 21, which is still depressed, 
as shown at Fig. 2, whereupon other key-le 
vers may be manipulated without relieving 
the first key-level from finger - pressure. 
Upon relieving the key-lever 21 from pres 
Sure it resumes its initial position under the 
return pressure of spring 25, during which 
motion the trip 24 rides along the end of le 
ver17 and vibrates independently on its own 
pivot against the tension of the spring 29, and 
upon lising above said end of lever 17 it wi 
brates forwardly under pressure of spring 29 
and resumes its initial position with the lug 
resting against the stop 28, as shown at Fig. 1. 
It will be seen that the top and bottom 
edges of the lever 17 in Figs. 1 and 2 are par 
allel for the entire length of the lever and 
that the trips are formed with jogs or shoul 
diers at their lower active ends, while at Fig. 
3 the lever 17 is beveled at its rear end, and - 
the lower end of the trip is parallel-sided; 
but these differences are not material in so 
far as my present improvements are con 
cerned, since I do not wish to be limited in 
any Wise to any peculiarity of construction 
or form of either the lever or the trip not 
specifically set forth in the claims, 
What i claim herein as new, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion. With a type-bar of a type-bar-pperating 
lever connected thereto, and a key-lever carry. 
ing a vibratory trip and a stol and a spring, 
I the said trip in the descent of said lever be 
ing held rigidly by said spring and stop and 
contactin g with said type-bar-Operati ng lever, 
and the said trip alspyibrating in an are about 
the pivot of the said key-lever, until by di 
vergence it parts company with said type-bar 
operating lever, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a type-bar of a lever for operating 
the same and a key-lever carrying a pivoted 
trip adapted to actuate the type-bar-operat 
ing lever and to detach itself therefrom by 
divergence, and means for holding said piv 
oted trip rigid during the time it is actuating 
said type-bar-operating lever and detaching 
itself therefrom, substantially asset forth. 
3. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a type-bar, a lever connected thereto, 
and a key-lever, the said key-lever and the 
said type-bar lever having each separate full 
crums, and the key - lever having a part. 
adapted to contact with the type-bar lever, 
the said part and the said type-bar lever vi 
brating in arcs which intersect each other, 
and the said part separating from said lever 
in the downward movement at the point of 
intersection of said arcs, substantially asset 
forth. 
4. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion of a lever connected to a type-bar, a 
key-lever having a trip jointed thereto and 
adapted to bear at one end upon said type 
barlever, the said trip being held rigidly dur 
ing the downward movement of the key-lever 
and operating to depress the type-bar lever 
and to slide along and off the same, whereby 
the type-bar and its associated lever may re 
turn to mornual position independently and 
in advance of the key-lever, and whereby dur 
ing the return of the key-lever to its normal 
position said trip may vibrate and resume its 
proper position relatively to the type-barle 
Ver, Substantially as set forth. 
5. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a circular series of type-bars of a 
series of rods attached at one end to the type 
bars and at the other end to a series of op 
erating-levers, the lower ends of the rodsbe 
ing arranged in a straight life, and a series 
of key-levers separably connected to said 
type-bar-operating levels, substantially asset 
forth. 
6. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a circular series of type-bars of a 
series of rods depending therefrom and ter. 
minating in line transversely of the machine 
and connected at their lower ends to a series 
of operating-levers pivoted at one end and 
having uniform motion, a series of key-levers, 
and a series of trips between the key-levers 
and the type-bar-operating levers, substan 
tially as set forth. 
7. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a circular series of type-bars of a 
Series of rods depending therefrom and ter 
minating in line transversely of the machine 
and connected at their lower ends to a series 
45 
55 
65 
IOO 
IOS 
IC 
IIS 
I 25 
576,285 
3. 
of operating-levers pivoted at one end and 
having uniform motion, a universal bar of 
the spacing mechanism adapted to be actu 
ated by said levers, a series of key-levers, 
and a series of trips between the key-levers 
and the type-bar-operating levers, substan 
tially as set forth, 
8. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a circular series of type-bars of a 
O series of rods depending therefrom and ter 
minating inline transversely of the machine 
and connected at their lower ends to a series 
of operating-levers pivoted at one end and 
having uniform motion, a series of key-levers, 
Witnesses: . 
JACOB FELBEL, 
K. W. DOSOWAN. 
a series of pivoted trips between the key-le 
vers and the type-bar-operating levers, and 
means for holding the tripsrigidly upon their 
levers during the releasement of the type 
bar-operating levers from the key-levers, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
Signed at New York city, in the county of 
New York and State of New York, this 15th 
day of June, A.D. 1895. 
BURNHAM. C. STICKNEY. 
. . 
. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576385.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 576,385. 
 
D. H. WALENTINE. 
BALANCING FRAME FOR BICYCLES, 
2. Sheets-Sheet l, 
Patented Feb. 2, 1897. 
N 
(No Model.) 
D. H. WALENTINE, 
BALANCING FRAME FOR; BICYCLES 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 576,385. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1897, 
9. 
W ; 
-- 
4 Sal 
Es 
4. 
g t 
Z 
7 
9 y 
A 
 
 
 
... 
" . 
 
 
Ly 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID H. VALENTINE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
BALANCNG FRAME FOR BCYCLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,385, dated February 2, 1897. 
Application filed July 21, 1896, Serial No. 600,028, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
To all whon, it may conce7n: 
Be it known that I, DAVID H. WALENTINE, 
of the city of Brooklyn, county of Kings, and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Balancing 
Frames for Bicycle-Riders, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a front elevation; Fig. 2, a top 
view of my improved frame for bicycles. Fig. 
3 is an enlarged detail showing the connec 
tion between the parts of the balancing-bar. 
Fig. 4 is a top view. Fig. 5 is a side eleva 
tion; Fig. 6, a horizontal section of the recip 
rocating clamp, one jaw and block being re 
moved. Fig. 7 is a sectional view of the clamp 
on lines 77 indicated in Fig. 6. Fig. 8 is a 
horizontal sectional view of the clamping-jaw 
and block removed in Fig. 6. Fig. 9 is a top 
view, and Fig. 10 a cross-section, of the roller 
bearing set between the top of the standard 
and the butt. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in all views of the drawings. 
My invention relates to appliances for bi 
cycle-schools; and it consists of a frame for 
sustaining in balanced position the bicycle of 
a rider learning the pedaling motion and un 
able as yet to maintain his equilibrium. 
Beginners in riding bicycles experience the 
greatest difficulty in maintaining their equi 
librium while performing the motion neces 
sary to propel the bicycle. In learning to 
ride the tyro is usually supported by an at 
tendant on foot. This, however, seriously 
interferes with his progress on the bicycle, 
besides preventing him from exercising at a 
proper speed. On the other hand no appa 
ratus has been yet devised for this purpose, 
permitting the rider to propel his bicycle 
freely and at the same time holding the bi 
cycle and rider in a balanced position. 
The balancing-frame, which is the object 
of my invention, consists of a post A, set in 
the ground and supported by braces b in ver 
tical position, balancing-bar B, turnably Se 
cured to the post on pivot c, and clamp C, se 
cured to the end of the bar. 
Balancing-bar Bisconstructed of telescopic 
tubes e e', &c., secured together and to the 
butt d by set-screws S. Butt d, slid on pivot 
c and turning on bearing a, extends beyond 
the post A, and on its outer end is added 
weight f to balance bar B in horizontal posi 
tion. The butt d being necessarily heavy 
and also the pressure of the weight fand of 
the teloscopic tube ee', &c., concentrated on 
the bearing-surface of the standard A, I in 
sert there the roller-bearing a, consisting of 
conical antifriction-rollers pillowed in slots 
provided in two flat rings riveted together. 
The slots are slightly wider-than the diameter 
of the rollers on the joined sides of the rings, 
but narrower on the opposite sides. Thus 
when the two rings are riveted together the 
conical rollers are inclosed and held between 
them. 
Clamp C, secured to the bar B and adapted 
to hold the fork-stem of a bicycle below the 
handle-bar, is peculiarly constructed to allow 
the bicycle a moderate deviation from verti 
cal position and yet to hold it firmly in any 
position it may assume. At the same time 
the springs used in the clamp compensate for 
deviations caused by the instability of the 
rider and assist him in returning to balanced 
position. 
Clamp C consists of the two longitudinal 
bars g and g', with strips k flanging their in 
ner edges, and of blocks h and h', screwed 
together with the bars g and g' by bolts i. In 
place of block h' the end of rod e may be 
squared and set between the bars g and g'. 
In that case the bolts would at the same time 
secure clamp C to bar B. In the frame thus 
composed and snugly fitted between flanges 
k are set jaws land l', having semicircular 
notches o, preferably lined with rubber to 
prevent injury to the smoothly-finished fork 
stem of the bicycle. Jaws land l'are pressed 
together by recoiling springs m, set between 
them and blocks handh', respectively. Each 
of these recoiling springs is composed of three 
springs m. m. m., of different diameters and 
lengths, slid one in another to increase their 
resistance and recoiling power proportion 
ately with the strain exerted on the jaws by 
the efforts of the rider, tending to force the 
bicycle from its balanced position. By such 
compounding of the springs the grip of the 
clamps is made also more yielding within a 
certain limit of deviation and to resist a 
greater deviation with a greater force. 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
I O 
2 
576,885 
IC) 
Springs in are connected to blocks l and h' 
and to jaws l and l, respectively, whereas 
springs in are supported on pins , as shown 
in Fig. 8, and springs an are held in position 
by bushings n'. 
During the first lessons, when the strain 
produced by the instability of the rider of 
the bicycle will be very great, a brace p, as 
shown in Fig. 1, may be used. This bar, how 
ever, will seldom be necessary, because the 
hold of the clamp of the frame is sufficient 
to meet any ordinary strain. 
Rod e is preferably constructed of steel 
tubing. Butt d may be cast of malleable iron 
or steel and in one piece with the weightf 
It may also be produced of Wrought-iron and 
a cast-iron weight secured thereto. Post A 
may be made of a piece of timber in the man 
ner as shown in the drawings, or a standard 
of cast-iron with a base-plate adapted to be 
screwed to the floor may be substituted there 
for. 
The frame of the clamp C may be produced 
of hard Wood or cast of some light metallic 
alloy of sufficient tensile strength. Jaws l 
and l are cast of suitable metal and lined 
with rubber. 
In reducing my invention to practice I do 
not confine myself to the particular construc 
tion and shape of the parts as herein shown 
and described, this construction showing only 
one practical embodiment of the principle of 
my invention. 
I claim as my invention and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent 
1. In a balancing-frame for bicycles, the 
combination with a supporting-frame, com 
prising a standard, secured in vertical posi 
tion, a pivot, set in the top of the standard, 
a Weighted butt set on the pivot, roller-bear 
ings supporting the butt, and an extensible 
bar, secured to the butt, of a clamp secured 
to the extensible bar and having jaws adapted 
to hold the fork-stem of a bicycle, and of 
means for elastically pressing the jaws to 
gether. 
2. A clamp for securing the fork-stem of a 
bicycle to a balancing-bar, consisting of a 
frame composed of two bars, flanged on their 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
inner sides and of blocks set one on each end 
between the bars with bolts passing through 
the bars and through the blocks and holding 
the frame together; of jaws, snugly fitted to 
slide in the flanges between the bars and hav 
ing semicircular notches lined with rubber, 
recoiling springs, composed of several spiral 
springs of different lengths and diameters, 
slid one in another and held by bushings and 
pins in relative positions between the blocks 
and the jaws, pressing the jaws together, and 
reacting against deviations of the fork-stem 
caused by the instability of the rider, thereby 
assisting him to regain a balanced position. 
3. In a balancing-frame for bicycles the 
combination with balanced extensible bar, 
rotatably secured to a standard, of a clamp, 
consisting of a longitudinal frame, jaws, hav 
ing semicircular notches adapted to hold the 
fork-stem of the bicycle, snugly fitted in the 
frame and adapted to slide therein, and of 
recoiling Springs, composed of several spiral 
Springs of different lengths and diameters, 
slid one in another, set in the frame to press 
the jaWS together, and reacting against devi 
ations of the fork-stem caused by the insta 
bility of the rider, thereby assisting him to 
regain a balanced position. 
4. In a clamp for securing the fork-stem of 
a bicycle to a balancing-frame, the combina 
tion with gripping-jaws, sliding between 
flanged bars, of compounded recoil-springs, 
set behind the gripping-jaws and consisting of 
Several springs of different lengths and diam 
eters slid one in another, the springs render 
ing the grip of the jaws more yielding within 
certain limit and increasing the resistance of 
the clamp in proportion to the strain tending 
to dislocate the bicycle, thus clamped, from 
balanced position. 
In witness that I claim the improvements 
described in the foregoing specification I have 
signed my name in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
D. H. WALENTINE. 
Witnesses: 
A. W. KURZ, 
HENRY SCHREITER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576485.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
J. D, TRACY & J. F. PLATT, 
STALK 0R FODDER, CUTTING MACHINE, 
No. 576,485. 
 
Patented Feb. 2, 1897. 
928 balcosco 
- - 
4. -(2 2ez 
-es 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
J, D, TRACY & J. F. PLATT. 
STALK OR FODDER. CUTTING MACHINE, 
No. 576,485. 
Patented Feb. 2, 1897. 
(S 
Z3 E 
ES 
Z5 
5 
Z4 
- 
7, 
S. 
- 
C 
L 
N Y 
2a 
I 
- - - - - 
SSS - 
- 2s 
--S 
| 
t 
f 
| 
| 
'' 
| 
I 
3-vvuc4-bots 
VfL 2. 
&ltiovvied. 
A7 
ass 
3O. 
6 ZO 
7. 
1. 
3. 
NS ligi- 
Sea 
2s. - 
---.S. 
* j, 
33 
3. 
32 
9 
43 
e. 
J9 VE 
2- 
(9) 
5 
9 
9 
3O 
Q) S- | 
N- - 
28), tv.cosos 26 
32294-st 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. TRACY AND JAMES F. PLATT, OF STERLING, ILLINOIS. 
STALK OR F O DDER C UTTNG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,485, dated February 2, 1897. 
Application filed August 20, 1896, Serial No. 603,406, (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To all tuhot, it may concern. 
Be it known that we, JOHN D. TRACY and 
JAMESF. PLATT, citizens of the United States, 
residing at Sterling, in the county of White 
side and State of Illinois, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Stalk 
or Fodder Cutting Machines, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in stalk-cutting ma 
chines; and it consists, substantially, in such 
features of construction, arrangement, and 
combination of parts as will hereinafter be 
more particularly described. 
While being applicable to a great many dif 
ferentforms of cutting-machines, our present 
invention has reference more particularly to 
machines for cutting fibrous material, as, for 
instance, corn stalks and husks for use as fod 
der for animals. 
The particular type of machine on which 
We prefer to use our invention will be at once 
recognized from the accompanying drawings. 
A desirable feature in these machines is the 
Self raising or adjusting of the upper feed 
roll, by which to permit passage of the mate 
rial operated upon, and one method of doing 
this has been to use spur-gears on the ends 
of the shafts of the feed-rolls, the teeth being 
Very deepin order that the movable roll could 
rise and the engagement of the spur-gearing 
be still preserved or maintained. More re 
cent improvements dispense with this means 
of driving the feed-rolls, and the said rolls, 
like in the machine herein shown, are driven 
separately by means of suitable shafting and 
connecting-gear. Even with this form, how 
ever, on account of the drive-shaft moving 
very fast, it was necessary to use a very small 
Sprocket on the upper-roll shaft, which re 
Sulted in considerable motion and wear at 
the joints of the drive-chain, and, besides, 
the said upper roll could only rise or move in 
its bearings to the extent permitted by the 
Slack in Said chain. It is this and other dis 
advantages which it is the purpose and ob 
ject of our present invention to overcome and 
which we do by the means illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective of a cut 
ting-machine embodying our invention; and 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged view in detail of the 
driving and adjusting devices, parts being 
broken away to more clearly indicate the con 
struction and arrangement thereof. 
Our improvements are capable of a great 
many different embodiments in use; but we 
prefer substantially the form and arrange 
ment of parts such, for instance, as we have 
herein shown. 
A designates the Supporting-frameWork of 
the machine. B indicates the feed-table, C 
the cutter-knives, and D a hinged cover for 
closing down over the said knives as well as 
the feed-rolls of the machine, these parts be 
ing of usual or well-known construction. 
While different forms of driving mechanism. 
could be employed, we prefer the arrange 
ment herein provided and which comprises 
a main shaft E, having its bearings in the 
lower part of the frameworkA and provided 
with a band-pulley at one end and a small 
pinion or gear 2 at or near the other end. 
F represents a counter-shaft which is pro 
vided at one end with a sprocket-wheel. 3, 
around which passes a sprocket-chain 4, lead 
ing to a similar wheel (not shown) on the cor 
responding end of the shaft of the lower feed 
roll G, and the said counter-shaft carries at 
or near its other end an enlarged gear-wheel 
5, which meshes with the gear 2 referred to. 
This counter-shaft is supported at this end 
in a box 6, and at its outer end beyond the 
gear-wheel 5 is a smaller gear-wheel 7, which 
meshes with a similar gear-wheel 8, carried 
by a stud 9, and on this stud is also carried a 
sprocket - wheel 10, over which passes a 
sprocket-chain 11. The said sprocket-chain 
passes upward and over a similar sprocket 
wheel 12, carried on the corresponding end 
of the shaft of the upper feed-roll H, which 
shaft has its bearing at each end in a box 
that is movable upwardly in a vertical, di 
agonal, or segmental slot or opening 13 of a 
roller-bracket 14, and which boxes are each 
held down by means of a spring 15, by which 
the upper roll is given a yielding action in 
operation. 
It is evident from the construction and ar 
rangement thus far described that on impart 
ing motion to the main drive-shaft in the di 
rection indicated by the arrow the feed-rolls 
G. and H would be independently operated to 
revolve in different directions from the same 
source of power, and in this way the corn 
stalks and husks would be fed to the cutting 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
: 
576,485 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
55 
lknives and by these latter be cut up into 
shreds or lengths suitable for fodder. It will 
be seen, however, that the upper roll His in 
capable of raising any higher than is permit 
ted by the slack in the sprocket-chain, and 
which distance is sometimes insufficient on 
account of the large obstruction offered by 
Some of the material; and this construction 
Would also necessitate the use of a belt-tight 
ener to take up the slack in the sprocket 
chain whenever the machine was running 
empty or when produced by wear of the chain. 
In order, therefore, to secure a uniform equal 
tension on the sprocket-chain 11 at all times, 
as well also as to be able to employ much 
larger sprocket-wheels than heretofore, we 
provide the construction and arrangement 
about to be described, and while it is to be 
understood that we do not limit ourselves 
thereto strictly as to detail we have found 
the same to fully and admirably subserve the 
intended purposes. Thus we mount the stud 
9 and the combined gear-wheel 8 and sprocket 
wheel 10 at the free end of a pivoted or swing 
ing rocker-arm 16, which in turn is loosely 
mounted to turn on the hub of the box 6, in 
which the end of the counter-shaft F rests; 
also, On the hub of the stud 9 we pivot an up 
Wardly-projecting arm. 18, which is prefer 
ably grooved at 20, so as to receive adjustably 
the lower end of a connecting rod or bar 21, 
having a slot 19, a suitable bolt 22 and nut 
23 being employed to secure the rod or bar 
to the said arm in an obvious manner. The 
upper end of the said rod 21 connects with 
the bearing of the upper roll II at this side of 
the machine, and the purpose of making the 
rod adjustable lengthwise is to take up the 
slack in the sprocket-chain 11, however pro 
duced. 
Our improved construction and arrange 
lment also enable the upper roll to lise to any 
height required, while at the same time main 
taining equal tension on the sprocket-chain, 
and this is an important feature on machines 
of this class where the upper feed-roll is con 
stantly changing its position or alinement 
relatively to the lower feed-roll. By our in 
vention also One end of the upper roll is per 
mitted to get up or rise independently of the 
other end, which produces much better re 
Sults, and We are enabled to use sprocket 
wheels of the same as well as much larger 
sizes than heretofore, which produces less 
wear on the chain at the joints. 
In order to maintain the rocker-arm in true 
Working a linement, We provide on the side 
of the framework a plate 30, which is slightly 
curved at 31 to correspond to the arc of the 
circle described in the movement of the arm, 
and which is bent or set out from the frame 
work at said curved edge, so as to receive the 
adjacent end or portion of the arm and thus 
guide the arm in its movements. Of course 
other means for guiding the arm could be 
adapted, but We prefer the construction 
shown. 
What we claim is 
1. In a stalk-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the feed-rolls, one being station 
alry and the other yieldable, of means for in 
dividually driving the stationary roll, a drive 
gear Supported in bearings independent of 
either of the rolls, a rocking arm also sup 
ported independent of either of the rolls, a 
driven gear carried by the arm and meshing 
with said drive-gear, a rigid connection be 
tween said arm and the yieldable roll, and 
independent driving connections for the 
yieldable roll operated from said driven gear, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a stalk-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the feed-rolls, one being station 
ary and the other yieldable, of means for in 
dividually driving the stationary roll, a drive 
gear supported in bearings independent of 
either of the rolls, a rocking arm also sup 
ported independent of either of the rolls, a 
driven gear carried by the arm and meshing 
With said drive-gear, an adjustable rigid con 
nection between said arm and the yieldable 
roll, and independent driving connections for 
the yieldable roll operated from said driven 
gear, substantially as described. 
3. In a stalk-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the feed-rolls, one being station 
ary and the other yieldable, of means for in 
dividually driving the stationary roll, a drive 
gear supported in bearings independent of 
either of the rolls, a rocking arm also sup 
ported independent of either of the rolls, a 
curved guide for the free end of the arm, a 
driven gear carried by the arm and meshing 
with said drive-gear, a rigid connection be 
tween said arm and the yieldable roll, and 
independent driving connections for the 
yieldable roll operated from said driven gear, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a stalk-cutting machine, the combi 
nation with the main shaft for driving the 
cutter-knives, of the feed-rolls, one of which 
is stationary and the other yieldable, an aux 
iliary or counter shaft operated from the 
main shaft, and connections from said coun 
ter-shaft for individually driving the station 
ary roll, a drive-gear supported in bearings 
independent of either of the rolls and oper 
ated from the counter-shaft, a rocking arm. 
also independent of either of the rolls, and a 
driven gear carried thereby and meshing with 
said drive-gear, a rigid connection between 
said driven gear and the yieldable roll, and 
independent driving connections for the 
yieldable roll operated from said driven gear, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
names to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN D. TRACY. 
JAMES F. PIATT. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES A. BUYERS, 
TENA TUMBLESON. 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576585.txt	(No Model.) 
M. W. KIDDER 
APPARATUS FOR GENERATING ACETYLENE GAS. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
 
a & 
INVEN 
T or 
4, 7 /(4!-- 
: , 
, 
reorbis perERs co. Phoro-LTHO, WASHMG0, ... 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MOSES. W. KIDDER, OF LINCOLN, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO PERSON 
NOYES, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS. 
A PPARATUS FOR GENERATING ACETYLENE GAS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,585, dated February 9, 1897. 
Application filed February 1, 1896, Serial No. 577,719, (No model.) 
55 
75 
(fo all, Luhon it may concern.' 
Be it known that I, MOSES. W. KIDDER, of 
Lincoln, in the county of Middlesex and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Generating, Storing, and Regulating Acety 
lene Gas from Calcic Carbid, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
apparatus for the safe generation, storage, 
and regulation of acetylene gas as obtained 
from calcic carbid and water by their mutual 
exchange of the elements of their composi 
tion. 
The invention consists in the improvements 
hereinafter described relating to the genera 
tion and storage of acetylene gas whereby the 
contact of the Water With the calcic carbid is 
automatically determined by the pressure of 
the gas generated during the period of such 
contact, the water being alternately displaced 
and expelled from contact with the calcic car 
bid as the gas-pressure increases and allowed 
to return to the storage-space containing the 
calcic carbid as the gas-pressure decreases. 
The invention also consists in certain ad 
ditional improvements incidental to the gen 
eral purposes of my invention, all of which I 
will now proceed to describe and claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a top view of an apparatus embodying my 
invention. Fig. 2 represents a section on 
line 22 of Fig. 1. 
The same letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in both figures. 
In the drawings, Cl, represents a cylindrical 
tank adapted to contain Water and provided 
With a top or cover C.'. 
b represents a gas-receptacle which is an 
inverted cup or cylinder closed at its upper 
end and open at its lower end, the closed 
upper end being here shown as projecting 
through the top or cover of the cylindrical 
tank Cl, the latter having an opening to re 
ceive the gas-receptacle b. 
c represents a receptacle for the calcic car 
bid, said receptacle being preferably made in 
the form of a funnel and having provisions 
at its lower portion for the admission of water 
from the water-receptacle, which is the lower 
part of the tank C., into the storage-space which 
contains the calcium carbid. 
I have here shown the calcium-carbid re 
ceptacle c as provided with a reticulated bot 
tom c', which supports the carbid above it 
and permits the water to pass upwardly 
through it into contact with the carbid, the 
receptacle c being provided below said bot 
tom. With One or more water-inlets. I have 
here shown two water-inlets c' c', each being 
an elongated tube extended downwardly from 
the lower portion of the receptacle c nearly 
to the bottom of the water-receptacle, the 
object of said elongated tubes being to pre 
vent the entrance of oil into the storage 
space of the receptacle c, as hereinafter ex 
plained. 
The receptacle cis here shown as supported 
by legs c from the bottom of the tank, the 
said receptacle being located within the gas 
receptacle, or, in other words, interposed be 
tween the water and the gas receptacles, its 
arrangement being such that its lower portion 
receives water from the water - receptacle, 
while its upper portion discharges gas into 
the gas-receptacle. 
d represents a pipe which extends from the 
upper portion of the gas-receptacle down 
Wardly under the gas-receptacle and laterally 
therefrom and upwardly to the upper portion 
of the tank Cl, its upper end communicating 
with the gas-outlet pipe e. To insure the 
maintenance of the proper degree of pressure 
in the gas-outletpipe and in the distributing 
pipes connected there with, I provide a gas 
pressure regulator, which regulates the pas 
sage of gas from the pipe d to the outlet-pipe 
e. Said regulator may be of any suitable 
construction. As here shown, it comprises 
an inverted floating cupf, which is immersed 
in a suitable sealing medium contained in an 
annular space funder a domef, and a valve 
f, connected by a rod f with the cup f, said 
valve being movable toward and from an 
openingf, through which the gas passes from 
the piped into the interior of the cupf, the 
valve f being adapted to close said opening 
when the cup f is sufficiently elevated. The 
outlet-pipe e communicates with the interior 
of the cupf. It will be seen, therefore, that 
as the pressure increases in the outlet-pipe e. 
95 
OC) 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
576,585 
55 
gas, which accumulates in the gas-receptacle, 
its pressure increasing until it depresses the 
Water within the gas-receptacle, the displaced 
water rising in the portions of the tank a sur 
rounding the gas-receptacle, the Water being 
thus expelled from the storage-space of the 
calcic-carbid receptacle, whereupon the gen 
eration of gas ceases, the pressure of gas in 
the gas-holder being decreased as the gas is 
drawn therefrom through the pipe d, so that 
the water again rises into contact with the 
calcic carbid, thus producing another supply 
of gas, this operation continuing as long as 
the gas escapes through the outlete, the pres 
sure of the gas in the gas-receptacle automat 
ically controlling the contact of water with 
the calcic carbid. I therefore avoid any ex 
cessive pressure of the acetylene gas and in 
Sure a supply proportionate only to the de 
mand. 
lic represents an outlet-pipe by which the 
Water may be drawn from the lowel portion 
of the tank, and in represents a gage-tube 
whereby the height of water in the tank may 
be ascertained. 
I claim 
A gas generating and storing apparatus 
comprising a Water-receptacle, a gas-l'ecepta 
cle whose walls extend within the water-recep 
tacle in proximity to the base thereof, said 
gas-receptacle being closed at the top and 
open at the bottom for water communication, 
an intermediate caicic-carbid receptacle with 
in the gas-receptacle communicating at one 
side with the gas-space thereof, and a water 
inlet conduit projecting downwardly from an 
other side of the said calcic-carbid receptacle 
to the lower portion of the water-receptacle, 
said inlet also serving as a guard to prevent 
the admission to the said calcic-carbid recep 
tacle of oil floating on the Water in the gas 
receptacle. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 27th day of 
January, A. D. 1896. 
MOSES W. KIDDER. 
Witnesses: 
A. D. HARRISON, 
A. D. ADAMS. 
75 
90 
95 
O 
and the distributing-pipes connected there 
with the cup f is raised and contracts the 
opening through which gas passes from the 
pipe d, thus reducing the pressure, the cupf 
descending when the pressure in the outlet 
pipe decreases, thus affording a larger Open 
ing for the entrance of gas into the outlet 
pipe. I do not limit myself, however, to this 
construction of pressure-regulator, and may 
use any other suitably-constructed pressure 
regulator. 
Any suitable fluid may be used to seal the 
inverted cup fin the annular spacef", chlorid 
of zinc or chlorid of calcium being suitable 
fluids. Mercury, however, should be avoided, 
because it is liable to combine with the acety 
lene gas, forming a fulminate of mercury. 
d' represents an outlet-pipe extending from 
the pipe d outside the tank a for the escape 
of any liquid that may accumulate in the pipe 
d, said outlet-pipe having a cock d. 
To prevent the sealing fluid from being 
blown out of the annular space f" by the gas 
pressure, I provide a safety appliance which, 
as here shown, comprises a pipeg, connected 
with the outlet-pipe e, a receptacle g", into 
which the pipeg extends nearly to the bottom, 
said receptacle containing a body of any suit 
able liquid, into which the lower end of the 
pipe of extends, and an outlet-pipeg, extend 
ing from the receptacle g above the body of 
liquid. The liquid in the receptacle g' seals 
the pipe of and prevents the passage of gas 
through it under ordinary pressures, but per 
mits the escape of gas when the pressure be 
comes greater than normal. 
In operating the described apparatus water 
is introduced into the tank Ct, until it rises 
above the lower ends of the elongated inlet 
pipe c'. A film of oil is then introduced into 
the tank to cover the water and prevent its 
evaporation and the absorption of its vapor 
by the calcic carbid. More water is then ad 
mitted into the tank until the accumulation 
rises and enters the lower portion of the cal 
cic - carbid receptacle c, the Water rising 
through the elongated inlets c', which prevent 
the admission of the oil to the receptacle c 
because their lower ends are below the fillm 
of oil. The contact of the Water with the cal 
cic carbid immediately produces acetylene 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576686.txt	(No Model.) 
E. B. PARKHURST. 
BOILER, FURNACE, 
6 Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
No. 576,686. 
 
 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897, 
st Sess sa 
NCRRS Peters co, PHOTOTHo 
(No Model.) 
v 
E. B. PARKHURST. 
BOILER, FURNAOE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 576,686. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
es w3 O) 
rs sS. 
S. 
(O 
(O) 
(O 
Witle55E5. 
G2a2a1- 5, Y6.00. 
. 
- 
Inventor. 
26eva-C /3. (27%4-4-2,4- 
- Uzzi (Zar-e- 
(No Model.) 
No. 576,686, 
 
E. B. PARKHURST. 
BOILER FURN AGE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
E. B. PARKHURST. 
w 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
No. 576,686. 
 
BOIER, FURNACE, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
 
 
  
(No Model.) 
E. B. PARKHURST. 
6. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 576,686, 
BOLER FURNACE, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
 
 
2 
Z 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
&lar. 
2/1-cu1- G. 
ld- 
  
s 
G. 
N gy CLSs 
N-g 
3.NET 
g D. Y. E 
i 
1. 
Inventor 
J2a 66r-ye 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD B. PARKHURST, OF WOBURN, MASSACHUSETTS. 
BO E R - FUR NAC E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,686, dated February 9, 1897. 
Application filed April 23, 1896, Serial No. 588,780, (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
- 
which- 
To all tuft. On it nually conce7n 
Beit known that I, EDWARD B. PARKHURST, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Woburn, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Boiler 
IFurnaces, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had therein to the 
accompanying drawings. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
an improved boiler-furnace which shall be 
of high efficiency in forming steam, and also 
economical in the consumption of fuel; and 
it consists in a boiler-furnace constructed as 
hereinafter set forth, and the novel features 
of which are particularly pointed out and 
clearly defined in the claims at the end of 
this specification. 
In the following description reference is 
made to the accompanying drawings, in 
Figure 1 is a vertical central lengthwise 
section showing a horizontal boiler and its in 
ternal furnace embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 is a front elevation with one-half in section, 
the section being on the line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a vertical section, the right half being on 
line 33, Fig. 1, and the left half being online 
4 4 of said figure. Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7 are de 
tails showing modifications, reference to 
which is hereinafter made. Fig. 8 is a detail 
of the slide-damper employed in the modifi 
cation shown in Fig. 7. Fig. 9 is a detail here 
inafter referred to. Figs. 10, 11, 12, and 13 
show a modification in which the furnace is 
outside of the boiler. Fig. 10 is a side ele 
vation. Fig. 11 is a front elevation, partly 
in section. Fig. 12 is a horizontal section on 
line 12 12 of Fig. 10, and Fig. 13 is a vertical 
section on line 13 13 of Eig. 10. Fig. 14 is a 
modification showing my invention applied 
to a water-tube boiler. Fig. 15 is a section 
on line 15 15 of Fig. 14. 
A represents a horizontal boiler of common 
form having what is frequently termed an 
internal fire-box or furnace. An upper 
series of grate-bars is shown at 3. Each of 
such bars consists of a tube, and a series of 
said tubes placed side by side, as shown, Fig. 
2, forms the upper grate. The grate bars or 
tubes 3 are slightly inclined, the rear ends 
thereof being somewhat higher than the for 
ward ends thereof, as shown, Fig. 1. The 
said rear ends of said grate-tubes are con 
nected each with a connection 30, the upper 
ends of said connections entering the crown 
sheet and thus connecting with the water 
space of the boiler above the crown-sheet. 
The forward ends of said grate-tubes 3 enter 
a manifold D, which is of the shape shown, 
Figs. 1 and 2, and which is supported upon 
feet 4, which latter rest preferably upon the 
metal strip or plate 5, extending across the 
floor of the ash-pit from side to side thereof. 
The water-box D crosses the front of the fur 
nace horizontally and consists of two por 
tions, namely, an upper portion 6, into which 
the forward ends of the upper grate-bars 3 
enter, as previously described, and a lower 
portion 7, into which the forward ends of the 
lower grate-bars 9 enter. The upper and 
lower portions 6 and 7 of said water-box or 
manifold are connected by vertical portions 
8, preferably three in number, so spaced as 
to leave openings between the said vertical 
portions opposite the tubes of the lower grate 
to permit the placing of fuel on said grate. 
The lower grate-bars 9 preferably are placed 
parallel with the upper grate-bars, as shown, 
and the rear ends of said lower grate-bars 
are connected by means of bent connections 
or elbows 20 with vertical connecting-pipes 
10, the upper ends of which enter the three 
way elbows 21, by means of which the real 
ends of the upper grate-bars are connected 
with the radial connections 30. The radial. 
connections 30 may therefore be considered 
as extensions of the vertical connecting 
pipes 10. 
The lower grate-bars preferably are set 
close together, and it is therefore undesirable 
to locate the vertical connections 10 in the 
same transverse plane, since if they were so 
located there would not be sufficient space 
between them to accommodate the draft from 
the upper and lower grates. To avoid plac 
ing these connections in the same plane, I 
make each alternate lower grate-tube 9 some 
what longer than the other tubes of the series 
forming the lower grate, so that the connec 
tions 10 will occupy two transverse planes, 
the connections for the shorter grate-tubes 
95 
ICO 
IO 
25 
35 
4o 
45 
 
... 
576,686 
IO 
35 
45 
being in one plane and those for the longer 
ones being in another plane-that is, the ver 
tical connections of the longer grate - tubes 
are set in a line a short distance behind the 
one formed by the connections of the shorter 
grate-tubes, as will be clear from Fig. 1. To 
facilitate the connection of these longer tubes 
of the lower series and their vertical connec 
tions 10 with the boiler-space above the crown 
sheet, the corresponding grate bars or tubes 
of the upper grate are also correspondingly 
extended, and the radial connections 30 fol' 
these longer grate -tubes are also set rear 
Wardly of the radial connections for the 
shorter upper grate-tubes, as will be clear. 
By this arrangement sufficient spaces are ob 
tained between the vertical connections 10 to 
permit the combined draft of the upper and 
lower grates to pass rearwardly between said 
Connections. 
To prevent the draft from the upper grate 
passing between the connections 30, I place a 
partition or Wall 35, of fire-brick or similar 
heat-resisting material, across the furnace in 
front of the said connections 30 and between 
the rear ends of the upper grate-tubes and 
This partition may be of 
the crown-sheet. 
any Well-known material and may be con 
structed in any well-known manner. By the 
employment of a bent connection or elbow to 
join the rear end of each of the lower grate 
bars 9 with its vertical connection 10 a sav 
ing in cost is effected over the employment 
of a manifold or Water-box at the rear ends 
of the lower grate-bars, and in like manner 
the employment of the three-way elbows 21 
and the radial connections 30 in place of a 
Water-leg or similar device is of considerable 
advantage in saving expense in construction, 
as also in the cost of cleaning and repairs, 
While at the salne time a better and more 
'apid circulation of the water through the 
grate-tubes is obtained. The bent connec 
tions or elbows 20 and 21 are also preferable 
to a main fold or Water-leg, in that they do 
not afford an opportunity for the collection 
of sediment. 
The Vertical connections 10 between the 
rear ends of the lower grate-bars 9 and the 
three-way elbow's 21 are important in increas 
ing the circulation of the boiler, since the 
Water in these vertical pipes 10 is exposed to 
the fiercest heat of the fire, and a rapid cir 
culation is thus insured. The water-box or 
manifold D is supplied with water from the 
i 
coolest Water in the boiler, preferably by 
means of supply-pipes 12, which latter con 
nect the lower portions of said manifold with 
the lowest portion of the boiler at the rear of 
the ash-pit or fire-chamber. The water cir 
culates from the coolest portion of the boiler 
through the Supply-pipes 12, of which there 
are preferably three, as shown, Fig. 2, to 
the manifold or Water-box D, thence either 
through the lower grate-bars 9 and vertical 
connections 10 to the radial connections 30, 
or through the upper grates 3 to the said 
radial connections 30, and thence through said 
connections 30 to the hottest water above the 
crown-sheet. 
For the purpose of causing the draft to pass 
upwardly through the lower grate and of pre 
venting it from passing below and behind the 
said grate I provide a supporting-piece 13, 
which is of the 
shape in cross-section 
shown, Fig. 1, and which extends across the 
furnace from side to side of the ash-pit and is 
secured at each end thereof to the side of the 
ash-pit in any well-known manner. I fill the 
interior of this support 13 with fire-brick or 
other fire-resisting material, and thus form a 
durable partition across the furnace below 
the bent connections 20 and between said 
connections and the supply-pipes 12, there 
being only sufficient space between the said 
supply-pipes and the bottom of the support 
ing-piece 13 to accommodate a damper 15, 
which is formed, preferably, from sheet-iron 
or the like. The damper 15 is arranged to 
slide on top of the said supply-pipes 12 and 
between said pipes and the supporting-piece 
| 13. The said damper 15, extends from side 
to side of the furnace and rearwardly to the 
rear wall of the ash-pit and serves in connec 
tion with the supporting-piece 13 to prevent 
the draft from passing below and behind the 
lower grates. The draft is therefore forced to 
pass upwardly through the said lower grate 
and between the vertical connections 10. As 
ashes and the like Will collect on the damper 15 
the construction above described is provided 
to permit the said damper to be slid forward 
toward the front of the furnace by the lase of 
a poker or similar device, the front edge of 
said damper being provided with a projection 
or eye by means of which it may be drawn 
forward by the aid of the poker. As the dam 
per is drawn forward the ashes or other ma 
|terial which have collected upon it will be 
forced off and will drop into the ash-pit, from 
whence they may be readily removed. 
At 221 are shown projections which pref 
erably are integral with the front plate of the 
furnace and which extend slightly over the 
front edge of similar projections on the mani 
; fold or water-box D. The projections 221 are 
located just below each fuel-door and serve 
to prevent any fuel from getting into the space 
in front of the manifold or water-box D. 
The stack or flue is shown at 23 and may 
be of any well-known construction. 
In the drawings various other parts of the 
boiler are shown which I do not deem it neces 
Salry to describe, inasmuch as their construc 
tion is familiar to all skilled in the art. 
At Fig. 9 a modification is shown in which 
the upper ends of the radial connections 30 
instead of entering the crown-sheet direct 
are connected by means of bent connections 
: 36 with horizontal connections 37, which enter 
the tube-sheet at the real' of the furnace, as 
shown. By this construction an extension 
I 
7 O 
So 
go 
IOO 
IC 5 
O 
II5 
576,686 
3 
O 
of the heating-surface is obtained, while the 
rapidity of the circulation is not interfered 
with. 
The closure device, consisting of the sup 
porting-piece 13 and damper 15, above de 
scribed, by means of which the draft is pre 
vented from passing below and behind the 
lower grate, may be variously modified. 
In Figs. 4 to S, inclusive, I have shown sev 
eral forms of the closure device above de 
scribed for preventing the draft of the lower 
grate from passing below and behind said 
grate. In Fig. 4 the supporting-piece 13 is 
employed in substantially the same manner 
as in Fig. 1 and as previously described. In 
the modification shown in the said figure, 
however, the presence of supply-pipes 12, 
passing underneath the said supporting-piece 
13, is not contemplated, such supply-pipes 
being otherwise located, thus leaving the en 
tire space below the supporting-piece 13 
down to the floor of the ash-pit free. The 
form of damper employed, however, may be 
such as is shown in said figure at 50. This 
damper is pivoted at its upper edge in any 
suitable manner to the under side of the Sup 
port 13. When closed, it occupies a substan 
tially vertical position, and it may be opened 
or swung up into the dotted-line position 
shown for the purpose of cleaning out that 
part of the ash-pit which is located rear 
wardly of it. 
In the modification shown, Fig. 5, the dam 
per 51 occupies when closed a horizontal po 
sition, being pivoted at its rear edge in any 
well-known manner and being provided with 
an arm 60, (indicated in dotted lines,) with 
which a slide-rod 61 is connected, which pro 
jects forwardly to the front of the furnace 
and is provided with a handle 62, by means 
of which the said rod may be drawn forward 
when it is desired to swing the damper down 
into the vertical position indicated by the 
dotted lines 63. By this contrivance the 
damper may be readily operated to allow ashes 
and the like which collect thereon to drop 
down into the ash-pit. 
The modified construction shown, Fig. 6, 
differs only in the method of constructing 
and operating the damper. In this construc 
tion the damper 55 is pivoted centrally at 
each end by means of a rod to which the 
damper is secured, the rod being journaled 
at each side of the furnace and at one end 
being extended and being provided outside 
the furnace with a handle, whereby the dam 
per may be swung through a quarter of a 
revolution in order to dump the ashes which 
may have collected thereon into the ash-pit. 
Fig. 7 shows another modified form which 
in place of the damper 55, employed in the 
form previously described, employs a slide 
damper, which is shown in plan view at Fig. 
S, and which is composed of a stationary slot 
ted plate secured between the brickwork at 
the rear of the furnace and the lower rear 
edge of the support 13 and a correspondingly 
slotted sliding part provided with a handle 
56, which projects to the outside of the fur 
nace, so that the damper-slide may be recip 
rocated in order to allow the ashes thereon 
to drop through to the ash-pit. 
I prefer to make the upper grate-tubes 3 of 
smaller diameter than the lower grate-tubes 
9, without, however, increasing the number, 
the axis of each upper grate-tube being pref 
erably, though not essentially, in the same 
vertical plane as one of the lower grate-tubes, 
thereby giving a wider opening between the 
peripheries of the upper tubes than between 
the lower tubes. By this construction the 
coarser pieces of fuel will remain on the up 
per grate until reduced by burning, while the 
finer pieces will fall through the openings 
onto the lower grate. 
In the modification shown in Figs. 10 to 13 
I have shown my invention as applied to a 
boiler having no internal fire-box, the fur 
nace being entirely outside of the boiler. 
The upper and lower grate-tubes are connect 
ed with the radial connections 31 in similar 
way to that already described for connecting 
the grate-tubes with the radial connections 
30. In the former case, however, the con 
nections 30, being within the boiler, radiated 
outwardly, while in the modified form shown 
in Figs. 10 to 13 the connections 31 radiate 
inwardly, passing through the shell E and 
connecting with the water-space of the boiler. 
The water-box consists of the upright portion 
F, leading into the boiler, and two horizon 
tal portions FF, one upper and lower, into 
which, respectively, the upper and lower 
grate-tubes enter. 
A modified form of the damper 55, pre 
viously described, is employed in Fig. 10, con 
sisting of a slide 71, operated by a handled 
rod 72 from the front of the furnace. 
In the modification shown in Figs. 14 and 
15 the upright connections 35, which corre 
spond with the connections 30, Fig. 1, are en 
tered directly into the tubes 36. 
What I claim is 
1. A boiler-furnace having an upper water 
grate composed of a series of tubes connected 
at their rear ends with the water-space of the 
boiler by independent connections for the re 
spective tubes, a water-box or manifold with 
which the front ends of said grate-tubes are 
connected, a lower water-grate composed of 
a series of tubes connected at their front 
ends with a water-box or manifold, a series 
of vertical connections whereby the rear ends 
of the said lower grate-tubes are connected 
with the Water-space of the boiler, and Sup 
ply-pipes connecting said water-box or mani 
fold with the water-space of the boiler, said 
upper series of tubes being of smaller diame 
ter than the lower series, and with wider 
spaces between their peripheries than the 
lower series substantially as set forth. 
2. Aboiler-furnace having an upper water 
grate composed of a series of tubes connected 
at their rear ends with the water-space of the 
3 5 
45 
55 
65 
75 
9 O 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
576,686 
boiler by independent collections for the re 
spective tubes, a water-box or manifold with 
which the front ends of said grate-tubes are 
connected, a lower water-grate composed of 
a Series of tubes connected at their front 
ends with the said manifold, a series of ver 
tical connections whereby the rear ends of the 
said lower grate-tubes are connected with the 
boiler connections of the upper grate-tubes, 
and supply-pipes connecting said water-box 
ormanifold with the water-space of the boiler, 
said upper series of tubes being of smaller 
diameter than the lower series, and with wider 
spaces between their peripheries than the 
lower series substantially as set forth. 
3. A boiler-furnace having upper and lower 
water-grates and suitable connections there 
for with the water-space of the boiler, and 
having a movable closure device located at 
the rear of the lower water-grate tubes for 
closing the space between the rear ends of 
said lower water-grate tubes and the adjacent 
surface of the furnace-chamber, whereby the 
draft of the lower grate is prevented from 
passing below and behind said grate and is 
caused to pass upwardly through the same, 
said closure device being made movable in 
order to permit of cleaning behind the same. 
substantially as set forth. 
4. A boiler-furnace having an upper and a 
lower series of tubular water-grates, the up 
per series being of Smaller diameter than the 
lower series, and with wider space between 
their peripheries than the lower series, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
5. A boiler-furnace having an upper and a 
lower series of tubular water-grates, the in 
tervals between the axes of the upper grate 
tubes being the same as the intervals between 
the axes of the lower grate-tubes, and the di 
ameter of the upper grates being less than 
the diameter of the lower grate-tubes, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. A boiler-furnace having an upper water 
grate composed of a series of tubes connected 
at their rear ends with the water-space of the 
boiler by independent connections for the re 
spective tubes, a water-box or manifold with 
which the front ends of said grate-tubes are 
connected, a lower water-grate composed of 
a series of tubes connected at their front 
ends with the said manifold, a series of up- - 
right connections whereby the rear ends of 
the said lower grate-tubes are connected with 
the boiler connections of the upper grate 
tubes, and Supply-pipes connecting said wa 
ter-box or manifold with the Water-space of 
the boiler, the intervals between the axes of 
the upper grate being the same as the inter 
vals between the axes of the lower grate-tubes, 
and the diameter of the upper grate-tubes be 
ing less than the diameter of the lower grate 
tubes, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
EDWARD. B. PARKHURST. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. A. COPELAND, 
ROBERT WALLACE. 
O 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576786.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 576,786. 
 
J. J. KENNELLY. 
FARE REGISTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 576,786. 
J. J. KENNELLY. 
FARE REGISTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
77 % % 
  
NSNYa2 
w it 3 is H 
32 IZ2 % 22.2% 
Muza. TS Notal C 
2. 
NN's S 
SSSSSSYasayas a 
 
Fig. se 
- 
 
 
     
2 
224 ZO 
%Exays 
SS 
E2c 
% %. It 
S. 
% 
R22L2 
2, 67 222 
Z% %22z LIZ 
P 
- - 
g- 
- 
- 
 
  
 
  
 
 
irl2. P 
20 aw El 
HNNNNNNNNSE" 
TN 
7"unwynwy - is 
I-III YWY. 
EPIDI 
H 
itvooooo. 
/S)011 U. 
1. 
the Norris PEFERS co. PHOTo-tltho. Washington. ... c. 
Az 
77. vendly, 
341.uo-1-1 to: 
45-6-6-4t, 
&letovic- r 
(No Model.) 
J. J. KENNELLY. 
FARE REGISTER, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 576,786. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
 
   
NS 
H s 
H Pl 
 
35 
 
Z9 
zWZZA. illili ll 
3 H.H. 
O. 2 sit 
 
 
Z 
t 5. Z. 
n Ya 
N 
- - - - 
7. //(ert rvelty, 
3vvue-vitov, 
(No Model.) 
J. J. KENNELLY 
FARE REGISTER, 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 576,786. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
7 is 0. 
/ar 
 
 
::::::::::::::::::45 it 
Illi 
2iSir 
ld 
Mult IILETETILIHETI 
- - 
t 
"In". s 
EBIII 
IEEEIHEIII 
- 
AIIII 
I 
a 
 
9 
/.../Mrinelly 
344-uov to ; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN J. KENNELLY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FARE-REGISTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,786, dated February 9, 1897. 
Application filed May 25, 1896, Serial No. 592,951 (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it Tinctly concern,' 
Be it known that I, JOHN J. KENNELLY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, in the county of New York and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Fare-Registers; and 
I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw. 
ings, and to the figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to that class or style 
of register's commonly known as dial-regis 
ters, in which a hand moving over a num 
bered dial Orface indicates the number of fares 
taken during a trip; and the objects are to im 
prove and simplify the construction, to reduce 
the number of parts, and to provide a regis 
ter which shall be reliable in operation and 
not liable to get out of order. 
To these ends the invention comprehends 
the Construction, arrangement, and combina 
tions of parts hereinafter fully described, and 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate my invention and form a part of this 
specification, Figure 1 represents a front or 
face view of the register; Fig. 2, 
a front ele 
ration with the dial and the hand or pointer 
l'enloved; Fig. 3, a front view of the base 
plate with a portion of the operating mech 
anism; Fig. 4, a transverse section on the line 
b b of Fig. 3; Fig. 5, a vertical section on 
the line C C of Fig. 3; Fig. 6, a side view of 
the base-plate and the operating mechan 
ism mounted thereon. Figs. 4, 5, and G show 
the gear - wheel for driving the permanent, 
register, which wheel is omitted from Fig. 3. 
lFig. 7 represents a transverse section on the 
line cl d of Fig. 2, the main gear-wheel and 
the ratchet-wheel being, however, shown in 
elevation. Fig. S is a rear or under side view 
of the ratchet-wheel; Fig. 9, a view of the de 
vices for locking the permanent register while 
the trip-register is being reset to zero, the 
view being taken on the line ee of Fig. 2, 
looking in the direction of the arrow. Fig. 10 
is a face view of the base or block which sup 
ports the register in operative position, show 
a 
ing the means for actuating the register; and 
Fig. 11 shows the direction-indicator in end 
view with means and connections for turn 
ing the same in the operation of resetting the 
trip-register to Zero. 
Figs. 10 and 11 are on 
an enlarged scale. Fig. 12 is a horizontal 
section on the line ff, Fig. 9, showing a 
broken view of the means for locking the per 
manent register when the trip-register is dis 
connected. 
Referring to the drawings, I designates the 
base-plate, which forms the back of the reg 
ister case or frame; 2, a rectangular box or 
case, and 3 a front plate, circular in figure 
and overhanging the box or case 2. Prefer 
ably the box 2 and the front plate 3 are cast 
integral, but they may be made separate. The 
parts are bolted together by bolts 4. At the cen 
ter of the base-plate is a hollow boss 5, which 
forms a bearing for the rear end of the shaft 
6, the front end of said shaft having a bear 
ing in a bridge-piece 7, which is mounted on 
the ends of two arms or studs SS, projecting 
forward from the front plate 3. Fast on the 
shaft 6 is a large latchet-wheel 9 and a gear 
wheel 10, these two wheels being preferably, 
but not necessarily, made separate and fas 
tened together by screws 11. A hub 12, hav 
ing a circumferential groove 13, for a purpose 
to be hereinafter explained, projects forward 
from the wheel 10, and on the shaft between 
this hub and the bridge-piece 7 is located a 
spring 14, which constantly presses the shaft 
and its connected wheels back. The shaft 
is, however, capable of being drawn longitu 
dinally forward against the force of said 
spring, the extent of such movement being 
regulated by a set-screw 15, which projects 
through the front plate 3. 
1U designates the dial or face mounted on 
studs or arms 17, projecting forward from the 
plate 3, and 18 is the hand or pointer mounted 
on the front end of shaft 6 and provided with 
a knob or finger-piece 19, whereby the shaft 
is adapted to be drawn forward. 
20 designates an angular lever fulcrumed 
on a stud 21, projecting forward from the 
base-plate1, near one side and toward the top 
thereof. (See Fig. 3.) For the sake of light 
ness and strength. I form this lever, as shown, 
with a connection 22 between the two arms, 
but this is not necessary and may be omitted 
75 
So 
9 O 
ICC 
IO 
25 
30 
35 
 
576, 
86 
IO 
25 
45 
7 o 
85 
9 O 
95 
ICO 
I IC 
I 15 
i? the level be made strong and heavy enough 
to bear the strain to which it is subjected in 
operation. 
The depending arm 20 has a stud 23, which 
projects back through an opening (indicated 
by broken lines in Fig. 3) in the base-plate 
and connects with the actuating mechanism 
shown in Fig. 10, while the horizontal arm 20 
callies a spling-pressed pawl 24, which en 
gages the teeth of ratchet-wheel 9 and turns 
the latter forward step by step when the le 
vel' is vibrated. Stop-lugs 25 26, formed on 
the base-plate on opposite sides of the arm. 
20', limit the movements of the lever, the al 
'angement of said lugs being such that just 
sufficient movement of the level' is permitted 
to advance the ratchet-wheel through an an 
gular distance corresponding with the length 
of one of its teeth. 
As represented in Fig. I, the trip-register 
is adapted to register one hundred fares, and 
therefore the ratchet-wheel is formed with one 
hundred equal teeth, but it will of course be 
understood that the register may have any 
capacity above or below that specified, and 
that whatever the capacity may be the num 
ber of teeth on the wheel') should correspond 
With the scale on the dial. 
27 designates a stop-pawl pivoted on a stud 
28, projecting from the base-plate, said pawl 
being pressed into engagement, with the wheel 
9 by a spring 29. The office of this pawl is to 
prevent backward rotation. 
It has an exten 
sion 27, which rests on a forwardly-project 
ing stud 20, formed on the lower end of the 
arm 20 of lever 20, the arrangement being 
such that when the lever is in normal position, 
as represented in IFig. 3, the pawl is positively 
held against the wheel, but when the lever is 
vibrated toward the left the stud 20, moving 
in the arc of a circle, recedes from the alm 27 
enough to permit the pawl to swing outwald 
against the force of its spring, so as to let the 
next tooth pass. As soon as the tooth has 
passed the pawl springs into engagement, and 
then when the lever returns to normal posi 
tion under the action of a spring 30 it posi 
tively locks the pawl and prevents forward 
as well as backward rotation of the wheel, 
thus preventing the hand ol' pointer from be 
ing advanced surreptitiously or by other 
means than the legitimate operation of the 
registel'. 
A guide Ol' keepel' 31, screwed upon the 
base-plate, overlies the lower end of a 'm 20 
to prevent the same from rising and the pin 
23 from disengaging with the operating mech 
anism. 
As above indicated, the shaft (3 is capable 
of being moved longitudinally forward, car 
lying with it the two wheels 9 and 10, which 
are fast thereola. The range of movement is 
such that the wheel 9 moves beyond the stop 
pawl 27, Whereupon the latter snaps under 
the wheel and prevents its return until the 
pawl is thrown out. This is effected by the 
following means: 
On its uncle' or real face the wice! () is 
formed with a circular ?lange or shoulder 32 
somewhat within the base-lile of the latchet 
teeth, and this flange or shoulder has a sin 
gle tooth 33, which coincides with one of the 
'atchet-teeth of the wheel. The wheel being 
rotated by turning the shaft (3, the tootl 
strikes the point of the pawl and throws it 
out to the limit of its Outward movemel at O1 
until it is arrested by the stud 20, when the 
wheels and shaft, al'e thrown back by the 
spring 14. The object of this construction 
and a 'rangement will appeal' p 1'esently. 
34 designates the permanent ol' total regis 
ter, which, being of ordinary construction, 
l'equires no particular description. This 'eg 
ister operates synchronously with the trip 
register, being driven from the gear-wheel () 
through a pinion 35 on the real' end of a short 
horizontal shaft 36, a level-gear 37 on the 
front old of said shaft, and a secondl bevel 
gear 3S on the shaft, 39, which supports the 
register-wheels. The shaft 36 is mounted in 
a bearing 40, formed or fastened on the front, 
plate 3. The two bevel-gea's 373S aire of the 
same size-that is, they have the same num 
ber of teeth, the number being immaterial 
but the pinion 35, which meshes with the 
gear-wheel 10, has ten teeth, while the said 
gear-wheel has the same number of teeth as 
the latchet-wheel 9, from which it will be un 
derstood that each for Wal'd movement of illn 
pulse of the wheels 910 will tun") the pinion 
35, and consequently the units-wheel of the 
permanent register, which is fast, on its shaft, 
through one length of a rotation. 
In the use of fare-registe's it is customary 
to reset the trip-register to Zero after each 
trip. In this case this is accomplished by 
taking hold of the button 14) and pulling the 
shaft (3 and its connected wheels 5) 10 forward, 
as already fully explained. When the pawl 
27 snaps under the ratchet-wheel 9, it pre 
vents the return of the parts to normal posi 
tion until the slnaft and Wheels have been 
turned forward to complete a full rotation 
and bring the hand 18 to Zei'o. When this 
position is reached, the tooth 33 throws the 
pawl 27 Out, and permits the parts to in Ove 
back to normal position under the influence 
of spring 14, it being understood that the 
tooth 33 is located with reference to the land 
and the pawl to throw the latter out at the 
instant, the Zero position is 'eached. 
The forward movement of shaft (3 callies 
the wheel I () beyond and out of mesh with the 
pinion 35, thus entirely breaking connection 
between the permanent register and the trip 
register. It is necessary that the pel'nanent 
register be locked during the continuance of 
such disconnection, so as to prevent fraudu 
lent operation. This accomplish in the fol 
lowing manner: A blacket, 41, secured on the 
front plate 3, Sustains a pivotetl lever 42, one 
end of which is adapted to be thrown into 
and out of engagement with the teeth of the 
pinion 35. 
The other Gnd of 
(See Fig. 9.) 
 
576,786 
3 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
9 O 
95 
Loo 
I) 
I 1.5 
said lever is bent down and forked, the two 
prongs 42 and 42 extending on opposite sides 
of the gear-wheel 10, which is normally in 
mesh with pinion 35 to actuate the perma 
nent or total register. When the shaft 6 and 
the wheels 9 and 10 are drawn forward, the 
latter disengages from the pinion 35, leaving 
the permanent register entirely disconnected 
from any driving or actuating mechanism. 
The same movement of the wheel that dis 
connects it with the pinion rocks the lever 
42 and throws its free end into engagement 
With the teeth of the pinion to lock the latter 
and positively prevent, the permanent regis 
tel' from being operated. The two positions 
of the wheel and lever are indicated in Fig. 
9 by broken lines acy, a being the normal or 
operative and if the disconnected or inopera 
tive position. 
43 designates the direction-indicator. This 
consists of a block square in cross-section and 
of Sufficient length to bear on its faces the 
legends to indicate the direction in which the 
car is moving. It is mounted on an axis 44, 
Which is journaled in ears 45 45, projecting 
Out from the front plate 3. One end of the axis 
44 projects through the ear 45, and is pro 
vided outside of the same with a four-toothed 
Wheel 46, shaped substantially as shown in 
Fig. 11. A Swinging spring-pressed arm 47, 
mounted in the same plane with the wheel 46, 
bears against the back of the wheel 46, the air 
rangement being Such that when the indicator 
is free to turn the swinging arm will move 
it and the Wheel 46 from the position indicated 
by full lines to that indicated by broken lines. 
At the opposite side of said wheel is a vibrat 
ing arm 4S, pivoted to an ear 49, which also 
projects from the plate 3. One end of this arm 
carries a laterally-projecting pin 50, which ex 
tends into the groove 13 in hub 12. The other 
end of the arm extends close to the wheel 46, 
the arrangement being such that when the 
parts are in normal or operative position 
(shown in full lines in Fig. 11) the arm 48 
prevents the wheel 46 from rotating. When, 
however, the shaft 6 is pulled forward pre 
paratory to resetting the trip-register to Zero, 
the arm 48 swings to the position indicated 
by broken lines, releasing the wheel 46 and 
permitting it and the direction-indicator to 
make a partial rotation under the influence 
of the Swinging arm 47. This partial rotation 
having been effected a tooth of wheel 46 stands 
in the path of arm 4S, which, on the return of 
the shaft (5 to normal position when the reg 
ister has been reset, strikes said tooth and 
carries it forward to complete a quarter-rota 
tion of the wheel and indicator, bringing the 
next face of the latter to view through the 
glazed sight- opening 51 in the dial and so 
changing the indication. 
52 designates the bell, which is mounted on 
a post Ol' Standard 53, projecting forward from 
the front plate 3, and 54 is the bell-hammer. 
The arm of the hammer comprises an elbow 
lever 55 and a resilient rod or extension 56. 
A spring 57, applied to one arm of the elbow 
lever, throws the hammer toward the bell, the 
movement being limited by a stop, which in 
this instance is shown as the ear on which the 
swinging arm 47 is pivoted, said stop being 
so arranged as to arrest the hammer just be 
fore it strikes the bell. The stroke is com 
pleted by momentum, and the hammer is in 
stantly retracted by the resiliency of its arm 
56, leaving the bell perfectly free and unob 
structed. 
The vertical arm of the elbow-lever 55 has 
at its end a laterally-projecting lug 58, and 
the pawl 24 has a forwardly-extending arm 
59, which in the normal position of the parts 
stands just above the lug 58, the adjacent 
vertical faces of these two members standing 
approximately in the same plane. When the 
register is operated, the pawl 24 moves down 
ward to rotate the wheel 9, carrying the arm 
59 opposite the lug 58. On the return of the 
pawl to normal position the arm 59 is thrown 
toward the left by reason of the point of the 
pawl riding over the next tooth of wheel 9, 
whereby the elbow-lever 55 is rocked on its 
pivot and the hammer is retracted. As soon 
the arm 59 passes the lug 58 or as soon as the 
point of the pawl 24 passes the tooth on which 
it is riding and drops behind the same the 
hammer is free to respond to its Spring 57 and 
is thrown forward to strike the bell. 
An important feature of my invention is a 
provision for preventing operation of the trip 
register or ringing of the bell while the trip 
and permanent registers are disconnected. 
This provision comprises a brake arranged 
and adapted to act on the ratchet-wheel 9 in 
the following manner: On the arm 20 of the 
lever 20 is formed a lug 60, and on this lug is 
a plate G1. The plate projects inward over 
the lug, and the arrangement is such that 
when shaft 6 and the wheels 9 and 10 ai'e 
pulled forward preparatory to resetting the 
plate will be in the same plane with the wheel 
9 and in close proximity thereto. (See Figs. 
3 and 4.) If now an attempt be made to op 
erate the register, the plate will be drawn 
against the teeth of the wheel and will not 
only serve as a stop for the operating mech 
anism, but will also act as a brake to prevent 
the wheel from rotating. The drawings show 
the edge of the plate as being plain, but if 
preferred it may be formed with teeth to en 
gage those of wheel 9 and positively lock the 
latter. 
62 designates the block, which is to be per 
manently attached at Some conspicuous place 
within the car or other vehicle on which the 
register is to be used, screw-holes 63 being 
shown for this purpose. Near the top of the 
block is a hook-stud 64, upon which the reg 
ister is hung, the base-plate 1 being provided 
with a hole 65 to receive said stud, and near 
the bottom of the block is a staple 66, which 
enters an eye 67, formed in a projection at 
the lower edge of the base-plate 1. This sta 
ple is intended to receive the hasp of a lock 
 
E. 
576, 
786 
O 
3 5 
40 
55 
ol' othel locking device for Seculing the leg 
ister in place. 
The block (32 is recessed on its face, as rep 
resented at (3S, and in this recess is secured 
a plate (39, provided toward its ends with two 
studs 7071, on which are mounted two level's 
72 73 of the first and second orders, respec 
tively, provided at their lower ends with coup 
ling-pieces 74, whereby they are adapted to 
be connected with the ordinary operating 
lever, rod, or strap. To the upper end of the 
level 2 is pivoted a push-plate 75, notched 
or slotted at its free end, and to the lever 73 
is pivoted a plate 76, having an elongated 
eye 77 at its free end. The two plates 75 76 
overlap each other and are both coupled with 
the pin 23, which projects back from the le 
ver 20. The two levers 7273 are arranged to 
Swing Outward, as indicated by the arrows, 
and both operate through their connections 
in the same direction, the first pushing the 
in 23 and the other pulling it toward the left. 
Under this arrangement the two level's act 
entirely independently of each other, and 
either is adapted to be operated without mov 
ing or disturbing the other. 
7S 79 ale guide-lugs formed on the plate (3), 
and SOS1 are stop-lugs to limit the inward 
movements of the levers. 
An expanding-spring S2, applied to the level 
and a contracting-spring S3, applied to 
o a 
lever 73, hold the said levers in normal posi 
tion against their stop-lugs or restore them. 
to such position after operation. 
IIaving now described my invention, I 
claim 
1. In a legister the combination of a ratchet 
wheel movable back and forth in the direc 
tion of the length of its axis, means for driv 
illg the Same, a Spring-pressed pawl fol' pre 
venting back rotation, said pawl being adapt 
ed to pass behind the teeth of the wheel when 
the lattel' is moved forward, and a tooth or 
projection on the back of the wheel to throw 
the pawl out from behind the same. 
2. In a register the combination of a ratchet 
Wheel innovable back and forth in the direc 
tion of the length of its axis, means for driv 
ing the same, a spring-pressed pawl normally 
in engagement with the teeth of the wheel to 
prevent back rotation, said pawl being adapt 
ed to pass behind the teeth of the wheel when 
the lattel' is moved forward, a tooth or pro 
jection on the back of the wheel to throw the 
pawl Out, and a Spring to throw the Wheel 
back automatically when the pawl is thrown 
out from behind the same. 
3. In a dial-register the combination. With 
the central shaft or spindle movable back and 
forth in the direction of its length, the hand 
or pointel', and a ratchet-wheel fast thereon, 
of a Swinging Ol' vibrating lever, a pawl 
thereon for driving the ratchet-wheel, a sec 
Ond pawl moulted on a stationary pivot to 
prevent back rotation, and arranged and 
adapted to pass behind the wheel when the 
latter is moved forward, a spring acting on 
said second pawl to hold it in action, a tooth 
or projection on the back of the wheel to 
throw the pawl out from behind the same on 
the completion of a full rotation, and il Spring 
for automatically returning the wheel to nor 
mal position when the pawl is thrown Out, 
from behind the same. 
4. In a dial-register the combination with 
the central shaft or spindle and a ratchet 
wheel fast thereon formed with an offset, or 
shoulder on the back thereof within the base 
line of the teeth, said shaft and wheel mov 
able back and forth in the di'ection of the 
length of the axis, means for driving the 
atchet-wheel, a pawl for preventing back 
rotation adapted to pass behind the teeth of 
the wheel when the latter is moved forward, 
a spring to hold the pawl in action, a single 
tooth or projection on said shoulder Ol' offset 
to throw the pawl out from belhind the Wheel on 
the completion of a rotation, and a spring 
for returning the shaft and ratchet-wheel to 
normal position when the pawl is thrown out 
from behind the wheel. 
5. In a fare-register the combination of a 
permanent or total register comprehending a 
pinion, and a dial trip-register comprehend 
ing a central shaft movable back and forth 
in the direction of its length, a geal-Wheel 
fast thereon normally ill mesh with Said 
pinion to drive the same, the connection be 
tween said gear and pinion being broken by 
the movement of the gear-wheel in One direc 
tion, and a level connected with, and Operated 
by the gear-wheel to lock the pinion when 
the connection is broken, Substantially as 
shown and described. 
6. The combination of a dial trip-legister 
comprehending a driven gear-wheel movable 
in the direction of the length of its axis, a 
permanent or total register comprehending a 
pinion driven by said gear-wheel, the connec 
tion between said pinion and gear-wheel be 
ing broken by the movement of the latter in 
one direction, and a pivoted level having a 
fork at one end in which the gear-wheel runs, 
its opposite end being arranged and adapted 
to be thrown into engagement with the teeth 
of the pinion when the connection between 
the gear-wheel and pinion is broken, and out 
of engagement when said connection is re 
Stored. 
7. In a register the combination of a ratchet 
wheel, an operating-lever and pawl for rotat 
ing the same, a stop-pawl for preventing back 
rotation, and a connection between said op 
erating-lever and pawl to lold the lattel' 
against the wheel and prevent forward rota 
tion when the level is in normal or retracted 
position. 
S. The combination of a rotatable direction 
indicator, a pivoted arm standing normally 
in position to prevent rotation of the indical 
tor, a Swinging spring-pressed arm arranged 
and adapted to partially rotate the indicator 
When released, and a longitudinally movable 
and rotatable shaft, comprising a part of the 
7 O 
90 
OO 
I O 
13 O 
 
576,786 
5 
IO 
15 
45 
So 
legistering mechanism, connected with said 
pivoted arm and operating by its longitudi 
nal movements to throw the arm into and 
Out of engagement with the direction-indica 
tor and to turn the latter to a new indicating 
position on the return of the shaft to normal 
position. 
9. The combination of a rotatable direction 
indicatorrectangular in cross-section, a four 
toothed wheel fixed on the projecting axis 
thereof, a Swinging spring-pressed arm ar 
ranged to act upon one of the teeth of said 
wheel to partially rotate the same when free, 
alongitudinally-movable shaft comprising a 
part of the registering mechanism, and a vil 
brating arm pivoted between the four-toothed 
wheel and the shaft and coupled with the lat 
ter, the said arm acting to lock and unlock 
the said wheel when the shaft is moved back 
and forth and change the position of the 
wheel and indicator on the return of the shaft, 
to normal position. 
10. In a register of the character described, 
the colmbination of a rotatable shaft compris 
ing a part of the registering mechanism, the 
Same being movable back and forth in the 
direction of its length, a ratchet-wheel fast 
on Said shaft, a vibrating lever and a pawl 
thereon for rotating the ratchet-wheel and its 
shaft, and a brake mounted on said lever to 
act upon the ratchet-wheel when the latter is 
out of normal position. 
11. In a register of the character described, 
the combination of a rotatable shaft compris 
ing a part of the registering mechanism, the 
Same being movable back and forth in the 
direction of its length, a ratchet-wheel fast 
On Said shaft, a vibrating lever and a pawl 
thereon for rotating the ratchet-wheel and its 
shaft, a lug on the lever, and a plate mounted 
On the lug and Overhanging the same on the 
side toward the ratchet-wheel, the arrange 
ment being such that when the shaft and 
wheel are moved out of normal position the 
Wheel will be in the same plane with said 
plate, the latter then serving as a stop to pre 
Vent Operative vibration of the lever and as 
a brake to prevent rotation of the ratchet 
wheel and its shaft. 
12. In a register of the character described, 
the combination of a dial trip-register includ 
ing a rotatable shaft or spindle, a ratchet 
wheel fast thereon, a vibrating lever and a 
pawl thereon for rotating the said wheel and 
shaft, a permanent or total register geared 
with, and operated from, the trip-register, a 
separable connection between the permanent 
and the trip registers, and a projection. On 
the vibrating lever of the trip-register ar 
ranged to impinge against said ratchet-wheel 
to prevent operative movement of the lever, 
and to brake the wheel while the two regis 
tering mechanisms are disconnected. 
13. The combination with a register compre 
hending a reciprocating mechanism through 
which it is operated, of an operating mech 
anism comprehending two levers arranged to 
move actively in opposite directions and to 
operate in the same direction, and conneC 
tions between said levers and the reciprocat 
ing mechanism of the register adapted to per 
mit the latter to be operated by either of said 
levers independently of, and without mov 
ing, the other. 
14. The combination with a register compre 
hending a reciprocating mechanism through 
which it is operated, of an operating mech 
anism comprehending a lever of the first Or 
der and a lever of the second order, the han 
dle ends of both levers standing in the same 
direction substantially parallel to each other, 
and connections between said levers and the 
reciprocating mechanism of the register 
adapted to permit the latter to be operated 
by either of said operating-levers independ 
ently of, and without moving the other. 
15. The combination of the base-block pro 
vided with means for holding a register, two 
levers 7273, fulcrumed thereon at opposite 
sides of a vertical central line, stop-lugs and 
springs for holding the handle ends of said 
levers normally in substantially vertical po 
sition, one lever having a push-bar pivoted 
thereto above its fulcrum to act on a nOV 
able projection of the register and the other 
lever having a link pivoted thereto below its 
fulcrum, said link having an elongated eye 
for the reception of said movable projection 
of the register, whereby the register is adapted 
to be operated by either of said levers with 
out moving the other. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN J. KENNELLY. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN H. WELCH, 
JOHN B. BENTON, 
55 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576886.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 576,886. 
H. PERK, 
COMBINED SLICER AND GRATER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897, 
28i-t-lossos 
?724 
S. y 7. as &bove: 
7/e7-72-acy7727 e7%. 
%. 
z -6-1. 
The Norris Peters co. Photo-LTHO. wash NGTON, c 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 576,886. 
 
H. PERK, 
00MBINED SIICER AND GRATER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
s 
2. 
. 
h 
 
53 22 as & 
&as elbowie's, 
-246-27 arrzerze. 
2 
--- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIER MAN N PERK OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOUR I. 
coMBINED Slic ER AND GRATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,886, dated February 9, 1897. 
Application filed February 20, 1895, Serial No. 539,044, No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
To (t// it'? oil, it in u(t1/ CO7 cell. 
Be it known that I, HERMANN PERK, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at St. Louis, 
State of Missouri, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in a Combined 
Slicer and Grater, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part hereof. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in combined slicers and graters; and it con 
sists in the novel arrangement and combina 
tion of parts more fully set forth in the speci 
fication, and pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a front eleva 
tion of my device with a portion of the front 
removable plate broken away. Fig. 2 is a 
vertical section on the line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a rear view of One end of the front remov 
able plate, which is adjacent to the open end 
of the grater-cylinder. Fig. 4 is an end view 
of the same. Fig. 5 is a top plan view of the 
machine. Fig. 6 is a top plan view of a por 
tion of the grater plate or cylinder. 
Fig. 7. 
is a section through the teeth thereof, taken 
On 27 y of Fig. 6. Fig. 8 is a view of a portion 
of the rear wall of the grater-cylinder, show 
ing the manner of securing the cutting knives 
or blades thereto. 
Fig. 9 is an end view 
thereof. Fig. 10 is a vertical section on 2 2. 
of Fig. S; and Fig. 11 is a diagrammatic view 
showing the disposition of the rows of teeth 
on the grater-plate when unfolded. 
The object of my invention is to construct 
a combined slicer and grater in a single ma 
chine which shall be compact, simple, dura 
ble, and have a maximum capacity for the 
number of parts employed. To this end I 
have devised a machine which in detail can 
be described as follows: 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents a 
frame provided with legs 2, to which the sev 
eral operative parts are secured and within 
which they are mounted. Within the frame 
is centrally mounted an open cylindrical re 
Volving grater 3, the said grater being secured 
to a shaft 4 by means of a binding-screw 5 in 
the tubular collar 6, forming a part of the rear 
Wall 7 of the grater, through which collar the 
shaft 4 passes, the reduced rear end of the 
shaft having a bearing in the rear wall 8 of 
the frame and held in place by the expanded 
m 
f 
... 
" 
head 9 at the outer end thereof. The front 
end of the shaft 4 has a bearing in an upper 
longitudinal bar 10, the projecting front end 
of the shaft carrying a pinion 11, which 
meshes with a gear-wheel 12 on a shaft 13, 
operated by a handle 14, which shaft 13 finds 
a suitable mounting in the inwardly-extended 
bearing 15, forming a part of or cast with the 
bar 10. 
The grating-plate of the grater 3 is secured 
at its closed end directly to an inwardly-pro 
jecting flange 16, forming a part of the Wall 
7 of the grater, the free open end of the 
grating-plate having a terminal peripheral 
turned-up edge 17, which construction acts 
to stiffen the grater-plate when pressure of 
the article to be grated is brought to bear 
upon its surface. The gratings from the 
grater-cylinder escape or drop from the mouth 
18, formed by the outwardly-inclined wall of 
a detachable front plate 19, forming the front 
wall of the frame. 
The plate 19 has terminal walls 20, which 
have outwardly-extended folded portions or 
wings 21, from which suitable inwardly-pro 
jecting lips 22 are punched, the said lips be 
ing adapted to pass over the inwardly-turned 
ledges 23 of the frame and thus hold the plate 
19 temporarily in place on the frame. The 
upper edge of the plate 19, too, is held by the 
downwardly-projecting lugs or ears 24, formed 
or cast with the bar 10, the latter being suit 
ably cut away on either side of each lug 24, 
as best seen in Fig. 1. The upper edge of the 
plate 19 is first passed under the lugs, when 
the lips 22 at the lower end will be in posi 
tion to be passed over the ledges 23, after 
which the plate can be firmly secured by 
pulling down on the plate and allowing the lips 
to fairly embrace the ledges 23, by which the 
plate is supported. 
The rear wall of the grater is provided with 
a series of radially - arranged rectangular 
openings or slots 25, at the opposite terminal 
edges of each of which is formed an out 
wardly-inclined ridge 26, so that when the 
cutting knives or blades 27, forming the slicer, 
are superposed over the openings the said 
blades will be inclined outward, as best seen 
in Fig. 9, the said blades being secured by 
means of screws 28 to the ridges. With the 
rear wall 8 of the frame are integrally cast a 
55 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
c. C. 
45 
 
e 
576,886 
Suitably-inclined pocket 28 for slicing cul 
cumbers, and other pockets 29 for beans and 
like vegetables, the open rear ends of the 
Several pockets leading directly to the series 
of revolving blades secured to the rear wall 
of the grater-cylinder. Each grater-tooth, as 
best seen in Fig. 7, is composed of three mem 
bers, two large members 3031 and a reduced 
member 32, and, as best seen in Fig. 6, the 
plate is so punctured that the members 30 
and 31 remain contiguous to one another, 
whereas the member 32 recedes from the other 
tWO, SO that when the opening between the 
members is viewed in plan it will be substan 
tially a triangular one, as shown by 33 in Fig. 
6. This form of tooth and the opening re 
suiting, therefrom is the only one, so far as I 
am aware, which will not clog and which can 
be readily cleaned. To the top of the frame 
at one end thereof is hinged the hood 34, 
which is adapted to close over the grater-cyl 
inder and have its opposite end secured or 
fastened by the spring plate or latch 35 snap 
ping over the lug 36, forming part of the hood. 
The hood carries a hopper 37 for introducing 
the necessary vegetable to be grated, such 
as a potato, horse-radish, and the like. 
As best seen from Figs. 6 and 11, the rows 
of teeth of the grater are inclined to the outer 
parallel edges of the grater-plate, so that 
when the latter is folded or bent into the cy 
lindrical position a number or series of spiral 
rows of teeth will be formed. Fig. 11 is a 
diagrammatic view showing the general dis 
position of the several rows of teeth forming 
the grater-surface. The view shows the cy 
lindrical plate laid open. 
It will be seen that there is a short row of 
teeth located at the opposite diagonal ends 
of the plate, the row at each end having its 
beginning at a point about one-third along 
the length of the plate. There is a second 
row having its beginning at a point about 
two-thirds the length of the plate. There is 
a third row having its point of beginning at 
There are then inter 
the end of the plate. 
mediate rows running the full length of the 
plate. All the rows are symmetrically dis 
posed about the medial longitudinal line of 
the plate, or about the middle rows extend 
o 
25 
35 
Ao 
45 
So 
55 
7 O 
75 
ing the full length of the plate and are in 
clined to the opposite parallel edges of the 
plate, and when the latter is bent into the cy 
lindrical form there will be formed three se 
ries of spiral rows, each having a distinct 
point of beginning and ending, the place of 
beginning for one row being in advance of 
the place of beginning of each succeeding 
row. In bending the plate into the cylinder 
form the point C is brought opposite the 
point Ct', the point b is brought opposite the 
point b', and the remaining rows accordingly, 
thus making the several rows continuous 
across the meeting edges of the plate. By 
this construction the teeth sweep back and 
forth over the Surface of the article to be . 
grated, grating every portion of it without 
leaving any portion ungrated, as would be 
the case were the rows simply arranged at an 
incline and without the consecutive spiral 
arrangement here described. The machine 
can be clamped to a table by a securing-clamp, 
as best seen in Fig. 1. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a combined slicer and grater, a suit 
able frame, a rear Wall for the same, a bar 
secured along the front portion of the frame, 
a series of lugs or ears depending therefrom, 
inwardly-projecting ledges on opposite sides 
of the bottom of the frame, an outwardly 
inclined plate, having terminal Walls, Wings 
forming a part of said walls, and inwardly 
punched lips on said Wings adapted to em 
brace the ledges upon insertion of the upper 
edge of the plate under the lugs of the bar, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a combined slicer and grater, a suit 
able grater-plate, a series of teeth disposed 
thereon, each tooth having two upwardly 
projecting large members, and a third oppo 
sitely-receding small member, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
IIERMANN PERIK. 
Witnesses: 
H. A. UHL, 
E. STAREK. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US576986.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 576,986, 
J. W. STARRITT. 
BIGY GLE BELL. 
Patented Feb. 9, 1897. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
'? AZ 5zzzzyritz h 
( jk 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH WILLIAM STARRITT, OF RICHMOND, VIRGINIA. 
BICYCLE-BELL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 576,986, dated February 9, 1897. 
Application filed November 16, 1895, Serial No. 569,178, (No model.) 
? 
2 ? 
I. ? 
25 
To all Zulfon, it inctly conce712. 
Beit known that I, JOSEPH WILLIAMSTAR 
RITT, a citizen of the United States, and a 
resident of Richmond, county of Henrico, and 
State of Virginia, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Bicycle Alarm 
Bells, of which the following is a specification. 
In the device in which this invention is 
comprised the bell is a vibrating bell, the 
gong is attached to one end of the handle-bar 
of the bicycle, the clapper is actuated by a 
sliding spiring-retracted toothed bar operat 
ing on a pallet attached to the rock-shaft on 
which the clapper is secured, and the said op 
erating mechanism is contained and concealed 
within the handle-bar. 
The invention will first be described in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings, 
forming part of this specification, and will 
then be more specifically pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan of the 
under side of one end of the handle-bar of a 
bicycle provided with the improvement. Fig. 
2 is a section on line 22, Fig. 1, with the pal 
let in elevation. 
The hollow handle-bar, only one end of 
which is shown, is indicated at A. To the 
outer extremity of this end is attached the 
alarm-gong B. The attachment of the gong 
to the handle-bar in this position is effected 
in the present instance by means of a tubul 
lar cylindrical shell C, which may be longi 
tudinally split, as shown, for a portion of its 
length to facilitate its insertion into the hol 
low handle-bar. 
The end of this shell, which 
protrudes beyond the end of the handle-bar, 
has a closed head to which the gong is securely 
fastened, and the sides of this protruding 
portion of the shell are cut away at points c c 
to permit the vibrating clapper to reach and 
contact with the gong. 
In the shell C is mounted the transverse 
rock-shaft D, from which projects the stem 
45 d, upon the outer end of which the clapperd 
is secured. Upon the rock-shaft is also se 
cured the pallet e, provided upon each side 
of the shaft with a pine'. These pins when 
struck by a suitable instrumentality will 
cause the rocking of the shaft and conse 
quently the vibration of the clapper. The 
actuating instrumentality made use of for 
35 
 
7 ? 
this purpose consists of the longitudinally 
sliding bar F, provided with teeth f, which 
engage the pallet-pins e'. The toothed slid 
ing bar is supported within the handle-bar 
in suitable guides. It is pushed in one di 
rection (outwardly) by a knob if on its inner 
end, and it is retracted in the other direction 
by a spring f". The guiding of the bar in its 
longitudinal movement is accomplished by 
providing it upon its opposite longitudinal 
edges with ribs f, which enter, engage, and 
slide in correspondingly-shaped undercut 
guide-grooves formed in guide blocks or bars 
g, attached in suitable position to and within 
the shell C. The retracting-spring f' is at 
tached at one end to a horn or projection f 
on the outer end of the toothed bar F and at 
the other end to a stationary part f in the 
shell C. The toothed bar F, near its inner 
end, makes a right-angled bend at f, at or 
near the point where the enlarged or handle 
part proper of the handle-bar joins the main 
part of that bar and then is again turned 75 
horizontally, passing out through a guide hole 
or slot d, at that point in the handle-bar, and 
thence extending outside of and parallel with 
the handle-bar. Upon this exposed part of 
the toothed baris placed the operating-knob.f. 
The mode of operation of the device is ob 
vious from the foregoing description and re 
Quires no further explanation. 
Having described my improvement and the 
best way now known to me of carrying the 
same into effect, I state in conclusion that I 
do not restrict myself narrowly to the me 
chanical details herein set forth in illustra 
tion of my invention; but 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is as follows: 
1. An alarm-bell for bicycles comprising 
the combination with the hollow handle-bar, 
of a shell C fitted and contained in said bar, 
a gong attached to the outer end or head of 
the shell, a clapper and clapper-actuating 
mechanism mounted in and carried by said 
shell, and a handle forming part of said mech 
anism projecting beyond the shell and 
through the handle-bar in position to be op 
erated by the rider, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of the hollow handle 
bar; the gong upon the end of said bar, the 
rock-shaft the clapper - supporting stem se 
95 
. 
9o 
55 
OO 
2 
576,986 
ating-loal Cingaging Said pallet, Supported in 
suitable guides on said shell, and provided 
with an extension which projects through to 
the exterior of the handle-bar, and is there 
provided with an operating knob or handle; 
and the spring for retracting the toothed op 
erating-bar-substantially as and for the pur 
poses hereinbefore set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 1st day of October, 1895. 
JOSEPII VILILIAIMI STARRITT, 
2 ? 
WWitnesses: 
J. M. POWIERS, 
J. F. LEONARD. 
Culted to Said rock-shaft, and the clapper car 
ried by said stem; the pallet attached to said 
rock-shaft; and the sliding toothed bar, en 
gaging the pallet, supported in guides within 
the handle-bar, and provided with an oper 
ating handle or knob upon the exterior of the 
handle-bar, substantially as hereinbefore set 
forth. 
3. The combination of the hollow handle 
bar; the shell C fitted in said bar; the gong 
attached to the head or outer end of said 
shell; the transverse rock-shaft mounted in 
said shell; the clapper and its supporting 
stem attached to said rock-shaft; the pallet 
secured to said rock-shaft; the toothed oper 
I. ? 
I 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577087.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 577,087. 
A. E. WEON 
CURING IRON. 
Patented Feb. l6, 1897. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW E. VEON, OF BRAINERD, M INNESOTA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO EDWARD W. LYNCH, OF SAME PLACE. 
CURLING-IRON. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 577,087, dated February 16, 1897. 
Application filed May 1, 1896, Serial No. 589,896, (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all w/von, it inctly concei'i: 
Beit known that I, ANDREWE. VEON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Brainerd, 
in the county of Crow Wing and State of Min 
nesota, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Crimping and Curling Irons, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to curling and crimp 
ing hair, and more particularly to crimping 
and curling devices which are heated and 
kept hot during the operation of crimping or 
curling, and has for one of its objects to pro 
vide a crimping and curling iron formed with 
a hollow handle having the crimping or curl 
ing iron formed there with and adapted to rest 
in a vertical position over a lamp. 
Another object of my invention is to pro 
vide a curling-iron formed with a handle 
which will inclose the lamp used in heating it 
and in which it may be fixed for packing in a 
trunk or gripsack when traveling. 
Another object of my invention is to pro 
vide a hollow separable curling - iron or 
crimper having the mandrel portion thereof 
formed in two longitudinal sections, said sec 
tionshinged together at their lower ends and 
provided with a spring to hold the parts in 
contact, said hollow curling-iron filling the 
purpose of a chimney when placed over the 
lamp by which it is heated. 
- 
Still another object of my invention is to 
provide a kit consisting of the several devices 
which may be used in the operation of curl 
ing and crimping hair. One of these devices 
consists of a folding stand or support which 
may be placed around the lamp and used to 
sustain a vessel containing Water to be heated 
over said lamp, the lamp itself forming one 
of the features of my invention used in mak 
ing up a kit for curling and crimping hair. 
These objects I accomplish in the manner 
and by the means hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and pointed out, reference being made 
to the accompanying drawings, in which the 
Same numerals indicate like parts in all the 
figures of the drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of the 
kit, showing the articles of which it is com 
posed. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the lamp 
and curling-iron. Fig. 3 is a top plan view 
of same, and Fig. 4 is an enlarged cross-sec 
tion of the tube on the line acac. 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
cylindrical handle 1, formed of brass or other 
suitable sheet metal and reinforced with a 55 
ring 2 of sheet metal at each of its ends and 
around its outer circumference. Extending 
from the upper end of the inner circumference 
of the cylindrical handle I are uprights 3, 
rigidly placed thereon equidistant from each 6o 
other and converging at their upper ends. 
These pieces 3 form supports for the cylin 
drical curling and crimping iron or tube 4 
and are attached to a collar 6, which sur 
rounds the curling-tube near its lower end. 65 
The form of construction, however, which I 
prefer is the one in which the uprights 3 are 
formed integral with the collar 6 and perma 
nently secured thereon by any suitable means. 
The curling-tube 4 is flared at its lower end to 
and formed bell-shaped for the purpose of 
receiving the flame and heat from the lamp 
5 when the latter is placed thereunder. The 
mandrel portion of this curling or crimping 
tube 4 is longitudinally separable and has 75 
one of its sections hinged to the other section 
thereof at a point near the collar 6, wherein 
it is supported. 
The hinge 7 is made by splitting the tube 
4 and spreading it so as to form brackets or 8o 
knuckles 8, provided with eyes wherein are 
inserted pintles 10, which enter the walls of 
the section of the mandrel hinged thereto. 
The hinged section of the mandrel is formed 
with a tapering arm 11, extending outwardly 85 
therefrom at a right angle and having hinged 
to its end a draw-bar 12, which depends to the 
inner circumference of the handle and has 
fixed thereto the shank of a knob or button 13, 
which passes through a longitudinal slot 14, 9o 
formed in the handle 1. Attached to the end 
of the draw-bar 12 within the handle is a con 
volute or flat spiral pressure-spring 15, formed 
of wire and which rests against the side of 
the handle and has its opposite end perma- 95 
nently fixed thereto. By placing the thumb 
on the upper side of the knob or button and 
pressing it down the sections of the mandrel 
are drawn apart to permit the hair to be 
clasped between said sections when the knob loo 
or button is released, the spring within the 
handle thus forcing the sections together. 
The edges of the walls of the mandrel where 
they join are formed so that one section 
slightly overlaps the edges of the other sec- Io5 
tion. This result is accomplished by cutting 
25 
35 
45 
 
577,08? 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
a Way the inner edges of one Section and the 
outer edges of the section hinged thereto, so 
that the edges correspond With each other. 
The lamp used in heating the curling-tube is 
formed with a cylindrical reservoir 16, of 
slightly less diameter than the handle 1, which 
is placed over the lamp during the operation 
of heating the curling-tube. The lamp-reser 
voir has a cap attached thereto by screw 
threads. From this cap rises a tube 17, hav 
ing a second tube 18 fitted concentrically 
therein, which construction forms a gas or 
vapor generator. The specific construction 
of said lamp will not be further described 
herein, it forming the subject of a separate 
application for Letters Patent, therefor. 
The bottom of the handle is provided with 
a number of horizontally-projected hooks 19, 
formed integral there with and adapted to be 
inserted in slots 20, formed in the flanged base 
21 of the lamp-reservoir, when the hollow 
handle is placed over said reservoir, whereby 
the lamp may be securely held in the handle 
of the curling and crimping device. A cap 
22 is provided for covering the top of the 
lamp-tube and prevents the escape of the al 
cohol which is used in said lamp, though any 
suitable hydrocarbon may be used instead of 
the alcohol, but I prefer the latter, it being 
less likely to Smut the curling-tube. Wood 
alcohol may be used instead of grain-alcohol, 
its cost being about one-half that of the latter. 
A cylindrical cover 9 incloses the curling 
tube and is closely fitted over the upper end 
of the handle thereof. 
A folding stand 23, constructed so that it 
may be extended circumferentially and con 
tracted concentrically, is provided to sup 
port a vessel for heating water when desired 
in connection with the curling or crimping 
of the hair. The construction of this stand 
is such that it may be used for supporting 
either large or small vessels containing water 
over the lamp, and it is folded when not in 
use and placed within the cylindrical cover 
of the curling device. The construction of 
this stand will not be further described herein, 
it forming the subject of a separate applica 
tion for Letters Patent therefor. The handle 
1 may be covered or surrounded with any 
suitable material. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a curling and crimping iron, the com 
bination with a hollow handle, of a tubular 
Curling-iron mounted on said handle, the man 
drel portion of said tube longitudinally di 
vided at its central portion, the end of one 
section hinged to its complemental part near 
the lower end thereof and having an arm pro 
jecting therefrom, a draw-bar connecting with 
Said arm and with means in said handle for 
holding the edges of said mandrel portion 
normally in contact and means for separating 
said hinged section to receive the hair, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
W 
m 
3O 
35 
45 
5 O 
55 
Ou 
2. In a curling and climping iron, the Com 
bination with a hollow handle open at each of 
its ends, of a tube rigidly fixed to said handle 
and rising vertically therefrom and forming 
a chimney for the heating device used there 
with, the mandrel portion of said tube longi 
tudinally divided at the central part thereof 
and one section pivotally Secured to its Com 
plementary portion to form a separable means 
to receive the hair, an arm projecting from 
said pivotally-secured portion below the piv 
otal point thereof, said arm connected by a 
draw-bar to a convolute spring secured in said 
handle whereby said mandrel portions of Said 
tube are held normally in contact and means 
attached to said draw-bar for separating said 
tube to receive the hair, Substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. A curling and crimping iron comprising 
a hollow handle and a tubular maindrel, Said 
mandrel longitudinally divided at the central 
portion to form a separable means to receive 
the hair, one section of said mandrel rigidly 
fixed to said handle and provided with knuc 
kles near its lower end, the complemental Sec 
tion of said mandrel hinged there with by a 
pintle passing through said knuckles, said 
hinged section provided with an arm at its 
lower end having hinged thereto a draw-bar, 
said draw-bar attached at its opposite end to 
a convolute or flat spiral spring secured in 
said handle, whereby the hinged section of 
said mandrel is held normally in contact With 
the fixed portion thereof and means for de 
pressing said draw-bar to separate the sec 
tions of said mandrel, substantially as shown 
and described. 
4. In a curling and crimping iron, the coln 
bination with a hollow handle provided with 
a tubular mandrel rigidly mounted thereon, 
of a lamp removably supported in said han 
dle for heating said mandrel, the bottom of 
the reservoir of said lamp provided With an 
annular flange for supporting said curling and 
crimping iron vertically, said flange provided 
with slots to receive hooks formed on the end 
of said handle and interlock there With Sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
5. In a curling and crimping iron, the com 
bination with a hollow handle provided with 
a tubular mandrel rigidly secured thereon, Of 
a lamp removably supported within said han 
dle for heating said mandrel, the bottom of 
the reservoir of said lamp provided with an 
annular flange for supporting said iron Ver 
tically, said flange being provided with slots 
to receive hooks formed on the end of the 
handle and interlock there with and a COVer 
inclosing said mandrel fitted to the top of said 
handle, substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I hereto affix my sig 
nature in the presence of two Witnesses. 
ANDREW E. W.E.ON. 
Witnesses: 
D. D. SMITH, 
H. J. DAVIS, 
O 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577187.txt	(No Model.) 
A. 
MANUFACTURE OF MANTIES FOR INCANDESCENT GAs BURNERS, 
Patented Feb, 16, 1897, 
No. 577, l87, 
L. HARTMAN, 
s 
SSSSSSS 
00000000 
X00000 
000 
8 SS 
88: 888 
XXXXX 8 8. 8. XXXXXX 
8 & 
SS SS 
0. 8 & & 
  
  
 
  
O 
O 
OOCR 8 &SXXXSS 
SSSSSSSSXXXXSS 
8SSSXSS 
8XXX88S &S 8XXX8& 
S. SS 88 88 XX 
584 e-e elvet Me 
 
THE MORRIS PETERS co, Photo-LITHo, washingtoN. D. c. 
8-vuo-14 to . 
...t. -- 
le al 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEO POLD HARTMAN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
MANUFACTURE OF MANTLES FOR INCANDESCENT GAS-BURNERS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 577,187, dated February 16, 1897. 
Application filed November 11, 1896, Serial No. 611,776. (No model.) 
55 
To all, Luhon, it na7? concer, 
Be it known that I, LEOPOLD HARTMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York city, in the county of New York 
and State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in the Manu 
facture of Mantles for Incandescent Gas 
Burners, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to the manufacture of 
mantles, also known as hoods, for incandes 
cent gas-burners; and its objects are more 
particularly directed to the preservation of 
the mantles in transportation. 
Prior to my invention this object has been 
sought to be attained by coating the mantle 
with various substances of a nature to stiffen 
the article. The mantle thus prepared, how 
ever, has the disadvantage, in consequence of 
its stiffness, of being liable to be crushed and 
destroyed by any careless handling to which 
it may be subjected in transportation. With 
a view to overcome this disadvantage I have 
adopted a substance to be applied to the man 
tle as a preservative, which, while imparting 
to the mantle the required strength to resist 
its breakage in ordinary handling, shall ren 
der the article pliable or elastic, and which 
at the same time may be burned off in the ini 
tial use of the mantle on the lamp. The sub 
stance which I have found best adapted to 
this purpose is a solution of guncotton, pref 
erably in amylacetate, with or without the ad 
dition of a solution of white shellac or other 
Similar gum or gums. 
In carrying out my invention I dissolve the 
guncotton in the amylacetate in the propor 
tion of about four ounces of guncotton to 
one gallon of amylacetate and coat the pre 
viously burned-off and completed mantle with 
this solution, or in lieu of coating the same I 
immerse the mantle therein, the effect being 
to thoroughly impregnate the fibers of the 
structure of the mantle with the solution, and 
due to the elastic or semielastic nature of the 
gun cotton thus employed the mantle is ren 
dered of that condition and thus adapted to 
preserve its shape and integrity in the ordi 
nary handling to which it may be subjected 
in transportation. This guncotton solution 
at the same time is readily burned off from 
the mantle when the latter is applied to use 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
on the desired burner, so that the film of the 
solution constitutes only a temporary ingre 
dient of the mantle. 
In order to permit of regulating the degree 
of elasticity of the mantle thus prepared, I 
have found it expedient to add to the solution 
of guncotton the before-mentioned solution 
of white shellac, and when such is used Igen 
erally follow the proportions of about one 
tenth to one-twentieth part of shellac to one 
part of guncotton. The solvent which Iem 
ploy for the shellac is alcohol or ether, and the 
proportion of this solvent may be as one-tenth 
part of shellac to one part of alcohol or ether. 
It may be here remarked that instead of the 
shellac I may use any other gum or gums, as 
mastic, possessing similar properties, and also 
that the proportions of any or all of the ingre 
dients herein named may be varied without 
departure from my invention. 
In the accompanying drawing I have rep 
resented in side view a mantle or hood em 
bodying my invention, it being composed of 
a network of earthy material, and which by 
the application thereto of my solution is ren 
dered of an elastic character. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In the manufacture of incandescent man 
tles, the step herein described, which consists 
in impregnating the same as a temporary in 
gredient, with a solution of guncotton for 
strengthening and rendering the same elastic, 
as specified. 
2. In the manufacture of incandescent man 
tles, impregnating the same as a temporary 
ingredient, with a solution of guncotton in 
amylacetate, for the purpose specified. 
3. In the manufacture of incandescent man 
tles, impregnating the same as a temporary 
ingredient, with a solution of guncotton and 
a gum, as white shellac, for the purpose speci 
fied. 
4. As a new article of manufacture, an in 
candescent mantle, the body of which is im 
pregnated as a temporary ingredient, with a 
solution of guncotton, substantially as and 
for the purpose herein described. 
LEOPOLD HARTMAN. 
75 
90 
95 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES G. COE, 
CHAs. WAHLERs. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577287.txt	 
(No Model.) 
No. 577,287. 
 
T. F. DEXTER. 
STEAM RADIATOR, 
Patented Feb. 16, 1897, 
 
c? 
SSs?********?***********???????:????????***? 
?} 
Attorney. 
Peters co. Photo. THo. wASHinqTON. o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS F. DEXTER, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
WARREN WEBSTER & COMPANY, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY. 
STEAM-RADATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 577,287, dated February 16, 1897. 
Application filed February 8, 1896, Serial No. 578,495, (No model.) 
55 
? ? 
75 
To all ?ph???, i? ??? ????????: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS F. DEXTER, of 
the city of Boston, county of Suffolk, and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
ment in Steam-Radiators, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention has reference to heating ap 
paratus; and it consists of certain improve 
ments which are fully set forth in the follow 
ing specification and are shown in the accom 
panying drawings, which form a part thereof. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
heater especially adapted to be used in con 
nection with an air- circulating fan which 
shall offer as small resistance as possible to 
the flow of the steam, shall handle the water 
of condensation with facility, and which shall 
be strong in construction. 
My invention comprehends certain struc 
tures in steam heating apparatus especially 
designed to heat a forced draft of air; and it 
consists, essentially, of a series of head-cham 
bers and foot - chambers respectively con 
nected together, the former being supplied 
with steam and the latter arranged to convey 
off the water of condensation, and combined 
therewith II employ a series of angle-pipes 
connected in parallel between the said head 
and foot chambers in such a manner that the 
steam is never required to pass upward, but 
always passes horizontally or downward, and 
thereby prevents any possibility of a clogging 
or retarding action due to the excessive water 
of condensation which naturally results in 
any heating apparatus employing force blast 
or draft. By this construction the water of 
condensation, which may be formed in the 
header, falls quickly past the majority of the 
heating-pipes and escapes from said header to 
the foot-chamber by the shortest of the heat 
ing-pipes and prevents clogging of the longer 
and more useful pipes. 
Myimprovements will be better understood 
by reference to the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of a heat 
ing apparatus, online y y of Fig. 2, embody 
ing my invention. Fig. 2 is a transverse sec 
tion on line ac ac, and Fig. 3 is a plan view of 
A are the foot-chambers, and the heater 
may embody a number of foot-chambers se 
curely fastened together by a bolt c, which 
passes through an enlarged transverse cen 
tral portion thereof, which in the adjacent 
chambers constitutes a continuous passage 
way C between them all and connects with 
the discharge or bleeder pipe L, provided, if 
desired, with a control-valve M. The upper 
walls of these, foot-chambers are perfectly 
horizontal, while the lower walls or floors B 
are slightly inclined to induce a flow of the 
water of condensation toward the center. 
These discharge-chambers, which I designate 
as foot-chambers, may be provided with 
feet A'. 
Arranged above the foot-chambers at a 
considerable elevation are a series of verti 
cal head - chambers D, which connect With 
each other by passage-ways E, corresponding 
in substance with the part C of the foot-cham 
berS. 
The several sections of the head-chambers 
may be connected together by bolts e or in 
any other manner. 
Opening into one end of the passage-way E, 
as shown in Fig. 2, is a steam-supply pipe G, 
provided with a valve H. 
F represents a series of inverted-L-shaped 
pipes screwed into the vertical walls of the 
head-chambers D and also into the horizontal 
walls of the foot-chambers A. In this man 
ner it will be observed that the steam is not 
required to pass upward at any time, but de 
scends from the passage-way Einto the cham 
ber D, thence horizontally into the pipes F, 
thence vertically downward into said pipes, 
and discharges into the foot-chambers A. 
In place of using the inverted-U-shaped 
pipes heretofore required, where the steam 
must flow upward prior to its being able to 
pass downward, I employ two sets of L-shaped 
pipes, which allow the steam to pass in op 
posite directions from the head-chamber D, 
thence downward into the two lateral por 
tions of the foot-chambers A, so as to cause 
the steam to be divided and pass through 
pipes F from opposite sides of the head 
chambers. 
It is of course evident that the pipes F on 
one side of the head - chamber may be dis 
pensed with, if desired, but I prefer the con 
O 
15 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
5o one of the foot-chambers. 
 
9o 
IOO 
Od 
2 
577,287 
?? 
75 
85 
ter of condensation, the entire apparatus be 
struction as shown, as it is more mechanical 
ing exposed to the circulation of the atmos 
and stronger. 
phere. 
To prevent the air being drawn through the 
2. In a heating apparatus, a series of ver 
space between the two central rows of verti 
tical head-chambers bolted together with a 
cal pipes and immediately below the head 
chambers, I arrange pedestals or legs II, Suf 
common communication with the steam-Sup 
ply, in combination with a series of horizon 
ficiently wide to form an obstruction to the 
tal foot-chambers bolted together with a com 
air and at the same time to act as vertical 
mon discharge for discharging Water of con 
supports for the heads upon central portions 
densation and independent of the head-cham 
of the foot-chambers, so that the parts are 
bers, a series of sets of inverted-L-shaped 
held in their proper relative positions before 
pipes having horizontal portions thereof open 
the pipes are secured into place. In practice 
it is only necessary to use two of these ped 
ing into the vertical walls of the head-cham 
bers and vertical portions opening into hori 
estals or legs for the head-chambers, as the 
latter are bolted together, forming an integral 
zontal walls of the foot-chambers, and verti 
cal supports or pedestals for sustaining the 
structure. 
| head-chambers and obstructing the free pas 
I is the chamber or casing inclosing the 
sage of air below said head-chambers upon the 
heating apparatus above described, and at 
the rear is made open, as at i, while at the 
foot-chambers. 
3. The combination in a heating apparatus 
front it has an opening i, connected at the 
of vertical head-chamber D, a steam-supply 
center of an exhauster J, which discharges at 
pipe therefor, a horizontal foot-chamber A 
K. In this manner the air is drawn through 
provided with a discharge-pipe, two sets of 
the opening at the rear and required to trav 
inverted-L-shaped tubes F, one set of which 
erse the space between the pipes F under the 
opens from one vertical face of the head 
action of the exhauster, which then delivers 
chamber and the other set of which opens 
the heated air to wherever required. The 
from the opposite face of the said head-cham 
exhauster J performs the dual function of 
ber and the lower ends of which pipes open 
creating a suction of air through the heating 
apparatus and then as a blower for discharg into the upper surface of the foot-chamber, 
and a vertical pedestal or Support arranged 
ing the heated air through the discharge-pipe 
below the head-chamber for supportingit ver 
K to the place to be heated. 
tically upon the foot-chamber but at an angle 
The case I may be of any suitable construc 
tion; and so far as my invention is concerned 
thereto. 
4. The combination in a heating apparatus 
it is evident that said case I and exhauster 
may be dispensed with. 
of a series of vertical head-chambers D open 
ing into each other, combined with a steam 
To increase the capacity of the heater, it is 
only necessary to lengthen the vertical pipes 
supply pipe therefor, a series of horizontal 
F and also the supporting-pedestals H. 
foot-chambers A opening into each other and 
provided with a discharge-pipe, two sets of 
While I prefer the construction shown, I 
inverted-L-shaped tubes F for each head and 
do not confine myself to the minor details 
foot chamber, one set of which opens from 
thereof, as they may be modified without de 
parting from the principle of my invention. 
one vertical face of the head-chamber and the 
other set of which opens from the opposite 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
face of the said head-chamber and the lower 
by Letters Patent, is 
ends of which pipes open into the upper sur 
1. In a heating apparatus the combination 
face of the foot-chamber, an inclosing case 
of a vertical rectangular steam head-chamber, 
having supply and discharge air-apertures 
a horizontal discharge or foot chamber inde 
upon opposite sides of the heads and heating 
pendent of the head-chamber, connecting 
pipes extending laterally from opposite faces 
pipes whereby the air is required to flow over 
the heads and pipes thereof successively, and 
of the head - chamber then downward and 
opening into the discharge or foot chamber 
power devices for creating a forced draft or 
and constituting the only means of commu 
blast of air through the said case and in the 
space between the tubes. 
nication between the head and foot chambers, 
In testimony of which invention I have 
said head and foot chambers and connecting 
pipes being maintained unobstructed by wa 
hereunto set my hand. 
ter, a steam-supply pipe for supplying steam 
to the head-chamber, and a discharge-pipe 
from the discharge or foot chamber having 
no connection with the steam-pipe for the wa 
C. H. CLARK, 
JOHN SMITH, Jr. 
THOMAS F. DEXTER. 
Witnesses: 
95 
OO 
II. ? 
? ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577387.txt	(No Model.) 
L. H. N.A.S.H. 
METER REGISTER. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 577,387. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1897. 
 
  
3N 3S g 1 
/? 2S2S2S22. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
24 
- 
15 
24 S.S.RS23 
2..- 
25Elms 9) A5 
wi. 
 
a-SS 
 
  
SN 
E F 
   
WITNESSES 
/3 
4-4-6-4-4- 
22/22) 7%2. 
 
in Iz 
S33S 
222 
INVENTOR 
'curvaceae/l-4 
94%. 
ARNEYS. 
(No Model.) 
L. H. NASH. 
METER REGISTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
No. 577,387. 
Patented Feb. 16, 1897, 
30 
3.4 s 
WITNESSES: 
& 
BY 
NVENTOR 
ATRNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS HALLOCK NASH, OF SOUTH NORWALK, CONNECTICUT. 
WETER REGISTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 577,887, dated February 16, 1897. 
Application filed April 28, 1896, Serial No. 589,430, (No model.) 
O 
2o all, whon, it may conce772: 
Beit known that I, LEWISHALLOCK NASH, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of South Norwalk, in the county of Fairfield 
and State of Connecticut, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Meter 
Registers, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to registers, and is es 
pecially adapted to the register of a water 
meter, although it might be used for other 
purposes; and it consists of certain novel 
parts and combinations of parts particularly 
pointed out in the claim concluding this 
specification. 
The following is a description of a meter 
register embodying my invention in the forms 
which are at present preferred by me; but it 
will be understood that various modifications 
and changes may be made without departing 
from the spirit of my invention and without 
exceeding the scope of the concluding claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal section through a part of the 
meter-register. Fig. 2 is a top view of the 
registering apparatus removed from the case. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section through the case in 
front of the register. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are 
detail views of driving teeth and pinions. 
The following is a description of the struc 
ture shown in the said drawings. 
Referring to Fig. 3, 10 is the case, provided 
with a cover 11, hinged thereto. 
12 is a plate 
of glass through which the dials may be read. 
13 is the upper part of the case containing 
the meter proper. 14 is a spindle operated 
by the meter-piston. 15 15 are gear-wheels 
connecting the spindle 14 with the shaft 16, 
which carries worm 17. The worm 17 meshes 
with the gear-teeth on the wheel 18, which is 
carried by a shaft 19. 
20, Fig. 1, is an index-wheel which is also 
carried on the shaft 19. 21, 21, 21, and 22 
are similar index-wheels. 23 are two lateral 
Spurs, and 23* are complete spur-gears at 
tached to the sides of the wheels. 24, 24, 24, 
and 26 are pinions mounted on shaft 25. 
These pinions each intermesh with teeth and 
spurs on adjacent wheels in such a manner 
that one wheel is caused to advance one step 
at each complete rotation of its fellow. 
is accomplished by reason of the fact that each 
of the pinions 24 is in driving relation with 
one wheel and driven relation with its fellow. 
It is only driven, however, one step at each 
complete rotation of the driving-wheel, at 
other times remaining at rest. As this con 
struction is now well known in the art, a fuller 
description is deemed unnecessary. 
Referring to Figs. 4, 5, and 6, 30 and 31 are 
pinions. 32 is a gear-wheel, only tWO of the 
teeth being shown. 33 shows in dotted lines 
a tooth in normal relation to the tooth 34. It 
is now a common practice to lay out inter 
meshing teeth, as shown in Fig. 4, by the 
teeth. 30 on the pinion and the teeth 33 and 
34 on the gear-wheel. 
My present invention consists in making 
the spaces between the teeth on the driving 
part greater than on the driven part. The 
object of this improvement is to diminish in 
jurious strains after the teeth become WOrn. 
In Fig. 6 I have shown a pinion-wheel 31 
with the teeth worn, and it will be observed 
that the tooth 33, but not the tooth 34, is in 
driving relation with the pinion. This gives 
rise to a force in the direction of the arrow, 
which, being toward the point of Support, 
tends to bind the wheel and increases friction 
and also to unduly wear the tooth 33. 
Fig. 4 in full lines shows the teeth con 
structed according to my present invention. 
In this position the tooth 34 is doing the Work, 
and the force exerted is in the line of the ar 
row, which is away from the support of the 
pinion. As this tooth is leaving and not en 
tering contact, the friction is at a minimum. 
In Fig. 5 I have shown the wheel 32 in the 
next position, in which the tooth 33 is doing 
the work, the resultant force being in the line 
of the arrow away from the support of the 
pinion. It will therefore be observed that 
the space between the driving-teeth is greater 
than between the teeth being driven, so that 
driving force is exerted between teeth which 
are leaving contact and not between teeth. 
which are approaching contact, (as is usual,) 
and friction is thereby reduced, while inju 
rious strains are avoided after the teeth are 
worn. This results in a somewhat intermit 
tent motion of the driven part; but it will of 
This course be understood that the illustrations 
55 
75 
95 
ICO 
25 
35 
45 
 
s 
577,38? 
5 
IC 
are exaggerated and that in practice a nuch 
Smaller difference between the teeth on the 
tWO parts is permissible. 
In the foregoing specification I have de 
scribed for clearness a complete registering 
device containing my present invention; but 
it will be understood that my invention may 
be embodied in any other desirable form of 
registering device, since my claim is not lim 
ited to these features, but relates solely to the 
form and relation of the gear-feeth on the 
driving and the driven parts. 
in a divisional application filed December 
22, 1896, Serial No. 616,624, I have claimed 
the features of improvement in the register 
ing device herein referred to which are inde 
pendent of the form and relation of the gear 
teeth on the driving and the driven parts, 
and I the lefore male no claim he'ein to such 
features. 
What i Clain is 
in a 1'egistering device the combination in 
cam-geairing of a driving pait consisting of a 
spur-gear and a driven part consisting of a 
spur-pinion, the teeth on the driving part be 
ing farther apart than the teeth on the driven 
part. 
EWS AL, OCX NAS. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN II. NORRIS, 
CHAS. II. SERGEANT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577487.txt	(No Model.) 
J. D., METS 
REVOLUBLE DESK FOR HOTEL REGISTERS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
No. 577,487. 
. 
. Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
J. D. MIETS, 
REVOLUBLE DESK FOR, HOTEL REGISTERS, 
2 Sheets-sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 577,487. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D. METS, OF DUBUQUE, IOWA. 
REVOLUBE DESK FOR HOTEL REGISTERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 577,487, dated February 23, 1897. 
Application filed November 28, 1896, Serial No. 614,387, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To Cu20, whon, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN D. METs, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Dubuque, in 
the county of Dubuque and State of Iowa, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Revoluble Desks for Hotel 
Registers; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
er's skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
The object of my invention is to combine 
a revoluble desk for holding a hotel-register 
and a show - case for displaying advertise 
ments; and it consists in a turn-table to which 
is pivoted a desk which supports the register. 
It further consists in hinging at or near the 
center of the desk a show-case surrounded by 
a frame and within which are placed sheets 
of paper. On one side of which is printed one 
or more advertisements. 
These, with other minor objects, will be 
fully set out and described in the following 
Specification and accompanying drawings, 
forming a part hereof, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the desk with the 
register and show-case thereon. Fig. 2 is an 
end view of the desk and register, thereon 
With show-case in a vertical position. Fig. 3 
is a plan view of the desk with the show-case 
and register removed. Fig. 4 is a plan view 
of one of the glasses of the show-case. Fig. 
5 is a plan view of the show-case. Fig. 6 is 
a plan view of a part of the hinge of the show 
case Which is to be attached to the end of the 
show-case. - Fig. 7 is a plan view of another 
part of the hinge to be attached to the end of 
the desk. Fig. 8 is a cross-section of the 
frame of the show-case. Fig. 9 is a plan view 
of the turn-table, showing the rollers on which 
the desk revolves; and Fig. 10 is a side view 
of the desk with show-case in a vertical posi 
tion and resting on its hinges. 
Likeletters of reference denote correspond 
ing parts in all of the drawings. 
Referring to the drawings, Adesignates the 
turn-table, which consists of a circular frame 
C. and a rigid stay or cross-plate B. In the 
frame a are set a number of rollers b, on which 
the desk, presently to be described, revolves. 
In the center of the cross-stay B is a socket 
d, into which the said desk is pivoted. 
The desk is preferably of an oblong square 
and of about the size of an ordinary hotel 
register when open. Upon each half of the 
upper surface of the desk is fastened a pad 
e, (shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3,) for the 
purpose presently to appear. Over nearly 
all of the upper surface of the desk is secured 
a cloth E, covering the pads e. To each end 
of the desk is fastened one butt F of a hinge, 
which hinge is provided with a slotif, for the 
purpose presently to appear. 
The show - case shown in Fig. 5 is con 
structed of two plates of glass G, beveled at 
their corners g and surrounded by a metal 
frame H, a cross-section of which is shown 
in Fig. 8. Within each end of the frame H 
is secured an arm I of the hinge, having the 
triangular projections h, with which the glass 
comes in contact. The frame is constructed 
of metal channel-bars S, beveled at their ends 
in such a manner that when they are put to 
gether they form a right angle at each of the 
four corners of the frame. The side bars are 
fastened to the triangular projections h, by 
screws S. The end bars are placed over the 
arms I and are also fastened to the projec 
tions h by screwst. (Shown in Fig. 5.) The 
object of this mode of construction is for the 
purpose of adapting the alms to be removed 
for the inserting of the advertising-sheets 
between the glasses. Near the inner end of 
the arm I is a pink, which engages with the 
slot f in the butt F of the hinge. The arm 
I projects a short distance from the frame to 
permit the sheets of the register to be slid be 
neath the frame, and the slot f is of sufficient 
length to allow the show-case to be raised and 
lowered to adapt it to registers of different 
thicknesses. 
Between the two glasses of the show-case 
is inserted two sheets of paper (shown in Figs. 
1 and 5) having on one side of each adver 
tisements in the various spaces L. The 
sheets k'are placed back to back in the show 
case, so as to be readily read through the 
glasses G. 
The register to be used upon this desk may 
be the ordinary hotel-register, but I prefer 
that there be only a few leaves stitched to 
gether at their centers, and these are placed 
upon the desk under the show-case, as shown 
in Fig. 2. 
' 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5.o 
 
95 
IOO 
2 
577,487 
having beveled corners, means for hinging 
said case to a desk consisting of the arms I, 
plates h, and projections k, all combined to 
operate, as and for the purposes shown. 
5. A turn-table with rollers therein, a desk 
pivoted upon said turn-table and adapted to 
travel upon said rollers, a register upon said 
desk and a show-case adjustably hinged to 
said desk and consisting of two plates of glass 
removably secured within a frame with space 
between the glasses, and one or more adver 
tising-sheets between the glass, adapted to be 
read from either side of the show-case, as and 
for the purposes shown. 
6. A device of the character described, a 
turn-table A, with socket d, and rollers b, a 
desk pivoted upon said turn-table, and hav 
ing the pads e, cover E, butts F, a register 
IK, and show-case S, consisting of frame II, 
glass G, advertising-sheetsk' and arms I pro 
jections lic, and plates h, all combined as and 
for the purposes shown. 
7. In a device of the character described, a 
turn-table, a desk pivoted to the turn-table 
with padding upon its upper surface and butt 
F, of hinge attached to opposite ends of the 
desk and a show-case consisting of two plates 
of glass removably set in the frame, with 
space between the glass and provided with 
arms I, and projections k, to engage with the 
butts F, of the desk, all combined to operate 
substantially as described and shown. 
S. In a device of the character described, a 
revoluble desk and a show-case hinged thereto 
having glasses G, with beveled corners g, re 
movably set within a frame, arms I provided 
with plate h, and projections lic, said arms re 
movably secured within said frame, all com 
bined to operate substantially as described 
and shown. 
9. In a device of the character described, a 
turn-table provided with rollers set within 
said table, a desk pivoted upon said turn 
table and provided at its opposite ends with 
half of a hinge and a register in combination 
with a show-case having two plates of glass 
removably set in the frame with a space be 
tween said glasses and with means attached 
to said show-case for engaging with the half 
of the hinge upon the desk, whereby the said 
show-case is removably hinged to the revo 
luble desk, all combined to operate substan 
tially as described and shown. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN D. MIETS. 
Witnesses: 
M. M. CADY, 
J. E. ROSSER. 
75 
OO 
IO 
O 
The manner of using my device is as fol 
lows: The desk is pivoted into the socket d 
of the turn-table. Then one of the arms I is 
removed and the advertising-sheets k' are 
placed between the glasses G, and the show 
case is then hinged to the desk, as before de 
Scribed. The register IX is then placed be 
neath the show-case on the desk, and as the 
slot f is of considerable length the case may 
be raised sufficiently to accommodate it to 
registers of different number of pages. The 
Show-case is then turned down and rests on 
one half of the register, leaving the other 
half free to be written on and the advertise 
lments on the sheet in one side of the show 
case in full view, and as the sheets k", having 
the advertisements on, are inserted in the 
show - case they will be kept free from ink 
stains and always in a condition to be read. 
When the opposite page of the register is to 
be used, the show-case is turned over like the 
leaf of a book, exposing the advertisements 
on the other sheet and the opposite page of 
the register free to be used. When one reg 
ister is filled, it is replaced by another, and 
at the end of the year all of the different reg 
isters may be cheaply bound and laid away 
for future reference. The advertising-sheets 
k' may be replaced at will. 
It will be seen that the turn-table, desk, 
and show-case will last indefinitely, as there 
is little or no wear on the desk, and the pads 
e Will prevent the glass from breaking, and 
as an additional protection there is placed a 
pad between the advertising-sheets l', and 
thus prevent the injury to the glasses. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A device of the character described, con 
sisting of a desk, a register thereon, and a 
show-case hinged to the desk and adapted to 
be turned to rest on either page of the open 
register, for the purposes shown. 
2. A device of the character described, a 
desk, a show-case consisting of two plates of 
glass removably set in a frame with a space 
between said glass and means for adjustably 
hinging the show-case upon the desk, for the 
purposes shown. 
3. A device of the character described, a 
turn-table, a revoluble desk pivoted to said 
turn-table, and a show-case hinged to the 
desk, the said case having two opposite trans 
parent sides, with space between the sides 
for receiving one or more advertising-sheets, 
adapted to be read from either side of the 
case, for the purposes shown. 
4. In a device of the character described, a 
show-case consisting of two plates of glass 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577587.txt	r 
 
 
El 
as 
------ 
- - - - 
S. 
i 
r 
si 
o 
III 
 
 
V 
:: iiiuurt E. 
as 
an 
sh 
(No Model.) 
- 
10 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
G. & T. SHAW &. J. P. DITCHFIELD. 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING. HOLES IN STOCKS, &c, OF BRUSHES OR BROOMS, 
Patented Feb. 23, 189, 
kan - - 
S. 
No. 577,587. 
 
s 
S- 
No. 
ea. 
W 
SS Bay 
A 
24 
s 
e 
ty 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
G. & T. SHAW & J. P. DITCHFIELD. 
10 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING EIOLES IN STOCKS, &c., OF BRUSHES OR BROOMS, 
No. 577,587. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
r 
Eda-H 
/zzie ver:- 
27.4%%- 
-- 
Aaa-ee-aez's:- 
Afzai, 2% ee. 
the Nolars Peters c 
AS-INGON, O, G. 
 
(No Model.) 
' 
. 
G., & T. SHAW & J. P. DITCHFIELD, 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING. HOLES IN STOCKS, &c., OF BRUSHES OR BROOMS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 577,587, 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
2/7/4tz-e- 
27.4 
m25% a 
3.4. ) 
T. No RIS PEI'ERS Co. photo-it-ic). WASHINgroN. O. c. 
 
G. & T. SHAW &. J. P. DITCHFIELD. 
MACEINERY FOR DRILLING. HOLES IN STOCKs, &c., OF BRUSHES OR BROOMS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
(No Model.) 
No. 577,587. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
. 
. 
. 
. .32 
ico.2:...it's 
272 esses:- 
 
(No Model.) 
10. Sheets-Sheet 5. 
G., & T SHAW & J. P. DITCHFIELD, 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING. HOLES IN STOCKS, &c OF BRUSHES OR BR00MS, 
No. 577,587. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
/W/ze prep- 
-s77%-7222-4- 
16.2e 6% 
- 
 
crae 22ee 
raz 
22:27:- 
3.7%.au 
G., & T. SHAW & J. P. DITCHFIELD. 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING FOLES IN STOCKS, &c., OF BRUSHES OR BR00MS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 6, 
(No Model.) 
No. 577,587. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
 
 
2 
/Warnesses:- 
Zazezezows: 
2-ye 
2 % -- 
C 
24-4-2-/ 
 
(No Model.) 
G. & T. SHAW & J. P. DITCHFIELD. 
10 sheets-Sheet 7. 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING HOLES IN STOCKS, &c., OF BRUSHES OR BROOMS, 
No. 577,587. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
p. 
7 
/12/respep- 
2.7%r- 
77-2'ezza7s 
2e2e 22 
?izzzaz 
The Norris PETERS CO., Photos. 
ON C. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 577,587. 
RN 
G., & T. SHAW & J. P. DITCHFIELD. 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING HOLES IN STOCKS, &c OF BRUSHES OR BROOMS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet, 8. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
R 
n 
/12/2ey per 
N. 
This, NCRRIseters co, Photo-lth, Washi NGON, C, C 
(No Model.) 
10 sheets-Sheet 9. 
G. & T. SHAW &. J. P. DITCHFIELD. 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING HOLES IN STOCKS, &c OF BRUSHES OR BROOMS, 
No. 577,587. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
Meenawer- 
(7-0-747-2 (a 
4.4 
the Norris PerERS co, Photo-LTHo. washisoro... 
A2Zee'erazorf 
27.2%% 
22.) 
 
(No Model.) 
G. & T. SHAW & J. P. DITCHFIELD. 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING. HOLES IN STOCKS, &c., OF BRUSHES OR BROOMS, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 10. 
No. 577,587. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
 
/12/ze prey:- 
. 
. 
17zeeraz - 
Y. 
 
the MoRRIS PETERs co., photo-iro ASHINoton, to 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
GEORGE SHAW, THOMAS SHAW, AND JOHN PETER DITCHFIELD, OF 
- 
ASHTON-UNDER-LYNE, ENGLAND. 
MACHINERY FOR DRILLING HOLES IN STOCKS, &c OF BRUSHES OR BROOMS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 57 7,587, dated February 23, 1897. 
Application filed March 13, 1896, Serial No, 583,068, (No model.) Patented in England May 9, 1894, No. 9,157, in France 
May 9, 1895, No, 247,258, and in Austria, November 24, 1895, No. 4,451, 
- 
Be it known that we, GEORGE SHAW and United States granted to us. 
To all, whon, it may concert: 
the above-mentioned Tetters Patent of the 
THOMAS SHAW, brush manufacturers, and 
According to our invention, in constructing 
JOHN PETER DITCHFIELD, manager, of Warre 
a machine we provide a templet arranged to 
Street, Ashton-under-Lyne, in the county of 
of be moved backward and forward or to and 
Lancaster, England, have invented certain fro laterally or upward and downward or in 
new and useful Improvements in Certain Ma 
any two or more of such modes, as may be 
chinery or Apparatus for Drilling Holes in the 
necessary, according to the form of the boards 
Boards or Stocks of Certain Kinds of Brushes or stocks for the drilling or boring of holes 
or Brooms, (for which we have obtained Let 
in which the machine is to be adapted and 
ters Patent of the United Kingdom of Great 
according to the manner in which it is de 
Britain and Ireland, No. 9,157, dated May 9, 
sired that the machine shall operate. In con 
junction with the said templet we provide as 
1894; Brevet dInvention of the Republic of 
France, dated May 9, 1895, No. 247,258, and 
many holders or sets of parts for holding 
Patent of the Empire of Austria, dated No 
boards or stocks to be bored or drilled as it 
vember 24, 1895, No. 4,451) of which the fol 
is desired to bore or drill by one operation in 
lowing is a specification. 
the machine, and so arrange such holders or 
Our invention relates to machines or appa 
sets of parts for holding boards or stocks that 
ratus of the kind described in the specifica 
When the said templet is moved the said hold 
tion forming part of TLetters Patent of the 
ers or sets of parts shall all be moved in a 
United States of America, dated March 29, 
similar manner, so that all the brush boards 
1892, and numbered 471,709, granted unto us; 
or stocks held thereby shall be similarly and 
and our invention consists in improvements 
simultaneously presented to and withdrawn 
by which machines of the kind above men 
from the drills by means of which they are 
tioned are rendered more efficient in opera 
to be drilled or bored. The turning of the 
holders or parts by which the boards or stocks 
Our invention consists in means by which it 
are held while being drilled necessary to en 
is made possible to bore or drill in one opera 
able the holes to be drilled at the required 
inclinations may be accomplished in cases in 
tion two or more boards or stocks simultane 
ously by distinct drills capable of revolution 
which a moderate amount of turning only is re 
but incapable of longitudinal movement while 
quired by mounting or forming the said hold 
using one templet, and to insure that all the 
ers or sets of parts upon arms or similar parts 
holes shall be bored or drilled in the boards 
connected at each end to an arm or frame or 
or stocks in the required positions and at the 
arms or frames and arranging the said arm or 
required inclinations; in means by which in 
frame or arms or frames so that by one or both 
ends of the arms or similar parts upon which 
certain kinds of machines constructed ac 
cording to our invention some of the neces 
the said holders or sets of parts are mounted 
sary movements of the brush boards or stocks 
or formed being moved by the movements im 
parted to the templet employed the required 
being operated upon in a machine may be 
accomplished by means of gearing arranged 
movements of turning and translation may 
in the machine instead of by the simple ap 
be imparted to the brush boards or stocks to 
plication of manual power to the templetem 
be drilled. In cases in which a greater degree 
ployed in such machine, and in improvements 
of turning movement is required to be given 
in appliances for regulating the depth of 
to the boards or stocks to be drilled the hold 
the holes drilled by means of machines con 
ers or sets of parts for holding the boards or 
structed according to our invention, which 
stocks to be drilled may be mounted or formed 
besides being applicable to the machines con 
upon arms or parts mounted upon suitable 
structed according to our present invention 
pivots in the parts moved with the templet 
are also applicable to machines such as are 
employed and be arranged to be turned there 
described in the specification forming part of 
in by being connected to arms or other equiv 
tion. 
. 
55 
75 
CO 
O 
35 
45 
 
2 
577,587 
IO 
2C) 
25 
alent means by which their movements of 
translation in relation to certain parts may 
be caused to bring about their turning. 
A machine constructed according to our 
invention is provided with a number of drills 
corresponding to the number of boards or 
stocks to be simultaneously drilled, and ac 
cording to our invention we cause each drill 
to be capable of revolving, but incapable of 
longitudinal movement, and preferably cause 
each drill to be driven by a separate strap 
and cause all the straps employed to receive 
motion from one pulley and to be placed one 
above another in their passage around the 
pulley from which they receive motion. 
Our invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in all the figures of which 
the same letters and numerals of reference 
are applied to corresponding parts. 
One machine constructed according to our 
invention is illustrated by Figures 1, 1, 2, 3, 
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the accompanying 
drawings. Fig. 1 is an elevation of one side 
of the machine with certain parts omitted in 
order that confusion may be avoided, and Fig. 
* is an elevation of a portion of the other side 
of the machine. Fig. 2 is an elevation of one 
end of the machine with certain parts omit 
ted in order that confusion may be avoided; 
and Fig. 3 is an elevation of the other end of 
the machine, also with certain parts omitted 
in order that confusion may be avoided. Figs. 
4 and 5 are plans of the machine, each with 
certain parts omitted in order that confusion 
may be avoided and showing certain parts 
not shown by the other. In Fig. 6, which is a 
side elevation, in which part is indicated in 
outline only, and in Fig. 7, which is an end 
elevation of a portion of the machine, certain 
parts which are omitted from Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 
and 5 are shown. Figs. 6 and 7 are drawn 
upon a larger scale than Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. 
Fig. S is a side elevation, Fig. 9 a front ele 
Vation, and Fig. 10 a plan, in part a section, 
taken on the line XX of Fig. 6. Fig. 11 is a 
side elevation, and Fig. 12 a plan, partly in 
section, on the line 12 12 of Fig. 11, illustrat 
ing another form of machine constructed ac 
cording to our invention. Certain parts are 
omitted from Figs. 11 and 12 in order that con 
fusion may be avoided, and in Fig. 13, which 
is a plan, Fig. 14, which is a front elevation, 
and Figs. 15 and 15, which are side elevations, 
all drawn upon a larger scale than Figs. 11 and 
12, there is illustrated one of four sets of parts 
for holding brush boards or stocks which are 
employed in the machine illustrated in Figs. 
11 and 12. 
Figs. 16, 17, 18, and 19 illustrate a 
form of templet constructed according to our 
invention which is adapted for use in the 
machine illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 
and is more convenient in use than the tem 
plet shown in Figs. 1, 4, and 6. Fig. 16 is a 
front elevation, and Fig. 17 a side elevation, 
of this form of templet, together with so much 
of the machine in which it is employed as is 
necessary for the explanation of the construc 
tion and employment of such templet. Fig. 
1S is a vertical section taken on the plane in 
dicated by the line C C of Fig. 16 and illus 
trating a portion of the templet shown in Figs. 
16 and 17, and Fig. 19 illustrates an appliance 
which is employed in conjunction with the 
templet illustrated in Figs. 16 and 17. 
The machine illustrated in Figs. 1, 1, 2, 3, 
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the accompanying 
drawings is adapted to give a certain amount 
of turning movement to the brush boards or 
stocks being operated upon, so that a mod 
erate amount of spread will be given to the 
tufts of bristles subsequently inserted in the 
holes drilled or bored in such brush boards 
or stocks, and the machine illustrated in Figs. 
11 and 12 is adapted to give a greater amount 
of turning movement to the brush boards or 
stocks being operated upon, so that a greater 
amount of spread will be given to the tufts of 
bristies subsequently inserted in the holes 
drilled or bored in such brush boards or stocks. 
In a machine constructed according to our. 
invention the drills 18 employed, which in the 
machine illustrated in Figs. 1, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 
6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 are six in number and in 
the machine illustrated in FigS. 11 and 12 are 
four in number, are respectively mounted in 
chucks or holders preferably screwed tupon 
screw-threads formed on the mandrels 16, by 
which they are respectively supported, which 
spindles or mandrels 16 are mounted in the 
standard c, mounted upon the bed d of the 
machine. Each of the mandrels or spindles 
16, which are respectively provided with pull 
leys 17, receives rotary motion by means of a 
separate belt 20 from a pulley 19, mounted 
fast upon a shaft 5, provided with a fast pull 
ley 5 and a loose pulley 5' and revolving in 
bearings formed in pedestals 6, supported in 
the legs d" of the machine. The belt 20, im 
parting motion to the lowest pulley 17, is 
placed in contact with the surface of the pull 
ley 19, and the others pass outside it around : 
the pulley 19 in an order corresponding to that 
of the pulleys 17, the belt 20, imparting mo 
tion to the uppermost pulley 17, being outer 
most in passing around the pulley 19. The 
pulleys 17 are preferably made of different 
sizes, such that although each of Such belts 
20 moves at a speed different from that of 
every other of such belts all the mandrels or 
spindles 16 shall revolve at approximately the 
Same speed. 
Although we prefer that motion shall be im 
parted to the drills 18 by means of a separate 
belt 20 for each drill and to superimpose the 
belts for the upper drills upon the belts trans 
mitting motion to the lower drills in the man 
ner above described, we may, whenever it may 
be considered desirable, cause motion to be 
imparted to the drills 18 by means of other 
arrangements, such, for instance, as a single 
belt transmitting motion to all the drills 18 in 
the machine. 
The brush boards or stocks to be operated 
upon are mounted in clamps or jaws O', capa 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
IEO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
3 
75 
ble of being moved upon slides upon brack 
ets O by means of right-hand and left-hand 
Screw-threads formed upon axles o, each of 
which is provided with a handle Oand capa 
ble of being revolved, but not capable of mov 
ing end wise in the bracket O in which it is 
mounted. The brackets O are mounted upon 
rods in', extending between opposite brackets 
in, and are secured in position upon such rods 
n' by means of set-screws. Each pair of two 
opposite brackets in supports two rods ', 
which are secured by means of nuts screwed 
upon their ends in each of the brackets in, in 
which they are mounted, and support two of 
the brackets O. Each pair of brackets n is 
SO, mounted in the machine that When the 
axes of the rods ', carried by such brackets 
n, are in the same vertical plane the center 
of the space inclosed between such pair of 
brackets in and the rods a carried thereby 
shall be in the same straight horizontal line 
as the axis of the drill 18, employed to operate 
upon the brush board or stock mounted in the 
jaws O', supported by such pair of brackets in. 
In the machine illustrated in Figs. 1, 1, 2, 
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 the brackets in are sup 
ported and moved by each of them being 
formed with a stud passing through and se 
cured by a nut and capable of being oscil 
lated in One of two bars n, each of which bars 
1) Supports six of the brackets in and is mount 
ed upon a rod l, which at each end enters and 
is secured by means of set-screws in eyes h", 
each of which is formed in one of two rodsh, 
which, as will be hereinafter described, may 
be caused to receive a backward-and-forward 
motion from the shaft 5 and are moved or 
turned upward and downward and laterally 
by means of the templet (t. Each of the rods 
h, passes through and is secured by means of 
a Set-Screw in an eye formed in one of two 
studs i, each of which is capable of being os 
ciliated in one of two arms formed upon a 
platei, capable of being slid between plates 
he c', which are secured together by bolts 
and kept at a certain distance apart by means 
of distance-pieces k and are mounted upon 
a pedestal k", which is formed in one with the 
plate k and is mounted upon the bedd of the 
machine. The plate i is formed with two 
arms i', in each of which are mounted six 
Studs p, each of which is secured by means 
of a nut and capable of being oscillated in 
the arm i', in which it is mounted, and is 
formed with an eye through which passes an 
arm in, formed on one of the brackets in. 
Each arm nis secured in position in the eye 
through which it passes by means of a set 
Screw screwed into such eye and bearing 
against the said arm n. The armsi" are con 
nected by rods f", each of which is secured at 
each end to one of such armsi'. 
Each rod h is connected to one of two studs 
g, each of which is mounted in and capable of 
being slid lengthwise of a slot f', formed in 
One of two brackets.f, each of which is formed 
of two parts secured together and is secured 
to one end of the templet C. employed in the 
machine. The studs 9, while being capable 
of being slid lengthwise of the slots f", in 
which they are respectively placed, are pre 
vented from being displaced therefrom by 
means of nuts or collars caused to bear against 
the brackets f and secured in position upon 
the studs g, upon which they are respectively 
screwed by means of lock-nuts. Each of the 
studs g is formed with jaws, through which 
passes a ping', connecting to such studg the 
rod h in conjunction with which it is em 
ployed, which rod h is capable of turning 
about the ping', which passes through it. 
The above - described arrangement of the 
bars n, arms m, studs p, armsi", and rods h. 
causes all the brackets in to be moved in a 
similar manner When the templet C is moved 
laterally or upward or downward. 
The tem 
plet a, which is arranged so as to be capable 
of being moved upward and downward and 
sidewise in relation to the machine, is mount 
ed between arms band arms b'. The arms b, 
of which there are two, one at each side of 
the machine, and the arms b', of which also 
there are two, one at each side of the ma 
chine, are secured to projections formed upon 
a brackett, secured to the standard C. A 
stud b, secured by means of lock-nuts to and 
in position in a projection formed upon a 
standard e, mounted upon the bed d of the 
machine, is screwed into the bar bat one side 
of the machine and passes through the barb" 
at the same side of the machine, which is se 
cured in position upon such stud b by lock 
nuts, so that such bars b b' are secured in posi 
tion and at a suitable distance apart. Another 
stud b8 at the other side of the machine in a 
similar manner secures the other bars b b' in 
position and at a suitable distance apart. A 
rod or frame f', which is secured at its ends 
to the brackets f and templet C, is connected 
to a cord which passes Over a suitable pulley 
or pulleys supported in any Suitable manner 
and is connected to a weight, by which the 
weight of the templet C and the rods h and 
the parts supported thereby is counterbal 
anced. 
The platei is provided with a dovetail pro 
jection f, in engagement With which is placed 
a plate q, provided with a notch of a form cor 
responding with that of the dovetail projec 
tion f. The plate q is kept in position upon 
the projection f by means of the plates k k", 
between which the plate i and the plate q. 
may be slid. 
The platei is formed with a number of holes 
j, in any one of which a pin r may be placed, 
and the plate q is also formed with a number 
of holes q', in any one of which the pin r may be 
placed. Slots are formed in the plates k l' 
in order to allow the pin r to be placed in the 
holes ig', as may be desirable from time to 
time, and to act as guides, in Which Such pin 
ir may be slid. In the plate q is formed a 
95 
do 
Io5 
IO 
IIS 
I25 
O 
(5 
25 
- 3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
slot q, which is curved for a purpose to be 
hereinafter explained. Above the plate l' 
and below the plate k are plates S, secured 
together by means of a block s', through 
which passes one end of a connecting-rodt. In 
the plates S holes s are formed, so that a pin 
15 may be inserted into any one of the holes 
s' in the upper plate S and through the slot 
gin the plate q into one of the holess in the 
lower plate S. The pin 15 in being inserted 
into the holes sin the plates S and passed 
through the slot of Will also be passed through 
the slots in the plates lic ic', which will act as 
guides for such pin 15. 
The rod l is connected 
at One end to an arm it, lmounted fast upon 
an axle u', capable of being Oscillated in bear 
ings formed in a standard ', mounted upon 
the bed d of the machine. The rod it is pro 
vided with nuts, by which it is secured in 
position in the blocks'. Upon the axle l' 
is also mounted an arm u', to which is con 
nected one end of a connecting-rod it, the 
other end of which embraces a stud ac, Se 
cured in a block capable of being secured in 
any suitable position in a groove formed in a 
disky, mounted fast upon a transverse shaft 
2, capable of being revolved in bearings pro 
vided in a bracket 2, secured to the bed d of 
the machine. Fast upon the transverse shaft 
2is mounted a Worm-wheel3, into which bears 
or engages a Worm 4, mounted loose upon but 
prevented from being moved lengthwise of 
the shaft 5. Upon the Worm 4 is formed one 
part 7 of a friction-clutch 7, the other part 
7 of which is capable of being slid length 
Wise upon the shaft 5 and of receiving motion 
therefrom. The part 7 of the friction-clutch 
7 is formed with a groove in which engage 
pins projecting from jaws formed on one arm 
of a lever 8, mounted upon a stud 98, secured 
in a bracket 9, secured to one of the legs d" 
of the machine. To the other arm of the lever 
S is connected one end of a rod 10, the other 
end of which is connected to an arm 11, 
mounted fast upon an axle 11, capable of 
being oscillated in a bracket 12, secured to 
the bed d of the machine. Fast upon the 
axle 11 is also mounted an arm 11, to which 
is connected one end of a rod 13, the other 
end of which is connected to a treadle 14, 
capable of being Oscillated upon an axle 14, 
passing through a bracket 14, secured to the 
floor beneath the machine. 
When the treadle 14 is depressed, the part 
7 of the friction-clutch 7 will be placed in 
engagement with the part 7 of such friction 
clutch 7, so that if the shaft 5 be revolving 
the shaft 2 will also be caused to revolve, and 
by means of the studa, connecting-rod v, arm 
l, axle l', arm it, and rod t cause the plates 
S to be moved backward and forward, and 
by means of the pin 15 cause the plates qi 
to be moved backward and forward. A spring 
10, which is compressed to a suitable extent 
between a collar 10, Secured upon the rod 10, 
and a bracket 10, secured to the lower side 
of the bed dof the machine and serving as 
a guide to the rod 10, serves to raise the treadle 
14 when such treadle 14 is released by the at 
tendant and to disengage the part 7 of the 
friction-clutch 7 from the part 7 thereof, so 
as to arrest the backward and forward move 
ments of the plates S. 
A bracket 7, secured to one of the legs d" 
of the machine, serves to prevent the part 7 
of the clutch 7 from moving along with the 
part 7 thereof when the treadle 14 is re 
leased, and so insures that the disengagement 
of the part 7 of the clutch 7 from the part 
7 thereof and the cessation of the revolu 
tion of the shaft 2 shall take place promptly 
when the treadle 14 is released. When the 
treadle 14 is depressed during the revolution 
of the shaft 5, the brush boards or stocks car 
ried by the jaws o' will be caused to advance 
toward and retire from the drills or other bor 
ing or drilling tools IS, and the portions of 
the said brush boards or stocks which are pre 
sented to the drills or other boring-tools 18 
will depend upon the position in which the 
templet C is placed. 
The Stud a must be se 
cured in such position in the groove in the 
disk of that the required amount of backward 
and forward motion may be given to the said 
brushboards or stocks. The templet Clis pro 
vided with holes arranged in accordance with 
the desired arrangement of the holes in the 
brush boards or stocks to be drilled, and is 
moved by means which we will now proceed 
to describe. 
In a bracket 21, secured to the standard e, 
are mounted jaws 22 23, which are capable 
of being slid upward and downward in or 
upon guides formed or provided upon the 
said bracket 21. The construction of the jaws 
22 23 is clearly illustrated by Figs. 8, 9, and 
10 of the accompanying drawings. The jaw 
22 is provided with two parts 22 22', formed 
upon a block 22, each of which parts 22 22' 
is formed with a notch made somewhat in the 
shape of a W. As the two notches in the jaw 
22 act as one notch, we shall for convenience 
refer to them as the notchin the jaw 22. The 
jaw 23 is provided with a notch made some 
what in the shape of an inverted W, and each 
of such jaws. 22 23 is so formed as to be a 
counterpart of the other, the notched part of 
the jaw 23 being adapted to pass between the 
notched parts 22 22' of the jaw 22. 
Each of the jaws 2223 is formed in two parts, 
one of which is adapted to bear upon One side 
of the bracket 21, while the other of such 
parts is adapted to bear upon the other side 
of the bracket 21, and one of the two parts 
of the said jaw is secured by set-screws to a 
projection formed upon the other of such 
parts and passing through the slot between 
the guides formed on the said bracket 21. A 
connecting-rod 24 is secured to the lower jaw 
22 by means of a part of such connecting-rod, 
which passes through a lug formed upon the 
said jaw and is secured in position therein 
by means of nuts. The connecting-rod 24 is 
connected to an arm. 25, mounted fast upon 
75 
95 
Oc 
O 
IC 
I 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
577,587 
s 
IO 
23 
35 
45 
5 5 
an axle 25, capable of being oscillated in a 
bracket 26, secured upon the lower surface 
of the bed d of the machine, fast upon which 
axle 25 is mounted an arm 25, to which is 
connected one end of a connecting-rod 27, 
which at its other end is connected to an arm 
28, mounted fast upon an axle 28, capable of 
being oscillated in a bracket 29, secured upon 
the lower surface of the bedd of the machine. 
Fast upon the axle 2S is also mounted an 
arm 28, to which is connected one end of a 
connecting-rod 30, the other end of which 
embraces a stud projecting from a lever 31, 
capable of being oscillated upon a stud se 
cured in the bracket 2. The lever 31 is pro 
vided with a bowl 31, which is moved in one 
direction by means of a cam 32, mounted fast 
upon the shaft 2, and in the other direction 
by means of the tension of a spring 319, which 
is secured at one end to the arm 28 and at 
the other end to a bracket 31, which is se 
cured to one of the legs d" of the machine. 
The bracket 31 is provided with a hole 
through which the connecting-rod 30 passes. 
When the shaft 2 is caused to revolve, the 
revolution of the cam 31 and the tension of 
the spring 31' will cause the axle 28 to be 
oscillated and cause the jaw 22 to be moved 
upward and downward. To the connecting 
rod 24 is secured a bracket 24, secured in 
which is a stud 24', which is embraced by one 
end of a lever 33, capable of being oscillated on 
a stud 21, secured in the bracket, 21. A con 
necting-rod 34, part of which passes through a 
lug formed on the upper jaw 23, embraces a pin 
33, secured in the lever 33. The upward and 
downward movements of the connecting-rod 
24, causing the lever 33 to oscillate, cause the 
jaw 23 to be moved upward and downward, 
the downward movement of the jaw 23 taking 
place simultaneously with the upward move 
ment of the rod 24 and jaw 22, and the up 
Ward movement of the jaw 23 taking place 
simultaneously with the downward movement 
of the jaw 22. 
Upon the connecting-rod 30 a collar 31 is 
secured, and upon such connecting-rod 30, 
between the collar 31 and the bracket 31, 
are placed a washer or collar 31, of leather, 
and a washer or collar 31, of india-rubber. 
The collar 31 is secured upon the connect 
ing-rod 30 in such position that the washers 
31 and 31, of leather and india-rubber, will 
act as a buffer to arrest the movement of the 
connecting-rod 30 in one direction and pre 
vent the termination of the downward move 
ment of the jaw 22 from being accompanied 
by unnecessary shock. The movements of 
the jaws 2223 are so adjusted that a pin 35, 
provided with a handle in order that it may 
be conveniently manipulated by the attend 
ant in charge of the machine, may, having 
been previously placed in the space between 
the sides of the notch of the jaw 22 and the 
sides of the notch of the jaw 23, be held be 
tween such jaws 22 23 and in the apexes of 
the notches of such jaws 22 23. The pin 35 
(shown only in Fig. 6) is shown removed from 
the space between the sides of the notches of 
the jaws 2223 for convenience of illustration. 
The jaws 2223 are preferably secured in such 
positions upon the connecting-rods 24 34, re 
spectively, that the pin 35 when held by such 
jaws 22 23 shall have its axis in the horizon 
tall plane passing through the centers of the 
platesi q. 
It will be obvious that in what 
ever part of the space inclosed between the 
sides of the notch of the jaw 22 and the sides 
of the notch of the jaw 23 the pin 35 may be 
placed it will as such jaws 2223 are brought 
together be brought to the apex of each of 
Such notches. 
The arrow Aindicates the directionin which 
the shaft 5 is caused to revolve when the ma 
chine illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 
9, and 10 of the accompanying drawings is in 
use, and the arrow B indicates the direction 
in which the shaft 2 is caused to revolve by 
the revolution of the shaft 5 when the part 
7 of the clutch 7 is placed in engagement 
with the part 7 thereof. 
The cam 32 is, as is indicated in Figs. 1 and 
1, so placed in relation to the groove in the 
disky that the jaws 2223 may have completed 
their approach to one another at the time the 
plates qi commence to be moved toward the 
drills or boring-tools 18 and so that the jaws 
22 23 may continue to hold the pin 35 until 
the brushboards or stocks being operated on 
are withdrawn clear of the drills or boring 
tools 18. 
In order that the templet C may be properly 
guided by the arms bb' and in order that the 
wearing of the templet a and arms b b'maybe 
prevented from interfering with the proper 
guiding of the templet a by the arms bb', we 
provide set-screws 36, by means of which the 
arms b may be pressed toward the arms b', 
and set-screws 37, by means of which the arms 
b' may be pressed toward the arms b, so that 
the arms b b' may be caused to bear upon the 
templeta, as closely as may be desirable. The 
set-screws 36, of which two are employed in 
conjunction with each arm b, are screwed in 
projecting parts formed on the bracket 21 and 
the set-screws 37, of which two are employed 
in conjunction with each arm b', are secured 
in brackets 38, secured to the standard e. The 
brackets 38 are omitted from Fig. 7 in order 
that confusion may be avoided. 
When the machine illustrated in Figs. 1, 
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the accompany 
ing drawings is in use and a brush board or 
stock to be drilled or bored has been secured 
in the jaws or clamps o', carried by each pair 
of brackets in, while the frame formed by the 
rods h, armsi", bars m, brackets in, and rods 
a' is in such a position that the said brush 
boards or stocks when secured in the said 
jaws or clamps o' are clear of the drills or 
boring-tools 18, and while the studais in apo 
sition such that it will require to move through 
more than one-quarter of a revolution in the 
direction indicated by the arrow B before 
75 
95 
IOC 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
6 
: 
577, 587 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
causing the said brush boards or stocks to 
move toward the drills or boring-tools 18, and 
a templet Cl, having formed in it holes ar 
ranged in accordance with the desired ar 
rangement of the holes to be drilled or bored in 
the said brush boards or stocks, has been se 
cured to the brackets f, the pin 35 is inserted 
into the space inclosed between the sides of the 
notches in the jaws 22 23 when such jaws 22 
23 are respectively in their lowest and high 
est positions through one of the several holes 
in the templet C, which may be opposite to 
the said space. Then the treadle 14 being 
depressed the shaft 2 will be caused to re 
volve and the jaws 22 23 will be brought 
against the pin 35 in the manner above de 
Scribed and, if it be not in the position into 
which the movement of the jaws 2223 is adapt 
ed to bring it, will move such pin 35, and also 
the templet Cl, into a position such that the 
pin 35 may be held between the deepest parts 
Of the notches in the jaws 22 23 in the man 
ner above described. After the templet a, if 
not already in the said position, has been 
moved into it and while the templet a, is held 
in Such position the brush boards or stocks 
Supported by the brackets in will be presented 
to the drills or boring-tools 18 and each be 
drilled with a hole by one of such drills or bor 
ing-tools 18 and then withdrawn therefrom. 
When the pin 35 is released by the jaws 22 
3, the attendant in charge of the machine, 
removing the pin 35 from the hole in the 
templet Cl, in which it was first placed, passes 
it into the space inclosed between the sides 
of the notches in the jaws 22 23, when such 
jaWS are respectively in their lowest and high 
est positions, through another hole in the 
templet Cl, which may be opposite to the said 
Space, so that when the jaws 22 23 are again 
moved upward and downward, respectively, 
into their highest and lowest positions the pin 
35 and templet C will be moved thereby, so 
as to move the brackets f and cause the rods 
h, carrying the arms on, to be so guided that 
the brush boards or stocks supported by the 
brackets , will each be drilled with another 
hole in the required position. The attend 
ant in charge of the machine passes the pin 
35 into the space between the sides of the 
notches of the jaws 2223 in the manner above 
described through one hole in the templet a 
after another until a hole has been drilled in 
each of the brush boards or stocks being op 
erated upon to correspond with each of the 
holes in the templet C or with each of any de 
sired number of such holes. If at any time 
the attendant in charge of the machine should 
fail to move the pin 35 from one hole in the 
templet C to another, when the hole corre 
Sponding to the first of such holes has been 
drilled in each of the brush-boards or stocks 
supported by the brackets n, the said brush 
boards or stocks will be again presented to 
the drills or boring-tools 18 in the position in 
which they were previously presented to such 
drills or boring-tools, which will thus be 
caused to again enter the holes previously 
drilled or bored by them. 
The lateral movement of the templet a, in 
either direction from its central position 
causes the platei to be turned upon the pin 
r, and the upward and downward movements 
of the templet Cl, from its central position 
cause the rods it and studs i to be turned in 
relation to the plate i and cause the brackets 
n to be turned in the bars m, and thus the 
holes drilled in the brush boards or stocks 
supported by the brackets in will differ in in 
clination thereto, So that a certain amount of 
what is termed spread will be given to 
the bristles afterward inserted in such brush. 
boards or stocks. 
The turning of the plate jabout the stud r, 
caused by the templet a, being moved later 
ally from its central position, causes the parts 
of the brush boards or stocks which are pre 
sented to the drills or boring-tools 18 to be 
moved nearer to the said drills or boring-tools 
apart from any movement of the stud 15, and 
as it is necessary that all the holes in the 
brush boards or stocks supported by the 
brackets in shall be of approximately the same 
diameter at the backs of such brush boards 
or stocks it is necessary that the distance be 
tween the stud 15 and the portions of the said 
brush boards or stocks to be presented to the 
drilling or boring tools 18 shall be reduced by 
an amount corresponding to the distance by 
which the portions of such brush boards or 
stocks to be drilled or bored are caused to ad 
vance toward the drills or boring-tools 18 by 
the turning of the plate i upon the stud '. 
We therefore form the slot g in the plate q. 
curved, so that as the plate j is turned about 
the stud r" and turns the plate q the stud 15 
will be caused to occupy different positions in 
the slot q', so that the distance between such 
stud 15 and the stud r will be caused to vary 
according to the position into which the plate 
i may be turned upon the stud n. By plates 
q, provided with slots q of different forms 
suitable for use in different cases, being pro 
vided in substitution for the plate q the dis 
tance between the stud 15 and the portions 
of the brush boards or stocks carried by the 
brackets in may be prevented from being mal 
terially varied by the turning of the plate i 
about the stud r, caused by the templet Cl, 
used in any particular case, being moved into 
different positions laterally. The plate j is 
formed with the dovetail projection f, in or 
der that different plates q may be readily sub 
stituted for one another as may be necessary 
or desirable from time to time. 
In the machine illustrated in Figs. 11 and 
12 each of the brackets in is provided with 
a stud or projection secured and capable of 
being oscillated in one of eight arms 45, of 
which there are four at each side of the ma 
chine. Each of the arms 45 is capable of be 
ing oscillated at one end about a stud 45, se 
cured by nuts in one of two bars n, which are 
mounted and capable of being oscillated upon 
75 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
I C5 
IO 
II5 
I 2 o 
I 25 
 
75 
studs 46, secured in rodsh, similar to the rods into the two partsjj of the platej, as may 
h of the machine illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, 3, be desirable from time to time, according to 
4, and 5, except in So far that the rods h of the form of the brush boards or stocks be 
ing operated upon. At its other end each 
the machine illustrated in Figs. 11 and 12 are 
connected directly to the templet; a employed 
of the arms 45 is capable of being Oscillated 
in such machine and are made capable of be 
about the axis of a stud 45, secured in one 
ing adjusted in length by being each formed 
of the arms f', projecting from the plate j. 
in two parts, secured together by a set-screw. 
Each of the brackets in, is provided with an 
The weight of the templetc. and rods hand 
arm n, which, being secured upon the stud 
the parts supported thereby is counterbal 
projecting from, such bracket, secures it in 
anced by means of a weight connected to a 
the arm 45 in which it is mounted. In the 
cord, which passes over suitable pulleys and 
arm n of each bracket in are formed guides, 
is connected to a frame h, connected by set 
between which may be slid a block capable 
screws to the rodsh. Each of the rodsh, of the 
of being oscillated upon a stud secured in Ole 
machine illustrated in Figs. 11 and 12 is se 
of a number of rods 47, which are respectively 
capable of being secured in various positions, 
cured by means of a set-screw in one of two 
studs i, each of which is secured and capable 
as may be desirable from time to time, in 
of being oscillated in one of two armsi", pro 
sockets 48, formed on the armsi', projecting 
jecting from a plate?, capable of being slid 
from the plate j. In each of the rods his 
between plates is k', mounted upon a stand 
mounted a bracket 49, which is capable of 
ard k", formed in one with the plate k and 
being oscillated in the rod h in which it is 
supported by the bed d of the machine. In 
mounted, and extending between the brackets 
the machine illustrated in Figs. 11 and 12 the 
49 is a rod 1, which at its ends is connected 
platei is formed in two partsii, the parti 
to blocks capable of being adjusted in posi 
being made so as to be capable of being slid 
tion in the brackets 49 by means of ScreWS 
or oscillated between the plates lic k" and the 
49. The said rod 1 supports a stop-plate 42, 
parti being capable of being oscillated hori 
such as will be hereinafter described. Each 
Zontally in the part i. Each of the parts ji 
of the brackets 49 is provided with an arm 
of the plate i is formed with a number of 
49, in which are formed guides, between 
which may be slid a block capable of being 
holes adapted to receive a stud or studs 39, 
by which such parts may be connected to 
oscillated upon a stud projecting from One of 
gether either so that the part j may be turned 
two rods 50, which are respectively capable 
in relation to the parti or so that both of 
of being secured in various positions, as may 
such parts if will be caused to move to 
be desirable from time to time, in SocketS 51, 
gether according to the movement which it 
formed in the arms i', projecting from the 
plate j. By the rods 50 being adjusted into 
is desired to give to the brushboards or stocks 
to be operated upon. When one stud 39 is 
proper position the brackets 49* may be caused 
employed to connect the partsii of the plate 
to oscillate to the same extent as the brackets 
i together, as is indicated in Figs. 11 and 12, 
in when the rods h are raised or lowered, and 
the parti' may be turned about such stud 39 
by means of the screws 49 the distance of the 
in relation to the parti, and when two studs 
stop-plate 42 from the axis about Which it is 
39 are employed to connect the parts if such 
turned may be adjusted, as may be necessary 
parts will move together and act as one plate 
or desirable, and each bracket n being pro 
i. In Figs. 11 and 12 two studs r are shown 
vided with a screw similar to the screws 49, 
as being inserted in the part i. of the plate i 
which is mounted in a block provided in Such 
and into the slots extending lengthwise of 
bracket and capable of being turned to ad 
the plates k k", which slots act as guides for 
just one part of such bracket n in position in 
Such studs r, so that the parti of the platei 
relation to another part thereof, the distance. 
can only be moved backward and foward in 
of the brush boards or stocks being operated 
a straight line, the necessary turning in a 
upon from the axes about which they are re 
spectively caused to oscillate may be adjusted 
horizontal plane of the brush boards or stocks 
being provided for by the parts if of the 
as may be necessary or desirable. When the 
plate?i, being only connected together by one 
templet a, is raised or lowered, the rods h be 
ing turned about the axes of the eyes i and 
stud 39. If only one stud be placed in the 
slots of the plates lic lic' and in the parti of 
the bars m being raised and lowered the arms 
the plate i and the parts it be connected to 
45 will be oscillated about the axes of the studs 
gether by two studs 39, the turning in a hori 
45 45, and the oscillation of the arms 45 
Zontal plane of the brush boards or stocks 
causing the brackets n to be moved in relation 
being operated upon will take place about 
to the rods 47, the blocks which are capable 
of being oscillated upon the studs respectively 
the axis of the stud r, inserted in the slots of 
the plates k k' and the parti of the plate j. 
projecting from such rods 47 and engage with 
The axis about which the turning in a hori 
the guides formed in the arms n of such 
zontal plane of the brush boards or stocks 
brackets in will cause such brackets in to be 
being operated upon shall take place may 
oscillated in relation to the arms 45, so that 
the turning of the arms 45, brought about by . 
thus be caused to be that of a stud r", inserted 
in the slots of the plates k le" and in the part 
the raising and lowering of the templet, Cl, 
j of the plate j, or that of a stud 39, inserted will cause the brackets in and the brushboards 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
95 
CO 
to5 
O 
I I5 
125 
8 
57,587 
Ol' Stocks Supported thereby to be oscillated 
to a greater extent than the arms 45. 
The extent of the oscillation of the brackets 
1 and the brush boards or stocks supported 
thereby may be varied by the rods 47 being 
adjusted longitudinally into different posi 
tions in relation to the brackets . The tem 
plet C in the machine illustrated in Figs. 11 
and 12 is arranged to be moved by the at 
tendant in charge of the machine, and is pro 
vided with holes arranged in a suitable man 
ner, which are placed or guided one after an 
other onto a pin or guide 52, carried by a 
Standard e, mounted upon the bed d of the 
machine. The depth of the holes bored or 
drilled in the brush boards or stocks supported 
by the brackets in or the extent, to which the 
drills or boring-tools 18 are caused to pene 
trate the said brush boards or stocks is regul 
lated by the stop-plate 42, supported by the 
rod l, which will be hereinafter further de 
Scribed, and which is made of a form corre 
sponding to that of the brush boards or stocks 
being Operated upon, and is caused by the 
arms 49 and rods 50 to be turned in a manner 
Corresponding to that in which the said brush 
boards or stocks are turned, so that the posi 
tion of the said stop-plate 42 will always cor 
respond With that of the brush boards or 
Stocks being operated upon. The backward 
and for Ward movements of the rods h, and 
plate inecessary to present and withdraw the 
brush boards or stocks being operated upon 
to and from the drills or boring-tools 18 in the 
machine illustrated in Figs. 11 and 12 are ar 
ranged to be obtained by the templet a being 
moved backward and forward by the attend. 
antin charge of the machine, as the turning 
of the brush boards or stocks being operated 
upon, caused by the upward and downward 
movements of the templet Cl, renders it diffi 
Cult to arrange for the requisite backward 
and for Ward movements of the said brush 
boards or stocks to be produced mechanically. 
We would have it understood that if it be 
Considered preferable in any case the machine 
illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 may be 
provided with a templet mounted and moved 
vertically and laterally by hand, like the tem 
plet C illustrated in Figs. 11 and 12, and that 
in such case if the stud 15 be removed from 
the plates S and the plate q the backward and 
forward movements and the lateral turning 
of the platei and the brush boards or stocks 
Supported by the jaws o' may be all accom 
plished by the said templet being moved by 
hand. 
When a machine of the kind illustrated in 
FigS. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 is provided with a tem 
plet mounted and moved vertically and lat 
erally by hand, like the templet C illustrated 
in FigS. 11 and 12, the backward and for 
Ward movements of the brushboards or stocks 
being Operated upon may, when accomplished 
by means of the movements of the stud ac, be 
limited by the position in which such stud a 
is Secured in the disk?, and in cases in which 
machines constructed according to our inven 
tion are provided with templets moved back 
ward and forward and laterally and vertically 
by hand, as in the machine illustrated in 
Figs. 11 and 12, the forward movement of the 
templet may be limited by means of a stop 
Surrounding the pin 52, as in the machines 
illustrated in the drawings accompanying the 
specification forming part of the Letters Pat 
ent of the United States granted to us and 
numbered 471,709 and dated March 29, 1892. 
There are provided in the templet a illus 
trated in Figs. 16 and 17 a number of pins a, 
which are severally mounted in holes formed 
in the boards act, forming with the pins a 
the templet C, and are provided with springs 
C, bearing against collars C. on the pins a 
with which they are respectively used and 
against the board C. and tending to force such 
pins a in the direction indicated by the ar 
row D. The pins Ct. are arranged in the 
boards C. Clin a manner corresponding to the 
manner in which it is desired that holes shall 
be bored in the brush boards or Stocks to be 
operated upon, and the boards a Cl? are se 
cured together by bolts a, passing through 
them and through blocks a, placed between 
such boards C. C.", and by being secured by 
screws to such blocks. Ct. The templet Cl, 
formed by the boards a Clf and the pins a, is 
provided at its upper and lower parts, respec 
tively, with boards Ci'a and is mounted in 
the machine similarly to the templet a illus 
trated in Figs. 1, 4, and 6, the arms b b' and 
pedestale being placed in suitable positions 
and a filling-piece e' being placed between the 
pedestal e and the bracket 21 in order that 
the bracket 21 may remain in proper position 
for the jaws 22 23 to be properly operated 
and filling-pieces b being placed between 
each of the arms b' used with such templet 
and the bracket b, to which such arms b' are 
secured by bolts l', of which only one is 
shown in Fig. 17. 
The toola" (illustrated in Fig. 19) is formed 
with a cup adapted to be placed upon the pro 
jecting parts of the pins C, and is also so 
formed that when placed upon the projecting 
part of one pin a' it shall be incapable of 
touching any of the other pins a adjacent 
thereto. By means of the said tool at the pins 
Clare pressed, one at a time, into the space 
between the sides of the notch in the jaw 22 
and the sides of the notch in the jaw 23, so 
that as such jaws 22 23 respectively ascend 
and descend the templet a will be moved into 
such position that the pinct so pushed into 
the said space shall be held between the apexes 
of the notches in the jaws 22 23 when such 
jaws 22 23 are respectively in their highest 
and lowest positions. The templet a, being 
thus noved will cause the brush boards or 
Stocks being Operated upon to be moved in a 
corresponding manner. In order that holes 
arranged in different manners may be drilled 
in brush boards or stocks, it is necessary to 
provide boards act with holes arranged in 
75 
IO 
t 
I 
2 
2 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
57,587 
s 
75 
O 
15 
3o 
the various modes requisite, and the pins a 
and springs a may be transferred from one 
pair of boards a a to another, or different 
pairs of boards a d", each fitted with a suit 
able number of pins a, furnished with springs 
Ct, may be provided for use at different times 
in the manufacture of different kinds of brush 
boards or stocks. In order that the templet 
C may be properly guided by the arms b b' and 
in order that the wearing of the boards a' at 
and arms b b' may be prevented from inter 
fering with the proper guiding of the templet 
a by the arms b b", there are provided two 
brackets 38, each of which is secured by means 
of a set-screw to the pedestale and is provided 
with a screw 37, which may be caused to bear 
to a suitable extent upon one of the arms b' 
and press it toward the adjacent arm b, and 
there are also provided screws 36, (not shown 
in Figs. 16 and 17, but similar and arranged 
similarly to those shown in Fig. 6,) which may 
be caused to bear upon the arms b and press 
them toward the adjacent arms b'. 
We provide, in conjunction with the tem 
plet by means of which the holes drilled in 
brush boards or stocks by means of machines 
constructed according to our invention are 
caused to be drilled in the required positions 
and at the requisite inclinations, a plate of 
suitable size, connected in any suitable man 
ner to the templet or any suitable part con 
nected to such templet, which plate is so made 
and arranged that it can be adjusted and se 
cured by means of a screw or nut, or screws 
or nuts or other device or devices, in any suit 
able position in relation to such templet, and 
provide a stud or stop which may be adjusted 
and secured by a screw or nut, or screws or 
nuts or other devices, in any suitable position 
in a stationary part of the machine, so that by 
the said plate or the said stud or such plate and 
stud or stop being adjusted into and secured 
in a suitable position or positions the extent 
to which the templet above mentioned may 
be moved in One direction may be limited as 
may be necessary. 
In the accompanying drawings, 42 is the 
plate, which we provide in conjunction with 
the templet C. The plate 42 is secured, by 
means of screws 43, provided with lock-nuts, 
to the bar 1 above mentioned. The screws 
43 and the lock-nuts on the screws 43 enable 
the plate 42 to be adjusted into and secured 
in position in relation to the bar 1 and in re 
lation to a stud 44, which, being omitted from 
Figs. 11 and 12 in order that confusion may 
be avoided, is indicated in Fig. 4 and is 
mounted so as to be capable of being adjusted 
endwise in the standard c, mounted upon the 
bed d of the machine, and is capable of be 
ing secured in position therein by means of a 
lock-nut. The plate 42 is mounted upon the 
bar 1 in such position that when the rodsh 
are in a horizontal position and at equal dis 
tances from the vertical plane containing the 
axes of the drills or boring-tools 18 the cen 
tral portion of the plate 42 shall be in line 
with the axis of the stud 44, which is in the 
same vertical plane as the axes of the drills 
18. The plate 42 is also adjusted into and se 
cured in such position that its front surface 
shall be in the same vertical plane as or in a 
Vertical plane at a suitable distance from the 
backs of the brush boards or stocks mounted 
in the jaws or clamps upon the rods n', and 
the drills or boring-tools 18 are so made and 
mounted that their points shall all be in one 
vertical plane. In consequence of being 
mounted and adjusted in position in the said 
manner the plate 42 is moved similarly to and 
I to the same extent as the brush boards or 
stocks supported upon the rods and by ar 
riving against the stud 44 in the forward mo 
tion of the said brush boards or stocks limits 
the forward movement of the brush boards 
or stocks, and thus regulates the extent to 
which the drills or boring-tools 18 may be 
caused to enter the said brush boards or 
stocks. The stop-plate 42 is made to corre 
Spond in form with the brush boards or stocks 
being Operated upon, and being moved simi 
larly to such brush boards or stocks renders 
it possible to insure that all the holes drilled 
or bored in such brush boards or stocks shall 
penetrate or pass through such brush boards 
or stocks to approximately the same extent, 
although the brush boards or stocks may vary 
somewhat in thickness. 
In the machine illustrated in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 
4, 5, and 6, in which the employment of the 
plate q with the curved slot q and the rigid 
connection of the connecting-rod t with the 
blocks' and the adjustment and securing of 
the stud a. in proper position in the disky 
insure that the requisite amount of motion 
shall be given to the plates q i by the revo 
lution of the stud ac, the plate 42 when set in 
proper position will by tending to prevent 
the frame formed by the arms or bars n, arms 
f', rods f, bar 1, brackets n, and rods n' from 
being distorted by any tendency which the 
drills or boring-tools 18, if in the form of 
twist-drills, may have to screw themselves 
into the holes tend to prevent such drills or 
boring - tools 18 from unduly entering the 
brush boards or stocks being bored or drilled, 
and such plate 42 will also when set in proper 
position serve as an abutment or stop to pre 
vent the plate i from being moved farther 
forward than the most forward position into 
which it may be allowable to bring it for the 
drilling of the holes in any particular brush 
boards or stocks for the drilling of which the 
machine may require to be set at any time, 
and by so acting as an abutment or stop to 
such plate i will hold such plate j in position 
while the block in which the stud at is secured 
is being adjusted into proper position in the 
groove in the disky and will so facilitate the 
setting of such stud a. in the different posi 
tions requisite from time to time. 
- 
Although illustrated in the accompanying 
drawings as applied to machines in which 
several brush boards or stocks are simulta 
95 
OO 
I o5 
... O 
I 1.5 
I 25 
 
neously subjected to the action of distinct 
stocks to be drilled, an adjustable stud 44 to 
drills by the use of one templet, the plate 42 
act as a stop to such stop-plate 42, a shaft 2 
and stud or stop 44 may be applied to ma 
carrying a disk provided with a crank-pin a 
chines of the kind described in the specifi 
to move the said plate i backward and for 
cation forming part of the Letters Patent of 
Ward, a clutch to bring the said shaft 2 into 
the United States numbered 471,709, granted 
connection as required with the driving-shaft 
unto the said George Shaw, Thomas Shaw, and 
5 of the machine and means to connect the 
said crank-pin to the said platei, said means 
John Peter Ditchfield. 
consisting partly of a stud 15 passed through 
What we claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
a curved slot q in a plate q secured to the 
1. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
said plate i, all arranged, employed and op 
erating for the purposes and substantially in 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 18, capa 
the manner hereinbefore described. 
ble of revolution but incapable of longitudi 
3. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
nal movement, a templet Cl, rods h moved 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
vertically and laterally by means of such 
combination of a number of drills 18, capable 
templet a, holders or sets of parts for hold 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
ing brush boards or stocks to be drilled equal 
movement, a templet Cl, means for moving 
in number to the drills 18 and supported upon 
such templeta, rods h moved vertically and 
the rods h so as to be moved vertically and 
laterally by means of such templet Cl, holders 
laterally thereby, a platej connected to the 
or sets of parts for holding brush boards or 
said rodsh, and provided with armsi'in which 
stocks to be drilled equal in number to the 
are provided studs formed with eyes which 
drills 18 and supported upon the rodsh. So as 
respectively embrace arms connected to the 
to be moved vertically and laterally thereby, 
apparatus by which the brush boards or stocks 
a plate i connected to the said rods hand pro 
vided with armsi'in which are provided studs 
to be drilled are held and so cause such 
formed with eyes which respectively embrace 
boards or stocks to be turned when moved 
vertically, means to support and guide the 
arms connected to the apparatus by which the 
said plate i, an adjustable stop-plate 42 sup 
brush boards or stocks to be drilled are held, 
ported by the rods h, and moved similarly to 
and so cause such brush boards or stocks to 
the brush boards or stocks to be drilled, an 
be turned when moved vertically, means to 
adjustable Stud 44 to act as a stop to such 
support and guide the said plate j, an adjust 
stop-plate 42, a shaft 2 carrying a disk pro 
able stop-plate 42 supported by the rods h 
vided with a crank-pin to move the said plate 
and moved similarly to the brush boards or 
i backward and forward, a clutch to bring 
stocks to be drilled, an adjustable stud 44 to 
the said shaft 2 into connection as required 
act as a stop to such stop-plate 42 a shaft 2 
with the driving-shaft 5 of the machine and 
carrying a disk provided with a crank-pin to 
means to connect the said crank-pin to the 
move the said platei backward and forward, 
said plate?, said means consisting partly of 
a clutch to bring the said shaft 2 into connec 
a stud 15, passed through a curved slot q in 
tion as required with the driving-shaft 5 of 
a plate q, secured to the said platei, all ar 
the machine and means to connect the said 
ranged, employed, and operating for the pur 
crank-pin to the said plate j, said means con 
poses and substantially in the manner here 
sisting partly of a stud 15 passed through a 
in before described. 
curved slot qin a plate q secured to the said 
2. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
plate i, all arranged, employed and operating 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
for the purposes and substantially in the 
combination of a number of drills 1S capable 
manner hereinbefore described. 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
4. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
movement, all receiving motion from one pull 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms the 
ley 19 by means of separate belts superim 
combination of a number of drills 18 capable 
posed in passing around such pulley 19, a 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
templet Cl, rods h moved vertically and later 
movement, all receiving motion from one pull 
ally by means of such templet a, holders or 
ley 19 by means of separate belts superim 
sets of parts for holding brush boards or 
posed in passing around such pulley 19, a tem 
stocks to be drilled equal in number to the 
plet Cl, means for moving such templet Cl, rods 
drills 18 and supported upon the rods h so as 
h. moved vertically and laterally by means of 
to be moved vertically and laterally thereby, 
such templet C, holders or sets of parts for 
a platei connected to the said rods hand pro 
holding brush boards or stocks to be drilled 
vided with armsi" in which are provided studs 
equal in number to the drills 18 and sup 
formed with eyes which respectively embrace 
ported upon the rods h so as to be moved ver 
arms connected to the apparatus by which the 
tically and laterally thereby, a plate i con 
brush boards or stocks to be drilled are held 
nected to the said rods h and provided with 
and SO calise Such brush boards or stocks to 
armsi" in which are provided studs formed 
be turned when moved verticaily, in eans to 
with eyes which respectively embrace arms 
Support and guide the said platei, an adjust 
connected to the apparatus by which the 
able stop-plate 42 supported by the rods h 
brush boards or stocks to be drilled are held, 
and moved similarly to the brush boards or and so cause such brush boards or stocks to 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
O 
25 
35 f 
45 
55 
 
ti, 
7 O 
75 
3O 
be turned when moved vertically, means to 
Support and guide the said plate i, an ad 
justable stop-plate 42 supported by the rods 
h, and moved similarly to the brush boards or 
stocks to be drilled, an adjustable stud 44 to 
act as a stop to Such stop-plate 42, a shaft 2 
carrying a disk provided with a crank-pin a 
to move the said plate j backward and for 
Ward, a clutch to bring the said shaft 2 into 
connection as required with the driving-shaft 
5 of the machine, and means to connect the 
said crank-pin to the said platei, said means 
consisting partly of a stud 15 passed through 
a curved slot q in a plate q secured to the 
said plate i, all arranged, employed and op 
erating for the purposes and substantially in 
the manner helrein before described. 
5. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 18, capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, a templet Cl, reciprocating jaws 22 
23 to move such templet vertically and later 
ally, rodsh, moved vertically and laterally by 
means of such templet Cl, holders or sets of 
parts for holding brush boards or stocks to 
be drilled equal in number to the drills 18 
and supported upon the rods h, so as to be 
moved vertically and laterally thereby, a 
plate i connected to the said rods h and pro 
vided with armsi'in which are provided studs 
formed with eyes which respectively embrace 
arms connected to the apparatus by which the 
brush boards or stocks to be drilled are held 
and so cause Such brush boards or stocks to 
be turned when moved vertically, means to 
Support and guide the said plate j, means to 
move the said platei backward and forward, 
and means to move the said jaws 22 23, all 
arranged, employed and operating for the 
purposes and Substantially in the manner 
hereinbefore described. 
6. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 18, capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, a templet Cl, reciprocating jaws 
22 23 to move such templet C. vertically and 
laterally, rods h moved vertically and later 
ally by means of such templet ct, holders or 
sets of parts for holding brushboards or stocks 
to be drilled equal in number to the drills 18 
and supported upon the rods h, so as to be 
moved vertically and laterally thereby, a plate 
55 j connected to the said rods h and provided 
with arms i' in which are provided studs 
formed with eyes which respectively embrace 
arms connected to the apparatus by which the 
brush boards or stocks to be drilled are held 
and SO cause such brush boards or stocks to 
be turned when moved vertically, means to 
support and guide the said platei, means to 
move the said platej backward and forward, 
and means to move the said jaws 22 23, all ar 
ranged, employed and operating for the pur 
poses and substantially in the manner here 
in before described. 
7. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 18, capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, all receiving motion from one pull 
ley 19 by means of separate belts superim 
posed in passing around such pulley 19, a tem 
plet Cl, reciprocating jaws 2223 to move such 
templet C vertically and laterally, rods h, 
moved vertically and laterally, by means of 
such templet Cl, holders or sets of parts for 
holding brush boards or stocks to be drilled 
equal in number to the drills 18 and supported 
upon the rods h, so as to be moved vertically 
and laterally thereby, a plate i connected to 
the said rods h and provided with armsi' in 
which are provided studs formed with eyes 
which respectively embrace arms connected 
to the apparatus by which the brush boards 
or stocks to be drilled are held and so cause 
such brushboards or stocks to be turned when 
moved vertically, means to support and guide 
the said plate i, means to move the said plate 
i backward and forward and means to move 
the Said jaWS 22 23, all arranged, employed 
and operating for the purposes and substan 
tially in the manner hereinbefore described. 
S. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 18, capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, all receiving motion from one pull 
ley 19 by means of separate belts superim 
posed in passing around such pulley 19, a 
templet Cl, reciprocating jaws 2223 to move 
such templet a vertically and laterally, rodsh. 
moved vertically and laterally by means of 
Such templet C, holders Or sets of parts for 
holding brush boards or stocks to be drilled 
equal in number to the drills 18 and supported 
upon the rodsh, so as to be moved vertically 
and laterally thereby, a platei connected to 
the said rods h and provided with armsi' in 
which are provided studs formed with eyes 
Which respectively embrace arms connected 
to the apparatus by which the brush boards 
or stocks to be drilled are held and so cause 
Such brushboards or stocks to be turned when 
moved vertically, means to support and guide 
the said plate j, an adjustable stop-plate 42 
supported by the rodsh, and moved similarly 
to the brush boards or stocks being drilled or 
bored, an adjustable stud 44 to act as a stop 
to Such stop-plate 42, means to move the said 
platei backward and forward and means to 
move the said jaws 22 23, all arranged, elm 
ployed and Operating for the purposes and 
substantially in the manner hereinbefore de 
Scribed. 
9. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 18, capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, a templet a reciprocating jaws 22 
23 to move such templet C vertically and lat 
erally, rods h moved vertically and laterally 
by means of such templet Cl, holders or sets 
45 
35 
9o 
95 
OO 
IC 
II5 
I 25 
 
2 
577,58? 
d 
of parts for holding brush boards or stocks 
to be drilled equal in number to the drills 18 
and supported upon the rods 7, so as to be 
moved vertically and laterally thereby, a 
plate i connected to the said rods hand pro 
vided with armsi'in which are provided studs 
formed with eyes which respectively embrace 
arms connected to the apparatus by which 
the brush boards or Stocks to be drilled are 
held and so cause such brushboards or stocks 
to be turned when moved vertically, means 
to support and guide the said platei, a shaft 
2 carrying a cam 32 to actuate the said jaws 
22 23 and a disk provided with a crank-pin 
a to move the said platej backward and for 
Ward, and a clutch to bring the said shaft 2 
into connection as required with the driving 
shaft 5 of the machine, and means to connect 
the said crank-pin to the said platei, said 
means consisting partly of a stud 15 passed 
through a curved slot of in a plate Q secured 
to the said platej, all arranged, employed and 
operating for the purposes and substantially 
in the manner hereinbefore described. 
10. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 18 capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, a templet Cl, reciprocating jaws 22 
23 to move such templet a vertically and lat 
erally, rods h moved vertically and later 
ally by means of such templet a, holders or 
sets of parts for holding brush boards or 
stocks to be drilled equal in number to the 
drills 18 and Supported upon the rodsh, so as 
to be moved vertically and laterally thereby, 
a plate i connected to the said rods h and 
provided with arms, in which are provided 
studs formed with eyes which respectively 
embrace arms connected to the apparatus by 
which the brush boards or stocks to be drilled 
are held and SO cause such brush boards or 
stocks to be turned when moved vertically, 
means to support and guide the said platei, 
an adjustable stop-plate 42 supported by the 
rods h and moved similarly to the brush 
boards or stocks being drilled, an adjustable 
stud 44 to act as a stop to such stop-plate 42, 
a shaft 2 carrying a cam 32 to actuate the 
said jaws 22 23 and a disk provided with a 
crank-pin a to move the said plate j back 
ward and forward, a clutch to bring the said 
shaft into connection as required with the 
driving-shaft 5 of the machine and means to 
connect the said crank-pin to the said plate 
i said means consisting partly of a stud 15 
passed through a curved slot of in a plate q 
secured to the said platei, all arranged, em 
ployed and Operating for the purposes and 
substantially in the manner hereinbefore de 
scribed. 
11. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 1S capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, all receiving motion from one pull 
ley 19 by means of separate belts superim 
posed in passing around such pulley 19 a. 
templet Cl, reciprocating jaws 2223 to move 
such templet a vertically and laterally, rodsh. 
moved vertically and laterally by means of 
such templet Cl, holders or sets of parts for 
holding brush boards or stocks to be bored 
or drilled equal in number to the drills 18 
and supported upon the rods h so as to be 
moved vertically and laterally thereby, a 
platei connected to the said rods hand pro 
vided with arms f' in which are provided 
studs formed with eyes which respectively 
embrace arms connected to the apparatus 
by which the brush boards or stocks to be 
drilled are held and so cause such brush 
boards or stocks to be turned when moved 
vertically, means to support and guide the 
said platei, a shaft 2 carrying a cam 32 to ac 
tuate the said jaws 22 23 and a disk provided 
with a crank-pin to move the said plate i 
backward and forward and a clutch to bring 
the said shaft 2 into connection as required 
with the driving-shaft 5 of the machine, and 
means to connect the said crank-pin to the 
said plate j, said means consisting partly of 
a stud 15 passed through a curved slot q in 
a plate q secured to the said plate i, all ar 
ranged, employed and operating for the pur 
poses and substantially in the manner here 
in before described. 
12. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 18 capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, all receiving motion from One pull 
ley 19 by means of separate belts superim 
posed in passing around such pulley 19 a tem 
plet Cl, reciprocating jaws 22 23 to move such 
templet a vertically and laterally, rods h. 
moved vertically and laterally by means of 
such templet Cl, holders or sets of parts for 
holding brush boards or stocks to be bored or 
drilled equal in number to the drills 18 and 
supported upon the rods h. So as to be moved 
vertically and laterally thereby, a plate icon 
nected to the said rods h and provided with 
arms j in which are provided studs formed 
With eyes which respectively embrace arms 
connected to the apparatus by which the brush 
boards or stocks to be drilled are held and so 
cause such brush boards or stocks to be turned 
when moved vertically, means to Support and 
guide the said plate i, an adjustable stop 
plate 42 supported by the rods hand moved 
similarly to the brush boards or stocks to be 
drilled, an adjustable stud 44 to act as a stop 
to such stop-plate 42, a shaft 2 carrying a cam 
32 to actuate the said jaws 22 23 and a disk 
provided with a crank-pin a to move the said 
plate i backward and forward, a clutch to 
bring the said shaft 2 into connection when 
required with the driving-shaft 5 of the ma 
chine, and means to connect the said crank 
pin to the said plate i said means consisting 
partly of a stud 15 passed through a curved 
slot qin a plate q secured to the said platei, 
all arranged, employed and Operating for the 
O 
3O 
45 
65 
 
13 
75 
purposes and substantially in the manner boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 18 capable 
herein before described. 
13. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, a templet a formed of pins a 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 1S capable 
mounted and capable of being moved in 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
boards, reciprocating jaws 2223 to act upon 
movement, a templet Cl, formed of pins a 
the said pins a when pressed into the space. 
mounted and capable of being moved in 
between such jaws 22 23 and so move such 
boards, reciprocating jaws 2223 to act upon 
templet vertically and laterally, rods h moved 
the said pins a when pressed into the space 
vertically and laterally by means of such tem 
between Such jaWS 2223 and so move the said 
plet a, holders or sets of parts for holding 
templet a vertically and laterally, rods h. 
brush boards or stocks to be drilled equal in 
moved vertically and laterally by means of 
number to the drills 18 and supported upon 
Such templet Cl, holders or sets of parts for 
the rods h, so as to be moved vertically and 
laterally thereby, a plate j connected to the 
holding brush boards or stocks to be drilled 
equalin number to the drills 18 and supported 
said rodsh, and provided with arms 'in which 
upon the rods h so as to be moved vertically 
are provided studs formed with eyes which 
and laterally thereby, a plate i connected to 
respectively embrace arms connected to the 
the said rods hand provided with arms j in 
apparatus by which the brushboards or stocks 
Which are provided studs formed with eyes 
to be drilled are held and so cause such brush 
Which respectively embrace arms connected 
boards or stocks to be turned when moved 
vertically, means to support and guide the 
to the apparatus by which the brush boards 
said platei, an adjustable stop-plate 42 Sup 
Or Stocks to be drilled are held and so cause 
ported by the rods h, and moved similarly to 
Such brushboards or stocks to be turned when 
moved Vertically, means to support and guide 
the brush boards or stocks being drilled, an 
the said plate i, means to move the said plate 
adjustable stud44 to act as a stop to Such stop 
?i backward and forward, and means to move 
plate 42, a shaft 2 carrying a cam 32 to actuate 
the said jaws 22 23, all arranged, employed 
the said jaws 2223 and a disk provided with 
and Operating for the purposes and substan 
a crank-pin a to move the said plate i back 
tially in the manner hereinbefore described. 
ward and forward, a clutch to bring the said 
14. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
shaft 2 into connection as required with the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
driving-shaft 5 of the machine, and means to 
connect the said crank-pin to the said plate i 
combination of a number of drills 18 capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
said means consisting partly of a stud i5 
passed through a curved slot q in a plate q. 
lmovement, a templet Cl, formed of pins a 
mounted and capable of being moved in 
secured to the said platei, all arranged, em 
boards, reciprocating jaws 2223 to act upon 
ployed and operating for the purposes and 
the Said pins a when pressed into the space 
substantially in the manner hereinbefore de 
between Such jaws 2223 and so move such 
scribed. 
templet vertically and laterally, rodsh moved 
16. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
Vertically and laterally by means of such tem 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
plet Cl, holders or sets of parts for holding 
combination of a number of drills 18 capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
brush boards or stocks to be drilled equal in 
number to the drills 18 and supported upon 
movement, all receiving motion from one pull 
the rods h, so as to be moved vertically and 
ley 19 by means of separate belts Superim 
laterally thereby, a plate i connected to the 
posed in passing around Such pulley 19, a 
said rods hand provided with armsi'in which 
templet a formed of pins amounted and ca 
pable of being moved in boards, reciprocating 
are provided studs formed with eyes which 
jaws 22 23 to act upon the said pins a when 
respectively embrace arms connected to the 
apparatus by Which the brushboards or stocks 
pressed into the space between such jaws 22 
23 and so move the said templet a vertically 
to be drilled are held and so cause such brush 
and laterally, rods h moved vertically and 
boards or stocks to be turned when moved 
Vertically, means to support and guide the 
laterally by means of such templet Cl, holders 
Said plate j, a shaft 2 carrying a cam 32 to ac 
or sets of parts for holding brush boards or 
tuate the said jaws 2223 and a disk provided 
stocks to be drilled equal in number to the 
with a crank-pin a to move the said platej 
drills 18 and supported upon the rods h, so as 
to be moved vertically and laterally thereby, 
backward and forward, a clutch to bring the 
said shaft 2 into connection as required with 
a platei connected to the said rods hand pro 
the driving-shaft 5 of the machine, and means 
vided with arms i' in which are provided 
to connect the said crank-pin to the said plate 
studs formed with eyes which respectively 
i said means consisting partly of a stud 15 
embrace arms connected to the apparatus by 
passed through a curved slot qin a plate q 
which the brushboards or stocks to be drilled 
secured to the said platei, all arranged, em 
are held and so cause such brush boards or 
ployed and operating for the purposes and 
stocks to be turned when moved vertically, 
means to support and guide the said plate?, 
Substantially in the manner hereinbefore de 
means to move the said plate i backward and 
scribed. 
15. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
forward and means to move the said jaWS 22 
Od 
TO5 
O 
II5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
14 
577,58? 
25 
35 
23 all arranged, employed and operating for 
the purposes and substantially in the manner 
hereinbefore described. 
17. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 1S capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, all receiving motion from one pull 
ley 19 by means of separate belts superim 
posed in passing around such pulley 19, a 
templet Cl, formed of pins a mounted and ca 
pable of being moved in boards, reciprocating 
jaWS 2223 to act upon the said pins a when 
pressed into the space between such jaws 22 
23 and so move the said templet a vertically 
and laterally, rods h moved vertically and 
laterally by means of such templet a, holders 
or sets of parts for holding brush boards or 
Stocks to be drilled equal in number to the 
drills 18 and supported upon the rods h so as 
to be moved vertically and laterally thereby, 
a plated connected to the said rodsh, and pro 
vided with arms f" in which are provided 
studs formed with eyes which respectively 
embrace arms connected to the apparatus by 
which the brush boards or stocks to be drilled 
are held and so cause such brush boards or 
stocks to be turned when moved vertically, 
means to support and guide the said platei 
an adjustable stop-plate 42 supported by the 
rods h and moved similarly to the brush 
boards or stocks being drilled, an adjustable 
stud 44 to act as a stop to such stop-plate 42, 
means to move the said plate j backward and 
forward and means to move the said jaws 22 
23, all arranged employed and operating for 
the purposes and substantially in the manner 
herein before described. 
18. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms, the 
combination of a number of drills 1S, capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, all receiving motion from one 
pulley 19 by means of separate belts super 
imposed in passing around such pulley 19, a 
templet C formed of pins a mounted and ca 
pable of being moved in boards, reciprocating 
jaWS 2223 to act upon the said pins a when 
pressed into the space between such jaws 22 
23 and so move such templet a vertically and 
laterally, rods h moved vertically and later 
ally by means of such templet a, holders or 
Sets of parts for holding brush boards or stocks 
to be drilled equal in number to the drills 1S 
and Supported upon the rods h so as to be 
moved vertically and laterally thereby, a plate 
i connected to the said rodsh, and provided 
With arms i' in which are provided studs 
formed with eyes which respectively embrace 
arms connected to the apparatus by which the 
brush boards or stocks to be drilled are held, 
and so cause such brush boards or stocks to 
45 
55 
 
be turned when moved vertically, means to 
support and guide the said plate i, a shaft 2 
carrying a cam 32 to actuate the said jaws 22 
23 and a disk provided with a crank-pinac to 
move the said platej backward and forward, 
a clutch to bring the said shaft 2 into connec 
tion as required with the driving-shaft 5 of 
the machine, and means to connect the said 
crank-pin to the said platei, said means con 
sisting partly of a stud 15 passed through a 
curved slot of in a plate q secured to the said 
plate j, all arranged, employed and operating 
for the purposes and substantially in the man 
ner hereinbefore described. 
19. In a machine for drilling holes in the 
boards or stocks of brushes and brooms the 
combination of a number of drills 18 capable 
of revolution but incapable of longitudinal 
movement, all receiving motion from one 
pulley 19 by means of separate belts super 
imposed in passing around such pulley 19, a 
templet Cl, formed of pins a mounted and ca 
pable of being moved in boards, reciprocating 
jaws 2223 to act upon the said pins a when 
pressed into the Space between such jaws 22 
23 and so move such templet a vertically and 
laterally rods h moved vertically and later 
ally by means of Such templet Cl, holders or 
sets of parts for holding brush boards or stocks 
to be bored or drilled equal in number to the 
drills 18 and supported upon the rodsh, so as 
to be moved vertically and laterally thereby, 
a platei connected to the said rodsh, and pro 
vided with armsi" in which are provided studs 
formed with eyes which respectively embrace 
arms connected to the apparatus by which 
the brush boards or stocks to be drilled are 
held and SO cause such brush boards or stocks 
to be turned when moved vertically, means 
to support and guide the said platei, an ad 
justable stop-plate 42 supported by the rods 
h, and moved similarly to the brush boards or 
stocks to be drilled, an adjustable stud 44 to 
act as a stop to Stlch Stop-plate 42, a shaft 2 
carrying a cam 32 to actuate the said jaws 22 
23 and a disk provided with a crank-pin a to 
move the said platej backward and forward, 
a clutch to bring the said shaft 2 into con 
nection as required with the driving-shaft 5 
of the machine, and means to connect the said 
crank-pin to the said plate j said means con 
sisting partly of a stud 15 passed through a 
curved slot of in a plate q secured to the said 
plate j, all arranged, employed and operating 
for the purposes and substantially in the man 
ner hereinbefore described. 
GEORGE SHAW. 
TIOMIAS SHAW. 
JOHN PETER DITCHFIELD. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR E. HALL, 
IHOWARD CHEETHAM. 
o 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
O 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577687.txt	(No Model.) 
W. M. JEWELL, 
CONTROLLING DEVICE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 577,687. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 577,687. 
W. M. JEWELL. 
CONTROLLING DEVICE, 
2 sheets 
Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897, 
 
zzzzzzzzzz 
No.sssssss) 
} 
the NORFs Peters.co. PHoro...THo, WASHINoron. p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM M. JEWELL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE O. H. JEWELL 
. 
FILTER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
contROLLING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 577,687, dated February 23, 1897. 
Application filed May 16, 1896, Serial No. 591,789, (No model.) 
TO 
20 
25 
To all whon, it inctly conce712: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM M. JEWELL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
5 Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Controlling Devices, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figures 1 and 2 are elevations of different 
parts of the controlling device. Fig. 3 is a 
vertical section. Fig. 4 is a plan view of one 
of the discharge-rings. Fig. 5 is a view show 
ing a modification. 
My invention relates to controlling devices 
or governors, and has for its object to pro 
vide a controlling device which will be par 
ticularly adapted for use in controlling the 
discharge from filters, but it is designed also 
for use with other mechanisms. 
I accomplish the object of my invention as 
hereinafter specified and as illustrated in the 
drawings. 
That which I regard as new will be set forth 
in the claims. 
In the drawings, 6 indicates a water-inlet 
pipe. 
7 indicates a water-tank with which the 
inlet-pipe 6 communicates, an extension S be 
ing provided which discharges the water from 
the inlet-pipe 6 into the tank 7 near the bot 
tom thereof. 
9 indicates a deflector arranged opposite 
the bottom of the pipe S to direct the water 
from said pipe laterally. 
10 indicates a butterfly-valve mounted on 
a stem 11 in the pipe 6. 
As best shown in Fig. 3, the tank 7 is pro 
vided with an opening at the bottom, around 
which is a circumferential shoulder 12. 
13 indicates a discharge-ring which is ellip 
tical or oval in shape, having an annular pas 
sage. By making the ring 13 oval or ellip 
tical it may be inserted into the tank 7 from 
below and fitted into place, as shown in Fig. 3. 
14 indicates a funnel arranged below the 
tank 7 and connected thereto by braces 15. 
16 indicates a discharge-pipe with which 
the funnel communicates. 
As shown in Fig. 3, the upper portion of the 
funnel 14 is of greater diameter than the tank 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
7, thereby forming an opening around said 
tank through which water may be discharged 
into the funnel 14 from Without. 
17 indicates a pipe which opens into the 
tank 7 about midway its length. 
18 indicates a flexible pipe which is con 
nected with the pipe 17 and with a discharge 
nozzle 19. As best shown in Fig. 2, the pipe 
1S is connected with the nozzle 19 by means 
of a rigid pipe 20. 
21 indicates a guide for the pipe 20. 
22 indicates a set-screw for the pipe 20, by 
which the nozzle 19 may be locked at any de 
sired altitude. 
23 indicates a bucket which is suspended 
by a rod 24 from a lever 25, mounted upon 
the pivot 11, which carries the butterfly 
valve 10. 
26 indicates a counterbalancing-weight con 
nected by a connecting-rod 27 to the opposite 
arm of the lever 25. 
28 indicates a weight connected by links 
29 30 to the arms of the lever 25. The object 
of the weight 28 is to lower the center of 
gravity and give more stability to the lever 25. 
31 32 indicate bars which are arranged over 
the lever 25 and serve as stops to limit its 
In OWeinent. 
As shown in Fig. 1, the bucket 23 is pro 
vided with a discharge-nozzle 33 at the bot 
tom to adapt it to discharge water from the 
bucket into the funnel 14. 
The operation of the controller is as fol 
lows: With a given flow of water from the 
pipe 6 into the tank 7 the water in the tank 
7 will remain at a corresponding height pro 
vided the discharge from the tank 7 is equal 
to the inflow. A certain amount of water will 
at the same time flow out of the tank 7 through 
the pipes 17 18 and nozzle 19 and be dis 
charged into the bucket 23, from which it will 
be discharged through the nozzle 33 to the 
funnel 14. If, however, the flow of water into 
the tank 7 increases, the head of water in said 
tank will increase, consequently increasing 
the outflow through the pipes 17 18 and noz 
zle 19 and increasing the discharge into the 
bucket 23. The weight of the bucket 23 will 
therefore increase, causing it to overbalance 
the counterweight 26 and rocking the butter 
fly-valve 10 in such manner as to partially 
Od 
2 
577,68? 
close the pipe 6, partially shutting off the wa 
ter and reducing the flow into the tank 7. 
Should the flow of water through the pipe 6 
decrease instead, the reverse operation will 
take place, in either case the flow of water be 
ing automatically regulated by the rocking 
of the lever 25 to keep the discharge from the 
tank 7 constant. The discharge is originally 
regulated by regulating the size of the dis 
charge-orifice in the ring 13. 
The operation of the bucket 23 is regulated 
by means of the adjustable pipe 20. Inas 
much as the flow of water through the nozzle 
19 depends upon the head of water in the tank 
7 above said nozzle, the flow may be increased 
or diminished by lowering or elevating said 
nozzle and the valve in the pipe be corre 
spondingly operated. The pipe 20 therefore 
provides for a more accurate adjustment of 
the Volume of the Water, as well as a more 
convenient adjustment, than by the removal 
of the rings 13. The range of adjustment, 
however, is not so great. 
Instead of using a lever 25 and providing it 
with the weight 28 a bent lever 34 may be pro 
vided, the link 24 being connected to one arm 
of said lever and a counterbalancing-weight 
35 to the opposite arm, the result being that 
when the lever 34 is rocked the weight 35 will 
be moved outward or inward, increasing or 
decreasing its leverage. 
I have described in detail the construction 
of my improved controlling device, but I do 
not desire to be limited to the specific details 
described, as many modifications may be made 
Without departing from the spirit of my in 
Vention. 
The form of lever 34 illustrated in Fig. 5 
is not claimed herein, as it forms the subject 
matter of another application filed by me of 
even date here with. 
That which I claim as my invention, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
1. In a controller for regulating the flow of 
liquid, the combination with a liquid-conduit, 
and a valve which controls the flow of the liq 
uid through said conduit, of a tank with which . 
Said conduit communicates and into which the 
liquid is discharged, an outlet from said tank, 
devices operated by the head of water in said 
tank to adjust said valve and thereby regu 
late the flow of liquid, and a removable ring 
having a discharge - Orifice, said ring being 
Substantially Oval in shape, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
2. In a controller for regulating the flow of 
liquid, the combination with a liquid-conduit, 
and a valve which controls the flow of the liq 
uid through said conduit, of a tank with which 
said conduit communicates and into which the 
liquid is discharged, an outlet from said tank, 
a bucket connected with said valve, a tube 
communicating with said tank and adapted 
to discharge water therefrom into said bucket, 
means for adjusting the outlet of said tube 
- Vertically, and means for discharging Water 
from said bucket, Substantially as and for the 
purpose Specified. 
3. In a controller for regulating the flow of 
liquid, the combination with a liquid-conduit, 
and a valve which controls the flow of the liq 
uid through said conduit, of a tank with which 
Said conduit communicates and into which the 
liquid is discharged, an outlet from said tank, 
a bucket connected with said valve, a tube 
communicating with said tank and adapted 
to discharge Water therefrom into said bucket, 
a guide for said tube, a set-screw for locking 
said tube at different heights, and means for 
discharging water from said bucket, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
WILLIAMI MI. JEWELI. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN L. JACKSON, 
ALBERT II. ADAMS. 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577787.txt	MEANS FOR ABSTRACTING PRECIOUS METALS FROM ORES, 
J. P. SCHMITZ, 
(No Model.) 
No. 577,787. 
Patented Feb. 23, 1897, 
 
 
HIHIHIRTELMAANDHIDHIDHUWIH 
HHHHHHHATRANNINNIHIHIHIHIRILI C) 
? 
387 ? 
Ge 
by 
WITNESSES : 
I/WWEWTOR 
- ??/vz Za?e? - s/q 
By 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN PETER SCHMITZ, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
MEANS FOR ABSTRACTING PRECOUS METALS FROM ORES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 577,787, dated February 23, 1897. 
Application filed March 30, 1896, Serial No. 585,502, (No model.) 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
To all ??h???, if ??? ??? ??r?: 
Be it known that I, JOHN PETER SCHMITZ, 
of the city and county of San Francisco, and 
State of California, have invented a new and 
Improved Means for Abstracting Precious 
Metals from Ores by an Amalgamation and 
Alloy Process; and I do hereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the same, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming part of 
this specification. 
My invention is embodied in the construc 
tion and combination of parts hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
In accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a 
vertical central section of my apparatus. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of 
the apparatus. Fig. 3 is a top plan view of 
the feed-pipe, the hopper being removed. 
Fig. 4 is a top view of one of the strainers. 
Fig. 5 is an edge view of two strainers placed 
one upon the other. 
A, Fig. 1, indicates the box or casing of 
the apparatus, which constitutes an amal 
gamating-box, B a feed-pipe, and C strain 
ers arranged within the casing or box A, one 
upon another. The hood or dome-like top D 
of the casing A has an opening d at one side, 
from the lower edge of which opening de 
pends an inclined lip or flange d', forming a 
chute. The opening d serves for egress of 
ore, placer ground, or sand, and the same 
slides down the chute d'. At a point oppo 
site the opening d two air-inlet pipes E are 
arranged. At the bottom of the box or cas 
ing A an outleti-pipe F, having a cock f, is 
provided. 
A rod H, Fig. 1, passes vertically and cen 
trally through the strainers C and is stepped 
in a support g', fixed on the bottom of the cas 
ing A. At the point where the rod G passes 
through and is journaled in the dome D it is 
cylindrical, but where it passes through the 
strainers C it is polygonal or flat, so that it 
is adapted to rotate freely in the dome D and 
step g', but carries the strainers C with it in 
its rotation. A funnel His secured at h onto 
an iron head-piece or ring b, screwed onto 
feeding-pipe B. Said head-piece or ring bhas 
a projecting arm b'. 
At its end b is pinned 
the leverage-rod i. 
I represents a movable cover, very accu 
rately covering the opening of pipe B in head 
piece or ring b. The cover I, leverage-rod i, 
and solid ball i' are in one piece, so that in 
taking hold of the outer end of rod the cover 
I can be pushed off the head-piece or ring b 
and then rests on projection b. 
K, Fig. 7, is a toothed wheel fastened on 
the flat iron rod G. The iron rod i acts as a 
pusher or pawl, being in connection with said 
wheel and leverage-rod i, so that when the 
cover I is pushed back and forward the wheel 
turns a part of a revolution, and thereby ro 
tates the strainers C, Fig. 4, correspondingly 
and stirring the contents of tube or box A. 
In the use of this my improved invention 
the operation is as follows: Having set up 
the apparatus, as described, the tube or box 
A, pipe B, strainers C, and hood D, in proper 
position, the tube or box A is filled nearly 
full with quicksilver. Then the crushed ore, 
placer-ground gravel, or sand containing the 
gold is thrown into pipe B through funnel H, 
the cover I being previously pushed aside, as 
indicated by dotted lines, Fig. 2. When pipe 
B is nearly full of ore or sand, the cover I is 
pushed back and over the top opening of pipe 
B, closing it air-tight, the solid ball acting 
as a weight on the cover. Then from an air 
pump connected with pipe L compressed air 
is forced through pipe L and into pipe B. 
The compressed air forces the ore or sand in 
pipe B downward and out of the lower open 
ing of this pipe, when, on account of differ 
ence of natural gravity between quicksilver, 
ore, and sand, as well as the force of the com 
pressed air, said ore or sand quickly perco 
lates upward through the quicksilver and 
strainers and floats on top of the quicksilver 
just below the hood D, but it has parted with 
its gold, which has united with the quicksilver. 
At the same time from an air-pump connected 
with pipes E E compressed air is forced 
through these pipes, thereby blowing the ore 
or sand away and out of the opening dat 
hood D. Said ore or sand rolling down on 
chute d is deprived of its gold. The opera 
tion is repeated with fresh ore or sand, which 
can be done very quickly. 
When a large quantity of ore has been 
worked and the quicksilver is considerably 
amalgamated with gold, or, on the other 
hand, when the hot melted lead is consider 
35 
45 
 
55 
?? 
75 
95 
OC 
2 
577,787 
ably alloyed with gold, silver, or other metal, 
then is the quicksilver or lead in tube or box 
A allowed to runoff through pipe F. The tube 
or box A is then refilled with fresh quicksil 
Ver or lead, as the case may be, and the ap 
paratus is ready again for further operations. 
The precious metals so taken from tube or 
box A are then separated or abstracted from 
the amalgam or alloy in the usual manner 
generally known. 
It will be noticed that it is not necessary to 
have strainers in tube or box. A for the ore. 
and air to percolate upward through the 
quicksilver or hot lead, respectively, but I ap 
ply the strainers for the purpose of dividing 
the ore more perfectly, so that each particle 
gets in contact with the quicksilver or lead; 
again, that the ore should not percolate and 
pass through in lumps. 
As shown in Fig. 5, the strainers have 
notches c' and lugs c, which engage and lock 
them together, so that they are not rotatable 
individually, and, as will be observed by in 
spection of Fig. 1, each strainer is so arranged 
relative to the adjacent ones. that its open 
ings or passages do not coincide with theirs. 
Hence the ore finds a tortuous passage and 
is agitated and thoroughly mixed when pass 
ing up through the strainers. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
lS 
1. The combination, with the feeding-pipe, 
having a lateral arm, of the cover I, and its 
leverage-rod pivoted to said arm, the pusher 
i, attached to such rod, a ratchet, a vertical 
rod on which the latter is fixed, and a series 
of rotatable strainers attached to said verti 
cal rod, and the tube or box inclosing the 
strainers, as shown and described. 
2. In an amalgamator, the combination, 
with a tube or box, having a vertical feed 
pipe, a lateral outlet, an air-pipe connected 
with the feed-pipe, a pivoted and laterally 
slidable cover for said pipe, a weighted lever 
age-rod for holding the cover pressed down 
upon the pipe while air is being forced in, 
and strainers arranged substantially as shown 
and described. 
3. In an amalgamator, the combination of 
the feed-tube, ring b, with its projecting 
arms b', and b*, with feeding-pipe B, funnel 
H, cover I, and air-pipe L, substantially as 
and for the purpose shown and described. 
4. In an amalgamator, the cover I, having 
leverage-rod i, and ball i', in combination 
with head-piece or ring b, pusher land feed 
ing-pipe B, substantially as and for the pur 
poses shown and described. 
JOEIN PETER SCHIMITZ. 
Witnesses: 
E. A. ORMSBY, 
W. D. COATES. 
35 
45 
55 
5 
IO 
2 ? 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577887.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
J. E. STANTON. 
DENTAL MALLET, 
No. 577,887, 
Patented Mar, 2, 1897. 
N.E. 
f2S 
244aaaaaad 3. 
Yaza 
P 
UE 
try 
2 
 
  
 
 
 
a 411aaa. 
The NORRIS PETERS co PHOTO. Tho...washington, d, c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JERE E. STANTON, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
DENTAL MAL LET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 577,887, dated March 2, 1897. 
Application filed March 25, 1896, Serial No. 584,787, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, Luhon, it nail? concern: 
Be it known that I, JERE. E. STANTON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and Common 
wealth of Massachusetts, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Dental Mallet, of which 
the following is a full specification. 
My invention relates particularly to the 
class of dental implements known as mal 
lets, the objects of my improvements being, 
first, to construct an angle-mallet or one in 
which the blow is dealt at an angle with the 
longitudinal axis of the implement, and, sec 
Ond, to adapt it to be operated by a pneu 
matic bulb. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 shows a complete device embodying 
my invention, part being shown in elevation 
and part in perspective. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged longitudinal section of the mallet. 
Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are sectional detail views 
further enlarged. 
The mechanism of the mallet is inclosed in 
the casing or handle AA, made in two parts, 
of which the part A is a simple tube closed 
at the outer end by the screw-cap a. The 
part A', as here shown, has at one end the 
connecting-piece a, whereby the two parts A 
and A may be readily joined together or de 
tached, preferably by a bayonet-joint. The 
part A' carries the tube a, in which is held 
the spring BB", the outer end of the tube 
and spring being bent at any angle at which 
it is desired to deliver the blows. 
bis the tool which gives the blows, and 
this is detachable from the tool-holder b, be 
ing frictionally held therein in the manner 
shown in Fig. 3. Different tools may thus be 
inserted, depending on the character of the 
Work. The tool-holderb has the shankb, by 
which it is attached to the spring B, the said 
spring being closely drawn over the shank. 
b' is a flange or stop on the tool-holder, 
which normally rests against the bottom of 
the tube a. 
a' is a cap-piece which screws over the end 
of the tube a. 
The spring BB', as here shown, is made in 
two parts joined together by the coupling 
piece B. (See Fig. 5.) This construction is 
preferable in the present form of device to a 
single spring for reasons presently to be seen, 
- 
The springs B B are tightly drawn over the 
shanks on each side of the coupling-piece B, 
and thus frictionally held thereto, or, if de 
sired, they may be screwed on. The two parts 
B B' form in any event virtually one spring. 
In a similar manner the shank His secured 
to the inner end of the spring B", the shank 
being provided with the conical head h. 
K is a piston which moves back and forth 
in the tube A and has the packing k. The 
piston is hollow in the inside and carries a 
clutch consisting in the present case of a 
pair of jaws LL', pivoted together at l. In 
the drawings the jaws are directly connected 
to the piece K", which screws into the piston 
K. The jaws LL' are normally held together 
in the position shown in Fig. 2 by means of 
the spring l'. 
N is a shank which plays loosely in a hole 
in the piston K, being provided with the con 
ical head m, which is so arranged that when 
the shank N is pressed against the jaws it 
will force them apart against the pressure of 
the spring l'. 
The piston Kis kept in the position shown 
in Fig.2 by means of the cushioning-spring G. 
The tube A has the inlet air-tube a, which 
is connected by the flexible tube E with the 
pneumatic bulb C. 
The screw-cap a has the screw F, prefer 
ably provided with a milled head. 
f is a piece let into the screw F, against 
which the shank n, bears when the piston is 
driven through the tube A. 
a is an air-outlet passage. 
The parts are so constructed and arranged 
that by pressure on the bulb C the piston K 
is driven toward the cap C, thereby drawing 
out the spring B B', which for all intents and 
purposes, as was said above, may be consid 
ered as one spring, the conical head h being 
held between the jaws L L of the clutch. 
When in the journey of the piston the shank 
N comes in contact with the piece for with 
the inner end of the screw F, the conical head 
in is driven between the jaws LL', separating 
the same and causing them to open out like 
a pair of ice-tongs, thus releasing the head h 
at the end of the spring B B'. The resultis, 
then, that the spring B B', released by the 
clutch, quickly snaps together, with the ef 
fect that a sharp blow is imparted to the tool 
r 
95 
OO 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
 
2 
577,887 
b. When pressure is taken off the bulb C, 
the piston K is driven back to the position 
shown in Fig. 2 by means of the spring G, the 
conical head h, at the end of the spring forc 
ing apart the jaws L. L and being locked 
therein. 
E" is an inlet-valve in the tube E to supply 
air to the bulb. 
The object of the enlarged coupling-piece 
B is to practically fill the tube a, so as to 
prevent the air from passing out through the 
tube a. If other means are provided to pre 
vent the air-egress at this point, the spring 
B B' can be made in one piece. 
The action of the spring B B in striking 
the blow around a corner is one of the chief 
features of my invention. The spring is held 
during its stretching by the flange b' at its 
Outer end, and when, after stretching, the in 
ner end of the spring is released the snapping 
together causes the blow. The spring is very 
closely wound, so that normally the coils are 
in contact when closed together. 
A spring made of round wire is shown in 
Figs. 2 and 3. In this case the shank bon 
the tool-holder is preferably long enough to 
pass around the bend of the spring, as shown 
in Fig. 3, so as to prevent any possible over 
riding of the strands of the spring around the 
curve when the spring snaps together. If the 
Spring-wire is square in section, as shown in 
Fig. 4, the shank b of the holder b may sim 
ply enter the spring far enough to be fric 
tionally held therein, as no buckling of the 
Spring could occur. 
The strength of the blow depends, of course, 
on the length to which the spring is distended 
before being released, and this is regulated 
by means of the thumb-screw F. At the mo 
ment of striking the blow the flange b' is 
driven momentarily out of contact with the 
end of the tube (t. 
The bulb C is preferably worked by the heel 
of the operator, and it is of considerable im 
portance that it be so placed with reference 
to the foot that no attention need be given in 
finding the bulb by the foot, as would be nec 
essary Were the bulb loose on the ground. 
For this reason I prefer to have the bulb se 
cured to a frame whichfits upon the operator's 
foot, the arrangement being as shown in Fig. 
1. The bulb C is secured to the heel-piece 
D, which, by means of the sliding plate D*, 
is connected with the toe-plate D'. 
By means of a slot and screw and with the 
adjustable toe-strap D8 the foot-piece may be 
adapted to any size of foot and so adjusted 
that when the foot is slipped under the strap 
D the operator has the bulb C directly un 
der his heel. 
A practicable angle-mallet, or one in which 
the pounding-tool at the end may be at any 
angle with the axis of the handle, even up to 
a right angle there with, and at the same time 
arranged to deliver a blow in direct line with 
the said pounding-tool, has long been de 
sired. It will be seen that my mechanism, in 
Volving a bent spring constrained by a suit 
able curved or bent support to hold the tool at 
an angle with the axis of the handle and held 
at its outer or tool-bearing end, makes such 
an angle-mallet possible. Moreover, instead 
of inclosing the tool-bearing spring in a tube 
it may, if desired, be arranged to operate on 
a bent or curved mandrel without affecting 
the principle. 
While I prefer to have the tool-bearing 
spring distended and released by pneumatic 
means, as shown, I do not confine myself to 
this form, as, if desired, the outer end of the 
said spring might be so arranged as to be dis 
tended and released directly by the fingers 
of the operator ol' by any other means. 
I claim 
1. In a pneumatic dental mallet, the com 
bination of a handle with a tube, a tool-bear 
ing spring engaging with said tube near the 
outer or tool-bearing end, and provided at its 
inner end with a head, a reciprocating spring 
cushioned piston provided with a clutch 
adapted to engage with said head, air inlet 
and outlet passages and a pneumatic bulb, 
all arranged and operating substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
2. In a pneumatic dental mallet, a handle 
provided with suitable air inlet and outlet 
passages, and having the regulating-screw F, 
in combination with a pneumatic bulb, a tool 
bearing spring provided with the head h, a 
reciprocating spring - Cushioned piston pro 
vided with the pivoted spring-jaws L. L', 
adapted to engage with the head h, and the 
shank and spindle N, 12, adapted to engage 
with said jaws, all arranged and operating 
substantially as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
JERE E. STANTON. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN P. SWEENEY, 
WILLIAM E. GARDLNER. 
75 
85 
9 O 
95 
CO 
Ic 5 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US577987.txt	(No Model.) 
W. B. NUCKOLS & P. L. RAMSEY 
CUT-OFF, 
No. 577,987. 
 
Patented Mar. 2, 1897. 
Hinesses 
Iogepipes, 
Zy 2z/Z.7ze;762s 
55 Z, Zeyamsey. 
RIS PETERS co, PHoro-THo. washington.o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
VIRGIL B. NUCKOLS AND PHILIP L. RAMSEY, OF ELKTON, KENTUCKY. 
CUT-OFF. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 577,987, dated March 2, 1897. 
Application filed June 24, 1896, Serial No. 596,786, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
carrying at their upper ends a segmentally- 5o 
Be it known that we, VIRGIL B. NUCKOLS 
curved cut-off slide 7. This slide normally 
and PHILIPL. RAMSEY, citizens of the United 
lies over the opening 4 of the hood 3 and is 
States, residing at Elkton, in the county of 
designed to cut off the flow of the molasses or 
Todd and State of Kentucky, have invented 
other substance as the same is poured from 
a new and useful Cut-Off for Molasses and 
the holder 1 when it is desired to stop the flow 55 
Similar Holders, of which the following is a 
of such. 
specification. 
Secured to the inner sides of the hood 3 and 
adjacent to the supporting-arms 6 are springs 
This invention relates to new and usefulim 
provements in cut-offs for molasses and simi 
8. The lower end of each of said springs is 
lar holders; and it has for its object to pro 
permanently attached to the lower part of the 6o 
vide a device of this character which shall 
hood 3 and the body of the spring is coiled 
effectually cut off the flow of the molasses or 
around the shaft 5, the upper ends extending 
other substance as the same is poured from 
along the arms 6 and each being bent at a 
the holder, and, further, to embody in the 
right angle to the body, so as to press against 
construction of the device simple and efficient 
said arms and by reason of the tension of the 65 
means whereby the cut-off slide is maintained 
springs thereby retain the slide 7 in its nor 
in a free condition, so as to be easily operated. 
mal position. 
To this end the invention consists, substan 
A spout 9 is also disposed in the hood 3 at 
tially, in the construction, combination, and 
the side in which the opening 4 is formed, and 
arrangement of parts, as will be hereinafter 
said spout extends in a substantially vertical 7o 
fully illustrated, described, and claimed. 
plane, its upper end projecting a short dis 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
tance above the lower side of said opening to 
a perspective view of a molasses or similar 
permit the molasses or other substance read 
holder provided with a cut-off constructed in 
ily passing therethrough when pouring the 
accordance with the present invention. Fig. 
same, and being slightly bent to squarely 75 
2 is a longitudinal sectional view thereof. 
meet the cut-off slide 7 as the latter descends 
Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view of the 
to close the opening 4. It is to be noted that 
same. Fig. 4 is a detail perspective view of 
a small space is formed between the spout 9 
the cut-off slide. 
and the side of the hood 3, and said space 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
provides a pocket for the reception of the 8o 
responding parts throughout the figures. 
slide 7. It will therefore be seen that when 
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates a 
said slide returns to its normal position after 
molasses or similar holder, which may be of 
the flow of molasses or other substance has 
any approved construction and is provided 
been cut off any of the same which remains 
with a handle 2 for carrying purposes. 
on the slide will drain into the holder 1, the 85 
At the top of the holder 1 a hood 3 is se 
lower end of the spout 9 being fastened in a 
cured in any suitable manner, and the said 
position to effect such a result, and also to 
hood, which may be of any desired material 
guide the molasses or other substance to the 
and shape, is preferably in the form of a trun 
opening 4 when it is desired to pour the same 
cated cylinder, an opening 4 being formed in 
from said holder. 
one of its sides through which the molasses 
For operating the cut-off slide 7 in order to 
or other substance may pass when pouring 
uncover the opening 4 a U-shaped yoke-lever 
the same from the holder 1. Arranged trans 
10 is employed. The lever 10 is arranged on 
versely within the hood 3 is a shaft 5, the 
the outside of the hood 3 and has each of its 
ends of which are journaled in and extend 
ends rigidly secured to the ends of the shaft 95 
through opposite sides of said hood, and pro 
5, which extend through the sides of said 
jecting upwardly from said shaft, adjacent 
hood, and the body of said lever is provided 
to each end thereof, are supporting-arms 6, with a loop 11, upon which a finger or thumb 
25 
35 
45 
e 
577,98? 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
may be placed to manipulate the lever when 
it is desired to remove the slide 7 away from 
the opening 4. 
The operation and advantages of the herein 
described cut-off will be readily understood by 
those skilled in the art. In practice, when 
molasses or other similar substance has been 
placed in the holder 1 and it is desired to pour 
a portion of the same therefrom, the yoke 
lever 10 is depressed toward the handle 2, by 
which operation the cut-off slide 7 is moved 
so as to uncover the opening 4. By tilting the 
holder 1 the contents thereof will pass through 
Said opening, and in order to stop the flow of 
the same it is simply necessary to release the 
pressure upon the yoke-lever 10, when the 
slide 7, by reason of the springs 8 pressing 
against the Supporting-arms 6, will immedi 
ately return to its normal position over the 
opening 4 and cut off the flow. Any of the 
molasses or other substance which may re 
main on the slide 7 will drain through the 
space formed between the spout 9 and the 
side of the hood 3 and return to the holder 1, 
thus leaving the slide free and clean. 
From the foregoing it will be apparent that 
we have provided a cut-off which is simple in 
Construction, easily manipulated, and adapted 
for use With any suitable holder of molasses 
and similar substances. The spring-actu 
ated slide 7 will effectually cut off the flow of 
the contents from the holder, and by reason 
of the arrangement of the spout 9 with re 
spect to the hood 3 any of the molasses or 
other substance which may remain upon the 
slide 7 after the flow thereof has been cut off 
will be returned to the holder, said slide re 
maining in a clean state, so as to be easily 
operated. 
If so desired, the hood 3 may be detachably 
secured to the holder 1 in any suitable man 
ner, and by this construction it will be seen 
that the cut-off may be applied to any ordi 
nary cup and effectively used therewith, the 
necessity of any particular form of holder be 
ing thereby overcome. 
Changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction may be resorted 
to Without departing from the spirit or sacri 
ficing any of the advantages of this invention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new, and desired to be secured 
by Letters Patent, is- 
1. In a cut-off of the class described, the 
combination of a vessel, a truncated cylin 
drical hood covering the top of the vessel and 
composed of straight sides and a curved top 
extending from one side of the vessel to the 
other and provided at one side with a liquid 
discharge opening, a curved slide arranged 
within the hood, guided on the curved top 
thereof and provided with an exterior oper 
ating-handle, and a spout mounted within the 
hood adjacent to the discharge-opening, and 
arranged to coperate with the curved slide 
- 
to cut off the flow of the liquid, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a cut-off as described, the combina 
tion of the holder having a hood covering the 
top and provided with a single discharge 
opening, a curved cut-off slide arranged with 
in the hood and normally held in closed posi 
tion and having hand-operated devices for 
swinging it to an open position, and a Spout 
or guide member for leading the liquid to the 
discharge-opening, said spout having its up 
per end in close contact with one side of the 
curved cut-off slide, the latter being adapted 
to enter the space between the spout and the 
hood, substantially as shown and described. 
3. In a cut-off of the class described, the com 
bination, with a molasses or similar holder, 
of a hood applied thereto and provided with 
an opening for the passage of the contents of 
said holder, a spring-actuated slide disposed 
in said hood and adapted to cut off the flow 
of said contents through said opening, a spout 
also disposed in said hood and adapted to 
guide the contents to the opening thereof, 
said spout having its upper end extended 
above the lower edge of the discharge-open 
ing and in close contact with the cut-off, and 
means for operating the slide, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. In a cut-off of the class described, the com 
bination, with a molasses or similar holder, 
of a hood applied thereto and provided with 
an opening for the passage of the contents of 
said holder, a shaft arranged within said hood, 
supporting-arms secured to said shaft, a slide 
carried by said supporting-arms and adapted 
to cut off the flow of the contents of the hood 
through the opening thereof, springs secured 
to the inner sides of said hood and adapted 
to normally hold said cut-off slide over said 
opening to close the same, and a lever secured 
to said shaft and adapted to operate the cut 
off slide to uncover the opening of the hood, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. In a cut-off of the class described, the com 
bination, with a molasses or similar holder, 
of a hood applied thereto and provided with 
an opening for the passage of the contents of 
said holder, a shaft arranged within said hood, 
supporting-arms secured to said shaft, a cut 
off slide carried by said supporting-arms and 
adapted to normally close the opening of the 
hood, springs secured to the inner sides of 
said hood and adapted to hold the cut-off 
slide in its normal position, a Spout also se 
cured within the hood and together with one 
side of the latter forming a pocket for the re 
ception of the cut-off slide, and means for 
operating said cut-off slide, substantially as 
set forth. 
6. In a cut-off of the class described, the colm 
bination, with a molasses or similar holder, 
of a hood applied thereto and provided with 
an opening for the passage of the contents of 
said holder, a shaft arranged within said hood 
75 
9o 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
65 
 
577,987 
3 
and having its ends extending through the 
sides thereof, a slide carried by said shaft 
and adapted to cut off the flow of said con 
tents through the opening of the hood, and a 
U-shaped yoke-lever arranged on the outside 
of the hood and having its ends secured to 
the ends of the shaft and adapted to operate 
said shaft to uncover the opening in the hood, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that We claim the foregoing as Io 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
WIRGIL B. NUCKOILS. 
PHILIP L. RAMSEY. 
Witnesses: 
J. C. JOHNSON, 
J. C. PERKINs. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578088.txt	(No Model.) 
T00L, FOR OUTTING IRREGULAR GROOWES IN ROLLS OF ROLLING MILS 
J. G. WALTER, 
w 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 578,088. 
 
Patented Mar, 2, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
T00L, FOR OUTTING IRREGULAR GROOVES IN ROILS OF ROLLING MILLS, 
No. 578,088, 
Patented Mar, 2, 1897. 
J. G. WALTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
orris Peters co, PHoro-THO. wasticon.o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JACOB GILBERT WALTER, OF ALTOONA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
T00L FOR CUTTING R REGULAR GROOVES IN ROLLS OF ROLLING-MILLS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,088, dated March 2, 1897. 
Application filed July 14, 1896, Serial No. 599,114. (No model.) 
25 
O 
To all, whom, it nau concern. 
Be it known that I, JACOB GILBERT WAL 
TER, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Altoona, in the county of Blair and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Tools for Cutting 
Irregular Grooves in the Rolls of Rolling 
Mills; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in tools for cutting irregular grooves in the 
rolls of rolling-mills for rolling brake-levers 
for street-railway cars and like articles; and 
the object is to provide a tool for cheaply, 
simply, and expeditiously forming the irregul 
lar grooves in said rolls required in the pro 
duction of said brake-levers and the like. 
To this end the novelty consists in the con 
struction, combination, and arrangement of 
the same, as will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings the same 
figures of reference indicate the same parts. 
of the invention. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a device 
embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a cross 
section of a roll with the templet or pattern 
in place. Fig. 3 is a similar view showing the 
templet or pattern in place and the groove 
cut corresponding to the pattern. Fig. 4 is a 
cross-section of a pair of the rolls with the 
irregular groove cut in them and in their rela 
tive relation to each other. Fig. 5 is a cross 
section of the rollon the line of the cutting-tool. 
Fig. 6 is a plan view of a pair of the lever 
4oblanks as they come from between the rolls. 
Fig. 7 is a plan view of the templet or pattern 
detached from the roll, and Fig. 8 is a per 
spective view of the grooving-tool detached 
from the tool-post. 
1 is the bed-frame, on which are mounted 
the cross-arms 22, having dovetail depending 
jaws, which engage the dovetail flange on the 
upper longitudinal parallel edges of the bed 
frame. Each arm is provided with the stand 
ards 33' and an integral lug 4, having a lag 
Screw 5. 
6 is the tool-rest, and it consists of a flat 
SO 
45 
35 
metal plate adjustably secured in place on 
the cross-arms, between the front standards 
33 and the lugs 4 4, by means of the lag 
screws 5. 
It will thus be seen that the cross 
arms 22, carrying the standards, can be ad 
justed to and from each other to correspond 
to the length of the rolls to be grooved. 
7 is a longitudinal slot in the plate 6 through 
which the rectangular leg 8 of the tool-post 9 
extends, it being first adjusted longitudinally 
and then rigidly secured in said slot by a 
taper-key 10, passing through a slot 12 in the 
leg 8, clamping the shoulders 13 of the tool 
post down firmly on the face of the plate 6. 
This tool-post is provided with a transverse 
rectangular slot 14, the bottom of which ex 
tends across the slot in the plate 6 on a line. 
slightly below the line of the face of said 
plate, so that when the grooving-tool 15 is in 
serted in the slot in the tool-post its bottom 
side rests upon the face of the plate. 6 and 
slides freely thereon through the slot 14 in the 
tool-post, it having no lateral or up-and-down 
motion whatever, but simply a longitudinal 
sliding motion in its own plane back and 
forth through the tool-post. 
16 is a stud on the face of the plate 6, to 
which is secured one end of a flat spring 17, 
which extends longitudinally along the plate, 
and its opposite end is provided with an ori 
fice 18, which engages the shouldered end 19 
of the adjusting-screw 20, mounted in the 
adjustable lug 21, the leg 22 of which passes 
through the longitudinal slot 23 in the plate 
6. Said lug 21 is adjustably secured in place 
in said slot by a taper-key 24, passing through 
an orifice 25 in the leg 22, in the same man 
ner set forth in the description of the tool 
post. 
26 represents the roll to be grooved. It is 
first mounted in the standards 33' 33, and 
a templet or pattern 26' is secured to its pe 
riphery a little to one side of where the groove 
is to be cut by means of the sunken-head set 
screws 27, which rigidly secure said pattern 
to the roll, so as to turn with it. When in 
this position the friction-roller on the later 
ally-projecting stud 28 on the grooving-tool 
15 presses against the periphery of the tem 
plet or pattern, being held in contact there 
with by the spring 17, pressing against the 
rear of the grooving-tool, and it will readily 
55 
65 
o 
75 
90 
95 
- 
- 
- - 
- - 
- 
- 
- 
. 
2 
578,088 
be seen that when the roll 26 is rotated by 
any suitable means in the direction of the ar 
row the spring presses the grooving-tool for 
Ward, and the tool continues cutting a true 
groove until its pin comes in contact with the 
highest point on the pattern. This prevents 
the tool from being pressed into the groove 
any farther, and as the roll and the pattern 
continue to revolve the depth of the cutting 
edge of the tool gradually conforms to the 
outline of the pattern. Consequently the 
outline of the groove is a facsimile of the 
reverse of the outline of the pattern. When 
this is done, the roller on the stud 28 bears 
equally around the face of the pattern and 
the tool ceases cutting. The roll is then re 
moved from the standards and the pattern 
removed from the roll is ready for use, a pair 
of them being mounted in the relative posi 
tions shown in Fig. 4. When a heated bar of 
iron is fed between them, it will assume the 
shape of the blank shown in Fig. 6. 
As shown in Fig. 8, the grooving-tool is pro 
vided with a cutting edge 29 and a slot 30, 
which receives the screw-threaded shank 31 
of the stud 28, carrying the friction-roller, 
and by means of the nut 32 the stud and its 
roller may be adjusted with reference to the 
cutting edge of the tool to cut the grooves in 
the roller deeper or shallower, as occasion 
requires, and also to compensate for the wear 
of the cutting edge due to use and sharpening. 
Although I have specifically described the 
construction and relative arrangement of the 
several elements of my invention, I do not 
desire to be confined to the same, as such 
changes or modifications may be made as 
clearly fall within the scope of my invention 
without departing from the spirit thereof. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new and useful, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
S-S- 
1. A machine for grooving rolls for rolling 
mills, comprising the adjustable cross-arms, 
provided with standards 33' and integral lugs 
4 having lag-screws 5, and the plate 6 pro 
vided with the slot 23, the adjustable lug 21 
having the adjusting-screw 20, the spring 17 
- 
forth. 
secured at One end to the stud 16 on the face 
of the plate 6, also provided with the longi 
tudinal slot 7, in combination with the tool 
post 9, adjustably secured in said slot 7, and 
provided with the rectangular slot 14, the 
grooving-tool 15, mounted in Said slot 14 and 
provided with a laterally-projecting stud 28, 
and the pattern 26 removably secured to the 
roll by means of the sunken-head set-screws 
27, substantially as and for the purpose set 
2. A machine for making irregular grooves 
in the rolls of rolling-mills, comprising the 
pattern secured to the roll, the tool-rest, the 
tool-post adjustably secured therein, and the 
grooving-tool mounted in said tool-post and 
provided with a slot 30, in which is adjustably 
secured the stud 28, on the projecting end of 
which is mounted a fiction-roller, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
3. A machine for grooving the rolls of roll 
ing-mills, comprising the bed-frame 1, the ad 
justable cross-arms 22, having standards 33', 
and integral lugs 4 provided with lag-screws 
5, the plate 6 secured on said arms, between 
the standards 33' and the lugs 4, by said lag 
screws, and provided with the stud 16, the 
spring 17 having one end secured to said stud, 
the adjusting-screw 20 engaging the opposite 
end of said spring and mounted in the lug 21, 
the leg 22 of which is adjustably secured in a 
slot 23 in said plate, in combination with the 
tool-post 9 adjustably secured in the longitu 
dinal slot 7 in said plate 6, and provided with 
the rectangular slot 14, the grooving-tool 15 
mounted in said slot, and provided with a 
slot 30, a stud 28 adjustably secured therein 
and provided with a friction-roller, and the 
pattern or templet 26, against the periphery 
of which said friction-roller on the stud 28 
bears, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
JACOB GILBERT WALTER. 
Witnesses: 
ROSE R. O'Tool.E, 
PHILIP HALTON. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
Id 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578188.txt	( No Model.) 
00MBINED PLANTER AND FERTILIZER DISTRIBUTER, 
J. H. BAILEY, 
No. 578,188. 
Patented Mar. 2, 1897. 
 NS 
SSS 
f 
SS 
107 
s 
ES S 
hiss a. 
Sis s 
2 
Sasami 
4. 
om 
 
A. 
/6 
E. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
E. 
In HT 
Elez 
else 
 
  
 
 
III 
Ipiepiop 
12zes/7Zee 22e 
diposses 
9%26.2% 
jy Zize offeepys, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. BAILEY, OF LEADING CREEK, WEST WIRGINIA. 
COMBINED PLANTER AND FERT LIZER-DSTRIBUTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,188, dated March 2, 1897. 
Application filed March 26, 1896, 
To all whom it Inval/ concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES H. BAILEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Lead 
ing Creek, in the county of Lewis and State 
of West Virginia, have invented a new and 
useful Combined Planter and Fertilizer-Dis 
tributer, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to that class of agri 
Cultural machines designed for planting seed 
and at the same time depositing a quantity 
of fertilizer in the same hill or furrow with 
the seed, and aims to provide a structure 
which will plant the seed in any kind of soil 
in Such a Way as to insure its germinating, 
and which will be light-running, positive in 
its action, open the ground to a required 
depth, cover the seed and fertilizer, and ca 
pable of being readily repaired at a small costa 
and without requiring the forwarding of the 
machine to a shop for the purpose. 
For a full understanding of the merits and 
advantages of the invention reference is to 
be had to the accompanying drawings and the 
following description. 
The improvement is susceptible of various 
changes in the form, proportion, and the mi 
nor details of construction without departing 
from the principle or sacrificing any of the 
advantages thereof, and to a full disclosure of 
the invention an adaptation thereof is shown 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a combined 
planter and fertilizer-distributer constructed 
in accordance with this invention. Fig. 2 is a 
top plan view thereof. Fig. 3 is a transverse 
Section of the hopper, its supporting-beam, 
and the upper portion of the grain-spout about 
On the line XX of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 shows a form 
of opener to be used when the ground is hard 
and difficult of penetration. 
Corresponding and like parts are referred 
to in the following description and indicated 
in the several views of the drawings by the 
Same reference-characters. 
The frame of the machine comprises a 
short beam 1, having a clevis 2 at its front 
end, to which the draft is applied, and parallel 
side bars 3, the latter being secured to or 
forming a part of the beam 1 and spaced 
apart a sufficient distance to receive the 
ground-wheel 4 between them. Eccentrics 5 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
Serial No. 584,950, (No model.) 
are provided on the sides of the ground-wheel 
and coperate with yokes or straps 6, form 
ing a part of pitmen 7, to reciprocate the drop 
ping-slides 8 and 9 within the hopper 10. 
Handles 11 are secured to the frame and are 
braced by stays 12, and enable the operator 
to guide the machine and control its move 
ments. The tread of the ground-wheel 4 is 
kept clean by means of a scraper 13, which is 
Secured to the rear end of the frame, thereby 
preventing the banking of earth and trash 
upon the periphery of the wheel, which would 
impede the progress of the planter and ren 
der its movements unsteady. 
A plow-stock 14 is fitted to the front end of 
the frame and is strengthened by a brace 15, 
having connection there with at its lower end 
and curving forward and upward and secured 
to the frame by passing through an opening 
in the beam 1. The foot or shovel 16, fitted 
to the lower end of the plow-stock, is designed 
to precede the opener 17 to level the ground 
and remove roots, stones, and trash, and for 
this purpose has similar side Wings and is of 
the type known as double-pointed shovels. 
The hopper 10 is divided by a vertical par 
tition 18 into two compartments, the one re 
ceiving the grain and the other the fertilizer. 
A transverse block 19 is fitted to the bottom 
of the hopper, and the dropping-slides 8 and 9 
operate therethrough, strips of rubber, felt, 
or cloth 20 being applied to the sides of the 
block to secure a close fit against the sides of 
the slides, so as to prevent the grain and fer 
tilizer from choking the openings in the block 
through which the slides reciprocate. The 
slides may have one or more openings, accord 
ing as it is required to drop the seed or fer 
tilizer at the end of each stroke or at the end 
of the forward or backward stroke of the 
slides. 
The quantity of grain or fertilizer dropped 
is regulated by the size of the opening or 
openings and will vary according to the soil 
and the nature of the grain or fertilizer, and 
to attain this end the dropping-slides are re 
movably fitted to the hopper, so as to be re 
placed by others having openings of different 
size. The front ends of the pitmen 7 are bent 
and enter openings in the rear ends of the 
dropping-slides, and when it is required to 
remove the dropping-slides the pitmen are 
90 
95 
OO 
 
2 
578,188 
The draft is applied to the front end of the 
disconnected therefrom and the slides drawn 
out through the openings in the rear side of 
frame by hitching a horse to the clevis 2, and 
the operator guides the planter and directs 
the hopper and substituted by others having 
openings of required size to suit the charge 
its movements by means of the handles 11. 
As the ground-wheel rotates, the eccentrics 5 
to be dropped in a hill. The ends of the 
impart a reciprocating motion to the pitmen 
dropping-slides are beveled to obviate injury 
to the grain and to facilitate the reciprocat 
7, and the latter, having connection with the 
dropping-slides, cause the latter to recipro 
ing movements of the slides through the grain 
cate and alternately bring the openings in the 
and fertilizer, which ride over and upon the 
dropping-slides in communication with the 
said beveled ends, as will be readily under 
hopper and the opening 24, whereby a deposit 
stood. 
A standard 21 is strengthened by a brace 
of grain and fertilizer is effected in the fur 
row made by the opener 17, as will be readily 
22 and carries an opener 17, which is spread 
at its rear end and extends along the sides of 
understood. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
the standard and in the rear thereof, forming 
is claimed as new is 
wings which receive between them the lower 
In a planter, the combination with a beam, 
end of the grain-spout 23, the latter coming 
a hopper supported thereby, and seed-drop 
in the rear of the standard 21 and protected 
ping mechanism, of a plow-stock attached to 
thereby. The brace 22 passes through the 
the said beam and bearing a double-pointed 
upper portion of the stock 14 and through 
the beam 1, thereby materially assisting in 
shovel, a curved brace connecting the lower 
end of the plow-stock with the front portion 
strengthening the said stock 14. For moist 
of the beam, a standard located immediately 
and soft ground the opener 17 is long, and its 
in the rear of the plow-stock, an opener se 
nose enters the stock 14 and is braced there 
by; but for hard soil the opener is short and 
cured to the lower end of the standard and 
having its nose engaged with and braced by 
shaped like a plow-point, as shown at 17 in 
the plow-stock, and a brace connected with 
Fig. 4. The opening 24 in the frame, and 
the lower portion of the standard and pass 
with which the upper end of the grain-spout 
communicates, flares at its upper end, so as ing through the aforesaid plow - stock and 
beam, substantially as shown for the purpose 
to receive the grain and fertilizer which are 
dropped therein by the reciprocating slides 8 
described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
and 9. Hence the grain and fertilizer com 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
mingle and pass through the same spout 23 
the presence of two witnesses. 
into the furrow formed by the opener 17 and 
are covered by the furrow closing in the rear 
of the opener, the ground-wheel serving to 
compress the earth, so as to insure a proper 
germinating of the seed. 
J. M. JARVIS, 
C. T. BUSH. 
JAMES H. BAILEY. 
Witnesses: 
40 
45 
55 
65 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578288.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 578,288, 
W. W. DUDLEY. 
CYCLOMETER, 
Patented Mar. 2, 1897. 
 
 
X 
4 
Cat- 
as 
ES 
SS 
S 
a 
Bette: eitzeee: 
  
 
 
2 
S 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM W. DUDLEY, OF TRENTON, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
TRENTON WATCH COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
CYCLO METER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,288, dated March 2, 1897. 
Application filed September 21, 1896, Serial No. 606,580, (No model.) 
?o all, Luhon it incluy CO7 cein: 
Be it, known that I, WILLIAM W. DUDLEY, 
of Trenton, in the county of Mercer, and in 
the State of New Jersey, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Cy 
clometers; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my cy 
clometer; Fig. 2, a plan view thereof with 
the bezel, hands, and dial removed; Fig. 3, a 
like view with the disk-form indexes removed, 
in addition to the other parts; Fig. 4, a sec 
tion on the linea a of Fig. 2, and Fig. 5 a sec 
tion on line if f of Fig. 2. 
Letters of like name and lxind refer to like 
parts in each of the figures. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
in a very compact form and of simple con 
struction a cyclometer for bicycles, more es 
pecially of the kind known as the ten-thou 
sand-mile  cyclometer; that is, a cyclometer 
capable of registering miles up to Said num 
ber; and to this end said invention consists 
in the cyclometer having the construction and 
combination of parts substantially as and for 
the purpose hereinafter Specified. 
In the carrying of my invention into prac 
tice I employ a preferably circular base or 
supporting plate A, at the center of which is 
fixed a pin or post B. Upon said post is jour 
naled an arbor C, that carries a worm-wheel 
D, meshing with a worm E at the inner end 
of a shaft F, upon whose Outer end is placed 
the customary star-wheel G, by which motion 
is imparted to the registering mechanism of 
the cyclometer from the bicycle-wheel in a 
well-known way. Said shaft F is journaled 
in a tubel, being confined from longitudinal 
movement by means of a screw I, passing 
through the tube and entering a circumferen 
tial slot fin the shaft. 
Secured to the upper end of the arbor C is 
a hand or pointer K, that travels over a dial 
l, marked on the face of a disk or plate L, 
which serves to indicate fractions of a mile, 
one revolution of the pointer around the dial 
taking place for each mile; also, fixed to said 
arbor C so as to rotate therewith is a disk 
M, having a single tooth m, that at each rev 
olution of the disk is adapted to engage a pe 
ripheral notch in in a wheel N, having a series 
of such notches and fastened to an arbor O, 
that is mounted to revolve upon a pin or post 
P, fastened to the base-plate A. Carried by 
said arbor at its upper end is a disk Q, hav 
ing marked on its face in a circular series 
numerals from O to 9, which in turn are 
displayed through an opening l in the dial 
plate L, and denote units. 
Fastened upon and rotating with the arbor 
O is a disk R, similar to the disk M, having 
a single tooth 1, that at each revolution is 
adapted to engage and partially turn a periph 
erally-notched wheel S, similar to the wheelN, 
upon an arbor T, that at its upper end carries 
a disk U, marked, like the disk Q, with a se 
ries of numerals from O to 9, which suc 
cessively are displayed through an opening 
l in the plate L, and denote tens. The arbor 
T revolves around a pin or post V, fastened to 
the base-plate. For denoting hundreds a third 
disk W is employed, precisely like the others, 
bearing the numerals 0 to 9, for which 
is provided the display-opening lin the plate 
L, which disk is mounted upon the upper end 
of an arbor X, journaled on a pin or post Y, 
attached to the base-plate A, and receives a 
periodic motion from the arbor U by means 
of a single-toothed disk. Z and a peripherally 
notched wheel A'. To employ similar indi. 
cating means to the numerals, disks Q, U, and 
W for indicating thousands would require 
enlargement of the size of the cyclometer and 
be otherwise objectionable, and I have ac 
cordingly provided a different means, which 
will enable the size of the instrument to re 
main the same as it is, if no higher indical 
tion than hundreds is provided for, and with 
out disturbing the symmetrical appearance Of 
the instrument. Said thousands-indicating 
means consists of a small diall, having a cir 
cular series of numerals from 'O' to '' ) 
marked on the dial-plate L concentric With the 
tens-disk U and a hand or pointer B' to coper 
ate there with carried by an arbor C'journaled 
Within the arbor O and upon the post V, and 
having attached to its lower end a peripher 
ally-notched wheel D', that is adapted to be 
engaged and moved by a one-toothed disk E, 
carried by the hundreds-disk arbor F. 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
578,288 
O 
The dial-plate L is conveniently fastened 
in place to the two posts P and V by means 
of Screws, as shown, and the entire mechan 
ism is inclosed in a suitable casing F, having a 
glass top or cover G' and provided with means 
for attachment to the frame of a bicycle. 
It is thought that the operation of the mech 
anism has been made clear in the description 
hereinbefore given, and hence a special de 
Scription of the operation is not deemed neces 
Sary. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a cyclometer, the combination of a 
series of indicators comprising numeral-bear 
ing disks, an arbor for each of said disks, 
gearing between the arbors, a dial concentric 
With one of said disks, a hand for said dial, 
an arbor carrying said hand, and gearing be 
tween Said arbor and One of the disk abol's, 
Substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a cyclometer, the combination of a 
driving-shaft having a worm, a Worlm-Wheel, 
an arbor on which the latter is mounted car 
rying a hand, a plate having a dial for said 
hand, a series of disk indicators having each 
an arb?or, said plate having a display-opening 
for each indicator, gearing between each of 
Said arbors and the worm-wheel arbor, a dial 
on said plate concentric with an intermediate 
One of the disks, a hand for said dial, an ar 
bor passing through the disk arbon carrying 
Said hand, and gearing between said hand 
carrying arbor and the arbor of the highest 
indication disk of the series, substantially as 
and for the purpose described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 18th day of 
September, 1896. 
WILLIAA. W. OU IDI, EY. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR. G. MOSES, 
JOHN MIOSES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578390.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. COLBATH. 
SAFETY PIN, 
No. 578,390. 
Patented Mar, 9, 1897. 
 
win 
(2/ 22/ fy /2 is Afforgeys, 
Ipileptor 
A6//iam A60/bath. 
The Norris PETERs co, Proto-Litho, washington.o. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM EDGAR COLBATH, OF WESTON, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO HIRAM IRA COLBATH, OF WALWORTH, MICHIGAN. 
SAFETY - PIN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,390, dated March 9, 1897. 
Application filed April 9, 1896, Serial No. 586,852. (No model.) 
55 
To all whon, it play concern. 
disposed in a plane at right angles to the 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM EDGAR COL 
plane of the members 2 and 3 and are set 
BATH, a citizen of the United States, residing 
wholly in front of a plane touching the rear 
at Weston, in the county of Lenawee and 
sides of the members 2 and 3, so that the lat 
State of Michigan, have invented a new and 
ter may touch the bandage or fabric without 
useful Safety-Pin, of which the following is 
causing the rear side of the coils 1 to bear 
a specification. 
against the bandage to the inconvenience, 
This invention relates to safety-pins for 
discomfort, and annoyance of the patient or 
surgical bandages and other uses where it is 
user. The coils 1 come centrally between 
desirable to employ devices of this character 
prolongations of the members 2 and 3 and are 
to house or protect the point of the pin from 
secured together by having the terminal por 
injurious contact with the person, clothing, 
tion of one extreme coil bent around the ter 
or other object. 
minal portion 4 of the other extreme coil, the 
One of the principal features is to so con 
bend 5 being over, around, and beneath the 
struct the pin that it can be applied to and 
terminal portion 4, whereby the member 2 is 
removed from a bandage or fabric while the 
given a tendency toward the cross-brace 6. 
latter is under tension and without necessi 
The end portion of the member 3 is bent at 
tating any loosning of the fabric or marip 
7 toward the member 2, thence inward about 
ulation thereof with both hands to attain the 
parallel with the member 3, as shown at 8, 
desired end, as is generally required by pins 
thence at right angles to the plane of the 
of this character heretofore commonly con 
members 2 and 3 and recurved, forming an 
structed. 
eye or loop 9, and around and beneath the 
A further object of the improvement is to 
part 8, forming the cross-brace 6, and looped 
utilize the fabric as a means for locking the 
around the member 3 a short distance from 
pin against opening after it is once properly 
the end 7, as shown at 10. The cross-brace 
adjusted except at the will of the user, a cer 
6 is about parallel with the end 7 and pre 
tain manipulation being required to effect a 
vents the spreading of the free end of the part 
release of the pin before the latter can be dis 
8. The eye or loop 9 is on the same side of 
engaged from the fabric. 
the pin as the coils 1, thereby leaving the rear 
Other objects and advantages are sought to 
side of the pinflat, so it can lie Snugly against 
be attained and Will appear as the nature of 
a bandage or other part without inflicting 
the invention is unfolded and to this end 
injury or causing any annoyance or discom 
reference is to be had to the following de 
fort. The member 2 is pointed and consti 
scription and the accompanying drawings, in 
tutes the pin proper, and its penetrating ter 
which corresponding and like parts are des 
minal comes close to the end piece 7 and 
ignated by the same reference-characters in 
bears against the inner side of the part 8 and 
all the views. 
is limited in its movement in one direction by 
Figure l is a perspective view of a safety 
engaging with the cross-brace 6. 
pin constructed in- accordance with this in 
The loop or eye 9 is formed wholly within 
vention. Fig. 2 is a detail view thereof, show 
the cross-brace 6, that is, it occupies a posi 
ing the pin locked by means of the fabric to 
tion between the coils 1 and the part 6, and 
which it is applied. Fig. 3 is a top plan view 
being at right angles to the plane of the mem 
of the same. 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section 
bers 2 and 3 it forms a shoe or runner to glide 
on the line XX of Fig. 3, looking in the di 
upon the bandage or fabric when thrusting 
the pin therein, the latter being held by the 
The pin will be manufactured in assorted 
coils 1 and pressure being brought to bear 
sizes and will be formed of a single length of 
upon the part 2 to cause its pointed extrem 
spring-wire of suitable gage, the wire being 
ity to enter the bandage or fabric to which it 
doubled upon itself at a suitable point in its 
is desired to apply the pin. 
length and bent to provide spring-coils 1 and 
When inserting the pin in the fabric, the 
parallel members 2 and 3. The coils 1 are pin is turned so that its front side faces the 
75 
90 
95 
OC 
O 
(5 
20 
25 
35 
40 
 
45 rection of the arrow. 
578,890 
5 
fabric, and after the pin is in position it is 
given a half-turn to bring its front side away 
from the fabric, and it is moved to cause a 
portion of the fabric to come between the ter 
minal part of the pin or member 2 and the 
base portion of the loop or eye 9, thereby 
forming a lock, as shown most clearly in Fig. 2. 
To remove the pin, it is given a half-turn 
to bring its front side opposite the fabric, it 
IO being necessary prior to this operation to 
move the pin longitudinally, so as to with 
draw the fabric from between the base por 
tion of the eye 9 and the pin, and after the 
latter has been reversed it can be easily dis 
I5 engaged by pressing upon the rear side of the 
pin or member 2 and at the same time pull 
ing upon the pin in a direction to withdraw 
it from the fabric. 
When the pinisinterlocked with the fabric, 
2O as shown in Fig. 2, the pin cannot be turned 
So as to bring its front side opposite the fab 
ric, and to effect this result the pin must first 
be moved longitudinally to withdraw the fab 
ric from between the pin and the adjacent 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. In a safety-pin formed of a single length 
Of Spring-wire, the combination of approxi 
3O mately parallel members, one of the members 
having its terminal pointed, the other mem 
ber having its end portion bent toward the 
pointed member, thence about parallel with 
the pointed member, thence into an eye at 
35 right angles to the plane of both members 
forming a runner and toward the member 
from which it first departed, forming a cross 
brace in advance of the eye, and looped 
around the latter member, the pointed mem 
4o ber engaging with the cross-brace and the in 
25 portion of the loop. 
3. A new article of manufacture, a safety- 55 
ner side of the eye-runner substantially as 
shown for the purpose described. 
2. In a safety-pin formed of a single length 
of spring-wire, the combination of approxi 
mately parallel members formed by doubling 45 
the wire upon itself, a series of coils at the 
folded end of the wire disposed at right an 
gles to the plane of the said members and to 
one side of the said plane and on a line pass 
ing midway between the aforesaid members, 5o 
and having the terminal portion of one ex 
treme coil bent about the terminal portion of 
the other extreme coil, substantially in the 
manner shown for the purpose described. 
pin constructed from a single length of spring 
wire which is doubled upon itself, forming 
parallel members, One of the members being 
pointed and the other member having its end 
portion bent toward the pointed member, 6o 
thence about parallel with the pointed mem 
ber, thence into an eye or loop at right an 
gles to the plane of both members and toward 
the member from which it first departed and 
looped therearound, and having a series of 65 
coils at the folded end disposed at right an 
gles to the plane of the said members and to 
one side of the said plane and on a line pass 
ing midway between the members, and hav 
ing the terminal portion of one extreme coil 7o 
bent around the terminal portion of the other 
extreme coil, substantially in the manner 
shown for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in 75 
the presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM EDGAR COLBATH. 
Witnesses: 
J. D. CUNNINGHAM, 
Mrs. W. E. COLBATH. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578490.txt	(No Model.) 
D. KNOWLES, 
BICYCLE SUPPORT, 
3 sheets-sheet 1. 
 
No. 578,490. 
Patented Mar, 9, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 578,490. 
 
D. KNOWLES, 
BICYCLE SUPPORT, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Mar, 9, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 578,490. 
D. KNOWLES, 
BICYCLE SUPPORT, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Mar, 9, 1897. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL KNOWLES, OF NORFOLK, VIRGINIA. 
BICYCLE-SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,490, dated March 9, 1897. 
Application filed July 3, 1896, serial No. 598,021. (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all, whom, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, DANIEL KNOWLES, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Nor 
folk, in the county of Norfolk and State of 
5 Virginia, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Bicycle-Supports; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to an improved de 
Vice for assisting beginners in learning to con 
trol and operate a bicycle. 
To those devices heretofore used or pro 
posed for this purpose with which I am ac 
quainted difficulties and disadvantages are 
incident. In the earlier ones provision was 
made for, first, supporting the entire weight 
of the bicycle and of the upwardly-project 
ing arm or arms upon the floor or ground be 
low the bicycle-wheels, and, secondly, the up 
Wardly-projecting bar or bars had a rigid con 
nection with the frame of the bicycle. In 
consequence of these facts but little benefit 
results from practicing upon or using thema 
chine. It is held in a manner radically dif 
ferent from that in which it is held when in 
ordinary use without extra supports. It is 
well known that the maintaining of a bicycle 
in an upright position is to the beginner a 
peculiarly difficult matter because of the con 
stant liability for the machine to swing or 
commence falling to the right or left, which 
swinging or falling is overcome by maintain 
ing a requisite speed and by a proper manipu 
lation of the steering-wheel. 
If the wheel be held rigidly in upright po 
sition, the practice thereon or the use thereof 
is not accompanied by the necessity of mas 
tering the primary and principal difficulty 
above referred to, as the rider is not sub 
jected to the sensation of falling or swinging 
laterally. Again, in the earlier mechanisms 
for assisting in the use of and practice upon 
the bicycle the support for the upwardly-ex 
tending bars, rods, or equivalents was the 
5o wheel itself, and not only their weight, but 
their cumbersomeness, served to increase the 
difficulties of manipulating, managing, and 
propelling the wheel. 
One of the objects of the present invention 
is to provide an attachment for this pur 
pose which shall be adapted to be supported 55 
largely, if not entirely, independently of the 
bicycle; and this I accomplish by suspending 
it from an overhead track or guideway, in 
contradistinction to merely confining it in 
proper position horizontally, or against lat 
eral displacement, at the upper end. 
Another important object is to furnish an 
attachment for the machine which while 
holding it sufficiently to generate a feeling of 
confidence in the rider shall yet be adapted 
to permit the wheel to move in one direction 
or the other, as concerns lateral swaying or 
swinging, in a manner approximating, in 
character and extent, that in which a bicycle 
moves when being used by the practiced rider. 
The invention also relates to matters of con 
struction and arrangement which will be read 
ily understood from the description appearing 
below in connection with the drawings. 
Figure'1 is a perspective view showing an 
embodiment of my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
sectional view of the same. Fig. 3 is a view 
illustrating another manner of supporting the 
elevated guideway. Figs. 4 and 5 are detail 
views of different tracks or guideways. Figs. 
6 and 7 are detail views of the spring which 
is interposed in the sustaining device. Fig. 
8 is a detail view of the trolley-like carrier. 
Fig. 9 is a side view of a bicycle having an 
additional support applied thereto. Fig. 10 
is a detail plan view of a portion of the top 
guide. Fig. 11 is a detail view of a slightly 
different form of trolley. 
In the drawings, A designates generally 
an elevated guideway on which is mounted a 
movable trolley-like device B, provided with 
means for attachment to the frame of any or 
dinary bicycle, (designated at C.) 
The guideway. A may be formed in either 
of numerous ways and suitably supported at 
the desired elevation above the floor or track 
D on which the bicycle runs. 
In Fig. 1 I have illustrated an embodiment 
of my invention in which the guideway A is 
formed of angle-iron and is adapted to be 
supported from suitable surrounding sup 
95 
35 
40 
45 
75 
- 
Od 
 
2 
578,490 
75 
- 
ports, such, for example, as the walls or beams 
of a building. In this construction the angle 
iron is rigidly fastened to suitable framing 
bars A", which are connected to the inner 
lower ends of rods E. The rods E may be 
provided with eyes e, which engage with or 
take over Suitable hooks a on the frame, or 
the parts may be connected in any suitable 
manner. At their outer upper ends the rods 
E are provided with means for attachment to 
suitable stationary supports, such as the 
beams of a hall, and said means may be in 
the nature of hooks and rings, as described, 
or of any other suitable character. 
Each of the rods E is preferably made in 
two sections connected by a suitable turn 
buckle E", by means of which the length of 
the rods can be varied somewhat, if neces 
sary. . 
On the track or guideway Athere is mount 
ed, as aforesaid, the trolley or movable car 
rier B. It consists of arms or bars b b', be 
tween which are supported one or more roll 
ers B'. The latter bear down upon and ride 
along the upper surface of the track or guide 
Way. 
The arm b is preferably somewhat longer 
and extends down farther than that at b', both 
being preferably flared somewhat in order to 
allow of the desired movements of the parts. 
I have illustrated in Fig. 11 a form of trolley 
in which but a single wheel B is employed, 
the arms b b' extending vertically downward. 
To the longer armb of the movable support 
are connected the upper ends of relatively 
short depending arms F. There are prefer 
ably two of these arms, each being of the 
form shown and both being connected with 
the arm b at a point directly under the axis 
of the wheel or roller B', and from which 
point they extend in opposite directions. 
On each arm F there is fitted a sleeve F", 
which is supported at any desired position 
from the lower free end of the arm by a nut 
G, which engages with the thread f, formed 
on the arm at and adjacent to its said end. 
The sleeves F are provided with two arms 
H, the lower ends of which terminate in 
clampsh, of any suitable style, adapted to be 
engaged with the frame of the bicycle C. 
The clamps h can be engaged with the 
frame of the bicycle in such way as that the 
arms H will not interfere with the movements 
of the rider on the machine or in mounting 
and dismounting therefrom. 
H'H' indicate springs which are interposed 
at suitable places between two parts of the 
upward-extending attachment. As shown, 
the arms or legs Hare formed in two parts, 
which are connected by one of these springs. 
In order that there may be the greatest pos 
sible freedom of motion between the parts, I 
have in Figs. 6 and 7 shown each of the studs 
h' which extends out from each of the clamps 
h as connected with the lower portion of the 
rod H by a ball-and-socket joint. In most 
cases, however, this will be unnecessary, as 
the springs H" will themselves allow the req 
uisite amount of motion. 
By means of the nut G the clamps h may 
be adjusted vertically in order to be properly 
arranged for attachment to wheels of differ 
ent sizes. 
The guideway A may be of any suitable 
form and of any length desired. I have illus 
trated it in Fig. I as made in the form of an 
oval and connected, through any ordinary 
style of switch mechanism, as at A, with one 
or more sections of straight guideway, as at A*. 
As before stated, the track may be formed 
in numerous ways other than that shown in 
Figs. 1 and 2. In its simplest form it may 
consist of a cable of suitable size, or a pipe 
supported on hangers I, as indicated in Fig. 
4. In this case I preferably arrange a guide 
strip K below the hangers I to assist in main 
taining the carrier B in proper position. With 
out interfering with the lateral flexibility of 
the lower part of the attachment; or in some 
cases it may be desired when the carrier is 
provided with two supporting-wheels to have 
the same ride on parallel guideways and have 
a centrally-arranged depending arm for Sup 
porting the clamp-arms. Such a form is illus 
trated in Fig. 5. 
In case it is desired to erect the apparatus 
in the open air the guideway may be Sup 
ported from a central pole L, which is pro 
vided at its upper end with a cap-plate to 
which the upper ends of the rods E can be 
connected. 
As hereinbefore indicated, I prefer to form 
on the floor or surface over which the bicycle 
moves a track D, which extends parallel with 
the guideway A and serves to guide and di 
rect the rider in his movements; but when an 
apparatus is used embodying other features 
of my improvements a bottom guide of this 
character is not essential, as the part can be 
so constructed as to permit considerable di 
vergence of the bicycle-wheels from a central 
or normal line because of the frame between 
the bicycle and the elevated guide being so 
constructed and supported as to allow the vi 
bratory movements herein described without 
permitting disengagement of the guide from 
its guideway. 
It will now be seen that the parts can be 
constructed and related if the plan herein de 
scribed be followed, so that practically the 
entire weight of the attachment is underhung 
or suspended from the track. Even without 
the springs H considerable flexibility can be 
provided at points between the topmost sup 
port and the points of contact of the bicycle, 
and, as above described, the latter is left to 
move much in the ordinary way, and by the 
addition of the springs H' at any suitable 
place this flexibility is greatly increased. The 
rider soon notices that the wheel cannot SWay 
or swing dangerously, and a resulting confi 
dence is generated, but at the same time the 
wheel is liable to lateral movements to such 
an extent that the power to properly control 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 20 
I25 
d 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
578,490 
" 
. 
the wheel is developed and a correct habit of 
controlling it is formed. 
In Fig. 9 I have illustrated an attachment 
which may be applied to a bicycle as an ad 
ditional safeguard when the above-described 
supporting devices are employed or when the 
suspending devices are removed. It consists 
in attaching two arms K to the frame of the 
wheel by suitable clamps k, each arm being 
provided at its lower end with a roller k", that 
normally lies from three to four inches above 
the floor or surface on 
which the bicycle is 
- 
moving. 
As above indicated, I am aware of the fact 
that bicycle-supports have been made or pro 
posed heretofore, but they have differed in 
material respects from the one herein pre 
sented. One of the earlier plans has been to 
combine with a bicycle an elevated guide 
flange and an intermediate frame stiffly sup 
ported entirely upon the bicycle and having 
at its upper end either two vertical rollers 
bearing against the vertical sides of the guide 
flange or one vertical roller lying between 
two vertical guide - flanges. With such a 
mechanism lateral swaying or vibrating is 
not permitted because of the elongated ver 
tical rollers binding or cramping against the 
stationary guide-flanges as soon as such, Vi 
bration begins, and, moreover, such vibration 
must be prevented in order to prevent the 
escape of the vertical rollers from the station 
ary guide, which was accomplished by two 
ribs or flanges along the floor or ground a few 
inches apart and near the wheels of the bi 
cycle. 
Another plan has been to employ a sub 
stantially similar frame stiffly connected to 
and supported entirely upon the bicycle, and 
to combinethere with not only upper rollers on 
vertical axes, but also lower rollers closely ad 
jacent to one of the bicycle-wheels. The re 
sult is, as above described, to hold the wheels 
45 stiffly and without the possibility of swaying 
or vibration. 
In my case the upwardly-extending frame 
is throughout more or less of its length vi 
bratable relatively to the upper guide, either 
by having the movable guide member adapted 
to bear on vertical lines against the guideway 
and at the same time sway horizontally rela. 
tively thereto or by having the part which 
is connected to the bicycle sway relatively 
to the moving guide member, both of which 
55: movements are more or less possible in the 
construction shown. 
What I claim is 
1. In an apparatus for the purpose de 
scribed, the combination with an elevated 
guideway, of a carrier movable on said guide 
Way, and one or more clamps flexibly con 
nected to said carrier so as to permit lateral 
movement and adapted to engage with the 
frame of a bicycle, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an apparatus for the purpose de 
scribed, the combination of a bottom guide 
for the wheels of a bicycle, an upper guide 
3. 
situated above the head of the rider, and an 
intermediate frame suspended from the upper 
guide to provide vertical support for and hold 
the bicycle in the lower guide, substantially 
as set forth. 
3. In an apparatus for the purpose de 
scribed, the combination with a bicycle hav 
ing a rider's seat, a bottom guide for the 
wheels of the bicycle, an elevated guide, and 
an intermediate frame suspended from Said 
elevated guide and attached to the bicycle 
both in front and in rear of the rider's seat, 
said suspended frame providing a vertical 
support for the bicycle and acting to main 
tain the wheels thereof in the bottom guide, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. In an apparatus for the purpose de 
scribed, the combination with a bicycle hav 
ing a rider's seat, an elevated guide, and an 
intermediate frame having an upper portion 
engaging said elevated guide and a lower 
portion engaging the bicycle at two points 
longitudinally of the length thereof, said up 
per and lower portions of said intermediate 
frame being flexibly connected to permit lat 
eral motion of the bicycle while supported 
vertically, substantially as set forth. 
5. In an apparatus for the purpose de 
scribed, the combination of an elevated guide, 
a bottom guide, a bicycle having its wheels 
fitted to the bottom guide, and an intermedi 
ate frame suspended from the upper guide 
and adapted to engage with and support the 
bicycle, said frame consisting of two sections 
flexibly connected together to permit lateral 
motion of the bicycle while its wheels are in 
contact with the bottom guide, substantially 
as set forth. 
6. In a bicycle-supporting apparatus, the 
combination of a guideway, means for sup 
porting the guideway in an elevated position, 
a carrier mounted on said guideway to move 
longitudinally thereon, the depending arms, 
F, connected to the carrier, arms, H, loosely 
connected to the carrier-arms, and the clamps 
for engaging with a bicycle-frame carried by 
said arms, H, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a bicycle-supporting apparatus, the 
combination with an elevated support, a trol 
ley-like carrier mounted on the upper edge 
of said support to move longitudinally thereof, 
a Sectional depending arm connected at one 
end to said trolley-like carrier and provided 
at its other end With means for attachment 
to a bicycle-frame, and means for flexibly 
?onnecting the sections of said arm, substan 
tially as set forth. . 
8. In a bicycle-supporting apparatus, the 
combination with an elevated support or 
guideway, an overrunning trolley-like car 
rier mounted on said support to move longi 
tudinally thereof, and means depending from 
said carrier for supporting a bicycle, such 
means being adapted to yield both laterally 
and vertically according to the movements 
of the bicycle, substantially as set forth. 
9. In an apparatus for the purpose de 
.35 
I25. 
75 
95 
ICO 
IO5 
IIO 
II5 
 
4. 
578,490 
scribed, the combination with a bicycle, of 
an elevated guideway, a guiding device fitted 
to said Way, and an intermediate frame con 
necting the bicycle and elevated guiding de 
vice and adapted to vibrate laterally rela 
tively to the latter, substantially as set forth. 
10. In an apparatus for the purpose de 
scribed, the combination with a bicycle, of 
an elevated guide, a guiding device bearing 
on vertical lines against said guide, and an 
intermediate frame between the bicycle and 
the guiding device and adapted to vibrate 
laterally while the guiding device is bearing 
vertically on the guide, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
DANIEL KNOWLES. 
Witnesses: 
TAURENCE WARING, 
THOMAS KIRBY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578590.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 578,590. 
Patented Mar, 9, 1897. 
H. C. WILLIAMSON & H. PRIES 
DRAW BAR ATTACHMENT FOR CAR COUPLINGs, 
2 Sheets-Sheet l. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
EA 2. 2. 
A 
V-2N 
5. 
A SSHSS 
2 
 
 
 
4 
  
Z2% . 
s 
2232 
. 
% 
   
 
A. 
72%. 7, 
ZS 
A. 
yvy 
YZZH 
M 
a. 7 
2 
  
SSSSS& AN 
3. P 
a.O 
 
 
 
 
 
The Norris PETERs co, PHoisturo washinston, oc 
(No Model.) 
H. C. WILLIAMSON & H. PRIES 
DRAW BAR ATTACHMENT FOR, CAR COUPLINGS, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
... 4 enzie 
%2. 
the NORR 
is Peters to, Photo-lit-8 WASHINGTON, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. WILLIAMSON AND HERMAN PRIES, OF MICHIGAN CITY, INDIANA. 
DRAW-BAR ATTACHMENT FOR CAR-couplings. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,590, dated March 9, 1897. 
Application filed September 8, 1896, Seria. No, 605,139, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it inlay conce/7.' 
Beit known that we, HENRY C. WILLIAMSON 
and HERMAN PRIES, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Michigan City, in the 
5 county of La Porte and State of Indiana, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Draw-Bar Attachments for Car 
Couplers; and we do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
Io tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to a novel construc 
tion in a draw-bar attachment for car-coup 
I5 lers, the object being to provide a device of 
this description which will not work loose 
and get out of repair and which will enable 
the use and simultaneous action of a plurality 
of springs; and it consists in the features of 
2O construction and combinations of parts here 
inafter fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
our invention, Figure 1 is a horizontal longi 
tudinal section of a car-coupler provided with 
25 a draw-bar constructed in accordance with 
our invention, taken on the line 1 I of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal section of the 
same on the line 22 of Fig. 1. 
Figs. 3 and 4 
are transverse vertical sections of the same 
3o on the line 33 and 4 4, respectively, of Figs. 
1 and 2. Fig. 5 is a horizontal longitudinal 
section of a modified form of our invention 
on the line 55 of Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is a vertical 
longitudinal section of the same on the line 
35 6 6 of Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a detail elevation of 
the guide-castings We employ. 
Referring now to said drawings, Aindicates 
the draw-bar of a car-coupler which is suit 
ably mounted between the draft-beams B of 
4o a car. To the inner end of said draw-bar A 
the ends of a loop C are secured by means of 
heavy bolts or rivets 1. Mounted within said 
loop C and abutting against said inner end 
of said draw-bar A is what we term a foll 
45 lower 2, which is adapted to be acted upon 
by the double spiral spring 3. Said follower 
2 is provided with a recess 4 in the center of 
its inner face, in which the end of what we 
term a plunger 5 is adapted to be received 
5o and which prevents said end of said plunger 
5 from spreading or fringing. Mounted with 
in the other end of said loop C and abutting 
against the same is a follower 6. A box or 
casing 7, also mounted within said loop C, 
abuts at its inner end against said follower 6 55 
and is provided at its other end with an in 
wardly-extending peripheral flange 8, against 
which the inner end of said spring 3 abuts 
and serves to hold the same firmly against 
said follower 6. The enlarged end 9 of said 
plunger 5 is situated within said box or cas 
ing 7, and between the same and said follower 
6 a spring 10 is mounted, said follower 6 and 
said plunger 5 being provided with center 
lugs 11 and 12, respectively, by means of 
which the position of said spring 10 is de 
termined. 
Rigidly secured to the inner faces of said 
draft-beams B are guide-castings 13, each of 
which comprises a plate provided with re 
cesses 14 and 15, in which the followers 2 and 6, 
respectively, are adapted to move. The said 
recessed portions of said plates are sunk into 
said draft-beams B and are thus firmly held 
against displacement from any shock to which 
they may be subjected. Said castings are se 
cured to said draft-beams B by means of the 
socketed bolts 16, the heads of which lie in 
pockets 17 in the middle portion of said cast 
ings, and by means of the bolts 18, passing 
through openings 19 in the ends of said cast 
ings. Said plates are provided with out 
wardly-extending flanges 20 on their lower 
edges, which are adapted to fit against the 
lower faces of said draft-beams B, and with 
inwardly-extending flanges 21 on their upper 
edges, between which the upper portion of the 
loop C moves. Said flanges 20 and 21 further 
serve to strengthen said castings. Said cast 
ings 13 are further provided with vertical re 
: cesses 22 and 23 adjacent said recesses 14 and 
15, through which bolts 24 pass, by means of 
which supporting-plates 25, upon which said 
followers 2 and 6 move, are secured. It will 
be noted that the said recesses 14 and 15 form 
shoulders in said plates which limit the move 
ment of said followers, so that when shunting 
the follower 2 will not move farther than until 
it comes in contact with the rearward end or 
shoulder of said recess 14, and this distance 
is so regulated that the springs 3 and 10, 
which are simultaneously compressed by this 
operation, are not acted upon or compressed 
to their fullest extent, but would still be ca 
75 
95. 
IOO 
 
2 
578,590 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
pable of further compression. Thus if the 
Springs are capable of two inches compression 
before the coils of the same lie upon each 
other the movement of the followers would 
be limited to one and three-fourths inches, so 
as never to entirely exhaust said springs. In 
this manner the life of each spring is pro 
longed to the fullest extent. It will also be 
obvious that any shock to which said casting 
13 may be subjected by the driving of said 
followers against the shoulders at the ends of 
said recesses will be directly transmitted to 
said draft-beams and thus relieve the bolts 
16 and 25 of any strain. We are aware that 
there are various constructions patented in 
Which the entire guide-castings are sunk into 
the draft-beams and are provided with a 
Small shoulder at each end, but we obtain a 
great advantage by our construction in that 
Our shoulders are of greater extent and that 
any shock is administered simultaneously to 
two shoulders in either direction, whereas 
heretofore such shock had to be borne by only 
one shoulder of less extent. This has always 
caused such shoulder to wear away very 
quickly and subjected the bolts by means of 
which said castings were secured to the shock, 
and these soon sheared or became loose. It 
is also our object to make the distance be 
tween the dead-wood 26 and the inner face 27 
of the coupler-head coincide with the stroke. 
of the followers 2 and 6, so that an excessive 
shock in shunting would be divided equally 
between the dead-wood and the rearmost 
shoulders of said recesses 14 and 15. 
It will 
be obvious that in pulling the shock cannot 
be as great as in shunting and can be easily 
borne by the forward shoulders of said re 
CeSSeS. 
It will be obvious that the plates 25, sup 
porting the followers 2 and 6, will also sup 
port the loop C, which rests thereon, but to 
further support the latter we have provided 
straps or bars 28, which are secured to the 
lower faces of the draft-beams B by means of 
bolts 29, upon the middle portion of which 
Said loop is adapted to rest. Said bars are 
slightly depressed at their middle portions, 
and at their ends are provided with upwardly 
extending flanges which are adapted to en 
gage the outer faces of the draft-beams. 
The operation of our device is very simple 
and almost obvious, so that a brief descrip 
tion will suffice. 
In shunting or coupling two cars or two parts 
of a train the coupler is always subjected to a 
shock greater or less, according to the speed 
at which the parts to be coupled move and ac 
cording to the loads they carry. This obvi 
Ously moves the couplers inwardly against the 
action of the springs. Thus the end of the 
draw-bar transmits its motion to the follower 
2 and plunger 5 simultaneously, while the fol 
lower 6 retains its position, being immovable 
in this direction. The spring 3 would there 
fore be compressed against the head of the 
box or casing 7, and therethrough, so to say, 
against the follower 6, while the spring 10 
would be compressed between the enlarged 
end of the plunger 5 and said follower 6. 
These parts being movable with relation to 
the loop C, the latter will move in unison with 
the draw-bar, to which it is secured, and not 
receive any portion of the strain. In pulling, 
said loop C will engage the follower 6 and 
draw the same forward against the action of 
said springs 3 and 10 as the box or casing 7 
moves with said follower 6 and transmits the 
pressure thereof to said spring 3. Said box. 
or casing 7 is guided in its movement by the 
said middle portions of Said castings 13, which 
prevent sidewise displacement, while the loop 
C, in which it is contained, prevents its ver 
tical displacement. The spring 10 impinges 
against the enlarged end of said plunger 5 and 
through it against said follower 2, so that said 
entire load is always borne by either of said 
followers 2 and 6. We desire to call particu 
lar attention to the fact that by means of our 
construction the loop C is subjected to strain 
only in one direction, and that the direction 
is always the one least subject to sudden jars 
and shocks. This is a very important fea 
ture, as it is apparent that where bolts are 
subjected to hard strain in two directions they 
will soon work loose and shear. 
In Figs. 5 and 6 we have illustrated our in 
vention as applied when three springs are em 
ployed, and it will be noted that this number 
can be increased with equal advantage. This 
construction coincides exactly with the con 
struction hereinbefore described, with the ex 
ception that a box 30, containing a spring 31, 
is mounted between the draft-beams behind 
the guide-castings 13 and abuts at its end 
against a block 32, mounted between said 
draft-beams B. The said box is preferably 
secured at its forward end to the rear ends of 
the said castings 13 by passing the bolts 18 
therethrough, and is further held against ver 
tical displacement by means of the lugs 33, 
which are sunk into the inner faces of said 
draft-beams. A plunger 34, provided with an 
enlarged end 35, impinges against Said Spring 
31 and passes through openings 36 in the end 
of said loop C and the follower 6, its other end 
being adapted to enter a recess in the enlarged 
end of said plunger 5 for reasons heretofore 
given. In this construction we have illus 
trated the follower 2 as being provided with 
a sleeve 37, in which the end of the plunger 
5 is adapted to fit and about which a single 
instead of a double spring 3 is trained. Either 
construction may, however, be employed, ac 
cording to the election of the purchaser. The 
operation of this construction differs slightly 
from the foregoing in that in shunting all three 
springs 3, 10, and 31 are brought into action, 
as will be obvious, while in pulling only the 
springs 3 and 10 are acted upon. The loop C, 
however, is subjected to strain only in one di 
rection, in the same manner as in the construc 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
578,590 
3. 
45 
55 
75 
lower rigid upon imparting a draft impetus, 
substantially as described. 
3. In a device of the kind specified, the 
combination with a draw-bar having a loop 
rigidly secured thereto, followers within said 
loop, a box or casing abutting against said 
rearmost follower, a plunger abutting against 
said foremost follower and having an enlarged 
end adapted to fit within said casing, and 
cushions interposed between said head of said 
box or casing and said foremost follower and 
between said enlarged head of said plunger 
and said rearmost follower, of draft-beams 
provided with gains on theirinnerfaces adapt 
ed to receive two recessed portions of guide 
castings secured to said inner faces of said 
draft-beams and adapted to receive said fol 
lowers and limit the movements of the same 
in either direction to limit the extent of com 
pression of said cushions, and transmit the 
strain thereon in either direction to said 
draft-beams at two points, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a device of the kind specified, the 
combination with the draft-beams gained at 
two points on their inner faces and adapted 
to receive guide-castings having recessed por 
tions adapted to enter said gains, of a draw 
bar attachment comprising a plurality of 
cushions arranged in tandem between two 
followers adapted to enter said recessed por 
tions of said guide-castings, said recesses be 
ing limited in extent to less than the limit of 
compression of said cushions and adapted to 
limit the movements of said followers in ac 
cordance therewith, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY C. WILLIAMSON. 
HERMAN PRIES. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER J. O'GDEN, 
HARRY M. BARNES. 
O 
25 
tion shown in Figs. 1 and 2. We desire also 
to call attention to the fact that the loop we 
employ greatly exceeds in strength the shafts 
heretofore employed in various draw-bar at 
tachments, and that by subjecting it to strain 
only in pulling it can never spread, which 
would obviously be most likely to occur were 
it subjected to strain in shunting. 
We claim as our invention 
1. In a device of the kind specified, a draw 
bar provided with a loop rigidly secured there 
to, a follower within said loop and adapted 
to be engaged by the rear end of the same, a 
box or casing within said loop and abutting 
against Said follower, an opening in the for 
Ward end of said box or casing, a plunger 
having an enlarged rear end adapted to fit 
within said casing provided with a shank 
adapted to pass through said opening therein 
and abutting at its other end against a fol 
lower adapted to be engaged by the rear end 
of the draw-bar, a cushion interposed between 
the head of said casing and said foremost foll 
lower, and a cushion within said casing in 
terposed between said enlarged end of said 
plunger and said rearmost follower, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a device of the kind specified, the 
combination with a draw-bar having a loop 
rigidly secured thereto, followers within said 
loop at Opposite ends thereof, a box or casing 
Within Said loop abutting against said rear 
most follower, a plunger abutting against 
said foremost follower and having an enlarged 
end adapted to fit within said casing, and 
cushions interposed between said head of said 
bOX Or Casing and said foremost follower and 
between said enlarged head of said plunger 
and said rearmost follower, of guide-castings 
rigidly secured to the draft-beams of the car 
and provided with shoulders adapted to limit 
the movements of said followers to hold said 
rearmost follower rigid upon imparting a buf 
fing impetus and to hold said foremost fol 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578690.txt	 
 
(No Model.) 
R. J. & J. A. BROCKMEYER. 
COOKING RANGE OR STOWE, 
No. 578,690. 
  
Patented Mar. 9, 1897, 
Fig 1. 
42%aza 
N 
Re-Frase 
I 
M 
Ma'a 
22 
YY a 
2. 
22 
2. 
2. 
M 
o 
Ou 
y 
SaaS 
S2 
N Z 
N 
N N 
N 
R N N 
S. 
S 
S. At 2. 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N D 
N 
S1 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
S. 
N N 
N. 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N N 
N 
S 
S 
S NS N 
S 
S2 
2 
s 
S2 
N: 
N 
NS 
N 
N 
N 
2 A 2 
2 22 
-II 2a-1 H 
 
2S HI is 
N 
 
 
aSaSSaaSassassaaS 
2 
WITNESSES 
9ere 22% 
%-4zee 
 
4 our-r 
/2. 
4/, 
orris perERs co, PHoro-LTHO, was "": 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD J. BROCKMEYER AND JOSEPH A. BROCKMEYER, OF BALTIMORE, 
MARYLAND. 
COOKING RANGE OR STOVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,690, dated March 9, 1897. 
Application filed April 7, 1896. Serial No. 586,507, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, RICHARD J. BROCK 
MEYER and JOSEPH A. BROCKMEYER, of the 
city of Baltimore and State of Maryland, have 
invented certain Improvements in Cooking 
Ranges or Stoves, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of this invention, in common 
With others of its class, is to construct a cook 
ing stove or range in such manner that the 
oven thereof will be heated from the door 
side, as Well as from the other sides thereof, 
as will hereinafter fully appear. With this 
in view we provide the stove-plate on the 
front or door side of the stove with two open 
ings, one above and the other below the oven, 
and make the oven-door hollow and provide 
the inner plate of the door with openings 
which, when the door is closed, register with 
the openings in the stove-plate before men 
tioned. Further, we hinge over the openings 
in the stove and door plates gravity-closing 
Valves and place across the said openings 
Spurs which serve to open the valves as the 
oven-door is closed. The spaces above and 
below the Owen are then in communication 
With the interior of the door, and when the 
direct-draft damper of the stove is closed 
and the products of combustion, which, from 
the construction of the stove, have a move 
ment in a downward direction or from over 
the Oven to underneath the same, a portion 
of the said products pass downward through 
the door and heat the inside plate thereof, 
which plate constitutes the front wall of the 
OWel. 
In the further description of the said in 
vention which follows reference is made to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
hereof, and in which 
Figure 1 is an exterior front view of theim 
proved cooking range or stove with the oven 
door open. Fig. 2 is a central longitudinal 
Section of the Same. Fig. 3 is a cross-section 
of Fig. 1, taken on the dotted line acac. 
Referring now to the drawings, A is the 
stove-oven, and C, the space above the oven, 
separated from the space b in the rear of the 
oven by a plate B, in which is situated the 
direct-draft damper C. The space c under 
the oven is in communication with the space 
b and also with the space d at the end of the 
stove, which latteris separated from the space 
b by a partition-plate D. The wall E of the 
oven is heated by the fire-bricke in the fire 
pot F. 
G is the oven-door, hinged, as is common, 
to the stove-plate H. This door is made hol 
low, so as to produce the spacef, and the in 
ner plate of the door is denoted by g. 
I and J are openings in the stove-plate H, 
situated, respectively, above and below the 
oven, the former leading into the space a and 
the latter into the space c. These openings 
have each a gravity-closing hinged valve h, 
the valves being on the inside of the stove 
plate H. 
In the oven-door plate g are openings K 
and L, which register with those I and J in 
the stove-plate H when the door is closed, 
and these latter openings having gravity-clos 
ing valves i, similar to the ones h, before de 
scribed in connection with the stove-plate H. 
Across each of the openings I, J, K, and L. 
is a spuri, and the spurs pass each other as 
the oven-door is closed and open the valves. 
When the direct-draft damper C is open, 
the products of combustion from the fire-pot 
take the shortest and most direct course to 
the stovepipe, and the oven is not heated ex 
cept through the plates E and at the top; but 
when the said damper is closed the products 
of combustion have to pass through the space 
al, over the plate k, down the space d at the 
end of the oven, along the space c under the 
oven, and thence upward through the Space 
b at the back of the oven to the smoke-pipe 
M. Now as the general direction of the prod 
ucts of combustion after leaving the plate k. 
is first downward some of them pass through 
the openings I and K into the upper part of 
the space fin the oven-door and out through 
the lower openings J and L into the space c 
and mix with the remainder, which have 
taken the direction described. From this de 
scription it will be seen that the door-plate g 
is heated from products of combustion while 
taking a downward course through the oven 
door and that the oven receives heat from the 
door. 
When the oven-door is opened, the valves 
h and close by gravity, as the Spurs i no 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
CO 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
578,690 
longer serve to keep them open and no air 
can enter the space f within the door or into 
the spaces around the oven. 
We claim as our invention 
In a cooking range or stove, the front stove 
plate thereof having an opening above and 
below the oven, combined with a hollow oven 
door with the inside plate thereof provided 
with openings which register with those in 
the front plate of the stove when the door is 
closed, a gravity-closing valve over each open 
ing, and the stove and inner door plates pro 
IC 
vided with spurs which serve to open the 
valves as the oven-door is closed, and there 
by induce a downward current of products 
of combustion through the hollow door, when 
the direct-draft damper is closed, substan 
tially as specified. 
RICHARD J. BROCKMEYER. 
JOSEPH A BROCKMEYER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. T. How ARD, 
DANL. FISHER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578790.txt	(No Model.) 
P. M. TRASK 
FRUIT PITTER, 
No. 578,790. 
Patented Mar. l6, 1897. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PRENTICE MELLEN TRASK, OF COLUMBIA, CALIFORNIA. 
FRUIT-PITTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,790, dated March 16, 1897. 
Application filed June 11, 1896, Serial No. 595,094, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it nay concern: 
Be it known that I, PRENTICE MELLEN 
TRASK, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Columbia, in the county of Tuolumne 
and State of California, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Fruit-Pit 
ters; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in fruit - pitters, and 
more particularly to the cushion upon which 
the fruit is placed while being operated upon; 
and it has for its object, among others, to 
provide a simple cheap improved construc 
tion of cushion whereby bruising or crushing 
of the fruit is avoided and which will assist 
materially in the pitting operation. The cush 
ion is provided with a covering or surface 
which lengthens the life of the yielding por 
tion thereof, as it prevents direct wear there 
upon. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear, and the novel 
features thereof will be particularly pointed 
"out in the appended claims. 
The invention is clearly illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, which, with the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, form a part 
of this specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a pitter 
cushion embodying the invention. Fig. 2 is 
a vertical section through the same. Fig. 3 
is a vertical section at right angles to Fig. 2. 
Like letters of reference indicate like parts 
in the several views. 
Referring now to the details of the draw 
ings by letter, A designates a pitting-machine 
having cutters and a central pitter B, which 
is adapted to be vertically reciprocated, and 
in line with the path of movement of the said 
cutter and pitter is a lower base-receptacle C, 
which is open at one end and has inwardly 
sloping sides, after manner of a dovetail. The 
bottom of the said receptacle is formed with 
an opening D, from which extend oppositely 
situated alined slots E. Within the said re- 
ceptacle is removably mounted a rubber cush 
ion F, having a central opening G and slots 
H similar to the opening and slots D and E. 
The cushion F has beveled sides and ends 
to fit into the base-receptacle, and extending 
inWardly from the opposite sides in transverse 
lines of the center thereof are two metallic 
plates , which have their ends secured, as at 
J, and their inner ends concave and depressed, 
as at K, and receive the seed without having 
the same come directly against the rubber of 
the cushion and thereby avoid wearing and 
tearing of the latter. 
By applying these me 
tallic plates to the cushion the latter is pre 
served and resists injury, and as said cush 
ions are expensive devices to replace, a con 
Sequent saving in the matter of expense is 
insured. The said metal plate or covering 
does not interfere in the least with the elas 
ticity of the rubber and allows the free pas 
sage of the pit or seed through the cushion, 
no matter what size it may be. Therefore 
when the orifice in the rubbercushion through 
which the fruit or seed is passed commences 
to cut and wear, the sides of said orifice allow 
not only the pit or seed to pass through, but 
also some of the fruit, thereby causing a waste, 
which increases, as the size of the orifice in 
creases until the Waste of the fruit becomes 
quite an important item. 
The device is exceptionally important in 
the art, and of course the form of the metal 
lic covering may be changed in accordance 
with the nature of the slot or opening through 
the rubber. 
Modifications in details may be resorted to 
without departing from the spirit of the in 
vention or sacrificing any of its advantages. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. The combination with a removably 
mounted elastic cushion having central open 
ing and slots extending from diametrically 
opposite sides thereof, of metallic plates hav 
ing their outer ends secured and their inner 
ends concaved and disposed and applied over 
the cushion and having a slot between their 
adjacent faces, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with a removably 
45 
 
55 
75 
90 
95 
2 
578,790 
receive the impact of the pitter and fruit, Sub- Io 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
PRENTICE MELLEN TRASK. 
L. FORSTERLING, 
TL. C. TIBBITS. 
mounted elastic cushion having central open 
ing and slots extending from diametrically 
opposite sides thereof, of metallic plates hav 
ing their outer ends secured and their inner 
5 ends concaved and disposed and applied Over 
the cushion and having a slot between their 
adjacent faces, and a substantially circular 
opening at the center thereof whereby the 
metallic plates protect the elastic cushion and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578890.txt	 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 578,890. 
R. C. MIENZIES. 
MAGHINE FOR DEFIBERIZING C0MPACTED JTE, 
Patented Mar. 16, 1897. 
V 
  
 
 
 
 
E CO CHOCO CHE 
IN A 
 
 
 
 
| 
| 
mini ifihli?itarfyrir 
|||||||||||||Allahtijas 
||||||||||||||| 
||||||||||||||||||.* 
| 
| | | 
| 
* 
H 
||| TBF4 
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| 
i ju 
| 
 
  
 
  
  
 
2 File?if 
 
, ?e. ZZCa.44- 
e/~22 
w 
Invrezator: 
 
ROBERT C. MENZIES, 
4y WKAQ.---> KK. K.-- 
Mtto a ey. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IR OBERT C. MEN ZIES, O F G L EN S FAILL S, NEW YORK. 
MACH I NE FOR D E F B ERZI NG CO V PACTED J UTE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,890, dated March 16, 1897. 
Application filed September 12, 1894, Serial No. 522,798, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Glens Falls, in the county of Warren and State 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Machines for Defiberizing 
Compacted Jute, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to a machine for loos 
ening the fibers of jute that has been com 
pressed in the process of baling for transpor 
tation, the jute being often reduced to such a 
compact mass that the fibers can only be sep 
arated by machinery of exceeding strength 
and power. 
The object of my invention is to provide fa 
cilities for mechanically separating the fibers 
of the compacted jute withoutinjury to them. 
This object I attain by the mechanism illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, which 
are herein referred to and form part of this 
specification, and in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a machine 
which embodies my invention, parts of said 
"machine being broken out to show underly 
ing parts; Fig. 2, a plan view; Fig. 3, a front 
elevation, and Fig. 4 an enlarged and de 
tached detail of the adjustable feed mech 
anism. 
As represented in the drawings, A desig 
mates the framework of the machine, which 
may be of the form shown or any other suit 
able form, and it may be composed of wood 
or metal, as may be preferred. 
B is a shaft journaled on the framework 
and provided with a tight pulley 1 and a loose 
pulley 2, to which motionis imparted by means 
of a driving-belt (not shown in the drawings) 
from any suitable motive power. Said shaft 
is provided with a longitudinal spline or 
feather 3 for a purpose that will be shortly 
described. A series of arms C are arranged 
on the shaft B radially from the latter and 
spaced equidistantly, so that the entire series 
will form a helix around the shaft B, said 
arms being spaced equidistantly on the length 
of the shaft, preferably by means of a series 
of sleeves 4, which slip on the shaft B. The 
several arms C are positioned on the shaft B 
to stand at a required angle to the lines of the 
other arms of the series by means of a key 
seat cutin each arm and fitted to slide on the 
spline 3. The outer end of each arm is pro 
vided with a series of three or more seg 
Be it known that I, ROBERT C. MIENZIES, of || mental plates D, and the outer edge of each 
of said plates is provided with a series of 
teeth or serrations whose angled sides will be 
arranged toward the advancing edge of the 
arm to which it is attached, as shown in Fig. 
1, in which the direction of movement is in 
dicated by an arrow, and preferably the first 
tooth on each segment-plate is larger. than 
the others, so as to present a longer bevel 
when the segment-plates strike the bale of 
jute, (the latter being indicated by dotted 
lines in Fig. 1,) and thereby the jute will be 
broken from the bale instead of being torn 
therefrom, as would be the case if the posi 
tion of the teeth were reversed to bring them 
into the position of the teeth of a circular saw. 
The series of segmental plates are Spaced 
equidistantly in the direction of the length 
of the shaft by means of spacing-blocks 5, 
and the spaces between the successive arms 
C are arranged so that the space between the 
outer plate of one arm in respect to the near 
est plate on the next succeeding arm will 
have the same distance from the face of the 
outer plate of the next arm as is given be 
tween the plates of each series of segmental 
plates, that is to say, if the series of arms be 
considered as a revolving drum with series 
of segmental plates spaced along the direc 
tion of its length the several series of seg 
mental plates will be Spaced at equal dis 
tances over the entire length of the imagi 
nary drum, so that the paths of the several 
segmental plates will be equidistantly spaced 
on the length of said drum. 
The segmental plates D and spacing-blocks 
5 are secured to the respective arms C by 
means of bolts 6, which also secure the ends 
of links 7, which connect the outer end of 
each arm to the next succeeding arm, except 
ing there is no link between the first and last 
arm, and the two arms last referred to are 
not connected together like the others for the 
reason that for that purpose a link would be 
required to extend nearly across the entire 
length of the machine, and while such a link 
would not add materially in supporting the 
two outer arms against a strain thrown upon 
them in the operation of the machine it would 
be adding a useless weight to be carried by 
the shaft B without adding to the effective 
O 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 -- 
9 O 
95 
IOJO 
 
578,890 
O 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
5 O 
55 
2 
ness of the machine. By this system of links 
the several connected arms support each 
other through the entire series. The arms C 
and sleeves 4, when fixed in position on the 
shaft B, are clamped between a collar 8 and 
a screw-nut 9, for which a screw-thread is 
formed on one part of the shaft B. 
E designates ribes or clearers for removing 
the jute from the teeth of the segmental plates 
D, and for that purpose one of said clear 
ers will suffice for each series of segmental 
plates. The outer end of each of said clearers 
is attached to a cross-bar 10, which is made 
adjustable, in respect to the center of the shaft 
B, in the framework A, and for that purpose 
the ends of the cross-bar 10 enter angular 
grooves formed in the front posts of the frame 
Work A, as shown in Figs. I and 3, and said 
cross-baris securedin place by driving wedges 
or keys between it and the shoulders of said 
grooves, as shown in Fig. 3. To adjust the 
cross-bar 10, said keys should be driven out 
sufficiently to loosen said cross-bar. Then, 
after the cross-bar 10 is adjusted to a required 
position, the keys can be driven in to secure 
said cross-bar in place. The inner end of 
each clearer is attached to a cross-bar 11, which 
is connected to adjustable suspenders 12, at 
tached to the framework A in such manner 
that the cross-bar 11 can be raised or lowered, 
as occasion may require, and for that purpose 
the upper end of each of said suspenders 12 
is provided with a slotted opening, as indi 
cated in dotted lines in Fig. 1, and a bolt 
passes through said slotted opening to secure 
the upper end of the suspender 12 to an ad 
jacent crOSS-bar of the framework A. The 
clearers E are curved, so that the teeth of the 
segmental plates will protrude therefrom at 
the front of the machine, but the lower part 
of each clearer has a straight portion that is 
formed talungentially to the curved portion, so 
that the teeth of the segmental plates will be 
automatically drawn in above the lower edge 
of the clearer, and thereby any jute carried 
by said teeth will be discharged downwardly 
therefrom and deposited on a conveyer F, 
which may be composed of an endless belt, 
as shown in the drawings, or any other well 
known form of conveyer suitable for the 
purpose. 
It is obvious that by making the clearers E 
adjustable independently of the shaft B and 
its journal-boxes provision is made for ob 
taining a greater or lesser projection of the 
teeth of the segmental plates D at the front 
of the machine and an earlier or later retrace 
tion of said plates at the lower portion of the 
clearers E. 
G is a feeding-table fixed to the front of the 
machine and preferably arranged on an in 
cline. Said table is designed to hold the bale 
of jute while the latter is being fed toward 
the separating mechanism of the machine. 
A transverse shaft 32 is journaled to the for 
ward end of the feeding-table G and is pro 
vided with pinions 13, which mesh into racks 
Y 
14, as indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 1. A 
face-board Hishinged to the inner end of the 
racks 14, so as to be turned in an erect posi 
tion, as shown by full lines in Fig. 1, or to be 
turned down, as indicated by dotted lines in 
the same figure. Said face-board bears against 
the bale of jute to force the latterinto position 
where the teeth of the segmental plates ID can 
take in the fibers of the jute to effect the sep 
aration of said fibers from the bale. On the 
outer face of the face-board Han angle-brace 
15 is hinged, so as to be turned perpendicu 
larly to the plane of the face-board for the 
purpose of holding the latter in its erect posi 
tion or to turn against the face of the face 
board to allow the latter to be turned doWin 
for the purpose of placing a bale of jute in 
position on the feeding-table G in contact with 
the ribs E, so that the teeth of the segmental 
plates can strike into the jute. On the outer 
end of the shaft 32 a ratchet-wheel 16 is Se 
cured for the purpose of affording means for 
imparting an intermittent rotatory motion to 
said shaft. A shaft 17 is arranged at one end 
of the machine and is provided with a pulley 
18, on which a belt 19, leading from a feed 
pulley 20, runs to impart motion to the shaft 
17. The feed-pulley 20 is secured on the shaft 
B. The shaft 17 carries an eccentric 21, 
which is indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 1, 
and said eccentric is connected by a rod 22 to 
an arm 23, arranged intermediate the shafts 
32 and 17, and the free end of said arm is pro 
vided with a -slotted opening 24, in which the 
wrist-pin, to which the rod 22 is connected, 
can be adjusted, as occasion may require. 
To the arm 23 a rod 25 is jointed, and to the 
outer end of said rod is attached a compound 
pawl, which is composed of a head 26, which 
is rectangular in form and is provided with 
oppositely - located knife - edges and has a 
screw-stem that is fitted to screw into the endl 
of the rod 25, whereby said head is adjustable 
to bring either of its edges in position to take 
against the teeth of the ratchet-wheel 16 and 
to either increase or , diminish the distance be 
tween it and the joint of the rod 25 to the arm 
23. Said head and rod form one part of the 
compound pawl, the other part consisting of 
a bifurcated pawl 27, which is jointed to the 
rod 25 and is provided with a head 28, ex 
tending outwardly beyond the head 26, and 
is provided with a knife-edge that is adapted 
to take against the teeth of the ratchet-wheel 
16. The head 26 should be arranged in rela 
tion to the head 2S in Such manner that when 
one of them is in position to engage with a 
tooth of said ratchet-wheel the other will be 
positioned about midway between two adja 
cently-located teeth of said wheel, and by this 
arrangement provision is made for imparting 
a partial rotative movement to the ratchet 
wheel less than the pitch of its teeth. By 
adjusting the wrist-pin in the slotted open 
ing 24 the movement of the arm 23 can be in 
creased or diminished, as occasion may re 
quire, and thereby the degree of rotative 
9 O 
95 
I CO 
I o 5 
I TIO 
I I5 
I 2 O 
I 25 
578,890 
3 
teeth of said serrated plates will protrude be 
yomd said curved portion and be retracted at 
the straight portion of said clearers, of a feed 
ing mechanismsubstantially as described 
whereby a bale of compacted material will be 
fed forward to the action of the teeth of the 
serrated plates, as and for the purpose speci 
fied. 
2. The combination of a shaft, B, a series of 
arms, C, secured to and arranged helically 
around said shaft, a series of serrated seg 
mental plates, D, attached to the outer end of 
each of Said arms, and a series of clearers, E, 
having an tupper curved portion and a lower 
straight portion that is tangential to the 
curved portion; said clearers being adjustable 
with relation to the shaft B, as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
3. The combination of a shaft, B, provided 
with arms, C, having a series of serrated seg 
mental plates, D, at their outer end, an inter 
mediate shaft, 17, driven by the shaft B and 
having an eccentric, 21, connected to a rod, 
25, provided with a longitudinally-adjustable 
head, 26, a shaft, 32, provided with a ratchet 
wheel, 16with which the head 26 intermit 
tently engagesand having pinions, 13, se 
cured thereon, racks, 14, which gear into said 
pinioms, aface-board, H, hinged to said racks, 
and a feeding-table, G, on which said face 
board is arranged to move, as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
4. The combination of a shaft, 17, an eccen 
tric, 21, secured to said shaft, a rod, 25, moved 
by said eccentric and provided with a longi 
tudinally - adjustable head, 26, and with a 
pawl, 27, that is hinged to said rod, and a 
ratchet-wheel, 16, with which said head and 
pawl are fitted to engage, as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
5. The combination of a shaft, B, a series of 
serrated plates, D, carried by and helically 
arranged around said shaft; the teeth of said 
plates having inclined edges at their foremost 
part, a series of clearers, E, arranged to re 
move the fibrous material from said serrated 
plates, and a conveyer, F, consisting of an 
endless belt that is arranged under said clear 
ers and is adapted to convey the fibrous ma 
terial away from the machine, as and for the 
purpose specified. 
ROBERT C. MENZIES. 
Witnesses: 
H. PRIOR IKING, 
CASS. C. LAPOINT. 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
Io5 
movement of the shaft 12 can be varied to 
meet any requirement of circumstances. 
I is a handle secured to the face-board H 
for the purpose of turning the latter either 
up or down, and preferably said handle is 
arranged to stand at an out Wardly-inclined 
angle to the plane of the face-board in such. 
manner that when the latter is turned down 
Said handle can be utilized as a Skid on which 
a bale of jutte can be moved preparatory to 
its being deposited on the feeding-table G, 
so that it willie between Said face-board and 
the clearers E. Instead of a single handle II, 
as shown in the drawings, the face-board H 
can have several like handles arranged to 
operate as skids. 
My invention is operated in the following 
manner: While the face-board H is turned 
down at the outer extremity of its movement 
a bale of jute is rolled up over said face-board 
and its handle and deposited on the feeding 
table G, so as to lie between the face-board 
and the clearers E and so as to bear against 
the latter, after which the face-board HI should 
be turned up into its perpendicular position 
and locked by the angle-brace 15. The shaft 
B is then set in motion and causes the bale to 
be fed in ward by the feeding mechanism op 
erated by said shaft, and by the rotations of 
the shaft B the arms C will successively be 
carried to the front of the machine to pro 
trude the Series of segmental plates D, at 
tached to each arm, beyond the clearers, so 
that their teeth will strike against the side of 
the bale and thereby loosen and break out the 
fibers of the jute from the bale, and saidfibers 
will be carried by said teeth toward the bot 
tom of the machine until said fibers are au 
tomatically removed from the teeth by the 
clearers D. The fibers dropping from the 
teeth fall upon the conveyer Fandare carried 
by the latter to any place provided for the 
purpose of receiving them preparatory to 
their being made into fabrics or other articles 
for which such material is used. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination, with a shaft, B, hav 
ing a series of arms, C, arranged helically 
thereon; each of said arms being provided 
with a series of segmental plates, D, whose 
outer edges are serrated, a clearer or clearers, 
E, having an upper curved portion and a 
straight lower portion that is tangential to 
said curved portion; said clearers being ar 
ranged in such relation to the shaft B that the 
O 
I 5 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US578990.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 578,990. 
S ta 
F. HERON. 
METALLIC RAILWAY CAR, 
Patented Mar, 16, 1897. 
 
i 
 
 
se 
rs 
/7ZZ/272222; . 
iC3 
21-yboyfa 
THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHoTour THo., wash:Ngron, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED HERON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
MEAC RAWAY - CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 578,990, dated March 16, 1897. 
Application filed July 20, 1896, Serial No. 599,762, (No model.) 
To all tufton, it T.C.J/ concern: 
close my invention and enable those skilled 
Be it known that I, FRED HERON, a citizen 
in the art to make or practice the same. In 
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in 
describing and illustrating my improvement, 
therefore, I prefer to and practically have 55 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
limited the description and illustrations to 
ments in Metallic Railway-Cars, of which the 
the means by which the channel-beams that 
following is a specification. 
form the platform of an ordinary car are se 
My invention relates particularly to me 
cured together and held in position, believ 
tallic railway-cars that are formed of metal 
ing that this will enable those skilled in the 
structural members or channel-beams, and 
art to use my invention and apply it to other 
especially to the means for securing these 
portions of the car. 
beams or members together and against lon 
In constructing my improvements and ap 
gitudinal and ordinary displacement. 
plying them to a platform-car I use several 
The object of my invention is to provide 
channel-beams A, of the desired shape and 
a simple, economical, and efficient metallic 
cross-section, and place them longitudinally 
railway-car; and the invention consists in 
or lengthwise of the car. These channel 
the features, combinations, and details of con 
beams are of sufficient width so that any de 
struction hereinafter described and claimed. 
sired number may be used to obtain the de 
In the accompanying drawings, Figurelisa 
sired width of the car and are arranged with 
transverse sectional view taken through a rail 
their flanges or legs a extending downwardly 
way-car in the vicinity of the needle-beams; 
and contacting the legs of the next adjacent 
Fig. 2, an enlarged transverse sectional de 
channel-beams. 
tail showing two sections of the structural 
To prevent ordinary displacement of parts 
members and the means for securing them 
due to usage of the car, I provide the legs or 
together, and Fig. 3 a side elevation of one 
flanges of several of the channel-beams with 
of the channel-beams removed from the car. 
cup-shaped projections at and the legs or 
In the art to which this invention relates 
flanges of the adjacent or contiguous chan 
it is well known that metal is adapted to en 
nel-beams with cup-shaped recesses a, adapt 
ter largely into the construction of both the 
ed to receive and hold the projections a on 
underpinning and superstructure of railway 
the next adjacent beams in interlocking or 
cars, so that the means by which these por 
meshing condition. Each channel-beam is 
tions may be secured together and held 
provided with several of the cup-shaped pro 
against lateral displacement is one of the 
jections or recesses intermeshing one with the 
most important features. The usual method 
other, so that it will be seen that lateral or 
of securing the members together by rivets, 
longitudinal displacement is impossible until 
bolts, and nuts is objectionable in that the 
the parts have been removed from their in 
cars must be, in order to take curves, to a 
termeshing or interlocking position. Tomore 
certain degree elastic and permit of a mod 
securely hold these parts in position, I pro 
erate amount of flexure. As a consequence 
vide tie-bolts B, that extend transversely 
bolts or rivets are apt to be sheared, thereby 
through the car from side to side thereof, and 
displacing or allowing the parts to vary from 
surrounding these bolts in each of the chan 
the desired arrangement. To remove this 
nels and between the cup-shaped recesses or 
objection and provide simple and economical 
projections are thimbles C, that act as spac 
mechanism by which the different portions 
ing-pieces, contacting the flanges of the beams 
of the cars may be secured against ordinary 
at the points where the cup-shaped projec 
displacement is the principal object of my 
tions or recesses are located. The outer ends 
invention. 
of these tie-bolts are provided with hemi 
In describing and illustrating my improve 
spherical washers D and nuts E, that allow 
ment I will only describe and illustrate that 
of a certain movement much like a ball-joint, 
portion which I consider to be new, taking 
but still act to hold the parts securely. By 
in connection only so much of the old mech 
this arrangement of construction it will be 
anism and elements as are necessary to dis- seen that the displacement of the parts is pre 
9o 
95. 
IOd 
IO 
3O 
35 
 
2 
578,990 
Vented by the interlocking cup-shaped pro 
jections and recesses, but at the same time 
the peculiar shape of the recesses and projec 
tions permits of an elasticity sufficient for the 
cars to take curves or flex the necessary 
amount when loaded. All that the bolts and 
nuts have to do is to prevent separation of 
the parts and are not liable in any way what 
ever to be sheared, all of which will be read 
ily appreciated by persons skilled in this par 
ticular art. 
In Fig. 1 I have shown the side bars G, 
needle-beams H, and center sills I. These are 
merely shown in their arrangement in the 
drawings, so as to present a complete cross 
section of a platform-car, and I do not desire 
to be limited to this particular kind of struc 
ture, but to embody my improvement in any 
kind of metallic railway-cars, leaving the ar 
rangement of the different parts to the me 
chanical skill of the manufacturer, builder, 
or artisan. 
I claim 
1. In a car of the class described, the combi 
nation of several metal channel-beams form 
ing part of the structural members of a car, 
lo 
25 
 
several of which are provided with cup-shaped 
projections and the next adjacent beams pro 
vided with cup-shaped recesses interlocking 
with the projections to prevent longitudinal 
or ordinary displacement, and bolt mechan 
ism for tying the beams together at the points 
where the projections and recesses are lo 
cated, substantially as described. 
2. In a car of the class described, the combi 
nation of several channel-beams arranged 
lengthwise to form the platform of a car and 
with their legs extending downwardly, some 
of such beams having cup-shaped projections 
on their legs and the rest having cup-shaped 
4. 
recesses on their legs or flanges interlocking 
one with the other to prevent longitudinal and 
vertical displacement, bolt mechanism passed 
through the cup-shaped portions of the legs, 
and thimbles surrounding the bolts and con- 4. 
tacting cup-shaped portions to act as spacers 
and in connection with the bolts to tie the 
parts together, substantially as described. 
FRED HERON. 
3. 
Witnesses: 
ED HAUPT, 
THOMAS B. MCGREGOR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579091.txt	(No Model.) 
W HAMILTON. 
BURIAL CASKET, 
No. 579,09), 
Patented Mar, l6, 1897, 
% 2S SN es 
  
 
 
 
 
2es X 
3 SSNSNSNy 
star 
7 
w 
s 
r 
K. 
1 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HAMILTON, OF ALLEGHENY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
BURIAL-CASKET. 
- SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 579,091, dated March 16, 1897. 
Application filed October 30, 1896, Serial No. 610,570. (No model.) 
O 
To all, Luhon, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM HAMILTON, of 
Allegheny, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Burial-Caskets, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming part of this speci 
fication, in which - 
Figure 1 shows in vertical longitudinal sec 
tion a burial-casket constructed in accord 
ance with myinvention. Fig. 2 is a plan view 
thereof with the lid partly broken away and 
with one of the end panels removed. Fig. 3 
is an end view of the casket shown in Fig. 2 
with the couch removed, and Fig. 4 is a per 
spective view of the couch. 
My invention consists in a burial-casket 
having a removable rigid couch shaped and 
upholstered in the manner of the body of a 
sofa, or lounge and without side boards. 
In the management of funerals the body of 
the deceased may be laid upon the couch and 
the couch supported on a suitable stand until 
it is desired to make immediate preparation 
for the burial, at which time the casketproper 
may be brought into the room and the couch 
carrying the body placed within the casket. 
In this way the casket itself is kept out of 
view as long as possible. The importance of 
this in sparing the feelings of friends of the 
deceased person will readily be appreciated. 
In the drawings, 2 represents the main por 
tion of the casket proper, having side and end 
panels and a lid 3. As shown in the draw 
ings, one of the end panels 4 is removable, 
25 
35 
 
45 
being adapted to slide vertically in grooves 
5, or otherwise to be detachably connected to 
the casket. Either of the end panels may be 
thus capable of being opened, or one of the 4o 
side panels may be made to open for a like 
purpose, or, within the scope of my invention, 
broadly stated, the couch may be adapted to 
be inserted at the top of the casket, the lid 
being made removable for that purpose. 
6 is the couch suitably upholstered and 
made with a rigid frame in the form of the bed 
of an ordinary sofa without side boards or 
end boards. Before the body is to be placed 
in the casket the couch is set upon a support- 5o 
ing frame or leg 7, as shown in Fig. 4, and 
the body is laid thereon. The couch is al 
lowed to rest on the frame 7 until the time 
for the burial, when it is lifted with the body, 
pushed endwise into the casket 2 through the 55 
open end thereof, and the end panel 4 then 
replaced, whereupon the lid, if removable, may 
be closed. 
Within the scope of the invention as de 
fined in the claim the improvement may be 6o 
modified in various ways. 
I claim 
A burial-casket having a removable rigid 
couch, shaped and upholstered in the manner 
of the body of a sofa or lounge, and without 65 
side boards. 
my hand. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
WM. HAMILTON. 
- 
Witnesses: . 
THOMAS W. BAKEWELL, 
WM. D. HAMILTON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579191.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 579, 191. 
W. STRAIT. 
HARROW, 
s 
Patented Mar. 23, 1897. 
2 
  
 
E 
 
  
 
 
 
y 
S 
/ht E" 
 
- - 
--" " 
- 
Attorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM STRAIT, OF ELMIRA, NEW YORK. 
HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 579,191, dated March 23, 1897. 
Application filed May 10, 1895, Serial No. 548,844, (No model.) 
O 
To all, uhon, it naily concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMSTRAIT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Elmira, 
in the county of Chemung and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Harrows; and I do declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art, to which it appertains 
to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the figures of reference marked on the 
accompanying drawings, which form a part 
of this specification. 
Myinvention relates specifically to a means 
of pivotally securing the tooth-supporting 
bars or rods to the side bars of the framework 
of an adjustable tooth-harrow; also, to a novel 
construction and mode of attachment of the 
shoe or runner by which the implement is sup 
ported when being carried to and from the 
field. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows a typical form of spring-tooth harrow 
in the construction of which my said improve 
ments have been used. Fig. 2 represents a 
plan view of the pivotal attachment of the 
tooth-bar to the side bar with the shoe at 
tached to the side bar. Fig. 3 is a bottom 
view of the parts shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is 
a side view of the parts shown in Fig. 2. 
In the several figures in my accompanying 
drawings, 1 represents the side bars of the 
harrow, rigidly connected by the bars 2. Piv 
oted between the bars 1 are the bars 3, pref 
erably of angle-iron, to which are secured 
harrow-teeth of any desired form. I have 
shown a Well-known form of Spring-tooth 4, 
rigidly secured to the angle-bar 3. Any de 
sired kind of device for rocking the bars 3 for 
the purpose of adjusting the angle of the tooth 
4 can be applied. I have indicated a con 
necting-rod 5, with cranks 6 pivoted thereto 
and secured to the angle-bars 3. 
7 is an iron block bolted to the end of the 
angle-bar 3 by a bolt 8, passing through the 
said block and bar and secured by a nut 9. 
The block has a slight depression correspond 
ing in shape to the head of the bolt to prevent 
the latter from turning when the nut is tight 
ened. The block preferably lies in the angle 
of the angle-bar so that one bolt will secure it 
rigidly in place. 
The block is secured to the angle-bar with 
one end preferably flush therewith. From 
this end of the block and preferably integral 
there with projects a short hook 11. The side 
bar has a hole 12, into which this hook is to 
be inserted. The hook is preferably tapered 
and contains a sharp bend 12 in it. When 
the block 7 is detached from the angle-bar, 
the hook can be readily inserted in the hole 
12; but on securing the block to the angle 
bar after the hook has been inserted in the 
said hole the hook cannot be withdrawn there 
from, but will rotate only in the side bar, thus 
giving the desired pivotal connection. 
13 represents my improved shoe. At the 
end by which it is to be secured to the side 
bar I bend the two edges up toward each other 
till they form an elongate U, the distance 
between the parallel sides being about the 
thickness of the side bar. Into this channel 
the side bar is inserted until its edge bears 
on the channel of the U, when a bolt 15 is 
passed through the U-shaped part and the 
side bar securing them rigidly together. 
To afford additional security, the edges of 
the U-shaped part may bear against a pro 
jecting ledge 16 of the side bar, as shown in 
Fig. 3, but this is not essential, as the edge 
of the bar being forced home in the bottom 
of the channel a rigid fastening is insured. 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
struction and arrangement of parts shown 
and described, what I claim is 
1. A detachable coupling for harrows or the 
like consisting of a flat body part or block 
provided with a bolt-hole and means to en 
gage the bolt-head to prevent turning and a 
pintle projecting from the body part in line 
there with and at right angles to the plane of 
the end of the body part and having its end 
bent substantially parallel to the plane of 
said end. 
2. A detachable coupling for harrows con 
sisting of a flat body part provided with a 
bolt-aperture, a depression in its face, and a 
pintle projecting from the end of the body 
part and having its extremity bent parallel 
to the plane of the end of the body part. 
3. In a harrow, the combination with a side 
bar disposed upon its edge, of an angle-iron 
tooth-bar likewise disposed, and having its 
extremity adjacent to the side bar, a detach 
25 
35 
45 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
579,191 
able coupling-block provided with a bolt-hole, 
and a pintle projecting from the body part 
through a transverse aperture in the side bar 
in line With the tooth-bar and bent at right 
angles, a bolt securing said block against the 
face of the angle-iron tooth-bar, and means 
to prevent the turning of the bolt, substan 
tially as described. 
4. As an article of manufacture, a shoe for 
harrows and the like, having a bolt-hole, an 
elongated horizontal U-shaped front portion 
with parallel sides, an intermediate down 
wardly - inclined part having outwardly 
Io 
curved edges, and a rear horizontal portion; 
the upper edges of the front portion merging 
into the curved sides of the intermediate por 
tion and into the parallel edges of the rear 
horizontal portion, and the bottom wall of 
the front portion merging into the face of the 
inclined part. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
WM. STRAIT. 
Witnesses: 
FENELON B. BROCK, 
J. FRED. IXELLEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579291.txt	(No Model.) H. W. CADOTT & C. C. CREWSON. 
HOSE COUPLING FOR, AIR BRAKES, &c, 
No. 579,291. 
Patented Mar. 23, 1897. 
 
WITNESSES. 
, 67%lezv. 
26. (#-e?- 
Fid, 3. 
INVENTORS. 
vacae. Navy. 
\\a&s -\, N (weswa 
a 6444., 6 6.ewton. ferty 
 
is co., Pitc-liho., was 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HENRY W. CADOTT AND CHARLES C. CREWSON, OF HORTON, KANSAS. 
HOSE COUPLNG FOR AR-BRAKES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 579,291, dated March 23, 1897. 
Application filed September 21, 1896, Serial No. 606,528, (No model.) 
?o all whon, it way conce#7. 
Beit known that we, HENRY W. CADOTT and 
CHARLES C. CREWSON, citizens of the United 
States of America, residing at Horton, in the 
county of Brown and State of Kansas, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Hose-Couplings, of which the following is 
a specification, reference being had therein to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the figures 
of reference marked thereon, forming a part 
of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of one-half 
the coupling, showing by dotted lines the 
valve and wedge-shaped operating-block. 
Fig. 2 is a detailed perspective view of the 
coupling, showing two halves coupled to 
gether, also having a portion broken away to 
show the interior mechanism. Fig. 3 is a 
perspective view of the valve, showing the 
leaf-spring for closing said valve and the 
Wedge-shaped operating-block and stem. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents the 
valve with its lug 11 and jaws 12, hinged by 
two parallel extending ears 2 and secured 
thereto by means of a pivot-pin 20, and the 
jaws 12 secured to the stem - shank 18 by 
means of a pivot-pin 17 and operated by the 
stem 4, carrying a Wedge-shaped block 5. 
The lip 6 engages the block 5 when coupling 
and forces valve 1 from its seat, opening a 
passage between gaskets 9 and 10. 
2 represents the two parallel extending ears 
secured to the wall of coupling. 
3 represents the leaf-spring secured to the 
Wall of coupling and bearing against the 
valve 1 for the purpose of keeping the valve 
1 closed when uncoupled. 
 
- 
7 and 8 represent gaskets placed around 
the stem 4 for the purpose of preventing air 
escaping. 
13 represents a leaf-spring fastened to the 
wedge-shaped block 5 in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 to 
compensate for wear and the variation of the 
lip 6. 
14 represents an air-passage, 
15 represents a threaded plug for the pur 
pose of gaining access to interior of coupling. 
16 represents the cap attached to coupling 
for retaining lip 6 in a rigid position. 
18 represents the shank to stem 4. 
19 represents mouth of coupling. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is as follows: 
1. Ahose-coupling provided with the valve 
1 pivoted at one end to the ears 2 and en 
gaged at its opposite end by the shank 18 of 
the stem 4 and bearing against the spring 3 
and operated by the Wedge-shaped block 5, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A hose-coupling provided with the valve 
1 and the mechanism consisting of the spring 
3, shank 18, stem 4, and wedge-shaped block 
5, connected together by the pivot 17, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
65 
HENRY W. CADOTT. 
CHARLES C. CREWSON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. MCNARY, 
W. H. KEMPER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579393.txt	(No Model.) 
L. HUNT, 
ELECTRIC SUNSHINE ANN UNCIATOR, 
No. 579,393. 
27%/ 
Patented Mar, 23, 1897, 
(2/- 
 
 
 
v2. 
7 p. 
ISP as: ACS 
s EEOut: 
ere t 
 
 
  
   
- 
N 
w 
l 
M 
tra. 
SSSSS 
2Z252.2% 
N 
77 - 7/ 
2 
12 w 
2/ , 
SSS SS 
Zeazz -1/2.7%; i. 
-72Z -6z- -(6ezeel -%ts s 
the Noras YERS Co., Photo-THC., WASHMOON. D. C. 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEON A R D H U NT, OF ST. LOUIS, MII SS O U R.I. 
E ECR C S UNS - N E A N N J N CAC, R, 
SECIFICATION forming part of Letters Paten: No. 579,393, dated March 23, 1897. 
Application filed October 17, 1896, Serial No. 609,188, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To al., Luhon, it fictly co-cei'72. 
Be it known that I, LEONARD CNT, of the 
city of St. Louis and State of Missouri, have 
invented certain new and useful improve 
ments in Electric Sunshine-Annunciators, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part hereof. 
My present invention relates to electric sun 
Shine-annunciatol's, and is an improvement 
upon the construction shown, described, and 
claimed in my application filed March 23, 
1896, and serially numbered 584,441, and both 
of my applications are improvements upon 
the device shown in United States Letters 
Patent No. 551,284, granted to myself and 
Frederick W. Duenckel as joint inventors, of 
which patent i am now the sole owner. 
Myinvention consists in the novel construc 
tion, combination, and arrangement of parts 
hereinafter shown, described, and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional view of 
Imy improved Sunshine-annunciator, taken 
Fig. 
approximately on the line 1 1 of Fig. 2. 
2 is a top plan view of the device with the 
glass removed. Fig. 3 is a vertical sec 
tional view on the line 33 of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 
is a vertical sectional view illustrating the 
construction of a stop of which I make use. 
Fig. 5 is a view in perspective of a clip car 
rying contact-points and used in breaking 
and closing the circuit. 
Referring by numerals to the drawings, 1 
is a rectangular metal base, and said base 
has a rim 2 projecting downwardly from its 
edges. In the center of the upper face of the 
base 1 is located a bearing-frame 3, which is 
adjustably connected to said base by means 
of the machine-screws 4, working in the slots 
5 and screw-seated in the base-block 5*. 
The bearing-frame 3 consists of the base 6 
and the upwardly-extending arms 7 and S, 
formed integral, and in the upper ends of 
the arms 7 and 8 are W-shaped notches form 
ing the bearings 9 and 10. 
The disks 1 are secured to the Outer faces 
of the arms 7 and 8 by means of the screws 
12 in such a position that said W-shaped 
notches are hidden from view from either side 
of the machine. 
Projecting upwardly from the upper stir 
face of the base 1 and near the edges thereof 
is a wall 13, encircling the mechanism of the 
annunciator. Fixed to One end of the base 
1 and outside of the Wall 13 are binding-posts 
14 and 15, to which the wires 16 and 17 of the 
recording instrument, 1S are attached. Cups 
19 and 20 are located in apertures in the base 
1 inside of the wall 13 and near the binding 
posts 14 and 15. Wires 21 and 22 are fixed 
in the bottoms of these cups and connect 
with the binding-posts 14 and 15. The cups 
19 and 20 are partly filled with mercury. 
Mounted in the bearings 9 and 10 is a bar 
23, having a knife-edge upon each of its ends 
to form a pivotal connection between said bar 
and said bearings, and projecting downwardly 
in parallel positions relative to each other 
from the center of the bar 23 is a pair of rods 
24, and a screw 25 is inserted through the 
bearing in the center of the bar and extends 
downwardly between said rods 24 with its 
head resting upon said bar, 
A sliding block 26 has a central aperture 
27, which is screw-threaded to receive the 
screw 25, and upon each side of this central 
aperture 27 are apertures 2S, in which the 
rods 24 slidingly operate. The block 26 is 
designed to be raised and lowered by the op 
eration of the screw 25, and the Screw 25 is 
operated by manually engaging the milled 
head thereof. A screw-threaded rod 29 ex 
tends from near the upper end of the block 
26 and in a horizontal position toward One 
end of the machine, and a screw-threaded 
weight 30 is adjustably mounted upon said 
rod. Attached to the end of and formed in 
tegral with the block 26 is a horizontal bar 
31, to each end of which are fixed the hori 
Zontally-alined loops or clamps 32 and 33. 
Each of the clamps 32 and 33 consists of two 
parts in the form of a split bearing, and said 
parts are held together by means of the ma 
Chine-screws. 34. 
A glass pipe 35, having the upturned ends 
30 and 37 and filled with mercury, is placed 
in a horizontal position in the clamps 32 and 
33. Stirips 3S of packing are placed around 
the pipe before the clamps 32 and 33 are tight 
ened. The end 36 of the pipe 35 extends up 
Wardly some distance at right angles to the 
body of said pipe, and then the portion 39 of 
said pipe is bent in Wardly, and a portion 40 
of said pipe extends downwardly. The end 
95 
OO 
5 
IO 
3o 
35 
45 
So 
 
3. 
579,393 
7 O 
9 O 
OO 
IIO 
I I5 
O 
2C) 
35 
55 
36 of the pipe, including the portions 39 and 
40, is formed of clear glass. The end 37 cor 
responds to the end 36 in construction; but 
said end is painted black. 
A post 41 is attached to the base (3 by means 
of the screw's 42. A slot 43 is formed in the 
post 41 and extends from near the top to near 
the bottom of said post and in a direction 
through said post transversely of the machine. 
A notch 44 is formed from the lower end of 
the post 41 nearly to the lower end of the slot 
43, thus leaving the horizontal Wall 45 divid 
ing said slot from said notch. A block 46 is 
slidingly mounted in the slot 43, and a screw 
47 is vertically mounted with its head resting 
upon the horizontal wall 4S, which forms the 
upper end of the slot 43, and with its lower 
end extending through a bearing in the hori 
Zontal wall 45, and a collar 49 is rigidly fixed 
upon the lower end of said screw 47 to pre 
vent said screw from being drawn out of po 
sition. in the arms 50, which extend from 
the block 46, are formed screw-threaded ap 
ertures, through which the screw-threaded 
portion of the screw 47 operates, as l'equired, 
to raise and lower the block 46 by the manipui 
lation of the milled head 51 of said screw. 
Projecting forwardly from the upper and 
lower ends of the block 46 are arms 52, be 
tween which the pipe 35 operates, and said 
arms act as a stop to limit the vibration of 
said pipe. 
A clip 53 is placed on the pipe 35 and nea; 
the upturned end 36, and from said clip pro 
jects a horizontal arm 54. Suitable insula 
tion 55 is inserted between the pipe 35 and 
the clip 53, and the clip. 53 is adjustably held 
in position by means of the screw 56. When 
the pipe 35 is made of glass, the insulation 
55 is not required for the purpose of insula 
tion, but takes the place of packing to pre 
vent the clip from crushing the pipe. 
An inverted--shaped bar 57 is attacled 
to the end of the arm 54, with its ends de 
pending into the cups 19 and 20. A suitable 
glass case 5S encircles the wall 13 and cover's 
and protects the mechanism hereinbefore de 
scribed. 
Extending horizontally from the center of 
the end portion of the rim 2 is a post 59, 
through which a rod 59 passes, and said rod 
is held adjustably in position relative to said 
post by means of the set-screw 60. The rod 
59 extends upwardly and is bent inwardly to 
a position approximately over the center of 
the machine, and a sheet-metal shoe G1 is at 
tached to the upper end of said rod and is 
curved into shape to fit the apex of the glass 
case, and said case is held in position by the 
tension of said rod 59 upon said shoe (31. 
By manipulating the screw 25 the center of 
gravity of the pipe 35 and the ends 36 and 37 
of Said pipe are raised or lowered relative to 
the Supporting-bar 23, thereby causing the 
apparatus to be more or less Sensitive, as de 
sired. The pipe 35 is adjusted by sliding it 
through the clamps 32 and 33 until it merely 
balances, and then Said clam)S are tightened, 
thus holding said pipe in position relative to 
the clamps. By manipulating the weight 30 
upon the screw-threaded rod 29 the ends 36 
and 37 can be exactly balanced. The ends 
36 and 37 are helmetically sealed, and the 
horizontal portion of the pipe 35 is filled with 
mercury until the mercury extends a slight 
distance into the lower parts of the vertical 
portions of the ends 36 and 37. Normally the 
air above the mercury in the White or clear 
end 36 is under the greatest pressure, and this 
will cause the mercury to stand slightly 
higher in the black end 37 than in the White 
end. The adjusting mechanism should be so 
manipulated that the White end of the pipe 
will be overbalanced when the sun is not 
slining on the mechanism. Then the bar 57 
will stand out of contact, with the mercury in 
the cups 19 and 20. The ends 36 and 37 of 
the pipe 35 perform the same functions as 
the bulbs shown in the patent above cited 
and in my concurrent application, and at the 
same time they are simple in construction. 
It is obvious that the shape of these ends is 
not imateli: , but that it is easiel to make 
them in tubular form than to make them in 
bulbous form, alld that the same result is ob 
tained. 
When the sun shiiles, the black end 37 al 
sorbs mo'e heat than the clear ol' white end 
36 on account of the difference in size alad 
the difference in color, and the air within 
said black end expands, forcing out the mer 
cuiry, and thus lightening said black end and 
causing it to be ovell)alanced by the white 
end, and the pipe 35 tips downwardly on the 
end carrying the clip. 53, thus dipping the 
bar 57 into the mercury in the cups 19 and 20 
and closing the circuit between the Wiles at 
the lower ends of said cups and causing the 
registelring mechanism to operate. As soon 
as the sun passes under a cloud the black 
end cools and becomes heavy again, thus 
breaking the circuit. By manipulating the 
screw 51 the stops 52, between which the pipe 
35 operates, may be raised and lowered as de 
sired to keep said pipe substantially in a 
horizontal position as the pipe is raised and 
lowered by the manipulation of the screw 25. 
Thus it will be seen that my present inven 
tion possesses advantages over my former 
devices, especially in its simplicity of con 
struction. 
The pipe 35 and the upwardly-extending 
ends may be constructed of glass or metal, 
and the ends may be bent into any shape and 
colored in any way that will adapt them to 
prese it large surfaces for the differential ab 
SO'ption and radiation of heat, and instead 
of ?illing the horizontal portion of the pipe 
with mercury any liquid may be employed 
which will retain its fluidity under the con 
ditions to which the instrument is apt to be 
eXposed. 
claim 
1. in an electric Sunshine-annunciator, a 
 
529,893 
3. 
O 
supporting-frame adjustably attached to a 
base, said supporting-frame consisting of the 
base-plate 6 having the slot 5 through which 
slot the said plate is adjustably bolted to the 
base of the machine, the arms 7 and 8 pi'o- 
jecting upwardly from opposite edges of said 
base-plate 6, the W-shaped bearings 9 and 10 
formed in the upper ends of said allins and 
the disks 1 attached to the oute faces of said 
upper ends by means of the screws 12, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. In an electric Sunshine-annunciator, the 
frame 3; consisting of the base-plate (3 having 
the slot 5 through which slot the said plate 
is adjustably bolted to the base of the ma 
chine, the arms 7 and S projecting upwardly 
from opposite edges of Said base-plate (, the 
W-shaped bearings 9 and 10 formed in the 
upper ends of said arms in the disks 11 at 
tached to the outer faces of said upper ends 
by means of the screw S12; the bar 23 mounted 
in said bearingS 9 and i0, the paii of 'ods 2-1. 
extending downwardly from said bai', the 
screw 25 inserted through the center of said 
bar and extending downwardly between the 
rods 24 with its head resting upon said bar, 
the sliding block 26 having the contral aper 
ture 27 in which said screw 25 operates and 
having the apertures 2S in which the rods 24 
slidingly operate, the screw-threaded rod 20 
extending from Said block in a horizontal po 
sition, the screw-threaded weight 30 upon said 
screw-threaded rod, the horizontal bar 3 
formed integral with the lower end of said 
block 26, and the clamps 32 and 33 carried by 
the ends of said bar 31, Substantially as speci 
fied. 
3. In an electric Sunshine-annunciator, the 
rectangular metal base 1, the rim 2 projecting 
downwardly from the edges of said base, the 
frame 3 adjustably attached to said base by 
means of the screws 4 operating in the slots 
5 and screw-seated in the base-block 5: said 
frame 3 consisting of the base - plate (3, the 
arms 7 and S projecting upwai'dly from oppo 
site edges of said base-plate 6, the V-shaped 
bearings 9 and 10 formed in the upper ends 
of said arms and the disks 11 attached to the 
outer faces of said upper ends by means of 
the screws 12; the bar 23 mounted in said 
bearings 9 and 10, the pair of rods 24 extend 
ing downwardly from said bar, the screw 25 
inserted through the center of said lar and ex 
tending downwardly between the rods 24 with 
its head resting upon said bar, the sliding 
block 26 having the central aperture 27 in 
which said screw 25 operates and having the 
apertures 2S in which the rods 24 slidingly 
operate, the screw-threaded rod 29 extending 
from said block in a horizontal position, the 
screw-threaded weight 30 upon said screw 
threaded rod, the horizontai bar 31 formed 
integral with the lower end of said block 26, 
the clamps 32 and 33 carried by the ends of 
said bar 31, the pipe 35 slidingly mounted in 
said clamps 32 and 33 and having the lip 
Wardly-extending white end 36 and the up 
Wardly-extending black end 37 and the hori 
Zontal portion of said pipe being filled with 
innercury, the clip. 53 attached to said pipe, 
the arm 54 attached to said clip and the - 
shaped ai' 57 carried by said alin, the cups 
19 and 20 mounted in said base-plate 1 and 
partly filled with mercury and in position to 
have said mercury engaged by the free ends 
of said bar 57, and suitable electrical connec 
tions with said cups, substantially as speci 
fied. 
4. In an electric sunshine-annunciator, a 
pipe having the horizontal central portion 35 
filled with inercilly, the portion 36 extending 
upwardly from one end of Said horizontal pol'- 
tion, the portion 39 bent in Wardly from the 
upper end of the portion 36 and the portion 
40 extending downwardly from said portion 
39, said portions 36, 39 and 40 being clear, and 
having the portion 37 extending upwardly 
from the end opposite said portion 36, the 
portion 30 beat in Wardly from the upper end 
of said portion 37 and the portion 40 extend 
ing downwardly from said polition 39, Said 
portions 37, 39 and 40 being black, and the 
lower ends of said portions 40 being Sealed, 
substantially as specified. 
5. in an electric sunsline-anilunciator, the 
post 11 attached to a suitable base by means 
of the machine-screws 12, said post having 
the slot 43 and the notch 44 and the horizon 
tail walls 45 and 48, the block 46 slidingly 
mounted in the slot 43, the Screw 47 Verti 
cally mounted in bearings in said horizontal 
walls 45 and 4S and passing through Screw 
threaded apertures in the arms 50 which pro 
ject from the block 46, the collar 49 fixed to 
the lower end of said screw to prevent said 
screw from being withdrawn from its posi 
tion, the milled head 51 upon the upper end 
of said screw for operating the same, and the 
arms 52 projecting from said block 46, Sub 
stantially as specified. 
G. In an electric Suinshine-all nunciator, the 
rectangular base-plate 1, the rim 2 projecting 
downwardly from the edges of said base-plate, 
the fraine 3 adjustably mounted upon Said 
base-plate, the horizontal ball 31 pivotally con 
nected to said frame, the clips 32 and 33 car 
lied by the ends of said bar, the pipe, having 
the horizontal portion 35, slidingly mounted 
in said clips and the clear end 36 extending 
upwardly from one end of said horizontal 
portion and tie black end 37 extending up 
wardly from the other end of said horizontal 
portion, the cups 19 and 20 mounted in said 
base-plate 1 and partly filled with mercury, 
suitable electrical connections to said cups, 
the clip 53 carried by said pipe and the - 
shaped bar 57 cairied by said clip and in po 
sition to engage the mercury within said cups, 
Substantially as specified. 
7. in an electric Sunshine-annunciator, the 
rectangular base-plate 1, the rim 2 projecting 
do Yin Wardly from the edges of said base-plate, 
the fraine 3 adjustably mounted upon said 
base-plate, the horizontal bar 31 pivotally 
7 O 
5 
9 O 
OO 
C. 
II5 
I 25 
35 
45 
55 
 
4. 
579,393 
IO 
connected to said frame, the clips 32 and 33 
carried by the ends of said bar, the pipe, 
having the horizontal portion 35, slidingly 
mounted in said clips and the clear end 36 
extending upwardly from one end of said 
horizontal portion and the black end 37 ex 
tending upwardly from the other end of said 
horizontal portion, the cups 19 and 20 mounted 
in said base-plate 1 and partly filled with 
mercury, suitable electrical connections to 
said cups, the clip. 53 carried by said pipe and 
the U-shaped ball 57 carried by said clip and 
in position to engage the mercury within said 
Cups, the post 11 attached to Said frame 3 by 
means of the screws 42, the block 46 arranged 
for vertical adjustment in said post, and the 
arms 52 extending from said block upon Op 
posite sides of said pipe to limit the vibration 
of said pipe, substantially as specified. 
S. In an electric sunshine-annunciator, the 
rectangular base-plate 1, the rim 2 extending 
downwardly from the edges of said base-plate, 
the Wall 13 extending upwardly from said 
base-plate, the glass case 5S surrounding said 
Wall and resting upon said base-plate, the 
post 59 extending horizontally from one end 
of said rim, the rod 59 slidingly mounted in 
said post and adjustably held in position by 
means of the set-screw 60, and the sheet 
metal shoe (31 attached to the upper end of 
said rod 59 and engaging the apex of said 
glass case to hold said case in position, sub 
stantially as specified. 
9. In an electric Sunshine-annt inciator, a 
pipe pivotally mounted with a substantially 
horizontal central portion filled with suitable 
liquid and the ends of said pipe being turned 
upwardly into planes above said holizontal 
polition and filled with air and hermetically 
sealed, and said pipe being cylindrical 
throughout all its upper parts and said up 
Wardly-turned ends being of a sufficient length 
to present large surfaces for the differential 
absorption and radiation of heat, substan 
tially as specified. 
in testimony whereof I affiN my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
45 
LEONARD IJNT. 
Witnesses: 
S. G. WELLs, 
MAUD GRIFFIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579493.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
C. NELSON. 
GARDEN HOSE HOLDER, 
No. 579,493. 
Patented Mar. 23, 1897. 
 
IWVEWTOR. 
Attorney. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARI, NEILSON, OF MARINETTE, WISCONSIN. 
GARDEN - HOSE HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 579,493, dated March 28, 1897. 
Application filed August 17, 1896, Serial No. 602,992, (No model.) 
55 
75 
5 
IO 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARL NELSON, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Marinette, 
in the county of Marinette and State of Wis 
consin, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Garden-Hose Holders; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to a garden-hose 
holder; and it consists in the device herein-- 
after fully set forth and claimed. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
holder for garden-hose provided with means 
Whereby the direction of the hose-nozzle, when 
said nozzle is engaged and retained by the 
spring - clips hereinafter described, may be 
changed from a horizontal plain to the oppo 
site horizontal plain, passing through a por 
tion of a vertical circle, said device also being 
provided with means whereby said nozzle. may 
be locked at any point in such vertical circle 
above a horizontal plain, which object is at 
tained by the construction and association of 
parts, illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a portion of 
a hose-nozzle engaged by my improved holder, 
a portion of the Supporting-stem of said holder 
being broken away. Fig. 2 is a modification in 
the manner of securing the spring-retaining 
clips or tongues to the face of the revolu 
ble disk. Fig. 3 is an edge view, and Fig. 4 
is a rear view, of the device. Fig. 5 is a sec 
tion on line 55 of Fig. 1. 
Referring to the figures of reference, 1 des 
ignates a disk which may be of any suitable 
size and formed of metal of suitable gage to 
give it stiffness. 
2 designates a spindle or rod of sufficient 
strength to support the disk and hose-nozzle 
supported thereby, which spindleissharpened 
to a point at one end and provided with an 
eye 2 at the other. 
3 represents a headed bolt which is passed 
through an aperture formed in the geomet 
rical center of the disk 1, said bolt also pass 
ing through the eye 2 of the spindle and is 
provided with a thumb-nut 3". 
4 4 designate spring-tongues which extend 
in a portion of a circle at right angles to the 
face of the disk 1. These tongues may be 
made to stand from the face of said disk in 
two ways: First, as shown in Fig. 1, in which 
they are struck from the metal of the disk 
and formed into a curve suitable for embrac 
ing a portion of a garden hose or nozzle. This 
method, as Will be apparent, necessitates the 
employment of tempered sheet metal or steel. 
If desired to manufacture the holder at a less 
cost, the disk I may be formed of sheet-tin 
or sheet-iron, and in either case the tongues 
4 4 are formed of suitable spring metal and 
riveted to the face of the disk, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 2, and which will be well un 
derstood. 
55 represent a series of ears, which are 
formed integral With the rim of the disk and 
extend around one-half of its diameter, as 
shown in Fig. 4, enough space being left be 
tween said ears to allow the spindle 2 to lie 
giguous to the rear face of the disk. (See 
Fig. 3. 
The operation of this device is as follows: 
When it is desired to support a 
garden-hose 
with this holder, said hose or its nozzle is en 
tered between the spring tongues or clips 44, 
as shown in Fig. 1, when the pointed end of 
said spindle may be forced into the ground 
a sufficient depth to be maintained in a ver 
tical position against the Weight of the hose 
and the vibration of the moving water therein. 
Should the parts be in the positions shown in 
Fig.2 and it be desired to tilt the hose either 
to the right or to the left, as shown in Fig. 1, 
the thumb-nut 3" may be loosened or un 
screwed, allowing the bolt 3 to be slipped 
through the disk 1 sufficiently to allow said 
disk to be moved away from said spindle 2 
and to carry the ears 55 clear of the spindle 
2, so that said disk may be revolved upon its 
pivot 3 until the desired angle has been at 
tained, when said parts may be locked by 
tightening the thumb-nut 3', which will draw 
- - 
95 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
579,493 
5 
O 
the disk up thereto, causing it to stand be 
tween two of said ears 5 5, and when said 
thumb-nut is properly screwed up, said disk 
will effectually be prevented from rotating, 
as Will be seen. 
It will now be seen that the formation and 
association of parts hereinbefore set forth 
produce a very simple and economical device, 
which effectually serves the purpose of a uni 
Versal hose-holder, for if the position cannot 
be attained by rotating the disk vertically 
the desired pitch may be found and the disk 
locked with the thumb-nut, as described, 
when the whole device may be turned hori 
Zontally by causing the spindle to twist in 
the ground. 
Having thus fully set forth my invention, 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a garden-hose holder, the combination 
of the disk, the clips struck therefrom, the 
spindle, and said disk pivoted to said spindle. 
2. In a garden-hose holder, the combination 
of the disk, the spring-clips secured thereto, 
the ears formed integral with and standing 
at an angle to the rim of said disk, the aper 
ture formed through the center of said disk, 
the spindle, the eye on the end of said spin 
dle, the bolt adapted to be passed through said 
aperture and eye, the thumb-nut adapted to 
be screwed upon said bolt, and the end of 
the spindle opposite said eye being sharpened 
to a point, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CARL NELSON. 
Witnesses: 
A. II. SETTERSTEN, 
SEGRED MOBERG. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579594.txt	(No Model.) 
R. L. LYONS 
STOP MECHANISM, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 579,594. 
Patented Mar. 30, 1897. 
2 
7 A Fig. ', a A 
A.' 
A' 
A. 
3-Sariwi. 
Hez 
2 
1. 
tes 
G 6. 
77 
s 
7. 
af 
2Es 
8 
2 
-- E. 
EAE2% 
EOEEE 
w 
O 
* 
o (S) 
23 
e? 
7 
 
22/ 
S 
32 
7 
e2 
d 
 
 
 
 
2/ 
 
2 2 
 
22N 
Alias 
22s2 
INVen 7 OF R 
(447-2 
a 1. 
tur 
No RRs reters co, PHOTO-tTHO., WASHINGTON, c. c. 
(No Model.) 
R, L, LYONS. 
STOP MECHANISM, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 579,594. 
fig. 4- 
Patented Mar, 30, 1897. 
fig 
 
valk 22 
s 
2 
5S$SES 
2222222 s 
 
a 4424 
al E777,77 
% 
A. % 
S 
 
A? 
1%21% 
f76 S22.23r 
M7 Nagapag 
-Y.3, 4%------, 
w 
Ya, 
( 
. 
m 
fit. Norris PEERs co, Horo.1. washington, b. c. 
: 
 
r 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT L. LYONS, OF WALTHAM, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
UNION BUTTON SEWING MACHINE COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSA 
CHUSETTS. 
STOP MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 579,594, dated March 30, 1897. 
Application filed February 7, 1896, Serial No. 578,324 (No model.) 
O 
I5 ) 
To all whon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT L. LYONs, of 
Waltham, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Stop 
Mechanism for Sewing or other Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention has for its object the pro 
duction of a new and improved apparatus for 
stopping sewing and other machines; and it 
consists in the novel features of construction 
and relative arrangement of parts hereinafter 
fully described in the specification, clearly 
illustrated in the drawings, and particularly 
ointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
sheets of drawings, forming a part of this ap 
plication, in which like characters indicate 
like parts wherever they occur. 
Figure 1 represents an inverted plan view 
of the bed-plate of a sewing-machine upon 
which is mounted a stopping apparatus con 
structed in accordance with my invention, the 
clutch being shown in operation. Fig. 2 rep 
resents a similar view showing the clutch dis 
engaged and the stopping apparatus operated 
to disengage the clutch to stop the machine. 
Fig. 3 represents a detail sectional view on 
the line 33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 represents an 
end elevation of the parts of the stopping ap 
paratus in the position shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 
5 represents a similar view showing the parts 
of the stopping apparatus in the position 
shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 6 represents a top plan 
view of the mechanism shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 
7 represents a detail sectional view on the 
line 77 of Fig. 6. Fig. 8 represents a detail 
sectional view on the line S S of Fig. 6. Fig. 
9 represents a detail sectional view on the 
line 99 of Fig. 1. 
Referring to the drawings, in the embodi 
ment of my invention therein shown and se 
lected by me for the purpose of illustrating 
my invention C. represents a bed-plate of a 
sewing-machine of any preferred style. 
a' represents the main shaft, mounted on 
Suitable bearings C, connected to the bed 
plate. This shaft is adapted to receive mo 
tion from some suitable source of power (not 
shown) and transmitting the motion to the 
various parts of the machine. 
. 
. 
a represents a worm-wheel fast upon the 
shaft. 
a represents a spur-gear loosely mounted 
on the bolt a, projecting from the plate a', 
secured to the bed-plate. The teeth of this 
gear a mesh with the turns of the worm 
wheel a in the usual Way. 
a represents a wiper carried by the gear Cl." 
and arranged to engage the under side of one 
arm of a pivoted pawl b to tilt said pawl for 
a purpose hereinafter described. The pawl b 
is pivoted intermediate its ends upon a pintle 
b'. This pawl is made up of a casting b. A 
plate b, provided with a slot b, is adjustably 
secured to the under side of this pawl by a 
guide-screw band a set-screw l'. This plate 
is thus practically a part of the casting and 
is adapted to be adjusted back and forth, SO 
that its end can be properly engaged by the 
wiper a to throw the end b of the pawl b up 
and at the same time depress the end b. 
The end to of the pawl b, that is acted upon 
by the wiper a, is heavier than the end b, so 
that the latter end is automatically thrown 
upward when permitted by the wiper a? and 
the plate c. If desired, I may employ a spring, 
as a, for this purpose. The upper side of 
the end bisformed with a shoulderb", adapted 
to engage a plate c and to hold the latter un 
til the pawl b is tripped by the wiper. 
The plate c is secured by a set-screw c' to 
a sliding bolt or rod c, arranged to slide in 
suitable openings (not shown) in the flange 
a" of the bed-plate. A spring c' is connected 
at one end to the bed-plate and at its other 
end to a block c', secured on the rod c' by a 
set-screw c. One end serves to throw said 
rod and plate a short distance toward the 
shaft (t, the distance traveled by the plate C 
being limited by the position of the block c* 
in the rod or bolt c, the former being arranged 
on the bolt so as to come against the flange 
Cl and check the movement in the direction 
in which the force of the spring is exerted. 
The plate c on one side rides between the bed 
plate and the plate a. This plate upon the 
upper side of the bolt c' from the pawl b is 
arranged to engage a crank-arm f, secured 
by a screw f" at the end of the rock-shaft f. 
This rock-shaft is secured in suitable bear 
ings if on the under side of the bed-plate, 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
2 
579,594 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
moved outward and away from the machine 
one end of the said shaft projecting, in the 
form here shown, beyond the bed-plate, car 
and unclutched from the shaft. 
It is desired to provide some means whereby 
rying a sleeve h, hereinafter described. 
the shaft a' will be positively stopped without 
frepresents a spring coiled about the shaft, 
jar after the wheel S has been unclutched. 
one end of Said spring bearing against the 
To this end I mount upon the member or 
bed-plate, the other end of said spring being 
sleeve h a spring-pressed stop t. This lever 
secured to the shaft by a collar f. The 
t is pivoted midway its ends by a bolt t to a 
spring f is arranged upon the shaft f in such 
lugt, projecting from the sleeveh. One end 
a way as to be put under tension when the 
i of this levertis arranged in a depression h" 
plate c is pushed by the rod or bolt c in the 
of the sleeve h and is pressed in one direc 
direction to make the plate engage the shoul 
tion by a coiled spring h", adjustably secured 
der b' on the pawl b, so that when said pawl 
in a chamber 1 of said sleeve by a set-screw 
is tripped and the plate c slid sufficiently to 
h18. This lever or stop t is arranged to be 
permit the arm f to move the rock-shaft f' 
oscillated back and forth into and out of the 
will be turned a short distance, the movement 
path of the clutch part in, the end t of said 
of this rock-shaft being one of oscillation 
lever being thrown by the spring hit toward 
rather than rotation. 
said clutch part and made to bear against 
h represents a sleeve or member secured 
said clutch part with a force that can be 
to the free end of the rock-shaft f by set 
regulated by the said screw h. This lever is 
screws h". 
formed at its end t with an inclined face 
in represents a lug or clutch part fast upon 
t, terminating in a notch it. The end t of 
the end of the shaft C. 
the lever is designed to be in the position 
S represents a wheel loosely mounted upon 
shown in Fig. 4 when the end h of the dogh" 
the shaft a' and free to slide thereon, said 
is in engagement with the sides of the groove, 
wheel being provided with a lug or clutch 
parts', adapted to engage the clutch part in. 
as in Fig. 1. When, however, this dog is 
shifted to throw the wheels in the position 
when the wheel is pushed toward the part r". 
shown in Fig. 2, the end t of the lever t is 
This wheel is designed to be driven by any 
thrown down in a position to lie in the path 
source of power and by means of the clutch 
of the clutch part in, the latter engaging the 
part to drive the shaft a' when the said parts 
are in engagement. The sleeve or member 
inclined surface l of the level t in the first 
h is arranged in close proximity to the wheel 
instance. The continued movement of the 
clutch part r as it rides upon the inclined 
S and is formed with a depending lug h. 
surface i will push the end t of the lever 
Through this lug by means of a bolt his ad 
against the spring h, thereby causing the 
justably secured a dog or cam h", whose op 
erating-face h is arranged in a plane at an 
inclined surface t to act as a brake. The 
pitch or degree of inclination of the surface 
angle to the axis of the shaft Ct' and adapted 
l, in conjunction with the tension of the 
to engage a groove s on the hub s of the 
spring h, is arranged to practically stop the 
wheel S, or it may engage the groove in the 
machine before the clutch part reaches the 
wheel. This construction might manifestly 
notch t, at which point the spring hi throws 
be reversed and the hub of the wheel be pro 
the end t of the lever t toward the clutch 
vided with a rib to run in a groove formed 
part and the sides of the notch t about said 
in the acting face of the calm or dog '. 
part, thereby positively stopping and locking 
The wheels is designed to be continuously 
the several parts of the machine. 
driven and its clutch parts' moved into and 
To start the machine, the rock-shaft f is 
out of engagement with the clutch part in 
given a movement to place the parts carried 
when it is desired to start or stop the ma 
by it in the position shown in Fig. 1. The 
chine, respectively. 
shaft f is thrown into position shown in Fig. 
Referring now to Figs. 1, 2, and 6, it will 
1 by means of the bolt c, which may be op 
be seen that the dog or cam h controls at all 
erated by hand or by a suitable treadle (not 
times the position of the wheels, and that by 
oscillating the rock-shaft f the operating 
shown) common in this class of machines. 
As the bolt c is pushed back into position 
face h' of the dogh' will be made to engage the 
grooves, thereby throwing the wheel S in or 
shown in Fig. 1 the plate c engages the arm 
f and throws the rock-shaft f against the 
out, according to the direction in which the 
tension-spring f to the position shown in 
dog is moved. This operation necessarily re 
Fig. 1, so that the end h of the dog his in 
sults from the construction and arrangement 
engagement with the sides of the grooves. 
of the several parts, since the two ends hl. 
The stop or lever t being spring-pressed re 
of the Operating face or part of the dog are 
leases itself from the clutch part 1 when the 
in different planes. 
end his of the dog his moved, as stated. The 
In the arrangement shown in Fig. 1, when 
shaft Ct' having completed the predetermined 
the end his in engagement with the sides of 
number of revolutions the wiper C. engages 
the groove s, the wheel S will be clutched 
the pawl b to trip the latter to permit the 
to the shaft Ct. When, however, the end h, 
spring c to throw the rod c and the plate c. 
as shown in Fig. 2, is engaged with the sides 
of the groove S', the wheel S Will have been toward the shaft a', thereby unlocking the 
75 
95 
OC) 
IO 
II5 
I25 
 
579,594 
. 
3. 
rock-shaft f* and permitting the spring f to 
rock said shaft to bring the end h of the dog 
h' into engagement with the sides of the 
grooves. This movement serves to unclutch 
the wheels from the shaft a' and at the same 
time to engage the stop twith the clutch part 
n, the stop or lever tacting as a combined 
brake or stop. 
Having thus explained the nature of my 
invention and described a way of construct 
ing and using the same, though without at 
tempting to set forth all of the forms in which 
it may be made or all of the modes of its use, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination of a main shaft having 
a clutch member, a loose driven wheel longi 
tudinally movable on said shaft into and out 
of position for rotative engagement with said 
clutch member, a shipper movable trans 
versely of the shaft and having an obliquely 
disposed end coperating with a suitable sur 
face on the wheel to withdraw the latter from 
position of engagement With the clutch mem 
ber, and means for operating said shipper. 
2. The combination of a main shaft having 
a clutch member, a loose driven wheel longi 
tudinally movable on said shaft into and out 
of position for rotative engagement with said 
clutch member, a double-acting shipper mov 
able transversely of the shaft and having an 
obliquely - disposed acting part coperating 
with opposed surfaces on the wheel to move 
the latter back and forth, and means for op 
erating said shipper. 
3. The combination of a shaft having a 
clutch member, a driven wheel loose on said 
shaft and movable longitudinally thereon into 
and Out of position for rotative engagement 
With the clutch member, said wheel having 
an encircling groove, an oscillatory shipper 
in a plane transverse to the shaft and having 
an oblique acting part engaging the groove of 
the wheel and coacting with the sides thereof 
to move the wheelback and forth, and means 
for oscillating the shipper. 
4. The combination of a main shaft having 
a clutch member, a loose driven wheel longi 
tudinally movable on said shaft into and out 
of position for rotative engagement with said 
clutch member, a shipper movable trans 
versely of the shaft and having an obliquely 
disposed end coperating with a suitable sur 
face on the wheel to withdraw the latter from 
position of engagement with the clutch mem 
ber, means tending to move the shipper in a 
direction to withdraw the wheel, and trip 
mechanism restraining said means and ar- . 
ranged to release at a predetermined time, 
substantially as described. 
5. In a stop-motion, in combination, a shaft, 
a clutch part fast thereon, a driven wheel 
loosely mounted upon said shaft, a pivoted 
dog having an operating-face arranged in a 
plane at an angle to the axis of the shaft, com 
plemental engaging parts upon said wheeland 
dog, a clutch part on said wheel, means for 
operating said dog to slide said wheel, and a 
combined brake and stop arranged to be en 
gaged by said clutch part. 
6. In a stop-motion, in combination, a shaft, 
a clutch part fast thereon, a wheel loosely 
mounted on said shaft, a clutch part on said 
Wheel, a dog-operating member, means con 
trolled by said shaft for operating said mem 
ber at a predetermined time, a dog carried by 
said member, and having an operating-face 
arranged in a plane at an angle to the axis of 
the shaft, complemental engaging parts upon 
said dog and wheel, and a spring-pressed calm 
carried by said member, and arranged to be 
moved into engagement with said shaft clutch 
part when said wheel is unclutched. 
7. In a stop-motion, in combination, a shaft, 
a clutch part fast thereon, a wheel loose on 
said shaft and provided with a complemental 
clutch part, a rock-shaft, a dog carried by 
said rock-shaft, and having an arc-shaped 
Operating-face arranged in a plane at an an 
gle to the axis of the shaft, complemental en 
gaging parts on Said dog and Wheel, a spring 
pressed cam carried by said rock-shaft, and 
arranged to be moved into and out of engage 
ment with said shaft clutch part, and means 
for operating said rock-shaft at a predeter 
mined time. 
8. In a stop-motion, in combination, a shaft, 
a clutch part fast on said shaft, a wheel loose 
on said shaft provided with complemental 
clutch part, a spring-pressed rock-shaft, a 
dog carried by said rock-shaft having an arc 
shaped operating-face arranged in a plane at 
an angle to the axis of said shaft, a combined 
Spring-pressed brake and stop carried by said 
rock-shaft, and adapted to be moved into 
the path of said shaft clutch part when said 
wheel is unclutched, means for holding said 
rock-shaft in one direction against the tension 
of its spring, and means controlled by said 
shaft for operating said first-mentioned means 
to release said rock-shaft whereby said wheel 
may be slid upon the shaft, and said brake 
and stop thrown into or out of engagement 
with the said shaft clutch part. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 30th day of 
January, A. D. 1896. 
ROBERT L. LYONS. 
Witnesses: 
A. D. HARRISON, 
A. D. ADAMS. 
65 
75 
95 
CO 
IO 
I I5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579695.txt	(No Model.) 
B. CARMINA-MORREALE, 
WATER SKATE OR SHOE. 
No. 579,695. 
Patented Mar. 30, 1897. 
 
 
f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7? 
22 
WITNESSES 4. 
17 N-1 
63- 
3 
m 
IM/ENTOR 
Ca2.. ATTORNEYu 
The Norris FETERs ce. PHoro-LTho...washimicroe, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN CARMINA-MORREALE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
WATER SKATE OR SHOE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 579,695, dated March 30, 1897. 
Application fled October 16, 1896, Serial No. 609,141, (No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
To all whom, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN CARMINA 
MORREALE, a subject of the King of Italy, 
residing at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Water Skates or Shoes, of which the follow 
ing is a full and complete specification, such 
as will enable those skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to water-shoes; and 
the object thereof is to provide improved de 
vices of this class which will enable the wearer 
to walk through water with greater ease and 
facility. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the foll 
lowing specification, of which the accompany 
ing drawings form a part, in which like nu 
merals of reference designate the same parts 
wherever found in both views, and in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
water-shoe, and Fig. 2 a sectional side view 
thereof. 
In the practice of my invention I provide 
a foot-plate 5, which is preferably of the form 
shown in the drawings and the front end of 
which is pointed, as shown at 6, and said foot 
plate is provided with a heel strap or plate 7, 
to which are secured straps 8 and 9, which 
are adapted to be buckled around the ankles, 
and the foot-plate 5 is also provided with toe 
straps 10 and 11, this construction being simi 
lar to that of an ordinary roller-skate. I also 
provide a bottom plate 12, which is similar in 
form to the foot-plate. 5 and which is con 
nected therewith by screw-bolts 13, on which 
are mounted tubular bearings 14. The tubu 
lar bearings 14 serve to hold the foot-plate 5 
and bottom plate 12 in proper relative posi 
tion, while the screw-bolts 13 hold said plates 
together. The bottom plate 12 is also pointed 
at its forward end, and placed around the 
pointed end of each plate is a shield 15, which 
extends backwardly almost to the toe-straps 
10 and 11, and this shield 15 is preferably 
composed of thin sheet metal. 
Pivoted between the foot-plate 5 and bot 
tom plate 12 are wing or fin plates 16, which 
are provided with enlarged heads 17, as shown 
in dotted lines in Fig. 1, through which pass 
pivot-pins 18, which consist of screw-threaded 
bolts which are passed upwardly through the 
bottom plate 12 into the foot-plate 5, and the 
forward ends of the heads 17 of the fin or wing 
plates are beveled on their outer and inner 
surfaces, as shown at 19 and 20, respectively, 
and the outer beveled portion corresponds 
with the shape of the forward end of the shoe, 
and said outer beveled ends of the heads 17 
are adapted to bear upon the shield 15 when 
the said wing or fin plates are in the position 
shown in full lines in Figs. 1 and 2, and as 
said wing or fin plates are turned outwardly, 
as shown in dotted lines in said Fig. 1, the 
inner beveled surface 20 thereof will strike 
the forward bolt 13, by which the foot and 
bottom plates are connected, or the tubular 
bearings 14, mounted thereon. 
The heads 17 of the wing or fin plates 16 
may, however, be beveled or formed in any 
desired manner, and the said heads may be 
directed forwardly and so formed as to strike 
each other instead of the bolts 13 or its tubul 
lar bearing. 
My invention is not limited to the means 
herein described for connecting the foot-plate 
with the bottom plate 12, nor is it limited to 
the means herein described for connecting the 
shoe with the foot. 
My improved water-shoe may be used upon 
the naked foot or it may be used in connec 
tion with an ordinary shoe, and in practice 
it is buckled to the foot in the manner of an 
ordinary roller-skate. 
It is frequently necessary to Walk in the 
shallow water of lakes, rivers, and along the 
sea-shore, and my improved water-shoe is in 
tended to facilitate this operation. 
It will also be understood that waterproof 
clothing may be used in connection there 
with, and also life-preserver's or similar de 
vices, and the operation will be readily un 
derstood from the foregoing description when 
taken in connection with the accompanying 
drawings and the following statement thereof. 
In the forward movement of the foot the 
fin or wing plates 10 fold backwardly into the 
position shown in full lines in Fig. 1, and in 
the backward movement of the foot these 
wing or fin plates are thrown outwardly and 
the angle of their projection will depend upon 
the form of the heads 17 thereof or the means 
employed for limiting the movement thereof. 
The fin or wing plates 16, when they are 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
579,695 
35 
45 
55 
2. The herein-described water-shoe, com 
prising a foot-plate, which is provided with 
means for securing it to the foot, a bottom 
plate which is secured to said foot-plate, the 
forward ends of said plates being pointed, 
and provided with a shield, and wing or fin 
plates, which are pivotally mounted between 
said foot and bottom plates, and which are 
adapted to fold between said plates when the 
foot is moved forwaldly, and to swing out 
wardly when the foot is moved backwardly, 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. The herein-described water-shoe, colm 
prising a foot-plate, which is provided with 
means for securing it to the foot, a bottom 
plate which is secured to said foot-plate, the 
forward ends of said plates being pointed, 
and provided with a shield, and wing or ?in 
plates which are pivotally mounted between 
said foot and bottom plates, and which are 
adapted to fold between said plates when the 
foot is moved backwardly, said wing or fin 
plates being provided at their pivoted ends, 
with beveled heads by which both their in 
nei' and Outer movement are limited, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I clain the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 15th 
day of October, 1896. 
BENAMIN CARTINA-10RREALE, 
Witnesses: 
JOHN BUCKLER, 
THOS. A. AITON. 
thrown outwardly as described, offer great re 
sistance to the water and thus facilitate the 
movement of the wearer therethrough, as will 
be readily understood, and the foot-plate 5 
and bottom plate 12 are connected in such 
lmanner that the weight of the body may be 
borne on the bottom plate, even when the 
wearer is not in the water, without injury to 
the shoe. 
One of the objects of the shield 15, which 
covers the pointed forward ends of the foot 
plate 5 and the bottom plate 12, is to prevent 
the water from rushing in between the said 
plates at the forward ends thereof, thus in 
terfering with the operation of the wing or 
fin plates 16, and in addition thereto, as here 
in before described, said shield also serves to 
limit the movement of said wing or fin plates 
in the forward movement of the foot. 
IIaving fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The herein-described water - shoe, con 
Sisting of a foot-plate, and a bottom plate 
which is connected there with, said plates be 
ing pointed at their forward ends, and pro 
vided with a shield, and wing or fin plates 
pivotally mounted between said foot and bot 
tom plates near the forward ends thereof, 
said wing or fin plates being adapted to fold 
between said plates when the foot is moved 
forwardly, and to swing outwardly when the 
foot is moved backwardly, substantially as 
shown and described. 
... O 
5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579797.txt	(No Model.) 
I. C. GRAY, 
ELEWATOR, 
No. 579,797. 
Patented Mar, 30, 1897, 
Willesses: 
(4/2-4-24.2% 
22.3% 
74. 
o/ ity 
4a ae (6.1% 
3, 2.73% 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
ISAAC C. 
GRAY, OF TIPPECANOE, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-FOURTH TO 
LORENZO D. ELY, OF SAME PLACE. 
EL EVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 579,797, dated March 30, 1897. 
Application filed January 4, 1897 
25 
To aid, whom it invay concern. 
Be it known that I, ISAAC C. GRAY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Tippe 
canoe, in the county of Marshall and State of 
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Elevators; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
to pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters and figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
I5 My invention has relation to improvements 
in elevators; and the object is to provide a sim 
ple, efficient, and reliable safety catch or grip 
for vertically-moving and suspended elevator 
carriages, whereby when the suspension-ca 
2O bles break or the progress of the carriage is 
stopped by accidental causes it will be auto 
matically prevented from descent by engage 
ment of the catches in racks or ratchets on 
the guides. 
I have fully and clearly illustrated my in 
vention in the accompanying drawings, 
Wherein 
Figure I is an elevation of the carriage 
frame of an elevator having my improve 
3o ments applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a detail side 
view of the auxiliary catch and lever for en 
gagement with the rack and to throw the 
main catches into engagement with the racks 
in case they are held by a partially slacked 
35 or broken cable. Fig. 3 is a top or plan view 
of the auxiliary catch and lever. 
Referring to the drawings, A A' designate 
the guide-posts for the elevator - carriage 
frame, formed or provided with grooves or 
4o ways 1 (indicated in dotted lines in Fig. 1) 
and provided with racks or ratchets 2 to be 
engaged by the catches on the carriage, as 
hereinafter more fully specified. 
B designates the frame which carries the 
45 car or carriage. This frame is composed of 
vertical side timbers or pieces 1" and bottom 
and top pieces. 2' 2", all suitably secured to 
gether, as usual. In the upper end portions 
of the side pieces 1' are formed vertically 
5o elongated openings 33', of the same size and 
dimensions, wherein are disposed cushion 
55 
75 
Serial No. 617,874, (No model.) 
blocks 4 4", consisting of substantial blocks 
of metal or other suitable material adapted 
to stand squarely and firmly on the bottom 
of the housings or openings in which they are 
arranged and formed or provided with stems 
55, serving as guide-stems for the coiled 
cushion-springs 6 6, arranged thereon with 
their lower ends seated on the upper ends of 
the blocks and their upper ends lodged against 
the upper end of the housings or openings, 
substantially as seen in the drawings, the 
object being to provide buffers to relieve the 
jar which would otherwise occur on the Sud 
den engagement of the safety-catches when 
the carriage would suddenly descend. 
CC designate the safety-catches, substan 
tially of the form shown in the drawings, piv 
oted to the cushion-blocks, as at 7, and hav 
ing their ends overlapped, as at 8, the under 
lapped end being formed with a suitable seat 
S', in which the cable-link 9 engages. This 
cable-link is of the usual form and is arranged 
centrally and loosely about the upper bar or 
rail of the frame. The catches C C are Sup 
ported so that their catch ends aline with the 
racks on the guide-posts, and have an offset, 
as at 10, made in them, so as to bring their 
arms or stems directly under and in allinement 
with the cross-bar above them. In the arm 
of each catch is fixed a vertical guide-stud 11, 
about which is arranged a buffer-spring 12, 
the lower end of which rests on the arm of 
the catch and the upper end under and against 
the top rail of the carriage-frame, substan 
tially as seen in the drawings, the springs act 
ing to throw the catches down and into en 
gagement with the racks when the strain or 
stress on the cable-link is slackened. 
It will be perceived from the foregoing de 
scription, taken in connection with the draw 
ings, that should the cable break the stress 
on the catches will immediately be relieved 
and the force of the compressed springs at 
once be exerted to move the arms of the 
catches downward and throw their catch ends 
into engagement with the notches of the racks, 
and thus stop the carriage and hold it from 
descending farther. 
For additional security and to insure the 
action of the catches in any and all exigen 
cies where it may be required to bring them. 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
- 
579,797 
55 
75 
into action I provide an auxiliary lever and 
catch of the following construction: On the 
top rail of the carriage-frame is strongly se 
cured a plate or bracket 13, formed with a 
downward-extending lug 13', to which is full 
crumed a lever 14, so arranged that its inner 
and short arm will bear normally on the arms 
of the catches and having its outer and longer 
arm extended adjacent to the rack, and has 
the end pivotally secured to the buffer-block, 
Substantially as seen in the drawings. This 
lever is pivoted or fulcrumed in a slot formed 
in the depending portion 13' of the lug 13, so 
as to have proper play to compensate for its 
requisite movements. To the outer end of 
the lever 14 is pivotally hung a pawl or catch 
15, the lower catch portion 15' of which is 
carried into alinement with the rack by means 
of a bend or offset 16. To the arm or stem 
of the catch 15 is rigidly secured a handle or 
lever 17, provided with a retractile spring 17 
at its free end, the spring being connected to 
the arm of one of the main safety-catches, 
substantially as seen in the drawings, and to 
the outer end of the lever 17 is attached a 
cord or rope 18, designed to be let through 
the top of the carriage and be manipulated 
by the operator. It will be perceived that if 
from any cause the main catches would fail 
to engage the racks when required to do so, 
by pulling on the rope IS the catch 5 will be 
moved or swung outward into engagement 
with the lack, which engagement will act to 
move the buffer-block upward, carrying there 
with the end of the lever 14, causing the in 
ner end thereof to bear on the arms of the 
main catches and throw their catch ends into 
engagement with the racks and thus hold the 
carriage securely against descent. 
The operation may be stated as follows: 
Under ordinary action the pull on the cable 
link holds all the catches out of engagement 
with the racks, but should the cable break or 
other accident occur which would cause the 
carriage to descend the force of the springs 
on the arms of the catches causes engage 
ment with the racks and the force of the jar 
or stop being compensated for by the action 
of the springs on the buffer-blocks. As here 
tofore stated, should the main catches fail to 
engage the racks a pull on the rope connected 
to the handle of the auxiliary-lever catch will 
effect the engagement and hold the carriage. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In an elevator, a safety-catch device, 
comprising a carriage-frame, oppositely-dis 
posed guides for the carriage formed with 
racks, buffer-blocks housed in the frame of 
the carriage, springs over the buffer-blocks, 
safety-catches pivotally mounted on the buf 
fer-blocks, and adapted to engage the racks 
and having their inner ends lapped, springs 
to throw the catches into engagement and a 
cable-link arranged over the lapped ends of 
the catches. 
2. In an elevator, a Safety - catch device 
comprising a carriage-frame, oppositely-dis 
posed guides for the carriage formed with 
racks, buffer-blocks housed in the frame of 
the carriage, springs over the buffer-blocks, 
safety. catches pivotally mounted on the buf 
fer-blocks, and adapted to engage the racks 
and having their inner ends lapped, springs 
to throw the catches into engagement and a 
cable-link arranged over the lapped ends of 
the catches, an auxiliary lever fulcrumed to 
bear with one end on the safety-catches, and 
its outer end connected to one of the buffer 
blocks, and a catch, having an actuating 
handle, pivotally suspended from the outer 
end of the auxiliary lever. 
3. In an elevator, the combination with the 
guides having racks, main safety catches or 
levers, of an auxiliary safety device, com 
prising a lever fulcrumed to the carriage 
frame with one end arranged to bear on the 
arms of the main safety-catches, and a catch 
arm pivotally suspended from the outer end 
of the said lever and having a catch portion 
adapted to engage one of the said racks, and 
a handle on the catch-arm, substantially as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ISAAC C. GRAY. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID HARRINGTON, 
S. C. BARRETT. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579897.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 579,897. 
W. A. ROSs. 
BALING PRESS 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Mar. 30, 1897, 
WITNESSES 
62.1%ate 
C. 
f / WENTOR 
A2ZZzazra 4. Z2Oss. 
By 772-zee-ee-Y Q 
ATTORNEYS. 
The Norris Peters Co., Ho-Lito., was iNGEON, D. C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 579,897. 
W. A. ROSS 
BAING PRESS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 30, 1897. 
% EE 
WZZezar v2.222ss. 
INVENTOR 
--ser. 
- 
AITORNEYS. 
The Norris Peers co, Phototitho...washieron. . 
. 
HA 
W/7/vasses 
N 
N 
 
(No Model.) 
w 
W. A. ROSS, 
BAING PRESS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
- 
No. 579,897. 
Patented Mar. 30, 1897. 
WITNESSES 
fe.g. 37- 
| Ay/ENTOR 
722(zawa Y2.Zooss. 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM A. ROSS, OF HICO, TEXAS. 
BANG - PRESS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 579,897, dated March 30, 1897. 
Application filed March 20, 1896, Serial No. 584,179, (No model.) 
O 
to a 20, whon, it may concerzer 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM ANDREW 
ROSS, of Hico, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Texas, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Bale-Winding Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention is an improvement in that 
class of machines for compressing and baling 
Cotton and other fibrous materials which form 
a cylindrical bale by winding the raw mate 
rial upon itself. In one of the two most 
prominent types or kinds of such machines 
to which mine is most closely related the cot 
ton bat or film received from the condenser 
is Wound around a core or cylindrical roller 
and is compressed while being so wound by 
means of two rotating rollers, one of which 
is movable toward or from the other. In ma 
chines of the other type or kind the cotton 
bat is compressed in the bight or loop of a 
belt, which is weighted and passes over two 
parallel rollers fixed in the same horizontal 
plane, said bight or loop being formed below 
the rollers and maintained by revoluble cir 
cular heads or disks, which are arranged at 
the ends of the loop and serve also to shape. 
the ends of the bale. 
In my machine I dispense with a core, also 
With fixed horizontal rollers and revoluble 
heads or disks for forming a bight or loop in 
a belt, also with a weight suspended from 
Such belt. I arrange an endless apron or 
belt to run on three elongated and flanged 
drums or pulleys, one of which is fixed in the 
frame of the machine, while the other two 
are arranged between and journaled in two 
parallel heads or disks that receive a rotary. 
reciprocating motion, whereby said drums or 
pulleys are changed in position and the apron 
caused to slacken to enlarge its loop as re 
quired by the growth of the forming bale. 
The rotation of the aforesaid heads or disks 
is caused by the increasing volume of the 
bale, and this movement is resisted by other 
mechanism. Whose action is automatically reg 
ulated to give a gradually-increased com 
pression to the bale as it increasesin diameter. 
I employ duplicate bale-forming mechan 
isms or apparatus which are arranged in the 
same horizontal plane, and a pivoted swing 
ing chute is located between them, whereby 
cotton is fed to one bale-forming apparatus 
while the bale already completed in the other 
is being removed, so that the compressing 
and baling operation is a practically continu 
OUS Ole. 
Having thus indicated some of the main 
features of my invention, I will proceed to 
describe it by reference to the accompanying 
drawings, three sheets. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
machine, showing the duplicated apparatus 
or mechanism. Fig. 2, Sheet 2, is an end 
view of the machine, showing the position of 
parts before a bale is formed. Fig. 3 is a 
vertical central section of the machine, show 
ing the position of parts after a bale has been 
formed. (Seeline 33, Fig. 1.) Fig. 4, Sheet 
3, is a vertical section of one of the bale 
winding mechanisms, showing the parts in 
the position they occupy at the beginning of 
their operation. Fig. 5 is a similar section 
of the same mechanism. When the bale has 
been wound to its full size. Fig. 6 is a per 
spective view of the rotatable portion of a 
bale-winding apparatus proper. Fig. 7 is a 
perspective view of the cotton-chute. 
The two duplicate sets of compressing and 
baling apparatus A and A' (shown in Fig. 1) 
are arranged side by side in the same frame 
B, but separated by a space which accommo 
dates the swinging cotton-chute C, pivoted 
in the upper portion of such frame, but is 
also sufficient to accommodate the Workman 
and also to receive a small car (not shown) 
into which the bales may be delivered when 
completed. The two apparatus A A' are 
driven intermittingly and alternately from 
the same continuously-rotating shaft D, ar 
ranged horizontally at one side of the frame 
B, the same being alternately connected with 
the compressing apparatus A A' by means of 
clutches 1 1' and bevel-gearing, as will be 
hereinafter further described. 
The two compressing apparatus or mechan 
isms A A' being alike, description of one will 
suffice for both, but to distinguish them from 
each other the numerals of the apparatus A 
are primed. The principal parts of each such 
compressing and balling apparatus proper are 
the endless belt or apron 2, Fig. 4, the rotatable 
flanged pulley or drum 3, fixed in the frame 
B, the two parallel heads or disks 4, Fig. 6, 
and the two flanged pulleys or drums 55", that 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
579,897 
o 
3O 
35 
45 
are journaled in and rotate in such heads 4. 
The latter are keyed on a central horizontal 
axle or shaft (i, journaled in suitable boxes 7, 
secured on the parallel side beams of frame 
B. The pulleys or drums 3 55' have a radial 
circumferential flange S at each end, and the 
horizontal distance between the two flanges 
S of a drum is the width of the apron that 
runs on the three pulleys and the length of 
the bales to be formed. The two pulleys or 
drums 55' have axles or shafts 9, that are 
journaled in boxes fixed in the inner opposite 
sides of the heads 4, and said pulleys 55' are 
arranged on opposite sides of the shaft 6, and 
also at different distances from the latter for 
a purpose hereinafter stated. Curved or seg 
ment lacks 10 are attached to the rins of the 
heads or disks 4 and with them mesh two pin 
ions 11, that are fixed on a holizontal shaft 
12, journaled in boxes secured on fraine B. 
On one end of this shaft, 12 is keyed a fiction 
pulley or wheel 13. Afriction band or strap 
14 is adapted to grip said wheel, its ends be 
ing attached to a lever 15, pivoted to the side 
beam of the frame. This lever 15 is con 
nected with the shaft (3 of the heads 4 by the 
following means: A rod 16, Fig. 1, having a 
nut 17, provided with a hand-wheel applied 
to its threaded free end, is pivoted to the 
longer arm of the lover 15, and a sleeve 18 is 
adapted to slide on the rod, as shown. A 
chain 19 connects this sleeve IS with a la 
dial pin 20, fixed in the elongated end of the 
shaft (3 of heads 4, and a spiral spring 21 is 
interposed between the sleeve and nut. 
A bevel-gear 22, Figs. 1 and 4, is keyed on 
the shaft 23 of lower fixed drum or pulley 3, 
and a pinion 24 on the horizontal drive-shaft 
D meshes with it. The said pinion 24 rotates 
free on the drive-shaft D, but may be locked 
with it by means of a clutch 1, that slides on 
the splined portion of said shaft, it being ad 
justed by a lever 25 and connecting-rod 26. 
The apron-driving pulley 3, Fig. 4, is keyed 
on the aforesaid shaft, 23 and is thus drive 
by the latter through the medium of the bevel 
pinion 24 and gear 22, connecting it with the 
power-shaft, and said pulley 3 in turn drives 
the apron or belt 2 in the direction indicated 
by arrows, Fig. 4, which movement tends to 
hold the bale in the loop 27 of the apron. 
This feature--the driving of the apron or belt 
by means of one stationary pulley and allow 
ing it to run on idle pulleys that are movable 
in position as to such driving-lpulley-is a par 
ticularly advantageous and valuable one, and 
I propose to make it the subject of a claim in 
another application. 
A portion 27 of the endless apron 2, Fig. 4. 
is doubled between the drums or pulleys 3 
and 5 by means of a curved shield 28, which 
also prevents contact of the upper portion of 
the loop 27 with the cotton bat, or film 29. 
Such shield 2S is attached to and held in 
place by a cross-bar 30, secured to the periph 
eries of the heads or disks 4. 
The Swinging chute C, Figs. 1 and 7, is open 
on opposite sides, so that it is practically a 
double trough. This construction adapts it 
to deliver the cotton bat or film to either of 
the two bale-forming mechanisms, according 
as it inclines one way or the other. Any suit 
able device may be used to hold it in either 
position. As shown in full lines, Fig. I, it is 
in position to deliver a cotton bat or film 29 
to the left-hand apparatus A. Upon screw 
ing down the hand-wheel nut 17 on the rod 
16, the friction-band 14 will be caused to grip 
the wheel 13 of the pinion-shaft 12, as illus 
trated on the right hand, Fig. 1, and the ap 
paratus A is then ready to operate as required. 
To start a bale, the clutch 1 is thrown into 
engagement with the pinion 24, and the cot 
to 29, sliding down the chute C, passes into 
the loo) 27, Fig. 4, of the apron 2, Fig. 4, 
and is convoluted or rolled upon itself, so 
that the roll gradually grows to the full size 
required. The direction of movement of all 
the parts is indicated by arrows in Figs. 4 
and 5. As the bale increases in dial meter it 
forces the pulley 5 upward, and the opposite 
one, 5', necessarily (lescends correspondingly, 
so that proper slack is given to the apron 2 
to form the gradually - expanding loop 27. 
Such slack of the apron is increased by the 
arrangement of the smaller dru in or pulley 
5' farther than drum 5 from tle shaft 6 of 
hoads 4, the important feature being that the 
outer side of the pulley 5' shall be farther 
from the axis (3 than the outer side of the pull 
ley 5. The shifting of the drums 55, one up 
and the other down, involves oscillation of 
the heads or disks 4 on their shaft 6 and the 
consequent winding of the chain 21 on the 
latter, so that the sleeve 18 is pulled Epward 
and the spring 21 further compressed, thereby 
increasing the tension of the friction-band 
14 on wheel 13 through the medium of rod 16 
and lover 15. This again hinders the oscilla 
tion of the heads or disks 4 through the me 
dium of the shaft 12, pinions 11, and segment 
acks 0, so that the resistance to growth of 
the forming bale is increased as its diameter 
increases, thereby giving it uniform density 
from center to circumference. In other 
words, the pressure applied to the bale is all 
tomatically increased as its diameter in 
creases, and it is apparent such pressure may 
be graduated as desired by adjusting the nut 
17 to give the spring 21 greater or less tension. 
So the bale may be wound to any desired den 
sity by varying the frictional resistance of 
the band 14 on the wheel 13. In Figs. 3 and 
5 the bale is shown wound to full size and 
Iready to be taken out. 
In the formation of the bale the circular 
flanges S, Fig. 4, on the ends of the drums 55' 
will guide the apron 2 and also shape or 
square the ends of the bale and make its 
length conform to the desired standard. 
IBagging in a single piece (not shown) is ap 
plied to the formed bale by laying one edge 
of the same on the apron just below the chute, 
and the same will be carried around the bale, 
95 
do 
Io5 
I d 
II5 
25 
579,89? 
- 
3 
IOO 
O 
II5 
3o economy of time and labor is effected. 
Then the movement of the apparatus being 
arrested by disengaging the clutch 1 the edges 
of the bagging may be lapped and sewed or 
otherwise secured together, when the bale is 
5 ready to be discharged. This operation is 
effected in one apparatus, say A, while the 
opposite apparatus, A', is forming another 
bale, the chute C having been first duly 
shifted in position as soon as the bale proper 
Io has been formed in the apparatus first oper 
ated. 
A floor 31, Fig. 1, is laid on the base-beams 
of frame B, and on it a car may be run be 
tween the bale-forming apparatus A A' and 
I5 the finished bale delivered into it. The bale 
is removed by screwing the hand-wheel nut 
17 up on the rod 16 until the chain 19 is slack 
enough to allow the sleeve 18 to drop on the 
stop-pin 32, Fig. 1, which projects from the 
2o side of frame B. Then the bale will fall out 
of the loop 27 of the apron 2. This result is 
mainly due to the action of gravity. It is ap 
parent that by thus shifting the swinging 
chute C and feeding the cotton to the two ap 
25 paratus A A' in succession, or alternately, 
and by removing a bale from one while an 
other is forming in the other apparatus, as 
before described, the balling operation is ren 
dered practically continuous, so that a great 
The heads or disks 4 and the drums 5 5', 
carried by them, Fig. 6, are practically bal 
anced on the shaft 6, and may therefore be 
turned manually without difficulty. This is 
35 an important feature in practice, since it en 
ables a Workman to quickly and easily adjust 
the apparatus for operation. 
I prefer to make the apron 2 of a good qual 
ity of rubber belting; but it may obviously 
be made of other materials. When made of 
metal, it is held in contact with the fixed 
drum 3 by a spring-pressed roller 33, Fig. 1. 
This roller is practically of use only at the be 
ginning of the baling operation, since the re 
45 quired tension of the apron is subsequently 
maintained by the expansion of the bale itself. 
The adjunctive bale-forming mechanism, 
consisting of the parallel heads or disks and 
the pulleys journaled therein and oscillating 
on the axis, is so constructed that the center 
of gravity is in the axis. The said mechan 
ism being thus balanced it is adapted to be 
easily rotated manually and Will remain sta 
tionary in any position or adjustment-a fea 
In another application, Serial No. 618,906, I 
claim the particular arrangement of the pull 
leys 3 and 5 to each other, and also to the 
bight of the belt, or to the bale formed there 
in, whereby the pressure and strain incident 
to Winding the bale are borne mainly by said 
pulleys rather than the belt. 
I do not claim the combination with a sin 
gle bat-forming apparatus of two sets of ro 
65 tary cotton-pressing appliances and means 
for feeding the bat to either one of said ap 
55 ture of much importance in practice. 
pliances and for shifting the feed from either 
one to the other, whereby the process of form 
ing in either one may go on While a previ 
ously-finished bale is being removed from the 7o 
other, nor the combination of a traveling 
pressure-surface for compressing the bale, a 
brake device for resisting the movement of 
said traveling pressure-surface, and auto 
matic means for gradually increasing the ten- 75 
sion on said brake device. 
95 
85 
What I claim is 
1. In a bale-Winding machine, the combi 
nation, substantially as specified, of an end 
less traveling winding-apron, and three pull 
leys or drums over which such apron passes, 
two of said pulleys being movable about a 
common center relative to the third pulley 
which is fixed in the frame, whereby due ex 
pansion of the forming bale is allowed. 
2. In a bale-winding machine, the combi 
nation of an endless apron, three rotatable 
pulleys or drums, around which said apron 
passes, the same being provided with radial 
flanges at their ends, and one of such pulleys 9o 
being driven to cause the apron to travel, and 
the other two being movable relative to such 
driven one, whereby the apron is slackened 
as the bale increases in diameter, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
3. In a bale-winding machine, the combi 
nation, of an endless winding-apron, a flanged 
driven pulley or drum, which is journaled in 
the frame, two oscillating heads or disks, and 
two flanged pulleys or drums which are jour 
naled in said heads, one of them being farther 
from the axis of the heads than the other, and 
the apron running on the three pulleys, and 
having normally sufficient slack to double be 
tween the fixed driven pulley and the adja 
cent movable one, substantially as shown and 
described, whereby, as the heads are caused 
to oscillate by the expansion of the forming 
bale in the loop between the driven pulley 
and the nearest movable one, the apron will 
be slackened proportionately to the rotative 
shifting of the two movable pulleys from the 
original position, as specified. 
4. In a bale-winding machine, the combi 
nation of parallel Oscillating heads, a fixed 
pulley, and two or more pulleys which are 
journaled in said heads and revolve therein, 
an endless apron that runs on the pulleys, 
and a tongue which is fixed to the heads op 
posite one of the movable pulleys and thus 
moved with it, the same projecting into the 
space between such movable pulley and the 
fixed pulley, when the parts are in position 
to begin forming the bale, and thus doubling 
the apron in such space and preventing con 
tact of the cotton bat or film with the upper 
side of the loop, substantially as specified. 
5. In a bale-winding machine, the colnbi 
nation, with three flanged pulleys or drums, 
one of which is fixed and the other two mov 
able around a common center, and an endless 
apron that I'llins on Stich pulleys, of a pressure 
I 25 
34 
.. 
579,897 
roller that acts against one of such pulleys, 
to hold the apron in firm engagement with it 
as shown and described. 
6. In a bale-windling machine, the combi 
nation substantially as described with a fixed 
pulley and endless traveling apron, of an ad 
junctive bale-forming mechanism which is 
adapted to oscillate and is counterbalanced 
as specified, the same being composed of par 
allel heads or disks and pulley's journaled in 
and between said heads, the said apron run 
ning on all three pulleys, substantially as 
shown and described. 
7. In a bale-Winding machine, the combi 
nation, with a fixed pulley, a carrier, and two 
pulleys mounted therein and movable as to 
the first pulley about a common center, of an 
endless apron running on the pulleys, and 
means for automatically resisting the oscilla 
tion of the movable pulley-carrier, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
S. In a bale-winding machine, the combi 
nation, With the bale-forming mechanism 
proper, composed of three pulleys, two of 
which are movable as to the other, oscillating 
parallel heads in which the movable pulleys 
are mounted, and an endless apron that runs 
on the pulleys, of a means for automatically 
applying an increased resistance to the ex 
pansion of the bale, which consists of pinions, 
a shaft, and segment-racks, and a friction and 
I d 
25 
spring tension apparatus connected with the 
axis of the part in which the movable pulleys 
are mounted to revolve, substantially as 
shown and described. 
9. In a bale-Windling machine, the combi 
nation, with the bale - forming mechanism. 
proper, a portion of which is oscillatory on 
and about an axle or shaft, of an adjusting 
mechanism for automatically resisting the 
expansion of the bale, the same being ar 
ranged in the frame of the machine, in con 
tiguity to one end of said shaft, and composed 
of a lever, a rod, a sleeve, spring, and friction 
band and wheel, and means arranged intel 
mediately of the adjusting mechanism and 
bale-forming mechanism, for communicating 
motion from one to the other, substantially 
as shown and described. 
10. The combination, with the rotary bale 
forming apparatus or mechanisms, of a de 
livery-guide, or chute, which is pivoted be 
tween them, and has its opposite sides open, 
being thus in the form of a double trough 
having a central portion that serves as a bot 
tom for each side of the chute, as shown and 
described. 
. 
* 
35 
45 
55 
WILLIAM A. ROSS. 
Attest: 
J. P. RODGERS, 
M. A. COLE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US579997.txt	(No Model.) 
H. E. MOON & J. W. HARRISON, 
ATTACHMENT FOR CLOVER HULLERS, 
W 
No. 579,997. 
Patented Apr, 6, 1897. 
3. YYYYYYXYYXXYYYYYYYYYYYYYY 
2 
WZZzzesses 
AO, (24.2eazz 
He. Norris Peters co. Hote-THo...washington, D. c 
2zzeeziars; 
A/ox afY A. a7ed/ 
Vaay 4% awa yo/Y 
Mazzazeys 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOXEY E. MOON AND JOHN W. HARRISON, OF CARTERSBURG, INDIANA. 
ATTACHMENT FOR COVER - H U LERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 579,997, dated April 6, 1897. 
Application filed August 24, 1896, Serial No. 603,818, (No model.) 
To all, it'? O1, it 7).?tly concern: 
Be it known that we, HOXEY E. MOON and 
JOHN W. HARRISON, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Cartersburg, in the county 
of Hendricks and State of Indiana, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Attachments for Clover-Hullers; and we 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
Oul invention relates to an attachment to 
be applied at the rear end of the shakers in a 
clover-huller; and it consists of a gate or de 
vice which is adjustably secured within the 
huller-frame and by which the seed which 
usually drops over from the end of the shak 
ers and is carried away and lost with the 
refuse is retained and saved, as Will be more 
fully described hereinafter and pointed out 
in the claim. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a side elevation of the rear portion of 
a clover-huller in which a portion is broken 
away, showing the interior in section; Fig. 
2, a top plan of a portion of the rear end of 
shakers, both showing our invention as ap 
plied; Fig. 3, a side elevation of a portion of 
huller-body, showing a portion of our device; 
Fig. 4 a top plan, Fig. 5 an end elevation, 
and Fig. 6 a front elevation, of our device. 
In the drawings, A designates a huller 
which is in common use, having shakers BB', 
suitably mounted on cranks, so that they 
cause the clover chaff and seeds to be grad 
ually separated, the seed falling downward 
while the chaff is pushed along to the rear 
end and overinto a suitable receptacle, thence 
to the stacker. The chaff in passing over 
the end carries with it considerable seed 
which is lost, the amount depending upon 
the quantity carried on the shakers. To 
avoid this waste, we provide a gate C, which 
may be made of any suitable material and of 
such size as shall adapt it to the huller to 
which it may be applied. 
IO 
3O 
45 
 
55 
The gate is an oblong rectangular plate 
and is provided at its front with two sets of 
rack-teeth E. E. The gate is set in guides e, 
which are adapted to retain it in all direc 
tions except vertically, yet permit of its ver 
tical movement. We provide a metallic shaft 
F, on which is secured two pinions D D, 
adapted to mesh with the rack-teeth on the 
gate, thereby supporting the latter. The 
shaft is suitably mounted adjacent to the 6o 
gate and rotatably supported by the huller 
frame by means of the journal-plates g g, 
suitably secured. The lever G is suitably 
secured at one end to an end of the shaft F, 
its handled end being adapted to preSS against 65 
a curved rack H, secured to the huller-frame 
and provided at its outside face with suitable 
notches h, into any of which the lever is re 
tained, but may be withdrawn and changed 
to another notch by springing it outward. 7o 
The side next to the rack may be provided 
with any suitable rubbing face or rib adapted 
to the notches. The position of the lever 
relative to the rack will indicate the relative 
position of the gate vertically. 
By manipulating the lever G the gate C 
may be so adjusted as to prevent seed from 
passing over it and will cause them to be de 
posited on the floor below and saved. 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is- 
The combination, in a clover-huller of the 
kind described having shakers B B', of the 
gate C having rack-teeth E E and mounted as 85 
shown at the rear end of said shakers; the 
shaft F having the pinions D D secured there 
to and suitably mounted to control said gate; 
the notched rack H attached to the huller 
body, and the lever G. secured to the end of 
Said shaft and arranged to engage the notches 
in said rack, substantially as described, for 
the purposes set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
Having thus described our invention, what 8o 
75 
- 
HOXEY E. MOON. 
JOHN W. HARRISON. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. S. THURMAN, 
E. T. SILVIUS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580097.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 580,097. 
H. D. WILLIAMS, 
GOVERNOR FOR, WATER, MOTORS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 6, 1897. 
... 
af 
27/S/N - \l 
II -h Sa-nits, 
N f 
i? 
Prm 
 
 
East 2ses 
-t 
  
 
A 1 A/EI 
G 5-1, e E. ES E. 
17. a 
in 
z/ 
2% 
R 
Z27-2 
 
22 % 
 
/ 
 
 
 
S 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
2 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
a 22 
Witnesses. 
Wo, bioka, 
7(y.2. 
-/rive/147. 
syen60%zala 
(3.94%aas? 
Attorneys 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 580,097, 
 
H. D. WILLIAMS, 
GOVERNOR FOR WATER MOTORS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 6, 1897. 
WTNESSES 
N Full w 
26-23 
 
(No Model.) 
H. D. WILLIAMS. 
GOVERNOR FOR WATER, MOTORS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 580,097. 
Patented Apr. 6, 1897. 
7%. 8, 
% 
m 
| 
P 
I 
-- 
art 
Es 
S21 
Ai/zzzesses. 
Wm. lank 
ve/7/07 
/rive/atoz 
were, 
A 
4ttorneys 
| 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 580,097. 
H. D. WILLIAMS, 
GOVERNOR FOR WATER, MOTORS, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Apr. 6, 1897. 
WITNESSES : 
Wbanks. 
32- 
The Norris PertRs co. Photo-LTHO. washington, d. c. 
 
NVENTOR 
76awy20. 
i.a.s.l. 
ATTORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HARVEY D. WILLIAMS, OF ITHACA, NEW YORK. 
GOVERNOR FOR WATER - MOTORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,097, dated April 6, 1897. 
Application filed March 13, 1896. Serial No. 583,123, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
5 
O 
To all whon, it inctly concer'72: 
Beit known that I, HARVEY D. WILLIAMS, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Ithaca, 
in the county of Tompkins and State of New 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Governors for Water-Mo 
tors; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the Same. 
My invention relates to governors or regu 
lators for water wheels or motors employed for 
regulating the speed of the wheel and main 
taining constant speed under varying condi 
tions of load; and my invention relates par 
ticularly to a governor designed to maintain 
the speed of water-wheels constant at the 
speed of maximum efficiency; and my inven 
tion is particularly applicable to wheels of the 
Pelton or hurdy-gurdy type and of the tur 
bine type. 
My invention consists in the novel regulat 
ing-valve employed for regulating the speed 
of the wheel, in the novel means employed for 
operating this regulating-valve, in the novel 
means employed for balancing said valve, 
thereby making it sensitive in action, and in 
the novel combination, construction, and ar 
angement of the parts of the apparatus. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to 
provide a governor or regulator for water 
wheels which shall be more effective than 
former governors, shall be quicker in its ac 
tion, and shall give better regulation; second, 
to provide a governor which shall keep the 
speed of a Water-wheel practically constant 
at the speed of maximum efficiency; third, to 
provide a governor having few parts and few 
joints and which shall require but little power 
in its operation; fourth, to provide an im 
proved form of valve for regulating the flow 
of water which shall be more rapid and more 
delicate in its action than former valves and 
shall require less powerfor its operation; fifth, 
to provide new and better means for operat 
ing this valve according to variations in the 
speed of the wheel; sixth, to provide means 
for balancing this valve, and, seventh, to pro 
vide a governor which shall be more simple, 
compact, efficient, and sensitive than former 
governors, which shall not be liable to de 
rangement, and which shall be as inexpensive 
as possible. These objects are attained in the 
governor for water-wheels herein described, 
and illustrated in the drawings which accom 
pany and form a part of this application, in 
which the same reference-numerals indicate 
the same or corresponding parts, and in 
which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of a water-wheel of 
the Pelton type with my governor attached, 
the case which usually surrounds water 
wheels of this type being removed. Fig. 2 is 
a central vertical section of the nozzle, show 
ing the regulating-valve by which the flow of 
water through the nozzle is regulated. Fig. 3 
is a transverse vertical section of the nozzle, 
taken on the line v at of Fig. 2. Figs. 4, 5, 
and 6 are views illustrating the direction of 
flow of the Water from the buckets of a water 
wheel when the wheel is revolving above the 
speed of maximum efficiency, at the speed 
of maximum efficiency, and below the speed 
of maximum efficiency, respectively. 
Fig. 7. 
illustrates a modification of the type of gov 
ernor shown in Fig. 1, which may also be ap 
plied to Pelton wheels. Fig. 8 illustrates the 
application of a governor working on the same 
principle as the governor shown in Fig. 1 to 
turbine wheels; and Fig. 9 is a horizontal 
transverse section of the turbine on the line 
acac of Fig. 8, showing the dash-plates by which 
the governor is operated, and also showing the 
valve-ports of the waste-passage by which the 
main governor valve Or. gate is operated. 
With well-designed water-wheels of either 
the Pelton or the turbine type, revolving at 
the speed of maximum efficiency, the velocity 
of the entering water is entirely lost in pass 
ing through the buckets, and the water falls 
dead, vertically in Pelton wheels as ordi 
narily arranged and in vertical-discharge tur 
bines, and outwardly and then downwardly in 
horizontal-discharge turbines. If the wheel 
be underloaded at a fixed gate-opening, so that 
it revolves at a speed higher than that of 
maximum efficiency, the velocity of the wa 
ter is not entirely lost, and the water as it 
leaves the buckets is projected forward in 
the direction of rotation of the wheel. If the 
wheel be overloaded at a fixed gate-opening, 
so as to revolve at a speed lower than the 
speed of maximum efficiency, the water as it 
95 
ICO 
25 
35 
45 
 
580,097 
3 
size of stream for rotating at maximum effi 
ciency the water - wheel under the load at 
which it is working, the valve-ports 13 open 
ing when the stream from the nozzle is too 
small and closing when the stream from the 
nozzle is too large. 
The operation of my governor is as follows: 
Water passing through the nozzle 3 is dis 
charged in a jet into the buckets 2 of the 
bucket-wheel 1, causing this wheel to revolve. 
As the buckets revolve water is discharged 
and falls between the dash-plates 6. If the 
wheel is running at the speed of maximum 
efficiency, by far the greater portion of this 
water falls directly downward, and therefore 
has no tendency to move these plates horizon 
tally. Some water of course falls obliquely, 
but by properly spacing the dash-plates of 
the rod 4 the influence of that water which 
falls forwardly may be counteracted by the 
influence of the water which falls rearwardly. 
If, however, the wheel be running beyond the 
speed of maximum efficiency, the direction 
of the main body of water falling from the 
buckets is not directly downward, but 
obliquely forward and downward. Water 
thus striking upon these plates 6 in an oblique 
direction moves the plates and the rod 4 to 
the left of Fig. 1, causing the abutment 15 
to strike the end of the horizontal sliding 
valve 11 and move the same to the left, clos 
ing partly or entirely the valve-port 13. The 
fiOW of Water from the valve-chamber 9 be 
ing thus restricted, the pressure in this valve 
chamber rises, causing the valve 8 to rise 
and so to reduce the size of stream flowing 
from the nozzle 3. The size of stream being 
thus reduced, the speed of the wheel falls and 
the dash-plates 6 move backward slightly, 
opening the valve 13 sufficiently to reduce 
the pressure in the valve-chamber 9 to the 
pressure above the valve S, thus holding the 
valve stationary. 
If the speed of the wheel falls too low, the 
greater portion of the water discharged from 
the buckets 2 will fall not directly downward, 
but downwardly and rearwardly, thus acting 
upon the dash-plates and moving the rod 4 to 
the right. This movement causes the abut 
ment 15' to strike the end of the valve 11, 
moving this valve to the right and opening 
partly or completely the port 13. Water is 
thereby permitted to escape from the valve 
chamber 9, thus reducing the pressure there 
in and causing the valve 8 to fall, thus in 
creasing the size of the stream flowing from 
the nozzle 3. The speed of the wheel being 
thereby increased, the dash-plates move back 
to their former position, since the water from 
the buckets is once more discharged directly 
downward, thus closing the port 13 suffi 
ciently so that the valve 8 shall be held sta 
tionary. 
I find in practice that this governor is very 
sensitive, responds quickly to variations in 
load upon the wheel, and keeps the wheel with 
practical uniformity at the speed at which the 
wheel operates most efficiently. The dash 
plates 6, being close to the buckets 2, areaf 
fected instantly by the change in direction of 
the falling discharge-water due to any slight 
change in the speed of the wheel, and act 
equally quickly upon the regulating-valve in 
the nozzle 3, which itself acts quickly, since 
it is perfectly balanced. The sensitiveness 
of the governor may be varied by varying the 
size of the water-passages 16 and 14, the size 
of which determines the rapidity of movement 
of the valve 8. In any case but little water 
is wasted through the passage 16, as it may 
always be small. 
In Fig. 7 is illustrated a modification of this 
governor. A dash-plate formed like a trough 
19, having a central partition, is pivotally 
mounted below the center of a Pelton wheel. 
If an excess of water fall upon one side of the 
partition, the dash-plate will be tilted in one 
direction, and if an excess of Water fall upon 
the other side of the partition the dash-plate 
will be caused to tilt in the other direction, 
its normal position being substantially hori 
Zontal. This movement of the plate may be 
utilized to move an ordinary rotary plug 
valve, as shown, or to operate the valve shown 
in Figs. 2 and 3. 
In Figs. S and 9 I have illustrated the ap 
plication of a governor of the same type as 
that shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 to the govern 
ing of a water-wheel of the common turbine 
type. In these figures, 20is the turbine wheel, 
mounted upon a vertical shaft 22 and having 
in its sides buckets 23 of the ordinary form. 
2424 are the ordinary guide-plates, and 25 the 
ordinary gate-valve, which by rising or fall 
ing controls the flow of water to the buckets 
At one end the valve is provided with a 
23. 
cylindrical portion 26, which when the valve 
descends closes the passages between the 
guide-plates and so prevents the Water from 
passing into the buckets 23. At the other end 
of the valve 25 is a head or piston 27, located 
within a counterbalance-chamber 28. The 
shaft 22 of the water-wheel is mounted upon 
the usual step 29, supported in the usual man 
ner by a bridge 30, and upon this bridge is rev 
olubly mounted, preferably upon ball-bear 
ings, a dash-plate wheel31, having radial pro 
jecting arms or dash-plates 32, so placed as to 
be in the stream of water which flows from 
the buckets 23 downwardly into the discharge 
passage of the wheel. These arms 32 corre 
spond substantially with the dash-plates 6. 
(Shown in Fig. 1.) 
The shaft 22 is hollow, having within it a 
water-passage 33, communicating with a simi 
lar water-passage 34 in the step 29, having 
horizontal discharge-ports 3535, adapted to 
register with corresponding ports 3636 in the 
hub of the dash-plate wheel 31. The wheel 
31 has projections 37 in its bottom engaging 
with lugs 37' of the bridge 30, so that the mo 
tion of the dash-plate wheel 31 is limited. 
At its upper end the Water-passage 33 of 
the shaft 22 communicates, through ports in 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
3O 
35 
45 
5 5 
 
4. 
580,097 
IO 
3o 
35 
40 
45 
55 
the bearing-sleeve through which the shaft 
passes with the upper portion of the balance 
chamber 28 above the piston 27. In the pis 
ton 27 is a small port 38, by which water is 
permitted to pass from the chamber surround 
ing the Water-wheel, through the port 3S and 
through the Waste-passages 33 34 and the 
ports 35 and 36, into the discharge-passage of 
the water-wheel. 
The piston 27 is made of such area that 
when the ports 36 and 35 are wide open, so 
that Water has free passage from the top of 
the counterbalance-chamber and the pressure 
on the top or rear face of the piston is prac 
tically nothing, the pressure on the bottom or 
front face of the piston will be sufficient to 
lift the valve 25. The effect of restricting 
the passage of the water through the waste 
passage 33 is to increase the pressure upon 
the rear face of the piston and so to reduce 
its counterbalancing effect, thus causing the 
valve 25 to fall and to permit less water to 
flow through the buckets 23. It will there 
fore be seen that closing or opening of the 
ports 35 and 36 adjusts the position of the 
gate 25. 
The operation of the governor is as follows: 
If the wheel is running at the speed of maxi 
mum efficiency, the water discharged from 
the buckets 23 falls directly downward and 
has no influence upon the dash-plates 32. If, 
however, the wheel be running too fast, water 
does not fall directly downward from the 
buckets 23, but is projected forward slightly, 
thus striking upon the sides of the dash-plates 
32 and causing the dash-plate wheel 31 to re 
volve slightly, so as to close the ports 35 and 
36, thereby restricting or stopping the flow of 
Water through the Waste-passages 34 and 33 
and causing the valve 25 to fall and restrict 
As the valve closes the 
the flow of water. 
speed of the wheel is brought to normal, thus 
Swinging back the wheel 81 and opening 
partly the ports 35 and 36. 
If, on the other 
hand, the wheel is running too slow, the wa 
ter falling from the buckets 23 is projected 
backward, striking thesides of the dash-plates 
32 and turning the dash-plate wheel 31, so as 
to close the ports 36, thereby permitting or 
increasing the flow of water through the 
Waste-passages 33 and 34, thus increasing the 
supporting-power of the piston 27 and caus 
ing the valve 25 to rise and opening more 
widely the passages to the buckets 23. 
It will be seen that although the governor 
shown in Fig. 8 differs somewhat in appear 
ance from the governor shown in Fig. 1, be 
cause of the difference in the types of wheels 
to which they are applied, they are substan 
tially the same. The arms 32 and the wheel 
31 correspond to the dash-plates 6 and the 
horizontal rod 4. The passages 34 and 33 
correspond to the port 13 and passage 12. 
The counterbalance-chamber 28 corresponds 
to the valve or balance chamber 9 of Figs. 2 
and 3. The valve 25 corresponds to the valve 
- 
block 8 of Fig. 2, and the port 38 corresponds 
to the passage 16 of Fig. 2. 
It will be seen, 
therefore, that these governors are substan 
tially the same in principle and operation, 
the differences in the forms of the parts being 
due simply to the difference in the types of 
water-wheels to which the governors are ap 
plied. 
The governor for turbine wheels is likewise 
applicable to horizontal-discharge wheels, the 
change in direction of discharge from vertical 
to horizontalin no way affecting the Operation 
of the governor. 
Having thus completely described my in 
vention, what I claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a water-wheel governor, the combina 
tion, with a plate movably mounted in the 
discharge-stream of the water-wheel and ar 
ranged to be moved by a change in the direc 
tion of flow of the Water, of means for regu 
lating the speed of the wheel, operated by the 
movement of said plate. 
2. In a water-wheel governor, the combina 
tion, with a regulating-valve controlling the 
speed of the wheel, of a plate movably mounted 
in the discharge-stream of the wheel, and ar 
ranged to be moved by a change in the direc 
tion of said stream, and means for Operating 
said regulating-valve by the movement of 
said plate. 
3. In a water-wheel governor, the combina 
tion, with a regulating-Valve controlling the 
speed of the wheel, of a series of dash-plates 
movably mounted in the discharge-stream of 
the wheel and in close proximity to the buck 
ets thereof, said plates being arranged to be 
moved by a change in the direction of said 
stream, and means for operating said regu 
lating-valve by the movement of said dash 
plates, substantially as described. 
4. In a regulator for water-wheels, the con 
bination, with the supply-passage of the wa 
ter-wheel, and a valve arranged to restrict 
the flow of water therethrough, of a balanee 
chamber in which said valve moves, means 
for admitting water to said chamber to oper 
ate said valve, a water-passage through which 
water may escape from said chamber, an aux 
iliary valve controlling the flow of water from 
said chamber, dash-plates movably mounted 
in the discharge-stream of the wheel and ar 
ranged to be moved by variations in the di 
rection of flow of the water, and means oper 
ated by the movement of said dash-plates for 
operating said auxiliary valve, substantially 
as described. 
5. In a regulator for water-wheels, the com 
bination, with the supply-passage of the wa 
ter-wheel, and a valve arranged to restrict 
the flow of water therethrough and having 
upon its face the water-pressure in the re 
stricted portion of said passage, of a balance 
chamber in which said Valve moves, means 
for admitting water to said chamber in rear 
of said valve, a water-passage through which 
90 
95 
Ioo 
IoS 
O 
I I5 
2d 
25 
130 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580197.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
No. 580,197. 
J. E. SCHLIEPER. 
WATER TUBE BOILER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 6, 1897. 
Z27 / 
6 
a 
 
ase as 
eSase a SEE 
 
 
 
 
O 
\ 
 
 
a 
2 
L2 
es es S 
 
 
% 
N2 N 
pses 
e 
t 
s N 
ray.K(\\% 
w: "W 
w 
or els 
8 
% y. 
W3%KyxSKy. 
al ww. y N S. 
y: ( 
2. 
a 
% 
2 
w 
Ww 
S 
a 
S. S& & 
 
S. 
(SYK?)' 
Z&2%2ces 
%/ 
m 
Z7zzzzzzz 
-&zz Zdz22-. 
orals sters co, photo-Litho, WASHINGro. p. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. E. SOHLIEPER, 
WATER, TUBE BOILER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 580,197. 
Patented Apr. 6, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
 
A. 
 
 
 
1 A1, 
 
 
& XXXXX 
3%xWy), K%; 
xxx xxxx 
s 
r 
XXy, & XS2 
r xxxx 
vvvvy 
 
Z/2 
(2S 
365, 
3. 21 63 
Z7zze/22/7. 
AZ, Zozzezez; 
 
(No Model.) 
J. E. SCHLIEPER. 
WATER TUBE BOER 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 580,197. 
Patented Apr. 6, 1897, 
 
 
 
 
 
-22222 case-2/22.9er; 
a 
22,6S---Y 
( 
Z3/. 
Speers co, PKO 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOIN E. SCHLIEPER, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
STIRLING COMPANY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
WATER-TUBE BOLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,197, dated April 6, 1897. 
Application filed September 12, 1895, Serial No. 562,310. (No model.) 
O 
To all, Luhon, it nGulf CO7 certa. 
Be it known that I, JoHN E. SCHLIEPER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pitts 
burg, in the State of Pennsylvania, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Water-Tube Boilers, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to make a 
boiler which shall have in one construction 
the advantages usually attained by having 
tubes connected directly into drums and also 
the advantages usually attained by having 
them connected into headers; and the inven 
tion consists in the features and combinations 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a vertical sectional elevation of my improved 
boiler; Figs. 2 and 3, the same, illustrating 
modifications, particularly in reference to in 
troducing feed-Water; and Fig. 4, the same, 
illustrating a modification in reference to the 
header and mud-drums. 
A is the lower mud drum or drums; B, ele 
vated steam and water drums; b, steam-pipes, 
and b' water-pipes connecting the elevated 
drums; C, banks of tubes connecting the 
header or headers with the elevated steam 
and water drums; D, the header or headers; 
E, a feed-drum, and e a pipe or pipes con 
necting the feed-drum to the header or lower 
mud-drum; F, the fire-chamber, and G fire 
brick arches, partitions, or shelves. 
In constructing my improved boiler I pro 
vide for connecting the upper ends of the 
tubes of the several banks directly into the 
elevated steam and Water drums and for con 
necting the lower ends into a suitable header 
or headers. The elevated drums may have 
steam and water communication with each 
other after the manner of an ordinary Stir 
ling boiler or in any other convenient way, 
and suitable fire-brick arches or partitions 
may be used to direct the heated gases and 
products of combustion in and among the 
banks of tubes and up and down along the 
same, as desired. 
The upper ends of the tubes are connected 
into the elevated drums and the lower ends 
into a header or headers in the usual way. 
The header or headers may be provided with 
hand-holes or not, as desired. 
A mud-drum is placed at some convenient 
point in the lower part of the boiler, prefer 
ably at the lower end of each header. 
This 
mud-drum being in communication with the 
header, impurities are deposited therein, 
which impurities may afterward be blown off 
or removed in any convenient way. 
In the form of boiler shown in Fig. 1 the 
feed-Water is introduced into a feed-drum 
above the header and communicating there 
with. After entering the feed-drum the water 
passes down through the header to the mud 
drum and flows on in general circulation from 
the header and up and through the several 
banks of tubes into the elevated steam and 
water drums. 
In the form of boiler shown in Fig. 2 the 
feed-drum has separate communications with 
the mud-drum, the latter also communicating 
With the lower end of the header. After en 
tering the feed-drum the water passes down 
into the mud-drum, thence back and up into 
the header, and thence out and up in general 
circulation through the several banks of tubes 
into the elevated steam and water drums. 
In the form of boiler shown in Figs. 3 and 
4 the feed-water is introduced into the rear 
upper drum, after which it passes down 
through the rear bank of tubes into the header, 
and thence into the mud-drum, also flowing 
out and up into the elevated steam and water 
drums. As shown in Fig. 4 also, there are 
two headers and mud-drums having water 
communication. With each other. The Water 
passing down into the rear header and mud 
drum immediately passes on into the forward 
mud-drum and thence up through the for 
ward header and out and up through the 
front and middle banks of tubes or one of 
them into the front and middle steam and 
Water drums. 
The water communication between the ele 
vated feed-drum and lower mud-druim may 
be directly through the header, as shown in 
Figs. 1, 3, and 4, or by means of separate 
tubes or pipes, one or more, as desired, as 
shown in Fig. 2. 
I claim 
1. In a water-tube boiler, the combination 
of elevated steam and water drums, a header 
in the rear part of the boiler, banks of tubes 
O 
 
55 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
IOO 
2 
. 
580,197 
connecting the elevated drums with the 
header, a lower mud-drum communicating 
with the header, and means for introducing 
feed-water into the header and lower mud 
drum, substantially as described. 
2. In a Water-tube boiler, the combination 
of elevated steam and Water drums, a header 
in the rear part of the boiler, banks of tubes 
connecting the elevated drums with the 
header, a lower mud-drum communicating 
with the header, and an elevated feed-drum 
communicating with the lower mud-drum 
substantially as described. 
O 
3. In a water-tube boiler, the combination. 
of elevated steam and water drums, a rear 
header, a bank of tubes connecting the rear 
elevated drum with the rear header, after 
Ward header, banks of tubes connecting the 
front and middle elevated drums with the 
forward header, two lower mud-drums eon 
municating with each other and with the 
headers, substantially as described. 
. 
JOHN E. SCHLIEPER. 
- 
. . 
. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. J. MCAFEE, 
JOHN H. RONEY. 
. 
. . 
 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580297.txt	(No Model.) 
M. TILLOTSON. 
SPOOL HEAD FASTENING, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
ZGZZpz 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARSHALL TILLOTSON, OF VASSALBOROUGH, MAINE, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO WILLIAM TAYLOR, OF BYFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, 
SPOOL-HEAD FASTEN ING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,297, dated April 6, 1897. 
Application filed January 20, 1897, Serial No. 619,894, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To al7 ?ph??? ?? ??? concer?: 
Beit known that I, MARSHALL TILLOTSON, 
of Vassalborough, in the county of Kennebec 
and State of Maine, have invented an Improve 
ment in Spool-Head Fastenings, of which the 
following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters on the drawings representing like 
parts. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
a spool with a novelfastening device by which 
to attach its head to its body very securely, 
so that there will be no liability of the head 
becoming loose on the body or the journals 
outside the head becoming loose. 
In accordance with my invention I attach 
the heads to the body by means of locking 
dogs, which, when in place, constitute a U 
shaped loop, Which may be in two pieces or . 
One piece, it presenting a portion which is ex 
tended diametrically across the axis of the 
body of the beam, leaving two substantially 
parallel arms which extend toward the end 
of the beam, said ends passing through the 
head and through the usual metal plate lying 
outside the beam-head and beyond which the 
usual journal of the beam extends, said arms 
being Securely fastened in or to said plate. 
Figure I shows a face or end view of a spool 
having its head attached in accordance with 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec 
tion. On the linea, Fig. 1. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 
show modifications of my invention, and Fig. 
6 is a detail of Fig. 5. 
In accordance with my invention the body 
A of the spool and the head b are and may be 
all as usual. The journal C is rounded where 
it is exposed outside of the head, and its oppo 
site end is forged to a square or other irregu 
lar shape in cross-section, so that when driven 
into aroundhole made in the end of the beam 
the journal will be securely fixed in place be 
yond any possibility of its being turned. The 
metallic washer C', applied to the outer side 
of the head on the said journal, may be of 
usual shape. 
In Figs. 1 and 2 I provide the body A, as 
shown, with a transverse bore or hole C, in 
which Ienter a portion of the U-shaped lock 
ing-dog or loop-like fastening device D, the 
dog or loop represented in said figures being 
shown as composed of two parts, each having 
a head and bent near its inner end, as at 
d, each of said ends being preferably beveled 
and provided with a hook or locking device d. 
To secure the heads on the body, Figs. 1 
and 2, I first put the locking-dogs or loops 
through the holes in the plate C" and then 
through enlarged holes b made in the head, 
bringing the points of the bent arms d of the 
dogs or loops opposite the outer ends of the 
bore or hole C, as shown by dotted lines in 
Fig. 2, the said hole being located at such a 
distance from the end of the beam that as 
the bent ends enter the said bore or hole, they 
being driven therein by blows of a hammer or 
other device, the said dogs or loops act to 
draw the head firmly upon or against the end 
of the body, the bore or hole being commonly 
called a draw-bore. 
The bent ends d of the dog or loop are 
driven into the bore or hole until the hooked 
ends pass each other and lock together, and 
thereafter it will be practically impossible to 
remove the heads or for the head in any man 
mer to become loose. 
? 
In the modification, Fig. 3, I have omitted . 
the hooks at the ends of the bent portions d'. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown a loop (marked E) 
as made in one piece of wire, the wire form 
ing the loop being first inserted through the 
bore or hole C, when straight and being then 
bent into the U form, after which the head 
and the journal-plate will be applied to the 
ends of the two parallel arms of the loop, and 
the said ends will thereafter be headed or up 
set in said holes at the outer portion of the 
plate. In Fig. 5 I have shown a similar loop, 
which I have designated F, its ends being pro 
vided with screw-threads, upon which I have 
applied nuts e, one of the said nuts being 
shown detached in Fig. 6, and these nuts, 
when screwed down snugly in place, may be 
locked against accidental rotation by driving 
a nail through the hole e' in the nut, the hole 
entering the head b. 
The spool herein described may be used to 
hold yarns for spinning telegraphic or other 
wire, or for any other purpose required of 
such spool. 
95 
IOQ) 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
580,29? 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters. Pat 
ent, is 
1. A spool composed of a body having a 
transverse bore or hole, a head and a metallic 
plate applied thereto outside the head, the 
said head and plate being connected to the 
body boy a, U.-shaped " dog or loop having por 
tions extended transversely through the bore 
or hole in the body, the heads on the parallel 
arms of the dog or loop engaging the plate 
outside the head at the end of the body, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A spool-body having a transverse bore 
or hole, combined with a dog or loop present 
ing parallel locking-arms having bent por 
tions to enter said bore or hole, and lock and 
IO 
2 ? 
draw the said plate and head firmly to the end 
of the body, substantially as described. 
3. A spool-body having a transverse bore 
or hole, a head and journal-plate, combined 
with a dog or loop presenting parallel lock 
ing-arms having bent portions to enter said 
bore or hole, said bent portions being provided 
with hooked ends to engage and lock together 
when driven into said bore or hole in the body, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
MARSHALL TILLOTSON. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT D. RICE, 
JNO. J. GOODY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580398.txt	P. J. HOEN SCHEID, 
SELF OILING DRILL, 
Patented Apr. 13, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 580,398, 
 
%22222. 
6-24, 7-Y 74, 42% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER J. HOENSCHEID, OF AKRON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE WHITMAN & 
BARNES MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SELF-OILING DRILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,898, dated April 18, 1897. 
Application filed October 7, 1896, 
. (5 
To all tuhon, it Tay concern: 
Be it known that I, PETER J. HoENSCHEID, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Akron, county of Summit, and State 
5 of Ohio, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Self-Oiling Drills, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings. 
Io My invention relates to self-oiling drills; 
and its object is to provide a drill having an 
oil-conduit leading to the working point, with 
economical and convenient means of supply 
ing oil to that conduit. 
My invention also contemplates providing 
such means as will supply oil to a revolving 
drill held in horizontal position. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with such a drill, of a collar surrounding the 
2O drill-shank and held thereto against longi 
tudinal movement and supplying oil to the 
drill from a tube held in proper relation to 
the drill by the collar. 
Another part of the invention consists of 
25 the combination of tubular holes and grooves 
by which the oil is conveyed to the Working 
point. 
The drawings show my invention embodied 
in the best form at present known to me. 
Figure 1 is an elevation of a complete drill 
containing the invention. Fig. 2 is a trans 
verse section on the line 22, and Fig. 3 a. 
bottom view thereof, both being on an en 
larged scale. Fig. 4 is a view of the drill 
35 shank, being taken at right angles to Fig. 1 
and its lower portion being a section on the 
line 4 4 of Fig. 1. 
A is a twist-drill having a shank B, which 
may be cylindrical or tapered or formed in 
4o other suitable manner. Carried by the body 
of the drill is the oil-conduit, which Iform by 
making a groove c therein and covering the 
outside of the same in any suitable manner 
by a strip of metal d, preferably brass. The 
45 grooves c (preferably two in number) ter 
minate in the diagonal tubular holese shown 
in Fig. 4. These holes continue the conduit 
from the surface grooves to the transverse 
holef, extending through the drill and com 
5o municating at each end with the annular 
55 
75 
Serial No. 608,140, (No model.) 
groove g. They are conveniently and eco 
nomically made and furnish a direct path to 
the covered surface grooves. Thus oil sup 
plied to this annular groove will flow through 
the holes f and e and the grooves cand reach 
the working point of the drill. 
Oil is delivered to the annular groove g 
from a stationary supply by means of the 
tube p and the collar i, the inner end of the 
tube being held in proper juxtaposition to 
the annular groove by the collar, while the 
collar, having its inner Wall in apposition to 
the annular groove, makes a passage around 
the shank and thus supplies oil coming 
through the tube continuously to the conduit. 
Dislocation of the collar is prevented by a 
set-screw ic, whose end terminates in the an 
nular groove. A shoulder S is preferably 
formed upon the drill-shank on which the 
collar may rest, whereby any leakage resulti 
ing from looseness of the collar is prevented 
or minimized. It will be seen that if the 
collar is made to fit snugly about the shank 
oil may be fed to the drill-point when the drill 
is working in a horizontal position or even if 
it should be completely inverted. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A drill having an oil-conduit leading 
from its point to its shank and terminating 
at the shank in an annular groove, in com 
bination with a collar surrounding the shank 
and having a set-screw projecting into said 
groove and a tube supplying oil to said groove 
and held in proper relation thereto by said 
collar, for the purpose specified. 
2. A drill having an annular groove about 
its shank, a diametrical hole through it ter 
minating at each end in the annular groove, 
and a diagonal hole whose entrance is within 
the said diametrical hole and whose exit is into 
a covered channel beginning at a point on 
the shank below the annular groove and ex 
tending to or near to the working point of 
the drill, substantially as described. 
PETER J. HOENSCHEID. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. WRIGHT, 
J. A. WINING. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580498.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 580,498, 
 
  
 
 
 
T. C. LEWIS, 
BALL BEARING, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 13, 1897. 
a*??g ? 
 
6% 
 
 
N 
 
(No Model.) 
T. C. LEWIS 
BALL BEARING, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
- 
No. 580,498. 
Patented Apr. 13, 1897. 
The corris reters co, P-ca-o, washinsors. p. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TRUMAN C. LEWIS, OF MARION, OHIO 
BALL BEARI N G . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,498, dated April 18, 1897. 
Application filed June 27, 1896, Serial No. 597,199, (No model.) 
55 
?? . 
75 
95 
IOC) 
?. ? 
15 
25 
35 
To all whoma, it may concern: 
Intermediate its ends the sleeve 4 is pro 
Be it known that I, TRUMAN C. LEWIS, a vided with one or more additional grooves, 
citizen of the United States, residing at Mar- forming ball-races 7 for another or otherse 
ion, in the county of Marion and State of 
ries of antifriction-balls 8. 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Ball 
9 designates what may be termed an in 
Bearing, of which the following is a specifi 
ner bearing-box, which is provided with a 
cation. 
cylindrical bore and which surrounds the 
This invention relates to ball-bearings, and 
sleeve 4, so as to leave an intervenings pace 
has for its object to provide a bearing of this 
10, the purpose of which will appear. This 
character which is especially adapted to be 
box is formed in two halves or sections, which 
used in railway-car journal-boxes for over 
meet upon the diametrical line of the jour 
coming the friction and preventing the heat 
nal and are connected and held firmly to 
ing of the journal, also saving the expense 
place by means of bolts 11, passing through 
of brasses, packing, &c., avoiding delay and 
corresponding openings in the said halves or 
enabling greater tonnage to be handled with 
sections, and being adjustable by tightening 
the same amount of power. 
or loosening the sections by means of the 
To this end the invention consists in cer 
The box 9 is provided upon the 
said bolts. 
tain novel features and details of construction 
inside with an annular groove or ball-seat 12 
and arrangement of parts, as hereinafter fully 
for antifriction-balls 8, said groove contain 
described, illustrated in the drawings, and 
ing a steel band 12, which extends around 
pointed out in the claims. 
the balls and against which said balls travel, 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
and the opposite ends of said box, which 
is a vertical longitudinal section through a 
overlap or extend beyond the corresponding 
journal-box constructed in accordance with 
ends of the sleeve 4, are provided with in 
the present invention. Fig. 2 is a similar 
ternal annular recesses 13, in which are re 
view showing the inner box in elevation. 
ceived the peripheral portions of ball-cups 14. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section through the journal 
Each of the ball-cups 14 is annularin form, 
box. Fig. 4 is an elevation of the outer end 
having an open center, the opening in outer 
of the box, showing the outer casing in sec 
cup l4 containing a disk or plug 20, while the 
tions. Fig. 5 is a plan view showing the col 
inner ball-cup 14 closely embraces the jour 
lar surrounding the journal, the balls, and the 
nal to prevent ingress of foreign matter and 
ball-cups. 
is grooved, as at 15, to form an annular seat 
Similar numerals of reference designate 
or race for the balls 6. The bearing or touch 
corresponding parts in the several figures of 
ing points between the balls 6 and the sleeve 
the drawings. 
4 and between said balls and cups 14 are ar 
The improved bearing contemplated in the 
ranged upon an oblique line, so that while 
present invention is designed to be used in 
said balls take the Weight placed upon the 
connection with the ordinary journal-box 
journal-box they also prevent the sleeve 4 
casing in use at the present time and is in 
from contacting with the cups 14 at each end, 
a space 16 being always preserved between 
tended to be substituted in lieu of the usual 
brasses and packing, &c., although, if desired, 
the ends of the sleeve 4 and said ball-cups. 
a new casing may be employed. 
At its inner end the sleeve 4 is extended to 
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates the 
form a circumferential flange 17, lying inside 
journal of a car-axle, which, for the purpose 
of the balls and serving to prevent the ad 
of carrying out the present invention, is lon 
mission of dust, dirt, and foreign matter there 
gitudinally grooved, as at 2, to receive ribs 
to. One or more annular pads or oil-conduc 
or keys 3 upon the inside of a bearing sleeve 
tors 18 surround the sleeve 4 inside of the box 
or collar 4, fitting closely around the journal. 
9 and lie adjacent to the balls, said pads serv 
The sleeve 4 thus keyed to the journal is pro 
ing to take up the oil within the space 10, 
vided at each end with an annular groove 5, 
which forms an oil-receptacle, and conduct 
such grooves forming ball-races in which cir 
the same to and distribute it evenly upon such 
cular series of antifriction-balls 6 travel. 
The lubricant is supplied to the space 
balls. 
45 
 
2 
580,498 
10 through an opening 19 in the Outer end of 
the box. 9, adjacent to one of its upper cor 
The box 9 at its inner end has a cen 
ners. 
tral opening which Snugly receives the jour 
nal and is also provided with a somewhat 
larger opening in its outer end. A removable 
disk or plug 20 is screwed into the central 
opening in the Outer ball-cup 14 for render 
ing the outer end of the bearing dirt-proof. 
This disk or plug may be quickly removed 
for giving access to the balls and journal. - 
The outer case 21 of the journal-box may 
be of any ordinary form, but is preferably 
constructed in two parts and bolted together, 
which facilitates the casting of the same and 
the inclusion of the inner box 9. 
22 designates a pair of bearing-plates ar 
ranged inside and at the top and bottom of 
the casing 21. These bearing-plates about 
correspond in dimensions to the top and bot 
tom of the casing 21 and are provided upon 
their adjacent faces with longitudinal grooves 
23, in which are placed longitudinal series of 
antifriction-balls 23, said balls also travel 
ing in longitudinal grooves 24 in the top and 
bottom Walls of the inner box 9, which is ap 
proximately square or rectangular in cross 
Section upon the outside. 
One, two, or more rows of balls may be em 
ployed at both the top and bottom of the in 
ner box. 9, and provision is thus made for the 
end thrust of the axle-journal, caused by the 
car suddenly striking a curve. 
Suitable stops or lugs 25 upon the inside of 
the outer casing 21 may be employed to hold 
the plates 22 in their proper position. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that by making inner box 9 in two sec 
tions or halves when the same are brought to 
gether they will embrace the ball-cups 14 and 
hold the same in place, thus avoiding the ne 
cessity for screw-threading the parts. 
It will also be seen that the journalis mount 
ed on balls Within the inner box and that the 
latter in turn is supported upon balls within 
the Outer casing. The inner box admits of 
the free rotation of the journal with a mini 
mum amount of friction, and said box is also 
adapted to slide bodily and longitudinally 
Within the outer casing for accommodating 
end thrust. This greatly reduces the draft of 
a train of cars. A limited supply of oil will 
last a long period of time, as it is kept clean, 
and the admission of foreign matter to the 
bearing Will be to a great degree prevented. 
It Will be understood that the several parts 
of the bearing are susceptible of changes in 
the form, proportion, and minor details of 
construction, which may accordingly be re 
sorted to Without departing from the spirit or 
sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
vention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. The combination with a journal and an 
Outer case inclosing the journal, of a bearing 
sleeve made fast on the journal and provided 
at its opposite ends with ball-races, an inner 
bearing-box surrounding the sleeve and hav 
ing closed end portions and a Series of longi 
tudinal grooves formed respectively in the ex 
terior upper and lowerfaces thereof, said in 
ner bearing-box lying entirely within the 
outer case and shorter in length than the lat 
ter to permit of the relative longitudinal play 
of the box and case, separate ball-cups ar 
ranged entirely inside of the inner bearing 
box within the closed end portions thereof, 
bearing-balls interposed between the ball 
cups and the adjacent races of the bearing 
sleeve, bearing-plates fitted within the top 
and bottom of the outer case and provided 
with a plurality of longitudinal grooves ar 
ranged opposite the corresponding grooves of 
the inner bearing-box, and antifriction-balls 
arranged in said longitudinal grooves, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with a journal and an 
outer case inclosing the same, of a bearing 
sleeve made fast on the journal and provided 
at each end with annular ball grooves or 
races, the inner end of the sleeve being ex 
tended to form a circumferential flange, an 
inner bearing-box supported within the outer 
case, annular ball-cups fitted within the ends 
of the inner bearing-box and having their 
grooved faces opposed to the adjacent grooves 
or races in the ends of the sleeve, the inner 
of said ball-cups overlapping the adjacent 
circumferential flange of the sleeve, a disk or 
plug removably fitted in the opening of the 
outer ball-cup beyond the end of the journal, 
and a circular series of bearing-balls arranged 
in the races provided therefor at the ends of 
the sleeve, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination with a journal, of a 
sleeve made fast on the journal and provided 
at its ends with ball-races, a bearing-box in 
closing the sleeve and carrying within its ends 
ball-cups lying opposite said ball grooves or 
races, said bearing-box being pierced at one 
end by a lubricating-opening communicating 
with the space between the sleeve and the 
box, a circular series of bearing-balls arranged 
in the races at the ends of the sleeve, and 
annular oil-conducting pads encircling the 
sleeve and resting at one edge against the 
bearing-balls in the oppositely-located races, 
substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination with a journal, of a 
bearing-sleeve fast thereon and provided at 
each end with ball-races, annular ball-cups 
opposing said races, antifriction-balls therein, 
and a box surrounding said sleeve and pro 
Vided with annular recesses at each end and 
at an intermediate point, the end recesses be 
ing adapted to embrace and hold the ball 
Cups in place, and the intermediate recess be 
ing provided with a band extending entirely 
around it and forming a bearing for an inter 
mediate series of balls, said box being also 
formed in Separable sections adjustable rela 
tively to each other, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
9o 
95 
OC) 
O 
II 5 
I 25 
 
580,498 
8 
5. The combination with a journal, of a 
bearing-sleeve made fast on the journal and 
provided at its ends with ball-races, a bearing 
box surrounding the sleeve and provided 
with closed end portions and with an interior 
annular groove intermediate of its ends, ball 
cups arranged within the closed end portions 
of the bearing-box, bearing-balls arranged in 
the races therefor at the ends of the sleeve 
and bearing-box, a metallic band extending 
entirely around the intermediate groove of 
I. ? 
 
the bearing-box, and separate series of inter 
mediately-located balls working in said inter 
mediate groove against the metallic band 
therein, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
TRUMAN C. LEWIS. 
Witnesses: 
S. S. Fox, 
H. EDMUND HILL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580598.txt	, 
(No Model.) 
a 
- 
No. 580,598, 
 
W. S., ELLIOTT, 
ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE, 
3 sheeta-sheet 1 
Patented Apr. 13, 1897, 
I, 
AEIAA 
97.932 O. 
N2 Finch S4 
III, II 
affiti. 
it launchisis 
2 
2 
Z// TT. A A. H2A 
N S 
N t 
 2NS 
2S 
N 
Io 
S. 
3 
2. 
% 
2 
3 2 
Hitti II is 
2 
T 
er 
O 
2 
N 
2 ra 
2 
2 2 
3|||| 
2 
2 
2 
2 
ISS 
2 
2 
2 
2 
N 2 SN 
3.22L. 
Y 
O 
ETV 72-2S e. 
esa 
R.I.V. 
p. x 
i? ties 
it?aesses: 
- 
432i2:26. 
(No Model.) 
No. 580,598, 
 
W. S., ELLIOTT, 
ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 13, 1897, 
 
(No Model.) 
W. S. ELLIOTT, 
ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 580,598, 
Patented Apr. 13, 1897, 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAMS, ELLIOTT, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ELECTRIC O COMOTIVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,598, dated April 13, 1897. 
Application filed June 27, 1896, 
Serial No. 597,104 (No model.) 
To all, whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. S. ELLIOTT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Pitts 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented or discovered a 
neW and useful Improvement in Electric Lo 
comotives, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this application, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved 
railway-truck and driving mechanism, the 
bolster being removed and the motor and its 
driving-spindle being shown in section. Fig. 
2 is a side elevation thereof. Fig. 3 is a side 
elevation of the upper part of the truck-frame 
and the motor removed from the lower truck. 
Fig. 4 is a similar view of the lower truck. 
Fig. 5 is a Vertical longitudinal section on 
the line V V of Fig. 1. Fig. 6 illustrates in 
side elevation a modified construction adapt. 
ed to a four-wheel truck. Fig. 7 is a diagram 
matic View illustrating in side elevation a 
further modification, the truck-frame being 
removed, Such as Would be used on six-wheel 
trucks or six-wheel locomotives using two 
motors to drive three axles. Fig. 8 is a view 
in side elevation, showing a similar arrange 
ment of wheels which may be used to pre 
vent derailment should the wheel-base be 
less than the gage of the track. Fig. 9 is a 
detached plan view illustrating in detail a 
modification in the manner of driving fric 
tion-gear. 
Similar numerals of reference refer to like 
parts wherever used throughout this specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
electric locomotives and trucks for electric 
railways, and refers particularly to the man 
ner in which the motor is mounted on its sup 
porting-framework and to the means by which 
Variations in the Superimposed load may be 
provided for and the amount of frictional 
contact of the driving mechanism controlled 
and utilized, together with such driving mech 
anism as shall now be more particularly de 
scribed and claimed. 
Referring to the drawings, 22 are the car 
wheels, secured to the axles 3, having suit 
able bearings in the usual boxes 4, mounted 
in housings 5, set upon the side members 6, 
25 
35 
45 
which may be of any preferred construction, 
as I-beams, channels, box-girders, or forgings. 
The housings 5 are secured to the members 6 
by bolts 7, so as to permit of longitudinal ad 
justment thereon, and right and left hand 
threaded screws 8 are secured in bosses 9 on 
the inner sides of the housings, a turnbuckle 
or nut 10 engaging their ends by which the 
opposite housings, and consequently the boxes 
4 and axles 3, mounted therein, may be ad 
justed toward or from each other. 
The upper or secondary independent frame 
11, serving to support the motor and car-body, 
is constructed, preferably, of Wrought metal, 
and at the middle portion of each side are 
suitable housings 13 for the boxes 14, in which 
are journaled the ends of the driving-disk 
shaft 15. Longitudinal upper brace mem 
bers 17 serve to strengthen the sides of the 
frame II in the manner of a truss, the parts 
being held securely together by bolts or rivets. 
Two longitudinal members 1818 are support 
ed from the ends of the frame 11 by bolts 19, 
having upper and lower equalizing-springs 
20, arranged in the usual manner, and upon 
these members 18 is mounted the driving-mo 
tor A. 
It is obvious that the longitudinal mem 
bers 18 may be made integral with the motor 
frame or fields, if desired. 
Extensions 21 of the outer bolts 7' project 
upwardly through the frame 11 and 17, pro 
vided with cushioning-springs 22, and serve 
to retain the upper truck-frame against un 
due movement in its relation to the lower 
truck. 
The armature 23 of the motor A is secured 
to a hollow spindle 24, surrounding the driv 
ing-disk shaft 15, the spindle resting in bear 
ings 25 at each end, secured to the suspended 
longitudinal members 18, in which bearings 
it is free to rotate within the fields and in 
closing case. Crank-disks 26 are secured to 
outer ends of the spindle 24, closely adjacent 
to similar coupling-disks 27, secured to the 
shaft 15, and a crank-pin 28, secured to the 
disk 26, projects into a hole 29 in the disk 27 
of considerably larger diameter than the di 
ameter of the pin, the excess of space being 
filled with a flexible cushioning substance 12, 
allowing for variations in a linement of the 
spindle and shaft, the internal diameter of the 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
2 
- 
580,598 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
spindle being made proportionately greater 
than that of the shaft 15, leaving a space 30 
for the same purpose. If preferred, any other 
desired form of flexible connection may be 
employed between the shaft 15 and hollow 
spindle 24, such as a pin or key, and I desire 
to include such alternative construction with 
in the scope of my invention. 
As a means of transmission of power from 
the motor through the spindle 24 and disks 26 
and 27, to the car-wheels I employ friction 
disks 31, secured to the ends of the shaft 15 
or made integral with the coupling-disk 27, 
such disks 31 bearing upon the faces of the 
wheels 2 and transmitting rotary motion to 
them by frictional contact, resulting in their 
rotation and consequent movement of the car. 
I have shown in Fig. 9 a modified construc 
tion in which special friction-wheels 32 are 
employed, secured to the axles 3, as is cus 
tomary with the usual pinion-gearing com 
monly employed, or the wheels may be made 
integral with the car-wheel, if desired. This 
construction has the advantage of freedom 
from uneven wear, to which the car-wheels 
are subject by reason of brake action and 
wear upon the rail, while the width of the 
wheel 32 may be increased, if desired, and 
kept true and clean for the purposes in view. 
A suitable bolster-frame 33 is mounted 
upon springs 34, resting in nests 35 on the 
upper side of the frame 17, upon which the 
upper structure of the car may be supported 
in any desired or preferred manner. This 
bolster is provided at each end with down 
wardly-projecting draft-bearing extensions 
16, fitting between lugs 37 on the inside of 
the frame 11, thereby insuring a positive con 
nection between the bolster and the truck 
frame, while allowing of vertical movement 
upon the springs 34, the extensions being cut 
out at 38 to allow axle-space. When so mount 
ed in place, it will be seen that the Weight: 
of the car and motor and the upper frame 
work will be transmitted through the boxes 
14 to the disks 31, which bear directly against 
the wheels 2 or 32, the amount of friction be 
ing thereby automatically regulated by the 
varying weight of the car and its contents, 
so as to be greater or less in proportion to 
the greater or less power required to propel 
the car. 
In cars employing but four wheels, as shown 
in Fig. 6, each motor-shaft is set in close prox 
imity to the front and back wheels, respec 
tively, and the friction-disks bear upon but 
one wheel, being held securely to the work 
by housings 36. 
Instrucks or electric locomotives employ 
ing three sets of wheels, two driving shafts 
and axles may be used, being located between 
the Wheels, as in Fig. 7, the center wheel be 
ing proportionately large, as shown, so that 
the angular relation between the center of 
the driving - disks and that of the driven 
wheels, varying with the varying diameters 
of the wheels in contact with the driving 
wheel, will cause the driving-disks to bear 
with varying pressures upon the respective 
wheels, so that each wheel will present ap 
proximately the same total amount of fric 
tion. 
Fig. 8 shows an arrangement that may be 
employed when it is necessary to mount the 
car-body as low as possible, necessitating the 
use of small car-wheels. In such cases the 
wheel-base of the driven wheels may be less 
than the width of the track, under which con 
ditions the liability to derailment would be 
great at high speeds. In order to overcome 
this, I use a third set of wheels 39 as pilot 
wheels or guides, so as to increase my Wheel 
base to suit the conditions, the driving shaft 
and disk 31 being located between any two 
of the wheels so arranged. 
It is obvious that my construction of truck 
and principle of transmission of power by 
friction may be applied to and utilized in 
many other forms of wheeled vehicles-as, for 
instance, in electric cranes, hoisting and Con 
veying apparatus, &c.-and all such varia 
tions are to be considered as within the scope 
of my invention. 
The advantages of my invention will be ap 
preciated by those skilled in the art, as by its 
use I am enabled to dispense with the usual 
toothed gearing and gear-cases, which are ob 
jectionable on account of noise, Wear, and 
consequent expense of renewal, whereas by 
my arrangement of friction - disks there is 
very little wear, while the operation is com 
paratively noiseless, very simple and direct, 
and not likely to get out of order. 
Changes and modifications may be made 
by the skilled mechanic in the shape and ar 
rangement of the truck and location of the 
driving mechanism, and I do not desire to be 
limited to the construction shown in the draw 
ings, but to include any equivalent therefor. 
Having described my invention and in what 
manner it is constructed and operates, What 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a truck-frame comprising an upper 
motor and car - supporting framework, and 
friction driving mechanism supported upon 
the wheels; and a lower framework provided 
with housings and car-axle boxes mounted 
in the housings, means for adjusting the 
housings toward or from each other, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. A car-truck frame comprising longitu 
dinal side members provided with housings, 
axle-boxes mounted in the housings, an up 
per framework provided with journal-boxes 
in the side members forming bearings for a 
power-shaft, longitudinal motor-supporting 
members suspended from the frame, and a 
power-shaft provided with friction - disks 
bearing on the faces of the supporting-wheels, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. A car-truck frame comprising longitu 
dinal side members provided with housings, 
axle-boxes mounted in the housings, an upper 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
I O5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
580,598 
45 
55 
75 
ture shaft, crank-disks secured to each end of 
the armature-shaft, a power-shaft passing 
through the armature-shaft, clearance-space 
between the power-shaft and the armature 
shaft, disks secured to the power-shaft, and 
crank-pins secured to the crank-disk project 
ing into cushioned holes in the power-shaft 
disks of a larger diameter than the diameter 
of the crank-pins, Substantially as set forth. 
8. In an electric car-truck or locomotive, 
the combination there with of a motor flexibly 
suspended or supported therefrom or thereon, 
a hollow armature-shaft, a power-shaft pass 
ing through the hollow armature-shaft and 
flexibly connected thereto, friction-disks se 
cured to the power-shaft and resting on the 
faces of the supporting-wheels of the truck, 
in a plane parallel with that of the wheels, 
the friction existing between the power-disks, 
and the supporting-wheels being created by 
the weight of the car-motor and supporting 
frame and utilized as a means to transmit the 
power developed by the motor to the wheels 
for the purpose of propelling the car, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
9. In an electric locomotive the combination 
of the truck, the motor suspended therefrom, 
longitudinal side members located below the 
truck provided with adjustable housings, 
axle-boxes mounted in the housings, a power 
shaft journaled in bearings in the upper 
framework flexibly connected with a hollow 
armature-shaft provided with friction-disks 
bearing on the faces of the truck-Supporting 
wheels, and an independent motor-support 
ing frame supported from the upper frame 
work, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 17th day of June, 1896. 
WILLIAM. S. ELLIOTT. 
Witnesses: 
PETER J. EDWARDS, 
C. M. CLARKE. 
IC 
framework provided with journal-boxes in 
the side members forming bearings for a 
power-shaft, longitudinal motor-supporting 
members suspended from the frame, and a 
bolster supported upon springs resting on the 
rectangular frame, with downwardly-project 
ing draft-bearings embraced by the frame 
work, substantially as set forth. 
4. In combination with a car-truck frame 
Comprising longitudinal side members, pro 
vided with housings, axle-boxes mounted in 
the housings, an upper framework provided 
With journal-boxes in the side members form 
ing bearings for a power-shaft, and longitu 
dinal motor-supporting members suspended 
from the frame; a hollow armature-shaft and 
a driving-shaft flexibly connected therewith, 
and having friction-disks mounted on its ends 
bearing against the faces of the supporting 
Wheels of the truck, substantially asset forth. 
5. In combination with a truck, a hollow ar 
mature-shaft provided with a crank-disk, a 
driving-shaft mounted within the hollow shaft 
carrying a friction-disk, and a crank-pin pro 
jecting from the crank-disk into a cavity in 
the friction-disk, with a resilient interposing 
packing Surrounding the pin, Substantially as 
set forth. 
6. In combination with a car-truck frame 
comprising longitudinal side members pro 
vided with housings, axle-boxes mounted in 
the housings, an upper framework provided 
With journal-boxes in the side members form 
ing bearings for a power-shaft, and longitu 
dinal motor-supporting members suspended 
from the frame; a hollow armature-shaft, a 
power-shaft passing through the armature 
shaft bearing friction-disks at each end, with 
a flexible connection between the armature 
crank-disk and the power-shaft, substantially 
as set forth. 
7. In combination with a truck and a mo 
tor suspended therefrom, a hollow arma 
3o 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580698.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 580,698. 
 
C. G. LAMBERT, 
CORN POPPER, 
Patented Apr. 13, 1897. 
fy 
 
 
2ezze,6 e 6%zesz 
3v-uovo. 
C227e/Zee (2, Zazzeze-Z 
poro-Litho...washingtoN, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIARENCE G. LAMBERT, OF BLOOMINGTON, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO OSCAR S. WINTON, OF SAME PLACE. 
CORN POPPER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,698, dated April 13, 1897. 
Application filed September 25, 1896, Serial No. 606,921 (No model.) 
To all whom, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, CLARENCE. G. LAMBERT, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Bloomington, in the county of McLean and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Corn-Poppers; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, which will enable others skilled in 
the art to Which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, which form a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to corn-poppers; and 
its object is to provide an improved imple 
ment for popping corn, which shall possessim 
portant advantages with respect to efficiency 
in use. 
The invention consists, essentially, in the 
novel construction and combination of parts 
hereinafter fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of a corn-popper constructed in 
accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
longitudinal section of the same, showing the 
corn-receptacle open, so as to allow it to be 
filled and emptied. Fig. 3 is a detail view 
showing the pivoted slotted catch. Fig. 4 is 
a detail view showing the manner of forming 
the support. 
In the said drawings the reference-numeral 
1 designates a hollow handle, to which is se 
cured a rod 2, having its outer end bent down 
Wardly, horizontally, and upwardly and its 
extremity twisted around the same, forming 
two inclined arms 33 and a horizontal arm 4, 
which serve as supports for the device. Jour 
naled on this rod is a rotatable corn-recepta 
cle which is also movable up and down on said 
rod. This receptacle consists of two end disks 
or heads 5 and a cylindrical casing 6, of wire 
gauze. The outer one of these heads is re 
movable, while the other or inner one is se 
cured to the casing. Secured to said inner 
head is a wire 7, which is wound spirally 
around said rod and extending to the handle 
and its end coiled around the rod at that point. 
Mounted on said rod is a slide 9, formed with 
a spiral groove with which the spiral wire en 
gages. It is also provided with a handle 10. 
Pivoted to the inner end of said handle is a 
catch or stop 12, formed With an open slot 13. 
The operation is as follows: To open the 
corn - receptacle to fill it with corn to be 
popped, the catch 12 is turned to one side, so 
that the spiral rod can be pushed down into 
the hollow handle, drawing the corn-recep 
tacle away from the outer end of the rod, so 
that the outer head can be removed. After 
the corn has been placed in the receptacle the 
latter is pushed outward until the removable 
head comes in contact with the support at the 
outer end of the rod, which will hold the head 
in its closed position. The pivoted catch is 
then pushed inward or closed, so that the 
inner end of the spiral will abut against the 
same. By now reciprocating the slide back 
and forth the corn-receptacle will be alter 
nately rotated in opposite directions, thus 
causing the corn therein to be agitated or 
tumbled about, so that it will all be properly 
popped. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. In a corn-popper, the combination with 
the hollow handle, the rod secured thereto, 
the rotatable and movable corn-receptacle 
and the removable head, of the spiral rodse 
cured to said receptacle, the slotted and piv 
oted catch and the slide having a spiral 
groove; substantially as described. 
2. In a corn-popper the combination with 
the hollow handle, the rod secured thereto, 
having its end bent downwardly, horizontally, 
and upwardly forming a Support and the ro 
tatable and movable corn-receptacle having 
a removable head, of the spiral rod secured 
to said receptacle, the slotted and pivoted 
catch and the slide having an annular groove; 
substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CLARENCE. G. LAMBERT. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. G. WELCH, 
FRED M. BARBER, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
go 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580798.txt	(No Model.) 
J. F. PARKER 
CASH INDICATOR AND REGISTER, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 580,798. 
Patented Apr. 13, l897, 
 
3.27. & 
A 
WITNESSES 
7%06-tea?e& 
4-c. 1754-2-2- 
INVENTOR 
76/27z A. Azz76ez 
"772max (...) 
ATTORAEYS. 
| 
 
(No Model.) 
J. F. PARKER 
CASE INDICATOR AND REGISTER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 580,798. 
Patented Apr. 3, 1897. 
 
27, 2. 
s 2 
2 
A. 3. 
 
2 
P N 
N 
INVENTOR 
76/7. A. Zaz776e?: 
"774 welv (a 
ATTORNEYS, 
WITNESSES 
7%&a. 
-shaz/725,24-7- 
 
THE NORRIS PETERS co, PHOTO-LITHo, wash. Noto oc 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 3. 
J. F. PARKER 
CASH INDICATOR AND REGISTER, 
u22.5. 
C 
3 
No. 580,798. 
 
 
Patented Apr. 13, 1897, 
C-East/E 
WITNESSES 
up, 2-7774% 
m 
s S S S S. S 
U/o/zza A , Az76er. 
INVENIOR 
BY 
ATTORAWEYS. 
oras PETERs co, PHOTO-Litho., washingtoN, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. PAR, KER, OF MICP II ER SON, IKANSA S. 
CAS - NCASO R A N 
REC SER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,798, dated April 13, 1897. 
Application filed September 23, 1896, Serial No. 606,762, (No model.) 
To all whon, it inva? conce7n: 
Be it known that I, JOHN F. PARKER, of 
McPherson, in the county of McPherson and 
State of Kansas, have invented a new and Ilm 
proved Cash Indicator and Register, of which 
the following is a specification. 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
a comparatively simple machine for register 
ing all individual sales and cash receipts from 
One cent upward and also for indicating the 
total amount of sales and receipts. 
In the accompanying drawings, (three 
sheets,) Figure 1 is a perspective view of the 
apparatus. Fig. 2 is an enlarged vertical sec 
tion on line 11 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3, Sheet 2, is a 
front view of the indicating and adding wheels 
and adjunctive devices. Fig. 4 is a central 
section of the adding-wheels. Fig. 5 is a 
side view of one of the cog or adding wheels 
that operate the indicating-wheels. Fig. (3 
is a vertical section showing a cog or adding 
wheel and a toothed carrying-wheel that en 
gages and rotates it intermittently or step by 
step. Fig. 7 is a vertical section of the cog 
and adding wheel of the units-column. Fig. 
S is a side view of the top portion of a rod 
thatlocks mechanism for locking adding and 
indicating wheels. Fig. 9 is a horizontal 
section or in effect a top plan view of part 
of such locking mechanism. Fig. 10 is a 
front view of said locking mechanism. Fig. 
ll is a central Section of one of the indicat 
ing-wheels. Fig. 12 is a sectional view of the 
air-check. 
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the broad flat 
base of the register contains a sliding drawer 
K, that is automatically pushed out by a 
spring K when released by a locking-catch 
J' K'. The casing, composing the upright 
portion or body of the register, contains in 
its upper portion a series of indicating-wheels 
C, having their peripheries inscribed with fig 
tures 1 to 0, which may be seen through 
a horizontal slot, Cl, in the face or front of the 
casing. The said wheels Care mounted loose 
On a transverse rod c', which is fixed in the 
parallel arms of a rocking frame G., pivoted 
at G'. Each wheel C has ten lateral pins or 
teeth. 
Below and slightly in rear of the wheels C, 
Figs. 2 and 3, is arranged a series of wheels 
B, having toothed or scalloped edges. Fol 
convenience they will be hereinafter termed 
cog-wheels, since they are practically such. 
They have ten teeth, corresponding to those 
of wheels C. 
In the body or enlarged lower portion of 
the register-casing al'e arranged the large 
counting-wheels A, which are mounted rota 
tably on a central transverse shaft A' and 
whose toothed peripheries are visible through 
vertical slots (t' in the casing. The digits 
1 to 9 are inscribed on the casing-front 
alongside the slots (t', as shown. The teeth 
of said wheels A engage the cog-wheels 13, 
which in turn engage the lateral pins of the 
indicating - wheels C and thus rotate the 
latter. 
The wheels A al'e rotated by placing a fin 
ger in One of the peripheral notches and push 
ing down until such finger comes in contact 
With the edge A* of the casing. If the finger 
be placed in a notch of the right-hand or units 
wheel, which notch is opposite the figure 3, 
the said wheel will rotate the indicating-wheel 
C, which it engages, three-tenths of a revo 
lution, and hence the figure 3 will appear 
in the units place in the upper slot (t. Each 
cog-wheel B is so arranged as to lap on the 
side of an indicating-wheel C and normally 
engages the pins projecting laterally from the 
same. Such engagement can obviously be 
destroyed by rocking the frame G and thus 
raising the Wheels C, which is effected by 
mechanism hereinafter described. 
As shown in Fig. 3, there is a series of add 
ing-wheels B, B, and B", peripherally in 
scribed with figures from l to 0 and ar 
ranged between the cog-wheels B on the same 
shaft B. The wheels B and B are loose on 
the shaft, but B is attached to the side of the 
right-hand ol' unit wheel B and hence rotates 
with it. Between but above the adding 
wheels B BIB and on a separate shaft Rare 
arranged five-pointed carrying-wheels R. 
Each adding-Wheel has a single pin on One 
side fol' engaging a counting-wheel R. Once in 
each rotation, and all the adding-wheels save 
the units-wheel have ten pins on the side op 
posite that on Which such single pin is placed. 
There are also ten pilus on the inner part of 
the adding-wheels of the tens, hundreds, and 
tens-of-hundreds column, as shown is Fig. 4. 
It is apparent if the wheel B be rotated com 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
580,798 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
pletely its single pin B will strike a tooth of 
Wheel E, and rotate it one space or one-fifth 
of a revolution, and thereby the wheel R will 
rotate also the adjacent adding-wheel Bone 
space, thus registering the ten carried. It is 
thus seen that the cog-wheel B, except when 
rotated by the corresponding wheel A, re 
mains stationary. When the adding-wheel 
corresponding to it is rotated, the ten pins on 
the inner side of the adding-wheel, acting in 
conjunction with the pawl B", allow the add 
ing-wheel to rotate one notch without mov 
ing the cog-wheel, yet the adding-wheels are 
always ready to move with the cog-wheel 
which works between their parts. 
A spring R*, Fig. 7, holds the carrying 
wheels R from accidental rotation. 
In Fig. 2I illustrate the mechanism for lock 
ing the wheels A B C. It consists of the foll 
lowing parts: An obtuse-angle lever Q is piv 
oted at Q. Within the casing and its free end 
projects through a slot in the latter, as shown 
in Fig. 1. A link or connecting-bar D is piv 
oted to the inner end of said lever () and its 
lower end is provided with a lengthwise slot 
(), having a lateral Offset at its upper end. 
The side of the bar D has a swell or enlarge 
ment opposite said offset for a purpose pres 
ently Stated. A rotary disk E is mounted on 
a journal E' and provided with a pin D", that 
projects into the aforesaid slot q. A vertical 
rod Or bar F is pivoted at its respective ends 
to the disk E and a rocking frame G, (see Fig. 
3,) in which the shaft c', carrying wheels C, is 
journaled. Said frame G is pivoted on a 
transverse shaft G'. It is now apparent that 
when the free end of lever Q is depressed 
the disk E will be rotated a part of a revolu 
tion, owing to engagement of the offset of slot, 
q with the pin D'. 
It is further apparent 
that by this operation the frame G will be 
rocked and its front end raised and the indi 
Cating-Wheels C thereby taken out of engage 
ment With the cog-wheels B, so that wheels C 
may be automatically rotated back to O 
by the Volute springs S, one of which is at 
tached to the hub c and S' of each wheel, as 
shown in Fig. 2. 
When the frame G is raised, as stated, the 
slotted end of link D is automatically thrown 
Or pushed laterally by engagement of its 
swelled portion with a fixed pin D, and thus 
the disk-frame G is free to drop to its normal 
position. 
Another operation and result simultane 
ously effected by depressing the lever () is 
the following: A lever I, Fig. 2, having its 
inner end weighted and provided with a notch 
i, is pivoted on a pin I* and has a slot-and 
pin connection at i* with the rod MI' of a pis 
ton (see Fig. 12) that slides in an air-cylin 
der M. The said piston has an aperture that 
allows slow passage of air, and the screw M18 
in the end of the Stein or rod M regulates the 
exhaust Or escape of air, so that the move 
ment of the level I may be regulated at will. 
In practice the regulation is such as to re 
quire about fifteen seconds for the level to 
return to its in O'nal Ol' uppermost position. 
The piston or valve, Fig. 12, sliding in cylin 
del M is composed of a leather disk M, Se 
cured between two smaller metal disks NE 
Ni. The upward movement of the piston is 
twisted or checked by the compression of the 
air above it. The tapered screw M regulates 
escape of air through a diaphragm Ni" and the 
lateral orifice 1". A link Ei connects said 
level I with the disk E through the medium 
of a pin II", that works free in a slot of the 
level. 
A vertical locking and trip rod L. Figs. 2 and 
S, is slidable in brackets and provided with 
a pin L, that rests on the level I, whereby 
the rod L is supported. The upper cnct of 
the rod is beveled and works in a slot or open 
ing in a shelf or bracket N and in frictional 
contact with one of a series of pivoted lock 
ing-disks N', that are arranged flatwise, side 
by side, on said shelf N. These disks N' lock 
the levers P, which in turn lock the cog 
wheels B, the said levers being pivoted ver 
tically at P and provided with rolle's P', 
that work in direct contact with the Wheels 
B and thus serve as rolling pawls. The free 
lower ends of the level's EP Work in transverse 
slots of the shelf N, as shown in Fig. 9, and 
are held in normal locking position, Figs. 2 
and 9, by springs P, attached to frame P. 
The disk E is connected by a rod J with a 
pivoted catch J', that engages a shoulder. K' 
on the drawer K. A spring J'aids gravity 
in holding the said catch Securely engaged 
with such shoulder K'. 
A rsum of the operation of the register 
So far as described is as follows: It may be 
Supposed a Sale has been made and that a 
number indicating the amount received ap 
peal's through the slot C in the casing. Then 
when the lever () is depressed for the purpose 
of registering the new or present sale the fol 
lowing operations and results occur practi 
cally simultaneously: The disk E rotates 
about one-fourth of a revolution. The Od 
F rocks the frame G and thus raises the indi 
cating-wheels C out of engagement with the 
cog-wheels IB, so that the splings S may ro 
tate wheels C back to their initial position, 
which is determined by engagement of their 
peripheral projections T, Fig. 2, with a stop 
bar T", extending the length of frame G. 
This movement of wheels C obviously de 
stroys the indication of the amount previ 
ously taken in. The rotation of disk E also 
depresses the inner end of the lever through 
the medium of bar H and pin II' and causes 
engagement of the locking Spring-pressed an 
gle-pawl II with the notch i in the weighted 
end of the lever. It also laises catch J' and 
releases the casii-drawer K, whose spring Is 
forces it out, and thereby leaves the trip-rod 
L free to slide downward, which releases 
disks N', that in turn release levers P, and 
thus allows freedom of rotation to the cog 
Wheels B and connecting-wheels A. The cash 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
IOC 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
580,798 
3 
o 
25 
45 
55 
received may then be registered by Operating 
one or more of the wheels A, as Will be un 
derstood from previous description. It will 
be seen the angle-catch H, Fig. 2, is tripped 
and releases lever I by means of the pawl II, 
with which the teeth of one of the counting 
wheels A Work in contact. The pawl acts on 
a pivoted trip-bar II, which extends the en 
tire width of the casing, parallel to the front 
of the latter. Thus the first movement of any 
One of the counting-wheels. A releases level 
and allows its spring I to return it to its no 
mal position. Thus, in brief, by pressing 
down the lever Q the registration of the pre 
vious sale is canceled, the working mechan 
ism released, and the cash-drawer opened all 
tomatically by the spring K. After the de 
sired new registration has been effected the 
drawer K is to be closed manually, which will 
force trip-rod L up to its normal position and 
thus again lock the entire Working mechan 
ism; but a careless or dishonest clerk may 
leave the cash - drawer open, and to guard 
against this result, and thus prevent use of 
the previous registration or a part of it to ap 
ply or add to the present or new sale, I en 
ploy automatic mechanism which locks the 
Working parts within fifteen seconds-that 
is to say, the valve-rod M moves upward and 
thus raises the slotted end of lever I, which 
forces trip-rod L up to its locking position. 
The time within which this is done may be 
varied, of course, by adjusting the screw Mi', 
but fifteen seconds is ample to allow the op 
erator to register a cash-receipt. 
What I claim is 
1. In a cash-register, the combination of the 
notched, manually-operated counting-wheels, 
the cog-wheels engaging them, the indicating 
Wheels engaging said cog-wheels, a rocking 
support or frame in which the indicating 
wheels are mounted, means for rotating the 
indicating-wheels backward to Zero, when re 
leased from engagement with the cog-wheels, 
and the mechanism for rocking the aforesaid 
frame, composed of a pivoted, depressible 
finger-lever, and devices connecting its inner 
end with the frame, substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. In a cash-register, the combination of the 
notched, manually-operated counting-wheels, 
the cog-wheels engaging them, the indicating 
Wheels engaging Said cog-wheels, a rocking 
support or frame in which the indicating 
wheels are mounted, means for rotating the 
indicating-wheels backward to Zero, when re 
leased from engagement. With the cog-wheels, 
the pivoted, depressible finger-lever, a link or 
bar pivoted to its free end, and a rotatable 
disk having a pin engaging such link, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
3. In a cash-register, the combination with 
the notched, manually - operated counting 
Wheels, cog-wheels engaging the latter, and 
adding-Wheels arranged alongside the cog 
Wheels, carrying-wheels engaging the adding 
Wheels, pivoted lever-pawls which engage the 
 
cog-wheels, pivoted disks which lock the free 
ends of such pawls, and means for automat 
ically locking and releasing said disks, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
4. In a cash-legister, the combination with 
the notched, manually - Operated counting 
wheels, cog-wheels engaging the latter, and 
adding-wheels arranged alongside the cog 
wheels, carrying-Wheels engaging the adding 
wheels, pivoted lever-pawls which engage the 
cog-wheels, pivoted disks which lock the free 
ends of such pawls, a vertically-slidable trip 
bar whose upper end is beveled to adapt it to 
move the disks for locking the pawls, and 
means for raising Said bar to the locking po 
sition, substantially as shown and described. 
5. In a cash-register, the combination with 
the notched, manually - Operated counting 
wheels, cog-Wheels engaging the latter, and 
adding-wheels arranged alongside the cog 
wheels, carrying-wheels engaging the adding 
wheels, ivoted level-pawls which engage the 
cog-wheels, pivoted disks which lock the free 
ends of such pawls, a vertically-slidable trip 
bar whose upper end is beveled to adapt it to 
move the disks for locking the pawls, a piv 
oted, horizontal lever which engages said trip 
bar, the rotatable disk, a slotted link which 
connects such lever and disk, a pivoted de 
pressible finger-lever, and a link or bar piv 
oted to the inner end of the finger-level, and 
having in its lower end a lengthwise slot with 
Offset or lateral extension to receive a lateral 
pin on the aforesaid disk, and a fixed pin or 
abutment for throwing the disk-pin out of the 
offset of the slot, substantially as shown and 
described. 
6. In a cash-register, the combination with 
the notched counting-wheels, cog-wheels, add 
ing and carrying wheels, pivoted pendent 
pawls for locking the cog-wheels, pivoted disks 
for locking the pawls, a vertically-slidable 
trip-rod for locking said disks, a slidable cash 
drawer that supports the trip-rod in normal 
position, and means for locking the drawer 
and releasing and pushing it out, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
7. In a cash-register, the combination with 
the notched counting-wheels, cog-wheels, add 
ing and carrying wheels, pivoted pendent, 
pawls follocking the cog-wheels, pivoted disks 
for locking the pawls, a vertically-slidable 
trip-rod for locking Said disks, a slidable cash 
drawer that Supports the trip-rod in normal 
position, a pivoted catch engaging the drawer, 
a level that SupportS the trip-l'Od, an air-check 
cylinder and valve for regulating the move 
ment of Such lever, and thereby the opera 
tion of the pawl-locking mechanism, Substan 
tially as shown and described. 
S. In a cash-legistel, the combination with 
notched counting-wheels, cog-wheels, adding 
and carrying wheels, mechanism for locking 
he adding and other connected wheels, a trip 
rod forlocking and releasing such mechanism, 
a pivoted horizontal lever for raising the trip 
rod, an air-check for regulating the action of 
95 
OO 
IOS 
7 O 
75 
So 
O 
II5 
2 C. 
I 25 
4. 
580,798 
the wheel-locking mechanism, a rotatable disk, 
a slotted link connecting the latter with the 
trip-rod lever, and a depressible finger-lever 
and slotted link pivoted thereto, for rotating 
such disk, and means for locking and manu 
ally releasing the trip-rod lever, as shown and 
described. 
9. In a cash-register, the combination of 
notched counting-wheels, cog-wheels engag 
ing them, adding-wheels, carrying-wheels, in 
dicating-wheels, springs for reversing the lat 
ter, a pivoted frame in which the indicating 
wheels are mounted, mechanism for locking 
the cog and other connected wheels, a trip 
rod for releasing and relocking such mechan 
O 
ism, a pivoted horizontal level for raising the 
trip-rod, an air cylinder and valve for gov 
erning the movement of such lever, a cash 
drawer and springs for ejecting it, a catch for 
locking it, a depressible lever, a slotted link 
pivoted to the free end of the latter, a rota 
table disk and a slotted link connecting the 
disk with the aforesaid horizontal level, and 
a locking-pawl and manual trip-lever for tilt 
ing such pawl, as shown and described. 
JOHN F. PARIKER. 
Witnesses: 
A. E. DWELLE, 
FREDERICK. C. CHAMPLIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580898.txt	(No Model. ) 
H. F. RAY & M. WICKERS. 
CHURN, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 580,898, 
Patented Apr. 20, 1897. 
 
 
3yfezz-A?toreys, 
Isleptors 
17%/27ze 
2. e 62 ar/6ezs 
 
(No Model.) 
H. F. RAY & M. WICKERS 
CHURN 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 580,898. 
Patented Apr. 20, 1897. 
 
 
I 
A.w 
A. 
Az2S2A 
/2 12262 ean 
SSSSSSSSS sys 
W 
Rs 
IAP 
 
 
 
R 
I 
Y NNSNNS H 
N 
/2 N. Heyyeh a1 
T2 IEEE-In 
as 
ax 
.. 
sis 
 
 
Ipdeplors 
Z22-172ey 
3y 6Zei? /?torpeys, 27.6% 272-275 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY F. RAY AND MYRTLE VICKERS, OF MARION, KENTUCKY. 
CHURN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,898, dated April 20, 1897. 
Application filed June 18, 1896, Serial No. 596,054, (No model.) 
5 
O 
- 
claims. 
To all, whon, it may concern.' 
able stop-blocks 9 to bear against the outer 
Be it known that we, HENRY F. RAY and 
surface of the receptacle, said blocks being 
MYRTLE VICKERS, citizens of the United 
provided with longitudinal slots 10, engaged 
States, residing at Marion, in the county of 
by set-screw's 11, which are threaded in the 
Crittenden and State of Kentucky, have in 
lid. The blocks may be adjusted to suit the 
vented a new and useful Churn, of which the 
diameter of the receptacle. Also arranged 
following is a specification. 
peripherally upon the lid are hooks 12, with 
Our invention relates to churns, and has for 
which are engaged links 13 at the upper ends 
its object to provide a simple, inexpensive, 
of the fastening or guy wires 14, said guy 
and efficient construction and arrangement 
wires being attached at their lower extremi 
of parts whereby the churn tub or receptacle. 
ties to eccentric-hooks 15, mounted upon the 
is mounted, the lid is secured in place thereon, 
base-bars near their extremities. After a link 
and motion is communicated to the dasher, 
at the upper end of each guy-wire is engaged 
the parts being so constructed as to provide 
with one of the hooks 12 the eccentric is turned 
for application to receptacles of differentsizes. 
down to produce the proper tension of the 
Further objects and advantages of this in 
wire, and thus securely fasten the lid upon 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
the receptacle. The operative portions of the 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be 
guy-wires may be shortened to suit the height 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
of the receptacle by engaging different links 
with the hooks 12. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
Secured to the upper side of the lid by 
view of a churn constructed in accordance 
means of a plate 16 is a bracket 17, terminat 
with our invention. Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
ing at its upper end in a vertical guide 18, 
tion of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail view in 
which is in alinement with a guide 19, formed 
perspective of the base, one of the adjustable 
at the center of the plate 16 to receive the 
blocks being shown detached. Fig. 4 is a 
dasher-staff 20, and mounted upon an annu 
similar view of one of the adjustable stops 
lar bearing 21, formed by an upstanding 
for the lid, showing the contiguous portion of 
flange on said plate 16, is a horizontal bevel 
Fig. 5 is a view of a crank adapted. 
the lid. 
pinion 22, which is secured to the dasher-staff 
to be substituted for the operating-lever for 
by means of a transverse pin 23, engaging 
communicating motion to the driving-wheel. 
registering perforations, respectively, in the 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
staff and the hub of the pinion. Projecting 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
laterally from the upper end of the bracket 
lingS. 
is a stub-shaft 24, upon which is mounted a 
The base of the improved churn consists of 
driving - wheel having bevel gear - teeth to 
centrally-intersecting bars 1, provided at 
mesh with the teeth of the pinion 22. 
their extremities with feet or supports 2 and 
Different means may be employed for com 
at intermediate points with adjustable rests 
municating motion to the driving-wheel, such 
3, said rests being designed to supporta churn 
as a lever 25, which is detachably secured by 
receptacle 4 and having stepped upper sides, 
means of bolts 26 to one of the spokes of said 
as shown at 5, to vary the elevation of the 
wheel or a crank, such as that illustrated in 
receptacle. The means for the adjustment 
Fig. 5, which may be substituted for the le 
of said rests, as shown in the drawings, con 
ver. When the lever is in use, a rocking or 
sists of set-screws 6, extending through lon 
oscillatory movement is imparted to the driv 
gitudinal slots 7 in the bars forming the base 
ing-wheel to cause partial rotation alternately 
and engaging the rests. 
in opposite directions of the dasher, whereas 
The lid 8, which is constructed to rest upon 
when the crank is used a continuous rotary 
the upper edge of the receptacle and is pref 
motion in a uniform direction may be im 
erably of larger diameter than the receptacle, 
parted to said wheel. 
in order to extend beyond the exterior sur 
The dasher which we have illustrated in 
face thereof, is provided upon its under sur 
the drawings consists of a series of radial arms 
face, contiguous to its periphery, with adjust- carried by the dasher-staff and arranged an 
25 
35 
45 
so 
 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
380,898 
35 
45 
rests mounted upon said bars to support a 
receptacle, set-screws extending through said 
slots and engaging the rests to secure the lat 
ter at the desired adjustment, a lid carrying 
dasher-operating mechanism, and adjustable 
fastening devices connecting the lid with the 
extremities of the base-bars, substantially as 
specified. 
3. A combined base and receptacle-top for 
churns, the base being provided with a plu 
rality of stepped rests mounted for radial ad 
justment, means for securing the rests at the 
desired adjustment, stop-blocks mounted for 
radial adjustment upon the under side of the 
receptacle-top, means for securing said blocks 
at the desired adjustment, a plurality of flexi 
ble connections between the periphery of the 
receptacle-top and the base beyond the limits 
of the outward movement of said rests, and 
means for adjusting the tension of said con 
nections, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
HENRY F. ERAY. 
MYRTLE WICKERS. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. M. CRIDER, 
W. D. WALLING FORD. 
gularly with relation to the bottom of the re 
ceptacle, the inclination of contiguous arms 
being respectively in opposite directions, 
whereby simultaneous upward and downward 
thrust is imparted to the contents of the re 
ceptacle. 
From the above description it will be seen 
that the construction of the device is simple 
and that the portion constituting our inven 
tion embodying the mechanism, exclusive of 
the receptacle, is applicable to a churn-recep 
tacle either of stone or wood of any ordinary 
size. 
Various changes in the form, proportion, 
and the minor details of construction may be 
resorted to without departing from the spirit 
or sacrificing any of the advantages of this 
invention. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim is 
1. In a churn, the combination of a base, 
stepped receptacle-rests mounted for radial 
adjustment upon the base, means for secur 
ing said rests at the desired adjustment, a lid 
carrying dasher - operating mechanism, and 
flexible connections between the lid and the 
base, substantially as specified. 
2. In a churn, the combination of a base 
having bars provided with radial slots, stepped 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US580998.txt	(No Model.) 
R. G. WARD, 
SPIKING BAR. 
No. 580,998. 
Patented Apr. 20. 1897. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RANDOLPH. G. WARD, OF SUMMERVILLE, SOUTH CAROLINA. 
SPKNG a BAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 580,998, dated April 20, 1897. 
Application filed April 2, 1896, Serial No. 585,904 (No model.) 
O 
To all who7, it inci 7? concern: 
Be it known that I, RANDOLPH. G. WARD, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Summerville, in the county of Berkeley, in 
the State of South Carolina, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Spik 
ing-Bars, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to a new and im 
proved spiking bar or implement to be used 
for holding a railroad-tie firmly against the 
base of a railroad-rail while spiking the rail 
to the tie. 
Heretofore it has been customary in spik 
ing rails to ties to place a pry-pole or crow 
bar under the sleeper and rest it on a suit 
able support, such as a stone or block of wood, 
and press down the outer end, so as to pry 
the sleeper up against the rail-base by means 
of its shorter inner end. A support is not 
always at hand, or it is crushed or pressed 
into the yielding soil by the great pressure 
exerted, and also frequently the pry-pole slips 
when the heavy blows are delivered on the 
spike. Furthermore,in case the bedliswashed 
out it is difficult and often impossible to find 
a proper support or fulcrum for the pry-pole. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
* new and improved implement which can be 
rested on the rail as a fulcrum and which en 
gages the bottom of the tie and presses the 
top of the tie firmly against the base of the 
rail. 
The invention consists of a bar having a 
shoulder or offset that can rest on the rail and 
a prong extending downward from said shoul 
der to pass under the tie and press the same 
upward when the outer end of said bar is 
forced downward, thereby holding the tie 
snugly against the rail-base until the rail has 
been properly spiked. 
The invention also consists in the construc 
tion of parts and details, as will be fully de 
scribed and set forth hereinafter and finally 
pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification and in which like 
letters of reference indicate like parts in all 
the views, Figure 1 is a perspective view of 
a rail-tie and two of my improved spiking 
bars, showing the manner in which they are 
to be used. Fig. 2 is a front view of the lower 
end of a spiking-bar, showing how it is to be 
used. Fig. 3 shows a modified construction 
of the lower end of the spiking-bar. 
A cast-steel or drop-forged fork. A has its 
two prongs Cl, flared from each other and 
slightly curved, so that the fork can straddle 
a railroad-rail B, the shoulder b at the upper 
ends of the prongs or tines resting on the head 
of the rail. The prongs or times a are at a 
slight angle to the shank or stem d of the 
fork, and the lower ends of the shanks are 
curved upward slightly or similarly shaped 
to form upwardly-extending claws e. The 
shoulder b is rounded, so as to adapt it to 
work freely on the rail-head. The upper end 
of the stem dis inserted in and welded to the 
lower end of a tube or bar C, which serves as 
a handle for the fork. 
In place of providing the fork with two tines 
or prongs a, a single tine may be provided, as 
shown in Fig. 3. The times may have exten 
sions to the outside, as shown in Fig. 3 in 
dotted lines, to form a tamping-head f, or a 
tamping-head g may be formed on the upper 
end of the bar or tube C, as shown in Fig. 1. 
To spike a rail, two spiking-bars are used, 
as shown in Fig. 1, one at each side of the tie 
D, and are placed on the rail B in such a 
manner that the rounded shoulders b rest on 
the rail-head and the claws e engage the un 
der side of the sleeper. When the upper ends 
of the handle tubes or bars C are pressed 
downward, the shoulders brock on the rail 
head and press the tie D firmly against the 
rail-base, and while thus held the spikes F 
are driven into the tie. The rail thus forms 
the fulcrum or support for the spiking-bar, 
and the entire pressure exerted is utilized 
for holding the rail and tie snugly and firmly 
in contact. 
As no support on the ground is needed, this 
implement is of most excellent service for 
spiking rails on Washouts, soft or imperfect 
beds, and the like. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A spiking-bar for holding railroad - ties 
against the rails while spiking them, consist 
ing of a bar provided with a lateral shoulder, 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
2 
580,998 
a prong extending downward from said shoul 
der, said shoulder and prong being rigidly 
connected with the bar, and an upwardly-ex 
tending claw on the free end of said prong, 
Substantially as herein shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention Ilhave signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 28th day of Janu 
ary, 1896. 
RANDOLPII G. WARD. 
Witnesses: 
F. F. CAPERS, 
E. W. BOTTNI. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581098.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 581, 098. 
 
J. BERBECKER, 
EASEL FOR PICTURES, &c. 
Patented Apr. 20, 1897. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS BERBECKER, OF WATERBURY, CONNECTICUT. 
EAS EL FOR PICTURES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,098, dated April 20, 1897. 
4 
Application filed September 16, 1896, Serial No, 605,960, (No model.) 
To all avho7mv it mvay concer7u: 
Be it known that I, JULIUS BERBECKER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wa 
terbury, in the county of New Haven and 
State of Connecticut, have invented an Im 
provement in Easels for Pictures or Similar 
Articles, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
Easels have heretofore been constructed 
for holding photographic pictures and other 
articles in which a back brace or support is 
hinged or pivoted so as to fold for transpor 
tation, and in some instances the back leg has 
been introduced into an opening, so as to be 
pulled out. 
The present invention is for rendering the 
easel very stiffand reliable when put together 
for use and for allowing the parts to be easily 
separated and packed together flat, or mearly 
so, so as to occupy but little space. 
In my improved easel the inclined support 
for the article is made of a metal tube or simi 
Iar article bentinto the desired form and hav 
ing two ends or feet upon which it is sup 
ported, and there are perforations at a suit 
able distance from the lower ends of the sup 
port for receiving into them the ends of a 
tube forming a shelf or support, and the back 
brace is slipped into the ends of the tube of 
the shelf. Hence the shelf and the back-brace 
are rigidly connected, and the ends of the 
shelf passing into the inclined support are 
firmly held into position; but the parts are 
easily separated by withdrawing the ends of 
the back-brace and separating the ends of the 
shelf from the support, and the parts can be 
more or less ornamental, and they are prefer 
ably tubular, so as to obtain a proper size 
and with as little weight as is consistent with 
strength. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation of 
the improved easel, and Fig. 2 is a plan view 
of the same; and Fig. 3 is a section in larger 
size at the intersection of the brace, shelf, 
and inclined support. 
The inclined support A is advantageously 
made of a metal tube , with two parallel, or 
nearly parallel, sides, the tube being bent at 
the upper end of the support; and ornamental 
feet are represented at 2. This inclined sup 
port, however, may be either of a metal or | 
| other tube, or it may be a casting of any de 
sired ornamental configuration. There are 
two holes, one in each leg or side part of the 
inclined support, through which the ends of 
the brace B pass, and this brace B can be of 
wire or tubular, with two sides parallel, or 
nearly so, to each other and with the backpor 
tion of the brace semicircular or any other de 
sired configuration, and it is advantageous to 
employ shoulders or projections at 3 upon the 
brace to come against the back surfaces of the 
inclined support adjacent to the holes through 
which the ends of the brace pass, and the 
shelf C is tubular at its ends, so that the ends 
of Said shelf can be thrust over the ends of 
the brace, and it is advantageous to make the 
holes in the front portion of the inclined sup 
port sufficiently large for the back ends of 
the shelf to pass into such holes, and the tu 
bular ends of the Shelf should fit the ends of 
the brace sufficiently tight for the parts to 
hold together firmly when the easelis put to 
gether for use. The shelf C may be of any 
desired configuration or construction, but 
when made of a tube, as shown, the parts are 
light and inexpensive; and when the shelf is 
made of a tube there may be a knuriled ribo 
or bead d upon the metallic tube and adja 
cent to the end portions that pass into the 
holes in the inclined support, so that such 
ribs or beads limit the movement of the ends 
of the shelf as thrust into the holes in the in 
clined support. 
When the easel is to be packed for trans 
portation, the ends of the brace are separated 
or pulled out of the ends of the shelf and the 
parts are packed together flatwise, so as to 
occupy little or no more space than the in 
clined support, as the shelf and brace are 
usually laid in between the side portions of 
the inclined support. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The easel having an inclined support 
with openings through the side portions and 
near the lower ends, a shelf having ends that 
pass into the openings in the side portions of 
the inclined support and a brace having ends 
that pass through such openings in the said 
side portions and into the tubular ends of the 
shelf, substantially as set forth. 
2. The easel having an inclined support 
I O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
Ioo 
2 
581,098 
of the parts as they are put together, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
Signed by me this 10th day of September, 
jS) (5. 
I O 
JULIUS J3 JE IR I3 IE (SIKER. 
VWitnesses: 
HAS. II, ANDRUS, 
ADAMI WWJENDEL. 
With openings through the side portions and 
near the lower ends, a shelf having ends that 
pass into the openings in the side portions of 
the inclined support, and a brace having ends 
that pass through such openings in the said 
side portions and into the tubular ends of tilne 
shelf, there being projections near the ends 
of the brace and slhelf to limit the movements 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581198.txt	(No Model.) 
A. M. D WORSCHACK. 
WHIFFLETREE, 
No. 581,198. 
Patented Apr. 20, 1897. 
WITNESSES: 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEY. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTON M. D WORSCHACK, OF INDEPENDENCE, WISCONSIN. 
whiFFLETREE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,198, dated April 20, 1897. 
Application filed December 26, 1896, Serial No. 617,082, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, ANTONM.D WORSCHACK, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at In 
dependence, in the county of Trempealeau 
and State of Wisconsin, have invented a new 
and useful Whiffletree, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Whiffletrees made from round iron rods or 
heavy Wire and secured to any ordinary evener 
by a combined double-headed bolt and clip 
or plate, which is secured to the evener by 
means of two bolts. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
the whiffletree connected to the evener. Fig. 
2 is a top view of the Whiffletree connected to 
the evener. Fig. 3 is a rear view of the com 
bined double-headed bolt and plate to which 
the whiffletree is attached and by which it is 
Secured to the evener. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lingS. 
4 designates the evener. 5 designates the 
combined bolt and plate. 6 designates the 
head of the bolt around which the whiffletree 
is passed. 7 designates the bolts that hold 
the combined bolt and plate to the evener. 
8 designates the top half of the whiffletiree. 
9 designates the lower half of the whiffletree. 
10 designates the stay-rod for holding the 
ends of the whiffletree apart, and 11 desig 
nates the hooks to engage with the harness. 
The bolt and plate 5 are cast, the bolt be 
ing cast with the plate, thereby forming one 
piece, and having the double heads for the 
O 
3O 
35 
purpose of holding the whiffletree after it is 
bent round the bolt. The bolts 7 are then 
passed through the cast plate and secure it 
to the evener. The wire 8, forming the top 
half of the whiffletree, is bent round the head 
of the bolt 5 and then crossed and bent round 
the lower half of the whiffletree 9 back of the 
stay-rod 10. The lower half of the whiffletree 
9 is bent round the lower head of the bolt 5 
and then crossed and passed through the eyes 
of the upper half 8 and through the eyes on 
the stay-rod 10, and eyes are then formed on 
the ends into which the hooks 11 are secured. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
A whiffletree comprising a bolt-plate adapt 
ed to be secured to the evener, a bolt integral 
with said plate, a lower section bent around 
the lower portion of the bolt and provided 
with diverging arms, terminating in eyes to 
which are secured hooks and an upper Sec 
tion bent around the integral bolt and ter 
minating in arms diverging in a plane par 
allel with the lower arms, the said upper arms 
being bent at right angles and Secured at 
their extremities to the lower arms, and a 
stay-rod secured at its extremities to the 
lower diverging arms. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own have hereunto affixed my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
ANTON MI. DWORSCEIACK. 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
JAMES ELSTAD, 
F. M. THEISEN, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581298.txt	(No Model.) 
W. H. McFALL, 
REGISTERING MECHANISM, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 581,298. 
: 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897. 
1. 
 
628). Evcosco 
wo 
A-02a uk 
56; 
- ?to iter 
3-vvue-vitov 
f 2 2 7e 
aela 1 
M-48 -a.e-ea 
the Norihis Peters co, Horo-litHe washristen, oc. 
 
W. H. McFALL. 
REGISTERING MECHANISM, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 581,298. 
 
 
   
me it L 
- 
The C 
-HIEEIILITIERIETILII 
it 
is simi" 
 
" 
. 
 
 
 
2| 
2 
 
928)itv.cooco 
-i. Sek. 
24. 
33.3%) 
3yggs to 
inte NORRIS Peters co, Photo-litc. washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. McFALL, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE AMERICAN ELECTRIC METER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
REGISTERING MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,298, dated April 27, 1897. 
Application filed February 6, 1897, Serial No. 622,240. (No model.) 
55 
To all whon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. MCFALL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a 
certain new and useful Improvementin Regis 
tering Mechanism, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to registering electric 
meters, and particularly to the class of meters 
described in Letters Patent No. 571,032, is 
sued November 10, 1896. 
In the form of 
meter described in that patent the register or 
counter is operated by an oscillating electric 
motor, the oscillations of the motor being 
transmitted to the register by means of a 
cam operating on a pawl which drives the 
primary wheel of the counter. 
The object of my invention is to improve 
the mechanism for transmitting the oscilla 
tions of the motor to the counter, and in car 
rying out my invention I employ the novel 
devices and combinations of devices herein 
after referred to, and pointed out in the claims. 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 illustrates the essential working 
parts, the framework and other details being 
omitted for the sake of clearness. Fig. 2 is 
a plan view of a portion of the mechanism for 
transmitting the movements of the motor to 
the counter. Fig. 3 is a partial elevation and 
vertical section taken on the line 33 of Fig. 
1, and Fig. 4 is a view illustrating three of 
the Working positions of part of the actuat 
ing mechanism. 
The meter comprises an ampere-indicator 
and the registering apparatus, the rate of 
registration being determined by the position 
of a cam or inverted arch whose position is 
controlled by the ampere-indicator. 
Referring now to Fig. 1, A indicates the 
solenoid of the ampere-indicator, and B the 
core actuated thereby. This core is carried 
by an arbor b, which also carries a cam or in 
verted arch C and a pointer D. The motor 
comprises a pendulum E, having corese, and 
an actuating - Solenoid F. In practice the 
motoris provided with a circuit-controller for 
periodically opening and closing the motor ter. 
circuit, but this feature is now well under 
stood and requires no further description or 
illustration. 
In the meter shown in the patent above re 
ferred to the primary wheel of the register or 
counter is driven by a pawl which is actuated 
by a cam driven by the oscillating motor, 
and in practice it was found that in order to 
obtain the best practical results the actuat 
ing-pawl had to be actuated about forty 5o 
times per minute, the actuating-pawl pick 
ing up a certain number of teeth on each for 
ward movement, the number of teeth picked 
up being proportional to the current passing 
through the ampere-meter, or, in other words, 
to the position of the cam C. This arrange 
ment placed somewhat narrow limitations 
upon the registering mechanism and necessi 
tated the making of very fine teeth on the 
primary wheel of the counter in order to en 
able the registration of small quantities of 
Current. 
The main object of my invention is to avoid 
the necessity for providing the primary wheel 
with fine teeth and at the same time obtain a 
finer registration than has hitherto been ab 
tained. To accomplish this, I employ, in 
stead of the actuating-cam of the patent re 
ferred to, a rotating actuating device G, which 
may be termed a snail-wheel, and which 
wheel is preferably provided with ratchet 
teeth. The teeth of the snail-wheel are de 
signed to pick up one-tenth of an ampere 
each-that is to say, if there were but one 
tenth of an ampere flowing through the indi 
cator only one tooth would engage the wheel 
H. For a ten-ampere meter the snail-wheel 
will have one hundred ratchet-teeth, and for 
larger meters the proportions of the snail 
wheels will be proportionately varied. This 
Wheel engages with a gear-wheel H, having 
ratchet-teeth, and which wheel is the first 
wheel of a train of pinions and gear-wheels 
h, h, h, and h, the last of which, pinion h, 
meshes with the first or primary wheel H of 
the counter. This train of gear-wheels is car 
ried by a frame I, which is pivoted upon the 
arbor i of the wheel H'. This arbor is pivoted 
in the plates J, forming the frame of the coun 
(Not shown.) By this arrangement the 
95 
75 
ICC 
O 
35 
4) 
45 
So 
s 
2 
581,298 
7 O 
75 
8. 
9o 
95 
OC) 
frame I is capable of movement about the ar 
bor i, the object of which will be hereinafter 
explained. 
The snail-wheel G is driven by the oscillat 
ing motor through a clutch mechanism, which 
for simplicity may be a ratchet-wheel and 
pawl. The ratchet-wheel is secured to the 
snail-wheel concentric to its bearing and is 
provided with ten ratchet-teeth 9, with which 
a pawl L, actuated by the pendulum E, is 
adapted to engage. The snail-wheel is cal 
ried by a shaft e', which is the shaft of the 
pendulum, and is free to rotate thereon. The 
pawl L is pivoted upon an arm l, projecting 
from a hub l', rigidly mounted on the shaft 
e'. Thus it will be seen that with each for 
ward oscillation of the pendulum E the pawl 
L is carried with it and caused to engage suc 
cessively on the backward swing the ratchet 
teeth g of the snail-wheel, which is rotated 
in the direction of the arrow and in turn ro 
tates the wheel II. In practice a detent, such 
as a light blade-spring, will be provided to 
engage With the ratchet g to prevent backlash 
of the snail-wheel. It is desirable in the os 
cillation of the pendulum to so arrange the 
pawl L that for each complete oscillation of 
the pendulum the snail-wheel G will be moved 
forward a distance of one tooth g, no matter 
what the degree of oscillation of the pendu 
lum may be. For this purpose I provide a 
bracket M, which is secured to the plate N, 
Fig. 3, of the framework, and which bracket, 
Mis provided with two pins in m', with which 
the finger l of the pawl L engages. 
Referring to Fig. 1, it will be noted that 
when the pendulum E swings to the right a 
certain distance the finger li will strike the 
pin m, which causes the pawl L to swing on 
its pivot and become disengaged from the 
ratchet-teeth g. When the pendulum swings 
to the left, which is the attracted swing, the 
pawl L is carried backward to engage a new 
tooth g, but the pawl is held out of engage 
ment with the ratchet-teeth g by the engage 
ment of arm land pin n', as shown by the 
dotted position 1, Fig. 4, which is the posi 
tion of the pawl at about the extreme forward 
swing of the pendulum. Pin an' will prevent 
the engagement of pawl L with a ratchet 
tooth g until it reaches the dotted-line posi 
tion 2, and as the pawl is carried to the right 
by the pendulum arm lengages pin in and 
pawl L is caused to gradually move upward, 
and when it reaches the dotted-line position 
3 it will clear the latchet-tooth g with which 
it was in engagement and cease to move the 
snail-wheel forward. In practice the pen 
dulum often swings through an arc of more 
than seventy-two degrees, which, if the pawl L 
were free to engage the ratchet-teeth at the 
limit of its forward swing, would be liable to 
move the Snail-wheel forward a distance of 
two ratchet - teeth g. To prevent this, the 
pawl and pins are set so that the pawl will 
engage the latchet-teeth g through a swing of 
eighteen degrees each side of the center line 
of the arbor of the pendulum, and in this Way 
the snail-wheel will be moved forwald a dis 
tance of but one tooth g for each complete 
swing of the pendulum. 
It will be understood that any suitable form 
of clutch mechanism which will accomplish 
the same results as the ratchet gy, pawl I, and 
pins in and n' may be substituted therefor 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
The frame I, which is pivoted upon the 
arbor i, is provided with a pin I", which rests 
upon the inner edge of the cam C, and since 
the frame I is free to swing on the arbor it 
will be seen that as the cam C moves to the 
right the wheel H will drop proportionately 
to the amount of current passing through the 
ampere-indicator, thus permitting a greater 
lumber of teeth on the snail-wheel to engage 
the teeth of the wheel H for each revolution 
of the snail-wheel. In the position indicated 
in Fig. 1 the meter is at rest, and since in 
practice it is customary to connect the motor 
solenoid F across the line the pendulum E 
will have a constant oscillation, but the teeth 
of the snail-wheel G will not engage the teeth 
of the wheel II. When, however, current 
passes through the solenoid of the ampere 
indicator, the calm C is swung to the right, 
permitting the wheel H to descend and en 
gage with the teeth of the snail-wheel. As 
the snail-wheel revolves it lifts the wheel H 
and the frame I, due to its cam shape, and 
the wheel H will reach the limit of its upward 
movement when the highest point of the snail 
wheel engages with the wheel H. When the 
snail-wheel has made a complete revolution 
and when the highest point of the snail-wheel 
leaves the wheel II, there would be a consider 
able drop of the frame I if the cam C be at an 
extreme position to the right, which would 
result in an undue jarring of the parts. To 
avoid this, I provide a device for effecting a 
gradual descent of the wheel II toward the 
lowest point on the snail-wheel. The device 
for accomplishing this is a guard O and roller 
O'. This device is also designed to periodi 
cally jar the bearings of the arbor b to enable 
the ampere-indicator to periodically correct 
the position of the cam C in case its position 
due to friction does not accurately correspond 
to the amount of current flowing through the 
indicator-coils. The relative positions of the 
guard and roller are such that when the last 
or highest tooth on the snail-wheel is about 
to become disengaged from the teeth of the 
wheel H the roller O' will strike the guard O 
and cause the pin. I to tap the concentric 
arch C and thus jar the bearings of the arbor 
b. As shown in the drawings, the guard O is , 
carried by the frame I and the roller is piv 
oted upon the snail-wheel, but it will be un 
derstood that the positions may be reversed 
that is, the roller O' may, for instance, be 
sleeved upon the arbor of the wheel II and 
the guard secured upon the snail-wheel. 
In a ten-ampere meter the wheel H has 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
 
581,298 
. 
3 
IO 
thirty teeth, the pinion h has six teeth, the ling of the counter to actuate the same, an 
idler-wheel h' thirty-six teeth, the wheel h 
oscillating motor for rotating said cam, and 
forty-eight teeth, the pinion h six teeth, and 
means for varying the engagement between 
the wheel H'sixty teeth. Hence the ratio be 
the cam and gearing, substantially assetforth. 
tween the wheels H and H" is eighty revolu 
5. The combination with a register or coun 
tions to one. In the operation of the meter, 
ter, of an actuator in the form of a cam en 
if one ampere is flowing through the ampere 
gaging the gearing of the counter, an oscil 
indicator, the cam C will assume a position 
lating motor, and a clutch mechanism for 
which will allow the wheel II to descend a 
converting the oscillations of the motor into 
distance sufficient to cause ten teeth of the 
an intermittent rotary movement of the cam, 
snail-wheel to engage the teeth of the wheel 
substantially as set forth. 
H for each revolution of the snail-wheel. 
6. The combination with a register or coun 
Since the pendulum makes forty beats per 
ter, of an actuator in the form of a cam en 
minute the snail-wheel through the pawl L 
gaging the gearing of the counter, an Oscil 
Will make four revolutions per minute or two 
lating motor, a ratchet-wheel carried by said 
hundred and forty per hour, and since under 
cam, and a pawl moved by the movable part 
the conditions assumed ten teeth of the snail 
of the motor to engage the teeth of said wheel, 
wheel engage the teeth of the wheel H on 
whereby the oscillations of the motor are con 
each revolution the wheel H will be moved 
verted into an intermittent rotary movement 
a distance of two thousand four hundred teeth. 
of the cam, substantially as set forth. 
per hour or eighty revolutions, which will re 
7. The combination with a register or coun 
Sultin one revolution of the wheelH'. There 
ter, of all actuatorin the form of a cam-shaped 
fore, since ten teeth on the snail-wheel rep 
ratchet-wheel engaging the gearing of the 
resent one ampere, the one revolution of the 
counter, and a motor for rotating said cam, 
wheel H will represent one ampere-hour. If 
substantially as set forth. 
two amperes are flowing through the indica 
S. The combination with a register or coun 
tor, the position of the cam C will be such 
ter, of an actuator in the form of a cam-shaped 
that the descent of the wheel H will permit 
ratchet-wheel engaging the gearing of the 
twenty teeth of the snail-wheel to engage the 
counter, a motor for rotating Said cam, and 
teeth of the wheel H during each revolution, 
means for varying the engagement between 
and the result will be two revolutions of the 
the cam ratchet-wheel and the gearing of the 
wheel H' for two hundred and forty revolu 
counter, substantially as set forth. 
tions of the snail-wheel, which will be equal 
9. The combination with a register or coun 
to two ampere-hours. 
The curve of the snail 
ter, of an actuatorin the form of a cam-shaped 
wheel G is such that it will be possible for 
ratchet-wheel engaging the gearing of the 
only one of its teeth to engage a tooth of the 
counter, an oscillating motor, and a clutch 
Wheel H, and consequently it is possible to 
mechanism for converting the oscillations of 
pick up one-tenth of an ampere on each revo 
the motor into an intermittent rotary move 
lution of the snail-wheeland register the same 
ment of the cam, substantially as set forth. 
in ampere-hours at the counter. 
10. The combination with a register or 
While I have described the snail-wheel G. 
counter, of an actuator in the form of a cam 
and wheel H as provided with ratchet-teeth, 
shaped ratchet-Wheel engaging the gearing 
it will be understood that I do not limit my 
of the counter, an Oscillating motor, a clutch 
self to that construction, since the snail-wheel 
mechanism for converting the Oscillations of 
maybe arranged to rotate the wheel H through 
the motor into an intermittent rotary move 
friction or the peripheries of G and H may be 
ment of the cam, and means for varying the 
roughened or milled without departing from 
engagement between the cam ratchet-wheel 
the spirit of my invention. 
and the gearing of the counter, Substantially 
as set forth. 
11. In a registering electric meter, the com 
bination with an ampere-indicator, of a reg 
ister or counter, an actuator in the form of a 
cam engaging the gearing of the counter, a 
motor for rotating. Said cam, and means con 
trolled by the ampere-indicator for varying 
the engagement between the cam and gear 
ing, substantially as set forth. 
12. In a registering electric meter, the com 
bination with an ampere-indicator, of a reg 
ister or counter, an actuator in the form of a 
cam-shaped ratchet-Wheel engaging the gear 
ing of the counter, a motor for rotating said 
cam, and means controlled by the ampere 
indicator for varying the engagement be 
tween the cam ratchet-wheel and the gearing 
of the counter, substantially as set forth. 
13. In a registering electric meter, the com 
What I claim is 
1. The combination with a register or coun 
ter, of a rotating cam engaging with the gear 
ing of the counter to actuate the same, and 
a motor for rotating said cam, substantially 
as Set forth. 
2. The combination with a register or coun 
ter, of a rotating cam engaging with the gear 
ing of the counter to actuate the same, a mo 
tor for rotating said cam, and means for vary 
illg the engagement between the cam and 
gearing, Substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination with a register or coun 
ter, of a rotating cam engaging with the gear 
ing of the counter to actuate the same, and 
an OScillating motor for rotating said cam, 
Substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination. With a register or coun 
ter, of a rotating cam engaging with the gear 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
125 
 
4. 
581,298 
between said driver and the first wheel of the 
counter and carried by a pivoted frame and 
whose pivotal point is coincident with the ar 
bor of the first wheel of the counter, a motor 2 o 
for rotating said cam ratchet-wheel, means 
controlled by the ampere-indicator for vary 
ing the engagement between the cam ratchet 
wheel and the first wheel of the train of gear 
ing, and a guard O and roller O', substantially 25 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
15th day of January, 1897. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
WILLIAM II. MCFAILL. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. ROSS GREEN, 
ERNEST L. TUSTIN. 
bination with an ampere-indicator, of a reg 
ister or counter, a cam-shaped ratchet-wheel 
for driving said counter, a train of gearing 
between said driver and the first wheel of the 
counter, and carried by a pivoted frame, and 
whose pivotal point is coincident with the ar 
bor of the first wheel of the counter, a motor 
for rotating said cam ratchet-wheel, and 
means controlled by the ampere-indicator for 
varying the engagement between the cam 
ratchet-wheel and the first wheel of the train 
of gearing, substantially as set forth. 
14. In a registering electric meter, the com 
bination with an ampere-indicator, of a reg 
ister or counter, a cam-shaped ratchet-wheel 
for driving said counter, a train of gearing 
- 
EO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581398.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTINA MACKIE, OF NEWARIK, NEWJERSEY. 
WOOD- POLISH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,898, dated April 27, 1897. 
Application filed December 31, 1896, Serial No. 617,680. (No specimens.) 
. 
To all, whom it naily concern: 
Beit known that I, CHRISTINA MACKIE, re 
siding at Newark,in the county of Essex, State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and use 
ful Composition of Matter to be Used for Pol 
ishing all Kinds of Decorative Woods, Fine 
Furniture, and Pianos, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My composition consists of the following 
ingredients, combined in the proportions 
stated, viz: for two gallons of the polish, raw 
linseed oil, onegallon; Wood-alcohol, one 
half gallon; spirits of turpentine, one-fourth 
gallon; malt vinegar, six ounces; muriatic 
acid, three ounces; spirits of cloves, three 
ounces; butter of antimony, three Ounces. 
The ingredients are to be thoroughly min 
gled by agitation. 
In using the above composition on all fine 
- 
O 
 
ornamental woods, furniture, and pianos it 
gives a brilliant luster. 
I am not aware that all of the ingredients 
of my composition have ever been used or 
offered for sale in this or any foreign country. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
The herein-described composition of mat 
ter to be used for polishing decorative Woods 
fine furniture and pianos consisting of raW 
linseed-oil wood-alcohol spirits of turpentine 
malt vinegar muriatic acid spirits of cloves 
butter of antimony in the proportions speci 
fied. 
CHRISTINA MACKIE. 
25 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES HAYES, 
J. G. LARRABEE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581498.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 581498, 
I. A. F. WALLBERG & J. D., ULL, G-REN, 
APPARATUS FOR STRAINING WOOD PULP, &c, 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897. 
e? 
42. 
-------- 
EH HA t 
tal) 
 
WITNESSES : 
474.5%:- 
(74.67 Cose 
4,024RS: 
g % 
P 
B, Z/ M 
- '4-7 4-4-2s 
Attorney. . 
rigorris PETERs co, Photo-Lito., washington. p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IVAR AXEL FERDINAND WALLBERG, OF CARLSTAD, AND JOHAN DANIEL 
ULLGREN, OF VERMBOL, SWEDEN. 
APPARATUS FOR STRAINING WOOD-PULP, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,498, dated April 27, 1897. 
Application filed August 13, 1896, Serial No. 602,600, (No model.) 
- 
Io lowing is a specification. 
To ali, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, IVAR AXEL FERDI 
NAND WALLBERG, residing at Carlstad, and 
JOHAN DANIELULLGREN, residing at Verm 
5 bol, near Katrineholm, Sweden, subjects of 
the King of Sweden and Norway, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Apparatus for Straining Wood-Pulp and 
Similar Fibrous Materials, of which the fol 
As its title indicates, our invention relates 
to straining Wood-pulp and the like in order 
to separate therefrom the coarser particles or 
bits. In passing Wood and other fiber held 
I5 in Suspension in Water through sieves the 
difficulty has been that, owing to the flow be 
ing continuous in One direction, the sieves or 
strainers become clogged with the fiber and 
have to be cleared, and this is not easy to do 
20 where the sieves are inclosed in a chamber 
and not readily accessible. 
With our apparatus we obviate the diffi 
culty named by imparting to the current 
which flows through the straining apparatus 
25 a vibratory motion-that is, the current bear 
ing the fibers is alternately forced forward 
and Sucked or drawn back. The forward im 
pulse tends to force the liquid and the finer 
particles held in suspension through the sieve 
3o and the backward impulse tends to draw 
away from the sieve the coarser particles 
which apply themselves to the sieve-surface 
and tend to choke or clog it. The to-and-fro 
motion imparted to the coarser debris thus 
35 keeps the interstices of the sieve open and 
clear and permits of the operation being con 
tinued for a long time without the necessity 
of removing the strained-out substance. 
In the accompanying drawings we have 
4c shown an embodiment of an apparatus con 
structed according to our invention. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
vertical section of the apparatus. Fig. 2 is 
a plan thereof. Fig. 3 is an end elevation 
45 showing the right-hand end as seen in Figs. 
1 and 2; and Fig. 4 is a transverse section at 
the point indicated by line as in Fig. 1. 
The apparatus comprises an elongated 
trough or receptacle A, which may be of wood 
5o or metal and which is divided into compart 
ments C, C, C, and C. In the longer com 
In the compartment a is mounted in suit- 7o 
partment C' is fixed a longitudinally-extend 
ing strainer B, in the form of a tube and here 
shown as Square in cross-section. The walls 
or sides of this strainer Bare composed wholly 55 
or in part of sieve or strainer plates having 
in them perforations preferably in the form 
of narrow slits b. It is not necessary that 
the whole surface of the tube be thus per 
forated; but we prefer to so perforate it. 6o 
The tube B will be, by preference, supported 
at its respective ends in the partitions be 
tween the long compartment a' and the com 
partments ( and a, being provided at its 
ends with bearing-flanges b', supported in 65 
corresponding bearings in said partitions. 
These flanges are of ring form, so that thc 
tube B may be turned axially to afford ae 
cess to its sides the more readily. 
able bearings a shaft C, which may have im 
parted to it a rocking or oscillating movement 
through the medium of a crank or arm C on 
said shaft, an eccentric d on a driving-shaft 
D, and a forked yoke in the end of the arm c. 75 
embracing said eccentric d. 
On the rock-shaft C is clamped a springy 
plate E, which extends into the tube B, as 
clearly shown in Figs. 1 and 4. This plate E 
may be of wood or metal. 
So far as described the operation of the ap 
paratus is as follows: The fibrous mass, sus 
pended in fluid, is poured into the compart 
ment a, whence it flows into the tube B with 
a velocity proportioned to the head and to the 85 
quality or condition of the fluid mass. The 
fluid will flow with a speed proportioned to 
its distance from the surface of the strainer 
tube B by reason of its friction on the inner 
surface of the tube. As a consequence of 9o 
this, the fibers come to lie in the direction of 
the longitudinal axis of the tube B and the 
slits b therein. By the vibration of the plate 
E the floating fibrous mass is alternately 
driven against the sieve-surface and drawn 95 
away therefrom, whereby those fibers which 
can pass through the slits b do so and those 
which cannot, or do not, pass on through the 
tube into the compartment a' and thence 
over the overflow-lip Clinto the last or outlet Ioo 
compartment C. The screened pulp passes 
over overflow-lips a' in the sides of the com 
8o 
2 
581498 
5 
O 
partment a' into suitable troughs or recepta 
cles a, as clearly shown. 
IBy varying the thickness of the plate E and 
the speed of the shaft D the undulatory or 
vibratory motion may be varied and adapted 
to suit the purpose in view. The velocity of 
the flow through the tube B can be varied by 
varying the head or level in the compart 
ment C. 
The compartment (t may have a door a to 
facilitate the insertion of the plate E, and the 
compartment C may have adjustable over 
flow-lips at its sides. 
IIaving thus described our invention, we 
claim 
1. In an apparatus for straining wood-pulp 
and similar fiber held in suspension in a liq 
luid, the combination with a strainer in the 
form of a tube, through which the liquid 
flows, of a laterally-vibrating plate E, extend 
ing through said strainer, Substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In an apparatus for straining wood-pulp 
and similar fiber held in suspension in a liq 
uid, the combination with the trough A, hav 
ing compartments a, a', a and a, of the 
strainer B, mounted in the compartment (t", 
the plate E in and extending through the 
strainer B, and means substantially as de 
scribed for imparting vibration to said plate, 
as set forth. 
In witness whereof we have here unto signed 
our names in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. . 
IWAR, AXEL FERDIN AND WALIBER(i. 
JOHAN DANIEI UILGIREN, 
Witnesses: 
ERNST SVANQ VIST, 
CARL P. GERELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581598.txt	(No Model.) 
E. LEVESQUE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 581,598. 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897, 
 
(No Model.) 
E. LEVESQUE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 581,598. 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897. 
 
Zzzo esses, 
Eois PEERS co, FHoTo-lirio, washingro. c.c. 
(No Model.) 
E. LEVESQUE 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 581,598, 
 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897, 
(No Model,) 
 
No. 581,598. 
E. LEVESQUE 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 581,598. 
E. LEVESQUE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
l 
 
Es 
 
enorris Peters co, PHoro. Tho, washington. 
(No Model.) 
E. LEVESQUE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE. 
8 Sheets-Sheet, 6. 
 
No. 581,598, 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
E. LEVESQUE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 7, 
No. 581,598. 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897, 
 
4. Zaz-esses. 
-2 (.72- 
23-22 
 
R 
is 
S1 is 
le 
O 
Zv-2-272 afar: 
 
cC. a.5 ?acre 
2. 72 zarzey 
(No Model.) 
No. 581,598. 
E. LEVESQUE, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
Patented Apr. 27, 1897. 
4472/472-esses, 
Zava/e/246. 
-2 a za. 
Co-ca.1%re 
22 3-1.2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMILE LEVESQUE, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
TYPE - WR N G V AC - NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,598, dated April 27, 1897. 
Application filed November 30, 1895, Serial No. 570,648, (No model.) 
O 
3O 
To all twin O1, ii. 1-Clif CO7 cert 
Beit known that I, EMILE LEVESQUE, a citi 
Zen of the French Republic, and a resident of 
Paris, France, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Type - Writers, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part thereof. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
type-writing machines, and more particularly 
to those in which a wheel or a cylinder is em 
ployed whose periphery or face is entirely or 
partly provided with types brought to the op 
erative position by rotation of the said wheel 
or cylinder about its axis. These improve 
lments, either conjointly or separately, are also 
applicable to machines in which the types are 
arranged on a strip or bar adapted to be dis 
placed longitudinally. 
In ordel' to effect, the rotation of the wheel 
or cylinder or the displacement of the strip 
or bar, I preferably employ a small string 
passing through the grooves of two pulleys. 
In the first case the two extremities of the 
string coming from the pulleys are fixed to 
the periphery of a drum arranged upon the 
axis of the wheel or cylinder and are wound 
upon this drum. In the second case the ex 
tremities of the String coming from the pull 
leys are fixed one to each end of the strip or 
bar which carries the type. 
By means of a knob or button having a con 
ical point and fixed to the string and a bar 
arranged along this string and pierced with 
a row of slmall holes previously registered I 
could bring any desired type to the operative 
position in the Ordinary manner, but this 
would be inconvenient. With the object of 
perfecting this mode of operation I arrange 
along the String a path for guiding a small 
slide or traveler to which the string is fixed, 
and upon this string I secure, by means of a 
double pivot, one extremity of a long rod, the 
other extremity of which is provided with a 
cone furnished with a sleeve. This long rod 
enables me to alrange in the alinement of the 
path followed by the slide or traveler a regis 
teling-plate and to form in this plate, in lieu 
of a single row of small holes, four or more 
rows of registering holes which are large and 
into which I can very easily introduce the 
cone on the rod in order to bring any desired 
type into position. By the employment of 
this long rod with its double pivot and the 
string with its two pulleys, by the arrange 
ment of these pulleys placed at a distance 
from each other, and by other arrangements 
which will hereinafter be described, I obtain 
a type-writing machine of simple construc 
tion, the working of which comprises the fol 
lowing operations-that is to say, first, bring 
any desired type into approximately opera 
tive position by placing the cone on the rod 
in the registering hole of this type previously 
formed in the plate, and, Second, by lowering 
this plate or tablet completing the exact reg 
istering of the type and also the pressure or 
the shock which causes it to make its impres 
sion, the whole taking place in a single action 
and with one hand, it being also possible to 
juxtapose two symmetrical apparatus, one for 
each hand. 
The pressure upon the type or the shock 
producing the impression may result, as usual, 
from the direct action of the hand, but this 
gives an irregular or insufficient impressioni. 
Another improvement consists in providing 
for a regular and adjustable shock instead of 
this irregular pressure. 
In order that my invention and the mode of 
carrying it into practice may be properly un 
derstood, I will proceed to describe the same 
with reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, which represent a machine with type 
wheels, this machine being constructed in two 
forms which embody my improvements here 
in before set forth in a general manner. 
The figures show that this machine is made 
in two symmetrical halves. 
Figure 1 is a diagram showing how thema 
chine, seen from the left-hand side of the op 
erator, must be placed before him in an in 
clined position in order to be operated. Fig. 
2 is a diagram which shows the position given 
to the machine in the following figures in or 
der that these figures may be clearer. Fig. 3 
shows an end elevation of the machine thus 
placed, with the right-hand end of the car 
riage as seen from the place of the operator. 
Fig. 4 shows, to an enlarged scale, a perspec 
tive view of the right-hand type-wheel with 
its accessory parts. Fig. 5 shows a plan of 
the right-hand half of the machine, a part of 
the arm being broken off so that parts below 
5 O 
 
55 
7 O 
75 
OO 
2 
581,598 
75 
O 
25 
35 
55 
may be seen. Fig. 6 shows a vertical section 
of this right-hand half. Fig. 7 is a vertical 
section, on the line acac of Fig. 6, of the rear 
part, where a Spring for lifting the arm is ar 
ranged. Fig. 8 is a plan of the left-hand half 
of the machine and of the left-hand extremity 
of the carriage. Fig. 9 is an elevation of the 
machine seen from the left-hand side and 
also of the end of the carriage. Figs. 10, 11, 
and 12 are diagrams showing the arrangement 
and operation of the string. Fig. 13 shows a 
plan of a pedal made in two parts in order to 
regulate the shock producing the impression. 
Fig. 14 is a section on the line acac of Fig. 13. 
Fig. 15 shows a vertical section and elevation 
of the arrangements of the cone at the end of 
the rod with a sleeve or a thimble serving to 
hold the cone. Figs. 16, 17, and 18 represent 
part of the same machine, showing a modifi 
cation in the arrangement or mounting of the 
type-wheel. 
In all the figures the same or similar parts 
are designated by the same letters or num 
bers without any index 1 in the case of the 
parts forming the right-hand half and with 
an index 1 in the case of the parts forming 
the left-hand half. 
The frame of the machine consists of a plat 
form A, upon which are fixed two uprights B 
B', a block C between these two uprights, and 
two blocks DD', which serve as seats for plac 
ing and fixing different parts. 
A long arm E is pivoted horizontally upon 
two adjustable points C, b, so that it can be 
moved in a vertical plane. This arm carries 
at its extremity a wheel F, provided at its 
periphery with, say, forty types, and fixed to 
the end of a horizontal shaft c, which can 
turn and slide in two brackets de, forming a 
single piece fixed below the said arm E. 
Upon the same shaft care secured a drumf 
and a wheel g, made of steel, which has forty 
triangular teeth, and consequently forty in 
termediate spaces, each of which corresponds 
to one of the forty types of the wheel F. A 
Spiral Spring h, bearing against the bracket cl 
and pushing against the hemispherical nut i, 
screwed on the end of the shaft c, always 
causes the wheel to return to the right-hand 
side. An adjustable spring Z, Fig. 7, in 
closed in the block C, lifts the arm E, whose 
upward movement is limited by an adjust 
able hooki, arranged above the fixed support 
G. The spring Z has its point of support 
upon a screw made with a broad head and 
screwed into the block C. Through a hole 
provided in the arm E, I may reach this screw 
and turn it in order to regulate the tension 
of the spring. 
At O is the central point where the types 
on the right-hand and left-hand wheels are to 
make the impression. 
For turning the wheel F, I employ a string 
le, arranged as particularly shown in Figs. 10 
and 12. One end, which passes through the 
periphery of the drum f, is stopped by a knot 
located in the cavity l, after which the string, 
passing half-way round the drum in the di 
rection of the arrow, is wound upon the pulley 
m, then upon the pulley 7, passes again half 
way round the drum f, extends through its 
periphery, and is finally stopped by a knot lo 
cated in the cavity p. The pulley in is fixed 
upon the block C, hollowed out for this pur 
pose. The pulley n, is arranged by means of 
two pressing-screws with a sliding device 
upon a plate fixed to the transverse piece H, 
carried by two rods II", the feet of which are 
secured in the block C and which are held by 
two supports J J'. The pulley in is a little 
larger than the drum fin order that the up 
per string may not rub upon the drum. I 
place the two guide-pulleys at a distance from 
each other, so as to give the String a Suitable 
tension. This string is fixed by the pressure 
of a screw it upon a small slide or traveler K, 
whose front and rear edges are bent down 
ward and pierced with holes, so as to slide 
along two steel rods it, 
l, which are fixed at 
their extremities to the head of the fixed sup 
ports G and L. 
The upper part of the Support G forms a 
gibbet, so that the lower portion of the string 
I may freely pass underneath without rub 
bing. Upon the slide or traveler IK is piv 
oted vertically by the bolt ; a fork?, in which 
turns the horizontal extremity of a rod M. 
At the free extremity of this rod is fixed a 
small metallic cone N, provided with a sleeve, 
as hereinafter set forth. 
On the arm E is fixed horizontally a plate 
P, of ebonite or other suitable material, which 
is not represented in Fig. 5. (See the plate 
P in the plan, Fig. 8.) On lines which are 
shown on this plate P', and which will be ex 
plained, this plate is perforated with forty 
holes, so that by inserting the cone N there 
in the wheel F as it turns will present a pre 
determined type to the point O. A desired 
type being thus brought to an approximate 
position, I cause it to descend and to make 
its impression exactly at the point O by the 
following means: 
Figs. 3, 4, and 5 (particularly Fig. 3) show 
an inclined plane 12, made in one part with 
a plate 13, which is secured by a pressing and 
adjusting bolt 14 to the plate 15, fixed to the 
rod I. By means of the bolt 14, which trav 
erses crossed grooves, I may regulate the dis 
tance and inclination of the inclined plane 12 
relatively to the nut at the end of the shaft c. 
A part R. (shown in perspective, Fig. 4) car 
lies a steel rod 16, the free end 17 of which, 
bent horizontally at a right angle, may have 
the form of a knife, and another rod 18, which 
is straight or preferably a little bulged in 
front of the end of the knife-shaped rod. A 
support 19, formed of a bent plate, is fixed 
upon the block D by means of screws or other 
Wise in such a manner that I may regulate its 
position laterally. Upon this support is fixed 
the part R by means of bolts or otherwise, so 
that I may regulate the position of the knife 
shaped rod toward the front and in height. 
9 O 
95 
Co 
IO5 
IO 
II 5 
581,598 
3. 
=3.14 millimetel's for caus 75 
IC 
15 
25 
35 
45 
25.7 
40 
The part 20, with its appendices, appertains 
to an inking arrangement which will herein 
after be set forth. 
The operation takes place in the following 
manner: Seizing the sleeve of the cone N 
with the fingers of the light hand, I insert 
this cone into the hole of the plate P corre 
sponding to the type which I wish to produce, 
and I press so as to lower the arm E. The 
intermediate space between the teeth of the 
wheel g which corresponds to the desired type 
has passed above the knife-shaped rod and 
will bear upon this latter as the said arm is 
lowered. At the same time the nut i slides 
along the inclined plane 12, and the type 
wheel is thus pushed to the left-hand side of 
the operator, (the right-hand side of Fig. 3.) 
At the moment when the type arrives at Oits 
iosition is very accurately fixed rearward by 
the knife-shaped rod and laterally by the face 
of the wheel g bearing on the left-hand side 
against the rod 1S and the nut at the end of 
the shaft c bearing exactly against the lower 
part of the inclined plane 12. Of course the 
respective positions of the part R. and of the 
inclined plane 12 have been regulated so as 
to obtain this result with accuracy. As soon 
as the cone N is raised the arm E rises with 
the type-wheel, which returns to the right 
hand side to its normal position. 
The following is a method of finding prac 
tically the center of the forty holes pierced 
in the plate P and also in the plate P: The 
slide or traveler K" being at its point of de 
parture, as shown in Fig. 8, I lower the arm 
E", so that the toothed wheel will bear upon 
its knife-shaped rod, and while the corre 
sponding type on the wheel F (say, for in 
stance, the number 2) is thus held in po 
sition I draw with the point of the cone N' 
an arc of a circle 2" upon the plate P. A hole 
pierced at any point of this arc of a circle 
would be an exact register of the type 2. In 
like manner I draw the arcs 3' 4' 5", &c., 
after having successively fixed the types 345. 
Upon the plate P, I draw four straight longi 
tudinal lines 2, which all intersect the arcs of 
circles. I pierce holes having for their cen 
ters the points of intersection 2 3 4 5, &c. 
Thus I obtain holes arranged in regular order, 
which are each an exact registering-point and 
into which I have to insert the cone N' in 
order that the types 2 3 4 5, &c., shall be 
brought to the predetermined position. 
The character or type which corresponds 
to each hole may be indicated to the operator 
simply by a small rectangular tablet upon 
white fabric fixed below the plate by its four 
corners by means of elastic bands, so as to 
yield to the point of the cone. The tablet 
would show in each hole the type correspond 
ing to the same. 
It may here be observed that it is necessary 
to use an in extensible string. Among the 
strings which may be suitable I mention the 
fishing-line, which has the stress of flax thread. 
Before employing this string I subject it to 
strong tension in order that it may not be 
liable to lengthen any farther. Moreover, 
with a view to better insuring this result I 
propose the following dimensions: a drum 
of forty millimeters in diameter, which gives 
a development of 125.7 millimeters to the 
movement of the slide or traveler and a dis 
placement of 
ing the wheel to advance through the space 
from one type to the following. By enlarg 
ing the drum I am obliged to lengthen the 
plate, which enables me to make larger reg 
istering holes, if desired. With a toothed 
wheel of sixty millimeters in diameter, in 
cluding the teeth, I obtain between the points 
of two consecutive teeth an interval of 4.7 
millimeters for insuring the bearing upon the 
knife-shaped rod. 
The long rod with double pivots, which has 
for its object to bring the types into an ap 
proximate position in combination with the 
registering-plate arranged in the direction of 
the path traveled over by the pivot of the 
rod, affords the means of providing in this 
plate a registering-tablet with large holes in 
the described manner. By applying this part 
of my invention to a machine it is needful 
that the plate should not be removed too much 
from the direction followed by the pivot of 
the rod, that the registering holes should not 
be separated too much in the lateral direc 
tion, and that the rod should not be short 
ened too much for fear of increasing too much 
the inaccuracy in the operation and the diffi 
culty in working too short a rod and pulling 
and pushing too obliquely, as is obvious. 
The drawings show a rod of about one hun 
dred and thirty millimeters. 
The pulley in might be used alone and would 
be sufficient for causing the drum to turn hy 
means of a string; but by arranging the pull 
ley in in front of the drum the latter is drawn 
by the cord in opposite directions, and by this 
means the friction of the shaft c in its brack 
ets when sliding, as well as when turning, is 
almost obviated. Moreover, the variations of 
the string itself are almost obviated by being 
distributed in its two directions. 
It would be expedient to arrange the pull 
leys an and 7 and the guides of the slide or 
traveler K on the arm E itself in order that 
these parts may participate in the movement 
of this pedal which carries the wheel. By ar 
ranging the said parts, on the contrary, in a 
fixed manner I relieve to that extent the said 
arm, which is a movable part, this being ad 
vantageous. Besides, the employment of the 
string with guide-pulleys in and n, which are 
purposely very far away from the drum?, en 
ables me, owing to the flexibility of a string 
which is a little stretched, but long, to give to 
the type-wheel the small downward displace 
ment necessary for correcting the position of 
the type and making its impression simulta 
neously with the small lateral displacement, 
which has the result that I may combinetwo 
OC) 
O 
I IS 
I 30 
 
4. 
581,598 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
similar apparatus to make the impresssion at 
the same point O; but it is necessary to ob 
viate the inconveniences which result from 
these arrangements. In the first place, when 
the type-wheel is lowered as the pulleys m. 
and n are fixed, the lower portions of the cord 
will occupy the forced and false position 
which is shown in elevation and plan, Figs. 
11 and 12. For this reason the pulleys should 
be at a suitable distance from the drum?, and 
the extent to which the wheel must be low 
ered and displaced laterally should be as 
small as possible. Furthermore, from the 
moment when the pedal is lowered the cone 
N, which is then in the hole of the plate, de 
scribes an arc of a circle which has virtually 
for its center the pivot b of the arm E, thus 
causing a small displacement of the pivot of 
the rod and consequently of the slide or trav 
eler, the string, and, lastly, the wheel F. To 
diminish this irregularity, the arrangement, 
is such that the pivots of the arm E and also 
the horizontal pivot of the rod in its fork of 
may be nearly in the same plane as the plate 
P. It will therefore be seen that the employ 
ment of a long rod doubly pivoted, combined 
with a registering-plate having large holes, 
is independent of the employment of a string 
for operating the part which carries the types. 
Accordingly, I may apply the first part of my 
invention to a type-Writing machine without 
applying the second. 
If, for example, in a machine wherein the 
types are on a pivoted part, the part with the 
types must not be removed from its axis of 
rotation, I may, by using the string, if neces 
sary, diminish the distance between its pull 
leys. In case the types describe the arc of a 
circle having a long radius, with a central 
pivot for a guide, as also when the types are 
- ?lisplaced in a straight line, I need not use a 
string, if it should not be deemed advanta 
geous, and I then pivot the long rod directly 
upon the part which carries the types or upon 
an appendix or prolongation fixed to this 
part, in Order to profit by the particular ad 
vantages obtained by this long rod with a 
double pivot, combined with a registering 
plate arranged and constructed in the de 
scribed manner. This plate, on being lowered, 
may actuate the parts of the machine which 
must effect the rectification of the position 
and the impression of the type, if the machine 
is provided with such parts. Tastly, this 
plate may be arranged in a fixed position, 
not pivoted, if it is not required to actuate 
parts producing these latter results. 
For inking the types I proceed in the fol 
lowing manner: The tube 21, by its plate and 
a Screw or other means, is fixed in an adjust 
able manner to the support 19. The small 
inking-roller 22 is provided at the twice-bent 
extremity of a rod which turns axially in 
the tube 21. A spring wound into this tube 
always returns the rod and its roller to the 
left-hand side of the operator. When the 
wheel F is lowered, the type which descends 
encounters the roller, is charged with ink, 
and the roller being pivoted laterally with 
respect to the path followed by the type this 
roller will be pushed to the right, (the left in 
Figs. 1, 3, and 4.) While the type makes its 
impression, the roller is in contact with the 
circular inking device 23, arranged round the 
drum. When the arm E is raised, the roller, 
moving upon the face of the wheel F, returns 
to its normal position and is ready to ink 
again. This device may be replaced by the 
customary inking-ribbon, use being made of 
two bobbins arranged, for example, below the 
inclined planes 12, or a little to the outside 
of them upon the rods I, the ribbon moving 
from one to the other bobbin, passing below 
the type-wheels, and, if desired, a small bell 
crank lever, actuated by the arms E when 
they are lowered, presents the ribbon below 
the wheels and moves it to the rear after the 
impression in order to uncover the writing. 
The carriage V, sliding upon two rails r, is 
moved to the left-hand side by the strap q, 
fixed to the drum Y, having a spiral clock 
spring. With the rack 6 engage alternately 
two pawls S, which are carried by a large os 
cillating fork 7, pivoted horizontally to the 
head of two supports X X" and moved to the 
rear by a spring. This fork is furnished 
with an arm 23, carrying a transverse piece 
24, which extends to the right and to the left 
hand side below an adjustable tappet fixed 
to each arm E E' in such a manner that the 
downward movement of each of them causes 
the oscillation of the pawl, and consequently 
the escapement of a tooth in the ordinary 
manner. By pressing upon the large key 33 
I operate the escapement independently of 
the arms E. E'. 
The paper is carried and controlled by one 
of the known devices adapted for the pur 
pose. The one represented carries a large 
roller Q and a small roller S, between which 
the sheet of paper passes, whereupon it rests 
upon a transverse piece T, serving as a Sup 
port, which is provided with plastic material. 
Upon the axis of the large roller are fixed a 
large knob U and a wheel with six notches, 
into which drops the stud on a springs, which 
regulates the spacing between the lines. The 
pawls are secured upon a rectangular plate. 
(Represented in dotted lines, Fig. 6.) This 
plate is secured by the pivot 25 and placed 
flat upon another rectangular plate 26, bent 
upward at a right angle after having been 
cut, as shown in the drawings by mixed lines, 
Fig. 3, from the metallic plate forming the 
fork. By means of this pivot the pawls may 
be raised in order to be disengaged from the 
rack. For this purpose a nose 27 projects 
from the plate of the pawls. A strip 2S, 
which extends from one end to the other of 
the carriage, is mounted upon this carriage 
as a hinge by its longside and furnished with 
a lever 29. When I seize with the fingers of 
the left hand the aforesaid knob U, I press 
with the thumb upon the extremity of the 
75 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
581,598 
5 
IO 
3O 
35 
lever 29. The edge of the strip 2S, which is 
below the nose of the pawls, (see section, Fig. 
6,) raises this nose, and, sliding below, keeps 
the pawls disengaged while I push the car 
riage to the right-hand side. By their weight 
or by the action of a spring the pawls drop 
upon the lack as soon as the strip is allowed 
to fall back. 
For the purpose of rendering the shock 
which causes the impression of the type in 
dependent of the hand of the operator, I 
make the pedal in two parts, Fig. 13. One 
part E remains under the action of the lift 
ing-spring Z, and the other part E rests with 
its weight upon the first. The latteris formed 
of a metallic plate pivoted at a and b upon 
the arm E, to which plate is fixed by the 
screws ' ', or otherwise, the arm receiving 
at its end the type-wheel F. As shown in 
Fig. 11, the arm E is hollowed or recessed, 
and the plate P is fixed above at its rear part, 
its front part being carried by a forked piece 
30, so as to leave below the plate P the space 
necessary for not interfering with the point 
of the cone N. The arm E is hollowed or re 
cessed below the edge of the plate P in order 
that the latter may descend with the arm E 
Without pressing upon the arm E. The type 
wheel, which is arranged below and at the 
extremity of the arm E in the axial line c i, 
cannot be reached by the plate P. When, 
under these circumstances, the arm E is low 
ered, the arm E and its wheel descend by 
their own weight alone; but as the arm E 
moves upward it raises the arm E, which, 
abutting against the stop j, arrests the up 
Ward movement of the arm E. The lever 29 
is fixed below the pedal E and prolonged so 
that it will bear upon the transverse piece 24 
of the arm of the pawls. 
The inclined position of the machine in op 
eration, Fig. 1, diminishes the falling weight 
of the arm and its wheel, which has the advan 
tage of necessitating a weaker lifting-spring, 
and consequently a smaller pressure of the fin 
ger for lowering the arm; but a certain falling 
force being necessary I provide, if desired, 
an adjustable spring, which assists the action 
of the weight and enables the force of the 
shock due to the type-wheel to be regulated. 
For greater convenience in the manipula 
tion of the cone N the latter may be provided 
with a rod or with a thimble, as shown in Fig. 
15. The rod terminates in a small ball, which 
is articulated in the cone in the known man 
ner in order that this rod may be able to turn 
and incline in any direction, or a thimble with 
a spherical bottom is retained in the cone by 
a. Somewhat elastic connection. 
In a somewhat modified arrangement of the 
machine hereinbefore described, instead of 
using a type-Wheel turning and sliding in two 
brackets provided at the end of a long arm 
pivoted at the rear of the frame, I mount the 
type-wheel axially at the end of an arm E, 
pivoted on the side of the frame by two points 
al)', as shown in front elevation, Fig. 16, and 
plan, Fig. 17. 
The type-wheel F, its toothed wheel g, and 
its drum fare arranged upon a sleeve which 
turns at the end of the arm E. The inclina 
tion of this axis allows of the symmetrical ar 
rangement of two wheels F and F', (the latter 
being only indicated in Fig. 16,) whose pe 
riphery with a conical surface is provided 
with types, so that one or the other wheel on 
being lowered will make the impression of its 
types at the same point O. The pivots at 
being lower than the point O, (which is the 
upper level of the carriage,) these pivots, as 
shown in plan, Fig. 17, are moved to the rear 
of the path of the carriage in order to leave 
this path free. They are arranged upon the 
block D, which is widened and notched for 
this purpose. The arrangement and opera 
tion are the same as before. The plate P is 
provided upon the arm E, which has a lifting 
spring. Along this plate are the guides at it 
for the slide or traveler K, Fig. 17, upon which 
the rod M is pivoted. The string k is wound 
upon the drum f and upon the pulleys an and 
in, (not represented,) which are fixed in an 
inclined position like the drum f. The knife 
shaped rod 17 corrects the position of the 
types by the wheel g. Near the end of the 
arm E is fixed a part 36, carrying a roller 35, 
which takes below the bent end of the arm 
34, which projects from the arm E. When 
I lower this arm, the wheel F falls by its own 
weight. If necessary, however, a spring is 
provided in order to augment or even dimin 
ish the action of the weight, the inclination 
of the machine in operation producing also 
in this case the before - mentioned effects. 
The flexibility of the cord is still utilized, but 
the parts which insure the displacement and 
the lateral separation of the wheel are dis 
pensed with. In Figs. 16 and 17 the rod I is 
farther away from the center than before. It 
may also be brought near the upper part of 
the support X, for example at I, Fig. 16. 
If for the impression I do not use the ordi 
nary ribbon, it will be preferable to join the 
two inking-rollers 22 22', as shown in eleva 
tion from the left-hand side, Fig. 18, in plan, 
Fig. 17, and in front elevation, Fig. 16. The 
part which unites their rods is fixed to the 
lower extremity of a rod 43 either in a flexi 
ble manner or by means of an articulation 
with a spring 42, which assures the same re 
sult. This rod is mounted at the top of a gib 
bet-support 39 40, so as to oscillate like the 
balance of a clock. Two spring-strips 41. 41' 
move this part back to the vertical position. 
A bent appendix 3S is attached to the end of 
the axis upon which turns the type-Wheel. 
When this wheel F descends, the type in po 
sition encounters the rollers 22, which yields. 
Then the appendix 3S, acting like a cam upon 
the side of the heart 37, pushes the rod 43 to 
the left of the operator, and the roller 22 is 
charged with ink on the left face of the wheel 
45 
 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
I 1.5 
I 25 
13o 
6 
581,598 
F, while the type makes its impression at the 
point O. When the wheel F is raised, the 
rollers return to the normal position and are 
ready to ink a type on the corresponding 
wheel which descends. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion. With the platen, of a pivoted arm, a type 
Wheel rotatably and slidably mounted in said 
arm, a flexible member for rotating said type 
Wheel, a registering-plate carried by the arm, 
a movable rod connected with said flexible 
member and adapted in conjunction with the 
registering-plate to operate said type-wheel, 
and means for correcting the position of the 
type-wheel. 
2. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with the frame and platen, of a pivoted 
arm, a type-wheel mounted in said arm, a 
registering-plate carried by the arm, a flexi 
ble member connected with the wheel for ro 
tating it, a rod movably mounted on the frame 
and connected with said flexible member for 
Operating the Salme, and adapted in conjunc 
tion with the registering-plate to move the 
Wheel to make the impression. 
3. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion with a platen, and a registering-plate, of 
a rotatable type-carrier, a fixed way, or guide, 
a slide or traveler working on said way, a 
flexible member secured to said slide passing 
around guide-pulleys and adapted to rotate 
the carrier in either direction, and an oper 
ating-rod for said type-carrier movably con 
nected to saidslide, substantially as described. 
4. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a platen, of a pivoted arm, a type 
carrier, rotatably and slidably mounted in said 
arm, a fixed way or guide, a slide or traveler 
Working on said Way, a connection from said 
slide for rotating the type-carrier, an oper 
a big-pad for said slide movably connected 
there with, a registering-plate, and means act 
ing to correct the position of the type-carrier, 
substantially as described. 
5. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion with the platen, of a movable arm, a type 
carrier rotatably and slidably mounted on said 
arm, a registering-plate, a flexible member 
connected to said type-carrier, a rod connect 
ed to said flexible member, and adapted in 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
conjunction with the registering-plate to ap 
proximately position the type - carrier, and 
means for correcting the position of the car 
rier, comprising an inclined plane for sliding 
the carrier, a knife-shaped rod, and a projec 
tion on the carrier adapted to engage said rod 
for rotating the carrier, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a platen, of a pivoted supporting 
arm, means for lifting said arm, a second piv 
oted arm, a type-carrier carried by said sec 
Ond arm, and means on the first arm for Sup 
porting Said Second arm, substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion of a platen, a pivoted arm, a second arm 
pivoted to the first arm, a type-carrier mount 
ed on Said second arm, a registering-plate car 
Iried by the first arm, means adapted in con 
junction with said registering-plate to posi 
tion and operate said type-carrier, substan 
tially as described. 
8. In a type-Writing machine, the combina 
tion with a platen, of two pivoted frames, ro 
tatable type-wheels one carried by each frame 
and arranged side by side on axes substan 
tially in a linement, means for operating said 
wheels, and mechanism for shifting said 
wheels to cause thelm to make impressions at 
the same point. 
9. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a platen, of two dependent pivoted 
arms, a rotatable type-wheel carried by each 
arm, independent means for rotating said 
Wheels, and stationary means for shifting said 
wheels bodily to cause them to make impres 
sions at the same point. 
10. In a type-writing machine, the combina 
tion with a platen, of two frames mounted on 
pivots parallel with the axis of the platen, a 
type-wheel carried by each of said frames, 
and cams for shifting said type-wheels to 
cause them to make impressions at the same 
point, Substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 17th day of July, 
A. D. 1895. 
EMILE IEVESQUE. 
Witnesses: 
H. PETKOURKI, 
CLYDE SHROPSHIRE. 
90 
95 
ICO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581699.txt	(No Model.) 
A. F. DODDRIDGE, 
APPARATUS FOR GENERATING ACETYLENE GAS, 
No. 581,699. 
Patented May 4, 1897. 
fe 
2 
 
 
ZM - a M. 7 - C Me. 
AZabe ap7 A.Z.o.o di?t 2G a 
ar/lovday, Satyryl-deo? 
a//s 1777 or Mas Y (s. 
the Norris PETERS co, PHoTo-Litho. wash Neron, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT F. DODDRIDGE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO JAMES E. 
MERRITT, OF SAME PLACE. 
APPARATUS FOR GENERATING ACETY ENE GAS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,699, dated May 4, 1897. 
Application filed March 18, 1896, 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERT F. DODDRIDGE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Apparatus for Producing and 
Controlling Acetylene Gas, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to an apparatus for 
automatically producing and controlling 
acetylene gas by the chemical action result 
ing when calcium carbid is brought into con 
tact with Water; and the invention consists 
in the novel devices and novel combinations 
of parts and devices herein shown and de 
Scribed, and more particularly pointed out 
in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a sec 
tional view of my improved apparatus, and 
Fig. 2 is a sectional view of a modified form 
of the same containing some of the features 
of the invention. 
In Said drawings, A is a water vessel, and 
B an inverted gas-chamber, these two mem 
bers constituting an ordinary telescoping 
gas-holder. Counterbalancing-weights b, at 
tached to cords b', which pass over pulleys 
b and are connected to the inverted holder B, 
may be employed, as is sometimes customary, 
to give greater sensitiveness to the move 
ments of the gas-holder, if desired. 
C is a float resting on the surface of the 
Water in the gas-holder. I make this pref 
erably of metal and hollow. This float C 
should have buoyancy enough to sustain out 
of contact with the water the wire-mesh 
basket D and also the additional weight of 
Whatever amount of calcium carbid it is in 
tended to place in the apparatus. An excess 
of buoyancy in the float beyond this necessary 
amount is, within reasonable limit, no detri 
ment. The function of the Wire-mesh basket 
D is to contain the calcium carbid in such 
manner that the chemical may be maintained 
out of contact with the Water by the buoyancy 
of the float or immersed in the water to more 
or less extent when this buoyancy is overcome 
by any means. 
Eis a submerging bar or plate placed above 
the float and basket and connected to a rod 
Serial No. 583,677, (No model,) 
e, which passes up through a stuffing-boxe', 
and has a handle e' on the outside of the in 
verted gas-holder. A set-screw e' serves to 
fix the submerger E at any desired position. 55 
F is a cock for letting the air out of the 
holder when it is to be set, and G is a similar 
cock for making the desired gas connection 
to the holder. 
El Hare weights placed on top of the in 
verted holder to cause the same to sink. 
c care guards extending from the float to 
prevent the float escaping from its proper cen 
tral position. 
The operation is as follows: A quantity of 
calcium carbid is placed in the basket D. 
The submerger E is raised to its highest po 
sition, and the weights II Hare applied to the 
top of the inverted holder. These weights 
are or should be sufficient in amount to push 
the holder down, the air-cock F being opened, 
until the submerger E comes in contact with 
the basket and to push down the float, sub 
merging it until the basket containing the cal 
cium carbid is brought into contact with the 
water and the calcium carbid at its lower 
parts also into contact with the water, which 
passes through the meshes of the wire bas 
ket. The acetylene gas is immediately there 
upon generated and begins to fill the holder. 
The air-cock F is then closed and the gas 
cock G opened, whereupon the gas will pass 
off to the place it is to be stored or used 
through the cock G. A constant pressure 
Will be maintained in the holder, or a prac 
tically constant one, by reason of the fact that 
assoon as pressure enough to raise the Weight 
of the holder and the superadded Weights H 
His created the submerger E will be lifted 
from the basket, and the buoyancy of the 
float coming into operation will lift the bas 
ket and its contained calcium carbid out of 
contact with the water, and the further gen 
eration of gas Will cease, or practically cease; 
and when the pressure diminishes again the 
weights will again push down the holder and 
again submerge the float and bring the cal 
cium carbid into contact again with the Wa 
ter, causing the gas to be again generated 
and the pressure to be increased, and so on 
until the calcium carbid is completely ex 
hausted. 
95 
IOO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
581,699 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
It will be noticed that the operation of this 
apparatus is the same when a large weight of 
calcium carbid is contained in the basket as 
when a small Weight is contained therein 
that is to say, the change of the weight of the 
chemical as it is consumed in the generation of 
the gas cannot affect the balance or sensitive 
ness of the movements of the inverted gas 
holder B, because the calcium carbid is not 
supported from said holder in any manner, 
but is independently supported by the float 
upon which it rests. 
The purpose of having the submerger E 
adjustable as to height is simply in order that 
a larger amount of gas may be contained in 
the upper portion of the holder without af 
fecting the sensitiveness of operation of the 
apparatus. Thus when said holder begins to 
fill with gas and thus to raise the submerger 
E may be adjusted to a lower point, so that 
the escape or using of a small amount of gas 
and the consequent Small drop or lowering 
of the holder will submerge the float and set 
up generation again. By means of this ad 
justable Submerger it will be seen that a con 
siderable quantity of gas may be kept in the 
upper part of the holder. 
Where the output is required to be fluctu 
atting, and consequently a still greater supply 
of gas is required to be kept in store, I em 
ploy in conjunction with the apparatus just 
described a second non-generating holder 
and controller comprising the two vessels A' 
B', having the weight H' and connected to 
the generating apparatus by the pipe J, which 
may be a flexible tube. This apparatus has 
a stop K to prevent the rise of the holder B' 
beyond a given point, and the weight of the 
holder B', including its superadded weight 
H' or the pressure per square inch of gas 
within it required to raise it, is fixed at a lit 
tle below the weight of the generating-holder 
and its superadded weights Hor the pressure 
required to raise it. The consequence is that 
the holder B' will fill and rise slightly in ad 
vance of the generating-holder, which latter 
will not rise until the receiving-holder has 
reached its uppermost limit and encountered 
the stop K, and in the converse operation as 
the gas is used or escapes from the storing 
holder B' this holder will not sink until the 
generating-holder has sunk. By this simple 
means a larger body of gas may be kept on 
hand and at the same time a nicer adjust 
ment and control of the operation main 
tained. 
Although I prefer to use the float as being 
the simplest means of maintaining the cal 
cium carbid out of contact with the water as 
required When the pressure is great enough, 
some of the advantages of my invention may 
be arrived at by the means indicated in Fig. 
2, where the wire-mesh basket containing the 
chemical is held up out of the water by means 
of counterbalancing - weights W, connected 
by a cord or chain W' to the basket D, pass 
ing over pulleys W*; and in this modifica 
tion instead of the adjustable submerger E, 
I have provided upright submerger-rods E", 
attached to the basket, and which come in 
contact with the top of the holder when the 
latter descends far enough. Otherwise the 
apparatus may be the same in all particulars. 
This modification of the submerger dispenses 
with the necessity of the stuffing-box and may 
be used in conjunction with the float form of 
the apparatus, if desired. The bottom of the 
vessel A, as shown in Fig. 1, is provided with 
a draw-off cock M for drawing off the pre 
cipitates in cleaning out the generator, and 
said bottom is for this purpose inclined from 
all points toward said draw-off cock. This is 
a desirable addition to the apparatus. 
By the means I have described an auto 
matic generator and controller quite unchang 
ing in its operation and of a very simple, 
cheap, and easily - maintained character is 
produced. 
I claim 
In an automatic apparatus for generating 
and controlling acetylene gas, the combina 
tion with a telescoping gas-holder, of a cal 
cium - carbid container movably suspended 
within said gas-holder independently thereof 
and in such manner that said container may 
be lowered into contact with the Water in the 
gas-holder or raised out of contact there with 
whereby the gas-holder is relieved of the 
Weight of said container and its contents, 
substantially as specified. 
ALBERT F. DODDRIDGE. 
Witnesses: 
H. M. MUNDAY, 
JOHN W. MUNDAY. 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581799.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 581,799. 
G. WINCQZ & H. MACHEPY, 
HYDRAULIC LIFT, 
Patented May 4, 1897. 
A2.2eataea. 
Zezzeezza72 
6%e2azze 7272.62, 
2.25ey 426%e2% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GREGOIRE WINCQZ AND HUBERT MACHEPY, OF SOIGNIES, BELGIUM. 
HYDRAUC LiFT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,799, dated May 4, 1897. 
Application filed December 2, 1896, Serial No. 614,218, (No model.) Patented in Belgium 0ctober 28, 1896, No. 1244:52, 
55 
75 
To all who77, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GREGOIRE WINCQZ, a 
citizen of Belgium, and HUBERT MACHEPY, a 
citizen of France, residing at Soignies, Bel 
gium, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Hydraulic Lifts, (for which 
We have obtained a patent in Belgium, No. 
124,452, dated October 28, 1896;) and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accornpanying 
dra Wing, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which forms a part of this specifica 
tion. 
Elevators, whether for the public or for 
merchandise, have heretofore generally been 
Operated by mechanical instrumentalities, as 
by Winch or steam or electrically or by means 
of simple or compound hydraulic pistons. An 
absolutely regular function is not attainable 
by the use of these mechanisms, because the 
precision of the function is dependent upon 
the arrangement of the mechanical appli 
ances and upon the intelligence, attention, 
and care of the operator. In hydraulic ele 
Vators, on the other hand, a simple leakage 
may suffice to start the elevator without pos 
sibility of stopping it. 
The object of our invention is to avoid these 
lifficulties by the substitution for the me 
3hanical appliances of a hydrostatic balance 
evice. 
In order that our invention may be fully 
understood, we will describe the same in de 
tail in conjunction with the accompanying 
ilrawing, which illustrates an elevator em 
bodying our invention by a sectional more or 
less Schematic elevation. 
As shown in said drawing, a chain or cable 
B, l'unning over the pulley C, has secured to 
pne end the elevator cage or platform A and 
to the other end a counterbalancing-weight 
D in a body of liquid, as water, contained 
in a reservoir E, that is provided with a dis 
:harge cock or valve S, means being provided 
Jo Supply Water to such reservoir, as from a 
valved pipe R, connected with a suitable 
Source of Water-supply, the arrangement be 
ng Such as to form a hydrostatic balance 
 
that is to say, the counterweight equilibrates 
or balances the weight of the cage or platform 
when the former is not completely immersed 
in the water, and therefore performs the func 
tion of a float, so to speak. If the Weight of 
the load placed in the cage or on the platform 
A is less than that of the volume of Water 
displaced by the counterweightD, it will sim 
ply be necessary to destroy the equilibrium 
of the hydrostatic balance by opening the 
stop-cock S of the reservoir E and allowing 
the water therein to flow out, when the bal 
ancing-weight Will descend and the cage or 
platform ascend, the reverse being the case 
when water is again admitted to reservoir E 
through pipe R, the stop S being of course 
closed. 
Although we have shown in the drawing a 
single cable or chain for the sake of simplicity, 
yet we desire it to be understood that differ 
ential or multiplying hoisting or power-trans 
mitting appliances can be used with a view 
to reducing the height of the reservoir E, so 
that the speed of the cage or platform will be 
a multiple of the speed of the counterbalance 
weight, as will be readily understood, and as 
these appliances do not per Se form a part of 
our invention. We have deemed it unneces 
sary to illustrate the same. So, also, will the 
number of pulleys C depend upon the uses 
or application of our invention, these pulleys 
acting simply as a means for transmitting the 
power utilized by the interruption of the 
equilibrium of the hydrostatic balance. 
The power, as is readily seen, is a cheap 
one wherever a liquid of any kind is avail 
able, the installation is a simple and cheap 
one as compared with that for elevators now 
in general use, and the system is applicable 
to all purposes and practically in all loca 
tions, does not entail great expenditures in 
repairs, can be operated by any one of ordi 
nary intelligence, while its perfect function 
is assured at all times. 
The uniformity of the speed of the cage or 
platform is, as will also be readily under 
stood, established by the hydrostatic equilib 
rium, so that a brake or other safety appli 
ance, now absolutely indispensable, is notin 
dispensable to the safe operation of elevators 
embodying our invention. 
9o 
IOC 
2 
581,799 
. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
by Tetters Patent, is 
The combination with the cage or platform 
5 of an elevator and a vessel for containing a 
body of water, of a counterbalancing-weight 
freely suspended in such body of water, means 
for varying the volume of water in said ves 
sel to cause the counterbalancing-Weight to 
Io ascend or descend, and a rope connection be 
 
tween the Weight and cage or platform, and 
suitable guide-pulleys for said rope, for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
GREGOIRE WINCQZ. 
H. MACHEPY. 
Witnesses: 
C. DUMONT, 
J. CORBAIB. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581899.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELLSWORTHI R. BATHIRICK, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
DEVICE FOR APPLYING LIQUIDs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,899, dated May 4, 1897. 
Application filed March 25, 1897, Serial No. 629, 176, (No model.) 
5 
O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
35 
45 
To all zvho7m, it may concernu: 
Be it known that II, ELLSWORTH R. BATH 
RICK, of the city of Brooklyn, in the county 
of Kings and State of New York, have in 
vented a certain new and useful Improvement 
in Devices for Applying Liquids, of which the 
following is a specification. 
I will first describe the improvement in de 
tail and then point out the novel features in 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a device embodying my 
improvement. Fig. 2 is a cross-section of the 
same, taken through the plane of the dotted 
line 2 2, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a section of the de 
vice shown in Fig. 1, taken through the plane 
of the dotted line 3 3, Fig. 1, looking in the 
direction of the arrows in Fig. 1; and Fig. 4 
is a view of the head of the device shown in 
Fig. 1, looking downward. 
Similar letters of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures. 
A designates a reservoir, the two walls of 
which a and Ca' have an opening a* between 
them, which opening forms the mouth of the 
reservoir. This reservoir may be made of any 
suitable material and of any desired shape. 
a designates a screw-cap which may be re 
moved at pleasure to permit of the filling of 
the reservoir A. 
B designates a support for a pad C. This 
support Bis shown as V-shaped, and that part 
of the support B which is directly over the 
opening a of the reservoir A is open, so as 
to permit liquid contained in the reservoir to 
pass through to the pad C. The support B is 
strengthened by the braces B'. 
The pad C is preferably made of felt, but 
any material may be employed which will hold 
the liquid which passes through the mouth a* 
of the reservoir A in suspense, and discharge 
such liquid upon being applied to the surface 
to which the liquid is intended to be applied. 
As shown, the pad C extends beyond the 
edges of the support B. 
D designates a block placed over the pad 
C, and the edges of the pad C are shown as 
extending beyond this block D. 
Edesignates the handle of the device. This 
handle E fits into a tube F, forming part of or 
affixed to the resrvoir A. I may use a brace 
F", intended to impart additional strength to 
the device at the point where the greatest 
Strain occurs in use. 
G designates a rod fastened to or made in 
tegral with the handle E. At the end of the 
| rod G, which terminates in the handle E, are 
Washers e e'. 
I prefer to make the washer e' 
of felt and the washer e of metal. 
The rod G passes through a circular open 
ing in the bottom of the reservoir A and 
through a tube ca in the mouth al of the reser 
voir directly in line with the circular opening 
in the bottom of the reservoir. The rod G. 
also passes through openings cut to receive it 
in the pad C and block D. The upper end of 
the rod G is screw-threaded and a nut g is 
placed on this screw-threaded part of the rod 
G. This nut g may fit in a portion of the 
block D countersunk to receive it, and it will 
be readily understood that by merely turning 
the handle E the pressure of the block D on 
the pad C can be regulated, and as the pad C 
fits into the mouth Ca the operator can by 
this simple turning of the handle E regulate 
the supply of liquid to the pad C, and thereby 
the amount of saturation of the pad C will be 
controlled. 
The various parts of the device can be made 
of any desired materials. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A device for applying liquids consisting 
of a reservoir having an opening therein to 
form a mouth, a pad covering said opening, a 
support for said pad, and means operated by 
the handle of said device for pressing said pad 
more or less firmly to the mouth of said reser 
voir, substantially as specified. 
2. A device for applying liquids consisting 
of a reservoir having an opening therein to 
form a mouth, a pad covering said opening, a 
block partially covering said pad, a rod affixed 
to, or made integral with the handle of said 
device, said rod extending through said reser 
voir, pad and block, and a nut engaging with 
said rod to hold said pad more or less closely 
to the mouth of said reservoir, substantially 
as specified. 
3. A device for applying liquids consisting 
65 
75 
9o - 
O O 
2 
581,899 
of a reservoir having an opening therein to | hold saidl pad more or less closely to the mouth 
form a mouth, a pad covering said opening, a, | of said reservoir, substantially as specified. 
y 
support for said pad, a, block partially cover- 
ELLSWORTH R. BATHIERICK. 
ing said pad, a rod affixed to, or made inte- 
5 gral with, the handle of said device, said rod 
eXtending through said reservoir, pad and 
block, and a nut engaging With said rod to 
MATTHEW BOWEN, 
J. R. BOWIEN. 
Witnesses: 
A r 
: 
AY ( 
rNL? 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US581999.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 581,999. 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
J. G. M. O. & G. REHFUSS. 
FRINCE MACHINE 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented May 4, 1897. 
3: HH 
 
H 
 
 
NT Hi l 
I I 
 
WITNESSES: 
G2 ft. ca.742. 
NVENTORS 
& 
leads 
ATORNEY. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 581,999. 
J. G. M. 0. & G. REHFUSS. 
FRINGE MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 4, 1897. 
I SSI 
 
  
 
(No Model.) 
No. 581,999. 
 
e 
Sheets-Sheet 3, 
FRINCE MACHINE, 
Patented May 4, 897. 
9.g. 
 
 
 
 
2 A.2 
y E7. ZZ 
His 
F. ill 
 
 
 
is a 
o X\ 
N-2 e 
NS 
 
J. G., M. O. & G. REHFUSS. 
FRINGE MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
289 
Patented May 4, 1897. 
ty 
Ef'a. 2. 
N 
a 
33 
(No Model.). 
No. 581,999. 
 
 
SS 
 
a. 
NNA 
AAA 
5s NS  
a 3.SSN 
 
 
  
 
AE 
2 
2 
 
 
 
 
  
2 
2 * 
 
  
 
- 
S 
WITNESSES 
T 
 
7. 
- - 
 
 
 
 
o267 -4262- 
96.-K-eeee-ez, 
 
7s 
6. INyENTQRS 
s 
es. 
dise 
(No Miodel.) 
J. G. M. O. & G. REHFUSS. 
FRINCE MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 581,999. 
Patented May 4, 1897. 
 
 
 
2 % 
o 
 
oRR's Peters Co., Photo-Litho...washtoro. 
(No Model.) 
No. 581,999. 
J. G. M. O. & G, REHFUSS 
FRINGE MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented May 4, 1897. 
(9, 6.4% 2L2 
eG 
%23% 
23S32S2 
2%aNZ WS 6 47 
a 3. 
a N. 2 
a 
 
WITNESSES 
Cefcaea. 
 
the Nohais Perers co, PHOTO-LTHo, washingto... . 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN G. REIIFUSS, MARTIN O. REHFUSS, AND GEORGE REHFUSS, OF 
PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FRING E-MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 581,999, dated May 4, 1897. 
Application filed July 18, 1895, Serial No, 556,418, (No model.) 
Id 
20 
To al/, Luhon, it inctly concern. 
Be it known that we, JOHN G. REHFUSS, 
MARTIN O. REHFUSs, and GEORGE REHFUss, 
citizens of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of Penn 
Sylvania, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Fringe-Machines, which im 
provement is fully set forth in the following 
Specification and accompanying drawings. 
Our invention consists of a novel construc 
tion of machines for making tassel-headings, 
&c., the same having a shaft adapted to be 
continuously rotated and to form twists of 
wire or other suitable material, which latter is 
unwound from spools mounted on said shaft, 
a thread-carrier being also suitably mounted 
adjacent said shaft for the purpose of form 
ing loops, which are retained in position by 
said twists. 
It also consists in causing the thread-car 
rier to make one or two movements at each 
revolution of the continuously - revolving 
shaft, whereby one or two loops are formed 
and retained at either or both sides of the 
twists at each revolution of the said shaft. 
It also consists in causing a cessation of the 
movements of the thread-carrier at intervals, 
during which period the shaft carrying the 
Wire or other suitable material continues the 
Operation of twisting the same. 
It also consists in providing means for regu 
lating the length of the loop and the tightness 
of the same, provision being also made for 
making a greater or less number of loops in 
each tassel-heading or forming and retaining 
loops continuously. 
It further consists of novel details of con 
struction, all as will be hereinafter set forth. 
Figure 1 represents a plan view of a tassel 
heading machine embodying our invention. 
Fig. 2 represents a side elevation of the same. 
Fig. 3 represents a section in line acac, Fig. 1, 
showing the relation of a portion of the actu 
ating mechanism to one of the cams. Fig. 4 
represents a partial section on line of y, Fig. 
1, the parts being revolved from the position 
seen in said figure. Fig. 5 represents a ver 
tical section on line 2, 2, Fig. 4. Fig. 6 rep 
resents a vertical section online ac' ac', Fig. 4. 
Fig. 7 represents a side elevation of a portion 
of the mechanism seen in Fig. 2, the same be 
ing revolved from the position seen in said 
figure. Fig. 8 represents a section online 'y', 
Fig. 7. Fig. 9 represents a detailed view 
showing portions of the clutch mechanism 
about to contact. Fig. 10 represents a detailed 
view showing the manner of adjusting the 
tension of one of the feed-rolls. Fig. 11 rep 
resents an end elevation of a portion of Fig. 
1, showing the means for actuating the cut 
ter and certain other portions of the machine. 
Fig. 12 represents a vertical section through 
Fig. 11, showing the means for actuating the 
drum and the cutting device in a different 
position. Fig. 13 represents a detail plan 
view of the drum and wire-carrying spools, 
showing the manner in which the thread is 
fed prior to cutting. Fig. 14 represents the 
positions the spool-carrier, thread-carrier, and 
their adjuncts assume primarily in forming 
the tassel-head. Fig. 15 represents the posi 
tion the same elements and their adjuncts 
assume at another period during the forma 
tion of the tassel-head. Figs. 16 and 17 rep 
resent detail views showing the position the 
spool - carrier, thread-carrier, and their ad 
juncts assume in another embodiment of our 
invention in which two pins are employed. 
Fig. 1S represents a plan view of the thread 
carrier employed. Fig. 19 represents a hori 
Zontal section on line aca, Fig. 12, showing 
a portion of the actuating device for the drum. 
Figs. 20 and 21 represent front and side ele 
wations of a suitable guiding device to be 
hereinafter referred to. Fig. 22 represents a 
side elevation of the finished product. Fig. 
23 represents a similar view of the same on 
an enlarged Scale. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in the several figures. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates the 
bed of the machine, the same being provided 
with the upright posts 2 and 3, in the upper 
portion of which are the bearings 2* and 3* 
for the shaft 4, which has mounted thereon 
the hand-wheel. 5 and the belt - pulley 6, 
which is connected with the shaft by suitable 
clutch mechanism, which latter is thrown into 
and out of operation by means of the collar 7, 
the construction of said clutch mechanism 
being not shown in detail, since it forms no 
part of the present invention, the same being 
7 O 
75 
83 
9 O 
OO 
35 
45 
So 
 
8 
581,999 
5 
15 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
thrown into and out of operation by means 
of the lever 8, which is fulcrumed at the 
point 9 and has a pin or projection engaging 
an annular groove in the collar 7, whereby 
the movement of the handle in either direc 
tion will cause a corresponding movement of 
said collar and Will throw the mechanism into 
and out of operation, as will be evident. 
10 designates a Worm mounted upon the 
shaft 4, which Worm meshes with and actuates 
the gear-wheel 11, which is mounted on the 
shaft 12, the latter being supported in suit 
able bearings 13. 
14 designates a cam which is attached to 
said gear 11, the contour of said cam being 
understood from Figs. 2 and 7, it being of 
course understood that said cam may be a 
separate disk mounted on the shaft 12, which 
can be readily removed and replaced, differ 
ent-sized cams being used, according to re 
quirements. 
15 designates a roller mounted upon the 
arm 16 of the lever 17, which is fulcrumed at 
18, the other end of said lever having piv 
otally attached thereto the rod 20, which 
passes up through the bed 1, as will be un 
derstood from Figs. 7 and 8, and has a head 
21, which is movable in the cavity 21*, the 
proper position of said parts being always as 
sured by means of the spring 22*, which has 
one end abutting against the bottom of said 
cavity, while the other end is in contact with 
the under side of the head 21. 
22 designates a dog mounted upon said 
head 21, which is provided with an inclined 
face 23 and a recessed portion 22*, said dog 
being adapted to contact at intervals with 
the extremity 24 of the plate 25, which is best 
seen in Figs. 4 and 6, said plate having an 
opening 26 therein, through which the shaft 
4 freely passes, while its lower end is pivoted 
at 27 within the cavity 28 of the cam-wheel 
29, which is provided with a cam-groove 30, 
said cam-wheel revolving freely on the shaft 
4 and being held in position thereupon by 
means of the collar 31 and the disk32, which 
has therein the annular groove 33, in which 
is secured a pin or stop 34, which projects 
Substantially to the face of that portion of 
the disk 32 which is in contact with the cam 
wheel 29. 
35 designates a pin which is mounted upon 
the plate 25 and is adapted to engage said pin 
35 at propel intervals, as will be hereinafter 
eXplained, said plate 25 being held in its for 
Ward position normally, as shown in Fig. 4, 
by means of a spring 36, which is seated in 
a suitable cavity 37. 
38 designates a roller mounted upon an arm 
39 of the elbow-lever 40, which is fulcrumed 
at 41 and has another arm 42, which is pro 
vided with a cavity in the end thereof, into 
which projects the cylindrical or other-shaped 
stem 43* of the head 43, which is attached to 
the thread - carrier 44, which reciprocates 
freely in the lugs or guides 45, mounted on 
the lever 46, which is fulcrumed to a suitable 
fixed point 47, it being understood that in 
practice the arms 39 and 42 are made adjust 
able relative to each other and held in po 
sition by means of the adjusting-Screw lo 
cated at the point 41, said screw being loos 
ened when adjustment is desired and after 
ward tightened up when the adjustment is 
completed. 
4S designates the extremity of said thread 
carrier, the same being slightly curved when 
viewed from its side and provided with a 
wedge-shaped recess 49, which terminates in 
an eye 50, through which the thread 51 passes, 
as will be hereinafter explained, it being of 
course evident that the recess 49 might be at 
the side as well as at the end of said carrier 48. 
52 designates a drum which has a base por 
tion or partition 53, from which depends the 
annular flange 54. 
55 designates a hollow sleeve which depends 
from said partition 53 and engages the post. 
56, upon which said drum is adapted to rotate. 
57 designates a disk which is held in posi 
tion adjacent the flange 54 and the partition 
53 of the drum by means of the lever or bar 
5S, which is attached thereto by the screws 
or similar devices 59. 
60 designates a neck separate from said bar 
5S and secured to sleeve 55, to which neck is 
attached a sprocket-wheel 61, around which 
passes the sprocket-chain 62, which engages 
a second sprocket-wheel 63, (best seen in Figs. 
1 and 2,) upon which latter sprocket-wheel is 
mounted a feed-roll (33*, the latter and said 
wheel being rotatable upon the post 64. 
65 designates rollers or cylindrical blocks 
which are mounted within the cavity (36 of 
the disk 57, said rollers being in contact with 
springs (37*, which point in opposite direc 
tions, as will be understood from Fig. 19, 
whereby it will be apparent that a slight os 
cillation of the bar 5S will, by reason of its 
attachment to the disk 57 and the reversely 
inclined recesses therein, having the rollers 
and springs arranged as described, cause a 
movement of the drum, this movement being 
caused by the contact of the rollers (35 with 
the flanges 54 and the walls of the recesses 
66 in the disk 57, the drum being thus rotated 
in a jerking manner simultaneously with the 
sprocket-wheel 61, as is evident. 
70 designates a stand which has a foot 71, 
adapted to be attached to the bed , which 
has a suitable body 70* rising therefrom. 
72 designates a laterally-extending portion 
from which depends the portion 73, which is 
provided with an inclined bottom edge 74, 
the face 73* of said stand being adapted to 
be in substantial contact with the drum 52, 
the relative position of said stand and drum 
being understood from Figs. 1 and 2, the in 
clined edge 74 having the function of direct 
ing the product downwardly from the drum, 
as will be made apparent. 
75 designates a feed-roll which is adapted 
to contact with the roll 63*, said roll 75 being 
mounted upon the arm 76 of the elbow-lever 
75 
95 
IOC 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
H 
581,999 
3. 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
77, which is fulcrumed at the point 77, the 
other limb 78 of said elbow-lever having a 
projection 79 thereon, as best seen in Figs. 
1 and 10, which is adapted to be engaged by 
the end of the spring 80, the other end of the 
latter being in contact with the end 81 of the 
threaded screw 82, which passes through the 
bearing or stand 83 and is provided with a head 
84, whereby it will be seen that upon screw 
ing said head 84 in or out of said stand the 
tension of the spring will be varied, and con 
sequently the degree of contact between the 
feed-rolls 75 and 63*. 
S5 designates a cam-disk mounted upon the 
shaft 4, which is provided with a working 
face S6, which is adapted to contact with and 
actuate the end 87 of the lever 88, which is 
fulcrumed at 89, the other end of said lever 
88 being pivotally attached to the rod 90, 
whereby it will be seen that a longitudinal or 
reciprocating movement will be imparted to 
said rod 90, as will be best understood from 
Figs. 1 and 15. 
91 designates an arm rigidly attached to 
said rod 90, said arm having a pin-and-slot 
connection at 92 to an end of the bar or lever 
58, which is attached to the disk 57, as will 
be understood from Fig. 12. 
93 designates a pin which projects upwardly 
from Said arm 91 and engages the walls of 
the slot 94 in the bar 95, which latter has 
mounted in the end thereof a pin 96, the rela 
tive location and arrangement of parts being 
understood from Figs. 11 and 15. 
97 designates a plate which is provided with 
a suitable slot 97X, through which said pin 96 
is adapted to project at intervals. 
98 designates a fork or yoke which is at 
tached to said bar 95 and is pivotally mounted 
on the collar 99 by means of the pin 98*, said 
collar 99 being mounted upon the rock-shaft 
100, which is mounted in suitable bearings 
and is caused to rock at the proper intervals 
by means of the arm 101, which has a roller 
101* molluted thereon, so as to engage a suit 
able cam-groove in the disk 102, mounted on 
the shaft 4, as will be understood from Fig. 1, 
whereupon it will be seen that the rocking of 
said rod 100 will give an up-and-down move 
ment to the bar 95 and also to the pin 96, 
while the reciprocation of the rod 90 will at 
the same time, through the medium of the pin 
93 engaging the walls of the slot 94, impart a 
reciprocating movement to said bar 95, the 
latter and the pin 96 attached thereto being 
thus capable of an up-and-down as well as a 
forward-and-backward movement, the object 
and function of which will be hereinafter set 
forth. 
103 designates an arm having one end at 
tached to said rod 100, while its other end 
terminates adjacent the drum 52 and has 
mounted in said latter end the blade or shear 
104, which is adjustably secured thereto. 
105 designates a hole or slot in the arm 106, 
through which said blade 104 is adapted to 
pass so as to cut the thread 51 at the proper 
intervals, as will be explained, said thread 
crossing the slot 105 at certain times in the 
manner indicated in Fig. 13. 
107 designates an angular-shaped plate 
which is attached to the end of the shaft 4, 
as best seen in Fig. 15, said plate having a 
shelf 108, the whole forming a spool-carrier, 
upon which are supported the spools109, which 
in the present instance are two in number, 
said spools being rotatable and held in posi 
tion by means of the spring 110, the tension 
of which can be varied according to require 
ments by manipulating the thumb-nuts 111, 
which engage the threaded studs 111*, on 
which latter said spools revolve. 
112 designates a rod which projects for 
wardly from the extremity of said shaft 4 
and rotates in unison there with and also 
with the spools 109, said rod being forked at 
its extremity and having the prongs 113, in 
which are the eyes 114, through which the 
wire 115 passes as the same unwinds from the 
spools 109, the simultaneous unwinding and 
rotation of the spools forming the straight 
twisted portion 116 of the finished tasseling 
head 116*, (seen in Figs. 22 and 23,) while the 
thread 51 is, by means of the reciprocation of 
the thread-carrier 44 and the movement of 
the pin 96 at the proper intervals, caused to 
assume the shape of loops 117, which are en 
gaged by the said wire, as will be hereinafter 
explained. 
If desired, instead of one pin 96 two pins 
96* may be employed, the same being suit 
ably attached to the bar 95, as will be read 
ily understood from Figs. 16 and 17, the man 
ner of forming the loops and the relation of 
the twisted wires thereto being readily under 
stood from said figures. 
The operation is as follows: The rotation 
of the shaft 4, through the medium of the 
cam-disk 102 and the intermediate connec 
tions, causes a rocking or up-and-down move 
ment to be imparted to the shaft 100, and 
thence to the arm 103, and also to the plate 
95 and the pin 96. The rotation of the cam 
disk S5 causes a reciprocating movement to 
be imparted to the rod 90, and by reason of 
the arm 91 and the pin 93 the bar 95 is also 
caused to oscillate on the pivot 98*, said bar 
and pin thus having an up-and-down as well 
as a backward-and-forward movement, as has 
been stated. The bar 58 because of its piv 
otal connection with the arm 9l is enabled to 
rock upon its support, and by reason of its 
attachment to the disk 57 in the manner de 
scribed and the action of the spring 67 and 
the contact of the rollers 65 with the disk 57 
and flange 64 the said drum is caused to re 
volve in a jerky manner, at the same time 
revolving the sprocket-wheel 61, thereby im 
parting rotation to the feed-roller 63*, as is 
evident. The rotation of the cam-wheel 29 
will cause the elbow-lever 40 to rock upon its 
fulcrum 41, thereby imparting to the thread 
carrier 44, through the intermediate connec 
tions, a reciprocating movement, thus caus 
V 
95 
IOO 
IC5 
II o 
II.5 
I 25 
 
4. 
581,999 
7 O 
95 
OC 
IoE 
C 
IO 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
ing the same to advance in between the prongs 
113 at the proper intervals, as will be herein 
after explained, the lever 46 moving on its 
fulcrum 47, as is evident. 
To operate the machine, the thread 51 is 
first passed through a suitable tension device, 
as 52*, which may be mounted on the arm 46, 
and thence through the eye 50 of the thread 
carrier 44, as seen in Fig. 18, and thence be 
tween the feed-rolls 63* and 75. The wire 
is then unwound a short distance upon the 
spools 109 and is passed through each of the 
eyes 114, as will be understood from Figs. 1 
and 14, the wires then being caught together 
and also carried around the drum through 
and between the friction or feed rollers 63* 
and 75. First, assume the parts to be in the 
position seen in Fig. 14, the thread-carrier 
moves forward, the shaft 4 having previously. 
rotated sufficiently from the position seen in 
said Fig. 14 to allow said thread-carrier and 
thread to advance between the two conver 
ging Wires 115 into the position seen in Fig. 15. 
The pin 96 now rises and moves forward, or 
to the left of the position seen in Fig. 15, into 
the position seen in Fig. 14, the wire twisting 
in the meanwhile, so as to hold each portion of 
the looped thread in the proper position rela 
tive to the adjacentloop, as will be understood 
from Fig. 23. The pin 96 now drops from the 
position seen in Fig. 14 below the plate 97, 
which is omitted from said Fig.14 for the sake 
Of clearness of illustration, and moves back, or 
to the right, into the position seen in Fig. 15 
again, at which point it rises so as to engage the 
thread 51 again, after which the thread-car 
rier moves back, the above operations being 
successively repeated so long as the working 
face of the cam 14, which operates the lever 
17, is in contact with the roller 15, as seen in 
Fig. 7. As soon as said roller leaves the Work 
ing face of said cam the spring 22* (best seen 
in Figs. 7 and 8) causes the trip or portion 22 
of the clutch to fly up and engage the end 24 
of the plate 25, as will be understood from 
Fig. 9, the pins 35 and 34 being then moved 
out of contact, and the rotation of the cam 
wheel 29, and consequently the movement of 
the thread-carrier, ceases momentarily, said 
thread-carrier being now in the position seen 
in Fig. 14. The shaft 4 continues to rotate, 
and the Wire is thus continuously unwound 
and twisted, since the feed-rolls are continu 
ously rotating, thereby causing the thread 51 
also to be continuously fed in the direction of 
the arrow in Fig. 13, said thread eventually 
being caused to cross the slot 105, as seen in 
Fig. 13, at which point, it is severed by the 
descent of the blade 104, as will be under 
stood from Figs. 13, 11, and 12, the finished 
product appearing substantially as seen in 
Fig. 22, while its manner of formation is as 
seen in Fig. 23, as has been stated. The in 
clined face 74 of the stand 70 (best seen in 
Fig. 20) causes the finished product to prop 
erly wind about the drum 52. 
It will be seen from the foregoing that the 
I length of the loops can be increased or de 
creased, as desired, by adjusting the move 
ment of the thread-carrier and also the move 
ment of the pin which takes the loops from 
said thread-carrier. 
The number of the thread-loops in the fin 
ished product can be increased or diminished 
by cutting out the cam-plate 14 to a greater 
or less extent or by making the same adjust 
able, (not shown,) so as to stop the cam-clutch 
sooner or later by the engaging lever 17. 
The finished product may be made tighter 
or looser, which is accomplished by making 
more or less loops therein, the same being ad 
justable by the regulation of the feed, as is 
evident. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a machine of the character described, 
a spool-carrier adapted to sustain spools of 
wire, a shaft for supporting said carrier, and 
means for continuously rotating said shaft in 
combination with means for causing a thread 
to assume the position of loops into which 
said wire is continuously inserted and twisted. 
2. In a machine of the character described, 
a pin suitably supported, means for impart 
ing to the same an up-and-down, and forward 
and-backward movement, a thread-carrier, 
means for reciprocating the same, a spool 
carrier adapted to support spools of Wire, 
means for continuously rotating said spool 
carrier. 
3. In a machine of the character described, 
a pin suitably supported, and means for im 
parting to the same an up-and-down, and for 
ward-and-backward movement, a drum, feed 
rolls adjacent the latter, a thread - carrier, 
means for reciprocating the same, a spool 
carrier adapted to support spools of Wire, a 
fork adjacent said spools, means for continu 
ously rotating said spool-carrier and fork, and 
means for actuating said pin, thread-carrier 
feed-rolls and drum in unison. 
4. In a machine of the character described, 
a pin and means for imparting to the same an 
up-and-down, and forward-and-backward 
movement, a thread-carrier, means for recip 
rocating the same, a spool-carrier adapted to 
support spools of wire thereupon, and to be 
continuously rotated, a fork mounted on said 
spool-carrier, a rotatable drum, means for ro 
tating the same at intervals, a cutter mounted 
adjacent said drum, feed-rolls suitably Sup 
ported and means for varying the tension of 
said feed-rolls. 
5. In a machine of the character described, 
the rods 90 and 100, means for imparting a 
reciprocating and a rocking motion respec 
tively thereto, an arm 91 having a pin 93 
thereon, a bar 95 having a forked end pivot 
ally attached to a suitable portion of Said 
rod 100, a slot in said bar engaged by said 
pin 93, a lever 58 pivotally attached to said 
arm. 91, a disk 57 to which said lever is at 
tached, a drum 52 having rollers 65 common 
 
581,999 
5. 
to it and to the disk, recesses in the latter for 
said rollers, springs for holding the latter in 
position, means for actuating said drum, feed 
rollers mounted adjacent to the latter, a 
thread-carrier, a spool-carrier, a cutter, and 
means for actuating the above partsin unison. 
6. In a machine of the character described, 
a device for looping threads, means for con 
tinuously feeding and twisting a wire between 
the loops of said thread, and means for mo 
mentarily stopping the action of the looping 
device without stopping the action of the wire 
feeding and twisting device, in combination 
with means for cutting said thread at proper 
intervals without necessitating the stopping 
of the machine. 
7. In a machine of the character described, 
a spool-carrier adapted to sustain spools of 
Wire, means for continuously rotating the 
same, a guide for said wire, a rotatable drum, 
means for actuating the latter, feed-rollersad 
jacent said drum, a pin suitably supported 
adjacent said drum, means for giving to said 
pin an up-and-down and forward-and-back 
Ward movement, a thread-carrier and means 
for actuating the same. 
8. In a machine of the character described, 
the shaft 4 adapted to be continuously rotated, 
the cam-wheel29 freely rotatable thereon, the 
Spring-pressed plate 24, having a projection 
thereon and pivoted to said wheel, a disk hav 
ing a groove and a pin therein attached to 
Said shaft adjacent said wheel, means for 
moving Said plate toward or away from said 
disk at proper intervals, a shaft 100 having 
an arm provided with a cutter attached there 
to, means for rocking said shaft, a rotatable 
drum, means for actuating the same, feed 
rolls, means for actuating said drum and feed 
rolls, means for looping a thread, and means 
for continuously feeding and twisting wire 
therebetween. 
9. In a machine of the character described, 
means for intermittently looping a thread, and 
means for continuously feeding and twist 
ing a Wire therebetween, in combination with 
O 
I 5 
2C) 
35 
45 
 
suitable devices for cutting off said thread at 
proper intervals. 
10. In a machine of the character described, 
a shaft adapted to be revolved continuously, 
a spool-carrier mounted upon said shaft, and 
adapted to support wire or similar material 
and means for causing said wire to simulta 
neously unwind and twist in combination with 
a thread-carrier adapted to form loops which 
are retained by the twists of said wire. 
11. In a machine of the character described, 
a shaft adapted to be revolved continuously, 
a spool-carrier adapted to sustain spools of 
wire supported upon said shaft, means for un 
winding and twisting said wire, and a thread 
carrier in combination with means for calls 
ing said thread-carrier to make a plurality of 
movements during each revolution of Said 
shaft, thereby forming and retaining a plu 
rality of loops at either or both sides of the 
twists formed at each revolution of said shaft. 
12. In a machine of the character described, 
a thread-carrier, a shaft adapted to be rotated 
continuously, supports for spools of Wire or 
other material mounted on said shaft, and 
means for unwinding and twisting said Wire 
in combination with means for temporarily 
stopping the movement of the thread-carrier, 
without stopping the rotation of the said shaft. 
13. In a machine of the character described, 
means for regulating the length of the loops 
and the tightness of the same, in combination 
with means for making a greater or less num 
ber of loops in each tassel-heading. 
14. In a machine of the character described, 
the combination of means for intermittently 
looping a thread, with mechanism for con 
tinuously feeding and twisting a wire between 
the loops of said thread. 
JOHN G. REHFUSS. 
MARTIN. O. REHFUSS. 
GEORGE REHFUSS. 
Witnesses: 
JoHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
E. HAY WARD FAIRBANKS. 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US582099.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 582,099. 
J. SALISBURY. 
DUST PRO OF CHAIN GUARD, 
Patented May 4, 1897. 
S 
RSNIsle 
 
 
224. 
w 
252 eazzafezzerzezz 
Zezezz27 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN SALISBURY, OFARLINGTON, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE ARLING 
TON MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
DUST PRO OF CHAIN GUARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,099, dated May 4, 1897. 
Application filed August 5, 1896, Serial No. 601.75l. (No model.) 
2o claimed. 
To all, uhon, it nooty concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN SALISBURY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Arling 
ton, in the county of Hudson and State of New 
5 Jersey, have invented new and usefnl Im 
provements in Dust-Proof. Chain-Guards, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to gear-cases for cy 
cles, and has for its object to provide a de 
Io tachable practically dust-proof gear-case and 
chain-guard constructed from transparent 
material to permit inspection of the condition 
and Working of the chain and capable of ad 
justment to suit the distance between the 
15 sprocket-wheels with which the driving-chain 
connectS. 
The invention consists in certain features 
of construction in a gear-case and chain-guard 
for bicycles, as hereinafter described and 
In the annexed drawings, illustrating the 
invention, Figure 1 is an outer side elevation 
of my improved gear-case and chain-guard. 
Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the same on the 
25 line 22 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a similar section 
of the same on the line 33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 
is an inner side elevation of the case or guard. 
In order to furnish a gear-case and chain 
guard that shall be light, durable, and trans 
3o parent, it is preferable to construct it from a 
material such as pyralin or a like pyroxylin 
compound. This material can be readily 
molded into required shapes and is transpar 
ent, tough, and light. 
For the purpose of making the gear-case 
adjustable to increase or diminish its length 
it may be constructed in telescopic sections 
to slip readily one into another. . 
The gear-case, as shown, is made in three 
40 sections-namely, a central or main section 
that comprises an upper tube 5 and a lower 
tube 6 to inclose the corresponding parts of the 
driving-chain, a curved end section 7 to in 
close the sprocket-gear on the cranked driv 
45 ing-shaft, and a smaller curved end section S 
to inclose the sprocket-gear on the axle of the 
rear wheel of a bicycle or velocipede. 
At or near their ends the tubular parts 5 
and 6 are connected by vertical braces 9, pref 
5o erably composed of pyralin in the form of 
blocks. The upper and lower tubes 5 and 6 
35 
The ends of the chain-inclosing tubes 5 and 55 
are slotted to receive the ends of the braces 
9, which will thereby more securely stiffen 
the adjustable gear-case or chain-guard. 
6 are fitted into the curved end sections 7 and 
S, that are to inclose the sprocket-gears, and 
as a means for securely connecting these tubes 
and end sections there may be provided metal 
bands 10, arranged to closely embrace the end 6o 
sections at the points of junction With the 
tubes. These metal bands 10 may be bolted 
or riveted in any convenient manner to the 
braces 9 and also to the tubes 5 and 6 and the 
curved end sections. The bands 10, or clamp- 65 
ing attachments 11 and 12 thereon, may serve 
as means for detachably securing the gear 
case and chain-guard to the usual horizontal 
rod, tube, or stay at the lower part of a bi 
cycle-frame. The longitudinal space 13 be- 7o 
tween the tubes 5 and 6 permits a properar 
rangement of the gear-case with relation to 
the said stay portion of the bicycle-frame. 
The curved end section 7 of the gear-case is 
provided with suitable openings 14 and 15 for 75 
passage of the pedal-crankshaft, and suitable 
openings 16 and 17 are provided in the end 
section 8 for passage of the axle or hub of the 
driving-wheel. 
adjustable to vary its length according to the 
distance from one sprocket-gear to the other, 
the tubes 5 and 6 are each divided trans 
versely or formed in two sections that Will 
telescope one within the other, as shown. It 85 
will be seen that this gear-case may be readily 
detached when desired and may be easily and 
conveniently adjusted to the length of driv 
ing-chain required. 
and will protect the driving-chain and gears 
from mud and dirt, and consequently lessen 
the need for cleaning and lubrication. Being 
constructed of transparent material the case 
or guard will permit inspection of the condi- 95 
tion and working of the chain at all times, so 
that the guard need not be removed for that 
purpose. In a lady's wheel the guard serves 
to prevent the skirts from catching in the 
chain. It is light and not heavy or cumber- Ioo 
some, as one made from leather, Wood, metal, 
or similar material, and it is susceptible of 
The case or guard is practically dust-proof 9o 
In order that the gear-case may be readily 8o 
 
2 
582,099 
ornamentation and may be produced in col 
ors with either opaque or transparent effects, 
as usual with articles made from pyralin or 
like pyroxylin compounds. 
To make each of the tubes 5 and 6 telescopic, 
they may be divided at any preferred point 
either centrally or toward either end of the 
gear-case, and the respective Sections may be 
made to slide one into another any desired 
distance to afford the required range of ad 
justment. If preferred, the adjustment of 
the gear-case may be effected by a telescopic 
connection at the junction of the tubes 5 and 
6 with the curved end 7 of the gear-case. 
What I claim as my invention is 
The herein-described cycle gear-case and 
chain-guard composed of the upper and lower 
tubular members 5 and 6, the vertical bracing 
blocks 9 secured in transverse slots in the 
under and upper portions of the said upper 
and lower tubular members, respectively, and 
intermediate the end portions of said mem 
bers, for the purpose of bracing the gear-case, 
and the two separately-attached curved end 
pieces 7 and 8 that receive the ends of the 
said upper and lower tubular members adja 
cent to the points of attachment for the said 
bracing-blocks, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have here unto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit 
GSS0S. 
25 
JOIN SALISBURY. 
Witnesses: 
EMMET SCHULTZ, 
P. E. BROCKWAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US582199.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 582,199. 
Aiz 1. 
C. GRATH. 
AWNING FOR WINDOWS, 
Patented May ll 1897, 
Aia, 2. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTIAN GRATH, OF LUBECK, GERMANY. 
AWNING FOR WINDows. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,199, dated May 1 1, 1897. 
Application filed July 29, 1896, Serial No. 601,000, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To al(, athlon, it Tinal? concern: 
Beit known that I, CHRISTIAN GRATH, a citi 
Zen of the city of Lubeck, German Empire, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Sun Blinds or AWnings for 
Windows; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description 
of the in Velution, which will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention relates to an improvement 
in sun-blinds for windows, by means of which 
sun-blinds may be used both for their known 
purpose of protection against the sun's rays 
and for the purpose of protecting window 
cleaners and others having to work outside 
of or lean out of Windows from the danger of 
falling therefrom, such accidents being of 
frequent occurrence. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
means for protecting persons working at win 
dows from all danger of falling therefrom. 
The invention consists in a Sun-blind which 
is applied to the Wall or window-frame in 
such a way that, according to the purpose for 
which it is to be used-namely, as a protec 
tion against the sun or as a protection against 
falling from the Window-it may, by a simple 
manipulation, be quickly brought into either 
of the desired positions. When the sun-blind 
is suspended over the upper part of the win 
dow, so as be open at bottom, it serves in the 
known way as a protection from the sun, but 
when it is turned down and attached to the 
window-frame, so as to be open at top, it 
serves to prevent any one from falling from 
the window by intercepting the falling person. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a vertical section of a Window with the sun 
blind in the position for intercepting sunshine, 
while the dotted lines show the position of 
the same in use to protect persons from fall 
ing out of the window. Fig. 2 is a front view 
of the window with the Sun-blind turned down 
into the position in which it affords protection 
against falling from the window. 
M is the sun-blind, mounted to turn in 
brackets d, fixed in the wall m of the building, 
and consisting of a skeleton frame formed of 
four or more members a, covered with strong 
linen or canvas or the like or with folding 
wire or strong twine network which may in 
turn be covered over with linen fabric. 
b is a cord for drawing up or letting down 
the sun-blind MI; c, a spring-hook fixed in the 
Wall above the window; f, two spring-hooks 
fixed in the wall underneath the window; g, 
a cord attached to the spring-hook c for the 
purpose of operating the same; e, two chains 
attached to the Wall for the purpose of hold 
ing the sun-blind in the position in which it 
serves as a protector to a falling person. 
The sum-blind M, when not required for 
use, may be folded up against the wall m in 
a known way by pulling the cord b. 
To intercept the Sunshine, the Sun-blind M 
is let down into the unfolded position, as 
shown in Fig. 1, by slackening out the cord 
b, whereupon that member C. of the skeleton 
frame which is nearest the wall is held in the 
Spring-hook c, and the sun-blind thus sup 
ported, which support is added to by draw 
ing tight the cord b. 
When the Sun-blind is to be used as a win 
dow-cleaner protector, it must be moved from 
the position shown in full lines to that shown 
in dotted lines in Fig. 1, and this is accom 
plished in the following manner: The cord b 
is released and left to hang slack. The spring 
hook, c is then, by means of the cord g, at 
tached to it, drawn down out of the way of 
the aforesaid member CI of the sun-blind which 
until then had rested on it. The sun-blind 
thus deprived of support falls by reason of 
its own Weight, thereby turning in the brack 
ets d through a quarter of a circle. In con 
sequence of the fall of the sun-blind the lower 
most of the members ct of the same strikes 
against and into the spring-hooks f, fixed in 
the wall m, and is then held in said hooks, 
while the uppermost of the members a, is held 
in a horizontal position, Fig. 2, by the chains 
e, attached to the Wall. In this position any 
one may work on the outside of the window 
free from danger, as in the case of the worker 
falling such person Would be caught in the 
Sun-blind. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
A blind or awning for windows, consisting 
of a skeleton frame formed of several mem 
bers a covered over with linen, canvas, or net 
95 
IOO 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
 
582,199 
One of the members C of the skeleton frame 
engaging spring-hooks f, if substantially as 
described and shown. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two subscribing wit 
CHERISTIAN GRATH. 
SSS. 
Witnesses: 
C. ZIMMERMANN, 
W. GRATH. 
work, the brackets d, d fixed in the wall of 
the building, in which said skeleton frame is 
pivoted, a spring-hook c fixed in the wall on 
the upper end of the Window, the spring-hooks 
5 f, if fixed in the wall on the lower end of the 
window and the chains or cords e, e fixed to 
the wall, said blind being held in its upper 
position by one of the members a of the skele 
ton frame engaging the spring-hook c and in 
Io its lower position by chains or cordse, e and by 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US582299.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 582,299. 
 
J. MOHS, 
BOX MAKING MACHINE 
Patented May ll, l897, 
s s e 
A HDI 
 
 
 
> As 
S-moiri III 
NIn 
sis 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS MOHS, OF DRESIDEN, GERMANY., ASSIGNOR TO THE BERLINER 
KUNSTDRUCR. UND VERLAGS-ANSTALT, VORMALSA. & C. KAUFMANN, 
OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
BOX. MAKNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,299, dated May 11, 1897. 
Application filed July 17, 1894, Serial No. 517,822, (No model.) Patented in Germany February 13, 1894, No. 77,341, 
O 
25 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JULIUS MOHS, a citi 
Zen of Prussia, residing at Dresden, Germany, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Box-Making Machines, (pat 
ented in Germany February 13, 1894, No. 
77,341;) and I do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
box-making machines. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
machine specially adapted for use in manu 
facturing boxes, plates, or similar articles 
from pasteboard, sheet metal, veneer, or other 
suitable material. 
The invention consists in a novel mechan 
ism for Operating the plunger, whereby the 
latter is reciprocated and at the end of its 
descent is held down for a short period in or 
der that the male die may be held under pres 
sure against the blank, whereby the latter is 
given a permanent set to prevent it from ex 
panding by elasticity when removed from the 
dies. 
The invention consists also in such fea 
tures, details of construction, and combina 
tions of parts as will first be described in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings 
and then particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of a machine embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the same. Fig. 
3 is a detail view showing the pin which 
moves in the slot. 
Referring to the drawings, A is a frame 
work carrying a female die a, the bottom of 
which is open for a purpose hereinafter de 
scribed. To the framework is fixed a stand 
ard a', which carries slideways a' and is slot 
ted at a transversely of the standard. The 
standard also carries a pair of journal-bear 
ings act and an arma, provided at its outer 
end with a vertical journal a?, the framework 
being provided with a step-bearing a, in line 
with the journal a. 
From the top end of the standard a pro 
jects a bracket a, carrying two journals a 
C., in line with the journals a'a, respectively. 
In the slideways a is movably mounted a 
plunger B, to which is adjustably attached a 
male die b by means of a screw b', threaded 
into the lower end of the plunger and pro 
vided with a head b, having spanner-holes 
b', by means of which the screw may be turned 
to adjust the male die with relation to said 
plunger, the head b of the screw being lo 
cated in a slot or recess in the top end b of the 
male die, which top end also works in the 
- 
guideways. 
To the upper end of the plunger B is piv 
oted a link C, which has a pin c projecting 
laterally into the slot Cl, a pitman D being 
pivotally attached by one end to the link C. 
The other end of the pitman D is attached to 
a crank E, fixed on a shaft F, mounted in the 
journals C. and Ct and carrying a fly-wheel 
G, a gear-wheel H, and a bevel cogged seg 
ment I, the latter intermittently meshing with 
a bevel gear-wheel K, fixed on a vertical 
shaft L, mounted in the journals a and a, 
being provided with a collar l, above which 
is fixed a disk-shaped carrier-plate M, pro 
vided with openings, in which is mounted a 
series of blank-carriers m, each provided 
with a recess arranged to receive the box 
blank. 
In the journals a and a' is mounted a driv 
ing-shaft N, carrying a gear-pinion O, mesh 
ing into the gear-wheel H, and a driving-pull 
ley P, which may be driven by a belt from 
any suitable source of power. 
In the opening at the bottom of the female 
die C, is placed a reciprocatory plunger or 
spindle R, having a head r within the cavity 
of the female die C and forming the bottom 
of the die. The lower end of the spindle R. 
is notched on each side at r" for engagement 
with the rounded end S of a lever S, full 
rumed at s' in an arm s, projecting down 
ward from the frame A, the outer end of the 
lever carrying a weight T. The arms has a 
noses', bent so as to project beneath the Outer 
end of the lever S, and thereby limit, the 
downward motion of the Outer end of Said 
lever. 
The operation of my machine is as follows: 
35 
45 
 
55 
7 O 
75 
85 
95 
IOo 
2 
582,299 
The blanks, previously cut to the proper 
shape, are fed into the blank-receiving recess 
in the blank-carriers either by hand or by 
any suitable blank-feeding mechanism. The 
apparatus being set in motion the segment I 
revolves and engages the bevel - wheel K, 
thereby imparting a partial rotation to the 
vertical shaft L, which rotates the carrier 
plate M and brings the loaded blank-carrier 
beneath the male die, which at that time is 
raised. The continued operation of the ma 
chine causes the plunger to descend and 
forces the blank into the female die and 
against the head r of the spindle R, thereby 
forcing the spindle down against the action 
of the weight T, at the same time forming the 
blank into its required shape. As soon as 
the plunger is raised the weight moves the 
lever S, so as to raise the spindle R, and there 
by forces the completed box upward through 
the opening in the blank-carrier, the next 
revolution of the carrier-plate sweeping the 
completed box from the top of the head 
and introducing a new blank beneath the 
die. As the carrier-plate revolves the boxes 
are removed and new blanks supplied. 
The slot a at the top of the standard may 
be considered as comprising two parts, one 
of which is arc-shaped or segmental, the radius 
of curvature being equal to the length of the 
link C from its center of oscillation to the 
center of the pin c. The other part of the 
slot rises at an angle, as shown. When the 
pin c is moving through the first part of the 
slot, the plunger is down and the male die in 
contact with the box-blank, while when the 
the pin c moves along the second part of the 
slot the plunger is raised until the pin reaches 
the top end of said second part of the slot, 
the plunger then being at its maximum height. 
The continued movement of the machine 
causes the pin to travel toward the first part 
of the slot and thereby force the plunger 
downward. 
While I have particularly described my in 
vention as applied to an apparatus in which 
the plunger operates vertically, it is plain 
that it may also be embodied in a machine 
having a horizontal plunger without depart 
ing from the spirit of my invention. More 
over, suitable magazines for supplying the 
blank-carriers with blanks may be provided; 
but this construction is not shown, inasmuch 
as it forms no part of my present invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a box-making machine, the combina 
tion, with a pair of dies, a plunger attached 
O 
2C) 
35 
55 
to the male die, and a link pivoted to the 
plunger, of a pin in the end of the link, and 
a standard having a slot into which the pin 
enters, said slot comprising two portions, one 
of which is arc-shaped and is located so as to 
receive the pin when the dies are at their limit 
of nearest approach, Substantially as Set 
forth. 
2. In a box-making machine, the combina 
tion, with a pair of dies, a plunger attached 
to the male die, and a link pivoted to the 
plunger, of a pin in the end of the link, a 
standard having a slot into which the pin en 
ters, said slot comprising an arc-shaped por 
tion and an angular portion, the arc-shaped 
portion being located so as to receive the pin 
when the dies are at their limit of nearest ap 
proach, and means for Oscillating the link, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a box-making machine, the combina 
tion, with a pair of dies, a plunger attached 
to the male die, and a link pivoted to the 
plunger, of a pin in the end of the link, a 
standard having a slot into which the pin en 
ters, said slot comprising an arc-shaped pol'- 
tion and an angular portion, the arc-shaped 
portion being located so as to receive the pin 
when the dies are at their limit of nearest ap 
proach, a pitman connected to the end of the 
link, a crank to which the pitman is attached, 
and means for operating the crank, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. In a box-making machine, the combina 
tion, with a pair of dies, a plunger attached 
to the male die, and a link pivoted to the 
plunger, of a standard having a slot compris 
ing an arc-shaped portion and an angulal' por 
tion, the said arc-shaped portion lying nearer 
the dies, a pin secured to the link and inserted 
in the slot, and means for oscillating the link, 
substantially as set forth. 
5. In a box-making machine, the combina 
tion, with a pair of dies, a plunger to which 
the male die is secured, and a link attached 
to the plunger, of a standard having a slot 
comprising an arc-shaped portion and an an 
gular portion, the said arc-shaped portion 
lying nearer the dies, a pin secured to the link 
and inserted in the slot, a pitman connected 
to the end of the link, a crank to which the 
pitman-rod is attached, and means for oper 
ating the crank, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JULIUS MOHS. 
Witnesses: 
HERNANDO DE SOTO, 
FRIEDRICH IBTRIKEN BUSCH. 
75 
9o 
95 
cyO 
IOS 
C 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US582399.txt	(No Model.) 
N)##################################################################################################% No. 582,399. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
H. C. STIFEL. 
WATER FILTER, 
2 sheets 
Sheet 2. 
 
'''PETERs. Co., PHoro-LTHo, washiro. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIERMAN C. STIFEL, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR, BY MIESNE ASSIGN 
MENTS, TO THE AMERICAN TRIPOLICOMPANY, OF CARTHAGE, MISSOURI. 
WATER-FILTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,399, dated May 11, 1897. 
Application filed March 5, 1894, Serial No. 502,350, (No model.) 
through the pipe 12 and out through the fil 
tering-body, as illustrated by the dotted ar 
15 
To (t/l (Uh O7, it naily conce77. 
Be it known that I, HERMAN C. STIFEL, o 
the city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
5 provement in Water-Filters, of which the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improved ap 
lo paratus for filtering Water, whereby, through 
means of what I term an automatic valve 
device, water under pressure from the main 
supply is at intervals forced back through the 
filtering stone or body to clean it. 
Myinvention consists in features of novelty 
hereinafter fully described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
Figure I is an elevation illustrative of my 
improved apparatus. Fig. II is an enlarged 
20 vertical section of the filter, the valve device, 
and adjacent parts. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 represents the 
Supply-pipe, eXtending from the city main or 
other source of Supply, and 2 a discharge 
25 pipe extending to the sewer or other place of 
deposit. 
3 represents the filter-tank, within which 
is located the filtering stone or body 4. 
5 is the clear-water storage-tank, and 6 the 
7 represents a tank communicating with 
the tank 5 by means of a pipe S and which 
communicates with the discharge - pipe 2 
through means of a pipe 9. The construc 
35 tion, function, and Operation of the tank 7, 
With its connections and accessories, are fully 
shown and described in my application filed 
February 26, 1894, Serial No. 501,566, and 
they form no part of my present invention. 
10 represents a clear-Water cylinder having 
a loose piston 11 and which communicates 
with the interior of the filteringstone or body 
4 through means of a pipe 12, as in my appli 
cation referred to. 
13 represents a pipe forming a communica 
tion between pipel, through the valve device, 
and the end of the cylinder 10 remote from 
pipe 12, so that when Water is admitted from 
the main supply through the pipe 13 and 
5o forces the piston 11 forward toward the pipe 
12 the water in the cylinder 10 will be forced 
3o pipe leading to the storage-tank. 
4o 
45 
Y 
OWS. 
6o 
In my application referred to water was ad- 55 
mitted from the main supply to the cylinder 
10, behind the piston 11, by the manipulation 
of a hand valve or cock, whereas with my 
present invention this is done automatically 
and at intervals. 
The valve device consists of a cylinder or 
tube 14, traversed by a stem 15 on a piston 
16, located in a cylinder or housing 17, which 
in turn is located within a tank or box. 18. 
The stem 15 is provided with cup-leathers 19, 65 
20, 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25. Within the tube 
14 is a sleeve 26, having perforations 27, 28, 
29, 30, 31, 32, and 33, and at each set of these 
perforations the tube 14 is provided with an 
annular chamber or groove 34. The lower to 
end of the tube 14 communicates with the 
pipe 2 through means of a hollow lateral ex 
tension 35, and this extension communicates 
with the chamber 34 of the perforations 29 
through means of a pipe 36. The pipe 1375 
communicates with the chamber 34 of the 
perforations 30. 
37 represents an extension of the Supply 
pipe I and which forms a communication be 
tween the supply-pipe and the valve-chest 3S 8o 
of the cylinder or housing 17. The pipe 37 
has a branch 39 extending to the chamber 34 
of the perforations 31. 
40 is a pipe forming a communication be 
tween the chamber 34 of the perforations 32 85 
and the upper part of the tank 3, and through 
which the water to be filtered is discharged 
into the tank 3 outside of the filtering stone 
or body 4. The pipe 12 communicates with 
the chamber 34 of the perforations 28 through 9o 
means of a branch 41. 
with the chamber 34 of the perforations 27. 
tion between the bottom of the filtering-tank 95 
3 and the chamber 34 of the perforations 33. 
44 represents a stem extending into the 
valve-chest 3S and having thereon a valve 
45 and also a valve 46, the valve 45 being 
adapted to close the upper end of a passage- Ioo 
way 47 within the chest and with which the 
pipe 37 communicates and the valve 46 be 
The pipe 6 from the storage-tank connects 
42 represents a pipe forming a communica 
3. 
582,899 
ing adapted to close the lower end of this 
passage-Way. 
48 represents a passage-way between the 
Valve-chest and the upper part of the cylinder 
17, and 49 represents a passage-way between 
the valve- chest and the lower part of the 
cylinder 17. 
50 represents a float located within the tank 
1S, and the stem of which is pivoted at 51 to 
the cylinder 17 and engages at 52 with the 
upper end of the stem 44. 
53 represents a valve or cock in the pipe 
37, and from which the water is allowed to 
escape continuously into the tank 18. 
54 represents an ordinary form of siphon 
located within the tank 18, and with which 
communicates a pipe 55, leading to any suit 
able place of discharge. The siphon 54 is pro 
vided with a float 56 and valve 56, by which 
the siphon is started when the water in the 
tank reaches and raises the float. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
Water from the pipe 1 passes through the 
branch 39, through the perforations 31 and 
32, through the pipe 40, and into the tank 3 
outside of the filtering body or block 4, a 
Small portion of the Water passing at the same 
time through the pipe 37 and through the 
Cock 53 and opening 58, hereinafter referred 
to, into the tank 18. The water that passes 
through the pipe 40 percolates through the 
filtering stone or body 4 and through the 
pipe 12 and branch 41, through the perfora 
tions 28 and 27, and through the pipe 6 to 
the storage-tank, a small portion of the water 
passing also through the pipe 12 into the 
cylinder 10 and forcing the piston 11 into 
the position shown in Fig. II. The water 
will continue to thus pass until the water in 
the tank 18 reaches and raises the float 50. 
This will cause the valve 45 on the stem 44 
to be seated and the valve 46 to be opened, 
and the water from the pipe 37 will then pass 
beneath the piston 16 and raise the piston 
and all of the cup-leathers on the stem 15 to 
the position shown by dotted lines in Fig. II, 
the Water escaping from above the piston 16. 
through a vent 58, which may be regulated 
by a set-screw 59, so as to control the speed 
with which the piston and cup-leathers rise 
or move. When the piston and cup-leathers 
are thus moved to the position shown by dot 
ted lines, water will pass from the pipe 1 and 
branch 39, through the perforations 31 and 
30, and through the pipe 13 to the cylinder 
10, behind the piston 11, and will force the 
piston forward, discharging the clear water 
therein through the pipe 12 into the hollow 
filtering stone or body, from where it passes 
out through the pores of the stone or body, 
as shown by the dotted arrows, cleaning the 
latter of sediment and dirt therein and on 
the surface, the water passing from the tank 
3 at this time through the pipe 42, through 
the perforations 33, and through the exten 
sion 35 and waste-pipe 2. 
When in its upper position, the cup-leather 
24 preferably closes only the lower set or 
series of perforations 32, so that while the 
water is passing back through the filtering 
body or stone 4 a small amount of water is 
also passing from the main supply through 
the upper series of these perforations 32 and 
through the pipe 40 into the tank 3, and thus 
while there is a flow of water back through 
the filtering body or stone there is also a 
flow of water down around the outside of the 
stone, effecting a thorough cleansing of the 
stone and tank. 
While the piston 16 and cup-leathers are 
in this upper position, the pipe 6, leading to 
the storage-tank, will be shut off, as well as 
the branch 41, leading from the pipe 12. 
While the piston 16 and cup-leather's are 
thus in their upper position, the Water con 
tinues to drip through the cock or valve 53 
until it reaches and raises the float 56, until 
it opens the valve 56*, and then the water will 
commence to flow from the tank 18 through 
the siphon 54, and as the Wateris lowered in the 
tank 18 the float 50 falls, opening the valve 
45 and closing the valve 46. The piston I (3 
then commences to descend, the Water escap 
ing from beneath the piston 16 through a 
vent 70, the size of which may be regulated 
by a set-screw 71. When the piston reaches 
its lower position, the cup-leathers on the 
stem 15 are all in their normal positions 
(shown by full lines in Fig. II) and the opera 
tion first described is resumed, the piston 11 
being forced back to the position shown in 
Fig. II by water passing through the pipe 12, 
and as it is forced back the water escapes 
from behind it through the pipe 13, through 
the perforations 30 and 29, and through the 
pipe 36 to the pipe 2. The water continues to 
fall in the tank 18 until it reaches the mouth 
of the short leg of the siphon - 54, when the 
action of the siphon will be broken and the 
tank will then commence to fill again and the 
operation just described is repeated, when 
the Water in the tank again reaches and 
raises the float 50. Thus the filtering stone 
or body 4 is intermittently being Washed out 
or cleansed by clear filtered water under the 
force of the main supply, although the unfil 
tered water from the main supply is not 
utilized to clean the filtering stone or body, 
and does not reach the filtering stone or 
body from the inside, this being done by 
means of the filtered and clean Water in the 
cylinder 10. 
In the drawings the course of the unfil 
tered water is shown by full arrows, the 
course of the filtered water is shown by feath 
erless arrows, and the course of the clean-out 
water is shown by dotted arrows. 
I do not wish to be limited to a cylinder 10 
with its piston 11, as some other form of de 
vice containing clear water might be used 
for this purpose. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A filter provided with a valve device, 
containing means whereby it is automatically 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
95 
ICC 
Jo5 
I I5 
I 25 
582,899 
3 
O 
operated, a device for containing clear Water, 
a supply-pipe communicating with said de 
vice containing clear Water through said valve 
device, whereby the Valve device and device 
containing clear Water are operated automat 
ically at predetermined intervals, by the hy 
drostatic pressure in the Supply-pipe, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a Water-cylinder having 
a piston and with which the filter connects, 
a supply-pipe, and an automatically-operated 
valve device controlling a communication be 
tween the supply-pipe and the Water-cylin 
der, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. In a water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a water-cylinder having 
a piston and with which the filter connects, 
a supply-pipe, and an automatic valve device 
controlling a communication between the sup 
ply-pipe and the Water-cylinder; Substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a Water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a device for containing 
water with which the filter connects, a sup 
ply - pipe, and an automatically-operated 
valve device controlling a communication be 
tween the supply-pipe and the device con 
taining water; substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
5. In a Water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a device for containing 
clear water with which the filter connects, a 
Supply-pipe, a valve device controlling a com 
munication between the supply-pipe and the 
device containing clear Water, and a commu 
nication between the valve device and the 
filter, outside of the filtering-stone, whereby 
clear Water under the supply-pressure is made 
to pass OutWardly through the stone and at 
the same time a small portion of water is per 
mitted to pass from the supply-pipe to the 
filter outside of the stone; substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a Water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a device for containing 
clear Water with which the filter communi 
cates, a Supply-pipe, a valve device control 
ling a communication between the supply 
pipe and the device containing clear water, 
a communication between the valve device 
and the filter outside of the filtering-stone, 
and a communication between the valve de 
vice and the filterinside of the filtering-stone; 
Substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
7. In a Water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a device for containing 
clear Water with which the filter communi 
cates, a Supply-pipe, a Valve device control 
ling a communication between the supply 
pipe and the device containing clear water, 
a pipe forming a communication between the 
valve device and the filter outside of the fil 
tering-stone, a pipe and branch forming a 
communication between the valve device and 
the filter inside of the filtering-stone, and a 
pipe forming a communication between the 
valve device and the bottom of the filter out 
side of the filtering-stone; substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
S. In a Water-filtering apparatus, the Com 
bination of a filter, a device for containing 
clear water with which the filter communi 
cates, a supply-pipe, a valve device control 
ling a communication between the supply 
pipe and the device containing clear Water, 
a storage-tank, a pipe forming a communica 
tion between the valve device and the Stor 
age-tank, a pipe and branch forming a com 
munication between the valve device and the 
filter inside of the filtering-stone, a pipe form 
ing a communication between the valve de 
vice and the filter outside the filtering-stone, 
and a pipe forming a communication between 
the valve device and the bottom of the filter 
outside of the filtering-stone; substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
9. In a water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a cylinder adapted to con 
tain clear water and having a piston, a clear 
water pipe forming a communication between 
the cylinder and the filter inside of the filter 
ing-stone, a valve device controlling commu 
nication between the supply-pipe and said 
cylinder, a branch forming a communication 
between the valve device and said clear-Wa 
ter pipe, a pipe forming a communication be-, 
tween the valve device and the filter outside 
of the filtering-stone, and a pipe forming a 
communication between the valve device and 
the bottom of the filter outside of the filtering 
stone; substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
10. In a water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a cylinder having a pis 
ton, a pipe forming a communication between 
the cylinder and the filter inside of the filter 
ing-stone, a valve device controlling the com 
munication between the supply-pipe and said 
cylinder, a waste-pipe, and a pipe forming a 
communication between the valve device and 
the waste-pipe; substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
11. In a Water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a clear-water cylinder hav 
ing a piston, a pipe forming a communication 
between the clear-water cylinder and the fil 
ter inside of the filtering-stone, a supply-pipe, 
a valve device forming a communication be 
tween the supply-pipe and said cylinder, a . 
pipe forming a communication between the 
valve device and the filter outside of the fil 
tering-stone, a storage-tank, a pipe forming 
a communication between the valve device 
and the storage-tank, a cut-off tank, a pipe 
forming a communication between the Sup 
ply-pipe and the cut-off tank, a cylinder lo 
cated within the cut-off tank and containing 
a piston for moving said valve device, a chest 
communicating with said last-mentioned cyl 
inder and with which said supply-pipe com 
municates, Valves located in said chest, a 
float connected to the stem of said valves, a 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
75 
90 
CO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I25 
4. 
582,899 
5 
O 
drip-cock located in said last-mentioned pipe, 
a siphon and a float-valve controlling the si 
phon; substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
12. In a water-filtering apparatus, the com 
bination of a filter, a clear-Water cylinder hav 
ing a piston, a pipe forming a communication 
between the clear-water cylinder and the fil 
ter, a supply-pipe, and a valve device located 
between the supply-pipe and the clear-Water 
cylinder; said valve device consisting essen 
tially of a tube containing a perforated sleeve 
and a valve-stem provided with cup-leathers; 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
13. In combination with a self-cleaning fil 
In presence of - 
C. G. EDWARDS, 
A. M. EBERSOLE. 
ter, having means for intermittently direct 
ing backflow of clear water through the fil 
tering medium to cleanse the same; a water 
forcing device operated by hydrostatic pres 
sure of the supply and intermittently-oper 
atting automatic mechanism also actuated by 
the pressure of the water-supply controlling 
the communication of the supply-pressure to 
said water-forcing device for effecting such 
backflow at predetermined intervals, as ex 
plained. 
IHERMIAN C. STIFEL. 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US582499.txt	(No Model.) 
H. F. CRAND ALL & E. J. BIRKETT, 
ELEWATOR AND GRAIN GUIDE FOR HARWESTERS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 582,499. 
Patented May 11, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
H. F. CRAND ALL & E. J. BIRKETT. 
ELEWATOR AND GRAIN GUIDE FOR HARWESTERS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 582,499. 
Patented May ll, 1897. 
 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3 
H. F. CRAND ALL & E. J. BIRKETT. 
ELEWATOR AND CRAIN G.UIDE FOR, HARWESTERS, 
No. 582,499. 
Patented May ll, l897. 
m.  
 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
H. F. CRAND ALL & E. J. BIRKETT, 
ELEVATOR AND GRAIN GUIDE FOR HARVESTERs. 
No. 582,499. 
Patented May 11, 1897. 
 
(No Model.) 
H. F. CRAND ALL & E. J. BIRKETT. 
ELEWATOR AND GRAIN GUIDE FOR HARWESTERS. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 582,499. 
Patented May ll, l897. 
k 
R 
AA 
S. 
----- 
w a w - 
f 
w 
V 
- 
w 
w 
s 
e 
EH 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
H. F. CRAND ALL & E. J. BIRKETT, 
ELEWATOR AND GRAIN GUIDE FOR HARWESTERS, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 582,499. 
Patented May ll, 1897. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY F. CRANDALL AND EDWARD J. BIRKETT, OF MILWAUKEE, WIS 
CONSIN, ASSIGNORS TO THE MILWAUKEE HARVESTER COMPANY, OF 
SAMIE PLACE. 
ELEVATOR AND GRAN-GUIDE FOR HARVESTERs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,499, dated May 11, 1897. 
Application filed September 21, 1895, Serial No. 563,181 (No model.) 
55 
65 
To cult, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, HENRY F. CRANDALL 
and EDWARD J. BIRKETT, of Milwaukee, in 
the county of Milwaukee and State of Wis 
Consin, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Elevators and Grain-Guides 
for Harvesters; and we dohereby declare that 
the following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, which will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it pertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
Our improvements relate particularly to 
the elevator and binder receptacle... 
The main objects of this invention are to 
avoid interference with the movement of long 
grain through the elevator and binder recep 
tacle and the consequent choking of the ele 
vator thereby, to prevent scattering short 
grain, and to facilitate the elevation and de 
livery to the binding mechanism of grain 
varying in length. 
It consists, essentially, of a door or guard 
applied to the rear end of the elevator-chute 
and constructed and arranged to be moved 
Out of the Way by the passage of long grain 
and to automatically close and prevent the 
scattering of short grain. 
It consists, further, of a deflector or guide 
for directing the grain on the binder-deck in 
proper position to the binding mechanism, 
constructed and arranged to be swung or 
moved out of the way by long grain and to 
be automatically returned to normal positio 
for operation upon shorter grain. 
It consists, also, of a novel arrangement of 
the elevator-belts and rollers and certain de 
tails in the construction and arrangement of 
component parts of the machine hereinafter 
particularly described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings like letters 
designate the same parts in the several fig 
leS. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a portion of a har 
vester embodying our improvements, the 
platform being broken away and the binding 
Y. 
mechanism removed. Fig. 2 is a rear eleva 
tion of the same. Fig. 3 is an elevation of 
the elevator viewed from the grain end of the 
machine, the platform being shown in Verti. 
Fig. 4 is a rear end view. 
cal cross-section. 
of the elevator, the self-closing door at its 
rear end and the binder being removed and 
the elevator-belts indicated by dotted lines. 
Fig. 5 is a cross-section on the line 55, Fig. 
2, showing a portion of the elevator on an en 
larged scale. Fig. 6 is an enlarged vertical 
cross-section of a portion of the door normally 
closing the opening at the rear end of the ele 
vator, showing the Spring and its attachment 
for closing said door. Fig. 7 is a side eleva 
tion of the parts shown in Fig. 6 as viewed 
from the rear of the machine. Fig. 8 is an 
enlarged elevation of a portion of the grain 
deflector or guide on the binder-deck and its 
connections; and Fig. 9 is a cross-section of 
the deflector, showing its pivot and adjusting 
connections as Viewed from the binder end of 
the machine. 
It has been customary heretofore in the con 
struction of harvesters to permanently close 
the elevators at the rear end or to leave them. 
entirely open and to provide the binder with 
a deflector placed in an upright position across 
the binder-deck and adapted to swing on a 
hinge or pivot at its upper end lengthwise of 
the binder and to be adjusted for guiding 
grain of different lengths to the binding mech 
anism. 
In the first case mentioned, with the eleva 
tor permanently closed at the rear end, the 
heads of long grain are doubled backward in 
their upward passage, thereby frequently 
choking the elevator and interrupting the op 
eration of the machine. In the second case, 
with the elevator constantly open at the rear 
end and with no deflector or guide on the 
binder-deck, an unobstructed passage for long 
grain to the binding mechanism is afforded, 
but short grain, which is often found in the 
same field with the long, is apt to be scattered 
and much of it wasted. To avoid these ob 
jections and to facilitate the elevation of the 
grain and its delivery to the binding mechan 
ism is the design of our improvements. 
75 
So 
90 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
582,499 
5 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Referring to Figs. 1 to 4, inclusive, A desig 
nates the main wheel, B the frame, C the 
binder-deck, D a guard or shield projecting 
Over the binder-deck, and E the platform con 
Veyer, all of the usual construction and ar 
rangement. 
F G is the elevator, consisting of the up 
per frame F, in which are journaled rollers 
f, f', and f', carrying the belt f, and the 
lower frame G, in which are journaled the 
rollers g and g', carrying the belt g. 
To the rear end of the lower elevatol-frame 
G is secured a deck H, adapted to support 
the heads of long grain in its passage up the 
elevator. To the rear end of the upper frame 
F is hinged a door I, adapted to normally 
close the opening at the rear end of the ele 
vator between the upper and lower frames 
and belts. At its lower end this dooris turned 
upwardly and rearwardly, forming an in 
clined guiding - surface i, which diverges 
downwardly from the deck II and is adapted 
to be engaged by long grain entering the ele 
vator and thereby cause such grain in its 
passage into and up the elevator to swing 
the door I rearwardly and upwardly out of 
the way, as indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 5. 
The door I is automatically closed and held 
normally in that position by a spring J, (shown 
in detail in Figs. 6 and 7,) coiled around a 
sleeve j of a casting, through which the hinge 
rod passes. It bears at one end against 
the outer side of the door I and is held at 
the other end in one of the notches of a sec 
tori', cast with the sleeve i and attached to 
the upper elevator-frame F. The notched 
sector f' affords means of adjusting the ten 
sion of spring J. 
The lower end of the upper elevator-frame 
F is supported by a tubular bar K, attached 
at one end to the rear sill of the frame B, as 
shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and formed with 
a rearward curve or bend, as shown in Fig. 
3, to afford an unobstructed passage for the 
heads of long grain into the elevator. 
It will be observed that the upper elevator 
belt is carried upon three instead of two roll 
e's, and that the lower roller f' is located far 
ther from the lower elevator-belt than usual, 
and thus produces a wider opening between 
the elevator-belts for the reception of grain 
from the platform conveyer. The interme 
diate roller f, located about the same dis 
tance as the upper roller f from the plane of 
the lower belt g, guides the upper beltf 
from the lower roller f' toward said lower 
belt, which is free to yield away from it and 
permit the passage of any bunch or increased 
mass of grain that can enter the diverging 
opening between the belts. The upper belt 
falso yields opposite the rollerg to permit 
the passage of bunches of grain, and the de 
flection of either belt tightens it on its car 
rying-rollers and causes it to act more posi 
tively. 
The roller f' being located above and nearly 
opposite the inner roller e of the platform 
conveyer coperates with said roller to force 
the grain between the elevator-belts as it is 
delivered thereto from said platform con 
By these means stout heavy grain or 
veyer. 
masses of grain which would otherwise clog 
and stop the elevator are taken care of with 
ease and certainty, and the choking and con 
sequent interruption in the operation of the 
machine are avoided. 
From the upper end of the elevator the grain 
is delivered upon the binder-deck C below the 
guard or shield D. As heretofore stated, it 
has been customary to provide the conduit 
thus formed with a guide hinged or pivoted 
at its upper end, so as to be swung at its lower 
end lengthwise of the binder and set in dif 
ferent positions across the rear end of the 
binder-deck for directing grain of different 
lengths in proper position to the binding mech 
anism, but when it is properly adjusted for 
guiding short grain to the binding mechanism 
it is in the way and obstructs the passage of 
long grain, which is frequently found in the 
same field with the short grain. To meet this 
difficulty, we have provided such a guide with 
a hinge or pivot connection in addition to that 
by which it is adjusted in the ordinary man 
ner for grain of different lengths, whereby 
it may be turned out of the way by the pas 
sage of long grain. 
Referring to Figs. S and 9 in connection 
with Figs. 1 and 2, I represents such a guide 
or deflector. It is hinged at its upper edge 
to a rod or bar l, which is bent at right an 
gles and hinged or pivoted at its upper end 
by its shorter arm in ears provided therefor 
on the upper elevator-frame. It is turned 
rearwardly and upwardly on the under side 
of its upper end, forming an incline l', di 
verging upwardly from the binder-deck C 
and presenting a flaring mouth or opening for 
the reception of the heads of long grain, 
whereby the guide or deflector is turned up 
wardly out of the way by the engagement 
there with of such grain in its passage over 
the binder-deck to the binding mechanism. 
The guide L is held normally in a plane 
perpendicular to the binder-deck by the yield 
ing pressure of a spring l', coiled around the 
rod l and bearing at one end against the rear 
side of said guide and held at the other end 
in one of the notches of a sector n, which is 
hinged or pivotally mounted upon said rodl. 
The sector in is cast integrally or provided 
with a handle m', projecting rearwardly from 
its hinge or pivot connection, and a horizon 
tally-disposed notched sector M, projecting 
forwardly therefrom and adapted to engage 
with a ridge or projection n on the upper ele 
vator-frame, and thereby hold the guide L. 
at any desired angle longitudinally to the 
binder-deck. The spring l thus serves not 
only to hold said guide in normal position, 
but also to yieldingly hold the notched sector 
Min engagement with the plojection m'. The 
7 o 
75 
95 
OO 
IIO 
I 15 
I 25 
65 
 
582,499 
3 
O 
notched sectorm, which is arranged in a plane tomatically turned out of the way by long 
at right angles to that of the sector M, af 
grain in its passage to the binding mechan 
fords means of adjusting the tension of said 
islm, substantially as and for the purposes set 
spring. To adjust said guide for different 
forth. 
lengths of grain, the sector M is lifted out of 
7. In a harvester the combination with the 
engagement with the projection m and is 
binder-deck, of an adjustable supporthinged 
turned with the guide on its vertical hinge 
or pivoted to a part of the machine in a line 
approximately perpendicular to the plane of 
or pivot connection with the frame by means 
of the handle m' into the desired position. 
the binder-deck, and a rearwardly-yielding 
guide extending transversely over the binder 
The sector M being released is forced by the 
spring l into engagement with the projection 
deck, and hinged or pivoted to said support 
m, and thereby locks the parts in place. 
in a line parallel with the plane of the binder 
The guide L is arrested and held in a vertical 
deck and lengthwise of said guide, substan 
position against the pressure of spring l by 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
a projection lat its upper end engaging the 
8. In a harvester the combination with the 
binder-deck, of a rearwardly-yielding guide 
vertical arm of rod l. 
extending transversely over the binder-deck 
We do not wish to be understood as limit 
and hinged or pivoted to a part of the ma 
ing ourselves to the exact details of construc 
chine in a line approximately parallel. With 
tion herein shown and described, since va 
rious modifications thereof may be made 
the plane of the deck, and lengthwise of the 
within the spirit and intended scope of our 
guide which has an incline at its upper end 
whereby it is turned rearwardly and upwardly 
invention. 
out of the way by and for the passage of long 
grain underneath it, substantially as and for 
the purposes set forth. 
9. In a harvester the combination with the 
binder-deck, of an L-shaped rod or support 
having one arm hinged or pivoted to a part 
of the machine in a line approximately per 
pendicular to the binder-deck, means of hold 
ing the other arm, which overhangs the binder 
deck transversely, in any desired position, a 
guide hinged or pivoted lengthwise at or near 
its upper edge to the overhanging arm of said 
rod or support, a spring tending to hold said 
guide in normal position in a plane approxi 
mately perpendicular to the binder-deck, and 
means of adjusting the tension of said Spring, 
substantially as and for the purposes set 
forth. 
10. In a harvester, the combination with the 
frame and binder-deck, of a rod or bar hav 
ing two arms at right angles to each other, 
the shorter arm being pivoted to the frame 
perpendicular to the binder-deck, a deflector 
or guide hinged at its upper edge to the longer 
arm of said rod, a spring and stop arranged 
to hold said guide normally in a plane per 
pendicular to the binder-deck, and a locking 
device for adjustably securing said guide at 
any desired angle lengthwise to the binder 
deck, substantially as and for the purposes 
Set forth. 
11. In a harvester, the combination with the 
frame and binder-deck, of a rod or bar hav 
ing two arms at right angles to each other, 
the shorter arm being pivoted to the frame 
perpendicular to the binder-deck, a deflector 
or guide hinged at its upper edge to the longer 
arm of said rod, a lever-handle pivoted upon 
the upper end of the longer arm of said rod 
and formed or provided on the opposite side 
thereof with a notched sector adapted to en 
gage a projection on the frame and hold said 
guide at any desired angle lengthwise to the 
binder-deck, and a spring coiled upon said 
We claim 
1. In a harvester, the combination with the 
elevator, of a door or movable guard normally 
closing the opening at its rear end, and adapt 
ed to be moved out of the way by the passage 
of long grain and to be automatically re 
stored to normal position after the passage of 
such grain, substantially as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
2. In a harvester, the combination with the 
elevator, of a door hinged to the elevator 
frame above the opening at its rear end, and 
adapted to be automatically turned out of the 
way for the passage of long grain, substan 
tially as and for the purposes set forth. 
3. In a harvester, the combination with the 
elevator, of a door hinged to the elevator 
frame above the opening at its rear end, and 
having an incline at the lower end whereby 
it is turned aside by the passage of long grain 
into the elevator, substantially as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
4. In a harvester, the combination with the 
elevator, of a door hinged to the elevator 
frame and normally closing the opening at 
its rear end, and a spring tending to close said 
door, Substantially as and for the purposes 
Set forth. 
5. In a harvester, the combination with the 
elevator, of a door hinged to its rear end so 
as to normally close the opening therein and 
having an incline at its lower end whereby it 
is automatically turned aside by the passage 
of long grain into the elevator, a spring tend 
ing to close said door and means of adjusting 
the tension of said spring, substantially as 
and for the purposes set forth. 
6. In a harvester the combination with the 
binder-deck, of a rearwardly-yielding guide 
extending transversely over the binder-deck 
and hinged or pivoted to a part of the ma 
chine in a line approximately parallel with 
the plane of the binder-deck, and lengthwise 
of said guide, whereby it is adapted to be all 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
TOO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
 
4. 
582,499 
rod and engaging at one end with said lever- our own. We affix our signatures in presence 
handle and at the opposite end with said guide of two witnesses. 
So as to hold the sector in engagement with 
said projection and the guide in normal-po- 
5 sition with yielding pressure, substantially 
as and for the purposes set forth. 
In testimony that We claim the foregoing as 
HENRY F. CRAND ALT. 
EDWARD J. BIRIKETT. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. I. GOSS, 
R. C. LIVESAY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US582599.txt	(No Model ) 
No. 582,599. 
 
A. C. BROWNELL, 
ROLLER BEARING, 
Patented May 11, 1897. 
2 
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
% 
M 
.N WS 
NGS 
SSN 
77%z2. 
35%Gee 225S 
SS 
2M 
2 
2 - 
al 
52 
. . 
. 
A 
a. 
%. NYN 
SA 
6 
% 2. 
 
2ZEEE: 
 
 
 
 
 
: 
 
 
 
 
 
M/z/vasses. ity 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
THENORRIS PETERs co, PHoTo-uTHo, washington. p. c. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. C. BROWNELL, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO HENRY T. McDONALD, OF SAME PLACE. 
ROLLER BEARNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,599, dated May 11, 1897. 
Application filed February 11, 1897, Serial No. 622,891, (No model.) 
d 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER. C. BROW 
NELL, of the city and county of Providence, 
in the State of Rhode Island, have invented 
5 a certain new and useful Improvement in 
Roller-Bearings for the Wheels of Bicycles 
and other Vehicles; and I declare the follow 
ing to be a specification thereof, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of my 
invention with the axle shown in front ele 
vation. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of 
the hub at and near the end thereof. Fig. 3 
is a diametrical section of the cage wherein 
I5 the rollers are mounted, the rollers and ball 
bearings being shown in elevation. Fig. 4 
is an end elevation of the same. Fig. 5 is a 
view of the same as seen in section on line 
acac of Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a view of the dust 
2O cap as seen in diametrical section. Fig. 7 is 
a front elevation of said dust-cap. Fig. 8 is 
a view of the holding-nut as seen in diamet 
rical section. Fig. 9 is a front elevation of 
said nut. Fig. 10 is a diametrical section of 
25 the hub at and near one end thereof, the 
sprocket-wheel on said hub, and the dust-cap 
at the sprocketed end of the hub. 
Like letters indicate like parts. 
My invention consists in the combination, 
3o with the wheel of a bicycle or other vehicle 
and the axle on which said hub is mounted, 
of a cage provided with rollers which are in 
rolling contact with a suitable bearing-sur 
face secured to the axle, and also with balls, 
35 and a supporting-ring therefor on the sides 
of said cage adapted to resist the end-thrust 
friction of the wheel-hub against suitable 
bearing-surfaces, together with a dust-cap 
arranged and mounted to protect said roll 
4o ers, balls, and supporting-rings from dust 
and moisture, as hereinafter particularly de 
In the drawings, A is the axle of the bicycle 
or vehicle, having its ends screw-threaded. 
B is the hub, tubular inform and rotatable. 
The hub is screw-threaded upon its ends. It 
has the annular flanges C C, through the holes 
lb b of which the wire spokes of the wheel 
pass or are secured in the usual manner. The 
So hub B also has the interior flanges cc, each 
With a central circular aperture d d whose 
scribed. 
45 
D D are check-nuts screwed upon the 6o 
diameter is slightly greater than the diameter 
of the central part of the axle A. The hub 
B also is cut away at its ends to form a thin 
flange and a shoulder, as seen at e in Fig. 2. 55 
C C are sleeves screw-threaded and en 
gageable upon the ends of the axle A, as 
shown. Each sleeve C has an enlarged head 
if and a flange g, as shown in Figs. 1, 8, and 9. 
threaded ends of the axle A and abutting the 
sleeves C C, respectively. 
The cages are made of two rings E. E. On 
the outer faces of the rings EE are the rings 
F F. Rollers G. G. are mounted in and be- 65 
tween the rings E E upon pins h. The rings 
E E F F are held together by the screws o 0. 
The rollers G. G. are preferably channeled 
circumferentially in their central part, so as 
to leave at their ends circumferential bearing- to 
surfaces, as seen in Figs. I and 3. 
The rings FF have conical holes, and balls 
H H are loosely mounted in said holes and 
slightly protrude therefrom, as shown in Figs. 
I and 3. 
The rollers G. G., as seen in Fig. 1, have 
their bearings upon the tubular extensions of 
the sleeves C C, respectively, and the balls 
H H on the inner sides of the cages have 
their bearings against the inner flanges C C of 8o 
the hub B, while the balls H H on the outer 
sides of the cages have their bearings against 
the inner surface of the heads or flanges of 
the sleeves C C, respectively. 
aperture m of a diameter to receive the head 
f of the sleeve C, and its circumferential 
flange is screw-threaded on the inside to en 
gage with the screw-threaded end of the hub B. 
wise fastened upon the hub. It has a circu 
lar channel, Fig. 10, within which the flange 
of the cap M' is received, which screws upon 
the end of the hub. The holes or sockets 1 m. 
are provided for the reception of a spanner- 95 
wrench, by which the cap M" can be screwed 
into position. 
The parts are assembled as shown in Fig. 
1, where it is seen that the rollers G. G. give 
a vertical rolling bearing to the wheel-hub, roo 
while the balls H H give lateral or endwise 
bearings, the latter being especially impor 
N is the sprocket-wheel, brazed or other- 9o 
M M are caps having a central circular 85 
- 
mounted on said cages and having conical 
holes, and balls mounted in said holes and 
bearing against the head of the sleeves and 
against said annular flanges, respectively, 
Substantially as specified. 
2. In combination with a bicycle wheel and 
axle, a cage surrounding said axle within the 
hub of the wheel and consisting of two rings, 
rollers mounted between said rings, two outer 
rings mounted on said cages, having conical 
holes, balls mounted in said holes so as to 
slightly protrude outwardly therefrom and 
means for fastening all said rings together, 
Substantially as set forth. 
ALEXANDER. C. BROWNELI. 
Witnesses: 
WARREN R. PERCE, 
CHARLES A. WILKINSON. 
25 
2 
582,599 
tant when the bicycle or vehicle is describ 
ing a short curve, in which case the bearing 
of the hub is both perpendicular to the axle 
and lateral at the same time. 
The cap Mor MI'prevents dampness or dust 
from reaching the roller, balls, or bearings, and 
so protects them from being worn by grit. 
I claim as a novel and useful invention 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. In combination with the wheel of a bi 
cycle or vehicle, a tubular, rotatable hub, an 
axle having screw-threaded ends, a sleeve on 
each end of the axle and provided with an 
annular head, an annular flange extending 
from said sleeve within the bore of the hub 
but surrounding the axle, cages having roll 
ers which are mounted therein and bear On 
said sleeves, respectively, rings properly 
d 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US582699.txt	(No Model.) 
H. W. SLATER, 
ANTIRATTLING THILL COUPLING, 
No. 582,699. 
Patented May 18, 1897. 
 
I 
  
DITNESSEs: 
4. l. 
36.33 
 
 
 
Hill 
i 
H 
Inven Toa: 
s 
a/-ra 00.46% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HERMAN W. SLATER, OF CHICAGO, ILT, INOIS. 
ANTIRATTLING THILL-COUPLING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,699, dated May 18, 1897. 
Application filed February 5, 1897, Serial No. 622,162, (No model.) 
To a f(, 7 lifton, it no.7/ conce7n. 
Be it known that I, HERMAN W. SLATER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in a Combination Antirattler 
and Shaft-Clip, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
devices to be used for coupling or connecting 
the shafts or thills to the axle of a vehicle; 
and it consists in certain peculiarities of the 
Construction, novel arrangement, and opera 
tion of the various parts thereof, as will be 
hereinafter more fully set forth and specific 
ally claimed. 
The objects of my invention are, first, to 
provide a connection for each of the shafts 
or thills which shall be simple and inexpen 
sive in construction, strong, durable, and 
effective in Operation, and, second, such a 
connection or coupling which by reason of 
the peculiar construction, arrangement, and 
operation of its parts will prevent rattling, 
i in other words, render the coupling noise 
eSS, 
Still another object of my invention is to 
enable the shafts to be raised to any desired 
height and there retained. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to Which my invention pertains to make and 
use the same, I will now proceed to describe 
it, referring to the accompanying drawings,in 
Which 
Figure 1 is a front view.in elevation of the 
front portion of a vehicle, showing my anti 
rattlers and shaft-clips attached to the axle 
thereof. Fig. 2 is an enlarged side view, 
partly in Section, of one of the antirattlers 
and clips and a portion of one of the shafts 
Orthills. Fig. 3 is an enlarged plan view of 
a portion of one of the thills and a part of the 
axle, showing the antirattler in section. Fig. 
4 is a central sectional view of one of the 
antirattlers detached. Fig. 5 is a cross-sec 
tional view of the cushion for the shaft-iron. 
Fig. 6 is a viewin side elevation of said cush 
ion. Fig. 7 is an end view thereof. Fig. 8 is 
a view of one end of the cylindrical casings 
for One of the cushions, and Fig. 9 is a view in 
elevation of one of said casings. 
Similar letters refer to like parts through 
out the different views of the drawings. 
E represents the shaft-irons, which may be 
bolted or otherwise secured to the shafts or 
thills, as is clearly shown in Figs. 2 and 3 of 
the drawings. The free end of each of the 
shaft-irons E is formed or provided with a 
transverse portion F, which is cylindrical in 
cross-section and may be hollow, as shown by 
dotted lines. (See Fig. 3.) The transverse 
portion F extends from either side of the 
iron E, and thus forms a T-shaped piece. 
The cylindrical casings A are each provided 
with a segmental or quadrantal recess C in 
its front surface, through which the shaft 
irons E extend and operate. One end of each 
of the casings A is open and screw-threaded 
to engage a screw-threaded cap B. The lower 
portion of each of the cylindrical casings A 
is formed or provided with a rearwardly-ex 
tending arm b, having openings for the re 
ception of the ends of a clip, which is passed 
over the axle and is secured thereon by means 
of nuts on the ends of said clip, as is shown 
in Fig. 2 of the drawings. 
Within each of the casings A is located a 
cylindrical cushion C, which is made of rub 
ber or other suitable flexible material and is 
provided with a longitudinal and cylindrical 
opening d to receive the transverse portion 
F of the shaft-iron. Each of the cushions is 
also provided at a right angle to its opening 
d with a segmental or quadrantal recess c, 
through which the shank of the shaft-iron 
passes and operates. 
Within each of the caps B is located a rub 
ber cushion D, having in its surface adjacent 
to the cushion C a central openinge to receive 
One end of the transverse portion F of the 
Shaft-iron. 
To use my combined antirattler and shaft 
clip, the casings A are secured on the axle of 
the Vehicle by means of the clips or in any 
suitable manner, and the shaft-irons E, hav 
ing on their transverse portions F the cush 
ions C, may be inserted into said casings 
through the open ends and recesses a, thereof, 
when the caps B, provided with the internal 
cushions D, may be screwed on the open ends 
of the casings until the ends of the transverse 
portions F are impinged by the rubber cush 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
2 
582,699 
45 
55 
its shank extending through the recesses of 
said cushion and casing, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination of a cylindrical casing, 
provided with a quadrantal recess in its front 
portion and having one of its ends open and 
Screw-threaded, of means to secure the casing 
to the shaft of the vehicle, the cushion-section 
C located within the casing and having a cen 
tral opening and a quadrantal receSS in its 
front portion, a screw-threaded cap to engage 
the open end of the casing, the cushion-sec 
tion ID, located in the cap and having a cen 
tral recess, and a T-shaped iron having its 
transverse portion in the opening of the cush 
ion-sections, and its shank extending through 
the recesses of the cushion and casing, said 
transverse portion adapted to turn within the 
cushion, and the shank thereof having a ver 
tical movement, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a slotted cylindrical 
casing, having one of its ends open and screw 
threaded, with means to secure it to the axle 
of the vehicle, a sectional cylindrical cushion 
having a central opening and a quadrantal 
recess communicating there with in its front 
portion, a screw-threaded cap to engage the 
Screw-threads on the open portion of the slot 
ted cylinder and adapted to contact with one 
end of the cushion, and a hollow T-shaped 
iron having its transverse portion located in 
the opening of the cushion and its shank ex 
tending through the recesses of the cushion 
and casing, substantially as described. 
IERMAN W. SATER. 
Witnesses: 
LOUIS IXRAMPE, 
F. M. L.A. FREENIER. 
O 
ions, when the shafts or thills may be raised 
to any desired position and there retained by 
reason of the clamping of said cushions. 
It is apparent that as each of the casings 
and cushions C therein is provided with a 
segmental Section, which are usually quad 
'antal or of about a quarter-circle, the shafts 
may have a vertical movement of about ninety 
degrees, and as the cushions C and D are 
clamped tightly and rigidly held within the 
cylindrical casings the portions F will turn 
in the openings d and e thereof, and that 
any noise incident to the lateral movement 
of the shaft-irons will be prevented. The 
portions F, as before stated, may be hollow 
to receive pins or bolts when it is desired to 
connect them to ordinary eye-clips on the 
shaft in the event of the casings becoming 
broken or otherwise out of repair. It is also 
apparent that by forming the portions F hol 
low the sections C and D of the cushions may 
be embedded therein by screwing the cap B 
tightly on each of the cylinders A, and thereby 
more rigidly secure the said portions within 
the cushions, so that the shafts will be more 
firmly held in the desired position, yet the 
transverse portions F will be allowed to turn 
in their respective cushions. 
IIaving thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of a cylindrical casing, 
provided with a quadrantal recess in its front 
portion and having means to secure it to the 
axle of the vehicle, of a cushion located in 
Said casing and having a quadrantal recess 
in its front portion, and a central opening, a 
T-shaped iron having its transverse portion 
located in the opening of the cushion and 
15 
2C) 
3C) 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US582799.txt	(NO MO del ) 
W. A. RANDOW. 
LOCOMOTIVE CAB SEAT, 
No. 582,799. 
 
Patented May 18, 1897, 
  
i0 
sib-les-3-on 
64-47 -- 
 
53 (as a 46 
Y 25 /6 & 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. RANDOW, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
LOCOM OTV 
E - CAB SEAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters 
Application filed Januaryl 9, 1897, 
Patent No. 582,799, dated May 18, 1897. 
Serial No, 619,798, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM A. RANDOW, 
a citizen of the United States of America, re 
siding at Denver, in the county of Arapahoe 
and State of Colorado, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Locomotive 
Cab Seats; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters and fig 
ures of reference marked thereon, which form 
a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
locomotive-cab-chair seats; and the objects 
Of my invention are, first, to provide a loco 
motive-cab chair the seat of which is spring 
Cushioned; second, to provide a cab-chair 
having a folding seat; third, to provide a cab 
chair having a folding arm-rest. I attain 
these Objects by the mechanism illustrated 
and described in the accompanying drawings 
and specification, in which 
Figure I represents a vertical cross-section 
of my improved cab-chair, showing the chair 
in a folded position; Fig. 2, a side elevation 
of the same attached to the side of a cab and 
showing the chair in an open position; Fig. 3, 
a front elevation; Fig. 4, two fragments in 
perspective of a pivotal joint of the arm-rest 
and One of its supports; Fig. 5, a fragment in 
perspective of the seat-supporting mechan 
ism, and Fig. 6 a fragment in perspective of 
the lower wall-support and lower end of the 
chair. 
Similarletters and figures of reference refer 
to similar parts throughout the several views. 
Referring to Fig. 1, A designates the seat, 
and B the arm-rest. 
C is a thin metal plate which I secure to 
the side of the cab by screws C, the side out 
lines of the cab being designated by the dotted 
lines D. To this plate I secure in a vertical 
position two yoke-shaped strips E and F, at 
a short distance apart, by rivets G. The ends 
of these strips are bent at right angles away 
from the plate. Extending across the under 
side of the top part of these strips is a strip H, 
Which is held up against them by the top of 
the springs I and J, which bear against the 
under side of it. These springs rest on the 
lower ends of the strips E and F and are con 
fined to them by the bolts IK and L, which 
pass freely through both ends of the strips 
and also through the cross-strip H. Conse 
quently this cross-strip is free to move down 
and compress the springs independent of the 
vertical strips and of the plate. The ends of 
this cross-strip are bent down and are riveted 
with the top ends of the cross-braces MandN 
to the side standards O and P, the bottom 
ends of which are riveted to the lower ends 
of the cross-braces M and N. Consequently 
the standards, the cross-braces, and the cross 
piece comprise a rigid frame. 
On the lower 
end of the standards I place staples Q, which 
fit loosely, and secure them to a plate R, 
which is also secured to the side of the cab 
by screws S. To the turned-down ends U of 
the cross-piece H, I Secure an angle-plate V, 
one to each vertical end, by screws W, (see 
Fig. 4) and to these angle-plates Irivet ver 
tical strips X, and to the tops of these strips 
I secure by rivets hinge-pieces Y, which are 
provided with a T-slot Z or eye, in which fits 
a T-shaped pin , which is formed on the end 
of the straps 2. These strips are secured to 
a strip of Wood B, which forms an arm-rest. 
The form of the pins 1 is such that they must 
be inserted in the eyes before they are se 
cured to the arm-rest, and when the arm-rest 
is swung down in a position of use the straps 
rest on the top of the vertical strips X and 
hold it at right angles to the vertical strips X, 
as shown in Fig. 2. 
In the tops of the standards O and P, I form. 
slots 4, and in these slots I pivot to slide freely 
up and down angled levers 5 and 6, which 
support the strip of wood A, which forms the 
seat, the seat being secured to them by rivets 
8. In the lower edge of these angled levers 
I form a slot 9 in which I pivot one end of a 
forked lever 10, the opposite end of which is 
pivoted to the lower end of the standards and 
the cross-braces, the ends of these cross-braces 
being carried under and bent up on the op 
posite side of the standards to form a shoe. 
The forked lever 10 is formed of the pieces 11 
and 12, the piece 11 being riveted to the piece 
12 near its lower end. The plate R is secured 
to the side of the cab in a position to stand 
about two or three inches above the floor-line 
D'. All of the mechanism of the chair ex 
90 
OO 
O 
25 
45 
 
2 
582,799 
cept these plates and the vertical strips E and 
F are supported by the springs, and when 
the seat is not in use it is folded up, as shown 
in Fig. 1, which is accomplished by moving 
the rear end of the seat or its angled levers 
up in the slots in the standards and moving 
the forked levers 10 in toward the standards 
until they stand parallel with them. The 
arm-rest may also be moved into a vertical 
position. When the seat is to be used, it is 
swung out, as shown in Fig. 2, by moving the 
angled seat-levers down in the slots in the 
standards and the levers 10 out to the ends of 
the slots in the lower edges of the angled le 
vers. The arm-rest is also swung down to a 
position of use, and when the seat is occupied 
the entire weight of the occupant is carried 
by the springs, which makes a resilient cush 
ion at all times independent of the jolting of 
the locomotive. The seat is preferably situ 
ated in the cab relative to the cab-window to 
allow the arm-rest to swing down over the 
window-sill, which is designated by the dot 
ted line 13. When the window is open, by 
this arrangement the seat occupies but very 
little space along the side of the cab, and it 
provides for the engineer and firennan a com 
fortable spring-cushioned seat and arm-rest of 
simple and durable construction. Both the 
seat and arm-rest may be upholstered, if de 
sired. 
I do not wish to be limited to the exact con 
struction shown and described, as many 
changes might be made without departing 
from the spirit of my invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a locomotive-cab seat the combination 
of the side standards the main supporting 
plate and foot - plates, vertically-arranged 
yoke-shaped strips secured to said main plate, 
compression-springs secured to said vertical 
45 
So 
55 
yoke-shaped strips and secured against dis 
placement therefrom, a cross-strip arranged 
to rest freely on the top of Said Springs and 
adapted to be held resiliently against the un 
der side of the top of the vertical yoke-shaped 
strips by said springs, with a seat pivotally 
secured to said cross-piece and adapted to 
swing downward and upward into vertical 
and horizontal positions and an arm - rest 
adapted to be supported by said cross-piece 
and springs, and adapted to pivotally swing 
into vertical and horizontal positions, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination with the supporting 
plates of the springs, the cross-strip resting 
thereon, the cross-braces and the oppositely 
disposed standards secured to said cross-strip 
and having slots in their top ends, angled le 
vers pivoted to move in said slots and sup 
porting a seat, slots in said angled levers and 
levers pivoted at one end in said slots to move 
therein and pivoted at their opposite ends to 
the bottom of the said standards and cross 
braces, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the supporting 
plates, the springs the cross-piece resting on 
said springs, the standards, the seat-support 
ing angled levers, the seat, the levers extend 
ing from said seat-supporting levers to the 
bottom of said standards, the cross-braces 
and the vertical strips secured to said cross 
piece, a hinge-eye secured to the top of said 75 
vertical strips and an arm-rest having a hinge 
pin and strap pivoted to said hinge-eye and 
adapted to swing from a horizontal to a ver 
tical position, substantially as described. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 8o 
65 
WILLIAM A. RANDOW. 
Witnesses: 
ALEXANDER SAMPSON GREIG, 
ROBERT GERWING. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US582899.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. CRAND ALL. 
BRAKE FOR BABY CARRIAGES, 
 
No. 582,899. 
Patented May 18, 1897, 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
JESSE A. CRANDALL, OF BROOKLYN, 
NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALE 
TO WILLIAM. H. ADAMS, OF SAME PLACE. 
BRAKE FOR BABY CARRAGES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 582,899, dated May 18, 1897. 
Application filed February 5, 1897, Serial No. 622,158, (No model.) 
O 
25 
2O leased and held in its released position. 
To all, uhon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JESSE A. CRANDALL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, in the county of Kings and State of New 
5 York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Brakes for Baby-Carriages, 
of which the following is a specification, ref. 
erence being had therein to the accompany 
ing dra Wings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a carriage, 
showing my improved brake in position. Fig. 
2 is a bottom view thereof. Fig. 3 is a detail 
bottom view of the device for holding the le 
Wel. 
This invention relates to a new and useful 
improvement in brakes for baby-carriages; 
and it has for its object to provide an ex 
ceedingly simple brake which may be readily 
set to hold the wheels against rotation or re 
This invention consists in the novel com 
bination and arrangement of parts herein 
after described, and particularly pointed out 
in the claims appended. 
Referring to the parts by numerals, 1 1 
designate the side-bars of a carriage, which 
are secured to the axle in the usual way. 
Pivoted to each of these side-bars at coinci 
dent points near the rear edge of the front 
3o Wheel is a lever 2, which carries at its outer 
end a brake-shoe 3, which is adapted to en 
gage the rim of the adjacent wheel. The in 
ner end of each lever is pivoted to one end of 
a rigid link 4, which connects the two levers 
35 2, as shown. Connected to the center of this 
link 4 is a rod 5, which extends rearwardly 
and passes through an aperture in the rear 
axle or through a suitable guide secured there 
on. The forward end of this rod passes loosely 
4o through the link 4 and is threaded to receive 
a set-screw 6 on its forward end, said set 
screw bearing against the forward side of the 
link. By means of this set-screw the posi 
tions of the brake-shoes in relation to the 
45 Wheel-rims may be varied to secure the proper 
operation of the brakes. 
The rear end of the rod 5 is formed into an 
eye 7 and engaging therewith is an eye 8, 
formed on the lower end of the upwardly and 
5o rearwardly extending rod 9, which is secured 
at its rear end to a lever 10, which is pivoted 
 
55 
75 
upon the handle 12 of the carriage. Secured 
also upon the handle 12 is a forwardly-ex 
tending spring-plate 13, which is formed with 
two upwardly - extending stops 14 and 15. 
When it is desired to put the brake on the 
wheels, the lever 10 is pulled rearwardly and 
dropped behind stop 14. 
To insure the brakes fitting tightly on the 
wheels in this position, the connection be 
tween the link 4 and rod 5 is made adjust 
able, as described. When it is desired to re 
lease the brakes, lever 10 is released from 
stop 14 and forced forward to stop 15, where 
it will remain until it is desired to again put 
on the brakes. 
It will thus be seen that I provide a brake 
which may be accurately adjusted so as to ap 
ply the brakes with the desired degree of 
force. It will also be noted that the brakes 
will be operated simultaneously. 
It will of course be understood that the 
pivotal connections of the ends of link 4 with 
the ends of the levers 2 will be sufficiently 
loose to permit the brake-levers to be operated 
by the lever 10. Because of the provision of 
the means for adjusting the brake-levers to 
secure their proper position in relation to the 
rims of the wheels the movement of the said 
levers need be very small. It will also be 
noted that the levers may be adjusted to com 
pensate for any Wear of the brake-shoes or 
the tires of the wheels, which latter, if the 
tires be made of rubber, may be considerable. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
l. A brake for a baby-carriage comprising 
a pair of levers pivoted to the side-bars of a 
carriage, a rigid link connecting their inner 
ends, their outer ends being adapted to en 
gage the rims of the adjacent wheels, an op 
erating-rod connected to said link and ex 
tending rearwardly, a lever connected to the 
rear end of said rod by a non-elastic connec 
tion and pivoted on the carriage, and means 
for holding said lever in its adjusted posi 
tions, whereby the brake may be positively 
actuated by the lever to hold or release the 
wheels and may be held in either of its posi 
tions substantially as described. 
2. A brake for a baby-carriage, comprising 
95 
OO 
2 
582,899 
ends, their outer ends being adapted to en 
gage the rims of the adjacent wheels, a rod 
passing centrally through said link, its rear 
end being screw-threaded, an adjustable stop 
mounted on said rod and adapted to engage 
the front side of the link, the said rod extend 
ing rearwardly and being guided by the axle, 
a lever pivoted on the handle of the carriage, 
said lever being connected to the rod by a 
non-elastic connecting means, and a Spring 
plate carried by the handle and formed with 
stops adapted to engage the lever and hold it 
in its positions, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Ia?ix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JESSE A. CRAND AIT. 
25 
Witnesses: 
NOAH TEBBETTS, 
WNT. II. CUNNINGII AM. 
O 
a pair of levers pivoted to the side-bars of the 
carriage, a rigid link connecting their inner 
ends, their Outer ends being adapted to en 
gage the rims of the adjacent wheels, a rod 
adjustably connected to said link, said rod 
extending rearwardly, a guide on the rear 
axle for said rod, a lever pivoted on the han 
dle of the carriage, said rod being connected to 
said lever by a non-elastic connecting means, 
and means carried by the handle for Secur 
ing the lever in its various positions, wherelby 
the brake may be positively actuated by the 
lever to hold the wheels or to release them, 
and the brake may be adjusted to Secure 
their proper operation substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. A brake for a baby-carriage comprising 
a pair of levers pivoted to the side-bars of the 
carriage, a rigid link connecting their inner 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583000.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 583,000. 
 
F. McCARTY. 
MILK CAN. 
Patented May 18, 1897. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK MCCARTY, OF MARTINS FERRY, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS 
TO WM. HILTON AND A. W. HARRIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
MKs CAN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 583,000, dated May 18, 1897. 
Application filed August 24, 1896, Serial No. 603,770, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To Clt, whom it nally concern: 
is provided with the usual lift members, as 
Be it known that I, FRANK MCCARTY, re 
shown. 
siding at Martin's Ferry, in the county of Bel 
C indicates the can-top, which is made with 
a double rim whereby to provide an annular 
mont and State of Ohio, have invented a new 
Space c, adapted to fit over the upper edge C. 
and Improved Milk-Can, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
of the can, Such chamber having a packing 
or gasket c', whereby the said cover C can be 
My invention, which relates generally, to 
improvements in milk-cans, more specifically. 
held down air-tight on the can, it having pend 
ent hooks c, which are adapted to be moved 
refers to an improved follower-head which is 
into engagement with catch members Cl* on 
adapted to follow the level of the milk as it 
the can-body, as clearly shown in Fig. 1. 
is drawn off and thereby prevent the milk 
from splashing and churning while handling 
D indicates the follower-head, which con 
sists of a body portion or disk D' of consid 
in transit or during standing of can when the 
erable less diameter than the can-body, as 
milk is drawn off at intervals. 
for a purpose pres 
clearly shown in Fig. 2, 
My invention also seeks to provide a fol 
lower-head which will operate to follow the 
ently described. 
The body or disk D' may be of wood or 
milk down, even should the sides of the can 
be dented by careless handling during ship 
other material, but it is preferably made of 
Cork, so as to give Such body a proper buoy 
plng. 
ancy, the cork body being also preferred, as 
Furthermore, my invention seeks to pro 
its expansive qualities are more nearly equal 
vide a follower-head which will be held air 
tight down on top of the milk and held from 
than that of wood. When such body is made 
moving up in the can by the exterior air 
of cork, its peripheral edge is covered with 
pressure, whereby to keep the body of the 
rubber or other non-absorbent material E, 
milk within the can always in a space of the 
the ends of which are lapped over the upper 
area of such body and practically cushion 
and under edges of the disk D'and held fast 
same from agitation. 
by the metal washer-disks F and G, screwed 
or otherwise fastened to the disk-body D'. 
With other objects in view, which will here 
Hindicates a packing-ring secured on the 
inafter be made clear, the invention consists 
in a milk-can embodying the peculiar ar 
under face of disk D and held secure by the 
rangement and novel combination of parts 
Washer G, and Jindicates a like ring secured 
on the top of the disk D' by washer F. 
such as will be first described in detail and 
then specifically pointed out in the appended 
It will be noticed by reference to Figs. 2 
claims, reference being had to the accom 
and 4 that the lower ring His of a diameter 
just equal or very slightly in excess of the di 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
ameter of the can-body, while upper ring J is 
of a considerably larger diameter than the 
proved milk-can. Fig. 2 is a vertical section 
said can-body, both rings J and H being, how 
Fig. 3 is a horizontal section of 
of the same. 
ever, of a larger diameter than the disk D'. 
the same, taken on the line 33 of Fig. 2, the 
top being removed. Fig. 4 is a perspective 
So far as described it will be manifestly 
clear that by having the disk D of a much 
view of the follower-head. Fig. 5 is a hori 
less diameter than the body of the can and 
Zontal section thereof. Fig. 6 show's my in 
proved can provided with a detachable cool 
providing such disk with flexible extensions 
ing-chamber, and Fig. 7 is a horizontal Sec 
or packing-rings the follower-head can move 
up or down within the can, even when such 
tion taken on the line 77 of Fig. 6. 
Referring to the accompanying dra Wings, 
body has one or more dents (see dotted line, 
Fig. 2) such as cans frequently receive when 
Aindicates the can-body, which is of the same 
diameter throughout its length and has at 
in transit. 
The object in making the packing-rings J 
the lower end the discharge-nozzle B, and 
such body preferably has reinforce portions 
and H of different diameters and the upper 
at upper and lower ends and centrally, and one the larger is for the double purpose of 
O 
5 
25 
45 
95 
OO 
2 
583,000 
55 
75 
cutting off the splashing or passage of milk flanges b' on cooling or jacket cans or holders 
up around the sides of the follower-head and 
in which ice can be packed during warm 
onto the top thereof and also for forming a 
weather to keep the milk at a proper tempera 
positive suction-packing, which is produced 
ture, such compartments having suitable 
by the upper ring J, and thereby hold the 
cover-plates, as shown. 
head in place air-tight and making the head 
While I have shown my improvement as 
always follow the level of the milk and hold 
applied to a cylindrical body, it is obvious 
ing it practically compressed-that is, with 
that the same may be used on a can-body 
out room for splashing or churning, there be 
square or of other shape in horizontal section. 
ing no air cushion or chamber between it, as 
Having thus described my invention, what 
the head is usually inserted on the top of the 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
milk when the can is full. 
ent, is 
To provide a positive means for drawing 
1. A milk - can having a follower - head 
off any air which might be between the head 
formed of a solid body of less diameter than 
the can-body and having a packing-ring on 
D and the milk after the head is inserted, such 
head may have a very small air-opening d, 
its lower end of a diameter practically that 
having an automatically-closing valve d', as 
of the can and a similar ring at the top of a 
shown, which in practice is so arranged that 
greater diameter than the can as specified. 
a slight finger-pressure will open the valve 
2. A follower-head for milk-cans having 
and let out the air under the head, it being 
flexible packing members and a central air 
obvious that such valve may be also opened 
passage having an automatically-closed valve 
to let in air under the head when it is desired 
as set forth. 
to pull the same out of the can. 
3. The combination with the can of a fol 
To provide a means for holding the head D 
lower-head formed of a cork body, a packing 
positively to a true level position as it de 
ring secured to the top thereof of a larger 
scends in the can, the disk D" is cut away on 
diameter than the can-body and a flexible 
its under face centrally and weighted by a 
ring at the bottom of practically the same 
lead filling I, which is also held in place by 
diameter as the can-body as set forth. 
the lower washer G, such head ID also having 
4. A milk - can having a follower - head 
angle-guides IK on the upper side, which en 
formed of a diskportion formed of a floatable 
gage the side of the can, as shown, and serve 
material, a weight held centrally in the lower 
to assist in holding the follower steady. 
face thereof, flexible rings held on the upper 
Lindicates a handle member secured to the 
and lower faces of the disk, and washer mem 
head D. 
bers secured to the upper and lower faces of 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
the disk adapted to hold the rings and the 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
weight in position as described. 
it is thought the advantages of my invention 
5. As a new article a follower for milk-cans 
will readily appear to those skilled in the art 
consisting of a body portion having flexible 
to which it appertains. It will be observed 
rings or annular extensions at the top and 
that while the lower packing-ring serves to 
bottom the upper one being of a larger diam 
effectively keep the milk from rising or splash 
eter than the lower one, said body portion 
ing up between the head and can the upper 
having an air-passage having an automatic 
packing-ring serves to keep out air and make 
ally-closing valve, substantially as shown and 
a tight packing for the head D, which, as 
for the purposes described. 
before stated, will move up or down in the 
body even when the sides are dented. 
By referring now to Figs. 6 and 7 it will 
be noticed the body of the can is provided 
with suitable guides at to receive hanger 
CHARLES E. RIORDON, 
JOHN EDW. LUCKETT. 
FRANK MCCARTY. 
Witnesses: 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583100.txt	(No Model.) 
P. TUCKER. 
CL0THES AND HATRACK, 
No. 583,100. 
Patented May 25, 1897. 
-g s 4-raz- 
- 46.2%ty-f. 
2&/4 
-- - - 
. 
. 
. . 
This NORRS PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo. washington.D. c. 
 
(24%- 
Ziv e a 202.-- 
- 
r --- up 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PHILIP TUCKER, OF GUNDERSON, MONTANA. 
CLOTHES AND HAT RACK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,100, dated May 25, 1897. 
Application filed November 15, 1895, Serial No. 569,061 (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, PHILIPTUCKER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Gunderson, county of Silver Bow, State of 
5 Montana, have invented a new and useful 
Clothes and Hat Rack, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The special object of the invention is to 
enable garments to be suspended by any part 
thereof until the clamp is released without 
danger of being knocked off or otherwise de 
tached by accident. 
The drawing is a side elevation of my rack 
provided with a back attachable to a wall or 
other suitable support. 
In the drawing, A CD represent three in 
tegral arms adapted to be turned on a shaft 
E, supported on projections extending out 
from the back at right angles thereto. The 
arms CD are diametrically opposite to each 
other on the shaft E and preferably at nearly 
a right angle to the clamp-arm A, the latter 
being made of such a length as to allow the 
curved end to come in contact with the rod 
B or the back of the rack. The arms CD 
are thus held fixedly in position for use. 
Each of these arms is constructed with an 
end curvature or simply with an end knob or 
otherwise shaped to suit the fancy of the 
manufacturer. 
B is a rod or roller over which articles may 
be thrown and held by the curved or cam 
shaped end of the arm Aagainst the back or 
the said rod, while a loop on a coat or other 
garment may be hung on the end of the arm 
D or on that of the arm C, the latter being 
specially adapted to hold a hat or cap. 
Having thus described all that is necessary 
to a full understanding of the invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to protect by Let 
ters Patent, is 
In a wall-bracket rack, the combination 
with the back thereof and the rod B, of the 
arms C D, shaft E, and clamp-arm A, the 
two arms C being diametrically opposite to 
each other and nearly at right angles to the 
arm. A which is of sufficient length for con 
tact with said back or rod as shown and de 
scribed. 
PHILIP TUCKER. 
Witnesses: 
E. J. TRERISE, 
GUY W. KINGSBURY. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583200.txt	(No Model. ) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C. MILLS. 
MACHINE FOR BENDING SEIEET METAL, 
No. 583,200. 
Patented May 25, 1897, 
 
 
 
 
va 
(No Model.) 
C. MILLS, 
MACHINE FOR BENDING SEIEET METAL, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 583,200. 
 
Patented May 25, 1897. 
. al 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES MILLS, OF NEWTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE PETTEE 
MACHINE WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR BENDING SHEET METAL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,200, dated May 25, 1897. 
Application filed October 23, 1896, Serial No. 609,799, (No model.) 
To al/, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CHARLESMILLS, a sub 
ject of Victoria, Queen of Great Britain, re 
siding at Newton, in the county of Middlesex 
5 and State of Massachusetts, have invented a 
new and useful Improvement in Machines for 
Bending Sheet Metal, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
Io ings, forming a part of this specification, in 
eXplaining its nature. 
The invention is illustrated as incorporated 
in a machine adapted to bend a flat metal 
strip, such as is used for forming clips for at 
I5 taching card-clothing to flats, from a flatform 
to an angular shape. It comprises a clamp 
for holding the flat strip in a perpendicular 
position by its lower edge, a presser to bear 
against the upper edge of the strip so held, 
2O and a series of folders which are simultane 
ously operated to turn the portion of the strip 
above the clamp from a perpendicular to a 
horizontal position. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a viewin hori 
25 ZOntal section upon the dotted line 11 of Fig. 
2 and in plan of the parts below said line. 
Fig. 2 is a view in vertical central section of 
the machine, also showing parts back of the 
section in elevation. Fig. 3 is a detail view 
3o in section, to which reference will be made. 
Fig. 4 is a view in perspective of a section of 
a flat strip of metal before it is bent. Fig. 5 
is a view of it in perspective in its bent form. 
A is the bed of the machine. It has a flat 
35 surface a, strengthened at its center by the 
longitudinal rib a'. It has opening from its 
upper surface a recess a, the Walla of which 
is undercut, and the opposite Walla of which 
is straight or vertical, the recess above this 
4o vertical wall extending to the long narrow 
jaw or wall a, which forms the back side of 
the recess and which rises from a shallow sur 
face a, a portion of which at the base of the 
wall a forms the rest and gage for the lower 
45 edge of the metal strip B. This recess a is 
slightly wider at the end a than at its other 
end, its outer wall a, formed to overhang, 
being very slightly inclined to the wall a, 
which is straight throughout. There is ar 
So ranged to be moved lengthwise in this recess 
a long narrow clamp or jaw plate C. This 
plate has the inclined edge c, which extends 
under the overhanging edge (t, and it also 
has the straight edge c' and the extension c', 
which laps upon the shallow surface Ct and 55 
the long straight edge c, which is a long jaw 
and bears against the side of the strip B near 
its lower end its entire length and serves to 
press it against the jaw-wall a and hold it, 
as will appear. The clamping-plate C is also 6o 
slightly wider at the end a of the bed than 
at its other end, and its edge c is of the same 
inclination lengthwise of it and in relation to 
its jaw c as that of the wall a to the jaw 
wall a of the recess. Therefore a movement 65 
of the plate toward the end a? of the bed will 
cause the long opening between the jaw c 
and the wall a to be slightly increased, while 
the movement of the plate in the reverse di 
rection will cause it to be decreased. This 7o 
long opening varies according to the width of 
the strip which is to be held by the jaw, but 
it always is such that the jaw will be closed 
by the inward movement of the clamp-plate 
from the end a? against the side of the strip 75 
throughout its length, clamping it throughout 
its length between the jaw c and the Wall Ct. 
It will be understood, of course, that the 
strip to be bent is inserted between the mem 
bers of the clamp when the clamp-plate is 8o 
withdrawn or moved outward or when the 
opening between it and the wall a is widest. 
The clamping-plate is closed and opened by 
the lever c', pivoted at c to the frame. 
struction is especially well adapted for re 
ceiving and firmly holding by a continuous 
narrow edge or section a long strip, the long 
wedged relation between the back edge of the 
clamp-plate serving to permit the clamp by 9o 
the application of relatively little power to be 
closed with great force against the strip, and 
when closed to be held closed without the ad 
dition of any locking instrumentality. This 
wedge construction also supports the clamp 95 
throughout its length and compensates for 
wear and permits the automatic adjustment 
of the clamp-plate to varying thicknesses. 
D is the presser and evener bar suspended 
from the eccentric-shaft (l, which has bear- Ioo 
It will be seen that a clamp of this con- 85 
583,200 
ICd 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ings in the upper end of the brackets d", bolted 
to the bed of the machine at each end. The 
presser is located immediately over the jaws 
c and C and slightly above them. It has a 
straight lower edged, which is adapted to be 
brought into contact with the upper edge of 
the metal strip B after it has been placed be 
tween the jaws of the clamp, but before it has 
been rigidly clamped, and it serves to exert 
a vertical pressure upon the upper edge of the 
strip throughout its length and thereby brings 
its lower edge into contact with the surface 
Ct and hold it in contact there with. It is con 
nected with the eccentrics upon the eccen 
tric-shaft by means of rods di. These rods 
are provided at theirlower ends with threaded 
sections d', which enter threaded holes in the 
bar and provide means for the vertical ad 
justment of the bar. The eccentric-shaft is 
turned to lower and raise the bar by means 
of the lever d, attached to one end of the 
shaft. Upon the bed A back of the clamp 
there is arranged a line of folders E, each of 
which has a relatively narrow folding edge e, 
which bears upon the surface of the bed ad 
jacent to the jaw (t. These folders are adapt 
ed to be simultaneously moved against the 
metal strip after it has been clamped and 
turn the section which is above the clamp 
forward and downward upon the surface of 
the clamping-plate C, thereby changing the 
shape of the strip from its flat form repre 
sented in Figs. 2 and 4 to the angular form 
represented in Figs. 3 and 5. 
Each folder is mounted upon an eccentric 
e' upon the common operating-shaft e, the 
folder having the forked rear endsee', which 
straddle the eccentric. The shaft e is sup 
ported between the eccentrics by the blocks 
e', each of which has an open bearing ethere 
for. The forward end of each folder is held 
down by a weight F, hung upon the outer end 
of the lever f, which is fulcrumed at f', and 
is attached to the folder by a rod f', extend 
ing upward through a hole in the bed and a 
hole in the presser and engaging the presser 
by a laterally-extending lug or hook.f., which 
laps upon the upper surface of the presser. 
The Weight F is represented as adjustable 
upon its lever f. The eccentric-shaft e is 
turned by the lever f', attached to one end of 
the eccentric - shaft. (See Figs. 1 and 2.) 
The position of the parts after the strip-clip 
has been leveled and clamped in its holder, but 
before the operation of the folders or benders 
to bend it, is represented in Fig. 2. The po 
sition of the parts at the end of the action of 
the folders is represented in Fig. 3. 
It will be seen that the clip-strip when 
folded has the narrow section g and the wide 
Section g', (see Fig. 5,) and as prongs are sub 
sequently formed from the narrow section 
and as the narrow section laps upon the outer 
edge of the clothing it is desirable for the pur 
pose of providing a uniform width of strip 
and uniform location of prongs that the nar 
row Section be the part that is gaged and 
made of uniform width throughout, and it is 
therefore the section which is held by the 
clamps with its lower edge in contact with the 
surface a, and it is the wider section of the 
plate above the clamps which is acted upon 
by the folders or benders and turned at a 
right angle to the narrower section. This in 
sures perfect uniformity in width between the 
edge g of the narrow section and the angleg. 
In operation the clip-strip is located be 
tween the jaws of the clamp, the presser and 
evenerbar D moved upon its upper edge, the 
clamp-plate moved inward to clamp its lower 
section rigidly against the stationary jaw ca, 
and the benders or folders moved forward to 
bend or fold the portion of the strip above 
the clamp forward or at a right angle to that 
held by the clamp. The folders or benders 
are then moved backward to their original 
position, the clamp-plate is moved to release 
the strip, the bar D lifted, and the formed 
strip removed. 
By using a series of folders instead of one 
continuous folder, each folder operating in a 
sense independently, as shown, noirregularity 
in the folding of one point of the strip will af 
fect the folding of the other parts of the edge. 
While I have described the invention as in 
corporated in a machine for bending clip 
strips, I would not be understood as limiting 
it to such an organization or to such use. 
Having thus fully described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. In a machine for bending or folding thin 
strips of metal or other material, a clamp for 
engaging and holding the strip with the por 
tion to be bent or folded extending there 
from and a series of pressers or folders adapt 
ed to be moved against said exposed strip 
section and fold or bend it, as and for the 
purposes described. 
2. The combination in a machine of the 
character specified of a strip-clamp to clamp 
and hold the strip by one edge, a strip-gage for 
determining the line of the fold, and a series 
or line of independent horizontal movable 
folders or benders, as and for the purpose 
described. 
3. The combination in a strip-bending ma 
chine of the strip-clamp, a bar B to bear on 
the upper edge of the strip and a line or se 
ries of horizontally - movable independent 
folders or benders, as and for the purposes 
described. 
4. In a machine of the character specified, 
an evening mechanism consisting of a sta 
tionary element and a movable element adapt 
ed to be reciprocated toward and from said 
Stationary element and to locate and even one 
edge of Said strip against said stationary ele 
ment, a clamp adapted to clamp said strip 
when so located and serve as one element of 
the folding mechanism and a series of hori 
Zontally-movable independent folders or 
benders, as and for the purposes described. 
5. In a strip-folding machine, in combina 
75 
go 
95 
do 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
i 
- 
583,200 
3. 
tion, a rest C, a presser-bar D adapted to be 
moved toward and from said rest and to lo 
cate and press one edge of the strip against 
it, a strip-clamp adapted to hold said edge of 
the strip and a series of horizontally-movable 
independent folders or benders, as and for the 
purposes set forth. 
6. The combination in a strip-bending ma 
chine of the strip-clamp for holding a strip 
by one edge only, and a series or line of in 
dependent strip benders or folders adapted 
to be moved horizontally upon the bed of the 
machine toward and upon the strip, and the 
ends of which are yieldingly held upon the 
surface of the bed and bent strip. 
7. The combination of the strip-clamp com 
prising a stationary Wall or jaw (a, a rest a 
and a movable clamping-jaw c with the series 
of benders or folders E, the ends of which rest 
upon the bed of the machine adjacent to the 
jaw a and means for holding the ends in yield 
ing contact with said bed and with the strip 
against and upon which the ends of the fold 
ers or benders are moved and means for si 
multaneously moving said folders or benders 
comprising the eccentrics e' upon the common 
shaft e, which eccentrics make engagement 
with the folders or benders as specified, the 
folders or benders being inclined from their 
O 
25 
eccentrics downwardly, as and for the pur 
poses set forth. 
8. The combination in a machine of the 
character specified of the bed. A having the 
recess a provided with a straight wall or jaw 
C and a slightly-tapering side a' and a gage 
surface a with a long clamp-plate Chaving 
a straight jaw cand a side c slightly inclined 
and adapted to be moved in said recess a and 
to coperate with the said inclined Wall Cl 
thereof and the jaw or wall a thereof, as and 
for the purposes specified. 
9. The combination in a machine of the 
character specified of the bed. A having the 
flat upper surface, the recess a shaped as 
Specified, the clamp-plate C shaped as de 
scribed, and movable in said recess as set 
forth, the bar D, the eccentric-shaft d, the ec 
centrics of which are connected by rods d 
with said bar, means for turning the eccen 
tric-shaft, the independent yielding benders 
orfolders E, the shaft ehaving the eccentrics 
e' to engage the said folders or benders and 
means for turning said shaft. 
CHARTES MILLS. 
35 
45 
In presence of - 
F. F. RAYMOND, 2d, 
J. M. DOLAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583301.txt	(No Model ) 
L. ECKEL. 
CAKE OUTTER AND MOLD, 
No. 583,301. 
Patented May 25, 1897. 
 
a sta 
 
77G-2. 
AIG-4 
H 
h 
 
 
d? 
FIG. 3. 
-d 
WITNESSES: 
3.35 III 
 
NVENTOR 
-6a, &cked 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS ECKEL, OF WEST HOBOKEN, NEW JERSEY. 
CAKE CUTTER AND MOLD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 583,301, dated May 25, 1897. 
Application filed September 30, 1896, Serial No. 607,378, (No model.) 
To al., whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, LOUISECKEL, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at West Hobo 
ken, in the county of Hudson and State of 
New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Cake Cutters and 
Molds; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to molds and cutters 
for fashioning biscuits, cakes, and articles of 
corresponding nature from dough; and its 
objects are, first, to divide from the suitably 
rolled material portions substantially alike 
in exterior formation and equal in Weight; 
second, to render unnecessary actual contact 
between the hands of the Operator and the 
dough; third, to provide devices for effect 
ively loosening the dough from the mold and 
cutter; fourth, to furnish reliable means for 
automatically discharging the mold, and, 
fifth, to accomplish these objects by construc 
tions at once simple, durable, cheap, easily 
cleansed, and readily manufactured. 
Each constituent element of my invention 
is described in detail and its office, together 
with the mode of operation of the whole, fully 
explained hereinafter. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
wherein like letters are employed to desig 
nate like parts throughout the several views, 
Figure 1 represents a vertical sectional view 
of cutter, piston, mold, and casing, the stem, 
spring, and vibrator appearing in full side 
elevations. Fig. 2 represents a bottom plan 
of cutter and mold. Eig. 3 represents an ex 
terior view of cutter and casing. Fig. 4 rep 
resents a view in the direction of the arrow 
in Fig. 1, showing the vibrator-springs and 
the bent finger cut upon line XX, leaving a 
portion between the Springs. 
Considering Figs. 1 and 3, letter. A desig 
nates the hollow casing, forming also the han 
dle of the device. To fit the hand, the top of 
the casing is made convex, although that Con 
tour is not essential. It will be observed that 
the orifices a through the casing are located 
at the sides and not through the top, where 
they might be obstructed by the palms of the 
hands. 
B marks the cutter, which may be of any 
selected configuration. (See Fig. 2.) 
C designates the molding-piston, consisting 
of a cast or stamped design in relief or in 
tagliocentrally fixed to the stem D. By means 
of the pin d, driven into the stem, the piston, 
as well as the stem, is yieldingly supported 
by the coiled spring E. Spring E encircles 
the stem and extends from the upper surface 
of the piston to the top of the hollow casing, 
where it is hooked through the interior staple. 
e or otherwise conveniently secured. 
In order that the formed dough may not 
cling too tightly to mold and cutter, I intro 
duce a vibrator consisting of the bent finger 
F, soldered upon the upper surface of the pis 
ton, (see Fig. 1) and the flat elbow-springs 
GH, soldered together upon the interior of 
the casing and having portions arranged per 
pendicular to the piston and parallel to each 
other. In one of the elbow-springs Habend 
his formed at a suitable point in the perpen 
dicular portion of that spring. Normally, 
Fig. 4, the finger F rests below the bend h, 
and it of course moves with the piston. Spring 
G holds finger F yieldingly against spring H. 
While spring G is preferred it is not an 
element absolutely required, as a rigid wire 
could clearly be substituted to limit the lat 
eral movement of the finger. Suitably chosen, 
spring H would prove sufficiently yielding. 
Should it be desired in order to more effect 
ively expel the formed dough that the piston 
be moved in each operation to a lower point 
relatively to cutter B than that shown in Fig. 
1, the extended point of finger F may plainly 
move downwardly between the springs. (See 
Fig. 4.) The position represented is ordi 
narily far enough down for all practical pur 
pOSes. 
The mode of operation of my invention 
may be described as follows: Pressed into a 
layer of dough the cutter divides the amount 
desired into the selected peripheral outline 
and prevents it from spreading. Piston C is 
forced upwardly by the entering material, 
which is at the same time molded according 
to the pattern adopted. AS pistOn C rises a 
slight tremor or vibration is given it by fin 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
2 
588,301 
O 
ger F in passing bend h of elbow-spring EI. 
When the whole is lifted, the piston is re 
turned by the reaction of spring E and an 
other vibration or tremor results, this time 
both piston and casing, with the attached cut 
ter, partaking of the jarring movement. Thus 
loosened the formed portion of dough is read 
ily discharged without any noticeable modi 
fication of its molded form. The operation 
is then repeated. 
I am aware that cake cutters and molds 
have been publicly used which employ cut 
ters and piston-expellers, and I do not claim 
those features, broadly. 
What I do claim, and desire to protect by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a cake cutter and mold, the combina 
tion of hollow casing A provided with ori 
fices, a cutter fixed to the casing, a piston 
possessing a suitable molding-face, stem D 
attached to said piston and possessing pin d, 
spring E connected with said casing inte 
riorly whereby said piston may be yieldingly 
held vertically movable within said cutter, 
and spring-operated devices constructed and 
arranged to vibrate said piston and stem dur 
ing the reciprocative movement of those parts, 
substantially as described. 
2. In a cake cutter and mold, the combina 
tion of hollow casing A provided with ori 
fices, a cutter fixed to the casing, a piston 
possessing a suitable molding-face, stem. D 
attached to said piston and possessing pin d, 
spring E connected with said casing inte 
riorly whereby said piston may be yieldingly 
held vertically movable within said cutter, 
and finger F fixed to the piston, springs G 
and II, joined to the casing interiorly, spring 
II having bend h, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
35 
LOUIS ECIKEL, 
Witnesses: 
JAMES II. SKINNER, 
ALFRED TSCHINKEL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583401.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 583,401. 
I, MUTHER 
SEAM FOR SEWED ARTICLES, 
s 
Patented May 25, 1897. 
 
/777-re Z2 
the ORRIS PETERs co, PhotourHe washineto, c.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TORENZ MUTHER, OF OAK PARK, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE UNION 
SPECIAL SEWING MACHINE COMPANY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
SEAM FOR SEWED ARTICLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 583,401, dated May 25, 1897. 
Application filed January 21, 1892, Serial No. 418,757, (No model.) 
o 
25 
35 
To Cult, whom it may concert: 
Beit known that I, LORENZMUTHER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Oak 
Park, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Seams, of which the follow 
ing is a description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, and to the let 
ters of reference marked thereon. 
My invention relates to an improved seam 
for use in uniting the edges of knit fabrics 
or for ornamenting the same, the two pieces 
of fabric to be united being superposed edge 
upon edge, stitches being passed through in 
the particular manner mentioned, after which 
the edges of the fabric are trimmed, the 
pieces spread out So as to lie in the same 
plane, and then rubbed down. By the use 
of my particular seam and the disposition of 
the threads therein each wale of the goods is 
caught by the thread, thus making a stronger 
Sea. 
The invention consists in the combination, 
with the fabric, of the threads arranged upon 
opposite sides of the central line of the seam, 
a continuous roW of loops in each thread 
passing down through the material, the loops 
in one row being set oblique to the corre 
sponding loops in the other row, and an un 
der thread having a series of loops, each pass 
ing diagonally across the line of the seam, the 
loops of said under thread lying within two 
loops and inclosing two succeeding loops. 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan view of my seam. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation in perspective of 
the same. Fig. 3 is a plan view representing 
the fabrics as spread out to lie in the same 
plane. 
In the drawings, A represents the pieces of 
fabric to be united, shown with their edges 
superposed. The threads C, b are arranged 
within the edge of the fabric parallel to each 
other and on opposite sides of the central 
line of the seam. The thread C, is placed ad 
jacent to the edge and is provided with a con 
tinuous row of loops c, passed down through 
the fabric and secured on the under side. 
The thread b is arranged at a greater dis 
tance from the edge than the thread a and is 
provided with a corresponding row of loops 
d, also passed down through the material and 
secured on the under side. The respective 
loops cd are not arranged directly opposite, 
but diagonally to each other across the line 
of the seam, so that the loops c come oppo 
site the central part of that portion of the 
thread b between any two loops d, the longi 
tudinal distance between each loop c and the 
next loop d of the other row being not sub 
stantially greater than the gage of the fabric, 
and by this arrangement a stitch is practically 
formed in every Wale of the goods, the loops in 
the threads C. passing through every alternate 
Wale on One side of central line of the seam 
and the loops in the threads b on the oppo 
site side of the central line of the seam pass 
ing through the Wales skipped by the loops 
in the threads C. 
The loops C dare secured on the under side 
of the fabric by a third thread e, and it will 
be seen, by starting at the left of Fig. 2, that 
the thread e passes first through a pair of 
loops d c, then around a second pair of loops 
c "d, then back through the first pair, then 
forward through the second pair and around 
a third pair, then back through the second 
pair and forward through the third pair, 
around a fourth pair, back through the third 
pair, and so on. The thread e therefore 
passes twice through each pair of loops c d 
and has a course at an angle to the line of 
the seam in order to pass through the ob 
liquely-set loops C d. In practice after the 
edges have been superposed and the seam 
above described applied thereto I preferably 
trim the edges of the fabric up close to the 
thread C, then unfold the pieces of fabric, 
spread them out so that they lie in the same 
plane, and finally rub down the seam and 
flatten it Out. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In combination with the fabric A, the 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
45 
 
2 
583,401. 
threads a barranged upon opposite sides of e lying within two loops cd and inclosing two 
the central line of the Seam, a continuous succeeding loops; substantially as described. Io 
row of loops in each thread passing down 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
through the material, the loops in one row in presence of two witnesses. 
being set oblique to the corresponding loops 
in the other row, and a thread as e, having a 
series of loops each passing diagonally across 
the line of the seam, the loops of said thread 
W. S. NORTH, 
CHESTER, MCNEIL, 
Witnesses: 
LORENZ MUTHER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583501.txt	J,M00?BERY, 
0?TLETGATEP0RVENTILAT0RS, 
PatentedJune l,1897, 
{No Model) 
No,583,501, 
 
UNTTED STATEs 
PATENT OFFrCE? 
JOSEPI McCREERY, 
OF TOLEDO,OITO. 
OUTLET-GATE FORVENT?LATORS? 
SPECTFICAT?ONforming part of Detters Patent No.583,501,dated June1,1897, 
Applicationfled0ctober28,1896,8erialNo,610307,(Nomodel) 
- 
- 
2b C/zphony?7na/concern? 
Beit known that I,JOSEPH MCCREERY,a 
CitizenoftheUnitedStates,residingatToledo, 
inthecountyof LucasandStateof Ohio,have 
invented Certain new and useful Improve 
Imentsin Outlet-GatesforVentilators;and I 
do herebydeclare thefolowingtobe aful, 
clear,andexactdescription oftheinvention, 
suchas willenableothersskilledintheartto 
whichitappertainstomakeandusethesame. 
Thisinvention relatesto anattachmentto 
beappliedto a System of ventilation, 
The object of theinventionisto produce 
anoutletoragate whichissoadjustablethat 
airin variableamountsmayissueatdiferent 
angles? 
Theinvention Consistsinan outletgateor 
nozzle whichisaxiallyrevoluble andis pro 
vided with a hood or cover made of Several 
pieces orsegments? 
Inthe annexed drawings,Figure lrepre 
Sentsaside view of the device,the hoodbe 
ing partialy open,Fig,2is averticalsec 
tiontakenthrough Fig,1,Fig,3isafront 
Orface View of the device Closed? 
Inthe accompanying drawings the letter 
Arepresentsacylindricalsleeve forattach 
ingthe devicetotheendofthe air-pipe,and 
Suchsleeve may have a flange Qtogiveita 
finish,Withinthe fangedthe sleeve Ais 
providedwithalip a/,0verthe exteriorof 
thislip a/andwithinaswellooftheflange 
dis loOSely placed the inneredge b of the 
outlet-gate B,The outeredge ofthe lipa/is 
Swelled Outward SO thatthe innerend ofthe 
gate Bis Securely held bythe lip o/from 
Separation from the sleeve A,The outlet 
gate Bis loosey held bythe lip a/,S0that 
the outlet-gate Bis revoluble aboutits axis 
onthe lip a/, 
The outlet-gate Bconsistsoftwo portions, 
therigidmainportionb'andthehoodC.,The 
hoodC consists ofSeveralSegmentsc ccof 
Substantially the Same Shape and size,but 
overlapping Oneanother,sothatthey maybe 
foldedtogether,Thesesegmentsarehinged 
attheirendstothe portion b of the outlet 
gateatthe opposite ends0f8diameter,At 
oneend the Segmentscandc'are provided 
withlugsdd,whichtakingagainsttheedges 
ofthe undersegmentslimittheclosingmove 
ment0fthesegmentscandc/?Thesegment 
cisprovidedwitharim whichcatchesagainst 
arim ofthe portionb'whenthesegmentsare 
moved SoastoClOSe the outlet,The Several 
Segments cc/care fitted closelyupon one 
anotherand are both Openedand closed by 
frictionalcontactwithoneanother,Theseg 
nent Cis provided with a handle D. 
As wil be noticed the outlet-gate when 
closedisglobularinform,the hoodoomplet 
ingtheglobularformation,The portion b', 
whichisa part ofthisglobularformation,is 
maderoundedforaspecial purpose?Itwill 
be nOticedthatthearea0f the Cross-section 
ofthe mouth ofthe portion b'isgreaterthan 
thearea ofthe CrOSS-Section Of thenarrowest 
Dortion or the thrOat Of the sleeve A,The 
dottedlinein Fig.1Showsthe p0sition ofthe 
outer-edge of the Segment c of the hoodC 
whensuchhoodishalf-open,Whenthehood 
isinthis position,the Openinginthe outlet 
gateis quadrant-shaped?When the airis 
foreed through the Outlet,the latter being 
opened,asindicated,the airisnotforeedin 
8Straightline,butatanangle,Nowbyen 
largingtheoutlet-gatebeyondthesize ofthe 
thrOat Ofthe Sleeve,theair,thoughforcedat 
an angle,will passout withgreatervolume, 
asthough ejectedinastraight line? 
With a devicesuch as desCribedairin va 
riable quantities may be admitted into an 
apartment at Variable angles,Orit may be 
Completelyshut ofatanygiven outlet-gate. 
Having described my invention,what I 
Claimis?  - 
1,An outletgateornozzle,whichisaxialy 
revolubleandisprovidedwithahoodorcover 
made OfSeveralmovable piecesor Segments, 
as Set forth? 
2,An outletgateornozzle,whichis axialy 
revolubleandisprovidedwithahoodorcover 
Imade ofSeveral movable piecesorsegments, 
alof the segments butone being provided 
withlimiting-lugs,asSetforth? 
3?Anoutletgate Ornozzle,whichisaxially 
revolubleandisprovidedwithahoodorcover 
made ofseveralmovable piecesorsegments 
overlapping One another,assetforth 
4.The combination of the sleeve,A,pro 
videdwithalip,q/,with the ontlet-gate,B, 
Consisting ofarigid main portion,b,loosely 
- 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
- 
583,501 
? 
held onthelip,o/,and the hood,C,consist- rowest portion orthethroatofthesleeve,A, 
ing of Several,pieces orsegments pivotedto assetforth. 
the portion,b',assetforth? 
Intestimony whereof Tafix mysignature 
5,The combination of thesleeve,A?with |in presence oftwowitnesses, 
- 
JOSEP? A[CCREERY? 
- 
?? 
5the hood,B,Consisting ofamain portion,b', 
anda hood,C,thearea of the Cross-Section 
ofthe mouth ofthe portion,b'?beinggreater 
thanthe area ofthe Cross-Section ofthe nar- 
Vitnesses: 
SAM.A.DRURY, 
W???,SINGL?TON? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583601.txt	(No Model.) 
s 
J. F. MEISSNER, 
TYPE WRITER, DESK, 
No. 583,601. 
Patented June 1, 1897. 
 
2 
2 
2 2 y 
7SS 
Ea 
S  NS 
277 
se 
2. 
N s N s s 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JULIUS F. MEISSNER, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
TYPE - WRITER DESK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 583,601, dated June 1, 1897. 
Application filed October 5, 1896, 
To all, Luhon it may concern, 
Be it known that I, JULIUS F. MEISSNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at San 
Francisco, in the county of San Francisco and 
State of California, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Type-Writer 
Desks; and I do hereby declare that the foll 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description 
thereof. 
The present invention relates to a certain 
new and useful type-writing desk, and more 
especially to the mechanism for throwing the 
type-Writing machine in or out of sight; and 
it consists in the arrangement of parts and 
details of construction, as will be hereinafter 
fully set forth in the drawings and described 
and pointed out in the specification. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
simple and inexpensive attachment mechan 
ism for raising and lowering the type-writing 
machine in order to throw the same in and 
out of sight, which mechanism shall be so con 
structed and arranged that very little power 
shall be required to raise or lower the machine 
in order that the operator will not have to 
handle the full weight of the machine. 
In order fully to comprehend the invention, 
reference must be had to the accompanying 
sheet of drawings, wherein 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a type 
Writer desk, showing the mechanism for rais 
ing and lowering the machine in an open po 
sition or the position assumed when the ma 
chine is exposed to view. Fig. 2 is a vertical 
cross-sectional end view of the desk, taken 
on the medial transverse line of Fig. 1; and 
Fig. 3 is a similar view of the position of the 
parts when closed to hide from view or cover 
the machine. 
In the drawings the letter A is used to in 
dicate the desk, which is provided or made 
with the central open portion A". Within 
the central open portion, between the sides 
A, is fitted and works the sliding platform 
B, upon which platform is secured in any 
suitable manner the type-writing machine. 
The ears O, depending from the underface of 
the platform, near its inner end, are secured 
by pins C to the lower end of the main levers 
B'. There are two of these levers, although 
only one is shown, one being fulcrumed by 
pins a to each side A* of the central open 
IO 
25 
3. 
35 
4O 
45 
55 
serial No. 607,836, (No model.) 
portion of the desk A. The upper end of 
each main lever is attached to the sides of the 
cover B*, near its inner end, by pins b. 
The platform B, near its inner end, has se 
cured thereto the upwardly-extending back 
plate B9, against which the rear portion of the 
type-writing machine rests, said back plate 
preventing the machine from slipping when 
thrown out of sight or covered. The forward 
end of the platform, when moved in Ward, 
rests upon the rolls b, secured to the upper 
inner edge of the lock-rail C, which rail is se- . 
cured to the sides A. The platform B rides 
upon the rolls b as moved in or out within 
the central opening of the desk. 
To each side A* is secured or fastened a 
guide rail or plate C", against the under edge 
of which the upper face of the platform B 
rests when the platform is moved outward to 
expose the type-Writing machine, Figs. 1 and 
and 2, the platform then resting between the 
guide-rails and the rolls b. 
The cover B is provided with a front C, 
which when the coveris thrown upward rests 
upon the lock-rail C. This front has attached 
thereto a lock which engages with that of the 
lock-rail. To the front is also secured the 
handle C, by means of which the cover is 
moved back and forth. In order to steady 
the cover as thrown back and forth, connec 
tion is made through the medium of the arm 
D between the said cover and the guide-rail 
C', Eigs. 2 and 3. For the purpose of closing 
the opening which would exist between the 
back plate B8 and the front C of the cover 
when the platform B is moved outward Ise 
cure to the back plate B the right-angularly 
extending piece or flange D'. 
To the forward edge of the central cut-away 
portion of the desk-top is attached the strip 
D. This strip covers the joint between the 
inner end of the cover and the edge of the 
desk and at the same time answers as a stop 
to prevent the pens or pencils rolling of the 
desk. 
When the parts stand in the position illus 
trated in Fig. 3, being closed, the type-Writing 
machine, resting upon the platform B, will 
be covered or hidden from view. To throw 
the machine into view for use, the operator 
takes hold of the handle C and by slightly 
lifting thereon raises the cover B. As the 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
583,601 
EO 
cover is raised its inner end will move down 
Ward or disappear within the central opening 
of the desk, and the main levers turning upon 
their fulcrumed point the platform, with the 
type-Writing machine attached thereto, will 
gradually move outward and upward until it 
assumes the position illustrated by Figs. 1 
and 2, which is an open position. The type 
writing machine will then be exposed and in 
position for use. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure protection 
in by Letters Patent, is 
The improved type-writer cabinet herein 
described and shown consisting of a desk hav 
ing a central opening, guide-rails secured on 
the side Walls of said opening at the top of 
the same, a lock-rail in front of said opening, 
rollers mounted on the lock-rail, a platform 
sliding between said rollers and the lower 
edges of the guide-rails, said platform being 
provided with a back plate near its rear end 
and a rearward extension or shelf extending 
from said back plate, a cover resting on the 
upper edges of the guide-rails, a front plate 
secured to said cover and adapted to engage 
the lock-rail, levers fulcrumed on the side 
walls of the central opening in the desk and 
having their opposite ends pivoted respec 
tively to the platform and the cover and links 
having their opposite ends pivoted respec 
tively to the cover and the guide-rails. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 12th day of 
September, 1896. 
25 
JULIUS F. MEISSNER.. 
Witnesses: 
N. A. ACKER, 
LEE D. CRAIG. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583701.txt	(No Model.) 
T. FARWICK 
POSTAGE STAMP AND ENVELOPMOISTENER, 
No. 583,701, 
Patented June 1, 1897. 
 
 
YSSY 
S 
S R 
N 
ATIORWEYS. 
fe NORRIS PETERS co, HoTTH. WASH:NaON, , ; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
T H EOD ORE FAR WICIK OF ELIZABET H, N E W J E R SEY. 
POSTAGE STAM P AND ENVELOP MOST ENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 583,701, dated June 1, 1897. 
Application filed March 18, 1897. 
Serial No. 628,161, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
O 
- 
To all twhon, it nually concern: 
Be it known that I, THEODORE FARWICK, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Elizabeth, county of Union, and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Postage-Stamp and En 
velop Moisteners, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to an envelop and 
postage-Stamp moistener, and has for its ob 
ject the production of a simple and effective 
device for moistening postage-stamps and en 
Velops. 
My invention consists of an envelop and 
stamp moistener comprising a reservoir, a 
holder integral with said reservoir and com 
municating there with by suitable perfora 
tions, and an absorbent filling secured in 
said holder. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
an elevation of the device closed. Fig. 2 is 
a similar view of the device open. Fig. 3 is 
an elevation of the device with the cover 
swung around and secured on top. Fig. 4 is 
a longitudinal central section. Fig. 5 is a 
central transverse section with the cover 
shut. Fig. 6 is a central transverse section 
with the cover open and secured on top of 
the device. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts. 
Referring to the drawings, A is a cylin 
drical reservoir closed at one end and thread 
ed at the opposite end for the reception of a 
threaded plug or stopper a. Projecting from 
one side of the reservoir A is an oblong holder 
B, which extends nearly the whole length of 
the reservoir. The holder B and the case A 
communicate by means of one or more small 
perforations or their equivalent. The oblong 
holder B is adapted to receive a filling C, 
which may be composed of any absorbent 
material-such as Wool, sponge, or the like 
and which tightly fills the interior of the ob 
long holder B and projects slightly beyond 
the edges of said holder. 
The closed end of the reservoir A is grooved 
circumferentially to receive a wire loop a', 
which is loosely fitted therein, so as to turn 
freely about said reservoir. The cover A is 
hinged to said wire loop and is composed of 
a hollow metal cap substantially the size and 
shape of the holder Band adapted to be closed 
down over the same and inclose the filling C. 
At suitable points on said cover A'are secured 
spring - arms a, one on each side thereof, 
whereby the said cover may be securely held 
in position when closed upon the holder B or 
when swung around upon the top of the res 
ervoir, as shown in Fig. 3. After the ab 
sorbent material is firmly packed in the 
holder B the stopper a is removed and the 
reservoir filled with water and the stopper 
again applied. The Water passes through 
the perforations communicating with the 
holder and is absorbed by the material of the 
filling C. When it is desired to moisten an 
envelop or stamp, the cover A' is pulled off 
the holder and turned around and secured by 
means of its spring-arms upon the top of the 
reservoir A. The cover in this position forms 
a convenient handle by which to grasp the 
device. The absorbent filling which pro 
jects, as above stated, slightly beyond the 
edges of the holder is passed over the surface 
of the envelop or stamp and leaves sufficient 
moisture thereon to permit of their intended 
use. The cover is then released from the 
top of the reservoir and swung around and 
closed down on the holder C, thus prevent 
ing the evaporation of the water from the 
reservoir and the drying of the absorbent 
filling. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a device for moistening stamps or en 
velops, the combination of a reservoir closed 
at one end and adapted to receive a stopper 
at the opposite end, a holder integral with 
said reservoir and communicating there with 
by suitable perforations, an absorbent filling 
secured in said holder, and a suitable cover 
hinged to a swiveled connection on said res 
ervoir, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a device for moistening stamps and en 
velops, the combination of a reservoir closed 
at one end and adapted to receive a stopper 
. 
- 
95 
25 
35 
45 
2 
583,701 
at the opposite end, a holder integral with 
said reservoir and communicating there with my invention I have signed my name in pres- Ic) 
by suitable perforations, an absorbent filling ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
secured in said holder, and a hinged cover 
5 swiveled to said reservoir and provided with 
spring-arms, whereby said cover is adapted 
to be secured over the holder or over the res- 
ervoir, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
-v 
THEODORE FARWICK. 
Witnesses: 
PAUL GOEPEL, 
GEO. W. JAEKEL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583802.txt	(No Model,) 
H. HAR TWIG 
DEWICE F0R 00NWERTING M0TI0N, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
No. 583,802, 
Patented June 1, 1897. 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 583,802, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
H. HAR TWIG. 
DEVICE FOR CONVERTING MOTION, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 1, 1897, 
I 
(6. 2 A / II 
Z72zvez2607 
???????? 
- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
IIENRY IIARTWIG, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
WILLIAM OLDFIELD, OF SAME PLACE. 
DEVICE FOR CONVERTING Motion. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 583,802, dated June 1, 1897. 
Application filed July 13, 1896. Serial No. 598,946, (No model.) 
IO 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HENRY HARTWIG, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
county of Cook, and State of Illinois, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Devices for Converting Motion, which are 
fully set forth in the following specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part thereof. 
This invention is an improved device for 
converting reciprocating into rotary motion; 
but it is specifically designed as an improved 
drill motor or device for rotating a drill by 
means of a reciprocating traveler. Further, 
specifically, it includes improvements in 
mechanism for operating such a device by 
compressed air. 
Figure 1 is an axial section of my improved 
drill-motor. Fig. 2 is an enlarged section at 
the line 22 on Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail axial 
section of the traveler removed from the 
shaft at the plane of the line 33 on Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a detail section of the shaft, on an 
enlarged scale, at such point as that indicated 
by the line 4 4 on Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is an axial, 
section showing a portion of the shaft with 
its housing and the traveler in a modified 
form adapted to rotate the shaft in either di 
rection at will by proper adjustment. Fig. 
6 is a section at the line 6 6 on Fig. 5. Fig. 
7 is a side elevation of the traveler removed 
from the case. 
Myinvention consists of a shaft having spi 
rals of opposite pitch and a traveler having 
dogs adapted to engage such oppositely 
pitched spirals so arranged that the dogs 
which engage the spirals of one pitch are in 
engagement only when the traveler is mov 
ing in one direction and the dogs which engage 
the spirals of opposite pitch are in engage 
ment only when the traveler is moving in the 
opposite direction. 
My invention also includes, in connection 
with the feature above stated, a piston con 
nected with the traveler and actuated in the 
cylinder by compressed air or other fluid un 
der tension to reciprocate the traveler along 
the shaft. 
A is the shaft, provided with spirals (in the 
form of depressions) a' a' and A' A', such 
spirals extending over so much of the length 
of the shaft as constitutes the course of the 
traveler in its reciprocating motion, hereinaf 
ter described, the spirals of opposite pitch 
crossing each other, as shown in the drawings. 
B is the traveler, which is a collar or sleeve 
having a central aperture adapting it to pass 
onto the shaft A and having suitable seats or 
chambers for the dogs B'B' and b'b'. The 
chambers which are cut in the traveler B to 
receive the dogs B'b' are adapted to permit 
the dogs to stand radially in the traveler, and 
they are each pivoted at their outer extrem 
ity to the traveler, their inner extremities 
being provided with oblique feathers B10 B10 
and bib', the direction of obliquity of the 
feathers corresponding to the pitch of the 
spirals A'anda', respectively, the dogs B hav 
ing their feathers B adapted to engage the 
spirals A and the dogs b' having their feath 
ers badapted to engage the spirals a'. 
In the traveler B there is provided space 
for each of the dogs to swing about its pivot 
away from radial position far enough to cause 
it to carry its feather out of engagement with 
the spiral of the shaft. The dogs are ar 
ranged in pairs-that is, opposite dogs con 
stituting a pair and engaging spirals of the 
same pitch-all the dogs swinging in the same 
direction about their pivots to clear their re 
spective spirals. Springs C'C' and c' c' are 
provided, operating upon the dogs B'B' and 
b'b', respectively, with a tendency to hold 
said dogs in radial position, such springs be 
ing coiled about the pivots of the dogs, re 
Spectively, and stopped at one end against 
the oblique wall of the chamber or cavity pro 
vided in the follower for the dog and in the 
other end stopped against a suitable abut 
ment X on the dog. Now if the follower be 
passed onto the shaft and the four dogs 
brought into engagement with the four spirals 
of the shaft, respectively, a movement of the 
follower longitudinally on the shaft will tend 
to Swing the dogs by reason of the engage 
ment of the oblique feathers on the dogs with 
the respective spirals of the shaft, and such 
tendency will be toward opposite movement 
of the two pairs of dogs. For one pair the 
tendency Will be to move in the only direc 
tion in which movement is possible-that is, 
away from the side of their chambers against 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
92 
95 
I OO 
2 
583,802 
5 
o 
5 
35 
45 
55 
which they are stopped toward the other side. within the shaft F as the piston and traveler 
reciprocate. In order that the journal end 
For the other pair the tendency will be to 
A30 of the shaft A may not operate as a pis 
move in the opposite direction, and such 
ton in the shaft F and be forced to compress 
movement being impossible the result will be 
the air ahead of it as it reciprocates, One Ol' 
rotary movement of the shaft as the feather 
more longitudinal grooves Ci' may be made 
of the dogs, which cannot swing about their 
on the journal A* to constitute air-vents. It 
pivots, travels along the shaft in engagement 
is essential, of course, that the traveler be 
with the spiral of the latter. If the motion 
prevented from rotating if it is to be made the 
of the traveler were in the opposite direction, 
means of forcing the shaft A to rotate, and 
the dogs which in the first described action 
this I accomplish by providing longitudinal 
become disengaged from the spirals of the 
guideways for the follower on the inner wall 
shaft would become the actuating pair of 
of the pipe II, which constitutes the rigid con 
dogs, and the other pair would become disen 
nection from the head D to the cylinder E. 
gaged; but the actuating-dogs in the first in 
These guideways are seen at II", and in order 
stance are engaged with spirals of opposite 
that the guidance of the traveler may be ob 
pitch from the spirals which are engaged in 
tained thereon with the least friction I pro 
the second instance. If the movement were 
vide studs BB, projecting radially from the 
in the same direction, therefore, the opposite 
periphery of the follower B and provided with 
pitch would result in opposite rotation of the 
antifriction-rolls b b, which bear against the 
shaft, but since the direction of movement of 
opposite sides of the ribs H II", respectively. 
the traveler and the pitch of the operating 
I deem it desirable to make the follower B 
spiral are both reversed at the same time the 
serve as a means of reversing the communi 
direction of the resultant rotation of the shaft 
cation of the compressed air or other medium 
remains the same. I thus obtain, by means 
of power with the cylinder-that is, shift 
of the traveler reciprocating back and forth 
ing it from side to side of the piston-and for 
Over the shaft, a rotation of the shaft contin 
this purpose I locate the controlling-Valve K 
tiously in the same direction. This device 
in the pipe H beyond the travel of the fol 
might be employed without any substantial 
lower therein toward the cylinder E, and 
additions for the purpose of driving a drill 
from the operating-lever K of the valve I ex 
by hand, the traveler being reciprocated back 
tend the reversing-rod L along within the pipe 
and forth on the shaft, the latter carrying a 
Houtside the path of the traveler. Most con 
drill in one end and being held to its work by 
veniently this rod L is provided with Sup 
pressure against the other end in a manner 
ports and guidance by lodging it in a chan 
familiar to those accustomed to such devices; 
nel FI, formed in one of the ribs H'. From 
but a fulrther part of my invention consists 
the rod L two spurs L'L'project into the path 
in adapting this tool to be operated by com 
of the traveler B at such positions that the 
pressed air or similar medium of power. For 
traveler engages them, respectively, just be 
this purpose I journal the shaft A at a point 
fore it reaches the limit of its opposite move 
beyond its spirals toward one end in a head 
ments, respectively, whereby it is adapted to 
or cap D, said head being made rigid with a 
shift the rod at the finish of each movement 
cylinder E, located beyond the other end of 
sufficiently to cause the rod to shift the lever 
the shaft A, and from the traveler B, I extend 
of the controlling-valve. 
a hollow shaft F through the head E' of said 
The structure of the valve need not be 
cylinder E, and within the cylinder secured 
herein explained, constituting no part of my 
to said extension I provide the piston G. 
It will be sufficient to point out 
The cavity of the shaft F is adapted to per 
invention. 
that the inlet for compressed air is shown at 
mit the shaft. A to telescope within it, and in 
IK and that the valve has nipples K and K, 
order that said shaft. A may be centered with 
the former communicating with the cylinder 
respect to the follower independently of such 
at one side of the piston directly through the 
bearing as it may obtain in the follower itself 
port e' in the head E' and the other commu 
immediately adjacent to the dogs I extend 
nicating through the passage ein said head 
the shaft A at this end beyond its spirals, as 
and by means of the exterior pipe with the 
seen at A', this extended portion being re 
opposite end of the cylinder through the port 
duced in diameter, and at the extremity of 
e mear the head E. 
this extended portion I make it of suitable 
If it should be desired to make the device 
diameter at the part A* to bear properly in 
adapted to rotate the shaft and tool in either 
the shaft F, thus obtaining for the shaft a 
direction at will it may be accomplished in 
center bearing in which it may rotate with 
the manner shown in Figs. 5 and 6, wherein 
out cramping and obtaining at the same time 
the traveler is provided with two complete 
for the traveler a steadying-bearing for its 
sets of dogs which are mounted upon oppo 
reciprocating movement. It will nowbe un 
site sides of the diaphragm B in the traveler. 
?lerstood that, proper provision being made 
for introducing compressed air or other proper 
The second set is denoted by the letters B. l. 
The second set differs from the first set merely 
medium alternately at opposite sides of the 
in that the dogs swing in the opposite direc 
iston G, said piston, by means of the tubu 
tion about their pivots to clear the spirals of 
lar shaft F, will reciprocate the traveler B 
the shafts. The individuals of the second set 
and rotate the shaft A, which will telescope 
75 
95 
I OO 
I I. ? 
II5 
I 25 
65 p 
" 
?? 
583,802 
8 
I. ? 
are among themselves related precisely as the 
individuals of the first set-that is to say, the 
dogs B" and b are adapted to engage the spi 
rals of opposite pitch. In order that the op 
erator may control the dogs and cause either 
set at will to be operative and the other set, 
inoperative they are each provided with a tail 
or finger b, which protrudes through a slot 
b' in the cylindrical shell of the follower, this 
finger or tail being adapted to extend beyond 
the outer surface of the cylindrical body of 
the traveler when the dog is radial-that is, 
in position to engage the shaft-but when the 
dog is thrown out of engagement the tail is 
withdrawn, so that it is only flush at its outer 
end with the Outer surface of the traveler. 
On the traveler I mount a band or belt B, en 
compassing the entire series of slots band 
projecting fingers b, eight in number. This 
band or belt B has slots B, into which the 
tails b of the dogs project when the dogs are 
in the position to cause such tails to protrude 
beyond the outer surface of the traveler. It 
will be seen that the rotation of the band 
about the traveler in one direction will cause 
it to force the tongues of one set of dogs back 
and swing the dogs to oblique position out of 
engagement with the shaft, while permitting 
the other set of dogs to remain in operative po 
sition, two at a time, according to the method 
already described, and that a rotation of the 
band a few degrees in the opposite direction 
will reverse the action, withdrawing from en 
gagement the set of dogs which was engaged 
on the shaft, and permitting the other set, 
which was before withdrawn from engage 
ment, to come into such engagement. This 
belt or band, therefore, gives the operator 
control ever the dogs, enabling him to deter 
mine the direction of rotation of the shaft, at 
will. In order that the band B may be ac 
cessible for the purpose of such adjustment, 
a longitudinal opening His made in the pipe 
or frame FI, which guards the traveler, and 
a tongue or boss B is formed on the band in 
position to be reached through said longitudi 
nal slot, and used as a handle by means of 
which to rotate the band through the neces 
sary angle to change the rotation of the dogs. 
I claim 
1. In combination with the shaft having 
spirals of opposite pitch, the traveler having 
dogs adapted to engage such spirals respec 
tively, such dogs being movable in the trav 
eler into and out of engagement with the spi 
rals, the dogs being pivoted to the traveler 
and stopped thereon at positions to engage 
the spirals respectively of the shaft, and 
adapted to swing about their respective piv 
ots to escape such engagement. 
2. In combination with the shaft having 
spirals of opposite pitch, the traveler having 
dogs adapted to engage such spirals respec 
tively, such dogs being movable in the trav 
eler into and out of engagement with the spi 
rals, dogs pivoted to the traveler and stopped 
thereon at positions at which they engage the 
spirals respectively of the shaft, said dogs 
moving about their pivots in planes trans 
Verse to the shaft and all in the same direc 
tion about their respective pivots to escape 
such engagement. 
3. In combination with the shaft having 
the exterior spirals and the traveler adapted 
to reciprocate on the shaft and provided with 
means for engaging the strippers, whereby it 
rotates the shaft in such reciprocation; a pis 
ton rigid with the traveler; a cylinderin which 
it reciprocates; a valve which controls the 
supply and exhaust of the fluid under tension 
to operate the piston in the cylinder; a slide 
connected to the operating-lever of such valve 
having abutments engaged by the traveler at 
the limits of its reciprocation in each direc 
tion to reverse the valve. 
4. In combination with the cylinder having 
exterior spirals, and a traveler adapted to re 
ciprocate thereon and having suitable means 
for engaging the spirals to rotate the shaft 
by such reciprocation; a bearing for the shaft 
beyond the spirals toward one end, through 
which that end projects, a rigid frame extend 
ing from said bearing to a point beyond the 
other end of the shaft, and a cylinder con 
axial with the shaft rigid with said frame; a 
tubular extension or shaft from the follower 
extending through the head of said cylinder 
thereinto, and a piston within said cylinder 
on said tubular extension, the shaft being 
adapted to telescope into said tubular exten 
sion of the traveler. 
5. In combination with the shaft Ahaving 
superficial spirals and a traveler B thereon 
having suitable means for engaging the spi 
rals to rotate the shaft, the pipe or frame H 
having at one end a bearing for the shaft 
through which it protrudes and having inte 
rior longitudinal guideways H' for the trav 
eler; the cylinder E, rigid and conaxial with 
the pipe or frame H, the piston Greciprocat 
ing in such cylinder having its stem tubular 
and extending through the head of the cylin 
der proximate the frame H, and made fast to 
the follower and adapted to permit the shaft 
A to telescope within it. 
6. In combination with the pipe E H, hav 
ing fixed heads E and E and the diaphragm 
E", the shaft A having superficial spirals ex 
tending through and obtaining journal-bear 
ing in the head D, the traveler adapted to 
reciprocate in said shaft and engage the spi 
rals having a tubular stem in which the shaft 
may telescope, said stem extending through 
and obtaining bearing in the diaphragm, and 
a piston terminating said stem within the cyl 
inder Ebeyond the diaphragm, and suitable 
means for longitudinally guiding the traveler 
and for reciprocating the piston. 
7. In combination with a shaft having spi 
rals of opposite pitch, a traveler having two 
sets of dogs adapted to engage the spirals, 
each set having two sorts of individuals, one 
sort being adapted to engage the spirals of 
one pitch when the traveler moves in one di 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
 
75 
IOO 
IIO 
II 5 
I 2O 
I25 
4. 
583,802 
rection along the shaft, and the other sort turning in the same direction about their piv 
ots, but the two sets turning in opposite di 
being adapted to engage spirals of opposite 
rections to escape such engagement. 
pitch. When the traveler moves in opposite 
10. In combination with the shaft having 
direction, each sort being adapted to be thrown 
spirals of opposite pitch, the traveler having 
out of engagement by that movement of the 
two sets of dogs pivoted to it and oscillating 
traveler which engages the other sort, and 
in planes transverse to the shaft and adapted 
means for holding all the individuals of either 
respectively to engage the spirals thereof, 
set at will out of engagement with the spirals. 
and stopped on the traveler in respect to such 
8. In combination with the shaft having 
pivotal movement at positions at which they 
spirals of opposite pitch, the traveler having 
engage the spirals respectively, and free to 
two sets of dogs pivoted to it, each set com 
move from such positions, said dogs having 
prising individuals of two sorts, one sort be 
projections which protrude through the shell 
ing adapted to engage the spirals of one pitch, 
of the traveler, and a band or collar encom 
and the other sort being adapted to engage 
passing the latter and engaging said projec 
the spirals of the opposite pitch, all being 
tions at the side suitable for swinging the 
adapted to turn about their pivots respec 
dogs out of engagement with the spirals, the 
tively to clear the spirals, but the two sets 
dogs of one set being adapted to turn about 
being adapted to turn in opposite direction 
their pivots in the opposite direction from the 
for that purpose, and means for holding either 
dogs of the other set to escape such engage 
set at Will in disengaged position. 
ment; whereby the encompassing band may 
9. In combination with the shaft having 
be moved in one direction to disengage one set 
spirals of opposite pitch, the traveler having 
and in the opposite direction to disengage the 
two sets of dogs pivoted to it and adapted to 
other set. 
turn about their pivots in planes transverse 
... In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
to the shaft and stopped on the traveler in 
my hand, in the presence of two witnesses, at 
respect to such movement at positions in 
Chicago, Illinois, this 7th day of July, 1896. 
which they are respectively engaged with the 
TEHENRY HIARTWIG. 
spirals, part of the dogs of each set being 
adapted to engage the spirals of one pitch, 
and the remainder to engage the spirals of 
the opposite pitch, all individuals of each set 
CHAS. S. BURTON, 
JEAN ELLIOTT. 
Witnesses: 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US583902.txt	(No Model.) 
S. H. HARRINGTON & G. E. SOMERS 
RAIL BOND, 
No. 583,902. 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
WITNESSES 
22 2. Z. 
ANWEA/TOA. 
6. it 2- 
2z4, 
ATIORAVEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL H. HARRINGTON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., AND GEORGE E. SOMERS, 
OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
RA - BOND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 583,902, dated June 8, 1897. 
Application filed March 19, 1897, Serial No. 628,299, (No model.) 
To (tal tuition it; 126tty CO7 tetil: 
Beit known that we, SAMUEL H. HARRING 
TON, residing at New York, N.Y., and GEORGE 
E. SOMERS, residing at Bridgeport, Connecti 
cut, citizens of the United States, have in 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
Rail-Bonds, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
Our invention is designed to facilitate the 
securing of a rail-bond in a hole drilled at an 
acute angle in a rail. It is designed to sim 
plify and cheapen bonds made for this pur 
pose. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows in elevation a rail-bond provided with 
our device. Fig. 2, in perspective, shows the 
essential portion of our device detached from 
the rest. 
A designates a rail having a hole C at an 
acute angle with its surface; B, a bond end 
having a cylindric portion b and a shoulder 
U C, a sleeve having one end c diagonal of 
its length. 
The same letters refer to like parts in both 
views. 
In the example of our invention illustrated 
in the drawings the web of the rail A is drilled 
at C in a slanting direction-i. e., at other 
than a right angle to its surface. The end B 
of the rail-bond is cylindric, its body b being 
of a size to fit snugly in the holed. Above the 
body b is a shoulder l', adapted, if the bond 
were used in a hole drilled at a right angle 
with the web, to bear against the web and to 
act with the clench formed at the opposite 
side of the web by swaging the free end of 
the bodyb to hold the bond in the rail. This 
has heretofore been a customary way of mak 
ing and securing rail-bonds, and we have 
illustrated it in dotted lines in Fig. 1 of the 
drawings. 
In full lines in Fig. 1 we have shown a 
sleeve C of an internal diameter to fit snugly 
on the body b of the bond end B. One end 
c of the sleeve C is cut diagonally of its 
length, as clearly shown in Fig. 2 of the draw 
ings. The squarely - cut end of the sleeve 
O 
15 
2 
35 
45 
bears against the shoulder t' of the bond 
end, while the diagonal end C bears against 
the web of the rail and acts with the clench 
at the free end of the bond to secure the 
bond to the rail and to increase the contact 
surface. 
In experimenting with a machine for drill 
ing rail webs or bases at an angle other than 
a right angle with their surfaces a bond was 
first used the ends of which had an integral 
angular shoulder swaged on them. This is 
found in practice both expensive and unsat 
isfactory. It is much cheaper to form the 
cylindric bond end with the ordinary shoul 
der and to apply thereto the sleeve herein 
described. The sleeve may well be made 
from ordinary tubing by sawing it diagonally 
into lengths sufficient to make two sleeves, 
then separating these by an ordinary cross 
cut. 
It is understood that our diagonal sleeve 
may be used with a bond formed of a single 
rod or of a cable, with one in which the bond 
end is milled to form a body and a shoulder, 
or with one in which a separate ferrule is 
used-i. e., that the form of bond used forms 
no part of our invention or any limit to the 
use of our device. 
What we claim as our invention, and wish 
to secure by Letters Patent, is as follows: 
1. In combination a rail-bond having a 
shoulder near its end and a separate sleeve 
adapted to slip over said end and to bear 
against said shoulder, one end of said sleeve 
being diagonal of its axis, substantially as 
described. 
2. In combination a rail-bond consisting of 
a connecting portion and a shouldered end 
and a separate sleeve adapted to slip over said 
end and to bear against said shoulder, one 
end of said sleeve being diagonal of its axis, 
substantially as described. 
SAMUEL E. HARRINGTON. 
GEORGE E. SOMERS. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. L. COOPER, 
JAS. R. COE. 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584002.txt	(No Model.) 
E. L.IND FORS.. . 
PLANE GUIDE, 
No. 584,002. 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
s ass 
S. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERICK LINDFORS, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA. 
PLAN E- GUDE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,002, dated June 8, 1897. 
Application filed May 7, 1895. Serial No. 548,413, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it incy concern: 
Beit known that I, ERICK LINDFORS, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing in the city 
of Minneapolis, county of Hennepin and State 
of Minnesota, have invented a certain new and 
useful Improvement in Plane - Guides, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to means for guiding 
jointer-planes and many other kinds of planes, 
and its object is to provide an adjustably 
connected wing or guide whereby the plane 
may be used for squaring or beveling at dif 
ferent angles the surface operated upon. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrative 
of my improvements, there is shown in Fig 
ure 1 a plan view of the skeleton of a device 
embodying my improvements; and in Fig. 2 
a transverse section of the same, showing by 
full and dotted lines different positions of 
the guiding member relative to the tool while 
being used for different purposes. 
In such drawings a metallic or other suit 
able frame or stock for carrying a plane-iron 
is shown by the reference Fig. 1, and the slot 
in the sole through such iron or bit may be 
introduced, secured, and adjusted in the 
ordinary way is shown at 2. The stock 
shown is a skeleton metal one, but it may be 
of wood, and a handle (not shown) should of 
course be provided for operating the tool. 
These features may be of any usual or suit 
able construction, for they form no part of 
the presentimprovement and are referred to 
only for the purpose of showing the relation 
ship of the improvement to a form of tool that 
is well known. 
At the side of the tool is suitably hinged, 
as by means of a wire 3 or pintles, in sockets 
4, a wing 5, which serves as the guide in the 
operation of the tool. This wing has formed 
on or attached to it an arm 6, on which is 
formed or to which is attached a suitably 
curved extension 7, which may be round or 
of any suitable shape. These latter mem 
bers 6 and 7 are arranged to pass through a 
suitable opening in the side of the stock and 
the arm 7 to pass through a guiding member 
8, supported within the stock by a partition 
9 or other suitable support within the body 
1, and a set-screw 10 (or other regulating de 
55 
75 
vice) is provided for engaging the part 7 to 
hold it in place in the guide, so as to hold the 
guide-wing 5 in desired positions of adjust 
ment. As illustrated, the arm 6 and its ex 
tension 7 are connected by a pivot 11, and 
the guide 8 for the part 7 is swiveled in the 
partition 9. By these means the wing can 
be turned from an upward to a downward 
position through an arc of about a half-circle, 
and it may be held in adjustment at any in 
termediate point by the set-screw 10. The 
tool may be used in the ordinary Way and for 
the usual purpose of dressing lumber when 
the wing 5 is in position shown by the full 
lines in the drawings or is turned upward 
from such position, and when turned down 
ward, as indicated at a, in Fig. 2, it will serve 
to guide the tool and direct its cutting, so as 
to form a bevel on the board that is being 
cut. It will be understood that the wing 5 
may be placed either on the upper or side 
surface of the board to be dressed, depending 
upon the work desired to be done, so that the 
blade of the tool as it is advanced will cut in 
a course determined by the angle of inclina 
tion of the adjustable member 5, and so by 
the desired adjustment of this member 5 the 
tool can be utilized to cut or smooth surfaces 
within a range of ninety degrees, and by 
suitable graduations supplied on the arm 7 
the degrees of adjustment, can be accurately 
determined and fixed. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
In a plane, the combination with a stock 
having a slot in its side and a cavity in its 
interior, of a guide-wing hinged to the stock 
adjacent to the slot therein, the curved ex 
tension 7 pivotally secured at one of its ends 
on the guide-wing and entering the slot in the 
stock, the guide 8 swiveled on the interior of 
the stock, and having a transverse opening 
for the reception of the extension 7, and a 
set-screw to fixedly secure said extension, 
substantially as described. 
ERICK TINDFORS. 
Witnesses: 
ANDREW LIDEN, 
J. W. PETERSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584102.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 584, l02, 
A. H. BAKER, 
LAST. 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
 
 
Nil ) 
t 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW II. BAKER, OF BROCKTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
AST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,102, dated June 8, 1897, 
Application filed December 2, 1896, Serial No. 614,196, (No model.) 
O 
40 
To all twhOn it inval/ concei'i: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW H. BAKER, of 
Brockton, county of Plymouth, State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented an Improvement 
in Lasts, of which the following description, 
in connection with the accompanying draw 
ings, is a specification, like letters on the 
drawings representing like parts. 
In the manufacture of boots and shoes the 
last on which the upper is lasted is removed 
and a finishing-last is inserted in the shoe for 
finishing, &c. Shoes are made of certain 
lengths, and each length of shoe is duplicated 
in different widths to thus enable customers 
to be properly fitted, but an ordinary last can 
not fill out a shoe of, say, the width A and 
also widths B, C, and D, &c., and conse 
quently a great number of finishing-lasts are 
required. 
I have aimed to and have produced a last 
which may be readily made to fill and prop 
erly distend the uppers of shoes of different 
widths. 
My improved last presents a heel end and 
crown with a hole for the reception of the 
usual holding-pin, and the fore part is sepa 
rated from its toe end toward the crown of 
the last, the separation appearing at the side 
of the last, and between this separated fore 
part I have placed an expanding device, a 
last, so constructed being adapted to be 
pinched together to be inserted into the shoe, 
when it will expand to fit and fill the upper. 
I have shown the inner side of the toe and 
foot of the last as made movable, for it is the 
inner side of the shoe which it is hardest for 
the last to fit and hold up properly. 
Figure 1 shows an inner side view of one 
of my improved lasts; Fig. 2, a top view; Fig. 
3, an under side view; and Fig. 4, a section 
on the line ac, Fig. 1. 
The heel part A of the last has a crown ct, 
provided with a hole a' to receive the usual 
stiff pin to hold the last in firmly when the 
shoe is being finished. 
The outside A" of the last is shown as in 
tegral with the heel, but the inner side B of 
the last is shown as separated or cut from the 
outer side by a cut starting at the toe, run 
ning through substantially the middle of the 
last to the crown, and the cut is then turned 
through the last at its inner side. 
- 
Spring. 
The part B so cut from the last is suitably 
connected to the remaining part of the last, 
but loosely, so that the fore part may be nor 
mally separated by a suitable Spring. 
The connection between the fore part of the 
last is herein shown as effected by two rods 
or screws c, screwed into the part A', the 
shanks of the screws and their heads enter 
ing loosely recesses in the movable part B of 
the last and forming a stop, a suitable spring 
or springs placed between the parts A" and 
B acting normally to expand the last in the 
direction of its width, the extent to which the 
springs may act being limited by adjustment 
of the Screws. 
To put the lastin a shoe, the part B may be 
closed up to the part A', and when released 
the springs will expand the fore part, 
This invention is not limited to the partic 
ular shape shown for the expanding device or 
I have herein shown the inner side of the 
fore part of the last as detached from the heel, 
but it will be obvious that the outer side may 
be separated in like manner from the heel. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A last consisting of a heel part having 
a crown, and a divided fore part, combined 
with a spring located in said fore part and 
acting normally to keep it separated in the 
shoe, substantially as described. 
2. A shoe filling and holding last present 
ing a divided fore part, springs placed in the 
said fore part to normally move one part 
away from the other part, and stops connected 
With one part and extended loosely through 
the other part to act as guides for the mov 
able part and to also limit the extent of move 
ment of the movable part from the other part, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
w 
ANDREW H. BAKER. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. GREGORY, 
ADDIE F. DANIELS, 
55 
65 
75 
85 
9o 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584203.txt	(No Model.) 
L, BOLLMANN. 
STEAM TURBINE. 
9 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
L. BOLLMANN. 
STEAM TURBINE, 
9 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Noraris reters co. Photo-li TKo washingtoN. c. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 584,203. 
L. BOLLMANN. 
STEAMTURBINE, 
9 sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
  
  
?????? 
???? 
fly/ENTOR 
?? ???? 
BY 
A FORPEYS. 
 
(No Model.) 
L. BOLLMANN, 
STEAM TURBINE. 
9 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 584,203. 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
  
S 
SN 
R 
 
al 
 
  
  
- - - - === 
2 % 
 
- 
  
  
   
  
S 
 
 
WITNESSES 
?? 
f'AWWE AWT0R? 
A 770 PAWE WS. 
'orris Prers co, PKoro-Litho. was cro. 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
L. BOLLMANN. 
STEAM TURBINE. 
9 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 584,203, 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
????S 
??? ? 
2 
L 
WITNESSES; 
????? 
 
| WWENTOR 
BY u???. 
ATTORAEYS. 
E cists fge:Rs o pisto-tic... v 
(No Model.) 
L. BOLLMANN. 
STEAM TURBINE 
9 Sheets-Sheet 6, 
No. 584,203. 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
  
 
???? 
i iM i iMMMM LLMM M SSLLLLLSSLSLS LSSLSSSLS LSSLSSSSSSSMMGSSSiL 
2222 
qSeSMSSSLSSSLLL LL 
LLLL 
? 
NS 
S 
@???????r 
' r????? 
ATTOREYS. 
the NORRS PETERS co. Pr3ro-lirHo, wastington. p. c. 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
8 
No. 584,203, 
9. Sheets-Sheet 7. 
L. BOLLMANN. 
STEAM TURBINE. 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
S 
SSSSSSSSSSSSR-2 
? 2 
? 
  
 
 
 
 
 
2 s 
3 
S. 
SFS 
SSSR Y 
2 
2 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES : 
 
 
AW WEWT09? 
ATTORNEYS, 
Teorris persas co, pororra. Washhotos, p. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
L. BOLLMANN. 
STEAM TURBINE, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 8, 
No. 584,203. 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
WITNESSES 
|? WEFOR 
AITORNEYS. 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, Photo-i trio. was HINGTON, D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 584,203, 
L. BOLLMANN. 
STEAM TURBINE, 
9. Sheets-Sheet 9. 
 
 
 
%2 ? ? 2 %2 2 ? ? ? /2 ? 29 % % 
2. 2 K3 
ATTORNEYS. 
rigorias PEsgRs co. PHoTo-rivs 
tes, i. 8, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS BOLLMANN, OF VIENNA, AUSTRIA-HUN GARY. 
STEAM - TURB. N. E. 
SPECIFICAON forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,203, dated June 8, 1897. 
Application filed April 25, 1896, Serial No. 589,032, (No model.) Patented in England April 5, 1894, No. 6,822; in Austria 
August 20, 1894, No. 44,384; in Germany January 15, 1895, No. 84,908; in Hungary May 17, 1895, No. 2,405; in Bel 
gium January 18, 1896, No. 119,396 in Frauce January 21 l896, No. 253,344; in Switzerland Februaryll, 1896, No, 
12,029 in Spain February 22, 1896, No. 18,694, and in Italy March 13, 1896, No. 40,773/57, 
5 
To all whom, if n-cy concern. 
Beit known that I, LOUIS BOLLMANN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at II Obere 
Donaustrasse 93, Vienna, in the Empire of 
Austria-Hungary, have invented Improve 
ments on Turbines Driven by Steam or Gas, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, and for which I have obtained 
Letters Patent in Austria, dated August 20, 
1894, No. 44,384; in Hungary, dated May 17, 
1895, No. 2,405; in England, dated April 5, 
IS94, No. 6,822; in Germany, dated January 
15, 1895, No. 84,90S; in Belgium, dated Janu 
ary 18, 1896, No. 119,396; in Italy, dated March 
13, 1896, No. 40,773/57; in France, dated 
January 21, 1896, No. 253,344; in Spain, dated 
February 22, 1896, No. 18,694, and in Swit 
zerland February 11, 1896, No. 12,029. 
My invention relates to turbines worked by 
steam or gas; and its object is, first, to re 
duce the speed with which such motors have 
till now been rotating, and, secondly, to ex 
pand the steam or gas usefully to a very high 
degree, so that its effect will be equal to any 
other steam or gas motor. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a partial section and partial ele 
Vation of a turbine embodying my invention. 
Eig. 2 is a vertical section showing a modifi 
cation. Fig. 3 is a front elevation thereof. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical section of another modifi 
cation. Fig. 5 is a front elevation thereof. 
35 
* Fig. 6 is a vertical section of another modifi 
cation. Fig. 7 is a section at right angles to 
Fig. 8 is a partial section and partial 
Fig. 6. 
elevation of another modification. Fig. 9 is 
a front view thereof. Fig. 10 is a diagram 
matic view of guides employed. Fig. 11 is a 
section, on an enlarged scale, illustrating the 
form of channels in the bucket-wheels. Fig. 
12 is a detail of buckets employed and being 
a section substantially on the line 11 11 of 
Fig. 1, and Figs. 13 and 14 are views designed 
to illustrate the principle of my invention. 
In order to explain the nature of part of my 
invention, I will first call attention to the foll 
25 
circular plates, of which A has a tube ( in its 
center. If A is held close over B and a clar 
rent of air blown through the tube a, the 
plate B will not be blown away from A, but 
is drawn toward it, even if a weight is at- 55 
tached to it. On account of its vis inertiae 
the air tends to retain the velocity with which 
it is passed through the tube C, but as the 
area of its passage between the plates is in 
creasing toward the periphery of the latter 6o 
this velocity can only be kept up if the air 
expands below the pressure and density of 
the atmosphere. A space of rare fied air is 
therefore produced, against which the out 
side air presses and thus holds plate B freely 65 
Suspended toward plate A. 
If the air or steam is of high pressure, an 
expansive force is set free between the plates 
by which the velocity of escape is increased 
much beyond that, due to the boiler-pressure. 7 o 
If the latter is ten atmospheres, the escaping 
steam will have only 0.29 atmosphere. It is 
obvious that the entire energy of expansion. 
and of the boiler-pressure will be accumu 
lated as vis inertiae in the current, giving it a. 75 
velocity of three thousand five hundred and 
fifty feet per second. 
In Fig. 1, A and B are plates of the system 
above explained for Fig. 13. A has a tube C, 
into which is fitted the stud b of plate B. Its 8o 
inner part is fluted, forming channels for 
leading the steam, which enters through pipe 
E, toward the plates. Suitable arrangements 
are made to adjust the distance between the 
plates, by a hand-wheel or otherwise, in order 85 
to regulate the admittance of the steam. 
K. K" are two disks so situated that the 
disk-like current escaping from A B passes 
between them. They have apertures on their 
sides, through which air enters, as indicated go 
by arrows. The areas of these apertures can 
be regulated by circular slides J J, or in any 
other way, in order to adjust the quantity of 
air admitted. 
The air has an intense affinity to mix with 95 
steam and to diffuse with it, the more SO by 
the arrangement of this invention, whereby 
the steam-current has the form of a verythin 
flat disk, (for a seven-horse-power motor its 
45 
5o lowing experiment: A and B in Fig. 13 are thickness being only one two-hundred-and- loo 
2 
584,203 
, . ? 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
- 
eightieth part of an inch, the plates A B being end in suitable bearings. 
three and one-halfinches in diameter,) which 
increases on its way toward the circumference 
of the plates K K'and presents, therefore, an 
immense area of surface to the air. The mix 
ture passes then into the turbine at a moder 
ate velocity proportional to the difference of 
the weights of steam and air. As the mixture 
is forced toward Gararefied space is produced 
near AB, which draws in fresh air by suction. 
If for one pound of steam of ten atmos 
pheres forty pounds of cold air of 50 Fahren 
heit (equals 10 centigrade) are admitted, the 
mixture of air, steam, and condensed water 
(the latter remaining suspended in it) will 
have at G. a temperature of 86 Fahrenheit, 
(equals 30 centigrade,) the air being thereby 
eXpanded accordingly at the cost of steam 
thereby condensed. Another part of steam 
is condensed by its expansion between the 
plates A. B. 
According to the mechanical theory of heat 
is the entire energy generated between the 
plates A B and K. K' equal to that which 
Steam can produce if it is expanded until its 
temperature is reduced from 473Fahrenheit 
(the temperature at ten atmospheres) to 86 
Fahrenheit (the temperature of the mixture) 
or its pressure from ten to one twenty-fourth 
atmosphere. The heat thus transferred to 
the air produces in the latter the same energy 
as if it had remained in the steam to expand 
the same to the same temperature. 
Suppose C in Fig. 14 to be an open tube, 
With a small one, d, below, through which 
Steam flows upward and forces the air enter 
ing from i below up through, a'. On the way 
the air is heated and expanded. Now in re 
gard to this expansion the tube represents a 
vessel closed on its bottom, because the cur-. 
rent of steam prevents a downward motion. 
The expansion can therefore act only upward 
by accelerating the velocity of the air. This 
is the effect produced between the plates K. 
K" by the heating and expansion of the air. 
If the proportion of steam and air (one to 
forty) given above as an example is used, the 
mixture will obtain at G a velocity of five 
hundred and sixteen feet per second, which 
is about one-seventh of that with which the 
steam is discharged from the plates A. B. 
This velocity will produce in a single turbine 
Wheel of twenty inches active diameter about 
three thousand revolutions per minute, which 
speed is for general use still too high, although 
it is only one - seventh of that produced in 
a rational turbine with the steam acting di 
rectly. It can be further reduced either by 
allowing more air to mix with the steam or 
by using any of the following arrangements 
of the turbine: 
Fig. 1 shows a serial turbine having three 
circles of stationary guiding-buckets L' L' 
L', connected to the stand or support H, and 
three circles of rotating wheel-buckets T T' 
T', cast in one and fastened to the shaft W, 
bearing partly in the stand Hand on the right 
(Not shown.) The 
iforms of the buckets of the wheel and of the 
two guiding-circles L'L' are similar to those 
T, (shown in Fig. 12,) which is a circular 
cross-section through line 1111 in Figs. I and 
4. . That of the first guides L is like those L. 
in Fig. 11. All guiding-buckets are curved 
reversely to those of the wheel. 
The mixture flows from G through guides 
L' into the buckets T of the wheel, thence 
through the second guides L', in which the 
tangential direction of the current is reversed, 
so as to enter the wheel-buckets T' in the 
same direction as in the first ones T. In like 
manner flows the current through the buck 
ets L' into the circular space. S, and then 
through the exhaust-pipe S off into the air. 
The turbine Fig. lis supposed to act with 
seven-horse power and rotate eight hundred 
times per minute, its diameter in the middle 
of the buckets being twenty inches. The ve 
locity of the mixture is reduced in the turbine 
from five hundred and fifteen to one hundred 
feet per second. 
The current contains, there 
fore, only 3.7 per cent. of the energy it had 
before entering the turbine. 
Figs. 2 and 3 i show a modification of the 
turbine, the wheel-buckets being radial in 
stead of axial. Only one circle of stationary 
guiding-buckets L* and three rotating cir 
cles (two of which, Tand T, rotate in one 
and one, T, in the other direction) are hereby 
used. Tand T are cast in one and fastened 
to the hollow shaft X, while the single one is 
connected to shaft W, which bears in X. The 
latter bears in the frame S' and in another 
bearing. (Not shown.) 
The current passes from the mixing-space 
between K K" through guides L* into the 
buckets T, thence through those, T, which ro 
tate in opposite directions, and lastly through 
Tinto space Sand off through pipe S". The 
guides L." L' of Fig. 1 are hereby avoided 
and the current passes in a more straightline 
through the turbine. The power can be trans 
mitted from the two shafts by straight and 
crossed belts. 
Figs. 4 and 5 show another arrangement 
having only a single wheel T, the general 
construction of the parts being substantially 
like those in Fig. 1. 
The forms of the guiding and wheel buck 
ets L and T are shown in Fig. 12 in section 
through the line 1111. The channels of the 
wheel T are made conical, as is shown in 
Figs. 4 and 11, each representing a conical 
diverging tube in which a current in the di 
rection of the arrows 1 and 2 produces a suck 
ing action at the wider end p, similar to that 
above described for the plate A B in Fig. 13. 
The atmospheric pressure acts on both ends 
of the tube, driving the current on at the nar 
rower end o and retarding it at the wider one 
p, but as the area is larger at p the retarda 
tion is greater than the acceleration ato, and 
consequently the velocity of escape is reduced. 
If the proportion of the weight of steam and 
75 
95 
I OO 
IO 
II 5 
I 25 
584,203 
25 
35 
T 5 
lo direction of rotation. 
4. 
air is one to forty, as above stated for Fig. 1, 
the sectional area of the channels of the wheel 
T should be three times as wide at the dis 
charging side than at the entrance in order 
5 to produce the same effect of reducing the ve 
locity of escape of the mixture and of the ro 
tations of the wheel. The driving force is in 
creased by the reacting pressure of the outside 
air acting on both sides of the channels in the 
A second circle of guiding-buckets M, Fig. 
12, may be placed near the discharging side of 
the wheel, guiding the current away in axial 
direction. They will act similar to the atmos 
phere in reducing the velocity if conical chan 
nels are used. 
Experiments have shown that for large mo 
tors alonger distance is required for perfectly 
mixing a sufficient quantity of air with the 
steam than can be obtained between the plates 
KK" without increasing their diameter to an 
impracticable extent. The air is at first forced 
along by the flat steam-current with acceler 
ating velocity, and it requires a certain time 
and length of way until steam and air have 
acquired the same speed. 
Figs. S and 9 show an arrangement for in 
creasing the distance for mixing and for fur 
thering the diffusion of the steam and air. 
Fig. 10 is a diagram showing the circumfer 
ence of the turbine in section through the line 
1010, Fig. 8, in flat extended condition, being 
half size of Figs. S and 9. The mixture flows 
through the guiding - channels L. from the 
space between KIK' into the circular space R 
in such direction that it must rotate the same, 
as is indicated by the arrows in Fig. 10. m. are 
partitions placed screw-like into the space R, 
so as to guide every part of the current to 
make one revolution before it can enter the 
second guides L and the buckets of the wheel 
T. The guiding-buckets L divide the flat 
current into single streams, each consisting of 
a central part of higher velocity surrounded by 
air which has not yet acquired the full speed. 
These streams are stratified side by side, 
which, entering the space R, produce there 
by a most perfect mixing of the current while 
it makes the long way in the circle. The 
quantity of air admitted for one pound of 
steam can be increased by this arrangement, 
which is economically favorable and allows 
also a reduction of the revolutions of the tur 
bine wheel. By increasing the dimensions 
of the space R. and the number of partitions 
in and disposing the latter accordingly the 
mixture can be forced to rotate more than 
once before it enters the turbine. 
The space R may be formed so that its sec 
tion Fig. S is like a reversed S, the current 
rotating screw-like at first from left to right, 
as in the figures, then from right to left, and, 
lastly, again to the right toward the wheel. 
The partitions in may be omitted, the freely 
rotating current finding itself the screw-like 
way toward the wheel. 
If the front plate K is formed as a ring, so 
as to be open in the middle until near k in 
Fig. 8, the atmospheric pressure holds the 
uncovered part of the current toward the in 
Iner plate K", giving it the appearance of a 
plate of glass. The quantity of air admitted 
can then be regulated by altering the distance 
between plate K and the ring-plate K. The 
form of the current passing from the plates 
A B may be altered in several ways. It may 
be conical instead of flat by forming and ar 
ranging the plates A Band K K accordingly. 
It may also be formed of many fine jets flow 
ing in radial or conical direction. 
This invention can as well be applied to 
turbines driven by pressed or heated air or 
any other gas-as, for exa1nple, coal-gas which 
has been previously burned or exploded. 
Coal-gas may be pressed through the plates A 
B and burned or exploded between the plates 
KK", or in a separate space connected to it near 
their center, or, vice versa, air may be pressed 
through A B and the gas admitted to it, or 
both might be mixed previously and pressed 
through the plates and burned in the space 
between K IX", the very close space between 
the plates AB preventing the ignition to pass 
to the center. The air or gas may be pressed 
into the mixing-space K K by a pump or any 
other contrivance. . 
Figs. 6 and 7 show an arrangement for re 
ducing the enormous high velocity with which 
the steam passes according to the other figures 
into the space for mixing it with the air. 
The mixing-space between the plates KK' 
is formed into conical spiral channels k, Fig. 
6, narrow near the center and wide toward 
the circumference. They have suitable ap 
ertures l to admit outside air (which are 
shown in Fig. 6 only for one of the four chan 
nels) and are made of such an angle to the 
channels that the air must enter nearly in 
the direction of the current. The conical 
form of the channels and the slant direction 
of the air-holes produce a suction for draw 
ing in the air if the steam or the mixture 
flows with a velocity much lower than that 
produced by plates A B in Figs. 1. and 13. 
For steam of ten atmospheres this velocity 
might be about two hundred meters, or six 
hundred and seventy-five feet, per second, 
which is one-fifth of that for the plate A B. 
If the areal dimensions of the channels are 
at N such that the required quantity of steam 
of ten atmospheres must enter them with the 
above velocity, air will be drawn in through 
the first air-hole k', and when the current 
reaches the next following hole its condition 
is altered according to the quantity of air 
previously mixed with it. By adjusting the 
size of each succeeding air-hole along the spi 
ral channels to admit at every point the re 
quired quantity of air the current can be 
kept at a relative low velocity. The steam 
begins at once to impart its energy to the air 
entered into the expanding-channels, the in 
terior of which acts as a resistance toward 
the small end N and prevents the steam to 
45 
5c. 
?? 
75 
9o 
95 
?. ? ? 
C. 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
4 
584,203 
obtain a high speed, which furthers the mix 
ing and prevents noise and friction. 
The cur 
rent passes from the spirals with a rotating 
motion through the guides Linto the buckets 
T of the turbine wheel. This arrangement 
can be combined with any of those previously 
described, and its form and construction may 
be modified in many different ways. The 
plates KK", Figs. 7 and S, can be arranged so 
that they rotate instead of the wheel T, in 
which case it works as a reaction or Scotch 
turbine. A part of the driving force is then 
produced by the current acting against the 
entering air to set it in motion, which causes 
a reacting pressure against the spirals. A 
circle of guides similar to those M in Fig. 12 
might then be used around the guides L. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination with a turbine, of cen 
tral plates adapted to receive steam under 
high pressure, plates surrounding the first 
named plates and having mixing-chambers 
for receiving steam from the first-named 
plates and openings for the admission of air, 
and means for regulating the air-openings, 
substantially as described. 
2. In combination with a turbine the plates 
having air-inlets, the central plates A, B, or 
their equivalents to draw or throttle the steam 
(or gas) of high pressure and to form it into 
a flat or conical jet, suitable to be mixed with 
a proportional large quantity of air (or other 
gas) of low pressure, substantially as herein 
described. 
O 
20 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
3. The combination with central plates, of 
the plates K, K' one having apertures to ad 
mit air into the mixing-Space between the 
said plates having the form of disks, cones or 
tubes so that the mixing-space is enlarging 
toward its periphery, substantially as herein 
set forth. 
4. The combination with a turbine, of the 
central plates for the admission of a motive 
agent, means for adjusting the plates to more 
or less enlarge the space between them, and 
the plates having the mixing-chambers and 
air-inlets, substantially as specified. 
5. The combination with a turbine, of the 
center plates for the admission of a motive 
agent, the surrounding plates having mixing 
chambers and air-inlets, and ring-plates for 
regulating the air - inlets, substantially as 
specified. 
6. The combination of a serial turbine hav 
ing more than one circle of turbine buckets 
and guides, with the said plates AB and KK' 
or their equivalents, substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. A turbine, comprising a bucket-wheel, 
guides at the entrance side of the buckets, 
guides at the exhaust sides of the buckets, 
and means comprising the center plates and 
the surrounding plates having mixing-cham 
bers for directing steam and air to the buck 
ets, substantially as specified. 
LOUIS BOLLMANN. 
Witnesses: 
LEON DEUTsCHL, 
FIARRY BELMIONT. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584303.txt	(No Model.) 
W. J. BUSSE 
CASH RECORDER AND INDICATOR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 584,303, 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. J. BUSSE 
CASH RECORDER AND INDICATOR. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 584,303, 
Patented June 8, 1897, 
7%7 a 
z - 
T 12. 
LA al-Rell a 
(200 
: 
  
i- 
W. 
   
 
 
-S 
% 
 
 
 
Year 
Yx 
All 
 
 
77==- 
Y. M. M. W. M. M. W. 
W. 
mm C. 
 
| 
W. 
7tezzeesses. 
w 
ty 
rSN SN. Sw. 
94. 72Z672Z67, 
at 
527 
(e? 
622's 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 584,303. 
 
W. J. BUSSE 
CASH RECORDER AND INDICATOR, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
  
  
 
 
  
Z 
 
 
3. 1. 
2 
a. 
NN 
were 
S 
 
e. & 
Z/Zzzasses. 
We haw 
Z724ezz7, 
634-22 
2, 1 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 584,303, 
W. J. BUSSE 
CASH RECORDER AND INDICATOR, 
Patented June 8, 1897. 
AY 
2. 2 
4. Sheets 
Sheet 4. 
zzzz ^ 
NZ 
zzzz 2 Z 
 
% 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM J. BUSSE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF THREE-FOURTIIS 
TO JOHN J. MILLER AND CARROLL B. VASTINE, OF AUSTIN, ILLINOIS. 
CASH RECORDER AND END CATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,303, dated June 8, 1897. 
Application filed May 28, 1894, Serial No, 512,674, (No model). 
Io this specification. 
To Ott (, Uh-O7, it Tru?t,7/ concern. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM.J. BUSSE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
5 Illinois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Cash Recorders and Indica 
tOl's, of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming a part of 
This invention relates to improvements in 
that class of apparatus known as cash re 
COrders and indicators, employed principally 
in stores, by means of which the amount of 
T5 each sale is recorded and indicated to the 
clerk or customer before the cash-drawer can 
a be opened to receive the money for such 
Sales. 
My invention has for its primary object 
2O greater simplicity, durability, and economy 
in the cost of manufacture of machines of 
this class. 
Another primary object of this invention 
is to simplify and improve the mechanism 
25 by means of which the machine operates to 
show the amount of a sale on the recording 
tape at each Operation of the machine, there 
by dispensing with the separate indicating 
devices heretofore employed to a large extent 
A further object of this invention is to im 
prove the mechanism by means of which the 
recording-tape is brought into contact with 
the type-wheels for the purpose of facilitat 
35 ing the adjustment and operation of the type 
Wheel and insuring perfect alinement of the 
letters on the different wheels and improve 
the printing resulting therefrom; and other 
objects of the invention are to simplify and 
4o improve the general construction of the differ 
ent parts, including novel and simple mech 
anism for successively operating the mov 
able platen, the storage-reel, and the cash 
drawer release and subsequently resetting 
45 these parts for the next operation by a single 
reciprocation of a vibrating actuating-lever. 
These and other objects that will appear 
hereinafter in the specification and be pointed 
out in the claims are attained by the devices 
50 illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
3O in apparatus of this kind. 
Figure I represents a perspective view of 
an apparatus embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 is a vertical section through the casing of 
the apparatus, taken just inside of the back 
wall thereof and showing the inclosed mech 
anism in real elevation. Fig. 3 is a verti 
cal section on line 33 of Fig. 2, looking in 
the direction indicated by the arrow. Fig. 4 
is a similar section taken on the line 4 4 of 
Fig. 2, looking in the direction indicated by 
the arrows. Fig. 5 is a vertical section taken 
on the line 55 of Fig. 2, looking in the same 
direction as in Fig. 4; Fig. 6, a detail view 
of the platen-operating devices, showing the 
position of the parts after a movement there 
of; and Fig. 7, a detail view of a locking de 
vice for preventing the use of the apparatus. 
Similar letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in the several figures of the draw 
IngS. 
Referring by letter to the accompanying 
drawings, A indicates a casing of any suit 
able contour and dimensions for containing 
the operating devices of my apparatus, and 
is provided at about the center of the front 
Wall thereof with a horizontally - elongated 
opening B, closed by a glass or other trans 
parent plate C, through which the recorded 
sale is seen by the purchaser or Salesman, as 
Will be described faither on. 
In the upper part of the casing is mounted 
a fixed transverse shaft D in a suitable frame 
within the casing A, and upon said shaft is 
loosely journaled a series of indicating-levers 
E, each operating to set a type-wheel so as 
to cause any One of the figures or characters 
thereon to register with a movable platen 
Over which travels a recording - tape lipon 
which the figures or characters are to be 
printed, and as the indicating-levers all op 
erate alike it will be sufficient to describe the 
operation of a single One of them. 
Preferably below the shaft D is mounted 
in the frame carrying said shaft another fixed 
shaft F, upon which is loosely journaled a se 
ries of type-wheels G, corresponding in num 
ber with the indicating-levers E and having 
secured to the peripheries thereof a series of 
type II at regular intervals apart, which type 
may be figures or any other suitable charac 
telS. 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
 
2 
584,303 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
ICO 
O 
I I5 
IO 
23 
35 
To the type-wheel G and concentric there 
with is secured a pinion I, with which meshes 
a segment-rack J, rigidly Secured to the piv 
oted end of the indicating-lever E, so that 
Whenever the said lever is moved a corre 
sponding movement of the type-wheel is pro 
duced. The Outer end of the indicating-lever 
E projects through the front wall of the cas 
ing A, which latter is curved on the arc of a 
circle Struck from the axis of the shaft, D and 
is slotted so as to serve as a guide for the said 
lever. 
The outer free end of the indicating-lever 
terminates in a suitable thumb-piece, to which 
is attached an index or pointer IX, as more 
clearly shown in Fig. 1, which pointer indi 
Cates upon a Scale, stamped or otherwise 
formed upon the adjacent portion of the cas 
ing, the figure or character on the type-wheel 
which is in position for printing, the parts 
being SO proportioned and arranged that such 
figure or character corresponds in all posi 
tions of the indicating-lever with the figure 
or character to which the index points in any 
particular position of said lever. 
In order to hold the type-wheel, and conse 
quently the indicating-lever, in any adjusted 
position, I provide a series of pins L. On one 
side of the type-wheel, and a spring-catch M, 
attached at a suitable point to a stationary 
portion of the frame, the outer free end of 
the spring-catch being bent so that the said 
end Will rest upon two adjacent pins, with the 
bent portion between the pins, so as to yield 
ingly maintain the type-wheel against move 
ment in either direction, although if sufficient 
force is applied to the indicating-lever the 
type-wheel may be readily rotated; but when 
ever the force is withdrawn the angular end 
of the spring-catch will compel the centering 
and registering of the type-wheel, so that one 
of the characters thereon will be immediately 
over the movable platen N. 
The type is automatically inked at every 
movement of the type-wheel by means of an 
inking - Wheel O, which is loosely mounted 
upon a fixed rod or shaft P, preferably at the 
rear side of the type-wheel, the hole through 
the inking-Wheel being of somewhat greater 
diameter than the rod P, which is set closer 
to the periphery of the type-wheel than the 
Center of the inking-wheel, so that the latter 
hangs eccentirically on the said rod and the 
gravity thereof causes it to rest at all times 
against the face of the type on the type-wheel. 
The inking-wheel is of course free to rotate 
upon the rod P and therefore constantly 
changes the face thereof upon the type, which 
it could not do if it were not loosely as well 
as eccentrically hung. The same result might 
be obtained by having the pivoting-rod con 
centric with and fitting the opening in the 
inking-wheel, but resting in obliquely-dis 
posed slots in the frame, so that the wheel 
might back off and revolve under the action 
of the type-wheel; but in practice I have 
found the form shown to be preferable. 
The recording-tape on which the type is 
designed to print, when the type is brought in 
contact there with by the movable platen N 
is wound upon the Supply-reel Q, of Suitable 
dimensions, which is loosely journaled in the 
frame of the machine and held against a too 
free rotation by any suitable tension device, 
such, for instance, as the tension-spling R, 
bearing against the face of the grooved wheel 
S, Secured to the end of the shaft of said reel, 
The tape T is trained over antifriction-roll 
ers or guide-bars V' W at each side of the 
movable platen, which underlies the tape be 
tween said roller's immediately beneath the 
type-wheel, and the tape then passes around 
another guide-bar or roller V and onto an in 
termittently-acting storage-reel W, the Op 
eration of which will be described farther on, 
the tape being eXposed to the view of the 
clerk or customer through the opening IB in 
the casing at a point between the roller or 
guide-bar V and roller or guide-bar V. 
The movable platen N is normally held out 
of contact with the type-l'Oller by suitable 
springs (, at each end thereof, and is moved 
into contact with the type by a mechanislm 
comprising a transverse shaft b, loosely jour 
na, led in the frame of the Innaclhine, which is 
moved in one direction by the Feciprocating 
actuating-lever c (see Figs. 1 and 2) and in 
the opposite direction by a Spring of Some 
suitable character, such as the coiled Spring 
cl, sleeved upon One end of the shaft, One endi, 
of which spring is rigidly secured to the shaft 
or to a part fixed thereon, the other end of 
the spring being secured to a stationary por 
tion of the machine frame or casing. The 
connection with the machine frame Ol' casing 
may be made adjustable by attaching the 
spring to a disk or collar e, fitting up against 
the face of a notched plate f, rigidly Secured 
to the casing or frame, and a key 9, which fits 
into one of the notches in the plate f and a 
corresponding notch in the plate or collar e, 
so as to securely lock the parts together in 
any adjusted position. 
Upon each end of the shaft l) is rigidly 
mounted a two-armed lever h, upon one end 
of which is pivotally secured a dog i, having 
a shoulder i thereon adapted and arranged 
to engage a suitable stop le upon the Said le 
ver, so as to stop the dog in propel' position 
to engage a notch l, formed in the projecting 
end of the platen when the parts are in the 
normal position shown in the drawings. The 
dog i and the alm of the double-ended lever 
to which it is attached constitute a toggle, SO 
that when the lever is moved in the direction 
indicated by the arrows in the drawings the 
toggle will be straightened Out, and thus 
cause the platen to be elevated into contact 
with the type-wheel, the continuous further 
movement of the toggle past, the dead-center 
releasing the platen so that it moves down 
under the influence of the Springs (t. Out of 
contact with the type-wheel, the parts at Such 
time being in the position shown in Fig. 6, 
584,303 
3 
O 
25 
45 
5 O 
Upon the releasing of the actuating-lever c 
and the reverse rotation. Ol' Oscillation of the 
shaft, b, carrying with it the lever h, the point 
of the dog i will engage the projection an upoil 
the platen, throwing said dog back to its nor 
mal position against its stop and in position 
to be again seated in the notch l upon the 
completion of the reverse movement of the 
Oscillatory power-shaft b, ready for another 
actuation of the platen. The other arm of 
one of the levers comes in contact with a stop 
in upon the frame of the machine, so as to 
normally hold the part in proper normal po 
sition, while the corresponding arm of the 
other lever, preferably near the end of the 
oscillatory shaft, b, to which the actuating 
lever c is secured, carries a spring-actuated 
pawl O, pivotally secured thereto and pro 
vided with a shoulder or projection p, adapted 
and arranged to strike against a stop or shoul 
der q upon the lever h, against which the 
shoulder is held by the spring 7', all as clearly 
shown by the full and dotted lines in Fig. 3. 
This pawl is adapted and arranged to engage 
one of the teeth of a ratchet-wheels, rigidly 
mounted upon the end of the shaft of the 
storage-reel W and to move or rotate said 
wheel the space of one tooth. The engage 
ment of the pawl with the ratchet - wheel 
takes place immediately after the platen has 
been elevated, so as to cause the recording 
tape to make contact with the type-wheel, 
the continued movement of the oscillatory 
power-shaft b causing such operation to take 
place and in Such degree as to move the 
newly-printed portion of the recording-tape 
from the platen to a point in front of the 
opening B in the frame-casing where it may 
be viewed by the clerk or purchaser. It will 
of course be understood that the pawl by rea 
Son of its spring actuation Will drag over the 
ratchet - Wheel. On its return stroke without 
causing any movement thereof and that the 
movement in parted to the ratchet-wheel and 
consequently the storage-wheel by the pawl 
is intermittent, but takes place immediately 
after every printing operation, the pawl mov 
ing to position to cause this movement dur 
ing the printing operation. 
The third operation is performed by the 
Oscillatory power-shaft immediately follow 
ing the two just described, and that is the 
releasing of the lock devices which secure 
the cash-drawer until both the printing oper 
ation and the storage operation have been 
completed. This third operation is obtained 
by means of an angular arm t, rigidly secured 
to the oscillatory shaft b, adjacent to the lever 
h, which arm, moving with the other parts, 
strikes against a collar or projection it upon 
a spring-actuated and vertically - disposed 
locking-bolt v, the end of which bolt projects 
down in front of a suitable stop device it in 
side the drawer, and prevents the opening of 
the drawer until the arm it has laised the lock 
bolt against the tension of its actuating-spring 
sufficiently to clear the stop it, when the 
drawer will be slightly projected by the force 
of a spring of some suitable character, such 
as the flat spring ac, attached to the rear end of 
the drawer and confined between the drawer 
and the back Wall of the casing. This opera 
tion of releasing the drawer is, as I have be 
fore stated, the last of the three to take place, 
the purpose of such an arrangement being to 
insure that the record shall be printed and 
the partial storage of the recording-tape to. 
bring the last record in view shall be made 
before the drawer can be opened for either 
the deposit or withdrawal of cash therefrom. 
In connection with this last operation, if de 
sirable, an alarm-bell may be simultaneously 
sounded by means of a pivoted dog /, engag 
ing the teeth of the ratchet-wheel S and held 
in contact there with by a Weighted arm y' or 
any equivalent spring or weighted device, to 
which dog or arm is secured a spring-sup 
ported hammer 2, which is caused to strike 
the bell or gong 3' whenever the ratchet 
wheel is moved the space of a single tooth, 
thus Sounding an alarm each time the cash 
drawer is opened. 
To prevent surreptitious or fraudulent op 
eration of the machine or tampering there 
with or opening of the cash-drawer by unau 
thorized persons in the absence of the mer 
chant or his employees, I provide a very sim 
ple lock device to prevent the operation of 
the machine, which consists of a pin or stop 
C'. On a prolongation of the arm t, with which, 
engages a hook-like catch b', operated by any 
suitable key inserted through a suitable key 
hole c' (see Fig. 1) in the side of the casing 
of the apparatus. The normal position of 
this catch is that shown in full lines in Fig. 
7, the catch resting against a pin d out of 
the way, so as to permit the free limovement 
of the arm t, while the dotted lines show the 
catch in its operative position in engagement 
with the pin Cl", so as to prevent the move 
ment of the arm t, which thereby locks all of 
the mechanism excepting, of course, the indi 
cating-levers and type-wheels, the movement 
of which produces no effect, as they are at 
all times movable back and forth and can be 
reset from any position to any other desired 
position without affecting the recording or 
indicating devices. In the making of change 
the type-wheels may be set so as to print a 
row of ciphers or any other characters that 
the merchant or manufacturer may select. 
A cash recorder or indicator embodying my 
invention is extremely simple yet durable 
and effective in construction, and is cheap as 
to cost of construction, as most of the parts 
coln posing the machine are rods and stamped 
or cheaply-cast sections which do not require 
for their perfect operation a very high degree 
of finish or especial accuracy in fit. At the 
same time the apparatus furnishes the mer 
chant with a sealed record which is the equiv 
alent of a day-book or blotter, which not 
only records every sale, but also clearly in 
dicates the same to the clerk or customer or 
75 
So 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
II.5 
4. 
584,303 
both, without the employment of the more 
or less complicated indicating devices hereto 
fore commonly employed in machines of this 
class. 
It is to be understood that I do not desire 
to limit myself to the exact devices and 
groups of mechanism herein shown and de 
scribed for accomplishing the desired object, 
as obviously many variations thereof will 
readily suggest themselves to the skilled me 
chanic, and all such variations would be with 
in the scope of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to Secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a cash recorder and indicator, the com 
bination with a series of adjustable type 
wheels, an intermittently-actuated recording 
tape, a vertically-movable platen provided 
With a Dotch and shoulder at each end there 
of, and a lock for the cash-drawer, of an OS 
cillatory power-shaft, a lever-arm mounted 
on each side of said shaft and each lever 
provided with a dog for engagement with 
said notch and shoulder for actuating the 
platen, a spring-actuated pawl-and-ratchet 
Wheel connection between said shaft and the 
storage - reel for the recording - tape, and a 
lever callied on One end of said shaft for 
lifting and thereby releasing the drawer 
locking bolt, substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
2. In a cash recorder and indicator, the com 
bination. With a series of adjustable type 
wheels, an intermittently-actuated recording 
tape, and a movable platen having a notch 
and shoulder, of an oscillatory power-shaft, 
a lever mounted on each side of said shaft, 
each lever having a dog for engaging said 
notch and shoulder to actuate the platen, a 
spring-actuated pawl-and-ratchet-wheel con 
nection between said shaft and the storage 
reel for the recording-tape, a lock for the 
cash-drawer, an arm mounted on said oscil 
latory shaft for releasing said lock, and an 
alarm device actuated by said ratchet-wheel 
connection, substantially as described. 
3. In a cash recorder and indicator, the com 
bination with the series of adjustable type 
wheels, an intermittently-actuated recording 
tape and a vertically-movable platen, of an 
oscillatory power-shaft, mechanism carried by 
each end of the shaft for operating the platen, 
mechanism carried by said shaft for actuat 
ing the recording-tape, an arm mounted on 
one end of the shaft for raising the lock-bolt 
to release the drawer, and a locking-catch de 
vice for said arm to prevent the actuation 
thereof, substantially as shown and described. 
4. In a cash recorder and indicator, the com 
bination with a series of type-wheels, an in 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
termittently-actuated recording-tape, a mov 
able platen, of an oscillatory shaft Ihaving 
mounted thereon a two-armed lever at each 
side thereof, each lever having at the upper 
end a dog and stop, said dog being adapted 
to engage with and actuate the platen, one of 
said levers having at its lower end a spring 
pawl and stop for intermittently actuating 
the winding - reel, said shaft having also 
mounted thereon an arm for releasing the 
cash-drawer lock, and a catch device on said 
arm to prevent the actuation thereof, all Sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a cash recorder and indicator, the coln 
bination with a type-roller, an indicating-le 
Ver, and a platen normally out of contact with 
the type-roller and provided with a notch l 
and projections in, of a rock-shaftly journaled 
in bearings in the frame of the machine, a 
two-armed lever 7 mounted on said shaft, a 
stop l; upon said lever, a dog pivotally se 
cured on one end of said lever and having a 
shoulder j thereon adapted to engage said 
stop, and an actuating-lever Secured on said 
shaft and outside of the frame of the machine, 
substantially as described. 
6. In a cash recorder and indicator, the com 
bination with a type-roller, an indicating-lo 
ver adapted to actuate the same, and a platen 
normally held out of contact with the type 
roller and provided with a notch and projec 
tions, a shaft b journaled in bearings in the 
frame of the machine, a two-armed level I, 
mounted on said shaft, a dog i pivotally Se 
cured to the lever and adapted to cngage the 
notch in the platen, a shoulder i on said dog 
adapted to engage a stop k upon said lever, 
a stop in upon the frame of the machine adapt 
ed to be engaged by the other arm of the le 
ver, a stop or shoulder q upon the lever h, 
and a spring-actuated pawl O pivotally se 
cured upon One end of said lever and pro 
vided with a shoulder or projection p adapted 
to engage said stop or shoulder q, substan 
tially as described. 
7. In a cash recorder and indicator, the com 
bination with a vertically-disposed spring 
actuated locking-bolt adapted to engage the 
drawer of the machine, a projection at upon 
said bolt, and a shaftly journaled in suitable 
bearings in the frame of the machine, of an 
angular arm t rigidly secured on said shaft 
and adapted to engage the projection on said 
bolt, a pin or stop (t' on a prolongation of the 
arm t, a catch b' to engage said pin or stop, 
and means for releasing said catch, substan 
tially as described. 
WILLIAMI J. BUSSE. 
Witnesses: 
M. E. SHIELDS, 
CHAS. B. BOWEN. 
75 
95 
OO 
I IO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584404.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. RIGHTMIRE, 
CAR COUPLING, 
No. 584,404. 
Patented June l5, 1897, 
 
 
 
 
  
WITNESSES : 
<-2-careg 
A 6-6-6-ee, 
 
N 
sy 
A. 
Ps 3. 
3 
H-3 
e 
BY 
74.7 caf/zzalezre 
a /372A - 
INVENTOR 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A. RIGHTMIRE, OF TULLAIOMA, TENNESSEE. 
CARs COUPNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,404, dated June 15, 1897. 
Application filed February 19, 1897, Serial No. 624,166, (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
To (t/l, it'? O7) if 72Cl2/ concert: 
Beit known that I, JAMES A. RIGHTMIRE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Tul 
lahoma, in the county of Coffee and State of 
Tennessee, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Car-Couplers; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
a car-coupler of a very simple but strong con 
struction which can be easily manipulated 
and which will serve to positively operate to 
couple the car. 
My invention also seeks to provide a simple 
car-coupling mechanism in which the coup 
ling-head and link-securer are so arranged 
that the draw-heads will readily become un 
coupled in case of a wreck. 
With other objects in view, which will here 
inafter appear, my invention consists in a 
coupler embodying the peculiar combination 
and novel arrangement of parts, such as will 
be first described in detail and then be spe 
cifically pointed out in the appended claims, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my car 
coupler, the link-holder pin being shown set 
to its elevated position. Fig. 2 illustrates two 
draw-heads constructed in accordance with 
my invention in the act of coupling. Fig. 3 
is a plan view of one of the draw-heads, and 
Fig. 4 is a transverse section taken on the line 
4 4 of Fig. 2. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
in which like numerals indicate like parts in 
all the figures, 1 indicates the draw-head, 
which has a raised portion 2, the rear end of 
which joins the usual abutment, and a rear 
wardly - extending member 20, held on the 
usual pendent strap or guide 9 and provided 
with the usual buffer-spring devices 22, as 
shown. 
The raised portion 2 has its front end open 
and its side walls 3 extended diverging for 
ward to provide a guide and seat Way for the 
end of the link 16 when the same passes up 
5c and over the inclined coupling-hook 7 on the 
35 
45 
upper front end of the draw-head, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 1. 
8 indicates an elongated vertical opening in 
the draw-head for the passage of the coupling 
pin or link-securer 10, which is in the nature 
of a gravity drop member, in practice of suit 
able Weight so as to retain its seat when in a 
dropped or coupled position. 
The pin 10 has an undercut or shoulder por 
tion 14 and an inclined front edge 15, so that 
when raised to its uncoupled position such 
shoulder will readily seat on the inclined seat 
or link end of recess 4, as clearly shown in 
Fig. 2, such pin 10 also having shoulders 11 
to engage the top of the draw-head and a for 
Wardly-projecting member or nose 12, having 
a recess or seat 13, whereby when the pin is 
to its dropped position the said nose will have 
its bifurcated or recessed end to project over 
the edges of the coupling member 7. (See 
Fig. 4.) The draw-head is also provided with 
the usual link-recess 6 and pin-opening 5 for 
the ordinary link-and-pin-coupling members 
when it is to be coupled to a car equipped with 
only ordinary link-and-pin devices. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
it is thought the advantages and operation of 
my invention will be readily understood. 
When it is desired to couple the cars, the 
pin at one side is set in the position shown in 
Fig. 1 and at the right in Fig. 2, the inclined 
or undercut portion 14 and the curved front 
edge 15 serving to keep itin a vertical position. 
The link held by the opposite draw-head 
will rise up the inclined coupling member 7 
in front of it, and as it passes over it engage 
the pin 10, dislodge it, and then it will drop 
by gravity to the position shown at the left of 
Fig. 2, its nose 12 forming a stop to prevent 
the link end accidentally jumping up over the 
member 7, such member in practice having 
its rear or coupling shoulder made inclined 
to form a more positive coupling. 
While I have not shown it, it is manifest 
that suitable lift devices adapted to be at 
tached to the pins 10, operated from the sides 
of the car or the top, may be provided, it be 
ing also understood that the pins and the link 
may be lifted to an uncoupled position by 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOC 
 
2 
n 
584,404 
tion 4 to the rear of member 7 and an elon 
gated slot 8, said head having a raised por 
tion 2 provided with diverging front walls 3 
forming side Walls for the depressed portion 4, 
of the link 16, and the gravity-pin 10, said 
pin having a head portion provided with a 
nose adapted to project over the rear of the 
member 7 and an undercut seat 14 all being 
arranged substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES A. RIGHTMIRE, 
Witnesses: 
J. W. SCOTT, 
J. W. GILLESPIE. 
suitable hand lever devices without requiring 
the operator to go between the cars. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The combination with the draw-head 
having an inclined coupling-lug, on its top 
face, and an elongated vertical slot 8, of the 
gravity-pin 10 having a head 11 provided with 
a nose or projecting member 12 having a re 
ceSS 13, and an undercut or seat portion 14 
Said draw-head having a shoulder which the 
seat 14 engages all arranged substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. The combination with the draw - head 
having a coupling member 7 provided with an 
inclined upper face, a seat or depressed por 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584504.txt	(No Model.) 
F. W. HAHN, 
EASTIC TREAD HORSE SHOE, 
 
No. 584,504, 
Patented June 15, 1897. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK. W. HAHN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
EAST C-T READ HORSES HO E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,504, dated June 15, 1897. 
Application filed December 21, 1896, Serial No. 616,45l. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all vilon, it indi/ concern. 
Be it known that I, FREDERICK. W. HAHN, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of the city, county, and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Elastic-Tread Horseshoes, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to enlarge 
the tread-Wearing surface of a horseshoe and 
preserve the toe-calk. 
The invention consists in an inner calk op 
posite the toe-calk and laps or staples to hold 
in the elastic packing. 
Figure 1 represents the under side of the 
shoe with part of the elastic material in place. 
Fig. 2 is a cross-section of Fig. 1 on line aca 
before the lap or staple is bent or the pack 
ing E is in place. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section of 
Fig. 1 on line XX. Fig. 4 is a modification 
of the finger A'. Fig. 5 is a cross-section of 
Fig. 6 on line XX*. Fig. 6 is a modification 
of the shoe, and Fig. 7 represents a cross-sec 
tion of Fig. 6 on line XX8. 
A in the several figures represents a cast 
or struck-up horseshoe-frame having nail 
flanges A and nail-holes A*. A in the vari 
ous figures is a channel for receiving the pack 
ing E, formed by the two right-angled flanges 
A and A'. The inner flange A' is provided 
with lugs A on its lower edge, which are bent 
over onto the elastic packing E, as shown at 
A, Figs. 1, 5, and 6, the flanges A, forming 
the outer wall of the channel, being provided 
with recesses A and merge into the broad 
callk B at the toe of the shoe, as shown in 
Fig. 1, the calk B being also provided with a 
recess A. 
That the packing E may not stub out or its 
free ends become loose the center and heel 
lugs A, Figs. 1 and 2, are provided with fin 
gers A', which are bent or turned over until 
their free ends enter the recesses A, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 3. 
In the use of malleable-iron shoes it has 
been found that the front part wears out much 
faster than the heel. To obviate this, I have 
formed an inner tread-step C, as shown in 
the several figures, which in the ordinary step 
ping of the horse saves the calk B and keeps 
the horse's feet level, thereby avoiding strain 
ing the muscles of the legs. 
That the lugs A opposite the tread C may 
. 
be free from the said tread a groove C' is 
formed between the lugs and tread, as shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 6. By this plan the base 
of the lugs are not readily worn off. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 6 there 
are two channels A", one upon each side of 
the shoe, leaving a central space for the calk 
B, tread-step C, and a web A, Fig. 7, unit 
ing the said calk, tread, and channel-walls. 
By this plan the shoe is made more durable. 
In Fig. 4 a loop A' is cast integral with the 
shoe in place of the finger A, Fig. 3. The 
recesses C and A' prevent the loop from be 
ing worn off, as the base of the loop is below 
the lower surface of the tread C and calk B. 
It is apparent that I may force a staple into 
the recesses C' and A' by dispensing with 
the loop A" and accomplish the same pur 
OSe. 
p If found desirable, I may V or corrugate the 
tread C. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. A horseshoe-frame having flanges A and 
A', a calk supported by and uniting the 
flanges A, the said calk having a recess A10 
for receiving the finger A', in combination 
with the elastic packing E, as and for the 
purpose described. 
2. A horseshoe-frame having flange A* pro 
vided with finger A' and lugs. A constructed 
to be bent over and retain the packing E, the 
flanges A, and a calk supported by and unit 
ing the flanges A, the said calk having a re 
cess A", incombination with the elastic pack 
ing E, as and for the purpose described. 
3. A horseshoe-frame having tread C, 
flanges A and A', and a calk supported by 
and uniting the flanges A, in combination 
with the elastic packing E, as and for the pur 
pose described. 
4. A horseshoe-frame having tread C, 
groove C', flanges A and A', and a calk sup 
ported by and uniting the flanges A, in com 
bination with the packing E, as and for the 
purpose described. . 
5. A horseshoe-frame having tread C, re 
cesses C', flanges A and A', and a calk pro 
vided with recess A and supported by the 
flanges A, and packing E, as and for the pur 
pose described. 
95 
Ox 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
584,504 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 15th day of Decem 
ber, 1896. 
FREDERICK. W. HAHN. 
Witnesses: 
E. T. THOMAS, 
HARRY S. WARSAWSKI. 
6. A horseshoe-frame having flanges A8 pro 
vided with recesses A, flange A' having fin 
ger A', and a calk B supported by and unit 
ing the flanges A, in combination with the 
5 elastic packing E, as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584604.txt	(No Model.) 
W. S. RICHARDSON, 
FASTENER FOR GARMENTs, SUSPENDERs, &c. 
No. 584,604. 
Patented June 15, 1897. 
  
 
s S 3 
V 
S 
 
27 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. S. RICHARDSON, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE BALL AND SOCKET FASTENER COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE AND 
NASI IUA, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
FASTENER FOR GAR MENTS, SUSPENDERS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,604, dated June 15, 1897. 
Application filed August 15, 1896, Serial No. 602,920, (No model.) 
55 
75 
95 
5 
IO 
25 
To ali, whon, it notif conce77: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. S. RICHARD 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Fasteners for Garments, 
Suspenders, and Similar Uses, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, leference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming a part of this specifica 
tion, in explaining its nature. 
The invention is an improvement upon 
that described in my application for Letters 
Patent of the United States executed of even 
date herewith; and it relates especially to the 
construction of the fastener whereby the part 
which holds the ball instead of having its 
outer end integral is divided at that point 
and connected by an independent connection, 
and whereby also the said part when integral 
With a loop-suspender or other frame has an 
upper bar or section which is continuous. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 represents my 
invention in elevation with the loop a re 
moved. Fig. 2 is a similar view showing the 
loop in place. Fig. 3 is a view of my inven 
tion attached to a suspender and having the 
ball of the suspender-end engaged with it. 
Fig. 4 is a view of my fastener attached to a 
Suspender, showing also the ball of the sus 
pender-end. Fig. 5 is a section on the line 
acac of Fig. 3. 
A represents the part of the fastener adapt 
ed to receive and hold a ball. It is made of 
Wire, has the curved yielding sides C. a', and 
at One end the sections Cl* C, which are con 
nected with each other by an integral section 
Ca", which may constitute a bar of a metal 
loop or a loop-buckle or other frame. The 
outer ends or sections a dare not integral, 
but are connected by a metal binding or 
loop Ct. These ends preferably are extended 
OltWard, as represented in Fig. 5, and the 
metal loop or binding unites them and limits 
the extent of their out Ward movement-that 
is, the ends are free to be moved apart from 
each other slightly in the loop or binding in 
order that the sides C. C may readily open 
and yield while a connection is being estab 
lished with the ball member. This construc 
tion permits the ends a a to be brought 
closely together and act as a bar against 
which the neck of the ball is drawn, and this 
bar may be reinforced by the metal loop or 
binding-piece a. It also enables the bar a 
to be made integral or in one piece. The 
sections act at a may be bent at any de 
sired angle to the sides C. C. for the purpose 
of forming legs or supports for the same to 
elevate the socket-entrance a, or for any other 
purpose. 
I prefer to make the fastener of one piece 
of wire, which is shaped or bent to form a bar 
or connection between the sections a C as 
well as the sections act, said sides C. C.", and 
the ends a? a, the said ends being the ends 
of the Wire length. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. In a fastener of the character specified, 
a ball-holder made of wire having the sides 
a, a forming a ball-entrance a, the sections 
a, a connected together, the ends a, a and 
a metal loop or connection a connecting said 
ends. 
2. In a fastener of the character specified, 
the yielding sides a, a, the sections C, a, ex 
tending therefrom connected with each other 
by an integral connection, the free ends a, 
a' and a loop or connection a in which said 
ends are free to be slightly moved from each 
other, as and for the purposes described. 
3. In a fastener of the character specified, 
the sections a, a connected with each other, 
the sides C, a forming the socket-entrance a, 
the ends C, a bent outwardly and a loop or 
metal connection C. extending about said out 
Wardly-bent ends. 
4. In a fastener of the character specified, 
the sections Ct, C' shaped to form an entrance 
a for a ball, the ends a, a, the metal loop 
or connection a' attaching the ends together, 
the sections a, a connected together by an 
integral extension in the form of a bar or 
frame substantially as described. 
WILLIAM. S. RICHARDSON. 
Witnesses: 
F. F. RAY MOND, 2d, 
J. M. DOLAN. 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584704.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 584,704. 
J. S. RAWORTH, 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
5 Sheets 
Sheet . 
Patented June 15, 1897, 
?? 
 
gz.aeg???????????? 
?? 
?????? 
2,2,2,2,2,2 
2. 
2 
2 SAYAN 
Sv 
& 
NS 
N 
2 
vaevae 
ZZZZZZZZzzzZZZZZZZZZZ 
THE Mor:RIS PETERS ty, phot ().i.t TMO, WASH NaTON. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
J. S. RAWORTH, 
STEAM. ENGINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 584,704. 
Patented June 15, 1897. 
4??? 
| 
Z 
??? 
f 
6 
A 
? 
? 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 584,704. 
J. S. RAWORTH, 
STEAM. ENGINE 
5. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented June l5, 1897. 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
AZ 
s 
i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
LUT 
zzzzzzzz2 
 
"oris PETERs co, Photo-Litho, washingto 
(No Model.) 
J. S. RAWORTH, 
STEAM ENGINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 584,704, 
Patented June 15, 1897, 
S ?? 
| 
NN 
 
N 
al 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
s 
s 
 
 
S 
? 
S 
the Norris Peters cc, photo.tir.o. wastors. p. c. 
 
g) 
 
TSN 
Ss 
Z 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN SMITH RAWORTH, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
STEAM - ENGIN E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,704, dated June 15, 1897. 
Application filed September 23, 1895, Serial No. 563,374. (No model.) Patented in Spain January 2, 1895, No. 18,152; in Eng 
land March 1, 1895, No. 4,442, and July 9, 1895, No. 24,751: in France July 9, 1895, No. 248,768 in Belgium July 22, 
1895, No, li,655; in Germany August 11, 1895, No. 86,408 in Switzerland September 6, 1895, No, lll63; in Hungary 
October 27, 1895, No, 4,023; in Austria November 30, 1895, No. 4,571 in New Zealand December 10, 1895, No, 8,137; 
in Victoria December 11, 1895, No. 12,732 in Queensland December 12, 1895, Nd, 3,207 in West Australia December 12, 
l895, No, 787 in New South Wales December 14, 1895, No. 6,270, and in Italy December 31, 1895, LXXIX, 219, 
To all, 7th on, it in city concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN SMITH RAWORTH, 
a Subject of the Queen of Great Britain and 
Ireland, residing at Streatham, London, in 
the county of Surrey, England, have invented 
Improvements in Steam-Engines, of which 
the following is a specification, and for which 
patents have been granted in other countries 
as follows: Great Britain, No. 4,442, dated 
March 1, 1895, and No. 24,751, dated July 9, 
1895; France, No. 248,768, dated July 9, 1895; 
Belgium, No. 116,655, dated July 22, 1895; 
Austria, No. 4,571, dated November 30, 1895; 
Hungary, No. 4,023, dated October 27, 1895; 
Germany, No. 86,408, dated August 11, 1895; 
Switzerland, No. 11,163, dated September 6, 
1895; Spain, No. 18,152, dated January 2, 
1895; Victoria, No. 12,732, dated December 
11, 1895; Queensland, No. 3,207, dated De 
cember 12, 1895; New Zealand, No. 8,137, 
dated December 10, 1895; West Australia, 
No. 787, dated December 12, 1895; New South 
Wales, No. 6,270, dated December 14, 1895, 
and in Italy, Reg. Att., Vol. LXXIX, No. 219, 
dated December 31, 1895. 
My invention has reference to improve 
ments in steam-engines in which two or more 
cylinders are used in tandem. According 
thereto the cylinders are placed one above 
the other or one in front of the other, accord 
ing as the engine is vertical or horizontal, 
and the valves are placed between the adja 
cent ends of the cylinders-that is to say, in 
compound engines the valves would be placed 
between the high-pressure and low-pressure 
cylinders, and in the case of a triple-expan 
sion engine they would be placed between the 
adjacent ends of the several cylinders. By 
this means the clearances in the ports and 
passages are reduced to a minimum. I pre 
fer to use valves of the well-known Corliss 
type, but similar results can be obtained with 
more or less efficiency with other forms of 
valves. 
Compound engines constructed in accord 
ance with my invention are double-acting as 
regards the forces transmitted by the piston 
rod, but are single-acting in each cylinder 
that is to say, the high-pressure steam acts 
upon the under side of the high-pressure pis 
ton and the expanded steam acts upon the 
upper side of the low-pressure piston in a ver 
ical engine and upon the corresponding sides 
in a horizontal engine. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows, partly in vertical section on the line 
A B of Fig. 2 and partly in elevation, a com 
pound vertical steam - engine constructed 
according to this invention. Fig. 2 shows 
the engine in elevation, and Fig. 3 is a sec 
tional view at right angles to Fig. 1. 
Figs. 
4 and 5 are sections through the valve-box 
om the lines C D and E F, respectively, of 
Fig. 3, the valves and their driving mechan 
ism being omitted. Figs. 6 to 10, inclusive, 
are vertical sections illustrating cylinders 
and valve arrangements according to this in 
vention for engines of various types. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the high 
pressure steam enters through the end of the 
valve-chamber d from the branch d" and is 
admitted at suitable intervals by the valve g, 
vibrating on its axis, through the short di 
rect port d' to the high-pressure cylinder a, 
which is surrounded by a live-steam jacket 
'. When the high-pressure piston arrives 
 CU. 
at the top of its stroke, it passes a ring of 
port-holes a, by means of which equilibrium 
is established between the steam-pressures in 
the cylinder a and the receiver l, which is in 
communication by means of the ports l l with 
a chamber or pocket l', formed in a partition 
or valve-box arranged between the adjacent 
inner ends of the cylinders, and in which the 
valve-chambers d and e are also formed, Figs. 
1, 3, 4, and 5. The high-pressure piston hav 
ing now arrived, as described, at the top of 
its stroke and the high-pressure steam-port 
d' having been previously closed, the low-pres 
sure oscillating valve h will have commenced 
to open a passage through valve-chamber e 
and short direct ports e'e' between the high 
pressure cylinder a and the low-pressure cyl 
inder b, and also to open passages through 
I. ? 
15 
35 
45 
 
?? 
75 
8. 
9o 
2 ? 
35 
2 
584,704 
the said valve-chamber e and the ports l, e', 
and e between the receiver and the inner 
end of each cylinder, and each of these pas 
sages will remain open until the point of cut 
off is reached, say one-half to three-quarters 
of the stroke, when the passage e' to the low 
pressure cylinder will be closed and the steam 
remaining in the high-pressure cylinder will 
pass into the receiver l l through the ports l, 
Figs. 4 and 5, which remain open to the high 
pressure cylinder until the valve h closes for 
compression. 
The low-pressure piston in on arriving at 
the bottom of its stroke passes a ring of port 
holes b', which allow the water and steam to 
pass out into the exhaust-chamber lic, from 
which an outlet is provided at '. On the up 
or return stroke of the low-pressure piston n. 
an outlet for the steam remaining above the 
piston is provided through the pipe i by the 
exhaust-cavity of the valve h covering the 
two ports ee. 
The valves g and h are driven by levers 
fixed to the ends of their spindles, from ec 
centrics and rods, as shown in the drawings, 
or by any other Well-known method suitable 
for the size and speed of the engine. 
The method of governing shown in Figs. 2 
and 3 is by means of a centrifugal governor 
carried by the crank-shaft and arranged to 
vary the throw of the eccentric used for driv 
ing the Valve g, but an ordinary throttle 
valve acting upon the steam-inlet may be 
used, if required. 
During the downstroke of the high-pres 
sure piston steam from the receiver l obtains 
access to the top side of the piston m. In 
non-condensing engines this communication 
may be constant through holes in the cover 
a', but in condensing-engines it is better to 
make it intermittent through the port-holes 
a', as shown. 
The steam-jacket a' is supplied with live 
steam through a small port a, communicat 
ing with the valve-chamber d, and the con- || 
densed water is collected at each stroke in a 
small pocket in the low-pressure valve h, be 
ing fed thereto by a similar port to a, and 
by the motion of the valve carried round and 
discharged through a small port leading into 
the exhaust-cavity e. These ports and the 
corresponding pocket in the valve are merely 
drilled holes and are too small to be visible 
in the drawings. A relief-valve l is placed 
in the head of the low-pressure cylinder to 
discharge Water or excessive steam-pressure 
to the receiver ll. 
The cylinders are carried on a hollow trun 
cated conical framet, which for small engines 
may be cast in One piece, but for large en 
gines may be built up in any convenient and 
suitable manner. This frame, which is pro 
vided with large openings for examination 
and repair of the engine, is closed in by a 
sheet-metalapront, which retains the oil and 
returns it to the crank-chamber ac, which 
forms part of the base-plate upon which the 
engine is built. 
The crank-shaft bearings, which are of or 
dinary construction, are held down by Wedge 
pieces v v' and tightening-screws v. The 
upper wedge-piece v'slides in horizontal Slots 
cut in the sides of the bearing-seat. The lu 
brication is effected by a small pump which 
draws oil from the crank-chamber and deliv 
ers it to the valve-spindle bearings and joints 
at f, whence it descends by the hollow eccen 
tric-rods to the eccentrics and by Small pipes 
to the low-pressure gland S, and thence to 
the cross-head pin and guide. 
Engines of various types, Vertical, horizon 
tal, or inclined, can be constructed with cyl 
inders arranged in tandem with Valves placed 
between them in the manner above set forth. 
Figs. 6 to 10, inclusive, are vertical sec 
tions illustrating the cylinder and valve ar 
rangements of Several constructions. 
Fig. 6 shows parts of a simple engine hav 
ing two single-acting high-pressure pistons 
m m', to the inner ends of which steam is al 
ternately admitted from the valve-chamber 
d through short direct ports d' d' by the cut 
off valve g, the exhaust-valve h serving to 
place each cylinder in turn in communica 
tion with the exhaust-pipe through the 
valve-chamber e. In this case the outer ends 
of the cylinders a. a' are closed, so that the 
same fluidfor example, air-r?mains con 
stantly therein, or they may have open ends 
communicating with the exhaust-pipe, as 
shown on the right-hand side of Fig. 9. The 
valve-chambers are formed in a partition ar 
ranged between the inner ends of the cylin 
ders, as in the arrangement show n in Figs, 1 
to 5, inclusive, but there is no receiver in 
this case. 
Fig. 7 shows parts of the arrangement rep 
resented in Figs. 1 to 5, inclusive, and is 
placed here in juxtaposition to the others for 
the purpose of facilitating comparison. 
Fig. 8 shows parts of a compound engine 
consisting of two simple engines, of which the 
left hand one luas tWo high-pressure pistons 
ni n', as in Fig. 6, and exhausts into the right 
handone, which finally exhausts into the pipe 
i, the two high-pressure cylinders a. a' being 
steam-jacketed and provided with receivers 
ill', like the cylinder a in Fig. 7, and the outer 
ends of the two low-pressure cylinders bb be 
ing in communication with the exhaust-pipei, 
like the outer end of the cylinderb in Fig. 7. 
In this arrangement while high-pressure 
steam is being admitted into and is expand 
ing in cylinder a, that which has already done 
duty in cylinder a' is permitted by the valve 
h of the high-pressure engine to pass partly 
into the valve-chamber d of the low-pressure 
engine and thence by valve g therein to the 
low-pressure cylinder b' and partly to the re 
ceiver l of the cylinder a', the steam that has 
already done duty in cylinderb escaping past 
the valve h of the low-pressure engine to the 
7 ? 
75 
95 
?? ? 
IO 
II 5 
45 
55 
 
584,704 
3. 
- 
exhaust '. Similarl y When high-pressure 
steam is admitted to the cylinder a that which 
has done duty in cylinder C. passes partly to 
the receiver l of that cylinder and partly to 
the cylinder b, while that in cylinder b' will 
be passing to the exhaust . . 
Fig. 9 shows parts of a triple-expansion en 
gine composed of a compound engine con 
structed and operating like that shown in Figs. 
1 to 5, inclusive, exhausting into a simple en 
gine like that shown at the right-hand side of 
Fig. 8. 
Fig. 10 shows parts of a quadruple-expan 
sion engine consisting of two compound en 
gines constructed and operating like that 
shown in Figs. 1 to 5, inclusive, arranged in 
Series, the several pistons being of gradually 
increasing size. 
?- 
" 
r 
What I claim is- 
1. A compound steam-engine comprising 
high and low pressure cylinders arranged tan 
demWise, an interposed partition, two inde 
pendent valve-chambers formed in said par 
tition, the one being in communication with 
a steam-Supply and the other with an exhaust, 
a short direct passage through said partition 
from the inner end of the high-pressure cyl 
inder to the wave-chamber connected with 
the steam-supply and a short direct passage 
from the inner end of each of said cylinders 
to the other valve-chamber and in each valve 
chamber a valve, said valves being independ 
ent of each other and adapted the one to ad 
mit high-pressure steam into the high-pres 
sure cylinder at its inner end and the other 
to establish communication at the proper time 
between the high-pressure cylinder and the 
low-pressure cylinder and afterward between 
the low-pressure cylinder and the exhaust. 
2. A compound steam-engine comprising 
high and low pressure cylinders arranged 
tandem Wise, a receiver, communication be 
tween the receiver and the outer end of the 
high-pressure cylinder, a partition interposed 
between the two cylinders, a valve-chamber 
formed in Said partition and which is in com 
munication. With the supply of high-pressure 
steam and with the inner end of the high 
pressure cylinder, a valve adapted to control 
said communication, a second valve-chamber 
also formed in said partition independently 
of the other and which has communications 
between it and the inner end of the high-pres 
sure cylinder, the inner end of the low-pres 
sure cylinder, the receiver, and the exhaust, 
and an independent valve located in said last 
mentioned valve-chamber and adapted to, at 
the proper time, place the inner end of the 
high - pressure cylinder in communication 
with the low-pressure cylinder and for a time 
to place the inner ends of both these cylin 
diers in communication with the receiver and 
Subsequently to close the communication be 
tween the low-pressure cylinder and the re 
ceiver and to open communication between 
the low-pressure cylinder and the exhaust. 
3. A steam-engine comprising two cylinders 
arranged tandemWise, a partition arranged 
between the adjacent ends of said cylin 
ders and formedWithindependent cylindrical 
valve-chambers having their axes at right 
angles to those of said cylinders and with short 
direct passages connecting the inner ends of 
said cylinders with said valve-chambers, in 
dependent oscillating cylindrical steam and 
exhaust valves located within said valve 
chambers and adapted to control the commu 
nication between the same and the adjacent 
ends of the said cylinders, and means for op 
erating said valves, substantially as herein de 
Scribed. 
4. In a steam engine, two cylinders ar 
ranged tandem Wise, a partition arranged be 
tween and transversely to the adjacent ends 
of said cylinder and formed with independ 
ent cylindrical valve-chambers having their 
axes at right angles to those of said cylinders, 
one of Said valve-chambers being in commu 
nication with the steam-supply and the other 
s with an exhaust, short direct passages through 
said partition from the inner end of each of 
said cylinders to each Valve-chamber and a 
valve in each of said chambers, said valves 
being independent of each other and adapted 
the one to admit steam to the inner end of 
each cylinder alternately and the other to 
place the inner end of each cylinder alter 
nately in communication with the exhaust. 
5. A steam-engine comprising two cylinders 
arranged tandemWise, a partition arranged 
between and transversely to the adjacent 
ends of said cylinders and formed with inde 
pendent cylindrical steam and exhaust valve 
chambers having their axes at right angles 
to those of said cylinders, independent cylin 
drical cut-off and exhaust Valves located in 
said chambers, short direct passages connect 
ing each valve-chamber with the inner ends of 
the two cylinders, and a passage connecting 
the exhaust-valve chamber With an exhaust 
pipe, said passages being arranged to be con 
trolled by the corresponding valves, substan 
tially as described. 
6. A compound single-acting steam-engine 
comprising a high-pressure cylinder, a low 
pressure cylinder, a partition arranged be 
tween the adjacent ends of said cylinders and 
formed with separate cylindrical valve-cham 
bers one of which is connected with the in 
ner end of the high-pressure cylinder and 
the other with the inner end of each cylin 
der, anindependent cylindricalvalve adapted 
to control the passage of high-pressure steam 
from one Valve-chamber to the inner end of 
the high-pressure cylinder, an independent 
cylindrical valve adapted to control the pas 
sage of steam from the inner end of the high 
pressure cylinder to the corresponding end 
of the low-pressure cylinder and from the 
latter cylinder to the exhaust, and means for 
oscillating said valves, substantially as herein 
described. 
7. A compound single-acting engine com 
prising a high-pressure cylinder and a low 
95 
OO 
II. ? 
I I5 
2 
I25 
5 
 
4 
. 
584,704 
pressure cylinder arranged tandemwise, a 
partition located between the adjacent ends 
of said cylinders and formed with two inde 
pendent valve-chambers one of which com 
municates through a short direct port with 
the high-pressure cylinder and the other 
through short direct ports with both cylin 
ders, independent cylindrical valves located 
within said chambers and arranged to con 
trol said ports and a receiver formed partly 
by a chamber in said partition and partly by 
a casing surrounding said high-pressure cyl 
inder, said receiver being adapted to com 
municate with the outer end of the high 
pressure cylinder through holes in the wall 
thereof and with the inner end of each cylin 
der through ports controlled by one of said 
valves, substantially as herein described for 
the purpose specified. 
8. A steam-engine comprising a high-pres 
sure cylinder a having ports Ct' in the outer 
end portion of its Wall, a low-pressure cylin 
der barranged in tandem with said cylinder 
C and formed with exit-ports h" near its outer 
end, connected pistons working in said cyl 
inders, a partition arranged between said 
cylinders and formed with cylindrical valve 
chambers d and e, ports d", e', e, e and b, 
exhaust-cavity e and pockets b a receiver l 
surrounding said high-pressure cylinder and 
in communication with said ports a and with 
said pockets, a cylindrical high-pressure 
valveg controlling said port d', a cylindrical 
low-pressure valve h controlling said ports 
e', e, e, and b, means for Oscillating each of 
said valves, and an exhaust-pipe communi 
cating with said exhaust-cavity e and ports 
b', substantially as described for the purpose 
specified. 
9. A single-acting compound steam-engine 
comprising a high-pressure cylinder C having 
a steam-jacket a', perforations a, and pis 
ton m, a low-pressure cylinder b arranged 
tandemwise with regard to said cylinder a 
and provided with a row of perforations b', 
and a piston ?), connected to Said piston. ???, 
and to the crank-shaft of the engine, a valve 
box located between the adjacent ends of 
said cylinders and provided with steam 
chambers d and e, pockets land steam-ports 
a', d', e, e, e, l, and e, and a relief-valve 
l, and oscillating valve g arranged in cham 
ber d and adapted to control port d", an os 
cillating valve h arranged in chamber e and 
adapted to control ports e', e, e, and l, 
means for operating said valves, a steam-re 
ceiver il surrounding said high-pressure cyl 
inder and communicating with said pockets l' 
i by ports l', an exhaust-chamber k into which 
the perforated lower or outer end of said cyl- ( 
inder b extends, and an exhaust-pipe in com 
munication with said port e and chamber 
k, all substantially as herein described for 
the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my ( 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JOHN SMITH RAW ORTE. 
Witnesses: 
EDMUND S. SNEWEN, 
WM. O. BROWN. 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584804.txt	(No Model ) 
No. 584,804. 
- 
H. D. WINTON 
SUPPORT FOR LAWN SPRINKLERs, 
Patented June 22, 1897. 
 
a. 
  
Hills 
H 
re 
Waa a law. 
itlesses 
3-vvue-veo 
/722,422 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY D. WINTON, OF WELLESLEY, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
HERSEY MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SUPPORT FOR LAWN-SPRINKLERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,804, dated June 22, 1897. 
Application filed March 5, 1897, Serial No. 626,029, (No model.) 
25 other figures. 
To all, whom it may concern. " 
Beit known that I, HENRY D.WINTON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Welles 
ley, Norfolk county, State of Massachusetts, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Supports for Lawn-Sprinklers, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to sleds or supports 
for lawn-sprinklers, and has for its object to 
Io provide a simple, cheap, and effective sled 
which is adapted to be extended to support 
the sprinkler and to be folded for the pur 
pose of compactness in transportation and 
storage; and to these ends my invention con 
I5 sists in a sled embodying the features of con 
struction and arrangement substantially as 
hereinafter more particularly pointed out. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
a perspective view of one embodiment of my 
2O invention. Fig. 2 is an end view of the same, 
showing the parts folded. Fig. 3 is an end 
view showing the parts modified and extend 
ed; and Fig. 4 is a side view showing the sled 
Supporting a T instead of an elbow, as in the 
In the use of sprinklers, especially those 
adapted for lawns and the like, it is desirable 
to have some sort of a support to maintain 
the sprinkler in proper position, and it is 
3o often convenient to have this support in a 
form that can be moved readily from one po 
sition to another when in use without danger 
of the operator getting wet, and it is further 
desirable that these supports or sleds should 
35 be so made that they can be folded for pack 
ing in transportation or storage, and in the 
construction hereinafter described I have 
provided for all these results and at the same 
time have made a simple, cheap, and effect 
Referring to the drawings, and more espe 
cially to Figs. 1 and 2, A represents an elbow 
joint having a coupling end a to receive the 
hose and a coupling a to receive any desired 
45 spraying device. Arranged adjacent the 
coupling portion a', and preferably forming 
a part of the elbow, is a plate B. Adjust 
ably connected to this plate in any suitable 
way are the runners or feet C, and these are 
4o ive sled or support. 
In order to limit the movements of the run- 7o 
shown in the present instance as consisting 5o 
of spring metal bent in the proper form to 
furnish a substantial base and having their 
ends adjustably connected to the plate B, 
and as a convenient Way of connecting them 
the plate is provided with sockets b, receiv- 55 
ing the bent ends c of the runners C. Other 
means of adjustably attaching the runners 
to the plate will readily suggest themselves 
to those skilled in the art, but those shown 
are simple and effective. The runners being 6o 
of spring material are bent, so that there is 
a tendency to retain the ends c in the Sockets 
b of the plate. 
It will be obvious that instead of forming 
the runners or feet C of spring-metal rods, 65 
as shown, they may be formed of thin plates 
of metal provided with openings to receive 
the elbow-joint when the runners are folded 
together. 
ners, some sort of stop devices are provided, 
and in the present instance I have shown the 
plate B as having an extension D, provided 
with shoulders d at the ends and preferably 
provided with a central shoulder d". The 75 
shoulders d are curved and bent at an angle 
to properly engage the runners when they 
are extended, as shown in Fig. 1, and in order 
to aid in maintaining the runners in proper 
position I provide the extension D with re-8o 
cesses d, arranged at an angle to receive the 
runners when they are in their extended po 
sition. The spring action of the runners 
tends to force the ends c into their sockets 
and into these recesses, so that they are prac-85 
tically locked in their extended position un 
der spring-pressure. When, however, it is 
desired to transport the sled, the runners are 
forced together to lie in the vertical plane of 
the elbow-joint, as shown in Fig. 2, the spring 90 
materiallyielding sufficiently to allow the por 
tions c to rise out of their recesses and rest 
upon the extension D adjacent the central 
shoulder d, where they will be held by fric 
tion due to their spring action. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown a modification in 
which the runners C are bent, as at C, to 
conform to and embrace the hose when in po 
95 
 
2 - 
584,804 
sition or attached to the elbow, and these 
bent arms permit the runners to be folded 
into the vertical plane of the elbow in close 
proximity to each other and embrace the 
hose. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown a modification ap 
plied to a T, and connected to the plate B 
is a cap E, which may be applied to one end 
of the T-joint, so as to practically form an 
elbow, or when it is removed a hose can be 
attached to both ends of the T and a num 
ber of sprinklers can be used in the same 
line of hose. 
While I have shown the runners as made 
of round metal, it is understood, of course, 
that they may be of other-shaped metal, hav 
ing their ends properly shaped to fit the sock 
ets in the plate, but I prefer to make them 
of a round wire or rod, as it is cheap and 
readily adapts itself for the purpose intended. 
While I have shown the plate B as made 
integral with the elbow or T, it is obvious that 
it can be made separate and screwed upon or 
otherwise attached to the elbow or . 
The runners extending laterally from the 
plate and bent substantially as shown fur 
nish a comparatively broad base for the sled, 
which is sufficient to maintain the sprinkler 
in proper position. 
What I claim is 
1. A sled for sprinklers comprising a plate, 
a joint, and runners pivotally connected to 
the plate and adapted to be folded together 
or extended laterally to form a base, substan 
tially as described. 
2. A sled for sprinklers comprising a plate, 
a joint, runners pivotally connected to the 
plate, and stops for the runners, the runners 
being arranged to fold together or to be ex 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
tended laterally to form a base for the sled, 
substantially as described. 
3. A sled for sprinklers, comprising a joint 
having formed integral there with a plate hav 
ing Sockets, the bent spring-metal runners 
having ends entering the sockets, and a stop 
having shoulders for limiting the movements 
of the runners, substantially as described. 
4. A sled for sprinklers, comprising a plate 
having sockets, and bent spring-metal run 
ners, the ends of which fit the sockets, the 
runners being curved to embrace the hose, 
substantially as described. 
5. A sled for sprinklers, comprising a plate 
having sockets, and bent spring-metal run 
ners, said runnel's being adapted by spring 
tension to press into and be held by recesses 
in said plate when extended laterally, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. A sled for sprinklers, comprising a plate 
having sockets, and bent spring-metal run 
ners, said runners being adapted by spring 
tension to be held in position against a cen 
tral stop on said plate when closed, substan 
tially as described. 
7. A sled for sprinklers, comprising an el 
bow having a coupling at each end and piv 
oted runners arranged upon opposite sides 
thereof, and adapted to be extended laterally 
form a base for the sled and to be folded to 
gether to lie in the vertical plane of the elbow, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
HENRY D. WINTON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. J. SMITH, 
W. T. KERSHAW. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US584904.txt	J. F. SWINNER TON, 
ROLLER BEARING, 
: 
Patented June 22, 1897. 
a 
7S 77 
Fig.1. 3 
B 
13 
l3 2. 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 584,904, 
% A3 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
%x 
13 
72 
S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
N 
 
 
 
 
S 
 
 
28)ibvicesco 
d& Z2-le-4 
3-vuovtov 
33 &ltov vicia 26 22 2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES F. SWINNERTON, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
ROLLER-BEARNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 584,904, dated June 22, 1897. 
Application filed September 3, 1896, Serial No. 604,701 (No model.) 
To all, whon, it inctly conce.7'72: 
Beit known that I, JAMES F. SWINNERTON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of St. Louis, in the State of Missouri, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Roller-Bearings, of which the fol 
lowing is such a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion as will enable any one skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming part of this specifica 
tion. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
an antifriction-bearing in which the weight is 
distributed over a large amount of surface, 
thus obviating the necessity of making the 
parts extremely hard, to do away with the 
necessity of adjusting the parts, and to make 
the bearings dust-proof without danger of 
bringing the metal parts of the bearing into 
sliding contact. 
My invention consists in the various novel 
features and details of construction set forth 
in the following specification, and pointed out 
in the claims affixed hereto. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate one form of bearing made in accordance 
with my invention, Figure I is a longitudinal 
section. Fig. 2 is a section on the line 22 of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a section on the line 33 of 
Fig. 1, and Figs. 4 and 5 are views of details. 
Like marks of reference refer to similar 
parts in the several views of the drawings. 
10 is the axle or shaft, on which are two 
flanges 11, Fig. 1. The flanges 11 are prefer 
ably formed integral with the axle 10, but, if 
so desired, may be made separate and secured 
to the axle in any suitable Way. Situated 
around the axle 10 and between the collars 11 
are a number of rollers 12, which are held in 
position around the axle 10, some distance 
apart and parallel to each other, by a roller 
cage 13. The roller-cage 13 is preferably about 
one-third the length of the rollers 12, and is 
formed in one piece or may be formed in two 
parts, which are secured together by screws 
or in any other suitable manner. The cen 
tral portion of each half of the roller-cage 13 
is cut away when made in halves, leaving only 
a thin connecting-strip 14 at each side, so that 
only a small portion at each end of the cage 
comes in contact with the rollers. The inte 
rior of the cage 13 is made larger than the axle 
10, as shown in Fig. 3, so as not to come in 
contact with the same and pass readily over 
the collars 11 when made in one piece. 
Surrounding each end of the rollers 12 and 
preferably extending about one-third of the 
length of the same is a roller-thimble 15, pro 
vided with an inwardly-extending flange 16. 
Surrounding the roller-thimble 15 is the outer 
shell or casing 17. Between the thimbles 15 
and the shell 17 is a sheet-metal cylinder 18. 
The cylinder 18 is especially adapted for use 
in the crank-shaft bearing of a bicycle, its 
object being to prevent borax, brazings, or 
filings from entering the bearing, and may be 
dispensed With when no brazing is to be done 
on the shell. At each end of the shell 17 is a 
Screw-cap 19, the opening in which for the 
passage of the axle 10 is a little larger than 
the collars 11 on said axle, so as not to come 
in contact with the same. Each of the screw 
caps 19 is provided with a washer 20, of felt 
or other similar yielding material, which bears 
against the collar 11 and thus renders the 
bearing dust-proof without causing any ap 
preciable amount of friction. 
As the rollers 12 come in contact with the 
axle 10 throughout their entire length and 
with the roller-thimbles 15 two-thirds of their 
length the weight is distributed over a large 
area and consequently the parts of the bear 
ing can be made comparatively soft, thus re 
ducing their cost. The roller-cage 13, by hold 
ing the rollers out of contact with each other, 
prevents friction between them. The spaces 
between the rollers also serve as receptacles 
for a large amount of oil or other lubricant, 
so that the bearing does not require frequent 
oiling. As there is no weight on the roller 
cage 13 there is no appreciable amount of fric 
tion between it and the rollers. 
While I have shown and described my bear 
ing in the form particularly adapted for the 
crank-shaft of a bicycle, it is obvious that it 
can be used in any place where an antifric 
tion-bearing is desired, and that it is imma 
terial whether the axle or the casing is the 
fixed part. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
1. In an antifriction -bearing, a suitable 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
IOC) 
 
2. 
584,904 
casing, removable roller-thimbles in each end 
of said casing, end caps for said casing se 
cured to the casing and holding said roller 
thimbles in place, an axle or shaft provided 
with flanges, antifriction-rollers around said 
axle or shaft and between said flanges, and a 
roller-cage between said roller-thimbles and 
holding said rollers out of contact. 
2. In an antifriction-bearing, a shaft or axle 
provided with flanges, rollers situated around 
said axle and between said flanges, roller 
thimbles at each end of said rollers, a shell 
or casing carrying said roller-thimbles, end 
O 
caps for said shell or casing, Washers of felt 
or other compressible material carried by said I5 
end caps and making contact with said flanges, 
and a roller-cage holding said rollers parallel 
and out of contact with each other. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto Set 
my hand and affixed my seal in the presence 2c 
of the two subscribing witnesses. 
JAAIES F, SWINNERTON, 
, s.) 
Witnesses: 
D. W. CARNES, 
J. D. ESTES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585004.txt	(No Model.) 
A. F., NORRIS. 
PIANO PEDAL, 
No. 585,004, 
Patented June 22, 1897, 
Cl e if 
C 
6, 
stills 
2 
(e 
S 
  
Q 
WITNESSES 
33. 
it 
INVENTO R 
4% f/2.7 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT F. NORRIS, OF BOSTON, MASSACIUSETTS, 
PAN. On 9 A. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters eatent No. 585,004, dated June 22, 1897. 
Application filed February 6, 1897, Serial No. 622,328, (No model.) 
55 
To all, Luhon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT F. NORRIs, of 
Boston, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Piano-Pedals, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention has for its object to provide 
improved means for mounting and support 
ing pedals of pianofortes and other instru 
ments; and it consists in the improvements 
which I shall now proceed to describe and 
claim. 
Of the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a rear 
perspective view of a piano-pedal enabodying 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a section on the line 
22 of Fig. 1, looking in the direction of the 
arrow. Fig. 3 represents a sectional view of 
a modification. 
The same letters and numerals of reference 
indicate the same parts in all the figures. 
In the drawings, a represents the part of a 
piano-frame which supports the pedal. c. 
b to represent upright standards between 
which the pedal-lever c is fulcrumed. The 
said standards are preferably formed on a 
base O', which is screwed to the support Cl, said 
base and standards constituting a bracket. 
The standards b b are provided near their 
upper portions with two pivots (ld, which are 
preferably screws having pointed or conical 
ends which fit into corresponding recesses 
formed in opposite edges of the pedal near 
its inner end. The said pivots, which screw 
into and through the standards b b, are pref 
erably provided with lock-nuts e e, bearing 
on the standards, as shown in the drawings. 
f represents a sheet-metal spring having 
one end riveted or otherwise firmly secured 
to the inner extremity of the pedal cand hav 
ing its other end secured to the support C. 
The spring is composed of a strip of suitably 
tempered sheet-steel or other suitable metal, 
having an end portion 1, attached to the pedal 
by screws or livets, and an end portion 3, at 
tached to the support Cl, the strip being bent 
between said portions to form a connecting 
portion 2, arranged to suitably offset the por 
tion 3 from the portion 1. The portions 2 
and 3 constitute a substantially -- shaped 
spring the operative part of which is located 
between the screws or rivets that attach the 
end portions of the spring to the pedal and 
support. The said .-shaped spring is al 
ranged to permit a free oscillation of the pedal 
on the pivots (ld and holds the pedal normally 
in its raised position, the spring yielding to 
permit the depression of the treadle. 
It will be seen that the rigid attachment of 
the ends of the spring to the pedal and Sup 
port enables it to act without rubbing contact 
with the pedal or with any other part, while 
the pivots (ld, rigidly supported by the stand 
ards b b, securely confine the pedal in the 
plane in which it is intended to oscillate and 
permit, the employment of a spring which is 
rigidly attached to the pedal and support, 
enabling said spiring to readily control the 
pedal. The pivots present comparatively 
frictionless bearings which are free from lia 
bility to creak when the pedal is worked. 
It is desirable to introduce a thin block or 
strip f between the lower end of the spring 
if and the support (t, so as to raise the lower 
portion of the said spring from its support 
and thus give the spring greater freedom of 
In OWellent. 
It will be seen from the foregoing descrip 
tion that my in proved pedal is noiseless in 
its operation, it being provided with antifric 
tion-pivots and with a particularly simple 
and noiseless spring. The bracket pivotally 
connected with the pedal and composed of a 
single casting or part adapted for attachment 
to the support C. and the spring riveted to the 
pedal and also adapted to be attached to the 
support enable the pedal to be installed and 
lmade operative by the act of screwing the 
bracket and spling to the support C. 
I do not limit myself to the particular form 
of spring here shown and may variously 
modify the same without departing from the 
spirit of my invention, the essential features 
of which are a spring connecting the pedal of 
a piano with a fixed Support, the Spring being 
attached positively to the framework and 
support and the pedal working on antific 
tion-pivots. 
In Fig. 3 I show a modified form of spring 
in which there is an upwardly-projecting neck 
5 between the part 1, which is attached to the 
pedal, and the downwardly-projecting part 2. 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
585,004 
This form gives greater elasticity than that 
shown in Fig. 1 and is preferable where only 
a light pressure is required. 
I claim 
11. The combination of a pedal, a bracket 
adapted for attachment to a Support and hav 
ing pivots engaged with the pedal, and an 
offset-spring attached at one end to the rear 
end of the pedal and having a portion thereof 
extended downwardly behind said rear end 
of the pedal, the free end of said spring being 
adapted for attachment to said support. 
2. The combination with the bracket, coln 
prising the two standards b b and the inte 
gral base-plate b', of the pedal pivotally con 
nected with said standards, and the L-shaped 
O 
spring having one end connected to the pedal 
adjacent to the pivotal point thereof and 
having the other end adapted to be attached 
to a suitable support, the intermediate por 
tion of the Spring being extended downwald 
behind the real end of the pedal, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 4th day of 
February, A. D. 1897. 
25 
AIBERT F. NORRIS. 
Witnesses: 
IIORACE l;ROWN, 
A. D. HARRISON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585104.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
KARL JEDLICIKA, OF BASLE, SWITZERLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE SOCIETY OF 
CHEMICAL INDUSTRY IN BASLE, OF SAME PLACE. 
GREEN TRAZO DYE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 585,104, dated June 22, 1897. 
- 
Application filed August 21, 1896, Serial No. 603,492, (Specimens.) 
To a ZZ whom it tually concert: 
Be it known that I, KARL, JEDLICKA, a citi 
Zen of the Swiss Republic, residing at Basle, 
Switzerland, have invented certain Improve 
5 ments in the Manufacture of Green Substan 
tive Cotton Dyestuffs, of which the following 
is a clear and complete specification. 
The present invention is based on the ob 
servation that the red monoa Zo coloring-mat 
Io tiers derived from one molecule of a diazoben 
zoic-acid compounds (chlorids or other salts 
of diazobenzoic acids and its ethers or amids) 
and one molecule of an amidonaphtholdisul 
fonic acid-as, for instance, amidonaphthol 
I5 disulfonic acid 1.8, 3.6.-produce valuable and 
successful green triazo dyestuffs when one 
molecule of the tetrazo derivative of a para 
diamidobase of the series of diphenyl-such, 
for example, as benzidin, tolidin, dianisi 
20 din, methylbenzidin, and ethoxybenzidin-is 
combined with one molecule of the said red 
monoazo coloring-matters and One molecule of 
a phenolic compound-such, for example, as 
phenol, orthocresol, metacresol, resorcin, and 
25 cresotinic acid. These triazo dyestuffs, which 
all contain three diazo groups, are all pow 
ders of bronze luster. They dye unmordanted 
cotton from dark green to yellowish green in 
an alkaline bath, also wool in an acid bath 
3o and on mordants of chromium. The prepa 
ration of these new tria Zo coloring-matters is 
preferably executed in three successive op 
erations, comprising, first, the production of 
thered monoazo coloring-matter derived from 
35 an amidonaphtholdisulfonic-acid and a diazo 
benzoic-acid compound; second, the combi 
nation of one molecule of the red monoazo 
coloring-matter thus obtained with one mole 
cule of the tetrazo derivative of a paradiamido 
4o base of the series of diphenyl, and, third, 
the combination of one molecule of the inter 
mediate product' thus formed with one mole 
cule of a phenolic compound. 
By way of example I will now describe the 
45 production of the dark-green triazo dyestuff 
derived from metadiazobenzoic acid, amido 
naphtholdisulfonic acid 1.8.3.6, tetrazodi 
tolyl, and phenol. 
I. Preparation of the n0200.30 coloring dye 
5o derived from metadia&oben2Oic acid and ami 
donaphtholdisulfo acid 1.8.3.6.-6.9 kilo 
grams meta-amidobenzoic acid are dissolved 
in about two hundred liters water, to which 
fifteen kilograms hydrochloric acid of thirty 
per cent. have been added, and diazotized by 55 
lmeans of 3.5 kilograms sodium nitrite at a 
temperature of 5 to 10 centigrade. The so 
lution of metadiazobenzoic acid thus obtained 
is poured into a solution of sixteen kilograms 
amidonaphtholdisulfonic acid 1.8; 3.6 and of 
2.7 kilograms of sodium carbonate in about 
two hundred liters water, care being taken to 
agitate and to cool the mixture. The product 
of reaction separates as brown-red flakes. The 
mixture is advantageously let stand for about 65 
ten hours for accomplishing the reaction. 
II. Preparation of the intermediate prod 
lct.-The mixture obtained as set forth un 
der I, and in which the primary monoazo col 
oring-matter is suspended, has first added to 7o 
it twenty kilograms of sodium carbonate, 
whereby an intense red-colored alkaline so 
lution of the monoa Zo coloring-matter is ob 
tained. This solution is cooled with ice to 
about 10 centigrade and then is mixed with 75 
the solution of tetrazoditolyl prepared in the 
known manner from 10.6 kilograms tolidin, 
care being taken to agitate the liquid. The 
intermediate product formed at the end of 
about one - half hour remains entirely dis- 8o 
solved. The solution has an intense black 
violet color. On adding common salt thereto 
the intermediate product may be precipitated 
in the form of black flakes, but its separation 
for further use is not necessary. 
III. Combination of one molecule of the in 
termediate product 
85 
with One molecule of phenol.-4.7 kilograms 
phenol are dissolved in water, which has 
added to it five kilograms of sodium carbon 
ate, and the alkaline solution of phenol thus 95 
obtained is mixed with the black-violet solu 
tion of the intermediate product obtained as 
set forth under II. The mixture is let stand 
for about twenty hours, after which it is heat 
ed to about 80 centigrade and the dyestuff 
precipitated with sea-salt. The precipitate is 
then collected and dried. The dyestuff is in 
OC 
2 
585,104 
O 
35 
45 
its dry state a powder of bronze luster, which 
is insoluble in alcohol, in ether, and in ben 
Zene and easily soluble in water with green 
Coloration. It dyes unmordanted cotton in 
an alkaline bath in intense green tints, fast 
to light and especially to alkalies. Its solu 
tion in concentrated sulfuric acid is dirty 
blue violet. By adding an acid to its aque 
ous Solution the dyestuff acid is precipitated. 
It dyes also wool in acid bath or on mordants 
Of chromium. 
According to the described process a series 
of new green dyestuffs can be prepared by 
substituting for the metadiazobenzoic acid in 
the method described under I the isomeric 
para and orthodiazobenzoic acids or the ami 
do derivatives of the diazobenzoic acids (the 
combination of these diazo bodies with ami 
donaphtholdisulfonic acid being effected in 
an acid solution) by combining the monoazo 
coloring-matters thus obtained, according to 
method described under II, with tetrazotolyl, 
and combining, finally, the resulting inter 
mediate products, according to the method 
described under III, with phenol. 
For the purpose of producing the interme 
diate products the tetrazoditolyl can also be 
replaced by the tetrazo derivatives of benzi 
din, of methylbenzidin,of ethoxybenzidin, and 
of dianisidin. Finally, other phenolic com 
pounds-as, for instance, Orthocresol, meta 
cresol, resorcin, orthocresotinic acid, (oxy 
toluic acid)-can be substituted for the phe 
mol, and the amidonaphtholdisulfonic acid 
1.8.3.6 can be replaced in certain cases by the 
isomeric amidonaphtholdisulfo acids 1.8.4.6 
and 1.5.3.7. 
A great variety of dyestuffs can thus be 
produced, which dye in all tints from black 
green to yellowish green. All these dye 
stuffs, which are characterized as derivatives 
of the diazobenzoic acids, may be represented 
by the general formula 
O 
X 
N=N-C.H.-C( 
NH. 
OH 
V(SONa) 
N=N-CHK 
/ 
P{ 
N=N-Y, 
where X is to designate a hydroxyl, alkyloxy, 
or amido group, P the radical of the tetrazo 
derivative of a paradiamin of the series of 
diphenyl, and Yaphenolic compound. They 
are, in dry state, powders of bronze luster, 
Soluble in Water with coloration varying from 
dark-green to yellowish green, insoluble in 
alcohol, ether, and benzene, soluble in con 
centrated sulfuric acid with dirty-blue-violet 
coloration. The addition of an acid to their 
aqueous solution produces a precipitate of the 
dyestuff acid. 
What I claim is 
1. The herein - described process for the 
manufacture of new green triazo dyestuffs, 
which consists in combining one molecule of 
the tetrazo derivative of a paradiamido base 
of the series of diphenyl with one molecule 
of a monoazo coloring-matter derived from 
one molecule of an amidonaphtholdisulfonic 
acid and one molecule of a diazobenzoic-acid 
compound and one molecule of a phenolic 
compound such for instance, as phenol, cre 
sol, resorcin and cresotinic acid, as set forth. 
2. The herein - described process for the 
manufacture of new green triazo dyestuffs, 
which consists in combining one molecule of 
the tetrazo derivative of a paradiamido base 
of the series of diphenyl, with one molecule 
of the monoazo coloring-matter derived from 
one molecule amidonaphtholdisulfonic acid 
1.S.3.6 and one molecule of metadiazoben 
Zoic-acid compound, and with one molecule 
of a phenolic compound, such for instance as 
phenol, resorcin, cresol and creSotinic acid, 
as Set forth. 
3. The herein - described process for the 
manufacture of new green triazo dyestuffs, 
which consists in combining one molecule of 
the tetrazo derivative of a paradiamido base 
of the series of diphenyl, with one molecule 
of the monoazo coloring-matter derived from 
one molecule of amidonaphtholdisulfonic acid 
1.8.3.6, with one molecule of metadiazoben 
Zoic-acid compound, and with one molecule 
of phenol, as set forth. 
4. As a new article of manufacture, the 
herein-described green triazo dyestuff, which 
is, in its dry state, a powder of bronze luster, 
insoluble in alcohol, ether and benzene, solu 
ble in Water with a green coloration, and ca 
pable of dyeing unmordanted cotton in dark 
green to yellowish-green tints, fast to light 
and especially to alkalies, and which, when 
dissolved in concentrated sulfuric acid, im 
parts a dirty-blue-violet color to the solution, 
as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
KARL, JEDLICKA. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE GIFFORD, 
AUGUST ROOS. 
75 
95 
OO 
IoS 
O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585204.txt	(No Model.) 
C. A., HIG-BEE. 
THREAD CUTTING TOOL, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
???????? 
?????: 
No. 585,204. 
Patented June 29, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
   
 
 
C. A. HIGBEE. 
THREAD CUTTING TOOL, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented June 29, 1897. 
L 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 585,204. 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
C. A. HIGBEE. 
THREAD CUTTING TOOL, 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented June 29, 1897. 
 
SS 
(No Model.) 
No. 585,204, 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLINTON A. HIGBEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
iH READ - C UT T N G TO O . " 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 585,204, dated June 29, 1897. 
Application filed January 17, 1896, Serial No, 535,222, (No m0ffel) 
55 
?? 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that II, CLINTON A. HIIGBEE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvement in Tools for Trim 
ming Screw-Threads, of which the following 
is a true and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part thereof. 
My invention relates to tools for cutting 
down screw-threads so as to form a thread 
such, for instance, as is shown in my United 
States Patents Nos. 447, 775 and 501,441, and 
has for its main object to provide a tool 
which will very quickly and neatly cut down 
a screw-thread. 
A further object is to provide a die for use 
in connection with this tool or otherwise 
which is provided with threads for engaging 
With threads on a screw and with means for 
adjusting the threads so as to engage with 
ScreWS of Various sizes. 
My invention can be best understood in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical elevation of one form 
of my device arranged to cut down a thread 
On a female screw. Fig. 2 is a plan view of 
the device shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a view 
similar to that shown in Fig. 1, showing an 
arrangement for cutting down the thread on 
a male screw. Fig. 4 is a section on the line 
4 4 of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a view of a die em 
ployed in connection with the device shown 
in Fig. 3, showing the convenient mode of 
applying removable handles. Fig. 6 is a 
view of a die similar in general character to 
that shown in Fig. 3, illustrating a mode of 
adjusting the die to engage with screws of 
slightly - different sizes. Fig. 7 is a front 
view, partly in section, of the die shown in 
Fig. 6. 
Fig. 8 is a view of a threaded block 
adapted to engage with a female screw and 
showing means for adjusting the screw 
threads so that they will engage with slightly 
different size female screws. Fig. 9 is a front 
view, partly in section, of the threaded block 
shown in Fig. S. Fig. 10 is a view of a 
threaded block illustrating a convenient 
mode for changing the number of threads to 
an inch. Fig. 11 is a front view of the de 
vice shown in Fig. 1. 
Figs. 12 and 13 are 
views of the end of the cutting-tool and illus 
trating a mode of finishing and cutting down 
a thread. Fig. 14 is a section of the thread 
ed block shown in Fig. 11 and serving also to 
illustrate a finishing cut such as would be 
made on the thread of a male or a female 
screw. Figs. 15 and 16 are views, respec 
tively, of blocks adapted to engage With male 
and female screws and showing means where 
by they may be adjusted so as to engage 
with screws which vary considerably in di 
ameter. Fig. 17 is a view illustrating a mode 
of finishing the cut, and Fig. 18 is a view 
illustrating a mode of adjusting the thread 
so as to engage with a screw having more or 
less threads to an inch. 
D is a threaded block which is provided 
with threads, as 'd, for engaging with the 
threads of a screw to be treated. This block 
may be of various forms, that shown in Figs. 
1, 9, 11, and 16 being adapted for use with a 
female screw and that shown in Figs. 3, 4, 6, 
14, and 15 for use with a male screw. 
Secured to the block, as by means of screws 
ct, is a guide or case in which a holder for the 
cutting-tool is guided. As shown, the guide 
consists of a tubular casting A, in which slides 
the holder B, which may conveniently be of 
the form shown. 
To adjust the holder, a screw b, provided 
with a milled head b", may be employed. The 
longitudinal movement of this screw rela 
tively to the case is prevented by means of 
the collars to b. 
b is an adjustable stop for limiting the 
movement of the holder. 
C is the cutting-tool, which has a head c, 
provided with cutting edges arranged in a 
manner to be more fully explained. The cut 
ting edges will come down across the thread 
or threads to be cut, and to adjust the Width 
of the cut I provide an adjustable stop, as d, 
for the cutter, the screw b of course serving 
to adjust the cutter toward and from the top 
of the thread to be cut. 
To operate the tool to cut down a thread, I 
provide a suitable handle or handles. These 
may, as shown in Fig. 5, be removable bars 
which fit in sockets D' in the device, or a per 
manent handle may be provided, as shown in 
Fig. 1. In this latter figure a handle E is se 
r 
95 
IOO 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
7 ? 
75 
95 
? ? ? 
II. ? 
cured to the top of the cutter C, and means 
are provided for securing the handle, when 
desired, to the case, so that the whole device 
can be moved together. As shown, a spiring 
pressed plunger e, provided with a head e, 
is adapted to engage in a slot e in the case. 
When the tool is operated to finish a cut, 
after shaving off the top of the thread the 
plunger e" is withdrawn from the slot, dis 
("onnecting the handle from the case, and the 
cutter C alone operated. 
To limit the novement of the entire device 
When the top of a thread is being planed Ol' 
cut off, I provide suitable stops. These are 
shown at D', (see Fig. 11) and to limit the 
operation of the cutter C when it is being op 
(erated alone I provide a stop, preferably ad 
iustable. Sucl: a stop is shown in Figs. 1 and 
2. An airc-shaped piece e, preferably seated 
in a Way e, is held in position by a screw e'. 
The screw fits in the slote', and by loosening 
it the stop e can be moved forward and back, 
and so limit the movement of the handle, 
and therefore of the cutter, as desired. An 
abutment or stop A' is secured to the case 
and coacts with the stop e. 
The case and holder may very conveniently 
be cast, and to form a tight ?it I may con 
Veniently split the case, as shown in Fig. 11, 
securing the two parts by a screw at a. The 
bore for the cutter may also be formed in the 
same Way, a screw cit binding these parts. 
The handle may be secured to the cutter in 
a similar way by a screwe, and the rotation 
of the cutter in the handle is prevented by a 
key e. 
In order to adjust the cutter vertically 
While its free rotation is permitted, a slot, c' 
is provided in the side of its socket, and a pin 
c projects through the slot and engages with 
the groove c in the cutter. The pin is ad 
justed by a screw c', which holds a plate c, 
to which the pin c is fastened in any desired 
position. 
The device shown in Figs. 3 and 4 is sub 
stantially the same as that shown in Figs. 1 
and 2, the threaded block ID being, however, 
provided with internal threads to engage with 
threads on a male screw. I have also shown 
sockets D' for removable handles, in which 
case no handle E need be provided, and to 
turn the cutter C a polygonal head may be 
formed at C, to which a suitable spanner or 
Wrench may be applied. 
Before describing certain very important 
details of the construction of the die which 
adapt it for use With screws of different sizes 
I will describe the preferred form of the cut 
ting-tool and the operation of the device. 
The preferred form of the construction of 
the cutter-head is shown in Figs. 12, 13, and 
16, which are about full size. The edge c' 
is the planing or cutting edge, which serves 
to cut of a thread so as to plane it completely 
down for a polition of its length, as shown in 
lmly prior patents referred to or as shown at 
d' in Fig. 14. The edge c0 is the finishing 
edge and is preferably formed with an Out 
ward bevel, as shown, so as to make a beveled 
finished end, (shown at d", Fig. 17.) 
In operation the threaded block is screwed 
onto or into the screw (male or female) which 
is to be treated, the proper adjustments hav 
ing been made by means of the screws Uand 
d, the screw blimiting the depth of the cut 
and the screw cl the width. Then the Cult 
ter C is advanced by means of the screw b 
till it engages with the top of the thread, the 
cutting edge being then in the position shown 
in Fig. 13. The tool is then turned by means 
of the handle, causing the cutter to shave off 
the top of the thread, the length of the cut 
being limited by the stops D". The tool is 
turned back, the cutter further advanced by 
the screw b, and another cut taken, this con 
tinuing till a cut of the proper depth is made, 
the proper depth being when the thread is 
completely cut down, and as the screw l' 
limits the depth of the cut there will be no 
danger of cutting into the body of the Screw. 
This shaving process will, however, leave the 
cend of the cell t u?n fin isled. ""o finisl? this cut, 
the handle E, if this is used, is disconnected 
from the case A, and on bcing turned brings 
the edge c10 of the cutter against the thread 
and finishes the cut in the manner shown in 
Fig. 17. If necessary, two or more cuts may 
be made to properly finish the end of the 
thread, the cutter being properly adjusted by 
means of the screvv lo. 
In practical use I have often found that 
screws which have or are supposed to have 
the same number of threads to the inch vary 
somewhat, so that a block which is made to 
fit a certain sized screw-as, for instance, one 
with eight threads to an inch and two inches 
in diameter-will sometimes bind when it is 
attempted to screw it onto this sized screw. 
To remedy this, I have devised an arrange 
ment of block shown on Sheets 3 and 4 of the 
drawings, and it consists in providing the 
block with means for moving some portion 
or all of the threads toward and from the 
center of the die. This motion when it is 
simply intended to make a block fit a screw 
which has threads which are very nearly the 
same size as those on the block need be but 
very slight. 
In Fig. S II have shown a block which is 
adapted to fit in a female screw. This block 
has a block IF, which has screw-threads on its 
face, which, when the block is in its normal 
position, form a continuation of the threads 
d on the rest of the threaded block, these 
threads cl being made a little smaller than 
those of a standard screw, so that the block 
cannot fail to fit any screw of the required 
diameter laving the same number of threads 
to an inch. To prevent any looseness wlen 
the screw with which the block engages is 
larger than the threaded block, the block F 
can be adjusted forward and so take up this 
looseness. As shown, a screw f, which is it 
self held from longitudinal movement by a 
I. ? 
2 ? 
55 
?? 
585,204 
- 
3 
O 
2 ? 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
5o 
55 
. 
pin f', serves to adjust the block, and a set 
screw f serves to hold the block in position 
after it is correctly set. 
The block which is adapted to engage with 
a male screw can be very conveniently ad 
justed by splitting it, as indicated at d, Fig. 
6, and by enlarging or decreasing the size of 
the ring by means of the screw f. 
Figs. 15 and 16 show blocks so arranged 
that screws varying considerably in diameter 
can be engaged by them. To effect this, I pro 
vide the die with a block or blocks dll11, which 
are stationary and which of course are pro 
vided with screw-threads, and with another 
block or blocks d', which are radially adjust 
able, as by means of screws d', and which 
adjustable blocks are also provided with 
threads. By properly adjusting the blocks 
d' the effective diameter of the main block 
(shown in Fig. 15) can be enlarged or dimin 
ished, so that it will engage with various-sized 
male screws and the block shown in Fig. 16 
With various-sized female screws. 
In order to arrange the block so that it will 
serve to engage also with screws having a 
greater or less number of threads to the inch, 
I provide either the block itself or the blocks 
d' d', if these be used, with a plate or plates 
and with means for separating the plate or 
plates in such a manner that the die will en 
gage with threads of different finenesses on 
different screws. 
It is of course evident that there are vari 
Olls modes of effecting this adjustment. In 
Fig. 18 I have shown a ring p, having a 
Wedge-shaped edge p'. This ring is split, as 
shown, and the split ends can be moved to 
Ward and from each other, thus making a heli 
cal screw-thread which can be made to cor 
respond to threads of different pitches. 
Another and preferable mode especially 
adapted for use in connection with the blocks 
d" and d is shown in Fig.10. Here two or 
three plates pare provided, each having a 
Wedge-shaped edge p'. A set-screw p serves 
to properly separate the several plates, so 
that they will engage with threads of differ 
ent pitches. 
Instead of employing positively - acting 
means as a screw to separate the plates they 
may be so constructed that when placed in 
different positions the wedge-shaped edges 
will be separated. Such a constructionisillus 
trated in the left of Fig. 10, where plates are 
shown provided with wedge-shaped edges, the 
point of the Wedge being nearer to one side 
than the other, so that if the plates are laid 
as indicated at the top of the figure they will 
engage With a fine screw and if laid as shown 
at the middle or lower part of the figure with 
coarser screws. 
In the foregoing specification I have de 
scribed the cutting-tool as secured to a block 
having threads which are adapted to engage 
with the threads of the screw to be treated, 
and have shown this block as a properly 
threaded block whose only function is to 
hold the cutting-tool in position and guide it 
while the cut is being made. It will, how 
ever, be clearly understood that any equiva 
lent suitable supporting and guiding devices 
can be used instead of the blocks, if desired. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
IPatent, is 
1. A device for cutting down screw-threads 
consisting of a block having threads adapted 
to engage with the threads of the screw to be 
treated, a guide or case secured to said block, 
a cutter-holder carried by said guide or case, 
means for adjusting said cutter-holder to and 
from the work and securing it in a determined 
position, a cutter secured and moving in the 
holder and a lever secured to the cutter and 
whereby it is operated to moveitin the holder 
and against its work. 
2. A device for cutting down screw-threads 
consisting of a block having threads adapted 
to engage with the threads of the screw to be 
treated, a case A secured to said block, a 
holder B guided in said case, a cutter C car 
ried by said holder, lying transversely to the 
threads of the block, means to adjust the 
holder in the case and a handle or handles 
for turning the block. 
3. A device for cutting down screw-threads 
consisting of a block having threads adapted 
to engage with the threads of the screw to be 
treated, a case A secured to said block, a 
holder B guided in said case, a cutter Clying 
transversely to the threads of the block car 
ried by said holder, means to adjust the holder 
in the case, and a handle E secured to the 
cutter C whereby it can be moved in the 
holder, said handle being provided with means 
for securing it to the case Aso that the whole 
device can also be turned together. 
4. A device for cutting down screw-threads 
consisting of a block having threads adapted 
to engage with the threads of the screw to be 
treated, a case or guide A secured to the block, 
a holder adjustably held in said case or guide, 
a cutter carried by said holder, a handle E 
secured to the cutter and adapted to turn it 
in the holder, and a latch on said handle for 
connecting it to the case A-Substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
5. In a device for cutting down screw 
threads a block having threads adapted to en 
gage with the threads of a screw to be treated, 
a cutter whose cutting edge projects across 
said thread or threads, means for moving said 
cutter toward the threads to be cut, means 
for adjusting the cutting edge across the 
threads, and an adjustable stop d to limit 
the movement of the cutter across the screw 
threads. 
6. In a device for cutting down screw 
threads a block having threads adapted to en 
gage with the threads of a screw to be treated, 
a case A, a holder B, means for adjusting the 
holder in the case, a stp to limit the motion 
75 
95 
IO3 
O 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
4. 
585,204 
of the holder, a cutter carried by the holder, 
and means for turning the device so as to cut 
off the thread on the screw under treatment. 
7. In a device for cutting down screw 
threads a block having threads adapted to en 
gage with the threads of a screw to be treated, 
a case A, a holder IB, means for adjusting the 
holder in the case, an adjustable stop to limit 
the motion of the holder, a cutter carried by 
the holder and means for turning the device 
so as to cut of the thread on the screw under 
treatment. 
S. In a device for cutting down screw 
IO 
threads the combination of a cutter having 
suitable cutting edges, means for holding the 
cutter in position relatively to the screw un 
der treatment, means for moving one edge of 
said cutter parallel to the top of a screw 
thread so as to shave it off, and means for 
bringing the other edge of the cutter against 20 
the top of the screw-thread to finish the cut. 
CLINTON A. H.GBEE. 
Witnesses: 
ALF. HI. FABER, 
HARRY J. PACK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585304.txt	LIMEKILN, CUPOLA AND METALLURGICAL FURNACE. 
E. J. BIRD. 
Patented June 29, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 585,304. 
 
Witnesses. 
Attorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD JAMES BIRD, OF BIG STONE GAP, VIRGINIA. 
LIMEKILN, CUPOLA, AND METALLURGICAL FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 585,804, dated June 29, 1897. 
Application filed May 11, 1896, Serial No. 591,063, (No model.) 
O 
To Cl24 tuhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD JAMES BIRD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Big 
Stone Gap, in the county of Wise and State 
of Virginia, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Limekiln, Cupola, 
and Metallurgical Furnaces; and I do de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters and figures of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in limekiln, cupola, and metallurgical fur 
naces of that kind or class wherein the fuel 
and material to be reduced are placed in suc 
cessive alternate layers or scaffolds and 
the combustion and reduction are promoted 
and accomplished by a blast of air admitted 
at the lower part of the furnace and forced 
upward through the fuel and charge. In 
such kilns or furnaces the sections or layers 
of fuel and reducible material tend to pack 
and lodge in the cupola above the line or 
Zone of direct reduction, and thus present 
an imperviable mass, bridging the cupola, and 
stopping the passage of the draft, thus re 
tarding combustion, preventing the reduc 
tion of the material below, and otherwise ma 
terially interfering with the general opera 
tion of the kiln or furnace. This occurrence 
of packing may take place in any one or more 
than one of the sections or layers, irrespec 
tive of the location in the charges in the cu 
pola, and the condition of the packed mate 
terial may be of less or of greater density 
and impenetrability, partially or wholly stop 
ping the escape of the gases and products of 
combustion in their upward course and per 
mitting the accumulation of gases below the 
packed layers of the charges, tending to oc 
casion dangerous and expensive explosions. 
In the present construction of this class of 
furnaces, so far as I am aWare, it is impos 
sible for the furnaceman to ascertain the 
amount of gas-pressure present in the cupola. 
or furnace, especially at any point therein. 
It is therefore the object of my present in 
vention to provide simple and reliable means 
for the escape of accumulated gases and to 
provide means whereby the gases will be au 
tomatically discharged at a pressure below 
that which would endanger the structure, 
and this I accomplish by the introduction of 
safety devices at intervals or stated distances 
in the walls of the furnace or kiln, as herein 
after will be fully specified. 
I have fully and clearly illustrated the in 
vention in the accompanying drawings, to be 
taken as a part of this specification, and 
wherein 
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of a 
furnace or kiln embodying my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a transverse section on the line acac 
of Fig. 1, showing the safety devices arranged 
at diametrical radii. Fig. 3 is an enlarged 
detail sectional view of the valves. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
kiln or furnace of any suitable and approved 
construction adapted to accomplish the pur 
poses for which intended. In the base of the 
furnace adjacent to the throat and above the 
hearth are suitably arranged and secured the 
twyers 1, through which the blast is intro 
duced in a Well-known manner and by any 
of the usual means. The line or Zone of com 
bustion in the furnace is indicated by the 
line 33 in Fig. 1. 
At stated intervals or distances in the walls 
of the furnace are formed horizontally-ar 
ranged openings 4, in which are arranged and 
secured gas-escape pipes 5, the inner ends of 
which are on a line with the inner surface of 
the furnace and the outer ends of which pro 
ject beyond the face of the furnace, substan 
tially as shown, the ends of the pipes being 
formed inclined, and to the inclined portions 
are suitably hinged lids or closures, 6, con 
stituting safety-valves, which open outward 
and are of such weight as not to be lifted by 
the ordinary pressure of the ascending and 
unimpeded products of combustion, but such 
that should the gases be impeded and accu 
mulate to an extent to endanger the safety 
of the structure or that an explosion of the 
gases takes place the force of the pressure 
will lift the hinged valves and permit the 
rapidlor forcible exit and escape thereof with 
out damage. 
In each of the escape-pipes 5 is formed a 
valve-seat 7, opening therefrom, in which is 
95 
IOO 
75 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
583,304 
valves, one of which is adapted to be opened 
before the other by gas-pressure within the 
furnace. 
2. In a furnace, a plurality of gas-escape 
pipes projected through the walls thereof, 
closures hinged to the ends of the pipes, and 
independent pressure-valves in the pipes con 
structed and arranged to be opened before 
the closures by gas-pressure within the fur 
aCe. 
3. In a furnace, a plurality of gas-escape 
pipes arranged in Vertical series, and each 
number of the series opening on a horizontal 
plane, closures to shut the outer ends of the 
pipes, and independent pressure-valves con 
structed to permit the outlet of gas before 
the closures are opened by gas-pressure. 
4. In a furnace, the combination with the 
walls thereof formed with openings arranged 
at different planes of elevation, of gas-escape 
pipes secured in the openings and projecting 
therefrom, closures hinged to close the pro 
jecting ends of the pipes, and independent 
pressure-valves seated in the pipes and ad 
justably-weighted levers to bear on the pres 
sure-valves. 
5. In a furnace, the combination of the cul 
pola, provided with longitudinally-arranged 
holes through the walls thereof, escape-pipes 
secured therein, hinged closures to close the 
outer ends of the pipes, independent pres 
sure-valves opening into the pipes, and means 
to adjust the pressure on the pressure-valves, 
as specified. 
6. A furnace formed with a series of open 
ings through its walls, escape-pipes secured 
in the openings and projecting beyond the 
outer face of the walls, closures to shut the 
outer ends of the escape-pipes, and independ 
ent safety-valves in the projecting portions 
of the escape-pipes arranged to open by in 
ternal pressure before the closures are lifted, 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
7. A furnace provided with valves con 
structed and arranged to be opened automat 
ically by internal pressure from the furnace, 
one set of valves being constructed and ar 
ranged to be automatically opened under a 
less pressure than the other set. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
EDWARD JAMES BIRD. 
9. 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT P. BARRON, 
ROBERT T. IRWINE. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
seated a valve 8, the stem of which is engaged 
by a rod 9, suitably jointed to and supported 
by the wall of the furnace, and on the rod 9 
is mounted a sliding and adjustable weight 
10, so that the valve 8 is held down and closed 
on its seat by the force of the weight on the 
rod and so that the valve may be raised and 
opened by the force of the outward pressure 
of the gas in the pipe. The amount of pres 
sure determined upon to open the valves 8 
and allow the escape of the gases is readily 
regulated by the position of the weight on 
the rod, the rod being graduated as usual. 
The valves S being set to open at such a fixed 
pressure as may not be required to lift the 
safety-valves, their condition can readily be 
observed by the operator and the amount of 
pressure within the furnace be indicated at 
any point subjected to their action. 
It is not essential that a pressure-valve be 
inserted in the topmost escape-pipes, as in 
dicated at 11, because these pipes being ad 
jacent to the top of the furnace it will be 
perceived that the gases will ordinarily es 
cape through the top of the stack or furnace; 
but to provide against damage by explosion 
at this point the pipes are provided with the 
hinged valves, the same as those of the pipes 
located below and protecting the body of the 
furnace. These safety appliances are located 
within the walls of the furnace on diametrical 
radii, as shown in Fig. 2 of the drawings, and 
on the same horizontal plane, so that should 
the packed material close any one or more of 
the pipes there may be still one or more es 
capes for the egress of the gas, and the op 
erator, from the outside, can detect at which 
point or points the packing process is going 
on, since if any impediment occur at the in 
ner end of the escape-pipe there will be no 
pressure indicated on the pressure-valve and 
consequently no escape of gas therefrom to 
the outside. 
Any suitable scaffolding may be erected 
about the furnace, so that the workman can 
examine the condition of the valves and clean 
out the pipes if they should by any means 
become choked or stopped up. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States 
1. In a furnace, a plurality of safety de 
vices disposed at different planes of elevation 
and communicating with the interior of the 
furnace, each safety device comprising two 
 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585404.txt	(No Model.) 
A. 
E. PORAK. 
APPARATUS FOR MAKING SULFUR OUS A0ID, 
No. 585,404. 
Patented June 29, 1897. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ERNST POR K, OF KIENBERG, AUSTRIA-HUN GARY. 
APPARATUS FOR MAKING SULFU Ro US ACID. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 585,404, dated June 29, 1897. 
Application filed July 6, 1896, Serial No. 598,206, (No model.) 
To all, whom it mally concert: 
Be it known that I, ERNST PORAK, resid 
ing at Kienberg, Bohemia, Austria-Hungary, 
have invented certain new and useful appa 
ratus for burning sulfur and other materials 
for the obtaining of sulfurous acid (SO) or 
similar products, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Myinvention relates to an apparatus for the 
production of sulfurous acid (SO) or other 
gases used for the saturation of fluids by the 
combustion of sulfur or other substances, the 
sulfur and sulfurous acid serving in this case 
only as an example. The chief object of my 
combination is to avoid the use of the dear 
and troublesome air-pumps and compressors, 
which besides this cause the formation of Sul 
furic acid, (SO.) For this purpose I produce 
a forced circulation of an appropriate fluid, 
as, for instance, of Water. I obtain in this 
way a sucking-jet which sucks the sulfurous 
acid or other saturating-gas as it arrives from 
the combustion apparatus. The tube of the 
jet reaches into the fluid of said reservoir, 
and thus the sulfurous acid is at the same 
time washed and put under pressure by the 
action of the jet itself, the reservoir being 
elosed. From the top of the reservoir the sul 
furous acid is led under the acquired pres 
sure to the place of its destination; and in 
order that my invention may be particularly 
described and ascertained reference is here 
by made to the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 represents the apparatus in a Ver 
tical section, and Fig. 2 the same in a hori 
Zontal plan view. Fig. 3 is an axial Section 
of the injector. 
The closed reservoir G is filled with an ap 
propriate fluid, preferably with Water. From 
its bottom this fluid is sucked by any appro 
priate pumping-machine E and is forced 
through the pipes F, injector E, and pipe 
F back to the same reservoir G, the pipe F 
preferably reaching into the fluid in G. 
A represents a stove or any appropriate ap 
paratus for the production of sulfurous acid 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
or other gases used in the saturation of flu 
ids, such sulfurous acid or other gases being 
led through the tubes B C D and the cen 
tral pipe S into the enlarged pipe E. The 
pipe S being surrounded by the jet of fluid 
which is forced back into G, the sulfurous 
acid is sucked and ejected into the fluid in 
G, and being therefore Washed and com 
pressed at the same time it can beled through 
the conduit Hi or through other appropriate 
tubes or apparatuses to the place of its des 
At the bends of pipes 
tination or further use. 
F' and D, I provide stoppers 22, which can 
be removed for cleaning purposes. 
The characteristic and new feature of my 
invention is the arrangement of the parts G. 
EF FEG by which I suck the gases from 
the pipe S and force them to enter into the 
fluid in G, so that the gas is automatically 
Washed and compressed and can therefore be 
led through the tube H or by other appro 
priate conduit to the place of its destination, 
especially for the purpose of saturating fluids. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
In combination with the closed reservoir 
Gadapted to contain a suitable fluid, a pipe 
system F, F, F making a circuit which in 
cludes the reservoir G, a pump E for drawing 
the fluid from G and forcing it through the 
pipe system back to G again, an apparatus. 
for the production of gas and pipe connec 
tions to the pipe E, said connections termi 
nating in a nipple whereby the fluid passing 
around said nipple acts by suction to drawin 
the gas to the reservoir G where it is washed 
and compressed, and a discharge-conduit FI, 
j, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
ERNST PORAK. 
P 
ADOLPH FISCHER, 
L. WOJACEK, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585504.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 585,504, 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
L. S. BROWN, 
CAS ENGINE 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 1, 
Patented June 29, 1897. 
 
 
IMWIVEAWTOR 
AT TORNEYS 
(No Model.) 
L. S. BROWN. 
GAS ENGINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 585,504, 
Patented June 29, 1897. 
??= 
.??? 
???????? 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
WITNESSES : 
 
ATTORMEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS S. BROWN, OF COLUMBUS, OHIO. 
GAS - ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION folming part of Letters Patent No. 585,504, dated June 29, 1897. 
Application filed October 22, 1896, Serial No. 609,686, (No model.) 
? ? 
IS 
25 
35 
To Citi, u/ OI), it 10.7/ CO ice?iv. 
Beit known that I, LEWISS. BROWN, of Co 
lumbus, in the county of Franklin and State 
of Ohio, have invented a new and Improved 
Gas-Engine, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and exact description. 
i. 
The invention relates to four-period en 
gines; and its object is to provide a new and 
improved gas or gasolene engine which is sim 
ple and durable in construction, very effect 
ive in operation, and arranged to insure a 
proper mixture of air and gas and a positive 
ignition of the explosive mixture. 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
details and combinations of the same, as will 
be fully described hereinafter and then point 
ed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the improve 
ment. Fig. 2 is a sectional side elevation of 
the same on the line 22 of Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a 
transverse section of the same on the line 33 
of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a sectional side elevation 
of the air and gas mixing device, the section 
being taken on the line 4 4 of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 
is a sectional side elevation of the inlet-valve 
and adjacent parts on the line 5 5 of Fig. 3, 
and Fig. 6 is a rear elevation with parts broken 
out of the exhaust-valve and connected parts. 
The improved gas-engine is provided with 
a water-jacketed cylinder A, in which oper 
ates a piston B, connected by a pitman B with 
the crank-arm C' of the main shaft C of the 
engine. Into the working end A' of the cyl 
inder Alead the oppositely-arranged inlet and 
exhaust portsCl and b, respectively, controlled 
by rotary valves D and E, respectively, both 
secured on a valve-shaft F, mounted to rotate 
in suitable bearings held on the cylinder A, 
the said shaft extending transversely through 
the working end of the cylinder, as indicated 
in the drawings. 
On one outer end of the shaft E is secured 
a sprocket-wheel F", connected by a sprocket 
chain E With a small sprocket-Wheel F, se 
cured on the main shaft C of the engine, the 
proportion of the wheels Fand F being such 
that the shaft C makes two revolutions to one 
revolution of the shaft F. The valve D is 
formed with an elongated opening or port c, 
adapted to connect the port a with the port d, 
opening into a mixing-chamber G, formed or 
secured on the cylinder A. This mixing 
chamber G is connected by a valve II with a 
cylinder I, connected with the gas-supply pipe 
J and containing a piston I, having its pis 
ton-rod I bent back at its outer end to form 
an arm I, pressed on by a spring I and car 
rying at its free end a friction-roller I, in en 
gagement with a cam I, secured on the valve 
shaft F. Thus when the latter is rotated the 
cam I pushes the arm I, the piston-rod I, 
and piston I outward, so that gas is drawn 
into the cylinder Ifrom the pipe J, having an 
inwardly-opening check-valve J'. The return 
movement of the piston I" is accomplished by 
the spring I, and the gas previously drawn 
into the cylinder I by the said piston passes 
into the mixing-chamber G past the valve H 
during the suction period of the engine. The 
valve His preferably surrounded by a wire 
netting cage H', so that the gases pass in a 
finely-divided state into the mixing- cham 
ber G. 
The mixing-chamber G is also connected 
by a valve K with an air-tube K", preferably 
containing a wire-netting L for finely divid 
ing the air, the said tube K" being connected 
at its lower end by openings K with an an 
nular space formed by an exterior tube N, 
screwed or otherwise fastened to the lower end 
of the air-tube K' and provided at its upper 
end with openings N'. (See Fig. 4.) The 
valve K opens upwardly, so that during the 
suction period of the engine air is drawn in 
from the outside into the mixing-chamber, 
the air being finely divided and kept free of 
dust and other impurities by the netting L. 
The discharge exhaust-valve E is formed with 
an elongated opening e, adapted to connect 
the exhaust-port b with a port f, leading to 
the atmosphere. The ports e and c are set 
in quarter positions, as indicated in Figs. 5 
and 6. 
The shaft F, within the working chamber 
A? of the cylinder A, is provided with an elec 
trode O, adapted to engage a flexible elec 
trode O', secured on a rod O, held insulated 
in the head A* of the cylinder A. The outer 
end of this rod O is connected with a wire 
O, leading to a battery or other electrical 
45 
So 
 
55 
75 
95 
1 ? ? 
2 
585,504 
5 
o 
2 ? 
35. 
45 
55 
supply also connected with a part of the cyl 
inder, to form a complete circuit at the time 
the electrode O engages the electrode O'. 
Now it will be seen that when the engine 
is in operation and the shaft F is rotated then 
the electrode O at every revolution of the 
shaft closes the circuit and breaks the same, 
thereby creating a spark for igniting the ex 
plosive mixture contained in the working 
chamber of the cylinder. 
The operation is as follows: When the 
parts are in the position shown in Fig. 2, and 
an explosive mixture is contained in the Work 
ing end A' of the cylinder A, and this mix 
ture is ignited by the spark created by the 
electrode O moving away from the electrode 
O', the piston B is sent outward by the ex 
plosion to rotate the shaft C, and on the re 
turn stroke of the piston the exhaust-valve 
E has its port e in register with the ports b 
and if, so that the products of combustion es 
cape to the outer air during this return 
stroke of the piston. During the return 
stroke of the piston the cam I pushes the pis 
ton I outward, so that gas is drawn into the 
cylinder I, and on the return stroke of the 
cylinder-piston B the port b is closed and the 
ports a cd are connected with each other, so 
that a suction is produced in the mixing 
chamber G, and consequently the valves H. 
and K open to admit gas and air into the 
mixing- chamber G. The air and gas mix 
ture pass through the ports d, c, and C into 
the working chamber A', and on the return 
stroke of the piston B this charge is com 
pressed, as the valve D has cut off the con 
nection between the ports a, and b. When 
the piston B is on the point of starting on 
- the next forward stroke, the ignition of the 
explosive mixture takes place and the piston 
B is again sent outward and the above-de 
Scribed operation is repeated. 
During the suction period of the engine 
the cylinder I moves inward by the action of 
the spring I to assist in forcing the gas into 
the mixing-chamber G. 
It will be seen that by the arrangement de 
scribed a proper mixture of the air and gas 
takes place, and the explosive mixture formed 
and contained in the working chamber is 
positively ignited by the spark from the elec 
trodes O and O'. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. An explosive-engine, comprising a cyl 
inder, a shaft mounted to turn in the sides 
of the cylinder and extending transversely 
therethrough, valves mounted on said shaft 
at opposite sides of the cylinder, separate in 
let and exhaust ports leading from said valves 
to the cylinder, an electrode carried by the 
shaft within the cylinder, a fixed electrode 
adapted to be engaged by the electrode on 
the shaft and a driving connection between 
the engine-shaft and the valve-shaft, substan 
tially as described. 
2. An explosive-engine, provided with a 
valved air-inlet, comprising an air-tube con 
taining a valve opening into the mixing 
chamber, a netting contained in the said tube, 
and an exterior tube surrounding the air 
tube and connected there with by openings, 
substantially as shown and described. 
3. An explosive - engine provided with a 
mixing-chamber adapted for connection with 
the fuel-supply, an air-tube containing a 
valve opening into the mixing-chamber, and 
another tube surrounding the air-tube and 
connected there with by openings, substan 
tially as described. 
LEWIS S. BROWN. 
Witnesses: 
FRED. J. BROWN, 
CHAS. M. JAYNES. 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585604.txt	(No Model) 
A. H. TWOMBLY. 
APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING SODA. 
s No. 585,604. 
Patented June 29, 1897. 
 
A fift ff. A 
c-f- 
THE NORR's Perers co. Photo-THo. WashingtoN. c.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER. H. TWOMBLY, OF YARMOUTH, MAINE. 
APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING SODA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 585,604, dated June 29, 1897. 
Application filed September 19, 1896, Serial No. 606,423, (No model.) 
IC) 
25 
To all whon, it invay concern: 
Beit known that I, ALEXANDER. H. TWOM 
BLY, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Yarmouth, in the county of Cumberland 
and State of Maine, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Recovering Substances from Air or Gases, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in means for separating 
from air and gases substances held therein in 
Suspension; and it consists, substantially, in 
Such features of construction, arrangement, 
and combinations of parts as will hereinafter 
be more particularly described. 
The object of the invention is the recovery 
of the Waste in soda-ash and other chemical 
substances employed in the manufacture of 
different kinds of pulp and the like. 
A further object is the provision of simple 
and effective apparatus for this purpose, sub 
stantially as will hereinafter more fully ap 
pear when taken in connection with the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional eleva 
tion of an apparatus constructed and ar 
ranged in accordance with my invention; and 
Fig. 2 is a top plan view, in part section, with 
the top of the tank removed. 
In order to successfully carry my invention 
into effect, several main elements are essen 
tial thereto-such, for instance, as a separa 
tor, a storage-tank for Water or other liquor, 
and means for causing a constant circulation 
of such liquor from the tank to the separator, 
through the latter, and back again to the 
tank. I am aware that some such arrange 
ment has been heretofore proposed with ref 
erence to certain forms of Washing or scrub 
bing devices for ordinary illuminating-gas, 
in which the gas is subjected to a spray of 
a continuously - circulating medium which 
passes down through the volume of gas to de 
prive the same of the impurities therein. 
With my invention to simply direct a spray 
of the separating liquor upon the ascending 
air orgas would be insufficient and practically 
ineffective, since the said air or gas When la 
den with soda-ash or other similar chemical 
substances must not have its volume broken 
up or disturbed, as would be the case with a 
spray, but the volume must be kept as nearly 
as possible en masse or intact. This Iaccom 
plish by directing the water or other liquor to 
flow down the inner sides of the separator in 
unbroken sheets, and the gas or air laden 
With the substance to be separated is made 
to impinge against the entire surface of the 
descending sheets of liquor, the latter both 
by its inherent quality as well as by the force 
of its descent serving to take up the sub 
stances in the air or gas. In this respect my 
invention is distinguished from the ordinary 
gas Washing or scrubbing apparatus referred 
to, as will be fully understood hereinafter. 
The means employed by me for effecting this 
result are capable of being constructed or em 
bodied in a great many different ways, and 
likewise their appurtenances, but for all gen 
eral purposes I have found that the construc 
tion and arrangement of devicesherein shown 
give good results, and I prefer the same in 
practice, although it will be understood that 
I am not limited thereto in point of detail. 
Thus the separator is designated at 1, and this 
could in some instances comprise a simple 
hollow tank or vessel; but in order that the 
incoming air or gas be subjected to a more 
complete and effective impingement against 
the descending sheets of separating liquor I 
prefer to increase the interior superfices of 
the separator. Different means could be em 
ployed to this end, but as a simple and effect 
ive embodiment I provide the separator with 
a circuitous or practically a spiral passage 2, 
that is formed between the outer Wall of the 
separator, and an inner or supplemental wall 
3, which extends the full height of the sepa 
rator, except for a short distance at the lower 
end thereof, where a space 3' is left all around, 
so that the liquor descending upon the inner 
surface of the outer wall will find passage to 
the outlet 3therefor in the bottom of the sep 
arator; also, in order that the Water or other 
liquor descending upon the inner surface of 
the inner wall 3 may find its outlet through 
3, the lower end of the inner wall is left free 
or open. The said inner wall 3 may start 
from any suitable point within the separator 
and it may be bent or carried inward upon it 
self as many times as desired by which to 
increase the length of the passage 2, but pref 
erably the same is made to terminate at or 
about the point 4, so as to leave a central Ver 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
35 
45 
 
585,604 
tical chamber 5, into which the gas or air 
passes from the passage through the commu 
nicating - opening 5'. Communicating with 
the said chamber 5 at the top is an exit-pipe 
8', and the gases or air may be allowed to 
pass of through the same or else conducted 
off to some place for use. The lower end of 
the separator is provided with a conical bot 
tom 8 to facilitate the flow of the liquor 
thereto, and the passage 2 is closed at the top, 
as indicated at 9, so as to prevent escape of 
air or gas before the same has been made to 
pass the full length of the passage and fully 
Subjected to the action of the descending 
Sheets of separating liquor. Any suitable 
means could be provided for sending the liq 
uor down the inner sides of the inner and 
Outer Walls in unbroken sheets, but as a sim 
ple construction I provide a single continuous 
pipe C, that is curved or bent in conformity 
With the shape or contour of the combined 
inner and outer walls in top plan and which 
pipe is closely perforated at ball around the 
Sides thereof adjacent the said walls, at or 
near the top of which latter the pipe is situ 
ated. At its inner extremity this perforated 
pipe is closed, while its outer end is connected 
With a pipe leading from the storage-tank and 
hereinafter referred to. 
Entering the separator at the side is one 
end of a flue 10, that is made flaring verti 
cally at 11, so as to conform to the full height 
of the passage 2, and this end of the said flue 
is in Open communication with the said pas 
Sage at the point where the latter begins. 
As a convenient construction I form the in 
ner Wall 3 as a practical continuation or ex 
tension of one side 12 of the enlarged inner end 
of the flue, substantially as is shown in Fig. 
2, or the two may be separate and properly 
united or joined together air-tight. The said 
flue10 is curved downward at 13 preferably, 
and is formed with a return-bend at 14, and 
Outside of the flue and on opposite sides of 
the said return-bend thereofsuitable supports 
15 are provided for the bearings 16 of a shaft 
17, that passes longitudinally through the 
bend 14 and carries a fan 18 for exhausting 
a room, chamber, or other place of its laden 
air or gas, which is thence passed to the sep 
arator to have recovered therefrom the soda 
ash or other substances held by the same in 
Suspension. By thus supporting the fan and 
its shaft all weight and strain of the same is 
taken from the flue, as is evident, and the 
flue itself may also with convenience be sus 
tained by these Supports through the medium 
of brackets 19, projecting from the inner sides 
thereof. The outer end of the fan is pro 
vided with a small band-pulley by which con 
nection may be had with any suitable driv 
ing power. While the water or other liquor 
might be Supplied to the separator in many 
different ways, it is desirable and absolutely 
essential that the same may be made to pass 
down the sides of the walls in continuous un 
broken sheets, and after a charge of the liquor 
w 
has been repeatedly passed through the sep 
arator a number of times its density will have 
so increased by the accumulation of the re 
covered Soda-ash Ol' Other waste substance as 
to render it practically impossible for the 
same liquor to take up any more of the waste, 
whereupon the dense liquor which settles in 
the bottom of the tank is drawn off through 
the valved outlet-pipe C without interrupt 
ing the operation. 
As a convenient means for supplying the 
liquor to the spreading device a, I employ a 
storage-tank 20, having a partition 20', and 
by means of a pipe 21, having a valve 21, I 
Connect the tank to the bottom of the sepa 
rator. Likewise at the opposite end of the 
tank at the bottom is a pipe 22, which leads 
to and connects with the casing of a small 
pump 23, from which leads a pipe or flue 24, 
that extends upWard and across and is con 
nected with the perforated liquid-spreader C. 
in the upper part of the separator. By rea 
son of the location of the partition 20' a cham 
ber 20 is provided into which the liquid over 
flowing the partition 20' passes, and thus the 
action of the pump is to always draw the least 
dense and most effective liquid practically 
from the liquid-level of the tank. The said 
tank is provided with a float - valve 25 for 
maintaining the liquor in the tank and sep 
arator at a uniform level, and it is through 
the valve that fresh liquid is passed to the 
tank to replace the quantities drawn off at Cl 
from time to time. Situated within the tank 
is a series of connected pipes 26, through 
which a heating or cooling medium may be 
carried to pass either to heat or to cool the 
liquor, according to the chemical nature of the 
Substances separated. 
By the construction and arrangement of 
parts above explained the ail or gas will be 
delivered to the passage 2 with such force 
that it will be carried rapidly around the pas 
Sage and Will impinge against the sheets of 
liquor descending upon the surfaces of the 
tWO Walls, and the Waste substances will be 
carried down with the liquor and recovered, 
and the free gas or air will pass into the cen 
tral chamber 5, from whence it rises up and 
passes out of the exit S'. 
The apparatus being thus constructed and 
arranged, the tank is supplied with a suit 
able quantity of Water or other separating 
liquor and the valve 21 opened, and then 
When the proper connection is made of the 
flue 0 with the source from which the air or 
gas is to be drawn the fan 18 and pump 23 
are both started and the operation begins. 
As the laden gas or air is forced into the 
passage 2 of the separator, it impinges against 
the sheets of water descending down the 
sides of the outer and inner walls from the 
perforated pipes above, and by this means 
any Soda-ash or other similar substance (ca 
pable of Solution or mechanical detention in 
water or other liquor) held in suspension in 
the air or gas will be carried to the bottom of 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
Go 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
585,604 
3 
75 
the separator and out through the pipe 21 to ent outside supports and bearings for the 
the tank. 
The water or other liquor is thus 
ends of said shaft, and a pump for producing 
continuously made to pass from the tank to 
a circulation between the tank and separator, 
the separator and back again until it is com 
substantially as described. 
pletely utilized in the manner already ex 
6. In apparatus for the purpose described, 
plained. 
the combination of the separator having an 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
exit-pipe at the top, and constructed With an 
struction and arrangement of parts shown, I 
inner supplementary wall constituting a pas 
claim as my invention 
sage and a central chamber each being open 
1. In apparatus for the purpose described, 
at the bottom and leading to the discharge 
the combination of a separator closed at the 
in the bottom of the separator, a conducting 
top and bottom and provided with an exit 
flue for the laden air or gases, a tank for 
pipe, a flue conducting air or gas into the sep 
water or other liquor; and pipe connections 
arator, a storage-tank for Water. Or other liq 
between the bottom of the tank and the top 
lor, and connections from the same to the up 
and bottom of the separator, a pump for pro 
per and lower portions of the separator, and 
ducing a circulation of such liquor between 
means for discharging a continuous unbroken 
the tank and separator, and means for dis 
sheet of the liquid upon the inner sides or sur 
charging the liquor down the sides of the 
face of said separator, and for maintaining 
passage in unbroken sheets, substantially as 
the liquid in circulation from one end of the 
shown and described. 
separator to the other substantially as de 
7. In apparatus for the purpose described, 
scribed. 
the closed separator having an exit-pipe at 
2. In apparatus for the purpose described, 
the top and provided with an inner vertical 
the combination of a separator closed at the 
wall terminating a little short of the height 
top and bottom, and provided with an exit 
of the separator at the bottom, and parallel 
pipe at the top, a flue conducting the laden 
with the Walls of said separator, said walls 
air or gas into the separator, and enlarged 
forming a spiral passage and a central com 
at its connecting end to the full height of 
municating chamber, the said separator be 
said separator, a storage-tank for Water or 
ing provided interiorly with devices adapted 
other liquor, means for producing a continu 
to discharge a stream of liquor down the sides 
ous circulation of such liquor between the 
of the passage in unbroken sheets, substan 
tank and separator, and means for discharg 
tially as shown and set forth. 
ing the liquor in continuous unbroken sheets 
S. In an apparatus for the purpose de 
upon the inner surface of said separator, Sub 
scribed, the combination with a separator hav 
stantially as shown and for the purpose de 
ing curved walls and provided with an exit 
Scribed. 
pipe, of a flue entering the separator and 
3. In apparatus for the purpose described 
adapted to deliver a blast of laden air tan 
the combination of a closed separator, pro 
gentially to the Walls of the separator-cham 
vided at its top with an exit-pipe and con 
ber, a circulating-pipe connecting the oppo 
structed on its interior with a circuitous pas 
site ends of the separator, and a pump con 
sage extending the full height of the said 
nected to said pipe whereby a continuous cir 
separator, a flue conducting the laden air or 
culation of fluid from one end of the separator 
gas to the said circuitous passage, a storage 
to the other is maintained, substantially as 
tank for water or other liquor, means for pro 
described. 
ducing a continuous circulation between such 
9. In an apparatus for the purpose de 
tank and separator and means for discharg 
scribed, the combination with a separator hav 
ing the liquor in descending unbroken sheets 
ing curved walls and provided with an exit 
upon the adjacent surfaces or walls of the 
pipe, of a flue entering the separator and 
said passage, substantially as described. 
adapted to deliver a blast of laden air tan 
4. In apparatus for the purpose described, 
gentially to the walls of the separator-cham 
the combination of a separator provided at its 
ber, a circulating-pipe connecting the oppo 
top with an exit-pipe, and constructed inte 
site ends of the separator, and a pump con 
riorly with a supplementary wall forming a 
nected to said pipe whereby a continuous cir 
spiral chamber, a flue conducting the laden 
culation of fluid in an unbroken sheet from 
air or gas to the said passage, a storage-tank 
one end of the separator to the other is main 
for Water or other liquor, and means for dis 
tained in a direction transverse to that in 
charging the liquor upon the adjacent sur 
which the laden air is delivered, substantially 
faces of the passage in unbroken sheets, sub 
as described. 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
5. In apparatus for the purpose described, 
name to this specification in the presence of 
the combination of a separator, the storage 
two subscribing witnesses. 
tank and connections, and the conducting 
flue connecting with the separator and hav 
ing a shaft passing through the same longi 
tudinally and provided with a fan, independ 
ALEXANDER. H. TWOMBILY. 
t 
Witnesses: 
M. C. MARSTON, 
MAY L. MITCHELL. 
95 
OO 
O 
I 25 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
1 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585705.txt	(No Model.) 
00MBINED STEAM ENGINE AND STEAM GENERATOR, 
W. SCHMIDT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 585,705. 
Patented July 6, 1897. 
A 2. Z. 
 
 
a 4.9 PM M MR 
 
 
  
  
  
2 
2 t3. 
E 2 
2- - - - 
3zzzzz3 
SSSSSSN 
S 
w 
- 
22A2aegg es 
those %% 
2%ud 2%ttenbey. 
 
Mie were or 
gear.some 
- 24-4 
veerzeez. 
8 E Norris PETERsco, ProTorto., washingtoN, d.c. 
. . 
COMBINED STEAM ENGINE AND STEAM GENERATOR. 
W. SCHMIDT, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 585,705. 
Patented July 6, 1897. 
22 s 
2 2 2 % 
% % i2 S 
S. 
s 
s 
2. 22222222222 
22'vesses. 
dow/6 
dul Wilenbery. - 
Zealeeae/ 
go some 
24.2% 
Nottis perERs co, Hoyo-Lito. WASH:NGTON, C. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELMSCHMIDT, OF BALLENSTADT, GERMANY. 
COMBINED STEAM-ENGINE AND STEAM - GENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 585,705, dated July 6, 1897. 
Application filed March 20, 1896, 
Serial No. 584,069, (No model.) 
- 
To aid, whom it may concern 
Be it known that I, WILHELM. SCHMIDT, a 
subject of the King of Prussia, German Em 
peror, and a resident of Ballenstdt-on-the 
Harz, in the Duchy of Anhalt, and of Aschers 
leben, German Empire, have invented a new 
and useful Combined Steam - Engine and 
Steam-Generator, of which the following is an 
exact specification. 
This invention refers in general to steam 
boilers and motors in which both these parts 
are continuously rigidly united and in par 
ticular to such combined steam boilers and 
motors in which the cylinder of the latter is 
either partly or wholly arranged within the 
boiler. There are combined steam boilers 
and motors in which the cylinder is arranged 
within the steam-space of the boiler, and there 
are other combined steam boilers and motors 
in which the cylinder is arranged within the 
way of the fire-gases streaming forth from the 
furnace of the boiler. Neither of these ar 
rangements has up to now met with the de 
sired success, in that in the first case a strong 
condensation of steam within the cylinder 
and consequently a great loss of power could 
not be avoided, and in the second arrange 
ment (which was devised in order to do away 
with the drawback just mentioned) the cylin 
der could not be protected against too strong 
a heating. 
The purpose of my invention therefore is 
to overcome said last-named drawback too, 
and, moreover, to produce a combined steam 
boiler and motor that, first, is able to yield a 
very high useful effect; second, requires re 
pairs either not at all or but in very long in 
tervals; third, need not continually be at 
tended to, and, fourth, may be manufactured 
at a comparatively very low price. I attain 
all these objects, first, by arranging the cyl 
inder of the motor within the interior of the 
boiler in such a manner that it extends 
through the boiler-water and reaches with one 
end into the Way of the fire-gases streaming 
forth from the furnace of the boiler; second, 
by employing the cylinder as a stay for the 
boiler, in that I connect an outer wall of the 
boiler proper with the fire-box; third, by di 
viding the latter into a furnace proper and 
another chamber by means of a fire-bridge 
that is arranged in the neighborhood of the 
inner end of the cylinder and carries a hood 
that protects said end against too strong an 
action of the hot gases escaping from said 
furnace; fourth, by arranging tubes of the 
Field type within said other chamber, and, 
fifth, by making said inner end of the cylin 
der exchangeable, as is all more fully de 
scribed hereinafter. 
In order to make my invention more clear, 
I refer to the accompanying drawings, in 
which similar letters refer to similar parts 
throughout both views, and in which 
Figure l is a vertical section through my 
improved combined steam boiler and motor, 
and Fig. 2 is another vertical section taken 
at right angles to the former one. 
- 
In the form of construction shown the cyl 
inder disarranged in a vertical position with 
in the interior of the boiler proper and con 
nects the crown a of the latter with the crown 
b of the fire-box. The lower end d of the 
cylinder projects through said crown b and 
extends into the way of the fire-gases that 
stream forth from the furnace. A fire-bridge 
U is arranged below the cylinder d d" and di 
vides the fire-bridge into two chambers, one of 
which forms the furnace proper, whereas the 
other contains a number of tubes of the well 
known Field type. The fire-bridge u carries 
a hood h, that takes around the portion d of 
the cylinder and protects that portion against 
too strong an action of the fire-gases, as has 
already been mentioned in the preamble. 
The hot gases escaping from the furnace and 
passing over the fire-bridge u into the other 
chamber of the fire-box flow then downward 
along the Field tubes above mentioned and 
escape at the lower ends of said tubes, so that 
these ends are washed by comparatively cold 
gases and are thus fully prevented against 
being burned. 
Although by the arrangement of the hood 
h the projecting lower end d of the cylinder 
is Well protected against too strong an action 
of the fire-gases, it may yet be that after a 
longer period of time said end requires a re 
newal. To facilitate this, I prefer to make 
the said end exchangeable, as shown in Fig. 
2, in which the piece d is inserted between 
the cylinder d proper and the crown b of the 
fire-box as a separate piece. 
In consequence of the cylinder being ar 
. 
- 
. 
30 
35 
45 
75 
95 
Iod 
2 
585,705 
ranged in the manner described it is con 
stantly washed by the hot water contained 
within the boiler, and the portion d that is 
exposed to the action of the fire-gases is thus 
very effectively cooled, while, on the other 
hand, the upper portion of the cylinder can 
cool down only to the highest temperature of 
the steam. The steam entering the portion 
d of the cylinder is instantaneously and per 
fectly dried therein, and any excessive con 
densation of steam within the cylinder proper 
is fully prevented. 
For the sake of completeness I now explain 
with regard to the distribution of the steam 
that the latter enters the valve-chest through 
a pipe c and flows from said pipe into an an 
gular spacee, provided within the valve-chest. 
The piston-valve f is in its middle portion 
contracted, and the space thus formed serves 
for intermittently connecting the angular 
space e aforementioned with the inlet-chan 
nelg for the cylinder. The piston-valve fis 
actuated from an eccentric i, that is arranged 
upon the main shaft fic of the engine. 
Having thus fully described the nature of 
this invention, what I desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States is 
i. In a steam-boiler with motor, the com 
bination with one of the walls between the 
Water-space of said boiler, and the heating 
space of the same, of the cylinder of said mo 
tor; said cylinder being arranged rectangu 
larly to said Wall and extending with an end 
portion through the said wall into said heat 
ing-space; the end of the remaining portion : 
of the cylinder being connected with the 
boiler-wall that lies opposite to the wall first 
mentioned, for the purpose as described. 
2. In a steam-boiler with motor, the com 
bination with one of the walls between the 
water-space of said boiler and the heating 
space of the same, of the cylinder of said mo 
IO 
35 
45 
55 
tor; said cylinder being arranged rectangul 
larly to said wall, and extending with one end 
portion through the said wall into said heat 
ing-space; said end portion of the cylinder 
being exchangeable, for the purpose as de 
scribed. 
3. In a steam-boiler with motor, the com 
bination with one of the walls between the 
water-space of said boiler and the heating 
space of the same, of the cylinder of said mo 
tor; said cylinder being arranged rectangu 
larly to said Wall and extending with a por 
tion through the same into said heating-space; 
a fire-bridge arranged below the said cylin 
der, and dividing said heating-space into two 
chambers, and a hood arranged upon said 
fire-bridge, and adapted to protect said por 
tion of the cylinder against the direct action 
of the fire, for the purpose as described. 
4. In a steam-boiler with motor, the com 
bination with one of the Walls between the 
Water-space of said boiler and the heating 
space of the same, of the cylinder of said mo 
tor; Said cylinder being arranged rectangul 
larly to said wall and extending with one end 
portion through the same into said heating 
space, and a fire-bridge arranged below the 
said cylinder, and dividing said heating-space 
into two chambers; and a hoodh located upon 
said fire-bridge and taking around the pro 
jecting end portion of the cylinder, one of 
said chambers forming the furnace proper, 
the other containing tubes of the Field type, 
for the purpose as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
WILHELMSCFIMIDT. 
Witnesses: 
FRITZ SPERLING, 
W. HAUPT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585805.txt	(No Model.) 
O, WILHELMI. 
ROCKET. 
 
No. 585,805, 
Patented July 6, 1897. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OTTO WILHELMI, OF DUSSELDORF, GERMANY. 
ROCKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 585,805, dated July 6, 1897. 
Application filed September 21, 1896, Serial No. 606,458, (No model.) 
O 
To all whon, it in City CO7 cen: 
Beit known that I, OTTOWILHELMI, a sub 
ject of the German Emperor, residing at Dus 
seldorf, Germany, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Rockets, with de 
Scription as follows. 
This invention relates to a rocket provided 
with a charge of circulars or other advertis 
ing matter, which is released when the rocket 
is exploded and which in descending is thus 
distributed over a large area. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side view of a stick-rocket provided with 
my improvement. Fig. 2 is a similar view 
showing the rocket after having been ig 
nited; and Fig. 3 is a cross-section online AB, 
Fig. 1. 
The letter a represents the case of a stick 
rocket, around which is coiled a roll of cir 
culars r in such a manner that it cannot be - 
reached by the flame escaping from below. 
These circulars are held in place by means of 
a fuse b, that projects out of the head or pot 
of the rocket. The fuse may be bodily coiled 
around the roll of circulars or it may be at 
tached to a confining-string c, which is coiled 
directly around such roll, as shown. 
When the rocket is exploded or after it has 
been partly consumed, the fuse b will become 
25 
 
ignited to release the circulars, which are 
thus scattered over a large area. 
In order to weight or counterbalance the 
stick d at its lower end and thus cause the 
rocket to ascend properly, a second roll 'of 
circulars may be coiled around the stick be 
low the case C. This roll is attached to the 
rocket by means of the same string c that 
holds the roll ', and thus both rolls are nearly 
simultaneously released. 
What I claim is 
1. A rocket provided with a case, a roll of 
circulars coiled around the same, and a fuse or 
fuse-string coiled directly around the roll of 
circulars and adapted to release the same 
upon ignition, substantially as specified. 
2. A rocket provided with a case, a roll of 
circulars coiled around the same, a second 
roll coiled around the stick, and a fuse or fuse 
string coiled directly around the rolls and 
adapted to release the same upon ignition, sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
OTTO WILIELMI. 
35 
40 
45 
WILLIAM ESSEN WEIN, 
ERNEST ANDRE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US585905.txt	( No Model ) 
No. 585,905. 
 
 
F. BONHEIM. 
BOX. 
Patented July 6, 1897, 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK TONIIEIM, OF ATCIIISON, KANSAS. 
BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 585,905, dated July 6, 1897. 
Application filed October 24, 1896, Serial No. 609,947. (No model.) 
55 
7 ? 
75 
To all, whom it. In?tity concert. 
tomatically upon the lifting of the platform by 
Be it known that I, FRANK BONHEIM, of 
means of suitable ribbons attached thereto. 
Atchison, in the county of Atchison and State 
To these ends my invention consists in 
of Kansas, have invented new and useful Im 
the construction and combination of parts 
provementsin Boxes; and I do hereby declare 
substantially as hereinafter described and 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
claimed. 
scription of said invention, reference being 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
perspective view of my improved platform or 
letters and figures of reference marked there 
table removed from a box. Fig. 2 is a longi 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
gitudinal sectional view of a box adapted to 
My invention relates to boxes for articles of 
contain four layers of cigars and with the 
merchandise which are usually kept in stock 
platform resting on the bottom thereof. Fig. 
in layers in the original packages and sepa 
3 is a similar view showing the condition of 
rately sold therefrom. When such boxes are 
the platform and the contents of the box after 
kept on exhibitionin a show-case or elsewhere, 
a layer of cigars has been removed and the 
the appearance of the stock contained there 
platform elevated one step. Fig. 4 is a simi 
in grows poorer as the layers of the goods are 
lar view showing the platform raised to its 
sold therefrom, and this is particularly no 
highest position, said figure also showing the 
rticeable in the case of cigars and their boxes. 
platform as made of pasteboard or other suit 
Furthermore, in country stores, where the 
able material formed to represent a layer of 
stock is small and the sales slow, as the cigars 
cigars when seen from the top. 
are sold out of the top of the box the deep 
In all the views the same reference-charac 
partially-emptied box becomes a place where 
ters are used to indicate the same or similar 
dirt is liable to collect and from which it is 
parts. 
difficult to clean it. 
In the form shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 the 
The object of my invention is the produc 
platform or table A is shown as composed of 
tion of a simple and cheap platform or table 
a flat piece of wood similar to the bottom 
(or 'false bottom, as it might be termed,) 
proper of the box and having its corners cut 
which may be applied to a box of ordinary 
away at a. and adapted to fit and move verti 
construction without altering the latter, which 
cally in a box B. In one side of each cut 
platform or table may be readily lifted and 
away portion or recess a is a stud (t", having 
automatically supported at varying eleva 
its end enlarged to form a head to retain the 
tions within the box to keep the upper layer. 
supporting-pins 1, 2, and 3 on Said stud. 
of the goods flush with the upper edge of the 
These pins are of different lengths, as shown, 
box. This not only preserves the original ap 
and have eyes at their upper ends, by means of 
pearance of the stock, but also provides for 
which they are strung on the stud. As indi 
the lodgment of dust or dirt that may enter 
cated in Eigs. 2 and 3, the board A is also 
the box in the space below the platform and 
cut away at a to form recesses in which the 
below the lower layer of goods. 
pins are accommodated when the table rests 
My invention will be herein shown and de 
on the bottom of the box. 
scribed in connection with a box for cigars, 
There are four sets of pins-one set at each 
although not limited to such use. 
corner of the platform or table-and I prefer 
I am aware that, broadly, Iam not the first 
to have the pins somewhat pointed, in order 
to produce a box for cigars or other goods 
to prevent the ones that are supporting the 
having a false bottom that is vertically ad 
platform from slipping when the box is moved 
justable in the box; but, so far as I am a Ware, 
more or less suddenly. 
I am the first to produce a false bottom or 
When the platform A is to be placed in a 
platform or table which is independent of any 
box, the latter is tilted toward one end and 
special construction of the box itself and 
the platform held in asimilar position, so that 
which is provided with retaining devices for 
the pins at the upper end will lie nearly in 
holding it at the desired elevation, said re 
the recesses a, and that end of the platform 
taining devices being brought into action au- may then be laid against the bottom of the 
e 
s 
. 
90 
95 
IOO 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
30 
35 
45 
so 
2 
585,905 
? ? 
box. On then reversing the box and plat 
form end for end the pins at the other end 
will move into the recesses a, and then that 
end can be laid against the bottom of the 
box, which is then ready to be filled with ci 
gars or whatever other goods are to be sold 
therefrom. 
When one layer has been sold, the platform 
A is lifted, as by means of the ribbons C, simi 
lar to the ordinary cigar-ribbons, and the 
short pins 11 swing on the studs to the posi 
tions indicated in Fig. 3. When another 
layer has been sold, the platform is lifted 
until the pins 22 come to a vertical position, 
and when the third layer has been sold the 
platform is again lifted, and the longer pins 3 
3 assume the position indicated in Fig. 4. 
When a plain flat platform is employed, the 
partial sale of the last layer would expose it 
to view, and I therefore propose to print the 
platform with the design or shape of a layer 
of cigars, said platform being constructed of 
some suitable material, such as pasteboard, 
and pressed, as shown in Fig. 4. 
It is to be understood that the goods to be 
sold from a box similar to that illustrated are 
supposed to comprise four layers, but that 
when the goods are to be placed in a greater 
number of layers the number of pins carried 
at each corner of the platform or table will 
be correspondingly increased. For four lay 
ers three pins in each set are sufficient; but 
when there are to be six or eight layers there 
will be five or seven pins, respectively, in 
each Sct. 
25 
35 
. 
- 
The pins serve as retainers to hold the plat 
form elevated above the bottom of the box 
and are carried solely by the platform and re 
(uire no coacting parts or mechanism in the 
box to insure their engagement. 
IIaving now described my invention, what 
I claim is- 
1. The combination with a box, of the plat 
form or table A having a plurality of sup 
porting legs or pins loosely connected thereto, 
said legs being of different lengths and en 
gaging the bottom of the box. 
2. The combination with the platform or 
table Ahaving studs projecting therefrom, of 
a set of legs or pins having different lengths 
and pivoted on said studs. 
3. The combination with the box 3, of the 
platform A having an irregular surface and 
having at each corner thereof a plurality of 
loosely-connected legs or pins having differ 
ent lengths and adapted to engage the bottom 
of the box to retain the platform at different 
predetermined elevations. 
4. The combination with the box B, of the 
table or platform. A having a plurality of sets 
of supporting legs or pins of different lengths 
to engage the bottom of the box, and said 
platform also having flexible strips connected 
thereto for lifting it. 
v 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
FRANK IBONHEIM. 
40 
45 
55 
?? 
Witnesses: 
ED.W. V. CONWELI, 
W. W. GUTHRIE, Jr. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586005.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN S. BLACK, OF PASADENA, CALIFORNIA. 
COOKING UTEN SIL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,005, dated July 6, 1897. 
Application filed April 4, 1895, Serial No. 544,439 (No model.) 
2 ? 
5 
? ? 
IS 
25 
- 
- 
the same. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN S. BLACK, of 
Pasadena, in the county of Los Angeles and 
State of California, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Cooking Uten 
sils; and I do hereby declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of thein 
vention, such as Will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
cooking utensils or dishes, and more particu 
larly to such as are adapted for cooking eggs 
in the unbroken shell. 
It is well known that in an ordinary boiled 
egg the white is tough and leathery and com 
paratively indigestible, while the yolk may 
be entirely uncooked and have a raw taste. 
It is a difficult matter to get eggs cooked to 
the right consistency, as they must be re 
moved from the Water promptly at the expira 
tion of a certain number of minutes. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
utensil or dish in which a limited number of 
hens' eggs can be cooked to just the proper 
degree without the possibility of being over 
cooked and without the necessity of remov 
ing them from their water-bath at any speci 
fied time, thereby dispensing with the aid of 
any horological instrument whatever, saving 
time and painstaking on the part of the cook 
and much fault-finding on the part of the con 
SUme. 
A further object is to produce a utensil or 
dish for the purpose stated which shall be 
simple in construction, comparatively cheap 
to manufacture, easy to handle and operate, 
and which shall be effectual in all respects in 
the performance of its functions. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in certain novel features of construc 
tion and combinations and arrangements of 
parts, as hereinafter set forth, and pointed 
out in the claims. 
The accompanying drawing represents a 
sectional view of a device embodying my im 
provements. 
A represents my improved utensil, which 
is preferably made of metal and in the form 
5o of a covered dish suitable to be placed on a 
dining-table. 
While the utensil might be made of a sin 
45 
35 
gle thickness of material, I prefer to make it 
with double walls, so as to form an interme 
diate chamber a between said walls for the 
reception of air, whereby to retain heat with 
in the device. The chamber CL between the 
walls of the device may be filled with some 
non-conductor of heat, such as pulverized car 
bon, wood fiber, paper, wool, felt, &c., if de 
sired. 
By constructing the receptacle with a 
double wall it has an increased capacity for 
holding and retaining heat, and consequently 
the size of vessel necessary to cook a certain 
number of eggs is reduced to a minimum. 
The cover A of the device is intended to re 
tain heat therein and may be made of a sin 
gle thickness of non-conducting material, but 
I prefer to make it of sheet metal with an in 
ner and an outer shell to form a chamber b 
for the reception of non-conducting material 
O SRI. 
The dish or utensil has substantially the 
internal form shown, the shape being such 
that the capacity of the dish below a given 
point is exactly proportioned to hold just the 
required quantity of hot water to cook a pre 
determined number of eggs, and the amount 
of water necessary is determined by a gage 
E, having figures thereon to indicate the ex 
act amount of boiling water needed to prop 
erly cook the eggs. The gage may be en 
graved on the inside of the dish or On a sep 
arate piece and placed within the dish. 
A tray D, made of woven wire, (or perfo 
rated metal,) is removably located within the 
dish and supported above the bottom thereof 
by means of a flange f, projecting from the 
tray and resting against the interior of the 
dish. The tray may be provided with a stem 
g, having a knob g' whereby to lift it. 
The tray D is designed to suspend eggs 
above the bottom of the dish, so that they 
will be evenly surrounded by Water contained 
in the dish. 
In using the cooker above described place 
the eggs in the tray, lift the tray, and pour 
into the dish boiling water directly from the 
boiler or kettle until the surface reaches the 
line on the gage corresponding to the number 
of eggs in the tray. Then immediately re 
place the tray, put the cover on, and set the 
dish on the dining-table. In a few minutes 
55 
?? 
? ? 
75 
95 
1 OC) 
2 
586,005 
the eggs will be perfectly cooked, jellied 
throughout like a well-cooked custard, the 
white of the eggs being equally as tender. 
There is not heat enough in the quantity of 
Water used to overcook the eggs, so they 
may be left in the hot bath indefinitely or 
until needed, and are thus warm for late 
comers. Should the eggs get cold, they may 
be recooked by exactly the same process. 
The same degree and amount of heat will not 
cause any further coagulation of the albu 
men, but Will simply Warm it up again, so 
that if eggs are left over at one meal they 
can be recooked at the next, and so that no 
epicure can tell by his sense of taste whether 
a certain egg cooked by my improved device 
has been cooked once or twice. 
Eggs cooked in the manner above described 
seem to have their sulfurous compounds 
eliminated, as they do not produce sulfurous 
eructation, nor do they seem to discolor sil 
verware as much as do ordinary boiled eggs. 
This effect is probably due to the compara 
tively long exposure to a moderate heat. 
My improvements are simple in construc 
tion, cheap to manufacture, handy to use, or 
namental in appearance, and effectual in all 
respects in the performance of their func 
tions. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. As an article of manufacture, an egg 
cooker comprising a graduated receptacle 
having a basin-like or flaring interior so 
I. ? 
25 
35 
shaped that the capacity of the receptacle be 
low a given point is proportioned to the 
amount of hot water required to cook a pre 
determined number of eggs, substantially as 
set forth. 
2. As an article of manufacture, an egg 
cooker comprising a graduated receptacle 
having a basin-like or flaring interior So 
shaped that the capacity of the receptacle be 
low a given point is proportioned to the 
amount of hot water required to cook a pre 
determined number of eggs, and means for 
retaining the heat in the receptacle whereby 
the size of a vessel required to hold an ade 
quate amount of Water to cook each egg is 
reduced to a minimum, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. As an article of manufacture, an egg 
cooker comprising a graduated receptacle 
having a basin-like or flaring interior so 
shaped that the capacity of the receptacle be 
low a given point is proportioned to the 
amount of hot water required to cook a pre 
determined number of eggs, and a removable 
tray shaped to substantially conform to the 
interior shape of the receptacle, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
, 
STEPHEN S. BACK. 
Witnesses: 
O. P. Foot'E, 
KATE S. BLACK. 
45 
50 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586105.txt	C. NUHRING, 
FIRE EXTINGUISHINGAPPARATUS, 
Patented July 13, 1897. 
(No Model ) 
No. 586, l05. 
 
AN 
H-Hi Y 
S7 
Af 
--K2, 
; ; ; 
::::::::Hiirii 
N 
; 
; 
foLIC (CTIOTT or 6 
: 
a. 
; }; 
 
 
 
  
 
cQ4 
 
holesow 
Hall 
a 
al 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARIES NUHRING, O F CINCINN ATI, OHIO. 
FIRE-EXTINGUISHING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,105, dated July 13, 1897. 
Application filed May 27, 1895, Serial No. 550,792. (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, uhon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES NUHRING, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cin 
cinnati, Ohio, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Fire-Extinguishing Appara 
tus, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to safety appliances 
provided to be used in buildings in case of 
fire, consisting, essentially, of a hose-rack for 
Suspending a hose in readiness for service and 
connections between the hose and water-plug 
for turning on the water by the act of draw 
ing out the hose. 
My improvements consist, first, in an im 
proved construction of the rack whereby the 
detaching of the hose is facilitated and the 
hose is permitted to expand without injury 
in case water is turned on before the hose is 
detached from the rack; secondly, in an im 
proved construction of the means for turning 
on the Water whereby a perfect and certain 
action is insured. 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a general elevation of a hose 
rack and attachments complete embodying 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
rack; and Fig. 3, a detail section across the 
rack, showing the construction of the rollers. 
Referring now to the drawings, Adesignates 
a hose-rack constructed in the similitude of a 
ladder-that is to say, having cross-pieces or 
rungs a, extending between side pieces at 
a, affording supports for the hose H in suc 
cessive folds h. The side pieces in this case 
are pivotally secured together at one end, 
whereby they are adapted to be attached to 
and project from a wall-bracket b in a hori 
Zontal plane and are temporarily secured to 
gether at their outer ends in any convenient 
manner, as by a permanent cross-bar a and 
SCIeW. S. 
The cross-pieces or rungs a are carried in 
opposite corresponding slots s' of the side 
pieces as independent pins or rollers. I pre 
fer to construct them, as shown in Fig. 3, 
with washers or flanges securing them in one 
of the side pieces, as Ct', permanently, so as to 
allow the opposite member a to be opened 
upon its hinged connection for convenience 
in replacing the hose after use. 
The usefulness of this construction is indi 
cated in Fig. 1. In the act of pulling out the 
hose H the first effect is naturally to swing 
the general structure A into the line of 
pull; second, as the hose itself begins to 
pull away from the rack the first or outer pin 
C. of the series is moved out, and thus widens 
the space through which the first or outer fold 
h of the hose is to be drawn. The pull then 
comes upon the second fold and its support 
ing-pin is drawn out in like manner, and thus 
the detachment of the hose is greatly facili 
tated and all danger of injury by too great re 
sistance of friction or tendency of the hose to 
kink is avoided. The space through which 
it is to be drawn out is thus widened at the 
moment when it is to be availed of. 
It will be seen that even if the rack should 
be so filled up by the hose as to permit no 
movement of the first or outer pin in the se 
ries the second Would nevertheless have a 
movement and each successive one a greater 
movement. 
The construction also facilitates replacing 
the hose, as will be readily understood. The 
pins a have also the function of friction-rolls. 
A second feature of my improvement has 
relation to the turning on of the Water-sup 
ply. Upon the lower end of the pivot-pin b' 
I swivel a depending yokec, having an easily 
withdrawable cross-pin d, passing through 
and between its jaws. Upon this pin is hung 
a chain or cord ac, suspending a weight W. 
An extension of the chain beyond the pin d 
is attached to the operating-lever e of a Wal 
ter plug or valve E, with which the hose is 
connected. The pin disconnected independ 
ently with the last fold of the hose and is 
drawn out by the dropping of the last fold 
from the rack A. As soon as the pin is drawn 
out the weight drops, and as the construction 
and arrangement of the parts give consider 
able slack of chain the weight, with its 
added momentum brought to bear suddenly 
upon the lever e and insures the opening of 
the valve under all circumstances. 
I claim as my invention and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent of the United States 
1. In a hose-rack, the combination of two 
side pieces, each having a longitudinal slot, 
with pins or rungs adapted to engage and 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
95 
IOO 
2 
586,105 
2. The combination of a pivoted hose-rack: 
move in the slots of the side pieces, substan- minally with the chain, substantially as set to 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
a swivel-yoke adapted to move with the rack: my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
a pin carried removably by the yoke and con- witnesses. 
nected to the last fold of the hose: a weight 
supported by a chain from the pin at an in- 
termediate point in the chain: and a water- 
plug whose operating-handle is connected ter- 
CHARLES NUHRING. 
forth. 
Witnesses: 
L. M. EIOSEA, 
FRANK IS. BOWMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586205.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 586,205. 
W. T., SLIDER, 
BRIDGE FOR FIRE HOSE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented July 13, 1897. 
 
Witnesses. 
-4a. 
bed. 
42-(2-(2-azze. 
C2 
2'azz doe: 
y 
Z. ZSA/AAAp 
/7to 2rezes. 
(No Model.) 
No. 586,205, 
W. T. SLIDER, 
BRIDGE FOR FIRE HOSE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented July 13, 1897. 
S SNSS ni IV NA S 
N 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
T 
- E. 
are: 
- " - was 
m 
ta 
s 
II ---. 
4zaesses. 
44a2.7%aldeae, 
4C (2/(Zazze 
C2ve a toe, 
YWal/a/1 7. Sivdar 
73% maxa 
/7tto a 2veys. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM THOMAS SLIDER, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
THIRD TO JOSEPH MATZ, OF SAME PLACE. 
BRIDGE FOR FIRE-Hose. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,205, dated July 13, 1897. 
Application filed February 12, 1897, Serial No. 623,140, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM THOMAS 
SLIDER, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Indianapolis, in the county of Marion 
5 and State of Indiana, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Bridges for 
Fire-Hose; and I do declare the following to 
be a full, clear, and exact description of the 
invention, such as will enable others skilled 
Io in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, and to the letters of 
reference marked thereon, which form a part 
of this specification. 
15 My invention relates to an apparatus that 
is designed to be used upon the track or rails 
of street-railways as Well as steam-railways; 
and it consists of the parts and combination of 
parts whereby I provide a temporary bridge 
2O adapted to carry the cars over Water-hose 
which may be laid across the tracks during 
fires or at other times, as will be more fully 
described hereinafter, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
25 The object of my invention is to provide an 
apparatus of this character which may be 
compact in form, so as to be readily handled, 
quickly connected and placed in position and 
removed, and which shall be durable and 
3o efficient in use; and I attain these objects in 
my invention illustrated in the drawings ac 
companying. ' 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a plan view of a section of railway to 
35 which my bridge is applied; Fig. 2, a longi 
tudinal sectional view on the line XX of Fig. 
1; Fig. 3, an end view of the bridge applied 
to the track, the rails being shown in trans 
verse section; Fig. 4, a central sectional view 
4o of the spreading-nut; Fig. 5, an end view of 
the spreader; Fig. 6 a side view of one of the 
spreader-arms; Fig. 7, a side view of one of 
the bridge-points, showing its larger portion 
cut across diagonally; Fig. 8, a bottom plan 
45 view of a bridge-point, and Fig. 9 a side ele 
vation of the central portion of the bridge. 
In constructing my invention the various 
parts are composed of Such metal as may be 
best adapted to provide the maximum strength 
- 
In the drawings, H H designate street-rails 
as usually constructed. 
AA are metallic bridges or elevating-rails, 
which are arched at the center and have two 
upper bearing-surfaces corresponding to the 55 
upper surface of the street-rails, the lower 
surface g being adapted to carry the wheel 
flanges or Wagon-wheel and the higher sur 
face or tracke carrying the treads of the car 
wheels. The lower track g has a point g' and 6o 
at the under side is provided with claw-teeth 
g, while on the side surface, where it comes 
in contact with the inside of the higher por 
tion of the car-rail, there are claw-teeth m. 
The trackse have elongated points e' and the 65 
under side of these have claw-teeth e, being 
adapted to gouge into the street-rails when 
the Weight of the cars are upon them. 
The central part of the bridge is preferably 
inclosed by a web, but is provided with a 7o 
suitable aperture F to admit the water-hose 
G. This aperture, when the bridge is not in 
use, is closed by suitable doors E, which 
When in use are opened and stand outward 
and when suitably blocked up at their outer 75 
ends provide a substantial support to the 
bridge laterally. At the inside of each bridge 
piece is a pair of lugs a, to which are con 
nected crossed braces B B', which are pivoted 
to the lugs by means of bolts b. The cross- 8o 
braces are loosely connected at their centers 
by means of a suitable bolt?, inserted through 
suitable slots f' in the bars. When the cross 
braces are detached from the bridge-rails, 
they are conveniently held together by means 85 
of the center bolt f. 
Near each end of the elevating-rails are 
transverse holes l', which are preferably 
square in cross-sectionald are adapted to re 
ceive the ends l of the spreading-arms C, the go 
body of the latter being in the form of a cross 
as seen transversely, having wings h, which 
provide a stiff brace with comparatively light 
weight. The opposite end of each armi is 
provided with screw-threads adapted to en- 95 
gage the screw-threads in the spreading-nut 
D, the ends d of which have screw-threads 
d, those in one end being right-hand and 
those in the opposite end being left-hand. 
The center of the nut dis enlarged and is pro Od 
5o with the minimum weight. 
 
8 
586,205 
vided with suitable holes d' therethrough in 
which to insert a lever. Thespreading-arms, 
with their coupling-nut, are readily detach 
able from the bridge-rails by contracting their 
length and withdrawing their ends from the 
socket-holes. 
The whole apparatus is of such design as to 
permit of being made very light, and, being 
detachable, the several parts may be handled 
by any one and quickly placed in position 
over a line or number of lines of fire-hose, 
and when the nuts D of the spreading-arms 
are turned so as to expand the arms are forced 
into contact with the inner sides of the street 
rails, thereby effectively securing them. It 
is obvious that a device so constructed is ca 
pable of sustaining a street-car while passing 
above the rails, and my device may also be 
made sufficiently strong to support steam 
railway cars in a like manner. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination with a railway-track of 
a pair of arched bridge-rails having the up 
per surfaces corresponding to the upper sur 
faces of the street-rails, said arched rails hav 
ing at the central part thereof a suitable ap 
erture to receive lines of water-hose, doors 
hinged at one side of said bridge-rails provid 
ing a lateral support, when in their open po 
sition; claw-teeth at the under side of each 
end of said bridge-rails and at the outer side 
of the lower track thereof adapted to gouge 
IO 
30 
35 
45 
55 
into said street-rails; apertures at the inside 
of each end of said bridge-rails; a lug at each 
end of said bridge-rails at the inner side there 
of, crossed braces pivoted to said lugs connect 
ing the said pair of bridge-rails; spreading 
arms adapted to enter said apertures in the 
rail ends; a spreading-nut suitably threaded 
and engaging the opposite ends of said spread 
ing-arms by which said rails may be forced 
apart and in contact with said street-rails 
substantially as and for the purposes shown 
and described. 
2. In a bridge for fire-hose of the character 
described the combination of the arched rails 
A having the claw-teeth e, g and m at the 
lower sides of the ends thereof, and central 
opening F, said bridges having the apertures 
l" and provided with the doors E providing, 
When open, a lateral brace for said bridge 
rails; the cross-braces B B connecting said 
bridge-rails; the spreading-arms C adapted 
to engage at one end in said apertures land 
the spreading-nut D connecting the opposite 
ends of said arms to provide means for spread 
ing said bridge-rails against the inner sides of 
said track-rails substantially as and for the 
purposes shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM THOMAS STLIDER. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. S. THURMAN, 
E. T. SILVIUS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586305.txt	(No Model.) 
F. J. CREQUE & F. R. MOORE, 
COMBINED SCRUB BRUSH AND SOAP HOLDER. 
No. 586,305, 
Patented July l3, 1897. 
" 
.. 8 
9 
5 
7, 
Fig. 3 
 
AIOffi ON 
  
WITWESSES. 
 
(gefa-4-ca.5 
IWWEWTORS 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK J. CREQUE AND FRANK R. MOORE, OF CUYAHOGA FALLS, OHIO. 
COMBINED SCRUB - BRUSH AND SOAP HOLDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,305, dated July 18, 1897. 
Application filed February 6, 1897, Serial No. 622,295. (No model.) 
2O in the claim. 
To all livhon, it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that we, FRANK J. CREQUE 
and FRANK R. MOORE, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Cuyahoga Falls, in the 
5 county of Summit and State of Ohio, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in a Combined Scrub-Brush and Soap-Holder; 
and we do hereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
1 o vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part of this speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
improvements in a combined scrub-brush and 
soap-holder; and it consists in the construc 
tion and arrangement of parts as hereinafter 
fully set forth, and pointed out particularly 
The object of the invention is to provide an 
article of the character set forth wherein the 
body or back of the brush is provided with an 
aperture, in which aperture a cake of soap 
25 may be placed so that its lower side and edges 
shall be subjected to the action of water when 
said brush is immersed therein, and said soap 
being so located and supported as to be de 
posited upon the bristles of the brush through 
3o the action of albrasion occasioned by the use 
of the brush in its ordinary capacity, which 
object will be attained by the construction 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a general perspective view of a 
brush provided with our improved means for 
holding soap therein, said view showing the 
normal location of the parts. Fig. 2 is a per 
spective view of the brush, showing the soap 
4o aperture cover raised from the brush and the 
spring-depressed follower secured to the un 
der side thereof, said view also showing a cake 
of soap within said aperture. Fig. 3 is a cen 
tral vertical longitudinal section through Fig. 
45 1, and Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail of the plate 
and wire which I employ for supporting the 
soap within the aperture of the brush-back. 
Referring to the numerals of reference, 1. 
designates the back or body of an ordinary 
5o scrub-brush, which is provided therein with 
a central rectangular aperture 1'. 
2 designates the supporting-wire, which 
may be of any Suitable formation, so long as 
it has a horizontal portion, as 2', adapted to 
cross the aperture 1" of the brush below the 
under side thereof and provided with spurs, 
as 3, which may be anchored in the body for 
the purpose of holding said wire in place. 
4 represents a plate, which may be of any 
material, of such size as to afford sufficient 
Support for a cake of soap 5, as hereinafter 
described. 
6 indicates a cover of sufficient area to ex 
tend entirely over the aperture 1", as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 3, and which is held thereover 
by passing its reduced ends 6' under bales 7, 
which bales extend diagonally across the up 
per face of the brush-back, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2. 
8 indicates a follower which is adapted to 
move vertically within the central aperture 
1", and 9 represents a coiled spring which is 
interposed between said cover 6 and said foll 
lower 8, one end of said spring being fastened 
to said follower and the opposite end to said 
cover, and the tendency of said spring being 
to exert a downward pressure upon the fol 
lower when the cover 6 is secured in place, 
as shown in Figs. I and 3. 
. 
The bristles of the brush may be secured 
in the body in any desired manner, as we do 
not claim this feature of the article as our in 
vention. 
The manner of using the brush, as described 
herein, is as follows: The parts being in the 
position shown in Fig. 1, the cover 6 is re 
leased from its engagement with bales 7 by 
turning said cover so that its ends 6' will be 
carried out from under said bales 7, as will 
be readily understood, when said cover may 
be raised from the brush-back and the spring 
9 and follower S withdrawn from the aperture 
1", when a cake of soap, as 5, may be placed 
in said aperture So as to rest upon plate 4, as 
shown in Fig. 3, when said follower may be 
caused to renter said aperture and pressed 
downward through the medium of spring 9 by 
forcing the ends 6' of the cover 6 under the 
bales 7, as will be readily understood. 
The plate 4 may be of any desired size, but 
it is preferable that it shall be no larger than 
is necessary to form a suitable support for the 
under side of the soap. 
It will thus be seen that the construction 
2 
586,305 
 
O 
and arrangement of parts hereinbefore set 
forth, when associated as described, will pro 
duce a brush that may be used in the capacity 
of the ordinary brush, at the same time dis 
tributing soap into the bristles of the brush 
in a sufficient quantity to serve the purpose 
of scrubbing and without Waste, and many 
other features of advantage will at once be 
apparent to users of these articles. 
Having thus fully set forth our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
As a new article of manufacture, a scrub 
brush and soap-holder, the same consisting of 
the body 1 having suitable bristles secured 
therein, the central rectangular aperture 1 
extending therethrough, the bales 7 secured 
in the upper face of said brush-back and ex 
tending diagonally therea cross, the cover 6 of 
such dimensions as to extend over said aper 
ture, the reduced ends of said cover adapted 
to be passed under said bales, the supporting 
wire 2 having spurs as 3, adapted to be se 
cured in said back, the horizontal portion 2' 
adapted to extend across said aperture 1' be 
low the plane of the under face of the brush 
back, the plate 4 secured upon the horizontal 
portion 2' of said supporting-wire, the soap, 
as 5, adapted to enter said aperture 1" and to 
rest upon said plate 4, the follower 8 adapted 
to enter said aperture and to bear upon said 
soap, and the coiled spring 9 interposed be 
tween the cover 6 and said follower S, substan 
tially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
35 
FRANK J. CREQUE. 
FRANK R. MOORE. 
Witnesses: 
E. A. CREQUE, 
J. B. MERRIMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586405.txt	(No Model.) 
? 13, 1897. 
----- 
 
- - - - - - - - -- ------------ 
5 - 11  111------ 
THE Norris PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo. washington, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
S. M. WAU CLAIN & J. Y. McC0NNELL. 
COMBINED RACK AND ADHESION LOCOMOTIVE, 
No. 586,405. 
Patented July 13, 1897. 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
N 
is 
O 
S 
e 
 
 
 
W 
NINT ? N 
N 
 
S 
zvesses: 
?? ???? 
() ? s/2 
Zezer 
Yzzezo. 
?????? 
?? 
??? 
?? 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
S. M. WAUCLAIN & J. Y. McCONNELL, 
COMBINED RACK AND ADHESION LOCOMOTIVE, 
Patented July 
No. 586,405. 
1897. 
III, 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Modei.) 
S. M. V AUCLAIN & J. Y. McCONNELL. 
COMBINED RACK AND ADHESION LOCOMOTIVE. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 586,405, 
Patented July 13, 1897. 
 
 
THE *W&Rs PFSTEFs te Pro-TH 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL M. VAUCLAIN, OF PHILADELPHIA, AND JACOB Y. McCONNELL OF 
DARBY, PEN NSYLVANIA. 
COMBINED RACK AND ADHES ON LOCOMOTIVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,405, dated July 18, 1897. 
Application filed March 18, 1897, serial No. 628,218, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, SAMUEL.M.VAUCLAIN, 
of Philadelphia, and JACOB Y. McCONNELL, 
of Darby, Pennsylvania, citizens of the United 
5 States, have invented certain Improvements 
in a Combined Rack and Adhesion Ilocomo 
tive, of which the following is a specification. 
The object of our invention is to so con 
struct the mechanism of a locomotive that 
Io the driving-axles on which are mounted the 
rack-Wheels can be thrown into and out of 
gear with the adhesion-wheels, so that it can 
be used either as an adhesion-locomotive or 
as a rack-locomotive. 
5 Our invention consists in certain clutching 
mechanism on one or both axles, which is con 
trolled by a lever in the cab of the locomo 
tive, so that when the engine-driver passes 
from an inclined plane to a level track he can 
2O operate the mechanism and clutch the adhe 
sion-wheels to the axle, as fully described 
hereinafter, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of a locomotive in 
25 dotted lines, with the parts illustrating our 
invention in full lines. Fig. 2 is a plan view, 
drawn to a larger scale, on the line 22, Fig. 1, 
with a portion in section. Fig. 3 is a trans 
verse sectional view on the line 33, Fig. 1. 
3o Fig. 4 is a sectional view on the line 44, Fig. 2. 
A is the frame of a locomotive, having the 
usual pedestals a for the boxes a' of the axles 
BB'. These axles have the cranks bb at each 
side beyond the frames, as shown in Fig. 3, 
35 and secured to the central portion of each 
axle are the toothed wheels C C, which en 
gage with the rackmounted between the rails 
of the roadway. These wheels are perma 
nently secured to the axles and revolve with 
Secured to each side of the rack-wheels are 
the brake-drums c, which are used in this 
construction of rack-locomotives. 
It will be understood that other forms of 
45 toothed wheels may be used without depart 
ing from our invention. In some instances 
a single wheel may replace the double wheels. 
D are the supporting or adhesion wheels, 
being of the flanged type and loosely mount 
5o ed on the axles BB'. These wheels travel On 
4o them at all times. 
the ordinary type of rails, and when the rack 
Wheels are engaging the rack they simply act 
as supporting-wheels; but in order to utilize 
these wheels as driving-wheels when a loco 
motive is on a level or slight grade we pro- 55 
vide mechanism for clutching the wheels to 
the axles, so that they then become the driv 
ing-wheels. We so arrange the clutch that 
it is a positive clutch, yet at the same time 
can be thrown during any portion of the move- 6o 
ment and it will automatically lock at the 
proper point. 
On the inner end of the hub of each wheel 
D are projections d, separated by suitable 
spaces, which form the fixed jaw of a clutch, 65 
while on each axle is the sliding section E of 
the clutch, having spaced projections e, which 
when moved into engagement with the wheel 
enter the spaces between the projection d on 
the hub of the wheel, thus locking the wheel 7o 
to this sliding section E. This clutch-section 
E is splined to the axle by the keyse', so that 
it will always turn with the axle. There is 
one of these sliding clutch-sections for each 
wheel, two being mounted on each axle, as 75 
clearly shown in Fig. 2. 
In order that the engine-driver may oper 
ate this clutching mechanism during any por 
tion of the stroke, We make the connection 
between the operating parts of the lever mech- 8o 
anism and the moving clutch-section Eelastic, 
so that the said clutch-section will spring into 
place as soon as its projections are opposite 
the spaces between the projections of the 
wheel D. Each one of these connections is 85 
independent of the other, so that they all do 
not have to clutch simultaneously. 
I is a lever pivoted in the cab of the loco 
motive and connected by a rod i to an arm i' 
of a rock-shaft I, which extends across the 9o. 
locomotive, and connected to each end of this 
rock-shaft is a short arm i, which is connected 
in turn by a rod to one arm of a bell-crank 
lever I, which is hung to the frame of the lo 
comotive. The other arm of this lever is con- 95 
nected by a rod i' to the frame G, which ex 
tends from one axle to the other and is yoked 
at each end, as shown. There is one of these 
frames at each side of the locomotive. 
Mounted on each clutch-section E is a cel- Ioo 
4. 
 
586,405 
lular ring E', made in two halves bolted to 
gether within an annular channel of the sec 
tion E, and mounted upon this ring is a sec 
ond two-part ring E, having cells correspond 
ing with the cells in the ring E", and in each 
cell is a coiled springe. These springs tend 
to press the rings apart. The rings are locked 
circumferentially by the projections e of the 
inner-ring section entering cavities in the 
outer-ring section E. The bolting together 
of the two parts of the outer ring secures the 
inner ring in a linement with the outer ring, 
so that the only independent movement they 
have is the longitudinal movement. 
On the outer-ring section Eare pivot pro 
jections e, to which are pivoted the arms of 
the yoke-frame G, so that on moving the le 
ver in the cabo to Clutch the wheels to the 
axles the frames G will be moved bodily 
toward the wheels, compressing the springs 
between the rings E" E until the projections 
of the movable clutch-section are opposite the 
spaces in the adhesion - wheels, when the 
springs will force the clutch-sections quickly 
forward without a further movement of the 
frames G, and the wheels will be positively 
locked to the axles, and they can be driven 
in the same manner as an ordinary locomo 
tive driving-wheel. 
The details relating to the lever mechan 
ism for operating the frames G may be ar 
ranged differently from that shown without 
departing from our invention. The design 
of the locomotive will be taken into consid 
eration in making the connections. 
The frames G are made of two plates bent 
at each end and secured to a filling-block at 
the center by bolts in the present instance, 
and in the ends of these plates are journaled 
the pivots e* of the ring-section E*. The le 
ver mechanism is coupled to the blockmount 
ed between the plates, as clearly shown in 
the drawings. 
Whell the clutches are only mounted on 
one shaft, the frames G may be pivoted at 
One end to Swing thereon when operated by 
the mechanism connected to the lever in the 
cab. 
We claim as our invention 
1. The combination in a combined rack and 
adhesion locomotive, of a driving-axle, a rack 
wheel secured thereto, adhesion-wheels loose 
thereon and having clutch-faces, a sliding 
clutch-section for each wheel mounted on the 
shaft, means for shifting the clutch-sections 
from the cab and means for throwing the 
clutches into engagement after shifting, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination in a combined rack and 
adhesion locomotive, of the driving-axles, a 
rack-WheelSecured to each axle, the adhesion 
Wheels loose on each axle and having clutch 
faces, a sliding clutch-section for each wheel, 
said sections being mounted on the axles, a 
frame extending from one axle to the other 
and coupled to two clutch-sections one on each 
axle, with means for operating the said frames, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination of the two axles B B', 
the two adhesion-wheels loose on each axle, 
each adhesion-wheel having a clutch-face, 
sliding clutch sections mounted on each axle 
back of each wheel, two frames extending from 
one axle to the other and each coupled to a 
clutch - section on each axle, an operating 
lever connected to the two frames so that on 
moving the said lever the frames with their 
movable clutch-sections will be moved toward 
their wheels, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of an axle, a wheel 
loose thereon and having a clutch-face, a 
clutch-section adapted to turn with but slide 
longitudinally on the axle and also having a 
clutch-face adapted to engage with the clutch 
face of the wheel, a ring on the said section, 
springs mounted between the ring and the 
section, means for moving the rings toward 
and from the wheel so as to move the clutch 
section against the wheel and compress the 
spring that when the clutch-face of the sec 
tion allines with the clutch-face of the wheel 
the springs will force them into engagement, 
substantially as described. 
5. The combination of an axle, a wheel 
loose thereon having a clutch-face, a sliding 
clutch-section adapted to turn with but slide 
on the axle, a cellular ring E' on the said sec 
tion and a cellular ring E, springs within 
the cells of the two rings tending to force the 
rings apart laterally, operating mechanism 
connected to the ring E so that the clutch 
will be thrown into engagement with the wheel 
through the rings and springs, substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination of the axle, a wheel 
loose thereon and having a clutch-face, a 
sliding clutch-section Eadapted to turn with 
but slide on the axle so as to engage with the 
Wheel, an annular recess in the said section 
E, the two-part rings E' and E adapted to 
the annular recess, springs mounted between 
the rings and means for operating the clutch 
connected to the ring E, substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. The combination of the driven axle, a 
wheel loose thereon, having a clutch-face, a 
sliding clutch-section also having a clutch 
face, said section adapted to turn with but 
slide on the axle, an annular groove in the 
periphery of the section, a two-part cellular 
ring E having a base and one side mounted 
Within the groove, a two-part cellular ring 
E mounted on the ring E' and having an in 
ternal flange, with springs mounted between 
the said flange and the side of the ring E" 
within the cells, with means for moving the 
ring Etoward and from the wheel so as to 
operate the clutch, substantially as described. 
S. The combination of two axles BB, the 
wheels loose thereon having clutch-faces and 
sliding clutch-sections on the axles, a ring 
on each clutch-section, springs between the 
- 
O 
15 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
 
7? 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
IOS 
0. 
II 5 
I 20. 
I 25 
 
586,405 
3 
rings and the said sections, a frame consist- 
ing of two members, bent and secured to- names to this specification in the presence of Io 
gether to form a double-forked frame, one two subscribing witnesses. 
end of the frame being coupled to one ring 
5 and the other end being coupled to the other 
ring, with means for moving the frame to- 
ward and from the wheels, substantially as 
described. 
SAMIUEL M. VAUCLAIN. 
JACOB Y. MCCONNEILL. 
In testimony whereof we have signed our 
Witnesses: 
GEO. II. SIMPKINS, 
JUSTUS JOHNSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586505.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 586,505. 
C, MAUL, 
SPADING HARROW, 
3 Sheets-Sheet , 
Patented July 13, 1897. 
-64e Zzz veza Za 2. 
Az-z-zu c 446, 
7/2442/72. 
 
(No Model.) 
C. MAUL, 
SPADING HARROW, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 586,505, 
Patented July l3, 1897. 
in Zik. 
ifijiti, 
N (). 
philst \ 
"A gly 
}}}}} tile 
Z 
4. 
4/2Zzzesses, 
7.6.4% 
Z77 vezzzz z 
-64, a2,322 
7. /24.6% 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 586,505, 
 
C. MAUL, 
SPADING HARROW, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented July 13, 1897, 
 
4/?/nesses, 
 
wer A/ 
-64&cz24. -624, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHRISTIAN-MAUL, OF BROCKPORT, NEW YORK. 
SPADING - HARROW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,505, dated July 13, 1897. 
Application filed October 20, 1894, Serial No. 526,458, (No model.) 
O 
-- 
To all uhon, it may concern 
Beit known that I, CHRISTIAN MAUL, of 
Brockport, in the county of Monroe and State 
of New York, have invented a certain new 
and useful Improvementin Spading-Harrows; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description of the same, 
reference being had to the drawings accompa 
nying this application. 
My improvement relates to that class known 
as spading-harrows, in which two gangs of 
cutting-teeth are arranged on oppositesides of 
the center of draft and are capable of being 
operated by the driver so as to cut in a straight 
line or at an angle. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and arrangement of parts hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
the machine. Fig. 2 is a side elevation. Fig. 
3 is a front elevation, a portion of the ma 
chine being broken away. Fig. 4 is a plan 
view of one of the gangs of cutting-teeth. 
Figs. 5 and 6 are enlarged detail views show 
ing the connection of the bars of the main 
frame with the standards. Fig. 7 is an en 
larged edge view of one of the sets of teeth. 
Fig. 8 is an inside plan view of one of the 
clamps of the teeth. Fig. 9 is a diagram show 
ing one of the clamps and two of the teeth 
fitted thereto, the position of the third tooth 
being indicated by dotted lines. 
AA indicate the two gangs of teeth, and B 
the draft pole or tongue with which they are 
connected and by which they are drawn over 
the ground. 
Each of these gangs consists of 
cutter-heads provided with teeth cut from 
sheet-steel and arranged in sets at definite 
distances apart. 
The sets of each gang are 
all located on an axle C and are separated by 
washers or spools b band have end standards 
c c, which support Weight-boxes d d and also 
serve for the connection of the bars of the 
main frame. 
The main frame consists of two front bars 
C C, pivoted centrally at f to the under side 
of the pole, the outer ends being curved back 
ward, as shown at g, and passing through 
slots h. h of the outer standards c c, to which 
they are attached by bolts i , as shown most 
clearly in Figs. 5 and 6. The slots are of 
double-V shape, as shown in Fig. 5, by which 
means they allow proper side play or Swing 
to the bars laterally as the inner ends of the 
75 
In some cases the braces D may be dispensed 7o 
gangs are thrown backward to stand at an 55 
angle to the line of draft. 
D D are two braces also pivoted centrally 
at k to the under side of the pole some dis 
tance in advance of the front bars before de 
scribed, said braces being curved at their 6o 
outer ends, fitting over the curved ends of 
the front bars, and attached rigidly to said 
front bars by bolts. 
The side bars and braces form substantially 
one attachment turning on pivots at their in- 65 
ner ends and by their joint action enable 
either end of the gangs to rise and fall to ac 
commodate themselves to any incline of the 
ground at right angles to the line of draft. 
with, the front bars C C in that case forming 
the frame. 
E is a seat-support consisting of a bar piv 
oted at l to the pole and having a driver's 
seat m at the rear end. 
J is a bar forming a guide attached at its 
upper end to a bearingi, pivoted to the seat 
support, its lower end passing freely through 
socket-pieces e e, attached to the rear end of 
the pole. 
G G are supporting-arms standing in A 
form, pivoted at their lower ends, at n, n, to 
the front bars C C and at their upper ends, 
at 0, to the guide J. It will be seen that by 
means of these supporting-arms the seat and 85 
its support is sustained at the rear end and 
that they rise and fall with the rising and 
falling of the inner ends of the front bars C 
C, but in the reverse direction. In other 
words, when the inner ends of the front bars go 
fall, the seat rises, and when said inner ends 
of the front bars rise the seat falls. The ob 
ject of this is to retain the seat in Substan 
tially a level position or at the same height 
during the rise and fall of the gangs in pass-95 
ing over inclined or irregular surfaces. The 
guide J holds the seat in a vertical position 
at all times, yet allows free up-and-down mo 
tion. This arrangement is an essential fea 
ture of my invention. 
H is an operating-lever pivoted at p to the 
pole and provided with two forked arms q q. 
at its lower end, to which are pivoted con 
necting-bars r r, extending back and pass 
ing through slots of the inner standards C C, Io5 
to which they are bolted in the same manner 
as the outer ends of the front bars before de 
scribed. By throwing the lever forward the 
IOC 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
m 
586,505 
 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
inner ends of the gangs are thrown back 
Ward, so as to stand at an angle to the line of 
draft, thereby producing a greater cutting 
or pulverizing action in the soil. 
I is a segment or circle plate, notched in 
its Outer edge, With which engages a pawl on 
the operating-lever to hold the latter in place 
at any adjustment. 
The parts composing the main frame are 
all made by cutting off lengths from straight 
bar or strap iron and then bending them into 
proper shape. The frame can therefore be 
made cheaper than the ordinary stiff frames 
now in use. 
The construction described has the advan 
tage of allowing almost universal action of 
the gangs in adapting themselves to the sur 
face of the soil. The gangs can be readily 
shifted from one side to the other, as they are 
interchangeable, thus throwing the soil in 
Ward instead of outward. The standards cc 
are also interchangeable, so that a single pat 
tern Only is required in making the castings. 
There are a less number of castings than in 
ordinary machines of the class, whereby the 
expense is reduced. 
Each of the cutter-heads consists of three 
blades KKK and two clamping-heads L. L. 
(Shown in Figs. 7, 8, and 9.) The clamping 
heads are counterparts made from a single 
pattern, and each consists of a disk having a 
Square central eye s, in which fits a corre 
Sponding Square shoulder t on the end of the 
Washer or spool b, by which means when all 
are clamped together they turn with the axle. 
In the inner face of each disk is made a 
Sunken seat it, of an angular shape, Fig. 8, 
in Which fits the shank of one of the blades 
IK, which shank fills the space flush with the 
Surface. Above this is placed the shank of 
the next blade, resting against shoulders at 
'U, forming a second raised seat, by which it 
is Supported. These two blades are fitted to 
One of the disks. The third blade, whose po 
sition is indicated by the dotted linesin Fig. 
9, is fitted in a seat of the other disk, similar 
in shape to the seat it. When the two disks 
are placed face to face, they form slots y 21, 
in which the blades rest and by which they 
are held. Each blade is made with two 
branching teeth 2 2, of curved form, and the 
ends are bent laterally to the desired degree 
to produce the necessary digging and turn 
ing action in the soil. This construction of 
the blades is such that the shank portion 
is of large extent, resting flatwise between 
the disks and giving great strength. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a Spading-harrow, the combination 
With the draft-pole and the two gangs of teeth, 
of the front bars C, C, attached at one end to 
Standards connected with the gangs, and piv 
Oted at the other end to the pole, the seat 
Support E. pivoted to the pole, and the arms 
G, G, connecting the front bars with the seat 
support, as shown and described and for the 
purpose set forth. 
2. In a spading-harrow, the combination 
with the cutting-teeth-carrying frames C, C, 
hinged to the opposite sides of the pole B, of 
a seat mounted between the said frames upon 
the outer end of the bar E, which is pivoted 
to the pole, and which is supported by di 
agonal bars G, G, the outer ends of which are 
pivoted to the inner ends of the cutting-teeth 
carrying frames, the inner ends being piv 
oted to a vertical guide-bar J, the lower end 
of which is adapted to slide freely through a 
guide-socket located at the rear of the pole, 
the said vertical rod carrying at its upper end 
a pivoted bifurcated support i, through the 
bifurcation of which passes the seat-support 
ing rod E, all combining to operate substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a Spading-harrow, the combination of 
the frame made in two sectionshinged on op 
posite sides of the pole, the said frame com 
prising the rods C, C, the inner ends of which 
are pivoted to the pole, and the outer ends 
bent rearwardly, being pivoted vertically to 
the outer pair of vertical standards which 
carry the axles upon which the cutting-teeth 
are mounted, the inner pair of vertical stand 
ards being connected to the lever which is 
adapted to adjust the cutting-teeth-carrying 
axles at the desired angle, of a diagonal seat 
support pivoted to the pole, and passing 
through the bifurcated blocki, which is piv 
oted to the upper end of the vertical rod J, 
which is adapted to slide freely through a 
guide-socket located at the rear end of the 
pole, the said seat-support and vertical rod 
being upheld by two diagonal rods G, G, dis 
posed at opposite sides of the vertical rod, 
the lower ends of which are pivoted to the in 
ner ends of hinged sections carrying the cut 
ting-teeth, and the inner ends to the vertical 
rod, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
4. The cutting-teeth of the class described 
comprising the disks L,L, each having the 
squared central eyes, in which fit the squared 
shoulders of the spools connecting together a 
series of the said cutting-teeth, and by which 
the said teeth are clamped together, the inner 
face of each disk having the sunken seat u, 
and the shoulders U, 2U, the said sunken seats 
being adapted to receive the shanks of two 
of the blades of the said cutter, which fill the 
said sunken seats flush, the edge of the shank 
of the third blade resting against the shoul 
ders v, v, the said third shank being clamped 
between the shanks of the other blades, sub 
stantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
CIRISTIAN MAUL. 
Witnesses: 
R. F. OsCOOD, 
P. A. COSTICH. 
75 
95 
OO 
I o5 
TO 
II5 
12o 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586605.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 586,605. 
W. H. KNIGHT, 
CONTROLLER FOR FLUID PRESSURE MOTORS. 
C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES : 
The Norris pereps co., Phot 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER II. KNIGHT, OF NIE W BRIGHT ON, NEW YORK. 
CONTROLLER FOR FLUID PRESSURE MOTORS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,605, dated July 20, 1897. 
Application filed June 3, 1896, Serial No. 594,084, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
75 
To Cull, luwih 07m2, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WALTER H. KNIGHT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Brighton, in the county of Richmond and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Controllers for Fluid 
Pressure Motors, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
The main object of my invention is to pro 
vide means for placing all of the valves and 
operating devices of a fluid-pressure motor 
under the control of a single controlling de 
WI??. 
Another object of my invention is to pro 
vide the motor-cylinder with automatic vac 
uum-relief valves which will automatically 
admit air to the cylinder after the cut-off of 
the fluid to prevent formation of a partial 
Vacuum behind the piston. These automatic 
relief-valves are also controlled by a single 
controlling device, so as to be automatically 
opened when the fluid-pressure has been cut 
off to enable the motor to run freely for fa 
cilitating coasting, my improved fluid-pres 
sure engine being particularly adapted for 
motor-cars. To accomplish these objects, I 
provide an automatic vacuum-relief valve at 
each end of the motor-cylinder. Suitable 
connecting devices extend from the valves to 
the controlling device, whereby they can be 
simultaneously opened by a movement of the 
controller. I provide the steam-distributing 
valve of the motor with any suitable revers 
ing mechanism, which is also connected to 
the controlling device, and for supplying the 
compressed air I provide an air-reservoir and 
a reducing-valve, a high-pressure throttle 
alve being interposed between the reservoir 
and reducing-valve and a low-pressure valve 
being interposed between the reducing-valve 
and fluid-chest of the motor. Both the high 
pressure and low-pressure throttle-valves are 
connected to the controlling-valves to be si 
multaneously opened or closed thereby. I 
prefer to include a heater in the system be 
tween the reducing-valve and low-pressure 
throttle-valve. 
In order that my invention may be fully 
understood, I will first describe the same with 
reference to the accompanying drawings and 
afterward point out the novelty with more 
particularity in the annexed claims. 
In Figure 1 of said drawings I have repre 
sented my invention in diagrammatic sec 
tional elevation, and in Fig. 2 a sectional view 
of the relief-valve. 
A is the engine-cylinder, in which operates 
the piston B, mounted on the piston-rod C, 
which is connected to the sliding cross 
head D. 
E is the crank-shaft, carrying the crank E, 
which is connected to the cross-head D by the 
pitman F. 
G is the fluid-pressure chest, communicat 
ing with the opposite ends of the cylinder A, 
and G' is the distributing sliding valve. 
II is an ordinary reversing-link suitably 
connected to the distributing-valve G' and 
adapted to be operated by the eccentries I on 
the crank-shaft E. 
J is a compressed-air reservoir, and J is a 
high-pressure throttle-valve located in the 
Supply-pipe extending from said reservoir. 
K is a reducing-Valve, and Lisa heater in 
terposed in the fluid-pressure-supply pipe be 
tween the high-pressure throttle-valve and 
engine. 
M is a low-pressure throttle-valve located 
between the heater and engine. The throt 
tle-valves J' and M are suitably connected by 
toggle-links N, by reason of which they are 
simultaneously opened or closed. 
O is the longitudinally-movable controlling 
rod, sliding in bearings O'. The rod O is 
pivoted to the knuckle of toggle-links N. 
P is the controller-le Ver, connected through 
link P and bell-crank lever P* with the lon 
gitudinally-movable controller-rod O. 
H''' is a bell-crank lever, and II* is a con 
necting-rod which connects the reversing-link 
II with the controlling-rod O. 
In the opposite ends of the cylinder A are 
automatic vacuum-relief valves Q. (Shown 
in the enlarged detail sectional view.) 
Q' arebell-cranklevers engaging the valve 
stems of the relief-valves Q and formed with 
lugs q on their short arms, which are adapted 
to be engaged by cam-shoulders R on the con 
95 
O 
2 ( ) 
35 
45 
 
2 
586,605 
1 ? 
troller-rod O. By these means the valves Q 
are forced open and held open by the control 
ling mechanism when the throttle is closed, 
so as to prevent the excessive compression 
that occurs when the link is at mid-gear, the 
air as it is compressed passing through the 
valves Q and into the crank-basin or else 
around to the other end of the cylinder through 
by-pass T. When the throttle is open and 
the motor doing Work, the valves Q act as Or 
dinary vacuum - relief Valves, Opening in 
wardly whenever the pressure in the cylin 
der falls below theatmosphere. In any Case 
whethel acting as vacuum-relief valves Ol' 
compression-relief valves the arrangement is 
such that only pure air free fron dust will 
be admitted to the cylinder from the crank 
chamber. 
The engine is shown at l'est with the re 
versing mechanism in central position, the 
relief-valves open, and the high and low pres 
sure throttle - valves closed. It will be ob 
served that by moving the hand-lever P in 
either direction both throttle-valves Will be 
opened, while the reversing-link will be moved 
either upward or downward, and the cylinder 
relief valves will be simultaneously allowed 
to close. 
VWhile I have S?o Wyn mechanism for utiliz 
ing the vacuum-relief valves as compression 
relief valves, I may provide separate valves 
for this purpose, in whiclh case the compres 
sion-relief could take the form of a stop-cock 
or valve placed in a by-pass between the two 
ends of the cylinder, the controller opening 
such cock or valve when it closes the throt 
tle, and Vice versa. Such a modification is 
indicated by dotted lines in the drawings, U. 
being a passage communicating between the 
ends of the cylinder and V a cock in said pas 
sage provided with a crank-arm V', connected 
to controlling-rod O by link W. This form 
of relief-valve in a by-pass communicating 
between the ends of the cylinder is described 
and claimed in my application, Serial No. 
597,32S, filed June 29, 1896, for improvements 
in motor-vehicles. I have found that the use 
of Such compression-relief Valves not only 
enables the notor to run free or without 
power for a much longer time than when they 
are not used, but also conduces greatly to the 
Smoothness of operation. In air-motors this 
feature of relieving compression when the no 
tor is running free is especially necessary on 
account of the fact that the air differs from 
steam in not condensing. It is particularly 
valuable in the case of vehicles, where about 
half the time the motor is coasting, as other 
Wise if the compression is not relieved there 
is a very decided retardation. Of course a 
large part of the energy of compression is re 
turned into mechanical work by subsequent 
expansion on the back stroke; but owing to 
the fact that the air is heated to a high de 
gree by compression and Some of the heat es 
capes by radiation there is always a loss by 
the variation of the energy of compression, 
amounting to probably about twenty per cent. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination in all air-motor, of a 
throttle-valve, or other means of controlling 
the power of the motor, vacuum-relief valves 
opening inwardly to relieve the cylinder of 
vacuum, and mechanism for holding Open Said 
Vacuum-Valves, said mechanism being con 
nected with the motor-controlling mechanism 
so that the said vacuum-valves will be held 
open when the motor is not doing Work, in 
order to relieve the motor of compression Oc 
curring at the ends of the stroke. 
2. The combination in an air-motor, of vac 
uum-relief valves, and means for holding the 
same open when the motor is not doing Work, 
of a passage Ol' passages communicating With 
both valves and also with the crank-basin Ol' 
exhaust-chamber of the motorso that nothing 
but pure air will be drawn into the cylinder. 
3. A controller for air-motor vehicles con 
structed to operate the high-pressure throttle 
leading from the high-pressure reservoirs, the 
low-pressure throttle, the variable cut-off, and 
reversing mechanism, and the compression 
relief valves, with one handle, the off position 
of the handle closing both throttles and open 
ing the relief-valves. 
4. The combination of a fluid-pressure en 
gine, provided With a compression - 1'elief 
valve, with a high-pressure reservoir, a throt 
tle-valve and a controlling device adapted to 
simultaneously operate the relief-valves and 
throttle-valve, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of a fluid-pressure en 
gine, provided with compression-relief valves 
anda fluid-distributing valve, suitable revers 
ing mechanism, a fluid-pressure reservoir, a 
throttle-valve, and controlling means adapted 
to simultaneously operate the relief-valves, 
the reversing mechanism and the throttle 
valve, Substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination of a fluid-pressure en 
gine having Suitable compression - relief 
valves and a fluid-distributing valve, suitable 
reversing mechanism, a compressed-air reser 
voir, a high-pressure throttle-Valve, a reduc 
ing-valve, a low-pressure throttle-valve, and 
Suitable controlling means adapted to simul 
taneously operate the cylinder-relief valves, 
the reversing mechanism and the two throt 
tle-valves, substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination of a fluid-pressure en 
gilae, provided with automatic vacuum-relief 
valves and a fluid-distributing valve, with 
a throttle-valve, and a controlling device 
adapted to open the relief-valves when the 
throttle-valve is closed and vice versa, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
S. The combination in a fluid-pressure mo 
tor for motor-vehicles, of a motor-cylinder 
5 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
65 
7 O 
9 O 
CO 
I O5 
II. ? 
II 5 
 
586,605 
work, in order to relieve the cylinder of com 
pression occurring at the ends of the stroke, 
substantially as set forth. 
WALTER H. KNIGHT. 
Witnesses: 
M. C. BENDER, 
M. W. BID GOOD. 
having compression-relief valves, with a mo 
tor-controlling device regulating the Supply 
of fluid to the cylinder and operatively con 
nected with the compression-relief valves, 
said controlling device being adapted to si 
multaneously operate said relief-valves to 
hold them open when the motor is not doing 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586705.txt	(No Model.) 
G. DEISER OTH. 
COWERED PAN FOR, CULINARY PURPOSES, 
No. 586,705. 
 
Patented July 20, 1897. 
Witnesses: 
-6 %Cha- 
(, . 
- 
George Deiseroth. 
Laventor, 
ove Detseroth. 
t 
6ZJ YA 
Attorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE DEISER OTH OF AL BANY, NEW YORK. 
COWERED PAN FOR CULINARY PURPOSES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,705, dated July 20, 1897. 
Application filed April 17, 1896, Serial No. 587,925, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To atti, tuft.07, it ju?tly concern. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE DEISEROTH, of 
Albany, in the county of Albany and State 
of New York, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Covered Pans for Culinary 
Purposes, of which the following is a speci?i 
cation. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
covered pans in which baking and other op 
erations pertaining to cooking and similar 
processes can be effected; and it consists of a 
sheet-metal pan and cover, which are sub 
stantially counterparts, divided by indenta 
tions into corresponding spaces to indicate 
transverse lines of separation in the article 
formed therein and longitudinal indentations 
in top and bottom to indicate lines of longi 
till dinal separation in the article formed there 
in, one part of said pan being provided with 
fastenings by which the two parts can be 
clamped together in corresponding position. 
In the accompanying drawings, which are 
herein referred to and form part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a plan view of my cov 
ered pan with a portion of the upper part or 
cover broken out to show the inner side of 
the lower part; Fig. 2, an end elevation of 
my covered pan, showing the two parts locked 
together; and Fig. 3, a longitudinal vertical 
section of part of my covered pan at the irreg 
ular line XX on Fig. 1. 
As represented in the drawings, A desig 
nates the upper section or cover of my pan, 
which is made of sheet metal in the form of 
a rectangle with slightly-flaring sides and 
ends to facilitate the removal of an article 
formed therein. Said cover is usually formed 
by dies, and has transverse grooves 1 formed 
in the outer side of the top, whereby corre 
sponding ridges 2 are produced on its inner 
side. In the flaring sides of said cover grooves 
3 are formed in the outer side to produce 
ridges 4, which correspond in form and posi 
tion to the ridges 2 at the top of the cover. 
In the top and each flaring end of the cover 
A a longitudinal groove 5 is formed to pro 
duce a corresponding ridge on the inner side 
of said cover. A flange 6 extends around 
the bottom edge of the flaring sides and ends 
of the cover A, for a purpose hereinafter ex 
plained. 
B is the bottom section of the pan, and it 
IC 
25 
35 
45 
is the exact counterpart of the cover A and 
is provided with grooves and ridges that cor 
respond in every respect to those of the cover 
A. At each end of the bottom section B a 
spring-catch C is Secured in position corre 
sponding to the groove 5 of the cover B. 
Said spring-catch is made of resilient sheet 
metal, is secured to the bottom section, and 
is provided with a shoulder 7, that is adapted 
to engage over the flange 6 of the cover A in 
such manner that the sections A and B will 
be securely locked together. The spring 
catch C has its upper arm formed to a V 
shaped ridge, as at S, and said ridge will take 
into the groove 5 at either end of the cover A, 
and thereby the parts A and B will be brought 
into exact correspondence. 
When my pan is used for baking bread or 
other raised material, the bottom section B 
should be fully filled with the dough and the 
cover A secured thereon, after which the pan 
and its contents should be put aside to afford 
time for the dough to rise in the cover. Then 
by Subjecting the pan and its contents to a 
suitable heat in an oven the dough will rise 
sufficiently to entirely fill the pan, both top 
and bottom sections. The moisture driven 
out of the dough in the process of baking will 
prevent the formation of a hard crust on the 
loaf, and the moisture will permeate through 
the loaf without rendering the same sogg 
and heavy. 
By constructing my pan of sheet metal I 
am enabled to obtain an equal thickness of 
metal at all points, thereby insuring an equal 
effect of the heat in the process of baking, 
and, the upper and lower sections being ex 
act counterparts, one die can be employed 
for stamping up the tWO parts. The trans 
verse ridges being Spaced at equal distances 
produce indentations in the loaf for cutting 
slices of uniform thickness, and the longitu 
dinal ridges produce indentations in the loaf 
to indicate the proper place to separate the 
slices into equal parts for the purpose of cut 
ting slices for sandwiches. The longitudinal 
grooves afford a suitable means for receiving 
a fastening device, whereby the two parts 
can be held sidewise in a true relation to each 
other. 
The two parts of my pan can be used sepa 
rately, for the purpose of baking cake, mold 
Od 
2 
586,705 
ing ice-cream or jellies, in which the ridges dian line; one of said parts having fastening Io 
of the parts will form indentations to indicate devices, substantially as described, adapted 
the places for dividing the same into suitable to take into the longitudinal groove of the 
pieces of uniform size. 
other part and lock the two parts together, 
What I claim as my invention, and desire substantially as specified. 
to secure by Letters Patent, is- 
A sheet-lmetalcovered pan composed of two 
like parts, each having a series of transverse 
grooves and a longitudinal groove at its me- 
WM. I. Low, 
LOUIS SCHWARTZ. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE DEISEEROTH. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586805.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
J. WATT. 
APPARATUS FOR REMOWING SEDIMENT FROM STEAM BOILERS, 
No. 586,805. 
Patented July 20, 1897. 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. W. ATT. 
APPARATUS FOR REMOWING SEDIMENT FROM STEAM BOILERS, 
No. 586,805. 
Patented July 20, 1897. 
 
JOHN WATT, OF BIRIKENHEAD, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR TO WILLIAM IRVING, 
OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
APPARATUS FOR REMOWING SEDMENT FROM STEAM-BOLERS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,805, dated July 20, 1897. 
Application filed February 16, 1897, Serial No. 623,740. (No model.) Patented in England June 4, 1888, No, 8,078, 
w 
5 
25 
I O fication. 
2O of various forms. 
To ?till ution, it inctly concer. 
Be it known that I, JOHN WATT, a subject 
of the Queen of Great Britain, residing at 
Birkenhead, in the county of Chester, Eng 
land, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Apparatus for Removing 
Sediment from Steam-Boilers, (for which I 
have obtained British Patent No. 8,078, dated 
June 4,1SSS,) of which the following is a speci 
This invention relates to an apparatus for 
causing or increasing a circulation of the wa 
ter in Steam-boilers during ebullition, where 
by Sediment is removed from the boiler and 
the Water thereof is purified. 
I will describe my invention as it may be 
applied to an ordinary horizontal boiler hav 
ing one or more internal furnace tubes or 
flues, although it may be applied to boilers 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal sectional elevation of a hori 
Zontal boiler containing my invention; and 
Fig. 2 is a front elevation thereof, partly in 
Section, also showing a sediment-collector in 
section. Fig. 3 shows the invention applied 
to a steam-boiler having a large centrally-lo 
cated tube or flue. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are de 
tail views showing various forms of jet-pump 
In the drawings, 1 represents the boiler 
shell, and 2 the furnace tubes or flues. 
6) 3 represents a vapor-collector, which, as 
shown, is a wide-mouthed vessel placed in an 
inverted position within the boiler-space be 
low the Water-line and connected to the de 
livery-pipe 7, which may have the trough S 
therein, and leads to the sediment-collector 
10. Said sediment-collector has the return 
40 pipe 11, communicating with the boiler-space 
below the Water-line. 
5 represents a sediment-collecting pipe ar 
ranged near to and parallel with the bottom 
of the boiler, but supported out of contact 
there with and having apertures 15 in its end 
and lower side. This pipe may terminate 
near the back end of the boiler, but is pref 
erably turned upwardly, as at 16, and is con 
nected with a scum-pan. 26. (See Fig. 1.) 
So The pipe 5 has a riser 17, which terminates in 
a jet or nozzle 6, arranged axially with refer 
3o used in connection with my device. 
35 
- 
ence to pipe 7. 4 is a pipe arranged coll 
centric to the nozzle 6 and the orifice of said 
nozzle and the annular passage between it 
and the pipe 4 communicate with the delivery 
pipe 7 at their discharge ends and with the 
sediment-collecting pipe and the intelior of 
the vapor-collector 3 at their receiving ends, 
respectively. 
The construction above described is that 
shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings and is the 
preferred construction, although I may em 
ploy the modifications shown in Figs. 4, 5, or 
6, but in all of these constructions the same 
general principle is employed-namely, that 
of a jet-pump having a central delivery-pas 
sage, such as that formed by the pipe 6 with 
a concentric annular passage or a concen 
trically-arranged series of passages. Thus 
in Fig. 4 the upper end of pipe 6 terminates 
close to the wall of the delivery-pipe 7. In 
Fig. 5a series of jet-tubes 9 are arranged con 
centrically to the pipe 6, while in Fig. 6 the 
comical plug 12 controls the jet. 
The action of the apparatus is as follows: 
Steam accumulates in the vapor-collector 3 
and issues in the form of a jet or jets through 
the passage or passages surrounding the noz 
zle 6. The passing of the steam in the form 
of a jet or jets induces a current of Water 
upwardly through the riser - pipe, horizon 
tally through the pipe 5, lying on the bot 
tom, and thus causing the Water and sedi 
ment to pass into such pipe through the ap 
ertures in the bottom thereof, and the scum 
and other floating impurities are collected in 
the scum-pan 26 and are drawn downwardly 
into the pipe 5 and thence lifted through the 
riser-pipe and discharged by the jet into the 
sediment-chamber 10, the purified water re 
turning to the boiler through the pipe II. 
The steam which passes by way of the jet 
may be liberated in the open trough 8, while 
the current of water carrying the sediment 
will pass through the trough to the sediment 
chamber. In the construction shown in Fig. 
2 the riser of the pipe 5 is vertically arranged. 
As shown in Fig. 3, however, said pipe is 
curved to pass around the large flue and the 
stack of tubes 17, and the jet-pump is of the 
construction shown in Fig. 4. 
To attain the best results with my inven 
45 
 
55 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
586,805 
tion, the vapor-collector is placed at that 
point in the boiler where ebullition is most 
violent, and said vapor-collector is of course 
so located that the entrance to or mouth 
thereof is below the water-level. This va 
por-collector is shown in the form of a rec 
tangular vessel, but it may be in the form of 
a pipe extending horizontally of the boiler 
near the water-level and with the openings 
thereof submerged. When the Water is boil 
ing the vapor-collector and the passage con 
necting it with the delivery-pipe become filled 
with steam, which displaces the water. The 
pressure of the steam being equal to the pres 
Sure of the water at the level of the mouth of 
the vapor-collector, the pressure will be some 
what in excess of the pressure at the level of 
the steam-nozzle, and the steam which is col 
lected will consequently issue through the 
annular passage as a jet. This jet of steam 
Will set the water in the riser-pipe in motion, 
and a current of water will therefore be es 
tablished from near the water-level through 
the scum-pipe 26, downwardly to the pipe 5, 
upwardly through the riser-pipe, and out 
wardly through the delivery-pipe 7 to the sedi 
ment- chamber for purification and subse 
quent return to the boiler. 
It will be observed, therefore, that my in 
vention includes, in addition to the means 
for generating a current of water by the aid 
of a jet of steam, the further idea of and 
means for collecting the impurities from near 
the top of the water and also from the bot 
tom of the boiler and raising said impurities 
through the body of the water and the pas 
sage, conducting them into the sediment 
chamber. 
The apparatus herein above described I 
have found to be highly efficient for the puri 
fication of the Water of steam-boilers and ad 
equate to meet the requirements of water 
purifiers under widely-varying conditions. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
1. In an appalatus for removing impurities 
from water in steam-boilers, the combination 
of a vapor-collector having an opening thereto 
so located as to be submerged in the liquid 
when in use, a sediment-collecting tube lo 
cated near the bottom of the boiler and dis 
charging beneath said vapor-collector, a de 
livery-pipe connected to the upper side of the 
vapor-collector and having its orifice in line 
with the discharge-orifice of the sediment 
tube and a passage or passages connecting 
the interior of the vapor-collector with the 
delivery-pipe and arranged concentric to the 
discharge end of the sediment-tube whereby 
a circulation of water may be caused or in 
creased, substantially as described. 
2. In an apparatus for causing or increas 
ing a circulation of water during ebullition, 
the combination with a boiler of a sediment 
collector connected with the boiler-space by 
delivery and return pipes, a vapor-collector 
located within the boiler-space and having 
the openings thereof adapted to be submerged 
in the liquid, a sediment-collecting tube ar 
ranged to discharge interiorly of the vapor 
collector and a steam passage or passages ar 
ranged concentric to the discharge-orifice of 
the sediment-tube and connecting the vapor 
space with the delivery-pipe, substantially as 
described. 
3. In a water-purifier the combination with 
a steam-boiler of a sediment-collector and de 
livery and return pipes connecting with the 
boiler-space, of a vapor-collector connected to 
the delivery-pipe and having steam-jet ori 
fices, a sediment-collecting tube extending 
along the bottom of the boiler and discharg 
ing within the vapor-collector axially of the 
steam-jet orifice, and a collector of suspended 
impurities arranged near the surface of the 
Water and connected with the sediment-tube, 
substantially as described. 
JOIN WATT. 
SO 
55 
65 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
W.M. PIERCE, 
S. MCCREADY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US586905.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 586,905. 
A. W. LAWSON. 
NUT LOCK, 
Patented July 20, 1897. 
2Seew-6 
2.T. 
A. zz20. 
e26%T, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT W. LAWSON, OF HATCHECHUBBEE, ALABAMA, ASSIGNOR OF 
STEPP AND CHARLES G. WATERS, 
THREE-FOURTHS TO WESTER, MI. 
OF SAME PLACE. 
NUT-LOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 586,905, dated July 20, 1897. 
Application filed September 25, 1896, Serial No. 606,933, (No model.) 
To aid, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT W. LAWSON, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Hatchechubbee, in the county of Russell 
and State of Alabama, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Nut-Locks; 
and I do hereby declare that the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, which will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, which form a part of this speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to that class of nut 
locks which comprise a slotted plate through 
which the bolt carrying the nut to be locked 
passes and the sides of said plate bent up 
Ward at right angles, to which is pivotally 
connected a spring locking-bar having the 
free end bent up at a right angle and engag 
ing with the nut. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
an improved construction of the same, where 
by the locking-bar can be readily discon 
nected from the slotted plate when desired. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of parts herein 
after fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation showing two railroad-rails 
With my improved nut-lock applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of a double 
nut-lock. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of one 
of the nut-locks shown in Fig. 1 disconnected 
from the fish-plate. 
In the said drawings the reference-numeral 
1 designates a metal platehaving extensions 2, 
which are bent up at right angles and formed 
O 
25 
35 
 
45 
55 
with triangular slots 2 at one end. The 
numeral 4 designates a locking-bar consist 
ing of a metal plate provided with pivots 3 
integral there with, which engage with the 
slots 2'. One end of this bar is bent out 
Wardly at a right angle, forming a flange 6, 
which rests against one of the sides of the 
nut. The other end of the bar is curved 
downwardly orinwardly, forming a spring-lug 
5. The numeral 7 designates a slot in plate 
1 for the passage of a bolt. 
The operation is as follows: The bolt 8 is 
passed through the slot 7 and the nut 9 
screwed home. The locking-bar is then 
turned inward, so that the end 6 will engage 
with one of the sides of the nut and turning 
of the latter be prevented. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 2 I have 
shown a double lock, so that two nuts can be 
locked thereby. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
In a nut-lock, the combination with the 
slotted plate having extensions bent out 
wardly at right angles and formed with tri 
angular slots, of the locking-bar having one 
end turned outwardly at a right angle and the 
other end curved inwardly forming a spring 
lug, and the pivots, formed integral with said 
bar and engaging with said triangular slots, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereunto affixed my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ALBERT W. LAWSON. 
Witnesses: 
- 
C. E. INGRAM, 
L. C. COOPER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587005.txt	(No Model.) 
D. M. KYLE. 
LAWN MOWER, 
 
No. 587,005. 
Patented July 27, 1897. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID M. KYLE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
LAWN MOWER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,005, dated July 27, 1897. 
Application filed June 26, 1894, 
Serial No. 515,769, (No model.) 
45 
bears against the wall f and the other end 
against the head h of the rod h", normally 
keeping the box h drawn back to the Wallf. 
Sprocket-wheel K on shaft G has a spring 
seated key, Fig. 5, and is connected with 
sprocket L on ground-roller M by chain N. 
In a backward movement of the mower the 
brush-shaft will not rotate, but sprocket 
wheel K will revolve upon the shaft and the 
ratchet O and pawl P will lock the shaft 5o 
against rotation until the machine is moved 
forward. Plate Q is secured to the front of 
the frame and is held up by the spring R. 
The cut grass is deposited upon the plate Q 
and grass is allowed to accumulate thereon 55 
until the shaft Ghas completed a revolution, 
when the brush S on shaft G will wipe over 
the plate Q and cast the grass to the back of 
the receptacle. 
trolled journal-box will be held in position to 
keep the driven chain taut. The hinged re 
ceptacle will conform to irregularities of the 
surface passed over and the rotating brush 
will be operated with a small expenditure of 
power to keep the cut grass thrown backinto 
the receptacle. 
Without limiting myself to precise details 
of construction, I claim 
In combination a lawn-mower, a box piv 
otally secured there with, a plate secured to 
the box, a spring beneath the plate whereby 
to upwardly thrust said plate and a rotatable 
brush whereby to remove the cut grass from 
the plate, substantially as described. 
In operation the sliding and spring-con- 6o 
DAVID M. KYLE. 
Witnesses: 
S. T. MANN, 
N. M. BOND, 
O 
5 of which the following is a specification. 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, DAVID M. KYLE, of 
Chicago, Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Lawn-Mowers, 
This invention relates to lawn-mowers hav 
ing receptacles to receive cut grass; and the 
features of invention are a box having flexi 
ble sides and back and a hinged bottom, a 
tension device for keeping the driving-chain 
taut in all positions of the push-pole, a shield. 
or plate upon which the cut grass is deposited, 
and a rotatable brush to remove the cut grass 
from the shield or plate. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a lawn-mower with my 
improvements applied thereto. Fig. 2 is a 
broken perspective showing the manner of 
securing the hinged bottom and plate to the 
frame of the box. Fig. 3 is a side elevation, 
partly in section, of a bracket with a slidable 
box thereon to receive one end of the brush 
shaft. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the bracket 
and one end of the brush-shaft. Fig. 5 is a 
25 detail view of the shaft and sprocket-wheel 
hub. 
In the drawings, A represents the cutting 
knives, which are operated in the usual man 
mer, and B lugs to which the box C is pivot 
ally secured. 
The box consists of a frame D, a hinged 
bottom E, and flexible sides and back F, con 
necting the frame and bottom. Shaft G has 
one end loosely secured to the frame D, as 
shown at H, and the opposite end is jour 
naled in a box h, slidably mounted in the 
bracket I. Journal-box h. has a rod h'se 
cured there with and projecting through a 
wall f of the bracket I. A coiled spring i. 
O surrounds rod h", one end of which spring b 
3o 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587105.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NIVEN MCCONNELL, OF MUNHALL, PENNSYLVANIA. 
MANUFACTURE OF STEEL ING OTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,105, dated July 27, 1897. 
Application filed May 6, 1896, Renewed May 21, 1897, Serial No. 637,626. (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it naily concern: 
filled with steel, say when it has been filled 
Beit known that I, NIVEN McCoNNELL, of 
about one-third. The very small propor 
Munhall, in the county of Allegheny and State 
tion of aluminium requisite for my process 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
(about fifty-five ten-thousandths of one per 
useful Improvement in the Manufacture of 
cent.) as compared with what has been here 
Steel Ingots, of which the following is a full, 
tofore used in other processes, as well as the 
clear, and exact description. . 
vast difference in result which follows my 
The object of my invention is to improve 
method of adding the aluminium in the mold, 
the manufacture of steel ingots for the pur 
as distinguished from adding it before it is 
pose of preventing the tendency to rise in the 
introduced into the mold, clearly distinguish 
mold which mild steel has when tapped from 
my invention. 
the open-hearth furnacein which it is refined, 
I do not add the aluminium in proportions 
and poured from the ladle into the ingot 
as high as one-tenth of one per cent. to the 
molds. 
steel. It will be found that if aluminium is 
I have discovered that if a very small per 
added in such high proportions it will produce 
centage of aluminium, either pure or as an al 
a deleterious effect and Will cause the forma 
loy, is added in the mold into which the steel 
tion of large cavities near the top of the in 
is being poured the steel will settle down in 
got. I do not, therefore, regard the use of 
the mold and lie quietly without such ebulli 
aluminium in Such large proportions as being 
tion as occurs when poured without addition 
part of my invention. 
of aluminium, or When the aluminium is added 
Idisclaim the addition of aluminium to steel 
in small proportion either in the furnace or 
while the steel is in the ladle or in the fur 
in the ladle. By this addition I do not seek 
nace as being outside the scope of my inven 
to effect the increase of the fluidity of the 
tion and as not suited to the obtaining of 
steel nor the lowering of its melting point, 
the result which I secure by my method; but 
but the purpose of its addition is to quiet the 
What I claim is 
metal and to prevent its ebullition, as above 
An improvement in the manufacture of 
stated, withoutinjuriously affecting the ingot. 
|Steel ingots, which consists in tapping steel 
This effect is not produced when the alumini 
from the furnace in which it has been refined, 
| 
um is added before pouring the steel. 
pouring it into an ingot-mold, and adding 
The beneficial effect of my invention is se 
to it in the mold a small percentage of alu 
cured by the use of a very minute quantity 
minium; substantially as described. 
of metallic aluminium. In practice I prefer 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
to use about two ounces of aluminium to the 
my hand. 
ton (two thousand two hundred and forty 
pounds) of steel, My practice is to put 
the aluminium preferably as a solid lump 
into the mold after the mold has been partly 
THOMAS W. BAKEWELL, 
G. I. HOLDSHIP. 
NIVEN MCCONNELL. 
Witnesses: . 
45 
55 
IO 
15 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587205.txt	J. HOWARD & O, B, FRAZIER, 
BELT TIGHTENER, 
Patented July 27, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 587,205, 
 
 
WZZ72 esses 
(No Model.) 
J. HOWARD & O. B. FRAZIER, 
BELT TIGHTENER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 587,205. 
Patented July 27, 1897. 
an. 4 in %3 :S 
  
  
 
  
 
Z72, 6 
 
 
WV2222 esses. 
Ara- 
7( 6. Sa- 
Z72.2/e72 Zors 
atta;3 
22. 
62 
% - 4-3 
THe worris PETERs co, Photo-THO, was Moon... c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES HOWARD AND OLIVER B. FRAZIER, OF ELWOOD, INDIANA. 
BELT-TiGHTENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,205, dated July 27, 1897. 
Application filed June 11, 1896, Serial No. 595,136, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all tufton, it inctly concert. 
Be it known that we, JAMES HOWARD and 
OLIVER B. FRAZIER, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Elwood, in the county of 
Madison and State of Indiana, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Belt 
Tighteners; and we do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
belt-tighteners, the object of the same being 
to provide a simple and cheaply-constructed 
tightener for belts of any width which is ef 
fective in operation and in which the drum 
may be adjusted to accommodate itself to 
variations in the angle between the main 
driving-shaft and the other roll over which 
the belt runs. 
The invention consists of a frame made up 
of two supports or standards, preferably con 
structed of T-iron or angle-iron, bolted se 
curely to the base of the machine, a drum 
whose shaft is mounted in sliding boxes in 
each of said standards, a threaded bolt ex 
tending through each of said boxes, a ratchet 
wheel upon one end of said bolt, a lever 
loosely mounted on said bolt adjacent to Said 
ratchet-wheel, and a pawl pivoted to said lever 
and adapted to engage said ratchet-wheel. 
The invention also consists in other details 
of construction and combinations of parts, 
which will be hereinafter more fully described 
and claimed. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 represents a side elevation 
of our improved tightener. Fig. 2 is a front 
elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a cross-sec 
tion through one of the boxes upon which the 
drum is mounted. Fig. 4 is a detail side ele 
vation of the bolt and the operating-handle 
connected thereto. Fig. 5 is an end view of 
the same. Fig. 6 is a diagrammatic view show 
ing the relation between our tightener and 
the main driving-belt. 
Like reference-numerals indicate like parts 
in the different ViewS. 
In the drawings forming part of this Speci 
fication our improved tightener has been 
shown in connection with a belt, I passing 
round the drums 2 and 3, the drum 2 being 
upon the main driving-shaft of the machine. 
The tightener is made up of two parallel Sup 
ports or standards 44, securely bolted to the 
base of the machine and preferably con 
structed of angle or T iron. The front faces 
of each of the standards 4 4 are angularly 
arranged, as shown, and mounted in suitable 
guides in said supports are the boxes 55, 
through which pass the ends of the shaft 6, 
upon which the drum 7 is mounted. The 
boxes 5 are each formed with an offset 8 
upon one side, through which pass screw 
bolts 99, engaging threads in said offsets and 
mounted to rotate in suitable bearings in the 
standards 4 4. Upon the lower end of each 
- of the bolts 9 is a ratchet-wheel 10, which is 
engaged by a pawl 11, pivoted to the front 
face of a lever 12, loosely fulcrumed on the 
lower end of the bolt, 9 and mounted to rotate 
thereon. 
Our tightener is located between the drums 
2 and 3, so that the upper surface of the drum 
7 bears against the under surface of the belt 
1. Should the said belt become loose from 
wear or variations in temperature, it is merely 
necessary in order to tighten the same to 
operate the levers 1212 upon the lower ends 
of the bolts 9, screwing up said bolts by the 
engagement of the pawls 1 with the ratchet 
wheels 10 on the lower ends of said bolts. 
Upon said bolts being rotated, the boxes 5, 
in which the drum 7 is mounted, will be 
forced upwardly, bringing said drum into 
closer contact with the belt 1. The pawls 11 
are so mounted on the levers 12 that they 
may have their positions reversed to engage 
the opposite sides of the teeth on the ratchet 
wheels 10. 
If, therefore, it be desired to re 
lieve the tension of the belt I, it is merely 
necessary to reverse the pawls 11 and operate 
the levers 12 in an opposite direction. In 
case the shafts upon which the drums 2 and 
3 are mounted are not exactly in line there 
will be a tendency for the belt 1 to be forced 
of the drum 2 when operated. In order to 
prevent this and to counteract the tendency of 
the belt 1 to roll off the drum 3, the lever 12 
on one or the other side is operated to raise One 
side of the drum 7 and leave the other Sta 
tionary. The sides of the belt I will thereby 
be brought into closer contact with one side 
of the drum 7, obviating the difficulty. 
o 
15 
25 
35 
45 
50 
95 
OO 
2 
587,205 
In order to operate the levers 12 12 simu 
taneously, We may connect the upper ends 
of said levers by a bar 13, passing transversely 
across the front of the tightener, so that upon 
the movement of said bar in one direction or 
the other both of said levers will be operated. 
Having now described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
In a belt-tightener, the combination with 
Suitable Supports or standards having guides 
formed therein, of journal-boxes slidingly 
mounted in said standards each having an 
Offset therein fitting within said guides and 
preventing the lateral movement of said 
boxes, a belt-tightening drum, a shaft to 
which said drum is sect red mounted in said 
d 
5 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES C. DEHORITY, 
JOE A. DEHORITY. 
boxes, threaded bolts mounted to turn in said 
standards and engaging threaded openings in 
said offsets, ratchet-wheels upon the lower 
ends of said bolts, levers fulcrumed on the 
lower ends thereof and adapted to oscillate 
thereon, pawls pivoted to said levers adapted 
to engage the teeth on said ratchet-wheels, and 
an operating-bar connecting said levers and 
pivoted thereto, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
JAMES HOWARD. 
OLIVER, B. FRAZIER. 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587305.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 587,305 
E. GREENBERG 
POTATO DIGGER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
  
is sta 
76ez7ce3665 
422 a 
| - Zvor 
of 2,2- 
 
3. Sheets-Sheet. 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 587,305. 
 
E. GREENBER, G, 
POTATO DIGGER, 
Paten ted 
S. 
s&I OE sSO s2 2 
SSSN:s s& s\%w OSA.\ 
OsM 
m 
y sS. X SAS rs MeN 2s ? 
 
 
E. GREENBERG 
POTATO DIGGER, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897, 
- 
(No Model.) 
No. 587,305. 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD GREENBERG, OF ARLINGTON HEIGHTS, ILLINOIS. 
Y 
POTATO-DIGGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,305, dated August 3, 1897. 
Application filed August 24, 1896, Serial No. 603,739, (No model.) 
55 
75 
w 
To all, Luhon, ii, inctly concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARD GREENBERG, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Ar 
lington Heights, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Potato-Diggers, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had therein to the accompany 
ing drawings. 
The nature of my invention relates to the 
construction and arrangement of the several 
parts of a potato-digger, as Will hereinafter 
be described and specially claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a side elevation of a potato-digger 
embodying my invention. Fig.2 represents 
a vertical longitudinal sectional view taken 
on the line 22' of Fig. 3, looking in the di 
rection of the arrow. Fig. 3 is a vertical 
cross-section of the same, taken on the line 
33' of Fig. 2, looking in the direction of the 
arrow. Fig. 4 is a detailed plan view of the 
potato-delivery end. 
Corresponding letters of reference desig 
nate like parts in all figures. 
The journals a, of the traction-wheels A are 
secured on the straight horizontal iron axle 
B, and these journals connect by clutches 
(and may be thrown in gear or out of 
gear by the ordinary construction-foot-le 
ver and spring) to the journals of the large 
sprocket-wheels N, working upon the same 
axle, and are secured to steel frame C by 
journal-boxes, as shown in drawings. This 
frame C is a continuous hollow half-rectan 
gular piece of steel, (known as angle-iron,) 
circular before and open in the rear, Which, 
together with the axle, forms the support of 
the various parts of the machine. 
In front of the axle B and resting in the 
rectangular groove of the frame C at the be 
ginning of the circular portion of said frame 
is a cross-bar D, bolted to the frame C, and 
to this cross-bar is bolted and rigidly fas 
tened the pole, on either side of which horses 
are attached for guiding and drawing the 
machine. Upon the rear of the pole is rig 
idly bolted a piece of spring-steel, support 
ing the seat E. Midway between the pole 
and the plowshare to the U-shaped bar F is 
bolted on either side two bars G, which pass 
forward and inward, unite, and form the at 
tachment of the doubletrees, or point of trac 
tion, to which horses are hitched. 
To the frame C on the outside at the ends 
of the cross-bar D are bolted two straps f, 
which secure the ends of the U-shaped bar 
F, which is adjustable and bent to this form, 
With the opening upward. In the bend of 
this bar F rests the curved metallic plow 
share, which is riveted to it and to a short 
bar welded at right angles to the U-shaped 
bar at its lowest point and which extends un 
der the share, performing the office of a shoe. 
To these upright parts of the U-shaped bar 
just above the plowshare g on either side is 
bolted the elbow-bar h, which bends down 
Ward and back Ward, and each is bolted to the 
end of the bars H, thus supporting bars H, 
which form the frame for the endless elevator 
aproni, which is protected on either side by 
the side-boards, of sheet-iron, riveted to said 
-- 
bars H. 
At the downward bend of the elbow-bar h, 
is attached the small link-bar I, which passes 
upward and fastens by a movable joint or 
link to sector K, which is provided with a 
Spring, pawl, and lever, Within easy reach of 
the seat, for elevating or lowering the plow 
share. 
The side bars Hare spliced at the upper and 
rear ends by a clutch-and-bolt arrangement 
and is adjustable as to length. The spliced 
portion of Said side bar is cast and divides 
into two prongs land L, the upper of which, 
L, fastens to and is movable upon the axle of 
the sprocket-wheels M, which turn the ele 
vator-apron i, and the lower prong supports 
the axle or crank-shaft of the sprocket-wheel 
m, and to this shaft is attached the grate P, 
which receives the potatoes from the apron i. 
On either side, fastened to the traction 
wheels A by means of a clutch on the jour 
nals, are the large sprocket-wheels N, over 
which an endless chain passes and which 
passes back Ward and over the small sprocket 
wheel M, which revolves upon an axis securely 
fastened by means of long stirrup-straps v, 
bolted under the frame C, permitting a back 
ward-and-forward movement to the journal 
and axis of sprocket-wheel when the plow 
is elevated or lowered, sets in motion the 
sprocket M, and imparts motion to the end 
less aproni, passes backward, downward, and 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
95 
OO 
2 
587,305 
of the potatoes, as the bars of the lower layer 
are shorter and do not throw the potatoes that 
fall upon it so far to the rear and right, thus 
forming two rows, one of large and One of small 
potatoes. 
Modus operandi: The plowshare or shovel 
g, adjusted to pass under the potatoes, will re 
move them to the aproni, which elevates them, 
with the vegetation, to the shaker or grate P, 
the motion of which deposits the Smaller po 
tatoes on the slat-grate below, which in turn 
delivers them to the rear and right, while the 
vegetation, together with the larger potatoes, 
is delivered from the shaker or grate P in a 
windrow to themselves. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination of the spliced side bar H 
(with the prongs land I.) with the journal of 
the sprocket-wheel M and its support, the 
stirrup-strap , permitting of a backward 
and-forward movement upon the elevation, 
depression, or adjustment of the plowshare g, 
all Substantially as set forth. 
EDWARD GREENBERG. 
Witnesses: 
DAVID H. STAPP, 
J. M. HESS. 
35 
45 
d 
under the sprocket - wheel n, attached to 
crank-shaft R, that imparts a shaking motion 
to the grate P, which is composed of slightly 
rounded bars suspended at one end from the 
crank-shaft IR and at the other by link-hooks 
(the left of which is shorter, giving slant of 
grate to the right) to the ends of Small straps 
of metal q, bolted to the cross-bar Q, which 
connects the real ends of the frame-bar C. 
The endless apron is composed of gas-pipe 
extending crosswise and liveted at either 
end to an endless chain which passes over 
sprocket-wheels which are fastened to the 
axle of the Small sprocket-wheels M, from 
which the apron receives its motion. The 
chains of the apron pass also over a small 
sprocket-wheel on either side, journaled to 
the bars II, with the axis one (1) inch from 
center, thus imparting a shaking motion to 
the apron i. 
The grate P is composed of a double layer 
of bars, the second layer being hung by link 
bars underneath the first layer and suspended 
from the link-bars of the first layer. The 
first layer is composed of cross-bars extend 
ing obliquely to the rear and has larger in 
terstices or spaces between the bars than those 
of the Second layer, thus forming an assorter 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587405.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 587,405. 
C. E. SCRIBNER, 
SIGNAL FOR TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDs. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897. 
Af 
h 
7 
N 
& 
Z72 eveza27: 
64, Z5e 7227zez, 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CHARLES E. SCRIBNER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE WESTERN 
ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SIGNAL FOR TELEPHONE-SWITCHBOARDS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,405, dated August 3, 1897. 
Application filed August 1, 1895, 
Serial No. 557,828, (No model.) 
25 
To all who in it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLEs E. SCRIBNER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Signals for Telephone 
Switchboards, (Case No. 397,) of which the 
following is a full, clear, concise, and exact de 
Scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawing, forming a part of this speci 
fication. 
My invention is a new arrangement of sig 
nals for use in telephone-switchboards, de 
signed to indicate continuously to the attend 
ant the condition of the apparatus at each of 
tWO connected substations. 
In the operation of telephone-switchboards 
it is desirable that the attendant may have a 
signal under her observation which shall in 
dicate the removal of the telephone from its 
Switch-hook for use or its replacement on the 
SWitch at the substation of a line or at each 
Substation of two connected lines. In prac 
tice these signals, which are known as su 
pervisory signals, have been associated with 
the connecting-plugs furnished the operator 
for looping lines together. In order that the 
two supervisory signals, referring to the two 
terminal plugs of a pair, might respond in 
dependently to current in the line-circuits 
with which they were connected, it has here 
tofore been necessary either to place the sig 
inals serially in the telephonic circuit with a 
source of current connected to the circuit be 
tween them or to separate the two portions of 
the plug-circuit including the signals by an 
interposed condenser or repeating-coil. 
In my invention I connect one signal in a 
branch or bridge of the plug-circuit, together 
with a source of current, and the other signal 
isinterposed in the plug-circuit between that 
plug which is known as the connecting 
plug and the point of junction of the other 
signal with the plug-circuit. During the use 
of the plug-circuit for looping two lines to 
gether the signals are excited and caused to 
give their indications when the circuit of the 
source of current through them is completed 
at the proper substation by the closing of the 
So line-circuit there in the use of the telephone. 
In the arrangement I have described as 
constituting my invention that signal which 
is serially included in the plug-circuit will 
be excited only during the use of the corre 
spondent telephone, or that of the answering 55 
subscriber. Hence if connection has been ef 
fected with a line and the substation-bell has 
been rung this signal will indicate the re 
sponse of the called subscriber in removing 
his telephone from its switch-hook. After 6o 
that it will be continuously excited until this 
telephone has been again replaced on its 
switch-hook. The signal in the bridge-con 
ductor will, however, be excited as long as 
either telephone is absent from its switch- 65 
hook. Hence it will be displayed from the 
moment connection is made in answer to a 
call until, after the termination of conversa 
tion, both telephones have been replaced upon 
their switches. The supervisory signals thus 7o 
impart to the operator this information: 
Upon making connection with a line in re 
sponse to a call the excitement of the bridged 
signal shows that the telephone of the calling 
subscriber is off its switch-hook. Upon com- 75 
pleting connection with a line called for the 
excitement of the serially-connected signal 
shows when the called subscriber responds 
and removes his telephone from its switch 
hook. When the conversation is completed, 8o 
the deemergization of both signals indicates 
that both telephones have been returned to 
their idle positions. If during the existence 
of the connection the correspondent oransWer 
ing subscriber should replace his telephone 85 
upon its hook, the corresponding signal would 
be de?nergized and would indicate the act of 
the subscriber. Only the return of both sig 
nals to their inert condition would be inter 
preted by the operator as constituting a signal 9o 
for the removal of the connection. It will be 
understood that these signals may be of any 
suitable type-either incandescent lamps or 
electromagnetic signals. I prefer, however, 
that the excitement of the signals should pre- 95 
vent the display of their indicators, their re 
turn to an inert condition being shown by the 
display of the signals. Those acts which re 
quire attention on the part of the operator are 
thus signalized by positive indications from Ioo 
the supervisory signals rather than by the re 
turn of these signals to their normal state. 
35 
O 
45 
 
587,405 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
I have shown my invention in the accom 
panying drawing associated with Well-known 
Substation apparatus and the usual switch 
ing mechanism at a central station. 
The substations A and B are furnished with 
the usual telephonic and signaling appara 
tus-a receiving-telephone c, a transmitting 
telephone c', a polarized signal-bell c, and a 
switch c' for closing the telephone - circuit 
when the receiving-telephone is removed from 
the hook of the switch. The bell c should be 
of very high resistance-say of five thousand 
ohms. The normal resistance of the tele 
phones should be about one hundred or two 
hundred ohms. 
The apparatus at station A is connected by 
line conductors 1 and 2 with signaling and 
switching mechanism in a telephone-switch 
board at a central station. Conductor 1, af 
ter extending through the switch-contacts of 
a spring-jack d, is led through a line annun 
ciator or signale to one pole of a battery f. 
Line conductor 2 passes through the helix of 
an impedance-coil 9 to earth or to the other 
pole of the same battery. 
Signal e is of well-known type, having a 
magnet with a light shutter of magnetic ma 
terial so pivoted with relation to a prolonga 
tion of the magnet-pole that when the magnet 
is excited the shutter shall be raised into a 
Vertical position, and thus shall be displayed. 
Battery fmay be common to the different 
lines of the exchange system. 
Connecting-plugs h h' are furnished for the 
operator, adapted to fit the spring-jacks d. 
The sleeve-contacts of the connecting-plugs 
are united through a continuous conductor 3 
of the plug-circuit, and the tips through the 
conductor 4. These conductors include the 
SWitch-contacts of the usual calling-key i, 
which is constructed to separate plug h' from 
the other member of the pair and to connect 
its terminals with the poles of a generator lic 
of signaling-current. Alistening-key lis also 
provided, by means of which the operator may 
connect her telephone set in with the plug 
circuit 3 4. 
In a bridge 5 of the plug-circuit are in 
cluded a battery in and a signal O. The sig 
inal is of the same type as line-signale except 
that its target hangs displayed while the 
magnet is inert and is drawn into a horizontal 
or concealed position when the magnet be 
comes excited. A similar signal pisincluded 
directly in the conductor 4 of the plug-cir 
cuit. If desired, the electromagnet of this 
signal, may be shunted by a non-inductive 
resistance-coil of higher resistance than that 
of the magnet, this device being a well-known 
contrivance for preventing the obstruction 
of telephonic currents by an electromagnet 
in a telephone-circuit. 
The operation of the system shown is as 
follows: The current from batteryf through 
signal e and bell c, while the apparatus is 
not in use, is insufficient to operate the sig 
nal on account of the high resistance of the 
bell. When the subscriber at station A, for 
example, removes his receiving - telephone 
from its switch-hook, the latter closes the cir 
cuit through the comparatively-low-resist 
ance telephone instruments, and thus per 
mits sufficient current to flow to excite sig 
nal e and cause the display of its indicator. 
Answering the call thus transmitted the op 
erator inserts the answering - plug h into 
spring-jack d, at the same time throwing her 
listening-key linto position to bring her tele 
phone set n into connection with the plug 
circuit 3 4. By the insertion of the plug into 
the spring-jack the signal e, together with 
battery f, is disconnected from line conduc 
tor 1, but the wire 5, including battery in and 
signal O, is brought into a bridge of the line 
circuit 1 2. Current now flows through con 
ductor 5 and through the line-circuit, excit 
ing signal O and causing its target to be con 
cealed. This indicates to the operator that 
the subscriber calling is in readiness to an 
swer. She receives the order for the required 
connection in the usual way. She then in 
serts plug It into the spring-jack of line to 
station B-assuming this to be the connec 
tion demanded-and operates the key i to 
send a call-signal. No operative circuit as 
yet exists from battery 12, through signal p, 
since the high-resistance bellcat substation 
B prevents the excitement of the signal. 
This condition remains until the subscriber, 
responding to the call, removes his telephone 
from the switch-hook. Then signal p also 
becomes excited and conceals its indicator. 
As long as both signals remain thus hidden 
the operator knows that both telephones are 
off the switch-hooks c' and assumes that con 
versation is being carried on. If the sub 
scriber at station B should temporarily hang 
up his telephone, this will be indicated by 
signal p, but the display of this signal will 
not be interpreted as indicating a call for 
disconnection, the target-signal o being still 
concealed. Only when, upon the replace 
ment of the receiving-telephones at both sub 
stations, both signals O and p become dis 
played will the operator assume that the con 
versation has been terminated. She will then 
withdraw the connecting-plugs h h' to dis 
connect the lines from each other. 
The prior art is exemplified in Letters Pat 
ent No. 518,331 of John I. Sabin and William 
Hampton, dated April 17, 1894, for a tele 
phone-exchange system. 
I claim as new 
1. In combination, two terminal plugs of a 
pair and the plug-circuit thereof, means for 
connecting a generator of signaling-current 
with one of the plugs, a bridge of the plug 
circuit, a source of current and a signal in 
the bridge, and another signal included in 
a conductor of the plug-circuit between the 
said bridge and that, plug with which the gen 
erator of signaling-current may be connected, 
as described. 
2. In combination, two telephone-lines 
95 
CO 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I25 
587,405 
3 
united by a plug-circuit, one of said lines be 
ing closed and the other open at its substa 
tion, a bridge of the plug-circuit, a source of 
current and a signal included in the bridge, 
another signal included serially in the cir 
cuit between the said bridge and that station 
at which the line-circuit is interrupted, and 
a switch for closing the line-circuit there dur 
ing the use of the telephone, as described. 
3. The combination with two telephone-lines 
and a pair of cords and plugs adapted to unite 
the said lines together, of a bridge-circuit 
across the cords in which bridge are included 
a signal device and a source of current, a 
source of signaling-current and a switching 
device adapted to connect the said source of 
signaling- current into the cord-circuit be 
IO 
tween the said bridge and the connecting 
plug h' and a signaling device, as p, placed 
serially in one of the cords of the said con 
necting-plug between the said bridge and 
said connecting-plug, whereby the signal in 
the bridge indicates the continued use or ac 
tivity of either subscriber's telephone, and 
the connecting-plug signal p indicates when 
the called subscriber responds to signaling 
current sent over the line. 
In witness whereof Ihereunto subscribe my 
name this 13th day of June, A. D. 1895. 
CHARLES E. SCRIBNER 
25 
Witnesses: 
ELLA EDLER, 
MYRTA. F. GREEN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587505.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
C. J. MELLIN. 
OWERPASS WALWE FOR LOCOMOTIVE ENGINES 
No. 587,505, 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897. 
SZT 
See an Az 
E7 ENEEEE 
tly NSs. 
2. RSSN 
 
sSa 
SN 
O 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
2 
f / 
 
i A 
Figs 
 
16%6% %E2%2% 
 
S. N  
y 
2N &;2 
 
zh S. N N 
A a a a 
Fig. 4 
2N 
7 
WITNESSES; 
%z- 
INVENTOR 
-24y-r 
ATTORNEY 
the NORRS pet:Rs 0, PHTO-LIHO, WASHINGTOK. Q, C. 
(No Model.) 
C. J., MELLIN, 
OWERPASS WALWE FOR LOCOMOTIVE ENGINES, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 587,505. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897. 
Fla. 5 
  
 
g 
z 
Q 
7 
ZZ fZZ 2 
K2423. 
NENAAYANN 
SSSzzzzX 
h k 
p 
h 
NZ 
A. 
f 
N 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL J. MELLIN, OF RICHMOND, VIRGINIA, ASSIGNOR TO THE RICHMOND 
IOCOMOTIVE AND MACHINE WORKS, OF SAME PLACE. 
OVER PASS-VALVE FOR LOCOMOTIVE ENGINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,505, dated August 3, 1897. 
Application filed July 18, 1896, Serial No. 599,748, (No model.) 
. 
. 
To all tuhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, CARL J. MELLIN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Richmond, in the county of Henrico and State 
of Virginia, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Overpass-Valves for 
Locomotive-Engines, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
simpler and more efficient automatic overpass 
valves for free circulation of air in the cylin 
der While running When steam is shut off, as 
hereinafter described, reference being made 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an end elevation of a steam-cyl 
inder and part of the Saddle-frame of a loco 
motive, showing the application of my im 
proved overpass apparatus, the steam-chest 
being removed. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitu 
dinal section on line 22 of Fig. 1, the valve 
being omitted. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section 
on line 33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a section on 
line 33, Fig. 1, in a modified form of some of 
the parts. Fig. 5 is a section same as in Fig. 
3 with the valves open and with a coiled 
spring between them instead of the atmos 
pheric port for opening them. 
A represents the cylinder; b, the port-face; 
e, the steam-ports, andf the exhaust-ports. 
g represents a valve-case that I provide on 
the outside of the port-case as an integral 
part of the cylinder-casting, and preferably 
parallel with the cylinder, through the middle 
portion of which I provide an overpass-way 
g" for free circulation of air from one steam 
port to another, when steam is shut off, by 
ports i, which have communication with the 
steam-ports e, with valvesh to close said ports 
when steam is admitted to the cylinder. 
Other ports i in communication with the 
steam-chest and with the valve-case g admit 
steam behind the valves and normally keep 
them closed on the seats k, which are inter 
mediate of the ports i. Between the valve 
seats is a smallport l, open to the atmosphere. 
It will be seen that when steam enters the 
steam-chest it closes the valves h, and they 
remain closed until steam is shut off. When 
steam is shut off and the engine is running, 
it creates a vacuum in the steam-chest and 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
Formore positive action of the valves, which 6o 
the atmospheric pressure through port l or 
spring forces the valves back sufficient to 
open a passage between the steam-ports e, 
through which the air will pass from one side 
of the piston to the other forward and back- 55 
ward, thus relieving the piston from excess 
ive resistance in drifting and preventing an 
excessive amount of cold air from entering the 
cylinder. 
in case of not closing tightly may possibly be 
equally subject to steam-pressure on both 
sides, I have provided them with counterbal 
ancing-pistons m in the middle part g' of the 
case g between the valve-seats, whereby there 65 
will always be preponderating pressure on the 
other sides for closing them. In this case I 
provide a by-pass for air around the pistons 
consisting of the lateral passage in and ports 
o, connecting therewith through the side of 7o 
the valve-case. 
The valves may have a spring or springs for 
opening them when steam is shut off instead 
of air-pressure, if desired-for example, a 
coiled spring p, placed between them, as in 75 
Fig. 5, suitably for taking effect on both, the 
atmospheric port l then being omitted. 
- 
I claim as my invention- 
1. The combination with the steam-cylin 
der, of the valve-case having the overpassbe- 8o 
tween the steam-ports, the automatic valves 
in said case normally subject to pressure from 
the cylinder steam-chest for closing said over 
pass, and means for opening said valves when 
steam is shut off substantially as described. 85 
2. The combination with the steam-cylin 
der, of the valve-case having the overpassbe 
tween the steam-ports, the automatic valves 
in said case normally subject to pressure from 
the cylinder steam-chest for closing said over- 9o 
pass, and the atmospheric port intermediate 
of the valves substantially as described. 
3. The combination with the steam-cylin 
der, of the valve-case having the overpassbe 
tween the steam-ports, the automatic, inde- 95 
pendent and reversely-acting valves in said 
case normally subject to pressure from the 
cylinder steam-chest, for closing said over 
pass, and means for opening said valves When 
steam is shut off substantially as described. Ioo 
- - - A-...--- 
port intermediate of the pistons substantially 
as described. 
6. The combination with the steam-cylin 
der, of the integral valve - case having the 
overpass between the steam-ports the valves 
in said case normally subject to pressure from 
the cylinder steam-chest for closing said over 
pass, and means for opening said valves when 
steam is shut off substantially as described. 
Signed at New York city, in the county and 
State of New York, this 14th day of July, A. 
D. 1896. 
CARL J. MEILIN. 
25 
Witnesses: 
W. J. MORGAN, 
ERNST CRUNDGREN. 
2 
4. The combination with the steam-cylin 
der, of the valve-case having the overpassbe 
tween the steam-ports, the valves in said case 
normally subject to pressure from the steam 
chest for closing said overpass, counterbal 
ancing-pistons intermediate of the valves, by 
pass around said pistons, and means for open 
ing said valves when steam is shut off sub 
stantially as described. 
5. The combination with the steam-cylin 
der, of the valve-case having the overpass be 
tween the steam-ports, the valves in said case 
normally subject to pressure from the steam 
chest for closing said overpass, counterbal 
ancing-pistons intermediate of the valves, by 
pass around said pistons and the atmospheric 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587605.txt	(No Model.) 
W. PORTEOUS. 
SAND MOLDING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 587,605, 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 587,605, 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
3 
O 
 
SS 
W. PORTEOUS. 
SAND MOLDING MACHINE 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897. 
 
i 
b2S J KC 
ors petes co. Photo-iro. Washington. . . 
(No Model.) 
No. 587,605. 
 
W. PORTEOUS. 
SAND MOLDING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
W. PORTEOUS. 
SAND MOLDING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 587,605. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897. 
e 
s ere 
 
ric Norris Peters co. PHOTo-Lito, WAMixoton, D.c. 
(No Model.) 
W. PORTEOUS. 
SAND MOLDING MACHINE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
No. 587,605, 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897. 
  
 
 
N NY VN N SNN RN VNS sY 
 
 
g F 
s 
2 
THE NORAS PETERs co, PHOTo-LTHo, wAshurston. D. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 587,605. 
W. PORTEOUS. 
SAND MOLDING MACHINE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 6. 
Patented Aug. 3, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
se 
 
 
 
 
  
O 
N E. oSyN Nusa aesae 
s 
N 
VZZZ 
27 
- Z 
the sorts. Peters. ProT-T was ?ector. . c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM PORTEOUS, OF ELMWOOD PLACE, OHIO. 
w 
SAND MOLDENG MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,605, dated August 3, 1897. 
Application filed April 23, 1892, Serial No. 430,375, (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
- 
To (tal lift oil, if I ju?t i? ri? I, CC 7't 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM PORTEOUS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Elm 
wood Place, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Sand-Molding Ma 
chines, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming part of 
this specification. 
My invention relates to machines for mak 
ing sand molds for castings, and has for its 
object the production of a machine which will 
be as nearly automatic as possible, and which 
will reduce the labor of making such molds 
to a minimum. 
The novelty of my invention will be here 
inafter set forth, and specifically pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1, 
Sheet 1, is a plan view of a machine embody 
ing my invention. Fig. 2, Sheet 2, is a sec 
tion, partly in elevation, on the dotted line 
acac of Fig.1, with the position of the sweeps 
changed to bring them into view with the rap 
ping mechanism which would not properly 
appear in said Section shown in dotted lines. 
Fig. 3, Sheet 3, is a sectional plan view on the 
dotted line if f of Fig. 2. Fig. 4, Sheet 4, is 
a representation of So much of the machine 
in projection as Will go on the sheet to afford 
a diagram for the better illustration of the 
successive operations. Fig. 5, Sheet 5, is a 
continuation of Fig. 4, showing the rest of the 
machine. Fig. 6, Sheet 5, is a transverse sec 
tion through the dotted line 2, 2 of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 7, Sheet 6, is a detail plan view of the 
Fig. S, Sheet 6, is a de 
knocker mechanism. 
tail in elevation and partly in section of the 
plate locking and releasing mechanism. Fig. 
9, Sheet 6, is a sectional detail of the sand 
dumping mechanism. Fig. 10, Sheet 6, is a 
plan view of Fig. 8 with the plate removed. 
Fig. 11, Sheet 6, is a sectional detail of the 
sifting-mechanism. Fig. 12, Sheet 6, is a side 
elevation through the dotted line l l of Fig. 
11, looking to the left. 
The same letters of reference are used to 
indicate identical parts in all the figures. 
Under its preferred form of construction 
my machine is intended to operate simulta 
neously upon eleven flasks arranged horizon 
25 
35 
45 
 
tally in a circle and carried upon intermit 
tingly-moving trucks, so that during and 
after each simultaneous movement of the 
trucks one of the operations necessary in mold 
ing is performed upon each flask, and so that 
after each simultaneous movement of the 
trucks a finished drag and cope are taken from 
the machine at one point and an empty two 
part flask placed in the machine at another or 
the starting point. 
Eor instance, as a preliminary description 
to give an idea of the successive operations, 
reference is made to Figs. 4 and 5, where the 
machine is shown in projection or straight 
ened out and the positions of the flasks are 
numbered from 1 to 11 consecutively. Here 
A represents the trucks abutting end to end 
and having flanged wheels Cl, traveling on 
tracks on a table B, supported by posts C. 
There is a two-part flask b c on each truck, of 
which b is the cope and c the drag, and inter 
posed between the two parts of each flask is 
a pattern-plated, with its patterns, as seen 
in Fig. 6. A sand-delivering trough D is ar 
ranged directly over the flasks with discharge 
hopper-boxes and screening mechanism. At 
position 1, Fig. 4, the facing-sand is sifted 
from box E to cover the patterns in the cope 
side. At position 2 Sand is dropped from box 
F to fill and heap up the cope side of the flask. 
At position 3 a rammer K packs the sand in 
the cope side. In moving from position 3 
to position 4 the cope side is carried under 
a stationary scraper G, which scrapes off the 
superfluous sand. At position 4 an attend 
ant places a backing-plate on the top of the 
cope side. At position 5 the two-part flask 
is clamped by the attendant by clamping 
bolts carried on horizontal pivots, the section 
of track and the truck below the flask is low 
ered, the flask still clamped and suspended 
is turned over, so that the packed cope side 
is underneath and the empty drag side is on 
top, the track and the truck are raised so that 
the flask again rests on the truck, and the 
bolts are disconnected to permit the truck 
with the flask on it to travel to position 6. 
At position 6 facing-sand is sifted from box 
H on the patterns in the drag side. At posi 
tion 7 sand is dropped from the box I to fill 
and heap up the drag side. At position 8 a. 
second rammer K packs the sand in the drag 
95 
IOO 
2 
587,605 
O 
25 
45 
side and a stationary Scraper J Scrapes off the 
superfluous sand as the flask travels under it 
from position 8 to position 9. At positions 9, 
10, and 11 the three trucks rest on a verti 
cally-movable section of table I, Fig. 5, sub 
jected to continuous rapping, and at position 
9 a backing-plate is put on the drag side and 
the handles of the drag side are engaged by 
shoulderse on suspended arms M. The ta 
ble L is then lowered, separating the cope 
from the drag and carrying the former down 
with it, while the drag is lifted off the ma 
chine finished with the exception of the gate 
ways to beformed in the usual manner. When 
the table is brought up again, an empty half 
is placed on the cope. At position 10 the 
flask is clamped and turned over during the 
descent of the table, bringing the cope on top 
and the empty half on the truck, just as at 
position. 5. At position 11 the cope is sus 
pended, as at position 9, while the empty half 
With the pattern-plate on it is carried down 
by the table. The cope is then lifted off the 
machine finished, another empty half is 
placed upon the empty half on the truck, and 
these tWO next move to position 1, and so on 
continuously with the requirement of but two 
attendants, One at position 5 and the other at 
the table L. 
Having thus stated in a general way what 
the machine is intended to accomplish and the 
successive operations on each flask, (though 
eleven are being acted on simultaneously,) I 
will now describe the machine in detail. 
The table B is a horizontal annular one, 
Figs. 2 and 3, supported on posts C and hav 
ing the tracks fon which the trucks. A travel. 
Above and in vertical alinement with the ta 
ble is the annular sand-trough D, supported 
on posts N, to which it is secured in any suit 
able manner. Within the annular table and 
substantially flush there with is a horizontal 
shifter-plate O, having a vertically-bored cen 
tral hub g On its under side, supported on a 
Central upright frame Pandjournaled on the 
upper end thereof. 
The main driving-shaft Q extends horizon 
tally beneath the shifter O and is journaled 
in the upright P and in a bearing R. This 
shaft is driven in any suitable manner, and 
in the present instance I have shown it pro 
vided with a worm-wheel S, engaging with a 
Worm T on a shaft U, revolved by pulleys V, 
secured thereon. Upon the hub g of the 
shifter-plate O is secured a beveledgear W, 
with which a mutilated beveled gear X, fast 
On the shaft Q, meshes at every revolution of 
the shaft Q to turn the shifter O one-eleventh 
of a revolution. These gears are so construct 
ed and the speed of the machine so timed that 
it takes thirty seconds for the complete revo 
lution of the shaft Q and the gear X, of which 
time during five seconds the plate O, trucks, 
and flasks are being shifted, and during the 
other twenty-five seconds the plate, trucks, 
and flasks are at rest and the various opera 
tions are being performed on the flasks. This 
time I consider ample, but, if desired, it may 
be increased. To prevent the plate O and 
the trucks carried by it from moving too far, 
I provide a spring-bolt I, Figs. 2, S, and 9, 
carried in a suitable guide Y, which engages 
successively a series of holes on the under 
side of the plate and which is withdrawn to 
unlock the plate just at the moment the mu 
tilated gear X is in position to mesh with gear 
W by means of an arm or projection on gear 
X, engaging a pini, projecting from the bolt 
h through a slot in the guide Y. As soon as 
the plate starts to turn the arm passes the 
pini and releases the bolt, which is projected 
by its spring into contact with the under side 
of the plate until just as the teeth of the gear 
X leave the gear Wa locking-hole rides over 
the bolt, which is projected into it to relock 
the plate, as will be readily understood. 
The plate O engages the trucks Aby means 
of vertical ribs lic upon its periphery entering 
notches upon the inner edges of the truck 
platforms, as seen in Figs. 2 and 3. The ribs 
F in this instance are in pairs upon the pe 
riphery of the plate and upward extensions l 
therefrom, and the inner edges of the truck 
platforms are cut away between the ribs to 
permit the backing-plates of the flasks to pro 
ject sufficiently to be engaged by the clamp 
ing-bolts, to be presently described. 
To drive the sand-sweeps, the sifting mech 
anisms, and the rammers, I provide a verti 
cal shaft A", journaled through the center of 
the plate O at its bottom in the step m, and 
at its upper end in a cross-piece B, support 
ed by other cross-pieces C', secured to the 
trough D. There is a beveled gear D', fast 
on the shaft A', beneath the gear W, which 
meshes with a smaller beveled gear E", fast 
on the inner end of the shaft Q, Fig. 2. 
The gear D is twice the diameter of the 
gear. E", so that for every complete revolution 
of the shaft Q the shaft A" makes just one 
half of a revolution. Secured upon the up 
per end of the shaft A" are two diametrically 
set horizontal arms E', projecting over the 
open top of the trough D, and each carrying 
a sweep FF', which extends into and fills 
the trough transversely. There are two sets 
of openings. G'H' through the bottom of the 
trough, (see Fig. 1) of which the two G" open 
into the sieve-boxes E H and the two II into 
the hopper-boxes F I, Fig. 4. 
Fast upon the shaft A', beneath its bearing 
in the cross-piece B', is a double beveled gear 
I", and journaled in suitable bearings on the 
under side of the trough are two horizontal 
crank-shafts.J', Figs.1 and 2, placed almost di 
ametrically to each other and having on their 
inner ends beveled gears IX", meshing with 
the teeth on the under side of the gear I". The 
gears K" are just half the diameter of the 
gear I, so that the shafts J" have the same 
speed that the shaft Q has. Upon each crank 
Of the shafts J" is a pitman n, whose lower 
end is pivoted to the upper end of a hollow 
plunger 0, guided in the tubular stem p of 
75 
9o 
95 
Oo 
IIo 
I I5 
13c 
- 6o 
 
587,605 
3. 
O 
the rammer IX, which is also vertically guided 
in the bearing q, secured to the hanger r, 
Fig. 2. A coiled spring S, confined in the 
plunger O, bears at its lower end against the 
rammer and serves to lessen the jar when the 
rammer strikes the sand in the flask, while a 
collar t on the plunger engages a shoulder in 
the stem of the rammer to lift the same. 
Suitably journaled in bearings u, Figs. 1, 
11, and 12, are two horizontal shafts L', set 
almost diametrically to each other and hav 
ing upon their inner ends small beveled 
pinions MI", meshing with the teeth on the 
upper side of the gear I, while upon their 
outer ends are small ratchet-wheels N', re 
volving close to the inner sides of the sand-sift 
ing boxes E. H. These boxes are hung on 
horizontal slides : on the trough under the 
openings G and their open lower ends are 
covered with sifting-screens v. A spring ca', 
Fig. 12, is applied to one end of each box, 
and the ratchet N' engages with a projection 
b' on the side of the box, so that as the ratchet 
revolves the box is shaken, being moved in 
one direction by the ratchet and in the oppo 
site direction by the spring, as will be readily 
understood. The hopper-boxes F I, which 
are identical in construction, are under the 
openings H" in the trough. In the lower end 
of each is a coarse screen c', Fig. 10. The 
bottom O of the box is hinged at one side 
and held normally closed by a spring-latch 
IP upon a rod d", pivoted on the under side 
of the trough, and having at its outer end an 
arm h", projecting up by the side of the trough 
in the path. of a tripping-arm Q', extending 
rearwardly from each sweep and of such 
length that the sweep will have filled the box 
with sand and passed over it before the latch 
is tripped to release the botton O'. As soon 
as it is released the weight of the sand throws 
it open and the sand falls into the flask below. 
As soon as the sand is discharged a counter 
weight e', secured to a cord f', passing over a 
pulley g', draws the bottom up and it becomes 
automatically engaged by the latch P. 
The section of table Q', Fig. 4, directly un 
der the truck at position 5 is carried upon a 
frame R' between two of the posts C, which 
serve as guides for the friction-rollers i", jour 
naled on the frame, so that the section of ta 
ble and the frame can be lowered and raised 
vertically. Counterweights S', secured to 
cords f", passed over pulleys k', and having 
their inner ends secured to the section Q', 
tend to hold the said section up flush with the 
table and return it and the frame after being 
lowered. The edges of the section Q' and the 
adjacent edges of the table are beveled, as 
shown, to prevent the section Q' from rising 
higher than the table. The other vertically 
movable section of tableL, under the trucks at 
positions 9, 10, and 11, is identicalin construc 
tion and operation with that just described, 
the only difference being that the latter is 
three times the length of the former to accom 
modate three trucks. Extending across from 
the posts C, between which are the movable 
sections of table L and Q', and on the outer 
side of the table is a projecting bar T, upon 
which at the middle is pivoted a vertical post 
U', having inserted through its upper end a 
sliding horizontal rod l, to which is secured 
a vertical clamping-bolt m', provided on its 
Removably sup 
ends with thumb-nuts in'. 
ported in one of a series of circular-arranged 
holes o', Figs. 3 and 6, in the table is a verti 
cal post p", directly opposite each of the posts 
U", and having inserted through its upper 
end in axial alinement with the rod l a simi 
lar rod q', to which is secured a vertical clamp 
ing-bolt r", provided on its ends with thumb 
nutss'. During the shifting of the plate O 
and the trucks the rods land g and clamp 
ing-bolts m rare drawn back out of the way, 
but when the plate comes to rest with the 
trucks and flasks shifted they are pushed for 
ward and the bolts enter slotst, Fig. 3, in the 
backing-plates of the flasks, and by turning 
down the upper thumb-nuts the flasks are 
clamped, the movable sections of table and 
the trucks thereon are lowered out of the way, 
the inner edges of the trucks sliding on the 
ribs 
without being disengaged, and the 
clamped flasks are turned over, with the rods 
l' q' acting as trunnions. After the flasks 
are turned over the sections of table and 
trucks are raised to again support the flasks 
and the thumb - nuts are loosened and the 
bolts drawn back out of the Way to permit the 
next shifting of the plate O, the trucks, and 
the flasks. 
Two posts V, Figs. 5 and 6, extend down 
from the bar T at the section L, and pivoted, 
as at u', is a horizontal rapping-arm W, Figs. 
2, 5, and 7. The inner end of the arm W' has 
a tooth v', engaging with a ratchet-wheel Y', 
fast on the shaft A'. 
The outer end of the 
arm W' has knocking-heads U' for rapping 
the posts V', between which they are situ 
ated, the arm W' being moved in one direc 
tion by the ratchet-wheel and in the opposite 
direction by a spring y', Fig. 7, as will be 
readily understood. 
The supports M, Figs. 2 and 5, are prefer 
ably adjustable in length by being made tel 
escopic, so as to regulate the height of the 
supporting-shoulders e, and when adjusted 
are held by set-screws Ct'. As seen in Fig. 2, 
the shoulders e are so adjusted that the han 
dles b' of the upper half of the flask ride over 
them without contact, but when the movable 
section of table L descends these handles are 
caught on the shoulders and the upper half 
of the flask remains suspended and is then 
lifted out of the machine, as before described. 
The scrapers G. Jare secured to any station 
ary part of the frame of the machine-in this 
instance to the posts N. 
The operation of the machine thus con 
structed is as follows: Assuming that the 
trucks are all provided with flasks that have 
been acted on by previous operations, as be 
fore described in reference to Figs. 4 and 5, 
25 
35 
45 
6 to 
 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
4. 
587,605 
 
: 
o 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
O 
25 
35 
and that the starting-points of the Sweeps 
(though they are continuously traveling) are 
indicated in Fig. 1, a quantity of sand suffi 
cient to fill both sets of boxes E F and HI is 
placed in the trough at , Fig. 1, in front of 
the sweep F" and a quantity of sand to fill 
the boxes III is in front of the sweep F". 
While the sweeps are in the position shown 
in Fig. 1 the shifter O is just about to shift 
the trucks and flasks from one position to the 
next and does so before the loads of sand are 
swept into the boxes EF and HI. When the 
sweep F gets to the position of the sweep F", 
it still pushes before it sufficient sand to fill 
the boxes H I, after which it comes to the 
position. Of Fempty and ready to take up and 
push forward the double load of sand de 
posited at in the trough, and so on continu 
ously. Any suitable means may be employed 
for depositing the sand in the trough, such 
as an elevating-conveyer, or it may be shov 
eled there by hand in measured quantities. 
At positions 1 and 2 the sand is sifted and 
dropped into the flasks below, the sifter be 
ing in constant operation and the bottom of 
the box being tripped, as before described, 
just as the sweep passes its opening in the 
trough. At the same time the same opera 
tions are being performed at positions 6 and 
7 and at the same time the rammers are si 
multaneously worked. The scrapers, how 
ever, act while the trucks are being shifted, 
but while the sifting, dropping, and ramming 
is taking place (during the twenty-five sec 
onds the shifter O is at rest and locked) the 
clamping of the flasks at positions 5 and 10, 
the lowering and raising of the sections Q' 
I, the turning of the flasks, and the separa 
tion of the flasks at positions 9 and 11 are all 
effected. 
The posts p', after each shifting of the shifter 
O, are taken out of their holes o' by hand and 
inserted in the next holes O' to bring them op 
posite the posts U, as will be readily under 
stood. 
While I prefer to construct my machine in 
the circular form described, yet I do not in 
tend my invention in its broad sense to be 
limited to this or any other form, and so far 
as this feature of my invention is concerned 
I wish my claims to be considered as broad as 
the language of their terms; also, while I pre 
fer to use shifting mechanism, yet it is evi 
dent that this might be dispensed with and 
the dropping mechanism alone retained. In 
deed a large part of the advantages of my in 
vention would be preserved if the sand was 
deposited by hand into the flasks at positions 
2 and 7. Again, while I prefer to use pat 
tern-plates the machine will work as well 
With loose patterns, the only requirements be 
ing that a match side with loose patterns in 
it is the under half at position 1. At posi 
tion 5, after turning and unclamping, the 
match side is removed and an empty half is 
substituted for it. Again, at position 9, after 
removing the drag, a match side is substi 
I claim 
tuted for it, and at position 11, after remov 
ing the cope and applying the empty half, the 
patterns are again placed in the match side, 
ready to start again at position 1. 
Iaving thus fully described my invention, 
1. In a sand-molding machine, the combi 
nation of an endless horizontal table, flask 
carrying trucks guided and simultaneously 
movable thereon intermittingly, automatic 
means for moving said trucks, a vertically 
movable section in said table under the path 
of travel of said trucks, and pivoted clamp 
ing-bolts over said movable section to support 
the flasks substantially as described. 
2. In a sand-molding machine, the combi 
nation of an endless horizontal table for the 
trucks and flasks, said table having verti 
cally-movable sections, a shifter, and suitable 
means to connect the said shifter to the trucks 
both in their normal and lowered positions. 
3. In a sand-molding machine, the combi 
nation of a horizontal circular sand-trough 
with openings in its bottom, sand dropping 
and ramming mechanism beneath said trough, 
sand-sweeps for said trough, a horizontal cir 
cular table beneath said trough, trucks car 
rying flasks on said table, a horizontal shifter 
for intermittingly moving said trucks, and 
operating mechanism for the sweeps and sand 
dropping and ramming mechanisms, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In a sand-molding machine having a 
sand-delivering trough, the combination of a 
dropping-box on the under side of the trough, 
said box having a hinged bottom, a sand 
sweep in the trough, a tripping-arm on said 
sweep, a latch for the hinged bottom, and a 
closing-weight for the hinged bottom, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a sand-molding machine, the combi 
nation of a horizontal table, flask-carrying 
trucks upon said table, mechanism for auto 
matically and intermittingly moving said 
trucks and flasks, said table having a verti 
cally-movable section under the path of travel 
of said trucks, and pivoted clamping-bolts 
over said movable sections to support said 
flasks, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of the shifter O, gear 
W fast thereto, mutilated gear X meshing 
with gear W, and driving-shaft Q, substan 
tially as described. 
7. The combination of the shaft, Q, gear 
E'fast thereon, vertical shaft A', gear D'fast 
on shaft A' and meshing with gear E", trough 
D provided with sand-passages and sweeps 
F', F", carried by shaft A', substantially as 
described. 
8. The combination of the shaft Q, gear 
E" fast thereon, vertical shaft A', gear D'fast 
on shaft A and meshing with gear. E", trough 
D provided with sand-passages, sand sifting 
and ramming mechanisms, and gear I for op 
erating said sand sifting and ramming mech 
anisms, substantially as described. 
9. In a sand-molding machine, the combi 
45 
55 
 
587,605 
5 
nation with the driving-shaft Q, the pinion nation with the supporting-table B and trucks 
E" fast on said shaft, and the vertical shaft A mounted thereon, of the shifter-plate O 
A provided with gear-wheel D' meshing with having vertical ribs on its periphery to en 
pinion E", whereby motion is imparted to gage the grooves on the under edges of said 15 
5 shaft A' from the driving-shaft Q, of a ratchet- trucks A, and means for moving said shifter 
wheel Y carried by said shaft A', posts V' by and trucks, substantially as described. 
which the flasks are supported, and a rap- 
ping-arm W arranged to vibrate between 
said posts and actuated by said ratchet-wheel 
10. In a sand-molding machine, the combi- 
Aft 
WILLIAM PORTEOUS. 
Io Y', substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
J. THOMSON CROSS, 
E. W. HARDINGHAUS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587705.txt	(No Model.) 
D. B. CLOSSON, 
SHOE. 
No. 587,705. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
  
xxz. 
W7Massas- 2x 
(2s23,-- 
a co- 
4v.23%.4- 
8264-69 
THE MORRIS PETERS co. PHoro-Litko, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID B. CLOSSON, OF BOSTON , MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE RICE 
& HUTCHINS, INCORPORATED, OF SAME PLACE. 
SHO E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,705, dated August 10, 1897. 
Application filed October 1, 1896. 
Serial No. 607,603, (No model.) 
O 
2C) 
To all Zwhon, it inctly coice.7i. 
Be it known that I, DAVID B. CLOSSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of 
5 Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Shoes, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, making part of this specification, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a top view of a shoe constructed 
in accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a side view of the same with the fly unfas 
tened. Fig. 3 is an enlarged transverse sec 
tion of the same on the line 33 of Fig. 1. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
an extremely easy and comfortable shoe for 
bicycle-riders and others; and it consists in 
an open-front shoe having a fly permanently 
secured to the shoe along one side of its front 
opening and adapted to be secured along its 
free edge to the opposite edge of said front 
opening by means of ball-and-socket or other 
suitable fastenings, said fly being provided 
with an elastic gore extending from its top 
down the center of its length to or nearly 
to the bottom of the front opening of the 
shoe, whereby great ease and comfort are se 
cured, as the elasticity of the gore and its 
central location over the instep permit of the 
free movement of the foot without uncom 
fortable pressure upon the instep or side 
joints, as hereinafter more fully set forth. 
In the said drawings, A represents a shoe 
having an oblong instep - opening b at the 
center of its front portion, the edges of the 
opening therefore being parallel and spaced 
apart. Along one edge of the opening t is 
permanently secured, by stitching, a fly d, 
which laps over the opposite edge of said 
front opening and is adapted to be secured 
in place when the shoe is on the foot, prefer 
ably by means of ball-and-socket fastenings 
f, as shown, the ball portions of the fasten 
45 ings being secured to the vamp and the 
socket portions to the fly. Other suitable 
fastenings may, however, be used, if desired. 
The fly dis divided longitudinally at the cen 
ter, forming an opening with parallel spaced 
35 
edges, within which opening is inserted an 
elastic gore g, which extends from the top of 
the fly to or nearly to the bottom of the front 
opening b of the shoe, said gore being of 
uniform width throughout its entire length 
and directly overhanging or closing the in 
step-opening b in the shoe, whereby the de 
gree of elasticity is equalized at all points 
and all of the cords and muscles of the foot 
relieved of uncomfortable pressure. Further 
more, by locating the elastic gore at the cen 
ter of the fly instead of on one side of the 
same the shoe is rendered much easier to the 
foot at the instep and side joints, whereby it 
is especially adapted for the use of bicycle 
riders where a free and easy action of the 
foot in pedaling is desirable. h is the toe 
cap, which in the shoe here shown is made in 
the same piece with the fly d, but, if desired, 
the toe-cap and fly may be made of separate 
pieces of material. 
The above-described shoe presents an ex 
tremely neat and stylish appearance, while 
the ball-and-socket fastenings greatly facili 
tate the operation of putting it on or remov 
ing it from the foot. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
As an improved article of manufacture, a 
bicycle or athletic shoe having a well-defined 
central longitudinal front opening b extend 
ing at its lower end over the ball of the foot; 
the edges of the opening being straight and 
spaced apart, a fly permanently secured along 
one longitudinal edge of the Opening and at 
the lower end thereof; said fly having a par 
allel-edged longitudinal opening registering 
with the shoe-opening and provided with an 
elastic filling piece or gore overlying the 
shoe-opening andfastening devices for secur 
ing the free edge of the fly to the underlying 
portion of the shoe, substantially as described. 
Witness my hand this 25th day of Septem 
ber, A. D. 1896. 
DAVID B. CLOSSON. 
In presence of 
P. E. TESCHEMACHER, 
R. H. BURDICK. 
55 
75 
go 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587806.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. FOX. 
POWER DRIVER FOR; BICYCLES, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 587,806. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897, 
c-A Z ?es ?: 
2/2 vee zer. 
resons perERs co, PHOTO-THOWASHINGTON, P. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. H. FOX. 
POWER, DRIVER FOR; BICYCLES, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 587,806. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
-say2upns 
24, ASN 
o4-ven for 
-zzle/3. (7% 
162-2-2 - 647. 
Morris PertRs co. ProTourHo-Washington, o.c: 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. FOX, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
Power-DRIVER FOR Bicycles. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,806, dated August 10, 1897. 
Application filed March 3, 1896, Serial No, 583,031, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may conce7'ri 
the wheel shown in section at the opposite. 
side of the center line upon line 55 in Fig. 6 
Be it known that I, JOHN H. FOX, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at New York, 
where the channel is bent to one side of the 
county of New York, State of New York, have 
wheel-disk. Fig. 6 is a side view of the crank 
shaft, wheel with one edge broken away for 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
want of room upon the drawings. 
ments in Power-Drivers for Bicycle and other 
In Fig. 1, A designates the steering-wheel, 
Wheels, fully described and represented in 
the following specification and the accompa 
and A' the driving-wheel, having the cord 
nying drawings, forming a part of the same. 
wheel B attached to its hub where the small 
sprocket-wheel is usually secured. C desig 
The object of this invention is to obviate 
nates the crank-shaft, carrying the crank C. 
the use of a chain in connecting the crank 
shaft with the driving-wheel of a bicycle by 
and the crank-shaft cord-wheel D. E desig 
nates the endless cord, which is applied to the 
using a flexible cord and grooved cord-wheels; 
two wheels so as to rotate the driving-wheel A 
and the invention consists in a particular 
when the pedal-cranks are turned. 
construction for the wheels which are em 
ployed to carry an endless cord. To secure 
The construction for the cord - wheels is 
great lightness with the requisite strength, I 
shown in the remaining figures, in which the 
entire wheel is designated by the letter B or 
form the flanges of the cord-wheels of two 
thin sheet-metal corrugated rings, connecting 
D, while the various parts of the wheel are 
designated by small letters f to k, inclusive. 
the rings of the Smaller cord-wheel with a hub 
threaded internally to fit upon the ball-bear 
The smaller cord-wheel is shown in Fig. 3 
with hub h. threaded internally to screw upon 
ing sleeve of the driven wheel and making 
the end of the ball-bearing sleeve in the cen 
one of the rings for the larger cord-wheelin 
ter of the driven wheel A', such thread se 
tegral with a disk or plate which is riveted 
curing the hub without weakening the same. 
to a hub on the bicycle crank-shaft. The 
The sheet-metalrings are formed upon their 
corrugations are formed upon the rings by 
inner edges respectively with flat flanges fand 
stamping alternate ridges and hollows there 
f', from which outwardly-flared extensions f* 
on and in the larger wheel pressing such 
and i are projected and formed, as shown in 
ridges and hollows within the margin of the 
ring, so that the periphery of the ring may 
Figs. 2 and 4, with alternate ridges in and hol 
lows n'. The flat portions of the ring are se 
run true. To avoid straining the sheet metal, 
cured together and to a rivet-flange g upon 
I press the ridges and hollows partly upon 
each side of the flat metal of which the ring the hub by rivetsi, while the flaring portions 
form a corrugated cord-channel, as shown in 
is formed, so that they project upon the outer 
Fig. 4. With this construction the two rings 
side of the ring as well as upon the inner side. 
may be identical and be stamped with the 
One of the rings upon the larger wheel is 
formed with a laterally-projecting cylindrical 
same die, the ridges and hollows being alter- . 
guard adapted to receive a brake-shoe, such 
nated when the rivet-holes are formed so as 
to be opposite one another when they are se 
guard being formed of the sheet metal inte 
cured to the flange g. 
gral with the adjacent ring. 
The section of the corrugated channel in 
The invention will be understood by refer 
Fig. 3 is taken across a portion of the chan 
ence to the annexed drawings, in which 
nel where the ridges and hollows are equidis 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a bicycle pro 
tant from the joint of the flanges ff", but at 
vided with my improved driving appliances. 
the right-hand side of Fig. 5 a cross-section 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the smaller cord 
of the two rings is shown through the middle 
wheel with part of the cord. Fig. 3 is a 
of one of the ridges, and both ridges and hol 
transverse section of the wheel on line 33 in 
lows are stamped from the metal of the rim 
Fig. 2 where the channel is central upon the 
within the margin so as to leave a peripheral 
disk of the wheel. Fig. 4 is an edge view of 
guard-flange k upon the ring, which runs per 
the smaller wheel. Fig. 5 is an edge view of 
fectly true when the wheel is rotated. The 
the crank-shaft wheel with the cord fitted to 
edges of the rings upon the smaller cord 
the rim upon one side of the center line and 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
s 
55 
75 
85 
. 
95 
ICO 
 
2. 
w 
587,806 
 
are described herein for the application of 
cord-driving wheels to a bicycle and find that 
they effect a very great reduction of the 
weight in the driving-gear as it is commonly 
constructed with a chain and sprocket-wheels. 
What I claim as my invention is- 
- 
1. The bicycle cord-driving wheelB, formed 
with the hub h. threaded internally to screw 
upon the ball-bearing sleeve of a bicycle 
wheel and provided with annular rivet-flange 
g, the sheet-metal rings formed respectively 
with flat flanges f and f', and with flaring cor 
rugated flanges f and i, the flanges f, f', be 
ing attached to the flangeg by rivetsi, and 
the ridges in and hollows n' upon the corru 
gated flanges being arranged alternately to 
form a corrugated cord-channel, as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
2. The bicycle cord-driving wheel D, formed 
of a hub and two sheet-metal rings, the hub 
h having annular rivet-flange g thereon, one 
sheet-metal ring being formed with the disk 
fattached to the flange g, and the other ring 
being formed with the flange f' riveted to the 
disk f, the rings being flared to form a cord 
channel and provided each at the edge with 
the true annular guard-flangele, and stamped 
within the periphery with the alternate ridges 
n, and hollows in', such ridges and hollows be 
ing pressed partly into the channel between 
the flanges , and partly outside of such 
flanges, to avoid straining the metal, substan 
tially as herein set forth. 
3. The bicycle cord-driving wheelD, formed 
of a hub and two sheet-metal rings, the hub 
h, having annular rivet-flange g thereon, one 
sheet-metal ring being formed with the disk 
fattached to the flange g, and the other ring 
being formed with the flangef riveted to the 
disk f, the rings being flared to form a cord 
channel and provided each at the edge with 
the true annular guard-flange k, and one of 
said guard-flanges being provided with the 
integral outwardly - projecting cylindrical 
brake-seat c', the rings being stamped within 
the periphery to form the corrugated cord 
channel, with the alternate ridges in and hol 
lows n' pressed partly into the channel be 
tween the flanges k and partly outside of such 
flanges, as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
JOHN H. FOX. 
Witnesses: 
L. LEE, 
THOMAS S. CRANE. 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
Io5 
O 
IS 
25 
wheel B present a wavy outline, as is shown 
in Fig. 4, but the larger cord-wheel D, which 
is attached to the crank-shaft, is liable to con 
tact with the clothing of the rider, and its 
margin is therefore provided with the guard 
flatages le. These flanges make the margin 
run perfectly true and thus avoid engagement 
With the dress of the rider. In the Sectional 
portion of Fig. 5 the corrugated groove lies 
between and inside of the flanges ic, and the 
ridge is lettered in and projects inside of the 
corrugated channel upon the upper side of 
the wheel, while the hollow is lettered n' and 
projects outside of the flange upon the lower 
side of the wheel. The projection of the ridges 
and hollows from the plane of the flat flange 
Fe upon the opposite sides of the same is about 
equal, so that the depression of the metal in 
the stamping operation is not excessive. 
The upper ring in Fig. 5 is shown extended 
inwardly to the rivet-flange g upon the wheel 
hub h, thus forming a disk-wheel or plate 
wheel, while the lower ring upon which the 
hollow n is shown is provided merely with a 
narrow flangelf' upon its inner edge and se 
cured to the disk or plate f by rivetsi. 
A brake-seat flange k" with cylindrical pe 
riphery is extended outwardly from the an 
nular rim lic of one of the corrugated rings to 
form an extended surface for applying a 
brake. 
By making the wheel-platerim and brake 
flange integral of sheet metal the wheel is 
provided with a corrugated groove to receive 
a cord and with a seat to receive a brake-shoe 
with the Smallest possible amount of weight. 
The Walls of the corrugated groove being 
formed of sheet metal possess a sufficient de 
gree of elasticity to yield as the strain in 
creases upon the cord and to hold the same 
elastically. The operation of the wheel in 
holding the cord is thus more effective than 
where the groove is formed between rigid 
cast-metal surfaces. As the corrugations in 
crease the stiffness of the sheet metal, it may 
be made verythin and a great degree of elas 
ticity secured with the utmost diminution of 
weight in the structure. 
The formation of the ridges in and hollows 
n' inside the periphery of the rings is clearly 
shown in Fig. 6, where the ridges and hollows 
are shaded so far as they are bent inwardly 
and outwardly from the plane of the ring. 
I am aware that corrugated wheels have 
been constructed in a variety of ways to use 
with endless cords, and I do not therefore 
make any claim, broadly, to such a construc 
tion. I have devised the constructions which 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US587906.txt	AY 
(No Model.) 
J. Q. ADAMS. 
CORN SHIELIER, 
5. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 587,906. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
H. 
nasa 
4. 
2s 
 
 
Zezee, 
/66-43/ 
2722-226.4% eel- 
| I s 
(2a 4--. Y S At 12 
Oss 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
J. Q. ADAMS, 
CORN SHIELLER, 
5 Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
6Voza Q/7%/7as 
Y 
6. 
O 
N 
HE NORRIS PETERs co, Poro-ur-ro, washington. D. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 587,906. 
J. Q. ADAMS. 
CORN SHELLER. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
 
alsYesA. \ As 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 587,906. 
J. Q. ADAMS, 
CORN SHIELLER, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
a 2% 
2 44 2 N Z22ZZZ 
 
sa 
3, 2 
2 2 
 
 
 
 
e 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
O O. O. O. O. O. O. O. O 
O O. O. O. O. O. O. O. O 
 
 
 
 
  
  
E. 
Z7&avezzz 
Vo/2/z 62/7%/7as 
Z 
acts 
 
the worris perers co. Photo-LTHo. was HINGTON. D. C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 587,906. 
. 
. 
. 
J. Q. ADAMS. 
CORN SHELLER, 
5 sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
 
2 
SS 
. 
fall N 
 
 
  
2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN QUINCY ADAMS, OF MARSEILLES, ILLINOIS. 
CORN - SHELLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 587,906, dated August 10, 1897. 
Application filed October 19, 1896, Serial No. 609,302, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all livhon it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN QUINCY ADAMS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Mar 
seilles, in the county of La Salle and State of 
Illinois, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Corn-Shellers, which is 
fully set forth in the following specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a general side elevation of my 
corn-sheller. Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal 
Section approximately along the center there 
of. Fig. 3 is a vertical cross-section on the 
line 33 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a similar section 
with the shelling-cylinder removed. Fig. 5 
is a detail plan view of one of the staves com 
posing the shelling-cylinder. Fig. 6 is an 
end view of such a stave. Fig. 7 is a section 
on the line 77 of Fig. 3. 
Fig. S is a plan view 
of the Spring mechanism Supporting each rid 
dle. Fig. 9 is a section on the line 9 9 of 
Fig. S. 
Fig. 10 is a detail of the bracket 
forming part of this mechanism. Fig. 11 is 
a vertical cross-section on the line 11 II of 
Fig. 7, being a view similar to that in Fig. 3, 
but taken in the opposite direction. Fig. 12 
is an elevation of the adjusting-ring of the 
cylinder. Fig. 13 is an elevation of a base 
ring, upon which the adjusting-ring is mount 
ed. Fig. 14 is a vertical section on the line 
14 14 of Fig. 13. 
My invention relates to corn-shellers, and 
has for its object certain improvements in 
construction designed to add to the efficiency 
of such a machine. These improvements re 
late principally to the construction of the 
shelling-cylinder and to the mounting of the 
shaking-screens, and will be described in con 
nection with their operation in the machine. 
The accompanying drawings illustrate the 
principal parts of a corn-sheller, as well as 
those parts especially connected with my in 
vention. Only the latter, however, will be 
described in detail. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A rep 
resents a hopper in which the ears of corn 
are supplied to the machine. 
A designates the feed-chamber, from which 
the ears are fed forward to the shelling mech 
anism proper. 
Extending throughout the length of the ma 
chine and suitably mounted in the frame 
Work thereof, is journaled a shaft B, to which 
power is applied through the belt-pulley B' 
at one end thereof. 
Within the feed-chamber A' the shaft B 
carries an enlargement B, around the edge 
of which extends a spiral flange b. This de 
vice constitutes, therefore, a screw-feed, forc 
ing the ears of corn into the shelling-cylinder 
later described. Within the said shelling 
cylinder the shaft B carries a still further 
conical enlargement or hub B, around which 
the spiral flange b is continued. Throughout 
the remainder of the length of the shelling 
cylinder there is mounted upon the shaft B 
the shelling-cone proper, B, consisting of a 
series of cone-sections b', disposed one be 
hind the other. Each such section is so 
shaped that its rear edge projects beyond the 
forward edge of the section next adjacent, 
forming thereby a series of shoulders b. 
These sections of the shelling-cone are pro 
vided with spiral V-shaped flanges b. 
The shelling-cylinder C, already referred 
to and inclosing the shelling-cone, is con 
Structed as follows: There is secured to the 
framework surrounding the opening from 
the feed-chamber to the shelling-cylinder a 
ring C, provided with an outer peripheral 
flange C. Opposite to this ring and sepa 
rated from it by the length of the cylinder 
there is secured to the framework a second 
or base ring D, provided with an inner pe 
ripheral flange D. Upon this flange are 
mounted, preferably, six equidistant lugs d, 
tapering in Wardly. Upon the base-ring D, 
surrounding the flange D'' and adapted to ro 
tate thereon, is mounted a third or adjust 
ing-ring E. The said adjusting-ring is pro 
vided upon its inward-facing surface with a 
series of segmental slots or grooves E", pref 
erably twelve in number. The said grooves 
are not concentric with the ring. One end 
e of each groove or slot is nearer the center 
of the said ring by a certain determined dis 
tance, preferably some five-sixteenths of an 
inch, than the remaining end of said groove. 
The adjoining ends of the said grooves are 
thus somewhat offset in relation to each other. 
The adjusting-ring E carries a bracket or 
projection E, to which there is secured a le 
ver E, extending upward. This lever is pro 
vided with a spring-controlled dog E of any 
95 
IOO 
d 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
587,906 
 
ordinary construction. Upon the framework 
of the machine, adjacent to the lever E, is 
mounted a segmental rack EP, provided with 
teethe'. The dog Eis adapted to engage with 
these teeth as the lever is moved one way or 
the other with relation to the said rack. 
The body of the shelling-cylinder is of 
skeleton construction, and according to my 
present invention consists of a series of Staves 
In the construction illustrated in the 
F. 
drawings I have shown a shelling-cylinder 
comprising six such staves. Each stave con 
sists of two end pieces F and F and of ribs 
F, mounted in and connecting the said end 
ieces. These end pieces are approximately 
in the form of segments of a ring. The piece 
F" is provided with a bolt-holef. The oppo 
site piece F carries two lugs f' and f', shorter 
than the grooves E' of the ring E, in which 
grooves the said lugs are adapted to fit and 
move. When the staves are in position to 
form the shelling-cylinder, the end piece F 
is somewhat loosely secured, by a bolt pass 
ing through the bolt-hole f, to the flange C* 
on the ring C. The two lugs f' and f, car 
ried by the opposite end piece F of the stave, 
fit in two adjacent grooves E' in the adjust 
ing-ring E. The ribs F, which form the 
skeleton of the cylinder, are preferably of 
the form shown in cross-section in Fig. 3. 
They are braced apart by the cross-pieces E. 
In actual construction the entire stave F, 
including all the parts described, is prefer 
ably made in a single casting. 
In the framework of the machine, below 
the feed- chamber A', is journaled a rock 
shaft G, which carries a pair of short up 
wardly-extending arms G' and of downwardly 
extending arms G. In the arms G' is pivot 
ally mounted one end of a shaking-riddle H, 
comprising a sieve H' and two deflectors H 
and H, disposed beneath the same. In the 
arms G is pivotally mounted one end of a 
second riddle I, comprising a sieve I and a 
pair of deflectors I and I. 
The remaining end of each of the riddles is 
spring-mounted in a manner which will now 
be described with reference to the upper lid 
dle and which is the same with respect to the 
lower. To the framework of the machine is 
secured a bracket-casting J, provided with 
two perforated ears J'and with a downwardly 
extending diagonally-disposed arm J. Upon 
this arm is formed a lug or projection i. A 
plate-casting K, provided with two perforated 
ears K", is pivotally secured by a bolt K, pass 
ing through the said ears and through the 
ears. J to the bracket J. The plate K at its 
lower end is provided with a lug k opposite 
and corresponding to the lug-i, and terminates 
in a diagonally-disposed arm K, correspond 
ing to the arm J. The lower end of the plate 
K is adjusted nearer to or farther from the 
bracket J by the bolt K'. 
Upon the bolt K is pivotally mounted the 
upper end of a flat spring-hanger L. The 
lower end of the said hanger is secured to and 
supports the free end of the riddle I. Upon 
that portion of the spring-hanger opposite the 
lugi and the said lugk: I place a coiled expan 
sion-spring L'. One end of the spring abuts 
against the hanger L, the other against the 
bracket J, where it surrounds the lugi, by . 
which the said spring is kept in place. A 
similar spring L* is placed between the oppo 
site side of the hanger and the lug k, carried 
by the plate K. By tightening the bolt K' 
both springs are compressed against the 
hanger and so against each other, thus in 
creasing their tension. 
The remaining parts of the machine shown 
are of the usual construction. A rotary blower 
M forces a current of air between the riddles 
H and I and through the passage N in the 
direction of the arrow. The dust-collector O, 
connecting with the passage N, receives this 
current of air with the dust collected thereby 
and expels the same from the machine. A 
screw conveyer P of ordinary form receives 
the shelled corn from the lower riddle. The 
transmission of power to the various parts of 
the machine is accomplished in any preferred 
way. The rocking movement is given to the 
rock-shaft G by the crank-rod Q, one end of 
which is secured to an arm carried by the rock 
shaft, the other to a crank carried by the gear 
wheel R, which is connected with the source 
of power. 
I shall now explain the operation of the 
machine, the construction of which is herein 
above described. 
The ears of corn enter the machine by the 
hopper A and are fed forward by the screw 
conveyer in the feed-chamber A' to the shell 
ing - cylinder C. By the movement of the 
conical hub 38 the ears of corn become ar 
ranged more or less lengthwise with reference 
to the cylinder and at the same time are fed 
forward toward the shelling-cone proper, B. 
The flanges upon the cone-sections, in combi 
nation with the cylinder, Wedge off the kernels 
from the ears and at the same time feed them 
forward. The cone-sections are of such rela 
tive size that the distance between the per 
imeter of the last and the inner surface of the 
cylinder is equal to the diameter of the cob. 
As the cobs pass out of the right-hand end of 
the shelling-cylinder, as shown in Figs. 2 and 
7, they are completely divested of the kernels 
of corn. 
So far as I am aware in corn-shellers as pre 
viously constructed the cylinder. C has been 
always of a fixed diameter. There has been 
no provision made for expanding or contract 
ing the said cylinder. Accordingly the space 
between the shelling-cone and the cylinder 
Inasmuch as the size of . 
has also been fixed. 
the ears of corn varies considerably a corn 
sheller of the usual non-adjustable type must 
be either so constructed that it will unduly 
pulverize the cobs of large ears of corn or will 
imperfectly shell the small ears. 
between the shelling-cone and the cylinder is 
of the proper size for large ears, it will be too 
I25 
. 
If the space - 
85 
95 
ido 
Ios 
o 
II5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
587,906 
3. 
75 
large for small ears, and vice versa. This im 
portant defect I remedy by making the exit 
end of the shelling-cylinder adjustable in di 
ameter by mechanism already described. 
Fig. 7 shows the exit end of the cylinder at 
its maximum contraction. The lever E is 
thrown over and held by the extreme end of 
the rack E. The adjusting-ring E is thereby 
rotated. Thelugs f' and f* are thereby moved 
to the inner endse of the grooves E'. The ends 
of the staves carrying the said lugs are there 
by moved directly inward. All tendency 
toward rotation on the part of the staves dur 
ing this movement is prevented by the lugs d, 
carried by the flange D' of the ring D. These 
lugs abut against the sides of the end pieces 
F of the staves and permit the said ends to 
move downwardly and inwardly without per 
mitting any lateral movement thereof. The 
loose bolting of the ends F of the staves per 
mits this movement of the ends F. 
When the cylinder is at its maximum con 
traction, as shown in Fig. 11, the adjoining 
ribs of the adjacent staves are nearly or quite 
in contact. Accordingly when the cylinder 
is expanded to its maximum expansion the 
Said adjoining ribs are Spaced apart by a dis 
tance approximately equal to that between 
the ribs of each stave. To expand the cylin 
der from its position, as in Fig. 11, the lever 
Eis moved over to any given extent, the ring 
E is rotated thereby, and the lugs f' and f' 
of the Staves move from the inner ends e of 
the slots E toward the outer ends e' thereof. 
The in Ward and outward movement of each 
stave amounts, preferably, to some five-six 
teenths of an inch. This will enable the shell 
ing mechanism to be adapted to ears of any 
ordinary size. 
The shelled corn falling from the cylinder 
C drops first upon the riddle H, which is vi 
brated longitudinally by the motion of the 
rock-shaft G. Passing through the sieve H' 
the corn is caught by the deflectors Hand H 
of the said riddle and drops thence on the 
second riddle I. Passing through the sieve 
I thereof it is carried by the deflectors I and 
I to the screw conveyer P, which removes the 
shelled and cleaned corn from the machine. 
As already stated, one end of each riddle 
is pivotally mounted in the arms of the rock 
shaft G. The other is supported by a spring 
hanger. AS Such riddles have been previ 
ously constructed the Spring-hanger has been 
rigidly secured at its upper end to the frame 
work of the machine; at its lower end piv 
otally secured to the end of the riddle. As 
a result of this construction and of the long 
continued vibration of the Spring-hanger near 
the point of the rigid attachment of its up 
per end, the said hanger is usually crystal 
lized in a short time at Such point and soon 
broken, requiring frequent repairing of the 
machine in this respect. By my construction 
the upper end of the hanger is not rigidly 
but pivotally secured to the framework. By 
the interposition of the coiled springs L and 
25 
35 
45 
55 
L when the riddle is at either end of its vi 
bration the entire spring-hanger is curved 
into the form of an arc of a circle, the bend 
and tension are distributed along the entire 
length of the hanger, there is no rigid point 
in the attachment of the hanger, there is no 
point at which crystallization can take place, 
and breakage of the hanger from this cause 
is entirely avoided. A further advantage of 
this construction is that the combination of 
the coiled springs L and L with the spring 
hanger forms a mounting for the end of the 
riddle of the greatest possible elasticity. As 
has already been seen, the tension of the 
springs L and L* can be increased or de 
creased at will by the bolt K. 
Having thus described the construction and 
operation of one of the forms in which my in 
vention may be carried out, I do not wish to 
be understood as limiting myself thereby to 
the specific form so described; but 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a corn-shelling machine, the combina 
tion of the shelling-cone, with the coperat 
ing cylinder, means for expanding uniformly 
one end of said cylinder so as to vary the di 
ameter of that end, and connections for hold 
ing said cylinder unyieldingly in any desired 
position of expansion. 
2. In a corn-shelling machine, the combina 
tion of the shelling-cone, with the coperat 
ing cylinder composed of staves arranged 
substantially parallel to the axis of said cone, 
and means of Simultaneously moving said 
staves at one end radially to the cone and re 
taining them unyieldingly in the position to 
which they have been moved. 
3. In a corn-shelling machine, the combina 
tion of the corrugated shelling-cone, with the 
coperating cylinder composed of skeleton 
staves arranged Substantially parallel to the 
axis of said cone, means for simultaneously 
moving said staves at one end radially to the 
cone, and connections for retaining them un 
yieldingly in the position to which they have 
been adjusted. 
4. In a corn-sheller, a shelling-cone; a shell 
ing-cylinder within which the said cone re 
volves, comprising a series of skeleton staves 
forming a complete cylinder; means for hold 
ing the staves approximately fixed at one end; 
and a single mechanism adapted to adjust si 
multaneously all the said staves at their other 
end radially to and from the center of the 
cylinder. 
5. In a corn-sheller shelling-cylinder, the 
ring E rotatably mounted at one end of the 
shelling-cylinder; the staves Feach provided 
at One end with devices adapted to engage 
with the said ring E; means for holding ap 
proximately fixed the opposite ends of the 
said staves; and mechanism adapted to ro 
tate the ring E. 
6. In a corn-sheller, the ring C'; the staves 
Floosely secured at One end thereof, and pro 
vided at their opposite ends with the lugs f' 
9o 
95 
O 
Io5 
O 
I 25 
4. 
587,906 
with the said sieve and pivotally connected 
with the framework of the machine; and sup 
plemental springs interposed between the 
said hanger midway thereof and the frame 
work of the machine on each side of the said 
hanger. 
10. As a spring - mounting for shaking 
sieves, &c., the spring-hanger L. pivotally con 
nected with the framework of the machine; 
and the coiled expansion-springs L and L. 
11. As a spring - mounting for shaking 
sieves, &c., the spring-hanger H. pivotally 
mounted in the framework of the machine; 
the spring. L interposed between the said 
hanger and the framework of the machine; 
the pivoted plate II; the spring L'interposed 
between the hanger and the said pivotal plate; 
and means for adjusting the free end of the 
said pivoted plate to and from the framework 
of the machine to alter the tension of the 
springs L and L. 
JOHN QUINCY ADAMS. 
Witnesses: 
G. J. CRAM, 
AUGUSTUS ADAMS. 
35 
x 
re 
--- 
40 
45 
O 
the ring E rotatably mounted at the opposite 
end of the shelling-cylinder, and provided 
with the grooves E' adapted to receive the 
lugs f and means for rotating the ring E. 
7. In a corn-sheller, the ring C'; the skele 
ton staves F comprising the ribs F; means 
for securing the said staves loosely at one end 
to the ring C'; the lugs f' and if mounted 
upon the opposite free end of the said staves; 
the base-ring B provided with the flange D' 
and the lugdi the adjusting-ring E, provided 
with the grooves E' adapted to receive the 
lugs f' and f', and means for rotating the said 
adjusting-ring, and for holding it in such ro 
tated position, substantially as described. 
8. In a corn-sheller, a riddle or sieve II; 
means attached to one end thereof adapted 
to reciprocate the said riddle; a spring-hanger 
pivotally connected to the framework of the 
machine supporting the free end of the rid 
dle; and supplemental springs interposed on 
each side of the said hanger-midway thereof 
between the hanger and the framework of 
the machine. 
9. As a spring-mounting for a shaking-sieve 
or other similar device, a hanger I connected 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588006.txt	(No Model.) 
J. L. POTTER, 
EXCAVATING AND CONWEYING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 588,006. 
N 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897 
SS 
- 
  
Sv S S t 
 
A/inesses. 
 
 
2% 6 Gaez. 
S 
M 
6 
Caveaeoe: 
UosFP A. Aovar, 
/zerneys. 
24 z wa, 
 
the Norris PETERS co, ProTolkif-powAsso. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. L. POTTER. 
EXCAVATING AND CONWEYING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 588,006. 
Patented Aug, l0, 1897. 
 
x 
AW- 
L- 
- 
S 
* 
a / 
A. 
A. 2. 
A2. 3 
202ezzesses. 
-42a. 2a2cead 
- - - uve-la-V . 
. 
C2vea tor: 
JosAA/A A277AA 
72%max4% 
o/Zetozaeys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEP II L. POTTER, OF INDIAN APOLIS, INDIAN A. 
EXCAVATING AND CONVEYNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,006, dated August 10, 1897. 
Application filed November 14, 1896, Serial No. 612,104 (No Imodel.) 
O 
5 
3O 
35 
To all, whom, it mazy concern. 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH L. POTTER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at In 
dianapolis, in the county of Marion and State 
of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Excavating and Con 
veying Machines; and I do declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
a machine for excavating trenches economic 
ally by means of a scoop to raise the mate 
rial from the bottom of the trench to the sur 
face, and, further, to provide means to trans 
port the Scoop filled with material longitudi 
nally to a convenient place for dumping. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple and inexpensive apparatus and recep 
tacle for scooping up the material from the 
trench and means for transporting same back 
and forth on the line of the track and dispos 
ing of the contents of the scoop at the desired 
place by means of the drop-bottom of the 
Scoop. The scoop is pulled over the trench 
Surface until filled by means of the rope or 
cable connected to one of the drums of the 
hoisting-engine and is raised and transported 
by means of ropes or cables, one end con 
nected to and operated by the hoisting-drums 
and the other end connected to the drums on 
- 
the shafts of the traveling carriage. 
With this end in view my invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combination of parts, which will be herein 
after more fully described, and pointed out 
in the claims. 
In excavating for trenches, sewers, and the 
like where the material is to be raised to the 
Surface to be transported longitudinally to 
a convenient place for dumping this device 
is of great convenience, as it affords a safe, 
practical, and readily-constructed transit for 
Such material. It has been the custom to 
first loosen the dirt by means of picks and 
shovels and filling the receptacle with dirt 
and then raising it to the surface, but my in 
vention fills the scoop automatically by drag 
ging it along the surface of the trench by 
means of the ropes and cables on the carriage 
and engine by simply manipulating the drum 
levers which are attached to the engine and 
dropping the contents of the scoop in a con 
venient place at the Will of the operators. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a side elevation showing the machine 
in operation. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
scoop, showing the bottom of same open in 
dotted lines. Fig. 3 is an end elevation. 
In the drawings, H is a surface rail on 
which the superstructure travels. On top of 
this superstructure the carriage J is mounted 
and travels longitudinally on wheels. On 
top of the carriage J is mounted the main 
drum F and the supplemental drums G, G, 
and G. These drums are mounted on suit 
able shafts of the carriage. 
I represents the boards of the sides of the 
trench in which the scoop M operates. 
A represents the hoisting - engine frame, 
provided with the drums C, B, and E, and 
which have the operating-levers ca, b, and d, 
respectively. The levers a, and b are con 
nected to suitable frictional clutches to re 
volve said drums in either direction. The 
drums C and B are loose on the shaft and 
only revolve when the levers a and b are en 
gaged therewith. The drums to which the 
levers a, b, and d are connected are geared 
together and are engaged by a third or a se 
ries of intermediate gears to the gear on the 
main shaft of the engine. 
Q is a long rope or cable, and is attached to 
the drum C of the engine and passes over the 
pulleys W and W lengthwise across the car 
riage and over the pulley W*, then around 
the main drum F. 
The rope or cable X is secured to the drum 
B of the engine, then passes upward and over 
the pulley B', and is attached to the carriage 
B. This rope pulls the carriage toward the 
engine. The ropes g and h, pass over the 
supplemental drums G. G', respectively, and 
around the supplemental drums G, which 
are attached to the main shaft G, on which 
is mounted the main drum F. The ropes or 
cables g and h have hooks T attached to their 
lower ends. 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
g 
588,006 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
of the United States, is 
1. In combination the movable trestle, the 
movable carriage mounted thereon, the shafts 
journaled on said carriage, the main and sup 
plemental drums carried by said shafts, the 
cables or ropes connected to said supplemen 
tal drums, the scoop connected by said ropes 
to said supplemental drums, the ropes or ca 
bles leading from the engine-drums and pass 
ing over pulleys carried by said carriage and 
connected to the main drum, the winding of 
said rope on said engine-drums being adapted 
to either raise or lower said scoop, or advance 
said carriage, the cable attached to one of said 
engine-drums to advance or pull said scoop 
on the surface of the trench, the hand-rope 
operating said drum and the rope or cable to 
pull the carriage toward the engine, substaff. 
tially as shown and described. 
2. The herein-described scoop for excavata 
ing materials having a cylindrical body, the 
mouth of the scoop flared upward, the bot 
tom doors pivoted to said cylindrical body. 
and made into halves and moving in oppse 
site directions, the bottom of said doors of 
the scoop made concave and held together by 
means of a spring - latch, substantially as 
shown and described. 
. . 
3. The herein-described scoop for an exea 
vating-machine, made cylindrical informand 
having operating-doors at the bottom thereof, 
and pivoted to said scoop, said doors having 
slanting bottoms and held together by means 
of a spring-latch, substantially as shown and 
described. 
In testimony whereof. I affix my signattire 
. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH L. POTTER. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
. . 
- 
- 
- - 
. 
. 
- 
JNO. S. THURMAN, 
E. T. SILVIUS. 
45 
55 
75 
O 
25 
The scoop M is preferably made cylindrical 
and has the swinging or bottom doors L, piv 
oted to the scoop at l, and the two halves of 
the bottom are held together by means of a 
Spring-latch R, engaging with the catch on 
the opposite half of the bottom. 
t is an eyelet in the spring-latch to attach 
a rope to disengage the doors of the scoop 
from the surface of the trench. The bottom 
L is concave at n, so that the sides of the 
doors will clear the scoop Mwhen open. The 
doors at the bottom of the scoop have the con 
cave or slanting bottom S. When the spring 
latch on the door is released, the doors open 
automatically by means of the Weight of the 
material forcing the bottom doors apart. 
The top of the scoop is shown flat at W and 
tapers upward in the contour, as shown at U. 
The edge U Scrapes and gouges in the sur 
face of the trench, thereby filling the scoop. 
N is the rigid handle and is riveted to the 
scoop by means of the rivets e. . 
O is the bracket attached to the handle N 
and engages with the hook T. 
In operation, to lower the scoop disengage 
the frictional clutch-lever a, and the scoop 
willfall by gravity to the bottom of the trench. 
Then engage the lever d by means of the rope 
j, which will cause the drum E to revolve and 
pull the scoop toward the hoisting-engine. 
The scoop is effectively filled in this manner, 
and when filled is engaged with the hook T 
on the rope or cable hand is elevated to the 
surface by means of the lever at and drum C. 
The scoop when elevated to the surface is 
then transported longitudirially along the 
track to the desired place for dumping. Then 
the operator lifts the latch, which releases the 
drop-bottom doors of the scoop, and said doors 
open by means of the weight of the load there 
in, thus relieving the scoop of its contents. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588106.txt	(No Model.) 
W. C. FAHY. 
ELEWATOR CONTROLLER LOCK. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 588, 106. 
 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
- 
   
 
 
  
Z % 
s 2 
VVinesses. 
(2a, 26-letzeeee- 
r: (Yentor 
4: (, 
He frn 2 M K 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,106. 
 
 
 
 
 
W. C. FAHY. 
ELEWATOR CONTROLLER I,00K. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
2. 
| 
I 
II 
I 
per his Attorney 
7 4-Auzzee (64. A 
fe worsts PEERs c 
0. P-O-- was: 
O 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,106. 
6 
W. C. FAHY, 
ELEWATOR CONTROLLER LOCK. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
Ex/XSXXt 
SXXXXXXXXs 
xSee a2 O 
3xx 
XX 
s x (> 
 
  
y 
F 
  
  
 
 
NH 
 
62 
; U : 
H. i2 225 
2/...I. 
HTH 
res, 
16 
17 
Fig.?. 
1S 
Inventor. 
Yi clam C. Fahy 
1/( tress 
- 
es 
fegret m 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 588, l06. 
 
W. C. FAHY, 
ELEWATOR CONTROLLER LOCK, 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 10, 1897. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM C. FAIIY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
ELEVATOR-CONTROLLER LOC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,106, dated August 10, 1897. 
Application filed April 4, 1896, Serial No. 586,179, (No model.) 
55 
- 
. 
to a 22 tufton, it 72 (zz conceri. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. C. FAHY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of the city and county of Philadelphia, State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
useful Improvement in Elevator-Controller 
ILocks, of which the following is a clear and 
Sufficient specification, reference being had 
to the drawings annexed. 
My invention operates to prevent the turn 
ing of the shaft which operates the valve or 
other starting mechanism or is positively con 
nected With the same or to the controller 
cables, so that the controller-ropes will be 
unable to turn or rotate it when the landing 
or floor doors, or any of them, are open, and 
On the other hand to allow this shaft to be 
turned when these doors are all closed. 
From this it results that the elevator-car can 
not move while any of the floor or landing 
doors are open, and consequently all danger 
of injury by crushing to people entering the 
shaft while the elevator-car is in motion is 
avoided. 
My invention consists, essentially, of the 
following elements: a locking device movable 
into and Out of positive engagement with a 
device provided with means for positively 
engaging With the locking device and mov 
ing positively with the mechanism operating 
the starting and stopping mechanism of the 
elevator, one of which devices noves with 
shaft above mentioned, mechanism moving 
said device in and out of engagement with 
said coperating keeper device, and mechan 
ical means operated by the landing - doors 
for causing the moving of said locking de 
vice into such engagement when any of the 
doors are open (thereby stopping the starting 
mechanism of the elevator and stopping the 
elevator-car) and moving same out of such 
engagement, alld thereby releasing the valve 
operating or other starting mechanism and 
allowing the elevator-car to be moved up 
ward and downward when all of the doors 
are shut. 
Various other portions of my device I con 
sider to embrace patentable novelty. 
Describing now in detail the form of my 
invention which I find best in practice, Fig 
ure 1 is a side elevation of a portion of shaft 
with the car therein provided with my in 
vented device. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of 
parts in the neighborhood of the shaft-con 
trolling the operation of the valve, and Figs. 3 
and 4 are respectively a right side elevation 
and a plan of same. In the right side eleva 
tion no attempt is made, however, to show any 
thing beyond the plane of the line y y' of Fig. 
2. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional view along the line 
yy' of Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is an elevation of the 
inside of one of the floor-landing doors with 
the devices for operating the cable connected 
to the device shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 7 is a 
sectional view along the line ac ac' of Fig. 2. 
Fig. S is a sectional view along the line at u' 
in Fig. 2; and Fig. 9 is a side elevation of a 
floor or landing door, looking at it from the 
side toward which it moves when opening. 
Fig. 10 is a side elevation of several stories 
of the elevator-well. 
The elevator-shaft can be of any ordinary 
or usual or convenient construction, as can 
be the hoisting device, car-controlling mech 
anism, starting device, and means for ingress 
and egress. All these parts can be varied in 
all cases to suit the particular problem which 
the elevator-builder may have to solve in the 
erection of his plant, and while I have shown 
a particular form of most of these parts and 
will particularly describe them in places 
such description or illustration is not to be 
taken as any limitation on my invention. 
Z is the car, which is provided with any 
suitable hoisting means and which travels 
vertically in the shaft W. The sides of a 
portion of the shaft are formed by the parti 
tions Y Y, provided with floor or landing 
doors X, which when open allow ingress and 
egress to the shaft. The car is provided with 
a controlling mechanism which consists in 
part of the controller - pulleys G 7 8, con 
nected together by the rods 5 and 9, which are 
shifted in the ordinary manner and around 
which pass the controller-cables 1010, which 
pass around the pulley which is secured to 
the main shaft C, which operates the valve. 
These cables are usually keyed fast to the 
wheels to give a more positive coaction be 
tween them and the shaft C. The particular 
form of valve - operating or other starting 
mechanism and the hoisting mechanism form 
45 
. 
75 
95 
roo 
Id 
25 
 
2 
588,106 
O 
ing no part of my invention are not shown 
except by the shaft C and will not be further 
described. . 
Describing now the locking mechanism. 
This consists in the best form of my device 
of which I am now aware of a device secured 
to the shaft C and turning with it, with which 
a locking device operated by the opening and 
shutting of the landing-doors engage when 
the latter are open and prevents the turning 
of the device secured to the shaft C. Continu 
ing the description of the said best form, 
the part attached or positively connected to 
shaft C is the disk A, provided with ratchet 
teeth 33, set in opposite directions. The 
teeth are placed only at the point where the 
locking mechanism will engage them when 
the shaft C is so turned that the elevator will 
be substantially stopped, the other part of 
the disk being a curved surface over which 
the parts of the locking device adapted to 
engage the teeth 33 will pass without en 
gaging, so that in case the locking mechanism 
be thrown into action when the elevator-car 
is in motion the latter do not engage the disk 
A, but will pass freely over as indeed they 
will ordinarily do over the ratchet-teeth set 
in the opposite direction to those they are 
intended to engage. The locking device con 
sists in the said best form of the pawls BB, 
set in a suitable framework and having pro 
visions for yieldingly impelling them into 
contact with the disk A. These provisions 
are ordinarily a tension-spring H, which is 
suitably secured to said pawls, to one by the 
pierced earl and to the other by the screw 
eye h, which passes through the pawl and 
allows the regulation of the tension of the 
spring by the turning of the nut b upon the 
screw m. The frameworkshown in the draw 
ings forms a very convenient arrangement 
for the mounting of these pawls and consists 
of a bed-plate G, in which these pawls are 
pivoted, and a standard F, which supports the 
pawls and lever actuating same, as will be 
further described. The best form of which 
I am now aware of devices for moving these 
locking devices toward and away from the co 
operating devices provided with means for 
positively engaging with the locking device on 
the shaft is as follows: 
I employ a yielding provision, such as the 
spring H, the detailed description of which I 
have given, to move toward disk A, and I 
employ devices acting positively upon the 
pawls to separate them from the disk. The 
advantages of this arrangement can be clearly 
seen by considering that if the motion to 
ward the disk be not positive the pawls will 
not be strained by coming into contact with 
the outside of the disk in case any landing 
door should be opened when the disk is in 
such position that the teeth of the parts will 
fall against the circular untoothed periphery 
of the disk instead of fitting between the 
teeth. The means I employ for this purpose 
is a lever N, pivoted between the pawls very 
conveniently to the standard F at the points. 
This leverN has provisions for engaging with 
the pawls B B and moving them away from 
the disk A as the lever is moved toward a po 
sition at right angles with the said pawls. 
The provisions are rollers OO, engaging with 
the inner faces of the pawls. 
To quicken 
the action of the lever N, I make the rollers 
moving along the pawls B B to move from a 
lower to a higher point on the pawls B B, 
which can very conveniently be done by 
making notches 22, into which the rollers 
will fall when the lever is shifted, to allow 
the pawls to contact with the disk and out of 
which they will be moved as the lever N is 
moved to separate the pawls from the disk 
A. In practice I provide this lever N with a 
sliding lug P, which can be moved along the le 
wer to adjust the amount of motion of the 
rollers relative to the movement of the means 
operated by the landing-doors. This is pro 
vided with eye p. For causing the move 
ment of the lever N in a direction to with 
draw the rollers O O from the notches 2 2. I 
place thereon a weight N', which is arranged 
to slide thereon and is provided with set 
screw n' in the ear n, which holds it in posi 
tion on the lever N. 
The form of mechanical means operated by 
the landing-doors for causing the movements 
of the locking device out of engagement with 
the parts coperating there with and moving 
with the main shaft, which is the best of 
which I am now aware, is as follows: At 
each door I provide door-operated devices, 
which are provided with connections extend 
ing from same to the device for moving said 
locking devices out of engagement with the 
devices, with means for positively engaging 
with the locking device and coperating there 
with and moving with the main shaft. These 
door-operated devices in said best form of 
my device consist of levers of the second 
class 17, pivoted to the walls of the shaft W 
at each door intended to be protected and 
having connected thereto the connections 
mentioned above. The ends of these levers 
away from the fulcrum are curved downward 
and are in engagement with the device cop 
erating with and placed on the door, this lat 
ter, in the best form of my device as afore 
said, being a roller 16, which runs on the top 
of the lever 17. A guide 15 for the lever is 
also attached to door. The connection r is 
in practice a wire rope, of small diameter, pass 
ing to the upper part of the shaft and con 
nected with the various levers 17 and over 
the sheaves R. R., down to the lug p, to which 
it is secured. If it is necessary to counter 
balance the weight of weight N' more than 
by weight of levers, a weight W' can be se 
cured to end of rope. 
The operation of the particular form of my 
invented device which I have described above 
in detail is as follows: When the landing 
doors are all closed, the levers 17 are raised 
until they stand in the position shown in the 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
90 
or 
To5. 
O 
is - 
2C 
I25 
I 30 
 
588,106 
8 
o 
2C) 
35 
45 
55 
full lines in Fig. 6 and the devices shown in said levers and said lever adapted to operate 
the locking means, substantially as described. 
FigS. 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, and 9 stand in the position 
3. The combination of means for locking 
there shown. The controller mechanism is 
the starting and stopping mechanism of an 
then free to cause the hoisting device to move 
elevator, a lever and connections between said 
the car in any desired direction. If one of 
lever and locking means, said lever being 
the doors open, the roller 16 will depress the 
Weighted at one end and adapted to operate 
lever 17, which will pull down the cable r, 
said locking means, a series of landing-doors, 
which will raise the lever N, which will make 
a series of level's adjacent said landing-doors. 
the rollers OO move into the notches 22 and 
and adapted to be oscillated on the opening 
allow the spring Hto bring the pawls against 
and closing of said doors, and connection be 
the disk A. If the pawls are opposite. the 
tween all of said levers and the said weighted 
teeth 3, they will engage there with and hold 
lever, substantially as described. 
the disk. If opposite any other part, they 
4. In an elevator, the combination of a ro 
will not engage, but allow the controller mech 
tating device positively connected with the 
anism to be moved into any desired position; 
starting and stopping mechanism, a pair of 
but if it is moved to bring them opposite the 
pawls suitably pivoted and having the free 
teeth the position of the starting mechanism 
ends of each movable in and out of position 
will be such that the hoisting mechanism will 
to engage positively with said rotating de 
not move, and the pawls Will then catch the 
vice, said rotating device being provided with 
teeth and hold the disk until the open door 
means for engaging With said pawls only when 
is closed, so that the fulcrum will be about 
the elevator is stationary, yieldingly-acting 
half the width of the lever below the bottom 
devices for urging said pawls into contact 
edge of the rollers 16, whereby the top of the 
with said rotating device, a landing-door and 
lever will be horizontal and will not have any 
means whereby the said pawls are moved out 
impulse to close until the roller 16 reaches 
of engagement with the said rotating device 
the edge of downward bend near the end of 
when the said door is opened substantially as 
lever 17, and the machine will be locked until 
the roller has passed this point. When this 
described. 
5. In an elevator, the combination of a pair 
occurs, the sharp incline will ordinarily serve 
of pawls suitably pivoted and having at the 
to close the door and lock it, so that it is prac 
free end of each, a tooth set substantially op 
tically impossible to avoid closing the door 
posite the tooth of the other, a rotating de 
when the door is pushed sufficiently far to 
vice positively connected with the starting 
unlock the valve or other starting mechanism. 
and stopping mechanism, and provided with 
While I have described with great particu 
means for positively engaging said pawls only 
larity the details of the best form of device 
at such points on said device as are opposite 
of which I am now aware, many changes and 
the teeth of the pawls when the elevator-car 
alterations can be made therein by a work 
is motionless, yielding devices for urging said 
man skilled in the art without departing from 
pawls into contact with said rotating device, 
my invention. 
a landing-door, a lever adjacent to said door 
Having now described my invention, what 
and connections between said lever and said 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
pawls substantially as described. 
ent, is 
6. The combination of the disk attached to 
1. In an elevator, the combination of a slid 
and moving with the shaft of the starting and 
ing door a lever hung in front of said door, 
stopping mechanism, the pawls secured to a 
mechanism yieldingly actuating said lever in 
suitable framework and having their teeth 
One direction, said lever having its free end 
on their free ends lying on either side of the 
curved in the direction opposite that toward 
disk, teeth on said disk at the points only 
which it is impelled by said mechanism, a 
thereon that will lie opposite the teeth of the 
guide for said lever, a part connected with 
pawls when the disk is in the position it will 
the starting mechanism, locking device en 
Occupy When the starting and stopping mech 
gaging with said part and connections be 
anism is in position to hold the car substan 
tween said locking device and said lever sub 
tially motionless and having the rest of the 
stantially as described. 
periphery of the disk upon which the pawls 
2. The combination of means for locking the 
may impinge without means for engaging with 
starting and stopping mechanism of an ele 
the same, yieldingly-acting means for draw 
vator capable of locking engagement with 
ing said pawls toward each other and toward 
said mechanism. Only at positions of the same 
said disk and means operated by landing 
when the elevator - car is substantially sta 
doors acting in opposition to said yielding 
tionary, a lever and connections between said 
means for causing the separation of said 
lever and locking means, said lever being 
pawls, substantially as described. 
adapted to operate said locking means, means 
7. In an elevator, the combination with a 
for yieldingly moving said lever in one direc 
car, a rotating device positively connected to 
tion, a series of landing-doors, a series of le 
the starting and stopping mechanism, pawls 
vers adjacent said landing-doors, and adapted 
set in a framework and adapted to positively 
to be oscillated on the opening and closing of 
engage with said rotating device only when 
Said doors, and a connection between all of 
75 
95 
iod 
Ios 
d 
II5 
I25 
 
4. 
588,106 
75 
go 
said car is substantially stationary, a lever a series of levers adjacent said landing-doors 
mounted in said framework, and provided 
and adapted to be oscillated on the opening 
nection secured to each of said levers and to 70 
with means for engaging with said pawls, a 
and closing of said doors and a flexible con 
yieldingly-acting device for yieldingly impel 
ling said pawls in one direction, a landing 
said lever, adapted to actuate said locking 
door and means operated by the opening and 
means, substantially as described. 
closing of said landing-door for oscillating 
12. The combination of means for locking 
said lever, substantially as described. 
the starting and stopping mechanism of an 
8. In an elevator the combination with a 
elevator, a lever having connections between 
part rotating positively with the starting and 
itself and said locking means, an adjustable 
stopping mechanism, pawls engaging with the 
weight upon said lever, a series of landing 
same, a yieldingly-acting device impelling 
doors, a series of levers placed opposite said 
said pawls toward the part with which they 
doors, a flexible connection connected to said 
engage, a positively-acting device having pro 
levers, and to said lever having connections 
visions for engaging with the faces of said 
between itself and the locking device, all sub 
pawls, the said faces being raised where said 
stantially as described. 
provisions will rest when the pawls are sepa 
13. The combination of a car, means for 
rated and depressed where said provisions 
locking the starting and stopping mechanism 
will rest when the pawls are drawn toward 
of an elevator, locking only when the car is 
the said part rotating with the starting and 
substantially stationary a lever, rollers se 
stopping mechanism, a landing-door, a lever 
cured to said lever and engaging with said 
adjacent to said landing-door, and connec 
locking device, means for yieldingly moving 
tions between said lever and said positively 
said lever in one direction, a series of landing 
acting device, substantially as described. 
doors, a series of levers adjacent to said land 
9. In an elevator, the combination of a car, 
ing-doors, and adapted to be oscillated on the 
a rotating part positively connected with the 
opening and closing of said doors, and a flexi 
starting and stopping mechanism and pro 
ble connection secured to each of said levers, 
vided with means for engaging with pawls co 
and extending between them and the lever 
acting there with only at such points as lie op 
adapted to actuate said locking means, sub 
posite said pawls when the car is substantially 
stantially as described. 
stationary, pawls, a yieldingly-acting device 
14. In an elevator, the combination with a 
for yieldingly impelling said pawls toward 
car, a rotating part positively connected with 
said rotating part, a rocking lever pivoted 
the starting and stopping mechanism, of a 
between said pawls and having provisions for 
locking device, adapted to be moved into and 
engaging with the face of said pawls, a yield 
out of positive connection with said part only 
ingly-acting device acting upon said lever, to 
when the caris substantially stationary, yield 
cause it to separate said pawls from said ro 
ingly-acting means for bringing said locking 
tating part, a landing-door, and mechanism 
device into engagement with said rotating 
operated by saidlanding-door for causing the 
part, a positively-acting device operating to 
movement to said lever in a direction to sepa 
move said locking device out of engagement 
rate the pawls from said rotating part sub 
with said rotating part, a series of landing 
stantially as described. 
doors, a series of levers opposite said doors 
10. The combination of an elevator-car, a 
and a flexible connection connecting all of said 
locking device for the stopping and starting 
levers to said positively-acting mechanism, 
mechanism and adapted to lock only when 
substantially as described. 
said car is substantially stationary, a series 
15. The combination of an elevator - car 
of landing-doors, a series of levers opposite 
means for locking the starting and stopping 
said landing-doors and depressed positively 
mechanism of an elevator, locking only when 
by the opening of said doors, a sheave placed 
said caris substantially stationary yieldingly 
above said doors, a flexible connection se 
actuated means for bringing the locking 
cured to said levers and extending upward 
means into locking engagement with the said 
over said sheave and downward from sheave 
stopping and starting mechanism, a lever 
free from engagement with said levers, means 
adapted to operate saidlocking means, a roller 
for moving said locking device yieldingly ac 
connection between said lever and locking 
tuated in one direction by a yieldingly-acting 
means, means for yieldingly moving said lever 
device and actuated positively in the other 
in one direction, a series of landing-doors, a 
by said connection, and means for counter 
series of levers placed opposite said doors, a 
balancing the weight of said levers, all sub 
roller and guide placed upon each of said doors 
stantially as described. 
and engaging with said levers and a flexible 
11. The combination of a car means forlock 
connection secured to each of said levers op 
ing the starting and stopping mechanism of 
posite said doors and to the levers adapted to : 
an elevator locking only when said car is sub 
operate said locking means all substantially 
stantially stationary a lever and connections 
as described. 
between said lever and locking means, said 
16. The combination of a toothed disk 
lever being adapted to operate said locking 
toothed on a portion only of its circumference 
means, means for yieldingly moving said le 
a pair of pawls placed on either side of said 
yer in One direction, a series of landing-doors, 
disk, engaging with the teeth thereof, a spring 
I 25 
95 
IIo 
II5 
20 
- 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
588,106 
- 
5 
Secured to the said pawls, and tending to bring teeth set in opposite directions each set ex 
tending over only an arc of said circumfer 
them into contact with the disk, a lever turn 
ing on bearings set between said pawls and 
ence of a pair of pawls, a frameworkin which 
having means for engaging with said pawls, 
said pawls are set, a weighted lever pivoted 
yieldingly-acting means for causing the move 
on said framework, having rollers secured 
thereto engaging with the faces of said pawls, 
ment of said lever in one direction and means 
actuated by the opening and closing of the 
a spring secured between said pawls, landing 
doors and mechanism operated by the open 
elevator-doors for causing the movement of 
ing and closing of the said landing-doors ac 
the said lever in the other direction, substan 
tially as described. 
tuating said lever in one direction, when all 
of the doors are open and allowing it to move 
17. In an elevator, the combination with a 
rotating toothed disk moving positively with 
into another when all of the doors are closed 
substantially as described. 
the starting and stopping mechanism, of a 
framework, a pair of pawls set in said frame 
22. In an elevator, the combination with a 
rotating part positively connected to the start 
Work, and having a portion of their faces cut 
ing and stopping mechanism, of a pair of pawls 
away, a rocking lever pivoted between said 
adapted to engage with said rotating part, a 
pawls and provided with rollers engaging with 
Said pawls and lying in said cut-away parts 
spring secured between said pawls to one of 
thereof when said pawls are in engagement 
which one end of said spring is secured, said 
with said toothed disk, landling-doors and 
spring having a screw-stem, a set-screw turn 
ing on said stem and bearing against One of 
mechanism actuated by said landing-doors 
said pawls, a lever pivoted between said pawls 
operating to move said lever in one direction 
and having provisions for moving said pawls 
when any of the doors are open and into an 
in the opposite direction to that in which they 
other position when all of the doors are closed, 
are moved by the said spring, a landing-door, 
substantially as described. 
and mechanism operated by the opening and 
18. In an elevator, the combination of a re 
closing of said landing-door by which said le 
volving disk moving positively with the start 
ing and stopping mechanism, and having a 
ver is moved in one direction. When the door 
Small portion only of its periphery provided 
is open and in the other direction. When the 
with teeth, pawls engaging with said disk, a 
door is closed, substantially as described. 
23. In an elevator, the combination with a 
framework in which said pawls are set, a 
disk positively connected with the starting 
weighted lever having bearings between said 
and stopping mechanism of a pair of pawls 
pawls set in said framework, a landing-door, 
adapted to engage with said disk only when 
a lever set opposite said landing-door, and a 
said car is substantially stationary, a spring 
flexible connection extending between said 
secured between said pawls, and acting to 
lever opposite said door and said weighted 
bring the pawls into engagement with said 
lever, all substantially as described. 
disk, a lever pivoted between said pawls, and 
9. The combination in an elevator with a 
provided with rollers engaging with said 
car and a rotating part in positive connection 
pawls, yieldingly-actuated mechanism oper 
With the stopping and starting mechanism, of 
a locking device adapted to engage with said 
ated to move said lever in one direction, a 
landing-door and positively-actuated mech 
part only when said car is substantially sta 
anism operated by the opening of said land 
tionary, a series of landing-doors, a series of 
ing-door, to move said lever in the opposite 
levers opposite said doors, rollers and guides 
upon said doors engaging with said levers, a 
direction to that in which it is moved by said 
yieldingly-actuated mechanism substantially 
lever for operating saidlocking device, and a 
flexible connection to each of said levers ad 
as described. 
jacent to said doors and to the lever operat 
24. In an elevator the combination of an 
elevator-car a rotating part positively con 
ing said locking device, substantially as de 
nected with the starting and stopping mech 
scribed. 
anism, of a locking device adapted to be 
20. The combination of an elevator-car Se 
moved into and out of engagement with Said 
lies of landing-doors, a Series of Oscillating 
part only when said car is substantially sta 
levers operated positively in one direction by 
tionary, a series of landing-doors, a Series of 
the opening of said doors, means for yield 
levers adjacent to said landing-doors, pivoted 
ingly operating Said levers in the opposite di 
at one end and engaging with the said door 
rection, a locking device for the starting and 
stopping devices of the elevator, adapted to 
and a flexible connection attached to saidle 
vers between pivot and the part engaging 
lock only when the car is substantially sta 
tionary a lever adapted to operate said lock 
with said door, and extending between said 
levers and said locking device, Substantially 
ing device, and a single flexible connection 
connected to each of said levers opposite the 
as described. 
25. In an elevator, the combination with a 
doors, and said lever operating said locking 
car a revolving part positively secured to the 
device, substantially as described. 
starting and stopping mechanism of a pair of 
21. The combination in an elevator, with a 
pawls adapted to be moved into and out of 
disk positively connected to the starting and 
engagement with said part only when said 
stopping mechanism, said disk being provided 
car is substantially stationary, a spring yield 
at different portions of its circumference with 
s 
75 
95 
do 
II5 
I25 
35 
45 
55 
 
6 
588,106 
ingly urging said pawls into engagement with tionary, a yieldingly-acting device operating 30 
Said disk, a lever pivoted between said pawls 
and provided with rollers engaging with the 
faces of said pawls, a bed-plate in which said 
pawls are mounted, a standard rising from 
said bed-plate to which said levers are piv 
oted, a guide-piece for said pawls, secured to 
said standard, landing-doors and means op 
erated by the opening and closing of the land 
ing-doors for controlling the movement of 
said lever substantially as described. 
26. In an elevator, the combination with a 
part positively connected with the starting 
and stopping mechanism, a locking device 
adapted to be moved into and out of positive 
connection with said part, a yieldingly-acting 
device for moving said locking device into 
such positive engagement only when the ele 
vator is substantially stationary, a landing 
door, a lever adapted to be operated by said 
door and connections between said lever and 
said locking device for causing the locking 
device to disengage itself from said part when 
said door is closed, substantially as described. 
27. In an elevator, the combination of a 
rotating part positively connected with the 
starting and stopping mechanism, a locking 
device adapted to engage said rotating part 
positively, and only when the elevator is sta 
to move said locking device into such en 
gagement, a landing-door, and mechanical 
connections between said door and locking 
device for causing the locking device to dis 
engage itself from said rotating part when 
the door is closed, substantially as described. 
28. In an elevator, the combination of a 
locking device, a toothed disk positively con 
nected, with the starting and stopping mech 
anism, and having teeth set to engage said 
locking device only at points on the periphery 
of same that will be opposite the said locking 
device when the elevator is stopped, yield 
ingly-acting mechanism for bringing the lock 
ing device into engagement with said toothed 
disk, a landing-door, a lever oscillated by the 
movements of said landing-door, and connec 
tions between said locking device and lever 
whereby the said locking device is disengaged 
from said toothed disk when said door is 
closed, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereto set my 
hand this 19th day of March, 1896. 
GEO. W. REED, 
MARK WILKS COLLET. 
WILLIAM C. FAHY. 
In presence of 
35 
40 
45 
 
 
 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588207.txt	No Model.) 
R. J. WILLIAMS, 
NUTMEG GRATER, 
No. 588,207. 
Patented Aug, l 7, 1897, 
p/TNASSAES 
larcus S3yrs 
4zzz-6-2 
/wVENTOR 
722-777 W222zes 
224-1244 
s 
Attorney 
THt roars PETERs co, Photo-liro. WASHINGTON. o. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT J. WILLIAMS, OF VINCENNES, INDIANA. 
NUTMEG-GRATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,207, dated August 17, 1897. 
Application filed February 12, 1897. Serial No. 623,047, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ROBERT J. WILLIAMS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Win 
cennes, in the county of Knox and State of In 
diana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Nutmeg-Graters; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
Myinvention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in nutmeg-graters, the ob 
ject being to provide an improved construc 
tion of sliding nutmeg-holder adapted to press 
the nutmeg into contact with the corrugated 
or roughened face of the grater, so that as the 
holder is slid back and forth longitudinally 
of the grater the nutmeg will be easily and 
quickly grated. 
To this end my invention consists in pro 
viding a grater having a roughened face and 
an opening at one end thereof and a nutmeg 
holder provided with flanges running in 
grooves on the grater and open at the inner 
side thereof, so that a nutmeg may be inserted 
through the said opening in the grater into 
the holder, and the said holder having a spring 
pressed follower adapted to hold the nutmeg 
firmly pressed against the corrugated or 
roughened face of the grater, so that the en 
tire nutmeg may be grated. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a nutmeg-grater con 
structed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional view thereof, taken 
through the sliding nutmeg holder and grater; 
and Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slid 
ing nutmeg-holder removed from the grater. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter Ades 
ignates a grater consisting of an approxi 
mately semicircular-shaped piece of metal 
provided With a roughened or corrugated face 
B, formed by punching holes through the said 
face from the interior side thereof in the 
usual manner. The terminal edges of the side 
flanges c of the grater are bent inward to form 
a guidewayd, which is closed by a stop-piece 
d at each end thereof. The corrugated face 
of the grater is provided adjoining one end 
thereof with an opening e, through which the 
nutmeg is inserted into the holder F, as here 
inafter described. 
- The holder F consists of a metal casing of 
cylindric or other suitable form provided with 
a substantially semicircular base part G, 
which extends across the corrugated or 
roughened face B. The side flanges h of the 
holder-base are coiled at their terminal ends 
h' to form side pieces, which are confined 
within and traverse the said guideways d of 
the grater. The inner end of the holder or 
casing is open, so that when the said holder 
is in coincidence with the opening e of the 
grater a nutmeg may be inserted from the in 
ner side of the grater into said holder. A 
follower i is inclosed within the case of the 
holder and is attached to a stem k, which pro 
jects to the exterior through a tubular exten 
sion l on the closed head of the case and is 
provided on the exterior with a head or knob 
k'. By means of this head or knob the spring 
pressed follower may be drawn inward to per 
mit of the insertion of the nutmeg. 
In practice the holder containing the nut 
meg is slid rapidly back and forth over the 
corrugated face of the grater until the entire 
nutmeg has been grated or a portion of the 
same has been grated for use as desired. The 
spring-pressed follower keeps the nutmeg into 
contact with the said corrugated face until 
the entire nutmeg has been thoroughly grated. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new, and desired to be secured 
by Letters Patent, is 
A nutmeg-grater having a grating-face and 
two side flanges formed integrally there with, 
said flanges having their edges coiled in 
Wardly to form guideways, stop-pieces clos 
ing said guideways at the ends thereof, and 
a nutmeg-holder provided with slides mov 
able in said guideways and adapted to abut 
against the stop-pieces to prevent disconnec 
tion of the holder from the grater. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
- 
ROBERT J. WILLIAMS. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES JUDAH, 
ALVIN M. MCCLURE, 
75 
90 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588308.txt	(No Model.) 
J. R. ADAMS. 
PEN EXTRACTOR. 
No. 588,308, 
Patented Aug. 17, 1897. 
776/7 
Za Z77 ZZZZZZZZZZZ 
 
WITNESSES 
16.6% Nu 
EMTOR 
(4.262: 
A TTORNEYS 
ENORRIS PETERS co, PHOTo-LTHo, washinero. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES ROBERT ADAMS, OF BEVIER, MISSOURI. 
PEN EXTRACTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,308, dated August 17, 1897. 
Application filed January 12, 1897, Serial No. 618,943, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Beit known that I, JAMES ROBERTADAMS, 
a citizen of Great Britain, residing at Bevier, 
in the county of Macon and State of Missouri, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Pen-Extractors, of which the 
following is a full and complete specification, 
such as will enable those skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to pen-extracting de 
vices, and the object thereof is to provide an 
improved device of this class by means of 
which the pen may be extracted from the 
holder without applying the fingers thereto. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the foll 
lowing specification, of which the accompany 
ing drawings form a part, in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved pen 
extractor and showing the method of its op 
eration; Fig. 2, an edgeview thereof, and Fig. 
3 a section on the line 33 of Fig. 1, 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication the separate parts of my improve 
ment are designated by numerals of reference 
throughout the several views, and in the prac 
tice of my invention I provide a pen-extractor 
which consists of two disks or plates 5 and 6, 
which are pivotally connected at 7, the piv 
otal connection being arranged adjacent to 
one side of the disks or plates. One of said 
disks or plates is preferably thicker than the 
other and is provided with two radial grooves 
8, which extend from or near the center to the 
outer edge thereof, and the other disk or plate 
is provided with corresponding radial ribs 9, 
which are adapted to enter said grooves. 
The disks or plates 5 and 6 are made of any 
desired material, and the operation will be 
readily understood from the foregoing de 
scription when taken in connection with the 
accompanying drawings and the following 
statement thereof. 
IO 
3o 
35 
It will be understood that a pen may be in 
serted between the disks or plates, and in prac 
tice when it is desired to remove a pen from 
the holder the pen is inserted in one of the 
radial grooves 8, as shown in Fig. 1, and the 
two disks or plates are pressed together, so as 
to grip and hold the pen, and by pulling out 
wardly on the penholder the pen will be de 
tached therefrom. 
This device is simple in construction and 
operation, and it will be apparent that any 
desired number of the radial grooves and cor 
responding radial ribs may be employed; and 
my invention is not limited to the exact form. 
of the disks or plates, and the same may be 
circular or of any other preferred form. 
- Having fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
As a new article of manufacture, a pen-ex 
tractor, consisting of two disks, or plates 5 
and 6, pivotally connected together at 7, by 
a pin or the like, said pin being longer than 
the combined thickness of the disks and pro 
vided at its upper and lower ends with heads, 
the lower disk being provided with two radial 
grooves extending from or near the center to 
the outer edge thereof and the upper disk be 
ing provided with ribs adapted to fill said 
grooves, said disks being combined substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 22d day 
of December, 1896. 
JAMES ROBERT ADAMS. 
Witnesses: 
BESSIE ADAMS, 
JACOB A. SNARR. 
45 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588408.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 588,408, 
W. DULIN, 
CHURN DASHER, . 
Patented Aug. 17, 1897. 
 
C-EX7 V, A 
7. C 77 
Z 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM IDULIN, OF CHANUTE, KANSAS. 
CHURN-DASHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,408, dated August 17, 1897. 
Application filed March 23, 1897, Serial No, 628,897, (No model.) 
-- 
IO 
To all, whon, it nually concert: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM DULIN, of 
Chanute, in the county of Neosho and State 
of Kansas, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Churn-Dashers; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it pertains to make and use it, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, Which form part of this specification. 
This invention relates to churn-dashers, 
and the object is to provide a simple dasher 
of improved form for effectually separating 
butter from cream. 
The invention consists in the novel fea 
tures of construction and in the combination 
and arrangement of parts hereinafter fully 
described and claimed, and illustrated by the 
accompanying drawings, in which- 
Figure I is a perspective view of the dasher. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation thereof, partly in 
section. Fig. 3 is an end view of the dasher, 
showing the position of the parts during the 
upwardstroke. Fig. 4is a similar view show 
ing the position of the parts during the down 
A designates the staff, which is centrally 
secured to the double comb-shaped part B, 
the latter having three teeth or projections 
C, extending from opposite sides of the cen 
tral web portion D, the projections being 
separated by slots or cuts E. The edges of 
the teeth bounding these slots or cuts are bev 
eled from their top surfaces downward, as in 
dicated at F. Web D is reinforced by trans 
verse strip G. 
The lower comb-shaped part H has four 
teeth I on each side of its central web J, the 
latter being reinforced on top by strip Kand 
on its bottom by strip L. Web D and strip 
G. of the upper comb are formed with verti 
cal openings M to accommodate headed pins 
N, secured to strip K of the lower comb. 
Said openings are larger than the pins, and 
the distance between the pin-heads and strip 
Kis greater than the combined thickness of 
Web D and strip G, so that the lower comb 
part is not only afforded vertical play with 
5o relation to the upper comb, but the parts are 
free to wabble, as will be understood. 
Teeth I of the lower part alternate with the 
stroke. 
. 
w 
30 
35 
45 
 
to form the teeth. 55 
slots E of the upper comb and are beveled 
from their under sides upward, as shown at 
O, or in opposite direction 
of the upper comb. 
In operation during the upward stroke of 
the dasher the under part is in its lowermost 
position, as shown in Fig. 3, and the cream 
is afforded free and comparatively unob 
structed passage downward through slots E 
of the top comb, while during the downward 
stroke the lower comb is raised as closely as 
possible to the upper comb, as seen in Fig. 4, 
with the effect that slots E are materially ob 
structed by teeth I, causing the cream to 
strike with considerable force against the 
under side of projections C. As the down 
stroke of a reciprocating dasher is more ef 
fectual than the upstroke, the automatic ad 
justment of the parts, as herein described, 
places the dasher in its most effectual adjust 
ment while moving downward. It also ren 
ders the churning operation comparatively 
easy, as the parts are separated as much as 
possible during the upstroke and little re 
tard the cream as it passes freely through 
the comb-like parts. The beveled edges of 
the teeth also materially assist in rendering 
both the up and down strokes easy, as con 
siderable friction which would otherwise oc 
cur is avoided. . 
Actual tests have demonstrated the effect 
iveness of the dasher. The action thereof, 
while being sufficient to effectually separate 
the butter, is not so violent as to injure the 
same, a fault attributal to many churn-dash 
ers now used. The dasher is of simple con 
struction and may be manufactured at small 
cost and is adapted to work in any form of 
churn-body or other vessel where a recipro 
cating dasher may be used. . 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In a churn-dasher, the combination of a 
staff, an upper breaking device, and a lower 
breaking device, the upper breaker fixed to 
the staff, the lower breaker loosely secured 
centrally between its ends to, and adapted 
to move vertically with respect to the upper 
breaker, the loose central mounting of the 
lower breaker permitting it to oscillate as 
well as to move vertically with respect to the 
. . 
. 
. 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
588,408 
upper breaker, substantially as shown and 
described. 
2. In a churn-dasher, the combination of 
the staff, the upper double - ended comb 
shaped breaker secured centrally to the staff 
and formed with vertical apertures in a line 
with the staff extending transverse the 
breaker, the lower double-ended comb-shaped 
breaker, and headed pins smaller in diameter 
than the diameter of the upper-breaker ap 
ertures and extended therethrough and unit 
ing with the lower breaker in a line extend 
IO 
ing transverse and centrally across the same, 
whereby the lower breaker is movable ver 
tically with relation to the upper breaker and 15 
also adapted to oscillate with respect thereto, 
substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM IDULIN. 
Witnesses: 
A. N. ALLEN, 
D. MI. IXENNEDY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588508.txt	(No Model.) 
J. A. TOWLER 
WALWE GEAR FOR PUMPING ENGINES. 
No. 588,508, 
Patented Aug. 17, 1897. 
Szzzzzzz. 
 
 
 
 
 
772/7Zeyaraj, 
onas Peters co, Photo-litro, was": 
-zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz-->N 
7" 
(===~~~=================, 79 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZZ, 4 2 
?z,<2 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzz!El 
22:2 ) 
2 
ae 
zzzzzzzza2 S 
Zezezzo 
71. 
Ma 
o/222eye/Z. Zaee/Zez: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES AL FRED TO WI, ER, OF LEEDS, ENGLAND. 
VALVE-GEAR FOR PUMPING - ENGINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,508, dated August 17, 1897. 
Application filed May 12, 1897, Serial No. 636,250, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES ALFRED TOWLER, 
a citizen of England, residing at 1 Cromer 
Road, Leeds, in the county of York, England, 
have invented certain new and useful. In 
provements in Valve-Gear for Pumping-En 
gines Driven by Steam or Compressed Air, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to valve - gear for 
pumping-engines driven by steam or com 
pressed air, having the valves of the main cyl 
inder actuated from a subsidiary cylinder 
which has its distribution valve or valves op 
erated from the piston of the main cylinder. 
The chief object of my invention is the ap 
plication of gear, hereinafter described, to the 
actuation of valves for the main cylinder of 
the Corliss kind with provision of trip-gear for 
rapid closing of the supply-valves and an ar 
rangement of the exhaust-valves, so as to pro 
vide adequate cushion in the main cylinder. 
I shall describe valve-gear according to my 
invention, referring to the accompanying 
drawings. 
Figure 1 is a side view of the main cylinder 
and valve-gear with section of the subsidiary 
and cataract cylinders. Fig. 2 is a part lon 
gitudinal section at one end of the main cyl 
inder. Figs. 3 and 4 show, to an enlarged 
scale, a front view and section of the trip-gear 
for the rear supply-valve. 
A is the main cylinder; B, its piston-rod, 
which has an arm b linked to a lever C. A 
rod c, having on it tappets when they are acted 
on by a tappet on the lever C, moves the dis 
tribution-valve of the subsidiary cylinder D, 
the piston of which is rigidly connected to the 
piston of the cataract-cylinder E, the move 
ment of this piston being controlled in the 
usual Way by adjusting its by-pass valve e. 
The rodd of the pistons of D and E is jointed 
to arms h, fixed on the spindles H of the ex 
haust-valves, and on these arms are pivoted 
catches lic, adapted to engage square pins p, 
projecting from arms P, which are fixed on 
the spindles L of the steam-valves and are 
linked by rods S to springs or pistons subject 
to pressure in the casing S. On the spindles 
L are fitted, free to turn, arms M, which are 
linked by a rod n to the lever C near its full 
crum, and the arms Mare partly formed as 
- 
calms N, which move under a rollerk', mounted 
on the catches k. 
The steam-valves G. govern ports which are 
at the ends of the cylinders, and the exhaust 
valves H govern ports at some distance from 
the ends, so that the piston as it approaches 
the ends of its stroke passes over and closes 
these ports, thus cushioning the steam be 
tween them and the ends of the cylinder. 
The gear described operates as follows: The 
main-piston in making its stroke in one di 
rection moves the lever C, and its tappet, act 
ing on one of the tappets on the rod c, moves 
the valve of the subsidiary cylinder D, so that 
its piston moves the arms h, by which the one 
exhaust-valve of the main cylinder is opened 
and the other exhaust-valve is closed; also, 
one of the catches k becoming engaged with 
the pinp of the trip-gear one of the steam 
valves is opened, causing the main piston to 
make its return stroke. The rod n, then 
moves back the arm M and brings the cam N 
round to act upon the roller k", so as to raise 
the catch k and release the lever P, which, 
urged by the springs or by the pressure in the 
casing S, immediately closes the steam-valve, 
the main piston thereupon being caused to 
continue its stroke by the pressure of the 
steam expanding in the cylinder. . 
I have shown a cataract-cylinder E con 
taining liquid to control the movement of the 
subsidiary piston in D, making that move 
ment the more slow and gradual the more the 
by-pass by the valve e is throttled. This is 
necessary only when the subsidiary cylinder 
D is supplied with steam or other elastic fluid 
under pressure. In cases where it is supplied 
with water or other liquid under pressure the 
cataract-cylinder E is dispensed with, the 
regulation of speed being effected by adjust 
ment of the supply or distribution valve of 
the cylinder D. 
Having thus described the nature of this 
invention and the best means I know for car 
rying the same into practical effect, I claim 
1. In valve-gear for a pumping-engine the 
combination of a lever linked to the main pis 
ton and connected through tappets to the dis 
tribution-valve of a subsidiary cylinder, the 
piston-rod of which is connected to arms fixed 
on the exhaust-valve spindles, these arms hav 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
588,508 
ing trip-catches adapted to engage pins on the 
arms of the supply-valve spindles and carry 
ing rollers over reciprocating cams connected 
to the lever linked to the main piston, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In the valve-gear of a pumping-engine 
the combination of an arm fixed on the ex 
haust-valve spindle connected to the subsid 
iary piston and carrying a pivoted trip-catch 
and roller, a cam loose on the supply-valve 
spindle and connected to the lever which is 
linked to the main piston, a lever or arm fixed 
On the supply-valve spindle having a pin 
O 
adapted to be engaged by the trip-catch, and 
connected to a spring or piston subject to 15 
fluid-pressure adapted to close the valve, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 29th day of 20 
April, A. D. 1897. 
JAMES ALFRED TOWLER 
Witnesses: 
JOHN H. WHITAKER, 
ALFRED BROWN. 
W. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588608.txt	(No Model.) 
W. S. SHIRK, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 588,608. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897, 
S oS 
: O 
V 
( 
----- 
CS 
f 
t 
GS Q 
S. 
GS 
cy 
(S 
- - - - - -/- - 
f 
: 
l 
f 
S 
-- 
fa 
S 
S. 
Co 
ery 
OS 
N. 
-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - a-- 
s S 
is 
(8F 
cy 
S \{{S} 
a' 
a 
N-1 
. 
i 
9 
is 
NS 
to 
gy 
 is 
f 
: 
L. 
- 
S 
n 
t 
* - - 
--- 
SS 
N 
- 
O) 
y 
vis 
f 
--- 
-- 
- - - - 
FE-T-si ---- 
YA W 
. 
SS 
N ves K; s 
S 
S 
SA 
Nan 
Sts 
-e 
Cl 
- SSS -- 
g 
S. S. 
----- 
N 
Jas 
Easy 
S/S b 
52 s 
A sia 
s 
N 
N 
Q 
() 
- 
ZESS 
Ea?t. 
Ir 
S. 
S SS s 
S 
late- 
- - 
- -M-, -, --Tai -- 
ve OFS 
S 
So 
i 
8 RS() is 
S / S 
- 
Sl 
: 
: 
-- 
Oy 
A. 
s 
O 
A. 
------- 
peptor 
7&am S. Shir 
Jy /zs o/fforgeys, 
The Norts PETERs co, PHOTO-Litho. washington, D.c. 
 
W. S. SHIRK, 
TYPE WRITENG MACHINE, 
6. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
(No Model. 
No. 588,608. 
 
(No Model.) 
W. S. SHIRK, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 588,608. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897, 
 
 
s 
  
 
 
 
 
WZZ Z222222222222222222222222222222222222 
S is 
, s 
eas 
is Go 
'''Ess 
-- 
iii. 
t 
NHS 
y 
 
 
 
o 
EIG, T 
... 
E. l 
H. 
S 
s 
pileptor 
A2ZZzzzzz/SS/dir/e- 
22/62 
 
By/was Vilorpey S, 
The NORRIS PETERs co. P4OTO-LITH., wastNgtoN, d. c. 
i 
: 
: 
. Wu 
l 
{ 
- - - 
  
 
  
  
  
 
(No Model.) 
W. S. SHIRK, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 588,608, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
ar 
pileplor 
Hilgesses 
4%r? fy Vezs s/lorpeys. 
29 
s 
72Aare-2SS/zr/e- 
The N3RIS PETERs copic-lit. WKSHMGON. c. 8. 
 
NO Model. 
No. 588,608, 
 
W. S. SHIRK, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
pilepior 
Z2/222-2SS/uzra 
y VezS villoepys, 
 
 
W. S. SHIRK, 
TYPE WRITING MACHINE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
(No Model.) , 
No. 588,608. 
 
gaggggg e f 
de CS(3GSG38 
10 
5 
 
 
3. 
Hi?passes 
 
pepler 
7222az4S.S/air// 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM S. SHIRIK, OF ANDERSON, INDIANA. 
TYPE-WRITING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,608, dated August 24, 1897. 
Application filed August 15, 1896, Serial No. 602,879, (No model.) 
55 
65 
. 
To all whom it nvoy concerto. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMS. SHIRK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at An 
derson, in the county of Madison and State. 
of Indiana, have invented a new and useful 
Type-Writing Machine, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention relates to type-writing ma 
chines, and has for its object to provide a 
compact, efficient, and comparatively inex 
pensive mechanism of that class wherein the 
type are carried by a type-wheel or its equiva 
lent, which is adjusted to bring the proper 
type-face into the printing-plane in order to 
secure the impression of the proper character. 
Further objects and advantages of this in 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
a type-Writing machine constructed in ac 
cordance with my invention with the con 
tiguous side wall of the casing omitted. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of the same, partly in sec 
tion, on the line 22 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
vertical section on the line 33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 
4 is a detail view of the paper-carriage-feed 
mechanism, the contiguous portions of the 
mechanism being shown in section upon a 
plane indicated by the line 44 of Figs. 2 and 
3. Fig. 5 is a front view in detail of the type 
wheel and immediate connections. Fig. 6 is 
a vertical central section of the same. Fig. 
7 is a detail view of the parts of the type 
wheel disassembled. Fig. 8 is a detail plan 
view of the operating-gage and the frame by 
which it is carried. Fig. 9 is a front view of 
the same. Fig. 10 is a plan view of the fixed 
gage. Fig. 11 is a rear view of the same. 
Figs. 12 and 13 are detail side views of key 
levers of different lengths. Fig. 14 is a de 
tached plan view of the rocker by which the 
vertical position of the type - wheel is ad 
justed to bring different horizontal lines of 
type-faces belonging to the same group or 
case into the printing-plane. Fig. 15 is a 
detail rear view of a rocker forming one mem 
ber of the means for regulating the lateral 
throw of the type-wheel to bring the type 
faces carried by different yielding tongues 
into the printing-plane. Fig. 16 is a detail 
plan view of the case-shifting block, together 
with the trip and contiguous parts employed 
for varying the positions of the type-wheel 
to bring different horizontal lines of type 
faces into the printing-plane. 
Fig. 17 is a 
side view, and Fig. 18 a plan view, of the 
trip. Fig. 19 is a detail view of the operat 
ing-pawl. Fig. 20 shows detail views of the 
upper and lower bars of the feed-frame. Fig. 
21 is a detail view of one of the driving-le 
vers detached. Fig. 22 is a detail view of 
the shift-keys and connections. Fig. 23 is a 
similar view of the escapement devices. Fig. 
24 is a detail front view of a portion of the 
type-wheel to show the preferred arrange 
ment of characters. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lingS. 
The type-wheel which I have illustrated 
in connection with my improved form of type 
writing machine is mounted for lateral or 
rotary and vertical or longitudinal adjust 
ment upon a guide and pivot rod 1, the frame 
of said wheel consisting of horizontal for 
Wardly-extending upper, intermediate, and 
lower arms 2, 3, and 4, respectively, provided 
at their front ends with segmental or arc 
shaped cross-heads which carry the type 
bearing tongues 5. The tongues are provided 
at their lower extremities with perforations 
fitted over retaining-pins 6 on the cross-head 
of the lower arm 4 and held in place by means 
of a securing-strip 7, (shown in detail in Fig. 
7,) and the upper portions of the tongues ex 
tend through guides formed on the cross 
heads of the upper and intermediate arms 2. 
and 3, said upper and intermediate arms be 
ing secured to the spindle 1 and capable of 
rotary movement there with. The intermedi 
ate cross-head is provided with spaced pins 8 
and a holding or guide strip 9, whereby the 
tongues are adapted to move longitudinally 
95 
thereto, and the upper cross-head is provided 
with radial guide-pins 10, which are of a . 
length in excess of the throw of the tongues 
in operation, the tendency of the tongues be 
ing to normally press against the outer edge 
of the cross-head or the floors of the seats 
which are provided upon said cross-head. 
Also mounted to slide upon the spindle 1 is 
a shoe 11, consisting of upper and lower plates 
75 
OO 
O 
25 
40 
So 
588,608 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
12 and 13, the former being terminally con 
nected by means of an inclined brace 14 with 
the outer extremity of the lower arm 4, which 
forms the movable tongue-carrying arm of 
the type-wheel. The lower plate 13 is ad 
justably connected to the upper plate 12 by 
means of adjusting-screws 15, which extend 
through the lower plate and are threaded in 
the upper plate, and set-screws 16, which are 
threaded in the lower plate and bear their 
extremities against the upper plate, for a pur 
pose hereinafter explained. In order to stiffen 
the type-wheel, a vertical brace-bar 17 is ar 
ranged between the upper shoe-plate 12 and 
the arm 4, and in order to prevent said wheel 
from turning independently of the spindle 1 
said brace-bar is extended through a notch 
18 in the free end of a guide-arm 19, which is 
fixed by means of a set-screw 20 to the spin 
dle, whereby said bar 17 performs the addi 
tional function of a guide. 
In order to bring the type-faces carried by 
different tongues into the vertical plane of 
the printing-point, I employ a gage or limit 
ing bar 21, which is mounted for vertical 
movement upon the type-wheel in slotted 
guide-bars 22 and 23, which are arranged ver 
tically between and connecting the upper and 
intermediate arms 2 and 3, respectively, at 
the Outer ends and at intermediate points 
thereof, and a coperating stepped gage 24, 
which is fixed in position concentric with the 
spindle 1 between the planes of said upper 
and intermediate arms 2 and 3, and contigu 
ous to the rear sides of the type-carrying 
tongues. This gage consists of opposite du 
plicate right and left hand series of steps or 
shoulders 25, said series diverging toward 
their upper ends, and inasmuch as the gage 
bar 21 operates between these series of steps 
ol' shoulders it will be understood that the 
lateral adjustment or swinging movement of 
the type-wheel will be regulated by the ver 
tical position of the gage-bar. For instance, 
if the gage-bar is at the upper limit of its 
movement it will be in the plane of the up 
permost steps or shoulders of the gage, and 
hence the type-wheel will be free to rotate in 
either direction a distance sufficient to bring 
either of the outside tongues into the print 
ing-plane, whereas if the gage-bar is de 
pressed to the lower limit of its movement it 
Will be in the plane of the lowermost shoul 
ders or steps of the fixed gage, and hence the 
type-Wheel will be capable of a movement in 
either direction only sufficient to bring one 
of the innermost tongues into the printing 
plane. In the same way, by arranging the 
gage-bar at different elevations, any desired 
tongue upon either side of the type-wheel 
may be brought positively into the printing 
plane. 
Between the key-levers 26 and the gage 
bar I have arranged connections by which 
Vertical movement is imparted to said bar, 
the extent of such vertical movement being 
regulated by the characters carried by the 
respective keys, whereby when a given key 
is operated the gage-bar will be depressed to 
such a point that when the type-wheel is 
turned and is checked in its rotary or lateral 
movement the type-carrying tongue bearing 
the type corresponding with the character car 
ried by said key will be arranged in the print 
ing-plane. In the construction illustrated in 
the drawings said connections include a rock 
ing frame having arms 27, carrying a trans 
verse rod 28, which is arranged in the paths 
of cam-surfaces 26 on the rear extremities 
of key-levers, whereby when a key-lever is 
depressed at its free end its cam-bearing rear 
end is elevated to bring its cam-face into con 
tact with said rod 28, and thereby swing the 
frame forward, said cam-face communicating 
with a vertical slot or parallel-sided seat 29, 
into which the rod is received at an interme 
diate point of the throw of the lever, and in 
which it remains until said lever is fully de 
pressed. The shaft of this rocking frame 
also carries a forwardly-extending arm 30, 
having a terminal pin 31, which operates in a 
bifurcated link 32 at the lower extremity of 
a vertical operating-rod 33, which is attached 
at its upper extremity to the gage-bar. This 
connecting-rod extends through guide-per 
forations 34 and 35 in the arms 3 and 4, re 
spectively, and similar perforations 36 in the 
guide-arm 19, 37 in the upper and lower shoe 
plates 12 and 13, and 38 in a short guide-arm 
39, which is fixed to the spindle. A return 
spring 40 is employed to return the rocking 
frame to its normal position and the gage 
bar to the limit of its upward movement, as 
illustrated in Fig. 1. 
The means for imparting rotary or lateral 
movement to the type-wheel includes an op 
erating-gage 41, which is constructed and ar 
ranged reversely to the fixed gage and is 
stepped or shouldered to coperate with the 
gage-bar in a manner similar to said fixed gage. 
This operating or movable gage is also pro 
vided with oppositely-arranged or right and 
left hand series of steps or shoulders corre 
sponding in number with the tongues upon 
each side of the center of the type-wheel and 
mounted coaxially with the type - wheel. 
Hence rotary motion imparted to the operat 
ing-gage is communicated through the gage 
bar to the type-wheel and is limited by the 
fixed gage, but inasmuch as it is desirable, for 
a reason hereinafter explained, to move the 
operating-gage through a given arc irrespec 
tive of the tongue which is to be brought into 
the printing-plane, the construction is such 
that said operating-gage moves through an arc 
of greater or less extent, according to the ver 
tical position of the gage-bar before a shoulder 
or step thereof engages said gage-bar. For in 
stance, if the gage-barisin its uppermost posi 
tion and rotary motion is imparted to the op 
erating-gage the latter will swing through an 
arc equal to one-half the interval between the 
innermost tongues of the type-wheel and will 
then engage the gage-bar and swing the lat 
7 o 
75 
95 
IOC 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
588,608 
. 
3 
I 25 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
ter through an arc approximately equal to levers, I have found it expedient to arrange 
one-half the width of the type-wheel to bring 
the type-faces having the characters belong 
the Outermost type-bearing tongue into the 
ing to one set or one case or field in a double 
printing-plane, whereas if the gage-bar is de 
row, and in practice the small letters or 
pressed to its lowermost position and motion 
lower-case' characters are arranged in the 
is imparted to the operating-gage the latter 
uppermost field or the two upper transverse 
Will Swing through an arc approximately 
rows or series of type-faces carried by the 
equal to one-half the width of the gage be 
yielding tongues. The capitals or upper-case 
fore the lowermost shoulder or step upon one 
letters or characters are arranged in an inter 
side thereof will be brought into engagement 
mediate series or field comprising the third 
with the gage-bar, after which the movement 
and fourth rows of type-faces on said tongues, 
of the operating-gage will be only sufficient 
while the third or lowermost group or field of 
to bring one of the innermost tongues of the 
two transverse series of type-faces constitutes 
type - wheel into the printing-plane. This 
the numerals, punctuation-marks, and other 
compensation in operation is due to the re 
auxiliary characters. 
spectively inverted positions of the stepped 
Inasmuch as two rows or horizontal series 
gages, the fixed gage having its series of steps 
of type-faces are required for each group or 
or shoulders arranged to diverge upwardly, 
set of characters, as above indicated, it will 
while the series of steps or shoulders on the 
be understood that means must be provided 
Operating-gage are arranged to diverge down 
for adjusting the type-wheel vertically or lon 
Wardly. In other Words, said gages have 
gitudinally to bring that row or series of char 
their series of steps or shoulders arranged, 
acters in which the character belonging to a 
respectively, to converge and diverge in a 
given key is located into the printing-plane 
in addition to moving the type - wheel lat 
common direction. 
The means which I have provided for im 
erally to bring the proper tongue into the 
parting rotary motion to the operating-gage 
printing-plane, and in order to facilitate the 
include a driving-lever 42, which is provided 
operation of the mechanism I have devised 
with a short arm 43, arranged in the paths of 
means for securing the automatic longitudi 
the key-levers in rear of their fulcrum-points, 
nal adjustment of the type-wheel from the 
whereby when a key-lever is depressed at its 
key-levers, whereby when a given key-lever 
front end the rearwardly-extending arm 43 is 
is depressed the type-wheel is adjusted both 
elevated to throw the long arm of the driving 
longitudinally and laterally to bring the type 
lever forwardly, and said long arm terminates 
corresponding with the letter on said key into 
the proper position for making an impres 
in a head 44, which curves inwardly toward 
and is normally arranged at its extremity con 
sion. In the construction illustrated in the 
tiguous to a shoulder 45 on the intermediate 
drawings these means include a pivotal or 
arm of the type-wheel. Inasmuch as the driv 
tilting trip 51, (shown in detail in Figs. 17 
ing-lever is duplicated upon the opposite side 
and 18,) consisting of an open cage having 
of the plane of the center of the machine it 
spaced pins 52 and 53 and a stud 54, which 
Will be understood that when said levers are 
is arranged in the shoe 11, the lower or ad 
in their normal positions the type-wheel is 
justable plate 13 of said shoe being adapted 
locked in its central or normal position and 
to be arranged in such a position with rela 
cannot be moved laterally until after the re 
tion to the upper plate 12 as to prevent lost 
moval of one of the driving-levers from the 
motion of the trip. As this trip is rocked it 
path thereof. The head of the driving-lever 
communicates to the shoe, and hence to the 
is also provided with an upwardly-extending 
type-wheel, a vertical movement equal to 
stud46, which is adapted to engage one of the 
the vertical interval between the contiguous 
lateral arms 47 of the operating-gage, and in 
transverse series or rows of type-faces con 
asmuch as the throw or depression of all of 
stituting one set or group-as, for instance, 
the key-levers is uniform it will be seen that 
the interval between the first and second, the 
the movement of the driving-lever will also 
third and fourth, and the fifth and sixth rows 
be the same for all of the keys, and hence the 
of type-faces, according to the vertical posi 
movement of the operating-gage will be uni 
tion of the type-wheel. 
form, as above mentioned, irrespective of the 
55 represents a rocking frame consisting of 
amount of angular movement imparted to the 
a shaft 56, having a depending arm 57, Which 
type-wheel. Also carried by the hub or sleeve 
is connected by means of a rod 58 with one 
48 of the operating-gage 41 is a spider 49, and 
arm of a bell-crank lever 59, said lever hav 
located upon the spindle 1, directly beneath 
ing a trip-arm 60, which is arranged at its 
said spider, is a secondary spider 50, corre 
free end in operative relation with the pins 
sponding in shape with the gage-spider 49 and 
52 and 53 of the trip. When the rocking 
adapted to be operated simultaneously there 
frame 55 is moved to cause the arm 57 to 
with, as hereinafter described. 
swing in the direction indicated by the arrow 
In order to avoid excessive lateral vibration 
in Fig. 1, the free end of the trip-arm 60 will 
or Swinging movement of the type-wheel, and 
be depressed into engagement with the pin 
thereby increase the compactness of the mech 
53, and hence cause the elevation of the pin. 
anism to provide for the prompt operation of 
54 and the consequent elevation of the type 
the different members thereof from the key 
wheel to bring the second row of type-faces 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
IO 
II5 
4 
588,608 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
into the printing-plane, and when Said rock 
ing frame is moved in the opposite direction 
the free end of the trip-arm will be elevated 
to engage the pin 52 and tilt the trip in the 
opposite direction, and thus depress the type 
wheel. 
In order to insure the fixed position of the 
type-wheel during the operation of producing 
an impression, I preferably so construct the 
trip and trip-arm that the latter locks the 
former in the position to which it has adjusted 
it, and hence after the trip-arm is moved in 
engagement with one of the pins 52 or 53 
sufficiently to throw the trip to one of its ad 
justed positions the extremity of said arm 
passes the pin 52 or 53 with which it has 
been in contact in moving the trip and as 
sumes a position with its extremity which is 
squared or abrupt in front of said pin, as 
shown clearly in Fig. 1. This disposes the 
other pin of the trip in the path of the arm. 
The trip retains this locked position until 
motion is again communicated to the trip 
arm to release one pin and engage the other 
to move the trip to the other position. For 
instance, with the parts in the positions shown 
in Fig. 1 the trip is locked with the type 
wheel in its depressed position, whereby the 
uppermost or first row of type-faces is in the 
printing-plane, but if it is desired to impress 
a character corresponding with a type-face ar 
ranged in the second row the trip-arm is de 
pressed at its free end by the operation of a 
key-lever corresponding with a character in 
the second row to release the upper pin 52 
and engage the lower pin 53, and thereby 
rock the trip to cause the elevation of the 
type-wheel and lock the trip in said position. 
Either row or series of a group or field may 
be at the printing-point when its case or field 
is in the printing position, and the lower-case 
characters, comprised in the uppermost field, 
are normally in printing position, being so 
held by gravity. 
In order to secure the automatic adjust 
ment of this trip, each key-lever is provided 
with a shoulder arranged in the path of a 
trip-rod carried by the rocking frame 55, two 
of said trip-rods (shown at 61 and 62 and car 
ried, respectively, by oppositely - extending 
arms 63 and 64) being employed. These trip 
rods are arranged, respectively, in the paths 
of shoulders 65 and 66 on the key-levers, 
each key-lever having one or the other, ac 
cording to the character which it bears and 
the row or series of type-faces in which the 
corresponding type is located. For instance, 
if a key-lever carries a character correspond 
ing with a type in the upper series or row of 
the type-wheel said key-lever is provided 
with the shoulder 66, whereby when said key 
lever is depressed the shoulder 66 engages the 
trip-rod 62 and turns the rocking frame 55 in 
the opposite direction to that indicated by 
the arrow in Fig. 1, and thereby elevates the 
free end of the trip-arm 60 and depresses the 
shoe 11 to the positions illustrated in said Fig. 
If, on the other hand, a key-lever carries 
1. 
a character corresponding with a type in the 
second series or row, said key-lever is pro 
vided with a shoulder 65, arranged to engage 
the trip-rod 61, and thus tilt the frame 55 in 
the direction indicated by said arrow in Fig. 
I to depress the free end of the trip-arm 60, 
and thereby elevate the type-wheel. 
It will be seen that the trip-rods 61 and 62 
are arranged at different distances from the 
axis of the frame 55, the latter being located 
at a greater interval than the former, but it 
will also be seen that the trip-rod 61 is located 
between the axis of said rocking frame and 
the fulcrums of the key-levers, whereas the 
trip-rod 62 is located in rear of or beyond the 
axis of said frame. Hence in order to give 
a uniform throw to the frame 55 it is neces 
sary to proportion the distance of the trip 
rods from the axis of motion to suit the dis 
tance of the shoulders 65 and 66 from the full 
crum of the lever. In this connection it 
should be noted that in order to cause all of 
the cams 26 to coperate with the trip-rod 
28 irrespective of the length of the key-lever 
(said key-levers being of different lengths in 
order to arrange them compactly upon the 
keyboard) and secure a uniform depression 
or throw of the key-levers the long and short 
key - levers are fulcrumed, respectively, by 
means of horizontal spindles 67 and 68, where 
by the proportionate lengths of the front and 
rear arms of all of the levers are uniform, the 
long levers being recessed or cut away, as 
shown at 69, to pass under the spindle of the 
short levers and allow free movement. 
Having described the automatic means for 
adjusting the type-wheel longitudinally to 
bring the different series or rows belonging 
to a given set or group into the printing-plane, 
said means being actuated by and under the 
control of the key-levers, it will be under 
stood that in order to bring different sets or 
groups of characters in a position for auto 
matic operation it is necessary to vary the 
vertical position of the fulcrum 70 of the 
tilting trip 51, and hence in this connection 
I employ a slide 71, consisting of a block 
which is mounted for vertical movement upon 
a fixed guide-bar 72, said trip being fulcrumed 
upon the slide contiguous to that end which 
is adjacent to the shoe 11, an auxiliary fixed 
guide-rod 73 being arranged near the ex 
tremity of the slide to prevent lateral swing 
ing movement or displacement of the slide, 
which is provided with a notch 74 to engage 
said rod. The slide is provided with upper 
and lower limiting-jaws 75 and 76, alranged, 
respectively, above and below the plane of the 
shoe 11, and mounted, respectively, in said 
jaws are the upper and lower limiting-screws 
77 and 78, which form adjustable stops to 
regulate the vertical throw of the shoe to ac 
curately correspond with the interval between 
contiguous rows of type-faces on the type 
wheel, and thus limit the throw of the tilting 
trip 51. The downward movement of the 
75 
95 
OO 
IIo 
II5 
I 25 
 
588,608 
5 
slide 71 is also limited by an adjustable stop, 
consisting of a screw 79, which is adapted to 
engage a fixed part, as 80, of the frame. 
Various means may be employed for ad 
justing this slide to bring different sets or 
groups of type-faces into operative position 
contiguous to the printing-plane, and in the 
construction illustrated said means consist 
of case-key level's 81 and 82, fulcrumed co 
axially and preferably provided with concen 
tric spindles, the spindle 83 of the lever 81 
being arranged within the hollow spindle 84 
of the lever 82. These case-key levers are 
provided, respectively, with arms 81 and 82, 
which are arranged in operative relation with 
the slide to impart vertical movement thereto 
and are preferably arranged at their free 
ends under the extended spindle or pivot 70 
of the trip. These levers are mounted to 
have throws of different extent, whereby the 
slide is elevated more or less, according to 
the case-key lever which is operated. In or 
der to compensate for this difference in throw, 
the levers are preferably of different lengths, 
that lever, S2, which is designed to elevate 
the type-wheel to bring the second set or 
group or field of type-faces (having the up 
per-case characters) into operative position 
being longer than the lever S1, which is de 
signed to bring the third set or group or field 
of type-faces bearing the auxiliary charac 
ters, as numerals and punctuation-marks, 
into operative position. 
It is desirable, furthermore, to employ 
means for regulating the vertical throw of 
the slide 71 in order to secure accurate a line 
ment of the printing- characters, and the 
means which I have shown for accomplishing 
this object consist of adjustable stops 85 and 
86, carried by an upstanding arm 87 of the 
shorter case-key lever 81, said arm being ar 
ranged in an approximately radial position 
with relation to the concentric spindles of 
the case-key levers. When the case-key lever 
S2 is depressed, the slide is elevated until a 
lug 88 thereon comes in contact with the ex 
tremity of the adjustable stop 85, the case 
key lever 81 meanwhile remaining at rest, 
and when the case-key lever S1 is depressed 
the slide is elevated until said lug comes in 
contact with the adjustable stop 86, the op 
eration of depressing said case-key lever 81 
serving to swing the arm 87 forwardly and 
thus remove the stop 85 from the path of the 
lug 88 and arrange the more elevated stop 86 
in the path thereof. In order to provide for 
locking either case-key lever in its adjusted 
position, whereby characters belonging to 
either group may be impressed without man 
ually holding said lever, I pivot the case 
keys 89 and 90, respectively, to their levers 
S1 and 82 and provide each with a locking 
tongue or hook 91 and 92 to engage fixed pins 
93 and 94, as clearly shown in Fig. 1. 
The form of platen which I preferably em 
ploy is shown in Fig. 1 and consists of a roller 
95, the path of the paper traversing the roller 
being indicated at 96 and being held in place 
by the usual pressure-roll 97, and between the 
surface of the platen and the type-wheel is 
arranged an inking device, such as a ribbon 
98, whereby the character constituting the 
type-face is impressed through the ribbon 
upon the surface of the paper; but it is nec 
essary in order to secure the impression of 
the desired type-face and the exclusion of all 
others to employ a printing-hammer 99 or its 
equivalent to strike the rear side of a tongue 
carrying the type-face to form the impression 
and directly in line with the desired type. 
The means which I have shown for commu 
nicating motion to this hammer, which is piv 
oted at 100, include a crank-arm 101, which 
is connected by a rod 102 to an arm 103 of a 
rock-shaft 104. This rock-shaft is adapted 
to be turned in the direction indicated by the 
arrow in Fig. 1 in order to swing the hammer 
toward the platen, and in order to turn the 
rock-shaft in this direction I employ a cam 
faced operating-arm 105, carried by the rock 
shaft and arranged in the path of a laterai 
stud 106 on the driving-lever 42. Hence when 
a key-lever is depressed the rocking frame 27 
is first operated by means of the cam-face 26 
to depress the gage-bar 21 into the plane of 
the step of the fixed gage which corresponds 
with the position of the tongue having the 
type corresponding with the character on the 
key, and at the same time the rocking frame 
55, if arranged in the wrong position to suit 
the character which is carried by the key-le 
ver, is actuated to move the trip 51, and there 
by arrange the proper row or series of type 
faces in the printing plane. The depression 
of the key-lever also communicates motion 
through the arm 43 to the driving-lever 42 
upon the same side of the center of the ma 
chine as that occupied by the key-lever which 
is depressed, and the forward movement of 
the head of this driving lever first releases 
the type-wheel, and then, by the engagement 
of the lug 46 with the contiguous arm 47, im 
parts lateral Swinging movement to the op 
- erating-gage. When the proper step or shoul 
der of the operating-gage comes in contact 
with the gage-bar, motion is communicated 
through the operating-gage and said gage-bar 
to the type-wheel, and the latter is adjusted 
laterally to bring the proper type-bearing 
tongue into the printing-plane. Just before 
the lateral movement of the type-wheel is 
checked by the engagement of the gage-bar 
with the step or shoulder of the fixed gage 
(in the horizontal plane of which said gage 
bar has been adjusted by means of the cam 
26, tilting frame 27, and rod 33) the stud 106 
engages the cam-faced arm. 105 of the rock 
shaft 104 and by swinging said rock-shaft in 
the direction indicated by the contiguous ar 
row in Fig. 1 elevates the free end of the 
crank-arm 101 and forces the hammer toward 
the platen to strike the tongue which is in 
the printing-plane inline with the type which 
is in position for forming an impression. At 
I5. 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
I I5 
I25 
6 
- 
588,608 
O 
25 
45 
55 
the moment of the operation of the hammer 
the tilting rod 28 of the frame 27 is engaged 
in the parallel-sided guide or seat, 29 of the 
key-lever, whereby the gage-bar is held firmly 
in the proper position, and at the same time 
the trip 51 is locked by the trip-arm 60 in the 
position to which it has been adjusted by the 
tilting frame 55 and bell-crank lever 59. 
In order to prevent vibration or rattling of 
the hamlner when in its repressed or normal 
position, I arrange the pivotal points of the 
link 102 in direct a linement with the rock 
shaft 104, and therefore when the parts are 
in the positions illustrated in Fig. 1 the rock 
shaft cannot be turned by applying pressure 
to the hammer, thus preventing vibration. 
The above - described lock can be released 
only by imparting rotary movement to the 
rock-shaft. 
The feed mechanism or letter and word 
spacing devices, which I have illustrated in 
the drawings, for imparting motion parallel 
with the lines of Writing to the platen are 
constructed as follows: 
107 represents a rack-bar capable of move 
ment parallel with the lines of writing and 
adapted to be suitably connected to the means 
for Supporting the platen, such as a carriage, 
(indicated in dotted lines at 10S,) such car 
riage, however, being of any approved con 
struction and forming no part of my inven 
tion, and 109 represents a gear meshing with 
said rack and adapted to be driven by a feed 
spring 110, which is indicated in Fig. 3, the 
arbor lll of Said spring and gear being held 
at the desired adjustment to insure the proper 
tension of the spring by means of ratchet 
mechanism including a ratchet-wheel112 and 
pawl 113. This rack-bar also meshes with 
the pinion 114, which is loosely mounted upon 
a feed-shaft 115, and the pinion carries a 
ratchet-wheel 116, engaged by a dog 117, car 
ried by an arm 118, which is fixed, by means 
of a collar 119, to said feed-shaft, whereby 
the pinion may be turned freely in one direc 
tion by linear movement imparted to the 
rack-bar to move the platen against the ten 
sion of the actuating-spring 110, or in a direc 
tion opposite to the forward or operative 
movement of said parts, without communi 
cating motion to the feed-shaft; but move 
ment of the rack-bar 107 and pinion 114 in 
the opposite direction, or forward, is pre 
vented by said dog 117 and ratchet 116 with 
out communicating rotary motion to the feed 
shaft. The dog 117 is normally held in en 
gagement with the ratchet-wheel by means 
of a spring 120, which bears upon the arm 
121 of the pawl. 
The rotary movement of the feed-shaft is 
Controlled by means of a ratchet-toothed or 
feed wheel 122, which is fixed to the feed 
shaft and is normally engaged by a stop-pawl 
123, and this stop-pawl, which is fulcrumed 
at an intermediate point to form an upwardly 
extending arm 124, is held in either its en 
gaged or disengaged position by means of a 
spring 125, which is connected, by means of 
a link, 126, with a forwardly-extending finger 
127, carried by the hub of the pawl. 
Mounted coaxially with and preferably 
upon the feed-shaft 115 is a swinging feed 
frame, having upper and lower bars 128 and 
129, connected by uprights 130, the lower bar 
129 of said frame being extended to form an 
arm 131, which carries an intermediately 
pivoted operating-pawl 132. The head 133 
of this operating-pawl is arranged in Opera 
tive relation with the teeth of the feed-wheel 
122 and in the plane thereof and is adapted 
to be engaged there with when a trip-arm 134, 
which extends inwardly from the operating 
pawl, is out of engagement with an adjust 
able stop 135, (clearly shown in Fig. 2,) and 
the tail 136 of the operating-pawl extends in 
front of and is normally arranged in contact 
with the stop-pawl 123, whereby when the 
trip 134 of the operating-pawl is in engage 
ment with the stop 135 the tail 136 of the 
operating-pawl holds the stop-pawl in engage 
ment with the teeth of the feed-wheel and 
thereby locks said feed-wheel against rotary 
movement in the direction of the arrow shown 
in Fig. 2 or in the direction necessary to 
feed the platen forwardly in the direction of 
the line of writing. 
The upper bar 128 of the feed-frame is ex 
tended to form an arm 137, carrying spaced 
pins 138, which respectively engage the arms 
of the spider 49, as clearly shown in Fig. 2, 
the portion of said arm between the pins be 
ing bowed to avoid interference with the con 
tiguous portions of the mechanism, said pins 
being designed and adapted to engage also 
the secondary spider 50, which is fixed to the 
spindle of the type-wheel, and inasmuch as 
the actuating-spring 125 of the stop-pawl is 
connected to the feed-frame, as shown at 139, 
it is obvious that both the type-wheel and 
the operating-gage will be held in their cen 
tral positions when at rest by the pressure 
of the pins 13S upon the extremities of the 
oppositely-extending arms of the spiders. 
In operation when the stud 46 of a driving 
lever engages the corresponding arm 47 of 
the operating-gage and communicates rotary 
motion thereto the spider 49 is turned in the 
same direction with the operating-gage and 
thereby swings the feed-frame in a direction 
opposite to that indicated by the arrow on 
the feed-wheel to arrange the nose of the 
feed-pawl opposite that tooth of the feed 
wheel with which it is to engage. When the 
hammer 99, under the control of the driving 
lever 42, has been thrown forward to a posi 
tion which brings its impact extremity almost 
in contact with the type-bearing tongue ar 
ranged in the plane thereof, a trip-pin 140, 
carried by an arm 141 on the rock-shaft 104, 
strikes an adjustable stop 142 on the upper 
extremity of the arm 124 of the stop-pawl, 
and by swinging said arm in the direction in 
dicated by the arrow in Fig. 4 disengages its 
lower aim from the feed-wheel 122. This 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
I o5 
IO 
I I5 
 
588,608 
g 
O 
outward movement of the stop-pawl causes a 
corresponding movement of the tail 136 of the 
Operating-pawl, and hence throWS the nose 
of the operating-pawl into engagement with 
the feed-wheel. Thus when the hammer 
strikes the type-bearing tongue to make an 
impression the feed-wheel is held in place 
by the nose of the operating-pawl, and when 
the key-lever is released by the operator, 
thereby relieving the arm 47 of the pressure 
of the driving-lever, the feed-wheel 122 is 
free to rotate in the direction of the arrow in 
Fig. 2 under the tension of the actuating or 
feed spring 110, thereby carrying the feed 
frame in the same direction until the trip-arm 
134 is engaged by the stop 135 and throws 
the tail of the feed-pawl toward the feed 
wheel to engage the stop-pawl with the teeth 
thereof. This movement of the feed-frame 
with the feed-wheel causes the return of the 
Operating-gage and type-wheel to their nor 
mal or central positions, where they are held 
by the tension of the spring 125. 
I have deemed it unnecessary to show or 
describe any specific means for imparting ro 
tary motion to the roller 95 or for feeding the 
ribbon, inasmuch as any of the ordinary forms 
of line-spacing and ribbon-feeding mechan 
isms may be employed in this connection. 
The driving-levers are preferably provided 
with hubs 143, at opposite ends of which the 
arms 43 and the body portions of said levers 
are arranged, as clearly shown in Fig. 3, and 
the hammer is preferably bifurcated at its 
lower end, as shown at 144, and is provided 
with a spindle 100, held in place by means of 
journal-screws 146 mounted in the frame, a 
portion of which is shown at 147. Only the 
general outlines and a portion of the frame 
have been illustrated, inasmuch as this fea 
ture may be varied to suit the preference of 
the manufacturer, and has no material bear 
ing upon the invention. 
From the above description it will be seen 
that the type-wheel consists of two sections, a 
guiding-section comprising a spindle and a 
terminal and an intermediate arm, the arms 
being provided with cross-heads having seats, 
and a movable type-bearing section compris 
ing an arm mounted to slide vertically upon 
the spindle toward and from the planes of the 
said terminal and intermediate arms, and 
carrying yielding type-bearingtongues, which 
fit to slide in the seats of the arms forming 
the first-named section. The arms which are 
attached to and carried by the spindle are 
arranged in fixed relative positions, and the 
hammer Operates at a given distance above 
the plane of the upper or terminal arm, where 
by the portion of the type-bearing arm which 
projects above the uppermost guiding-arm is 
proportionate to the vertical adjustment of 
the movable section of the wheel, and the in 
terval between the plane of said uppermost 
guide-arm and the type to be impressed is 
uniform. In other words, the uppermost guide 
is located at a fixed distance from the print 
ing-plane, whereby the resistance offered by 
a tongue to the hammer is uniform in all po 
sitions of the vertically-adjustable member 
of the wheel. 
The greater proportion of the force neces 
sary to depress the keys is expended in mov 
ing the driving-lever 42, and hence in propor 
tioning the long and short arms of the key 
levers the short arms are measured from the 
spindles or rods upon which the key-levers 
are mounted rearwardly to the points where 
said levers come in contact with the short arm 
43 of the driving-lever 42. With thisarrange 
ment and proportionate length of arms a uni 
form force or pressure is required to operate 
the key-levers, and a uniform depression of 
the keys accomplishes the desired result. 
Various changes in the form, proportion, 
and the minor details of construction may be 
resorted to without departing from the spirit 
or sacrificing any of the advantages of this 
invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel including longitudinally-movable ra 
dially-yielding type-bearingtongues, and per 
manent guides through which the tongues 
extend to slide, and operating devices, sub 
stantially as Specified. 
2. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel including terminal and intermediate 
segmental cross-heads provided with allined 
guides or seats, and an axially-movable cross 
head carrying type-bearing tongues which ex 
tend through said guides or seats, and oper 
ating devices, substantially as specified. 
3. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel including a spindle, radial arms car 
ried by the spindle and terminating in seg 
mental cross-heads having seats, one of said 
arms being axially movable, yielding type 
bearing tongues secured to said movable arm 
and fitting to slide in the seats of the remain 
ing arms, the seats on the arm contiguous to 
the free ends of the tongues being open, and 
operating devices, substantially as specified. 
4. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheelcomprising a guiding-section and a type 
bearing section, the former including a spin 
dle and arms arranged in fixed relative posi 
tions and provided with alined guiding-seats 
consisting of spaced pins, and the latter com 
prising an arm mounted to slide upon the 
spindle, and yielding type-bearing tongues 
permanently secured at one end to the mov 
able arm by means of pins engaging perfora 
tions in the tongues and a securing-strip for 
holding the tongues in engagement with the 
pins, said tongues fitting in the seats of the 
arms forming the first-named section, and 
operating devices, substantially as specified. 
5. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel comprising a guiding-section provided 
with a lined seats arranged in fixed relative 
positions, and a type-bearing section being 
mounted for movement parallel with lines 
25 
35 
45 
So 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
115 
I25 
8 
588,608 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
connecting said seats and having yielding 
type-bearing tongues fitted to slide in the 
Seats, and operating devices, substantially as 
specified. 
6. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheel capable of swinging movement in either 
direction from an intermediate point of rest 
and having type-faces arranged in a trans 
Verse Series at different distances from an in 
termediate point of the wheel, fixed and mov 
able gages having relatively-inverted conver 
gent Series of Steps or shoulders, a gage-bar 
mounted upon the type-wheel for movement 
parallel with the axis thereof and adapted to 
be arranged in the planes of different steps or 
shoulders of said gages to limit the lateral 
movement of the wheel, and operating de 
vices for turning the movable gage, substan 
tially as specified. 
7. A type-writing machine having a type 
Wheel mounted for movement in either direc 
tion from an intermediate point of rest and 
having type-faces arranged at intervals upon 
opposite sides of a point which is normally 
arranged in the printing-plane, a fixed gage 
having convergent series of steps or shoul 
ders, a movable gage mounted for movement 
parallel with the type-wheel and having se 
lies of steps or shoulders converging in the 
Opposite direction to those of the fixed gage, 
a gage-bar mounted upon the type-wheel for 
movement parallel with the axis thereof and 
adapted to be arranged in the planes of cor 
responding steps or shoulders of the fixed and 
movable gages, means for adjusting said gage 
bar, and operating devices for communicat 
ing motion in either direction to the movable 
gage, Substantially as specified. 
S. A type-Writing machine having a type 
Wheel mounted for movement in either direc 
tion from an intermediate point of rest and 
having type-faces arranged at intervals upon 
opposite sides of a point which is normally 
arranged in the printing-plane, coperating 
fixed and movable gages having steps or 
shoulders arranged in inclined series respec 
tively converging and diverging in a common 
direction, the movable gage being mounted 
concentrically with the type-wheel, operating 
devices for imparting motion to the movable 
gage, a gage-bar mounted upon the type 
Wheel for movement parallel with the axis 
thereof and adapted to be arranged in the 
planes of corresponding steps or shoulders of 
Said gages, and means for operating the gage 
bar, Substantially as specified. 
9. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheel mounted for movement in either direc 
tion from an intermediate point of rest and 
having type-faces arranged at intervals upon 
opposite sides of a point which is normally 
arranged in the printing-plane, fixed and 
movable gages having steps or shoulders ar 
ranged in inclined series respectively con 
verging and diverging in a common direction, 
the movable gage being mounted concentric 
ally with the type-wheel, operating devices 
including key-levers for communicating mo 
tion to the movable gage, a gage-bar mounted 
upon the type-wheel for movement parallel 
with the axis thereof and adapted to be ar 
ranged in the planes of corresponding steps 
or shoulders of the gages, and connections 
between said gage-bar and the key-levers, 
substantially as specified. 
10. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel, fixed and movable gages having steps 
or shoulders arranged in series respectively 
converging and diverging in a common direc 
tion, a gage-bar mounted for movement par 
allel with the axis of the type - wheel and 
adapted to be arranged in the planes of cor 
responding steps of the gages, a rocking frame 
operatively connected with the gage-bar, key 
levers respectively carrying cams of different 
pitch to engage a trip-rod On the rocking 
frame, and means connected with the key 
levers for imparting Swinging movement to 
the movable gage, substantially as specified. 
11. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel, fixed and movable gages having steps 
or shoulders arranged in series respectively 
converging and diverging in a common direc 
tion, a gage-bar mounted for movement par 
allel with the axis of the type - wheel and 
adapted to be arranged in the planes of cor 
responding steps of the gages, a yielding rock 
ing frame operatively connected with the 
gage-bar and having a transverse trip-rod, 
key-levers provided with inclined cam-faces 
and communicating parallel-sided seats re 
spectively adapted to engage and receive Said 
trip-rod, the cam-faces of different levers 
varying in pitch, and operating connections 
between the key-levers and the movable gage, 
substantially as specified. 
12. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel, fixed and movable gages having steps 
or shoulders arranged in series respectively 
converging and diverging in a common direc 
tion, a gage-bar mounted for movement par 
allel with the axis of the type - wheel and 
adapted to be arranged in the planes of cor 
responding steps of the gages, a rocking frame 
operatively connected with the gage-bar and 
having a single transverse trip-rod, key-le 
vers having their keys arranged in different 
transverse series and provided at their rear 
ends with transversely-alined cam-faces to 
engage said trip-rod, the key-level's being full 
crumed at intermediate points and at differ 
ent distances from Said calm-faces whereby 
the lengths of the front and rear arms of all 
of the levers are of a given uniform ratio, and 
operating connections between the key-levers 
and the movable gage, Substantially as Speci 
fied. 
13. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheel mounted for longitudinal and lateral 
movement and having parallel-spaced rows or 
series of type-faces either of which is adapted 
to be arranged in the printing-plane, a rock 
ing trip operatively connected with the type 
Wheel and capable of a plurality of positions, 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IC 
2C 
2. 
 
588,608 
9 
IO 
25 
a pivotal trip-arm arranged at one end be 
tween spaced points on the trip, key-levers, 
and Operating connections including a rock 
ing frame between the key-levers and the trip 
whereby the trip is adjusted by the key-levers 
to correspond with the character carried by 
each key-lever, substantially as specified. 
14. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheel mounted for longitudinal and lateral 
movement and having parallel-spaced rows or 
series of type-faces either of which is adapted 
to be arranged in the printing-plane, a rock 
ing trip operatively connected with the type 
- wheel and capable of a plurality of positions, 
Said trip having spaced pins, a pivotal trip 
arm arranged at its free end to swing between 
and engage said pins alternately, key-levers, 
and operating connections between the key 
levers and said trip-arm, substantially as 
specified. 
15. A type-Writing machinehaving a type 
wheel mounted for longitudinal and lateral 
movement and having parallel-spaced rows 
or series of type-faces either of which is 
adapted to be arranged in the printing-plane, 
a rocking trip operatively connected with the 
type-wheel and having spaced pins, a pivotal 
trip-arm arranged with its free end in oper 
ative relation with said pins and adapted to 
engage and move the latter alternately out 
of its path to occupy a position with its ex 
tremity in the path thereof and thereby lock 
the trip in its adjusted positions, key-levers, 
and operating connections between the key 
levers and the trip - arm, substantially as 
specified. 
16. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheel mounted for longitudinal and lateral 
movement and having parallel-spaced rows 
or series of type - faces either of which is 
adapted to be arranged in the printing-plane, 
a rocking trip operatively connected with the 
type-wheel, a trip-arm arranged at its free 
end in operative relation with said trip, key 
levers, a rocking frame provided upon oppo 
site sides of the plane of its axis with trip 
rods arranged in the paths of shoulders car 
ried respectively by the key-levers, whereby 
the frame is tilted in opposite directions by 
the operation of different key-levers, and 
connections between the rocking frame and 
the trip-arm, Substantially as specified. 
17. In a type-Writing machine, the combi 
nation with a type-wheeland key-levers, of a 
driving-lever having one arm arranged in the 
paths of the key-levers, and a swinging arm 
operatively connected with the type-wheel to 
communicate rotary motion thereto and ar 
ranged in the path of a stud on the driving 
lever, said driving-lever being extended to oc 
cupy, when at rest, a position in the path of 
the type-Wheel to lock the latter against move 
ment, and the movement of the driving-lever 
to actuate said swinging arm serving to release 
the type-wheel, substantially as specified. 
18. In a type-writing machine, the combi 
nation with a type-wheel adapted to normally 
Occupy an intermediate point of rest, and key 
levers, of swinging arms operatively con 
nected with the type-wheel and adapted to 
communicate Swinging movement in opposite 
directions thereto, driving-levers each hav 
ing an arm arranged in the paths of the key 
levers, and provided with studs to engage said 
SWinging arms to communicate motion to the 
type-wheel, each driving-lever being extended 
to occupy, when at rest, a position at one side 
and in the path of the type-wheel to lock the 
latter against Swinging movement, and re 
silient means for returning the type-wheel to 
its normal position, the movement of one of 
the type-levers to actuate the corresponding. 
SWinging arm serving to release the type 
wheel for movement in the direction in which 
it is actuated by the corresponding swinging 
arm, Substantially as specified. 
19. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheel provided with yielding type-bearing 
tongues, a hammer adapted to engage atongue 
in the printing-plane, a driving-lever and 
means for communicating SWinging move 
ment thereto, a rock-shaft having a crank 
arm connected by means of a link with the 
crank-armon the hammer, the pivotal points 
of said link being adapted to be arranged in 
alinement with the axis of the rock-shaft to 
lock the hammer against vibration in its re 
tracted position, and a cam-faced arm on the 
rock-shaft arranged in the path of a lateral 
pin on the driving-lever, substantially as 
specified. 
20. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheelyieldingly held at an intermediate point 
of rest, means for communicating rotary mo 
tion to the type - wheel including arms 47 
mounted concentrically with the type-wheel, 
fixed and movable gages having Series of 
steps or shoulders arranged respectively to 
converge and diverge in a common direction, 
the movable gage being carried by said arms, 
a gage-bar mounted for movement parallel 
with the axis of the type-wheel and adapted 
to be arranged in the planes of corresponding 
steps or shoulders of the gages, means for 
adjusting the gage-bar, and operating devices 
including driving-levers normally arranged 
in engagement with the type-wheel to lock it 
inits position of rest, said arms being arranged 
in the paths of projections on the driving-le 
vers and adapted to be turned to communicate 
motion to the movable gage, Substantially as 
specified. 
21. A type-writing machinehaving a longi 
tudinally-movable type-wheel having type 
faces arranged in spaced transverse series, a 
slide mounted for movement parallel with the 
type-wheel and operatively connected there 
with, case-key levers operatively connected 
with the slide, and stops carried by one of the 
case-key levers at different distances from its 
fulcrum and arranged in different radial 
planes, one stop being normally in the path of 
40 
45 
50 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
IOC 
O 
i 15 
I 25 
O 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
said slide and the other being moved there 
into by the lever by which it is carried, sub 
stantially as specified. 
22. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel mounted for longitudinal movement 
and having type-faces arranged in different 
transverse rows or series, a slide mounted for 
movement parallel with the type-wheel and 
operatively connected there with, case-key le 
vers operatively connected with the slide and 
adapted to move the same through different 
distances, one of the case-key levers being 
provided with an arm extending radially from 
its fulcrum, and adjustable stops carried by 
said arm in different radial planes, one stop 
being normally in the path of said slide and 
the other being moved thereinto by the opera 
tion of the lever by which it is carried, sub 
stantially as specified. 
23. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel provided with different groups or sets 
of type-faces, each group or set comprising a 
plurality of transverse spaced series or rows, 
a slide mounted for movement parallel with 
the axis of the type - wheel, a rocking trip 
mounted upon the slide and operatively con 
nected with the type-wheel, key-levers, oper 
ating connections between the key-levers and 
said trip and including means for locking the 
trip in either of its adjusted positions, case 
key levers operatively connected with the 
slide, and adjustable stops carried by one of 
the case-key levers to limit the movement of 
the slide, substantially as specified. 
24. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheel adapted to normally occupy an inter 
mediate position of rest, printing mechanism 
including means for impressing the type 
faces, letter-spacing mechanism including an 
actuating or feed spring, and operating con 
nections between said spring and the type 
wheel whereby the latter is returned after 
each operation to said position of rest, sub 
stantially as specified. 
25. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheel, printing mechanism including means 
for impressing the type-faces, a spider con 
nected to and mounted concentrically with 
the type-wheel, letter-spacing mechanism in 
cluding an actuating or feed spring and a 
pivotal frame operatively connected with the 
spring and provided with pins arranged in op 
erative relation with the arms of said spider, 
whereby after each deflection the type-wheel 
is returned to its normal position by the pres 
sure of said frame, substantially as specified. 
26. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel and means for moving it in either di 
rection from a point of rest, printing mechan 
ism including means for impressing the type 
faces, a spider operatively connected with the 
type-wheel, a pivotal frame having an arm 
provided with pins arranged normally in con 
tact with opposite arms of the spider, and 
yielding means for holding said frame in its 
normal position, whereby the type-wheel is 
returned after each deflection in either direc 
- 
fied. 
tion to a normal position of rest, Substan 
tially as specified. 
27. A type-Writing machine having a type 
wheel, printing mechanism including means 
for impressing the type-faces, a spider oper 
atively connected with the type-wheel, letter 
spacing mechanism including a feed-Wheel, 
operating and stop pawls arranged in Oper 
ative relation with said wheel, and a feed 
frame carrying the operating-pawl and oper 
atively connected with said spider, whereby 
the feed mechanism is controlled by the Oper 
ation of the type-wheel, substantially as Speci 
28. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel capable of a variable lateral movement 
to bring different type-faces into the printing 
plane, operating mechanism including means 
for impressing the type-faces and a spider 
mounted concentrically with the type-wheel 
and having a uniform lateral movement, and 
feed mechanism including a feed-wheel ex 
posed to a constant rotating force applied in 
a uniform direction, operating and stop pawls 
in operative relation with the feed-wheel, and 
a feed-frame carrying the operating-pawland 
provided with pins arranged respectively in 
contact with the arms of said spider, Substan 
tially as specified. 
29. A type-writing machine having a feed 
wheel and means for communicating rotary 
motion in a uniform direction thereto, Oper 
ating and stop pawls arranged in operative 
relation with the feed-wheel, the operating 
pawl being adapted to move in a path paral 
lel with the periphery of the feed-wheel and 
having a tail arranged in permanent contact 
with the stop-pawl, a swinging arm carrying 
the operating-pawl, operating devices for ad 
vancing said arm when the pawl is in engage 
ment with the feed-wheel, means for disen 
gaging the stop-pawl from the feed-wheel and 
thereby throwing the operating-pawl into 
temporary engagement there with, and a stop 
arranged in the path of a trip-arm on the op 
erating-pawl to return the parts to their nor 
mal positions, substantially as specified. 
30. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel, a spider operatively connected with 
the type-wheel, printing mechanism for im 
pressing the type-faces including a rock 
shaft, and feed mechanism including a feed 
wheel, and operating-pawls arranged in op 
erative relation with the feed-wheel, a crank 
arm on said rock-shaft adapted to engage the 
stop-pawl to disengage the same from the feed 
wheel, the operating-pawl being provided 
with a tail arranged in contact with the outer 
side of the stop-pawl, a feed-frame having an 
arm provided with pins arranged in operative 
relation with the spider, said feed-frame car 
rying an operating-pawl, and a stop arranged 
in the path of a trip-arm on the operating 
pawl, substantially as specified. 
31. A type-writing machine having a type 
wheel, printing mechanism for impressing 
the type-faces including a rock-shaft, and 
75 
85 
95 
ICO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
12C 
I25 
 
588,608 
feed mechanism including a feed-wheel, and 
means for imparting rotary motion in a uni 
form direction thereto, a pivotal stop-pawl 
arranged in operative relation with the feed 
wheel, a crank-arm carried by said rock-shaft 
for engaging an arm of the stop-pawl, a hold 
ing-spring connected with a finger on the 
stop-pawl and adapted to hold the latter in 
either its engaged or disengaged position, a 
feed-frame operatively connected with the 
type-wheel and having the other end of said 
holding-spring attached thereto, an operat 
ing-pawl mounted upon the feed-frame and 
having a tail arranged in operative relation 
O 
with the stop-pawl, whereby when the latter 
is disengaged the former is engaged with the 
feed-wheel, and a trip-arm on the operative 
pawl adapted to engage a stop to return the 
stop-pawl into engagement with the feed 
wheel, substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAMI S. SHIERK. 
Witnesses: 
M. M. DUNLAP, 
EARL REEWE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588708.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 588,708 
H?? 
? 
T 
?? 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
ATTORAVEKS. 
The Morris PETERS co, PHote-Litto, washington, c. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM W. STEWART, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
FOUNTAIN-PEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,708, dated August 24, 1897. 
Application filed September 17, 1896, Serial No, 606,105, (No model.) 
? 
tudinal sectional view of a sufficient number 
To all, whom it may concern: 
of parts of a fountain-pento illustrate a modi 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM W. STEWART, 
a resident of Brooklyn, Kings county, State 
fied form of my invention. Fig. 8 is a detail 
top view of a pen-nib which is preferably used 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Fountain-Pens, of 
in the construction illustrated in Fig. 7. 
which the following is a specification. 
The holder or reservoir A is preferably 
My invention relates more particularly to 
closed at its upper end and is adapted to con 
fountain-pens in which a tubular handle or 
nect with the nozzle B by screw-threads a, or 
reservoir closed at the upper end is used and 
otherwise. Within the nozzle B may be main 
wherein suitable ducts are provided at the 
taimed a feeder-bar C, which in the present 
lower end of the pen to conveyink to the pen 
instance is shown as comprising a body por 
tion which preferably fits friction-tight and 
nib and to admit air to the reservoir. In 
fountain-pens of this description wherein air 
is adjustable in the nozzle B. From this body 
and ink are combined, so to speak, at the 
portion of the feeder-bar projects a slitted 
feeder-fingerb, that bears upon the under side 
lower end of the pen, so that air is admitted 
of the pen-nib D, as shown in Fig. 2. 'The 
to the reservoir and ink is allowed to be fed 
to the pennib, the air naturally forms itself 
slit in the finger of the feeder-bar is in com 
into bubbles or globules on its passage to the 
munication with recesses c c'. The feeder 
reservoir. These globules naturally conform 
baris provided with a non-circular or angu 
in size to the conduit or channel through which 
lar bOre or inlk-cOnduit d, (see Fig. 5,) Which 
preferably terminates in the flaring mouths 
they have to pass, in view of which it will 
be obvious that the globules in themselves 
did to better control the bubbles, and there 
form means for obstructing the flow of ink 
by control the flow of ink through the bore 
through the conduit in which they are con 
or conduit d, as will be hereinafter more fully 
explained. 
tained. Principally for this reason great diffi 
culty has been experienced heretofore in pro 
It will be observed that the recessic ex 
viding a fountain-pen which will meet all 
tends on but one side of the slitted finger of 
requirements. 
the feeder-bar and that the other side is plane. 
The object of my invention is to overcome 
By this means I am enabled to hold to one 
these and other difficulties heretofore expe 
side out of the path of the main slit in the 
feeder-finger any bubbles which may pass 
rienced and to provide simple, and efficient 
means for controlling and regulating the flow 
along said slit and which if allowed to re 
of ink and for providing against the liability 
main therein would choke the same and pre 
of the pen sweating when notin use, as will 
vent the free flow of ink to the pen-nib. 
Within the angular bore d is contained the 
be hereinafter more fully explained. 
globular mechanical obstructing-piece, which 
To this end my invention consists in the 
novel arrangement and combination of parts 
preferably consists of a rubber balle, having 
a diameter sufficient to make contact with 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, wherein like 
the walls of the bore or conduit, so as to es 
letters represent corresponding parts in the 
tablish a nucleus for the flow of ink. This 
ball e may be mounted upon a Wire or Sup 
Various views, Figure I is a side view, look 
port?, that projects within the handle or res 
ing in the direction of the arrow ac in Fig. 2, 
of a pen embodying my invention, the cap 
ervoir and is provided with means for pre 
venting the withdrawal of the obstructing 
having been removed. Fig. 2 is a central 
ball or piece entirely from the pen. In the 
longitudinal sectional view on the line 22 of 
Fig. 5 With the cap in place. Fig. 3 is a de 
present instance this means consists of form 
ing the end of the wire f into a hook g after 
tail top view of the feeder-bar. Fig. 4 is a 
the same has been passed through a sleeve h, 
detail longitudinal sectional view of the noz 
carried upon a plug i, adapted to be secured 
zle. Fig. 5 is a transverse sectional view of 
in the upper end of the holder. 
the pen on the line 55 of Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is a 
The wire f 
detailside view of the controlling obstruction may pass through the balle to form a hook 
Fig. 7 is a detail longi like shanki at the lower end, by which the 
and its connection. 
- 
O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
- 
588,708 
user of the pen is enabled to adjust the ball 
within the bore. It will be observed that by 
this means the mechanical obstruction or 
ball may be adjusted within the bore or may 
be entirely removed therefrom for the pur 
pose of filling the pen without removing the 
nozzle. 
In small pens it may be found desirable to 
construct the pen as shown in Fig. 7, where 
in the feeder-bar C is dispensed with and the 
heel k of the pen D is entered into the angu 
lar bore d of the nozzle B, so as to divide said 
bore, the wire i with ball in thereon acting to 
control the flow of ink to the pen. 
Having described the construction of two 
forms of fountain-pen embodying my inven 
tion, I will now proceed to describe the oper 
ation thereof. The pen illustrated in Figs. 
1 to 6 may readily be filled by withdrawing 
the ball e from the bore by means of the hook 
like extensionisufficiently far to expose the 
mouth of said bore. The ball is then re 
placed in the bore, when the pen is in condi 
tion for use. In operation ink and air pass 
in opposite directions through the apertures 
formed between the corners of the angular 
bore and ball e and the lower end of the pen. 
The ink passes to the recess c', from which it 
is fed to the pen-nib as required. The air 
passing to the rear of the ball or obstruction 
eforms into globules or bubbles, each of which 
is of about the same diameter as the ball e, 
and passes up the ink conduit or bore to the 
reservoir. It will be readily understood that 
if the bore d were circular instead of angu 
lar each of the air-bubbles would fill the bore 
and no control of the flow could be had. 
Various means have been devised heretofore 
to either destroy or otherwise get rid of these 
bubbles, but by my invention I am enabled 
to utilize them to automatically control the 
flow of ink to the pen-nib. The ball e is a 
mechanical obstruction which performs the 
same function as one of nature's bubbles re 
tained against movement. It is in a sense a 
bubble which may be maintained at the lower 
end of the bore and is at all times under con 
trol of the user, so that it may be adjusted in 
the bore to give a greater or less flow of ink 
to the pen. 
The enlargements d' d' in the feeder-bar C 
and in the nozzle shown in Fig. 7 are in the 
nature of valve-seats and act at times with 
the bubbles to restrain the flow of ink. For 
instance, a film or bubble having been in 
voked within the reservoir behind the en 
largement d will be prevented from being 
forced through the bored by the weight of 
the ink behind the bubble, but will be re 
tained against the enlargement as against a 
valve-seat and prevent the too-ready flow of 
ink through the bore. 
It will be observed that the pen can prop 
erly ventilate itself at all times and thereby 
prevent all liability of Sweating--that is to 
say, when the pen is not in use there is no 
liability of the expansion of air within the 
holder causing air-bubbles, with the ink, 
which forms a component part thereof, being 
forced out through the bore and around the 
pen-nozzle, as heretofore, because the air 
within the holder at all times may escape 
through the apertures formed between the 
surface of the bubbles (and of the obstruc 
tion e) and the corners of the bore. 
Myinvention is of particular value in large 
pens where a considerable flow of ink is re 
quired because of the absolute control and 
regularity of the flow without liability of the 
pen sweating, bleeding, or dropping ink, 
which heretofore could not be had. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a fountain-pen, the combination of 
angular ink-conduit in communication with 
the pen and with the open air, and a mechan 
ical obstruction contained in the path of said 
conduit and leaving unobstructed openings 
at the corners thereof. 
2. In a fountain-pen, the combination of 
an angular ink-conduit in communication 
with the pen and with the open air, and an 
adjustable obstruction contained in the path 
of said conduit and leaving unobstructed 
openings at the corners thereof. 
3. In a fountain-pen, the combination of 
an angular ink-conduit in communication 
with the pen and with the open air, and an 
adjustable and removable obstruction con 
tained in the path of said conduit and leav 
ing unobstructed openings at the corners 
thereof. 
4. In a fountain-pen, the combination of 
an angular ink-conduit in communication 
with the pen and with the open air, and a ball 
contacting with the walls of said conduit and 
adjustable therein. 
5. In a fountain-pen, a feeder-bar having 
an angular bore extending therethrough, said 
bore being entirely surrounded by the walls 
of said feeder-bar and in open communica 
tion with the reservoir and with the air, a 
feeder-finger extending from said feeder-bar 
and contacting. with the pen-nib to convey 
ink thereto from said angular bore and means 
for controlling the flow of ink to said bore. 
6. In a fountain-pen, a feeder-bar having 
a slitted feeder-finger for conveying ink to 
the pen-nib and a recess formed on one side 
only, of the feeder-finger, said recess being in 
communication with the slit in the feeder-bar. 
7. In a fountain-pen, the combination of a 
non-circular ink-conduit in communication 
with the pen-nib and with the open air and 
a globular mechanical obstruction contained 
within said conduit. 
* WILLIAMI W. STEWART. 
Witnesses: 
DAN MATTHEWS, 
FRANK A. SMITH. 
? ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
7? 
75 
9o 
? ? ? 
Lo5 
I I. ? 
II5 
? 2 ? 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588808.txt	(No Model. ) 
No. 588,808. 
N. M. BAIN. 
CAN SOLDERING MACHINE. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
SS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
NATHANIEL M. BAIN, OF PORTLAND, OREGON. 
CAN - SOLDERNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICAGIGN forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,808, dated August 24, 1897. 
Application filed January 2, 1896, Serial No. 574,141, (No modcl.) 
O 
25 
35 
- 
- 
. . . 
outer walls. 
cured in the hoop by the same means as the 
Be it known that I, NATHANIEL A. BAIN, a arms 7 are secured in the rim of the band 
citizen of the United States, residing at Port 
wheel, and like the latter arms they are 
land, Multnomah county, Oregon, have in 
adapted to be laterally adjusted. 
vented a new and useful Improvement in 
14 is a track rigidly fixed in the acid-tray 3. 
Can-Soldering Machines, of which the follow 
15 and 16 are two tracks supported on three 
ing is a specification. 
arms 17, each of which is mounted on the 
The object of my invention is to obtain a 
bed-plate by means of two short posts 18 and 
soldering-machine for cans, more especially 
19, which posts are provided with two nuts 
for oval and long cans. The mechanism in 
or collars 20, holding the arms 17 between 
vented by me for this purpose is as illustrated 
them, as seen in Fig. 4, and the base or lower 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
ends of such posts 1819 being threaded and 
Figure 1 is a perspective plan view of my inserted in threaded perforations in the bed 
soldering-machine. Fig. 2 is a detail of a 
plate, so as to be vertically adjustable. 
band-wheel and an inner end of a long arm, 
21 is a bead extending along the interior of 
showing means for securing the wheel on the 
the outer wall of the troughs to prevent the 
arm. Fig. 3 is a detail of a section of a long 
edges of the can from binding against such 
arm, a hoop, and clips thereon for support 
ing the hoop on the arm. Fig. 4 is a cross 
The rail or track 16 is covered with asbes 
sectional view of the device, taken on line 
tos to offer some resistance to the cans and 
n in, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is a view similar to the 
turn the same while being moved forward by 
latter, showing an apparatus for heating the 
the arms 7. 
soldering-trough underneath the same. Fig. 
22 is a rail supported on posts 23, attached 
6 is a detail of two tracks and means for sup 
to the outer wall of the trough, this rail be 
porting the same. 
ing provided for the cans to lean against 
The numerals and letters designate the 
while traveling around the machine and dip 
parts of my machine referred to in describ-ping their edges in the acid and the molten 
ing the same. 
solder. 
The circular bed-plate 1 is rigidly mounted 
The operation of my machine is very sim 
on some suitable frame and a furnace is pro 
ple. The shaft of the band-wheel 6 is re 
vided under that section of such plate em 
volved by means of suitable gearing, as indi 
braced within the letters X and Y. On the 
cated by the arrows. The cans are fed to the 
bed-plate is provided a trough extending 
machine at A and are revolved and moved 
from 2 to y, which is divided by a box-like 
by the arms 7, in the first place through the 
partition, inserted at 2, into two compart 
acid-trough and next through the solder 
ments or baths, one, 3, for the acid solution 
trough, while so revolving leaning outward 
against the rail 22 and dipping their edges in 
and the other, 4, for the molten solder. 
5 is a block or pillow in which the band 
the molten solder as they travel along and 
wheel 6 is journaled. The band-wheel is pro 
are finally ejected from the machine at B. 
vided with a series of long arms 7, having. 
The short or auxiliary arms 13 are provided 
to keep long cans in position and cause them 
antifriction-wheels S at their ends. These 
arms are threaded at their inner ends and are 
to revolve evenly. For the purpose of illus 
secured in apertures in the rim of the band 
trating this operation one long can is shown 
wheel by means of two nuts 9 and 10, (see 
in broken outlines L. C in Fig. 1, and it will 
Fig. 2,) thus adapting such arms to be later 
be observed that the auxiliary arm. 13 holds 
ally adjusted to some degree. 
the inner end of such long can in place by 
11 is a hoop which is supported from the 
preventing the same from rolling away from 
arms 7 by means of suitable clips 12, which 
the arm 7. 
clips are also adapted to lateral adjustment, 
Underneath the soldier-trough is suspended 
a detail of this construction being shown in 
in depending straps Ca suitable tubular fluid 
Fig. 3. From stich hoop 11 project a series 
heating device D, having apertures d in its 
of short or auxiliary arms 13, which are se 
upper surface, as shown in Fig. 5, for the 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
is is: 
 
2 
588,808 
compartment 4 to heat the same; the wheel 
6 journaled in a suitable pillow or support; 
means for revolving such wheel; the arms 7, 
secured in slots or apertures in the rim of the 
wheel 6 by means permitting such arms to 
be laterally adjusted, and such arms being 
provided with antifriction-wheels 8 at their 
free ends; the hoop 11 supported from the 
arms 7 by adjustable clips, the auxiliary 
arms 13 secured in slots or apertures in the 
rim of such hoop 11 by means permitting such 
arms to be laterally adjusted, and such arms 
13 being likewise provided at their free ends 
with antifriction - wheels; the rigidly-fixed 
rail 14 and the rails 15 and 16 mounted on 
suitable supports adapting the same to verti 
cal adjustment; a suitable fiction covering, 
for the purpose specified, on such rail 16; a 
bead 21 extending along the interior of the 
outer wall of the troughs or compartments; 
and the rail 22 for cans to lean against, all 
substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof I have here unto set my 
signature, in the presence of two witnesses, 
this 27th day of November, 1895. 
NATIANIEL M. BAIN. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
E. D. TIMMS, 
T. J. GEISLER. 
5 
O 
ignition of the fluid in the tube for heating 
the solder-trough directly above the same. 
Now what I claim is 
1. In a soldering-machine, in combination, 
the circular bed-plate, rigidly mounted, a cir 
cular trough upon such bed-plate, divided by 
a partition into the two compartments 3 and 4; 
a suitable heating apparatus under the com 
partment 4 to heat the same; the wheel 6, 
journaled in a suitable pillow or support; 
means for revolving such wheel; the arms 7, 
secured in slots or apertures in the rim of the 
wheel 6, by means permitting such arms to be 
laterally adjusted, and such arms being pro 
vided with antifriction - wheels S at their 
free ends; the rigidly-fixed rail 14, and the 
rails 15 and 16 mounted on suitable supports 
adapting the same to vertical adjustment; a 
suitable friction covering, for the purposes 
specified, on such rail 16; a bead 21, extend 
ing along the interior of the outer wall of the 
troughs or compartments, and the rail 22 for 
cans to lean against, all substantially as set 
forth. 
2. In a soldering-machine in combination, 
the circular bed-plate rigidly mounted, a cir 
cular trough upon such bed-plate, divided by 
a partition into the two compartments 3 and 
4; a suitable heating apparatus under 1 he 
2C) 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US588909.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 588,909. 
 
G. H. HILG ARTNER, 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
1. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
 
Nipit 
He scrRS 
reas cc, photo-LITHO., WASHINGTON. d. 
(No Model.) 
G. H. HILG ARTNER, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
m 
No. 588,909. 
CICARETTE MACHINE, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
J%z72 esses: 
2227 
THE MORRIs Peters Co. Proto-LTHQ, washington, D.c. 
 
(No Model.) 
G. H. HILG ARTNER, 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 8. 
N0. 588,909. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
 
 
Y A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
S. Ele 2. S 
to  
WS 
& 
N 
G. H. HILG ARTNER, 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
S 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,909. 
I 
 
  
 
 
tie noRRs perERs co, poro-liro. washinGTON, D. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,909. 
G, H, HILG ARTNER, 
CIGARETTE MACHINE 
17. Sheets-Sheet 5, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
 
7%22 esses. 
33 re 
NC) 
Eicks Co. 
d 
WASHINGTON 
(No Model.) 
G. H., HILG ARTNER, 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
No. 588,909, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
Z/ 
4.2. 
P 
Z, %22 
36. 26-yaez. 
azzarreey, 
He. Norris Peters co, Photo-lirho...washington. P. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,999. 
G. H. HILG ARTNER. 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
Sheets-Sheet 7, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
SAR st S 
S 
N 
S N 
9 
I H. 
S. 
N S 
S. 
N n 
s. 
s 
N. 
w 
is 
as N 
s 
S sy 
N 
SES $ 
& N NIS 
Rn 
S. S. 
n 
S 
S. 
o 
s 
s 
O 
O 
--SS 
O 
-- 
-- as 
S. 
as: $3S : . 
sef- 
N1a Sq 
R & 
N 
s 
to 
S 
N. S. 
ra 
--- 
- 
s 
& 
SS 
N 
& 
Gy 
Q 
== 
se 
test 2. 
r (s " T 
S 
N 
-- 
e 
--- | S 
=e 
H 
GD. 
HIN 
"es 
- 
s 
d & 
N 
SN 
'N 
s 
SS 
S R- 
e 
s 
N 
RS 
w 
S. 
n S 
n 
cryo 
R 
t 
& 
an 
S. 
ra 
N (S 
(SS 
NS 
s 
m 
e. 
& 
f 
As 
 to 
o | 
Eas 
co-- 
s 
OS 
oNO). 
--- 
- -- 
r 
72%azzles ses. 
7, af. CS 
27 tree 5%. &zzzzey 
2-ye- 26. 
Zezer 
- Z22e22227 
This of RIS PETES c., Photo-liro. Washio, . , 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,909. 
 
G. H. HILG ARTNER. 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 8, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
Z72erezz27. 
3-eval -as 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,909. 
G. H. HIT G ARTNER, 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 9, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
() cy 
is 
S2- NZ 
)WN 
N 
 
WN 
S. 
S. 
 
71.6zees 3 es, 
 
Zrier 6, 
  
 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,909, 
 
G, H, HILG ARTNER. 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17. Sheets-Sheet ll, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
G. H. HILGARTNER, 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 12. 
No. 588,909, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
6 67 
2 
3 3  2 2 3 2 
s 2 7.2 8) 
79, 
60 
 
G. H., HILG ARTNER 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 13, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
- 
No. 588,909, 
 
 
 
 
 
Sys6 
  
 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,909. 
G. H., HILG ARTNER, 
GIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 15, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,909, 
 
 
  
 
 
G. H. HILGARTNER. 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 16, 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897. 
 
I 
| 
|| 
 
 
 
H 
(No Model.) 
No. 588,909 
 
G, H, HILG ARTNER, 
CIGARETTE MACHINE, 
17 Sheets-Sheet 17. 
Patented Aug. 24, 1897, 
762 
1- 
- 
763 
76/ -- 
764 
so 
WZZzzesses. 
Z7ze/e/2Z27; 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE H. HILGARTNER, OF RICHMOND, VIRGINIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO WILLIAM HENRY WALKER, OF SAME PLACE. 
CIGARETTE-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 588,909, dated August 24, 1897. 
Application filed March 25, 1896, Serial No, 584,869, (No model.) 
. 
s 
s 
O 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
i wrapper. Fig. 1 is a view showing the posi 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. HILGART 
tion of the parts while the ends of the ciga 
NER, a citizen of the United States, residing 
rette are being trimmed. Fig. 12 is a hori 
at Richmond, in the county of Henrico and 
Zontal section of the cigarette-rolling head, 
State of Virginia, have invented certain new 
showing the position of the plungers before 
and useful Improvements in Cigarette-Ma 
the said head has closed the pocket in the 
chines; and I do declare the following to be 
apron. Fig. 13 is a similar section of the 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
cigarette-rolling head, showing in dotted lines 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the final compression of the cigarette. Fig. 14 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
is a section of the parts mentioned after the 
use the same. 
plungers are released by the converging rails. 
My invention has relation to cigarette-ma 
Fig. 15 is a longitudinal section of the paste 
chines, and more particularly to that class 
receptacle and its bracket. Fig. 16 is an en 
wherein the filler is first picked and suitably 
larged detail view, partly in section, of the 
prepared, then slightly pressed and cut into 
main shaft and cam operating the cutting 
proper lengths and fed to the rolling-table, 
knife. Fig.17 is a side elevation, partly in sec 
and the paper cut into suitable lengths with tion, of the paper-roll, feeding, tension, past 
the requisite amount of paste applied to one 
ing, and shearing devices. Fig. 18 is a plan 
edge thereof, then wrapped around the filler 
view of the bracket supporting the paste-re 
So that its edges are united and the formed 
ceptacle. Fig. 19 is a side view of the shears 
cigarette delivered to the cutter, which trims 
and their operating mechanism. Fig. 20 is a 
its ends to the proper length and the finished 
top plan view of the Wrapper-conveying mech 
cigarette delivered to the packers, the opera 
anism. Fig. 21 is a side elevation of the same, 
tion from beginning to end being accom 
showing the paper-carrying jaws closed with 
plished automatically, as above described. 
the gummed wrapper between them. Fig. 22 
To these ends the novelty consists in the 
is a similar view showing the jaws open. Fig. 
construction, combination, and arrangement 
23 is an enlarged rear elevation of the wrap 
of the several parts coperating to this com 
per-conveying head. Fig. 24 is a detail of 
mon end, as will be hereinafter more fully 
the wrapper-conveying head, taken opposite 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
to and when the jaws are in the position 
shown in Fig. 16. Fig. 25 is a detail view of 
In the accompanying drawings the same 
the same, taken on opposite side of and when 
figures and letters of reference indicate the 
the jaws are in the position shown in Fig. 17. 
same parts of the invention. 
Fig. 26 is an enlarged plan view of the paper 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
feeding, tension, and pasting devices. Fig. 27 
of my improved cigarette-making machine, 
is a side elevation of the feed-rolls detached 
viewed from the left-hand side thereof. Fig. 
from the machine, and Fig. 28 is a section on 
2 is a similar view taken from the right-hand 
the line C C of Fig. 27. 
side. Fig. 3 is alongitudinal central sectional 
The construction of my invention may be 
elevation of the same. Fig. 4 is a top plan 
described as follows: 
view. Fig. 5 is a top plan view on the line AA 
The cast metal sides 2 and 3 and the bed 
of Fig. 7. 
Fig. 6 is a top plan view of the end 
plate 4 constitute the frame of the machine, 
less-chain carriage. Fig. 6 is a side view of 
the plate being firmly secured to the sides by 
the same. Fig. 7 is a rear end view of the ma 
bolts 5. A bracket 6 is adjustably secured 
chine. Fig. 8 is an enlarged detail view of the 
to the forward end of the bed-plate 4 by bolts 
cigarette-trimming device. Fig. 9 is another 
7, passing through slots 8 in said bracket, and 
view of the same, showing the finished ciga 
the forward end thereof is bifurcated, so as to 
rette in the act of being discharged upon the 
receive a roller 9. Starting at this point an 
endless carrying-chain. Fig. 10 is an enlarged 
endless belt 10, provided at suitable intervals 
5o sectional view showing the cigarette-rolling 
with divisional strips or cross-bars 12, passes 
head engaging the front end of the gummed 
obliquely upward over a small roller 13, 
claims. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
 
2 
588,909 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
t 
thence obliquely downward and forward over 
a roller 14, thence rearward along the bed 
plate 4, around a return-roller 15, thence for 
Ward between two feed-rollers 6 and 17 to 
the first roller 9. The journals of the roller 
16 are mounted in fixed bearings 18 in the de 
)ending brackets 19, bolted underneath the 
bed-plate 4, and the journals of the lower 
roller 17 are mounted in adjustable bearings 
20, sliding in guideways in said arms 19. 
These bearings:0 rest upon springs 21, which, 
through the medium of the roller 17, press 
the endless belt 10 against the roller 16, the 
tension of the spring being regulated by 
thumb-screws 22. A gear on the outside of 
the shaft of the roller 16 drives it in the direc 
tion of the arrow, and it will thus be seen that, 
a continuous motion in the direction indicated 
by the arrows is imparted to the endless 
belt, 10. 
Mounted in the upper part of the side pieces 
2 and 3, between them and above the endless 
belt 10, is a roller 23, driven by a sprocket 
wheel 23", connected by a sprocket-chain 23, 
driven by a sprocket-wheel on the shaft of 
the picket'-cylinder 31 on the outside of the 
frame, and back of Said roller is similarly 
mounted a smaller roller 24, and upon these 
rolle's 23 24 is secured an endless belt 25, 
continuously driven by the roller 23 in the 
direction of the arrows, and the lower face of 
the endless belt 25 is set at an angle or in 
cline with reference to the endless belt, 10, so 
that the discharge-opening between the roll 
el's 15 and 24 will be contracted or narrower 
than the receiving-point between the roller 
23 and the endless belt at the point imme 
diately beneath it. 
The prepared cut or loose tobacco is evenly 
spread in suitable quantities upon the end 
less belt 10 and between the dividing-strips 
12 at the forward end of the machine. The 
tobacco is then conveyed by said belt, 10 and 
discharged by gravity upon the picking-roller 
26, whence it is caught by the picker-teeth 
27 and carried under the solid pressure-roller 
2S, having a plain surface, around which it 
is prevented from being thrown off by the 
sheet-metal guard 29. The tobacco is then 
taken off of the picking-roller 26 by the teeth 
30 on the lower-picking roller 31, which is in 
a different plane with the teeth 27 on the cyl 
inder 26, and the points of the teeth 3) pro 
ject beyond the periphery of the teeth 27 and 
pick the tobacco off from said teeth 27, carry 
it around below the lower portion of the 
guard 29, and discharge it evenly upon the 
endless apron 10. The upper picking-roller 
26 revolves in a comparatively slow motion 
in the direction of the arrow, while the lower 
picker-l'Oller 31 revolves in the direction of 
the arrow much more rapidly, which effec 
tually picks or 'gins off the tobacco from 
the upper roller and discharges it evenly and 
regularly upon the endless belt, as above 
mentioned. The tobacco as thus received 
upon the endless belt J.0 is conveyed rear 
ward into the conveying-passage formed by 
the belts 10 and 25 and gradually compressed 
as it is carried back to the discharge-opening 
between the roller's 15 and 24, where it is dis 
charged upon the cutting-off shelf 32, where 
its end is stopped by and it is further com 
pressed against the face of the cutter-blade 
33. At a suitable moment the cutter-blade 
33 is raised and the tobacco then continues its 
movement rearward until Sufficient tobacco 
has been fed out Ward. At this moment the 
blade 33 descends, cuts off the charge into the 
pocket, 34, formed in the front end of the 
apron 35. This cutter-blade 33 is rigidly Se 
cured in the Outer ends 36 of two vertically 
reciprocating arms 37, located on each side 
of the base-plate 4 and between it and the 
inside of the sides 2 and 3, where they travel 
in two guide-brackets 38, adjustably secured 
to the inside of said sides 2 and 3 by bolts 
39, (shown in Fig. 16,) so that the arms 37, and 
thereby the blade 33, may be adjusted with 
reference to its cutting edge. The lower ends 
of these arms 37 are hinged upon a transverse 
rod 4(), which in turn is hinged by a pair of 
levers 41 to a rock-shaft 42, journaled in 
brackets 43, cast integral with the sides 2 and 
3. The levers 41 are rigidly secured to either 
end of the rock-shaft 42, and between them 
and at approximately a right angle thereto 
is rigidly secured a lever 44, to the upper end 
of which is connected one end of the forked 
connecting-rod 45, the forked end 46 of which 
encompasses the shaft 4S, and a cam 47 is 
rigidly secured upon and rotates with this 
main driving-shaft 4S, which is mounted in 
bearings 49 in the front end of the sides 2 
and 3. 
On the forked end 46 of the rod 45 and on 
one side thereof is journaled a friction-roller 
50, against which the face of the cam 47 
presses to raise the cutter-blade 33, and the 
roller 50 is held against the cam 47 in its re 
turn movement, which is the downward or 
cutting movement of the blade 33, by a spiral 
spring 51, one end of which is secured to the 
lever 41 and the other end to a bolt 52, Se 
cured at a suitable point on one of the sides 
2, and the tension of this spring is so adjusted 
that while it will readily cut off the required 
charge of tobacco the notion of the cutter 
blade will be arrested and injury to its edge 
prevented should small particles of metal, 
such as nails, tacks, or the like become ac 
cidently mixed in with the cut tobacco. 
The charge, being severed from the main 
body of the tobacco by the blade 33, falls by 
gravity into the pocket 34 of the apron 35. 
One end of this apron 35 is clamped longitu 
dinally in a divided rod 53, which is rigidly 
Sectared at its ends in the lower ends of a pair 
of arms 54, rigidly secured to and depending 
from an oscillating shaft 55, journaled in the 
sides 2 and 3, and similarly secured to said 
Shaft 55 is an upwardly-projecting lever 50, 
the free end of which is connected to a pit 
lman 57, the forked end of which engages a 
w 
90 
OO 
O 
I 25 
 
588,909 
8 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
cam 58, secured to the main shaft 4s. This 
pitman and its operating-cam are similar in 
construction to the forked rod 45 and cam 48 
above described, and consequently the de 
scription of the one will answer for the other. 
The forward end of the apron 35 being se 
cured to the divided rod 53, as before men 
tioned, the rod is now moved toward the ciga 
rette-rolling table, whereby sufficient slack is 
allowed to form the pocket 34. The apron 
then extends rearward, resting upon the ciga 
rette-rolling table, passing around the beveled 
end 60 thereof, and having its end seculed to 
the under side thereof by a clamp 61. 
When the cam 58 operates to carry the di 
vided rod 53 toward the cigarette-rolling ta 
ble, the cigarette-rolling. head 73 closes the 
pocket in the apron with the charge of tobacco 
in it, and as soon as the cigarette-rolling head 
73 enters on its journey on the cigarette-roll 
ing table the divided rod 53, to which one end 
of the apron is attached, is moved away from 
the table by its cam 58 a sufficient distance 
to draw the apron snugly around the charge 
of tobacco, which it encompasses within the 
cigarette-rolling head 73, and the further 
movement of the said cigarette-rolling head 
rolls the charge of tobacco over and over, 
ready to receive the Wrapper, as will be here 
inafter explained. 
The table 59 is adjustably secured to a 
bracket 62, so that its discharge end 60 will 
be slightly higher than its receiving end, (the 
drawings showing a somewhat exaggerated 
inclination,) whereby in the operation of 
forming the cigarette it is practically rolled 
uphill. The object of this is to retain the 
loose tobacco in the roll and prevent it from 
falling ahead of the roll by gravity and cov 
ering the paste end of the paper, thereby over 
coming a very serious objection in that class 
of machines using a segmental table. 
The bracket 62 is adjustably secured to 
lugs on the sides 2 and 3 by bolts 64", passing 
through vertical slots 65, and by means of this 
construction the table 59 may be raised or 
lowered at will. This bracket 62 is provided 
with an integral guide 66, upon which a roll 
ing-carriage 67 slides, the said carriage being 
reciprocated by a pitman 68, connected to a 
lever 69, the lower end of which is hinged to 
a shaft 70, secured between the sides 2 and 3, 
and this lever is provided with a friction, 
roller 71, which comes in contact with a suit 
ably-shaped cam 72, secured to the main shaft 
48, which operates the carriage as follows: 
The parts being in the position shown in Fig. 
2 and the charge of tobacco having fallen 
into the pocket in the apron, the cam 72 forces 
the carriage backward until its cigarette-roll 
ing head 73 is about midway the length of the 
table 59, where it stops for a brief interval, 
as will be hereinafter explained. It then con 
tinues its movement to the end 60 of the table, 
which is its limit in one direction. The cam 72 
then releases it, and a spring 74, secured at 
one end to the lever 69 and at the other to 
the frame, restores the carriage at one con 
tinuous movement to its first position. 
I will now proceed to describe the particu 
lar construction of the cigarette-rolling head 
73 of the carriage 67. 
Referring to Fig. 12, the cigarette-rolling 
head 73 is provided with an inverted semi 
circular recess 75, which is a trifle longer than 
the length of the cigarette, and at each end 
thereof in said cigarette -rolling head is a 
plunger 76, pressed outwardly by a spiral 
spring 77, so that when the roll of tobacco is 
in the recess in the first step of the process of 
forming the cigarette the outer ends of the 
plungers will come into contact with the bev 
eled ends 80 of the converging rails 79, force 
the plungers in Wardly, as shown in Fig. 13, 
and compress and hold the ends of the roll of 
tobacco solid both before and after it has been 
Wrapped. After the Wrapping and rolling op 
eration has been completed and just before 
the cigarette is about to leave the rolling-ta 
ble 59 the ends of the plungers 76 pass be 
yond the beveled ends 81 of the rails 79, leav 
ing the cigarette free to be discharged when 
the cigarette-rolling head of the carriage has 
arrived at the end 60 of the table. It will 
thus be seen that I preserve the roll cylin 
drical and compact both in its body and at 
its ends, thereby making a firm solid roll in 
the wrapper. 
After the cigarette has been finished as far 
as above described and it has been discharged 
from the end 60 of the table it falls by gravity 
into a longitudinal semicircular recess 82 in 
the solid cylinder 83, and this cylinder is the 
exact length of a finished cigarette, and it is 
adjustably secured on a shaft 84, journaled 
in arms 85 on a bracket S6, secured to bracket 
62 on the frame. One end of the shaft 84 is 
provided with a pinion 87 on the outside of 
the arm 85. Said cylinder 83 and pinion 87 
are oscillated one-half of a revolution by a 
rack 88, reciprocating in a guide 89, secured 
to the bracket 62, and the forward end of said . 
rack is connected to a cam 90 on the shaft 48 
by a pitman. 91, provided With a spring 92. 
The construction of said cam and pitman is 
the same as that described above for the cam 
47 and pitman 45. The cylinder 83 is adjust 
ably secured on its shaft 84 by a set-screw, 
(not shown,) and its periphery may be pro 
vided with a series of semicircular recesses 
82' of different sizes to correspond to the di 
ameter of different-sized cigarettes. 
Mounted upon the shaft 93 and driven by 
a small pulley 94 and belt 95 from a larger 
pulley on the main shaft 48 is a pair of cut 
ter-disks 96, revolving in the direction of the 
arrows, and they are so adjusted that their 
peripheral cutting edges overlap the recess 
82 and barely clear the ends of the cylinder 
83, and at the same moment the cigarette is 
dropped into the recess 82 the rack 88 is op 
erated by its calm 90 to semirotate the cylin 
der 83, which carries recess 82 containing the 
cigarette, around, when its ends come in con 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
I I5 
4. 
588,909 
75 
tact with the rapidly-revolving disks 96, which 
trim off the ends of the cigarette to a uniform 
and finished length, and the further rotation 
of the cylinder carries the recess 82 around 
and down into the position shown in dotted 
lines in Fig. 2. Here it drops by gravity upon 
an endless chain 97, traveling in a frame 101, 
secured to the bracket 86 and extending lat 
erally at a right angle to the machine proper, 
in which it is driven by a sprocket-wheel 98 
on a shaft 99, provided with an angle-gear 
100, meshing with an intermediate gearing 
means driven by a bevel-gear on the main 
shaft 48. 
Referring to Fig. 6, it will be seem that the 
shaft 99 extends through the frame 101, and 
its end is provided with a gear-wheel 102, 
which meshes with an idler 103, which rotates 
a pinion 104, secured to a roller 105 by a screw 
106, so that the roller and attached pinion re 
volve freely in the frame 101. This descrip 
tion will answer for the series of rolls 105, 
which are driven in the same direction by the 
idlers 103 placed between them. It will be 
seen by reference to Fig. 6 that these rollers 
105 each have a semicircular groove 107 in its 
periphery, so that after the finished cigarette 
is carried by the endless chain over the 
sprocket-wheel 98, at which point the chain 
returns, the cigarette is carried along and de 
livered to the rollers 105, it falling into the 
grooves 107. The cigarette is then carried 
forward until its further motion is arrested 
by its end coming in contact with the arm 108 
on the frame 101. Immediately below these 
rollers 105 and at a right angle thereto is a 
second carrying-frame 109, which extends up 
Wardly and terminates at a point near the 
front end of the machine and within conven 
ient reach of the operator engaged in feeding 
the machine. This frame 109 supports an 
endless traveling belt 110, passing around 
friction-rollers 112 and 113, located in either 
end of said frame, and it is driven by one of 
said rollers and is provided on its face at suit 
able intervals with fingers or pins 114, which 
arise and pass between the rollers 105, engage 
the cigarette, and carryit along with them up 
the incline, when the cigarette is dropped in 
a box or receptacle placed there to receive it. 
The object of conveying the finished ciga 
rette to this point is to allow the filled recep 
tacle to be removed and an empty one sub 
stituted by the operator attending the ma 
chine, thus economizing the time of the at 
tendant and requiring the services of only 
one person to each machine, a very impor 
tant saving in time, labor, and expense in op 
erating the machine. 
Secured by bolts 115 to the rear end of the 
sides 2 and 3, near their tops, is a brace 116, 
the face of which is provided with an integral 
dovetail guide 117, upon which slides trans 
versely a carriage 118, and this carriage is 
provided with a vertical integral dovetail 
guide 119, upon which slides a carrier-head 
120, and a gib 121 in the guideway of the head 
120 is adjusted by the set-screws 122, by 
means of which the head may be set the proper 
height, as will be explained hereinafter. 
Alongitudinal slot 123 in the brace 116 per 
mits the passage of a stud-bolt 124, to the 
outer end of which is connected a pitman 125, 
passing through a circular opening 126 and 
having its free end connected to a cam-lever 
127, pivoted to the frame at 128 and having 
a friction-roller 129 mounted thereon, which 
comes in contact with the face of a cam 30 
on the shaft 99, which is operated by bevel 
gears from the main shaft 48, as above ex 
plained. 
Rigidly secured to the carriage-head 120 by 
screws is one arm 131 of the paper-carrying 
pincers, the free arm 132 of which is pivoted 
to the former by a bolt 133, its arm extend 
ing upwardly above the carriage, where it 
is bifurcated to receive a friction-roller 134. 
Secured to one side of the movable arm 132 
is a rigid detent 135, V-shaped on its under 
side, which engages with a similarly-shaped 
detent 136, secured to the free end of a lever 
137, pivoted to a lug 138 on the front face of 
the carrier-head 120 by a bolt 139, and the 
contacting V faces are held together by a leaf 
spring 140, the free end of which presses 
against the bottom of the lever 137, the other 
end being secured to a screw-stud 141 on the 
face of the head 120, the tension of said 
spring being regulated by a thumb-screw 142, 
passing through a lug 143, integral with the 
face of the head 120. 
The lower end of the rigid pincers-arm 131 
extends below the carrier-head 120 and ter 
minates in a stationary lower jaw 144, while 
the movable arm 132, which is pivoted to the 
former by the bolt 133, also extends down 
ward and terminates in a finger 145, between 
which the end 146 of the paper-roll 147 passes. 
This movable finger 145 is operated to clamp, 
carry, and release the paper as follows: Upon 
the brace 116 are secured two upright brack 
ets 148, in which is journaled a rock-shaft 149, 
and upon this shaft at one end of the stroke 
of the head 120 and at a point in the same 
plane is secured an arm 150, the inclined face 
of which projects above and over the periph 
ery of the friction-roller 134 on the upper end 
of the movable arm l32. If now the rock 
shaft 149 be oscillated to press the inclined 
face of the arm 150 against the friction-roller 
134, the arm 132 will be thrown outward, 
which raises the finger 145 from contact with 
the jaw 144 at the same time the V-shaped 
face of the detent 135 presses against the 
near side of the V-shaped detent 136, forcing 
the lever 137 downward against the action of 
the spring 140 until the point of the detent 
135 has passed the point of the detent 136. 
The spring then forces the arm 137 up, there 
by throwing the arm 132 to its limit and rais 
ing the finger 145 to its full extent. In this 
condition the head is moved back to the other 
end of its stroke, where the friction-roller 134 
then lies in the same plane with the beveled 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
go 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
588,909 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
face of a depending lever 151, supported on 
the frame, and this lever 151 is connected to 
a lever 152 by a pitman 153 on the rock-shaft 
149, and at this point the shaft 149 is turned 
to press the beveled face of the lever 151. 
against the opposite side of the roller 134, so 
as to force the arm 132 inward. This motion 
throws the detent 135 on the opposite side of 
the detent 136 on the lever 137, which closes 
the finger 145 on the jaw 144 and retains them 
in a closed position. 
The roll of paper 147 is provided with a hol 
low cylindrical core 154, which is centered 
and mounted upon a series of screws 155, 
tapped in and radially adjustable on the solid 
cylinder 156, and each screw is provided with 
a milled collar 157 for convenience of adjust 
ment, by means of which the reel of paper 
may be centered to run true on the cylin 
der 156, which is mounted on a shaft 158, 
journaled so as to run freely in a standard 
159, mounted on a shelf 185'. The end of the 
strip of paper passes over a roller 160 on one 
side of the standard 159 and then in a straight 
line in the direction of the feed-rollers 161 
and 162 and under the paste-roller 176, thence 
passing between the jaw 144 and finger 145. 
The feed-roller 161 is positively driven by a 
pinion 1628. on its shaft 163, which meshes 
With a similar pinion 164 on the shaft 165, 
which carries the lower feed-roller 162. The 
shaft 163 is journaled in a sleeve 166, which 
is adjustably held in place in the standard 
167 by a set-screw 168, and the bearing for 
the shaft 163 in the sleeve 166 is eccentric 
With the periphery of the said sleeve, so that 
the upper roller may be adjusted with refer 
ence to the lower roller 162, as shown in 
Fig. 28. 
A shaft 169, mounted in brackets 170 on 
center studs 171, carries two rigid arms 172, 
provided at their free ends with center screws 
173, between which is mounted a shaft 174, 
provided with a pulley 175 and the paste 
wheel 176, which is provided with a circum 
ferential flange 191. A pair of arms 177 and 
178 are likewise secured to the shaft 169 and 
extend in the opposite direction to those first 
mentioned, and the extremity of the arm 177 
is provided with a pressure pad or finger 179 
and at a proper interval will press the paper 
147 against the bed-plate and hold it there 
temporarily for the purpose to be hereinafter 
mentioned. 
The end of the other arm 17S is provided 
with a friction-roller 180, which comes in con 
tact with and is operated by the calm 181 on 
the lower feed-roller shaft 165, so that one 
portion of the periphery of said cam will op 
erate the arm 17S to raise or release the pres 
sure-finger 179 from contact with the paper 
147 and at the same time throw the wheel 176 
and its flange 191, which carries the paste, 
downward upon and in contact with the edge 
of the strip of paper, while another portion 
of the periphery of said cam presses the finger 
179 down upon the paper, holding it tempo 
rarily and at the same time raising the paste 
wheel from contact with the paper. . 
Immediately above the paste - wheel is 
mounted a paste-reservoir 182, secured by 
lugs 183 upon a yoke 184, which in turn is se 
cured to the paper-carrying bed 185. The 
upper face of this yoke 184 is provided with 
a dovetail recess l86, in which is adjustably 
secured a slide 187, operated by a milled head 
screw 1S8 in a lug 189, cast on the yoke 184, 
and the bottom of the reservoir 182 is pro 
vided with a slot 190, into which the flanged 
periphery 191 of the paste-wheel 176 projects 
to receive its paste, and the amount of paste 
Withdrawn by the flange can be regulated ex 
actly by the adjustable slide 187, the paste in 
the reservoir 182 being of such a consistency 
that it will not run out during the slight down 
Ward movement of the paste-wheel. The arm 
178 of the pasting device is operated by the 
Cam 181, as above mentioned, and it is held 
in contact with and caused to follow the mo 
tion of the face of said cam by a spiral spring 
192, one end of which is secured to said arm 
and the other to a suitable point on the frame. 
The feed-rollers 161 and 162 have a portion 
161' and 162' cut away, so that when the paste 
roller 176 is up and the finger 179 down any 
buckling of the strip of paper 147 is pre 
vented, as would be the case if the paper were 
continuously fed while the finger 179 was 
down upon the strip of paper, and the motion 
of the cam 181 of course is so timed that when 
the finger is down the cut-away portions 161'. 
and 162' will be opposite to and parallel with 
each other, leaving the paper free. 
The pulley 175 on the paste-wheel driving 
shaft 174 is driven by a small belt 193, run 
ning over a larger pulley on the main driving 
shaft 48, and the pinion 164 on the lower feed 
roller 162 receives its motion from a wheel 
194, operated through the medium of a series 
of idlers 195, driven by a gear 196 on shaft 
99, as shown in Fig. 17. 
Upon the shelf 185' is secured a knee 197, 
adjustable thereon by means of the slot 198 
and set-screw 199, and to it is fastened the 
lower rigid blade 200 of a pair of shears by 
screws C, a, the upper movable blade 201 be 
ing pivoted to the former on a rivet b in the 
usual manner, and a C-shaped flat spring 202, 
having its ends secured to studs 2)3, serves 
to hold the movable blade down upon the lat 
ter except when raised as follows: As shown 
in Fig. 19, the upper or movable blade 201 is 
provided with an inclined surface 204, located 
on its under side. Located between its cut 
ting edge and the pivot connecting it to its 
mate and in line With this inclined surface 
204 is a friction-roller 205, mounted on the 
free end of a rocking lever 206, pivoted to a 
bracket on the frame at 207. To this lever 
206 is connected a pitman 208, provided with 
a roller 209 on one side thereof, which is op 
erated by a cam 210 on the shaft 211, having 
a pinion 212, driven through the medium of 
i idlers from a gear-wheel on the main driving 
- 
7 O 
75 
95 
Ico 
I Io 
IIS 
I 25 
. 
588,909 
7 O 
75 
So 
95 
do 
O 
I I5 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
shaft, 4S, and the operation of said cam 210 is 
such that when the finger 145 has closed to 
grasp the paper 147 the cam then operates 
the shears to sever the piece of paper the size 
of a cigarette-wrapper at a point between the 
pincers-finger and the paste-wheel. The car 
riage-head is then operated to carry the de 
tached paper wrapper over and lay it on the 
rolling-table, where it is held until the apron 
carrying the roll of tobacco engages it. 
The operation of the machine is as follows: 
Power being applied to the main driving 
shaft 4S, the attendant feeds the prepared to 
bacco to the feed-belt 10, allowing a certain 
predetermined amount to each space between 
the strips 12. The loose tobacco is conveyed 
to the picking-roller 26, being loosely packed 
thereon by the solid-pressure roller 28. It is 
then taken off the picking-roiler 26 by the 
teeth on the picking-roller 31, when it is dis 
charged by gravity on the belt 10 at a point 
immediately below said roller 31. The belt 10 
carries it under the conveying-belt 25. lightly 
compressing it as it is carried forward and 
pushed over the shelf 32. The end of the to 
bacco is forced against the cutter-blade 33 to 
further slightly compress it in the direction 
of its travel. The cutter is then raised, a Suf 
ficient charge is fed out by the feed-belt 10 
and compacting-belt 25, the blade descends, 
and the charge is severed from the main body 
of the tobacco, and the said charge falls into 
the pocket 34 in the apron 35. The cigarette 
rolling head 73 is then forced rearward to 
close the pocket, and as its motion continues 
the charge is enveloped by the apron and the 
charge, with the apron surrounding it, forced 
into the rolling-recess 75 in the head 73. As 
Soon as the cigarette-rolling head 73 has en 
tered upon is journey along the cigarette 
rolling table the levers 5-4, carrying the shaft 
53, to which is secured the front end of the 
apron, are pressed forward, which takes up 
all the slack in the apron between the ciga 
rette-rolling head 73 and the shaft. 53. While 
this operation is going on, the shears have 
severed a piece of paper from the roll, with 
the paste on one edge of it, and it is caught 
by the finger 145 and jaw 1-44, and the carrier 
120 carries it over and deposits it on the apron 
35 about midway of its length on the cigarette 
rolling table 59 with its free ungummed end to 
Ward the roll of tobacco in the cigarette-rolling 
head 73. The finger 145 holds it in this posi 
tion until the cigarette-rolling head has en 
gaged the Wrapper and partially wrapped it 
around the roll of tobacco. At this moment 
the finger 145 releases the wrapper and the 
carrier 120 returns to its normal position, when 
a fresh section of gummed paper is fed be 
tween its jaws, which are then closed and the 
shears operated to sever the wrapper from the 
Strip, and is ready to begin its trip over the 
cigarette-rolling table, as before described. 
While this operation is going on, the cigar 
ette-rolling head 73 resumes its journey along 
the cigarette-rolling table 59, which causes 
the Wrappel' to completely envelop the roll of 
tobacco and press the meeting edge of the 
wrapper firmly down on the gummed edge 
thereof. The cigarette is then rolled over 
two or three times until it arrives at the end 
60 of the cigarette-rolling table, where it falls 
over and into the recess S2 in the roller S3, 
which is then oscillated by the rack SS, which 
carries the cigarette between the revolving 
cutters 96, which trim off the ends of the cigar 
ette to the proper length. The finished and 
complete cigarette then falls upon the endless 
chain belt 95, whence it is carried to the rollers 
105, from which it is taken off by the pins 114 
on the belt 110 and by it conveyed to a point 
within reach of the attendant, where it drops 
into a receptacle, which as soon as filled is 
removed and an empty one replaced by the 
attendant, as above described. 
While I have described the means of car 
rying out my invention, it will be understood 
that various mechanical modifications may be 
made without departing from the spirit of the 
invention. 
IIaving thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A machine for making cigarettes, com 
prising an endless feed-belt, a series of pick 
ing-rollers located in the path of said belt, an 
endless compacting-belt located at an incli 
nation above said feed-belt, a cutter-blade 
crossing the path of the tobacco, which abuts 
against said blade while it is being pressed 
by the feed and compacting belts, a pair of 
vertically - reciprocating arms carrying said 
cutter-blade and mounted in guide-brackets 
secured to the bed-plate, a transverse rod con 
necting the lower ends of said arms, a pair of 
levers having their free ends hinged to said 
transverse rod, and fulcrumed on a rock-shaft, 
a vertical ever likewise fulcrumed on said 
shaft, a connecting-rod, one end of which is 
pivoted to the free end of said vertical level 
and having a friction-roller secured to one 
side of its opposite forked end, and a can 
fixed on a driving-shaft and adapted to en 
gage said forked end to impart an intermit 
tent vertical reciprocating movement to said 
cutter-blade, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. A machine for making cigarettes, com 
prising an endless feed-belt, an endless com 
pacting-belt located at an inclination above 
said feed-belt, a series of picking-rollers lo 
cated in the path of the feed-belt, a cutter 
blade crossing the path of the tobacco, which 
abuts against said blade while it is being 
pressed by the feed and compacting belts, and 
means substantially as described for operat 
ing the same, in combination with a cigarette 
rolling table, a rod mounted in the lower ends 
of a pair of oscillating levers fulcrumed in the 
frame of the machine, a roller-apron, one end 
of which is secured to said table and the other 
to the rod, a reciprocating carriage, a lever 
fulcrumed in the frame, a connecting-rod con 
588,909 
. 
IO 
(5 
20 
25 
45 
SO 
55 
necting the free end of said level with said 
carriage, a cam mounted on the driving-shaft 
and in operative contact with said lever, the 
cigarette-rolling head of said carriage being 
formed with a recess adapted to engage a 
pocket in said roller - apron containing a 
charge of tobacco, and form the same into a 
roll during its passage across the cigarette 
rolling table, as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. A machine for making cigarettes, com 
prising a cigarette-rolling table, a pair of os 
cillating levers, a rod mounted in said levers, 
a rolling-apron connected at one end to the 
cigarette-rolling table and the other end to 
the rod, a reciprocating carriage having a cig 
arette-rolling head formed with a recess, plun 
gers, a retractile spring located at each end 
of said recess in said head, and a pair of sta 
tionary converging rails located in the path 
of said head, as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a cigarette-making machine, the com 
bination with the conveying-cylinder, the ro 
tating cutters and the conveyer-belt located 
in a frame immediately below said cylinder, 
a series of circumferentially-grooved feed 
rollers journaled in said frame, and an arm 
against which one end of the finished cigarette 
abuts, of an upwardly-inclined elevator-belt 
provided with fingers adapted to take the fin 
ished cigarette from the feed-rollers, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
5. In a cigarette-making machine, the cig 
arette forming and rolling devices substan 
tially as described, in combination with a pair 
of continuously-operated feed-rollers, having 
oppositely-arranged cut-away portions, an in 
termittently-operated paste-wheel, adapted 
to travel to and from the paper, a traveling 
carriage having a stationary jaw and a mov 
able finger adapted to clamp the paper against 
said jaw, and a paper-cutting device located 
between the paste-wheel and the clamping 
finger, and adapted to sever a section of the 
pasted paper, as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a cigarette-machine, the endless feed 
belt provided with cross-strips, the stationary 
rollers and the adjustable tension-roller upon 
which said feed-belt is mounted, in combina 
tion with the compacting-belt mounted on 
rollers at an inclination to said endless feed 
belt, the picking-rollers located in the path 
of the feed-belt, the cutter-blade crossing the 
path of the tobacco which abuts against said 
blade while it is being fed forward, the ver 
tical reciprocating arms on which said blade 
is mounted, the driving-shaft and the cam 
mounted on said driving-shaft and adapted 
to intermittently operate said arms and cut 
ter-blade, as and for the purpose set forth. 
7. In a cigarette-making machine, a ciga 
rette-forming device, consisting of the rolling 
table 59, the apron 35, the oscillating arms 54, 
the rod 53 mounted in said arms, in combina 
tion with the carriage 67, the cigarette-roll 
ing head 73, formed with a recess 75, spring 
actuated plungers located in said cigarette 
P 
w 
rolling head at each end of said recess, and a 
pair of inwardly-converging rails located in 
the path of said plungers, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
S. In a cigarette-machine having cigarette 
rolling, wrapping and trimming devices, sub 
stantially as described, the combination with 
the frame 101 extending at a right angle to 
the delivery end of the machine proper, the 
endless chain 97 mounted in said frame, the 
series of grooved rollers 105 journaled in the 
outer end of said frame, the inclined frame 
109 located at a right angle to the frame 101 
and extending upwardly and forwardly to a 
point within reach of the attendant at the 
front of the machine, the endless belt 110 pro 
vided with a series of fingers 114 and mounted 
in said inclined frame 109, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
9. In a cigarette-making machine having a 
cigarette rolling and wrapping device sub 
stantially as described, the combination with 
a pair of continuously-operated paper-feed 
rollers having cut-away portions, the shaft 
169, the arm.172, the paste-wheel 191 mounted 
in said arm, the pressure-finger 179 and arm 
178 mounted on said shaft, a cam mounted 
on the shaft of one of said paper-feed rollers 
and adapted to cause the paste-wheel and 
pressure-finger to alternately travel to and 
from the paper, of the traveling carriage 120, 
the stationary jaw 144 and pivoted finger 145 
mounted on said carriage, the lever 127, and 
the pitman 125 connecting said carriage and 
lever, the calm 130, and the shaft 99 on which 
said cam is mounted, and means substantially 
as described for operating the same, as set 
10. In a cigarette-making machine compris 
ing the pair of continuously-operated feed 
rollers, the paste-receptacle having an open 
ing in its bottom, the arm 172, the paste-roller 
191 mounted in said arm and adapted to 
travel from the opening in the bottom of the 
paste-receptacle to the paper on the bed of 
the machine, the arm 178 and the pressure 
finger 179, the shaft 169 on which said arms 
and pressure-finger are mounted, a pair of 
feed-rollers having cut-away portions, the 
calm 181 mounted on the shaft of one of said 
feed-rollers, the stationary shear-blade 200, 
the blade 201 pivoted thereto, and the Spring 
202 connecting said blades, in combination 
with the lever 206, the roller 205 mounted in 
said lever, the pitman 208 connected to said 
lever, a counter-shaft and a cam mounted on 
said counter-shaft and adapted to operate the 
pivoted blade through the medium of said pit 
man and lever, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
forth. 
- 
- 
GEORGE H. EIILGARTNER. 
Witnesses: 
A. B. SUIT, 
SAML. A. DRURY. 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589009.txt	(No Model.) 
J. H. MARTINDALE. 
FRUIT PICKER, 
- 
s 
No. 589,009. 
Patented Aug. 31, 1897. 
1222-22 
(12272122 
 
 
the Norris PETERS co, Photo-LTHo. washington. p. c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN II. MARTINDALE, OF 
RUSSELL, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FRUIT-PICKER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,009, dated August 31, 1897. 
Application filed September 15, 1896, Serial No, 605,942, (No model.) 
To ald Luhon, it Inazy concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN H. MARTINDALE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Russell, Warren county, Pennsylvania, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Fruit-Pickers, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
a fruit-picker which will be very cheap' and 
durable in construction, effective in use, and 
which will offer the least possibility of inter 
ference with the limbs of the tree and conse 
quent interruption of the picking operation 
While in use. 
A further object is to make the parts which 
constitute the grip relatively adjustable, so 
as to adapt the implement for use in picking. 
different sizes and kinds of fruit. 
My invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures of construction, which will be herein 
after fully described, and particularly pointed 
out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of the implement in use, 
illustrating the manner of approaching the 
fruit to grip it; and Fig. 2 is a similar view 
illustrating the manner in which the fruit is 
gripped, so that it may be pulled off and al 
lowed to fall in the collecting-tube. 
Fig. 3 
is a side elevation of the pair of gripping 
rings, one of which supports the collecting 
tube, while the other is adjustable relatively 
to it. 
1 represents the staff or handle, and 2 the 
collecting-bag, which may be constructed and 
manipulated in the manner well known. 
Upon the upper end of the staff I is mounted 
the gripping or plucking head 3, constructed 
of two rings arranged one above the other in 
an approximately tangential relation and va 
rying in diameter in about the proportion of 
one to three. The lower or larger ring 4 sup 
ports the collecting-tube 2 in proper position 
to receive the fruit when it drops, and the 
upper ring 5 is held in such relation to the 
lower ring that when the implement is passed 
up beneath the fruit, substantially as shown 
in Fig. 1, and then moved sidewise the stem 
will pass into the narrow neck G on either 
side of the ring 5, when the fruit will be 
firmly gripped and can be pulled from the 
tree and permitted to drop into the collect 
- 
ing-tube. As it, drops the fruit is arrested, 
as shown in Fig. 2, by the hand of the oper 
ator, who holds the tube to the staff, or in 
Some equivalent manner, as shown at A, and 
after its fall has been arrested it passes into 
the lower portion of the tube upon releasing 
the hand A and there remains until sufficient 
fruit has been collected, after which it may 
be deposited in the usual manner by releas 
ing the hand B. 
A special advantage arises in the use of 
the ring 5, in addition to its gripping effect, 
in that it offers no projections or forks or 
other means for the admission of the limbs 
or twigs and consequent hindering of the 
work of picking. Moreover, the shape of the 
grip formed by the two rings is such as to 
permit the implement being passed up close 
to a limb for gripping the fruit, the opening 
between the gripping-rings being a lateral 
one and there being one such grip on either 
side. 
A further advantage arises from the fact 
that the fruit is always in sight until it is 
finally pulled from the tree, and this adds 
greatly to the ease in manipulation. 
To provide an effective and simple means 
for connecting the two rings, for making them 
relatively adjustable, and for mounting them 
upon the pole, the ends of the wire or rod of 
which they are formed are wound spirally 
upon suitable mandrels, so as to form shanks 
projecting tangentially from the rings. 
By 
making the shanks of the proper size one fits 
within the other and the spiral form of their 
shanks adapts them to screw one within the 
other, so as to be not only effectively con 
nected together and held in the proper rela 
tion, but to be adjustably connected. This 
same construction also adapts the smaller 
shank to be screwed upon the end of the shaft 
as a means of attachment thereto. The rings 
are preferably bent at about the angle shown 
with relation to their shanks, so that the user 
may hold the gripping-head in an approxi- . 
mately horizontal position while standing off 
from beneath the picking-point, so that the 
fruit remains in sight 
at all times until 
dropped. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Tetters Patent; 
w 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
589,009 
IO 
1. A fruit-picker, comprising a suitable at 
taching-shank and two rings projecting at an 
angle from the shank, and one above the other, 
So as to leave a space between then in which 
the stems may enter and permit the fruit to 
be engaged by the rings, substantially as ex 
plained. 
2. A fruit-picker, comprising an attaching 
shank and two rings of different diameters 
projecting at an angle from said shank, and 
With the smaller placed above the larger, a 
distance suitable to permit the stems to pass 
between them, and the gripping of the fruit 
to take place adjacent to the shank as ex 
plained. 
3. A fruit-picker comprising two rings pro 
jecting at an angle from a suitable shank 
which holds them tangential to the line of said 
shank and relatively adjustable in said line; 
the upper ring being of sufficiently smaller 
diameter than the lower to permit the fruit 
 
to pass between their peripheries on the side 
away from the shank, the said rings being 
spaced apart a distance suitable to permit the 
passage of the stems between them, or to cause 
them to grip the fruit adjacent to the shank, 
as explained. 
4. A fruit-picker, comprising two rings, 
each having a shank projecting from its pe 
riphery in substantially the manner shown, 
said shanks being made to screw one within 
the other to render the rings relatively ad 
justable, as herein explained. 
5. In a fruit-picker, a grip comprising two 
rings formed of rod or wire having the ends 
Wound spirally to form attaching-shanks, 
which shanks are made to fit one within the 
other as explained. 
JOIN II. MARTINDALE. 
Witnesses: 
II. S. KNIGHT, 
LE BLOND BURDETT. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589109.txt	(No Model.) 
 
 
 
A. O. WYMAN. 
TROLLEY, 
Patented Aug. 31, 1897. 
2 3. 3N 
SIAW 
f222 S 
S 
S 
 
 
/97 
(AWWEWTOR 
(22.2, ATTORNEYS. 
 
- NORRS PETERS Co. PHOTo-LTHo, washingro, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT OREN WYMAN, OF TURNER'S FALLs, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR 
OF ONE-HALF TO JAMES A. GUNN, OF SAME PLACE. 
TROLLEY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,109, dated August 31, 1897. 
Application filed April 20, 1897, Serial No. 633,047, (No model.) 
O 
To all, w/on it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERTOREN WYMAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Turner's Falls, in the county of Franklin and 
5 State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Trolleys, of 
which the following is a full and complete 
specification, such as will enable those skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
This invention relates to trolley-arms for 
trolley-cars; and the object thereof is to pro 
vide an improved device of this class which 
is adapted to be raised and lowered by pull 
ing on the usual trolley cord or rope and 
which is also pivotally connected with the top 
of a car and adapted to move laterally thereon, 
this movement being also effected by means 
of the trolley cord or rope. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the foll 
lowing specification, of which the accompa 
nying drawings form a part, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved trol 
ley-support and showing a portion of the top 
of the car with which the same is connected, 
and Fig. 2 an end view of a part thereof, part 
of the construction being shown in section. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication the separate parts of my improve 
ment are designated by the same numerals of 
reference in each of the views, and in said 
drawings I have shown at 5part of the top of an 
ordinary trolley-car, and in the practice of my 
invention Isecure thereto, centrally thereof, 
standards 6, in which is pivoted a main or base 
frame which consists of side bars 7 and end 
bars 8. 
The end bars S of the main frame are pro 
vided with trunnions 9, which pass through 
the keepers 6, and said frame is thus pivotally 
supported at the center thereof, and said 
frame is provided at each side and each end 
thereof with bearings 10, in each of which is 
mounted a shaft 11, and each of these shafts 
11 is provided with a crank 12, one of which 
is directed downwardly and the other up 
wardly, as shown in Fig. 1, and these cranks 
12 are connected by a crank-rod 13, and Se 
cured to one side of each of the end bars 7 of 
- 
35 
45 
 
55 
the main frame is a strong curved spring 14, 5o 
the ends of which bear on the top of the car, 
as shown at 15, and one of the trunnions 9, by 
which the main frame is supported, is pro 
vided With a segmental gear-head 16, and piv 
otally connected with the top of the car at 17 
is a lever 18, which is provided with a similar 
segmental gear-head 19, which is adapted to 
operate in connection with the segmental 
gear-head 16, and the lever 18 is provided at . 
its free end with a ring or eye 20. 
The shafts 11, which are mounted in the 
bearings 10 of the main frame, are each pro 
vided with upwardly-directed arms 21, and the 
arms 21 of each of the shafts 11 are provided 
at their upper ends with circular heads 22, 
through which is passed a bolt 23, and mount 
ed between said heads 22 is a short tubular 
head 24, through which the bolt 23 also passes, 
and the tubular head 24 is provided on its up 
per side with an upwardly-directed tubular 
extension 25, in which is secured a supple 
mental arm 26, and wound on the bolt 23, 
Within the tubular head 24, is a strong spiral 
spring 27, the ends of which are passed 
through or connected with the heads 22, as 
shown at 28, and the central portion of which 
is connected with the inner end of the sup 
plemental arm 26 or with said tubular head 24. 
The supplemental arms 26 are pivotally 
connected at their upper ends with a cross 
head 29, in which is mounted a trolley-wheel 
30, and said head 29 is provided with a yoke 
31, which is pivotally connected therewith, 
and pivotally connected with said yoke and 
suspended therefrom is a knob 32, with which 
is connected the trolley cord or rope 33. 
Secured centrally of the top of the car and 
centrally of the main frame of the device 
and projecting upwardly therethrough is a 
standard 34, and supported in the upper end 
thereof is a pulley 35, and the trolley cord 
or rope 33 is passed beneath or around said 
pulley and outwardly between two of the 
side arms 21 at one end of the main frame 
and through the eye or ling 20 at the end of 
the lever 18, and the operation will be readily 
understood from the foregoing description 
when taken in connection with the accom 
75 
589,109 
panying drawings and the following state 
ment thereof: 
By pulling on the free end of the trolley 
cord or rope 33, which in practice hangs over 
5 the end of the car, the trolley-wheel 30 may 
be depressed, and in this operation the up 
per ends of the arms 21 at each side of the 
main or base frame and the lower ends of 
the supplemental arms 26 bend outwardly at 
Io their pivotal connection, and said arms 21 
also turn outwardly on their pivotal connec 
tion with the main or base frame, and When 
the trolley cord or rope is released the springs 
27 will operate to return the main and sup 
I5 plemental arms 21 and 26 to the position 
shown in Fig. 1, so as to raise the trolley 
wheel 30 to its highest position. It will also 
be apparent that the trolley-wheel may be 
depressed by pressure thereon or on the 
2O cross-head 29, by which it is supported, and 
this operation is such that the trolley-wheel 
is always supported in the desired position 
by means of the springs 27, and the crank 
rod 13 and cranks 12 operate to cause the 
25 supplemental arms 21 at each end of the 
main or base frame of the device to operate 
together or simultaneously under all circum 
stances. It will also be apparent that by 
pulling laterally or toward either side on the 
3o end of the cord or rope 23 the lever 18 may 
be operated so as to turn the entire trolley 
support, consisting of the main or base frame 
and the arms 21 and 20, to one side, the direc 
tion of the movement of these parts depend 
35 ing on the direction in which the lever 18 is 
turned, this operation being accomplished by 
means of the gear-heads 16 and 19, and the 
springs 14, which are connected with the 
ends of the main or base frame, scrve to re 
4o tain said frame and the arms 21 and 26 in 
their normal position and to return the same 
to their normal position when they have been 
moved laterally, as above described. 
This device is simple in construction and 
45 operation, and by means thereof the trolley 
Wheel may be manipulated as desired, and 
said device is adapted to serve under all con 
ditions and may be connected with any 
trolley-car as now constructed, and it will be 
5o apparent that changes in and modifications 
of the construction herein described may be 
made without departing from the spirit of 
my invention or sacrificing its advantages. 
IIaving fully described my invention, I 
55 claim as new and desire to secure by Tetters 
Patent 
1. A support for the trolley-wheel of trolley 
cars consisting of a frame which is pivotally 
supported longitudinally thereof on the top 
6o of a car, said frame being provided at each 
end with springs which bear on the top of the 
car, and with shafts which are mounted trans 
versely thereof, said shafts being provided at 
One end with cranks which are connected by 
65 a crank-rod, and said shafts being also pro 
Vided with upwardly-directed main arms 
 
75 
which connect at their upper ends With a till 
bular cross-head, and provided with a shaft 
which passes therethrough, said tubular croSS 
heads being also provided each. With an up 
wardly-directed supplemental arm, and said 
shafts in said tubular cross-heads being pro 
vided with springs which operate upon the 
main arms, and on the Supplemental arms, 
and said supplemental arms being pivotally 
connected at their upper ends With a CrOSS 
head in which is mounted a trolley-Wheel, and 
means for depressing said trolley-Wheel, and 
operating said frame, Substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. A support for the trolley-wheel of trolley 
cars, consisting of a frame which is pivotally 
supported longitudinally thereof on the top 
of a car, said frame being provided at each 
end with springs which bear on the trolley 
car, and with shafts which are mounted trans 
versely thereof, said shafts being provided at 
one end with cranks which are connected by 
a crank-rod, and said shafts being also pro 
vided with upwardly-directed main arms 
which connect at their upper ends with a tu 
bular cross-head, and provided with a shaft 
which passes therethrough, said tubular cross 
heads being also provided each with an up 
wardly-directed supplemental arm, and said 
shafts in said tubular cross-heads being pro 
vided with springs which operate upon the 
main arms, and on the supplemental arms, 
and said supplemental arms being pivotally 
connected at their upper ends with a CrOSS 
head in which is mounted a trolley-wheel, and 
means for depressing said trolley-wheel, and 
operating said frame, consisting of a trolley 
cord or rope which is connected with said 
cross-head and which is under the control of 
the conductor or motorman, Substantially as 
shown and described. 
3. A support for the trolley-wheel of trolley 
cars, consisting of a main Ol' base frame which 
is pivotally supported above the top of the 
car, said frame being provided at each end 
with springs which bear on the top of the car, 
and at one end thereof, With a segmental gear 
head, a lever which is pivotally connected 
with the top of the car, and which is also pro 
vided with a segmental geal-head which op 
erates in connection with that With which Said 
frame is provided, said lever being also pro 
vided at its free end with a ring or eye, and 
said frame being provided at each end with 
shafts which are connected by means of 
cranks, and a crank-rod, arms which are Se 
cured to said shafts, and which are projected 
upwardly and which connect at their upper 
ends with tubular cross-heads, supplemental 
arms connected with said cross-heads and pro 
jecting upwardly, springs mounted in Said tu 
bular cross-heads, and acting in connection 
with said supplemental arms, a cross-head by 
which the upper ends of the supplemental 
arms are connected, a trolley-wheel mounted 
therein, and atrolley cord or rope which is con 
95 
IOC 
Io5 
II5 
I 25 
589,109 
- 
3 
nected with said cross-head, and passed down- ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 12th 
Wardly arounda pulley supported in said main day of April, 1897. 
or base frame, and then through the eye or ring 
at the end of said lever, substantially aS shown 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres- 
ARTHUR E. WYMAN, 
FRANK E. SEVERANCE. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT OREN WYMAN. 
st wv 
5 and described. 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589210.txt	| (No Model.) 
No. 589,210, 
Patented Aug. 31, 1897. 
REVERBERATORY SMELTING AND REFINING FURN ACE, 
B. HALL. . 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
 
 
 
J, 
 
 
r 22 7 
Ef2% 
2 . 
 
  
 
 
s 
 
Z7 
4. 
7 
. 
 
WAp 
%W s 
  
C E D 
A' 
 
 
Ff ZZ-le 3. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
E.' 
% 
3A. 
68); 
330-3, 
2-a/2-2-Q 
3% of \ 
3. 
76. E 
2/3 p16 r 
cery 
se 
y --- 
 
(No Model.) 
B, HALL. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
REWERBERATORY SMELTING AND REFINING FURNACE, 
No. 589,210, 
Patented Aug. 31, 1897. 
 
  
 
i --- 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BENJAMIN HALL OF NEWADA CITY, CALIFORNIA. 
REVERBERATORY SMELTING AND REFINING FURNAc E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,210, dated August 31, 1897. 
Application filed February 17, 1897, serial No. 623,812, (No model.) 
- 
O 
To all, whom it naily concerto: 
Be it known that I, BENJAMIN HALL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Nevada. 
City, Nevada county, State of California, have 
invented an Improvement in Reverberatory 
Smelting and Refining Furnaces; and I here 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
reverberatory smelting and refining furnaces 
which are especially useful in the treatment 
of pyritic ores. 
It consists in the parts and the construc 
tions and combinations of parts hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
of my apparatus. Fig. 2 is a horizontal sec 
tion on line acac of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a view of 
the feed end. Fig. 4 is a section on line y ly 
of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a view of the feed-trough. 
In the working of reverberatory furnaces 
the ore is usually fed in charges, smelted, the 
slag skimmed off, another charge put in until 
a sufficient amount of metal or matte has ac 
cumulated, when it is tapped and drawn off. 
The disadvantage of this method is that the 
matte or metal is covered with a layer of ore 
or slag that cannot be penetrated by the air 
blast. Therefore it is not oxidized and con 
centrated, and the fuel qualities of such oxi 
dation are not utilized. 
In my invention the furnace proper, A, is 
made in the usual or any suitable form for 
this class of furnace, having at the receiving 
end blast-pipes B and a feed device, which 
will be hereinafter described, and at the op 
posite end the furnace is contracted to a nar 
row discharge-opening C, having a bridge 
wall D, over which the slag is constantly dis 
charged by natural flow and by the action of 
the blast and is delivered into a smaller sup 
plemental furnace-chamberE, from which the 
slag is finally discharged over a bridge.F. 
The furnace may also have the usual tap 
holes A', as shown in Figs. I and 2. 
The escape-flue or chimney G is situated at 
the end of the supplemental chamber E, so 
... that the heat and products of combustion 
after leaving the main chamber A will pass 
into and through the supplemental chamber 
E, where the accumulated matte and slag 
- 
3O 
35 
55 
75 
from the main chamber are still exposed to 
the heat and prevented from too rapid cooling. 
By means of the two successive chambers, 
arranged as shown, the matte, which results 
from the smelting of the ore first sinks to the 
bottom of the main smelting-chamber and foll 
lows this chamber up to a level with the top 
of the discharge top of the wall D and the dis 
charge-opening C. Thereafter the slag will 
constantly flow over into the chamber E. 
The uniform level of the matte may be va 
ried by the insertion of water-pipes d trans 
versely within the wall D, and an increase 
or decrease of the flow of water through these 
pipes raises or lowers the level of the matte. 
The slag which is formed upon the top of the 
matte being in a fluid condition will flow over 
the wall D and constantly maintain an even 
level surface of the matte without being cov 
ered or buried too deeply in the slag, and the 
blast which was admitted through the pipes 
assists to carry the light slag along and dis 
charge it and leave the matte constantly ex 
posed to the air-blast. 
The matte is drawn off from time to time 
from the supplemental chamber E, while the 
slag is allowed to pass off through the open 
ing F. By this continued double operation, 
if used upon ore which might run, for in 
stance, five per cent. of copper, the concen 
tration would be such that the matte drawn 
off from either chamber A or E would run as 
high as fifty per cent. of copper, and from 
this it would be easy to convey it into a sec 
ond similar furnace or refining apparatus, 
such apparatus having a tilting ladle or fur 
nace in place of the feeding device herein 
described. 
The feeding device of my furnace consists 
of an approximately horizontal trough H, 
having a rotary screw journaled to turn in it, 
so that the ore which is delivered to the trough 
at one end will be gradually advanced by 
this screw. This trough H extends across 
the end of the furnace at a sufficient height, 
so that the branch troughs or chutes I, lead 
ing from it, at intervals will receive theore 
from the screw which is carrying it along be 
hind the troughs, and each chute will thus 
be supplied with a portion of the ore which 
slides down into the receiving end of the fur 
IOO 
2 
589,210 
IO 
25 
45 
55 
75 
Y 
nace. These chutes I are made with receiv 
ing-openings I' from the many troughs inclin 
ing from one side to the other. This construc 
tion is better suited to distribute the ore 
evenly from the transverse main trough II 
into these chutes from one side to the other, 
so that it will flow down over the full width 
of the bottoms of the chutes. These inclined 
edges incline in line with each other, as shown, 
until the last but one terminates at the floor 
level of the trough H. 
The last one of the chutes I is fed by an 
opening in the bottom of the trough II, as 
shown, so that the ore will be delivered reg 
ularly from one side of the receiving end of 
the furnace to the other. 
The angle of the blast-pipe T3 is such that 
the blast of air from these pipes does not 
strike the ore until it has moved a short dis 
tance away from the end of the furnace toward 
the center, and by the time the blast does 
strike it it has become heated, so that it will 
more readily burn, and to such an extent that 
it will in a Way cement together and thus pre 
vent the dissipation in the form of dust when 
the blast strikes it. These blast-pipes are 
adjustable to change the angle of any one or 
more of them, so that the blast strikes the 
ore nearer to or farther from the receiving 
end, as may be desired. 
A supplemental blast-pipe or oil-burner en 
ters the upper part of the furnace, as shown 
at J, or above the surface of the ore and matte, 
and also discharges upon the mass of ore 
within the furnace at a point in advance of 
that of the blast-pipes B. 
A cold blast may be employed, if preferred, 
or the pipes connecting with the blast-pipes 
B may be carried through the walls of the 
furnace above the level of the surface of the 
matte, whereby the air is heated within these 
pipes. A line of water-pipes IK along the level 
of the matte keeps a certain temperature 
along this line which prevents the lining of 
the furnace from being entirely destroyed by 
the slag. 
In some cases where a suitable hydrocarbon 
oil is obtainable the air-blast may be joined 
with oil-jets, but where this is not used I 
have shown a furnace K, built at one or both 
sides of the main furnace A and having a ?lue 
or opening at L, through which the heat and 
products of combustion pass into the main 
furnace A to assist in smelting the ore therein 
or to commence the work or to heat the air 
for the jets, the amount of sulfur in the ore 
being usually about sufficient for the work 
after it has once begun. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. Alhorizontal reverberatory smelting-fur 
nace having a feed mechanism at one end and 
a discharge at the opposite end, said feed 
mechanism comprising a series of chutes lead 
ing into the furnace and a feed-screw whereby 
- 
the ore is delivered successively to the chutes 
and thence to the furnace. 
2. A horizontal-hearth Smelting-furnace 
having a series of chutes leading into one end 
thereof and a feed-screw whereby the ore is 
delivered regularly and continuously at the 
receiving end, a passage through which the 
slag is discharged at the opposite end and a 
blast apparatus delivering air in at the re 
ceiving end along the line of travel of the ore. 
3. A horizontal-hearth reverberatory fur 
nace having a feed-inlet and a feed-screw at 
one end, a discharge at the opposite end and 
a blast-inlet at the receiving end along the 
line of travel of the ore whereby the action 
of the draft skins the slag from the matte' or 
metal. 
4. In a horizontal-hearth reverberatory fur 
nace, a continuous feed device comprising a 
series of chutes leading into the furnace and 
a feed-screw delivering ore successively to 
the chutes whereby the ore is delivered at 
one end of the furnace, a discharge-passage 
at the opposite end, the blast pipe or pipes 
delivering the air into the feeding end of the 
furnace along the line of travel of the ore, a 
supplemental furnace-chamber in line be 
yond the discharge adapted to receive the 
overflow of slag and matte whereby the level 
of the matte is approximately maintained, a 
chimney or stack at the outer end of the sec 
ond chamber through which the products of 
combustion escape after acting upon the 
matte and slag within said chamber, and a 
final discharge-passage for the slag at the end 
of Said chamber. 
5. In combination with a horizontal rever 
beratory furnace, a mechanism for regularly 
feeding the ore thereto consisting of a trough 
extending across behind the feed end of the 
furnace, a screw revolving in said trough to 
advance the ore transversely, inclined chutes 
opening from the main trough and having 
their receiving-openings inclined from one 
side to the other, said chutes each receiving 
a supply of ore from the rotating screw and 
delivering it into the rear of the furnace. 
6. A horizontal reverberatory furnace, a 
transverse trough extending across behind 
the receiving end of the furnace, a series of 
inclined chutes leading therefrom into the 
furnace, said chutes having partitions at the 
receiving ends inclined transversely so that 
one edge is lower than the other, and a re 
volving feed - screw journaled in the main 
transverse trough whereby the ore is carried 
along said trough and delivered successively 
to the inclined chutes and thence to the fur 
Il CG. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
BENJAMIN HALL. 
Witnesses: 
S. II. No URSE, 
JESSIE C. BRODIE. 
95 
IOO 
I OS 
IO 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589310.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
A SMITH, 
COMBINED MEASURING AND COST INDICATING APPARATUS, 
No. 589,310. 
Patented Aug. 31, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
A. SMITH, 
COMBINED MEASURING AND COST INDICATING APPARATUS, 
No. 589,310. 
Patented Aug. 31, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s 
 
III 
IIH 
E. S. N. 
  
 
   
  
 
 
 
a wr 
th 
III 
 
 
 
  
 
SI 
 
 
 
TNRSSSNS 
is Lull 
 
 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
A. SMITH, 
COMBINED MEASURING AND COST INDICATING APPARATUS, 
No. 589,310. 
Patented Aug. 31, 1897. 
 
- 
W/ E- 
---. 
A%. 42 Za 
%ze? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED SMITH, OF CHRISTCHURCII, NEW ZEALAND. 
COMBINED MEASURING AND COST-INDICATING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,810, dated August 31, 1897. 
Application filed April 17, 1897, 
Serial No. 632,681, (No model.) 
To all, whom it TCity concert: 
Be it known that I, ALFRED SMITH, electri 
cian, a Subject of the Queen of Great Britain, 
residing at 71 Cathedral Square, Christchurch, 
in the provincial district of Canterbury,in the 
Colony of New Zealand, have invented a new 
and Improved Combined Measure and Cost 
Indicating Machine, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
This invention relates to the class of calcu 
lating-machines used for indicating the cost 
of goods Sold by lineal measurement. 
In certain machines for the purpose with 
Which I am acquainted a rollel' is employed 
which bears the cost-markings, and is caused 
to revolve by a pawl or pawls engaging in a 
ratchet-wheel upon its axle, the pawls being 
actuated by tappets placed at intervals along 
a measuring-staff. This method has been 
found unsatisfactory, as it lmay happen in 
practice that a tappet is not depressed suffi 
ciently far to cause the roller to revolve 
through the required space to bring the cor 
rect column of cost-markings into indicating 
position. 
In my invention a roller is mounted hori 
ZOntally in bearingS beneath a counter, and 
the essential feature is that it normally tends 
to revolve under influence of a spring or other 
equivalent motor, the roller being alternately 
retained and released by escapement-gearing, 
whereby it is insured that if it is released at 
all it must revolve through the desired space 
and be retained in that position until again 
Operated. 
The periphery of the roller is marked with 
longitudinal and circumferential lines, where 
by divisions are formed, each of which bears 
the cost of an article of a certain length and 
price. 
The cost-markings are so arranged that the 
figuresform circumferential and longitudinal 
columns, and the counter beneath. Wihich the 
roller is mounted has a slot through which one 
longitudinal column is visible at a time. 
Each circumferential column bears the cost 
of articles of different length at one price and 
each longitudinal column the cost of articles 
of one length at different prices. 
The longitudinal columns are marked at One 
or both ends with the length to which the cost 
figures therein refer and a scale fixed above 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
and, if desired, also below. The slot through 
which a column is visible is divided to corre 
spond with the circumferential columns and 
bears figures to indicate the price to which 
each of Said columns is devoted. 
The escapement-gearing referred to may be 
Operated by depressing any one of a number 
of tappets or push-buttons arranged at inter 
Vals along an Ordinary flat metal measuring 
staff fixed upon the counter. 
The tappets are placed and the mechanism 
proportioned so that a salesman when meas 
uring against the measuring-staff in the Or 
dinary Way finds his hands in juxtaposition to 
the tappet, which will, when depressed, actu 
ate the escapement-gearing and permit the 
roller to revolve through a space necessary to 
bring the longitudinal column of figures into 
view, giving the length of material he has 
measured off and the cost thereof at different 
prices. 
I will now more particularly describe my 
invention by the aid of the accompanying 
drawings, wherein 
IFigure 1 is a side elevation, Fig. 2, a plan, 
and Eig. 3 an end elevation, of a machine ac 
cording thereto. Fig. 4 is a part plan showing 
the arrangement of tappets along the measur 
ing-staff. 
This view is drawn more in propor 
tion than the preceding figures, which for the 
sake of clearness have been reduced dispro 
portionately. Fig. 5 is a detail sectional view 
of part of the mechanism at the right-hand 
end of Fig. 2. 
Similar letters of reference indicate the 
same parts in all the figures. 
The roller C, preferably formed of sheet 
metal, is journaled in bearings b, carried upon 
brackets b', fixed beneath the counter U, and 
normally tends to revolve under the influence 
of a coil-spring c upon its axle d. 
A ratchet-wheele is fixed upon a sleeve e', 
journaled upon the axle cl, and the arm f, 
fixed to the sleeve, carries a spring-paw g', 
which gears in one direction with a ratchet 
wheel 9, fixed upon the axle. 
A loop or bridle h is mounted upon a ver 
tical pivot h", one arm of the loop carrying a 
pawl-pin i, which gears in the ratchet-wheel 
e. The other arms of the loop has a boss 7, 
which is fitted loosely upon the sleevee', and 
a lever I, journaled upon the boss I and 
9 O 
IOC 
2 
589,810 
5 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
- 
kept in position thereon by a collar l', cal 
ries a pawl-pin l, engaging the ratchet-wheel 
e, when the loop is vibrated upon its pivot in 
a manner to be described. 
Tappets (m, na', n, and n, placed at the 
quarter, half, three-quartel's, and One yard 
divisions of a measuring-staff n, fixed upon 
the counter, (shown in Fig. 4.) have stems 
which are severally pivoted to bell-crankle 
vers n, n', n, and 7. 
The respective bell-crank levers have each 
a pino O'o'o, operating one of the four slide 
bars p p' p' p' by engaging in a slot formed 
therein. 
Pins q in the bracket q' form guides for the 
slide-bars, each of which has a pin or projec 
tion q', which, when the bar is moved later 
ally by depression of its tappet, comes in con 
tact with the end of the arm S of the loop , 
and causes the loop to turn upon its pivot 
and the pawl-pin l to come out of as the 
pawl-pin it upon the lever 
passes into en 
gagement with the ratchet-wheel e. 
The lever k, being pivoted, moves with the 
latchet-wheele as the latter turns under in 
fluence of the spring c. 
The vibration of the lever k, and conse 
quently the revolution of the ratchet-wheel 
e, is limited by the end of the lever coming 
in contact with the end of any one of the 
slide-bars referred to which has been oper 
ated, the end of the bar passing through Or 
alongside the arm S into the path of the end 
of the lever. The ends of the respective 
slide-bars are proportioned to permit the le 
ver to vibrate, and consequently the roller to 
revolve, through more or less space, accord 
ing to the position the tappet operating the 
slide-bar occupies upon the measuring-staff. 
A spring U causes the loop to return to its 
normal position when the tappet is released, 
the pawl-pill passing back into engagement 
with and retaining the ratchet - wheel and 
the level 
being returned for a fresh opera 
tion by a spring ac, a stop-pin of upon one end 
of the lever coming into contact with the loop 
l, and stopping it in its proper position. This 
spring a' is simply a piece of spring-wire bear 
ing on top of the pin f at one end and held 
at its other end by a pin ac', projecting from 
the side of the loop h, as shown in Fig. 2. 
The depression of the tappet in allows the 
roller to revolve through the space of one lon 
gitudinal column of figures, and a similar 
operation of tappets na', na', and in permits 
the roller to revolve through two, three, and 
four columns, respectively. 
A Scale t, fixed upon the counter in line 
with the slot therein and divided to corre 
Spond with the circumferential columns upon 
the roller, bears figures which refer to such 
columns and indicate the price per yard to 
which they are respectively devoted. 
One longitudinal column upon the roller is 
left blank to serve as a starting-point, and 
the roller is returned after each measuring 
operation by a cord , coiled around a sheave 
t", fixed to the drum - axle d, the ratchet 
wheel g and pawl g' permitting the drum to 
revolve back independently of the wheel e. 
A pin v in the end of the roller engages with 
the stud v' upon a fixed bracket l' and stops 
the roller when revolved back at starting 
point and also just before it completes a for 
ward revolution. 
Each of the slide-bars has a spring p", which 
returns it and the bell-crank lever operating 
it to their normal positions. 
As an illustration of the operation of the 
machine, and supposing the roller to be ar 
ranged to give the cost at quarter-yard inter 
vals, when a salesman is l'equired to measure 
off one yard and a quarter of material he will 
first measure one yard in the ordinary Way, 
and as his hand in pulling out the material 
reaches the end of the measuling-staff it will 
come over the tappet 1)", which he will de 
press, and the roller will revolve through the 
space of four longitudinal columns. He will 
then measure the remaining quarter-yard and 
depress the tappet in, when the roller will re 
volve through the space of One column and 
expose to view through the slot in the coun 
ter the longitudinal column of figures, giving 
the cost of one yard and a quarter at differ 
ent prices. By a glance at the Scale the Will 
find the division bearing the price per yard 
of the material dealt with and upon the roller 
immediately below it the cost of a yard and 
a quarter at that price. The circumferen 
tial column at the end of the roller will also 
give the length of material measured off. 
IIaving now particularly described my in 
vention and in what mainlner the Salme is to be 
performed, I declare that what I claim is 
1. In a machine for indicating the cost of 
goods sold by lineal measurement a Spring 
driven roller having cost-markings in longi 
tudinal and circumferential columns upon 
its periphery, such roller being contil'Olled by 
ratchet-and-escapement gearing Operated by 
tappets placed at intervals upon a measur 
ing-staff whereby one or other of the longi 
tudinal columns of figures is brought into po 
sition in relation to a fixed indicating-scale 
substantially as specified herein and illus 
trated. 
2. A roller having cost-markings in longi 
tudinal and circumferential columns upon 
its periphery; all indicating-scale fixed above 
it denoting the prices to which the circum 
ferential columns are devoted; a spring for 
revolving the roller, and a ratchet-wheel upon 
the roller-axle, controlled by an escapement, 
whereby one or other of the longitudinal 
columns is brought into indicating position, 
slide-bars for operating and differentiating 
the action of the escapement and tappets 
fixed upon bell-cranklevers for operating the 
slide-bars substantially as and for the pur 
poses herein described and illustrated. 
3. The spring-driven roller C, the ratchet 
escapement-wheele journaled upon the roller 
axle and revolving with it in one direction, 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
55 
 
Dated this 1st day of March, 1897. 
Witnesses: 
ALERED SMIITIT. 
W. B. CUMING, 
IIENRIE. H. RAY WARD. 
589,310 
3. 
having a pawl 9' engaging with a ratchet 
wheel g fixed upon the axle, the sheave at' 
and the cord it, coiled around it for returning 
the roller to starting-point substantially as 
specified and illustrated. 
the pivoted loop h, and the spring U the pawl 
pin normally engaging the wheel e the e 
ver k upon the boss h having a pawl-pin l 
engaging wheele When the loop is vibrated, 
the spring a operating upon lever k and the 
stop-pin if the whole substantially as herein 
described and illustrated. 
4. The spring-driven roller Ct, the ratchet 
wheel e fixed upon a sleeve journaled upon 
Io the roller-axle, an arm f upon the sleeve 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589410.txt	(No Model.) 
A. BRENNECKE, 
TOY, 
No. 589,410, 
Patented Sept, 7 l897, 
 
itvlosey 
e2%a- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED BRENNECKE, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, 
TOY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,410, dated September 7, 1897. 
Application filed April 12, 1897, Serial No. 631,772, (No model.) 
IO 
To ?till aw?on, it inctly concern: 
Beit known that I, ALFRED BRENNECKE, 
a citizen of the United States of America, 
and a resident of Springfield, in the county 
of Hampden, State of Massachusetts, have 
invented new and useful Improvements in 
Toys, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
simple and inexpensive toy wherein various 
figures may be supported, and by manipula 
tion of a simple mechanism caused to move 
as if in dancing. 
My invention consists in the arrangement 
of a rotary foot-piece mounted in a suitable 
stand, which rotary foot-piece engages a part 
of the toy and causes the toy to move. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
like letters of reference indicate like parts, 
Figure 1 is a front view of my improved de 
vice. Fig. 2 is an edge view of the figure 
when the figure is constructed of cardboard 
or other thin material; and Fig. 3 is a side 
view of the device, the figure being shown 
constructed of material other than a sheet of 
cardboard. 
In detail, C. indicates the base of the sup 
porting-stand; b, a vertical support secured 
thereto; c, a projecting piece; d, a wheel-spin 
dle; e, a lug on the base; f, a figure-support 
ing rod; g, a bOSS on the figure; h, a figure 
body; i, the limbs; l, a wheel, and in projec 
tions thereon. 
In the construction of my device a suit 
able base, as a, is provided, and by prefer 
ence a lug or piece e is formed in the center 
of the base and is provided with a pivot 
opening, preferably cone-shaped, for the re 
ception of the end of the pivot or rodd. The 
vertical piece b is secured to the base in any 
convenient manner, and projecting from it 
laterally is a piece c, provided at its end with 
an opening to receive the upper end of the 
pivot or rodd. A suitable wheele is mounted 
upon this pivot, which wheel is provided with 
a series of projections on its perimetrical up 
per edge, as m. The figure is supported from 
the back by a supporting-rod f, projecting 
25 
30 
35 
45 
from the vertical support b, and the figure is 
usually provided with a lugg, into which the 
supporting-rod f projects. The limbs i are 
pivotally mounted upon the body, and the 
figure is arranged at a height above the wheel 55 
to just allow the feet to touch the projec 
tions. When therefore the wheel is revolved, 
the limbs are caused to move as the lower 
portions are brought in contact with the pro 
jections, and when the figure is adjusted at 
the proper height and the wheel revolved the 
figure is caused to move, giving it the ap 
pearance of dancing, the appearance and ra 
pidity of the motion of the limbs being varied 
by the difference in rapidity of revolution of 
the wheel. 
I prefer that the supporting-rod f be some 
what elastic, so as to give to the body of the 
figure a somewhat elastic movement. It will 
be seen that figures of various kinds may be 
mounted upon the supporting-rod, so that the 
toy will not at all times present the same ap 
pearance. 
The wheel may be revolved by the fingers 
or by a string wound about the spindle, and 
when drawn taut the wheel is caused to re 
volve with great rapidity and may be given 
such an impulse as to cause it to revolve a 
considerable length of time. 
Having therefore described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
The toy herein described, comprising a suit 
able base-piece, a vertical standard secured 
to the base-piece, a supporting-rod projecting 
from the standard over the base, a figure se 
cured to the end of the said rod to stand sus 
pended over the wheel and base, pivotally 
supported legs on the figure, a suitably jour 
naled and supported vertical shaft on the 
base, and a wheel mounted on the upper end 
of the vertical shaft, said wheel being formed 
With a rim having projections on its perimet 
rical upper edge and arranged to contact with 
the feet of the figure when rotated, 
75 
85 
ALFRED BRENNECIKE. 
Withesses: 
ALLEN WEBSTER, 
GEORGE. R. WENTWORTH. 
-is 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589510.txt	 
(No Model.) 
C, H, PHINNEY. 
WATCHMAN'S ELECTRICTIME RECORDER, 
No. 589,510. 
Patented Sept. 7, 1897, 
 
N N : NaNNS N s 
aa. 
i 
i. 
r 
N. 
t 
t 
r SNNN 
NS 
SN 
N 
 
Nez SNS 
N 
 N N f SN N N N 
N 
NSS 
N 
Q NS 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CII ARLES II. P III N N E Y, OF BOST ON, MIAS SAC II US ETTS, 
WATCH MANS ELECTRIC TIME-RECORDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,510, dated September 7, 1897. 
Application filed December 9, 1895, Serial No. 571,479, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To cull tuhon, it Tucully concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES H. PHINNEY, 
of Boston, county of Suffolk, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Watchmens Indicating Systems, of which the 
following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters and figures on the drawings repre 
Senting like parts. 
This invention relates to electrical systems 
for indicating Orindicating and recording the 
movements or positions of Watchmen in a 
building, employed during the night to guard 
against fires, &c., Such apparatus being com 
monly known as a Watchman's indicating or 
indicating and recording system. 
Prior to my invention the usual practice in 
installing systems of this type is to arrange 
a suitable indicating or indicating and re 
cording apparatus at Some convenient point, 
as the office, and to electrically connect the 
Same With a plurality of push-buttons Ol' 
other circuit- changing devices distributed 
throughout the establishment at various 
points, the Watchman being required to make 
the round of the circuit-changing devices at 
regular intervals and operate the same in suc 
cession to indicate or indicate and record at 
the office apparatus his positions at various 
times during the night. 
In my experience in connection with the fire 
protection for large manufacturing establish 
ments I have found that great dange' lies in 
the possibility of the Watchman passing from 
room to room or building to building of an 
establishment, and leaving the doo's open 
after him, for if a fire is started in a room or 
building soon after the Watchman leaves it is 
possible for it to spread through the open 
doors or opening from room to room or build 
ing to building before the Watchman is made 
aware of it and can sound the alarm Ol' close 
the doors. The same danger, to a degree at 
least, arises from the possibility of Windows 
or other openings being left open or un 
guarded. To obviate this danger, my pres 
ent invention comprehends the introduction 
into the operating circuit or circuits of a 
system of circuit-controlling clevices located 
at various points and controlled Ol' operated 
by the opening and closing of the closures for 
the various doors, windows, or other openings 
referred to, such circuit-closing devices be 
ing arranged in Such manner as to prevent 
the Watchman sending in his proper indicat 
ing or recording impulse or signal from any 
point if a single door or closure is left open 
or in its abnormal condition at any point in 
the system or in or along the circuit of the 
controller which he must, of necessity, oper 
ate. Such an arrangement requires the 
Watchman to see to it that the doors or clo 
sures thus connected with the operating-cir 
cuit are in their desired or proper normal or 
closed positions, cutting off that room or 
building from the rest of the establishment, 
before he sends in his signal from said room 
or building. 
My invention will be more clearly under 
stood from the following specification, and 
the particular features which I claim as my 
invention will be hereinafter pointed out in 
the claims at the end of the specification. 
In the drawings representing one embodi 
ment of my invention, Figure 1 is a diagram 
lmatical view illustrating my improved sys 
tem as applied to ordinary factory purposes, 
and Figs. 2 and 3 details illustrating suitable 
means for actuating the circuit-controllers 
from or by the moving closures. 
In the embodiment of my invention selected 
for illustration and shown in the drawings, 
referring particularly to Fig. 1, A represents 
in horizontal section or plan view a single 
floor of a factory or other building containing 
four distinct rooms or departments C C Cl 
Ct, with the office barranged at some conven 
ient point, shown, fol' instance, at the end of 
the building. 
The indicating or 'ecording apparatus C, 
designed to be located in the office, is, for the 
sake of clearness, partially shown on an en 
larged scale at the upper left-hand portion of 
Sheet 1 of the drawings. This indicating o' 
recording apparatus C may be of any Suitable 
or desired construction so long as it is elec 
trically operated from one or more stations or 
points distributed through the establishment. 
The apparatus herein illustrated is the 
Well-known IIowa'd alpparatus, containing a 
recording-dial c, rotated slowly by clockwork, 
coperating with which is the marker c', con 
trolled by a let-off c, actuated by a suitable 
time mechanism within the frame c, the op 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
 
9 O 
95 
CO 
2 
589,510 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
erations of which are controlled by the mag 
net c' and its almature c, successive opera 
tions of the mechanism c' acting to carry the 
rotary switch-arm c' into successive positions 
connecting the magnetic with the various out 
going circuits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and S, lead 
ing, respectively, to the Operating-stations or 
circuit-controlling devices d', d', d', d', d, cle, 
d", and d5, located at different points in the 
building, the devices d', d', d', and d being 
arranged, respectively, in the rooms C1, Ct', C., 
and C, the remaining devices being supposed 
to be arranged in corresponding Or, it may be, 
different rooms on the next floor of the same 
or in different parts of the same or other 
buildings. 
The openings to be guarded are indicated 
at e, e', e, and e, and it is supposed that other 
and, it may be, similar openings are arranged 
for and adjacent the circuit-controlling de 
vices (l, d", d, and cl, said openings e to c', 
inclusive, being shown as doorways fitted 
with suitable swinging or, it may be, sliding 
doorsf, f', f', and f'. 
Referring to IFig. 2, I have shown in detail 
a part of one door, as f', hung from Suitable 
hangers f", adapted to travel on suitable 
runs f. 
At one side of the doorway is arranged a 
circuit-controller II, of any suitable or de 
sired construction, capable of being operated 
by the door when moved into its position, 
closing the doorway, said controller 
in the 
Spring 
present instance comprising the two 
contacts I, and l', one of which, as , is pro 
vided with an operating projection l', adapt 
ed to be struck by the door as the lattei' ap 
proaches the end of its movement and pushed 
over into contact with the spring 7 to close 
the circuit thereat. 
All the circuit-controller's (l to cl, inclusive, 
are shown as connected by a common return 
wire 9 with one pole of the battery 10, the 
opposite pole of which is connected by Wile 
11 with the magnet c' of the indicating or re 
cording apparatus, said magnet being in turn 
connected by wire 12 with the arms of the 
switch c". This return: wire 9 in the present 
instance passes through and includes all of 
the circuit-controllers II, said return-wire bo 
ing broken at each of said controllel's when 
the doors of their adjacent doorway's are open 
or in their abnormal positions and closed by 
said doors when the latter are in their normal 
Ol' closed position. 
The door f being a swing-door is provided 
With a circuit-closer, arranged as shown in 
Fig. 3, it operating, however, precisely on the 
principle illustrated by Fig. 2. 
In the elmbodiment of my invention heroin 
illustrated I have shown an open-circuit sys 
tem, the Watchman as he passes from room to 
room proceeding to and manually operating 
the circuit-controllers d' d', &c., in said room 
to close the circuit and record the impulse 
upon the dial c in the office. 
From the previous description it will be 
 
evident that if any single door f tof' is ajar 
the return-wire of the system will be broken 
thereat, and it will be impossible for the Watch 
man to send his l'ecording signal or impulse 
from any point in the establishment. It is 
thus obligatory upon the Watchman when he 
enters the room to see that the door behind 
him is closed and when he leaves a roolm to 
see that he leaves all doors closed, so that it 
is impossible for a Watchman to record his 
movements, as required, at tille Office and at 
the same time leave any (loor open to permit 
fire to spread from room to room in the build 
ing before discovered. 
It will be evident that my invention is 
equally applicable to Windows or any other 
closures for openings which if left open would 
present an element of dangel', and, in fact, my 
system may be applied to and used in con 
nection with any device located at any part 
of the building which it is desired the watch 
man shall place in a certain condition bo 
fore proceeding upon his rounds through the 
building. 
In the claims I have designated the switches 
cl, &c., which are operated by the Watchman 
to send his signal, as manually-operated cir 
cuit-controlling devices to distinguish then 
from the other circuit - controlling devices 
which are operated or controlled by the mov 
able closures. 
While I have he'eil shown and described 
my invention as embodied in an open-circuit 
system, it should be distinctly undcrstood 
that my invention is equally applicable to a 
closed-circuit system, and the circuit-control 
lers may be of any (lesired construction so long 
as they are capable when operated of effect 
ing such a change in the condition of the elec 
tric operating-circuit as shall produce the re 
Sults enumerated in the foregoing description. 
Instead of employing push-buttons as cir 
cuit-controlling devices I may employ any 
other usual or Well-known equivalent devices 
capable of making the circuit cffective to 
actuate the indicating apparatus-as, for in 
stance, instead of the push-buttons, I might 
employ Small magneto - generators in each 
room as in the so-called eco-magnetosys 
tem, the turning of which would produce a 
current of electricity sufficient to actuate the 
indicating apparatus, the use of magneto 
generators doing away with the necessity of 
employing a battery. 
IIaving described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. In a Watchman's detector system, an elec 
trically-actuated indicating appalatus, a plu 
Itality of circuit-controlling devices clectric 
ally connected thereWith in series, and adapt 
ed to be moved when a like number of inde 
pendent objects are placed in predetermined 
position, combined with a series of manually 
operable circuit - changing devices each ar 
ranged in multiple in electrical circuit with 
said series circuit and also arranged to operate 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
IOC) 
I. O5 
IIC 
I I5. 
I 25 
I 3 
589,510 
3. 
O 
said indicating apparatus, the operation of 
each of which is dependent upon a predeter 
mined position of all of Said circuit-control 
ling devices, substantially as described. 
2. In a Watchman's detector system, an elec 
trically-actuated indicating apparatus, a plu 
rality of circuit - controlling devices electric 
ally connected there with and adapted to be 
moved when a like number of independent 
objects are placed in predetermined position, 
combined With a series of manually-operable 
circuit - changing devices, arranged in elec 
trical circuit with and to operate said indi 
cating apparatus, the operation of each of 
Which is dependent upon a predetermined 
position of all of said circuit-controlling de 
vices, substantially as described. 
3. The herein-described protective system 
for factories, &c., comprising in connection 
with a watchmans indicating system, having 
a plurality of signaling devices located re 
spectively at various remote points desired, 
 
25 
a plurality of controlling devices for certain 
movable articles whose positions it is desired 
shall be ascertained and controlled, said con 
trolling devices being operated by movement 
of all of said articles into predetermined po 
sitions to render said signaling devices oper 
ative, the latter being inoperative otherwise, 
said predetermined positions remaining the 
same, so long as the protective system is in 
operative condition whereby the watchman is 
obliged to carefully attend to the said posi 
tioning of all of said articles before he can 
send his required signals over the indicating 
system from the said various points thereof, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
CIARLES II. PIIINNEY. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. GREGORY, 
MIARGARET A. DUNN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589610.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 589,610, 
2. 
 
R. MCPHAILL. 
STOWEPIPE, 
Patented Sept. 7, 1897. 
N 
 
 
 
ar r s 
s re 
s 
WH ifpzssos 
2%262: 2 
N 
p?zpfor 
7,22272 /ZZ22a2z2, 
y 3y225 Afterseys, 
724 4%-5%. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT McPHAILL, OF BRENHAM, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
J. F. SCHRAMMAND W. SEIDEL, OF SAME PLACE. 
stove PIPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,610, dated September 7, 1897. 
Application filed February 12, 1897, Serial No. 623,145, (No model.) 
55 
6 
75 
. 
city concer. 
To all tufa of it 
Be it known that I, ROBERT MICPHAILL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bren 
ham, in the county of Washington and State 
of Texas, have invented a new and useful 
Stovepipe, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
stovepipes. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide a stovepipe adapted for cooking and 
heating stoves and capable of deflecting the 
sparks and of causing the same and soot to 
drop back into a stove and thereby avoid any 
liability of setting a house on fire or injuring 
the sections of stovepipe between it and a 
chimney. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a stovepipe which will confine the heat 
to the stove and prevent the same from pass 
ing up the chimney or flue and at the same 
time not interfere with the diraft. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination of parts, as hereinafter 
fully described, illustrated in the drawings, 
and pointed out in the claims hereto ap 
pended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is an elevation 
of a stovepipe constructed in accordance with 
this invention. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec 
tional view, the damper being closed in full 
lines and shown open in dotted lines. Fig. 3 
is a horizontal sectional view on line 33 of 
Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is a similar view on line 4 4 of 
Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a detail perspective view of 
the damper. 
Like numerals of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
ingS. 
1 designates a stovepipe-section provided 
with a central enlarged portion or chamber 
2, which is cylindrical between its ends, and 
the latter taper toward the end portions 3 
and 4 of the stovepipe-section. The end por 
tions 3 and 4 are of the ordinary size, the up 
per end portion 3 being adapted to fit into 
another stovepipe-section and the lower end 
portion 4 being designed to fit upon a stove 
in the ordinary manner. 
Within the chamber 2 of the stovepipe-Sec 
2 
25 
AO 
50 
tion is arranged an upper inclined deflector, 
a damper 5, and a lower inclined deflector 6, 
which is substantially semicircular and which 
extends across one-lalf of the chamber 2. 
The deflector 6 is secured at its curved edge 
or periphery to the interior of the stovepipe 
section, and it is provided with a curved slit, 
forming a segmental body portion 7 and ar 
ranged parallel with the curved edge of the 
deflector. The segmental body portion 7 of 
the inclined deflector is depressed slightly 
and is arranged in a plane below the curved 
edge or peripheral portion and forms an open 
ing whereby it is adapted to have sparks im 
pinge against it and be deflected downward 
and at the same time permit a sufficient draft 
at that side of the chamber 2. 
The upper deflector 8 is constructed simi 
lar to the lower deflector G, and the damper 
5, which is hinged to the upper rigid deflec 
tor S, is similarly constructed. The upper 
deflector S is located above the lower deflec 
tor G at the opposite side of the stovepipe 
section, and the damper 5 is located directly 
over the bottom deflector, whereby a tortu 
ous passage is provided for the smoke and 
other products of combustion, the lower de 
flector being adapted to stop the sparks at 
one side of the chamber and the upper de 
flector at the other side of the Same. 
The damper and the upper deflector con 
verge downwardly and are provided near 
their curved edges with slits and have seg 
mental body portions which are depressed 
below the planes of the peripheral edge por 
tions. 
The damper 5 is mounted on a shaft or rod 
10, which is extended through the sides of the 
chamber 2 and provided with an exterior han 
dle 11. A coiled spring 12 is disposed on the 
rod or shaft between the handle and the stove 
pipe-section andfrictionally engages the parts 
sufficiently to maintain the damper at the de 
sired adjustment. 
The openings in the deflectors and damper 
permit a limited draft when the damper is 
closed, and the diameter of the enlarged por 
tion or chamber 2 of the stovepipe-section is 
sufficient to provide for all the draft desired 
when the damper is open. 
95 
OO 
2 
1. 
589,60 
and having its body portion depressed to form 
an upper opening, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a stovepipe-section, 
the upper and lower inclined deflectors lo 
cated at opposite sides of the stovepipe-sec 
tion and provided near their upper edges. With 
slits and having their body portions depressed 
to form openings, and a damperhinged to the 
upper, deflector and inclining in the opposite 
direction, said damper being provided with 
a depressed body portion and an opening simi 
lar to the deflectors, substantially as (ie 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
ROBT. AICPAILT, 
Witnesses: 
C. G. BOTTS, 
THOS. B. BOTTS. 
25 
35 
O 
It will be seen that the stovepipe-section is 
adapted to confine the heat in a stove and 
prevent it from passing out through the chim 
ney or fille, that it serves as a Spark-arrester, 
and that it will cause the soot to drop back 
into the stove. It will also be apparent that 
it will protect the other sections of a stove 
pipe and will prevent a house catching on fire 
by reason of flames or sparks passing into a 
chimney or flue. 
What is claimed is 
1. The combination with a stovepipe-sec 
tion, of an inclined segmental deflector ar 
ranged therein and provided near its upper 
edge with an opening, and a damper hinged 
to the deflector and inclining upward in the 
opposite direction, Substantially as described. 
2. A stovepipe-section provided with an in 
clined deflector arranged at one side thereof, 
and provided near its upper edge with a slit 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589711.txt	(No Model.) 
J. G. FOOTE. 
AIR PUMP FOR BICYCLES, 
28ievesoco 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN G. FOOTE, OF KENNETT SQUARE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
A R PUMP FOR BCYCLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,711, dated September 7, 1897. 
Application filed October 28, l896, Serial No. 610,350, No mode, 
To all, tv7-O12, it inctly concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN G. FOOTE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Kennett 
Square, in the county of Chester and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Air-Pumps for Bicy 
cles; and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention has relation to improvements 
in pumps for inflating the pneumatic tires of 
bicycles, and more particularly to that class 
of pumps which are permanently fixed to the 
inachine, and the object is to provide a sim 
ple, durable, and effective device of this kind. 
To this end the novelty consists in the con 
struction, combination, and arrangement of 
the same, as will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and particularly pointed out in the 
claim. 
in the accompanying drawings the same 
figures of reference indicate the same parts 
of the invention. 
Figure I is a side elevation, partly in sec 
tion, of a bicycle-frame with my improved 
pump combined there with. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged sectional detail of the lower end of the 
tubular piston-rod, and Fig. 3 is a similar 
view of the upper end of the seat-post tube. 
I represents the ordinary seat-post tube, 
the lower end of which is closed by a screw 
plug 2, the threaded stem of which enters a 
nut 3, and between the contiguous beveled 
faces of the plug and the nut is inserted any 
suitable packing 4, which is laterally ex 
panded in the tube to make an air-tight joint 
at this point when the plug is screwed into 
the nut. 
3 is a nipple communicating with the tube 
1, and its outer end receives one end of the 
flexible pipe G. 
7 represents the tubular piston-rod, the 
lower end of which is externally screw-thread 
ed to receive the beveled face-piston S, also the 
beveled face-follower 9 and the jam-nut 10. 
12 represents suitable packing secured be 
tween the contiguous beveled faces of the pis 
ton and its folloyer. 
13 represents a conical valve-seat in the 
lower end of the piston-rod, and 14 is a ball 
- 
25 
45 
So 
 
65 
Valve Secured within the perforated screw 
cap 15 and held in place against the valve 
seat by a spiral spring 16. The upper end of 
the tubular piston-rod is provided with an 
air-inlet orifice 17, and its immediate end is 
closed by a transverse handle S. 
The piston-rod passes snugly through ver 
tical Orifices in the seat-bar bracket 19 and 
the adjustable seat-bar 20, the bracket 19 be 
ing provided with a stuffing box and gland 
21 to insure an air-tight joint around the pis 
ton-rod. When the handle IS is pressed down 
to its full limit and not in use, the air-inlet 
17 is closed by the gland 21, and consequently 
all grit and dirt are excluded. 
When the pump is not in use, the end of 
the inflating-pipe 6 is conveniently held in 
place by a Spring-claim 22, as shown. 
The operation of the device is very simple, 
for when occasion requires the inflation of 
either of the tires the free end of the inflat 
ing-pipe 6 is removed from the clamp 22 and 
connected to the nipple on the tire and the 
handle S is drawn upwardly through the 
opening 23 in the saddle. As the piston is 
drawn up the air enters through the inlet 17 
in the tubular rod 7, passing down below the 
piston through the ball-valve 14, thereby fill 
ing the space in the seat-post tube between 8o 
the plug 2 and the piston, and as the piston 
descends this air is forced through the nip 
ple 5 and pipe G into the tire. 
Although I have specifically described the 
construction and relative arrangement of the 
several elements of my invention, I do not 
desire to be confined to the same, as such 
changes or modifications may be made as 
clearly fall within the scope of my invention 
without departing from the spirit thereof. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new and useful, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
S-r- 
A bicycle-plump, comprising the Seat-post 
tube 1, the plug 2 adjustably secured in the 
lower end of said tube, the tubular piston 
rod 7, the beveled-faced piston S, the beveled 
faced follower 9 adjustably secured on the 
lower threaded end of said piston-rod, the 
packing 12 secured in place on the rod be 
tween the contiguous beveled faces of the pis 
85 
75 
90 
95 
55 
ECC. 
589,711 
tion and follower, and the ian - lnut 10 ad- 
justably secured on the immediate end of the I signature in presence of two. Witnesses. 
piston-rod to lock the follower on said 'Od, 
the perforated cap 15, formed integral With 
5 said nut and the ball-valve 14 located within 
said perforated cap, substantially as shown 
and described. 
R. ERVIN FOOTE, 
H. J. ENNIS. 
Witnesses: 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affiX Inly 
u 
pony 
JOIN G. FOOTE. 
ry 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589812.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 589,812, 
 
C. S. BURTON. 
LOCOMOTIVE SMOKESTACK. 
Patented Sept, l4, 1897. 
AS 
S 
S. 
Ezzazza E 
SYS 
2a2a 
22 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIIARLESS. IBURTON, OF OAK PARK, ILLINOIS. 
O CO WOTWE SM OKE, STAC K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,812, dated September 14, 1897. 
Application filed October 19, 1896, Serial No. 609,274, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To ?till aviion, it 12-?tly coice it. 
Be it known that I, CHARLESS. BURTON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Oak 
Park, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Locomotive Smoke - Stacks, 
which arefully set forthin the following speci 
fication, reference being had to the accompa 
nying drawings, forming a part thereof. 
This invention is an improvement upon the 
locomotive smoke-stack shown in my applica 
tion filed December 9, 1895. 
The improvement consists in specific de 
vices herein shown for relieving the back pres 
sure on the exhaust-nozzle by so constructing 
the deflector as to permit the easy escape of 
the exhaust steam and gases carried thereby 
before and during the deflection, to the end 
that the solid matter driven by the exhaust 
steam may be carried by its momentum in 
the deflected course, while the exhaust-Steam 
itself expanding at all points at which it may 
find vent shall escape in large part before 
being deflected. 
It consists, further, in the employment of 
a supplemental deflector below the principal 
deflector adapted to take the outer annular 
portion of the ascending column of smoke in 
the barrel of the stack, thereby relieving the 
main deflector of that portion of the work 
and obtaining a better angle of impact for 
the gases, whereby their deflection is accom 
plished with less resulting back pressure. 
It consists, further, in specific details of 
construction of the deflector designed with a 
view to its economical manufacture. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical axial 
section of my improved stack. Fig. 2 is a 
top plan of the deflectors. Fig. 3 is a detail 
section at the curved line 33 on Fig. 2. Fig. 
4 is a plan of the lower member of the prin 
cipal deflector. Fig. 5 is a detail edge view, 
looking in the direction of the arrow on Fig. 2. 
A is the stack-barrel; B, the boiler-shell; 
C, the petticoat-pipe within the boiler-shell, 
under which the exhaust-nozzle D is located. 
The principal deflector E F is for conven 
ience of manufacture made in two parts E 
and F, each of which has the radial curvature 
suitable to effect the gradual deflection of 
the current without abrupt change of direc 
tion which would be liable to produce exces 
sive back pressure, and in order to afford the 
proper relief for the gases, and especially for 
the exhaust-steam which mainly occupies 
the center of the ascending column, and to 
avoid the back pressure which is caused when 
it cannot find easy vent, and also to avoid 
throwing the bulk of the exhaust-steam over 
the top of the barrel against the outer shell 
G, where its condensation will be rapid and 
will objectionally moisten the solid matter 
which it is the purpose of said shell to re 
ceive and gather for discharge, it is desirable 
that the deflector should be very extensively 
apertured, but such apertures should not be 
so made or located as to permit the direct 
discharge of the ascending column or portion 
thereof through them, since in that event the 
purpose of the device-to wit, the deflection 
of the solid matter-would not be accom 
plished. For this purpose deflectors having 
similar function have heretofore been made 
perforated with a very large number of small 
holes. 
The result obtained by the use of such de 
flectors is that the solid matter being thor 
oughly pulverized by its impact against the 
deflector passes through such small apertures 
in a condition which is harmless as respects 
the danger of causing fire; but such finely 
pulverized matter is liable to be discharged 
in a shower of black dust over the engine and 
cab to the great inconvenience of the engi 
neer and to the injury of the machinery into 
whose joints it penetrates, and, furthermore, 
if such deflector is made thick enough to en 
dure the wear upon it of the stream of solid 
matter thus pulverized against it the small 
apertures no longer afford the relief, but be 
come rapidly clogged, and even before being 
clogged the friction of the steam and gases 
passing through them diminishes and almost 
destroys the value of the relief afforded. To 
avoid these difficulties, I make my improved 
deflector consist of two levels of deflecting 
surfaces, each level comprising radial strips 
alternating with radial slits or apertures and 
constituting what is hereinafter named a 
deflecting-crown, the deflecting-strips of 
the upper level overhanging the apertures of 
the lower level. Preferably each level or 
conical series of deflecting-strips with inter 
vening apertures is cast separately from the 
9o 
95 
ICO 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
589,812 
5 
O 
other, and the two radially-slotted conical 
crowns thus constructed are mounted rela 
tively, so as to coperate in the manner indi 
cated. The lower crown E of this compound 
deflector has the radial ball's E', alternating 
with the apertures E, the bars E preferably 
uniting in a hub E. at their inner ends and 
in a ring Eat the outer periphery, the hub 
E0 being axially apertured and adapted to 
serve as part of a pipe or passage through 
which a portion of the exhaust-Steam passes 
for the purpose of assisting the draft by its 
discharge through the upper mouth G* of the 
outer shell G substantially as set forth in my 
former application. This central pipe or hub 
E0 is formed with an exterior shoulder or 
step enear the bottom, on which the hub F. 
of the outer crown lodges. The crown F is 
made with its radial bars Falternating with 
apertures E, the bars being joined at the hub 
F0 at the inner ends by the ring F1 at the 
periphery. 
It is desirable that the column of gases dis 
charged from the top of the barrel or the 
stack even at the outer side shall not be so 
directed against the deflector that the angle 
of impact shall be other than such as to cause 
an easy deflection outward. This result is 
easily attained toward the center, and since 
the smoke and gases at the central part by 
their deflection as they strike the deflector 
will force the outer portion of the column 
outward such outer portion will not strike 
the deflector in the direction in which it 
emerges from the top of the stack, but, on the 
contrary, will bend from that direction to one 
which will make its impact with the deflector 
more favorable. Nevertheless it is desirable 
that matter carried up in a straightline from 
the outer side of the stack should not strike 
the deflector at an unfavorable angle, and in 
order to accomplish this result without mak 
ing the deflector of unduly great diameter I 
interpose underneath the principal deflector 
a supplemental deflecting - crown K, whose 
lower edge is about two inches inside the bar 
rel of the stack, and which at its outer edge 
overhangs the pocket formed between the 
shell G and the barrel suitably to deliver the 
deflected matter into such pocket. By this 
means the area of the material which is di 
rected against the principal deflector is di 
minished to that of the circle which is defined 
by the lower inner edge of the outer deflector, 
and the Worst angle of impact possible is that 
of a straight line parallel with the axis of the 
barrel of the stack tangent to the lower edge 
of the Supplemental deflector K. Such a line 
k; k is placed on Fig. 1. 
Since the solid matter deflected by the de 
flecting-bars E and F would have some tend 
ency to spread laterally over said strips and 
SO pass by their lateral edges and eventually 
escape with the steam, I prefer to provide 
said strips with marginal flanges, which will 
tend to prevent this result by confining the 
solid matter which is deflected by the bars to 
the area of the bars, thus causing it to pass 
off at the ends only of the bars and not at the 
sides. Such marginal flanges f'f'' on the up 
per crown F depend from the lateral edges 
of the bars F. Marginal flanges on the bars 
E' of the lower crown are less essential be 
cause solid matter passing off the lateral 
edges of these lower bars would almost cer 
tainly be caught by the upper bars and re 
tained by the guard-flanges f 
'. Neverthe 
less the guard-flanges may be used upon the 
bars of both crowns. 
The supplemental crown K may be made 
of two apertured sections having relations 
similar to those of the two sections of the 
crown of the principal deflector, but it is not 
so essential because at the outer portion of 
the column which rises through the stack 
barrel there is, under ordinary conditions, no 
steam, but only the gases of combustion. 
Since the steam which escapes from the 
central portion of the deflector will be some 
what deflected outward before it thus es 
capes, it may be advisable to employ, to 
gather or retain the steam in a central body 
beyond the deflector and cause it to be dis 
charged centrally from the mouth of the stack, 
an annulus N, which may taper upwardly, 
forming a gathering-funnel above the deflec 
tor, so that this steam thus held together may 
have the utmost efficiency for the purpose of 
assisting the draft. This gathering annulus 
or funnel N is secured to lugs f on the up 
per side of the crown F and terminates a few 
inches below the top of the staff. 
Two crowns E and F are bound together at 
their hubs by a nut Hand may be secured to 
gether for the purpose of stiffness at their 
outer circumference by bolts f, which take 
through the rings E1 and F, and the entire 
deflector is suspended from the upper margin 
of the stack by the flanges PPP, which are 
secured to the lugs f' by the same bolts which 
secure the gathering-annulus N when such 
annulus is employed. The deflection effected 
by the deflectors carries over more or less 
steam and gases into the pocket designed to 
receive the solid matter, and in order to per 
mit such steam and gases to find vent, so that 
they will not be forced down into the recep 
tacle which will be provided for the solid 
matter, it is desirable to provide a vent-pipe 
R, which preferably leads from the discharge 
duct G" upwardly outside the expanded head 
or shell G to the top of the stack, into which 
it may discharge at the upper end, though 
this is a matter of convenience. 
I claim 
1. In a locomotive smoke-stack, in combi 
nation with an uptake-pipe, a deflector which 
is situated so as to be encountered by the as 
cending column from the uptake-pipe before 
the same has been reflected, and which is ra 
dially concave toward such ascending col 
umn, whereby it is adapted to deflect the gas 
eous current sufficiently to precipitate the 
solid matter therefrom, such precipitating-de 
8. 
9o 
I OO 
I O 5 
I IO 
II 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
589,812 
3 
5 
o 
2O. 
35 
45 
flector consisting of bars which are radially 
continuous and separated by radially con 
tinuous apertures, and a second series of ra 
dially continuous bars overhanging such ap 
ertures, whereby the steam is allowed to es 
cape by expansion laterally between the up 
per and lower series of radialbars simultane 
ously with the deflection of the gases which 
precipitates the solid matter. 
2. In combination with the smoke-box and 
the steam-jet discharging upward at the bot 
tom thereof, the uptake-pipe leading upward 
from the smoke-box in direct line with the 
discharge of the steam-jet, whereby the steam 
jet entrains the gases of combustion in a col 
umn with it in the uptake-pipe; an inverted 
conical deflector interposed directly in the 
path of such column, such deflector being co 
axial with the uptake-pipe and radially con 
cave toward the upper margin of the latter, 
whereby it is adapted to deflect the gases of 
combustion sufficiently to precipitate the 
solid matter therefrom outside the uptake 
pipe, and consisting of radially continuous 
bars alternating with radially continuous ap 
ertures, and a second series of radially con 
tinuous bars overhanging such apertures, 
whereby, simultaneously with the deflection 
of the gases which precipitates the solid mat 
ter outside the uptake-pipe, the steam has 
opportunity to expand and escape laterally 
between the two series of radial bars. 
3. In a locomotive smoke-stack, in combi 
nation with an uptake-pipe, a deflector which 
is situated so as to be encountered by the as 
cending column from the uptake-pipe before 
the same has been reflected, and which is ra 
dially concave toward such ascending column, 
whereby it is adapted to deflect the gaseous 
current sufficiently to precipitate the solid 
matter therefrom, such precipitating deflec 
...tor consisting of bars which are radially con 
tinuous and separated by radially continuous 
apertures, and a second series of radially 
continuous bars overhanging such apertures, 
whereby the steam is allowed to escape by 
expansion laterally between the lower and 
upper series of radial bars simultaneously 
with the deflection of the gases which precipi 
tates the solid matter; the upper series of 
bars having depending flanges from the lat 
eral margins at the outer portion of their ra 
dial extent. 
4. In a locomotive smoke-stack,in combina 
tion with an uptake-pipe, a deflector which is 
situated so as to be encountered by the as 
cending column from the uptake-pipe before 
the same has been reflected, and which is 
radially concave toward such ascending col 
umn, whereby it is adapted to deflect the 
gaseous current sufficiently to precipitate the 
solid matter therefrom, such precipitating-de 
flector consisting of bars which are radially 
continuous and separated by radially contin 
uous apertures, and a second series of radi 
ally continuous bars overhanging such aper 
tures, whereby the steam is allowed to escape 
by expansion laterally between the lower and 
upper series of radial bars simultaneously 
with the deflection of the gases which pre 
cipitates the solid matter, and an expanded 
head within which such deflector is inclosed 
and into which the uptake-pipe protrudes, 
and a duct leading from the pocket thus 
formed outside the protruding part of the 
uptake-pipe to conduct away the precipitated 
matter. 
5. In a locomotive smoke-stack,in combina 
tion with the uptake pipe or barrel, the prin 
cipal deflector which overhangs the same radi 
ally concave toward the mouth of the uptake 
pipe, and a supplemental annular deflector 
interposed between the upper mouth of the 
uptake-pipe and the principal deflector, and 
overhanging the outer annular portion only 
of the uptake-pipe and extended radially be 
yond the same. 
6. In a locomotive simoke-stack,in combina 
tion with the uptake pipe or barrel and an 
expanded head within which said uptake-pipe 
discharges; a deflector overhanging the up 
take-pipe consisting of two inverted conical 
crowns having each a plurality of radially 
extended apertures alternating with radial 
bars, the bars of the upper crown overhang 
ing the apertures of the lower, whereby vent 
for the exhaust-steam is afforded through the 
deflector; a steam-gathering annulus mounted 
above the upper crown adapted to gather the 
exhaust-steam which passes through the aper 
tures of the deflector at the central part, and 
cause the same to be delivered centrally from 
the discharge-mouth of the stack. 
7. In a locomotive Smoke-stack, in combina 
tion with the uptake pipe or barrel and an 
expanded head into which the uptake-pipe 
discharges; an inverted conical deflector over 
hanging the uptake-pipe radially concave 
toward the margin thereof and a supple 
mental annular deflector interposed between 
the mouth of the uptake-pipe and the prin 
cipal deflector and overhanging the margin 
only of the uptake-pipe, whereby the outer 
annular portion of the column discharged 
from said pipe is deflected over the margin 
of the latter without impact against the prin 
cipal deflector: substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand, in the presence of two witnesses, at 
Cingo, Illinois, this 15th day of October, 
S96. 
CHARLES S. BURTON. 
Witnesses: 
E. T. WRAY, 
JEAN ELLIOTT. 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US589912.txt	(N0 M0 del. ) 
No. 589,912, 
 
E. STERN. 
SHIRT BOSOM. 
Patented Sept, l 4, 1897. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMANUEL STERN, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
SHIRT-Boso M. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 589,912, dated September 14, 1897. 
Application filed May 5, 1897, Serial No. 635,124, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
- 
- 
cation. 
To all whon, it nually concern: 
Beit known that, I, EMANUEL STERN, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Balti 
more, in the State of Maryland, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Dickey's, of which the following is a specifi 
Myinvention consists in a reversible dickey 
having four available fronts, which may be 
used in succession. The general outline of 
the dickey is rectangular. It is cut away at 
each end to form neck-openings and cut away 
at each side to facilitate folding and to impart 
to each of the fronts a shield shape which 
adapts it to the shape of the body and pre 
vents bulging and buckling in use. A suita 
ble fasteningsuch as a button, buttonhole, 
or loop-is provided at each end near the 
neck-opening for attaching the dickey to a 
shirt. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate my invention, Figure 1 is a view show 
ing the application of the dickey to a shirt. 
Figs. 2 and 3 are views showing opposite sides 
of the dickey. Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7 are per 
spective views showing the dickey folded at 
the central line and the manner of presenting 
the several bosoms to the front. 
Referring to the drawings, Figs. 2 and 3 
show opposite sides of a dickey. The general 
outline is rectangular. It is cut away at each 
end to form neck-openings and also cut away 
at D at the middle of each side to facilitate 
folding along the transverse central line C 
and also to impart a shield shape to the sec 
tions A B on each side of the line C. 
The dickey consists of two or more plies of 
fabric united by suitable stitching and fin 
ished on the outer faces of the outer plies. 
The several fronts orbosoms may have dif 
ferent patterns or configurations, or they may 
be all alike. In Figs. 2 and 3 I have shown 
different patterns upon the bosoms for con 
venience of illustration, the bosoms 1 and 2 of 
Fig. 2 being the reverse sides of bosoms 3 and 
4 of Fig. 3, respectively. 
Any convenient means for attaching the 
dickey to the collar-button of the shirt may be 
employed, such as the elastic loop E, adapted 
to pass over the collar-button and having a 
button F, which passes through a buttonhole 
in the top of the dickey. Any other suitable 
means of attachment may be employed. 
The dickey is to be worn usually as shown 
in full lines, Fig. 1-that is, folded upon it 
self on the central line C-but it may be worn 
as shown in dotted lines, the lower part de 
pending from the upper one. 
The manner of reversing and inverting the 
dickey, so as to present the several bosoms to 
the front in succession, is illustrated in Figs. 
4 to 7, inclusive. Fig. 4 shows the dickey 
creased on the central line C, bosom 1 of part 
A being to the front and part B in the rear. 
Fig. 5 shows part B brought forward and laid 
over part A, so that bosom No. 4 is presented. 
After bosoms Nos. 1 and 4 are soilled the 
dickey may be inverted, as shown in Fig. 6, 
so that bosom No. 2 of part B will be shown, 
while part A is placed in the rear, and after 
ward, as shown in Fig. 7, part A may be folded 
in front of part B, so that bosom No. 3 will be 
presented to the front. 
The advantages of my invention will be 
readily apparent, as it provides means for 
presenting four clean fronts successively, 
which may have as many different patterns or 
configurations, while no more space is occu 
pied than is required by an ordinary dickey, 
and there is little tendency to wrinkle. 
The dickey may be worn on any shirt, re 
gardless of the size of neckband. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
IS 
A reversible dickey having four fronts or 
bosoms, comprising two or more substantially 
rectangular plies of fabric united by suitable 
stitching and finished on the outer faces of 
the outer plies, said plies being cut away cen 
trally at each end to form neck-openings, and 
also cut away centrally at each side to divide 
the dickey into two substantially shield 
shaped portions, each portion being provided 
with a suitable fastening adjacent to theneck 
opening, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. . 
. 
EMANUEL STERN. 
. 
Witnesses: 
- 
GEORGE IXENT, 
JOS. S. MACWITILIAMS. 
75 
9o 
95 
25. 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590014.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet I. 
M. M. BROPHY, 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING AND CIRCULATING WATER, 
No. 590,014. 
Fig.1. 
Patented Sept. 14, 1897. 
Fig.5. 
s 
VzzZ2 S 
22zz 2 
S N 
1 
S. / 1.3-i-y 
E. 
7tverlor. 
J&J s. 
S.S.A. O& 
 
the Norris Peters co, photo-Litho, washington, b. c. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
M. M. BROPHY, 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING AND CIRCULATING WATER, 
NO, 5900 4, 
Patented Sept. 14, 1897. 
62. 
( S 
Q) 
it 
Etti 
NSNSNSSSNSN 
s 
S 
% % % % NS 
N 
: 
. 
Witnesses 
37. 6. SEE 
> 0 A?esi 
as 
N 
W\ey W. Sree 
/ru/endor 
Ol. 
 
The Norris PEERs co, PHoto-LTHQ, washingtoN, E. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL MARY BROPHY, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
APPARATUS FOR HEATING AND CIRCULATING WATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,014, dated September 14, 1897. 
Application filed October 28, 1895, Serial No. 567,130, (No model.) Patented in England May 17, 1893, No, 9,900, 
To all, whon, it pay concer'72: 
Beit known that I, MICHAELMARY BROPHY, 
a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, re 
siding at London, England, have invented 
new and useful Improvements in Apparatus 
for Heating and Circulating Water, (for which 
I have obtained a patent in Great Britain, 
No. 9,900, dated May 17, 1893,) of which the 
following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the warming of 
railway-trains and buildings by means of hot 
water and to supplying such water for use in 
lavatories, Wash-houses, and elsewhere. 
It is well-known that considerable difficulty 
exists in economically heating railway-trains 
by means of hot water and in heating build 
ings or parts of buildings situated below the 
source of heat. According to my invention 
I provide means whereby the water in the 
pipes of a heating system may be heated and 
circulated notwithstanding variations of the 
level of such pipes. . 
In carrying out my invention I make use 
of an injector, and preferably one adapted to 
be operated by exhaust-steam. This injector 
is introduced into the system of pipes at any 
suitable point, so that the steam will not only 
cause the circulation of the Water which fills 
the said system of pipes, but also impart the 
requisite degree of heat to the same. At or 
near the top of the heating system I arrange 
a tank or cistern into which the water is dis 
charged after having made the complete cir 
cuit of the pipes and from which it is drawn 
for again supplying the injector. I provide 
means for cooling the water if necessary be 
fore again passing to the injector, and I also 
provide an overflow-pipe through which the 
surplus water due to the condensation of the 
steam introduced into the pipes can escape. 
To enable my invention to be fully under 
stood, I will describe the same by reference 
to the accompanying drawings, in which, fol' 
the purpose of illustration, I have shown the 
invention as applied for heating a railway 
train, and in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of the in 
jector and the parts immediately connected 
there with. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of 
a locomotive Water-tankin which the cooling 
hereinbefore referred to is effected and into 
which the water of condensation is discharged. 
Ed 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
- 
75 
. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse section, and Fig. 4 is a 
Figs. 5 and 
horizontal section, of the same. 
6 are sectional elevations of details relating 
to the said tank. Fig. 7 is a sectional plan of 
portions of a railway-train heated according 
to my invention. 
CL indicates an exhaust-injector of ordinary 
construction, the discharge-outlet b of which 
is connected to the flow-pipe c of the system 
of heating-pipes and the Water - inlet d of 
which is connected by the pipe e with a cis 
tern, tank, or the like, into which the return 
pipe e' of the system of circulating-pipes dis 
charges. 
f is the usual pipe provided for the over 
flow of surplus water from the ejector, the 
said pipe discharging into a tank f', from 
which the water escapes into a well f'. The 
injector discharge-nozzle b and the overflow 
pipe fare each provided with spring check 
valves, such as 9 g, for preventing the en 
trance of air into the injector in case the lat 
ter is not working. 
As exhaust-steam frequently carries in Sus 
pension more or less lubricant, I preferably 
combine with my injector a grease-extractor, 
through which the exhaust-steam passes be 
fore it reaches the injector. This grease-ex 
tractor advantageously consists of an outer 
casing or chamber h, connected by the nozzle 
h' with the exhaust-pipe, from which the steam 
is taken, and of an inner casing , connected 
with the steam-inlet of the injectori. The 
casing i, which is open at the bottom, is of 
smaller diameter than the casing h and ex 
tends some distance down within the same, 
so that the steam which passes to the injector 
has to pass down between the casings hand 
and then up through the latter before it 
reaches the injector. The space between the 
two casings is preferably provided with a se 
ries of helical or spiral ribs or with obstruc 
tions against which the steam will impinge, 
so as to give up or deposit a large proportion 
of the grease which it contains. 
The lower part of the casing his provided 
with a steam-trap of any suitable construc 
tion for allowing the escape of the Water of 
condensation and of the grease which forms 
or is deposited in the said casing h. This 
steam-trap, as shown in the drawings, con 
sists of a downwardly-projecting pipe k and 
55 
1 oo 
2 
590,014 
65 
 
a Surrounding pipe l', having at its upper 
part a chamber l', from which the discharge 
takes place through a pipe . The pipes : 
and k' are of such length that a water seal is 
always preserved sufficient to withstand the 
pressure in the casing 7. 
l is a cock which serves for regulating the 
pressure of the steam which passes to the in 
jector. In practice I have found that an ex 
haust-injector will not work properly when the 
pressure of the steam exceeds a certain limit. 
In Order, therefore, that this limit shall not be 
exceeded, I provide on some suitable part of 
the apparatus adjacent to the injector (for 
instance, on the top of the casing i) a spring 
escape-Valve, such as in, which valve is per 
manently set to allow the steam to escape 
When the desired pressure is exceeded. When 
steam is escaping from this valve, it will indi 
cate to the person who controls the working 
of the apparatus that the pressure is too great, 
so that he can at once reduce it by means of 
the Valvel to the desired extent. 
7, is a pipe for admitting live steam into 
the casing h, for the purpose of blowing out 
any grease deposited on the ribs between the 
Casings h and any grease or water contained 
in the trap beneath the said casing or cham 
ber h. This pipe also serves for introducing 
live Steam for working the apparatus in case 
exhaust-steam is not available, the valve in 
Serving to insure that the pressure of the live 
steam shall not exceed the desired limit. 
It is to be understood that the tank into 
which the water from the return circulating 
pipe e' is discharged and from which the wa 
ter returns to the injector through the pipe e 
must in all cases be above the level of the in 
let-nozzled of the said injector, (when an ex 
haust-injector is used,) as such an injector is 
not capable of lifting the water which feeds it. 
When my apparatus is designed for use 
upon a railway-train, the injector, with the 
Connected apparatus, as shown in Fig. 1, is 
preferably arranged upon the foot-plate of 
the tender, the said foot-plate being indicated 
by the letter O in Fig. 1, and instead of caus 
ing the return-pipe to discharge into a cis 
tern I arrange it to discharge into a funnel p 
upon the tender, the said funnel being con 
nected to the pipe e (through which the wa 
ter flows to the injector) by a pipe p', the 
height of which is sufficient to insure there 
always being a head of water above the inlet 
nozzle d of the injector. The nozzle through 
which the return-pipe discharges into the 
funnel p is provided with a non-return valve 
q, a suitable form of spring-valve being shown 
drawn to an enlarged scale in Fig. 5. 
To insure that the Water returning to the in 
jector shall be sufficiently cool, the pipe p' is 
preferably connected to a chamber or box 7', 
from which a series of pipes at the bottom of 
the tender-tank extends to anothel chamber 
or box r", from which the Water for supply 
ing the injector flows through the pipee, the 
employment of several pipes, as shown in 
Fig. 4, affording a large cooling-surface and 
allowing the Water to flow slowly. 
As hereinbefore stated, after the pipes are 
once filled there will always be an excess of 
Water due to the condensation of the steam 
necessary for working the injector. Such ex 
cess of water may overflow from the funnel 
p into the tank, but in practice I prefer to 
employ a separate Overflow-pipe S, arranged 
within the tank and connected to the box '. 
This pipes I preferably surround by a casing 
t, which extends nearly to the bottom of the 
tank, so that the water which overflows into 
the said casing will escape therefrom at the 
bottom, thus allowing any oil or grease which 
may not have been extracted in the manner 
hereinbefore described to remain floating 
upon the water within the said casing with 
out escaping into the tender and so polluting 
the Water therein. 
it is a valve which serves for allowing the 
water from the tender to flow directly into 
the pipe e to the injector when starting the 
apparatus-that is to say, When there is no 
head of water in the pipe p' owing to the cir 
culating-pipes being empty-but which will 
not allow the level of the water to fall as the 
water-level in the tank lowers. This Valve 
it is shown in section drawn to an enlarged 
scale in Fig. 6. 
In order that a train provided with a hot 
water heating apparatus of the kind herein 
before described may be warmed before be 
ing brought up to a platform of a terminus 
or while at the platform-that is to say, in 
order that it may be heated without the aid 
of exhaust-steam-I preferably connect the 
cock l of the injector apparatus of the shunt 
ing-engine which brings the train to the plat 
form directly to the boiler, in which case the 
pipe 
herein before mentioned will be un 
necessary. 
The pipes may be arranged in the carriages 
in any suitable manner. In order, however, 
that all the compartments of a train shall be 
heated as uniformly as possible-that is to 
Say, the compartments nearest the engine 
shall not be overheated and those at the rear 
end of the train underheated-I prefer to ar 
range the pipes in the manner shown in Fig. 
7, in which the numerals 1, 2, 3, and 4 indi 
cate compartments to be heated. In the ar 
rangement shown in this figure the flow-pipe 
c, which naturally contains the hottest water, 
is formed into a coil under one seat, and the 
return-pipe e' is provided with a coil under 
the opposite seat. With this arrangement it 
will be understood that in the compartment 
nearest to the engine the hottest coil is un 
der one seat and the coolest under the other, 
Whereas in the compartment at the rear of 
the train the two coils are at practically uni 
form heat. 
The circulating-pipes of the different car 
riages are connected by flexible tubes v, 
provided with couplings for enabling the said 
flexible tubes to be readily connected and dis 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
So 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
590,014 
3. 
connected. In practice I prefer to make use 
of couplings provided with valves for pre 
venting the hot water contained in the flexi 
ble pipes from escaping when the couplings 
are disconnected. 
Although I have illustrated my invention 
as being applied for heating a railway-train, 
it will be obvious that it is also applicable for 
heating buildings in which there is a supply 
of exhaust-Steam which can be utilized. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
1. In a heating system, the combination 
with a circulating system, of a steam-injector 
in said system, and a cooling device inter 
posed between the injector and the return 
pipe of said circulating system, whereby the 
IC 
 
circulating fluid is cooled before passing to 
the injector, substantially as described. 
2. In a lieating apparatus, the combination 
of an exhaust-injector, means for Supplying 
the injector with exhaust-steam, an inlet-noz 
zle for water, an outlet-nozzle for the dis 
charge of the steam and water, a system of 
circulating heating-pipes, a tank situated 
above the level of said inlet-nozzle, for re 
ceiving the return - Water from said pipes, 
means for cooling the Water and a pipe Con 
necting the tank with the said inlet-nozzle for 
delivering the water to the injector, substan 
tially as described. 
3O 
MICHAEL MARY BROPHY. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES BEGBIE SLATER, 
FRANK HARVEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590114.txt	(No Model.) 
J, T, ROBERTSON, 
FEEDER ATTACHMENT FOR PRINTING PRESSES. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 590,ll 4, 
Patented Sept. 14, 1897. 
Sy 
al 
III ITT 
IMNN 
TEMHSN -------- 
M -At 
Pel, ERISSESS 
  
 
  
  
 
 
7WZazeesses. 
4%/or 
-6 6.1%te 
%. 
2 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J, T, ROBERTSON, 
FEEDER ATTACHMENT FOR PRINTING PRESSES, 
No. 590ll 4, 
Patented Sept. 14, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
 
A 
4. 
5 
rease T 
A. 
I, 
This MZ-24 
Trini, 52s. 
EW 
A2/ 
A. 
(No Model.) 
J. T. ROBERTSON. 
FEEDER ATTACHMENT FOR PRINTING PRESSES. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 590ll 4. 
Patented Sept. 14, 1897. 
 
(No Model.) 
4 sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 590,114, 
7%.2 
J. T. ROBERTSON. 
FEEDER ATTACHMENT FOR PRINTING PRESSEs, 
Patented Sept. 14, 1897. 
 
  
 
Zrzeesares, 
(7. 
722/Z 
 
s 
e 
-% 
3-3-2- 
1st 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JUDAH TOURO ROBERTSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FEEEER ATAC - Vie NT FOR PR NING-PRESSES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,114, dated September 14, 1897. 
Application filed December 23, 1895, - Serial No. 573,065, (No model.) 
O 
25 
. 
To at whon it may coice; to: 
Beit known that I, JUDAH TOURO ROBERT 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Feeder Attach 
ments for Printing-Presses; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
feeder's for printing-presses and analogous de 
vices adapted to be run at a high rate of speed, 
and in the present instance I have shown the 
same as applied to a rotary-plate printing 
press provided with two plates adapted, for 
instance, to be run atten or more revolutions 
per minute, which with a two-plate press 
would give double the number of impressions 
per minute. It will be apparent to any one 
skilled in the art that when running at such 
speed it would be a physical impossibility for 
one or even two operators to feed such a press 
by the means heretofore devised for this pur 
pose, especially in the case of Work requiring 
careful registration-for instance, where nee 
dle-points, cross-marks, or dots, to be seen 
through the translucency of the paper, are to 
be observed, and more particularly where it 
is necessary to use dampened paper, with 
which the inaccuracies resulting from shrink 
age have to be averaged between fixed regis 
ter-marks. 
The object of my said in velution is to pro 
vide a series of feeders for a printing-press 
and means for successively presenting each 
feeder to the press to deliver the sheet carried 
thereby in accurate and correct register to said 
press. 
My said invention consists, essentially, in a 
series of independent feeders adapted to 
travel transversely across the path of the de 
lively-line of feed to the press and means for 
causing one of the feeders of the series to stop 
a sufficient period of time in front of the press 
at each operation thereof to deliver the sheet 
carried thereby in due register to said press 
and at the same time to permit each feeder, 
when not delivering, to remain at rest in po- . 
sition to receive its sheet ready for delivery 
during the entire period consumed by the 
| other feeders of the series in delivering their 
sheets successively to the press. 
My said invention further consists in cer 
tain novelty in the construction, arrangement, 
and combination of the various parts of the 
same, all of which I will now proceed to point 
out and describe. . 
In the drawings I have omitted as far as 
practicable all the details of construction of 
the press-such, for instance, as parts of the 
frame or housing, the inking, Wiping, and pol 
ishing devices, and all gearing not essential 
to illustrate the operation of the present in 
vention. 
Referring to said drawings, Figure I repre 
sents a top plan view of a portion of a rotary 
plate printing-press provided with my inven 
tion; Fig. 2, a side elevation of the same; Fig. 
3, a central longitudinal section, certain parts 
being shown in elevation; Fig. 4, a perspec 
tive of the feeder boards or frames and parts 
of their operative mechanism. Figs. 5, 6, 7, 
and 8 are enlarged details of the pinions op 
erating the feeder boards or frames; Fig. 9, a 
diagrammatic view of the cam-wheel for op 
erating the feeder-board levers; Figs. 10 and 
11, details of parts of the gearing; and Fig. 
12, a perspective of the locking mechanism, 
shown detached from the machine. 
Referring to the said drawings, the refer 
ence-numeral 1 denotes the frame or housing 
supporting the Various parts of my improved 
mechanism. Mounted in said frame is a shaft 
2, carrying the plate-cylinder 3, the latter 
having two diametrically opposite cut-away 
portions 4, leaving two intermediate seg 
mental surfaces 5, each adapted to receive a 
plate fastened thereto in any well-known 
manner. Mounted in the frame directly above 
said plate-cylinder is an impression-cylinder 
6, formed of substantially D shape-that is 
to say, having a cut-away portion 7. The 
shaft of this cylinder is suitably fixed in ad 
justable boxes 15 in the usual manner, a 
shown in Fig. 2. 
- 
On one end of the plate-cylinder shaft 2 
and outside the frame 1 are two gear-wheels 
S and ), fixed together and to said shaft, the 
outer one 9 of which is adapted to receive 
motion from any suitable source of power. 
The inner wheel 8 is divided on its periphery 
into alternate and equal segments of plain 
r 
55 
75 
95 
OC 
45 
 
2 
590,114 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IO 
IO 
25 
39 
35 
45 
55 
The pinions 
99 4 4. 
and toothed surfaces, there being two of each 
kind located diametrically opposite to each 
other, as shown in Fig. 10. Geared with this 
wheel 8 is a smaller gear-wheel 10, mounted 
on and fixed to the end of shaft of the in 
pression-cylinder 6. This gear-wheel has a 
short mutilated portion ll, for a purpose 
hereinafter described. The relative diame 
ters of the gear-wheels S and 10 are such that 
one of the toothed segments of the wheel 8 
will cause a substantially complete rotation 
of the gear 10 and through it the impression 
cylinder 6. 
It will thus be readily under 
stood that when the first tooth of gear 10, be 
ginning from the mutilated portion 11, is en 
gaged by the first tooth of one of the toothed 
segments of gear-wheel 8 the impression-cyl 
inder 6 will receive one complete rotation by 
the time gear-wheel S has been revolved 
through the arc covered by one of its toothed 
segments, but that when this movement is 
completed the mutilated portion 11 will come 
opposite to the succeeding plain segment of 
the wheel 8, thus stopping the rotation of 
gear 10 and leaving space for the passage of 
the succeeding plain surface of wheel 8 in 
its further rotation. Suitable plates 12, car 
rying starting-teeth 13, are attached to the 
inside surface of wheel S and are adapted to 
engage with similar teeth 14 on the impres 
sion-roller shaft to impart an initial move 
ment to gear 10 Sufficient to carry it past 
the mutilated portion 11 and cause it to en 
gage its teeth with those of the wheel 8. 
From the above description it will be read 
ily understood that the impression-roller re 
ceives two complete rotations and two com 
plete stoppages within a length of time equal 
to that taken for one rotation of gear-wheel 
8 and the plate-cylinder 3. Now by reason 
of the fact that the mutiliated portion 11 of 
gear-Weeel 10 and the cut-away portion 7 of 
the impression-cylinder are on the same side 
of their shaft and that the cut-away portions 
4 of the plate-cylinder and the plain surfaces 
of the gear-Wheel S correspond in position, as 
do the segmental surfaces 5, with the toothed 
portions of said gear-wheel 8 that the im 
pression-cylinder 6 will begin its rotation as 
the front end of each of the segmental sur 
faces 5 comes in position beneath it and will 
continue this rotation until the end of the 
segmental surface 5 is reached, when said ro 
tation will stop until the other segmental sur 
face 5 comes into position beneath said im 
pression-cylinder (3. 
Fixed to the plate-cylinder shaft 2 on the 
end opposite to the gear-wheels S and 9 and 
also outside the frame is a small gear-wheel 
16, which is meshed with a larger gear-wheel 
17, mounted on a suitable stud-shaft 18, hav 
ing its bearing in the main frame 1 of the 
machine. Also fixed to this stud-shaft 18, 
preferably outside the gear-wheel 17, is a 
wheel 19, having a wide periphery 20, in 
which is a continuous cam-groove hereinafter 
described in detail. The relative size of the 
gear-wheels 16 and 17 is such that gear-wheel 
17 will receive one rotation for three rotations 
of gear-wheel 16. 
Referring now to the feeding mechanism 
for the press, I have shown the same in this 
instance as consisting of three feeder-boards 
A, B, and C, mounted one above another and 
carried by suitable arms 21, which in turn 
are fixed to pinions 22, 23, and 24, pivoted On 
a vertical shaft 25, that is mounted in a frame 
26, arranged transversely to the main frame 
of the machine, said shaft being located di 
rectly opposite to the center of the plate and 
impression cylinders. These feeder-boards 
consist each of a base-plate brought to a 
feather-edge at its front and having side 
and rear strengthening-braces 27 and pro 
vided with two claws 28, fixed to the side 
braces and curved and projecting somewhat 
in front of the base-plate, as shown. The 
function of these claws Will be hereinafter 
set forth. 
23, and 24, carrying the 
feeder-boards, are provided on their under 
surfaces with hubs 29, 30, and 31, the hubs 
30 and 31 being provided with cam-recesses 
32 and 33, located diametrically opposite to 
the points of attachment of the arms 21, 
connecting the feeder-boards to said pinions. 
It will be observed by reference to Figs. 5 
and 6 that the cam-recess 33 is somewhat 
deeper than cam-recess 32. Fixed in the 
transverse frame 26 are two horizontal pins 
34 and 35, upon which the hubs 30 and 31 
rest, respectively. A leaf-spring 36, inter 
posed between the top of pinion 23 and the 
pin 35, serves to exert a constant downward 
pressure on the said pinion, while a coil 
spring 37 performs a similar function for pin 
ion 24, as will be readily understood. 
By referiing to Figs. 3 and 4 it will be 
seen that by reason of the fact that the cam 
recesses 32 and 33 are diametrically opposite 
to the points of attachment of the arms 21 
to the pinions each cam-recess will engage 
with its respective pin when the feeder-board 
carried by its arm is opposite to the pin-that 
is to say, in position to feed to the plate and 
impression cylinders. For instance, in Figs. 
2, 3, and 4 the feeder-board B is in position 
to deliver and the cam-recess 32 of pinion 23, 
carrying Said feeder-board, is engaged by the 
pin 32, thus permitting the pinion 23 and its 
feeder-board B to drop bodily a distance 
equal to the depth of said cam-recess 32. 
The object of this construction is to provide 
that each feeder-board shall be on a plane 
with the lowermost feeder-board A when in 
position to deliver, it being understood that 
said lower feeder-board A is always in a 
proper plane to deliver. The cam-recess 33 
in the upper pinion 24 is made sufficiently 
deeper than cam-recess 32 in pinion 23 to 
compensate for the increased distance neces 
sary for the feeder-board C to drop. 
Located in the inner side of the transverse 
! frame 26 are a series of three horizontal ways 
590,114 
95 
OO 
I o5 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
75 
adapted to support, therein the horizontal 
racks 38, 39, and 40, having their teeth mesh 
ing, respectively, with the pinions 22, 23, and 
24. Pivoted intermediate their lengths in 
suitable brackets 41, attached to the main 
frame 1 and on the same side thereof as the 
cam-wheel 19, are three levers 42,43, and 44. 
The upper ends of these levers are connected 
by means of intermediate links 45 to the ends 
of the racks, lever 42 being connected to rack 
38, lever 43 to rack 39, and lever 44 to rack 
40. The lower ends of the levers. 43 and 44 
are provided with elongated slots 46, in which 
are located pins 47 to engage said evers with 
the levers 4S and 49, pivoted intermediate 
their lengths to suitable brackets 50, attached 
to the main frame I, lever 43 being connected 
to lever 48 and lever 44 to lever 49. The 
free ends of these levers 48 and 49 are pro 
vided with stud-rollers 51 and 52, respec 
tively, adapted to remain at all times in the 
continuous cam-groove in the periphery 20 of 
wheel 19. The lever 42 has no second lever, 
but is connected directly with said cam 
groove by its stud-roller 53. Referring to 
said cam-groove, (shown in diagram in Fig. 9, 
in which the arrow indicates the direction of 
rotation,) it will be seen that the same con 
sists of two short central straight races 54 
and 55 and two long straight races 56 and 57, 
both of them parallel with the races 54 and 55, 
the race 56 lying inside and race 57 outside 
of said races 54 and 55. These races are con 
nected one to the other by diagonal steps 58, 
59, 60, and 61, as shown, their combined 
length being equal to that of one of the short 
races 54 55. 
It will be understood that the 
races 56 and 57 are of the same length, but 
are each as long as both the short races 54 
and 55 and one of the diagonal steps. The 
relative positions of the stud - roller's are 
shown in said Fig. 9, they being equidistant 
from each other, and from the same and the 
above description it will be understood that 
two of said stud-rollers always enter and leave 
tWO of the diagonal steps at the same time. 
Now by inspecting Fig. 4 it will be seen that 
all the feeder-boards to be in position to de 
liver must have their stud-roller's either in 
race 54 or 55, which is the position occu 
pied by feeder-board B in said figure, its 
stud-roller 51 being in race 54. By reason of 
the compound-lever construction connected 
with feeder-boards B and C it will be seen 
that for either one of these boards to be to 
the light of the feeder position it is necessary 
that its respective stud-roller 51 or 52 should 
move in race 57, while for them to be to the 
left of the feeder position their stud-rollers 
must move in race 56. On the contrary, 
feeder-board A, by reason of its having no 
compound lever, but merely the simple lever 
42, will lie to the right of the feeder position 
when its stud-roller 53 is in race 56 and to 
the left when in race 57. Now feeder-lboard 
B being in position to deliver, feeder-board A 
being to the right and feeder-board C to the 
left, the stud-rollers will be in the position 
shown in Fig. 9, but as the cam-wheel 19 ro 
tates stud-roller 52 will approach and enter 
diagonal step 60 and at the same time stud 
roller 51 will enter diagonal step 59, while 
stud-roller 53 remains in race 56. The result 
of this is that feeder-board A, controlled by 
stud-roller 53, will remain at rest to the right 
of the feeding position, while feeder-board 
B, controlled by stud-roller 51, will move from 
its feeding position to the left, and feeder 
board C, controlled by stud-roller 52, will 
move from its position to the left to the feed 
ing position. The next step is that stud 
roller 53 reaches diagonal step 60, thus mov 
ing feeder-board A into feeding position, 
while stud-roller 52, reaching diagonal step 
61, moves its feeder-board C to the right of 
the feeding position, leaving feeder-board B 
at rest to the left of the feeding position, its 
stud-roller 51 remaining in race 56. This op 
eration is continued indefinitely, it being ap 
parent that each feeder-board in turn re 
mains at rest alternately to one side and to 
the other until the other two feeder-boards 
have delivered to the plate and impression 
cylinders. 
In order to provide that the feeder-boards 
A, B, and C shall register properly with the 
plate and impression cylinders as they suc 
cessively come into position to deliver their 
sheets, I have provided a transverse rock 
shaft 62, mounted in the main frame 1 of the 
machine and located just beneath the de 
livery position of the feeder-boards. Fixed 
to this rock-shaft are the two fantail locking 
cams 63, as clearly seen in Fig. 12. 
Pivoted 
to the inside of the main frame 1 at 64 is a 
lever 65, connected to a crank 66 on shaft 62 
by intermediate link 67 and carrying inter 
mediate its length the roller 68, adapted to 
contact with the hub of the plate-cylinder 3. 
This hub has formed thereon the two diamet 
rically opposite cams 69, rising gradually to 
their extreme distance from the center of the 
hub, continuing thus for a short distance and 
then dropping off abruptly. These cams are 
so located on the hub of the plate-cylinder 
that the roller 68 is adapted to be operated 
on thereby a little before the front edge of 
each of the segmental surfaces 5 of the plate 
cylinder 3 passes beneath the impression 
cylinder 6, as shown in Fig. 2. A retracting 
spring 70 serves to retain the roller 68 against 
the hub of the plate-cylinder and to retract 
the locking-cams 63 to their lowermost posi 
tion out of the path of travel of the feeder 
boards. It will thus be seen that when the 
roller 6S is not in contact with one of the cams 
69 the locking-cams 63 will be horizontal and 
out of the path of the feeder-boards A, B, and 
C, but that when one of the cams 69 contacts 
with roller 68 it rocks lever 65 and, through 
links 67 and crank 66, rocks shaft 62 until 
the locking-cams 63 assume a vertical posi 
tion, in doing which their upper edges con 
tact with the sides of the feeder-board and 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
4. 
590,114 
IO 
25 
35 
-45 
55 
lock Said boards in position to deliver and 
accurately center the same. The abrupt 
dropping off of the cams 69 provides for the 
prompt dropping of the locking-cams 63 when 
the delivery is completed and the feeder 
board is ready to move away from the feed 
ing position. While I have shown and de 
scribed this particular registering mechan 
ism for the feeder-boards, I do not wish to be 
understood as limiting myself to this particu 
lar construction, as any other mechanism 
capable of performing the same function may 
be employed, if desired. 
In order to provide a protection and sup 
port for the operators laying on the paper 
and also a guide for the front ends of the 
feeder-boards, I employ two supporting-seg 
ments 71, mounted at their outer ends on suit 
able brackets 72 and at their inner ends in 
the cut-away recesses 73 in the main frame 
near the point of contact of the plate and im 
pression cylinders. These segments are pro 
vided on their inner surfaces with a series of 
three grooves 74, 75, and 76, the lower one 74 
of which is adapted to receive the claws 28 
of the feeder-board A, the middle one 75 the 
claws of feeder-board B, and the upper one 
76 the claws of feeder-board C, as shown in 
Fig. 4. It will be observed that the inner 
ends of these segments terminate a sufficient 
distance apart to leave the claws of the feeder 
board that is in position to deliver clear of the 
Same, as is the case with feeder-board B in 
Fig. 4. Moreover, the position of such seg 
ments with relation to the plate and impres 
sion rollers is such that the lower groove 74, 
carrying the claws of feeder-board A, is on a 
level with the proper delivery position, so 
that said plate A, when leaving said groove, 
will be ready to deliver. 
The increased height of feeder-boards Band 
C is compensated for by the operation of the 
cam-recesses 32 and 33 of the pinions 23 and 
24, hereinbefore described, which permit their 
respective feeder-boards to drop the required 
distance to the proper delivery position when 
they leave their grooves, and which promptly 
raise them again to the level of their respec 
tive grooves as they leave the delivery posi 
tion. It will be understood that these seg 
ments 71 are not essential to the proper op 
eration of the device, but are employed, if de 
sired, simply to afford a guide and support 
for the free ends of the feeder-boards when 
not delivering, and also to afford a protection 
for the operators laying on the paper who are 
stationed at D and E. 
From the above description the complete 
operation of the mechanism will be under 
stood to be as follows: The feeder-board B, 
for instance, being in position to deliver and 
being held in registered position by the lock 
ing-cams 63, engaging the sides thereof, as 
shown in Fig. 1, with the paper F to be deliv 
ered, projecting slightly beyond the feather 
edge thereof, the paper will be drawn off and 
in between one of the segmental surfaces 5 of 
the plate-cylinder 3 and the impression-roller 
6 as they are rotated, as hereinbefore de 
scribed, the construction and relative arrange 
ment of the various gear-wheels being such 
that one of said segmental surfaces 5 and the 
impression-roller 6 meet and engage just af 
ter each feeder-board has come to a stop and 
been registered in delivery position. The 
feeder-board remains in this position until 
the complete delivery of its paper, during 
which time the impression-roller makes sub 
stantially one complete rotation and the 
plate-cylinder moves the space of one of the 
segmental surfaces 5. Now as the rear end 
of the segmental surface 5 passes beneath the 
impression-roller 6 the latter stops, the lock 
ing-cams 63 drop down out of the path of the 
feeder-board B, and the latter moves to the 
left, while at the same time feeder-board C 
moves to the delivery position, feeder-board 
A remaining at rest to the right where the op 
erator at D is laying thereon the paper. As 
feeder-board B moves to the left, it is raised 
by the pin 34, leaving calm-recess 32, so that 
the claws 28 thereof will enter their proper 
groove 75 in segment 71. The time consumed 
by the feeder-boards B and C in shifting their 
positions is also occupied by one of the cut 
away portions 4 of the plate-cylinder 3 in 
passing beneath the impression-roller 6. Now 
as feeder-board C reaches the delivery posi 
tion it drops down to the proper delivery 
plane through the engagement of cam-re 
cess 33 with its pin 35 and is at the same 
time registered by the locking-cams (33. The 
paper thereon is then drawn off, as before, by 
the other segmental surface 5 and impression 
roller 6, which again begins to rotate. In 
like manner the feeder-board A is next moved 
to the delivery position and feeder-board C to 
the right, feeder-board Bremaining at rest to 
the left. Next feeder-board B moves to de 
livery position and feeder-board A to the left, 
feeder-board C remaining at rest to the right. 
Next C goes to delivery, B to the right, and 
A remains at rest to the left. Next A goes 
to delivery, C to the left, and B remains at 
rest at the right, and finally B goes to delivery 
and. A to the right, C remaining at rest to the 
left. This brings the feeder-boards back to 
the original position shown in Fig. 1, the cam 
wheel 19 having made one complete rotation, 
the plate-cylinder 3 three rotations, carrying 
a segmental plate-Supporting surface 5 six 
times past the impression-roller, and the latter 
six intermittent rotations, thus corresponding 
in number with the number of presentations 
of the feeder-boards A, B, and C at delivery, 
each having presented themselves twice. 
It will thus be seen that I may run the press 
at the rate of twenty or more impressions a 
minute and at the same time allow to the two 
operators laying on the paper a length of time 
equal to that occupied by two deliveries in 
Which to lay on and adjust each sheet. 
While I have illustrated in the present con 
struction a series of three oscillating feeder 
75 
9 O 
CC 
O 
II5 
I 25 
590,114 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
so 
boards, it will be understood that I do not 
limit the scope of my invention to this num 
ber, as they may be increased, if desired, by 
making the necessary changes in the operat 
ing mechanism; nor do I wish to be under 
stood as limiting myself to oscillating feeder. 
boards, as they may be arranged to travel in 
a Straight line transversely across the line of 
feed to the press, or to revolve about a com 
mon center, at the same time moving trans 
versely across the line of feed, the gist of the 
invention being that there shall be independ 
ently-movable multiple feeder-boards succes 
sively presenting themselves in position to 
deliver to the press. It will also be apparent 
that this general construction may be em 
ployed in devices analogous to printing 
presses-that is to say, devices in which a 
lapid feed is a desideratum-and I do not, 
therefore, limit myself to its application to 
printing-presses. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a feeding device, the combination of 
a series of independently-movable feeders 
adapted to be successively presented in de 
livery position, at the same point, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
2. In a feeding device, the combination of 
a series of independently - movable feeders 
adapted to move transversely across the path 
of the line of feed and to successively stop in 
delivery position, substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. In a feeding device, the combination of 
a series of independently-movable feeders 
adapted to successively deliver to the same 
point, each feeder adapted to remain at rest 
in position to receive during the delivery of 
the other feeders, substantially as shown and 
described. 
4. A printing-press provided with inde 
pendently-movable multiple feeder-boards 
adapted to be successively presented in de 
livery position at the same point, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
5. A printing-press provided with a series 
of independently-movable feeders adapted to 
be successively presented to the press at the 
same point in position to deliver, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
6. A printing-press provided with a series 
of independently-movable feeders adapted to 
be successively presented to the press in po 
sition to deliver, and means for accurately 
registering said feeders independently when 
in said position to deliver, substantially as 
shown and described. 
7. A printing-press provided with a series 
of independently-movable feeders adapted to 
move transversely across the path of the line 
of feed to the press and to successively stop 
in position to deliver to said press, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
8. In a printing-press, the combination with 
a printing - couple, of a series of independ 
ently-movable feeder-boards, means for suc 
cessively presenting the same to substantially 
the delivery position, and means for position 
ing the same independently to the proper de 
livery plane, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
9. A printing-press provided With a series 
of independently-movable feeders adapted to 
move transversely across the path of the line 
of feed to the press and to successively stop 
in position to deliver to said press, and means 
for successively positioning said feeders to the 
proper delivery plane, substantially as shown 
and described. 
10. A printing-press provided with a series 
of independently-movable feeders adapted to 
move transversely in the arc of a circle across 
the path of the line of feed to the press and 
to successively stop in position to deliver to 
said press, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
11. A printing-press provided with a series 
of independently-movable feeders adapted to 
move transversely in the arc of a circle across 
the path of the line of feed to the press and 
to successively stop in position to deliver to 
said press, and means for successively posi 
tioning said feeders to the proper delivery 
plane, substantially as shown and described. 
12. A printing-press provided with a series 
of independently-movable feeders adapted to 
move transversely in the arc of a circle across 
the path of the line of feed to the press and 
to successively stop in position to deliver to 
said press, means for successively positioning 
said feeders to the proper delivery plane, and 
means for accurately registering said feeders 
when in position to deliver, substantially as 
shown and described. 
13. A printing-press provided with a series 
of independently - movable feeder - boards 
adapted to vibrate transversely in the arc of 
a circle across the path of the line of feed to 
the press and to successively stop in position 
to deliver to said press, substantially as shown 
and described. 
14. A printing-press provided with a series 
of independently-movable feeders adapted to 
successively deliver to said press, at the same 
point, each feeder adapted to remain at rest 
in lying on position during the delivery of 
the other feeders, substantially as shown and 
described. 
15. A printing-press provided with a series 
of feeder-boards adapted to vibrate trans 
versely in the arc of a circle across the path 
of the line of feed to the press and to succes 
sively stop in position to deliver to said press, 
each feeder-board adapted to alternately re 
main at rest on each side of the delivery po 
sition during the delivery of the other feeder 
boards, substantially as shown and described. 
16. In a printing-press, the combination 
with a printing-couple, and a series of feeder 
boards adapted to vibrate transversely in the 
arc of a circle across the path of the line of 
feed to the press and to successively stop in 
. 
. 
7 O 
75 
85 
95 
IOC) . 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
IO 
5 
590,114 
25 
position to deliver to said press, of a series of from the delivery position, substantially as 
racks for Operating said feeder-boards, and a 
shown and described. 
19. In a printing - press, the combination 
cam-wheel geared to the plate-cylinder and 
adapted to operate the racks and feeder 
with a series of feeder-boards, and mechan 
is in for causing the same to Successively de 
boards through intermediate mechanism, sub 
liver to the press, of claws secured to and pro 
stantially as shown and described. 
jecting from each side of the delivery ends of 
17. In a printing - press, the combination 
said feeder-boards, segmental supports hav 
with a series of feeders adapted to succes 
ing individual grooves for the claws of each 
sively deliver to said press, of a cam-wheel 
Operated by the press mechanism and having 
feeder-board and adapted to receive and sup 
port the same during their travel to and from 
differently-disposed races, and intermediate 
the delivery position, and means for adjust- 35. 
mechanism connecting the races of said cam 
ing said feeder-boards to the proper delivery 
Wheel independently with each feeder, sub 
plane when said feeder-boards are in the path 
stantially as shown and described. 
of the line of delivery to the press, substan 
18. In a printing - press, the combination 
tially as shown and described. 
With a series of feeder-boards, and mechan 
ism for causing the same to successively de 
in presence of two witnesses. 
liver to the press, of claws secured to and pro 
jecting from each side of the delivery ends of 
said feeder-boards, and segmental supports 
having individual grooves for the claws of 
each feeder-board and adapted to receive and 
support the same during their travel to and 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 4o 
JUI) AII TOURO ROBERTSON. 
Witnesses: 
II. VICTOR KEANE, 
D. E. WOODHULL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590214.txt	W. DALL, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
DENTAL FURN ACE, 
Patented Sept. 21, 1897. 
Az. 2 
2 
2III 
1Trava, 
AWA 
2: 
%. 
23. 
VSH- a. 3. 
%Naz. 
SN2 it. 
A  3. 
2 3 N. NK 2 
VS. W. 
SAA / fift 
II, 66. El Y2 
 
. Se S % 
--SS 
5 
2 
g 
s N S. 
2. 
7 of 
 
 
2 
%2 
* 
(No Model.) 
No. 590,214. 
Az Z 
 
 
/ 
A 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
G 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 590,214. 
W. DALL, 
DENTAL FURNACE. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept. 21, 1897. 
22.6 
3%22 NZ2/ Wise, 24 
3viue vitov 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM DALL OF GLASGOW, SCOTLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THE DENTAL 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, LIMITED, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
D ENTAL FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,214, dated September 2. 1897. 
Application filed February 1, 1897, Serial No. 621,517, (No model.) , 
. 
IO 
To all, whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that, I, WILLIAM DALL, den 
tal Surgeon, a subject of the Queen of Great 
Britain, residing at 8 Newton Place, Charing 
Cross, Glasgow, Scotland, have invented a 
certain new and useful Furnace Suitable for. 
Dentists, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
Figure 1 is a front elevation, and Fig. 2 a. 
Vertical section, of a furnace constructed ac 
cording to this invention. Fig. 3 is a plan of 
the inner casing with the covers removed. 
Fig. 4 is a local section. Fig. 5 shows a modi 
fied form of muffle. Fig. 6 is a detail view, on 
an enlarged scale and in section, showing the 
manner of connecting the muffle to the cas 
ing. Fig. 7 is a detail view, in perspective 
and partly in section, of the casing and its 
lining and showing also the entrance to the 
muffle. 
C is an outer case provided with a cover b 
and a foot c to standon a bench. d is an in 
ner casing lined with fire-claye and provided 
With a cover f, lined with fire-clay g. 
h is a muffle, of platinum or other suitable 
material. Its front enters a slot in the cas 
ing d and fire-clay e, and is held there by a 
downward projection on the cover fand fire 
clay g, its flanged rim resting on the outside 
of the casing d. 
j is a metal plate fitting a square hole in 
the casing C and screwed to the casing d and 
cover f. 
fisa table made in one piece with the plate j. 
h', Fig. 3, are two wires or pins fixed to the 
muffle h and entering the fire-clay e, so sup 
porting the rear end of the muffle without ob 
structing the passage round it. 
lc is a cock closing a sight-hole through the 
casings a, and d and fire-clay e. 
lis a burner consisting of a metal blockhav 
ing a conical hole in it covered with wire 
gauzel. 
m, is a pipe screwing into the block land 
secured by a nut m'. 
n is a pipe directed slightly upward, con 
nected to an air-blast, and carrying a cock n'. 
o is a circular shutter carrying a handle o' 
and free to turn on the pipe in. It has open 
ings o' in it, which can be made to coincide, 
as shown, with openings m in the pipe m, or 
by turning the shutter the latter openings 
can be covered. 
a prolongation of the 
m* is a pipe forming 
pipe in. 
p is a three-way cock on the pipe m. It 
is shown closed, so shutting off the gas, which 
is supplied at the bottom of the pipe m^. By 
giving it a quarter-turn the gas is turned full 
on, and by giving it a half-turn the main Sup 
ply is cut off, but a small quantity of gas en 
ters by the by-pass pipe q. When the full 
heat of the furnace is required, the gas is 
turned full on, the cock n' on the air-blast pipe 
is opened, and the openings mare closed. On 
the other hand, when only a moderate heat 
is required the gas is only admitted by the 
by-pass q, the cock n' is closed, and the open 
ings m are uncovered. The burner then 
Works as a Bunsen burner. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of a channber, an open 
ing in its side, a muffle projecting through the 
opening, a flange around the Outside of the 
mouth of the muffle, and a plate holding the 
flange against the outside of the chamber. 
2. The combination of a chamber, an open 
ing in its side, a muffle projecting through the 
opening, a flange around the outside of the 
mouth of the muffle, a plate holding the flange 
against the outside of the chamber, and pins 
fixed to the rear of the muffle and entering 
the side of the chamber. 
3. The combination of a casing, a lining of 
fire-clay, a slot in the casing and fire-clay, a 
muffle whose mouth fits the slot, a cover, a 
fire-clay lining to the cover, downward pro 
jections of the cover and fire-clay filling the 
slot above the muffle and a burner beneath 
the muffle. 
4. The combination of a furnace, a burner 
in the furnace, a gas-supply pipe leading to 
the burner, an air-opening in the pipe, means 
for closing the opening, an air-blastpipe open 
ing into the pipe between the air-openings 
and the burner, and means for shutting off 
the blast. 
5. The combination of a chamber, a muffle 
projecting intoit, a burner beneath the muffle, 
a pipe leading to the burner, openings admit 
ting air into the pipe, means for closing them, 
an air-blast pipe opening into the pipe be 
 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
Oc 
- 
9o 
 
2 
- 
590,214 
tween the air-openings and the burner, means 
for shutting off the blast, and means for Sup 
plying gas to the pipe. 
6. The combination of a chamber, a muffle 
projecting into it, a space round the sides and 
rear of the muffle, a burner beneath the muffle, 
a pipe leading to the burner, openings admit 
ting air into the pipe, means for closing them, 
an air-blast pipe opening into the pipe be 
tween the air-openings and the burner, means 
for shutting off the blast, and means for sup 
plying gas to the pipe. 
7. The combination of a chamber, a muffle 
projecting into it, a space round the sides and 
rear of the muffle supports for the rear of the 
muffle, a burner beneath the muffle, a pipe 
leading to the bulner, openings admitting air 
into the pipe, means for closing them, an air 
blast pipe opening into the pipe between the 
openings and the burner, means for shutting 
off the blast and means for supplying gas to 
the pipe. 
8. The combination of a casing, a lining of 
fire-clay, a slot in the casing and fire-clay, a 
muffle whose mouth fits the slot, a cover, a 
fire-clay lining to the cover, downward pro 
jections of the cover and fire-clay filling the 
slot above the muffle, a burner beneath the 
muffle, a pipe leading to the burner, an air 
blast pipe connected to the pipe, means for 
cutting it off, openings admitting air into the 
pipe, means for closing them and means for 
Supplying gas to the pipe. 
9. The combination of a chamber, a muffle 
projecting into it, a burner beneath the muffle, 
a pipe leading to the burner, an air-blast pipe 
connected to the pipe, means for shutting off 
the blast openings admitting air into the first 
pipe, means for closing them and a three-way 
cock constructed and arranged to admit either 
a full supply or a partial supply of gas to the 
pipe or cut off the supply. 
10. The combination of a chamber, a muffle 
projecting into it, a space round the sides and 
rear of the muffle, a burner beneath the muffle, 
a pipe leading to the burner, an air-blast pipe 
connected to the pipe, means for shutting off 
the blast, openings admitting air into the pipe, 
means for closing them and a three-way cock 
constructed and arranged to admit either a 
full supply or a partial supply of gas to the 
pipe or cut off the supply. 
11. The combination of a chamber, a muffle 
projecting into it, a space round the sides and 
rear of the muffle, supports for the rear of the 
muffle, a burner beneath the muffle, a pipe 
leading to the burner, an air-blast pipe con 
nected to the pipe, means for shutting off the 
blast, openings admitting air into the pipe, 
means for closing them and a three-way cock 
constructed and arranged to admit either a 
full supply or a partial Supply of gas to the 
pipe or cut off the supply. 
12. The combination of a casing, a lining of 
fire-clay, a slot in the casing and fire-clay, a 
muffle whose mouth fits the slot, a cover, a 
fire-clay lining to the cover, downward pro 
jections of the cover and fire-clay filling the 
slot above the muffle, a burner beneath the 
muffle, a pipe leading to the burner, an air 
blast pipe connected to the pipe, means for 
shutting off the blast, openings admitting air 
into the pipe, means for closing them and a 
three-way cock constructed and arranged to 
admit either a full supply or a partial Supply 
of gas to the pipe or cut off the supply. 
13. The combination of a chamber, a muffle 
projecting into it, a burner beneath the muffle, 
a gas-pipe leading to the burner, a three-Way 
cock interposed in the main passage of said 
pipe, and a supplementary side passage Com 
municating with the cock and with the pipe 
between the burner and the cock. 
WILLIAM DALL. 
Witnesses: 
W. PERCY CARPMALI, 
W. M. IIARRIS. 
45 
55 
65 
75 
IO 
15 
25 
35 
40 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590314.txt	J. KILBURN, 
BEARING FOR, SPINDLES, 
Patented Sept. 21, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
?-- 
???N 
N 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SSSSSS 
JOHN KILBURN, OF BELMONT, MASSACHUSETTS. 
BEARING FOR SPN DL.E.S. : 
- 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,314, dated September 21, 1897. 
Application filed December 2, 1896, Serial No. 614,250, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To (t,ZZ t.U 7ho7na, it, 1nn,(tg/ co1ace7?7n.: 
Be it known that I, JOHN KILBURN, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing at Belmont, 
in the county of Middlesex and State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Bearings for Spindles: 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sae. 
As spindles of the self-centeringor top 
type are commonly mounted it is of the 
greatest importance that the bolster or tubu 
lar suppOrt Within Which the spindle rotates 
should be freely movable to allow the spindle 
to find its true center of rotation under an 
unbalanced load and that the bolster should 
at the same time be restrained from rotation 
with the spindle. 
Various devices have heretofore been pro 
posed to secure the results above suggested, 
but such devices, in so far as I am informed 
of the art, have been found to be objection 
able in that they impede the operation of the 
spindle or are too sensitive and liable to get 
out of repair; and the principal object of the 
present invention is to provide a simple and 
durable device to be substituted therefor. 
Another object of the present invention is 
to provide an improved means for adjusting 
the step or bearing-point of the bottom of the 
spindle to raise the spindle in the bolster to 
prevent the pintle of the spindle, which com 
monly tapers toward its lower end, from 
binding upon the Walls of the bolster as the 
lower end of the spindle wears off or into the 
Step. 
To the above ends the present invention 
consists of the devices and combinations of 
devices hereinafter more particularly setforth 
in this specification, and pointed out in the 
The present invention is illustrated in the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section through a 
spindle-support embodying the same, show 
ing the spindle in elevation. Fig. 2 is a ver 
tical section through the lower portion of the 
bolster-case, parts appearing in elevation, 
showing a modified form of the present in 
claims. 
- 
vention. Figs. 3 and 4 are similar viewsillus 
trating other modifications. 
In the drawings, A represents the spindle, 
having the usual tapered pintle C, B its 
whirl, C the bolster, conveniently surrounded 
by the usual wicking or other elastic packing 
c, D the bolster-case, and E the spindle-rail, 
all of which parts, except as hereinafter 
specified, may be and conveniently are of 
any usual or convenient construction and in 
themselves form no essential feature of the 
present invention. 
H represents the rest or bearing for the 
lower end of the spindle, commonly termed 
the step. 
I have shown in the drawings two forms of 
connections for the step and bolster, in one 
of which the step H is inserted with a tight 
driving fit in the bottom of the bolster C, 
(see Figs. 1, 2, and 3,) an arrangement to be 
hereinafter referred to, and in the other the 
step H" is threaded and screwed into threaded 
bearings in the bottom of bolster C, a check 
nut C being provided to lock the step H in 
the required position. 
In accordance with the present invention 
the step His supported on a pintle L, which 
rests upon a suitable support and is free to 
tip laterally in all directions. 
As shown in the drawings, the pintle L is 
circular in section and slightly less in diame 
ter than the bore of the bolster-case D, so that 
its lateral movement is limited by contact 
there with; but I desire to say that while I 
prefer to make the pintle L of substantially 
the form shown, on account of the strength 
and simplicity of the arrangement; I do not 
wish to limit my invention thereto, as the 
pintle L may be varied in form and relative 
size and other means provided to limit its 
lateral movement without any departure from 
the present invention. 
The pintle L rests upon a suitable support, 
preferably the base of the bolster-case D, and 
the base l of said pintle L is shaped to allow 
the pintle to tip freely, as hereinbefore stated, 
the basel, as shown in the drawings, being 
conical in shape. 
The step H (or H") is loosely connected with 
the pintle L either by a tongue p, projected 
therefrom and engaging a recess p" upon the 
??, 
25 
35 
5 O 
OO 
2 
590,314 
pintle L, (see Figs. 1, 2, and 4,) or by a re 
verse arrangement, in which the tongue p is 
formed upon the pintle L and the recess p 
in the step H, (see Fig. 3,) or by other suit 
able means which will not interfere with the 
free lateral movement of the pintle. 
To restrain the bolster C from rotation, I 
prefer to restrain the pintle L by its connec 
tion with the bolster-case and the bolster C 
by its connection with the pintle L. 
I have shown in the drawings two methods 
of restraining the pintle L from rotation, one 
by means of the pins l', driven through the 
walls of the bolster-case D (see Figs. 1, 3, 
and 4) and engaging vertical slots l in the 
pintle L, and the other by means of the po 
lygonal tonguel, projected from the pintle 
L and engaging a correspondingly-shaped re 
cess l in the base of the bolster-case D. It 
is evident, however, that other methods of 
restraining the pintle L. may be used without 
any departure from the essential features of 
the present invention. 
To restrain the bolster C from rotation with 
reference to the pintle, the tongue p (or p) 
and the recess p' (or p) are formed of a simi 
lar shape in section, the recess p' (or p) be 
ing slightly larger in section, so that the 
tongue p (or p) by its engagement there with 
restrains the stepH, and hence the bolster c, 
from rotation . without interfering with the 
- free lateral movement of the pintle L or 
bolster C. 
It will be noted that in the form of my in 
vention shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 of the draw 
ings, in which the driving-step His supported 
upon the pintle L, the pintle L forms a firm 
support for the step H, capable of withstand 
ing the shock of a blow on the bolster suffi 
cient to drive the step into the bolster, so 
that the step H can be adjusted within the 
bolster C without removing the bolster from 
the case, a feature which I deem of great im 
portance as greatly facilitating the adjust 
ment of the bolster and step to secure the 
proper position of the spindle in the bolster. 
Having thus described my invention and its 
mode of operation, I claim as novel and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
States 
1. In a spindle-support the combination 
with a bolster, of a step held by a driving fit 
within the bolster, and a loosely-held pintle 
supporting the step, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
2. In a spindle-support the combination 
with a bolster, of a step movable along the 
bolster, a loosely-held pintle supporting the 
step free to tip laterally in all directions, and 
a loose connection between the step and pin 
tle, substantially as described. 
3. In a spindle-support the combination 
with a bolster, of a step held by a driving fit 
25 
35 
45 
55 
so 
within the bolster, and a support for the step 
within the bolster-case, formed and arranged 6 
5 
to support the step while the bolster is driven 
onto the same, substantially as described. 
4. In a spindle-support the combination 
with the bolster-case and bolster, of a step 
carried by the bolster, a loosely-held pintle 7 
free to tip laterally in all directions support 
ing the step, connections between the pintle 
and bolster - case and the pintle and step 
whereby the bolster is restrained from rota 
7 
tion, substantially as described. 
5 
5. In a spindle-support, the combination - 
with the bolster of a loosely-held pintle Sup 
porting the same and free to tip laterally 
in all directions, and means for restraining 
the pintle from rotation substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. In a spindle-support, the combination 
with the bolster-case and the bolster, of a 
loosely-held pintle supporting the bolster and 
free to tip laterally in all directions, said pin- 85 - - - 
tle being provided with a body portion fitted 
loosely to the bore of the bolster-case and ar 
ranged to limit the lateral movement of the 
pintle by contact with the bolster-case, sub 
stantially as described. 
7. In a spindle-support, the combination 
with the bolster and a step movable along the 
bolster, of a pintle free to tip laterally in all 
directions supporting the step, and a cop 
erating tongue and recess upon the step and 9 
5 
pintle, whereby the step is held in position 
upon the pintle without interfering with the 
lateral movement of the pintle, substantially 
as described. 
8. In a spindle-support the combination 
with the bolster-case and bolster, of a step, a 
pintle supporting the step, engaging polygo 
nal tongues and recesses upon the step, pintle 
and bolster-case, substantially as described. 
9. In a spindle-support, the combination 1 
with a bolster, of a step within the bolster 
movable longitudinally along the bolster, and 
a pintle free to tip in all directions support 
ing the step, substantially as described. 
10. In a spindle-support, the combination I 
with a bolster, of a step movable longitudi 
nally within the bolster, and a pintle sup 
porting the step and restraining it from rota 
tion, substantially as described. 
11. In a spindle-support, the combination II 
with a bolster having a step fitted within the 
same, of a loosely-held pintle supporting the 
step, and free to tip laterally in all direc 
tions, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature. I 
2 
in presence of two witnesses. 
9 
O 
to 
5 
JOIIN KILBURN. 
Witnesses: 
A. E. WHYTE, 
A. O. ORNE. 
I. ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590416.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 590,4l 6, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
R. T., JONES. 
FOOT SUPPORT. 
Patented Sept. 21, 1897. 
Witnesses: 
InVENT OFR: 
-64a 6. czyca 
7 c. 4-4-1 
-te torris Peters ce. Photo-Ho Washington..."C. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 590,416. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
R. T. JONES. 
FOOT SUPPORT. 
Patented Sept. 21, 1897. 
- 
-------- 
f 
f 
VMTNESS es: 
C.J./3--tory. 
-6%. 6 2-car 
In Mento Fr; 
7-A-V 2. 
17 Cal 2-4----- 
roans Peters co. HoTo-Tho...washingto.o. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD T. JONES, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
Foot-SUPPORT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,416, dated September 21, 1897. 
Application filed June 29, 1897, Serial No. 642,779. (No model.) 
55 
75 
m 
made in two pieces ff', which overlap each 
To all whon, it notif concern: 
other, and a stay-plate g reinforces the said 
Beit known that I, RICHARD T. JONES, a 
overlapped parts, which are provided with 
citizen of the United States, residing at Balti 
more, in the State of Maryland, have invented 
holes I, and bolts h' to enable said upright 
heel-plate to be adjusted in height. The 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Foot-Supports, of which the following is a 
lower piece f of the heel-plate is attached by 
specification. 
bolts to the rear end of the foundation-plate 
This invention relates to an improved foot 
C. The upturned part d of the foundation 
Support for persons having one leg shorter 
plate is attached by a rivet c to the turned 
up part b of the inclined plate A. A toe 
than the other. 
part I is jointed in front of the upturned part 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
d of the foundation-plate. This toe part may 
mechanical foot-support to be worn on the 
foot of the short leg, which support shall be 
be jointed thereto in any preferred manner, 
adjustable both as to length and height in 
but in this instance the joint consists of a 
order to adapt it to be worn by young persons 
thin flexible stripi, which allows the toe part 
to bend upward. Where the toe part I ad 
who have not attained their growth and who 
joins the upturned part d, said toe part has 
for that reason may desire to gradually in 
an upbent end k, and a V-shaped spring of 
crease the size of the support as the foot 
metall is between said upturned part d and 
grows. 
end k. This spring keeps the toe part Inor 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
mally down. 
The toe part extends forward . 
from this joint, then curves upward, as at k", 
Figure 1 is a side view of an ordinary shoe 
and the Special shoe or foot-covering which 
and backward, as at , and the end rests 
on the said upturned part d, where it slides 
contains the mechanical foot-support. Fig. 2 
shows the special shoe or foot-covering and 
whenever the toe part bends on its flexible 
joint, as it does when the wearer takes a step. 
by broken lines indicates the inside mechan 
The foundation-plate C has at each side, 
ical foot-support. Fig. 3 is a vertical section 
of the adjustable mechanical foot-support 
where the turned-up part bor toe-rest of the 
inclined plate occurs, a side inward-curved 
for limbs three inches and over too short. 
plate in. These opposite side plates project 
Fig. 4 is a top view of same. Figs. 5 and 6 
up from the said foundation-plate and curve 
are views of a modified form of adjustable 
mechanical foot-support for limbs less than 
over toward each other and meet the turned 
up toe part b. Thus said toe part b and the 
three inches too short. 
The inclined supporting-plate A (see Figs. 
two side plates m, together form a box-toe for 
2, 3, and 4) is the surface on which the sole 
the foot. 
The inclined plate A has below the toe part 
of the foot rests. This plate is made in two 
pieces b b', which overlap each other at the 
a downbent flange in at each side, and a rivet 
n' is employed to connect each flange with 
center, and both pieces are provided with a 
one of the side plates in. This gives stabil 
central row of holes c and bolts c', by means 
ity and strength for supporting the box-toe. 
of which the length of the plate may be in 
From this description it will be seen that I 
creased or diminished to suit the size of the 
have provided a mechanical foot-support that 
foot. The toe end of plate A is turned up at 
b. A foundation-plate C is designed to rest 
is adjustable both as to length and height, 
and by changing the adjustments the same 
on the inner sole of a shoe and extends from 
support may be worn by persons, say, twelve, 
the heel to the point where the ball-joint of 
fourteen, sixteen, or eighteen years of age. 
the foot would ordinarily occur and here 
turns upward, as at d. This plate is also 
This mechanical foot-support is to be in 
made in two pieces d' d', which overlap each 
serted in a leather cover or heelless shoe O. 
(See Figs. 2 and 1.) The inclined plate A 
other, and the said pieces are both provided 
will be covered on top with a soft insole of 
with holese and bolts e', by means of which 
the plate may be adjusted as to its length. 
any suitable material. The foot of the lame 
At the rear or heel is an upright plate F, leg will be inserted in the shoe O and the 
m 
9o 
CO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
590,416 
as 
45 
So 
55 
Go 
75 
foundation-plate also adjustable as to length; 
an upright heel-plate made in two pieces and 
adjustable as to height; and a toe part jointed 
at the front end of said foundation-plate. 
2. A mechanical foot - Support having in 
combination an inclined supporting - plate 
made in two pieces adjustable as to length 
and at the toe end turned up as at, by a foun 
dation-plate made in two pieces which are 
adjustable as to length, and which at its front 
where the ball-joint of the foot would ordi 
narily occur, is turned upward as at, d and 
a toe-piece jointed to said turned-up part 
said toe-piece extending forward from the 
joint curving upward, as at, c', and backward 
as at, ', with its end resting on said turned 
up part. 
3. A mechanical foot-support having in 
combination an upright heel-plate; an in 
clined supporting-plate made in two pieces 
adjustable as to length and the rear end con 
tacting with said heel-plate; and a founda 
tion-plate made in two pieces which are ad 
justable as to length. 
4. A mechanical foot-support having in 
combination an inclined plate whose toe end 
is turned up; a foundation-plate having at 
the point where the ball of the foot would 
ordinarily occur an upturned part, d, which 
is attached to said turned-up toe end on the 
inclined plate; a toe-piece jointed in front of 
said upturned part on the foundation-plate; 
and Opposite side plates, m, attached to the 
foundation-plate and projecting up curving 
toward each other and meeting the said 
turned-up toe end. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
RICHARD T. JONES. 
Witnesses: 
CHAPIN A. FERGUSON, 
CHARLES B. MANN, Jr. 
sole of the foot-rest on the covered incline 
plate A. A lace p will secure this cover and 
support the foot. When the shoe O is worn, 
it is to be inserted into an ordinary street 
shoe Q and secured by a lace g. 
In Figs. 5 and 6 is shown a modification of 
mechanical foot-support for limbs that are 
three inches and less too short. This modi 
fication shows the same features of adjust 
ment both as to length and height. In this 
case the inclined supporting-plate A'is turned 
up at r to form a toe-plate, but thence ex 
tends forward and down at land then back 
and becomes part of the foundation-plate C". 
Thus in this case the inclined plate A'is thin, 
and the foundation-plate C also is thin, and 
both plates at the toe-rest, where the ball of 
the foot would ordinarily occur, may yield a 
little under the weight of the person walking. 
The heel-plate E in this case is not adjust 
able in height, but the rear end of the in 
clined plate A' is adjustable as to height by 
holes S and bolts S' in the back of heel-plate, 
and also holes t and bolts t' at the side of 
heel-plate. These adjustments permit the in 
clined plate at the heel to be set higher or 
The construction of plates A" and C 
lower. 
shown in Figs. 5 and 6 enables a shoe to be 
made for a person whose leg is three inches 
or less too short. 
In case of repairs being needed for the me 
chanical foot-Support shown in either of the 
figures of the drawings the same may readily 
be made by a mechanic anywhere. 
All the metal plates of this mechanical foot 
Support may be made, and preferably should 
be made, of aluminium, in order thereby to 
have it as light as possible. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A mechanical foot-support having in 
combination an inclined supporting-plate 
made in two pieces adjustable as to length; a 
m 
O 
I5 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590516.txt	(No Model.) 
E. E. DULIER, 
APPARATUS FOR CLEARING SMOKE, 
No. 590,516, 
. 
Patented Sept. 21, 1897. 
"" 
5. 
 
Inventor Sa-ass-swo. 
54, -3se. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD E. DULIER, OF RICHMOND, ENGLAND. 
APPARATUS FOR CLEARING SM OKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,516, dated September 21, 1897. 
Application filed January 11, 1897, Serial No. 618,874. (No model.) 
O 
2C) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD EUGENE DU 
LIER, a citizen of Belgium, residing at Clar 
ence House, Richmond, in the county of Sur 
rey, England, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Apparatus for Clear 
ing Smoke, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
Myinvention relates to apparatus for clear 
ing smoke of its sooty and sulfurous ingredi 
ents, as I shall describe, referring to the ac 
companying drawing, which is a vertical sec 
tion of a smoke-flue provided with apparatus 
according to my invention. 
I bend the flue: in S form, with an ascend 
ing limb A, an enlarged descending limb B, 
and another ascending limb C. In the limb 
A, I provide a nozzle D, distributing steam, 
which mingles with the ascending smoke. 
At the top of the descending limb B, I pro 
vide a nozzle E, distributing water, which 
mingles with the descending smoke and steam. 
In the enlarged part of B, I fix a core F, hav 
ing projecting helical blades G, and under 
them an upwardly-projecting part P, perfo 
rated at its base. The core F is reduced and 
threaded at its ends, as at f, and said ends 
are passed through apertures formed in cross 
bars or supports f', fixed in any suitable man 
ner in the upper and lower portions of the 
descending limb B. The core F is firmly 
fixed in the supports f' and securely held 
against rotation by nutsf, tapped over the 
threaded and reduced ends f. The blades G. 
are fixed on the core F, so as to be held fixed 
or stationary on the latter. The mixture of 
smoke, Steam, and Water being caused to 
travel in a helical course between the blades 
G has its heavier particles driven by cen 
trifugal action against the wall of the limb 
B, on which the sooty and sulfurous ingredi 
ents mixed with water are deposited. They 
descend through the perforations P in the 
part P to the bend II, whence they are run 
off by a pipe K, leading to a drain or other 
discharge. The combustion - gases cleared 
from the sooty and sulfurous matters ascend 
the limb C. 
Having thus described the nature of this 
invention and the best means I know of car 
rying the same into practical effect, I claim 
A smoke-clearing apparatus, consisting of 
an ascending limb provided with a steam 
nozzle, a descending limb connected at its 
upper end with the ascending limb, an as 
cending limb having a drain at its base and 
connected with the said descending limb, a 
water-nozzle delivering water into the de 
scending limb, fixed helical blades by which 
the smoke, steam and water are forced to 
travel in a helical path and the heavier par 
ticles are driven by centrifugal action against 
the wall of the descending limb, and means 
for withdrawing the deposits from the lower 
end of the limb containing the fixed helical 
blades, substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 29th day of 
December, A. D. 1896. 
EDWARD E. DULIER. 
Witnesses: 
T. J. OSMAN, 
FRED C. HARRIS. 
45 
55 
65 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590616.txt	(N 0 Model.) 
No. 590,616. 
H, A, HOUSE, 
COUPLING DRIVING SHAFTS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Sept. 28, 1897. 
Ys 
t 
In 
ES 
A. 
mill s M 
I 
------All------------- 
 
--------------- 
. 
. 
. . a. as w aw sh 
ase 
E C 
eESSEE 
es 
-El. 
(Eas 
geologie 
r.3vvuoribov 
% 6. 
se B. s 
s 
(No Model.) 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
H, A, HOUSE 
COUPLING DRIVING SEIAFTs, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Sept, 28, 1897, 
s 
 
 
 
S3 
2 
S 
N N 
assey2 
SYNS2 
A. 
asyz a 
 
S) 
 
S 
N 
2S 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
N2 
a. 5%zeze 
ro-Tho...washief. D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY A. HOUSE, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
COUPLING DRIVING - SHAFTS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,616, dated September 28, 1897. 
Application filed March 19, 1895, Serial No. 542,404, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whon, it nulf Coil001'i. 
Beit known that I, HENRY A. HOUSE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Bridge 
port, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Coupling Driving 
Shafts, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
Difficulty has been experienced in coupling 
together the axles of locomotives and motor 
cars and vehicles, so that one shall be driven 
from the other, because of the amount of 
play which is a necessary incident to the bear 
ings of all axles in such structures and also 
because of the necessity in many instances of 
mounting axles upon separate pivoted trucks 
or bearings to permit the axles to assume an 
angle to each other when turning curves. 
The object of my invention is to remedy 
these difficulties and to provide means where 
by without unduly limiting any of the inde 
pendent movements of the axles power may 
be transmitted through the medium of gear 
ing from one to the other; and to this end I 
make use of an arrangement of coupled shaft 
Sections, driving-gear, and self-accommodat 
ing bearings, as fully set forth hereinafter 
and as illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation showing 
two car-axles and their coupling devices em 
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a part sec 
tional plan. Fig. 3 is an enlarged sectional 
elevation of one of the couplings and bear 
ings; Fig. 4, an enlarged sectional elevation 
of another of the couplings and bearings. 
Fig. 5 is a perspective view, and Fig. 6 is a 
A series of axles or shafts may be coupled 
in accordance with my invention. In the 
drawings are shown two shafts or axles 56, 
carrying flanged car-wheels 7 and turning in 
the usual boxes 8, supported in the brackets 
of a tram-car, locomotive, or other vehicle. 
Upon each of the axles is fixed a beveled 
gear-wheel 9, gearing with a beveled pinion 
10 or 12 upon a flexible shaft consisting of a 
series of sections and extending horizontally 
in a plane above or below that of the axles 5. 
6, as is necessary in order that the beveled 
pinions 10 12 may be arranged to drive the 
shafts simultaneously. In such case of course 
modification. 
the teeth of the gears are arranged at an an 
gle instead of being directly radial as in regu 
lar gears. 
Each shaft A is shown as consisting of 
three sections 131415 between the pinions 10 
12, the section 13 carrying the pinion 10 and 
being coupled at one end by a universal coup 
ling B with the adjacent end of the section 14, 
and the other end of the latter being coupled 
by a universal coupling C with the proximate 
end of the section 15. These couplings BC 
may be of any suitable character, but prefer 
ably are so constructed as not only to permit 
of the flexion incident to ordinary universal 
couplings, but also to permit of an independ 
ent longitudinal movement of the sections. 
An effective construction to this end consists 
in providing each of the adjacent ends of the 
Sections with a fork Ci, extending into an an 
nular groove a or ac'in a sphereb, the grooves 
ac a' being in the periphery of the sphere and 
at right angles to each other, as shown in Figs. 
3 and 4, SO that When one section is turned 
it will carry the sphere with it, the rotation 
of the sphere turning the other section, while 
the forks can slide in the grooves to permit 
independent longitudinal movements of the 
Sections. 
Where it is desired to employ an ordinary 
universal coupling, which does not permit 
the longitudinal movement of the sections, 
the Section 14 may consist of two parts, one 
with an angular socket receiving the angu 
lar end of the other, as shown in Fig. 6. 
The coupled sections may be supported in 
different ways, but it is most desirable to so 
support them in bearings of such a character 
that the tendency of one pinion to rise up 
upon the wheel with which it is geared and 
to tilt the bearing in which its shaft is mount 
ed shall be counteracted by the correspond 
ing tendency of the other pinion. To this 
end I make use of a jointed support which 
will accommodate itself to the changes in 
vertical and angular positions of the axles 
and to their movements to and from each 
other. Thus the section 13turnsin bearings 
in a frame in the form of a case D, which is 
in two half-sections flanged and clamped to 
gether with bearings to receive an axle, upon 
which the casing can swing freely, and with 
other bearings to receive the journal portions 
" 
. 
o 
25 
45 
95 
IOO 
2 
590,616 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
of the section of the shaft A, the said casing 
inclosing the gears and adapted to contain 
a body of oil by which the gears may be lu 
bricated and the sound deadened. The cas 
ing D is prolonged at one end to form a Sub 
easing or box d for receiving the coupled 
ends of the sections and open at the inner 
ends to receive the neck of a tube?, having 
at the ends a hollow cylindrical bearing 20, 
adapted to a corresponding bearing in the 
side of the box d, the section 13 or 15 extend 
ing into the end of the tube. The cylindrical 
end bearing 20 of the tube?, which incloses 
the section 14 of the shaft, permits the said 
section to assume any desired angle upon a 
horizontal plane, and while it is desirable to 
permit one axle to rise or fall independently 
of the other it is not desirable that one of the 
sections 13 or 15 shall assume an angle in a 
vertical plane to the intermediate section 14 
of the shaft. Therefore, to maintain these 
sections as nearly as possible in the same lon 
gitudinal plane I elongate the bearing 20 by 
adding a conical extension 21, adapted to a 
corresponding extension of the box d and 
bearing therein, as best shown in Fig. 3, the 
said extension d being strengthened by means 
of a Web e, connecting with the main casing. 
I thus secure a bearing for the end of the tube 
f, which, while it permits the latter to move 
laterally and permits the section 14 to assume 
an angle in a lateral direction to the section 
to which it is coupled, tends to hold the tubef 
and the box din their relative positions, so that 
the coupled sections cannot assume an angle 
to each other in a vertical plane. The upper 
part of the cylindrical bearing 20 is provided 
with an extension 22, open at the top to permit 
oil to be supplied to the interior of the coup 
ling and having its bearing in a detachable cap 
23, which aids in maintaining the partsin po 
sition against independent vertical play. In 
order to accommodate the tube f to varying 
distances between the axles, I make it in two 
Sections, One sliding within the other, as 
shown, and extending through a packing-box 
k, which excludes dust and prevents the es 
cape of oil when the coupling - casings are 
filled with oil, and the tube is braced by 
braces m, extending from each section to the 
bottom of the box d. To further exclude 
dust from the boxes of the couplings B C, I 
prefer in Some cases to extend an accordion 
sleeve in from the opening in the box d, 
through which the tube fpasses, to the tube, 
as shown in Fig. 3, the said sleeve extending 
and contracting according to the movements 
of the parts. 
If a motor was upon one of the axles-say 
upon the axle 5-power would be transmitted 
therefrom, through the gears and sectional 
shaft A, to the other axle 6. 
When, however, 
the motor is not upon or geared directly to 
either axle, power is transmitted from another 
shaft or shaft - Section 24, which may be 
coupled to the end of the section 13 by a 
coupling similar to the coupling B or C and 
which may extend through a tube f", an ac 
cordion-sleeve m' extending from the end of 
the tube f' to an annular flange p upon the 
casing D and excluding dust from the coupler. 
It will be seen that if the pinion 10 is turned 
in the direction of its arrow, Fig. 1, it tends 
to travel upward on the gear 9 and to tilt or 
swing the casing D at the inner end down 
ward in the direction of the arrow S, but that 
the pinion 12 also tends to travel upward 
upon its gear and to lift the inner end of its 
casing in a reverse direction, so that one ac 
tion counteracts the other and maintains the 
parts of the bearing-casing in equilibrium. 
It will be evident that by the construction 
above described one axle may move verti 
cally independently of the other, carrying 
with it one end of the bearing-casing, the 
other end of which merely swings upon the 
opposite axle without the intermediate parts 
of the casing or the sections of the shaft A 
being carried out of alinement, that either 
axle may be carried to or from the other with 
out any straining of the parts or may swing 
in a horizontal plane at an angle to the other, 
and that all of the connected parts are so 
fully connected as practically to exclude 
dust, but without increasing the friction upon 
the bearing. 
Without limiting myself to the precise con 
struction and arrangement of parts shown, I 
claim as my invention 
1. The combination with two parallel inde 
pendently-movable shafts or axles, of gears 
thereon, an intermediate shaft in section, 
gears on the sections engaging with the gears 
on the axles, couplings connecting the sec 
tions of the intermediate shaft whereby the 
said sections may be swung in an angular re 
lation upon a horizontal plane, swinging 
bearings on which the couplings are supported 
and means for preventing the shaft-sections 
assuming angular relation with respect to 
each other in a vertical plane, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination of independently-mov 
able shafts or axles, connected sectional shaft 
and gears, universal couplings, and casings 
Swinging upon the axles inclosing the gears, 
and provided with boxes inclosing the coup 
lings, an intermediate extensible tube inclos 
ing the intermediate section of the sectional 
shaft and jointedly connected with the said 
boxes, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination with the independently 
movable axles, sectional shaft and gears, of a 
casing D inclosing the gears of one axle and 
having bearings for one of the shaft-sections, 
an elongated box connected with the casing 
and receiving the end of said shaft-section 
and an extensible tube receiving the interme 
diate shaft-section, and having a terminal 
cylindrical end bearing fitting the interior of 
the box, Substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination with the casing D and 
coupled shaft-sections 13, 14, of a tube f hav 
ing a cylindrical end bearing elongated ver 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC) 
I) 
II5 
I 25 
590,616 
3 
o 
tically, and a bOX connected with the casing 
D and adapted to receive the said end bear 
ing, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination with two parallel inde 
pendently-movable shafts or axles, of gears 
thereon, an intermediate shaft in section, 
gears On the Sections engaging with the gears 
On the axles, couplings connecting the sec 
tions of the intermediate shaft whereby the 
saidsections maybe swung in an angular rela 
tion upon a horizontal plane, swinging bear 
ings on which the couplings are supported, 
means for preventing the shaft-sections as 
Suming angular relation in a vertical plane 
with respect to each other, and means whereby 
elongation and contraction of the intermedi 
ate shaft is permitted, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. A coupling for driving-shafts, comprising 
tWO or more movable shafts or axles, a sectional 
power-shaft connected with said shafts or 
axles to drive the same, couplings between the 
sections of the power-shaft whereby elonga 
tion and contraction of said shaftispermitted, 
swinging bearings for the power-shaft, a rigid 
closed casing surrounding the power-shaft, 
and devices connected to the casing and to 
the SWinging bearings adapted to expand and 
contract to conform to the elongation and con 
traction of said shaft, all of the parts between 
the shafts or axles being arranged in the same 
plane, substantially as described. 
7. The combination with two independ 
ently-movable shafts or axles, of bevel-gears 
thereon, an intermediate shaft in sections, 
bearings for said sections, pinions on the sec 
tions engaging the gears on the independently 
movable shafts, universal couplings connect 
ing the intermediate shaft-sections whereby 
elongation and contraction of said shaft is 
permitted, a rigid tube surrounding the in 
termediate shaft-sections and flexible connec 
tions between the tube and the section-bear 
ings adapted to expand and contract to con 
form to the elongation and contraction of the 
Said shaft, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
35 
45 
HENRY A. HOUSE. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGIA P. KRAMER, 
A. N. DOBSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590716.txt	(No Model.) 
J. G. BARRON, 
SEAL L00K, 
No. 5907l6, 
Patented Sept. 28, l897. 
32 %2. 
4-2-ro. cZ7orrey. 
Z7a evezzizov. 
 
regas prrzsco. Porotho, WAShihir N. se. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPIH. G. BARRON, OF EAST BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA. 
SEAL LOCK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,716, dated September 28, 1897. 
Application filed February 3,1897, Serial No. 621,900, (No model) 
O 
To al vihon it nay concern: 
Beit known that I, JOSEPH. G. BARRON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at East 
Berkeley, in the county of Alameda and State 
of California, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Freight-Car Locks; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as Will enable others skilled in the 
art to whichit appertains to make and use the 
S810, 
Myinvention relates to that class of devices 
known as seal-locks. 
The object of my inventionis notto provide 
a fastening which Will offer any great resist 
ance to the forcible entry of the carto which 
it is applied, but whichis so constructed and 
used that in case the Sealis broken or tam 
perd With thesame maybe readily discovered; 
and the invention consistsin certain novelfea 
tures of construction and combination of 
parts, as Will be hereinafter described, and 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a perspective view of my device. Fig. 2 is a 
central vertical section of the same, and Fig. 
3 is an inverted plan view of the latch. 
A is the latch, formed of resilient material 
and bent upon itself forming the spring 
tongue, or the tongue maybe a separate piece 
properly secured to the latch A. This latch 
is also provided with the holes or perforations 
aca a, for the purpose hereinafter set forth. 
Bis the box or casing for containing the 
latch, and is provided with the rectangular 
aperture bin its upper face and transverse 
aperture or slot b' in its forward end. This 
casing maybe made square, oblong, or any 
other shapedesiredor ofany material desired. 
Cis the seal or labelthatis placed beneath 
the aperture b and held there by the latch, 
and it has any suitable arbitrary or identify 
ing marks. 
Disthekey or hook, provided with the an 
gular attenuated end or projection d. 
Whenin position the latchisattached to the 
car-door by means of a chain heldin the Open 
inga, and the box or casing is attached to the 
car by any suitable means-suchas screws 
passing through the ends of the casing, lugs 5o 
attached thereto, or otherwise. 
It is obvious, oficourse, that the relative po 
sitions of the two parts maybe changed,if de 
sired, and the latch placed on the door and 
the casing or box on the car proper. 
The operation of my device is as follows: 
When it is desired to seal the car, the tongue 
a of the latch is depressed to a plane parallel 
With the main part of the latch. The latteris 
then forced through the slot or aperture b' 6o 
until the spring-tongue clears the forward 
end of the casing, When by reason of its re 
siliency it resumes its normal position and 
drops backbehind the end plate of the casing. 
Theseal orilabelis then passed in through the 65 
slot bover the latch and beneath the opening 
b. When it is desired to separate the parts, 
or, in other Words, break the Seal, the point 
of the angular projection on the end of the 
key D is forced through the seal or label, 7o 
which is of paper or analogous material, ata 
point coincident with the holes in the latch. 
The angular end of the key rests against the 
under side of the springtongue or latch. By 
then drawing the key up ward and slightly 75 
forward the tongueis pressed against the main 
partA of the latch, and it maythenbe readily 
removed through the slot b of the casing. 
The perforation made in the card or label 
defaces the same and breaks the seal. 
Mior changes within the scope of the in 
vention maybe made Without departing from. 
the spirit or sacrificingany of the advantages 
thereof. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. Allockfor freight-cars, comprising a cas 
ing with a rectangular opening oraperture in 
its top face and a transverse slot in its front 9o 
end, in combination with a latch having a 
spring-tongue, and a seal, cardor label, With 
suitable marks, interposed between the top 
face of the latch and the under side of the 
top of the casing, and meansfor releasing the 95 
latch, substantially as set forth. 
2. A lockfor freight-cars, comprisinga cas 
ing with a rectangular openingor aperturein 
Having thus fully described the invention, S5 
8o 
25 
3 o 
35 
45 
2 
590,716 
its top face and a transverse slot in its front or hook for defacing the Seal, and engaging 
end, in combination with a latch having a the tongue to release the latch, so that the Io 
Spring-tongue formed by being bent upon latch and Casing may be separated, Substan 
itself and provided with holes through the tially as set forth. 
5 body of the latch and the spring-tongue; a 
Seal, card or label With suitable marks, in- 
terposed between the top of the latch and the 
under side of the top of the casing, and a key 
LEE D. CRAIG, 
FREDERICK A. WEISE. 
Vitnesses: 
JOSEPI G. BARRON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590816.txt	(No Model.) 
J. BEADLE. 
RAIL JOINT, 
No. 590,816. 
 
Patented Sept. 28, 1897, 
 
The 
Norris Peters co, PHOTO-LITHo, washington, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JESSE BEADLE, OF SHICKSHINNY, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAIL-JOINT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,816, dated September 28, 1897. 
Application filed July 10, 1896, 
Serial No. 598,706, (No model.) 
onto each other, this engagement of the inter 
locking portions A" and B with the Walls a 
and bforces the flanges C of the joint against 
the Web of the rail. 
55 
The member. A is provided with slots a to . . 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JESSEBEADLE, a citizen 
of the United States, and a resident of Shick 
shinny, Luzerne county, Pennsylvania, have 
invented certain Improvements in Rail 
Joints, of which the following is a specifica. 
tion. 
This invention relates to joints for the meet 
ing ends of railway-rails or beams, the object 
of the invention being to provide a joint that 
will afford a support for the ends of the rails 
Or beams, and a further object being to pro 
vide means for tightening the joint should it 
Work loose on account of traffic in the case of 
a rail-joint or of any strain when used in con 
nection With beams. 
This invention is fully illustrated in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of the joint, 
showing it as applied to a railway-rail. Fig. 
2 is a perspective view showing the members 
of the joint detached. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
of the joint, showing it when in use as a con 
nection for the meeting ends of railway-rails. 
Fig. 4 is an inverted plan view of the joint 
shown in Fig. 3, and Fig. 5 is an end view of 
the members of the joint projected so as to 
illustrate the inclined edges of the interlock 
ing members. 
In the drawings, A represents one member 
of the joint, and B represents the other mem 
ber. The members are provided with the or 
dinary flange Cl, adapted to be confined to the 
Web of the rail by the ordinary bolts b. Con 
nected to the flange a, of the member A is the 
portion C", which laps under the base of the 
rail and forms a support for the same. Con 
nected to this portion a' is the interlocking 
portion A'. The member B is of similar con 
struction to the member A, except that the 
interlocking portion B'is bent in an opposite 
direction to the portion A', so that the por 
tion b' forms the lowermost part of the joint 
and may rest upon the ties, tie-plates, or 
stringers. 
The members of the joint are so bent inform 
ing the interlocking portions A" and B" that 
the Webs connecting the same with the flanges 
a of the joint form the walls a and b, with 
which said interlocking portions are adapted 
to engage when the joint is fitted together. 
When the members of the joint are driven 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
- 
allow the same to be driven onto the mem 
ber B should the joint become loose, it being 
simply necessary to loosen the bolts b, which 
hold the joint to the rail, to enable the mem 
ber A to be driven onto the member B, so as 
to wedge the joint more tightly. 
After this 
has been done the bolts b can be again tight 
ened and the joint is ready for further use. 
The interlocking portions A" and B' are ta 
pered at ac and y, and the walls a and bare 
tapered in the same direction, as shown in 
Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 5. When the members of 
the joint are placed together, the inclined 
edge ac of the interlocking portion A' bears 
against the wall b of the member B and the 
inclined edge y of the interlocking portion B' 
bears against the Walla of the member A, and 
as these interlocking portions are pushed or 
driven onto each other, so as to permit the in 
sertion of the bolts b, the members of the 
joint are firmly wedged together, and the 
flanges a of the same are securely held against 
the web of the rails or beams, the base por 
tions forming a bridge joint or bearing for 
the meeting ends of the same. A space C is 
left between the wall a of the member A and 
the portion bof the member B, so as to allow 
for any spread of the metal of the interlock 
ing portions due to the wedging of the one 
upon the other. 
Although I have shown and described my 
improved joint as applied to the meeting ends 
of railway-rails, it is obvious that it may be 
used as a connection for beams of any de 
scription. 
- 
I claim as my invention 
1. A joint for the meeting ends of railway 
rails or beams having flanges adapted to en 
gage the Web of the rail or beam, portions for 
supporting the base of the same, said Sup 
porting portions being bent to form inter 
locking members, one of said members being 
bent in one direction, and the other member 
being bent in the opposite direction, and walls 
formed by the bending of said interlocking 
members with which they are adapted to en 
gage. 
75 
9o 
IOO 
590,816 
IO 
2. A joint for the meeting ends of railway 
rails or beams having interlocking members, 
portions adapted to support the base of the 
rails or beams and ?langes for engaging the 
web of the same formed integral with the in 
terlocking members, and walls having faces 
inclined from end to end of the joint formed 
by the bending of said interlocking members 
and with which they are adapted to engage, 
the interlocking member of one section of the 
joint engaging the Wall of the opposite section 
and vice versa. 
3. A joint for the meeting ends of railway 
rails or beams, having wedge-shaped inter 
locking members, flanges to engage the Web 
of the rail or beam and portions upon which 
the base of the same may rest formed integral 
with the interlocking members, and webs con 
necting the portions supporting the base of 
the rail or beam and the interlocking mem 
bel's whereby a wedge-shaped space is formed 
in eachinterlocking section of the joint adapt 
ed to receive the wedge-shaped interlocking 
members, whose inclined faces engage the in 
clined faces of the connecting-webs. 
4. An interlocking-joint for the meeting 
ends of railway-rails or beams having flanges 
to engage the Web of the rails or beams and 
the base of the same, each section of the joint 
35 
45 
having a wedge-shaped interlocking member, 
and webs connecting the interlocking mem 
bers with the flanges of the joint-sections and 
forming wedge-shaped spaces for the recep 
tion of said members, the sections of the joint, 
when fitted together leaving a space between 
the side walls of the interlocking parts al 
lowing for longitudinal adjustment of the 
joint to lock it to the rails. 
5. The combination in a joint for the meet 
ing ends of railway-rails or beams, of the 
flanges A and IB adapted to webs of the rails 
or beams, portions supporting the base of the 
rails and interlocking members A", B' formed 
integral with said flanges, said interlocking 
members having inclined faces and webs also 
inclined from end to end adapted to engage 
one with the other, with bolts for securing 
the joint to the rails, one of the joint-sections 
having elongated openings in its flange to al 
low for longitudinal adjustment without re 
moving said bolts. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JESSIE BEADILE. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. CAMPBELL, 
JAMES P. SORBER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US590916.txt	(No Model. ) 
R. A. L., SNYDER & A, F, TINNERHOLM 
ELECTRIC HEATER, 
No. 590,916. 
Patented Sept. 28, 1897. 
Z729. 7. 
K 
N sy2S2 SSNSS 
3. 
  
 
a 2 
2 2 2X3XY 22 aaZazawa 
& 
2 
2 
M 
the NORRIS PETERS co, PHoTo-LTHo., washington. p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD A. L. SNYDER, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, AND AUGUST F. 
TINNERHOLM, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNORS TO THE AMERICAN 
ELECTRICAL HEATER COMPANY, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
ELECTRC HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 590,916, dated September 28, 1897. 
Application filed December 22, 1896, Serial No. 616,652, (No model.) 
To (till, Luhon, it inctly conce77. 
Beit known that We, RICHARD A.I.S.NYDER, 
residing at Pittsburg, in the county of Alle 
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, and AUGUST 
5 F. T.INNERHOLM, residing at Detroit, in the 
county of Wayne and State of Michigan, citi 
zens of the United States, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Electric 
Heaters; and we do hereby declare the fol 
Io lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
I5 electric heating apparatus, with which either 
an alternating or a direct current of electric 
ity is employed. 
In electric heating apparatus of the char 
acter to which our invention relates it is of 
2 o the greatest importance that the heat gener 
ated should be quickly transmitted to that 
part of the apparatus which it is the object 
to heat and to keep as cool as possible those 
parts of the apparatus not intended to be 
25 heated. We have found by experience that 
when a heating-coil consists of a considerable 
number of layers of resistance-wire the mid 
dle layers, or layers inside the coil, get very 
much hotter than the outside layers and the 
This is caused by 
accumulation of heat, as the heat is not con 
ducted away from the wire as fast as gener 
ated, and as a consequence the middle or in 
ner layers often burn out, while the outer lay 
35 ers and layers nearest the core are very little, 
if any, affected by the heat. 
The object of our invention is to overcome 
this and to provide means of conducting away 
the heat from all parts of the coil as fast as 
Having these objects in view, as Well as the 
production of a very simplified form of ap 
paratus, our invention consists of the fea 
tures, combination of parts and their con 
45 struction, all as more fully hereinafter de 
scribed, and particularly claimed. 
Our invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
iFigure 1 is a cross-section showing our in 
5o vention employed in connection with a flat 
3o layers nearest the core. 
4o generated. 
We. 
- 
iron; Fig. 2, a plan view of same, and Fig. 3 
a cross-section showing our invention applied 
to a soldiering-iron. 
Referring to the drawings, Cl, indicates iron 
cores, each preferably consisting of a single 55 
piece of cast-iron; but the cores may be com 
posed of a number of pieces of iron and built 
up in any suitable manner. 
The number and shape of the cores may 
Vary to Suit the various styles of appliances 6o 
to which our invention is adapted. 
Immediately surrounding each core and in 
contact therewith are sheets or pieces b of 
Some Suitable insulating material, as mica, 
..7 O 
d is one of a series of layers of resistance- 65 
e are copper strips or pieces placed between 
the layers of resistance-wired, but separated 
from the resistance-wire by the insulating 
sheet b. 
By this construction-namely, a series of 
layers of resistance-wire, sheets of insulating 
material, and heat-conducting copper strips 
built up around the cores in the manner above 
described that is to say, immediately sur- 75 
rounding the cores C. We place a sheet of good 
insulating material b, as mica. On this we 
Wind the first layer of wired. Another sheet 
of insulating material b is then placed over the 
first layer d of the series. Then the good So 
heat- conducting substance, as the copper 
Strips e, are introduced. On the top of the 
stripe We add another insulating-sheet b, then 
another layer d of the resistance-wire, and so 
on until the desired amount of wire is wound 85 
on the core-we produce a very efficient de 
vice. 
It will be understood that our invention 
may be employed with many different styles 
of heating appliances, but we have thought go 
it only necessary to show and describe in de 
tail its use in connection with a flat-iron and 
a soldering-iron, and We now first refer to 
Figs. 1 and 2 of the drawings. 
Wound thereon in the manner above de 
scribed, together with the heat-conducting 
strips e, rest and are held in the desired po 
sition on an iron plate f, or, rather, directly on 
the copper-plated surface g of the plate f. Ioo 
The iron cores C, having the resistance-wire 95 
Aw 
cy 
590,916 
35 
O 
45 
I. In an electric heating appalatilis, a ne 
tallic part to be heated; a metallie core; 
layers of resistance-Wire a 1'1'anged Oll the Col'c 
and insulated there from; a metallic strip, 
between the said layers of resistance-Will'e and 
insulated therefrom, said strip in metallic 
contact with the part to be heated. 
2. In an electric heating apparatus, it inc 
tallic plate, to be leated; a metallic core at 
tached thereto; an insulated layer of resist 
ance-wire arranged on the core; a metallic 
shell in metallic contact with said plate, a 
layer of insulated resistance-wire arranged 
on the metallic shell. 
3. In an electric heating alpparatus, the 
combination of an outer casing, a heating 
coil arranged within said casing; said casing 
composed of separate parts consisting of the 
heating-plate, side portions and top; pool' 
heat-conducting material Separating thc sicle 
portions from the heating-plate and poor heat 
conducting material separating the side O'- 
tions and said top, Substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in the presence of two witnesses. 
RICHARD A. L. SNY DER, 
AUGUST IF. T.INNERIOLAI. 
Witnesses to the signature of Snyde': 
JOHN MI. PRESCOTT, Jr., 
W. G. DOOLITTLE. 
Witnesses to the signature of Tinnerholm: 
BENJ. II. SCRANTON, 
WM. M. FRASER, 
O 
The purpose of the copper-plated surface () of 
the plate f is to aid in conducting heat from 
the heating-coils to said plate and to distrib 
ute the heat over the entire plate. The cores 
(t are fastened to the plate f by screws h, or 
other suitable means. Care should be taken 
to have the copper stripse make good contact 
with the part to be heated. It is a sheet or 
mat of asbestos resting on that part of the 
copper-plated surface () of the plate fnot cov 
ered by the cores or spools and their wind 
ings. 
The flat-iron further consists of the 
side portions l and top 12, provided with a 
handle 7 and an opening O to permit the re 
sistance-wire to pass to the cores Ct. The top 
in on its inner surface is provided with a sheet 
of asbestos F. By thus making the outer cas 
ing composed of three parts-namely, the 
heating-plate f, the side portions l, and the top 
2-all separated by asbestos or other suit 
able poor heat-conducting material, we are 
enabled to keep the upper part of the iron 
much cooler than if the casing was made from 
a single piece of metal. 
In Fig. 3 we have shown a cross-section of 
a soldering-iron having an Outer casing p, 
made of any suitable shape and material. ' 
is the soldering-tip. S is a handle provided 
with a hollow shankl, through which the wire 
d passes. The core C, the mica, sheets b, and 
the copper Strips e are all in the same rela 
tive position as in the figures above described. 
IIaving thus described our invention, what 
we claim is 
2 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591016.txt	(No Model.) 
W. SCOTT. 
FLUSHING DEWICE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
D 
E 
 
 
 
2- - 
St. 
 
SAAC 2 IAS 
III 
 
3SN2. 
 
s 
2 
  
S. 
a. 
 
titles 
sets in 
  
 
 
(No Model.) 
W. SCOTT. 
FLUSHING DEVICE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 591,016, 
Patented 00 t, 5, 1897. 
2 
erre 
AS 
SS 2 
Xaxa 
 
/67ees ses 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM SCOTT, OF MEDFORD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
FLUSHING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 591,016, dated October 5, 1897. 
Application filed October 12, 1896, Serial No. 608,557, (No model.) 
To cut (, livlvoir, it Tructiy coivcei'i: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM SCOTT, of Med 
ford, County of Middlesex, and State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Flushing Devices, of which the following de 
Scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification, like letters on 
the drawings representing like parts. 
The present invention relates to a flushing 
device for Water-closets, and is intended as 
an improvement in apparatus of that class 
Which is adapted to be automatically oper 
ated by the depression and release of the 
seat, the connecting devices being so ar 
ranged that the depression of the seat causes 
the Water to flow from a tank to a service 
bOX, While the release thereof closes the colm 
munication between the tank and service-box 
and opens the communication between the 
latter and the service-pipe to flush the bowl. 
The invention also relates to improved 
means for producing a preliminary wash, 
provision being also made for the slow dis 
charge of water after the flushing operation 
is completed in order to insure the proper 
filling of the traps. 
The invention further relates to an im 
proved device for operating the flushing de 
vice in response to a movement of the water. 
closet seat. 
In apparatus of the class to which the in 
Vention relates the tank and service-box are 
arranged upon substantially the same level, 
the former being provided with the usual 
means for maintaining it supplied with wa 
ter, Such as a ball-cock, and a communicat 
ing passage is provided between the tank and 
Service-box and controlled by a valve, which 
Will be hereinafter referred to as the tank 
valve, said valve being normally closed and 
adapted to be opened by the depression of 
the Water-closet seat. The service-box is con 
nected by the usual service-pipe to the bowl 
of the closet, the said service-pipe being con 
trolled by a valve, which will be hereinafter 
referred to as the flushing-valve, which is 
normally Open, but adapted to be closed auto 
matically in response to the closure of the 
tank-waive. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide means for automatically regulating 
- 
the flushing operation to insure a complete 
flush at each operation, followed by a slower 
discharge to fill the traps. For this purpose 
the flushing-valve is arranged to be only par 
tially opened at the beginning of the flushing 
operation, and a siphon discharge-pipe is pro 
vided in conjunction with the service-pipe, so 
that such partial opening of the flushing-valve 
will produce siphonic action to discharge the 
service-box with the full capacity of the serv 
ice-pipe, it being obvious that after the level 
of the water falls below the mouth of the si 
phon that portion of the water which remains 
will be more slowly discharged through the 
partially Open flushing-valve to insure the 
proper refilling of the traps, it being obvious, 
moreover, that in any event a momentary 
opening of the flushing-Valve will result in a 
complete flushing operation. 
To provide for a prelitminary wash, the flush 
ing-valve is arranged to be self-closing and is 
normally held open to its fullest extent by 
means of a ball or float which is adapted to 
engage a portion of Said valve when the serv 
ice - box is empty. When, therefore, the 
tank-valve is opened and the water flows into 
the service-box, the service-pipe is open and 
a portion of the Water flows down through the 
same, the capacity of Said service-pipe, how 
ever, being less than the capacity of the com 
municating passage between the tank and 
the service-box, so that the water flows into 
the service-box faster than it can flow out 
through the flushing-valve, whereby the float 
which controls said flushing-valve is eventu 
ally lifted, permitting the said valve to close, 
after which the service - box fills until it 
reaches the level of the water in the tank, the 
parts remaining in this condition as long as 
the closet-seat is depressed, the ball-cock or 
refilling device for the tank then operating so 
that both the tank and service-box are simu 
taneously filled. 
In order that the flushing-valve during the 
preliminary wash may be held open to its 
widest extent for a predetermined length of 
time and then immediately closed, a float con 
trolling the same is preferably arranged to 
act in response to Water contained in a sup 
plemental chamber or poeket formed in the 
service-box by means of a Wall or partition 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
591,016 
25 
35 
5 
O 
rising from the bottom of said service-box, so 
that the water is practically excluded there 
from until it rises in the service-box to the 
top of said wall and overflows the same, thus 
promptly filling the said pocket and lifting 
the float, permitting an immediate closure of 
the flushing-valve. The said partition is pro 
vided with a small opening at or near the 
bottom thereof, through which the water can 
flow out after the main portion of the serv 
ice-box is discharged, thus permitting the 
float to fall to maintain the flushing-valve 
wide open. The said flushing-valve is also 
connected with the Water-closet seat, so that 
when the latter is no longer depressed the 
flushing-valve will be partially opened and 
produce siphonic action, as above described, 
to discharge the contents of the service-box. 
Figure l is a sectional elevation of a wa 
ter-closet bowl provided with a flushing de 
vice embodying the present invention and an 
actuating device adapted to be operated by 
the water-closet seat. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
elevation of the service-box, taken on line ac, 
Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a top plan view of the tank 
and service-box. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal sec 
tion of the same on line act of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is 
also a section on line at of Fig. 3, showing 
the parts in a different position from that in 
dicated in Fig. 2. Fig. 6 is an enlarged sec 
tional view of the water-closet seat, and the 
hinge and valve-actuating device connected 
there with, and Fig. 7 is a top plan view of 
the same. 
The tank C. and service-box b are preferably 
contained in a single main casing A, divided 
by a Wall or partition A, the tank being on 
one side of said wall and the service-box on 
the other'. The said tank and service-box 
are provided with a communicating passage 
c, controlled by the taluk - valve c', herein 
shown as a clapper-valve pivoted at c and 
connected by a rod c'. With one arm of a lever 
d, pivoted at d' and provided with an arm d, 
adapted to coperate with the flushing-valvee, 
as will be hereinafter described. The said 
lever d may be rocked upon its pivot in any 
suitable way to open the tank-valve c, and is 
herein shown as connected by a rod d to a 
rocker or lever f, adapted to be operated by 
the seat g, the sail rod being shown as pro 
vided with a weight d. The rocker f is ar 
ranged, as will be hereinafter described, so 
that a depression of the water-closet seat g 
lifts the rod d and opens the tank-valve, c, 
thus allowing the water to discharge from the 
tank ( into the service-box b. 
The flushing-valvee which controls the serv 
ice-pipe e, is pivoted at e and provided with 
a projection e', adapted to be engaged by the 
stem e of a float e, whereby it is normally 
held open to its fullest extent, as best shown. 
in Fig. 2. When, therefore, the tank-valve 
c is opened, the water flowing from the tank 
into the service-box will also flow through the 
service-pipe e', thus affording a preliminary 
wash, which will take place until the level of 
the water in the service-box has risen to a 
sufficient height to lift the floate' and permit 
the valve e to close, the said valve being ar 
ranged to close automatically when thus re 
leased, as by its own weight. 
In order that the valve e may remain fully 
open during the preliminary Washing Opera 
tion and close promptly at the end of Such 
operation, the ball e' is adapted to rise in re 
sponse to the rise of level of Water in a Sup 
plemental chamber or pocket b, formed in 
the service-box by means of a wall or partir 
tion b, extending across from one side to the 
other thereof, the said partition being pro 
vided with a small opening b", communicating 
with the main portion of the tank to prevent 
the water from being permanently trapped 
therein, the said opening, however, being SO 
small that the water in rushing into the serv 
ice-box, when the tank-valve is open, will 
rise to the top of the partition band overflow 
the same before any material amount has en 
tered through the said opening b. The pre 
liminary wash, therefore, will go on to the 
full capacity of the valve e until the water in 
the service-box has risen to the top of the par 
tition b, when it will overflow the same and 
fill the pocket b, causing the float e to rise 
at once, upon which the valve e will close of 
itself, so that the service-box will fill. As 
long, therefore, as the seat is depressed the 
tank-valve will remain-open, so that the Water 
in the tank and that which is admitted thereto 
through the ball-cock or other supply device 
is ill communication with the service-box, 
which is thus charged with water while the 
flushing-valve remains closed. When the 
pressure upon the closet-seat is relieved, how 
ever, the tank-valve c will at once be closed, 
owing to the weight d or the equivalent 
thereof, and in order to produce the flushing 
operation means are provided whereby the 
same operation of the seat opens or partially 
opens the valvee, allowing a sufficient amount 
of water to flow through the service-pipe e to 
start siphonic action in a siphon discharge 
pipe e, connected with said service-pipe e 
and of substantially equal capacity the re 
with, so that a complete flushing operation is 
produced. For this purpose the lever-arm d 
is loosely connected to a rode, connected, as 
shown, to the valve e and adapted by its up 
ward movement to open the same. When, 
therefore, the valve e is closed and the lever 
arm d8 moves upward, it will engage the rod 
e, which is herein shown as provided with a 
loop e, coperating with a pin d' at the end 
of the lever d, and produce a sufficient up 
Ward movement thereof to lift, the valve from 
its seat and produce siphonic action through 
the siphon discharge-pipe e. As the water 
recedes in the service-box the float e' will be 
gradually lowered until it is supported only 
by the water in the chamber b. 
In Fig. 5 the service-box is shown as full 
of Water and the lever in its normal position 
that is to say, the position it takes when the 
jo 
75 
IOO 
I Io 
I 25 
O 
15 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
591,016 
seatg is no longer depressed. It will be seen 
that the valve e is lifted from its seat and 
partially opened, so that sufficient water 
passes through to start siphonic action. A 
perfect flushing operation to the full capacity 
of the service-pipe is thus started and con 
tinues until the siphon is broken, after which 
the remainder of the water flows slowly down 
through the partially open valve. With the 
discharge of water the float e descends, and 
after the service-box is emptied of its con 
tents the said float reaches its lowermost po 
sition, as shown in Fig. 1, the stem e engag 
ing the projection e' and fully opening the 
valve e. 
At the end of the complete flushing opera 
tion-that is, the discharge of water through 
the siphone and partially-opened valve e 
water still remains in the said pocket b, owing 
to the fact that the opening b is so small 
in proportion to the outlet from the service 
box that the latter becomes discharged be 
fore the pocket b can discharge its contents 
through the said opening. The water con 
tained in said pocket, therefore, will flow out 
slowly and assist in the proper refilling of 
the trap. Means are preferably provided, 
however, for breaking the siphon hefore the 
main portion of the contents of the service 
box is fully discharged, and for this purpose 
the siphon is provided with a vent e, con 
sisting of a pipe secured thereto at the bend 
of the siphon and extending downward to 
the level at which it is desired to stop siphonic 
action. When, therefore, the water reaches 
the level of the end of the pipe e, it is ob 
vious that air will be admitted to the top of 
the siphon, thus stopping the siphonic ac 
tion, the remainder of the discharge from 
the service - box taking place through the 
restricted valve-opening. 
After the water is fully discharged from the 
service-box and the chamber b the float ef, 
having returned to its normal position, as 
shown in Fig. 2, with the stem thereof en 
gaging the projection e', holds the valve e 
wide open, and thus provides for the proper 
preliminary wash at the next operation. 
The supporting-lug d for the lever did 
may be adjustably connected with the tank, 
and is herein shown as supported upon a 
plate d', extending across the top of the tank 
and secured to the edge thereof and having 
a slot d' in which the said lug d' is movable 
and adapted to be secured in any given po 
sition, as by a thumb-screw d. 
The weighted rod d, which is secured to 
the lever d, is inclosed in a tubular passage 
d' within the main portion of the tank A, so 
that the said tank may be connected, as in 
dicalled, directly to the wall of the room 
within which it is to be used. 
The downward movement of the lever d is 
preferably limited by means of cross-arms d', 
adapted to rest upon the surface of the plate 
d' and provided, as shown, with cushions d'. 
The said plate d? may also serve as a sup 
85 
- 
3 
port for the ball-cock, which is not herein 
shown, the construction of the tank thus be 
ing compact and neat. 
The flushing device hereinbefore described 
may obviously be operated by any suitable 
or usual means, a novel actuating device, 
however, being herein shown and forming a 
part of the invention. 
75 
Referring to Figs. 1, 6, and 7, the rockerf, 
which is connected by a suitable slide-jointf . 
to the lifting-rod d, is pivotally supported at 
f' upon a supporting-rod h, shown as extend 
ing across between two studs h, secured to 
the surface of the bowl and adapted to sup 
port the hinge g of the seat g. The said 
rocker fis provided below its pivotal support 
with a shoulder f', adapted to be engaged, 
when the seat is turned downward on its 
hinge, by the shoulder g or rear edge of the 
seat, the said shoulder being herein shown as 
a portion of the hinge g. 
The said rocker if 
is normally maintained in the position shown 
in Fig. 6, owing to the weight d, the parts be 
ing so adjusted that the seat g is slightly 
tipped up. When, therefore, the said seat is 
depressed, the rocker f will be rocked upon 
the rod h, whereby the rod d is lifted, as in 
dicated in dotted lines, Fig. 6, thus recking 
the lever d to properly actuate the valves. 
When the seat g is released, the weight d, act 
ing through the rod d, restores the rocker f 
to its normal position, and the valves are cor 
respondingly actuated by the consequent 
movement of the lever d. 
- 
It is obvious that the seat g is free to b 
turned back upon its hinge without produc 
ing any corresponding movement of the rocker 
f, since the said rocker is engaged thereby 
only during that portion of its movement from 
the position shown in full lines to that shown 
in dotted lines, Fig. 6. 
It is desirable in some cases to maintain the 
seat permanently tipped back upon its hinge, 
as shown in Fig. 1, and in order that the said 
seat may be automatically restored to this po 
sition the shoulder g is herein shown as con 
nected by a linkg with a plungerf, longitudi 
nally movable in a guideway, herein shown 
as a bore or opening f in the rocker f, the 
said plunger being normally pressed outward 
by means of a springf. When, therefore, the 
seat is moved downward upon its hinge, the 
said plunger will he forced inward against 
the stress of the spring until the shoulderg 
engages the said rocker f, a further move 
ment then operating the valves, as described. 
When the seat is released, it will be first posi 
tively moved by the rocker f to the full-line 
position, Fig. 6, and a further movement will 
be produced by the action of the spring f", 
acting through the liuk g to throw the seat 
back to the dotted-line position shown in Fig. 
6. The seat is thus automatically restored 
to the position shown in Fig. 1, a stop or cush 
ion g being preferably provided, against 
which the said seat normally rests. 
To properly restore the seat, it is necessary 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
al. 
591,016 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
I O5 
IO 
II5 
to employ a stiffspring, and in order that the 
action of the seat may be easy and not liable 
to slam against the stop as it rises means are 
preferably provided for retarding the out 
Ward movement of the plunger f, the said 
plunger being herein shown as provided for 
this purpose with a cup-leather f", having its 
edges turned toward the mouth or opening of 
the boref. When, therefore, the seat is low 
ered, the said cup-leather will collapse, al 
lowing the air in the bore f to escape by the 
same. Consequently when the seat is re 
stored by the stress of the spring the upward 
movement thereof will be resisted by the air, 
so that such movement will be sufficiently re 
tarded to prevent the seat from slamming. 
It is not intended to have the cup-leather 
fit closely enough to produce an actual vac 
uum or to permanently exclude air from the 
bore f. 
It may in some cases be desirable to em 
ploy a seat-lifting device when the flushing 
device is not operated by the seat, in which 
case the guide for the spring-plunger may be 
Stationary or fixed with relation to the bowl. 
By use of the flushing device hereinbefore 
described a complete flushing operation is 
insured each time the valve-actuating device 
is operated, and it is not essential that the 
flushing-valve should be maintained open to 
permit the proper discharge of water, as in 
flushing devices of this class heretofore em 
ployed. For example, if the seat is occupied 
and it is desired to flush the closet, without 
leaving the Seat, a momentary relief of the 
pressure thereon will operate the flushing 
valve and start siphonic action, which will 
continue, even if the seat is immediately de 
pressed again, until the siphon breaks, after 
which if the seat is still occupied, the flush 
ing-valve being closed, the service-box will 
refill, and if the seat is unoccupied the re 
mainder of the water in the service-box will 
flow out through the flushing-valve, which is 
then partially open. 
It is not intended to limit the invention to 
the specific construction herein shown and 
described, since modifications may be made 
without departing from the invention. 
I claim 
1. The combination with the tank; of a 
Service-bOX communicating there with and 
provided with a service-pipe having a nor 
mally open flushing-valve, means for closing 
said flushing-Valve dependent upon the rise 
of the level of the Water admitted to said serv 
ice-box, a siphon discharge-pipe communi 
cating with said Service-pipe, and means for 
starting siphonic action to discharge the serv 
ice-box, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with the tank; of a 
service-box communicating there with and 
provided with a service-pipe having a nor 
mally open flushing-valve, means for closing 
said flushing-valve dependent upon the rise 
of the level of the water admitted to said serv 
ice-box, a siphon discharge-pipe communi 
cating with said Service-pipe, means for start 
ing siphonic action to discharge the service 
box, and a vent for breaking the siphon after 
the water has reached a predetermined level, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination with the tank, of a nor 
mally closed tank-valve controlling the out 
let therefrom, a service-box adapted to re 
ceive water from said outlet, a self-closing 
flushing-valve controlling the outlet from said 
service-box to the service-pipe, a device con 
necting said valves whereby the flushing 
valve is maintained open during the closure 
of said tank-valve, a siphon discharge-pipe 
communicating with said service-pipe, and 
means for starting siphonic action to dis 
charge the service-box, substantially as de 
scribed. 
4. The combination with the tank and serv 
ice-box provided with a communicating pas 
sage, of a tank-valve controlling Said passage, 
a lever having one arm connected to said 
tank-valve, a flushing-valve connected with 
said lever whereby it is opened upon the clo 
sure of the tank-valve and adapted to be closed 
upon the opening thereof, and a siphon dis 
charge-pipe communicating with the passage 
controlled by the flushing-valve; whereby si 
phonic action is started to discharge the serv 
ice-box upon the opening of said flushing 
valve, substantially as described. 
5. The combination. With the tank and Serv 
ice-box provided with a communicating pas 
sage, of a tank-valve controlling said pas 
sage, a normally open flushing-Valve con 
trolling the service-box outlet, a device for 
maintaining said valve open when the service 
box is empty and closing the same after the 
water has risen to a predetermined level in 
the service-box, means for partially opening 
said flushing-valve in response to the closure 
of the tank-valve, and a siphon discharge 
pipe communicating with said service-pipe, 
substantially as described. 
6. The combination with a flushing-tank; 
of a service-box adjacent thereto; a passage 
leading from the flushing-tank to the service 
box; a tank-valve for said passage; a flush 
ing-valve adapted to control the outlet from 
the service-box to the service-pipe; a lever 
connected on opposite sides of its fulcrum 
with said valves respectively; means for rock 
ing said lever upon its fulcrum; and a siphon 
discharge-pipe within the service-box com 
municating with the service-pipe, substan 
tially as described. 
7. The combination with the tank, of a Serv 
ice - box communicating there with, a tank 
valve controlling the communicating pas 
sage, a service-pipe and flushing - valve, a 
siphon discharge - pipe communicating with 
said service-pipe, a pocket or chamber in said 
service-box, a float in said pocket adapted 
when said pocket is empty to maintain the 
flushing-valve open, a valve-actuating device 
adapted by its movement in one direction to 
open the tank-valve without affecting the 
591,016 - 
5 
flushing-Valve, and by its movement in the 
other direction to close the tank-valve and 
partially open the flushing - valve, whereby 
siphon action is started to discharge the serv 
ice-box, and an outlet from said pocket to 
the service-box, substantially as described. 
8. The combination with the tank, of a serv 
ice-box; a communicating passage between 
said tank and service-box, a tank-valve con 
trolling the said passage, a self-seating flush 
ing-valve adapted to control an outlet from 
said service-box, and an independently-piv 
oted float adapted when not supported by 
fluid to engage and open said valve, whereby 
the said valve may be opened without de 
pressing the float, substantially as described. 
9. The combination with the seat g, of a sup 
port therefor consisting of the rodh, mounted 
IO 
Witnesses: 
H. J. LIVERMORE, 
N. P. FORD. 
on the studs it supported upon the bowl 
proper, a hinge secured to said seat and 
mounted on said rod g, a rocker also sleeved 
on said rod h and provided with a shoulder 
adapted to engage the rear edge of the said 
seat, a valve-actuating device connected to 
said rocker, a bore or recess in said rocker, a 
spring-plunger supported and guided in said 
recess and connected with said seat, and a 
retarding device for said plunger, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM SCOTT. 
25 
e 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591116.txt	(No Model.) 
B. L. H.A.R GROWE. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
COTTON CHOPPER, AND CULTIVATOR. 
No. 59 lll 6, 
Patented Oct. 5, 1897, 
S. Ipjeplor 
  
 
62.2%-42, ?ay Zzzs A?tersey Ayron /, //azyzzee 
%c 
t 
3. 
(No Model.) 
B, L, HAR GROWE. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
COTTON CHOPPER AND CULTIVATOR, 
| 
No. 591, ll6, 
=s=. 
 
Patented Oct. 5, 1897. 
az2%% 3y2s A floppeys, 
Byroz. Z.Aazyro ae 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BYRON LAFAYETTE HARGROVE, OF McLENDONS, TEXAs. 
COTTON CHOPPER AND CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 591,116, dated October 5, 1897. 
Application filed November 24, 1896, Serial No. 613,306, (No model). 
55 
75 
Io 
25 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, BYRON LAFAYETTE 
HARGROVE, a citizen of the United States, re 
siding at McLendons, in the county of Rock 
wall and State of Texas, have invented a new 
and useful Cotton Chopper and Cultivator, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to agricultural im 
plements or machines which are designed 
for simultaneously thinning rows of cotton 
plants and plowing or cultivating, or for 
performing either work separately and inde 
pendently, the machine being so constructed 
that when it is required to thin cotton-plants 
the chopping devices are in working position 
and the plowing or cultivating devices re 
moved, and when it is required to plow or cul 
tivate without thinning the hoeing or chop 
ping devices are removed. 
The improvement relates more particularly 
to the means whereby the hoeing and culti 
vating devices are secured in place, so as to 
be capable of being readily and quickly re 
moved to adapt the machine for the particu 
lar Work in hand. -- 
For a full understanding of the merits and 
advantages of the invention, reference is to 
be had to the accompanying drawings and the 
following description. 
The improvement is susceptible of various 
changes in the form, proportion, and the mi 
nor details of construction without departing 
from the principle or sacrificing any of the 
advantages thereof, and to a full disclosure of 
the invention an adaptation thereof is shown 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the im 
proved machine as it will appear when 
equipped for chopping or thinning the rows 
of plants and for plowing or cultivating, the 
frontportion of the tongue being broken away 
and the ground-wheel on the near side re 
moved. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section show 
ing the implement stripped of the hoeing 
or chopping mechanism and the accessories 
therefor. Fig. 3 is a transverse section of the 
casting and hoe or chopping blades. Fig. 4 
is a detail view of the means for connecting 
a beam with the horizontal portion of the 
arched rod or bar. Fig. 5 is a top plan view 
of the rear end of a beam. Fig. 6 is a side 
elevation thereof. 
Corresponding and like parts are referred 
to in the following description and indicated 
in the several views of the accompanying 
drawings by the same reference-characters. 
The axle 1 is provided at its ends with 
ground-wheels 2, and near its ends with hang 
ers 3, in which is journaled a shaft 4, pro 
vided intermediate of its ends with a bevel 
gear 5, and at one end with a pinion 6, which 
is in mesh. With a gear-wheel 7, secured to the 
adjacent ground-wheelin any convenient way, 
so as to revolve therewith. The hangers 3 are 
separable, so as to admit of the shaft 4 being 
removed when it is not required to use the 
hoeing or chopping mechanism in connection 
with the implement. 
- The detachable part of the hangers is bolted 
or otherwise fastened to the part of the hanger 
attached to the axle and is the rear portion, 
so as to admit of the shaft 4 being easily dis 
connected after the removable parts of the 
hangers have been displaced. An interme 
diate hanger 8 is detachably secured to the 
axle 1 and supports the shaft 4 about midway 
of its ends. A bracket-casting 9 is removably 
attached to the axle 1 and has a shaft 10 jour 
naled in its pendent portions 11 and in the 
intermediate hanger 8, and this shaft has a 
square portion between the pendants 11, to 
which are adjustably secured hoe or chopping 
blades 12. A bevel-gear 13 is secured to the 
rear end of the shaft 10 and meshes with the 
bevel-gear 5 and is driven thereby. The 
tongue 14 is secured to the front end of the 
bracket-casting 9, and by lengthening or 
shortening the breast-straps the front end of 
the tongue can be raised or lowered, so as to 
cause the hoe or chopping blades to cut dee 
or shallow, as required. Ariarch 15 is se 
cured to the tongue by means of a clip 16, 
and its bent or pendent ends are connected by 
rods 17 with the hangers 3, so as to strengthen 
the latter and apply the draft to the best ad 
vantage. The singletrees 18have adjustable 
connection with the bent or pendent ends of 
the arch 15, so that the draft can be applied 
to the machine to the best possible advantage, 
according to the character of the work. A 
rod 19 is secured to the horizontal portion of 
the bracket-casting 9, and its ends are sup 
plied with scrapers 20, so as to remove any . 
earth, trash, or other matter from the tread 
p 90 
95 
Coo 
35 
45 
 
2 
591,116 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
surfaces of the ground-wheels that may be 
clinging thereto. 
An arched rod or bar 21 is secured to the 
rear portion of the bracket-casting, and its 
pendent portions are strengthened by braces 
22, extending from the hangers 3 and 8 thereto, 
and the lower ends of the pendent parts of 
the arched rod or bar are bent outwardly and 
have blocks 23 adjustably mounted thereon 
and to which beams 24 are pivotally con 
nected, so as to swing horizontally. Any Suit 
able means may be employed for fastening 
the blocks 23 in an adjusted position, and, as 
shown, binding-screws are employed. A 
coupling rod or bar 25 adjustably connects 
the beams 24 and is arched intermediate of 
its ends, the terminal portions being bent 
horizontally and adapted to be secured to the 
beams 24 in any convenient way. This coup 
ling rod or bar maintains the distance between 
the beams after the parts have been once ad 
justed. 
Any convenient means may be employed 
for raising and lowering the beams, and, as 
shown, a lever 26 is mounted within conven 
ient reach of the driver's seat and has con 
nection with the coupling rod or bar 25, said 
lever being supplied with the ordinary hand 
latch to engage with a notched segment for 
holding the beams at the required elevation. 
A block 27, expanded at one end and con 
tracted at the opposite end, has pivotal con 
nection at the contracted end with a beam 24, 
and its expanded end is formed with an arc 
uate slot 28, through which operates a fas 
tening-bolt 29 to secure the block in an ad 
justed position. 
This block is adapted to 
tilt to vary the pitch of the plow or culti 
vator 30 carried thereby, the standard of 
said plow or cultivator being seated in a 
groove or channel 31, formed in the inner side 
of the block intermediate of its ends, said 
standard being clamped in its seat by the 
fastenings employed for holding the block to 
the beam. Usually a block and a plow or 
cultivator shovel will be attached to oppo 
site sides of a beam and the one will be placed 
in advance of the other. 
The hoe or chopping blades 12 are rectan 
gular-shaped plates curved intermediate of 
their inner and outer edges and have adjust 
able connection with the shaft 10, whereby 
provision is had for causing them to operate 
deep or shallow. To regulate the distance 
between the hills, the blades will be of suit 
able length, and where the hills are to be far 
apart the blades will be long, and for short 
distances apart the blades are proportionately 
shorter. Any suitable means may be em 
ployed for adjustably connecting the blades 
With the shaft, and, as shown, they are formed 
near their inner edges with transversey slots 
32, through which pass the bolts or fasten 
ings 33. 
. When the implement is to be used for hoes 
ing or chopping and cultivating or plowing, 
it will appear, as shown most clearly in Fig. 
1, with the chopping and plowing devices in 
position, but when it is to be used for either 
purpose solely the other mechanism is re 
moved. When the machine is to be used for 
plowing only, the bracket-casting 9 is re 
moved and the tongue 14 is Secured directly 
to the axle 1 and the arched rod or bar 21 re 
places the arch 15 and the shaft 4 and the in 
termediate hanger 8 are omitted, thereby 
making the machine as light as possible and 
comprising only such parts as are essential 
for plowing or cultivating. When the im 
plement is required for chopping or thinning 
rows of plants without plowing or cultivating, 
the arched rod or bar 21, together with the 
plow-beams, and the arch 15, together with 
the rods 17, are removed. 
The machine is equally well adapted for 
either plowing or cultivating or for thinning 
rows of plants, or will perform both operations 
at the same time and will give satisfactory 
results in either capacity, and when required 
for either work the mechanism and devices 
intended solely for the other work can be 
readily disconnected, thereby making provis 
sion for quickly stripping the machine of un 
necessary parts. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is-s 
1. An agricultural implement of the chair 
acter set forth for the purpose described, com 
prising an axlehaving ground-Wheels, a shaft 
parallel with the axle and driven from a 
ground-wheel, a second shaft at right angles 
to the first shaft and driven therefrom, and 
bearing hoe or chopping blades, a bracket 
casting having detachable connection with 
the axle and supporting the said second shaft, 
and an arched rod or bar having connection 
with the bracket-casting and bearing beams 
carrying plows or cultivators, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. In an implement of the character set 
forth, the combination of an axle bearing 
ground-wheels and having hangers, a shaft 
journaled in the hangers and driven from a 
ground-wheel, a bracket-casting having de 
tachable connection with the axle, a second 
shaft journaled at right angles to the first 
shaft in the pendent portions of the bracket 
casting and bearing hoe or chopping blades, 
an arch, rods connecting the pendent ends of 
the arch with the end hangers of the axle, an 
arched rod or bar mounted upon the rear por 
tion of the bracket-casting, braces connect 
ing the pendent ends thereof with the hang 
er's of the axle, and beams bearing plows or 
cultivating devices secured to the lower ex 
tremities of the said arched rod or bar, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In an agricultural implement of the char 
acter specified, the combination of an axle 
having ground-wheels at its ends, a middle 
and end hangers secured to the axle, the end 
hangers comprising separable parts, a shaft 
journaled in the hangers and driven from a 
ground-wheel, a bracket detachably connect 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
591116 
3 
with the beam, and a second fastening oper 
ating through the arcuate slot and serving to 
secure the block in an adjusted position, and 
both fastenings acting jointly to clamp the 
shank between the block and beam, substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. The herein-described implement, com 
prising an axle having ground-wheels and 
hangers, a shaft journaled in the hangers and 
driven from a ground-Wheel, a bracket-cast 
ing having detachable connection with the 
axle, a second shaft journaled in the pendent 
portions of the bracket-casting and driven 
from the first-mentioned shaft, hoe or chop 
ping blades having adjustable connection 
with the second shaft, an arched rod or bar 
secured to the rear portion of the bracket and 
braced from the hangers, beams having ad 
justable connection with the arched rod or 
bar and bearing plows or cultivating devices, 
an arch secured near the front end of the ma 
chine and having its bent end portions con 
nected with the end hangers of the axle, and 
a rod bearing scraping-blades, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
BYRON LAFAYETTE HARGROWE, 
Witnesses: 
BISHOP COMPTON, 
L.D. PEAY, 
35 
45 
55 
ed with the axle, a shaft journaled in pendent 
portions of the bracket and in the middle 
hanger and receiving its motion from the first 
mentioned shaft, hoe or chopping blades se 
cured to the second shaft, and an arched rod 
or barremovably connected with the bracket 
casting and having beams connected there 
with bearing plows or cultivators, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. An implement of the character specified, 
comprising an axle having ground-wheels, a 
shaft removably connected with the axle and 
driven from a ground-Wheel, a bracket-cast 
ing detachably connected with the axle, a sec 
ond shaft journaled in pendent portions of 
the bracket-casting and driven from the first 
mentioned shaft, and bearing hoe-blades, a 
tongue adapted to be secured to either the 
bracket-casting or the axle, and an arched 
rod or bar adapted to be mounted upon either 
the bracket-casting or the tongue, and having 
connection therewith of beams bearing plows 
or cultivating devices, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. In combination, a beam, a block having 
One end contracted and its opposite end ex 
panded and provided with an arcuate slot, 
and having a seat intermediate of its ends in 
the side facing or adapted to be placed against 
the beam, aplow or cultivator having its shank 
fitted in the said seat, a fastening pivotally 
connecting the contracted end of the block. 
. 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591216.txt	 
(No Model.) 
M. L. GRIFFIN 
POISON DISTRIBUTER FOR FIELD USE, 
No. 591,216, 
Qraea, 
razzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzraeae,% 
& 
- III 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Patented Oct. 5, 1897. 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz--> 
No. 
Ezzzzz!!!!!!!!!ZE?No. 
N 
N 
|22222,2:2,2:2,2:2); 
N 
N N 
f*ie NCRIs Peters co 
, PHOTO-rh 
o., WAS-INGTON. . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN L. GRIFFIN, OF PRIEST WALLEY, CALIFORNIA. 
POISON-DISTRIBUTER FOR FIELD USE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 591 216, dated October 5, 1897. 
Application filed March 12, 1897. Serial No, 627,096, (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MARTIN L. GRIFFIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Priest 
Walley, county of Monterey, State of Cali 
fornia, have invented an Improvement in 
Poison-Distributers for Field Use; and Ihere 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the same. 
My invention relates to a device which is 
especially useful for distributing and placing 
poison for the extermination of ground-squir 
rels, gophers, moles, and other vermin which 
burrow in the ground. 
It consists in details of construction, which 
will be more fully explained by reference to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a general perspective view of 
the device. Fig. 2 is an enlarged vertical 
section of the lower portion. Fig. 3 is a simi 
lar view taken at right angles to Fig. 2. 
My device is especially designed so that a 
person riding on horseback or otherwise mov 
ing from place to place can carry it in the 
hand, and, passing from point to point where 
the Vermin make their appearance, can de 
posit a certain regulated amount of the pois 
oned wheat, which is the substance prefer 
ably used for this purpose. 
A is a casing of Sufficient length and diam 
eter to contain a convenient amount of the 
prepared poison. This casing is here shown 
as cylindrical for a portion of its length and 
at the point A' it is contracted into a flat 
rectangular shape at the lower end, as shown 
at A'. From one side of the lower end of this 
casing a discharge-spout B extends and is 
here shown as curving slightly outward. 
The lower end of this spout may be open, if 
preferred, but I have here shown it as pro 
vided with a gate C, having a spring-hinge 
D, which normally closes the gate against 
the bottom of the spout. 
An arm E projects from the bottom of the 
gate and serves for the attachment of a cord 
or wire F, which in turn connects with a pin 
upon the stem or shank G, which projects 
through the bottom of the casing A" as shown. 
The operation of this device will be de 
scribed hereinafter. 
The upper end of the stem G is fixed to a 
slide H, and this slide is movable in a chan 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
55 
75 
nel I, which is formed in the flattened portion 
A" of the outer shell. 
From the upper portion of the discharge 
tube B, which extends up along the side of 
the channel I, a passage or opening J leads 
into the channel I, and from the oppositeside 
and bottom of the flattened portion A' a simi 
lar passage J' opens into the opposite side of 
the channel I. Within this channel is fitted 
the slide H, the lower part of which is solid, 
as shown, and has the shank G. connected 
with it, as previously described. 
K is a spring surrounding the shank G and 
so connected that when the foot of the shank 
Gis pressed upon the ground the springyields 
and allows the slide H to move upward, and 
when the foot is removed from the ground 
the spring again resumes its normal position 
and moves the slide downwardly. 
Within the slide H is a supplemental slid 
able piece H', and this is adjustable so that 
between the solid portion of the slide Hand 
the part His formed a chamber h, and by ad 
justing the part H. the size of this chamber 
may be varied, as will be hereinafter de 
scribed, so as to regulate the charge which is 
to be received into it. This chamber 7, nor 
mally stands in line with the opening J from 
the lower part A of the holder, and in this 
position a portion of the contents will flow 
When the 
into the chamber h, and fill it. 
slide His moved upwardly, the chamber h. 
will be carried up so as to cut off communi 
cation with the passage J and bring it oppo 
site to the passage J, with which communica 
tion is thus opened, and the contents of the 
chamber h will flow out through J and into 
the discharge-tube B. As the pressure upon 
the shank G. pushes the slide up it also acts, 
through the cord or chain F and the lever E, 
to open the gate C, previously described, and 
allow the charge to be delivered at the exact 
point desired. As soon as the pressure upon 
the shank G is relieved the spring brings the 
slide H H back to its normal position, so as 
to allow another charge of grain to enter the 
chamber h, and this may be repeated as often 
as desired. The top of the slide Hhas a fixed 
cap H, and through this is a hole, which is 
screw-threaded to allow the rod L to pass, 
the rod being also screw-threaded, as shown. 
9o 
95 
OO 
% 
591,216 
5 
- - 
- 
- 
25 
ingly enlarged. 
The lower end of this rod has an enlarged 
head M, which is turnable in a correspond 
ing socket or chamber in the upper part of 
the slide H'. It will be manifest from this 
construction that when the rod L is turned 
in One direction the screw-threads will cause 
it to advance and carry with it the inner slide 
II", thus correspondingly decreasing the size 
of the opening h. When turned in the op 
lo posite direction, the inner slide H." will be 
withdrawn and the chamber h correspond 
From the upper end of the containing-cham 
ber A extends a tubular extension N, which 
15 is of sufficient length for the purposes of the 
operator. If the operator is on foot, it need 
not be as long as When he is on horseback, 
and to the upper end of this extension N is 
fixed a handle O, by which the operator can 
2O conveniently carry and operate the device. 
When the device is operated by pressing 
the foot of the shank G. upon the ground, he 
simply presses down upon the handle O, and 
the operation will be as previously described. 
The rod L extends up through the interior 
of the case A and through the extension N, 
having at its upper end and within the open 
sides which support the cross-bar O a head 
or cross-bar P, so that, if desired, the opera 
3o tOr may pull up on this cross-bar P and the 
rod L and thus operate the slide H. H'. The 
slide P also serves to turn the rod L when it 
is desired to adjust the inner slide II" and 
alter the capacity of the chamber h. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A device for distributing and placing poi 
Son consisting of the containing-case having 
4o the rectangular extension at the lower end, a 
spout projecting from one side and below said 
extension, an intermediate channel between 
said spout and the opposite side of the exten 
sion of the case, openings made from the lower 
part of said extension into the intermediate 
channel, and from the channel into the dis 
charge-spout and out of line with each other, 
a slide fitting and movable in the intermedi 
ate channel, a spring-pressed foot-piece con 
5o necting with said slide whereby pressure upon 
the foot-piece moves the slide upward and 
when relieved from said pressure allows the 
spring to return the slide to its normal posi 
tion, a chamber formed in the slide and nor 
mally standing in line with the opening from 
the casing whereby the chamber is filled there 
from, said chamber being moved with the 
slide to cut off communication with the sup 
ply, and bring it into line so as to discharge 
6o its contents into the spout upon the opposite 
side. 
2. A device for distributing and placing poi 
Son for Vermin, consisting of a containing 
case having a contracted extension at the 
lower end, a discharge-spout extending down 
Wardly from the lower part of said extension, 
a closed channel intermediate between said 
35 
45 
55 
65 
spout and the opposite side of the extension 
having passages out of line with each other 
communicating respectively with the spout 
and with the extension, a slide fitting and 
movable in said passage, a foot-piece Orshank 
fixed to the lower end of the slide so that 
pressure of the same upon the ground acts to 
move the slide upwardly within its channel, 
a spring connecting with the slide and foot 
piece whereby the slide is returned to its nor 
mal position when pressure upon the foot 
piece is relieved, a chamber formed in said 
slide standing normally in line to be filled 
from the lower part of the casing, said cham 
ber being cut off from the source of supply 
and brought into communication with the dis 
charge-spout by the upward movement of the 
slide and returned to its normal position by 
the action of the spring, and a spring-closed 
gate at the lower end of the spout, With con 
nections whereby it is opened and closed in 
unison with the movement of the slide. 
3. A device for distributing and placing poi 
son for vermin, consisting of a containing 
case having a contracted extension at the 
lower end, a discharge-spout projecting down 
wardly from one side of said extension, a 
closed channel intermediate between the 
spout and the opposite side of the extension, 
passages connecting the extension. With said 
channel and with the spout, out of line with 
each other, a slide movable in the intermedi 
ate channel having a spring-pressed foot 
piece whereby pressure upon the lower end of 
said foot-piece moves the slide upwardly and 
when relieved from said pressure returns the 
slide to its normal position, a chamber formed 
in said slide adapted to be brought alter 
nately into line with the supply-passage from 
the containing-case and with the discharge 
passage into the Spout, and an adjustable mov 
ing side to said chamber whereby the amount 
received and discharged may be regulated. 
4. A poison distributing and placing device 
consisting of the containing-case having the 
contracted lower end, a discharge-spout con 
nected with and extending downward from 
one side, an intermediate channel having open 
ings out of line with each other communicat 
ing respectively with the discharge-spout and 
with the containing-case, a slide movable in 
the intermediate channel having an inde 
pendent slidable block forming a chamber 
between itself and the lower end of the main 
slide, a screw-threaded rod extending through 
the top of the main slide having a swivel-head 
in the lower end turning loosely in the slid 
ing block whereby the latter is movable to in 
crease or diminish the size of the chamber in 
the slide. 
5. A device for distributing and placing poi 
son consisting of a containing-case having the 
contracted extension at the lower end, a dis 
charge-spout extending downwardly from 
One side thereof, an intermediate closed chan 
nel between said spout and the opposite side 
of the containing-case having passages out of 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
591,216 
. . 
3 
line with each other communicating respec 
tively with the discharge-spout and with the 
containing-case, a slide movable in the inter 
mediate channel having an adjustable cham 
ber formed within it and capable of being 
brought alternately into line with the passage 
to the containing-chamber and with the pas 
sage to the discharge-spout, a rod connecting 
with the slide and adapted to regulate the size 
in the chamber thereof by turning, said rod. 
extending upwardly from the top of the con 
taining-case, a tubular extension or handle 
... O 
 
within which the rod is movable having a 
handle at the upper end and an independent 
handle upon the rod whereby the latter may 
be turned, and whereby it may also be used 
to move the slide independently of the foot 
piece. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
- 
MARTIN 1, GRIFFIN. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. NoURSE, 
JESSIE. C. BRODIE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591316.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 591316. 
 
W. H. WOODS, 
REFRIGERATOR, CAR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, l. 
Patented Oct. 5, 1897. 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR 
24/-, 
77-e Y 7 
(No Model.) 
. 
W. H. WOODS. 
REFRICERATOR, CAR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 591,316, 
Patented Oct. 5, 1897, 
 
WITNESSES 
%22 A2a-la. 
INVENTOR 
-6-4-7. Cez-4 
427, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. WOODS, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OE TWO-THIRDS 
TO ROBERT FERGUSON AND ELBERT R. TODD, OF SAME PLACE. 
REFRIG ERATOR-CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 591,316, dated October 5, 1897. 
Application filed November 23, 1896. Serial No. 613,087, (No model.) 
To all tuhon, it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. WooDs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at De 
troit, county of Wayne, State of Michigan, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Refrigerator - Cars; and I de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to refrigerator-cars, 
and its object is to provide means for com 
pressing and circulating ammonia-gas or other 
refrigerating vapor by means of the power 
generated by the movement of the car. 
My invention is shown in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a car, show 
ing the refrigerating-pipes in dotted lines. 
Fig. 2 is a perspective showing the means of 
compressing the circulating vapor used in re 
frigerating. Fig. 3 is a separate view of the 
tank I. Fig. 4 is alongitudinal sectional view 
showing the tank Ilocated within the tank H, 
but with the coil removed. 
In the drawings, A represents the body of 
a car, C. C. the car-wheels, and a' at the axles. 
B represents the supply end of the circu 
lating-pipes in the car, and A' the return end. 
These pipes I prefer to pass around the car 
at the top and bottom. 
C is an ammonia-tank bolted to the under 
side of the car. 
D is a rotary pump which receives the gas 
on the return from the circulation and com 
presses it into the tank C. 
a' and Clare sprocket-wheels on the shaft 
of the pump and the car-axle, respectively, 
and a' is a sprocket-chain by means of which 
the pump is driven from the car-axle. 
C is an inlet-valve through which to charge 
the tank with ammonia in starting the de 
WCe. 
His a Water-tank supported on the hang 
ers h h underneath the car and is left open 
at the top. 
I is another tankihside of the tank H, also 
open at the top, and around the edge it is pro 
vided with the perforated rim i. 
25 
35 
45 
J J are coils of pipe forming a part of the 
circulating system and are located in the in 
ner tank, where they are surrounded by the 
water contained in that tank. The tank I is 
filled with water, the tank H. partially so, and 
the pump K, operating from the axle of the 
car in like manner as the ammonia-pump, is 
employed to pump the water from the tank 
H into the inner tank, where it overflows 
through the perforations in the rim i into 
the outer tank, causing the water to circu 
late constantly from one tank to the other 
while the car is in motion. 
J is a resistance-valve arranged to pass the 
ammonia or gas upward from the coils into 
the circulating-pipes in the car only when the 
pressure in the tank and coils gets above a 
determined amount, preferably a pound or 
two above that necessary to compress the 
ammonia-gas into a liquid. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
The ammonia-tank is filled with liquid am 
monia, which is held in this state by the re 
sistance-valve J', with a difference of about 
thirty pounds below and above the valve. 
As soon as the car starts the pump D re 
duces the pressure in front of the valve by 
exhausting from the refrigerating-pipe, which 
admits ammonia from below the valve to pass 
into the refrigerating-pipes, where it expands 
and takes up heat in the manner common to 
such devices. The coils J J are kept in the 
Water-tank to keep the ammonia at as low 
temperature as possible. The Water over 
flowing from the inner tank is cooled by con 
tact with the air brought over it by the move 
ment of the car. 
I show a rotary pump for compressing the 
ammonia, or other vapor, but any form of 
pump may be used. 
While show gearing for the pump adapted 
to work when the car is going in one direction 
only, suitable gearing may be employed to 
run the pump in one direction, whatever di 
rection the car may be going. 
What I claim is 
In a refrigerator-car, the combination of the 
expansion-pipes Within the car, a coil of pipe 
underneath the car connecting opposite ends 
of said pipes, means for circulating Water over 
the coil of pipes operated by the movement of 
55 
7 o' 
75 
95 
IOC) 
591,316 
the car, Said means consisting of an outer 
tank H, and an inner tank I within which 
the coil lies suitably suspended beneath said 
car, and a pump operated by the movement of 
Said car, pipes connecting said tanks with 
the pump whereby the pump may draw wa 
ter from one tank and discharge it into the 
other, a pump to draw the vapor from the 
pipes and force it into the coil, and a resist 
ance-valve adapted to deliver the vapor from Io 
the coil into the pipes only at a high pressure, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof Isign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM II. WOODS. 
Witnesses: 
S. E. THOMAS, 
A. F. EBELING. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591416.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 591,416, 
E. L., MORG AN. 
INDICATOR, AND RECORDER. 
9. Sheets 
Sheet 1. 
Patented 00t, 
l2, 1897, 
 
"I 
 
WITNEssfs. 
 
 
saasaxxx rasarasvassavasawaxaashrew 
64-ace K 
By 
INVENTOR 
72 2-24. 
y 7. Y. 
the Norris ETERs co, PHoro-LITHo, washinoro... 
(No Model.) 
E. L. MORG AN. 
INDICATOR AND RECORDER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 591,416. 
Patented Oct. 12, 1897. 
WITNESSES 
-6.4/29-4. 
 
INVENTOR 
"A 2/3...A. 
ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
E. L. MOR GAN. 
INDICATOR AND RECORDER. 
9 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
No. 591,416. 
Patented Oct, 12, 1897. 
 
in t- 
5x), 2. 
- 
{} { 
7 
G2 re-A A 
y 97s 
AM 
Aig 
alo 
re 
O 
2 
B 
(Are 719 as 
- 9as 
s 
ERY 
O 
? 
S. 
WITNESSES: 
2-64-7 9. a 46- 
-60/6/244 
thi NRay, PETERS CO. PHOff)-la-G. WASINGTON, D.C. 
INVENTOR 
awa/24. Z Zzzeez. 
". . /2-6. 
ATTORNEY. 
(No Model.) 
E. L. MORG AN. 
INDICATOR, AND RECORDER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 591,416. 
Patented 00 t. 12, 1897. 
4 - 2 
367, 7. 
6 
- - - -76 - - - - 
- - - - -.V. 
 
 
2 2 
 
2 2S2 
2eS 
2 
2 
INVENTOR 
6a- 72.2/art 
y 7 /3 2.4. 
ATTORNEY. 
 
"THE NORRIs Peters co, PHOTo-LTHO, wash NGTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
No. 59,416. 
E. L. M.ORGAN. 
INDICATOR AND RECORDER 
9 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Oct. 12, 1897. 
2.7/. 
WITNESSES 
-(06/24-5 
INVENTOR 
of 2. 
ATTORNEY. 
 
The NORRS PETERs co., Photo.l.itho...washi NGrcN, o, c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 591416. 
E. L. MORG AN. 
INDICATOR, AND RECORDER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented Oct. 12, 1897. 
O HO y 
 
 
 
70 
rigs 
S 
 
arrat 
 
 
 
 
% 
% 
 
 
NS 
2 
73 
S 
WITNESSES: 
264444- 
-Cola/24- 
" 
. 
6. 
(aze/2c ec. A 
1M/EMTOR 
2-a-a- 
by 2E 
7. 9/3c a 4. 
ATTORNEY. 
the Morris PETERs co., Photo-Lithd., washington, to c 
(No Model.) 
E. L. MOR GAN, 
INDICATOR, AND RECORDER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
No. 591,416. 
Patented 00t, 12, 1897. 
N 
N N N N N N N N 
N N 2 N N N Nis 
NQ N N 5 N 
Z A 
N 
N N 
% 
N N N R R 
3,Sita 
assSc, 
I 
 
  
2. 727, 
 
al 
zz56; ------- - --- 
 
WITNESSES 
- Ta. 
INVENTOR 
a 9 
ATTORNEY. 
 
(No Model.) 
E. L. M.ORGAN. 
INDICATOR AND RECORDER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 8, 
No. 591,416. 
Patented 00 t. 12, 1897, 
267, 72. 
Z076 
 
 
762a. 
72 
72 
INVENTOR 
Im-33 i.e. <brzer 
-s /24 
ATTORNEY. 
 
The Norris PETERs co, PHoTo-LTHo. washington, b. c. 
(No Model.) 
E. L. MORG AN. 
INDICATOR AND RECORDER, 
9 Sheets-Sheet 9 
No. 591416, 
Patented 00t, 12, 1897. 
WITNESSES 
6. 
fly/ENTOR 
-6/62/28.5 
 
7/2.4. 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD LAWRENCE MORGAN, OF LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS. 
NDICATOR AND RECORDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Retters Patent No. 591,416, dated October 12, 1897. 
Application filed November 18, 1896, Serial No. 612,564, (No model.) 
55 
o 
75 
- 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EDWARD LAWRENCE 
MORGAN, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Little Rock, in the county of Pulaski 
and State of Arkansas, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Indicators 
and Recorders; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
a duplex indicator and recorder having two 
faces containing dials arranged on opposite 
sides, provided with dial-pointers operated 
simultaneously, so that the number or thing 
indicated will show on opposite sides or faces 
of the register. 
It is also my object to provide a recording 
mechanism which will type-write on a paper 
ribbon each number or Word indicated on the 
dials, affording a consecutive record of each 
transaction during an indefinite period of 
time. 
It is also my object to provide a novel mech 
anism for operating a pointer or set of point 
ers which indicate the number or Word and 
return to Zero after each registration simul 
taneously with the return of the type-wheel 
corresponding to each set of dials. 
It is also my object to provide a mechanism 
for operating two sets of dial-pointers having 
separate sets of dials, one set indicating dol 
lars and words and the other set indicating 
fractions of a dollar or cents, the pointers for 
each set of dials being operated separately 
and provided with an alarm-bell distinct in 
tOne. 
It is also my object to provide two type 
wheels, one of which corresponds to each set 
of dials, said wheels operating independently 
of each other, but simultaneously and in uni 
son with their respective dial-pointers, each 
wheel printing a consecutive record in the 
dollar or cents column, respectively. 
It is also my object to provide a spacing 
mechanism for the paper-feed spool to be au 
tomatically operated by the locking mechan 
ism, causing a blank space to be left on the 
paper ribbon each time the register mechan 
ism is unlocked, thus beginning a separate 
record each time the register is unlocked, 
which the conductor is compelled to make for 
his own protection when he leaves the car 
and locks the register. 
It is also my object to provide a returning 
mechanism which, after the dial-pointers are 
turned to indicate and the gong sounded call 
ing attention to the fact, will hold said point 
ers on the number indicated a sufficient time 
for an observer to read the number before the 
pointers are returned to Zero. 
It is also my object to provide an endless 
feed mechanism for the carbon ribbons which 
will also give automatically a lateral move 
ment to the ribbon. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, I have shown my 
invention as applied to a railway-coach; but 
it is evident that its application is manifold. 
It is well adapted for a ferry-boat, or as a cen 
tral indicator in an office or store and sales 
room. It may be used without the telltale 
dials, in which instance it would serve as a 
cash-indicator, when the locking mechanism 
may be omitted. In its application to a rail 
way-coach the indicator is placed midway the 
length of the coach and connected by line 
shafts operating telltale-dial pointers placed 
at each end of the same, so that regardless 
of the direction in which the passengers are 
facing One of the telltale indicator-dials and 
one face of the central or operating indicator 
will confront them. This is an important 
feature, as owing to the length of a passen 
ger-coach it would be impracticable to have 
have dials large enough to be read more than 
half of said length. 
Figure is a longitudinal section of the 
upper part of a railway-coach broken away 
near each end, showing my indicator and re 
corder, the telltale-indicators, the operating 
shafts connecting the same, and the pull 
cords. Fig. 2 is a transverse section of the 
coach, showing a front elevation of one of 
the telltale-indicators in position. Fig. 3 is 
a detail view of a hanger for the line-shafts. 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of the casing for hous 
ing in the locking mechanism to the inner 
end walls of the coach. Fig. 5 is a front ele 
vation of the operating mechanism of my in 
dicator and recorder, the front wall of the 
casing, the dials, and dial-pointers being re 
moved; and Fig. 6 is a rear elevation of the 
95 
OO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
3 
591,416 
The pointers for the two dials mark- 7 O 
IC 
3O 
45 
5 5 
same with the rear wall and other like parts 
detached. Fig. 7 is a section taken on the 
line 7 7 of Fig. G. Fig. 7 is a detail view 
of a portion of the cam-shaft disk, showing 
relative position of its shoulder and stop. 
Fig. S is a section taken on the line S S of 
Fig. 7, showing the mechanism for operating 
the gong-hammer, the vertical motor-rod, and 
horizontal levers. Fig. 9 is a vertical longi 
tudinal section showing the cam-shaft, its 
attachments, and the relative position of the 
dial-pointer shaft. Fig. 10 is a section on 
the line 10 10 of Fig. 8. 
Fig. 11 is a hori 
Zontal section taken on the line 11 11 of Fig. 
6. 
Fig. 12 is a view showing part of the re 
versing mechanism for the carbon-feed. Fig. 
13 is a section taken on the line 13 13 of Fig. 
5. 
IFig. 14 is a longitudinal section through 
one of the grooved pulleys. Fig. 15 is a sec 
tion taken on the line 15 15 of Fig. 14. Fig. 
16 is a section through the type-wheels, type 
hammer, and means for operating the latter. 
Fig. 17 is a detail view of the mechanism for 
operating the lateral movement of the car 
bon-spools. Fig. 1S is a detached view of the 
pawl and ratchet and attachments for con 
necting the paper-feed to the locking mech 
anism. Figs. 19 to 22, both inclusive, are 
detail views of the several parts forming the 
mechanishm for operating the carbon - feed. 
Fig. 23 is a cross-section showing the parts 
in Figs. 21 and 22 assembled. Fig. 24 is a 
cross-section through the switch-lever 111, 
showing its pivotal attachment and its coln 
nection to the reciprocating frame shown in 
Fig. 20. Fig. 25 is a detail view of the re 
ciprocating frame 115. Fig. 26 is a plan view 
of one of the return-moto's for dial-pointer 
shafts and type-wheels. Fig. 27 is a front 
elevation of the indicator and recorder. 
Referring more particularly to the draw 
ings, I will first describe the construction and 
operation of the indicator and recorder and 
afterward its application to a railway-coach. 
1 denotes the casing of the indicator, to the 
bottom, top, and side walls of which the oper 
ating mechanism is attached, the front and 
back Walls being removable for purposes of 
repair and adjustment, 
2 denotes a door in the front Wall of the 
casing for access to the paper ribbon. 
3 denotes a horizontal platform secured to 
the sides of the casing, upon which part of 
the mechanislm is supported. 
4 denotes the dial for dollars, and for the 
purpose of a railway-coach is also mallked 
with the words Annual pass, Punch pass, 
Mileage-book, Local ticket, Through 
ticket, and Half-fare. 
5 denotes the dials for fractions of a dollar. 
There are four dials in all, making two pairs, 
each pair having a dial facing from opposite 
sides of the indicatol'. The numbers on the 
front dials read to the right and those on the 
opposite side read to left. 
G denotes the dial-pointers, attached to op 
posite ends of two shafts, hereinafter de 
scribed, said ends projecting through the front 
and back walls of the casing, as shown ill. 
Fig. 7. 
ing dollars being on opposite ends of one shaft 
and those for the two dials malking CentS Oll 
the other, a movement of either shaft Will 
cause its corresponding dial-pointel's to indi 
cate simultaneously on both faces of the 'eg 
ister. 
77 denote two pairs of grooved pulleys, 
mounted loosely upon shafts S. Each pair of 
pulleys has two cords 9, one cord passing 
around each pulley in its groove and fastened 
thereto. The free ends of said cords pass 
under guide-pulley's 10 and lead in opposite 
directions-two in front and two to the rea)' 
of the indicator. 
11 denotes housings over the gl'OO Ves of each 
pulley to confine the cords in position. Be 
tween each pair of pulleys and fixed to said 
shafts 8 is a sprocket-wheel 12, (shown in 
Figs. 13 and 14,) provided with pins 12, which 
engage a lug 7 on each of a pair of pulleys. 
13 denotes sprocket-chains connecting Sail 
sprocket-wheel with a sprocket-wheel 14, Se 
cured to a hollow shaft 15. As shown in Tig. 
7, there are two separate mechanisms for Op 
erating the dial-pointers and type-wheels, Olle 
on each side of the indicator, and therefore 
a description of one will suffice for both, the 
construction being identical. Said hollow 
shaft, to be hereinafter termed the cann 
shaft, has secured thereto said sprocket 
wheel 14, an actuating-calm 17, hereinafter 
described, a main coiled spring 18, one end 
of which is secured to the side wall of the cas 
ing, and a cam-shaft disk 19, having a shoul 
der 20 on its periplery which engages a stop 
21, secured to said casing, and also a lug 
20', which engages a toothed disk hereinafter 
mentioned. Said cam-shaft is mounted upon 
and turns on a shaft 22, as shown in Fig. ), 
known as the dial-pointer shaft, to which 
is secured a toothed disk 23, having a stop 24, 
which engages a lug 25, secured to the casing 
wall, and also engages the lug 20. 26 denotes 
a pawl which engages the teeth of Said disk, 
as hereinafter described. To the square ends 
of the dial-pointer shaft the dial-pointers are 
secured, the normal position of which point 
el's is the Zero-marks on the front and l'eal' 
dials. The cam 17, as shown in Figs. S and 
9, is provided with a recess or detent 16 on 
its periphery, which normally is turned up 
permost and which engages with a shoulder 
on a horizontal lever and a like shoulder on 
a hinged arm, as hereinafter described. 
27 denotes two gear-wheels, each secured to 
One of the dial-pointer shafts, as shown in 
Fig. 5, and engage idle-wheels 28, which in 
turn engage two gears affixed to or forming 
part of each type-wheel 29 29. The ends of 
the two dial-pointer shafts are journaled on 
horizontal bal's 30, crossing the front and real 
sides of the casing, and the type - wheels, 
which are located just inside of the front, 
Wall of the casing, are loosely mounted on a 
75 
So 
go 
ICC 
IC5 
IO 
15 
 
591,416 
3 
IO 
25 
35 
55 
75 
90 
95 
fixed axle supported by a vertical bar 31 at 
one end and to a standard 32 at the other. 
The type-wheels are mounted side by side 
and are operated by the respective dial 
pointer shafts, each wheel moving and print 
ing independently of the other and revolving 
in an opposite direction. They carry on their 
peripheries the numbers corresponding to 
their respective dials, and as the dial-pointers 
are operated by pulling the cords 9 the type 
wheel geared to the dial-pointer shaft turns 
simultaneously with said pointers and prints 
on a detachable paper ribbon, as hereinaf 
ter described, the number indicated by said 
pointers. Said shaft is then acted upon by 
a return-motor and returns said pointers and 
type-wheel back to Zero, as hereinafter de 
scribed. Said motors are designated in Fig. 
5 as A and B, and a plan view of the same is 
shown in Fig. 26. They are identical in con 
struction and a description of one will suffice 
for both. 
33 denotes a gear-wheel which meshes with 
gear-wheel 27 on the dial-pointer shaft. 34 is 
a gear-wheel mounted on the same shaft with 
wheel33. 35 is a coiled spring (shown in Fig. 
20) secured to said shaft between said wheels. 
36 is a shaft carrying a pinion 37, which 
meshes with wheel 34, and a gear-wheel 38, 
which meshes with a pinion 39 on shaft 40, 
which also carries gear-wheel 41, meshing 
with a pinion 42 on shaft 43, carrying a 
retarding fly - Wheel 44. Said spring 35 is 
Wound up by a pull on the cords 9, operating 
the dial-pointer shaft, which, through its 
gear-wheel 27, transmits its movement to the 
motor. When said cord is released, the 
spring effects a return movement of the dial 
pointer shaft, which in turn moves the type 
wheels back. 
45 denotes two main horizontal levers (seen 
in Figs. 6, 7, and 8) pivoted at one end to the 
sides of the casing and extending inwardly 
to about the center of the same, where the in 
ner ends are loosely mounted by means of 
slots upon opposite sides of a Vertical motor 
rod 46. Said levers are alike in construction. 
Each is formed with a bend giving upon its 
under side a vertical rise or shoulder, which 
fits into the detent on cam 17, and when the 
cam-shaft is revolved the cam-bearing upon 
the under side of the shoulder first lifts the 
lever by forcing the shoulder out of the de 
tent. When the main spring 18 turns the 
cam-shaft back, the shoulder gradually sinks 
back into the detent and the further back 
ward turn of the shaft is arrested by the 
shoulder 20 on disk 19 engaging the stop 21. 
This check to the return movement of cam 
shaft occurs immediately before the begin 
ning of the gradual descent of shoulder on 
lever 45 into said detent. The vertical motor 
rod 46 extends down nearly to the bottom of 
the casing, as shown in Fig. 6, where it is 
connected to the main return-motor C, here 
inafter described, by a crank-arm 47. The 
movement of said rod is a reciprocating ver 
tical one, its upward movement being effected 
by pulling either one of the four cords, which 
in turn operates the cam-shaft, raises either 
horizontal lever, which in turn raises the 
motor-rod. The downward movement of said 
rod is effected by the main return-motor. 
C denotes the main return-motor, which, 
as shown in Figs. 6 and 13, is provided with 
a train of gear-wheels mounted in a frame 
hung to the under side of the platform. This 
motor consists of a rock-shaft 4S, to which is 
rigidly secured one end of the crank-arm 47. 
49 denotes another crank-arm attached to 
said shaft, its free end carrying a Spring-ac 
tuated pawl 50, which engages with a ratchet 
wheel 51, loosely mounted to said shaft. 52 
denotes a gear-wheel loosely mounted to said 
shaft and rigidly secured to said ratchet 
wheel. 
53 denotes a crank-arm having a coiled 
spring attached to its free end, which spring 
is secured to a tension device hereinafter de 
scribed. The gear-wheel 52 meshes with a 
pinion 54 on a shaft 55, which carries a gear 
wheel 56, which in turn meshes with a pinion 
57 on a shaft 58, carrying a gear-wheel 59, 
which meshes with a pinion 60 on shaft 61, car 
rying a gear-wheel 62, which in turn meshes 
with a pinion 63 on shaft 64. 
65 denotes the coiled spring, one end of 
which is attached to the crank 53 and the 
other end to a crank-arm 66, Secured to a rock 
shaft (37, extending through to the front side 
of the casing, where it is provided, as shown 
in Fig. 5, with a segmental rack 68 and hand 
crank 69, rigidly secured thereto. 70 denotes 
a spring-actuated pawl which engages the 
teeth of said rock. The tension of spring 65 is 
regulated by moving the hand-crank to the 
right or left. The train of gear-wheels of 
the main return-motor is operated to expand 
spring 65, which is accomplished by the up 
Ward movement of the vertical motor-rod 46 
as it is lifted by the action of the cam 17 upon 
either horizontal lever 45. The operation is 
as follows: As rod 46 moves up it carries 
with it the attached end of crank 47, which 
partially rotates the rock-shaft 4S, carrying 
with it crank 49, having pawl 50 and crank 
53, which latter causes spring 65 to expand 
until the motor-rod 46 has attained the limit 
of its upward movement. When this occurs, 
the pawl 50, engaging with the ratchet-wheel 
51, locks the train of gears to the rock-shaft, 
which shaft is then turned back by the ten 
sion of said spring upon its crank 53, which 
puts the train of gears in motion. The ob 
ject of this train is to retard or graduate the 
action of the spring 65. 
The functions of the vertical motor-rod 46 
are threefold. 
First. It acts through its attachments on 
the toothed disk 23 (see Fig. 6) as follows: 71 
denotes two horizontal arms having locking 
catches or pawls 26, which engage the teeth 
of said disks. Said arms are pivoted to op 
posite side walls of the casing and extend 
IOO 
lo5 
IIo 
II5 
I 25 
 
i. 
591,416 
O 
about half-way across, where their free ends 
are supported in a bracket 73, secured to the 
upper end of a gravity-rod 74. This rod has 
a vertical movement, its downward move 
lment being effected by its weight and the 
weight of said horizontal arm 71, while its up 
Ward movement is caused by the descent of 
said motor-rod, as hereinafter shown. Said 
gravity-rod is provided at its lower end with 
a short guide-l'od 74, which rides in a per 
foration in the horizontal platform, and a 
guide-lug 74", which plays in a recess 72, 
formed in the holrizontal bar 30. 
It also has 
a step Ol' lug 75 near its lower end which 
rests on one end of an arm 76, pivoted at its 
Center On a bracket secured to the holizontal 
platform. The other end of said pivoted arm 
engages a lug 77 on the motor-l'Od. Said parts 
act as follows: When the motor-rod is raised, 
lug 77 allows the contacting end of the arm 
76 to rise. The weight of the gravity-rod 
bearing down on the other end causes this 
end of said arm to fall. As the gravity-rod 
falls pivoted arm 71 (better shown in Fig. 6) 
falls With it, bringing the catches 26 in con 
tact with the teeth on disks 23. The object 
of this action of the vertical motor-rod through 
the gravity-rod and pivoted arms 71 upon the 
toothed disks is to hold the dial-pointer shaft 
from titlrning backward, the pawl 26 passing 
over the teeth of said disk when said shaft is 
turned in the direction for registering, but 
will arrest a movement of said disk in the op 
posite direction. Said pawl is lifted from 
contact with said teeth by the motor-rod just 
as it completes its down movement, thereby 
releasing said shaft, which is then acted upon 
by its return-motor A or B. 
Second. The motor-rod acts through its at 
tachments on the type-hammer as follows: 
7S denotes a lug secured to the front side of 
Said motor-rod, which engages the real end 
of the hammer-arm, as shown in Fig. 16. 79 
denotes the hammer-arm, which is composed 
of two parts-all upper and lower part. The 
upper part is hinged to the lower, and the lat 
ter extends forwardly under the upper part, 
its forward elnd having a short guide-pin 79, 
which registers with a perforation in the up 
per part. The latter is slotted near its front 
end and provided with an oblong hammer S0, 
pivoted at its center and hung by a pivot-bolt 
in said slot. The lower part of the hallmer 
arm extends back until it meets the lug 7S on 
moto'-l'Od, and near its rear end it is secured 
to a rock-shaft S1, carrying a coiled spring 
S2, (shown in Fig. 6,) which actuates said 
shaft. S3 is a stop secured to said shaft, 
which engages a lug S4, arranged below the 
shaft. 85 denotes a calm rigidly secured to 
said shaft, provided with a detent which en 
gages a paW186, pivoted to one of the shaft 
Supports. S7 denotes a coiled spring fastened 
to said pawl, and SS denotes a trigger pivoted 
to said shaft-support and normally bearing 
against the under side of said pawl. The 
trigger extends rearwardly until it is brought 
in contact with a lug. 89, secured to the 10 
tor-rod. The type-haminer operates as fol 
lows: When the motor-l'od is elevated, the 
lug 7S strikes the rear end of the hanner 
arm, moves it up, and depresses its front eld, 
causing the rock-shaft Si to turn and Wild 
its coiled spring. The cam 85 turns with the 
shaft until the pawl SG engages its detent, 
which locks the shaft and holds tie hall 
mer down preparatory to making its upward 
stroke against the papel' and type-Wheel. As 
the motor-rod moves down the lug S9 strikes 
the trigger and releases the pawl. The shaft 
is instantly rocked by its spring and elevates 
the forward end of the type-hammer arm, 
causing the hammer to strike. To relieve 
the force of the blow and to prevent constant 
contact of the hammer with the paper is the 
purpose of the stop S3. The construction of 
the hammer-arm in two pieces and hinging 
them together is also of especial vallie in this 
respect, as it allows the Outer end of the artil 
carrying the hammer to be swung or thrown 
upward, bringing the halaine' in contact with 
the ribbon, after which it will fall slightly to 
its normal position below the same and not 
interfei'e with its novellent. 
Third. The vertical in otol' - rod, acting 
through its lug 78 upon the type-inal nine', ac 
tuates the feeding mechanism fol' the Spools 
carrying the carbon ribbon and provides 
means for automatically 'eye'sing the feed 
and also giving said ribbon a latei'al move 
ment and thereby changing its path relatively 
to the type-hanmer, so that the latter will not 
wear the ribbon linevenly. This in echanism 
is shown in Figs. 6, 11, and 12. 
It consists of a 
yoke 90, having three jointed arms-One hori 
Zontal and two vertical. The latter are piv 
otally connected by their upper ends to two 
pivoted arms 91, each of which is provided 
with a trip-pawl 918 and a coiled spring 91'. 
(Shown in Fig. 5.) 92.92 denote two ratchet 
wheels, which engage said pawls and throw 
the feed of the carbon libbon either to the 
right or left, depending upon the throw of a 
Counterbalance-arm 93. Said ai'i is show in 
as set to the right, looking from the rear, (see 
Fig. 12,) which throws the feed to the left 
hand carbon-spool. it is provided at its lower 
end with a shoe 94, having two arms extend 
ing at an angle upon each side and also with 
a lug 9.4. 95 denotes two rectangular dogs 
pivoted at theil' angles and provided at One 
end with a locking-tooth 95, engaging said 
latchet-wheels. The other or lower ends of 
said dogs are placed in the path of the als 
of said shoe 94, which alternately bear upon 
each dog. The lower ends of the dogs are also 
placed in the path of the trip ends of pawls 
91, which are actuated by springs to engage 
said ratchet-wheels and aro discngaged there 
from when the lower ends of said dogs are 
forced against the tril) ends of said pawls. 
90 denotes a pinion Oil the shaft of the latchet 
wheel 92', which gear's with a rack-bar 97, 
forming part of a horizontal reciprocating 
90 
CO 
IC5 
O 
I. I5 
3O 
45 
55 
 
591,416 
5 
75 
frame 98. (Shown in Figs. 6, 21, and 22.) 
Said frame is provided with two arms 99, 
which cause the lateral movement of the car 
bon-spools, and a yoke 100, having a slot 100, 
in which rests the free end of switch-lever 
101, which serves to throw the counterbalance 
93 and reverse the carbon-feed. I will first 
describe the construction and operation of the 
reversing mechanism and afterward that of 
the mechanism for effecting the lateral move 
ment of the carbon ribbon. The lever 101 is 
provided with a lug 101", which engages a per 
foration in a horizontal reciprocating bar 102, 
hereinafter described. Said lever is pivot 
ally mounted to a table 103, as shown in Figs. 
11 and 24, and is provided near its free end 
with a yoke 104, having two tripping-arms 105. 
106 denotes a reciprocating frame, (shown in 
Fig. 19,) having guideway's 107 at each end, 
which play in suitable heads secured to said 
table. Said frame is arch-shaped at its mid 
dle and has a yoke upon its under side which 
engages the lug 94 on the counterbalance. 
It is also provided with two perforated lugs 
108. The reciprocating bar 102 (shown in de 
tail in Fig. 20) is mounted in guideways 109, 
secured to said table 103, and said bar is pro 
vided at each end with lugs having projecting 
rods 110, over which are placed coiled springs 
111, Sectured to said lugs at one end, the other 
or free end of which springs bears against lugs 
108 alternately. The rods 110 pass through 
the perforations in the lugs 108. 112 denotes 
trip-pawls pivoted to said table 103, each 
pawl having a spring-pressed tooth at one 
end which engages a detent in the frame 
106. The other or trip ends of said pawls are 
arranged in the path of the tripping-arms 
105. The reversing mechanism operates as 
follows: The pinion carries the rack-bar to 
the right or left, moving the frame 98, with 
its yoke, until either end of the slot 100 
strikes the free end of the switch-lever 101. 
This causes the opposite end of said lever to 
move the bar 102 in the opposite direction, 
compressing one of the springs 111 until 
either side of the tripping-arm 105 trips one 
of the pawls 112 and releases its tooth from 
the frame 106. The coiled spring just com 
pressed will then force frame 106 to move to 
the right or left, and in so doing carry with 
it the counterbalance, which, through the 
action of its shoe upon the dogs and pawls 91, 
reverses the feed. The lateral movement 
given the carbon-spools is effected by arms 
99 of the frame 106 striking a bell-crank 
lever 13, pivoted to a reciprocating frame 
114, having a carriage 115, which holds the 
carbon-spool 115. Both spools are mounted 
on splined shafts or spindles and adapted to 
move endwise on the same and are held in 
place by keepers 116, secured to said car 
riage. 117 is a similar bell-crank lever at 
tached to similar carriage which holds car 
bon-spool 118. Said levers are connected by 
a rod 119. Hence the movement of one bell 
crank moves the other simultaneously in 
Ward or outward, causing the spools to slide 
endwise on their spindles. It is evident that 
this movement will occur as often as the car 
bon-feed is reversed. 
The paper-feeding mechanism consists of a 
rod 120, pivotally connected by its upper end 
to the main horizontal lever 45 on the left 
side of the casing, looking from the rear, (see 
Fig. 6,) its lower end being pivoted to a crank 
arm 121, mounted on a rock-shaft 122, carry 
ing a ratchet-wheel 123. 124 denotes a pawl 
Secured to said crank-arm, which engages 
the teeth of said ratchet-wheel. The for 
Ward end of said shaft carries a paper-feed 
spool 125, in rear of which (see Fig. 18) is a 
ratchet - wheel 126, rigidly secured to said 
shaft, provided with a pawl 127. 125 is the 
paper-supply spool. The parts operate as 
follows: As the cam 17 lifts the horizontal 
ever 45 the latter carries with it the connect 
ing-rod 120, raising the crank-arm 121 and, 
actuating its pawl, turns the rock-shaft carry 
ing the paper-feed spool. The purpose of 
the ratchet 126 is to prevent the spool turn 
ing back. It also serves to advance the paper 
feed through the operation of the locking 
mechanism, as hereinafter described. 
The gong-sounding mechanisms are shown 
in Fig. 8 and are operated by the cams 17. 
There are two gongs provided, one for the 
dollar-dials and one for the cents-dials. Said 
gongs are different in tone, the object of 
which is to distinguish by sound whether 
dollars or cents are being indicated. 128 de 
notes said gongs, the mechanism for operat 
ing which is placed on opposite sides of the 
register. As said mechanisms are identical 
in construction and operation, a description 
of one will suffice for both. 
129 denotes an arm pivoted to the side wall 
of the casing, provided with a coiled spring 
130 near its pivoted end. 131 denotes a shoul 
deron said arm similar in construction to the 
shoulder on the main horizontal lever, and in 
similar manner engages with and is elevated 
by cam 17. Near the free end of said arm, on 
its upper side, is a depression 132, in which 
rides a stud 138, secured to the lower end of 
an arm 134, forming part of a calm 135, se 
cured to a rock-shaft 136, carrying a gong 
hammer 136. The cam 135 is provided with 
a shoulder 135 on its upper side, which nor 
mally bears against a stud 137, secured to one 
side of a supporting-bracket, which stud 
serves to hold said rock-shaft against the ten 
sion of a coiled spring 138, surrounding said 
shaft and fastened to the same at one end, 
while its other end is fastened to an opposite 
supporting-bracket. (Not shown.) 
139 denotes a trigger provided at one end 
with a shoe 140, which impinges against the 
under side of the arm 129. The other end of 
said trigger bears against a spring 141, and 
near this end of the trigger it is provided 
with a tooth 142, which engages a detent, 135 
in said cam. The operation is as follows: As 
the pivoted arm is lifted it raises the arm 134 
95 
OO 
IIC) 
15 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 
(3 
5914i6 
and turns the rock-shaft back against the pawl 127 to engage the ratchet-wheel 126 and 
tension of its spring, lowering the gong-ham 
advancing 
turn the paper-feed shaft 122, 
mel until the detent 135 engages the tooth 
spool 125. 
on the trigger. When the return movement 
The sign-boards are operated as follows: 
of the calm 17 brings its detent or recess 
The connecting-rod 152 through its connec 
under the shoulder 131 of said hinged arm, its 
tion with the rock-shaft 15.1 also operates the 
spring 130 forces said shoulder down in said 
sign-boards to show through the openings in 
recess, lowering the free end of said arm and 
the front and rear walls of the casing. AS 
bringing its under side in contact with the 
shaft, 143 is turned to lock the register mech 
shoe of said trigger, releases its tooth from 
anism the connecting-rod moves shaft 154, 
the cam, and allows the spring on the rock 
lifting the rods 155, which in turn Swing up 
shaft to turn the same, moving the gong-halm 
the free ends of arms 156, having said boards 
nel upward to make its stroke upon the gong. 
attached, and the word Locked will then 
The mechanism for locking my indicator 
appear through said Openings. As the mech 
and recorder consists of a rock-shaft 143, ex 
anism is unlocked the sign-boards drop be 
tending across the center of the casing from 
low said openings and said word is concealed. 
front to rear, as shown in Fig. 13. 144 de 
In Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4 I show my indicator 
notes a can on said shaft, the periphery of 
and recorder attached to the interiol of a rail 
which bears on a spring 145, the purpose of 
way-coach midway of its length and combine 
the cam and spring being to hold the shaft in 
with it two telltale-indicator's 159, one at each 
the position it is turned. 146 denotes a lug 
end of the coach. 
secured to said shaft, which bears against two 
160 denotes two parallel line-shafts for Op 
arms 147, connected to rocking yokes 14S, 
erating the dial-pointers of the several indi 
having locking-arms 149, which engage stops 
cators, one shaft operating the dollar-pointer, 
150 On the grooved pulleys, and thus lock the 
and the other shaft, which is not shown, op 
mechanism. 150* are springs which throw 
erating the cents-pointel'. Each shaft is coll 
Said arms in engagement. 151 denotes a 
posed of two sections, as shown in Fig. 1, 
crank-arm secured to said shaft 143 and piv 
numbered 161, having Square sockets at 
oted to a connecting-rod 152, as shown in Figs. 
each end which register with the Squai'e cind 
5 and 13. Said rod is pivoted to a crank-arm 
of the dial-pointer shafts of the main regis 
153, secured to a rock-shaft 154, (shown in 
ter, and the square - end arbo's 162, which 
Fig. 6,) which shaft also has two other short 
carry the dial-pointel's 163 of the telltale-indi 
crank-arms at each end, which are pivotally 
cators. Said line-shafts thus practically ex 
connected to connecting-rods 155, and these 
tend through the central indicator carrying 
rods are in turn pivotally connected to arms 
the dial-pointers on both faces of the same. 
156, pivoted to the upper right-hand side wall 
164 denotes a bracket for supporting said a 1'- 
of the casing in front, and rear, their free 
bors. 
ends having secured thereto sign-boards bear 
165 denotes a locking line-shaft made up 
ing the Word Locked, which show through 
of two sections 165, similar in construction 
an opening in the front and rear wall of the 
and in its connections with the several reg 
casing, as shown in Fig. 27. The connecting 
isters to the line-shafts for the dial-pointers. 
l'Od 152 also serves to operate a crank-arm 
Said lock-shaft forms practically a contint 
15S, On which is secured the pawl 127, as shown 
ous shaft extending through the main indi 
in Fig. 18. Said crank-arm is mounted by a 
cator by its union with each end of the rock 
yoke at its lower end to a stud on rod 152. 
shaft 143 (shown in Fig. 13) and connected 
Its upper end is loosely mounted to the rock 
to arbors 166 in the telltale-dials. 167 de 
shaft 122 and is adapted to rotate the shaft 
notes sprocket-wheels on said arbors, carrying 
through its pawl 127 engaging the teeth of 
sprocket-chains 168, which gear with sprock 
ratchet-wheel 126. The pawl 127 serves two 
et-wheels 169, mounted on a key-arbor 170, 
purposes. It prevents the return movement 
secured in suitable bearings attached at each 
of shaft 122, as before described, and also 
end of the car. 
serves to rotate the rock-shaft and operate 
171 denotes a casing for housing the sprocket, 
the paper-feed spool when the mechanism is 
chain and wheel, provided with a keyhole for 
unlocked. 
the arbor. This locking mechanism is oper 
The locking limechanism operates as follows: 
ated from either end of the car by a turn on 
Unlocking the mechanism, for example, from 
either key-arbor operating the lock-shaft and 
the rear side the key is fitted to the project 
locking or unlocking the mechanism in the 
ing square end of the shaft and turned to the 
main or central indicator. 
left, causing the lug 146 to bear downwardly 
172 denotes two lines of cords extending 
on the two arms 147 and rock the shafts 148 
from the main indicator, where they are se 
backwardly. This throws the locking-arms 
cured to the grooved pulleys, before described, 
out of engagement with the grooved pulley 
to the telltale-indicators, where their ends 
and unlocks the mechanism. 
are made fast. Said cords are supported by 
The paper-feed is advanced as follows: Si 
suitable hangers suspended from the side 
multaneously with said movement of shaft 
walls of the car-cupola. 
143 the crank-arm operating the connecting 
173 denotes a metal hanger. (Shown in de 
rod 152 actuates the crank-arm 15S and causes tail in Fig. 3.) 
It is secured to the ceiling of 
o 
75 
So 
90 
I O5 
IC 
II5 
2C) 
O 
(5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
591,416 
7 O 
75 
the cupola by its arms 175, and is provided 
with side arms having bearings 176 for the 
line-shafts 161 and a depending arm having 
a bearing 177 for the lock-shaft and a perfo 
ration at its lower end for the usual bell-cord. 
The general operation of my indicator and 
recorder is as follows: The mechanism being 
first unlocked, the paper-feed is actuated, 
Separating the preceding account on the pa 
per ribbon from the one about to be taken. 
A pull is then made on the cord, which oper 
ates the dollar or word dial-pointer to indi 
cate and record the number of dollars or the 
words required. This is followed by a pull 
on the cord operating the pointer for cents. 
When the indicator is used for railway 
coaches, it is placed midway of the same and 
the four cords leading from the register, two 
in front and two in the rear, form practically 
two cords, one at each side of the car, extend 
ing the entire length of the same and con 
nected to the pulleys on corresponding sides 
of the main indicator front and rear, so that 
a pull on either cord will operate four dial 
pointers, one on the front and back of the 
main indicator and One at each end of the car. 
The dial-pointers of the telltale - dials are 
turned by the line-shafts which are operated 
by the mechanism in the main indicator. As 
a cord is pulled the lug on the pulley 7 en 
gages the lug on the corresponding side of the 
sprocket-wheel 12, rotating the same and 
through sprocket-chain 13 revolves the 
sprocket-wheel on the cam-shaft, which in 
turn coils its mainspring. This movement is 
continued until the lug on cam-shaft disk en 
gages the lug on the toothed disk secured to 
the dial-pointer shaft, causing the latter to 
turn until the amount or word is indicated. 
As the dial-pointer shaft is turned the gear 
Wheel 27, carried thereby, operates the train 
of gears of the return-motors A or Band winds 
the spring 35, which actuates the return move 
ment of said notor. Said wheel 27 at the 
same time (through the idle-wheel 28) turns 
the type-wheel corresponding to either dial 
pointer shaft simultaneously. The cam-shaft 
performs its principal functions during the 
first fifth of its rotation, the remaining four 
fifths of the same being transmitted to the 
dial-pointer shaft. During the first fifth of 
its rotation said shaft, by means of its cam17, 
Springs the gong-hammer and simultane 
Ously, acting upon the main horizontal lever, 
transmits its motion to the vertical motor-rod, 
Which through its attachments causes first 
the catches on the hinged arms to engage the 
toothed disk, and Second, and almost simulta 
neously it operates the paper and carbon rib 
bon feeds by depressing the type-hammer arm 
and springs said arm preparatory to its blow 
upon the paper and type-wheel. The cam 
shaft then acts upon the dial-pointer shaft, as 
beforementioned. When the cord is released, 
the mainspring returns said cam-shaft to its 
original position, where it is checked by the 
shoulder 20 on cam-shaft disk engaging stop 
21. An interval is then allowed to note the 
number or word registered, at the beginning 
of which interval the gong-hammer is tripped 
and the gong sounded, calling attention to 
what is being registered by the dials. This 
interval is afforded while the main return 
motor by its regulating train of gear-wheels 
is returning the reciprocating parts to their 
original positions, the last act of which is to 
raise the catches from the toothed disk and 
release the dial-pointer shaft, which is then 
actuated by the return-motor A or B, return 
ing the dial-pointers to Zero and the type 
wheels to their normal poistion. The release 
of said shaft is immediately preceded by the 
motor-rod tripping the type-hammer. 
The train of gear-wheels of the main re 
turn-motor retards the return movement of 
the reciprocating parts and affords a period 
of rest to the pointers after being set for the 
purposes before mentioned, as Well as to al 
low time to pull or set the other pointers, 
when desired, before the former are released. 
This return-motor effects the return move 
ment of all parts of the mechanism except 
the dial-pointer shaft and the type-wheels, 
which, as before mentioned, are returned to 
Zero, or their normal position, by the motors 
A or B. 
It is evident that instead of placing my in 
dicator in the center of a car I may place it 
at either end of the same and dispense with 
one of the telltale-dials, in Which case, there 
Would be two operating-pulleys instead of 
four, and these would be fixed to their re 
spective sprocket-wheels. Again, the indi 
cator would have but one face, and the Op 
erating-shafts and lock-shaft would extend 
from it to the telltale-dial at the opposite end 
of the car. It is also evident that instead of 
connecting the dial-pointer shafts with the 
type - wheels by means of gear-wheels, as 
shown in Fig. 5, I may use a sprocket-chain, 
connecting a sprocket-wheel, fixed to said 
shafts, to a like wheel fixed to each type 
wheel. 
, Having shown and described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. An indicator and recorder having two sets 
of duplicate dials facing upon opposite sides 
of the register each set having different units 
of value, two shafts one in common for each 
set of dial-pointers, type-wheels correspond 
ing to each set of duplicate dials, connected 
to and operated by said shafts and means for 
actuating either set of dial-pointel's and their 
corresponding type - wheel independently 
from either side of the register. 
2. In a recording-indicator the combina 
tion of the dial, the pointer, a recording type 
wheel corresponding to said dial, the dial 
pointer shaft, and means for connecting Said 
shaft and type-wheel whereby said pointer 
and wheel will turn in unison in either direc 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IIC) 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
S 
591,416 
75 
So 
C 3 
I o5 
O 
I 5 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
tion, first indicating and recording the re-it different units of value or words, the combi 
quired number or word and then automat 
nation of the dial-pointer shafts, the calm 
ically returning to Zero. 
shafts, independent return - moto1's for Sail 
3. An indicator and recorder having two 
dial-pointer shafts, the two horizontal level's, 
dials, one marking dollars or words and the 
a rod connecting one of said level's with the 
othel' cents provided with independently-op 
paper-feed shaft, the vertical moto'-l'od coln 
erating pointel's, two type-wheels correspond 
nected to said levers, a main return-motor for 
ing to said dials and actuated independently 
said moto1'-rod, a carbon-libbon feed actuated 
of each other by the dial-pointer shafts to 
by said moto1'-l'O(l, and a Spring - actilatetl 
move in unison with said pointers and record 
hammer-arm sprung and tripped by said mo 
side by side the number indicated on its cor 
to1'-lrod. 
responding dial in the dollars or cents column. 
12. The combination of the dial - pointer 
4. In a double-faced indicator the combi 
shaft having a toothed disk, the cam-shaft, a 
nation of the dial-pointer shaft extending to 
main horizontal level', a vertical moto1'-rod, 
each face of the indicator and carrying point 
means for Operating said level' and l'Od, a 
ers at each end, a shaft carrying two pulleys, 
gravity-rod, and a hinged alm having catches 
means for connecting said shafts, and oper 
which engage the teeth of said disk substan 
ating - cords for said pulleys shaft leading 
tially as described. 
from opposite faces of the register. 
3. The combination of the gong-halmmer, 
5. In an indicating and recording appliance 
the hinged arm connected there with, the can 
the combination of the main indicator and 
shaft, the dial-pointer shaft, means for Oper 
recordler, the telltale-indicators located upon 
ating said shafts and independent meals sub 
opposite sides of said main indicator and con 
stantially as described for effecting the return 
lnected there with by an operating line-shaft, 
in ovements of Said shafts at different inter 
a locking mechanism located in the lmain in 
vals, whereby after the going is sounded the 
dicator connected by a locking line-shaft to 
dial-pointer is held on the number or worl 
Said telltale-indicators, and means for con 
registered for a given time before the pointer 
necting said lock-shaft to a key-arbor at either 
is returned to Zero. 
end of the car. 
14. In a recording-indicator the combina 
6. The combination of the calm 17, the hori 
tion of the vertical motor-l'od, the type-halm 
ZOntal lever actuated by said cam, the con 
mer arm actuated by said rod, the jointed 
necting - rod 120 pivoted to said lever, the 
yoke actuated by said almmer-arm, the piv 
crank-arm operated by said connecting-rod 
oted arms connected to the yoke and having 
carrying a pawl, and the rock-shaft, 122 hav 
actuating-pawls, and the ratchet-wheels oper 
ing the paper-feed spool and a ratchet-wheel 
ated by said pawls and actuating the carbon 
actuated by said pawl. 
spools substantially as described. 
7. In an indicator the combination of the 
15. In a recording-indicator, the combina 
dial-pointer shaft having the toothed disk 
tion of the vertical motor-l'od, the type-han 
and the cam-shaft disk provided with lugs 
ner arm actuated by said rod, the jointed 
which engagelugs on said toothed disk, means 
yoke actuated by said arm, the pivoted arms 
for operating said shafts in common, and in 
connected to said yoke, the 'atchet-wheels 
dependent, means substantially as described 
actuated by said pivoted arms, the trip-pawls, 
for effecting the return movements of said 
and means for actuating and tripping said 
pawls. 
shafts at different intervals. 
S. The combination of the dial - pointer 
16. In a recording-indicator, the colmbina 
shaft, a return-lmotor connected thereto and 
tion of the vertical motor-rod, the type-halm 
causing the return movement of the same, 
lmer arm, sprung and tripped thereby, the 
and a type-wheel operatively connected with 
jointed yoke depressed by said arm, the piv 
the dial-pointer shaft and actuated simulta 
oted arms connected to said yoke, the ratchet 
neously there with. 
wheels operated by said pivoted alms, the 
9. In an indicator and recorder the combina 
tlip-pawls, the pivoted dogs, the counterbal 
tion of the dial-pointer shaft, the calm-shaft, 
ance and means for automatically shifting 
the main horizontal lever, the type-Wheel, 
said coulnterbalance to 'everse the call) On 
the vertical motor-rod, means four effecting the 
feed. 
downward movement of said rod, and a type 
17. In a l'ecording-indicator, the combina 
hammer operated by said rod substantially 
tion of the jointed yolke, the pivoted alms 
as described. 
connected thereto, the latchet-wheels on the 
10. In a double indicator and recorder, the 
carbon - Spool shafts actuated by the trip 
combination of the dial-pointer shaft, the 
pawls, the counterbalance, the pinion on the 
calm-shafts, the horizontal levers pivoted to 
carbon-spool shaft, the horizontal reciprocat 
opposite sides of the casing, the vertical mo 
ing frame having a lack-bal' engaging said 
tor-rod connected to the free ends of said le 
pinion, the pivoted switch-level' actuated by 
vers and having a return-motor at its lower 
said frame, and the horizontal reciprocating 
end, the type-wheels, the type-halmmer com 
rod actuated by said switch-level to shift the 
mon to both type-wheels, and the return-mo 
counterbalance Substantially as described. 
tors A and I3. 
18. The combination of the frame 106, the 
11. In a device for indicating and recording bell-cranks, a laterally-shifting carriage for 
55 
 
591,416 
9. 
O 
the carbon-spools, means for connecting said 
bell-cranks, and means for operating said 
frame. 
19. In a recording-indicator, the combina 
tion with the reversing mechanism for the 
carbon-spools, of a pivoted switch-lever, 
means for operating said lever, a horizontal 
bar actuated by said lever having coiled 
springs at each end, a reciprocating frame 
114 actuated by said coiled springs and pro 
vided with tripping-pawls actuated by said 
switch-lever, and the counterbalance and 
means for shifting the same. 
20. In a locking mechanism for registers 
the combination of the rock-shaft 143 having 
a key-arbor, a rock-shaft 148 connected to and 
operated by said first-named shaft, and lock 
ing-arms secured to the latter shaft adapted 
to engage and hold the grooved pulleys Sub 
stantially as described. 
21. The combination of the rock-shaft 143 
extending to opposite sides of the indicator 
casing having key-arbors at each end, a rock 
yoke 148 upon each side of shaft 143 con 
nected therewith and operated thereby pro 
25 
 
vided with locking-arms engaging operating 
pulley's connected to separate registering 
mechanisms. 
22. The combination of the shafts 143, the 
rod 152 connected to said shaft, the arm 158 
connected to said rod and carrying a pawl, 
the ratchet-wheel 126 actuated by said pawl, 
and the paper-feed shaft, whereby the lock 
ing mechanism operates the paper-feed when 
unlocked. 
23. In an indicator and recorder, the com 
bination of the cam-shaft, the main horizon 
tal lever, the vertical motor-rod the jointed 
yoke actuated by said rod and operating the 
carbon-spools, the connecting-rod 120 con 
nected to said motor-rod and the rock-shaft 
122 carrying the paper-feed spool and oper 
ated by said rod 120. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
3o. 
35 
EDWARD LAWRENCE AIORGAN, 
Witnesses: 
GEO. HARTMAN, 
L. I. BRADFIELD. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591516.txt	?No Model.) 
No. 591,516. 
W. H. WIG GIN. 
ELECTRICAL RAIL BOND, 
Patented 00 t. 12, 1897. 
% N 
ANENYES 
2 
2\\ 
(24 
2. 
WITNESS 
6. 4. 24. 
lo.uo. ?ecuto. 
 
IWWEWTOR 
44- or q 
4ae. 4 ?ea, 
A. 
y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. WIGGIN, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
AMERICAN ELECTRICAL WORKS, OF PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND. 
ELECTRICAL RAL, BOND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 591,516, dated October 12, 1897. 
Application filed April 26, 1897, Serial No. 633,909, (No model.) 
. . 
Io specification. 
To aid, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. WIGGIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Wor 
cester, county of Worcester, State of Massa 
5 chusetts, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Electrical Rail-Bonds, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of this 
My invention relates to a bond for electric 
ally connecting the meeting ends of rails in 
an electrically-operated railway; and my in 
vention consists in an electrical rail-bond 
I5 composed of a flat-sided plate having, pref 
erably, an edgewise bend or curve and car 
rying at its ends laterally-projecting termi 
nals adapted to seat in and to the web of the 
rail, and the portion of the plate between the 
2O terminal ends having a partial flatwise twist, 
substantially as hereinafter set forth and for 
the purpose hereinafter described. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of an electrical rail-bond containing my 
25 invention, and Fig.2 is a sectional plan of 
the same shown seated to and uniting the 
meeting ends of railway-rails. 
My improved rail-bond is composed of a 
plate A, preferably of copper or other elec- . 
3o trically-conductive material, which plate is 
flat-sided and preferably has an edgewise 
curve, as shown in Fig. 1, desirably uniform 
throughout its length. 
At the respective ends a of the plate, and 
35 preferably projecting from the same side face 
thereof, the terminal studs at are provided, 
adapted to seat in suitable corresponding ap 
ertures in the respective meeting ends of rails 
B B', as illustrated in Fig. 2. These termi 
4o nal studs may be of any known form desired. 
Those illustrated in the drawings are simple 
cylindrical studs adapted to be driven into 
or otherwise forcibly seated in the rail-aper 
tures and to have their ends projecting be 
45 yond the face of the rail-web turned or riv 
eted down thereon, as at a*. 
The body or portion a of the plate Abe 
tween the aforesaid terminal ends has a par 
tial flatwise twist, as shown plainly in Fig. 2. 
5o It is essential that the said twist in the body 
 
Witnesses: 
MARVIN M. TAYLOR, 
WILLIS E. SIBLEY. 
- 
65 
of the plate should be a partial one, and pref 
erably a twist which inclines the faces of the 
-body a something less than about forty-five 
degrees to the faces of the terminalends, which 
latter should desirably be in parallel planes, 55 
as shown, as otherwise, and if the twist be 
substantially greater, the lateral dimension 
of the bond-body would be so increased as to 
impair the utility of the bond in carrying 
out one object of the invention-namely, the 
seating of the bond between the rail-Web and 
the fish-plate C. 
The described twist may be given to the bond 
by means of suitable dies or analogous tools 
or in any other known manner. 
It is evident that a rail-bond constructed 
as described may be seated in and to the web 
of the meeting ends of rails between the same 
and the fish-plate, as illustrated in Fig. 2, and 
that the bond Will thus be covered and pro- 7o 
tected by the fish-plate; and it is further evi 
dent that the described partial flatwise twist 
in the bond-body will act to afford a torsional 
spring action in the bond-body and thus more 
or less relieve the seated terminals from strain, 75 
which would otherwise tend to loosen them in 
their seats, due to thermometric changes and 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. An electrical rail-bond composed of a 
flat-sided plate, provided on one of its side 
faces at its respective ends with terminal 
studs adapted to seat in apertures in the 
web of the meeting ends of rails, and having 85 
a partial, flatwise twist in its central portion 
or body, between said terminals, substan 
tially as and for the purpose specified. 
2. An electrical rail-bond composed of an 
edgewise-curved, flat-sided plate, provided on 
one of its side faces at its respective ends with 
terminal studs adapted to seat in apertures 
in the Web of the meeting ends of rails, and 
having a partial, flatwise twist in its central 
portion or body, between said terminals, sub- 95 
stantially as and for the purpose specified. 
WILLIAM. H. WIGGIN. 
traffic. 
- 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591616.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MELCHIOR BNIGER, OF BASLE, SWITZERLAND, ASSIGNOR TO CHEMISCHE 
FABRIK, VORMALS SANDOZ, OF SAME PLACE. 
TRSAZO, DYE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 591,616, dated October 12, 1897. 
Application filed June 26, 1897, Serial No. 642,412, (Specimens.) Patented in France December 11, 1896, No. 262,109, and 
in England December 16, 1896, No. 28,810, 
Io 
to all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MELCHIOR BNIGER, 
chemist, residing at Basle, Switzerland, have 
invented new and useful Improvements in the 
5 Manufacture of Trisazo Dyestuffs, of which 
the following is a specification, and for which 
there is a patent of France, No. 262,109, dated 
December 11, 1896, and a patent of Great 
Britain, No. 28,810, dated December 16, 1896. 
For the production of substantive trisazo 
coloring-matters the tetrazo compounds of 
paradiamins have been frequently combined 
in molecular proportions with amins. Thein 
termediate products thus obtained have been 
I5 rediazotised and then combined with two 
molecules of an azo component. The amins 
proposed as suitable for this purpose are 
alpha-naphthylamin, Cleve's alpha-naphthyl 
amin-sulfonic acids, and a number of amido 
2O naphthol-sulfonic acids. Hitherto, however, 
it has been found impossible to replace these 
compounds by ordinary amins of the benzene 
series, because by the process hereinbefore 
referred to no amidoa Zo compounds capable 
25 of further diazotisation were formed, but only 
diazoamido compounds. Now I have discov 
ered that the easily-accessible, paraxylidin 
(CH:NH: CH=1:2:4) proves to be an ex 
ception to this rule, since the intermediate 
3o products obtained from one molecule of a 
tetrazo compound and one molecule of para 
xylidin can be readily diazotised and be fur 
ther combined without decomposition. Of 
the coloring-matters prepared in this manner 
35 the products obtained by acting with the re 
diazotised bodies on two molecules of amido 
naphthol-disulfonic acid H have proved to be. 
most valuable. On using the tetrazo bodies 
of paradiamins, Well known as components of 
4o dyestuffs-viz., benzidin, tolidin, and dianisi 
din-coloring-matters are hereby obtained 
which dye unmordanted cotton in shades va 
rying from intense indigo to a greenish blue 
and which are capable of diazotisation on the 
45 fiber and of producing thereon by combina 
tion with beta-naphthol deep-black shades 
perfectly fast to washing. 
In carrying out my invention the following 
mode of operation maybe employed: 9.2 kilos 
of benzidin are dissolved in two hundred liters so 
of Water acidulated with twenty-eight kilos 
of muriatic acid of 21 Baum and then diazo 
tised in the usual manner with 6.9 kilos of 
nitrite of soda. Thereupon a solution of 6.1 
kilos of paraxylidin, eighty liters of water, 55 
and six kilos of muriatic acid of 21 Baum 
is added at a temperature of about 5 centi 
grade to the clear tetrazo solution. The mix 
ture is stirred for about two hours, when a 
part of the intermediate product separates 6o 
as a brown precipitate. To complete the re 
action, a solution of sodium acetate prepared 
by neutralization of 7.5 kilos caustic soda 
with about twenty-eight kilos of acetic acid 
of forty per cent. is added and the mixture 65 
is stirred at a temperature not exceeding 5 
centigrade for about three to four hours un 
till unchanged tetraZO-diphenyl can no more 
be identified. The mixture is then acidu 
lated with thirty kilos of muriatic acid of 7o 
20' Baum and diazotised by the gradual ad 
dition of a solution containing 3.5 kilos of 
sodium nitrite. The resulting solution, which 
is of an intensely reddish-yellow color, is now 
allowed to react on a solution of 35.4 kilos of 75 
amidonaphthol - disulfonic acid H (acid so 
dium salt of one hundred percent.) in six hun 
dred liters of water, four kilos of caustic soda, 
and forty kilos of sodium carbonate. After 
some hours standing the new coloring-matter 8o 
is heated to boiling, precipitated by addition of 
two hundred kilos of common salt, filtered 
and dried in the usual way. 
By substituting in the above process ben 
Zidin by equivalent weights of tolidin or di- 85 
anisidin similar coloring-matters are pro 
duced, as is the case in other processes for 
producing coloring-matters, 
These three new coloring-matters have the 
form of powder of slaty to purplish-brown 9o 
color and are easily soluble in Water and also 
in methylic alcohol, however, very sparingly 
soluble in ethyl alcohol. They dissolve in 
strong sulfuric acid with greenish-blue color 
and dye unmordanted cotton from a bath 95 
containing common salt intense blue shades, 
ranging between indigo and dark-greenish 
blue. When diazotised on the fiber, by com 
2 
591,616 
bination with beta-naphthola deep black, with 
metaphenylene-diamin a greenish black, and 
with resorcinol a dark green is produced. 
Reducing agents such as protochlorid of tin 
or zinc-dust destroy the new coloring-matters 
and regenerate benzidin, tolidin, or dianisi 
din. Besides the original diamido base there 
are formed paradiamido-paraXylol and an 
easily-soluble sulfo-acid of the naphthalene 
series, whose neutral solution is colored red 
by oxidation with air. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The process of producing substantive 
trisazo coloring-matters which consists in 
combining one molecule of the tetraZO Com 
pound of a paradiamin such as benzidin 
with one molecule of paraXylidin to form 
intermediate products, in redia Zotising these 
intermediate products and in combining the 
thus-produced tetrazo compounds with two 
molecules of amidonaphthol-disulfonic acid 
H, substantially as hereinbefore described. 
15 
 
2. The within-described new trisazo dye 
25 
stuffs of the general formula 
-paraxylidinamidonaphthol-sulfonic acid H. 
Paradianin Yamidonaphthol-sulfonic acid H. 
being powders of slaty to purplish-brown 
color, easily soluble in water and methylic 
alcohol but very sparingly Soluble in ethyl 
alcohol, dissolving in strong sulfuric acid 
with greenish-blue color; dyeing unmordant 
ed cotton from a bath containing common 
Salt in intense blue shades ranging between 
indigo and dark-greenish blue; producing 
when diazotised on the fiber by combination 
with beta-naphthol a deep black, with meta 
phenylene-diamin a greenish black and With 
resorcinol a dark green. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
MELCIIIOR BONIGER. 
35 
Witnesses: 
ARNOLD KEINER, 
EDUARD SIDLER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591716.txt	L YOUNG. 
HEDGE FENCE, 
Patented Oct, 12, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 591,716. 
 
 
=No.zz=z-Z-Z-Z-Z-Z-Z-ZZOEL-HEI---- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LORIN YOUNG, OF DAYTON, OHIO. 
H EDGE FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 591,716, dated October 12, 1897. 
Application filed May 14, 1897, Serial No. 636,526, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, LORIN YOUNG, a citizen 
of the United States of America, residing at 
Dayton, in the county of Montgomery and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Hedge Fences, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to make a 
plashed hedge fence by bending the plants 
down with the twigs or branches on and loop 
ing them to horizontal wires. 
The features of my invention are more fully 
set forth in the description of the accompany 
ing drawings, making a part of this specifi 
cation, in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the fence. 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of one of the loop-wires. 
Fig. 3 is a side vertical section showing the 
method of looping the lateral over the hori 
Zontal wires. 
AA represent posts, between which are 
stretched wires which are secured to the posts 
in any appropriate manner. 
B C represent the two lower wires which 
form the base-lines for plashing, and DE the 
two upper wires. 
C. b represent the first two plants next to 
the leading post of the fence. 
c represents a wire loop extending around 
the plant Cl, wire B, wire C, and plant b. 
This looping anchors or holds the plant bin an 
inclined position. 
d represents a secondary wire, which will 
be hereinafter explained. 
h represents the third plant, which is held 
in the inclined position by a loop c. The up 
per ends of the plant above the base-loop c 
are secured by the secondary wire d, which 
passes over the plant and under the wire, and 
attached to the top wire by being bent around 
the plant and wire together. This secondary 
wire may be a continuation of the loop c or 
may be a second wire connected into the loop. 
If desired, the loop c may be provided with 
an eye i, as shown in Fig. 2, which is formed 
by bending the loop-wire around the lower 
wire B before the loop is formed, and then 
looping the plants to the wires B C, as ex 
3o 
35 
45 
plained; but the plants being inclined within 
the loops prevent the tendency of the loops 
straightening on the wire, and the eye i is 
not needed, except where the plants are very 
flexible. 
It has been attempted to hold hedge-plants 
in their inclined positions by stapling them 
to horizontal wires or other fastenings; but 
this is objectionable, first, because it injures 
the plant, and, second, because it is a tedi 
ous mode of fastening the wires. Again, the 
plants have to be of large size in order that 
they may be stapled or held in the inclined 
position by the fastenings hitherto employed; 
but by employing two base-wires BC and the 
base-loop c, connected to the plants and wires, 
as shown, the plants are securely held at or 
near the base and the wires do not injure the 
plants, because, while the loop is drawn tight 
enough to hold the plants in their inclined po 
sition at the time of plashing, the wire will ex 
pand each season during the warm weather, 
While the plants are growing, and compensate 
to a great degree by this expansion to the in 
crease of the size of the plants without unduly 
drawing the wire against the bark. This is 
a very material feature of my invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
The herein-described plashed hedge fence, 
consisting of posts, a series of horizontal 
wires stretched between and secured to said 
posts along a line of plants, and a series of 
looped wires embracing the two lowermost 
horizontal wires and a plurality of plants to 
hold said plants in an inclined position and 
a secondary wire extending from said looped 
wire and engaging the upper courses of hori 
Zontal wires to confine the plants thereto, 
said secondary wires being securely fastened 
to the topmost horizontal wire, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
LORIN YOUNG. 
Witnesses: 
F. M. CoMPTON, 
JOHN H. MEYER. 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591816.txt	(No Model.) 
W. & W. A. CLARK. 
FEED WATER HEATER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 59l816. 
Patented Oct. 19, 1897. 
 
  
   
 
  
 
 
2. 
2 
Y 
2 
ow. 
a & d 2 ME 
 
N 
 
 
*:: *draisierers co. Photo-To... wasnerox. p. c. 
(No Model.) 
W. & W. A. CLARK, 
FEED WATER HEATER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 591,816, 
Patented Oct. 19, 1897. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM CLARK AND WILLIAM. A. CLARK, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
FEED-WATER HEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 591,816, dated october 19, 1897. 
Application filed June 15, 1898, Serial No. 595,597, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To (tilt, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, WILLIAM CLARK 
and WILLIAM ALEXANDER CLARK, citizens 
of Great Britain, residing at No. 37Whitworth 
Road, Plumstead, London, in the county of 
Kent and Kingdom of England, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements Relat 
ing to the Heating and Purifying of Feed 
Water for Steam-Boilers and Like Wessels, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention has reference to the man 
her in Which We construct and arrange appa 
ratus and fittings for supplying feed-water to 
boilers and for purifying the water from the 
impurities contained initbeforeintroduction 
into the boiler, and also for extracting oil, 
grease, or other fatty matter held in suspen 
Sion in the Water employed for general, en 
gine-Work, for marine engines, and for like 
purposes. 
In the accompanying sheet of explanatory 
drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of 
a Lancashire boiler with our improvements 
attached, and Fig. 2 is an end elevation of 
Figs. 3 and 4 are similar views of 
the same. 
a marine boiler having our improved fittings 
thereon. Figs. 5 and 6 are diagrammatic 
views of an alternative method We sometimes 
adopt. Fig. 7 is a sectional elevation of our 
improved valve, and Fig. 8 is a plan of a modi 
fied form of the same type of valve. Fig. 9 
is a detail of an alternative form. 
- 
In carrying our invention into effect when 
arranging our improvements for attachment 
to an ordinary Lancashire or Cornish boiler 
We arrange the parts as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2. We make the pipe Afrom the feed-pump 
to pass into and around the inner space B of 
the boiler and through the same for the pur 
pose of heating the water when passing 
through the pipe A, and We convey the Water 
after having passed through the steam-space 
in its pipe-circuit to a settling-chamber or 
exterior sediment-casing C, in which the wa 
ter will be allowed to remain comparatively 
at rest before it is drawn from thence for 
feeding into the boiler. 
We make our settling-chamber C of any de 
sired shape, and of any suitable metal, and 
We arrange therein a number of baffle-plates 
or projecting ridges D, preferably inclined 
within the chamber for the purpose of divid 
ing the water into thin sheets or layers when 
held within it, in order that the solids or 
other impurities which are freed when the 
water is raised in temperature may be de 
posited or slipped down free from disturbance 
by the gradual upward current of the feed 
water within the settling-chamber. The an 
gular or other projecting ridges or baffle 
plates we make with suitable openings or per 
forations for allowing the sediment to fall 
from one ridge to the other, these openings 
or perforations being arranged to overlap or 
not to be opposite those above and below 
them. We prefer to incline the ridge-plates 
from the sides toward the center, the inclina 
tion being upward, in order that the solids or 
sediment deposited on one ridge or plate may 
pass on to another in a radial or opposite di 
rection, thus falling gradually to the bottom, 
where the matter can be blown off by any Or 
dinary blow-off-cock pipe E or by other well 
known devices. We deliver the water after 
having passed it through the boiler to the un 
der side of the settling-chamber and cause it 
to ascend, and we withdraw it from the up 
per surface by the pipe F to feed the boiler, 
making it sometimes to pass through a spe 
cial combination branch pipe having an im 
proved valve G or H therein for controlling 
the supply, although We do not limit the ap 
plication of our invention to any particular 
form of branch piece or to any special form 
of inlet or controlling valves or cocks. 
The action of our apparatus is as follows: 
The water is forced through the feed-pipes. A 
A' by any ordinary force pump or injector 
round the inside of the boiler B, where it be 
comesheated in the steam-space to a very high 
temperature. This temperature causes the 
lime and other solids held in a state of Sus 
pension or solution to be freed, and by the 
continual forward motion of the water in the 
feed-pipes the solids are carried out again 
into our settling-chamber C, entering through 
the pipe. A near the lower end, where the 
water being in a comparative state of rest the 
deposit takes place. The feed thus heated and 
delivered to the chamber gradually rises to 
the top, leaving all the solids or impurities at 
the bottom or on the shelves or plates D, which 
direct the sediment to the bottom, Where it 
can be blown off or withdrawn as required 
O 
25 
45 
SO 
95 
IOO 
591,816 
O 
2 
through E. The water at the top of the set 
tling-chamber thus freed from solids by high 
temperature and continual precipitation is 
withdrawn from an outlet F near to the top 
to feed the main body of water in the boiler. 
Any deposit that may be left in the ordinary 
feed-pipes can be blown out by our improved 
form of cock G, having two waysg'g'' through 
it, one, g', for conveying the feed-water con 
taining all impurities to the circuit-pipes in 
the boiler and the other waterway, g, for 
conveying the purified water back from the 
settling- chamber to feed the main body of 
water in the boiler. We make this improved 
valve in one suitable form with a web or di 
vision plate gin the main portion, as shown 
at Figs. 7 and 8, the one side of the division 
plate being taken into a branch piece g for 
supplying the impure water and the other 
side to a similar branch piece or flange at 
tachment g for supplying or receiving the 
purified water at each end-that is, there are 
two branches or flanges at one end or two 
union bosses, the one receiving the water 
from the pump and passing it through above 
the Web-plate to the circuit-pipe on the other 
end, while the other similar branch or con 
nection receives the purified water from the 
settling-chamber and passes it under the web 
plate to another branch or connection for sup 
plying the purified water to the boiler. We 
provide a boss g upon the upper portion of 
our junction-piece body for receiving a valve 
stem and ordinary gland and stuffing-box, 
through which we pass a spindle carrying an 
ordinary screw-down valve K upon its end. 
We provide a seat and opening within the 
web-plate to receive this valve, so that when 
the spindle is manipulated the two chambers 
g'g' may be placed one in communication 
with the other, and when the stop-cock or 
back-pressure valve is closed which supplies 
the Water from the purifier or settling-cham 
ber and the communication-valve is opened 
the Water within the tube-circuit in the boiler 
can be made to scour out the pipes for the 
purpose of removing any sediment which may 
have become deposited at the corners, and 
thus the whole of the pipes can be readily 
cleaned by the water and steam forcing 
through. This result is due to the pressure 
within the boiler, which is free to pass from 
the boiler beneath the partition g through 
the valve K and into the tube-circuit. Simi 
larly by reversing the action and shutting 
off the Supply from the pump and allowing 
the connection to and from the purifier or set 
tling-chamber to be opened the water can be 
set in constant circulation throughout by the 
valve being opened. We are enabled by this 
arrangement of our improved valve to clear 
out all before it in the feed-pipes round the 
boiler and to blow everything out within the 
settling-chamber C when the sludge cocks or 
valves connected at E are opened, which we 
provide upon this chamber. 
When arranging our improvements for 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
75 
application to sea-going boilers, as shown at 
Figs. 3 and 4, in which the water-feed is 
mainly obtained from the condensers and the 
water is consequently much impregnated 
with oil, grease, and other fatty matters 
from the lubricators of the engine, we make 
our settling-chamber L of somewhat different 
form internally and we provide that its ac 
tion shall be such that the inlet Afrom the 
feed-pumps enters a settling-chamber near 
the top and the outlet to the boiler is taken 
from near the bottom or lower end, so that 
when the feed-water in its impure state mixed 
with oil or like matters enters the upper end 
of the settling-chamber these impurities be 
ing of a much less specific gravity than Wa 
ter will remain on the top surface, the solids 
only sinking to the bottom to be withdrawn 
by the sludge-cock attached to E while the 
impurities may be withdrawn by any blow 
off cock and valve Marranged at the top. 
We provide a gage-glass N and ordinary 
indicating-cocks upon our chamber to record 
the condition of the water within the cham 
ber, so as to determine the blowing-off stage 
of the operation. We take our water from 
the feed-pump pipe A first round the boiler 
in the steam-space prior to taking it to the 
settling-chamber, and we may employ our 
improved valve (shown at G or H,) as here 
in before described, when arranging our im 
provements upon an ordinary land-boiler. 
We sometimes dispense with the special 
two-way valve or cock and allow any ordi 
nary check or regulating single-way valve to 
control the admission of water to our pipe 
circuit within the steam-space of the boiler, 
and in Figs. 5 and 6 such an arrangement is 
shown. We allow the feed-pipe circuit A to 
have a branch piece O upon it at a position 
within the boiler, and to this branch. We at 
tach an open-ended pipe P or a pipe having 
a back-pressure or other valve attached to 
its upper end. When the pipe-circuit is to 
be scoured, we close the outer valve connected 
with the pipe-supply and open the sludge or 
blow-off valve or cock in the chamber, thus 
permitting the steam to pass down the open 
pipe P and to clear out the circuit-pipe and 
the chamber through which it will travel on 
its way to the blow-off branch. It will be 
readily understood that in ordinary use the 
Water will not escape out of the open end of 
the branch pipe P as the steam will be act 
ing against it. 
Fig. 9 shows an alternative arrangement of 
a more circuitous form of pipe A", which we 
Sometimes employ to attain the maximum 
temperature of the feed-water by a longer 
contact with the steam in the steam-space, 
So as to insure total precipitation. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
declare that what we claim, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the boiler, the cir 
culating-pipes for the feed-water, the supply 
pipe for the feed-water, the settling-drum 
90 
95 
Oo 
O 
I I5 
I25 
 
591,816 
8 
connected with the circulating-pipes, the con 
necting-pipe from the settling-drum to the 
boiler for the purified water and the duplex 
coupling for connecting the feed-Water sup 
ply and the circulating-pipes and for also con 
necting the interior of the boiler with the 
pipe from the settling-drum, said coupling 
having the two waterways therethrough, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In combination with the boiler, the cir 
culating-pipes for the feed-water, the sup 
ply-pipe for the feed-water, the settling-drum 
connected with the circulating - pipes, the 
connecting-pipe from the settling-drum to 
the boiler for the purified water and the du 
O 
plex coupling for connecting the feed-Water 
Supply and the circulating-pipes and for also 
connecting the interior of the boiler with the 
pipe from the settling-drum, said coupling 
having the two waterways therethrough with 
the valve between the said waterways, sub 
stantially as described. 
In Witness whereof We have hereunto set 
our hands in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM CLARK. 
WILLIAM A. CLARK. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM EDWARD EVANS, 
ALBERT EDWARD PARKER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US591916.txt	(No Model.) 
BURNER FOR PLUMBERS OR BRAZIERS FURNACES, 
J. C. DUPEE. 
No. 591,916, 
 
Patented Oct. 19, 1897, 
?? = 
I 
SS S 
22 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
36.5 
46 ? ??? 
| | | | 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. DUPEE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO R. J. 
WHITE, OF SAME PLACE. 
S U R N E R F O R P U MI BERS O R B RAZERS FU FR NAC ES . 
SigECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 591,916, dated October 19, 1897. 
Application filed November 28, 1896, Serial No, 613,725, (No model.) 
?o all Luch???, it, ??? ????. cer?: 
Be it known that I, JOHN C. DUPEE, of Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
5 Improvements in Burners for Plumbers and 
Braziers' Furnaces, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of this specification, in which 
1 o correspondling letters of reference in the dif 
ferent figures indicate like parts. 
The object of my invention is to so construct 
a burner for plumbers, braziers and other 
furnaces in which hydrocarbon oils are em 
5 ployed, that a blow-torch or force-blast hav 
ing a heating, as distinguished from an illu 
minating, flame, may be produced from hy 
drocarbon oils of low gravity-such, for ex 
ample, as kerosene or crude petroleum. To 
2O this end, I so construct the contour of the 
burner and adjust it with reference to the re 
tort that in its effort to escape from the mouth 
of the burner the flame, when forced by a 
Strong blast or heavy air-pressure, is choked 
25 Sufficiently to produce eddies and cause a 
backflow to impinge upon and heat the re 
tort, and that Without materially lessening the 
tOrch-like flame or impairing its quality as a 
heating-flame, while at the same time such a 
3o thorough mixture of air and gas or vapor may 
be caused as to produce complete combustion, 
all of which is hereinafter more particularly 
described, and definitely pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation 
of a plumber's furnace embodying the fea 
tures of my invention. Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
central Sectional view of a modified form of 
burner, the same being arranged horizontally; 
40 and Fig. 3 is a detail view taken upon the 
line 33, Fig. 2, viewed in the direction of the 
arrow there shown. 
In the drawings, C, represents the usual tank 
for the Storage of hydrocarbon oil, connected 
45 With which is any well-known form of air 
pulmp, as b, for example, for the purpose of 
compressing air therein in order to force oil 
to the burner. Above the tank and sustained 
upon posts c, attached to the tank, is secured 
5o the Ordinary short chimney-top d, within 
Which maybe placed the melting-pot. Con 
35 
nected with the tank C is a tube e, which, in 
the form of furnace shown in Fig. 1, is ex 
tended upwardly and thence horizontally, so 
as to connect with and form a support for the 55 
vertical burner. The service-pipe e is tapped 
into a retort g, which consists of a hollow an 
nular ring integral with which is a tube h, 
having a tube i tapped therein. A nipple i 
is tapped into the part i, the opening in which 6o 
is adapted to be closed by means of the usual 
needle-valve k. The opening in the nipple 
is directed toward the center of the opening 
or ring formed by the retort g. Extending 
downwardly or backwardly, as the case may 65 
be, according as the burner is arranged ver 
tically or horizontally, are flanges l, which 
are integral with the retort and are provided 
with slots in therein. Upon the opposite side 
of the retort is formed an annular flange q, 70 
Fig. 2, into which is tapped or otherwise se 
cured a hollow pear-shaped extension in the 
interior of which forms the mixing and com 
bustion chamber. It will be observed by ref 
erence to Fig. 2 that the diameter of the in- 75 
terior of that portion of the part in which is 
tapped into the ring is greater than the diam 
eter of the interior of the ring formed by the 
retort, and is also greater than that of the 
eduction-opening or outer end of the exten- 8o 
sion, but is very much smaller than that of 
the intermediate portion, which forms a bulge 
o, as shown. In other words the base of the 
pear-shaped shellis placed next to the retort. 
In the bulge O is formed a series of Openings 85 
p, Figs. 2 and 3, which are so arranged with 
reference to the retortg that a flame passing 
through said openings may impinge directly. 
upon the retort. The usual drip-cup r, Fig. 
2, serves to heat the burner. A shield orhood 9o 
sis preferably providedtoprotectthejet from 
side draftS. 
Having thus described the various parts of 
my improved device, I will now explain its 
Operation. 
The oil, by reason of the pressure of air in 
the tank, is forced upwardly through the tube 
e, from whence it passes through the annular 
retort g, where it is vaporized. The vapor 
then passes through the tubesh, i, and escapes Ioo 
from the nipple jin the form of a jet Whichis 
directed toward the center of the opening 
95 
2 
. 
591,916 
formed by the annular retort. Air is ad 
mitted freely from the rear and through the 
slots m. The jet takes fire shortly before it 
reaches the annular retort and thus serves 
to partially heat the latter. As a consider 
able air-pressure is employed in the tank the 
impingement of the flame upon the retort 
causes it to enlarge and fill the combustion 
chamber, and as the chamber is suddenly re 
stricted from the bulge O and tapered, as 
shown, eddies are formed in the flame, as in 
dicated by the arrows; and while the main 
flame is directed forward and outward from 
the eduction end of the tapered nozzle, por 
tions thereof are directed backwardly and 
forced out through the openings pin the form 
of jets which impinge upon and serve to heat 
the outside of the retort. A further advan 
tage is derived from the formation of eddies 
in the combustion-chamber-viz., the com 
plete commingling of air and gas at the point 
of combustion where the temperature is suf 
ficiently high to render the combustion com 
plete. 
Heretofore it has been found wholly im 
practicable to utilize low - gravity oils for 
burners known as blow-torch or pres 
sure burners. Any confinement by the use 
of baffle-plates or similar devices adapted to 
produce a backflow of the flame not only 
eliminates the torch feature thereof, but so 
softens it that it fails to vaporize the heavy 
oil, thereby defeating the end desired, al 
though such a burner may be entirely effec 
tual in burning high-gravity oils. 
I have found in actual practice that by 
means of my improved burner supplemented 
by an air-pressure in the oil-reservoir of from 
about twenty to one hundred pounds per 
Square inch centigrade a low-gravity oil may 
be used as readily as can naptha with the or 
dinary burner employed therewith. The com 
bustion is complete and the body of the flame 
is not materially lessened by the divergence 
of the jets therefrom required to heat the re 
tort. Moreover, by reason of my improved 
- 
construction, the retort does not become over 
heated and the tendency of the oil to carbon 
ize therein is obviated. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination with an oil-reservoir 
and means for forcing a jet of oil therefrom 
under pressure, of a retort, means for project 
ing a vaporized jet from said retort through 
an opening extending through said retort into 
a combustion - chamber, and a combustion 
chamber adjacent to said retort, said combus 
tion-chamber having a restricted opening at 
its outer end, an enlargement in the body 
thereof next to said retort and a series of 
openings in its walls in operative proximity 
to said retort, whereby a portion of the main 
flame from the combustion-chamber may be 
reversed as a result of the eddies formed in 
said enlargement by the forced action of the 
flame, and caused to impinge upon the retort, 
substantially as described. 
2. As an improvement in blow-torch burn 
ers, the combination with a retort and means 
for projecting a vaporized jet therefrom 
through an opening extending through said 
retort, of a pear-shaped projection or shell, 
the interior of which is adapted to form a com 
bustion-chamber, the base of said shell being 
attached to said retort and having an interior 
diameter larger than that of the opening 
through said retort, an eduction-opening of 
smaller diameter than that through said re 
tort, and an intermediate en largement having 
a series of openings therein in operative prox 
imity to said retort, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification, in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses, this 25th day of November, 
1896. 
50 
55 
?? 
65 
75 
85 
JOHIN C. DUPEE. 
WWitnesSeS : 
D. III. FLETCHER, 
R. A. WHITE. 
I. ? 
2 ? 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592016.txt	(No Model.) 
L. McCARTHY, 
INSULATING COUPLING FOR ELECTRIC WIRE CONDUITS, 
No. 592,016, 
Patented 00t, l 9, 1897. 
7297. /. 
a 
M 
s 
/O 
( 
3. 
III 
762, a. 
2 
5 \l 3 S 
S 
/O 
NS 
V&N- 
S 
|-/ 
Ae 
2 
/ 
RP 
72c.P. 
22 
fill P2 
II. this 
IEEEI-2 
Null 
3-III 
/2 
/2 
/2 
/2 
f 
A/z72esses: 
ce-a-sf, Yoi. 
is a let R-- 
Z72 z/e7 2-zo7. 
-&-co -(6-ace 
?o Jeeee-S6e 4-y see 
c/7o 2-72 e2/s. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS MCCARTHY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
NSU A N G COUPLING FOR ELECTRIC-WIRE conDUITs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,016, dated October 19, 1897. 
Application filed July 2, 1897. Serial No. 643,207, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all tw?on, it tag? conce.77: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS MCCARTHY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Bos 
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Insulating-Couplings 
for Electric-Wire Conduits, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
The invention consists of an insulating 
coupling or joint of novel and useful char 
acter or construction, the same being adapted 
more particularly for use in connection with 
conduits and the like containing electric con 
ducting-wires, although intended to be used 
in other connections as well, as circumstances 
may render advisable. 
I will describe the invention first with refer 
ence to the accompanying drawings, in which 
latter Ihave illustrated the best embodiments 
of the invention which I have yet contrived, 
after which I will particularly point out and 
distinctly define the distinguishing char 
acteristics of the invention in the claims at 
the close of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings shows in elevation 
an insulating coupling or joint embodying 
the invention. Fig. 2 shows the same in 
vertical section on the dotted line 22 of Fig. 
1. Fig. 3 is a view in elevation of a second 
form of coupling or joint embodying the in 
vention. Fig. 4 shows the same in vertical 
section on the line 4 4 of Fig. 3. 
My device comprises, essentially, the oppo 
site connections 1 land the interposed insu 
lator 2. The connections I 
are constructed 
suitably for application and attachment to 
the parts which are to be joined by the coup 
ling. In the illustrated embodiments of the 
invention the outer end portions thereof are 
screw-threaded interiorly, as at 4, to fit upon 
the correspondingly-threaded exteriors of the 
ends of the parts to which they are to be ap 
plied, although the attachment of the coup 
ling to the conduits, or the like, may be pro 
vided for otherwise. The said connections 
are made hollow or tubular, so that the cen 
tral passages 33 thereof shall constitute con 
tinuations of the interior spaces of the parts 
which are joined by the coupling, and each 
connection has one or more lateral passages 
5 5 extending from the central passage 3 
thereof to the exterior of the connection. 
The foregoing construction enables hollow 
conduits containing electric conducting-wires 
1717 to be joined by means of the coupling, 
and permits the ends of the wires 1717 which 
are contained within the said hollow conduits 
to be extended into the central passages 33 
of the respective connections and then to be 
drawn to the exterior through the lateral 
passages 55 and passed around the exterior 
of the insulator 2, the said ends being united 
in known manner, usually at the exterior of 
the said insulator, as at 18, Figs. 1 and 3. 
In the embodiment of the invention which 
is represented in Figs. 1 and 2 the insulator 
comprises two flanged pins 66, the heads of 
which are separated by an interposed layer 7 
of sheet mica or other suitable insulating 
The flange of one of the said pins 
material. 
is furnished with a lip 8, which is bent down, 
so as to overlie the flange of the other pin, 
a ring or washer 9 of insulating material 
mica, for instance-being interposed between 
the bent-over portion of the said lip 8 and 
the flange which it incloses and all being 
firmly clasped together by the compression 
of the lip upon the said ring or washer 9. A 
covering or casing 10 of plastic insulating 
material incases the main portion of the insu 
lator, so as to cover and protect the flanges 
and lip aforesaid. The oppositely-project 
ing stems of the pins 6 6 are screw-threaded, 
and the adjacent portions of the connections 
11 are interiorly threaded to fit upon the 
In the foregoing con 
said threaded stems. 
struction it will be seen that the connections 
are removably united or applied to the pins 
66 of the insulator. This enables the said 
connections to be unscrewed from the insul 
lator and separately applied to the ends of 
the respective parts which are to be joined, 
the parts of the coupling subsequently being 
reunited. 
In the embodiment of the invention which 
is represented in Figs, 3 and 4 the insulator 
2 consists of a suitable thickness of sheet 
mica interposed between the proximate por 
tions of the connections 11, the said portions 
having outwardly-projecting lugs, through 
holes in which are passed the screws or bolts 
11 11, by which the various parts are bound . 
together. Thimbles 12 12 of insulating ma 
45 
 
55 
65 
75 
IOO 
2 
592,016 
2. An insulating-coupling comprising oppo 
site connections made hollow or tubular for 
the reception of conducting-wires, and an 
interposed insulator to which said connec 
tions are applied removably, the said con 
nections respectively having lateral passages 
to permit the said wires to be withdrawn and 
passed around the exterior of the insulator, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
LOUIS MCCARTIY. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. F. RAND ALL, 
WILLIAM. A. COPELAND. 
terial are interposed between the heads and 
stems of the said screws or bolts and the ad 
jacent sides of the holes through which said 
Screws pass in the lugs of one connection, 
while the holes in the lugs of the other con 
nection are internally threaded to fit the 
threads of the screws or bolts. 
I claim as my invention 
1. An insulating-coupling comprising oppo 
site connections made hollow or tubular fol' 
the reception of conducting-wires, and an 
interposed insulator, and having at opposite 
sides of the insulator lateral passages to per 
mit the said wires to be withdrawn and passed 
around the exterior of the insulator, sub 
stantially as described. 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592116.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 592,116. 
C. H. JOHNSON. 
PNEUMATIC HAMMER, 
Patented Oct. 19, 1897. 
: Z 
22? . 
? 
 
 ? 
ZZZZZZ 
2476 
N 
SN 
VN 
??A?NNN 
NYSEN 
SS 
???:VVVVVV??? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES H. JOHNSON, OF SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO WILLIAM BARRET RIDGELY, OF SAME PLACE. 
PNEU MATIC HAMMER. 
SPECI???ATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,116, dated October 19, 1897. 
Application filed February 15, 1897, Serial No. 623,496, (No model. 
5 
? ? 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES H. JoHNSON, 
a citizen cf the United States, residing at 
Springfield, in the county of Sangamon and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Portable Pneu 
matic Hammers and Similar. Tools, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to make a 
simple, economical, and efficient portable 
pneumatic hammer; and the invention con 
sists in the features, combinations, and de 
tails of construction hereinafter described 
and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal sectional view of a hammer 
constructed in accordance with my improve 
ments, showing the parts in their retracted 
position; and Fig. 2, a similar view showing 
the parts in their striking position. 
In the art to which this invention relates it 
is well known that the movements of the pis 
ton-hammer in each direction produce a re 
actionary movement on the part of the cas 
ing, and that this reactionary movement and 
recoil due to the blow is very severe upon the 
operator of the machine, and limits the size 
and power of machines which can be practi 
cally operated. 
The principal object of my invention, there 
fore, is to provide a portable pneumatic ham 
mer with a single hammer and a counterball 
ancing-piston, which effectively removes the 
above objections, and by reducing the jar and 
strain upon the operator makes it practicable 
for a man to operate a machine of greater size 
and efficiency. 
In the accompanying drawings I have illus 
trated one of the many forms in which my in 
vention may be constructed, and in which A 
is the casing, having a cylindrical bore or open 
ing of two different diameters extending lon 
gitudinally into the same and threaded at its 
forward end to receive the extension B. The 
casing A is provided with the air-passages a 
and a, and an opening on its side dF. 
B is an extension of the casing A, provided 
with a longitudinal bore of two different di 
ameters and is pierced at its forward end to 
5o receive the shank of the tool to be operated 
40 
45 
35 
upon. On the side of this extension is an 
opening or exhaust-port C. 
To operate on the tool, I provide a recipro 
cating hammer C, and mount it in the bore 
of the cylinder. This piston-hammer is made 
of two different diameters, one of which forms 
a piston-head c, fitting the larger bore of cas 
ing A, and the other the smaller bore of ex 
tension B, so that an annular fluid-pressure 
chamber a is thus formed between the cylin 
der-casing and the piston -hammer. This 
fluid-pressure chamberis what Iterma  con 
stant fluid-pressure chamber, and is con 
nected with a source of fluid-pressure supply 
by means of an inlet-porta', so that fluid 
pressure may be admitted to the same to move 
the piston-hammer to its retracted position, 
as shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings. 
To move the piston-hammer in its opposite 
direction, so as to perform the striking blow, 
I preferably provide such hammer with alon 
gitudinal passage c' and substantially radial 
openings c, so as to permit fluid-pressure to 
flow to the chamber a at the rear of the pis 
ton-hammer and move thehammer to a strik 
ing position, as shown in Fig. 2. When in 
the striking position, the longitudinal passage 
connects the pressure-chamber a with the 
exhaust-chamber a, from which it passes out 
through exhaust-port a. 
From the foregoing description of the parts 
in operation it will be seen that the piston 
hammer is moved backward and forward by 
the direct and expansive force of the fluid 
pressure-preferably compressed air. 
i. To counterbalance the operation of the pis 
ton-hammer and minimize or absorb the shock 
incident thereto, I provide an auxiliary pis 
ton Dor plunger, and mount it in the cylin 
dricalbore of the cylinder-casing. This aux 
iliary plunger is made of two diameters, so as 
to provide an inner head d, and a reduced 
diameter between which and the casing is 
formed an annular pressure chamber d". 
This plunger is further provided with a lon 
gitudinal passage d' and radial openings di 
and an annular groove d, connecting the 
outer ends of the radial openings di. The 
inlet-passage a' is provided with a port a, 
that alternately, by means of the movements 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
I OO 
 
2 
592,116 
of the auxiliary plunger, communicates with 
the annular pressure-chamber and by means 
of the grooved with the radial passages in 
such plunger, so as to act to move the plun 
ger forward when the piston-hammer is being 
moved backward, and brings its radial pas 
sages into alinement with the fluid-pressure 
inlet or port, as shown in Fig. 1. At this 
point both of the longitudinal passages of the 
piston-hammer and the auxiliary plunger are 
connected with the fluid-pressure inlet, and 
fluid-pressure is admitted into the chamber 
a between the same, which, acting directly 
at first and then expansively, moves the parts 
in an opposite manner to compel the hammer 
to do its striking operation and the plunger 
to balance the shock of the strike almost iden 
tically at the same period of time, when the 
parts occupy the position shown in Fig. 2, and 
the passages d and care brought into com 
munication with the exhaust-ports a' and di 
and the pressure permitted to exhaust. 
It will be noted that when, upon its back 
ward stroke, the rear end of the plunger D 
passes the port d the exhaust from the cham 
ber d is cut off and the air confined in the 
chamber d is compressed, forming a cushion 
and preventing the plunger from striking the 
casing. If at any time the plunger D should 
move to any position forward of that shown 
in Fig. 1, the air-passage A would be closed 
and fluid-pressure could be admitted through 
a' to the annular space a only, which would 
return both hammer C and plunger D to the 
position shown in Fig. 1 and the tool would 
resume operation. 
The fluid-pressure inlet is provided with a 
throttle-valve E and a lever e in the handle 
portion A', by which such throttle-valve may 
be operated as desired. 
It will be seen from an inspection of the 
drawings and the foregoing description that 
I have provided a tool possessing all the sim 
plicity and economy of a single-acting pis 
ton-hammer and which is very efficient, in 
that the blow is delivered by a hammer of 
the desired weight and durability, and that 
the movements of such hammer are counter 
balanced by the movements of an auxiliary 
mechanism. The parts are so designed that 
the counterbalancing device by slight me 
chanical changes may be simply and eco 
nomically applied to any of the single-acting 
hammers now in use. 
While I have described my invention with 
more or less minuteness as regards details, 
and as being embodied in certain precise 
forms, I do not desire to be limited thereto 
unduly, or any more than is pointed out in 
the claims. On the contrary, I contemplate 
all proper changes in form, construction, and 
arrangement, the omission of immaterial ele 
O 
2 ? 
35 
45 
55 
 
ments, and the substitution of equivalents 
as circumstances may suggest or necessity 
render expedient. 
I claim 
1. In a piston-hammer, the combination of 
a casing provided with a longitudinal bore 
and fluid-pressure inlets and outlets, a recip 
rocating piston-hammer mounted in One end 
of the bore and provided with a headed por 
tion at its inner end so as to provide an an 
nular chamber between it and the casing and 
with a longitudinal passage to admit pressure 
and exhaust it from the interior, a movable 
counterbalancing - plunger arranged in the 
longitudinal bore of the cylinder-casing at 
the opposite end and provided with a headed 
portion at its inner end to form an annular 
passage between it and the casing, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a piston-hammer, the combination of 
a casing provided with a longitudinal bore 
and fluid-pressure inlets and outlets, a recip 
rocating piston-hammer mounted in one end 
of the bore and provided with a headed por 
tion at its inner end so as to provide an an 
nular chamber between it and the casing and 
with a longitudinal passage to admit pressure 
and exhaust it from the interior, a movable 
counterbalancing - plunger arranged in the 
longitudinal bore of the cylinder-casing at 
the opposite end and provided with a headed 
portion at its inner end to form an annular 
pressure-chamber between it and the casing 
and a longitudinal passage to admit fluid 
pressure to the interior of the chamber be 
tween it and the piston-hammer SO as to move 
the parts in an opposite manner, Substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a pneumatic hammer, the combination 
of a casing provided with a longitudinal bore 
and fluid-pressure inlets and outlets, a recip 
rocating piston-hammer arranged in one end 
of the bore having a headed inner portion to 
provide a constant fluid-pressure chamber 
which communicates with the fluid-pressure 
inlet and alongitudinal passage to alternately 
admit pressure to and exhaust it from the 
rear of the hammer, and a reciprocating coun 
terbalancing - plunger arranged end to end 
with the hammer and having an inner headed 
portion to provide an annular pressure-cham 
ber and with a longitudinal passage for ad 
mitting and exhausting fluid-pressure to and 
from the space between it and the hammer 
both of such the chamber and passage being 
arranged to be alternately connected and dis 
connected with the fluid-pressure inlet, sub 
stantially as described. 
CHIARLES II. JOIINSON. 
Witnesses: 
A. A. BILLINGSLEY, 
WM. BARRET RIDGELY. 
75 
95 
I OO 
II. ? 
IT 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592216.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 592,216, 
J. BENNETT, 
CHURN, 
Patented Oct. 19, 1897. 
 
AA s 
T S. 2 
2 
S 
2 
- C 
S SE 
22 
MXaasax-axxara araxacaraza awararayawawarararayaswax 
 
am N3S 
Nassa-a- 
.NYea 
15. 
N 
F22 
2452 
%2. e 
6. 
ZEZ2 
- 22 
WITNESSES : 
INVENTOR 
y 7.4% 
ATTORNEYS. 
The NRRIS PETERS Co., PHOTollho. WASIGTON, d. c. 
 
  
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN BENNETT, OF LYNDHURST, CANADA, ASSIGNOR TO HIMSELF AND 
JAMES THOMPSON, OF SAME PLACE. 
n 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,216, dated October 19, 1897. 
CHURN. 
... Application filed April 21, 1897, Serial No. 633,167, (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
- 
- 
- 
. 
. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN BENNETT, of 
Lyndhurst, in the Province of Ontario and 
Dominion of Canada, have invented a new 
and Improved Churn, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention is a churn with a reciprocal 
dasher, serving to create a current of cream 
around a reservoir, which may contain hot or 
cold Water to regulate the temperature of the 
Cream. . 
This specificationis the disclosure of one 
form of my invention, while the claims define 
the actual scope of the conception. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
dra Wings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is...a section of the invention on the 
line II of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a section of the in 
vention on the line II II of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 
is a section of the invention on the line III 
III of Fig.1. 
A base-board 4 is provided with cleats 5, 
arranged in a square figure and holding the 
lower end of the churn-body 6, which is a ver 
tically-elongated four-sided structure, with a 
metallic base 7 rested flat upon the upper 
side of the plate 4 and having flanges sunken 
in the lower edges of the sides of the body 6, 
by which construction a hermetic chamber is 
formed. 
. 
The top of the body 6 is closed by a lid 8, 
having a slot 9, through which the dasher 
rod 10 is movable. The dasher-rod 10 is piv 
oted to an operating-lever 11, the transverse 
head 12 of which is mounted in standards 13, 
respectively carried in diagonal positions by 
sides of the body 6. The lower end of the 
rod 10 carries a transverse head 14, the ends 
of which respectively carry bars 15, running 
parallel with each other and spanned at their 
ends by cross-bars 16. Pivotally mounted 
between the bars 15 are the dasher-plates 17, 
which open downwardly as the dasher moves 
upward, and as the dasher moves downward 
the plates 17 close against the cross-bars 16. 
The lower end of the dasher-rod 10 has a re 
movable plate 18 covering a thermometer 19, 
the bulb 20 of which is continually exposed 
at the lower end of the plate 18. The plate 
18 may be easily removed to expose the tube 
of the thermometer when it is desired to note 
the indications thereof; but normally the 
thermometer is covered to prevent it from 
being engaged with the cream and butter 
within the churn-body 6. A hollow partition 
21 has side flanges 22 respectively running 
in vertical grooves 23, formed in the inner 
surfaces of opposite sides of the body 6 of the 
churn. By these means the partition 21 is 
held immovably in place, and the arrange 
ment of the grooves 23, is such as to leave a 
vertically-elongated passage 24 on the side of 
the partition 21 opposite the side occupied by 
the dasher. The lower edge of the partition 
21 is raised above the bottom plate 7 of the 
body 6, so that the two compartments com 
municate at the bottom. The upper portion 
of the partition 21 is provided with a passage 
25, establishing communication between the 
upper end of the space 24 and the remainder 
of the churn by means of an apron 26 to which 
the passage 25 leads. A cleat 27 is carried 
by the rear wall of the body 6 of the churn 
and in position to be engaged by the ledge 28 
at the upper portion of the partition 21, where 
by the partition 21 may be supported in proper 
vertical position. 
The operation of the dasher within the 
churn causes the cream to circulate through 
out the body in a manner indicated by the 
arrows in Fig. 1. By means of a feed-nipple 
29 the hollow partition 21 may be filled with 
liquid at such a temperature as Will properly 
regulate the temperature of the cream. The 
agitation of the cream against the partition 
effectually churns the cream, while the pe 
culiar construction of the dasher tends to 
make the circulation of the cream perfect. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The combination with the churn having 
a body portion, of the hollow partition within 
said body portion, said partition providing 
passages at the top and bottom of the body 
and through which the cream may circulate, 
and having an inlet-opening for Water, where 
by to regulate the temperature of the cream. 
2. A churn having a body portion, a hollow 
partition run longitudinally within the body 
9o 
95 
OO 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
4O 
45 
 
2 
592,216 
IO 
25 
portion and dividing the same into two pas 
sages, the partition having an opening in its 
upper end through which the cream may pass 
from one passage to the other and being Sus 
pended from such end with its lower end sep 
arated from the contiguous wall of the churn 
to establish communication at the lower por 
tions of the passages, a dasher working in 
one of the passages to effect a continuous cir 
culation of the cream through the passages 
and a feed-nipple for the temperature-regu 
lating liquid. 
3. The combination with a churn having a 
rectangular vertically-elongated body por 
tion, of a hollow partition run vertically 
through said body portion near one side there 
of and dividing the churn into two compart 
ments, the partition having an opening in its 
upper portion by which to establish commu 
nication between the compartments, an apron 
covering the opening and projecting down 
Wardly past the same, and means for filling 
said hollow partition with a liquid for regu 
lating the temperature of the cream. 
4. A churn having a vertically-elongated 
body portion, a partition run vertically in the 
body portion and having an opening there 
through, an apron carried by the partition 
and running past the opening to guide the 
Cream in its passage from the opening, and a 
ledge carried by the partition and capable of 
engaging a portion of the churn-body to sup 
port the partition. 
5. A churn, the body portion of which has 
vertical grooves in opposite side walls, a hol 
low partition provided with flanges beyond 
35 
 
45 
55 
its hollow portion and arranged to register 
in said grooves, a cleat on one wall of said 
body, and a ledge run out from the partition 
and resting upon said cleat, whereby the par 
tition is suspended at a distance from the 
bottom of the body. 
6. A churn having a body portion, a hollow 
partition within the body portion, the parti 
tion being slidably arranged in the body por 
tion and having an opening in its upper por 
tion and through which the cream may cir 
culate, an apron extending from one side of 
said partition and downwardly past the open 
ing therein, a horizontal ledge extending from 
said partition opposite the said apron, and a 
cleat in said body portion and on which said 
ledge rests, said cleat holding the bottom of 
said partition at a distance from the bottom 
of the body. 
7. The combination in a churn having a 
body portion, of a dasher mounted to recip 
rocate in said body portion and arranged to 
force the cream in but one direction, namely, 
downwardly, and a hollow partition located 
in said body portion and providing passages 
at the top and bottom of the body through 
which the cream may be circulated by the re 
ciprocal movement of said dasher, said par 
tition being provided with an inlet-opening 
whereby a fluid may be admitted to the in 
terior of the same to regulate the tempera 
ture of the cream as it is circulated. 
JOIN BENNETT. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. IBRYAN, 
GEO. W. ARMSTRONG. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592316.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 592,316. 
Zevere 2. 
M. G. KELLOGG. 
MULTIPLE SWITCHBOARD, 
Patented 00t 
26, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
za N 
e2ist2tist 
98)ibviesses 
ca%2 
62 
2. 
33 
J(Cu(o 
&ltov 
awa. 
3. 
7 
341.uovtov 
24.2, 
4. &. 
oCaoz/ 
2% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MILO G. KELLOGG, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE KELLOGG 
w 
SWITCHBOARD AND SUPPLY COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
MULTIPLE SWITCHBOARD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,316, dated October 26, 1897. 
Application filed November 29, 1889, Serial No. 332,019, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To all, uhon, it notif concern: 
Be it known that I, MILOG: KELLOGG, of 
Chicago, Illinois, temporarily residing at Stutt 
gart, in the Empire of Germany, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Mul 
tiple Switchboards for Telephone-Exchanges, 
of which the following is a full, clear, concise, 
and exact description, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to a metallic-circuit 
telephone-exchange system, and is especially 
applicable to a system of exchange in which 
the calling by the subscribers is done on an 
independent calling-circuit. 
It consists of apparatus for and a system of 
testing metallic-circuit lines to determine 
whether they are in use. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a diagram illustrat 
ing the main-line Central-office apparatus and 
circuits. Fig. 2 shows a diagram of the sub 
scriber's-station apparatus necessary to illus 
trate my invention. Fig. 3 is a diagram of the 
operator's cord system for receiving calls and 
switching lines. Fig. 4 shows an operator's 
test system, including a test-plug with cord, 
test receiving instrument, and a test-battery. 
In Fig. 1, A is a sectional view of a section 
of one switchboard, and A' is a sectional view 
of a section of another board, to which the 
same lines are connected. I place as many 
boards in the central office as are found neo 
essary or desirable in order to properly an 
swer the calls and make the connections. On 
each board is a spring-jack or similar switch 
for each line. Each switch has a contact 
spring which normally bears on an insulated 
contact-point and has a third contact-piece 
insulated from the rest (except by the circuit 
connections) and is adapted to receive a loop 
plug, and when a plug is inserted to discon 
nect the spring from the contact-point (on 
which it normally bears) and connect the two 
contact-pieces of the plug with the contact 
spring and said insulated contact-piece, re 
spectively. In the figure g g represent the 
contact-springs of the different switches, h. h. 
the contact-points on which the springs nor 
mally bear, and if the insulated contact-pieces 
of the switches. l l are the switch-holes. a. a. 
 
are the rubber strips on which the switch parts 
are mounted, as shown, and through the fronts 
of which are the switch-holes ll. These holes 
are adapted to receive the switch-plugs, 
(shown in Fig. 3 and marked D D,) and when 
a plug is inserted into a switch it operates it, 
as above described. The insulated contact 
pieces if should be so placed that a test-plug 
or similar testing device may be readily ap 
plied to them. 
The connection of each main line to the cen 
tral-office switchboards and apparatus is as 
follows: One of the branches of the line-say 
wire C, as indicated in the figure-is con 
nected to all the contact-pieces ii of its 
switches on the different boards. The other 
branch of the line-Say wire b-passes suc 
cessively through the pairs of contact-points 
of its Switches which are normally in contact, 
passing in each case to the spring first, as indi 
cated. This wire after passing from the last 
contact-point of the switch connected far 
thest from the subscriber's station is con 
nected by a circuit-wire to wire a of the sub 
scriber's line. 
In the subscriber's-station apparatus shown 
in Fig. 2, 1 is the telephone-switch. 2 is the 
subscriber's telephone. 3 is the signal-bell, 
and G is the ground connection. The cir 
cuits and contact-points of the apparatus are 
substantially as shown. The signal-bell is 
an automatic or vibrating bell with an auto 
matic circuit-breaker, as shown, which makes 
and breaks the circuit of the bell when the 
current passes through it. The bellis in the 
circuit of the branch of the line designated 
as wire b when the subscriber's telephone 
is on its switch. The switch has contact 
points and connections, as shown, which 
ground one branch of the line, wire b, and 
open the tWO branches of the line to each 
other when the telephone is on the switch 
and remove Said ground and close the two 
branches to each other when the telephone 
is taken from the Switch. 
Fig. 3 shows an operator's cord system with 
One pair of loop-switch plugs and their double 
cords, looping-in switch, her telephone, and 
circuits. D D are the loop-plugs. n n are 
their rubber insulation, and n n are their 
contact-pieces. Ois a metal strip on which the 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
592,316 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
M 
plugs normally rest and which then connects is not yet switched with another line, the cir 
the two contact-pieces of the plug together. 
cuit above described is opened at the pair of 
The method of operating the system in con 
contacts of the switch in which the plug is 
nection with the switchboards will be appar 
placed. If the line is connected with another 
line for conversation and their telephones are 
ent to those skilled in the art. 
The plugs should be inserted into the line 
switched for use, no complete circuit will be 
switches of two lines connected together for 
established on testing, because the metallic 
conversation in such a direction that the 
circuit of the two lines is not connected with 
the ground at either subscriber's station. If 
sides or branches of the lines marked wire C, 
are connected together by one of the cord 
When the Subscribers' lines are thus connected 
for conversation both of their telephones are 
circuits of the pair of cords and the other 
sides or branches are connected together by 
placed on their switches, no complete circuit 
will be established on testing, because the 
the other cord-circuit. 
The operator's test system shown in Fig. 
test is made to a test contact-piece i, which is 
4 consists, essentially, of a wire with a test 
connected with the circuit of the two wires Cl 
receiving instrument and test-battery in its 
C of the lines, and these wires are then dis 
circuit, said wire being grounded at one end 
connected from the ground at the subscribers 
stations. In either of these cases no complete 
and connected at the other end to a flexible 
conducting-cord adapted at the will of the 
circuit is established, and therefore the signal 
bell will not operate and no response will be 
operator to be brought into contact with any 
SWitch contact-piece father board. T is the 
indicated in the test receiving instrument. 
test-plug. t is the test receiving instrument. 
If when two subscribers lines are connected 
B is the test-battery, and G is the ground 
together for conversation the telephone at 
The test - battery should be 
connection. 
One of the stations should be on the switch 
strong enough to operate any subscriber's sig 
and that at the other station not on the switch, 
nal-bell and the test receiving instrument 
a complete circuit Will be established as foll 
through the line-circuit of one of the sides or 
lows: on testing one of the lines from the of 
fice ground through the test receiving instru 
branches of the line to the subscriber's ground 
ment and battery to the test-plug, thence 
When the test is made as indicated and the 
line is free, but is not strong enough to op 
through wire C of the line whose telephone 
erate the signal-bell through the complete 
is SWitched for use and back to the central 
office through wire b of that line, and thence 
metallic circuit of the line. 
Each Operator has a cord system with as 
through wire b of the other line to its ground 
many pairs of cords as she may need and one 
connection established by the telephone being 
test system, and they 
are conveniently air 
on the switch. The signal-receiving bell in 
ranged and connected to operate the exchange 
the circuit at the subscriber's station will 
system. 
not then sound, because it and the test-battery 
When an operator makes a test of a line by 
are included in a circuit, which includes one 
placing her test-plug on the contact-piece i of 
branch of that line and both branches of the 
a SWitch of the line, and the line is not switched 
Other line. 
at any board and the subscriber's telephone 
is On its SWitch, a complete circuit is estab 
lished in which are the test receiving instru 
ment and battery and the subscriber's signal 
bell, and the bell will ring, calling the sub 
Scriber, and the test receiving instrument will 
respond Or indicate the make and break of 
the bell and show the operator that the line 
is free. This complete. circuit is from the 
subscriber's ground, through his switch con 
tact-points to the line, over the line and 
through the several pairs of contact-points 
of its switches, thence to contact-piece i, to 
Which the test-plug is applied, and thence to 
ground through the test receiving instrument 
and test-battery. The signal-bell is then in 
the circuit at the subscriber's station. If, 
however, when a test is made the line is in 
use either by its being switched at some board 
or by the subscriber's telephone being off its 
switch, the test instrument will not respond. 
When the Subscriber has taken down his tel 
ephone for use and the line is not yet switched 
at any board, the test-circuit above described 
is opened by the opening of the ground con 
nectionathis station. When a switch-plug is 
inserted into a switch of the line, but the line 
The operator Will thereforeknoW that either 
the line is switched for use at the central of 
fice or that the subscriber's telephone is 
switched for use, and she will not connect to 
the line. 
In multiple-switchboard systems an opera 
tor to whom certain lines are assigned to an 
swer frequently receives several calls at prac 
tically the same moment, and it may require 
Some time before she can switch to a cer 
tain line and answer its call. In systems 
in which the test depends only on the switch 
ing of the line at some other board another 
operator may in the meantime test the line 
and finding it to test free may switch it 
to another line and cause annoyance and con 
fusion to the subscriber. In my system this 
trouble is obviated, because as soon as the 
subscribertakes his telephone from its switch 
the line will test busy whether or not it is 
switched at the central office. Again, in sys 
tems of testing which depend only on the sub 
scriber's telephone being switched for use or 
not by its being on or of its switch confusion 
frequently occurs from the fact that a sub 
scriber placeshis telephone on its switch when 
he is through conversation without sending 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
592,316 
s 
EO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
in a clearing-out signal and his line, tests 
free and is connected to ' when it is al 
ready switched at the central office with some 
other line. Lines in this condition are tech 
nically called tied up. In my system, again, 
this trouble is obviated, because the line will 
test busy until it is disconnected at the 
central office whether or not the subscriber's 
telephoneis Onits Switch. This system, there 
fore, combines the advantages and obviates 
the disadvantages of the two general systems 
of testing outlined above. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent 
1. In a telephone-exchange system, a me 
tallic-circuit line normally (or when it is not 
in use) with its two branches open to each 
other at the subscriber's station and one of 
them with an automatic circuit-breaking bell 
in its circuit and grounded at the subscriber's 
station when his telephone is not switched 
for use but not otherwise, and a switch at the 
Central office containing a pair of contact 
pointSnormally in contact and a third contact 
piece insulated from the rest (except by the 
circuit connections), said branch of the line 
which is normally grounded at the subscrib 
er's station passing through said pair of con 
tact-points and thence connected to said third 
contact-piece, in combination with a switch 
plug adapted to be inserted into said switch 
and when inserted to disconnect the pair of 
contact-points which are normally in contact, 
and a test wire or circuit at the central office 
containing a test receiving instrument and 
battery and grounded at one end and con 
nected at its other end to a test plug or de 
vice adapted, at the will of the operator, to 
be brought into connection with said third 
contact-piece, substantially as set forth. 
2. In a telephone-exchange system, a me 
tallic-circuit line having one of its branches 
with an automatic circuit-breaking bell in its 
circuit and grounded at the subscriber's sta 
tion when his telephone is not switched for 
use but not otherwise and its branches nor 
mally open to each other, and a switch at the 
central office containing a pair of contact 
points normally in contact and a third con 
tact-piece insulated from the rest (except by 
the circuit connections), said branch which is 
thus normally grounded passing through said 
pair of contact-points and thence connected 
to said third contact-piece, in combination 
With a SWitch-plug adapted to be inserted into 
Said Switch and when inserted to disconnect 
Said pair of contact-points, and a test wire or 
circuit at the central office containing a test 
receiving instrument and battery and ground 
ed at One end and connected at its other end 
to a test plug or device adapted, at the will 
of the operator, to be brought into connection 
with said third contact-piece, substantially as 
Set forth. 
3. In a telephone-exchange system, a me 
tallic-circuit line having one of its branches 
With an automatic circuit-breaking bellin its 
circuit and grounded at the subscriber's sta 
tion when his telephone is not switched for 
use but not otherwise and with its branches 
normally open to each other, and a switch at 
the central office containing a pair of contact 
points normally in contact and a third con 
tact-piece insulated from the rest (except by 
the circuit connections), said branch which 
is thus normally grounded passing through 
Said pair of contact-points and thence con 
nected to said third contact-piece, in combi 
nation with a Switch-plug adapted to be in 
serted into said Switch and When inserted to 
disconnect said pair of contact-points, a test 
receiving instrument grounded on one side 
and connected on its other side to a test plug 
or device adapted, at the will of the operator, 
to be brought into connection with said third 
contact-piece, and a battery in the test-circuit 
thereby established, substantially asset forth. 
4. In a telephone-exchange system, a me 
tallic-circuit line the two branches of which 
are normally open to each other and one of 
Which has an automatic electric - circuit 
breaker in its circuit and is grounded at the 
subscriber's station when his telephone is not 
Switched for use, and a switch with contact 
points to close said branches to each other 
and remove said ground connection when the 
telephone is switched for use, in combination 
with a switch at the central office with con 
tact-points to open the closed circuit of the 
line there when the line is switched for use, 
and a test Wire or circuit containing a test 
receiving instrument and battery and ground 
ed on One side and connected on its other end 
With a test plug or device adapted, at the will 
of the operator, to be brought into connection 
With the line with the pair of contact-points 
of said office switch between said connection 
and the normal ground of the line at the sub 
scriber's station, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a telephone-exchange system, a me 
tallic-circuit line the two branches of which, 
are normally open to each other and one of 
Which has an automatic electric - circuit 
breaker in its circuit and is grounded at the 
Subscriber's station when his telephone is not 
Switched for use, and a switch with contact 
points to close said branches to each other 
and remove said ground connections when 
the telephone is switched for use, in combi 
nation with a switch at the central office with 
contact-points to open the circuit of the line 
when the line is switched for use, a test re 
ceiving instrument grounded on one side and 
connected on its other side to a test plug or 
device adapted, at the will of the operator, 
to be brought into connection with the line 
with the pair of contact-points of said office 
SWitch between said connection and the nor 
mal ground of the line at the subscriber's 
Station, and a battery in the test-circuit there 
by established, substantially as set forth. 
6. In a telephone-exchange system, multi 
ple SWitchboards, metallic-circuit lines con 
nected to the same, each normally (or when 
7 o 
75 
95 
O 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
4. 
592,316 
25 
5 
O 
5 
not in use) with its two branches open to each 
other and one of them with an automatic 
electric - circuit breaker in its circuit and 
grounded at the subscriber's station when his 
telephone is not switched for use but not 
otherwise, and switches at the central office, 
One on each board for each line, each contain 
ing a pair of contact-points normally in con 
tact and a third contact-piece insulated from 
the rest (except by the circuit connections) 
said branch of each line which is thus nor 
mally grounded passing successively through 
said pairs of contact-points of its switches 
and thence connected to said third contact 
pieces of its switches, in combination with 
Switch-plugs adapted to be inserted into said 
switches and when a plug is inserted to dis 
connect the contact-points of the switchi, test 
receiving instruments one at each board, each 
grounded on one side and connected on its 
other side to a test plug or device adapted, at 
the will of the operator, to be brought into 
connection with any of said third contact 
pieces of the switches at its board, and a bat 
tery in the test-circuit thereby established, 
substantially as set forth. 
7. In a telephone-exchange system, multi 
ple Switchboards, metallic-circuit lines con 
nected to the same, each of which has its two 
branches normally open to each other and 
one of the branches with an automatic elec 
tric-circuit breaker in its circuit and ground 
ed at the Subscriber's station when his tele 
phone is not switched for use, and a switch 
for each line with contact-points to close its 
branches to each other and remove its ground 
connection when the subscriber's telephone 
is switched for use, in combination with a 
switch on each board for each line to open 
the circuit of the line when it is switched at the 
board, test receiving instruments, one at each 
board, each grounded on one side and con 
nected on its other side to a test plug or de 
vice adapted, at the will of the operator, to be 
45 broughtinto connection with any line with the 
pairs of contact-points of its said switches be 
tween said connection and its normal ground 
connection, substantially as set forth. 
8. A test-circuit for a subscribers line con 
taining normally at the subscriber's station an 
automatic circuit-breaking bell and a pair of 
contact-points which are open when the sub 
scriber's telephone is switched for use but not 
otherwise and at the central office a pair of 
contact-points which are open when the line is 
switched for use but not otherwise, a pair of 
contact-points which are normally open and 
closed by the operator on testing and a test 
receiving instrument and battery, substan 
tially as set forth. 
9. A test-circuit for a subscriber's line con 
taining at the Subscriber's Station, normally, 
an automatic circuit-breaking bell and a pair 
55. 
35 
O 
 
75 
95 
of contact-points which are open when the 
subscribers telephone is switched for use but 
not otherwise, and at the central office, switch 
contact-points which open the circuit when 
the line is switched but not otherwise, a se 
ries of branch or derived circuits to said test 
circuit, each containing a test receiving in 
strument and pair of contact-points normally 
open and closed by the operator on testing, 
and a battery in any test-circuit established, 
substantially as set forth. 
10. In a telephone-exchange system, a me 
tallic-circuit line having one of its branches 
with both an automatic circuit-breaking bell 
in its circuit at the subscriber's station and 
grounded at the subscriber's station when his 
telephone is not switched for use but not other 
wise, and a switch at the central office con 
taining a pair of contact-points normally in 
contact and a third contact-piece insulated. 
from the rest (except by the circuit connec 
tions), said branch which is thus normally 
grounded passing through said pair of con 
tact-points and thence connected to said third 
contact-piece, in combination with a SWitch 
plug adapted to be inserted into said switch 
and when inserted to disconnect said pair of 
contact-points, a test receiving instrument 
grounded on one side and connected on its 
other side to a test plug or device adapted, at 
the will of the operator, to be brought into 
connection with said third contact-piece, and 
a battery in the test-circuit thereby estab 
lished, substantially as set forth. 
11. In a telephone-exchange System, mul 
tiple switchboards, metallic-circuit lines con 
nected to the same, each of which has one of 
the branches with both an automatic electric 
circuit breaker in its circuit at the Subscrib 
er's station and grounded at the subscriber's 
station when his telephone is not switched for 
use, and a switch for each line with contact 
points to remove its ground connection when 
the subscriber's telephone is switched for use, 
in combination with a switch on each board 
for each line to open the circuit of the line 
when it is switched at the board, test receiv 
ing instruments, one at each board, each 
grounded on one side and connected on its 
other side to a test plug Or device adapted, at 
the will of the operator, to be brought into 
connection with any line with the pairs of con 
tact-points of its said switches between said 
connection and its normal ground connection, 
and a battery in the test-circuit thereby es 
tablished, substantially as set forth. 
In witness whereof hereunto subscribe my 
name this 4th day of October, 1889. 
MIILO G. KELLOGG. 
Witnesses: 
MARGARETHA RIEHL, 
FRANCES D. KELLOGG. 
CO 
O 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592416.txt	(No Model.) 
M. G. KELLOGG, 
SPRING JACK FOR TELEPHONE SWITCHBOARDS, 
No. 592,416, 
Patented Oct. 26, 1897, 
 
 
(e. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MILO G. KELLOGG, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE KELLOGG 
SWITCHBOARD AND SUPPLY COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
SPRING-JACK FOR TELEPHONE-SWITCHBOARDS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,416, dated October 26, 1897. 
Application filed April 1, 1893, Renewed December 30, 1893, Serial No. 495,265. (No model.) 
d 
35 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MILO G. KELLOGG, of 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Telephone-Exchange 
Switches, of which the following is a full, clear, 
concise, and exact description, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing a part of this specification. 
Myinvention relates to a spring-jack switch 
adapted for use in certain forms of exchange 
operation in connection with the test system 
shown in my Patent No. 308,315, of Novem 
ber 18, 1884, and for other purposes. In said 
patent the lines which are shown are ground 
or single-circuit lines, and it shows both lines 
which normally pass through series of pairs 
of normally closed contacts on the various 
multiple switchboards and lines which are 
connected permanently to series of switch 
In 
bolts or contacts on the various boards. 
the test system therein shown the test-circuits 
are entirely local and disconnected from the 
main-line circuits. For each line there is on 
each board a pair of local contacts on each 
board disconnected from the main-line cir 
cuits and normally insulated from each other, 
but brought alltomatically into electric con 
nection when the line is switched at that 
board, and one of each of said pairs of local 
contacts is SO constructed and located that a 
test plug or device may be applied to it by 
the operator for testing. The test-circuits 
and connections are substantially as shown 
and described in the patent. The switch 
therein shown and described is, however, not 
applicable to metallic-circuit lines. 
The switch which I shall herein describe 
and claim is applicable to a metallic-circuit 
telephone-exchange system which embodies 
the test system shown in said patent as out 
lined above. 
The switch which is my invention is a 
spring-jack switch in which a contact-piece 
is placed along the Switch-hole, and there is 
one pair of contacts normally in contact and 
another pair normally open, and said first 
pair are opened and said second pair are 
closed by the switch-plug on its insertion; 
also, in which a contact-piece is placed along 
the switch-hole, and there is one pair of con 
tacts normally in contact and another pair 
normally open, and said first pair are opened 
and said second pair are closed by the switch 
plug on its insertion, while the plug then 
forms connection with one of the contact 
pieces of said normally closed pair; also, in 
which a contact-piece is placed along the 
switch-hole, and there is one pair of contacts 
normally closed and another pair normally 
open, and a switch-plug on its insertion opens 
said normally closed points and closes said 
normally open points, and there is a test con 
tact-piece on the front of the switchboard 
connected to one of said normally open con 
tact-points; also, in which a contact-piece is 
placed along the switch-hole, and there is 
one pair of contacts normally closed and an 
other pair normally open, and a switch-plug 
on its insertion opens said normally closed 
contact-points and forms connection with one 
of them and closes said normally open points, 
and there is a test contact-piece on the front 
of the switchboard connected to one of said 
normally open contact-points; also, in which 
there are two insulated contacts and a pair 
of contacts insulated from the others and 
normally open, but automatically closed on 
the insertion of the plug, and when the plug 
is inserted its two contacts form connection 
with said two insulated contacts of the switch, 
respectively; also, in which there are two in 
sulated contacts and a pair of contacts in 
sulated from the others and normally open, 
but automatically closed on the insertion of 
the plug, and a test contact-piece on the front 
of the board connected to one of said nor 
mally open contact-points. 
My invention also consists in the combina 
tion of said switch with a loop-switch plug 
which on its insertion separates said normally 
closed points and closes said normally open 
points, while the two contact-pieces of the 
plug form connection with one of said nor 
mally closed points and with the contact-piece 
along the switch-hole, respectively; also, in 
the combination of said switch with a loop 
switch plug which on its insertion forms con 
nection between its two contacts and two of 
the switch-contacts, respectively, while auto 
matically on the insertion of the plug the pair 
of contacts which are normally open and in 
95 
CC 
2 
. 
592,416 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
sulated from said other contacts are closed to 
each other. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a front view of the 
switch. Fig. 1 is a sectional view of the 
switch as indicated by the line de in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 2 is a side view of the loop-switch plug 
adapted to be inserted into the switch. Fig. 
3 shows the plug inserted into the switch with 
the connections thereby made and broken as 
will hereinafter be described. 
In the drawings like parts are indicated by 
the same letters of reference. 
In Fig. 1, a is the rubber strip of the shape 
substantially as shown, on which the metal 
parts of the switch are mounted, and through 
the front of which is the switch-hole b. g is 
a contact-spring mounted in the rear of the 
strip and extending toward its front par 
allel to the length of the hole and to one side 
of the center of the hole. h is a contact-point 
against which springg normally presses. p is 
a contact-spring mounted on the rear of the 
par 
strip and extending toward its front 
allel to the length of the switch-hole and to 
the other side of the center of the switch 
hole from where g is placed. O is a contact 
point, mounted in close proximity to p, but 
farther from the hole and normally out of con 
tact with p. i is a contact-piece mounted on 
the front of the strip and in electrical con 
nection with O. i is a contact-piece placed 
along the surface of the switch-hole and on 
the same side as Spring p. 
In Fig. 2, m, is the rubber insulation of the 
switch-plug, and n n' are its two contact 
pieces. n., as shown, does not extend to the 
end of the plug-tip, but leaves an insulated 
surface m, at the end of the plug and in front 
of the contact-piece m'. The plug is made so 
that its tip fits the switch-hole, and when in 
serted presses spring g away from contact 
with point h. and by the insulated surface m. 
presses spring pinto contact with point O, and 
the contact-piece in of the plug forms connec 
tion with g, and the piece n' of the plug forms 
connection withi and not with p. The plug 
should be inserted into the switch, in such a 
direction as to perform the switching opera 
tions above described. 
Fig. 3 shows the plug inserted in the switch 
with the connections made.as described. 
The connections of the metallic - circuit 
lines of various forms of telephone-exchange 
operation to the contacts of the switches are 
obvious. For instance, in those systems 
where one side or branch of the line passes 
successively through pairs of normally closed 
contacts of the switch and the other side or 
branch of the line is connected rigidly to third 
or insulated contact-pieces of the switch the 
first - mentioned side will pass, as usual, 
through the pairs of contacts g h of its line 
switches, and the other side or branch of the 
line will be connected, as usual, to all the con 
tacts if of the line-switches, and in those sys 
tems in which each side or branch of the line 
is connected permanently to a contact-piece 
of its switch on each board one side or branch 
is connected to all the contacts g g and the 
other side or branch to all the contacts if of 
its switches on the several boards. In the 
latter case the contacts h h need not be nec 
essarily utilized. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A spring-jack switch containing a con 
tact-piece in or along the switch-hole, and a 
pair of contact-pieces normally closed, and 
another pair of contacts permanently insu 
lated from the rest and normally open, in com 
bination with a loop-switch plug containing 
two contact-pieces each insulated from the 
other, and an insulated surface of the plug 
insulated from said plug contact-pieces, said 
plug being inserted into said switch, and 
when inserted automatically opening said 
normally closed contact-pieces, and forming 
connection between said two contact-pieces 
of the plug respectively and said contact 
piece in or along the switch-hole and one of 
the contact-pieces of said pair of normally 
closed contact-pieces, and said insulated sur 
face of the plug pressing one of said nor 
mally open contact-pieces of the switch into 
electrical contact with its mate. 
2. A spring-jack switch containing a con 
tact-piece in or along the switch-hole, and 
another contact-piece, and a pair of contacts 
permanently insulated from the rest and nor 
mally open, in combination with a loop-switch 
plug containing two contact-pieces each in 
sulated from the other, and an insulated sur 
face of the plug insulated from said plug con 
tact-pieces, said plug being inserted into said 
switch, and when inserted forming connec 
tion between said two contact-pieces of the 
plug respectively and said two first-mentioned 
contact-pieces, respectively, and said insu 
lated surface of the plug pressing one of said 
normally open contact-pieces of the switch 
into electrical contact with its mate. 
3. A spring-jack switch containing a con 
tact-piece, and a pair of contact-pieces nor 
mally closed, and another pair of contacts per 
manently insulated from the rest and nor 
mally Open, in combination with a loop-switch 
plug containing two contact-pieces each insu 
lated from the other, and an insulated piece 
of the plug insulated from said plug contact 
pieces, said plug being inserted into said 
switch, and when inserted automatically open 
ing said normally closed contact-pieces, and 
forming connection between said two contact 
pieces of the plug respectively and said first 
mentioned contact-piece and one of the con 
tact-pieces of said pair of normally closed 
contact-pieces, and said insulated piece of 
the plug pressing said normally open contact 
pieces of the switch into electrical connection 
With each other. 
4. A spring-jack switch containing a con 
tact-piece in or along the Switch-hole, and a 
pair of contact-pieces normally closed, and 
another pair of contacts permanently insu 
7 o 
75 
95 
OC 
O 
II5 
I 25 
592,416 
Cd 
25 
35 
40 
lated from the rest and normally open, and 
a test contact-piece a part of or in electrical 
connection with one of said normally open 
contact-pieces, in combination with a loop 
switch plug containing two contact-pieces 
each insulated from the other, and an insul 
lated piece of the plug insulated from said 
plug contact-pieces, said plug being inserted 
into said Switch, and when inserted automat 
ically opening said normally closed contact 
pieces, and forming connection between said 
two contact-pieces of the plug respectively 
and said contact-piece in or along the switch 
hole and one of the contact-pieces of said 
pair of normally closed contact-pieces, and 
Said insulated piece of the plug bringing said 
normally open contact-pieces of the switch 
into electrical connection with each other. 
5. A spring-jack switch containing a con 
tact-piece in or along the switch-hole, and 
another contact-piece, and a pair of contacts 
permanently insulated from the rest and nor 
mally open, and a test contact-piece a part 
of or in electrical connection with one of said 
normally open contact-pieces, in combination 
with a loop-switch plug containing two con 
tact-pieces each insulated from the other, 
and an insulated piece of the plug insulated 
from said plug contact-pieces, said plug be 
ing inserted into said switch, and when in 
Serted forming connection between said two 
contact-pieces of the plug respectively and 
said two first-mentioned contact-pieces, and 
said insulated piece of the plug bringing said 
normally open contact-pieces of the switch 
into electric connection with each other. 
6. A spring-jack switch containing a con 
tact-piece and a pair of contact-pieces nor 
mally closed, and another pair of contacts per 
manently insulated from the rest and nor 
mally open, and a test contact-piece a part of 
or in electrical connection with one of said 
normally open contact-pieces, in combination 
With a loop-switch plug containing two con 
tact-pieces each insulated from the other, and 
all insulated piece of the plug insulated from 
Said plug contact-pieces, said plug being in 
Serted into Said switch, and when inserted 
alltomatically opening said normally closed 
Contact-pieces, and forming connection be 
tween said two contact-pieces of the plug re 
Spectively and said first-mentioned contact 
piece and one of the contact-pieces of said 
pair of normally closed contact-pieces, and 
said insulated piece of the plug bringing said 
normally open contact-pieces of the switch 
into electric connection with each other. 
7. A loop-switch plug containing two insu 
lated contact-pieces to each of which a flexi 
ble switch-cord is attached, and containing an 
insulated piece insulated from said contact 
pieces of the plug, in combination with a 
Switch adapted to receive the plug, said switch 
45 
55 
 
8 
containing a hole into which the plugisplaced 
for switching, containing also two contact 
pieces with one of which one of the contact 
pieces of the plug forms connection, and with 
the other of which the other contact-piece of 
the plug forms connection, When the plug is 
inserted into the switch, and containing also 
two other contact-pieces never in electrical 
connection with the other contact-pieces and 
normally insulated from each other but au 
tomatically, electrically connected on the in 
sertion of the plug into the switch by said in 
sulated piece of the plug. 
8. A loop-SWitch plug containing two insul 
lated contact-pieces to each of which a flexi 
ble switch-cord is attached, and containing an 
insulated piece insulated from said contact 
pieces of the plug, in combination with a 
switchadapted to receive the plug, said switch 
containing a hole into which the plugisplaced 
for Switching, containing also two contact 
pieces with one of which one of the contact 
pieces of the plug forms connection, and with 
the other of which the other contact-piece of 
the plug forms connection, when the plug is 
inserted into the switch, and containing also 
two other contact-pieces never in electrical 
connection with the other contact-pieces and 
normally insulated from each other but au 
tomatically electrically connected on the in 
sertion of the plug into the switch by said in 
Sulated piece of the plug, one of said last 
mentioned contact-pieces extending to the 
front of the switch. 
9. A loop-switch plug containing two insu 
lated contact-pieces to each of which a flexi 
ble switch-cordis attached, and containing an 
insulated piece insulated from said contact 
pieces of the plug, in combination with a 
switch adapted to receive the plug, said switch 
containing a hole into which the plugis placed 
for Switching, containing also two contact 
pieces with one of which one of the contact 
pieces of the plug forms connection, and with 
the other of which the other contact-piece of 
the plug forms connection, when the plug is 
inserted into the switch, containing also two 
other contact-pieces never in electrical con 
nection with the other contact-pieces and nor 
mally insulated from each other but auto 
matically electrically connected on the inser 
tion of the plug into the switch, by said in 
Sulated piece of the plug, and containing 
also a contact-piece at the front of the switch 
connected with one of said last-mentioned 
contact-pieces. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name. 
MILO G. KELLOGG. 
Witnesses: 
II. M. WALKER, 
E. S. WALKER. 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592516.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JENNIE P. DUVAL, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI. 
CAR-FENDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,516, dated October 26, 1897. 
Application filed May 28, 1897. Serial No. 638,662. (No model.) 
* 
claims. 
To all avhom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JENNIE; P. DUVAL, of 
Kansas City, Jackson county, Missouri, have 
invented certain new and I useful Improve 
ments in Car-Fenders, of which the following 
is a full, clear, and exact description, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part thereof. 
MIy invention relates to street-car fenders; 
and its object is to produce a device of this 
character which will positively and reliably 
pick up any object or obstruction from the 
trackWay, Such as a child, an adult, or any 
other object upon which the rotary lifter can 
obtain a firm grasp. 
A further object is to produce a fender of 
this character which, under the impact of a 
large object, such as another car or a vehicle, 
will yield and fold up out of the way, so as 
to reduce the chances of breakage or destruc 
tion Of the fender to the minimum. 
Other objects of the invention will herein 
after appear, and be pointed out in appended 
In order that the invention may be fully 
understood, I will proceed to describe it with 
reference to the accompanying drawings, in 
wlhlich 
Figure 1 represents a vertical longitudinal 
section of my improved car-fender. Fig. 2 
Fig. 
represents a top plan view of the same. 
3 represents a cross-section taken on the line 
III III of Fig. 2. 
In the said drawings, 1 designates a fender 
composed of wire-gauze or equivalent mate 
rial, in order that it may fold transversely 
under the impact resulting from a collision 
with a heavy object, as hereinbefore suggested, 
and as will be more fully referred to herein 
after. This flexible fender is provided with 
a series of allined guide-loops 2 at its opposite 
sides, and fitting therein are stiffening-rods 
3, connected by short chains 4, so as not to 
interfere with the folding or bending opera 
tion of the fender. The rear ends of the rear 
most rods and the front ends of the foremost 
rods 3 terminate in collars 5, and journaled 
therein are shafts 6, provided with wheels 7, 
which run upon the track-rails, the front 
wheels, by preference, being of much smaller 
diameter than ordinary car-wheels. The size 
of the rear wheels 7 is not so important. 
The rear axle, in order that the device may 
adjust itself freely in turning curves, has a 
swivel connection with the car, such connec 
tions comprising a collar 8, mounted upon 
the middle of the axle, bolts 9 and 10, mounted 
thereon, the bolt 10 being provided with an 
eye or loop 11 and a bifurcated bracket 12, 
which is pivotally mounted at its lower end 
upon the bolts 9 and 10, and is bolted se 
curely to the bottom of the car at its upper 
end, as shown at 13. 
The front Or collar end of one of the rods 3 
is bent out of its direct course, and extending 
therethrough is a sleeve 14, which is journaled 
upon the front shaft 6. 
It carries the bevel 
gear-wheel 15 at one end, which is driven by 
the gear-wheel 16, cast upon the adjacent 
track-wheel 7, through the medium of the 
pinion 17, provided with a short stem which 
finds a journal in the bearing-box 18, secured 
to the rod 3, which is bent out of its course. 
By this arrangement it is obvious that the ro 
tation of the track-wheels, due to friction, 
causes the rotation of the front shaft i 6 for 
wardly and the sleeve 14 rearwardly, for a 
purpose which will presently be explained. 
Said sleeve is provided with a series of radiat 
ing arms 19, armed with the loosely-mounted 
angle-hooks 20, which are adapted to posi 
tively and reliably grasp an object as they ro 
tate in the direction indicated by the arrow, 
Fig. 1, convey it upwardly and to the rear 
and deposit it upon the fender 1. By reason 
of being loosely mounted in said arms 19 they 
release the object, in case of a slight penetra 
tion, for instance, of the apparel of the person, 
without material, if any, injury. 
19 designates a collar which is mounted 
loosely upon the middle of the sleeve 14, and 
depending from the same is a threaded ex 
tension 19, engaged by a nut 19. 
A break-joint rod comprises the members 
20 and 21, hinged or pivoted together as at 
22. The front end of said rodis provided with 
a slot 23, through which the threaded exten 
sion 19 of the collar 19 extends. The rear 
end of the member 21 is provided with a catch 
comprising a block 22 and a spring 23, and 
this catch is adapted to engage the arm 24, pro 
jecting from a bracket 25, secured to the floor 
of the car adjacent to the position of the grip 
man, motorman, or driver, a slot being made 
C 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
O 
2 
W- 
592,516 
55 
75 
for the passage of said rod. Said rod is also 
prevented from sagging by its passage through 
the eye or guide-loop of the pivot-rod 10. 
When the catch is engaged by the arm 24 
of the bracket 25, the break-joint rod is ex 
tended and its pivotis rearward of the hinge 
point of the fender, as shown clearly in Fig. 1, 
so that as long as they are maintained in such 
positions, their pivotal points overlapping, it 
will practicallybe impossible, by the frontend 
of the fender striking an obstruction, to col 
lapse or fold upwardly. When the person in 
charge of the gar, however, by pressing upon 
the end of the member 21 disengages said 
bar from the bracket 25, the pressure of the 
operators foot, assisted by the weight of the 
bar itself, causes it to slide forwardly upon 
the extension 19" until its pivotal point coin 
cides approximately in position with the 
hinge-point of the fender, so that ifan obstruc 
tieon is met with the fender and rod will bend 
at their hinge-points and the device befolded 
upwardly in the direction indicated by the ar 
row, Fig. 1, toward the dashboard. In order 
to assist this operation, I by preference em 
ploy a spring 26, which is secured to one mem 
ber and presses upwardly against the other 
member of said break-joint rod, as shown in 
Fig. 1. By this arrangement it is obvious 
that the cair-controller, in the face of an im 
pending collision, may disengage the break 
joint bar and the bracket, in order that the 
impact, instead of crushing the fender, may 
simply cause it to bend upwardly at its mid 
dle in the manmer referred to. 
After the danger is passed or the collision 
has occurred the fender is again caused to 
assume its original and normal position and 
the rod is expanded and rengaged with the 
bracket 25. 
From the above description it will be ap 
parent that I have produced a safety-fender 
for cars which embodies the advantages enu 
merated in the statement of invention and 
which is comparatively simple and inexpen 
Sive of manufacture. 
It is to be understood, of course, that va 
rious changes may be made without depart- - 
ing from the spirit and scope of my inven 
tion or sacrificing any of its advantages. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
a wheeled 
1. A car - fender, comprising 
frame, a flexible fender or apron provided 
with guide-loops, bars mounted in said guide 
loops and linked together at their opposing 
ends, and mounted upon the axles of the 
frame, a break-joint bar secured to a car and 
engaged with the rear end of said bar, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A car-fender, comprising a flexible fen 
der or apron, provided with guide-loops at its 
sde, bars engaging said guide-loops, chains 
connecting the opposing ends of said bars, 
shafts journaled in said bars at opposite ends 
of said fender or apron, wheels mounted upon 
said shafts and running upon the track-rails, 
a collar secured to the front shaft at its mid 
dle, a break-joint bar comprising two sections 
hinged together rearward of said chains, and 
one of them provided with a slot which en 
gages the collar upon the front shaft, a guide 
loop for the rear member, a spring secured 
to the rear member, and pressing upwardly 
against the front member, a bracket upon 
the car, and a spring-catch upon the rear 
member of the rod detachably engaging said 
bracket, substantially as described. 
3. A car - fender, comprising a wheeled 
frame, a flexible fender or apron provided 
with guide-loops, bars mounted in said guide 
loops and linked together at their opposing 
ends, and mounted upon the axles of the 
frame, a break-joint bar secured to a car and 
engaged with the rear end of saidbar, a spring 
catch secured to the rear end of the break 
joint bar, and a bracket upon the car engaged 
by said catch, substantially as described. 
4. A car - fender, comprising a wheeled 
frame, a flexible fender or apron provided 
with guide-loops, bars mounted in said guide 
loops and linked together at their opposing 
ends, and supported by the wheeled frame, 
a rotating sleeve mounted upon the front axle 
of said frame and provided with arms having 
hooks so as. to constitute a carrier, means to 
rotate the same, and a break-joint bar con 
necting the front end of said frame with the 
car, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
JENNIE P. DUVAL. 
Witnesses: 
M. R. REMILEY, 
G. Y. THORPE. 
9o 
95 
I CO 
I O 
I 5 
2 O 
25 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592617.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 592,617, 
 
D. SEWELL, 
SHAKING BOLT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Oct. 26, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 592,617, 
 
SSES 
M/I 
a 75 224 
ecca %a-/- 
D. SEWELL. 
SHAKING BOT, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Oct, 26, 1897. 
EZT 
4, 2% 24 
By 62,4- 2 73-4. 
1iorneys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DELOS SEWELL, OF HILLSDALE, MICHIGAN. 
SHAKING-BOLT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,617, dated October 26, 1897. 
Application filed November 20, 1896, Serial No. 612,827, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, DELOSSEWELL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Hillsdale, 
county of Hillsdale, State of Michigan, have 
invented a certain new and useful Improve 
ment in Shaking-Bolts; and I declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it pertains 
to make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
shaking-bolts; and it consists in the peculiar 
arrangement and combination of parts here 
inafter pointed out and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the com 
pound bolting-frame with a portion of the 
same broken away to show the operation of 
the parts more perfectly. Fig. 2 is an en 
larged detailed sectional view showing one 
of the eccentrics and its connection with the 
oscillating arm. 
In the drawings, A A represent the frame, 
Within which is hung a compound bolt com 
prised of two frames B and B', each carrying 
sieves, (not shown,) B", as it will be seen, being 
somewhat smaller and located within the 
frame B. These are hung from the cross-bars 
A' A' of the frame A by peculiar mechanism, 
consisting of pins KK, projecting from the 
cross-bars A' A'. Entwined around these 
pins are wire ropes k k, passing from one pin 
to the other and the ends dropping down and 
secured to adjustable eyebolts kic, located in 
the larger and outer sieve-frame B. The inner 
sieve-frame B' is hung from that portion of 
the Wire rope that extends from pin to pin by 
means of short sections of wire ropes sleeved 
thereon and marked kk. These also engage 
With adjustable eyebolts in the frame B'. 
These adjustable eyebolts permit the sieves 
to be leveled. 
C is a longitudinal shaft journaled at c cin 
brackets attached to the frame A and carry 
ing, preferably, eccentrics of the common 
type located at ce. Any crank means in the 
place of an eccentric would perform the same 
office, this not being any element of my in 
Vention. 
Attached to the eccentric-straps are pit 
men cc, which connect, respectively, with 
s 
invention. 
vertical rocking arms E. E. These rocking 
arms are journaled in slots in cross-bars A*A* 
of the frame on pivots ee. The slots are so 
proportioned that on the extreme throw of the 
eccentric in either direction the rocking arms 
will come in contact with the walls of the slots 
at C. C. The upper portion e'e' of the rocking 
arms is made slightly convex and fits into 
somewhat larger recesses b'b' in the cross-bar 
B'B' of the larger sieve or frame B. The en 
largement of this recess, which corresponds 
substantially in shape with that of the head 
of the cross-bar, constitutes, in connection 
with the abutment formed by the slots in the 
cross-bars A' A', an important feature of my 
If desired, buffers of some semielastic ma 
terial, such as leather, may be introduced at 
all points of contact. A slight descent can be 
given to the two sieves from the head to the 
tail or discharge, and appropriate spouts can 
be arranged as in the ordinary way; but as 
these constitute no part of my invention what 
ever and are universally well known they are 
not illustrated nor described. 
It is obvious that the forms could be varied 
without departing from the principle, and I 
do not limit myself to the exact form shown. 
The mode of operation of this device is as 
follows: The apparatus being constructed as 
hereinbefore described and the shaft C being 
set in motion, the crank action of eccentrics 
would cause an oscillating motion to be given 
to the rocking arms upon the pivots e e, by 
means of which motion is transmitted trans 
versely to the swinging sieve-frame B, and 
as the upper sieve B' is contained within the 
frame of the lower one and is so proportioned 
that its sides come in somewhat close rela 
tion thereto the frame B strikes the frame B' 
and also gives the upper and smaller sieve a 
transverse swinging motion. This motion is 
continued until it is met on the return mo 
tion by the frame B, when it is thrown in the 
opposite direction. In this way a continual 
reciprocating shaking movement is given to 
the upper sieve. The recesses in which the 
heads of the rocking arms engage in the Cross 
bars of the frame B being somewhat larger 
than the heads permits a continued move 
ment by the frame B in the direction in which 
it is started by the oscillation of the rocking 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
592,617 
arm until the opposite face of the recess comes 
in contact with the opposite side of the head 
of the rocking arm, the rocking arm on its re 
turn movement throwing the sieve in the op 
posite direction. It will be observed that the 
rocking arm slows upits movement by virtue of 
the crank action of the eccentrics as those ec 
centrics reach and pass their dead-centers; but 
the sieve does not operate on this slowing-up 
movement, but the oscillating movements are 
sharp and rapid in that they are suddenly re 
Versed by virtue of the mechanism described. 
The recesses in which the rocking arms oscil 
late being so proportioned that as the eccen 
trics reach their dead-centers the rocking 
arms come in contact with the sides of those 
recesses they take the Strain due to the sud 
den stoppage of the sieves and relieve the 
eccentrics and shaft from any strain what 
ever except that due to the reversal of the 
sieve's motion. This strain is also almost, if 
not entirely, obviated by the semi-elastic 
material operating as buffers, as the elasticity 
causes the sieves to rebound from the extreme 
limit of their motion. This rebound is caught 
up and taken by the movement of the eccen 
tric and the rocker-arms, so that the sudden 
jerk upon the eccentric that otherwise would 
occur, due to the sudden starting of the sieves 
in the other direction, is quite avoided. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I desire to claim is 
1. In an improved mechanism for shaking 
bolts, the combination of a continuously-ro 
tating driving-shaft, means connected with 
said shaft whereby rocking arms are caused 
to Oscillate, rigid abutments against which 
Said arms impinge at the extreme limit of 
their oscillations, a bolting-sieve and means 
45 
50 
55 
permitting it to swing, and recesses in the 
frame of said bolting-sieve in which the end 
of the oscillating arm engages, each of said 
recesses being larger than the head of the OS 
cillating arm, substantially as described. 
2. In an improved mechanism for shaking 
bolts, the combination of a continuously-ro 
tating driving-shaft, means connected with 
said shaft whereby rocking arms are caused 
to oscillate, rigid abutments against which 
said arms impinge at the extreme limit of 
their oscillations, a bolting-sieve and means 
permitting it to swing, recesses in the frame 
of said bolting-sieve in which the end of the 
oscillating arm engages, each of said recesses 
being larger than the head of the Oscillating 
arm, and an interior bolting-sieve arranged 
to be operated by the frame of the exterior 
bolting-sieve, substantially as described. 
3. In mechanism for operating shaking 
bolts, the combination of a shaft and crank 
thereon, a pitman, an oscillating arm con 
nected with said pitman and oscillated there 
by, abutments against which said oscillating 
arms may come in contact at the extremity 
of the oscillation, a sieve adapted to engage 
the outer extremity of the oscillating arm by 
a connection which permits the motion of the 
sieve to continue a short distance after the 
motion of the arm has stopped, and hangers 
permitting thesieve to oscillate, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
tion in the presence of two witnesses. 
DELOS SEWELL. 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK. W. STOCK, 
WILLIAM J. MAY. 
O 
(5 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592717.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 592,717. 
ge/2. 7, 
 
 
 
T. J. SULLIVAN. 
PIANTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
s 
as 2. 
Patented 00t, 26, 1897. 
Until 2 
les-92 as 
ths - 3. 
3. -s - - - - - f 
I 
See 
ea S 
C 
(No Model.) 
T. J. SULLIWAN, 
PANTER, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 592,717. 
Patented Oct. 26, 1897. 
 
 
Ed 
 
A.es 
N NS 
s 
Nss 
N 
i 
 
3 
-- o 
 
'totic t; 
 
 
 
 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TIMOTHY JOY SULLIVAN, OF ROCKPORT, KENTUCKY. 
PLANTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,7 17, dated October 26, 1897. 
Application filed May 15, 1897, Serial No. 636,616, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, TIMOTHY JOY SULLI 
VAN, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Rockport, in the county of Ohio and State 
of Kentucky, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Planters; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exagt description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My said invention consists in an improved 
construction and arrangement of parts of 
planters of the character wherein the seed is 
carried in the wheels of the machine, which 
have dropping mechanism connected there 
with, as will hereinafter be more fully de 
scribed and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which are made a part hereof and on which 
similar letters and figures of reference indi 
cate similar parts, Figure 1 is a top or plan 
view of a planter embodying my said inven 
tion; Fig. 2, a section looking in the direction 
indicated by the arrows from the dotted line 
22 in Fig. 1, showing the inner face of the 
Wheel in elevation. Fig. 3 is a rear elevation; 
Fig. 4, a transverse section through one wheel 
on the dotted line 33 in Fig. 2, showing the 
dropping mechanism on one side only; Fig. 5, 
a section looking in the direction indicated by 
the arrows from the dotted line 55 in Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 is a detail view showing the joint in 
the rake; Fig. 7, a detail top plan of the trip 
bar for operating the mechanism, and Fig. 8 
is a detail perspective of the main parts of 
said dropping mechanism. 
In Said drawings the portions marked A 
represent the frame for attaching the team; 
B, the axle; C, the wheels; D, the trip-bar, 
and E a marker. 
The frame A is of any approved construc 
tion for the purpose, being composed of cross 
bars and side pieces carrying thills, or a pole, 
or whatever attaching means is desired. On 
the under side of the rear cross-piece are se 
cured the boxes a, of suitable form, by which 
said frame is mounted on the axle, which axle 
revolves in said boxes. Arms A" and A', 
suitably braced, are carried by the front cross 
piece and extend into the interior of the 
wheels and in turn carry a trip-bar D for op 
erating the dropping mechanism, as will be 
r 
presently described. Said arms are connected 
to said cross-piece, so as to be adjusted there 
on to allow for different adjustments of the 
Covering 
wheels when desired, as shown. 
rakes A are also attached to the rear end of 
this frame and extend back over the planted 
rows to cover the seed deeper, if desired, and 
also to rake off any clods or stones. They 
are preferably jointed at the bolt a', and the 
rear sections a may be adjusted to different 
positions to rake off more or less, as desired. 
The teeth a incline rearwardly, as shown, to 
better adapt the rakes to their work. 
The axle B is mounted to rotate in the boxes 
C. and is provided with a series of perforations 
in each end (indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 
4) by which the wheels may be secured in dif 
ferent positions. 
The wheels Care each composed of an outer 
plate of sufficient strength and rigidity to fur 
nish the needed support and have a hub c bolt 
ed thereto or formed thereon, as preferred, 
which is perforated, and a pin c', extending 
through said perforation, and one of the per 
forations in the axle secures the wheel in the 
position desired. When it is desired to ad 
just the wheels nearer to or farther from each 
other, it is readily accomplished by with 
drawing said pins and moving said wheels 
out or in to the desired position and then re 
inserting the said pins in the appropriate per 
forations in the axle. By this means the dis 
tance between the rows may be regulated, as 
preferred. The face of each wheel is also of 
a plate of suitable dimensions to secure the 
needed rigidity. Its inner side is closed to a 
point a sufficient distance from the rim to 
hold the seed securely by a plate which pref 
erably flares or inclines toward the center of 
the machine to afford more room for the op 
erating parts, and also to better adapt it to 
catch any seed which may be carried to the 
top as it falls back. The droppers are com 
posed of two parts or bills C and C of suffi 
cient width to form a hill of the desired size 
and are arranged with their width inline with 
the sides of the wheels. Apertures are formed 
in the rim of the wheels at suitable points to 
accommodate them. There may be as many 
as needed to drop the seed at the desired in 
tervals. In the drawings two are shown, one 
exactly opposite the other. This is a suitable 
Io 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
592,717 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
arrangement for corn-planters, but for other 
Seed a different one may be preferred. The 
part C" of each of said droppers is bolted or 
riveted to one edge of the apertures provided 
therefor, and the other part C is mounted on 
a pivot c, being rounded on its outer sidelon 
gitudinally, where it extends through the rim, . 
so as to be in close contact with the edge of 
the apertures in all its positions. The top of 
said part C is formed into an arm C8, which 
extends into near the hub and has an anti 
friction-roller con its inner end, which con 
tacts with the trip, as will be presently de 
scribed. A sliding part C', containing seed 
cups c, is mounted to slide in over each of 
the apertures covered by the droppers, the 
seed-cups being normally outside. The Outer 
end of said plate is connected by a pivot to a 
lever C, which is pivoted midway its length 
On a suitably-located bracket c, and the op 
posite end of said lever is connected by a link 
c' to the inner end of the arm C3. A spring 
C operates to hold said parts in their normal 
position and return them there to when the 
said arm C has been released from the trip 
after operation. Just at the inner edge of 
each aperture, in line with the part C" of the 
droppers, a brush or cut-off C is located, its 
lower edge coming nearly in contact with the 
plate C and serving to brush back any seed 
thereon except that contained in the cups c. 
Thus only the exact number of seeds desired 
are dropped into each hill. Said brush is of 
any Suitable material and is mounted on a 
horizontal arm c, which extends over the piv 
oted rod c and is riveted or bolted to the rim. 
On said pivot-rod c is mounted a finger-bar 
C, provided with fingers which project to 
Ward the seed-cups and curve downwardly, 
one being located in line with each cup. The 
points normally rest on the top of the plate 
C, being held down by a spring c. 
Thus as 
said plate C is forced under the brush C7 the 
points of these fingers drop into the cups c' 
and force out any seed that might become 
stuck therein. A suitable casing 1surrounds 
the arm C, and another, 2, surrounds the le 
Ver C, thus protecting the joints and work 
ing parts from being clogged or interfered 
With by the seed. A straight diaphragm 3 is 
preferably set across the face of the wheel 
just behind each of the plates C4 to acceler 
ate the fall of the seed thereto and prevent. 
it from lodging behind it, as when the supply 
of Seed is nearly exhausted. 
The trip D is in the nature of a cam, being 
a bar with tapered ends. It is carried on the 
inner ends of the arms A" and A* in a posi 
tion just below the hub and next to the out 
Side plate of the wheel, with its cam-face in 
Ward. On its rear side it is provided with 
antifriction-rollers d, which prevent friction 
between it and the outer plate of the wheel 
if when operating the dropping mechanism 
it is forced back against said plate. Said trip 
is located so as to contact with the roller cs 
at the time when the dropper-bill is in a ver 
tical position in the ground, and it is of a 
length to hold said dropper open until it is up 
out of the ground, thus allowing the Soil to 
fall back into the opening loosely alld cover 
the Seed. 
The operation of my said invention is as 
follows: The several parts being in position 
and adjusted as desired the seed is deposited 
through the open sides of the wheels, and the 
machine is then ready for work. The wheels 
being mounted upon the axle rigidly and ad 
justed so the droppers of each are in line With 
those of the other perfect alinement is always 
secured. If desired, a marker E may be 
mounted on the outside of the Wheel next to 
the work, its ends in line with the droppers, 
and the operator can then readily see that 
the hills are kept in line in the several rows. 
As the wheels rotate to bring the droppel's or 
bills into a vertical position in the ground 
the trips D contact with the rollers c' and 
through the arms C open the dropper, at the 
same time operating the seed-plate C and 
dropping mechanism to deposit the desired 
number of seed in the ground. The soil falls 
back into the opening as the dropper comes 
up, covering the seed, and the rakes A* and 
a finish the covering operation and finish off 
the row, as before described. 
By reason of the width of the dropper and 
the arrangement of the seed-cups separated 
one from another and each of a size intend 
ed to accommodate a single seed the seed are 
deposited in the ground separated one from 
another, which obviates the necessity of 
thinning out to make the hills of the char 
acter most desired, which is of great advan 
tage, as will be readily understood. 
It will be understood, of course, that in 
many details of construction the machine 
shown may be modified without departing 
from my invention and that by increasing or 
decreasing the distance between the Seed-cups 
the plants of each hill may be secured the ex 
act distance apart desired, that by increas 
ing or decreasing the number of droppers and 
the size of the wheels the space between the 
hills may be regulated as desired, and that 
by adjusting the wheels on the axle the space 
between the rows may be made as desired. 
It will also be understood that by having dif 
ferent sets of droppers projecting different 
distances adapted to be interchanged the 
same machine may be adapted to drop the 
seed at different depths, if desired. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion, What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a planter, the combination, of the 
frame, the axle, the wheels formed with one 
- closed side a closed periphery and the other 
side closed from the periphery into within a 
Short distance of the axle by a plate which 
tapers from said periphery toward the center 
of the machine thus forming the seed-cham 
ber within said wheel, droppers mounted in 
the rim of said wheel, mechanism for operat 
o 
75 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
592,717 
g 
95 
ICO 
5 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55. 
75 
ing said droppers and carrying the seed from 
said chambers thereto, and mechanism for 
closing them when the operation is completed, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a planter, the combination, of the 
frame, the axle, the wheels rigidly mounted 
on said axle and formed hollow to contain the 
seed with an opening around the axle on One 
side to admit the seed, droppers mounted at 
intervals on the rims of said wheels consist 
ing of two parts one of which is pivoted, an 
arm extending inwardly from said pivoted 
part, a trip supported from the frame and lo 
cated to contact said arm and operate said 
pivoted part, a frame provided with seed 
carrying cups mounted to slide from said seed 
chamber to the droppers, a lever connected 
at one end to said frame and at its other end 
connected by a link to the arm of said piv 
oted part of the dropper, whereby they are 
operated simultaneously, and a spring for re 
turning the parts to their normal position, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a planter, the combination, of the 
frame, the axle, the wheels rigidly mounted 
on the axle and formed to contain the seed, 
the droppers mounted at intervals on the rims 
of said wheels consisting of a stationary and a 
pivoted part, the pivoted part being provided 
with an arm which projects inward to contact 
with a trip D supported from the frame, the 
casing 1 surrounding said parts, the sliding 
plate having the seed-cups, the lever and link 
connecting the same to said arm, the casing 2 
surrounding them, the brush C mounted at 
the entrance to the dropper, the cross-bar C 
pivoted within said droppers and provided 
with a fingerfor each of the seed-cups and ar 
ranged to drop into and force the seed from 
said cups when they enter said droppers, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In a planter, the combination, of the 
frame, the axle, the wheels formed with closed 
outer sides and with their inner sides open 
near the center, said inner sides being formed 
tapered from the rim in Wardly, droppers 
mounted over apertures in the rims of each 
wheel one side of each of which is pivoted and 
provided with an inwardly-extending arm, a 
sliding plate carrying seed-cups connected by 
a pivoted lever and link to said arm, a trip 
for operating said arm, and means for re 
turning it to its normal position, substan 
tially as set forth. 
5. In a planter, the combination, of the 
frame provided with boxes, the axle journaled 
in said boxes, the wheels provided with the 
seed-chambers mounted rigidly on said axle, 
the droppers one part of each of which is piv 
oted, the part carrying the seed-cups con 
nected with said pivoted part, whereby it is 
operated to carry the seed from the seed 
chamber to the dropper as said part is oper 
ated, the trip for operating the same, carried 
on arms secured to the frame and projecting 
within the wheel, said trip having antifric 
tion-rollers on its back to contact with the 
back of the wheel, and means for returning 
the parts to their normal position, Substan 
tially as set forth. 
6. In a planter, the combination, of the 
frame, the axle the wheels formed as seed 
chambers, the seed-carrying plates with the 
cups, finger-bars Chaving a finger adapted 
to enter each of said cups as the plate is op 
erated, the droppers, and the operating mech 
anism, substantially as set forth. 
7. In a planter, the combination, of the 
frame provided with boxes, the axle journaled 
therein, the wheels rigidly mounted on said 
axle and formed to contain the seed-cham 
bers, the droppers, the mechanism for oper 
ating said droppers, and the covering-rakes 
connected to said frame and provided with 
adjustable jointed ends, substantially as Set 
forth. 
8. In a planter, 'the combination, of the 
frame, the axle, the wheels mounted on said 
axle, the droppers mounted at intervals 
around the peripheries of said wheels, the op 
erating mechanism, the plates containing the 
seed-cups, said cups being formed therein Sep 
arated one from another and each adapted to 
carry a single seed, the brush at the entrance 
to said droppers, and the fingers therein 
adapted to drop into said cups as they enter 
and force the seed therefrom, said fingers be 
ing mounted on a rocking bar and arranged 
separated thereon to correspond with the ar 
rangement of the cups, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
TIMOTHY JOY SULLIVAN. 
Witnesses: 
J. SMITH, 
TIM. J. SULLIVAN, Jr. 
- --- 
Y 
Affidavit having been filed showing that the name of the patentee in Letters Patent 
No. 592,717, granted October 26, 1897, for an improvement in Planters, should have 
been written and printed Timothy Jay Sullivan instead of Timothy Joy Sullivan, it 
is hereby certified that the proper correction has been made in the files and records 
pertaining to the case in the Patent Office, and should be read in the Letters Patent 
that the same may conform thereto. 
Signed, countersigned, and sealed this 14th day of December, A. D., 1897. 
SEAL. 
Countersigned: 
A. P. GREELEY, 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 
WEBSTER, DAVIS, 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592818.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 592,818, 
J. C. NELSON. 
INTERCHANGEABLE CULTIVATOR, 
Patented Nov. 2, 1897. 
WITNESSES: 
2,2'-r 
 
INVENTOR 
Cheed-el 
ty. 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES C. NELS ON, O F O MAHA, NEB RASKA. 
INTERCHANG EABLE CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,818, dated November 2, 1897. 
Application filed December 29, 1896, serial No. 617,430, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES C. NELSON, re 
siding at Omaha, in the county of Douglas 
and State of Nebraska, have invented certain 
usefullmprovements in Interchangeable Cul 
tivators; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention has relation to a new and 
novel improvement in cultivators, the object 
being to provide a wheeled cultivator that 
shall be arranged so that it can be used for a 
double purpose. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
shows a side elevation, with parts broken 
away, of my cultivator, while Fig. 2 shows a 
broken front view thereof. 
My invention comprises, essentially, an in 
verted-U-shaped frame, preferably compris 
ing two metal blanks 22, which are connected 
above to a block 1, to strengthen the same, 
and below are provided with two stub-axles 
5 5, provided with the usual axle-skein 7, 
adapted to receive a suitable wheel. These 
stub-axles 55 are slotted, being provided with 
an opening 6, within which is held a T-shaped 
block 10, the stem of which passes through 
the slot 6 and is provided with a nut 50, so 
that this block is securely but adjustably at 
tached to its stub-axle 5. Extending upward 
and forward are the ears 8, which give sup 
port to a sheave 9, as is shown in Fig.1, below 
which sheave is positioned another (marked 
14) in line with a sheave 15 between the 
blanks 22, which sheave 15 in turn is lower 
than a sheave 16, mounted upon a pin 17, 
referring now to Fig. 2. These sheaves 9 
14 15 16 are used in sets, there being one 
upon each side. Movably secured to each of 
the blocks 10, of which there are two, though 
only one is shown in the drawings, is a clip 
11, provided with a series of openings a, 
adapted to hold a pin 31, which pin in turn 
movably secures a cultivator 12 or 12", one 
being shown as not used, while the one marked 
12 is shown in a working position. These 
cultivators are provided with the operating 
handles 1313', and, further, each has a hook 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2828", as well as a chain 27 27, secured to a 
Spring 24 24', which springs are secured to 
the clip 11, so that the tension of this spring 
may be regulated by adjusting the same 
Within the various loops of these chains. At 
a suitable point the frame-blanks 2 are piv 
oted with the rear-extending holders 22, used 
in pairs, which act as a support in holding 
the cultivators when not in use. Mounted 
upon these holders 22 is a shaft 23, compris 
ing an ordinary wire-reel, used in stretching 
or unwinding wire fencing. 
Secured to the 
frame-bars 22 centrally is a tongue 3, sup 
porting a transverse bar 21, secured to the 
frame by means of the brace-bars 4 4, used 
in sets of two, and which bar 21 further sup 
ports two depending bars 20, to which are se 
cured ordinary singletrees 19, which are used 
in pairs. The singletrees are connected to the 
cultivator by means of a strand 18,extending 
from One singletree to the other and passing . 
over the sheaves 9 9, 14 14, 1515, then up 
Ward and Over the two sheaves 1616, so as to 
form a draft-equalizer. In the drawings but 
one set of these sheaves is shown, though it 
should be understood that two similar sets 
are used. This arrangement comprises my 
invention. By means of the springs 24 24 
the cultivators are held in tension, as it were, 
so that the operator can nicely guide them 
through the earth, his pressure directing the 
depth to which the shares are to sink, while 
the springs aid in promptly withdrawing these 
shares. 
The forward end of the cultivator, by means 
of the block 10, is given lateral adjustment, 
while by means of the clip 11 the forward 
cultivator end is given a vertical adjustment 
by virtue of the openings a, and the pin 31. 
While not in use as a cultivator the pins 31 
can be withdrawn to remove the clip 11 and 
all connected thereto, so as to provide a skele 
ton vehicle or sulky, which could be used as 
a water-carrier in suspending a barrel be 
tween the inverted-U frame, or be used as a 
hose or wire reel cart, the arms 22 22' be 
ing adapted to receive a seat on which the 
operator can rest while the device is used for 
purposes other than a cultivator. 
Now, having thus described my said inven 
tion, what I claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by United States Letters Patent, is 
90. 
95 
OO 
2 
592,818 
O 
1. The combination in a cultivator of an 
inverted-U-shaped hollow frame a tongue ex 
tending centrally from said frame slotted 
stub - axles extending laterally below said 
frame a T-shaped block adjustably held with 
in each of said slotted stub-axles a clip mov 
ably secured to said blocks provided with a 
series of pin-openings a pin within Said open 
ings a cultivator secured to each of said clips 
by means of said pins, said cultivators being 
used in pairs, a spring secured to each of said 
clips a chain secured to each of said cultiva 
tors said springs being used in pairs and 
adapted to removably and adjustably engage 
said chains to hold said cultivator-frames in 
tension all substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
2. The combination in a cultivator of an 
inverted-U-shaped hollow frame a tongue ex 
tending centrally from said frame slotted 
stub - axles extending laterally below said 
"... 
frame a T-shaped block adjustably held with 
in each of said slotted stub-axles a clip mov 
ably secured to said blocks provided with a 
series of pin-openings a pin within said open 25 
ings a cultivator secured to each of said clips 
by means of said pins a spring secured to 
said clip a chain secured to each of said cul 
tivators said springs being used in pairs and 
adapted to removably and adjustably engage 
said chains to hold said cultivators intension 
and the sheaves 9, 14, 15, 16, used in pairs 
and secured to said cultivators and adapted 
to receive the strand 18 provided with the 
singletrees 19 all substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof. I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
35 
JAMES C. NELSON. 
Witnesses: 
C. L. THOMAS, 
W. A. WEBSTER, 
- 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US592918.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 592,918, 
Patented Nov. 2, 1897. 
M. E. RICE, 
SAD IRON ATTACHMENT FOR PRESSING SEAMS, 
21 
72 
77 
 
THE Norris Perers co. PHoTo-LITHo, wash NGTON, d, C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MAR GARET ELIZABETH RICE, OF HILLS BOROUGH, TEXAS. 
SAD-RON ATTACHMENT FOR PRESSING SEAMS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 592,918, dated November 2, 1897. 
Application filed December 16, 1896, Serial No. 615,866. (No model.) 
O 
To all whoa, it inval/ concern: 
Beit known that I, MARGARET, ELIZABETH 
RICE, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Hillsborough, in the county of Hill and 
State of Texas, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Sad-Iron Attach 
ments for Pressing Seams, of which the fol 
lowing is a full and complete specification, 
Such as Will enable those skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to sad-iron attach 
ments; and the object thereof is to provide a 
device of this class which is adapted to be 
connected with an ordinary sad-iron, and 
which is designed for use in opening or spread 
ing and for dampening seams preparatory to 
ironing or pressing the same, the opening or 
spreading of the seams and the dampening 
and ironing or pressing thereof being all per 
formed at a single operation. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the foll 
lowing specification, of which the accompany 
ing drawings form a part, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of a sad-iron pro 
vided with my improved attachment, the at 
tachment being partly shown in section; Fig. 
2, a plan view of the device as shown in Fig. 
1, and Fig. 3 a bottom perspective view of a 
part of the attachment. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication, the same parts of my improvement 
are designated by the same numerals of ref 
erence throughout the several views, and in 
said drawings I have shown at 5 an ordi 
nary sad-iron, which is provided with the 
usual handle 6, and in the practice of my in 
vention I provide an attachment which com 
prises a yoke-shaped cap or cover 7, which is 
adapted to inclose or to be mounted on the 
forward end of the sad-iron 5, as clearly shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2, and said yoke-shaped at 
tachment 7 is pointed at its forward end and 
provided with a projecting plate or arm 8, 
which supports and is rigidly secured to a 
suitable receptacle 9, which is shown in ver 
tical section in Fig. 1 and in dotted lines in 
Fig. 2, and projecting forwardly of the base 
of the receptacle 9 is a plate or arm 10, which 
is shown in full lines in Fig. 1 and in dotted 
lines in Fig. 2, and said plate or arm 10 is 
adapted to enter a corresponding hole or 
opening 11 formed in a triangular block or 
head 12. 
The block or head 12 is similar in form to 
a sad-iron and is provided on its under side 
with a longitudinal rib 13, which is triangu 
lar in form in cross-section and which is 
adapted to enter the seam, the lower edge of 
the rib being in line with the bottom of the 
iron 5, and secured to the sides of the yoke 
shaped attachment 7 are arms 14, which pro 
ject forward and are connected with and rig 
idly secured to the sides of the receptacle 9, 
at the bottom thereof, and which serve to 
form additional supports for said receptacle. 
The receptacle 9 is open at the bottom and 
top and is filled with sponge or other absorb 
ing material, as shown at 15, and mounted 
thereon is a vessel 16, which is preferably 
conical in form and the apex of which is di 
| rected downwardly and is adapted to enter 
the top of the receptacle 9, and said vessel 
16 is provided with a perforated bottom 17 
and is connected with the receptacle 9 by 
side loops 18. 
The vessel 16 is provided at its top with a 
neck, which is closed by a removable cap or 
cover 19 in the usual manner, and said ves 
sel is adapted to be filled or partially filled 
with water, and the perforations in the bot 
tom 17 thereof are very small and designed 
to allow of the slow but gradual flow of the 
Water therethrough into the sponge or other 
absorbing material 15. 
The vessel 16 is also 
provided with curved side arms 20, which are 
connected there with in the manner of an or 
dinary bail, and said side arms are in prac 
tice carried backwardly in the direction of 
the handle 6 of the sad-iron and are connect 
ed by a cross-head 21, which is oblong in 
form and semicircular in cross-section and 
adapted to fit the under side of the handle 6 
of the sad-iron, and the cross-head 21 is pro 
vided at its opposite sides with outwardly 
directed flanges 22, and I also provide a 
spring-clamp 23, which is adapted to be placed 
over and crosswise of the handle 6 of the sad 
iron and to engage with the flanges 22 of the . 
cross-head 21 of the arms 20, and thus secure 
said cross-head to the handle 6 of the sad 
iron, and in practice one of the said arms 20 
is passed through the said handle, and the 
25. 
35 
4C) 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
592,918 
ends of both arms 20 are then attached to 
the vessel 16, as will be readily understood. 
The operation of the device will be readily 
understood from the foregoing description 
when taken in connection with the accom 
panying drawings and the following state 
ment thereof. The attachment is connected 
with the sad-iron as described, and as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 2, and the said sad-iron is em 
ployed in the usual manner, and in the oper 
ation thereof the water in the vessel 16 is 
gradually fed through the perforated bottom 
of said vessel into the sponge or other ab 
sorbing material in the receptacle 9, and the 
head or block 12, when connected with the 
arm or plate 10, as shown in the drawings and 
as herein described, serves in the operation 
of the device to separate the parts of the 
seam, as will be readily understood, and said 
separate parts or sides of the seam are mois 
tened by the sponge or other absorbing mate 
rial in the receptacle 9, which presses there 
on, and the seam is ironed or pressed in the 
usual manner by the sad-iron. 
My invention is not limited to the means 
herein described for connecting the vessel 16 
with the receptacle 9, and any desired means 
may be employed for securing the attachment 
to the sad-iron, and it will therefore be ap 
parent that various changes in and modifica 
tions of the construction herein described 
may be made without departing from the 
spirit of my invention or sacrificing its ad 
Vantages. 
IIaving fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. An attachment for sad-irons comprising 
a yolke-shaped device which is adapted to be 
connected with the iron, said yoke-shaped de 
vice being pointed at its forward end and 
provided with a forwardly-directed support, 
a receptacle connected with said support and 
open at its lower end, and a triangular block 
or head connected with said receptacle, in 
front thereof, and in line with the bottom of 
the iron, said receptacle being provided with 
a sponge, and with means for feeding Water 
thereinto, substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
2. An attachment for sad-irons comprising 
a yoke-shaped device which is adapted to be 
connected with the iron, said yoke-shaped de 
vice being pointed at its forward end and 
provided with a forwardly-directed support, 
a receptacle connected with said support, and 
open at its lower end, and a triangular block 
or head connected with said receptacle, in 
front thereof, and in line with the bottom of 
the iron, said receptacle being provided with 
a sponge, and with means for feeding water 
thereinto, consisting of a vessel connected 
with the top thereof, and provided with a per 
forated bottom, substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. An attachment for sad-irons comprising 
a yoke-shaped device which is adapted to be 
connected with the iron, said yoke-shaped de 
vice being pointed at its forward end and 
provided with a forwardly-directed support, 
a receptacle connected with said support and 
open at its lower end, and a triangular block 
or head connected with said receptacle, in 
front thereof, and in line with the bottom of 
the iron, said receptacle being provided with 
a sponge, and with means for feeding water 
thereinto, consisting of a vessel connected 
with the top thereof, and provided with a per 
forated bottom, said vessel being also pro 
vided with a bail which is adapted to be se 
cured to the handle of the sadl-iron, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 7th day. 
of December, 1896. 
Witnesses: 
MARGARET ELIZABETI RICE. 
ALINE EVANS RICE, 
R. M. WAUGHAN. 
75 
O 
2 O 
25 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593018.txt	(No Model. 
W. H., HUGHES, Jr. 
UMBRELLA OR FLAG. HOLDER FOR BICYCLES, 
No. 593, Ol 8, 
Patented Nov. 2, 1897, 
   
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
IWVEWTOB, 
27, 3- 22 
7%.e4a2.64. 
NORRrs PErers co, PHoto-Lirio, wastincton, D. : 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIA M H. HU GHES, J R., OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
UMBRELA OR FLAG HOLDER FOR BICYCLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 593,018, dated November 2, 1897. 
Application filed November 23, 1896, Serial No. 613,216, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. HUGHES, 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, residing 
at New York, in the county of New York and 
State of New York, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Bicycle At 
tachments; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to bicycle attach 
ments; and it has for its object to provide a 
simple, cheap, and convenient socket-piece 
which is adjustable to the handle or other 
part of the frame of an ordinary safety-bicy 
cle or other foot-propelled vehicle for the pur 
pose of supporting and firmly holding the 
staff of an umbrella, flag, or similar article. 
The invention consists in certain novel fea 
tures and details of construction, as herein 
after fully described, illustrated in the draw 
ings, and pointed out in the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of the improved attach 
ment,showing the same applied to the handle 
bar of a bicycle. Fig. 2 is a detail perspec 
tive view of the socket-piece proper with its 
rigidly-attached bolt. Fig. 3 is a similar view 
of the flexible strip which embraces the han 
dle-bar or frame of the machine. Fig. 4 is a 
detail section taken through the device. Fig. 
5 is a front elevation of the flexible strip. 
Similar numerals designate corresponding 
parts in the several figures of the drawings. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates a 
tubular socket-piece, preferably of cylindrical 
form and closed at one end, the other end 
open to receive the lower end of the staff 2 of 
an umbrella, flag, or similar article. The 
socket-piece 1 is provided about centrally 
with a laterally-projecting bolt 3, the end of 
which is threaded to receive a thumb-nut 4. 
5 designates a thin flexible strip formed, 
preferably, from a single piece of metal, the 
same being fashioned at its central portion 
into a loop 6, which is cut out, as indicated 
at 7, to enable the strip to be bent more easily 
around the handle-bar, and said loop is pref 
erably lined with felt, rubber, or other soft 
material to prevent scratching the enamel or 
other finish of the machine. The endportions 
of the strip 5 are reinforced by means of 
3O 
35 
45 
 
55 
plates or ears 9, the same being perforated in 
transverse alinement to receive the bolt 3 of 
the socket-piece. Between said ears is inter 
posed a spring 10, which preferably consists 
of a block of rubber having an opening there 
through for the passage of the bolt 3. As the 
thumb-nut 4 is tightened for binding the strip 
5 around the handle-bar or other frame-bar 
of the machine this rubber block will com 
press sufficiently to allow of the strip being 
tightened. By loosening the thumb-nut the 
device as a whole may be adjusted to any de 
sired angle for imparting a corresponding in 
clination to the staff of the umbrella or flag. 
The bolt 3 is provided adjacent to its junc 
tion with the socket-piece 1 with an enlarged 
square shoulder 11, and the inner ear 9 is 
provided with a square opening 12, adapted 
to fit said shoulder snugly and prevent the 
strip 5 from turning around the bolt 3 as an 
axis. The opening 12 is also notched, as in 
dicated at 13, to receive the corners of the 
shoulder portion 11 of the bolt, whereby the 
socket-piece 1 may be adjusted to an angle 
with relation to the strip 5 in order to tilt the 
staff of the umbrella or flag to one side or the 
other, as may be found desirable. 
The device is extremely simple and eco 
nomical in manufacture and will be found of 
great convenience in practice. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
The herein-described attachment, compris 
ing a tubular socket-piece, a bolt projecting 
laterally therefrom and rigid thereon, said 
bolt being provided at its junction with the 
socket-piece with flat-sided enlargements, a 
flexible strip having its central portion looped 
to form a contractible loop adapted to em 
brace one of the bars of a bicycle and having 
its end portions reinforced and provided with 
alined openings for the passage of Said bolt 
one of said openings being flat-sided to re 
ceive said enlargement, and a thumb-nut on 
said bolt, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM. H. HUGHES, JR. 
E. B. DUNNE, 
WM. C. RICKARDs, Jr. 
75 
85 
95 
do 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593118.txt	(No Model.) 
No, 593, 118, 
 
F. R. , C. PITZLER. 
WASHING MACHINE, 
Patented Nov, 2, 1897. 
 
| 
OEZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZzzzzzzzzzzzz) 
------?No. 
qqqqqLLqLqLqLLqLLLqqLqLqLLiqiiqLiLqqLqLqLq 
sS 
A 7TOAMEYS, 
NORRS 
Perers co. PHoTo-LTHO. washingtoN, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRED R. C. PITZLER, OF LESTER PRAIRIE, MINNESOTA. 
WASHING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,118, dated November 2, 1897. 
Application filed June 8, 1897, Serial No. 639,241, (No model.) 
55 
To all, Zuhon, it may concern: . 
Beit known that I, FRED R. C. PITZLER, of 
Lester Prairie, in the county of McLeod and 
State of Minnesota, have invented a new and 
Improved Washing-Machine, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
that class of Washing-machines in which the 
casing forming the clothes-chamber may be 
placed with its axis vertical when the articles 
to be Washed are inserted or removed and 
may then be turned so as to have its axis hori 
Zontal while it is in use, and has for its object 
the production of a new and improved device 
of this character, whose novel arrangement 
and construction of parts will now be de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
appended claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of the ma 
chine, showing in dotted lines the filling po 
sition of the cylinder. Fig. 2 is a cross-section 
of the cylinder, showing a portion of the end 
partition which separates the clothes-receiv 
ing chamber from the chamber containing the 
gear-wheels as broken away. Fig. 3 
is a 
longitudinal section through the cylinder. 
Fig. 4 is a detail section through the shaft or 
central portion of the cylinder. Fig. 5 is a 
detail cross-section of the cylinder-shaft, 
showing the beaters attached thereto; and 
Figs. 6 and 7 are respectively a side and an 
end elevation of the cylinder carrying the 
beaters so arranged that it may be revolved 
in either direction. 
A framework A, composed of bars joined 
together in such manner as to form a sub 
stantial support for the machine, is provided 
and has pivoted therein a cross-bar A', which 
at its center has a vertical bar A, joined at 
its outer end to a cross-bar A, the latter be 
ing parallel with the pivoted bar A'. 
pivots C, 
whereby theframe composed of the bars A, A, 
and A may be swung down to the horizontal 
position, as shown by dotted lines in Fig. 1. 
The upper ends of the vertical posts of the 
main frame are notched to receive the ends 
The bar A' is hinged upon the 
? 
of the bar A* when the same is swung to the 
vertical position. This limits the swing of 
said bar in that direction. 
To the ends of the bar A* are pivoted posts 
A, which maintain a vertical position when 
the bar A* is swung down t the position 
shown in dotted lines. These posts support 
the bar A* and the cylinder B. 
The shaft D is fixed to the bar A and does 
not turn. The cylinder B is mounted to ro 
tate upon the sleeve E, which in turn is free 
to rotate upon the shaft. This cylinder is 
divided into two sections, the smaller one 
B' being next to the bar A. This section B8 
contains the gear-wheels by which the mech 
anism of the Washing-machine is operated. 
The partition B' between these two cham 
bers should be mde water-tight to prevent 
water passing from the larger or clothes-re 
ceiving chamber to the smaller chamber B. 
The larger chamber is provided upon its in 
ner periphery with a series of longitudinal 
ribs b, and the heads BB of the cylinder are 
also provided with radial ribs b. The head 
at the end opposite the chamber B'is provided 
with a filling-opening b', through which the 
clothes are inserted and removed, and this 
opening is provided with a suitable door by 
which it may be closed and made substantially 
water-tight. The head B is also provided 
with a knob or handle b, by means of which 
the cylinder may be turned. 
Upon the inner periphery of the cylinder, 
within the chamber B, is placed an internal 
toothed spur - gear C. Mounted upon the 
shaft D within the said chamber is an arm D', 
which at its outer end carries a spur-gear C', 
meshing with the gear C, and fixed to the end 
of the sleeve Eis a spur-gear C, which meshes 
with the gear C. 
It is evident from the proportion of the 
parts that if the cylinder B be turned upon 
its axis the sleeve E will be rotated more rap 
idly than the cylinder and in an opposite di 
rection. 
The sleeve Eisprovided with two longitudi 
nal flanges F, located opposite each other and 
to which are attached beaters consisting of 
bars G, which are fixed upon chains g, which 
in turn are attached to the flanges F by means 
of apertures.ftherein. The outer ends of the 
75 
9o 
95 
O 
25 
3. 5 
45 
So 
2 
593,118 
chains g are free. The bars may be strung 
upon ally flexible connector as well 
as upon 
a chain. 
As the sleeve Erotates the beaters G will 
be revolved and thrown outward by centrifu 
gal force, striking against the clothes which 
are held against the inner periphery of the 
cylinder B. As a consequence the clothes 
will receive a rapid pounding and rubbing, 
which will quickly cleanse theim of all dirt. 
When the machine is being filled with 
clothes or Water, the cylinder Bis swung down 
to a horizontal position. After being filled 
it is swung to the upper position, (shown by 
full lines in Fig.1) in which the axis of the 
cylinder is horizontal. The cylinder is then 
rotated upon this axis, which operation rap 
idly cleanses the clothes. 
The construction shown in Figs: 2, 3, 4, and 
5 is one in which the device is intended to be 
rotated in one direction only, while Figs. 6 
and 7 show a modification of the sleeve E and 
the attachment of the beaters thereto, which 
adapt it to be rotated in either direction. 
This construction is exactly the same as that 
heretofore described, except that the longi- : 
tudinal flanges F have been removed from 
the sleeve Ei and the beaters G attached di 
irectly to the said sleeve. 
It is of course to be understood that in 
Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7 the beaters are not shown 
in full length, but have been curtailed. They 
are shown in full length in Fig. 2. . 
. . 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patentes 
1. In a Washing-machine, aframework hav 
ing uprights or posts, a normally vertical sec 
tion formed of two cross-bars and a central 
bar connecting said cross-bars, said section 
. 
. 
. 
. 
 
? ?? 
35 
55 
having one of said bars pivotally mounted 
between said posts, whereby it may be swung 
down to a horizontal position, legs pivotally 
attached to said section and by which it may 
be supported in such horizontal position, said 
legs folding up against said posts or uprights 
when the said section is vertically placed, a 
shaft, attached to said central bar and run. 
out at right angles thereto, and a clothes 
holding washing-chamber mounted to rotate 
upon said shaft, as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
2. A washing-machine, comprising a cylin 
der divided into two water-tight sections, one 
of which forms the Washing-chamber and is 
provided with ribs upon its inner periphery 
and ribs upon its heads and radiating from 
the center thereof, a shaft upon which said 
cylinder is mounted to revolve, said shaft be 
ing capable of being swung to both a hori 
zontal and a vertical position, and gearing 
in the other section, as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
3.  washing-machine, comprising a cylin 
der divided between its heads into two water 
tight sections, one of which forms the wash 
ing-chamber, a shaft upon which said cylin 
der is ounted to revolve, a sleeve surround 
ing said shaft and provided with flexible 
beaters, a handle attached to the outer head 
of said cylindeir, afid gearing in the other sec 
tion of said cylinder and by which the sleeve 
is rotated in an opposite direction from said 
cylinder when the latter is turned by means 
of said handle, 
| fofth. 
----- - - 
Witnesses: 
FRED R. C. PITZLER. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
A. SCHMID, 
CHAS. SCHWARZKOPF. 
as and for the purpose set 5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593218.txt	(No Model.) 
C. HOLLY, 
LOOPING MACHINE. 
10 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 593,218, 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897. 
c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
iiiiiiiiiii II 
s 
 
-Z72 evezafor 
(No Model.) 
C. HOLLY. 
LOOPING MACHINE 
10 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
re norras pertrs to. PKoTo-LuT'Ho, wASH;1 saron, D. C. 
(No Model.). 
No. 593,218, 
C. HOLLY. 
LOOPING MACHINE, 
10 sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897. 
 
HE CRits petes ce. Rotte 
WASINos. f. c 
(No Model.) 
C. HOLLY. 
LOOPING MACHINE, 
0 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
No. 593,218, 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897. 
 
 
???? 
 
 
 
 
 
LL 
L0 LLLL eeSLLeLLLS LLLLSaLLLLSSSLLLS 
 
C. HOLLY. 
LOOPING MACHINE, 
10 Sheets 
Sheet 6. 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897. 
(No Model.) 
No. 593,218, 
 
Ho. Washi 
(No Model.) 
No. 593,218, 
C. HOLLY. 
i L00PING MACHINE. 
10 sheets-Sheet 7. 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897. 
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
C. HOLLY 
LOOPING MACHINE. 
10 Sheets 
Sheet, 8. 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897. 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 593,218, 
S 
2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
(No Model.) 
C. HOLLY. 
LOOPING MACHINE, 
10 Sheets-Sheet 9. 
No. 593,218, 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897, 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ZZZZZZ 
A 
W 
 
? ? E ? 
 
-7orreys, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
CARLOS HOLLY, OF LOCKPORT, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO JOSEPH A. 
WARD AND JOHN MCILEAN, OF SAME PLACE. 
LO O P N G -- VA C H I N E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 593,218, dated November 9, 1897. 
Application filed January 11, 1897, Serial No. 618,850, (No model.) 
- 
2O ?ZZ ?phoon, i? ??? ???????*?: 
Beit known that, CARLOS HOLLY, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Lockport, in 
the county of Niagara and State of New York, 
5 have invented new and useful Improvements 
in Looping-Machines, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to a machine for at 
taching hangers or loops of string or twine to 
IO books, pamphlets, or other blanks, and has 
the object to produce an automatic machine 
for this purpose whereby the blanks are fed 
successively from a pile or stack and are per 
forated, threaded, and knotted and then 
I5 gathered in a pile or stack in a reliable and 
expeditious manner. 
In the looping-machine which forms the 
Subject of this application the pamphlets or 
other blanks are placed side by side, with one 
2O corner downward, in an angular feed-trough 
and are then separated successively at the 
front end of the pile or stack and fed against 
the side of a vertical drum which rotates in 
termittently about a vertical axis and which 
25 is provided on its cylindrical face with jaws 
by which the blanks are clamped to the drum. 
The latter presents the pamphlets, during its 
rotation, successively to mechanisms whereby 
each blank is perforated and whereby the 
twine is drawn through the perforation,looped, 
tied, and cut off. The looped blanks are dis 
charged one after the other from the drum 
and stacked in a receiving-trough, from which 
they are removed from time to time. 
In the accompanying drawings, consisting 
of ten sheets, Figure 1 is a front elevation of 
iny improved pamphlet looping-machine, 
partly in Section. Fig. 2 is a transverse sec 
tion thereof in line 22, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a 
fragmentary longitudinal sectional elevation, 
on an enlarged scale, in line 33, Fig. 6. Fig. 
4 is a fragmentary longitudinal sectional elle 
Vation, on an enlarged scale, in line 4 4, Fig. 
16. Fig. 5 is a horizontal section in line 55, 
Fig. 6 is a top plan view of the ma 
chine, partly in section. Fig. 7 is a horizontal 
section in line 77, Fig. 8. Fig. 8is a rear elle 
vation of the machine. Fig. 9 is a fragmentary 
sectional view, on an enlarged scale, showing 
5o the operation of the packer and detent on the 
blanks. Fig.10isafragmentary longitudinal 
45 Fig. 4. 
35. 
 
section, on an enlarged scale, showing the 
means for driving the blank-supportingshafts 
on one side of the feed-trough and one of the 
rear Wrapping-screws. Fig. 11 is an eleva- 55 
tion of the front end of the machine. Fig. 12 
is an elevation of the rear end of the machine, 
partly in section. Figs. 13, 14, and 15 are trans 
verse sections in lines 1313, 1414, and 1515, 
Fig. 1, respectively. Figs. 16, 17, 18, 19, and 6o 
20 are transverse sections in lines 1616, 1717, 
1818, 1919, and 20 20, Fig. 6, respectively. 
Fig. 21 is a fragmentary longitudinal section, 
on an enlarged scale, in line 21 21, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 22is a vertical longitudinal sectional elle- 65 
Vation, on an enlargedScale, of the blank-con 
veyer and connecting parts, in line 2222, Fig. 
6. Figs. 23, 24, and 25 are fragmentary rear 
elevations of the conveyer-screw and adjacent 
parts, showing different positions of the parts. 7o 
Figs. 26, 27, 2S, and 29 are vertical cross-sec 
tions in lines 26 26, 27 27, 28 28, and 2929, 
Figs. 22, 23, 24, and 25, respectively. Fig. 
30 is a fragmentary horizontal section, on an 
enlarged scale, in line 3030, Fig. 24. Fig. 31 75 
is a vertical section, on an enlarged scale, in 
line 31 31, Fig. 22. Fig. 32 is a longitudinal 
section, on an enlarged scale, in line 3232, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 33 is a perspective view show 
ing the manner in which the rotary blades 8o 
separate the blanks from the pile. Fig. 34 is 
a transverse section, on an enlarged scale, in 
line 3434, Fig. 6. Figs. 35, 36, 37, and 38 are 
horizontal sections in lines 3535, 3636, 3737, 
and 3838, Fig. 34, respectively. Fig. 39 is a top 85 
plan view, on an enlarged scale, of the carrier 
drum and adjacent parts. Fig. 40 is a frag 
mentary vertical Section, on an enlargedScale, 
in line 40 40, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 41 is a fragmen 
tary front view, on an enlarged scale, of the 9o 
threading device. Fig. 42 is a fragmentary 
horizontal section, on an enlarged scale, in 
line 42 42, Fig. 34. Fig. 43 is a similar view 
showing the parts in a different position. 
Figs. 44, 45, and 46 are fragmentary vertical 95 
sections in lines 44 44, 45 45, and 46 46, Fig. 
42, respectively. Fig. 47 is a fragmentary 
vertical section in line 47 47, Fig. 44. Fig. 
48 is an inside elevation of the twine-feeding 
device on the same scale as Fig. 44. 
is a detached view of one of the twine-clear 
ing hooks or fingers. Fig. 50 is a horizontal 
Fig. 49 Ioo 
2 
593,218 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
section in line 50 50, Fig. 45. Figs. 51 and 
52 are fragmentary sectional views, on an en 
larged scale, showing two different longitu 
dinal positions of the threading hook or 
needle. Figs. 53 and 54 are end views of the 
threading hook or needle, showing the same 
in different rotary positions. Fig. 55 is a 
fragmentary cross-section, on an enlarged 
scale, in line 55 55, Fig. 42. Fig. 56 is a frag 
mentary vertical section in line 5656, Fig. 
55. Figs. 57 and 58 are horizontal sections, 
on an enlarged scale, inlines 57 57 and 5858, 
Fig. 55, respectively. 
Figs. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 
64, 65, and 66 are fragmentary views show 
ing different positions of the knotter in the 
operation of tying a knot in the loop or 
hanger. Fig. 67 is a fragmentary vertical 
section, on an enlarged Scale, in line 67 67, 
Figs. 36 and 37, showing the mechanism for 
operating the blank-holding clamp of the 
carrier-drum. Fig. 68 is a fragmentary trans 
verse section, on an enlarged scale, in line 
68 68, Fig. 6, showing the blank-transferring 
mechanism from the inner side. Figs. 69 and 
70 are longitudinal sections in lines 6969 and 
7070, Fig. 68, respectively. Fig. 71 is a top 
view of the blank-transferring mechanism. 
Fig. 72 is a transverse section in line 7272, 
Fig. 68. 
Like letters of reference refer to like parts 
in the several figures. 
The main frame of the machine consists, 
essentially, of an open bed A, provided with 
legs. a, and three mainstandards A' A A, se 
cured, respectively, to the front, intermediate, 
and rear portions of the bed. 
b b" bb b4 bb, Figs. 1, 6, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, 
16, 17, 18, and 33, represent longitudinal sup 
porting shafts or rods which are arranged in 
two downwardly-converging sets to form a V 
shaped feed trough or receptacle. The palm 
phlets, which I will call blanks' for the sake. 
of brevity, are placed upside down and side 
by side in the trough with their backs or 
folded ends against the set of shafts b b'll, 
which form the oblique front side of the feed 
trough, and with their upper ends against the 
set of shafts bb b, which form the oblique. 
rear side of the feed-trough. 
These shafts: 
are journaled in bearings formed in the up 
per V-shaped portions of the standards A' A' 
A', and are rotated and form rolling support 
ing-surfaces for the blanks, which enable the 
latter to be readily moved lengthwise through 
the trough. 
B, Figs. 1, 6, 8, 17, and 21, represents a fol 
lower which bears against the back of the 
pile or stack of blanks in the feed-trough and 
which is provided on opposite sides with lugs 
b', which project outwardly between the ad 
jacent trough-ShaftS. 
lare horizontal follower-bars bearing with 
their front ends against the lugs of the foll 
lower and Secured with their rear ends to a 
cross-head composed of a V-shaped body b, 
which slides in the trough, and an end board 
b', secured to the rear end of the body. 
These bars are arranged between the feed 
trough shafts and below or outside of the Sup 
porting-surfaces thereof, Figs. 17 and 21, SO 
that these bars will not interfere with the 
blanks in the trough. The Cross-head, fol 
lower-bars, follower, and blanks are con 
stantly pressed forward by any 
suitable 
means, preferably by a weight band a cord 
b18 connecting the weight with the cross-head 
and passing around a roller b, mounted on 
the front standard A', as shown in Fig. 8. 
When the pile of blanks requires replenish 
ing, an additional lot of blanks is placed in 
the trough against the back of the follower 
which is in use and another follower of the 
same construction is placed behind the new 
lot of blanks, after which the follower-bars, 
together with the cross-head, are drawn rear 
wardly and engaged with the lugs of the rear 
follower. The front follower is then removed. 
This follower mechanism permits of easily 
and readily renewing the supply of blanks 
without stopping the machine or disarranging 
any of the blanks which have previously been 
placed in the feed-trough. 
c c' cc cle c5, Figs. 1, 6, 8, 17, 18, and 33, 
represent two sets of rotary separating and 
supporting wings or blades which are secured 
to the front ends of the feed-trough shafts 
and which serve as an abutment against 
which the front of the pile of blanks rests 
and also as separators whereby the foremost 
blanks of the pile are separated from the re 
The blades c c' c c, forming one 
mainder. 
set, are secured, respectively, to the front 
ends of the trough-shafts b b' bl', and form 
an abutment for the backs of the blanks. 
The blades c', c, and c, forming the other 
set, are secured, respectively, to the front 
ends of the trough-shafts b, b, and U" and 
serve as an abutment for the upper in Verted 
ends of the blanks. The blades of both sets 
are arranged in the same transverse vertical 
plane, Fig. 6, and each blade has substan 
tially the form of a semicircular wedge, the 
front or advancing edge thereof being sharp, 
while its rear or trailing end is comparatively 
thick and ends abruptly, as represented in 
Fig. 32. These separating-blades rotate with 
their inner portions upwardly, as indicated by 
the arrows, Fig. 18, and the relative arrange 
ment of the blades on the shafts is such that the 
blades of each set operate upon each blank 
successively and the blades of both sets op 
erate upon each blank alternately. The low 
ermost blade c of the front set first enters be 
tween the lower portions of two blanks and 
passes upwardly between the same, whereby 
the lower portion of the foremost blank of 
the two is moved forwardly and away from 
the next following blank by the wedge action 
of the gradually-thickening body of the blade. 
Before the rear end of the lowermost blade C 
has cleared these blanks the sharp front end 
of the lowermost blade c of the rear set, fol 
lowing behind the thick rear end of the low 
Fermost blade of the front set, enters the gap 
75 
So 
OO 
IO 
II5 
| 25 
 
598,218 
3 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
which has been formed between these blanks Iter-shaft to the crank-shaft d by a driving 
gear-wheel d", secured to the counter-shaft 
and in moving upwardly separates the same 
and provided on its periphery with a segmen 
further. When this blade has nearly cleared 
tal row of gear-teeth dl, Figs. 14 and 15, and 
the rear side of these blanks, the next higher 
a convex face d', adapted to engage, respec 
bladec' of the front set enters the gap in like 
tively, with the teeth d and concave face d' 
manner and extends the separation of the 
of an intermediate mutilated gear-pinion d', 
blanks upwardly. The remaining blades c, 
secured to the crank-shaft d. The pinion is 
c, c, and c' of the two sets then follow each 
held at rest while the convex face of the driv 
other alternately in the order named. Each 
ing-wheel is in engagement with the concave 
of said blades enters the gap between the 
face of the pinion; but when the teeth of the 
blanks as the next lower blade is about to 
latter are engaged by the teeth of the driv 
leave the blanks and then effects a further 
ing-wheel the pinion is turned in the direc 
upward separation of the blanks. When the 
tion of the arrow, Figs. 14 and 15, the num 
uppermost blade has passed between the two 
ber of teeth on the wheel and pinion being 
blanks, the separation between the same is 
so proportioned that the pinion makes one 
completed from the lower ends to the upper 
rotation during each rotation of the driving 
ends of the same. The relative timing of the 
wheel. The teeth of the driving-wheel are 
separating-blades is such that while the up 
compelled to engage gradually at the proper 
per blades are passing between the first and 
time with the teeth of the pinion by a shoul 
second blank of the pile the intermediate 
der d, formed on the driving gear-wheeland 
separating-blades are passing between the 
engaging with an arm d" on the pinion. 
second and third blanks and lowermost blades 
In order to enable the lowermost separating 
are separating the third and fourth blanks, so 
blade c to pass positively and reliably be 
that when the machine is in full operation 
tween the lower portions of two contiguous 
three blanks are being separated simultane 
blanks and for the purpose of aiding the blades 
ously from the pile in different stages of com 
in feeding off the blanks a preliminary sepa 
pleteness. When all of the separating-blades 
rating and feeding device is provided, which 
have made one rotation, the combined effect 
is equal to separating one blank completely 
is constructed as follows: 
E, Figs. 1, 6, 8, 17, 18, 22 to 30, represents a 
from the pile, after which the movement of 
main feeding screw or conveyer whereby the 
the blades is arrested until the foremost 
lower portions of the partially - separated 
blank has been carried away by mechanism 
blanks in the feed-trough are carried for 
her'einafte}? described. This interImittent ro 
wardly from the unseparated portion of the 
tary movement of the separating-blades is 
pile to the mechanism which carries the blanks 
preferably effected as follows: 
to the perforating, threading, and tying mech 
d, Figs. 6, 8, and 10, represents horizontal 
anisms. This conveyer is arranged length 
spindles which are journaled in the rear 
wise below the delivery end of the feed-trough 
standard A, and which are provided with 
gear-pinions d', meshing with gear-pinions d' 
and is mounted on the front end of a longi 
tudinal shafte, which is journaled in bearings 
on the adjacent rear feed-trough shafts b, l, 
in the adjacent stationary parts of the ma 
and l). 
chine, so as to be capable of both a rotary and 
d', Figs. 6, S, 10, and 12, is a crank arranged 
a longitudinally-reciprocating movement. 
on the rear end-of one of the spindles, and d" 
The feed-conveyer consists, preferably, of 
are similar cranks arranged on the rear ends 
two convolutions, so as to present, three clamp 
of the front feed-trough shafts b b' b b. 
ing jaws or faces e'e'e', which are arranged 
d is an intermittently-rotating crank-shaft 
in a longitudinal row along the upper side of 
which is journaled in the rear main standard 
the conveyer, and are formed, respectively, by 
A and a short standard A', arranged on the 
bed, and which is provided on its rear end with 
the rear side of the first convolution of the 
conveyer, the front side of the first convolu 
al ???hk d' of the same length as the cranks 
tion and the front side of the second convo 
di Cl4. 
lution, as shown in Figs. 22, 23, 24, 25, and 30. 
disabifurcated yoke or rod which connects 
The rear end of the conveyer is preferably 
the actuating-crank d with the two sets of 
driven cranks of the shafts and whereby these 
made of the same form as the intermediate 
separator - blades and is arranged parallel 
parts are caused to rotate intermittently in 
there with, so that the rear jaw e' is arranged 
liaison. 
at right angles to the axis of the conveyer, 
D, Figs. 1, 2, 6, 8, 13, and 14, is the continu 
ously-rotating main driving-shaft, which is 
while the intermediate and front jaws arear 
ranged at an angle thereto. 
journaled lengthwise underneath the feed 
F represents a separating and clamping fin 
trough in bearings arranged on the standards, 
ger whereby the foremost blankis separated 
and ID' is a counter-shaft, journaled in bear 
at its lower corner from the pile and pressed 
ings on the rear standard A8 and the short 
against the rear jaw e' of the conveyer, Figs. 
standard A. The counter-shaft is driven 
22 to 30. This finger is arranged below the 
from the main shaft at the same speed as the 
latter by gear-wheels did, secured, respec 
front portion of the pile and has its end 
curved to form a bent jaw or hook.f. This 
tively, to these shafts. An intermittent ro 
tary movement is transmitted from the coun- finger is secured to the front portion of a 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
IO5 
II5 
I 25 
 
4 
593,218 
I. ? 
, 2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
shaft f, which is journaled lengthwise un 
der the feed-trough in bearings on the adja 
cent stationary parts of the machine, so as to 
be capable of both a rocking and a longitudi 
nal reciprocating movement. 
f* f represent two clamping-jaws which 
are arranged to face the front sides of the 
first and second convolutions of the conveyer 
screw, and whereby the blanks are succes 
sively held against the jaws ee of the con 
veyer-screw. These clamping-jaws are moved 
toward and from the conveyer-jaws by a slid 
ing rod f', which is arranged in the tubular 
front portion of the conveyer-shaft. The 
clamping-jaws ff project laterally through 
a longitudinal slot f in the tubular shaft. 
The clamping-jaws. f* f are arranged at the 
same angle as the convolutions of the con 
Veyer, against, which they press the blanks, 
and are preferably formed by cutting them 
out of the conveyer, as represented in Figs. 
22, 27, and 30. 
Preparatory to separating the lower corner 
pile the conveyer-shaft 
of a blank from the 
is moved rearwardly to its fullest extent, 
whereby the rear jaw e' of the conveyer is 
pressed against the foremost blank of the pile 
and the latter is compacted at the lower cor 
ner. The finger-shaft has been shifted to its 
most real Ward position, in which the sepa 
rating-finger stands with its hook opposite 
the lower portion of the foremost blank, as 
represented in Figs, 22 and 26. While the 
lower corner of the pile is held in this com 
pressed condition by the rear jaw e' of the 
screw conveyer, the separating - finger is 
turned so as to enter between the leaves of 
the foremost blank near the back thereof, 
and is then moved forward toward the rear 
jaw of the conveyer, whereby the part of the 
blank at the lower corner thereof is clamped 
between the rear jaw of the screw conveyer 
and the finger, as represented in Fig. 23. By 
thus pressing the rear jaw of the screw con 
veyer against the lower corner of the pile 
the location of the first blank is always the 
same, and the place where the finger engages 
between the leaves of the blank is definitely 
determined, regardless of the thickness of 
the blanks, whereby the missing of a blank 
is positively avoided. After the blank has 
been clamped between the conveyer and the 
finger the shafts carrying these parts are 
moved forwardly together to the end of their 
forward stroke, whereby the lower corner of 
the foremost blank is separated from the suc 
ceeding blank and a gap is formed between 
the same. As Soon as this gap has been 
formed the lowermost Separating-blade C en 
ters the same and starts the upward separa 
ration of these blanks at the lower corner of 
the same, which operation is continued up 
wardly, as hereinbefore described. 
When the separating-blades have finished 
separating the lower portion of the foremost 
blank from the second blank, the separating 
fingeris withdrawn from the first blank. The 
conveyer shaft and screw now move back 
ward, and after the initial portion of this lon 
gitudinal movement the screw makes one com 
plete turn in the direction of the arrow, Figs. 
26 to 29, whereby the rear end of the conveyer 
passes behind the first blank, after which the 
conveyer stops turning and is pressed against 
the front side of the lower corner of the Sec 
ond blank at the end of its backward move 
ment preparatory to engaging the same by 
the separating-finger, which latter has in the 
meantime also been moved back Wardly to the 
place where it is inserted into the blanks. 
While the separating-finger is holding the 
second blank against the rear jaw of the con 
veyer during the next forward movement of 
the finger-shaft the first blank is clamped 
against the intermediate javy e of the con 
veyer by the jaw f, whereby the first and 
second blanks are carried forward simulta 
neously. When the second blank has been 
separated at itslower end from the third blank 
of the pile by the separating-blades, the first 
and second blanks, are released from the in 
termediate and rear clamps and the conveyer 
in the course of its backward movement again 
makes one turn, whereby the first blankiscar 
ried in front of the frontjaw of the conveyer, 
the second blank is carried in front of the in 
termediate jaw of the conveyer, and at the 
end of the backward movement of the con 
veyer its rear jaw bears against the front side 
of the third blank. During the next longi 
tudinal forward movement of the conveyer 
the first blank is clamped between the front 
jawe of the conveyer and the front sliding 
jaw f' and presented to the mechanism which 
carries the blanks to the looping mechanism, 
the second blank is held by the intermediate 
pair of clamping-jaws, and the third blank is 
held between the rear jaw of the conveyer 
and the finger which constitutes the rear 
clamp. When the third blank has been sepa 
rated with its lower portion from the fourth 
blank by the lower separating-blades, the 
three blanks held by the conveyer are released 
by the opening of the clamps, the first blank 
is carried away to the looping mechanism and 
the conveyer while turning during its sub 
sequent backward movement advances the 
second blank to the front clamp, the third 
blank to the intermediate clamp, and then 
bears against the fourth blank. When the 
machine is in full operation, there are always 
three blanks operated upon by the prelimi 
nary separating, clamping, and conveying de 
vices, the separation of each blank operated 
upon being one step in advance of the next 
following and one blank being completely 
separated from the pile during each revolu 
tion of the conveyer-screw. 
The several parts of the preliminary separat 
ing and feeding devices are preferably driven 
as follows: G, Figs. 1, 3, 8, 14, and 15, is a 
multilated gear-pinion mounted loosely On 
the conveyer-shaft between the standards A 
and A', said shaft being free to slide length 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
IC5 
IO 
II5 
I2 ? 
I 25 
 
593,218 
I. ? 
2. ? 
35 
45 
55 
wise in the hub of the pinion, but compelled 
to turn there with by means of a ping on the 
shaft engaging with slots g' in the supporting 
hub or sleeve of the gear-pinion, as repre 
3. This pinion engages with 
sented in Fig. 3. 
the upper portion of the driving-wheel d', 
diametrically opposite the lower mutilated 
gear-pinion d', and is of the same size and 
construction. . During each rotation of the 
driving-wheel d its shoulder d engages 
with the arm d" of the lower gear-pinion d' 
and throws the same into gear, and after the 
teeth of the driving-wheel have cleared the 
lowerpinion the shoulder of the driving-wheel 
engages with the arm g' of the upper pinion 
and throws the latter into gear with the driv 
ing-wheel. This operation is repeated dur 
ing each rotation of the latter and produces 
alternate rotation of the separating-blades 
and the conveyer-screw. 
g is a longitudinal reciprocating cross-head 
which slides with one end on the counter 
shaft and is secured with its opposite end to 
a sleeveg', which slides on the conveyer-shaft. 
The backward movement of the cross-head is 
produced by springs g, Figs. 1, 6, and 8, and 
is limited by the sleeve g, engaging with a 
collar g on the conveyer-shaft, which collar 
in turn engages with the standard A. The 
forward movement of the cross-head is pro 
duced by a rock-leverg, pivotally connecting 
said sleeve with the standard A', and a cam 
g, mounted on the counter-shaft and engag 
ing with a roller on said rock arm, Figs. 1, 3, 
S, and 13. The rear end of the finger-shaft 
f' is journaled in a bearing on the cross-head 
and provided on opposite sides of this bear 
ing with collars or shouldersg', whereby the 
finger-shaft is permitted to turn in this bear 
ing, but compelled to move lengthwise with 
the cross-head. 
g" is a collar or shoulder arranged on the 
conveyer-shaft and separated hy an inter 
vening or dead space from the front end 
of the sleeve of the cross-head when the lat 
ter is in its rearmost position, thereby pro 
ducing a slack connection between the cross 
head and conveyer-shaft, whereby the finger 
shaft is moved forwardly independent of the 
conveyer until the separating-finger has been 
pressed against the rear jaw of the conveyer, 
after which the cross-head sleeve strikes the 
shoulder g of the conveyer-shaft and moves 
the conveyer forward, together with the sep 
arating-finger. The forward rotary move 
ment of the separating -finger for engaging 
the same between the leaves of a blank is 
produced by a camg, arranged on the coun 
ter-shaft and engaging with a roller on the 
end of a rock-arm g, secured to the finger 
shaft, the face of said cam being of sufficient 
width to permit of the necessary longitudinal 
movement of the rock-arm with the finger 
shaft. The backward-turning movement of 
the finger-shaft is produced by a spring g', 
secured with its ends to an arm g on the fin 
 
ger-shaft and a stationary part of the ma 
chine, as shown in Figs. 1 and 18. 
H, Figs. 1, 8, 18, 22, and 31, is an elbow 
lever whereby the sliding clamping-rod in 
the front end of the conveyer-shaft is oper 
ated and which is pivoted on the adjacent 
portion of the frame. This lever is prefer 
ably double its full length and provided in 
the end of its upwardly-projecting arms h. 
with slots h", which receive pins h, project 
ing from opposite sides of a swivel-collar hi, 
Fig. 31. The latter is mounted loosely on the 
front end of the clamping-rod and confined 
by a shoulder h. and screw-nut, h, arranged 
on the rod and bearing, respectively, against 
opposite sides of the collar, whereby the 
clamping-rod is compelled to move back and 
forth with the elbow-lever, but is free to turn 
independent thereof. The elbow-lever is 
turned for moving the clamping-rod back 
wardly for clamping the blanks by a spring 
h, which is connected at one end to the frame 
and with its opposite end to a pull-rodh, con 
nected with the lower horizontal arm h of the 
elbow-lever, Figs. 18 and 22. The position 
of the elbow-lever for opening the front and 
intermediate clamps is controlled by a cam 
h', mounted on the main shaft and engaging 
with a roller or projection h on the pull-rod 
h. While the blank-conveyer is in its rear 
most position, with its rear jaw pressing 
against the foremost blank of the solid pile, 
the clamping-rod and its jaws f' fare held 
in their foremost position by the cam l'. 
When the blank-conveyer begins its forward 
movement, the cam h" releases the elbow-le 
ver and permits the same to be turned by the 
spring h9 for moving the jaws of the clamp 
ing-rod f backwardly against the front and 
intermediate jaws of the conveyer, after which 
the jaws of the clamping-rod are moved for 
wardly again to the end of the forward move 
ment against the pull of the spring h by the 
conveyer, whereby the blanks are firmly held 
by the front and intermediate clamps. Be 
fore the conveyer begins its backward move 
ment the salient, part of the cam h' engages 
with the roller h of the pull-rod and holds 
the clamping-rod fandits jaws against back 
ward movement while the conveyer effects its 
entire backward movement, thereby releas 
ing the blanks from the front and interme 
diate clamps. 
After each blank in the feed-trough has 
been completely separated from the pile the 
blank is delivered to a carrier, which rotates . 
intermittently about a vertical axis and which 
presents the lowermost corner of the blank 
to the devices which attach a hanger or loop 
to the same. This carrier is constructed as 
follows: I, Figs. 1, 6, 8,34, and 55, represents 
a supplemental frame mounted on the front 
portion of the main frame in front of the de 
livery end of the feed-trough and consisting 
of a lower supporting-ring i, a lower support 
ing-plate it, arranged above said ring, an 
75 
95 
OO 
Id 
I 5 
H 2 ? 
25 
6 
593,218 
intermediate i supporting-plate i*, iarranged | supporting-plates, and is provided on its pe 
above the lower supporting-plate, an upper. 
riphery with a suitable number of clamps, 
eight being shown, whereby the blanks are 
. Supporting-plate , arranged above the in 
termediate supporting - plate, and vertical 
successively seized and held on the carrier 
posts or members i, connecting the support 
drum. Each of these clamps consists of a 
stationary outer jaw i and a movable inner 
ing ring and plates with each other and with 
jawi, having a radial movement toward and 
the main frame. 
J, Figs. 34, 35, 36, and 44 represents a cal 
from the stationary jaw. Each of the outer 
jaws is curved substantially concentric with 
rier wheel or drum to which is imparted an 
the drum and is arranged at a sufficient dis 
intermittent horizontal rotary motion in the 
tance from the latter to permit a blank to 
direction of the arrow, Figs. 36 and 42. This 
pass into the space between the outer jaw 
drum is arranged between the lower and in 
termediate supporting-plates of the supple 
and the drum. The front end of the outer 
mental frame with its axis vertically and with 
jaw is free, while its rear end is secured to 
its receiving portion opposite the delivery end 
the drum. 
of the feed-trough. During the forward 
When the blank-conveyer has carried the 
foremost blank in the feed-trough against 
movement of the blank-conveyer the lower 
the drum, the latter rotates one-eighth of a 
portion of the foremost blank is carried 
against the drum and also wrapped around 
turn and carries one of its outer clamping 
the same by a front wrapping-screw i, which 
jaws behind or around the lower portion of 
wraps the advancing portion of the blank 
the foremost blank and then stops, after which 
the blank-conveyer Emoves backwardly and 
around the drum, and two rear Wrapping 
screws if, which wrap the trailing portion of 
disengages, itself from the foremost blank. 
the blank around the drum, as shown in Fig. 
Before the drum begins its next forward move 
mentitsinner clamping-jaw opposite the feed 
39. The front wrapping-screw is mounted on 
trough is pushed out and clamps the fore 
the front end of the trough-shaft b, so as to 
: most blank against the opposing outer jaw, 
turn in a vertical plane therewith, and has 
so that during the subsequent forward move 
preferably the form of a concave conoid, the 
curved side of which is substantially concen 
ment of the drum this blank is carried later 
ally and forwardy away from the pileto the 
trie with the carrier-drum, as represented in 
Figs. 6 and 39. The front end i8 of this co 
extent of one-eighth of a turn of the drum. 
In the meantime the blank-conveyel E has 
noidal screw enters the gap between the first 
carried the next following blank forwardly, 
and second blank in the feed-trough, and in 
turning with the separating-blades gradually 
so that the next following outer clamping 
jaw passes behind the following blank pre 
wraps the advancing end of the blank around 
the drum. The lower rear wrapping-screw i' 
paratory to clamping the same. The lower 
is mounted on the rear end of the feed-trough 
edge of each outer jaw is horizontal, while its 
shaft band engages with the rear portion of 
upper edge rises. from the front end to the 
rear end of the jaw, which gives the jaw a ta 
the blank adjacent to its lower corner and 
pering or pointed form, whereby the same is 
Wraps the same around the drum. The upper 
rear Wrapping-screw engages with the central 
able to enter more freely into the gap behind 
rear portion of the blank and wraps the same 
the first blank. The inclined upper end also 
around the drum. In order to avoid kinking 
aids in separating the first blank from the 
the rear middle portion of the blank while it 
second and carrying the same against the 
is being Wrapped around the drum, the upper 
drum. 
rear Wrapping-Screw is turned in a direction 
Each of the blanksis carried intermittently 
Opposite to that of the lower rear Wrapping 
with its back or folded side foremost fronn 
screw. This is accomplished by a reversely 
the receiving side of the drum one-half way 
rotating shaft f", which carries the upper rear 
round the drum to the delivery side thereof, 
Wrapping-screw at its front end and is pro 
where the clamp is opened and the blank is 
discharged. During this half-rotation of the 
vided at its rear end with a cranki, which is 
drum the blank is successively presented to 
connected with the bifurcated connecting rod 
or yoke d', whereby the feed-trough shafts 
the perforating, threading, and knotting 
are operated. The upper rear screw-shaft f* 
mechanisms. This intermittent rotary move 
is preferably journaled in the feed-trough 
ment of the drum and the closing and open 
ing of its clamps are effected by the following 
shaft b, which latter is made hollow for this 
purpose, as shown in Fig. 10. This manner 
means: K, Figs. 6, 34, 35, and 36, is a verti 
of driving the Wrapping-screws causes the 
cal driving-shaft which is journaled with its 
latter to turn and rest at the same time as the 
central portion in the hollow arbor and with 
separating-blades. 
its upper end in a bearing formed in the upper 
J is a curved guide which is secured to the 
horizontal supporting-plate i. 
The vertical 
upper supporting-plate i and which bears 
driving-shaft is driven from the main shaft 
against the inner side of the blanks opposite 
and at the same speed as the latter by a pair 
the front wrapping-screw i. 
of bevel gear-wheels c' lic, secured, respec 
The carrier-drum is journaled on a hollow 
tively, to the front end of the main shaft and 
arbor or bushing j, Fig. 34, connecting the 
the lower end of the vertical shaft. 
le, Figs. 34 and 35, is a vertical counter 
Central portions of the lower and intermediate 
30 
go 
95 m 
od 
IO5 
O 
II 5 
2 ? 
I 25 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
49 
45 
So 
?? 
 
593,218 
Cs 
20 
2. 5 
shaft which is journaled with its upper and 
lower ends in bearings arranged, respec 
tively, on the upper and intermediate sup 
porting-plates. The lower end of the verti 
cal counter-shaft is provided with a gear 
pinion k', which meshes with a gear-wheel k, 
secured to the upper end of the hub of the 
carrier-drum, the relative size of the pinion 
and gear-wheel being such that one complete 
turn of the pinion produces one-eighth of a 
rotation of the carrier-drum. An intermit 
tent rotary motion is imparted to the carrier 
drum by a horizontal driving-wheel k", Figs. 
6, 7, S, 19, and 34, secured to the upper por 
tion of the vertical driving - shaft and pro 
vided on its periphery with a segmental row 
of teeth k and a plain convex portion lic, 
which are adapted to engage successively 
with the teeth k' and the concave portion ki 
of a mutilated gear-pinion ic, secured to the 
upper portion of the vertical counter-shaft. 
The driving-wheel is provided with a shoulder 
lc', Fig. 6, which is adapted to engage with 
an arm k on the gear-pinion k and start 
the same gradually and in correct register 
with the teeth of the driving-wheel in the 
same manner in which the gear-pinions di 
and G of the crank-shaft d. and conveyer 
shaft e are geared with the driving-wheel d0 
on the horizontal counter-shaft D'. 
The timing of the stop-gearing connecting 
the vertical driving-shaft with the vertical 
counter-shaft is such that during each rota 
tion of the vertical driving-shaft the coun 
ter-shaft makes one rotation, which, however, 
is produced while the driving-shaft makes 
one-quarter of a rotation, the counter-shaft 
then remaining at rest during the remaining 
three-quarters of the rotation of the driving 
shaft, whereby the carrying-drum is turned 
intermittently one-eighth of a rotation dur 
ing each complete turn of the main shaft. 
Each of the inner movable jaws of the drum 
is mounted on the outer end of a radially 
movable carriage l, Figs. 34, 36, 44, and 47, 
which projects through an opening in the rim 
of the carrier-drum and is guided in a way l' 
on the under side of the web of the drum. 
The carriage is preferably bifurcated and is 
yieldingly held in its retracted or inner posi 
tion by a spring l, mounted on the carriage 
and bearing against the inner side of the rim 
of the drum. 
L is a rotary cam-disk whereby the inner 
55 jaws are moved outwardly for clamping the 
blanks and which is journaled on the lowerpor 
tion of the hub of the drum, as represented in 
Figs. 34, 44, and 67. The face of this cam-disk 
engages with rollersion the jaw-carriages and 
is provided with a short outwardly-throwing 
cam portion l, adjacent to the receiving por 
tion of the drum, a salient concentric portion 
li* following the outwardly-throwing cam por 
tion and extending around the front half of 
the cam-disk, an inwardly-throwing cam por 
tion l following the salient concentric por 
tion and arranged adjacent to the delivery 
-40 
 
75 
portion of the drum, and a depressed or re 
ceding concentric portion li following the in 
wardly-throwing can portion and extending 
half-way around the rear side of the cam-disk, 
as represented in Fig. 36. 
Each of the clamp-carriages during one ro 
tation of the drum engages its roller with the 
outwardly-throwing camportion l'of the cam 
disk and is lifted upon the salient concentric 
portion lithereof, whereby the foremost blank 
in the feed-trough is clamped and held while 
the drum makes the front half of its rotation, 
after which the roller of the clamp-carriage 
rides down the inwardly-throwing cam por 
tion l onto the depressed concentric portion 
l, whereby the clamp is opened, the blank is 
released, and the clamp is held open while 
moving around the rear half of the drum. 
Before the drum begins each intermittent 
movement the cam-diskis turned backwardly 
in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 36, sufi 
ciently to close the receiving-clamp upon the 
foremost blank in the feed-trough, and after 
the drum has turned forward sufficiently to 
bring the roller of the clamp-carriage beyond 
the reach of the outwardly-throwing portion 
the cam-disk is again turned forwardly. 
clamping the blank before the drum begins 
its forward movement displacement of the 
blank on the drum is prevented. While a 
new blank is being clamped on the drum by 
the backward movement of the calm-disk the 
clamp on the diametrically opposite side of 
the drum is opened and releases its blank, 
but the clamps on the front side of the drum 
remain unaffected, because their rollers re 
main on the salient concentric portion of the 
cam-disk. 
ls is a vertical rock-shaft whereby the cam 
disk is Oscillated for closing and opening the 
drum-clamps and which is journaled with its 
upper end in a bearing in the lower support 
ing-plate and with its lower end in a bearing 
formed in a hanger l', depending from said 
plate, as represented in Figs. 36, 37, and 67. 
This rock-shaft is provided above the lower 
supporting-plate with a rock-arm l', having 
a pin which engages with a radial slot l" in 
the cam-disk. 
l' is a rock-arm secured to the vertical 
rock-shaft libelow the lower supporting-plate 
and provided with a roller which engages 
with a cam l, secured to the vertical driving 
shaft K. The backward movement of the 
cam-disk L is produced by the salient portion 
of the can lengaging with the lower rock 
arm of the rock-shaft land the forward move 
ment of the cam-disk is arrested by the roller 
on the lower rock-arm lengaging with the 
receding portion of the cam l. 
While the blanks are clamped on the drum 
the lowermost corners of the blanks project 
downwardly below the drum and its jaws, and 
each blank stands obliquely and laps over the 
preceding blank, as shown in Figs. 1 and 39, 
S0 that they are compactly arranged around 
the drum while each lower corner is suffi 
? ? ? 
II5 
I 2 ? 
I25 
593,218 
| 
Id 
25. 
15 
ciently exposed for performing the operations 
of perforating and threading the blank. This 
Overlapping arrangement results from trans 
ferring the blanks in an oblique position 
from the feed-trough to the drum. After leav 
ing the front wrapping-screw the blanks are 
guided toward the delivery side of the drum 
by a curved guide l', Figs. 1, 6, 11, and 39, 
arranged in front of the central portion of the 
blanks and supported at one end on the shaft 
land at its opposite end on the supplemen 
tary frame. 
After the foremost blankin the feed-trough 
has been clamped against the drum the latter 
moves forwardly one-eighth of a turn and 
then stops with the lower corner of said blank 
arranged in line with the punch, which per 
forates the lower corner of the blank and 
which is constructed as follows: M, Figs. 1, 
42, and 45, represents a perforating-die air 
ranged outside of the path of blanks and ad 
jacent to the place where the lower corner of 
the blankstops to be perforated. This die is 
Separated a sufficient distance from the drum 
to permit the blank to pass between the die 
and the drum and is supported at its lower 
end by a bracket in, which is secured to the 
lower supporting-plate 
and extends out 
Wardly below the path of the blanks. 
m' represents a radially-movable punch 
which is normally arranged inside of the path 
of the blanks and which is adapted to move 
OutWardly against the die and perforate the 
... blank which is in place at this time between 
35 the punch and die. The front end of the 
punch is guided in an opening in the bracket 
?) and is secured with its rear or inner end to 
a radially-movable slide or holder n, which 
is guided in a way an in the lower supporting 
plate. 
m" is a vertical rock-shaft whereby the 
punch is operated and which is journaled in 
a bearing in the lower supporting - plate. 
This rock-shaft is provided above the lower 
Supporting-plate with a gear-segment M', 
which meshes with a gear-rack m on one side 
of the punch-slide. The rock-shaft is pro 
vided below the lower supporting-plate with 
a rock-arm n., having a roller at its end which 
bears against a cam no on the vertical driv 
ing-shaft. When the salient portion of this 
cam engages with the rock-arm m, the rock 
shaft and segment are turned so as to project 
the punch and perforate a blank. The punch 
is retracted by means of a spring m, mounted 
On the lower supporting-plate and connected 
With the rock-arm m'. The movement of the 
punch is So timed that it is projected and re 
tracted While the blank in front of the same 
remains at rest. 
After the lower corner of the blank has 
been perforated the drum is turned another 
One-eighth of a rotation and stands still with 
the lower corner of the blank arranged in line 
With the threading mechanism, which draws 
the twine or cord through the perforation of 
the blank and which is constructed as follows: 
?? 
55 
45 
rY 1 
N N', Figs. 1,34, 40, 41, 42, 44, and 48, rep 
resent two twine-feeding disks which are ar 
ranged horizontally one above the other out 
side of the path of the blanks and adjacent 
to the place where the perforated corner of 
the blankstops temporarily. The upper disk 
is secured to the upper end of a vertical spin 
dle n and is provided on the under side of its 
marginal portion with an annular gripping 
face m'. The spindle is journaled in a bear 
ing formed in a standard in, which is mounted 
on the front portion of the supporting-ring , 
and the spindle is rotated constantly in the 
direction of the arrow, Fig. 34, by a train of 
gear-wheels n' 'n', mounted, respectively, 
on the vertical driving-shaft, the lower-por 
tion of the standard in, and the lower portion 
of the feed-spindle n. The lower feeding-disk 
N'isprovided on the upper side of its marginal 
portion with an annular gripping-face v. 
which stands opposite the gripping-face of the 
upper disk. The lower feed-diskis journaled 
om a bushing or arbor an, formed on the stand 
ard around the upper portion of the feed 
spindle, and has its axis arranged slightly at 
an angle to the axis of the upper feed-disk, 
so that one portion of the lower disk is higher 
than the remaining portion of the disk and 
bears only With a portion of its gripping-face 
against the gripping-face of the upper disk, 
thereby causing the receiving side of the grip 
ping-disks to converge toward the gripping 
point and the discharge side of the disks to 
diverge from the gripping-point, as repre 
sented in Figs. 34, 44, and 48. The inclina 
tion of the lower feed-disk is such that the 
contact between the gripping-faces of the 
disks takes place on the inner portion of the 
disks, as represented in Figs. 34, 40, and 44. 
The feed-spindle is pressed downwardly for 
holding the inner portions of the gripping 
faces of the feed-disks yieldingly in engage 
ment with each other by a spring in', which 
surrounds the spindle and bears with its ends 
against a shoulder on the standard n* and on 
the upper side of the gear-wheel n on the 
spindle, as represented in Fig. 34. The lower 
feed-disk is driven from the upper feed-disk 
by vertical pins n', arranged on the under 
side of the upper feed-disk and engaging 
loosely with recesses in in the upper side of 
the lower feed-disk, as represented in Figs. 
42, 44, and 51. 
n' is an annular flange which is formed on 
the under side of the upper feed-disk within 
its gripping-face and engaging with an an 
nular groove formed in the upper side of the 
lower feed - disk within the gripping-face 
thereof, and which serves as a guard where 
by the twine is held in place between the 
gripping-faces of the disks. 
The twine unwinds from a horizontal spool 
m*, Figs. 1 and 11, mounted on the front por 
tion of the main frame below the drum, and 
passes thence upwardly through a twine-guide 
n', arranged on the main frame in front of 
the feed-disks, and thence around the receiv 
75 
85 
90 
95 
105 
II 
II C) 
II5 
I 25 
AAAASAAAAAAA AAAA ATMeeeAASSAASAASAA AeAAqMAASAAeeYAeAAqAiSASA S 
593,218 
) 
7 O 
ing side of the guard-flange and between the 
gripping-faces of the disks to the inner por 
tions thereof, where the end of the twine is 
clamped between the abutting portions of the 
gripping-faces. Upon turning the spindle 
this movement is transmitted by the pins 
from the upper to the lower feed-disk, where 
by all portions of the gripping - face of the 
lower disk are rolled successively into engage 
ment with the gripping - face of the upper 
disk, and the twine is fed forward by the feed 
disks, which roll in engagement with the op 
posite sides of the twine. The slot in the 
twine-guide through which the twine passes 
is preferably so narrow that a knot or enlarge 
ment in the twine cannot pass through the 
same, thereby arresting the forward feed of 
the twine and preventing imperfect work and 
possible injury to the delicate parts of the 
machine. 
in, Figs. 42, 48, and 51, is a notch or recess 
formed partly in the edge of the upper feed 
disk and partly in the edge of the lower feed 
disk. This notch stands opposite the perfo 
rations of the blank when the latter comes to 
a standstill before the threading device and 
forms a clear space around the twine at the 
point where the twine is removed from the 
feed-disks and drawn through the perfora 
tions of the blank by the radially-movable 
threading-needle o, which is provided at its 
Outer end with a hook o'. This needle stands 
with its hook on the inner side of the path of 
the blank, while the latter is carried forward 
by the drum and is in line with the perfora 
tion thereof when the blank stands still be 
fore the needle. The latter is guided with 
its Outer portion or free end in an opening 
formed in a guide and clamping block o', 
which is secured to the outer side of the lower 
supporting-plate and is secured with its inner 
end to a cylindrical holdero, which isguided 
in a cylindrical way o' in the lower support 
ing-plate, as represented in Figs. 34, 42, 44, 
and 47. 
After the blank has been shifted so 
that its perforation stands opposite the needle 
the latter is moved outwardly with its hook 
uppermost through the perforation of the 
blank and into the recess of the feeding-disks. 
During the last portion of the outward move 
lent of the needle the inclined front side of 
its hook engages with the under side of the 
twine, which crosses the recess of the feeding 
disks, as represented in Fig. 51, and deflects 
the same upwardly, and after the hook has 
passed the twine the latter drops down into 
its normal position in front of the hook, as 
represented in Fig. 52. When the hook of 
the needle is in the recess of the feeding 
disks, a considerable portion of twine has 
previously been fed off by the feed-disks and 
hangs loosely on the delivery side of the feed 
disks, as represented in Fig. 42. The twine 
is grasped by those portions of the gripping 
faces on the disks which are on oppositesides 
of its recess, the grip of the portions of the 
faces on the rear side of the recess being 
Stronger than the portions of the gripping 
faces on the front side of the recess. 
During the subsequent backward or in Ward 
movement of the needle its hook engages with 
the twine which crosses the feed-disk recess 
and disengages the loose front portion of the 
twine from engagement with those portions 
of the gripping-faces on the front side of the 
recess and then pulls the loose front portion 
of the twine through the perforation of the 
blank. After the needle is withdrawn from 
the perforation of the blank it continues its 
backward movement until its hook has re 
ceded into the opening of the clamping-block 
o, as represented in Fig. 43, in which posi 
tion the end of the twine is clamped lightly 
between the needle-hook and the adjacent 
portion of the clamping-block. After the 
needle has receded to its innermost position 
and clamped the end of the twine the blank 
is moved forward another one-eighth of a ro 
tation and the twine is drawn into the form 
of a loop or bight, as represented in Fig. 43, 
the twine for this purpose being supplied by 
the feed-disks, which pay the twine out con 
tinuously. When the hook engages with the 
itwine while the latter is held by the feed 
disks, the portions of twine on opposite sides 
of the hook are horizontally in line, as repre 
sented in full lines, Fig. 53, and if the twine 
were held in this position by the hook while 
the blank is moving forward and forming a 
loop in the twine the front end of the twine 
would be liable to creep over the top of the 
hook, as represented in dotted lines, Fig. 53, 
and disengage itself from the same. In order 
to obviate this difficulty, the needle, after its 
hook has disengaged the twine from the feed 
disks, is turned one-quarter, so that its hook 
faces rearwardly, as represented in Figs. 42 
and 54, whereby the dangling free end of the 
twine is carried upwardly and the main por 
tion of the twine is carried downwardly, in 
which position the twine cannot creep over 
the hook and disengage itself. 
o, Figs. 40, 41, and 42, is a horizontally 
reciprocating carriage whereby the thread 
ing-needle is moved back and forth and which 
- is guided on the upper portion of the stand 
ardn, below the lowersupporting-plate. The 
inner portion of this slide is provided with a 
bearing O", which projects upwardly through 
an opening in the bottom of the lower Sup 
porting-plate and in which the front end of 
the needle-holder is journaled, so as to be 
capable of turning independently of the car 
riage, but compelled to move lengthwise with 
the carriage. 
o, Figs. 40 and 41, is an elbow-lever where 
by the needle-shifting carriage is operated 
and which is pivoted on the front side of the 
standard in, so as to turn in a vertical plane. 
The upper arm of this lever engages with a 
notch or recess of in the outer end of the 
meedle-carriage, while its lower arm is pro 
vided with a roller engaging with a horizon 
tally-rotating cam o'. When the receding 
95 
CC 
C. 
I 25 
25 
35 
AO 
55 
?? 
65 
 
O 
593,218 
portion of the needle-cam engages with the 
elbow-lever o, the latter is permitted to be 
turned in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 40, 
by a spring ot, whereby the needle is moved 
outwardly through the perforation of the 
blank and into engagement with the twine in 
the twine-feeding disks. When the salient 
portion of this cam engages with the elbow 
lever o, the needle, together with its holder 
and carriage, is moved inwardly, so as to 
carry the twine through the perforation of the 
blank and clamp its end against the ciamp 
ing-block. 
The spring which moves the needle out 
Wardly is preferably mounted on the pivot of 
the elbow-lever of and connected with its ends 
to said lever and the adjacent standard. The 
needle-cam o' is secured to the upper end of 
a hollow spindle O', which is journaled in the 
standard in and which is rotated continuously 
at the same speed as the main shaft by the 
gear-wheel in, mounted on the lower portion 
of the spindle, as represented in Fig. 34, and 
forming one of the train of gear-wheels where 
by the twine-feed shaft is operated. The os 
cillating movement of the needle is produced 
by a stationary pin o', arranged in the bore 
of the cylindrical guide of the needle-holder 
and engaging with a cam or spiral slot o' in 
the side of the needle-holder, as represented 
in Figs. 44 and 47. During the outward 
movement of the needle one side of the in 
clined or spiral slot in its holder engages with 
the stationary pin, whereby the needle is 
turned so that its hook is on the upper side 
of the needle during the last portion of the 
forward movement of the needle and engages 
properly with the twine in the feed-disks. 
During the back Ward movement of the nee 
dle the other side of the inclined slot in its 
holder engages with the stationary pin, and 
the needle is turned one - quarter after its 
hook has engaged with the twine. If a non 
perforated blank should be presented to the 
needle, owing to the punch failing to perform 
its function, the needle will only be pressed 
against the inner side of the blank by the 
Spring, which latter is made of such strength 
that the needle will not be forced through the 
blank, whereby the needle is prevented from 
being caught in the blank and injured by 
the Subsequent forward movement of the 
blank, which injury would be liable to hap 
pen if the needle were moved forward posi 
tively by a calm and retracted by a spring. 
While the blank is moving forward one 
eighth of a turn after leaving the threading 
device the blank passes between a pair of co 
operating twine-cutters or blades PP', which 
are arranged, respectively, on the inner and 
outer sides of the path of the blank and each 
of which is provided with a V-shaped cutting 
edge, as represented in Figs. 42, 43, and 46. 
The inner Stationary cutter P is secured to a 
bracket p, which is mounted on the adjacent 
portion of the lower supporting-plate, and the 
Outer movable cutter P' is mounted on a rock 
??? 
arm p', having a horizontally-swinging move 
ment. After the blank has passed beyond 
the cutters the outer cutter moves past the 
inner cutter, whereby the overlapping W 
shaped cutters together form an eye or guide 
, as shown in Figs. 42 and 46, through S 
? which both strands of the loop are drawn by 
the blank until the latter reaches the end of 
the respective eighth of a turn, at which time 
the cutters have closed upon the strands of 
the loop sufficient to produce a light tension 
on the twine, but not sufficient to cut the 
same, and then stand still, thereby holding 
the twine loop comparatively taut between 
the cutters and the blank. 
As the blank moves forward from the thread 
ing device and forms the loop in the twine 
the blank takes up the slack which has been 
formed in the twine by the constant feeding 
of the disks. This slack is fully taken up by 
the blank after the latter passes the twine 
cutters owing to the movement of the blank 
being faster than that of the feed-disks, and 
during the continued forward movement of 
the blank a tension is produced on the loop 
which causes the front strand of the loop to 
be pulled out of engagement with the needle 
hook owing to the grip of the feed-disks on 
the rear strand being greater than the grip of 
the needle-hook on the front strand. As the 
blank continues its forward movement after 
having passed the twine-cutters the loose 
front strand of the loop is carried forward, 
but still remains with a considerable portion 
of its length in rear of the cutters when the 
blank comes to a standstill and the cutter's 
close upon the strands for producing a ten 
sion on the Joop. When the blank comes to 
a standstill after having passed the twine 
cutters, the knotting mechanism grasps both 
strands of the loop between the blank and 
twine-cutter, and during the first portion of 
the tying operation draws a sufficient portion 
of both strands through the cutters to form 
the knot. After the knotting mechanism ob 
tains control of both strands of the loop the 
outer cutter completes its inward movement 
and cuts the twine, whereby a remnant of 
the front strand of the loop is left behind the 
cutters and the rear strand of the loop is 
severed from the main or supply portion of 
the twine, which main polition is now loose 
and free to be pulled by the threading-nee 
de through the perforation of the next blank. 
The movable twine-cutter is mounted on the 
upper end of a vertical rock-shaft p, which 
is journaled in bearings On the Supporting 
ring i and the standard n and passes through 
the hollow spindle O'. For moving the outer 
twine-cutter toward the inner cutter the rock 
shaft is turned by a camp, Figs. 34 and 3S, 
arranged on the lower end of the feed-spindle 
n, and engaging with a rock-arm 2) on the 
lower end of the cutter rock-shaft, and the 
latter is turned in the opposite direction for 
separating the twine-cutters by a spring p", 
surrounding the lower portion of the cutter 
o 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
i 25 
I. ? 
35 
45 
?? 
 
593,218 
5 
25 
40 
45 
So 
?? 
shaft and secured with one end to the latter, 
while its opposite end bears against the lower 
end of the feed-disk shaft or a stationary part 
of the machine. 
The mechanism whereby the strands of the 
twine loop are tied together into a knot is 
constructed as follows: Q Q', Figs. 55 to 66, 
represent inner and outer knotter-tubes ar 
ranged one within the other and provided, 
respectively, at their upper ends with hook 
shaped jaws g g . These tubes are arranged 
vertically in rear of the stationary twine-cut 
ter and on the inner side of the path of the 
blanks, and the outer jaw is journaled in the 
bracket p, but is held against vertical move 
ment by a gear-pinion g, sectared to the lower 
portion of the outer tube Q and bearing with 
its upper side against the under side of the 
bracket p and with its under side against an 
arm q, secured to the bracket p, Figs. 55 and 
56. The inner knotter-tube is capable of 
sliding vertically in the outer tube, but is 
compelled to turn there with by means of keys 
or lugs q', formed on the outer side of the in 
ner tube and engaging with longitudinal slots 
q in the outer tube, as represented in Figs. 
55, 56, and 58. 
Q, Fig. 55,isa vertically. sliding pusher-rod 
arranged within the inner knotter-tube and 
provided at its upper end with a notch or re 
cess g, forming a fork which is adapted to en 
gage with the twine and push the same against 
the hooks of the knotter-tubes. 
Preparatory to tying a knot in a loop the 
pusher-rod is depressed so that its fork is ar 
ranged below the path of the twine and the 
knotter-tubes are shifted so that their jaws 
are arranged side by side and together form 
practically one hook, whosejaws are arranged 
on the inner side of the path of the twine and 
overhang the same. While the blank is mov 
ing from the threading to the knotting mech 
anism the strands of its loop are carried 
against the outer side of the knotter-jaws and 
underneath the overhanging portion thereof, 
as represented in Fig. 59. After the blank 
comes to a standstill in advance of the knotter 
jaws the pusher-rod is moved upwardly, so 
that its fork engages with the strands of the 
loop, forces them against the under side of the 
knotter-jaws, and elevates the front or ad 
vancing portion of the loop above the rear or 
trailing portion of the loop, as represented in 
Fig. 60. While the pusher-rod is in this ele 
wated position the knotter-tubes are turned 
in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 61, and its 
jaWS in a closed position are carried under 
neath the raised front portion of the loop, as 
represented in this figure. The pusher-rod 
is now lowered, while the knotter tubes and 
jaws continue to turn in the same direction 
and carry the rear portion of the loop under 
neath the front portion thereof and form a 
complete sling or turn in the loop, as repre 
seated in Fig. 62. As the jaws approach the 
rear portion of the strands the inner jaw is 
lowered by depressing the inner tube, and in 
. 
continuing their forward rotary movement the 
outerkinotter-jawis carried oyer the rear por 
tion of the strands and the inner jaw is car 
ried below the rear portion of the strands, as 
represented in Fig. 63. The inner knotter 
tube is now raised and its jaw is moved toward 
the outer jaw, whereby the rear portions of the 
strands are clamped between the two knotter 
jaws, as represented in Fig. 64, and shortly 
thereafter the twine-cutters close entirely, 
thereby severing the loop from the body of 
the twine and from the remnant. The knot 
ter-tubes are now moved backwardly with the 
ends of the strands clamped between the jaws 
until the jaws point forwardly in the direction 
of the blank, as represented in Fig. 65. The 
jaws remain momentarily at rest in this po 
sition during the first portion of the next for 
ward movement of the blank, whereby the 
turn in the loop is stripped from the jaws and 
the ends of the strand are pulled through the 
turn in the loop, thereby forming a knot, as 
represented in Fig. 66. The jaws retain hold 
of the ends of the strands, so that during the 
continued forward movement of the blank 
the knot will be drawn tight, and when the 
pull upon the loop becomes sufficient to over 
come the grip of the knotter-jaws the ends of 
the loop are disengaged from the knotter 
jaws, after which the knotter tubes and jaws 
are returned to the normal position shown in 
Fig. 59. 
The oscillating movement of the knotter 
jaws is produced by a gear-segment (, mesh 
ing with the pinion of the outer knotter-tube 
and molunted on a, rock-arm g, which is piv 
oted to the under side of the lower support 
ing-plate. Q', Fig. 37, is a cam whereby the 
rock-arm q is turned for moving the knotter 
jaws forwardly and which is mounted on the 
vertical driving-shaft and engages with a 
roller on the rock-arm q. The backward 
movement of the knotter-jaws is produced by 
a spring g, secured with its ends to the rock 
arm q and the lower supporting-plate. 
q is a horizontal connecting-bar which is 
pivotally connected at its outer end with the 
lower end of the pusher-rod q and which is 
hung by links ('from a horizontal rock-lever 
q, whereby the pusher-rod is actuated. This 
rock-lever is pivoted with its inner end to the 
lower portion of the hangerl, Figs. 55 and 67, 
and is raised and lowered by a cam q', which 
is secured to the vertical driving-shaft, and 
which engages with a roller on the horizontal 
rock-lever q. The inner knotter-tube ex 
tends below the outer knotter-tube and is pro 
vided on its lower portion with a stop-collar 
q, which is adapted to bear with its upper 
side against the lower end of the outer tube 
and thereby limit the upward movement of 
the inner tube. 
q is a lifting-lever which is connected with 
the lower portion of the inner knotter-tube, 
and q is a spring whereby this lever is pressed 
upwardly for holding the inner knotter-tube 
yieldingly in its elevated position. The lift 
5 
8 
95 
OC 
I o5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
 
593,218 
25 
5 
ing-lever is pivoted at its inner end to one of 
the linksg'and is adjustably connected with 
the inner knotter-tube by passing the lower 
externally-screw-threaded portion of the in 
ner tube through the lever and applying stop 
screw-nuts qi q8 to the inner tube above and 
below the lifting-lever, as shown in Fig. 55. 
q9 is a vertical rod which bears with its 
upper end against the under side of the outer 
O portion of the lifting-lever and is guided with 
its lower end in an arm q, secured to the sup 
porting-ring i. The spring qsurrounds this 
rod and bears with its lower end against the 
arm of and with its upper end against a col 
lar q on the guide-rod. 
q'is a collar which slides on the inner knot 
ter-tube between the stop-collar qi' and the 
Upper stop-nut qland Whichis pivotaly con 
nected with the outer end of the rock-lever 
q' by pins of', arranged on opposite sides of 
the sliding collar and engaging with slots q. 
in the bifurcated outer end of the rock-lever 
: q', as represented in Fig. 57. 
During the first portion of the rotary move 
ment of the cam qit raises the rock-lever q 
from the normal position shown in Fig. 55 
and the pusher-rod connected there with just 
after the loop of the blank has been carried 
against the knotter jaws or hooks, whereby 
the pusher-rod forms the upward bend in the 
front portion of the loop to permit the jaws, 
which now begin to turn forwardly, to carry 
the rear portion of the loop under the front 
portion thereof. During the last portion of 
the forward rotary movement of the knotter 
jaws the cam of depresses the rock-lever be 
low its normal position, whereby the pusher 
rod is lowered into an inoperative position and 
the knotter-jaws are separated by reason of 
the sliding collar q on the lever engaging 
With the upper screw-nut q and depressing 
the inner knotter-tube, thereby permitting 
the knotter-jaws to straddle the loop. The 
can now raises the rock-lever to its normal 
position, whereby the spring is permitted to 
raise the inner knotter-tube and close the 
lknotter-jaWS on the loop, in which position 
the parts are held while the knot is being 
completed during the subsequent backward 
rotary movement of the jaws and until the 
loop of the next blank has been carried across 
the knotter-jaws. If the blank-carrying drum 
misses a blank or does not receive one, so that 
a pair of drum-jaws passes by the looping 
mechanism without presenting a blank to the 
same, the constant feed of twine by the feed 
ing-disks is liable to clog the machine and 
obstruct the parts in their subsequent opera 
tions. In order to prevent this occurrence, 
each pair of drum-jaws is provided with a fin 
ger around which the loop is formed when no 
blank is presented and which carries the loop 
away from the looping mechanism. q', Figs. 
S, 19, 35, 42, 44, and 49, are these clearing 
fingers, which are hook-shaped and one of 
which is secured to each of the inner clamp 
jaws of the drum. Each finger is arranged 
with its hook inside of the place where the 
blank stands and back of the perforation in 
the same. If no blank is present, the thread 
ing-needle carries the twine across the clear 
ing-hook, and the latter during its forward 
movement forms a loop in the twine and holds 
the same while its strands are being tied and 
takes the place of a blank. 
After the knot has been tied on the loop of 
the blank and the latter is released on the 
delivery side of the drum the blank is carried 
obliquely downward and rearward by a de 
livery or transfer mechanism into a inclined 
chute, which latter delivers the blanks into a 
W-shaped delivery or discharge trough. This 
chute consists of a bottom board R, Figs. 6. 
8, 11, 19, 6S, 69, and 70, upon which the 
blanks slide with their lower edge, a front 
board , extending upwardly from the bottom 
board on the front side of the path of the 
blanks, and a barr', arranged on the inner side 
of the path of the blanks and secured by bolts 
ra' to the upper ends of posts r r", which are 
Imounted on the bottom of the chute. The 
discharge-trough is arranged lengthwise in 
rear of the chute, drum, and feed-trough and 
below the same and is composed of a number 
of longitudinal bars r, which are connected 
by V-shaped brackets to the rear portion 
of the frame, Figs. 6, 8, 11, 12, 16, 19, and 20. 
The mechanism whereby the blanks are dis 
charged is constructed as follows: SS S'S'ss 
s's, Figs.1, 6, 8,11, 19,68, 69,70,71, and 72, rep 
resent an upper and a lower set of discharge 
rollers which are arranged adjacent to the 
delivery portion of the drum and whereby the 
blanks are carried from the drum to the dis 
charge-trough. The outer roller's S S of the 
upper set are arranged on the outer side of 
the path of the blanks and mounted on a shaft 
s', and the inner rollers s' s' of this set are 
arranged on the inner side of the path of the 
blanks facing the rollers SS and mounted on 
a shafts. The outer rollers ss of the lower 
set are arranged on the outer side of the path 
of the blanks below the upper outer rollers 
and mounted on a shafts, and the inner roll 
ers ss of the lower set are arranged on the 
inner side of the path of the blanks below the 
upper inner rollers and mounted on a shaft 
s. These shafts are arranged parallel with 
the front and back ends of the blanks as the 
latter are discharged in an oblique position 
by the drum, whereby the blanks are pro 
pelled by the rollers in a line parallel with 
the top and bottom edges of the blanks. The 
shafts, supporting the upper inner rollers, 
is journaled in fixed bearings s, arranged on 
the adjacent portion of the stationary frame, 
and the shafts, supporting the upper Outer 
rollers, is journaled in movable bearings s. 
whereby the upper outer rollers are carried 
toward and from the upper inner rollers. As 
the blank leaves the drum the upper outer 
rollers stand away from the opposing inner 
rollers, so as to form a clear space into Which 
the blank can enter freely. After the blank 
35 
40 
45 
55 
7 ? 
75 
90 
95 
(OO) 
IO5 
? ? ? 
II5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
I 30 
 
598,218 
18 
is yieldingly moved toward the outer lower 
has entered between the upper rollers the 
rollers by a spring s engaging its ends with 
outer rollers are moved inwardly and the 
the post rand the lower rocking frame. The 
blank is pressed between the rollers, whereby 
movement of the lower inner rollers toward 
the latter obtain a firm grip upon the blank 
the lower outer rollers is limited by a stops' 
and feed the same forward. The movable 
on the main frame, against which an arms' 
bearings of the upper outer roller shafts are 
on the lower rocking frame engages, Figs. S 
formed on the upper portion of a rocking 
and 6S, and whereby the lower inner rollers 
frames, which latter is pivoted at its lower 
are prevented from coming in contact with 
end on the main frame by pivots s, arranged 
the outer lower rollers when there is no blank 
parallel with the upper outer roller shaft. 
The upper outer rolliers are moved outwardly 
between the same. The lower inner shaft is 
driven from the lower outer shaft by similar 
by an outer spring S', secured at one end to 
intermeshing gear-pinions s'is', secured, re 
the stationary frame and bearing with its 
spectively, to these shafts below the path of 
other end against the outer side of a down 
wardly-projecting arms on the upper rock 
the blanks and provided with teeth of such 
length that they remain in gear while the 
ing frames, as represented in Figs. 1, 6, 11, 
70, and 71. s is an inner spring bearing 
lower rollers are moved toward and from each 
other. Motion is transmitted to the discharge 
with its free end against the inner side of the 
rollers for turning them in the direction of 
arms of the rocking frame and secured to 
the arrows, Figs. 69 and 71, by a belts", pass 
the stationary frame, and S is a connecting 
ing arounda main driving-pulley s, arranged 
rod which connects the inner springs with 
on the main horizontal shaft in rear of the 
the rock-arm l' on the lower end of the rock 
drum, guide-rollers s' s, arranged on the 
shaftli, as represented in Figs. 37,68, and 70. 
front portion of the main frame, pulleyss's", 
When the salient portion of the cam li turns 
secured, respectively, to the lower front ends 
this arm l' for the purpose of turning the 
of the upper and lower outer shafts, and a 
cam L and releasing the blank from the clamp 
tension-rollers', mounted on the frame be 
on the delivery side of the drum, the inner 
springs is moved outwardly and thus turns 
tween the rollers sis', as shown in Figs. 1, 
the rocking frames, so that the outer upper 
6, and 68. 
T, Figs. 6, 8, 11, 16, and 19, represents a ver 
rollers grip the blank, and when the rock-arm 
tical packer-board which reciprocates length 
lengages with the receding portion of the cam 
wise in the discharge-trough and whereby 
l the inner springs' moves inwardly, so as 
each blank, after being discharged by the 
to permit the outer spring S' to separate the 
chute into the discharge - trough, is moved 
upper rollers. 
rearwardly, so as to clear the Space in the 
By interposing the inner springs between 
the connecting-rods and the rocking frame 
trough below the chute and to pack the blanks 
into a pile or bundle. While the blank is be 
st a yielding connection is formed between 
ing delivered by the chute into the discharge 
these parts which enables the upper outer 
trough, the packer-board stands on the Outer 
rollers to adjust themselves to the thickness 
side of the path of the blank. After the lat 
of the blanks, thereby avoiding binding and 
ter has dropped into the trough the board 
injury to the parts, which otherwise would be 
moves forwardly, carrying the blank away 
liable to happen if the movable rollers were 
from the outlet of the chute and backwardly 
shifted by positive actuating mechanism. 
in the discharge-trough, after which the board 
The shaft s', supporting the upper outer 
returns to its, normal position outside of the 
rollerss, extends forwardly beyond the inner 
outlet of the chute. The packer-board is 
upper shaft sand is journaled at its front 
end in a fixed bearing s, arranged on the 
mounted on the front end of a bar i, which is 
guided in the bottom of the discharge-trough 
front portion of the frame, that portion of the 
and connected with its rear end to a rock-le 
outer shafts between its fixed and movable 
bearings being sufficiently flexible to permit 
ver t, Figs. 6, 8, and 16. This lever is piv 
oted on the main frame and is turned in the 
of the necessary movement of the rocking 
proper direction for moving the packer-board 
frame. The upper rear end of the outer up 
against the blank in the trough by a cam l, 
per shaft is provided with a gear-pinion s', 
which is mounted on the main driving-shaft 
which meshes with a similar gear-pinions 
and which engages with a roller on the rock 
on the upper rear end of the upper inner 
lever. The backward movement of the 
shaft, whereby these shafts are rotated in uni 
packer-board is effected by a spring t, con 
son, the teeth of these gear-pinions being suf 
ficiently long so that they will remain in gear 
nected with its ends to the rock-lever t and 
the discharge-trough, as represented in Fig. 8. 
in the different positions of the rocking frame. 
t, Figs. 6, 8, 9, 19, and 68, is an inclined 
The shaft supporting the outer lower dis 
detent-finger whereby the blanks, after they 
charge-rollers s is journaled in fixed bear 
have been carried away from the outlet of the 
ings s' on the frame, and the shaft support 
chute by the packer-board, are prevented 
ing the inner lower rollers s is mounted in 
from moving backwardly again with the 
movable bearings s', which are arranged on 
packer and obstructing the chute - outlet. 
a lower rocking frames', having a movement 
This finger is arranged on the inner side of 
toward and from the outer lower rollers. This 
lower frames' is pivoted on the post rand the discharge-trough and projects slightly 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
40 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
90 
95 
?. ? ? 
I I. ? 
II 5 
I 25 
 
4. 
593,218 
for uncoupling the driving-pulley from the 
into the path of the blank. As the latter is 
driving-shaft. 
moved rearwardly by the packer-board the 
inner edge of the blank passes along the in 
W, Figs, 1, 4, 5, 8, and 16, is a vertical catch 
whereby the coupling-levers are held in a 
clined under side of the detent-finger and is: 
coupled position. This catch is pivoted with 
deflected thereby, and after the blank has 
passed the detent-finger the deflected portion 
its lower end to the front arm of the interme 
diate coupling-lever and passes with its up 
of the blank straightens out and the abrupt 
per end through an opening which is formed 
rear side of the finger engages against the 
blank when the packer is retracted, thereby 
in a bracket U, mounted on the main frame. 
The opening in the bracket is L-shaped, one 
preventing the blank from moving back with 
branch v' being arranged transversely, while 
the packer. The detent-finger is preferably 
the other branch v is arranged longitudi 
formed on the lower end of the chute-bar r'? 
and is made adjustable for different sizes of 
nally and extends from the front end of the 
blanks by the fastening-bolts *, which pass 
transverse branch toward the rear end of the 
through a slot i in the bar r". 
The upper end 
machine, as shown in Fig. 5. 
U, Figs. 6, 8, and 20, represents a vertical 
of the catch is provided with a shoulder U, 
abutment-board which is removably arranged 
which is adapted to engage with a shoulder 
in the discharge-trough on the inner side of 
NU, formed on the under side of the bracket 
the chute and against which the blanks are 
adjacent to the rear side of the transverse 
packed after they have been delivered by the 
branch of the Opening in the bracket, as rep 
chute into the discharge-trough. This abut 
resented in Figs. 4 and 5. The catch is yield 
ingly held in engagement with the shoulder 
ment-board is provided with lugs u, which 
of the bracket by a spring U, connecting the 
project OutWardly between the bars of the dis 
charge-trough. 
same with the main frame, and can be disen 
at represents a number of abutment-bars 
gaged by hand from the bracket-shoulder by 
which are arranged lengthwise between the 
a handle v', pivoted on the front arm of the 
longitudinal bars of the discharge-trough and 
main coupling-lever and connected by a rod 
at with the catch, Fig. 1. 
which bear loosely with their front ends 
it is a vertical trip-arm which is adapted 
against the lugs of the abutment-board, while 
to disengage the catch from the shoulder on 
their rear ends are connected by a cross-head 
u. A back pressure is applied to the abut 
the bracket and uncouple the driving-clutch. 
This arm is arranged with its lower end in 
ment-board and the blanks behind the same 
by a weight at, connected with the cross-head 
rear of the upper end of the catch and is SO 
uby a cord'u', which latter passes around a 
mounted that it is capable of a transverse and 
a longitudinal oscillating movement. This 
roller it, mounted on the lower portions of 
is preferably accomplished by pivoting the 
the discharge-trough, as shown in Fig. 8. 
upper end of the trip-arm by a transverse pin 
If a blank becomes caught in the chute or 
inv' to a longitudinal horizontal shaft w, which 
in the mechanism which carries the blanks 
from the drum to the discharge-trough, the 
shaft is journaled with its ends in bearings 
operation of the machine is automatically ar 
up on the main frame. Upon swinging the 
trip-arm lengthwise of the machine the catch 
rested by a stop mechanism, which is con 
is not disturbed, but when the trip-arm is 
structed as follows: 
V is a main driving-pulley which is so 
swung transversely forward it strikes the 
mounted on the rear end of the main driving 
catch and disengages the same from the 
shaft as to be capable of a longitudinal and a 
bracket, thereby permitting the spring v' to 
shift the parts for uncoupling the driving 
rotary movement thereon. This pulley is pro 
vided on the inner side of its hub with a clutch 
clutch. 
W, Figs. 4, 5, and 16, is a rotary trip-disk 
collar v, which is adapted to be engaged with 
or disengaged from a clutch-collar v' on the 
mounted on the main shaft and provided 
main shaft by moving the pulley lengthwise 
with a pin v1, which is adapted to engage 
with the rear side of the trip-arm and swing 
on the shaft. 
v is an intermediate coupling-lever which 
the same forwardly, so as to disengage the 
is arranged lengthwise in the main frame and 
catch from the bracket-shoulder. 
pivoted between the rear portions of the same 
'U' is a spring which connects the trip-arm 
to a bracket V, Figs. 1 and 12. This lever is 
with the main frame and which yieldingly 
provided on its rear arm with a fork v, which 
holds the trip-arm in the path of the pin on 
the trip-disk. 
engages. With an annular groove in the clutch 
collar of the pulley, Figs. 1 and 12. 
v' represents an intermediate rock-lever 
''' is a main coupling-lever which forms a 
which is pivoted on the rear portion of the 
forward extension of the intermediate lever, 
frame and which is connected with its front 
and is pivoted at v to the main frame and 
arm by a rod up to the trip-arm. The rear 
loosely connected at its rear end with the front 
arm of the intermediate rock-lever is con 
nected by a rod v with a main rock-lever X, 
end of the intermediate level. 
'' is a spring which connects the front end 
which is pivoted on the front portion of the 
of the main lever with the main frame, Fig. 1, 
main frame. The main rock-lever X is turned 
and exerts a downward pressure on the lever in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 6, for per 
w 
95 
II. ? 
II5 
2 ? 
I 25 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
 
593,218 
75 
mitting the spring auto pull the trip-arm 
into the path of the trip-disk pin by means 
of a cam ac, Figs. , 8, and 18, mounted on the 
main shaft and engaging with a roller on the 
main rock-lever X, and the latter is turned 
in a reverse direction for shifting the trip 
arm out of the path of the trip-disk pin at by 
a spring ac', Figs. 6 and 8, which connects the 
main rock-lever X with the main frame. 
y, Figs. 6, 8, 68, and 69, represents a num 
ber offeeling-fingers which move horizontally 
back and forth across the path of the blanks 
as they are carried by the chute and delivery 
mechanism from the drum to the discharge 
trough and which are adapted to detect any 
blanks that may be caught in the blank-de 
livery devices. These fingers are guided in 
openings formed in a stationary supporting 
bar y', which is secured to the post r" or a 
part of the frame on the inner side of the 
chute, as shown in Figs. 68 and 69. 
f' is a reciprocating carrying-bar to which 
the inner ends of the feeling-fingers are se 
cured and which is connected with the free 
end of the main rock-lever X by rods f. 
The movement of the feeling-fingers is so 
timed that they are moved forwardly across 
the path of the blanks after a blank is sup 
posed to have been transferred from the drum 
to the discharge-trough. If the blank has 
been properly transferred, the feeling-fingers 
are moved forwardly across the path of the 
blanks by the main rock-lever X, and the 
latter pulls the trip-arm u' rearwardly, as 
shown in dotted lines, Fig. 4, so that the pin 
of the trip-disk cannot strike the trip-arm, 
thereby preventing uncoupling of the driving 
mechanism. If a blank becomes caught in 
the transferring mechanism, the feeling-fin 
gers strike the same and are prevented from 
moving forwardly across the path of the 
blanks, thereby preventing the rock-lever X 
from pulling the trip-arm its out of the path 
of the trip-disk pin av, so that the latter 
during its rotary movement strikes the trip 
arm, and this arm in turn strikes the catch W 
and disengages the same from the bracket, 
whereby the coupling-levers are liberated and 
permitted to uncouple the driving mechanism. 
The blanks in moving through the machine 
are engaged only on their lower portions, 
while their upper portions are perfectly free, 
which enables this machine to operate on 
blanks of various widths and lengths without 
necessitating a change in the adjustment of 
its parts. 
I claim as my invention 
l. In a blank-looping machine, the combi 
nation with a rotating drum provided on its 
periphery with blank-holding jaws, of perfo 
rating and looping mechanism, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. In a blank-looping machine, the combi 
nation with an upright rotating drum pro 
vided on its periphery with blank-holding 
jaws, of perforating and looping mechanism 
arranged below said drum, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. In a blank-looping machine, the combi 
nation with an upright rotating drum pro 
vided on its periphery with blank-holding 
jaws, of a feed-trough opening against the 
peripheral face of said drum, means whereby 
the blanks are successively fed from said 
trough against the drum, and perforating and 
looping mechanism arranged below said 
drum, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a blank-looping machine, the combi 
nation with an upright rotating drum pro 
vided on its periphery with blank-holding 
jaws, of a feed-trough opening against the 
peripheral face of said drum on one side 
thereof, means whereby the blanks are suc 
cessively fed from said trough against the 
drum, a discharge mechanism arranged on 
the opposite side of the drum, and perforat 
ing and looping mechanism arranged below 
the drum and between the feed-trough and 
the discharge mechanism, substantially as 
set forth. 
5. The combination with a blank-carrying 
drum, of a feed-trough having oblique sides 
and opening adjacent to the peripheral face 
of the drum, and means whereby the blanks 
are successively delivered from the trough 
against the drum, whereby the blanks are al 
ranged on the drum obliquely, Substantially 
as set forth. 
6. The combination with a blank-carrier, 
of a feed-trough composed of longitudinal 
rotating shafts, substantially as set forth. 
7. The combination with a blank-carrier, 
of a feed-trough composed of two sets of lon 
gitudinal rotating shafts, and means whereby 
the two sets of shafts are rotated in opposite 
directions, substantially as set forth. 
8. The combination with the two sets of 
shafts of the feed-trough and the driving-shaft 
provided with a crank, of a yoke connected 
with said crank, cranks secured to one set of 
said shafts and connected with said yoke, a 
counter-shaft provided with a crank which is 
connected with said yoke, and gear-wheels 
connecting said counter-shaft with the other 
set of said shafts and rotating the same in the 
opposite direction, substantially as set forth. 
9. The combination with an open trough 
in which the pile or stack of blanks is ar 
ranged, of a follower extending outwardly 
beyond the inner faces of said trough, and 
longitudinal actuating-bars arranged outside 
of the inner faces of said trough and detach 
ably connected with said follower, substan 
tially as set forth. 
10. The combination with the shafts of the 
feed-trough, of a follower arranged in said 
trough and having extensions which project 
beyond the inner faces thereof, and longitudi 
nal actuating-bars arranged outside of the in 
mer faces of said trough-shafts and connected 
with said follower, substantially as set forth. 
11. The combination with a feed-trough 
O 
2 ? 
25 
as 
4O 
45 
5? 
55 
?? 
90 
OO 
I C5 
O 
II 5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
I 30 
 
6 
593,218 
Io tially as set forth. 
which contains the stack or pile of blanks, of a 
feeding-finger which has a rotary motion in 
the plane of the blanks and across the feed 
is trough, whereby said finger enters edgewise 
5 between the blanks, and which has a subse 
quent motion at right angles to the plane of 
the blank and lengthwise of the feed-trough 
whereby the blank in front of the finger is 
moved forward in the feed-trough, substan 
12. The combination with a feed-trough 
which contains the stack or pile of blanks, of a 
Separating-finger which enters the trough and 
engages with one of the blanks and moves the 
I5 Same for Wardly and a conveyer-screw against 
which the blank is moved by said finger and 
which continues the movement of the blank, 
substantially as set forth. 
13. The combination with a feed - trough 
2O, which contains the stack or pile of blanks, of a 
separating-finger which enters the trough and 
engages. With one of the blanks and moves the 
same forwardly, a conveyer-screw... against 
which the blank is moved by said finger and 
25 which continues the movement of the blank 
and clamping-jaws whereby the blanks are 
pressed against the conveyer-screw, substan 
tially as set forth. 
14. The combination with the feed-trough 
... 30 containing the stack or pile of blanks, of a 
conveyer-screw, clamping-jaws, and a tele 
Scopic actuating-shaft upon the parts of which 
said screw and jaws are respectively mounted, 
Substantially as set forth. 
15. The combination with a feed-trough 
containing the stack or pile of blanks, of a 
separating-finger engaging one of the blanks 
and moving the same forwardly in the trough, 
a conveyer-screw whereby the forward move 
4o ment of Such blank is continued, and a series 
of rotary separating-blades which continue 
and complete the separation of the blanks, 
Substantially as set forth. 
16. The combination with a feed-trough 
45 composed of longitudinal rotary shafts, of 
separating-blades mounted on said shafts, 
substantially as set forth. 
17. The combination with the blank-carry 
ing drum, of a feed-trough facing the periph 
5o eral portion of the drum, means whereby the 
blanks are successively fed against the pe 
ripheral portion of the drum, and a Wrapping 
device whereby the projecting portion of the 
blanks is laid against the peripheral portion 
18. The combination with a blank-carrying 
drum and means whereby the blanks are suc 
cessively fed against the peripheral face of 
the drum, of a Wrapping-screw having a con 
6o cave or conoidal face corresponding with the 
peripheral face of the drum, whereby the pro 
jecting portion of the blank is laid against 
the face of the drum and the blank is guided 
in moving with the drum along the concave 
65 face of said screw, substantially as set forth. 
19. The combination with the rotating 
55 of the drum, substantially as set forth. 
35 
 
75 
blank-carrying drum and mechanism where 
by the blanks are fed successively and ob 
liquely against the peripheral face of said 
drum, of a perforator arranged below said 
drum and adapted to perforate the exposed 
corner of the blank carried on the drum, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
20. The combination with the rotating . 
blank-carrying drum and mechanism where 
by the blanks are fed successively and 
obliquely against the peripheral face of said 
drum, of a threading mechanism arranged 
below said drum and adapted to draw the 
twine through the perforation in the exposed 
corner of the blank carried on the drum, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
21. The combination with the rotating 
blank-carrying drum and mechanism where 
by the blanks are fed successively and 
obliquely against the peripheral face of said, 
drum, of a perforator arranged below said 
drum and adapted to perforate the exposed 
corner of the blank carried on the drum, and 
a threading mechanism arranged below said 
drum and in rear of said perforator, substan 
tially as set forth. 
22. The combination with the blank-car 
rier, and the threading-needle, of twine-feed 
ing disks arranged at an angle to each other, 
substantially as set forth. 
23. The combination with the blank-car 
rier and the threading-needle, of twine-feed 
ing disks which are arranged at an angle to 
each other and one of which is provided with 
a peripheral guard-flange in the space be 
tween the disks, substantially as set forth. 
24. The combination with the blank-car 
rier and the threading-needle, of twine-feed 
ing disks arranged at an angle to each other 
and provided with a gap into which the needle 
enters and across which the twine extends, 
substantially as set forth. 
25. The combination with the blank-car 
rier, of a threading-needle, twine-feeding 
disks arranged at an angle to each other, a 
driving-shaft connected with one of said disks, 
and coupling-pins whereby the other disk is 
driven from the disk on said shaft, substan 
tially as set forth. 
26. The combination with the blank-car 
rier and a twine-feeding device, of a thread 
ing-needle, mechanism whereby a reciprocat 
ing rotating movement is imparted to the 
needle, and mechanism whereby the needle 
is given a partial turn back Wardly after it has 
seized the twine, substantially as set forth. 
27. The combination with a moving blank 
carrier, of a threading mechanism whereby 
the twine is drawn through the perforation 
of the blank,a knotting-hook arranged in rear 
of the threading-needle and past which the 
twine, drawn through the perforation of the 
blank, is carried by the movement of the 
blank-carrier, jaws which are arranged be 
tween the needle and hook and mechanism 
whereby the jaws are caused to impinge upon 
95 
OG 
IO5 
II. ? 
II 5 
I 25 
593,218 
17 
28. The combination with the knotter-hook, ber, 1896. 
the twine while the hook is tying the knot, ranged within said stem, substantially as set Io 
and afterward caused to cut the twine, sub- forth. 
stantially as set forth. 
of a pusher-rod whereby the twine is pushed 
into the bight of the hook, substantially as 
Set forth. 
29. The combination with the knotter-hook 
having a hollow stem, of a pusher-rod ar- 
Witness my hand this 28th day of Decem 
Witnesses: 
MARK J. TO VELL, 
T. E". "TRACEY. 
T. 
CARLOS HOLLY. L. s. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593318.txt	(No Model.) 
J. D. BAC0N. 
RECTAL APPLICATOR. 
No. 593,38, 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897, 
 
 
42a 
1.s 
Witnesses- 
y / (22-y 
us/ % 5.4, 
INyeNtor 
42%. 
zy 7zs /7% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES D. BACON, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS. 
RECTAL APPLICATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 593,318, dated November 9, 1897. 
Application filed May 20, 1897, Serial No. 637,315, (No model.) 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES D. BACON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Boston, 
in the county of Suffolk and State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented a new and useful 
Rectal Applicator, of which the following is 
a Specification. 
This is a device whereby a lubricant may. 
be applied laterally or radially therefrom to 
the rectum, impinging against and lubricat 
ing the Walls of the rectal passage. 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
pipe or tube of suitable material, preferably 
of hard rubber, such pipe being closed at its 
entering end and having the passage at its 
rear end flared. An annular groove isformed 
On the tube near its closed end and radial 
perforations are bored in the groove and con 
nect with the interior of the tube. A plun 
ger or piston fits into the tube and is furnished 
with a suitable handle. The plunger having 
been removed from the tube, a lubricant, such 
as a preparation of lard, is inserted in the de 
vice through the outer flared end of the pas 
Sage and pushed into the tube and the closed 
end of the instrument inserted in the rectum 
as far as possible, the operation being aided 
by a flange and annular depression, below de 
scribed. The plunger is then forced up the 
tube, with the effect of ejecting the lubricant 
therefrom radially or laterally through the 
perforations in the annular groove and caus 
ing it to fill said groove and impinge against 
and lubricate the Walls of the rectal passage. 
The nature and operation of the invention 
are fully described below and illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation or side view of my 
rectal douche. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec 
tion of the same, broken lines showing the 
plunger or piston partially withdrawn. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
SpOnding parts. 
A represents the body of the douche, con 
sisting of a pipe or tube closed at its forward 
or entering end A' and rounded at that point 
in order to preventinjury or discomfort when 
being inserted in the rectum. Next the closed 
end is an annular groove B, within which are 
a number of radial perforations B", connect 
ing with the interior of the tube. The outer 
end of the passage in the tube is flared at b, 
and an annular depression a extends from the 
Outer end of the tube toward an annular 
flange C, rigidly Secured upon it. A plunger or 
piston D fits into the passage and is provided 
with a suitable handle D'. All the parts are 
preferably made of hard rubber. 
In operation the piston D is removed and a 
suitable quantity of lubricant, such as a prep 
aration of lard, is applied to the interior of 
the tube through the flared end b of the pas 
sage, such flared end serving to prevent the 
lubricant from getting on the outside and al 
lowing a larger quantity to be inserted at a 
time. The piston D may then be used to 
push the lubricant toward the front end of 
the tube. The closed end A' is then pushed 
into the rectum as far as possible and the de 
Vice grasped by means of the annular de 
pression a and flange C and the piston pushed . 
in by means of its handle D' until the lubri 
cant is forced radially or laterally through 
the holes B into the groove B and against 
the walls of the passage. As the groove Bis 
near the entering end of the device, the lubri 
cant is discharged very near the contents of 
the rectum, especially, as is frequently the 
case in constipation, if the fecal matter is 
reached by the end A' of the instrument. As 
the holes are not in the end of the douche, 
they cannot become clogged or stopped by 
contact with the contents of the rectum in 
advance of the instrument, and as they are 
depressed from the surface of the instrument 
by opening into the groove B they cannot be 
come clogged by such of the contents as may 
be between the instrument and the walls of 
the rectal passage, especially as the groove 
itself is filled with lubricant expelled from 
the douche through said holes. As much lu 
bricant may be delivered and applied to the 
walls of the rectum as desired and thus se 
were cases of constipation relieved and hemor 
rhoids and constipation prevented and cured. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A rectal applicator, comprising a rigid 
tube closed and imperforate at its entering end 
and open at its opposite end, said tube being 
formed with an annular groove nearits closed 
end and having radial perforations in said 
groove connecting with the interior of the 
45 
 
55 
75 
8O 
85 
go 
95 
OO 
3. 
s 
598,318 
sion a near its open end, and having the en 
trance to the passage therein flared at by the 
annular flange C rigid on the tube next said 
depression; and a plunger or piston adapted 15 
to fit into said tube and force a lubricant 
through said perforations, substantially as 
set forth. 
JAMES D. BACON. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY W. WILLIAMS, 
A. N. BONNEY. 
tube; and a plunger or piston adapted to fit 
into said tube and force a lubricant radially 
or laterally through said perforations, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A rectal applicator, comprising a rigid 
tube closed and imperforate at its entering 
end and open at its opposite end, said tube 
being formed near its closed end with an an 
nular groove provided with substantially ra 
dial perforations connecting with the interior 
of the tube, formed with the annular depres 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593418.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 593,418. 
W. KOUZNEZOFF. 
HOT WATER ACCUMULATOR, 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897. 
THE MORRIS PETERS co. Photo-thic, was iNGTON. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WASILIY KOUZNEZOFF, OF MOSCOW, RUSSIA. 
HOT - WATER ACCUMULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 593,418, dated November 9, 1897. 
Application filed March 22, 1897. 
Serial No. 628,659, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WASILIY KoUZNEZOFF, 
a subject of the Czar of Russia, residing at 
MOSCOW, in the Empire of Russia, have in 
yented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Hot-Water Accumulators for Locomotives, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention has relation to apparatus for 
increasing the working capacity of a locomo 
tive to enable the same to perform its work 
with greater certainty or regularity and with 
less consumption of fuel; and in such connec 
tion it relates particularly to the general con 
struction and arrangement of the apparatus 
for said purposes. 
As practice has demonstrated, in the known 
type of six-wheeled locomotive it has not 
been possible to Work it to its full extent or 
capacity nor to vary the load with any degree 
of Saving without considerable outlay and 
Waste of the fuel in deriving the requisite 
power ordinarily required of present-day lo 
comotives. The most practical manner of 
remedying Such defects as above mentioned 
at the present time is to replace such a loco 
motive by another of more modern type. 
My invention has been designed and is so 
arranged that the Working power of the loco 
motive can be greatly increased at nominal 
expense, due to the employment of a simple 
and efficient form of apparatus in conjunction 
there with to insure a greater capacity or 
power being derived therefrom and in which 
it is possible to vary the load at will with a 
great saving by the avoidance of much of the 
waste of fuel incident to the use of present 
day locomotives. 
Myinvention, stated in general terms, con 
sists in providing a locomotive-boiler with a 
hot-Water accumulator and its accessories 
When constructed and arranged in connection 
With the boiler or with a tender at a conven 
ient distance therefrom, substantially as here 
in after described and claimed. 
The nature and scope of my invention will 
be more fully understood from the following 
description, taken in connection with the ac 
companying drawings, forming part hereof, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of an apparatus 
embodying main features of my invention in 
application to a locomotive-boiler of the type 
hereinbefore explained, and Fig. 2 is a rear 
elevational view of said apparatus. 
Referring to the drawings, A is a reservoir 
or accumulator, which is suitably located 
about or above the boiler B, or the same may, 
if desired, belocated in connection with a ten 
der (not shown) to be connected with the lo 
comotive, the accumulator being connected 
with the boiler or tender by pipes or tubes C, 
b, and c. These pipes or tubes may be differ 
ently arranged, if desired, so as to correspond 
with any alteration with respect to position 
of the accumulator A and are closed or opened 
by means of cocks Ci', b', or c'. The pipe or 
tube b is led from the accumulator into the 
boiler B and below the Water-level therein, 
while the tube or pipe c connects the accumu 
lator A with the dome C of the engine or with 
the steam-space of the boiler in its upper part 
thereof and the tube C of the accumulator A, 
with a pipe ac, provided with a valve y, with 
one of the injectors D. Of course it will be 
understood that my invention is not limited 
to the use of a single accumulator, as more 
than one may be employed with good results. 
The mode of operation of an apparatus of 
my invention is as follows: When the loco 
motive comes to a stop at a station or On a 
siding, the cock C is opened, so that the in 
jector D may blow out any air in the accu 
mulator A, or when the locomotive is in tran 
sit, in which only a certain amount of steam 
is required, the cock C is opened, so that 
steam may be conducted to the injector D by 
the pipes a and at and water forced or pumped 
into the boiler B. The cock b' is then grad 
ually opened, so that Water can pass from the 
boiler B to the reservoir or accumulator A, 
and when the steam has begun to issue from 
the injector D the cock C' is closed again, as 
the air has by this time been removed from 
the accumulator A. In this manner the Steam 
in the accumulator A is utilized to fill the 
boiler B with water by means of the injector 
D and is not uselessly blown into the atmos 
phere. After sufficient water has been led 
from the boiler to the accumulator, the level 
of which can be observed by means of the 
water-gaged, the cock b' is then closed and 
the cockc' is opened, so as to let steam into 
the accumulator A. The cock cremains open 
until the accumulator is emptied of its Water 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
75 
90 
OO 
593,418 
 
O 
into the boiler B. The locomotive in travel 
ing up gradients or inclines, when the water 
level in the boiler falls to the lowest limit 
the cock b' is opened until sufficient heated 
Water passes from the accumulator A into 
the boiler to raise the water-level in the lat 
ter to the necessary height, and when the top 
of the gradient or incline has been reached 
the said water-level in the boiler will be kept 
at the height required by means of the injec 
tor after the cock b' has been closed. The 
filling of the accumulator A with water is 
then effected as beforethat is, the cock c' 
is shut off, the cock a' is opened, and as soon 
as the steam begins to issue from the injec 
tor the cock a' is closed and the cock b is 
opened, and when there is sufficient water in 
the accumulator A the cock b' is also closed 
and the cock c' is opened. The steam pass 
ing from the pipe a can be used for feeding 
the boiler by means of the injector and also 
for heating the water in the tender. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
evident that the apparatus not only supplies 
heated water when most required without 
undue expense with respect to the heating of 
the same up to a temperature corresponding 
to ordinary steam-pressure, but it also pre 
vents waste of steam in the working of the 
". 25 
35 
40 
45 
injector to feed the boiler from the tender or 
other source. The volume of water in the 
accumulator represents the difference be 
tween the highest and lowest limit of water 
level in the boiler, and the effect of the ac 
cumulator is therefore to double the working 
power of the water. 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combination with a locomotive-engine 
having a boiler, a dome and an injector, of 
an accumulator or reservoir A, and pipes a, , 
b and c, provided with stop-cocks, the pipe b, 
from said accumulator being connected with 
said boiler below the water-level therein, the 
pipe C, from said accumulator being connected 
with said dome or steam-space of said boiler 
and the pipe a, from said accumulater being 
connected by means of a pipe ac, with said in 
jector, substantially as and for the purposes 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set, 
my signature in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
WASILIY KOUZNEZOFF. 
Witnesses: 
CASIMIR V. OSSOWSKI. 
OTTO ZOPIKE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593518.txt	(No Model.) 
G. F. DAWIDSON. 
INSECT TRAP. 
No. 593,518, 
Patented Nov. 9, 1897. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
I 
Himilm 
 
 
|| 
|| 
 
 
4627esses: 
21. 2ai:II i4 
22. 
253, 
2 
6 
NSSyaSNSNYSSYSYSNSSSSNSYNNN 
3. ES 85 
His: 
F 
d 
6 
w 
Zzzaza, 
 
the Norris Peters Co. PHoc-uto Washington. D. c. 
 
J. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE F. DAVIDSON, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
INSECT-TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 593,518, dated November 9, 1897. 
Application filed December 23, 1896, Serial No. 616,804, (No model.) 
55 
O 
To a 2Z whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, GEORGEF. DAVIDSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Insect-Traps; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the figures of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
insect-traps for catching insects, preferably 
for roaches, water-bugs, and the like; and the 
invention consists in the construction and 
novel combination of parts hereinafter de 
scribed, pointed out in the appended claims, 
and illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a top view of the box 
with its lid removed. Fig. 2 is a top view of 
the lid. Fig. 3 is a top view of the lid with 
the crevice-strips removed, and Fig. 4 is a 
cross-section of the device. 
Similar numerals of reference refer to simi 
lar parts throughout the several views. 
The box 5 is made of any suitable material, 
and its bottom is covered with adhesive sub 
stance 6 similar to that used for sticky fly 
paper in common use. The adhesive cover 
ing may be applied directly upon the bottom, 
of the box, but it is preferably used upon a 
sheet of suitable material cut to fit the bottom 
of the box, and is removably placed therein. 
Such sheet provides a removable covering, 
so it may be replaced with fresh sheets when 
needed. The lid 8 for the box 5 is provided 
with narrow slots 9 for the entrance of the 
insect. These slots 9 are so narrow that they 
resemble the crevices in which such insects 
usually escape and find refuge, such as are 
formed by shrinking of the woodwork in 
base-boards and around sinks, &c. They are 
preferably made just about large enough for 
the insect to pass through... Above these slots 
9 and near to them are placed crevice-strips 
10, which cover the slots 9 so they are not 
seen, and form crevice-passages to them on 
either side. This construction greatly aids in 
deceiving the insect, because they enter from 
a horizontal floor similar to the entrances the 
insect finds in base-boards and around sinks. 
Inside of the box 5 I place decoy-bridges 11 
transversely to the slots. These bridges may 
be placed parallel to the bottom of the box. 5; 
but I prefer to arch them and have their ends 
rest on the bottom of the box, as shown in 
Fig. 4. The purpose of this construction is . 
that when the insect passes through the slots 
9 into the box 5 it finds a safe landing on the 
bridge 11 and will follow it on down toward 
the adhesive substance 6, and will prefer this 
path to Wandering upon the under side of the 
lid 8. The insect thus moves nearer to the 
adhesive substance, and any flapping of its 
wings or moving of its tentacles will bring 
them in contact with the adhesive substance 
more readily and thereby capture the insect. 
Another advantage of the arched form is that 
smaller insects can follow down the bridge 11 
until they are very near the adhesive sub 
stance 6, and are therefore more easily en 
trapped. 
The trap as described is my preferable con 
struction for a complete trap; but the box 
provided with adhesive substance and made 
shallow and provided with a lid with the nar 
row slots described would form a good trap. 
If to this was added the crevice-strips 10, 
placed over the slots 9 to give a secret en 
trance, as described, it would aid the efficiency 
of the trap greatly; and if then we should 
add also the bridges placed transversely and 
parallel to the bottom. We would add more 
largely to the efficiency of the trap. These 
constructions may, therefore, be used sepa 
rately; but the preferable trap is the com 
plete one described. 
The operation is obvious from the descrip 
tion. The trap is baited with a piece of meat 
or other suitable bait, and is placed where 
the insects do most abound and left, say, over 
night. In the morning it is opened and it will 
be found that a large number of insects have 
been caught by the adhesive substance. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In an insect-trap, a box having its bot 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
45 
 
s 
tom covered with adhesive substance on the 
inside, and a lid for the box provided with one 
or more slots adapted to form crevice-open 
lingS. 
2. In an insect-trap, a box having its bot 
tom covered with adhesive substance; a lid 
for the box provided with one or more narrow 
slots; and strips over and near the slots 
adapted to form a crevice-entrance thereto. 
3. In an insect-trap, a box having its bot 
tom covered with adhesive substance; a lid 
O 
593,518 
for the box provided with one or more narrow 
slots; strips placed over and near the slots 
adapted to form a crevice-entrance thereto; 
and decoy-bridges placed within the box 15 
transversely to the slots. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
GEORGE. F. DAVIDSON. 
Witnesses: 
T. B. MEINCKE, 
H. R. L. WHITE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593618.txt	(No Model.) 
L. B. ST ACKHOUSE, 
- 
m 
BIB, 
No. 593,618. 
Patented Nov. 16, 1897. 
m 
X 
WZZ7(eyes. 
  
 
the NORRIS PETERS co, PHoTo-Lito. washinston.e. c. 
 
A72 Zvez22O71. 
Aezzves A. Szac%/zoese 
Az/ 72.2s eazz77zee/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LEWIS B. STACKHOUSE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO HENRY STRUNTZ, OF SAME PLACE. 
BB. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 593,618, dated November 16, 1897. 
Application filed July 9, 1896, Serial No. 598,596, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To di Luhon, it noty concern. 
Beit known that I, LEWISB. STACKHOUSE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in Phil 
adelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain Improvements in Bibs for Infants and 
Children, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of my invention is to so construct 
a bib for infants or children as to prevent the 
soiling or wetting of the front of the dress 
by liquid dropping from the mouth or from a 
Spoonin feeding, a further object of the inven 
tion being to so construct the bib that the same 
can be readily cleansed and dried. These ob 
jects I attain in the manner hereinafter set 
forth, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a child's 
bib constructed in accordance with my inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a modified form 
of bib embodying the invention, and Fig. 4 
is a sectional view of the same. 
When children are teething or have consid 
erable discharge of liquid from the mouth 
from any other cause, the ordinary bib is 
ineffective, as it soon becomes soaked, and 
thereby, unless frequently changed, increases 
the evil it is intended to prevent-that is to 
say, the wetting of the front of the childs 
dress and the ills likely to result therefrom. 
Even the padded bibs sometimes employed 
soon becomesodden, and in this condition are 
worse than the plain or unpadded bibs. 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
bib which will absorb and retain a large 
amount of liquid, but will prevent the same 
from wetting or even causing dampness in 
the front of the dress, the bib, however, being 
readily cleansed and dried when necessary. 
The bib shown in Fig. 1 comprises a back 
portion A and a front portion B, both pro 
vided, by preference, with straps D for pass 
ing around the neck of the child and support 
ing the bib in its proper position on the breast, 
the two straps being connected by means of 
a button C or other equivalent fastening. 
The use of these straps, however, is not ab 
solutely necessary to the proper carrying out 
of my invention, as any available means of 
- 
supporting the bib upon the person of the 
child may be adopted. 
The front and back portions of the bib are 
disconnected at the top, so that they form a . 
pocket for the reception of a sheet F, of oil 
cloth, rubber, waterproof paper, or equiva 
lent material impervious to moisture, this 
sheet of impervious material lying against 
the back A of the bib. Between the water 
proof sheet F and the front of the bib is a pad 
G, of sponge, absorbent cotton, or equivalent 
absorbent material, both the waterproof sheet 
and the pad being retained in the pocket of 
the bib by buttoning or otherwise securing 
together the front and rear portions of said 
bib at the top of the pocket, as shown, for 
instance, at b. 
A bib of this character will catch and re 
tain liquid flowing from the mouth of the 
child or liquid dropping from a spoon whereby 
the child is fed, the absorbent character of 
the pad G enabling the bib to be used for a 
considerable time before said pad becomes 
saturated, and the Waterproof sheet F effectu 
ally preventing the passage of liquid through 
the back of the bib and onto the dress of the 
child. 
The waterproof sheet and the absorbent pad 
can be readily removed from the pocket of the 
bib for being cleansed and dried, and when 
they are so removed the bib can be washed 
and dried with the same facility as an ordi 
nary single or unpadded bib, it being under 
stood, of course, that both the front and back 
of the pad are of textile material which will 
permit of such washing and drying. My in 
vention, however, is not specifically limited 
to a bib having a textile front and rear por 
tion forming a pocket. For instance, the rear 
portion of the bib may be made of Waterproof 
cloth or other impervious material, as at A' in 
Fig. 3, the outer portion B' of the bib being 
secured to the back portion by buttons d or 
other available fastenings, so that it can be 
readily removed for being cleansed and dried, 
the pad G', of sponge or other absorbent ma 
terialin this case occupying the space between 
the front and back of the bib. In this case 
the front of the bib may be of lace or other 
open work or ornamental fabric, and in either 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
95 
Oo 
2 
593,618 
case the front portion of the bib may be as is maintained in contact with the impervious 
ornamental as the taste of the maker may sheet, all of the parts being separable from 
Suggust. 
each other so as to be independently cleaned I5 
Having thus described my invention, I and dried, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
A child's bib consisting of a fabric portion, two subscribing witnesses. 
5 claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat- 
tent- 
a sheet of material impervious to moisture, 
and a pad of absorbent material, said sheet 
Io of impervious material being at the rear of 
the absorbent pad, and the fabric portion of 
the bib forming a pocket, whereby said pad 
LEWIS B. STACKIIOUSE. 
Witnesses: 
F. E. BECHTOLD, 
JOS. II. KLEIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593718.txt	(No Model.) 
T. J. FAY, 
ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN GAS MACHINE, 
No. 593,718, 
Patented Nov. 16, 1897, 
s 4. 
Z? 
WITNESSES : 
26.2 (3.a4, 7% 
gastr 
NH 
NVENTOR 
7. 92-e 
y:/7 
THE MORRISP2 Teas Co., rhoto-LTHC., washingtoN, d. c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
TIOMAS J. FAY, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE AMERICAN 
ELECTRIC COLD SUPPLY COMPANY, OF MAINE. 
ELECTRICA Ya DREWEN GAS WAC - N E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 593,718, dated November 16, 189?. 
Application filed February 25, 1897, Serial No. 625,053, (No model.) 
To all whon, it inctly C7-Ce?'70: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS.J. FAY, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Brooklyn, in 
the county of Kings and State of New York, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Electrically-Driven Gas-Ma 
chines, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
Thisinvention relates to electrically-driven 
Io gas-machines especially adapted for use in 
refrigerating systems. 
In some refrigerating processes it is cus 
tomary to use a gas which must be put under 
pressure by a power-driven pump. This gas, 
I5 which has a very bad odor and is otherwise 
obnoxious, sometimes leaks out of the appa 
ratus and becomes a nuisance. I locate the 
pump in a hermetically-sealed casing, and if 
the shaft of the driving-motor passes through 
2O a bearing in the side of such case to connect 
with the machine therein it is found that 
after a short period of use the bearing will 
have worn sufficiently to permit of the escape 
of the gas. The problem is to transmit the 
25 power to the pump or other machine in the 
casing without making it possible for leaks of 
this character to occur. An electric motor 
might be placed bodily inside of the sealed 
casing with the machine which it is to drive; 
3o but there are obvious objections to this, such 
as the necessary enlargement of the case and 
the inaccessibility of the motor when inspec 
tion or repairs are necessary. 
My invention provides a way for transmit 
35 ting power from an electric motor located 
Outside of the case to a machine located in 
side thereof without permitting of the escape 
Qf gas. This is accomplished by using a pe 
culiar type of electric motor in which the field 
4o magnet system forms of itself a sealed in 
closure connecting the motor and sealed case 
by a Sealed passage and passing the shaft of 
such a motor through said passage. 
The invention will be more fully described 
45 in connection. With the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of the appa 
ratus constituting my invention, and Fig. 2 
is a sectional detail illustrating a modification 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A repre 
5o of the invention. 
 
. 
sents ahermetically-sealed casing of any char 
acter or shape, which is supposed to contain, . 
or through which passes, a gas and which also 
contains a machine, such as a pump acting 
upon said gas. 
B is an electric motor whose field-magnet 
system b consists of a cylinder or other closed 
form of iron, having inwardly-directed pole 
pieces b', surrounded by coils of wiret. The 
ends of the field-magnet cylinder are closed 
by heads land b', respectively, the joint be 
tween the cylinder and the heads at b being 
made gas-tight. The head is not perforated 
at any point, but contains a central socket l' 
for the end of the armature-shaft. The other 
head b' is perforated at the center for the 
passage of the armature-shaft and in which 
it has its bearing, 
C is the armature of the motor, and c the 
armature-shaft. The shaft, as before stated, 
has one bearing in the socket b', while another 
bearing may be formed in the head b. The 
shaft passes through this latter bearing and 
through an opening C in the side of the sealed 
casing A. There may also be a bearing for 
the shaft in the opening a, but it is not nec 
essary. 
That portion of the armature-shaft exposed 
between the motor and the casing A is sur 
rounded by a sleeve or tube d, having flanges 
d' at each end, by which the ends are respec 
tively secured to the wall of the casing and to 
the head b of the motor. Packing-rings d 
are inserted to make the joints gas-tight. 
The gas in the casing A may have free access 
to the interior of the tube and may even escape 
to the interior of the motor, in case the arma 
ture-shaft bearing wears sufficiently, but it 
can never escape to the atmosphere outside 
and so become a nuisance. 
A modification of the invention is shown 
in Fig. 2, wherein the tube dis dispensed with 
and the bearing e for the armature-shaft is 
provided with a flangee", which may be bolted 
to the Wall of the casing A, a packing-ring e 
being inserted to make the joint tight. An 
obvious modification of this idea would be to 
place the bearing in the Wall of the casing A 
and bolt the flange to the headb of the motor. 
The invention, however, is not limited to any 
special construction, but comprehends a mo 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
i. 
593,718 
through which the armature-shaft leads, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. The combination of a sealed gas-casing, 
an electric motor located outside thereof and 
whose field - magnet system itself forms a 
Sealed Casing and a scaled tube oil sleeve (sol 
necting the motor and casing together and 
through which the armattle-shaft, leads, stil)- 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I subscribe my signa 
ture in presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS J. F.AY. 
Witnesses: 
IFRANK. S. OBER, 
IARRY BAILEY. 
tor whose field-magnet system constitutes a 
sealed casing, in combination with the sealed 
gas-casing and a sealed gas-passage connect 
ing the motor and casing together, through 
which passage the motor-shaft leads, it be 
ing understood that the term passage may 
mean one formed by a tube similar to Cl or 
merely one formed by the bearing or bearings 
of the shaft. 
IIaving thus described my invention, I 
1. The combination of a sealed gas-casing, 
an electric motor located outside thereof and 
whose field - magnet system itself forms a 
Sealed casing, and a Sealed gas-paSSage Con 
necting the motor and casing together and 
claim 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593819.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J. G., SMITH, 
TELEPHONE AND SIGNALING OR CALLING SYSTEM, 
No. 593,819, 
Patented Now, l 6, 1897. 
 
 
 
s 
YNAH 
y d 35. 
A. 
WITNESSES 
Garif. ared r 
M 
The Norris Perers co, Photo-liro. WAshington.e. c. 
s 
st 
INVENTOR 
Aze T.a 
sy 
ATTORNEY 
(No Model.) 
No. 593,819, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
J. G. SMITH, 
TELEPHONE AND SIGNALING OR CALLING SYSTEM. 
Patented NOW 
16, 1897. 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
crisperers co, PHOTO-Litho, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
If WENTOR 
A-6-6-2 
6. 
2. ArroRNEr 
an of 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES G. SMITH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE SMITH-VASSAR TELEPHONE COMPANY, OF NEW 
YORK. 
TELEPHONE AND SIGNALING OR CALLING SYSTEM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 593,819, dated November 16, 1897. 
Application filed April 4, 1895, Serial No. 544,40l., (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES G. SMITH, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
and county of New York, in the State of New 
5 York, have invented a certain new and use 
ful Improvement in Telephone and Signaling 
or Calling Systems, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to that class of sig 
Ionaling or calling systems in which several 
stations are located on a circuit and wherein 
any station or subscriber can call or signal 
to any other desired station without calling 
the intervening stations. In this class of 
I5 systems heretofore in use as known to me 
the bells at each station were all out of cir 
cuit with the line, and each station on the 
circuit was provided with a step-by-step or 
clockwork mechanism all arranged to work 
20 synchronously and in unison, such mechan 
ism when operated acting to place the signal 
ing instrument at a station in circuit with 
the line and to then cut it out of circuit, and 
so on through all the stations successively 
25 until the desired station was reached, in 
Which latter station its step-by-step or clock 
Work mechanism would operate to place its 
bell in circuit with the line and leave it in 
that position, so that it could be operated by 
My present invention differs from the above 
mentioned system in that all the stations on 
a line or circuit are in direct circuit with the 
call-bell or signaling instrument at one sta 
35 tion; also, in that no step-by-step or clock 
Work mechanisms operating in unison are 
used; also, in that the call-bell or signaling 
instrument at one station is normally in di 
rect circuit with a line leading from the pre 
4o ceding station on the circuit, in which latter 
station the line is broken, (or does not di 
rectly lead to the next preceding station,) 
and to permit two stations to communicate 
the line must be established between them 
In carrying out my invention I provide a 
series of stations or a circuit, and in each 
station is a signaling instrument connected 
With a Wire normally leading to ground or to 
5o a return-wire. A wire normally leads from 
45 in One or more intermediate stations. 
3o the calling station or subscriber. 
one station to the call-bell at the next station, 
and in the first-mentioned station the circuit 
is normally broken or does not lead directly 
back to a preceding station. In each station 
are devices for completing the line from a 55 
station on one side of it to a station on the 
opposite side of it, so as to establish a line 
from one station through an intermediate 
station to another station, the said devices in 
an intermediate station being operated by a 6o 
subscriber in a calling-station when he de 
sires to communicate with a station to be 
In thus establishing the circuit in 
called. 
said intermediate station to enable a calling 
station to communicate with a called station 65 
the bell at the intermediate station is cut from 
the line, so that it will not be operated by the 
calling subscriber. I may, therefore, say that 
my systemissectional, because there is no nor 
mal direct, or unbroken line running through 7o 
all the stations for operating the several call 
bells on the circuit, but a section of the line 
passes from one station to the call-bell at the 
next station, with no electrical devices, such 
as push-buttons, in normal connection with 75 
such line at the first-mentioned station. The 
said sectional wire, which leads from one sta- . 
. 
tion to the call-bell at the next station, is ar 
ranged to be brought into circuit with an 
other sectional wire at the first-mentioned 8o 
station by contacts operated directly by a de 
vice at that (the said first-mentioned) sta 
tion, the operation of that device acting also 
to break the circuit of the bell at that station. 
The said sectional wire serves two purposes: 85 
first, that of connecting two sectional lines 
at one station to make a through line be 
tween stations on opposite sides of the first 
mentioned station, and, second, the said sec 
tional line, when thus connected to another 90 
sectional line, serves to convey current to the 
bell at the called station from the calling 
station. It will be understood also that suit 
able magnets and make-and-break devices 
are utilized at the several stations by which 95 
the operations above outlined can be per 
formed, and that when the electrical devices 
in one station are operated to establish a line 
to the next station the devices in a station or 
stations beyond are not operated. 
IOC 
 
598,819 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
My improved system also utilizes two lines 
that pass or operate in one direction through 
all the stations on which are located the oper 
ating push-buttons or switches, one of said 
lines Serving with said sectional line to estab 
lish a through line out of said sectional line 
from Station to station and the other of said 
first-mentioned lines serving with said sec 
tional line, when the latter is so established as 
a through line, to enable a subscriber at one 
Station to call or signal to a subscriber at an 
Other Station. By this means a minimum of 
Wire can be provided. In connection with this 
portion of my improved system above set forth 
I provide a line or circuit passing through 
the Stations, which line or circuit has suit 
ably-arranged magnets adapted to operate 
the contacts that connect or join the portions 
of the Sectional line to break the last-men 
tioned line (after it has been established as a 
through line) and restore it as a sectional line, 
Which magnets also serve to operate the con 
tacts for the several bell-circuits to restore 
the circuit of each bell with its appropriate 
Sectional line. Suitable batteries and de 
vices are provided for energizing the mag 
nets in said line at the proper time, said de 
vices and batteries, by preference, being con 
nected with the before-mentioned two paral 
lel lines that pass through all the stations, as 
hereinafter set forth. The magnets of said 
through line are provided with shunts to cut 
out the magnets from the line after they have, 
as above stated, operated to restore the sec 
tional line to its normal condition. The said 
through line is, by preference, divided or ar 
ranged to operate only a few of its magnets 
at One time, for which purpose the line is ar 
ranged to be broken, whereupon a ground is 
formed whereby the magnetson a portion only 
of the line will be operated at once, devices be 
ing arranged to reconnect the divided portions 
Of the line as a series of magnets or stations 
are passed. For instance, between any five 
or ten stations (or other desired number) the 
line is arranged to be divided, so that only a 
limited number of its magnets need be op 
erated at a time. Thus the stations on this 
line or circuit are divided into series, and the 
magnets of each series of stations are cut out 
or shunted as that series of stations is passed. 
At each sectional or divided point on the cir 
cuit are devices for breaking the line and 
forming a local ground, as well as for con 
necting the sections of the line together to 
form a through line from one series of sta 
tions to the next, and so on, provision also, 
by preference, being made to shunt the mag 
nets of Said Section-joining devices from the 
line when a section of said line is to be passed, 
SO that the current will not have to traverse 
said magnets. 
I have also shown an improved arrange 
ment for a telephone-circuit wherein circuit 
wires pass through the stations and the tele 
phone devices in each station are normally 
out of circuit with said wires, the devices be 
ing so arranged that a subscriber cannot 
place his telephone in circuit with the line 
without operating the call-bell in another sta 
tion; and, further, when the last-mentioned 
call-bellis operated the telephone in the call 
ing-station is simultaneously placed in cir 
cuit with the telephone-wire. By this means 
a subscriber is prevented from trying to 
listen to a conversation on the line without 
immediately calling another subscriber who 
will naturally respond to see why he is called, 
and by answering back over the telephone 
line will apprise other subscribers who may be 
talking that some one is trying to listen. The 
advantages of this feature will be obvious. 
Provision is also made by which the telephone 
will be cut from the line when a subscriber 
has finished talking. 
In connection with my improved system as 
above outlined I provide novei arrangements 
of magnets, batteries, circuits, and grounds 
for the purpose of operating the system with 
as few main lines, contact - points, &c., as 
possible, so that the system when in use will 
be as reliable as possible and require little 
attention. 
The invention further consists in the novel 
details of improvement that will be more 
fully hereinafter set forth, and then pointed 
Out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part hereof, wherein 
Figure 1 is a diagrammatic view illustrating 
my improved signaling and telephoning sys 
tem complete, and Fig. 2 is a corresponding 
view showing a modified arrangement of 
parts and circuits for signaling from station 
to station. 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
similar numerals and letters of reference in 
dicate corresponding parts in the several 
Views, the letters ABCD indicate stations on 
a circuit at each of which the appropriate de 
vices, hereinafter set forth, are located. 
The numeral I indicates a line-wire which 
passes through all the stations and serves, as 
hereinafter shown, as part of the circuit for 
the call-bells or signaling instruments for the 
Stations on a circuit. 
2 is a line-wire also passing through all the 
stations, like wire 1, and it serves as part of 
a circuit to establish electrical connection 
between any two stations for the bell at a 
called station while cutting out the bell or 
bells at an intermediate station or stations. 
The Wire 1 includes a battery 3, and in the ex 
ample illustrated enters the battery at the 
negative pole and passes out from the positive 
pole thereof and is connected to a wire 4. The 
wire 2 likewise includes a battery 5 and, as 
shown, enters the battery at the positive pole 
and passes from the negative pole to the wire 
4, the wires 1 and 2 being connected with wire 
4 at 1. Thus when the circuit through wire 
is closed a positive current is discharged 
75 
95 
CO 
I O5 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
593,819 
3. 
5 
O 
15 
25 
through wire 4, and when the circuit through 
Wire 2 is closed a negative current is sent over 
the line 4, for a purpose set forth hereinafter. 
The Wire 4 forms part of a normal sectional 
circuit through the several stations for the 
purpose of connecting the stations together, 
as desired, and for operating the call-bell 
at the desired station. The batteries 35 are 
shown located at station A, the first station 
On the circuit. The wire 4 at each station 
leads, through suitable make-and-break con 
tacts, directly to a call-bell or signaling device 
6, the magnet of which is shown leading to 
ground 7 by wire 7, which I prefer to using 
a return-wire; but of course the latter could 
be provided instead of the ground. The mag 
nets of the call-bells are polarized, as for a 
positive current, so that the discharge from 
battery 3 when the circuit - wire 1 is closed 
will operate the desired bell. As stated, the 
Wire 4 at Station A, or the first station on the 
circuit, leads from wire 1 to the correspond 
ing bell 6, but does not lead directly to the 
bells of the other stations on the circuit. From 
each station, as A B CD, a wire 4 leads from 
a contact 4 to the bell at the next following 
station, as from A to B and from B to C, &c. 
The contact 4" is adapted to make electrical 
engagement with a contact 4 on a wire 4, that 
leads to a contact 4". The contact 4d is adapt 
ed to engage an armature or contact 9, that is 
connected, by a wire 4, with a wire 4, as shown. 
The parts above described are correspond 
ingly arranged at each station. Thus when 
contacts 4" and 4 are in engagement, as well 
as the contacts 4 and 9, at a station, as A, the 
bell-circuit will be established from A to B, 
directly to ground 7, through bell 6, at B, as 
follows: from 4 (at A) to 49, 9, 4d, 49, 4b, 48, and 
4 (from A to B) to bell 6 and ground 7 at B. 
The contact 4" is carried by an armature 10, 
from which it is insulated, and said armature 
also carries a contact 6, which is insulated 
from the contact 4", and is connected with 
the Wire 4 in its station. The contact 6 is 
adapted to make and break engagement with 
a contact 6', which leads, by a wire 69, to the 
magnet of the bell 6. In the normal position 
Of the armature 10 the contacts 6 and 6b in 
each station are in engagement to establish 
a normal circuit from the wire 4 through the 
bell-magnet to ground, while at the same time 
the contacts 4 and 4 are out of engagement, 
SO as to normally break the line from one sta 
55 tion to another. When the armature 10 is 
Operated in any station, it will break the cir 
cuit through its bell at 66 and establish the 
circuit at 4 4' directly to the bell at the next 
station, from 44 through 9, 4', 4', 4', and 49 to 
4 in the station that is operated, and so on 
Successively through the stations until the 
desired station is reached, without operating 
the devices at a station beyond the called sta 
tion. Thus it will be seen that the circuit 
for the bells is what I call sectional, be 
cause it is normally broken from station to 
station and yet adapted to be established from 
35 
45 
station to station successively; but there is no 
normally complete line at this part passing 
through all the stations. 
The armatures 10 are operated to break the 
bell-circuit in one station at 6' 6 and estab 
lish it at 4: 4 to the next station as follows: 
12 12 indicate magnets which are located on 
the wires 4 at each station and adapted to at 
tract the armatures 9, which latter, in Fig. 1, 
operate the armatures 10. As shown, the ar 
matures 10 have extensions 10, upon which 
the armatures 9 may bear to turn armatures 
10 on their pivots. The armatures 10 are 
dead' or not controlled by springs or grav 
ity, but remain in any position placed. The 
magnets 12 are in the example illustrated 
polarized to operate by a negative current 
when it is passed over the wire 4 from battery 
5, and they are adapted to attract the arma 
ture 9 to temporarily break the circuit 4 4 
at 4, while at the same time operating to 
break the bell-circuit at 6 and establish a 
through-circuit at 4 4 to the next station. 
The armature 9 also carries a contact l3, 
which is insulated from said armature and 
leads by a spur-wire 14 to one terminal of the 
magnet 12. The contact 13, when the ar 
mature 9 is attracted by the magnet 12, is 
adapted to engage a contact 15, that leads, by 
a wire 16, to ground, as 17. By this means 
when the magnet 12 at any station is ener 
gized and the ground 7 for wire 4 is broken 
a new ground is established at 17, so as to 
prevent the current from passing through 4 
and 49 to the station beyond until the proper 
time. 
With the arrangement so far described if 
a party at one station desires to call another 
station he sends a negative impulse from 
battery 5 through line 4, which energizes 
the magnet 12 in the intervening station, 
which magnet attracts its armature 9, the 
latter operating armature 10 to cause the lat 
ter to break the bell-circuit at that (the in 
tervening) station and establish connection 
with wire 4 at 44 to the next station. Ar 
mature 9, when attracted by magnet 12, as 
stated, also establishes the new ground 17 at 
1315 to keep the circuit temporarily broken 
at 9 4d. The negative current being next 
broken from the line, as by removing the fin 
ger from a push-button or operating a switch, 
allows the armature 9 to move back, which 
armature establishes the complete circuit at 
9 4 and breaks the ground-circuit 17 at 1315. 
The bell-circuit from one station to the next 
is thus established at station. A from the junc 
tion 1 of wires 1 and 2 with wire 4 to 4, 
through 9, 4', 4', 4', 4', and 4, and leads to 
the next station, as B, the circuit being thus 
completed to the bell at B without operating 
devices in stations beyond. A second nega 
tive impulse sent over the line will operate 
the armatures 9 and 10 in said next station 
B to make connection with the station beyond, 
C, and so on, a negative impulse being sent 
for each station between a calling and a called 
75 
95 
OC) 
IId 
II5 
I25 
4. 
593,819 
75 
O 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
50 
55 
station until the desired station is reached. 
A positive current now being sent from bat 
tery 3 through the line so completed from sta 
tion to station will energize the positive mag 
net in the instrument 6 at the station to be 
called, and thus give the desired signal. The 
through-line thus established from one sta 
tion to another can be restored to the normal 
sectional condition, as set forth hereinafter. 
In order to send the proper pulsation 
through the line to make connection at 4 4' 
from one station to another, as well as to op 
erate the signal device 6 at the desired sta 
tion, suitable push-buttons or switches can 
be connected with the lines 1 and 2. 
I have 
shown a suitable arrangement for the pur 
pose, as follows: At each station is a push 
button 18, that is connected with the line 1, 
as by a wire 19, and with ground 20, as by 
Wire 21, or the buttons 18 could be included 
in a return metallic circuit. The wire 2 is 
also connected by a wire 22 with a contact, 
as a, which leads to ground 20 or 20 or to said 
return metallic circuit. While this contact 
C may be a push-button to be operated once 
for each station to be passed in reaching a 
desired station, I preferably provide a series 
of such contacts, as a b c d, one for each sta 
tion on the circuit, said contacts being all con 
nected together, as by the wire 22, which 
leads to wire 2. The contacts C1, b c d, &c., 
Will be engaged by an arm 23, which is con 
nected with ground, as 20, by wire 22, so 
that as arm 23 is turned, making contact with 
a, b c d, a suitable number of impulses will be 
sent over the line from battery 5; but of course 
any suitable arrangement for this purpose can 
be provided. 
Means for restoring the bell-circuits 4, &c., 
to their normal sectional conditions are pro 
provided as follows: 25 is a line-wire passing 
through the stations, as shown, and prefer 
ably grounded at the end of the line farthest 
from A, (the first station,) the circuit through 
wire 25 being normally broken at station A. 
For this purpose the wire 25 is shown at A 
provided with a contact 26, adapted to be 
engaged by a spring-acting armature 27, which 
leads, by a wire 2S, through a battery 29 to 
ground 30, whereby when the armature 27 
engages the contact 26 the wire 25 will be sup 
plied with current to energize magnets 36 on 
wire 25, which thereupon attract their re 
spective armatures 10 to restore the circuit 
in the several stations, as hereinafter shown. 
For convenience in operating my system 
with as few wires as possible I have provided 
a double magnet 3132 for armature 27, which 
must be energized by batteries 3 and 5 to 
gether in order to attract the armature 27, the 
spring 27 for said armature being of suffi 
cient strength to resist the action of one bat 
tery 3 or 5. The coil 31 of the double magnet 
is connected with wire 1 and battery 3, while 
the coil 32 is connected with wire 2 and bat 
tery 5, the wires 1 and 2 being also connected 
together at 1 at station A. 
In Fig. 2, 33 is a push-button connected by 
wires 34 35 with the wires 1 and 2, respec 
tively, so that when the circuit is closed in 
said push-button 33 a local circuit is estab 
lished through the double magnet to include 
the batteries 3 and 5. By preference, how 
ever, I utilize the arm 23 to close the circuit 
between wires 1 and 2, as shown in Fig. 1. 
In this figure wires 34 and 35 are shown con 
nected with wires 19 and 22, respectively. 
Wire 34 is connected with a contact 34, 
adapted to be engaged by a switch 34, which 
is connected by a wire 34 with a long contact 
33, mounted on the board or box E, which 
latter carries the contacts a b c d, &c., and the 
rotative arm 23. The wire 35 is connected 
with a spring-acting contact 35", adapted to 
engage contact 33, but normally out of en 
gagement therewith, the arm 23 being ar 
ranged when passing over the contact 35 to 
press it (contact 35) into engagement with 
contact 33, whereby the circuit will then be 
established from 2 through 22, 35,35, 33, 34, 
34, 34, 34, and 19 to wire 1. This takes place 
at the end of movement of a Plm 23 over con 
tacts C lic d, &c. In order that arm 23 will 
also close the circuit between Wires 1 and 2 
as it starts to move over contacts C l) cd, &c., 
to insure the normal positions of armatures 
10 when starting to make a call, the contact 
35 is connected by a wire 35 with a contact 
35, (like 35,) also adapted to engage contact 
33, but normally out of circuit with the lat 
ter. Thus when arm 23 Stal'ts to move from 
Zero (0) it presses contact 35 into engage 
ment with contact 33, whereupon the circuit, 
will be from wire 1 to 19, 34, 34, 34, 34, 33, 
35, 35, 35, 35, and 22 to wire 2. 
The switch 34 is for use when there are 
more stations on a circuit than there are con 
tacts Ct. b c d. For instance, Suppose there 
are two hundred stations on a circuit and 
only one hundred contacts (t ) C cl, &c. To 
reach any station up to one hundred, the 
switch 34 will be left in engagement with 
contact 34 and arm 23 turned accordingly, 
and when arm 23 is first turned it will close 
circuit 35 33', &c., to connect wires 1 and 
2 to operate armature 27 to close the circuit 
through wire 25, so as to assure that all the 
armatures 10 on the circuit shall be in their 
normal positions, as hereinafter shown. Arm 
23 will continue to be turned, making engage 
ment with all contacts (, b. c. d, &c., until the 
desired contact is reached-say 75 (the called 
station)-during which movement of arm 23 
the armatures 9 and 10 will operate one at a 
time and successively in all stations between 
the calling-station and the called station 75 
to form a through line to the called station, 
as before stated; but should a station num 
bered more than one hundred be desired 
Say No. 175-the switch 34 will first be moved 
away from contact 34 and then arm 23 will 
be given one complete turn, covering one hun 
dred stations, and then continued to contact 
75, (making one hundred and seventy-five in 
90 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
593,819 
5 
all,) whereupon connection will be made to 
station 175. Push-button 18 will then be op 
erated to signal in station 175. Switch 34 
Will then be returned to contact 34, and when 
arm 23 is returned to zero contact 35 will be 
moved by said arm into engagement with 
COntact 33 to close the circuit between wires 
1 and 2 to operate the magnets on wire 25. 
The circuit through wires 1 and 2 is com 
pleted as follows: in Fig. 2, from 33 34 to 1 
or from the above-described switching de 
vices through 34 19 131 to battery 3, thence 
through 12, through battery 5 to coil 32, 2, 
22, and 35 to 33, &c., (or in Fig. 2 through 
35 to 33.) Both batteries 3 and 5 now act on 
the coils of the double magnet 3132 with suf 
ficient force to attract the armature 27 and 
establish the circuit through wire 25 from 
ground 30. The contact at 33 or 35' 35 is 
preferably made of long duration to insure 
the closing of wire 25 for a sufficient length 
of time for the purpose desired. 
The Wire 25 at each station on the circuit 
includes a magnet 36, which is adapted to at 
tract the corresponding armature 10 to break 
the completed circuit 4 at 4 49 and restab 
lish the circuit for the corresponding bell 6 
Shunts are provided around the 
at 6 6. 
magnets 36, which shunts are closed when 
the armatures 10 are in their normal posi 
tions. For this purpose said armatures are 
shown connected by wires 37 with the wire 
25, and said armatures are adapted to nor 
mally engage contacts 38, that lead by wires 
39 to wire 25, the parts 37,10, 38, and 39 form 
ing the shunts around magnets 36. When a 
magnet 12 attracts its armature 9, and thus 
moves armature 10, the shunt around the cor 
responding magnet 36 will be broken, so that 
when the circuit in Wire 25 is closed at 26 27 
the magnet 36, whose shunt is broken, will 
be energized to attract its armature 10 to re 
store the latter to its normal position. The 
shunts around magnets 36 serve to reduce 
the size or amount of battery 29 that would 
be necessary were the circuit 25 directly and 
permanently maintained through the mag 
nets 36. 
To further reduce the requirements of the 
battery 29, I preferably arrange the line 25 to 
be divided or broken into sections, these sec 
tions including a number of stations in a se 
ries, say five or ten. In the example shown 
there are three stations in a series (ABC) 
included in a section of wire 25, which is for 
simplicity of illustration. The sections of 
Wire 25 are normally connected together, and 
are broken or separated and a ground pro 
vided for a section when a station beyond any 
series of stations is operated. For this pur 
pose the Wire 25 at a point between the last 
station of one series (C) and the first station 
of the next series (D) is provided with a mag 
net 40, whose spring-actuated armature 41 
normally engages a contact 42 on a wire 43, 
which leads to a contact 43 on the armature 
10 and insulated therefrom. In this case 
Wire 37 leads from armature 10 to wire 25 at 
a point to normally shunt magnet 40 from 
wire 25. In the example shown in Fig. 1 the 
contact 43 (when armatiure 10 in the first sta 
tion of a certain series of stations, as D, is 
operated by the magnet 12 at that station) is 
adapted to engage a contact 45, which leads 
by wire 46 to ground at 47 to establish a ground 
for the corresponding section of line-wire 25. 
When the parts are all in their normal posi 
tions and the circuit through wire 25 is closed 
at 26 27, the circuit will be directly through 
wire 25, shunting magnet 40; but if armature 
10 at the first station of a second series, as D, 
has been operated in reaching a station be 
yond it the wire 25 will find ground at 47, 
through 40, 41, 42, 43, 43, 45, and 46, for the 
first series of stations, whereby all magnets 
36 on said section of wire 25 that is grounded, 
as stated, will attract their respective arma 
tures 10 to cause the latter to break the line 
4 into its normal sectional condition and re 
store the ground-circuits for the bells, and 
also restore the shunts around said magnets 
36. At the same time magnet 40 will be en 
ergized and attract its armature 41 to break 
ground 47 at 42. Armature 41, which is nor 
mally connected with wire 25, is thus brought 
into engagement with a contact 48, connected 
by a wire 48 with the next section of wire 25, 
leading through the magnet 36 at D, and 
through wire 25 for the second series of sta 
tions, &c., the line 25 being thus restablished 
to the second series of stations. If armature 
10 in the first station of the third series of 
stations on Wire 25 has been operated, the 
same action will take place there to restore 
all armatures 10 in the second series of sta 
tions, and so on through all the series of sta 
tions on Wire 25, as the case may be, operat 
ing only a few magnets 36 at a time. Thus 
all the magnets 36 in a series of stations on a 
Section of Wire 25 are shunted from the line 
as the series of stations is passed, so that the 
current will not have to traverse them to 
reach a station or stations beyond, the only 
magnet then being in circuit with wire 25 be 
ing magnet 40. 
To prevent the current from continuing to 
traverse a magnet or magnets 40 when any 
armature 10 in a station or stations beyond a 
section of wire 25 has been operated, as well 
as in the normal condition of line 25, I pro 
vide for shunting the magnet or magnets 40 
from the wire 25. This may be done as foll 
lows, (see Fig. 1:) From the wire 25 in ad 
vance of magnet 40, or the inlet-terminal of 
the magnet 40, the wire 37 extends to arma 
ture 10 at the first station of a series, as ID, 
the normal circuit then being from 25, around 
magnet 40, through wire 37 at D, to arma 
ture 10, to 38 and 39, to 25 again, thereby 
forming a normal shunt around both magnets 
40 and 36 at the first station of each series on 
the sectional line beyond station A. Thus, 
as above outlined, the normal circuit of wire 
25 is directly through all the stations, shunt 
I5, 
2O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
75 
95 
Od 
IO5 
TIO 
II5 
I 25 
6 
593,819 
IO 
35 
40 
45 
55 
ing the magnets 36 and 40, but when an arma 
ture 10 at the first station of a series has been 
operated in reaching stations beyond it said 
line is broken at that point and a new ground 
formed at 45 47 to permit the magnets 36 on 
a section of wire 25 to act to close their 
shunts, the magnet 40 then attracting its ar 
mature 4 to establish the line 25 at 41 4S 
through wire 4S and magnet 36, so that mag 
net 36 of the first station of the next series 
can operate its armature 10 to restablish the 
shunt 3710 39 to shunt, magnets 40 and 36 
from wire 25, and so on through circuit 25 as 
any stations are passed whose armatures 10 
may have been operated in selecting the sta 
tion desired. Thus the current from battery 
29 is only required to operate a few magnets 
36 at a time, although a large number may be 
in line to be operated. By this means I am 
enabled to use a smaller battery than would 
be required were all of the magnets 36 and 40 
left in the line to be operated simultaneously. 
In Fig. 2, instead of the shunt around mag 
nets 36 and 40 being broken through wire 39 
at 38, the wire 37 has a contact. 37 in normal 
engagement with the armature 10, and when 
said armature is operated the shunt is broken 
at 37, the line 25 being restablished at 414S 
through 4S to 25, when armature 41 is oper 
ated by magnet, 40. 
In connection with the calling or signaling 
System I have provided a telephone-circuit, 
with a suitable telephone instrument in each 
station. In this connection I have arranged 
the telephones so that they will be normally 
out of circuit with the telephone-line leading 
through the stations on a circuit, arrange 
ments being provided so that when a station 
is called its telephone will be placed in circuit 
With the line, and at the same time the oper 
ation of calling will also place the telephone 
at the calling-station in the circuit, whereby 
the calling and called stations are put in com 
lmunication, this operation affecting the tele 
phones at no other stations on the circuit. 
In order to carry out this idea, the following 
arrangement is shown: 
52 and 53 are telephone line-wires leading 
through the stations on a circuit, and 54 and 
55 are spur-wires at each station leading from 
the telephone-wires 5253, respectively, which 
may be arranged on the circuit in well-known 
manner. The spur-circuit 54 55 is normally 
broken in each station, and in order to close 
Said circuit when a station is calling or called 
the Wire 54 is shown connected with a con 
tact or armature 56, that is adapted to engage 
a COntact 57, connected with wire 55. When 
contact or armature 56 engages contact 57, 
the circuit through the telephone at that sta 
tion will be closed to enable said instrument 
to operate. It is designed that the armature 
56 Will be operated to close the circuit 54 55 
in a station to be called only when a signal 
ing instrument in such station has been or is 
being operated, and for this purpose the wire 
7 for the bell 6 is provided with a magnet 
58, adapted to attract armature 56 when the 
bell at one station is operated from another 
station. 
In order that the telephone at the calling 
subscriber's station will be placed in circuit 
with the line-wires 52 53 only when he sig 
mals to another station, the magnet 58 has a 
second coil 5S, connected with wire 21 of 
push-button 18, the coil 58 also acting on 
contact or armature 56 to close the telephone 
circuit at 56 57. Thus when a calling sub 
scriber closes his button 18 to signal to a called 
subscriber the coil 58 in the calling-station 
will attract, its armature 56 to close the cir 
cuit for the telephone in the calling-station, 
and the coil 5S in the called station will like 
wise operate its armature 56 to close the cir 
cuit for the telephone in its station. Thus 
a calling subscriber places his telephone and 
the called-subscriber's telephone in circuit 
when he rings the latter's bell 6. 
When they have finished talking, each sub 
scriber breaks his telephone-circuit, which 
may be done as follows: The armatures 56, 
which are dead armatures, have magnets 
60, which, when energized, attract their re 
spective armatures 56 to break the telephone 
circuits at 56 57. For this purpose I have 
shown a local circuit 61 for each magnet 
60, having a battery 62 and a switch G3 to 
make and break the local circuits. In the nor 
mal positions the circuits 61 are open and 
contacts 56 57 disengaged. After armature 
or contact 56 has closed the telephone-cir 
cuit and the talking has ceased the respec 
tive switches 63 are turned to close the local 
circuits G1, whereupon magnets 60 attract the 
armatures 56 and break the telephone-cir 
cuits, the local circuits (31 being thereupon 
again broken and left so. 
The complete operation of my improved 
system is as follows: If any subscriber on a 
circuit desires to call station A or the first 
station on the circuit, it is only necessary for 
him to close the circuit through line 1 at 
push-button 18, when a positive current will 
pass from battery 3 through wire 4 at A by 
way of contacts 6' 6 and wire 6 to the bell 
6 and ground 7, whereupon a signal at 6 in 
station A will be given, while at the same 
time the contacts 56 in the calling and called 
stations will be attracted by their respective 
coils 58 and 5S to place the respective tele 
phones in circuit with the telephone-wires. 
Should it be desired to signal to station IB or 
any other station on the circuit beyond A, 
the bell 6 at the intermediate station or sta 
tions must be cut from the line and the sec 
tional line through 4 from one station to an 
other must be established as a through line 
from the calling to the called station. For 
this purpose one or more impulses are sent 
along the line from battery 5, according to 
the number of intermediate stations, where 
by a negative current is discharged. Thus 
if station B is desired the switch-arm 23 will 
be turned to engage contact (, in the calling 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
593,819 
9o 
95 
station. Then magnet 12 at station A, now in Fig. 1 (or from 33 in Fig. 2) through 34 19 
receiving negative current, will attract its 1, coil 31, (of the double magnet,) battery 3 to 
armature 9, breaking the line through 4 at 
12, battery 5, coil. 32, line 2, and wire 38 
49, also operating the corresponding arma 
back to the switch-box or to 33, thereby en 
ergizing both magnet-coils 3132 and attract 
ture 10. This movement of armature i?) 
breaks the bell-circuit, at station A, at 6' 6 
ing armature 27, which closes the circuit for 
and also breaks the shunt around magnet 36 
line 25 to include its battery 29. Line 25 
now being charged, energizes its magnet 36 75 
at 38 10 and establishes the circuit at 4 4 
between the wire 49 at A and the line 4, 
at station A, which was described as the first 
which leads to the bell at B, the complete 
one operated. This magnet 36 now attracts 
circuit for wire 4 to the next station being 
its armature 10, which restores the bell-circuit 
at 6 and 6 and the shunt around magnet 36 at 
still broken at 49 in station A. When arma 
38 10, breaking the circuit of wire 4 at 4 4. 
ture 9 is thus attracted, it establishes the new 
ground 17 for magnet 12 by the closing of 
in station A, leaving the line to be again 
contacts 1315, so that notwithstanding that 
used, as before described. Likewise if the 
the circuit to ground 7 is broken at 6' 6 ar 
other stations on the first Section of wire 25 
mature 9 will not return until the proper 
had been operated the several magnets 36 
time. The circuit at 23 is next broken by a 
would have operated their armatures 10 to re 
continued movement of arm 23 away from 
store the circuits in all of said stations si 
multaneously to their normal conditions; but 
contact a, and armature 9 moves back to com 
plete the circuit through line 4 at 9 4d in sta 
if the devices at station D (or the first station 
tion A. Thus a throughline is established 
on the second section of wire 25) had been op 
from A to B without operating any circuit 
erated in reaching a station or stations beyond 
changing devices beyond A. To signal to 
D the wire 25 would have found ground for 
station B, now, it is only necessary to push 
its first section at 47 through 4345, and none 
button 18 in the calling-station, whereupon 
but the magnets 36 on the first section of wire 
a positive current will be discharged from 
25 would have been operated until magnet 40 
battery 3, following the circuit from 1, 1, and 
had attracted its armature 41. Thereupon ar 
4 to 4, 9, 4', 4', 4', and 4", at station A, to 4, 
mature 41 would close line 25 at 41. 48, join 
leading to station B, thence, without energiz 
ing the two sections together, whereby mag 
ing magnet 12 at B, because it is negatively 
net 36 at station D of the second section of 
polarized, to 6' 6' 6", through bell-magnet 6 
wire 25 (and any other magnets 36 on the sec 
to ground 7 at B, thereby giving the signal, 
ond section of wire 25, whose shunts are 
broken) will operate to attract its (or their) 
while at the same time the telephones at the 
calling and called stations are placed in cir 
armature 10. This movement of arimature 10 
cuit with their wires 5253,as before explained. 
at D breaks the ground 47 at 43 45 and re 
Should any stations beyond B be desired, the 
stores the shunt around magnet 36 in station 
switch-arn 23 is turned to the appropriate 
D at 38 10, thus shunting both magnets 36 
number, thereby sending a negative impulse 
and 40, leaving a through line to the next 
through the circuit for each intermediate sta 
section of wire 25, and so on. Thus as each 
section of wire 25 is passed only the magnets 
tion between the calling and the called station 
Without operating the devices in the called 
36 on that section are operated at once, and 
station or a station beyond. Thus each time 
as soon as that is done the next section upon 
the devices in an intermediate station are op 
which any stations have been operated are 
joined in the line, and so on. By this means 
elated the bell at the intermediate station is 
only a limited number of magnets 36 will use 
cut from circuit with its wire 4, and the sec 
tional circuit is established at that station as 
the current from battery 29 at once. 
a through circuit to the next station, and so on 
It will be understood from the foregoing 
description that the call-bell and circuit 
till the desired station is reached. When the 
devices in station Dare operated (or the first 
changing devices in each station are normally 
station beyond a series of stations on a sec 
wholly separated from the next, but that each 
station can be connected with the next, the 
tion of the wire 25) to reach a station or sta 
tions beyond, the armature 10 at D, in addi 
devices operating one at a time and succes 
tion to breaking the bell-circuit and estab 
sively to break the call-bell circuit and estab 
lishing the circuit through wire 4 to the next 
lish a through line at each station operated 
station, also establishes the new ground 47 at 
and that one station is reached without oper 
ating the circuit-changing devices in any sta 
45 43 and breaks the shunt around magnets 
40 and 36 at 38 to permit magnet 40 to be 
tion beyond. 
energized by way of ground 47. After the 
In the modification shown in Fig. 2 the op 
calling and telephoning is finished the call 
eration is substantially the same as in Fig. 1; 
ing-subscriber should restore all the circuits 
but instead of having the armature 9 act di 
to their normal condition. This is done by 
rectly on armature 10 the line 4 is provided 
with a magnet 11, polarized for a negative 
closing the circuit through both batteries 3 
current, like magnet 12, and is arranged to 
5 as arm 23 returns to zero, in accordance 
with the devices shown in Fig. 1, or by press 
directly attract armature 10 simultaneously 
with the operation of magnet 12 on armature 
ing button 33, as in Fig. 2. When this is 
done, the circuit leads from the switch-box 
9. In this case wire 4 leads from armature 
w 
I 25 
Od 
Ios 
O 
I 15 
15 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 
8 
593,819 
75 
9 to Wire 4 outside of magnet 11, so that the 
Current when passing through one station to 
another station (after the connection at 44 
and 9 4' has been established) need not trav 
erse magnet 11. In this case when the nega 
tive current first reaches a station it passes 
through wire 4 and through both magnets 11 
and 12 to ground 7. Both magnets are then 
energized and attract their armatures 9 10, 
breaking the bell-circuit at 6, establishing 
the through circuit to the next station at 4:4, 
and when the magnets are deemergized the ar 
mature 9 moves back to complete the through 
circuit to the next station at 94. In Fig. 2 
also the shunt-wire 37 at station D is not 
permanently connected with the armature 10, 
but leads to contact 37, which normally en 
gages almature 10 at station D, or the first 
station of a series on wire 25. When arma 
ture 10 at D is attracted by its magnet 11, 
the shunt through 37 is broken at 37, and a 
ground is established from 41 through 42 43 
43 45 46 to ground 47. 
It will be evident that the arrangement of 
Contacts, armatures, magnets, wires, shunts, 
&c., can be altered without departing from 
the spirit of my invention, the arrangement 
being shown in diagram to more clearly illus 
trate the features of my improved system. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of Stations, a circuit for said stations di 
vided into sections in each station, and elec 
trically-operating devices in each station ar 
ranged to be operated directly from aay of 
the Stations for connecting two sections of 
Said circuit together to establish a through 
line between any two of said stations, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In an electrical signaling system, a plu 
rality of stations, a wire from each station to 
another, electrically-operating devices in each 
station, and means in each station for operat 
ing said devices in any other station for con 
necting two of said wires in a station together 
to establish a through line between any two 
stations, to permit a current from a calling 
Station to be sent over the wires so connected 
as a through line, to Operate a signaling in 
Strument at a desired station located on said 
wire, substantially as set forth. 
3. In an electrical signaling system, a plu 
rality of stations, a wire from each station to 
another, electrically-operating devices in each 
station, and means in each station for operat 
ing said devices in any other station for con 
necting two of said wires in a station together 
to form a through line between two stations, 
a separate circuit passing through said sta 
tions and connected with the first-mentioned 
Wire in One station, and means in each sta 
tion on Said separate circuit arranged to op 
erate the circuit-changing devices, and other 
means in each station to operate a signaling 
instrument in a called station after the two 
Wires between two stations have been so con 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Go 
nected together as a through line, substan 
tially as set forth. 
4. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a plurality of wires, each of which re 
spectively leads from one station to the sig 
naling instrument in another station, and 
electrically-operating devices in each station, 
comprising a magnet and almature, connected 
with the respective wire leading to their sta 
tion arranged to act by a single impulse to 
connect two of said wires together to form a 
through line between a calling and a called 
station, Substantially as set forth. 
5. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a plurality of wires which lead suc 
cessively from one station to the signaling in 
strument in the next station, electrically-op 
erating devices in each station arranged to 
operate one at a time and successively to suc 
cessively connect two of said wires together 
to form a through line between two stations 
without operating the wire - connecting de 
vices in stations beyond, a separate circuit 
leading through said stations and having elec 
trical devices for operating the first - men 
tioned electrical devices to establish a through 
line between two stations, and means in each 
station for operating the signaling instrument 
in the called station, substantially asset forth. 
6. A signaling or calling system comprising 
a plurality of stations, signaling instruments 
at each station, a wire leading from each sta 
tion to and through the signaling instrument 
at the next station, and electrically-operating 
devices in each station for breaking connec 
tion between the corresponding signaling in 
strument, and its wire in one station, and for 
thereupon establishing connection between 
the wires from stations on opposite sides of 
said station to form a through line to the sig 
naling instrument in the called station, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
7. A signaling System comprising a plural 
ity of stations, signaling instruments in each 
station, a wire in a station disconnected from 
the signaling instrument in that station and 
leading to and through the signaling instru 
ment in the next station, electrically-operat 
ing circuit-changing devices in each station 
connected with the respective separate wire 
that leads into that station for breaking the 
circuit of the signaling instrument from said 
wire and for connecting the wires leading 
to and from two stations on opposite sides of 
it, to form a line from one station through 
an intermediate Station to another station, a 
separate circuit passing through all the sta 
tions and connected with the first-mentioned 
wire in one station, and means in each sta 
tion on said separate circuit for sending an 
impulse to the circuit-changing devices to 
operate them successively as desired, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
8. A signaling system comprising a plural 
OO 
lo5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
593,819 
9 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a plurality of wires each normally 
leading from one station to and through the 
signaling instrument in the next station, said 
Wires being normally disconnected, in each 
Station. Whence they start, from the wire lead 
ing to the signaling instrument in that sta 
tion, a magnet in each station on the respec 
tive wire, whose armature is adapted to con 
nect the Wire leading to said magnet with the 
Wire leading from said station to the next 
station, to form a through line between two 
stations and to shunt said magnet from the 
throughline When it is so connected,a wire also 
passing through said stations, and devices at 
each station. On the second-mentioned wire to 
operate the said magnets to form a through 
line, substantially as set forth. 
9. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a separate wire leading from each sta 
tion to and through the signaling instrument 
in the next station, a branch wire in each sta 
tion, and electrically - operating devices in 
each station for connecting said branch wire 
in any station with the Wires leading to and 
from its station, to establish a through line 
from a calling to a called station through 
said branch wire and for breaking the con 
nections of the signaling instrument from its 
wire in stations between a calling and a called 
station, so that the corresponding signaling 
instrument Will not be operated when its wire 
is connected with the branch wire, substan 
tially as set forth. 
10. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a wire leading from each station to 
and through the signaling instrument in the 
next station, and SO on throughout the series 
of stations, a movable contact in each station 
to break the circuit of the signaling instru 
ment With its Wire, a branch wire in each sta 
tion normally in connection with the wire 
leading into its station, a movable contact in 
each station arranged to establish connection 
between said branch wire and the wire that 
leads from its station, electrically-operating 
devices in each station for actuating the cor 
responding movable contacts to break the sig 
naling instrument from its line and establish 
a through line through the branch wire, and 
a circuit passing through said stations having 
devices for operating said contacts, as and 
for the purposes specified. 
11. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of Stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a Wire leading from each station nor 
mally to and through the signaling instru 
ment in the next station, electrically-operat 
ing devices in each station located on the re 
spective wire leading thereto, and arranged 
to connect two of said wires in a station to 
gether, between a calling and a called station, 
Without operating the electrical devices in a 
Station beyond, thereby establishing a through 
line out of said separate wires directly to the 
signaling instrument in a called station with 
Out Operating any devices in the latter sta 
tion, a circuit leading through all the stations 
and connected with the first-mentioned wire 
in One station, means on said separate circuit 
for sending an impulse to any number of sta 
tions, for Operating their respective electrical 
devices, to connect two wires together, and 
means in each station for operating the sig 
naling instrument in a called station after a 
through line is so established thereto without 
Operating any signaling instruments between 
a calling and a called station, substantially 
as set forth. 
12. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a wire leading from each station to 
the signaling instrument in the next station, 
and SO On throughout the series of stations, a 
movable contact 6 in each station to break 
the circuit of the signaling instrument with 
its Wire, a contact 4 connected with the wire 
in each station that leads to the next station, 
a branch Wire in each station to be connected 
with said contact 4, a contact 4 on said 
branch wire to connect with said contact 4, 
another movable contact 9 in each station 
connected to the wire that leads to the sig 
naling instrument in that station and also 
normally in electrical connection with said 
branch wire, and electrically-operating de 
vices to operate said contacts 4, 6, to break 
the signaling-instrument circuit in any sta 
tion and establish a through line between two 
or more stations through the branch wire in 
an intermediate station, substantially as set 
forth. 
13. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a Wireleading from one station to the 
signaling instrument in the next station, a 
contact in the circuit, an armature or bar to 
operate said contact to break said circuit 
through said instrument, another movable 
contact in each station engaged with the wire 
that leads to the next station, a branch wire 
in each station to connect with the last-men 
tioned contact when one of them is operated, 
another contact connected with the branch 
Wire, an armature or contact to engage the sec 
ond-mentioned contact on said branch wire, 
said armature or contact being connected with 
the Wire that leads into a station, a magnet on 
said Wire to operate said armature to break 
its connection with said branch Wire, and 
means for Operating the first-mentioned con 
tact to break the circuit through a signaling 
instrument and to establish a through line be 
tween a calling and a called station, substan 
tially as set forth. 
14. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a wire leading from one station to the 
signaling instrument in the next station, a 
contact in the circuit, an armature or bar to 
operate said contact to break said circuit 
through said instrument, and another mov 
75 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
593,819 
able contact in each station engaged with the 
wire that leads to the next station, a branch 
wire in each station to connect with the last 
mentioned contact when one of them is oper 
ated, another contact connected with said 
branch wire, an armature or contact to engage 
the second-mentioned contact on said branch 
wire, said armature or contact being connected 
with the wire that leads into a preceding sta 
tion, a contact 13 carried by said armature, a 
wire and contact leading to ground, a magnet, 
a wire 14 connecting said magnet or its wire 
with the contact 13, and means for operating 
the appropriate contacts to break the circuit 
through a signaling instrument and to estab 
lish a through line between a calling and a 
called station, substantially as set forth. 
15. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a wire leading from one station to the 
signaling instrument in the next station, a 
contact in the circuit to said signaling instru 
ment, a contact in each station engaged with 
the Wire that leads to the next station, an ar 
mature or bar connected with each contact to 
operate them, a branch wire in each station 
having a contact to engage the second-men 
tioned contact, another contact on said branch 
wire, an armature or contact engaging said 
last-mentioned contact, said armature or con 
tact leading to the wire that passes into its 
station, a magnet on said wire to operate said 
armature, means to establish a ground for 
said magnet when its armature is attracted, 
means for operating the first-mentioned ar 
mature by the second-mentioned armature, 
and a magnet to operate the first-mentioned 
armature to restore the circuit of the sig 
inaling instrument and to break the circuit 
through the branch wire, substantially as set 
forth. 
16. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a circuit for said stations divided 
into Sections at Said stations, devices in each 
station arranged to break the circuit of its sig 
naling instrument and to join the sections of 
said circuit into a through circuit in each sta 
tion, a magnet in each station to restore the cir 
cuit of the signaling instrument and break 
the main circuit into sections, a circuit for said 
lmagnets, and a shunt around each magnetar 
ranged to be broken when the corresponding 
signaling-instrument circuit is broken and to 
be restored when the signaling-instrument 
circuit is restored. 
17. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, signaling instruments in each 
station, a circuit for said stations divided 
into Sections in said stations, each section be 
ing normally in circuit with a signaling in 
strument in a station, means in each station 
for breaking the circuit of its signaling in 
strument and for establishing a complete line 
through that station to the signaling instru 
ment at the next station, another circuit for 
said stations, magnets on said circuit to re 
store the signaling-instrument circuits and to 
break the first-mentioned line into sections, 
the second-mentioned circuit being divided, 
between certain series of stations, into a Sec 
tion, and means at One station of a Series to 
establish a complete line between two series 
of stations, substantially as set forth. 
18. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, signaling instruments in Said 
stations, a circuit for said stations divided 
into sections in said stations, the section of 
said circuit in each station leading to the sig 
naling instrument in its station, an armature 
or bar to operate a contact to make and break 
the circuit of the respective signaling instru 
ment, another contact operated by said arma 
ture or bar to establish a through line out of 
said sections of said circuit, and a magnet in 
each station to operate the respective arma 
tures or bars, another circuit passing through 
said stations, magnets 36 in said stations on 
said circuit arranged to operate said arma 
tures or bars to restore the signaling-instru 
ment circuits and break the first-mentioned 
circuit into sections, shunts around said mag 
nets 36 including their armatures therein, and 
contacts leading to the circuit of said magnets 
36 and arranged to form the shunts around 
said magnets by engagement with their arma 
till leS. 
19. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, signaling instruments in said 
stations, a circuit for said stations divided 
into sections in said stations, each section 
leading to the signaling instrument in the re 
spective station, contacts arranged to break 
the circuits of said signaling instruments 
and to form the sections of said circuit into a 
through line between stations, magnets and 
armatures to actuate said contacts, another 
circuit 25 for said stations, magnets 36 in said 
circuit, shunts around said magnets 30 ar 
ranged to be broken by said armatures, a 
ground for said circuit at one station arranged 
to be formed by the operation of said armature 
at the first station of a series to permit the 
magnets 36 of a series to be operated, and elec 
trically-operating devices at said first station 
of a series of stations arranged to break said 
ground and restore the circuit 25 as a through 
circuit through a second series of stations. 
20. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, signaling instruments in said 
stations, a circuit for said stations divided into 
sections in said stations, each section leading 
to the signaling instrument in the respective 
station and from another station, contacts ar 
ranged to break the circuits of said signaling 
instruments and to form the sections of said 
circuit into a through line between stations, 
magnets and armatures to actuate said con 
tacts, another circuit 25, for said stations, 
magnets 36 in said circuit, shunts around said 
magnets 36 arranged to be broken by said ar 
matures, a ground for said circuit at one sta 
tion arranged to be formed by the operation 
of said armature at the first station of a se 
75 
95 
CO 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
25 
35 
45 
55 
593,819 
11. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
5 O 
55 
ries of stations to permit the magnets 36 of a ture 10 to restore the circuits to their normal 
series to be operated, a magnet 40 on the cir 
conditions, substantially as set forth. 
cuit 25 at the first station of a series of sta 
24. A circuit having a magnet, an armature 
tions, an armature for said magnet 40 ar 
9 therefor, a contact in said circuit, an arma 
ranged to form the circuit for said ground 
ture 10 to operate said contact to break said 
and to break said ground when operated, and 
circuit, the armature 10 being arranged to be 
a contact 48, leading to a magnet 36 of said 
operated by the armature 9, another circuit, 
first series of stations, arranged to connect the 
a magnet 36 therein to operate the armature 
circuit 25 through said magnet 36 when the 
10 to restore the first-mentioned circuit, and 
armature of the magnet 40 is operated, to op 
a shunt around the magnet 36, the circuit 
erate said magnet 36 to restore the line 25 as 
through which shunt is made and broken by 
a through circuit. 
said armature 10, substantially as set forth. 
21. A signaling system comprising a plural 
25. A circuit having a magnet 12, an arma 
ity of stations, signaling instruments in said 
ture 9 therefor, a contact 13 to be operated 
stations, a circuit for said stations divided into 
by said armature, a contact leading to ground 
to be engaged by the contact 13 to establish 
sections in said stations, each section leading 
from one station to the signaling instrument 
a ground for the magnet 12, an armature 10 
in another station, contacts arranged to break 
arranged to be operated by the armature 9, a 
the circuits in said signaling instruments and 
contact to be operated by the armature 10 to 
to form the sections of said circuit into a 
break said circuit, another circuit having a 
through line between stations, magnets and 
magnet. 36 to operate said contact to restore 
armatures to actuate said contacts, another 
said circuit, and a shunt around the magnet 
circuit 25 for said stations, magnets 36 in said 
36 to be made and broken by the armature 10. 
circuit, shunts around said magnets 36 ar 
26. A circuit having a signaling instrument 
whose magnet is polarized, circuit-changing 
ranged to be broken by said armatures, a 
magnet 40 on the circuit 25 at the first station 
devices on said circuit arranged to cut the 
of a series of stations, an armature for said 
signaling instrument from the circuit and 
magnet, a branch wire 43 having a contact 42 
having a magnet which is polarized oppositely 
normally engaging said armature, said branch 
to the first-mentioned magnet, two batteries 
wire leading to a contact 43 operated by the 
connected with said circuit by poles of oppo 
corresponding magnet 36, a contact 45 to be 
site polarity, means to discharge a current 
engaged by the contact 43 and leading to 
from one battery to the magnet of the sig 
ground, the main circuit leading around the 
naling instrument, and means to discharge a 
corresponding magnets 36 and 40, a contact 
current of opposite polarity from the other 
48 to be engaged by the armature of the mag 
battery to the other magnet on said circuit, 
net. 40, and a wire leading from the contact 
to operate but one of such magnets at a time, 
48 to the corresponding magnet 36, whereby 
so that when the magnet of the circuit-chang 
when the contact 43" is operated a ground will 
ing devices is energized the magnet of the 
be formed for the circuit 25 to energize mag 
signaling instrument will not be affected, and 
net 40 and the magnets 36 of a preceding se 
vice versa. 
ries of stations, the magnet 40 operating its 
27. A signaling system comprising a plural 
armature to cause the restoration of the cir 
ity of stations, a circuit for said stations, a 
cuit 25 in the corresponding station. 
signaling instrument in each station having 
a polarized magnet, circuit-changing devices 
22. A circuit 25, magnets 36 and 40 con 
nected there with and having a normal shunt, 
in said stations to break the circuit through 
an armature 41 leading to wire 25, a contact 
the signaling instruments and to establish a 
42, a wire 43 leading therefrom to a contact 
through line between stations desired, mag 
43 to be operated by magnet 36, a contact 45, 
nets to operate said circuit-changing devices, 
leading to ground, to be engaged by contact 
said magnets being polarized oppositely to the 
43 to establish a ground for wire 25, means 
magnets of the signaling instruments, two 
to operate contact 43 to establish said ground, 
batteries connected by opposite poles to said 
a contact 48 to be engaged by armature 41, 
circuit and arranged to discharge currents of 
and a wire leading from contact 48 to the 
opposite polarity respectively to the magnet 
magnet 36, whereby when contact 43" is op 
of the signaling instrument and to the mag 
erated a ground will be established for wire 
net of the circuit-changing devices. 
25 to energize magnet 40, which by attract 
28. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ing its armature 41 breaks said ground-cir 
ity of stations, a circuit divided into sections 
cuit to energize magnet 36 to further break 
in each station, a signaling instrument in each 
said ground at 43, 45, and restablish a 
station connected with the section of Said cir 
cuit that leads from another station, the mag 
through circuit in wire 25. 
23. A circuit having a magnet, an armature 
net in said signaling instrument being polar 
therefor; another circuit having a magnet 36, 
ized, circuit-changing devices in each station 
an armature 10 therefor, the latter armature 
arranged to break the circuit of the corre 
being arranged to be operated by the armature 
sponding signaling instrument and to estab 
9 to make and break the first-mentioned cir 
lish a through line out of said sectional line, 
cuit, the magnet 36 serving to operate arma- said circuit-changing devices each having a 
w 
75 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
12 
593,819 
magnet of opposite polarity to the polarity of 
the magnet of the signaling instrument, and 
two batteries connected with said circuit, one 
being arranged to discharge a current of like 
polarity to that of the magnet of the circuit 
changing devices to cause the latter to oper 
ate, the other battery being arranged to dis 
charge a current of opposite polarity to oper 
ate the signaling instruments. 
29. A normally open circuit having a bat 
tery and means to close the circuit, combined 
with another circuit having a double magnet 
to operate said circuit-closing devices when 
both coils are energized, a battery connected 
with each of said coils and means for simul 
taneously discharging the currents from said 
batteries through the corresponding coils to 
operate said circuit-closing devices, substan 
tially as set forth. 
30. A normally open circuit having a bat 
tery and means to close the circuit, combined 
with a double magnet to close said circuit, a 
wire connected with one coil of said magnet, 
a battery on said wire, a wire connected with 
the other coil of the magnet, said wires being 
connected together at one part, and means for 
closing the circuit through said wires to op 
erate both of said coils simultaneously to close 
the first-mentioned circuit, substantially as 
set forth. 
31. A magnet having two coils, a circuit 
leading to and from one of said coils, thence 
to one pole of a battery, thence to the oppo 
site pole of another battery, thence from the 
opposite pole of said batterythrough the other 
of said coils, and means for closing said cir 
cuit to discharge the currents from said bat 
teries through their corresponding coils, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
32. A signaling system colmprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a circuit for said stations having 
branch connections in each station, circuit 
changing devices in each station to cut out the 
corresponding signaling instrument, and to 
connect up the branch connections to estab 
lish a through line to the signaling instrument 
in the next station, a normally open circuit 
for said stations having a battery, a magnet 
in each station on said open circuit, an arma 
ture, a contact to be operated thereby to re 
store the branch connection of the correspond 
ing signaling instruments, and means in each 
station adapted to cause the closing of said. 
open circuit to energize the magnet thereon in 
any other station, substantially as set forth. 
33. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a circuit for said instruments divided 
into sections in each station, each section lead 
ing from one station to the signaling instru 
ment in the next station, circuit-changing de 
vices in each station arranged to break the 
circuit of its signaling instrument and to es 
tablish a through line out of the correspond 
ing Sections of said circuit, a normally open 
circuit for said stations having a battery, a 
magnet in each station on said open circuit 
to restore the circuit of the corresponding 
signaling instrument and to break the first 
mentioned circuit into sections, and means in 
each station to cause the closing of said open 
circuit to energize its magnets, substantially 
as set forth. 
34. A signaling system, comprising a plural 
ity of stations, a signaling instrument in each 
station, a circuit for said instruments divided 
into sections in each station, each section lead 
ing from one station to the signaling instru 
ment in the next station, circuit-changing de 
vices in each station arranged to break the 
circuit of its signaling instrument and to es 
tablish a through line out of sections of said 
circuit, and a normally open circuit for said 
stations having a battery, a magnet in each 
station on said open circuit to restore the cir 
cuit of the corresponding signaling instru 
ment and to break the first-mentioned circuit 
into sections, a wire passing through said sta 
tions and connected with the first-mentioned 
circuit to operate the signaling instruments, 
another wire passing through said stations 
and included in the circuit of the circuit 
changing devices to operate said circuit 
changing devices, a magnet and batteries on 
said two wires, and circuit-closing devices in 
the open wire adapted to be operated by said 
magnet when the said two wires are joined to 
form a metallic circuit, substantially as set 
forth. 
35. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, signaling instruments and cir 
cuit-changing devices in said stations, said 
circuit-changing devices being arranged to 
cut their corresponding signaling instruments 
from their circuit and to establish electrical 
connection between stations, a circuit for said 
stations divided into sections between sta 
tions, and on which sections said signaling 
instruments are respectively located, said cir 
cuit having a wire 1 and battery 3 to operate 
said signaling instruments, another circuit on 
which said circuit-changing devices are lo 
cated, said circuit having a wire 2 and a bat 
tery 5, the latter serving to operate said cir 
cuit-changing devices, all the signaling in 
struments being normally in circuit with the 
respective sections of their line so that when 
one of said instruments is cut from its line 
the next will be in condition to be operated 
directly without changing its circuit, substan 
tially as set forth. 
36. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, signaling instruments and cir 
cuit-changing devices in said stations, a cir 
cuit for said stations on which said signaling 
instruments are located, a circuit on which 
said circuit-changing devices are located, and 
a battery for each circuit, said circuits hav 
ing a portion in common, Said circuits and 
batteries being so arranged as to operate the 
circuit-changing devices or the signaling in 
75 
95 
Od 
O 
II5 
I 25 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
598,819 
3. 
o 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
struments according to which battery-current 
is discharged over the respective circuit, sub 
Stantially as set forth. 
37. A signaling system comprising a plural 
ity of stations, signaling instruments and cir 
cuit-changing devices in said stations, a cir 
cuit for said stations on which said signaling 
instruments are located, a circuit on which 
Said circuit-changing devices are located, and 
a battery for each circuit, said circuits hav 
ing a portion in common, said batteries being 
located on that portion of each circuit that is 
not common to both, said batteries being 
adapted to discharge currents of opposite po 
larity to their respective signaling instru 
ments and the circuit-changing devices, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
38. A telephone-circuit having telephone 
instruments normally out of circuit there with, 
and another independent circuit having elec 
trically-operating devices arranged to be op 
erated from either station on the circuit to 
any other station on the circuit to place the 
telephones in circuit with their line, and sig 
naling instruments also on said independent 
circuit, all so arranged that when an impulse 
is sent over said independent circuit it will 
actuate the signaling instrument in a called 
station and also the devices for placing the 
telephone in circuit with its line in said called 
Station, Substantially as set forth. 
89. A telephone-circuit having normally 
Open branch Wires, and telephone instruments 
On said branch wires, and another circuit hav 
ing signaling instruments and also electric 
ally-operating devices to close the circuits of 
the branch wires, all being so arranged that 
When an impulse is sent over the circuit it 
Will operate the signaling instrument in a 
called station, and also operate, the devices 
for placing the telephone instruments in cir 
cuit with the telephone-lines in both the call 
ing and the called stations substantially as 
set forth. 
40. A telephone-circuit having two wires 
and a plurality of telephone instruments nor 
mally out of circuit therewith, and another 
circuit having electrically-operating devices 
SO arranged that when a current is passed 
along said circuit it will operate said electric 
ally-operating devices in two stations to close 
the circuit of two of said telephone instru 
ments with said two wires to place the tele 
phones in any two stations in communication 
through a metallic circuit, substantially as 
set forth. 
41. A telephone-circuit having a plurality 
of telephone instruments normally out of cir 
cuit there with, circuit-closing devices to close 
the circuits of said telephone instruments, an 
other circuit having signaling instruments, 
and separate magnets on the last-mentioned 
circuit arranged to operate said circuit-clos 
ing devices in the telephone-circuits so that 
When an impulse is sent to a signaling instru 
ment said impulse will simultaneously oper 
ate the corresponding magnets on the circuit 
in the calling and a called station to cause 
said magnets to close the circuits of the re 
Spective telephone instruments with their 
lines in a calling and a called station, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
42. A telephone-circuit having a plurality 
of normally open branch circuits, telephone 
instruments on said branch circuits and con 
tacts to close said branch circuits, and an 
other circuit having magnets to operate said 
contacts to close the circuit of said branch 
lines in a calling and a called station respec 
tively when said magnets are operated from 
any station, and other independently-operat 
ing devices to operate said contacts to break 
the circuits of said branch lines to cut the 
corresponding telephone instruments from 
the telephone-lines, substantially as set forth. 
43. A telephone system comprising a plu 
rality of stations, a telephone-circuit passing 
through said stations, normally open branch 
wires in said stations connected with said tele 
phone-circuit, telephone instruments on said 
branch wires, electrically-operating devices 
in said stations arranged to close the circuits 
of said branch wires as desired, another cir 
cuit for said stations arranged to actuate said 
electrically-operating devices and the signal 
ing instruments on said circuit in said sta 
tions, and means in each station arranged to 
Select the station desired to be communicated 
with, all so arranged that when an impulse 
is sent over the circuit to a signaling instru 
ment it will also operate the devices for clos 
ing the circuit of the telephone instrument 
in the same station. 
44. A telephone system comprising a plu 
rality of stations, a telephone-circuit passing 
through said stations, normally open branch 
wires in said stations, telephone instruments 
on said branch wires, electrically-operating 
devices in said stations arranged to close the 
circuits of said branch wires, as desired, to 
place the telephone instruments in circuit 
With the main line, another circuit for said 
stations arranged to actuate said electrically 
operating devices, and signaling instruments 
on said circuit in said Stations, the last-men 
tioned circuit and the electrically-operating 
devices located thereon, in said stations, be 
ing arranged so that when a current is sent 
over said circuit the signaling instrument in 
a station to be called will be operated, and so 
that said electrically-operating devices in a 
calling and a called station will also be oper 
ated to place the telephones in circuit with . 
their line in both the calling and called sta 
tions. 
45. A telephone system comprising a plu 
rality of stations, a telephone-circuit passing 
through said stations, normally open branch 
wires therefrom in said stations, telephone in 
struments on said branch wires, contacts to 
close said branch wires to place the telephones 
in the circuit with the telephone-lines, mag 
nets having double coils oppositely polarized 
to operate said contacts to close the branch 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
4. 
593,819 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
wires for the telephones, and another circuit 
for said stations arranged to be established 
through a coil of one polarity at one station 
and through a coil of opposite polarity at an 
other station to close the circuits through the 
branch telephone-wires in a calling and a 
called Station to connect the corresponding 
telephones together, substantially asset forth. 
46. A telephone system comprising a plu 
rality of stations, a telephone - circuit, nor 
mally open branch wires therefrom in said sta 
tions, telephone instruments on said branch 
Wires, contacts to close the circuit through 
said branch wires to place the telephones in 
circuit with their lines, another circuit for 
Said Stations, magnets on said circuit arranged 
to Operate tWO of Said contacts at a time in 
different stations to close the branch circuits 
through telephone instruments in two stations 
to connect them for telephone purposes, and 
a local circuit in each station having a mag 
net to Operate the contacts of the branch 
wires to break the circuit of the telephones in 
dividually in the branch wires after they have 
been connected, substantially as set forth. 
47. A telephone and signaling system com 
prising a plurality of stations, a telephone-cir 
cuit for said stations, telephone instruments 
normally out of circuit with said telephone 
circuit, another circuit for said stations, sig 
naling instruments and other electrically-op 
erating devices on said last-mentioned circuit 
in each station, the last-mentioned devices 
being arranged to close the circuits of the 
telephone instruments in a calling and a called 
Station while an impulse from a calling-sta 
tion is sent to the signaling instrument in the 
called Station, another circuit for said stations 
having circuit-changing devices arranged to 
cut the signaling instruments in stations be 
tween a calling and a called station from the 
circuit and to establish a through line between 
a calling and a called station, substantially as 
set forth. 
48. A telephone and signaling system com 
prising a plurality of stations, a telephone 
circuit for said stations, telephone instru 
ments normally out of circuit, with said tele 
phone-circuit, another circuit for said sta 
tions, signaling instruments on said circuit, 
another circuit for said stations, electrically 
Operating circuit-changing devices on said 
last - mentioned circuit in each station ar 
ranged to be operated from any station to cut 
the signaling instruments from the circuit 
in intermediate stations and to establish a 
through line from a calling-station to the 
signaling instrument in a called station, and 
other electrically-operating devices on the cir 
cuit of the signaling instruments arranged 
to close the circuits of the telephones in a 
calling and a called station when an impulse 
is sent to the signaling instrument in a called 
station from a calling-station to place their 
respective telephone instruments in circuit, 
Substantially as described. 
49. A telephone System comprising a plu 
rality of stations, a circuit therethrough, tele 
phone instruments normally out of circuit 
there with, another circuit for said stations 
having electrically - operating devices ar 
ranged so that when an impulse is sent over 
the circuit it will place two of said telephone 
instruments simultaneously in circuit with 
the telephone-circuit, as desired, and a local 
open circuit for each telephone comprising 
a magnet, battery, switch and wires arranged 
to break the circuit through the respective 
telephones to cut the telephones from circuit 
with their lines, substantially as set forth. 
50. A telephone and signaling system com 
prising a plurality of stations, signaling in 
struments in said stations, the circuit for said 
stations being divided into sections in each 
station, means in each station arranged to be 
operated from any calling-station to cut out 
the respective signaling instrument from the 
circuit and to establish a through line between 
a calling and a called station directly to the 
signaling instrument in the latter station, 
and a telephone-circuit for said stations hav 
ing telephone instruments in said stations al 
ranged for use when a calling-station has sig 
inaled to a called station, substantially as set 
forth. 
51. A telephone and signaling system com 
prising a plurality of stations, signaling in 
struments in said stations, a circuit for said 
stations divided into sections in each station, 
means in each station arranged to be oper 
ated from any calling-station to cut out the 
respective signaling instrument from the cir 
cuit and to establish a through line between 
a calling and a called station to the signaling 
instrument in the latter station, and a tele 
phone-circuit for said stations having tele 
phone instruments normally out of circuit 
with the telephone-lines, and devices in said 
stations arranged to close the circuit of the 
telephone instruments with the telephone 
lines in a calling and a called station when 
an impulse is sent over the circuit from a 
calling-station to the signaling instrument in 
a called station, substantially as set forth. 
52. A telephone and signaling system com 
prising a plurality of stations, signaling in 
struments in said stations, a circuit for said 
stations divided into sections in each station, 
means in each station to cut out the respec 
tive signaling instrument from the circuit and 
to establish a through line between a calling 
and a called station to the signaling instru 
ment in the latter station, and a telephone 
circuit for said stations having normally open 
branch wires in said stations, telephone in 
struments on said branch wires, electrically 
operating devices in said stations for closing 
said branch wires and arranged to close the 
branch wires in a calling and a called station 
when an impulse is sent over the circuit from 
a calling-station to the signaling instrument 
in a station to be called, and means for break 
95 
OO 
IC5 
II.5 
I 25 
593,819 
5. 
J 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
- 
ing said branch wires to cut, the telephones 
from circuit with the main telephone-lines, 
substantially as set forth. 
53. In a signaling system, a plurality of sta 
tions, wires 1 and 2 passing through said sta 
tions, signaling instruments in each station, 
a circuit for said instruments, devices in each 
station to break the circuit of its signaling 
instrument and to establish a through line to 
the signaling instrument of a desired station, 
the wires 1 and 2 being connected with said 
circuit, another circuit for said stations hav 
ing magnets arranged to restore the circuit 
of said signaling instruments, electrically-op 
erating devices on the wires 1 and 2 to close 
the last-mentioned circuit, and devices in each 
station arranged to close the circuit between 
the wires 1 and 2, and devices in each station 
to send the desired impulses along wire 2 to 
effect the changing of the sectional circuit 
into a through circuit between a calling and 
a called station, and devices in each station 
to send an impulse along wire 1 to give a sig 
nal in the called station, substantially as set 
forth. . 
54. A circuit-operating device comprising 
a contact 33, to be connected with a line, a 
contact 35 to engage contact 33 and to be 
connected with another line, a contact a con 
nected with the latter line, and an arm to 
cause contacts 33 and 35 to engage, and to 
also engage contact a, substantially as set 
forth. 
55. A circuit-operating device comprising 
a contact 33, a contact 35 to engage it, a con 
tact 35 also arranged to engage contact 33, 
the contacts 35,35, being connected together, 
a contact C, and an arm to cause contacts 35 
and 35 to engage contact 33, and also to 
close a circuit through contact a, substan 
tially as set forth. . 
56. A circuit-operating device comprising 
a contact 33 connected with a switch, a con 
tact to engage the contact 33, a contact a, 
and an arm to cause the second-mentioned 
contact to engage the contact 33, and also to 
close a circuit through the contact a, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
57. The combination of a wire 1, a wire 19 
leading therefrom, a contact 33 in circuit 
with the wire 19, a contact 35 to engage the 
contact 33, a wire 2, a wire 22 connected 
with wire 2 and with contact 35, a contact a 
connected with wire 2, and an arm adapted 
to cause contact 35 to engage contact 33 to 
close the circuit between wires 1 and 2, and 
to close the circuit of contact a with said arm, 
substantially as set forth. 
58. The combination of a wire 1, a wire 19 
leading therefrom, a contact 33 connected 
with wire 19, a contact 35 to engage contact 
33, a wire 2, a wire 22, a contact 35 con 
nected with wire 22 and with contact 35, con 
tacts a, b, c &c., also connected with wire 2, 
and an arm to cause contacts 35 and 35 to 
engage contact 33, and to close the circuit 
9o 
95 
of contacts a, b, c, with wire 2, substantially 
as set forth. 
59. The combination of a wire 1, a wire 19 
leading therefrom, a contact. 33, connected 
with wire 19, a contact 35 to engage contact 
33, a wire 2, a wire 22, a contact 35 con 
nected with wire 22 and with contact 35, con 
tacts C, b, c, &c., also connected with wire 2, 
an arm to cause contacts 35 and 35 to en 75 
gage contact 33", and to close the circuit of 
contacts a, b, c with wire 2, and a switch 34 
connecting contact 33 with wire 19, substan 
tially as set forth. 
60. The combination of a wire 1, a wire 19 
leading therefrom, a contact 33 connected 
with wire 19, a contact. 35 to engage contact 
33, a wire 2, a wire 22, a contact 35 con 
nected with wire 22 and with contact 35, con 
tacts a, b, c, &c., also connected with wire 2, 
an arm to cause contacts 35 and 35 to en 
gage contact 33, and to close the circuit of 
contacts a, b, c, with wire 2, and a push-but 
ton or switch 18 also connected with wire 1, 
substantially as set forth. 
61. A signaling system comprising a plu 
rality of stations, a signaling instrument in 
each station, a circuit for said instruments 
divided into sections at said stations, devices 
in each station arranged to break the circuit 
of its signaling instrument and to join the 
sections of said circuit into a through circuit 
in each station, a magnet in each station to 
restore the circuit of the signaling instrument 
and break the main circuit into sections, and 
a circuit for said magnets, substantially as 
set forth. 
62. A circuit having a magnet 12, an arma 
ture 9 therefor, a contact 13 to be operated 
by said armature, a contact leading to ground 
to be engaged by the contact 13 to establish 
a ground for the magnet 12, an armature 10 
arranged to be operated by the armature 9, 
a contact to be operated by the armature 10 to 
break said circuit, and another circuit hav 
ing a magnet 36 to operate said contact to re 
store said circuit, as and for the purposes 
specified. 
63. In a signaling system, a plurality of sta 
tions, a circuit for said stations divided into 
sections in each station, and electrically-op 
erating devices in each station to partially 
join two sections of the circuit together when 
moving in one direction, a ground to hold the 
devices in this position, and means to break 
the circuit to cause said devices when mov 
ing back to completely join said two sections 
together to form a through circuit between 
two stations. 
64. In a signaling system, a plurality of sta 
tions, a circuit divided into sections in each 
station, a signaling instrument in each sta 
tion normally in circuit with the respective 
section of the circuit leading into its sta 
tion, a contact 6 in each station to make and 
break the circuit of the respective signal 
ing instrument, a contact 4 in each station 
IO 
II5 
I2O 
I 25 
IOO 
6 
593,819 
connected with the section of the circuit lead 
ing to the next station, a branch wire in each 
station to be connected with said contact 
4", another contact 9 in each station normally 
connected with said branch wire and con 
nected to the section of the circuit leading 
into its station, electrically-operating devices 
in each station to operate the contact 6 to 
break the circuit of the signaling instrument 
and to operate the contact 4" to join the 
branch wire to the section of the circuit lead 
ing to the next station, and likewise arranged 
to operate the contact 9 to temporarily break 
its connection with the branch wire, and 
means in each station arranged to hold the 
O 
contact 9 from circuit with the branch wire 
so long as the impulse or current which served 
to operate said contact is active, the devices 
being so arranged that when the impulse or 
current ceases the contact 9 will move to com 
plete the circuit through the branch wire be 
tween two stations. 
In testimony that I claim the invention 
above set forth I affix my signature in pres 
ence of two witnesses. 
JAMES G. SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
T. F. BOURNE, 
M. F. BOYLE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US593919.txt	ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARD FOR COIN OPERATED MACHINEs. 
J. L. BLODGETT, 
No Model.) 
No. 593,919, 
Patented Nov. 6, 1897. 
 
y 
It re- 
F 
s: 
M43 
 
 
 
2 A. 
7. S, 
. 
a 
s if va 
o 
Ars Era f2 f 
it is 2.saea az Sea Sts 
22-sa-Nics a-C e 
SN 
2. 
  
 
wasses 
all LTTETL III fg 23 3. 
'S 
Svyinxmom, 
&60%iver 3, 2 
Swest 
SS 
707.jnsend.6% 
at air 
P 
 
2 2 
2 
 
Lic, wish stori,. C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JERRY L. BLODGETT, OF LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA. 
ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARD FOR coin-oPERATED MACHINES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 593,919, dated November 16, 1897. 
Application filed July 20, 1897, Serial No. 645,279, (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
- 
p 
To all whom it may concern: 
be thereby electrically connected to make a 
Be it known that I, JERRY L. BLODGETT, a 
circuit. Coinways 3' 4", &c., are provided 
citizen of the United States, residing at Los 
below the slide B, one at the side of each pair 
Angeles, in the county of Los Angeles and 
of contacts. 
State of California, have invented a new and 
E indicates stationary contacts, one at the 
useful Electrical Switchboard for Coin-Oper 
side of each coinway. 
ated. Machines, of which the following is a 
Findicates pivoted contacts, one for each 
coinway at the side opposite the contact 
specification. 
This invention is designed for use on coin 
point E. 
operated machines for delivering articles or 
G indicates a contact-moving slide in the 
giving service to persons depositing coins 
lower slideway to operate the pivoted con 
therein, and is applicable for telephones, 
A lever H is pivoted between the 
tacts. 
phonographs, kinetoscopes, and vending-ma 
slideways with one end between the stops bb' 
chines of various kinds. 
of the coin-slide and the other end operatively 
The object of this invention is to provide 
connected with the contact-slide to move the 
an automatic absolutely accurate device for 
same and thereby move the pivoted contacts 
supplying to the depositor of the coin the ar 
into the coinways to intercept the coin when 
ticle or service for which the coin is deposited 
the receptacle is above the coin Ways, there 
and to prevent any fraudulent manipulation 
by to hold the coin between the contacts to 
of the machine. It is especially adapted for 
form a second circuit. 
use where a number of different kinds of ar 
I indicates a magnet for operating any 
ticles are to be delivered at the option of the 
suitable means for delivering the article de 
One depositing the coin, and the accompany 
sired or to operate mechanism for perform 
ing drawings illustrate my invention as ap 
ing a desired service, and i i" indicate elec 
plied to such a machine in one of the many 
trical contacts, the connection between which 
forms in which it may be applied. 
is made by the slide B when the same is in 
Figure 1 is an elevation of my newly-in 
position to drop the coin into the coinways 
vented electrical switchboard with operative 
below the slide B. 
parts Which go to make up a vending-ma 
J indicates a spring for automatically re 
chine. Fig. 2 is a plan of a fragment of a 
turning the slide B to its normal position to 
vending-machine embodying my invention 
again bring the coin-receptacles beneath their 
adapted for delivering any one of various ar 
respective coin-slots. This spring is shown 
ticles at the option of the one by whom the 
arranged to throw the crank into its returned 
coin is deposited. Fig. 3 is a fragmental sec 
position 
tional elevation on line 33, Fig. 1. 
K indicates a battery for furnishing the 
Aindicates a vulcanized-rubber plate with 
requisite electrical energy. 
horizontal channels 1 2 for slideways and 
L indicates a lock for the crank C, and Ma. 
magnet for releasing such lock. 
with vertical channels 3 4 5 67 for coin-slot 
ways, with their lower open ends at the top 
. When the circuit is closed between the con 
of the upper slideway 1. 
tact-points DD", this connects the magnet M 
Bindicates a circuit-closing coin-carrying 
with the battery and the magnet M will be 
slide in such upper slideway and provided 
energized and the lock-catch thrown into the 
with coin-receptacles 3'4', &c., to receive coins 
position indicated in dotted lines, and the le 
from the slotWays 3 4, &c., respectively, and 
wer Cisthus released, so that it can be turned 
also provided with lever-operating stops bb'. 
in the direction of the arrow to throw the 
Suitable means-such, for instance, as the 
slide B, thus to carry the coin from the con 
crank C with arms cc and the pinb'-are pro 
tact-points DD' to the appropriate one of the 
vided for moving the coin-slide. Electrical 
coin ways 3' 4", &c., which are respectively 
contact-points DD" are provided below the 
at one side of a vertical line drawn from said 
slideway 1 and arranged two beneath each 
contacts to receive the coin when the slide 
slotWay to support a coin dropped through 
has moved it from beneath the coin-slot. The 
such slotway into the receptacle 3, &c., and circuit between the contact-points D D' is 
9o 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
So 
broken by the removal of the coin, so that the arm c' or some other suitable part con 
the magnet M is no longer energized and the 
nected with the lever to lock the lever in its 
normal position. This catch is so placed that 
lock is therefore allowed to return to posi 
before the lever moves the slide B to return 
tion to lock the lever upon its return to nor 
it to normal position the catch locks the le 
mal position. When the coin-carrying slide 
ver against any return of the same, so that 
B is in position to drop the coin into any one 
of the coinways, the stops 
b' will have 
after the slide B is started back toward its 
normal position the lever cannot be again 
thrown the lever II into position to move the 
thrown to move the slide B outward until 
contact-slide G, so as to move the movable 
such slide has been fully returned to its coin 
contacts F to intercept the coin in any of the 
receiving position, and the contact-points 
coinways. . The coin then closes the circuit 
are so arranged with relation to the slide that 
between the contacts E F, thus to connect 
the battery to energize the magnets II", &c., 
immediately after the slide moves it breaks 
which operate suitable mechanisms NN', &c., 
the circuit, and the catch of the lock has 
locked the lever C before the stop b has en 
for delivering the desired article. 
gaged the lever II to return the pivoted con 
N is a latch for holding the slide N' in its 
tact-points and release the coin. This effec 
retracted position against the tension of the 
tually prevents any manipulation of the ma 
spring 7'. 
chine to obtain articles or Service except by 
q, indicates a spring to hold the latch N to 
dropping the coin into the slot, as intended. 
catch the slide N'. 
N' is a bar for simultaneously moving all 
Now, having described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to Secure by Let 
the slides N' to the catches N, one catch be 
ing provided for each slide. The bar N' en 
ters Patent, is 
gages a shoulder n' on the slide when actu 
1. The combination of a slide with a coin 
receptacle therein beneath a coin-slot; elec 
ated by the arm c' of the lever C. 
a' is a connecting-bar which extends from 
trical contacts beneath the receptacle to Sup 
port a coin in the receptacle and be thereby 
the bar N' to be operated by the arm c'. 
In practical operation when the lever C is 
electrically connected to make a circuit; 
means for moving the slide; a coin Way below 
drawn to the right this throws the arm c' to 
the left and releases the bar N', so that the 
the slide, and at one side of a vertical line 
slides are held by their respective latches N, 
drawn from said contacts, to receive the coin 
and the coin which falls into the coin way 
when the slide has moved it from beneath the 
causes an electric current through the appro 
coin-slot; an electrical contact on one side of 
priate magnet I to draw down the armature 
the coin way; a movable electrical contact on . 
the opposite side of such way and operatively 
latch N, thus to release the appropriate slide 
N', and the spring ' thereof actuates the 
connected with the slide to move into the coin 
way when the receptacle is above the coin 
slide to deliver the package which has fallen 
way, thereby to hold the coin between the 
down from the chute N'. 
indicate electrical contacts to be con 
contacts to form a second circuit. 
nected by the circuit-closing coin-carrying 
2. The combination of a coin-slide with a 
coin-receptacle therein beneath a coin-slot; 
slide I3 when the same is thrown out to de 
posit the coin into the coin way. This makes 
electrical contacts beneath the receptacle to 
support, a coin in the receptacle and be thereby 
and breaks the circuit between the battery 
and the magnets I, which are connected with 
electrically connected to make a circuit; 
the contact-points EF and operated by the 
means for moving the slide; a coin Way below 
coin in the coin Way. When the lever is 
the slide, and at one side of a vertical line 
thrown to deposit a coin in a coin way, the cir 
drawn from said contacts, to receive the coin 
cuit between the battery and the contact 
when the slide has moved it from beneath the 
points E F of all the coin ways will be closed, 
coin-slot; an electrical contact on one side of 
so that the coin in any coin way will complete 
the coinway; a movable electrical contact on 
the circuit and energize the magnet II", &c., 
the opposite side of such way; a contact-oper 
pertaining to that coin way. When the lever 
ating slide connected with such movable con 
tact to operate the same; a level arranged to 
is thrown back, the circuit, which was closed 
by the coin in the coinway, will be open, re 
operate the contact-slide and arranged in the 
gardless of the connection made by the coin, 
path of stops on the coin-slide to be operated 
thereby. 
so that if a coin should stick in the coin way 
and continue to make the connection between 
3. The combination of a Vulcanized-rubber 
the contact-points EF of the coinway the bat 
plate with horizontal channels for slideways 
tery will not be exhausted, because the cir 
and with vertical channels for coin-slots with 
cuit is opened by the withdrawal of the slide B. 
their lower open ends at the top of the upper 
slideway; a circuit-closing coin-carrying slide 
The arms c c', which are connected with the 
lever for the purpose of acting upon the pin 
in such slideway and provided with a coin 
l' for operating the slide B, are at a suitable 
receptacle to receive coins from the slotways 
distance apart to operate the pin l' to throw 
respectively, and also provided with lever 
the slide IB in opposite directions when the 
Operating stops; means for moving the coin 
lever is appropriately turned for that purpose. 
slide; electrical contact-points below the 
slideway and arranged two beneath each slot 
The catch of the lever-lock L. hooks over 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
Io5 
o 
J. I.5 
I 25 
2 
593,919 
55 
65 
 
593,919 
3 
way, to support a coin dropped through such 
slotway into the receptacle therefor; coin 
ways below the slide, one at the side of each 
pair of said contacts; stationary contacts, 
one at the side of each coin Way; pivoted con 
tacts, one at the opposite side of each coin 
Way; a contact-moving slide in the lower 
slideway to operate the pivoted contact; a 
lever pivoted between the slideways, with 
one end between the stops of the coin-slide 
and other end operatively connected with the 
4. The combination of a slide with a coin 
receptacle therein beneath a coin-slot; elec 
trical contacts beneath the receptacle to sup 
port a coin in the receptacle and be thereby 
electrically connected to make a circuit; a 
contact. 
- 
- 
d 
lever for moving the slide; and a lock for 
locking such leverandarranged to be released 
by Said magnet. 
5. The combination of the slide provided 
with a coin-receptacle and having a project 
ing pin; a lever with two arms to operate 
upon opposite sides of the pin to move the 
slide in opposite directions; a lock for lock 
ing the lever; a magnet for unlocking such 
lock; an electrical circuit for energizing the 
magnet; and contact-points in such circuit 
and arranged to be electrically connected by 
a coin in the receptacle of the slide. 
JEERRY L. BLODGETT. 
... 
Witnesses: 
25 
JAMES R. To WNSEND, 
F. M. TOWNSEND. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594019.txt	(No Model.) 
E. A. W. JEFFERIES. 
HYDRAULIC COPING OR SHEARING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 594,019, 
 
Patented Nov. 23, 1897, 
(No Model.) 
E. A. W. JEFFERIES. 
HYDRAULIC COPING OR SHEARING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 594,019, 
Patented Nov. 23, 1897. 
 
 
 
  
2 % 
 
RS S. 
S N 
T. N. S 
N e S N N S 
2 
 
 
  
 
 
2S2 
22 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo, was HINcro 
 
E. A. W. JEFFERIES, 
HYDRAULIC COPING OR SHEARING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
(No Model.) 
No. 594,019, 
Patented Nov. 23, 1897, 
 
 
gala 26 
13 as 
 
 
15 
A. 
azi are 22 go111-eas 
6%ue 21/A.2 
1s-11-12a-1 cou-2 
2e2/ 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EBENEZER A. W. JEFFERIES, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR 
TO WALTER WOOD, OF SAME PLACE. 
HYDRAULIC COPING OR SHEARNG MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 594,019, dated November 23, 1897. 
Application filed March 30, l897, Serial No. 629,894, (No model.) 
2O gles to the coped beam. 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, EBENEZER A. W. JEF 
FERIES, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at the city of Philadelphia, in the county 
5 of Philadelphia and State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Hydraulic Coping or Shearing 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
Io My invention has relation to a machine for 
coping metal beams-that is to say, it relates 
to a machine preferably operated by hy 
draulic pressure--wherein the flanges of the 
metal beams may be sheared or coped by one 
I5 operation in contradistinction to a series of 
operations, as heretofore, and in order to per 
mit the Web of the beam thus unflanged to 
fit in between the flanges and abut against 
the Web of a similar beam placed at right an 
My invention, stated in general terms, con 
sists of a machine for coping metal beams 
constructed and arranged in substantially the 
manner hereinafter described and claimed. 
25 The nature and scope of my invention will 
be more fully understood from the following 
description, taken in connection with the ac 
companying drawings, forming part hereof, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevational view of a hy 
draulic coping-machine embodying main fea 
tures of my invention. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vational view, partly sectioned, of said ma 
chine. Fig. 3 is an enlarged front eleva 
35 tional view illustrating in detail the tool or 
die, the anvil or block, the side blocks, the 
upper vertical movable block, and the metal 
beam, all in position, so that the beam may 
be coped or sheared. Fig. 4 is a top or plan 
4o view of Fig. 3, certain parts being removed 
and broken away to show the construction 
and arrangement of the anviland side blocks. 
Fig. 5 is a perspective view, enlarged, of the 
lower end of the coping tool or die. Fig. 6 is 
45 an underneath plan view of the tool or die, 
illustrating the cutting-face of said tool or 
die; and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of an 
I-beam after the same has been coped and 
illustrating in dotted lines another I-beam ar 
5o ranged at right angles to the coped beam and 
3o 
in position to be connected to the coped I 
beam. 
In the drawings it will be seen that the 
present invention has been embodied in a 
hydraulic shearing-press of ordinary type; 55 
but it will be readily understood that my in 
vention may also be applied to any shearing 
press, whether operated hydraulically or oth 
erwise, without departing from the spirit of 
the invention, since any modifications neces- 6o 
Sary in the construction of other machines 
will readily suggest themselves to the skilled 
mechanic. 
Referring now to the drawings, a represents 
the bed of the machine, on which is supported 65 
in any suitable manner a bottom block or an 
villb, having an opening b', the edges b of 
which are sharp and of a hard material, such 
as steel. At either side of the anvil b is ar 
ranged a horizontally-movable blockd, adapt- 7o 
ed to be shifted inward toward the center of 
the anvil and outward from said center by 
means of Wedges d' or other suitable mech 
anism, which is preferably controlled by hy 
draulic pistons or rams d, as shown in Fig. 75 
2. Each block d has an opening din that 
side nearest the anvil b, and this opening di 
has sharp edges d", of preferably hard steel, 
to form a cutting or knife-like face, for a pur 
pose hereinafter described. Above the anvil 8o 
b is arranged a tool or die e, adapted to slide 
vertically toward or away from the anvil b 
and operated by a ram or pistone'. This tool 
or die e consists of a bladee, having at either 
end a flange earranged, preferably, at right 85 
angles to the blade, which flange is tapered 
or beveled, as at e, on its outer face. 
The 
blade e has also a recessed cutting-face e of 
a width corresponding to the width of the 
web which is to remain upon the beam to be go 
cut. Sliding vertically within the flanges et 
is a clamping-block f, operated by a ram or 
piston f' and adapted to approach or recede 
from the anvil b. 
the machine with its web g lying flat upon 
the anvil b and its flanges g pressed toward 
the sides of the anvil b by the side blocks d. 
In this position the clamping-blockfis moved 
downward against the upper face of the Web Ioo 
In operation a beam g is introduced into 95 
: 
------es-, ... --e. 
. ... --- risis. 
2 
594,019 
g' to clamp the web tightly down upon the 
anvil, as shown in Figs. 1 and 3. In this po 
sition the tool or die e is moved downward, 
the flanges e, in connection with the edges 
d of the side blocks, cutting off the flanges 
g of the I-beam, and the blade e, in connec 
tion with the edges b of the anvil, cutting 
off the web g' until the I-beam is coped by 
one and the same operation, as illustrated in 
Fig. 7. In the cutting off of the flanges g 
of the beam the tapered flangese of the tool, 
as the tool descends, crowds the flanges g? 
against the sharp edges of the knives on the 
side blocks d and shears them off by a trans 
verse action rather than by a vertical action, 
such as the blade emakes in cutting off the 
web g' of the beam, and this it is to be un 
derstood is by one and the same operation of 
the machine. 
It will be manifestly obvious that the tool 
e may be employed for shearing channeled 
beams as well as I-beams and still be within 
the scope of my present invention. 
Having thus described the nature and ob 
jects of my invention, what I claim as new, 
and desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a machine for coping metal beams, a 
bed supporting an anvil having an opening 
provided with sharp edges, a block provided 
with an opening having sharp edges, said 
block adapted to be shifted inward toward 
the center of said anvil and outward there 
from, a tool or die consisting of a blade hav 
ing flanges, and a recessed cutting-face in 
width corresponding to the web to remain 
upon the beam to be cut, and a clamping 
block adapted to approach and recede from 
said anvil, the construction being such that 
said blade is adapted to shear the web of the 
beam by passing vertically through the same 
and the flanges to sever the flange of the 
beam by a transverse action at one and the 
same operation, substantially as and for the 
purposes described. 
2. In a machine for coping metal beams, a 
bed Supporting an anvil having an opening 
provided with sharp edges, a horizontal block 
provided with an opening having sharp edges, 
said block adapted to be shifted inward to 
Ward the center of said anvil and outward 
therefrom by means controlled by a piston 
or ram, a tool or die adapted to slide verti 
cally toward or away from said anvil and 
consisting of a blade having tapering or bev 
eled flanges at right angles thereto and a 
cutting-face of a width corresponding to the 
width of the web to remain upon the beam to 
be cut, and a clamping-block adapted to slide 
vertically within said flanges and to approach 
or recede from said anvil, substantially as 
and for the purposes described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my signature in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
EBENEZER A. W. JEFFERIES. 
J. WALTER DOUGLASS, 
RICHARD C. MAXWELL. 
35 
45 
55 
O 
3O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594119.txt	(No Model.) 
A. W., & A, D, MORRIS. 
R0D PACKING, 
No. 594, l l 9, 
Patented Nov. 23, 1897. 
P 
797. Z. 
-------- 
/ 
f 
W 
W 
V 
- r--are mar- - - 
 
S 
 
 
  
ANM 
MI 
f 
AAE 
RRRAW, 
usu 
V 
s 
AG 
AN----- N 
... YNY 
Oo 
 
 
 
 
  
t 
--z 
 
R2S2S2Sas 
NGSS&NygS-2 
... 's NENV 
as S 
A 
i 
surrow 
- ANSEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 
: 
SeaSt N No. - 
F. 
22%2)2S SSS 
SSS SS 
% 
2 
sa 
nN. 
-------- 
WITNESSES 
 
 
---------, 
\ 
f 
l 
w 
V 
v. 
w 
A 
---------- 
r/Y 
- Z Z, -Z7 
7 
M 
E2 
fa 
E. 
iTOR.S. 
Q 
i. Sis 
Saba; 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFRED W. MORRIS AND ALFRED D. MORRIS, OF PHILADELPHIA, 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
RODPACKING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 594,119, dated November 23, 1897. 
Application filed April 7, 1897, Serial No. 631,046, (No model.) 
It will be noted that in each instance the 7o 
The packing-ring R is made in the present 65 
mental sections or rings N and R are adapted 
to abut when the parts are assembled, said 
section N being of annular shape and provided 
with the portion P, which contacts with the 55 
web G and the lateral or overhanging wall J, 
while the flange or lug Q contacts with said 
wall alone, it being noted that said flange Q. 
by reason of its novel location relative to the 
contiguous wall J serves an important func 
tion in breaking the joint between the section 
N and the ring H, thereby preventing the 
egress of steam into the engine-room during 
the reciprocation of the piston. 
instance substantially rectangular in CrOSS 
section and is seated in the space between 
the web G and the overhanging Wall J oppo 
site to the ring N. 
body or T-shaped ring F is made in sections 
or segments, preferably three in number, 
while the rings N and R are also made in 
sections, preferably three in number, the 
whole being assembled in staggered order, so 75 
as to break joints in the manner indicated. 
The operation is as follows: The parts are 
placed in position upon the piston-rod in the 
order indicated in Fig. 2, the plate S contact 
ing with the face of the cylinder, (not shown,) 8o 
the sections R and N of the segmental rings 
being located on either side of the web G of 
the T-shaped ring F, as indicated in Fig. 2, 
and being held between the plate S and the 
flange E, it being noted that the joints are 85 
arranged in staggered order, so that there is 
no possibility of leakage of steam, the springs 
L also assisting to hold the various sections 
in juxtaposition. The parts are held in as 
sembled position by the passage of studs se 
cured in the cylinder (not shown) through 
openings in the plate B, the latter being held 
by means of the nuts on said studs in the usual 
9o 
Io companying drawings. 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that we, ALFRED W. MORRIS, 
a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, and 
ALFRED D. MORRIS, a citizen of the United 
5 States, both residing in the city and county 
of Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Rod-Packing, which improvement is fully set 
forth in the following specification and ac 
Our invention consists of an improved con 
struction of rod-packing, the same embody 
ing a sectional T-shaped ring having located 
on the sides thereof polygonal and angular 
I5 shaped sectional rings, respectively, whereby 
a better and more effective packing is pro 
duced than heretofore. 
It further consists of novel details of con 
struction, all as will be hereinafter fully set 
2O forth, and specifically pointed out in the 
claims. 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
rod-packing embodying our invention. Fig. 
2 represents a longitudinal sectional view of 
25 Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents a perspective view 
of a portion of the packing in detached posi 
tion. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
sponding parts in the figures. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates 
packing in assembled position, the same be 
ing retained by an inclosing casing, the same 
consisting of a plate B, which has an annular 
groove C therein, said groove being engaged 
35 by the shell D, which is provided with the in 
termediate in Wardly-extending flange E, the 
extremity of said shell being covered by the 
plate S, which is adapted to contact with a 
cylinder, (not shown,) the opening in said 
4o plate S for the passage of the piston-rod T 
being of course slightly larger than the latter. 
F designates the body of the packing proper, 
the same consisting of a T-shaped ring H, 
the latter being provided with a web G and 
45 laterally extending or overhanging walls J, 
said Walls being provided with a peripheral 
groove or grooves K, in which the coilor other 
shaped springs L are located, two grooves 
being in the present instance employed. 
M designates pins on the sides of the web 
G, against which the extremities of the seg 
3O 
all0. 
It will of course be evident that instead of 95 
employing a plurality of T-shaped rings, as 
seen in Fig. 2, a single T-shaped ring and 
the segmentalrings N Ron either side thereof 
may be employed, as seen in Fig. 3, the func 
tion and operation of the parts being the same 
as already described. It will be seen that 
the function of the pin or pins M is to posi 
CO 
2 
594,119 
5 
IO 
25 
tively insure packing of joints on each side 
of the web G. It will also be apparent that 
but a single set of springs I may be em 
ployed, if desired. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
We claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A packing consisting of a sectional T 
shaped ring having a projecting web and lat 
erally-extending walls, means for holding the 
Sections of said ring in juxtaposition, sub 
stantially rectangular sectional rings located 
on one side of said Web, and angular-shaped 
sectional rings located on the other side of 
said web, said angular rings having a flange 
engaging the contiguous laterally-extending 
wall of said T-shaped ring, whereby leakage 
of steam is prevented. 
2. A packing consisting of a T-shaped ring 
having a projecting web and laterally-extend 
ing walls, a groove or grooves in said ring, 
springs located in said grooves, substantially 
rectangular-shaped sectional rings located on 
one side of said web, and angular-shaped sec 
tional rings located on the other side of said 
web, said angular rings having a flange en 
gaging the contiguous laterally - extending 
wall of said T-shaped ring, whereby leakage 
of steam is prevented. 
3. In a packing, a T-shaped ring having a 
depending Web, and laterally-extending walls, 
a groove or grooves in said ring, springs lo 
cated in said grooves, pins located in said 
web, substantially rectangular sectional rings 
located on one side of said web, and angular 
shaped Sectional rings located on the other 
side of said web, said angular rings having a 
flange engaging the contiguous laterally-ex 
tending wall of said T-shaped ring. 
4. In a packing, the plates S and B, the 
shell D supported thereon and provided with 
an inwardly-extending flange E,T-shaped sec 
tional rings H having inwardly - extending 
webs and laterally-extending walls, said rings 
being located in the spaces between said 
plates and flange, rectangular rings R located 
in proximity to a side of said webs, angular 
shaped rings N located between one of said 
webs and the flange E and also between the 
other of said webs and the plate B, respec 
tively, and means for holding said rings and 
their adjuncts in juxtaposition. 
ALFRED W. MORRIS. 
ALERED D. MORRIS. 
35 
45 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. WIEDERSHEIM, 
E. H. FAIRBANKS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594219.txt	(No Model.) 
C. A., TREDWELL, 
GEAR, WHEEL. 
No. 594,219. 
Patented Nov. 23, 1897. 
 
S. 
A 
1 A 
22 2 
girlf-2 
EEEEEEE 
SS 
RSNS: 1. 
3 
s 
7 
  
 
928)-Evosscs 
 
6%2%is-Z 22%e2 
&11-uo.11 to 
11 
NORRIS PETERs co, photo-Litho., wasteron, p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES A TREDWELL, OF BRISTOL, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE 
ASSIGNMENTS, TO THE P. & F. CORBIN, OF NEW BRITAIN, CONNECTICUT. 
G EAR WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 594,219, dated November 23, 1897. 
55 
| 
Application filed September 12, 1896, Serial No. 605,566, (No model.) Patented in England September 28, 1896, No. 21,454, 
respond and when united upon the bushing 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, CHARLESA. TREDWELL, 
fit opposite to each other. When fastened 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bris 
together, they constitute in effect a kind of 
tol, in the county of Hartford, State of Con 
cage-gear, each pair of abutting teeth in the 
opposite plates constituting a cog-pin 10. 
5 necticut, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Gear-Wheels, (for which 
In practice I prefer, as above stated, to 
I have obtained a patentin GreatlBritain, No. 
form teeth in each of the plates and to strike 
21,454, bearing date of September 28, 1896,) of 
up the toothed edge of each of the plates by 
which the following is a specification, refer 
the use of dies or other suitable mechanism. 
Io ence being had to the accompanying drawings. 
After the plates are formed they are placed 6o 
The object of my invention is to produce 
in position upon the bushing and the parts 
an improved gear-wheel which, being espe 
are firmly united, as by brazing or by forced 
cially designed for use in bicycle-bells, is 
enlargement of ends of bushing. 
adapted to impart rotary movement to the 
The important feature of my completed gear 
I5 mechanism thereof and at the same time to 
is that each of the cog-pins is perfectly flush. 65 
present to the thumb or finger of the oper 
With the edge of the plate, so that while it 
ator a smooth-finished, effectual, and mild 
affords a positive coperation with an inter 
operating-surface. 
meshing gear it presents a comparatively 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I is 
smooth surface to the thumb or finger of an 
2O atop plan view of my wheel incorporated with 
operator, affording just enough friction to 7o 
a species of bicycle-bell mechanism. Fig. II 
drive it freely without being severe in its ac 
is a section of the same taken through the 
tion against the surface of the hand which 
stud-pin upon which the gear revolves and 
drives it. 
that of the intermeshing gear. Fig. III illus 
Although I prefer to make my wheelin two 
25 tirates in group the component parts of the 
corresponding parts and to form the teeth 75 
preferred form of my gear. Fig. IV is a per 
which, when united, constitute the cog-pins 
spective view of the same united. Fig. Willus 
equally upon both of the side plates, yet, as 
tratesin group the component parts of a modi 
illustrated in Fig. V, it is practicable to form 
fied form of my gear. 
the teeth entirely upon one plate and to fit 
Referring to the figures on the drawings, 1 
them against the opposite plate. 
indicates the base of a bicycle-bell, which is 
My gear as applied to a bicycle-bell is pref 
illustrated merely by Way of example of mech 
erably secured to the stud-pin 4 by means of 
anism with which my gear is especially adapt 
a screw 13, screwing into the end of the pin, 
ed to be used. 
and an intermediate Washer 14. 
2 is an intermediate gear incorporated in 
bicycle-bell mechanism and which is pivoted 
upon a pin 3, projecting from the base. 
4 indicates a stud-pin located in proximity 
to the usual aperture 5, which in bells of this 
4o class are designed to accommodate an oper 
ating-gear. It is in such a gear that my in 
vention resides. 
The gear consists of a pair of plates 6, each 
provided with concentric apertures adapted 
45 to receive the reduced ends 7 of a bushing 8. 
One or both of the plates is provided with a 
series of teeth 9, which are formed in the plate 
and are afterward struck up at right angles 
to the plate, So as to resemble somewhat a 
So crown-gear. The teeth of the two plates cor 
What I claim is- 
1. A gear consisting of a pair of plates, and 
cog-pins uniting the same, said pins being 
formed by teeth struck up substantially as 
set forth. 
vided, respectively, with teeth struck up from 
their edges, respectively, and united together 
to form a Whole, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
subscribed my name. 
In testimony of all which I have hereunto 95 
2. A gear consisting of a pair of plates pro- 9o 
85 
CHARLES A TREDWELL, 
Witnesses: 
-- 
JENNEY T. HAUGH, 
JOHN H. KIRKHAM. 
35 
 
wiliguliguliullaliuli 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594319.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 594,319. 
2 
lii 
G. W. BEEBE, 
CHECK PROTECTOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Nov. 23, 1897. 
ix SrS & 
 
N s Ny 
W 
fyissezSS S2X. Z. 
AF, % 2 
Eesese 
E 
t 
2NES 
Ef 
Zauseatze- 
Z72 Vezzaoz, 
Zo 
G zcz 175eeae . . 
2%, 7zis 4 &g/454 
(No Model.) 
No. 594,319, 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
G. W. BEEBE. 
CHECK PROTECTOR, 
Patented Nov. 23, 1897. 
7270 
7, I - A 
'' L- gE LA 
2 
N N N N 
SS i. 
// 
 
   
N 
 
a? 7f77 esses 
E. ?ale, 
3. 
Z772e 77 foa 
Gaz/Zora Zvi Aeeae. 
7z is Attorzze3/. 
 
THE MORRIS revers co. PHoro-LTHo, washington...t.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GAYLORD W. BEEBE, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA. 
CHECK-PROTECTOR. 
W 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 594,819, dated November 23, 1897. 
Application filed October 25, 1895, Serial No. 566,805. (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, GAYLORD W. BEEBE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Minneapolis, county of Hennepin, and State 
of Minnesota, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Check-Protectors, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to means for indent 
ing checks, drafts, and notes, and for inking 
the fiber thereof in such a manner that the 
check-marks cannot be changed or altered 
Without so changing the appearance thereof 
that the same would be noted instantly by a 
person seeing the check or draft. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
check-protector which shall be of an ex 
tremely simple and cheap construction and 
which maybe operated by any person whether 
skilled in the use of the instrument or not, 
and the device is designed particularly as an 
improvement over the check-protector shown 
and described in the application for Letters 
Patent of the United States filed by me Sep 
tember 17, 1894, Serial No. 523,214. 
My invention consists generally in various 
constructions and combinations, all as here 
inafter described, and particularly pointed 
Out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a plan 
view of a check-protector embodying my in 
Vention. Fig. 2 is a sectional view on the 
line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view 
on the line y y of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a similar 
view on the line 22 of Fig. 2. Figs. 5 and 6 
are details of the mechanism for holding the 
paper straight during the process of indent 
ing the same. Figs. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 
are details of the punch-points or serrations 
On the face of the dies. 
In the drawings, 2 represents the hollow 
base, preferably of metal, and having the re 
movable bottom 3, which is secured in a re 
cess in the lower edge of the base by suitable 
screws and is provided with rubber buttons 
4 to prevent the base scratching or otherwise 
defacing the desk or table on which the pro 
tector may be placed. The top of the base 2 
is provided on its under side with a stud 5, 
having a central opening to receive a rod or 
pin 6, provided at its upper end with a disk 
I 
7, having a knob 8, into which the upper end 
of the rod or pin 6 extends, and a spring 9 is 
coiled about the pin 6 above the base and be 
low the disk 7 and normally holds the disk 
in a raised position. 
Upon the under side of the disk 7 and near 
the outer edge thereof is arranged a series of 
dies, preferably twelve in number, mounted 
upon a ring 10, which is secured to said disk, 
and each die is provided on its face with a 
series of beveled or cone-shaped points rep 
resenting figures or characters, and beneath 
the disk and secured to the top of the base 2 
is a removable plate or female die 11, provided 
With a series of indentations corresponding 
to the serrations in the dies above and adapted 
to receive the same when the disk 7 is forced 
down against the tension of the spring 9. Be 
neath the opposite side of the diskis arranged 
an inking-pad 12, which may be curved to cor 
respond to the curve of the disk 7 and of any 
desired length and in position to ink the points 
on the face of the dies when the diskis forced 
down. The lower end of the pin or rod 6 is 
provided with a collar or ring 13, securely fas 
tened thereto, and above the ring on said pin 
is a bracket 14, having an extensionatits outer 
end provided with a slotted upper end, to re 
ceive a horizontal shaft 15, which extends out 
through the Wall of the base and is adapted 
to move vertically in a slot 16, provided there 
in. The outer end of the shaft 15 is provided 
with a knob to be grasped by the fingers of 
the operator when it is desired to place a check 
The inner end of the shaft 
in the machine. 
15 fits into a recess 17 in the side of the stud 
5, the inner end of the recess being of a size 
to closely fit the end of the shaft 15, while the 
outer part of the recess is enlarged to permit 
the shaft to be depressed, as described. A 
stud 18 is provided on the under side of the 
top of the base, having a slotted lower end to 
receive and form a guide for the shaft 15. A 
flat spring 19 is provided having one end se 
cured to the inside Wall of the base and its 
free end bearing upon the under side of the 
shaft and normally holding it in the upper 
end of the slot 16. 
Upon the inner end of the shaft 15, between 
the stud 5 and the upward extension of the 
bracket 14, is a ratchet 20, and a dog 21 is piv 
75 
85 
go 
95 
IOO 
O 
2d 
25 
35 
4.O. 
45 
2 
594,319 
15 
25 
O 
oted to the bracket 14, having one end in en 
gagement with the teeth of the ratchet-wheel 
20, being held in engagement there with by the 
spring 22. Upon the opposite side of the 
5 ratchet-wheel and secured to the under side 
of the top of the base 2 is a spring-dog 23, also 
having its end in engagement with the teeth 
of the ratchet-wheel, whereby the wheel is 
prevented from turning backward during the 
operation of the machine. 
Upon the outer end of the shaft 15 is ar 
ranged a hub 24, provided at each end with 
the milled wheels 25, which extend up through 
slots in the top of the base. The base is pro 
vided upon its upper surface with a flange 26, 
surrounding the disk 7 and preventing dust 
and other foreign substances from getting 
into the dies. The flange 26 is provided with 
a threaded opening to receive a pin 27, which 
extends out parallel with the top of the base 
and is provided with the roller 28, which nor 
mally rests upon the peripheries of the wheels 
25. The roller 28 is provided with a recess in 
each end, thereby bringing its bearing on the 
pin 27 at the center of the roll, and the con 
struction permits the roll to automatically be 
brought to a proper and even bearing upon 
the surfaces of the wheels 25. The hub 24 is 
held in position on the shaft 15 by a suitable 
set-screw, and a collar 29 is arranged on the 
shaft just inside the depending stud 18. 
In Figs. 1 and 3 I have shown a device for 
guiding the paper during the process of in 
dentation and thereby assuring perfect aline 
ment. This device consists of a long arm 31, 
pivoted to the inside wall of the base 2 and 
extending over and resting upon the shaft 15, 
as shown in Fig. 3. This arm is provided at 
its free end with a roller 32, which extends a 
short distance above the upper surface of the 
top of the base through a slot or opening 
therein. The roller 32 is provided with an 
nular grooves 33 to receive ribs 34, provided 
on a roller 35, which is supported by the 
flange 26. When the shaft 15 is depressed, 
the arm 31 will drop with it and leave a space 
between the rolls 32 and 35 to permit the in 
sertion of the end of a check or draft, and 
when the shaft is released the spring beneath. 
the same will raise the shaft and arm back to 
their normal position and keep the paper 
straight during the process of indenting. 
While I consider this device a valuable addi 
tion to the machine, I do not confine myself 
to its use, as it may be dispensed with, if de 
sired. 
I provide a guide for the check as it is be 
ing put into the machine, which consists in a 
slotted arm 36, held in place by a thumb 
screw 37, which enters a threaded opening in 
the flange 26. The disk 7 is provided upon 
its upper surface with characters correspond 
ing to the Serrated outlines on the dies be 
neath, and the periphery of the disk 7 is pro 
vided with recesses 36' to receive a spring 
catch 37', carried by the top of the base, and 
which serves to hold the diskin position when 
it is being depressed to indent the check or 
draft. A lug 38 is also provided on the top 
of the base, which prevents the disk from re 
volving while being depressed and also pre 
vents the disk from being depressed except 
when one of the dies carried by said disk is 
over the female die. 
A stopper 39 is provided upon the upper 
surface of the disk near its periphery, through 
which ink is supplied to the pad below, and 
the knob S is also provided with projections 
which prevent the hand from slipping while 
turning the disk. 
A set-screw 42 is provided in the bracket 14 
to extend up through the same and engage the 
teeth of the ratchet-wheel 20. This screw 
acts as a stop and regulates the movement of 
the ratchet-wheel, preventing the same from 
moving forward more than the desired dis 
tance at each upward movement after each' 
depression of the disk. The screw also serves 
to support the spring which keeps the dog 21 
in engagement with the teeth of the ratchet 
wheel. 
The punching points or serrations may be 
continuous, as shown in Figs. 8 and 9, or may 
be made with a space between every two 
points, as shown in Fig. 7, and, as shown in 
this figure, the depressions in the female die 
are preferably made larger in diameter than 
that of the punch-points, so that the paper 
will not be cut when it is forced into the de 
pressions in the female die, but only crushed 
and indented. The top of the base is made 
crowning, as clearly shown in Fig. 3, so that 
all danger of smearing the face of the check 
or draft with ink during the process of in 
denting the same will be avoided. 
Whenever it is desired to ink the pad, the 
plug or knob 39 is removed and the ink ap 
plied by a brush upon the pad through the 
opening in the top of the disk. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
When it is desired to indent a check or draft, 
the shaft 15 is depressed and the end of the 
slip of paper inserted between the guiding 
rolls and also between the milled wheels and 
the roller 28, the guide 37 serving to bring 
the paper to the right position. The flange 
26 being slotted upon both sides of the female 
die 11, the edge of the paper will slip in un 
der the dies carried by the disk 7, and when 
the desired point is reached the disk is de 
pressed and the serrated face of the die-in 
mediately above the female die forced into 
the check or draft. As the rod 6 rises after 
being depressed the ratchet mechanism is op 
erated and the milled wheels revolved, there 
by advancing the paper farther into thema 
chine to present a new place for indentation. 
When the desired indentations have been 
made, the shaft may be depressed again and 
the paper removed. The indented portions 
of the paper being thoroughly inked, it will 
obviously be impossible to alter the charac 
ters so indented in the face of the paper with 
out detection. This indentation and abrasion. 
65 
55 
35 
45 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
--- 
594,319 
8 
of the paper is particularly insured by using 
slightly-blunted points, as shown in Figs. 11 
and 12. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a device of the class described, the 
combination, with a suitable base, provided 
with an annular flange upon its upper sur 
face, of a revoluble and vertically-movable 
shaft supported by said base, a disk carried 
by said shaft and arranged within said flange, 
and provided with a series of dies and with a 
series of notches in its edge, and a spring-dog 
arranged in a recess in said flange and 
adapted to engage the notches in said disk, 
for the purpose specified. 
2. In a device of the class described, the 
combination, with a suitable base provided 
with an upright circular flange or wall, a ro 
tating disk mounted upon an upright verti 
cally-movable shaft and substantially filling 
the space within said wall or flange, and pro 
vided with a series of dies upon its under sur 
face and with a series of notches in its edge, 
a spring arranged within said wall and en 
gaging said notches, and means for inking 
said dies, for the purpose set forth. 
3. The combination, with the suitable base, 
provided with an annular flange upon its up 
per surface, of a revoluble disk supported 
by Said base Within Said flange, dies upon said 
disk, a plate or female die carried by the base 
beneath said disk, an inking-pad also ar 
ranged upon the base beneath the disk, said 
disk being provided with an opening through 
which said pad may beinked, for the purpose 
set forth. 
4. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a hollow base, of a revolving 
vertically-movable disk arranged thereon, a 
rod whereon said disk is supported, a hori 
Zontal shaft arranged within said base, a 
ratchet carried thereby, a dog carried by said 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
rod and engaging with said ratchet, a wheel 
carried by the outer end of said shaft, verti 
cally movable thereWith, and extending up 
through openings in the top of said base into 
engagement With a roller arranged thereon, a 
series of dies carried by said disk and pro 
vided with serrations forming characters cor 
responding to characters marked upon the 
upper surface of said disk, a movable plate 
or female die arranged beneath said disk, and 
provided with indentations to receive the ser 
rations on the face of said dies when said disk 
is depressed, and means for inking said dies, 
substantially as described. 
5. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with the base, of the vertically 
movable revolving disk mounted thereon, a 
rod or shaft supporting said disk, the bracket 
upon the lower end thereof, a horizontal shaft 
having one end extending through the wall 
of said base, the ratchet-wheel upon the in 
ner end thereof, the dog carried by said 
bracket for engaging the teeth of said ratchet 
during the upward movement of said disk, 
the wheel arranged upon the Outer end of said 
shaft and extending up through the top of 
said base, the roller above said wheel, the 
spring for normally holding said wheelin en 
gagement with Said roller, and permitting said 
shaft and wheel to be depressed to insert the 
paper between said wheel and said roller, the 
female die arranged beneath said disk, a series 
of dies carried by said disk, means for inking 
the same, and a guide for preventing said disk 
from turning while being depressed, and the 
spring for normally holding said disk in a 
raised position substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 26th day of September, A. D. 
1895. 
GAY ORD W. BEEBE. 
In presence of - 
A. C. PAUL, 
C. G. HAWLEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594419.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 594,419. 
S. D. S. NARBER 
METALLIC RAILROAD TIE, 
Patented Nov. 30, 1897, 
 
M374. 
Simon A. 5./arvez 
Aaze-2-2e. 
&letovo 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMON D. S. NARBER, OF LE GRAND, IOWA. 
METALC, RAI ROAD - TE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 594,419, dated November 30, 1897. 
Application filed June 10, 1897. Serial No. 640,201 (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SIMON D. S. NARBER, 
of Le Grand, in the county of Marshall and 
State of Iowa, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Metallic Railroad 
Ties; and I do hereby declare the following 
to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
metallic railway-ties; and the object of the 
same is to provide an improved tie which will 
not break at the center under the influence 
of extreme cold and which is so formed to 
coact with the ballast as to form an extremely 
strong road-bed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of my invention. Fig. 2 
is a top plan view with the upper plate re 
moved. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
1 and 2 indicate the top and bottom plates of 
the tie, having their ends bent at right angles 
and Overlapping, as illustrated, said ends be 
ing secured together and to the transversely 
extending plates or arms 3 by bolts, as illus 
trated. 
It will be understood that these 
transversely-extending plates or arms project 
On each side of the top and bottom plates, 
whereby when the ballast is packed around 
the tie a very strong and rigid construction 
is provided. Secured to the upper plate are 
the railplates or clamps 4, the inner ones be 
ing removable for securing the rails to the tie. 
Secured between the top and bottom plates 
of the tie, at the center thereof, and extend 
ing nearly to each transverse plate or arm is 
a plurality of diamond-shape casings or com 
partments 5, secured between the plates by 
Suitable bolts and nuts. 
By having the tie formed as above de 
scribed the ballast may be filled in between 
the diamond-shape casings, and thereby form 
a very strong construction of road-bed. 
When it is desired to secure the rails upon 
the tie or remove the same therefrom, all that 
3o 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
is necessary is to remove a small quantity of 
ballast from the under side of the top plate, 
when the removable clamp may be readily 
removed. 
A tie constructed as above described is ex 
ceedingly strong, it being braced at its center 
and beneath the rails by the boxes or casings, 
and the arrangement of said casings or boxes 
enables the ballast to be so packed around 
the tie as to form what may be amply termed 
a mortise-joint. 
The tie is extremely simple in construction 
and can be manufactured at a nominal cost, 
the boxes being cast and secured between the 
plates by bolts and nuts. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a rail 
way-tie comprising upper and lower plates, 
transversely-extending plates to which said 
upper and lower plates are attached, said 
transversely-extending plates projecting on 
opposite sides of the top and bottom plates, 
and a web connecting said plates, said web 
being formed ZigZag in contour, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. As a new article of manufacture, a rail 
Way-tie comprising a top and bottom plate 
having their ends extending at right angles 
and overlapping, transversely - extending 
plates to which the overlapping ends of the 
top and bottom plates are attached, said trans 
versely-extending plates projecting on oppo 
site sides of the top and bottom plates, a se 
ries of diamond-shape boxes or casings con 
necting said top and bottom plates, and means 
for securing the rails to the tie, substantially 
as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing Witnesses. 
SIMON D. S. NARBER. 
Witnesses: 
JONAH IDUNCAN, 
S. O. SIMKINS, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594519.txt	(No Model.) 
H. BRISTOW, 
SKEIN SILK B00K, 
No. 594,519, 
Patented Nov. 30, 1897. 
WITNESSES : Ziz 
?izV. 
4. A 3.2. 
/27/622- -ef 
7.9% Ps (suitou 
//WWENTOR 
O 
vs114 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY BRISTOW, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
SKEN-SILK BOOK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 594,519, dated November 30, 1897. 
Application filed January 16, 1897, Serial No. 619,474 (No model.) , 
To all, whom, it may concern 
Beit known that I, HENRY BRISTOW, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Brook 
lyn, county of Kings, State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Skein-Silk Books, of which the fol 
lowing is so full, clear, and exact a descrip 
tion as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which my invention appertains to make 
and use the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im 
proved book closed. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view of the same open. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
of one of the leaves. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal 
section of the book closed. Fig. 5 is a sec 
tional view at the opening C, showing the 
eyelet. Fig. 6 is a detailed view of the strips 
which hold the leaves in the book and which 
separate them from each other at the back of 
the book. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
skein-silk case by the use of which skein-silk 
may be kept in perfect order without liabil 
ity of becoming tangled and without danger 
of fading in spots. 
Another object of my invention is to pro 
vide a skein-silk book by the use of which 
any desired shade or size of silk may be se 
lected at will and drawn out instantly with 
out in any Way injuring the thread drawn or 
disturbing or distorting or injuring or de 
stroying any other thread or plurality of 
threads in the skein or skeins. 
In the accompanying drawings, A desig 
nates the outside cover. 
B designates two leaves, one on either side, 
forming what I term an inside cover. 
C designates the leaves proper of the book. 
The leaves are provided near one end with 
two circular openings connected by a pas 
sage-Way D, extending up above the line of 
the top of the openings C, leaving a projec 
tion E, which extends above the lines of the 
openings C' in the shape of a lip or tongue E, 
Over which is adapted to be looped a skein of 
silk. The material at this end of the leaf is 
Solid around the edge and end. At the oppo 
site end of the leafare two openings HH, pro 
vided with slits II, which extend from the 
Opening to the Outer edge of the paper each 
side of the flap or tongue E. 
The book proper is put together with strips 
of fabric which connect the leaves together 
and the outside ones connect the leaves to the 
cover. To the outside of the cover is secured 
a fabric J, which covers the back of the book, 
but is loose from the back edges of the leaves, 
which prevents cracking and breaking of the 
fabric forming the back of the book and thus 
avoiding its becoming disfigured. The in 
side leaves or covers are smaller than the 
outside cover and serve to prevent the silk 
from coming into contact with the thumb or 
thumb-marks on the inside of the cover or 
the paste or fabric of the removable cover M. 
This cover M is provided with ribbons NN 
for fastening the book closed. There is a de 
cided space between the upper ends of the 
tongues and the inner edge of the end of the 
leaf nearest the outer end of the tongue. 
This enables the operator to move the tongues 
back and forth without injuring them. 
It will be observed that the distance be 
tween the openings each side of the base of 
the tongue E is greater than the distance be 
tween the openings at the opposite end of the 
sheet each side of the tongue E. This is 
done to prevent too great bulk of silk on the 
same line through the book and to distribute 
the bulk of the skein over the leaves in such 
a way that the book will close evenly. An 
eyelet may be put through the openings to 
prevent fraying the silk and will prevent 
cutting the sheet. The eyelet will be in the 
nature of an open ring, as shown in Fig. 3 at 
C. C. C. C. This will also reduce friction and 
make the silk slip freely. 
The strips of fabric a' (shown in Figs. 2 and 
6) are secured to the leaves, so that they will 
lie flat out when the book is opened, and the 
thickness of the doubled fabric a' (as it must 
double when closed) will hold the leaves apart 
to accommodate the additional thickness of 
the bulk of the silk in the skein, as set forth. 
Having thus fully described the objects, 
uses, and advantages of my device, and hav 
ing described and shown a preferred form of 
carrying the same into practice, what I desire 
to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
States, and what I therefore claim, is 
1. A skein-silk book consisting of covers 
having secured thereto and therein between 
a series of leaves joined together with and 
(d 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
594,519 
3. A skein-silk book consisting of covers 
having secured thereto and therein between 
a series of leaves joined together with and 
separated by a strip a' to facilitate the open 
ing of the book flat out, and to accommodate 
the additional thickness of the bulk of the 
silk, said leaves provided with Openings and 
flaps or tongues to receive and hold the silk 
and an outside cover provided with means 
for fastening the book closed to prevent soil 
ing, distorting, fraying and tangling of the 
silk. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
3o 
IIENRY BRISTOW. 
Witnesses: 
ALEX. S. STEUART, 
CHARLES E. BARBER, 
separated by a strip C to facilitate the open 
ing of the book flat out, and to accommodate 
the additional thickness of the bulk of the 
silk, said leaves provided with openings and 
flaps or tongues to receive and hold the silk, 
as set forth. 
2. A skein-silk book consisting of a series 
of leaves bound together and provided at or 
near one end with a tongue having openings 
at either side of its base and provided at or 
near the opposite end with a tongue having 
openings at either side of its base, the dis 
tance between the openings at the base of one 
of the tongues being greater than the distance 
between the openings at the base of the other 
tongue, and the width of the base of one of 
the tongues being greater than the width of 
the base of the other tongue, as and for the 
purpose specified. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594619.txt	( No Model.) 
No. 594,619, 
T. HADDOW. 
HOISTING APPARATUS, 
Patented Nov. 30, 1897. 
 
www. 
WITNESSES: 
NVENTOR 
BY \%zee Ya ATTY 
S. 
The corris Peters co. Photo-Ho., WASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS HADDOW, OF WEST HOBOKEN, NEW JERSEY. 
HOISTING APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 594,619, dated November 30, 1897. 
Application filed February 5, 1897, Serial No. 622,143, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS HADDOW, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in West 
Hoboken, Hudson county, and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Hoisting Apparatus; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to Which it appertains to make and use the 
Same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to letters of reference 
marked thereon, which form a part of this 
specification. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
hoisting devices such as are used in hoisting 
engines, elevators, (especially of the dumb 
Waiter class,) &c., and its object is to pro 
vide devices of the above character of simple, 
strong, and durable construction, reliable in 
Operation, easily handled, and in which the 
Weight to be lifted can be maintained at any 
height desired without the use of brakes, 
catches, or similar contrivances. 
The invention consists in the improved 
hoisting apparatus, its coperative drums, 
carrying and operating the lift-ropes and in 
the combination and arrangement of the va 
rious parts thereof, substantially as will be 
hereinafter more fully described, and finally 
embodied in the clauses of the claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
in which like letters of reference indicate 
COrresponding parts in each of the several 
Views, Figure 1 is a front elevation of my 
improved hoisting apparatus; Fig. 2, a side 
elevation of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a front elevation 
illustrating a slightly-modified form of what 
is shown in Fig. 1, and Fig. 4 a detail side 
elevation of a certain endless chain or belt 
and of the drum carrying the same and used 
in connection with the modification illus 
trated in Fig. 3. 
-In Said drawings, C. represents a bed-plate 
having the upWardly-projecting standards a', 
a', and C., forming the bearings for the par 
allel shafts band e, as clearly shown. On 
the shaft e and at or near its bearings are 
Securely mounted the pinions did and between 
them the drum g, having the annular flanges 
g'. Said pinions mesh into the gear-wheels 
c, arranged on the shaft b, which latter ex 
. 
O 
25 
35 
 
55 
75 
tends beyond the bearing in the standard at 
into the bearing in the standard a and car 
ries a drum f with annular flanges f' on its 
extended portion-that is to say, on the por 
tion between the bearings in the standards 
a' and a. One end of the lift-rope his se 
cured to the drum g, while the other end is 
fastened on the drum f. The lift-rope, which 
is arranged on both drums in the same direc 
tion, passes Over a sheave i, which latter is 
connected to the weight to be lifted in the 
usual and Well-known manner. 
On one of the parallel shafts (in the draw 
ings b) is secured a grooved wheel m, adapted 
to be operated either by a crank-handle in or 
through an endless rope passing over said 
wheel and descending to within reach of the 
operator. 
When space is limited, (in width,) the modi 
fied form illustrated in Fig. 3 is used. In 
that construction the drum g is replaced by 
a drum g, having on its periphery a series of 
parallel grooves or channels g, adapted to be 
engaged by the rods or bars g, arranged on 
the endless belt or chaing, which latter also 
passes over a drum g, arranged on the par 
allel shafte', having its bearings in the stand 
ards a and a' and below the bearings for the 
shaft e. The endless belt or chain g is pro 
vided at or near its edges with sectional por 
tions g, forming flexible flanges, to prevent 
the slipping off of the lift-rope h. The pro 
portions of the gear-wheels c and pinions d 
and also of the drum g and f must be such 
that at any phase of Operation the One drum 
and its gear-wheel acts as a brake for the 
other drum and its pinion, and vice Versa 
that is to say, that no matter what Weight may 
be suspended by the lift-rope h the mechan 
ism will not be started by said weight except 
when one of the shafts is operated. 
From the foregoing it is obvious that very 
little power is required for operating the 
hoisting apparatus irrespective of the weight 
to belifted. Supposing the drums g andfwere 
in proportion six to twelve and the pinions d 
and gear-wheels c in proportion one to eight, 
(these figures to be calculated as inches.) In 
this case the retaining or balancing power 
would be about the highest obtainable and 
the weight would be carried during one revo 
lution of the shaft ba distance of about thirty 
95 
CCs 
2 
594,619 
25 
35 
meshing with said pinions, a lift-rope Secured 
with one end to one of said drums and with 
its other end to the other drum and coiled in 
the same direction, on said drums, and means 
such as a crank, for operating one of said 
shafts, substantially as described. 
2. In a hoisting apparatus, comprising two 
drums, means for operating said drums at 
different speeds and in opposite directions, one 
of said drums having the form of an endless 
belt stretched over two drums of smaller di 
ameter than the independent drum, and a 
lift-rope secured with one end to the inde 
pendent drum and with its other end to the 
belt-drum, and coiled around said drums in 
the same direction, substantially as and for 
the purposes described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing I 
have hereunto set my hand this 1st day of 
February, 1897. 
THOMAS IIADDOW. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED GARTNER, 
WM. D. BELL. 
O 
nine inches, and the power necessary to op 
erate the said shaft would have to be slightly 
greater than the combined friction in the ap 
paratus. 
I do not intend to limit myself to the pre 
cise construction shown and described, as vari 
ous alterations can be made without chang 
ing the scope of my invention; but 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a hoisting apparatus, the combination 
with a frame, comprising a bed-plate and 
three standards, of two parallel shaftsmount 
ed in said standards, one of said shafts hav 
ing its bearings in tWO of Said standards, 
while the other shaft extends beyond the cen 
tral standard to and into the third standard, 
in which latter an additional bearing is formed 
for said shaft, a cylindrical drum secured on 
the shorter one of said shafts, a cylindrical 
drum of larger diameter secured on the ex 
tended portion of the other shaft, a pinion on 
the first-mentioned shaft on each side of the 
drum, gear-wheels on the other shaft and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594719.txt	(No Model.) 
R. W. ANDREWS, 
PICKER CHECK FOR LOOMS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 594,719, 
Patented Nov. 30, 1897. 
 
aro-RP 
eae. S t 
(No Model.) 
R. W. ANDREWS, 
PICKER CHECK FOR LOOMS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 594,719, 
Patented Nov. 30, 1897. 
N 
z 
M 7%7% 
N 
 
/ 25 
  
- 
||Z I 
 
 
 
 
- 
 
 
 
 
7-Z724722, N 
Czz. 3 (2.4. 
 
727zZ, 
Ze 
ZZZZYZZzz, 
Z - 7.) 
3. 
594,719 
mally hold the lever in the relative position 
shown more particularly in Fig. I, is a spring 
bolt bearing the short arm n to a bearing 
on part c of lug D and fulcrum part O to the 
part e. The spring-bolt comprises a bolt ti, 
adapted to be received in slots d and d", and a 
rounded head it, adapted to straddle the short 
arm m above the slot d' and rest in the socket 
s, to which it conforms and in which it 
slightly rotates when the short arm n is sepa 
rated from its bearing on the lug D, as shown 
in Fig. II. A spring H surrounds the bolt 
and bears between the washer U and an ad 
justing-nut upon the threaded free end of 
the bolt it to regulate the strength of the 
spring. A washer at bears over slot d and 
receives the thrust of one end of the spring. 
An outside check-nut y is also combined with 
the bolt, as shown. 
The bolt-hole at in frame B is in the top of 
the frame, near the face of long arm of 
the lever E, and, as shown in Fig. VII, serves 
to permit the frame to be bolted to the wall 
of the lay-box, while bolt-hole b is at the bot 
tom of frame B and coincides with a curved 
slot ac' in the wall of the lay-box. Said slot 
is described on a circle, having the bolt-hole 
CL as its center, and by loosening the two bolts 
in said holes the bottom of the frame B can 
be swung to bring the face of lever E to dif 
ferent angles to compensate for the reduction 
in size and change in shape of the picker from 
Wear, and in its changed position the frame 
B can be secured by simply tightening up the 
two bolts which bind it to the lay-box wall. 
In Fig. VII portions of a lay - box and 
shuttle-box are shown, with the inner walls 
removed and the picker in partial section be 
tween the eveners XX before being impelled 
by the blow of the shuttle T to swing lever 
E from its normal resting position. In the 
same position the lever is shown in top plan 
view in Fig. VIII, with the picker F upon 
its guide-rod n, and tied to the picker-staff 
W, the parts in both views Figs. VII and 
VIII being to a scale of one-half natural size. 
In operation the blow of the picker upon 
first impact starts the lever to rotate upon its 
half-round fulcrum. After the commence 
ment of rotation the long arm of the lever be 
gins to find a fulcrum on the eccentric sur 
face joined to its first journal-bearing, and 
as the lever continues to swing under pres 
sure its fulcrum continually shifts farther 
and farther from the short arm, and conversely 
nearer to the free end of the long arm, with 
the result that the lever gets weaker progress 
ively and the weight, in the shape of the 
spring, gets stronger out of all proportion, 
due to the compression of the spring. I am 
by these means able to oppose to the blow of 
the picker and shuttle a check yielding easily 
enough at first to prevent the rebound of the 
shuttle and rapidly increasing its resistance 
to absorb gradually all of the momentum of 
the shuttle before the limit of elasticity or 
setting of a spring weakenough for the initial 
resistance is reached, and while consequently 
there is always an elastic reserve to prevent 
a smash. 
The lever and spring-bolt cannot by any 
operation of the shuttle or picker nor by the 
movement of the lay be detached from their 
frame and its lug; but when it is desired to 
remove the picker to replace it, or for any 
other reason, or when it is desired to tighten 
up the spring H the bolt with spring can 
easily be withdrawn from slots d and d" and 
the lever E be lifted off its seat on the lug to 
leave an open space for removing the picker 
from the lay-box, and to assemble the parts 
in operative position it is only necessary to 
drop the lever into its place and insert the 
bolt in the slots in rear of the lug and lever. 
It is evident that in place of slots did open 
ing to the rear a hole of larger diameter 
than the bolt through the seat of the lug and 
short arm of the lever to permit the bolt to 
be passed through and then through the coil 
spring before having the end nut screwed on 
the bolt would make the spring-bolt equally 
effective; but the open-end slots and socket 
S permit the withdrawal or assembling of the 
spring-bolt with all of its parts as one piece 
and with the spring at an adjusted tension, 
so that to remove all of the downward-ex 
tending parts of the device it is sufficient to 
pull the spring-bolt from its place. When 
the short arm of the lever is separated from 
its seat on the lug, as shown in Fig. II, the 
sockets, by means of the bolt-head resting 
on it, prevents the bolt from sliding out of 
the slots d d". After the shuttle is checked 
this device becomes operative to return the 
picker and shuttle to the position to receive 
the blow of the picker-staff automatically. 
Although the most convenient way of at 
tachment of frame B, having the lug D, is, 
as shown in the drawings, upon the inner 
wall of the lay-box, it may be, without a de 
parture from the spirit of my invention, bolt 
ed to the outer face of the front wall to have 
the lug extend through or over said Wall to 
support the lever and spring-bolt within the 
lay-box. 
Without the eccentric prolonged from the 
half-round journal of the lug this device 
would be an effective picker-check, possess 
ing many advantages over those now in use, 
from the small space it occupies and the fa 
cility with which it can be removed and again 
replaced. 
Now, having described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In loom picker - checks, a lay-bOX, a 
metal frame bolted to its vertical Wall, a lug 
integral with the frame and projecting at 
right angles therefrom over the inside of the 
box, said lug comprising a polygonal block 
presenting a rear horizontal seat and upward 
extending rounded journal-surface from the 
front of said seat, a rigid lever with short 
arm and adjacent fulcrum adapted to rest 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
594,719 
3. 
journal portion and adapted upon its rotation 
or swing to bear upon the eccentric, as a full 
crum; and a coil-spring combined with the 
lever short arm and its seat, and arranged to 
surround the stem of a bolt tying the two to 
gether, and to bear between the lug and the 
free end of the bolt, as shown and described. 
4. The combination with the lay-box, a 
frame adapted to be secured thereto, a lug 
projecting from said frame provided with a 
lever-seat, journal and eccentric bearing, 
rigid lever with short arm seated on the lug 
and long arm extended down into the picker 
path, and spring-bolt t bearing the lever to 
its seat and journal, all arranged and oper 
ating as set forth, the short lever-arm and 
corresponding lug-seat being provided with 
coinciding bolt-holes d and d therethrough 
and open to the rear, short lever-arm also 
being provided with a sockets therein above 
said holes, the head of the bolt resting in said 
socket; whereby the removable parts are held 
operatively connected by the spring, and 
adapted to be displaced or assembled without 
changing the position of the spring-regulat 
ing nut upon the bolt. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
ROBERT W. ANDREWS. 
Witnesses: 
R. F. HYDE, 
G. P. ANDREWS. 
35 
45 
55 
upon and conform to the lug-seat and journal, 
and a long arm faced to the picker and ex 
tended downward in its path, coinciding bolt 
holes through rear of lug and short arm of 
lever; and a downward - extending spring 
bolt combined with the short lever-arm and 
lug, and operating to normally bear them to 
gether, substantially as shown and described. 
2. A lay-box, a metal frame bolted to one 
vertical Wall of the box, a polygonal lug from 
the frame and projecting over the interior of 
the box with a rear seat-surface and upward 
extended journal therefrom, said journal be 
ing rounded on its top With an enlarged ec 
centric surface prolonged therefrom, a rigid 
lever comprising a short arm and adjacent 
fulcrum conformed to bear upon the lug-seat 
and rounded journal, and a long arm faced 
to the picker and extended down in its path 
in close proximity to the eccentric, coincid 
ing bolt-holes through the lug-seat and short 
arm of the lever, and a spring-bolt received 
through the lug and short arm of the lever 
and bearing to normally hold the lever seat 
ed with its long arm just free of the eccen 
tric, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
3. The combination of the frame; a lug 
thereon provided with a seat for the short 
lever-arm, and raised journal with outward 
extended enlarged eccentric; rigid lever with 
straight long arm prolonged from its rounded 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594820.txt	(No Model.) 
INSTRUMENT FOR MEASURING, TIME AND DISTANCE, 
S. N. AYRES. 
No. 594,820, 
Patented Nov. 30, 1897, 
WITNESS. 
Ga2. (2% 
 
IWWENTOR C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SERENO N. AYRES, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
NSTRUMENT FOR MEAS J R N G 
W S A \ 
} SANCE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 594,820, dated November 30, 1897. 
Application filed April 28, 1896, Serial No. 589,385, 
(No model) 
O 
To add, whon, it invazy concert: 
Be it known that I, SERENO N. AYREs, a 
citizen of the United States of America, and 
a resident of the city of New York, in the 
county and State of New York, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in In 
struments for Measuring Time and iDistance, 
of which the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming part of the same, in which 
Figure I represents the dial-face of a cy 
clometer to which my invention has been 
added. Fig. 2 is a reverse face view of the 
meter, showing the record-keeping tablet or 
disk. Fig. 3 is a substantially similar view 
of the meter, but without the tablet. Fig. 4 is a 
plan view of the shifting mechanism I employ 
to alter the position of the marker as the tab 
let moves around. Fig. 5 shows the main 
Wheel of the distance-recording mechanism 
and the modification therein I have devised 
to cause it to operate the marker. Fig. G is 
an enlarged view of the marker, the operating 
hammer, and adjacent parts, showing them 
in the position they occupy when neither 
marker nor hammer is in action. Fig. 7 is 
a view of the same parts, showing the ham 
lmer retracted to add force to its blow; and 
Fig. S shows the parts in the position they oc 
cupy When the blow has been delivered and 
before the hammer and the marker have re 
covered their normal quiescent positions. 
The invention relates principally to mechan 
ism for simultaneously recording two facts 
for instance, a distance traveled and the time 
occupied in doing so-or it might be used for 
recording the number of blows delivered by 
a drill and the time occupied or time and num 
ber in almost any application. 
I have shown the device as applied to a cy 
clometer, such a one as would be useful in re 
cording the distance traveled by a bicycle; 
but I do not limit myself to such a combina 
tion. As shown, it will render the rider the 
service of a timepiece, being readily secured 
in such position that it can be easily seen 
from the saddle, and at the same time will 
make a permanent detailed and detachable 
record of the distance traveled and the time 
consumed between the completion of each 
quarter of a mile of that distance. Thus if 
after completing twelve miles at 9.17 a rest 
of twenty-five minutes should be taken and 
the next quarter ridden in a minute the rec 
ord would show that twenty - six minutes 
elapsed between completing the twelve miles 
and completing twelve and a quarter miles, or 
that twenty-five minutes more than necessary 
was taken for this thirty-seventh quarter, c'e- 
atting a very efficient check on One sent on an 
errand. 
The mechanism of the cyclometer is well 
known and its full description unnecessary. 
In this form a pointer iP revolves about the 
dial-center once for each mile traveled by the 
machine, indicating by its location the part 
traversed, and registry-wheels with appropri 
ate figures exposed through openings in the 
dial-face, as shown, indicate how many times 
the pointer has completed its revolutions. To 
such mechanism I have added a time-move 
ment, so arranged that I may use the same 
dial for it that I also use for the distance-re 
corder by making a combination of a time and 
a cyclometer dial, the watch-hands moving 
over it and indicating the time as the pointel' 
and the figures do the distance. 
Upon the center spindle S of the time-move 
ment and preferably at the rear face, that it 
may be conveniently adjusted or removed, I 
mount a record-holding disk or tablet D, (pref 
erably of paper,) so arranged that it shall turn 
completely around once each hour, (or other 
given interval, preferably in unison with the 
minute-hand,) that being most convenient for 
purposes of ready reading and also Operation, 
as its movement need only be timed with the 
minute-hand spindle of the time-lmovement, 
and this may be effected by seculing it; SO as 
to turn with that spindle. This tablet is by 
me usually divided into spaces, such as equal 
the travel of the disk during one minute, by 
radial lines, as shown, and for convenience in 
reading I have numbered the fifth lines se 
quentially 5, 10, 15, &c., to (30. 
It 
is also provided with other lines concentric or 
spiral for a purpose to be presently described. 
Division into other than minute-spaces might, 
be substituted for the ladial lines shown, if 
desired. 
Supported in an arm C, which is here shown 
as pivoted to one arm of an elbow-lever E, i. 
provide a marker n, a needle-point with an 
enlarged head to retain a spring S between it 
25 
35 
45 
55 
So 
9 O 
95 
OC) 
 
: 
594,820 
55 
 
3o p, secured to the wheel 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
and the arm Ct, that the needle may be with 
drawn after action, and a collar c, which limits 
the l'eturn motion of the needle by engage 
ment with the lower end of a socket-bearing 
b, connected to arm (t, to insure the move 
ment of the needle m in right lines. The 
marker is preferably mounted on the side of 
the watch-plate farthest from the tablet and 
extends through a slot S, cut in said plate, 
but not necessarily. To prevent the blow 
from disarranging the tablet, I secure a slot 
ted finger f to the bridge of the movement in 
such position that it will extend inward over 
the disk and its slot will register with the path 
of the needle or marker n. The tablet might 
be fixed and the marker revolve with substan 
tially similar i'estilts. 
Within the line of the main wheel W of the 
in eter On a Spring-arm A, i mount the ham 
mer I immediately over the head h of the 
marker, but no1 mally not in contact with it. 
This hammer of its level is provided with a 
double lug or two single lugs ll'. The part 
l extends beyond the interior line of the an 
nular wheel W and, resting upon it, insures 
the hammer shall not touch the marker-head 
except when desired. The other part l' ex 
tends a little beyond and below the hammer 
head and register's with a set of inclined planes 
W, one before each 
point in the wheel which is intended to be op 
posite the hamme' when a blow is struck. 
Finally, one or more notches in are cut in 
Wheel W., one for each time the marker is in 
tended to act during the revolution of wheel 
W, here four evenly spaced, that the time 
Occupied in going each quarter-mile may be 
accurately recorded. These notches are of a 
size and shape to permit the entry of the lugs 
la distance sufficient to cause the hammer to 
strike the needle-marker and drive its point 
through the tablet, and yet such that the lug 
l will engage with the inclined planes p' at the 
real' of the notches. 
The operation is evident: As the wheel W., 
driven by the Worm-gear connected to the ac 
filiating part, turns around the plane p comes 
under lug land, carrying it upward, forces 
back the hanliner against the stress of spring 
arm A. Just as the machine completes a 
quarter-lnile (or a mile, if so arranged) the 
lug l comes over a notch n, lug lslips off the 
high point of plane p, the hammer descends, 
delivers its blow, and the marker is driven 
through the tablet, leaving a minute-mark 
therein, say at the radial line marked 5. The 
halmlner and needle spring back into normal 
position, the inclined plane p' at the rear of 
the notch ninsuring this if the spring should 
fail to act. The motion continues, and as an 
Other quarter is completed the needle is again 
driven through the paper, say, at the next ra 
dial line. Then the rider knows that that 
quarter of a mile was ridden in just one min 
lute, and so the record will continue, a prickin 
the paper marking the completion of each 
Guarter-mile and thus preserving an abso 
lutely correct and automatically-taken record 
of the distance covered and time occupied, 
provided for in the arrangement. It also tells 
the number of miles ridden, for the number 
of punctures divided by four always gives 
that record independent of the instantane 
ously-read index on the face, already de 
scribed. I usually cut the inotch 7, into which 
the hammel-lug descends at the completion 
of the mile, a little longer and so set the plane 
p' at the rear that the needle-point may be 
driven farther down, and being tapered may 
lihake a larger puncture for the mile-mark 
than when it marks the quarter, fol' pulpOSes 
of convenience in reading the record. With 
such arrangement, the counting of the large 
punctures alone will tell the miles traveled. 
To use as a stop-watch, the automatic nove 
ment of the marker is unnecessaly. 
It is not convenient to divide the disk by 
radial lines as closely set as would be required 
to record a long run by merely one lotation 
of the disk. If it were arranged to tulin but 
once in twelve hours, the punctures would be 
so close on any disk of practicalle diameter 
that they would be scarcely distinguishable 
one from the next. I have therefore arranged 
it should rotate once an hour and the division 
lines should correspond to divisions of that 
interval. If no further device were provided, 
the disk would need to be changed each houl', 
and such a necessity would be very unpopul 
lar. 
I have therefore arranged that the disk 
shall hold the record of a series of hours (here 
twelve) by causing the marker to assume a di? 
ferent radial position each hour, (or other suit 
able interval.) It thus happens that the re 
cording-punctures of each hour are in sub 
stantially different and concentric circles, 
(really one long scroll,) and I am enabled on 
one tablet to make the l'ecord of many mol'e 
hours than could feasibly be done with a sta 
tionary marker. This is accomplished as fol 
lows: The arm Ct, carrying the marker ), is 
mounted, as stated, on an elbow-level E, piv 
oted at P', preferably near the rim of the case. 
A short distance from the center I mount a 
cam C, which engages the second arm L' of the 
elbow-level E, and by making this second arm 
L' shorter than the first all)n I, get a greater 
movement, of the end of arm L than the Swing 
of the cam would otherwise provide. This cam 
is turned on its pivot P once in twelve hours 
(or other predetermined interval) by means 
of a train of gears operated from the central 
or other spindle of the time mechanism. A 
spring A' holds the arm L'against the can C 
and returns the marker to its outermost po 
sition when the arm L' drops off the high 
point of the cam. 
I might operate the arm C from the cam di 
rect and might operate the cam from some 
other spindle than the One designated, not 
ably the hour-wheel of the time mechanism, 
the absolute requisites being mechanism that 
will move the marker across its designated 
path in the designated time, but I prefer the 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
CO 
I O5 
IIO 
I I5 
I 25 
594,820 . 
3. 
mechanism described, as it enables line to 
accomplish the desired result without such 
stress as would interfere with the correct run 
ning of the time mechanism, which would 
result were the action of a spring such as A' 
arranged to be directly opposed to the mo 
tion of the hand indicating the time. 
The marker, by the mechanism described, 
will be continually moving from its outer 
limit of motion to its inner limit, and its 
movement being regular it will move over 
One-twelfth of the distance in one hour and 
(if the machine is running the whole time) 
will of course leave a trail of twelve circles 
of punctures or, rather, a spiral of twelve con 
volutions marked by punctures, and to ren 
der reading easier I have divided the space 
On the disk or tablet which moves under the 
marker by lines, it being intended that dur 
ing the first hour the punctures shall be with 
out the first line, then between it and the sec 
Ond line during the second hour, &c. In ordi 
nary practice, however, I find that the eleven 
lines required to separate twelve spaces would 
be SO close together as to confuse, and I there 
fore use but six, the space between any two 
being therefore occupied by the punctures 
made during two hours. Instead of a series of 
circles I might make a continuous spiral line, 
With the requisite number of convolutions to 
accomplish the desired purpose. I set the 
marker and the disk or tablet in such posi 
tion that at the beginning of the twelve hours 
the record of which it is intended the disk 
shall receive the marker is at its outward 
limit of movement and the radial line indi 
cating the beginning of the first minute of 
the time to be indicated shall lie immediately 
linder the marker, such arrangement insur 
ing the ready reading of the record for the 
twelve hours when completed and uniformity 
in the reading of a series of such tablets used 
One after the other. 
The head of the hammer II is sufficiently 
Wide to strike the head h of the marker 
Whether that be at the outward or in Ward 
limit of Variation or at any intermediate point. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to Secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination with a regular moving 
mechanism of a record-tablet moved by said 
mechanism across a given point, a marker, a 
hammer, a second moving mechanism for op 
erating said marker and engaging devices for 
intermittently holding said hammer from en 
gaging the marker-head, all substantially as 
Set forth. 
2. The combination with a cyclometer 
wheel provided with one or more notches, 
each provided with an inclined plane at one 
side, of a hammer provided with a lip extend 
ing Over the rim of said wheel and adapted 
i to enter the motch and engage the inclined 
plane thereof, a marker in line with said ham 
mer, a tablet carried with regularity under 
the marker and mechanism substantially as 
described for moving said tablet, all substan 
tially as set forth. 
3. The combination with a double mech 
anism substantially as described of a circular 
moving tablet connected with the time-move 
ment, a marker mounted on a movable arm, 
an elbow-lever mounted in the case, one end 
connected to the arm of the marker and the 
opposite end bearing against a calm, said cam, 
gears connecting said calm to the time-move 
ment and means substantially as set forth 
for operating the marker to mark the tablet, 
all substantially asset forth. 
4. The combination with a double mech 
anish substantially as described of a circular 
moving tablet connected with the time-move 
inent, a marker mounted on a movable arm, 
an elbow-lever, with arms of different length, 
mounted in the case, the longer end connected 
to the arm of the marker and the opposite 
end bearing against a calm, said calm, gears 
connecting said cam to the time-movement 
and means substantially as set forth for op 
elating the marker to mark the tablet, all 
substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination with a double mech 
anism substantially as described of a circular 
moving tablet connected with a time-move 
ment, a marker mounted on a movable arm, 
an elbow-level mounted in the case, one end 
connected to the arm of the marker and the 
opposite end bearing against a cam, said cam, 
gears connecting Said calm to the time-move 
ment, a spring bearing against said ever op 
positely to the stress of the cam and means 
Substantially as set forth for operating the 
marker to mark the tablet, all substantially 
as set forth. 
6. The combination with a cyclometer 
wheel provided with one or more notches, of 
a hammer, provided with a lip extending over 
the rim of said wheel and adapted to enter a 
notch, a second lip depending within the line 
of the wheel, an inclined plane also within 
Said line and adjacent to the notch, a marker 
in line with said hammer, a tablet carried 
with regularity under the marker and mech 
anism substantially as described for carrying 
Said tablet, all substantially as set forth. 
in testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 22d day of April, 
1890. 
SERENO N. AYRES. 
Witnesses: 
C. L. WRIGHT, 
A. G. N. VERMILYA, 
75 
9 O 
OO 
IO5 
IO 
I I5 
O 
2 
25 
35 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US594920.txt	(No Model.) 
A. THIEKE, 
WOOD PLUG. HOLDER. 
No. 594,920, 
Patented Dec. 7, 1897. 
Fi-l- 
s 2222224 reas E. 
 
WZ 
 
W/7 WESSES 
Y . 
. 
/WWENTOR 
(26-6. 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHoTo-LTHO. wash:NGTov, c.c. 
BY 
M 
A 7TORNEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST THIEKE, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
WooD-PLUG Hold ER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 594,920, dated December 7, 1897. 
Application filed April 28, 1897. Serial No. 634,266, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUST THIEKE, a 
subject of the German Emperor, residing at 
Berlin, in the Kingdom of Prussia, German 
Empire, have invented a new and Improved 
Wood-Plug Holder, of which the following is 
a full, clear, and exact specification. 
The object of this invention is a device in 
tended to take the place of the Wooden dow 
els now generally in use for securingwooden 
partS-Such as panels, moldings, &c.--to ma 
sonry, so as to obviate in a simple and eco 
nomical manner the numerous inconven 
iences attached to the use of these dowels. 
The essential feature of the new plug-holder 
is that wooden plugs are held in masonry by 
a white-iron plate, secured in turn to the 
Wall with nails or the like. 
The accompanying drawings show the new 
Wood-plug holder in three distinct forms. 
Figure 1 represents a Wood-plug holder for 
Ordinary masonry for securing moldings and 
the like. Fig.2 represents a Wood-plug holder 
for plaster walls with wire-netting. Fig. 3 is 
a modification. 
The plug a is forced with its reduced end 
through a hole in the white-iron plate b, and 
the plate itself is fastened to the masonry 
with the two nails c, which are provided with 
a V-shaped cross-cut. 
In Fig.2 the white-iron plateb catches with 
turned-back wings d behind the wired and 
is so incased in the plate. This figure fur 
ther shows another arrangement suitable for 
35 
45 
So 
55 
securely fastening the plug to the white-iron 
plate and very efficient in all the various 
forms of execution. It consists in the plug 
having projecting rims e Overlapping the hole 
in the plate on one or on both sides. This 
arrangement can be effected by either press 
ing the wood or by heating the whiteiron and 
forcing it over the plug while hot. 
Fig. 3 represents a holder having two plugs 
secured by means of a plate b and a nail 
with S-shaped head c in the middle. This 
form is especially adapted for fastening the 
boards for telegraphic push-buttons and the 
like. 
I claim 
1. A Wood-plug holder, comprising a white 
iron plate secured to the Wall, and the plug 
held thereby to the wall, said plug fitting in 
a hole in the White-iron plate with a project 
ingrim on One or both sides, substantially as 
described. 
2. A wood-plug holder, comprising the plate 
b, means for holding it to the wall, an open 
ing through said plate for the insertion of the 
plug and means for holding the plug to the 
plate substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto signed 
my name in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
AUGUST THIEKE, 
Witnesses: 
HENRY HASPER, 
W. H.AUPT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595020.txt	(No Model.) 
R. P. HORNBAKE, 
WRINGER, ROLL. 
No. 595,020, 
Patented Dec. 7, 1897, 
 
Ni esses 
Sea 
 
 
Z3 S. (). 
 
 
s SS 
1-1/ue 11-to 
&ltto: 11. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT P. HORNBAKE, OF WASHINGTON, PENNSYLVANIA. 
WRING ERa ROL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,020, dated December 7, 1897. 
Application filed November 16, 1896, Serial No. 612,276, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT P. HORNBAKE, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Washington, in the county of Washington 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in 
Wringer-Rolls; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to Wringer-rolls. 
Heretofore much trouble has been expe 
rienced in using clothes-Wringers owing to 
the fact that the water is liable to rot out the 
rolls, and more particularly the crank-roll, 
thereby quickly impairing the efficiency of 
the device and making it necessary to supply 
new rolls. 
My object is to provide a novel form of roll 
adapted for use on clothes-Wringers which 
will be of simple and cheap construction, can 
be quickly and easily applied to or removed 
from the Wringer, and one which will be ex 
tremely durable and strong. 
Having these objects in view, the invention 
consists of those novel features and combina 
tions of parts appearing more fully herein 
after. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view of a clothes-wringer equipped with 
my improved roll; Fig. 2, a longitudinal sec 
tional view; Fig. 3, a view of the left-hand 
end of the roll, the shaft being shown in sec 
tion and the washer as broken away; Fig. 4, 
a sectional view of the right-hand end of the 
roll, and Fig. 5 an end view of the right-hand 
end of the roll. 
The numeral I designates the spindle or 
shaft. This shaft is provided with an elon 
gated enlarged portion 2 and reduced ends or 
journals 3 and 4. The left-hand end of the 
enlarged portion is cut away on opposite sides 
to provide the flat portions 5 and 6. The 
other or right-hand end of the enlarged por 
tion is only cut away on One side, as at 7. 
The numeral 8 designates a sleeve which is 
provided with a key 9, adapted for reception 
on the flat portion 7, so as to prevent the 
sleeve from turning. The body of the sleeve 
snugly fits the enlarged portion of the spin 
dle or shaft. The body of the sleeve is cut 
away on one side, as at 10, said sleeve being 
provided with an outer collar 11. 
The numeral 12 designates a tube which is 
grooved longitudinally, as at 13, thereby pro 
viding the ribs 14. At 15 there is shown a 
key which is located on the inside of the tube 
and is held in position by a screw 15'. This 
key is adapted to slide on the reduced portion 
10 of the sleeve and keep the tube from slip 
Olng. 
) There is a second sleeve 16, which is adapted 
to snugly fit over the enlarged portion of the 
spindle, and this sleeve fits snugly within the 
other end of the tube. At the end of the 
sleeve there is located a washer 17, provided 
with an opening 18, having straight sides 19 
and 20, which are received on the cut-away 
portions 5 and 6. This washer is securely 
connected to the sleeve, and by its engage 
ment with the cut-away portion of the spindle 
it prevents the sleeve from slipping or turn 
ing. If desirable, the tube can be secured 
by fastening devices to the two sleeves. 
It will be seen that as the roll is of metal it 
is practically indestructible, but at the same 
time well adapted to fill its office. Should, 
however, a roll become Worn through long 
continued usage, it can be removed whenever 
desirable and a new one substituted therefor. 
If desirable, a similar roll could be substi 
tuted for the ordinary upper roll now em 
ployed in clothes-wringers, although it is not 
necessary, as the greater part of the Wear and 
action of the boiling water comes on the lower 
or crank roll. 
There are many slight changes which could 
be resorted to without detracting from the 
present invention in any manner, and hence 
it is to be understood that I do not limit my 
self to the precise construction herein shown 
and described, but consider that I am entitled 
to all such variations as come Within the spirit 
and scope of the invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
In a Wringer-roll, the combination with a 
spindle having cut-away portions, of sleeves 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
595,020 
slipped over the spindle and provided with 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
keys which fit in said cut-away portions, one specification in the presence of two subscrib 
of said sleeves being provided with an addi- ing witnesses. 
tional cut-away portion, and a tube slipped 
5 over the sleeves and provided with a key 
Witnesses: 
which engages with the said additional cut- 
a Way portion. 
ROBERT. P. HORNBAKE. 
W. P. HuRST, 
O. M. HARTILEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595120.txt	 
 
  
(No Model.) 
G. J. DEHN. 
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING WATER HEATERS, 
No. 595,120, 
Patented Dec. 7, 1897. 
H 
I 
N NS 
2s. S 
2firs4 
 
 
SS 
s As Q S 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SS 
ze 1 
 
Z 
Zzy. A 
WITNESSES 
%22 2-1 
 
 
 
INVENTOR 
BY prere 
ATIOAAVEYS. 
terris petes to 
otolitho. WASHINGTN, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GE OR GE J. D. EEIN, O F I R ON MOUNTAIN, MICHIGAN. 
APPARATUS FOR CLEAN N G WATER - HEATERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,120, dated December 7, 1897. 
Application filed June 4, 1897, Serial No. 639,392, (No model.) 
O 
To all tition, it inct i? conce77. 
Be it known that I, GEORGE. J. DEHN, of 
Iron Mountain, in the county of Dickinson 
and State of Michigan, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Cleaning Water-Heaters, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
apparatus for preventing the accumulation 
of lime or similar matter in boilers, water 
back or front ranges, and connecting-pipes; 
and the object is to provide a simple means 
for automatically supplying a compound to 
the water to prevent lime or the like matter 
from adhering to the interior of the water-re 
ceptacle. 
I will describe an apparatus embodying my 
invention and then point out the novel fea 
tures in the appended claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in both views. 
Figure I is an elevation of a portion of a 
water-back lange and a hot-water tank, show 
ing my invention as applied thereto; and Fig. 
2 is a sectional elevation of the apparatus. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates the 
tank portion of a Water-back stove or range, 
and 2 is a boiler having the usual pipe con 
nection 3 with the water-back. Leading from 
the bottom of the boiler 2 is the usual supply 
pipe 4, and a coupling-pipe 5 connects the 
Supply-pipe With the Water-back. 
Mounted on the coupling-pipe 5 is a ves 
sel 6, provided with a cover 7, which may be 
secured in place in any desired manner. I 
have here shown it as provided with a down 
Wardly-extended flange at its edge, having a 
screw-thread to engage with a screw-thread 
on the vessel. A pipe 8 extends from the 
upper portion of the vessel 6 to the coupling 
pipe 5 at One side of the vessel, and from the 
other side of the vessel a pipe 9 extends from 
said vessel to a connection with the coupling 
pipe 5. This pipe 9 has a gooseneckportion 
10 within the vessel 6 and extended nearly 
to the bottom thereof. The pipe 8 may be 
termed the feed-pipe for the vessel 6, and 
55 
the pipe 9 the discharge-pipe 'for carrying 5o 
out water with which a compound is mingled. 
The pipe 8 is provided with a plug-valve 11, 
and the pipe 9 is also provided with a plug 
valve 12. 
The object in providing the pipe 9 with a 
gooseneck, as described, is to prevent an out 
flow of liquid from the vessel 6 should the 
valve 12 be inadvertently left open and the 
valve 11 closed. 
In using this apparatus the valves 11 and 
12 must be closed, and then a suitable com 
poundisplaced in the vessel 6 and the cover 
7 put in position. Then upon opening the 
valves 11 and 12 a certain portion of Water 
will discharge from the coupling - pipe 5 
through the pipe 8 into the vessel 6, where 
the compound will be mingled with it, and this 
water and compound will discharge through 
the pipe 9 into the water-back and also into 
the boiler, this operation of course only tak 
ing place when the water is in circulation. 
The apparatus may be made of any suit 
able metal and at comparatively small cost. 
The demand for the apparatus will be gener 
ally for kitchen-ranges and range-heaters. 
While I have shown and described it in con 
nection with a water-back range and boiler, it 
is obvious that it may be connected with the 
feed-pipe of any water-heater. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
An apparatus for cleaning water-heaters, 
comprising a length of pipe designed for con 
nection with a feed-pipe, a vessel on said 
pipe for containing a compound, a remov 
able cover for the vessel, an inlet leading 
from the pipe into the vessel near its top, an 
outlet leading from the upper portion of the 
vessel to the pipe, the said outlet having a 
downwardly-turned portion within the vessel 
and extending nearly to the bottom thereof, 
and valves for the inlet and outlet. 
GEORGE.J. DEIIN. 
75 
Witnesses: 
RANSOM. T. HAMMOND, 
FABIAN J. NUDELI. 
25 
35 
45. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595220.txt	(No Model.) 
A. L., TAWEAU. 
BICYCLE BEL, 
No. 595,220, 
Patented Dec. 7, 1897. 
S 
2ZZzz Szzzzz SEzhzS2 
(Sri 2. 
Zazaszz grie 
Sr. 
d 
 
W T NESEEs - 
-3. U-4- 
-644. (2.24v. 
NVENT FR - 
73 - vi.cC. ya-v-e-c-e- 
7 C42-7 /7 - Cattu 
at T in RNEY 
The Norris PETERS co, Phoro. Tho...washtneros, t, c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTIN L, TAVEAU, OF 
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
B CYCLE - BE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,220, dated December 7, 1897. 
Application filed November 14, 1896, Serial No. 612,071 (No model.) 
O 
To ?till it fuOn, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, AUGUSTINL. TAVEAU, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bal 
timore, in the State of Maryland, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Bells for IBicycles, of which the following 
is a Specification. 
This invention relates to an improved bell 
for bicycles. 
The object of the invention is to provide an 
improved construction whereby a bell with an 
exterior circular revoluble hammer - carrier 
may be brought in contact with the tire of the 
wheel wheneveritis desired to sound the bell. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure I shows a portion of a bicycle with 
my improved bell Over the wheel-tire in po 
sition to be sounded. Fig. 2 is a top plan 
View, On a larger scale, of the bell device. 
Fig. 3 is a diametrical section of the bell de 
vice. Fig. 4 shows two views of one bell. 
Fig. 5 shows two views of one of the cup 
shaped hammer-carriers. Fig.6 shows a bell 
with a modified form of inward-bent lug. 
Two small bells A A' of the gong pattern 
are employed, and these have position with 
the cup sides confronting each other, but the 
two bells are separated by the central part of 
the revoluble hammer-carrier. 
The bells are stamped up from sheet metal 
instead of cast, and each has a central exte 
rior swell b with a hole c through it and on 
the interior has an annular face b' around 
the hole. The rim of each bell has an in 
Ward-bent lug or projection d, as shown in 
Figs. 3 and 4. This lug is formed on the 
bell by pressing the metalinward with a suit 
able tool and leaving a depression d on the 
exterior. By thus making the bell of sheet 
metal Stamped up by means of dies and form 
ing an inward-projecting lug d on the rim by 
producing a depression on the exterior a prod 
uct or article may be turned out that is both 
good and cheap. 
The circular hammer-carrier comprises a 
wheel part or rim C and two cup-shaped disks 
F, forming the center of said rim. One of 
these cup-shaped disks is shown separately 
in Fig. 5. Each disk has a lateral rim g, a 
Central hub-flange h, projecting in the same 
direction as the rim, and a circular raised 
surface centrally around said hub-flange. 
An annular face i constitutes the base of the 
cup. The side of the disk where the lateral 
rim and hub-flange are constitutes the cup 
shape referred to. On the opposite side is a 
cavity k, corresponding to the said circular 
raised surface i. Two of these disks F are 
placed together, with their annular facesi in 
contact, and the two are secured by rivets l 
through holes in said faces. The two cavi 
tiesk; thus form a central chamber. (See Fig. 
3.) The two lateral rims g project in oppo 
site direction and form the rim of a wheel, 
but to cover and unite these two rims a band 
or tire n is fitted around both, said band hav 
ing its two edges folded inwardly and each 
forming a hook in n', each of which takes over 
the edge of one of the said lateral rims g. 
A central tube O extends through the two 
hub-flanges h and fits within them tightly 
and is suitably secured by solder or other 
means, such as a pin p. A spindle q does 
not revolve, but passes loosely through the 
central tube O, so as to allow said tube, the 
two cup-shaped disks, and the band or tire 
to revolve. This spindle has reduced endsg' 
and a shoulder q where the reduction of the 
end commences. The reduced ends q' pro 
ject through the holes c in the two bells A A', 
and the internal annular face b' of each bell 
bears against one of the shoulders q on the 
spindle, and a nut r on each reduced end con 
fines the bell tightly against the said shoulder. 
The ends of the central tube O are not de 
signed to bear tightly against the interior of 
the bells at the annular faces b', but, on the 
contrary, this central tube is to be free or 
unconfined on the spindle, so that said tube 
may revolve while the spindle and bells re 
main stationary. 
The circular rim or wheel part (designated 
C) is broad and surrounds and covers the cir- - 
cular part of the bells. Of course the breadth 
of this rim may be varied. In Fig. 3 it is 
shown somewhat broader than in Fig. 2, but 
it may be narrower relative to the size of the 
bells than shown in either figure. When 
broad, it guards the bells from Splashing mud. 
Ioose hammers S are provided and are 
mounted on the circular raised surface of 
the revoluble cup-shaped disks F, so as to 
strike the inward-bent lugs d on the bells at 
3o 
35 
45 
So 
75 
95 
Co 
 
595,220 
each revolution of the hammer-carrier. These 
loose hammers may vary in their construc 
tion from those here shown. In the present 
instance each hammer consists of a small disk 
or ring S, loose on a pint, fixed on the cup 
shaped disk. 
When the circular rim or band 
?m is caused to revolve rapidly and continu 
ously, the centrifugal action will throw the 
loose hammers S outward, and said hammers 
thereby strike the inward-projecting lugs d 
On the bells and sound them. 
The bells and the revoluble hammer-carrier 
are mounted in a suitable holder u, such as 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. This holder has two 
prongs or arms ', which take on either side of 
the bell device, one of the prongs taking over 
each screw end g and bearing against the 
raised face b on each bell, and the nut r, al 
ready mentioned, confining the prongs to 
their position. A cross-bar 'unites the two 
prongs, and the latter are pivoted at is to a 
collar v, which is clamped around the post ac 
or front prong of the bicycle. It will now be 
understood that the holder, which at one end 
carries the bell device, is pivoted at the other 
end, so as to raise and lower the bell device 
and thereby normally sustain said bell de 
vice elevated above the pneumatic tire y, or, 
when the bell is to be sounded, allow it to 
lower and bring the circular hammer-carrier C 
in contact with the revolving tire. 
Any suitable means may be employed to 
enable the rider of the bicycle to raise and 
lower the bell device and its holder. In this 
instance a cord 2 connects with a bail : at 
tached to the spindle end g. This cord ex 
tends up the front part of the bicycle-frame 
and is attached to a vertically-sliding bolt 2", 
movable in bearings on a clip 2', secured to 
the post ac. A spring 2 keeps the bolt nor 
mally elevated and the bell normally raised, 
so that the circular rim will not contact with 
the pneumatic tire. By pressing the spring 
bolt down the circular revoluble rim will con 
tact with the pneumatic tire and the bells 
will sound so long as the bicycle is running. 
It is to be understood that hammers to strike 
the bell of different form and construction 
may be used; also, a differently-constructed 
holder to raise and lower the bell and its cir 
cular hammer-carrier may be used. Further 
more, one bell instead of two may be em 
ployed with the several features of my inven 
tion. 
Fig.6 shows a modification in the construc 
tion of theinward-bentlug on the stamped-up 
bell. In this figure the lug or projection com 
prises a tang or point d' on the rim edge, and 
said tang bent in Ward, as shown. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a bicycle-bell, the combination of two 
bells having position with their cup sides con 
fronting each other; two struck-up disks se 
cured together and mounted between said 
two bells; a circular rim larger than said bells 
and secured to the said two disks; and loose 
or movable hammers operated by the revolu 
tion of said two disks, whereby the circular 
rim and two disks may revolve continuously 
and the bells be sounded. 
2. In a bicycle-bell, the combination of a 
fixed spindle having each end reduced and a 
shoulder where the reduction commences; 
two bells, each secured on one of the reduced 
ends of the spindle and bearing against the 
said shoulders; two disks secured together 
and revoluble on said spindle between the 
bells; a circular rim larger than said bells 
and secured to the disks; and hammers to 
strike the bells, said hammers being operated 
by the revolution of the circular rim and disks. 
3. In a bicycle-bell, the combination of a 
fixed spindle; two bells each secured on an 
opposite end of the spindle; two cup-shaped 
disks each having a hub part and a rim larger 
than said bells and mounted on the spindle; 
and hammers which are caused to strike the 
bells by the revolution of the said disks. 
4. In a bicycle-bell, the combination of a 
fixed spindle; two bells each secured on an 
opposite end of the spindle; two cup-shaped 
disks each having a hub part and a rim larger 
than said bells and mounted on the spindle; 
a band or tire having on each circular edge 
a hook which takes over the rim edge of said 
disks and thereby covers and unites them; 
and hammers which are caused to strike the 
bells by the revolution of the said disks. 
5. In a bicycle-bell, the combination of a 
fixed spindle; two bells each secured with 
their cup sides confronting each other on an 
opposite end of the spindle; two cup-shaped 
disks each having a hub and a raised surface, i, 
centrally around said hub; hammers mounted 
on said raised surface; and a circular rim se 
cured to said disks, said rim being larger 
than the bells. 
6. A sheet-metal bell formed into shape and 
having on its rim a lug bent inward by form 
ing on the exterior of the rim a depression in 
combination with a revoluble circular rim 
larger than said bell, and a hammer carried 
by the said rim to strike against the said lug. 
7. In a bicycle-bell, the combination of a 
spindle; two bells each at an opposite end of 
the spindle; two disks between the bells each 
mounted on the spindle and of greater diame 
ter than said bells; and a band or tire which 
covers the rims of said two disks. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
AUGUSTIN L, TAWEAU. 
Witnesses: 
- 
CHARLES B. MANN, Jr., 
CHAPIN A. FERGUSON. 
io 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
40 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595320.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 595,320, 
 
2 a 
s 
S 
SSS 
SS-s 
SSS 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1, 
J. S. LONG. 
WATER GAGE, 
Patented Deo, l4, 1897. 
 
C 
ES 
E. -3 
Egg 
e-ada 
giggas 
p/7AwAESSAS 
9. Q &a.g. 
22-6-6- 
AAVWEAV7OA, 
32, 9% 
WOSAA/ S. Z.O.W6, 
Attorney 
The noRas E. E.Rs co, Pioto. Irr... washingtoN. D. c 
 
(No Model.) 
J. S. LONG. 
WATER, GAGE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
No. 595,320, 
Patented Dec. 14, 1897, 
 
PWTWAESSAES 
S. 5ts. 
IN WEATOR, 
MOSAA/ S. AOMG, 
a -2.1% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPII S. LONG, OF PURSELI, MISSOURI. 
WATER GAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,820, dated December 14, 1897. 
Application filed February 20, 1897, Serial No. 624,409, (No model.) 
O. 
To all, Luhon, it half conce77: 
Beit known that I, JOSEPH. S. LONG, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Pursell, in 
the county of McDonald and State of Missouri, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Gages; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
Nyinvention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in liquid-gages, the object 
being to provide a novel form of gage for at 
tachment to a barrel or vessel adapted to in 
dicate the amount of liquid therein at the 
Outset, the amount of liquid subsequently 
drawn off, and the amount remaining in the 
Said barrel or vessel. 
To this end my invention consists of a hol 
low gage-body having a stem or shank for in 
Sertion into the barrel or vessel, an indicat 
ing-face or a plural number of indicating 
faces bearing thereon indicating-figures rang 
ing from Zero to the figure designating the 
capacity in number of gallons of the barrel 
or vessel on which it is intended to use it, a 
float moving in said body, and a movable gage 
indicating-pointer carried by the float and 
adapted to indicate the quantity of liquid con 
tained in the vessel and the quantity with 
drawn therefron. 
My invention also consists in certain other 
novel constructions, combinations, and ar 
rangements of parts, as Will be hereinafter 
more fully described and specifically claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a part Sectional and a part elevational view 
of a barrel, showing the gage applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is an elevation view of the gage on an 
enlarged scale. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section 
of the gage on line 33 of Fig. 2. 
Fig. 4 is an 
enlarged detail perspective view of the float 
and gage indicating-pointer and parts. 
Referring to the drawings, the letter Ades 
ignates a barrel to which, for the purpose of 
illustration, the gage is shown applied. The 
gage B comprises a body b, having a stem or 
shank C for insertion into the bung-hole of a 
barrel or opening in a vessel, and a vertical 
passage d through it and the said shank. 
The gage-body has a suitable number of ex 
terior indicating-faces e e'e', &c., each bear 
ing indicating - numerals thereon. In the 
present instance the gage is shown provided 
with twelve indicating-faces each bearing a 
different set of numerals, whereby it is adapt 
ed for use upon twelve different sizes of bar 
rels or vessels. The gage may have only a 
single indicating-face, if desired. The set of 
numerals on each face are arranged in two 
columns, that on the left-hand side, extend 
ing from the top downward, designating the 
quantity of liquid drawn from the vessel, and 
the corresponding column on the right-hand 
side designating the amount left therein. 
For instance, the face e is intended for use 
with a vessel of sixteen-gallon capacity. The 
left-hand column of numerals on this face, 
reading downward, range from 1 to 15, 
while the corresponding column of numerals 
On the right-hand side are the reversal there 
of, ranging from 15 to 1. The columns 
of numeras on the other faces are likewise 
arranged, except that the numerals thereof 
Vary correspondingly with the capacity of 
the vessel for which it is intended. 
The gage mechanism consists of an indi 
cating-band f, surrounding the staff or body 
b, and provided with corresponding faces g 
g'g'', &c., each having an indicating-point h, 
to point to corresponding numerals of the two 
Columns of figures on the staff-face before re 
ferred to. This band f is carried by two 
crossed rods if, whose ends project from the 
passaged through four guide-slots k in the 
Staff and are connected with said band. A 
plunger l is attached to the said rods at the 
crossing-point thereof and carries at its lower 
end a float , which is movable up and down 
in the said vertical passage d. 
When the gage stem or shank c is inserted 
in a vessel-opening or the bung-hole of a bar 
rel, as shown in Fig. 1, the liquid contents of 
the said barrel acting on the float forces the 
latter up, and the gage carried thereby indi 
cates the quantity of said liquid. For in 
stance, if the gage is applied to a sixteen-gal 
lon barrel, the gage-band would be lifted to 
the highest point on the face e, and when a 
gallon of liquid is drawn from said barrel the 
said band will drop down and the pointer h. 
thereof will register with the column-numer 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
 
55 
75 
go 
95 
Oo 
2 
595,320 
25 
35 
4.O 
2. In liquid-gages, the combination of a 
stock provided with a reduced stem adapted 
to fit within a vessel-opening, said stock be 
ing provided also with a series of angularly 
disposed indicating-faces each bearing two 
columns of gage-numerals reading downward, 
one being a reversal in figures of the other, 
and longitudinal slots, a float below the stem 
and limited in movement thereby, a rod pro 
jecting up from the float and carrying at its 
upper end two cross-bars i, j, whose ends pro 
ject through said slots, and an indicating 
band corresponding in configuration to and 
surrounding the stock and provided with in 
dicating-pointers, said pointers being con 
nected with the ends of the cross-bars, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH S. LONG. 
m 
JAMES W. BROCK, 
M. D. BRODLEY. 
O 
15 
als 1 to 15, indicating thereby that a 
gallon of liquid has been withdrawn and fif 
teen gallons remain in the barrel. 
My invention provides a simple and effect 
ive device which is not liable to get out of or 
der. By its use the amount of liquid con 
tained in a barrel of a given capacity may be 
readily ascertained without the necessity of 
drawing off and measuring said liquid. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In liquid-gages, the combination of a 
Stock provided with a reduced stem adapted 
to fit within a vessel-opening, said stock be 
ing provided also with a series of angularly 
disposed indicating-faces each bearing two 
columns of gage-numerals reading downward, 
One being a reversal in figures of the other, 
a float projecting below the stem, a rod ex 
tending up from the float, and an indicating 
band surrounding the stock and provided 
With pointers, said band being connected with 
the float-rod, substantially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595420.txt	(No Model.) 
E, THOMSON & C, E HARTHAN. 
ELECTRICAR CLAMP. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1 
  
 
 
 
 
No. 595,420, 
Patented Del 4, 1897. 
Fig.2. 
: 
58 
HES - 61 
i-5? 
Hi-59 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
E, THOMSON & C. E. HARTHAN. 
ELECTRICAR CLAMP, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 595,420, 
Patented Deo, l4, 1897, 
 
F 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ELIHU THOMSON, OF SWAMPSCOTT, AND CHARLES E. HARTITAN, OF LYNN, 
MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNORS TO THE GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF 
NEW YORK. 
ELECTRIC-ARC AMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,420, dated December 14, 1897. 
Application filed June 12, 1897, Serial No. 640,472, (No model.) 
O 
I5 lamp. 
To all avhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ELIHU THOMSON, re 
siding at Swampscott, and CHARLESE. HAR 
THAN, residing at Lynn, county of Essex, 
5 State of Massachusetts, citizens of the United 
States, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Electric-Arc Lamps, (Case 
No. 540,) of which the following is a specifi 
Cation. 
This invention relates to arc-lamps, and has 
especial reference to that class of lamps in 
Which the arc is inclosed, and especially adapt 
ed to run on constant-potential circuits, with 
a resistance in the branch containing the 
The invention embraces a number of im 
provements in the details of the construction 
of Such lamps, adapting them to be run with 
Small currents and providing an efficient and 
2O economical arc-lamp constructed and ar 
ranged as hereinafter set forth and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure I is an elevation, partly in section, of 
an arc-lamp embodying detailed improve 
25 ments in accordance with this invention. 
Fig. 2 is an enlarged detail view, in vertical 
Section, of a modification of the dash-pot con 
nected to the upper-carbon support. Fig. 3 
is a horizontal plan view of a portion of the 
3o device shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a detail 
view in elevation, showing the clutch mech 
anism. Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are detail plan views 
of the holding device for the inner globe. 
Figs. 13 and 14 are views in elevation of part 
35 of the Supporting-frame for the carbons, show 
ing the arrangement of the outer globe and 
its support. Fig. 15 is an elevation, partly 
in section; and Fig. 16 is an elevation show 
ing the contact-making weight or follower for 
Referring to Fig. 1, the lamp is shown pro 
vided with the inner tube 1, in which is lo 
cated the tube 2, within which is the upper 
carbon 3 of the lamp, arranged to slide therein, 
45 the upper end of said tube 2 being hinged to 
a piston 4, arranged to slide in the dash-pot 
5, secured to the upper end of the tube 1. A 
weight 6, located in the tube 2, bears on the 
upper end of the carbon 3 and is for the pur 
4o the upper carbon. 
 
pose of producing a more positive action of 
the feed when the carbon is released. A 
magnet-coil 7, of insulated Wire, preferably 
Wound, so as to resist high temperature, Sur 
rounds the tube 8, within which is located a 
cylindrical core 9, adapted to play up and 
down in accordance with the attraction ex 
erted by the magnet-coil 7. The upper end 
of the cylindrical core 9 is tapered or con 
tracted, as shown, to bear against the tube 2. 
The core 9 is partly a solenoid-core and partly 
an electromagnet-core. The coil 7 is prefer 
ably inclosed by an iron casing 40, extending 
over the ends thereof, thereby completing the 
magnetic circuit around it and adding to the 
force exerted on the core 9. The core 9 is 
secured at its lower end to the tube 2. The 
tube 1 is secured at its upper end to the upper 
part of the lamp where the lamp is Suspended, 
and the lower end of tube 1 is secured to the 
upper part of the casing 10. 
A clutch mechanism is provided to engage 
the upper carbon and to move with tube 2 
and core 9 as follows: 11 11 are the jaws for 
clamping the upper carbon, which are pivoted 
to bell-crank levers 12, pivoted in turn to a 
cross-piece 13, which slides on guide-rods 14, 
depending from a cross-piece 15, mounted on 
a portion 16, depending from the bottom of 
casing 10. The upper portion of levers 12 
are bent in a horizontal direction to clear the 
tube 2, as shown in Fig. 6, and have their up 
per ends pivoted, respectively, to the depend 
ing arms 17 of a yoke 18, clamped to the tube 
2. The tube 2 being lifted by the raising of 
core 9 will cause the levers 12 to be operated, 
thereby causing the lower or short arms of 
levers 12 to move upward and inward and the 
jaws 11 11 to be moved upward and toward 
each other. This will cause the upper carbon 
to be firmly clamped and the cross-piece 13 
will be slightly raised on the guide-rods 14 
simultaneously with the upward movement 
of the tube 2. By this means the upper car 
bon is separated from the lower and the arc 
is formed in the inner globe. When the cur 
rent in the coil 7 is Weakened, so as to let 
down the core 9, tube 2 goes down with the 
yoke 1S. The cross-piece 13 also descends, and 
55 
75 
95 
595,420 
O 
25 
55 
When it reaches the lower ends of the guide 
l'Ods 14 and rests on the nuts 14' at the ends of 
the latter the levers 12 will be relaxed and 
the clamping-jaws 11 11 set free from the up 
per carbon 3. The carbon 3 is then fed down 
Ward by gravity and the weight 6 until the 
feed is checked by the resumption of the 
power of the coil 7, owing to the current hav 
ing increased subsequently to the feed, the 
clutch being brought into action and the jaws 
ll 11 again clamping the carbon 3. 
In the construction of the support for the 
inner globe and lower carbon and the outer 
globe there are two vertical tubular guide 
rods 19, Suspended at their upper ends from 
a flange 20 of the casing 10 and extending 
through a plate 21, which is the main portion 
Of the bottom of a casing 22, inclosing the 
upper portion of rods 19, casing 10, and mag 
net-coil 7. In its lowered position the core 9 
rests on the bottom of casing 22, as shown in 
Fig. l. The guide-rods 19 are connected ad 
jacent to their lower ends by a yoke 23, hav 
ing a central circular opening through which 
extends a short tube 24, having a flange 25, 
located above the yoke 23. A ring-nut 26 
Screws on to the lower threaded end of the 
tube 24 and serves to clamp the latter to the 
yoke 23, proper insulation 27 being employed, 
as shown in dark lines in Figs. 1 and S. 
The yoke 23 is provided with internally 
Screw-threaded depending lugs 23", to which 
is secured by screws 2S the cross-piece 29, 
having a central depending portion 30, with 
a transverse pin 31, adapted to be received, 
With portion 30, into a slotted socket 32 in the 
yoke 33, carrying at its ends the vertical rods 
31, which slide in the tubular guide-rods 19, 
and have at their upper ends heads 35, which 
Serve to prevent the rods 34 from sliding out 
of the rods 19 by abutting in their down 
Ward movement against the headed screw 
threaded thimbles or sleeves 36 in the lower 
ends of rods 19. The upper end of tube 24 
tapers in Wardly, and within the tube 24 is 
located a tube 36, split at its upper end and 
having at its lower end a depending lug or 
projection 24', upon which turns a cap 37, 
Screwing onto the lower end of tube 24. The 
lower carbon 38 is mounted in the split tube 
36, and when the latter is pushed up into the 
tube 24 and the cap 37 is screwed up into 
place the upper end of tube 36 is contracted 
and clamps the carbon 38, so as to effectually 
Center and Secure it in place. A cylindrical 
shell or casing 39, contracted at its top so as 
to form an Opening just sufficient to allow 
the flange of the inner globe 40 to enter, 
Screws onto the flange 25 of tube 24. 
A ring 41 is located in the space between 
the casing 39 and the tube 24 and is free to 
move vertically therein. The ring 41 is pro 
vided with pins 42, projecting from its pe 
riphery through vertical slots 43 in the cas 
ing 39 and having their ends located in a cir 
cumferential groove 44 in the inner Surface 
of a ring-nut 45, which screws on the shell 39. 
The upper surface of the ring 41 inclines 
upward, and resting thereon are a set of wire 
coils 46, such as shown in Figs. 10 and 11, ar'- 
ranged in a circle and having their depend 
ing ends 46' extending through vertical slots 
41" in the ring 41, as shown in Figs. 9 and 12, 
and engaging the flange 25 of tube 24, there 
by holding them in place and preventing their 
movement in a circle, but pcrmitting their 
movement radially. 
It will readily be seen that by means of the 
foregoing construction upon the ring-nut 45 
being screwed up the ring 41 will be carried 
upward and the wire coils adjustably clamped 
between the top of casing 39, ling 41, and the 
neck of globe 40, thereby securing the neck 
of the latter in place, as shown in Figs. 1, S, 
and 12. A cap 46 rests on the top of globe 
40, through which the carbon feeds. 
47 is the Outer or main globe, having its 
neck resting in the flanged socket, 4S, pro 
vided with set-screws 49 for securing the globe 
to the socket. The Socket 4S is secured to the 
depending portion 30 of cross-piece 29 by a 
bayonet-joint, one of the slots 50 of the bay 
onet-joint being shown, which engage and 
form, with the transverse pin 31, the bayonet 
joint operated by turning the socket 4S. 
The globe 47 is provided at its top with a 
cap 47', which, when the globe is raised to its 
closed position, compresses the springs 47', 
mounted on the rods 19, against the bottom of 
casing 10, thereby aiding in holding the globe 
steadily in position. The raising and lower 
ing of the globe 47 and the rods 34 in the rods 
19 will be readily understood without further 
description. 
The weight G is preferably made of a pal 
ticular construction, as shown in FigS. 15 and 
16. The weight G is formed with a socket 51 
at its lower end, which may be provided with 
slots 52, as shown, to receive and engage the 
upper end of the carbon 3, the socket 51 be 
ing secured to the Weight by a screw 53 or 
otherwise. The weight is provided with ver 
tical grooves 54, terminating in a socket 55 
at the upper end of the Weight, and in the 
vertical grooves 54 are located delicate spring 
contacts 56, having their lippel' ends project 
ing into the socket 55 and their lower ends 
bent and clamped between the Socket 51 and 
the Weight, as shown. The spling-contacts 
56 are bent slightly outward, so that when 
the weight is located in the tube 2 the springs 
56 will bear on the inner surface of tube 2 
and Secure almple contact for the passage of 
Current. 
In Figs. 2 and 3 is shown a modification of 
the dash-pot for the tube 2. 
In this construc 
tion there are two dash-pots 57, suspended 
from the ends of a yoke 5S, clamped to the 
tube 2, and pistons 59, Secured to the frame 
Work 60 below. This modification is inclosed 
90 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
595,420 
3. 
in a casing 61. The advantage of this con 
struction lies in the shortening of the lamp 
somewhat by a saving of the vertical space 
taken up by the dash-pot shown in Fig. 1. 
In the construction of this lamp a particul 
lar arrangement of and provision for venti 
lating the resistance-coils is provided as fol 
lows: 
The outer casing 62 of the lamp is prefer 
ably formed with a hood 63 about opposite 
the lower end of coil 7, and below the hood 
63 is an additional casing 64, inclosing a set 
of resistance-coils 65, encircling the portion 
of the lamp between coil 7 and top of globe 
47. This resistance is supported in any Way 
desired out of contact with the casing and 
is included in a branch with the lamp when 
in use by suitable connections. (Not shown.) 
The resistance in the present example is 
composed of spirals of German-silver wire led 
around the lamp and mounted on porcelain 
or other heat-resisting insulators in the usual 
way common to such structures and con 
nected in series with the coil 7 and the car 
bons. Sufficient space is allowed around the 
resistances for their thorough ventilation, and 
openings 66 are provided just above the cap 
47 for the ingress of cold air and beneath 
hood 63 for the egress of the heated air which 
passes through the coils of the resistance. 
In the entire construction of the lamp it is 
understood that insulation is used, as indi 
cated in dark lines, wherever it is needed to 
prevent the current from taking any other 
path than that desired. 
It may Sometimes happen that the carbon 
3 will break short off in the tube 2. 
In such 
event it Would be necessary to remove a pol 
tion of the lamp mechanism in Order to re 
move the broken end. 
To avoid the neces 
sity of doing this, a window or opening 18' is 
provided in the tube 2 above the yoke 18, as 
shown in Fig. 4, by means of which the broken 
end of the carbon can be pushed out of tube 
2 by inserting a piece of metal through the 
opening 18. 
What we claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In an electric-arc lamp, a central carbon 
carrying device, a yoke secured thereto, dash 
pots suspended from said yoke parallel with 
the carbon-carrying device, and pistons en 
gaging said dash-pots, as set forth. 
2. In an electric-arc lamp, the combination, 
with a tube for receiving and permitting ver 
tical play therein of the upper carbon, of a 
clutch consisting of a yoke secured to said 
tube, vertical guide-rods, a cross-piece mount 
ed to slide on said guide-rods, bell-crankle 
vers pivoted to said cross-piece and pivoted 
at their upper ends to Said yoke, and bent SO 
that one bell-crank lever passes on One side 
of Said tube and the other bell-crank lever 
passes on the other side of said tube, and 
clamping-jaws pivoted to the lower ends of 
said bell-crank levers and adapted to clamp 
the carbon, as set forth. 
3. In an electric-arc lamp, a Solenoid lo 
cated centrally in the lamp and having a tubul 
lar solenoid-core, a vertically-movable till be 
extending through said solenoid-core to which 
the latter is attached, a clutch mechanism 
connected to said tube, a carbon vertically 
movable in said tube, a casing surrounding 
the magnet-coil, a second casing Surrounding 
the magnet-coil casing, and an air-Space be 
tween said two casings, and vertical guide 
rods for the outer globe extending between 
said casings, as Set forth. 
4. In an arc-lamp, a central Vertically-lmOV 
able tube for carrying the upper carbon, a 
pair of dash-pots yoked to said tube, and pis 
tons for said dash-pots mounted on the main 
frame, as set forth. 
5. In an arc-lamp, a centrally-located ill 
closed solenoid, a resistance arranged adja 
cent to and about said solenoid an Outer cas 
ing with an air-space between it and the Solen 
oid-casing and having a hood at its bottom, 
and a second outer casing below the first Outer 
casing and ventilated at its top and bottom. 
6. In an electric-arc lamp, a clutch mech 
anism consisting of a fixed yoke, Vertical 
guide-rods, a cross-piece vertically movable 
on said guide-rods, bell-crank level's pivoted 
to said cross-piece and having horizontal up 
per portions pivoted to the yoke and bent On 
opposite sides to the carbon to clear the lat 
ter, and rocking clutching-jaws pivoted to the 
lower ends of the bell-crank levers, as Set 
forth. 
7. In an electric-arc lamp, a central Ver 
tically-movable support for the upper carbon, 
in combination with parallel dash-pots yoked 
to said carbon-support, and arranged on the 
sides of said support, as set forth. 
S. In an electric-arc lamp, a centrally-lo 
cated movable carbon-carrying tube, a yoke 
secured thereto, dash-pots suspended from 
said yoke and parallel with the carbon-carry 
ing device, and pistons engaging said dash 
pots; in combination with a solenoid located 
centrally in the lanp and having a tubular 
Solenoid-core attached to the said vertically 
movable carbon-carrying tube which extends 
through said solenoid-core, a clutch mechan 
ism connected to said tube, a carbon verti 
cally movable in said tube, a casing Surround 
ing the magnet-coil, a Second Casing Surround 
ing the magnet-coil casing and forming an 
air-space between said casings, and vertical 
guide-rods for the Outer globe extending be 
tween said casings, as set forth. 
9. In an electric-arc lamp, a magnet-coil, a 
tube extending centrally through said coil, 
and Suspended from its dash-pot, an upper 
carbon located in said tube, and a tubular 
Solenoid-core surrounding said tube and se 
cured thereto; in combination with a clutch 
mechanism consisting of a fixed yoke, verti 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
4. 
595,420 
cal guide-rods, a cross-piece vertically mov 
able on said guide-rods, bell-cranklevers piv 
oted to said cross-piece and having horizontal 
upper portions pivoted to the yoke and bent 
5 on opposite sides to the carbon to clear the 
latter, and rocking clutching-jaws pivoted to 
the lower end of the bell-crank level's, as set 
forth. 
10. In an arc-lamp, a centrally-located mov 
Io able tube for carrying the upper carbon, hav 
 
ing an opening in its side permitting of access 
to and removal of the carbon when broken, 
as set forth. 
In witness whereof we have here linto set 
our hands this 7th day of May, 1897. 
ELIU TIOMSON. 
CIARES E. IIARTIAN, 
Witnesses: 
JOHN W. GIBBONEY, 
HENRY O. WESTEN DARP. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595520.txt	(No Model.) , 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
J. M., BRADLEY, 
MACHINE FOR SHARPENING GIN SAWs, 
No. 595,520, 
Patented Dec. l 4, 1897. 
 
- 
E7 
7 
2E. | 
ez 
A 
sers v. 
O 
N 
iz Zevezee.7: 
#4aveyaz, Zirez&ay 
27, 
26 /22 y 4. 
2a, 324s 
f 
 
(No Model.) 
J. M., BRADLEY. 
MACHINE FOR SHARPENING GIN SAWS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 595,520, 
Patented Dec, l 4, 1897. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES M. B R A DLEY, OF HILL SIDE, TEXAS. 
MACHINE FOR SHARPENING GIN-SAWs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,520, dated December 14, 1897. 
Application filed April 13, 1897. Serial No. 631,994 (No model.) 
55 
6. 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES M. BRADLEY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hill 
side, in the county of McLennan and State of 
Texas, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Machines for Sharpening Gin 
Saws, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to machines for 
sharpening gin-saws, and has for its object to 
provide an improved machine of the charac 
ter described wherein the saws may be sharp 
ened without removing them or any other op 
erative part from the gin and wherein the files 
in sharpening one tooth automatically operate 
to impart a partial rotation to the saw to bring 
the next saw-tooth in position to be filed. 
It has for its further object to provide the 
reciprocating file-holders with a longitudi 
nally-yielding pitman, whereby the files will 
act upon each tooth with the same force or 
power irrespective of the resistance encoun 
tered or the power applied for driving the ma 
chine, and whereby the files operate to sharpen 
each tooth alike irrespective of the difference 
of length of the teeth and regardless of any 
defects that may exist in the teeth. 
Finally, it has for its object to improve and 
simplify the construction and increase the effi 
ciency of this class of machines generally. 
To these ends my invention consists in the 
features and in the combination, arrange 
ment, or construction of parts hereinafter de 
scribed, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims following the description, reference be 
ing had to the accompanying drawings, form 
ing a part of this specification, wherein 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
machine. Fig. 2 is a top plan view thereof, 
and Fig. 3 is a detail view of the slide-bar and 
file-holders removed from the machine. 
Referring to the drawings, the numeral 1. 
indicates an upright rectangular frame for 
supporting the driving mechanism of thema 
chine. In one of the uprights 2 of the frame 
is journaled a shaft 3, on the inner end of 
which is mounted a crank-wheel 4. On the 
outer end of the stud-shaft 3 is fixed a small 
pinion 5, which is engaged by a gear-wheel 6, 
journaled on a stud-shaft 7, fixed in the up 
right before referred to. The gear or drive 
wheel 6 is provided with a crank 8, by means 
of which said wheel may be rotated by hand 
to drive the crank-wheel 4. 
Fixed to the uprights 2 are two approxi 
mately parallel horizontal arms 9, and to said 
arms intermediate their ends is rigidly fas 
tened a strap or stirrup 10, that operates to 
maintain the bars 9 the proper distance apart. 
A set-screw 11 is tapped through said strap or 
stirrup and at its upper end engages the un 
der side of one end of a guide-block12. The 
guide-block 12 at its other end is fitted on a 
threaded bolt 13, journaled at its opposite 
ends in the arms 9, and may be adjusted lat 
erally on the bolt 13 by means of nuts 14, 
tapped over said bolt and engaging the oppo 
sitesides of the guide-block. The guide-block 
is longitudinally slotted from end to end, and 
fitted and adapted to be reciprocated back 
and forth therein is a slide-bar 15, the for 
Ward end of which is forked or bifurcated, as 
shown, to form two arms or file-holders 16 and 
17. The rear ends of the arms 16 and 17 are 
flattened to form springs 18, and said arms 
are crossed one over the other, as shown. The 
springs 18 yield to permit the holders 16 and 
17 to cross each other and operate to throw 
said holders outwardly or away from each 
other, and they also yield vertically to permit 
said holders to be depressed or forced down 
Ward, and when pressure is removed from the 
holders said springs throw the holders upward 
to engage another tooth, all of which is fully 
hereinafter explained. The free ends of the 
arms are bent inward toward each other, as 
at 19, and said bent ends are provided with 
small perforations, in which are inserted the 
ends of files 20. The opposite ends of the 
files are clamped to the holders by bolts and 
nuts 21. 
The slide-baris actuated by a pitman driven 
by the crank-wheel 4 and constructed in the 
followingmanner: The pitman 22 is journaled 
at one end on a Wrist-pin 23, eccentrically 
fixed on the crank-wheel 4, and at its other 
end is loosely pivoted to the rear end of the 
slide-bar 15 by a pin 24, passing through the 
end of the pitman and through an elongated 
slot 25, formed in the end of the slide-bar. 
The pitman is threaded intermediate its ends, 
as at 26, and tapped over said threaded por 
tion is a nut 27. A coiled spring 28is arranged 
. 
go 
95 
ICO 
... O 
25 
35 
45 
e 
595,520 
EO 
25 
O 
45 
50 
55 
on the pitman and at One end bears against 
the nut 27 and at its other end bears against 
the end of the slide-bar. The pitman may 
thus have a limited yielding movement rela 
tive to the slide-bar for the purpose hereinaf 
terset forth, and such movement may be regu 
lated by adjusting the tension of the coiled 
spring by means of the nut 27. 
Arranged in vertically-elongated slots 20, 
formed in the forward ends of the arms 9, is 
a threaded rod or shaft 30, on which is rota 
tably arranged a sleeve or roller 31. Nuts 32 
are arranged on the outer ends of the shaft 
30, by means of which said shaft may be ver 
tically adjusted in the elongated slots. The 
file-holders 16 and 17 are adapted to engage 
the roller 31 during a portion of their recip 
rocation, and their simultaneous downward 
and forward thrustis limited thereby. Curved 
or hooked arms 33 are mounted on the rod or 
shaft 30 between the opposite ends of the roller 
31 and the arms 9 and are adapted to be hooked 
over the arbor of the gin-saws and support 
the machine in operative position. 
By adjusting the rod or shaft 30 in the elon 
gated slots 29 the hooked arms or hangers 33 
are adjusted vertically for the purpose here 
inafter explained. 
The operation of my improved machine is 
as follows: When it is desired to sharpen the 
saws, the latter need not be removed from 
the gin, it being only necessary to rest the 
frame 1 on a bench or other suitable support 
in front of the gin and then raise the usual 
breast of the gin, after which the hooked arms 
33 may be arranged on the arbor of the gang 
of saws. The ends of the holders are then 
sprung apart and caused to engage the oppo 
site sides of one of the saws, in which posi 
tion the two files 20 engage the edges of two 
teeth of the saw. The drive-wheel G being 
rotated, the slide-bar 15 is reciprocated back 
and forth in guide-block 12. As the files en 
gage the teeth of the saw at a point below the 
axis of the latter, the saw is rotated by the 
files as the latter advance, and as the saw ro 
tates the files and their holders are forced 
downward by the rotating teeth with which 
they are in engagement (the springs 18 yield 
ing vertically to permit such downward move 
ment) until the holders strike against the 
roller 31, which acts as a stop and arrests the 
downward movement of the holders. When 
the holders strike the roller 31, the files are pre 
vented from moving in a downward direction, 
and therefore they are unable to further rotate 
the saw, and hence as the files continue to move 
forward they move tangentially relatively to 
the saw and act on the teeth with a filing 
movement and sharpen the same. In this 
forward movement of the files to sharpen the 
teeth the springs 1S yield laterally to permit 
the file-holders to slip one across the other 
to change the point of contact between the 
holders to accommodate the advancing move 
ment of the files. At the end of the forward 
movement of the holders the driving mech 
anism operates to retract them, and in their 
rearward movement the files slip over the 
teeth without moving the saw, as the pres 
sure of the files on the saw is not sufficient 
in such rearward movement to turn the gang 
of saws in their bearings and against the 
gin-driving mechanism. As the files are re 
tracted the tendency of the springs 18 is to 
raise the holders, and hence the files bear 
against the under side of the teeth above 
them and round the rear edges of the teeth 
off. At or near the end of the rearward move 
ment of the holders the files disengage the 
teeth previously operated upon, and the 
springs 18 then immediately act to throw the 
holders and files upward into position to en 
gage the next succeeding teeth and to throw 
the holders above and out of contact with 
the roller 31. As the files are again thrust 
forward they engage the teeth next above 
those previously sharpened and give the saw 
another partial rotation until the holders 
again strike the roller 31, when the rotation 
of the saw ceases and the files operate to 
sharpen the teeth in the manner before de 
scribed. 
From the foregoing it will be understood 
that in the forward movement of the files 
they first operate to partially rotate the saw 
to bring the teeth into proper position for 
engagement by the files on their next succeed 
ing advance, and on their continued advance 
they operate to file the teeth. 
By raising or lowering the guide-block 12 
by means of the screw 11 it will be evident 
that the holders will be adjusted from or 
toward the roller 31, and hence the movement 
communicated to the saw by the files will be 
regulated. For example, if the guide-block 
be raised the holders will be moved father 
away from the roller 31, and hence the files 
will have an increased forward movement be 
fore the holders strike the roller, whereby 
the saw will be rotated a greater distance at 
each reciprocation of the files. In this man 
ner the files may be caused to feed the saw 
so that the teeth will be acted on successively, 
or so that the alternate teeth only will be 
acted on, or the device can be adjusted to act 
upon different-sized saws or saws having dif 
ferent-sized teeth or teeth of different pitch. 
By adjusting the roller 31 in its elongated 
bearings the height at which the hangers sup 
port the arms 9 is regulated, and hence the 
point on the periphery of the saws at which 
the files engage it is determined, and in this 
manner the filing action of the files upon the 
teeth may be adjusted or varied. 
In practice many of the teeth in each saw 
become broken or stripped off, forming gaps 
or what is known in the art as low places, 
and when new teeth are cut in these low places 
said new teeth are manifestly not in the same 
circular plane as the other teeth, but are 
nearer the center of the saw. In sharpening 
75 
95 
CO 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
595,520 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
saws having these low places it will be evi 
dent that unless especial provision be made 
the teeth in the low places will not be acted 
on by the files or will be acted on but slightly, 
either resulting in the failure of the files to 
feed or rotate the saw or in the feed being in 
sufficient and irregular and the imperfect 
sharpening of the teeth in the low places. In 
order to cause the files to act on all the teeth 
alike, I make the pitman 22 yielding in the 
manner described, whereby when the files are 
operating on regular teeth the spring 28 will 
be under considerable tension, but when the 
files encounter, short teeth or teeth in low 
places the spring will expand and give an in 
creased throw to the files, thus causing the 
latter to enter between the short or low 
teeth and sharpen them along their entire 
length and also feed the saw the regular and 
desired distance for engaging the next teeth. 
The machine above described is entirely 
automatic in its action, the files operating to 
sharpen the teeth and also operating to auto 
matically feed or rotate the saw the proper 
distance to present new teeth to be operated 
on at every reciprocation of the files and with 
out any manipulation or attention on the part 
of the attendant. It will also be understood 
that the machine will act precisely the same 
upon both regular and irregular teeth and 
that the saWS may be sharpened without re 
moving them from the gin or disturbing any of 
the parts of the gin or their adjustment. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a machine for sharpening gin-saws, 
the combination with a frame, of a recipro 
cating slide-bar, two crossed and vertically 
and laterally yielding file-holders carried by 
the slide-bar, files carried by said holders, and 
a stop arranged in the forward end of said 
frame and operating to arrest the downward 
thrust of the file-holders, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a machine for sharpening gin-saws, 
the combination with a frame, of a recipro 
cating slide-bar, two crossed and vertically 
yielding file-holders carried by the slide-bar, 
files carried by said holders, and a vertically 
adjustable stop arranged in the forward end 
of said frame and operating to arrest the 
downward thrust of the file-holders, substan 
tially as described. 
3. In a machine for sharpening gin-saws, 
the combination with a frame, of a recipro 
cating slide-bar, two crossed and vertically 
and laterally yielding file-holders carried by 
the slide-bar, files carried by the holders, and 
a vertically-adjustable roller arranged in the 
forward end of said frame and operating to 
arrest the downward thrust of the file-hold 
ers, substantially as described. 
4. In a machine for sharpening gin-saws, 
the combination with a frame having two 
horizontal and approximately parallel arms, 
a guide-block secured between said arms, a 
slide-bar fitted to reciprocate in said guide 
block and provided at its forward end with 
two crossed and vertically and laterally yield 
ing file-holders, files arranged in said holders, 
driving mechanism for reciprocating the slide. 
bar, and hangers attached to the forward end 
of the frame for suspending the same from the 
arbor of the saws to be sharpened, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a machine for sharpening gin-saws, 
the combination with a frame having two 
horizontal and approximately parallel arms, a 
guide-block adjustably secured between said 
arms, a slide-bar fitted to reciprocate in said 
guide-block and provided at its forward end 
with two crossed and vertically and laterally 
yielding file-holders, files arranged in said 
holders, driving mechanism for reciprocating 
the slide-bar, and a vertically-adjustable 
roller arranged in the forward end of the said 
arms beneath the file-holders and operating 
to limit the downward thrust of the file-hold 
ers, substantially as described. 
6. In a machine for sharpening gin-saws, 
the combination with a frame, of a recipro 
cating slide-bar, two crossed and vertically 
and laterally yielding file-holders carried by 
said slide-bar, files carried by said holders, a 
stop arranged in the forward end of said 
frame and operating to arrest the downward 
thrust of the file-holders, a pitman yieldingly 
connected to the slide-bar, and mechanism 
for driving the pitman, substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. In a machine for sharpening gin-saws, 
the combination with a frame having two 
horizontal and approximately parallel arms, 
a guide-block secured between said arms, a 
slide-bar fitted to reciprocate in said guide 
block and provided at its forward end with 
two crossed and vertically and laterally yield 
ing file-holders, files arranged in said holders, 
a driven crank-wheel, and a yielding pitman 
connecting said crank-wheel and slide-bar, 
substantially as described. 
8. In a machine for sharpening gin-saws, 
the combination with a frame having two 
horizontal and approximately parallel arms, 
a guide-block secured between said arms, a 
slide-bar fitted to reciprocate in said guide 
block and provided at its forward end with 
two crossed and vertically and laterally yield 
ing file-holders, files arranged in said holders, 
a driven crank-wheel, a pitman eccentrically 
connected at one end to said crank-wheel and 
loosely journaled in an elongated slot in the 
rear end of the slide-bar, a coiled spring sur 
rounding said pitman and an adjusting-nut 
threaded on the pitman, said spring bearing 
at One end against said nut and at its other 
end against the rear end of the pitman, sub 
stantially as described. 
9. In a machine for sharpening gin-saws, 
the combination with a guide-block, of a slide 
bar fitted to reciprocate therein and bifur 
cated or forked at its forward end to form two 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
It 
II5 
I25 
4. 
595,520 
file-holders, said holders being crossed at their 
forward ends and at their rear ends flattened 
and tempered to form vertically and laterally nesses. 
yielding springs, as shown, means for clamp 
ing files to said holders, a stop arranged to 
arrest the downward thrust of the file-holders, 
and mechanism for reciprocating said slide 
bar, substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
J. W. FROST, 
T. J., PAMIM. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit- Io 
JAMES M. BRADLEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595620.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 595,620, 
P. GAUTIER, 
KINETOGRAPHIC CAMERA, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Dec. 14, 1897, 
Fif. A 
 
(No Model.) 
P. GAUTIER, 
KINETOGRAPHIC CAMERA, 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 595,620. 
 
Fig. Z. 
Patented Dec. 14, 1897. 
-  ** --| 
-------+ | 
AZZ72 esses. 
Z72 Zvezz-Zo 7. 
THE NORRIS PETERs co: Phoro-Litho, washington, D.c. 
(No Model.). 
No. 595,620 
 
P. GAUTIER, 
KINETOGRAPHIC CAMERA, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Dec. 14, 1897, 
A Z-Z2-e 7z Zto 7-. 
Salt aa-zz 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PAUL GAUTIER, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
KINETOGRAPHIC CAMERA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,620, dated December 14, 1897. 
Application filed March 3, 1897, Serial No. 625,811. (No model.) Patented in Belgium Januaryll, 1896, No. 125,671 in 
France September 11, 1896, No. 259,599, and in England January 4, 1897, No. 212, 
45 
So 
55 
75 
As the spindle P revolves the link Crecip 
rocates. As it ascends the pawl H moves 
over one tooth of the ratchet-wheel3 and en 
gages with the next, the projection Mat this 
time acting on L and disengaging the pawl 
G from the ratchet-wheel 4, and then as C 
descends the cylinder A is turned one tooth. 
While C ascends again the cylinder Aisheld 
stationary by both pawls G and I, and the ac 
tion is continuously repeated. Thus the film 
is held stationary during the ascent of the 
rod Carid moves only during its descent. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
1. In intermittently-moving apparatus for 
taking or displaying photographs, the com 
bination of clockwork driving a crank having 
a link connected to a pawl-lever engaging a 
ratchet-wheel on the axis of a pinned cylin 
der moving the film, the pawl-lever being ar 
ranged to disengage, as the link ascends, a 
second lever having a pawl which engages an 
oppositely-toothed wheel on the axis of the 
cylinder and operating as the link descends 
to move the cylinder one tooth to a position 
in which during the ascent of the link it is 
held by the second pawl and by a third pawl 
preventing back movement, substantially as 
described. 
2. In combination the feeding-passages S 
and S', the cylinder A adapted to engage the 
film to draw it through the passage, a disk B, 
means for rotating the same, and an operat 
ing connection between the disk and cylin 
der A, substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
PAUL GAUTIER, 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD P. MACLEAN, 
JULES TAYOLUT. 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, PAUL GAUTIER, of Paris, 
France, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Intermittently-Moving 
Apparatus for Taking or Displaying Photo 
graphs, (patented to me in France Septem 
ber 11, 1896, No. 259,599; in Belgium Jan 
uary 11, 1896, No. 125,671, and in England 
January 4, 1897, No. 212,) of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to intermittently 
moving apparatus for taking or displaying 
photographs of moving objects, as will be de 
scribed, referring to the accompanying draw 
1ngS. 
Figure 1 is a front view, and Fig. 2 a side 
View, of the moving parts of apparatus ac 
cording to this invention. Fig. 3 is a view of 
detail. 
The invention consists of an intermittently 
moving apparatus for taking or displaying 
photographs in which the film is drawn along 
a guide-passage by a cylinder operated by a 
clockwork mechanism. 
Between two side plates 1 and 2 suitable 
clockwork is arranged to give intermittent ro 
tary movement to a cylinder A, furnished 
With pins a, which pierce the film, drawing it 
along a guide-passage S and between the cyl 
inder and the movable segmentF to the guide 
passage S'. 
The clockwork drives the spin 
dle P, having on it a disk B, with crank-pin 
N, which is connected by link C to a lever D, 
pivoted on the axis of A and carrying a pawl 
H, which engages a ratchet-wheel 3, fixed on 
the axis of A, thus advancing the cylinders 
step by step, while the pawl I prevents it from 
moving backward. A third pawl G engages 
another oppositely-toothed ratchet-wheel 4, 
also fixed on the axis of A. The lever D has 
a projection M, which at a certain part of its 
stroke pushes an arm L, fixed to the pawl G, 
thus disengaging G from the ratchet-wheel 4. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595720.txt	(No Model.) 
C. D. LOOMIS, 
BUG EXTERMINATOR, 
i 
2. Sheets--Sheet l. 
No. 595,720, 
Patented Dec. 2, 1897. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 595,720, 
 
 
  
 
C, D, LOOMIS, 
BUG EXTERMINATOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Deo. 21, 1897. 
HIHza 4 
Preda 
 
 
 
 
  
 
EE E 
 
1. 
28itvlosses 
%26 (52a2z4, 
- as 
3vewto 
CAarzes 77. Zoomzzs. 
$94.7%4. 
fit NORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHo, washington, D.c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES D. LOOMIS, OF AUSTERLITZ, NEW YORK. 
BUG - EXTERMINATO R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,720, dated December 21, 1897. 
Application filed October 29, 1896, Serial No. 610,483, (No model.) 
55 
65 
To Ctil tufton, it nally concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES D. LOOMIS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Aus 
terlitz, in the county of Columbia, and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Potato-Bug Extermi 
nators with Attachments; and I do hereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to potato-bug exter 
minators and a cultivator attachment there 
for for the purpose of cleaning bugs and other 
vermin from vines or stalks and for extermi 
nating the bugs thus cleaned. 
To this end the invention consists in the 
Various matters hereinafter described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, which illus 
trate the invention, Figure 1 is a perspective 
of the exterminator. Fig. 2 is a view with 
the hopper and its attendant parts removed, 
showing the location of the rolls upon the ex 
terminator-frame and the connections for op 
erating said roll. Fig. 3 is a cross-section 
taken just in front of the gears upon the rolls, 
this figure showing the manner in which the 
rolls are seated, while the upturned edge of 
the hopper-plates are removed in order to 
show the relation of said plates to the rolls. 
Fig. 4 is a plan view of the hopper. Fig. 5 is 
an elevation showing the attachment of the 
arms of the brush-frame to the hopper. 
Referring now more particularly to the 
drawings, A represents the exterminator 
frame, and B the exterminator mechanism. 
The exterminator - frame comprises side 
beams C, to which the plow-points 1 are at 
tached and from which extend the usual han 
dles 2. To the beams C. are attached the ex 
terminator mechanism. This consists, gen 
erally speaking, of rolls located upon the 
frame of the exterminator, a hopper having 
a discharge - opening above said rolls and 
brushes or collector-arms attached to said 
hopper, together with mechanism for rotating 
the rolls and for rotating the brushes or col 
lectors. The exterminator is designed to be 
run in the furrow between two rows of plants, 
and the rotation of the collectors Will cause 
them to scrape said plants, picking the bugs 
O 
25 
35 
45 
or vermin from them and depositing said 
bugs or vermin into the hopper, by which 
they are fed to the rolls and crushed. 
Referring now to the details of construc 
tion, a roll 3 is journaled longitudinally along 
one of the beams a, and journaled upon the 
other of said beams is a roll 4, adapted to co 
operate with the roll 3 and to crush the ver 
min. The roll 3 is seated in journal-boxes 5 
and has more or less play in slotS 6 in Said 
journal-box, the said roll being normally 
pressed into contact with the roll 3 by means 
of springs 7, between the journals of the roll 
and the side of the journal-box. Thus should 
any stones or dirt be thrown into the hopper 
and fed to the rolls said rolls can give to ac 
commodate the unusual thickness. The rolls 
are provided at their rear ends with gears 8, 
which intermesh so that rotation of One roll 
will cause corresponding rotation of the other. 
Upon one of the rolls (here shown as roll 3) 
the rear journal is extended to form a shaft 
9, and upon the end of this shaft is provided 
a bevel-gear 10, which gear meshes with a 
corresponding gear 11 upon a wheel 12, jour 
naled between the beams C. Thus upon ro 
tation of the wheel 12 motion will bein parted 
to the rolls 3 4. The wheel is of a diameter 
such that its circumference will rest upon the 
ground in the movement of the exterminator, 
and in order to insure the rotation of the 
wheel its periphery is provided with suitable 
teeth 13. 
A hopper 14 is attached to the frame over 
the rolls, said hopper being composed of four 
plates 15, 16, 17, and 18, the plates 15 and 16 
having their inner edges 19 in contact with 
the rolls in order to clean the same and being 
supported upon brackets 20, attached to the 
beams a. These plates 15 and 16 lie One upon 
each side of the rolls. The plates 17 and 18 
rest upon the plates 15 and 16 and are adjust 
ably attached thereto, as by means of the slots 
and set-bolts 21. Arms 22 extend from the 
upturned edges 23 of the plates 17 and 18, said 
arms being pivoted to these plates and having 
means, as a set-screw 24, extending through 
the arms for locking said arms at any desired 
inclination. Each set of arms carries a brush 
or collector 25, by which the bushes or plants 
are scraped and the bugs deposited into the 
hopper. 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
2 
- 
595,720 
55 
65 
75 
members being adjustable both vertically and 
laterally, substantially as described. 
4. A potato-bug exterminator with attach 
ment for cultivators comprising means for 
exterminating vermin, a hopper above Said 
means, and means upon said hopper for col 
lecting vermin from vines and depositing the 
same upon the hopper, said collecting mech 
anism being carried by plates laterally adjust 
able upon said hopper, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
5. A potato-bug exterminator with attach 
ment for cultivators comprising means for 
exterminating vermin, a hopper above said 
means, said hopper having plates laterally ad 
justable thereon, and collectors for the ver 
min carried by said plates, substantially as 
described. 
6. A potato-bug exterminator with attach 
ment for cultivators comprising means for 
exterminating vermin, a hopper, collectors for 
the vermin carried by plates within the hop 
per and operating over the edges of said hop 
per, and aprons extending from the edges of 
the hopper over which the collectors operate, 
substantially as described. 
7. In a potato-bug exterminator with culti 
vator attachment, a frame composed of beams 
having a space between them, a roll journaled 
upon each of said beams, said rolls having 
their faces in contact or approximately so at 
a point over the space between the beams, 
one of said rolls being yieldingly located, the 
other of said rolls having its shaft extended 
and provided at its end With a gear, a wheel 
journaled to rotate in the space between the 
beams, said wheel being provided with a gear 
in mesh with the gear upon the roll-shaft, 
gears between the rolls, brushes journaled in 
suitable supports upon the frame, sprockets 
upon said brushes, sprockets upon the shaft 
of the fixed roll, and chains connecting the 
Sprockets, a hopper having plates adjustable 
laterally, and collectors for the vermin, car 
ried by said plates, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES D. LOOMIS. 
WILLIAM. C. DALEY, 
GEO. L. MORRIS. 
95 
Connections are provided by which the 
brushes are rotated and, as here shown, these 
connections comprise sprockets 26, located 
upon the shafts 27 of the brushes, and sprock 
ets 28 upon the shaft of the roll 3, said sprock 
ets being connected by chains 29 in such a 
manner as to give the brushes rotation to 
ward the hopper. 
A fender 30 is attached to the front of the 
exterminator-frame, said fender extending to 
a point quite near the ground and having its 
sides carried up to near the level of the hop 
per. Aprons 31 extend over the sides of the 
hopper, said aprons having their upper edges 
rounded. Thus any low-lying bushes or vines 
are caught by the fender and carried up to 
the aprons, where they are scraped by the 
brushes, the rounded upper edges of the aprons 
preventing the bushes from being cut by the 
hopper edges. 
It will thus be seen that by the use of the 
present improvement with its cultivator at 
tachment the vines can be easily cleaned of 
bugs, thus obviating the necessity of picking 
said bugs by hand. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
I. A potato-bug exterminator with cultiva 
tol attachment comprising rolls having their 
faces substantially in contact, means for ro 
tating said rolls, and means for collecting and 
conveying vermin from vines to the rolls, said 
rolls being yieldingly placed with relation to 
each other so that the distance between their 
faces can be varied and a hopper having lat 
erally-adjustable plates carrying collectors, 
substantially as described. 
2. A potato-bug exterminator with cultiva 
tor attachment comprising means for exter 
minating vermin, means for collecting vermin 
from vines and feeding the same to said ex 
terminating means, the collecting members 
carried by plates within the hopper and be 
ing laterally adjustable, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. A potato-bug exterminator with cultiva 
tor attachment comprising means for exter 
minating Vermin, and means for collecting 
vermin from vines and feeding the same to the 
exterminating means, said collecting mem 
bers carried by plates within the hopper, said 
- 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595821.txt	( No Model.) 
E. OXLEY. 
2 Sheets-Sheet, i. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE METERING OF 
ELECTRIC CURRENTS, 
No. 595,821, 
Patented Dec. 21, 1897. 
 
 
 
syll 
rt 
2Ez.- 
g- z377 
22, 
 
(No Model.) 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE METERING OF 
ELECTRIC CURRENTS, 
E. OXLEY. 
2 sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 595,821. 
Patented Dec. 21, 1897. 
4 
w. 
f 
O 
o 
o 
o 
-O 
 
2 36 
- 
2 
35 
ap/2 
Zzzee27 
Zzszzzze (2c2.6% 
C R V&SNAuyu 
RN 
7s -17, 
6 
O 7 
A0 
772226,5566, 
2/3ez w 
e -stret) 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EUST ACE OXLEY, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE METERING OF ELECTRIC CURRENTS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,821, dated December 21, 1897. 
Application filed October 25, 1897, Serial No, 656,351 (No model.) 
I5 this specification. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EUSTACE OXLEY, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at Washington, in the District of Columbia, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im. 
provements in Methods of and Apparatus for 
Multiple-Rate Metering of Electric Currents; 
and Ido declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
1o as Willenable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters and figures of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
My present invention relates to methods of 
and apparatus for the multiple-rate metering 
of electric currents, whereby a generating 
Company is enabled to popularize and extend 
2O the use of electricity, to increase the output 
and the dividend-producing capacity of agen 
erating plant, and by improving the load fac 
tor reduce the cost of generation sofar, under 
favorable conditions, as to permit a success 
25 ful competition with gas and steam for light 
and power. 
It is my purpose in this instance to provide 
means Whereby a company generating and 
distributing electricity shall be able to offer 
a special or reduced rate during a number of 
hours in each day, and thus avoid the neces 
sity of letting the generating plant lie idle 
during the daylight hours, or practically so. 
My present invention is adapted to all sys 
35 tems whether using two wires or three wires, 
but is particularly convenient in systems in 
which the mains are piped and buried in the 
ground, as is the case in some places in the 
Edison system. These mains being usually 
4o covered by asphalt and other pavements it is 
troublesome and expensive to lay additional 
wires, and I have therefore devised the ar 
rangement described hereinafter, in which I 
use one of the mains, in conjunction with the 
My invention consists in the several fea 
tures hereinafter fully described and then 
pointed out and defined in the claims, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
45 earth, as the control-circuit. 
. 
. 
So ings, in which-e- 
 
--M' 
55 
The three mains are denoted by the nu- 6o 
Figure I is a diagram showing the inven 
tion applied to a three-wire system. Fig. 2 
is a similar diagram showing its adaptation 
to a two-wire system with a single meter at 
each point of consumption. 
The reference-numerals 1 and 2 in Fig. 1 
indicate two independent meters, havingfield 
coils 3 and 4 and an armature 5, by which a 
series of registering-dials is driven. 
merals 6, 7, and 8, and from the positive 
main a service-wire 9 is tapped off to the field 
coil 3 of the meter 1, the wire 10 from the 
second terminal of said coil going to the coil 
3 of the meter 2. From the latter a wire 12 65 
goes to the positive side of the house-circuit, 
from the negative sides of which a wire 13 is 
led to the coil 4 in the meter 2, whence a con 
nection is made to the corresponding coil 4 in 
meter 1, and from the latter to the negative 7o 
main. . A shunt 14 supplies, current to one 
brush and winding of the armature in each 
meter. 
At a suitable point I locate a device con 
sisting of an armature 15, pivoted between 75 
electromagnets 16 and 17. The armature 15 
carries a bar 18 of non-conducting material, 
on which are mounted two knives 19 and 20, 
insulated from each other and adapted to 
strike into clips 21 and 22 when the electro 
magnet 16 is energized and into clips 23 and 
24 when operated by the magnet 17. From 
the clips 21 and 23, respectively, wires 25 and 
26 are led to the armature-circuits of the me 
ters 1 and 2. The clips 22 and 24 are con- 85 
nected by wires 27 and 28 to the first terminals 
of the coils of the electromagnets 17 and 16. 
The second terminals of said coils are con 
nected by wires 29 and 30 to the neutral serv 
ice-wire 7 and to the positive service-wire 9. 9o 
The knives 19 and 20 are connected by wires 
31 and 32, the first to the wire 29 and the last 
to earth, as at G. 
At the central station or at any other suit 
able point is a double-throw switch, consist- 95 
ing of a switch-arm 33, pivoted between clips 
34 and 35 on one side, and 36 and 37 on the 
other side, of the pivotal point, The clips 34 
and 36 are connected to each other by a wire 
38 and to earth by a wire 39. The clip 35 is Ioo 
595,821 
75 
go 
95 
co 
25 
20, clip 24, wire 28, and winding of magnet, 
connected by a wire 40 to the neutral main 7, 
16 to the negative side of the system. 
and the clip 37 is connected by a wire 41 to 
the positive main 6. By throwing the switch 
By this invention I can use the mains of 
the system in conjunction with the ground 
arm 33 into the clips 36 and 37 the current 
will pass from the positive main 6 over wire 
for the control-circuit or any three-wire sys 
tem in which the neutral wire is not grounded. 
41 to clip 37, over switch-arm 33 to clip 36, 
The expense of drawing in or burying cable 
and thence by wires 3S and 39 to earth. 
Thence the circuit is completed by the ground 
for the control-circuit can thus be avoided 
to G by wire 32, knife 20, clip 22, wire 27, 
wherever such expense would be burdensome. 
It should be understood that my invention 
coil of magnet 17, and wire 29 to the neutral 
is not limited to the particular method of me 
service-wire 7. This draws the armature 
over to the right of Fig. 1 and strikes the 
tering the two rates, as I may use two meters 
in alternation one with the other, a single 
knives 19 and 20 into the clips 23 and 24, 
meter with speed-controlling means, a pair 
which opens the circuit automatically at the 
of meters, one of which runs continuously 
clip 22. The circuit for the meter 2 is by the 
and the other intermittently, or at the time 
action described established over wire 10, 
current is furnished at a special rate, or any 
shunt-wire 14, the brushes of the armature 
form of registering mechanism, 'one or more, 
and wire 26 to clip 23, knife 19 and wires 31 
suitable for the purpose. I may also use any 
and 29 to the neutral service-wire 7. 
In Fig. 2 I have shown the invention ap 
type of meter, either mechanical or chemical. 
plied to a two-wire system with a single me 
What I claim is 
ter, the speed of which is controlled by the 
1. In a system of electrical distribution, the 
method set forth of controlling the metering 
insertion of a suitable resistance, whereby 
the speed and registration are cut down to 
or registering devices, which consists in elec 
trieally operating a control apparatus from a 
one-half or such other fraction of the normal 
rate of speed as will correctly represent the 
single point by circuits composed of one or 
relation of the reduced or special rate to the 
the other of the mains of the system in con 
junction with the ground, substantially as de 
normal or full rate of charge. The parts are 
lettered, as in Fig. 1, so far as they correspond 
Scribed. 
in function and arrangement. The only dif 
2. In a system of electrical distribution, the 
ference that requires notice is the following: 
combination with metering or registering de 
vices arranged at a plurality of points of con 
The clip 23 is connected by a wire 23 to and 
through an auxiliary resistance R* to the wire 
sumption, of a control apparatus therefor, cir 
cuits for the same composed of one or the 
25, in which the normal resistance R is ill 
terposed. In the position shown in the figure 
other of the mains of the system in conjunc 
the circuit for the meter-armature is over 
tion with the ground, and means arranged at 
a single point for closing either circuit mo 
wire 9, shunt 14, brushes and armature, wire 
25, resistances R and R, wire 23, clip 23, 
mentarily, substantially as described. 
knife 19, and Wire 31 to the negative service 
3. In a system of electrical distribution, the 
wire 9*. When in the clips 21 and 22, the 
combination with a series of metering or reg 
circuit is over the same path until the point 
istering devices, at a series of points where 
is reached where the resistance Runites with 
current is consumed, of a series of control 
the wire 25. At this point the current passes 
mechanisms, one for each of said points, two 
over the wire 25 to the clip 21, and thence by 
circuits for said mechanisms, each composed 
knife 19 and wire 31 to the negative service 
of one of the mains of the system in conjunc 
wire. The switch-arm 33 in said Fig. 2 is 
tion with the ground, and means at a single 
represented as having been thrown at its last point for momentarily closing one or the other 
movement into the clips 34 and 35 and then 
of Said circuits, substantially as described. 
withdrawn. While it remains in these clips, 
4. In a system of electrical distribution, the 
the circuit is from the negative side of the 
combination with a series of outlying stations 
system over wire 40, clip 35, switch-arm 33, 
of a series of metering or registering mechan 
clip 34, and wires 38 37 to earth, thence over 
isms arranged at said stations, a series of elec 
wire 32 to knife 20, which is assumed to be 
tromagnetic devices suitably located with re 
resting in clip 22 at the moment when the 
lation to said metering or registering mechan 
switch-arm 33 is operated. From said clip 
isms, and control-circuits each consisting of 
22 the circuit is completed over wire 27, wind 
one of the mains and the ground, substan 
ing of magnet 17, and by wire 29 to the posi 
tially as described. 
5. In a system of multiple-rate metering, 
tive side of the system. The arm 18 is there 
by thrown over into the position shown in 
the combination with a series of outlying sta 
Fig. 2 with the knife 20 in the clip 24. If the 
tions, of a series of metering or registering 
switch-arm 33 is now thrown into the clips 36: 
mechanisms at said stations, a series of elec 
tromagnetic devices each suitably arranged 
and 37, the circuit will be over wire 41 from 
the positive side of the system to clip 37, over, 
With relation to the metering or registering 
switch-arm 33 to clip 36, and thence by wires. 
mechanism and consisting of an armature 
653S and 37 to earth, then by wire 82, knife pivoted between independent electromagnets 
35 
45 
So 
55 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
595,821 
3. 
and clips for knives carried by an armature 
bar, a circuit for each electromagnet includ 
ing one of the mains of the system and the 
ground, and a switch at a suitable point to 
momentarily close either circuit, to control 
the action of the metering mechanism, sub 
stantially as described. 
 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
EUSTACE OXLEY. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. M. COPENHAVER, 
EWELL A. DICK. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US595921.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 595,921. 
J. B. RICHARDS. 
SELF CLOSING COCK OR v ALVE FOR GAs, &c. 
Patented Dec. 21, 1897 
22.4. 
*-i- ZIn , 
2%-5. 
 
witHiiri was 
i? 
221 
773. 
a 6 Sea 
27, 
42 
 
zz7% 
2,532 
79 s57% o%.e42, 9-us.) 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. RICHARDS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SELF-CLOS ING COCK OR VALVE FOR GAS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 595,921, dated December 21, 1897. 
Application filed April 6, 1897, Serial No, 630,981, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, JOHN B. RICHARDS, a citi 
zen of the United States, residing in the city, 
county, and State of New York, have invented 
an Improvement in Self- Closing Cocks or 
Valves for Gas or other Fluids, of which the 
following is a specification. 
Gas-cocks have heretofore been provided 
with a time-movement or clockwork adapted 
to release a detent or similar device at a des 
ignated time, so as to turn off the gas and ex 
tinguish the light, but the plug of the cock 
or valve remains quiescent from the time it 
is turned on until it is suddenly turned off. 
Myinvention is specially adapted to the ex 
tinguishing of gas-lights automatically and 
after the lapse of a given period of time, and 
with this object in view the plug of the sup 
ply-cock is moved in proportion to the period 
of time required in the closing of the same, 
so that the closing mechanism will move the 
plug progressively back to the closing-point. 
It is advantageous to employ a plug that 
will close both the inlet-pipe and the outlet 
pipe. Hence where the inlet and outlet pipes 
are at opposite sides of the plug and in line 
with each other less than a half-revolution 
of the plug can be given in opening such plug, 
and where the plug is directly connected with 
a hand over a dial and clock mechanism is 
employed to rotate such hand the period dur 
ing which the gas may be allowed to burn is 
limited to less than six hours. 
In the present invention the inlet-pipe at 
one side of the plug is not in line with the 
outlet-pipe at the other side of the plug. 
Hence the plug can receive nearly a complete 
revolution and be allowed to remain open for 
a period of nearly twelve hours under the cir 
cumstances before mentioned, because the 
land or closing surface of the plug only 
requires to be sufficiently large to cover the in 
let-opening, and a channel extends all around 
the plug except at this land or closing surface, 
and a similar land or closing surface is pro 
vided at the other side of the plug and a pe 
ripheral channel adjacent to or connecting 
with the first peripheral channel, so that the 
gas or fluid can pass through the channels of 
the plug except when the lands or closing 
surfaces are directly at the ends of the respec 
tive inlet and outlet pipes. 
In the drawings, Figure l is an exterior 
elevation showing a dial, hand, stops, and 
Winding-key. Fig. 2 is a diagrammatic illus 
tration of the gearing with the case in sec 
tion and the gas pipes and cocks in elevation. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section of the gas-cock at the 
line ac ac, Fig. 4. Fig. 4 shows the barrel in 
section and the exterior of the plug, and Fig. 
5 shows the movable stop-pin. 
The gas or other fluid is to be supplied 
through a pipe A, and the shut-off or stop 
cock is advantageously provided at B, and 
D represents the plug, and D' the barrel, of 
a cock or valve, the peculiarities of which will 
be hereinafter more fully described. 
The pipe E extends to a burner P of any 
ordinary character. 
Within the case C is a 
train of gearing G, extending from the spring 
H to a suitable escapement I. These parts 
are of usual construction and form a clock or 
time movement, and there is a dial K on the 
exterior of the case and a hand k that is 
moved around and indicates hours or parts of 
hours, and it is generally advantageous to 
provide suitable plates within the case for 
Supporting the arbors of the time-movement, 
and the hour-hand k is upon the arbor of the 
plug D, so that it moves with such plug, and 
the gear-wheel L is fastened to the arbor of 
the spring and it engages the wheel M upon 
the arbor of the plug D. 
In the common clock-movement the arbor of 
the spring usually revolves once in six hours. 
I therefore make the wheel L on the arbor of 
the spring half the size of the wheel M on the 
arbor of the plug, so that twelve hours, or 
nearly so, may be consumed in giving to the 
plug of the cock a complete revolution. By 
varying the proportion of the wheels L and 
Many desired time may be consumed in giv 
ing to the plug D a complete rotation. 
The figures on the dial K are to indicate 
hours, so that when the pointer of the arm lic 
is turned to indicate '2' the gas will burn for 
two hours, and so on, and as the spring is 
wound up the hand will be turned around on 
the dial to a proportionate extent, and as the 
clockwork runs down the hand will be turned 
back to 12 or the point of beginning. 
The supply-pipe A usually passes into the 
barrel D' at the opposite side to the pipe E, 
leading to the burner; but instead of be 
IO 
20 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
595,921 
3O 
35 
IO 
ing in line with each other the pipe A is 
nearer one end of the barrel than the pipe E, 
so that the plug D may have two peripheral 
grooves adjacent to each other, the ends of 
the grooves terminating on opposite sides of 
the plug where the lands or surfaces of the 
plug close the respective pipes, and there are 
openings, passage-ways, or channels connect 
ing one groove with the other, so that when 
the plug is turned around to its normal posi 
tion the lands 6 and 7 close the ends of the 
respective pipes A and E, and as soon as the 
plug is turned the channels for the gas are 
opened, the gas passing to the burner until 
the spring has turned the plug back to its 
normal position, and the time occupied in so 
doing is regulated by the clockwork and in 
dicated by the dial. 
It is to be understood that in the normal 
position the spring is to be wound up suffi 
ciently to obtain the necessary power for 
freely turning the plug of the cock, and I pro 
vide a stop for arresting the movement of the 
parts when the gas is shut off. This stop is 
shown at N, there being an arm extending 
out from the airbor of the plug at the opposite 
side to the pointer or hand, which arm comes 
in contact with such stop N, and it is advan 
tageous to employ a set-screw acting against 
the arm, so that by adjusting this screw the 
plug can be brought into the proper position 
for entirely shutting off the flow of gas, or it 
may be so adjusted that a small flame may re 
main burning, the gas being either extin 
guished or turned down to a very small flame 
when the arm is arrested by the stop N. 
To prevent the plug being turned back too 
far and to limit the period of time during 
which the gas may be allowed to burn, I pro 
vide a back-stop pin P to be inserted into any 
one of a series of holes around the dial, and 
this pin prevents the arm is being turned af 
ter reaching such pin, and hence the pointer 
upon the arm will indicate the number of 
hours during which the gas will be allowed 
to burn. This is important in hotels where 
the attendant can set the stop-pin for the 
time that the gas is needed-say one hour or 
more-and should the guest on seeing the 
light gradually diminish turn on the gas 
again it can only be used for the period of 
time indicated and then it is shut off auto 
matically, and if blown out there is but little 
risk to the occupant in the room, as the gas 
will only escape for a short time. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination with the cock or valve 
for admitting gas or other fluid, of a spring 
and clock-movement directly connected to the 
plug of the cock so that the spring is wound 
simultaneously with the opening of the cock 
and the plug is turned gradually by the spring 
as the clockwork runs down, and a dial and 
hand connected to and moving in both direc 
55 
75 
tions with the plug of the cock for indicating 65 
the period of time during which the fluid will 
be allowed to pass through the cock before 
the same is shut off, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with the gas pipe and 
cock or valve, of a train of gearing and spring 
forming a clockwork, gear-wheels connecting 
the plug of the cock and the arbor of the 
spring, a key for turning the arbor and wind 
ing the spring and simultaneously opening 
the cock, and a dial and hand moved with the 
plug of the cock during the opening and clos 
ing operations for indicating the period that 
the fluid will be allowed to pass through the 
cock, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination with the gas-cock, a 
spring and train of gearing forming a clock 
work, of gearing connecting the plug of the 
cock to the arbor of the spring, whereby the 
plug of the cock is turned in one direction in 
winding the spring and is turned gradually in 
the other direction as the clock-movement 
runs down, and a stop for arresting the move 
ment of the plug as the cock is closed, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. The combination. With the gas-cock, a 
spring and train of gearing forming a clock 
work, of gearing connecting the plug of the 
cock to the arbor of the spring whereby the 
plug of the cock is turned in one direction in 
winding the spring and is gradually turned in 
the other direction as the clock-movement 
runs down, and an adjustable stop for allow 
ing the gas to be entirely shut off or a small 
flame to remain burning, substantially as set 
forth. 
5. A gas-cock, the plug of which has two 
peripheral grooves adjacent to and communi 
cating with each other extending around the 
plug except at the points opposite the Supply 
and discharge pipes where there is sufficient 
surface on the plug to close them, so that the 
gasway remains open nearly the entire revo 
lution of the plug and is closed at the end of 
the movement, substantially as set forth. 
6. The combination with the gas-supply 
pipe and a spring and train of gearing form 
ing a clockwork, of a gas-cock having a plug 
and gearing connecting the same to the arbor 
of the spring, such plug having two channels 
extending almost around the plug, leaving the 
surfaces of the plug between the ends of the 
channels for closing the ends of the supply 
and discharge pipes and connections between 
the respective channels for allowing the gas 
to pass from one to the other and for allowing 
the gasway to remain open during nearly the 
i entire revolution of the plug, substantially as 
set forth. 
II5 
95 
IIC) 
IOO 
Signed by me this 1st day of April, 1897. 
J. B. RICHARDS. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
S. T. HAVILAND. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596021.txt	(No Model.) 
W. E. WILD. 
0RE CLASSIFIER AND SLIMER, 
No. 596,021. 
Patented Dec. 21, 1897. 
N 
S 
SR 
  
 
O 
v 
S. N 's 
Q SSN EY 
( 
n 
n 
/ 
a 4 elitotvoy 
/AW// 
/ 
V 
The Norris PEERs to. Phoro. Tho., washingtoN. p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM E. WILD, OF DENVER, COLORADO. 
ORE CLASS FER AND SLIMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,021, dated December 21, 1897. 
Application filed January 15, 1897, Serial No, 619,298, (No model.) 
55 
75 
umn is provided with a tubular projection 10, 
To all athlon, it inval? concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM E. WILD, a. 
whose lower extremity rests upon a hollow 
citizen of the United States of America, re 
pedestal 12. To the topmost column is at 
siding at Denver, in the county of Arapahoe 
tached a boss 13, to which is secured a verti 
and State of Colorado, have inventd certain 
cal shaft 14, carrying a fast bevel-gear 15, 
new and useful Improvements in Ore Classi 
meshing with a similar gear 16 on a shaft 17, 
to which power is applied for rotating the col 
fiers and Slimers; and I do declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
umn 9. Surrounding the boss 13 and attached 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
to the base thereof is a hopper 18, open to re 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
ceive the material to be treated from a chute 
make and use the same, reference being had 
19, leading from a stamp-mill or other pull 
Verizing apparatus. 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
figures of reference marked thereon, which 
The wall of the hopper is provided with 
form a part of this specification. 
openings close to the bottom to allow the ma 
My invention relates to improvements in 
terial to escape to a downwardly-inclined cir 
ore classifiers and slimers; and it consists of 
cular plate 20, attached to the top flange of 
the features, arrangements, and combinations 
the uppermost section 9. This plate 20 may 
hereinafter described and claimed, all of 
be coated with mercury for purposes of amal 
which will be fully understood by reference 
gamation when the material under treatment 
to the accompanying drawings, in which is 
carries free gold or other amalgamable metals. 
illustrated an embodiment thereof. 
To the bottom flange of the same section is 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical lon 
attached a screen 21, having a vertical flange 
gitudinal section taken through the appara 
21 formed at its circumference. This screen 
tus. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section taken on 
is oppositely inclined to the plate 20 and pro 
the line y ly, Fig. 1, looking downward. Fig. 
jects beyond the same, whereby it is adapted 
3 is a similar section taken on the linea, ac, 
to receive the material from the plate. This 
Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 illustrates the valve mechan 
material is delivered by the plate to the outer 
ism for controlling the discharge from the 
portion of the screen close to its flange 21", 
vertical conduits, the parts being shown on a 
whereby the said material is made to travel 
larger scale. 
over the entire surface of the screen. The 
Similar reference-characters indicating cor 
portion of this material too large to pass 
responding parts in the views, let the numeral 
through the screen 21 is delivered through 
5 designate an upright tank mounted on a 
suitable openings formed in the adjacent sec 
suitable support 6. As shown in the draw 
tion of the column to a hopper 22, located in 
ings, this tank is cylindrical in form and sur 
the adjacent lower section of the column. A 
rounded by hoops 7. The outer portion 5 of 
vertical pipe or conduit 23 leads from the 
the bottom of the tank is cone-shaped, while 
mouth of the hopper 22 and discharges into 
its inner part 5 is oppositely inclined, hav 
one of the compartments 24 of a receptacle 
ing the shape of an inverted cone. Hence 
24, from which it passes by way of a discharge 
the bottom of the tank is so shaped that the 
pipe 25 into a stationary vat 26, divided by 
slimes that settle thereon may be easily drawn 
circular partitions 27 into a number of com 
off from a port or ports 8, formed where the 
partments 28, from which it may be drawn 
parts 5 and 5 of the bottom are joined to 
off for further treatment. The receptacle 24 
gether. In the center of the tank 5 is located 
is made fast to the depending part 10 of the 
a hollow cylindrical column 9, composed of 
column 9 and therefore rotates with the col 
sections 9, set one upon another. These 
umn. It is divided by radial partitions 24 
sections may be cast-iron and are provided 
into a number of compartments 24 equal to 
with flanges 9, bolted together. As shown 
the number of the grades of material into 
in the drawings, the column 9 is composed of 
which the ore is to be separated by the classi 
fying apparatus. 
six sections, though a greater or less number 
Each section of the hollow vertical column 
of sections may of course be employed. The 
bottom 9 of the lowermost section of the col 9, except the lowermost, is provided with a 
95. 
OO 
O 
3o 
so 
& 
596,021 
O 
25 
35 
55 
plate 20 and a screen 21. The uppermost 
screen is of coarsest mesh, and the mesh of 
each succeeding screen toward the bottom is 
finer, the bottom screen being the finest of all. 
Hence the material that passes through the 
plate 20 next 
uppermost screen falls to the 
below and thence to the finer screen. The 
material rejected by this last-named screen 
passes to another hopper 22 and thence by 
way of a pipe 23 to another compartment 24 
of the receptacle 24, from which it is taken 
by another pipe 25 and discharged into an 
other compartment 28 of the vat 26, and so 
on, the material rejected by each screen from 
the top toward the bottom of the column be 
ing finer and discharged by way of a hopper 
22 and a pipe 23 into a separate compartment 
24 of the receptacle 24, there being as many 
grades of material as there are screens 21. 
The apparatus shown in the drawings (see 
Fig. 1) is provided with five screens 21. 
Hence such a machine would classify, size, 
or divide the ore into five different or distinct 
grades or sizes, each grade being kept en 
tirely separate while passing through the ma 
chine and finally discharged into a separate 
receptacle or compartment of its own. 
The discharge extremity of each pipe 23 is 
controlled by a conical valve 29, attached to 
an arm 31 and Surrounding and sliding upon 
a vertical water-pipe 30, projecting into the 
pipe 23. To each arm 31 is attached a lug 
31, through which passes a screw 32, thread 
ed to engage a threaded aperture in a lug 95 
of the lowermost section 9 of the column 9. 
The valve may be raised or lowered by turn 
ing the screw 32 and the discharge from the 
pipe 23 regulated. It is desirable that the 
lower eXtremity of the pipe 23 shall be open 
only wide enough to discharge the ore which 
enters the same; otherwise the water would 
flow too rapidly through these pipes. 
The lower part of the hollow pedestal 12 
communicates with the water-tank 33, which 
may receive its supply from the overflow of 
the tank 5 or from any other suitable source 
having a proper pressure. The water rises 
in the pedestal 12 and passes through outlets 
34 into the pipe 30. This upward discharge 
of Water prevents the slimes from passing 
down Ward with the sized or classified ore. It 
also prevents any tendency on the part of 
the material to clog the pipes. The volume 
of Water passing through the pipe 30 is regu 
lated by valves 35, whose stems 35 are pro 
vided with hand-wheels 35. 
The slimes, or the materialso fine that it is 
held in suspension by the water, is allowed to 
Settle in the bottom of the tank 5, where it 
may be drawn off through a port or opening, 
as heretofore explained. The water which 
enters the tank is allowed to overflow at the 
top into a slime-tank 36, suitably supported. 
This slime-tank receives a grade of slimes 
which will not settle in the tank 5 by reason 
of the agitation of the water incident to the 
rotation of the column 9 and its connections 
as well as the discharge of the material into 
the tank 5. In this tank 36 there is very little 
agitation, and the slimes consequently have a 
better chance to settle than in the tank 5. 
The material which settles in the tank 36 is 
drawn off at the bottom thereof through a . 
port 37 and carried to any suitable recepta 
cle, where it may be subjected to further 
treatment by the cyanid or any other Suit 
able process. The tank 36 has also an over 
flow into a tank 38, which receives a still finer 
grade of slimes. The entrance to the tank 3S 
is filled with straw or similar filtering mate 
rial 39 to check the flow or current of Water. 
The slimes which settle in the tank 3S may 
be drawn off through a port 40 and carried to 
any suitable receptacle. There is also an 
overflow from the tank 38, which may be con 
nected with another slime-tank, and SO On, as 
many slime-tanks being used as are neces 
sary to thoroughly impoverish the Water of 
its slimes or metallic values held in Suspen 
sion. The overflow from the outermost slime 
tank may be carried by means of a suitable 
conduit to the water-tank 33 and thence into 
the pipes 23 for the purpose heretofore stated. 
Hence there need be no loss of Water. The 
slimes from the tanks 5, 36, and 38 or from 
all the slime-tanks may be drawn off and car 
ried to a common receptacle. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The combination of a stationary tank 
adapted to hold liquid, of a hollow column ro 
tatably mounted therein, two or in Ore in 
clined screens of varying mesh attached to 
the column one above another, said screens 
being downwardly inclined from their outer 
edges which are highest, oppositely-inclined 
plates also attached to the column and adapt 
ed to direct the material to the outer edges 
of the screens, and suitable means located 
within the hollow column and communicat 
ing with the individual screens for conduct 
ing the different grades of material to a suit 
able receptacle. 
2. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination of a stationary tank having 
an opening in its bottom, a hollow rotatable 
column located in said tank, projecting 
through the opening in the bottom thereof 
and resting upon a suitable support, the tank 
being adapted to hold liquid when the col 
umn is in place, two or more conical screens 
attached to the column, one above another, 
their outer edges being highest, oppositely 
inclined plates also attached to the column 
and adapted to discharge the material to the 
outer edge of each screen, and conduits lo 
cated within the hollow column and commu 
nicating with the individual screens at their 
upper extremities, while their lower extremi 
ties have outlets at the bottom of the column. 
3. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination of a stationary tank having 
an opening in its bottom, a hollow rotatable 
column located in said tank, projecting 
75 
95 
IO) 
O 
II5 
 
596,021 
3 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
through an opening in the bottom thereof, 
and resting upon a pedestal underneath, the 
tank being adapted to hold liquid when the 
columnis in place, a series of conical screens 
attached to the column one above another, 
their Outer edges being highest, oppositely 
inclined plates also attached to the column 
and adapted to direct the material to the outer 
edges of the screens, conduits located within 
the hollow column and communicating re 
Spectively with the individual screens at their 
upper eXtremities, while their lower extremi 
ties have Outlets at the bottom of the column, 
a Suitable receptacle attached to the column 
below the tank and divided into compart 
ments to receive the different grades of ma 
terial from the respective conduits. 
4. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination of a stationary slime-tank 
having an Opening in its bottom, a hollow ro 
tatable column located in said tank, project 
ing through said opening and resting upon 
a suitable support underneath, a series of 
Conical Screens attached to the column one 
above another, their outer edges being highest, 
plates also attached to the column and oppo 
sitely inclined from the screens whereby they 
are adapted to direct the material to the outer 
edges of the Screens, conduits located within 
the hollow column and communicating re 
spectively with the individual screens at their 
lipper eXtremities, while their lower extremi 
ties have outlets at the bottom of the column, 
a Suitable receptacle attached to the column 
below the tank and having compartments to 
receive the different grades of material from 
the respective conduits, and a valve con 
nected with the lower extremity of each con 
duit and adapted to control the discharge 
therefrom. 
5. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination of a stationary tank having 
an Opening in its bottom, a hollow rotata 
ble column located therein and projecting 
through the bottom opening, the tank being 
adapted to hold liquid when the column is in 
place, a Suitable Support, or pedestal located. 
below the tank upon which the hollow column 
is Supported, a Series of conical screens at 
tached to the column one above another, their 
Outer edges being highest, said screens vary 
ing in mesh as described, oppositely-inclined 
plates also attached to the column and adapt 
ed to discharge the material to the outer 
edges of the screens, conduits located within 
the hollow column to which they are made 
fast, Said conduits communicating respec 
tively with the individual screens at their 
upper eXtremities, while their lower extremi 
ties are provided with outlets at the bottom 
of the column, a suitable receptacle attached 
to the column below the tank and having 
compartments to receive the different grades 
of material from the respective conduits, a 
conical valve adapted to project into the 
lower extremity of each conduit, a vertically 
movable arm Supporting said valve, and suit 
able means for raising and lowering the arms 
whereby the valves are adjusted and the dis 
charge from the conduits controlled. 
6. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination of a stationary tank having 
an opening in its bottom, a hollow rotatable 
column located in said tank and projecting 
through said opening, a suitable support lo 
cated below the tank and upon which the col 
umn is mounted, a Series of conical Screens 
of varying mesh attached to the column one 
above another, their outer edges being high 
est, oppositely-inclined plates also attached 
to the column and adapted to discharge the 
material to the outer edges of the screens, con 
duits located within the hollow column and 
communicating at their upper extremities 
with the individual screens, while their lower 
extremities have outlets at the bottom of the 
column, a suitable receptacle attached to the 
column below the tank and having compart 
ments to receive the different grades of ma 
terial from the respective conduits, suitable 
valve mechanism for controlling the discharge 
of material from the conduits, and water-pipes 
connected with a suitable supply source at 
their lower extremities, their upper extremi 
ties opening into the said conduits. 
7. In an apparatus of the class described, 
the combination with a stationary slime-tank 
having an opening in its bottom, a hollow ro 
tatable column located in the said tank and 
projecting through the opening in the bottom 
thereof, the said tank being adapted to hold 
liquid when the column is in place, the upper 
extremity of the column being suitably Sup 
ported, a series of conical screens attached to 
the column one above another, said Screens 
being of varying mesh, their outer edges be 
ing highest, oppositely-inclined plates also at 
tached to the column and adapted to discharge 
the material to the outer edges of the screens, 
conduits located within the hollow column to 
which they are made fast, the upper extremi 
ties of said conduits communicating with the 
individual screens, while their lower extremi 
ties have outlets at the bottom of the column, 
a suitable receptacle attached to the column 
below the tank and adapted to receive the 
different grades of material from the respec 
tive conduits, a valve for controlling the dis 
charge from the lower extremity of each con 
duit, a vertically-movable arm supporting 
said valve, and means for raising and lowering 
the arms comprising a screw passing through 
a lug in the arm and engaging a threaded ap 
erture formed in a lug on the column. 
8. In a classifier, the combination of a hollow 
rotatable column, a series of conical screens 
of Varying mesh attached to said column, the 
mesh of the screensincreasinginfineness from 
the top of the column downward, a series of 
oppositely-inclined amalgamated plates also 
attached to the column and adapted to dis 
charge the material to the screens, and a sep 
arate conduit located in the hollow column to 
receive the discharge from each screen, 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
4. 
596,021 
12. In a combined ore classifier and slimer, 
the combination of a stationary tank, the ro 
tatable column located therein, conical 
screens of varying mesh attached to the col 
umn and located one above another, the up 
permost being of the coarsest mesh, and one 
or more slime-tanks connected with the main 
tank and adapted to receive the overflow 
therefrom. 
13. In a classifier for ore or other material, 
the combination of a stationary tank having 
an opening in its bottom, a hollow rotatable 
column located in said tank and projecting 
through the opening in the bottom thereof, a 
series of screens of varying mesh attached to 
said Column, conduits located within the col 
umn, their upper extremities communicating 
with and being adapted to receive the mate 
rial rejected by the respective screens, the 
lower extremities of the conduits having suit 
able outlets located at or below the opening 
in the bottom of the tank. 
14. In a classifier for ore and other nate 
rial, the combination of a stationary tank 
having an opening in the bottom, a hollow 
rotatable column located in said tank and 
projecting through said opening in the bottom 
thereof, the tank being adapted to hold liquid 
when the column is in place, a series of screens 
of varying mesh attached to said column, con 
duits located within and attached to the co 
umn, their upper extremities communicating 
with and being adapted to receive the mate 
rial from the Screens, the lower extremities 
of the conduits having suitable outlets lo 
cated at or below the opening in the bottom 
of the tank, and suitable means for introduc 
ing water under pressure into the discharge 
extremities of the conduits to prevent the 
slimes from passing downward with the ore. 
15. In an ore-classifier, the combination of 
a stationary tank having an opening in its 
bottom, of a hollow rotatable column located 
in Said tank and projecting through said open 
ing, suitable classifying orgrading mechanism 
attached to the exterior surface of the column, 
conduits located within the column and adapt 
ed to receive the respective grades from said 
mechanism, the conduits having outlets be 
low the bottom opening in the tank. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM E. WILD. 
Witnesses: 
G. J. ROLLANDET, 
ALERED J. OBRIEN. 
75 
95 
Oo 
O 
25 
35 
45 
9. In a classifier, the combination of a sta 
tionary tankhaving an opening in its bottom, 
a hollow rotatable column located in the tank 
and projecting through said opening, a series 
of conical screens of varying mesh attached 
to the said column, the mesh of the screens 
increasing in fineness from the top of the 
Column downward, a series of Oppositely-in 
clined plates also attached to the column and 
adapted to discharge the material to the 
screens, conduits located in the hollow col 
umn and adapted to receive the discharge 
from the respective screens, said conduits hav 
ing an outlet at the bottom of each column, a 
receptacle also attached to the column and 
located below the tank, said receptacle being 
divided into compartments to receive the dis 
charge from the respective conduits, a sta 
tionary vat located below the said receptacle 
and divided into circular compartments, and 
suitable conduits leading from the respective. 
compartments of the rotating receptacle and 
discharging into the corresponding compart 
ments of the stationary wat. 
10. In a combined classifier and slimer, the 
combination of an upright stationary tank 
having an inclined bottom provided with a 
port controlled by a suitable valve, a verti 
cal, hollow, rotatable column located in said 
tank and projecting through an opening in 
the bottom thereof, a suitable support below 
the tank upon which the said column is 
mounted, two or more conical screens at 
tached to the column one above another and 
of varying mesh, the uppermost being the 
coarsest, oppositely-inclined plates also at 
tached to the column and adapted to discharge 
upon the Screens, and suitable means for con 
ducting the Several grades of material sepa 
rately from the screens through the hollow 
column to separate compartments of a suit 
able receptacle. 
11. In an ore-classifier, the combination of 
a hollow rotatable column, conical screens at 
tached thereto and surrounding the column, 
oppositely-inclined plates also attached to the 
column and adapted to feed the ore to the 
outer edge of the screens which are provided 
with upwardly-projecting flanges, conduits 
located within the hollow column and adapted 
to receive the material from the respective 
screens, and pipes projecting upward into the 
lower extremities of the respective conduits, 
said pipes being connected with a suitable 
Water-supply Source having sufficient pres 
sure to force the water through the said pipes 
into the conduits. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596121.txt	(Model.) 
R. PATTISON. 
STEAM IN JECTOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet. 1. 
No. 596,121, 
Patented Dec. 28, 1897, 
/W/re-r. - 
2. - 
E: 
Z72 evezzaz 
 
(Model.) 
R. PATTISON, 
STEAM INJECTOR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 596,121, 
Patented Dec. 28, 1897, 
X 
 
  
3 
 2 1st 
1 2. l 
Z. 
  
  
 
 
 
N RNst ( 
 
 
 
SS 
N2 
 
 
ZZayA. 
2a 
2.T.S., 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
RICHARD PATTISON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
STEAM-INJECTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,121, dated December 28, 1897. 
Application filed April 7, 1897, Serial No. 631,079, (Model.) 
55 
75 
- 
To all whon, it may concern: 
New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Steam-Injectors, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention is an improvementin steam 
injectors of the double-jet' or lifting-and 
forcing' type. 
This invention relates particularly to an 
improvement in the injector set forth and 
claimed by me in a pending application which 
was filed January 19, 1897, Serial No. 619,714, 
and allowed March 19, 1897. 
The object of this invention is to provide 
an injector in which the movement of the op 
erating-valve will permit the escape of any 
backpressure in the pipe or tube between the 
injector and the boiler check-valve which 
may becaused by the leakage of steam from 
the boiler through the said check-valve or 
from any other cause. By thus permitting 
the back pressure to escape as the valve is 
operated the injector is permitted to operate 
to lift and force the water perfectly and in 
stantaneously. 
A further object of this invention is to so 
arrange the ports in the valve which controls 
admission of steam to the lifting and forcing 
chambers, the overflow, and the escape of 
the back pressure that the throw of the valve 
operating handle will be very short. 
A practical embodiment of my invention is 
represented in the accompanying drawings, 
. 
in which- 
Figure 1 represents an outside view of the 
injector, the valve - operating handle being 
shown in full lines in the position which it 
assumes when all the ports are closed and in 
dotted lines in the three positions which it 
assumes during its movement-the first when 
the steam is admitted to the forcing-chamber 
only by way of the lifting-chamber, commu 
nication being established from the forcing 
chamber to the overflow-chamber; the second 
when the escape of back-pressure steam is 
permitted through the valve to the overflow, 
communication still being established be 
tween the steam-inlet and forcing-chamber 
by way of the lifting-chamber and the over 
flow-port in the forcing-chamber closed, and 
the third position showing the direct commu 
Be it known that I, RICHARD PATTISON, of nication of steam to the forcing-chamber and 
to the lifting-chamber, the back-pressure es 
cape and the overflow-port from the forcing 
chamber both being closed. Fig. 2 is an out 
side view of the reverse side of the injector 
from that shown in Fig. 1 to show the outlet of 
the overflow-chamber. Fig. 3 represents a 
vertical longitudinal central section through 
the injector, the valve or cock being shown 
in its closed position. Fig. 4 is a side view 
of the valve-plug. Fig. 5 represents a detail 
view showing the position of the valve-plug 
when steam is admitted to the forcing-cham 
ber only through the lifting - chamber, the 
overflow-port in the forcing-chamber being 
shown open to the overflow-chamber. Fig. 6 
represents in detail the next position of the 
valve-plug, in which communication is estab 
lished through the back-pressure port to the 
overflow, the overflow-port in the forcing 
chamber being closed; and Fig. 7 represents 
the third position of the valve-plug in detail, 
in which steam is admitted directly to the forc 
ing-chamber, and directly to the lifting-cham 
ber, the back-pressure port being closed and 
the overflow-port in the forcing-chamber be 
ing closed. 
The injector-casing is denoted as a whole 
by A, its steam-inlet by C, its Water-inlet by 
a', and its discharge opening or outlet by a, 
to which discharge-opening may be attached 
any suitable pipe or tube (not shown) lead 
ing to the boiler. The steam-chamber is de 
noted by B, the lifting-chamber by C, the 
forcing-chamber by D, and the overflow 
chamber by E. The injector-casing is fur 
ther provided with a suitable valve-seat f, 
to which is fitted a rotary valve or cock F, 
having a suitable stem f', to which is at 
tached a suitable operating handle f for 
turning the said valve. The steam-inlet C is 
provided with a suitable porta, opening into 
the valve-seat f. The steam-chamber B is 
provided with a suitable port b, opening into 
the valve-seat f a short distance from the port 
a. The overflow-chamber Eis provided with 
a porte, opening into the valve-seat f, and 
adjacent to the said port is located a suit 
able overflow-port d, opening from the forc 
ing-chamber D into the valve-seat. A steam 
95 
Ioo 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
r 
----se 
596,121 
O 
port (l" also opens from the valve-seat f into 
the forcing-chamber D through the forcing 
nozzle, to be hereinafter described. 
The lifting-chamber C communicates with 
the forcing-chamber D through a lifting-tube 
G, and the steam-chamber B connects with 
the lifting-chamber C through a steam-nozzle 
(), which nozzle is located in position to direct 
the steam into the lifting - tube G. for lift 
ing the Water into the forcing-chamber D. A 
forcing-tube. It is located in the forcing-cham 
berl), near its outlet or discharge opening Ci', 
and a steam-nozzle h is located in position 
to direct the steam which enters the port d", 
when the valve F is full open, into the 
forcing-tube II fol' forcing the water within 
the chamber D into the boiler. The casing 
A is also provided with a back-pressure cham 
be' or conduit I, which opens at one end, as 
at , into the discharge end of the injector 
beyond the forcing-chamber D. The other 
ent l of the back-pressure chamber I opens 
into the valve-seat F to form a port i", which 
port is located between the steam-inlet port 
(valid the steam-port d'. 
The valve F is provided with a suitable 
through-port f', which port is considerably 
larger at one side of the valve and is gradu 
ally reduced through to the other side of the 
same. The valve F is further provided with 
a suitable through -port f", which extends 
through the valve F at an angle to the port 
f', and in the present instance passes through 
a Webf, extending through the through-port 
35 f, the said Webf being spaced from the bot 
tom and top of the said portf' to permit the 
free passage of the steam above and below 
the Web for permitting the steam to pass from 
the inleta, through the portf, into the steam 
port (l" when the valve is turned to full 
open. The through - port f' serves also to 
Opeln Communication between the steam-inlet 
Cl and the steam-chamber B through the ports 
C and b. The through-port f" serves, when 
the valve is in one position, to open commu 
nication between the forcing-chamber D and 
the overflow-chamber E through the ports d 
and e, respectively, and when in another po 
sition to open communication between the 
back-pressure chamber I through its port i' 
and the overflow-chamber E through its port 
e. The casing A is provided upon its exte 
rior with stops at Cl, located in position to be 
engaged by the operating-handle f* for limit 
ing its movements. 
The operation of my invention is as follows: 
Supposing that the valve be closed, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 3, and it be desired to force 
the Water into the boiler, the valve-operating 
handle is swung around until the valve is in 
the position shown in Fig. 5, when the port 
f will have opened communication between 
the steam-inlet and the forcing-chamber by 
way of the lifting-chamber and the portf' will 
have open communication between the forc 
ing-chamber and the overflow-chamber. The 
Steam thus admitted will lift water into the 
45 
50 
55 
65 
 
75 
95 
Ido 
chamber C and from thence into the cham 
ber D, and when the chamber ID has been 
filled the water will overflow through the 
chamber E. The movement of the valve-Op 
erating handle is continued until the valve is 
in the position shown in Fig. 6, when the port 
f will have opened communication between 
the back-pressure chamber I and the Over 
?low-chamber E, at the same time cutting off 
the overflow-port d from the forcing-chamber. 
When the valve is in this position, any pres 
sure of steam which may be within the pipe 
or tube leading from the outlet end of the in 
jector to the boiler between the injector and 
the check-valve will be allowed to escape 
through the overflow-chamber E to the at 
mosphere, thereby leaving the Said tube or 
pipe in proper condition to receive the Water 
through the forcing-tube II, when the valve 
is turned to full open. The valve-operat 
ing handle f' is then caused to complete its 
swinging movement, when the valve will be 
caused to turn into the position shown in Fig. 
7,in which steam is admitted directly through 
the through-port f into the forcing-chamber 
D through the port d' and forcing-nozzle h. 
In this position the through-port f has cut 
off communication from the back pressure I 
to the overflow-chamber E. In the last tWO 
above-described positions communication has 
been continuously maintained from the inlet 
a through the steam-chamber B and lifting 
chamber C. 
It will thus be seen that the movement of 
a single operating-valve controls the admis 
sion of steam to the lifting-chamber and di 
rectly to the forcing-chamber and opens and 
closes communication between the forcing 
chamber and the overflow-chamber and be 
tween the back-pressure chamber and the 
overflow-chamber. It will also be seen that 
the valve as above constructed is caused to 
have a very limited movement for controlling 
the several operations of the injector. 
It is evident that slight changes might be 
resorted to in the construction and arrange 
ment of the several parts without departing 
from the spirit and scope of my invention. 
Hence I do not wish to limit myself strictly to 
the structure herein set forth; but 
What I claim is 
1. In an injector, the combination with a 
casing provided with steam and water inlets 
and an outlet, a forcing-chamber, an over 
flow-chamber, a back-pressure chamber, of 
means for opening and closing communica 
tion between the steam - inlet and forcing 
chamber, between the forcing-chamber and 
overflow - chamber, and between the back 
pressure chamber and overflow-chamber, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In an injector, the combination with a 
casing provided with steam and water inlets 
and an outlet, a lifting-chamber, a forcing 
chamber, an overflow-chamber and a back 
pressure chamber, of a single valve arranged 
to open and close communication between 
O 
IIS 
I25 
596,121 
3. 
IO 
the steam-inlet and the lifting-chamber the 
steam-inlet and the forcing-chamber, the forc 
ing-chamber and the overflow-chamber and 
the back-pressure chamber and the overflow 
chamber, substantially as set forth. 
3. In an injector the combination with a 
casing provided with steam and water inlets 
and an outlet, a lifting-chamber, a forcing 
chamber, an overflow-chamber and a back 
pressure chamber, of a single valve for con 
trolling the admission of steam, adapted by 
successive movements to firstly open com 
munication between the steam-inlet and lift 
ing-chamber, the forcing-chamber and over 
flow-chamber; secondly close communication 
between the forcing-chamber and overflow 
chamber and open communication between 
the back - pressure chamber and overflow 
chamber and finally to open communication 
between the inlet and the forcing-chamber 
and close communication between the back 
pressure chamber and overflow-chamber, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
4. In an injector the combination with a 
casing provided with a valve-seat, a steam 
inlet opening into the valve-seat, a steam 
chamber opening into the valve-seat, a forc 
ing-chamber having an overflow-port and a 
steam-inlet port both opening into the valve 
seat, a lifting-chamber communicating with 
the steam-chamber and forcing-chamber and 
a back-pressure chamber opening into the 
valve-seat, of a rotary valve provided with a 
through-port for opening communication be 
tween the steam-inlet and the steam-cham 
ber and between the steam-inlet and forcing 
chamber and provided with a second through 
port adapted to open communication between 
the forcing-chamber and overflow-chamber. 
and between the back-pressure chamber and 
overflow-chamber, substantially as set forth. 
25 
35 
RICHARD PATTSON. 
Witnesses: 
FREDK. HAYNES, 
C. S. SUNDGREN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596222.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PETER VOGEL AND HUBERT HATSCHER, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS. 
BEVERAGE AND PROCESS OF COV POUND ING SAM E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,222, dated December 28, 1897. 
Application filed May 21, 1897. Serial No, 637,615. (No specimens.) 
55 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, PETER VOGEL, a citi 
Zen of Germany, and HUBERT HATSCHER, a 
citizen of the United States of America, resi 
dents of Springfield, county of Hampden, and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in a Composition of 
Matter-to wit, a Beverage-and in the Proc 
ess of Compounding the Same, of which the 
following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to a beverage which 
we term champagne Weiss beer. 
The object of our invention is to produce a 
beverage which, while being so far free from 
alcohol that it is non-intoxicating or of a 
character known as a temperance drink, 
will have a sparkling and clear appearance, 
will be inexpensive in cost of manufacture, 
and a pleasant and desirable beverage. The 
method of compounding the same and the 
materials employed are as follows, in sub 
stantially the proportions herein set out. 
Our composition or beverage consists of 
the following ingredients, combined in the 
proportions stated-viz.: lager-beer, one bar 
rel; filtered water, one barrel; granulated 
sugar, six pounds; Salt, three and One-half 
ounces; Weinstein, (argol,) four and one-half 
ounces; kiraeusen, four quarts. 
The ingredients above named are all well 
known to the general public except Wein 
stein (argol) and kraeusen, and these are 
terms well known to those skilled in the art of 
compounding beer. Weinstein, also known 
as argol, is the material which has the ap 
pearance of rock-candy and which is depos 
ited on the walls of the Vats during the man 
ufacture of wine while the Wine is in the 
curing-vats, where it frequently remains for 
one or two years, during which time the Wein 
stein or argol becomes deposited or precipi 
tated, as stated. Kraeusenisknown by brew 
ers to be beer in its first stages of fermenta 
tion; or, to state it in other Words, in the 
process of manufacturing lager-beer the com 
pound which ultimately becomes lager-beer 
passes through various stages offermentation, 
and while in the first stage of fermentation it 
is known as 'kiraeusen. 
The ingredients are preferably mixed or 
compounded as follows: The barrel of lager 
beer and about one barrel of filtered water 
are mixed. The salt, sugar, and Weinstein or 
argol are each separately reduced to a finely 
powdered state and each separately dissolved 
in Water. After the powdered materials have 
all been dissolved the solutions and the kraeu 
Sen are all mixed with the mixture of water 
and beer, care being taken to carefully and 
thoroughly intermix. The compound is then 
bottled, the bottles, however, being left un 
corked or open until fermentation begins. 
This usually takes about from four to five 
days, depending, of course, upon the temper 
ature and other conditions familiar to those 
skilled in the art of making beer. As soon 
as fermentation begins the bottles are care 
fully corked and kept at a temperature of 
from two to ten degrees above freezing for 
from ten to fourteen days, during which time 
the bottles should be occasionally partially 
rotated back and forth by a quick motion of 
the hand, or, in other words, shaken by a ro 
tary motion, so as to cause the sediments, if 
any there be, to thoroughly dissolve. The 
thermometric scale herein referred to is Fah 
renheit. The beverage thus compounded may 
then be stored in any convenient place for a 
great length of time and will retain its desir 
able qualities. 
When the beverage is to be served and used 
it is advisable that it, like other beverages, 
should be placed in a cool place-a few de 
grees, for instance, above freezing-before 
using, so that at the time of its being poured 
into the glass the gas will not escape too rap 
idly. 
Having therefore described our invention, 
what we claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The herein - described composition of 
matter to be used as a beverage, consisting 
of lager-beer, Water, sugar, salt, weinstein 
(argol) and kraeusen in the proportions sub 
stantially as stated. 
2. The herein - described method of com 
pounding a beverage consisting of mixing the 
ingredients herein specified in the propor 
tions substantially as set forth, leaving the 
Same Open until fermentation begins, then 
closing the same, all substantially as shown. 
PETER VOGEL. 
HUBERT HATSCHER. 
w 
Witnesses: 
ALLEN WEBSTER, 
M. E. GERTZE. 
75 
85 
95 
ICO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596322.txt	(No ModeI.) 
N. CARPENTER, Sr. 
HEARSE. 
No. 596,322. 
Patented Dec. 28, 1897. 
 
 
i 
st 
  
  
S 
s 
S 
SN s 
ASX 
EEEEEEEGeg=C. 
rREstest 
EAEAs. SAEAEA 
s EESEEG). 
ESE Estate 
V7 
a. A A. A 
Pre-RH 
Y 
V 
V 
V 
V 
A A A A 
Wirt 
EsseGEEEEGEs r 
S. 
S 
| Esessesses 
S R RFR Fyrvary 
V 
N 
s 
N 
 
S. 
& 
s 
s 
% 
72cs A? forpeys, 
u16zze?Cazoerzez.5 
 
THE No?aris Peters co, Photo-ltho, washingtoN. b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NEWEL CARPENTER, SR., OF WHITE CREEK, WISCONSIN. 
HEARSE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,322, dated December 28, 1897. 
Application filed February 5, 1897, Serial No. 622,237, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To al., whom it 720ty concert: 
Beitknown that I, NEWELCARPENTER, Sr., 
a citizen of the United States, residing at White 
Creek, county of Adams, and State of Wiscon 
sin, have invented a new and useful Improve 
ment in Hearses, of which the following is a 
specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means for conveying a casket or coffin into a 
hearse and to hold it firmly in place therein 
Without resorting to the employment of ex 
traneous fastening appliances. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
wide a support external to the hearse on which 
a casket may be placed preliminary to mov 
ing the same into the hearse, said external 
Support being detachable from the hearse 
and foldable compactly upon itself to enable 
it to be stored beneath the hearse out of sight 
and out of the way when required. 
With these ends in view the first part of 
the invention consists in the combination, 
With a hearse having a slotted floor, of a se 
ries of transverse toothed rollers journaled 
in place to have the toothed surfaces thereof 
project through the slotted floor, a counter 
shaft geared to said rollers, and a locking de 
vice to restrain the rollers and the counter 
shaft from rotation, whereby the toothed 
rollers engage With the bottom of the casket 
and serve to hold the latter firmly in place. 
The invention further consists in the com 
bination, with a hearse, of a stand equipped 
With smooth bearing-rolls and adapted to be 
connected detachably at its inner end to the 
hearse, and foldable legs attached to said 
stand at or near its outer end; and the inven 
tion further consists in the novel combination 
and construction of parts, which will be herein 
after fully described and claimed. 
To enable others to understand my inven 
tion, I have illustrated the preferred embodi 
ment thereof in the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of this specification, and in 
which 
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of a hearse 
with my improvements applied thereto. Fig. 
2 is a plan view of the improved appliance 
removed from the hearse. Fig. 3 is a detail 
5o fragmentary view showing the locking ap 
pliance for the rollers. 
45 
35 
 
Like numerals of reference denote like parts 
in all the figures of the drawings. 
1 designates a hearse provided with a slot 
ted floor 2. The hearse may be constructed 
in the usual manner, except that the floor 
thereof is constructed to accommodate my 
improved appliance for conveniently adjust 
ing a casket in the hearse and for holding said 
casket firmly in place therein. 
In Fig. 1 I have shown the floor 2 provided 
with a series of transverse slots 3, which are 
spaced apart to accommodate a series of 
rollers 4. 
The lower part of the hearse is constructed 
to receive a supporting-frame 5, which may 
be held in place rigidly within the hearse 
body by any suitable fastenings-as, for ex 
ample, bolts. (Not shown.) The frame 5 
occupies the lower part of the hearse-body 
below the slotted floor 2 therein, and said 
frame is constructed to receive a series of 
transverse parallel shafts 6 6. The frame 
may be provided with a series of cap-boxes 
to receive the roller-shafts, or the sides of the 
frame may be apertured for the passage of 
said roller-shafts, as may be desired. Said 
frame 5 is fastened within the hearse-body a 
suitable distance below the slotted floor 2 
thereof for the rollers 7 to have their toothed 
surfaces project through the slots in the floor 
2, and the rear cross-bar of this frame 5 is 
provided with sockets to receive hooks on the 
external stand, which will be presently de 
scribed. 
The shaft 6 is arranged at the rear end of 
the hearse-body, adjacent to the door or doors 
thereof, and both ends of this shaft 6 are ex 
tended beyond the side rails of the support 
ing-frame 5, one end of said shaft 6 protrud 
ing through a suitable opening in the side of 
the hearse-body and constructed for the at 
tachment of an operating crank or handle 8. 
I prefer to make one end of the shaft square 
or of angular form to receive a correspond 
ingly-shaped opening in the crank-handle 8, 
so that said crank-handle may be readily ap 
plied to or removed from the shaft 6; but it 
is obvious that the parts may be otherwise 
constructed for the expeditious application 
or removal of the crank-handle. 
The roller-shafts 6 6 are extended beyond 
55 
o 
75 
95 
OO 
596,322 
one side rail of the supporting-frame 5, and 
said extended ends of the shafts 6 (3* are pro 
vided with miter-gears 9, with which mesh 
similar miter-gears 10, provided on the coun 
ter-shaft 11. Said counter-shaft is arranged 
longitudinally of the supporting-frame 5, at 
one side thereof, and it is journaled in suit 
able bearings on brackets or arms 12, fastened 
in a suitable way to one side rail of the Sup 
porting-frame 5. This longitudinal counter 
shaft serves to operatively connect the shafts 
of the series of rollers to give to the rollers 
the same peripheral speed. 
By reference to Fig. 2 it will be observed 
that the crank S may be rotated by hand to 
turn the shaft 6, which drives the shaft 11, 
and the latter shaft in turn drives the Shafts 
6 of the remaining rollers of the series pro 
vided in the bottom of the hearse-body. 
The series of rollers each have an equalse 
ries of teeth 3 arranged in correspondingpo 
sitions thereon, and the rollers are so geared 
together through the longitudinal counter 
shaft that One line of teeth on each roller oc 
cupies the same relation to the casket as the 
corresponding teeth on the other rollers of the 
series, thus making each toothed roller en 
gage with the casket similarly to all the other 
rollers and retaining the casket firmly in po 
sition within the hearse-body without resort 
ing to extraneous fasteners. 
On the end of the shaft 6, adjacent to one 
side rail of the frame 5, is rigidly fastened a 
locking-disk 13, which is provided with a se 
ries of radial notches 14 to be engaged by a 
nib 15 on a spring-controlled pawl 16. The 
number of notches in the locking-disk 13 cor 
respond to the number of the series of teeth. 
on each roller of the Series of rollers. The 
pawl 16 is pivoted near its heel to a suitable 
... support fastened within the body of the 
hearse, and With one of the double-inclined 
faces of the heel of this pawl engages a lift 
ing-spring 17, that Serves when engaged with 
one face of the pawl to force it normally to 
Ward the notched edge of the locking-disk 13 
and when engaged with the other face of the 
pawl to hold it away from the notched disk 
to permit free turning of the rollers. 
As shown by Fig. 3, the spring 17 is pref 
erably in the form of a leaf-spring fastened 
at one end on the floor of the hearse and hav 
ing its free end arranged to bear against the 
heel of the pivoted pawl. This pawl is situ 
ated within the hearse-body at one side of the 
roller-Supporting frame and adjacent to the 
open real' end of said hearse-body, so that the 
pawl may easily be operated by hand to dis 
engage its locking - nib from the radially 
notched disk 13. 
To provide means for supporting the casket 
in position from whence it may readily be 
moved into the hearse, I provide an external 
stand 20, adapted to be detachably connected 
with the rear end of the hearse-body and to 
Occupy a position Substantially in horizontal 
2 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
75 
alinement with the series of toothed rollers 
contained within the hearse - body. This 
stand comprises a supporting-frame 21, a Se 
ries of idle-rolls 22, attaching devices 23 on the 
frame 21 for connecting the stand with the Slip 
porting-frame 5 within the hearse-body, fold 
able legs 24, connected to the supporting-frame 
21 at the end farthest from the hearse, and 
suitable braces or stays for the legs 25. The 
attaching devices 23 for the Supporting-frame 
are shown in the drawings as hooks, which 
project from the front end of the frame 21 
and are adapted to engage with Sockets 26, 
provided in the rear rail of the frame 5, as 
shown by Fig. 1; but the detailed construc 
tion of the means for attaching the stand 
frame removably to the hearse may be al 
tered without departing from the spirit of 
the invention. The legs 24 for supporting 
the outer end of the stand-frame are pivoted 
at their upper ends to said frame 21 to en 
able them to fold compactly against the frame 
21 when the stand is not in use, and Wheln 
said legs 24 are folded alongside of the stand 
frame 21 they may be held in place by hooks 
or any suitable form of catch. 
The stays 25 may consist of flexible cords 
attached at their respective ends to the fold 
able legs 24 and to the stand-frame; but, if 
desired, rigid metallic braces may be Substi 
tuted for the flexible cords. 
I do not desire to restrict my invention to 
the employment of the foldable stand in con 
nection with the hearse, as it is evident that 
the stand may be omitted altogether. 
The operation may be described briefly as 
follows: The stand is adjusted in position at 
the rear end of a hearse by unfolding the 
pivoted legs 24 and connecting the attaching 
devices 23, substantially as shown by Fig. 1. 
A casket may be now placed upon the idle 
rolls 22 of the stand, and the crank 8 having 
been applied to the shaft 6 the crank is 
rotated to drive the counter-shaft 11 and 
thus rotate all the series of pivoted rolls be 
low the slotted floor of the hearse. The cas 
ket is moved endwise on the idle-rolls of the 
supporting-stand until its advancing end en 
gages with the toothed rollers, and the con 
tinued rotation of the crank serves to drive 
said toothed rollers So that the teeth engage 
with the bottom of the casket and advance 
the latter within the hearse-body to the proper 
position. The stand and hand-crank may 
now be disconnected and the pawl 16 engages 
with the notched disk 13 to hold the shaft (3, 
shaft 11, and the toothed rollers in fixed posi 
tions, so that the casket will engage firmly 
with the teeth of the rollers and be held in 
position thereby. 
The stand may be folded compactly to 
gether and be thrust into a receptacle pro 
vided beneath the hearse-body, as indicated 
by Fig. 1. 
I am aware that changes in the form, pro 
portion, and minor details of construction 
95 
OO 
II5 
I25 
596,822. 
3. 
may be resorted to without departing from 
the spirit or sacrificing any of the advantages 
of the invention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new, and desired to be secured 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination with a hearse, of a 
series of toothed rollers journaled below the 
floor thereof, means for imparting correspond 
ing peripheral speed to all of the rollers of 
the series, and means for locking said rollers 
against rotation, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with a hearse having 
a slotted floor, of a series of toothed rollers 
journaled within the hearse to have their 
working surfaces protrude above the slotted 
floor, a counter-shaft geared to all of said 
rollers, and a locking device to restrain the 
counter-shaft and the rollers against rotation, 
substantially as described. 
3. The combination with a hearse having 
its floor provided with a series of transverse 
slots, of a supporting-frame fixed within the 
hearse below the slotted floor thereof, a se 
ries of rollers journaled in said frame and 
arranged to have their toothed working sur 
faces protrude through the slots in said floor, 
a counter-shaft geared to the shafts of all the 
rollers, a driving-shaft carrying one of said 
1ollers, geared to the counter-shaft and pro 
vided with a detachable crank, and a locking 
IO 
5 
2C) 
25 
 
device associated with the driving-shaft, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. The combination with a hearse having 
a slotted floor, of a driving-shaft journaled 
beneath said floor and carrying a toothed 
roller, a Series of rollers, a counter-shaft 
geared to the driving-shaft and geared to 
said rollers, a radially-notched disk fastened 
to the driving-shaft, and a spring-controlled 
pawl to engage with said notched disk, sub 
staintially as described. 
5. The combination with a hearse, of a sup 
porting-standadapted to have one end thereof 
connected detachably to the hearse and pro 
vided with a series of idle-rolls, and foldable 
legs attached to said stand, substantially as 
described. 
6. The combination with a hearse and a 
series of rotatable toothed rollers journaled 
therein, of a supporting-stand connected de 
tachably to the hearse to have its series of 
idle-rolls occupy substantially the same hori 
Zontal plane as the toothed bearing-rollers, 
foldable legs attached to said stand-frame, 
and suitable stays connected with the stand 
frame and the foldable legs thereof, substan 
tially as described. 
NEWEL CARPENTER, SR. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED CLARENCE HOWARD, 
THOMAS LISTER. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596422.txt	(No Model.) 
ST, JULIEN GIRARDEAU & R. J. MURRAY, 
RAILWAY SWITCH, 
No. 596,422, 
767. Z. 
Patented Dec. 28, 1897. 
ZZz67. 3. 
NSN 
-. Alaas 
 
WITNESSES. 
-7. 
M 
& 
S G. 
/WWENTORS. 
---47 TORNE rs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ST. JULIEN GIRARDEAU AND RICHARD JAMES MURRAY, OF GALVESTON, 
TEXAS. 
RALWAY - SWITCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,422, dated December 28, 1897. 
Application filed December 23, 1896, Serial No. 616,797, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, ST. JULIEN GIRAR 
DEAU and RICHARD JAMES MURRAY, citizens 
of the United States, residing in Galveston, 
county of Galveston, and State of Texas, have 
invented an Improvement in Automatic Rail 
way-Switches, of which the followingis a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to that class of auto 
matic railway-switches which embody a mech 
anism carried upon the car and adapted to 
engage an operating mechanism connected 
with the switch. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
simple and improved automatic safety-switch 
mechanism of this character which will enable 
the motorman or conductor to conveniently 
and accurately insure the proper setting of 
the switch without leaving his position, which 
will reduce the labor of operation to a mini 
mum and lessen the liability of danger or ac 
cident, which will enable effective operation 
even if the switch be submerged from view by 
water or otherwise, and which will, further 
more, possess advantages in point of simplic 
ity, quick and positive action, convenience, 
inexpensiveness, effectiveness, and general 
efficiency. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view showing the end of a car provided with 
our improved switch-actuating mechanism. 
Fig. 2 is a front end elevation. Fig. 3 is a top 
or plan view of the Switch and its operating 
mechanism. Fig. 4 is a detailperspective view 
of the thrower or swinging arm which en 
gages the switch-operating mechanism. Fig. 
5 is a detail vertical sectional view taken lon 
gitudinally on the plane of the main rockshaft. 
or rod. 
Corresponding parts in all the figures are 
denoted by the same letters of reference. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates 
the front end of the car, having the end plat 
form C and dashboard a', in relation to which 
our improved operating mechanism is ar 
ranged. 
B designates a main operating-lever which 
is pivotally mounted in upright position at 
the front of the dashboard, the top end of said 
lever being housed in a limiting-guard C, 
adapted to be centrally engaged by an auto 
matic clasp-spring b, carried upon the lever 
and adapted to retain the same in normal 
central position with relation to the guard. 
The lower end of the lever is connected with 
the front end of a main horizontal rock shaft 
or rod D, arranged in a longitudinal plane 
under the car and supported by and having 
bearings in transverse brackets EE, depend 
ing from and below the bottom of the car. 
Upon the rock-shaft D, preferably inter 
mediately between the supporting-brackets 
E, a transverse thrower or actuating device 
F is secured. This device embodies two op 
positely - projecting downwardly - extending 
arms.ff, carrying at their ends flanged wheels 
G, as shown. The member F is preferably 
secured upon the shaft or rod D by means of 
a set-screw h. 
I designates a coiled spring which is mount 
ed upon the shaft D and has its ends respec 
tively secured to one of the supporting-brack 
ets E and to the member F, as shown at and 
i". This spring operates to normally return 
the rock-shaft and thrower or membel E to 
normal position after operation of the mech 
anism. 
We prefer to retain the rock-shaft D in po 
sition by means of collars JJ, secured by set 
screws i and arranged with relation to the 
supporting-brackets EE, as shown. 
IK designates a transverse sliding bar which 
is mounted with relation to the track and is 
pivotally connected to two pivoted switch 
tongues L. L. 
MM designate two bars which are longi 
tudinally arranged with relation to the track 
and at the respective sides of the latter and 
have their front ends pivotally connected to 
the sliding bar K, as shown at n. The rear 
ends of the bars M are pivotally mounted 
upon a transverse stationary bar or plate N, 
as shown at m'. 
In Fig. 2 we have illustrated a slight modi 
fication in the construction of the main lever 
B, the latter being provided with a gooseneck 
curves near its lower end, which will permit 
play of a loose draw-head. In Fig. 1 the lever 
is of a continuous straight construction adapt 
ed for use in connection with other types of 
draw-heads. 
The operation and advantages of our in 
vention will be readily understood. 
When the main lever B is thrown from the 
- 
- 
95 
CO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
596,422 
W 
thereto. 
center in a right-hand direction to the limit 
of play permitted by the guard C, the rock 
shaft D is correspondingly actuated, which 
causes the right-hand arm f of the thrower 
or member F to move downwardly, so that its 
flanged wheel G comes into contact with the 
outer edge of the right-hand connecting-bar 
M, and as the flanged wheel travels in rela 
tion to said connecting-bar it bears laterally 
against the same and causes a pivotal move 
ment, which actuates the transverse sliding 
bar Kand sets the switch-tongues LL at each. 
side in position for the right-hand track. A 
reverse operation of the main lever B will 
cause a setting of the switch in opposite po 
sition. When the hold upon the main lever 
is released, the mainspring I automatically 
returns the mechanism to normal position, 
When the clasp-spring b will centrally engage 
with the limiting-guard C and lock the le 
wer in normal central position with relation 
It will be noted that in our invention the 
operating mechanism is located beneath the 
carin position for direct engagement with the 
SWitch-controlling mechanism, which insures 
simplicity and convenience in construction, 
and an adjustment of the actuating member 
F in a longitudinal plane upon its rock-shaft 
to insure its perfect operation with relation 
to the pivotal connecting-bars M M is en 
abled by means of the set-screw connection 
h. The automatic return of the mechanism 
and operating-lever after operation effected 
by the placing of the governing-spring in di 
rect connection with the member E and the 
rock-shaft and the automatic locking of the 
lever in normal position are important fea 
tures and advantages of our improved con 
struction and arrangement. These features 
obviate any necessity for the operator to re 
turn and lock the mechanism in its normal 
position and insure the immediate resump 
tion of its normal position by the actuating 
member F as soon as the flanged wheels of 
the latter are released from lateral pressure 
upon the pivotal connecting-bars M. The 
improved construction and arrangement com 
prising flanged wheels adapted to bear later 
ally upon the switch - actuating mechanism 
also insure a more positive and effective op 
eration than is accomplished by similar mech 
anisms in which operating wheels or rollers 
bear downwardly upon the switch-actuating 
mechanism. It will also be noted that in our 
improved construction and arrangement sim 
plicity and inexpensiveness in construction 
are insured by reason of the fact that all the 
SWitch-operating mechanism is located above 
ground, and the employment of the double 
switch-tongue construction as comprised in 
Our improvements also insures a safer and 
more positive setting of the switch. 
Having thus described our invention, we 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
In combination with the car, the hangers un 
der the platform at one end having central 
bearings, and With an open space between 
Said hanger and the platform both vertically 
and laterally of the rock-shaft, the rock-shaft 
supported by said bearings, the thrower con 
sisting of the arms extending laterally from 
the rock-shaft to each side of the same, the 
flanged wheels carried by said arms, the le 
Ver having the lateral gooseneck providing 
an opening in line with the open space of the 
hangers to permit the arrangement of a draw 
head, a single spring coiled about the shaft 
for returning the parts to normal position, 
and the pair of switch-tongues at opposite 
sides of the track to be operated by the flanged 
wheels, said tongues being adapted to remain 
in the position in which they are moved by 
the flanged wheels until they are again oper 
ated thereby. 
In witness whereof we have here unto set 
our hands in presence of two witnesses. 
ST. JULIEN GIRARDEAU. 
RICHARD JAMES MURRAY. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY JACOB LABATT, 
EUGENE ALSTON HAWKINS, Jr. 
O 
(5 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596522.txt	(No Model. ) 
J. C. MACKEY. 
LAMP, 
No. 596,522, 
Patented Jan. 4, 1898, 
WITNESSES 
A. 
A. 
/WWEMTOR 
 
tie Norris Peters Co, PHOTO-LITHO., WASHINGTON Q. C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN C. MACKEY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO W. HARRISON 
ALBACH, OF SAME PLACE. 
LAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,522, dated January 4, 1898. 
Application filed February 16, 1897, Serial No. 623,622, (No model.) 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN C. MACKEY, a 
citizen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York city, county and State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Lamps, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
lamp with a perfect combustion - chamber, 
whereby the strength of the flame is mate 
rially increased for illuminating and likewise 
heating purposes. 
Another object is to produce an odorless 
lamp, whereby the flames can be increased or 
decreased by the raising or lowering of the 
wick without creating Smoke or Smoking. 
Another object is to separate the wick from 
the body of oil in the oil-reservoir. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a sec 
tional elevation of a lamp embodying my in 
vention, a part of the perforated lifting tube 
or sleeve being shown in full lines. Fig. 2 is a 
detached bottom view of the chimney-holder. 
Fig. 3 is a detached top view of the chimney 
holder. 
Letter A represents a lamp with stand or 
base B, oil reservoir or holder C, and chim 
ney D. The oil-holder is provided with a cen 
tral opening into which is placed the parti 
tion-tube E, provided with a perforated cap 
e10 and supporting the wick-tube F, provided 
with an annular space for the insertion of 
the wick G. The projecting portion C of the 
oil-holder is provided with holes for the ad 
mission of air into the central opening of the 
wick-tube. (See arrows.) The top of the 
wick - tube supports the flame - deflector H, 
the side walls of which are perforated, (see 
Fig. 1) and in the interior of the perforated 
tubular portion h is inserted the perforated 
cone J. (See Fig. 1.) 
The partition-tube Esupports the chimney 
holder K, with annular space k divided off 
by perforated Wallk and perforated top plate 
le. The top of this holder Ksupports the air 
deflector M, constructed after, or nearly so, 
the shape shown. 
Oil is admitted to the Wick from the oil 
holder by the tube or pipe O. 
The Wick is raised and lowered by the re 
movable lifter P, which is inserted through 
an opening in the oil-holder at n, (see Fig.1) 
and the horizontal member p enters any one 
O 
20. 
25 
35 
45 
of the holes of wick-lifting ring or collar or 
sleeve R. (See Fig. 1.) To enable the wick 
lifter P to traveleasily and steadily within 
the oil-holder, I place therein the guide or 
steadier S, (see Fig. 1,) with holes S to per 
mit the oil to reach the Wick. 
The object of the perforated cone in the 
flame-deflector is to equalize the current of 
air coming up the central opening of the Wick 
tube and likewise distribute it more evenly 
against the disk of the deflector than could 
be done otherwise if the cone Was not used. 
The deflector on the chimney-holder deflects 
or concentrates the air toward the ignited 
portion of the wick and effectually draws the 
heat of the flame or light away from the oil 
holder of the lamp. 
It Will be observed that the Wick is fed from 
the oil-holder by an opening which frees the 
wick from the sediments of the oil, which de 
stroy the usefulness of the wick. 
Because of the air-space T between the par 
tition-tube and Wick-tube Iamenabled to pre 
vent the oozing of the oil upon or onto or 
through the oil holder or fount, thereby mak 
ing the handling or carrying of the lamp lin 
accompanied with soiling of the person of the 
carrier and prevents odor from the oil, and it 
also keeps the reservoir or fount clean. 
What I claim is 
1. In a central- draft lamp, the chimney 
holder K provided with an annular space in 
closed by a solid wall and a perforated wall, 
a solid cover, perforated top plate, and curved 
deflector placed on top of said holder as 
shown, in combination with the partition 
tube E over which it is placed and supported, 
as shown and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a central - draft lamp the chimney 
holder K provided with solid outer wall, per 
forated inner wall, solid top, perforated top 
plate, and curved deflector, placed on top of 
said holder as shown substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres 
ence of two witnesses, this 13th day of Feb 
ruary, 1897. 
JOHN C. MACKEY. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. T. ROGERS, 
HENRY S. GREENBURGH, 
55 
75 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596622.txt	(No Mode.) 
No. 596,622, 
 
A, C. ROWE. 
FIRE EXTINGUISHER 
Patented Jan. 4, 1898. 
???? C 
2- 
| | | | | 
 
 
 
  
 
 
the NORRIs Peters co. Phot:-Lithu.. washingtox, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARTHUR C. ROWE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
FIRE EXTNG US HER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,622, dated January 4, 1898. 
Application filed September 25, 1896. Serial No. 606,994, (No model.) , 
IO 
2 ? 
To all whon, it in-?ty concern: 
first position and mingled Water and gas in 
the second position. 
IBe it known that I, ARTHUR C. ROWE, of 
the city, county, and State of New York, have 
In the accompanying drawings, in which 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
the same letters indicate like parts, Figures 
ments in Fire-Extinguishers, of which the fol 
1 and 2 are vertical sections of two varieties 
lowing, taken with the accompanying draw 
of the machine, each capable of use for dry 
ings, is a description. 
carbonic-acid gas or combined gas and Water. 
My invention relates to chemical fire-ex 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section on line acac of Fig. 2. 
tinguishers in which certain chemicals are 
Fig. 4 is an alternative variation of the upper 
placed ready to be combined at the time of 
part of Fig. I when used for one purpose. 
the fire to produce a flame - extinguishing 
A is the first compartment. For producing 
gas or combination of gas and liquid. There 
carbonic-acid gas this is to be filled about 
have been heretofore two kinds, one in which 
one-half full of water and bicarbonate of soda, 
the gas is thrown mingled with water, the 
added until it reaches Saturation. 
Water acting primarily as a vehicle to carry 
B is the acid-receptacle, suspended by rods 
b from the screw-cap C. 
the gas to the fire, and the other in which 
D is the lead stopper, placed loosely over 
a stream of gas only is thrown. In the lat 
ter kind, useful especially around electrical 
the mouth of B. 
Switchboards and delicate machinery, a sec 
E, the second compartment, Fig. 1, is a ves 
ondary or drying chamber is necessary to rid 
sel about one-third the size of compartment 
the gas of the Watery vapor or spray which 
A, rigidly attached to it, having as its inlet 
from A the pipe F and its outlet at the point 
issues with it from the commotion of the 
generating - chamber; but it frequently oc 
G, at which any suitable hose-pipe and nozzle 
curs at a fire around electrical apparatus 
may be attached. 
that it is desirable to first throw a stream of 
The pipe F, which forms the communica 
dry gas and afterward throw water and gas 
tion between the two chambers, starts from 
upon another part of the fire. The latter 
near the bottom of the first compartment A 
carries farther and is more effective upon 
and terminates in the second compartment E 
burning Wood. To do this heretofore, it has 
at a point some distance from the top H there 
been necessary to have two machines, one of 
of and with its mouth near to and directed 
substantially at right angles against the in 
each kind, each with its separate charge. 
The main object of my invention is to pro 
terior surface of the compartment. The bend 
in the pipe Fat J forms a handle, (in case of 
vide a single machine which can be made to 
throw a stream of dry gas and then by sim 
a portable machine,) and the bari at the other 
ply reversing it instantly change this to a 
end serves as a handle when it is reversed. 
The operation as a dry carbonic-acid-gas 
Stream of Water and gas, all from the same 
machine is as follows: The compartment A 
charge. Thus the same machine and the 
having been charged with the Water and bi 
same charge can be used either as a wet or dry 
carbonate of soda, and the receptacle B with 
machine until the charge is exhausted, and 
the acid, the whole machine (both compart 
can also be made to change from one to the 
other instantly as the necessity arises. 
ments) is reversed, the lead stopper D falls 
It consists, substantially, of two separate 
out, the acid mingles with the solution, and 
compartments, a generating and a drying 
carbonic-acid gas is evolved. In this position 
chamber, affixed to each other and capable 
the liquid stands below the mouth f of the 
exit-pipe F. The chemical action is so quick 
of reversal together and with the outlet from 
the generating into the drying chamber and 
and violent that the entire space in the ma 
chine not filled with liquidis filled with spray 
the outlet from the latter into the outer air 
so arranged that in one position they are 
or watery vapor floating in the carbonic-acid 
above the level of the liquid in their respec 
gas. As the machine stood before reversal 
the liquid filled the pipe F up to the same 
tive chambers and in the reversed position 
are below that level, so as to throw gas in the level as in the rest of the compartment. Upon 
55 
?? 
65 
75 
85 
95 
CO 
35 
45 
 
2 
- 
596,622 
Figs. 2 and 3 show the same principle, but 
with three separate condensing or drying 
chambers, all arranged within (and in series 
with) the generating-chamber A. K, L, and 
Mare the three successive condensing-cham 
bers, the only inlet into each being a pipe k, l, 
and m, which delivers the stream of gas against 
a concave surface n o p. These are shown in 
cross-section in Fig. 3. The second compart 
ment K should be much the larger, as it will 
receive the bulk of the liquid. The compart 
ments K, L, and M. must be placed above the 
level at which the liquid stands before use; 
or the same result may be accomplished, as 
shown in the drawings, by leading the outlet 
pipe N above the level of the liquid before it 
enters the first drying-compartment K. 
I claim as my invention 
1. A reversible chemical fire-extinguisher 
to throw gas or liquid from the same charge 
at will, consisting of a generating-chamber 
containing an acid-receptacle, and a separate 
drying-chamber, affixed to each other in par 
allel positions andre versing together; the out 
lets from the first to the second, and from the 
second to the Outer air being placed in Such 
positions in their respective chambers that 
they will both be above the level of the liquid 
therein, in one position of the machine, and 
below that level in the reversed position; and 
the inlet into the drying-chamber being situ 
ated close to and directed against the perpen 
dicular side of the chamber. 
2. A chemical fire-extinguisher to throw 
dry gas, consisting of a generating-chamber 
and a separate drying-chamber; the outlets 
from the first to the second and from the sec 
ond to the outer air being placed in such po 
sitions in their respective chambers as to be 
above the level of the liquid therein; and the 
inlet into the drying-chamber being situated 
close to, and directed against the perpendicu 
lar side of the chamber. 
In witness whereof I have signed my name 
to this specification, in the presence of two 
subscribing witnesses, this 23d day of Sep 
tember, 1896. 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR. C. ROWE. 
MARX E. HARBY, 
SALTER STORRs CLARK. 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
75 
9 O 
95 
IO 
5 
2 ? 
25 
reversal of the machine and the evolving of 
the gas this liquid in the pipe F is forced into 
the second compartment E, but falls by grav 
ity to the end H thereof, and so cannot issue 
onto the fire. The carbonic-acid gas, laden 
with the watery vapor, follows through the 
pipe F under pressure and strikes the inte 
rior surface of the compartment E forcibly. 
This forcible directing of the stream against 
a solid surface has the effect of separating 
the Watery vapor from the gas, the particles 
of Water or liquid clinging to the surface and 
dropping thence by gravity to the bottom H 
(top before reversal) of the chamber E, while 
the gas under the pressure passes on to the 
exit. The first discharge, being of liquid, 
completely wets the surface opposite the end 
g of the pipe F, and thereafter all the parti 
cles of moisture are forced by the blast against 
this wet surface and, uniting with the body 
of liquid there, run off into the receiver or 
pocket by gravity. The second compartment 
not only serves as a comparatively quiet place 
away from the generating-chamber, where 
this depositing of the particles of vapor may 
go on, but it also serves as a receptacle or 
pocket, as it were, for holding the condensed 
(collected) vapor as well as the liquid dis 
charged at the start from the pipe F and pre 
venting any of it reaching the flames. 
The same machine may be used as a wet 
extinguisher, delivering combined gas and 
Water by simply reversing it (turning it top 
end up again) after the acid has run out of 
the bottle B. The end f of the pipe. F then 
again comes below the surface of the liquid, 
and it is liquid-charged with the gas, which 
is forced through the pipe F and the com 
partment E to the outlet G. Thus if after 
putting out a fire on a switchboard there is 
some of the charge left the same machine 
may be reversed and used elsewhere om an 
ordinary fire the same as other extinguishers; 
or by the same process the entire charge may 
be used upon an ordinary fire, throwing the 
liquid charged with gas, as in the case of ex 
tinguishers now in use. 
It is evident that a third or fourth condens 
ing-chamber may be used to extract more of 
the vapor, if desired. Different degrees of 
dryness are essential for different situations. 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596722.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 596,722. 
 
P. SCHINEIDER 
SWING, 
Patented Jan. 4, 1898. 
E. 
Witnesses, 
4/6; Z. . 
Af. (f 7. 
A4e 2% 4,c411-exedes- inventor. 
By A au-114-1461. p/4. Attorney. 
vie 4, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PIIILLIP scHNEIDER, OF BUFFALO, NEW YORK. 
SWING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,722, dated January 4, 1898. 
Application filed July 20, 1897, Serial No. 645,291. (No model.) 
Y 
O 
m 
fo all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PHILLIP SCHNEIDER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Buf 
falo, in the county of Erie and State of New 
York, have inyented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Swings, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
simple and convenient portable swing for 
children that can be quickly and securely put 
up for use in a doorway of a room, and as 
readly taken down when required and hav 
ing a seat and rope portion forming the swing 
noroper that can instantly be detached and 
inung up to a hook at one side of the device, 
so as to be out of the way of persons passing 
in or out of the door, all of which will be fully 
and clearly hereinafter described and claimed, 
ference being had to the accompanying 
rawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a detached side eleva 
tion of one of the swing-supporting hooks. 
Fig. 2 represents a front elevation of a door 
casing, showing my improved swing secured 
therein. Fig. 3 also represents a front eleva 
tion of a door-casing, showing the swing re 
moved from the swing-supporting bar and 
hung up to one side out of the way. Fig. 4 
represents a front elevation showing a modi 
fication of one of the swing-supporting hooks. 
Fig. 5 represents a side elevation of the same, 
showing the modified construction. Fig. 6 
represents an enlarged sectional elevation of 
the adjustable swing-supporting bar. 
Referring to the drawings for the details 
of the construction, the adjustable swing-sup 
porting bar consists of three telescoping parts 
1, 2, and 1. The parts 1 and 1 are made, 
preferably, of steel tubing, but any suitable 
material may be used. The outer end of 
each is provided with a supporting or abut 
ting block 3. The outside of the blocks are 
provided with a thin layer of elastic material 
4, india-rubber preferred. The object of the 
elastic covering of these supporting-blocks is 
to prevent injury to the door-casing between 
which the device is secured, as will appear. 
fartheron. These blocks may be made either 
square, round, or of any suitable shape. 
Each tubular portion 1 and 1" is provided 
with a reduced portion or groove 5, produced 
... by means of any well-known compressing-die 
for forcing in a groove around the tube and 
at the same time producing a corresponding 
inwardly-extending ring 6 on the inside of the 
tube, thereby reducing its inside diameter at 
that point, so that a fine internal screw-thread 
may be cut in it. (See Fig. 6, where this is 
shown.) 
In each of the grooves 5 is fitted a ring por 
tion 7 of a hook 8. (See Fig. 1.) These por 
tions 7 are pushed over the tubes 1 and 1 
until they pass over and spring into the 
grooves 5, and are thus fitted in place, so they 
can swing easily thereon without danger of 
moving sidewise. 
The center bar 2 is provided with a screw 
portion at each end, the screw portion 9 be 
ing a left-hand screw and the screw portion 
10 a right-handscrew. These screwportions 
9 and 10 are adapted to operate in the inter 
nal screw-threaded portions 6 in the tubular 
portions 1 and 18. The central bar 2 is also 
provided with a handle 11, by which it is 
turned. 
The swing is put up by placing the sup 
porting-bar between the door-casings, as in 
Fig. 2, and then turning the handle 11 until 
it is sufficiently tightened in place. 
To se 
cure the swing in place to the supporting-bar, 
all that is required is to put the looped ends 
12 of the swing-cords 1313 over the hooks 8, 
as in Fig. 2. 
The seat 14 is attached to the swing-cords 
in the usual way. 
15 represents a back-supporting cord, and 
the transverse cord 16 is connected by loops 
17 to the cords 13, so as to be capable of be 
ing moved up or down in front of a child to 
keep it from falling. 
In the modified construction of the support 
ing-rings shown in Figs. 4 and 5the ring por 
tion 7 is formed so that it can spring apart 
sufficiently to allow it to be passed over the 
tubular portions 1 or 1 and then spring into 
the groove 6, after which it can be rigidly se 
The 
- cured by a rivet 17 or its equivalent. 
hook portion 7 is made in the form of a solid 
ring 8. (See Fig. 5.) In this case the ends 
of the swing-ropes would have to be passed 
through the rings 8 and then tied. This con 
struction can be used when greater strength 
is required. 
When the swing is not in use and it is not 
- 
, a 
. 
25 
35. 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
596,722 
desirable to remove it from the doorway al 
together, it can be removed from the support 
ing-bar and hung upon a hook 18, substan 
tially as shown in Fig. 3. 
I claim as my invention 
In a child's swing adapted to fit in a door 
way, the combination with the swing of two 
end-supporting bars, each provided with end 
abutting portions and one having a reduced 
portion with a right-hand internal screw 
thread and the other a reduced portion with 
a left-hand internal screw-thread, a central 
O 
tightening-bar having right and left hand 
screw ends adapted to engage with the inter 
nal screw-threads in the end-supporting bars, 
and two portions each provided with a circu 
lar spring portion adapted to be sprung over 
the end bars and seated around the reduced. 
portions and having hooks to support the 
swing-ropes, as above set forth. 
PHILLIP SCHNEIDER. 
Witnesses: 
G. A. NEUBAUER, 
JAMES SANGSTER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596822.txt	(No Model.) 
J. McINTYRE, 
APPARATUS FOR INCREASING EFFICIENC 
No. 596,822. 
Y OF COMPRESSED AIR, 
Patented Jan. 4, 1898. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
?? 
N ???? 
2 
s 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES 
????. (e 
//, /ENTOR 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
J OLIN MICINTYRE, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW J ERSEY. 
APPARATUS FOR INCREASING EFFICIENCY OF COMPRESSED AR, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,822, dated January 4, 1898. 
Application filed December 30, 1895, Serial No. 573,777, (No mode.) 
To all it fi???, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN MCINTYRE, of Jer 
sey City, in the county of Hudson and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and 
Improved Apparatus for Increasing the Effi 
ciency of Compressed Air, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of the invention is to provide 
a new and improved apparatus for treating 
compressed air to increase its efficiency in a 
Very simple and economical manner and to 
'ender it more efficient and serviceable for 
Work as a motive agent in a compressed-air 
Inotor. 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
details and combinations of the same, as will 
be fully described hereinafter and then point 
ed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a sectional side elevation of the 
improved apparatus, and Figs. 2 and 3 are 
Similar views of modified forms of the same. 
In apparatus for heating compressed air as 
heretofore practiced the compressed air pre 
paratory to its entering the motor is passed 
through water heated by external means. It 
has been found that this method for heating 
the Water is rather expensive in comparison 
to the results obtained, and the apparatus 
used for the purpose was of a cumbersome 
Complex construction, and hence not well 
adapted and impracticable for compressed 
air motors employed for propelling street-cars 
and for other purposes where space is very 
limited. Now with my apparatus, presently 
to be described in detail, I am enabled to in 
crease the efficiency of the compressed air to 
a considerable extent at a comparatively low 
cost and can simplify the apparatus to ren 
der it very serviceable and practicable for the 
intended work. 
The apparatus shown in Fig. 1 is provided 
With a suitably-constructed casing A, in the 
top of which is a combustion-chamber B and 
a vapor-chamber C, separated one from the 
other by a condensing liquid D, the level of 
which defines the bottoms of said chambers. 
The combustion-chamber is sealed by the liq 
uid D, preferably water, and a combustible 
gas is burned in this closed chamber above 
and in the presence of, on, and above the liq 
uid, the latter being free to rise and fall in 
the said chamber B, according to the pres 
sure therein. The efficient fluid, which forms 
the motive agent for the motor, generated 
and passing into the vapor-chamber, is passed 
for consumption by a pipe F to the engine or 
The liquid fuel 
other motor to be driven. 
(oil or a gas) and the compressed air for form 
ing the combustible gas passes into the com 
bustion - chamber B by means of a pipe G, 
which extends up through the botton of the 
casing A, as is plainly shown in the drawings, 
the upper end of Said pipe G being normally 
closed by a ball-valve II, held within a per 
forated nozzle I, through which the liquid 
fuel and compressed air pass, minutely di 
vided, into the combustion-chamber B to form 
a combustible gas to be burned in the said 
chamber. 
The upper end of the pipe G and its nozzle 
I are inclosed within a tube J, extending up 
Wardly from the bottom of the casing A to 
within a short distance of the top of the com 
bustion-chamber B, and in this tube J, and 
near the lower end thereof, is formed a port 
J to permit the condensing liquid D under 
normal conditions to stand at the same leyel 
in the tube J as in the chambers B and C. 
The liquid fuel passes into the pipe G at 
the outside of the casing A through a pipe R, 
leading from the bottom of a jacket A', formed 
on the casing A and connected by an oil-sup 
ply pipe K' with an overhead tank contain 
ing the oil or similar liquid fuel. A pipe R. 
connects the tank with the pipe G, so that 
the same pressure is maintained in the tank 
and pipe G to insure a gravity flow of the 
oil through the jacket A' and pipe K to the 
pipe G. As the casing A is heated to a con 
siderable extent, the liquid fuel in passing 
through the jacket A will be vaporized and 
pass in this state to the pipe G. The lower 
end of the latter is connected by a pipe L with 
a second jacket A, arranged on the casing A 
on the opposite side to that on which the 
jacket A' is located. The upper end of this 
jacket A* is connected by a pipe L with an 
air- compressor or other suitable source of 
compressed-air supply. 
Into the casing Adischarges a water-supply 
2 ? 
45 
50 
55 
?? 
75 
90 
95 
OC) 
 
2 
596,822 
7 ? 
? ? 
2 ? 
25. 
35 
45 
55 
pipe N, as indicated in the drawings, and 
this pipe N connects with an overhead water 
supply in which a pressure is maintained 
equal to the pressure in the chamber C by 
means of a pipe N', leading from said chamber 
to the said water-supply tank. By the ar 
rangement described the water as well as the 
oil is fed by gravitation. 
Adjacent to the combustion-chamber B is 
arranged an igniting-chamber O, adapted to 
connect by a passage O' with said combustion 
chamber, the passage being normally closed 
by a valve P, having its stem P' fitted to slide 
in the casing A, the valve-stem being pressed 
on by a spring P, so as to hold said valve P 
normally to its seat. Within the igniting 
chamber O are arranged two electrodes Q, 
supported in a block R., of glass or other suit 
able insulating material, the electrodes being 
connected with a suitable source of electricity 
to insure a spark between the inner ends of 
the electrodes whenever desired. A small 
discharge or vent port O' leads from the cham 
ber O to the outside to permit the products 
of combustion to escape from said chamber 
O after the valve P is closed, as hereinafter 
more fully described. 
The operation is as follows: In starting the 
apparatus the casing A is filled with a suffi 
cient quantity of a condensing liquid D, pref 
erably hot Water, and then communication is 
made between the source of compressed air 
and the chamber B by opening a valve in the 
pipe L'. The compressed air passes from the 
chamber B by Way of the condensing liquid to 
the chamber C to equalize and continue the 
pressure in both chambers. The motor is 
now started by opening a valve in the supply 
pipe F to establish communication between 
the motor and motive vapor-chamber C, and 
when the motor is working then the liquid 
fuel or gas is turned on to cause a mixture of 
the compressed air with the vaporized gas and 
form an inflammable and combustible gas 
which can be ignited at any time while the 
motor is running by opening the valve P to 
permit an ignition of the gas by the spark in 
the igniting-chamber O. The valve P closes 
on the ignition of the charge in the combus 
tion-chamber B and the gaseous products of 
combustion pass downwardly in the chamber 
B and then upwardly through the condensing 
liquid D to finally rise and pass into the vapor 
chamber C. The motive agent thus produced 
passes from the vapor-chamber C by the pipe 
F to the motor to drive the same. The stop 
page of the motor stops the combustion by 
stopping the Supply of compressed air. To 
resume Operations, it is only necessary to start 
the motor and then ignite the gas. At all 
times the motor must be working before igni 
tion can take place. 
By the arrangement described the burning 
of the combustible charge takes place in a 
closed chamber and above the level and in 
the presence of the entire level of the con 
densing liquid in the combustion-chamber, 
and the gaseous products of combustion, in 
order to reach the vapor-chamber, must pass 
downward in the chamber Band then upward 
through the liquid D to the chamber C. It is 
understood that the condensing liquid forms, 
with the side wall3 of the combustion-cham 
ber, a liquid seal for the latter and a large 
area of level of the condensing liquid is pres 
ent when the combustible charge is burning, 
and the gaseous products, under ordinary 
pressure in the combustion and vapor cham 
bers, pass into and through the liquid with 
out disturbing the level of the liquid in the 
chamber C to a great extent, and the columns 
of liquid are made long enough to allow of a 
rise or fall to counterbalance any variation of 
pressure that can occur in the chambers and 
to assure the condensing liquid being ever 
present in the combustion-chamber. 
The area of the motor-supply pipe Fis con 
siderably less than the area of the condens 
ing liquid in either chamber B. or C, so that 
the products of combustion in chamber B 
are given ample area to reach the vapor-cham 
ber C slowly. Therefore the velocity of the 
motive agent passing through the pipe F to 
the motor is relatively higher than the ve 
locity of the products of combustion through 
Thus by giving the 
the condensing liquid. 
products of combustion more time while pass 
ing from the chamber B through the condens 
ing liquid for reaching the chamber C and the 
pipe Fit is evident that a more perfect mix 
ing, combustion, and cleansing of the gases 
is obtained. 
Now it will be seen that by this method of 
combustion and condensation heat unitS. in 
the liquid fuel are utilized to a maximum de 
gree, as the hot products of combustion have 
to travel downward in the chamber B and 
then upward through the condensing liquid 
to reach the chamber C, and they are given 
sufficient time and space for perfect combus 
tion and a large area of condensing liquid in 
which to condense and cleanse themselves. 
The fluid forming the motive agent and pro 
duced in the manner described and passed to 
the motor by pipe F is approximately of the 
same volume as the compressed air originally 
passed into the chamber B, but its heat units 
and its moisture are increased to a consider 
able extent at the comparatively low expense 
of a small amount of oil or gas used for the 
heating. 
It will further be seen that having the ignit 
ing-chamber O separated from the combus 
tion-chamber B the electrodes are protected 
from hurtful effects of the flame, and short 
circuiting the said electrodes by possible 
moisture in the gas to be ignited is entirely 
prevented. It is understood that the spark 
is first produced between the electrodes and 
then the valve P is opened for a time suffi 
cient to permit ignition of the gas by the 
spark. The burned gas in the chamber O can 
readily pass through the vent-opening O' to 
the outside, and the chamber O is a normally 
- 
90 
95. 
OO. . . 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
596,822 
3. 
pressureless, isolated, dry chamber and per 
mits of igniting moist inflammable gas 
brought in contact with the spark between 
the electrodes Q, connected with an ordinary 
electric battery. If moist gas is in constant 
contact with the electrodes, the latter will not 
spark, but producing the spark first then the 
latter will readily ignite the moist gas. 
It will be understood that the isolating of 
the electrodes and creating the spark in a dry, 
separate, and normally pressureless chamber 
and then bringing the gas in contact with the 
spark is a valuable feature of my invention. 
In the apparatus shown in Fig. 2 the jack 
ets of the casing A', as well as the tube J, are 
entirely dispensed with, and the nozzle I of 
the pipe G' and containing the ball-valve K' 
extends into the combustion - chamber B 
above the level of the liquid D' contained in 
the casing A8 and defining the bottom for the 
combustion-chamber Band the vapor-cham 
ber C". From the latter leads a pipe F to the 
motor for carrying off the motive agent. The 
casing is provided in its bottom with a water 
supply pipe N and at its top with a pressure 
pipe N, leading to the tank containing the 
water-supply. The oil-supply pipe IX leads 
into the pipe G', supporting the nozzle I and 
valve K", and from the pipe G leads the pipe 
K to the oil-tank for equalizing the pressure 
therein. An air-supply pipe L* connects with 
the lower end of the pipe G', as shown. The 
igniting-chamber O is adapted to be con 
nected with the combustion-chamber Bby a 
cock P, adapted to be turned, so as to estab 
lish communication between the chambers O 
and B whenever it is desired to ignite the 
gaseous combustible charge contained in the 
chamber B. The electrodes Q are held in 
insulated blocks R' and are connected with a 
suitable source of electricity to form a spark 
in the chamber O for igniting the gas. A 
vent-cock O' is connected with the chamber 
O to carry of the burned gases remaining in 
said chamber when the cock F is shut. The 
operation is the same as previously described 
in reference to Fig. 1. 
The apparatus shown in Fig. 3 is provided 
with a combustion-chamber comprising two 
chambers B8 and B, connected with each 
other by a pipe B, as small as practicable for 
the work to be done by the motor, the cham 
ber B' receiving the charge and the chamber 
B having its bottom defined by the level of 
the condensing liquid D, contained in the 
casing A', so that the charge ignited in the 
chamber 38 burns in both chambers B8 and 
B and the pipe B and the gaseous products 
of combustion pass through the liquid D to 
The vapor 
chamber Cis provided with a pipe E for car 
rying off the motive agent to the motor, and 
the supply-pipe N for the condensing liquid 
leads into said chamber, and a pipe N leads 
therefrom to the tank containing the condens 
ing liquid to equalize the pressure in the tank 
and the chamber C and insure a gravity flow 
of the condensing liquid. The charge of oil 
and compressed air passes through the pipe 
G into an annular chamber B, formed in the 
chamber B, said annular chamber B' being 
connected by a series of apertures B with 
the interior of the chamber B, so that the 
mixture passes through said apertures B in 
a finely-divided state to the chamber B. By 
this arrangement the separate nozzle I(shown 
in Figs. land 2) can be dispensed with. The 
pipe G is connected with an air-supply pipe 
L8 and with an oil-supply pipe K, and from 
the said pipe G8 leads a pressure-pipe K to 
the oil-tank to equalize the pressure therein. 
The igniting-chamber O is here formed in an 
insulated block R, as is plainly shown in the 
drawings, and the electrodes Q are held in 
the block R (which may be in two parts) and 
are connected with a suitable source of elec 
tricity, and said block R is secured in the 
shell of an ordinary one-way cock P, adapted 
to be turned like an ordinary One-Way cock, 
to open or close the igniting-chamber O to 
the combustion-chamber B. Now it will be 
seen that the gas in the chambers BB and 
pipe B will be ignited by the spark from the 
electrodes Q in the ignition-chamber O when 
the cock P is turned open to the combustion 
chamber B8. The cock is shut as Soon as ig 
nition occurs and burned gas in the ignition 
chamber escapes by the vent-hole O. The 
gaseous products of combustion pass by the 
pipe B into the chamber B", from which the 
gaseous products pass through the liquid D' 
to the vapor-chamber C. Thus the action 
of the gaseous products relative to the con 
densing liquid D* is exactly the same as above 
described in reference to Figs. 1 and 2. 
It is understood that one of the principal 
features of my invention consists in burning 
the gas in the presence of a largebody of con 
densing liquid and passing the gaseous prod 
ucts of the combustion under pressure first 
downwardly in the chamber B and then up 
wardly through the condensing sealing liq 
uid to a vapor-chamber without permanent 
or serious displacement of Said Sealing liquid. 
It is further understood that the igniting 
device for the ignition of the charge in the 
combustion-chamber formas a Very important 
feature of my invention, as the said device 
can be readily manipulated whenever it is 
desired to start the combustion. 
It is understood that each apparatus is pro 
vided with the usual safety-valve, pressure 
gage, water-gage, stop-valve, blow-off, Scum 
cocks, and other mountings usually fitted to 
an ordinary steam-boiler. It is preferable to 
have two valves on the oil-supply pipes and 
the water-supply pipe, one valve to be used 
as a regulator for the liquid passing through 
the pipe and the otherfor completely turning 
the supply on or off. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to Secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. An apparatus of the class described, 
o 
75 
9 O 
95 
do 
Io5 
? ?. ? 
I25 
II. ? 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 
?? reach the vapor-chamber C. 
35 
O 
45 
trodes in the said igniting-chamber and adapt: 
ed to spark and ignite the moist gas admitted 
into the igniting-chamber through the valved 
connection, the products of combustionpa SS 
ing through the liquid, to reach the said va 
por-chamber, and an outlet-pipe for the said 
vapor-chamber, to connect with the motor, 
substantially as shown and described. 
4. An apparatus of the class described. 
comprising a casing, a tube extending from 
the bottom of the said casing upwardly nearly 
to its top, a second tube extending from the 
top of the casing down, over and below the 
upper end of the said first tube forming a 
combustion - chamber, an ignition-chamber 
connected with the said combustion-chamber, 
a nozzle arranged within the tube leading 
from the bottom of the casing, and air and 
fuel Supply pipes in connection with the said 
nozzle, substantially as shown and described. 
5. An apparatus of the class described. 
comprising a casing inclosing a combustion. 
chamber and provided with a jacket for the 
oil or fuel and with a jacket for the com 
pressed air, supply-pipes leading to the said 
jackets, a nozzle by which to deliver the air 
and fuelto the combustion-chamber, and con 
nections between the said nozzle and the air 
and fuel jackets, substantially as shown and 
described. 
JOHN MCINTYERE. 
4 
596,822 
comprising a casing adapted to contain the 
condensing liquid, a tube extending into the 
condensing liquid to form a combustion 
chamber within the tube and a Vapor-cham 
ber around the tube, the bottoms of both 
chambers being formed by the condensing 
liquid, means for supplying the said combus 
tion-chamber with a combustible gas, and an 
igniting device for the said gas in the com 
bustion-chamber, the products of combustion 
passing through the liquid to reach the said 
vapor-chamber, substantially as shown and 
described. 
2. An apparatus of the class described, 
comprising a closed casing adapted to Con 
tain the condensing liquid, a tube extending 
into the said casing and into the liquid con 
tained therein to form a combustion-chamber 
within the tube and a vapor-chamber around 
the tube, both chambers having their bot 
toms formed by the said condensing liquid, 
a nozzle for supplying the air and fuel to the 
said combustion-chamber, air and fuel pipes 
for the said nozzle, and an igniting-chamber 
having a valved connection with the said 
combustion-chamber, substantially as shown 
and described. 
3. An apparatus of the class described, 
provided with a combustion-chamber and a 
vapor-chamber, both chambers having their 
bottoms in free communication with the con 
densing liquid extending into the said cham 
bers, a valved igniting-chamber connected 
with the top of the combustion-chamber,elec 
25 
 
Witnesses: 
THEO. G. IOSTER, 
JNO. M. RITTER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US596922.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 596,922. 
W. J. THOMPSON, 
PICKER STAFF CAMP. 
Patented Jan. 4, 1898. 
 
  
 
  
  
S. % 
O 
 
-4%-2261->e 3y fits Afforgeys, 
///zaz A 7%aswu. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM J. THOMPSON, OF HAW RIVER, NORTH CAROLINA. 
PCKER-STAFF CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 596,922, dated January 4, 1898. 
Application filed July 28, 1897, Serial No. 646,224, (No model.) 
C 
To all, whom, it may concert: 
Beitknown that I, WILLIAM J. THOMPSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Haw 
River, in the county of Alamance and State 
5 of North Carolina, have invented a new and 
useful Picker-Staff Clamp, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
clamps for holding the picker-rod on the lay 
of a loom; and the object that I have in view 
is to provide a simple and efficient clamp by 
which the picker-rod is securely held in place 
without exposing or subjecting it to the fric 
tion and wear due to bringing the clamping 
screw in direct engagement with the picker 
rod. 
It is well known by those skilled in the art 
that the ordinary method of holding the pick 
er-rod in place by arranging a binding-screw 
to impinge or bear directly on the rod is open 
to objection in that the screw forms a cavity 
in the rod which requires the rod to be turned 
to give to the binding-screw a fresh hold, the 
consequence of which is that the end of the 
rod is in course of time worn and mutilated 
to such an extent as to cause the rod to break 
in two and necessitate its replacement. Iaim 
to overcome these objections by the provision 
of a simple form of clamp which may be easily 
attached to the lay of the loom, and which is 
constructed in a novel manner to grip and 
hold the picker-rod tightly and securely in 
place. 
To the accomplishment of these ends my 
invention consists in the novel construction 
and arrangement of parts, which will be here 
inafter fully described and claimed. 
To enable others to understand my inven 
tion, I have illustrated the preferred embodi 
ment thereof in the accompanying drawings, 
forming a part of this specification, and in 
which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of part of 
a lay and a picker-rod with my improved 
clamp applied thereto. Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
detail perspective view of the clamp by which 
the picker-rod may be attached to and held 
tightly on the lay. Fig. 3 is a vertical longi 
tudinal sectional view through the clamp. 
Like numerals of reference denote corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
ings, referring to which 
1 designates a portion of the lay, and 2 is 
the picker-rod, of an ordinary loom. With 
these elements I have associated my improved 
means for attaching and holding the picker 
rod to the lay, and said attaching and hold 
ing means consists of the clamp shown in its 
entirety by the reference-numeral 3. 
My clamp 3 consists of the two members or 
sections 45, an eye-formed or bifurcated bolt 
6, provided on one side of the fixed member 
4, and an attaching-bolt 7, projecting from 
the other side or face of the member 4 of said 
clamp. The members 45 constitute the jaws 
of the clamp by which the picker-rod is held 
securely in place within the clamp, and the 
bolt 7 provides the means for attaching the 
clamp itself rigidly to the lay 1. The inner 
working face of the fixed jaw or member 4 of 
the clamp is flat, except at the central por 
tion thereof, where the jaw is provided with 
a curved groove or channel 8. The bolt 6 is 
straight for a part of its length, but the inner 
part of the bolt 6 is formed with a bifurcated 
part which joins with the fixed jaw or mem 
ber 4 of the clamp, said forked part of the 
bolt 6 being coincident with the groove or 
channel 8 to form there with an eye or pas 
sage for the reception of one end of the picker 
rod 2. The movable member or jaw 5 of the 
clamp is formed with a recess 9, which ter 
minates in an aperture or orifice 10, and the 
inner edge or face of said movable jaw or 
member has grooves or channels intersected 
by the recess 9, said grooves or channels be 
ing indicated by the numerals 11 11. This 
construction of the movable jaw or member 
5 enables it to be fitted on the bolt 6, so as to 
receive within its recess 9 the forked part of 
the bolt and to have the straight shank of 
the bolt 6 pass through the orifice or aperture 
10, whereby a nut 12 may be screwed on the 
protruding end of the bolt 6 to force the mov 
able member or jaw 5 tightly upon the picker 
rod to clamp the picker-rod between the two 
jaWS or members 4 5 of the clamp. 
My clamp is applied bypassing the attach 
ing-bolt 7 through an opening in the lay 
and adjusting the nut 13 to fasten the bolt 7 
and the clamp securely in place on the lay. 
The end of the picker-rod is passed through 
the eye formed by the fixed jaw 4 and the 
forked end of the bolt 6, and the movable jaw 
25 
30. 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
 
2 
596,922 
or member 5 is now applied to the bolt 6 and 
the nut 12 screwed in place to force the mov 
able jaw toward the fixed jaw. The recessed 
or grooved faces of the jaws receive the 
picker-rod, and said faces of the jaws serve 
to bind the picker-rod tightly in position be 
tween them and hold the same securely in 
place. These jaws or members provide broad 
bearing-Surfaces to grip the picker-rod to 
avoid cutting or Wearing into the same and 
to grip the picker-rod securely to sustain it 
in position. 
While I have shown and described myim 
proved clamp as especially adapted for serv 
ice in holding in place the picker-rod of a 
loom, I would have it understood that I do 
not strictly confine myself to this precise use 
of the clamp, because the device may be used 
advantageously in other relations where it 
is desired to hold a rod or equivalent device 
in place, nor do I limit myself to the precise 
form and proportion of parts herein shown 
and described as the preferred embodiment 
of my invention, because it is evident that 
changes may be made therein by a skilled 
mechanic without departing from the spirit 
or sacrificing the advantages of my invention. 
It will be observed that the movable jaw 
embraces the forked part of the bolt or shank 
6, to be held thereby against rotation on the 
bolt or shank 6, and that the two jaws are ad 
justed so that they do not abut against each 
other, thus leaving a space between the two 
jaws to enable them to act efficiently in grip 
ping the picker-rod or its equivalent. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination with a lay, and a picker 
rod, of the rigid clamp-jaw having a bolt which 
is attached to the lay, an eye-formed bolt rigid 
with said clamp-jaw and protruding from the 
working face thereof, a movable clamp-jaw 
fitted to the eye-formed part of the last-named 
bolt to be held against turning thereon and 45 
provided with duplex bearing-faces adapted 
to impinge the picker-rod on opposite sides 
of the point where said rod passes through 
the eye of the bolt, and a binding-nut fitted 
on the projecting bolt and bearing against 
the movable jaw, substantially as described. 
2. In a clamp, the fixed jaw having a recess 
in its working face, and a forked bolt or shank 
united to the fixed jaw to have its space be 
tween the fork coincident with the recess in 
said jaw, combined with a movable, recessed 
jaw fitted to the bolt or shank to embrace the 
forked part thereof, and a nut screwed on the 
bolt or shank and bearing against the mov 
able jaw, as and for the purposes described. 
3. A clamp comprising a fixed jaw having, 
on one side, a projecting attaching-bolt, and 
a recess or groove in its working face, a forked 
shank or bolt united with the fixed jaw to 
have the space between its forked part coin 
cident with the recess or groove therein, a 
movable jaw fitted on the shank or bolt and 
recessed to fit the forked part of the shank, 
and forming the duplex bearing-faces to en 
gage with an object adjusted between said 
jaws, and a nut, as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM J. THOMIPSON. 
Witnesses: 
J. M. MAY, 
W. H. BROWN. 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597022.txt	(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
C. E. RICE, 
FIREMAN'S APPARATUS FOR HANDLINGLADDERS AT FIRES. 
No. 597,022. 
Patented Jan. 11, 1898. 
 
, 
D ID 
|| 
Witnesses. " . 
27..." 
iweto. 
6%arzer 6 Vice 
Ze 
N Attorney, 
 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
FIREMAN'S APPARATUS FOR, HANDLING LADDERS AT FIRES, 
C, E, RICE, 
No. 597,022, 
Patented Jan. 1, 1898. 
 
VVitnesses. 
427 (2% 
 
veto. 
Ca?ale 7: 
N. Attorney. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES E. RICE, OF LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS. 
FIRE MANS APPARATUS FOR HAND LN G. AD DERS AT FRES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,022, dated January 11, 1898. 
Application filed February 1, 1897, Serial No, 621,498, (No model.) 
To all, who, it inctly concern. 
Beitknown that I, CHARLES E. RICE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Little Rock, in the county of Pulaski and 
State of Arkansas, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Firemens Ap 
paratus for Handling Ladders at Fires; and 
I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to letters of reference marked there 
on, which form a part of this specification. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is an elevation of 
a building, showing my invention applied 
thereto and not in use. Fig. 2 is a similar 
view of the same in use. Figs. 3 and 4 are 
detail views of one of the drums and its 
bracket, and Fig. 5 is a detail view showing 
the cap and bearing at the upper end of the 
ladder. 
This invention is designed to provide means 
of improved character for hoisting ladders 
upon buildings in case of fire and for holding 
and staying the same after they are hoisted 
in such a manner that they may be readily 
moved along the side of the building from 
window to window or to any desired point, 
while at the same time it is impossible for 
them to move or slip accidentally. 
It is also designed to provide means of this 
character which can be used in connection 
with the fire-ladders now in general use with 
out material change therein. 
It is also designed to provide means which 
will not disfigure the buildings to which they 
are applied by reason of their unsightly char 
acter. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists in the novel construction and combi 
nation of parts, all as hereinafter described, 
and pointed out in the appended claims. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the letter A designates the side of a building 
to which I have shown my invention applied. 
BB designate two sheaves or pulleys which 
are journaled, respectively, in brackets C C, 
permanently secured to the building, one near 
each side thereof and a short distance below 
the cornice. 
DD designate two brackets which are fasa 
tened to the lower portion of the building, 
one below and substantially in line with each 
of the said sheaves or pulleys. These brack 
ets may be of any suitable form or construc 
tion-such, for instance, as that shown in the 
drawings, wherein they consist each of a bi 
furcated casting hinged to the wall of the 
building at d and provided at each side with 
a slot d", extending into the front edge. 
D' ID' designate two similar drums whose 
shafts d are in the construction shown pro 
vided with bearing-blocks D', which are fit 
ted to slide in the said slots d'. Each of said 
drums or its shaft is provided with a ratchet 
wheel E, which is arraiged to be engaged by 
a pawl E to prevent backward rotation. 
G. G. designate two cables which are passed 
up and over the respective pulleys B B, and 
whose ends when not in use are secured to 
the brackets D, being fastened by means of 
padlocks F or other suitable locks, for the 
purpose of preventing them from being tam 
pered with by boys or others. One end of 
each cable also has a Snap-hook I, or other 
suitable fastening device. 
K designates a ladder, which in practice 
may be of any suitable character or construc 
tion, such as those now in use by hook-and 
ladder companies, with the addition thereto 
at its upper end portion of two eyes or rings 
L or their equivalent, one at each side. I 
prefer, however, that these eyes or rings in 
stead of being secured in the ladder proper 
shall be carried by a metal cap M, such as 
shown in Fig. 5. This cap is of curved form 
to hold the ladder properly away from the 
wall of the building and is formed with 
socket portions N, which fit over the upper 
end portion of the ladder proper and are sea 
cured by a bolt O or other suitable fasten 
ing device. That end of the cap which bears 
against the wall of the building has journaled 
therein two caster-wheels P. 
The sheaves B, the brackets C and D, and 
the ropes or cables G. G constitute the per 
manent equipment of the building. The lad 
der, together with the drums, is furnished by 
the fire or hook-and-ladder companies, it be 
ing intended that all the brackets D used in 
one city or two shall be of standard charac 
ter, so that the same drums will fit any of 
them, 
IS 
25 
45 
55 
75 
95 
Od 
 
2 
597,022 
jo 
) s 
In case of fire assoon as the ladder-truckar- the building to which it is applied and in 
washing the windows thereof. 
It can also be 
used for hoisting other apparatus besides lad 
ders, such as escape baskets or carriages. 
Another important feature of the invention 
is that it does not afford means whereby bur 
glars may enter the building. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 5 
5 
Patent, is 
1. The herein - described fireman's appa 
ratus, comprising the two upper sheaves or 
pulleys applied to the upper portion of One 
side of a building at points near opposite cor 
ners thereof, a pair of Winding-drums jour 
naled to the building at corresponding points 
near the ground, a pair of ropes or cables, 
one of which is passed up and over each of 
the said sheaves or pulleys and thence back 
to the respective winding-drum, and an ex 
tensible ladder having means whereby the 
free ends of said ropes or cables may be at 
tached thereto, and provided also at its up 
per end with a swiveled antifriction-bear 
ing, substantially as and for the purpose de 
scribed. 
2. The herein - described fireman's appa 
ratus, the same comprising a pair of sheaves 
or pulleys applied to the upper portion of a 
building near the cornice and also near op 
posite sides thereof, a pair of cables passed 
respectively over the said sheaves or pulleys, a 
pair of brackets secured to the building near 
the ground, drums adapted to be journaled in 
the said brackets, means for Securing andlock 
ing the ends of said cables when not in use, 
and means whereby one end of each cable 
may be attached to a ladder or other escape 
device or carrier, substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
rives the ropes or cables G are loosened from 
the brackets D, the drums D' are placed in 
the said blackets, and one end of each cable 
is made fast to its drum. The other ends of 
the cables are Snapped into the eyes or rings 
L of the ladder which is placed in position to 
be hoisted. One or more men then man each 
of the drums and quickly raise the ladder 
into the desired position. Said ladder, being 
held or stayed by the two cables, cannot slip 
in any direction, and the firemen can work 
thereon with perfect safety. By slacking 
the cable on one drum and winding on the 
opposite one the ladder may be moved from 
window to window or to any desired point to 
enable the firemen to rescue the inmates or 
to fight the fire to better advantage. The 
caster-Wheels P facilitate to a considerable 
extent the moving of the ladder both verti 
cally and transversely. 
By the arrangement above described I over 
come an objection which is frequently urged 
against those fire-escapes and ladders where 
in all the parts used, including the ladders 
proper or the escape baskets or cars, are a 
permanent fixture on the building-viz., the 
unsightliness thereof and the consequent dis 
figuration of the building. The present in 
vention does not disfigure the building to an 
objectionable extent, since the only parts 
which are permanently fixed thereto are the 
sheaves at the upper corners, the brackets at 
the lower corners, (these, being hinged, may 
be swung back against the building when not 
in use,) and the cables. Furthermore, the 
remaining parts, being in the possession of 
the companies, are protected from injury 
from exposure to the weather and may be 
kept in good condition for use. 
In point of expense it will be readily seen 
that the cost is but slight, comparatively 
Speaking, either to the fire department or to 
the owner of the building. 
I would also remark that the apparatus 
may be used to great advantage in painting 
PHILIP C. MASI, 
GEORGE. H. PARMELEE. 
CHARLES E. RICE. 
Witnesses: 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597122.txt	(No Mode.) 
 
No. 597,122, 
J. 0MWAKE. 
DUPLICATE WHIST APPARATUS, 
O 
Patented Jan, l l l898, 
s 6 
S s 
 
Z2 
 
(t 
T E. 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
2: 3 2 3 
222222 
E. 
- 
SNSSNSSNSNSNS N 
9 
Ya 
 
ge 
 
SNS 
R 
2. 
N 
e 
CNVENTOR 
B%eals; 
ATTORNEYS 
t's PECRs co. Proto-Lito. was ico. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
J OHN OMWAKE, OF CINCIN N AT I, OHIO. 
DUPLICATE-WHIST APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,122, dated January 11, 1898. 
Application filed June 15, 1897. 
To all whom it may concerto 
Be it known that I, JOHN OMWAKE, a resi 
dent of Cincinnati, Hamilton county, State of 
Ohio, have invented an Improved Duplicate 
Whist Apparatus, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to duplicate-whist ap 
paratus, and has for its object to produce 
a handy effective device for preserving the 
hands in proper shape for the duplicate play. 
To this end my invention consists in the con 
struction hereinafter set forth and claimed. 
In the drawings, Figurel is a plan view of 
an apparatus embodying my invention. Fig. 
2 is a section on line 22 thereof. Fig. 3 is a 
similar section of a modification, and Fig. 4 
is likewise a similar section of a modification. 
Referring to the drawings, it will be noted 
that the device comprises two parts, a box A 
and a cover B, hinged together edge to edge 
by hinges C. The box. A has a bottom C, 
which, as clearly shown in Fig. 2, slopes up 
ward from the ends C of the box to the mid 
die c'. At the middle of the said box, at the 
highest point of the bottom, the said bottom 
has a flat upper surface which shows in the 
This rib c is recessed with 
form of a rib a. 
finger-holes C., so that the fingers may be in 
serted below the edges of the cards. 
Each of 
the inclined sides of the bottom is divided in 
the middle by a rib a' a', so that the rib at 
and the ribs C. C. divide the box into four 
compartments having inclined bottoms, as 
clearly seen in Fig. 2, wherein the hands D, 
E, F, and G may be received. Each of these 
compartments is of sufficient size to receive 
a plurality of playing-cards, which are pre 
vented from lateral movement by the walls 
of the compartments. The cover B is pro 
vided with inclined or wedge-shaped blocks 
b'bbb, which are adapted to enter the com 
partments containing the hands when the 
box-lidis closed. These blocks may be either 
hollow or solid, as shown, and so also may the 
inclined bottom. The top is likewise pro 
vided with a ribb, which enters between the 
hands in the box, as clearly shown in Fig. 2, 
and preferably rests upon the highest part a 
of the inclined bottom of the box. The ap 
paratus is likewise provided with coperat 
ing fastening devices Cab, which coperate 
55 
Serial No, 640,867, (No model.) 
| with each other to fasten the free edges of the 
box and lid together. The top of the box fits 
down snugly upon the sides Cand the blocks 
carried by the top snugly fit the compart 
ments containing the hands. 
The modification shown in Fig. 3 is very 
similar to that shown in Fig. 1, with the ex 
ception that the central riba of the inclined 
bottom is prolonged upward, as shown, and 
the ribb is omitted, being now unnecessary. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 4 a COm 
bination of devices shown in Figs. 2 and 3 is 
In this figure the rib dis extend 
exhibited. 
ed upward, but is grooved, as at C, and a 
tongue a0 is provided on the lower face of the 
top of the box to enter this groove. 
I have found that the device is a very effi 
cient one for the purpose named and securely 
holds the hands separate until the time for 
the duplicate play. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a duplicate-whist apparatus, the coni 
bination of a box having a plurality of com- 75 
partments each provided with a stationary 
inclined bottom, means for maintaining cards 
against lateral movement in said compart 
ments, and a cover contacting with the cards 
and coperating with said box to maintain 
the cards in their proper relative position and 
against displacement therein, substantially 
as described. 
2. In a duplicate-whist apparatus, the Com 
bination of a box having one or more corn 
partments each of which is of sufficient size 
to receive a plurality of playing-cards which 
are prevented from lateral movement by the 
walls of said compartments, stationary in 
clined bottoms in each of said compartments, 
and a cover having inclined blocks adapted 
to enter the compartments to secure the hands 
in place. 
3. In a duplicate-whist apparatus, the com 
bination of a box having a plurality of Com 
partments with inclined bottoms sloping 
downward away from the middle portion of 
the box, each of said compartments being of 
sufficient size to receive a plurality of play 
ing-cards and maintain the same against lat 
eral movement, finger-recesses between com 
partments and a cover. 
85 
95 
OC 
o 
 
2 
597,122 
arranged to come opposite the highest portion 
of the bottom of the box, substantially as de 
scribed. 
JOHN OMWAKE. 
Witnesses: 
F. D. JAMISON, 
S. S. SANGUINETTE. 
4. In a duplicate-whist apparatus, the com 
bination of a box having a plurality of com 
partments with inclined bottoms sloping 
downward from the middle portion of the box, 
divisions between the compartments and a 
cover provided with inclined blocks for en 
tering the said compartments and a rib as b 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597223.txt	(No Model.) 
T. H. ROBERTS, 
AIR COMPRESSOR, 
2. Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 597,223, 
Patented Jan, ll 898, 
 
 
 
7/ 
careece 
www.Mar 
zza 
- ya 
sizzzzzz 3. NL 
77onas/7/?oberzs, 
4. 
f AZ2/vagys. 
a 
3Rs firs C, Hhe...iics. ASN, 
 
 
T. H. ROBERTS 
AIR COMPRESSOR, 
2. Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
Patented Jan. 11, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
No. 597,223. 
 
 
Wiznesses: 
Z77/ea(or: 
77omas/7/oberzs, 
"RRS PETERs co, PHotelirio, was 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS HERBERT ROBERTS, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
A R COMPRESS OR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,223, dated January 11, 1898. 
Application filed December 14, 1896, Serial No. 615,686, (No model.) 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
40 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, THOMAS HERBERT ROB 
ERTS, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Detroit, in the county of Wayne and State 
of Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Air-Compressors, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to a new construc 
tion of air-compressor especially adapted for 
the equipment of electric cars with air-brakes; 
and to this end the invention consists in the 
novel construction, arrangement, and combi 
nation of parts whereby extreme simplicity 
and compactness are obtained, all as more 
fully hereinafter described, and shown in the 
drawings, in which 
Figure I is a side elevation, partly in verti 
cal central section, of my improved air-com 
pressor. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section thereof 
on line acac. 
A is the compressed-air tank, provided with 
lateral flanges B for supporting it in upright 
position upon suitable supports, such as the 
floor-timbers C of a car. 
D is the cylinder of the air-pump; E, the 
piston; F, the piston-rod, and G and H are 
valves seated, respectively, on the upper and 
lower end of the pump-cylinder. The valve 
G is seated by gravity and has a stuffing-box 
I for the pump-piston to pass through, and 
the valve His upheld by a spring J, supported 
by a skeleton cap K, which is screwed on the 
pump-cylinder. 
The pump-cylinder is provided midway of 
its length with a head L, in which are formed 
a series of radial air-passages M, which com 
municate at their inner ends through the an 
nular series of ports N into the air-cylinder, 
while the outer ends open into the atmos 
phere. This head is secured within the air 
tank, which to this end is formed of an upper 
and lower section, each provided with annu 
lar flanges a, between which the head is bolted 
in, the flanges being preferably formed with 
annular lips b, adapted to engage with corre 
sponding grooves in the head, all so arranged 
as to form an air-tight joint between the parts. 
The head L Supports the air-pump within 
the air-tank in the axial line thereof, and it 
- 
is provided with suitable openings c, through 
which the compartments above and below 
the head communicate. 
On top of the tank is secured a gallows 
frame O, the sides of which form vertical 
guide-bearings for the slotted head P, carried 
by the piston - rod, which latter extends. 
through and is guided in a stuffing-box d in 
the top of the air-tank. 
On top of the gallows-frame is journaled in 
suitable horizontal bearings the drive-shaft 
Q, which carries a worm R, engaging with a 
worm-wheel S on the shaft. This shaft has 
a crank-arm U, provided with a suitable 
wrist-pin V, which engages into the slotted 
head P of the piston, all so arranged as to 
impart a suitable reciprocating motion to the 
pump-piston. 
The drive-shaft Q extends on one side of 
the frame O and carries the armature of a 
revolving electric motor S of any suitable 
description, the free end of the shaft being 
supported in a bracket T, which also sup 
ports the stationary parts of the motor, all 
so arranged as to utilize the power of an elec 
tric current applied to the motor for operat 
ing the air-pump. 
It will be seen that the piston of the air 
pump alternately compresses the air in the 
opposite ends of the cylinder, and by the op 
eration of the valves G and H it is stored in 
the tank, while fresh air is constantly admit 
ted through the ports N from the atmosphere. 
It will be seen that this air-compressor is of 
an upright type which requires but very little 
floor space, practically only what is required 
for the base of the air-tank to rest on, and by 
placing the lateral supporting-flanges Babove 
the base the available space between the floor 
joist is utilized to drop the tank partly below 
the floor. Furthermore, the drive mechanism. 
is such that the pump Works without jar or 
noise, and the pump, being entirely inclosed 
within the tank, muffles the noise incidental 
to the working of air-pumps in such a manner 
that it does away entirely with the objections 
heretofore found in placing the air-pumps in 
side of cars or apartments in dwellings. 
The pump, being entirely inclosed, is dust 
proof and protected from being tampered 
with, and the necessity of keeping the parts 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
OC 
45 
 
597,223 
a stuffing-box in the tank and operated by 
drive mechanism supported on the tank. 
3. In an air-compressor, the combination of 
the air-tank forming a supporting-base, a 
pump having its cylinder provided with a web. 
bolted in between two sections of the tank and 
provided with radial air-passages from the 
outside into the pump-cylinder, a reciprocat 
ing piston having a piston - rod extending 
through a stuffing-box in the tank and drive 
mechanism supported on the tank. 
4. In an air-compressor, the combination of 
a tank or reservoir for compressed air, a pump 
cylinder inclosed within said reservoir inter 
mediate its ends and provided with air-inlet 
conduits communicating with the external air, 
movable caps for said pump-cylinder consti 
tuting the exhaust-valves thereof, a piston in 
said cylinder, and means for operating the 
piston from without the reservoir or tank, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS HERBERT ROBERTS. 
Witnesses: 
OTTO F. BARTHEL, 
A. L. HABBY. 
AO 
45 
SO 
well oiled does not create any nuisance. To 
gain ready access to the pump, a suitable hand 
hole is placed in the tank. 
For the reasons above given my air-pump 
is especially available for use on electric cars, 
dwelling-houses, offices, &c., where the de 
mand for such a compressor is constantly in 
creasing. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In an air-compressor, the combination of 
an air-tank formed of two sections, and an air 
pump secured in between the sections, said 
pump having its pump-cylinder formed with 
a supporting means fitted in and secured be 
tween the sections and provided with a series 
of air-inlet passages extending through said 
Supporting means into the pump-cylinder. 
2. In an air-compressor, the combination of 
an air-tank formed of a section, having sup 
porting-flanges, and a second section, an air 
pump having its cylinder provided with an 
apertured Web bolted in between the said sec 
tions of the tank, radial air-passages extend 
ing through the web into the pump-cylinder 
and forming an annular 'series of inlet-ports 
centrally of the pump, valves seated on the 
ends of the pump-cylinder and a reciprocating 
piston having a piston-rod extending through 
IO 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597323.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 597,323. 
A. E. MAGORIS. 
WAGINAL SYRINGE. 
Patented Jan, ll, 1898, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTHONEY E. MAGORIS, OF BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK. 
WAGINAL SYRING E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,823, dated January 11, 1898. 
Application filed April 30, 1897, Serial No. 634,541. (No model.) 
- 
To all whon, it may concern. 
Beit known that I, ANTHONEY E. MAGORIS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bing 
hamton, in the county of Broome and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Waginal Syringes; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawing, and to the letters of reference 
marked thereon, which forms a part of this 
specification. 
My invention relates to those nozzles for 
vaginal syringes provided with a drain-pipe 
leading from the vagina, for the purpose of 
carrying off the wash to any suitable recepta 
cle without wetting the clothes of the patient. 
The object of my invention is to produce 
a superior vaginal-syringe nozzle especially 
adapted for more effectually cleansing and 
removing all mucus, pus, or other substances 
which may be loose or coated upon the walls 
of the cavity treated. 
A further object of my invention is to give 
the syringe-nozzle Such a shape and construc 
tion that it will thoroughly drench and wash 
the walls of the vagina, without danger of in 
jecting a stream of medicament into the cav 
ity of the uterus, and so that it will serve the 
further purpose of a safe instrument for re 
placing a displaced uterus. A further use 
from its particular construction is that with 
it the liquid injected into the cavity can be 
retained therein by closing the drain-pipe by 
pressure, and liquid medicament is thus re 
tained in contact with the diseased surfaces 
at the pleasure of the user. 
With these purposes in view my invention 
consists in the peculiar features and combina 
tions of parts more fully described hereinaf 
ter and pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawing the letter a 
denotes a pipe, conduit, or duct bent in the 
form of a pear or U shaped loop, the ends o' 
of which are brought together to form a noz 
zle and passed through the smaller end b' of 
a funnel-shaped sleeveb, whence they pass out 
through the large end. This tube is pref 
erably made of flexible material, such as rub 
ber, having sufficient hardness to permit it to 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
55 
75 
be bent, yet being impervious to hot water, 
acids, and other cleansing elements. The 
smaller end b' of the sleeve tightly embraces 
the ends of the tubes, so that fluids cannot 
escape at that point. The conduit is divided 
into two sections c and d, the former being 
the inlet-section and the latter the outlet-sec 
The inlet-section comprises about two 
tion. 
thirds of the loop, commencing at the sleeve 
and terminating at a plug or stopper e, lo 
cated below and to the left of the curved end 
a' of the loop and serving to cut off commu 
nication between the two sections. This in 
let-section is provided with numerous small 
perforations through which the fluid medica 
ment is projected from all sides against the 
inner, walls of the vagina or the parts to be 
treated, after which it escapes through alon 
gitudinal slot or opening d in the inner wall 
of the outlet-section d. The particular ad 
vantage of locating the escape-opening d" in 
the inside of the loop is to prevent it from 
being closed by coming in contact with the 
walls of the vagina, or cavity in which it is 
inserted, thereby leaving it open and free to 
allow the waste fluid carrying foreign matter 
to pass off while fresh fluid enters. 
The free end of the inlet-section C of the 
conduit should be of such form as to be read 
ily attachable to the pipe of any suitable 
pump, fountain, or other source of supply, 
while the outlet d should be likewise provided 
for the attachment of a removable discharge 
pipe leading away from the syringe. 
The peculiar location of the pluge projects 
the inflowing liquids radially from the semi 
circular end of the loop in such a manner 
that by turning the instrument every possi 
ble direction can be given to the jets of liquid 
issuing from the perforations. 
By making the conduit of flexible rubber 
tubing or other flexible material the sides of 
the loop can be pressed toward each other or 
allowed to expand in order to vary the diame 
ter. When the sides of the loop are pressed 
together, they form an irrigating-syringe for 
treating the lower bowel or flushing the larger 
intestine. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A nozzle for a vaginal Syringe consisting 
95 
OC 
2 
597,323 
of a flexible tubular loop having an inlet-sec 
tion provided with perforations, in combina 
tion with an outlet-section having a longitu 
dinal slot on the inside, means for cutting off 
fluid communication between the two sec 
tions, and a sleeve through which the ends of 
the loop pass substantially as described. 
2. In a vaginal nozzle, a substantially loop 
shaped conduit composed of an inlet and out 
let portion or section, the inlet-section being 
provided with perforations, and the outlet 
section with a longitudinal orifice, and a par 
tition or stopper between said portions, in 
combination with a sleeve embracing both 
sections, substantially as described. 
O 
3. A vaginal syringe consisting of a con 
tinuous loop of flexible material provided 
with perforations and divided interiorly into 
independent inlet and outlet sections, the 
inlet-section having perforations distributed 
in its sides, and the outlet-section being pro 
vided with an elongated discharge-opening on 
the inside, substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I affix my signature in 
presence of two witnesses. 
2) 
ANTHONEY E. MAGORS. 
Witnesses: 
G. W. STONE, 
E. L. CHURCHILL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597423.txt	(No Model.) 
A. MAUSER. 
HAT BRUSH 
No. 597,423. 
Patented Jan. 18, 1898. 
Wiznesses, 
2a4, 
A2ave?26a7. 
Zy Aes szzorevey, 
Zefires Aczzese: 
 
his pers O. Rh8.0, was Nc3. , i. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALFONS MAUSER, OF SCHRAMBERG, GERMANY. 
HA. BRUSH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,423, dated January 18, 1898. 
Application filed May 5, 1897. Serial No. 635,127. (No model.) Patented in Belgium December 8, 1896, No. 125,487; in France 
December 8, 1896, No. 261,978; in England December 8, 1896, No. 28,063; in Switzerland December 8, 1896, No. 13,306; in 
Austria December 30, 1896, No. 46/5,258, and in Germany July 7, 1897, No. 92,718, 
55 
70 
To all tuhon, it 720gy concern. 
Beit known that I, ALFONS MAUSER, a sub 
ject of the Emperor of Germany, residing at 
Schramberg, in Wirtemberg, German Em 
pire, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Hat-Brushes, (for which I have ob 
tained patents in Belgium, No. 125,487, dated 
December 8, 1896; in France, No. 261,978, 
dated December 8, 1896; in England, No. 
28,063, dated December 8, 1896; in Switzer 
iand, No. 13,306, dated December 8, 1896; in 
Germany, No. 92,718, dated July 7, 1897, and 
in Austria, No. 46/5,258, dated December 30, 
1896,) of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to hat-brushes and 
means for holding the same within a hat, the 
main object being to provide a simple and in 
expensive device of this character which can 
be quickly inserted in and removed from a 
hat and which when in place therein will not 
injure the same nor inconvenience the wearer. 
The improved device consists of a brush 
of suitable construction and an elongated 
spring secured thereto, the device being re 
tained within the hat by the frictional en 
gagement of the spring there with for the 
greater part of the length of said spring. 
Another object is to provide in connection 
With a brush having two working surfaces a 
handle secured to said brush for reversal rela 
tively to said working surfaces, so that either 
of the latter can be readily used, suitable 
means being employed to hold the handle in 
its different positions. 
In the drawings accompanying and form 
ing part of this specification, Figure 1 is a 
bottom view of a hat, showing the improved 
device therein. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of 
a hat with a part removed, also showing the 
device in position therein. Figs, 3 and 4 are 
elevations of the brush and the spring or han 
dle thereof in its different, positions. Figs. 5, 
6, and 7 are detail views of a convenient de 
Vice for holding the spring in either of its po 
sitions when used as a handle, and Fig. 8 is 
a view of a modification of the holding-spring 
or handle. 
Similar characters designate like parts in 
all the figures of the drawings. 
My improved device comprehends as a part 
thereof a brush or similar article, which may 
be of any preferred kind, to which is suitably 
secured a spring for holding the brush within 
a hat. 
The brush is designated by B, and in the 
form illustrated it has two working Surfaces, 
either of which can be utilized when desired. 
One of the working surfaces is represented 
composed of bristles 2 for brushing the hat 
and the other as a covering 3 for the back of 
the brush, said covering being made of Vel 
vet, felt, or analogous material and being emi 
ployed for polishing a silk hat. 
The bristles 2 will be connected with the 
back 4 of the brush in some well-known man 
ner, said back being made usually of Wood. 
The elongated spring for holding the brush 
in the hat is designated by S, and Said spring, 
which may be of any suitable form, also con 
stitutes a handle by which the brush may be 
manipulated. The spring is preferably made 
flat and is adapted when bent to conform to 
the shape of the hat to lie flatwise against 
the wall thereof for the greater part of its 
length, as represented in Fig. 1. The spring 
S is bent at one end to form the flange 5, 
which is fitted against one end of the brush 
back 4, said spring also bearing against the 
upper face of said back throughout the length 
of the latter. (See Fig. 3.) 
A spring - retaining strip is shown at 7, 
which is preferably made of metal, said strip 
having at its opposite ends the flanges 8 and 
9, the first mentioned of which binds against 
the flange 5, and the other flange bears 
against the opposite end of the back 4 and is 
provided with a slot or aperture 10, through 
which the elongated spring S is passed, said 
strip being adapted to hold the spring against 
the back of the brush and being secured in 
place by suitable fastening means. 
The velvet or covering 3 is adapted to sur 
round the retaining - Strip 7 and to extend 
along the edges of the back 4, it being held 
in place in the usual manner. 
In Fig. 1 the device is represented in posi 
tion in a silk hat, (designated by H,) wherein 
the spring S and the plush covering 3 of the 
brush B are shown in contact with the inner 
wall of the body of the hat at a point very 
near the crown, (see Fig. 2,) the spring being 
set flatwise against said wall for the greater 
part of its length. 
It will be evident on inspection of Figs. 1. 
and 2 that no fastening devices are employed 
9o 
95 
CO 
2 : 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
2 
597,423 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
for holding the brush in place, which would 
mar or injure the hat, nor is the brush in the 
Way of the wearer. 
When the device is needed either to brush 
or polish the hat, all that is necessary is to 
simply grasp and withdraw it, which opera 
tion can be performed readily. 
The spring S, in addition to constituting a 
means for holding the brush in place in a hat, 
Serves as a handle for manipulating the brush, 
it being connected thereto for reversal rela 
tively to the two working surfaces thereof, so 
that either of the latter can be used without 
applying the hand to the brush proper. 
In Fig. 6, the flange 5 of the spring S is 
shown having formed therein the slot or notch 
15, which is adapted to coperate with a catch. 
or transverse portion 16 on the other or en 
gaging end of said spring, the walls of said 
notch having the shoulders, 17 and 18 at op 
posite sides. The Spring S, near its free end, 
has the curved portion. 19, which is adapted 
to fit and embrace one end of the brush or the 
felt covering thereof, as shown in Fig. 3, when 
the spring or handle S is in the position nec 
essary to enable the bristles 2 to be employed 
for the usual purpose. 
When the brush B and its spring S are re 
moved from the hat H, the spring willimmedi 
ately assume a substantially straight position, 
as Will be evident. If the bristles 2 are to be 
used, the brush will be grasped with one hand 
and the free end of the spring with the other 
handland said spring will be flexed or bent over 
to carry the catch 16 thereof under or below 
the notch 15. The spring will then be slightly 
retracted to carry its reduced portion 21 into 
the notch, as shown in Fig. 5, and then re 
leased, so that by its resiliency the catch 16 
is caused immediately to a but against the ad 
jacent end 5 of the spring, as shown in Fig. 
3. Should it be necessary to use the polish 
ing-surface 3 of the brush, pressure will be 
applied by the thumb or otherwise to the up 
per side of the spring to force the catch 16 
out of the notch 15, whereby the spring is re 
leased and can be reversely flexed to intro 
duce the reduced portion 21 between the walls 
of the notch 15. When the said reduced 
portion is placed in the notch, the spring will 
be released and will fly outward until it im 
pinges against the shoulders or lugs 17 and 18. 
The curved portion 19 of the spring serves 
as a finger-piece to remove the device from 
the hat. (See Fig. 1.) 
In Fig. S I have illustrated a modification 
of the device, spring S' being secured to the 
brush B in a manner similar to the spring 
illustrated in the other views, but being at 
tached thereto at a point intermediate its 
ends. The spring S' has secured thereto, near 
One end, the rivet 25, the shank 26 of which 
is to be passed through the slot 27 in the en 
gaging end 28, said shank being furnished 
With a transverse head 29 to hold it in a set 
position. The two ends of the spring are 
adapted to overlap when they are flexed or 
are serving as a handle, the shank 26 of the 
rivet 25 being passed through the slot 27 to 
hold the spring in proper position. Should 
the polishing-surface 3 be required, the two 
meeting ends of the spring will be disengaged 
and will be flexed around the other side of the 
brush, as shown by dotted lines, so that the 
shank 26 of the rivet can be passed through 
the slot 27, the resiliency of the spring serv 
ing to hold the parts locked together. 
It will be evident from the foregoing de 
scription that my device consists of a brush, 
an elongated spring secured permanently at 
one point to the brush, and means for de 
tachably connecting another point of the 
spring with said brush. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
I. A device of the class specified to be worn 
in hats, consisting of a brush and an elon 
gated spring secured to and extending from 
the brush and adapted frictionally to engage 
the inside of a hat for the greater part of the 
length of said spring. 
2. A device of the class specified to be worn 
in hats, consisting of a brush and a spring Se 
cured thereto and adapted frictionally to en 
gage the inside of a hat for the greater part 
of the length of said spring; and means for 
connecting the respective ends of the spring 
whereby it constitutes a handle for the brush. 
3. A device of the class specified consisting 
of a brush and an elongated Spring Secured 
to and extending from the brush and having 
a bifurcation at one end and also furnished 
with projections extending partially acroSS 
said bifurcation, the other end of the spring 
having a reduced portion provided with a 
4. The combination, with a brush, of an 
elongated spring having a terminal flange 
adapted to bear against an end of the brush 
back; a strip for holding the Spring against 
said back and having flanges at its opposite 
ends in one of which is formed a slot Or aper 
ture through which the spring is passed; and 
a device for holding the spring, when bent, 
to form a handle. 
5. The combination, with a brush, of a 
spring one end of which is flanged and bears 
against an end of the brush-back and is 
notched and provided with projecting shoul 
ders, and the other end of which is provided 
with a curved portion of reduced width and 
with a catch; and a strip adapted to hold the 
spring in place against the back of the brush, 
said strip having flanges at its opposite ends 
in one of which is formed a slot or aperture 
through which the spring is passed. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in the 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
catch. 
ALFONS MAUSER. 
Witnesses: 
WILHELM MAUSER, 
CHRISTIAN BAUER. 
75 
9o 
95 
co 
O 
II5 
I 25 
- 
IOS 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597523.txt	(No Model.) 
F. HUDSON & W. MEIER, 
HARNESS SADDLE, 
No. 597,523, 
l, Patented Jan. 18, 1898, 
  
 
2. 7-i." CZ7 
St. f Y IE 
O) NJ 
WITNESSES 
-8264-276-42- 
-is a 3- 
a 
 
Aigali ZZetasoa, 
Z4.40.677 Weeez., 
N.VENORS 
BY of dale fgs 
ATTORNEYs 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK HUDSON, OF JERSEY CITY, AND WILLIAM MEIER, OF NEWARK, 
NEW TERSEY. 
HARN ESS - SADD E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,523, dated January 18, 1898. 
Application filed March 22, 1897, Serial No. 628,594 (No model.) 
To ?till ution, it inctly concert: 
Be it known that we, FRANK HUDSON, of 
Jersey City, Hudson county, and WILLIAM 
MEIER, of Newark, in the county of Essex, 
State of New Jersey, citizens of the United 
States, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvementsin Harness-Saddles; and we do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same, 
reference being had to the accompanying . 
drawings, and to letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
The objects of this invention are to pro 
wide a suitable saddle for horses which will 
be of greater ease upon the animal's back and 
one which will serve, in cases where the ani 
mal has been made sore by the use of other 
saddles, in curing the sores by relieving the 
same of pressure and friction and to permit 
of the saddle being changed from time to time 
in its relation to the back or the Sores or 
bruises thereon. 
The invention has other objects, some of 
which may be referred to hereinafter in con 
nection with the description of the working 
parts. 
The invention consists in the improved hair 
ness-saddle, and in the arrangements and 
combinations of parts thereof, all substan 
tially as will be hereinafter set forth, and 
finally embraced in the clauses of the claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
in which like letters of reference indicate 
corresponding parts in each of the several 
views, Figure 1 is a front elevation of the im 
proved saddle. Fig. 2 is a detail view of a 
portion of one of the members of the pre 
ferred tree employed therein. Fig. 3 is a plan 
of the said saddle. 
In said drawings, C. a. indicate two pads 
adapted to bear upon the animal's back. Said 
pads are of peculiar shape, the preferred 
shape being shown more clearly in Fig. 3. 
Said preferred pads are in plan provided at 
the forward sides with horns a', adapted to 
extend a limited distance over the horse's 
withers, the opposite side of the tree being 
devoid of such a horn, 
prise heavy harness-leather plates d', to the 
under or inner sides of which are sewed in 
ings a', of suitable textile fabric, which 
linings are of sufficient fullness to form a re 
ceptacle for a filling, such as of hair or other 
filling material, to give the desired rotundity 
and softness to the under side. Upon the 
upper faces of said leather plates are secured, 
by suitable pad-screws, metal plates b of suf 
ficient width to hold the broad pads flat upon 
or in proper conformity to the back. These 
said plates b are also provided with horns b' 
b', the first of which extend in the line of the 
tree c and serve as bearings for said tree, the 
said extensions b' being preferably provided 
with loops b", cast integral with the plates, 
through which the said tree is passed in the 
manner indicated in Fig. 3. The said tree is 
adapted to slide in said loops and others cast 
on the bodies of said plates, to admit of the 
adjustment as hereinafter described. Said 
tree and plates are held in rigid relation by 
means of the terrets did, or they may be ad 
justably secured. 
Below the horns or extensions b' and in 
alinement there with are formed the back 
band loops or eyes b', which are also inte 
gral with the plates. At the forward side of 
the said horns or extensions b' are formed 
second extensions of horns b', which are 
curved upward and forward from the line of 
the tree, as shown, So as to extend over a por 
tion of the animal's withers and present a 
broad and firm bearing thereupon, the said 
horns being bent out of the planes of their 
respective plates, so as to fit the animal. On 
the opposite or rearward side of the tree the 
pads and the plates thereon are devoid of up 
ward-extending horns in the preferred con 
struction, so as to provide a greater space or 
clearance for the Sores upon the horse's back. 
The pad-screws are suitably held in place 
by pad-nuts of any ordinary kind under or 
on the inside of the back-leather. 
The tree is preferably made flat at its ex 
tremities, so as to have a firm bearing upon 
the upper face of the pad-plates and slide 
thereon, and provided at its opposite ends 
with a series of holes h. h. to receive the ter 
ret and admit of the desired adjustment. At 
The said pads com- the center of the tree, at the check-hook, we 
- 
25. 
35 
45 
so 
55 
to 
75 
85 
go 
95 
CC 
 
597,523 
ing adjustable pads, a tree having, at each 
end, bearings to receive said pads, said tree 
having at each end, a plurality of independ 
ent receptacles for fastening means on said 
pad, and said fastening means coperating 
with those on the tree to secure positive fas 
tenings of the pads on said tree at various 
points on its bearings, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing 
we have hereunto set our hands this 2d day 
of March, 1897. 
25 
FRANK HUDSON. 
WILLIAM METER. 
W 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES H. PELL, 
C. B. PITNEY. 
provide a pivotal joint of any ordinary con 
struction, by means of which the oppositesides 
of the tree may be changed in relation to one 
another, either by spreading apart or being 
brought together to increase or decrease the 
angle therein and adapt the saddle to lean or 
fat, horses. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
We claim as new is 
1. The combination in a saddle with a suit 
able tree of pads secured at the opposite ends 
of said tree, the said pads each having an up 
wardly and forwardly inclined horn or exten 
Sion on the forward side of the tree and at 
the oppositeside being devoid of such an ex 
tension, substantially as set forth. 
2. The improved harness-saddle, compris 
d 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597623.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 597,623. 
(\ 
S. 
N 
 
W. S. SHAW, 
SNUFF PACKAGE. 
Patented Jan. 18, 1898. 
so 
SY 
N 
X SN s 
pilepior 
Wey, ,SAShaw, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILBER, S, SHAW, OF DALLAS, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO W. A. 
FINDLEY, OF WACO, TEXAS. 
SNU FF-PACKAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,628, dated January 18, 1898. 
Application fled October 5, 1897, Serial No. 654,151 (No model.) 
IO 
2 
To all tufton, it Talf concern. 
Beit known that I, WILBERS. SHAW, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Dallas, 
in the county of Dallas and State of Texas, 
have invented a new and useful Snuff-Pack 
age, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in snuff-packages adapted for the re 
tail trade, its object being to provide a re 
ceptacle in which the snuff can be packed 
and kept in proper condition until used, and 
after the snuff has been removed the recep 
tacle will serve as a useful article of table 
We. 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists of a goblet, tumbler, or similar article 
adapted to receive and hold a given quantity 
of snuff and provided with a cover secured 
to the receptacle by sealing-wax or other simi 
lar breakable sealing substance to tightly 
close the open end of the receptacle, said 
cover being formed of spring sheet metal and 
provided with an integral outwardly-opening 
portion to afford access to the interior of the 
receptacle in order that the snuff may be re 
moved as desired without breaking the seal 
of the cover, and which outwardly-opening 
portion will normally maintain its closed po 
sition. 
The invention will be fully described here 
inafter and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a snuff-package made in accordance 
Fig. 2 is a vertical trans 
verse section of the same. Fig. 3 is a plan 
view of the cover or lid. 
Similar reference-numerals indicate similar 
parts in the several figures of the drawings. 
In the drawings I have illustrated the re 
ceptacle as being in the form of a goblet; but 
it is to be understood that such receptacle 
may be in the form of a tumbler, wine-glass, 
or any other article of tableware suitable for 
the purpose and also that the receptacle may 
be of any desired size, it being my intention 
to pack the snuff in quantities varying from 
one to six or eight ounces. 
The receptacle is indicated by 1 and the 
lid or cover by 2. This latter will preferably 
be formed of spring sheet metal and be se 
cured to the receptacle by means of sealing 
wax or other similar breakable sealing sub 
stance, (indicated by 3,) whereby the package 
will be closed air-tight. The cover may be 
provided with a flange 3, as in Fig. 1, or be 
a simple disk, as in Fig. 2, as preferred. As 
clearly shown in Fig. 3, the cover is cut on 
the arc of a circle, (indicated by 4,) and the 
metal included within the cut forms an out 
wardly-movable closure or flap 5, connected 
to the main portion of the cover, and forms a 
part thereof, and owing to the resilience of 
the metal of which the cover is formed the 
closure or flap will have a spring hinge con 
nection there with and normally maintain its 
closed position. To facilitate the opening of 
the closure or flap, I provide the same with 
a knob 6, which serves as a finger-hold. To 
effectually exclude air from the snuff from 
the time it is packed until delivered to the 
consumer for use, the cut 4 in the cover may 
be covered with a thin film of wax, as indi 
cated at 7 in Fig. 3, and which can easily be 
removed by the consumer when the flap is to 
be opened. 
One common Way of packing snuff for the 
retail trade is to put it in two, four, and six 
ounce bottles, the stoppers of which are cov 
ered with sealing-wax to effectually exclude 
air, and my improved package is especially 
designed to supersede packages of this char 
acter, and by the use of my invention much 
time and labor will be saved in filling the 
packages, since the Snuff can be placed in a 
tumbler or goblet very easily and without the 
use of funnels, which are necessary when 
bottles are used. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
seen that I have provided a snuff-package 
adapted for retail purposes from which the 
snuff can be conveniently removed for use 
without undue or prolonged exposure of the 
contents to the air; also, that when the snuff 
has been used up the receptacle will form a 
useful article of tableware and be of great 
benefit to the purchaser after having accom 
plished its original purpose. It is obvious 
5 with my invention. 
55 
75 
95 
45 
 
2 
. 
597,623 
metal cover fitted over the open end of the 
receptacle and secured thereto by a breakable 
sealing substance, said cover having a cut 
therein, and the metal included within the 
cut forming a flap adapted to open outwardly 
to afford access to the interior of the recepta 
cle, said flap having a spring connection to 
the main portion of the cover and normally 
maintaining its closed position with its edges 
in contact with the edges in the main portion 
of the cover formed by the cut, whereby the 
receptacle is closed substantially air-tight, a 
breakable sealing substance to temporarily 
seal the cut in the cover, and a finger-hold on 
the flap, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
- 
WILBER. S. SHAW. 
Witnesses: 
I. F. HATHAWAY, 
JOHN W. TAYLOR. 
25 
35 
- 
- 
- 
I claim is- 
that instead of cutting the flap or closure on 
the arc of a circle it may be of any other out 
line desired. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
1. A snuff-package, comprising a receptacle 
of the class described, and a spring-sheet 
metal cover fitted over the open end of the 
receptacle and Secured thereto by a breakable. 
sealing substance, said cover having a cut 
therein, and the metal included within the 
cut forming a flap adapted to open outwardly 
to afford access to the interior of the recepta 
cle, said flap having a spring connection to 
the main portion of the cover and normally 
maintaining its closed position with its edges 
in contact with the edges in the main portion 
of the cover formed by the cut, whereby the 
receptacle is closed substantially air-tight, 
2. A snuff-package, comprising a receptacle 
of the class described, and a spring-sheet 
20 for the purpose specified. 
-IO 
I 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597724.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 597,724, 
E. S. LEFLER, 
CAN OPENER, 
Patented Jan. 25, 1898, 
I 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
S S S S. 
3. 
Z 
peplor 
 
7/3/6---a-A- 3y 7z- SAI ?orpeys, 
Zarauze-a-S Zeyaez, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDMUND S. LEFLER, OF ANNA, ILLINOIS. 
CAN - O PEN ER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,724, dated January 25, 1898. 
Application fled October 17, 1896, Serial No. 609,244. (No model.) 
5 
O 
To all upho77, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, EDMUND S. LEFLER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Anna, 
in the county of Union and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Can-Openers, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
can-openers. 
The object of the present invention is to 
improve the construction of can-openers and 
to provide a simple, inexpensive, and efficient 
one adapted to be readily adjusted to ac 
commodate cans of different sizes and capa 
ble of rapidly cutting out the top of a can to 
the desired extent and of securely holding a 
can during the cutting operation to prevent 
the loss of any of its contents. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claims hereto appended. . 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a can-opener constructed in accord 
ance with this invention. Fig. 2 is a central 
longitudinal sectional view, the lever being 
swung upward. Fig. 3 is a reverse plan view 
of the lever, the ring or rim being removed. 
Fig. 4 is a detail sectional view illustrating 
the construction of the adjustable standard. 
Fig. 5 is a detail perspective view of the rim 
or ring, showing the arrangement of the pro 
jections for engaging a can. 
Like numerals of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
ings. 
1 designates a base, constructed of suitable 
material and provided with a series of con 
centric circular recesses 2, forming seats for 
and conforming to the configuration of cans 
to prevent the latter from slipping during 
the operation of opening them. The base is 
provided with perforations for the reception 
of suitable fastening devices for securing it 
to a counter or other suitable support, and 
rising from its rear portion is a vertical stand 
ard 3, which is composed of inner and outer 
sections 4 and 5, capable of vertical move 
ment on each other to raise and lower a 
clamping frame or lever 6, that carries the 
cutting mechanism. The inner section 4 of 
The standard and the base form an adjust- 75 
the standard is rigid with the base and is ta 
pering or substantially wedge-shaped in cross 
section, and an outer section 5, which is hol- 55 
low, is provided with dovetail openings con 
forming to the configuration of the inner sec 
tion, whereby the outer section is capable of 
vertical movement, but is locked against any 
rotary or twisting movement. The rear face 6o 
of the inner section is provided with a series 
of horizontal recesses 7, which are adapted 
to be engaged by a catch 8, mounted on the 
outer section to secure the standard at the 
desired adjustment. The catch consists of 65 
a substantially U-shaped spring having its 
lower portion or bend 9 bent at right angles 
and arranged substantially horizontally in a 
slot 10 of the outer section 5 in position for 
engaging the recesses 7. A handle 11 is se- 7 o' 
cured to the sides of the spring by means of 
a plate or clip fastened to the inner end of 
the handle and provided with eyes receiving 
the sides of the spring. 
able supporting-frame for a can, and the le 
ver 6, which engages the top of the can, is 
adapted to clamp the latter firmly on Such 
supporting-frame. The lever, which is piv 
oted in a bifurcation of the top of the stand- 8o 
ard, is provided with a central circular por 
tion having a circular recess 12 at its lower 
face, receiving a rotary head 13, which car 
ries a blade 14 for cutting the top of a can. 
The head 13 is provided with a vertical spin- 85 
dle 15, passing through a central opening of 
the enlarged portion of the lever and having 
a handle 16 secured to it, and the lever is pro 
vided with a conical boss 17, which raises the 
crank-handle 16 sufficiently above the handle go 
portion of the lever to enable the crank-han 
dle to be rotated without coming in contact 
with the hand that grasps the lever. 
The blade, which is adapted to be replaced 
by a new one when worn or broken, is detach- 95 
ably secured in a slot of the head by screws 
or other suitable fastening devices. The le 
ver, which extends horizontally across the top 
of the can, is adapted to be pressed against 
the same to clamp the can sufficiently to hold Ioo 
it firmly on its seat in the base, and the ring 
or rim 18 is secured to the lower face of the 
enlarged portion of the lever and extends in 
ward from the rotary head to prevent the lat 
25 
30 
35 
45 
 
2 
597,724 
ter from coming in contact with a can and 
fictionally engaging the same and being 
thereby retarded in its rotation. The ring or 
rim is provided at opposite sides with depend 
ing points or projections 19, adapted to pene 
trate the top of a can near the side edges 
thereof, whereby the lever is capable of se 
curely clamping the same. The leverextends 
sufficiently beyond the can to afford a con 
venient handle or grip, and the hand which 
holds the clamping-lever is not in the way of 
the hand which operates the rotary knife. 
The top of the can is rapidly cut to the de 
sired extent by rotating the rotary head, and 
in Order to enable the operator, to determine 
the position of the blade the rotary head is 
provided at its periphery with a notch 20, 
which is adapted to be engaged by a spring 
catch 21, and the latter is secured to the top 
of the lever and is provided with an arm ex 
tending through an opening in the top thereof 
in position to engage the notch. The spring 
catch 21 is constructed of a single piece of re 
silient material provided with a coil, which is 
adapted to throw the arm inward into engage 
ment with the notch of the rotary head, and 
the notch is curved so that it may readily dis 
engage itself from the spring-catch when the 
hand is subjected to a slight pressure in ro 
tating it. The lever is adapted to be swung 
upward, as illustrated in Fig.2 of the accom 
panying drawings, and it is maintained inits 
raised position by a flat spring 22, secured to 
the rear face of the standard and having its 
upper end freeland engaging the rear end of 
the lever. 
It will be seen that the can-opener is sim 
ple and comparatively inexpensive in con 
struction, that it enables the can to be read 
ily opened, and that it is capable of ready 
adjustment to suit the size of the can to be 
operated on. The handle of the spring-catch 
of the adjustable standard is in convenient 
position to be readily grasped by an operator 
with one hand while he takes hold of the le 
ver with the other, and the outer section of 
the adjustable standard may be readily raised 
and lowered to bring the lever at the desired 
elevation to operate properly on a can. 
Changes in the form, proportion, and minor 
details of construction may be resorted to 
without departing from the principle or sac 
rificing any of the advantages of the inven 
tion. 
What I claim is 
1. In a can-opener, the combination of a 
base, a standard, a lever fulcrumed on the 
standard and provided at its lower face with 
a bearing-recess, a rotary head arranged in 
the bearing-recess and provided with a de 
pending blade, a rim secured to the lever, 
extending inward over the rotary head to pre 
vent the same from coming in contact with a 
can and provided with projections for engag 
ing the latter, and means for rotating the 
head, substantially as described. 
2. In a can-opener, the combination of a 
base, a standard, a lever fulcrumed on a 
standard and provided with a bearing-recess, 
a rotary head journaled in the bearing and 
provided with a peripheral notch, a resilient 
catch mounted on the lever and arranged to 
engage the catch, and a blade carried by the 
rotary head, substantially as described. 
3. In a can-opener, the combination of a 
base, a standard, a lever pivoted to the stand 
ard and adapted to be swung upward from a 
horizontal position to substantially a vertical 
one, a spring mounted on the standard and 
engaging the pivoted end of the lever to hold 8 
the latter in its raised position, and a rotary 
head journaled in the lever and provided 
with a blade, substantially as described. 
4. In a can-opener, the combination of a 
base, an adjustable standard comprising an 
inner section, substantially wedge-shaped in 
cross-section, a hollow outer section having 
a dovetail opening conforming to the config 
uration of the inner section, means for se- 
curing the outer section at the desired eleva 
tion, and a lever fulcrumed on the standard 
and provided with cutting mechanism, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a cam-opener, the combination of a 
base, a standard comprising an inner and 
outer section, the outer section being adapted 
to slide on the inner one, and the inner sec 
tion being provided with a series of recesses, 
a substantially U-shaped spring secured to 
the outer section and having a horizontal 
portion extending through an opening of the 
outer section and adapted to engage the said 
recess of the inner section, a handle having 
a clip secured to the sides of the said spring, 
and a lever fulcrumed on the standard and 
provided with cutting mechanism, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own Ihave hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
EDMUND S. LEFLER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. H. PEAK, 
JAMES A. PEAK. 
: 
; 
OO 
ics 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597824.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 597,824, 
H. E. PITTS, 
CLOTH MEASURING MACHINE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Jan. 25, 1898, 
(R 
o 
R 
S. 
 
The miRRs Peters co. Photo-kit KO. washington R. C. 
(No Model.) 
H. E. PITTS, 
CLOTH MEASURING MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 597,824. 
Patented Jan, 25, 1898. 
al 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
tle SN 
a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2%. 
 
  
 
 
 
aft 
awa S. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
- HANOVER E. PITTS, OF NORA SPRINGS, IOWA. 
Cloth- MEASURING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,824, dated January 25, 1898. 
Application filed May 5, 1896, Serial No. 590,350, (No model.) 
55 
To atti ttflotia, it 7) (tif coil cei'il. 
Be it known that I, HANOVER. E. PITTs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Nora 
Springs, in the county of Floyd and State of 
Iowa, have invented a new and useful Cloth 
Measuring Machine, of which the following 
is a specification. 
in 
The invention relates to improvements 
cloth-measuring machines. 
The object of the present invention is to 
improve the construction of cloth-measuring 
machines and to provide a simple, efficient, 
and comparatively inexpensive one adapted 
to receive bolts of cloth or other material and 
capable of unwinding, accurately measuring, 
and rewinding the same with great rapidity. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a cloth - measuring machine con 
Structed in accordance with this invention. 
Fig. 2 is a central longitudinal sectional view. 
Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional view on line 33 
of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a detail sectional view on 
line 44 of Fig. 2. Fig. 5 is a vertical sectional 
view of the registering mechanism. Fig. 6 is 
a horizontal sectional view of the same. Fig. 
7 is a detail perspective view of one of the 
adjustable clamps of the winding-spindles. 
Fig. 8 is a detail sectional view illustrating 
the manner of connecting the supplemental 
frame to the main frame. Fig. 9 is a detail 
perspective view of the adjustable guide of 
the supplemental frame. Fig. i0 is a detail 
perspective view of the hinged friction device. 
Fig. 11 is a detail sectional view illustrating 
the manner of mounting one end of the front 
spindle or shaft. 
Like numerals of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
ings. 
1 designates a main frame composed of 
sides 2, provided with longitudinal bars or 
sills 3 and cross-bars 4, connecting the sides at 
the front and rear of the main frame, located 
at the bottom thereof, and forming the base of 
the same. The sides 2 have journaled on them 
a pair of lower guide-rolls 5 and 6, an upper 
guide-roll 7, and a registering-roll 8, and dur 
ing the operation of the measuring-machine 
the cloth or other fabric to be measured is ar 
ranged on said rolls and in passing over the 
same rotates the measuring-roll, which actu 
ates the registering mechanism, hereinafter 
described. 
The cloth is introduced at the back of the 
machine and is passed over the upper guide 
roll 7 and under the adjacent lower guide-roll 
5 and is carried upward to the registering-roll 
S and placed centrally on the top thereof. 
The latter is then rotated by hand to move 
the cloth forward and operate the registering 
mechanism, and the clothis then passed under 
the lower guide-roll 6 and is carried forward 
to a winding-spindle 9. The winding-spindle 
9 is mounted on posts or supports 10 and 11, 
located at the front of the main frame. The 
post or support 10 is provided with an open 
bearing-recess to receive the adjacent end of 
the spindle, which is rounded at that point, 
and the other post or support is provided with 
a bearing-opening, in which is journaled a 
spindle of a socket 12, which has a rectangu 
lar opening and which receives a squared end 
of a spindle or shaft 9 detachably and per 
mits the shaft or spindle to be readily removed 
when desired. 
The socket 12 is permanently mounted on 
the post or support 11, and it is provided at 
the outer end of its journal with a crank 
handle 13, by means of which the measuring 
machine is operated. After the cloth has 
been properly arranged on the rollers and 
connected with the shaft, or spindle 9 the lat 
ter is adapted to be rapidly rotated to effect 
a quick measuring of thematerial. 
The shaft or spindle 9 is designed to carry 
a board 14, on which the material to be meas 
ured is wound, and it is adapted to receive 
boards of various lengths to accommodate ma 
terials of different widths, and for this pur 
pose it is provided with a pair of adjustable 
clamps 15. The shaft or spindle is prefer 
ably square or polygonal, and each clamp 
comprises a sleeve 16, conforming to the con 
figuration of the shaft and adapted to slide 
thereon, and a jaw 17, which consists of a 
plate bent to form substantially a W-shaped 
recess and which is adapted to receive one 
end of the board 14 and firmly engage the 
same. The clamps are secured at any de 
75 
CO 
O 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
597,824 
Id 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
- 
sired adjustment by set-screw's 19, mounted 
on the sleeves and adapted to engage perfo 
rations of the shaft or spindle 9. 
One of the sides of the main frame is pro 
vided on its inner face with a horizontal strip 
or cleat 20, located between the upper and 
lower rolls and adapted to hold the cloth or 
other fabric clear of the adjacent side of the 
frame, and a hinged guide 21 is mounted at 
the same side of the frame in advance of the 
rolls and is adapted to be arranged vertically 
when in operative position and to be swung 
downward in a plane parallel with the cross 
bars 4 when not in use. The guide 21 pre 
vents the cloth or material from moving lat 
erally and causes it to move in a straightline 
to the shaft or spindle 9. 
It is secured in its 
vertical position by a hook and eye, and its 
downward movement is limited by a block 
Secured to the lower edge of the adjacent beam 
or sill 3 and forming a stop. 
The rolls are designed to be covered with 
cloth or a similar material to prevent the 
cloth or other fabric being measured from 
slipping over the rolls without rotating them, 
and the measuring-roll 8 is preferably nine 
inches in circumference in order that it may 
make one complete revolution at every quar 
ter of a yard passing over it. The measur 
ing-roll is provided at one of its journals or 
gudgeons with a horizontally-disposed worm 
22, meshing with a gear-wheel 23 of a verti 
cal shaft 24, and the latter is journaled in 
Suitable bearings of brackets or supports 25 
and 26. The gear-wheel 23 is fixed to the 
Vertical shaft 24 at the lower end thereof, 
and the upper end 27 of the shaft is reduced 
and threaded for the reception of an index 
arm 28, which is adjustably secured to the 
shaft by means of a thumb-nut 29. 
The rotation of the measuring-roll commu 
nicates motion to the arm 28, which moves 
Over a stationary disk or dial 30, which is 
graduated, being preferably divided into 
yards and quarters. Each revolution of the 
measuring-roll moves the index-arm from one 
graduation of the disk or dial 30 to another 
and indicates a quarter of a yard, and one com 
plete revolution of the index-arm may indi 
cate five, ten, or any other desired number of 
yards. The outer end 31 of the index-arm is 
bent upWard at an angle and is arranged to 
engage one of a series of radially-disposed 
pins 32 of a Wheel33 at each revolution. The 
Wheel 38 is graduated, preferably indicating 
one hundred yards when it has made a com 
plete revolution, and it is arranged in a cas 
ing 34, which is provided with an opening 35 
to enable the condition of the registering 
mechanism to be ascertained at a glance. 
The pins 32 extend radially from the circum 
ference of the wheel and are arranged to be 
engaged by the index-arm at the end of each 
complete revolution of the same, so that the 
Wheel 33 is rotated one point or the distance 
between the pins. By this construction if 
the dial 30 is divided off into ten yards the 
wheel 33 will register ten yards at each revo 
lution of the index-arm. After a piece of 
cloth has been measured the thumb-screw of 
the shaft 23 will enable the index-arm to be 
readily adjusted on the dial to its initial po 
sition, or at 0, and the wheel may be readily 
set by hand. 
The main frame may be clamped or other 
wise secured to a counter or other support, 
and the bolt of material may be arranged at 
the back of the machine, and the operation 
thereof will unwind the material from the 
bolt, measure and rewind it on the board 14, 
and in rewinding the board may or may not 
be employed, accordingly as an oblong or 
round roll or bolt is desired. 
Instead of allowing the bolt to fall loosely 
at the back of the main frame it may be 
mounted on a shaft or spindle 35, detach 
ably journaled in bearings 36 of a supplemen 
tall cloth-holding frame 37. The cloth-hold 
ing frame 37 is composed of opposite sides 
and connecting cross - bars 38 and 39, ar 
ranged at the top and bottom of the sides. 
The inner vertical edges of the sides are re 
cessed or rabbeted to fit between the sides of 
the main frame, and one of the rabbeted 
edges is provided with openings or dowel 
pins 40, which fit in perforations or sockets of 
the adjacent edges of the sides of the main 
frame, and the two arms are secured together 
by means of hooks and eyes. The sides of 
the main frame are provided at their front 
and rear edges with perforations or sockets 
41 for the reception of the dowel-pins 40, and 
when the cloth-measuring machine is not in 
use the auxiliary or cloth-holding frame is 
adapted to be compactly arranged at the front 
of the main frame between the uprights or 
posts and adjacent to the front edges of the 
sides, the latter being provided on the outer 
faces adjacent to their front and rear edges 
with eyes to be engaged by hooks carried by 
the supplemental or cloth-holding frame. 
By arranging the cloth-holding frame at the 
front of the main frame the measuring-ma 
chine has its length materially shortened, so 
that it will occupy but a small area when it is 
stored away. 
The bearings 36 are pivoted to the outer 
faces of the sides of the supplemental or cloth 
holding frame. When in use, they extend 
above the upper edges of the sides, and they 
are locked in this position by hooks mounted 
on the sides of the cloth-holding frame and 
engaging eyes of the bearings. The bearings 
have open recesses to receive the ends of the 
shaft or spindle 35 and enable the same to 
be readily removed when desired, and one 
journal 42 of the shaft or spindle 35 is oppo 
sitely beveled to enable the shaft or spindle 
to be readily inserted through the center of 
a roll or bolt. Adjustable clamps 43, which 
are constructed similar to those heretofore 
described, are mounted on the shaft or spin 
dle 35 and are adapted to engage a board of 
a bolt of material. When the shaft or spin 
- 
95 
OO 
Io5 
IId 
II5 
I 25 
 
597,824 
s 
O 
2 C. 
25 
35 
45 
dle 35 is not employed, it is removed from 
the bearings 36 and the latter are swung 
downward below the upper edges of the sides 
of the frame 37, and are held in that position 
by the hooks which secure them in their op 
erative position. 
The cloth or other material to be measured 
may be loosely arranged within the cloth 
holding frame 37, which is provided with a 
yieldingly-mounted basket 44, composed of a 
series of curved bars arranged longitudinally 
of the machine, secured at their front termi 
nals to a cross-bar 45 and at their rear ends 
to a transverse bar 46. The cross-bar 45 is 
fixed to the sides of the frame, and the trans 
verse bar 46 is supported by spiral springs 47, 
mounted on vertical pins or rods 48, which 
depend from the cross-bar 38 of the frame 36, 
the spiral springs being interposed between 
the lower edge of the transverse bar 46 
disks or heads of the bolts or pins 48. The 
springs. form cushions and take up the jars 
incident to the unrolling of a bolt which is 
loosely placed within the basket. 
When the bolt is placed within the basket, 
it is held against movement laterally of the 
frame by an adjustable guide 49, arranged 
within the basket at one side of the cloth 
holding frame, having a curved lower edge to 
conform to the configuration of the basket 
and supported by angularly-bent arms 50 and 
5, which embrace the cross-bars 45 and 38. 
The arms 50 and 51 are arranged to slide on 
the cross-ba's which they embrace, and the 
guide 49 is operated by a shank or stem 52, 
extending outward through an opening of the 
adjacent side of the cloth-holding frame and 
adapted to be engaged by a clamping-screw 
53, mounted in a threaded perforation of the 
side of the frame, at the top thereof, whereby 
the guide is held at any desired adjustment. 
During the unwinding of the cloth or other 
material it is engaged by a hingedly-mounted 
friction device 54, comprising a transverse 
bar which engages the cloth and a pair of 
curved arms 55, located at the ends of the bar 
54, secured to the same and pivotally mounted 
on the sides of the cloth-holding frame to per 
mit the bar to be swung forward against the 
upper guide-roll 7 to engage the cloth and to 
be swung rearward against the cross-bar 38 
to enable the cloth to be readily placed in the 
basket. The friction device 54 is provided 
with a series of curved fingers 56, depending 
from the rear edge of the transverse bar of 
the friction device and adapted to engage a, 
bolt of cloth or other material when it is 
drawn upward through the operation of the 
machine and to limit the upward movement 
thereof to facilitate the unwinding of the 
same, and the front edge of the transverse 
bar of the brake is beveled. The friction de 
vice holds the cloth or other material against 
the roll 7 and maintains the same perfectly 
Smooth. 
It will be seen that the cloth-measuring 
machine is simple and comparatively inex 
pensive in construction, that it is capable of 
unwinding, accurately measuring, and re 
winding cloth and other fabrics, and that the 
parts may be compactly arranged when not 
in use. It will also be apparent that the ma 
chine is especially adapted for use in taking 
stock and the like and that it will enable a 
large stock of goods to be rapidly handled. 
Changes in the form, proportion, and mi 
nor details of construction may be resorted 
to without departing from the principle or 
sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
vention. 
What I claim is 
1. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination of a main frame having opposite 
sides and provided in advance of the same with 
posts forming a space between them and the 
sides, rolls journaled between the sides of the 
main frame, the supplemental frame detach 
ably secured to the back of the main frame 
and adapted to be arranged in the said space 
between the sides of the main frame and the 
posts, and a vertical guide hinged to the main 
frame and arranged in the said space and 
adapted to be folded down to a horizontal po 
sition to permit the supplemental frame to 
be arranged in such space, substantially as 
described. 
2. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination of a main frame having opposite 
sides provided at their front and rear edges 
with sockets 41, posts mounted on the main 
frame and located in advance of the sides and 
forming an intervening space between them 
and the same, eyes mounted on the sides of 
the main frame and located adjacent to the 
front and rear edges thereof, rolls mounted 
between the sides of the main frame, a Sup 
plemental frame provided with pins adapted 
to fit in the sockets 41, said supplemental 
frame being designed to be arranged at the 
back of the main frame when the machine is 
in use and to be located in the intervening . 
space between the posts and the sides of the 
main frame when not in use, hooks mounted 
on the supplemental frame and adapted to 
engage the front or rear eyes of the main 
frame, and a folding support arranged ver 
tically in the said space and adapted to be 
folded down to a horizontal position to per 
mit the supplemental frame to fit in such 
space, substantially as described, 
3. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination of a frame, rolls, a basket ar 
ranged in rear of the rolls, and a pivotally 
mounted friction device arranged adjacent to 
one of the rolls, adapted to engage the mate 
rial passing over the same and provided with 
fingers rearwardly extending for engaging a 
roll or bolt and assisting in unwinding the 
same, substantially as described. 
4. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination of a frame, a roll, a friction de 
vice comprising a transverse bar arranged 
65 
 
75 
90 
95 
Ioo 
II5 
I 25 
and securing the guide at the desired adjust 
ment, substantially as described. 
7. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination of a frame, rolls, a cloth-holding 
basket arranged within the frame and adapt 
ed to receive a bolt or roll, a guide conform 
ing to the configuration of the basket and 
adapted to be moved across the same, the 
angularly-bent arms 50 and 51 secured to the 
guide at the front and back thereof and ar 
ranged to slide on the frame and on the bas 
ket, the shank or stem secured to the guide, 
disposed transversely of the frame and slid 
ingly arranged thereon, and means for secur 
ing the shank or stem to the frame, whereby 
the guide is held at the desired adjustment, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
- 
HANOWER. E. PITTS, 
- 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES F. MILLER, 
W. K. SLATER, 
4. 
597,824 
25 
adjacent to the roll and adapted to arrange' 
material passing over the same, rearwardly 
extending arms 55 secured to the ends of the 
bar and pivotally mounted on the frame, and 
a series offingers 56 extending rearward and 
downward from the transverse bar, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a machine of the class described, th 
combination of a frame, a basket arranged 
Within the frame and composed of a series of 
rods and cross-bars connecting the rear ends 
of the rods, and spiral springs supporting one 
of the cross-bars and yieldingly mounting the 
basket and cushioning the same when mate 
rial is being unwound from a bolt, substan 
tially as described. 
6. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination of a frame, a cloth-holding bas 
ket, a guide arranged at one side of the frame 
and having its lower edge conforming to the 
configuration of the basket, a shank or stem 
fixed to the guide and passing through an 
opening in the adjacent side of the arm, and 
a fastening device engaging the stem or shank 
; 
: 
Io 
15 
20 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US597924.txt	(No Model.) 
, 
IMPLEMENT FOR FORMING ENDS FOREAVES TROUGHS, 
W. W. WARREN. 
No. 597,924, 
Patented Jan. 25, 1898. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILLIAM W. WARREN, OF DOWAGIAC, MICHIGAN. 
W. P. E. VENT FOR F OR, N G E N DS FOR AWESTRO G. H. S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 597,924, dated January 25, 1898. 
Application filed June 1, 1897, Serial No. 639,035, (No model.) 
To c.22 Luhon, it in City CO72-Cerf: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM W. WARREN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at the 
city of Dowagiac, in the county of Cass and 
State of Michigan, have invented a certain 
new and useful Implement for Forming Ends 
for Eaves-Troughs, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to improvements for 
forming ends to eaves-troughs or like articles. 
As heretofore constructed the ends of 
eaves-troughs have been formed on a separate 
length, which is joined to the eaves-trough 
by a slip-joint, or, after careful measurement, 
the entire trough is made and an end soldered 
in before it is put into place. This necessa 
rily requires a great deal of calculation and 
care on the part of the tinner, and also the 
soldered joints thus formed are objectionable, 
particularly to galvanized eaves-troughs, be 
cause they soon break apart, a firm joint being 
practically impossible under such circum 
stances. Eaves-troughs formed in the ordi 
nary manner that have soldered joints are 
frequently broken apart from freezing of the 
water within the same, causing expansion and 
breaking them apart. 
The objects of this invention are, first, to 
provide a simple and convenient implement 
which can be used in closing the ends of an 
eaves-trough after the trough has been at 
tached to the building or other place where 
it is intended to be used and the inclination 
of the trough and the flow of the water there 
through determined; second, to provide an 
implement by means of which the ends of an 
eaves-trough can be quickly closed without 
the necessity of solder or slip joints and with 
out waste of material; third, to provide a 
simple means of closing the ends of the eaves 
trough that can be successfully used after the 
eaves-troughs are put into place. Further ob 
jects will definitely appear in the detailed de 
scription. I accomplish these objects of my 
invention by the devices and means described 
in the following specification, pointed out in 
the claims, and illustrated in the accompany 
ing drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of an eaves 
trough after it has been cut off, with one of 
my improved forming devices in place, the 
starting end of the same being in position for 
3d 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
55 
operation. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the 
same, showing the completing end of the form 
ing device in position and the eaves-trough 
pounded into place around it, forming a per 
fect end to the same. Fig. 3 is an inverted 
plan view of the forming device itself. 
In the drawings similar letters of reference 
refer to similar parts throughout the several 
views. 
Referring to the lettered parts of the draw 
ings, A represents the end of an eaves-trough 
before it has been closed. 
B is one of my improved forming devices, 
which consists of a body portion conforming 
to the contour of the eaves-trough on which 
it is to be used. One end is sloped up, ter 
minating in a semicircular form, and contains 
rather deep corrugations extending from a 
transverse line around the body of the same 
outwardly to the end of the semicircle, as 
clearly indicated by letter C in Fig. 1. 
The opposite end has corresponding corruga 
tions, which are vertical and at right angles 
to the general direction of the body of the 
same, as clearly appears at D in the drawings. 
Within the body of the same a depression Eis 
formed, which permits of an easy handling 
of the device. A portion is left flat to re 
ceive a clamp, where it is found necessary to 
clamp the top during the operation of closing 
the end of a trough. 
To use my improved device, the same is 
fixed in the end of an eaves-trough, and the 
projecting end of the trough is rounded off 
Somewhat in a Semicircular line, as appears 
in Fig. 1. The end portion having corruga 
tions C is then brought near the end, and by 
the use of a peening-hammer the trough is 
indented into the various corrugations at c, 
which starts the formation of the end. The 
forming device is then reversed, and the end 
B, with its corrugations, is brought next to 
the fluting already started, and as the corru 
gations at each end correspond the corruga 
tions started in the trough are driven tight 
into the form, as indicated in Fig. 2. Thus 
the end of the trough is closed in an artistic 
manner very quickly without solder, rivets, 
or any seaming. When used in very stiff 
troughs or by those having little experience 
in the use of the device, it is desirable to 
clamp the former in place in both instances, 
7 o 
75 
85 
95 
OO 
2 
597,924 
when the hammer can be utilized and the 
corrugations made perfect. An experienced 
operator, however, will use the former in al 
most any kind of trough without any such 
precaution. A Workman should be provided 
With a series of these forms, so that different 
sized eaves-troughs can be easily operated 
upon. 
I desire to state that the structure shown 
can be somewhat varied in its details without 
departing from my invention. It is not a 
necessity that the corrugations forming the 
Square end and the oblique corrugations be 
upon the same block, though they are ex 
ceedingly convenient so, as will be readily 
understood, when it is taken into considera 
tion that this implement is used high up on 
cornices or on the eaves, where it is not con 
venient to carry many tools and where it 
would require too much time to descend for 
another part; also, by having the corruga 
tions or fluting on the same part a surer fit 
is obtained. 
O 
15 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 25 
Patent, is 
1. As an article of manufacture an imple 
ment for forming the ends of eaves-troughs 
consisting of a body B, conformed to fit the 
trough and having oblique corrugations at 3o 
One end and vertical corrugations at the op 
posite end to correspond thereto for use. 
2. As an article of manufacture an imple 
ment or implements for forming the ends of 
eaves-troughs having a body portion and 35 
sloping corrugations to start the fold and 
right-angled or vertical corrugations corre 
sponding thereto to fit the same, as specified. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal in the presence of two wit- 4o 
I6SS0S. 
WILLIAM W. WARREN. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
W. A. OSBORN, 
HENRY MICHAEL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598024.txt	(No Model.) 
W. B. SIMPSON. 
WAGON SPRING, 
No. 598,024, 
Patented Jan. 25, 1898, 
e 
4. 
AwVASSASAAVSSENSENSYSy: 
72 
s 
S. 
Ip5o pior 
-a-77 (2-era-6- 
3%z &ee. 
fy Avis 
66%/. Semasov 
2-56. 
The Norris Pergas co, FHotcy. Tho... washireTon, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM BUTLER, SIMPSON, OF BENTON, LOUISIANA. 
WAGON-SPRING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,024, dated January 25, 1898. 
Application filed March 10, 1897, Serial No. 626,867, (No model.) 
55 
75 
- 
claims. 
To all whon, it in-af conce772: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM BUTLER, SIMP 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Benton, in the parish of Bossier and State of 
Louisiana, have invented a new and useful 
Spring Attachment for Wagons, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to detachable and 
portable spring attachments for Wagons, 
adapted to be removably supported on the 
bolsters of the vehicle and to be detachably 
connected to the body of the vehicle, the ob 
ject being to provide an attachment of this 
character which may be interposed between 
the body and the running-gear of a vehicle 
and removed therefrom as occasion may de 
mand. 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists in the several details of construction 
and combination of parts hereinafter fully 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
the running-gear of the wagon with my spring 
attachment in position. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation of a wagon with my invention applied 
thereto, the wheels being shown in dotted 
lines. Fig. 3 is alongitudinal section through 
the spring attachment and the bottom of the 
wagon-body. 
Similar reference-nuinerals indicate similar 
parts in the several figures. 
The front and rear bolsters are designated 1 
and 2, respectively, and 3 indicates the Wagon 
body. These parts may be of any ordinary 
construction and form no part of the present 
invention. 
The spring attachment consists of the sid 
bars 4, each being provided at its ends with 
hooks 5, adapted to fit over the front and rear 
bolsters of the wagon to hold the attachment 
firmly in position. 
6 represents cross-bars connecting the two 
side bars 4 to prevent any lateral movement 
between them. These cross-bars are prefer 
ably arranged at the rear end portions of the 
side bars, and on the cross-bars are stupported 
semi-elliptical leaf-springs 7. The ends of 
the springs 7 are bent to form hooks 8, which 
fit over the cross-bars and securely hold the 
springs in position. On the upper surface of 
each of these springs is secured a plate 9, 
s, 
X 
which plates extend parallel with the side 
bars and are detachably connected to the bot 
tom of the wagon-body 3 by bolts 10 or other 
suitable fastening devices. To the front ends 
of the side bars 4 is secured another semi 
elliptical leaf-spring 11, extending trans 
versely between them, and on the upper Sur 
face of this spring is secured a plate 12, which 
extends transversely of the side bars and is 
adapted to be detachably connected to the 
front end of the bottom of the Wagon-body 
by bolts 13 or other suitable fastening de 
vices. The ends of the spring 11 are bent to 
form hooks 14, which fit over staples 15, firmly 
secured in the side bars 4 and projecting from 
their lower faces. 
When it is desired to use my attachment, 
the body of the wagon is disconnected from 
the bolsters and lifted up sufficiently to en 
able the spring attachment to be placed below 
it and the hooks 5 to engage with the front 
and rear bolsters, when the body may be 
lowered and secured to the plates 9 and 12. 
In this manner a wagon that is Ordinarily 
used without springs for the purpose of haul 
ing heavy loads may be converted into a 
spring-wagon which will be suitable for light 
loads or for the conveyance of passengers. It 
will be readily seen that the spring attach 
ment can be put in position or removed at 
pleasure and that it will not necessitate any 
changes whatever in the body of the Wagon 
or the running - gear ordinarily employed; 
also, that it will occupy very little space when 
not in use and will be of such weight as to 
be easily handled. 
These attachments may be made of vary 
ing sizes adapted to fit wagons of different 
sizes, and it is to be understood that changes 
in the form, proportion, and minor details of 
construction may be resorted to without de 
parting from the spirit or sacrificing any of 
the advantages of this invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A portable spring attachment for Wag 
ons, consisting of two side bars having hooks 
at their ends to fit over the bolsters on the 
running-gear, staples secured to the side bars 
near one end thereof, a semi-elliptical leaf 
spring extending transversely between the 
side bars and having hooks at its ends to en 
o 
35 
40 
45 
95 
CO 
m 
598,024 
gage said staples, cross-bars connecting the 
other ends of the side bars, two semi-ellip 
tical springs supported by the cross-bars and 
extending parallel to the side bars, and de 
vices to detachably connect the springs to the 
bottom of the Wagon-body, substantially as 
described. 
2. A portable spring attachment for wag 
ons, consisting of two side bars having hooks 
at their ends to fit over the bolsters on the 
running-gear, a spring extending trans 
Versely across between the bars and connect 
ed thereto near their front ends, cross-bars 
connecting the rear end portions of the side . 
O 
bars, springs supported by said cross-bars and 
extending parallel to the side bars, plates se 
cured on the upper surfaces of the springs, 
and devices to detachably connect the plates 
to the bottom of the Wagon-body, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM BUTLER, SIMPSON. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. D. ALEXANDER, 
WILLIE BROOM. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598124.txt	(No Model.) 
J, G, WALL, 
WEATHER SIGNAL INDICATOR, 
No. 598,124. 
Patented Feb. 1, 1898. 
Z, 
eferrifi, is 
4. 
g). WEATHER INDICATIONS. 
-Z 
Ese WIND 
4. JASL,1997 z N VELoc Y. 
sidNAL's DisPLAYED E cyclone 
4 SHOULD STRICTLY EY Et-EURRICANE 
CONFORM. To ADVICEs 
FROM THE HEHG 
UNITED STATES BEE 
WEATHER BUREAUEIHE cAM 
7 WIND DIRECTION. 
t 
is 
TEMPERATURE. zz 
-za-N 
strzon 
7. 
a 
GA 37 
2 
F. G. 
Z 
  
   
  
  
2 
  
   
  
  
 
 
 
pe SENSBE - - - - - - 
As 
OtjTER CIRCLES...ABOYE ZERO 
.NNER - - - - - - - - BE.0- - - 
O amm- 
WEATHER SIGNALS. 
No.3. 
No.2, 
No.t. 
ot'ER circle...PRESENT WIND DIRECrica 
NNER - 
EP------- "re CONTINUE 
s-------- Y ARABLE 
, ... EXPECTED - - - 
- - 
, 
O ous 
STORM SIGNALS. 
Fair weather. Rain or Snow 
No,..., 
No.5, 
local rairi 
or snow 
No.6., 
NE.ucinds. 
SEusiads. 
7 
Storm 
H 
cold Wave 
Temperature 
Fogard Frost 
INTERPRETATION OF DISPLAYS. 
Notalote, indicates fair weather, stationary temperature 
arrierry rur 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
Ng3 - 
New Notabswest,- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 
S: 
-- 
3. 
. 
Nia.3 y 
Ns.2, wi 
sluit. 
 
 
 
 
N.W. winds. SW. wituds 
I/ENTOR 
Hurricane 
a 6, 22-ee 
" narks 
AITOREYS. 
ite Norris Peters cas. Photo-Litho. was inciton, b. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JUDSON G. WALL OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK. 
WEATHER SIGNAL IND CATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,124, dated February 1, 1898. 
Application filed January 12, 1897, Serial No. 618,966, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom, it may concer'7. 
Be it known that I, JUDSON G. WALL, of 
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State 
of New York, have invented a new and Im 
proved Weather-Signal Indicator, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved weather-signal indicator 
designed for use in public and private build 
ings, offices, stores, &c., and arranged to prop 
erly display Weather-signals according to the 
daily advices from the United States Weather 
Bureau. 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
details and combinations of the same, as will 
be fully described hereinafter and then point 
ed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure I is a face view of the improvement. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same, and 
Fig. 3 is a sectional plan view of part of the 
same on the line 33 of Fig. 1. 
The improved weather-indicatoris provided 
with a suitably-constructed display or bulle 
tin boardA, of any desired shape, and formed 
with means B and C for reading weather and 
storm signals, respectively, according to the 
signals issued by the United States Weather 
Bureau. The said means are printed, painted, 
or otherwise arranged on the boardA with the 
necessary text, so that the public can readily 
interpret the signals displayed. 
On the board A is secured a piece D of card 
board, fabric, or other suitable material, on 
which are displayed flags E, colored, figured, 
or otherwise arranged, according to the sig 
nals indicated by the means B and C. The 
flags are kept separate from the board A, and 
each is provided with a suitable fastening de 
vice F in the form of a pin or the like adapted 
to be stuck into an extension D' of the piece 
D, as is plainly indicated in the drawings, so 
that the said flag extends over the piece D, 
and as the latter is colored it readily sets off 
the flag and indicates the proper signals. 
Thus, for instance, as shown in Fig. 1, the 
upper flag E represents the weather-signal 
No. 2 (shown by the means B) and indicates 
rain or snow, and the second flag, having a 
colored square displayed on the piece D, 
shows a storm-signal, as shown by the means 
C, so that the public can readily read Rain 
or Snow and a coming storm. 
It is understood that the flags E are se 
lected and placed on the piece D according 
to the daily advices from the Weather Bu 
reau and according to the Weather and storm 
signals, as indicated by the means B and C. 
Thus any person can be readily informed of 
the prevalent indications of the weather. 
The bulletin-board A is further provided 
with a changeable calendar G, indicating the 
day of the month on which the advices are 
received from the Weather Bureau. This 
calendar is preferably of the construction 
shown in the drawings, and is provided with 
two endless plates or aprons G and G, of 
which the apron G' contains the names of the 
months, and the apron G* is provided with 
consecutive numerals from 'I' to 
31. 
The aprons G and G' are mounted on a roller 
G, journaled in the upper end of the board 
A, and from which the aprons hang down 
The name of 
ward at the back of the board. 
the month and the numeral for the corre 
sponding day can be read through openings 
G* G, formed in the board directly in front 
of the said aprons, and the year is preferably 
written alongside the opening G, as shown in 
Fig. 1. The calendar is shifted daily upon 
receipt of the advices from the United States 
Weather Bureau, it being understood that the 
proper flags E are displayed at the same time 
on the piece D. 
In order to inform the public of the velocity 
of the wind, I provide the board A, preferably 
next to the piece D, with a graduation H, in 
dicating the several degress of velocity of the 
wind from cyclone' to calm. A pointer 
I, held vertically adjustable on a guideway I", 
secured to the back of the board A, indicates 
On the said graduation H, so that the velocity 
of the wind at the time can be read. As shown 
in Fig. 1, the pointer I indicates the wind ve 
locity as that of a gale. 
In order to give information as to the direc 
tion of the wind, I provide an indicator J, ar 
ranged on the face of the board A, having two 
pointers J and J, both mounted to turn from 
and on a pivot J. The longer pointer J'in 
- 
95 
OC) 
25 
30 
35 
45 
 
2 
598,124. 
dicates on a graduation J", representing the 
points of the compass and indicating pres 
ent wind direction. The shorter pointer J 
indicates on a like graduation J, indicating 
the points of the compass and representing 
expected? wind direction. 
Thus, as shown 
in Fig. 1, the gale blows in a northeasterly 
direction, but it is expected that it will veer 
to the south. 
In order to indicate the temperature ac 
cording to advices from the United States 
Weather Bureau, I provide the indicator K, 
having the long and short pointers K' K, 
mounted to turn on a common pivot, Kand 
fitted to slide thereon, the said pointers be 
ing for this purpose provided with longitudi 
nal slots K and IK, respectively, as shown. 
The pointer K' is adapted to indicate on two 
concentric graduations KK, indicating or 
dinary temperature above and below zero, re 
spectively. The other pointer K is adapted 
to indicate the degrees above and below zero 
on the concentric graduations KK, the said 
graduations representing sensible temper 
ature, this being about the temperature felt 
by ordinary life and may be many degrees 
below the air temperature, the difference be 
tween the two temperatures depending upon 
the relative humidity of the air-that is, the 
drier the atmosphere the lower the sensible 
temperature. When compared with the air 
temperature, the damper the air the higher 
the sensible temperature. 
; 
Thus by the arrangement described a per 
son is enabled to readily read all the weather 
indications according to the advices from the 
United States Weather Bureau, it being un 
derstood that the weather-signals, storm-sig 
mals, wind velocity, wind direction, and both 
air and sensible temperatures are given by 
the indicator on the board A. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A weather-signal indicator, comprising 
a board provided with explanatory means for 
> . 
. 
. 
O. : 
2O. 
25 
45 
So 
55 
reading Weather-signals, a series of weather 
and storm signal flags provided with fastein 
ing devices, a piece secured to the face of said 
board and on which the flags are adapted to be 
displayed, the said piece being provided with 
an extension forming a fastening - Strip to 
which the said flags are adapted to be detach 
ably secured, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
2. A weather-signal indicator, comprising 
a board provided with explanatory means for 
reading weather-signals, a series of Weather 
and storm signal flags provided with fasten 
ing devices, a display-piece secured to the 
face of the said board and on which the said 
flags are displayed, the said piece being pro 
vided with an extension forming a fastening 
strip to which the said flags are adapted to be 
detachably secured, and a graduation and 
adjustable pointer arranged on the said board 
adjacent to the said display-piece for reading 
the velocity of the wind, substantially as set 
forth. 
3. A weather-signal indicator, comprising 
a board provided with explanatory means for 
reading weather-signals, a series of weather 
and storm signal flags adapted to be renov 
ably secured to the said board in the order 
of advice to permit of reading the prevalent 
weather indications according to the said ex 
planatory means, and an indicator held on 
the said board and consisting of a series of 
graduations spaced apart and arranged in the 
form of a circle, and representing the points 
of the compass and indicating present wind 
direction, a similar series of graduations ar 
ranged within the first series and indicating 
expected wind direction, and two pointers 
mounted to turn on a central pivot and adapt 
ed to indicate on the said graduations the 
present and expected wind directions, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
JUDSON G. WALL. 
Witnesses: 
THEO. G. HOSTER, 
JNO. M. RITTER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598224.txt	 
 
H. J. HAYS. 
MOLD FOR MANUFACTURING LAMPS, &c, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 1 
Patented Feb, l, 1898. 
 
t 
No.SN? 
OD 
|> 
INVENToR, 
(No Model.) 
No. 598,224. 
N %@ N 
/ 
20 
N N 
N  
WTNESSES 
-64 - 7%.4, 
c1644.2/ 
H. J. HAYS. 
MOLD FOR MANUFACTURING LAMPS, &c. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
No. 598,224, 
Patented Feb, l, 1898, 
is 
 
 
 
 
22 NY 
N 
 
Y 
CST 
4 DK - 
sy 
Al-Ali SS 
47 
N Y 
avsze N 
 
ANY 
N22 
 
l 
s 
(12 NY 
s 
N S 
- s N s 
2e2 
--- 
r 
s 
 
U 
wiTNEsses: 
c764.4% 
 
N r O R a 
\ces Rs. 
(No Model.) 
No. 598,224, 
Patented Feb. 1, 1898. 
H. J. HAYS 
MOLD FOR MANUFACTURING LAMPs, &c. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
 
 
R N  
Q 
@ RN 
2. N s NS 
Z S. 2 SSS 
2 2: e N S. NS 
SN 
EY 
2 S. 
SS 
S 
2 
N K 
S 
22RN 
NY 
QS 
42.74. 
NVENToR, 
(No Model.) 
No. 598,224, 
H. J. HAYS. 
MOLD FOR MANUFACTURING LAMPS, &c. 
 
5. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Feb. 1, 1898. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
c/64.2/c/ 
NVENTOR, 
(No Model.) 
No. 598,224, 
Patented Feb. 1, 1898. 
H. J. HAYS, 
MOLD FOR MANUFACTURING LAMPS, &c, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
    
  
  
  
 
 
WITNESSES: 
-6Aa. 7242 
c7644a/ 
 
2. 
V 52 
 
 
f N. N. N. 
% N. 
r is SA 3% NS N 
22e 
a? SSS 24 
ab N . 3. 
i 
3.SSN Sir NZE ZE 
SN ense 5. NSN 
y 
 
E. 
SS% %I 
NVENTOR, 
Tw. 
Nis 
Atty. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
HARRY J. HAYS, OF BAL D WIN, PEN N SY L. WAN IA. 
MOLD FOR MANUFACTURING LAMPS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,224, dated February 1, 1898. 
Application filed April 23, 1895, Renewed November 19, 1896, Serial No. 612,781, (No model.) 
55 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
OO 
IO 
3O 
35 
. 
- . . 
To all, whom, it nay conce7n 
Be it known that I, HARRY J. HAYS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Baldwin 
township, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented or dis 
covered certain new and usefullmprovements 
in Molds for the Manufacture of Lamps, &c., 
of which improvements the following is a 
Specification. 
The invention described herein relates to 
certain improvements in molds for the manu 
facture of glass lamps and other articles 
Wherein a portion of the article is formed by 
pressing and the remaining portion by blow 
Ing. 
It has heretofore been the practice in the 
manufacture of lamps having a glass bowl 
and stand or foot to press the latter in a suit 
able mold, removeit from the mold, and while 
hot, or after suitably heating the upper por 
tion, gather a ball of glass on a blowpipe, 
attach it to the heated stand or foot, and then 
blow the bowl. After the bowl has been 
blown the blow-over is broken off, the ragged 
edges ground or otherwise smoothed off, and 
the article annealed. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide suitable and desirable means for si 
multaneously pressing the foot or stand por 
tion, the neck, and a blank adapted to form the 
bowl, and then, without removing the pressed 
parts from the mold, blowing the bowl to final 
shape and size. 
The improvement claimed is hereinafter 
fully set forth. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a sec 
tional elevation of an apparatus embodying 
my invention, the several parts of the appa 
ratus being shown in the positions they oc 
cupy after the pressing operation. Fig. 2 is 
a similar view showing the position of the 
parts of the apparatus after the bowl has been 
blown. Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation of the 
apparatus, the plane of section being at right 
angles to that on which Figs. 1 and 2 were 
taken, showing the position of the parts for 
Opening the mold. Fig. 4 is a sectional plan 
view, the plane of section being indicated by 
the line a ac, Fig. 3. 
Fig. 5 is a sectional ele 
vation similar to Fig. 3, showing a construc 
tion of apparatus for the manufacture of cen 
. . 
-- 
. 
'. 
tral-draft lamps. Fig. 6 is a sectional plan 
view, the plane of section being indicated by 
the line if y, Fig. 5; and Fig. 7 is a sectional 
elevation, the plane of section being indicated 
by the line 22, Fig. 6. 
The mold 1, which is made in two, three, 
or more sections,asis customary, is fitted upon 
a table 2, provided with an upwardly-project 
ing boss 3. This boss has an undercut pe 
riphery, forming a projection adapted to fit 
in a correspondingly-shaped groove in the 
inner wall of the mold. The mold is pro 
vided with a matrix a for the formation of 
the stand or foot of the lamp, a matrix b for 
the formation of the bowl, and a matrix c for 
the formation of the stem connecting the stand 
and bowl. 
The table is supported a suitable distance 
from the base-plate 4 by posts or standards 5, 
and between the table and base-plate is placed 
the shell 6, which serves as a guide for the 
movable cylinder 7. This cylinder, which 
forms the matrix for the bowl-blank, projects 
during the pressing operation up through the 
boss 3 and into the bowl-matrix b, its upper 
end bearing against the upper Wall of said 
matrix around the stem-matrix.c. Within the 
cylinder is placed a hollow rotatable plug 8, 
and within the plug is fitted the vertically 
movable plunger 9, which is connected to the 
cylinder, so as to move therewith, by a pin 10, 
passing through the lower end of the plunger 
and vertical slots 11 in the plug and pro 
jecting into a groove in the inner wall of the 
cylinder near its lower end. This construc 
tion permits of the rotation of the plunger 
with the plug and its vertical movement with 
the cylinder through which the plunger ex 
tends. The lower end of the plunger is cy 
lindrical and fits snugly within the plug, 
while the body portion is made tapering, so 
as to permit of its withdrawal from the glass 
blank, and also permit of the upward passage 
of air between it and the wall of the plug. 
when the plunger is lowered. 
The cylinder is raised and lowered by means 
of connected slides 12, moving in suitable 
guideways in the table and base-plate, one 
on each side of the cylinder, and provided 
with suitably-shaped grooves 13, into which 
trunnions 14 on the cylinder project, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 4. As shown, the grooves 13 
45 
 
75 
O 
extend diagonally across the plates and are 
provided at their ends with horizontal por 
tions. The upper horizontal portions serve 
to support the cylinder during the pressing 
operation, and the lower horizontal portions 
are made of sufficient length to permit of 
Some back-and-forth movement of the slides 
Without producing any movement of the cyl 
inder, for a purpose to be hereinafter stated. 
The lower end of the hollow plug 8 is ex 
ternally threaded and screws into a threaded 
opening into the lower end of the shell or 
case 6. A nozzle 15 is formed within the 
threaded opening in the end of the shell or 
Case and projects into the lower end of the 
hollow plug. This nozzle communicates with 
a passage 16 in the base-plate, said passage 
being connected to a fluid-pressure-supply 
pipe 17, which is provided with a valve hav 
ing a handle 18, adapted to be shifted by a 
projecting finger 19 on the slides 12. The 
threaded portion of the plug is also provided 
With teeth for engagement with correspond 
ing teeth. On the bar 20, which passes through 
a transverse opening in the lower end of the 
case or shell, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. 
In manufacturing lampsin accordance with 
my invention the slides 12 are shifted so as 
to raise the cylinder 7 and plunger 9 into the 
matrix buntil the cylinder bears against the 
upper Wall of said matrix, inclosing the open 
ing of the matrix cinto the matrixb, as shown 
in Fig. 1. The rack-bar 20 is also shifted so 
as to rotate the hollow plug 8, thereby, through 
action of the Screw and nut at the lower end 
Of the plug, causing the plug to move up into 
the cylinder. The upward movement given 
to the plug is dependent upon the length of 
neck to be formed on the lamp-bowl and its 
rotation on the number of threads to beformed 
On the neck. The mold is closed and locked 
by the pin 21, which is of the usual or any 
Suitable construction. It will be observed 
that the hollow plug closes the space between 
the cylinder and the plunger, forming the 
bottom of the bowl-blank matrix, and is pro 
Vided at its upper end with a recess or matrix 
2, adapted to form the neck on the bowl. 
The side Wall of this recess may be made 
Smooth Or provided with grooves and ribs to 
form external threads on the neck of the bowl. 
The parts being in the position stated and the 
mold closed, a sufficient quantity of glass is 
placed in the matrix C and subjected to the 
action of the plunger 23, whereby it is caused 
to conform to the matrices a, and c and to fill 
the blank-matrix formed by the cylinder. 7, 
plug 8, and plunger9. The glassis also caused 
to fill the recess or matrix 22 in the upper end 
of the plug 8, thereby forming a pressed-glass 
neck for the lamp-bowl. As soon as the glass 
is pressed, as described, the slides 12 are shift 
ed, thereby stripping the cylinder from the 
bowl-blank and withdrawing the plunger 
from said blank. As soon as the cylinder 
and plunger have been withdrawn, as stated, 
air is forced into the blank, thereby causing 
it to expand and conform to the bowl-matrix 
b, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. The stripping 
of the blank and the forcing of air into the 
same should be as nearly simultaneous as 
possible, and in my apparatus this Sequence 
of operation is effected by permitting a con 
tinued movement of the slides 12 after the cyl 
inder and plunger have been lowered, there 
by causing the finger 19 to engage and shift 
the handle 18 of the Valve in the pipe 17, open 
ing said valve and permitting air underpres 
sure to flow through the passage 16 and noz 
zle 17 into the plug 8, up through the grooves 
9 in the sides of the cylindrical portion of 
the plunger, and between the Walls of the hol 
low plug and plunger into the blank. As 
soon as the blank has been expanded to con 
form to the matrix b the slides 12 are again 
shifted to the right sufficiently far to reverse 
the valve in the pipe 17 and stop the inflow 
of air, but not far enough to raise the cylin 
der. The rack-bar 20 is then shifted so as to 
rotate the hollow plug, causing it to ScreW 
down into the nut in the lower end of the 
shell or case and thereby removing its upper 
end from the neck of the bowl with a rotary 
movement. The plunger 23 having been 
withdrawn, the mold is opened and the lamp 
complete, except as regards annealing, is re 
moved. In case the wall of the recess 22 is 
constructed to form threads on the neck of . 
the lamp, the threads at the lower end of the 
plug 8 should correspond in pitch with those 
formed in the wall of the recess 22, so that 
there may not be any, injury to the neck or 
its thread in removing the plug therefrom. 
It will be observed by reference to Figs. 2 and 
3 that the upper ends of the cylinder 7 and 
hollow plug 8 are constructed to form por 
tions of the wall of the matrixb when lowered. 
After the lamp has been removed the mold is 
closed and the slides 12 shifted entirely to the 
right, thereby raising the cylinder and plun 
ger into the matrix b. As the slides 12 are 
shifted to the right they engage a shoulder 
24 on the rack-bar and shift the latter to the 
right, thereby rotating the hollow plug or 
blowpipe and causing it to screw up to oper 
ative position within the cylinder 7. 
My improved apparatus is readily adapted 
for the manufacture of central-draft lamps 
by forming an axial recess in the plunger 9, 
said recess being open at its upper end so as 
to permit the inflow of glass under the action 
of the main plunger 23. The glass entering 
this axial recess is given a tubular form by a 
projection 25 on the end of the main plunger. 
This projection, which is made of a diameter 
less than the diameter of the axial recess by 
an amount equal to twice the desired thick 
ness of wall in the draft-tube, enters the axial 
recess as the main plunger descends and im 
parts a tubular form to the glass in said re 
After the stand or foot bowl blank and 
CeSS. 
draft-tube have been pressed, as described, 
the cylinder 7 and plunger 9 are withdrawn, 
as hereinbefore described, and air under pres 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
2. 
598,224 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
598,224. 
3. 
- 
- 
sure is admitted into the annular recess 
formed in the bowl-blank by the annular 
plunger 9. The central tube formed by the 
conjoint action of the annular plunger and 
projection 25 is supported internally by said 
projection during the blowing operation and 
is not therefore in any way injured or dis 
torted. 
In Figs. 6 and 7 are illustrated certain modi 
fications in the mechanism for raising and 
lowering the cylinder 7 and the plunger9 and 
also for rotating the hollow plug 8. For rais 
ing and lowering the cylinder and plunger a 
lever 26, provided with arms passing on op 
posite sides of the cylinder and having slots 
for the reception of the trunnions 14, is piv 
oted at one end between ears 27 on the base 
plate, while its opposite end projects suffi 
ciently far beyond the table 2 to permit of the 
easy operation of the lever. 
For rapid manipulation of the apparatus it 
is desirable that the vertical movements of the 
hollow plug or blowpipe shall coincide with 
the opening and closing of the mold. The 
means shown in Figs. 6 and 7 for effecting 
this conjoint operation consists of a gear 
wheel2S, keyed on a hollow pin 29, project 
ing through the passage 16 in the base-plate 
and into the lower end of the plug and locked 
thereto, so as to rotate the plug and a seg 
mental rack 30, engaging the gear-wheel 28. 
This rack is keyed to a shaft 31, mounted in 
suitable bearings in the table and base-plate 
and provided at or near its upper end with 
a radial arm 32, whose outer end is connected 
by a link 33 with one of the mold-sections, 
preferably through the medium of an arm 34, 
projecting from said section; as clearly shown 
in Figs. 6 and 7. These parts are so combined 
that when the mold-sections are closed the 
hollow plug will be rotated in suitable direc 
tion to cause it to move up into operative po 
sition, and when the mold is opened the rota 
tion of the plug will be reversed to strip it 
from the neck of the bowl. 
In order to se 
cure a true movement of the mold-section op 
erating the plug, the pintle-pin 35 of the mold 
should pass down into the supporting-table, 
thereby insuring the movement of the sec 
tions in the same arc. 
In order to lock the cylinder and plunger. 
in their raised and lowered positions, a spring 
catch-rod 36, adapted to be operated by a han 
dle 37, is so arranged in the lever 26 that its 
free end Will engage notches in the bar 38, at 
tached, as shown in Fig. 7, to the table and 
bar-plate. 
The lever 26 is also provided with 
a finger 39, adapted to engage and shift the 
handle 18 of the valve in the air-supplypipe 17. 
It is characteristic of my improvement that 
the entire operation of forming a complete 
lamp can be effected in nearly the same time 
as that heretofore required in pressing the 
foot or stand and that the lamp is complete 
when removed from the mold, there being no 
blow-over or any ragged or unfinished edges. 
As the neck of the bowl is pressed, and also 
the central-draft tube, they are always of uni 
form standard dimensions, thereby facilitat 
ing the application of fittings or trimmings 
- 
thereto. 
. 
. 
. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. In an apparatus for the manufacture of 
glass lamps and other articles, the combina 
tion of a main mold having matrices, a cyl 
inder or blank-mold movable into and out of 
one of the matrices of the main mold, a hol 
low plug or blowpipe fitting within the cyl 
inder, a movable plunger operating through 
the plug or blowpipe, and a main plunger 
for causing the glass to conform to the several 
matrices, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an apparatus for the manufacture of 
glass lamps and other articles, the combina 
tion of a main mold having a matrix, a cyl 
inder or blank-mold movable into and out of 
the matrix, a hollow plug or blowpipe fitting 
within the cylinder and provided with a ma 
trix at its upper end, a movable plunger op 
erating through the plug or blowpipe, means 
for raising and lowering the cylinder-plug or 
blowpipe and plunger, and a main plunger 
for causing the glass to conform to the sev 
eral matrices, substantially as set forth. 
3. In an apparatus for the manufacture of 
glass lamps, &c., the combination of a main 
mold having a matrix, a cylinder or blank 
mold movable into and out of said mold-ma 
trix, a hollow plug or blowpipe provided with 
a threaded matrix at its upper end, a mov 
able plunger operating through the plug or 
blowpipe, means for simultaneously raising 
and lowering the cylinder and plunger, means 
for imparting a combined vertical and rotary 
movement to the hollow plug or blowpipe, 
and a main plunger for causing the glass to 
conform to the several matrices, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. In an apparatus for the manufacture of 
glass lamps, &c., the combination of a main 
mold provided with a suitable matrix, a cyl 
inder or blank-mold movable into and out of 
the matrix, a hollow plug or blowpipe fitting 
within the cylinder, an annular plunger mov 
able through the plug or blowpipe, means 
for raising and lowering the cylinder and 
plunger, and a main plunger provided With 
an extension adapted to enter the annular 
plunger, substantially as set forth. 
5. In an apparatus for the manufacture of 
glass lamps and other articles by pressing and 
blowing, the combination of a mold having 
blowing and pressing matrices, the pressing 
matrix being movable into and out of the blow 
ing-matrix, a hollow plug fitting within the 
mold, a movable plunger operating through 
the plug, a main plunger for causing a glass 
to conform to the pressing-matrix and means 
"for introducing air into the mold for causing 
the glass to conform to the blowing-matrix, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. In an apparatus for the manufacture of 
O 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
75 
d 
II5 
s 
598,224 
glass lamps and other articles, the combina- in the annular plunger, substantially as set Io 
tion of a mold having a blowing-matrix and forth. 
a pressing-matrix, the latter being movable 
into and out of the blowing-matrix, an annu- my hand. 
5 lar plunger movable into and out of the mold, 
a main plunger adapted to cause the glass to 
Conform to the pressing-matrix and provided 
With an expansion or auxiliary plunger adapt- 
ed to cause glass to conform to the opening 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
HARRY J. HAYS. 
Witnesses: 
DARWIN S. WOLCOTT, , 
E. E. GAITHER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598324.txt	UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM G. MOORE, OF LONDON, CANADA, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO 
WILLIAM RALPH AND THOMAS RALPH, OF SAME PLACE. 
COMPOUND FOR PREVENTING ESCAPE OF AIR FROM PUNCTURED TIRES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,324, dated February 1, 1898. 
Application filed October 2, 1896, Serial No. 607,6403, (No specimens.) 
- 
To a whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM G. MOORE, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, and a 
resident of the city of London, in the Prov 
5 ince of Ontario, Canada, have invented a new 
and useful Compound for Preventing the Es 
cape of Air from Punctured Tires, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to a composition of 
Io matter to be used for preventing the escape 
of compressed air from a pneumatic bicycle 
tire or other receptacle when pierced by a 
sharp-pointed object. 
My composition consists of the following in 
I5 gredients combined in the proportions stated, 
viz.: best glue, one pound; water, one quart; 
glycerin, two-ounces; chloroform, two ounces. 
In preparing the above compound the glue 
is placed in the water and the latter, boiled 
2O until the glue is thoroughly dissolved and 
incorporated with the water. Then add the 
glycerin and again boil until the whole is 
thoroughly incorporated one with the other. 
Then remove the vessel containing this por 
25 tion of the compound from the stove, and 
while it is yet warm and before it cools add 
the chloroform and thoroughly mingle by agi 
tation. 
The glue is valuable for giving the com 
3o pound a strong and tough body and for caus 
ing it to adhere to the interior surface of the 
receptacle, and the glycerin and chloroform 
are valuable for keeping the compound soft, 
sticky, and inseparable. 
While the compound is yet warm, it is 
pumped or otherwise introduced into the tire 
and the latter rotated to evenly coat the in 
terior thereof, and said compound should be 
allowed to cool and settle well before using 
The practical advantages of this compound 
4o the coated article. 
35 
. 
- 
 
are that when the tire is punctured or pierced 
by a sharp-pointed object if the sharp-point 
ed object does not pierce the tire with great 
force it will not penetrate the compound on 
account of its toughness and inseparableness, 
and if said object penetrates the tire, but not 
the interior coating of said compound, the lat 
ter is of sufficient strength and toughness to 
prevent the escape of compressed air equal 
to the pressure required in a pneumatic bi 
cycle-tire to retain the latter inflated, and 
thereby avoid and completely prevent the es 
cape of the compressed air from a punctured 
pneumatic bicycle-tire. Again if the sharp 
pointed object should be driven into the tire 
with sufficient force to extend through both 
the tire and the compound the latter is of 
such a sticky inseparable nature that it will 
bed and bind against and around the punc 
turing object, and even if the puncturing ob 
ject should remain in the tire for any length 
of time the compound from its sticky and in 
separable nature does not set, but closes the 
puncture immediately on the withdrawal of 
the puncturing object and avoids and pre 
vents any appreciable loss of air from the 
tire, and, again, the compound, being of a 
strong and tough nature, adds to the strength, 
durability, and life of the tire. , 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
A tire compound, composed of glue, glyc 
erin, water, and chloroform, in or about the 
proportions specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed in the 
presence of the two undersigned witnesses. 
WILLIAM G. MOORE. 
Witnesses: 
P. J. EDMUNDs, 
S. MCBAIN. 
45 
So 
55 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598424.txt	(Ne Model.) 
W. KUSS 
MEANS FOR STEERING SHIPS, 
No. 598,424, 
Patented Feb, l, l898. 
 
ZZz6%/ 
7/2Zezze Meess 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
WILHELM. KUSS, OF CROSSEN, GERMANY. 
MEANS FOR STEERING SHiPS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,424, dated February 1, 1898. 
Application filed March 23, 1897, 
55 
Serial No. 628,916, (No model.) 
bevel-wheele is mounted on the shaft fwhich 5o 
is rotated by means of the wheels gh. The 
wheel his mounted loosely on the crank-shaft 
of the main engine of the ship. The crank 
shaft of the main engine is not, as usual, firmly 
connected to the propeller-shaft k, but is 
coupled thereto by means of the clutches lin, 
whenever the ship goes ahead or astern. 
When it is desired to turn the ship rapidly, 
the clutch n, which forms an integral part of 
the clutch l, is coupled to the loose toothed 6o 
wheel h, fitted on the crank-shaft , and the 
propellers a are thus set in motion by the 
main engine. The clutches h are capable 
of sliding axially on a feather on the crank 
shaft and are rotated thereby. According as 
the main engine is made to rotate to the left 
or to the right hand the propellers a will turn 
in a corresponding direction and steer the 
ship either to port or starboard. 
For men-of-war and generally for large ships 
the method of steering before described has 
this advantage, that fluid can be forced out 
fore and aft on the same side of the ship and 
thus give the ship a lateral motion. 
In the passageb, Fig. 3, a single propeller 
only may be used, such propeller being ac 
tuated by means of suitable driving-gear for 
the purpose of steering the ship. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
In a ship having a transverse passage open 
at both ends, the combination of the trans 
verse shaft c mounted in said passage and 
provided with steering-blades a, the shaftf 
provided with gear-wheel g, bevel-gearing d85 
e connecting the shafts clf, the main shaft , 
the loose gear-wheel h carried by the said 
main shaft i and adapted to be meshed with 
or disengaged from the gear g of shaft?, the 
propeller-shaft k, and means for clutching 9o 
and unclutching the shafts i and k, substan 
tially as described. . 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
75 
WILHELM KUSS, 
Witnesses: 
ROBERT DITTMANN, 
CARL KLOSI, 
O 
To all, whom it may conce77. 
Beit known that I, WILHELMKUSS, a sub 
ject of the King of Prussia, residing at Cros 
sen-on-the-Oden, Germany, have invented a 
5 new and useful Improved Means for Steering 
Ships, of which following is a specification, 
reference being had thereinto the accompany 
ing drawings. 
This invention relates to apparatus for 
steering ships by causing quantities of water, 
gas, or other fluid to be expelled or discharged 
by means of a propeller, pump, or other well 
known and suitable device through openings 
made in the side of the ship. The openings 
may be made at either one or both ends of 
the ship, and they are so constructed that the 
water, gas, or other fluid used for steering 
purposes is expelled or discharged at right 
angles to the direction of the keel of the ves 
2O sel. When, for example, the water or gas is 
expelled or discharged from both ends of the 
ship simultaneously and it is desired to turn 
the ship's head to starboard, the discharges 
are so arranged as to be from the port side of 
the stem and the starboard side of the stern. 
If it is desired to turn the ship's head to port, 
the direction of the discharges is reversed, 
and in order that my said invention may be 
properly understood I have hereunto ap 
pended an explanatory sheet of drawings, 
whereon- 
Figure 1 is a side view of a vessel, partly 
in section, constructed in accordance with my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a horizontal section on 
the line acac, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical trans 
verse section on the line y ly, Fig. 1. 
It is assumed that the vessel is propelled 
by means of a screw-propeller situated at the 
stern. On the sea or in smooth river-water 
the ordinary rudder m is used when it is not 
required to turn the vessel rapidly; but in nar 
row waterways or whenever it is found nec 
essary to keep out of the way of a ship go 
ing at full speed, either behind or in front, 
45 the small screw-propellers a are brought into 
action. The screw-propellers C are located 
in passages b, formed across the ship. 
c is the shaft of the propellers, which is ro 
tated by means of bevel-gearing de, The 
35 
25 
: 
- 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598524.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM LITCHFIELD, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
TYPE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,524, dated February 8, 1898. 
Application filed. September 3, 1897, Serial No, 650,528, (No model.) 
shows the symbols produced when each of 
the thirty keys is struck lightly and the third 
column the symbols produced when the same 
keys are struck heavily. The second and 
fourth columns give the letter or combination 
corresponding to each symbol. Figs. 2, 4, 
and 6 are enlarged plan views of the type 
producing th and thr, t and d, 
and tir and  dir, respectively. Figs. 3, 5, 
and 7 are sections on the lines 33, 5 5, and 
77 of Figs. 2, 4, and 6, respectively. 
As shown, the symbols in column 3 of Fig. 
1 differ from those in column one either by the 
addition of a line, by the thickening of a line, 
or by both. Fig. 2 is an example of the first, 
and Figs. 4 and 6 of the second, method. The 
addition of a line is produced when the type 
has surfaces a, and b, Figs. 2 and 3, at differ 
ent levels. The higher surface a is operative 
whether the key be strucklightly or heavily, 
while the surface, b is only operative in the 
latter case. A thickening of the line is pro 
duced when the projection c on the type, Figs. 
4 to 7, whose top is the surface a, is conical, 
so that the operative part is broader when 
the key is struck heavily than when struck 
lightly. By similar means three symbols may 
be produced by the same type; but this is 
rarely convenient. 
What I claim is- 
Type having duplex printing-faces namely 
an upper face which alone prints when the 
type is lightly impressed and a lower face 
which produces an impression in conjunction 
with that of the upper face when the type is 
more heavily printed. 
* 
WITLLIAMLITCHFIELD, 
. 
45 
So 
55 
?? 
75 
Witnesses: 
GERALD F. BIRD, 
CHARLES HALE. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM LITCHFIELD, 
a subject of the Queen of Great Britain, re 
siding at 26 Lewisham Park, TLondon, in the 
county of Kent, England, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Type, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
In type-writers as at present constructed 
numerous finger-keys are required, one for 
each character employed, whetherit be a capi 
tal letter, a small letter, a cipher, a short 
hand sign, a punctuation, or the like, or if 
one finger-key be made to serve for two or 
more separate type the mechanism is compli 
cated thereby. 
According to my invention the number of 
finger-keys required in a type-writer is re 
duced by the employment of type which print 
different characters when the finger-key is 
struck with different degrees of force. For 
this purpose the face of the type is made du 
plex-that is to Say, it has printing surfaces 
in different planes. Thus, to take the sim 
plest illustration, the same type may be em 
ployed to print a comma and a semicolon. 
In this case the comma will stand somewhat 
higher on the type than the dot stands. Con 
sequently when the key is lightly struck the 
comma alone prints, but when the key is 
struck with more force the dot also produces 
its impression. 
In this Way, where the alpha 
bet is suitably designed, a great reduction 
may be made in the number of finger-keys 
without in any way complicating the ma 
chine. The type of hand-stamps may simi 
larly be made with duplex printing-faces. 
The drawings illustrate the application of 
the invention to a type-writer producing 
special system of shorthand. 
Figure 1 is a table, the first column of which 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598624.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 598,624, 
 
 
J. BROWER 
COMPOSITE BUILDING MATERIAI, 
Patented Feb. 8, 1898. 
-E-2S4 
s 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
n N N 
N 222 rises 
- x . 
. 
. . 
... 
f. - 1 -- 
t-seas-- 
face-Sas?a is 
SSSSSSSSS sn SSaNaas SSSSSSS 
- - - 
. 
 
  
ar 
- 
232 2 
Y 
 
2S2533. 1. FC 
2. 
SaaSSSSSSN 
r 
 
D 
rts orig 707-7. Z57 roao-er 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
the NORRIs Peters co, Photo-LTHO. washington. p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOHN BROWER, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
COMPO STE BUDNG VATERA. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,624, dated February 8, 1898. 
Application filed January 11, 1897. Serial No. 618,860, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JoHN BROWER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at San Fran 
cisco, in the State of California, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Com 
posite Building Material, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification, reference being had 
therein to the accompanying drawings. 
My invention is designed for the covering 
of buildings and is intended principally to 
form the outside covering for the walls of 
frame buildings. 
It consists, essentially, of a composite ash 
ler or plate in which a backing of wood is pro 
vided with a facing of artificial stone, these 
ashlers or plates being formed of uniform or 
regular sizes and being adapted to be applied 
to the studding or outside of the wall of the 
building. I have sought to provide a mate 
rial which may be made and placed upon the 
market ready to be applied as aforesaid and 
to form a complete and finished outside cov 
ering for such walls, the surface thereof be 
ing in imitation of stone and having the quali 
ties of stone in respect of appearance and ca 
pacity to resist atmospheric influences. The 
material for the backing may be of ordinary 
boards of a uniform quality, and the covering 
of cement or artificial stone may be caused to 
adhere by any Well-known means and may be 
of limited thickness, sufficient only to give it 
the proper stability. In connection with this 
principal idea. I have also shown modifications 
and subordinate details, all of which are here 
inafter fully set forth. 
I may give the face of the article any orna 
mental appearance which may be desired by 
molding the surface of cement or artificial 
stone in the process of manufacture. When 
these plates or pieces are put into place in 
the building, they represent blocks of stone 
in appearance, and in the subjoined descrip 
tion I have called them blocks, although 
it will be understood that they may be thin 
and do not constitute the body of the wall, 
but only its covering. 
I have illustrated my invention in the ac 
companying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a face view of a block 
with an ornamental border and a convex cen 
ter within the border, the scantlings to which 
the block is secured being shown in dotted 
lines in rear of the block. . Fig. 2 is a sec 
tional view of the block, showing the means 
for holding the cement to the wood backing. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a part of one 
of the blocks, showing another form of con 
nection between the cement and Wood back 
ing. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are sectional views 
showing modifications of the means for hold 
ing the cement face and Wood backing to 
gether and for securing the block to the scant 
ling of the building. Fig. 7 is a longitudinal 
section showing the arrangement of the fill 
ing-piece, and Fig. 8 is a like section showing a 
form of block with filling-pieces and a hollow 
space above the filling-pieces. Fig. 9 shows 
a brace embedded in the face of the block and 
adapted to serve as a support for the center 
thereof and prevent the breaking or cracking 
of the cement face when the blocks are used 
over windows or other openings where sup 
port is only furnished at each end. Fig. 10 
illustrates one way of compressing the cement. 
In carrying out my invention I take a foun 
dation-piece A of wood and form it with a 
series of tongues and grooves, as shown at Cl, 
or any other form of projections and recesses, 
or, as shown in Fig. 2, I may provide a series 
of wire loops a', projecting from the surface of 
the board A, and upon the face of the board 
thus formed I compress in any suitable man 
ner a cement surface, (indicated at B,) and 
this soon becomes stone-like, adhering firmly 
to the face of the board and prevented from 
detachment by engaging the pockets and pro 
jections or loops, so that it becomes as one 
piece with the backing A. 
In forming the cement surface I may use 
any suitable material to color the cement and 
to imitate the various known kinds of stone, 
and by a suitable mold in which the cement 
is compressed I may give the surface any de 
sired configuration and may make the surface 
in imitation of granite or any other well 
known appearance of stone, or I may make 
special designs, such as shown in Figs. 1 and 
3, and these designs may of course vary to 
suit the fancy of the builder or maker of the 
material. In order to secure the block to the 
frame of the building, I may use any one or 
all of the various attaching devices. As 
shown in Fig. 3, embed in the cement a wire 
anchor b, having its ends turned at right 
- 
as 
35 
A 45 
so 
 
55 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
3 
598,624 
angles to the body portion c, which passes 
through the backing-plate A, terminating in 
a loop through which screws or nails may be 
passed to secure it to the frame of the build 
ing. Instead of this form of securing device 
I may, as shown in Fig. 4, use an inserted 
piece d of Wood or other material and have 
the retaining device, which may be of wire, 
looped around this piece d and passed out 
through the backing-plate and secured to the 
frame, as before stated. 
In Fig. 5 I have shown the anchor of Fig. 3, 
together with an independent inserted piece 
d", which serves as a filling to cheapen the 
Construction, lessen the amount of cement to 
be used, and generally strengthen the block. 
In Fig. 6 I use the inserted piece of Fig. 4, 
as shown at d, together with a like anchor c, 
and provide the upper part of the cement 
With a passage or channel e, thus adding to 
the lightness of the completed block and pro 
viding a non-conducting air-space, and at the 
same time cheapen the cost. 
Where I use the filling-pieces d'd? I prefer, 
as shown in Figs. 7 and 8, to have the ends 
project so as to engage with recesses in the ad 
jacent blocks and thus tend to form stronger 
connection between adjoining blocks. 
In order to prevent, the breaking of the ce 
ment where blocks are used across openings, 
I embed a brace fin the cement, as shown in 
Fig. 9, having the ends g turned over and 
the central portion inclined downwardly to 
the lower part of the block. 
I do not limit myself to any particular de 
vice for manufacturing this block; but I have 
shown in Fig. 10 a desirable form of device 
for compressing the cement and forming a 
central opening for an inserted filling-piece, or 
When an opening is desired for a filling-piece. 
In this figure the upper and lower plates of 
the mold are shown ath, and within the mold, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
centrally thereof, is placed a rod i, about which 
the cement is filled. This rod is connected 
to a larger rod k with a tapering end l, and 
by exerting pressure. upon the rod to draw 
it through the mold the larger rod k com 
presses the mold to the desired extent and at 
the same time forms a passage through the 
same, which may be left open or which may 
be filled with an inserted piece. The end of 
the mold is provided with spring-pressed gates 
m, which allow the egress of the rod k. The 
mold-plates may be given any configuration, 
as has been before stated, and the backing 
plate is also put in place, so that when the 
pressure is applied the cement is filled into 
the recesses around the loops of the backing 
plate. 
I claim 
1. A composite building-block comprising 
a backing-plate, a cement face and an inserted 
filling-piece having one end projecting be 
yond the line of the cement, forming a recess 
at the other end, substantially as described. 
2. A composite building-block comprising . 
a backing-plate, and a cement surface having 
a hollow space within the same and a filling 
piece, substantially as described. 
3. A composite building-block comprising 
a backing-plate, a cement face and a stay elm 
bedded therein, having curved ends and a . 
depressed center, substantially as described. 
4. A press for molding the cement block, 
comprising the mold-box, spring-pressed end 
gates and a central rod having an enlarged 
end for compressing the cement, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN BROWER. 
65 
75 
Witnesses: 
HENRY E. COOPER, 
F. L. MIDDLETON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598724.txt	(No Model.) 
H. C. BARKER 
BRICK MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet l. 
No. 598,724, 
Patented Feb. 8, 1898. 
  
 
 
 
 
2.Tez. 
-H - 
- 
- 
W--7--est-P- 
M 
a 
2 
-- 
- 
I 
- E 
-- 
SS 
Q y 
Q 
NVENTOR 
4, 24. 
22 
No Model.) 
H. C. BARKER 
BRICK MACHINE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 598,724, 
Patented Feb. 8, 1898, 
a: a. 
? 
 
 
 
 
 
E27. 2 
  
E. A 
J 
E. 
D. Art 
F-E 
in 
\r Rail 
iTim . 
fiefs"Ya? ( 
't All 
a 
) 
 
Say 
2. 
S 
NVENTOR 
Y E. 
Zll t 6 i. 
JN 4 
t 
(l 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY C. BARKER, OF SEDALIA, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO JOHN W. BOWMAN, 
EMIL DORN, AND HENRY KROPP BENTE, OF SAME PLACE. 
BRICK-MACHINE, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,724, dated February 8, 1898. 
Application filed April 13, 1897, Serial No. 631,991. (No model.) 
20 
. 
. 
Io appertains to make and use the same. 
25 ing the brick from beneath the mold. 
To all, Luhon, it may concern: 
. 
Be it known that I, HENRY C. BARKER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Se 
dalia, in the county of Pettis and State of Mis 
5 souri, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Brick-Machines; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which it 
My invention relates to improvements in 
dry-pressed-brick machines; and it consists 
in a frame carrying levers, means for operat 
ing said levers, a mold-table mounted in said 
15 frame, a mold adapted to rest upon said ta 
ble, dies actuated by said levers and adapted 
to press clay or similar material in the mold 
for forming bricks, and means for raising the 
mold above the brick for removing the same. 
It also consists of dies mounted in a suit 
able frame, means for operating the same, 
a mold having a feed mechanism attached 
thereto, means for raising the mold after a 
brick has been pressed, and means for eject 
It further consists in certain other novel 
constructions, combinations, and arrange 
ments of parts, as will be hereinafter fully de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the accempanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a side elevation of my improved 
brick-machine. Fig. 2 represents a top plan 
view of the same. Fig. 3 is an end elevation 
of the brick-machine. Fig. 4 is a detailver 
35 tical section through the mold-table, mold, 
and feeding mechanism; and Fig. 5 is a detail 
view of the mold, showing the grooves upon 
the under side for the escape of air. 
A in the drawings represents the frame of 
4o my improved brick-machine; B, an upper 
die; C, a lower die; D, a mold-table; E, a 
mold, and F a feeder. 
The frame A is provided with a bed-plate 
C and at one end with upright standards a'a', 
45 connected at the top by a cross brace-piece a. 
The frame A is also provided at its other end 
With upright standards a, which are con 
nected with the standards a' by horizontal 
braces C. C. 
The upper die B is formed of a rectangular 
bar preferably bifurcated at its lower end, as 
5.o. 
 
at b, and is provided with laterally-extend 
ing portions b'b', the outer ends of which en 
gage guides formed upon the standards at al. 
These guides are preferably formed by the 
bars a C, bolted to the edges of the stand 
ards a', spacing-blocks C of a suitable thick 
ness being interposed between the said bars 
and standards. The die B is provided with 
a slot b at its upper end. In the lower end 
of the slot is mounted a friction-roller b, 
which is adapted to be engaged by the end g 
of a lever G, pivotally mounted, as at g', be 
tween the upper ends of the standards at a'. 
The other end g of the lever G is connected 
to a toggle H. The end g of the lever G ex 
tends into the slot b of the die and is adapted 
to exert a pressure upon the friction-roller b8 
for forcing the die B downwardly. 
In order to be able to regulate the height 
to which the upper die may be raised upon 
the retraction of the lever G, I provide a 
screw g, mounted in the die B above the slot 
band adapted to extend into the same. 
The 
upper end of the screw g is provided with 
hand operating means, as a wheelg, by which 
it may be turned to adjust the screw. It will 
be seen that by adjusting the screw g the 
height to which the upper die B will be car 
ried by the movement of the lever G may be 
regulated at will. . The lower die C is also bi 
furcated at its upper end, as at c, to correspond 
to the die B and is provided at its lower end 
with a friction-roller c'. The die C is also 
provided with laterally-extending arms c' c, 
which engage the guides a to direct the move 
ment of the said die C. A lever I, pivoted, 
as at i, in the frame A, is adapted to engage 
the friction-rollerc' at its outer end i' to raise 
or lower the die at the proper time. The in 
ner end of the lever I forms one member of 
the toggle H, the other member h, thereof, con 
necting the inner ends of the levers G and I, 
being pivoted to each. In order to operate 
the toggle H, a bar J is pivoted, as at ti, at 
one end to the lever I and at the other end to 
a crank it upon the shaft K. The shaft K 
carries a large gear-wheel k', which meshes 
with a pinion l upon a shaft Li, mounted in 
the lower part of the frame A. The shaft L 
preferably extends beyond the frame A and 
is provided with a pulley or belt-wheell, by 
55 
75 
8o 
95 
Oc) 
598,724 
O 
which any suitable power may be applied for event of its own weight not being Sufficient 
to accomplish this result. In order to remove 
operating the above-described mechanism. 
It will be apparent from the above descrip 
the bricks from beneath the mold when the 
same is raised, I provide a lever M, pivotally 
tion that upon revolving the pulley l motion 
will be imparted through the pinion l to the 
mounted to the frame A, as at ?m. This lever 
is preferably of an approximate S shape and 
gear-wheel lic' and shaft K, which in turn will 
is pivoted at its upper end to a bar in', which 
cause the reciprocation of the bar J, thereby 
extends forward and rests upon the table D 
operating the toggle Hand levers G and I for 
in proximity to the mold E. Afriction-roller 
forcing the dies B and C toward each other 
lc is mounted upon one side of the gear-Wheel 
to press the bricks and retracting the same. 
lc' and upon the revolution of the same Will 
Mounted between the standards C'C' is a 
come in contact with the upper portion of 
table, which I term the mold-table, D, 
the lever M. and force the same forward, SO 
which is provided centrally thereof with an 
that the bar n' will be caused to strike the 
aperture d to receive the upper ends of the 
bricks and knock them from beneath the 
die C. As the machine herein particularly 
mold E. The friction-roller n' will then come 
described is adapted to mold two bricks at a 
time, the aperture dis provided with a parti 
in contact with the lower end of the lever M 
and cause the lever to assume its normal pO 
tion d', dividing the opening. Above the ta 
ble is a mold E, provided with central open 
sition and withdraw the bar m'. 
It will be apparent from the description 
ings, as e e, in which the bricks are adapted 
that when the mold is in place upon the table 
to be compressed. The upper surface of the 
and the levers operating the dies are actuated, 
mold E is beveled, as at e', to direct the clay 
into the compressing-chambers. A central 
as described, the lower die will be forced up 
ward to a point on a level with the mold 
partition e' is employed to divide the bricks 
table and the upper die will pass down through 
and guide the bifurcated ends of the dies. 
the feeder, carrying the clay about it, and 
Secured to the upper part of the mold E is a 
compress the clay in the mold to form bricks. 
feeder F, comprising a casing f, having inlet 
At this point the mechanism carrying the 
passage if leading into the top of the same 
mold will be operated to raise the same and 
for supplying the clay to said feeder. The 
the ejecting-bar will be actuated to push the 
die B passes through the feeder and therefore 
brick from beneath the mold. The mold is 
works up and down in the clay. When the 
preferably formed with a slightly-beveled 
die B is raised, the clay around it in the 
under surface, so that it only rests upon the 
feeder falls into the mold, being guided by 
table at its inner edge. 
the inclined surface e', and when the die 
It will be seen from the above description 
descends it compresses the clay beneath it. 
that I have provided a simple yet very effect 
In order to allow for the escape of air from 
tive machine for manufacturing dry-pressed 
the clay upon the pressing of the brick, I 
form grooves, preferably V-shaped, upon the 
bricks and that the same may be SO COn 
structed as to automatically take the clay, 
end surfaces of the mold E, extending in 
press the bricks, and remove the same in a 
different directions. In order to remove the 
continuous operation. 
bricks from the mold, I provide means for 
Having now described my invention, what 
raising the mold after the bricks are pressed, 
consisting of levers ele, mounted upon a 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
shaft e, pivoted in the standards a' d', one 
Patent, is 
1. In a brick-machine, the combination of 
end of each lever extending on either side of 
an upper die, a lower die, means for recipro 
the mold and connected thereto by pivoted 
cating both the said dies, a mold-table, a mold 
links e. e. A lever e is secured to the shaft 
open at the top for receiving the loose clay to 
e and is connected at its upper end to a link 
be pressed and adapted to rest upon said ta 
or bare". The bare carries a friction-roller 
eat one end, said roller being adapted to 
ble and means for raising the mold after the 
bricks are pressed, substantially as described. 
rest and run upon a portion of the frame, as 
a. A diagonal bar is mounted upon the 
2. In a brick-machine, the combination. With 
side of the gear-wheelk', and one edge thereof 
a suitable frame, of dies mounted therein, 
means for reciprocating the dies, a mold-table 
forms a cam-surface for engaging the fric 
tion-roller e as the gear-wheel lic' revolves. 
mounted in said frame, a mold open at the 
top and bottom and provided with upper bev 
The mold normally rests upon the table, but 
after the bricks have been pressed the bark 
eled surfaces, a feeder secured to said mold 
for supplying the same with loose clay, means 
will engage the roller et and draw the bare 
toward the gear-wheel le", which willraise the 
for raising the mold above the table and 
means for pushing the bricks from beneath 
mold E to a point a little above the bricks. 
the mold, substantially as described. 
After the bricks are removed the roller es 
will become disengaged from the bar land 
3. In a brick-machine, the combination with 
the mold will return to its position upon the 
a suitable frame, of a mold-table, a mold 
adapted to rest upon said table for receiving 
table. A bark, similar to k, but oppositely 
material to be pressed, the lower edges of 
5 arranged, is also Secured to the wheel k' and 
is adapted to engage the wheel e and force 
said mold being beveled so as to touch the 
mold-table at the inner edge, and having 
the mold E to its place on the table D in the 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
75 
95 
Od 
Io5 
O 
II5 
2 d 
I 25 
 
598,724 
3 
grooves upon its under surfaces for allowing 
the air to escape from the bottom of the mold, 
substantially as described. 
4. In a brick-machine, the combination with 
a suitable frame, of reciprocating dies mount 
ed therein, levers pivotally mounted in said 
frame for operating the dies, a toggle-joint 
for spreading said levers one of said levers 
forming one member of said toggle-joint and 
means connected with the actuating mechan 
ism for operating the said levers, a mold-table 
mounted in the frame and a mold open at the 
top for receiving the loose clay and normally 
resting upon the said table and adapted to 
receive the dies from the top and bottom for 
pressing bricks within the same, means for 
raising the said mold whereby the bricks may 
be pushed from beneath the same, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a brick-machine, the combination with 
a suitable frame, of upper and lower dies 
mounted therein, means for reciprocating 
both of the Salme, a movable mold, open at top 
and bottom, to receive said dies whereby clay 
may be fed in at the top and be pressed into 
bricks within the same, and means for mov 
ing the said mold away from the brick, where 
by the same is free to be ejected from the 
machine beneath the mold, Substantially as 
described. 
6. In a brick-machine, the combination. With 
a suitable frame, of reciprocating dies mount 
ed therein, levers pivoted in the said frame, 
for reciprocating the said dies, friction-roll 
ers interposed between said levers and the 
said dies and a toggle-joint for opening the 
said levers one of said levers forming one 
member of said joint and means for actu 
ating the toggle-joint, substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. In a brick-machine, the combination with 
a suitable frame, reciprocating dies mounted 
therein, a mold-table, a mold adapted to rest 
upon said table, a shaft mounted in said 
frame, levers secured thereto and connected 
to said mold, an arm upon said shaft, a bar 
pivotally connected to said arm and pro 
vided with a friction-roller at one end, adapted 
to run upon said frame, a gear-wheel provided 
with a cam mounted in said frame, said cam 
being adapted to engage the friction-roller 
for raising the mold and means for actuating 
the gear-wheel, Substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
35 
45 
HENRY C. BARKER. 
Witnesses: 
S. M. HoDGES, 
EUGENE. J. WARNON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598824.txt	(No Model.) 
A, STUCKI. 
STEAM TRAP, 
No. 598,824. 
T - 
  
Patented Feb. 8, 1898. 
SS 
% ea 44-4. 
Celess An 
 
2 S 
3 
  
 
 
-Asia 
i-HHH 
2. 
2 
 
 
al 
  
21 
 
 
 
 
  
IN/\s 
 
 
2 
'', 
2 
A. 
/A. 
Ma 
A. 
3. 
Z22, 2. 
1 
3. 
SN3. 1 
6. 
6 
6 
A 
Maesses 
-f6762------ 
4 A. -6ee4444 
Zvezazer 
Arava Stacaz 
k2.g. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ARNOLD STUCKI, OF ALTOONA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
STEAM TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,824, dated February 8, 1898. 
Application filed May 14, 1897, Serial No. 636,525, (No model.) 
O 
25 
To all tufton, it inctly CO7 ceira: 
Be it known that I, ARNOLD. STUCKI, a citi 
Zen of Switzerland, and a resident of Altoona, 
Blair county, Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain Improvements in Steam-Traps, of 
which the following is a specification. 
Myinvention relates to that class of steam 
traps in which the movement of the valve 
which governs the flow from the trap is ef 
fected by the expansion and contraction of a 
vessel containing a volatile liquid, said ves 
Sel being eXposed to the steam or water of 
condensation flowing from the pipe or system 
of pipes in connection with which the trap is 
employed. 
The object of my invention is to prevent 
injury to the said vessel, such as is ordinarily 
caused by excessive expansion of the same, 
and this object I attain in the manner here 
inafter set forth, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of a steam-trap 
constructed in accordance with my invention, 
the valve being shown open. Fig. 2 is a simi 
lar view showing the valve closed; and Fig. 
3 is a sectional view, on a smaller scale, illus 
trating a modification of the invention. 
Steam-traps of the character to which my 
invention relates, while generally applicable, . 
are especially intended for use in connection 
With the steam-heating pipes or systems of 
railway-cars. When intended for such use, 
the valve must be large and must have con 
siderable movement in order to provide an 
opening of sufficient area to rapidly drain of 
, the Water of condensation when a train is 
nearing or has reached its destination and the 
steam is cut off, such rapid drainage being 
necessary in many cases in order to prevent 
the freezing of the water in the trap and pipes. 
A considerable movement of the valve means 
a corresponding expansion of the vessel con 
taining the volatile liquid, and this in turn 
requires the use of an expansion vessel with 
45 thin walls in order to permit it to readily re 
spond to the internal stress and so that when 
expanded to the maximum extent the elastic 
limit of the metal will not be reached or ex 
ceeded. 
The expansion vessel is usually such that 
it will move the valve from the fully-opened 
position to the completely-closed position by 
35 
w 
 
55 
7 o 
75 
a variation in temperature of about 40. For 
instance, if the valve is wide open when the 
temperature of the Water of condensation 
passing through the trap is 160 Fahrenheit 
the valve should be entirely closed when the 
temperature of the Water of condensation 
reaches 200 Fahrenheit, as it would be a 
waste of heat to discharge Water of so high a 
temperature. Steam at a pressure of forty, 
sixty, or even eighty pounds is, however, some 
times used in the heating-pipes, and the sub 
jection of the expansion vessel to a tempera 
ture such as that represented by these pres 
sures causes excessive expansion of the Walls 
of the Vessels. Hence the elastic limit of the 
metal composing the same is exceeded and 
the walls of the vessel are thereby caused to 
bulge or take a permanent set, and hence the 
vessel on a reduction of temperature does not 
contract to its normal extent and therefore 
does not work properly until readjusted. In 
order to overcome this objection, I limit the 
expansion of the valve-operating vessel So 
that it cannot pass beyond certain limits, even 
when subjected to extremely high tempera 
tures. 
In the drawings, 1 represents the casing of 
a steam-trap closed at the top by a detach 
able cap or cover 2 and having at one side an 
inlet 3 and at the bottom an outlet 4, there 
being within the chamber contained in this 
casing a valve-chest 5, having passages 6, 
which communicate with said chamber in the 
casing and also with the Outlet 4. 
The valve-chest 5 is in the present instance 
of cylindrical form and contains a sliding cy 
lindrical valve 7, which is normally raised to 
its full extent by means of a coiled spring 9, 
interposed between the expanded base of the 
valve-chest 5 and a flange or collar 10 On the 
Valve. 
The upper end of the valve has a stem 11, 
which has an enlarged head bearing upon the 
underside of the expansion vessel 12, the lat 
ter consisting of a pair of corrugated disks, 
preferably of cylindrical form, connected to 
gether at the outer edges, so that the vesselis 
hermetically sealed. Bearing upon the up 
per side of the vessel 12 is a stud 13, which 
is secured to and projects inwardly from the 
cap or cover 2 of the casing 1. 
The vessel 12 is contained within a bOX Or 
95 
Ioo 
2 
598,824 
cage 14, which preferably consists of upper 
and lower halves suitably secured together 
at their meeting edges, this cage having slots, 
perforations, or other openings, thus form 
ing an open-work cage, so that free access of 
Steam or Water to the outer surface of the 
vessel 12 is permitted. Said vessel 12 con 
tains alcohol, bisulfid of carbon, or other vola 
tile liquid, which will be so acted upon by the 
heat of the steam or water of condensation as 
to cause rapid expansion or contraction of the 
vessel in order to close or open the valve 7; 
but when the desired limit of expansion has 
been reached, as shown, for instance, in Fig. 
2 of the drawings, the walls of the vessel 12 
come into contact with the inner sides of the 
box or cage 14, and any further expansion of 
said vessel 12 is thereby prevented, such fur 
ther expansion being resisted by the strength 
of the box or cage 14, which is too great to be 
Overcome by the expansive force of the liquid 
contained in the vessel 12 under any tem 
perature to which it is likely to be subjected 
in practice. Hence undue strain on the Walls 
of the vessel 12 is effectually prevented and 
the trap always remains in operative condi 
tion. 
The vessel 12 shown in the drawings is con 
structed so as to expand both as to its upper 
and lower sides. Hence the box or cage 14 is 
carried by the vessel and is free to move in 
the casing 1 as said vessel expands or con 
tracts, and, while this construction is pre 
ferred, a palpable modification of my inven 
tion is one in which the box or cage is fixedly 
mounted in the casing, as shown, for instance, 
at 14" in Fig. 3, and provides a rigid backing 
for the top of the vessel 12, the expansion of 
the latter being downward. 
The valve 7 has a transverse slot 15, through 
which passes a transverse pin 16, carried by 
the valve-chest 5, this pin limiting the up 
Ward movement of the valve under the thrust 
of the spring 9 and thereby restricting the 
compressive action of the vessel 12. 
While I have shown in the drawings and 
prefer to use a valve sliding in a chest so as 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
to open and close passages formed in said 
chest, it will be evident that my invention is 
not limited to this construction, but can be 
used in steam-traps having any desired form 
of valve operated by the expansion and con 
traction of a vessel under the influence of 
varying degrees of temperature. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. A steam-trap in which are combined a 
casing, a valve governing the outlet there 
from, an expansion vessel whereby the opera 
tion of said valve is controlled, and an open 
work box or cage in which said expansion 
vessel is contained and by which its expan 
sion is limited. 
2. A steam-trap in which are combined a 
casing, a valve governing the outlet there 
from, an expansion vessel controlling the op 
eration of said valve, and an open-work cage 
containing said expansion vessel and limiting 
the expansion of the same, said cage being 
free to move in the casing. 
3. A steam-trap in which are combined a 
casing, a valve governing the outlet there 
from, an expansion vessel controlling the op 
eration of said valve, and an open-work cage 
mounted upon and movable with said expan 
Sion vessel, and serving to restrict, the expan 
sion of the same. 
4. The combination in a steam-trap, of a 
casing, a valve governing the outlet there 
from, a spring for moving said valve so as to 
Open the Same, an expansion vessel Serving 
by its expansion to close the valve against 
the action of the spring, and an open-work 
box or cage containing said expansion vessel 
and Serving to limit the expansion of the same. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
ARNOLD STUCKI. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
Witnesses: 
A. W. DIVELY, 
JNO. C. INNES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US598924.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 598,924. 
G. C. HALE, 
FIRE EXTINGUISHER, 
Patented Feb. 15, 1898, 
s4y a 
.. 
 
rHE Norris PETERs co. PHOTO-LTHO. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE C. HALE, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR TO MILO E. 
LAWRANCE, OF SAME PLACE. 
FIRE EXTINGUISHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 598,924, dated February 15, 1898. 
Application filed March 6, 1897, Serial No. 626,240. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE C. HALE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Kan 
sas City, in the county of Jackson and State 
of Missouri, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Fire-Extinguishers; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
fire-extinguishers of the class shown and de 
scribed generically in an application for Let 
ters Patent of the United States which I filed 
on the 17th day of February, 1897, bearing 
Serial No. 623,857, in which the distributing 
main or pipe of a fire-extinguishing system 
is provided with an outlet in its upper side 
or face and a revoluble distributer is sup 
ported over said pipe or main in a manner 
to normally rest by its own weight upon the 
outlet, so as to close the latter against the 
ingress and lodgment of dust and dirt, but at 
the same time said distributer is capable of a 
limited and unrestrained upward movement 
under the pressure of the jet or stream of 
water, which acts to raise the distributer and 
to rotate the same by impinging against 
spiral Working surfaces on said distributer, 
whereby the latter is held raised and rotated 
by the escaping stream and the distributer 
breaks up and throws the water in the form 
of a spray around and upon the adjacent sur 
faces. 
The object of my present invention is to 
simplify the construction of the extinguisher 
by providing a means which serves to opera 
tively connect the distributer to the pipe or 
main and also form the outlet-nozzle so that 
the application of the nozzle to the pipe also 
attaches the means for supporting the dis 
tributer. 
To these ends my invention consists of a 
tubular nozzle having a water-passage there 
through and a projecting spindle rigid there 
with and a distributer-head fitted on said 
spindle to rotate and slide freely thereon, said 
head adapted to seatitself by gravity upon the 
open end of said tubular nozzle; and the in 
vention further consists in the novel combi 
nation of elements and in the construction 
and arrangement of parts, which will be here 
inafter fully described and claimed. 
I have illustrated the preferred embodi 
ment of my invention in the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improved 
fire-extinguisher, showing it applied to one 
of the distributing-pipes of an extinguishing 
system. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional eleva 
tion thereof. Fig. 3 is an inverted or bottom 
plan view of the nozzle. Fig. 4 is an inverted 
plan view of the distributer-head. 
Like numerals of reference denote corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
ings, referring to which 
The numerall designates one of the dis 
tributing pipes or mains of a fire-extinguish 
ing system, which, as is usual in this art, em 
bodies a series of pipes or mains situated in 
rooms or other parts of a building or other 
structures where fires are likely to occur and 
also provided with a branch pipe or pipes 
leading to a source of Water-supply-such as 
a tank, a street service-main, or to a place 
where the hose from a fire-engine may be con 
nected with said extinguishing system. 
According to my invention it is essential 
that the water-outlet shall be provided in the 
upper side of the distributing-pipe and the 
sprinkler device be arranged over said outlet 
to seat itself by gravity upon the pipe and 
close the outlet against the lodgment and ac 
cumulation of dust and dirt in and around 
said outlet. In the present invention these 
essential parts of the extinguishing system 
are provided by forming a threaded opening 
2 in the top side of the pipe or main1. Into 
this opening is screwed the lower externally 
threaded end of the tubular nozzle 3, the up 
per part of which has a square, angular, or 
polygonal surface (indicated at 4) for the ap 
plication of a Wrench or other suitable imple 
ment for turning the nozzle in order to screw 
it into the threaded opening 2 or to unscrew 
it therefrom to enable the nozzle to be de 
tached easily from the pipe or main 1. The 
nozzle carries the upright spindle 5, on which 
is loosely fitted the rotary and slidable dis 
tributer-head 6. In the preferred embodi 
95 
Ido 
O 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
598,924 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
ment of my invention the spindle is integral 
with the tubular nozzle, is arranged axially 
in relation thereto, and projects above the 
open end of said nozzle for a suitable distance, 
so as to support said head 6 and permit it to 
have the necessary sliding movement upward 
on the spindle and away from the mouth of 
the nozzle. The spindle is joined to the noz 
zle by an open spider 7, (shown more clearly 
by Fig. 3,) and said spider and spindle are 
preferably integral with the nozzle. A wa 
ter-passage 3' extends through the nozzle, and 
the spider is cut away or has its arms spaced 
apart to provide the openings or passages 
7' through the spider, which passages 7' pro 
vide for the free egress of water from the pipe 
or main through the tubular nozzle. The 
upper end of the spindle has a male thread 
cut thereon to receive a nut 8, which prevents 
the head 6 from becoming disconnected from 
the spindle and which limits the upward play 
of the head 6 on said spindle, but other forms 
of stop devices may be used in lieu of the nut 8. 
The distributer-head 5 has the form shown 
by the drawings, in which the lower sur 
face thereof is approximately inverted-cone 
shaped. On the lowerface of the head is pro 
vided a series of spiral ribs 9, which extend 
upward along the head from a point above 
the apex 10 to and beyond the edge of the 
head, and these ribs terminate at their upper 
Outer extremities in the curved overhanging 
lips 11, said ribs gradually increasingin depth 
from their lower inner ends to their upper 
Outer ends, as shown. The periphery of the 
head, between the overhanging lips 11 at the 
free ends of the spiral ribs, is corrugated or 
toothed, as at 12, and the center of the head 
terminates in the inverted conical teat-like 
apex 10. This form of the head constitutes 
an efficient means for distributing the water 
in the form of a spray, and the spiral taper 
ing ribs thereon furnish the means for giving 
rotary motion to the head when the stream or 
jet of Waterimpinges against the working sur 
face of the head. 
In the upper side of the distributer-head is 
proVided a Cavity 13 and an annular recess 
14, the latter forming a seat for the periph 
eral edge of a metallic cap-plate 15, which is 
adapted to be sprung into place within the 
annular seat, thus closing the cavity against 
the accumulation of dust and dirt. Through 
the center of the head and its apex 10 is 
formed a vertical passage 16, that provides 
for the introduction of the head on the fixed 
Spindle. The head is fitted loosely on the 
spindle, the check-nut is screwed on the 
threaded end of the spindle, and the cap 
plate is sprung into place within the annular 
seat in the head, a space being provided be 
tween the nut and the head to permit the head 
to have the necessary sliding movement be 
fore it is arrested by the nut. Normally the 
head rests by gravity upon the open end of 
the nozzle, so that the apex 10 of said head 
fits in the nozzle, whereby the head over 
hangs the nozzle and its apex closes the n0Z 
zle to prevent the accumulation of dust and 
dirt to clog up the nozzle. When the Water 
is admitted to or forced through the main 
under pressure, it escapes through the nozzle 
and acts against the distributer-head with 
sufficient force to lift said head clear from 
the nozzle and to maintain the head in Such 
raised position. Under these conditions the 
stream or jet of water impinges against the 
spiral ribs on the raised head and the latter 
is rotated and raised by the water as it issues 
from the main, the head also serving to break 
up the stream or jet of water and to distribute 
the same in the form of a spray upon the sur 
faces or parts of a building adjacent to the 
sprinkler. When the flow of water ceases, the 
head descends automatically by gravity and 
seats itself upon the nozzle, thus overhanging 
the nozzle and closing the same against the 
lodgment of dust, &c. 
My new device is very simple in construc 
tion, consisting practically of two parts-i.e., 
the nozzle with the spindle and the head. 
The head and nozzle are preferably each cast 
in a single piece and afterward finished in 
any suitable style. 
While I have shown the nozzle as having a 
male thread to screw into a threaded opening 
in the pipe or main, I do not limit myself to 
this particular construction, because the noZ 
zle may be fastened to the pipe by other styles 
of couplings or joints, nor do I restrict my 
self to the precise details of construction and 
form and proportion of parts herein shown and 
described, as it is evident that changes can 
be made therein without departing from the 
scope of my invention. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination with a main or pipe, of 
a substantially cylindrical nozzle projecting 
upwardly from said main or pipe and having 
a longitudinal liquid-passage terminating in 
an open mouth at the upper extremity of said 
nozzle, a spindle carried by said nozzle and 
projecting therefrom, and a rotatable and slid 
able distributer-head fitted loosely on said 
spindle to overhang the nozzle, said head hav 
ingonitslower surface a central protuberance 
to rest upon the nozzle and also provided with 
a series of spiral fins which extend outwardly 
and upwardly from said protuberance, for the 
purposes described, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination with a main, of a tubu 
lar nozzle coupled to the upper side of said 
main and provided with an axial spindle, a 
distributer-head fitted loosely on said spindle 
and provided with a smooth conical center 
and with spiral blades that extend from said 
center toward the edge of said head, and a 
stop device to arrest the upward-sliding move 
ment of the head on said spindle, as set forth. 
3. The combination of a nozzle having an 
axial liquid-passage terminating in an open 
mouth at the upper extremity of the same, a 
75 
95 
Od 
Io5 
O 
II5 
125 
 
598,924 
3. 
spindle carried by the nozzle in axial relation the head to close the cavity therein and to 
thereto and projecting through and beyond conceal the upper extremity of the spindle 
the open mouth of its liquid-passage, a slid- and the check device, substantially as de 
able and rotatable head having its lower flar-scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
5 ing surface ribbed spirally and terminating 
in a Sp apex adapted to seat upon the in presence of two witnesses. 
mouth of the nozzle and provided in its up 
per side with a cavity in which terminates 
the upper end of the spindle on which the 
Io head is fitted loosely, a check device attached 
to the spindle, and a cap-plate connected to 
A. ERWIN, 
B. F. COLLINS. 
 
I5 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE C. HALE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599025.txt	No Model.) 
( 
 
 
z?? ? 
?? 
K, A STUR GES & I. LE AYCRAFT. 
GAME APPARATUS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
?????????? ?? 
es 
:k 
(No Model.) 
K. A. STURGES & I. LEAYCRAFT, 
GAME APPARATUS 
- 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 599,025, 
Patented Feb. 15, 1898. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT ?????. 
KATHERINE A. STURGES, OF WILTON, AND IDA LEAYCRAFT, OF 
NORWALK, CONNECTICUT. 
GAME APPARATUS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,025, dated February 15, 1898. 
Application filed April 28, 1897, 
To all typh???, i?; ??? ????ce7?: 
Be it known that we, KATHERINE A. STUR 
GES, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Wilton, and IDA. LEAYCRAFT, a subject of 
the Queen of Great Britain, residing at Nor 
Walk, in the county of Fairfield, State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Game Apparatus, of 
which the following is a description, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, and 
to the letters of reference marked thereon. 
Our invention comprises a new and original 
game which we have entitled the World's 
Produce Exchange, for the reason that it is 
played With an apparatus comprising maps 
correctly showing different geographical divi 
Sions or countries of the World and With small 
representations of the products of said coun 
tries. Each product is also correctly labeled, 
and on either side of the map are written 
names of the different countries or divisions, 
with a list of their various products. The 
products of the list are numbered, and num 
bers corresponding to these are placed upon 
the map, showing thereby the correct geo 
graphical positions of product. An indicator 
With a freely-moving handisprovided with a 
list of products. Each product on the indicator 
is given a value in numbers, written with the 
dollar-sign, which price represents the money 
value given in exchange for the products. 
The indicator when put in motion will stop 
opposite one or the other of these products. 
If the product which the indicator stops at is 
in the country or division of the player, he 
marks the price or number specifying the 
value of the product on the credit side of the 
tally. If the product which the indicator 
stops at is not in the country of the player, 
the loss is marked on the debit side of the 
tally. The player first scoring the designated 
total Wins the game. 
The object of our invention is not only to 
produce a new and entertaining game, but at 
the same time one which carries with it a 
useful study and which will be highly valu 
able in kindergartens and schools, as it is 
calculated to extend and fix the knowledge 
of geography in the mind, together with use 
 
Serial No. 634,273, (No model.) 
ful information concerning the chief prod- 5o 
ucts of the various countries. It also supple 
ments the study of arithmetic in a pleasing 
late. 
The illustration accompanying the appli 
cation shows the general principle of the in- 55 
vention and is sufficient for the explanation 
thereof; but it will be understood that only 
a few of the principal products of the several 
countries are enumerated, and that for pur 
poses of study the apparatus may be simpli- 6o 
fied or may be extended to a much greater 
extent, that instead of maps representing the 
World a map embodying one country or divi 
sion of a country may be used, in which in 
stance the counters will be more numerous 65 
and indicate each of said products, as in the 
present instance, by some characteristic of 
form or marking. By this arrangement a 
geographical study can be extended from that 
of the principal products of the whole world 7o 
to the specific products of specified divisions 
thereof and a regular course of instruction 
be pursued in a new and entertaining manner. 
In addition to the general designations 
shown in the accompanying map by Way of 75 
illustration when lesser territory is employed 
upon an increased scale of illustration not 
only are the products marked upon said map, 
but they are also located as nearly as possi 
ble at the points upon said territory which 8o 
are the chief sources of the product indicated. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a plan view of the principal geographical 
divisions of the world, including also two 
indexes of the principal products thereof. 85 
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the indicator. Fig. 
3 is a view showing in elevation representa 
tions of the various products in the form of 
Counters. 
tries of the World, each one of which is pro 
vided with two or more numbers. 
B and C are indexes enumerating under 
headings designating the different countries 
the names of the different products thereof, 95 
the name of each product being followed by 
a number, which number corresponds with 
the numbers upon the map. 
In Fig. 1. A represents the different coun- 9o 
- 
35 
to 
5 
IO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
Fig. 3 shows a number of counters, as fol 
lows: D is a sack marked Oats, which is 
preferably made of fabric and stuffed and 
tied at the top to represent a sack. E is a 
small barrel which would ordinarily be turned 
from a piece of wood and ornamented as de 
sired. This is marked Oil. Eindicates 
a small box which is marked Tea. G is 
another small sack, marked Wheat. His 
another barrel, marked Tobacco, which may 
be of a different color from the barrel repre 
senting oil. Iis another sack, marked Corn. 
J is a small barrel marked Molasses. K 
is a box marked Oranges, which is prefer 
ably made of oblong form to resemble the 
Orange-box of commerce. Lisa counter made 
in the form of a roll and is marked Hides. 
Mis another barrel marked Sugar. These 
counters may be made of any material, al 
though we prefer to embody in their con 
Struction some indication of the substances 
represented whenever that can conveniently 
be done. 
Fig. 2 shows an indicating device which 
comprises a base N, in the center of which 
is pivotally mounted a freely-rotatable hand 
1. In a circle around the hand are arranged 
the names of the different products, as at P, 
With a price-list Q opposite each. The hand 
is turned and thereby set in motion, and 
When its momentum is exhausted the name 
of the product nearest the pointer n is an 
nounced and the player holding the same 
Will place the counter representing it upon 
the map where indicated by the tally-num 
bers, scoring the price assigned upon the in 
dicator to the counter. As shown in said 
Fig. 2, the pointer has stopped in front of 
Gloves, opposite which appears the sum of 
$10.00,' which is the amount to be added to 
the score of the player in whose country 
gloves are made. The hand, or pointer n is 
then again started, and the product nearest 
to Which it stops is again announced and the 
player holding the counter scores, and so on. 
The player first reaching the designated to 
tal score wins the game. 
The indicator may be operated by a person 
not playing the game, but the usual method 
is for each player to spin the indicator in 
turn. If the player whose turn it was to spin 
the indicator is operating the territory in 
which the product indicated is found, he 
places the counter indicating said product 
upon the imap at the point indicated by the 
corresponding number or mark upon the map 
and upon the counter and adds to his score 
the value assigned to said product upon the 
indicator, and the player first tallying the 
designated total wins the game. In many 
instances both debit and credit are employed, 
So that in case the indicator stops nearest to 
a product not emanating from the country as 
signed to the player whose turn it was to spin 
the indicator he will debit himself with the 
price of the product, and the game may be 
played by the person holding the territory 
producing the product called for by the spin 
of the indicator by any other player credit 
ing the value thereof to his score, while the 
player spinning the indicator debits himself 
With a like amount. 
Only a few of the products marked upon the 
indicator and enumerated in indexes B and 
C are shown in Fig. 3; but they are sufficient 
for illustration, it being understood that 
counters will be provided to represent any 
and all products which the game may be made 
to include. 
The geographical features of the game, to 
gether with products of the several countries, 
are the leading features of the invention, and 
these we claim, broadly. It will be obvious, 
however, that various modifications may be 
made in view of the foregoing without the 
exercise of invention. 
We claim 
1. Agame comprising a chart or charts rep 
resenting geographical divisions or countries, 
each provided with tally-marks, counters in 
dicating the products of said countries and 
each marked to correspond With the tally 
marks upon a chart, and an indicator adapt 
ed to arbitrarily designate one product at a 
time. 
2. A game comprising a chart or charts rep 
resenting geographical divisions or countries, 
each provided with tally-marks, counters in 
dicating the products of said countries and 
each marked to correspond with the tally 
marks upon a chart, and an indicator adapt 
ed to arbitrarily designate one product at a 
time, and also a number or value, which lat 
ter Constitutes the score. 
3. A game comprising a map or chart show 
ing geographical divisions or countries, each 
country provided with numbers, an index 
showing the products of said countries, each 
product bearing a number corresponding with 
numbers upon the map indicating the coun 
try where it is produced, counters indicating 
the products of said countries, and an indi 
cator adapted to arbitrarily designate one 
productata time, and also a number or value, 
which latter is credited or adapted to the 
SCOe. 
4. A game comprising a chart or charts rep 
resenting geographical divisions or countries, 
each provided with tally-marks, counters 
formed or marked to indicate different prod 
ucts of said countries, and an indicator adapt 
ed to arbitrarily designate one product at a 
time, and also a number or value, which lat 
ter Constitutes the score. 
5. A game comprising a map or chart show 
ing different geographical divisions or coun 
tries, each country provided with tally-marks, 
an index showing the products of said coun 
tries, each product bearing a mark corre 
Sponding with those on the map indicating 
the country where it is produced, counters 
indicating the products of Said countries, and 
75 
95 
IC 
d 
II 
2 
I2. 
2 
599,025 
55 
 
599,025 
3. 
an indicator comprising a list of said prod- 
ucts, and a score-number for each product, tures in presence of two witnesses. 
and a movable device adapted to be operated 
by each player in turn to arbitrarily desig- 
IDA ITLEAYORAE'T. 
nate one product at a time, the number of 
MAE CHOLWELL PRICE, * 
which is credited or adapted to the score of 
the player operating the indicator. 
HENRY P. PRICE, 
Witnesses: 
. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
. 
. KATHERINE A. STURGES. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599125.txt	 
H. H. FEFEL. 
MEANS FOR PROPELLING.. WESSELS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
h 
Patented Feb. 15, 1898. 
ZEZI 
L 
ZZZZZZZ??? 
%% 
|| 
N 
ZZZZZ 
% 2^1) 
22 
N 
(No Model.) 
No. 599,125, 
 
 
WITNESSES 
ATTORNEY 
re of Bis PEtreRs co. PHoTo-LITHO... w ASHINGroN, O. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 599,125, 
  
H. H. FEFEL. 
MEANS FOR PROPELLING WESSELS 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Feb. 15, 1898. 
 
 
 
RA 
l 
 
 
ATTORNEY 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY H. FEFEL, O F NEW Y ORK, N. Y. 
MEANS FOR PROPELLING VEssE Ls. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,125, dated February 15, 1898. 
Application filed April 12, 1897, Serial No. 631,876, (No model.) 
WM 
o 
2 ? 
25 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
The shaft A is directly connected with a mo 
tor, (indicated at C,) which may be of any 
Beit known that I, HENRY H. FEFEL, a citi 
preferred type of steam, electric, or gas en 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
New York, in the county and State of New 
gine. One face of the disk B is provided, as 
York, have invented certain new and useful 
shown, with a series of radial grooves or slots 
Improvements in Means for Propelling Marine 
b b' bib', the sides or walls thereof being 
slightly convergent. 
Wessels, of which the following is a specifica 
A shaft D is mounted in bearings did, ex 
tion. 
tends to and through the stern of the vessel, 
The invention herein disclosed relates to 
means for propelling marine vessels. 
and is provided at its outer end with a pro 
I have observed that while the speed of 
peller E. The shaft D, as shown, is hollow 
boats driven by the screw-propeller is gener 
and surrounds a second shaft G, which extends 
ally proportionate to the number of revolu 
to and slightly beyond the end of the shaft 
tions of the propeller in a given time such 
D, where it also is provided with a screw-pro 
peller, (indicated at K.) and preferably of 
vessels lose rather than gain in speed when 
the propellers are revolved at a very high rate, 
smaller diameter than propeller E. 
the theory being that the extraordinary rapid 
The shafts D and G are mounted in a line 
about midway the center and periphery of the 
rotation of the screw causes the formation of 
a cylinder or column of water, which being of 
disk B, and the inner end of the shaft G car 
about the diameter of the propeller and whirl 
ries a series of tapered rollers g g g, mounted 
ing therewith offers no purchase for the screw, 
On Studs on a suitable carrier H. The carrier 
and consequently retards the movement of the 
Stands adjacent the face of the disk B and 
the rollers project within the grooves or slots 
Wessel. 
The object of this invention is to provide a 
thereof. The drawings show a set of three 
construction by which this objectionable fea 
rollers for the carrier H and twelve radial 
grooves in the diskB or two sets of six grooves 
ture may be avoided, whatever the rate of 
Speed of the propeller, and, furthermore, to 
each. The rollers g g g engage and are acted 
upon Only by the set of grooves marked b b b. 
provide a simple and efficient means fortrans 
mitting the power from the motor to the pro 
Rotation of the shaft A and disk B causes 
peller-shafts. 
the shaft G and propeller Ktorotate at a speed 
double that of shaft A. This result, it is be-, 
The invention therefore consists in the use 
of two screw-propellers of different diameters 
lieved, is clearly, understood and further ex 
planation is deemed unnecessary. 
mounted one behind the other on concentric 
shafts, and means, more particularly described 
Mounted on the short shaft J is a second 
carrier L, also provided with tapered rollers 
hereinafter, whereby the shafts are rotated, 
m. m. m, which engage and are operated by 
and a relative difference of speed between the 
two rotating shafts constantly maintained. 
the set of radial grooves b'b' b'. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view showing 
By providing a distinct set of grooves for 
my improved mechanism in plan, the dotted 
the rollers of each of the carriers H and L 
line indicating the Qutline of a boat to which 
the carriers may be set so as to have the roll 
the mechanism may be applied. Fig. 2 is an 
ers' meshin a manner similar to that of the 
enlarged view, partly in section and partly in 
teeth of gear-wheels. Thus but one roller at 
elevation, of the power-transmitting mechan 
a time crosses the center of the disk B, and 
ism. Fig. 3 is a sectional view, still further 
interference between the carriers is avoided. 
enlarged, on the line as a of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is 
If but one-half the number of grooves were 
a face view of one of the roller-carriers; and 
used, the carriers would lock. 
A pinion. N is formed integrally with or 
Fig. 5 is a sectional view of one of the roller 
carriers, showing a means for adjusting the 
otherwise fixed to the carrier L and engages 
the gear-wheel F, secured to the inner end of 
?8????. 
A represents a horizontal shaft suitably 
the shaft D. The gear-wheel F being about 
mounted in bearings and having fixedly se 
double thesize of pinion Nrotation of the disk 
cured at one end thereof the disk or wheel B. B causes the hollow shaft D and propeller E 
55 
?? 
75 
95 
OO 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
599,125 
40 
45 
35 
bination of a motor, a disk driven thereby, a 
series of radial slots in said disk, a carrier 
provided with suitable rollers or projections 
engaging with each alternate slot in said disk, 
a second carrier provided with similar rollers 
or projections engaging each of the other slots 
in said disk, a pair of concentric shafts car 
rying propellers and suitable connections be 
tween said carriers and shafts whereby the 
shafts are driven substantially as described. 
2. In boat-propelling mechanism the com 
bination of a motor, a grooved disk driven 
thereby, a shaft G, having thereon a propeller 
and a suitable carrier provided with rollers or 
projections engaging the grooves in said disk, 
a second shaft parallel with the first and hav 
ing thereon a suitable carrier provided with 
rollers or projections engaging the grooves in 
said disk, and also having a pinion thereon, 
and a hollow shaft or sleeve surrounding 
shaft G, provided with a propeller and hav 
ing thereon a gear-wheel of suitable diameter 55 
engaging with the said pinion, whereby the 
propellers are operated at different speeds, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres- 6o 
ence of two witnesses, this 5th day of April, 
1897. 
HENRY II. FEFEL. 
Witnesses: 
HARRY BAILEY, 
FRANK S. OBER. 
I. ? 
2 ? 
to rotate at a speed about equal to that of 
the shaft A. 
By this construction many of the advan 
tages common to * twin screws' as ordinarily 
used are attained and in addition great econ 
omy of space. Furthermore, while each of 
the two screws exerts a propelling force of 
high efficiency for the vessel their unequal 
size and unequal speed disturb the water in 
such manner as to effectually prevent the 
formation of a column or cylinder of water, 
with its attendant ill effects, as hereinbefore 
referred to. 
It is desirable that some means be employed 
for adjusting the position of the carriers or 
the rollers with respect to the disk B. In Fig. 
5 is shown one simple method of accomplish 
ing this. The carrier is feathered on the 
shaft and abuts against a nuts, (shown in 
dotted line,) which turns on a threaded por 
tion w of the shaft. By turning the nut the 
carrier may be forced toward the disk and 
the tapered rollers advanced farther into the 
grooves b b' to take up any unnecessary play 
that might exist between said grooves and 
tapered rollers. This method of adjustment 
may be applied to either carrier. 
As the two shafts D and G. rotate in oppo 
site directions, the blades of the two screws 
should be set at opposite angles. 
It is so in 
dicated in Figs. 1 and 2. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. In boat-propelling mechanism the com 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599225.txt	( No Mode.) 
No. 599,225. 
W. C. DIMMOCK, 
STOWE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Feb. 15, 1898. 
& 
a 
2. 
a -a -ses-as a 
2 
2. 
r 
2/ III 
AeA) ississi 
Assassess 
w 
lim C 
i t 
TIETH 
C 
 
-924 Z24&t 
44.2% 
 
4%. , 's- 
7. 6/7% s. / 
(No Model.) 
W. C. DIMMOCK. 
STOWE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
 
No. 599,225. 
Patented Feb. 15, 1898. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. C. DIMMOCK, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
SOWE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,225, dated February 15, 1898, 
Application filed 0otober 11, 1897, Serial No. 654,817. (No model.) 
C 
To all whom it may concert: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM C. DIMMOCK, 
of the city of Baltimore, and State of Mary 
land, have invented certain Improvements 
in Stoves, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
This invention relates to certain improve 
ments in what are commonly known as air 
tight' stoves-that is to say, stoves having 
no grate and in which the fuel, generally wood, 
is introduced thereto through an opening at 
the top, which is covered by a removable 
hood. Where wood is used as fuel, the feed 
opening must necessarily be of considerable 
size, and when it is uncovered for the intro 
duction of fuel the draft is so interfered with 
that the smoke instead of passing through the 
stovepipe to the chimney escapes through 
the feed - opening to the room. In Letters 
Patent No. 557,775, granted to me on the 7th 
day of April, 1896, I show and describe a 
certain device whereby the escape of smoke 
to the room is prevented. Such device, briefly 
described, consists in a yielding trap - door, 
which is placed within the feed-opening and 
normally closed, but which is opened by the 
Weight of the wood in the act of feeding. 
The yielding trap-door shown and described 
in the said Letters Patent is fixed within the 
feed-opening and cannot be bodily removed 
therefrom, and this construction is open to the 
objection that should the hand be inserted 
through the feed-opening in starting the fire 
or for any other purpose it cannot be easily 
withdrawn, the trap-door automatically clos 
ing upon the hand and Wrist. It also pre 
vents the withdrawal of a piece of wood 
should it be too long or too thick to allow of 
its passage entirely through the door to the 
bottom of the stove. In the present inven 
tion I obviate this defect by placing in the 
feed-opening a supporting-ring for the trap 
door and hanging the door on the upper sur 
face of the ring in such manner that it may 
be lifted out of the stove, the supporting-ring 
being left in place. 
The present invention therefore consists, 
first, in seating the trap-door on a ring which 
is held within the feed-opening, and, secondly, 
in making the door liftable from the ring, as 
hereinafter described. 
In the further description of the said in 
vention which follows reference is made to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
hereof, and in which 
Figure 1 is an exterior side view of the stove 
embodying the presentimprovement with por 
tions thereof torn away to show the interior. 
Fig. 2 is a top view of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an 
enlarged top view of the invention. Fig. 4 
is a cross-section of Fig. 3, taken on the dot 
ted line aca. Fig. 5 is an enlarged top view 
of the supporting-ring alone. Fig. 6 is an 
enlarged edge view of one section of the trap 
door as seen from the center thereof. Fig. 7 
is an enlarged under side view of one sec 
tion of the door. 
Referring now to the drawings, A is the 
body of the stove, having the legs C. The 
body is unprovided with a grate, and the bot 
tom plate b has a hole therein covered by a 
sliding plate, (not shown,) and an ash-drawer 
underneath. 
B is the stovepipe, and C the draft-pipe, 
which opens into the stove, near the bottom 
thereof, as shown in Fig. 1. 
The feed-opening in the top plate c is de 
noted by D, and the removable covering-hood 
by E. 
F is a ring adapted to fit closely within the 
feed-opening D, provided with legs d, which 
rest on the flange e, formed by the annular 
projection of the top plate of the stove within 
the feed-opening. The object of the legs d 
is to elevate the supporting-ring to allow of 
the operation of the trap-door G, hereinafter 
described. 
The trap-door G consists of two sheet-metal 
semicircular plates f, which together have a 
diameter slightly less than that of the inte 
rior of the supporting-ring. To the under 
side of each of these semicircular plates f is 
secured a casting H, which forms not only the 
pintles g, which rest in depressions h in the 
supporting-ring, but also a counterbalancing 
weight, which, in connection with a stop i, 
extending beyond the circumference of the 
casting and resting in a depression i in the 
supporting-ring, serves to retain the plate in 
a horizontal position, as shown particularly 
in Figs. 3 and 4. The castings Hare attached 
to the semicircular plates by means of rivets 
le. The supporting-ring F may be secured 
within the feed-opening or merely laid there 
- 
30 
35 
49 
45 
 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
2 
599,225 
25 
depressions in the said ring, substantially as 
specified. 
3. In a stove, the top wall or plate thereof 
having a feed-opening, combined with a trap 
door formed of two semicircular plates, each 
having a casting secured to its under side 3O . 
which consists of a counterbalancing-weight 
and two pintles, the said pintles resting in 
depressions formed in the upper surface of 
the supporting-ring, Substantially as Speci 
fied. 
4. In a stove, the top wall or plate thereof 
having a feed-opening, combined With a ring 
seated in the said opening, and a trap-door 
in two semicircular sections, each having a 
casting secured to its under side, the said cast 
ings comprising a counterbalancing-Weight, 
two pintles, and a stop to prevent the door 
from rising at the center above a horizontal 
position, substantially as specified. 
35 
WILLIAM C. DIMMOCK. 
Witnesses: 
WM. B. BOGART, 
R. W. MULLOY. 
O 
in as described. The supporting-ring being 
elevated on legs the door is free to swing, the 
castings passing over the flange e, as shown 
by the dotted lines in Fig. 4. 
From the foregoing description it will be 
understood that either or both of the trap 
door sections may be lifted out of the feed 
opening and clear of the supporting-ring. 
Consequently if the hand should be caught 
by the door the sections will only be lifted 
from their seats in the withdrawal of the hand. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a stove, the top Wall or plate thereof 
having a feed-opening, combined with a door 
supporting ring within the said opening, and a 
liftable trap-door supported by and within the 
ring, Substantially as Specified. 
2. In a stove, the top wall or plate thereof 
having a feed-opening, combined with a ring 
within the said opening, provided with pintle 
depressions in its upper surface, and a trap 
door formed of two semicircular plates with 
castings secured to their under side, the said 
castings having pintles adapted to rest in the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599325.txt	(No Model.) 
E. J. FITZGER ALD, 
PICTURE SUPPORTER, 
No. 599,325. 
Patented Feb. 22, 1898. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD J. FITZGERALD, OF EVERETT, MASSACHUSETTS, 
PCTURE SUPORTER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,325, dated February 22, 1898. 
Application filed June 10, 1897, Serial No, 640,183, (No model.) 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all, whom it. Tay concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD J. FITZGER 
ALD, a citizen of the United States, residing 
in Everett, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvementsin Picture-Sup 
porters, of which the following, taken in con 
nection with the accompanying drawings, is 
a Specification. 
The object of this invention is to obtain a 
device for hanging pictures or other articles, 
which device Will enable a picture or other 
Supported article, after it is hung, to be raised 
to any desired point, thus avoiding the in 
convenience and trouble of altering the length 
of a picture-support and to bring the picture 
or other article to any certain line. This re 
sult is accomplished in this invention, as here 
inafter more fully set forth, by means of a 
spring-slide provided with means for attach 
ing thereto the picture or other article to be 
Supported and moving freely in an upward 
direction upon a vertical rod suspended from 
the picture-molding or any other point of the 
wall, but prevented from moving downward 
on this rod while the rod is in the position 
which it normally has when suspended and 
capable of moving freely in both directions 
when the rod is given a quarter movement of 
rotation. 
In the accompanying drawings a device is 
represented which embodies the principle of 
my invention, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of the device, show 
ing a picture Supported by the same. Fig. 2 
is a side view of the supporting-rod and a 
sectional view of the slide. Fig. 3 is a view 
of the front of the supporting-rod when turned 
to permit the free movement of the slide, and 
Fig. 4 is a front view of the slide. 
In the several figures the same numerals 
refer to the same parts. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 is a rod pro 
vided at one end with a means for suspend 
ing the rod from any point on the Wall in such 
a manner that the same slide will normally 
be outward. 
When the room is provided with a picture 
molding, a convenient device for this pur 
ose is the wide hook 2, which obviously acts 
to prevent the rotation of the rod. Upon 
either the front or the rear side of this rod 
are a series of teeth or notches 3, each having 
the side which is uppermost when the rod is 
suspended in a plane at right angles to the 
rod and its other side inclined toward the 
other end of the rod. The slide is shown at 
4. It may be formed in any suitable manner 
and is provided with perforations for the pas 
Sage of the rod 1 through the slide, which per 
forations maintain the slide at right angles 
to the rod and permit the rotation of the slide 
in the rod. Upon the slide is a spring-tongue 
6, bent inward, so that its lower edge strikes 
the vertical face of the tooth adjacent to the 
tongue, and thus prevents the slide from mov 
ing downward, but this tongue yields, so as 
to permit the slide to be moved upward to 
any desired point. A convenient manner of 
forming the slide is by bending a plate of 
metal into the form of an ellipsoid and stamp 
ing the tongue out of the piece of metal. A 
suitable rod is pivoted at one end to each side 
of the slide in any suitable manner, and the 
other end of the rod is provided with a hook 
7 or any other device for holding the picture 
8 or other article which is to be hung on the 
wall. If it is desired to move the slide freely 
in both directions on the rod, this may be ef 
fected by giving a quarter-rotation to the rod, 
when the teeth will be free from the tongue, 
and it will slide freely upon the smooth sur 
face of the rod. 
The slide may be placed at any point on 
the rod, and after the rod is suspended the 
slide. can be adjusted upwardly at any point, 
but cannot move downwardly unless the rod 
is quarter rotated, which movement cannot 
be given to the rod while it is suspended. 
Instead of a spring-tongue I can use any 
other suitable device for preventing the down 
Ward movement of the slide. 
As an additional safeguard against the 
downward movement of the slide I can pro 
vide a series of perforations 9 on the toothed 
side of the rod, into any one of which a pin 10 
maybe inserted to hold the slide in position. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Tetters Pat 
ent of the United States, is 
1. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of a straight rod, means on said rod for 
suspending the same from a point on the Wall 
and preventing it from rotating; a series of 
55 
o 
75 
90 
95 
. OO 
 
2 
599,825 
ratchet-teeth on one side of this rod, each 
having a straight side and an inclined side, 
inclined in the direction which is downward 
when the rod is suspended, a slide moving on 
said rod and turning on the axis of the same; 
means on said slide for permitting the up 
ward movement of the slide but preventing 
its downward movement when the rod is sus 
pended; arms each pivoted at One end to op 
posite sides of the slide, and means on each 
arm for the support of the suspended article. 
2. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of a straight rod; a hook in the end of 
said rod for suspending the same from a pic 
ture-molding, and preventing it from rotat 
ing; a series of ratchet-teeth on one side of 
this rod each having a straight side and an 
inclined side and all inclined in the direction 
which is downward when the rod issuspended, 
a slide moving on said rod, and turning on 
the axis of the same, means on said slide per 
mitting the slide to be moved upward but 
preventing it from moving downward when 
the rod is suspended; arms each pivoted at 
one end to opposite sides of the slide, and 
means on each arm for the support of the Sus 
pended article. 
3. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of a straight rod; means on said rod 
for suspending the same from a point on the 
wall and preventing it from rotating, a series 
of teeth on one side of said rod each having 
O 
25 
a straight side and an inclined side and all 
inclined in the direction which is downward 
when the rod is supported; a slide moving on 
said rod and turning on the axis of the same; 
and a spring-tongue on this slide having the 
lower edge bearing against the straight side 
of the tooth adjacent to the tongue to prevent 
the movement of the slide in one direction 
but passing over the teeth when the slide is 
moved in the other direction. 
4. The combination, substantially as set 
forth, of a straight rod, a series of ratchet 
teeth on one side of the said rod each having 
a straight side and an inclined side and all 
inclined in the direction which is downward 
when the rod is suspended, a slide moving on 
said rod and turning on the axis of the same, 
means on said slide for permitting the slide 
to be moved upward but preventing it from 
moving downward when the rod is suspended, 
a series of perforations in the teeth, and a pin 
capable of insertion into any one of the per 
forations and acting as a support to prevent 
the slide from moving downward. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 4th day of June, A. D. 
1897. 
EDWARD J. FITZGERALD. 
Witnesses: 
WALTER B. BosTWICK, 
JOS. H. JACKSON. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599425.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT E. SCHMIDT, OF ELBERFELD, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO THE FARBEN 
FABRIKEN, VORMALS FR. BAYER & CO., OF SAME PLACE. 
BU Es BACK AZAR N DYE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,425, dated February 22, 1898. 
Application filed September 1, 1897, Serial No. 650,419, (Specimens.) Patented in Germany October 14, 1894, No, 84,509; 
in France December 3, 1894, No. 243,316 in England December 8, 1894, No. 23,927, and in Italy December 31, 1894, 
XXIX, 37,890, and LXXIV, 206, 
To all, whom it inctly concei'i: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT E. SCHMIDT, 
doctor of philosophy and chemist, (assignor to 
the FARBEN FABRIKEN, VORMALS FR. BAYER 
5 & Co., of Elberfeld, Germany,) a subject of 
the Emperor of Germany, residing at Elber 
feld, Germany, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in the Manufacture of Dye 
stuffs Derived from Alizarin, (for which the 
Io aforesaid Farbenfabriken has already ob 
tained Letters Patentin Germany, No. 84,509, 
dated October 14, 1894; in England, No. 
23,927, dated December 8, 1894; in France, 
No. 243,316, dated December 3, 1894, and in 
I5 Italy, Reg. Gen., Wol. 29, No. 37,890, Reg. At 
test, Vol. 74, No. 206, dated December 31, 
1894,) of which the following is a clear and 
exact description. 
My invention relates to a process for pro 
2O ducing a new alizarin dyestuff, which process 
consists in, first, condensing purpurin with a 
primary aromatic amin, with or without the 
addition of suitable condensing agents, such 
as boric acid or the like, and, secondly, treat 
25 ing the condensation product thus obtainable 
with a suitable sulfonating agent. The afore 
said condensation product has most probably 
the following general formula: 
OH 
CO 
C.H.( YCH(NiR 
CO/ "NNHR, 
3O 
- 
35 xylyl, or the like. 
in which formula R represents an aromatic 
radical, such as phenyl, ortho or para tolyl, 
In carrying out this process practically I 
can proceed as follows, the parts being by 
Weight: A mixture of thirty parts of purpu 
rin, three hundred parts of anilin, and twenty 
4o parts of crystallized boric acid is heated dur 
ing from two to four hours at from 150 to 
160 centigrade in an enameled vessel pro 
vided with a stirring apparatus. By this op 
eration the boric ether of the condensation 
45 product is obtained, which for the most part 
separates from the reaction mixture during 
the process in the form of little crystals hav 
ing metallic luster. After the reaction is fin 
ished the mixture is cooled down to about 50 
50 centigrade and poured, under stirring, into a 
solution of three hundred parts of hydro 
chloric acid (15 Baum) in fifteen hundred 
parts of water, a precipitate being thus sep 
arated. The precipitate, partly consisting of 
the condensation product itself and partly of 55 
its boric ether, is filtered, washed with water, 
and dried. It can be directly sulfonated. 
In case it is desired to obtain the conden 
sation product in a chemically pure state the 
raw product is first repeatedly treated with 6o 
warm dilute soda-lye in order to decompose 
the boric ether contained therein. Then it is 
washed with cold dilute hydrochloric acid, 
dried, and crystallized from anilin. In pure 
state it represents dark glittering crystals 65 
and has the following properties: It is in 
soluble in water, in dilute acids, and in di 
lute alkali lyes, easily soluble in hot anilin 
with a violet blue, in cold pyridin and chloro 
form with a violet color, difficultly soluble in 7o 
cold alcohol, more readily soluble in hot al 
cohol with a violet color. On the addition of 
a small quantity of a concentrated soda-lye 
to the alcoholic solution the color of the lat 
ter is changed into blue green. The color of 75 
its solution in concentrated sulfuric acid is 
greenish blue and changes into violet either 
after heating for a short time or if the solu 
tion be allowed to stand for Some time. By 
heating the condensation product with sul- 8o 
furic acid of 60 Baum it is decomposed, 
purpurin being regenerated. In order to Sul 
fonate the said condensation product from 
anilin and purpurin, I can proceed as follows: 
The dry raw condensation product which is 85 
obtained, as above described, from thirty 
parts of purpurin and three hundred parts of 
anilin is ground and added, with continuous 
stirring, to four hundred parts of concentrated 
sulfuric acid, (66 Baum.) The resulting 9o 
mixture is stirred, keeping the temperature 
at from about twenty to sixty degrees centi 
grade until the precipitate obtained by pour 
ing a test portion of the mixture into a large 
quantity of Water leadily dissolves in boiling 95 
water. At this stage the above mixture is 
poured into three thousand parts of Water 
with continuous stirring. To the thus-ob 
tained mixture one hundred parts of common 
salt are added. The dyestuff thus precipi- Ioo 
2 
599,425 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
tated is filtered off and washed with a solu 
tion of common salt. Of course the sulfona 
tion of the hereinbefore-mentioned condensa 
tion product can be carried out by treating 
the latter with any other sulfonating agent 
yielding the same result. The dyestuff is 
thus obtained as a dark violet-brown paste 
and can be used in this state for dyeing and 
printing. In case it is required to prepare 
the dyestuff in dry state the paste is mixed 
with a small quantity of sodium carbonate, 
soda-lye, or the like, dried, and pulverized. 
The alkali is added in order to neutralize the 
small quantity of acid which may be con 
tained in the paste, the chemical nature of 
the dyestuff being not affected by this oper 
ation. 
The dry dyestuff has the following proper 
ties: It represents a dark powder difficultly 
soluble in cold water, readily soluble in hot 
water with a violet-red color, solublein dilute 
soda-lye With a dull violet-blue color, soluble 
in a dilute ammonia solution with a violet 
red color which turns into bluish Violet if an 
excess of ammonia liquor be added. The 
dyestuff is easily soluble in hot alcohol with 
a violet-red color which changes into violet 
blue on the addition of an excess of ammonia 
liquor and into greenish blue on adding a 
small quantity of soda-lye to the alcoholic 
solution. If a test portion of my new dye 
stuff be heated with sulfuric acid of 60 
Baum, it is decomposed, the anilin radicals 
and the sulfo groups being eliminated while 
purpurin is regenerated, which can be iso 
lated and recognized in the usual manner. 
The new coloring-matter yields from bluish 
gray to bluish-black even shades on chromium 
mordants, which shades are fast to light, to 
fulling, and against the action of acids. 
Products having nearly the same proper 
ties as the above dyestuff produced from ani 
lin and purpurin are obtained if in place of 
anilin corresponding quantities of orthotolui 
din, paratoluidin, or xylidin be used or if 
the raw commercial anilin be employed in the 
hereinbefore-defined process. As a matter 
of course other condensing agents acting in 
the same or a similar manner can be used in 
stead of boric acid used in the above exam 
ple, the general process being not altered 
thereby. It is also possible to carry out the 
condensation of purpurin and aromatic amins 
Without the addition of condensing agents. 
In this case the reaction can only be finished 
if the mixture of the two bodies be treated 
for a longer while and at a higher tempera 
ture. 
Having now particularly described my in 
vention and in what manner the same is to be 
performed, what I claim as new, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The process of producing new alizarin 
dyestuffs, which process consists in first con 
densing purpurin. With a primary amin, which 
process may be carried out under the addi 
tion of condensing agents, such as boric acid, 
7 o 
75 
and secondly treating with sulfonating agents, 
such as concentrated sulfuric acid, the thus 
obtainable condensation products having 
most probably the general formula 
CO 
CHK)CH(NiR 
NCO/NNR 
OH 
in which formula R, represents an aromatic 
radical such as phenyl, ortho or para tolyl, 
xylyl, substantially as described. 
2. The processfor producing a new alizarin 
dyestuff, which process consists in first con 
densing purpurin with anilin, which process 
may be carried out under the addition of con 
densing agents, such as boric acid, and sec 
ondly treating with sulfonating agents, such 
as concentrated sulfuric acid, the thus-ob 
tainable product of condensation having most 
probably the formula: 
CH 
{ >CH(SigE 
CO 
NNH-CH 
CO 
OH 
9o 
substantially as described. 
3. As new articles of manufacture, the aliza 
rin dyestuffs being sulfo-acids of bodies hav 
ing the general formula 
95 
CO 
C.H.K >CH(N-R 
NNH-R 
CO 
OH 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
in which formula R represents an aromatic 
radical such as phenyl, ortho or para tolyl, 
Xylyl, being decomposed under regeneration 
of purpurin when heated with a sulfuric acid 
of 60' Baum, yielding from grayish-blue to 
bluish-black shades on chromium-mordanted 
Wool, which shades are fast to light, to fulling 
and against the action of acid. 
4. The intermediate condensation product 
obtainable from purpurin and anilin, repre 
senting in pure state dark glittering crystals 
insolublein Water, in dilute acids and in dilute 
alkali lyes, easily soluble in hot anilin with a 
violet blue, in cold pyridin in chloroform and 
in hot alcohol with a violet color, soluble in 
concentrated sulfuric acid with a greenish 
blue color which by and by changes into vio 
let, being decomposed under regeneration of 
purpurin when heated with a sulfuric acid of 
60 Baum, substantially as described. 
5. As a new article of manufacture, the ali 
Zarin dyestuff being a sulfo-acid of the body 
obtained from purpurin and anilin, having 
most probably, the formula: 
/OH 
CO. . 
C.H.().C.H4Ni-CH, 
Noo/"Niii. 
6 
being in dry state a dark powder, difficultly 
soluble in cold water, readily soluble in hot 
water with a violet-red color, soluble in dilute 
soda-lye with a dull violet-blue color soluble 
in a dilute ammonia solution with a violet 
red color which turns into bluish violet on the 
addition of an excess of ammonia liquor, 
599,425 
3. 
easily Soluble in hot alcohol with a violet-red 
color which changes into violet blue on add 
ing an excess of ammonia liquor and into 
greenish blue on the addition of a small quan 
5 tity of soda-lye being decomposed under re 
generation of purpurin when heated with a 
sulfuric acid of 60 Baum, yielding from blu 
ish-gray to bluish-black even shades on chro 
mium-mordanted Wool, which shades are fast 
to light, to fulling and against the action of Io 
acids. 
ROBERT E. SCHIMDT. 
Witnesses: 
FI. F. HESS, 
OTTO. KONIG. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599526.txt	(No Model.) 
W. R. G.0RRELL 
HAT PIN. 
No. 599,526. 
Patented Feb. 22, 1898. 
28i-tuosocos 
y- 
- 
al- 
M 
3vvue wboz: 
N\\\\ax\\RSorceV, 
zz &620-ceed Azul, 
eletozive. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM R. GORRELL, OF CARSINS RUN, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO RICHARD H. WEBSTER, OF ABERDEEN, MARYLAND. 
HAT-PN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,526, dated February 22, 1898. 
Application filed April 12, 1897, Serial No. 631,713, (No model.) 
O 
15 
3o 
35 
To all whon, it nay concern. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM R. GORRELL, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Car 
sins Run, in the county of Harford and State 
of Maryland, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Hat or Shawl Pins; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
Sale. 
My invention has relation to a hat or shawl 
pin; and the object is to provide a device of 
this character by means of which the pin af 
ter it has been attached will not accidentally 
become disengaged. 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists of certain features of construction and 
combination of parts, which will be hereinaf 
ter fully set forth and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of my improved pin, and Fig. 2 
is a similar view of another form of my inven 
tion. 
In Fig. 1, 1 denotes the shank of the pin, 
which is of usual construction. At the rear 
end the shank is bent out Wardly, as shown 
at 2, thence upwardly, as shown at 3, thence 
inclined inwardly and downwardly, as shown 
at 4, thence coiled to form a spring 5. Thence 
it is bent upwardly, as shown at 6, thence 
down Wardly, as shown at 7, in Wardly, as 
shown at 8, thence downwardly, as shown at 
9, and thence inwardly and formed with a 
point, as shown at 10. This construction pro 
vides two spring-arms C, b, the energy of the 
spring being exerted to force the safety-point 
into the material when the body of the pin 
is inserted therethrough and thus prevent its 
accidental withdrawal. 
In attaching the pin its spring-arms a and 
b are grasped between the finger and thumb 
and compressed to raise the safety-hook away 
from the shank of the pin. The pin is then 
inserted into the goods and by releasing the 
pressure of the spring-arms C and b the spring 
55 
75 
will force the hook into the goods and pre 
vent the removal of the pin until the said arms 
are compressed together. 
In the construction shown in Fig. 2 I have 
formed the shank of the pin with an eye c, 
adapted to receive the safety-hook. This 
construction will more effectually prevent the 
accidental disengagement of the safety-hook 
with the material through which the pin has 
been passed. 
Although I have specifically described the 
construction and relative arrangement of the 
several elements of my invention, I do not 
desire to be confined to the same, as such 
changes or modifications may be made as 
clearly fall within the scope of my invention 
Without departing from the spirit thereof. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Tetters Pat 
ent, is 
1. The herein-described pin provided with 
the diverging Spring-arms C, b, the pin-shank 
1, connected to one of said arms and the 
Safety-point 10 connected to the other arm, 
Said point 10, normally lying across the plane 
of the shank 1 to hold the pin into the mate 
rial, the arms C, b, serving to withdraw the 
oint 10, when pressed together, substantially 
as described. 
2. The herein-described pin provided with 
the diverging spring-arms a, b, the pin-shank 
I having the eye c, said shank connected to 
One of said arms, and the safety-point 10 con 
nected to the other arm, said point 10 nor 
mally projecting through the eye c and lying 
across the plane of the shank 1 to hold the pin. 
into the material, the arms a, b when pressed 
together serving to withdraw the point 10, sub 
stantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
WM. R. GORRELL 
Witnesses: 
R. H. WEBSTER, 
D. K. PRITCHARD, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599626.txt	(No Model.) 
N, NEILSON. 
BUCKLE, 
No. 599,626. 
Patented Feb. 22, 1898. 
5 eG 
IHETI 
at S 
  
 
 
W6ts 
Iperior 
Melson 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NELS NELSON, OF LITCHFIELD, MINNESOTA. 
BUCKLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,626, dated February 22, 1898. 
Application filed March 23, 1897, Serial No. 628,908, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern 
Beit known that I, NELSNELSON, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Litchfield, in 
the county of Meeker and State of Minnesota, 
have invented a new and useful Buckle, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention provides means forlocking 
the tongues of buckles, whereby their posi 
tion is fixed and the tongue held against 
movement, which is objectionable for many 
reasons. In double harness the buckles for 
securing the side or branch lines to the main 
lines, not being subjected to tension at all 
times and flopping about with the reins, fre 
quently have their tongues move away from 
the buckle-frame and engage with parts of the 
harness or with fly-nets to the annoyance of 
the driver and discomfort of the team. It is 
the purpose of this invention to overcome 
these objectionable features and to combine 
with the tongue a means for securing or 
locking it when applied, thereby holding 
the tongue in positive engagement with the 
buckle-frame at all times and under all con 
ditions except when released at the will of 
the teamster or person adjusting the buckle 
or harness. 
For a full understanding of the merits and 
advantages of the invention reference is to 
be. had to the accompanying drawings and 
the following description. 
The improvement is susceptible of various 
changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction without de 
parting from the principle or sacrificing any 
of the advantages thereof, and to a full dis 
closure of the invention an adaptation there 
of is shown in the accompanying drawings, 
in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a buckle 
constructed in accordance with this inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is a top plan view thereof, the 
dotted lines showing the position of the lock 
ing-arms when disengaged from the buckle 
frame. Fig. 3 is a side elevation, the dotted 
lines showing the position assumed by the 
locking-arms prior to swinging them into en 
gagement with the keepers provided on the 
Corresponding and like parts are referred 
to in the following description and indicated . 
in the several views of the drawings by the 
Same reference characters, 
buckle-frame. 
" 
. 
. 
75 
The buckle-frame, which maybe of any con 
figuration, according to its location and use, 55 
is shown as of rectangular form and has a 
middle cross-bar 1, a brace-bar 2, and keep 
ers 3 at one end. The intermediate bar I is 
channeled in its outer side, as shown at 4, to 
receive the outwardly-extending members 5, 
forming a part of the tongue 6, and openings 
are provided in the side bars of the frame in 
line with the channel 4 for the passage of the 
parts 5. A locking-arm 7 is applied to the 
outer portion of each part 5 and extends about 
parallel with the tongue 6 and is elastic to 
admit of its free end being sprung into en 
gagement with the keeper 3, thereby locking 
the tongue 6 in engagement with the end bar 
of the buckle-frame. The Cross-bar I braces 
the parts 5 and sustains the strain of the 
strap or branchline connected therewith. By 
making the parts 5 sufficiently stout the part 
1 may be dispensed with, and such construc 
tion is contemplated within the scope of the 
invention, although not preferred. 
The tongue 6, outwardly-extending parts 
5, and locking-arms 7 are integrally formed 
and constitute parts of a single wire which is 
doubled upon itself and twisted for a short 
distance, forming the tongue, thence having 
its end portions bent outwardly, forming the 
parts 5, and again bent to extend parallel, or 
nearly so, with the tongue 6, whereby the lock 
ing-arms 7 are formed. For all intents and 
purposes a single locking-arm may be em 
ployed; but it is preferred to have two, there 
by equalizing the strain and providing a 
buckle of like appearance from either side. 
The locking-arms and tongue are so related 
that when the end portion of the tongue is in 
engagement with the end bar of the buckle 
frame the free ends of the locking-arms stand 
away from the keepers 3, as indicated by the 
dotted lines in Figs. 2 and 3, whereby to make 
engagement with the said keepers it is nec 
essary to spring them behind the said keep 
ers, advantage being taken of the normal 
tendency of the arms to regain their normal 
position to retain them in positive engage 
ment with the said keepers. The cross-bar 
2 serves to brace the tongue and reinforce it 
at a point intermediate of its ends. 
Having thus described the invention, wha 
is claimed as new is 
1, Ina buckle, the combination of the frame, 
OO 
105 
25 
35 
45 
---...-...-- 
2 
599,626 
ment with the aforesaid keepers to retain the 
tongue in place, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a buckle, the combination of a frame 
having keepers, and a wire doubled upon 
itself and twisted together a short distance, 
forming a tongue, and having its end portions 
bent outwardly and passing through openings 
in the sides of the buckle-frame, and again 
bent, forming locking-arms to be sprung into 
engagement with the keepers, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. The herein-described buckle, comprising 
a frame having side keepers at one end, a 
cross-bar grooved in One side, and a brace-bar 
intermediate of the cross-bar and an end bar 
of the frame, and a wire doubled upon itself 
and twisted together, forming a tongue, and 
having its end portions bent outwardly and 
seated in the groove of the cross-bar, and pass 
ing through openings in the side bars of the 
buckle-frame, and bent about parallel with 
the tongue, and adapted to have the termi 
nals of the outer bent ends sprung into en 
gagement with the aforesaid keepers, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
NELS NEILSON. 
Witnesses: 
EDW. P. PETERSON, 
LUCY BURKE. 
35 
45 
55 
a tongue pivoted to the frame, a spring lock 
ing-arm exterior to the buckle-frame and con 
nected to a journal of the pivoted tongue, and 
a keeper provided on the frame to engage 
with the free end of the locking-arm and hold 
it and the tongue in a normal position against 
turning backward, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
2. In a buckle, the combination of a frame 
having lateral keepers at one end, a tongue 
having oppositely- extending parts forming 
journals obtaining bearings in the side bars 
of the frame, and spring locking-arms exte 
rior to the buckle-frame and integral with the 
journals of the pivoted tongue and adapted 
to engage with the aforesaid keepers and hold 
the tongue closed, substantially in the man 
ner set forth for the purpose described. 
3. In a buckle, the combination of a cross 
bar having a groove, a tongue having out 
wardly-extending portions seated in the said 
groove, and a locking-arm having connection 
with an outwardly-extending portion of the 
tongue, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
4. In a buckle, the combination of a frame 
having keepers and provided with a cross 
bar having a groove, a tongue having out 
Wardly-extending portions seated in the said 
groove, and spring locking-arms applied to the 
outer ends of the said outwardly-extending 
parts and adapted to be sprung into engage 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599726.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANZ NONNENMACHER, OF SPADRUCKEN, GERMANY. 
S2 N.G. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,726, dated Starch i, 1898. 
Application filed June 6, 1896. Serial No. 594,518. (Specimens.) Patented in Germany June 10, 1896, No. 86,688, 
5 der it stretchable. 
To all whon, it naty concern 
Beit known that I, FRANZNONNENMACHER, 
a resident of Spabricken, Germany, have in 
vented a certain new and useful Sizing for 
5 Use in the Manufacture of Stretchable Paper, 
(for which I have obtained Letters Patent in 
Germany, No. 86,688, dated June 10, 1896;) 
and I declare that the following is such a full, 
clear, and exact description of the mode or 
Io manner of making or compounding and using 
the said sizing as will enable those skilled in. 
the art to make and use the same. 
The object of my invention is to produce a 
sizing for treating a paper-like fabric to ren 
In preparing the sizing I preferably pro 
ceed as follows: I take ingredients as follows 
in substantially the following proportions, to 
wit: fifty parts 9f wax, eighteen parts of tur 
20 pentine or resinous matter, twelve parts of 
animalfat, such as tallow, lard, &c.; ten parts 
of ruinous soap, sixty-three parts of caustic 
soda, one hundred parts of oil, preferably 
vegetable oil, such as linseed-oil or poppy 
-In preparing the compound just described 
I preferably proceed as follows: The wax is 
dissolved in the caustic soda and water and 
the other constituents of thesizing are gradu 
3o ally added, the whole mixture being diluted 
In the 
by the water, which should be warm. 
course of this proceeding the resin is acted 
upon by the caustic soda, and resin-soap is 
produced. The sizing which is thus obtained 
35 may be applied to pulp in various ways. It 
may be incorporated in the pulp while the 
pulp is in the vat or while the pulp is in the 
cylindrical paper-mill, and the pulp may be 
subsequently manipulated to form it intopa 
40 per, or the sizing may be applied to the pulp 
25 oil, and one thousand parts of water. 
while it is in the form of a sheet or bat, or 
ordinary paper may be treated by passing it 
through a bath of the sizing. The fabric pro 
duced by the treatment of the pulp or paper 
with the sizing may be calendered or other- 45 
wise manipulated, and may likewise, if de 
sired, be stiffened by suitable stiffening sub 
stance-such, for instance, as starch or kao 
lin-mixed with a suitable metallic salt, which 
in the preparation of white or light-colored 5o 
papers will be sulfate of zinc and for colored 
papers sulfate of copper or of iron, or, in 
stead of these salts, chlorid of sodium or mu- . 
riate of baryta. The stiffening substance 
may be added to the sizing, if desired, and 5S 
the materials of the sizing, together with the 
metallic salts used, will bring the starch to a 
tough and elastic glue-like eonsistency. 
The fabric produced can be used as ordi 
nary paper, and can be marked on if properly 6o 
surfaced, and can be stretched in all direc: 
tions without resuming its former shape. 
Because it possesses the quality of being eas 
ily stretched, this parchment-like paper is 
especially adapted for use in all situations 65 
where paper is employed and is of particular 
use in bookbinding, the manufacture of fancy 
goods, wall-papers, &c., and for all work in 
which the use of ordinary non-stretchable 
paper is impossible or at least very limited. 7o 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
A sizing for the treatment of a pulp sheet 
to render the same stretchable comprising 
wax, animal fat, caustic soda, oil, resin-soap 75 
and water. 
FRANZ NONNENMACHIER, 
Witnesses: 
JEAN GRUND, 
CHRISTIAN GEISS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599826.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 599,826. 
A. B. BLACK. 
CART BODY, 
Patented Mar, l, 1898. 
  
TOOOL 
? zi, 
gly 
 
 
N 
 
A2 
*-A 
les 
HESISIHI. 
6. 
Fi ?. 4. 
Fi ?.l. 
2 
 
 
S. c 
8 o 
d 0. 8 d 
o O K 
8. 
   
 
 
 
eze 
zs 
2ZA) 
I146AIU). 
In SW 
az Zaz 
Fi ?. 5. 
co 
6a 
  
  
  
Witnesses. 
642...e6, 
-//WaA (, 
E 
en to R: 
24.2/3. 2.-- 
4-6-446-4 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT B. BLACK, OF LEXINGTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
CART. BODY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,826, dated March 1, 1898. 
Application filed May 11, 1897, Serial No. 636,004. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALBERT B. BLACK, of 
Lexington, in the county of Middlesex and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement, in Carts, of which 
the following is a specification. 
Wagon and cart bodies, while sometimes wa 
ter-tight, do not long remain so, for being made 
entirely of wood (so far as I have seen) the 
planking swells and shrinks according to the 
amount of dampness which the wood absorbs, 
and if the wooden floor is made absolutely 
tight when the body is dry, when it is wet the 
floor and side walls swell, and hence become 
bulgy and are liable to crack and sometimes 
even spring out of place. When shrinking 
takes place after this amount of swelling, it 
is usually found that the joints are imper 
fectly closed and the cart is no longer water 
tight. This of course may not take place un 
til after the cart has been used for some lit 
tle time, but when it does occur the cart be 
comes useless for Water-tight purposes. My 
improvement is intended-to overcome this 
fault; and it consists in providing the floor and 
the walls of the cart-body with strips of sheet 
iron or other metal, which overlap the wooden 
joints, and thus make it possible to so con 
struct the cart that it will be water-tight and 
at the same time so that the woodwork may 
expand and shrink without changing the level 
of the floor or sides. 
My improvement also consists in providing 
a tail2boardholder which by reason of its cam 
like construction may jam the tail-board as 
tightly as possible against the rear of the cart 
body and so make a practically Water-tight 
joint between it and the tail of the cart. 
My invention will be understood by refer 
ence to the drawings, in which 
Figure I is a side view, and Fig. 2 a rear 
view, of a cart-body embodying my inven 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section on line 33 of 
tion. 
Fig. 1. Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7 are sectional de 
tails, Fig. 4 being a section on line 44 of Fig. 
2, Fig. 5 being a section on line 55, and Fig. 
6 a modification of one of the tail-boardhold 
ers, and Fig. 7 a section on line 77 of Fig. 2. 
A is the wagon-body, which consists of a 
floor, sides, and front made of planking in 
the ordinary shape and manner, except that 
where the edges of the planks a abut against 
each other or against sills a' the joint is cov 
ered by a metallic strip B, which is counter 
sunk into the abutting portions, as will be 
clearly understood from Fig. 3. This con 
struction is also carried out at the joining of 
the walls of the cart with the floor, as will 
also be seen from Fig. 3, metallic angle-strips 
B' being provided for this purpose. The me 
tallic strips in each case are suitably attached 
to the Woodwork. Being countersunk, they 
have a smooth water-tight finish, but allow 
a certain amount of expansion and contrac 
tion without changing the water-tight char 
acter of the cart. The tail-board C is con 
structed in the same manner with a metallic 
strip c at the bottom, the bottom being chan 
neled and the end of the floor of the cart be 
ing also channeled, so that they will fit to 
gether, as shown in Fig. 7. The tail-board 
is held in place by cam connections, which 
are convenient also for use in other kinds of 
CartS. 
In place of the ordinary tail-board pin, be 
tween which and the end of the cart one end 
of the tail-board ordinarily fits, I provide a 
tail-board pin in the form of a vertical cam 
D, set at its bottom into one of the sills D' 
and at the top into one of the side raves D. 
This cam D may be made in the form of an 
eccentric cylinder, as shown, d being its axis, 
and it is provided with a handled. Its cam 
like construction and operation will be seen 
from Fig. 5, in which it is shown in two posi 
tions, its position in full lines binding the 
tail-board C against the rear edge of one side 
of the cart and its position in dotted lines 
showing it when turned so as to release the 
tail-board. At the otherend of the tail-board 
I have also shown a cam arrangement for 
binding it against the rear edge of the cart. 
In this case, E is a shank having a hooke at 
its outer end, which may be made either with 
a plane face, as shown in Fig. 1, or with a 
cam-shaped face, as shown in Fig. 6. Its 
shank is hung in eyes E" E, attached to the 
posts of the cart, and it is provided with a 
handle E. F is a block which, in the form 
shown in Figs. 1 and 2, is provided with a 
cam-surface, this surface being formed about 
an openingfthrough the block and tail-board, 
suitably shaped and just large enough to pass 
over the hooke. It will be seen that on pass 
O 
25 
35 
45 
95 
Ioo 
2 
599,826 
55 
65 
75 
O 
ing the opening fover the hooke and turning 
the hook by means of the handle E, so that 
it will ride up on the cam-surface, the tail 
board will be clamped tightly against the 
lear edge of the cart. The same result will 
take place if the hook is provided with a cam 
surface, as shown in Fig. 6, in which case, 
however, the block F should have a plane 
Surface. Another way of accomplishing this 
result, is by so constructing the shank E and 
One of the eyes E that a cam-surface will be 
formed, as shown at e', Figs. I and 4. By 
turning the handle down the cam-surface will 
draw the shank back, so that the hook will 
bind the tail-board against the cart. The 
operation of putting this tail-board C in place 
is as follows: The cam D being open and the 
hooke being properly turned to pass through 
the opening f, one edge of the tail-board is 
slipped in behind the cam D and the opening f 
in the other end is slipped over the hook e. 
By turning the cam D into position shown in 
Fig. 5 it is caused to bind against the rear 
edge of the cart, and by turning the handle 
E in the same way its edge of the tail-board 
will be caused to bind against the rear edge 
of the cart, so that the water-tight joint may 
be formed. 
The added expense of this construction is 
Very slight, and on the other hand the value 
of this invention is very great, for it enables 
a cart to be built which is not only water 
tight at the start, but with ordinary wear and 
tear will remain so for a very long time by 
reason of the fact that those portions of the 
cart which ordinarily are subjected to the 
greatest amount of wear and tear, due to the 
expansion and contraction under the varying 
conditions of dampness and dryness, are fully 
protected by strips which will not expand and 
contract under the same conditions, but which 
will allow the wooden portions to expand and 
contract as occasion may require. Moreover, 
by binding the tail-board to the rear edge of 
the cart by means of cams-for example, in 
the manner shown-a much tighter joint can 
be made than in any other way now known 
to me. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A water-tight cart above described con 
sisting of a wooden body grooved at its joints, 
each joint being provided with a metallic strip 
fitting into its groove flush with said wooden 
body and breaking joints therewith, all as and 
for the purposes set forth. 
2. In a cart, a tail-board and a cam mechan 
ism for holding one end thereof in place, Said 
cam mechanism consisting of a shaft mounted 
horizontally on the side of the cart-body and 
having at its outer end a hook adapted to en 
gage with a portion of said tail-board, One ele 
ment of said cam mechanism being located. On 
said hook and the other upon said tail-board 
whereby upon the rotation of said shaft it and 
said hookbind said tail-board against the end 
of said cart, as set forth. 
3. In a cart, the tail-board-attaching mech 
anism above described consisting of tWO cam 
connections, one a vertical cam-shaped rod lo 
cated on one side of the tail of the cart and 
adapted to form with the rear edge of the cart 
a slot into which one end of the tail-board may 
be set and adapted to be rotated whereby said 
end of the tail-board will be bound against the 
rear edge of the cart, the other cam mechan 
ism consisting of a shaft mounted horizontally 
on the side of said cart and carrying a hook 
and bearing-surface for said hook located 
upon said tail-board, as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
4. A cart having its floor dovetailed to re 
ceive a tail-board and a tail-board adapted to 
fit the dovetail in said cart-floor and mechan 
ism consisting of two cams to bind said tail 
board to said cart with a water-tight joint, 
one of said cams consisting of a vertical cam 
shaped rod adapted to be rotated and form 
with the rear end of one side of the cart, a slot 
within which one end of the tail-board is Set, 
and the other consisting of a hook mounted 
on the end of a shaft and adapted to be turned 
thereby and engage with a cam-surface on 
one end of the tail-board, all as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my name this 10th day of May, 1897. 
ALBERT B. BLACK. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE O. G. COALE, 
E. A. GUILD. 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0500001-0600000/US599926.txt	(No Model.) 
W. F. BOWERS. 
CONCENTRATING BET, 
No. 599,926. 
Patented Mar, l, 1898. 
saaSas 
SysNNawNSSaSayNSW 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM F. BOWERS, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
ConCENTRATING-BELT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 599,926, dated March 1, 1898. 
Application filed July 22, 1897, Serial No. 645,516. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To a whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. F. Bow ERs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at San 
Francisco, in the county of San Francisco and 
State of California, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Concentrat 
ing-Belts; and I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion thereof. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in concentrating-belts 
for use in connection with that class or style, 
of concentrating-machines used for recover 
ing precious ore by what is known as wet 
concentration; and the invention is more es 
pecially an improvement in that particular 
class of flexible concentrating-belts fully set 
forth and described in an application filed by 
me on the 16th day of December, 1896, Serial 
No. 615,875, for Letters Patent of the United 
States upon an ore- concentrating belt, to 
which reference is hereby made. 
In my former application, SerialNo. 615,875, 
there is run into the rubber side flanges dur 
ing the manufacture of the concentrating 
belt an independent piece or strip of textile 
fabric or duck cut on the bias. The running 
of such a piece of textile fabric or duck, inas 
much as it is distinct or separate from the 
otherlayers of textile fabric, requires consid 
erable time and the exercise of care that the 
piece cut on the bias be properly united to 
the belt and side flange. 
The object of my present invention is to 
simplify the construction and reduce the cost 
of manufacturing such belts without destroy 
ing or removing the elasticity of the rubber 
side flange. 
Referring to the drawings forming a part 
of this application, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view showing a portion of a concentrating 
belt partly broken away, and Fig. 2 is a broken 
top plan view of one of the layers of textile 
fabric or duck used in the manufacture of the 
belt. 
In the drawings the belt is shown as being 
composed of layers A of rubber and layers B, 
B', and B of canvas, duck, or other textile 
fabric. These layers of canvas, duck, or other 
textile fabric are cut straight, so that the 
Warp-threads run parallel with or lengthwise 
of the layers of rubber. At each side of the 
ro 
25 
35 
45 
belt is formed, by means of a suitable mold, 
the upwardly-extending side flanges A", which 
side flanges are preferably made of rubber of 
purer quality than the main body or portion 
of the belt, although this is an immaterial 
feature. One of the layers of textile fabric, 
in the present instance layer B', is made some 
what wider than the belt proper, and the 
Warp-threads thereof at each edge are re 
moved in any suitable manner, so as to leave 
the woof-threads a projecting. These pro 
jecting threads form what Ishall term bind 
ing or tie threads, which are during the 
manufacture of the belt run upward or ex 
tended into the rubber side flange of the belt. 
This binding or tie thread takes the place of 
the piece or strip of textile material cut on 
the bias set forth in my former application, 
Serial No. 615,875, filed on the 16th day of 
December, 1896. 
While I prefer simply to remove the Warp 
threads from one of the layers of textile fab 
ric, so as to expose the woof-threads for a 
given distance and to extend or run the pro 
jecting Woof-threads into the rubber side, 
flanges of the belt, I do not limit myself 
thereto, for I am well aware that a series of 
strips or binding-pieces may be run from the 
belt proper and extended vertically into the 
side flanges. Consequently by the expression 
binding or tie threads I wish to be under 
stood as meaning the Woof-threads of the tex 
tile material or separate and independent 
pieces inserted into the body of the belt and 
extended vertically into the rubber side 
flanges of the said belt. By the use of these 
reinforcing binding or tie threads or strips 
the side flanges of the belt are materially 
strengthened, so as to make it nearly impos 
sible for the said flanges to break away from 
the body of the belt, and inasmuch as the re 
inforcing binding or tie threads or strips in 
serted vertically within the side flanges are 
independent of each other and not united one 
to the other they allow of the rubber side 
flanges stretching longitudinally as carried 
over the end rolls of the concentrating-ma 
chine. 
It will be observed that while I preserve the 
elasticity of the rubber side flanges I do not 
incorporate therein textile material cut on 
the bias, as in my aforesaid application, Serial 
90 
95 
Od 
599,926 
of layers of rubber and textile material hav 
ing its warp-threads removed at its edges so 
as to leave the Woof-threads exposed, rubber 
side flanges united to the body portion of the 
belt, the side flanges being reinforced and 
strengthened by extending the projecting 
Woof-threads into the side flanges. 
4. A belt having its body portion composed 
of rubber and textile material provided with 
rubber side flanges strengthened and rein 
forced by extending the woof-threads of the 
textile material of the body portion upwardly 
into the side flanges. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in presence of two witnesses, this 8th day of 
July, 1897. 
WILLIAM. F. BOWERS. 
Witnesses: 
LINCOLN SONNTAG, 
WM. J. HOW ATT. 
25 
35 
No. 615,875, filed December 16, 1896. The 
binding or tie threads or strips, while not in 
terfering with the elasticity of theside flanges, 
serve to prevent the same from breaking away 
from the body of the belt proper. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure protection 
in by Letters Patent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture a belt 
having its body portion provided with elastic 
side flanges reinforced by a series of independ 
ent flexible binding or tie threads or strips 
run from the body of the belt into the side 
flanges vertically. 
2. A belt composed of rubber and textile 
material having elastic side flanges reinforced 
by extending the woof-threads of the textile 
material of the body portion of the belt into 
the rubber side flanges. 
3. A belt having its body portion composed 
O 
(5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600030.txt	(No Model.) 
F. H. RICHARDS, 
WEIGHING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 600,030, 
Patented Mar, l, 1898, 
F. H. RICHARDS, 
WEIGHING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar, l, 1898, 
(No Model.) 
No. 600,030, 
 
Wizzeesses: 
cea./92. 
Azeeze/a27, 
THE MORRIS FEfERS CO, PHOTO-LTH), WASHINGTON, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
F. H. RICHARDS, 
WEIGHING MACHINE, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 600,030, 
Patented Mar, l, 1898, 
----------- 
----------- 
Wizzeesses: 
of ecz/.96%: 
Are e'eze (27. 
*%-46, 
 
. 
the Norris Peters co. Pho . . . it it washington.D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS H. RICHARDS, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
WEIGHN GMACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,030, dated March 1, 1898. 
Application filed August 6, 1897, Serial No. 647,302, (No model.) 
fo all, Luhon, it nudgy concern. 
Beit known that I, FRANCIS H. RICHARDS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hart 
ford, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Weighing-Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to weighing appara 
tus for automatically weighing and delivering 
various classes of free-flowing materials. 
One of the objects of the invention, in ad 
dition to Securing great rapidity and precision, 
is to furnish, in connection with two inde 
pendent Weighing mechanisms, each includ 
ing a load-receiver having a closer, two me 
ters or rough - Weighers, located above the 
Weighing mechanisms, and a duplex stream 
director actuated by the weighing mechan 
isms and including two stream - directing 
spouts unitarily shiftable upon a common 
axis into position for delivering streams of 
material from the meters or rough-weighers 
to the load-receivers alternately, and to also 
provide, in connection With said spouts, means 
effective on the movements of said spouts and 
on the descending movement of the load-re 
ceivers for gradually reducing the volume de 
livered from Said spouts to the load-receivers. 
A further object of my present invention 
is to furnish a multiplex weighing-machine 
comprehending a plurality of load-receivers, 
a main Supply apparatus, a plurality of rough 
Weighers or meters located above the load-re 
ceivers, a multiplex stream-director for di 
recting material from the rough-weighers to 
the receivers in alternating order and com 
prising a plurality of stream-directing spouts, 
a multiplex by-pass device in connection with 
the Stream-director, means operative on pre 
determined alternating movements of the 
load-receivers for actuating the multiplex 
stream-director, and means for interrupting 
the movements of the multiplex by-pass at 
predetermined points in the alternating move 
ments of said receivers. 
In the drawings accompanying and forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a front 
elevation of a multiplex Weighing apparatus 
embodying my present improvements, said 
figure showing the supply-chute valves in 
their closed positions and one of the rough 
Weigher's or meters in the position it occupies 
IO 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 . 
when discharging a load to a lower load-re. 
ceiver through the medium of one of the os 
cillatory spouts of the multiplex stream-di 
rector. Fig. 2 is a detail drawn in projection 
with Fig. 1 of the shiftable by-pass stop de 
tached. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of the 
weighing apparatus as seen from the right 
hand in Fig. 1, parts being broken away. In 
this figure, which shows certain elements of 
the machine in different positions from those 
illustrated in Fig. 1, the multiplex stream-di 
rector is shown with one of its spouts in a 
fully-open position and discharging a load 
into the left-hand load-receiver, whose closer 
is blocked against opening movement, and 
the right-hand load-receiver is shown with its 
closer open and discharging its contents, the 
stop member of this closer being in position 
for blocking the return movement of the mul 
tiplex stream-director. Fig. 4 is a side ele 
vation of a portion of the lower end of one of 
the meters, showing the duplex closer in con 
nection there with, and also showing, partially 
in section, a portion of the closer-actuator, 
said actuator being illustrated in its closer 
opening position. Fig. 5 is a side elevation 
similar to Fig. 3, showing the duplex stream 
director with one of its spouts in position for 
supplying a drip-stream to the left-handload 
receiver, and also showing the duplex by-pass 
in engagement with the by-pass stop, which 
interrupts the movement thereof until the 
load-receiver which is being filled has arrived 
at a predetermined point in its descending 
movement. In this figure the meter-closer 
actuator is shown by dotted lines in a par 
tially-retracted position, and the meter-clos 
ers are shown nearly closed. 
Similar characters designate like parts in 
all the figures of the drawings. 
The framework for supporting the various 
parts of the apparatus may be of any suitable 
character, and in the form shown comprises 
in part a base or bed 3, from which rise the 
columns or standards 2 and 4, connected at 
the top by the beam 5. 
A duplex supply chute or hopper is illus 
trated at H, it being preferably formed inte 
gral with the beam 5 and having two oppo 
sitely-disposed conduits or spouts 6 and 7 for 
delivering material to the two rough-Weigh 
ers or meters, (designated, respectively, by M. 
9o 
95 
OO 
600,030 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
and M',) which meters deliver material to the 
load-receivers G and G' of the two independ 
ent weighing mechanisms, which are desig 
nated by W and W and hereinafter described, 
the Supply from the meters to the load-receiv 
ers being controlled by a duplex stream-di 
rector (designated in a general way by S) and 
coperative devices whose constructions, or 
ganizations, and operations will be hereinafter 
fully described. 
In the form thereof illustrated in the draw 
ings the Weighing apparatus includes two in 
dependent Weighing mechanisms W and W', 
Supported on the framework side by side. 
These Weighing mechanisms are shown in the 
present instance of substantially the same 
construction and mode of operation, and there 
fore it is deemed necessary to describe but one 
of them in detail-for example, the mechan 
ism W-corresponding parts of the weighing 
mechanism W being designated by the same 
characters, with additional prime-marks. 
The Weighing mechanisms include load-re 
ceivers or buckets G and G', respectively, and 
beam mechanism for Sustaining the same, and 
said beam mechanism in the present instance 
consists of the counterweighted Scale-beams 
B and B', which are fulcrumed on the frame 
Work and will be provided with suitable sup 
ports for the load-receivers. 
The buckets or load-receivers G and G' will 
have the usual discharge-openings, which are 
controlled by the counterweighted closers L 
and L', respectively. 
For maintaining the closer in its normal or 
closed position the following instrumentali 
ties will be employed: A rocker or stop mem 
ber 12 is fixed to a rock-shaft 10, journaled 
in suitable bearings at the upper end of the 
load-receiver or bucket G, which rocker is in 
the nature of a segmental plate having an in 
tegral arm 13, to the outer end of which is 
pivoted a connecting-rod 14, said rod being 
connected at its lower end to the counter 
weighted plate 15 of the closer L. A latch 16 
is provided for engaging the rocker 12 when 
the closer is in its shut position and for hold 
ing said rocker against movement until the 
latch is tripped or thrown out of engagement 
with said rocker by means, hereinafter de 
scribed, Operated by the beam mechanism. 
This latch is shown pivotally mounted on the 
side of the load-receiver and will in practice 
be counterweighted to retain the same nor 
mally in its rocker-engaging position. 
Located above the two weighing mechan 
isms W and Ware two alternately-operative 
meters or rough-weighers M and M', which 
are herein shown in the form of buckets or 
receptacles and are adapted for discharging 
their loads into the load-receivers G and G 
of the weighing mechanisms W and W", the 
Stream of material to the two load-receivers 
G. and G' being controlled by the duplex 
stream - director, as will hereinafter be de 
scribed. The two meters are of substantially 
the same construction, organization, and Op 
eration, and therefore but one of them need 
be specifically described, corresponding parts 
in the other being indicated by the same char 
acters, with additional prime-marks. 
The meter or bucketM is supported by the 
counterweighted scale - beam 17, which is 
mounted on the usual knife-edge Support On 
the framework of the machine. Said meter 
has at the lower end thereof a discharge 
trough, the outlet of which is controlled by a 
closer or closer-valve V, which, when opened, 
as indicated in Fig. 3, will permit the contents 
of the meter to pass into one member of the 
duplex stream - director, whence it is dis 
charged into one of the load-receivers of the 
Weighing mechanisms. 
As a means for controlling the Supply of 
material to the meters M and M' the supply 
chutes or conduits 6 and 7 are shown pro 
vided with Oscillatory valves y and y', which 
may be of any suitable construction adapted 
for closing the outlets of said chutes, and 
these valves are connected by rods 18 and 18' 
to the inner ends of the Valve actuators or 
levers d and d", pivotally supported on the 
beams 17 and 17 of the meter mechanism. 
These valves in the organization shown are 
opened and closed by the beams 17 and 17, 
in connection therewith, on the rising and 
falling movements of said beams, the opera 
tions being similar in a general Way to the 
operation of the valve or stream-controller 
described in Letters Patent of the United 
States No. 548,840, heretofore granted to me. 
In the preferred form thereof shown most 
clearly in Fig. 4 of the drawings the closer 
valve V for the meter M comprises two 
curved oppositely-disposed closer-plates 19' 
and 20', pivotally supported at 21 on the dis 
charge-spout of said meter, the two closer 
plates being shown connected together by 
linkage l', constructed and organized so that 
upon the closing or opening movement of one 
plate a similar movement will be imparted to 
the other plate. One of these plates is shown 
furnished with a counterweight 22, adapted 
for normally retaining the two closer-plates 
in their closed positions relatively to the dis 
charge-spout of the meter. 
For the purpose of preventing an opening 
movement of the closer-valve V of the meter 
until the supply-valve y is in its closed posi 
tion and for preventing a closing movement 
of said valve until the said closer is in its shut 
position I have provided, in connection with 
the supply-valve i? and the closer-valve V, re 
ciprocally-effective interlocking instrumen 
talities, which in the preferred form thereof 
shown in the drawings comprise two coper 
ative stop members 23 and 24, the former of 
which is carried by the shaft of the supply 
valve? and the latter of which is fixed to the 
rock-shaft 25 at the upper end of the meter 
and is connected by a rod 26 to the counter 
Weighted closer-valve V of the meter, the 
75 
95 
TCO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
600,030 
3 
O 
35 
45 
55 
construction and Organization of the coper 
ative stops being such as to block the move 
ments of one another alternately. 
As a means for supplying material from the 
meters M and M' alternately to the load-re 
ceivers G and G' and for controlling the 
volume I have provided in operative relation 
with the meters and with the load-receivers a 
multiplex stream-controlling director S, which 
in the form thereof shown most clearly in 
Figs. 1 and 5 of the drawings comprises two 
angularly-disposed stream-directing Spouts 
27 and 28, pivotally supported at 29 above 
and substantially midway between the two 
load-receivers G and G', with their receiving 
ends in operative relation with the two dis 
charge-spouts of the meters M and M', respec 
tively, and with their discharge ends in po 
sition for directing material to the two load 
receivers G and G'. The stream-directing 
spouts are shown in Fig. I coupled together 
for unitary oscillatory movements, they being 
preferably fixed to a horizontally-disposed 
shaft 30, journaled in the side frames of the 
Weighing apparatus. 
As a means for actuating the multiplex 
stream-director I have provided a rocker or 
Walking-beam (designated in a general Way 
by R) comprising two arms 31 and 32. This 
walking-beam is fixedly connected substan 
tially midway of its length or midway between 
the two arns 31 and 32 to the rock-shaft 30 
and has for the purpose of interrupting the 
oscillatory movements thereof at predeter 
mined points in the descending movements 
of the load-receivers a depending by-pass arm 
33, which will be hereinafter fully described. 
Pivotally connected to the outer ends of the 
two arms 31 and 32 of the walking-beam are 
two depending thrust members 34 and 34", 
One of which bears at its lower end upon a 
walking-beam actuator or lever 35, pivot 
ally connected to the scale-beam B, and the 
other of which bears at its lower end upon a 
similar actuator 35", pivotally connected to 
the scale-beam B', the construction and Organ 
ization of the Walking-beam and the actuat 
ing instrumentalities therefor being such that 
on the descending movement of the scale 
beam B of one weighing mechanism the walk 
ing-beam, together with the multiplex stream 
director, Will have a movement in One direc 
tion, and on a similar movement of the bealm 
B' of the other weighing mechanism said walk 
ing-beam and stream-director will have a 
movement in an opposite direction. 
As a convenient means for positively actu 
atting the closer-valves V and V of the me 
ters M and M', I have provided in fixed con 
nection with the stream-director two oppo 
sitely-disposed valve-actuating arms or level's 
36 and 36', respectively, which extend up 
Ward from the axis of the Walking-beam in 
position to alternately engage projections 37 
and 37 upon the linkage connection landl 
of the closer-valves V and W' and impart an 
opening movement to said valves alternately 
on opposite movements, respectively, of the 
stream-director, as will readily be understood 
by reference to Figs. 3, 4, and 5 of the draw 
ings. 
For the purpose of gradually cutting off the 
supply of material from each of the stream 
directing spouts to the load-receiver Supplied 
thereby on the descending movement of said 
receiver I have provided in operative relation 
with the discharge ends of these Spouts a 
fixed cut-off plate 3S, which is supported in 
bearings in horizontal bracket-arms 39 and 
39', fixed to the framework, (see Figs. 1 and 
3,) said plate being located slightly below and 
concentric to the path of movement of the 
lower discharge ends of the stream-directing 
spouts. This plate, which is located substan 
tially midway between the two load-receivers, 
terminates at opposite ends above the receiv 
ing ends of the load-receivers and is so dis 
posed with relation to the discharge ends of 
the stream-directing spouts that when one of 
the load-receivers is in its elevated Or load 
receiving position said plate will not intersect 
the discharge-opening of the Spout which 
supplies such receiver and Will, when the load 
receiver is descending under the Weight of 
the load and during the retractive movement 
of the spout, gradually intersect and reduce 
the effective area of Said opening and finally 
cut off the supply of material from said spout, 
the closing of the discharge end of the spout 
being of course due to the retractive move 
ment thereof, as will be understood by refer 
ence to the drawings. 
For the purpose of blocking the opening 
movements of the closers L and L of the two 
load-receiversalternately on the closing move 
ments of the stream-director I have provided 
in fixed connection with the Walking-beam 
and multiplex stream-director a multiplex 
blocking device, (designated in a general way 
by T,) and which in the present instance is 
shown as a duplex device Comprising tWO all 
gularly-disposed stop members 40 and 40', 
which depend in relatively-oblique lines and 
have their working faces Substantially con 
centric to the axis of the Walking-beam, its 
shaft 30, and the stream-director. The Work 
ing faces of the two stop members of the 
blocking device are so disposed as to alter 
nately engage the rockers or stop members 12 
and 12', connected with the closers L and L', 
respectively. 
The stop members 40 and 40' of the block 
ing device and the rockers or stops 12 and 12", 
in connection with the closers L and L'of the 
load-receivers G and G', constitute interlock 
ing devices which are reciprocally effective 
for blocking the movements of one another 
that is to say, when a closer, as L', (see Fig. 
3,) is in its open position the stop member 12' 
will block the movement of the stop member 
40' of the blocking device, and at the same 
time the stop member 40 of the blocking de 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
600,080 
4. 
vice will engage and prevent the closer-open 
ing movement of the stop member 12, con 
nected to the closer L. 
For the purpose of arresting the movements 
of the Walking-beam and connected stream 
directors during the descending movements 
of the load-receivers G and G', I have pro 
vided, in connection with the lower end of the 
by-pass arm 33, two oppositely-disposed by 
passes 42 and 43, which are pivotally sup 
ported at the lower end of said arm and are 
normally held in position for engaging a by 
pass stop 45 by means of the Springs 44 and 
44', which by-passes are adapted for alter 
nately engaging the upper end of said by 
pass Stop 45, which is shown in the nature of 
a bar supported for reciprocatory movement 
crosswise of the path of the by-passes in a 
plane intel'Secting the axis of movement of 
the Walking-beam. This by-pass stop 45, 
which is reactionary in its movement, is 
shown supported in a bracket 46, fixed to the 
framework, and is normally held with its by 
pass-engaging end in a position intel'Secting 
the path of movement of said by-passes by 
means of a spiral spring 40', Surrounding said 
bar, and one end of Said Spring bears against 
one arm of the bracket 40, and the opposite 
end thereof against an abutment or collar 47, 
which is shown fixed to said by-pass stop and 
limits the reactionary movement of said stop. 
As a means for retracting the by-pass stop 
to release the by-passand permita movement 
of the stream - directors at predetermined 
points in the descending movement of the 
load-receiver the by-pass stop is shown fur 
nished at the lower end thereof with an out 
Wardly-extending arm or projection 4S, which 
is located in position to be engaged by the 
inner non-counterweighted ends of the beams 
B and B on the descending movement of these 
ends of Said beams, said beams engaging and 
retracting the by-pass Stop alternately. The 
by-pass stop and by-passes are so disposed 
that the movement of the stream-directing 
spouts will be arrested simultaneously with 
the arrival of the load-receivers at their poised 
positions, to thereby cause the spouts to de 
liver a stream of relatively small volume 
commonly called a 'drip-stream'--to the re 
ceivers, and the projection upon the by-pass 
stop will be so located that the beams B and 
B' will retract the said by-pass stop to per 
mit a complete closure of the discharge end 
of one stream-directing spout by a further 
retractive movement thereof, which occurs 
after the receiver which is being filled has 
passed its poising position and after the latch 
which controls the opening movement of the 
closer of said receiver has been released, the 
releasing of the latches from engagement with 
the stop members which control the opening 
movements of the closers being effected by 
latch-trippers or projections 50 and 50' upon 
the thrust members 34 and 34". 
The operation of the Weighing apparatus 
which has been herein partially described ceiver. 
will be readily understood by any one famil 
iar with the art to which this invention ap 
pertains. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. The combination, with two weighing 
mechanisms located one above the other and 
each including a load-receiver having a closer, 
of a stream-director shiftably supported in 
termediate the receivers; means controlled 
by the lower weighing mechanism for actu 
ating the director; and means in connection 
with the director for actuating the closer of 
the upper receiver. 
2. The combination, With weighing mechan 
ism including a load-receiver and with a me 
ter located above said receiver and having a 
closer or valve for controlling the Supply to 
the load-receiver, of a stream-director sup 
ported for oscillatory movements between the 
metel-valve and the load-receiver; means for 
oscillating said director; and mealis carried 
by said director and adapted, on one move 
ment thereof, for impal'ting an opening nove 
ment to the meter-valve. 
3. The combination, with weighing mechan 
ism including a load-receiver, of a superposed 
Weighing mechanism including a load - re 
ceiver having a discharge-spout furnished 
with a valve or closer; a stream-director piv 
otally supported between the upper and lower 
load-receivers; means actuated by the lower 
weighing mechanism for oscillating the direc 
tor; and means carried by said director and 
operative, on one movement thereof, for open 
ing the valve of the upper receiver. 
4. The combination, with weighing mechan 
ism including a load-receiver and with a me 
ter located above said receiver and having a 
valve for controlling the supply to the load 
receiver, of a stream-director supported for os 
cillatory movement between the meter-valve 
and load-receiver; means for oscillating said 
director; means carried by said director for 
imparting a movement in one direction to said 
Valve; and means in connection with said 
Valve for imparting thereto a movement in 
another direction. 
5. The combination, with weighing mechan 
ism including a load-receiver, of a movable 
load-receiver or meter located above the 
Weighing mechanism and having a discharge 
Spout; two closer-blades pivotally supported 
in operative relation with, and adapted for 
opening and closing, the discharge-spout of 
the meter; means including a counterweight 
ed lever connecting the closer - blades and 
adapted for normally retaining said blades 
in their closed positions; a stream-director 
shiftably supported in position to direct a 
stream of material from the upper to the lower 
load-receiver; means operative with the lower 
Weighing mechanism for controlling the ac 
tion of the stream-director; and means con 
trolled by the stream-director, on one move 
linent thereof, for impal'ting all opening move 
ment to the closer-blades of the upper re 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
ICO 
Io5 
I IO 
II5 
600,030 
5 
O 
6. The combination, with a plurality of 
Weighing mechanisms, each including a load 
receiver having a closer, of stream-Supplying 
means including a plurality of meters located 
above the weighing mechanisms; a plurality 
of Stream - directors, one for each load-re 
ceiver, having a common axis of movement; 
and means actuated by the weighing mech 
anisms for shifting the stream-directors, one 
into a supplying, and another simultaneously 
into a cut-off or non-supplying, position with 
relation to their respective load-receivers. 
7. The combination, with a plurality of 
Weighing mechanisms each including a load 
receiver, of stream-supply means including 
a fixed cut-offplate and two oscillatory stream 
directors in operative relation there with; and 
means operative with the weighing mechan 
isms for simultaneously shifting said direc 
tors in corresponding directions and in such 
manner with relation to the cut-off plate as 
to effect a gradual closing of the discharge 
end of One, and a gradual opening of the dis 
charge end of the other, director. 
S. The combination, with a plurality of 
Weighing mechanisms each including a re 
ceiver having a closer, Ofstream-supply means 
including a plurality of meters located above 
the Weighing mechanisms; a fixed cut-off 
plate located between the meters and load 
receivers; a plurality of stream-directors hav 
ing a common axis of movement located be 
tWeen the cut-off plate and meters, said di 
rectors coperating with the cut-off plate for 
controlling the supply of material to the load 
receiver; means operative with the weighing 
mechanism for simultaneously shifting said 
directors in corresponding directions to grad 
ually open and gradually close, through the 
medium of the cut-off plate, the discharge 
Openings of the directors alternately. 
9. The combination, with a plurality of 
Weighing mechanisms set side by side and each 
including a load-receiver and with stream 
Supply means located above said load - re 
ceiver, of a plurality of stream-directors, one 
for each load - receiver, located below the 
stream-supplying means; and actuating mech 
anism connecting the stream-directors and 
Weighing mechanisms in such manner that a 
descending movement of one receiver will 
cause its respective stream-director to grad 
llally assume a cut-off position and will si 
multaneously cause another stream-director 
to gradually assume a supplying position with 
relation to another receiver. 
10. The combination, with weighing mech 
anism including a plurality of load-receivers 
set side by side and with a superposed sup 
ply apparatus, of a plurality of stream-direc 
tors shiftably supported above said receivers 
With their axes coincident; a cut-off device 
located between the discharge ends of the di 
rectors and the load-receivers; and means 
controlled by the weighing mechanisms for 
oscillating the directors. 
11. The combination, with a plurality of 
meters, of a plurality of Weighing mechanisms 
each including a load-receiver having a closer 
and each receiver having a stop member piv 
Otally supported thereon and connected with 
the closer thereof, of a stop-member-blocking 
device shiftable into positions for alternately 
engaging, and blocking the movements of, the 
Stop members; and means controlled by the 
Weighing mechanisms for actuating the block 
ing device. 
12. The combination, with a plurality of 
meters, of a plurality of weighing mechanisms 
each including a load-receiver having a closer 
and each receiver having a stop member piv 
otally supported thereon and connected with 
the closer thereof, of a stop-member-blocking 
device comprising a plurality of fixedly-con 
nected stops shiftable unitarily into positions 
for alternately blocking the movements of the 
stop members; and means controlled by the 
Weighing mechanisms for actuating the block 
ing device. 
13. The combination, with two independent 
Weighing mechanisms each including a scale 
beam and a load-receiver having a closer, of 
a rocker or Walking-beam pivotally supported 
above and substantially midway between said 
Weighing mechanisms; thrust members con 
necting opposite ends of the Walking-beam 
and the two scale-beams; stop members piv 
otally supported on the load-receivers and 
connected with the closers; and a stop-mem 
ber-blocking device connected with the Walk 
ing-beam and embodying two stop members 
shiftable, on movements of the walking-beam, 
into positions for alternately engaging, and 
blocking the movements of, the closer stop 
members. 
14. The combination, with a plurality of in 
dependent weighing mechanisms set side by 
side and each including a scale-beam and a 
load-receiver having a closer, of a rocker or 
Walking-beam pivotally supported above said 
mechanism; means connecting the Walking 
beam with the scale-beams of the weighing 
mechanisms; Supply apparatus located above . 
the Walking-beam; a plurality of stream-di 
rectors fixed to the walking-beam and each 
having its receiving end in operative relation 
with the supply apparatus and its discharg 
ing end in operative relation with a load-re 
ceiver; and a fixed cut-off plate in operative 
relation with the discharge ends of the stream 
directors and adapted, on certain movements 
thereof, for controlling the supply of material 
therefronn to the load-receivers. 
15. The combination, with a plurality of in 
dependent weighing mechanisms set side by 
side and each including a scale-beam and a 
load-receiver having a closer, of a rocker or 
Walking-beam pivotally supported above said 
mechanisms; means connecting the Walking 
beam with the scale-beams of the weighing 
mechanisms; Supply apparatus located above 
the Walking-beam; a plurality of stream-di 
rectors fixed to the walking-beam and each 
having its receiver end in operative relation 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
600,030 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
With the Supply apparatus and its discharg 
ing end in operative relation with the load 
receiver; a fixed cut-off plate in operative re 
lation with the discharge ends of the stream 
directors and adapted, on certain movements 
thereof, for controlling the supply of material 
therefrom to the load-receivers; and stop de 
vices for controlling the sequential move 
ments of the closers and stream-directors. 
16. The combination, with two independent 
Weighing mechanisms each including a scale 
beam and a load-receiver having a closer, of 
a rocker or Walking-beam pivotally supported 
above and substantially midway between said 
Weighing mechanisms; thrust members piv 
otally connected at their upper ends to oppo 
site ends of the Wallking-beam and supported 
at their lower ends upon levers carried by the 
tWO Scale-beams, respectively; a by-pass arm 
depending from the walking-beam and hav 
ing two oppositely-operative by-passes at the 
lower end thereof; and a by-pass stop shift 
ably supported in operative relation with the 
by-passes and embodying means whereby the 
same may be operated by the weighing mech 
3.S. 
17. The combination, with two independent 
Weighing mechanisms each including a scale 
beam and a load-receiver having a closer, of 
a rocker or Walking-beam pivotally supported 
above and substantially midway between said 
Weighing mechanisms; thrust members piv 
otally connected at their upper ends to oppo 
site ends of the walking-beam and supported 
at their lower ends upon levers carried by the 
tWO scale-beams, respectively; a by-pass arm 
depending from the central portion of the 
Walking-beam and having two oppositely-op 
erative by-passes at the lower end thereof; 
and a reactionary by-pass stop supported with 
its upper end normally intersecting the path 
of movement of the by-passes and having 
projections at the lower end thereof located 
in the path of movement of the inner ends of 
the Scale-beams, whereby, on the alternate 
movements of the scale-beams, the by-pass 
stop will be retracted out of the path of move 
ment of the by-passes. 
18. In a Weighing-machine, the combina 
tion, With an oscillatory member, of a duplex 
or two-way by-pass device carried by said 
member; a by-pass stop shiftable in a line in 
terSecting the axis of movement of the oscil 
latory member and into and out from the path 
of movement of the by-pass device; and 
means for actuating said by-pass stop. 
19. The combination, with two independent 
Weighing mechanisms each including a scale 
beam and a load-receiver having a closer, of 
a rocker or Walking-beam pivotally supported 
above said Weighing mechanisms; two stream 
directors fixed to the Walking-beam and adapt 
ed for directing material to the two load-re 
ceivers; means in connection with the beam 
mechanism and walking-beam for controlling 
the operation of the stream-directors; a du 
plex by-pass device carried by the walking 
beam; and a by-pass stop normally intersect 
ing the path of movement of the duplex by 
pass device and operable for temporarily hold 
ing the walking-beam against movement, first 
in one, and then in the opposite, direction. 
20. In a multiplex weighing-machine in 
cluding a plurality of load-receivers, a Sup 
ply apparatus, in combination with a multi 
plex stream-director for directing material to 
the receivers in alternating order and com 
prising a plurality of spouts unitarily shift 
able on a common axis; a multiplex by-pass 
device; means operative, on predetermined 
alternating movements of the load-receivers, 
for actuating the stream-director; and means 
for interrupting the movements of the multi 
plex by-pass at predetermined points in the 
alternating movements of said receivers. 
21. In a multiplex Weighing-machine in 
cluding a plurality of load-receivers, a sup 
ply apparatus including a plurality of recepta 
cles, in combination with a multiplex Stream 
director including a plurality of stream-di 
recting spouts shiftable on a common axis to 
supply material to the load-receivers in alter 
nating order; a fixed cut-off plate in opera 
tive relation with the discharge ends of the 
spouts and effective, on a movement of said 
spouts, for controlling the discharge of mate 
rial; a multiplex by-pass device carried by 
the multiplex stream-controller; means op 
erable at predetermined points in the move 
ments of the load-receivers for actuating the 
multiplex stream-director; and means for en 
gaging the by-pass and interrupting the move 
ments of the stream-director at predetermined 
points in alternating movements of the re 
ceivers. 
22. The combination, with two alternately 
operable automatic Weighing mechanisms Set 
side by side and each including a load-re 
ceiver having a closer, of a duplex meter mech 
anism including two compartments Ol' recep 
tacles each having a self-shutting closer; a 
duplex stream-director pivotally supported 
between the meter and weighing mechanism 
and embodying two unitarily-shiftable spouts 
for directing material alternately to the two 
load-receivers; means operable by the two 
weighing mechanisms, alternately, for shift 
ing the director-spouts first in one and then 
in an opposite direction; means for control 
ling the discharge of material from the spouts 
during the movements thereof; means car 
ried by the duplex stream-director for impart 
ing opening movements to the meter-chamber 
closers, alternately; and means in connection 
with the stream-director and controlled by the 
weighing mechanism for alternately blocking 
the movements of the two load-receiver closer's 
alternately. 
FRANCIS II. RICITARDS. 
Witnesses: 
F. N. CHASE, 
FRED. J. DOLE. 
75 
95 
CO 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600130.txt	(No Model.) 
T. R. WOOD ARD 
CLOTH MEASURING MACHINE, 
No. 600,130. 
Patented Mar, l, 1898. 
fic-1- 
f G-2. 
 
  
  
is ra 
%3E 
A24.7% (4eez 
Thom as Ri chard Wood ard, 8viuc-vilot 
33 2/-ve 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS RICHARD WOODARD, OF KINGSBURY, CANADA, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALE TO ALPHONSE JOHN ESNOUFF, OF RICHMOND, CANADA. 
COTH MEASURING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,130, dated March 1, 1898. 
Application fied December 18, 1896, Serial No. 616,162, (No model.) 
55 
journaled in bearings g' on the bar G, and H 
is a worm revolved by the said wheels. The 
bar G is provided with notches i in one side 
for the wheels g to project through. The 
bars F and G are slidable in the sockets c and 
jaws c', so that the uprights C can be set at 
different distances apart. The wheels g bear 
on the cloth and are revolved by it constantly 
as it passes over the CrOSS-bar. 
I is a casing pivoted at One end by a hinge 
to one of the bearings g'. 
J is a worm-wheel secured on a shaft i, 
which is journaled in the casing I and is pro 
vided with a knob i' on its end outside the 
casing. The casing has a sight-opening i", 
through which a marked scale h on the side 
of the worm-wheel can be observed. 
the amount of cloth passed over the cross-bar 
is indicated by the scale on the worm-wheel. 
When a new roll of cloth is to be measured, 
the casing is raised on its hinge and the worm 
wheel is turned back to Zero while out of gear 
with the Worm by means of the knob i. The 
position of the casing when raised is indicated 
by dotted lines in Fig. 2. 
The Worm revolves the worm-wheel, and 65 
What I claim is 
In a cloth-measuring machine, the combi 
nation, with two similar uprights C adjust 
able toward each other and having open 
ended sockets c and open-ended jaws c' nar 
rower than the sockets; of a cross-bar F for 
supporting the cloth, said cross-bar being 
slidable longitudinally in the said sockets; a 
bar slidable longitudinally and vertically in 
the said jaws over the cloth, said bar being 
provided with notchesi in one side of it; and 
an indicator carried by the said bar and pro 
vided with driving-wheels g which project 
downwardly through the said notches and 
bear on the cloth, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
THOMAS RICHARD WOODARD. 
J. A. MARION, 
A. PAGE. 
Witnesses: 
75 
85 
I5 inafter fully described and claimed. 
20 section taken on the line 4 4 in Fig. 3. 
fo all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I,THOMASRICHARD WOOD 
ARD, a citizen of the Dominion of Canada, 
residing at Kingsbury, in the county of Rich 
5 mond and Province of Quebec, Canada, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Cloth-Measuring Machines; and I 
do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Io such as Will enable others skilled in the art to 
Which it appertains to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to cloth-measuring 
machines; and it consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the parts here 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side view of 
the machine. Fig. 2 is a front view of the 
indicator mechanism. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
of the indicator mechanism. Fig. 4 is a cross 
The base consists of two longitudinal bars 
A, and B is a screw for adjusting the distance 
between the said bars, so as to accommodate 
rolls of cloth of different width. B' is a guide 
25 secured to one bar and sliding in a hole in 
the other bar, so that the two bars are kept 
parallel. All these parts are of ordinary ap 
proved construction. 
Care uprights secured to the bars A. Each 
3o upright is provided with a rectangular Socket 
c and jaws c' above the said socket. The up 
rights C are secured at about the middle of 
the bars A, and D are supports secured to 
the end portions of the bars A. A roll of 
35 cloth E is journaled between the supports D 
at one end of the machine, and E' is a similar 
roll journaled between the supports D at the 
other end of the machine. The roll E" is 
provided with a crank-handle e or other ap 
F is a cross-bar which is placed in the 
sockets c. The cloth from the roll E is passed 
over the cross-bar F and is wound upon the 
roll E. 
G is a bar which rests on the cloth over 
the cross-bar F and has its ends arranged be 
tween the jaws c'. Two driving-wheels g are 
4o proved means for revolving it. 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600230.txt	(No Model.) 
A. MARTIN 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
ELECTROTHERAPEUTIC EXERCISING APPARATUS, 
No. 600,230, 
 
Patented Mar, 8, 1898. 
fill 
P 
- 
4. 
(No Model.) 
A, MARTIN 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
No. 600,230. 
Patented Mar. 8, 1898, 
ELECTROTHERAPEUTIC EXERCISING APPARATUS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ABRAHAM MARTIN, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
ELECTROTHERAPEUTIC EXERCISING APPARA U.S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,230, dated March 8, 1898. 
Application filed November 23, 1897, Serial No. 659,548, (No model.) Patented in France May 10, 1897, No. 266,784, 
55 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, ABRAHAM MARTIN, 
of the city of Paris, France, have invented 
an Electrotherapeutic Exercising Apparatus, 
(for which I obtained Letters Patentin France 
on the 10th of May, 1897, under No. 266,784,.) 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act description. 
This invention relates to a system of elec 
tromechanical exercising apparatus where 
by, in addition to the muscles being mechan 
ically exercised, all or any part of the human 
organism is subjected to electrical action pro 
portional to the work developed. 
In addition to the uses above mentioned 
the apparatus may also be employed for re 
ducing obesity. 
My apparatus not only permits of produc 
ing power, but also of giving to the body a 
general course of gymnastics by employing 
the individual strength to set in movement a 
magneto-electric generator or its equivalent 
which when in action generates a current 
Which may be caused to pass through the en 
tire organism or certain parts of the body 
only. Thus if it is desired to electrize the 
arms it is simply necessary to place the hands 
upon the contacts on the crank-handle in or 
der to feel the magnetic effect. 
For the ab 
domen a belt would be employed provided 
with metallic plates connected with the dy 
namo. For the legs two bands, also connected 
to the poles of the generator, would be applied 
either on the ankles or at the knees. For the 
Spine a kind of back-support would extend 
from the nape of the neck to the lower part 
of the vertebral column, provided with a me 
tallic plate at each end. It will be, however, 
readily understood that the current may be 
applied to any other parts of the body than 
those mentioned, it being simply necessary 
for this purpose to provide at suitable points 
contacts connected with the poles of the elec 
tric generator. The length of the crank-arm 
is such that its throw is sufficient, when the 
apparatus is is use, to compel the body to as 
sume a considerable degree of inclination, 
which stimulates respiration and circulation 
and at the same time develops the flexibility 
of the body. 
It will be seen from the foregoing that the 
apparatus may be thus utilized for perform 
ing exercises of strength and movement, while 
at same time producing an electric action. 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a face view, and Fig. 2 
a corresponding side view, of the apparatus. 
The same letters of reference denote like 
parts in both figures. 
a is the frame of the machine, upon which 
is mounted a shaft b, carrying a pulley c, by 
which is driven a magneto-electric generator 
d. One of the poles is connected by a corde 
to one of the hand-grips f of crank-handler, 
the other pole being connected by the cord g 
to the other hand-grip f. Upon shaft b is 
mounted a drum h, encircled by segments i, 
about which is wound a cord k, one of whose 
ends is attached to a spring-balancel and the 
other end to a pulley m, so as to act as a 
hand-brake on the drum h. A lever n, pro 
vided with notches, each of which represents 
one kilogram, enables the spring of balance 
l to be put in tension for the purpose of in 
creasing the pressure of the brake upon the 
drum, and consequently of increasing at Will 
the resistance of the exercising movement. 
A graduated dial-plate O is revolved by a 
worm on shaft bin relation to a pointer p and 
indicates the number of revolutions of the 
crank-handle, a gongg being sounded at every 
ten revolutions. 
The counter,in combination with the gradu 
ation of the spring-balance, serves to indicate 
the power which has been developed. For 
example, if the resistance equals ten kilo 
grams on the spring-balance each revolution 
of the crank-handle represents ten kilogram 
meters, and when the gong sounds after ten 
revolutions it represents one hundred kilo 
grammeters. 
The pulley c, which drives the magneto 
electric generator d, may be disconnected. 
from shaft b, so as to allow of the apparatus 
being used for exercising purposes only. 
I claim 
1. A system of electromechanical appara 
tus for exercising the muscles of the human 
body and thereby generating an electric ac 
tion applicable to all or any part of the body, 
comprising a frame Cl, shaft b, pulley c ac 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
600,280 
and the gong g sounding every ten revolu 
tions. 
3. In an electromechanical gymnastic ap 
paratus of the kind specified, the combina-. 
tion of the counter with the graduated spring 
balance for indicating the power developed 
as described. 
The foregoing specification of my electro 
therapeutic exercising apparatus signed by 
me this 9th day of November, 1897. 
- 
ABRAHAM MARTIN. 
Witnesses: 
- 
EDWARD P. MACLEAN, 
MAURICE HENRI PIG.NET. 
tuating a magneto-electric generator d whose 
poles are respectively connected to the hand 
grips f of crank-handler, a brake-drumh en 
circled by brake-shoes, segments iembraced 
by a cord k connected to a spring-balancel 
and also to a regulating-pulley m, adjustable 
by means of a notched lever in to vary the 
tension of the cord and spring-balance sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. In an electromechanical gymnastic ap 
paratus, the counter comprising a graduated 
dial O operated by a worm on shaft band 
moving past a pointer p for indicating the 
number of revolutions of the crank-handle; 
-- 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600331.txt	(No Model.) 
BELT, 
 
s 
 
e 
O) 
8. 
%3 %3 42% 
22. 
- 
sa 
u 
 
a 
Sis 
2-- 
e a? 
ga k 
M 
S 
SS 
Sass 
$2. 
SS 
W 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM LANZ, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
BET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,831, dated March 8, 1898. 
Application filed July 3, 1897, Serial No, 643,352, (No model.) 
- 
45 
55 
65 
O 
To all whon, it nagy conce77: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM LANZ, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Belts, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to belts such as are 
commonly worn by ladies, and has for its ob 
ject to provide a belt which may be readily 
reversed, so that by making one side of the 
belt of one color and the other side of another 
color the Wearer may be able to suit the color 
of the belt to the rest of her attire and make 
a single belt do the service of two. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view. Fig. 2 is a partial view 
Fig. 3 is an 
of the inner side of the belt. 
edge view of part of the belt. Fig. 4 is a per 
spective view of the buckle. Fig. 5 is a per 
spective view of one end of the strap. Fig. 
6 is a perspective view showing the position 
of the strap and buckle during a part of the 
operation of securing them together. 
Referring to the drawings, a, indicates the 
strap, and b indicates the buckle. 
c indicates the tongue of the buckle. 
As shown in Figs. 3 and 5, the strap C is 
provided with a slot or perforation d near the 
end to which the buckle is attached, and with 
two loops e and f, said loops being arranged 
at opposite sides of the strap, as shown. As 
indicated in the drawings, the two sides of 
the strap are of different colors, and the loops 
e fare also of different colors, the color of 
each loop corresponding to that of the side 
of the strap opposite to the side across which 
it extends. The buckle is secured to the strap 
by slipping the strap through it and passing 
the tongue c through the slot d. The end of 
the strap adjacent to the buckle is then bent 
back and the free end of the strap is passed 
through the loop, causing the parts to assume 
the position shown in Fig. 3. The loop which 
is not in use Will then be at the back or in 
ner side of the strap, and with the arrange 
ment of loops shown and described the loop 
of the color which corresponds to the outer 
side of the strap will be outermost. 
In order to reverse the belt, all that it is 
necessary to do is to release the buckle and 
after reversing the strap to replace the buckle 
in the manner above described. The outer 
loop serves to confine the free end of the strap 
when the belt is in use, as shown in Fig. 1. 
That which I claim as my invention, and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
A belt having both of its faces finished and 
provided near one end with a slot and be 
tween said slot and the adjacent end of the 
belt with loops, said loops lying respectively 
one upon each face of the belt, and a buckle 
having a tongue, said buckle being adapted 
to be secured within a fold of the belt with 
its tongue passing through the slot, the fold 
being formed by passing the opposite end of 
the belt through one of the loops, as set forth. 
WILLIAM LANZ. 
Witnesses: 
NELLIE MCIKIBBEN, 
JOHN L. JACKSON, 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600431.txt	(No Model. 
C. LEE. 
FIST BLOW TESTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 600,431, 
Patented Mar. 8, 1898, 
 
 
 
 
 
IUITTIN 
 
  
 
 
Hitti N222 
3 Sia 
& Niini Nig 
 
 
Hilgesses 
(1,232-izz 
% 2 
Ipileptor 
CZoza Zee, 
fy Zzf Aftoppeys, 
Cza-P. 
the Norris PEERS Co., Phorc-tro, wASINGTON., c. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 600,431. 
 
C. LEE. 
FIST BLOW TESTER, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 8, 1898. 
PZPapa 
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa 
Riflesses 
6/42, a 221071 
W 
S 
&y Mozas cAfforgeys, 
The MoRRs PETERs co, PhorouTHo. wash MGTON, D.c. 
m 
perfor 
67%zes Zee, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES LEE, OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS. 
F ST. BLOW TESTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,431, dated March 8, 1898. 
Application filed March 20, 1897. Serial No. 628,521. (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
40 
To all, Luhon it nuclf concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLES LEE, a sub 
ject of the Queen of Great Britain, residing 
at San Antonio, in the county of Bexar and 
State of Texas, have invented a new and use 
ful Fist-Blow Tester, of which the following 
is a specification. 
This invention relates to machines for test 
ing the force of a blow delivered by a per 
son's fist, and has for its object to provide a 
simple, durable, and efficient machine em 
bodying a striking-cushion for receiving the 
impact of the blow, recording mechanism for 
indicating the precise force of the blow, and 
coin - operated apparatus for releasing the 
striking-pad preparatory to delivering the 
blow, the device being thus automatic in ac 
tion. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will appear in the course of the ensuing 
description. 
The invention consists in a fist-blow-test 
ing machine embodying certain novel features 
and details of construction and arrangement 
of parts, as hereinafter fully described, illus 
trated in the drawings, and incorporated in 
the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of the improved machine, 
partly in section, with the adjacent side of 
the casing removed. Fig. 2 is a front eleva 
tion of the machine, showing the indicator. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view of the machine with the 
top removed. Fig. 4 is a horizontal section 
on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Similar numerals of reference designate cor 
responding parts in the several figures of the 
drawings. 
Referring to the drawings, I designates the 
inclosing case of the machine, which is sub 
stantially in the form of a rectangular box. 
At its rear the case is provided with a sur 
rounding flange 2, which is perforated at in 
tervals to receive fasteners by means of which 
the machine may be secured to a wall or other 
Suitable support, and at one side the casing is 
provided with a hinged door 3 for giving ac 
cess to the internal mechanism. Arranged 
in the lower portion of the case is a tubular 
plunger 4, which slides through the front Wall 
of the case and also through a guide 5 there 
in. This plunger is provided, preferably at 
its top, with a longitudinal guiding - rib 6, 
which slides through a notch or slot in the 
guide 5 and prevents the plunger from turn 
ing. At its outer end the plunger 4 is pro 
vided with a rigid metal plate 7, to the outer 
surface of which is secured a disk or block 
of wood 8. Outside of the block 8 is arranged 
a rubber pad 9, and outside of said pad 9 is 
a cushion 10, comprisiug a soft flexible cov 
ering 11 and a filling 12 of hair, cotton, wool, 
or similar material for cushioning the blows 
delivered thereto and preventing injury to 
the knuckles and the hands. Intermediate 
its ends the plunger 4 is provided with an 
internal annular flange 13, forming a shoul 
der for a plate or disk 14, against which is 
seated one end of a spiral compression-spring 
15, arranged partly within the plunger and 
extending beyond the inner end thereof, the 
opposite end of said Spring being seated in 
a recess in a block 16, attached to the rear 
Wall of the casing 1. 
17 designates a cross-pin which passes trans 
versely through the plunger adjacent to the 
annular flange 13, the ends of said pin pro 
jecting outside of the plunger and being pro 
vided with washers 18, of rubber or analogous 
material, which serve as bumpers, the same 
coming in contact with shoulders 19, at or near 
the front Wall of the case, for limiting the out 
Ward movement of the plunger and cushion 
ing the same when thrust outward by the ex 
pansive force of the spring 15. 
20 designates a latch pivotally connected 
at one end to the block 16 or other convenient 
point adjacent to the rear Wall of the case 
and provided at its free end with a shoulder 
21 for engaging the rib 6 of the plunger and 
preventing the inward movement of the lat 
ter. The latch 20 also has a lip 22, which rests 
on the rib 6, and is further provided with an 
inclined bottom edge or face 23, against which 
the rib 6 operates in the inward movement of 
the plunger for elevating the latch. 
A rod 
24 connects loosely at its lower end to the 
latch 20 and at its upper end to the rear end 
of a lever 25. This lever is fulcrumed inter 
mediate its ends on a bracket 26, located near 
the top of the case, and is provided at its for 
Ward end and in its upper surface with a cav 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OC 
45 
 
2 
600,431 
7 o 
75 
95 
ity 27 for receiving the coins from an angu 
lar chute 28, projecting above the top Wall of 
the case and secured for convenience thereto. 
29 is a weighted pin arranged in the path 
of the rear end of the lever 25 and slidingly 
mounted in an arm 30 on the bracket 26. As 
the forward end of the lever 27 is depressed 
by the Weight of the coin resting in the cav 
ity 27 the rear end of said lever strikes against 
the pin 29 and is stopped temporarily thereby, 
the latch 20 being lifted sufficiently to move. 
the shoulder 21 out of the path of the plun 
ger. When the plunger is thrust forcibly in 
ward by the blow delivered thereon, the rib 
6 acts against the inclined surface 23 of the 
latch and thrusts upward on the rod 24, 
thereby depressing the forward end 27 of the 
lever 25 and precipitating the coin into a sub 
posed receptacle 31, arranged inside of the 
CaSe. 
32 designates a horizontal spindle journaled 
in the front wall of the case and in the up 
per portion of the bracket 26. This spindle 
is arranged at One side of the coin-chute 28 
and is provided near the front of the case and 
inside of the same with a drum or pulley 33, 
having a beveled rear flange 34 and a square 
faced forward flange 35. A cord or other 
flexible connection 36 is fastened at one end 
to said drum and is wound around the same, 
and the other end of said cord passes around 
a guiding-pulley 37 and connects to the plum 
ger 4 or its rib 6, as shown. The spindle 32 
extends through the front wall of the case 
and has a hand Orindicating-finger fast upon 
it, said hand being adapted to revolve in front 
of a graduated dial 38 and to register the force 
of the blow delivered upon the plunger. 
39 is a spring-brake which bears against the 
periphery of the flange 35 and prevents the 
indicating hand Or finger being carried be 
yond the proper point by the sudden jerk on 
the cord or connection 36. 
In operation a coin is deposited in the chute 
28 and the same falls into the cavity 27 of the 
lever 25, depressing the front end of the lat 
ter and elevating its rear end so as to elevate 
the latch 20 Sufficiently to remove the same 
from the path of the plunger. The blow is 
now struck upon the plunger, and the force 
of said blow is received and absorbed by the 
spring 15, and at the same time the latch 20 
is thrust upward and the rear end of the le 
ver 25 lifts the pin29, allowing the front end of 
said lever to descend and deposit the coin in 
the receptacle 31. As the plunger is forced 
inward the cord 36 is drawn upon and the 
drum 33 rotated under the resisting influence 
of the spring-brake 39, the indicating hand 
or finger being at the same time rotated to a 
point corresponding to the distance to which 
the plunger was thrust inward. 
The machine is exceedingly simple in con 
struction, reliable in operation, and will ac 
curately register the force of a blow delivered 
upon the plunger. 
It will be understood that the several parts 
of the machine are susceptible of changes in 
the form, proportion, and minor details of 
construction, which may accordingly be re 
sorted to without departing from the spirit or 
sacrificing any of the advantages of this in 
vention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. In a fist-blow-testing machine, a plun 
ger, and a compression-spring for resisting 
the movement thereof, in combination. With a 
metal plate secured to one end of said plun 
ger, a wooden block secured to said plate, a 
pad of rubberforming a facing for said block, 
and a cushion arranged in front of Said rub 
ber pad and comprising a flexible cover and a 
filling of fibrous material, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a fist-blow-testing machine, the com 
bination with a plunger carrying a striking 
pad, and a cushion-spring for said plunger, 
of a gravity-latch engaging directly with said 
plunger and arranged to ride thereon and to 
be sustained in a raised position thereby dur 
ing the sliding play of the plunger, and a coin 
freed mechanism operatively connected with 
said latch, substantially as described, for the 
purposes set forth. 
3. In a fist-blow-testing machine, the hol 
low plunger provided with an internal shoul 
der and with protruding pins or studs, com 
bined with a coiled compression-spring par 
tially fitted in the plunger and seated at One 
end against the internal shoulder of the plun 
ger and at its other end in a suitable support, 
yieldable bumpers mounted on the protruding 
pins or studs and movable with said plunger, 
fixed abutments in the path of said bumpers, 
and a coin-freed latch arranged to engage op 
eratively with the plunger, substantially as 
described, for the purposes set forth. 
4. In a fist-blow-testing machine, the com 
bination of a casing having a plunger-receiv 
ing opening, a stationary guide 5 within said 
casing and in allinement with said opening in 
the front thereof, a tubular plunger provided 
on its exposed face with alongitudinal guide 
rib and fitted slidably in the openings in the 
casing and said guide, a disk 13 fixed within 
the plunger, the latter carrying the exposed 
yieldable bumpers, a cushion-spring fitted 
against Said disk 13 and seated in the casing, 
a latch to restrain the plunger from endwise 
movement, and a coin-controlled releasing de 
vice connected with said latch, as and for the 
purposes described. 
5. In a fist-blow-testing machine, the com 
bination With a spring-controlled plunger car 
rying a striking-pad, of a gravity-latch ar 
ranged to engage With said plunger to lock 
the same and to ride upon the plunger to be 
Sustained in a raised position thereby, a coin. 
operated lever pivoted at a point intermediate 
of its length and adapted to receive at its free 
end a coin to overbalance the same and lift 
the latch, a link attached to the short arm of 
said lever and to the latch and affording a 
O 
II5 
I25 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
600,431 
3. 
it from inward movement and, when disen 
gaged from locking engagement thereWith, to 45 
ride upon said lever on its inward movement, 
a coin-operated lever positively linked at one 
end to said latch and provided at its other 
end with a coin-receptacle, and a gravity-pin 
lying in the path of said lever to temporarily So 
arrest its tilting movement under the gravity 
of a coin deposited therein, whereby the forci 
ble inward movement of the plunger lifts the 
latch and link to tilt the coin-operated lever 
against the resistance of the gravity-pin and 55 
thereby discharge the coin from the recepta 
cle on said lever, as and for the purposes de 
scribed. 
9. In a fist-blow-testing machine, a spring 
resisted plunger carrying a striking-pad, a 
latch for engaging and holding said plunger 
and provided with an inclined face adapted 
to rest on and to ride upon said plunger when 
the latch is freed from locking engagement 
therewith, a coin-actuated lever linked to the 
latch and adapted to move the same out of 
engagement with the plunger, a coin-chute 
arranged over said lever, a coin-receptacle 
carried by said lever, a gravity-pin in the path 
of said lever to limit the upward movement 
thereof on the deposit of a coin in its recep 
tacle and arranged to be lifted by a tilting 
movement of the lever as the latch and link 
are raised on the inward movement of the 
plunger, a revoluble indicator, a drum on the 
spindle of said indicator, a cord wound around 
said drum and attached to the plunger, and 
a spring-brake for resisting the momentum of 
the indicator, substantially as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
75 
CHARLES LEE. 
Witnesses: 
CARLTON R. SPRAGUE, 
A. R. PEREZ. 
connection to hold the free end of the lever 
in a depressed position when the latchis lifted 
by engagement with said plunger, and a slid 
able gravity-pin in the path of the short arm 
of said coin-operated lever to resist the move 
ment thereof, the resistance of Said pin being 
overcome by the upward thrust of the latch 
and link, substantially as described, for the 
purposes set forth. 
6. In a fist-blow-testing machine, a plunger 
having a striking-pad, and a spring for resist 
ing the movement of said plunger, in combi 
nation with a pivoted latch for engaging and 
holding said plunger, and adapted to ride 
thereon when the plunger is forcibly impelled 
inwardly, a coin-operated lever provided with 
a coin-receptacle, connections to said latch for 
moving the latter out of engagement with the 
plunger, and a gravity-pin for resisting the 
movement of said lever, said latch having an 
inclined face against which the plunger acts 
for forcibly lifting the latch and tilting the 
coin-operated lever against the Weight of the 
gravity-pin, substantially as and for the pur 
pose described. 
7. In a fist-blow-testing machine, the com 
bination with a casing, a dial, and a spindle 
carrying a pointer, of a spring-cushioned plun 
ger provided with a guide-rib and with a strik 
ing-pad, a pulley attached to the Spindle, a 
guide-sheave between the spindle and plun 
ger,a flexible cord coiled on the spindle-pulley, 
passing around the guide-sheave and attached 
to the guide-rib on the plunger, a gravity-latch 
hung to engage with and to ride upon said 
guide-rib of the plunger, and a coin-freed 
mechanism operatively connected with said 
latch, substantially as described, for the pur 
poses set forth. 
8. In a fist-blow-testing machine, the com 
bination with a plunger, and a cushion-spring 
therefor, of a gravity-latch hung to engage 
directly with said lever to normally restrain 
IO 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600531.txt	(No Model.) 
G. W. HEY, 
STAMP ATTACHER, 
5. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
No. 600,531, 
Patented Mar, 15, 1898. 
i. \ t 
WITNESSES: 
666, -e-, 
6064-nor, 
NWENTOR 
'' 
4. 2 
ATTORNEY 
The Norris Peters co, PHOTO-L'Ho, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 600,531. 
G. W. HEY. 
STAMP ATTACHER 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar. 15, 1898. 
s 
WITNESSES: 
1666%. , 
&C.4 of 
S& NVENTOR 
S. 
Rs BY 22ei 
ATTORNEY 
the Norris PETERs co, Photo-LITHo, WASHINGTON, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
G. W. HEY. 
STAMP ATTACHER, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 600,531. 
Patented Mar. l5, 1898. 
S 
a. 
as . 
s 
* is 
. is IS: 
o s 
N. 
s s 
SS 
sis 
it f "Ris 
9 
s 
? 
a. 
R 
airs, 
s ss. Qs 
RN n- 
s N 
Sss 
sis is sis 
s 
As R 
2 
Y 
SQ. 
S- 
2 
p 
WITNESSES: , 2 San 
v664, 
2 
2RSS 
s 
s(2WS 
w 
RS 
is 
R 
as 
s 
& 
s 
5. 
iss 
NVENTOR 
of (226 
as Cit 
i 2%- ATTORNEY 
THE Norris PETERs co, PHOTo-LTHo, WASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
(No Model.) 
G. W. HEY, 
STAMP ATTACHER, 
5. Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
No. 600,531. 
Patented Mar, 15, 1898. 
2. 
isities: crisier is: 
 
 
  
 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A 
A 
f 
  
---------- 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
5. 
E. 
 
2 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X 
WTNESSES 
-6, 
62% 
NWENTOR 
-%.7% % 
of 4-62.a? 
ATTORNEY 
BY 
 
the NORRIS PETERs co, Photo-Litho. washington, d. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE W. HEY, OF SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 
STAMPATTACHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,531, dated March 15, 1898. 
Application filed December 29, 1892, Renewed July 19, 1897, Serial No. 645,167, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whon, it nually concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE W. HEY, of 
Syracuse, in the county of Onondaga, in the 
State of New York, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Stamp-Attachers, of 
which the following, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, is a full, clear, 
and exact description. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
stamp-attachers, and has for its object the 
production of a simple, practical, and effect 
ive device for attaching postage and other 
stamps to lettel's and similar articles; and to 
this end it consists, essentially, in the com 
bination, construction, and arrangement of 
the component parts of a stamp-attacher, all 
as hereinafter more particularly described, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
In describing this invention reference is 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part of this specification, in which like let 
ters indicate corresponding parts in all the 
views. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in sec 
tion, of my improved Stamp-attacher, its parts 
being shown as in their normal position and 
a strip of Stamps as operatively engaged by 
the stamp-feeder. Figs. 2 and 3 are eleva 
tions of my invention similar to Fig. 1, parts 
of the stamp-attacher shown at Fig. 1 being 
broken away and the other parts shown in 
elevation at Fig. 1 being shown in section at 
said figures, the component parts of my in 
vention being shown at Fig. 2 as in their po 
sition assumed when the presser-piece is in 
contact with the platen for supporting the 
stamps and at Fig. 3 as in their position as 
sumed when the stamp is being pressed upon 
the letter or other article. Fig. 4 is a longi 
tudinal vertical section taken on line 4 4, 
Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a similar view to Fig. 4 of 
the central portion of my stamp-attacher, the 
roller or stamp-engaging piece of the mois 
tening device being removed for the purpose 
of illustrating the adjacent parts. Fig. 6 is 
a vertical section of the central portion of 
my stamp-attacher, taken on line 6 6, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 7 is a vertical section taken on line 77, 
Fig. 1. Figs. 8 and 9 are horizontal sections 
taken, respectively, on lines 88, Fig. 1, and 
Fig. 10 is a horizontal detail sec 
99, Fig. 3. 
tion taken on line 10 10, Fig. 7. 
Fig. 11 is a 
- 
clamp. 
detail horizontal section taken on line 11 11, 
Fig. 1. 
Fig. 12 is a side elevation of the 
platen, adjacent portions of the upright of 
the frame, the clamp for holding the stamps 
in engagement with the platen, and the 
bracket for supporting the clamp. Fig. 13 
is a detail section taken on line 13 13, Fig. 
11; and Fig. 14 is an isometric view of the 
detached clamp for engaging the stamps and 
the spring and supporting-bracket for said 
The frame A of my invention may be of 
any desirable form, size, and construction 
and is here illustrated as composed of a base 
A and an upright A', having a projecting 
guide A on its front face C. The guide A 
is formed by ribs A A', projecting from the 
front face a of the upright A', and by the 
portion of the front face C of said upright in 
terposed between said ribs, and a plate A, 
secured by screws or other suitable fastening 
means a' to the front face of the ribs A' A'. 
B is a plunger or movable operating-piece 
movable in the guide A', and as the guide A 
is rectangular in cross-section the plunger B 
is of corresponding cross-section. It will be 
readily understood, however, that the guide 
A may be otherwise formed and that the op 
erating-piece or plunger B may be of any de 
sirable form, size, and construction to move 
freely within the guide A. The plunger B 
is formed with an internal chamber B' for re 
ceiving a spiral spring b and consists of the 
central section B, the presser piece or foot 
B, and the hand-piece or head B. . 
A suitable rod b' is passed through the 
spring b and is screw-threaded at its opposite 
ends for retaining the spring in position and 
for securing the upper and lower sections of 
the plunger to the central section thereof. 
The rear wall of the plunger B is formed with 
a lengthwise slot b, within which projects a 
stationary lug or arm a, secured to the front 
face a of the upright A* for supporting the 
lower extremity of the spring b. This arm a 
is formed with a perforation (t, through which 
the rod b' is passed, and as the plunger is de 
pressed the rod b'moves freely through the 
perforation a, and the spring b is compressed 
between the arm or lug a' and the bottom face 
of the top section B of the plunger B. This 
particular form of plunger is easily manufac 
95 
Ido 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
600,531 
sists of a screw c', having one end movably 
tured and assembled in operative position, is 
mounted in a downturned lug c, provided 
strong and durable in use, and is pleasing in 
upon the lower side of the feeding end c, and 
appearance. 
its other end passed through a downturned 
The guideway C, through which the stamps 
lug c', provided upon the rear end of the 
are fed, is of any desirable form, size, and 
plate C7. A head c is formed upon the screw 
construction and is provided with a rectilin 
c" and bears against the outer face of the lug 
ear feeding end c, (here shown as formed 
c', which is movable in a slot c in the lower 
with a depending arm c',) mounted on a pro 
wall of the feeding end c and is adjusted to 
jection a, extending upwardly from the base 
ward and away from the lug c as the screw 
A', and as arranged in a substantially hori 
c is moved inwardly or outwardly. 
Zontal plane, although it is evident that said 
The plate C7 is firmly secured in its ad 
feeding end may be arranged in an inclined . 
justed position by a suitable clamp c', con 
plane. The opposite end c of the guideway 
sisting of a bolt c10, having one end secured 
C extends upwardly above the feeding end 
to the plate C and its other end passed 
C and is removably secured to said feeding 
through a slot c1 in the lower wall of the feed 
end c by screws or other suitable fastening 
ing end c and provided with a nut c', mov 
means c'. The feeding end c of the guideway 
C is substantially rectangular in cross-sec 
able on the outer end of said bolt. 
c18 care springs arranged on opposite sides 
tion and is formed with a lengthwise slot C" 
of the slot C within the feeding end c for forc 
in its top wall for permitting the entrance of 
ing the stamps against the upper face of the 
the stamp-engaging piece of the stamp-feeder, 
lower wall of said feeding end. The upper 
(presently described,) and the opposite end 
ends of these springs are secured by suitable 
c of the guideway C consists of a substan 
fastening means clic to the under face of the 
tially rectangular tube formed with an inlet 
top wall of said feeding end c, and their lower 
opening Cat its extreme end and with a sec 
ends are bent downwardly and are arranged 
ond inlet-opening C8 in its inner face. 
in close proximity to the inner extremity of 
The stamps are either fed in strips of lim 
said feeding end. 
ited length or are fed from a reel in a con 
The feeder for feeding the stamps succes 
tinuous strip. When desired to feed strips 
sively consists, essentially, of an actuating 
of limited length, they are passed through 
lever E, a cross-head E', and stamp-engaging 
the opening C*-along the guideway C until 
pieces E. The lever E is pivoted at E to 
the first stamp l. projects beyond the front 
edge of said guideway, as best seen at Fig. 1. 
the arm D* and is formed with a pair of down 
wardly-extending arms EE, arranged at an 
The rear end of the strip of stamps then hangs 
angle with each other, the arm E being pro 
downwardly along an upright arm C at the 
vided with a bearing-roller E and the arm 
outside of the opposite end c of the guideway 
E with a lengthwise slot E. The roller E 
C, as shown at Fig. 1, and as the strip is fed 
engages the sides of a slot or camway B, 
forwardly its rear end passes over a curved 
which is formed in the front face of the plun 
bar C at the upper end of the arm C and 
ger or operating-piece B and is provided at 
downwardly through the opening c and the 
its lower end with the upright portions BB, 
ends c' c of the guideway C. 
arranged one above the other on Opposite 
The stamp strips of limited length are con 
veniently arranged upon any suitable sup 
sides of the center of the front face of the 
plunger and with the inclining portion B 
port, as an arm D, projecting from the oppo 
connecting the adjacent ends of the upright 
site face of the upright A* and formed with 
portions B B7. 
lower and upper lugs d d' d', around which 
The lever E is shown in its operative posi 
the strips are coiled, as shown at Fig. 1. 
tion at Fig. 1, and as the plunger moves down 
When desired to feed the stamps continu 
wardly, as shown at Fig. 2, the roller E is 
ously in a single Strip, they are coiled upon a 
forced laterally from the upper end of the up 
suitable reel D', and the feeding end of the 
right position B7 of the slot B to the base of 
strip is passed within the opening C8 in the 
the upright portion B of said slot and rocks 
inner wall of the outer end c of the guideway 
the lever E upon its pivot. As will be pres 
C, as shown by dotted lines at Fig. 1. This 
ently described, the plunger B is then in its 
reel D' is of any desirable form, size, and con 
position assumed when the front stamp l is 
struction and may be supported in any de 
about to be severed from the remainder of 
sired manner upon the frame A, as by an arm 
the stamp strip, and as the plunger B con 
D, projecting from the adjacent face of the 
upright A*. 
tinues its downward movement the roller E 
continues to register with the portion B of 
A movable plate C is arranged in a length 
the slot B5 without rocking the lever E. As 
wise depression or groove C in the front end 
the plunger B assumes its normal position 
of the base of the feeding end c of the guide 
way C. Said plate C7 is provided with length 
the lever E is also forced to its normal posi 
wise grooves C' in its top face and with a cut 
tion, as shown at Fig. 1. 
The cross-head E is movable lengthwise of 
ting edge C, which forms, essentially, the 
the feeding end c of the guideway C for the 
front edge of said feeding end c. A suitable 
stamp strip, and, as best seen at Figs. 7 and 
adjusting device C operates to move the 
plate Clongitudinally and preferably con- 11, is formed with a central contracted por 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OC) 
IO 
I 25 
 
600,531 
3. 
tione, movable in the slot C", and with lipse' 
at its longitudinal edges bearing upon the 
upper and lower faces of the separated por 
tions of the top wall of the feeding end, ar 
ranged on opposite sides of the slot C". Pro 
jecting upwardly above the cross-head E are 
ears e for receiving a pine, movable in the 
slot E of the lever E. Consequently as the 
lever E is rocked on its pivot E the cross 
head E is reciprocated along the feeding end 
c of the guideway C for the stamp strip. I 
preferably provide the feeder for the stamps 
With a number of stamp-engaging pieces ar 
ranged side by side, and, as best seen at Figs. 
2, 3, 8, and 9, each of these stamp-engaging 
pieces consists of a lever which is pivoted at 
e' to the forward end of the cross-head E and 
is formed with a forwardly-extending weight 
ed arm e, arranged normally in the path of 
the presser-piece B, and with a depending 
projection or lug e", extending downwardly 
beneath the cross-head through the slot C" 
and adapted to engage the strip of stamps 
within the feeding-guideway C. 
The weighted arme of each of these stamp 
engaging pieces normally depresses the cor 
responding projection e' into engagement with 
the strip of stamps, and each of said projec 
tions is formed with a curved outer side e", in 
order that as the cross-head E is recipro 
cated backwardly or outwardly upon the de 
pression of the operating-piece or plunger B 
said projections e' may slide along the strip 
of stamps without operatively engaging the 
same. Moreover, it will be evident that the 
springs cc tend to prevent the retraction 
of the stamp strip as the cross-head E is 
moved outwardly, since the outer end of the 
strip is engaged by Said Springs. On the con 
trary, as the upward movement of the plun 
ger or operating-piece B, effected by the spring 
b, rocks the lever E and retracts the cross 
head E' inwardly to its normal position, as 
shown at Fig. 1, the projections e operatively 
engage the stamp Strip and feed the same for 
wardly along the feeding end c. This oper 
ative engagement of the stamp - engaging 
pieces E with the stamp is facilitated by 
means of suitable springs e for forcing down 
wardly the weighted arms e of said engaging 
pieces and by alining said projections et with 
the rectangular grooves C' in the plate C", as 
clearly seen at Fig. 9. The projections eare 
designed to enter the perforations between 
the adjacent edges of the stamps, and conse 
quently the cross-head E' is reciprocated a 
distance equal to the length of one of the 
stamps to be fed through the guideway Cand 
is limited in its movement by a suitable stop 
C upon the guideway C, which engages 
stop-shoulders e'e' upon the cross-head E'. 
When the cross-head E is in its normal 
position, as shown at Fig. 1, the projections 
e' are normally at the edge C of the plate C", 
and the arms e of the stamp-engaging pieces 
E are normally in the path of the presser 
piece of the lower section of the plunger B, 
and as the plunger descends to affix the stamp 
the cross-head E is forced outwardly, so that 
its projections e engage with the perfora 
tions just at the rear of the stamp behind the 
forward stamp l, which extends beyond the 
edge C. As the plunger continues its de 
scent the forward stamp is clipped off and 
affixed in position, and as the plunger as 
sumes its normal position the Stamp in ad 
vance of the projections e is fed forwardly, 
so as to project beyond the edge C. It is 
therefore evident that my improved feeder 
supplies the stamps successively to the 
presser-piece for affixing the stamps in posi 
tion, and to one skilled in the art it is evident 
that this feeder is simple in construction and 
practical and effective in operation. 
F is the cutter for severing the projecting 
stamp from the strip of stamps before the 
affixion of said stamp in its position upon the 
letter or other article to which it is to be ap 
plied. This cutter preferably consists of a 
cutting-blade secured to the plunger B and 
having an inclined edge f, shearing by the 
edge C of the adjustable plate C. In order 
that the plunger B may support the knife F 
in close proximity to the cutting edge C, I 
provide my invention with a gibb, which is 
forced by a suitable clamping means b 
against the face of said plunger directly op 
posite to the face provided with the cutter 
F. As has been previously described, the 
stamp - engaging pieces of the feeder, al 
though normally in the path of the cutter, 
are forced out of said path by the movement 
of the lever E, and it will be evident that, as 
clearly shown at Fig. 2, these stamp-engaging 
pieces E are forced out of the path of the 
cutter F before said cutter reaches the plane 
normally occupied by said engaging pieces. 
The affixion of the stamps in position is fa 
cilitated by a platen G, Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, 
which preferably consists of a laterally-bent 
end upon a sliding bar g, guided in ways a 
a in the upright A'. The barg is provided 
with an outwardly-projecting lugg', movable 
lengthwise of an upright bar g, having its 
lower end suitably secured to the base-plate 
A' of the frame A. Surrounding this barg, 
with one end bearing against the top face of 
the base A" and its other end bearing against 
the lower face of the lug or armg', is a spring 
g, which forces the platen G to its normal 
position, and thereby slightly elevates the 
same above the plane normally occupied by 
the stamp l, projecting beyond the edge Cof 
the feeding-guideway C. 
To facilitate the movement of the platen G, 
the front wall of the upright A' is formed with 
a slot A", Figs. 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6, and the upper 
edge of this slot normally engages with the 
upper face of the platen and limits the up 
ward movement of the same. The presser 
piece B is directly above the platen G, and 
as the plunger or operating-piece B continues 
its downward movement from its position 
shown at Fig. 2 to its position shown at Fig. 
75 
95 
Ico 
Io5 
ITO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 
4. 
600,531 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
3 the platen is engaged by the presser-piece 
and is forced downwardly against the spring 
g, carrying with it the severed stamp arranged 
beneath the platen. In order to prevent in 
jury to the letter or other article to which the 
Stamp is affixed, the platen is formed on its 
under face with a yielding plate G', of rubber 
or other suitable material. 
His a stop for limiting the forward move 
ment of the advancing stamp and facilitating 
its practical downward feeding to the letter 
or other article to which said stamp is to be 
attached. This stop preferably consists of a 
bar rectilinearly movable in a guide G in the 
platen G and having its lower end project 
ing normally below the lower face of said 
platen. I is a clamp, Figs. 1, 2, 3, 11, and 14, 
for engaging the advancing end of the stamp 
beneath the platen G, and as preferably con 
structed this clamp consists of a pair of yield 
ing arms and a supporting-bracket '. The 
arms i i register with longitudinal grooves G8 
G, formed in the right-hand side of the un 
der face of the platen G upon opposite sides 
of the stop H. The bracket normally en 
gages with a stop I on the upright A', is 
hinged at to ears projecting from the up 
perface of the platen G, and is formed with a 
cross-bar i, arranged directly above a pro 
jection h, upon the stop H. 
The spring-arms i, as clearly seen at Figs. 
4, 5, 11, and 14, are rigidly secured to a piv 
otal pin i, journaled in the outer depressed 
end of the bracket l', and the outer spring 
arm is engaged by one end of a spring i, 
encircling said pin i and having its other 
end bearing upon the top face of the cross 
bar of said bracket i. The pin is formed 
at its outer end with an arm , which is nor 
mally engaged by a cami, rigidly secured to 
the bracket or link J for supporting the 
stamp-engaging piece of the moistening de 
vice, presently described. This bracket is 
normally arranged, as best seen at Fig. 1, so 
that its cam i rocks the arm i upwardly out 
of its normal position and rocks the clamping 
arms out of registration with the grooves 
G G8 for permitting the stamp to feed to its 
normal position, with its advancing end inter 
posed between said clamping-arms and the 
adjacent face of the platen. 
As the stamp-engaging piece of the mois 
tening device moves forwardly to apply the 
moisture to the stamp the cami is forced out 
of engagement with the arm , and the spring 
coiled around the bar i and formed integral 
with the outer clamping-arm i rocks the pin 
i., and said clamping-arms 
immediately 
engage the lower face of the forward end of 
the stamp. This action of the clamping-bars 
is facilitated by the continued movement 
of the stamp-engaging piece of the moisten 
ing device, which, as clearly seen by dotted 
line at Figs. 1 and 2, forces said arms i i up 
Wardly as said engaging piece moves upwardly 
to apply the moisture to the under face of the 
Stamp. 
As the plunger or operating-piece B com 
mences its downward movement the clamp 
engage the end of the stamp pre 
ing-arms 
viously fed beneath the platen by the up 
ward movement of the plunger or operating 
piece, and consequently the stamp is firmly 
held when being severed from the strip of 
stamps by the cutter F. As the plunger con 
tinues its downward movement the lower end 
of the stop H engages the top of the letter or 
other article to which the stamp is to be ap 
plied, whereupon said stop is forced upwardly, 
and in its upward movement its arm h en 
gages the cross-bar i of the bracket and 
rocks said bracket upwardly until said cross 
bar engages a stop G upon the platen G. 
and disengages the clamping-arms 
from 
the stamp, as clearly seen at Fig. 3. Thispe 
culiar construction of platen, Stop, and clamp 
for facilitating the practical and efficient feed 
ing of the stamp after it is fed by the feeder 
is particularly simple, practical, and effective. 
The moistening device for feeding moisture 
to the stamp beneath the platen G consists of 
a lever J, a bracket J', hinged at one ex 
tremity to the lower end of the lever J, a 
stamp-engaging piece J, journaled in the op 
posite end of the bracket J', a moisture-res 
ervoir J, and a feeder or wick J within the 
reservoir J. The lever J is pivoted at J to 
the outer plate A of the upright A' and is 
formed with an engaging lug J, which is mov 
able in a slot A in the plate A and registers 
with an inclined cam-shaped portion B' of 
the slot B in the plunger B and the upright 
portion of said slot. The stamp-engaging 
piece J consists of a roller journaled in the 
free end of the bracket J' and arranged nor 
mally at the right hand of the clamping-arms 
i. i. A spring J, having one end secured to 
the bracket J and its other end to the lever 
J, constantly tends to force the roller J* up 
wardly, but is normally restrained from ac 
tion by the engagement of the cam i upon 
said bracket with the arm , connected, as 
previously described, to normally rock the 
clamping-arms 
out of operative position. 
The reservoir J8 of my invention may be of 
any desirable form, size, and construction 
and is suitably secured in position by any de 
sired construction of clampsi", and the wick 
or moisture-feeder J is normally engaged by 
the roller or stamp-engaging piece J. 
The roller or stud J is arranged normally 
at the base of an incline B' in the slot B, and 
as the plunger descends to feed the engaging 
piece of the stamp-feeder out of the path of 
the presser-piece Band the cutter F the up 
per end of the lever J is rocked outwardly and 
its lower end is rocked inwardly, thereby dis 
engaging the cam-face from the arm and 
permitting the spring J to force the roller or 
stamp-engaging piece Jupwardly against the 
clamping-arms i and against the under face 
of the stamp l. As the lever J reaches the 
limit of its movement a cam-face Cupon the 
feeding-guideway C engages the free end of 
75 
95 
dC 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
600,531 
5 
O 
the bracket J and rocks the same down 
wardly, so that the roller J' passes beneath 
the feeding end of the guideway C and out of 
the path of the cutter F and the presser 
piece. 
As the plunger or operating-piece B as 
sumes its normal position the roller or stamp 
engaging piece J* is retracted into engage 
ment with the moisture-feeder Jand, as pre 
viously stated, the cami rocks the arms of 
the clamp I out of their operative position to 
permit the insertion of the forward end of the 
front stamp between the clamping-arms i i 
and the adjacent face of the platen G. In 
order to facilitate the passage between the 
roller J and the moisture-feeder J of en 
velop-flaps and other surfaces to be moistened, 
the receptacle J is formed with an outwardly 
turned wing or guide J, which guides the flap 
or other surface between said engaging piece 
and moisture-feedler. It will be evident to 
one skilled in this art that this is a particu 
larly effective construction of moistener for 
feeding moisture to the stamps and that with 
each movement of the plunger the moistener 
returns to the feeder in the reservoir and is 
freshly supplied. 
The operation of my invention will be read 
ily perceived from the foregoing description 
and upon reference to the accompanying 
drawings, and it will be noted that the same 
is simple and economical in construction, du 
rable in use, and practical and effective in 
operation. It is evident, however, that con 
siderable change may be made in the relative 
construction and arrangement of the parts of 
my invention without departing from the 
spirit thereof. Hence I do not herein spe 
cifically limit myself to such precise detail 
construction and arrangement. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
l. A stamp-attacher, comprising a recipro 
Cating platen for supporting the stamps, a 
feeder for feeding the stamps successively 
provided with an engaging face for engaging 
the stamps arranged normally at one side of 
the platen, and a moisture-applying device 
having a stamp-engaging piece arranged nor 
mally at the other side of the platen and mov 
able toward said engaging piece of the feeder 
for feeding moisture to the stamps, and a re 
ciprocating operating-piece or plunger for de 
tachably engaging the platen and forcing the 
same toward the article to be stamped, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. A stamp-attacher comprising a recipro 
cating platen for supporting the stamps, an 
automatically-movable stop supported by the 
platen for engaging the stamps, a feeder for 
feeding the stamps successively, and an op 
erating-piece for forcing the platen toward 
the article to be stamped, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
3. A stamp-attacher comprising a stop for 
the stamps automatically movable out of its 
operative position, a feeder for feeding the 
stamps successively to said stop, and a mov 
able clamp for engaging the stamps connected, 
substantially as described, to said stop, where 
by the stop forces the clamp out of its opera 
tive position, substantially as and for the pur 
pose specified. 
4. A stamp-attacher comprising a stop for 
the stamps, a feeder for feeding the stamps 
successively to said stop, a pivoted clamp for 
engaging the stamps, a platen for supporting 
the clamp, and a spring for rocking the clamp 
into operative position, substantially as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
5. A stamp-attacher comprising a rectilin 
early-movable stop for the stamps, a feeder 
for feeding the stamps successively to said 
stop, a movable clamp for engaging the 
stamps, a platen for supporting the clamp, a 
spring for throwing the clamp into operative 
position, and a cam for throwing the clamp 
out of its operative position against the ac 
tion of said spring, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
6. A stamp-attacher comprising a platen 
for supporting the stamps, a feeder for feed 
ing the stamps successively to the platen, a 
movable clamp for engaging the stamps fed 
to the platen, and a hinged bracket provided 
with a cam rigidly secured thereto for throw 
ing the clamp out of its operative position, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
7. A stamp-attacher complising a platen 
for supporting the stamps, a reciprocating 
operating-piece or plunger for actuating the 
platen to affix the stamps, provided with a 
cam, a feeder for feeding the stamps succes 
sively to the platen, a stamp-engaging piece 
movable across the face of the stamps for 
feeding moisture thereto, and a pivoted lever 
having one end provided with a projecting 
lug engaged with the cam and its other end 
connected to said engaging piece for actuat 
ing the same, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
S. A stamp-attacher comprising a platen 
for supporting the stamps, a feeder for feed 
ing the stamps successively to the platen, a 
movable clamp for engaging the stamps fed 
to the platen arranged normally in an inop 
erative position, and a moistening device hav 
ing a stamp-engaging piece for engaging said 
clamp and forcing the same to its operative 
position, substantially as and for the purpose 
specified. 
9. In combination, a movable operating 
piece, a guideway for receiving a strip of 
stamps, a cross-head movable lengthwise of 
the guideway, stops for limiting the move 
ment of the cross-head, two or more independ 
ently-movable stamp-engaging pieceshinged 
to the cross-head and formed with an engag 
ing projection or lug for entering the perfora 
tions between the stamps, and connections, 
substantially as described, between said cross 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
II5 
I 25 
6 
600,531 
head and the movable operating-piece, sub 
Stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
10. In combination, a movable operating 
piece, a guideway for receiving a strip of 
Stamps, a spring within the guideway for en 
gaging the stamp Strip, a cross-head movable 
lengthwise of the guideway, stops for limit 
ing the movement of the cross-head, two or 
more independently-movable stamp - engag 
ing pieces hinged to the cross-head and each 
formed with an engaging projection or lug for 
entering the perforations between the stamps, 
and connections, substantially as described, 
between said cross-head and the movable op 
erating-piece, substantially as and for the 
purpose specified. 
11. In combination, a movable operating 
piece, a guideway for receiving a strip of 
stamps, provided with longitudinal grooves 
in its wall for supporting the stamp strip, a 
cross-head movable lengthwise of the guide 
way, two or more independently - movable 
stamp-engaging pieces hinged to the cross 
head above the wall of the guideway, for sup 
porting the stamp strip and formed with an 
engaging projection or lug registering with 
said longitudinal grooves for entering the per 
foration, between the stamps, and connec 
tions, substantially as described, between 
said cross-head and the movable operating 
piece, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
12. In combination, a platen for the stamps, 
a guideway at one side of the platen for re 
ceiving the stamps, a pivoted stamp-engag 
ing piece having its advance end provided 
With a projection or lug for engaging the 
stamps and a weighted arm extending in front 
of the projection or lug, an operating-piece or 
plunger for depressing the platen and affixing 
the stamps in position, and connections, sub 
stantially as described, between the stamp 
engaging piece and the operating-piece or 
plunger for reciprocating the stamp-engag 
ing piece, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
13. In combination, a platen for the stamps, 
a stop movably supported upon the platen 
with one end projecting beneath its lower 
face, a bracket hinged to the platen and en 
gaged by the stop whereby the bracket is 
rocked upwardly as the stop is forced up 
Wardly, a clamping - finger secured to said 
bracket, and a spring for normally engaging 
said clamping-finger with the stamp, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
14. In combination, a platen for the stamps, 
a stop movably supported upon the platen 
With one end projecting beneath its lowerface, 
a bracket hinged to the platen and engaged 
by the stop, whereby the bracket is rocked 
upwardly as the stop is forced upwardly, a 
clamping - finger secured to the bracket, a 
Spring for normally engaging Said clamping 
finger with the stamp, an arm connected to 
the clamping-finger, and a cam for rocking 
said arm and forcing the clamping-finger out 
of operative position, substantially as and for 
the purpose specified. 
15. In a stamp-attacher, the combination 
with a feeder for feeding the stamps succes 
sively, a reciprocating platen for supporting 
the stamps, a movable clamp for engaging the 
stamps fed to the platen, an operating-piece 
for actuating the platen, a lever connected to 
said operating -piece, a roller for applying 
moisture to the stamps fed by the feeder, and 
a movable arm or bracket having one end Se 
cured to the roller and the other hinged to 
said lever, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
16. In a stamp-attacher, the combination 
with a feeder for feeding the stamps succes 
sively, a reciprocating platen for supporting 
the stamps, a movable clamp for engaging the 
stamps fed to the platen, an operating-piece 
for actuating the platen, a lever connected to 
said operating-piece, a moisture-containing 
receptacle provided with a moisture-feeder, 
a roller for removing the moisture from the 
moisture-feeder and applying the same to the 
stamps fed by the stamp-feeder, and a mov 
able arm or bracket having one end secured to 
the roller and the other hinged to said lever, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
17. In combination, a platen for the stamps, 
a stop movably supported upon the platen 
with one end projecting beneath its lowerface, 
a bracket hinged to the platen and engaged 
by the stop, whereby the bracket is rocked 
upwardly as the stop is forced upwardly, a 
clamping-finger secured to said blacket, a 
spring for engaging said clamping-finger With 
the stamp, an arm connected to the clamping 
finger, a moisture-applying roller, a bracket 
for supporting the roller provided with a cam 
for engaging said arm, and means, substan 
tially as described, between said bracket and 
the operating-piece, substantially as and for 
the purpose described. 
18. The herein-described feeding device, 
the same comprising a support, and a series, 
of independent automatically-acting engag 
ing pieces mounted on the support, and hav 
ing their advance ends provided with engag 
ing projections or lugs, substantially as speci 
fied. 
19. The herein-described feeding device, 
the same comprising a support, and an auto 
matically-movable engaging piece mounted 
on the support and having its advance end 
provided with an engaging projection or lug, 
and a weighted arm extending in front of said 
projection or arm, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed my name, in the presence of two attest 
ing witnesses, at Syracuse, in the county of 
Onondaga, in the State of New York, this 22d 
day of November, 1892. 
GEORGE W. HEY. 
. 
Witnesses: 
CLARK H. NORTON, 
M. BAXTER. 
IOO 
IO 
II.5 
I 25 
*::...'...... 
 
---...--i- is: -is: -itsell - 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600631.txt	(No Model.) 
M. F. BLAKE. 
FREIGHT CAR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 600,631. 
Patented Mar. i5, 1898, 
 
s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
2 
 
AAS 
Eas E. 
 
 
aSeSNs 
s 
S 
vue wbov 
--7%z Zaz72" 
3 & 462o-decaa tya 
&ltovce e 
  
 
   
N 
NSN 
 
 
(No Model.) 
M. F. BLAKE, 
FREIGHT CAR, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 600,631, 
Patented Mar, 15, 1898, 
922. 2. 
--- 
r 
E2% 
1- N2 H 
T- 
|- 
al 
w 
|-2 
| 
-7 NI 
h 
h 
sease 
- C ? 
d 
- 
- 
f 
22.3 
a - ==s 
-s 
av 
alm-Re 
75 
2-99%s 
N 
N 
N 
N 
N 
928)iticssos 
 
- - 
-7%z777',43% 
341.uo-1-foz 
&ltov. 1-to-3 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MILLARD FILLMORE BLAKE, OF MARTINSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR - 
OF ONE-FOURTH TO JOHN S. BOWERS, OF SAME PLACE. 
FREIGHT-CAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,631, dated March 15, 1898. 
Application filed September 9, 1897, Serial No, 651,093, (No model.) 
55 
75 
Ca. 
2O ter fully described and claimed. 
To all tufton, it inctly concer. 
Be it known that I, MILLARD FILLMORE 
BLAKE, a citizen of the United States, resid 
ing at Martinsburg, in the county of Blair 
5 and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Freight 
Cars; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
Io the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
Myinvention has relation to dumping-cars; 
and the object is to provide a car which may 
be used either as an ordinary box-car, an or 
I5 dinary dumping-car, or as a grain-dumping 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists of certain features of construction and 
combination of parts, which will be hereinaf 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a longitudinal vertical sectional view taken, 
through the body of the car and showing the 
position the grain-doors and the end inclines 
25 and flaps are in when the car is used for the 
transportation of grain. Fig. 2 is a similar 
view showing the doors and inclines elevated 
to adapt the car for the transportation of 
other character of freight; and Fig. 3 is a 
3o cross-sectional view through one of the sides 
of the car, taken through the doorway. 
In said drawings, 1 denotes the body of a 
box-car. 2 denotes the hinged floor, and 3 
the mechanism for lowering the sections of 
35 the flooring to discharge the car of its con 
tents. These parts may be of any well-known 
construction, but are identical in the present 
instance with the corresponding parts shown 
and described in Letters Patent No. 567,019, 
4o granted to me September 1, 1896, and a fur 
ther description of the same will not be deemed 
necessary, as they form no part of my pres 
ent invention. 
A represents the grain-doors, one being in 
45 each side of the car-body near each end. 
These doors have eyes B, which are hung 
upon vertical hanger-rods C, secured to the 
inner sides of the car-body at the edge of the 
doorway, so that when not in use the doors 
5o may be elevated and swung back and held in 
this position out of the way by means of hooks 
D, engaging pins d. The lower edge of each 
 
door is provided with a flexible strip F, which 
when the door is closedlies upon the bottom 
of the floor and prevents the escape of grain 
between the sill and the lower edge of the 
door. 
At each end of the caris an incline G, which 
extends downwardly and has its lower edge 
in close proximity to the door-sill to feed the 
grain close up to the doorway through which 
it is to be removed. The upper ends of these 
inclines are provided with eyes H, which are 
hung upon transverse rods E, secured at each 
end of the car-body, so that when the car is 
not in use for transporting grain these in 
clines may be swung up and secured by hooks 
F', thus enlarging the capacity of the car. 
Each incline Ghas secured above its upper 
edge to the end of the car a stiff flap, pref 
erably made of rubber and fabric, and when 
the car is filled with grain these flaps Klie 
upon the grain, and, while incidentally pro 
tecting the same from dampness from the roof 
at the ends of the car, have for their main ob 
ject the pressing of the grain downward, so 
that when it is removed either through the 
doors of the car or through the hinged bottom 
none will stick or accumulate upon the in 
clines, thus enabling a car to be completely 
emptied of its contents. 
From the foregoing description, taken in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
the construction and operation of the inven 
tion will be readily understood without re 
quiring further explanation. 
A car built on these lines will answer as an 
ordinary box-car, an ordinary dumping-car 
for carrying coal, stone, &c., or as a grain-car, 
and is very efficient in either of the three uses 
named. 
Although I have specifically described the 
construction and relative arrangement of the 
several elements of my invention, I do not 
desire to be confined to the same, as such 
changes or modifications may be made as 
clearly fall within the scope of my invention 
without departing from the spirit thereof. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a dumping-car, the combination with 
inclines arranged at the ends of the car, of 
stiff flaps secured above the upper edges of 
95 
IOd 
2 
600,631 
the inclines and adapted to lie over the top 
surface of the grain and to be folded up when 
the inclines are elevated, substantially as set 
forth. 
2. In a dumping-car, the combination with 
inclines hinged to the ends of the car, of stiff 
flaps secured to the ends of the car above the 
upper edges of the inclines, and means for 
holding the inclines raised, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. In a car, the combination with inclines 
at the ends of the car and flaps secured above 
O 
the inclines and adapted to lieupon the grain 
contained in the car to protect the same from 
inclemencies of the Weather and force it of 15 
the inclines when the car is being unloaded, 
Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
MILLAERD EILLMORE BLAKE. 
Witnesses: 
A. R. HAGEY, 
J. E. CLAPPER. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600732.txt	(No Model.) 
INKE 
SANITARY CESSPOOL AND TRAP, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
W 
AfroREy. 
THE NORRIS PETERs co. PHoro-LTHo, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THEOD ORE LINKE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
SANITARY - C ES S PO O L AND TRAP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,732, dated March 15, 1898. 
Application filed December 22, 1896, Serial No. 616,611 (No model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
80 
. 
To all wh???, it may concern: 
below which is formed the concave seat K for 
Beitknown that I, THEODORELINKE, a citi 
the ball-valveL, the latter being preferably of 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
thin metal covered with rubber or other soft 
New York, in the county of New York and 
material, as indicated in Fig. 1. The casing F 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
is globular in general outline and has at its 
and useful Improvements in Sanitary Cess 
lower end the outlet-opening M and valve 
- pools and Traps, of which the following is a 
seat N. The valve-seats KN of the casing F 
specification. 
correspond with one another and each is 
The invention relates to a combined sani 
adapted to receive the ball L, as necessity may 
tary ceSSpool and trap, and comprises the fea 
arise, as indicated by the dotted lines showing 
tures of arrangement and construction here 
the extreme upper and lower positions of said 
inafter described, the whole being embodied 
ball L in Fig. 1. The ball L will be light in 
in the form of a new article of manufacture 
weight and adapted to float upon the water, 
and in but few pieces, which may be quickly 
and when the cesspool contains a normal 
and readily assembled. 
amount of water, as shown in Fig. 1, the ball 
The Sanitary cesspool and trap constructed 
Ti will simply ride upon the same within the 
n accordance with my invention is complete 
casing F and perform no function. When, 
in itself and is efficient and ready to be ap 
however, the water in the cesspool. A from 
plied to practical use with the least amount of 
evaporation or other cause falls below the cas 
labor, delay, and expense. 
ing F, the ballL will contact with the annular 
The invention will be fully understood from 
valve-seat N and close the opening M at the 
the detailed description hereinafter present 
lower end of said casing F, in which position 
ed, reference being had to the accompanying 
the ball will operate as a valve to close the out 
drawings, in which 
let from the cesspool to the open air and pre 
Figure 1 is a central vertical longitudinal 
vent the escape upward of any gases or odors 
Section through a cesspool and trap construct 
which might under other circumstances as 
ed in accordance with and embodying the in 
cend from within the cesspool or receptacle A. 
vention, the section being on the dotted line 
The ball L is of great importance also in all 
1 of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a transverse section of 
instances in which the Water may back up 
same on the dotted line 22 of Fig.1, and Fig. 3 
through the pipes into the cesspool A, since 
is a detached central vertical section of a por 
under such circumstances the water passing 
tion of a modified form of cesspool. 
upward through the opening Minto the cas 
In the drawings, A designates the cesspool, 
ing F would carry the ball L against the seat 
which will be of suitable outline and size and 
Kand prevent the water from overflowing the 
is in the form of a receptacle having at its 
cesspool. It will thus be observed that the 
top the central opening B, surrounded by the 
ball L, while not interfering with the ingress 
flange C, adapted to receive the flange D of 
of water to the cesspool, is capable of pre 
the upper section E of the central trap or cas 
venting the escape of gas upward from the 
ing, (lettered F.) The casing F comprises the 
cesspool when the water therein is below the 
upper and lower sections, (lettered E. G.,) 
casing F and is especially adapted to prevent 
which are flanged, as at a, b, and secured to 
the overflow of said receptacle A due to the 
gether by means of the bolts d. The casing F 
backing up of the water within the outlet 
is suspended centrally within the cesspool A 
from said receptacle. 
by means of the flange D, which may be se 
The outlet from the receptacle A will be in 
cured to the flange C of the cesspool by means 
any of the usual desirable forms, two of which 
of the bolts e, and centrally over said casing F 
are illustrated in the drawings, and the one 
will preferably be arranged the usual grating 
of which (shown in Fig. 1) is in the form of 
H, through which water will pass to the cham 
a siphon O, in the short arm P of which the 
ber formed within said casing F and thence 
water within the cesspool will form a seal 
into the cesspool A. The upper section E of 
which will in a well-known manner prevent 
the casing Fis provided with the contracted 
the return of the gases through the outlet 
neck I, above which is formed the basin Jand pipe. The Water flowing into the cesspool A 
95 
OCs 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
So 
???? 
2 
600,782 
may rise through the short arm P and read 
ily find its exit, as indicated by the arrows in 
Fig. 1, while that body of Water within the 
short arm P will effectually prevent the en 
trance to the cesspool of return gases through 
the exit-pipes. 
In Fig. 3 the outlet-pipe from the cesspool 
is at the upper end of the latter and lettered 
Q, while the seal is formed within the branch 
R., extending downward into the cesspool and 
connecting with said pipe Q, as shown in Fig. 
3. Ithus illustrate twoforms of escape-pipes 
from the cesspool and do not limit the inven 
tion to these two forms, since various other 
forms of exit-pipes from the cesspool are well 
known and any of them may be employed. 
It is un necessary in the present case to rely 
upon the seal formed by the water adjacent 
to the exit-pipe from the cesspool, since the 
lower end of the casing F is substantially be 
low the water-line in the cesspool and it forms 
a trap which is entirely efficient, while the 
water remains above the opening M at the 
lower end of said casing. When the water 
falls below the opening M of said casing, the 
ball L will close said opening to prevent the 
upward escape of the gases, as above de 
scribed. Hence it will be apparent that the 
present invention does not depend entirely 
upon the use of a seal connected with the out 
let-pipe from the cesspool. If under any cir 
cumstances it should be found that the form 
of seal and outlet from the cesspool A (shown 
in Fig. 1) have a tendency to siphon the wa 
ter from the cesspool, this result may in a 
well-known manner be prevented by venting 
the upper end of the pipe O. 
When the surface of the ball L is covered 
with a coating of rubber or other soft mate 
rial, the valve-seats KN may be left uncov 
ered; but should it be preferred the valve 
seats KN may be covered with a thin layer 
of rubber or other soft material for the pur 
pose of enabling the ball L, either covered or 
uncovered, to more closely engage said seats 
KN, this being a feature of construction and 
arrangement within the skill of the manufac 
turer. 
The operation of the combined cesspool and 
trap will be readily understood from the fore 
going description, taken in connection with 
the accompanying drawings, and hence but a 
further word of explanation is necessary. 
The water will pass through the grating H 
into the casing F, and thence through the 
o 
2 ? 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
opening M at the lower end of the latter into 
the cesspool A, whence it will pass to the out 
let-pipe from the said cesspool and be carried 
off in any of the usual ways. The construc 
tion is such that the water-line within the 
cesspool is above the lower end of the casing 
F, and hence the water ordinarily remaining 
within the cesspool or receptacle A will seal 
the casing F and prevent the escape of gases 
upward through the grating H. When the 
water is in its normal state within the cess 
pool A, the ball L will float upon the same 
and perform no function; but when the water 
within the cesspool by reason of evaporation 
or other cause falls below the opening M at 
the lower end of the casing F the ball L will 
automatically seal said opening for the pur 
pose of preventing the escape of gases upward 
through the casing F, and when, due to any 
cause, the waterbacks into the casing Afrom 
the outlet-pipes and rises within the casing 
F the ball L will be seated at the upper end of 
said casing F and close the outlet from the cess 
pool or receptacle A, thus preventing the 
damages which constantly result from the 
overflows in cellars and other places. 
While I do not limit the invention to the 
grating H, the same is useful in many places 
to prevent sticks and other matter from en 
tering the cesspool. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
The combined cesspool and trap, compris 
ing the cesspool-receptacle A having the out 
let for water and at said outlet provided with 
the trap, said receptacle also having the inlet 
opening B, in combination with the interior 
globular casing F composed of the flanged 
and connected sections. E, G, adapted to be 
inserted downward through said opening B, 
and the float-valve L. Within said casing, the 
said section E being formed integral with the 
contracted neck I, valve-seat K, basin J and 
flange D, the latter being the means for sus 
pending said casing F within the upper part 
of said receptacle A, and the said section G. 
having the outlet-opening M and valve-seat 
N; substantially as set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 19th day 
of December, A. D. 1896. 
THEODORE LINKE. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. C. GILL, 
E. JOS. BELKNAP. 
75 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600832.txt	(No Mode.) 
D., JORDAN & J. W. DUNCAN, 
CONSTRUCTION OF LEVEES, &c. 
No. 600,832. 
Patented Mar, 15, 1898. 
 
S. 
S 
E. 
E. 
E. 
2. 
3. i. 1. 
SE 
A 
3. A 
- 2. 
C 
O 
Vs 
".. f. % 
St. 
7 n 
y 
... 
*EE NSCSi 
635R3, 
if: 5. {-, 
r 
I 3. E. EHF 
5. :33: 
s 
th 
E%26S 
S. E. 3: : 
A 
; ::: 
g 
3. 
N:3:52, NE 
R 
: 3. 3. 3. 3. 
323s 
X 
5.255 
is 
rve 'over WS 
P. 
P. W Sn, 33 1% 
: 
%ill ill 
W342, is 
\, 3. 
rt 
N. 
A. 
  
 
 
 
f 
LR 
 
 
 
 
N "...' 
S. 27. 
u 
cy. 
. 
. 
9/7/277/7/25, 
id 
serve 5%. , itse 
M777A 77A/7 - 
sa,227 sea--- 
a 37. 
M 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DENNIS JORDAN AND JAMES W. DUNCAN, OF SAN FRANCISCO, 
CALIFORNIA. 
CONSTRUCTION OF LEVEES, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,832, dated March 15, 1898. 
Application filed June 23, 1897, Serial No. 641,983, (No model.) 
55 
To all whon it may concern. 
Be it known that we, DENNIS JORDAN and 
JAMES W. DUNCAN, citizens of the United 
States, residing in the city and county of San 
Francisco, State of California, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in the 
Construction of Levees and other Artificial 
Embankments, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Our invention relates to an improvement 
made in the construction of levees and simi 
lar artificial embankments for protecting 
lands from inundation; and the improvement 
consists, essentially, in a structure formed or 
produced mainly of concrete piers or pillars 
and concrete slabs arranged in parallel rows 
and longitudinally in the levee and a filling 
of rock or other material between said rows, 
such structure being located partly below and 
partly above the bottom or base upon which 
the levee is erected. 
This improvementis well adapted for obtain 
ing a firm foundation upon or for strengthen 
ing those portions of a levee that are required 
to be carried across a quicksand or other soft 
bottom in the line of a levee, where a solid 
or firm base or foundation cannot be secured 
by the ordinary methods of construction at 
present followed without going to great ex 
pense in filling in and rendering such soft or 
weak spots sufficiently solid to bear the levee 
or to resist the erosive or undermining action 
of the Water, and it is also adapted for 
strengthening those portions of a levee al 
ready constructed where there is more or less 
danger of an undermining or weakening ac 
tion of the water upon the lower portion of 
the levee. 
The nature of our said improvements and 
the manner in which we proceed to construct, 
apply, and carry out the same will be fully 
understood from the following description and 
the accompanying drawings, forming part of 
this specification, and to which reference is 
herein made by letters. 
In the said drawings, Figure 1 is a top view 
of a section of our structure as applied for 
strengthening a portion of a levee that is car 
ried across quicksand or similar soft bottom 
in the line of a water-course and before the 
levee is completed. Fig. 2 is a vertical sec 
tion taken transversely through the finished 
structure. Fig. 3 is a plan or top view of one 
of the slabs of the structure, with a portion of 
the surface broken away to show the internal 
construction. Fig. 4 is an end view of Fig. 3. 
A indicates a levee or embankment, B the 
foundation or bottom on which the same is 
built, and C the river or body of water on the 
outer side of the levee. 
DD are piers or pillars of concrete sunk 
partly into the bottom B and standing partly 
above the bottom at intervals of distance 
apart and in two rows or lines substantially 
parallel with each other, following the lines 
or general direction of the embankment. 
EE are concrete slabs standing substan 
tially perpendicular or in an upright position 
against the piers from the inside of the space 
between the two rows. Each slab in length 
horizontally across the face is equal to the 
distance between one pier and the next in the 
row, measuring from center to center, and the 
height of the slab is about equal to its length. 
The space inclosed between the two rows or 
lines of slabs is filled with rocks or broken 75 
stone or any available material producing a 
solid wall F. 
The piers D are built by first sinking a cais 
son d of sheet-iron into the bottom B and 
then filling in the concrete, the caissons being 
of such cheap construction that they may be 
left in position after the pier is formed. Each 
pier is carried up to a greater or less height 
above the bottom B, and usually up to the 
ordinary level of the body of water above the 
bottom. 
The slabs E are formed of concrete, with 
two sets of strengthening-rods E" E embed 
ded and interwoven in the concrete in such 
manner as to secure the greatest strength in 
the direction of the lines of force which the 
slab is called upon to sustain while being han 
dled and when in position. These rods consist 
of a set or series E", running horizontally from 
end to end, and a second set or series E, run 
ning perpendicularly from top to bottom and 
woven or interlaced with the horizontal rods 
in an alternate manner similar to basket 
weaving, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. The ob 
ject of this construction is to obtain a rela 
tively thin and light slab possessing the re 
95. 
Ioo 
C 
25 
35 
45 
so 
 
2 
600,832 
45 
55 
quired strength to resist the pressure brought 
against it when in position supported at the 
ends, and also capable of being handled and 
laid in place without danger of fracturing, and 
these points we secure by the application and 
combination of the two sets of interwoven 
rods E. E. 
The slabs are laid in position against the 
piers from the inside of the inclosed space in 
two parallel lines or rows, after which the in 
closed space between the rows is filled with 
the material F-such as broken stone, gravel, 
or any such available material--and the same 
closely packed against the slabs. The earth 
work forming the embankment is then built 
up from the bottom or bed to the required 
height over and entirely covering the con 
crete work, and the same is finished with the 
sloping walls or faces in the usual manner of 
constructing levees and such like embank 
mentS. 
As thus constructed and applied it will be 
seen that the improvement embraces a means 
of strengthening a levee by interposing be 
tween the two faces of the embankment a wall 
or perpendicular structure mainly of concrete 
piers and slabs standing partly above the base 
or bottom on which the embankment is built 
and extending partly into such base. 
The width of the concrete structure will 
necessarily vary with and be governed to some 
extent by the special conditions of the case, 
such as the height and thickness of the em 
bankment and the pressure which it is re 
required to sustain under ordinary and ex 
traordinary occasions. The structure can be 
made of much less thickness in proportion to 
its height, however, than an ordinary con 
struction of Wall without the piers and slabs. 
This improvement affords a rapid and ef 
fective means of strengthening and protect 
ing at one or more points a levee or embank 
ment already constructed, and at a compara 
tively small expense. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to Secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. In the construction of levees and other 
like embankments, a strengthening structure 
consisting of concrete piers or pillars in par 
allel rows at intervals apart extending partly 
below and standing partly above the bottom 
or natural base of the embankment, concrete 
slabs resting against and Supported by said 
pillars and a filling of solid material between 
said rows of slabs. 
2. In a levee or other like embankment the 
combination of the concrete piers or pillars, 
in parallel rows at intervals apart, the con 
crete slabs resting against said pillars and 
closing in the space between the rows there 
of, and the filling material between the rows 
of slabs, constructed and applied for Opera 
tion as hereinbefore described. 
3. In a concrete structure for strengthen 
ing levees and other like embankments, the 
combination of the concrete piers or pillars 
in spaced rows, and concrete slabs having the 
horizontal rods E and the vertical rods E' in 
terwoven with the horizontal rods and em 
bedded in the concrete. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing We 
have hereunto set our hands and seals. 
DENNIS JORDAN. 
L. S. 
JAMES W. DUN CAN. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
C. W. M. SMITH, 
CHAS. E. KELLY. 
O 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US600932.txt	L. D. R ALSTON, 
RAILROAD GATE, 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 600,932, 
 
Willi 
4% /2-4-acAur 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 600,932, 
L. D. R ALSTON, 
RAILROAD GATE, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Mar, 22, 1898, 
 
 
 
- 
 
 
 
 
Sssssssssss 
see WS 
sts 
Wiesses 
A.44%-4 
R\-Roux 
NORRIS PETERs co, PHorouTHo, wash NGroN, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
LEANDER. D. RALSTON, OF LAWRENCE, OHIO. 
RAILROAD-GATE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 600,982, dated March 22, 1898. 
Application filed September 18, 1897, Serial No. 652,165, (No model.) 
d 
. 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, LEANDER. D. RALSTON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
North Lawrence, in the county of Stark and 
State of Ohio, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Railroad-Gates; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to railroad-gates, has 
for its object a gate that shall be operated 
automatically by an approaching engine or 
train of cars, and consists in certain improve 
ments in construction, which will be fully 
disclosed in the following specification and 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, which form 
part of this specification, Figure 1 presents 
a top plan view of my improved gate and its 
operating mechanism; Fig. 2, a side eleva 
tion showing the gate, the tower, and the op 
erating mechanism; Fig. 3, a vertical section 
of the spring-cylinder connected to the gate 
on an enlarged scale; Fig. 4, a like view of 
the Spring-actuated cushion on which the gate 
falls; Fig. 5, an end view of the locking mech 
anism for securing the gate in closed position; 
Fig. 5", a top plan view of the same, and Fig. 
6 an end view of the actuating mechanism 
operated by a passing engine or train. 
Reference being had to the drawings and 
the letters thereon, A indicates the rails of 
one track, and B the rails of another parallel 
track; C, a tower which is placed on one side. 
of the track, and D the gate. 
In a suitable frame Ea, shaft a is supported, 
and to one end of the shaft is connected a ver 
tical lever b, arranged in close proximity to 
the rail of the track to be struck by a wheel 
or a projection from an engine or car, and at 
the opposite end of said shaft is an arm c, con 
nected at its upper end by a link d to a hori 
Zontal lever e, pivoted to a bar fatig, and the 
opposite or long end of said lever or crank 
arm e is connected to the arm h, by a rod i. 
The arm his secured to a shaft F, which 
extends across the track or tracks and under 
neath the tower C, and on said shaft is a sec 
tor-shaped gear-wheel k, which is engaged by 
a pinion l on shaft m, supported at its ends 
in supports in n, attached to the posts of the 
thereof. 
tOWer. On the shaft in is a lever or crank 
arm, to which are attached chains pp, which 
at their opposite ends are attached to the in 
ner end of the gate-lever G, which is sup 
ported at its ends in bars q q., also secured to 
the posts of the tower near the upper ends 
The gate-lever G is angular, and the lower 
end of its long arm r is pivotally connected 
to the upper end of a cylinder H, in which is 
a detachable heads to close its upper end, to 
which head arm, r is attached, a piston t, 
whose rod it is connected to the inner end of 
the gate D and surrounding the rod u, a coiled 
spring v, the function of the piston and spring 
being to take up or cushion the blow of a 
passing engine imparted to the operating 
mechanism before it reaches the gate and 
produces vibration thereof. 
The gate D is pivotally supported in a post 
I by a bolt U and is provided with a weighty 
at its inner end to counterbalance the long 
arm of the gate, which extends across the 
street it is designed to guard and is supported 
upon a rest K, consisting of a cylinder O', a 
coiled spring b', and a piston c', having a rod 
d', provided at its outer end with a heade', 
on which the gate rests when the gate is 
closed. 
The gate D having been closed motion of 
the lever or crank-arm b in the opposite di 
rection will not affect the gate, for the reason 
that the long arm of the levere will slide upon 
the end of rod i without moving the rod. 
To raise or open the gate, a simple mech 
anism is provided. On a shaft F is secured 
a vertical lever or crank-arm g' in line with 
the lever or crank-arm b, and on said shaft 
under the tower is another lever or crank 
arm h", to which are connected chains i i", 
which are connected to the outwardly-bent 
arm k' of a locking-lever L, on whose verti 
cal arm t is formed a seat in', which engages 
the outer end of the arm n' of the gate-lever 
G, as shown in Fig. 5, the lever being pushed 
under the arm n' by spring o'. The locking 
lever L is pivotally secured at p' to a bar g', 
attached to the posts of the tower. As an 
engine or train approaches and strikes the 
lever or crank-arm g' the armic' of the lever 
L is drawn down, the arm l moved laterally 
from beneath the arm n' of the gate-lever 
25 
35 
45 
55 
Go 
75 
95 
OO 
 
N 
600,982 
and against the tension of the spring o', when 
the gate D will rise automatically by the 
weight of the arm r of the gate-lever and 
the cylinder H being brought to bear upon 
the inner end of the gate. 
The frame E, with its levers b and e, is set 
at a suitable distance from the street or road 
to be guarded, so that the gate will be low 
ered or closed as the engine or train ap 
proaches and will remain closed until the le 
verg", in close proximity to the street or road, 
is struck by the engine ortrain, which is then 
in full view of persons on the street, and the 
locking-lever L. released, when the gate will 
rise or open slowly. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim is 
1. A railroad-gate pivotally supported near 
its end, a gate-operating lever, a cylinder con 
nected at one end to one arm of said lever, a 
spring and a piston within said cylinder and 
the piston connected to the inner end of said 
gate, in combination with mechanism oper 
ated by an engine or train for actuating the 
lever. 
2. A railroad-gate pivotally supported near 
its inner end, a tower, a lever supported on 
said tower and having one arm thereof con 
nected to a cylinder, a piston and a spring 
within said cylinder and the piston connect 
ed to the gate, in combination with mechan 
ism connected to the opposite arm of said le 
ver and operated by an engine or train for 
closing and opening the gate. 
3. A railroad-gate, a tower, a gate-Operat 
ing lever supported on said tower, and a vi 
bratory locking-lever secured to a bar on the 
tower and engaging one arm of said lever, 
means for automatically throwing the lock 
35 
45 
55 
ing-lever into engagement With said arm and 
means operated by an engine or train for re 
leasing the arm, in combination with sepa 
rate means operated by an engine or train 
for actuating the gate-operating lever. 
4. A railroad-gate, a tower and a gate-Op 
erating lever supported on said tower and 
having one arm connected to Said gate, a shaft 
provided with a lever or crank-arm connect 
ed to the opposite arm of said gate-Operating 
lever, and a pinion on said shaft, in combi 
nation with a second shaft, means on said Sec 
ond shaft for transmitting motion to the for 
mer shaft and means operated by an engine 
or train for transmitting motion to the latter 
shaft. 
5. A railroad-gate, a lever having a resili 
ent section connected to the gate, a vibratory 
locking-lever therefor and a spring for mov 
ing saidlocking-leverin one direction, in com 
bination with a shaft and a lever or crank 
arm for closing the gate and a separate shaft 
and a lever or crank-arm for releasing the 
gate. 
6. A railroad-gate, a gate-operating lever, 
a shaft, a sector-shaped gear-wheel on said 
shaft, a pinion supported on another shaft and 
a lever or crank-arm on the same shaft, and 
connections between said lever or crank-arm 
and the gate-operating lever, in combination 
with means for positively operating the sec 
tor-shaped gear-wheel. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
IEANDER. D. RALSTON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. BUTTERMORE, 
JOSEPH ELLIS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601032.txt	(No Model.) 
C. E. BAUER, 
BOLSTER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
The NORRIS PETERS co, Photo-LITHo. washinaro, b. c. 
(No Model.) 
C. E. BAUER. 
BOLSTER, 
2 Sheets 
Sheet 2, 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, Photo-Litha, was HINGTON, D.C 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CARL E. BAUER, OF CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS, ASSIGNOR.TO THE SIMPLEX 
RAILWAY APPLIANCE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BOLSTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 601,032, dated March 22, 1898. 
Application filed February 4, 1898, Serial No. 669,155, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
75 
To all vvhom, it Inva? concern: 
Be it known that I, CARL E. BAUER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in Chicago, 
county of Cook, and State of Illinois, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Bolsters, of which the following is a 
specification. 
My invention relates to bolsters formed of 
metal such as are used in car construction, 
and while it is particularly designed for serv 
ice as a body-bolster it may also, if desired, 
be utilized as a truck-bolster. 
In the construction of my improved bolster 
I preferably employ the common forms of 
what is known as commercial rolled iron; 
but as the essence of my invention embodies 
features of merit independent of the particu 
lar kind or description of iron used in the 
construction it is of course to be understood 
that I do not limit myself to a bolster formed 
of the class of iron specified, but would in 
clude all known equivalents as within the 
Scope of my claims. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
a bolster of great strength which will be light 
-in weight, cheap to manufacture, easy to re 
pair, and which will have a secure and un 
yielding form of connection at its ends. 
A further object of my invention is the pro 
vision of a tension member composed of a 
piece of metal having a Web and flanges and 
the flanges cut away at the ends to form a 
tongue adapted to be bent around the ends 
of the compression member. The above, as 
well as such other objects as may hereinafter 
appear, I obtain by the construction illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, in 
- 
which- . 
Figure 1 is a side elevation with one end 
partly in section showing a bolster in which 
I have incorporated my improvements in pre 
ferred form. Fig. 2 is a section on the line 
22 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a section of one end 
of the bolster, showing a modification of the 
construction. Fig. 4 represents one end of 
the channel tension member which I prefer 
to use, showing how the flanges of the same 
are cut away at the end, for a purpose which 
will be hereinafter more particularly de 
scribed. Fig. 5 is a side view, partly in sec 
tion, of a modification of my improvement, in 
which, in place of the plate which I prefer to 
use as a compression member, I have substi 
tuted a channel with its flanges pointing out 
wardly. Fig. 6 illustrates the channel with 
the flanges pointing in Wardly. Fig. 7 is a sec 
tion on the line 77 of Fig. 5. Fig. 8 is a sec 
tion on the line 88 of Fig. 6. 
Fig. 9 shows 
the tension member with its flanges turned 
outwardly and embraced between the flanges 
of a compression member which is wider than 
the tension member, and Fig. 10 is an end 
view of the same. . 
In the preferred form of my invention 
(shown in Fig. 1) I provide a middle support 
or casting 9, a plate compression member 10, 
and a tension member 11, having a web and 
flanges. The end of the plate compression 
member Ibend back upon itself, as shown at 
12, forming a double thickness, which affords 
a better and rounder bearing for the tongue 
13 of the tension member, which is wrapped 
around it in hook shape and secured by rivets 
14 in the manner shown. The tongue 13 is 
formed upon the tension member 11 by cut 
ting away the flanges of the same for a short 
distance from the ends, as shown at 15 in Fig. 
4. At each end of the bolster the plate is ar 
ranged to pass between the flanges of the ten 
sion member, as shown in Fig. 2, thus mak 
ing the structure more secure against lateral 
displacement of the parts. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown the end of the com 
pression member 10 cut offsquare and a filling 
block16 inserted, the tongue 13 of the tension 
member 11 being formed as before and bent 
around the filling-block. Fig. 5 illustrates 
the same form of tension member 11, but has 
combined therewith a channel 17, the flanges 
of which are directed outwardly and the end 
of which is secured, as in the former con 
struction, by bending around it a tongue 
which is formed upon the end of the tension 
member in the manner already described. 
In Fig. 7 I have illustrated the manner in 
which the channel 17 at its ends is inclosed 
or embraced by the flanges 18 of the tension. 
member 11, by which I have secured, as in 
the prior construction, great strength against 
lateral displacement of the parts. 
Fig. 6 shows a, channel compression mem 
ber with its flanges 19 directed inwardly and 
- 
90 
95 
OO 
?? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
601,032 
dle support and a compression member hav 
ing its end doubled back upon itself, of a 
channel - iron tension incinber constructed 
with a tongue at its end, said tongue being 
wrapped about the end of said compression 
member, substantially as described. 
4. In a bolster the combination with a mid 
dle support and a plate compression member, 
of a channel tension member constructed 
With a tongue upon its end bent around the 
end of said compression member in a manner 
Substantially as shown and described. . 
5. In a bolster the combination with a mid 
dle support and a plate compression member 
having its end doubled back upon itself in 
the manliner shown, ofa, channel tension mem 
ber formed with a tongue upon its ends en 
gaging the ends of said compression member, 
and having flanges directed in Wardly so as to 
embrace the cends of said compression mem 
ber, substantially as described. 
35 
45 
CARL E. BAUER. 
Witnesses: 
WM. V. KELLEY, 
PAUL SYNNEST VEDT. 
cut away, as shown at 20, to permit the joint 
to be formed upon the end, the tension mcm 
ber 11, with the tongue 13 upon it, being sub 
stantially the same as that already described. 
In this construction I have inserted a second 
filling-piece 21, adapted to assist in holding 
the parts together when the rivets 14 are set 
in place. This is clearly shown in Fig. S. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a bolster the combination with a con 
pression member alnd middle Support, of a 
tension member formed of a piece of metal 
having a web and  langes, the flanges of the 
salme being cut away at the ends to form a 
tongue which is bent around said compression 
member in a manner substantially as shown 
and described. 
2. In a bolster the combination with a mid 
dle support and a tension member hooked 
upon its ends, of a compression member hav 
ing its end doubled back upon itself and en 
gaging the hooked end of the tension mem 
ber, substantially as described. 
3. In a bolster the combination with a mid 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601132.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 601, 182. 
 
D. B. ESHLEMAN. 
REVERSIBLE TROUGH, 
Patented Mar. 22, 1898. 
Zw Z} ZShlomon 
Ip, ri 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DANIEL B. ESHLEMAN, OF DERRY CHURCH, PENNSYLVANIA. 
REVERSIBLE TROUGH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 601,132, dated March 22, 1898. 
Application filed September 13, 1897, Serial No. 651,504. (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Beitknown that I, DANIELB.ESHLEMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Derry 
Church, in the county of Dauphin and State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented a new and 
useful Reversible Trough, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to feed-troughs, and 
particularly to a reversible trough adapted 
to facilitate cleansing and avoid the freezing 
of its contents in cold weather; and the ob 
ject in view is to provide a simple and effi 
cient construction and arrangement of parts 
Whereby the manipulation thereof is facili 
tated and whereby the same may be securely 
held in its adjusted positions. 
Further objects and advantages of this in 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View. Of a trough constructed in accordance 
with my invention. Fig. 2 is an end view 
showing the casing of the operating mechan 
ism with its face-plate omitted. Fig. 3 is a 
Vertical sectional view of the operating mech 
anism. Fig. 4 is a detail perspective view of 
the locking-pin and actuating-spring and the 
contiguous portion of the face-plate. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
1ngS. 
Mounted between suitable standards 1 and 
1", having feet 2, which are adapted to be se 
cured by screws 3 or any equivalent devices 
to a horizontal support, is a reversible trough 
4, which may be of any suitable cross-sec 
tional construction, but is preferably semi 
cylindrical, said trough being provided with 
terminal spindles or trunnions 5, mounted in 
suitable bearings in said standards. 
One of the standards, 1, is of hollow con 
struction to form a casing provided with a re 
movable face-plate 6, which is provided with 
inWardly - extending lugs 7, secured to the 
flange of the standard by means of screws 8 
or equivalent devices. Fastened to the trough 
spindle within the casing is a gear-wheel 9, 
the portion of the spindle beyond said gear 
wheel being reduced and fitted in a suitable 
bearing in the outer Wall or removable face 
plate of the casing, and meshing with the pe 
ripheral teeth of said gear is a pinion 10, hav 
ing its spindle 11 mounted in suitable bear 
ings in the outer and inner walls of the cas 
ing. The spindle of the pinion is extended 
beyond the outer Wall and is constructed to 
form a Wrench-seat 12, upon which may be 
fitted an operating-crank 13 or any equivalent 
tool for communicating rotary motion to the 
Spindle. 
In order that the trough may be secured in 
either of its adjusted positions-namely, in 
its upright or in its inverted position-I pro 
vide the gear 9 with a plurality of sockets 14, 
preferably at diametrically opposite points, 
and also provide a spring-actuated locking 
pin 15, terminally exposed beyond the plane 
of the face-plate and adapted to engage either 
of said sockets in the gear. In the construc 
tion illustrated this locking-pin is provided 
with an actuating-spring 16 of the plate type 
secured to the inner surface of the face-plate, 
and it is obvious that in order to release the 
parts to provide for the turning of the trough 
the locking-pin must be drawn outwardly by 
means of its projecting extremity to remove 
itsinner end from engagement With the Socket 
in which it is fitted. 
From the above description it will be seen 
that when in either its upright or operative 
position or in its reversed or inoperative po 
sition the trough is locked by means of the 
pin provided for that purpose and that when 
released a trough of considerable Weight (the 
same is preferably constructed of boiler-iron) 
can be reversed with facility by turning the 
crank-arm provided for that purpose. 
The trunnions of the trough are preferably 
arranged at the centers of its ends or in aline 
ment with its longitudinal center and slightly 
above the center of gravity, whereby while 
the trough is adapted by gravity to maintain 
an upright or normal position it may be read 
ily reversed to discharge its contents. It will 
be seen that by this arrangement the opera 
tion of tilting the trough does not involve ele 
vating its contents, as the bottom of the 
trough, which is of semicylindrical construc 
tion, is approximately concentric with the 
trunnions, and hence With the axis of move 
ment. 
Warious changes in the form, proportion, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
7 o 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
 
2 
601,132 
trough and incased within said hollow stand 
ard, the gear on the said trunnion being pro 
vided with sockets, and a spring-actuated 
locking-pin mounted within the hollow stand 
ard for engagement with one of the sockets of 
the gear, and having a handle portion extend 
ed through an opening in Said face-plate for 
manual operation, Substantially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
DANIEL B. ESILENIAN. 
25 
Witnesses: 
C. BENSON, 
D. H. HOLLINGSWORTH. 
and the minor details of construction may be 
resorted to without departing from the spirit 
or sacrificing any of the advantages of this 
invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
A reversible trough having terminal trun 
nions, standards having bearings in which 
said trunnions are mounted, one of the stand 
ards being of hollow construction and having 
a removable face-plate, an operating-spindle 
mounted in one wall of the hollow standard 
and provided with an exposed wrench-seat, in 
termeshing gears carried by the operating 
Spindle and the contiguous trunnion of the 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601232.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1 
Gourling for SHAris, 
Patented Mar. 29, 1898. 
RMITN SMILE 
 
s 
NS 
N 
ity 
& to 
& Q 
N. 
SN 
. 
. 
. 
. . 
N 
'U' 
-S ) N 
\ 
\ 
-/ 
a. S 
2. 
3 a 
I 
II:r 
y 
2 s 
2 
a sm-- Z 
Q II 
..S. 
-- - - a re 
is 
. 
NAss-A 
Sail t 
| 
in 
O 
y 
S 
R 
O 
: 
O 
t 
SE 
S- 
t 
": 
U 
s 
R 
Y 
  
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
E. A. BLANTON, Jr. 
COUPLING FOR SEAFTS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 60l.,232. 
Patented Mar. 29, 1898. 
As74. 
 
 
424 
Y Es 
Ea 
es 
S 
EE 
 
 
P 
 
 
 
he Norris PTERs co, picto-4C WSHINGTON, d.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD A. BLANTON, JR., OF RIDLEY PARK, PENNSYLVANIA. 
couplin G FOR SHAFTs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 601 282, dated March 29, 1898. 
Application filed September 30, 1897, Serial No. 653,638, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD A. BLANTON, 
Jr., a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Ridley Park, in the county of Delaware and 
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Coupling for Shafts, of which the 
following is a specification. 
My present invention relates to a coupling 
for shafts and similar devices; and it has for 
its object to provide improved means whereby 
shafts, shaft-sections, and other devices may 
be quickly and effectively coupled together 
and in such a manner that they can be readily 
uncoupled when desired; and to these ends 
my invention consists in the various features 
of construction and arrangement of parts hav 
ing the mode of operation substantially as 
hereinafter more particularly set forth. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
wherein. I have shown an embodiment of my 
invention sufficient to enable those skilled in 
the art to make and use the same, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of portions of two shafts 
and the coupling separated and partly in sec 
tion in order to clearly show their construc 
Fig. 2 is a similar view of a modifica 
tion. 
tion in which there is a flanged coupling. 
Fig. 3 is a longitudinal vertical section of the 
parts shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a longitudi 
nal partly-vertical section of a modification, 
and Fig. 5 is a longitudinal vertical section 
showing a shaft of the character described 
acting as a coupling for driving and driven 
pulleys. 
. 
In my Patent No. 581,476, granted April 27, 
1897, I have described and claimed, broadly, 
a shaft provided with a series of curved in 
tegral Wedge-shaped bosses arranged in a cir 
cumferential line around the shaft adapted 
to be combined with a hub having a series of 
recesses to engage the bosses, so that the hub 
can be tightened on the shaft, and my pres 
ent invention may be said to be an improve 
ment on the Subject-matter of said patent and 
an extension or application of the same gen 
eral principles of construction applied more 
particularly to a shaft-coupling. 
In carrying out my present invention as 
illustrated more especially in Fig.1, A and B 
represent two shafts or shaft-sections or simi 
lar devices which are to be joined together, 
s 
sleeve. 
and C represents the connecting or coupling 
The shafts or shaft-sections to be joined 
are provided with a number of bosses or 
wedge-shaped portions a, b, respectively ex 
tending longitudinally along the shaft for a 
sufficient distance to form the coupling and 
preferably formed integrally with the shaft. 
The number of bosses or Wedge-shaped por 
tions may vary according to the requirements 
of any particular case; but in the drawings 
I have shown ten wedges or bosses arranged 
circumferentially on the ends of the shaft 
sections at equal distances apart. The Outer 
surfaces of the bosses a, b are on curves having 
gradually-increasing radii measured from the 
center of the shaft, either in the form of true 
eccentrics or involute curves or otherwise, the 
characteristic feature being that the curved 
surfaces of the bosses have gradually-in 
creasing radii measured from the center of 
the shaft, as more fully set forth in my prior 
patent above referred to. The wedges or 
bosses preferably extend completely around 
the circumference of the shaft, although it is 
evident that the object of the invention can 
be accomplished to a greater or less extent by 
having the bosses extend partially around 
the circumference, leaving plain surfaces of 
greater or less extent between the lowest part 
of one boss and the highest part of the next 
succeeding boss; but in all cases it is desir 
able to have the bosses symmetrically ar 
ranged around the circumference of the shaft, 
so that it can be readily applied to the coup 
ling-sleeve in different positions. 
It will be seen that the ends of the shafts. A 
and Badjacent to each other have the wedges 
or bosses arranged in opposition to each 
other-that is, the highest part of the Wedges 
or bosses a on the shaft A are farthest from 
the observer, while the highest part of the 
wedges or bosses b on the shaft B are nearest 
to the observer, making, in fact, right and left 
hand arrangements of the Wedges or bosses on 
the adjacent ends of the shafts to be coupled. 
The highest parts of these wedges or bosses 
are preferably on a longitudinal line with the 
remainder of the shaft, as shown in the draw 
ings, and the lower parts are formed by cut 
ting away portions of the shaft, although of 
45 
25 
35 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
601,282 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
55 
course they may be otherwise made, and they 
may be formed in any mechanical way, al 
though I have found it most practicable to 
turn them in a lathe. In this way the lower 
portions of the bosses are within the periph 
ery of the shaft-that is, the diameter of the 
shaft through the line including two of the 
lower portions of opposite bosses is less than 
the diameter of the shaft, while in the form 
shown the diameter through the highest parts 
of two opposite bosses is the same as the di 
ameter of the shaft. In some instances I find 
it advisable to groove the shaft adjacent the 
ends of the bosses, as at a', the groove being 
preferably of a depth corresponding to the 
lower portions of the bosses, and when this 
is done the side of the groove will form an 
abutment for the coupling to preventits mov 
ing too far on the shaft. When several sec 
tions of the shaft are to be joined, it is evi 
dent that the bosses at the opposite ends are 
arranged in opposition, as indicated in con 
nection with the shaft A, and it will be seen 
that either end of the section can be united 
With the coupling-sleeve, as whichever end 
is presented to the sleeve the bosses will cor 
respond in direction with the recesses in the 
sleeve, as hereinafter more fully set forth. 
The connecting or coupling sleeve C is pro 
vided With a number of recesses c c' in its 
bore or bearing-surface, corresponding with 
the number of bosses or wedges on the shaft, 
the recesses, however, being a little longer on 
their curved surfaces than the outer surfaces 
of the bosses or Wedges, so as to leave a slight 
space between the thickened portion of the 
boss or wedge and the corresponding radial 
portion of the recess. The curved surfaces 
of these recesses of course are the comple 
ments of the curved surfaces of the wedges 
Or bosses on the shaft. The recesses extend 
partially through the coupling-sleeve from 
each end, and, commencing at each end, they 
are in opposition to each other, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 1-that is, the high parts of 
the recesses c are toward the observer, while 
the high parts of the recesses c' are away from 
the observer, and preferably the high parts 
of the recesses care in line with the low parts 
of the recesses c', although this is not essen 
tial. In practice I prefer to have a plain cy 
lindrical surface between the inner adjacent 
ends of the recesses c c', as shown at c', al 
though this is not essential. 
It Will be observed that the recesses of the 
coupling are in opposition to each other, or, 
as it may be termed, right and left handed 
With relation to each other; but it will also 
be observed that the coupling can be turned 
either end to with relation to either one of 
the shafts A or B, as when turned in either 
position the curves of the recesses will corre 
Spond in direction with the curves of the 
bOSSes on either one of the shafts, 
With this construction of the parts, in or 
der to couple the shafts it is only necessary 
to insert the ends of the shafts into the oppo 
site ends of the coupling, and then by slightly 
turning one of the shafts or shaft-sections in 
the proper direction the coupling-section is 
secured tightly on the shaft, the Outer Sur 
faces of the bosses bearing closely against the 
inner surfaces of the recesses in the coupling 
at its opposite ends, and they will remain 
thus securely fastened together until One por 
tion of the shaft or the coupling itself is 
turned forcibly in the opposite direction, when 
the parts will be loosened, so that they can 
be readily removed. 
In practice I have found that the bosses or 
recesses need have but a relatively small lise 
between their lowest and highest parts. For 
instance, in a shaft two inches in diameter 
on which there are ten bosses one thirty-sec 
ond of an inch rise in the cams is entirely 
sufficient, and in a shaft five inches in dia 
meter, with a similar number of bosses, the 
cams may have one-twentieth of an inch rise, 
and the lost motion between the tight and 
loose position under these conditions does not 
exceed one-sixteenth of an inch. It will thus 
be seen that the shafts and coupling-sleeve 
have very little motion with relation to each 
other between the tight and loose position, and 
this is an important advantage in coupling 
shafts and other similar devices. Further 
more, if, for instance, a pulley or other device 
is desired to be attached to the shaft-sections 
the bosses or wedges may be extended longi 
tudinally of the shaft, as indicated at IB, IFig. 
3, and the pulley or other device may be 
slipped over the end of the shaft-section prior 
to its being coupled, and can be secured on 
the shaft by simply turning it slightly in a 
direction to bring the surfaces of the bosses 
and recesses together in a manner well un 
del'stood. 
In Fig. I the coupling-sleeve is shown inte 
gral, while in Fig. 2 I have shown a flanged 
coupling-sleeve, which is exceedingly useful 
in many instances-as, for instance, when it 
is desired to remove a shaft-section without 
the necessity of moving it longitudinally, so 
as to interfere with its bearings or devices car 
ried thereon or otherwise-and in this case 
the coupling is made in two sections C'C', 
with the recesses c c' formed in the bearing 
surfaces of the two portions, the same as in 
the coupling C. The sleeve portion or flange 
C is also provided with a series of recesses 
c' but, as shown in Fig. 2, these are in oppo 
sition to the recesses c, and the projecting 
portion C of the section C* is provided with 
bosses or wedges c, and these are arranged 
in the same relation as the bosses l on the 
shaft-section 13, adapted to engage the re 
cesses c', so that a slight turn of either shaft 
section A or B or of either of the sections C" 
or C of the coupling will lock the parts to 
gether and a slight turn of either portion in 
the Opposite direction will unlock or release 
them. . With this arrangement, as indicated 
in Fig. 3, the portion C" of the coupling can 
be slipped longitudinally on the shaft-section 
75 
95 
CO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
601,232 
3. 
is evident that I am not limited to the con 
struction and arrangement of the parts shown 
in the drawings, as the principles of the in 
vention may be embodied in other forms and 
under other conditions or applications with 
out departing from the spirit thereof. It will 
be manifest also to those skilled in the art 
that the invention provides a self-centering 
and self-tightening construction, but one 
which can be readily loosened when for any 
purpose this is desirable. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination with two shaft-sections 
each having a series of curved wedge-shaped 
bosses arranged in a circumferential line 
around its end, of a coupling-sleeve having 
two series of recesses to engage the bosses. On 
the respective shaft-sections, the recesses be 
ing arranged in opposition to each other in 
the bearing of the coupling-sleeve, Substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination with two shaft-sections 
each having a series of curved wedge-shaped 
bosses arranged in a circumferential line 
around its end, of a flanged coupling having 
two series of recesses to engage the bosses On 
the shaft-sections arranged in opposition to 
each other in its bearing and having a series 
of bosses on the projecting portion and cor 
responding recesses in its flanged portion, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination in a coupling and driv 
ing mechanism, of driving and driven ele 
ments and a connecting element, said connect 
ing element having two sets of wedge-shaped 
bosses arranged in opposition to each other 
and one set engaging with corresponding re 
cesses in the driving element while the other 
set engages with corresponding recesses in 
the driven element, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
W 
EDWARD A. BLANTON, JR. 
Witnesses: 
W. I. KLURG, 
R. A. KIRKPATRICK. 
55 
75 
90 
A, when both the portion of the coupling and 
the shaft-section can be removed laterally 
Without the necessity of moving either shaft 
Section longitudinally, and this is a great con 
venience when, for instance, any section of 
the shaft becomes injured or it is desired to 
change or rearrange the pulleys or bearings 
of the shaft or for other reasons which are ap 
parent to those skilled in the art. 
In Fig. 4 I have illustrated a modification 
in which the shaft-sections AB are formed at 
their ends with sockets adapted to receive a 
shaft-section D. This shaft-section, which in 
the present instance is shown as a short shaft, 
So that the adjacent ends of the sockets abut, 
but which of course can be a longer section 
separating the ends of the sockets, is provided 
with the bosses or wedge-shaped portions a, b, 
Oppositely arranged adjacent its ends, and 
these bosses or projections fit corresponding 
recesses c c' in the sockets of the shafts A and 
B, and their purpose and operation will be 
readily understood from what has been set 
forth above. 
In Fig. 5 I have illustrated a modification 
of what may be termed a coupling between 
the driving and driven pulleys embodying the 
broad features of my present invention. In 
this case the shaft A' is provided with two 
sets of bosses or wedge-shaped portions a b' 
at different parts of the shaft, arranged with 
their highest parts in opposition to each other, 
and mounted on the shaft and bearing on one 
set of bosses is a driven pulley E, while mount 
ed on the shaft and bearing on the other set 
of bosses is the driving-pulley F, the hubs of 
the pulleys being recessed, of course, to cor 
respond with the bosses or wedges. 
In this 
construction it will be seen that the shaft it 
self acts practically as a coupling between the 
driving and driven elements through theme 
dium of the oppositely-faced Wedge-shaped 
bOSses. 
From the above illustrations and descrip 
tion, which need not be further extended, the 
principles of my invention will be readily un 
derstood by those skilled in the art, and the 
advantages thereof Will be apparent, and it 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601332.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 601,332, 
S. H. ARRELL. 
TOBACCO CUTTER, 
Patented Mar, 29, 1898. 
  
WITNEsses. 
524.2 
 
IWWEMTOR 
14% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL H. ARRELL, OF GUTHRIE, OKLAHOMA TERRITORY. 
TOBACCO - CUTTER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 601,332, dated March 29, 1898. 
Application filed March 9, 1897, Serial No. 626,591. (No model.) 
O 
' 
... 
: 
" 
use the same. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SAMUEL H. ARRELL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Guth 
rie, in the county of Logan and Territory of 
Oklahoma, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Tobacco-Cutters, of 
which the following is a full and complete 
specification, such as will enable those skilled 
in the art to which it appertains to make and 
This invention relates to what are known as 
tobacco-cutters, and particularly to that 
class thereof employed for cutting plug-to 
bacco; and the object of the invention is to 
provide a tobacco-cutter of this class of the 
usual form which is provided with means for 
automatically cleaning the cutter-blade as the 
latter is operated. 
The invention is fully disclosed in the fol 
lowing specification, of which the accompany 
ing drawings form a part, in which the sepa 
rate parts of my improvement are designated 
by the same numerals of reference in each of 
the views, and in which- 
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved to 
bacco-cutter, part of the frame of the device 
being broken away; and Fig. 2, a vertical sec 
tion on the line 22. 
In the practice of my invention I provide a 
tobacco-cutter which comprises a base-plate 
5, to one end of which is secured a yoke-shaped 
frame 6, in the upper portion of which is 
formed a central slot or opening 7, centrally 
of which is pivoted a lever 8, and adjacent to 
the rear side of the slot or opening 7 is piv 
oted a plate or link 9 of the form shown in 
Fig. 1, and pivotally connected with the link 
9 and with the lever 8 is a curved or segmen 
tal coupling-link 10, and the cutting-blade 12 
is secured to a cross-head 13, which is pro 
vided with a shortarm14 and alonger arm15, 
and the short arm 14 is pivotally connected 
with the plate 9 and the longer arm 15 with 
the lever 8 below the connection of the link 10 
therewith. The opposite sides of the yoke 6 
are provided with vertical grooves 16,in which 
the cutting-blade 12 moves, and mounted 
at each side of the upright portions in the 
grooves 17, formed in the yoke 6, is a down 
Wardly and inwardly inclined blade 18. 
The blades 18 are held in proper position by 
screws or bolts 19, which pass through slots 
: 
- 
55 
20, formed in said blades, and into the sides 
of the yoke 6, and said blades 18 are verti 
cally adjustable within certain limits, and are 
also sharpened at their lower edges and adapt 
ed to press upon the opposite sides of the cut 
ting-blade 12, and in the operation of the cut 
ting-blade 12, by means of the lever 8, said 
blade is caused to rise and fall in the usual 
manner, the plug or plugs of tobacco being 
passed beneath said cutting-blade over the 
plate 5, and as the cutting-blade 12 is raised 
the blades 18 will remove from thesides there 
of all particles of tobacco that adhere thereto. 
It is a well-known fact that the cutting 
blades of tobacco-cutters of this class become 
quickly clogged or covered with tobacco, 
which is very hard to remove; but by means 
of my improvement the cutting-blade is kept 
clean, as will be readily understood, the to 
bacco adhering thereto being removed at each 
upward movement of said blade. 
This device is simple in construction and 
operation and is perfectly adapted to accom 
plish the result for which it is intended, and 
it will be apparent that changes in and modi 
fications of the construction herein described 
may be made without departing from the 
spirit of my invention or sacrificing its ad 
Vantages. 
Having fully described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. The herein - described tobacco - cutter 
comprising a base 5, frame 6 having a slot 7, 
a lever 8, links 9 and 10, a cutting-blade 12, 
cross-head 13 provided with arms 14 and 15 
the sides of said frame being provided with 
grooves 16, and scraping-blades 18 held in 
place by screws 19, all combined substantially 90 
as shown and described and for the purpose 
set forth. 
2. As an improved article of manufacture, 
a tobacco-cutter, the same being provided 
with scraping-blades 18 mounted in grooves 
17, and held in place by screws 19, said blades 
being provided with slots 20 whereby the same 
may be adjusted, substantially as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
3. The herein - described tobacco - cutter 
comprising a base 5, frame 6, having a slot 7, 
a lever 8, links 9 and 10, a cutting-blade 12, 
cross-head 13 provided with arms 14 and 15, 
95 
75 
CO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
50 
 
2 
- 
601,332 
the sides of said frame being provided with 
grooves 16, in which said cutting -blade is 
mounted and grooves 17 in which said scrap 
ing-blades are mounted, said scraping-blades of March, 1897. 
being provided with slots 20, and set-screws 
passed through said slots whereby the said 
scraping-blades may be adjusted, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY D. TODD, 
MARCUS T. CARLISLE. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name, in pres- Io 
ence of the subscribing witnesses, this 2d day 
SAMUEL H. ARRELL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601432.txt	(No Model.) 
J. COYNE. 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING GAS. 
Patented Mar. 29, 1898, 
No. 601.432. 
FS || . 
 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz?~No.?~zzzzzzz 
 
 
 
 
 
 
no-ross AAN 
aa2, 
S. 
222222222 
The Norris PTERS co. Photo. THO., WASHINGTON, d. c. 
Atty. 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
J. COYNE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING GAS, 
(No Model.) 
No. 60 
432. 
Patented Mar, 29, 1898, 
FG. E. . 
 
7zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzza?y?? 
2??zzzzz?zzzzzzzzzzzz%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NvEN ToR, 
THE MORRIS PETERs co. PHoro-Litho. wastington e 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J. COYNE 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING CAS, 
No. 601,432. 
 
Patented Mar, 29, 1898. 
The NORRI 
sperers co. PHoro-LTHO, WASHINGTON, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
6 Sheets-Sheet 4, 
J. COYNE, 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING GAs, 
No. 601,432, 
Patented Mar. 29, 1898. 
A. 3 
WNESSES 
??????? 
?Z// 
INVENTOR, 
vHE MORRIS PETEPS co. PHOTO-LITHo. wasncroN. . 
. 
 
(No Model.) 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING GAs. 
J. COYNE 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
 
 
Atty. 
? 
(No Model.) 
J. COYNE 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING GAS, 
No. 601,432, 
Patented Mar, 29, 1898, 
WTNESSES 
 
INVENTOR, 
?????????? 
?? 
???? 
???? 
????? 
??? 
 
the Norris rerers co, ProTo-LITHo...wash INGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN COYNE, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING GAS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 601,432, dated March 29, 1898. 
Application filed December 2, 1896, Serial No. 614,190, (No model.) 
? ? 
25 
30 
To all, ??h???, it may conce7?: 
Be it known that I, JoHN COYNE, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Pittsburg, in 
the county of Allegheny and State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented or discovered certain 
new and usefullmprovements in the Manufac 
ture of Gas, of which improvements the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The invention described herein relates to 
certain improvements in the method of and 
apparatus for producing gas rich in illuminat 
ing qualities and of such stability as to per 
mit of its being stored and transported for a 
considerable distance. 
In general terms the invention consists in 
the construction and combination substan 
tially as hereinafter more fully described and 
claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a sec 
tional elevation of my improved plant, the 
plane of section being indicated at the lineII, 
Fig. 3. Fig. 2 is a similar view, the plane of 
section being indicated by the line II III, Fig. 
3. Fig. 3 is a top plan view of the apparatus. 
Fig. 4 is a sectional elevation of a modified 
form of the apparatus, the plane of section 
being indicated by the line IV IV, Fig. 6. 
Fig. 5 is a view, partly in section and partly 
in elevation, the plane of section being indi 
cated by the line VW, Fig. 6. 
Fig. 6 is a top 
plan view of the apparatus shown in Figs, 4 
and 5. Figs. 7 and 8 are sectional detail 
views of the reversing-valves. Fig. 9 is a sec 
tional detail view illustrating the manner of 
constructing the walls of the metal retaining 
shell of the apparatus. Figs. 10 and 11 are 
detail plan views of the grate-supporting spi 
der. Fig. 12 is a sectional detail view, the 
plane of section being indicated by the line 
XII XII, Fig. 2; and Fig. 13 is a sectional de 
tail view, on an enlarged scale, of one of the 
reversing-valves. 
In the practice of my invention Iemploy two 
chambers A and B, which are alternately used 
as generating and fixing chambers. These 
chambers may be arranged in one retaining 
shell 1, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, or in in 
dependent retaining-shells 1 and 1, as shown 
in Figs. 4, 5, and 6. The metal retaining 
shells areformed by a series of cylindrical sec 
tions and a dome-shaped top or cap section. 
The upper ends of the body-sections are 
formed as shown in Fig. 9, with outwardly-pro 
jecting flanges or ledges 2, provided around 
their outer edges with upwardly-projecting 
retaining ribs or rims 3, thereby forming seats 
for the reception of the enlargements or feet 
4 on the lower ends of the superjacent body 
sections or cap. The adjacent faces of the 
flanges or ledges 2 and the feet 4 are prefer 
ably grooved, as shown at 5 in Fig. 9, for the 
reception of a suitable packing. As an ad 
ditional safeguard against leakage the outer 
edges of the feet 4 and the inner faces of the 
rims 3 are so shaped as to form between them 
a wedge-shaped opening for the reception of 
a suitable luting, which is held in place by 
grooves in the rims or feet. It will be ob 
served that this luting can be tightly packed 
in position, but will permit the lifting of one 
section from the others. 
The metal shell, which is supported on 
brackets 6, secured with the tank 7, as shown 
in Figs. 1, 2, 4, and 5, is provided with an in 
wardly-projecting shelf or ledge 8. From 
this ledge or shelf depends the annular apron 
9, which projects down sufficiently far into 
the water contained in the tank to form a 
seal around the grate, as hereinafter de 
scribed. 
In the construction shown in Figs 1, 2, and 
3 two semicircular sections of pipe. 10, having 
a diameter a little greater than the external 
diameter of the spherical grate 11, are placed 
on the ledge or shelf 8 and form supports for 
the arch pipe-sections 12, which are preferably 
formed integral with the pipe-sections 10 and 
are formed on arcs of such radius that their 
upper ends will come into contact with one 
another and can be secured together, form 
ing the support for the dividing-wall 13. 
In the form of apparatus shown in Figs. 4, 
5, and 6 the supporting-arch 12 is omitted, as 
the two chambers are formed in independent 
shells. The brickwork forming the inner 
Walls 14 is supported by the ledge or shelf 8 
and the cooling-pipes 10. 
It will be observed 
that an air-space is left between the metallic 
shell and brickwork to prevent loss of heat 
or excessive heating of the metallic shell. 
As 
gases may escape into the air-space and form 
an explosive mixture with the air, injury to 
the shell or brickwork in case of explosion is 
55 
75 
95 
OCs 
35 
45 
 
2 
. 
601,482 
prevented by the escape - pipe 1", which is 
normally closed by the weighted cap 1, as 
shown in Fig. 2. 
The hollow spherical grate 11 is supported 
by the pipes 1515, which extend through the 
outer shell and brickwork and passing be 
tween the ends of the pipe-sections 10 pro 
ject into the grate, as shown in Figs. 2 and 5. 
These pipes 15 15 are supported by sleeves 
16, which are secured to the outer shell 1. 
The spherical grate is provided on its surface 
with conical projections c, whereby the por 
tions of the charge adjacent thereto may be 
agitated, and through the walls of the grate 
at the bases of the projections are formed 
conical perforations for the passage of air, 
gases, &c., into the chambers, said perfora 
tions being largest at their inner ends. In 
order to rotate the grates, collars 1717, hav 
ing sockets for the reception of ends of suit 
able bars, are secured on the pipes 1515, out 
side of the bearing-sleeves 16. 
In the form of apparatus shown in Figs. 1, 
2, and 3 the grate is formed in two hemi 
spherical sections a and b. In the diaphragms 
18, closing these grate-sections, are formed 
sockets for the reception of the journal 19, 
which serves to hold the two sections in proper 
relation to each other. 
The fuel is placed in a hopper 20, provided 
with a controlling-bell 21 and supported by 
the tubes. 22 and 22, which are connected at 
their upper ends to the hopper 20, while their 
lower ends project down into the chambers 
A and B. At the junction of the tubes with 
the hopper 20 and with each other is arranged 
a gate 23, whereby the charge may be directed 
into one or the other tube, as desired. 
The chambers A and B are connected by 
pipes. 24 24" with a valve-chamber 25, having 
a valve 26 arranged therein. The ports of 
this valve are so located that in one position 
of the valve the gases from one chamber will 
flow through the pipe 24 and the valve into 
the passage d of the pipe 27, and when the 
valve, is shifted the pipes. 24 and 27 will be 
closed and gases from the other chamber will 
flow through pipe 24" and the valve into the 
passaged of pipe 27, as shown in Fig. 7. As 
shown in Fig. 2, the pipes 27 and 27 are con 
nected at their lower ends to the outer ends 
of the pipes 15.15 by a form or construction 
of joint which will permit of the rotation of 
the pipes. 15. 15" without opening the joint. 
The joint shown is formed by beveling the 
outer wall of one set of pipes and the inner 
wall of the other set of pipes, so as to permit 
the latter being inserted in the former, as 
shown. In order to introduce air into the 
chambers, the pipes 27 27 are formed with 
two passages for a portion of their length, and 
one of these passages e is connected to nozzle: 
60, which in turn is connected to a suitable. 
source of air under pressure. At the junc 
tion of the passages e with the nozzle. 60 is 
placed a gate 61, adapted to direct the air 
- 
into the passages of the pipes 27 or 27 alter 
nately, and to close the corresponding passage 
in the other pipe steam is introduced into the 
chambers A and B by pipes 62 62, passing 
through the pipes 15 15 and projecting into 
the grates 11, as shown in Figs. 2 and 4. If 
: it is desired to use oil in the production of 
gas, pipes 6363 are passed through or along 
side of the steam-pipes 62 62. 
As shown in Figs. 1 and 9, the valve-cases 
25 and 29 are internally coned, and the ex 
terior walls of the valves 26 and 30 are simi 
larly shaped, so that the latter may be moved 
: down into the cases to compensate for Wear. 
As these valves might become wedged into 
the cases and require considerable force to 
move them, they are preferably supported by 
means of nuts. 36 and 37, screwing on the 
stems 36 and 37 and bearing on the caps 25 
and 29 of the valve-cases. These nuts can 
be so adjusted that the entire weight of the 
valves will be borne by them and the valves 
just in contact with the shells. 
The fixed gases are conducted from the 
chambers by pipes 2828, which are connected 
to the valve-chamber 29, containing the valve 
30, and also connected to the pipe 31. The 
ports of the valve are so arranged that in One 
position of the valve the pipe 28 is placed in 
communication with the pipe 31 and by a 
shifting of the valve the pipe 2S is closed and 
the pipe 28 connected to the pipe 31. The 
lower end of the pipe 31 projects down such 
a distance into the hydraulic main or seal 
box 32 that its lower end will be immersed by 
the water contained in such tank, which is 
provided with an outlet-elbow 33, adapted to 
be connected to a pipe leading to a storage 
tank or gas-distributing pipes. 
The seal-box 
is provided with a supply-pipe and With an 
escape-pipe 34, having its upper end made in 
the form of a trap 35. The inflow of water is 
so regulated that the open. end of the trap 
will be always opem, so as to permit of the 
escape of the heavier gases, as ammonia and 
cyanogen, through the pipe 35. The Water 
flowing through the pipe 35 will have an eject 
ing action on the gases, so as to facilitate their 
escape from the seal-box. 
As shown in Figs. 1, 3, and 6, the stems 36 
and 37 of the valves 26 and 30 are provided 
with arms 38 and 39, having their outer ends 
connected by a link 40, so that a movement 
of one of the valves will effect a correspond 
ing movement of the other valve. A double 
arm 41 is secured upon one of the valve-stems, 
as 37, and the ends of this arm are connected 
by rods 42 and bell-crank levers 43 to the op 
jerating-levers 4444", which are so pivoted to 
the metal shell 1 as to be conveniently oper 
ated from the ground, as shown in Figs. 3, 5, 
and 6. The bell 21 in the hopper 20 and the 
igate 23 for directing the coal are operated by 
levers, which are preferably located so as to 
! be convenient of access. The bells in the 
I feed-tubes 22 22 are connected by suitable 
? ? 
2 ? 
35 
45 
5o 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
75 
95 
? ? ? 
IO 
II5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
 
601.432 
75 
5 
? ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
?? 
mechanism with levers 46.46, pivoted to the 
metallic shell so as to be capable of operation 
from the ground. 
Circulation of water through the pipes 10 
and 12 is maintained by the supply-pipes 47 
and the outlet-pipes 48, which are arranged 
to discharge water into the tank 7, as shown 
in Figs. 1 and 4. 
In order to relieve the pipes 1515 of a por 
tion of the weight of the grate 11, the latter 
is provided with one or more circumferential 
ribs f, which rest upon rollers 49, journaled 
on the frame 50, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 
5. The legs of this frame are curved up 
wardly and the feet thereof are provided with 
adjusting-screws 51, resting on the bottom of 
the tank, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, and 
11, where the height of the frame may be 
regulated. In order to prevent them from 
spreading, the legs are tied together by a rod 
52, looped around the hook 53 on one leg and 
its ends passed through lugs 54 on the other 
legs. The tension of the rod is regulated by 
nuts screwing on the threaded ends and bear 
ing against the lugs. 
? 
For the removal of the grates the bottom of 
the tank is provided with a removable sec 
tion 55, which is formed with a peripheral 
groove for the reception of the rim or bead 
56 along the edges of the opening in the bot 
tom of the tank, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 
4. The removable section is held in place by 
a bolt 57, passing through the center of the 
spider 58 and screwing into the section. The 
ends of the spider rest in a groove 59, formed 
along the edges of the opening in the bottom 
of the tank, and in order to prevent displace 
ment of the spider it is given a slight dish or 
upward curvature, so that when drawn down 
toward the removable section its ends will 
be forced outwardly against the wall of the 
groove 59. 
When employing the form of apparatus 
shown in Figs. 4, 5, and 6, it is preferred to 
form the tank in two sections, as shown. As 
each section of the twin apparatus has only 
one pipe 15 or 15, it is preferred to use dummy 
pipes 64 64 for supporting the opposite sides 
of the grates 11, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6, 
said pipes being closed at their outer or inner 
ends. 
In the manufacture of gas kindling and 
coke or coal are charged and ignited in both 
chambers. A blast of air is maintained in 
both chambers until a body of incandescent 
fuel of suitable depth is obtained in each 
chamber. The products of combustion dur 
ing the preliminary operation are allowed to 
escape through the charging-tubes 2222* and 
hopper 20. Carbonaceous fuel, as coal, is 
then charged into one of the chambers, as A, 
and the bells in the tubes and hopper are 
closed. Air under pressure is then forced 
through the passage e of pipe 27 into the hol 
low grate, whence it escapes in small jets into 
the chamber A. As the air passes through 
the incandescent charge it is decomposed. In 
the lower portion of the charge carbonic acid 
is formed, but is converted while passing 
through the upper part of the incandescent 
bed into carbonic oxid. The heat of the in 
candescent bed and that of the gases passing 
through the superincumbent coal volatilizes 
the hydrocarbons thereof, and the gases thus 
produced mingle with the carbonic oxid and 
pass through the pipe 24, the passage d of 
pipe 27, the valve 26 having been properly 
adjusted, and hollow grate 11, into the cham 
ber B. As the gases begin to flow into the 
hollow grate of chamber B steam is mingled 
with the gases in the grate and passes with 
them into and through the incandescent 
charge in chamber B. In their passage 
through the incandescent charge of chamber 
B the hydrocarbon vapors are fixed and the 
steam is decomposed, producing Oxygen and 
hydrogen. The carbon is volatilized by the 
combined action of heat and oxygen and com 
bines with the latter, forming carbonic oxid, 
while the nitrogen will combine with a por 
tion of the hydrogen, forming ammonia. The 
gases thus formed and fixed in the chamber 
B pass by the pipe 28 through hydraulic 
main and water seal, where the ammonia and 
cyanogen gases are removed, and then into 
a distributing-main or gas-holder. As soon 
as the charge in chamber B becomes cooled 
the valves 26 and 30 and gate 61 are reversed 
and the valve in steam-pipe 62 is closed and 
that in 62 is opened. At the same time a 
charge of coal is admitted into chamber B. 
It results from this adjustment of the valves 
that air will flow through passage e of pipe 
27 into the grate of the chamber B, and the 
gases generated in said chamber will flow 
through the pipe 24", the passage d of pipe 
27, into the grate of chamber A, where it is 
mingled with steam, as above described, and 
passes in small jets through the incandescent 
charge in chamber A. From the latter cham 
ber the gases flow through the pipe 28, hy 
draulic main, and water seal to the distrib 
uting-main or gas-holder. 
If it is desired to produce a gas of high 
illuminating quality, oil may be introduced 
into the fixing-chamber through the pipe 63 
or 63 along with the steam. 
It is characteristic of my improved method 
that all the gases generated are saved, none 
being lost in the blasting up of the charges, 
the latter operation as an independentstep be 
ing entirely avoided in my improved method. 
It will be noticed that the gases from the gen 
erating-chamber and the steam pass upwardly 
through the incandescent charge of the fixing 
chamber, Or, in other Words, are subjected to 
a gradually-decreasing temperature, the lower 
part of the charge in the fixing-chamber be 
ing the hottest. This operation results in the 
production of carbonic oxid, hydrogen,marsh 
gas, ethylene, and acetylene, all of which are 
valuable in heating and illuminating gases. 
95 
Ido 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
 
4 
601,432 
This operation also facilitates the combina- || 
tion of the nitrogen and hydrogen, forming 
ammonia, which can be removed. 
The methods heretofore in vogue-i. e., 
passing the gases down through the incan 
descent fixing-charge-result in the produc 
tion of carbonic oxid, carbonic-acid gas, and 
nitrogen, the two latter being in such quan 
tities as to greatly reduce the efficiency of the 
carbonic oxid. It also results from forcing 
the air and gases up through the charges that 
the latter are prevented from packing down 
into a comparatively dense mass, through 
which the air and gases can be forced with 
difficulty. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. As an improvement in the art of manu 
facturing gas, the method herein described, 
which consists in passing air upward through 
an incandescent body of carbonaceous mate 
rial and a superincumbent charge of fresh 
fuel ignited from the incandescent body and 
hot gases passing therethrough, and then 
commingling the gases so produced with steam 
or steam and oil, and passing such commin 
gled gases and steam or steam and oil through 
an incandescent body of carbonaceous mate 
rial in such manner that the gases will be 
subjected to a gradually-reduced heat, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. As an improvement in the art of manu 
facturing gas, the method herein described, 
which consists in passing air upward through 
an incandescent body of carbonaceous mate 
rial and a superincumbent charge of fresh 
fuel ignited from the incandescent body and 
hot gases passing therethrough, and then 
commingling the gases soproduced with steam 
or steam and oil, and passing Such commin 
gled gases and steam or steam and oil upward. 
through an incandescent body of carbona 
ceous material previously blasted from the 
bottom, substantially as set forth. 
3. In a gas apparatus, the combination of 
two chambers, pipe connections extending 
from the upper portions of each of said cham 
bers and connected to the lower ends of the 
other chamber, and pipes for introducing air 
and steam into the lower portions of each 
chamber, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a gas apparatus, the combination of 
two chambers, a valve mechanism, pipe con 
nections from the upper and lower portions 
of each chamber to the valve mechanism, and 
pipes for introducing air and steam into the 
lower portions of said chambers, substantially 
as set forth. 
I. ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
5. In a gas apparatus, the combination of 
a water-tank provided with inwardly-project 
ing brackets, a metallic shell supported by 
said brackets and provided with an inwardly 
projecting ledge or shelf for supporting the 
lining, an annular apron projecting from the 
shell down into the water contained in the 
tank, and a grate arranged in the Space in 
closed by the annular apron, substantially as 
set forth. 
6. In a gas apparatus, the combination of 
a metallic shell provided with an inwardly 
projecting shelf or ledge for supporting the 
lining, semicircular water-pipes supported by 
the ledge, and a pipe for supplying water to 
: the semicircular pipes, substantially as set 
forth. 
7. In a gas apparatus, the combination of 
a chamber, a hollow, spherical grate With con 
ical projections on its exterior and conical 
openings to the interior, and provided with 
a circumferential rib adjustably supported, 
rollers forming a bearing or support for the 
rib, and one or more blast-pipes for rotating 
the grate, substantially as set forth. 
8. In a gas apparatus, the combination of 
a tank, a generator-shell supported within the 
tank, with its lower end projecting below the 
surface of the Water contained in the tank, a 
grate arranged in the lower end of the gener 
ator, a frame resting on the bottom of the 
tank, and a removable plate forming a por 
tion of the bottom of the tank, substantially 
as set forth. 
9. In a gas apparatus, the combination of 
a tank, a generator-shell supported within the 
tank, a hollow, spherical grate provided with 
projections on its outer surface, and having 
its walls perforated, a frame for adjustably 
; supporting the grate and a pipe extending 
into the grate and adapted to rotate the same, 
substantially as set forth. 
10. In a gas apparatus, the combination of 
| tw?? chambers and pipes projecting in the 
lower portions of said chambers, the pipe from 
each chamber being connected to the upper 
portion of the other chamber, and pipes con 
nected to a suitable source of air under pres 
I sure and to the lower portions of the cham 
ber, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
JOHN COYNIE. 
Witnesses: 
DARWIN S. WOLCOTT, 
F. E. GAITHER. 
?? 
75 
95 
? ? ? 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601533.txt	(No Model.) 
R. A. STEWAR.T. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING AND SEPARATING ORES, 
Patented Mar. 29, 1898, 
No. 601,533, 
 
 
 
: 
N 
  
 
S) 
pileptor 
72 & 4.e. 
orris peers co- photoLITHO, WASH:NGTON. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT A. STEWART, OF CERRILLOS, TERRITORY OF NEW MEXICO, AS 
SIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND MESNEASSIGNMENTS, OF ONE-HALF TOJAMES 
J. VORPE AND LILLIE G. BEALE, OF WAN WERT, OHIO. 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING AND SEPARATING ORES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 601,533, dated March 29, 1898. 
Application filed April 21, 1897, 
Serial No. 633,170. (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it. nally concern: 
Beit known that I, ROBERTA. STEWART, a 
resident of Cerrillos, in the county of Santa 
F and Territory of New Mexico, have invent 
ed certain new and useful Improvements in 
Methods of and Apparatus for Reducing and 
Separating Ores; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
the method of and apparatus for reducing and 
separating ores, the object being to effect a 
saving of time and expense as well as a thor 
ough separation of the precious metals from 
their ores; and it consists in certain proce 
dure in the method of treatment of the ores 
and in features of construction and combina 
tions of parts in the apparatus, which will be 
hereinafter described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view in side elevation of the form of appa 
ratus, and Fig. 2 is a horizontal section 
through the centrifugal distributer. 
A represents a furnace. This may be of 
any approved construction, its function being 
to furnish heat for the ore-chamber. Ordi 
nary fuel is burned in it, and a draft is cre 
ated by a blast-fan a beneath the grate. B 
indicates this ore- chamber, into which the 
charge of ore is fed through a chute b or oth 
erwise for disintegration, and the flow of ore 
into the chamber may be regulated by a gate 
C at the lower end of this chute. A pipe 1 
leads from the furnace into the ore-chamber 
for discharging the full blast of heated air 
This pipe 1 may be variously con 
thereinto. 
structed, and it must of course be lined with 
some refractory material to withstand the in 
tense heat. The pipe is preferably large where 
it leaves the furnace, from which point it is 
gradually reduced in size to concentrate the 
escaping hot air as it passes through it. In 
order to increase the intensity of heat of this 
column of air, a steam-pipe 2 is inserted part 
way through the pipe 1, and its contents is 
discharged therein a short distance backfrom 
the discharge end of the larger pipe, so that 
the contents of the two are mixed together be 
fore the flame enters the ore-chamber. This 
steam may be brought in from any conven 
ient point-as, for instance, the boiler of the 
furnace-and to superheat it I prefer to con 
duct it through the furnace for a short dis 
tance. Air may be introduced into the pipe 
1 by means of another pipe similar to steam 
pipe 2, or it may be admitted through open 
ings 3 in the front of the ore-chamber around 
the pipe 1, if desired. By this means I am 
enabled to get a very high degree of heat, and 
this is absolutely necessary to accomplish my 
purpose, which is to entirely disintegrate the 
ore while in the ore-chamber B. After this 
heat has continued for an adequate period 
the ore is calcined or reduced to powder, and 
it is not until this stage of disintegration has 
been reached that it is in condition for the 
next step in the process of treatment. 
An exhaust-chamber 5 is located beyond the 
ore-chamber, and a pipe 6 conducts the finely 
disintegrated ore from chamber Binto the ex 
haust-chamber. Beneath the exhaust-cham 
ber a distributing-chamber 7 is located. This 
chamber is filled with water and its bottom is 
covered with quicksilver. A centrifugal dis 
tributer 8 is submerged in the water of this 
chamber, and it is constructed to rotate there 
in at a high speed. A pipe 9, leading down 
from the bottom of the exhaust-chamber, con 
stitutes an outlet for the contents of the lat 
ter, and the rapidly-revolving centrifugal dis 
tributer creates a suction thereon which is 
sufficient to carry the ore from chamber Bjust 
as fast as it becomes finely disintegrated. 
This distributer has slotted sides, out through 
which its contents is forced into the surround 
ing water as a result of the centrifugal action. 
Water is constantly supplied through a pipe. 
12, and an overflow 13 carries it off over amal 
gamating-plates, where any remaining par 
ticles of precious metal are readily extracted. 
: The heat, the dampers, the steam and air 
supply, and the speed of the distributer ma 
be regulated suitably to accomplish the best 
results. The apparatus may of course be 
varied more or less-as, for instance, any va 
riety of furnace might be employed and the 
steam can be supplied from any convenient 
y 95 
TICO 
O 
35 
40 
45 
So 
 
2 
601,533 
means for applying sufficient heat thereto to 
calcine and reduce the ore to a finely-divided 
condition, of a receptacle adapted to contain 
a body of water, a centrifugal distributer lo 
cated within said receptacle and arranged to 
be submerged in Water, and a conduit through 
which the calcined ore is drawn from the ore 
chamber into the centrifugal distributer, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. The combination with an ore-chamber, 
means for supplying sufficient heat thereto to 
calcine and reduce the ore to a finely-divided 
condition, and an exhaust-chamber in com 
munication with the ore-chamber, of a dis 
tributing-chamber communicating with the 
ore-chamber, a slotted centrifugal distributer 
located in the distributing-chamber and con 
nections through which the calcined ore is 
drawn from the ore-chamber into the cen 
trifugal distributer, substantially asset forth. 
4. The combination with an exhaust-cham 
ber, and a distribution-chamber containing 
water therein, of a slotted centrifugal dis 
tributer submerged in water contained in the 
distribution-chamber and in communication 
with the exhaust-chamber to draw material 
from the exhaust-chamber into the distribu 
ter and force it therefrom into the surround 
ing water. 
5. The combination with an exhaust-cham 
ber and a distribution-chamber adapted to 
contain Water, of a slotted centrifugal dis 
tributer and an axial tube leading from the 
exhaust-chamber through which material is 
drawn into it from said chamber. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
ROBERT A. STEWART. 
45 
55 
75 
Witnesses: 
S. W. FOSTER, 
R. S. FERGUSON. 
point; but the gist of the invention is the 
method by which in a single continuous op 
eration the ore is reduced to a finely-divided 
and disintegrated powder and conveyed in 
that state into a distributer, partly in conse 
quence of the construction and operation of 
the distributer itself and partly as a result of 
the natural draft of the furnace and the force 
of the air-blast in front. In this way the 
time required and the cost incident to the 
operation of reduction is reduced to a mini 
mum. By actual tests I have found that I 
can reduce a charge of ore an hour at a 
greatly-reduced cost, probably one third or 
fourth of the usual cost, at the same time 
saving a larger per cent. of the precious metal 
than it has been possible to do heretofore. 
It will not pay, ordinarily, to mine ore which 
does not yield ten dollars per ton, as it costs 
that much to reduce it. By this method I 
make it yield three or four times that amount, 
and I propose to employ my method to a very 
large extent in working waste and discarded 
ore, because it will save such a large percent 
age of what has heretofore been lost. Also 
it may be mentioned that this process may 
be applied to the manufacture of paint from 
lead ore, as it is most effective and success 
ful in reducing lead in a single process for 
use as an ingredient in the manufacture of 
paint. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The method of reducing and separating 
ores, consisting in heating the ores until the 
ore is calcined and brought into a finely-di 
vided condition while still in the presence of 
heat, then conveying the calcined ore by suc 
tion and distributing it over an amalgamator 
located beneath a body of water, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. The combination with an ore-chamber, 
O 
(5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601633.txt	E. CLIFF. 
HOSE REEL. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1, 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
No. 601,633. 
% 
 
 
s 
 
 
 
2 
  
 
Z 
- 
O- 
A. 
& NN N 
S 
74 a 
s 
s 
 
 
 
EEe E 
s E 
 
 
w.N sakw 
US 
te Y IN 
s 
WITNESSES: N-7 N. Y Y-7 INVENTOR 
IN NS 
)2%zz s Se 
S-Per-SEle. - 
s 
> 
enaces 
R SS 
= (24 A22. 
2NS N2 
- Arr;we 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 601,633, 
WITNESSES 
 
E. CLIFF. 
HOSE REEL, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898. 
&lwa-64, 
By 
/WWENTOR 
A 
rta Norris PETERs co, photo-LTHo, WASilmoto. C. c. 
ATTORNEY. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
. 
EDWARD CLIFF, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY. 
HOSE REE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 601,633, dated April 5, 1898. 
Application filed October 18, 1897, Serial No. 655,547, (No model.) 
IO 
(5 
25 
. 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD CLIFF, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Newark, in the county of Essex and State of 
New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Hose-Reels, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
hose-reels, and particularly to improvements 
in hose-reels of the character employed in 
buildings having a fixed water-supply appa 
ratus, to which the hose or the-reel may be 
permanently applied. 
In the embodiment of my invention herein 
presented the reel proper is connected to the 
stem of the valve controlling the flow of wa 
ter, and said valve is opened by the unwind 
sing of the hose from the reel, so that upon 
the hose being unwound for use the water is 
automatically turned on and is within the 
hose as soon as the latter can be used. When 
fully unwound, the hose is entirely free of 
the reel and is simply left connected with the 
exposed water-supply apparatus. After the 
use of the hose in extinguishing a fire the 
reverse motion of the reel without regard to 
the hose will close the valve in the water 
supply pipe and thereafter at any convenient 
time by disconnecting the reel from the valve 
stem, but leaving said reel to turn freely 
around said stem or upon a sleeve inclosing 
said stem, the hose may be readily rewound 
upon the reel without affecting the valve. 
The invention will be fully understood from 
the detailed description hereinafter present 
ed, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which- 
Figure 1 is a central vertical longitudinal 
Section through a reeland Water-supply appa 
ratus embodying the invention, the valve con 
trolling the flow of water being shown in its 
closed position and the hose being omitted 
from the water-supply pipe. Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation, partly broken away, of a reel and 
hose embracing the invention. Fig. 3 is an 
enlarged detached side elevation of a portion 
of the reel; and Fig. 4 is an edge view show 
ing the reel mounted at an angle of forty-five 
degrees instead of on a horizontal plane, as 
indicated in Fig. 1. 
In the drawings, A designates the reel, 
- - 
- 
- 
which is composed of the hub B and disks 
CC, the latter being secured to the flanges 
E of said hub by means of the bolts E, upon 
which the hose F is wound, as more clearly 
illustrated in Figs. 2 and 4. The hub B is of 
cast metal and contains the circular hollow 
bore G to receive the sleeve H, which incloses 
the valve-stem I and is connected with the 
valve-casing J, the latter being supported 
upon the water-supply pipe K. The hub B 
is cast with the radial end flanges D and with 
the webs L., which connect the said flanges 
within the line of the bolts E, as indicated 
in Fig. 1. The plates or disks C Chave cen 
tral apertures, as shown, the disk nearest to 
the valve-casing J having its central aper 
ture of greater diameter than the bore G of 
said hub B, while the disk Cat the outer side 
of the reel has its central aperture of a di 
ameter adapted to snugly receive the outer 
end of the said hub B. The outer end of the 
hub B has the inwardly-projecting annular 
flange M, which is utilized, as hereinafter 
described, for fastening the reel A and sleeve 
R together, so that the movement of the reel 
turning on the sleeve H will effect the longi 
tudinal movement of the valve-stem I. 
The valve-casing J, the Water-pipe K, and 
the valve N are of well-known form, said 
valve-casing, as usual, receiving the sleeve EI 
and being provided with the nozzle O, to which 
the hose F is attached. The sleeve Hat One 
portion has a bore which is polygonal in cross 
section to engage the polygonal portion of the 
valve-stem I, and the bore of said sleeve Hat 
its other portion is circular in cross-section 
to receive and permit the revolving therein 
of the inner end of the sleeve R, which, as 
shown in Fig. 1, is internally threaded and re 
ceives the exterior thread formed on the valve 
stem I. The sleeve R is keyed by means of 
the pins S within the sleeve H, the purpose 
of the pins being merely to prevent the sleeve 
R from traveling outward from the sleeve 
H when said sleeve R is being revolved un 
der the action of the reel A. The sleeve 
R has within the bore G of the hub B the 
annular flange T, which, as shown in Fig. 
1, is at the inner side of the flange M, formed 
on the reel, and the outer end of the sleeve R. 
is externally threaded to receive the clamp 
35 
40 
45 
so 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
R 
601,633 
15 
25 
 
 
ing-nut W and jam-nut W. When the parts 
are in the position in which they are shown 
in Fig. 1, the sleeve R is connected with the 
reel A by means of the pressure exerted on 
5 the flange M by the nut V and flange T, and 
under such condition the sleeve R will freely 
revolve with the reel A and by means of its 
internal thread effect the longitudinal move 
ment of the valve-stem I and valve N, said 
Io stem I being prevented from rotating by the 
polygonal form of the bore of the sleeve HT 
and the corresponding form of the polygo 
nal portion of said valve-stem. Thus upon 
the rotation of the reel A, when the parts are 
in the condition shown in Fig. 1, the sleeve 
R will effect the longitudinal movement of 
the valve-stem I, and the latter will be held 
against rotation. The sleeve His stationary 
and the sleeve R revolves within the outer 
end of the sleeve H and upon the threaded 
portion of the valve-stem I. Upon the outer 
face of the outer disk C is provided a plate X, 
whose central portion extends inward upon 
the flanges M. For convenience the tighten 
ing up of the nut V draws the head T of the 
sleeve R against a portion of the hub B, said 
portion being lettered m, but it is apparent 
that the flange M may be omitted and the 
head T drawn against the plate X, if pre 
ferred. The flange M forms a convenient 
means for clamping the reel and sleeve R to 
gether. When the nuts V W are loosened 
on the outer end of the sleeve R, the reel A 
is left free to revolve upon the sleeve H with 
out in any manner affecting the valve-stem I. 
The hose F is at one end provided with the 
usual nozzle C and at its other end is coupled 
to the nozzle O, forming a part of the perma 
nent Water-supply apparatus. In winding 
the hose upon the reel, one end of the hose 
being coupled to the nozzle O, the hose at 
about its center will be folded upon a cyl 
inder or core of the kind shown in Letters 
Patent of the United States No. 585,861, 
granted to myself July 6, 1897, and the said 
cylinder or core will be placed within one of 
the spaces between the webs L. of the hub B, 
and thereupon the hose will be wound upon 
the bolts I in double layers, the discharge 
nozzle C, being left in close proximity to the 
reel A. The hose F will preferably be wound 
upon the reel A when the latter is upon the 
sleeve II and the nut V is loosened from the 
outer disk C, in which condition the reel A is 
free to be revolved in either direction with 
out affecting the valve-stem I. The hose be 
ing wound upon the reel A, the latter will be 
secured to the sleeve R by the tightening of 
the nut V against the inwardly-extending 
flange Mof the reel, and upon this being done 
the, reel may be left until occasion shall arise 
requiring its use. 
In the employment of the apparatus for the 
extinguishing of a fire the attendant will seize 
the nozzle a, and carry the same toward the 
fire, this action of pulling on the hose caus 
ing the reel to unwind the hose and at the 
same time to effect, through the sleeve R, the 
outward movement of the valve-stem I and 
valve N, whereby the water from the pipe K 
may pass through the nozzle O into the hose 
F. The hose will be drawn from the reel un 
till all of the hose has been released therefrom 
and is left hanging from the nozzle O free of 
the reel. After the fire has been extinguished 
the valve N, without regard to the hose, will 
be closed by causing a reverse rotation of the 
reel A upon the sleeve H, and after the valve 
N has been closed the hose F may be restored 
In restoring the hose to the 
to the reel A. 
reel A it will first be necessary to loosen the 
nut W from the flangeM of the reel, and there 
upon the hose, at about its center, will be 
doubled upon itself, as before, and placed 
upon the reel A, which, being then free of the 
clamping action of the nut V, may be conven 
iently revolved to wind the hose upon itself 
without affecting the valve-stem I or valve N. 
After the hose has been again fully wound 
upon the reel Athenut V will be retightened 
against the flange M, and thus the reel will 
become restored to a condition and position 
in which it may be left for further use. The 
nut W locks a part of the reel A to the sleeve 
R, and the latter is keyed to the sleeve H, 
and thus when the nut V is tightened against 
the flange M the sleeve R and reel A will re 
volve together and cause the thread on the 
valve-stem to travel in the thread within the 
sleeve R, while at the same time said valve 
stem is permitted to travel- longitudinally, 
but prevented against rotating by means of 
the polygonal bore of the sleeve H. The 
sleeve R is directly on and carried by the 
valve-stem, and thus the means for connect 
ing the reel with the valve-stem to operate 
the latter are wholly independent of the reel. 
The reel made the subject of this applica 
tion is shown in Fig. 1 upon a horizontal 
sleeve H and valve-stem I, as usual; but in 
Fig. 4 the said reel is shown set at an angle 
of forty-five degrees, and this feature forms 
a part of the present invention. 
When the 
reel A is upon a horizontal sleeve, as shown 
in Fig. 1, it is more or less inconvenient to 
draw the hose, except in two directions, one 
being at each side of the longitudinal center 
of the valve-stem; but when the reel is mount 
ed at or about at an angle of forty-five de 
grees, as shown in Fig. 1, the hose may be con 
veniently drawn not only in the two direc 
tions at opposite sides of the valve-stem, but 
also in a substantially forward direction, or 
at right angles to the wall adjacent to which 
the reel may be placed. Thus the reel mount 
ed at the angle of forty-five degrees becomes 
more effective under some conditions than 
the reel placed horizontally. 
The operation of winding the hose upon the 
reel and of operating the valve from the reel, 
above explained as pertaining to the appa 
ratus disclosed in Fig. 1, applies also to the 
reel illustrated in Fig. 4. in both instances 
the reel revolves freely upon its tubular bear 
55 
35 
45 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
II5 
I 25 
601,633 
- 
3 
45 
55 
mounted to turn axially upon said sleeve, the 
revoluble sleeve having a threaded bore to re 
ceive the valve-stem and provided with the 
flange, the nut for connecting said flange to 
the reel so that said reeland said sleeve R may 
revolve together, means for preventing said 
revoluble sleeve from traveling longitudi 
nally, and hose suitably wound upon said reel; 
substantially as set forth. 
5. Water-supply apparatus having a sleeve, 
a valve and a valve-stem projecting through 
said sleeve, said valve-stem having a threaded 
portion and a polygonal portion and said 
sleeve having a polygonal bore to engage the 
polygonal portion of said valve-stem, com 
bined with the reel mounted to turn axially 
upon said sleeve, the threaded sleeve mount 
ed to revolve axially on and receiving the 
threaded portion of said valve-stem, means 
for detachably connecting said threaded 
sleeve to the reel in order that said reel and 
sleeve may revolve together, and hose suit 
ably Wound upon said reel; substantially as 
set forth. 
6. In combination with water-supply appa 
ratus having a sleeve, a valve and a valve 
stem projecting into said sleeve, a hose-reel 
mounted to turn axially on said sleeve, means 
for connecting said reel to said stem for oper 
atting the latter and the valve, and means for 
preventing said stem from turning axially dur 
ing its longitudinal movement; substantially 
as Set forth. 
Signed at New York, in the county of New 
York and State of New York, this 15th day of 
October, A. D. 1897. 
. 
- 
EDWARD CLIEE. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. C. GILL, 
E. JOS. BELKNAP. 
75 
- 
ing, but has no traveling motion thereon, and 
in both instances the valve-stem travels lon 
gitudinally, but has no rotary motion. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to Secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In combination with the water-supply 
apparatus having the valve, projecting valve 
stem and exposed hose-attaching nozzle, the 
reel adapted to operate said stem, means con 
necting the reel with said stem to operate the 
Salme and the hose at one end connected with 
said exposed nozzle and thence, while doubled 
at about its center, Wound upon the said reel, 
the said reel and the said valve-stem being 
arranged at an angle of about forty-five de 
grees; substantially as and for the purposes 
set forth. 
2. In combination with Water-supply appa 
ratus having a tubular sleeve, a valve and a 
valve-stem projecting into said sleeve, the 
reel mounted to revolve upon said sleeve, 
means connecting said reel with the valve 
stem for the purpose of operating the valve 
from the reel, and hose suitably wound upon 
the reel, said valve-stem, said sleeve and said 
reel being arranged at an angle of about forty 
five degrees; substantially as shown and de 
Scribed. 
3. In combination with Water-supply appa 
ratus having a stationary sleeve, a valve and 
a valve-stem projecting through said sleeve, 
the reel mounted to turn axially upon said 
sleeve, the revoluble sleevehaving a threaded 
bore to receive the threaded portion of the 
valve-stem, and means for connecting said 
revoluble sleeve to the reel; substantially as 
Set forth. 
4. In combination with water-supply appa 
ratus having a sleeve, a valve and a valve 
Stem projecting through said sleeve, a reel 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601733.txt	(No Model.) 
N. A. PHILLIPS, 
4 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 601,733. 
GEAR CASE. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898, 
esse H 
   
 
x 
Worman APillips, 
2-6-2266 
The Norris PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo...washi NGTON, d. c. 
N. A. PHILLIPs. 
GEAR CASE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898, 
N aS 
S. 
S 
R 
SS 
S: 
N 
S. 
S. SSSSSSSS 
Vorman/Faillips 
%. 67's 6-1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 601,733. 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 60733, 
N 
  
N. A. PHILLIPS, 
GEAR CASE, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
ented Apr, 5, 1898. 
Pa. y 
a 
Q 
y 
SS 
 
 
 
EE7 & 
JNorman.J.Ph illips, 
(No Model.) 
N. A. PHILLIPS, 
GEAR CASE. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 601,733, 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898. 
Arrass 
s 
s&e As 
s se 
628) twossos 
sack - 6s 6. 
Norman. H.Phillips, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NORMAN A. PHILLIPs, OF NEW CASTLE, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE FROST GEAR CASE COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
GEAR CAS E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 601,733, dated April 5, 1898. 
Application filed January 19, 1897, Serial No. 619,803, (No model.) 
O 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NORMAN A. PHILLIPS, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at New 
Castle, in the county of Lawrence, State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Gear-Cases; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to gear-cases in gen 
eral, and more particularly to that class adapt 
ed for application to the chain and sprockets 
of a bicycle, tricycle, or similar vehicle, and 
has for its object to provide such a construc 
tion as Will prevent contamination of the 
parts in question, and which will at the same 
time be light, ornamental, and cheap of con 
struction, and which, moreover, will not hin 
derin any manner the adjustment of the rear 
wheel and its sprocket in tightening or loosen 
ing the chain. 
In the drawings forming a portion of this 
specification, and in which like symbols of 
reference indicate similar parts in the several 
views, Figure 1 is a side view of a portion of 
a bicycle, showing the location and arrange 
ment of the sprockets, chain, and case with 
respect thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a section on line 
22 of Fig. 1, showing the front sprocket and 
its casing in section. Fig. 3 is a section on 
line 33 of Fig. 1, looking to the left and show 
ing in section the rear sprocket and wheel 
hub and adjacent portions of the frame. Fig. 
4 is a perspective view showing the frame of 
the front sprocket-casing, over which the rub 
ber covering is adjusted. Fig. 5 is a perspec 
tive view showing the inner side of the re 
movable dished element of the rear sprocket 
casing. Fig. 6 is a view similar to Fig. 1, 
showing a different form and arrangement of 
chain-inclosing tubes. Fig. 7 is a section on 
line 77 of Fig. 6, showing means for bracing 
the chain-inclosing tubes. - Fig. 8 is a per 
spective view of one form of stiffening-lining 
for the chain-inclosing tubes. 
Fig. 9 is a 
view similar to Fig. 8, showing the lining hav 
ing an interior coating of some suitable fab 
ric. 
Fig. 10 is a section on line 1010 of Fig. 
9. Fig. 11 is a side view of a portion of one 
of the tie-rods of a bicycle, showing a brace 
secured thereto and extending to the front 
sprocket-casing to form an additional brace 
therefor, said casing, as also the covering 
thereof, being shown in section. 
Fig. 12 is 
a view similar to Fig. 1, showing the appli 
cation of my invention to the driving mech 
anism of a tandem. Fig. 13 is a view simi 
lar to Fig. 12, showing the construction indi 
cated in Fig. 6 of the drawings applied to the 
rear chain of a tandem, a single elastic tube 
being employed as a covering for the front 
sprocket and free chain-sections. Fig. 14 is 
a view similar to Figs. 1 and 6, showing the 
front sprocket-casing formed entirely of metal 
and having elastic chain-inclosing tubes at 
tached to the tubular extensions thereof. Fig. 
15 is a view similar to Fig. 4, showing an al 
ternative form of front sprocket-frame. 
Referring now to the drawings, in operat 
ing in accordance with this invention there 
is formed upon or secured to the hub at of 
the rear wheel of a bicycle or similar vehicle 
an annular flange b, forming one element of 
a casing inclosing the adjacent rear sprocket 
c of the machine, which latter is secured 
to or formed upon the said hub in the usual 
To complete the casing for the rear sprocket, 
I form a disk-shaped plated, having a central 
perforation e, adapted to receive the axle f 
of the rear wheel, the inner face of the plate 
engaging the outerface of the adjacent bear 
ing-coneg of the rear wheel, against which it 
is securely clamped through the medium of 
the adjacent portion of the rear fork, the 
usual clamping-nut k being screwed upon the 
threaded end of the axle exterior of said fork 
to maintain this clamping action. 
The flange in of the disk-shaped plated is 
arranged to project over the periphery of the 
rear sprocket and is of such extent as to in 
close the flange b of the hub a, to which it 
approaches so closely as to form practically 
a dust-proof joint. 
Formed in the face of the flange m in the 
direction of the front sprocket are openings, 
leading from which are tubular projections 
in and O, concentric with the upper and lower 
common tangents of the front and rear sprock 
ets, the purpose of which projections will be 
presently explained. 
manner. 
- 
25 
35 
4c) 
45 
55 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
601,733 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
Referring now to the mechanism connected 
with the front sprocket, as shown in Figs. 1, 
2, and 4, I form a framework comprising two 
rings p and q, lying in parallel planes and 
upon a common axis, extending radially from 
which are spokes r and s, respectively, sup 
porting a circular band t, having a width sub 
stantially equal to the interspace between the 
rings. Projecting from the band t and posi 
tioned to coperate with the projections in 
and O are tubular extensions at and v, open 
ingrearwardly into the inclosure of the bands, 
the object of which projections will be shortly 
described. The framework thus formed is 
divided, preferably vertically, into two parts, 
so that the extensions u and v will be com 
prised in One part, these parts in practice be 
ing held together in any desired manner, 
such as by means of ears v, formed upon the 
adjacent portions thereof and adapted to re 
ceive screws or bolts a to hold them in en 
gagement. 
The ring p has a diameter somewhat in ex 
cess of that of the ring q, in order that it may 
be fitted Snugly upon the crank-hanger y of 
the machine, said ring having a laterally-pro 
jecting flange p' adjacent itsinner periphery, 
presenting an extended surface to the crank 
hanger and thus rigidly supporting the struc 
ture. 
In order to apply the ring p as above de 
scribed, it is of course necessary to dissemble 
the framework and to bring the elements 
thereof, together with the crank-sprocket A, 
in position between the spokes r and S and 
the rings p and q. When the framework is 
thus assembled upon the machine, the dimen 
sions thereof are such as will cause the ring 
q to closely encircle the axle B of the crank 
C. When the framework is thus in position, 
the extensions at and thereof will be in a line 
ment with the projections in and O of the rear 
sprocket-casing, so that the chain D of the 
machine arranged upon these sprockets will 
in passing from one to the other run through 
them. 
The rings p and q are provided exteriorly 
of the spokes r and S each with a peripheral 
groove E and F, respectively, which grooves 
are adapted to receive the edges of the frame 
covering. 
The frame-covering, as shown in Figs. 1 and 
2, consists of a disk-shaped bag G, of rubber 
or other suitable elastic material, which said 
bag is provided with axial perforations cor 
responding in location to the rings p and q, 
the edges of the material adjacent the per 
forations being formed sufficiently strong to 
prevent tearing. In practice this bag is ap 
plied by passing the crank C through its per 
forations, after which the perforation in the 
side adjacent the Sprocket is stretched and 
thus enlarged in order that the material may 
be fitted over the framework and those por 
tions surrounding the perforations may con 
tract and lie within the grooves E and F, the 
outer perforation of the bag receiving the 
ring q and the perforations being of such di 
ameters as to cause the said Surrounding ma 
terial to fit snugly within the grooves. 
Extending from the bag G and formed, pref 
erably, integral there with are elastic tubes 
H and I, which tubes when the bag is in po 
sition upon its frame form continuations of 
the extensions at and y of the crank-sprocket 
frame and are of such lengths that when in 
position, as shown in Fig. 1, their extremi 
ties receive the projections in and O of the 
rear sprocket-casing, to which they may be 
secured by means of clamps K and L or in 
any other desired manner. 
The vertical diameters of the extensions at 
and are slightly in excess of the similar di 
ameters of the projections in and O, the tubes 
H and I tapering from the front casing to the 
rear casing correspondingly. It will be read 
ily understood, however, that, if desired, these 
tubes may have constant and equal vertical 
diameters. 
It will thus be seen that I have provided an 
extremely simple, light, cheap, and effective 
as well as an ornamental casing for both the 
sprockets and chain, which said casing, more 
over, does not in any way interfere with the 
adjustment of the rear wheel and sprocket in 
tightening or loosening the chain, the elas 
ticity of the chain-inclosing tubes H and I 
stretching or contracting during this opera 
tion and thus at all times completely cover 
ing the chain and maintaining their proper 
positions. 
In Fig. 6 of the drawings I have shown a 
modification of my invention employing the 
same forms of sprocket-casings, but differing 
in the shapes of the chain-inclosing tubes, in 
which construction is also employed means 
for bracing the tubes intermediate their ex 
tremities, which means also serves to maintain 
their shapes. In this construction the lateral 
dimensions of the tubes Hand Iare practically 
constant, while the vertical diameters gradu 
ally increase from the extensions at and v in 
equal ratios until midway of their lengths, 
when after a short distance of constant di 
ameter they gradually decrease until at their 
opposite extremities they receive snugly the 
projections n' and o' of the rear sprocket-cas 
1ng. 
The upper walls of the tubes H and I" are 
substantially straight, the variations in ver 
tical diameters of the tubes being attained 
by first diverging and then converging the 
lower walls with respect to the upper walls in 
the direction of the rear sprocket. In order 
to brace the tubes, as well as to maintain their 
shapes, I arrange therein at points interme 
diate their extremities rigid linings, as shown 
in Figs. 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the drawings, of 
any desired material, either of wood, as shown 
in Fig. 8, or of the same or different material 
having linings of velvet or other suitable 
stuff, as shown in Figs. 9 and 10. These lin 
ings not only protect the tubes against in 
jury from the chain, but when made of wood 
Od 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
601,783 
. 
3. 
75 
or of metal having a soft lining make no 
noise when the chain comes in contact there 
with. 
f 
In order to give a certain amount of rigid 
ity to the chain-coverings and thus prevent 
their displacement and consequent engage 
ment by the chain, I encircle each tube ex 
teriorly of the linings M with metallic bands 
Q, which latter may be secured in place by 
means of rivets R or in any other desired 
manner, the ends of said bands extending in 
the direction of the adjacent tie-rod S of the 
machine, which tie-rod they engage and mu 
tually encircle, their extremities T being 
turned outwardly to form ears; which latter 
are perforated and have passed through them 
bolts U, which when screwed up bring the 
adjacent ears into contact and thus firmly 
clamp the tie-rods. 
The object of the variable diameters of the 
tubes H' and I' will beat once apparent when it 
is remembered that the drive-chain has a cer 
tain amount of Sag, as also vertical vibration, 
under Working conditions, and in thus form 
ing the lower wall of each tube to approxi 
mately conform to this sag engagement of 
the tube and chain is prevented. There is 
also at times lateral vibration of the drive 
chain under Working conditions, which must 
be considered in a construction of this na 
ture. When such lateral vibration occurs, 
however, the section of lining M will receive 
engagement of the chain and thus prevent 
noise, as well as injury to the casing. 
Referring now to Fig. 11 of the drawings, 
to give greater rigidity to the inclosure of 
the front sprocket the tie-rod S" may be en 
circled by a band R', secured thereon in any 
desired manner, one extremity of said band 
being given a quarter-turn at Tand extended 
to a point adjacent the periphery of the said 
inclosure. A threaded perforation U is 
formed in the band G' of the framework and 
concentrically there with, and exteriorly of 
said band is arranged a washer H', fitting a 
perforation in the rubber covering I'. The 
band R' lies upon the washer H' and is pro 
vided with a perforation K", formed in aline 
ment with those of the Washer H' and band 
G", through which perforations is passed a 
screw L to hold the elements in engagement. 
It will be readily understood that similar brac 
ing means may be applied to the bottom bar 
and seat-tube of the machine, if desired. 
Referring now to Fig. 12 of the drawings, 
in which is shown my invention as applied to 
a tandem, the casing for the rear crank 
sprocket is formed in the same manner as 
that for the front sprocket of a bicycle, with 
the exception that the band of the casing 
frame is provided with a second pair of ex 
tensions c' and d', which latter are arranged 
to receive the front drive-chain in passing 
from the front crank-sprocket to the corre 
sponding rear crank-sprocket. The frame 
Work of the front sprocket-casingisidentical 
with that of the crank-sprocket of a bicycle, 
and connecting these two crank-sprocket cas 
ings is a rubber or other elastic chain-cover 
ingg', in the form of tubular extensions of a 
disk-shaped bag g', applied to the front 
sprocket-casing as in connection with a bi 
cycle. In this view I have shown a cam 
shaped casing for the rear crank-sprockets, 
the object of which shape is to bring the lower 
rear extension v' sufficiently low to correspond 
to the position of the drive-chain. 
In Fig. 13 of the drawings is shown a dif 
ferent embodiment of my invention applied - 
to a tandem, in which the rear chain-tubes 
are of varying vertical diameters and are pro 
vided with a brace Q", which features are 
similar to those shown in Fig. 6 of the draw 
ings and deseribed in connection therewith. 
In Fig. 13 of the drawings I have further 
shown the front chain-covering formed of a 
single tube, one end of which is closed and 
covers the front sprocket. A single exten 
sion d'isformed upon the rear crank-sprocket 
casing to receive the rear end of the tube 
which incloses both free chain-sections. 
In Fig.14 of the drawings I have shown a. 
construction in which the rear sprocket-cas 
ing b is the same as that shown in Fig. 1 of 
the drawings, the crank-sprocket casing being 
formed in two parts 6 and 7, one part, 7, 
thereof being provided with the usual rear 
extensions 8 and 9. This casing is made en 
tirely of metal and is assembled from oppo 
site sides of the periphery of the sprocket, 
the meeting edges of said casing being se- . 
cured together in any desired manner, such 
as through the medium of ears 10 and 11, 
provided with alining perforations, through 
which a bolt or screw is passed. Secured to 
the extensions 13 and 14 of the rear sprocket 
casing 5 and having their opposite extremi 
ties fastened to the extensions 8 and 9 of the 
front casing are elastic tubes 15 and 16, held 
in place through the medium of clamping 
bands 17 or in any other desired manner, the 
said extensions being provided, preferably, 
with flanges 18 to prevent withdrawal of the 
tubes therefrom. It will thus be seen that 
in this embodiment of my invention I secure 
the same elastic adjustment as in the con 
struction heretofore described and produce 
a somewhat more rigid casing for the front 
sprocket. 
In Fig. 15 of the drawings is shown an al 
ternative form of front sprocket-frame for 
the rubber casings, which frame comprises 
rings 20 and 21, arranged in parallel planes 
and on a common axis, extending radially 
from which are spokes 21 and 22, respectively, 
which said spokes are provided with an en 
circling band 23, having tubular projections 
24 and 25, opening rearwardly into the in 
closure thereof, said band 23 having cut 
therefrom within its edge an arc-shaped piece 
whose chord is greater than the diameter of 
the front sprocket, the removal of said piece 
Ioo 
IIO 
II5 
25 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
4 
601,733 
O 
25 
35 
45 
resulting in the formation of a slot 26, hav 
ing such dimensions as to permit the passage 
of the sprocket therethrough, whereby it may 
be caused to assume a position with its axis 
coincident with the common axis of the rings 
19 and 20. In order to hold this device in 
place, the ring 19 may be provided with a 
flange 21, extending outwardly from its inner 
periphery and adapted to embrace the crank 
hanger in the same manner as does the flange 
p' described in connection with Figs. 3 and 4. 
It will be readily understood that I may 
employ any desired form, construction, and 
arrangement of the front sprocket-casing and 
that the same remarks are true with respect 
to the rear sprocket-casing, with the excep 
tion that the latter must be adjustable with 
the rear sprocket, and, moreover, that I may 
employ as a covering for the chains a single 
tube or individual tubes of any desired shape 
and material, with the exception that such 
tubes must be wholly or in part of elastic ma 
terial. 
I am aware of British Letters Patent No. 
15,701, dated July 15, 1896, and I do not claim 
anything therein shown or described. 
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
1. In a bicycle or similar vehicle, the com 
bination with sprockets and intermediate mo 
tion-transmitting means, of a frame inclosing 
one of said sprockets and provided with open 
ings through which the transmitting means 
passes, an elastic covering closely fitting the 
frame, openings in the covering registering 
with those of the frame, a casing for the sec 
ond sprocket having openings through which 
the transmitting means passes and elastic 
material intermediate the frame and casing, 
secured thereto and inclosing the transmit 
ting means. 
2. In a bicycle or similar vehicle the com 
bination with front and rear sprockets and 
intermediate means for transmitting motion, 
the sprockets being correlatively adjustable, 
of a frame inclosing the front sprocket, open 
ings in the frame through which the trans 
mitting means passes, elastic material fitted 
upon the frame and having tubular exten 
sions corresponding in location with their re 
spective openings in the frame and inclosing 
the motion-transmitting means, and a casing 
for the rear sprocket having openings through 
which the transmitting means passes, the said 
tubular extensions being secured to the cas 
Ing. 
3. In a bicycle or similar vehicle, the com 
bination with the front and rear sprockets and 
adjacent tie-rod, of casings for the sprockets, 
flexible tubes intermediate the casings and 
inclosing the free chain-sections, rigid linings 
within the tubes intermediate their extremi 
ties, and clamps engaging the tubes exteriorly 
55 
 
of the linings, said clamps having connection 
With the tie-rod. 
4. In a device of the class described the com 
bination with a sprocket of an inclosing frame 
comprising rings having radiating spokes, and 
a band secured to the spokes and encircling 
the rings, said band having an opening adapt 
ed for the passage of the sprocket there 
through. 
5. In a device of the class described, a frame 
comprising rings having peripheral grooves 
and radiating spokes, said rings lying in par 
allel planes and upon a common axis, a band 
secured to said spokes and encircling the 
rings, openings in the band terminating in tu 
bular extensions and an additional opening 
in the band. 
6. A sprocket-casing comprising a frame 
having an elastic covering said frame com 
prising rings and a band supported thereby 
and openings in the covering corresponding 
to those of the rings, the material surround 
ing the openings of the covering lying upon 
the rings. 
7. A sprocket-casing comprising a frame 
having an elastic cover, said frame compris 
ing rings and a band supported thereby, said 
rings having peripheral grooves, openings in 
the covering corresponding to those of the 
rings, the material surrounding said openings 
lying within the grooves of the latter. 
8. In a bicycle or similar vehicle the combi 
nation with the driving-wheel and the driven 
wheel of a suitable motion-transmitting de 
vice, and a casing for one of said wheels con 
sisting of a rigid frame suitably perforated 
for the passage of said motion-transmitting 
device and formed of separable parts includ 
ing a grooved ring located upon one side of 
the driving-wheel, an exterior covering of soft 
elastic rubber having one edge suitably sup 
ported at or upon one side of the wheel and 
its other edge contracted in or upon said 
grooved ring, substantially as described. 
9. In a bicycle or similar vehicle the com 
bination with the driving-wheel, the driven 
wheel and a suitable motion-transmitting de 
vice, of a covering for one of said wheels con 
sisting of a metal frame attached to the vehi 
cle, said frame having tubular extensions for 
the passage of the motion-transmitting device, 
and an elastic flexible box or case having sub 
stantially the same form or outline as said 
frame and corresponding tubular extensions, 
said elastic flexible case inclosing and con 
tracting upon said metal frame, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
NORMAN A. PHILLIPS. 
Witnesses: 
TENNEY ROSS, 
GEO. CHANDLEE. 
75 
90 
95 
Od 
Io5 
O 
I I5 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601833.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 601,833, 
E. E. HENDRICK, 
FILTER PRESS, 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898, 
 
 
 
3 
---- 
62/ 
  
saidoo odeo boooooedded odd 
d d e d ed d ed O ed o ed O es e ed d 
deed Oee deeeeeeeeeeeded be ee oeeeedoeded eeeeeeo 
4% 
E. deod eded edode desodeeded ed 
Oficii 
If I9p e 
Seeeeeeeeeeee 
I e de be eled deeded eded 
deep eeeo e de deep ocee 
ed eeeeded doese ee ed 
eeeee 
de eese eledeed 
R9999999//s'999 
Yeede 
deeve seed 
99.9999 AJ399 
Doooo be essa feeded 
be 60 ded eonsafe ee e 
W be dooooooeeeeeeeeded doesoetoeddodode eeded 
do o O Odo de Oede do de OO eled do o odd odoood doebe ded 
WO900000005 
W999999999999999999999999999999 
W to do odoo e do ded to 
W 
Y 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
-%  4% 
Z/& -24. 
 
a 6 
THE Norris PETERs co, Photo-Litho. WASHINGTON, D. C. 
- 
3. 
2S 
 
 
INVENTOR: 
42 a? 
By his 4ttorneys 
1%-2-1-4 
2 
601,833 
o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
55 
- 
about midway between said faces, as shown 
in Fig. 3. 
a' a designate separated lips preferably 
formed integral with the annulus and extend 
ing inwardly therefrom. These lips coact 
with the locking mechanism. 
B designates the locking-ring. This also 
is formed of a suitable metal and is of such 
size as to fit snugly within the annulus A. 
This is provided in its exterior with a series 
of separated rabbets or grooves bb, the spaces 
between these being cut away at b'. These 
cut-away portions coincide with the lips a'. 
The upper surface b of the locking-ring may 
be beveled, as shown, and this beveled sur 
face may be serrated or lined, as at b, to fa 
cilitate the turning of the ring. If desired, 
the ring may be provided with a stud or boss 
b', Fig. 5, for the same purpose. 
C designates the filter-plates. In the pres 
ent instance these consist of the central im 
perforate corrugated plate C and the perfo 
rate plates C C on either side of said plate 
C'. These are preferably of the same size 
and are provided with the central perfora 
tions c, through which the oil is forced. The 
plates, as above indicated, rest near their pe 
ripheries upon the flange a' of the annulus. 
The interior of the latter may, if desired, be 
cut away, as shown at c', so as to make the 
seat for the plates C equal in height to the 
thickness of the plates. 
Each of the outside plates C is provided 
upon its exterior with bosses c, and the bosses 
upon each element coincide with those upon 
the next adjacent element. Each element 
therefore bears against the adjacent element 
not only at the annulus A, but also at the 
bosses c. 
It should be understood that I do not limit 
myself either to the number of plates or to the 
particular description thereof above given. 
Both number and description may be varied 
to meet the requirements of use. 
In operation the plates are placed upon the 
flange or ledge a' and the locking-ring B 
placed within the annulus so that the cut 
away portions b' coincide with the lips a? of 
the annulus. The locking-ring is then pressed 
downwardly and partially revolved, so as to 
cause said lips a to enter the rabbets or 
grooves b of said ring. This operation is fa 
cilitated by the beveling of the ends of the 
lips a, as shown at Ct. If desired, the ends 
of the flange forming the rabbets or grooves 
b may also be beveled in the direction oppo 
site that of the bevel of the lips a'. By this 
means the locking-ring is forced down upon 
the plates near their peripheries and the whole 
element firmly bound together. 
In Fig. 6 I have illustrated a modification 
of the means for securing the plates in posi 
tion. In this construction the flange a' and 
the locking-ring B are provided with perfora 
tions e to receive rivets or bolts e". In mak 
ing up an element of this structure the plate 
or plates are placed upon the flange a', the 
locking-ring B placed upon them and within 
the annulus, and the bolts or rivets passed 
through flange, plates, and ring and secured. 
This construction may be used either with or 
without the rabbets or grooves in the ring and 
the lips in the annulus. 
Turning now to the blankets D, these con 
sist of disks of fabric larger than the press 
element. They are provided with the cen 
tral perforation d. Each blanket is prefer 
ably bound around its inner edge (not shown) 
and outer edge, as shown at d". One blanket 
is placed on either side of the annulus and 
plates. The bound edges surrounding the 
perforation in one blanket are then stitched 
or otherwise secured to the corresponding 
edges of the blanket on the other side of the 
annulus and plates. The outer edges of the 
blankets extend beyond the annulus, and 
here each two blankets which are attached 
around the central perforation are secured to 
gether by stitching or other suitable means. 
The structure thus described constitutes a 
filter-press element. A series of these are 
mounted in juxtaposition upon the press 
frame by means of the ears C. a. The oil or 
other fluid is then introduced into the press 
and forced through under considerable pres 
sure. During this operation the waxes and 
other solid matters are deposited upon the 
exterior of the blankets, the clarified oil pass 
ing through the blankets and perforate plates 
into the channels in the corrugated plate and 
running off through the outlet a' of the an 
A filter-press thus constructed will be found 
more efficient, as well as stronger and more 
durable, under the rough usage and high 
pressure required than presses heretofore em 
ployed. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. In a filter adapted to separate material 
under pressure, the combination of a series of 
press elements arranged in series, each ele 
ment comprising a ring or annulus, a filter 
ing medium removably connected there with 
and having a substantially central opening, 
and a detachable locking-ring for securing 
said filtering medium to said ring or annulus, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a filter-press element of the character 
described, the combination of a ring or annu 
lus having an interior flange, a series of filter 
plates removably secured to the same and 
supported thereby, (said series comprising a 
central vertically-corrugated plate and two 
adjacent perforate plates on both sides there 
of) all of said plates having a central opening 
for the passage of the liquid under pressure, 
and two blankets secured together at said 
central opening and covering said plates and 
resting on the ring or annulus, substantially 
as described. 
3. In a filter-press element of the character 
described, the combination of a ring or annu 
lus provided with an interior flange, a filter 
nulus. 
- 
- 
75 
95 
do 
Io5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
601,833 
3. 
A5 - 
So 
O 
plate supported on said flange, a locking-ring 
coperating with the ring or annulus for se 
curing said plate in position, said plate hav 
ing a central opening for the passage of the 
liquid under pressure, and two blankets se 
cured together at said central opening and 
covering said plate and resting on the ring or 
annulus, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a filter-press element of the character 
described, the combination of a ring or annu 
lus provided with an interior flange, a filter 
plate supported on said flange, a locking-ring. 
for securing said plate in position, means for 
detachably securing said locking-ring to the 
ring or annulus, said plate having a central 
opening for the passage of the liquid under 
pressure, and two blankets secured together 
at said central opening and covering said 
plate and resting on the ring or annulus, sub 
stantially as described. 
5. In a filter-press element of the character 
described, the combination of a ring or annu 
lus provided with an interior flange, a series 
of filter-plates supported on said flange, (said 
25 series comprising a central corrugated plate 
and two perforate plates on both sides there 
of,) all of said plates having a central open 
ing for the passage of the liquid under pres 
sure, a locking-ring coperating with the ring 
or annulus for Securing said series of plates 
in position, and two blankets Secured together 
at said central opening and covering said 
plate and resting on the ring or annulus, sub 
stantially as described. 
6. In a filter-press element, the combination 
with a ring or annulus having internal lips, 
of a filtering medium within said ring or an 
35 
nulus and a locking-ring coacting with said 
internal lips to secure, said filtering medium 
to Said ring or annulus, substantially as de- 4o 
scribed. 
f 
7. In a filter-press element, the combina 
tion. With a ring or annulus having internal 
lips beveled at their ends, of a filtering me 
dium and a locking-ring coacting with said 
internal lips to secure said filtering medium 
to said ring or annulus, substantially as de 
scribed. 
8. In a filter-press element, the combination 
With a ring or annulus having internal lips, 
of a filtering medium and a locking-ring, hav 
ing rabbets or grooves coacting with said in 
ternal lips to Secure said filtering medium to 
said ring or annulus, substantially as de 
scribed. 
9. In a filter-press element, the combination 
with a ring or annulus, of a filter plate or 
plates, a locking-ring for securing removably 
said plate or plates in position, and a disk of 
fabric, substantially as described. 
10. In a filter-press element, the combina 
tion with a ring or annulus having an outlet 
for the filtered material, of a filter plate or 
plates having hollow bosses, a locking-ring. 
for securing said plate or plates in position 65 
and a blanket of fabric on either side of said 
plate or plates, substantially as described. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
ELI E. HENDRICK. 
7th day of June, 1896. 
55 
: 
; 
Witnesses: 
S. O. EDMONDs, 
JOHN R. TAYLOR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US601933.txt	(No Model.) 
M. BROCK, 
LASTING MACHINE. 
8 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 601,933. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898, m 
 
 
 
S 
ReS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
It '', 
 
I 
II. is 
 
 
st g I 
1s1. In 
ea is 
9% 
IT 
- 
- sees 
I 
I 
SL-Isrow Wi t 
sER). 
 
?ite A. HIW 
NEEsoil s 
f 
 
 
 
s AE 
s 
sees. 
W 
M 
 
 
- as 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(No Model.). 
No. 601,933, 
 
M. BROCK. 
LASTING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898, 
(No Model.) 
M, BROCK. 
LASTING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 601,933. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898, 
z:22 
22%22 
3. S it ill-see 
Ni 
IN 
S. RNZ 
N% 
% 
N2 
N 
N 
% 
2N----ill- -a-N 2 
N f7; 
t37 N 
N 
N 
if N' 
- 1 N 
N , S-1 
N \ -- fish-F-- N 
N 
ass, 
66 - 
1 
 " ' " i 
e 
RE's 
s 
; 
| 
i 
 
a 
  
"ois PETERS co, PHoro-Litho. washioro. 
(No Model.) 
No. 601,933. 
M, BROCK, 
LASTING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898. 
a 
  
  
 
 
 
aZ% 
 
2 22 
SSSNSND2EE 
AS 
..., 2N. 
eae 
y 
 
 
Ea 
 
 
f 
Vatzaesses: 
72226%-24. 
Zayerotozr. 
tT eys. 
(No Model.) 
No. 601,933, 
 
 
  
M, BROCK, 
LASTING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898, 
 
 
   
i 
EIILR 
O 24 
I SES 
P22 
www.sv 
 
 
 
 
  
 
M. BROOK. 
LASTING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet, 6. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
No. 601,933, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 601,933, 
M. BROCK, 
LASTING MACHINE, 
8 Sheets-Sheet 7. 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898. 
 
 
 
2 
 
 
 
S\ S 
SY 2S326 
3.2 S. 
sS. 
SS S I-9 
S s 
S S Ge. 
6. 
s 
&QN) 
is a 
2 M 
2 
 
 
 
 
( No Model.) 
No. 601,933, 
M, BR00K. 
LASTING MACHINE, 
8. Sheets-Sheet 8. 
Patented Alg. 5, 1898. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MATTHIAS BROCK, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE CON 
MACHINE COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, 
SOLIDATED & McKAY LASTING 
MAINE. 
. 
LASTING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 601,988, dated April 5, 1898. 
Application filed May 24, 1897, 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, MATTHIAS BROCK, of 
Boston, county of Suffolk, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
5 Lasting-Machines, of which the following de 
scription, in connection with the accompany 
ing drawings, is a specification, like figures 
and letters on the drawings representing like 
partS. 
My invention has for its object to improve 
what are known as lasting-machines for 
lasting boots and shoes. 
One of the main features of my invention 
lies in suitable means for automatically ad 
15 justing the boot or shoe to be lasted relatively 
to the toe and heel lasting devices, so that the 
said heel and toelasting devices will properly 
meet and act upon the ends of the shoe, 
whether the latter be a left or right shoe or 
2O otherwise formed or shaped to present at its 
ends different lines or incliriations. 
I believe that I am the first to have invented 
mechanism by means of which such relative 
adjustment between the toe and heel lasting 
25 mechanisms on the one hand and the boot or 
shoe to be lasted on the other is automatic 
ally effected. 
The above, with other features of my in 
vention, will be hereinafter fully described, 
In the drawings, Figure 1, in side elevation, 
illustrates a machine containing one embodi 
ment of my invention, the position of the last 
for holding the shoe during the process of 
35 lasting being indicated in dotted lines; Fig. 
2, a top or plan view of the machine shown in 
Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a Vertical cross-section on the 
dotted line aca, Fig. 2; Fig. 4, a detail show 
ing the cam-disk 35, which is secured to or 
4O forms a part of the cam-wheel32, Fig. 1. Fig. 
5, on an enlarged scale, shows the heel-lasting 
devices with the cap removed to expose the 
parts beneath; Fig. 6, a vertical longitudinal 
section on the dotted line ac' ac', Fig. 5, with 
45 the cap in position; Fig. 7, a view similar to 
Fig. 5, with the wiper-plates and actuating 
bar removed to expose parts beneath; Fig. 8, 
a cross-section taken on the dotted line aca, 
Fig. 7; Fig. 9, a view like Fig. 7, with the 
5o parts in different positions; Fig. 10, a detail, 
3o and set forth in the claims. . . 
Serial No. 637,850. (No model.) 
looking at the under side of the cap. Fig. 11, 
on an enlarged scale, is a top or plan view of 
the toe-lasting devices, Fig. 1; Fig. 12, a ver 
tical longitudinal section thereof on the dot 
ted line y J. Fig. 13, a sectional detail show- 55 
ing the toe part and some of its connections; 
Fig. 14, a diagrammatic view, looking down 
upon the machine, showing the relative posi 
tions of the heel and toe lasting devices and 
last when operating upon the left last; Fig. 6o 
15, a similar view with the heel and toe last 
ing devices and last in the relative positions 
they will occupy when operating upon a right 
last. 
y 
7o 
75 
For assistance in disclosing my invention 65 
I have selected for an illustration of the same 
the machine shown in the drawings above re 
ferred to, although it should be understood 
that my invention is not thereby restricted 
to the embodiment therein shown. 
Referring to the drawings, wherein like ref 
erence characters in the several figures indi 
cate like parts, the base 1, Figs. 1 and 2, of 
suitable shape and construction to sustain the 
working parts, has mounted upon it at the 
rear side thereofsuitable bearings 22,in which . 
is journaled the main or driving shaft 3, upon 
which are loosely mounted the continuously 
and oppositely rotating pulleys 45, provided 
at their inner adjacent faces with suitable 
friction - surfaces adapted for engagement 
with the opposite friction-disks 67 on the 
sliding sleeve 8, splined upon said shaft 3 be 
tween said pulleys. 
The sliding sleeve 8 is grooved circumfer 
entially for the reception of the loose ring 9, 
provided with diametrically d 
site trun 
nions 10, which rest in the forkedyarms of a 
yoke 11, fast on the treadle-shaft 12-mount 
ed upon the base and fitted with a suitable 
treadle 13, by which said sleeve 8 may be 
moved into frictional engagement with one or 
the other of the pulleys 45 to thereby cause 
rotation of said sleeve and the shaft 3, to 
which it is splined, in one or the other direc- 95 
tion, as desired. 
The treadle 13 is shown as counterbalanced 
by a weight 13 and may conveniently be 
raised by a lifting-treadle 14, mounted in a 
bracket 15. 
. 
OO 
2 
- 
601,933 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
To stop rotation of the shaft 3 when the 
treadle 13 is released, I have provided said 
shaft with a friction or brake wheel 16, cop 
erating with which is a brake-shoe 17, car 
ried by an arm of a hub 18, fast on a shaft 
19, mounted in suitable bearings in a post 20 
on its base, said hub also being provided with 
an oppositely-extended arm 21, to which is 
connected a spring 22, acting normally to 
maintain said brake-shoe in braking contact 
with said brake-wheel. 
The brake-shaft 19 referred toisherein pro 
vided with a pair of radially-extended arms 
23 24, Fig. 2, provided at their ends, respec 
tively, with set-screws 25, which lie directly 
over the ends of two laterally-extended arms 
26 27 on the treadle-shaft 12 referred to. 
Rocking of the treadle-shaft in either di 
rection to start the shaft 3 will cause one or 
the other of the arms 26 27 to act upon its 
set-screw 25 and through the arm to which 
said set-screw is attached rock the brake-shaft 
in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 2, to re 
lease the brake. 
Release of the treadle and return of the 
same to its normal intermediate position to 
stop the shaft 3 permits the spring 22 to ap 
ply the brake and stop the said shaft 3. 
Fast on the left-hand end of the main shaft 
3 (see Figs. 2 and 3) is a pinion 28, which 
meshes with and drives a larger toothed wheel. 
29, fast on a shaft 30, journaled in bearings 
also in the post 20 referred to, said shaft also 
having mounted upon it a pinion 31, Fig. 3, 
in mesh with and driving the large toothed 
cam-wheel32, fast on a shaft 33, journaled 
in suitable stands 34 on the base. (See 
Fig. 1.) 
The toothed cam-wheel 32 has formed on 
its left-hand face, Figs. 1 and 3, a spiral cam 
groove 34, and secured to the opposite face of 
said wheel, or it may beforming a part there 
of, is a cam-disk 35, also provided with a 
spiral cam-groove 36. The use of these cam 
"grooves 34 and 36 will be hereinafter fully 
explained. 
Upon the base 1 is erected the central col 
lumn 37, carrying at its top the table 38, and 
within said column 37 is arranged in suitable 
guides the vertically-sliding cross-head 39, 
having a depending adjustable actuating 
rod 40, Fig. 1, forked at its lower end to strad 
dle and be guided by the bearing or stand 34, 
and provided at its side with a roller or other 
stud 41, Fig. 3, which travels in the spiral 
cam-groove 34 in the cam-wheel32, and where 
by rotation of said cam-wheel causes said 
cross-head to be raised and lowered, as nec 
essary. 
Upon the top or crown of the cross-head 39 
are arranged the transversely-movable slides 
42, grooved longitudinally of the machine 
(see Fig. 3) to receive and adjustably hold 
the several finger-carriers 43, to which are re 
spectively pivoted at 44 the girth-fingers 45, 
to the inner free ends of which are attached 
one of the ends of the girth-straps 46. The driving-clutch and stop the machine. 
several girth-straps 46 extend from the real' 
ends of the fingers, to which they are secured, 
across to the opposite side of the machine 
(see Fig. 3) through loops 47 on the under 
sides of the girth-fingers there located, thence 
over rollers 48 in the finger-carriers and down 
and attached at their lower ends to suitable 
tension-springs 49, secured to brackets 50, 
fast on and movable with the cross-head 39 
referred to. As the cross-head is raised by 
the cam-groove 34 in the rotating cam-Wheel 
32 the finger-carriers 42, mounted thereon, 
will be likewise raised to cause their fingers 
to draw the girth tightly about the body of 
the last to stretch the material of the shoe 
thereupon. 
Within the cross-head 39 and arranged to 
reciprocate vertically in guideways therein is 
the slide-plate 51, (see Fig. 3,) provided with 
a depending adjustable actuating - rod 52, 
forked at its lower end to straddle and be 
guided by the adjacent bearing-stand 34 and 
provided with the roller or other stud 53, 
which travels in the spiral cam-groove 36 in 
the face of the cam-disk 35 referred to, So that 
said cam-groove gives to said slide-plate a 
rising-and-falling movement together with 
and also independent of the cross-head. This 
slide-plate 51 is shown provided with two op 
positely-inclined cam-slots 54, which feceive 
the studs 55 on the lower ends of the levers 
56 (shown in dotted lines, Fig. 3) and pivot 
ally mounted at 57 on the cross-head With 
their upper ends in engagement with the 
transversely-movable slides 42 referred to. 
The spiral cams 34 and 36 referred to are 
so shaped and timed that during the first part 
of the rotation of the shaft 33 both the cross 
head carrying the fingers and the slide-plate 
51 will rise together until the shoe-upper has 
been tightly drawn about the body of the - 
last, as described, at which time the fingers 
45 have risen above the level of the last. Fur 
ther rotation of said shaft 33 now causes the 
drop in the cam-groove 34 at 34" to slightly 
drop the cross-head and its fingers 45 while 
the slide-plate still further rises, this relative 
movement between said cross-head and slide 
plate causing the inclined cam-grooves 54 in 
the slide-plate to separate the lower ends of 
the levers 56 and throw the upper ends and 
the connected carrier-slides inwardly to cause 
the fingers and their attached girth-straps to 
fold over and lay the material upon the bot 
tom of the last in a manner well understood 
by those skilled in the art, 
A cam 58, (see Fig. 1) loose on the shaft 
33, is arranged to be acted upon by an arm 
59, fast on said shaft, and moved to swing a 
yoke 60, embracing said cam in one or the 
other direction, according to the direction of 
rotation of said calm, to thereby cause said 
yoke, which is notched, to embrace the treadle 
13 to release or return said treadle from one 
or the other of its extreme positions to its in 
termediate normal position to disengage the 
75 
85 
95 
Od 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
601,933 
3 
transverse axis on the studs 74 to accommo 
To prevent accident, which might other 
wise arise if the driving-shaft 3 did not stop 
date the toe-lasting devices to the varying 
promptly, I have herein mounted the pinion 
springs or longitudinal curvatures at the bot 
31, Fig. 3, upon a sleeve 31", loosely engaged 
tons of the toe portions of the lasts. 
Pivot 
ally mounted on studs 78, in the arms of the 
about the shaft 30 and clutched to the latter 
yoke-like tipping-plate holder, is the tipping 
by a suitable clutch, shown as composed of 
plate 79, resting at opposite sides of its lon 
a disk 61, fast on the end of the said sleeve 
Igitudinal axis upon springs which act to nor 
and grooved to receive a lug on the face of a 
mally hold said tipping plate yieldingly in a 
sliding collar 62, splined-upon said shaft 30. 
The sliding collar 62 is grooved circumfer 
central or horizontal position. A stud 81 on 
the tipping plate 79 furnishes a suitable axial 
entially to receive the forked end of a lever 
bearing for the operating-cam 82, shown as 
63, Fig. 2, fulcrumed at 64, and provided at 
its opposite end with a stud running in con 
disk-like in form, and provided with an op 
erating-handle 83, by which the operator can 
tact with the face of a cam-disk 65, fast on 
rotate said cam at Will in either direction. 
the shaft 33. When the shaft 33 has rotated 
its proper distance, if the driving-shaft is not 
At its under side the cam 82 is provided with 
a suitably-shaped cam-groove for the recep 
stopped in season the cam 65 will by its fur 
ther rotation act to disengage the clutch 61 
tion of the roller-stud 84 on the longitudinally 
sliding block 85, slotted at its right-hand end, 
and Stop the rotation of the shaft 33 in sea 
Son to prevent damage. 
Fig. 12, to receive the vertical arm of a bell 
crank lever 86, pivoted at 87 in a longitudi 
The last, carrying the shoe to be lasted and 
indicated at l in the several figures, is or may 
mally-adjustable plate 88, secured to the under 
be provided with any suitable supporting or 
side of the tipping plate 79. The horizontalarm 
of said bell-crank lever 86 (see Fig. 12) is 
holding device-such, for instance, as the 
jointed to the lower end of the end-wiper 
usual heel-socket-for the reception of the 
Supporting-pin 66, Fig.1, forming apart of the 
holder 89, shown as socketed at its upper end 
block 67, pivoted upon the upper end of the 
to receive therein the cylindrical shank 90 of 
jack or Supporting post 68, mounted to move 
the end wiper 91. This end wiper 91 herein 
Vertically in suitable bearings in the column, 
consists of a U-shaped metallic plate or back 
Said post being preferably divided between 
92 with a leather or other covering or face 93. 
its ends and provided with suitable means 
The wiper-shank 90 is shown as circumfer 
for example, the threaded adjusting-nut 68*- 
entially grooved at 94 to receive the pin 95, 
by which to vary the effective length of the 
which prevents said shank and its wiper ris 
last-carrying post. This supporting-post at 
ing from the holding-socket therefor without 
its lower end rests upon the cam-shaped edge 
in any way interfering with the free rotation 
of the foot-treadle 69, (shown principally in 
of said wiper and shank in said socket. A 
dotted lines, Fig. 3,) said treadle being full 
spring 96, secured to the wiper-holder 89, 
crumed at 70 and projecting outwardly at the 
acts upon the horizontalarm of the bell-crank 
front of the machine in convenient position 
lever 86 and thereby holds the end wiper 
for movement by the operator. Depression 
back in its proper position against its back 
of the treadle. 69 acts through the last-sup 
support on the tipping plate. 
porting or jack post to raise the last into 
The operating cam 82 at its top side is 
provided with two cam-grooves 97 98, the 
Working position and also furnishes means for 
groove 97 receiving the roller-stud 99 on the 
Compressing the lasted material between the 
bottom of the last and the heel-lasting wipers 
under side of the abutment-slide 100, the 
outer end of which at the right, Fig. 12, is 
When the latter outlie the end of the last. 
To drop the last-supporting post to release 
shaped and adapted to constitute an abut 
the lasts when the lasting operation is com 
ment against which the toe of the shoe is 
pleted, I have herein provided the shaft 33 
placed when positioning the said shoe pre 
paratory to lasting. As the operating-cam 
With a dog 70*, which at the proper time en 
is rotated for actuating the toe-lasting devices 
gages one arm of a bell-crank lever 71 on the 
treadle 69 and through said lever raises said 
this abutment-slide is withdrawn by said cam 
treadle to its normal position. 
groove 97, so as not to interfere with the work 
Passing now to the toe and heel lasting de 
ing parts operating about or in the vicinity of 
vices, the former will be first described, re 
the toe. 
ferring particularly to Figs. 1, 11, 12, and 13. 
The inner cam-groove 98 referred to re 
The table 38 has suitable guideways, in 
ceives the roller-stud 101 on the under side 
which is mounted the longitudinally-sliding 
of the wiper-slide 102, arranged in suitable 
carriage 72, provided with suitable stand 
guideways in the under side of the cap 103. 
To the outer end of this wiper-slide, at the 
ards 73, between which is mounted to rotate 
upon short longitudinally-adjustable studs 
right, Fig. 12, are pivoted at 103* (see Fig. 
74 (shown only in dotted lines, Fig. 12) the 
11) the toe-wiper carriers 104 and toe-wipers 
yoke-shaped tipping-plate holder 75, provided 
105, adjustably secured to said carrier. 
The wiper-carriers 104 referred to have re 
at its rear end with a swivel-nut 76, in which 
is threaded the adjusting-screw 77, acting 
spectively secured to their upper sides the 
upon the carriage and furnishing means to 
cam-plates 106, crossing each other like a pair 
vary the tip of said plate-holder about its of sleeves and diagonally slotted at 107 to re 
' 
... 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4 
601,933 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
ceive the roller-studs 108, depending from the 
transversely-sliding bar 109, also arranged in 
suitable guideways in the cap referred to. 
Rotation of the operating - calm 82 acts, 
through its cam-groove 98, to move the wiper 
slide 102 forward, carrying there with the 
wipers, which are pivoted thereto. This for 
ward movement of the wipers carries them 
Over the toe end of the last and at the same 
time causes their attached cam-plates to be 
acted upon by the depending roller-studs 108 
referred to and moved one laterally toward the 
other to thereby close the advancing wipers 
over the end of the last to lay or wipe the ma 
terial over and upon the bottom of the last. 
As herein shown, one end of the trans 
versely-sliding bar 109 is connected with the 
slotted end of one arm of a bell-crank lever 
110, pivoted at 111 to a bracket 112 on the 
tipping plate 79. The other arm of this bell 
crank lever 110 is slotted to receive a pin 113, 
fast on one arm of a lever 114, fulcrumed at 
115 on the end-wiper carrier 89, Figs. 12 and 
13, the opposite short arm of said lever en 
tering a vertical recess 116 in one side of the 
cylindrical wiper-shank 90 referred to. 
When in the rotation of the operating-cam 
82 the slide 85 at the under side thereof is 
moved back or to the left, Fig. 12, it acts 
through the bell-crank lever 86 to raise the 
end wiper 91 to cause it to wipe the material 
of the upper smoothly about the sides of the 
toe of the last. If, however, the toe of the 
last be an extreme right or left or be other 
wise So shaped or formed that its outline or 
contour does not happen to correspond in 
its alinement With the alinement of the end 
wiper 91 and the wiper-plates 105, then said 
end wiper, as it rises to wipe the material 
about the sides of the toe end of the last, will, 
on contact with the last or the material there 
upon, Swing to the right or to the left to adapt 
itself to the lateral inclination or a linement 
of the end of the last or to any variation in 
the thickness of the material at the sides of 
the last and by so doing acts through the le 
vers 114 and 110 to move the slide-bar 109 in 
the direction of its length but transversely of 
the machine to cause its roller-studs 108, act 
ing in the inclined cam-slots 107, to shift the 
wiper-carriers and their wipers also to the 
right or to the left into such positions that 
the opening presented between said wipers 
will correspond as to its a linement or as to 
the inclination of the working edges of said 
wipers with the alinement of the sides of the 
toe end of the last as determined by the ris 
ing end wiper. It is thus clear that when the 
operating-handle 83 is moved to manipulate 
the toe-lasting devices the latter, in the ma 
chine herein illustrated, are automatically 
and laterally shifted into such position that 
they will properly and uniformly meet the 
sides of the last however much the inclina 
tion of the sides thereof may vary. This, 
therefore, is one means for effecting a rela 
tive adjustment between toe-lasting devices 
and the adjacent end of the last to meet vary 
ing inclinations of the sides of a last, either 
a right or a left. 
During the action of the toe-lasting devices 
the toe end of the last is firmly supported 
upon the padded upper end of a toe-post 117, 
arranged to slide in vertical guideways in the 
inner face of the carriage, said toe-post hav 
ing at one side an adjustable block 118, ar 
ranged immediately above a cam-plate 119, 
fast on a short shaft 120, Fig. 1, journaled in 
a suitable bearing on and depending from the 
sliding carriage 72. On this short shaft 120 
is a forwardly-extended arm 121, to which is 
connected a wire 122, reaching downwardly 
to the treadle 123, fulcrumed on the base of 
the machine. To this treadle is attached a 
tension-spring 124, which tends constantly to 
raise the treadle and its connected toe-post, 
the raising of said treadle and post being nor 
mally resisted by a pin 125 on a bracket 126, 
secured to and vertically movable with the 
cross-head within the column and heretofore 
described. 
When the machine is at rest, the cross-head 
within the column is in its lowermost position, 
and consequently the treadle 123 is held in its 
depressed position, the toe-post 117 being 
then held tightly in elevated position above 
the cam-plate 119 by a light bow-spring 127, 
Fig. 12. When, however, the cross-head re 
ferred to rises, as described, for lasting the 
sides of the shoe, it carries with it the bracket 
126 and pin 125 and permits the spring 124 
to correspondingly raise the treadle 123 and 
thereby turn the shaft 120 and cause its at 
tached cam - plate 119 to act from beneath 
upon and to press the toe-post and the toe end 
of the last firmly upward against the usual 
holddown 12S, pivoted to and to swing back 
upon the top of the cap 103. 
The holddown 128 is locked in its holding 
position by sliding it on its pivot to carry a 
holding-lug 128 thereon beneath the holding 
dog 129, pivoted at 130 on the cap 103 and held 
in adjusted position by a set-screw 131. (See 
Fig. 12.) By means of this set-screw 131 the 
height of the holding-dog 129 may be varied 
at will to thereby vary the level at which the 
end of the holddown 128 will lie to thus 
acGommodate said hold down to materials of 
varying thicknesses. A spring 132, attached 
to the holddown and to a collar on its pivot, 
acts to draw the said holddown normally 
against its said pivot, away from which it may 
be slid or withdrawn by the operator in car 
rying the locking-surface 128 on said hold 
down past the locking-dog 129 during locking 
and unlocking. Since the toe-post is raised 
by the spring 124, it is free to stop at any 
point determined by the last and the thick 
ness of the material thereupon. 
Should the bottom of the last in the vicinity 
of the toe present a pronounced roll, due to 
an imperfectly-positioned socket or holding 
pin or otherwise, or should the material at 
one side of the last be thicker than at the op 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
601,933 
5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
m 
posite side, the lasting devices described are 
free to automatically adjust themselves to 
such roll or unevenness of material what 
ever be its direction or extent, the tipping 
plate at such times, together with the parts 
carried thereby, rolling upon its trunnions 
78, described, and compressing one or the 
other of the side springs 80, which latter re 
turns said tipping plate and its parts to their 
normal central position after one lasting op 
eration and preparatory to the next. 
To move the carriage 72 longitudinally to 
carry the toe-lasting devices into proper po 
sition relatively to the side lasting devices, I 
have herein provided the said carriage with 
a rack 132, (see Fig. 12,) which is meshed 
with a pinion 133 on the shaft 134, carried by 
table 38 and provided with a suitable hand 
wheel 135. This hand-wheel (see Fig. 2) is 
provided at its rear face with a series of 
ratchet holding-teeth 136, which are engaged 
by the spring-controlled pawl 137 to hold said 
wheel and its carriage in adjusted position. 
Passing now to the heel-lasting devices par 
ticularly illustrated in Figs. 5 to 10, inclusive, 
the table 38 is provided with suitable guide 
ways for the sliding heel-carriage 138, made 
longitudinally adjustable in said guideways 
by a suitable adjusting-screw 139, (see Fig. 
6,) held against longitudinal movement at one 
end, as there shown, and provided with a 
beveled pinion 140 in mesh with a bevel-wheel 
141, Fig. 1, fast on the hand-wheel shaft 142, 
journaled in bearings carried by the table 
and provided with a suitable hand-wheel 143, 
rotation of which will thus cause longitudinal 
adjustment of the heel-carriage to adapt the 
heel-lasting devices carried thereby to the 
side lasting devices described. The heel-car 
riage 138 (see Figs. 6 and 8) is provided with 
two vertically-extended arms or stands 144, 
slotted horizontally at their upper ends to 
receive a horizontally-adjustable pivot-bolt 
145, on which is pivoted the tipping-plate 
holder 146, shown as bifurcated at its rear 
end to receive the curved slotted arm 147, 
rising from the carriage 138, a guide-pin 148 
passing through the plate-holder and the slot 
in said arm. The tipping-plate holder 146 
at its rear end carries a swivel-nut, 149, in 
which is threaded the adjusting-screw 150, 
connected at its lower end, preferably by a 
universal joint, with a lug on the slotted arm 
147 of the carriage. Rotation of the adjust 
ing-screw 150 Swings the plate-holder and 
parts carried thereby about the pivot 145 to 
vary the tip or vertical inclination of the 
plate-holder to adapt the parts carried there 
by to the varying springs of lasts. The plate 
holder 146 at its opposite ends is provided 
with vertically-extended ears 151, to which is 
hung on the longitudinal trunnions 152 the 
tipping plate 153, adapted to swing trans 
versely about the longitudinal axis of the 
trunnions 152 to automatically adaptits parts. 
to the roll of the heel end of the last, substan 
tially as described with reference to the toe 
mechanism, springs 154 at the sides of the 
said plate serving to maintain the latternor 
mally in an intermediate or central position. 
To the front of the tipping plate 153 is se 
cured, as by a screw 155, the middle portion 
of the clasp-chain 156, within which is ar 
ranged the flexible clasp 157, adapted to em 
brace the heel end of the last with the mate 
rial thereupon. The ends of the clasp-chain 
I56, and therefore the ends of the clasp, are 
connected in suitable manner, as by pins 158, 
(see Fig. 7,) with the sliding pins 159, longi 
tudinally movable in sockets in the ends of 
positioning devices 160, springs (shown in 
dotted lines in Fig. 9) being interposed be 
tween the ends of said pins 159 and the bot 
toms of said sockets to press said pins and 
the ends of the clasp normally outward. 
The positioning devices 160 are fulcrumed 
at 161 on the tipping plate 153 and have 
jointed to them at 162 one of the ends of the 
actuating-levers 163, provided, respectively, 
with the angular slots 164, each of said slots 
extending longitudinally for a distance near 
its end adjacent the joint 162, and a rear an 
gular portion, as shown, the angular portions 
of the two slots being extended in opposite 
directions. (See Fig. 7.) Springs 165 are in 
terposed between the actuating-levers 163 and 
the tail portions 166 of the positioning de 
vices, said springs being limited in their move 
ments by nuts 167, threaded on the ends of 
the limiting-bolts 168, carried by the actuat 
ing-levers and passing through the tail por 
tions of the positioning devices. 
The pivot-pins 162 are vertically extended 
and provided with rollers which enter the 
cam-slots 169 in the wiper-carriers 170, (see 
Fig. 5,) said wiper - carriers being pivotally 
connected at 171 to the end of the common 
actuator 172, shown as a slide-bar, said car 
riers having secured to their under sides the 
adjustable wipers 173, although said wipers 
and their carriers may be made integral, if de 
sired. The sliding actuator - bar 172 is ar 
ranged to slide in suitable guideways in the 
under side of the top plate 174, said bar at its 
rear end (see Fig. 5) having alongitudinal slot 
175, which receives the pin 176 on the hand 
lever 177, fulcrumed at 178 to the free end 
of a lever 179, pivotally connected at 180 to 
the tipping plate. 
Jointed to the under side of a hand-lever 
177 is a short link 181, Figs. 6 and 7, carry 
ing at its free end a roller-stud 182, which 
drops into the angular slots 164 in the actu 
ators referred to and at its upper endisguided 
in the slot 175 in the under side of the actu 
ator-bar 172. 
Having placed the last and shoe upon the 
last-support preparatory to lasting, the oper 
ator by means of the hand-wheel 143 moves 
the heel-carriage to the left, in the drawings, 
to cause the heel-clasp to tightly embrace the 
heel end of the last with the material there 
upon. The operator now grasps the handle 
177 and draws the latter toward him in the 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
Od 
IC5 
IO 
II5 
f 25 
601,933 
6 
direction of the arrow, Fig. 5, causing its pin stantially coincide or be in alinement with 
the median line of the heel end of the last, 
176, Fig. 5, to travel for a short distance in 
which line of course may vary, according as 
the slot 175 in the actuator-bar without mov 
the said last is a right or left or according to 
ing the latter or the wipers. During the time 
the contour of the last. 
of this lost motion, however, the roller-stud 
The movement of the operating-lever to ac 
182 on the short link 181, connected with the 
complish what has just been described takes 
hand-lever, moves to the left in the opposite 
place before the pin 176 reaches the end of its 
angular portion of the slots 164 and causes 
lost motion in the slot 175 of the actuator-bar, 
the latter to be thrown outwardly, and there 
and having thus properly positioned the 
by through the springs 165 moves the inner 
wipers to advance uniformly upon the last 
or free ends of the positioning devices and 
from opposite sides thereof further movement 
clasp inwardly toward the heel end of the last 
of the said operating-handle causes its pin 
to cause said clasp to tightly embrace said 
176, acting against the end of the slot 175, to 
heel end. If the end of the last, by reason 
act through the said actuator 172 to carry 
of its being a right or left of extreme form, 
bodily forward the wiper-carriers and their 
happens to be in a position with its median 
wipers to move the latter over and upon the 
line at a considerable angular position-that 
bottom of the last, the angular slots 169 in 
is, if the converging side lines at the heel of 
the carriers at the same time operating upon 
the last stand in different angular or inclined 
the studs 162 to close the wipers one toward 
positions with relation to thesides of the open 
the other to thereby lay the material tightly 
ing formed between and by the edges of the 
over and upon the bottom of the heel end of 
Wipers-then one end of the heel-clasp con 
the last. It will thus be seen that movement 
nected with one of the positioning devices 
of the operating lever or handle 177 for car 
will meet the side of the last in advance of 
rying the wipers over the heel end of the last 
the other, and when one positioning device 
in the present machine herein described acts 
thus meets and is stopped by the last in ad 
also and automatically to Swing the Said 
vance of the other its actuator 163 will also 
wipers to one or the other side of the median 
be stopped in its sidewise movement, causing 
line of the head and to correspondingly change 
the roller-stud 182 to follow the line of its 
their line of closing movement to properly 
curved or angular slot 164, and by so doing 
act upon the heelends of the lasts, either rights 
impart an excessive transverse movement to 
or lefts or otherwise formed, to present vary 
the other slotted actuator to throw the latter's 
ing side inclinations or alinement at the heel 
positioning device through a greater distance 
in Ward to meet the opposite side of the last. 
end of the last. 
The positioning devices described by posi 
The positioning devices act like equalizers, the 
tioning the heel-wipers accurately with rela 
One first meeting the last being stopped, and 
tion to the sides of the heel end of the last 
thereby through its cam-slot operating to give 
preparatory to the closing movement of the 
an excessive movement to the other position 
wipers renders it certain that said wipers when 
ing device that the latter may be moved 
subsequently closed will move inwardly over 
through the greater distance necessary to 
the sides of the last through uniform dis 
meet its side of the last. Thus it matters not 
tances and to points uniformly distant from 
What be the inclined line or a linement of the 
the sides of the last, thereby rendering more 
heel end of the last, due to its being a right 
uniform the quality of the work. 
or left or otherwise, the positioning device 
A latch 183, pivoted at 184 to the under 
which first meets the last will be stopped and 
side of the actuator 172, has a hooked end, 
the other will continue its movement until it 
which during the forward movement of the 
also meets the last, the two positioning de 
actuator, while the pin 176 is at the forward 
vices thus acting to place their roller-studs 
end of its slot, is forced by a suitable projec 
162 in transverse positions, which bear the 
tion 185 (see Fig. 10) on the cap into position 
same unequal relation to the median line of 
behind said pin 176, so that during the first 
the head as do the sides of the heel end of the 
part of the return movement of the hand-le 
last to the median line of the head. 
ver to the right, Fig. 5, said pin 176 will act 
Any movement of the hand-lever after both 
through the latch 183 to also return the ac 
positioning devices meet the last acts equally 
tuator and the wipers, thus eliminating that 
upon and to press them both tightly against 
lost motion between the operating-lever and 
the surface of the last at both sides thereof, 
actuator which takes place at the beginning 
and any excessive movement of the operat 
of the first movement of the operating-lever 
ing-lever and actuating-levers 163 after the 
to the left. Further movement of the oper 
positioning devices have met the last will be 
ating-lever, however, carries the said latch 
taken up in compressing the springs 165. 
beyond the projection 185 and releases the 
This shifting of the positioning devices acts 
said latch, permitting it, under the pressure 
through their roller-studs 162 and the slots. 
of the pin on the lever, to be pushed to one 
169 in the wiper-carriers to automatically 
side, leaving the actuator and its Wipers at a 
throw the latter and their wipers to one or 
standstill, while during its further movement 
the other side of the median line of the head, 
the positioning devices and claspare returned 
So that their line of movement when subse 
to their original positions. 
quently moved forward and closed will sub 
. . . 
o 
20 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
65 
75 
95 
IOO 
I IO 
II5 
I25 
13O 
 
601,933 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
The top of the pivot-pin 182 referred to 
travels in the enlarged portion 175 of the 
slot 175, (see Figs. 5 and 6,) which is of suffi 
cient width to permit said pin moved there 
into to move to the right or to the left as the 
positioning devices are shifted to meet the 
alinement of the end of the last. When, how 
ever, the actuator is returned to its normal 
position, this pin 182 is drawn back from the 
enlarged portion 175 of said slot into the nar 
rower slot proper, 175, which acts to center 
Said pin, and return the positioning devices 
and the Wipers automatically to their original 
or central position preparatory to another 
lasting operation. 
Referring particularly to Fig. 9, by screw 
ing up the nuts 167 the heel-clasp may be 
opened or varied to meet varying widths or 
shapes of heel ends of lasts, and the nuts 186, 
threaded on the bolts 168 and furnishing abut 
ments for the springs 165, may be turned to 
Compensate for the adjustment of the nut 167 
to maintain the tension of the springs sub 
stantially uniform. This capacity for right 
and left adjustment of the lasting devices for 
Opposite ends of the last perhaps will be more 
clearly understood by reference to Figs. 14. 
and 15, Which illustrate, diagrammatically, 
this full adjustment for rights and lefts at 
both ends of a last possessed by a machine 
embodying my invention. 
For example, referring to Fig. 14, a com 
mon outline of a left last is there shown at l, 
the view of course looking down upon the 
bottom or tread of the last, as must always 
be the case in a lasting-machine of this type, 
where during lasting the last is turned bot 
tOm up. 
The median line of the machine is 
indicated by the dotted line Oo, and if the 
last Were a perfectly straight last or nearly 
straight the median lines of the toe portion 
and heel portion of the last would coincide 
With the median line of the machine, as would 
also the line of movement of the toe and heel 
lasting mechanisms. 
With the last shown, 
however, it will be seen that the median line 
O' O' of the toe portion of the last and the me 
dian line O'o of the heel portion of the last 
both lie at considerable angles to the median 
line of the machine and out of alinement 
thereWith, and by my invention the toe and 
heel lasting mechanisms automatically ad 
just their respective lines of movement and 
their respective positions to correspond with 
the lines O' O' and oo, so that they will act 
upon the ends of this extremely crooked last 
With the same accuracy and uniformity as 
they would act upon a straight last. 
In Fig. 15 is shown the corresponding right 
last, and the different angles of the lines O'O' 
and O'o', as compared with the correspond 
ing lines in Fig. 14, indicate the extent to 
Which the toe and heel mechanisms will au 
tomatically move or shift in acting upon first 
a left and then a right shoe of this style, and 
it will be further noticed that it matters not 
how crooked may be the last or what the an 
gles at the ends thereof my invention en 
ables the heeland toe mechanisms to automat 
ically and properly meet the varying ends of 
the last without requiring any peculiar posi 
tioning of the last, or any necessary change 
in-the position of the last, or any difference, 
So far as the operator is concerned, in the 
manipulating of the operating-handles for 
lasting the toes and the heels. 
It is of course apparent that should the con 
tour of the last, so require the toe mechan 
ism might adjust itself along the line O'o', 
Fig. 14, and the heel mechanism along the 
line O'o', Fig. 15, or the toe mechanism along 
the line O'O', Fig. 15, and the heel mechan 
ism along the line oo, Fig. 14. 
: From the foregoing description it will be un 
derstood how in the machine herein described 
and shown the toe-lasting devices and the 
heel-lasting devices are each automatically 
adjustable to meet the varying ends of lasts, 
either rights or lefts. 
It is obvious that my broad invention may 
be embodied in mechanism differing in detail 
from that herein specifically shown and de 
scribed, it being essential only that the mech 
anism should be such as automatically to ef 
fect the said relative adjustment between the 
last or shoe thereupon and the end lasting 
mechanisms. 
By my invention I am the first to automat 
ically adjust the heel and toe lasting mech 
anisms relatively to the heel and toe portions 
of the last, so that the said mechanisms will 
properly and uniformly, or substantially so, 
meet the varying ends of lasts, either rights 
or lefts or otherwise made in contour and an 
gularity. 
The heel-lasting mechanism herein shown 
is substantially identical with the end lasting 
mechanism which is the subject-matter of 
another application filed by me February 14, 
1896, Serial No. 579,231; and applications 
filed by me April 14, 1896, and August 14, 
1897, Serial Nos. 587,488 and 648,236, respec 
tively, show other end lasting mechanisms 
having the capacity for automatic adjust 
ment to meet the variations in swing in the 
ends of lasts, whether rights or lefts. 
The . 
claims of this present application are generic 
to all these various mechanisms. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
1. A machine for lasting boots and shoes, 
containing toe, heel and side lasting mechan 
isms, and a support for the last carrying the 
shoe to be lasted, all constructed and ar 
ranged to permit said last and said toe and 
heel lasting mechanisms to be relatively and 
automatically moved to bring the respective 
lines of action of said toe and heel lasting 
mechanisms into substantial correspondence 
with the line of directionin which the toe and 
heelportions of the last respectively face, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. A machine for lasting boots and shoes 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5. 
I25 
s 
601,933 
o 
containing toe and heel lasting mechanisms, 
and a support for the last carrying the shoe 
to be lasted, all constructed and arranged to 
permit said last and said toe and heel lasting 
mechanisms to be relatively and automatic 
ally moved to bring the respective lines of 
action of said toe and heel lasting mechan 
isms into substantial correspondence with the 
line of direction in which the toe and heel 
portions of the last respectively face, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. Alasting-machine for use in lasting boots 
and shoes, containing a support for the last 
and end lasting mechanism, constructed and 
arranged to permit relative and automatic 
movement of said last and end lasting mech 
anism to enable the latter to act in a direc 
tion corresponding to the direction in which 
the end of the last faces, substantially as de 
scribed. 
. 
4. A machine for lasting boots and shoes, 
containing manually-operated end lasting 
mechanisms, an operating-handle for the said 
end lasting mechanism, a support for the last 
and the shoe thereupon, and means whereby 
movement of said operating-handle acts first 
and automatically to a line said end lasting 
mechanism and the end of the last, and there 
after to lay the material of the shoe over and 
upon said last. 
5. A machine for lasting boots and shoes, 
containing a support for the last with the shoe 
thereupon, and end lasting mechanism with 
a clasp adapted to embrace the end of the last 
and the material thereupon, and means where 
by said clasp on meeting and adapting itself 
to the alinement of the end of the last, acts 
automatically to move said end lasting mech 
anism also into alinement with said end of 
the last. 
6. A machine for lasting boots and shoes 
containing end lasting mechanisms, and a 
support for the last carrying the shoe to be 
lasted all constructed and arranged to permit 
said last and said end lasting mechanism to 
be relatively and automatically moved by 
said last to bring the alinement of said end 
lasting mechanisms and the ends of said last 
into substantial correspondence. 
7. A machine for lasting boots and shoes, 
containing a support for the last carrying the 
shoe to be lasted, toe, heel and side lasting 
mechanisms, means to move said toe and heel 
lasting mechanisms one toward and from the 
other and with relation to said side lasting 
mechanisms,said last-support and said toe and 
heel lasting mechanisms being constructed 
and arranged to relatively and automatically 
move to bring said toe and heel lasting mech 
anisms into substantial alinement with the 
ends of Said last. 
8. A machine for lasting boots and shoes 
containing a support for the last carrying the 
shoe to be lasted, toe, heel and side lasting 
mechanisms, said last-support and said toe 
and heel lasting mechanisms being construct 
ed and arranged to permit a relative and au 
- 
35 
45 
5 O 
55 
65 
75 
- 
tomatic movement to bring the alinement of 
the ends of said last and the allinement of said 
toe and heel lasting mechanisms into corre 
spondence, said toe and heel lasting mech 
anisms also having the capacity of rolling to 
accommodate the roll of said last and the ca 
pacity of tipping to accommodate the Spring 
of said last, substantially as described. 
9. In a machine for lasting boots and shoes, 
a support for the last, toe and heel lasting 
mechanisms, means to actuate said toe and 
heel lasting mechanisms, said last-support and 
said toe and heel lasting mechanisms being 
constructed and arranged automatically to 
permit alinement of the last relatively to the 
toe and heel lasting mechanisms as an inci 
dent to the operation of the latter, substan 
tially as described. 
10. A machine for lasting boots and shoes, 
containing a support for the last, with a shoe 
thereon, and end lasting mechanism with 
a member adapted to engage the end of the 
last and the material thereupon, and means 
whereby said member on meeting the end of 
the last or the material thereupon acts auto 
matically to move said end lasting mechan 
ism into position in correspondence with the 
end of said last as indicated by said position 
ing member. 
11. In a lasting-machine, end lasting-plates, 
actuating means to move and close the same, 
a member to bear against the side of the boot 
or shoe prior to closure of the wiper-plates, 
and connections between said member and 
said lasting-plates whereby the latter Will 
be adjusted automatically by movement of 
said member to act properly upon last ends 
whether rights or lefts presenting difference 
of Swing. 
12. In a machine for lasting boots and shoes, 
end lasting-plates mounted to swing about a 
common center, a transverse slide-bar con 
nected with said end lasting-plates to govern 
the relative movement of the latter about 
their common center and thereby to adapt the 
same to the swing of the end of the boot or 
shoe being lasted, whether a right or a left, 
combined with a swinging member in the form 
of an end clasp, and connections between the 
same and Said transverse sliding bar for mov 
ing the latter and thereby automatically ad 
justing said end-wiper plates to act properly 
upon the upper of the boot or shoe)eing lasted. 
13. In a lasting-machine, the combination 
with the lasting devices and means for actu 
ating the same, of means automatically to 
cause relative movement of said lasting de 
vices and the last laterally to adapt the same 
for the swing of lasts either rights or lefts. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
MATTHIAS BROCK. 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
Witnesses: 
FREDERICK L. EMERY, 
JOHN C. EDWARDS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602034.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 602,034. 
J. F. MURPHY, 
BICYCLE, 
Patented Apr. 5, 1898. 
ag: 
?% V46. 
52. 5, 
3. 52. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. MURPHY, OF ADRIAN, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF TWO-THIRDS TO 
JAMES MURPHY AND LEWIS T. LOCHINER, OF SAME PLACE. 
: 
w 
BICYCLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,034, dated April 5, 1898. 
Application filed September ll 1896, Serial No. 605,521 (No model.) 
Io pertains to make and use the same. 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN F. MURPHY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Adrian, 
in the county of Lenawee and State of Michi 
5 gan, have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Bicycles; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
This invention relates to bicycles, and es 
pecially to the steering mechanism thereof. 
The object of the invention is to provide, in 
connection with a suitable frame having front 
I5 and rear steering-heads, two forks arranged 
to turn in said heads and carrying the front 
and rear wheels and means connecting said 
forks whereby they are turned simultaneously 
in opposite directions. 
The invention consists in certain novel con 
structions, combinations, and arrangements 
of parts, all of which will hereinafter be more 
fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
25 part of this specification, Figure 1 represents 
a perspective view of a bicycle embodying 
my invention; and Fig. 2 represents a side ele 
Vation of the same, the steering-heads being 
shown in vertical section. 
Referring to the drawings, A represents the 
frame of the machine, B and B' the front and 
rear wheels, respectively, and C the driving 
The frame. A comprises a top or upper reach 
35 bar C and front and rear reversely-inclined 
heads. a' and a, respectively. These heads 
are held rigidly in their inclined position in 
relation to the bar by corner-braces a ca. 
The front fork-stem b passes up through the 
4o inclined head a', being provided with the 
usual ball-bearings for securing it in position. 
A handle-barb' of any suitable construction 
has its stem fitted adjustably in the upper end 
of the fork-stem b in the ordinary manner. 
45 The crown of the fork b for the front wheel 
B is provided with angular lugs or shoulders 
b. The rear wheel B is mounted in a rear 
fork b, and the stem of the latter passes up 
through the head a in a manner similar to 
5o the fork-stem b to receive the saddle-post b, 
having a T-head b, on which the saddle b is 
3O 
gear. 
- 
 
mounted. The crown of the fork b is pro 
vided with lugs or shoulders bsimilar to the 
shoulder b of the front fork. The lugs or 
shoulders band b are provided with open 
ingst to receive the ends of crossed connect 
ing-rodsbib. The driving mechanism C, of 
the usual chain-and-sprocket style, is sup 
ported in a suitable frame c, consisting of a 
pair of bottom runs connected rigidly to the 
fork of the rear wheel B" and inclined braces 
which extend from the crank-hanger upward 
to upper end of the rear fork-stem, said runs 
and braces being rigidly connected to and 
moving with the rear fork. A coiled spring 
F connects crown of forkband crank-hanger, 
So as to normally keep them in alinement and 
prevent excessive Wabbling. 
It will be observed from the foregoing de 
scription that when the front wheel B is 
turned in one direction to guide the machine 
the rear wheel B" will be turned to a corre. 
sponding degree in the opposite direction 
through the medium of the connecting-bars 
b', and thus the turn made by the machine 
will be exactly double the amount that would 
be made if the front wheel alone were turned. 
By means of the construction set forth a 
very delicate touch upon the handle-bar b' 
will have a greatly-increased effect upon the 
steering apparatus of the machine, and the 
latter can be controlled with approximately 
half the movement necessary when the front 
wheel alone is turned. 
This construction is of great assistance in 
turning corners, enabling ruts and holes to be 
avoided. Instead of the rear wheel following 
straight on when the front wheel is turned it 
also turns and follows the circular path de 
scribed by the front wheel, thus avoiding the 
rut or recess by turning about the edge of 
the same. 
I also contemplate applying my improved 
steering mechanism to ladies' wheels, said ap 
plication of the invention requiring only a 
slight alteration of the connecting-rods bin 
order to get them out of the way of the dress 
of the rider. 
It will be noticed that the action of the rear 
wheel B'is positive and that said wheel does 
not merely follow on in the path of the front 
wheel in a loose manner, but is turned from 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
602,034. 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
O 
side to side by the rigid connection with the 
front wheel. I also contemplate employing 
suitable adjusting means for the rods b, 
which may consist of nuts on the ends of said 
rods, whereby any misalinement between the 
front and rear wheels may be corrected. 
I do not care to limit myself to the particu 
lar formation of the frame shown, as any suit 
able construction now upon the market will 
answer equally as well, with the exception of 
the addition of the rear steering-head. It 
will also be observed that the rider may con 
trol the steering through the medium of the 
saddle, as well as through the front handle 
bar, by reason of the saddle-post turning with 
the rear fork-stem. 
It will be observed in my invention that the 
effort of steering a machine is reduced to a 
minimum, and a perfect balance may be sus 
tained at all times by the slightest movement 
of either the handle-bar or the saddle. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a bicycle, a frame comprising front 
and rear steering-heads, in combination with 
front and rear forks having their stems re 
ceived in said heads, one stem having connec 
tion with the handle-bar and the other with 
the Saddle-post, connections between said 
forks for turning them in opposite directions, 
propelling mechanism carried by the rear fork, 
and a stiffening-spring connecting the front 
fork with the frame carrying the propelling 
mechanism, substantially as described. 
2. In a bicycle, a frame comprising front 
and rearheads, in combination with front and 
rear forks having their stems received in said 
heads and having connection with the handle 
bar and saddle-post, crossed connections be 
tween said forks, a crank-hanger, bottom runs 
rigidly connecting said crank-hanger and rear 
fork, braces connecting the crank-hanger and 
upper end of the rear-fork stem, propelling 
mechanism arranged to move with the rear 
fork and crank-hanger, and a flexible yield 
ing connection between the crank-hanger and 
front fork, substantially as described. 
3. In a bicycle, a frame comprising a front 
head and a rear head, front and rear forks 
having their stems arranged to turn therein, 
connection between said forks for simulta 
neously turning them in opposite directions, 
propelling mechanism fixed relatively to One 
fork, and a yielding connection between the 
other fork and the part of the frame carrying 
the propelling mechanism, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
JOIN F. MURPIY. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES N. KILLIN, 
HENRY C. HIFTLINE. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602134.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 602,134, 
F, F, HAWKES, 
BICYCLE REST. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
Patented Apr. 12, 1898, 
ZZZZ, 
7% z/, 
 
 
Z727A/ZZZ77, 
efs 3-2-e- 
12-e 1. 26-4- 
(No Model.) 
F. F. HAWKES, 
BICYCLE REST. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 602, l34, 
Patented Apr. 12, 1898. 
 
717Ze/262, 
cea, i. 2a-eta-1, 
? 
 
Z77za7ZZ7, 
22s 
2 - 242- - - - 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRANK F. HAWKES, OF WESTFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF TWO. 
THIRDS TO EDWIN J. SMITH AND CLARENCE K. PRINCE, OF SAME PLACE. 
BICYCLE REST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,134, dated April 12, 1898. 
Application filed February 11, 1896, Serial No. 578,828, (No model.) 
- 
- 
5 sachusetts, have invented a new and useful attached. When, however, as shown more 55 
To all whon, it may concern. 
cheek-pieces are held by the spring squarely 
Be it known that I, FRANK F. HAWKES, a seated on the bottom section C of the clamp 
citizen of the United States, residing at West- and at approximately right angles to the side 
field, county of Hampden, and State of Mas- tubing of the frame, to which the clamp is 
Bicycle-Rest, of which the following is a speci- particularly in Fig. III, the swinging section 
fication. 
is swung to a position half-way between its 
My improvements relate to a spring folding open and closed position, the spring is on a 
rest for bicycles adapted to be operated both dead-center on the corner of the lug D, so 
invention consists in the combination and con- either direction will cause the spring to be 
struction, as hereinafter described, and more come operative to snap the swinging part to 
a bearing, the device being in that respect 
particularly pointed out in the claims. 
My invention is fully illustrated in the ac- analogous to a pocket-knife with the spring 
placed on the blade in place of being in the 65 
Figure I is a perspective view of so much of handle. 
Io in opening and closing by the feet; and the that a little impetus given to the leg H in 6o 
I5 companying drawings, in which- 
2O III is an enlarged side view of a part of the double-working snap-joint. 
a bicycle as is necessary to illustrate the in- 
By making of the cheek-pieces an elon 
vention. Fig. II is an enlarged rear elevation gated shank to inclose the spring I am able 
of the device in an operative position. Fig. to get the long spring essential to an easy 
device and in partial section, and Fig. IV. is 
Between the cheek-pieces where they are 
an enlarged view of one end of the device riveted is a lugh, conveniently formed inte 
when in a closed position. Fig. W is a broken gral with spring F, and in said lug is a screw 
elevation of a bicycle with rest attached, show- socket for a screw i. 
- 7o 
25 ing relation of the rest to the pedal. 
The rear ends of cheek-pieces on each side 75 
3o the tube between them and screwsb for draw- 
Combined with leg His a spuro, setting off 8o 
35 two cheek-pieces G, inclosing a spring F, and as not only to form the spur, but to supply a 85 
Referring to the drawings, the attached end of lug h are carried up to form, with the top 
of the support is a clamp-piece adapted to be of the lug, a seat for leg H, and a series of 
secured to the tubular framing of a bicycle holes n through the under side of the leg en 
and comprising two sections Cc for inclosing ables it to be adjustably extended. 
ing the sections together. The section C is from its longer axis, so as to enable the foot 
provided with a dependent squared lug D, to to be used to rotate the rest from a closed po 
which is hinged the swinging part of the rest. sition, and, as shown in Figs. I and II, the 
The swinging portion of the rest comprises terminal end of the leg is curved outward, so 
a leg H, adjustably seated on the cheek-pieces foot having a better bearing upon the ground 
and spring. The cheek-pieces and spring are than a point or the mere end of a straight 
riveted together at g, and the cheek-pieces tube. 
are at their other ends hinged at d to the lug 
The leg His formed of thin tubing at least 
F bears normally upon two sides of the lug or mouth part closes over the tubing against 
to retain the swinging portion of the rest in which it bears when in a closed position to 
either a closed or open position. 
Within the leg. His secured a rubber cush 
flat side of lug D, the leg H bears against the permit the leg to lie close to the tubing, but 
tube-framing and is held there by the spring, in the first place taking up the shock of the 
and when the rest is in an open position, at impact of the leg impelled by the spring. 
the same time that the spring bears against 
My device so constructed is clamped to the 
When the rest is in a closed position, coin- 
thus fit closer to the machine-framing. 
45 cident with the spring bearing upon the lower ion I, adapted to be compressible enough to 95 
4o D, so that the free end of the inclosed spring semicircular in cross-section, so that the open 90 
5o the flat side of lug D, the squared ends of the side tubing W on the opposite side of the Ioo 
 
2 
602,134 
frame to the sprocket-wheel and close in rear 
of the pedal-hub, and, as shown in Fig. I, has 
the leg H extend in a close position rearward 
along said tube W and closed to partially 
embrace it. 
In Fig. I the rest is shown in side view in 
two positions-insolid lines closed and in dot 
ted lines in operative position. When in a 
closed position, it is entirely out of the way of 
the pedal; but when extended, as seen in dot 
ted lines, it is directly in the path of the 
pedal, so that by running the machine for 
ward before mounting it or by righting the 
machine from its tipped position and placing 
a foot on the opposite pedal, either before or 
after mounting, the pedal on the rest side of 
the machine swings the leg to a point beyond 
where its spring is on a dead-center to per 
mit the spring to complete the closing of it. 
So, also, when in a closed position a foot of the 
machine rider is removed from a pedal and 
pressed against the spur O to swing the leg 
out slightly beyond half-way, when the spring 
comes in action to complete the traverse of 
leg and the rider has only to dismount and 
slightly incline the machine to bring the rest 
to a bearing on the ground. 
It will be seen that the operation of the rest 
is entirely independent of the hands. 
Now, having described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. The combination with the frame of a bi 
cycle, of a clamp-piece embracing said frame 
near the pedal, and a leg having jointed con 
nection to said clamp-piece, in position to be 
engaged by the pedal. When swung away from 
contact with the frame, and means for re 
IO 
35 
40 
45 
55 
taining the leg folded against the frame, or 
in extended position, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination with the frame and 
pedal of a bicycle, of a supporting-rest con 
nected to the frame and having a joint which 
may be folded in one direction only, means 
for holding the rest in folded or in extended 
position, said rest connected to the frame in 
position when extended to be struck by the 
moving pedal and folded back against the 
frame, and to be passed by the pedal when 
closed, all substantially as described. 
3. The combination with the frame and 
pedal of a bicycle, of a rest connected to said 
frame, said rest having a joint which may be 
folded in one direction only, means for hold 
ing said rest folded against the frame or ex 
tended to act as a support, said rest attached 
in position to be struck and turned back from 
its extended to its folded position by the 
movement of the pedal, said rest also pro 
vided with a foot-piece by which it may be 
turned out by the foot of the rider without 
dismounting, whereby the support may be 
turned either out or in without dismounting, 
all substantially as described. 
4. In a bicycle - support, the combination 
with a movable supporting-leg, of mechanism 
actuated by the movement of the drive 
sprocket which is adapted to engage with the 
leg and raise the latter out of supporting po 
sition. 
FRANK F. HAWKES. 
Witnesses: 
R. F. HYDE, 
EDWIN J. SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602235.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 602,235. 
F. N. LAWTON. 
ELECTRIC CORD ADJUSTING DEVICE. 
Patented Apr. 12, 1898. 
WITNESSES: 
CN 
NVENTOR 
AITORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS N. LAW TON, OF SUMMIT, NEW J ERSEY. 
ELECTRIC CORD ADJUST N G DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,235, dated April 12, 1898, 
Application filed April 5, 1897, Serial No. 630,737, (No model.) 
45 
75 
55 
65 
device with five successively-reversed loops 
lying in the same plane. In Fig. 2 I show 
the double flexible cord so arranged that the 
slack or take-up portion is at the center loop 
3, and at one side the cords are passed into 
one loop 2 and returned through the other 
loop 1, while on the opposite side the cords 
pass in at loop 4 and out at loop 5. The 
metal wire employed has a certain slight de 
gree of resilience, while its insulating-surface 
and the semiflexibility of the cord employed, 
which is susceptible of sharp kinks as it is 
wound through the loops used in the described 
adjusting device, enable me to Support and 
retain translating devices of considerable 
weight without danger of slipping or danger of 
abrading or breaking the insulating-covering. 
Having described my invention, I make the 
following claims: 
1. The combination of flexible insulated 
electric conducting-cords with an adjusting 
device therefor consisting of a wire, rod or 
form of metal having a smooth, curved, con 
tact-surface, said wire being bent or crimped 
into a series of successively-reversed loops, 
and having a layer or coating of insulating 
material on its surface; said flexible cord be 
ing intertwined with said adjusting devices, 
substantially as described. 
2. An adjusting device for flexible insu 
lated conducting-cords consisting of a metal 
wire, rod or form of metal having a smooth, 
curved exterior surface, bent or crimped into 
a series of successive loops arranged in the 
same plane, and a layer or coating of insulat 
ing vitreous enamel thereon, Substantially as 
described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand this 2d day of April, 1897. 
P 
FRANCIS N. LAWTON. 
Witnesses: 
JAS. A. WADE, . 
F. J. ALDERSON. 
O 
m 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANCIS N. LAWTON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Sum 
mit, Union county, State of New Jersey, have 
invented a new and useful Improvement in 
Electric-Cord Adjusters, of which the follow 
ing is a specification, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
thereof. 
My invention consists of an improved con 
struction and arrangement of cord-adjusting 
device for use in varying the length of a flexi 
ble insulated conducting-cord from which an 
electric lamp may be suspended, as from the 
ceiling of a room. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
effective, cheap, light, and durable adjusting 
device conforming to the requirements of the 
fire-insurance specifications. 
My improved adjusting device consists of a 
Wire Or strip of metal having a smooth curved 
surface, which wire or strip is bent, stamped, 
Crimped, or molded into a series of similar 
loops arranged in the same plane, successive 
loops opening in the reverse direction and 
possessing but slight resilience, the surface 
of such wire or strip being covered or coated 
With an insulating coating having a hard, 
Smooth, and velvet-like polished surface, 
such as vitreous enamel or glazing. Such a 
surface permits of sliding the adjusting de 
Vice along on the flexible cord, while the con 
volutions thereof successively reversed pro 
vide means for engagement with the cord of 
such a binding nature that movement of the 
cord is prevented. 
Figure 1 shows the detached device. Fig. 
2 shows the device in position upon a flexible 
cord. 
The numerals 1 to 5 indicate the crimps or 
loops of a metal wire-of brass, for example. 
Its surface is coated with vitreous enamel, 
the surface of which is smooth and possesses 
a velvet-like polish. I prefer to construct the 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602335.txt	A, KISSELL & I. J. SPACE. 
STOVE LEG, 
Patented Apr. 12, 1898. 
 
  
NHe N N N 
(No Model.) 
No. 602,335. 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
AARON RISSELL AND IRVING J. SPACE, OF CYGNET, OHIO. 
STOVE-LEG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,335, dated April 12, 1898. 
Application filed November 30, 1897, Serial No. 660,196, (No model.) 
O 
25 
pivoted head 6, provided with an operating 
To all, uhon, it nucly contern: 
handle 7 and also with a downwardly-extend 
Be it known that we, AARON KISSELL and 
ing projection 8, to which is movably attached 
IRWING J. SPACE, citizens of the United States, 
residing at Cygnet, in the county of Wood 
a caster or roller 9. To the handle 7 of the 
head 6 is pivotally connected the lower end 
and State of Ohio, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Stove-Legs; and 
of a bifurcated brace 10, which receives the 
we do hereby declare the following to be a 
handle when the lifting mechanism is folded 
or moved upwardly in a stove-leg, as shown 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
by Fig. 1, and the attachments of the several 
vention, such as Will enable others skilled in 
parts are such that when this position is at 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
tained the mechanism Will be thrown so far 
use the Same. 
past the movable connections as to prevent 
This invention relates to stove-legs; and it 
the lifting attachments from dropping down 
consists of the construction and arrangement 
when not desired. . The upper end of the 
of the several parts, which will be more fully 
brace 10 has a cross-trunnion 11 thereon with 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
the ends thereof projecting laterally beyond 
The object of the invention is to provide 
the width of the said brace to engage the 
means, in connection with a stove-leg, where 
grooves 3, shoulders 4, and transverse recess 
by the stove as an entirety may be elevated 
5. On one of the Walls of the upper portion 
and by means of a caster or roller be readily 
of the cavity or recess 2 is a lug or projection 
moved from One position or place to another 
12 of Wedge shape and having the reduced 
and wherein the parts are simple and effect 
part thereof toward the bottom of the stove 
ive in their construction and operation, strong 
leg. The purpose of this lug or projection 
and durable, easily and readily operated, and 
comparatively inexpensive in the cost of 
is to cause a slight binding action on the ad 
jacent portion of the brace 10 and assist in 
manufacture. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
holding the mechanism in elevated position 
a transverse vertical section of a stove-leg, 
when not in use. 
showing the lifting mechanism therein and 
When it is desired to elevate a stove, the 
arranged in inoperative position in full lines. 
handle 7 is grasped and the head 6 turned on 
its fulcrum, thereby drawing the brace 10 
and in operative position in dotted lines. 
downwardly through the cavity or recess 2 
Fig. 2 is a section taken in a plane at right 
angles to that shown by Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a 
and the cross-trunnion 11 in the grooves 3 
until the opposite ends strike the shoulders 
detail perspective view of the lifting mech 
anism disconnected from the stove-leg. 
4. By this means the caster or roller 9 is 
brought below the level of the lower termina 
Referring to the drawings, wherein similar 
tion or foot of the stove-leg, and to sustain 
numerals of reference are employed to indi 
this position the cross-trunnion 11 is forced 
cate corresponding parts in the several views, 
into the recess' 5, and after this operation has 
the numeral 1 designates a stove-leg of any 
been conpleted in all the stove-legs which are 
preferred form of construction and prefer 
applied to the stove the latter may be moved 
ably made of cast metal, as in ordinary de 
with convenience and without requiring the 
vices of this character. The leg has a cavity 
strain and ofttimes injury to those lifting a 
or recess 2 in the rear thereof, which is of 
such shape throughout its length as to con 
stove for the same purpose. 
When the handle 7 and brace 10 are down, 
form to the contour of the mechanism here 
as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 1, and the 
45 inafter referred to and which is mounted 
weight of the stove bears upon the caster or 
therein, and at the upper part the said cavity 
or recess has laterally-extending grooves 3 in 
roller 9, the cross-trunnion 11 is held continu 
ously in the recess 5 until released by an up 
opposite Walls thereof, which terminate in 
Ward pressure on the said handle 7. This 
lower shoulders 4 in line with a transverse 
operation is due also to the position of the 
circular recess 5. The bottom of the cavity 
pivotal connections relatively to each other 
or recess is of greater depth than the upper 
portion to accommodate the movement of a when the mechanism is in this lowered posi 
35 
75 
95 
 
2 
602,335 
tion, and the said receSS 5 is situated so 
closely to the shoulders 4 at the bottom of 
the groove 3 that no resistance is offered to 
the change of position of the cross-trunnion 
11 in either operation. 
Many advantages will appear from time to 
time to those using the device, and it is ob 
viously apparent that changes in the form, 
proportions, and minor details of construc 
tion might be made and substituted for those 
shown and described without in the least de 
parting from the nature or spirit of the in 
Vention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. In combination with a stove-leg having 
a cavity or recess therein with grooves com 
municating there with, a caster or roller low 
ering and elevating device pivotally mounted 
in said leg, and a brace movably attached to 
the said caster lowering and elevating device 
at its lower end and having a cross-trunnion 
at its upper end movable in said grooves, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In combination with a stove-leg, of a cas 
25 
ter lowering and elevating device, and a brace 
movably attached at its lower end to said cas 
ter lowering and elevating device and at its 
upper end having a cross-trunnion moving in 
the stove-leg, substantially as described. 
3. The combination of a stove-leg having a 
cavity or recess therein with grooves on the 
Opposite sides of the upper portion thereof 
terminating in lower shoulders and also pro 
vided with a transverse recess, a head piv 
oted in the lower portion of the said cavity 
or recess, and provided with a roller or cas 
ter and a handle, and a bifurcated brace hav 
ing its lower end pivoted to the handle of the 
head and its upper end formed with a cross 
trunnion adapted to engage the said grooves 
and transverse recess, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
AARON IXISSELL. 
I. J. SPACE. 
35 
Witnesses: 
R. O. WooD, 
J. TAGGART. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602435.txt	(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
J D WYER 
MINING CAR AND RAILWAY SYSTEM THEREFOR, 
No. 602,435. 
 
 
ES5 
El 
22A;GEE 
sits 
2. N2 
E. 
i. 
Evg|E.S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
wo-store 
a 
- ES 
Sossilises 
s 
H, a 4 
Wife'sse 
a 4 
Y 
4%zha- jay/zes "/o/uv Zayer 
the NORRIS PEERS co. PHoTo-LTHo. was incron. D. c. 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
J. DWYER. 
MINING CAR AND RAILWAY SYSTEM THEREFOR, 
No. 602,435, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1898, 
A/2. 
fy 
 
 
| | | | || 
TH 
is 2 
It 
A. 
7 
5. 
74. 
Sza Szar SS 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
J D WYER 
MINING CAR AND RAILWAY SYSTEM THEREFOR. 
No. 602,435. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1898. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
S. 
3. -as R 
3 R R-Rum 
u 
af7%4- Py/vis Alleroys 
pe plor 
Jo/art/ /Ozzyyer 
the Norris Peters co. PhotoLitho, washington. p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN DWYER, OF BUTTE, MONTANA. 
MN N G CAR AND RALWAY SYSTEM THE REFOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,435, dated April 19, 1898. 
Application filed March 10, 1897, 
Serial No. 626,827, (No model.) 
To all, whom it navy concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN DWYER, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Butte city, 
in the county of Silver Bow and State of Mon 
tana, have invented a new and useful Min 
ing - Car and Railway System. Therefor, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The primary object of the present inven 
tion is to facilitate mining and blasting op 
erations, dispense with labor, lighten the 
Work, and reduce the cost incident to con 
structing tunnels and cuts for railroads and 
canals, the earth and rock loosened, shattered, 
and detached by blasting being loaded on cars 
placed in position, thereby obviating the ex 
pense and expenditure of manual energy re 
quired to load the same onto cars as com 
monly practiced by the methods now in use. 
A vital feature of the improvement is the 
construction of cars sufficiently low to receive 
the major part of the earth and rocks loosened 
at the time of the blast, whereby as little shov 
eling as possible is required for clearing the 
cut or tunnel after an explosion, and to this 
end it is desirable to have the cars as low 
as possible and to have the bodies tiltingly 
mounted upon the trucks, whereby the load 
can be easily and quickly dumped after the 
cars are withdrawn from the tunnel, cut, or 
Shaft. 
The cars are specially designed to be used 
singly or in groups, and when grouped they 
form, in effect, a single car, the several cars 
having their contiguous portions matching, 
so as to prevent any intervening Space or any 
independent vertical movement between the 
contiguous ends of adjacent cars which would 
result in providing a space and admitting of 
smallparticles and earth escaping when draw 
ing the cars from the cut or tunnel. 
For a full understanding of the merits and 
advantages of the invention reference is to be 
had to the accompanying drawings and the 
following description. 
The improvement is susceptible of various 
changes in the form, proportion, and the 
minor details of construction. Without depart 
ing from the principle or sacrificing any of 
the advantages thereof, and to a full disclo 
sure of the invention an adaptation thereof 
is shown in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
55 
65 
75 
- 
bodies. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view in elevation 
and partly in section, showing two cars as 
they will appear when withdrawn from the 
tunnel or drift and having their bodies tilted 
for discharging the load into a car for convey 
ing the same to the required place of deposit. 
Fig. 2 is a top plan view of two cars and two 
tracks, showing the latter diverging from the 
mouth of the tunnel or drift, whereby the cars 
are automatically separated. Fig. 3 is a de 
tail perspective view of a car, showing the 
body tilted and the means for securing the 
car when dumping the load. Fig. 4 is an in 
verted view of the car shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 
5 is a detail view showing the means for con 
necting the contiguous ends of adjacent car 
Corresponding and like parts are referred 
to in the following description and indicated 
in the several views of the accompanying 
drawings by the same reference characters. 
While the invention is intended for con 
structing tunnels, subterranean passages, 
cuts, &c., it is shown in connection with a 
drift or tunnel, as it will be more generally 
used for mining operations. 
In practicing the invention the car or cars 
are moved into the tunnel or drift 
close 
against the breast, the latter being previously 
drilled and charged with blasting-cartridges 
or other explosive generally employed for 
loosening and shattering rocks and earth 
when cutting into the earth's crust. After 
the car or cars have been placed in position 
the blast is effected and the loose rock, earth, 
&c., are received therein, and the car or cars 
are drawn from the tunnel or drift in any con 
venient or known manner, and the load auto 
matically deposited thereon is conveyed di 
rectly to the required point of deposit or is 
discharged into a transfer-car 3, as shown in 
Fig. 1, by means of which it is conveyed to 
the desired point. 
In order to prevent the blast from moving 
the car away from the breast, so as not to re 
ceive the bulk of the detached earth and rocks, 
a timber is placed against the lower portion 
of the breast and in advance of the truck and 
the car or cars are blocked and otherwise se 
cured in place as may be found most advan 
tageous, and after the explosion the Securing 
means are removed, thereby permitting the 
95 
IOO 
2 
602,435 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
car or cars to be drawn out of the passage or 
cut to be relieved of their load. 
The car-bodies are hinged or pivotally con 
nected with their respective trucks so as to 
tilt either forwardly or laterally to dump the 
load, and in order to admit of a body tilting 
at either end or side the plates forming the 
Support are provided at each of their ends 
With knuckles, through which pins 5 pass for 
connecting the parts together. A single plate 
6 is secured about centrally to the bottom of 
each car body or platform and has knuckles 
7 at its ends. Corresponding plates S, disposed 
in parallel relation, are applied to the top of 
each truck and have knuckles 9 at their ex 
tremities, which aline with the knuckles 7 
when the plates are in the same plane. When 
the car is not tilted, its body is held rigidly 
to place by means of the pins or rods 5, which 
pass through the alining knuckles 7 and 9, 
and when it is required to tilt the body or 
platform one or the other of the pins or rods 
5 is withdrawn and the body or platform 
tilted, as clearly shown in Figs. 1 and 3. If 
the body or platform is to be tilted to the front 
or rear, the plates 6 and 8 will be disposed so 
as to extend parallel with the track and the 
direction of movement of the car; but if the 
said body is to be tilted laterally the plates 
will be disposed at right angles to the track 
and line of motion, as clearly indicated in 
Fig. 1. 
When the cars are constructed for conjoint 
use, their contiguous parts will match, 
Whereby a space between them is obviated 
and independent vertical movement avoided. 
Any means may be resorted to for effecting 
an interlocking of the contiguous ends or por 
tions of adjacent cars so long as the desired 
end is attained, and, as shown, strips 10 are 
secured to the top and bottom edges of a car 
and extend beyond the end thereof a suffi 
cient distance to overlap the contiguous edge 
portion of the adjacent car, thereby causing 
the cars to move together at their meeting 
ends and closing any space which might oth 
erwise be provided. This exceedingly sim 
ple construction admits of the cars readily 
Separating when the diverging portions of the 
tracks are reached, as indicated in Fig. 2. 
A bolt or rod 11 slides in keepers 12, pro 
vided at the ends of the cars, and supple 
ments the action of the strips 10 with respect 
to obviating independent vertical movement 
or play, and this bolt may be shot back by 
hand Or Withdrawn when the cars reach the 
diverging portions 13 of the tracks 14, as will 
be readily understood. Rubber strips 15 are 
interposed between the bed of the truck and 
the car body or platform and relieve in a 
measure the jolt and jar and serve as a noise 
deadener and cushion and compensate for the 
impact incident to throwing the body or plat 
form back upon the truck from a tilted posi 
tion. 
Inasmuch as the track will slope in places 
or throughout its length it is expedient that 
each car be provided with a suitable brake 
mechanism. 
In Figs. 3 and 4 is shown a form of brake 
applied to the truck-wheels, the brake-beam 
34 bearing brake-shoes to be brought into en 
gagement with the truck-wheels and having 
connection with an arm 35 of a shaft 36, pro 
vided at its outer end with an arm 37, con 
nected with a link38, having attachment with 
a lever 39, mounted upon a stud 40. A foot-le 
ver or treadle 41 is loosely mounted upon the 
stud 40 and engages with the outer or rear 
end of the lever 39, and when pressed upon 
turns the shaft 36 in its bearings and sets 
the brake. When not required for immedi 
ate use, the foot-lever 41 can be folded upon 
the lever 39, so as to be out of the way. 
At the place where the cars are unloaded 
suitable means are provided for securing 
them while dumping the load, and for the, 
sake of simplicity of illustration hooks 42 are 
provided and engage with openings in lateral 
extensions of the truck-frame. These hooks 
42 have loose connection with a rod or bar 43, 
applied to a base 44, secured to ties at the re 
quired point. Obviously the hooks or their 
equivalent means may be secured to the road 
bed in any manner other than that shown, 
and the desired end will be effected. 
When the tunnel, passage, or cut is elevated 
and it is not desirable or advantageous to 
move the cars to the required point of deposit, 
a track 45 will be provided at a lower level 
and intermediate of the branching portions 
13 of the tracks 14, and the diverging portions 
13 of the tracks leading from the tunnel or 
drift will be supported upon a scaffolding or 
trestle-work 46, and chutes 47 will be pro 
vided, so as to direct the earth, rocks, and 
other matter into the transfer-car 3, as most 
clearly shown in Fig. 1, and said car 3 will 
carry the load to the desired point. 
The end cars when used in series of two or 
more will have a side piece in addition to the 
rear end piece, as will be clear on reference 
to FigS. 2 and 5, but when an intermediate 
car is required it will have an end piece only. 
The truck for supporting a car-body is in 
dicated by A, and the body by B, and each 
body is mounted upon its truck in the man 
ner set forth, so as to tilt to permit the load 
to be easily dumped. While the car-bodies 
will be similarly mounted, they will not all 
be constructed alike, as will be apparent from 
the description herein and the annexed draw 
ings, the particular manner of using them, 
whether singly or jointly, controlling largely 
their specific formation and equipment. The 
rubber strips 15 are thicker than the plate 6 
to enable them to cushion the blow incident 
to the return of the body to a normal position 
after dumping the load. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
is claimed as new is 
1. In a mining system, the combination with 
the truck and body of a car, of plates spaced 
apart and rigidly secured to the truck and 
75 
95 
OC 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
602,435 
8 
having knuckles at their opposite ends, a plate 
firmly attached to the car-body and fitting 
snugly between the spaced plates, and of a 
corresponding length therewith and having 
knuckles at its ends, and pins or rods remov 
ably fitted into the alining knuckles of the 
plates to secure the parts of the car together 
and form a support for the body to tilt upon, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. In a mining system, the combination with 
the truck and body of a car, of plates spaced 
apart and firmly secured to the truck and 
having knuckles at their ends, a platerigidly 
attached to the body and fitting snugly be 
tween the spaced plates and having knuckles 
at its ends to aline with the knuckles of the 
spaced plates, pins or rods passing through 
the alining knuckles of the plates to secure 
the body in place, and removable to admit of 
the body tilting from either end, and rubber 
strips applied to the top side of the spaced 
plates and thicker than the plate applied to 
the body, substantially as shown for the pur 
pose set forth. 
3. In a mining system, two or more separate 
and independent cars constructed for conjoint 
use placed side by side and having their con 
tiguous portions intermatching, whereby the 
cars are held against vertical displacement 
and are free to separate, Substantially as set 
forth for the purpose described. 
4. In a mining system, the combination of 
two or more separate and independent cars 
constructed for conjoint use placed side by 
side, and strips overlapping the joint formed 
between contiguous portions of adjacent cars 
and rigidly secured to the opposite sides there 
of, whereby the cars are prevented from in 
dependent vertical movement but are free to 
Separate laterally under conditions, substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a mining system, the combination of 
two or more separate and independent cars 
arranged side by side and having vertical end 
pieces, and having the contiguous edges of 
their bottoms intermatching, keepers applied 
to an end of one car, and a bolt or rod slid 
ably mounted in keepers applied to the end 
of the other car and adapted to engage with 
the keepers of the first-mentioned end, sub 
stantially as set forth for the purpose de 
scribed. 
6. In a mining system, the combination of 
tracks extending parallel for a given dis 
tance, thence branching or diverging, and cars 
mounted upon the tracks side by side and 
having their contiguous portions intermatch 
ing and readily separable when the cars reach 
the diverging or branching portions of the 
tracks, Substantially as set forth. 
7. In a mining system, the combination of 
tracks extending parallel for a given dis 
tance, thence branching or diverging, cars 
mounted upon the tracks and having their 
contiguous portions intermatching and read 
ily separable when the cars reach the diver 
ging portions of the tracks, means for secur 
ing the cars prior to unloading, and provision 
for admitting of the car-bodies tilting, sub 
stantially as specified. 
8. In a mining-car, the combination of a 
brake-beam, a shaft having connection with 
the brake-beam, a lever having one end con 
nected with an arm of the said shaft, and a 
foot-lever mounted upon the same support 
with the lever and engaging with the free end 
thereof, and adapted to fold, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN DWYER. 
Witnesses: 
A. E. WHIPPs, 
NEWTON W. SIMMONS, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602535.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 602,535, 
C. L. ALEXANDER, 
HORSE RAKE, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1898. 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
N 9 
Sas 
e I y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
22- 34-s: 
INVENTOR 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLARENCE L. ALEXANDER, OF COMO, TENNESSEE. 
HORSE RAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,535, dated April 19, 1898. 
Application filed August 26, 1897. 
Serial No. 649,590, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To Ct. 27, who77, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, CLARENCE L. ALEXAN 
DER, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Como, in the county of Henry and State of 
Tennessee, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Horse-Rakes, of which the 
following is a specification. 
I have improved the type of wheeled rake 
in Which the axle is made the rake-head for 
the trailing teeth; and my improvement is 
directed to a novel construction whereby the 
axle may be shortened to adapt the wheel 
rake for passing through gateways, narrow 
lanes, or Wooded roadsides. For this purpose 
the improvement resides in constructing the 
axle of a long and a short part, providing 
each part With an end sleeve and mortised 
construction to receive the short part and em 
ploying the shanks of the trailing teeth as 
bolts passing through coincident holes in the 
sleeve and the short axle part, making the 
axle as one piece for working the rake its full 
width. For shortening the rake the two teeth 
used to secure the short axle partin the sleeve 
are removed, the short axle part withdrawn 
from the sleeve and placed in lapping posi 
tion upon the sleeved end of the axle and se 
cured by passing the shanks of the two re 
moved teeth through coincident holes in the 
lapped parts, so that the securing-teeth stand 
upward. In the different positions of the 
short axle part the fastening-teeth are se 
cured by the same nuts. By this construc 
tion a very simple and convenient way is pro 
vided for shortening the width of the rake as 
it may be required for transportation. 
In the accompanying drawings I have 
shown in Figure 1 in top view the rake in 
full width, the rake-head being in partial sec 
tion to show the fastening of the short axle 
part within the sleeve of the long axle part 
by the shanks of the trailing teeth. Fig. 2 is 
a like view of the rake made shorter, the 
Short axle part being separated from and se 
cured upon the sleeved end of the long axle. 
part by using the teeth-shanks as fastening 
bolts. Fig. 3 is a vertical section of the rake 
head as shortened. Fig. 4 is a like section of 
the rake-head sections coupled, and Fig. 5 is 
a vertical cross-section of the shortened axle 
as seen in Fig. 3. 
The axle forms the rake-head and is con 
structed of a long and a short section, to each 
of which the spring trailing teeth are secured. 
The shanks of the teeth may be of any suit 
able cross-section and, passing through holes 
in the axle, are secured by nuts. On the end 
of the long axle part 1 a sleeve 2 is secured, 
into which the short axle part 3 is secured 
when using the rake its full width, as in Fig.1. 
The sleeve 2 and the short axle part 3 are 
made with coincident holes 4 455, and the 
shanks 6 of the rake-teeth 77, passing through 
these holes, firmly bind and secure the axle 
parts together. For this purpose the shanks 
6 6 of two of the teeth 7 pass through the 
sleeve and through the coupled end of the 
short axle part, as in Fig. 1, making the rake 
its full width. 
To shorten the rake, the two rake-teeth 77 
are removed and the short axle part separated 
from the sleeve and placed upon the top of 
the axle, lapping with the sleeve. The two 
rake-teeth 7, which had been removed, are 
then used to secure the lapped axle parts by 
passing the shanks 66 of said teeth vertically 
through coincident holes in the lapping parts 
and nutting the shanks on the under side of 
the axle, as in Figs. 3 and 5. For this pur 
pose the short axle part has holes 88, corre 
sponding with the holes 99 in the sleeve to 
receive the teeth-shanks in the full width of 
the rake. This way of employing the nutted 
rake-teeth as the means of fastening the short 
axle part makes it very convenient and easy 
for changing the rake. Provision is made for 
changing the line of draft for the shortened 
rake by providing the long axle part with 
three eyes 11, 12, and 13, into which the draft 
rods 14 of the shafts are secured, as in Fig. 2. 
The short axle part has an eye 15, into which 
the draft-rod is adjusted when using the rak 
full Width. 
The spring-teeth are raised by the turning 
of the axle to permit the load to drop off, 
thus dumping the rake, the teeth being cleared 
from the load in the usual manner by a tooth 
ed clearing device consisting of a bar 16, sup 
ported crosswise upon the spring-teeth, so 
that in raising the trailing teeth the toothed 
bar will ride upon them with the teeth of the 
cross-bar standing down between the rake 
teeth, as in Fig. 5. This toothed clearing 
bar I provide with an adjustable end piece 
95 
OO 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
602,535 
whereby the rake is shortened which consists 
in securing the short axle part upon the 
sleeved part by the nutted shanks of the 
spring-teeth vertically passed through coin 
cident holes in the lapped parts, and means 
for shifting the draft-rod of the shafts upon 
the longest axle part. 
3. In a wheeled rake, the long and short 
axle parts, the longest part having an end 
sleeve whereby the two parts are coupled and 
secured together, by the nutted shanks of the 
spring-teeth, the means for shortening the 
rake which consists in securing the short part 
in the axle lapping upon the upper side of the 
sleeved part by the nutted shanks of the 
spring-teeth carried by said short axle part, 
and means for shifting the draft-rod of the 
shafts on the axle and means for shortening 
the clearing-bar of the teeth to conform to the 
shortened rake. 
4. In a wheeled rake adapted to be adjusted 
in width, the long and short axle parts, hav 
ing each a sleeve at its end adapted to receive 
and engage a corresponding end tenon of the 
coupled parts, in combination with the trail 
ing spring-teeth the nutted shanks of which 
pass through and secure the coupled axle 
sleeve parts. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto 
signed this specification, in the presence of 
witnesses, this 3d day of August, 1897. 
CLARENCE L. ALEXANDER. 
45 
so 
55 
65 
Witnesses: 
GEO. W. MooRE, 
F. M. LAVINS. 
17, by which the bar may be shortened to 
conform to the shortened rake, as in Fig. 6. 
The adjustable end piece fits by tongue and 
groove upon the bar and is secured to it by 
screws, the adjustment being made at both 
ends of the rake, so that the toothed clearing 
device is adjusted in length to suit the full 
width of the shortened rake. 
The toothed clearing-bar is hung to the 
shaft-frame by rods 18, and the rake is dumped 
by means of the lever 19, connecting the shafts 
and the axle. 
The driver's seat 20 is mounted upon the 
shafts. 
It is obvious that the sleeve may be secured 
to the short axle part. In addition to the 
sleeve the long axle part 1 may have a tenon 
10 to enter a socket in the end of the short 
axle part, making a sleeve of this axle part 
secured to a tenon of the long axle part and 
thereby strengthen and brace the connection. 
I claim as my improvement 
1. In a wheeled rake adapted to be short 
ened, the long and short axle parts, one part 
having an end sleeve adapted to receive the 
end of the other axle part, the one partse 
cured within the sleeve by the nutted shanks 
of the spring-teeth passing through coinci 
dent holes in the sleeve and in the other axle 
part whereby to give full width to the rake. 
2. In a wheeled rake adapted to be short 
ened, the long and short axle parts, the long 
est part having an end sleeve whereby the 
axle parts are coupled and secured together 
by the rake - teeth shanks, the provision 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602636.txt	(No Model.) 
W. FETTERS 
GLASS PRESSING MACHINE, 
sheets-sheet 1. 
No. 602,636, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1898. 
 
WITNESSES 
? 32-Ala- 
c 2 6-4-4- 
INVENTOR: 
(4- 
MZZA/ AA 77A/S, 
226 
YuYa 42-4 
3% 
(No Model.) 
No. 602,636, 
W. FETTERS 
GLASS PRESSING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1898. 
Ti s 
1S 
s 
N 
N 
N 
N 
'N 
S 
() 
'N 
(s 
- - - - - - - - - -...-- 
i 
&SCR's s 
is 4 
2- ----- 
 
. 
u 
st 
1. It 
TQ 
if r 
hit hi? 
ALT III F 
TH 
\O/ 
C 
n 
s ()), O/ 
s 
RS 
is, 
st 1 
WITNESSES: 
6 & 72.4/. 
Z 
NVENTOR: 
Aza/ro A/VA/FS, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 602,636, 
 
W. FETTERS 
GLASS PRESSING MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1898, 
 
 
 
 
C. ^ SSES; 
WITN ES 
3 ZAZ. 
INVENTOR: 
Awa/ A/VA/S, 
(No Model.) 
W. FETTERS 
CLASS PRESSINC MACHINE, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 602,636, 
Patented Apr. 19, 1898, 
AZ6 4. 
AZA . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
As 
Z 
7 
v 
$ $  
 
W. FETTERS 
GLASS PRESSING MACHINE. 
. 5 Sheets-Sheet, 5. 
Patented Apr. 19, 1898. 
 
o 
777 
6) 
 
 
Air 
(No Model. ) 
No. 602,636, 
  
  
  
  
WITNESSES 
c 252A.Z. 
INVENTOR: 
WZawir AA77A/S 
2 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILBUR FETTERS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
GLASS-PRESSING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,636, dated April 19, 1898. 
Application filed September 20, 1897, Serial No. 652,248, (No model.) 
IO 
5 
To add twhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILBUR FETTERS, of 
Philadelphia, in the State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Glass-Pressing Machines, 
whereof the following is a specification, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings. 
My invention relates to machines compris 
ing dies or molds wherein a solid mass of 
glass or similar material may be pressed to a 
form predetermined by the shape of said 
Inolds. 
As hitherto constructed machines of this 
class, comprising a lower stationary mold and 
an upper reciprocating mold, are manually 
operated. The lump of glass to form each 
article being manually cut from a mass of 
glass heated to a plastic condition, it is im 
possible to precisely predetermine the bulk 
of each lump. . The percentage of variation 
of the individual lumps from the proper 
amount even in the hands of the most skilful 
Workman is so great as to prevent the employ 
ment of a machine which has a stroke of in 
variable length. Said machines are therefore 
constructed so that the limit of approach of 
the molds is wholly under the control of the 
individual operator, who determines at each 
stroke of the movable mold by the resistance 
of the material when the compressing action 
shall cease. The length of stroke is therefore 
manually varied in accordance with the quan 
tity of material interposed between the molds. 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
a machine which shall automatically effect 
the variation of stroke hitherto dependent 
upon the skill of an experienced operator, 
said machine being supplied with portions of 
material manually clipped from the fused 
mass, as heretofore. 
Broadly speaking, my invention comprises 
opposed molds automatically brought to 
gether by mechanism in which the limit of 
approach of the opposed molds is determined 
at each stroke by the amount of material in 
serted between them. 
It is obvious that a 
plunger thus automatically controlled may 
be used in connection with single lower molds 
manually inserted and removed after each 
stroke of the plunger, as such lower molds are 
ordinarily used in connection with a plunger 
which is manually operated. I prefer, how 
ever, to embody such an automatic plunger 
in a machine which is provided with a series 
of molds and mechanism to shift them beneath 
said plunger, together with mechanism for 
removing the finished articles from the molds, 
without removing the latter from their posi 
tion in the machine. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
a machine, showing a convenient embodi 
ment of my invention. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation of said machine. Fig. 3 is an end 
elevation of said machine. Fig. 4 is a verti 
cal sectional view of the plunger on the line 
44 of Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a vertical sectional 
view of the plunger on the line 55 of Fig. 1. 
Figs. 6, 7, and 8 are horizontal sectional views 
of the plunger on the respective lines 66,77, 
and 88 in Fig. 2. 
Fig. 9 is a sectional view 
on the same plane as Fig. 5, showing the po 
sition of the dies at the limit of their approach. 
Fig. 10 shows a side elevation of the lower 
die and its pivotal connection to the machine. 
Figs. II and 12 show convenient means for 
tilting the lower die to discharge an article 
pressed therein. Fig. 13 shows a modified 
pivotal support for said lower die. Figs. 14 
and 15 are respective plan and side elevations 
of a modified portion of the die-plunger. 
In said figures, A is the bed-plate of the 
machine, provided with suitable legs A' A'. 
An annular die-carrier B is mounted for ro 
tation upon said bed, surrounding the central 
boss C of the latter, upon which is mounted a 
standard A', which serves to support the plun 
ger C by the brackets act, in which said plun 
ger is adapted to reciprocate. The driving 
shaft D is mounted in suitable bearings in 
said standard A* and in the standard A, fixed 
at the edge of the bed A. 
The driving-shaft D is conveniently rotated 
by means of the pulley E, which is loosely 
mounted upon said shaft and rotatively en 
gaged therewith, at the will of the operator, 
by means of the clutch F. The means for 
driving the shaft D is not of the essence of 
my invention. I have, however, shown a well 
known type of clutch, comprising projections 
f, adapted to engage corresponding projec 
tions e upon the pulley E. Said clutch F, be 
ing keyed upon the shaft D, as indicated at 
d, may be conveniently shifted into engage 
55 
o 
75 
95 
Od 
3o 
35 
 
2 
602,636 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
ment with the loose pulley E, against the pres 
sure of the releasing-spring F, by means of 
the bell-crank lever F, mounted upon the 
standard A and provided with a link f' to 
connect with an operating-treadle or similar 
device. 
As shown in Fig. 1, the die-carrier B con 
tains eight dies G, mounted in sockets b. 
Each of said dies is pivoted in its socket, as 
indicated at g g. Said dies G do not, how 
ever, rest upon their pivots in the carrier B, 
but upon the bed A, which supports them 
against the downward thrust of the plunger 
C, as they are successively shifted beneath 
and receive the impact of the latter. 
The plunger C is reciprocated by means of 
the eccentric H, which is fixed upon one ex 
tremity of the shaft D, as shown in dotted 
lines in Fig. 3. Said eccentric FI is provided 
with a strap H, pivotally engaged upon the 
stud C*, which is adjustably secured upon 
said plunger C by means of the clamp-ring c. 
Said eccentric H serves to positively and uni 
formly raise and lower the plunger C with 
each rotation of the shaft D, means herein 
after described being, however, interposed 
between said positively-actuated portion of 
the plunger Cand the plunger-mold, whereby 
the operative stroke of the latter is automat 
ically varied, as aforesaid. 
The die-carrier B is shifted in consonance 
with the reciprocation of the plunger C by 
means of the eccentric I, mounted upon the 
other extremity of the shaft D, the roller-pin 
i of said eccentric being engaged in the slot 
i of the lever J, which is fulcrumed at i* upon 
the standard A. The lower extremity of said 
lever J is connected by an adjustable link J' 
with a slide J', which is mounted for reciproca 
tion in the slideway in the bed-plate A. Said. 
slide is provided with a pawl J, which is held 
by the springi against the periphery of the 
die-carrier B, the latter being provided with 
eight notches B, adapted to be engaged by 
said pawl. The stroke of the pawl J being 
somewhat in excess of the distance between 
adjoining notches B* the parts just described 
are so related that in each back Ward stroke 
of said pawl it engages with one of the notches 
B* and by its forward stroke rotates the die 
carrier B, so that one of said dies is centrally 
located beneath the plunger C, as shown in 
Fig. 5. 
The relation of the two eccentrics Hand I, 
as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 3, is such that 
the die-carrier B is at rest during the down 
ward operative portion of the stroke of said 
plunger C and is rotated while the latter is in 
its upper inoperative position. 
Referring now to Figs. 4 to 9, inclusive, I 
have applied the letter C to that portion of 
the plunger which is positively actuated by 
means of the eccentric H. and its connected 
strap H". As best shown in Fig. 8, the stud 
C* is adjustably secured upon the plunger C 
by means of the clamp-ring c, so that the po 
sition of said plunger may be adjusted with 
I relation to the eccentric Hin accordance With 
the form of dies used in the machine. With 
the form of dies which I have illustrated in 
section in Fig. 9 the machine is adapted to 
make disks such as are used in fruit-jar tops. 
I do not, however, desire to limit myself to 
such a construction, as it is obvious that other 
forms of dies may be provided and the move 
ment of the plunger Cadjusted in accordance 
there with. 
In the manufacture of the articles afore 
said I prefer to use in conjunction with the 
mold G an annular mold K and a cylindrical 
mold L, concentrically mounted therein and 
operatively connected with the positively-ac 
tuated portion C of the plunger as follows: 
It is desirable that the annular die or mold 
Kbe first brought into contact with the lower 
die or mold G, with the die Lin such relation 
there with as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. The 
conical periphery k of said die K serves to 
center the latter in a similar-shaped socket in 
the die G. As shown in Fig. 9, said molds 
are so shaped that a tight joint is made at the 
edge of the cavity X between said molds to 
prevent the escape of the glass when com 
pressed. The lump of glass which is to be 
compressed rests upon the lower die G, as in 
dicated at a in said figure, and is thus inclosed . 
by said annular mold K. The plunger-die L. 
then descends into the position shown in Fig. 
9, compressing said lump acinto the interstices 
of the space X, thus forming the completed 
article. 
To effect the movement of the molds or dies 
K and I, the former is mounted upon a yoke 
K", the cross-bar K* of which encircles the up 
per threaded stem C' upon the plunger C. 
As hereinafter described, this threaded stem 
C' is adjustable with respect to the plunger C; 
but for purposes of operation said two parts 
are relatively fixed. The normal lower posi 
tion of the die K and its yoke K. With respect 
to the plunger C is determined by the posi 
tion of the nut K, which is adjustable upon 
the threaded stem C of said plunger. The 
spring K' serves to normally maintain Said 
yoke and die in said normal lower position. 
The pressure of said spring K is, however, 
determined by the adjustable nut, K, which 
is also fixed upon said threaded stem C and 
serves as an abutment for the upper end of 
said Spring. 
The parts just described are so related that 
when the plunger C is at the upper extremity 
of its stroke the distance between the molds 
K and G is less than the stroke of the eccen 
tric Hand plunger C. It is therefore obvious 
that as the eccentric H rotates said molds K 
and G will be maintained in contact during 
a predetermined portion of the stroke of said 
eccentric, the spring K. yielding under a cer 
tain pressure, predetermined by the adjust 
ment of the nut IK, to permit of the positive 
movement of the plunger C. 
The die L is mounted upon the extremity 
of the plunger L', the latter being mounted 
75 
90 
95 
O 
O 
II5 
I25 
602,636 
- 
- 
- 
3. 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
- 
to reciprocate within the plunger C, the lim 
its of the relative movement of the two plun 
gers C and L' being determined by the slot l' 
in the latter, in which is engaged the pin c, 
which is fixed in the plunger C. The upper 
extremity of the plunger L' is reduced in di 
ameter, as indicated at L, and surrounded 
by the spring L, which normally maintains 
the plunger L'at the lower limit of its move 
ment relative to the plunger C, as shown in 
Figs. 4 and 5. 
The pressure of the spring L8 may be varied 
by longitudinal adjustment of the threaded 
sleeve C*, having the abutment c' for said 
spring. The aforesaid adjustment of the 
sleeve C* with respect to the plunger C, with 
which it is in threaded engagement, is con 
veniently effected by the collar - wrench C, 
(best shown in Fig. 6,) said wrench being ro 
tatively engaged with the sleeve C* by means 
of the key C, entered in the keyway c' in 
said sleeve. As stated, the position of said 
sleeve C*, with its abutment-shoulder c, with 
respect to the plunger C determines the pres 
sure with which the spring Li maintains the 
plunger L' in its lower normal position with 
respect to said plunger C. Its adjustment 
is, however, effected before the machine is 
placed in operation, the sleeve being securely 
clamped in its adjusted position by means of 
the threaded socket c' of the stem C. 
From the foregoing description of construc 
tion and operation of the movable mold mem 
bers and their actuating mechanism it is mani 
fest that although the machine may be con 
tinuously operated from an eccentric having 
a uniform stroke, yet the effective operative 
stroke of the dies or molds is not dependent 
upon the skilful manipulation of an experi 
enced operator, but is automatically deter 
mined by the resistance of the material com 
pressed between said dies, the springs Kand 
Lyielding in accordance with said resistance. 
I find it desirable in the manufacture of 
Some articles to so construct the elastic me 
dium of the plunger that it shall yield dur 
ing the compressing action to a certain ex 
tent, as aforesaid, and shall then continue to 
yield only under greater pressure or resist 
ance. A convenient construction to attain 
this result, is as follows: 
In Figs. 14 and 15 I have shown modified 
means connective of the plungers C and L' 
differing from that described in connection 
with Figs. 4 and 5 in that the downward 
stroke of the plunger C not only compresses 
the spring L directly by the relative move 
ment of said plunger L' within the plunger 
C, but after certain portion of its stroke the 
direct or primary compression is supple 
mented by a secondary compression, the parts 
being arranged as follows: The spring L, 
which surrounds stem. Li of the plunger L', 
rests upon the loose collar L. Said collar L' 
remains in fixed relation with the plunger L' 
during the first portion of the compressing 
stroke of said plunger, but is raised from its 
seat at the extremity of said stroke by means 
of the toggle-levers L, which are in said por 
tion of the stroke operated by the descent of 
the pin c of the plunger Cin the slotl. Said 
toggle-levers are provided with seats land 
l in the plunger Land the collar L, respec 
tively, said seats serving to prevent the lat 
eral displacement of the extremities of said 
levers. It is obvious that by the operation 
of said levers L the spring Lis not only com 
pressed to the extent of the relative move 
ment of the plungers C and I", but this move 
ment is supplemented by the movement of 
said levers in a longitudinal direction with 
respect to said plungers, the effect being to 
compress the material between the molds with 
greater force at the extremity of the stroke of 
the plunger C. 
Referring now to Figs. 10, 11, and 12, it 
will be seen that the pivotal projections g 
upon the molds G are seated in suitable de 
pressions b' in the mold-carrier B. As above 
described, said molds are not suspended upon 
said pivotal projections, but rest upon the 
surface of the bed-plate A. Each of the die 
sockets b is provided with a spring b, secured 
to the under side of the carrier B and nor 
mally disposed in the position shown in Fig. 
11. When, however, said carrier B-shifts the 
dies G successively over the opening A* in 
the table A, said springs bserve to tilt their 
respective dies G, as indicated in Fig. 12, 
thus discharging the pressed articles upon an 
inclined table A, from whence they may be 
removed as desired. The further traverse 
of the carrier B causes the dies G. to ride over 
the edge ax of the opening A* in the bed 
plate A, and thus restores them to their nor 
mal position. As shown in Fig. 13, said 
dies G may be pivoted upon adjustable cone 
screws g', mounted in the carrier B instead 
of upon the cylindrical projections g of the 
molds G. 
In the operation the die-carrier B rotates 
in the direction of the arrow in Fig. 1, and 
lumps of glass or similar material are clipped 
from the mass and fall upon the dies G, as 
indicated at ac a' in said figure, as said dies 
are shifted successively in front of the oper 
ator. As above described, said dies G, con 
taining said lumps ac, pass successively be 
neath the plunger C, &c., and are pressed. 
The opening A* is preferably located as indi 
cated in dotted lines upon Fig. 1, so that af 
ter compression sufficient time elapses for the 
pressed articles to become partially cooled be 
fore they are discharged from the machine. 
Although the operation of the machine is in 
tended to be continuous, it is desirable to pro 
vide a clutch, as above described, whereby 
the operator may instantly stop it if the cycle 
of operation is accidentially interrupted. 
I am aware that in this art rotary tables or 
dials which serve to shift molds or dies be 
neath a manually-operated plunger have been 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
55 
 
4. 
602,686 
IO 
35 
45 
55 
- 
used for many years. I therefore do not de- bed-plate, means to rotate said mold-carrier, 
an opening in said bed-plate, means to tilt 
sire to broadly claim this feature of my in 
said pivoted mold when in registry with said 
vention. 
bed-plate opening, means to return said tilted 
So far as I am aware it is new in this art to 
mold to normal position by the rotation of said 
provide an elastic medium between a movable 
carrier, and a second mold adapted to cop 
die or mold and its actuating mechanism. I 
erate with said pivoted mold, substantially as 
therefore do not desire to limit myself to the 
set forth. 
precise construction which I have shown and 
6. In a glass-press, the combination with a 
described, as it is obvious that various modi 
fixed bed-plate, of a mold-carrier mounted for 
fications may be made without departing from 
movement upon said bed-plate, a mold piv 
the spirit of my invention. 
oted in said carrier, means to shift said mold 
carrier, an opening in said bed-plate, means 
to tilt said pivoted mold when in registry with 
said bed-plate opening, to discharge the mold 
ed article through the latter, a table A, be 
neath said opening, and a second mold adapted 
to coperate with said pivoted mold, substan 
tially as set forth. 
7. In a glass-press, the combination. With a 
fixed bed-plate, of a mold-carrier mounted for 
movement upon said bed-plate, a mold piv 
oted in said carrier and adapted to rest upon 
said bed-plate, means to shift said mold-car 
rier, an opening in said bed-plate, means to 
tilt said pivoted mold when in registry with 
said bed-plate opening, to discharge the mold 
ed article through the latter, means to return 
said mold to normal position by the move 
ment of said mold-carrier, a table A, beneath 
said opening, and a second mold adapted to 
coperate with said pivoted mold, substan 
tially as set forth. 
S. In a glass-press, the combination with a 
fixed bed-plate, of a mold-carrier mounted for 
rotation upon said bed-plate, a mold pivoted 
in said carrier and adapted to rest upon said 
fixed bed-plate, peripheral notches in said 
carrier, a reciprocatory pawl to engage said 
notches and shift said carrier, an opening in 
said bed-plate, means to tilt said pivoted mold 
when in registry with said bed-plate opening, 
to discharge the molded article through the 
latter, means to return said mold to normal 
position by the movement of said mold-car 
rier, and a second mold adapted to coperate 
with said pivoted mold, substantially as set 
forth. 
9. In a glass-press, the combination with a 
positively-actuated plunger C, of a plunger 
IL", mounted for relative movement upon the 
first-named plunger, a spring L, intermediate 
of said two plungers, and toggle-levers L 
connective of said two plungers, substantially 
as set forth. 
10. In a glass-press, a hollow plunger C, 
mounted for reciprocation, a second plunger 
L', mounted for reciprocation within said 
plunger C, a spring L, mounted within the 
plunger C, to bear upon the plunger L', and 
a pin c, entered through said plungers to limit 
their relative movement, substantially as set 
forth. 
- 11. In a glass-press, a hollow plunger C, 
mounted for reciprocation, a second plunger 
L', mounted for reciprocation within said 
plunger C, a spring L, mounted Within the 
I claim- 
1. In a glass-press the combination with a 
fixed bed-plate, of a mold-carrier mounted to 
rotate upon said bed-plate, mechanism to in 
termittently rotate said carrier, a series of 
sockets in said carrier, a series of molds piv 
oted in said sockets, and resting upon said 
bed-plate, a discharge-opening in said bed 
plate, means to tilt said pivoted molds when 
Over said discharge-opening, means to return 
said molds to normal position, a positively-ac 
tuated plunger, a second plunger in telescopic 
relation with said first plunger, an elastic me 
dium between said two plungers, and a mold 
upon said second plunger adapted to succes 
sively register with said pivoted molds, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
2. In a glass-press the combination with a 
fixed bed-plate, of a mold-carrier mounted to 
rotate upon said bed-plate, mechanism to in 
termittently rotate said carrier, a series of 
Sockets in Said carrier, a series of molds piv 
oted in said sockets, and resting upon said 
bed-plate, a discharge-opening in said bed 
plate, means to tilt said pivoted molds, when 
Over said discharge-opening, means to return 
said molds to normal position, a positively 
actuated plunger, a mold comprising two con 
centrically-related relatively-movable mem 
bers, adapted to successively register with 
said pivoted molds, and separate elastic me 
diums connective of said two mold members 
and Said positively-actuated plunger, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a glass-press, the combination with a 
fixed bed-plate, of a mold-carrier mounted for 
movement upon said bed-plate, a mold en 
tered in said carrier adapted to rest upon said 
fixed bed-plate, means to shift said mold-car 
rier, and a second mold adapted to coperate 
with the mold in said carrier, substantially 
as set forth. 
4. In a glass-press, the combination with a 
fixed bed-plate, of a mold-carrier mounted for 
movement upon said bed-plate, a mold piv 
oted in Said carrier, and adapted to rest upon 
said bed-plate, means to shift said mold-car 
rier, an opening in said bed-plate, means to 
tilt said pivoted mold when in registry with 
said bed-plate opening, and a second mold 
adapted to coperate with said pivoted mold, 
Substantially as set forth. 
5. In a glass-press, the combination with a 
fixed bed-plate, of a mold-carrier mounted for 
rotation upon said bed-plate, a mold pivoted 
in said carrier, adapted to rest upon said fixed 
- 
75 
9o 
OC 
IO 
IC 
2c 
I 25 
602,636 
upon said extension C, and provided with an 
adjustable spring K", and rods K", connecting 
said yoke K, with the mold K, at the lower 
extremity of said plunger L', substantially 
aS set forth. 
14. In a glass-press, a hollow plunger C, 
mounted for reciprocation, a second plunger 
T', mounted for reciprocation within said 
plunger C, a spring L, intermediate of said 
two plungers, a pin c, to limit the relative 
movement of said plungers, a sleeve C, in 
threaded engagement with the plunger C, the 
collar-wrench C, in engagement with said 
sleeve, a threaded extension C", upon the up 
per extremity of said plunger C, in threaded 
engagement with the sleeve C, a yoke K, 
mounted upon said extension C, and pro 
vided with an adjustable spring K', and rods 
K", connecting said yoke K, with the mold K, 
at the lower extremity of said plunger L', 
Substantially as set forth. 
35 
45 
WILBUR FETTERS. 
Witnesses: 
EPHRAIMROGERS, 
GEO. E. POTTS. 
- 
plunger C, to bear upon the plunger L', a pin 
c, entered through said plungers to limit their 
relative movement, and a screw-threaded 
sleeve C, to adjust the pressure of said spring, 
Substantially as set forth. 
12. In a glass-press, a hollow plunger C, 
mounted for reciprocation, a second plunger 
T', mounted for reciprocation within said 
plunger C, a spring L, intermediate of said 
two plungers, a pin c, to limit the relative 
movement of said plungers, a threaded ex 
tension C", upon the upper extremity of said 
plunger C, a yoke K, mounted upon said ex 
tension C and provided with an adjustable 
spring K, and rods K", connecting said yoke 
K with the mold K, at the lower extremity 
of said plunger L', substantially as set forth. 
13. In a glass-press, a hollow plunger C, 
mounted for reciprocation, a second plunger 
L', mounted for reciprocation within said 
plunger C, a spring L, intermediate of said 
two plungers, a pin c, to limit the relative 
movement of said plungers, a threaded sleeve 
C, to adjust the pressure of said spring 'L', 
a threaded extension C, upon the upper ex 
tremity of said plunger C, a yoke K, mounted 
O 
5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602736.txt	(No Mode.) 
P. N. DE DUBOEAY. 
REWOWING BOOK REST. 
No. 602,736, 
TE--- 
 
Patented Apr. 19, 1898. 
 
 
 
awaraya 
/6 
last (722zz A666%rpz. 
&btor4. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
PERCY NORCOP DE DUBOEAY, OF TALLULAH, GEORGIA. 
REVOLVING Boo K-REST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,736, dated April 19, 1898. 
Application filed May 5, 1897, Serial No. 635,224, (No model.) 
O 
15 
25 
35 
To all, whon, it Tinctly concern: 
Beit known that I, PERCY NORCOP DE DU 
BOEAY, of Tallulah Falls, in the county of Ra 
bun and State of Georgia, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Revolv 
ing Book-Rests; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as Will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
revolving book-rests, the object of the same 
being to provide a device of this character in 
which the support or table for the book can 
be revolved and also quickly and conven 
iently tilted to any desired extent, thereby 
especially adapting the device for use in con 
nection with hotel-registers, where the clerk 
can turn the support or table to face the reg 
istrant and save the wear upon the book which 
usually occurs where the register is moved di 
rectly upon the desk or counter. 
To these ends and to such others as the in 
vention may pertain the same consists in pro 
viding a table or desk hinged to a revoluble 
support and adjustable thereon to permit of 
its being tilted to more or less extent. 
In the following specification I have en 
tered into a detailed description of my inven 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings and to numerals thereon, which des 
ignate the several parts, and what I consider 
to be the novel features of construction are 
specifically set forth in the claims. 
In the drawings forming a part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 is a perspective view of a 
revolving book-rest constructed in accord 
ance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a side ele 
vation of the book-rest. Fig. 3 is a plan view 
of the device with the board or table removed. 
Fig. 4 is a vertical sectional view on the line 
acac of Fig. 3. 
Referring to the drawings by numerals, 1 
designates the base-board or counter, upon 
which is rigidly secured the standard 2, the 
upper part of which is hollow or provided with 
a socket, in which fits the spindle 3 of the rev 
oluble frame, to which the table or desk is 
connected. The revoluble frame consists of 
a cross-bar 4, having at its ends forwardly 
projecting members 55 and centrally a rear 
wardly-projecting arm 6, the said arm being 
on a line with the spindle. To the outer ends 
of the forwardly-projecting side members 55 
of the revoluble frame the table or desk 7 is 
hinged, the said table or desk having secured 
to its under side rails 88, terminating in the 
apertured projection 9, through which the 
bearing-pin 10 passes. It will be understood, 
of course, that the table could be hinged di 
rectly to the forward ends of the side mem 
bers by providing apertured lugs instead of 
the side rails, though the arrangement shown 
is preferred, as it acts to thoroughly brace the 
table-top. 
In order to provide for tilting the table-top 
or desk and adjusting it at various heights, 
the side rails 88 are connected by cross-bar 
11, having a depending rod or support 12, 
which passes through a vertical opening in 
the rearwardly-projecting arm 6 of the revo 
luble frame. The depending arm or support 
is provided at one edge with a series of rack 
teeth 13, which are engaged by a pinion 14, 
mounted Within the opening in the arm upon 
a shaft 15, which extends beyond one side of 
the table or desk and carries a hand-wheel 16, 
by which it is turned, the shaft being sup 
ported by a bracket or arm 17, extended rear 
ward from the cross-bar 4. Supported with 
in the rearwardly-projecting arms 6 and 17 is 
a second shaft 18, having a hand-wheel 19 at 
its outer end and its inner end threaded to 
engage a threaded aperture in the arm 6 to 
one side of the slot and communicating there 
with. By this arrangement of the shafts 15 
and 18 the table or desk can be quickly ma 
nipulated or tilted upward by operating the 
hand-wheel 16, which turns the pinion 14 in 
mesh with the rack-teeth on the rear support 
of the table, and When the table has been ad 
justed such adjustment is held by turning 
the hand-wheel 19, which moves the inner 
end of the shaft 18 in frictional contact with 
the roughened side of said support. I also 
provide the standard with a screw 20, which 
is adapted to be moved into frictional contact 
with the spindle 3 of the revoluble frame, and 
thereby hold the frame rigid with respect to 
the said standard. 
From the foregoing description, in connec 
tion with the accompanying drawings, the 
construction and operation of my improved 
revolving book-rest will be readily apparent, 
55 
65 
75 
85 
95 
Od 
 
e 
w 
602,736 
55 
75 
O 
for after the table has been adjusted at the 
proper inclination it can be turned and is 
limited in its movement by manipulating the 
screw 20. This provides a very simple and 
effective support for hotel-registers, by which 
the clerk can change the position of the book 
without handling the same by simply turn 
ing the table, and when he has done.this he 
can make the support rigid by manipulating 
the screw carried by the standard. There 
fore the book can be turned toward the guest 
for his signature and afterward turned to face 
the clerk without having to remove the book 
itself, thereby saving the wear and tear to 
which a hotel-register is usually subjected 
and also relieve the clerk of having to lift 
the book in changing to the different posi 
tions. 
It will be understood, of course, that the 
device could be applied for other purposes 
than that for which it is particularly adapted, 
and it is also obvious that changes could be 
made without sacrificing any of the advan 
tages of the invention, and I therefore do not 
limit myself to the particular construction of 
the parts and arrangement thereof as herein 
shown and described, but reserve the right 
to modify or change the same within the 
spirit and scope of my claim. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a revolving book-support, the combi 
nation with a standard, of a frame revoluble 
thereon, a table or desk hinged to the frame, 
a depending rack-bar carried by said table, 
mechanism carried by the frame for actuat 
ing the rack-bar longitudinally to effect the 
tilting of the table, and mechanism independ 
ent of the actuating mechanism for locking 
the rack-bar in its adjusted positions, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. In a revolving book-support, the combi 
nation with a supporting-standard, of a frame 
revoluble thereon, a table or desk hinged to 
the frame and having a depending rod or arm 
with rack-teeth on one edge, a shaft carried 
25 
35 
by the revoluble frame and having a pinion 
in mesh with the arm of the table and a Sec 
ond shaft engaging a screw-threaded aper 
ture and adapted to be moved into frictional 
contact with the arm or rack-bar, Substan 
tially as shown and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a revolving book-support, the combi 
nation with a hollow standard, of a frame 
having a spindle set within the hollow stand 
ard, a table or desk hinged to the frame and 
having a depending arm or rack-bar; together 
with a pinion supported by a shaft journaled 
in the revoluble frame, said pinion being in 
mesh with the rack-bar, and a second shaft 
also supported by the revoluble frame and 
threaded to engage a threaded aperture and 
bear against the rack-bar of the table or desk, 
and a screw in the standard to engage the 
spindle of the revoluble frame, substantially 
as shown and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a revolving book-support, the combi 
nation with a standard having a socket at its 
upper end, of a frame consisting of a cross 
bar having forwardly-projecting members at 
its ends and centrally a rearwardly-project 
ing arm, said frame being mounted upon a 
standard and having a spindle which extends 
within the socket thereof, a table or desk 
hinged at its forward end to the outer ends 
of the side members of the revoluble frame, 
a rack-bar depending from the table, through 
an opening in the rearwardly-projecting arm 
of the frame; together with a shaft journaled 
in said arm and having a pinion in mesh with 
the rack - bar, a second shaft engaging a 
threaded opening in the arm to frictionally 
contact with the rack-bar, and a screw car 
ried by the standard to engage the spindle of 
the revoluble frame, substantially as shown 
and for the purpose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
Witnesses: 
PERCY NORCOP DE DUBOEAY, 
C. H. JACKSON, 
M. A. DOCKINS. 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602837.txt	- 
(No Model.) 
- 
A. DOLLFUS. 
CORKING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 602,837. 
Patented Apr. 26, 1898. 
 
 
es k 
JW2 tra esses: 
-69, af------4-- 
172 vera or 
M/o/loise (707/ws. 
 
r 
(No Model.) 
No. 602,837. 
A. DOLLFUS. 
CORKING MACHINE, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented Apr. 26, 1898, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
U. - 
Maalhonse Dollfus 
Mzzorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 
ALPEIONSE DOLLFUs, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
CORKING-MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,837, dated April 26, 1898. 
Application filed August 17, 1897, 
O 
25 
35 
40 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALPHONSE DOLLFUS, a. 
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila 
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Improvementin Corking 
Machines, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to a new and useful 
improvement in machines for corking bottles 
and the like, and has for its object to provide 
a simple and effective device of this descrip 
tion which may be operated by hand and ad 
justed to various heights of bottles within its 
limit and by means of which a cork may be 
quickly and conveniently forced within a bot 
tle with but little care upon the part of the 
manipulator; and a further object of my in 
vention is to provide a gage whereby each 
cork may be forced within its bottle to an 
exact distance, and this regardless of the 
height of the bottle; and a still further ob 
ject of my invention is to provide means for 
holding the adjustable bracket in any posi 
tion. 
With these ends in view this invention con 
sists in the details of construction and com 
bination of elements hereinafter set forth, 
and then specifically designated by the claims. 
In order that those skilled in the art to 
which this invention appertains may under 
stand how to make and use the same, the con 
struction and operation will now be described 
in detail, referring to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of my improve 
ment, showing a bottle in position prior to be 
ing corked; Fig. 2, a vertical section showing 
the plunger forced downward in driving a 
cork within the bottle, and Fig. 3 a plan view 
of the machine. 
In carrying out my invention as here em 
bodied, A represents the base of the machine, 
which is of sufficient size and proper design. 
for supporting the machine and the bottles 
to be corked, and B is a standard projecting 
upward from this base and having guideways 
C formed upon the edges of the upper por 
tion thereof, around which the sections of the 
bracket D are secured. This bracket, being 
thus secured around the upper portion C of 
45 
So 
 
Serial No. 648,50l., (No model.) 
the standard, is adapted to slide vertically 
thereon, and a series of teeth E are formed 
with the standard with which the pinion F 55 
meshes, said pinion being secured upon the 
spindle G, journaled in the rear portion of 
the bracket. A hand-wheel His secured upon 
the spindle, and by the revolving of said 
wheel it will be seen that the pinion will cause 6o 
the bracket to move up or down, as the case 
may be, and to prevent the bracket from fall 
ing from any adjustment to which it may be 
placed a spring I is coiled about the spindle 
between the hub of the hand-wheel and the 65 
rear portion of the bracket, and the tension 
of this spring will produce sufficient friction 
upon the hub of the hand-wheel to retard the 
rotation of the spindle sufficiently to hold it 
against the tendency of the bracket to move 7o 
downward. The head J of the bracket has 
formed therein the guideways K, and between 
these ways is fitted the plunger-bar L, so as 
to slide vertically, and having formed there 
on the teeth M, with which meshes the seg- 75 
mental gear N, the latter being journaled at 
O within the head and having formed there 
with or secured thereto the operating-handle 
P, by which arrangement the plunger-bar 
may be moved up and down, as described, as 8o 
will be readily understood. The lower end 
of the plunger-bar has formed therein a socket 
for the reception of the plunger Q, and this 
plunger is held in place by the set-screw R. 
A cylindrical housing S is formed with the 85 
lower portion of the bracket and has fitted 
therein a bushing T, said bushing being flared 
upward for the reception of a cork, while the 
housing is flared at its lower end, as indi 
cated at U, for fitting over the head of the 9o 
bottle W. A clamp-screw W serves to bind 
the bushing in place within the housing, and 
this bushing may be removed and another 
substituted therefor with a different sized 
opening therein for the accommodation of 95 
different sized corks, and it is obvious that a 
series of these bushings being provided for 
each machine a large variety of sizes of corks 
may be manipulated thereby. 
the head of the bracket, and has threaded 
therethrough the gage-screw Y, against which 
the operating-handle P strikes when moving 
downward, thereby limiting said handle, and 
X represents a lug formed upon the side of Ioo 
2 
602,887 
2C) 
, 
. 
. 
- 
- 
- 
- 
. 
. . 
. . 
30 
in hand. . 
as this screw may be adjusted it is obvious 
that the downward limit of the handle may 
be varied to suit the requirements of the work 
From this description it is obvious that in 
practice a bottle may be placed upon the base 
A after the bracket has been elevated, so as 
to carry the housing above the top of said 
bottle, and by manipulating the hand-wheel 
FI the housing will be caused to fit over the 
o 
I head of the bottle and the bushing brought 
in contact therewith, after which a cork, be-, 
ing placed within the flared opening in the 
bushing, may be quickly forced within the 
bottle to the exact depth desired by the down 
Ward movements of the plunger-bar through 
the medium of the operating-handle, as be 
fore described. After the gage-screw. Y has 
been adjusted so as to carry the plunger to: 
the proper distance below the bushing it will 
be seen that regardless of the height of the 
bottle each cork will be forced home to the 
same distance, since the bushing, resting upon 
the head of the bottle, forms a gage for the 
25 starting-point of the cork, and as the plun 
ger is carried by the bracket its downward 
movement will always be the same relative 
to the bushing, which is also carried by said 
bracket. When the cork has been forced 
home, a slight reverse movement of the hand 
wheel H will elevate the bracket above the 
clevel of the bottle, thereby permitting a free 
removal of Said bottle and the substitution 
I therefor by another, and the proper move 
ment of the plunger will permit the insertion. 
of a new cork, when the operations just de 
scribed may be repeated with a like result. 
By the use of my improvement large num 
bers of bottles may be quickly and advan 
tageously corked, thus saving considerable 
time and labor and accomplishing the work 
in a superior manner with less skilled help. 
The cost of manufacturing a machine of 
this description is exceedingly small, since 
the principal parts thereof are made of cast 
iron and require but little machine-work for 
their assembly. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new and useful is 
I. A machine for corking bottles consist 
ing of a base, a standard projecting upward 
therefrom, guideways formed upon the upper 
portion of said standard, a series of teeth 
formed upon this upper portion, a bracket 
adapted to slide upon the guideways, a spin 
dle journaled in the rear portion of the 
bracket, a pinion carried by said spindle and 
meshing with the teeth, a hand-wheel for 
revolving the spindle, a spring for retain 
ing the spindle against accidental rotation, a 
35 
5 
55 
. 
pose set forth. 
plunger-bar fitted to slide vertically in the 
bracket, teeth formed upon said plunger-bar, 
a segmental gear journaled in the bracket, 
and meshing with the last-named teeth, an 
operating-handle formed with the segmental 
gear, a plunger carried by the plunger-bar, a 
housing formed with the bracket, and a flared 
bushing fitted within the housing, substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. . . 
2. In combination, a base, a standard, 
guideways formed upon said standard, teeth. 
E also formed upon the standard, a bracket 
adapted to slide upon said ways, a pinion. 
meshing with the teeth, means for operating 
said pinion, a plunger-bar, teeth M formed 
upon said bar, a segmental gear meshing with 
the last-named teeth, an operating-handle 
formed with the segmental gear, a gage-screw 
carried by the bracket and adapted to limit 
the downward movement, of the operating 
handle, a plunger detachably secured within 
the plunger-bar, a housing formed with the 
bracket, and a bushing having a flared open 
ing therethrough secured within the housing, 
all arranged substantially as and for the pur 
3. A machine for corking bottles consisting 
of an upright standard, guideways formed on 
the upper portion thereof, a series of teeth. 
also formed on said upper portion, a bracket 
adapted to slide on the guideways, a spindle 
1journaled in the rear portion of the bracket, 
a pinion carried by said spindle meshing with - 
the teeth, a hand-wheel for operating the 
95 
spindle, a spring for retaining the spindle 
against accidental rotation, a plunger fitted 
in the bracket to slide vertically and means 
for raising and lowering said plunger inde 
Essently of the bracket, substantially as set 
orth. 
4. In a corking-machine, a bracket, a plun 
ger-bar slidable vertically therein, a plunger 
secured to the plunger-bar, a rack-bar formed 
on the plunger-bar, a segmental gear jour 
naled in the bracket meshing with said rack 
bar, a handle on the gear, a lug on the side 
of the bracket, a set-screw threaded there 
through to strike the handle, a supporting 
standard on which the standard is slidably 
mounted, and means for raising and lowering 
the bracket and holding it in position, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto af 
fixed my signature in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
. . . . 
. . . . . 
. . 
- - 
. 
. 
. 
. 
- 
IOO 
Io5 
IIO 
ALPHONSE DOLLEUS. 
Witnesses: 
S. S. WILLIAMSON, 
SAMUEL L. TAYLOR. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US602937.txt	No Model.) 
No. 602,937, 
H. W. EGLI, 
CLEANING DEVICE FOR GUN BARRELS, 
Patented Apr. 26, 1898. 
 
a. 
22 % 
yspill esses 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
HANS WALT FR EGLI, OF Z U RICH, S W IT Z E R LAN D. 
CLEANING DEVICE FOR GUN-BARRELS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 602,937, dated April 26, 1898. 
Application filed November 17, 1897, Serial No. 658,866. (No model.) 
55 
O 
To all, whon, it voy concervi 
Be it known that I, HANS WALTER, EGLI, 
a citizen of Switzerland, residing at Zurich, 
Switzerland, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Cleaning Devices for 
Tubular Articles; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skillied in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same. 
Myinvention relates to an improvement in 
cleaning devices for tubular articles, such as 
firearms and the like. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
cleaning device whose length can be altered 
as may be necessary to clean firearms whose 
bores are of differentlengths and which when 
not in use may be readily packed into a com 
pact form in a manner which avoids the ne 
cessity of employing a separate casing or box 
to hold the various parts. 
With this object in view my invention con 
sists in the features, details of construction, 
and combination of parts which will be here 
inafter described in connection with the ac 
companying drawings and then particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure I is an elevation 
of my device in condition for cleaning a long 
bore, such as the barrel of a rifle or the like. 
Fig. 2 is a detail view, partly in section, illus 
trating one division of the cleaning rod; Fig. 
3, a similar view illustrating the terminal di 
vision of the cleaning-rod, which is provided 
with the head or handle, the cap employed in 
connection with my device being illustrated 
in position for screwing into the end of said 
terminal division. Fig. 4 is a view similar to 
Fig. 1, illustrating the device in concation for 
cleaning a short bore, such as the barrel of a 
pistol or tha like. Fig. 5 is a view similar to 
Fig. 4 with the cleaning-brush removed. Fig. 
6 is an elevation showing the device as it ap 
pears when packed for transportation or stor 
ags-that is to say, when not in use; Fig. 7, a 
cross-section of the same on line 77, Fig. 6. 
Fig. 8 is a section on the line 88, Fig. 3. In 
these views Fig.1 is on a reduced scale com 
pared with the others. 
Referring to the drawings, a' is a terminal 
or handle division provided with a handleb, 
which may be attached to said terminal di 
vision in any desired manner and which is 
provided on its inner face with a plurality 
of recesses or sockets c for a purpose herein 
after referred to. 
a are intermediate divisions, and C' is a 
cleaning - division, which comprises a brush. 
a', formed in the usual manner. 
a is a cleaning - division comprising a 
scraper device particularly adapted for Scrap 
ing the lead from the barrel of the firearm in 
a well-known manner. These various divi 
sions are united in a detachable manner, pref 
erably by means of a screw-threaded stud on 
one end of one of the divisions, which stud 
is adapted to be threaded into a socket formed 
in the corresponding opposite end of the ad 
jacent division. In Fig. 4this screw-thread 
ed stud is illustrated as reaching to the bot 
tom of the socket. The other joints, how 
ever, are all somewhat modified from this 
construction, the stud having its f: il reduced 
to form a nipple, which is arraged to enter 
an unthreaded extension of the socket, as will 
be clear from Fig. 2. 
In the drawings I have illustrated a clean 
ing device which comprises four intermediate 
divisions C. but it is obvious that more or less 
divisions may be employed in connection with 
a structure embodying my invention without 
departing from the essence thereof. 
In addition to the parts thus far described 
I employ a securing device adapted to be at 
tached to one end of the terminal division a', 
this securing device being preferably ill the 
nature of a cap d, provided with a screw 
threaded stud arranged to enter the threaded 
socket in the end of said terminal division (t", 
whereby the cap is held to said terminal di 
vision. This cap has an in Wardly-projecting 
means for retaining the other divisions of the 
cleaning device, said means being in this case 
in the form of an annular inwardly-projecting 
flange d". 
To use my improved device for cleaning a 
long, bore, such as a rifle-barrel, the interme 
diate divisions are screwed together and to 
the terminal division. The cleaning - divi 
sions are then united and connected to the ad 
jacent intermediate divisions. The rod will 
then be in the condition shown in Fig. 1, 
where a brush is sluown at the end ready for 
brushing out the interior of the desired bore. 
25 
35 
75 
90 
loo 
2 
602,937 
- 
If, however, it is desired to employ only the 
scraping device, the division carrying the 
brush may be removed by unscrewing it from 
the cleaning-division comprising the scraper. 
To make the cleaning device applicable for 
use in cleaning short bores, one or more or all 
of the intermediate divisions may be removed 
as is necessary to reduce the cleaning device 
to a convenient length. 
In Fig. 4 I have shown the invention as ar 
ranged for cleaning a short bore, such as a 
chamber of a revolver or the like. In this 
case if it is desired to use only the scraper 
the brush-division a may be removed, when 
the invention will appear as in Fig. 5. 
When not in use, the plurality of divisions 
may be disconnected, with the exception of 
the two cleaning-divisions, which are allowed 
to remain united, the total length of the said 
cleaning-divisions being equal to the length 
of each intermediate division. The nipples 
on the ends of the intermediate divisions and 
on the end of the cleaning-division carrying 
the scraper are inserted into the recesses or 
Sockets c, formed in the inner face of the han 
dleb, the various divisions lying parallel to 
each other. The cap d is then secured to the 
terminal division a' by screwing its threaded 
stud into the corresponding socket in the end 
of said terminal division, whereby the in 
wardly-projecting annular flange is brought 
down over and outside of the ends of the said 
intermediate divisions a and of the brush-di 
yisiona', thus holding all the parts together 
1n a secure manner. 
From the description given it will be seen 
that my cleaning device, broadly speaking, 
comprises a terminal division provided with 
means for securing one end of the interme 
diate and cleaning divisions and a securing 
device arraned to be attached to the oppo 
site end of said terminal division and capable 
of holding the other ends of said intermediate 
and cleaning divisions. . 
IIaving thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 
Letters IPatent of the United States, is 
1. In a cleaning device of the class de 
scribed, the combination with a plurality of 
divisions arranged to be detachably connected 
end to end, of means secured to one of said 
divisions for receiving one end of each of 
the other divisions, and a securing device 
arranged to be detachably connected to one 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
- 
55 
scribed. 
of said divisions at the end opposite said 
means and to engage the corresponding ends 
of the other divisions, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. In a cleaning device of the class de 
scribed, the combination with a terminal di 
vision having a handle secured at one end, . 
of a securing device arranged to be detach 
ably connected to the opposite end of said 
terminal division, a cleaning-division and a 
plurality of intermediate divisions arranged 
to be secured between the handle and the Se 
curing device and to be connected end to end 
in a detachable manner, substantially as de 
3. In a cleaning device of the class de 
scribed, the combination with a terminal di 
vision having a handle provided with a plu 
rality of recesses in its inner face, a plurality 
of intermediate divisions each provided with 
a threaded stud arranged to enter a socket in 75 
the corresponding opposite end of the adja 
cent division, and a cleaning - division ar 
ranged to be connected to the intermediate 
divisions, said cleaning and intermediate di 
visions being arranged to enter the recesses 
in the handle, of a securing device provided 
with a stud adapted to be threaded into one 
end of the terminal division and arranged to 
engage the intermediate and cleaning divi 
sions whereby all the parts are held in a com 
pact form. 
4. In a cleaning device pf the class de 
scribed, the combination with a plurality of 
intermediate divisions and a terminal divi 
sion provided with means for holding one end, 
of each of the other divisions, of a pair of 
cleaning-divisions arranged to be detachably 
connected to each other, said cleaning-divi 
sions when united being equal in length to 
each intermediate division and arranged to 
be held at one end by the handle, and a se 
curing device arranged to engage one end of 
the terminal division and to hold the corre 
sponding ends of the intermediate divisions 
and one end of the cleaning-divisions where 
by all the parts are held in a compact form. 
In testimony whereof E affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
95. 
90. 
OO 
IIANS WALTER EGLI. 
Witnesses: 
OTTo STEIGER, 
H. PAHKORF. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603037.txt	(No Model.) 
- 
2 Sheets-Sheet, i. 
J. B. CHACE, 
WOODWORKING MACHINERY. 
No. 603,037. 
Patented Apr, 26, 1898, 
ZI 
WTTW. 
ZZz. 24.7% 
NNTTA. 
2. 376. 
 
J. B. CHACE. 
WOOD WORKING MACHINERY, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2, 
Patented Apr. 26, 1898, 
(No Model.) 
No. 603,037, 
F. . 3. 
a 
 
77 
N N 
- 
  
 
 
 
s s 
222222 
e 
  
SS 
?t 
N S s 
2 
23-22 
& 
 N 
2. 
11 
 
WTNEEa. 
zz Entif." 22 
(6.76%-42A, 24% 
TiE torris Peters co, PHOTo-Lithio. washisto. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. CHACE, OF ORANGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
WOOD WORK NG MACH NERY. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 603,037, dated April 26, 1898. 
Application filed February 7, 1896, Serial No. 678,303, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JoHN BOYDEN CHACE, 
of Orange, in the county of Franklin and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Woodwork 
ing Machinery; and hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same, reference being had to the 
accompanying drawings, forming part of this 
specification. 
This invention has reference to improve 
ments in Woodworking-machines, and espe 
cially in machines for cutting concave de 
pressions in boards to serve as thumb-holes. 
The object of the invention is to increase 
the accuracy of machines of this character 
and to render the same automatic in action. 
The invention consists in the peculiar fea 
tures of construction and combination of 
parts, as may hereinafter be described, and 
pointed out in the claims, whereby the object 
of the invention is accomplished. 
Figure I represents a side elevation of the 
improved thumb-hole-cutting machine. Fig. 
2 represents a plan view thereof. Fig. 3 rep 
resents a vertical longitudinal sectional view 
of the same. Fig. 4 represents a cross-sec 
tional view. Fig. 5 represents an enlarged 
view of details of the cutter and the device 
for lifting and depressing the same. Fig. 6 
represents a board illustrating the style of 
thumb-hole cut by this machine. 
Similar numbers and letters of reference 
designate corresponding parts throughout. 
The mechanism is supported on a frame 
work consisting of the standards, as 8 and 
9, the longitudinal brace 10, connecting the 
pairs of standards, and the base or top 11, 
mounted on the standard. Extending through 
a portion of the length of this top 11 is the 
slot 12, in which the feed-block 13 is recipro 
cal, the limit of the forward movement of 
this block being regulated by the set-screw 14, 
Working through the depending portion 15 of 
the top 11. 
On the top 11 is a hopperformed by the par 
titions or ends 16 and 17. The end 16 is sta 
tionary, having the lower feed-opening 18, 
governed at the center by the vertical adjust 
able bolt 19 and the webs 20 and 21. From 
the web 21 and the adjoining portion of the 
end 16 extends the bearing-support 22. The 
end 17 is adjustable on the top 11 and is sup 
plied with a clamping device 23, traveling in 
the groove 24 of the top. On the inner sur 
face of this end are adjustably mounted the 
guides 25 25. 
In the lower portions of the webs 20 and 21 
is journaled the shaft 26, having the handle 
27 and the oppositely-extending screw-threads 
28 and 29, and on these threads are engaged 
the threaded sleeves 30 and 31, which are se 
cured to the guide-arms 32 and 33, the verti 
cal members 34 and 35 of these arms extend 
ing upward on the inner surface of the end 
16. To these arms 32 and 33 are secured the 
downwardly-acting presser-springs 36 and 37. 
By the rotation of the shaft 26 the guide-arms 
32 and 33, with their vertical members, are 
adjusted laterally to accommodate the par 
ticular width of boards which it is desired to 
operate on. 
The shaft 38 is journaled in the bearing of 
the support 22. On the outer end of this 
shaft 38 is the belt-pulley 39, having the slot 
40 formed in a portion thereof. In this slot 
is adjustably secured the clamp 41, having a 
pivot on which the upper end of the connect 
ing-rod 42 is journaled. The lower end of 
this rod is pivoted to the arm 43, extending 
from the shaft 44, journaled in bearings pro 
jecting from the standards 88. From the 
central portion of this shaft 44 extends the 
lever-arm 45, the upper end of which is con 
nected with the feed-block 13 by the rod 46, 
pivoted at both ends. 
The pulley 39 is driven by the belt 47, con 
necting the same with a pulley on the drive 
shaft 48, which is journaled in bearings in 
the lower portion of the frame and also car 
At the lower portion 
ries the band-wheel 49. 
of the machine is pivoted the lever 50, hav 
ing the member 51, carrying the roller-bear 
ing 52, by the pressure of which against the 
belt 47 the slack in the same is taken up. 
When set to exert a desired tension on the 
belt, the lever 50 is held by the pawl 53 en 
gaging one of the steps of the rack 54. At 
the sides of the top 11 are secured the brack 
ets 55 55", between which is pivoted the frame 
95 
do 
O 
20 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
603,037 
I5 
The end 17 of the hopper is first placed 
56. In this frame is journaled the cutter 
shaft 57, having the band-pulley 58 at one 
end and the rotary cutter 59 and saw 60 at the 
other end. The free end of this frame has the 
slotted member 61, in which the pivot-block 
62 is adjustable by means of the set-screws. 
63. On this pivot is journaled the lower end 
of the link 64, the upper end of which is piv 
ioted on the pin 65, set in the enlarged end of 
the shaft 38, off the axial center thereof. 
The . 
O 
bracket 55' has the stud 55, on which is ro 
tatably mounted the angularly-disposed band 
pulley 66, while on the bracket 67, extending 
from the top 11, is similarly mounted the pull 
ley 68. 
The band 69 passes around the pull 
ley-wheel 49 and thence over those pulleys 
66 and 68 to the pulley 58 of the cutter-shaft 
to transmit rotary motion thereto. 
suitable distance from the end 16 to accom 
modate the length of the boards A A. The 
guides 2525 on the end 17 are next adjusted 
to the width of the boards. The handle 27 is 
now turned to rotate the shaft 26 to draw to 
gether or separate the guide-arms 32 and 33, 
the members 34 and 35 being at the same 
time adjusted within the hopper. The boards 
AA are now placed in the hopper between 
the members 34 and 35 at one end and be 
tween the guides 25 25 at the other end, 
and the bolt 19 is adjusted to allow for the 
passage of but one board at a time through 
the opening 18. The mechanism is now 
started and through the driving-gear the pull 
ley 39 and the shaft38 is rotated. This causes. 
the reciprocation of the feed-block 13, through 
the connections therewith. Passing through 
the opening in the lower portion of the end 
17 the block engages the lowest of the pile of 
boards and carries it along through the open 
ing in the end 16 and between the guide-arms 
32 and 33, where it is engaged and pressed 
downward by the spring-plates 36 and 37. 
This forward movement of the board contin 
lues until the block 13 is arrested by the stop 
screw 14. During this operation the cutter 
shaft has been rotated by its drive-band 69; but 
the cutter has been sufficiently raised to allow 
for the passage of the board. When the for 
Ward movement of the board ceases, the shaft 
38 has been sufficiently rotated to bring the 
pin 65 past the vertical center. As this pin 
moves downward in its circular path the free 
end of the cutter-frame is also moved down 
Ward until the cutter 59 and saw 60 act to cut 
the thumb-hole B in the board A, the cutter 
forming the inclined concave recess, while the 
saw cuts the vertical wall forming the end of 
the hole. When this is accomplished, the 
cutter is raised by the rotation of the shaft 
38 and the board is pushed out of the way by 
the next board which has been engaged by the 
feed-block after its return to its original posi 
tion. Should the block 13 reach the stop 14be 
fore the rotation of the pulley 39 has carried 
... 
the clamp 41 to its farthest forward point of 
circular movement, this pulley will be held 
from rotation by the stop, the block, and the 
connections between the block, and the pull 
ley, the tension on the belt 47 being regulated 
to allow for the slipping of the belt on the 
pulley. A spring-finger 16' is secured to the 
stationary end 16, extending outwardly there 
from, and has a bearing on the end of the 
board next to the thumb-hole cutter, thereby 
firmly holding the board to the bed of the ma 
chine during the cutting of the thumb-hole, 
as clearly shown in Fig. 3. 
Should it be desirable to cut two thumb 
holes in the board, one of the guide-arms 32 
33 is adjusted on its sleeve 30 or 31, so that 
the board in passing under the thumb-hole 
cutter will be off the center and the thumb 
hole will be cut to one side of the center. To . 
cut the hole on the opposite side, the guide 
arm first adjusted will be replaced to its cen 
tral position on the sleeve and the other guide 
arm will be adjusted so as to bring the thumb 
hole cutter to that side of the center and the 
boards will be again passed through the ma 
chine, when the finished board will then have 
two thumb-holes, one to either side of the 
Center. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a thumb-hole machine, the combina 
tion with the frame 56 pivotally mounted in 
the brackets 55 and 5.5', the cutter-shaft jour 
naled longitudinally in the frame, and the 
cutters on the free end of the shaft, of the 
feeding device and connections intermediate 
the same and the frame 56, whereby the cut 
ter-frame is raised at the operation of the 
feeding device. 
2. The combination with the screw-threaded 
shaft 29, and the guide-arms 32 and 33 hav 
ing bearings engaged with the screw-shaft 
and provided with the vertical ways 34 and 
35 and the tension-springs 36 and 37, of the 
vibratory cutting device, as described. 
3. In a thumb-hole machine, the combina 
tion with the cutter-shaft frame pivotally 
mounted and operated by the pulley 39 
through the link 64, the cutter-shaft jour 
naled longitudinally in the frame, a pulley 
on one end of said cutter-shaft and the cutter 
on the opposite end thereof, of the driving 
pulley, the shaft on which the driving-pulley 
is mounted, the guide-pulleys, a belt Work 
ing over the driving-pulley, the guide-pulleys 
and the pulley 58, and a belt working over 
the pulley 39 from the drive-shaft, substan 
tially as and for the purpose herein shown and 
described. 
4. In a thumb-hole machine, the combina 
tion of the following instrumentalities: the 
hopper provided with adjustable guides, the 
guide-arms provided with vertical members 
and presser-springs, the spring-finger 16', the 
35 
45 
5o 
55 
65 
7o 
75 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
603,037 
3. 
shaft 26 for adjusting the guide-arms 3233, the reciprocal feed-block 13, as and for the 
the pivoted frame 56, the cutter-shaft sup-purpose described. 
ported in the pivoted frame and provided with 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
the pulley 58 at one end and the cutter at the hand. 
5 other end, the pulley 39 connected to the piv- 
oted frame by the link, the reciprocal feed- 
block 13, and means, substantially as herein 
shown, for operating the pulleys 58 39 and 
J. A. MILLER, Jr., 
M. F. BLIGH. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN B. CHACE. 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603137.txt	(No Model.) 
No 
27 
G. H. GRUNDY & G. A. LING ARD. 
DEVICE FOR DECORATING TILES OR PLANE SURFACEs. 
Patented Apr. 26 
1898. 
DJS 
croZ, 
?????-??-???-???????-????izzzzzzzz!!!!!!!!NY 
g te, n No. 
 
A77OAMEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE HENRY GRUNDY, OF DERBY, AND GEORGE ARTHUR LING ARD, 
OF OLD NORMANTON, ENGLAND. 
DEVICE FOR DECORATING TILES OR PLANE SURFACEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 603,137, dated April 26, 1898. 
Application filed November 24, 1896, Serial No. 613,313. (No model.) 
5 
15 
20 
25 
35 
40 
45 
To all tohon, it nogy concern. 
Beit known that we, GEORGEFIENRY GRUN 
DY, photo-engraver and colotype-printer, of 
27 Duffield road, Derby, and GEORGE AR 
THUR TLINGARD, colotype-printer, of Mount 
Pleasant, Old Normanton, near Derby, Eng 
land, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Devices for Decorating Tiles, Plates, 
or other Plane Hard Surfaces, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
This invention has for its object the dec 
oration of tiles and other flat-surfaced arti 
cles; and it consists in certain construction of 
the printing apparatus whereby the printing 
may be done in a direct manner by the pho 
tocollgraphic process without the use of trans 
fe's. 
The invention will be first described, and 
then particularly pointed out in the appended 
claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of the specification, 
in which 
Figure is a part vertical section showing 
the collotype-film, its elastic support, and 
metal backing-plate as mounted on the bed of 
the press. Fig. 2 is a section through the 
tile fixed to the platen. Fig. 3 is a face view 
of the device for securing the tile upon the 
platen of the press; and Fig. 4 is a cross-sec 
tion online 44 of Fig. 3, the tile being omitted. 
A film of bichromatized gelatin is spread 
upon an elastic or resilient support formed of 
vulcanized india-rubber mounted upon such 
a rigid Surface as a machine-planed metal bed 
or backing. 
Referring to the drawings, the elastic sup 
port for the gelatin film A is composed of 
two qualities of rubber, an upper layer B, 
upon which the gelatin is applied and formed 
of a sheet of white vulcanized india-rubber 
about one-sixteenth of an inch thick, said up 
per layer being united by cementing to a sub 
stratum of softer and more elastic vulcan 
ized rubber C about one-quarter of an inch 
thick, so as to obtain elasticity or yielding 
under compression without such an amount 
of superficial extensibility of the film as would 
cause spreading and blurring of the picture. 
The thin superficial layer of india-rubber is 
 
 
55 
65 
S 3. 
white in order that the inking-up of the pic 
ture may be visible to the workman and is 
of rather common non-elastic quality and is 
somewhat dense or hard in order that it shall 
not be too extensible and shall be devoid of 
air-bells in its structure, so as to admit of be 
ing very smooth surfaced with sandpaper 
without becoming stringy when a film is 
cleaned off for the purpose of coating the 
rubber for use again. This thin superficial 
layer of rubber B is cemented upon a thicker 
substratum of better quality rubber C, which 
is vulcanized onto a canvas backing, which in 
turn is cemented to the smooth-surfaced sup 
porting-plate D by means of a solution of 
gelatin and bichromate of potash. The bi 
chromatized gelatin film A is spread on this 
elastic support as in the ordinary collotype 
process, but is rather thicker than the ordi 
nary colotype-film. The film having been 
spread upon the elastic support is then dried 
in a collotype drying-oven at about 125 Fah 
renheit, after which it is exposed under a re 
versed photographic negative, the exposure 
being timed by actinometer. It is then washed 
well and dried in a warm room. After it has 
been dry for about eight hours it is mounted 
in a printing-press of the oscillating-platen 
type, the metal backing of the film being 
screwed or otherwise secured immovably to 
the type-bed E of the press, provision be 
ing made for holding both the plate and the 
tile so that repeated impressions may be made 
upon the same tile without loss of register. 
The colotype-plate is then etched' in the 
usual way and rolled up with ink composed 
of vitrifiable pottery color in a suitable me 
dium. 
The tile F is secured to the platen J of the 
press in such manner that it is held immov 
able in position in order that repeated im 
pressions may be pulled upon the same tile 
without loss of register, the collotype-plate 
being inked afresh after each impression un 
till sufficientinkhas been thus deposited upon 
the tile, this being necessary in order that the 
picture may withstand the action of the sub 
sequent glazing and firing. The tile is locked 
up in the manner of a form of type in a chase 
or frame K, screwed to the platen, provision 
being made to prevent the displacement of the 
go 
95 
OO 
2 
603,187 
O 
tile by the suction of the collotype printing 
surface. For this purpose the sides of the 
frame are undercut or gibbed, as at k k, to 
receive the ends of a sliding stick T, having 
tenoned ends arranged to slide in the under 
cut grooves k k and being locked up against 
the edge of the tile by quoins m m, or other 
means may be adopted for retaining the tiles. 
In order to avoid the breakage of the tile, it 
is backed up by a suitable backing, such as 
a sheet of rubber H, upon the platen covered 
by a layer of cardboard G, against which the 
tile rests. The tile having been printed is 
then hardened on-that is to say, it re 
ceives a firing in the kiln to burn out all the 
oil in the color, so that the bisque tile will 
absorb the glaze when dipped. 
The tile is: 
then dipped and fired again at a much higher. 
temperature. 
The mode of operation is simi 
lar for other plane hard surfaces. 
The pictures produced by this apparatus 
and mode of operation are sufficiently strong: 
and vigorous to obviate the necessity for 
hand-painting or working up by hand in any 
way and is much less costly than the dust 
ing-on and the substitution processes: 
now practiced. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
35 
45 
1. The combination with a photocollotype 
printing-film for direct photocolotype print 
ing on tiles or other plane hard surfaces, of 
an elastic support composed of two layers of 
vulcanized india-rubber of different qualities 
cemented together, one of which is a thin up 
per layer of dense non-elastic rubber and 
upon which the photocolotype-film is spread 
and the other being a thicker substratum of 
elastic rubber, and a smooth-surfaced rigid 
backing-plate for said elastic support, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. The combination with a photocolotype 
printing-film for direct photocolotype print 
ing on tiles or other plane hard Surfaces, of 
an elastic support upon which the photocollo 
type-film is spread, and a smooth-Surfaced 
backing-plate, the elastic support being com 
posed of two layers of vulcanized india-rub 
ber of different qualities cemented together, 
namely, a thin upper layer upon Which the 
film is spread and formed of dense non-elastic 
crubber, and a thicker substratum of elastic 
rubber cemented to the backing-plate, sub 
stantially as specified. 
GEORGE HENRY GRUNDY. 
GEORGE ARTHUR LINGARD. 
In presence of 
C. R. B. EDDOWES, 
WILLIAM FORDHAM. 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603237.txt	(No Model.). 
C. A. MORRISON & J. MORAN. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
WINDLASS, 
 
 
Patented Apr. 26, 1898. 
No. 603,237, 
 
 
 
d. 41 
1vbobozs 
????? 42-ettotv 
The Norris PETERs co. Photo-Litho, washingto ?G. ? 
(No Model.) 
No. 603,237. 
C. A. MORRISON & J 
WINDE ASS, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
MORAN, 
Patented Apr. 26, 1898. 
|?zzzzzzzzzzzzzz@ 
 
 
 
 
28)itv.cscs 
?????? 4treltsovie 
??????? 
???????? 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHESTER A. MORRISON AND JOHN MORAN, OF MANITOU, COLORADO; SAID 
MORAN ASSIGNOR TO, AND SAID MORRISON ASSIGNOR OF PART TO, 
LAURA. E. MORRISON, OF SAME PLACE, AND WILLIAM WHELAN, OF EL 
PASO COUNTY, COLORADO. 
WINDLASS. 
SPECIF??ATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 603,237, dated April 26, 1898. 
Application filed June 24, 1897. Serial No. 642,042, (No mode.) 
To alZ ??ho? it ??? ????error 
Be it known that we, CHESTER A. MORRI 
SON and JOHN MORAN, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Manitou, in the county of 
5. El Paso and State of Colorado, have invented 
a new and useful Improvementin Windlasses, 
of which the following is a specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
Windlasses used for hoisting purposes, and 
Io specially adapted to be used where blasting 
is required in the excavation under the wind 
lass, such as in shafts and wells sunk in rocky 
formations. 
The objects of our improvements are, first, 
I5 to provide a windlass-drum with a ratchet 
wheel on each end; second, to provide a pawl 
to set the ratchet-wheels which will be safe 
and Secure; third, to arrange for the instanta 
neous removal of the drum of the windlass 
20 from the supporting-standards by providing 
a metal box to fit over the top of the stand 
ards; fourth, to reduce friction in operating 
the windlass by providing adjustable boxes 
with ball-bearings. We attain these objects 
25 by means of the mechanism illustrated in the 
accompanying two sheets of drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1is an end view of a Windlass con 
structed in accordance with our invention. 
3o Fig. 2 is a section of the drum of the wind 
lass, taken through the dotted line 22 in Fig. 
6. Fig. 3 is a section showing the end of the 
box and the location of the balls which serve 
as a bearing for the shaft of the drum. Fig. 
35 4 is a plan view of the bottom of the box, and 
Fig. 5 is a similar view of the top of the box. 
Fig. 6 is a plan view of the top of the entire 
windlass. Fig. 7 is a detailed side elevation 
of the pawl; and Fig. 8 is a view of the under 
4o side of the pawl, showing the lips thereon. 
Fig. 9 is a side view of the entire windlass. 
Similar characters of reference refer to the 
same parts throughout the several views. 
The windlass-drum B is supported by two 
45 standards A A, which are mortised in and se 
cured to the curbing at the top of the shaft 
or well. The drum B has a collar bat each 
end to prevent the rope from winding up 
The rope G has the buckets H and H' at- 6o 
against the ratchet-wheels C C, which are se 
cured by means of screws or other suitable 5o 
devices to the ends of the drum B, so that the 
ratchet-wheels will be turned in conjunction 
with such drum. The ratchet-wheels C C 
have their teeth pitch in opposite directions, 
so that when the drum is being turned in one 55 
direction one of the pawls E will engage one 
ratchet-wheel and when the drum is turned 
in the opposite direction the other pawl will 
engage the other ratchet-wheel. 
tached to its respective ends, and the rope is 
wound around the drum a number of times 
to prevent it from slipping, and the ends of 
the rope descend from opposite sides of the 
drum, so that when one bucket ascends the 65 
other descends. The purpose of having the 
ratchet - wheels secured to each end of the 
drum is to facilitate the operation of the wind 
lass by one person by having the bucket as 
cend at the end of the drum next the operator 7o 
and near the ratchet-Wheel, so that the Oper 
ator can conveniently take hold of the bucket 
with one hand and disengage the pawl with 
the other when removing the bucket, whereas 
if the ratchet-wheels were both on the same 75 
end of the drum one of the buckets would be 
elevated at the end of the drum farthest dis 
tant from the operator or from the ratchet 
wheels, and the operator could not hold the 
bucket and at the same time disengage the 8o 
pawl, but he would have to place something 
under the bucket to keep it from descending 
and then go to the opposite end of the drum 
and disengage the pawl and return to remove 
the bucket. 
The pawl E has the lipse eat either side of 
the point which engages the ratchet-Wheel,and 
these lips are designed to rest against the 
edges of the ratchet-wheel to prevent the 
pawl from slipping off of the ratchet-wheel 90 
in the event that the joint e' should become 
worn, so as to allow the pawl to have lateral 
play. These lips on the pawl are of the high 
est importance in order to secure perfect 
safety in a windlass using a ratchet-wheel 95 
and pawl, because there is always danger that 
85 
2 
603,237 
The bases F are countersunk on their under 
surfaces to receive the heads of the bolts f', so 
that the bottom of the bases will be smooth, 
while the bolts will be kept from turning. 
The bases F and the caps if have a narrow 
groove in them, extending around the bear 
ing of the shaft, for the reception of the small 
steel balls f, and the shafts rest upon these 
balls, thereby greatly reducing friction when 
the windlass-drum is operated. 
We construct the boxes as above described 
and fasten them permanently to the shaftsb 
to prevent the loss of the steel balls when the 
drum is hurriedly removed from the support 
ing-standards, as it must be to avoid injury 
when blasting in shallow shafts and wells. 
The windlass is provided with a crank D, 
which can be slipped on the shafts l'at either 
end of the drum. 
Having described our invention, what we 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
lS 
1. The combination in a windlass of two 
reversely-set ratchets, and two pawls having 
the lipse, e, at their ends which engage the 
teeth, the joints e' near the centers, and the 
eyes E at their base ends, substantially as 
described and for the purpose set forth. 
2. The combination in a windlass of two 
deeply-recessed, countersunk bases F, two 
caps fand bolts f, with the drum-shafts U 
to which they are permanently attached, and 
adapted to slip over and rest loosely on the 
ends of the supporting-standards A, substan 
tially as described and for the purpose set 
forth. 
CHESTER A. MORRISON. 
JOIIN MORAN. 
... WWitnesses: 
IIUGO PEYD?LER, 
A. T. MICIDILL. 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
I. ? 
a flat-faced pawl will slip off the side of the 
ratchet-wheel when under heavy strain and 
allow the bucket to fall. 
The pawls and their supports consist of two 
parts-the half-circular arms E' and the pawls 
E. The pawls E rotate on the joints e'e' and 
can be raised and lowered at will. The arms 
E" are stationary and are held in proper po 
sition by bolts passing through them and the 
standards A at the point E. The stationary 
arms Eserve to raise the pawls Ehigh enough 
to allow them to drop down and rest on the 
ratchets, so that there is no danger of their 
becoming disengaged when the ratchets are 
turned, whereas if the pawls were made of 
one piece and rotated at the point E they 
would be liable to be thrown out of engaging 
contact with the ratchets by their rapid ro 
tation. The shafts b, extending from each 
end of the drum B, have metal boxes consist 
ing of the bases F and the caps f, secured to 
them by means of the bolts f', so that the 
boxes will remain on the shafts U' when the 
drum is removed from the supporting-stand 
ards A. The purpose of having the boxes per 
manently secured to the shafts b is to facili 
tate the instant removal of the boxes in con 
nection with the shafts when the windlass 
drum is taken away to be out of the way of a 
blast in the shaft or well. 
The bases F have downward - projecting 
flanges f at their ends and sides, whereby 
deep recesses are formed in the bottom of the 
bases to fit over the top ends of the support 
ing-standards A. The purpose of construct 
ing the bases of the boxes with deep recesses 
in them is to prevent them from slipping off 
the ends of the standards horizontally and 
yet allow them to be raised vertically and be 
thus removed from the standards at the pleas 
ure of the operator. 
30 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603337.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 603,337, 
 
W. A. McCALLUM. 
MACHINE FOR JOINTING TUBES, 
Patented May 3, 1898. 
P 
. 
 
W 
V 
M . 
- 
N 
assiusa 47 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. McCALLUM, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO CHARLES 
ANDREW, OF SAME PLACE. 
MACHINE FOR JOINTING TUBES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 603,337, dated May 3, 1898. 
Application filed October 15, 1896, Serial No. 609,010, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. A. MCCAL 
LUM, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Cincinnati, Ohio, have invented new and 
useful Improvements in Machines for Joint 
ing Tubes, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to machines for joint 
ing metal tubing, its object being to produce 
a machine for the convenient and expeditious 
manufacture of tubular posts by compressing 
an outer tube upon an inner one, into which 
it is telescoped at the zone of the lap. 
To this end my invention consists in the 
machine constructed and operating as here 
inafter set forth, embodying generally a bed 
frame, a central cross-head adapted to move 
upon the bed-frame and carrying a compres 
sion-die, actuating-cylinders at the outer ends 
of the bed-frame, and connections between 
the plungers of said cylinders and the cross 
head for reciprocating the latter, and rolls 
for supporting the tubes while undergoing the 
action of the machine. 
The particular features of invention em 
bodied therein will be more specifically de 
Scribed, and set forth in the claims. 
Mechanism embodying... my invention is 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the machine 
complete, omitting the hydraulic forcing 
pump; Fig. 2, a plan view of the same; Fig. 
3, an end elevation of same, showing one of the 
plunger connections with the draw-bars; Fig. 
4, an axial cross-section of the die-withdraw-. 
ing cylinder and its supplemental cylinder 
and plunger; Fig. 5, a cross-section of the ma 
chine, showing one of the supporting-rollers; 
Fig. 6, an end elevation; and Fig. 7 a cross 
section of the die-carrying cross-head. 
nate two parallel I-beams resting upon cross 
ties a, suitably spaced apart to constitute a 
Upon the bed 
bed-frame for the machine. 
frame near one endisfirmly bolted a hydraulic 
cylinder B, with plunger barranged to move 
outwardly,and at the opposite end of theframe 
is a similar cylinder C, with plunger c mov 
ing outward oppositely to the first, the cyl 
inder C being adjustably secured to the bed 
frame, as by a hook or yoke L. Outwardly 
the plungers b and c each engage movable 
blocks D, provided with rollers r" to move 
upon the ways A' A' of the bed-frame. The 
opposite blocks D are connected by parallel 
draw-bars d' d', passing outside the cylinders 
B C in the horizontal plane of their axes 
above the ways A' A'. 
At an intermediate point between the cylin 
ders BC the draw-bars d d connect with the 
cross-head E, arranged to reciprocate upon 
the bed-frame as impelled by the plungers b c 
alternately. The cross-head E is of the form 
indicated in the figures, provided with rollers 
r, supporting it upon the Ways A' A' and With 
a central recess adapting it to receive and 
carry a hollow die F, a series of interchange 
able dies being provided adapted to the dif 
ferent sizes of pipe to be operated upon. 
: The dies F are solid blocks preferably of 
steel, each of rectangular or other external 
form, adapted to fit in the recess of the cross 
head E (whereby it is carried and operated 
in relation to the tubes acted upon) and pro 
vided with an aperture of the diameter re 
quired to engage and act upon the tubes. 
The cross-head E is attached to the draw 
bars d' d' by its wings e, having side recesses 
e', through which the draw-bars pass and are 
secured by keys e, Suitable engaging holes 
e being provided in the draw-bars at proper 
intervals to adjust the cross-head to any de 
sired position in relation thereto. 
The cylinders B C are permanently closed 
at their inner ends and are open at their outer 
ends and fitted with close-fitting plungers b 
c, provided with cup-leather packings in the 
usual manner. 
- The further construction and the functions 
of the several parts will appear in connection 
with the mode of operation, which is as fol 
Referring now to the drawings, A' A' desig lows: The plunger of the main operating-cyl 
inderB being in its receded position, the larger 
tube T of the tubes to be jointed is placed 
between the draw-bars d' d' upon Suitably 
provided supporting-roll R, with one end 
abutted against the rear end of the cylinder 
B and the other adjacent to and in line With 
the opening of the compression-die F. The 
smaller of the tubes T is then placed in a 
relatively similar position in the extended 
a. 
d 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
90 
OO 
 
2 
608,337 
o 
25 
35 
45 
55 
axis of the first, one end being passed through 
the compression-die F and telescoped within 
the larger tube T the distance of the desired 
lap and the other end adjacent to the rear 
end of the cylinder C being likewise support 
ed upon rolls R from the ways A' A'. The 
driving-pump (not shown herein) is then set 
in operation and water forced through the 
pipes 7) (indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 1) 
into the cylinder B, moving its plunger b out 
ward and drawing the cross-head E in the 
same direction, whereby the compression-die 
F is drawn inward upon the end of the tube 
T', compressing it centripetally upon the tube 
T and at the same time upsetting it longi 
tudinally to Some extent. When the die has 
reached the limit of the desired Zone of com 
pression, a valve, as 2, controlling the flow to 
the cylinder B, is closed and one, as , con 
trolling the flow to the cylinder C, is opened. 
The cylinder C has a short rear extension C, 
fitted with a short supplemental plunger c' 
moving rearward. An aperture. O, through 
the wall separating the two cylinders, admits 
the water to the two plungers simultaneously, 
but the smaller one having less resistance 
is first moved rearward until it comes into 
contact with the end of the tube T, thus form 
ing a take-up to accommodate any lost mo 
tion and constitute an abutment for the 
smaller tube. The pressure of water then 
moves the plunger c outward, carrying the 
cross-head E backward and stripping the die 
from the tube T. By pressure of the supple 
mental plunger c' the post formed by the now 
united tubes TT is held firmly in position 
between the said supplemental plunger and 
the cylinder IB while the plunger c is oper 
ating. When the compression is complete 
and the die receded from the Zone of lap, the 
composite tube TT is lifted out of the ma 
chine with the die F still upon it, the latter 
supported by a hook a from a traveling crane 
(not shown) and slipped off the end of the 
tubes and again replaced in its containing 
cross-lhead for a new operation. 
l3y readjustment of the cylinder C and the 
cross-head E to new positions upon the bed 
frame and new relations with the draw-bars 
to accommodate new lengths of pipe and plac 
ing a new die in the cross-head to accommo 
date tubes of different diameter posts of any 
desired size can be made by the machine. 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States 
1. In a tube-jointing machine embodying a 
longitudinally-extended bed or frame, oper 
ating-cylinders at or near the outer ends there 
of, having plungers operating outwardly in 
opposite directions, draw - bars connecting 
said plungers, and a compression-die movable 
upon the bed or frame between the cylinders 
by attachment to the draw-bars, substantially 
as set forth. 
2. In a tube-jointing machine, of the char 
acter indicated, the combination of a bed 
frame, a fixed operating-cylinder at or near 
one end thereof, an adjustable withdrawing 
cylinder at or near the opposite end thereof, 
draw-bars connecting the plungers of the cyl 
inders, and an intermediate cross-head adapt 
ed to be attached adjustably to and be recip 
rocated by the draw-bars, and a hollow colm 
pression-die carried by the cross-head, Sub 
stantially as set forth. 
3. In a tube-jointing machine, of the char 
acter indicated, in combination with the bed 
frame, operating and withdrawing cylindel's, 
the draw-bars and intermediate cross-head, a 
supplemental cylinder and plunger in con 
nection with the withdrawing-cylinder, said 
plunger acting as an adjustable backing for 
the tube under treatment, substantially as Set 
forth. 
4. In a tube-jointing machine, the combi 
nation of the bed-frame, operating-cylinders, 
draw-bars and cross-head, the intervening 
removable carrying-rolls in bearings attached 
to the bed-frame, substantially as Sct forth. 
5. In a tube-jointing machine of the chair 
acter indicated, the combination of the bed 
frame; oppositely-acting cylinders attached 
thereto; cross-heads attached to the plungers 
of the cylinders and moved upon the bed 
frame as a support; draw-bars connecting the 
cross-heads; and a central cross-head or die 
carrier adjustably attached to the draw-bars, 
substantially as set forth. 
6. In a tube-jointing machine, of the char 
acter indicated, the combination of the oppo 
site cylinders, bed-frame, draw-bars, and the 
cross-head or die-carrier adjustably attached 
to the draw-bars, and an annular die carried 
by said cross-head, substantially as Set forth. 
7. In a tube-jointing machine, of the char 
acter indicated, the combination of the bed 
frame, opposite cylinders, draw-bars, and the 
intermediate cross-head adapted to move upon 
the bed-frame, and provided with lateral 
wings provided with slots to receive the draw 
bars, and removable pins connecting the Salme 
with the cross-head at any desired points, and 
an annular die carried by said intermediate 
cross-head, substantially as Set forth. 
S. In a tube-jointing machine of the char 
acter indicated in combination with the mo 
tor-cylinders for operating the die, a supple 
mental cylinder and plunger located at the 
back of the motor-cylinder with a perforated 
partition between the two and a take-up plun 
ger operated by said supplemental cylinder 
against the end of the tube under treatment, 
to engage the same and accommodate any Val 
riations of length, substantially as set forth. 
9. In a tube-jointing machine, the combi 
nation of the bed-frame, the opposite operat 
ing and withdrawing cylinders, the cross 
heads and connections, and a pipe connecting 
the two cylinders, provided with two control 
ling-valves, and a supply connection enter 
E. between said valves, substantially as set 
Orth. 
10. In a tube-jointing machine of the char 
acter indicated, the cross-head or die-carrier 
75 
95 
CO 
Io5 
IO 
IIS 
I 25 
608,837 
3. 
constructed With an open vertical slot or my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
SOcket for the insertion of dies and with lat- witnesses. 
eral Wings for connection with the draw-bars, 
and With bearing-rolls for support and guid 
5 ance upon the bed-frame, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
WILLIAM A. McCALLUM. 
: 
Witnesses: 
L. M. HOSEA, 
JAMES L. FoLEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603438.txt	(No Model.) 
V. ZWISSLER. 
STAPEEDRIVING AND CLINCHING MACHINE, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 603,438. 
Patented May 3, 1898, 
 
 
IRAQElz 7 sea 
7 
  
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet, 2. 
W, ZWISSLER. 
STAPLE DRIVING AND CLINCHING MACHINE, 
No. 603,438, 
Patented May 3, 1898. 
 
N. SN . 
o 
 
Wit. In esses. 
 
74 arty. 
 
 
V, ZWISSLER. 
3 sheets-Sheet 3. 
STAPLE DRIVING AND CLIN CHING MACHINE, 
(No Model.) 
No. 603,438, 
Patented May 3, 1898, 
 
| 
2 sale 
eas 
  
 
VVitresses. 
742. 
24-ty 
Fig.5. ?: sus.gr 
 
ONITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
VALENTINE ZWISSLER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
SAMUEL J. YARGER, OF SAME PLACE. 
STAPLE DRIVING AND CLEN CHING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 603,438, dated May 3, 1898. 
Application filed September 10, 1897, Serial No. 651,174 (No model.) 
2O serted in the book, 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, WALENTINE ZWISSLER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city of Philadelphia, county of Philadelphia, 
5 and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Ma 
chines for Inserting and Clenching Metallic 
Staples, of which the following is a specifica 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
Io art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
This invention relates to that class of ma 
chines which are used for the binding together 
of books or pamphlets, and more particularly 
I5 to that class of such machines where a se 
ries of the staples to be forced through and 
clenched as a binding-staple for the book are 
contained in a suitable magazine and are au 
tomatically fed forward one by one and in 
This invention consists, in substance, of a 
suitable Supporting base and frame, a maga 
zine for holding the staples, means for auto 
matically feeding the same forward into po 
25 sition for insertion, an upwardly-moving ta 
ble for carrying the pamphlet to be secured 
together by the staples, means for forcing the 
staples through the book, means for clench 
ing the staples after being inserted in the 
3o same, and means for regulating the move 
ment of the table and the staple-clenching de 
vice, although it is not to be understood that 
the inventionis limited to a device necessarily 
comprising at once all of the devices or mech 
35 anisms before mentioned, for the invention 
consists in certain various combinations or 
arrangements of devices and parts and the 
construction of certain devices and parts, all 
substantially as will behereinafter more fully 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
side view of my improved staple inserting and 
clenching machine, partially in section, with 
the parts in the upward or operating posi 
45 tion, showing the position of the parts at the 
moment of the clenching of the staples. Fig. 
2 is a like view of said machine with the parts 
in the lower position ready to be operated. 
Fig. 3 is a view in perspective of the end of 
5o the driving-arm of the machine to which is 
4o described, set forth, and claimed. 
| secured the staple-driving plunger, and Fig. 
4 is a top plan view of the forward portion of 
Fig. 2 on the line acac thereof. Fig. 5 is a view 
in section of the top portion of Fig. 2 on the 
line y ly, looking to the right. Fig. 6 is a front 
View, partially insection, of the staple-clench 
ing mechanism before the staple is driven, 
taken on the line a. a. of Fig. 7; and Fig. 7 is 
a view of such clenching mechanism in cen 
tral vertical section on the line b b of Fig. 6. 
Fig. 8 is a front view, similar to that shown 
in Fig. 6, of the upper portion of such mech 
anism in the position it assumes when the 
ends of the staple are being driven inward; 
and Fig. 9 is a view, similar to Fig. 8, of the 
position assumed by such mechanism when 
the staple is being fully clenched or driven 
home to its ultimate position. 
Referring to the drawings, the reference 
letter A designates a suitable framework of 
any desired form, upon the top of which is a 
suitable bar B, preferably of the shape shown, 
composed of an upright standard 2 and an 
outwardly-extending upper bar 3. 
Pivoted to the bar B, preferably at the point 
marked 4, upon a suitable pivot-pin or shaft 
is the staple-carrying magazine-bar C, which 
is so mounted upon such pivot-pin that the 
outer end thereof will move freely up and 
down. The staple-carrying magazine-bar C 
is provided with a staple-carrying bar 6, which 
is located in the slot 7 of such bar C. The 
bar B at its upper part 3, at all except its end 
ortion, is in cross-section of substantially 
the form shown in Fig. 5, and at its extreme 
outer end is of the form shown in perspective 
in Fig. 3, it being at this portion composed 
of an upper bar 8 and a lower bar 9, extend 
ing downward at right angles to the bar 8. 
Secured at the lower end to the staple-car 
rying magazine-bar C, preferably at about the 
point shown in Figs. l and 2, is a screw 10, 
which passes up through a suitable hole pro 
vided therefor in the top portion 8 of the up 
per part 3 of the bar B, and upon the screw 
10 is screwed a suitable thumb-screw 11, by 
which the downward movement of the maga 
zine-bar C is limited or by which it may be 
locked in the extreme upward position to close 
the staple-magazine, such bar C being nor 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
603,438 
O 
25 
35 
45 
0. 
mally forced downward to the full length al 
lowed by the thumb - nut 11 by a suitable 
spring 12, located at the ends in sockets 12'. 
The staples 13 desired to be used in the ma 
chine are straddled or placed upon the staple 
bar 6 and are normally forced forward to the 
extreme end of such staple-bar by the staple 
feeding bar 14, which is provided with the 
upwardly-extending hook 15, to which is se 
cured a chain 16, passing over wheels 17 and 
1S, to the end of which chain 16 is secured a 
Weight 19, by the operation of which weight 
the staples are normally forced forward into 
working position, or such staple-feeding bar 
may be forced forward so as to feed the sta 
ples by a suitable spring or any other desired 
Firmly screwed upon the extreme outer free 
end of the magazine-bar C is the face-plate 
20, which is preferably in cross-section of the 
form shown in Fig. 4 and is secured to such 
magazine-bar C by suitable screws 21. This 
face-plate 20 is provided with a central slot 
22, which is of such width as to receive and 
hold therein by frictional contact the staples 
13 when they are pushed into the slot thereof 
one by one by the action of the staple-feeding 
bar 14. The end of the bar B is provided with 
a stud 23, which is adapted to move freely up 
and down in the slot 22, and to the outer end 
of this stud is secured by a screw 24 a staple 
driver or driving plunger or plate 25, the screw 
24 passing for that purpose into a hole 24'. 
Pivotally supported at any suitable point 
upon the frame, preferably upon the pivot 4, 
is a table-supporting bar ID, preferably of the 
curved form shown, which is provided at its 
Outer free end with a suitable table 26 for re 
ceiving the articles to be bound, which may 
be of the saddle form shown or of flat or any 
Other desired form. 
Carried by the bar D and located immedi 
ately beneath the staple feeding and driving 
mechanism heretofore described and the ta 
ble 26 is the staple - clenching mechanism. 
(Shown in detail in Figs. 6 to 9, inclusive.) 
Such staple-clenching mechanism consists, 
preferably, of a bar 27, a slide-plate 28, hav 
ing the slot 29, adapted to receive the pin 30, 
Secured in the table-supporting bar D, a top 
plate 31, having a staple-receiving slot 32, 
and the circular slideways 33, and two staple 
clenching plates 34, pivoted to the plate 2S at 
35, preferably of the shape shown and having 
the upwardly-extending point 36, and the bar 
27, provided at the bottom with a set-screw 37 
for regulating the force of the clenching move 
ment of the staple-clenching plates. The bar 
27 is preferably provided on one side with a 
flattened portion 34", registering with the slot 
Ol' opening 35' in the end of the bar ID, the 
purpose of which flattened portion and slot 
or opening is to permit of the escape down by 
said bar and out through said slot of waste or 
mutilated staples which may be acted upon 
by the clenching-plates. 
Pivotally secured to the frame below the 
table, preferably upon a suitable lug 38, by 
means of a pivot-pin 39, is a lever 40, adapted 
to receive the pivot-pin 41, and this lever 40 
has its rearward end normally pressed down 
Ward by a suitable spring 42, and has its po 
sition regulated by means of a suitable set 
screw 43. Pivoted upon the pivot 41 is a le 
ver 44, pivoted at the rear end, by means of a 
pivot-pin 45, to the connecting-rod 46, which 
rod 46 is Secured at its upper end to the table 
bearing bar D. The lever 44 is provided at 
its forward end and on its upper side with a 
slide-face, ending in an abrupt entrant hollow 
50, beyond which is a hammer-face 51, and 
secured to the table-bearing bar Dat the point 
shown is a pivot-pin 52, preferably provided 
with a suitable friction-wheel, mounted there 
on as shown in dotted lines in Figs. 1 and 2. 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
The parts being in the position shown in Fig. 
2, the operator places the book desired to be 
stapled upon the saddle-table 26, as shown at 
G in dotted lines, and presses downward with 
his foot upon the treadle 47, which draws down 
the connecting-rod 46, and thus forces upward 
the outer or hammer-faced end 51 of the lever 
44. The table 26 is gradually raised by this 
movement by the action of the roller and pin 
52 upon the slide-face 49 of such lever 44, and 
as it is gradually raised the book is caught 
and compressed between the outer end of the 
magazine-bar C and such table 26, and as the 
downward motion of the treadle 47, and con 
sequently the upward motion of the table 26, 
continues, one of the staples 13 being always 
in position in the slot 22, beneath the staple 
driving plunger or driver 25, and, as the up 
ward movement continues, the staple relmains 
stationary and is by the action of the driver or 
plunger 25, as the magazine-bar C continues 
its upward movement, driven through the 
book or pamphlet and is by the action of the 
plates 34, as they are by this upward move 
ment forced into the position shown in Fig. 8, 
driven inward in its points, as shown, and 
the moment that the pin 52 reaches the end 
of the slide-face 49 and drops into the entrant 
hollow 50 the force which is exerted upon 
the treadle 47 causes the hammer-face 51 of 
the lever 44 to deliver a hammer-like blow 
upon the set-screw 37, which forces the staple 
clenching plates, which are then in the posi 
tion shown in dotted lines in Fig. 8, forcibly 
upward, so as to clench such staples into the 
position shown in dotted lines in Fig. 9. In 
aslnuch, however, as the particular clenching 
mechanism shown herein is not broadly new 
and forms no part of this invention, it is not 
deemed necessary to more fully explain the 
mechanism thereof, as the same is well known 
in the art. 
It Will be seen by an examination of the 
drawings that the force exerted in the final 
clenching of the staple by the hammer-face 
51 of the lever 44 may be regulated by a 
proper Setting of the set-screw 37 and that 
the distance of the travel of the table is reg 
75 
95 
OD 
O 
II5 
I 25 
603,438 
s 
3 
o 
ulated by a proper manipulation of the set 
screw 43, by which the pivot 41, supported in 
the lever 40, is moved from front to rear of 
the frame. 
The principal object of my invention is to 
provide an easier and more efficient method 
of binding books or pamphlets by assisting 
in the feeding to the binding-table of the pa 
pers or pamphlets to be bound whether the 
table be of the saddle form shown in full 
lines or of the straight form shown in dotted 
lines in Fig. 2, which may be used with equal 
facility and effect, for it will be seen that 
When the operator places the pamphlet or 
book to be bound upon the table 26 the 
upWard movement of such table facilitates 
the smoothing and drawing into proper posi 
, tion of such book, or pamphlet and therefore 
also the insertion of the staples, and it is evi 
dent that this upward movement will there 
fore enable the operator with practice to bind 
a much larger number of books in a given 
time than with the stationary tables now in 
Se. 
The moving table, in combination with sta 
ple - clenching mechanism actuated by the 
continued movement of the mechanism which 
moves the table after the table has ceased to 
move, is, so far as I am aware, broadly new, 
and I do not intend to limit myself to the ex 
act form of construction shown or to any par 
ticular form of the whole or any of the parts 
of said device or to the particular manner of 
combining the same together to bring about 
the desired result, as it is evident that many 
modifications in the construction, combina 
tion, and arrangement of the several parts of 
my improved staple inserting and clenching 
machine may be made without departing from 
the scope of my invention. 
Having now particularly described my said 
invention, its construction and operation, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination with a staple-driving mechan 
ism, of an upwardly-moving table, mechan 
ism for raising the table, a staple-clenching 
mechanismlocated below the table, and means 
for actuating the staple-clenching mechan 
ism after the table has ceased its upward 
movement actuated by the continued move 
ment of the table-raising mechanism, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
2. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination with a moving or vibrating maga 
zine for holding the staples, of a stationary 
staple-driver or plunger, an upwardly moving 
or Vibrating table, mechanism for raising the 
table, and means for clenching the protrud 
ing ends of the staples after they are driven 
actuated by the continued movement of the 
table-raising mechanism, the driving of the 
staples being accomplished by the upward 
movement of the table and the clenching by 
positively - actuated clenching mechanism, 
substantially as shown and described. 
n 
3. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination with a magazine or means for 
holding the staples to be driven, of a staple 
driver or plunger, a moving or vibrating ta 
ble, mechanism for moving the table, and 
means for clenching the staples actuated by 
the continued movement of the table-mow 
ing mechanism, substantially as shown and 
described. 
4. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination with a magazine or means for 
holding the staples to be driven, of a staple 
driver or plunger, a moving or vibrating ta 
ble, mechanism for moving the table, and 
means for clenching the staples after being 
driven located below and carried by the ta 
ble and actuated by the continued movement 
of the table-raising mechanism, the driving 
being accomplished upon the upward move 
ment of the table, and the clenching by posi 
tive action of the clenching means or mech 
anism, substantially as shown and described. 
5. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination with a suitable supporting-frame 
having a bar B secured thereto, of a pivoted 
staple-carrying magazine-bar C, a pivoted bar 
D, carrying a table, and means carried by the 
bar D, for clenching the staples, substantially 
as shown and described. 
6. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination with a suitable supporting-frame, 
of a staple-carrying magazine-bar C and a 
pivoted bar ID carrying means for clenching 
the staples after being driven, the magazine 
bar C and the bar D. being pivoted upon the 
same point, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
7. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination with a suitable supporting-frame, 
of a bar B provided at the free end with a 
staple-driving plunger 25, a staple-carrying 
magazine-bar C pivoted to the bar B and pro 
vided with a slotted face-plate 20, means for 
normally forcing the free end of the maga 
zine-bar C away from the free end of the bar 
B, a bar D pivoted to the bar Band provided 
with clenching mechanism for clenching the 
staples after being driven, and means for 
moving the bar D so as to drive the staples 
by the forcing upward by the bar D of the 
bar C and for clenching the staples after they 
are driven, substantially as shown and de 
8. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a suitable supporting-frame, 
of a staple-carrying magazine-bar C pivoted 
thereto, and a screw 10 for limiting the down 
ward movement of the bar C, substantially 
as shown and described. 
9. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a bar B provided with a sta 
ple-driving plunger 25, of a staple-carrying 
magazine-bar C, a pivoted bar D, a table and 
a staple-clenching mechanism carried by the 
bar D, means for forcing the bar D upward 
so as to compress the book or pamphlet to be 
bound between the table and the end of the 
scribed. 
Y 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
I I5 
. 
I25 
 
4. 
603,438 
bar C, and for continuing the upward move 
ment of the table so as to force the free end 
of the bar Cupward and drive the staple, and 
means for clenching the staples when driven, 
substantially as shown and described. 
10. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a bar IB provided with a sta 
ple-driving plunger 25, of a pivoted bar D, 
a table and a Staple-clenching limechanism car 
ried by the bar D, a pin 52 in the bar D, a le 
ver 44 having the slide-face 49, the entrant 
hollow 50, and hammer-face 51, and means 
for actuating the lever 44, substantially as 
shown and described and for the purposes set 
forth. 
11. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a bar B having a staple-driv 
ing plunger 25, of a pivoted staple-carrying 
magazine or bar C, a pivoted bar ID, a table 
and a staple-clenching mechanism carried by 
the bar D, an adjustable ever 40 and a lever 
44 pivoted to the lever 40, substantially as 
shown and described and for the purposes set 
forth. 
12. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a bar IB provided with a sta 
ple-driving plunger 25, a pivoted bar D, a 
table and a staple-clenching mechanism car 
ried by the bar D, means for clenching the 
staples after being driven, and means for reg 
O 
25 
ulating the point of the upward movement of 
the table at which the staples are clenched, 
substantially as shown and described and for 
the purposes set forth. 
13. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination with a stationary staple-driving 
plunger, of a moving Staple-carrying maga 
Zine-bar, a moving table and staple-clenching 
mechanism, and means for locking the mov 
ing staple-carrying magazine-bar and staple 
driving plunger in the extreme clenching po 
sition so as to prevent accidental feeding of 
the staples, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
14. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a stationary driving-plun 
ger, of a moving staple-carrying device or 
magazine, a bar ID, a bar 27 reciprocating in 
the bar D and provided with a flattened por 
tion 34 registering with a slot or opening 35' 
in the end of the bar D, substantially as 
shown and described and for the purposes set 
forth. 
Signed in the city and county of New York, 
in the State of New York, this 31st day of 
July, A. D. 1897. 
WALENTINE ZWISSLER. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK II. MASSEY, 
C. L. DAVIS. 
35 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603538.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 603,538. 
 
J. PETTIBONE 
SWORD SLINGING HOOK, 
Patented May 3, 1898. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES PETTIBONE, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
SWORD - SLING NG HOOK. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 603,588, dated May 3, 1898. 
Application filed October 11, 1897. Serial No. 654,804 (No model.) 
- 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES PETTIBONE, re 
siding at Cincinnati, in the county of Hamil 
ton and State of Ohio, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Sword-Sling 
ing Hooks, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
sword-fastening device which can be readily 
attached to and detached from the belt, hav 
ing a safety-guard for securely holding it in 
position. 
The features of my invention are more fully 
set forthin the description of the accompany 
ing drawings, making a part of this specifica 
tion, in which- 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my device, 
showing the scabbard-supporting straps at 
tached, the device being suspended in posi 
tion from the belt. Fig. 2 is a perspective 
view of my fastening device. Fig. 3 is a rear 
elevation of the same. 
My fastening device consists of an upper 
and a lower hook member A and B, the lower 
member B being for the purpose of receiving 
the upper ring of the sword-scabbard, the up 
per hook member being for the purpose of 
engaging With a loop on the Sword-belt. 
Crepresents a slot in the upper member for 
receiving the scabbard-suspending strap. 
D represents the safety-guard, which rests 
in a recesse, formed in the shank of the upper 
hook member, the lower hook member being 
preferably made integral with this safety 
guard. 
a represents the pivot; b, ears in which said 
pivot journals; and D represents the guard, 
which is bent outward to rest against the up 
per hook member A. 
E represents a spring for holding the guard 
in contact with the hook. In the preferred 
form of construction this spring is coiled 
around the pivot a, one end of the spring en 
gaging the guard member D and the other 
end engaging the shank of the upper hook A. 
It Will readily be seen that the hook A is 
Snapped on the belt, guard D yielding to al 
low the hook to pass over the ring and clos 
ing to guard the same. In order to unhook 
the same, the lower hook B is rocked on its 
pivot, depressing the guard D in the recesse 
sufficiently to allow the disengagement of the 
hook. This guard effectually prevents the 
hook from becomin g accidentally disengaged. 
from the belt and is especially useful in the 
cavalry service, as it is adapted to be disen 
gaged from the belt and suspended from a 
ring on the saddle, as well as from the sword 
belt. Also the sword can be readily attached 
and detached without removing the belt. 
Having described my invention, I claim 
1. A sword-fastening device, consisting of 
an upper hook member A, provided with a 
central recesse, a lower hook member B, piv 
oted to the said upper member and having a 
guard extension D, which normally lies upon 
the under side of the hook portion of the up 
per member, said extension of the lower hook 
playing in the recess in the upper hook mem 
ber, substantially as described. 
2. A sword-fastening device, consisting of 
an upper hook member A, provided With a 
central recesse, and a strap-opening C, below 
said recess, a lower hook member B, pivoted 
to the said upper member and having an ex 
tension which lies in the recesse, in the up 
per member, and a guard D, at the end of 
said extension, which normally presses upon 
the under side of the hooked portion of the 
upper member. 
3. A sword-fastening device consisting of 
the upper and lower hook members A, B, piv 
oted together by means of a pin Supported 
upon the upper hook member, said lower hook 
member having an extension beyond the 
pivot-point lying within a recess in the up 
per hook member, and a spring connecting 
said upper and lower hook members and 
adapted to press the guard against the upper 
hook member, Substantially as Specified. 
4. A sword-fastening device consisting of 
the upper hook member. A provided with a 
recesse, a lower hook member B centrally 
pivoted to said upper member, the upper ex 
tension D of the lower hook member lying 
within said recess and provided with a pres 
sure device adapted to strain the guard mem 
ber D against the upper hook member, sub 
stantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
w 
JAMES PETTIBONE. 
Witnesses: 
W. R. WooD, 
R. M. BICKERSHOFF, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603638.txt	(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet l. 
J. HAWTHORN & J. P. LIDDELL, 
APPARATUS FOR WASHING PRINTERS BLANKETS, 
No. 603,638, 
Patented May 10, 1898. 
- 2. 2. 
W T N ESSES 
(. 42 (3642 . 
 
4. vs/ae/ 2-le 
N.VENTORS, 
Ay 7eir Attorn 
35, 
- 
(No Model.) 
No. 603,638, 
Patented May 10, 1898. 
J. HAWTHORN & J. P. LIDDELL 
APPARATUS FOR WASHING PRINTERS BLANKETs, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
rany 
24 
WITNESSES. 
(7%ue . . . 
(8.42 (26426. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HAWTHORN AND JOHN PEMBERTON LIDDELL, OF NEWTOWN, NEW 
- 
MILLS, ENGLAND. 
APPARATUS FOR WASHING PRINTERS BLANKETS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 603,638, dated May 10, 1898. 
Application filed July 30, 1896, Serial No. 601,119, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that we, JOHN HAWTHORN 
and JOHN PEMBERTON LIDDELL, subjects of 
the Queen of Great Britain, residing at New 
town, NewMills, near Stockport, in the county 
of Chester, England, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Apparatus 
for Washing and Cleansing Calico-Printers 
Blanketing, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
Our said invention relates to improvements 
in apparatus for Washing and cleansing cal 
ico-printers' blanketing. 
The invention refers to that class of appa 
ratus in which one side only of the blanket 
ing is washed, so as to save the blanketing 
from unnecessary saturation, and thus effect 
economy in drying. 
According to our invention that side of the 
blanketing which is subjected to the Washing 
operation is liberally-treated with water by 
the aid of SWilling-brushes or their equiva 
lents, while at the same time by our improved 
arrangements less water is used or wasted 
than formerly, and the supply is so arranged 
that the freshly-introduced water meets the 
blanketing as it leaves the apparatus, while 
the foul Water encounters the blanketing as 
it enters the machine. Thus the water is 
used to the best advantage. 
Our invention will be more easily under 
stood by a reference to the annexed two sheets 
of drawings, which illustrate our invention. 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
of our improved apparatus fashioned with 
an inclined trough or trough-bottom. Fig. 
2 is a similar view with a horizontal trough. 
In carrying our invention into effect in the 
manner shown by Fig. 1. We provide an in 
clined oblong trough or casing a to contain 
or support the brushes b b' b and backing 
rollers c. In the said inclined casing we 
mount two, three, or any greater number of 
backing-rollers c c' c and also guiding or di 
verting rollers d, around which the blanket 
ing e is carried as it passes through the ma-. 
chine. These backing and carrying rollers 
c c' clie successively at about the same rela 
tive angle as the floor of the apparatus. 
Above the last backing-roller c we mount a 
drawing-cylinder f, around which the blan 
keting is led as it leaves the machine. The 
other backing and guiding rollers are not 
driven, but this last drawing-cylinder f is 
positively driven, so as to draw the blanket 
inge through the machine, the strain on the 
blanketing keeping it close against the back 
ing-rollers c c' c and so presenting it under 
favorable conditions to the revolving scrub 
bing and swilling brushes b b' b. 
From the drawing-cylinder the blanketing 
is led over guide-rollers g g to the ordinary 
drying-cylinders, which do not appear in the 
drawings. We place the first revolving swill 
ing and scrubbing brush b beneath the first 
backing-roller c, and we also place the SWill 
ing and scrubbing brushes b'b' between the 
other two backing-rollers c' c, the said swill 
ing-brushes being so situated as to act simul 
taneously at both sides upon the blanketing 
as it is stretched around the rollers. Thus 
each brush after the first practically performs 
the work of two. A final cleansing and mois 
ture-removing brush h revolves in contact 
with the blanketing as it passes around the 
last backing-roller c of the series, this latter 
brushh revolving at a considerably-increased 
speed as compared with the other brushes. 
As to the distribution of the water-supply We 
preferably arrange spurt-pipes 
between 
the first and second and the third backing 
rollers. The water from the first spurt-pipei 
is dashed on the blanketing e as it passes 
around the first roller c and removes the bulk 
of the color and matter which has been loos 
ened and already partly removed by the swill 
ing and scrubbing brushes b b'. 
The Water 
so dashed on the blanketing falls into the 
bottom of the casing and is collected in a 
trough k', within which the intermediate 
swilling and scrubbing brushb' works. This 
swilling-brush b'makes lavish use of the Wa 
ter in the trough k, raising it and dashing it 
against the blanketing e, with which it is in 
contact. The water overflowing, from this 
latter trough k' enters a lower trough k, in 
90 
95 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
603,638 
75 
trough beneath it in turn overflows and allows 
which the first swilling and scrubbing brush 
b revolves, also applying the water to the 
the foul water to run to Waste. There may be 
one, two, or any greater number of SWilling 
blanketing. From this last trough the water 
and scrubbing brushes with corresponding 
finally overflows and escapes by an outlet l. 
water-troughs, but we consider two sufficient. 
In addition to the two swilling-troughsk 
The water from the spurt-pipes keeps the 
and c'. We might have a third trough k be 
troughs full and plays upon the blanketing 
neath the brushb, as indicated in dotted lines 
as it passes around the backing-rollers. The 
in the drawings; but in practice we prefer to 
spurt-pipei'gives a finals will with clear Water 
dispense with this additional trough. The 
said troughs, compartments, or pools lic lic' are 
to the blanketing, and then follows the action 
conveniently formed by partitions o, extend 
of the brushb beneath, and lastly that of the 
more rapidly revolving and final moisture 
ing across the casing and secured by angle 
removing brush, which wipes the surface 
irons o' but they may be formed in any other 
of the blanketing free of moisture before it 
Suitable manner. 
The progress of the blanketing through the 
passes around the drawing-roller and then 
away from the apparatus. We might employ 
machine is as follows: Entering from the 
only one spurt-pipe-viz., the spurt-pipe - 
printing-machine in the direction of the ar 
row it passes around the first backing-roller 
in which case the whole apparatus would be 
served from this single supply, and by ar 
c. Here it encounters the first swilling and 
scrubbing brush b, which dips into the trough 
ranging the backing-rollers, as described, at 
successively lower angles and providing the 
le, and which removes the great bulk of the 
aforesaid overflow-compartments and SWill 
dirt and color from the surface of the blanket 
ing and scrubbing brushes the Water is used 
ing. In practice we find that this brush re 
again and again, the fouler water meeting the 
moves and projects the bulk of the dirt on 
fouler portions of the blanketing, as hereinbe 
the blanket against the lower end of the cas 
ing, thus avoiding excessive fouling of the 
fore described. We might, however, as afore 
said, multiply both spurt-pipes and cleans 
Water in the trough le. The blanketing in 
ing-brushes. 
its further progress around the same backing 
roller c is next acted upon by the one side of 
In Fig. 2 the trough C, instead of being ar 
the intermediate revolvings willing and scrub 
ranged at an incline, as in Fig. 1, is set hori 
Zontally. In other respects the apparatus is 
bing brush b', the latter brush dipping into 
the trough k'above the first trough, and which 
almost identical with that shown in Fig. 1. 
receives the water falling from the spurt-pipe 
The water from the spurt-pipes plays upon 
'i and also the Water running from the upper 
the blanketinge as it passes around the back 
ing-rollers c' and falls into the trough le. 
end of the machine. The said swilling and 
Scrubbing brush b' operates on the blanket 
The swilling and scrubbing brushb dips into 
ing not only as it ascends to the diverting or 
the water in the trough lc and swills and 
guiding cylinderd, but also as it descends and 
scrubs the blanketing. From the trough 
passes around the succeeding backing-roller 
the water overflows over the partition o into 
c', the brush acting simultaneously against 
the trough k', into which the swilling and 
both backing-rollers. In the same manner 
scrubbing brush b' dips. This brush swills 
the blanketing in its continued progress 
and scrubs the blanketinge against both the 
through the apparatus is next subjected to 
backing-rollers c' and c. From the troughlc' 
the action of the brush b, which operates on 
the water flows over the next partition o into 
the blanketing against both the rollers c' and 
the trough k, in which the brush b revolves, 
c'. The spurt-pipe also douches the blan 
SWilling and scrubbing the blanketing as it 
keting above the brush b. The blanketing at 
passes around the first backing-roller c. The 
this point being almost completely cleansed, 
Water then overflows into the end of the cas 
the douche from the spurt-pipe 'gives a final 
ing and is led away through the outlet l. As 
SWill to the surface of the blanketing. Lastly 
shown in the drawings, the partitions o are 
the blanketing as it proceeds around the roller 
made successively lower toward the end at 
c is subjected to the rapidly-revolving mois 
which the blanketing enters, so as to let the 
ture-removing brush h, which removes all sur 
Water overflow from trough to trough, and to 
compensate for the successive lowering of the 
plus moisture from the face of the blanket 
ing and renders it much more easily and 
water-levels in the compartments or poolsk, 
quickly dried by the drying-cylinders. 
k', and k we successively increase the diame 
The swilling and scrubbing brushes b b' b? 
ter of the swilling and scrubbing brushes b, 
b', and b. We might also, to preserve the same 
are revolved at a speed sufficient to exercise 
a scrubbing and swilling effect upon the 
surface speed in all, drive the said swilling 
blanketing, but not so fast as to throw the 
and scrubbing brushes at different speeds, cor 
water out of the troughs into which they dip. 
responding to their diameters. In other re 
The Water is lifted from the trough by the 
Spects the construction and operation of the 
revolving brushes and applied plentifully to 
apparatus are precisely as indicated in Fig.1. 
the blanketing, the same water being used 
What we claim as our invention is 
again and again, so that We use the Water 
The improved apparatus for Washing cal 
ico-printers' blanketing consisting of the in 
thoroughly and none is Wasted. As the wa 
ter from the trough above overflows into the clined casing a, furnished with overflow com 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I25 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
603,638 
3 
In witness whereof we have hereunto set 
partments or pools, swilling and scrubbing . 
brushes dipping into the said compartments, our hands in presence of two witnesses. 
backing and guiding rollers to carry the 
blanketing, spurt-pipes to supply water or 
5 other cleaising fluid, and a moisture-remov- 
ing brush, all arranged combined and acting 
substantially as hereinbefore set forth and as 
illustrated. 
JOHN HAWTHORN. 
JOHN PEMBERTON LIDDELL. 
JoSHUA ENTWISLE, 
RICHARD IBBERSON. 
Witnesses: 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603738.txt	(N0 MI0del.) 
- 
~ 
IM, IRRI)(IRAWIH, 
BAGATEIIE B0ARD, - 
INo, 603,738, 
Patented May 10, 1898. 
? 
Cholic 
 
UNITED STATES IPATENT OFFICE. 
MIONTAGUIE IREDGIRAVE, OF JEIRSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY. 
BAGATELLE-BoARD. 
SPECIEICATIONI forming part of ILetters Patent No. 603,738, datedi May 10, 1898. 
Appicationfled Rovember 12,1897, 8erial No, 658270, (Romodal) 
55 
10 M z07/070, i 7n 20722e772; 
IBeitilknown thatI, MONTAGUEIREDGRAVE, 
a Citizen of the United States, residingin Jer 
Sey City, in the county of Hudson and State 
Of New Jersey, have invented a, certain inew 
and ISeful Improvementin IParlor IBagatelle 
IB0ards, 0f Which the following is a specifica 
tion, 1eference being had to the accompany- || . 
ing draWings, Which form part of the same. 
In my ILetters Patent No. 115,357, granted 
May 30, 1871, the ball is ditriven up the alley 
bya Spring-inIpelled piston, thelknob of Which 
eXtelds thTOIgh the mearer end of the board | 
in Ordel that it may be pulled out, by one 
hand of the player while his other hand 
Steadies the board, The knobithusarranged 
i8 in 80me dainger 0f being caught bypassing 
garmelts, 1may easily be broken by Childrem 
through Carelessiness or in theirplay, and will 
impede IDackingforstorage ortransportation. 
'Ilhe Object of this invention is tio enable 
the Iplayer to Operate the propelling devide 
With the Same hand thatholds the b0ard and 
to dio away With the other objections above 
To this end my invention Consists, chiefty, 
in the combination of a bagatele-board hay-. 
ingalongituldinally-slotted platesecturedover 
the Inearet part of the alley With a spring 
impelled Ipistion operating Wholy in the said 
alley and provided With a Iraised Iknob, the 
Stem Of Which is guided in the said slot, the 
ends of the latter limiting its movement, so 
that the kilob Will always be in convenient 
I00Sition for Operation by pressure of the 
IDlayer's thImb), While the fingers of the Same 
hand hold the I0IOXimate Corner of the board. 
In the acCompalying draWings, IFigure 1 
Ireptesents a perspective View of a bagatelle 
boaltd embodying Imy invention. Fig. 2 Irep 
IreSents a detail Wiew of the propelling device 
and a, Ipart of the Iproximatie alleyand slotted 
Iplate. IRig. 3 Ireptesents a, Cross-section on 
the line 22 of IFig. 2. 
A designates the b0Cly of abagatelle-b0ard, 
prowided, With pins (1, Cups 0, and bells 0%, 
aTrainged in any ConVenient Way. Ithasalso 
a IraiSed Itim A" along its edges and a, Curved 
bulfer-platie APat the upper end. A straight 
Wall), Iparallel t0the Irightside oredge of the 
boad, forms the usual alley IB, which is cov 
ered at the lower right-hand corner of the 
board and for some distance alongits length 
by a plate C. 
In this Iplate a, longitudinal 
slot C"is formed, begininingatisomelittle dis 
tance from the corner and ending ata point 
1not beyond convenient Ireach by the thImb 
of the Samehand thatholds and Steadies the 
said Corner of the board. 
ID designates a, Solid Ipistion, preferably of 
Wrood, which isguided bythe Walls ofthe Said 
alley and impelled up the latter by a spring 
IE, arrainged in the Said alley and Iresting at 
its lower end against the Irear or loWer Ipart) 
of Irim A', Which is everyWhere Continuous 
and imperforate. IhiSpistonislanipulated 
by means of a knob II", the stem /of Which 
tises through the slot C", the ends of Which 
limit the longitudinal lovement of the Said 
pistion in either direction, That part of the 
plate Cisbent downward, formingan oblong 
depression C, allowingthe saidknobitio move 
backward and forward therein, the top of the 
said knobbeingfush with the surface of the 
remainder of the Iplate. "This Construction 
leaves absolutely Ino Ipart projecting beyond 
or above the s0ulare Irim A', Sothata Consign 
Iment of these boards Imaybe Ipacked On each 
other and against the sides and ends of each 
other with as little impediment Or inCon 
venience asa mass of brickS. Ilhelknob Can 
mot possibly be caught by any garment and 
is guarded by its Iposition against fracture OP 
any injury. A single hand Suffices to hold 
the board and play the game, Which is thus 
Imade practicabletio One-armedIperS0mS,While 
those who are mot Imaimed haVe the UISe of 
the other hand for other purposes." 
I am a Ware that Spring-lockS haWe Oftel 
been made with a, knob extending froll the 
boltabove a slotted plate Which guides and 
limits the movement of the stem of the Said 
knob, and that such a Iplate has S0metines 
been depressed in the meighb01h000l Of the 
slot and Ikmob. These devices have 10thing 
to do with bagatelles, ate Inot ImeanS Of im 
pulsion, and form Ino Ipart of any kind Of a 
board or other article eSpecially designed fol 
packingsguarely and evenlyt0gether. 1 do 
mot Glaim anysuch l0ck 10ranyarticle, Ipart, 
or feature whatever Which does Inot lbelong 
to a bagatelle-board and is Inot adapted t0 
further the object oflkeepingalthe elements 
andlattachments of the same Withinthe bor 
- 
75 
9? 
95 
25 
Stated. 
IC) 
2C)  
3? 
35 
4? 
45 
5? 
 
? 
. 
603,738 
der of the lboard and below or eVen With the 
surface of its Irim. The ball is shot up the 
alley by draWingback the knoband Ipistion to 
compress the Spring and then removing the 
thumb from the knob toletits resiliency act). 
Having thus described myinvention, What 
IGlaimasneW, and desire to Secureby Letters 
IPatent, is- 
In Combination With the bagatelle-board, 
A, having the Wall, (), parallel With one side 
So as to leave an alley, IB, betWeen them, a, 
Iplate, C, Coveringthe IrearorloWer end of the 
Said alley at the lower 1tight-hand Corner of 
theboardiand prowided Wilhadepressedipart, || 
C", having a longitudinal slot, C", a plunger, 
ID, arranged in the Said alley under the said 
-- 
IC) 
plate and a spring behind the Said Iplunger, 
the said plunger beingprovided with alknob 
which Slides in the said depressed Ipart of the 
plate, thetop ofthe saidknobbeingfiush With 
the higher part of the plate and Dractically 
with the Irim, that there may be nopart ap 
preciably above or in any Wayoutside of the 
Said Irim tointerfere With packing the boards 
together, Substantially as Set forth. 
In testimomy Whereof I afix mysigmature 
in presence of two Witnesses. 
MIONTAGIUJIE IRRIDGIRAVIE. 
Witimesses: 
FREDERICK W. IBIETZ, 
WILLIAIMI C. WAILILACE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603838.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 603,838. 
G. & J. M. DAVIS. 
VEHICLE WRENCH, 
Patented May 10, 1898. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GRAN VILLE DAVIS, OF NORTH SALEM, INDIANA, AND JAMES M. DAVIS, OF 
HENRY, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNORS OF ONE-THIRD TO DAVID D. THOMSON, 
OF NORTH SALEM, INDIANA. 
WEHICLE - WREN CH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,838, dated May 10, 1898. 
Application filed October 11, 1897, Serial No. 654,769, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, GRAN VILLE DAVIS, 
residing at North Salem, in the county of 
Hendricks and State of Indiana, and JAMES 
5 M. DAVIS, residing at Henry, in the county 
of Marshall and State of Illinois, citizens of 
the United States, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Vehicle 
Wrenches; and we do declare the following 
Io to be a full, clear, and exact description of 
the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to the 
I5 figures of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in 
vehicle-wrenches of the class that are adapted 
to simultaneously clamp the axle-nut and 
2d vehicle-wheel and take off or put on said axle 
nut by rotating the wheel. 
The objects of our invention are, first, to 
provide a wrench of that class that will be 
simple in construction; second, that can be 
25 quickly adjusted to fit nuts of different sizes; 
third, that has an elastic arm which holds the 
jaws in constant contact with the nut, and, 
fourth, that has a means for adjusting the 
jaws to clamp a nut without the necessity of 
With these objects in view our invention 
consists in the construction and combination 
of parts shown in the accompanying draw 
ings and described in the following specifica 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion, the dotted lines indicating the adjust 
ment of the jaws. Fig. 2 is a top plan view. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view taken on the line ca: 
4o of Fig. 2, the securing-hooks being broken 
away. Fig. 4 is an end view of the spring 
arm hook, and Fig. 5 shows the device as ap 
plied to a vehicle-wheel. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 is a jaw-base 
45 having a hinge-lug 2, an extending angular 
jaw 3, and having a spring-arm 4 secured 
thereto by rivets 5. Opposite the jaw 3 is a 
projecting portion 6, having a threaded open 
ing therein to receive the thumb-screw 7. A 
5o jaw-support 8, having hinge-lugs 9 and a pro 
3o clamping the wheel. 
35 tion. 
- 
- 
. 
jecting portion 18, is pivotally attached to 
the hinge-lug 2 by a pin or bolt 10. An ad 
justable arm 11, having an angular jaw 12 
and carrying a pivotally-secured hook 13 at 
its outer end, is slidably secured upon the 55 
jaw-support 8 by means of a thumb-screw 14, 
passing through a slot 15 in the adjustable 
arm 11 and entering threaded openings 16 in 
the jaw - support 8. The spring-arm 4 is 
preferably formed of flat spring metal, with 6o 
the integral hook 17 at its outer end and at 
right angles thereto. 
In operation the jaws 3 and 12 are adjusted 
to fit the vehicle-nut by means of the thumb 
screw 14 and slot 15. Said jaws are placed 65 
on the nut and the hook 13 hooked over a 
The spring-arm 4 is 
spoke of the wheel 19. 
then depressed until the hook 17 on the end 
thereof also engages a spoke, When the ten 
sion of the spring-arm serves to hold itse- 7o 
curely in position on the wheel and nut. By 
rotating the wheel the nut will be loosened 
or tightened, as the case may be, inasmuch 
as it is forced to turn with the wheel. Should 
it be desired to clamp a nut without using 75 
the hooks 13 and 17, the jaws 3 and 12 are 
adjusted upon the nut and the screw 7 tight 
ened until its end, pressing against the inner 
face of the projecting portion 18, will clamp 
the jaws upon the nut. - The adjustment of 8o 
the jaws is sufficient to fit the wrench to any 
vehicle-nut of the class of vehicles for which 
it is intended. As seen in Fig. 5, the arms 4 
and 11 are on an angle when the wrench is 
in use with the hooks 13 and 17 secured upon 85 
the spokes of the wheel. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States, is 
consisting of the jaw-base 1, having the lug 
2, the extended portion 6, carrying the thumb 
screw 7, and the jaw 3, and having a spring 
arm 4, fixedly secured thereto, said spring 
arm terminating in a right-angled hook 17, a 95 
jaw-support 8, having lugs 9, and a projection 
18, an adjustable arm 11, slidingly secured to 
said support 8, by means of a thumb-nut 14, 
passing through a slot 15, said arm having the 
jaw 12, at one end and the pivotally-secured Ioo 
1. A vehicle-wrench of the class described, go 
 
2 
608,838 
IO 
25 
hook 13 at the other end, all substantially as 
set forth. 
2. A vehicle-wrench composed of two oppo 
sitely-disposed members, pivotally hinged to 
gether, each of said members provided with a 
nut-engaging jaw upon one side, one of said 
members provided with a spring-arm termi 
nating in a right-angled hook adapted to en 
gage a vehicle-spoke, and the other member 
Composed of two portions, the jaw portion be 
ing slidably adjustable upon the hinged por 
tion and adapted to be regulated by means of 
a thumb-screw working in a slot in said mem 
ber, said member terminating in a pivotally 
mounted hook-engaging spoke, all as shown 
and described. 
3. In a vehicle - Wrench of the class de 
Scribed, the combination with the member 1, 
having the jaw 3, and the extended portion 6, 
carrying the thumb-screw 7, and the spring 
arm 4, pivotally secured to the member 1, and 
terminating in a flat hook 17, integral with 
and at right angles to said arm 4, of the jaw 
support 8, pivotally connected with the base 
1, and having an extended face 18, adapted 
to engage the thumb-screw 7, the sliding arm 
11, adjustably secured upon the jaw-support 
8, by means of the thumb-screw 14, said arm 
having the jaw 12, upon its inner end and the 
pivotally-secured hook 13, upon its outer end, 
all substantially as shown and described. 
4. The combination in a vehicle-wrench of 
the class described, of an adjustable sliding 
arm ll, having a spoke - engaging hook 13, 
pivotally secured at its outer end and a nut 
engaging jaw integral with its inner end, and 
the jaw-support 8, having hinged lugs 9, and 
threaded openings 16, with the jaw-base 1, 
having the nut-engaging jaw 3, and an ex 
tended portion 6, carrying a thumb-screw 7, 
and having a spring-arm 4, terminating in a 
hook 17, fixedly secured thereto, as shown and 
described. 
5. In combination in a vehicle-wrench of the 
class described, the jaw-base 1, having the 
lug 2, the extended portion 6, carrying the 
thumb-screw 7, and the jaw 3, the spring 
arm 4, fixedly secured thereto, said spring 
arm terminating in a hook 17, disposed at 
right angles to said arm, a jaw-support S, hav 
ing a screw-engaging depending portion 18, 
and provided with openings 16, to receive the 
said thumb-screw 14, the adjustable arm 11, 
having the slot 15, and the jaw 12, the pivot 
ally-mounted hook secured to the end of the 
arm 11, the thumb-screw 14, securing said 
arm upon the support 8, the jaw-base 1, be 
ing pivotally connected by means of the bolt 
10, passing through the lugs 2, and 9, all as 
set forth. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
GRAN WILLE DAVIS. 
JAMES MI. DAVIS. 
Witnesses: 
LUCY NATHAN, 
CAREY S. ERYE. 
35 
40 
45 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US603938.txt	(No Model.) 
. 
W. J. BROCK. 
PORTABLE FENCE, 
No. 603,938. 
Patented May 10, 1898. 
--- 
| 
--m- 
e 
ta, 
6. 
O 
is 22 
www. 
O 
sly 
-Zai''' 
4. 
42. 
' 
O 
es 
s 
m 
4. 
46 
 
t 
2 
 
Wezcza Z2-z, 
42, 
22-y 4. 
rz.-- 
% f2 a-- 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIS J. BROCK, OF TAMAHA, INDIAN TERRITORY. 
PORTABLE FENCE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 603,938, dated May 10, 1898. 
Application filed August 25, 1897. Serial No. 649,494, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIS J. BROCK, of 
Tamaha, Choctaw Nation, Indian Territory, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Portable Fences; and Idohere 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My present invention relates to an improve 
ment in fences, and has for its object the pro 
duction of a portable fence consistingentirely 
of metal and designed to be constructed at 
Small expense and in a manner to facilitate 
its transportation and its erection in a short 
Space of time. 
To the accomplishment of these and other 
objects subordinate thereto my invention con 
sistS in forming the fence-panels from a pair 
of sheet-metal stringers serrated or toothed 
along their opposite edges and provided upon 
their opposite ends with post-sockets, the 
stringers being connected by vertical stays 
connected in turn by longitudinally-extend 
ing panel-wires Secured to the vertical stays 
by clips cut from the metal of which the stays 
are formed. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 illustrates 
two panels of my fence arranged as in use. Fig. 
2 is a view, on an enlarged scale, of one of the 
vertical stays, showing the manner of secur 
ing the wires thereto. Fig. 3 is a view simi 
lar to that of Fig. 2, but taken from the op 
posite side. 
Referring to the numerals on the drawings, 
1 indicates the fence-panel, composed of top 
and bottom stringers 2 and 3, provided with 
Serrated or toothed edges 4 and having ter 
minal post-sockets 5, designed to receive the 
fence-post 6, of any suitable construction, but 
preferably formed from metallic bars having 
pointed lower ends 7 and loops or rings 6 at 
their upper ends, as illustrated. 
8 and 9 indicate vertical stays, likewise 
preferably formed of sheet metal and located 
adjacent to the ends of the stringers and be 
ing secured thereto, as by rivets or the like, 
and 10 indicates an intermediate stay simi 
larly constructed and secured to the stringers. 
Said stays have their lower ends bent at right 
angles to constitute Supporting-fanges, the 
- 
flanges of adjacent stays extending upon op 
posite sides of the fence to prevent its tilting. 
11:11 indicate Wire-retaining clips cut from 
the metal stays and bent back sufficiently to 
permit the panel-wires 12 to pass between 
them and the stays and then bent over the 
Wire and down upon the stays on the side op 
posite the Wire. The clips 11 are arranged in 
Vertical series upon the stays, as illustrated, 
and the panel-wire is secured at one extremity 
to the uppermost clip on one of the end stays 
and is carried longitudinally across the panel 
through the upper clip on the intermediate 
stay through the corresponding clip on the 
stay located on the opposite end of the panel 
and is then carried down and is returned 
across the panel, being secured by the next 
lowerline of clips, and thence back in a simi 
lar manner until the desired number of strands 
have been provided. 
It will be observed that any number of 
panels constructed as described may be pro 
vided and that they may be caused to assume 
any proper relative position; also, that the 
ost-sockets upon the stringers of the several 
panels may be caused to a line in order to per 
mit a single post to secure the contiguous ends 
of the two sections, or that various other modi 
fications might be resorted to without depart 
ing from the spirit of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A fence-panel composed of flat metal 
stringers provided at their ends with post 
sockets, stays Secured to said stringers to hold 
them in fixed relative position, and panel 
wires secured to the stays, substantially as 
shown and described. 
2. In a fence-panel, the combination with 
a pair of stringers, provided with serrated 
edges and with terminal post-sockets, of ver 
tical stays connecting the stringers, clips upon 
the stays, and panel-wires secured to the 
clips, substantially as described. 
3. In a fence-panel, the combination with 
a pair of stringers having Serrated edges and 
provided with terminal post-sockets, of ver 
tical stays secured to the stringers and hav 
ing their lower ends bent at right angles, 
clips cut from the stays and panel-wiresse 
cured to said clips, substantially as described. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
70 
75 
95 
Co 
 
& 
603,938 
4. A fence-panel consisting of flat metal 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
stringers, vertical stays secured thereto to specification in the presence of two subscrib 
hold them in relative position, and panel-wires ing witnesses. 
secured to said stays, the stays having their 
Witnesses: 
5 lower ends bent at right angles and the bent 
portions of adjacent stays extending laterally 
in opposite directions. 
WILLIS J. BROCK. 
J. C. HOPKINS, 
L. S. CARDWELL. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604038.txt	(No Model.) 
- A. N. GILBERT, 
ROT ARY ENGINE 
No. 604,038, 
Patented May 17, 1898. 
As  
7/s: 
 
st GSECEEa 
3s SEESSES 
2S,37. SS 
f(\s is (Y 
 
 
 
SSN-2 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
2 S&sd 2S 
lz726.232.2% % /ZZ 
a 46.4// 
A-A-4 S------, -ss- N 
SNAN 
%2 
x2 
32SR 
/n, 
7 
2 
 
  
A 7,32& 
65EgE-FORS 
2.. ZA AEY, a 
a 
A? 
a 
Z Zia a 42 
2. 2 
d'd 6.7 
2. e/ f 
GSS 
an 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
1. 
in 
most 
1,1-, 1. 2 2% % 
5. 
a 
3 
illil 2 
val, 
II 
32-2-stle 
is - 
His . . 
a a sis" 
27 
. 
i 
  
 
   
 
FIG.3, 
  
T ax3%3%K 
l, 
2 
22 
S2ssEx>x2SS Z - 
2, 3-4 
2 + 3& 32 
3 
INVENTQR 
2 22 
2 
% 
WITNESSES: Zg. 2. 2. % t 
2 
 
 
  
 
222222222222 722 
2 
a "...is 
S-Z 3 
AITORNEr 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUSTINE N. GILBERT, OF BERLIN, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
RoTARY ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604,038, dated May 17, 1898. 
Application filed June 12, 1897, Serial No, 640,470. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, AUGUSTINEN. GILBERT, 
of Berlin, in the county of Coos and State of 
New Hampshire, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Rotary Engines, 
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
- 
act description. 
Myimprovement in rotary engines consists, 
essentially, in two parallel shafts having cyl 
inders or drumsplaced thereon and connected 
by a chain passing over the same, to which 
chain are attached bars extending parallel 
with the direction of the drums and forming 
piston-heads. This chain and the drums are 
Surrounded by a casing which forms the cyl 
inder, and the device is provided with suit 
able steam inlet and exhaust ports and valves 
and with devices for moving the abutment 
plates. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional eleva 
tion of my device. Fig. 2 is a sectional plan 
view taken through the upper chamber, 
through which the chain passes; and Fig. 3 
is a sectional elevation taken parallel with one 
of the drums and upon the line 33 of Fig. 1. 
My invention comprises two parallel shafts 
B, upon which are mounted drums B", and 
the latter have their surfaces formed as poly 
gons with a number of sides, each side being 
adapted to receive one of the links of the 
chain C, which is made in duplicate and 
passes about both of the drums B. At in 
tervals in its length, preferably equal to the 
circumference of the drum, are attached bars 
C", which extend both inward and outward 
from the chain. The drums are provided with 
grooves C, adapted to receive that portion of 
the bars C" which projects inward from the 
chain. These bars are provided with suitable 
packing-Strips upon each edge designed to 
make a tight joint between the bars and the 
passage through which they pass. 
Acasing Asurrounds both of the drums and 
the chain, and it is provided with a central 
portion A", lying within the two sides of the 
chain and between the cylinders, being con 
nected at each end and closely approximat 
ing the outer surface of the cylinder. This 
leaves a passage between the outer portion 
of the casing and the inner portion A", which 
is of such a size that the bars C", forming the 
pistons, will closely fit therein. The central 
portion A' at each end and close to the drums 
is provided with cross-grooves receiving the 
auxiliary abutments D'. These may be ex 
tended entirely across the cylinder, but pref 
erably extend simply beneath the chain, and 
they are held outward against the chain by 
means of a spirally-coiled spring beneath 
them. Immediately opposite these abutments 
D', and sliding within cavities formed in the 
outer casing A are the main abutments D, 
which consist of plates connected by stems 
d with a cross-rod a, by which they are op 
erated. These plates or abutments D are 
provided with slots D, which closely embrace 
the sides of the chain. 
Close to the abutments D are steam-inlet 
ports and valves E. These valves, as shown, 
consist of round bars or cylinders having a 
plurality of ports or passages e extending 
therethrough. The valve-stems extend out 
ward through suitable packing-boxes and are 
provided with crank-arms E, connected by 
links E with levers E, pivoted at their rear 
ends to the casing of the machine and pro 
vided intermediate their length with friction 
rollers which engage grooves b' in the cams 
B, mounted upon the same shaft B as the 
drums B". The cam-grooves bare so arranged 
as to give an intermittent motion to the le 
vers E, and as a consequence the valves E 
will be opened immediately after the pistons 
C have passed the abutments D. 
The cross-bar a', to which the abutment is 
connected, is carried upon one end of a lever 
- D', which consists of two parts pivoted to 
each other at d and so arranged that they 
may be connected so as to act as one lever or 
disconnected so that the motion of one end 
of the lever will not affect the other end. 
This is accomplished by placing a blockd 
upon the lever D', which block is grooved 
and slides upon both parts of the lever. 
In 
Fig.1 the lower right-hand lever Dis shown 
with this block moved away from the joint, so 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75. 
95 
OO 
2 
604,038 
that the lever is broken or permitted to hinge 
at its center. The lower left-hand lever, how 
ever, has the block d placed at the joint, so 
as to unite the two parts of the lever to make 
it a single lever. 
To the lever Dis connected a link D, which 
at its other end is connected to a lever D', 
which at a point intermediate its length is 
pivoted to the casing of the machine and at 
its outer end is provided with a friction-roller 
engaging the grooves b in the cam-disk B. 
As shown in the drawings, four of these cam 
disks, with the levers described as operated 
thereby, are provided with each engine, one 
disk being placed upon each end of each 
drum. 
The cam-groove b is so constructed as to 
give an intermittent vibrating motion to the 
lever D and a similar motion to the abut 
ment D. The object of multiplying the le 
vers is to insure a quick motion of the abut 
ments and one which will promptly remove 
the same from the path of the piston and 
close it close behind the piston. The auxil 
iary abutment D' has its upper edges bev 
eled, so as to be engaged by the inner edge 
of the piston and be forced outward thereby. 
The levers E, which operate the valves, 
are constructed on the same principle as the 
lever D, having a similar block e sliding 
upon the two parts of the levers and arranged 
so as to break the lever in the middle or to 
connect the two parts, so as to form a rigid 
lever. 
The blocks dare connected by links d? with 
the controlling-lever d, and the blocks e are 
connected by links e' with the same lever d8. 
The arrangement is such that when the lever 
d is thrown to one side diagonally opposite 
blocks d and e are moved so as to break their 
respective levers, while the other two diago 
nally opposite sets of blocks are moved so as 
to unite the two halves of their levers into a 
single rigid lever. In consequence of this 
diagonally opposite abutments are operated 
together, while the other two abutments are 
thrown outward, so as to be inoperative. 
Similarly diagonally opposite valves are op 
erated, while the other two valves are inop 
The casing A is provided with exhaust-pas 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5o erative-that is, remain closed. 
55 
65 
75 
sages a, which are four in number, two of 
which are in use at a time. 
To reverse the engine, the lever dis thrown 
to the opposite side of the center, which closes 
the two valves formerly in use and opens the 
two valves which were closed, at the same time 
changing the abutments which are operative. 
The result is that the direction of the mo 
tion of the chain is reversed. 
The pistons Care preferably provided with 
inset-balls h, which bear against the sides of 
the cylinder and reduce friction. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. A rotary engine, comprising parallel ro 
tative drums, a chain passing about said 
drums, and having plates attached thereto 
and acting as pistons, a casing surrounding 
the paths of said pistons and also extending 
within the chain between the drums, said cas 
ing having steam inlet and exhaust ports and 
valves controlling the steam-ports, abutments 
having slots to accommodate the chain, cams 
mounted upon the drum-shafts, and mechan-, 
ism connecting said cams with the abutments 
and valves, substantially as described. 
2. A rotary engine having two sets of abut 
ments and steam-valves adapted to be alter 
nately used in reversing the operation of the 
engine, vibrating levers actuating said valves, 
each of said levers being composed of tWO 
parts pivoted to each other, and a coupling 
block or sleeve adapted to connect and dis 
connect the two parts to make of them a rigid 
or a jointed lever, substantially as described. 
3. A rotary engine having two sets of abut 
ments and steam-valves adapted to be alter 
I nately used in reversing the operation of the 
engine, vibrating levers actuating the same, 
each composed of two parts pivoted to each 
other, a coupling block or sleeve adapted to 
connect and disconnect the two parts to make 
of them a rigid or a jointed lever, a common 
reversing-lever, and links connecting the 
same with said coupling-blocks, substantially 
as described. 
AUGUSTINE N. GILBERT. 
95 
Witnesses: 
BERT L. PIKE, 
JOSEPH. H. BATES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604138.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 604,138. 
S. J. CLULEE, 
FRAMELESS SPECTACLES OR EYEGLASSES, 
Patented May 17, 1898, 
 
A/,7AMAFAFA, 
-/AV6A/Z. 
Yala 
a 
g 
2 
S\,L\\\\\ S. C\\\te. 
hoto-Li Ho...washistop. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHEN J. CLULEE, OF ATTLEBOROUGH, MASSACHUSETTS. 
FRAMELESS SPECTACLES OR EYEGLASSEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604,138, dated May 17, 1898. 
Application filed September 15, 1897, Serial No. 661,740, (No model.) 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STEPHEN J. CLULEE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Attle 
borough, in the county of Bristol and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvementsin Frameless Spectacles 
or Eyeglasses; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, and to letters 
of reference marked thereon, which form a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
the fittings or clips of frameless spectacles 
and eyeglasses; and it consists, essentially, 
of a two-arm clip having one of said arms re 
duced in thickness, elongated, and bent, 
whereby the same clip is adapted to readily 
receive and adjust or adapt itself to lenses 
Varying greatly in thickness and shape, the 
construction being such that the clip willem 
brace maximum and minimum thickness 
lenses with equal facility. The lenses are 
firmly secured to the clip by means of a screw 
or bolt passing through all, substantially as 
COOl. 
By means of my improved fitting or clip the 
objections or difficulties just referred to are 
practically overcome, since the one clip is 
readily adaptable to any form, size, and thick 
ness of lens, the length of the bolt or clamping 
screw employed being sufficient to extend 
through a lens of maximum thickness. 
In the accompanying sheet of drawings, 
Figure 1 is a partial front side elevation, in 
enlarged scale, showing my improved clip 
adapted to a frameless-spectacle lens. Fig. 
2 is a similar view showing the device com 
bined with an eyeglass-lens; and Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5 are horizontal sectional views taken on 
line acac of Fig. 1, showing the adaptability 
of the clip to lenses varying in shape and 
thickness. 
I would state in passing that I am well 
aware that frameless spectacles and eye 
glasses are old and well known, and Ialso rec 
ognize the fact that the lenses of such articles 
have been mounted in clips provided with two 
arms, between which the lenses are embraced 
and secured thereto by means of a clamping 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
screw passing through the whole. My pres 
ent invention, however, has to do only with 
means whereby an integrally-formed clip is 
capable of being adjusted to lenses varying 
in thickness. 
In the drawings, A indicates my improved 
one-piece clip or fitting as a whole. It is made 
of metal and is provided with a suitable head 
or outer extension e, in which, in the case of 
spectacles, the temple i may be mounted in 
any well-known manner. Fig. 2 shows the 
said head portion arranged or modified to re 
ceive the bridge or nose-piece in of an eye 
glass. The clip A is further provided with a 
pair of laterally-separated inwardly-extend 
ing ears or arms a C', arranged to receive and 
hold the lens b between them. The front or, 
as shown in Figs. 3, 4, and 5, the lower arm C 7o 
is comparatively thick and has a hole there 
through in the center of its ear, in which is 
seated the head of the clamping-screw S. 
The ear portion of the rear or opposite arm 
a' is also comparatively thick and is tapped 
to receive the screw-threaded shank portion 
of the said clamping-screw. The adjacent 
faces of said ears are suitably adapted to bear 
against the corresponding sides or faces of 
the lenses b, the latter having a hole there 
through registering with said holes formed 
in the two ears for the passage of the clamp 
ing-screw, whereby the whole may be firmly 
clamped together. 
The portion of the arm a' between its ear 
and the body part is reduced in thickness 
and elongated and also bent substantially as 
shown at a. By means of this construction 
the clip is rendered sufficiently pliable or 
yielding as to automatically adapt itself to 
lenses varying greatly in thickness and shape. 
(See Figs. 3 and 5 and particularly Fig. 4.) 
In the last-named figure the dotted lines in 
dicate a lens, say, of maximum thickness. It 
will be seen, too, that owing to the presence of 
the thin or yielding tie portion a the ear at is 
adapted to conform to and bear snugly against 
the corresponding face of the lens and irre 
spective of the shape of the latter. I would 
add that the other arm C itself is made Sufi 
ciently stiff and strong to successfully with 
stand all the pressure or force to which the 
spectacle or eyeglass may be subjected with 
out depending upon the said tie portion. 
95 
75 
IOO 
2 
604,138 
I prefer to provide my improved clip with 
the side wings C, adapted to bear against the 
edge of the lens, as usual, although they may 
be omitted, if desired. 
I claim as my invention 
As a new article of manufacture, a clip for 
frameless spectacles and eyeglasses consist 
ing of a body portion, an arm or ear portion 
extending from the front end of the body por 
tion, and an arm or ear portion connected 
with the rear end of the body portion by an 
IO 
elongated pliable non-resilient bent portion, 
the said arms or ear portions bearing against 
the opposite faces of the lens and being pro 
vided with perforations to receive the fasten 
ing-screw. 
In testimony whereofI have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
STEPIEN J. CLULEE. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. REMINGTON, 
REMINGTON SHERMAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604238.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 60 4,238. 
P. NERNEY. 
SPECTACLE EYE GUARD OR SHIELD, 
Patented May 17, 1898, 
// G I. 
W.ZAsses, 
3 
6 
 
 
f/Eg, 4. 
A4/V72 F 
Aeze N2 re/. 
2 
2% 32% 2 a' 
AP 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
PETER NERNEY, OF ATTLEBOROUGH, MASSACHUSETTS. 
SPECTACLE EYE GUARD OR SHIELD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604,288, dated May 17, 1898, 
Application filed September 15, 1897. Serial No. 651,766, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, PETERNERNEY, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Attle 
borough, in the county of Bristol and State 
of Massachusetts, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Spectacle Eye 
Guards or Shields; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the invention, such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same, reference 
being had to the accompanying drawings, 
and to letters of reference marked thereon, 
which form a part of this specification. 
My invention relates to a new and im 
proved spectacle eye guard or shield; and 
it consists, essentially, of a one-piece frame 
or rim, made of vulcanized rubber, having 
shields or lenses of mica or other suitable 
transparent material mounted therein, as 
hereinafter set forth and claimed. 
In spectacles or devices of the class form 
ing the subject of my present invention it has 
been usual heretofore, so far as I am aware, 
to employ a composite frame for holding the 
lenses in position-that is to say, such for 
mer frames Were composed of a thin sheet 
metal base, a binding of flexible material, as 
cloth, cemented to the base, the lenses being 
interposed between them, and a circumscrib 
ing cushion, of felt, cemented or otherwise se 
cured to the base and binding. As thus con 
structed eye-guards are moreliable to become 
unserviceable, owing to the fact that mois 
ture or perspiration readily decomposes or 
softens the cement or glue employed for se 
curing the lenses in position in the frame. 
Moreover, the cost of such former devices 
was increased by reason of the number of 
parts entering into the construction of the 
lens-frames, as well as in the use of mate 
rials varying widely in character. 
The object I have in view is to produce an 
improved eye-guardin which the cost of labor 
and materials employed in its construction 
are reduced to a minimum, the device at the 
same time being stronger and less liable to 
get out of order and also possessing greater 
flexibility or adaptability to conform to the 
face of the wearer. 
In the accompanying sheet of drawings, 
Figure 1 is a top view of my improved eye 
guard. Fig. 2 is afront elevation of the same. 
Fig. 3 is a view showing the opposite or rear 
side of the device, and Fig. 4 is a transverse 
section taken on line acac of Fig. 3. 
I would state that in order to more clearly 
represent the eye-guard the drawings show 
the device in a somewhat exaggerated form. 
The entire frame or lens-holding portion a 
of my improved eye-guard is or may be com 
posed of vulcanized rubber. The outline or 
contour of the frame may have any desired 
or suitable shape. I prefer, however, to make 
it substantially as represented, wherein the 
two lens-holding portions are separated longi 
tudinally by a central transverse tie t, the 
latter being integral with and uniting the up 
per and lower sides of the frame or rim a. 
The back side of the frame-that is, the 
side contiguous to the face of the wearer-is 
provided with a suitably-shaped narrow flange 
a', extending at substantially right angles to 
the plane of the frame. The said flange fol 
lows the contour of the frame and forms a 
comparatively soft cushion adapted when in 
use to bear against and conform to that por 
tion of the face and forehead surrounding the 
eyes, thus protecting them from dust, Snow, 
rain, &c. The flange may be provided with 
openings c at intervals, thereby ventilating 
the eye-guard. 
At the base of the flange the frame is pro 
vided with a groove or recess a, the upper 
side of which terminates in the projecting 
edgeportiona, adapted to bear Snugly against 
the surface of the lens. (See Fig. 4.) 
The lenses b may be made of mica, or other 
suitable transparent material. I prefer to 
use mica, because it is somewhat flexible. The 
two eyepieces or lenses b are introduced into 
and seated in the said grooves aof the frame, 
the material of the latter being sufficiently 
yielding or elastic to permit it, yet at the same 
time adapted to prevent the lens from being 
accidentally detached or dismounted. 
In order to hold the device in position when 
in use, the frame may be provided with small 
end ears in, having the ends of a cord or elas 
tic connection m secured thereto. 
In my improved eye-guard the frame or rim 
member a, together with the said flange a 
75 
85 
90 
95 
CO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
2 
604,238 
I claim as my invention and desire to secure 
by United States Letters Patent 
As a new article of manufacture, an eye 
guard or shield consisting of a non-absorbent 
flexible frame formed in a single integral 
structure having two lens portions separated 
by a central integral transverse tie, and pro 
vided with an integral horizontal flange hav 
ing ventilating-openings, and flexible lenses 
held in the lens portions. 
In testimony whereof I have affixed my sig 
nature in presence of two witnesses. 
PETER NERNEY. 
2C) 
25 
Witnesses: 
GEO. H. REMINGTON, 
REMINGTON SHERMAN. 
and the lens-holding device, are all made in 
tegral, thereby reducing the cost of manufac 
ture, as well as reducing the liability of acci 
dent to a minimum. Moreover, by means of 
the herein-described manner of construction 
the frame may, if desired, be folded along the 
center of the tie membert, thereby forming 
the functions of a joint without the use of a 
hinge or other analogous device. If desired, 
the said tie portion may be reduced in thick 
ness, (see dotted line t, Fig. 1,) thus render 
ing the frame more readily foldable. In lieu 
of making the frame a of rubber other suit 
able material or substance that can be prop 
erly molded or shaped may be employed-as, 
for example, celluloid, leatherette, &c. 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604338.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CLYDE A. RICKARD AND EDWARD N. LONG, OF SEVILLE, OHIO. 
ART OF TREATING TOBACCO - LEAVES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604,388, dated May 17, 1898. 
Application filed October 18, 1895. Serial No. 566,129, (No specimens.) 
55 
I5 of Superior quality. 
To all uhon, it may concern: 
Be it known that we, CLYDE A. RICKARD 
and EDWARD N. LONG, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Seville, in the county of 
5 Medina and State of Ohio, have invented a 
new and useful Art of Treating Tobacco 
Leaves, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. This invention relates to the art of treating 
I O tobacco-leaves which are employed as wrap 
pers for cigars; and it has for its object to pro 
vide a process for treating the leaves of a 
growing plant in such a manner and by such 
means as to provide for producing a wrapper 
The invention contemplates the employ 
ment of chemicals or other agents applied to 
the leaf in isolated spots to provide for pro 
moting the burning quality of the leaf, while 
2O at the same time leaving the leaf sufficiently 
Soft and pliable, so as not to destroy the use 
fulness of the leaf as a wrapper for cigars. 
In carrying out this process it is to be ob 
served that the fundamental feature of the 
25 invention is the application of the chemical 
agent to the leaf while the plant is growing; 
but the chemical agent employed is intended 
to only partially deaden the leaf at the spots 
where applied, so that the chemical will be 
3o absorbed and assimilated throughout the en 
tireleaf. This becomes very important when 
the chemical employed is such a chemical as 
potash, that would greatly increase the burn 
ing quality of the leaf when used as a wrap 
35 per, and it has been found that the chemical 
is more thoroughly distributed throughout the 
body of the leaf by applying the same to the 
leaf in spots and allowing the growing leaf to 
absorb and assimilate the chemical. 
In carrying out the invention it has been 
found most desirable to employ, for the pur 
pose of treating the leaf as described, chem 
icals belonging to the alkaline group, such as 
potash, and at the same time such chemicals 
45 as have a considerable affinity for water, so 
that the leaf will only be partially deadened 
at the spots of application, whereby sufficient 
vitality will be left in such spots to allow for 
the absorbtion and assimilation of the chem 
5o ical throughout the leaf and to prevent the 
spots from becoming too brittle. These re 
Sults are secured best by applying the com 
bustion-promoting agent to the leaf while the 
plant is still growing at about the time the 
leaves have reached their maturity. 
Referring more particularly to the agents 
employed, it is to be noted that such agents 
may be conveniently dropped on the leaves in 
spots by means of atomizers or other suitable 
apparatus; but however applied the best mix- 6o 
ture found available for the purpose is a com 
bination of potash and glycerin, the potash 
having the important property of promoting 
or increasing the burning quality of the leaf, 
while the glycerin maintains the spot soft and 65 
pliable, so as to maintain the usefulness of the 
leaf as a wrapper. Without intending to 
limit ourselves to specific proportions We 
would say that where the size of the drops 
sprayed upon the leaves varies from approxi- 7 O - 
mately the size of a pin-head to sizes still 
more minute solutions of caustic potash, 
(which may conveniently be made from the 
ninety-eight-per-cent. caustic potash, known 
commercially as Babbitt's caustic lye,) 75 
varying from sixteen ounces to thirty-two 
ounces per gallon of water, may be employed 
to produce the desired result, either with ji 
without the addition of glycerin in the pro 
portion of, say, one pint of glycerin to ten 8o 
gallons of the solution. For the thinnest 
leaves and upon bright sunshiny days the so 
lution will preferably be the sixteen-ounce so 
lution. For the thickest leaves and upon 
dark cloudy days the thirty-two-ounce so- 85 
lution will preferably be employed. Other 
agents may be such chemicals as absolute al 
cohol, with or without glycerin, lime, or th 
like; but it will of course be understood that 
any means may be employed for securing the 9o 
two results emphasized-namely, the increas 
ing of the burning quality of the leaf and caus 
'ra 
ing the spots to remain soft and pliable. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat- 95 
ent, is 
1. An improvement in the art of treating 
tobacco-leaves, which consists in applying a 
combustion-promoting agent to the leaves of 
a growing plant, substantially as described. I oo 
2. An improvement in the art of treating 
tobacco-leaves, which consists in applying an 
 
 
 
2 
604,338 
au 
alkali to the leaves of a growing plantin spots, our own we have hereto affixed our signatures 
Substantially as described. 
3. An improvement in the art of treating 
tobacco-leaves which consists in applying a. 
. S. ESEARD. 
r 5 mixture of potash and glycerin to the leaves 
of a growing plant in spots, substantially as 
- 
described. 
In testimony that we claim the foregoing as 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
 
Witnesses: 
JOHN H. SIGGERS, 
W. B. HUDSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604440.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 604,440. 
  
 
 
E. WERMILYEA, 
KNITTING MACHINE CYLINDER. 
Patented May 24, 1898. 
e 
 
 
 
As 
 
S. 
SS 
% 
Z. 
 
 
 
 
 
Ses S 
 
 
 
 
Ea s sy 
y 
928) tv.cscs F 
2. 
t 
3:vowev 
eletov o 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
EUGENEVERMILYEA, OF WATERFORD, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO SAMUEL SNYDER AND JOHN METCALF, OF SAME PLACE. 
KNITTING-MACHINE CYLNDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604,440, dated May 24, 1898. 
Application filed November 17, 1897, serial No. 658,799, (No model.) 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EUGENE WERMILYEA, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Waterford, in the county of Saratoga and 
5 State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Knitting - Ma 
chine Cylinders; and Idohereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable 
Io others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
This invention relates to knitting-machines 
which use a revolving cylinder having a cen 
tral tubular hub or sleeve that turns on a bear 
I5 ing-stud, as in the Campbell and Clute ma 
chine and the Tompkins machine. Hitherto 
the cylinder and hub have been cast in one 
piece, being afterward turned and bored to 
receive the needles and stud. The sleeve or 
2q hub has gear-wheels clamped on it, whereby 
it is driven. 
In practice it often becomes necessary to 
change the size of the cylinder. For this pur 
pose the gears are loosened, the cylinder is 
25 lifted off the stud, and another one is substi 
tuted; but as each cylinder is made for its own 
stud such changes result in imperfect fitting, 
and as a consequence both the cylinder and the 
stud are worn so as to injure them. Indeed, 
3o a cylinder which has frequently been changed 
in this way will rarely run quite true on any 
stud. To obviate this defect, I make my hub 
or sleeve detachable from my cylinder in or 
der that the hub and gears may be left in 
35 place and the cylinders exchanged without 
disturbing the accurate fit of the sleeve and 
stud. I also provide for bracing the hub or 
sleeve at its point of attachment to the cyl 
inder by means hereinafter more particularly 
4o set forth and claimed. I also provide for 
lubricating the -bearing-surface by making 
the stud hollow, with perforations whereby 
the oil supplied to the interior of the said stud 
may pass out over its exterior, which is in con 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 
represents a vertical section of a knitting-ma 
chine cylinder, hub, gears, and bearing-stud 
embodying myinvention, the remaining parts 
5o of the knitting-machine being omitted as old 
and irrelevant to the invention. Fig. 2 rep 
45 tact with the interior of the hub or sleeve. 
w 
55 
65 
75 
resents a detail perspective view of the cyl 
inder and hub; and Fig. 3 represents these 
latter parts detached, the cylinder being 
shown in plan from below the hub in its nor 
mal vertical elevation. 
A designates the cylinder, which is pro 
vided with an internal rigid spoke-frame A', 
but otherwise open. This frame and the body 
of the cylinder constitute the entire casting. 
The central part of the said spoke-frame is 
recessed on the under side, forming a bear 
ing-space A, having its edges on each spoke 
curved to fit the periphery of a disk B', which 
is cast with the sleeve or hub B near the up 
per end of the latter. Said frame has also a 
central opening A', which receives the up 
wardly-extending end B of the said hub or 
sleeve, so as to let the said disk fit into said 
recessed part of the said frame, while the up 
per end of the said hub will be flush with its 
upper side. On the under side of the three 
spokes of said frame three lugs C are fas 
tened by screws Cand arranged so that their 
curved inner faces C will fit against the pe 
riphery of disk B". 
D designates the gear-wheel on the said 
hub, through which the said cylinderis driven. 
E designates the hollow bearing-stud, which 
fits into the bore b of the said hub and is pro 
vided with perforations e for the lubrication 
of the bearing-surfaces of the said parts, the 
oil being supplied to the interior of the said 
stud through an opening e. 
The disk B' and recessed part A of the 
frame A" are provided with bolt-holes b' and 
a', which register, in order that they may re 
ceive bolts d for detachably securing the cyl 
inder and hub together. Screws or other de 
tachable fastenings may be employed instead. 
The cylinder while in operation is held to 
its hub and braced laterally on the same with 
as much practical security as though the two 
were cast in one piece, by reason of the fit 
ting of the upper end B of the tube into the 
opening A, the fitting of the disk B'against 
the lugs Cand into the recessed part A of the 
cylinder spoke-frame, and the clamping ac 
tion of the bolts or other fastenings. 
When the cylinder is to be exchanged for 
another of different size, the bolts d are re 
moved in the usual way, the cylinder is lifted 
- 
90 
95 
OO 
2 
604,440 
o 
lugs and means for detachably fastening said 
- off, the other cylinder is bolted on in its stead, 
and the Working of the machine goes forward, 
collar to the said bottom part of the cylinder 
With no displacement of the gear-wheels and 
substantially as set forth. 
With lino change of the bearing-surfaces. The 
4. A hub or sleeve having a conoidal top, 
Cylinder, being thus rendered independent of 
B, and a disk or collar, B, in combination 
with a cylinder having a permanent part ex 
the hub or sleeve, may be used very much 
longer and relied on for much more perfect 
tending across the bottom of the ring and 
Work. The hub and stud, being used only 
provided with a central, conoidal opening 
With parts originally intended for them, will 
adapted to fit the upper end of the said hub, 
wear but little and run evenly for alongtime. 
lugs removably attached to the under side of 
The importance of the change to the machine 
the said part and having curved, inner edges 
as a Whole is obvious and great. 
fitting the periphery of the said disk and 
The lugs C might be cast with the cylinder; 
means for detachably fastening the latter to 
but it is preferred to have them in separate 
the said bottom part of the cylinder substan 
parts. This makes an easier casting and will 
tially as set forth. 
allow their adjustment to disks of greater or 
5. A cylinder, A, provided with a perma 
nent Spider-frame, A", extending across its 
less diameter. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
bottom and having a central, conoidal open 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
ing, A, in combination with a hub or sleeve 
having a conoidal, upper end, B, adapted to 
Patent, is 
1. A knitting-machine cylinder having a 
fit into the said opening, and a disk, B', adapt 
permanent part extending across the bottom 
ed to fit against the bottom of the said frame, 
of the ring, and provided with a detachable 
means for fastening the said disk to the said 
hub or sleeve, and means for detachably fas 
frame and lugs which are detachably fastened 
tening the upper end of the said hub to the 
to the said frame and provided with curved, 
Said part, substantially as set forth. 
inner edges which fit against the said disk 
2. A cylinder having a permanent part ex 
substantially as set forth. 
tending across the bottom of the ring, having 
6. In combination with the tubular, sus 
a Central, Conoidal opening, and provided 
pending-stud, E, having holes, e, the sleeve 
With a hub or sleeve which is provided with 
or hub, B, having a conoidal, upper end, B, 
a conical upper end adapted to fit into this 
: and the cylinder, A, having a rigid part ex 
Opening, and an outwardly-extending part 
tending across it at the bottom, and provided 
and means for detachably fastening said out With a central, conoidal opening, A, the said 
Wardly - extending part to the said bottom 
sleeve and cylinder being detachably fastened 
part of the cylinder substantially as set forth. 
together, substantially as set forth. 
3. In combination with a cylinder having 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
a permanent part extending across the bot 
in presence of two witnesses. 
tom of the ring and lugs or plates with cur 
Yilinear edges detachably fastened to the un 
part, a hub or sleeve 
der side of the said 
having a rigid disk or collar on its upper end 
the periphery of which fits against the said 
MORTON. C. POWELL, 
JOHN HOFFMAN. 
EUGENE WEERMILYEA. 
Witnesses: 
'- 
25 
35 
45 
55 
7 o 
75 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604540.txt	(No Model.) 
S. MATHER 
SPOOL, 
No. 604,540, 
Patented May 24, 1898. 
 
WITNESSES 
26.7%-4. 
NVENTOR 
?ery -/64 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIDNEY MATHER, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT. 
SPO. O. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604,540, dated May 24, 1898. 
Application filed April 5, 1897, Serial No. 630,684, (No model.) 
To all tuhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, SIDNEY MATHER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Bridge 
port, in the county of Fairfield and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Spools and Bobbins; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
Vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention has for its object to provide 
spools and bobbins which shall be provided 
With slots or recesses to receive and hold 
Small articles, such as needles. It will of 
course be apparent that spools of this class 
may be used in various ways, and it is well 
known that in factories-for example, corset 
factories-it is not infrequent to break a 
number of sewing-machine needles in using 
up one two-thousand-four-hundred-yard 
spool of thread. By providing them with 
two or three needles, which shall go with each 
Spool of thread as part of the package itself, 
considerable time may be saved when the 
needlesbreak. In order to meet this and simi 
lar requirements, I have devised the novel 
spool of which the following description, in 
connection with the accompanying drawings, 
is a specification, numbers being used to des 
ignate the several parts. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a view, partly 
in vertical section, of a spool provided with 
a slot or recess of such shape as to adapt it 
to receive sewing-machine needles and pro 
vided with an opening in the end through 
which the needles may be removed before the 
thread is used. Fig. 2 represents a cross 
section through the barrel of the spool. 
1 designates the heads of the spool or bob 
bin, and 2 the barrel, and 3 the usual longi 
tudinal opening. 
The novel feature of my invention consists 
in providing the barrel of the spool with a 
slot or recess 4. The size and shape of this 
recess is not of the essence of my invention. 
It is essential, however, that this recess be 
located wholly at one side of the central open 
ing, so that the contents of the recess will not 
pass into the central opening under any cir 
O 
ed 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
cumstances. The length of the slot may be 
greater or less, according to the length of the 
barrel and the length of the needles to be 
placed therein. In Fig. 1 I have represented 
the slot as extending the entire length of the 
barrel of the spool and also extended into one 
of the heads of the spool, the edges of the re 
cess converging under the head of the spool, 
as indicated at 5, and terminating in an 
opening 6, through which the needles may be 
removed by turning the spool end for end. 
In practice the thread is Wound upon the 
spool in the usual manner, and the needles 
are thereby prevented from slipping out lat 
erally from the slot or recess. Should the 
operator of the sewing-machine on the spin 
dle of which a spool is mounted break a 
needle, it would simply be necessary to re 
move the spool from the spindle, turn it over, 
and let a needle slip out and then replace the 
spool upon the spindle. 
For the actual purposes of my invention it 
Would not be necessary that the slot should 
extend through from side to side of the bar 
rel of the spool, as indicated in the drawings; 
but in order to manufacture the spools in the 
most economical manner the saw or other tool 
by means of which the slot is formed ap 
proaches the barrel at a tangent and extends 
through to the other side in the slotting oper 
ation. The tapered end 5 of the recess may 
be formed in any suitable manner. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
A spool or bobbin having its barrel provided 
with a slot or recess lying wholly at one side 
of the usual longitudinal opening, said slot 
or recess extending into one of the heads of 
the spool, and the sides of the recess in the 
head converging at one end and leading into 
an opening 6, through which the contents of 
the recess may be removed before the thread 
is used. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
- 
in presence of two Witnesses. 
SIDNEY MATHER. 
Witnesses: 
A. M. WOOSTER, 
SUSAN. W. HELEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604640.txt	(No Model.) 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
YARN CHANGING DEVICE FOR RIB KNITTING MACHINES, 
R. W. SCOTT 
No. 604,640, 
Patented May 24, 1898, 
) 
C 
Y 
S2 
T 
 
 
 
n 2 5. 
2Sg.NSNEN 
M 
N 
 
2 
H 
s 
Elim 
YS 
ASGs 2 
s 
SS 
s 
is  T 
N 
f/2Z72esses 
76. 
A. A. 
%leya 44% 
Z72-zvezzzoz. 
ZZoe 7-ZfA2 Scozz 
2772-zls A2772eas 
46.76 sov 
the NORRs Peters co. P-Or...ITHO, was NGTON, D. G 
YARN CHANGING DEWICE FOR RIB KNITTING MACHINEs. 
R. W. SCOTT. 
(No Model.) 
No. 604,640, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented May 24, 1898, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT W. SCOTT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO LOUIS N. D. WILLIAMS, OF ASHBOURNE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
YARN a CHANG NG DEVICE FOR R B K NTT N G V AC - NES 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604,640, dated lVIay 24, 1898. 
Application filed April 16, 1895, Renewed May 8, 1896, Serial No. 590,782, (No model.) 
I5 
2O of the fixed structure broken away. 
To all, whon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT W. SCOTT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Phila 
delphia, Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
5 Improvements in Yarn-Changing Devices for 
Rib-Knitting Machines, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to produce by 
continuous operation and with unbroken 
IO threads tubular-ribbedknitted fabrics having 
stripes extending around the same, and this 
object I attain in the manner which I will 
now proceed to describe, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, in which-- 
Figure l is a sectional view of sufficient of 
a rib-knitting machine to illustrate the means 
which I have devised for carrying out my in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a front view of part of the 
machine, and Fig. 3 is a plan view with part 
In Fig. 1A represents part of the fixed table 
orbed of the machine; B, the usual fixed nee 
dle-cylinder, grooved for the reception of the 
Vertically-reciprocating needles, and B' the 
25 rotating cylinder or cam-box, having cams for 
effecting the reciprocation of the needles, so 
as to cause them to engage with the thread and 
form stitches, said cam-cylinder having at 
the bottom a bevel-wheel C, which meshes 
3o with a bevel-pinion a' on the driving-shaft. 
D is the fixed dial, having radial grooves 
for the guidance of the dial-needles, which 
alternate with and play in the spaces between 
the cylinder-needles, and D is the rotating 
35 dial cam-plate, which is secured to a central 
spindle D*, carried by a hub D, the latter in 
turn being carried by the hub F of an arch 
F, which is mounted upon posts F, projecting 
upward from the cam-cylinder B' in the usual 
The dial D is of annular form and is mount 
ed upon brackets d, secured to the under side 
of the dial cam-plate D', as shown in Fig. 1, 
and in said dial is formed at one point a ra 
45 dial slot d", a radial slot d being also formed 
in the dial cam-plate D'. 
Projecting from a bracket G on the arch F 
is a spindlef, and upon the latter are mounted, 
so as to be free to turn, two bevel-wheels i 
5o and m, both of these bevel-wheels meshing 
with a bevel-wheel h, secured to a shaft h, 
40 mall her. 
which is free to turn in a bearing on the 
bracket G, and has at the outer end a tappet 
h', adapted to be actuated by upper and 
lower projections n' n' upon a rod or post 7, 55 
vertically guided in a bearing an on the bed 
A and acted upon by a pattern-chain in be 
neath said bed. 
To the back of the bevel-wheel i is secured a 
thread-carrying arm i", and to the back of the 6o 
bevel-wheel n is secured a similar thread-car 
rying arm m', each of these arms having guides 
for the passage of a knitting-thread and each 
arm when at its innermost limit occupying a 
position within the limits of the annular dial 65 
D, as shown by the arm n' in Fig. 1, and 
when at its outermost limit occupying such 
position as to lay its thread into the notch of 
the thread-guide b, as represented by the arm 
in Fig. 1. When in the outermost position, 7o 
therefore, the thread carried by the arm is 
fed to the needles and forms the stitches; but 
when the arm is in the innermost position 
the thread carried thereby is drawn inwardly 
beyond the needles and simply floats on the 75 
inner side of the knitted tube which is being 
produced. When it is desired, therefore, to 
change the thread which is being knitted to 
form the fabric, it is only necessary to effect 
a quick reversal in the position of the arms 
m' when the latter are in line with the ra 
dial slot d' in the dial, and such reversal is 
effected by the action of the lugs n' in of the 
post in upon the tappet h of the shaft h". 
For instance, supposing that the parts are in 
the position shown in Fig. 2 and that the 
thread from the arm is being fed to the 
guide b, by lifting the post n until its lug 
in is in the path of the tappet h the latter 
will, as it is carried around with the rotating 
parts of the machine, strike said lug in and 
will be partially turned thereby, this move 
ment being transmitted to the shaft h' and 
bevel-wheel h, and thence to the bevel-wheels 
i and in and guide-arms and m', thereby ef 
fecting a reversal in the position of Said arms, 
the tappet hbeing so adjusted with relation 
to the radial slot d' of the dial D that the 
movement of the arms n' will always take 
place when said arms are in line with said Joo 
slot. 
95 
In order to restore the arms to the position 
604,640 
shown in Fig. 1, the post n is lowered, so that 
its upper lug in acts upon the tappet and re 
stores the same to its former position. 
By my invention I am enabled to produce 
a tubular-ribbed fabric knitted continuously 
and with unbroken threads. Hence by vary 
ing the color or shade of the different threads 
I am enabled to produce stripes running 
around the fabric, a result which, so far as I 
am aWare, has never heretofore been accom 
plished with unbroken threads in tubular 
ribbed work. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent 
l. The combination, in a knitting-machine, 
of a needle-cylinder and its needles, an an 
nular dial also provided with needles, and 
having a slot extending through the same 
from the inner to the outer edge, and means 
for actuating the needles of the cylinder and 
dial whereby one or more threads may be 
passed down on the inner side of the dial, sub 
stantially as specified. 
2. The combination, in a knitting-machine, 
of a needle-cylinder and its needles, an an 
nular dial also provided with needles, and 
having a slot extending through the same 
from the inner to the outer edge, means for 
actuating the needles of the cylinder and dial, 
and a movable thread-guide adapted to carry 
a thread through the slot of the dial from a 
position outwardly beyond the same to a po 
sition in Wardly beyond it, substantially as 
specified. 
3. The combination, in a knitting-machine, 
of a needle-cylinder and its needles, an an 
nular dial also provided with needles, and 
having a radial slot, cam - cylinder having 
cams for actuating the cylinder-needles, a 
cam-plate having cams for actuating the dial 
needles, and brackets on said cam-plate for 
Io 
- (5 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
supporting said dial, Substantially as Speci 
fied. 
4. The combination, in a knitting-machine, 
of a needle-cylinder and its needles, an an 
nular dial also provided with needles and 
having a radial slot, means for actuating the 
needles of the cylinder and dial, a series of 
thread-guides mounted so as to be movable 
inwardly through the slot of the dial to a po 
sition within the limits of said dial and so as 
to be moved outwardly through said slot to 
a position for feeding thread to the needles 
of the cylinder and dial, and means for so 
moving said thread-guides. 
5. The combination in a knitting-machine, 
of the needle-cylinder and its needles, the 
cam-cylinder, an annular and radially-slotted 
dial and its needles, a radially-slotted cam 
plate and its spindle, a structure connecting 
the cam-cylinder and the spindle of the dial 
cam-plate, and swinging thread-guides mount 
ed upon said connecting structure and adapt 
ed to move through the slot of the dial either 
to an inoperative position within the dial or 
to an operative position beyond the same. 
6. The combination of the swinging thread 
guides, the bevel-wheels carrying the same, 
a bevel-wheel meshing with the wheels which 
carry the thread-guides, a shaft carrying said 
meshing bevel-wheel, a tappet on said shaft, 
and means for actuating said tappet SO as to 
partially turn the shaft first in one direction 
and then in the opposite direction, substan 
tially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
ROBERT W. SCOTT. 
Witnesses: 
JOS. H. KLEIN, 
FRANK E. BECHTOLD. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604740.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 604,740, 
f 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
A. EDSON. 
GOVERNOR FOR MOTORs. 
Patented May 31, 1898. 
firls' Strony 
O 
Mini?t mem t 
es 
5. 
 
St. 
f() 
EO 
re: 
a-Artill 
Erni 
AirTate 
t 
t 
it, 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
--- 
Aes- S. 
t41, 
1-6 at 
tov via 4- 
-7- 
53" 
341 Uevitov 
- 
- - 
(No Vodel.) 
No. 604,740, 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
T. A. EDISON, 
GOVERNOR FOR MOTORs, 
. 
Patented May 31, 1898. 
S. 
E. 
E. 
is 
s 
S. 
O 
S8itvesses 
A. 
C 
c 1: 27 a 
2,6-cuu/ 
 
u/ 
584A-2, elitozac-d- 
27, 2 
84.11c - fot 
a 
r 
UNITED STATES 
rity 
w" 
in 
, 
"", 
il 
i-r is a st 
(s EAAEN 
's 
; 
: 
, 
, ; 
IFFICE 
Ti IOMAS A. EDISON, OF T.J. EWELLYN 
PAR X NEYW J ESE'. 
GOVERNOR FOR vicio Rs. 
SFECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604, 246, dated Ray 31, 1898. 
Application filed January 27, 1897, Serial No. 620,975, (No model.) 
O 
2 C. 
To ?till athoi, ii. 16tly concert: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS A. E.) ISON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Llew 
ellyn Park, in the county of Essex and State 
{}f New Jersey, have invented a certain new 
and useful improvenet in Governors for 
Miotors, (Case No. 972,) of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Yy invention relates, mainly, to friction. 
speed-governors provided with means for ad 
justing the governor for any desired speed 
and with means, such as centrifugal governor 
balls, for regulating the friction members to 
maintain a constalt speed. 
The object of my invention is to wholly or 
largely overcome irregularities in speed due 
to cramping of the parts, untrue surfaces of 
friction membel's, and uneven action of the 
governor-balls. 
In carrying my invention into effect em 
ploy two friction members, one being prefer 
ably a rotating disk and the other two or more 
equidistant blocks or pads held in frictional 
engagement with said disk, a free and un 
restrained equalizing device for producing 
uniforg pressure between the pads and the 
friction-disk to prevent uneven aetion due 
to various causes and to prevent any unequal 
or cranping strains on the shaft by which the 
disk is carried, a devic? for adjusting the 
friction members to obtain different speeds, 
and an automatic device, such as a centrifu 
gal governor, for automatically increasing or 
decreasing the frictional engagement upon 
an increase or decrease in the speed of the 
inotor to maintain a constant speed. 
\ly invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
iFigure is all elevation showing my in 
proved governor applied to a spring-imotor 
and a ps) 'tion of the feed-screw of a phono 
graph and the driving connection between 
the same and the motor. Fig, 
3 is an end 
view looking from the left of Fig. 1, and Figs. 
3 and 4 are detail views of one member of the 
goverro'. 
Referring to the drawings, A is the box 
containing the driving-spiing, which spling 
is wound up by means of the gearing 3 and 
the shaft C, to which a crank is applied. The 
spring drives the nulley 3 til rough the inter 
mediate gearing iiii strated, aid this pulley 
4 I. 
is connected with the illey is oil feet-screw 
E by the belt i}''. 
ivoted to the late c. of 
the frame is an aria d, carrying all idler cl, 55 
which is held against the belt, D by a spring 
(l, coiled around tie pivot of tie arm (l, and 
whereby the slack in the belt is is take up. 
The speed-governor comprises the centrifu 
gal governor-balis F, carried by springs j, 6o 
whicl are attacited to a hub f" on the spindie 
f' and to the sliding sleeve?', which rotates 
with the spindle f and is capable of longi 
tudinal movement. The sleeve f carries a 
friction-disk G. The spindle f is rotated by 65 
the pinion f meshing with one of the gear 
wheels of the notor nechanisna. 
The disk, 
G is in frictional engagement, with equidis 
tant friction pads of blocks h, which engage 
the disk at opposite points. These pads are 7o 
carried by an equalizing device, which in the 
drawings is illustrated as a yoke II, which is 
swiveled in a block by a pin h", (see Figs. 
3 and 4,) and the block I is pivoted on a pin 
i", projecting horizontally from the down- 75 
wardly-extending arm I of the frame. It will 
readily be seen that the swiveled yoke His 
free to adjust, itself, so that the pads will both 
be in contact with the disk at all times, and 
hence the yoke will equalize the pressure of 83 
the pads against the disk G to compensate 
for an titlue Stiface aid to compensate for 
unequal wear of the pads and the disk. Thus. 
the cramping of the sleeve f on the rod f is 
prevented and irregularities in speed due to 85 
such causes avoided. The pressure of the 
pads upon dialetrically opposite points of 
the disk G also tends to overconne irregulari 
ties in speed due to uneven action of the gov. 
ernor-balls. The pads li are heid against the 
friction-disk G. by a spring J, connected to the 
a'n J', which is formed integral with tho 
blocki. The aria J is provided with a shoul- ". 
del J, with which engages the end of an ad 
justing-screw J, working through the top g; 
plate of the frame. When the screw J is 
moved upward, so as to bring the full tension 
of the spring, upon the aru j', the friction 
at the disk Gand the pads h will be such as 
to hold the motor at rest. 
To start, the notor, the screw j is moved 
downward, so as to decrease the tension of 
the spring J, and hence decrease the friction 
betwee; the disk (; and the pads i, and when 
ECQ 
- 
40 
So 
 
2. 
604,740 
the friction is sufficiently decreased the mo 
tor will start, and the degree of friction may. 
be further decreased until the proper speed 
is obtained. If for any reason the speed of 
5, the motor increases beyond the desired speed, 
the governor-balls F, moving outward, will 
increase the friction between the disk G and 
pads h, and hence automatically regulate and 
unaintain the desired speed. 
To stop the motor, the screw J is moved 
upward until the friction due to the spring J 
is sufficient to bring the motor to rest. 
O 
25 
I5 
2O face, substantially as set forth. 
What I claim is 
1. Afriction speed-governor having in com 
bination a rotatable element having afriction 
surface, two friction-pads bearing thereon at 
opposite points, and a swiveled equalizing de 
vice for maintaining the same uniform pres 
sure between both pads and said friction-sur 
2. Afriction speed-governor having incom 
bination a rotatable element having afriction 
surface, friction-pads bearing thereon at dia 
metrically opposite points on the same side 
of the friction-surface, and a swiveled equal 
izing device for maintaining the same uni 
form pressure between all the pads and said 
friction-surface, substantially as set forth. 
3. Afriction speed-governer having in com 
bination a rotatable elementhaving afriction 
surface, friction-pads bearing thereon at op 
posite points, and an equalizing device for 
maintaining a uniform pressure between each 
pad and said friction-surface, said device be 
ing supported so as to be capable of swinging 
about an axis perpendicular to the axis of the 
friction-surface, substantially as set forth. 
4. In a friction speed-governor, the combi 
nation of-a friction-disk, and a swiveled yoke 
40 carrying friction blocks or pads in contact. 
with said disk at diametrically opposite points 
35 
55 
45 
on the same side of the disk, whereby a uni 
form pressure between the disk and pads is 
produced, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a friction speed-governor, the combi 
nation of a friction-disk, a yoke carrying fric 
tion blocks or pads making contact with said 
disk at diametrically opposite points on the 
same side of the disk, a pivoted blockin which 
said yoke is swiveled, whereby a uniform pres- 5o 
sure between the disk and pads is produced, 
and means for moving said block on its pivot 
to vary the friction between said disk and 
pads to vary the speed, substantially as set 
forth. 
6. In a friction speed-governor, the combi 
nation of a friction-diskayoke carrying fric 
tion blocks or pads making contact with said 
disk at diametrically opposite points on the 
same side of the disk, a pivoted blockin which 
said yoke is swiveled, wherebya uniform pres 
sure between the disk and pads is produced, 
means for moving said block on its pivot to 
vary the friction between said disk and pads 
to vary the speed, and a centrifugal governor 65 
for maintaining a uniform speed, substan 
tially as set forth. 
7. Afriction speed-governor having in com 
bination a rotatable element having afriction 
surface, two friction-pads bearing thereon at 7o 
opposite points, and a swiveled equalizing de 
vice connecting said pads for maintaining the 
same uniform pressure between both pads 
t said friction-surface, substantially as set 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
THOMAS A. EDISON. 
25th day of January, 1897. 
orth. 
75 
". 
Witnesses: 
RICHARD N. DYER, 
W. PELZER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604840.txt	J. R. REYNOLDS. 
GOVERNING MECHANISM FOR THROTTLE VALVE CLOSERs. 
2. Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
No. 604840, 
(SN 
8v). 
Patented May 31, 1898. 
1 
- 
  
 
 
 
tztress 
(CSCEGEDE 
l HIA 
 
 
2227.22222272-27.222 zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz) 
1. 
 
 
 
 
zZ24 
sy % 
on 
N 
 
V 
ANs 
N ria 
N 
 
R 
as? 
ce (N2 
 
OVozdeavdo2- : 
99erves ded : 
 
"re orris Peters co., photo-LTHC., washlision, D.C. 
(No Model.) 
J. R. REYNOIDS, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
GOVERNING MECHANISM FOR THROTTLE VALVE CLOSERs. 
No. 604,840, 
Patented May 31, 1898. 
N 
2 
   
  
 
 
 
 
3. 
s 
-71. 
14 
ls. If 
N SE N 
N 
N 
N 
Z2 
2 
 
5. 
 2RNSNS N 
Z 
  
 
NSS Ng 
SAANNANNNNN ANNNNAN.SY. ANNANAAN ANNANN 
--- 
: Q&SN 2232 
M a 22 
24a2SaaSSSSSSN-7 Naza 
2.2.2 & 
... E 22 
an 
A. 
O 
2ZErs 
222 222 
2 7 
29 2. 
the Norris Peters co., Photo-Lifhd., WASHINGTON. D. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN R. REYNOLDS, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
GOVERN N G VECHAN S W FOR - ROTTE WALWE CO SERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604,840, dated May 31, 1898. 
Application filed February 28, 1898, Serial No. 671889, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it in aly CO7 ce.77: 
Beit known that I, JOHN R. REYNOLDs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hart 
ford, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Governing Mechan 
isms for Throttle-Valve Closers, of which the 
following is a specification. 
This invention relates to the mechanisms 
which are employed for controlling the move 
ments of throttle-valve closers of the class 
set forth in United States Letters Patent Nos. 
599,013 and 599,014, granted February 15, 
1898. 
The object of the present invention is to 
provide a simple and durable mechanism 
which will easily and quickly, but with little 
motion, exercise Sure and perfect control over 
the movements of such a closer when set in 
operation by a powerful spring or weight for 
closing a large or small throttle-valve. 
The embodiment of the invention illus 
trated by the accompanying drawings has a 
spring or weight actuated spindle with a wheel 
adapted to be connected with a wheel on the 
spindle of the throttle-valve to be closed, a 
train of differential gears connected so as to 
be brought into operation by the rotation of 
the spindle, and a plural number of pistons 
located in oppositely-facing cylinders and 
provided with means whereby they simultane 
ously receive very slow motion in opposite 
directions from the rapid rotation of the spin 
dle through the action of the speed-reducing 
gears, as more particularly hereinafter de 
scribed, and pointed out in the claims. 
Figure of the drawings illustrates a plan 
of a throttle-valve closer embodying the in 
vention with the cover removed and the elec 
tric tripping means omitted. Fig.2 illustrates 
a vertical section of the same closer, taken 
longitudinally of the spindle. Fig. 3 illus 
trates a vertical section taken transversely of 
the spindle through the oppositely-facing con 
trolling-cylinders; and Fig. 4 illustrates a ver 
tical section taken transversely of the spindle 
through the oppositely-facing controlling-cyl 
inders, showing a modified arrangement of 
connecting the pistons. 
The case 1 may be built of any suitable ma 
terial to any approved shape for inclosing the 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
mechanisms. The spindle 2 is supported by 
standards 3 and 4. Outside of the case the 
spindle bears a pulley 5, upon the periphery 
of which a weight cord or band may be wound 
to rotate or aid in the rotation of the spindle, 
if necessary. Ajustably attached to the pulley 
is a sprocket-wheel 6, that is adapted to be 
connected by a common sprocket-chain with 
a corresponding sprocket-wheel on the spin 
dle of any throttle-valve which it is desired 
to be closed by the operation of the closer. 
Inside of the case the spindle bears a barrel 
7, that is adapted to receive any common 
form of driving-spring. One end of the driv 
ing-spring may be attached to the walls of 
the barrel, while the other end may be at 
tached to the stud S, that is held by the stand 
ard 9 and is used to assist in supporting the 
barrel. Either a spring or a weight, or both, 
may be utilized as a source of motive power. 
When the throttle-valve is opened through 
the sprocket wheel and chain, the spindle is 
rotated and the power of the spring or weight, 
or both, as the case may be, is stored for ro 
tating the spindle in the reverse direction 
and closing the valve when an emergency 
arises and instant stopping of the engine is 
necessary. Any common form of catch and 
trip mechanisms, such as set forth in the 
above-mentioned patents, may be used for 
retaining the parts Set and for tripping the 
catch when instantaneous action is required. 
Mounted upon a stud projecting from the 
spring-barrel is a gear 10. This gear meshes 
with a pair of differential gears 11 and 12, 
one of which is fast to the standard 3 and the 
other attached to a sleeve 13, that is loosely 
supported by the standard. One of the gears 
has more teeth than the other, and as the 
barrel-gear revolves the gear attached to the 
sleeve is rotated very slowly. This greatly 
increases the relative rate of rotation be 
tween the spindle and sleeve. 
On the end of the sleeve opposite the dif 
ferential gears is a gear 14. In the arrange 
ment shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3 this is a spur 
gear, and meshing with the upper and lower 
teeth are the teeth of racks 15. These racks 
are formed on rods that extend in opposite 
directions and are connected with oppositely 
facing pistons 16, that are free to reciprocate 
95 
OO 
2 
604840 
in short cylinders 17, supported by the bot 
tom of the case on opposite sides of the 
spindle. 
The pistons are cylindrical in form and are 
provided with oppositely-facing cup-packings 
18 and packing-retaining rings 19. Extend 
ing from each of the pistons is a semicircular 
hub 20. Each of these hubs fits the back of 
and aids to retain in position the piston-rod 
that is connected with the opposite piston, so 
that the rack-teeth will properly mesh with 
the gear-teeth. These hubs also assistin guid 
ing the pistons in their movements into and 
out of the cylinders. The piston-rods loosely 
fit into openings through the pistons, and they 
push the pistons in by means of shoulders 21 
and pull the pistons out by means of pins 22 or 
equivalent means. The hubs 23 on the pis 
tons are provided with packings 24, and the 
piston-rods are allowed some movement, so 
that when forcing the pistons into the cylin 
ders the shoulders 21 will press against the 
packings 24 and prevent the outflow of air; 
but when drawing out the pistons the shoul 
ders will move away from the packings and 
permit the entrance of air into the cylinders 
through the pistons and thus facilitate the 
movements of the mechanisms when the 
throttle-valve is being opened. 
This manner 
of connecting the pistons relieves the spindle 
and bearings from one-sided strain, for the 
pistons Work in opposite directions, and the 
rack-teeth of one engage the top and the rack 
teeth of the other engage the bottom teeth of 
the gear on the sleeve that is rotated by the 
motion of the differential gears. In this form 
the pistons aid in retaining the racks in po 
sition and the piston-rods with the racks as 
sist in guiding the pistons in their move 
ments, so there will be no jamming or binding. 
In the form of connection illustrated by Fig. 
4 of the drawings the driving-spindle is pro 
vided with a spiral gear 26-that is, a gear 
with teeth arranged as short portions of spirals 
or screw-threads of quick pitch. Meshing 
with this spiral gear is a spiral gear 27, having 
teeth arranged in the same manner and on the 
same angle. The gear 27 is mounted on a 
shaft 28, that is supported by a forked stand 
ard 29. The shaft 28 is provided on one end 
with a right and on the other end with a left 
hand screw-thread, and these screw-threads 
engage similarly-threaded hubs 30, projecting 
from the piston-heads. The rotation of the 
intermeshing spiral gears rotates the shaft, 
which through engaging screw-threads causes 
the pistons to travel back and forth simulta 
neously in opposite directions in the oppo 
sitely-arranged cylinders. 
The differential gears permit a rapid and 
Io 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
continued rotation of the spindle, which gives 
a quick and extended movement to the oper 
ating parts and so greatly reduces the speed 
that the pistons are obliged to move but a very 
short distance and to travel but slowly. The 
arrangement of oppositely-Working pistons in 
oppositely-facing cylinders permits this great 
reduction of speed and movement and still 
provides a powerful controlling means, for 
the combined areas of the pistons Working op 
positely is large, and although moving but 
short distances the resulting action of both is 
such that perfect and sure control can be, with 
a short movement, exercised over a powerful 
and rapid-running driving means. 
The arrangements shown permit the use of 
powerful actuating means, and this enables 
the closer to be used successfully with large 
throttle-valves as well as small. The relations 
of the controlling mechanisms are such that 
the rotating parts are relieved of undue 
strains. The controlling mechanisms placed 
in the manner described can be made very 
compact, for powerful control is exercised with 
a very short movement of the pistons. This 
also permits a perfect working device to be 
built by ordinary labor in an inexpensive 
ale. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In combination with the motive mechan 
isms of a throttle-valve closer, cylinders lo 
cated on opposite sides of the driving-spindle, 
a speed-reducing mechanism connected with 
the driving-spindle, and oppositely-facing pis 
tons movable within the cylinders and pro 
vided with parts connected by intermeshing 
teeth with the speed-reducing mechanism and 
adapted to be given very slow short recti 
linear movementsin opposite directions in the 
cylinders by the rotation of the speed-reduc 
ing mechanism and connected parts, substan 
tially as specified. 
2. In combination with the motive mechan 
isms of a throttle-valve closer, a plural num 
ber of cylinders located on different sides of 
the driving-spindle, a speed-reducing mech 
anism connected with the driving-spindle, 
and a plural number of pistons movable with 
in the cylinders and provided with parts con 
nected by intermeshing teeth with the speed 
reducing mechanism, which parts are so ar 
ranged that the pistons move simultaneously 
oppositely and each of the parts assists in 
guiding the opposite piston from that to which 
it is connected, substantially as specified. 
JOHN R. REYNOLDS. 
75 
95 
IC 
IC 
I 
Witnesses: 
H. R. WILLIAMS, 
E. W. FOTHERGILL, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US604940.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN L. MAT THEWS, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. 
PROTECTIVE cove RING FoR SHiPs ARMOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 604,940, dated May 31, 1898. 
Application filed September 4, 1897, Serial No. 650,624 (No model.) 
. 
. 
which- 
To all, ???, ??, i?; ??? ????????,: 
Beit known that I, JoHNL. MATTHEWS, of 
the city of Baltimore and State of Maryland, 
have invented certain Improvements in Pro 
tective Elastic Coverings for Armor of Iron 
Clad Wessels, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
The object of this invention is the construc 
tion of an elastic composite covering to be at 
tached to the outer surface of the armor to re 
duce the concussion of projectiles, and there 
by prevent the penetration of the armor by 
projectiles, as will hereinafter fully appear. 
In the description of the said invention 
which follows reference is made to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part hereof, in 
Figure 1 is cross-section of a piece of the 
elastic covering, together with a part of the 
armor to be protected. Fig. 2 is a partly-sec 
tional front view of the covering. 
Referring now to the drawings, A repre 
??? a portion of the armor-plate of an iron 
clad. 
B is a plate of steel attached to the armor 
by any suitable means. To this plate of steel 
is united a coating C of some soft metal, such 
as Babbitt metal. 
The union is effected by 
pouring on the outer surface of the steel plate 
the soft metal while in a molten condition, 
its adhesion being effected in a manner simi 
lar to that in the covering of iron and steel 
with zinc in a process commonly known as 
 galvamizing. 
D is a body of rubber which is made as 
hard as possible without materially reducing 
its compressibility and elasticity. To this 
body of rubber is attached a plate E of soft 
metal the composition of which is about the 
same as that of the coating C. This is united 
to the rubber by pouring it onto its surface 
while in a melted condition or onto a sheet 
of tin-foil which is laid on the rubber. In 
either case the metal adheres to the rubber, 
and when the tin-foil is employed the same 
becomes melted by the contact with the mol 
ten Babbitt metal. 
The united rubber and 
Babbitt metal is covered on the inner side 
With a sheet plate F of steel, it being held to 
the steel by means of flanged strips G, which 
are held to the steel by means of screws a. 
IO 
25 
35 
o 
45 
The rubber is sawed lengthwise to form 
grooves b for the reception of the flanges c of 
the strips G and also cut away for the base 
part d of the strips, as shown in Fig. 1. 
Between the steel plate F and the Babbitt 
metal coating Care placed spiral springs II, 
the inner ends of which are passed through the 
Babbitt-metal coating C and the steel plate 
B and the outer end through the steel plate 
F. The ends of the springs are threaded and 
have nuts f, which are seated in recesses S. 
These springs are stiff enough to support the 
plates exterior of them and yet have some 
compressibility. 
The protective covering, composed of the 
various elements as described, is placed in 
strips one upon another over the armor-plate, 
which may be made considerably thinner 
than that generally employed, as the covering 
will protect it, and the lateral edges of the 
outer Babbitt-metal sheets may have a rab 
bet h om one edge and a tongue or lipij on the 
other, as shown. 
In operation a shot striking the outer plate 
E of the Babbitt metal and penetrating it 
carries with it a piece of the said metal, which 
forms a cushion for its end, and the rubber 
and springs have to be destroyed before the 
point of the shot comes into contact with the 
inner Babbitt metal. In continuing its course 
the projectile has to force a portion of the in 
ner soft plate through the inner steel plate, 
so that when it reaches the armor its force 
is considerably spent. 
I do not limit myself to the exact arrange 
ment of the elements of the coverings as de 
scribed, as they may be differently arranged 
to effect the same result. 
I claim as my invention 
A protective coveringfor armor, which con 
sists in the combination of an exterior plate 
of Babbitt metal, a body of rubber applied to 
the inner surface of the said metal, and a 
spring backing secured to the armor and form 
ing a support for the rubber and its outer cov 
ering of Babbitt metal, substantially as speci 
fied. 
JOIN , MATTHEWS. 
Witnesses: 
WM. T. HowARD, 
DANL. FISHER. 
55 
?? 
75 
9o 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605040.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 605,040. 
F. CHASE. 
SEWING MACHINE. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 
Patented May 31, 1898. 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 605,040. 
 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
F. CHASE 
SEWING MACHINE, 
Patented May 31, 1898, 
77 
2-e/e72-607. 
77272 Z (Zazase, 
 
Zasz 
... -N.-- 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK CHASE, OF MALDEN, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO WALTER 
SHAW, TRUSTEE. 
SEWING-MACHINE. 
55 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,040, dated May 31, 1898. 
Application filed May 28, 1895, Renewed August 12, 1896, Serial No. 602,582, (No model.) 
. 
. 
o 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known thatI, FRANK CHASE, of Malden, 
in the county of Middlesex and State of Mas 
sachusetts, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Sewing-Machines, of which 
the following is a specification. . 
Myinvention relates to that class of sewing 
machines in which a hook-needleisused; and 
it consists in a device, termed by me a loop 
keeper,' which enters the loop of thread as 
it is drawn out by the needle, which while, 
the needle is taking a fresh loop holds so 
much of the previous loop as is needed to 
form about one-half of the fresh loop, and 
which when the needle is drawing out the 
fresh loop through the goods renders said 
portion of the previous loop to the needle so as 
to furnish about one half of the thread needed 
for the fresh loop, the remaining half being 
supplied by the spool or other source of thread 
supply. The loop-keeper is thus, in effect, a 
measurer,' which by holding the previously 
formed loop at a certain point and then ren 
dering it to the needle as it draws out a fresh 
loop furnishes to the latter the needed length 
of thread to prevent the thread in the hook 
of the needle (as the latter is drawing the . 
fresh loop through the goods) from moving 
or dragging crosswise in the hook, which ac 
tion, as is well known, results oftentimes in 
the abrasion and cutting of the thread. 
When the sewing mechanism is one in 
which a take-up is used to set the stitch in 
the goods, the loop-keeper also has the added 
function of receiving and resisting the strain 
exercised by the take-up, and thus prevent 
ing that strain from coming upon the needle. 
The final strain occasioned by the action of 
the take-up comes upon the loop-keeper at 
the time it is at restin the position it occupies 
in holding the half loop or length of thread 
needed to furnish about one-half of the fresh 
. 
loop in process of formation. 
The nature of my improvement will b 
readily understood by reference to the accom 
... panying drawings, in which 
Figurel is a side elevation of so much of my 
improved sewing-machine as needed for the 
purpose of explanation. Figs, 2 to 5, inclu 
sive, illustrate the operation of the loop 
keeper. Fig.6 is a table showing the relation 
. 
. 
. 
- 
D is the needle. B is the back gage. 
of the driving mechanism for the loop-keeper 
and the needle during each revolution of the 
main shaft in the machine. shown. . 
The particular form of machine which I 
have selected for the purpose of illustrating 
my improvement is that which is set forth in 
my Letters Patent No. 445,924, dated Febru 
ary 3, 1892. The machine is fully illustrated . 
in my said patent, and I have therefore omit 
ted from the drawings accompanying this 
specification many of the details thereof, re 
taining only such of the principal parts as 
will suffice for the purposes of explanation. 
I have omitted the awl, (except in so far as 
it is shown diagrammatically in Figs. 2 to 5,) 
the channel-gage, and the looper, (except so 
far as it is represented in the conical awl and 
needle passage in the lower end of the back 
gage B.) I remark here that of course any. 
other appropriate form of looper can be used 
in lieu of the particular one represented in 
my said Letters Patent. . 
37 
and 35 constitute what I term in my patent 
the multiple purchase take-up, although 
for the purposes of my present improvement 
I am not limited to this form of take-up. 
29 
is the strap connecting the backgage with the 
take-up, and 38 is the tension. These parts 
operate together substantially in the manner 
described in my patent. 
It is fast on a rock 
A is the loop-keeper. 
shafta, the rocking of which gives the keeper 
its proper motions. This device, in which my 
present improvement is mainly comprised, 
takes the place of the device which in my 
aforesaid Letters Patent is termed the 're 
tarder. In the particular organization herein. 
illustrated it, like the retarder, serves to take 
from the needle the strain which otherwise. 
would be brought upon it when the take-up 
is setting the stitch; but it also has the added 
function of a measurer, which the retarder 
has not. . 
The position occupied by the loop-keeper. . 
with relation to the needle is clearly illus 
trated in the drawings, and their movements 
relatively to each other will be readily under 
stood from the table in Fig. 6 taken in con 
nection with Figs. 2 to 5, inclusive. 
In Fig. 2 the needle has nearly completed 
- 
. 
go 
95 
Ioo 
25 
35 
40 
45 
so 
 
2 
605,040 
its upstroke in drawing out a loop, and the 
loop-keeper A is shown in its lowermost po 
sition. During the remainder of the upstroke 
of the needle (see right-hand end of the table 
in Fig. 6) the keeper makes its upstroke, en 
tering and engaging the loop. Now following 
the table from the left-hand end it will be 
seen that the keeper holds the loop in this 
position a short time, while the needle com 
mences its descent, as seen in Fig. 3, where 
the needle has moved down a short distance. 
Then the keeper commences to descend also 
and continues this movement until about 
half-way down, when it rests. During this 
movement of the keeper the take-up comes 
into operation, taking up so much of the loop 
(about one-half) as rendered by the keeper 
and gives the final strain requisite to set the 
stitch when the keeper comes to rest, and the 
needle completes its downstroke, takes a fresh 
loop, and then recedes on its upstroke until 
its hook reaches the goods, the parts being 
represented in this position in Fig. 4, the 
keeper having held back so much of the old 
loop as will be equal in length to about one 
half of the new one now in process of being 
drawn out by the needle. Then as the needle 
continuing its upstroke pulls this new loop 
through the stock the keeper moves toward 
the stock, as seen in Fig. 5, thereby render 
ing to the needle sufficient thread for one leg 
of the loop to prevent sidewise drag of the 
thread through the hook, the thread for the 
other leg of the loop being drawn from the 
spool or other rihain source of thread-supply. 
This movement continues until the keeper 
has given up all of its thread, at which time 
the needle will have very nearly completed 
its upstroke, the parts at this time reassum 
ing the position shown in Fig. 2. 
I have shown the loop-keeper Aas operated 
by a rock-shaft oscillated by a cam through 
a connecting-rod, as will be clear from Fig. 1 
without further description; but it is obvious 
that these details form no part of my inven 
tion and may be widely varied. The form of 
loop-keeper also is a mere detail, the sub 
stance being that the keeper shallengage the 
loop drawn out by the hook-needle, hold back 
or retin such length thereof only as substan 
tially is needed for one leg of the next suc 
ceeding loop, and then give up this length of 
the old loop to form part of the fresh loop 
drawn out by the needle. 
I have illustrated my invention as applied 
to that class of hook-needle sewing-machines 
in which the stitch is tightened by a take-up; 
but my invention is equally applicable to 
that class of such machines in which ordi 
narily the needle tightens the stitch by a final 
pull on the loop, (the standing thread or 
thread leading from the spool being then 
held,) and when my invention is embodied in 
machines of the latter class the final pull upon 
the loop to tighten the stilels will best be given 
by the keeper instead of th: needle; but in 
this case the keeper would live substantially 
the same Sequence of movement as in the 
other case so far as its "" measuring' function 
is concerned, and the devices which in the 
other class of machines would act as a take 
up would in the case now contemplated act 
simply to draw back the surplus or slack of 
the loop given up by the keeper in moving 
from its highest to its middle position, or the 
position represented in Fig. 4. 
Obviously it would be a mere matter of ad 
justment of the stroke of the keeper to cause 
it to pull the loop to tighten the stitch, and 
it is equally obvious that it is a matter of 
adjustment of the range of movement of a 
take-up whether it shall merely take up the 
slack or surplus thread given up by the 
keepel' in moving down to the position shown 
in IFig. 4, or whether in addition to taking up 
this slack it shall exercise the further pull 
needed to set the Stitch. 
What I claim, therefore, as new and of my 
own invention is 
1. The combination with the hook-needle 
and its looper, of a loop-keeper, located on 
that side of the work to which the loop is 
pulled by the needle, having a movement to 
and from the work with an intermediate pe 
riod of rest during its loop-rendering move 
ment, and actuating mechanism therefor, 
timed in their movements relatively to, and 
operating in connection with, the needle sub 
stantially as described, and means by which 
the slack or Surplus of the old loop rendered 
by the loop-keeper before it attains its inter 
mediate position of rest is drawn back to the 
side of the stock on which the needle takes 
its loops before the needle pulls the new loop 
through the stock; all substantially as here 
in before set forth. 
2. The combination with the hook-needle 
and its looper and the take-up for tightening 
the stitch, of a loop-keeper, located on that 
side of the work to which the loop is pulled 
by the needle, having a movement to and 
from the work with an intermediate period 
of rest during its loop-rendering movement, 
and actuating mechanism therefor, timed in 
their movements relatively to the needle and 
take-up substantially as described, whereby 
the loop-keeper retains that portion of the 
old loop needed to furnish the requisite sup 
ply of thread to one leg of the new loop, and 
at the same time takes the strain occasioned 
by the action of the take-up in setting the 
stitch, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 20th day of May, 1895. 
r 
FRANK CITASE. 
Witnesses: 
H. D. BATES, 
I. B. SPENCER. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
S5 . 
75 
95 
OO 
IOS 
C. 
IIS 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605140.txt	(No. Model.) 
. 
No. 605,140, 
J. D. SCHOFIELD, 
ADJUSTABLE CULTIVATOR TOOTH SEAT, 
Patented June 7, 1898. 
 
 
 
 
es 
2Zage 
N 64% S. 
S t 
N syks 
 
a 
WNESSES 
areSS SC-a-- Af z-z-A52/20/e6% 
22-6 sztes 
627 yaee/. 
- 
 
a. . 
. 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES DRUMMOND SCHOFIELD, OF DALLAs, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
TEXAS IMPLEMENT AND MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ADJUSTABLE CULTIVATOR-Tooth sEAT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,140, dated June 7, 1898. 
Application filed October 28, 1897, Serial No. 656,696, (No model.) 
- - 
To all whom it may conceriu: 
to may as well be applied to any of the ordi- . 
nary styles of cultivator-tooth fastenings in 
Beit known that IJAMESDRUMMOND SCHO 
FIELD, a citizen of the United States, residing 
general use as to the one which I have selected 
at Dallas, in the county of Dallas and State of 
and which is herein illustrated and described. 55 
Texas, have invented certain new and use 
The tooth-fastening herein shown is what . 
ful Improvements in Adjustable Cultivator is known as the friction-clutch fastener, 
Tooth Seats; and I do hereby declare the fol 
and it comprises an inner yoke - casting 1 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
(illustrated in detail in Fig. 3) and an outer 
pivotal tooth-supporting casting 2. 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
The yoke-casting 1 comprises a semicylin 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
I drical or concaved seat 3, designed to em 
My invention relates to improvements in 
brace in the present instance a cylindrical 
cultivator-toothfastenings, the object in view cultivator-beam 4, and upper and lower ver 
tically-alining plates or wings 5 and 6, re 
being to so construct the ordinary clutch cul 
tivator-toothfastener as to permit of a radial 
spectively. These wings are offset from the 
adjustment of the same upon the cultivator 
concaved seat of the yoke-casting, so that 
beam, whereby said fastener is adapted to re 
between the two wings 5 and 6 there is formed 
ceive and support in a vertical manner the 
a cavity 7. Pivoted on the lower wing 6 by 
shanks of various styles of cultivator-teeth. 
means of an eyebolt 8 is the tooth-support 
With this main object in view my invention 
ing casting 2 hereinbefore mentioned, the 
consists in providing the yoke-casting of the 
same having formed at its lower end the 
tooth-fastening with a vertically-elongated 
flanged tooth-seat 9 for the reception of the 
bolt-opening, whereby said casting may be 
shank 10 of the cultivator-tooth. It will be 
moved to a degree and in a circumferential 
obvious that by passing the shank 10 of the 
line about the cultivator-beam, and, further 
tooth through the eyebolt 8 the nut 11 of said 
bolt may be run down upon the same, and 
more, in providing a convenient means of 
locking the said casting upon the cultivator 
thus cause the said shank to be drawn snugly 
beam at any point of its circumferential ad 
into the concaved seats 12, formed in the seat 
justment, so as to adapt the fastening as a 
flange 9. The upper end of the tooth-seat 
whole to the disposition of the shank of the 
support 2 is formed with a hook 13, which 
alines with a slot 14, the edges of which are 
cultivator-tooth. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
toothed. A bolt 15 passes through the hook 
side elevation of a cultivator-tooth fastening 
13 and the slot 14 and may be adjusted at 
any point in the slot, thus giving the proper 
constructed in accordance with my invention 
and arranged in operative position upon a 
rake or slant to the tooth-shank. A handle 
cultivator-beam. Fig. 2 is a vertical trans 
16 is threaded on the bolt 15 between wash 
verse sectional view through the same, the 
ers 17, and it will be, seen that by moving the 
cultivator-tooth shank being removed. Fig. 
handle to the rear it will loosen the bolt and 
3is an elevation of the yoke-casting comprised: 
by moving it to the front it will tighten said 
in the fastening. 
bolt, whereby it may be secured at any point 
Fig. 4 comprises details in 
rear view and side elevation of the locking 
of its adjustment in the slot 14. 
Washer. 
The only essential feature contained in the 
foregoing description is the concaved seat 3, 
Like numerals of reference indicate like 
parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
that embraces the beam 4. Any other tooth 
As the cultivator-tooth fastening in con fastening having this feature may be pro 
vided with the improvements to be described. 
nection with which my invention is illus 
trated is but one of the many forms of well 
... It is usual to provide the yoke-casting 1 at 
known devices for this purpose and forms no 
its seat 3 with a circular or square bolt-hole, 
part of my invention, a brief description of 
the same being of such size as to fit the bolt 
18, which is passed through corresponding 
the same will be sufficient, it being under 
stood that the invention hereinafter referred 
bolt-holes 19, formed in the beam 4 and in a 
75 
. 
go 
95 
Ioc 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
so 
2 
605,140 
rear clamping-plate 20. In the present in 
stance, however, in lieu of such bolt-hole be 
ing formed in the seat 3 I form a vertically 
elongated oblong opening 21, which exceeds 
in length the diameter of the bolt, and hence 
will permit of a limited circumferential move 
ment of the tooth-fastening as a whole. The 
front surface of the seat 3, or what may be 
lmore properly termed the bottom of the 
cavity 7, is, immediately surrounding the 
opening 21, provided with a raised annular 
toothed portion or surface 22, which is curved 
concentrically with the seat 3. Interposed 
between the head 23 of the bolt and the afore 
said toothed surface 22 is the locking-washer 
24. This washer is provided with a square 
opening 25, has its inner side concaved to 
conform with the toothed surface 22, and, 
like said surface, is provided with transverse 
teeth 26, designed to interlock there with at 
any point of its annular adjustment thereon. 
By loosening the nut 20 of the bolt; 1S it will 
be observed that the teeth of the washer 24 
will but loosely engage with the toothed sur 
face 23 of the yoke-casting, and it will be seen 
that this will permit of a rotary movement 
upon the part of the tooth-fastener, whereby 
the cultivator-tooth may be brought to a vor 
tical position, and by a subsequent tighton 
ing of the nut 20 the bolt-hoad 23 will serve 
to draw or force the washer 24 into locking 
ongagement with the teeth 22, and thereby 
resecure the tooth-fastener as a whole upon 
the bean. 
From the foregoing it will be seen that I 
have produced a very simple and inexpensive 
improvement to be applied to the usual tooth 
fastener, whereby cultivator-teeth having dif 
ferently-disposed shanks may be properly ad 
justed in position and secured. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
IIaving described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. The combination with a cylindrical cul 
tivator-beam, of a tooth-fastening having a 
concaved seat fitting said beam, the seat of 
said fastening being provided with an elon 
gated opening, a bolt passed through the beam 
and the opening and of less diameter than 
the length of the opening, and a clamping 
washer interposed between the head of the 
bolt and that portion of the tooth-fastener 
surrounding the elongated opening. 
2. The combination with a cylindrical cul 
tivator-beam, of a cultivator-tooth seat mount 
ed and adapted for circumferential adjust 
ment, thereon, and means for Securing the 
said tooth-seat at any point of its said cir 
cumferential adjustment. 
3. The combination with a cultivator-beam 
cylindrical in cross-section, of a tooth-fas 
tener having a concaved seat fitting the beam 
and provided with a vertically - elongated 
opening having a raised toothed surrounding 
surface and alining with smaller, transverse 
openings formed in the beam, a bolt passing 
through the openings in the beam and fas 
tener and having a diameter less than the 
length of the opening in the latter, a nut, on 
the rear end of the bolt and a concaved, toothed 
washer having an opening fitting the bolt and 
designed to interlock with the teeth surround 
ing the opening in the fastener and interposed 
between the head of the bolt and the fastener. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JANIES I) RUMM()N) S(SOE), 
Witnesses: 
E. G. EISENLOHR, 
J. C. IIAMTBERLIN. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605240.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 605,240, 
 
 
 
2A 
A 
VWitnesses 
C. W. TROTTER, 
FURN ACE, 
Patented June 7, 1898. 
2/ 
A 7 
/8 
1/8 
2O 20 
22 
M2 
24 
23 
/3 
b 
- - - - - - - - 
4 
6 
SN S 
/3 
N 
a 
Avata a 
s<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<ssssssssssssssssssssssss ? & 
!zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzaezzZZZZZZZZ) 
2 
In Ventor. 
Attorney 
the Norris PETERS co. Photo-rho was Nestor D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES W. TROTTER, OF ROCHESTER, NEW YORK. 
FURNACE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,240, dated June 7, 1898. 
Application filed. January 29, 1898, Serial No. 668,423, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, CHARLES W. TROTTER, 
of Rochester, in the county of Monroe and 
State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Furnaces; and 
I do hereby declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification, and 
to the reference-numerals marked thereon. 
My present invention relates to hot-air fur 
naces, and has for its object to improve their 
construction and operation, whereby the heat 
derived from the combustion of the fuel may 
be economized and thoroughly distributed and 
all the apartments evenly heated irrespective 
of the length or inclination of the conductor 
pipes; and to these ends it consists in certain 
improvements and combinations of parts, all 
as will be hereinafter fully described, and the 
novel features pointed out particularly in the 
claims at the end of this specification. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal 
sectional view of a furnace containing myim 
provements; Fig. 2, a cross-sectional view, 
and Fig. 3 a horizontal sectional view on the 
line acac of Fig. 2. 
Similar reference-numerals indicate simi 
lar parts. 
The furnace proper embodies a suitable body 
1, preferably rectangular and having the fire 
box. 2, lined with fire-brick 3, as usual, the 
grate 4, ash-pit 5, fuel-door 6, and ash-pit 
door 7. Extending transversely of the body 
1 and above the fire-box are a series of sub 
stantially horizontal pipes or passages 8, four 
being shown herein, each preferably con 
structed of cast metal of sufficient thickness 
to withstand the heat and having at the ends 
flanges 9, abutting against the inner sides of 
the body and secured by bolts 10, passing 
through said flanges, the body, and the outer 
rings 11. The pipes 8 are provided with the 
centrally - arranged tubular extensions 12, 
preferably oval in cross-section, as in Fig. 3, 
passing through the top of the furnace-body 
and secured to the latter by flanges 9, bolts 
10, and rings 11 in a manner similar to the 
fastenings for the ends of the tubes, said ex 
tensions having the vertical partitions 13 
therein for directing vertically the air enter 
ing the ends of the horizontal portions. At 
. . 
. 
. 
. 
tached to the ends of the pipes 8 are depend 
ing air-supply pipes 14, preferably of sheet 
metal, extending toward the bottom of the 
furnace, but within the outer casing 15, and 
adapted to receive air, which enters said cas 
ing through the cold-air pipe 16 or otherwise, 
and cause it to rise through the pipes 8 and 
the extensions 12. 
17 and 18 indicate conductor-pipes connect 
ed to the upper portion of the casing 15 and ar 
ranged to receive the warm air and distribute 
it to the various chambers, and 20 are mov 
able collars sliding upon the upper ends of 
the extensions 12 and preferably longer than 
the distance between said extensions and the 
conductor-pipes 18, arranged over them and 
constituting a direct connection between the 
extensions 12 and the conductors. The air 
drawn into the pipes 14 is heated in the pipes 
8, which are directly over the fire, and de 
livered directly into the conductor-pipes 18, 
so that each of the latter may be supplied 
with sufficient hot air irrespective of its 
length or inclination. I have shown four pipes 
8 and corresponding conductor-pipes 18; but 
it will be understood that a greater or lesser 
number could be employed, if desired, and 
the length of the furnace increased or dimin 
ished. The pipes 18- are provided with suit 
able dampers 21, by means of which they can 
be closed when desirable or necessary, and in 
order that the heated air from the pipes 8 
whose conductors are closed may be utilized 
the collars 20 are adjustable, so as to permit 
pipes 8 and 12 to discharge into the casing 
15 and the heated air be permitted to pass 
through the general conductors 17 or through 
others of the conductors 18 whose connect 
ing-collars 20 are open, as shown at the right 
of Fig.1. 
Any suitable devices may be em 
ployed for holding the collars-as, for in 
stance, notched rods 22, coperating with the 
sides of suitable apertures formed on the cas 
ing 15. 
The smoke-pipe of the furnace (indicated 
by 23) is preferably arranged at the rear and 
upper part of the furnace, and the pipes 8, in 
connection with the top of the furnace, form 
a smoke-flue. If said pipes 8 are arranged 
as far apart as shown or are made round, I 
close or partially close the spaces between 
them and also between the last pipe of the 
95 
IOO 
O 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
4O 
s 
So 
 
2 
605,240 
O 
2O 
I5 
Series and the rear of the body by means of 
plates or slabs 24, preferably provided with 
apertures 25 to permit the escape of gas. A 
space is left between the front pipe S and 
the casing, so that all the heat and products 
from the fire will operate upon the lower sides 
of all of the pipes 8, then pass to the front 
and Over said pipes to the smoke-pipe, thereby 
effectually heating them on all sides and also 
the upper part of the furnace-body, thus util 
izing in the best 
possible manner all the 
heat derived from the fuel. By making the 
plates 24 flush with the top of the pipes 8 and 
providing a cleaning-door 26 in the front of 
the furnace the tops of the pipes and the 
smoke-flue formed thereby may be readily 
cleaned, the contents being drawn forward 
and permitted to drop directly into the fire 
box. 
The size and capacity of the furnace may 
be increased as desired by the employment 
of additional pipes 8, with their attachments, 
and by the damper arrangements shown any 
- or all of the conductor-pipes 18 may have a 
25 
Separate direct supply of hot air, thus obviat 
ing the difficulty incident to the use of the 
ordinary furnace, in which all the conduc 
tors are supplied from the surrounding cas 
ing, and the Supply of hot air from some con 
ductors will be very voluminous and from 
others very meager. 
Other forms of damper and connections be 
tWeen the pipes 8 and the conductors 18 may 
be employed instead of the adjustable collars 
20; but those are simple and cheap in con 
struction and I prefer them for this reason. 
By arranging the pipes 8 so that the heated 
products from the fire pass under and over 
them they are not liable to burn out and at 
the same time they are thoroughly heated a 
all times. 
30 
35 
- 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination with the furnace-body 
having the fire-box and smoke-pipe, of the 
pipes arranged substantially horizontally 
Over the fire-box provided with the vertical 
extensions, the partitions therein, and the de 
pending Supply-pipes at the ends, the outer 
Casing, the conductor-pipe leading therefrom, 
and means for connecting the extensions di 
rectly with the conductors, substantially as 
described. 
2. The combination with the furnace-body 
having the fire-box and the smoke-pipe, the 
horizontal air-pipes arranged over the fire 
box, and forming a smoke-flue between said 
45 
55 
pipes and the top of the furnace-body, and a 
cleaning-aperture arranged in the body in line 
with the smoke-?lue over the pipes, substan 
tially as described. 
3. The combination with the furnace-body 
having the fire-box and smoke-pipe, the sub 
stantially horizontal air-pipes having the de 
pending Supply-pipes at the ends, and the cen 
tral discharge extensions, of the outer casing, 
the air-conductors leading therefrom, and 
movable pipe collars or sleeves for connecting 
the discharge extensions of the horizontal 
pipes With the conductor-pipes, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination with the furnace-body 
and the fire-box and smoke-pipe, of the hori 
Zontal air-pipes extending over the fire-box 
and below the smoke-pipe and forming a flue 
at the top of the body and between it and the 
pipes, a casing around the furnace-body, con 
ductor-pipes leading from the top thereof, 
and detachable pipe connections between the 
horizontal air-pipes and the conductor-pipes, 
Substantially as described. 
5. The combination with the furnace-body 
having the fire-box, the horizontal air-pipes 
arranged above the fire-box having the ver 
tical extensions passing through the furnace 
body, and the partitions therein, of the outer 
casing, the conductor-pipes connected there 
to and having dampers therein, and means 
for connecting the vertical extensions of the 
horizontal pipes directly with the conductor 
pipes or permitting them to discharge into 
the casing, substantially as described. 
6. The combination with the furnace-body 
having the fire-box, the horizontal air-pipes 
arranged above the fire-box, having vertical 
eXtensions passing above the furnace-body, 
of the outer casing, the conductor-pipes lead 
ing therefrom, the vertically-adjustable col 
lars coperating with the pipe extensions and 
with the conductor-pipes, substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. In a furnace, the combination with the 
furnace-body, and the fire-box, air-pipes pass 
ing over the fire-box and discharging above 
the furnace-body, of the outer casing, the con 
ductor-pipes connected there with and adjust 
able collars for connecting the pipe exten 
sions with the conductor-pipes, substantially 
as described. 
CHARLES W. TROTTER. 
Witnesses: 
F. F. CHURCH, 
G. A. RODA. 
75 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605340.txt	.."--- - - - - - - - - - - 
6 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
(No Model.) 
W. B. PLACE 
MACHINE FOR ASSEMBLING HEADS OF CARTRIDGE SHELLS, 
No. 605,340, 
Patented June 7, 1898. 
Z27, 
(so 
92 
71 
52 
------ - - - 
8 
a- - - - 
--S- 
-- is 
83 
4. 
39 40 
MO6 
3 
4. 
M/ 
6 
7 
a 
ce. 
- 4 
7/4 
// 
A/ 
v/ 
8 
- E 
' 
----- 
&OFsses O O.J. 
. 
O 
- - - - - - - - 
22- - - 
M 
1 - . 
O O 
FC 
- 
47. 
44 
443 
60 
6/ 
| 
4% 46 
49 
| -- 
2. 
17: 4. 
88 | N. - 
I :- 
--- 
as 
Ji 
Gallis II, 
47. 
-- 
| 
83 
/6; 
6, 
- 
5.3% 
9e: 
E: 
36 E. 3.1 
30 
L 
/20 
f 
734 ... v2/ 
- 
ra. 
a0 
48 
Z) 
Z 
2 
/13 
712zzesses. /3 
i 
I' 
I 
/40 t 
A. 
Z7zzezz27 
THE NORRIS PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo, washington, d.c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 605,340, 
MACHINE FOR ASSEMBLING HEADS OF CARTRIDGE SHELLs, 
W. B. P 
LACE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 7, 1898. 
60 
-1 
82 
7 
86 
87 
90 \ 
9/ 
9. 
3 
7/08 
'a? A/S 
5. 
W 
no - ... \ 4- 
ITVSS) 
A?o 
40 
39 
Z. 
m 
- 
6 - 
I 
- 
- 
-\72 (- - - 4 
R 
f 
M// WZ 
991, 
89 \ 
93. 
3. A 
3. 
3. 
3& 4 
3. 
W3 
92- M6 
- - - 
it 
/ 
30 
4./ 
46 
X44 
45 
s: 
pil-2 
AO 
s A/ 
a 
-79 
IL66 
9 
if 
I-14 
59 
y 
\\ 
M6 
//7 
/ A 49 
M20 
-60 
36 
36 
----- - - - - - - - - - -Asia-1 
/21 
v 
// 
/0 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - 
Erik 
9 G8 
M 
= 
HR 
t 
1/4 
as Z7zzezzzz 
742 - 602-e 
71227zasses 
(S&SN. 5W. 
ThE NORRIS Pet 
ERS CO. PHOTO-LTHO, wash NGTON, C. c. 
(No Model.) 
W. B. PLACE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet, 4. 
MACHINE FOR ASSEMBLING HEADS OF CARTRIDGE SHELLS, 
No. 605,340, 
 
& 
Patented June 7, 1898. 
&s-s 
N - 'S 
Sve 
w 
- 
 
Z/2Z7zesses. 
SNSW 5&s. 
yuh. 4.- 
%, 3.- 
%a. 
toRRIS PETERS co, PHOTo-LTHo, washington, 
W. B. PLACE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
MACHINE FOR ASSEMBLING HEADS OF CARTRIDGE SHELLS, 
(No Model.) 
No. 605,340, 
Patented June 7, 1898. 
 
Zail 
2. 
7. 
761 
r 
2. 
23 
73 
72. 
\\ 
72 
71%zzesses. 
ye.8 
(No Model.) 
No. 605,340, 
 
 
  
 
 
 
762zzesses 
MACHINE FOR ASSEMBLING HEADS OF CARTRIDGE SHELLS, 
W. B. PLACE, 
6 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
Patented June 7, 1898. 
6. 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS|>e?, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM B. PLACE, OF KINGS MILLS, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO TITE PETERS 
CARTRIDGE COMPANY., OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
- MACHINE FOR ASSEMBLING HEADS OF CARTRIDGE-SHELLS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,840, dated June 7, 1898. 
Application filed March 26, 1894, 
To all uhon, it inctly conce77. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM B. PLACE, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at King's 
Mills, in the county of Warren and State of 
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Ma 
chine for Assembling the Heads of Cartridge 
Shells, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to machinery for use 
in the manufacture of cartridge-shells; and 
it has for its object the provision of mechan 
ism for automatically preparing a cartridge 
shell and placing a head thereon. 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists in the construction, location, and rela 
tive arrangements hereinafter more particu 
larly described, as shown in the accompany 
ing drawings, and finally pointed out in the 
appended claims. 
Reference is now had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part hereof, and to the 
several views and reference letters and nu 
merals appearing thereon, wherein 
Figure 1 is a view in front elevation of my 
entire machine. Fig. 2 is a view in side ele 
Vation of the same, looking from the left of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a horizontal sectional view 
taken on the line acac, Fig. 1, the head-feed 
ing chute being removed. Fig. 4 is a central 
vertical sectional view through the shell-tur 
ret, showing in central vertical section the 
lower end of the feed-chute and showing the 
cartridge-head-transferring device suspend 
ing a cartridge-head in position to be forced 
on the end of a cartridge-shell. Fig. 5 is a 
view in front elevation of the feeding-chute 
cend agitating-chamber. Fig. 6 is a central 
Vertical Sectional view of the same, taken on 
the line y J, Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a detailed view 
of the mechanism for removing the shells 
from the turret after the heads have been 
laced thereon, parts being in section. Fig. 
S is a detailed view in vertical section, show 
if, g the action of the crimping-die and strip 
per. Fig. 9 is a detailed view of the cam for 
elevating and depressing the shell-holders in 
the turret. Fig. 10 is a front view in detail 
of the lower end of the feeding-chute. Fig. 
11 is a view in detail of the head-transferring 
mechanism. 
Similar letters and numerals of reference 
55 
Serial No. 505,204. (No model.) 
refer to and designate similar parts wherever 
they occur throughout the several views. 
A designates a table or base-plate, which 
may be suitably supported in any convenient 
way. Suitably secured to and rising from 
table A are two standards or castings BC, 
The main driving-shaft is journaled in suit 
able boxes formed in or bolted to the upper 
ends of standards B and C. On the end of 
shaft D is mounted a drive-wheel E, which is 
adapted to receive rotary motion from any 
suitable source of power by belting or other 
Any ordinary and conveniently-ar 
WSe. 
ranged clutch mechanism M maybe employed 
for throwing shaft ID into and out of opera 
tion, as occasion may require, and therefore 
I have not deemed it necessary to show in 
detail any means for this purpose. 
The portion of main driving-shaft D be 
tween the two uprights or standards B and C 
is formed into a crank-arm F. Operated by 
crank-arm F is a pitman-rod G, which is piv 
otally connected at its lower end to a plun 
ger-head II, adapted to reciprocate vertically 
in suitable guideways formed in or bolted to 
the inner faces of standards Band C, as shown 
at 1 and 2 in Fig. 3. Plunger-head II carries 
the head-setting die and the shell extracting 
or ejecting mechanism, as will more fully 
hereinafter appear. 
On the opposite end of main shaft D. from 
the main drive-wheel E is mounted a plate or 
disk 3, having a crank-pin 4 projecting from 
the face thereof, which is adapted to work in 
a slot 5 in the upper end of a lever 6, pivoted 
centrally to standard B, as at 7. The lower 
end of lever 6 is pivoted at S to a link 9, which 
is in turn pivoted, as at 10, to a slide-block 
11, sliding in suitable guideways 1212, formed 
in or bolted to standard B. In the front end 
of guide-block 11 is pivotally mounted a pawl 
13, adapted to engage ratchet-teeth 14, formed 
in the periphery of circular flange 15, cast 
with or secured to the shell-feeding turret 16. 
(See Figs. 1, 2, and 3.) A spring 17, attached 
at one end to the pivoted pawl 13 and at the 
other end to a fixed lug upon the block in 
which said pawl is pivoted, serves to keep the 
end of the pawl in constant engagement with 
the ratchet-teeth 14 and at the same time per 
mits said pawl to ride over the teeth upon its 
Id 
I5. 
3O 
35 
45 
7 o 
95 
OO 
605,840 
IO 
rearward reciprocation after rotating the tur 
as clearly shown in Fig. 4. By this construc 
ret one step on its forward reciprocation. The 
tion the case-supporting pins are prevented 
operation of this part of my machine is as fol 
from being removed from their seats in the 
lows: Rotary motion is imparted to main shaft 
turret, except from the under side thereof. 
D. The crank-pin 4 in the face of plate 3, 
Suitably secured to the top of table A, as by 
operating in slot 5 of lever 6, serves to oscil 
pins or screws 33, are circularly-arranged 
late or rock said lever about its pivot. The 
cam-plates 34 35, adapted to be received in 
link 9, pivoted to the lower end of said rock 
the groove 27 in the lower face of the turret. 
ing or oscillating lever, reciprocates slide 
The heads 32 of the case-supporting pins 30 
block 11 back and forth. Upon each forward 
rest upon these cam-plates and are held there 
reciprocation of said slide-block, the turret 
on by gravity, said pins being usually cast, 
carrying the shells is rotated one step by the 
solid. The cam-plates serve to elevate or de 
engagement with ratchet-teeth 14 thereon of 
press the pins in their sockets 25 during the 
pivoted pawl 13, carried by the slide-block. 
rotation of the turret in order to bring the 
The rearward reciprocation of said block 
shells 36 carried thereon into proper eleva 
causes the pawl to ride over the next adjacent 
tion to be acted upon by the several mech 
ratchet tooth or teeth, as the case may be, into 
anisms, as will be hereinafter more particu 
position to rotate the turret another step upon 
larly described. A perforation may be pro 
a new forward reciprocation of the block and 
vided in flange 38 of table A, as at the point 
pawl. By these means the turret carrying 
37, Figs. 4 and 9, through which the pins 30 
the shells is given a step-by-step rotation 
may be removed from the turret by with 
through a predetermined distance upon each 
drawing a slide-plate 37, which covers said 
complete revolution of the main shaft, thus 
perforation, as will be readily understood. 
presenting the shells successively to the ac 
I will now describe the wad-gage and the 
tion of the Wad-gage, the crimping-die, the 
crimper-die for crimping the end of the shell 
head-placer and plunger-setter, and the ex 
case preparatory to receiving a head. On 
tractor or ejector, as will be more fully here 
the end of main shaft D, adjacent to the 
inafter explained. 
main drive-wheel, is eccentrically mounted a 
I will now describe the construction of the 
disk 39, adapted to receive an eccentric-strap 
shell carrier or turret, into which the open 
40, having a short arm 41 projecting there 
ended shells are fed by an operator and by 
from. In a stationary block or bearing 42, se 
which they are successively presented to the 
cured or bolted to standard C, is journaled a 
various mechanisms hereinafter described. 
short shaft 43, having a crank-arm 44 45 on 
Reference is particularly had to Figs. 4 and 8. 
each end thereof. Short arm 41, carried by 
The turret 16 is provided with a centrally 
eccentric-strap 40, is pivoted to a pin 46, car 
bored hub 19, adapted to receive a pin or pin 
ried by crank-arm 44. By reason of the 
tle 18, which is supported in a socket in ta 
eccentricity of strap 40 a rocking motion is 
ble or base-plate A and about which said tur 
given to the end of the short arm 41, and 
ret is adapted to rotate. Pin 18 is provided 
this motion is imparted through pin 46 and 
with an enlargement 20, forming a shoulder 
crank-arm 44 to shaft 43, whereby said shaft 
which rests upon the top of table A and which 
is rocked or partially rotated back and forth 
is received in the bore of hub 19. The upper 
upon each revolution of main shaft D. 
end of pin 18 is screw-threaded, as at 21 22, 
Adapted to slide vertically, through a perfo 
and nuts 2324 are provided for clamping the 
ration in a stationary block or bearing 47, 
turret to the top surface of the table A tight 
bolted or otherwise secured to standard C, is 
enough to offer sufficient frictional resistance 
a rod 48. In order to further steady said rod 
to the rotation of said turret to hold it against 
in its vertical reciprocations, its lower end is 
rotation until it is acted upon by the pawl 
adapted to pass through a vertical perfora 
mechanism above described. Turret 16 is 
tion in base-plate or table A, and a spring 48* 
provided through the rim thereof with a series 
is coiled around said rod between a collar 
of perforations or sockets 25, countersunk, as 
thereon and the top of the table A. (See 
at 26, in the upper face thereof. A bushing 
Fig. 1.) The upper end of said rod is ar 
28 is secured in the countersink 26 in the 
ranged in the path of oscillation of crank-arm 
upper end of perforations or sockets 25 by 
45 on shaft 43, said crank-arm thus acting as 
means of bolts 29. Loosely arranged in sock 
a cam to force arm 48 in a downward direc 
ets or perforations 25 are the shell-supporting 
tion. Afriction-roller 49 may be provided 
pins 30, the top portions of which are of a 
to reduce the friction of contact between 
size to snugly fit inside a shell-case, and they 
crank-arm 45 and the upper end of rod 48. 
are provided with an enlarged portion 31, 
A strong spring 50, attached at one end to a 
adapted to fit snugly in the bore or perfora 
stationary part of the framework and at the 
tion 25 and at the same time form a shoulder 
other end to a reciprocating part of rod 48, 
against which the end of the shell rests. The 
resists the action of cam-arm 45 and tends to 
lower ends of pins 30 are formed into a head 
elevate rod 48 into constant contact with said 
32, which is received in a groove 27 in the 
cam-arm. Rod 48 carries a block 50, adjust 
lower face of turret 16 and extending com 
ably collared thereon to reciprocate there 
pletely around the rim thereof. The perfo 
with, which is provided with a perforated 
rations 25 communicate with said grooves 27, flange 51. In one of the perforations in said 
25 
35 
45 
so 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
IO5 
II5 
I 25 
605,840 
3. 
O 
5 crimping - die 53. 
75 
by gravity down into its socket 25 until the 
flange is carried a hollow sleeve 52, in which 
top or crimped end of the shell comes very 
is suitably supported the crimping - die 53. 
nearly flush with the top face of the turret 
A projecting portion 54 of said flange is also 
for a purpose presently to be described. 
perforated and is adapted to support in said 
It is desirable to have the shell-supporting 
perforation a sleeve 55, in which is supported 
pins 30 drop back into their sockets as soon 
the wad-gage 56. Upon the lower end of the 
as they ride off the end of cam-plate 34 at the 
Wad-gage 56 is a collar 57, and interposed be 
point 63, Fig. 9, in order that they may prop 
tween said collar and the under face of pro 
erly present the crimped ends to the head 
jecting portion 54 of flange 51 and coiled 
transferring and setting devices. To avoid 
around the Wad-gage is a spring 58. Upon 
the possibility of the pins wedging so as not 
the upper end of Wad-gage 56 are adjusting 
to descend by gravity, I mount a pusher 64 on 
nuts 59, by which the amount of projection 
the reciprocating head H, which acts to push 
rcyf the Wad-gage is determined, and hence the 
the pins and crimped shells carried thereon 
position to which the wads are gaged in the 
fully home in their sockets before they reach 
shells may be regulated. The action of spring 
the head-placer and die. By this means I 
5S is to permit the gage to yield against ex 
avoid the possibility of injuring the shell 
cessive pressure on the wad in the shell and 
case by the setting - die coming in contact 
thus avoid injury in case the shell-supporting 
there with, while its crimped end projects ab 
pin, and consequently the shell, is out of its 
normally above the top surface of the turret. 
normal position when brought underneath 
In the lower face of die II is formed a dove 
the gage during the rotation of turret 16. 
tailed guideway adapted to receive a dove 
A rod 60 is adjustably held in a bracket 61, 
tailed block 65, in which the shank of the 
suitably secured to standard C. This rod 
head-setting die 66 is adjustably held. (See 
projects downwardly through the hollow 
Fig. 1.) This die is adapted to engage a car 
(See Figs. 1, 3, and S.) 
tridge-head 67, held in place immediately over 
The lower end of the crimping-die is flared 
the crimped end of a shell by the transferring 
into a conically-shaped mouth, and when the 
device, and force the same firmly and securel 
die descends the end of the shell is received 
onto the end of said shell. (See Fig. 4.) In 
therein and is crimped, as clearly shown in 
order to provide a firm support for the shell 
Fig. S. The object of rod 60 is to strip the 
supporting pin to resist the action of the head 
shell from the crimping-die when said die is 
placing die, I provide a screw-threaded bolt 
elevated should the shell adhere thereto by 
66", adapted to be received in a screw-threaded 
frictional contact. The operation of this part 
socket in table A and to support the shell 
of the machine is as follows: Suppose the 
supporting pins during the action of the plac 
parts be in the position shown in Fig. 1, with 
ing-die, as clearly shown in Fig. 4. Upon 
a shell in position to be acted upon by the 
further rotation of the turret the shell-hold 
Wad-gage. 
Main shaft D is thrown into op 
ing pins reach the point 67 of cam 35 and 
eration, and the plunger-rod 48, carrying the 
begin to ride up its inclined surface, thus 
gage and crimping-die, is forced down by cam 
causing the headed shells to project above the 
arm 45 on a shaft 43 by the rocking of said 
surface of the turret (see Fig. 2) in position 
shaft through its connection with eccentric 
to be grasped by the extractor mechanism 
40. The end of the gage enters the 
strap 
and removed from the machine. I will now 
open end of the shell carried by the turret 
describe the construction of the mechanism 
and forces the Wad therein down to the neces 
for accomplishing this purpose. 
sary point, where it will not be injured by nor 
In a perforated lug 68, cast with or secured 
interfere with the operation of the crimping 
to reciprocating head II, is adjustably held a 
die. Further revolution of the main shaft 
hollow sleeve G9. This sleeve is enlarged at 
rocks shaft 43 in the opposite direction, thus 
its lower end, and in said enlargement is pro 
relieving the pressure of cam-arm 45 on the 
vided two oppositely-inclined passages 7071, 
upper end of plunger-rod 4S, allowing spring 
one on each side, communicating with the in 
50 to elevate said rod and with it the gage and 
terior of said sleeve. Carried in each of these 
crimping-die. During this elevation of the 
inclined passages is a solid circular block 72, 
rod 48 the pawl-and-ratchet mechanism oper 
slotted, as at 73, to receive a pin 74, carried, 
ates to further rotate turret 16, so as to bring 
by a bolt 75, screw-threaded at its upper end 
the shell-case into position to be operated 
to receive an adjusting-nut 76, adapted to 
upon by the crimping-die. Another revolu 
Support and adjust said bolts and block, as 
tion of shaft D causes rod 48 to be forced 
clearly shown in Fig. 7. The inner or oppos 
down, and the crimping - die receives and 
ing faces of blocks 72 are beveled off, as shown 
crimps the end of the shell. The rod 60 strips 
at 77, and the lower end of each is provided 
the shell from the crimper when said crimper 
with a hook or shoulder, as at 78, and on the 
is again elevated should the shell stick there 
extreme lower end is beveled,as clearly shown. 
to. The cam-plate 34 is so shaped as to afford 
When plunger-head II descends, the beveled 
a firm base or support for the shell-supporting 
lower faces or ends of blocks 72 strike the 
pins 30 during the action of the gage and 
rim of the head on the end of the shell, and 
crimping-die. Upon further rotation of the 
said blocks are forced upwardly as the plun 
turret the point 63 of cam 34 is reached, and 
the pin carrying the shell is allowed to drop ger-block descends still farther. By reason 
35 
45 
55 
y 95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
O 
605,840 
4 
of the oppositely-inclined passages in which enough to permit the heads to pass singly 
said blocks are carried their lower ends are 
therethrough into the raceway S3". In order 
gradually forced apart until the shoulders 78 
to facilitate the feeding of the heads singly 
ride over the cartridge-heads. The slots 73 
from chamber 83, I mount therein a plate or 
permit the blocks to move upwardly without 
disk 84, held rigid upon the end of a Sup 
disturbing supporting-bolts 75. When the 
porting-pin S5, which is journaled centrally 
shoulders 78 ride over the head of the shell, 
in the rear plate of portion 82 of thesfeed 
the blocks 72 descend by gravity into position 
chute. A crank-arm 86, having a hub, S7, is 
for the shoulders or hooks 78 to grasp the 
sleeved on the rearwardly-projecting end of 
rim of the head when the plunger-head H 
said pin. 
Projecting rearwardly from plum 
moves upwardly, and thus extract the headed 
ger-head H and adapted to reciprocate verti 
shell from its seat on the carrying-pin in the 
cally there with is an arm SS, perforatedrin 
feeding-turret and hold it suspended by its 
its outer end, as at 89, Fig. 2. A rod 90, 
head, as shown in Fig. 7. Upon the next re 
loosely attached at its upper end to crank 
ciprocation of the plunger-head the lower end 
arm 86, is adapted to pass through the per 
of the suspended shell comes in contact with 
foration S9 in arm or bracket 88. 
Oi each 
the head of the next shell in the turret and is 
side of bracket SS a collar 91.92 is adjustably 
forced upwardly in the sleeve 69 and is sup 
secured to rod 90, and a spiral spring 93 94, 
ported therein by the new shell, which is held 
coiled around the rod 90, is interposed be 
suspended by its head between the hooks or 
tween each collar. 91.92 and bracket SS. The 
shoulders on blocks. 7272. Upon further re 
operation of this part of the machine is as 
ciprocation of plunger-head E and the extrac 
follows: When plunger-head II is recipro 
tion of other, shells from the turret the first 
cated, it carries with it bracket 88, which, 
shell is forced still further upwardly through 
coming in contact with spring 93 on rod 90 in 
said sleeve and out the upper end thereof, 
its upward reciprocation, compresses said 
where it strikes an inclined mouthpiece 79, 
spring against collar 91 until the Weight and 
which causes it to fall into a chute 80 (shown 
friction of the several parts affected thereby 
dotted in Fig. 1) and from thence into a suit 
are overcome, thus elevating rod 90, and con 
able receptacle. 
sequently raising crank-arm 86 and rotating 
It will be readily seen from the construc 
pin 85, and with it plate or disk S4, against . 
tion described that if for any reason a head 
a yielding resistance. Upon a downward 
is not supplied to the shell-as, for instance, 
movement of arm SS spring 94 is engaged and 
should the head-transferring device fail to 
compressing against collar 92 yieldingly 
act properly or the supply of heads become 
forces rod 90 downwardly, thus rocking arm 
exhausted in the feeding-chute, presently to 
86, and consequently disk 84, in the opposite 
be described, or for any other reason-the 
direction. This constant alternate rocking 
extractor Will not extract that shell from its 
back and forth of disk 84 agitates the heads 
seat in the turret, for it is only by the hooks 
in chamber 83, thus preventing the mouth of 
or shoulders 7878 in blocks 72 72 grasping 
the raceway S3 from becoming choked up 
the rim of the head that it is possible to ex 
and assisting the feed of the heads singly into 
tract the shells. It will also be seen that upon 
said raceway. To still further assist in this 
each reciprocation of the plunger-head a 
work, I provide a pin 95 (see Fig. 5) 
in f' . 
headed shell is extracted should the heading 
face of disk 84, adjacent to the passage there 
mechanism operate properly. 
in leading into the raceway, which when 
I will now describe the head-feeding chute 
said disk is rocked back and forth moves 
for delivering the heads singly to the head 
the heads contained in chamber 83 at the 
transferring device, presently to be described. 
point where they begin to feed into the race 
I designate the feed chute or hopper gen 
way, thus crowding and forcing the heads 
erally by the letter. K. This chute is con 
singly into the raceway. . 
structed in two parts, the upper part being 
The upper or removable part of the feed 
removable and adapted to be received tele 
chute is removed from the machine and is 
scopically in the upper mouth of the lower 
filled by an operator with cartridge-heads, all 
section, where it is held by shoulders S1, as 
of said heads being placed therein with the 
clearly shown in Figs. 5 and 6. 
The lower 
cup part thereof pointing toward the front. 
section 82 is stationarily held by being suit 
A small rod 96, passing through suitable per 
ably bolted to the framework of the machine 
forations in the edges of said portion near its 
and is provided with an enlarged chamber 83, 
lower end, serves to support the heads therein 
preferably circular in form. The front and 
until said lower end is telescoped into the up 
back plates forming the sections of the chute 
per end or mouth of the portion 82, when said 
are spaced a distance apart equal to the 
rod 96 is withdrawn, allowing the heads to 
depth of a cartridge-head. The lower por 
slide down into the chamber, and the race 
tion of section S2 is formed with or adapted 
way being just sufficient to accommodate a 
to receive the upper end of a raceway 83, 
head therein the possibility of the heads being 
constructed of a size adapted to receive a 
turned in the wrong direction after having 
single column of heads from the chamber 83, 
been started in properly is entirely avoided. 
the lower part of chamber 83 being provided 
The lower end of raceway 83" is supported 
with an opening or passage-Way just large 
in a standard 97, rising from base-plate A, 
35 
45. 
. So 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
Id 
II5 
I 25 
605,340 
75 
(see Fig. 4.) and the upper end of standard 97 
is provided with a chamber 98, adapted to re 
ceive a bolt, 99, having a reduced shank 100, 
adapted to pass through a perforation in 
5 standard 97. An adjusting-nut 101 is pro 
vided on the end of said shank. Bolt 99 is 
cut away upon the upper side thereof, leav 
ing a projecting half 102, having a flat upper 
surface. This projecting portion is adapted 
to to b. projected across into the path of race 
way S3 immediately adjacent to the lower end 
thereof and in fact forms the support for the 
column of heads contained in said raceway, 
the lower most head resting against the flat 
I5 pper surface of projecting portion 102 of bolt 
99. A spring 136, located within chamber 98, 
bearing at one end against the wall of said 
chamber and at its opposite end against the 
rear face of bolt 99, tends to keep said bolt nor 
2O mally projected across the lower end of the 
raceway, the amount of projection being reg 
ulated by nut 101. Upon the front end of 
projecting portion 102 are formed ribs 103 
104. (See Figs. 4 and 10.) The head-trans 
25 fer lug device, presently to be described, upon 
being thrown up into a vertical position strikes 
the ribs 103 and 104 and forces bolt 102 back 
into its receiving chamber or socket, thus per 
mitting a cartridge-head to fall down into po 
3o sition to be grasped by the transferring de 
vice. A lip or tongue 105 is pivoted, as at 
106, to raceway S3 to assist in holding and 
steadying the cartridge - head while being 
grasped by the transferring device. A spring 
35 107 bears against said pivoted lip and tends 
to thress the same against the end 102 of block 
99, as clearly shown in Fig. 4. 
I will now describe the mechanism for trans 
feating the cartridge-heads from the lower end 
4O of the raceway or feeding-chute into position 
to be placed on the end of a shell. Disk 3, 
heretofore referred to, is mounted eccentric 
ally on shaft D and has mounted thereon a 
strap 10S, having a short arm 109. A lever 
4th 11, pivoted intermediate to its ends, as at 
112, to standard B, is pivoted at its upper 
end to a pin 110, carried by arm 109. The 
lower end of the lever 111 is slotted, as at 113, 
and receives in said slot a pin 114, carried by 
5o a crank-arm 115, adjustably sleeved on the 
end of a short shaft 116, having bearings in 
standard B. A gear-wheel 117 is mounted on 
the other end of shaft 116, so as to be capable 
of angular adjustment thereon. Gear-wheel 
55 117 is adapted to mesh with a small gear-wheel 
11S, mounted upon a shaft 119, suitably jour 
maled inlugs 120121, projecting upwardly from 
the table or base-plate. Mounted on shaft 
119 or cast solid there with is a block 122, 
6o slotted, as at 123, and cut away, as at 124. 
Jaws 125 126 are pivoted in the slot 123 in 
block 122, as at 127128. These jaws 125 126 
are provided on their meeting edges with 
flanges 1291.30, beveled away from each other, 
65 as shown in Fig. 11. The meeting edges of 
jaws 125 126 are also correspondingly cut 
away, as at 131 132, to form an opening of a 
size adapted to receive and grasp a head. 
Springs 133 134 serve to press said jaws con 
stantly toward each other. Through stand 
ard or bracket 97 projects a pointed screw 
135, so located that, when block 122 is thrown 
up into position to receive a head from the 
raceway, the point thereof enters the W-shaped 
opening formed by the beveling of the flanges 
129 130, and thus forces said jaws against the 
action of springs 133 134, so as to receive a 
cartridge-head in the grooves 131132, the cut 
away portion of the block 122, as at 124, per 
mitting the screw 135 to reach the flanges on 
the clamping-jaws. The screw 135 is adjust 
able in order to regulate the amount of its 
projection. Block122 is so located on a shaft 
119 that when it is thrown up by said shaft 
it will be in a position to receive a cartridge 
head from the raceway S3, and when thrown 
down into a horizontal position it will hold the 
cartridge-head immediately over the crimped 
head of a shell and ready for the action of 
the placing-die. (See Fig. 4.) The operation 
of this part of the machine is as follows: 
Rotary motion is imparted to the shaft D, 
which is imparted to eccentric - disk 3, and 
this in turn reciprocates the short pitman 109, 
and consequently racks or oscillates lever 111 
about its pivot 112. This oscillating or rack 
ing movement is transmitted to shaft 116, and 
consequently to gear 117, through the crank 
arm L15 and the pin thereon, working in slot 113 
in the lower end of lever 111. The relative sizes 
of gears 117 and 118 are so proportioned that 
upon each complete oscillation of said gear 
117 the gear 118, meshing there with, is rotated 
a little more than a quarter-revolution in One 
direction and then back again. This rotation, 
transmitted to shaft 119, throws clamping 
block 122, which forms the head-transferring 
device, upwardly, where it receives a car 
tridge-head, and back to its horizontal posi 
tion to place the head in position to be forced 
on the crimped end of a shell. When said 
block is thrown upwardly, the pointed end of 
screw 135 forces jaws 125 126 open against the 
action of springs 133 134. The plunger-bolt 
99 is forced back into its socket or chamber 
98 against the action of spring 136, thus per 
mitting the lowermost head to fall into the 
grooves 131. 132 in the clamping-jaws 125126, 
said head being prevented from falling out 
by pivoted tongue 106. When block 122 be 
gins its return movement, spring 136 forces 
the plunger-block forwardly into position to 
sustain the column of heads in raceway S3 
and springs 133 134 force jaws 125 126 to 
gether to grasp and clamp the head when re 
lieved from the point of screw 135. 
In order to catch and hold the drippings of 
oil from the machine, I provide a tray 140, 
extending around the top of table or base 
olate A. 
In order that rod 48 may reciprocate truly 
in a vertical line and be prevented from turn 
90 
95 
dcy 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
75 
To 
- 
- 
- 
605,340 
6 
ing, I provide a longitudinal groove therein 
one direction to its work and a yielding re 
adapted to receive a feather or spline carried 
sistance arranged to oppose said movement 
by block 47, as clearly shown in Fig. 3. 
and normally acting to return said plunger, 
While I have shown and particularly de 
a plunger-head carrying a setting-die, a shell 
scribed a preferred form of mechanism for 
extractor and a shell-feeding mechanism, all 
carrying out the principles of my invention, 
combined and arranged as and for the pur 
it is obvious that many changes, modifica 
pose set forth. 
tions, and alterations may be made in the 
7. In a cartridge-head-assembling machine, 
details of construction, location, and arrange 
a grooved, reciprocating plunger, a crimping 
ment without departing from the spirit or 
die carried thereby, a stationarily-held feath 
Scope of my invention. I therefore do not 
ered box through which said plunger recipro 
desire to be understood as limiting myself to 
cates, means for reciprocating said plunger, 
the exact details shown and described; but 
and cartridge-shell-feeding mechanism, all 
What I do claim as my invention, and de 
combined and arranged as and for the pur 
sire to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
pose set forth. 
States, is 
8. In a machine of the class described, a re 
1. In a machine of the class described, a 
ciprocating plunger-head, shell - extracting 
plunger - head, a head - setting die carried 
and head-setting mechanisms carried there 
thereby, a plunger-rod, a shell-crimper car 
by, a plunger-rod, shell-crimping mechanism 
ried thereby, shell feeding and extracting de 
carried thereby, and means for moving said 
vices, means for reciprocating said plunger 
plunger-rod independently of the reciproca 
head and means for reciprocating said plun 
tions of the plunger-head, and a yielding re 
ger-rod independently of the reciprocations 
sistance against which said rod is moved, as 
of the plunger-head, as and for the purpose 
and for the purpose set forth. 
Set forth. 
9. In a machine of the class described, a 
2. In a machine for placing heads on car 
plunger, a block adjustably supported by said 
tridge-shells having the wads previously in 
plunger, a shell-crimping device carried there 
Serted therein, a reciprocating plunger-head, 
by, means for moving said plunger, a yield 
a head-setting die carried thereby, shell-case 
ing resistance against which said plunger is 
feeding and extracting devices, and means 
moved, shell feeding and extracting devices 
for actuating these several parts, in combi 
and head placing and setting mechanism, all 
nation with an independent plunger, a gage 
substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
carried thereby and arranged to gage the 
10. In a machine of the class described, a 
depth of the wads in the shell-cases in ad 
plunger, a block adjustably carried thereby, 
Vance of the action of the head-setting die 
a crimping-die and a Wad-gage carried by said 
and means for reciprocating the said inde 
block, reciprocating head-setting and shell 
pendent plunger, as and for the purpose set 
extracting devices, shell-feeding devices and 
forth. 
means for moving said plunger against a 
3. In a machine of the class described, a 
yielding resistance independent of the recip 
driving-shaft having an eccentric disk mount 
rocations of the head setting and extracting 
ed thereon, a strap for said disk, a plunger 
devices, as and for the purpose set forth. 
rod, a crimping-die carried thereby, means 
11. In a machine of the class described, a 
Operated by said eccentric-strap for moving 
plunger adapted to be periodically moved 
Said rod and a yielding resistance against 
against a yielding resistance, a crimping-die 
which said rod is moved and adapted to re 
and a wad-gage adjustably carried thereby, 
turn the same, as and for the purpose set 
and means for securing a yielding motion of 
forth. 
said gage, as and for the purpose set forth. 
4. In a machine of the class described, a 
12. In a machine of the class described, a 
plunger, a shell-crimping die carried thereby, 
plunger adapted to be moved periodically 
yielding means for normally keeping said 
against a yielding resistance, a block adjust 
plunger elevated, means for periodically ad 
ably carried thereby, a crimper-die carried by 
vancing said plunger against said yielding 
said block, a wad-gage yieldingly supported 
resistance, a head placing and setting mech 
by said block, all in combination, as and for 
anism, and shell extracting and feeding de 
the purpose set forth. 
vices, all combined and arranged as and for 
13. In a machine of the class described, a 
the purpose set forth. 
plunger, a hollow crimper-die carried thereby, 
5. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling ma 
a shell-stripper stationarily held and adapted 
chine, a plunger-head, carrying a head-set 
to be projected longitudinally through said 
ting die and a shell-extractor a rod independ 
hollow die and means for moving said plunger 
ent of said plunger-head, a crimping-die car 
positively in one direction and a spring ar 
ried thereby, a shell-feeding mechanism and 
ranged to return said rod to its normal posi 
means for independently operating said plun 
tion, as and for the purpose set forth. 
ger head, rod and feeding mechanism, as and 
14. In a machine for placing heads on car 
for the purpose set forth. 
tridge - shells having the wads previously 
6. In a machine of the class described, a 
placed therein, a reciprocating plunger-head, 
plunger-rod, a shell - crimping die carried 
a head-setting die carried thereby, means 
thereby, devices for moving said plunger in for reciprocating said plunger-head, a shell 
- 
... 
- 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
95 
OO 
IOS 
IO 
115 
I 25 
605,840 
g: 
d 
25 
- 
crimper and stripper arranged in advance of travel of said sockets upon which said pins 
are supported, and means for actuating said 
the head-placing mechanism, an independent 
carrier, as and for the purpose set forth. 
reciprocating plunger, a Wad - gage carried 
20. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
thereby and adapted to gage the depth in the 
machine, the combination with wad-gaging, 
shells of the wads previously placed therein, 
shell-crimping, head-setting and extracting 
means for actuating said independent plun 
devices, and means for actuating the Salme, 
ger, and shell-extracting mechanism, all com 
of means for successively presenting the shells 75 
bined and arranged as and for the purpose set 
to said several devices, comprising a table, a 
shell-carrier mounted thereon and having a 
forth. 
15. In a machine of the class described, a 
groove upon the under side thereof, sockets 
short shaft journaled in a stationary bearing 
formed through said carrier and communi 
and having a crank-arm on each end thereof, 
cating with said groove, cam-plates station 
means connected with one of said crank-arms 
arily mounted upon said table and arranged 
for rocking said shaft, a plunger adapted to 
to register with and to be received in the 
be moved by the other of said arms against a 
groove in said carrier, pins loosely mounted 
yielding resistance, a crimping-die and a Wad 
in said sockets and arranged to rest upon said 
gage carried by said plunger, all combined 
cam-plates, and means for actuating said car 
and arranged as and for the purpose set forth. 
rier, as and for the purpose set forth. 
16. In a machine of the class described, a 
21. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
main shaft, an eccentric mounted thereon, an 
machine, the combination with Wad-gaging, 
eccentric-strap mounted on said eccentric and 
shell-crimping, head-setting and extracting 
provided with a pitman, a spring-supported 
devices, and means for actuating the same, 
plunger adapted to slide in a stationary bear 
of means for successively presenting the shell 
ing, a rock-shaft, journaled in a stationary 
cases to said several devices, comprising a ta 
bearing and provided with a crank-arm on 
ble, a rotary dial arranged to rest thereon and 
each end thereof, one of said crank-arms con 
having a circularly-arranged groove on the 
nected to said pitman and the other adapted 
under side thereof, peripherally - arranged 
to contact with said plunger and force the 
sockets formed through said dial and open 
same in a direction opposed to its spring-sup 
ing into said groove, camplates stationarily 
ports, as and for the purpose set forth. 
mounted on said table and arranged to pro 
17. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
ject into said groove, pins loosely mounted in 
machine, the combination with wad-gaging, 
said sockets and arranged to rest on and to 
shell - crimping, head - setting and shell - ex 
be supported by said cam-plates, and means 
tracting mechanisms of a shell-feeding mech 
for rotating said dial, as and for the purpose 
anism for successively presenting a shell to 
set forth. 
said several mechanisms, comprising a dial 
22. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
having sockets formed therein and having a 
machine, the combination with Wad-gaging, 
continuous groove upon the under side there 
shell-crimping, head-setting and extracting 
of, pins loosely mounted in said sockets, a 
devices, and means for actuating the same, 
calm - surface stationarily mounted and ar 
of means for successively presenting the shell 
ranged to be received in said groove and upon 
cases to said several devices, comprising a 
which said pins are supported, whereby when 
table, a carrier arranged to rest thereon and 
Said dialis rotated, said pins are projected or 
having a groove or recess upon the under sur 
retracted, and means for rotating said dial, 
face thereof, sockets formed through said car 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
rier and opening into said groove, fixed cam 
1S. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
plates mounted on the top surface of the said 
machine, the combination with a plunger, a 
table and arranged to project into said groove, 
Wad-gaging device and a shell-crimping de 
headed pins arranged in said sockets and hav 
Vice actuated thereby, a reciprocating plum 
ing the heads thereof arranged in said groove 
ger-head, shell-case-head setting and extract 
and resting upon said cam-plates, and means 
ing devices actuated thereby, of means for 
for actuating said carrier, as and for the pur 
Successively presenting the shell-cases to said 
pose set forth. 
several devices, comprising a dial, pins car 
23. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
lied thereby and means for projecting said 
machine, the combination with Wad-gaging, 
pins and withdrawing the same to properly 
shell-crimping, head-setting and extracting 
present the shell-cases, and means for rotat 
devices and means for actuating the same, 
ing said dial, as and for the purpose set forth. 
of means for successively presenting the shells 
19. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
to the said several devices, comprising a per 
machine, the combination with a plunger, 
forated table, a shell-case carrier mounted 
Wad-gage and shell-crimping devices carried 
thereon, said carrier provided with sockets, 
thereby, and a reciprocating plunger-head, 
pins loosely mounted in said sockets, said 
head-setting and shell-extracting devices car 
sockets and perforations being so relatively 
ried thereby, of means for successively pre 
arranged as to be brought into register with 
senting a shell-case to said several devices, 
each other when said carrier is suitably ac 
comprising a shell - carrier having sockets 
tuated, whereby said pins may be inserted in 
formed therein, pins loosely mounted in said 
or withdrawn from said sockets, means for 
sockets, cam-plates mounted in the path of 
45 
55 
95 
OO 
105 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
I 30 
8 
605,340 
75 
83 
O 
closing said perforations, cam-plates arranged machine, the combination of a reciprocating 
in the path of travel of said carrier and upon 
plunger, a head-setting die and shell-extract 
which said pins are supported, and means for 
ing devices carried thereby, means for actu 
actuating said carrier, as and for the purpose 
ating said plunger, means for crimping the 
Set forth. 
ends of the shell-cases and means for present 
24. In a machine of the class described, a 
ing the heads to the said setting mechanism, 
plunger, a head-setting die actuated thereby 
comprising pivoted jaws having oppositely 
and means for feeding a head, in combination 
beveled meeting projections or flanges and 
With a table, a shell-feeding device mounted 
means for engaging said oppositely-beveled 
thereon and arranged to present the shells to 
flanges for opening said jaws, as and for the 
the action of said setting-die and a stationary 
purpose set forth. 
Support for the shell adjustably mounted in 
31. In a cartridge-head-assembling ma 
Said table and arranged in line with the head 
chine, a reciprocating plunger, a head-setting 
Setting die, said support adapted to resist the 
die and shell-extracting devices carried there 
action of said die, as and for the purpose set 
by, means for actuating said plunger, a 
forth. 
crimper and a wad-gage arranged in advance 
25. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
of said die and means for presenting the 
machine, a head transferring and placing de 
shell-cases to these several parts, in combi 
vice, a shaft upon which said device is mount 
nation with means for presenting the heads 
ed, a gear-wheel mounted on said shaft and 
to the said head-setting die comprising piv 
means for operating the same, comprising a 
oted jaws having oppositely-beveled meeting 
rock-shaft, a gear-wheel mounted thereon and 
projections or flanges, springs arranged to 
meshing with said first-mentioned gear and a 
normally close said jaws and means for en 
rocking-lever for rocking said shaft, as and 
gaging said oppositely-beveled flanges for 
for the purpose set forth. 
opening said jaws, as and for the purpose set 
26. In a machine of the class described, a 
forth. 
head-setting mechanism, a head transferring 
32. In a cartridge - head - assembling ma 
and placing device, a shaft upon which said 
chine, a reciprocating plunger a head-settiug 
device is mounted, a gear-wheel mounted on 
die and shell-extracting devices carried there 
said shaft, a second gear-wheel meshing with 
by, means for actuating said plunger, a 
the first-mentioned gear and means for rock 
crimper and a Wad-gage arranged in advance 
ing said last-mentioned gear at each opera 
of said head-setting die and means for suc 
tion of said head-setting mechanism, as and 
cessively presenting a shell-case to these sev 
for the purpose set forth. 
eral devices, in combination with means for 
27. In a machine for heading shells in which 
presenting the heads to the action of said 
the Wads have been previously placed, the 
setting - die, comprising pivotally-mounted, 
combination with wad-gaging, shell-crimp 
spring-pressed jaws, having oppositely-bev 
ing, head-setting and extracting devices and 
eled meeting projections or flanges, said jaws 
a main shaft for actuating the same, of a head 
being cut away on their meeting edges to con 
transferring and placing device and means 
form to the shape of the head, and means ar 
for actuating the same, comprising a pivot 
ranged to engage said oppositely-beveled pro 
ally-mounted lever having connection at one 
jections or flanges upon said jaws, as and for 
end With Said transferring device, an eccen 
the purpose set forth. 
tric mounted on said main shaft and connec 
33. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
tions between said eccentric and the other 
machine, a shell-crimping device, a head-set 
end of said lever, as and for the purpose set 
ting die, a shell-extracting mechanism, means 
forth. 
for actuating these several parts, and means 
28. In a machine for heading shells in which 
for successively presenting the shell-cases to 
the Wads have been previously inserted, a 
the action of these several devices, in combi 
head-setting mechanism, a head-transferring 
nation with a head-transferring device, com 
device, a shaft for supporting the same, a rock 
prising pivotally - mounted spring - pressed 
shaft, intermeshing gear-wheels respectively 
jaws having oppositely-beveled meeting pro 
mounted on said shafts, and means for rock 
jections or flanges, and an adjustably-fixed 
ing Said rocking shaft at each actuation of 
part arranged to enter the space between the 
said head-setting mechanism, comprising an 
beveled meeting edges of said flanges or pro 
eccentric and a pivotally-mounted lever, as 
jections when said jaws are rocked, whereby 
and for the purpose set forth. 
said jaws are forced apart, and means for 
29. In a machine of the class described, a 
rocking said jaWS upon their pivotal support, 
head-setting mechanism, a head-transferring 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
mechanism and supporting-shaft therefor, a 
34. In a machine of the class described, a 
rock-shaft, a gear-wheel mounted thereon for 
crimper, a head-setting die, a shell-extractor, 
angular adjustment and adapted to mesh with 
means for actuating these several devices, in 
a gear-wheel on the first-mentioned shaft and 
combination with a rocking, head-transferring 
means for rocking said rock-shaft at each ac 
device comprising pivotally-mounted spring 
tuation of said head-setting mechanism, as 
pressed jaws arranged with the edges thereof 
and for the purpose set forth. 
opposed to each other, said edges provided 
30. In a cartridge-shell-head-assembling 
with projections or flanges oppositely beveled 
- 
95 
Od 
IO5. 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
25 
35. 
45 
55 
605,840 
9 
O 
75 
on the meeting edges thereof, an adjustable ingly rocking the latter, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
pointed screw or pin arranged in the path of 
40. In a machine of the class described, a 
movement of said transferring device and 
feeding-chute, an agitating-disk arranged to 
adapted, when said jaws are rocked about 
rock therein, a reciprocating plunger and 
their pivotal support, to enter the space be 
yielding connections intermediate said plun 
tween the beveled meeting edges of said pro 
ger and said disk for rocking the latter, as and 
jections or flanges, whereby said jaws are 
for the purpose set forth. 
forced apart, and means for rocking said jaws, 
41. A head-feeding chute having an en 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
larged chamber, a rocking disk mounted 
35. In a cartridge-head-assembling machine, 
therein, a crank-arm sleeved on the disk-sup 
a shell-crimping device, a head-setting die and 
port, a rod connected to said crank-arm, a re 
a shell-extractor, means for reciprocating 
ciprocating plunger, a perforated arm carried 
these several parts, and means for succes 
thereby, said rod adapted to pass through said 
sively presenting the shells to the action of the 
perforation and springs interposed between 
several parts, in combination with means for 
said arm and collars on said rod, as and for 
feeding the heads to the said head-setting die, 
the purpose set forth. 
comprising a stationary raceway having a 
42. In a head-feeding device, a raceway 
delivery-mouth and adapted to receive the 
adapted to receive a single column of heads, 
heads in single column, a support for said 
a slidable spring-pressed plunger normally 
raceway, a recess formed in said support ad 
held transversely across the mouth of said 
jacent to the delivery-mouth of said raceway, 
raceway and adapted to support said column 
a yieldingly-mounted block arranged in said 
of heads and a transferring device arranged 
recess and normally held across the delivery 
to periodically engage said support and slide 
mouth of said raceway, and a head-transfer 
the same out of line with said column of heads, 
ring device arranged, when actuated, to dis 
whereby said heads are delivered to said trans 
place said block from across the delivery 
ferring device, as and for the purpose set forth. 
mouth of the said raceway, whereby the heads 
43. In a head-feeding device, a raceway 
are permitted to pass singly from said race 
adapted to receive a single column of heads, 
Way to said head-transferring device, and 
a support for the said column of heads com 
means for actuating said head-transferring 
prising a spring-pressed, cylindrical block 
device, as and for the purpose set forth. 
provided with a flat upper side, as and for the 
36. In a machine of the class described, a 
purpose set forth. 
feeding-chute comprising a stationary cham 
44. In a machine of the class described, a 
ber having a mouth, a removable tray adapt 
raceway, a spring-pressed lip mounted there 
ed to receive the articles to be fed and to be 
on at the end thereof, a spring-pressed Sup 
telescoped into the mouth of said stationary 
port for the column of heads contained in 
chamber to deliver the articles therein, means 
said raceway, and a head-transferring device 
for supporting the movable part in the mouth 
adapted to force said support out of the line 
of said stationary part and means arranged 
of travel of the heads in said raceway and to 
Within said chamber for agitating the heads 
receive therefrom a single head, all combined 
contained therein, as and for the purpose set 
and arranged as and for the purpose set forth. 
forth. 
45. In a machine of the class described, a 
37. In a machine of the class described a 
plunger-head in combination with a shell 
feeding-chute, comprising a chamber, means 
extracting mechanism mounted thereon, said 
for delivering the heads to said chamber with 
extracting mechanism comprising loosely 
their open ends all presented in one direction, 
mounted, gravity-operated blocks, as and for 
a raceway communicating with said chamber, 
the purpose set forth. 
a disk arranged in said chamber and means 
46. In a cartridge-shell-extracting mechan 
for rocking or agitating said disk, whereby 
ism, a sleeve provided with oppositely-in 
the heads are prevented from clogging the 
clined passages and gravity blocks or pins 
mouth of said raceway, as and for the pur 
loosely mounted therein, as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
pose set forth. 
38. In a machine of the class described, a 
47. In a shell extracting mechanism, a 
head-feeding chute comprising an enlarged 
sleeve provided with oppositely-inclined pas 
chamber, a raceway communicating with the 
sages and gravity-blocks loosely mounted 
lower part of said chamber and a rocking 
therein, said blocks being beveled upon their 
disk mounted in said chamber and provided 
opposing faces, as and for the purpose set 
with a pin in the face thereof, and means for 
forth. 
rocking said disk, as and for the purpose set 
4S. In a shell-extracting mechanism, a re 
; forth. 
ciprocating sleeve provided with oppositely 
39. In a machine of the class described, a 
inclined passages and blocks loosely mounted 
feeding-chute comprising a chamber, a re 
to slide therein, said blocks being beveled on 
ceiver communicating with said chamber, an 
their meeting faces and provided with hooks 
agitating-disk arranged in said chamber, a 
at their lower ends, as and for the purpose 
reciprocating plunger and yielding connec 
tions between said plunger and disk for yield 
set forth. 
. . 
3O 
35 
45 
so 
55 
90 
95 
Ioo 
O 
II5 
I 25 
0 
605,840 
49. In a shell-extracting mechanism, a re 
ciprocating plunger carrying a sleeve, said 
sleeve provided with oppositely-inclined pas 
sages, blocks loosely mounted to slide in said 
passages, means for guiding and supporting 
said blocks, said blocks being beveled on their 
inner or meeting faces and also on the ends 
thereof, and provided with hooks or shoul 
ders, as and for the purpose set forth. 
50. In a machine of the class described, the 
combination with a reciprocating, shell-crimp 
ing, head-setting and shell-extracting mech 
anisms and means for operating the same, of 
TO 
shell-feeding mechanism and means for ele 
vating the shells to the crimping mechanism, 15 
lowering the shells for the setting operation 
and again elevating the shells for the action 
of the extracting mechanism, as and for the 
purpose set forth. 
hand this the 10th day of March, 1894, in the 
presence of two subscribing witnesses. 
- 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 20 
WILLIAM B. PLACE. 
Witnesses: 
HIRAM. A. BOND, 
GRANT SMITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605440.txt	(No Model.) 
F. W. WARREN. 
PENCIL SPLICER, 
No. 605,440. 
Patented June 7, 1898. 
 
UNITED STATES ATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK W. WARREN, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA. 
PEN C - SPLCE. R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,440, dated June 7, 1898. 
Application filed July 1, 1897, 
O 
25 
35 
40 
To cult, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANKW. WARREN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of San Francisco, State of 
California, have invented an Improvement in 
Pencil-Splicers; and I hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same. 
My invention relates to a device which is 
especially designed to splice or connect two 
different pencils, so that either two pencils of 
different Colors or qualities or hardness may 
be used or to enable the person to use up short 
ends of pencils. 
It consists in details of construction which 
Will be more fully explained by reference to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view of my splicer. Fig. 2 is 
a similar view showing the ends flaring with 
Cutting edges inserted. Fig. 3 is a cross-sec 
tion of the same, showing the cutters in the 
inner face. 
The special object of my invention is to pro 
vide a device by which short pencils or pencils 
of different quality or character can be united 
so as to be conveniently used. For this pur 
pose Iemploy a short section A, which may be 
made cylindrical, hexagonal, triangular, rec 
tangular, Or any convenient form or desired 
shape to prevent its rolling about, or it may 
be milled or otherwise ornamented, and if the 
exterior surface is longitudinally fluted it is 
Ornalmental and also serves to retain the air 
ticle in place and prevent its rolling. The 
interior of this section has screw-threads a 
formed within it. 
If the section be of solid 
material, these threads are cut sharply, and 
they have a groove or channel C made trans 
versely across the threads, so as to present a 
sharp angle which will serve as a die, so that 
when the pencil is to be introduced it is only 
necessary to screw it into the holder, which 
will serve at the same time as a die to cut 
threads upon the pencil end and a holder to 
hold it securely in place. 
Another pencil of different character or 
quality or of the same kind, if desired, can 
be in the same manner screwed into the op 
posite end until the two pencils abuttogether, 
Or, if preferred, a diaphragm B may be fixed 
midway between the ends of the holder, so 
that each pencil can be screwed up firmly 
45 
 
Serial No,643,068, (No model.) 
against this diaphragm and practically locked 
in place, the holder being of Sufficient length 
to take enough of each pencil to holdit firmly. 
Where pencils of different sizes are liable 
to be used, one or both ends of the holder 
may be divergent or coned outward and so 
formed as to reduce the larger pencil to the 
propersize, so that when it engages the thread 
in the inner portion the latter will cut into it 
and lock it in place. 
When the tube is made rectangular or other 
polygonal shape or fluted upon the outside, 
it enables the operator to hold it more firmly 
when it is to be screwed upon the end of a pen 
cil. By thus using the intermediate threaded 
thimble each pencil serves as a holder or han 
dile for the other. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to Secure by Letter's 
Patent, is 
1. A pencil-holder consisting of a short tube 
internally threaded and with the threads cut 
transversely to present a sharp angle which 
forms a cutting-die. 
2. A pencil-splicer consisting of a short tube 
having a threaded interior and a many-sided 
exterior, said internal threads being grooved 
transversely to present a sharp angle form 
ing a Cutting-die. 
3. A pencil-splicer consisting of a short tube 
with internal screw-threads adapted to en 
gage pencils introduced from opposite ends 
and having transverse cuts made across the 
threads to form a die to cut the threads upon 
said pencils. 
4. A pencil-splicer consisting of a short tube 
internally threaded and having a diverging 
Orbell-shaped end and transverse cuts made 
across the threads to present a sharp angle 
which forms a cutting-die. 
5. A pencil-splicer consisting of a short tube 
having internal screw-threads and having its 
Opposite ends bell-shaped or diverging where 
by pencils may be introduced from both ends, 
and having interior transverse cuts or grooves 
forming cutting-dies for the threads. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
FRANK.W. WARREN. 
Witnesses: 
S.H. NOURSE, 
JESSIE C. BRODIE. 
55 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605542.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 605,542, 
Fis T. 
J. FAIRFIELD 
CAR WEHEEL. 
Patented June 14, 1898, 
  
 
 
 
GR) 
(27&on-4/324. 
f 
A. 
s 
 
3uvvowtov: 
says aw've\M, 
YFW sy 
S 3. %2. 0-d 
etozwo 
to 
m 
His NRRis Peters co Photo-Litho Washimatch. . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES FAIRFIELD, OF MANCHESTER, NEW HAMPSHIRE. 
CAR-WHEEL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,542, dated June 14, 1898. 
Application filed May 17, 1897, Serial No. 636 1950, (No model.) 
IO 
To all whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMESFAIRFIELD, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Man 
chester, in the county of Hillsborough and 
State of New Hampshire, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Car 
Wheels; and I do declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the same. 
My invention relates to car-wheels. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
car-wheel in two sections to facilitate the re 
newal of the wheels when worn out or broken. 
As at present done the wheels are made in 
one piece, the hub is bored out to a tight fit 
for the axle, and the wheel is then forced into 
the axle with a hydraulic pressure varying 
from thirty to fifty tons. Consequently when 
the wheel is to be renewed it has to be forced 
off in like manner, which can only be done 
by removing the axle and wheels from the 
car and in many cases sending it away to the 
original maker or to some shop equipped with 
hydraulic presses. This entails the loss of 
the use of the car, the transportation charges 
- on wheels and axle going and returning, the 
expense of the work, and also the labor neces 
sary to remove it from and replace it beneath 
the car. Under my invention this expense 
Will be saved, as I shall make the car-wheel 
in two sections-viz., a flanged hub or central 
portion of the wheel and the body of the wheel 
or Outer portion. The hub will be placed on 
the axle in the customary manner. The body 
of the wheel will then be put in place on the 
hub and securely bolted thereto, using check 
nuts to prevent loosening of the bolts. To 
prevent any shearing strain on the bolts, suit 
able projections are provided on the body of 
the wheel, which fit into corresponding re 
cesses in the hub. To prevent the bolts from 
turning around when the nuts are being tight 
ened, the bolt-holes on the body of the wheel 
will be recessed to take the heads of the bolts. 
In renewing the wheel all that it is necessary 
to do is to remove the bolts attaching the body 
of the wheel to the hub, take off the body of 
the wheel, put on the new one, and replace 
the bolts. As this can be done in a short 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
time, the use of the car is not delayed to any 
extent. To facilitate this quick renewal, the 
fit or joint between the body of the wheel and 
the hub should be a taper one. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a car-wheel constructed 
in accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is 
a similar view, the body and hub of the wheel 
being shown separated; and Fig. 3 is a sec 
tional view. 
In said drawings, 1 denotes the car-wheel, 
formed with a tapering aperture 2, about . 
which the body of the wheel is enlarged, as 
shown at 3, and provided with projections 4. 
5 denotes the hub, which is secured to the 
axle 6 in the usual manner and which is pro 
vided with a tapering portion 7 and an an 
nular flange 8, having recesses 9 to corre 
spond to the projections. 
In assembling the parts the body of the 
wheel is put on the hub with the affixed axle, 
so that the projections engage the recesses. 
Bolts 8' are inserted through the annular 
flange and through the thickened portion of 
the body of the wheel and serve to prevent 
the lateral displacement of the body of the 
wheel with respect to the hub. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
A car-wheel composed of a body portion and 
a hub, the former being provided with a cen 
tral tapering aperture and with an integral 
annular shoulder surrounding said aperture. 
and provided with projections and bolt-holes, 
and the latter being tapering in form and 
adapted to the central aperture, and pro 
vided with an annular flange having recesses 
adapted to receive the projections of the bod; 
portion, and bolt-holes registering with the 
bolt-holes of the body portion, and bolts pass 
ing through the annular flange of the hub 
and the annular shoulder of the body of the 
wheel, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES FAIRFIELD. 
95 
Witnesses: 
GEO. E. BISHOP, 
W. R. FoRSAITH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605642.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 605,642. 
 
E. KUBASCH. 
AUTOMATIC WINDOW CLOSER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet, 1. 
Patented June 14, 1898. 
Fig.4 
70, 
 
(No Model.) 
No. 605,642. 
E. KUBASCH, 
AUTOMATIC WINDOW CLOSER, 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 14 l898. 
Z772e 7-ZZO v. 
Cztec 264-4 dea 
  
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMIL KU BAS CH, OF DIRESIDEN, GERMANY. 
AUTOMATIC WINDOW-CLOSER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,642, dated June 14, 1898. 
Application filed February 25, 1898, Serial No. 671,592, (No model.) 
55 
To all, whom, it may concern 
Beit known that I, EMIL KUBASCH, a sub 
ject of the Emperor of Germany, residing 
at Dresden, in the Kingdom of Saxony, Ger 
man Empire, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Automatic Window 
Closers, of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
window-closer which when a strong wind or 
storm comes up will automatically close any 
window left open to which it is attached to 
prevent damage by drafts or strong currents 
of air entering the room or interior to which 
the window belongs. For this purpose pref 
erably in one or both upper corners of the 
Window a fan or a fan-Wheel of any number 
of wings or vanes is arranged which, when set 
in motion performs the closing of the window. 
A special form of construction embodying 
the principle of the invention and applied to 
a window with swinging sashes of the kind 
usual in most European countries is shown 
in Figure 1, whereas Fig. 2 shows the con 
struction modified for application to a win 
dow with sliding sashes, as usual in America 
and England, 
Referring now to Fig. 1, in an upper corner 
of the window-casing c is arranged a revolv 
ing shaft b, suitably journaled at d, e, andf, 
as illustrated, and bearing on its Outer end a 
fan - wheel a, of any preferred number of 
wings. On the inner end of said shaft is 
mounted a grooved wheel or drumg, to which 
is affixed the end of a rope or chain h. The 
latter is shown extending downward and pass 
ing over a guide-pulley k on the inner side 
of the side piece of the framing, then ex 
tending through an aperture in the latter to 
the outside of the same and passing Over a 
guide - pulley l, thereupon again extending 
downward and over a guide-pulley m, after 
which it is conducted laterally and over a 
pulley in, supported by the cross-bar O, and 
fastened to an eyelet g of the swinging sash p. 
The drum g instead of being on the inner 
end of the shaftb might be placed on the mid 
deportion or Outer end of the same, as might 
also the pulleys be removed from the outside 
to the inside of the Window, the exact ar 
rangement of all the details being as preferred 
in any particular case. 
It will easily be understood how rotation of . 
the fan in any direction will cause the win 
dow-sash to move from an Open to a closed 
position. In order now to prevent a feeble 
wind or breeze from closing the window, a 
brake is applied to the shaft b, preferably ad 
justable and of any desired construction. In 
the drawings a brake is shown composed of 
a lever r, fulcrumed at one end to the Wall or 
framing of the Window, resting on and par 
tially encompassing the shaft b, and support 
ing at its other end a pendent rods, to which 
any number of Weights tu may be applied 
to obtain the desired adjustment of the brake. 
A catch or fastener may be provided to hold 
the sash in its closed position. 
The form and construction of the vanes of 
the fan-Wheel may be of any kind to fulfil 
their purpose. The fan-Wheel may also be 
provided with a casing directing the wind in 
a desired manner. For illustration, in Fig. 1 
a very simple form of wheel has been chosen. 
In the modification shown in Fig. 2 the 
drum g is assumed inclosed within a cavity 
of the Wall. The rope h is passed over but 
one guide-pulley U and then fastened to the 
sliding sash ac, so that when the fan on shaft 
b is rotated in either direction this sash will 
be raised and the window closed. 
What I now claim as new, and desire to se 
cure by Tetters Patent, is 
1. In combination with a window, an auto 
matic device for closing the same on the aris 
ing of a Wind comprising a Wind-wheel and 
operating connections therefrom to the win 
dow-sash whereby the movement of the wind 
wheel effects the closing of the window, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In combination, with a window, a wind 
wheel, a drum carried by the shaft thereof, a 
cord adapted to be Wound on said drum and 
operatively connected with the window-sash, 
and a brake to prevent the too free move 
ment of said wind-wheel, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
EMIL, KUBASCII. 
Witnesses: 
EMIL RECHELT, 
HERNANDO DE SOTO, 
75 
9o 
95 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605743.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 605,743. 
A, PINOWER. 
CHAIN ADJUSTING DEVICE. 
iii 
Patented June l4, 1898, 
  
 
  
R 
S SS S NS SS 
72 
FiG-3. (C), 6-4 
SS NY N y e2 
2a X 
2N. 
  
 
a 
S. 
 
WITNESSES 
(4-3,724 
C/2-1 
BY 
INVENTOR 
-62. 2.-----D 
TS 
THE NORRis PETERs co, PHoro-LTHO. wash NGTON, D. C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER PINOVER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
CHAIN-ADJUSTING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,743, dated June 14, 1898. 
Application filed September 21, 1896. Serial No. 606,553, (No model.) 
To all whom it may conce77. 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER PINOVER, 
of New York, in the county and State of New 
York, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Chain-Adjusting Devices, of which 
the following is a full, clear, and exact de 
scription. 
This invention relates particularly to de 
vices for adjusting the sprocket-chain of a 
bicycle or similar vehicle or for adjusting the 
distance between the sprockets; and the ob 
ject is to provide a device for this purpose 
that may be easily and quickly operated, and, 
further, to construct the device of few and 
simple parts that may be rigidly held in place 
and not liable to get out of order. 
I will describe a device embodying my in 
vention, and then point out the novel features 
in the appended claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying . 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a partial plan and partial sec 
tion showing my invention. Fig. 2 is a side 
elevation with a section of an adjusting device 
removed, and Fig. 3 is an inside view of a sec 
tion of an adjusting device. 
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates a 
rear-fork member of a bicycle-frame, and 2 a. 
lower brace connected there with. The con 
nection between the fork member and the 
brace is provided with a transverse opening 
3, into which disks 4 and 5 are designed to 
Each disk 4 5 is provided with an 
engage. 
opening 6 eccentric to its center, the opening 
or hole in one disk registering with that in the 
other. Each disk has an annular flange to 
engage against the outer surface of the con 
nection between the parts 1 and 2. 
The adjusting-disks will of course be placed 
at each side of the wheel, and the ends of the 
shaft 7 will extend through the openings 6. 
One projected and threaded end of the shaft 
7 may be engaged by the interiorly-threaded 
Step 8, and the other projected threaded end 
may be engaged by a nut 9. By tightening 
the parts 8 and 9 it is obvious that the re 
spective pairs of disks may be firmly clamped 
in place. 
As a further means for clamping the disks 
4 and 5 in place I may employ a screw 10, hav 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
55 
75 
ing its shank portion passing through a hole 
in the outer disk 5 and its tapped portion en 
gaging in a tapped-hole in the inner disk 4. 
I may employ a still further means for clamp 
ing the disks to prevent their rotation after 
adjustment, which is the following: It will be 
seen that the holes for the screw 10 are ar 
ranged near the periphery of the disks and 
that the wall of the opening 3 is provided at . 
its center with an annular flange 11, provided 
with a series of closely-arranged transverse 
notches, in which a segment of the screw 10 
may engage, as plainly shown in Fig. 2. 
On the shaft 7 is mounted the hub 12 and 
the sprocket 13 in the usual manner. To pre 
vent a rotary movement of the shaft 7 rela 
tively to the disks 4 and 5, I may provide one 
or both of said disks with a feather 14 to en 
gage in a groove 15 in the shaft. 
It is obvious that to adjust the sprocket 13 
rearward or forward to take up or loosen the 
chain the disks must be rotated in their bear 
ings, and after adjustment they are to be 
clamped or fastened as before described. By 
taking hold of the step 8 the disks at each side 
of the wheel may be simultaneously operated. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
In a bicycle, a connection between the lower 
bar of the frame and a member of the rear fork, 
said connection having a circular opening, an 
annular flange on the wall of said opening in 
termediate of the sides of the connection, the 
said flange being provided with transverse 
notches, a pair of disks inserted in the open 
ing, one at one side and the other at the other 
side of the connection, each disk having an 
annular flange bearing on the outer surface 
of its side of the connection and each disk 
having a hole eccentrically through it, and a 
screw passing through an opening in the pe 
riphery of one disk and engaging with a tapped 
opening near the periphery of the other disk, 
the said screw also engaging in one of the 
notches of the interior flange, substantially 
as specified. 
ALEXANDER PINOVER. 
95 
Witnesses: 
JNO. M. RITTER, 
C. R. FERGUSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605843.txt	J. W. BEAR, 
NON-REFILLABLE BOTTLE, 
Patented June 21, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
No. 605,843. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. BEAR, OF UD ELL, I O W. A. 
NoN-REFiLLABLE BOTTLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,843, dated June 21, 1898. 
Application filed March 8, 1898, Serial No. 673,040, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it malf concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN W. BEAR, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Udell, 
in the county of Appanoose and State of Iowa, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Non-Re?illable Bottles; and I 
do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
The invention has relation to non-refillable 
bottles; and the object is to provide a bottle 
of this character which cannot be refilled and 
sold as an original package without detection. 
With this objectin view the invention con 
sists in certain features of construction and 
combination of parts, which Will be herein 
after fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure lis 
a sectional view of a portion of a bottle illus 
Fig. 2 is a detail per 
trating my invention. 
spective view of the bolt-casing, showing the 
bolt projected. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal sec 
tional view of the same parts, the bolt being 
retracted and a key being shown with its bit 
in engagement with the bolt in the act of 
shooting the same; and Fig. 4 is a detail per 
spective view of the bolt. 
In said drawings, 1 denotes the neck of a 
bottle, provided near its mouth with an inte 
rior annular groove 2 and an outer Weaken 
ing-groove 3. 
4 denotes the cork, which is adapted to be 
driven into the neck below said grooves. 
5 denotes the bolt-casing, which is adapted 
to be placed in the neck of the bottle and have 
one of its ends engaged with the groove 2. 
This casing is provided with a keyhole 6 in 
its top and with a notch or opening 7 in its 
side. 
8 denotes a bolt which has a sliding engage 
ment in said casing, and 9 denotes a key 
adapted to be inserted through the keyhole 
of the casing and shoot the bolt into the 
groove 2. 
10 denotes a filling placed on top of the cas 
ing after the bolt has been shot. 
In operation after the bottle has been filled 
the cork is driven into the neck below the 
55 
grooves, and the lock-casing is placed in po- 5o 
sition in the neck with one of its ends in the 
groove 2. The key is now inserted through 
the keyhole and turned, which forces the bolt 
outward into the groove at a point diametric 
ally opposite the point of engagement of the 
lock-casing with the groove. At this instant 
the spring-tongue 11 on the side of the bolt 
springs out laterally and engages the Wall of 
a slot in the side of the casing, and thereby 
prevents the retraction of the bolt by a tool 
or implement. The neck of the bottle above 
the lock is now filled with any suitable ma 
terial, such as Wax, cement, or the like. 
Although I have specifically described the 
construction and relative arrangement of the 
several elements of my invention, I do not de 
sire to be confined to the same, as Such changes 
or modifications may be made as clearly fall 
within the scope of my invention without de 
parting from the spirit thereof. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A non-refillable bottle having an inter 
nal annular groove in its neck, a lock-casing 
placed in said neck with one end in said 
groove, a bolt having a sliding engagement 
in said casing, and a key for projecting the 
bolt into said groove at a point opposite to 
the engagement of the casing with said groove, 
substantially as set forth. 
2. A non-refillable bottle having an inter 
nal annular groove in its neck, a lock-casing 
placed in said neck. With one end in said 
groove and provided with a notch in its side, 
a bolt having a sliding engagement in said 
casing and provided with a marginal spring 
tongue adapted to engage said notch. When 
the bolt is projected, and a key for project 
ing said bolt, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit 
75 
85 
9o 
leSSeS. 
- 
JOHN W. BEAR. 
Witnesses: 
W. H. SANDERs, 
C. S. MCGUIRE. 
O 
3O. 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US605943.txt	(No Model.) 
J. T. WILSON. 
BALANCED WALWE, 
No. 605,943, 
Patented June 21 
1898. 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHIN T. WILSON, OF JERSEY SHORE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
BALANCED VALVE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 605,948, dated June 21, 1898. 
- 
Application filed May 13, 1897, Serial No. 636,355, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN T. WILSON, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at the bor 
ough of Jersey Shore, in the county of Lycom 
ing and State of Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in Bal 
anced Valves; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of said invention,  such as will en 
able others skilled in the art to which it most 
nearly appertains to make, use, and practice 
the same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
Valves, and more particularly to an attach 
ment thereto for relieving the vertical pres 
Sure of the valve upon the valve-seat. 
The invention consists in an improvement 
in the construction shown and described in a 
patent granted to William J. Thomas the 3d 
day of May, 1892, and bearing No. 474,153; 
and it consists in the construction of what is 
therein termed the balance-ring, whereby 
the Wearing-surface is materially increased 
and suitable means for lubricating same are 
provided; also whereby the strength and du 
rability of the plate for preventing the pas 
sage of steam to the inside of the ring when 
the same is spread in its action are increased. 
In the drawings, Figurelis a cross-sectional 
View of a valve constructed in accordance 
With this invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view of 
the half of a double balanced valve. Fig. 3 
is a detail view of the meeting ends of the 
ring and the joint-plate construction, the plate 
being partly cut away. Figs. 4 and 5 are de 
tail views in section of the balance-ring and 
joint-plate, the latter view showing the parts 
Separated to show the construction. Fig. 6 
is a cross-section of a modification of the joint 
plate. Fig. 7 is a cross-section of the balance 
ring at the point where the joint-plate is ap 
plied. Fig. S is a detail view in section of 
a retaining-post provided on the top of the 
valve to hold a retaining-ring. Fig. 9 is a 
detail view of a small segment of the retain 
ing-ring, and Fig. 10 is a detail view in sec 
tion of the retaining-ring shown in Fig. 9. 
AS Set forth in the patent above referred 
to, the pressure on the side of the valve raises 
the bevel-shaped ring A against the top of 
This is accomplished by 
the steam-chest, 
means of the bevel-surface on the cone X, 
the ring being provided with a corresponding 
bevel on its inner side. It is evident that 
when the ring is compressed the inclination 
of the two bevel sides is to force the ring 
bodily upward and to seat it with considerable 
force against the top of the steam-chest. As 
the pressure against the top of the steam 
chest is exerted with considerable force and 
continuance, the Wear on the upper surface 
of the ring is necessarily great. As this Wear 
transpires it permits the ring to rise. On the 
cone X in proportion to the quantity of Wear 
on top. As the spring rises on the cone it 
becomes weakened in its resilient quality 
and diminishes its surface for the operation 
of the steam in setting it against the cone. 
It further exaggerates the discrepancy of the 
joint-plate in performing its function of clos 
ing the gap between the separated ends, which, 
when the ring is new or very slightly worn, 
is perfect in its operation, but which neces 
sarily becomes impaired with the diminution 
of the circle to which the ring is expanded. 
It is with the object to provide an added 
wearing-surface of greater area and therefore 
of increased wearing resistance to operate 
against the top of the steam-chest that this 
invention is designed. This is here accom 
plished by adding to the top of the ring A the 
wearing-surface or extended flange B. This 
wearing-surface or flange B, I find I can 
make quite a considerable extension and pro 
duces on top of the ring a wide wearing-sur 
face which it requires a greater length of 
time to wear away perceptibly. The flange 
B may be either internal or external of the 
ring, though that preferred by me is the in 
ternal extension, as I avoid thereby the lift 
ing strain which would be exerted under the 
flange to the outside of the ring, and, further, 
I am enabled to use a ring of full circular 
capacity inside of Small steam - chests in 
which the external extended flange might in 
terfere with the present construction of the 
chest. Around the upper surface of the ring 
so provided with this flange I form a groove 
C, which is designed to hold a lubricant 
and is called an oil-groove. With the oil 
placed in this groove or accumulated by it 
in the rapid reciprocating movement of the 
95 
OO 
I. ? 
35 
45 
 
2 
605,948 
45 
55 
65 
75 
secured in grooves E, formed in suitable ex 
tensions on the surface of the valve. 
Having thus described this invention, it is 
claimed 
1. A slide-valve provided with a cone 
shaped extension on its upper Surface the 
sides of which are beveled inward toward the 
apex, in combination. With a ring having a 
corresponding internal bevel and adapted to 
fit snugly the beveled surface of the cone, said 
ring being divided at one point and recessed 
on its under side at the point of division and 
a joint-plate attached to one end of the ring 
thus divided and overlapping the other end 
to close the joint, the said joint-plate being 
provided with an inwardly-extending flange 
D', which fits into the said recess and ex 
tends inwardly to the said cone substantially 
as set forth. 
2. In combination with a slide-valve hav 
ing a cone-shaped extension on its upper sur 
face, a ring having a corresponding internal 
bevel and adapted to fit snugly the said cone 
and a metal ring E of greater diameter than 
the said beveled ring and provided with in 
wardly-extended flanges E. divided by slots 
or cuts yet forming a practically continuous 
guard for the purpose set forth. 
3. In combinatiom with a slide-valve hav 
ing a cone-shaped extension on its upper sur 
face, and raised lugs F provided with inward 
flanges, a metal ring internally beveled to fit 
the said cone and an exterior sheet-metal ring 
provided with a practically continuous in 
wardly-presented guard or flange and held in 
place by said lugs and their overlapping 
flanges F substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 15th day of March, 1897. 
JOIIN T. WILSON. 
Witnesses: 
WM. P. PEOPLES, 
NORMAN MCKELLAR. 
valve this surface is still further maintained 
from wearing. The joint-plate shown in the 
drawings is secured to one end of the ring, 
as described in the patent above referred to, 
and differs here from that therein set forth 
only in the extension D', which is set under 
the ring, so as to let the edge bear against 
the cone X of the valve. In some construc 
tions I find it convenient to cut a recess out 
of the meeting ends, from the inside thereof, 
for the insertion of the extension D", as shown 
in Figs. 3 and 5 of drawings. This permits a 
closer fitting when the balance is to be ap 
plied to valves working in very small chests. 
This, however, is not necessary, as will be 
seen by the drawings in Fig. 6, wherein the 
extension D is carried into the under side of 
the ends of the ring without cutting them 
away, as described. 
By means of the construction herein de 
scribed the life of this balance attachment is 
prolonged to quite an extent. 
In many instances where this balance is 
applied to valves working within steam-chests 
of limited capacity it becomes impossible to 
provide the cone X with a cast-iron retaining 
ring or extension, which, however, is consid 
ered necessary in order to provide against 
the possibility of the ring becoming broken 
and falling into the path of the valve. In 
the present construction, as illustrated in 
Figs. 2, 8, 9, and 10, I have provided for a 
thin sheet-metal ring E, which is provided 
with an inwardly-extending flange E", this 
being formed by cutting the metal into pieces, 
as shown in Figs. 9 and 10, the pieces E 
serving to form the bottom of the extension. 
This ring is secured in position by being 
forced under inwardly-projecting shoulders 
F of projections F, cast on the top of the 
valve. This false ring may be mounted on 
the valve either in short sections or in a con 
tinuous form, as shown in Fig. 2. In the 
latter construction the ends of the ring E are 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606043.txt	 
(No Model.) 
  
No. 606,043. 
F. BOSSERT 
SIGNAT, ALARM, 
Patented June 21, 1898. 
 
 
An?enior: 
77ed Aosserl. 
247, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FREDERICR BOSSERT, OF DETROIT, MICHIGAN, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-IIALF TO 
JOIN E. F. UTHES, OF SAME PLACE. 
SIGNAL-ALAR Vi. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 606,043, dated June 21, 1898. 
Application filed December 6, 1897, Serial No, 660,944, (No model.) 
w 
To all, whom it nazy concern. 
Be it known that I, FREDERICKBOSSERT, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at De 
troit, in the county of Wayne and State of 
5 Michigan, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Signal-Alarms, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
Io This invention relates to that class of sig 
nal-alarms especially designed for the pro 
tection of homes and their inmates from the 
visits of burglars or other persons entering 
with evil intent; and to this end the inven 
15 tion consists in the peculiar construction, ar 
rangement, and operation of a torch and tor 
pedoes or their equivalents inclosed within a 
case on the outside of the house, with means 
for lighting the torch and setting off the tor 
2o pedoes instantly by the operation of an elec 
tric-circuit closer, all as more fully hereinaf 
ter described and shown in the drawings, in 
which 
Figure 1 is a vertical section of my alarm 
25 with the parts in position as required for op 
eration. Fig. 2 is a top plan with the cover 
of the inclosing case removed. Fig. 3 is a 
perspective view of the device with the parts 
in position as in operation. 
3o A is the outer inclosing case, which should 
form a weatherproof housing and have a door 
IB for ready access to the interior. 
C is a tube or barrel closed at the lower 
end and open at the upper end. D are trun 
35 nions, by means of which this tube is pivotally 
secured upon a Suitable Support E. On the 
bottom of the housing. 
F is an interior filling with which the tube 
C is charged and which consists of Bengal 
4o fire or other like material, which when lighted 
will burn with a vivid flame capable of being 
seen at a distance and attract attention. 
F is a torpedo of the kind which will ex 
plode with a loud report. 
45 G is a clamp or other fastening device 
whereby the torpedo is secured to the tube C. 
II is a coil-spring attached inside the hous 
ing. 
I is a combustible cord connecting the tube 
So C with the coil-spring H across the mouth of 
the tube C or in any other manner, whereby 
the tube is held in inclined position within 
the casing capable of releasing itself by the 
burning of the cord. 
J is a door; in the side of the housing, to 
ward which the tube C is inclined. It is 
hinged at its lower end and opens OutWardly. 
K is a connection between the door J to 
the tube C, by means of which the door is 
kept closed in the normal position of the 
parts shown in Fig. 1. 
L is a shelf removably secured in the upper 
part of the housing, and M are binding-posts. 
carried by the shelf and insulated from each 
other. 
N are electrodes, one for each binding 
post and in electrical connection there with 
and forming between them an electric gap 
for the production of an electric spark. 
O O are electric connections, whereby the 
electrodes are connected in circuit with a Suit 
able source of electricity (not shown) for pro 
ducing an electric spark between the elec 
trodes on closing the circuit. 
P is a fuse connected to the torch and ex 
tending with its free end between the elec 
trodes. 
Q are spring - fingers to prevent the acci 
dental displacement of the fuse P. 
R is another fuse leading from the torch to 
the torpedo, and S is a push-button in the 
electric circuit. 
The parts being constructed and arranged 
as shown and described, they are intended to 
operate as follows: On pressing the button S 
an electric spark is produced in the gap be 
tween the electrodes, and if the parts are al 
ranged ready for Operation, as in FigS. 1 and 
2, the spark ignites the fuse P, the latter in 
turn ignites the charge in the tube, and this 
in turn destroys the connection I, and thereby 
causes the tube C to open the door J and fall 
outwardly with it until it assumes the posi 
tion shown in Fig. 3. The torch will thus 
emit a big flame of colored fire which is cal 
culated to burn for several minutes, and as 
the burning of the fuse reaches the torpedo 
the latter explodes with a loud report, and 
thus a twofold alarm is produced. 
In practice the device is secured, prefer 
ably, at the outside of a house in an elevated 
position. The electric connections which lead 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
 
606,043 
55 
6) 
o 
go 
into the house should be connected to prevent, and means for lighting the fuse operated by 
any malicious talmpering, and the plush-but 
the closing of an electiic circ(lit. 
tol) or switch should be in an easily-accessible 
4. In a signal-alai'in, the combination of a 
position to guard against Surprise. 
housing, a torch inclosed therein and hinge 
The means for operating my device electric 
connected at its lower end, means Securing 
ally are well known and do not form a part of 
the torch in inclined position within the hous 
my invention, and I expressly want it under 
ing and adapted to release the torch when 
stood that any other means for lighting the 
burning, an opening in the housing through 
flise may be applied, although I prefer the use 
which the torch is adapted to project, a door 
of electricity as the most convenient. This 
normally closing said opening and adapted to 
may be used in various known ways either to 
be opened by the falling of the to cla from its 
Operate the al'matul'e of an electric magnet, 
inclined position, a fuse for lighting the torch 
which in turn operates to release a hammer 
and electrically-operating means for lighting 
for exploding a cap, or it may be used to ren 
the fuse. 
der a piece of fine platinum wire incandescent, 
5. In a signal-alarm, the combination of a 
and thereby light the fuse, or an induction 
housing having an opening in One side, a 
coil and battery may be used. In this case 
torch comprising a in outer metallic tube 
the electrodes Would be connected to the sec 
hinged at its lower end in the housing and 
On daily circuit and the push-button would be 
adapted to receive a charge of colored fire 
in the primary circuit, and the opening and 
and a fuse leading into said charge, a (loor 
closing of this circuit would then produce : 
normally closing the opening in the side of 
spark. 
the housing and connected to the torch, a 
torpedo carried by the torch and adapted to 
be exploded by the burning of the torch, a 
combustible connection for holding the torch 
in an inclined position, electrodes and means 
for producing a spark between the electrodes, 
the arrangement being such that the spark 
lights the fuse, the fuse lights the torch, the 
torch burns the connection holding it in po 
sition and allows the torch to fall open the 
door and show the light outside the housing 
and fire also the torpedo. 
6. In a signal-alarm, the combination of a 
housing having all opening in one side, a 
torch movably secured within the housing, 
and provided with means, operating all to 
matically, for projecting it out through the 
Opening in the housing, a string or like coln 
nection of combustible material for holding 
the torch in its retracted position within the 
housing and adapted to be severed by the 
burning of the torch and theirely release the 
same and means for lighting the torch. 
in testimony whereof a ?ix ny signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a signal-ala l'in, the combination of a 
housing, having an opening in one side, a 
torch hinged within the housing free to fall 
in the direction of said opening, a combusti 
ble connection securing the torch against fall 
ing and adapted to be destroyed by the burn 
ing of the torch, and means for lighting the 
to 'ch. 
2. In a signal-alarm, the combination of a 
housing having an opening in one side, a torch 
hinged within the housing free to fall in the 
direction of said opening and project out 
through the same, a door normally closing 
Said opening and adapted to be opened by 
the falling of the torch, means securing the 
torch against falling and adapted to release 
the same by the burning of the torch and 
means for lighting the torch. 
3. In a signal-alarm, the combination of a 
housing having an opening formed in one 
side, a torch hinged within the housing free 
to fall in the direction of said opening and 
plOject Out through the same, a torpedo se 
cured to and carried by the torch and adapted 
to be exploded by the burning of the torch, 
means Securing the torch in inclined position 
and adapted to release the same by the burn 
ing of the torch, a fuse for lighting the torch 
FREI). OSSIER, 
Witnesses: 
M. B. O'DoGHERTY, 
OTTO F. BARTIEL. 
O 
25 
35 
4.O 
45 
SO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606143.txt	(No Model.) 
F. D. HOEHL. 
ALARM CLOCK, 
3 sheets-Sheet 1. 
No. 606,143, 
Patented June 21, 1898, 
witnesses 
NVENOr 
 
(No Model.) 
F. D. HOEHL. 
ALARM CLOCK, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 606, 143, 
Patented June 2l l898, 
WITNESSES 
NVENTOR 
 
THE NORRS PETERs co, PHOTo-Litho., washingtoN, b. c. 
F. D. HOEHL, 
ALARM CLOCK, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented June 21, 1898. 
Zey. A2 
(No Model.) 
, 
No. 606,143. 
Z27 A2 
 
- 
also E. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FREDERICK D. HOEHL, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
AAR V - C - O C K. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 606,143, dated June 21, 1898. 
Application fled July 19, 1892, Serial No. 440,532, (No model.) 
O 
To all, who in it Tival/ conce71. 
Beit known that I, FREDERICKD. HOEHL, 
of Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and 
State of Pennsylvania, have invented a new 
and useful Improvement in Alarm-Clocks, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the ac 
companying drawings, forming part of this 
specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a front view of the dial of a clock 
constructed in accordance With my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a front view of the alarm-controlling 
cam and the alarm-movement. Fig. 3 is a 
similar view of the alarm-movement shown 
in a different position. Fig. 4 is a detail view 
hereinafter referred to. Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are 
front, side, and top elevations, respectively, 
of the alarm-controlling cam. Figs. 8, 9, and 
10 are front elevations showing different po 
sitions of a modified form of the alarm-con 
trolling cam. Figs. 11 and 12 are detail views 
thereof. Figs. 13 and 14 are side elevations, 
partly in section, of the alarm-movement of 
Figs. 2 and 3; and Fig. 15 is a front elevation 
of a modified form of the alarm-movement. 
My invention relates to that class of alarm 
clocks wherein the alarm may be set to sound 
once in twenty-four hours at any desired time; 
and it consists in an improved construction 
and arrangement of the parts whereby the 
works are much simplified and very little care 
is required in setting the alarm. 
. 
It also consists in mechanism which may be 
set or adjusted to regulate the duration of the 
alarm, all as hereinafter more fully described, 
and set forth in the claims. 
In the drawings, in which similar numerals 
indicate like parts, 2 represents a disk secured 
to a sleeve 3, which fits tightly about the hour 
hand spindle 3' and normally rotates there 
with, but may be turned independently of the 
same. The front portion of this sleeve is suffi 
ciently hollowed out to allow the usual tubu 
lar eye of the hour-hand to enter the same 
and prevent interference with said tubular 
eye when the sleeve 3 is turned and also to 
make said sieeve light. To the disk 2 is se 
cured a spiral band 4, whose outer end portion 
5 is somewhat broader than elsewhere. An 
inclined strip 6 is secured on this outer part 
5 and forms a seat for a bridge 7, pivoted 
loosely thereto, and said seat is arranged so 
that the front side of the bridge is level with 
the highest point of the strip 6 and with the 
band 4. The bridge 7 has a rearwardly-bent 
extension S, to which is attached one end of 
a spiral spring 9, whose other end is attached 
to a pin 9', secured to the front side of the 
disk 2 and serves to draw said bridge into the 
position of Fig. 2. A lever 10 is pivoted loosely 
to the clock-movement plate 11, and said le 
ver is provided at its outer end with a per 
foration, within which is provided a tongue 
12, which is normally held inwardly by a flat 
spring 13, secured to the lever by pins 14, and 
is engaged by the Spiral band 4. From this 
lever extends the rod 15, which connects the 
same with the lever 16, pivoted loosely to the 
front alarm - movement plate 16'. 
In this 
alarm - movement the toothed wheel 17 is 
driven, primarily, by the usual spring and 
meshes with a pinion 18, whose shaft carries 
a toothed wheel 19, meshing with a pinion 20 
upon the shaft of the escape-wheel 21. The 
pallet 22 is fixed to the spindle which car 
ries the bell-clapper lever 22", and upon the 
escape-wheel is secured a projecting pin. 23, 
which is normally engaged by a projecting 
tongue 24 upon the end of a lever 25. This 
lever 25 is provided with a bearing 25", which 
is secured to said lever, and has a perfora 
tion which is flattened upon one side and 
supports a tongue 26 of similar shape as 
said perforation and which is arranged to 
project in the path of a lever-hook 36 and is 
held in said projected position by a spring 27, 
secured to the rear side of the lever 25. A 
slot is provided in the front plate 16' in the 
path of said tongue for a purpose hereinafter 
referred to. The bearing of the tongue 26 is 
secured to its lever so that the round side of 
the perforation is toward the lever-hook 36 
when in normal position, and thus the tongue 
is always held in the same relative position. 
The front end of said tongue is beveled off so 
that the flat side is the longest, and the hook 
36 is bent upward, as shown in Fig. 13, in 
order that said hook may easily force the 
tongue and the spring 27 rearward and thus 
pass the tongue. 
28 is a pin, upon the rear portion of which 
is arranged a sleeve 28, to which its lever 25 
is secured and also another lever or pawl 29. 
A Washer 28' is placed between said sleeve 
3O 
45 
 
55 
75 
9 O 
95 
CO 
3. 
606,143 
O 
25 
35 
coil of the cam and continuously drawing up 
and a shoulder of the pin 2S, while a rivet 29' 
passes through said projection in front of the 
wardly on the lever 16. As this lever 16 is 
sleeve and, pressing the same tightly against 
raised the hooked end 36 is forced down 
the washer, frictionally tightens the sleeve to 
wardly and passes over the beveled end of 
the projection, but it is arranged loosely 
the tongue 26, forcing the same back against 
enough so that the gravity of the attached 
the action of the spring 27 until the level is 
parts slightly exceeds the fiction, and the 
past, when the tongue is forced back to place, 
lever 25 and its attached bearing 25 are also 
and the hook is consequently behind the flat. Ol' 
arranged so that the front side of said bear 
top edge of the bevel and cannot pass over the 
ing slightly touches the rear side of the front 
same in its return motion. When the Cain 
plate 16', and thus the motion of these parts 
has nearly completed its two revolutions, SO 
is retarded for the purpose hereinafter re 
that the tongue 12 reaches the incline 3, it 
rides up this incline and is forced forwardly 
ferred to. 
30 is a lever arranged loosely upon a pin 
against the spring 13 until the end of the 
31, extending rearwardly from the front plate 
raised part 5 of the cam-strip is reached, when 
1(5', and about the pin is a spiral spring 31', 
it is released and slides down Wardly over the 
bridge and middle coil into the position of 
One of whose ends is attached to said level 
and the other to the front plate 16' in order 
Fig. 2, the tongue being then forced into nor 
to draw said level downwardly until its pro 
mal position by the spring. As the tongue 12 
jecting end 32 comes opposite the pin 33, 
is released by the cam the Spring 35 will draw 
which is secured to said front plate. This 
the lever 16 downwardly, and thereby force 
lever 30 is provided at its upper end with a 
its hooked end against the tongue 26 and raise 
certain number of teeth and with an offset 34, 
the evers 25 and 29, the level ol' pawl 29 mov 
both of which are engaged by a pin 37 and by 
ing out of the offset in the toothed fever, al 
the pawl 29. The pill is secured to the wheel 
lowing the lever to drop to a position where 
19 and rotates at an ecual rate there with, en 
it is arrested by the pin 33, the tonglle 24 of 
gaging the teeth of the level when revolving, 
the lever 25 at the same time being lnoyed 
and the pawl leeps the teeth of said lever in 
out of the path of the pin 23. After the end 
line with the pin 37 while the same is revolv 
36 of the lever 16 has passed the tongue 26 
ing and engages the offset to lock with the 
the level's 25 and 29 are allowed to drop back; 
coperating level 25 the alarm - movement. 
but as the toothed lever 30 has cl!'opped a cel 
The pin 33 is all'anged in a certain portion of 
tain amount the lever or pawl 29 cannot dro) 
the arc of the projecting lever end 32 to cor 
into the set-off of the toothed lever, and hence 
respond to a certain number of teeth of the 
falls upon the ratchet - teeth, keeping the 
lever 30 which may be desired to be operated 
tongue 24 still out of the path of the pin 2:3. 
by the pin 37. It will be seen in Figs. 2 and 
The alarm mechanism is now fi'ee ald the 
3 that this pin 33 is arranged so that ten teeth 
alarm sounds. As the wheel 19 'evolves and 
of the lever are operated by the pin 37, and 
the pin 37, revolving at the same speed there 
the highest number which may be operated 
with, engages the teeth of the lever 30 it 
in the form shown is twelve; but this lever 
moves one tooth of the same at every revolu 
may be arranged to have many more teeth if 
tion, and as the pawl or lever 29 rests upon 
it should be desired. 
the same it causes the pawl to slicle from Olle 
35 is a spiral spring, of which one end is 
tooth to another and preserve the toothed le 
attached to the pin 28 and the other to the in 
wer in the position left by the pin 37; but 
ner portion of the lever 16, which is connected 
when the set-off is engaged by the pawl the 
with the rod 15 to draw the connected parts 
lever 25 drops downwardly and brings its 
to their normal position, as in Fig. 2. A hand 
tongue 24 into the path of the pil 23, therely 
lever, having arms 3S and 3S", is pivoted to 
locking the alarm - movement. When the 
the front movement-plate, so that it will stay 
hand-lever 38 is turned to lock the alain, Oln() 
in any position it may be moved, and the ends 
arm enters the slot in the fraine and engages 
of said arms are bent rearwardly to respec 
the toothed lever 30, while the other an ell 
tively engage the pallet and the protruding 
gages the escapement-lever, and in this posi 
level end 32. A slot is arranged upon said 
tion the lever 16 will override the tongtic 20 
front plate opposite said level end 32 and the 
and move the lever 25 with oilt, Sounding the 
end of the arm 3S, permitting the arm 3S" to 
alarm. 
enter for the purpose of stopping off the alarm 
In Fig. 1, which illustrates the dial. I pre 
entirely when desired. 
fer to employ, 39 is the dial, having the usual 
The operation of the device is as follows: 
numbers thereon. 40 and 41 are the hands, 
When the disk rotates in the direction of the 
and 42 an ordinary alarm-dial Secured to the 
arrow, the spiral calm 4 engages the tongue 12 
sleeve 3 of the cam, as ordinarily. 43 is a rigid 
of the level 10 and gradually lifts said lever, 
pin secured to the back of the alarin-dial and 
thereby drawing upon the end of the lever 16 
arranged to engage a rotary sign-dial lif., piv 
through the rod J5. When the cam completes 
oted upon the rear side of the time-dial 39. 
one revolution, the tongue 12 strikes against 
The sign-dial is provided around its periph 
the bridge and gradually forces the same back 
elry with a series of alternating signs indicat 
until it has passed, when the spring 9 retracts 
ing the first and second cycles of the call 
the bridge, the tongue riding upon the outer such as the letters A and W, which appear 
o 
RO 
85 
90 
OO 
I o5 
C. 
I 30 
45 
55 
 
606,143 
3. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
through a slot in the time-dial-and with a the projection 28, while the pin 31 is arranged 
series of notches which are successively en 
so that it extends from the front side of the 
movement-plate. 51 is a lever pivoted loosely 
gaged by a spring 45, which holds the dial in 
any position to which it is turned. 
to the movement-plate and having two rear 
wardly-bent tongues 52 and 52', which engage, 
In Fig. 2 the cam is shown as having just 
released the lever 10 and the alarm having 
respectively, the pallet and the lever 25, and 
been consequently sounded. In Fig. 1 this is 
having a forwardly-bent tongue 53, which is 
indicated by the letter A, disclosed through 
connected with the rod 15. A spring 54 is 
a slot in the dial, thus showing that the cam 
secured to the rear side of the front plate and 
begins its first cycle and that if the alarm is 
has a forwardly-extending tongue 55, which 
presses against the lever 51 and is thereby 
set for a certain hour while the letter 'A' is in 
forced upwardly when the same is raised by 
view the alarm Will be sounded at that hour 
in the second cycle from the time indicated by 
the action of the cam. When said lever is 
gradually raised, its tongues 52 and 52' are 
the clock. The letter A indicates After, 
the cycle after twelve hours from the time in 
moved toward the pallet and lever 25, respec 
dicated by the clock when setting the alarm. 
tively, and at the moment the lever-tongue 
If the alarm-dial is rotated once, the next 
24 is moved out of the path of the pin 23 the 
sign, the letter W, appears in the slot, and 
escapement is sufficiently locked by the 
the alarm will now sound at any particular 
tongue 52 to prevent the sounding of the 
hour in the second cycle. 
alarm, and after the lever 30 is raised to its 
In Fig. 1 the hands indicate the hour of 3.30 
full extent the parts assume the position 
p. m., and if all alarm is desired, say at six 
shown, the pawl 29 being then out of the path 
a.m., the alarm-setting dial is turned forward 
of the lever 30 and said lever having dropped 
to its proper position. At the moment the 
until the division G comes opposite the hour 
hand 41, which is the pointer for the alarm 
lever 51 is released by the cam it is forced 
downwardly by the spring 54, and thereby the 
dial, as in an ordinary alarm-clock. Thus the 
alarm-controlling mechanism was turned nine 
tongues 52 and 52' are sufficiently removed 
and one-half divisions, and consequently has 
out of the path of their respective parts to 
allow the same to operate, as explained in the 
fourteen and One-half divisions yet to rotate, 
this being equal to the passage of the hour 
other form. A lever 56 is loosely arranged 
hand from 3.30 p.m. to 6 a. m. If the time is 
upon the front portion of the pin 31 and is 
the same and the alarm is desired at six p.m., 
provided on its rear side, at its outer end, with 
a strip 57, which is arranged to engage with a 
the alarm-dial is turned once around, thus 
bringing the letter W into view, and then 
series of notches arranged upon a strip 5S, 
turned again until the division 6 is oppo 
which is secured to the movement-plate and 
site the hour-hand, the alarm-dial being thus 
to which is secured an index-plate 59 to indi 
turned twenty-one and one-half divisions, and 
cate the position of said lever 56. The pin 
consequently two and one-half divisons yet 
33, which is shown in the other form secured 
remain, this being equal to the passage of the 
to the front plate 16', is secured to the lever 
hour-hand from 3.30 to 6 p.m. 
56, as shown, and is arranged to move in the 
In Figs. S, 9, and 10 I illustrate a modified 
path of the lever 30, and its relative parts are 
form of alarm-controlling calm, consisting of a 
so constructed and arranged that if the lever 
disk 46, having a curved slot 47, an inclined 
56 is set in a certain notch of the strip num 
outer portion 48, and a curved projection 49. 
bered from 1 to 12 said pin will be in 
The lever 10, carrying the rod 15, is provided 
the position in the arc of the lever 30 which 
with the tongue and spring, as before. The 
is equivalent to the respective number of the 
tongue, however, is flattened on one side to 
notch in which the lever 56 has been set and 
preserve it in the same relative position and 
the number of teeth which the lever 30 may 
is provided at its inner end with an extension 
bring within the path of the pin 37. It is ob 
bent at right angles to the same, as in Fig. 
Violls that in whichever notch the lever 56 is 
12, to prevent the tongue from slipping into 
set the number opposite the same indicates 
the curved slot when released by the projec 
the respective number of teeth which the le 
tion 49, this extension taking the place of the 
ver 30 may bring within the path of the pin 
swinging bridge in the other construction. 
37 in said position, and consequently the num 
A straight tongue and bridge may, however, 
ber of revolutions of the said pin 37 and 
be used with this form of calm, if desired, the 
wheel 19, before the alarm is stopped, and as 
tongue sliding upon the disk 46 until it reaches 
the pin 33 is thus made adjustable the du 
the straight end 50 of the slot, when it drops 
ration of the alarm may be lengthened or 
thereinto. The incline 4S raises the tongue 
shortened thereby, as desired. If no alarm is 
to the top of the disk, so that it again takes 
desired, the lever 56 may be set in the notch 
the position shown. 
mark 0, which keeps the lever 30 in a 
raised position and permits the pawl 29 and 
In the modified form of alarm-movement 
shown in Fig. 15 the lever 16, spring 35, the 
lever 25 to drop back to normal position each 
front extending portion of the pin 2S, and the 
time they are raised by the action of the cam, 
tongue 26 and its bearing and spring are 
and consequently the alarm is not sounded. 
omitted, and the sleeve 28, which carries the 
Many other changes in the form and ar 
pawl 29 and lever 25, is arranged loosely upon 
rangement of the parts will readily suggest 
75 
95 
Od 
IO 
I 25 
 
t 
606,143 
themselves to those skilled in the art without 
departing from my invention. 
The advantages of my construction are ob 
vious. A calm may be mounted directly upon 
the hour-hand spindle and the ordinary alarm 
dial employed and the alarm thus set for any 
time in twenty-four hours as easily as with 
an ordinary alarm-clock, while the mechan 
islm may also be set or adjusted to regulate 
the duration of the alarm. 
I claim 
1. In a clock, the combination with the 
clock-movement, of an alarm-movement, an 
alarm-controlling cam rotated by the clock 
movement more than once in a certain period 
of time and arranged to actuate the alarm 
movement once in the same period, an alarm 
Setting plate having divisions, and an indi 
cator operated by the alarm-setting plate and 
arranged to indicate continuously the posi 
tion of the alarm-controlling cam; Substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a clock, the combination of the clock 
movement arranged to complete one cycle of 
lmotion in twelve holls, an alarm-limovement, 
an alarm-controlling cam rotated by the clock 
movement twice in twenty-four hours and ar 
ranged to actuate the alarm but once in the 
same time, an alarm-setting dial having twelve 
divisions, and a movable sign operated by the 
alarm-setting dial arranged to indicate con 
tinuously the position of the alarm-control 
ling cam; substantially as described. 
3. In a clock, the combination with the 
clock-movement, of an alarm-movement, an 
alarm-controlling mechanism arranged to be 
rotated by the clock-movement more than 
once in a certain period of time and to actu 
ate the alarm but once in the same time, said 
mechanism consisting of a flat spiral cam of 
more than one convolution, the path of the 
convolutions receding from the center of the 
spiral, an element coperating with the cam, 
one of said parts being arranged to actuate 
the other, and an alarm-setting dial having 
divisions; substantially as described. 
4. In a clock, the combination with the 
clock - movement, of all alarm - movement, 
mechanism operated by the clock-movement 
for controlling the alarm - movement, stop 
mechanism for the alarm, means connected 
with the alarm-controlling mechanism for op 
erating the stop mechanism, a pivoted lever 
which may be adjusted to alter the duration 
of the alarm, and mechanism for retaining 
said lever in its adjusted position; substan 
tially as described. 
5. In a clock, the combination. With the 
clock-movement, of an alarm - movement, 
means for controlling the same, stop nech 
anism for the alarm, mechanism which may 
be adjusted to alter the duration of the alarm, 
means for retaining said adjusting mechan 
ism in its adjusted position, means operated 
by the clock-movement to disengage the stop 
mechanism, and mechanism for automatic 
ally returning the stop mechanism to its lock 
ing position; Substantially as described. 
6. In a clock, the combination with the 
clock-movement, of an alarm-movement, a flat 
spiral calm of more than one convolution the 
path of the convolutions receding from the 
center of the spiral, mechanism in engage 
ment with said can for operating the alarin 
movement, and mechanism near the Outer 
terminus of the cam by which the mechanism 
in engagement With the calm is brought to a 
position to be returned to its starting-point 
at the center of the calm; Substantially as de 
scribed. 
7. In a clock, the combination with the 
clock-movement, of all alarm-movement, a 
pivoted lever for starting and stopping the 
alarm, means operated by the clock-move 
ment to disengage said lever for the purpose 
of Sounding the alarm, and a toothed lever 
by which said pivoted lever is returned to its 
alarm-stopping position; Substantially as de 
scribed. 
S. In a clock, the combination of an alarin 
movement, means for controlling the same, 
stop mechanism for the alarm, a pivoted ad 
justing-lever for altering the duration of the 
alarm, and an indicator for indicating the clif 
ferent durations of the alarm; substantially 
as described. 
9. In a clock, the combination with the 
clock-movement, of an alarm-movement, a 
cam, a lever adapted to engage with said calm. 
for operating the alarm-inovelment, and a 
bridge-piece for returning the lever to its 
starting position after it has reached the outer 
terminus of the cam; Substantially as de 
scribed. 
10. In a clock, the combination. With the 
clock-movement, of an alarm-limovement, a 
cam, a level having in its end a spring-actu 
ated pin or stud adapted to engage with Said 
am for Operating the alarm-lmovement, all (l 
mechanism on the calm near its outer termi 
nus for engaging and retracting the pill; Sub 
stantially as described. 
11. In a clock, the combination with thic 
clock-movement, of an alarm-movement, a 
cam, a lever having in its end a spring-actu 
ated pin or stud adapted to engage with Said 
cam for operating the alarm-movement, and 
a bridge-piece for returning the level to its 
starting position after it has reached the 
outer terminus of the cam; substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand this 17th day of June, A. T). 1892, 
FREDERICIR ). IOEII. 
Witnesses: 
W. B. CoRWIN, 
II. M. CORWIN. 
o 
75 
8 5 
95 
CO 
I O5 
IO 
I I5 
O 
25 
35 
45 
5.o 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606243.txt	(No Model.) 
w 
F. H. RICHARDS, 
WEIGHING MACHINE. 
Sheets-Sheet 1, 
No. 606,243, 
Patented June 28, 1898, 
Fiv. 7. 
MV/aesses 
A/222a 
?ave/ator 
y 
 
THE Norris PETERsco, PHoro. Lt Ho, wash.INGTON, b. c. 
(No Model) , 
No. 606,243, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
F. H. RICHARDS, 
WEIGHING MACHINE, 
Patented June 28, 1898, 
72 
81 
re, la/ 
W2tnesses. 
. 
2 (22%z-z-z-z- 
-- 
An over Zor 
 
 
the NORRIS PETERS co, PHoTo-LTHo, washinator. D. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 606,243, 
F. H. RICHARDS. 
WEIGHING MACHINE, 
Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Patented June 28, 1898. 
i 
Witnesses. 
Za vent or 
 
The Norris Peters co, PHOTO-Litho, WASHINGroN, D. C. 
(No Model.) 
F. H. RICHARDS. 
WEIGHING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
No. 606,243, 
Patented June 28, l898, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
SA 
%.S. S. IBM 
Ky 
N.W.17 
M ( 2 
2.9/ 
--- 
/ 
 
 
M a 
M M 
 
t 
H 
Anven for 
 
HENORRIS PEfERS co, PHOTo-Lithio. washington.D. c. 
(No Model.) 
No. 606,243 
F. 6. 
F. H. RICHARDS, 
WEIGHING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 6. 
Patented June 28, 1898, 
... A22. . 
At Q'ev Zor 
 
the Norris Peters co. Photo-liho. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
(No Model.) 
F. H. RICHARDS. 
WEIGHING MACHINE, 
7 Sheets-Sheet 7, 
 
 
No. 606,243. 
Patented June 28, 1898. 
  
 
 
te iSEI 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS H. RICHARDS, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
WEIGHING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATIO orming part of Letters Patent No. 606,243, dated June 28, 1898. 
Application filed July 16, 1897, Serial No. 644,838, (No model.) 
the discharge of that portion of the material 
To all whom, it may concert: 
Beitknown that I, FRANCISH. RICHARDS, a 
constituting the overload to reconvey the 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hart- same back to the load-supply means or chute. 
ford, in the county of Hartford and State of 
This operation not only necessitates some 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
form of reconveying means-such, for in 
useful Improvements in Weighing-Machines, 
stance, as buckets carried by a belt or chain 
of which the following is a specification. . 
but may also necessitate a motor to lift such 
This invention relates to weighing - ma 
buckets, thereby increasing the running cost 
chines, more particularly to that class thereof 
of the apparatus, owing to the expense of run 
designated as rising-poise. Weighing-ma 
ning the motor. In order, therefore, to ob 
chines, in which an overload is reduced in 
viate this serious disadvantage, an improved 
stead of an underload increased, thereby to 
weighing-machine is provided in which the 
Secure a true load, the object of the invention 
overload discharged from One weighing mech 
being to provide a plurality of weighing ap 
anism will be received by and will constitute 
paratuses so coacting one with another that 
a part of the load of another weighing mech 
the material or stream discharged from the 
anism, thereby doing away with all recon 
load-receiver of one apparatus during the 
veying means heretofore used in weighing 
load-reducing period thereof will be received 
machines of this class. 
by and constitute a part of the load in the 
As a preface to a further description of this 
load-receiver of another apparatus without 
improved duplex Weighing-machine it will be 
the use of reconveying means for the purpose 
understood that the operative. mechanisms 
of conveying Such discharged material back 
and the means of support therefor can be 
to the material-Supply means. 
more or less varied without departing from 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
the general scope of the invention. 
vide a duplex Weighing-machine in which a 
As the operative mechanisms of the appa 
part of the operative mechanisms of one ap 
ratuses of this duplex weighing-machine are 
paratus will be reciprocally effective with a 
substantially duplicates of each other in con 
part of the operative mechanisms of the other 
struction and operation, it is deemed neces 
apparatus, whereby the operation of a part of 
sary to describe only one of said apparatuses 
each weighing-machine is controlled by the 
in detail, with such exceptions, however, as 
other machine. 
will be hereinafter set forth, corresponding 
In the drawings accompanying and form 
parts in the other apparatus being designated. 
ing a part of this specification, Figure 1 is a 
by like characters with prime-marks. In the 
top view of one construction of this improved 
present structure, however, a majority of the 
weighing-machine. Fig. 2 is a front view 
operative devices of one apparatus are shown 
thereof with parts broken away more clearly 
herein supported at the side opposite to that 
to illustrate the operative mechanisms of the 
at which the majority of the operative mech 
machine. Figs. 3, 4, and 5 are progressive 
anisms of the other apparatus are carried. 
This improved weighing-machine comprises 
side elevations of the machine. Figs. (3 to 
10, inclusive, are diagrammatical Sectional 
in a general Way a plurality of weighing 
views of the load-receivers, illustrating the 
mechanisms, (designated generally by A and 
operation thereof relatively to each other. 
A", respectively,) comprehending a plurality 
Figs. 11 to 14, inclusive, illustrate one of the 
of load-receivers, (designated in a general way 
load-reducing instrumentalities shown here 
by 200 and 200', respectively,) and a plurality 
in and the means for operating the same. 
of beam mechanisms, (designated in a general 
Similar characters of reference designate 
way by 300 and 300', respectively,) a plurality 
like parts in all the figures of the drawings. 
of material-Supply-regulating or stream-con 
Heretofore in the use of rising-poise weigh 
trolling means or mechanisms, (designated in 
-ing-machines-that is to say, those machines 
a general way by B and B", respectively,) a 
in which an overload is reduced to obtain a 
plurality of material-discharge means, such as 
closer mechanisms, (designated in a general 
true load instead of an underload increased 
for this purpose-it has been the practice upon 
way by C and C, respectively,) a plurality of 
O 
25 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
Ioo 
 
606,243 
load - reducing means or instrumentalities, 
(designated in a general way by D and D', 
respectively,) the load-reducing instrumen 
tality of one apparatus being controlled by 
5 alld on the Operation of another apparatills, 
and in the construction of machine herein 
shown, through the medium of the weighing 
mechanism thereof, preferably on the return 
of said Weighing mechanism to its normal po 
Io sition to receive a load after the discharge of 
its preceding load, a plurality of locking 
means (designated generally by E and E", re 
spectively) intermediate the stream-control 
ling means and load-discharging means, and 
I5 each of which is herein designated for the 
purpose of this specification as valve-closer 
locking means and operative to lock the 
valve shut when the closer is open and to lock 
the closer shut when the valve is open, and 
20 each of which locking means embodies sup 
plemental locking means operative to main 
tain the closer shut on the unlocking of the 
main locking means, reciprocally - effective 
locking means (designated in a general way 
25 by F) intermediate the main stream-control 
ling instrumentalities, whereby when one of 
Said stream-controlling means is open another 
is locked shut, and reciprocally-effective lock 
ing means (designated in a general way by 
3o G) intermediate the load-discharge or closer 
mechanisms, whereby when one of said closer 
lmechanisms is open another will be prevented 
from opening should the supplemental lock 
ing means be prematurely tripped. 
The framework for carrying the opera 
tive parts of this machine, which in its pre 
ferred form is shown as a duplex machine, 
may be of any suitable construction, but is 
herein shown comprising a relatively large 
40 base 2, having a natelial-discharge hopper or 
bin 3, divided by a partition 4 to constitute a 
pair of hoppers 5 and 5', one beneath the 
load-discharging means of each weighing 
mechanism, said hoppers terminating, how 
45 ever, in this structure of machine in the same 
conduit or outlet G. Extending upward from 
this base 2 is a pair of uprights or side frames 
8 and 9, each preferably comprising a pair of 
member's 8' and 8' and 9' and 9', respectively, 
5O and which side frames or uprights have se 
cured thereto a preferally marrow top plate 
10, supporting the duplex material-supply 
conduit or chute 12, which may be of any 
suitable or desired construction adapted for 
55 the purpose, and shown herein provided with 
a pair of conduits 13 and 13", each having its 
mouth disposed above one of the load- re 
Gleiwel's. 
The Weighing mechanism-for instance, 
6o that designated generally by A, (the weighing 
mechanism designated generally by A' being, 
as above stated, substantially a duplicate 
thereof)-comprehends, in the preferred form 
thereof herein shown and described, a load 
65 receiver which may be of any suitable con 
struction, but is shown herein as a receptacle 
or bucket (designated generally by 200) prof 
35. 
 
o 
So 
erably of the single-chambered type Ol' class, 
having adjacent to its lower end a main-load 
discharging mouth. This load-receiver is 
carried by beam mechanish (designated gen 
erally by 300) comprehending a be: in or coull 
terbalancing-weight (designated generally by 
150) adapted in its normal position to rest on 
a pair of supporting arms or brackets -l, ex 
tending from the base 2, and which Weight 
has connected there with a pair of Scale beans 
or arms 100 and 101, adapted to support, the 
load-receiver, and for this purpose each of 
said beams is supported on the framework by 
means of suitable adjustable bearings 17, 
shown herein as knife-edge pivots 1S and W 
shaped bearing members 19, the bearing illem 
bers 19 being preferably carried by the base 
2. In the construction shown Substantially 
similar bearings 20 are used between the lean 
mechanism and load-receiver. To maintain 
said receiver in proper position during its op 
eration, and thereby prevent lateral or Oscil 
latory movement, thereof, it is shown coll 
nected to the supply-chute by a pair of coin 
nectors 21 and 2:2, one, as 21, having Olle eld 
pivotally secured to said chute and its oppo 
site end pivotally secured to an upwardly-ex 
tending arm 22, the lower end of which is 
fixedly secured to the load-receiver: it one side 
thereof. 
The stream-conti'olling means, (designated 
generally by B, ) in the preferred for in thereof 
herein shown and described, comprehends a 
valve 25, comprising a valve plate O' blade 26, 
having a pair of valve-arms 27 and 28, one at 
each end thereof. One of the Valve-al' inas, as 27, 
is shown pivotally secured to one side of the 
supply-chute conduit 13, while the other, as 
28, is rigidly secured to a short rock-shaft, 29. 
one end of which is supported at the opposite 
side of said chute-conduit 13, while the other 
end of said shaft is journaled in a bracket 30, 
projecting from the top plate 10, whereby the 
valve is in position at the mouth of said con 
duit 13 to control the supply of material to 
said load-receiver. The valve is pi'ovided 
with a weight 31, carried by all a in 32, ?ix 
edly secured to said rock-shaft, 29 and adapt 
ed to shut, said valve to cut of the stie: Il of 
material. Suitable means is provided for 
opening and holding the valve open dil ring 
the load-receiving period of the apartus, 
and which means enlyodies a waive-act at Ol', 
shown herein as a depending member, Stell 
as a lever 33, pivotally secured to the weight 
arm 32. This valve-actuator is collin ccted to 
one of the side frames or members, as S', in y 
meals of a suitable connectoi' or ill, 3-4, 
whereby it is held in proper position to en 
gage a lart of the beam lechanisin, which 
preferably comprises a supplemental beam 
arm 35, shown herein pivotally connected to 
one of the scale beams or arms, as 100. This 
supplemental beam-arm 35 is provided adja 
cent to one end with a projection or roll 38, 
adapted to engage the lower end of said actil 
ator 33, and at its opposite end with a weight, 
f) 
90 
ICO 
O 
5 
606,243 
3 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
37. This weight, in view of its position, con 
stitutes a part of the beam-Weight and is pro 
vided with a recess 38, into which a projection 
39, carried by the beam-weight proper, 150, 
extends, whereby said supplemental weight 
will be carried upward with said beam-weight 
on the descent of the load-receiver. When 
the beam-weight 150 and the supplemental 
weight 37 are in their normal position, it will 
be seen that the actuator 33 will be main 
tained in position to hold the valve open, but 
that on the descent of the receiver and the 
consequent ascent of the beam and supple 
mental weights said actuator will be free to 
descend, whereupon the valve by means of 
its weight 31 will shut and cut off the supply 
Stream. 
The material-discharge means, (designated 
generally by C.) in the preferred form there 
of herein shown and described, comprises a 
closer 40, comprehending a closer blade or 
plate 41, having a pair of arms 42 and 43, piv 
otally Secured one at each side of the load 
receiver adjacent to the discharge-mouth 
thereof. This closer is provided with a weight 
for shutting the same after the discharge of 
the material from the receiver, and which 
Weight is shown carried by an arm 44, project 
ing from the hub of one of the closer-arms, 
as 42. 
To maintain the closer shut when the valve 
is open and the valve shut when the closer 
is open, suitable locking means (designated 
generally by E) is provided, and in the struc 
ture shown it comprises a pair of stops 45 
and 46, one, as 45, carried by the valve rock 
shaft 29, and therefore movable with the 
valve, and the other, as 46, carried by a rock 
shaft 47, journaled in bearings secured to 
the load-receiver, and therefore movable with 
Said load-receiver. The stop 46 is operative 
with the closer, and for this purpose it is 
shown connected there with by means of a 
pair of connectors 4S, pivotally secured at 
their lower ends to arms 49, rigidly secured 
to the hubs of the closer-arms 42 and 43, and 
at their upper ends respectively to an arm 50, 
rigidly secured to the rock-shaft 47 and to 
the stop 46. From the above it will be seen 
that when the valve is open the stop-face 51 
of the valve-stop 45 will engage the stop-face 
52 of the closer-stop, and thereby lock the 
closer shut, the valve-stop, however, being 
free to shift on the closing of the valve, at 
which time the stop-face 53 thereof will en 
gage the stop-face 54 of the closer-stop after 
the descent of the bucket and the opening of 
the closer, whereby the valve will be locked 
shut, the upward movement of the bucket on 
the partial discharge of the true load tending 
simply to lock the valve more tightly closed. 
To prevent the unlocking of the closer when 
the stops 45 and 46 are disengaged, supple 
mental locking means is provided, which in 
the Construction shown comprises a depend 
ing arm 55, carried by the closer-stop 46 and 
in position to be engaged by the locker 56. 
 
This locker 56 is shown pivotally secured to 
the load-receiver and is provided with a catch 
57 and is counterweighted, being maintained 
in its normal position by a stop 58, carried by 
the receiver. 
When the closer is shut, the 
locker-catch 57 is in engagement with the de 
pending arm 55, whereby the closer is locked 
shut. For the purpose of tripping this locker 
at a predetermined period, thereby to unlock 
the closer, a suitable locker-tripper 59 is pro 
vided, which in the construction shown is 
pivotally mounted on a projection or bracket 
60, carried by the member 8' of the side frame 
8, and comprises a weighted member 61, its 
movement being limited by a pair of stops 
62, carried by the weighted end thereof and 
engaging a stop member 63 of said projec 
tion 60. On the descent of the load-receiver 
the locker 56 engages and shifts the locker 
tripper 59 and moves past the same, where 
upon the tripper is shifted by its weight into 
position to engage the end of said locker 56 
on the return or ascent of the load-receiver 
to its poise position, at which time the closer 
is unlocked. The closer is preferably pro 
vided with a blade or plate 64, constituting 
regulator means, whereby the shutting of 
said closer is retarded until all appreciable 
amount of material has passed from the re 
ceiver. 
The primary object of this invention is to 
provide a machine in which the overload, or 
that part of the material discharged from one 
load-receiver during the load-reducing period 
of its weighing mechanism, will be emptied or 
discharged into and constitute a part of the 
load in the receiver of another weighing mech 
anism, whereby the use of reconveying means 
is obviated. In practice, therefore, each 
weighing apparatus comprised in the weigh 
ing-machine is furnished with a load-reducer, 
by which is meant some suitable means or 
instrumentality whereby at the proper time 
the surplus load of one of the weighing mech 
anisms may be discharged into the load-re 
ceiver of another of the Weighing mechanisms 
of the machine. These load-reducing instru 
mentalities or means (designated, generally 
and respectively, by D and D") are operative 
to cause or permit the reduction of the load, 
and each, in the preferred form thereof herein 
shown and described, preferably comprises a 
stream-controller, such as a valve 65, com 
prehending a plate or blade 66 and an arm 
67, pivotally secured to the load-receiver at 
one side thereof. This valve-blade is in po 
sition to close and open the mouth of an out 
let or a spout 68, projecting from one side of 
the load-receiver and which spout is shown 
herein disposed directly above a stream or 
material receiving conduit 69', communicat 
ing with the interior of the receiver 200', and 
which conduit is formed by an extension of 
said load-receiver of the weighing mechan- . 
ism A', whereby it will be seen that on the 
reduction of the load in one receiver the ma 
terial discharged therefrom during its load 
o 
75 
93 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
4. 
606,248 
Id 
reducing period will flow into the other load-. 
receiver and form a part of the load thereof. 
From the above it will be seen that the spout, 
of one receiver is directly above the stream 
receiving conduit of the other receiver. In 
this improved duplex machine the operation 
of each load-reducing instrumentality is ef 
fected and controlled at one predetermined 
period by means of the other apparatus, pref 
erably by means of the weighing mechanism 
thereof through the medium of the beam 
mechanism, and for this purpose a load-re 
ducer actuator 70 is pivotally secured to the 
load-receiver 200 and has its opposite end 71 
projecting into position to be engaged by a 
stop 72', carried by the supply-valve actua 
to 33". This load-reducer actitiator 70 is pro 
vided with an upwardly-extending arm 73, 
adapted to engage a laterally-extendling stop 
or projection 74 of the valve-arm (37. From 
the above it will be readily seen by reference 
to the load-reducing means (designated gen 
erally by D', Figs. 4, 11, and 12) that after 
the true or completed load has been dis 
charged from the receiver 200 the ascent of 
said receive to its normal position and the 
consequent descent of the supplemental 
beam-weight, 37 at the proper time moves 
the valve-actuator 33 upward, thereby open 
ing the supply-valve 25 and simultaneously 
shifting the load-receiver actuator 70' of the 
weighing mechanism A', which in turn, by 
means of its arm 73' and the reducing-valve 
stop 74", shifts the load-reducing valve (35' 
into position to permit the reduction of the 
overload previously received by said weigh 
ing mechanism A', such overload flowing 
into the load-receiver 200, which at this time 
is also being supplied with material from 
the Supply-chute. When the overload has 
been reduced stifliciently to form a true load 
in the receive?' 200', said receiver ascends to 
its poise position, Figs. 13 and 14, thereby 
carrying the load-reducing valve 65' upward 
there with, and consequently disengaging the 
stop 74 from the actuator-arm 73', whereby 
such load-reducing instrumentality returns 
by its own weight into its normal position, 
thereby cutting off the outfiow of material, 
the return or downward movement of said 
instrumentality being limited by a suitable 
stop 75", carried by the load - receiver. The 
return movement of the reducing-valve ac 
tuator 70' takes place on the descent of the 
supply-valve actuator 33, which occurs prac 
tically simultaneously with the ascent of the 
beam-weight 150, whereby the load-receiver 
200' can descend at the proper time with its 
lnext overload without the opening of its re 
ducing - valve. From the above it will be 
readily seen that while the operation of the 
load-l'educing instrumentality of one appa 
ratus is effected and controlled by the other 
apparatus through the Weighing mechanism 
5 tiereof by means of its beam mechanism the 
operation of Stlch load-l'educing instrumen 
tality at one predetermined time is also indi 
rectly controlled by the closer, as tintil Slich. 
closer shuts the stops d5 and d6 prevent 
the ascent of the valve-actuator 33 and the 
consequent descent of the supplemental 
weight 37. 
To lock the main-stream-controlling means 
of one apparatus tightly closed while the other 
is open, suitable coacting mechanism is pro 
vided, (designated generally by F.) and in tie 
construction thereof herein show it, Con 
prises a pair of stops SO and 80', one, as 80, 
being fixedly secured to the supply - valve 
rock-shaft 29, while the other, as SO", is ?ix 
edly secured to a hub 27' of the other streal 
controller 25, whereby when the valve 25 is 
open, Fig. 4, the stop-face S of the stop S() 
will be in position to engage the stop-face SI' 
of the other stop S0', and thereby prevent the 
opening of the valve 25", the same result be 
ing secured when the valve 25 is closed aid 
the valve 25' is open, at which title the stop 
faces S2 and S2' will be in engagement, 
To provent the opening of the closer of one 
apparatus during the main-load-discharging 
period of its coln pallion apparatus, Suitable 
reciprocally-effective locking means (desig 
nated generally by G) is provided, whereby 
should the supplemental locking means 55 
and 56 or 55' and 56' be preimaturely trippel 
the opening of the closer of one apparatus 
would be prevented while the closer of the 
other apparatus is open. This locking incans, 
in the form shown herein, preferably coin 
prises a pair of stops S5 and S.5', carried one 
by the hub of each closer 40 and 40', respec 
tively. As in this construction of apparatus 
the closers open toward each other, it will be 
seen that when, for instance, the closer 10 is 
open, Fig. 3, the stop-face S6 of the stop S5 
will be in position to engage the stop-face S7 
of the closer-stop 8.5', whereby the opening of 
the closer 40' will be prevented. In this cou 
struction of apparatus a slight play is per 
mitted between the said stops S5 and S5', this 
being provided for by the increased lengths 
of the closel's at the outel' ends thereof. 
The operation of this improved duplex. 
weighing-machine is substantially as follows: 
The load - receiver 200 having received all 
overload and the same having been reduced, 
said receiver ascends to a poise, wherettpon 
the closer is opened and the discharge of the 
load takes place, Fig. 3, at which time the 
operative mechanisms of the duplex machine 
are substantially in the positions shown in 
Fig. 3, from which it will be seen that the re 
ceiver 200' of the weighing mechallisin A' has 
descended with its overload, Fig. (3, and is ill 
position to have such overload reduced. 
When all appreciable amount of laterial 
has passed from the load - receiver 200, the 
closer 40 will shut, thereby unlocking the 
main-stream controller 25, owing to the dis 
engagement of the stops 45 and f(1, at which 
time the supplemental weight 37, which as 
cended with the bean - weight 150 and was 
held in such ascended position, Owing to the 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
7 O 
75 
So 
90 
95 
Od 
I o5 
1 15 
I 25 
I to 
 
606,243 
5 
7 O 
75 
O 
15 
25 
35 
engagement of said stops 45 and 46, will be 
permitted to descend, thereby moving the 
supply-valve actuator 33 upward and open 
ing the supply-valve 25 to permit the supply 
of material to flow into the load - receiver. 
This upward movement of the supply-valve 
actuator 33 operates by means of the stop 72 
to shift the load-reducer actuator 70' upward, 
and thereby, through the arm. 73' and the 
stop 74, the load-reducing valve 65' is moved 
upward, whereby the overload in the receiver 
200' is discharged into the stream-receiving 
conduit 69 of the receiver 200 simultaneously 
with the main supply thereto, Figs. 4 and 7, 
the supply-stream controller 25 at this time 
being locked closed by the engagement of the 
stops S0 and 80'. When the overload has been 
discharged from the receiver 200', such re 
ceiver ascends to its poise position, thereby 
disengaging the reducer-arm stop 74'from the 
actuator-arm 73' and permitting the load-re 
ducer valve 65 to close and thereby cut off the 
discharge of material. When the reduction 
of the load has been obtained, it will be seen 
that as the reducer-valve 65' cuts off such out 
flow the closer-locker 56' is in position to be en 
gaged by the locker-tripper 59, Fig. 5, whereby 
the closer is unlocked and permitted to open 
by the weight of its load, whereupon such load 
is discharged. This opening movement of 
the closer 40' carries its stop 85 into position 
to prevent the opening movement of the 
closer 40 of the receiver 200, Figs. 9 and 10. 
From the foregoing and by reference to Figs. 
6 to 10, inclusive, it will be seen, Fig. 6, that 
during the latter part of the main discharge 
from the receiver 200 the receiver 200 has 
received an overload and has descended to its 
Overpoise position in readiness to have such 
overload reduced, and which reduction takes 
place, as above set forth, on the reascent of 
the receiver 200 to receive another load, such 
reduction also taking place, in the construc 
tion of apparatus shown herein, simultane 
ously with the main supply to the receiver 
200, so that such receiver 200 is supplied with 
material from different sources at the same 
time. When the overload has been properly 
reduced, the discharge thereof is cut off, Fig. 
S, and the closer 40' unlocked, Fig. 9, and 
thereupon opens to discharge the load, Fig. 
10, while at this time the load-receiver 200 
has practically received its load and is in po 
sition to have the same reduced on the ascent 
of the receiver 200'. It will therefore be ob 
served that the receptacles discharge their 
true loads in alternation, that one receptacle 
is filling while the other is having its load re 
duced, and that the discharge of the true load 
from one receptacle commences while the 
other receptacle is still being supplied with 
material. 
In conclusion it will be seen that the oper 
ation of the load-reducing instrumentality of 
one apparatus is effected and controlled by 
the other apparatus, preferably through the 
Weighing mechanism thereof, and preferably 
 
through the beam mechanism forming a part 
of such Weighing mechanism, and is, more 
over, controlled on the ascent of a load-le 
ceiver to receive a load, whereby the reduc 
tion of the overload in the receiver of one 
apparatus takes place simultaneously with 
the supply of material to the receiver of the 
other apparatus. 
It will also be seen that the supply-valve 
actuator 33 is the means through which the 
beam mechanism operates the load-reducing 
valve and that such reducing-valve is per 
lmitted to close upon the ascent of its receiver, 
from which it follows that the beam mechan 
ism of one apparatus controls the opening of 
the reducing-valve of the other apparatus, 
while the closing movement thereof is con 
trolled by its own weighing mechanism. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim 
1. The combination of a pair of weighing 
apparatuses, one provided with a load-reduc 
ing instrumentality operative to reduce a load 
before the final discharge thereof; and actu 
ator means intermediate said load-reducing 
instrumentality and the other apparatus, 
whereby the operation of said load-reducing 
instrumentality is effected at one predeter 
mined period by and on the operation of said 
Other apparatus. 
2. The combination of a pair of weighing 
apparatuses, each provided with a load-reduc 
ing instrumentality operative to reduce a load 
before the final discharge thereof; and actu 
ator means intermediate each apparatus and 
the load-reducing instrumentality of its com 
panion apparatus, whereby the operation of 
the load-reducing instrumentality of one ap 
paratus is effected at one predetermined pe 
riod by and on the operation of the other ap 
paratus. 
3. A Weighing-machine comprising a plu 
rality of apparatuses, each provided with a 
load - reducing instrumentality operative to 
reduce a load before the final discharge there 
of, the operation of the load-reducing instru 
mentality of one apparatus being effected at 
one predetermined period by and on the op 
eration of another of said apparatuses. 
4. A weighing-machine comprising a plu 
rality of apparatuses, one provided With a 
load-reducing instrumentality operative to 
reduce a load before the final dischargethere 
of, the operation of said instrumentality be 
ing effected at one predetermined period by 
and on the operation of another of said ap 
paratuses. 
5. The combination of a plurality of weigh 
ing mechanisms; a load-reducing instrumen 
tality for each of said weighing mechanisms, 
and operative to reduce a load before the final 
discharge thereof, the operation of the load 
reducing instrumentality of one weighing 
mechanism being effected by and on the op 
eration of another of said weighing mechan 
isms. 
6. The combination of a plurality of weigh 
95 
IOO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
606,243 
7 O 
ing l}lechanisms, One provided with a load-re 
ducing instrumentality operative to reduce a 
load before the final discharge thereof; and 
means adapted to effect the operation thereof, 
and colntrolled by and on the operation of an 
Other of said Weighing mechanisms. 
7. The combination of a pair of weighing 
mechanisins, each provided with a load-re 
(lucing instrumentality operative to reduce a 
load before the final discharge thereof; and 
means adapted to effect the operation of the 
load-reducing instrumentality of one weigh 
ing lnechanisln on the operation of the other 
Weighing mechanism. 
S. A. Weighing-machine comprehending a 
pll!'ality of Weighing mechanisms, one pro 
vided with a load-reducing instrumentality 
Operated by and On the operation of another 
of Said Weighing mechanisms to reduce a load 
before the final discharge thereof, and adapt 
ed to cult Off Slich reduction at one predeter 
milled period on the Operation of its own 
Weighing mechanism. 
9. A Weighing-machine comprehending a 
plurality of weighing mechanisms, each pro 
vided with a load-reducing instrumentality 
Operated by and on the Operation of another 
of Said Weighing mechanisms to reduce a load 
before the final dischargethereof, and adapted 
to cut off such reduction at one predeter 
mined period on the operation of its own 
Weighing mechanism. 
10. The combination of a plurality of weigh 
ing mechanisms, one provided with a load-re 
dulcing Valve; and actuator means interme 
diate Said load-reducing waive and another of 
Said Weighing mechanisms, and operative to 
Open Said load-reducing valve on the opera 
tion of said other weighing mechanism, there 
by to permit the reduction of the load before 
the final discharge thereof, and said valve 
being adapted to close at One predetermined 
period on the operation of its own weighing 
lmechanism, thereby to cut off such reduction. 
ll. A. Weighing-machine comprehending a 
plurality of weighing mechanisms, each pro 
vided with a load-reducing valve opened by 
and On the Operation of another of said weigh 
ing mechanisms to effect the reduction of a 
load before the final discharge thereof. 
2. A duplex weighing-machine comprising 
a plurality of coacting weighing mechanisms, 
each having a load-reducing valve operable 
to Open and thereby effect the reduction of 
the load before the final discharge thereof, 
and adapted to close at one predetermined pe 
riod on the Operation of its own weighing 
lmechanism, and thereby cut off such reduc 
tion. 
13. The combination of a plurality of weigh 
ing mechanisins, each embodying a load-re 
Ceiver and beam mechanism therefor; a load 
reducing instrainentality for one of said 
Weighing mechanisms, and Operative by and 
Oil the Operation of the beam mechanism of 
all other of Said weighing mechanisms, there 
by to reduce a load before the final discharge 
thereof. 
14. The combination of a plurality of weigh 
ing mechanisms, each embodying a load-le 
ceiver and beam mechanis in therefoi'; a load 
reducing instrumentality for each of sail 
Weighing mechanisins, the load-reducing ill 
Strumentality of one weighing mechanisin &- 
ing operated by the bean mechanisl of al 
other of said weighing mechanisms, thereby 
to reduce a load before the final discharge 
thereof. 
15. The combination of a pair of weighing 
mechanisms, each embodying 
9 : load-receive 8 
and beam mechanism therefor; a load-red tic 
ing instrumentality for each of said weigiing 
mechanisms; and actuato' inleais inteline 
diate the load-reducing instrumentality of 
each of said weighing mechanisins and the 
beam mechanism of the other weighing mech 
anism, whereby said load - reducing instru 
mentality is operated, thereby to reduce a 
load before the final discharge tiereof. 
16. The combination of a pair of weighing 
mechanisms, each embodying a load-'eceiver 
and beam mechanism the 'efo'; Oyello al-Sill 
ply means for each of said weighing mechan 
isms; a load-reducing valve for each of Sail 
Weighing mechanisms; and actuator neas 
intermediate the load-reducing valve of each 
of said weighing inlechanisms and tile bean 
mechanism of the other Weighing nechanism, 
whereby said load-reducing valve is operated, 
thereby to reduce a load before the final (is 
charge thereof. 
17. In a weighing-machine, the coniina. 
tion of a pair of weighing mechanisms, each 
embodying a load-receiver having a load-re 
ducer, and Said machine having tile lo:(l-'e- 
ducer of one weighing mechanis in located to 
discharge the surplus material of the load of 
the one weighing mechanism into the load-re 
ceiver of the other weighing mechanisin. 
18. In a weighing-machine, the combilla 
tion of a pair of Weighing mechanisms, each 
embodying a load-l'eceiver having a load-'e- 
ducer, said machine having the load-reducer 
of one weighing mechanism located to dis 
charge the surplus material of the load of the 
one weighing mechanisin into the load-ite 
ceiver of the other weighing mechanism; andl 
said machine also having supply in eans for 
simultaneously supplying naterial to said re 
ceiver during its reception of such surplus 
imaterial. 
19. In a weighing-machine, the contina 
tion of a pair of coacting Weighing mechan 
isms, each embodying a load - receive; and 
mechanism operative to effect the overlo: {l 
of the receiver of one weighing mechanism 
during a predetermined period, and then op 
erative to effect the reduction of such ove 
load and the discharge of the surplus tiere 
of into its companion receiver simultaneously 
With a Slipibly of laterial to said companio 
receiver'. 
95 
Co 
I OS 
C. 
I T 5 
I 25 
O 
3O 
40 
45 
55 
65 
 
606,243 
; 
75 
95 
tion of a pair of Weighing mechanisms, each 
embodying a load-receiver having load-dis 
charge means and load-reducing means; and 
5 actuator means for operating the load-reduc 
ing means of each weighing mechanism on 
the operation of its companion weighing 
mechanism, and controlled in its operation, 
at one predetermined period, by the load-dis 
?o charge means of said companion weighing 
mechanism. 
21. In a Weighing-machine, the combina 
tion of a pair of Weighing mechanisms, each 
embodying a load-receiver having a closer 
I5 and a load-reducer; a stream - controller for 
each of said receivers; reciprocally-effective 
locking means for each coacting stream con 
troller and closer, and operative to lock the 
closer shut when the stream-controller is open, 
2O and to lock the stream-controller shut when 
the closer is open; and actuator means for 
operating the load-reducer of one weighing 
mechanism on the operation of its companion 
Weighing mechanism, and controlled in its 
25 Operation at one predetermined period by and 
On the shutting of the closer of said com 
panion Weighing mechanism. 
22. In a weighing-machine, the combina 
tion of a plurality of weighing mechanisms, 
3o each embodying a load-receiver, and one of 
said receivers having a stream-receiving con 
duit, and another of said receivers having a 
load-reducing outlet disposed adjacent to said 
stream-receiving conduit. 
23. In a Weighing-machine, the combina 
tion of a plurality of Weighing mechanisms, 
each embodying a load-receiver provided with 
a stream-receiving conduit and a load-reduc 
ing opening, each receiver having its open 
4o -ing disposed adjacent to the stream-receiving 
conduit of another of said receivers. 
24. In a duplex Weighing-machine, the com 
bination of a pair of weighing mechanisms, 
each embodying a load-receiver provided with 
45 a stream-receiving conduit at the lower part 
thereof, and a load-reducing opening at the 
upper part thereof, each receiver having its 
Opening disposed adjacent to the stream-re 
ceiving conduit of the other receiver. 
25. In a duplex Weighing-machine, the com 
bination of a pair of Weighing mechanisms, 
each embodying a load-receiver provided with 
a stream-receiving conduit and a load-reduc 
ing outlet, each of said receivers having its 
55 conduit and outlet disposed intermediate said 
receivers, and also having its outlet disposed 
directly above the stream-receiving conduit 
of the other receiver. 
26. In a duplex weighing-machine, the com 
6o bination of a pair of weighing mechanisms, 
each embodying a load-receiver provided with 
a Stream-receiving conduit and a load-reduc 
ing outlet, each of said receivers having its 
conduit and outlet disposed diagonally op 
65 posite to each other, whereby each receiver 
has its load - reducing opening adjacent to 
20. In a weighing-machine, the combina- the stream-receiving conduit of the other re 
ceiver. 
27. The combination of a plurality of Weigh 
ing mechanisms, each embodying a load-re 
ceiver provided with a stream-receiving con 
duit and a load-reducing opening, each re 
ceiver having its opening disposed adjacent 
to the stream-receiving conduit of another of 
said receivers; and a load-reducing instru 
mentality for each weighing mechanism and 
operative to effect the reduction of the load, 
whereby the material discharged during the 
load-reducing period of one receiver will be 
received by another receiver. 
28. The combination of a pair of Weighing 
mechanisms, each embodying a load-receiver, 
one provided with a stream-receiving conduit, 
and the other with a load-reducing opening 
disposed adjacent to said stream - receiving 
conduit of its companion receiver; a load-re 
ducing instrumentality for that weighing 
mechanism having the load-reducing open 
ing; and actuator means intermediate said 
load-reducing instrumentality and the weigh 
ing mechanism having the stream-receiving 
conduit, whereby said instrumentality is Op 
erative by and on the operation of said last 
mentioned weighing mechanislm, thereby to 
effect a reduction of the load before the final 
discharge thereof, and whereby the material 
discharged through the load-reducing opening 
during the load-reducing period of said re 
ceiver will be received by the conduit of the 
other receiver. 
29. The combination of a pair of weighing 
mechanisms, each embodying a load-receiver 
provided with a stream-receiving conduit and 
with a load-reducing opening, the opening of 
each receiver being adjacent to the stream 
receiving conduit of the other receiver; a 
load - reducing instrumentality for each of 
said weighing mechanisms; and actuator 
means intermediate the load-reducing instru 
mentality of each weighing mechanism and 
the other weighing mechanism, whereby said 
instrumentality is operative, by and on the 
operation of said other Weighing mechanism, 
to effect a reduction of the load before the 
final discharge thereof, and whereby the ma 
terial discharged during the load-reducing pe 
riod of one receiver will be received by the 
other receiver. 
30. In a weighing-machine, the combina 
tion of a pair of weighing mechanisms, each 
embodying a load-receiver provided with a 
stream-receiving conduit and with a load-re 
ducing opening, the opening of each receiver 
being in juxtaposition to the stream-receiving 
conduit of the other receiver; a load-reducing 
instrumentality for each of said weighing 
mechanisms; and actuator means intermedi 
ate the load-reducing instrumentality of each 
weighing mechanism and the other weighing 
mechanism, whereby said instrumentality is 
operative by and on the operation of said 
other weighing mechanism to effect a reduc 
35 
- 
OO 
I C5 
IO 
IIS 
I2O. 
I 25 
 
606,343 
5 
OC 
tion of a load before the final discharge there 
of, and whereby the material discharged dur 
ing the load-reducing period of one receiver 
Will be received by the other receiver, and 
each of said load-reducing instrumentalities 
being Operative, on the operation of its own 
Weighing mechanisin, to cut of the reduction 
of the load. 
31. The combination of a pair of weighing 
appal'atuses, each embodying a load-receiver 
having a stream-receiving conduit and a load 
reducing Opening, the opening of each receiver 
being disposed above the stream - receiving 
conduit of the other receiver; and a plurality 
of load-reducing means operative to effect the 
l'eduction of a load before the final discharge 
thereof, and comprising valves disposed in 
position one adjacent to the load - reducing 
opelling of each receiver. 
32. In a Weighing - machine, the combina 
tion of a pair of Weighing apparatuses, each 
embodying a load-receiver having a stream-le 
ceiving conduit and a load-roducing opening, 
the opening of each receiver being disposed 
above the stream - receiving conduit of the 
other receiver; a plurality of load-reducing 
in eans Operative to effect the reduction of the 
load before the final discharge thereof, and 
comprising valves disposed in position one 
adjacent to the load-reducing opening of each 
receiver; and actuator means for operating 
the Valve of one apparatus on the operation 
of the other appalatus. 
33. The combination of a pair of weighing 
appal'atuses, each embodying Weighing mech 
allism comprising a load-receiver and beam 
inc.chanism therefor, cach of said receivers 
having a stream-receiving conduit and a load 
reducing outlet; a plurality of load-reducing 
Valves, One callied by each receiver and 
adapted to control the reduction of the load 
before the final dischargethereof; and means 
Operative by the beam mechanism of each 
apparatus for effecting the operation of the 
load-reducing valve of the other apparatus. 
34. The combination of a pair of weighing 
apparatuses, each embodying weighing mech 
anislin Comprising a load-receiver and beam 
mechanislm the 'efo', one of said receivers 
having a strealin-i'eceiving conduit, and the 
Other of sail l'eceivers having a load-reduc 
ing Outlet adjacent to said stream-receiving 
conduit; a load-l'educing instrumentality car 
Iried by that receiver having the load-reduc 
ing outlet, and adapted to effect the reduction 
of a load before the final disclarge thereof; 
Overload-supply means for each of said re 
ceivers; Stream-controller's for each of said 
Overload-Supply means; actuator means in 
termediate the weighing mechanism and 
stream-controller of each apparatus for effect 
ing the Operation of Said stream-controller at 
one predetermined period; and an actuating 
instrumentality intermediate said load-reduc 
ing instrumentality of one of said weighing 
apparatuses and the stream-controller actu 
ator of the other apparatus. 
35. The combination of a pair of weighing 
apparat, uses, each elabodying weighing tech 
allism collising a load-'eceive' and lean 
nechanis in tiere fol', etc. of said receiver's 
having a stream-receiving cond it and a load 
reducing outlet; a plurality of load-edicing 
valves, one carried by each receiver and it at 
ed to control the 'eduction of tile loid before 
the final discharge thereof: supply-strean 
controllers; actuator means itemediate the 
be: in anechanisin a ji (l sticall - controllel' of 
each apparatus for effecting the operation of 
said strealin-controller at Oile predetermined 
period; and actuator means oc1'ative by the 
strealin-controller-&ctuating lineans of one a 
paratus to effect the operation of the load 
l'educing means of the other apparatus. 
36. In a duplex weighing-machine, the coin 
bination of a pair of weighing appa'attiscs, 
each embodying weighing mecha isla coll 
prising a load-receiver and beam mechanism 
supporting said receiver; overload - Stiply 
means for each receiver; Streal n-controlling 
means for each of said supply means; a load 
reducing instrumentality for each receiver; 
actatoi' incais intel'in ediate the leaian lech 
anism and the stream-controlling means of 
each apparatus, whereby the operation of Said 
stream-controlling means is effected at one 
predetermined period by the beam mechan 
ism; and actuator means intermediate the 
load-reducing instrumentality of each appa 
ratus and the stream-controlling actuator of 
the other apparatus, whereby, simultaneously 
with the operation of the Streall-controlling 
means of one apparatus, the Operation of the 
load-reducing instrumentality of the other 
apparatus is effected. 
37. The combination of a pair of Weigling 
apparatuses, each embodying a load-receiver 
and beam mechanism for Supporting Said 'e- 
ceiver, and each of Said receiver's having a 
stream-receiving conduit and a load-reducing 
outlet, the outlet of each receiver being dis 
posed above the strealin-I'eceiving conduit of 
the other receiver; overload-supply means for 
each receiver; stream-controlling means for 
each of said supply in ea ins; ail actuator in 
termediate the beam inlechanism and the 
stream-controlling means of cach weighing 
apparatus, whereby the opening of the sti'eam 
controlling means is effected by the bean 
mechanisin; a load-l'educing instrumentality 
for each receiver, and in position to control 
the ?low of material from the receiver-outlet: 
an actuator for each load-reducing instill 
mentality, the actuatoi' for the load-reducing 
instrumentality of one apparatus being in po 
Sition to be engaged by the stream-controller 
actuator of the otheir appalatus oil the open 
ing of said strealm-controller, thereby simul 
taneously to Operate Said load-reducing ill 
strumentality. 
38. The combination of a pair of weighing 
apparatuses, each embodying Weighing nech 
anism comprising a load-receiver and beam 
mechanism Supporting said receiver, each of 
CO 
I O 
I 15 
EO 
15 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
 
606,243 
9 
O 
3O 
35 
:40 
45 
SO 
anism. 
m 
said receivers having a stream-receiving con 
duit and a load-reducing outlet, the Outlet of 
each receiver being adjacent to the stream 
receiving conduit of the other receiver; a 
plurality of load-reducing valves, one carried 
by each receiver and adapted to control the 
reduction of the load; overload-supply means 
for each of said receivers; a stream-control 
ling valve for each of said supply means; ac 
tuator means intermediate the beam mech 
anism and stream-controlling Valve of each 
apparatus for effecting the operation of said 
stream - controlling means at One predeter 
mined period; and actuator means operative 
by the stream-controller-actuator means of 
one apparatus to effect the operation of the 
load-reducing means of the other apparatus, 
whereby the discharge of the surplus mate 
rial of the load of one load-receiver Will OC 
cur substantially simultaneously with, and 
form a part of, the supply of material to the 
other load-receiver. 
39. The combination of a pair of Weighing 
apparatuses, each embodying a load-receiver 
and beam mechanism for supporting said re 
ceiver, each of Said receivers having a stream 
receiving conduit and a load-reducing outlet, 
the outlet of each receiver being disposed 
above the stream-receiving conduit of the 
other receiver; overload - Supply means for 
each receiver; an actuator intermediate the 
beam mechanism and the stream-controlling 
means of each weighing apparatus, whereby 
the Opening of the Stream-controlling means 
is effected by the beam mechanism; a stop 
carried by each of said actuators; a load-re 
ducing valve carried by each of said receiv 
ers, and operable to open and close the load 
reducing outlet, and comprising a valve-plate 
and an arm pivotally secured to said receiver 
and provided with a stop; means for control 
ling the operation of said load - reducing 
valves, and comprising a pair of actuators 
pivotally secured one to each load-receiver, 
and each provided with an arm adapted to 
engage its respective valve-arm stop, the ac 
tuator for the load-reducing valve of one 
Weighing apparatus having an end thereof 
extending into position to be engaged by the 
stop carried by the stream-controller actua 
tor of the other weighing apparatus. 
40. A Weighing-machine comprising a plu 
rality of coacting Weighing mechanisms; a 
load-reducing instrumentality for one of said 
Weighing mechanisms; and means connecting 
said Weighing mechanisms whereby they co 
act to have the load-reducing instrumentality 
of said weighing mechanism reduce the load 
thereof during the reception of the load by 
another of said mechanisms. 
41. A weighing-machine comprising a pair 
of coacting weighing mechanisms, each hav 
ing a load-reducing instrumentality operable 
to reduce the load thereof; and means con 
necting said weighing mechanisms whereby 
they coact to have the load-reducing instru 
lmentality of one Weighing mechanism reduce 
the load on the ascent of the other Weighing 
mechanism to receive its load. 
42. In a weighing-machine, the combina 
tion of a pair of weighing mechanisms; a load 
reducing valve carried by one of said Weigh 
ing mechanisms; and means for effecting the 
operation of said valve, and operative by and 
on the operation of the other weighing mech 
43. The combination of a pair of Weighing 
mechanisms each embodying a load-receiver, 
one of said receivers having a stream-receiv 
ing conduit, and the other of said receivers 
having a stream-outlet; a load-reducing valve 
carried by said last-mentioned receiver and 
operative to control the reduction of the load; 
a load-reducing valve-actuator also carried 
by said last-mentioned receiver, and extend 
ing into position to be operated by and on the 
operation of the other weighing mechanism. 
44. The combination of a pair of Weighing 
mechanisms, one of said Weighing mechan 
isms embodying a load-receiver having an 
outlet; a load-reducing valve comprising a 
valve-plate and an arm pivotally secured to 
said receiver and provided with a stop; a 
valve-actuator carried by Said receiver and 
having an arm adapted to engage said stop, 
and also having a part thereof extending into 
position to be operated by the other Weighing 
mechanism. 
45. The combination of a pair of Weighing 
mechanisms; load-Supply means for each of 
said weighing mechanisms; a stream-control 
ler for regulating the supply of material to 
each weighing mechanism; and reciprocally 
effective means intermediate said Stream-con 
trollers, and operable, when One of Said stream 
controllers is in operation, to lock the other 
against Operation. 
46. The combination of a pair of weighing 
mechanisms; load-Supply means for each of 
said weighing mechanisms; a stream-control 
ler for regulating the supply to each Weighing 
mechanism; and a pair of reciprocally-effect 
ive stops carried one by each of said stream 
controllers, and operative, On the opening 
of one stream-controller, to lock the other 
stream-controller shut. 
47. In a weighing-machine, the combina 
tion of a plurality of coacting rising-poise 
weighing mechanisms; load-discharge means 
for each of said Weighing mechanisms and 
operative on the ascent thereof to its poise 
position; a load-reducing instrumentality for 
each of said Weighing mechanisms; means 
connecting said Weighing mechanisms, Where 
by they coact to have the load-reducing in 
strumentality of one of said weighing mech 
anisms reduce the load thereof during the re 
ception of the load by another of said weigh 
ing mechanisms; and reciprocally-effective 
means operative on the operation of one of 
said load-discharge means to lock the other 
against Operation. 
48. In a duplex Weighing-machine, the com 
bination of a plurality of Weighing appara 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
0. 
606,243 
O 
2) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
tuses, each embodying Weighing mechanism 
comprising a load-receive1 and beam mech 
anism supporting said receiver, and each of 
said receivers having a stream-receiving con 
duit and a stream-outlet, the stream-outlet of 
each receiver being above the stream-receiv 
ing conduit of the other receiver; overload 
Supply means for each load-receiver; a plu 
rality of stream-controllers for regulating the 
supply to said receivers; a plurality of stream 
controller actuators operated by the beam 
mechanisms for opening said stream-control 
lers; a load-reducing instrumentality for each 
of said receivers; an actuator for each of said 
load-reducing instrumentalities, the load-re 
ducing-instrumentality actuator of one weigh 
ing mechanism being operated by and on the 
operation of the other weighing mechanism, 
and simultaneously with the opening of the 
strealm - controller of said other weighing 
mechanism, whereby, during the supply of 
material to one receiver, a reduction of the 
overload in the other receiver takes place; 
load-discharge means for each receiver; lock 
ing means intermediate the stream-controller 
and the load-discharge means of each weigh 
ing apparatus, and operative to lock the 
stream - controller shut, when the load - dis 
charge means is Open, and to lock the load 
dischal'ge lineans shut when the stream-con 
troller is open; reciprocally-effective locking 
means intermediate the stream - controller 
lmeans of Said appal'atuses, and operative to 
lock one stream - controller shut when the 
other stream-controller is open; and recipro 
cally - effective locking means intermediate 
the load-discharge means of said apparatuses, 
and operative to lock one load - discharge 
means shut when the other is open. 
49. In a duplex weighing-machine, the coin 
bination of a plurality of weighing appara 
tulses each elnbodying weighing mechanism 
comprising a reciprocatory load-receiver hav 
ing a closer and beam mechanism supporting 
said receiver, and each of said receivers hav 
ing a strealm-receiving conduit and a stream 
Outlet, the outlet of each receiver being di 
rectly above the stream-receiving conduit of 
the other receiver; overload-supply means 
for each load-receiver; a valve for regulating 
the supply to each of said receivers; a plu 
rality of valve - actuatou's operated by said 
beam mechanisms for opening said valves; a 
load-reducing Valve carried by each of said 
receivers; an actuator for each of said load 
reducing valves, the reducing-valve actuator 
of one weighing mechanism being operated 
by and on the operation of the beam mechan 
ism of the other weighing mechanism, and 
simultaneously with the opening of the sup 
ply-valve of said other weighing mechanism, 
whereby, on the Supply of material to one re 
ceiver, a reduction of the overload in the 
Other receiver takes place; locking lineans in 
termediate the Supply-valve and the closer of 
each apparatus, and operative to lock the 
supply-valve shut when the closer is open, 
and to lock the closer shut when the Supply 
valve is open; reciprocally-effective locking 
means intermediate the Supply-valves of Said 
apparatuses, and operative to lock One Sup 
ply-valve shut when the other is open; and 
reciprocally - effective locking means inter 
mediate the closers of said receive's and Op 
erative to lock one closer shut when the other 
is open. 
50. The combination of a pair of weighing 
apparatuses each comprising weighing mech 
anism embodying a load-receiver and bean 
mechanism, one of said beam mechanislns em 
bodying a supplemental beam-arm operative 
there with, and one of said receivers having a 
stream-receiving conduit, and the other of 
said receivers having a load-reducing outlet; 
a load-reducing instrumentality for Said last 
mentioned receiver; load-Supply means for 
each of said receivers; a stream-controllel' for 
each of said load-supply means; an actuato!' 
intermediate said Supplemental beam - arm. 
and one of said stream-controllers and opera 
tive to open the same; and an actuator for 
effecting the operation of said load-reducing 
instrumentality, and in position to be engaged 
by said stream-controller actuator on the oil 
eration thereof by the beam mechanism. 
51. In a duplex weighing-machine, the coin 
bination with a pair of coacting weighing 
mechanisms, each embodying a load-receive 
and beam mechallis in thei'efo', of inecial) is in 
operable to effect the overloading of Ole re 
ceiver before the completion of the load-dis 
charge of the other receiver; and then to ef 
fect the reduction of such overload during the 
Supply to the other receiver, whereby the Sul'- 
plus of the load discharged from one receiver 
assists the loading of the other receiver. 
52. In a duplex weighing-machine, the coin 
bination of a plurality of Weighing appara 
tuses comprising a plurality of coacting 
weighing mechanisms embodying a plurality 
of load-receive's and a plurality of bean 
mechanisms therefor; overload-supply means 
for said receivers; a plurality of stream-coin 
trolling means; a plurality of material-dis 
charge means; a plurality of altel'nately-op 
erable load-reducing instrumentalities, the 
load-reducing instrumentality of One appara 
tus being controlled by and on the operation 
of another of said apparatuses through the 
medium of the weighing mechanism thereof 
on its return to its normal position to receive 
a load after the discharge of its preceding 
load; a plurality of main locking means in 
termediate said stream-controlling means and 
load-discharge means, and operative to lock. 
the stream-controller's shut when the load 
discharge means are open and to lock the load 
discharge means shut when the stream-coln 
trollers are open, and each of which locking 
means embodies supplemental lockiing means 
operative to maintain the load - discharge 
means shut on the unlocking of the Dail). 
iocking means; reciprocally-effective locking 
means intermediate the strealm - controlling 
o 
75 
So 
O 
O 
IC 
5 
II 
I 
5 
I 2 
O 
5 
 
606,248 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
means, whereby, when one of said stream-con 
trolling meansis open the other is locked shut; 
and reciprocally-effective locking means in 
termediate the load-discharge means, where 
by, when one of said load-discharge means is 
open the other will be prevented from open 
ing should its supplemental locking means be 
prematurely tripped. 
53. In a weighing-machine, the combina 
tion of a pair of weighing mechanisms, each 
embodying a load-receiver, and one of said 
Weighing mechanisms having a load-reducer 
operative to discharge the surplus material 
of the load of one receiver into the load-re 
ceiver of the other Weighing mechanism. 
54. The combination in a Weighing appa 
ratus, of a pair of Weighing mechanisms, each 
provided with a load-receiver and with means 
located and operating for reducing an over 
load to bring the Weighing mechanism to a 
poise by discharging the surplus material 
from its load-receiver; and means for deliv 
ering the surplus of the load of one weighing 
mechanism into the load-receiver of the other 
Weighing mechanism, whereby the discharged 
Surplus of the load of one mechanism consti 
tutes a part of the overload of the other mech 
anism. 
55. The combination of a pair of weighing 
mechanisms, each embodying a load-receiver, 
and a load-reducer operative to reduce a load 
and to discharge the surplus material thereof 
into the other receiver, said reducers being 
disposed interimediate said weighing mech 
anisms. 
56. In a Weighing-machine, the combina 
tion of a pair of Weighing mechanisms, each 
embodying a load-receiver, one of said weigh 
ing mechanisms having load-discharge means, 
and the other of said weighing mechanisms 
having load-reducing means; and actuator 
means for Operating said load-reducing means 
on the Operation of the other weighing mech 
anism, and controlled in its operation at one 
predetermined period by the load-discharge 
means of Said Weighing mechanism. 
57. In a Weighing-machine, the combina 
tion of a pair of Weighing mechanisms; load 
supply means for each of said weighing mech 
anisms, One of said Weighing mechanisms hav 
ing a stream-controller; and means for effect 
ing the Operation of said stream-controller at 
One predetermined period; and the other of 
said Weighing mechanisms having a load-re 
ducing instrumentality operative to reduce 
the load Supplied thereto; and means inter 
mediate the stream - controller - actuating 
means of one Weighing mechanism and the 
load-reducing instrumentality of the other 
Weighing mechanism for effecting the opera 
tion of Said load-reducing instrumentality. 
58. A Weighing-machine comprising a pair 
of Weighing mechanisms, each having a load 
receiver, One of said weighing mechanisms 
having load-reducing means operative to re 
duce the load supplied to one receiver and 
to discharge the surplus material thereof into 
the other receiver intermediate its top and 
bottom; and means for supplying said other 
receiver with material at the upper part there 
of, whereby said receiver is supplied with ma 
terial from different Sources. 
59. A weighing-machine comprising a pair 
of Weighing mechanisms, each having a load 
receiver adapted to receive material at the 
top and also at the side thereof; means for 
reducing the load of each receiver, and oper 
ative to discharge the surplus thereof into 
the other receiver at the side thereof, and on 
the ascent of said receiver to receive a load; 
and means for supplying each of said receiv 
ers with material at the top thereof, whereby 
each receiver is supplied with material from 
different sources simultaneously during a pre 
determined period. 
60. The combination of a pair of weighing 
mechanisms; load-supply means for each of 
said weighing mechanisms; a stream - Con 
troller for regulating the supply to each 
weighing mechanism; load-discharge means 
for each weighing mechanism; reciprocally 
effective locking means intermediate the 
stream - controller and the load - discharge 
means of each weighing mechanism and op 
erative to lock the stream-controller inoper 
ative when the load-discharge means is in op 
eration, and to lock said load-discharge means 
inoperative when the stream-controller is in 
operation; and reciprocally-effective means 
intermediate the stream-controllers of said 
weighing mechanisms and operative when 
one of said stream-controllers is in operation 
to lock the other inoperative. 
61. The combination of a pair of Weighing 
mechanisms; load-supply means for each of 
said weighing mechanisms; a stream - con 
troller for regulating the supply to each 
Weighing mechanism; load-discharge means 
for each Weighing mechanism; reciprocally 
effective locking means intermediate the 
stream - controller and the load - discharge 
means of each weighing mechanism and op 
erative to lock the stream-controller inoper 
ative when the load-discharge means is in op 
eration, and to lock said load-discharge means 
inoperative when the stream-controller is in 
operation; and reciprocally-effective means 
intermediate said load-discharge means and 
operative on the operation of one load-dis 
charge means to lock the other against oper 
ation. 
62. The combination of a pair of weighing 
mechanisms; load-supply means for each of 
said weighing mechanisms; a stream - con 
troller for regulating the supply to each 
Weighing mechanism; load-discharge means 
for each weighing mechanism; reciprocally 
effective locking means intermediate the 
stream - controller and the load - discharge 
means of each Weighing mechanism and op 
erative to lock the stream - contoller shut 
when the load-discharge means is open, and 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
i2 
606,248 
said load-discharge means and operative Ol. 
the opening of one loadl-discharge means to 
lock the other against opening. 
FRANCIS I. RICARDS. 
Witnesses: 
C. A. WEED, 
EDWARD A. MiEAI). 
to lock Said load-discharge means shut when 
the stream-controller is open; reciprocally 
effective means intermediate the stream-con 
trollel's of Said Weighing mechanisms and op 
erative when one of said stream-controllers 
is open to lock the other against opening; and 
reciprocally - effective means intermediate 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606344.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 606,344, 
M. S. HOY, 
PROTRACTOR, 
Patented June 28, 1898. 
SS SD-762-e 
a 2222222 Sese 
SSSSSS 
SAG) 
s 
27, 
22. 
12A7AESSAS 
-6&. 9 
 
He cars PETERs co, PHOTO-liiho. WASH NGTON. D. C. 
AvWENZOA 
14-Z S. Zay. 
3-42, Attorney 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTIN. S. HOY, OF WILKINSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PROTRACTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 606,344, dated June 28, 1898. 
Application filed March 18, 1897, Serial No. 628,121 (No model.) 
55 
 
To all, whon, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, MARTIN S. Ho Y, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wilkins 
burg, in the county of Allegheny and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Mechanical Dividers; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and 
use the Same. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
protracting-bevels, and to this end provides 
a mechanical divider consisting practically of 
a quadrant one member or radius of which 
is provided with a slot, the said quadranthav 
ing certain subdivisions employed in connec 
tion with the bevel-stock or pivoted ruler, also 
carrying subdivisions, all as will be herein 
after fully set forth in the specification and 
the novel features specifically pointed out in 
the claim. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a plan 
View of an instrument constructed in accord 
ance With my invention. Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
detail view of a quadrant, showing subdivi 
sions thereon. Fig. 3 is a similar view of the 
bevel-stock or ruler. 
Fig. 4 is a sectional 
view through the implement. Fig. 5 is a de 
tail view of the attachment which provides 
for holding the adjustment of the bevel-stock 
or ruler. 
Referring to the drawings by numerals and 
letters, I designates a quadrant presenting an 
angle or square having a blade 2 and tongue 3, 
the blade being extended beyond the segment 
and the tongue having a longitudinal slot 4. 
Through this slot passes a thumb-screw 5, 
connecting an attachment 6 and a bevel or 
ruler 7 in sliding connection with the quad 
rant, these parts having heads S and 9, re 
spectively, which are provided with segmental 
slots that are engaged by a thumb-screw 10 
for holding these parts adjusted. The blade 
or tongue 11 of the bevel is secured to the 
head 8 by screws, leaving a space between 
the attachment and blade or tongue to receive 
the tongue of the angle or square of the quad 
rant. The attachment is provided adjoining 
its head with guide-rollers 12 12, that bear 
against the outer edge of the tongue of the 
square or angle and hold the said attachment 
at the proper relative position. 
As shown in the drawings, the blade 2 of the 
square or angle of the quadrant is divided by 
longitudinal and transverselines into a plural 
ity of spaces. 
For the purpose of illustration 
we will suppose that the said blade is twenty 
four inches in length and the transverselines a 
one-twelfth of an inch apart. The said blade 
is then provided with a scale containing grad 
The blade is also 
uations from 1 to 28S. 
provided with sixteen parallel lines b, extend 
ing longitudinally the entire distance. Thus 
it is possible in computing and measuring to 
return from the point of the blade to the heel, 
skipping a space in the second line for the 
miter of the square, and starting with 290, 
then proceed outward to the point again. This 
can be proceeded with or continued through 
the sixteen longitudinal divisions, so that the 
blade is capable of four thousand six hun 
dred and eight graduations or divisions. The 
tongue of the angle or square is marked in 
the same manner, with the exception that it 
is but sixteen inches long, and therefore the 
transverse lines c or graduations would only 
run to 192 and, coming back to the heel, 
would start with 194 on the second and pro 
ceed or continue in this manner. The num 
ber of longitudinal lines b is limited to eight 
spaces, owing to the slot 4, and these spaces or 
graduations are on the same scale as those on 
the blade. The blade of the bevel or ruler is 
marked with lines ef, that are graduated simi 
lar to those on the blade and the tongue of the 
square or angle, having sixteen longitudinal 
linese and transverse lines or graduations f, 
running from 1 to 400, the second series 
being graduated from 2 to 800, and so 
on until all the spaces are filled. On the 
other side of the square the tongue is pro 
vided with a scale the marks g of which are 
one-twelfth of an inch apart and with eight 
parallel linesh, while the blade is marked with 
spaces or lines i and k in the ratio of one to 
3.1416. On the same side, which is sixteen 
inch radius from the heel of the square to 
the trammel-point of each tongue and blade, 
two radial lines l are made, so as to permit the 
indication of the degrees from 1 to 90 
and return, so that the operator can obtain any 
degree within a quadrant. By providing an 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
95 
Ioo 
606,344 
O 
implement constructed as herein shown and 
described the bevel or ruler can be brought 
to the miter of the square and the attachment 
firmly held in place by the thumb-screw. 
Then the head or bevel may be brought 
around to its full capacity, throwing it at 
right angles with the blade or square and 
parallel with the tongue thereof. This will 
give the operator any desired degree in a 
Now should the operator wish to 
Quadrant. 
find the hypotenuse of a right-angle trian 
gle he can do so by setting the bevel or ruler 
on tongue of square or angle for one side of 
the right angle and to a point on blade of 
square for the other side, the blade or tongue 
of the bevel or ruler giving the answer. It 
Will also be apparent that the ruler and at 
tachments which are applied to the quadrant 
could be removed, and by providing said at 
tachment with a central opening instead of 
the segmental slot this part of the instrument 
could be readily used as a T-square. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patient, is 
The quadrant provided with the slot 4, the 
blade 2 extending at one end beyond the 
quadrant, the head 6 secured to one corner 
of the quadrant and provided with the curved 
slot at its outer end, and the friction-rollers 
12 which bear against the outer edge of the 
tongue of the square or angle, combined with 
the bevel or rule 11, the slotted head 8 se 
cured to its inner end, and which head Scor 
responds in shape and size to the head 9; and 
the clamping-screw which passes through the 
head 9, the slot 4 in the tongue and the rule, 
substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing witnesses. 
MARTIN. S. HOY. 
35 
Witnesses: 
DANIEL KRIDER, 
BENJAMIN MARSH. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606444.txt	(No Model.) 
 
 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
M. CLARK, 
COUPLER FOR PNEUMATIC ORGANS, 
No. 606,444, 
& . 
Ni, 
  
  
 
Patented June 28, 1898. 
N 
is 
N 
W e Art 
o 
SNO 
O esses a Sea N 
5% 
NN/AZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/7Z///7/////777 W. 
Wav WZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ(ZZ 
N% 
% W W W. z S 
WAWE 
-47%.W.I. 
WA 77 5 
L 
W 
2. S 
s 
i 
Wizz's N N 
N N 
{% WWZ 
A 
&AEE 
2 
WN 
% N \s 
2 
R 
S. 
N 
N 
s 
y s 
N 
3XZ A 
y 
C 
R 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cl NZ 
s d N 
N N 
S t Ty 
N N 
the NorBs Peters Co., Priory, tho, washington, c 
(No Model.) 
No. 606,444, 
 
M. CLARK, 
COUPLER FOR PNEUMATIC ORGANS, 
2 Sheets 
Sheet 2. 
Patented June 28, 1898. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
MEL WILLE: CLAR K, OF CHICAGO, IL LIN OIS. 
coUPLER FOR PNEU MATIC ORGANs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 606,444, dated June 28, 1898. 
Application filed July 30, 1897, Serial No. 646,475, (No model.) 
o 
To all, whon, it in Gulf CO7 ce17. 
Be it, known that I, MELVILLE: CLARK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
5 have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Couplers for Pneumatic-Or 
gans, which are fully set forth in the fol 
lowing specification, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, forming a part 
thereof. 
The purpose of this invention is to provide 
improved means for coupling Octaves in pneu 
matically-operated reed-organs or other mu 
sical instruments whose sound-controlling de 
vices are pneumatically actuated. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a fore-and-aft 
section through a reed-organ having my im 
provement, one reed-valve and its operating 
mechanism, including the pneumatics and the 
manual-key connections, being shown. Fig. 
2 is a detailed plan of the same structure in 
which the parts of four octaves of the primary 
pneumatics and coupling connections are 
shown. Fig. 3 is a detail elevation of a por 
tion of the action corresponding to that shown 
in Fig. 1, illustrating a modified form of stop 
connections for operating the coupling-board. 
Fig. 4 is a detail elevation at the end of the 
coupling-board, showing a further modifica 
tion of the coupling mechanism. Fig. 5 is a 
detail plan of the construction illustrated in 
Fig. 4. 
The general structure of the organ herein 
illustrated is that which I have used hereto 
fore and which is shown in several patents 
heretofore granted to me. 
A is the wind-chest; B, a reed-block; C, the 
reed-controlling valve; D, the motor-pneu 
matic or reed-valve-actuating pneumatic; E, 
the primary pneumatic, whose function is, by 
means of the valves E and E9, mounted on 
a common stem carried by said pneumatic, to 
control the communication of the motor-pneu 
lmatic with the wind-chest and with the outer 
air, and thereby cause the action of said mo 
tor-pneumatic to actuate the reed-valve. 
F is a duct leading from the primary pneu 
matic to a post i in board J, which is con 
trolled by valve g on the lever G, which is 
provided with a spring G, tending to hold the 
valve g seated. The lever G is actuated by 
the pitman H on a manual-key H. It will 
be u inderstood that the depression of the man 
ual-key lifting the valve g and venting the 
primary pneumatic will cause the latter to be 
inflated and to close the communication of 
the motor-pneumatic with the outer air and 
open communication with the wind- chest, 
thus causing said motor-pneumatic to be col 
lapsed and to actuate the reed-valve C by 
means of the connecting-tape c. The duct?, 
of which the tube F is a continuation and 
through which the primary pneumatic is 
vented, has a branch F, which may lead to 
a tracker-range, (not shown,) where it may be 
controlled by a perforated music-sheet (not 
shown) for the purpose of venting the primary 
pneumatic and operating the instrument all 
tomatically. These self-playing appurte 
nances are not illustrated, because their ac 
tion, so far as the present invention is con 
cerned, is precisely equivalent to that caused 
by the depression of the manual-key, and it 
may be understood that the coupler devices 
which constitute the invention and which will 
now be described perform their function in 
precisely similar manner whether the instru 
ment is operated by the manual or by the 
self-playing appurtenances. 
For the purpose of coupling octaves I mount 
upon the upper side of the board X, upon the 
lower side of which the motor-pneumatics D 
are mounted, the coupler-board L, in which 
are formed ducts ll, &c., which open at the 
upper surface of the board and at the rear 
edge thereof, the openings at the upper sur 
face being closed by valves M. M. M., &c., 
which are located in position above the mo 
tor-pneumatics, respectively, which have pro 
jecting fingers M. M., &c., which overhang 
the fingers D. D., which project up rigidly 
from the lower or fluctuating walls of the 
pneumatics. Tubes NN, &c., connect the 
rear ends of the ducts l l with the octave dis 
tant primary pneumatics, respectively. The 
tubes N N, &c., are flexible and should be 
made with a slight excess of length to allow 
for some movement of the board I. The 
board I, may be mounted either pivotally at 
its rear edge and adapted to tilt up at its 
forward edge to carry the valve-fingers M 
out of range of the upward thrust of the mo 
tor-pneumatic fingers D, as shown in Figs. 
1 and 2, or it may be arranged to slide longi 
45 
So 
25 
35 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
606,444 
55 
75 
o 
25 
tudinally on the board X to carry the valve 
fingers laterally out of range of the pneu 
matic fingers respectively. Suitable me 
chanical connections from a stop-rod P to the 
board L will effect the shifting of the board 
from one position to the other. In case the 
board is pivoted the connection may be that 
shown in Fig. 1, which consists of a bell 
crank lever Q, having one arm connected 
With the stop -rod and the other arm con 
nected by link Q with the board L. If the 
coupling-board is arranged to slide instead of 
tilt, I provide for the purpose a vertical rock 
shaft S, which may have a lever-arm S' at 
the lower end connected to the stop-rod M. 
and the lever-arm S at the upper end ar 
ranged to engage the board L. With this 
structure it will be understood that when 
any motor-pneumatic is operated and causes 
the corresponding sound-producing device to 
speak the action of such motor-pneumatic 
opening the valve M vents the octave distant 
primary pneumatic, whereby the motor-pneu 
lmatic corresponding to the latter is also op 
erated and causes its sound-producing de 
Vice to Speak, thus coupling the octaves. 
For the purpose of coupling the range of 
the instrument is preferably divided into an 
upper and a lower half, so that above the di 
vision-point the coupling may be made up 
Ward and below that point it may be made 
downward. The coupling-board is preferably 
divided at the corresponding point and the 
two sections operated by separate stops, the 
connections being precisely the same in the 
two cases; but the tubes M on the right-hand 
or upper board will diverge upwardly from 
the divisional plane to the octave distant pri 
mary pneumatics, and the tubes on the lower 
or left-hand board will diverge downwardly 
to the octave distant primary pneumatics. 
I claim 
1. In a pneumatically-operated musical in 
strument, in combination with the motor 
pneumatics and the primary pneumatics 
which operate them, vent-valves for the pri 
mary pneumatics respectively, and mechan 
ical connections by which the moto1'-phell 
matics may actuate the vent-valves of the 
octave distant primary pneumatics respec 
tively. 
2. In a pneumatically-operated musical in 
strument, in combination with the motor 
pneumatics and primary pneumatics which 
operate them; vent-valves for the primary 
pneumatics respectively; movable mechan 
ical connections by which the motor-pnett 
matics may actuate the vent-valves of the OC 
tave distant primary pinell matics, and Inleails 
for moving the same into and out of move 
ment-communicating position. 
3. In a pneumatically-operated musical in 
strument, in combination with the motor 
pneumatics and the primary pneumatics 
which operate them respectively; ducts lead 
ing from the primary pneumatics and valves 
which control such ducts located proximate 
to the octave distant motor-pleumatics re 
spectively; and mechanical connections by 
which the motor-pneumatics act lipoll. Such 
proximate primary pneumatic valves to cause 
their respective sound-producing devices to 
Speak. 
4. In a pneumatically-operated musical in 
strument, in combination with the motor 
pneumatics and the primary pneumatics 
which operate them; a coupler - board and 
ducts leading from the primary pneumatics 
respectively to such board; valves on the 
board which control the ducts respectively lo 
cated proximate to the motor - pneumatics 
which are an octave distant from the primary 
pneumatics from which the ducts respec 
tively lead; abutments extending from the 
motor-pneumatics and adapted to encounter 
their proximate valves respectively, the 
board being movable to carry such valves into 
and out of the range of the motor-pneumatic 
abutments respectively. 
Chicago, July 23, 1897. 
Witnesses: 
MEWII.E ( 3,AIRV. 
CHAs. S. BURTON, 
E. T. WRAY. 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606544.txt	(No Model.) 
No. 606,544. 
J. H. HARTING. 
TURN TABLE FOR RAILWAYS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 
 
  
--- i. 
- - - 
  
S. 
Sy bx is 
old N N. 
iSiglia SSES R 
1st 
rty H. 
s i 
 
S rs sists 
s 
 
 
 
Inventor: 
Mo?ha A 7arzizz7. 
e1ttorneys. 
 
J. H. HARTING, 
TURN TABLE FOR RAILWAYS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Patented June 28, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
No. 606,544. 
 
S 
77 
i.e. 
% 
. 
  
2, O. 
4. 
-Yi yiii 
Witos.sos: 
2. 44% --4------ 
avoivov; 
le, JoAAartiz-7. 
JAormous. 
:*k 
- 
- 
 
J. H. HARTING, 
TURN TABLE FOR RAILWAYS, 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Patented June 28, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
No. 606,544. 
 
 
 
Wives scs: 
22.2-is 
Va. 
% 4-4A. 
renorris Perers co, Photo-Lithic), WASHINGTON.o. c. 
Acorneys. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. HARTING, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
TURN-TABLE FOR RALWAYS. 
. SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 606,544, dated June 28, 1898. 
Application filed August 18, 1897, Serial No. 648,623, (No model.) 
. 
To all twhon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN H. HARTING, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Indian 
apolis, in the county of Marion and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Turn-Tables for Railways; 
and I do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
Such as Will enable others skilled in the art 
to which it appertains to make and use the 
same, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, and to the letters and figures of 
reference marked thereon, which form apart 
of this specification. 
My invention relates to that class of turn 
tables that are designed to be used more par 
ticularly for turning locomotive-engines and 
cars at railway-shops or engine-houses and 
are commonly known as roundhouse turn 
tables; and it consists in certain novel de 
vices by means of which turn-tables may be 
actuated by compressed air or steam as a mo 
tive force and operated automatically elec 
trically. 
It further consists in the parts and combi 
nation of parts, which will be more fully de 
scribed hereinafter and pointed out in the 
claims. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
a turn-table which may be cheaply, quickly, 
and positively operated automatically by the 
One man Whose usual duty it is to move the lo 
comotives in and out of the roundhouse and 
turn them around and who is usually termed 
the hostler, thus dispensing with a large 
amount of manual labor, which is a source of 
constant expense in turning locomotives and 
housing them at terminals. 
A further object is to provide such a turn 
table as shall be adapted to be under the full 
control of a specially - designated operator, 
who would be responsible for accidents due 
to carelessness. 
My objects are fully attained in my inven 
tion, which, while inexpensive for equipment, 
is durable and economical in use. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents a side elevation of a turn-table embody 
ing myinvention; Fig. 2, a plan view; Fig. 3, 
an end view, partly in section; Fig. 4, a de 
tail of the swivel-joint, and Fig. 5 a detail 
- 
55 
View of the latch and automatic operating 
Valve for same. 
In the drawings, A designates the turn-ta 
ble; D, the Supporting-center; C, the circu 
lar pit; E, the circular rack anchored in the 
pit; F, the track for supporting the ends of 
the table; G, the end rollers of the table; B, 
the bulkhead around the pit; a, the air-res 
ervoir; T, the operating-cylinder; U, the arch; 
V, the main air-valve; W, the latch-valve; 
X, the electric valve-motor; Y, the swivel 
joint, and 2 the battery. 
In constructing my invention I employ a 
turn-table of any design of structure desired, 
Such as are commonly used, to which I apply 
my devices for its operation. Isecure founda 
tion-beams Ubeneath the table transversely, 
upon which I erect a suitable arch U for sup 
porting the various apparatus required. The 
arch is so constructed that while furnishing 
adequate Support it is slightly flexible, so that 
the inevitable tilting of the table shall not in 
jure the metallic pipe connections on top. 
The rack is provided with strong gear-teeth 75 
and is circular, extending around the pit, to 
the bottom of which it is suitably anchored, 
and is of suitable diameter to correspond to 
the length of the table. In the face of the 
bulkhead around the pit at each approaching 
track is a pocket 32 to receive the latch-bolt. 
I provide a cylinder T of suitable diameter 
and length, which is secured to the frame of 
the turn-table by suitable brackets T. Each 
end of the cylinder has a port-opening con 
nected by port-pipesh at one end and g at 
the opposite end. The end Tis closed, as is 
also the end T; but the head of the latter end 
has a central opening provided with a suit 
able packing around the piston-rod S, which 
Works through the opening in the usual man 
ner and has at its inner end a packed head 
S' of suitable form. The rod S is approxi 
mately as long as the cylinder, but has an in 
tegral toothed rack-bar R at its outer end of 
about the same length as the piston-rod proper. 
The rack-bar slides in and is supported by 
suitable guide-brackets R', secured to the ta 
ble. A shaft P is suitably mounted rotata 
bly, to which is secured a pinion Q, meshing 
with the rack-bar, and a chain-wheel P, over 
which runs a power-transmitting chain O, 
95 
OO 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
606,544 
O 
15 
25 
35 
40 
connecting with the chain-wheelN, the latter 
being secured to the shaft M', which is suit 
ably journaled and mounted on the table. 
The opposite end of this shaft has secured to 
it a bevel gear-wheel M, meshing with a simi 
lar wheel I, secured to a suitably-lmounted 
vertical rotating shaft (33. To the latter is 
secured a gear - wheel IS, meshing with a 
smaller wheel or pinion J, which is secured to 
the journaled shaft I", supported upon the 
bracket I. The large gear-wheel II is secured 
to the lower end of the shaft I" and meshes 
with the teeth of the lack E. This train of 
gearing is usually so designed that a full 
stroke of the piston in the cylinder will cause 
the end A' of the table to traverse the com 
plete circle, more or less, according to the 
proportions of the gear-wheels relative to the 
length of the cylinder. 
The reservoir C is usually placed at the side 
of the table opposite the cylinder and is adapt 
ed to contain a supply of compressed air to 
feed the cylinder when in operation and is 
supplied through a pipe O, leading from a 
suitable compressor located at any convenient 
point to the swivel-joint Y, thence by a pipe 
(l, suitably situated. A steam-pipe c e also 
follows the course of the air-pipes and may 
terminate in a steam-jacket about the cylin 
der to prevent freezing of the condensation in 
the air-pipes and cylinder in cold weather, or, 
if desired, suitable connections may be made 
with the steam-pipes, so as to use steam as a 
motive force instead of compressed air. The 
platform 1" is attached to the arch and sup 
ports the operating devices in a place conven 
ient to be reached by the operator without 
leaving the locomotive. A suitable cover y 
is provided, encasing the machinery. The 
valve W may, if desired, be situated below 
within the frame of the table, as it acts auto 
matically. The battery 2 of suitable power 
is supplied for each circuit, one of which leads 
from a convenient point at the side of each 
stall or track in the roundlhouse and elsewhere, 
the wires being connected, and thence leading 
to the swivel-joint on top of the arch, thence 
to the electric motor X, which may be of any 
suitable reversible design. For the purpose 
of illustration but one circuit 4 and 5 is shown. 
The open-circuit system is preferably used, 
and at a convenient point to be reached from 
the locomotive is located a circuit-closer (3 and 
a circuit-reverser 3, the latter to be used in 
reversing the motion of the motor. 
An air-supply pipe F leads from the reser 
voir to the valve V, which may be of any 
suitable design adapted to close ports lead 
ing to the pipes g and hand to open the same 
alternately, as desired, and to permit the es 
cape of exhaust-air there from. I preferably 
use the well-known form of D-valve in a suit 
able chest and operate it by a connecting 
stem 29, having exterior screw-threads pass 
ing through the center of a threaded worm 
wheel 2S, suitably mounted. The latter is 
actuated by contact with the worm 27 on the 
shaft of the motor. Supplemental pipes gh' 
lead from the pipe F around the valve V and 
connect to the pipes of h, respectively, and at 
the point of branching is a three-way cock i, 
to be operated by hand, when desired, inde 
pendently of the motor and valve V, to admit 
air to the cylinder T and release it there from. 
It may be of any of the common forms known 
in railroad practice. 
The swivel-joint Y is situated centrally 
above the turn-table and is supported upon 
the arch U, so that its lower portion and con 
nected pipes and wires turn around with the 
table, while its upper portion and connected 
pipes and wires remain stationary, so held by 
the pipes which are suitably anchored above 
the bulkhead or to adjacent buildings. It con 
sists of a base 13, adapted to be secured to the 
arch, and has a packing-box 25, provided with 
a gland 15, by which packing may be retained. 
The air-pipe d and steam-pipe e are secured 
to the base, the latter centrally. The case 12 
is secured centrally upon the base by Suit 
able screw-bolts passing through the flange 
26. The top of the case has a central aper 
ture through which the tube 9 passes loosely. 
The interior of the case is preferably lined 
with a bushing 14, composed of non-corrosive 
metal. The top of the case has a ball-race 
filled with bearing-balls 11, which are cov 
ered by the adjustable collar S, having a cor 
responding ball-race in its under side. This 
collar is secured to the tube 9 and callies an 
overhanging arm 7, to which is suitably at 
tached the wires 4 and 5, and it is provided 
with contact-brushes 21 and 23, insulated and 
having electrical contact with the wires. 
Around the case is secured insulated mag 
netic rings 22 and 24, to which are attached 
the continuing circuit-wires, leading thence 
to the motor X, the brushes and rings form 
ing an insulated circuit through the swivel 
joint. A plate 16 is secured to the tube 9 
near its lower end and has at its upper side 
a circular ball-race filled with bearing-balls 
20. Below the plate is a packing 17, held se 
curely against turning by a plate IS and 
threaded nut 19. Above the collar S is an 
Z, secured to the top of the tube 9, and through 
it passes the steam-pipe C, which has an el 
bow or bend above and terminates in the pack 
ing-box 25 in a linement with the pipe e. The 
exterior of the lower end of the pipe C in the 
packing-box is smooth and true, and the pipe 
in passing through the tube 9 forms an annu 
lar air-passage 10, connecting with the pipe 
l). In operation the steam passes through 
the center, while the compressed air ente's 
through the passage 10 to the interior of the 
case below the packing and out through the 
pipe (l. The pressure expands the packing 
17, preventing the escape of air through the 
top of the case around the tube). The bear 
ing - balls 20 receive the upward pressure 
against the packing, eliminating the friction 
when rotating. 
The latch it is composed of a flat, bar hav 
75 
OC 
I O5 
I IO 
I I5 
I 25 
45 
55 
 
606,544 
3 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
e 
. 
- 
W 
ing a stop 31 and sliding in guides 30, secured 
to the table, the outer end of the bar being 
adapted to enter the pockets 32 in the bulk 
head to prevent the accidental movement of 
the table. The central portion v' is cylin 
drical, as a piston-rod, and passes through a 
packing-box 35, having a packing-nut 36 on 
the head 34 of the air-cylinder u. The pis 
ton-rod has a packed head 37, working in the 
cylinder, and a follower-plate3S,against which 
One end of a spring 39 is seated, while its op 
posite end presses against the inside of the 
bottom of the cylinder, the latter having a 
central guide-hole through which the rear end 
40 of the latch-bar works. The front portion 
33 of the cylinder is supplied with compressed 
air through the pipel, connected at its oppo 
site end to the latch-valve W, which in turn 
is connected by air-pipes in and n to the pipes 
i.e. g, respectively, leading to the cylin 
The latch-valve W comprises a small cyl 
inder 41, having like heads 47 and 4S at the 
ends. Each head has at the inside a short 
cylinder open at the inner end, as 49 and 50, 
and a passage, as 60 or 61, through pipe 62 
leads therefrom to the atmosphere. Each 
cylinder has a valve-seat 58 at the bottom 
around the pipe-opening corresponding to the 
valve 56 or 57, which are also constructed as 
packed pistons, filling the small cylinder and 
adapted to close the ports 59 and 60 and 61 
in the walls of the small cylinders. The pis 
ton 51 is packed and is adapted to close the 
port:42 and is connected by a suitable stem 
to the Small piston 56. The opposite side of 
piston 51 has a hollow stem 53, around which 
is a spiral Spring 54, seated between the pis 
tons 51 and 52, which normally hold the pis 
ton-Valves 56 and 57 to their seats. Piston 
52 is connected to piston 57 by a suitable stem 
and at the Opposite side has a stem 55, adapt 
ed to slip freely into the hollow stem 53, the 
end of the latter, being a stop-gage against 
the opposite piston. Piston 52 is adapted to 
normally close port 43, which terminates as 
port 42, a branch 44 extending to the pipel. 
Connected to the branch 44 is an exhaust 
valve comprising the chamber t, having an 
Outlet 46 and containing a valve 45, suitably 
Seated and normally held open against at 
mospheric pressure by a suitably-arranged 
spring. This exhaust-valve may be of any 
suitable form of construction to perform the 
described functions and may be located at 
any point in the line of the pipel, in some 
cases being preferably near the cylinder u. 
The various parts of my invention are con 
structed of such material as may be best suit 
ed for the various parts, metal being chiefly. 
In practical use the operator throws the le 
ver of the current-reverser 3 to start the elec 
tric motor X in the proper direction, as may 
be determined by suitable indicators conven 
iently arranged, to admit compressed air from 
the reservoir C. to either end of the cylinder 
used. 
T desired, which sets the piston therein in 
motion, and consequently the train of gearing, 
thus moving the table radially in either direc 
tion. Assuming that air is admitted by the 
valve V to the port-pipe h, it passes to the 
end T of the cylinder, where it meets resist 
ance, the pressure forcing air into the pipe in 
and unseating the valve 56 in the cylinder 41, 
the air passing through the ports 59 and meet 
ing the greater area of piston 51 pushes it be 
yond and opensport.42, at the same time clos 
ing port 60, while the opposite pistons remain 
in the position as shown in Fig. 5, normally 
closing the passages. The air then passes out 
through pipel and into the latch-cylinder it, 
the pressure first closing valve 45 and then 
forcing the piston 37 back against the pres 
sure of the spring 39 withdraws the latch from 
the pocket 32. All this is done almost simul 
taneously, and the table is thus released and 
allowed to move. When approaching the de 
sired track, the air-supply is cut off by revers 
ing the motion of the motor and valve actu 
ated by it, and the air by the same valve re 
leased from the cylinder Torpartly so, remov 
ing the pressure, so that the valve 45 opens 
and further augments the discharge of air 
from the latch-cylinder at, allowing the spring 
to push the latch into the approached pocket, 
thus locking the table automatically. At the 
same time the spring 54 pushes the piston 51 
over the port 42, opens port 60, and closes the 
opening to pipe in. A reverse operation at 
the opposite end of cylinder T actuates the 
opposite end of latch-valve W similarly. 
Shouldlit be desired, the table maybe operated 
by manipulating manually the air-cock i, 
which may be adapted to perform the same 
functions as the valve Windependently of it. 
It is obvious that many minor changes and 
modifications in the details of construction 
may be made without departing from the 
spirit and intent of my invention, such as sub 
stituting other air-valves or parts for those 
shown, as it is not essential how they are par 
ticularly constructed so long as they perform 
the desired functions, many known forms be 
ing applicable. In lieu of the cylinder I may 
use any other suitable fluid-pressure motor or 
engine and adapt the gearing thereto. My 
turn-table may also be adapted for a swinging 
bridge when desired. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. An electropneumatic turn-table compris 
ing the table suitably mounted, the arch there 
on, a swivel-joint mounted upon the arch by 
which fluid under pressure may be conducted 
through pipes from a supply plant to all parts 
of said table while in motion or while at any 
point of its revolution about its center and by 
which an electrical circuit may be likewise 
conducted from any exterior point to any 
point upon the table while in motion, a motor 
on said table adapted to be operated by fluid 
pressure and controlled by electric current 
- 
75 
95 
OO. 
I o5 
II5 
I25 
 
7 O 
75 
So 
9 O 
95 
IOO 
C) 
IT 5 
O 
35 
45 
acting upon a suitable electric motor and con- from engagement automatically in advance 
trolling-valve, a latch to secure said table in 
of the movement of Said table, pipcs commu 
a fixed position and means by which it may 
nicating between the port-pipes of said mo 
be controlled automatically, and a suitable. 
tor and said latch-valve and between Said 
fluid-pressure engine by means of which said 
latch-valve and said latch-cylinder, and means 
table may be rotated, substantially as de 
by which fluid may be automatically exhaust 
scribed for the purposes set forth. 
ed from said latch-cylinder, Substantially as 
2. The combination of the table, a main 
shown and described. 
lmotor thereon adapted to use fluid-pressure 
4. The combination of the turn-table, the 
and to transmit power whereby said table 
motor comprising a cylinder having an inlet 
may be rotated, an arch on said table having 
port at each end, the piston terminating in a 
rack-bar suitably supported, gearing adapted 
a central point elevated above the center of 
said table under which a locomotive may pass, 
to connect with said rack-bar and transmit 
a swivel-joint having substantially an upper 
power to actuate said table, the circular rack 
part immovably fixed and a lower part fixed 
secured to the pit-bottom and in engagement 
to said arch and adapted to rotate with rela 
with said gearings, the central arch upon said 
tion to said upper part, said Swivel-joint be 
table, the electric motor, the main valve con 
ing adapted to convey fluid under pressure 
trolled by said motor, port-pipes between said 
by means of suitable pipes from a fixed point 
7alve and said cylinder, the latch-valve in 
exterior to said table to various parts of said 
communication with both of Said port-pipes 
and adapted to operate automatically when 
table while in motion radially, and also to 
pressure exists in either port-pipe to admit 
form a continuous electrical circuit by means 
fluid to a latch - cylinder, a latch normally 
of suitable wires between a fixed exterior 
point, to the moving parts of said table, a 
thrust outward to engage bulkhead-pockets, 
valve adapted to control the supply and ex 
a latch-cylinder in communication with said 
haust of fluid to and from said motor, an elec 
latch-valve and adapted to receive fluid un 
trical motor adapted to control said valve, 
der pressure to withdraw said latch, a valve 
wires leading from a battery to said electrical 
to automatically release the fluid from said 
motor through said swivel-joint, a circuit 
latch-cylinder, the swivel-joint on said arch, 
closer connected to said wires, a circuit-re 
the pipes and electric wires leading to and 
verser connected to said wires, pipe to con 
there from and suitably connected, and a Sup 
vey fluid to said main motor, and means by 
ply-pipe leading to said main Valve, substan 
which power may be transmitted from said 
tially as shown and described. 
main motor to actuate Said table, Substan 
5. In a turn-table, the combination with a 
tially as shown and described. 
suitable central support, of a swivel-joint con 
sisting of the base provided with the packing 
3. In a railway turn-table, the combination 
of the arch situated centrally upon the table, 
box, and having the outlets adapted to re 
a swivel-joint upon said arch and adapted to 
ceive pipe connections, the case Secured cen 
form fluid - ducts therethrough from fixed 
trally upon said base and having the central 
pipes to pipes movable upon the table, a fluid 
aperture in its top, the ball-race at the top of 
pressure motor and means for transmitting 
said case and the balls the rein, the tube pass 
power to operate said table, pipes leading 
ing through the top of said case and termi 
from an exterior point to said swivel-joint, 
nating therein, the packed piston at the lower 
electric wires leading from an exterior bat 
end of said pipe and provided with the ball 
tery to said swivel-joint, a valve to control 
bearing against the top of said case, a collar 
adjustably secured to said pipe and provided 
the ?low of fluids to and from said motor, 
pipes leading from said valve to said motor, 
with the ball-bearing against said case, the 
pipes communicating between said Swivel 
interior pipe passing through said first-men 
joint and said valve, an electrical motor adapt 
tioned pipe and terminating in Said base, andl 
ed to operate said valve, said electrical mo 
means by which the upper end of said pipes 
tor being reversible and having its central 
may be connected to form Separate ducts, 
shaft connected by means of suitable gear 
substantially as described and set forth. 
ing to a stem attached to said valve, wires 
6. In a turn-table, the combination of the 
communicating between said Swivel-joint and 
arch, the swivel-joint thereon, the fluid-pipes 
said electrical motor, the battery, the circuit 
leading to said joint, the electric wires lead 
closer, the circuit-reverser, a fluid-pressure 
ing to said joint and connected to a battery, 
cylinder, a slidable latch to secure said table 
the circuit-closer, the circuit-reverser adapt 
by engagement in bulkhead-pockets and hav 
ed to reverse the circuit over said wires, the 
ing its rear portion adapted to form a piston 
electric motor adapted to operate in either di 
rod and entering said fluid-pressure cylinder, 
rection and having an extended shaft pro 
a packed piston on said piston-rod working 
vided with a screw-worm, a worm-wheel suit 
in said cylinder, packing at the head of said 
ably Supported engaging said Worm and hav 
cylindel' around said rod, means for normally 
ing a central opening provided with screw 
forcing said latch into bulkhead-pockets, a 
threads, a main fluid-controlling valve hav 
latch-valve adapted to be automatically op 
ing a stem provided with screw-threads and 
erated by fluid-pressure to admit fluid to said 
passing through the center of said worm 
latch - cylinder to withdraw the said latch 
wheel, and a motor adapted to actuate said 
4. 
606,544 
55 
 
606,544 
M. 
O 
15 
25 
35 
- 
turn-table and in communication with said 
main valve, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
7. In a turn-table, the combination with 
the bulkhead having suitable pockets, of the 
latch-bar suitably supported by said turn-ta 
ble and adapted to engage said pockets and 
having the extended rear end forming a pis 
ton-rod, the cylinder suitably supported on 
said table at the rear of said latch-bolt and 
having a packed head through which said 
piston-rod enters, the piston on said piston 
rod. Within said cylinder, the spring seated 
between said piston and the opposite end of 
said cylinder, the pipe connected to said cyl 
inder, the latch-valve connected to said pipe, 
the Supply-pipes connected to said latch-valve 
and to the main operating-motor, the main 
Valve, with means by which it may be sup 
plied with fluid and controlled, substantially 
as shown and described. 
8. Iria turn-table, the combination of a mo 
tor-cylinder secured to the frame thereof and 
situated parallel to the main beams between 
one end and the pivotal center of said table, 
said cylinder having a port and connecting 
port-pipe at each end thereof and a piston 
Working in said cylinder, the piston-rod at 
tached to said piston, and passing through 
the packed head of said cylinder toward said 
pivotal center, the rack-bar attached to the 
Outer end of said piston-rod and suitably sup 
ported, the gearing connected to said rack 
bar and Supported by the opposite end of said 
table, the circular rack anchored in the pit 
and engaged by said gearing, the main valve 
having its chamber connected to said port 
pipes, the stem connected to said main valve, 
the electrical motor connected operatively to 
Said stem, the swivel-joint providing conduc 
tors for fluid and electricity, and the connect 
ing pipes and wires, substantially as shown 
and described. 
9. The combination with the main motor 
and gearing, of the port-pipes, the main valve, 
the electric motor, the swivel-joint and sup 
ply pipes and wires connected therewith, the 
55 
75 
latch-valve in communication with said port 
pipes and adapted to operate automatically 
as described, the latch-cylinder in communi 
cation with said latch-valve, and the latch 
connected to said latch-cylinder, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
10. In a turn-table, the combination of a 
main motor or engine, the port-pipes leading 
thereto, the main valve connected to said 
port-pipes, the electric motor adapted to op 
erate said main valve, the arch, the swivel 
joint thereon provided with fluid-ducts there 
through and having contactrings and brushes 
adapted to convey an electrical circuit con 
tinuously while said swivel-joint is in opera 
tion; the wires connected there with, and the 
fluid-pipes adapted to supply fluid under 
pressure through said swivel-joint to said 
main valve, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
11. In a turn-table, the combination with a 
motor mounted thereon, and having two sup 
ply-pipes connected at opposite ends thereof, 
of the latch-valve comprising a cylinder hav 
ing a pipe connecting one end thereof with 
one of said supply-pipes and a pipe connect 
ing the opposite end thereof with the other 
of said supply-pipes, valve-seats at said end 
connections, a valve seated on each of said 
seats and opening inwardly, a piston con 
nected to each of said valves, a spring inter 
posed between said pistons, ports adapted to 
be closed or opened by said pistons, said ports 
being connected and having a communicat 
ing pipe, and the latch having the connected 
cylinder in connection with said communi 
cating pipe, and means by which said supply 
pipes may be charged with fluid and the same 
released, substantially as shown and de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two Witnesses. 
JOHN H. HARTING. 
Witnesses: 
E. T. SILVIUS, 
M. D. HENDERSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606645.txt	No. 606,645. 
- 
. 
(No Model.) 
- EIGI- 
J. A. COSTELL). 
NUT TAPPNG MACH NE. 
(Application filed ct, 25, 1897.) 
Patented July 5, 1898. 
- 
IT 
CI 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
P 
s 
W/TWESSES 
O 
  
 
t A. e 
Res% 
 
 
O 
INVENTOR 
- 
(5.2 g/2-6, 
ACE) 5-y 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
JOSEPHA. COSTELLO, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. . 
NUT-TAPPING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 606,645, dated July 5, 1898. 
Application filed October 25, 1897, Serial No. 656,336, (No model.) 
O 
. 
. 
To all whon, it naily concern: 
Beit known that I, JOSEPH A. COSTELLO, 
of Cleveland, Cuyahoga county, Ohio, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Nut-Tapping Machines; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
nut-tapping machines. 
The object of the invention is to construct 
a machine that is simple, convenient, durable, 
and reliable. . 
With this object in view and to the end of 
rendering the machine, simple and durable 
the invention consists in certain features of 
construction and combinations of parts here 
inafter described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures I 
and II are side elevations, partly in section, 
of a machine embodying my invention. Fig. 
III is a transverse section. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates an 
upright standard that at its upper end bears 
a horizontally-arranged suitably - operated 
pinion B, that is driven continuously in one 
direction in any approved manner. Pinion 
B meshes with a horizontally-arrangedgear C, 
that is loosely mounted upon the upper end 
of a vertically-arranged spindle D. Spindle 
D has bearing in boxes a' a', that are rigid 
with arms a, that project laterally from and 
are integral with standard A. The upper 
box a' is arranged near the upper end of the 
standard, a short distance below pinion C. 
Spindle D at its lower end is provided with 
a tap-holder d, to which the tap T is secured 
in any approved manner. A clutch for con 
trolling operative connection between gear C 
and the spindle D is provided. One member 
C of the said clutch is rigid or integral with 
the gear, and the companion clutch member 
D' is operatively and slidably mounted upon 
the spindle, and operative connection between 
the said last-mentioned clutch member and 
spindle is formed, preferably, by the well 
known means of grooved and feather D. 
The said feather is fixed to the clutch mem 
ber ID' and engages the said groove, that is 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
formed in the spindle and is long enough to 
accommodate the endwise movement of the 
spindle during the operation of the machine. 
An annular groove C' is formed upon the 
part that forms gear Cand clutch member C" 
and is occupied by a ring or collar g, that is 
not rotatable With the said part, and is pro 
vided with a laterally-projecting pin or arm 
g', that is operatively engaged by one of the 
arms of the bell-crank lever G, that is hori 
Zontally fulcrumed or pivoted, as at G', to 
standard A, and has its other arm arranged 
to be engaged by the projecting arm or mem 
ber h of a ratchet-wheel H, that is pivoted 
horizontally, as at Fl', to a lug or arm A', 
formed upon standard A. Member h pro 
jects beyond the periphery of the ratchet 
wheel and is arranged at one side of the teeth 
of the said wheel and of course in position 
to engage and actuate the lever once in every 
complete rotation of the ratchet-wheel. The 
ratchet-wheel is engaged by a pawl I, that is 
horizontally pivoted, as at I", to a lever I, that 
is loosely mounted or journaled upon the axial 
pin or bearing of the ratchet-wheel and ex 
tends into close proximity to spindle D, and ex 
tends also below the pawl, as at I, and has its 
said portion I arranged to be engaged and ele 
vated by a collar or shoulder D, formed ex 
ternally of the spindle, when the spindle is ele 
vated after having tapped a nut and prepara 
tory to the descent of the tap into engagement 
with the next nut that is to be tapped. The 
shank of the tap is long enough to render it 
capable of holding several tapped nuts. The 
spindle is moved end Wise by a double-feed 
screw Kand by the engagement of the threads 
of the tap with the threads that the tap is cut 
ting on the nut being operated upon, as will 
hereinafter more fully appear. The upward 
movement of the spindle is effected entirely by 
the said screw K, and the arrangement of parts 
is such that upon the completion of the tap 
ping of a nut the aforesaid collar or shoul 
der ID shall come into engagement with the 
upper end of the said screw, that is there 
upon or simultaneously with the said engage 
ment reciprocated upwardly or in the di 
rection required to push upward upon the 
said shoulder or collar and thereby elevate 
the spindle to the extent required to cause 
OC 
2 
606,645 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
than the said arm I, ol' a suitably-applied 
the said collar or shoulder to colne into en 
gagement with portion I of lever I and 
spring acting in the direction to retain the 
pawl in the latter's normal position should be 
thereby actuate the said lever and the pawl 
provided. The tap is removably seculed 
carried thereby as required to give the ratchet 
within the tap-holder clin any approved man 
wheel the desired fractional turn. In the 
ner, and the nut that is being tapped is held 
case illustrated the latchet-Wheel has six 
stationary and in line with the path of the 
teen teeth, and each fractional turn of the 
tap during the tapping operation within the 
wheel moves the latter the distance of two 
nut-holder O, that consists, preferably, of any 
teeth, and consequently eight intermittent 
approved form of socket that is Suitably 
actuations of the said wheel are required af 
shaped internally to hold the nut stationary 
ter the last actuation of lever G for the pur 
during the tapping operation and that has its 
pose of operatively disconnecting gear C from 
bottom perforated, as at O', to accommodate 
spindle D after the number of nuts that are 
the location and operation of the tap and that 
capable of being held upon the tap's shank 
is open at one end-its mouth or receiving 
have been threaded before the member I of 
the ratchet-wheel is again brought into en 
end-that is in open relation with the inclined 
gagement with the said lever after operative 
feed-trough IP, down which the nuts which 
are to be tapped are fed by gravity or other 
engagement has again been established be 
tween the said gear and spindle. 
wise. 
Feed-screw IX being of the double-feed va 
To render the matter now being described 
riety, the same having a light-handed and 
more clear, I would remark that the spindle 
left-handed spiral groove, is adapted to feed 
and its tap are in their elevated position pre 
spindle D in opposite directions alternately, 
paratory to the tapping of a nut and are re 
ciprocated downwardly preparatory and dur 
as will hereinafter more clearly appear. The 
ing the Operation upon the nut that is next 
pitch of the screw IK is of course much 
greater than the pitch of the tap, and colnse 
to be tapped and are again elevated into the 
quently it is obvious that screw IX, when it is 
said position when the last-mentioned nut 
operatively engaged by a relatively station 
has been tapped; that the ratchet-wheel K is 
given a fractional turn upon each upward re 
airy tooth or thread, will be reciprocated much 
ciprocation of the said spindle; that when 
more rapidly than the spindle can be actu 
ated by the engagement of the threads of the 
the ta) has accumulated as many nuts as its 
shank is capable of holding the last upward 
tap with the threads of the nut-blanks being 
tapped. 
reciprocation of the tap that follows the said 
R, designates the relatively stationary 
accumulation results in the operation of le 
ver G by member h of the ratchet-wheel and 
thread ol' tooth that is instrumental in the 
thereby disconnects gear C and the spindle, 
operation of Screw IX and is formed upon an 
oscillating shaft R', that has bearing in a 
whereupon the said nuts are removed from 
the tap's shalnik; that operative connection be 
box A, formed upon the standard A. A suit 
ably-applied spring (not shown) can, if de 
tween the Said spindle and gear is again estab 
lished preparatory to the commencement of 
sired, be employed to act to retain the said 
the operation of the machine upon another 
shaft and its members in their normal posi 
series of nuts that are to be tapped and ac 
tion. Said shaft, adjacent to the said tooth 
or thread R, is provided with a latcally-pro 
Cumulated in the same manner; that in the 
position of the parts shown in Fig. I, that 
jecting arm R', and the screw K above its 
threaded portion is provided with an annu 
shows the extent to which the ratchet-wheel 
lar recess K'. The screw K is operatively 
has been actuated upon the accumulation of 
and slidably mounted upon spindle D, prefer 
three nuts by the tap, the tap is ready to de 
scend into the fourth nut that is to be tapped; 
ably by the well-known means of groove and 
that the shank of the tap, when the ratchet 
feather, and the feather K is in the case illus 
trated formed upon or rigid with the screw, 
Wheel has sixteen teeth and is turned two 
and the groove D, that is engaged by the said 
teeth at a time, should be long enough to ren 
der it capable of accumulating eight nuts, and 
feather, is formed in the spindle and is long 
enough to accommodate the operation of the 
that the return movement of the pawl after 
parts independently of each other. Means 
the latter's actuation of the ratchet-wheel is 
for the purpose of insuring that the said pawl 
ale provided also for causing the spindle to 
reciprocate with the screw preparatory to the 
shall actuate the Patchet-wineel an equal dis 
tance during each of its operations, limited 
commencement and after the completion of 
by a stop that comprises, preferaibly, a screw 
the tapping Operation, and the said means 
comprises, preferably, a horizontally-arranged 
L, that has its shank extending through a 
correspondingly-threaded hole in a lug A, 
block Q, placed within a horizontally-arranged 
chamber K, formed in one side of spindle D, 
formed upon the standard A, and has its head 
arranged lowermost and in position to be en 
and acted upon by a spring Q', confined with 
gaged by an arm I of lever I upon the said 
in said chamber at the inner end of the said 
return movement of the pawl, and I would 
block. The said clhambel is open at its outel 
remark, furthermore, that the pawl-bearing 
end, and the Spring acts to push the block 
portion of the Said lever should be heavier against the opposing surface of the screw and 
75 
OO 
O 
I I5 
606,645 
3 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
55 
frictionally connect the two, and this opera 
tive connection is sufficient to cause the spin 
dle to reciprocate in unison with the screw, 
but inadequate to prevent said frictional op 
erative connection from yielding to that feed 
of the spindle that is occasioned by the en 
gagement of the threads of the tap with the 
threads of the nut-blank that is operated 
upon. 
The arrangement of parts is such that when 
the screw K is in its lowermost position the 
thread or tooth R shall be in its normal posi 
tion and engage the said recess K' and shall 
be in position to be actuated into an operative 
position relative to that spiral groove of the 
screw that is instrumental in effecting the up 
Ward reciprocation of the screw, and the arm 
Rof the shaft R'normally protrudes into the 
lower portion of the path of shoulder or collar 
D that, as soon as the tap has passed through 
the nut, shall actuate the said shaft-arm R*, 
and thereby oscillate the shaft in the direc 
tion and to the extent required to bring its 
tooth or thread R into operative engagement 
With the aforesaid spiral groove. The actua 
tion of thread or tooth R into operative posi 
tion relative to screw Kresults in the upward 
reciprocation of the said screw, and conse 
quently in the upward or return movement 
of the tap. Figs. I and III show member R. 
in. Operative engagement With screw K. As 
already indicated, the upper or return move 
ment of the tap is effected by the engagement 
of the upper end of screw IK with shoulder or 
collar D. 
By the construction hereinbefore described 
the spindle is lowered comparatively rap 
idly-that is, in unison with the downward 
movement of the screw R-before the tap has 
commenced to operate upon the nut-blank; 
but as soon as the tap has commenced its op 
eration the means that establishes frictional 
operative connection between the screw and 
the spindle yields to the feed occasioned by 
the engagement of the threads of the tap and 
nut. The arrangement of the threads or 
grooves that are instrumental in the forma 
tion of the double-feed screw is the same as 
is found in double-feed screws generally, and 
in the case illustrated is such that the screw 
shall commence to lower as soon as ratchet 
wheel H has actuated upon the upward recip 
rocation of the screw. 
What I claim is 
l. In a nut-tapping machine, the combina 
tion with the suitably-rotated and suitably 
Supported tap-carrying spindle capable of re 
ciprocation; of a double-feed screw opera 
tively and slidably mounted upon said spin 
dle, a relatively stationary thread or tooth for 
operatively engaging the said screw, and 
means for causing the spindle to move end 
wise with the screw but capable of yielding 
to the feed occasioned by the engagement of 
the tap with the threads being cut in the nut 
blank, substantially as and for the purpose 
Set forth. 
2. In a nut-tapping machine, the combina 
tion with the suitably-rotated tap-carrying 
spindle capable of reciprocating, and a double 
feed screw slidable upon the said spindle and 
having such operative connection with the 
spindle as to accommodate the reciprocation 
of the spindle independently of the recipro 
cation of the screw; of a suitably-supported 
oscillating shaft provided with a thread or 
tooth having the arrangement required to ren 
der it capable of being actuated into an oper 
ative position relative to the aforesaid screw, 
and the said shaft being provided with a lat 
erally-projecting arm, and a member formed 
upon or rigid with the spindle and arranged 
in the position required to engage the said 
arm during the reciprocation of the spindle, 
substantially as and for the purpose specified. 
3. In a nut-tapping machine, the combina 
tion with the suitably-rotated tap-carrying 
spindle provided with the shoulder or collar 
D, the nut-holder O. perforated to accommo 
date the location and operation of the tap, 
and the inclined feed-trough P communicat 
ing with the nut-holder; of the double-feed 
screw K operatively and slidably mounted 
upon the spindle, means arranged within the 
spindle and bearing outwardly upon the screw 
and thereby establishing frictional operative 
connection between the screw and spindle, 
and the oscillating shaft provided with the 
tooth or thread R and the laterally-projecting 
arm R, all arranged and operating substan 
tially as shown, for the purpose specified. 
4. In a nut-tapping machine, the combina 
tion with the tap-carrying spindle, a suitably 
driven driving-wheel loosely mounted upon 
the spindle, a clutch for controlling operative 
connection between the said Wheel and the 
spindle, and the clutch-operating lever; of an 
intermittently-rotated wheel provided with a 
projecting member arranged to engage and 
actuate the said lever once during every com 
plete rotation of the Wheel, means for actuat 
ing the said wheel or intermittently-rotated 
member upon the return or idle strokes of the 
spindle, Substantially as and for the purpose. 
specified. 
5. In a nulti-tapping machine, the combina 
tion with the tap-carrying spindle having the 
collar or shoulder D, the suitably-driven 
driving-wheel loosely mounted upon the spin 
dle, a clutch for controlling operative con 
nection between the wheel and the spindle, 
and the clutch-Operating lever; of the ratch 
et-wheel H provided with a projecting mem 
ber h, the tilting lever I bearing a pawland 
having a member extending into the path of 
the aforesaid shoulder or collar, all arranged 
and operating Substantially as shown, for the 
purpose specified. 
6. In a nut-tapping machine, the combina 
tion with the tap-carrying spindle, a driving 
wheel loosely mounted upon the said spindle, 
a clutch for controlling Operative connection 
between the said clutch and the spindle, and 
the clutch-operating lever; of the ratchet 
75 
95 
CO 
IO5 
O 
- II.5 
I 25 
13o 
 
i. 
606,645 
In testimony whereof I sign this specifica 
wheel II provided with the projecting men- 
ber 1, the suitably-supported lever I pro- tion, in the presence of two witnesses, this 
vided with the pawl I, the arm I, and the 11th day of October, 1897. 
member I normally projecting into the path 
5 of the aforesaid shoulder or collar, and the 
stop I, all arranged and operating Substan- 
tially as shown, for the purpose specified. 
C. I. IDORER, 
ELLA. E. TITLDEN. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPI A. COSTELLO. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606745.txt	No. 606,745. 
(No Mode.) 
F. C. H. STRASBURGER. 
BOTTLE LABELING MACHINE. 
(Application filed May 19, 1896.) 
Patented July 5, 1898 
uly 3, 
5 Sheets-Sheet 
S s 
3 
s 
N S 
2 
 
2 
C El 2 
N 
/7ZZvezza? 
4, 7C2a4% 
%mov6-4, a 
s 
filiili 
s 
s 
t s 
S3 sell 
It 
 
asSs 
SS S. 
R. 
S. 
n 
ASNS S N 
K 
Oil NLA ( 
a2%22% 
S 
- - - -- sees w 
- 
S 
N 
 
 
 
 
 
712Zzzesses. 
?ex S\,.65&s. 
2/4/64-N- 
 
No. 606,745. 
(No Mode. 
F. C. H. STRASBURGER. 
BOTTLE LABELING MACHINE. 
(Application filed May 19, 1896.) 
Patented July 5, 898. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
1 f / 1 
772d 
/ 
f f 
f 
f 
 
N 
Y a2C 
(as aale SSSN 
E. | 
 
  
 
 
M 
l 
2 
a 
Eois PETERs co. Piore-LIrHe washiore... 
 
No. 606,745. 
(No Model.) 
F. C. H. STRASBURGER. 
BOTTLE LABELING MACHINE. 
(Application filed May 19, 1896.) 
Patented July 5, 1898. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Z7% 
71 
W 
7/2Z72esses. 
Z7zzvez2271 
7:6/64-N- 
%urs 2, 
(233. 
 
THE NORRS PETERs co. Photo-Lito. washington, c. c. 
No. 606,745. 
(No Model.) 
F. C. H. STRASBURGER. 
BOTTLE LABEING MACHINE. 
(Application fled May 9, 1898.) 
Patented July 5, 1898. 
Sheets-Sheet 
Z?||||||||||||||||||||||  No.| 
TTTTTTTFEETALITET% 
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS|ziks 
Zzz-Zvezza27 
2 CW-122 
% 
a 21 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
72zzuesses 
No. 606,745. 
(No Mode.) 
F. C. H. STRASBURGER. 
BOTTLE LABELING MACHINE. 
(Application filed May 19, 1896.) 
Patented July 5, 1898. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 5, 
S SY 
N 
n 
SS 
H-- 
S 
& 
n 
I 
s 
s 
fia 
s 
N 
(D 
s 
() 
s 
Ny 
Ny 
712z7zesses. 
/7ZZvezzo.7 
3/ 72 
3% 
&zzys. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK C. H. STRASBURGER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
BOTTLE-LABELING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 606,745, dated July 5, 1898. 
Application filed May 19, 1896, Serial No. 592,122, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: . 
Be it known that I, FRANK C. H. STRAS 
BURGER, a citizen of the United States, resid 
sing in Chicago, in the county of Cook and 
State of Illinois, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Labeling-Ma 
chines, of which the following is a full, clear, 
and exact description, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification. 
My invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in labeling-machines, 
and more particularly to that type which are 
used in affixing labels to bottles and articles 
of a similar nature. 
The primary object of my invention is to 
provide a machine of simple construction 
which can be easily operated to feed a single 
label from a pile, apply a suitable amount of 
paste thereto, and affix the label in its proper 
position on a bottle. 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
vide suitable means for insuring the feed of 
but a single label during each complete opera 
tion of the machine. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide means for affixing the label to the bottle 
which are adapted to be operated in such a 
way that the bottle is immediately released 
after the label has been affixed, whereby the 
affixing means are prevented from disturb 
ing the label after it has been placed upon 
the bottle. 
Further objects of the invention are to pro 
vide carriers which receive the label after it 
has been supplied with paste and arrange it 
in position on the bottle to be operated upon 
by the affixing-rolls, means for stopping the 
feeding operations while the label is being 
affixed to the bottle, means for holding the 
labels in position where they may be easily 
and readily operated upon by the feeding de 
vices, so that the latter will feed only a sin 
gle label during each operation, and means 
for throwing the carriers to each side after 
the label has been affixed to the bottle. 
My invention also has for its object to sim 
plify the construction of machines of this 
character and provide means for operating the 
same, so that the mechanism will be placed 
in operation when the bottle is arranged in 
the machine. 
- 
With these and other ends in view the in 
Vention consists in the construction, combina 
tion, and arrangement of parts hereinafter 
described, and shown in the accompanying 
drawings, referring to which 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional side view of 
my improved machine, showing the arrange 
ment of the different mechanisms therein. 
Fig. 2 is a front view of the machine, partly 
in section. Fig. 3 is a side elevation of the 
machine. Fig. 4 is a horizontal sectional view 
on the line 4 4 of Fig. 1 and showing the inte 
rior mechanism of the machine in plan. Fig. 
5 is a sectional view on the line 55 of Fig. 4. 
Fig. 5* is a sectional view through Fig. 5, 
and Fig. 6 is a top plan view of the machine. 
Referring to the drawings, in which like 
letters and numerals of reference denote cor 
responding parts in all the figures, A desig 
nates a suitable frame, which is mounted, 
preferably, on a stand a, a table, or in any 
other manner. The frame is provided with 
a bed-plate a', which may be of any desired 
shape and size. 
The feed-rolls B are mounted on a shaft b, 
which is journaled in suitable bearings in the 
frame, and these rolls are provided with the 
cam-faces b, which are adapted to engage the 
pile of labels and remove the label on the bot 
tom from the pile in a manner hereinafter 
described. A gear-wheel Cismounted on the 
shaft b between the two feed-rolls B, and it 
is provided with a sleeve c, which extends 
from one end thereof and on which is mount 
ed a ratchet-wheel c'. This ratchet-wheel is 
inclosed within a box D, and spring-pressed 
pawls d are pivotally secured Within the said 
box and arranged to engage the ratchet-wheel 
c'. The box D is rigid with a collard', which 
is secured on the shaft b, whereby when the 
gear-wheel C is revolved in one direction the 
ratchet-wheelc' will operate against the pawls 
and through the medium of the box D and 
collar d cause the shaft band the feed-rolls 
to turn. This gear-wheel is operated by 
means of a push-bar E, provided with a rack 
e, located adjacent to the gear-wheels, said 
push-bar being mounted in the frame and 
adapted to be thrust forward when the bot 
tle is arranged in position, the bottle having 
its bottom forced against the head e' on the 
push-bar, whereby the tension of the spring 
IO 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
dO 
- - r 
2 
606,745 
IO 
2C) 
25 
e' is overcome. The rack on the push-bar is 
normally engaged with the gear-wheel C, and 
when the push-bar is thrust forward the gear 
wheel and feed-rolls are revolved a full turn, 
and in order to stop the revolution of the 
feed-rolls at the proper time a disk IF is se 
culed on the shaft l) and provided with a slot 
f, in which the downturned end f' of a piv 
oted arm G is adapted to drop and hold the 
feed-rolls in a stationary position after they 
have completed a full turn. In order to dis 
engage the said arm from the disk, I provide 
an adjustable collar 9 on the push-bar E, 
which engages a cam-face g' on the under side 
of the arm and operates to raise the end of 
said arim out of the slot when the push-bar is 
in its normal position. When the push-bar 
E is in its normal position, the collar (1 Sup 
ports the al'm Out of engagement with the 
disk; but when the push-bar is thrust for 
ward the collar, being rigidly secured there 
on, is carried from beneath the pivoted arm, 
whereupon the end of the latter rests upon 
the disk E until the latter and the feed-rolls 
have made a complete turn, at which time it 
will engage the slot fand hold the feed-rolls, 
the shaft, and the disk in position against 
rotation until the push-bar has been released 
and caused to assume its normal position by 
the operation of the spring e', as shown in 
Fig. 1, when the collar will again assume its 
position under the pivoted arm and disengage 
it from the disk. The paste - rolls II are 
mounted in front of the feed-rolls 3, and they 
are also provided with calm-faces h, which 
cam-faces are adapted to receive paste from 
the paste-feed roll h", yieldingly supported in 
a vat, I, Contailing paste or other adhesive 
material, by means of the spring-arms i. The 
paste-feed roll is adapted to engage the cam 
faces le. On the paste-rolls and supply said 
faces with an amount of paste which is sub 
sequently applied to the under side of the la 
bel while the label is being fed from the pile 
to the carriers, the said cam-faces of the paste 
rolls being of such a size that they will apply 
the paste to the label in a manner best calcul 
lated to Secure the results sought for, it be 
ing unnecessary to cover the entire under 
surface of the label with paste and desirable 
that the paste should be applied to the label 
Without extending to the extreme edges there 
of, so that it will not be spread beyond the 
label when the latter is affixed to the bottle. 
An idle-roller ' is suitably mounted above 
the paste-rolls II and adapted to operate to 
hold the label in contact with the paste-rolls 
while the label is passing through the ma 
chine to the carriers. A scraper J is sup 
ported by the spring-arms j and adapted to 
bear yieldingly against the paste-rolls for the 
purpose of removing therefrom surplus 
amounts of paste which may have adhered 
thereto, and a guardi' is arranged between 
the paste-rolls and the feed-rolls to prevent 
paste from being spattered or otherwise ap 
plied to the feeding mechanisms. 
The carriers are mounted on a plate K, 
which is arranged to reciprocate back and 
forth in guides l; on the under side of the bed 
plate (t". This reciprocating plate is provided 
with lugs le", which extend upwardly through 
slots c' in the bed-plate, and to which the 
bases I of the carriers are pivotally secured. 
These bases I, are broad at their bottom, SO 
that they will contact with the upper face of 
bed-plate, and the outer edge thereof is cut 
away, as shown at l, so that the carriers may 
be thrown outward at a certain point in their 
operation to take them out of the Way of the 
bottle which is being operated upon. 
The carriers comprise the upwardly-extendl 
ing guide-arms M, which are bent to form the 
loop n, and the supporting-arms a for the 
holders N, said holder's being Supported in a 
horizontal position on the Supporting-arms 
in and provided with slots 
to receive the 
label, a stop n' being secured on each holder 
and adapted to be adjusted thereon for labels 
of different sizes. 
There is a threefold object in providing 
the lower end of the holding-rod () with a 
socket S to receive the engaging device or in 
making this holding-rod hollow or concave 
for the same purpose, to wit: first, to pre 
vent the holding-rod from dulling and other 
wise injuring the pin or other engaging do 
vice which would occur if the lower end of 
the holding-rod were solid, so that the same 
would engage the pin when the pile of labels 
is almost exhausted and dull the point, or 
edge of the engaging device or bend it or 
otherwise injure the same to render it in op 
erative for the purposes intended and neces 
sitating frequent renewal of the same and 
resulting in corresponding loss of use of the 
machine as well as the loss of labor and ma 
terial; second, the pressure of the holding 
rod on the paper is maintained and continued 
until the last label has been used, as the en 
gaging device is permitted to enter the lower 
end of the rod, and if the lower end of the rod 
were solid it would rest, upon the engaging 
device, and there being no pressure upon the 
labels below the upper end of the engaging 
device there would bc nothing to prevent 
the feed-rolls feeding two or more labels at a 
time, or, indeed, the entire remaining pile, 
and, third, when the pile of labels is almost 
exhausted the continued pressure of the hold 
ing-rod on the few remaining labels, espe 
cially when there is a space around the en 
gaging device into which the rear edges of the 
labels may be forced, causes the engaging 
device to slightly tear the labels and render 
the individual freeing thereo? from the de 
vice easy and certain and without any more 
liability of feeding 'a plurality of labels at 
this time than at any other time during the 
operation of the machine. 
The calliers receive the labels in the old 
ers N after the paste has been applied there 
to, and these carriers are adapted to carry 
the label into a position upon the bottle where 
35 
45 
55 
 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
606,745 
it can be operated upon by the affixing-rolls 
and secured permanently to the bottle, the 
bottle itself resting upon a cushion O, and in 
order to prevent the carriers from receiving a 
shock as the plate K is reciprocated cushions 
O are secured in the slots k" on the bed-plate, 
against which the lugs k". will engage when 
the plate K is at that end of its movement. 
The labels are arranged in a pile and sup 
ported in the frame of the machine above the 
feed-rolls, the pile being held in a label 
holder P and the front edge of the pile being 
arranged against a front plate p, the lower 
end of which is beveled away, as at p", to per 
mit a single label from the bottom of the pile 
to be fed from the pile by the feed-rolls. The 
label-holder P is pivoted on the frame at p", 
and a holding-rod Q operates in the keepers 
q Within the label-holder and is adapted to 
be normally pressed upon the pile of labels 
by a spring g to hold the labels in a compact 
pile and in their proper position in the label 
holder. Another holding-rod R is guided in 
a tubular guide r on the front plate p and 
provided with a bearing-plate r", which is 
normally held in engagement with the top of 
the pile of labels close to the front plate by 
the Spring r", arranged upon the holding-rod 
above the tubular guide r. These holding 
rods QR maintain the pile of labels compact 
and closely pressed together, so that they will 
not become disarranged during the various 
Operations of the machine, and in order to 
more surely provide against feeding more 
than a single label from the pile during each 
Operation I provide a device adapted to en 
gage tWO Or more of the bottom labels in the 
pile near the edge thereof and preferably 
beneath the holding-rod Q. This engaging 
device may be of various forms; but in the 
drawings I have shown a pin S, which is se 
cured in the bottom of the label-holder P 
and projected up sufficiently to engage two 
or more of the labels in the pile, at the rear 
edge of the pile, the lower end of the rod Q 
being provided with a sockets to receive the 
pin Swhen the machine is not in use and the 
label-holder is empty. Instead of the pin S, 
I may use other forms of engaging devices, 
Such as a sharpened blade or other devices of 
a similar nature which will operate to engage 
two or more of the bottom labels in the pile. 
The front edge of the bottom label in the 
practical operation of the machine will rest 
below the front plate p, so that it can be 
readily and easily advanced or fed by the 
feed-rollers B when the latter are operated, 
said label passing over the supporting-barss' 
to the carriers. If no engaging device simi 
lar to the pin S were used, there would be 
danger of feeding more than one label from 
the pile at each operation of the machine; 
but by the use of this device, which engages 
two or more of the bottom labels in the pile, 
the feeding of but a single label from the 
pile is insured, as the power of the feed-rolls 
will be exerted altogether upon the bottom 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
63 
 
75 
9o 
95 
CO 
Io5 
3. 
label, the restraining influence of the engag 
ing device On the labels above the bottom 
label being sufficient to overcome the usual 
friction and cohesion between the bottom la 
bel and the label next above. 
The affixing-rolls T are mounted on the 
curved spring-armst, said arms being of such 
form that when the machine is at rest or in 
its normal position before being placed in op 
eration the rolls will be substantially in con 
tact above the carriers, as shown in Fig. 2. 
These spring-arms are pivotally mounted in 
a plate U, which is arranged beneath the bed 
plate O' and supported on a vertically-oper 
ating bar it, provided with a socket u' in its 
upper end to receive a spring it'. The spring 
arms t operate in slots O' in the bed-plate a, 
and they are provided with lateral exten 
sions o' at their pivots, which are arranged . 
to bear upon the top of the plate U to limit 
the inward movement of the arms, the out 
Ward movement of said arms being limited 
by the end walls of the slots o' and also in a 
measure by reason of the fact that the loops 
in operate upon cross-bars W on the spring 
arms. However, when the Spring-arms are 
in their lowest position the cross-bars W will 
be below the loops in, so that the carriers will 
be free from said cross-bars, the operation of 
the arms it being such that when the rolls T 
engage the bottle Z the arms are spread out 
wardly, thereby carrying with them the car 
riers, which at this time have performed their 
part of the operation in supporting and hold 
ing the label and are of no further practical 
use while that label is being affixed to the 
bottle. A spring connects the spring-arms 
t and returns them to their normal position, 
in which the rollers T are closely adjacent to 
each other, immediately after the label has 
been affixed to the bottle, and the action of 
the Spring may be strong enough to press the 
rolls Tagainst the bottle with such force as 
to raise the bottle from its cushion O; but 
this operation is not absolutely necessary, and 
the strength of the spring need only be suffi 
cient to return the arms to their proper posi 
tion ready to affix another label to another 
bottle. A shaft. W is journaled in bearings 
in the frame, and it carries pinions v, which 
engage racks v' on the under side of the plate 
K. A strap X is attached to the spring t' 
and to a roller ac on the shaft W, and when 
the bar at is operated vertically the shaft W 
is rotated, through the medium of the strap 
connection X and the pinions U, engaging the 
racks v', to cause the table K to be advanced 
to the front of the machine and the carriers 
to advance the label into its proper position 
with relation to the bottle. When the pres 
sure upon the bar it is released, a spring ac', 
connected to the rear portion of the frame 
and to the plate K, causes the said plate to 
resume its normal position, in which the car 
riers are arranged in front of the paste-rolls 
to receive another label. 
The machine may be operated by a treadle 
II5 
I 25 
606,745 
O 
25 
Y, attached to the lower end of the vertical 
bar (, Or, in the preferred construction, a link 
2) is connected to the lower end of the bar at 
and to the crank-arm f' of a shaft f', said 
shaft being journaled in bearings in the stand 
Cl, upon Which the frame is mounted. This 
shaft is provided with a bolt-pulley 2 and a 
clutch 2', the clutch being closed by a pivoted 
rod 2", which extends upward and in line 
with the push-bar E, so that the push-bar 
will strike the rod 2" when a bottle is placed 
in the machine and throw the clutch into en 
gagement, so that the shaft y' will be placed 
in Operation. A spring 2 returns the rod ' 
to its normal position and disengages the 
clutch, when the push-bar resumes its nor 
mal position. 
An arm 1 is pivotally secured in the rear 
portion of the frame beneath the push-bar E, 
and When the machine is at rest, and while 
the affixing-rolls are in their normal position 
the real end 2 of said arm rests upon a Sup 
lporting-rod 3, projecting rearward from the 
plate U. When the push-bar E is thrust, 
rearwardly, the collar 4 passes beyond the 
end of the alm 1; but these parts do not come 
into engagement, until the supporting-arm 3 
is carried downward with the plate U, at 
Which time the rear end of the arm 1 causes 
Said arm to rise and engage the said collar 4 
to hold the push-bar in its rearward position 
until the label is affixed to the bottle. When 
the plate U rises, the supporting-arm 3 en 
gages the rear end 2 of the arm 1 and causes 
Said alm to be disengaged from the collar 4, 
which therefore releases the push-bar, and 
the spring e' returns it to its normal position, 
as shown in Fig. 1. 
The feed-rolls are supported on a shaft b, 
Which carries a gear-wheel 6, arranged in en 
gagement with an idle-gear 7, which commu 
nicates motion from said gear 6 to a gear S 
on the shaft 9, which carries the paste-rolls 
II. The gear S also meshes with a gear 10 
on the shaft 11, which carries the idle-roll i, 
and by this arrangement of gearing motion 
is communicated to the paste-rolls and the 
idle-roll from the feed-rolls simultaneously, 
and all of Said rolls operate together. 
By this construction it will be seen that the 
Operation of the machine is to a very large 
extent automatic, and it may be briefly de 
scribed as follows: The label - holder IP is 
turned back, so that the holding-rod Q will 
a SSulme a horizontal position for convenience 
in arranging the pile 12 of labels in place, 
and in doing this care is observed to have the 
labels in a symmetrical pile, so that they may 
be properly fed forward, the pin S or other 
device engaging two or more of the labels at 
the rear edges thereof. The holding-rod Q 
is then allowed to bear upon the labels, and 
the label-holder P is turned into its normal 
position, as shown in Fig. 1, and the holding 
rod R is arranged to bear upon the front edge 
of the pile. The bottom of the bottle is placed 
against the heade', and the push-bar is forced 
backward until the bottle rests in its proper 
position upon the cushion O and the collar 4 
has engaged the rear part of the frame. During 
this operation the rack e, engaging the geal 
wheel C, has caused the shaft 0 to make one 
turn. The cam-faces l' during this operation 
engage the bottom label of the pile 12 and 
carry it forward to the paste-rolls, the cam 
faces of which paste-rolls apply a suitable 
amount Of adhesive Substance to the label 
and advance it in the holders N. Of the Ori 
Zontally - reciprocating carriers. When the 
shaft () has made a complete turn, the end f' 
of the pivoted arm G engages the slot f of the 
disk IF and prevents a further revolution of 
the feed-rolls, which might tend to advance 
the bottom label of the pile. The vertical 
bar at is now lowered by means of the treadle 
Or, as previously explained, by power applied 
through the shaft if' and its connection with 
said bar to cause the horizontally-l'ecipl"Ocat 
ing carriers to advance and arrange the label 
in its proper position with relation to the bot 
tle. At the same time the plate U, being 
lowered, carries with it the affixing-rolls T, 
which at the proper time engage the label 
supported in the holders N and press it closely 
and tightly on the bottle, said rolls operating 
upon the bottle under considerable pressure 
until they pass the horizontal plane of the 
middle of the bottle, at which time the label 
carriers are thrown outward into the position 
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2, and the bot 
tle is slightly forced upward by reason of the 
fact that the rolls T pass below the middle of 
the bottle. When the plate U is lowered, the 
Supporting-arm 3, callied thereby, releases 
the alm I and causes the latter to engage the 
collar 4 on the push-bar and hold the bar in 
its retracted position until, the label having 
been affixed to the bottle, the plate U rises 
to its normal position and the Supporting-arm 
3 disengages the arm 1 from the collar, where 
upon the push-bar returns to its normal posi 
tion under the influence of the springe', and 
the machine is ready to operate upon another 
bottle. 
I am aware that changes in the form and 
proportion of parts and details of construc 
tion of my invention may be made without 
departing from the spirit or sacrificing the 
advantages thereof, and I would therefore 
have it distinctly understood that I reservo 
the right to make all changes in the construc 
tion and arrangement of parts of my im 
proved machine which fall within the scope 
of my invention. 
It will be understood, of course, that the 
rack e is always in engagement with the gear 
Wheel C; but when the push-bar resumes its 
normal position after the label has been af 
fixed to the bottle the pawls (lyield to the move 
ment of the ratchet-wheelc' and no movement 
is communicated to the shaft to, which only 
rotates when the push-bar is thrust inwardly. 
IIaving thus fully described my invention, 
what I desire to secure by Lotters Patent, is 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
I 25 
35 
45 
55 
 
606,745 
5 
75 
90 
25 
1. In a labeling-machine, the combination vided with eam-faces to apply adhesive ma 
With a label-holder for containing a pile of terial to portions of the surface of the label, 
labels, of feed-rolls adapted to engage the 
supporting -bars arranged intermediate of 
bottom label in said pile and feed the same 
the feed-rolls and the paste-rolls to support 
forward, paste-rolls adapted to apply adhe 
the label while being advanced by the feed 
sive material to said labels, horizontally-re 
rolls to the paste-rolls, a vat arranged beneath 
ciprocating carriers operating above the arti 
the paste-rolls to contain the paste or adhe 
cle to be labeled and arranged to receive the 
sive material, the spring-arms secured to the 
label from said paste-rolls and carry it into 
side of said vat, the paste-feed roll on said 
proper position with relation to the article to 
arms and arranged to engage with the cam 
be labeled, and means for operating said car 
faces of the paste-rolls, a scraper yieldingly 
riers, substantially as described. 
Supported adjacent to the paste -rolls and 
2. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
adapted to engage there with, and a guard ar 
With a label-holder, of feed-rolls having cam 
ranged intermediate of the feed - rolls and 
faces on a portion of their peripheries adapted 
paste-rolls to protect the feed-rolls, 
Substan 
to engage the bottom label of a pile in said 
tially as described. 
7. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
label-holder and feed said bottom label for 
Ward from the pile, and means operated by 
With a label-holder adapted to receive a pile 
the insertion of the bottle in the machine to 
of labels, offeed-rolls adapted to advance the 
actuate said feed-rolls, substantially as de 
bottom label of said pile, paste-rolls adapted 
to apply adhesive material to portions of the 
Scribed. 
3. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
surface of said label, reciprocating carriers 
With a label-holder, of feed-rolls having cam 
to receive the label from the paste-rolls and 
faces on a portion of their peripheries adapted 
carry it into its proper position with relation 
to engage the bottom label of a pile and feed 
to the article to be labeled, and means for si 
the same forward, paste-rolls spaced a suit 
multaneously affixing the label to the article 
able distance apart, cam-faces on a portion 
and throwing the carriers out of the way of 
of the peripheries of said paste-rolls adapted 
the article, substantially as described. . 
to receive paste and apply the same to the 
8. In a labelling-machine, the combination 
label and feed the label forward from the 
With a label-holder, offeed-rolls for advancing 
feed-rolls, and means for operating said feed 
a label from said holder, paste-rolls adapted 
to apply paste to a portion of the surface of 
and paste rolls actuated by the insertion of 
the bottle in the machine, substantially as 
said label, horizontally-reciprocating carriers 
to receive the label from the paste-rolls and 
described. 
4. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
carry it into position above the article to be 
labeled, and a push-bar adapted to be oper 
With a label-holder, of feed-rolls provided 
With cam-faces on a portion of their periph 
ated by the insertion in the machine of the 
eries adapted to engage the bottom label of a 
article to be labeled and thereby actuate the 
pile in said label-holder and advance the same 
feed-rolls to advance a single label from the 
forward, paste-rolls, cam-faces on a portion 
holder to the carriers, substantially as de 
of the peripheries of said paste-rolls adapted 
scribed. 
to apply adhesive materials to portions of the 
9. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
with a label-holder, of feed-rolls adapted to 
surface of said label and advance the label 
forward, an idle-roll operating above said 
advance a label from said holder, paste-rolls 
45 paste-rolls and upon the label to hold the la 
adapted to apply adhesive material to a por 
bel in contact only with the cam-faces on the 
tion of the surface of said label, a push-bar 
paste-rolls and means operated by the inser 
operated by the insertion of the article to be 
labeled in the machine and actuating the feed 
tion of the bottle in the machine for actuat 
ing said feed and paste rolls simultaneously, 
and paste rolls, and means for stopping the 
substantially as described. . . 
operation of said rolls after they have com 
5. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
pleted a full revolution, substantially as de 
with a label-holder adapted to receive a pile 
scribed. 
10. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
of labels, of feed-rolls provided with cam 
faces on a portion of their peripheries to en 
with a label-holder, of feed-rolls adapted to 
55 gage the bottom label of said pile and ad 
advance a label from said holder, paste-rolls 
adapted to apply adhesive material to a por 
vance the same forward, means operated by 
tion of the surface of said label, a push-bar 
the insertion of a bottle in the machine for 
actuating said feed-rolls and means for auto 
operated by the insertion of the article to be 
matically stopping said feed-rolls at the end 
labeled in the machine and actuating the feed 
of each complete revolution, substantially as 
and paste rolls, and means for holding said 
push-bar after it has been thrust in, substan 
described. 
6. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
tially as described. 
11. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
with a label-holder adapted to receive a pile 
of labels, of feed-rolls provided with cam 
with a label-holder, of feed-rolls adapted to 
faces adapted to engage the bottom label and 
advance a label from said holder, a shaft sup 
porting said feed-rolls, a disk on said shaft 
advance the same forward, paste -rolls ar 
ranged in advance of said feed-rolls and pro- and provided with a slot in its periphery, a 
- 
a 
35 
Od 
IO5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 
606,745 
7 O 
75 
95 
pivoted arm having a downturned end adapt 
ed to engage the slot in said disk, a push-bar 
adapted to actuate said feed-rolls, and a col 
lar carried by said push-bar and arranged to 
engage the pivoted arm to raise the down 
turned end thereof out of engagement with 
the disk, substantially as described. 
12. In a labelling-machine, the combination 
With a label-holder, of feed-rolls adapted to 
advance a label from said holder, a shafts up 
porting Said rolls, a gear - wheel mounted 
loosely on said shaft and provided with a 
sleeve at One end thereof, a ratchet-wheelse 
cured rigidly on said sleeve, a box secured on 
the shaft and over said atchet-wheel, pawls 
pivotally Secured in said box and arranged in 
engagement with the ratchet-wheel, and a 
push-bar provided with a rack to engage the 
gear-wheel and operate the same whereby, 
When the push-bar is thrust backward, the 
shaft, and feed - rolls will be revolved for 
Wardly, and, when the push-bar resumes its 
normal position, the feed-rolls will remain 
stationary, Substantially as described. 
13. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
with a label-holder, of feed-rolls adapted to 
advance a label from said holder, a shaft Sup 
porting Said feed-rolls, a disk mounted on said 
shaft and provided with a slot, a pivoted arm 
provided with a downturned end adapted to 
engage the slot in said disk, a gear-wheel 
loosely mounted on the shaft adjacent to said 
disk and provided with a sleeve at one end 
thereof, a ratchet - wheel secured on said 
sleeve, a box arranged over the sleeve and se 
cured to the shaft, Spring-pressed pawls piv 
oted in the box and arranged in engagement 
with the ratchet-wheels, a push-bar adapted 
to be operated by the insertion of the article 
to be labeled in the machine, a rack on said 
push-bar arranged to engage the gear-wheel, 
and a collar carried by said push-bar and ar 
ranged to engage the pivoted arm and raise 
the end thereof from engagement with the 
disk, Substantially as described. 
14. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
With a frame, and means for advancing the 
label therethrough, of a label-holder pivot 
ally mounted on the frame and adapted to re 
ceive and hold a pile of labels, and spring 
controlled devices bearing on the pile for 
lmaintaining Said labels in a compact pile, 
Substantially as described. 
15. In a labelling-machine, the combination 
With a frame, and means for advancing the 
label therethrough and affixing the same to 
the article to be labeled, of a label-holder 
pivotally moulted on the frame and adapted 
to receive the pile of labels, said pile of labels 
being partly inclosed within the walls of said 
holder and projecting partly from the forward 
end thereof, and the label-holder being adapt 
ed to be turned on its pivot to bring the labels 
into a vertical position, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
1G. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
With a frame, and means for advancing a label 
therethrough and affixing the same to the arti 
cle to be labeled, of a label-holder pivotally 
mounted on the frame and adapted to be 
turned on its pivot to bring the pile of labels 
into a vertical position, substantially as and 
for the purpose described. 
17. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
with a frame, and means for advancing a label 
therethrough and affixing the same to the arti 
cle to be labeled, of a label-holder pivotally 
mounted on the frame and adapted to receive 
the pile of labeis, said pile of labels being 
partly inclosed within the walls of said holder 
and projecting partly from the forward end 
thereof with the botton label in position to 
be engaged by the advancing means, a pin 
projecting up from the bottom of the holder 
and adapted to engage the bottom labels of 
the pile therein, a holding-rod adapted to bear 
upon the pile of labels and having a socket 
in its lower end to receive said pin and a . 
spring-pressed holding-rod arranged to press 
the forward part of the pile, uninclosed by 
the holder, downward in position to be on 
gaged by the feed-rolls, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
1S. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
with a frame, of a label-holder mounted on 
said frame, feed-irolls adapted to advance a 
label from said holder, a device projecting up 
through the bottom of the holder and adapted 
to engage the bottom labels of a pile in Said 
holder at the edge thereof, and a spring-CO 
trolled holding-rod arranged to bear upon the 
pile of labels and provided with a socket in 
its lower end to receive said engaging device 
when the pile of labels is entirely or nearly 
exhausted, substantially as described. 
19. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
with a frame and means for advancing a label 
therethrough, of a pivoted label-holder mount 
ed on the frame and adapted to receive a pile 
of labels, said pile of labels being partly in 
closed within the walls of Said holder, a plate 
arranged in front of said pile, a Spring-pressed 
holding-rod supported on said plate and ar 
ranged to bear upon the forwald (end of the 
pile of labels to bring the lower label into po 
sition to be fed from the pile, a Spring-pressed 
holding-rod arranged to bear upon the lear 
end of the pile of labels, and supported on 
said pivoted label-holder and a device for 
retarding the movements of the lower la 
bels, substantially as and for the purpose de 
Scribed. 
20. In a labelling-machine, the combination 
with a frame, a label-holder mounted thereon 
and means for advancing a label through the 
machine, of a cushion to receive the article to 
be labeled, vertically-movable affixing-rolls, 
arms supporting said rolls, carriers to receive 
the label from the advancing means and 
means for reciprocating said carriers in a hori 
Zontal plane to carry the label forward in po 
| sition above the article to be labeled and si 
OO 
O 
I I5 
I 25 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
606,745. 
. 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
affixing-rolls and the carriers simultaneously, . 
substantially as described. 
26. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
with a frame having a bed-plate, of a plate lo 
cated beneath the bed-plate, arms supported 
on said plate and carrying the affixing-rolls, 
a vertically-operating bar connected to said 
plate, means for raising and lowering said bar 
to cause the affixing-rolls to contact with the 
article to be labeled, carriers adapted to sup 
port the label above the article to be labeled, 
a plate arranged beneath the bed-plate and 
having lugs extending up through the bed 
plate to support the carriers, racks on the 
under side of said plate, a shaft journaled in 
the frame, pinions carried by said shaft and 
adapted to engage the racks, and a connection 
intermediate of the shaft and vertically-op 
erating bar, whereby the carriers are oper 
ated simultaneously with the affixing-rolls, 
substantially as described. 
27. In a labeling-machine, the combination . 
with a frame having a bed-plate, of a plate lo 
cated beneath the bed-plate, arms supported 
on said plate and carrying the affixing-rolls, 
a vertically-operating bar connected to said 
plate, means for raising and lowering said bar 
to cause the affixing-rolls to contact with the 
article to be labeled, carriers adapted to sup 
port the label above the article to be labeled, 
a plate arranged beneath the bed-plate and 
having lugs extending up through the bed 
plate to support the carriers, racks on the un 
der side of said plate, a shaft journaled in the 
frame, pinions carried by said shaft and 
adapted to engage the racks, a spring ar 
ranged in the socket at the upper end of the 
vertical bar, a strap connected to said spring 
and the shaft whereby the shaft is rotated as 
the rod is lowered, and a spring connected to 
the frame and to the plate carrying said racks 
and adapted to return said plate to its nor 
mal position after being advanced, substan 
tially as described. 
28. In a labeling-machine, the combination . 
with a frame, means for feeding a label 
through the frame, a push-bar adapted to op 
erate said feeding means, means for affixing 
the label to the article to be labeled, a verti 
cally-operating rod adapted to actuate said 
affixing means, a shaft connected with said 
vertical rod and adapted to operate the same, 
a clutch on said shaft, and a rod connected to 
said clutch and adapted to be engaged by said 
push-bar to close the clutch, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
29. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
With a frame, and means for advancing a la 
bel therethrough, of carriers adapted to re 
ceive the label and adjust the same in posi 
tion over the article to be labeled, the affix- . 
ing-rolls normally maintained above the car 
riers, arms supporting said affixing-rolls, and 
means adapted to bring said rolls into contact 
With the article to be labeled and, at the same 
time, throw the carriers out of engagement 
IIo 
II5 
I25 
V 
described. 
multaneously operate the affixing-rolls to af 
fiX said label to the article, substantially as 
21. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
With a frame, a label-holder mounted on 
the frame, and means for advancing a label 
through the frame, of vertically-movable af 
fixing-rolls, arms supporting said rolls, hori 
ZOntally-reciprocating carriers connected with 
said arms and adapted to receive the label 
from the advancing means and carry it into 
position above the article to be labeled, and 
means for simultaneously operating the car 
riers and lowering the arms to cause the af 
fixing-rolls to affix the label to the article and 
the carriers to move out of the path of said 
affixing-rolls, substantially as described. 
22. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
With a frame, a bed-plate, a label-holder 
mounted on the frame, and means for advanc 
ing a label through the frame, of carriers 
adapted to receive the label and support, the 
same above the article to be labeled, loops in 
forming a part of said carriers, the affixing 
rolls, the arms supporting said affixing-rolls, 
the cross-bars on the said arms and operating 
in the loops, and means for lowering said arms 
to bring the rolls into contact with the article 
to be labeled, substantially as described. 
23. In a labeling-machine, the combination. 
With a frame, a label-holder, and means for 
advancing the label through the frame, of car 
riers provided with slotted holders to receive 
the label, and means for reciprocating said 
carriers back and forth in the frame to carry 
the label from the advancing means into po 
sition above the article to be labeled, sub 
stantially as described. 
24. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
With a frame, a label-holder mounted on 
the frame, and means for advancing a label 
through the frame, of a bed-plate having slots 
therein, a plate arranged beneath the bed 
plate and having lugs projecting up through 
Said slots, the bases pivotally mounted on said 
lugs, the arms secured on said bases, the 
holders carried by said arms and adapted to 
receive a label and support the same above the 
article to be labeled, and adjusting devices in 
Said holders to adapt the holders to receive 
labels of different sizes, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
25. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
With a frame having a bed-plate, a label-holder 
mounted On the frame, and means for advanc 
ing a label through the frame, of affixing-rolls, 
a plate arranged beneath the bed-plate, the 
arms pivoted on said plate and carrying the 
affixing-rolls, the carriers adapted to support 
a label above the article to be labeled, a plate 
arranged beneath the bed-plate and provided 
With lugs extending up through slots in the 
bed-plate, the bases mounted on said lugs and 
Supporting the carriers, and means connected 
With the plates beneath the bed-plate and 
adapted to actuate the same to operate the 
O 
25 
35 
55 
 
S 
606,745 
35 
45 
55 
arms, a vertically-operating bar at connected 
to said plate, and yielding devices intermcdi 
ate of the shaft, and said ba', whereby the 
shaft is l'otated as the bar is lowered, Sub 
stantially as and for the purpose described. 
33. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
with a frame, and meals for advancing a la 
bel therethrough, of horizontal reciprocating 
carriers adapted to receive the label and sup 
port the same in position above the article to 
be labeled, vertical reciprocating a fixing 
rolls, arms supporting said a fixing-rolls and 
means for operating the same and connections 
botween said arms and the carriers, whereby 
the carriers are thrown out of the path of the 
affixing-rolls as the latter descend to affix the 
label to the article, substantially as described. 
34. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
with a frame, and means for advancing a la 
bel therethrough, of horizontally-reciprocat 
ing carriers adapted to receive a label from 
the advancing means, vertically-reciprocat 
ing affixing-rolls, arms supporting said affiX 
ing-rolls and normally holding the carriers 
in their proper position to receive and sup 
port the label and operating to throw said 
carrie's out of the path of the affixing-rolls 
while the latter are in operation, and means 
for operating said carriers and affixing-rolls, 
substantially as described. 
F. C. II. STIRASBUIR (EIR. 
Witnesses: 
NICHOLAS GLAT3, 
J. P. FIRANTZEN. 
5 
IO 
15 
25 
with the label and on each side of the article, 
Substantially as described. 
30. In a labelling-machino, the combination 
with a frame, and means for advancing a la 
bel therethrough, of a fixing-rolls normally 
arranged above the article to be labeled, arms 
Supporting Said a fixing-rolls, carriers pro 
vided with holders adapted to receive the 
label and support it in position above the 
article to be labeled, and adjusting devices 
On Said holders whereby the carriers can be 
changed to suit labels of different sizes, sub 
stantially as described. 
31. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
With a frame, and means for advancing a la 
bel therethrough, of carriers adapted to sup 
port a label above the article to be labeled, 
and comprising guide-arms bent to form loops, 
the Supporting-arms and the holders carried 
by Said supporting-arms and provided with 
slots to receive the labels, substantially as do 
scribed. 
32. In a labeling-machine, the combination 
With a frame, and means for advancing a la 
bel therethrough, a bed-plate, carriers adapt 
ed to receive and support the label above the 
article to be labeled, a plate arranged below 
the bed-plate and provided with lugs extend 
ing up through slots in said bed-plate, a shaft 
journaled in bearings in the frame, gearing 
devices intermediate of said shaft and said 
plate, whereby the latter is reciprocated as 
the shaft rotates, the affixing-rolls, the arms 
supporting said rolls, a plate U carrying said 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606845.txt	7. 
No. 606,845. 
(No Model.) 
J. H. SMMONS 
FOLDING TABLE. 
(Application filed July 16, 1897.) 
Patented July 5, 1898. 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
722eserer 
 
No. 606,845. 
(No Model.) , 
J. H. SIMMONs. 
FOLDING ABLE. 
(Application filed July 16, 1897.) 
Patented July 5, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
f 
2Z 
2 
 
 
 
 
3. 
SN ESWEA 
Enz/Ea 
 
renee 
Ee M 
2 
4 
2 
a 
przes es 
a.(2% 
Z72/2Zea7. 
o/22/Z.c5222222207&s. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN H. SIMMONS, OF WARREN, PENNSYLVANIA. 
FOLDING TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 606,845, dated July 5, 1898. 
Application filed July 16, 1897, Serial No. 644,814. (No model.) , 
55 
- - 
. 
To all whom it invay concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN H. SIMMONs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at War 
ren, in the county of Warren and State of 
Pennsylvania, have invented new and useful 
Improvements in Folding Tables, of which 
the following is a specification. 
- 
This invention relates to folding tables; 
and it consists in features of construction and 
novel combinations of parts, as hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
In the annexed drawings, illustrating my 
improvements, Figure1 is a perspective of my 
improved folding table, showing the arrange 
ment and manner of securing the legs when 
the table is unfolded. Fig. 2 is a longitudi 
nal Section of the upper portion of the table. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view of the table infolded 
position. Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail view 
illustrating a modification in the form of the 
guide and attached spring-catch for securing 
the legs of the table in unfolded position. 
Fig. 5 is an enlarged sectional view of a roller 
mounted on the round or bar that connects 
the upper ends of a pair of folding legs. 
The table-top (designated by the reference 
numeral 1) has preferably secured to its un 
der side toward one edge a pair of blocks, lugs, 
or bearings 2, to which a pair of legs 3 may 
be hinged or pivoted. These legs 3 carry on 
pivots 4 another pair of legs 5, which are se 
curely connected and braced by a cross-bar 
6 at the point of pivotal connection between 
the two pairs of legs. As an additional means 
of bracing there may be provided brackets 7 
in the angles formed by the legs 5 and the 
said connecting cross-bar. At their upper 
ends the legs 5 are connected by a round or 
Cross-bar 8, that is adapted to slide in a guide 
way provided between the under side of the 
table-top and a guide-bar 9, the ends of which 
are secured to the table-top, as shown. 
In Figs. 1, 2, and 3 the round or bar 8 is 
shown as having a circumferential groove 10, 
corresponding with the width of the guide 
bar 9 and engaged with the edges of said 
guide-bar, so that all lateral sway of the legs 
will be prevented in folding or unfolding the 
table. This construction also braces the ta 
ble-legs in such manner as to avoid any tor 
sional strain on the pivots 4, whether the ta 
ble is folded or unfolded or in adjusting it 
from the one position to the other. There 
may be provided in the guide-bar 9 a longi 
tudinal slot 11, that affords a housing for a 
spring-catch 12, one end of which is secured 
to the under side of the said guide-bar. The 
free portion of this spring-catch 12 consti 
tutes a bend that projects upward through 
the guide-bar slot 11 in such manner as to 
bear against the round 8 when the table is 
unfolded, as in Figs. 1 and 2, and thus locks 
the table-legs rigidly in unfolded position, so 
as to form a firm support for the table-top. 
When the unfolded legs are thus secured, the 
table can be safely lifted by its top and moved 
from place to place without slipping or dis 
arrangement of the legs, as is often the case 
with folding tables. 
In order to fold the table, it is only neces 
sary to draw down the spring - catch 12 by 
catching hold of its end 13, thereby releas 
ing the round 8 from the locking-pressure of 
said catch, and then the legs 3 and 5 may be 
moved to a position parallel with the table 
top, as shown in Fig. 3, the round 8 mean 
while sliding rearward along the guide-bar 9 
and with the groove 10 in engagement with 
the edges of said guide-bar, so as to obviate 
lateral swaying of the legs and avoid any 
tendency to twisting at the pivotal connec 
tions. . At one end of the guide-bar 9 there is 
a spring-catch 14 to engage a lug or projec 
tion 15 on the cross-bar 6 when the table 
legs are folded together, thus holding the 
table in secure and compactly-folded position 
for transportation and storage. 
The round 
or cross-bar 8 slides easily and freely along 
the guide-bar 9 in folding and unfolding the 
table, and by its engagement with said guide 
bar the table-legs are most effectually braced 
and strain on the pivots prevented. By 
means of the slot 11 in the guide-bar 9 the 
spring-catch 12 is housed in such manner as 
to protect it from injury and yet permit it to 
exert the most effective locking action on the 
round 8 when the table is unfolded. 
Instead of providing the guide-bar 9 with 
a spring-catch, such as 12, there may be se 
cured to said guide-bar a spring-catch 16, Fig. 
4, consisting of a single piece of wire formed 
into two coiled springs 17, having loop ends 
fastened to the guide-bar 9 by means of studs 
18 on its under side. The two main arms of 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
606,845 
the springs project upward at the sides of 
the guide-bar 9 in position to exert locking 
pressure on the round S, and they are con 
nected in front by a cross-bar 19, that affords 
a finger-hold for depressing the spring-catch 
to release the round S when it is desired to 
fold the table. 
A roller 20, Fig. 5, may be mounted in the 
circumferential groove 10 of the round S to 
diminish friction in running along the guide 
bar 9, and the ends of this roller will be 
provided with flanges 21, between which the 
guide-bar is engaged or received to prevent 
lateral movement of the table-legs. To fa 
cilitate mounting this roller 20, the round S 
may be formed in two parts, jointed together, 
as in Fig. 5, after the roller is placed in posi 
tion. 
The fastenings for the table-legs are simple, 
not liable to get out of order, and will hold 
the table parts securely whether folded or un 
folded. 
What I claim as my invention is 
In a folding table, the combination with the 
table-top, of a pair of legs having hinged or 
pivotal connection with the under side of the 
table-top, another pair of legs pivotally at 
tached to the first-named pair of legs and coll 
nected by a cross-bar at the said point of piv 
otal attachment and by a round at the lipper 
ends of said legs, a guide-bar Secured to the 
under side of the table-top, a roller mounted 
on the said round and having flanged ends 
engaged with the edges of said guide-bar to 
prevent lateral movement of the legs, a Spring 
catch mounted on said guide-bar to engage 
the round and lock the table in unfolded 
position, and a spring-catch at one end of the 
said guide-bar to engage the cross-bar located 
between the pivotal connection of the legs 
and secure the folded table, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto Set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit 
(SSOS. 
35 
JOIN II. SIMMONS. 
Witnesses: 
O. II. IIOLD RIDGE, 
SUMNER. E. ORR. 
O 
2O, 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US606945.txt	No. 606,945. 
(No Mode.) 
Patented July 5, 1898. 
W. SMITH & E. J. GOUL). 
BUGGY, OR WAGON WRENCH. 
(Application filed Nov 20, 1897.) 
28two seco 
al Ce(3. 
%2f daa-. 
w 
4. 
l/l/atg8. 
Edwind aould. 
74.1 eletovavy 
HENRIs PE reas co. Photo-LTHo., washington, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WATSON SMITH AND EDWIN J. GOULD, OF VALMONT, COLORADO. 
BU GGY OR WAG O N WREN C-. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 606,945, dated July 5, 1898. 
Application filed November 20, 1897, Serial No. 659,266, (No model.) 
To all tuhon, it nozy concert: 
Be it known that we, WATSON SMITH, and 
EDWIN.J. GOULD, citizens of the United States, 
residing at Valmont, in the county of Boulder 
and State of Colorado, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Buggy or 
Wagon Wrenches; and we do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to make and use the same. 
Our present invention relates to a novel 
wrench, and has for its object the production 
of a device of this character which can be 
quickly adjusted to any size of nut, bolt-head, 
or other object to be turned and which when 
so adjusted may be employed as an ordinary 
wrench-crank to effect the removal of the 
part. 
To the accomplishment of this and other 
objects our invention consists in providing a 
pair of pivoted members with a pair of clamp 
ing-jaws extending Substantially at right an 
gles to the members and in providing means 
for adjusting the pivotal connection between 
the members and a screw for securely clamp 
ing the jaws upon the object, and, further, in 
providing one of the members upon its end 
opposite the jaws with the handle, extending 
at right angles thereto in a direction opposite 
the said jaWS. 
In the drawing we have illustrated in per 
spective the Wrench complete. 
1 indicates the main handle of the Wrench, 
provided at one end with a jaw 2, extending 
at right angles thereto and at a suitable dis 
tance from said jaw with Spaced bearing-lugs 
3, provided with a longitudinal series of bear 
ing-apertures 4, designed to receive a pivot 5 
in the form of a bolt passing through a bear 
ing-lug 6, extending laterally from the mov 
able member or handle 7 and also fitting be 
tween the lugs 3, said last-named handle be 
ing provided, like the member 1, with a right 
angular jaw S, designed to be urged toward 
the jaw 2 by an adjustment and clamping 
screw 9, passing through the member 1 and 
bearing against the handle of the member 7, 
which extends substantially parallel to the 
main handle, any suitable means being pro 
vided for actuating the screw-as, for in 
stance, a winged head 10. The jaws are pro 
vided upon their inner or contiguous faces 
with angular depressions or recesses 11 to 
facilitate the bite upon the object to be oper 
ated upon. 
12 indicates a securing-nut on the bolt 5. 
A suitable grip or crank-handle 13 is pro 
vided upon the handle of the member 1 for 
the purpose of permitting the device to be 
used as a crank in a manner well understood 
in the art, the said crank-handle extending 
at a right angle to the main handle in the op 
posite direction from the jaw 2. 
It will be observed that the jaws may be 
firmly clamped upon the object to be rotated 
by the adjusting-screw, or if the throw of the 
movable jaw is insufficient or is too great the 
proper adjustment of the parts may be ef 
fected by employing any one of the series of 
bearing-apertures for the reception of the bolt 
5, and when thus applied the operator by 
grasping the handle 13 may quickly screw or 
unscrew the object to be turned by employing 
the Wrench as an ordinary crank. By remov 
ing the bolt 12 the two handles may be ad 
justed relatively to each other and in parallel 
planes for varying the primary distance be 
tween the two jaws. 
What We claim is 
In a wrench, a fixed member embodying a 
handle provided at its opposite ends with a 
jaw and crank-handle, both extending at 
right angles to the member and in opposite 
directions, and spaced bearing-lugs on the 
fixed member provided with a series of bear 
ing-apertures extending lengthwise of the 
handle, in combination with a movable mem 
ber embodying a handle extending parallel 
to the main handle and provided with a jaw 
and With a bearing-lug fitting between the 
lugs on the main handle, a removable pivot 
passing through said lug and through One of 
the bearing-apertures and providing for the 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
9o 
 
2 
606,945 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
WATSON SMITH. 
EDWIN J. GOULD. 
Witnesses: 
JAMES A. KING, 
E. W. POMEROY. 
relative adjustment of the handles in parallel 
planes for primarily changing the distance 
between the fixed and movable jaws and set 
ting them the desired distance apart, and a 
screw for forcing the handles apart and hold 
ing the jaws relatively fixed and in clamping 
engagement with the object between them, 
Substantially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607046.txt	No. 607,046. 
(No Model.) 
F. A. JOHNSON. 
TYPE JUSTIFYING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Mar. 17, 1897.) 
Patented July 12, 1898. 
4 -2 
2. 
5 Sheets-Sheet . 
Al- 
I-4 
E. s l- 62. 
id- 
t 
. 
3 \ 
w V O837 
64 NPS 
as 
64-48 a 1577263? 
II. 
29 5O i--d- 
4. 
(S 63 
--- 
Es---------- 
- 
Z06 
s 
7 
f 
37 
62 
30 
: 
3. 
28 /AAA 
--- 4:2.4.Yas----37 
96 (6. i.e. 
e 72 
siana 
e 
"pw 
7 27 
99 W. 
94 
2 
83-- 
981 L, 
SR 7 
84. s 
es 
*: 
as N 
23 
Inve rt OY 
Zerz-%/6%. 
Fi 
95 
2O 
- - - - - 
22 
72-seats 3-S2-A-Fel 
37 
Witress E S- 
2/87%ae) 
the NortRis Peters co., Photo-th., was:INSTON, D. c. 
 
No. 607,046. 
(No Model.) 
F. A. JOHNSON. 
TYPE JUSTIFYING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Mar. 17, 1897.) 
Patented July 12, 1898. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 2 
I-7 
Wit. ESSES : 
2. 
Fig. Irtysor. 
-17% 7%/ 2% 
 
renoRiis Peters co., Photo-Tho., was Nation... c. 
No. 607,046. 
(No Model.) 
F. A. JOHNSON. 
TYPE JUSTIFYING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Mar. 17, 1897.) 
Api 
Patented July 12, 1898. 
5. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
d 
47 
79 26 
Witnesses. 
27%ze- 
6/42.426 
Irventor. 
/zz e-W4/0%re 
5, %2%.e. 
the NORRIS Peters co. Photo-Lithd., WASHINGTCN. O. C. 
 
No. 607,046. 
(No Model.) 
F. A. JOHNSON. 
s Patented July 12, 1898. 
TYPE JUSTIFYING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Mar. 17, 1897.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
Fig. 
E. Norris PETERs coacTC-L-I-C. WASHNSTON. O. c. 
 
No. 607,046. 
(No Model.) 
F. A. JOHNSON. 
TYPE JUSTFYING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Mar. 17, 1897.) 
Patented July 12, 1898. 
- 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5, 
Fi E. 
- Zo (s 
as 
5-34o 
3. 
 
s 
as 
2. 
s 
76 a 
/ 
1 
36 
 
17 
MY 1. 
22222 22 
 
 
s 
Wit. ESSES. H-7 Irystics. 
4e) 27.7%- 
waz w//w 
474.44% 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK AMOS JOHNSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO 
TIE JOHNSON TYPESETTER COMPANY, OF PORTLAND, MAINE. 
TYPE-JUSTIFYING MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,046, dated July 12, 1898. 
Application filed March 17, 1897, 
Serial No, 628,026, (No model.) 
5 
IO 
25 
To all, whon it nuclf concern: 
Be it known that I, FRANKAMOS JOHNSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia, 
and State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer 
tain new and useful Improvements in Type 
Justifying Machines, of which the following 
is a specification. 
The present invention consists in improve 
ments in justifying mechanism for type-set 
ting machines. 
To facilitate the description and illustra 
tion of the invention, I have shown it as ap 
plied to the machine embodied in my Patent 
No. 584,362, dated June 15, 1897, granted on 
application, Serial No. 613,973, filed Novem 
ber 30, 1896. In said application there is 
illustrated and described a complete type-set 
ting machine having a justifying mechanism 
which cuts the justifying-spaces from a con 
tinuous strip of metaland inserts them in the 
assembled lines in lieu of temporary spaces, 
which are placed between the words by the 
assembling mechanism. 
In the present application several improve 
ments in justifying mechanism are embodied, 
Some of which are of general application in 
justifiers and others of which are applicable 
especially to justifiers for type-setting ma 
Chines. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan View of a portion of a type-setting ma 
chine sufficient to illustrate the present in 
vention. Fig. 2 is a section on the line 22 
Fig. 3 is a front elevation, partly 
of Fig. 1. 
in section, on the line 33 of Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is 
a section on the line 4 4 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 5 is 
a section on the line 55 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 6 is 
a perspective view showing the relative po 
sitions of a number of the parts. Fig. 7 is a 
section on the line 77 of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 8 is a 
section on the line S S of Fig. 4, and Fig. 9 is 
a detail. 
Any suitable assembling mechanism may 
be utilized in connection with the presentin 
vention -for instance, that shown in my 
patent before mentioned. For the purpose 
of the present specification it will be assumed 
that lines of type t, provided with temporary 
spaces S, slightly longer than the type and of 
normal thickness, are placed on ways 1 ahead 
of a follower 2, which follower transfers the 
type along the ways to the justifying mech 
anism. In the patent referred to I have de 
scribed mechanism for assembling type and 
temporary Spaces and transferring the assem 
bled lines onto Ways in front of the follower 
and also mechanism for justifying and for 
transferring the justified lines along the said 
Ways to the galley. The present specification 
Will be limited to the intermediate mechan 
ism necessary for removing the temporary 
spaces and inserting final or justifying spaces 
as the type are being transferred from the 
assembling mechanism to the galley. 
The mechanism is mounted on a suitable 
base or table A, parts being supported by a 
standard C. Beneath the base is a power 
shaft P, supported in hangers p, and an es 
cape-shaft E, supported in hangers e. The 
power-shaft is driven continuously by a pull 
ley p', and the escape-shaft is driven inter 
mittently by means of the clutch F, con 
structed as follows: On the power-shaft is a 
pinion 3, which meshes With a gear 4, run 
ning idly on the escape-shaft. On one face 
of the gear 4 is a crown-ratchet 5, and mounted 
in a transverse slot in the shaft E is a pawl 
6, which when released is drawn into en 
gagement With the ratchet-Wheelby means of a 
spring 7, Figs. 4 and 8. The pawl is normally 
held out of engagement with the ratchet 
wheel by means of the stop-arm 8, which is kept 
in the path of the pawl by a spring 9. As 
shown, the pawl is released by means of a 
key 10, connected to the stop-lever S. When 
the key is depressed, the pawl 6 springs into 
engagement With the constantly - moving 
ratchet-wheel, and the escape-shaft is there 
by carried around with the wheel. Upon re 
leasing the key the stop-arm, which is pro 
vided with a cam-surface, throws the pawl 
out of engagement With the ratchet, and the 
escape-shaft instantly stops. The several 
cams are mounted upon the power-shaft and 
the escape-shaft. 
When a line of type temporarily spaced 
and of approximately the proper measure is 
in position on the ways in front of the foll 
lower 2, the line-key is depressed momenta 
55 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
35 
45 
 
2 
607,046 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
rily and the escape-shaft is permitted to make 
one revolution. The first operation is the 
measurement of the line, which is effected 
automatically as follows: Upon a vertically 
movable yoke 11, which embraces the ways 1, 
is mounted an abutment consisting of a pair 
of stops 12. These stops are attached to ad 
justable blocks 13, which fit in grooves 14 in 
the sides of the yoke and are held against 
longitudinal movement by pins 15, which en 
gage transverse notches 16 in the yoke. The 
yoke 11 is carried by a sliding rod 17, which 
is moved vertically by a roll 18, resting upon 
a cam 19 on the escape-shaft. As soon as 
the said shaft starts the abutments are raised 
above the ways, and they are held in this po 
sition to intercept the line until after the 
measurement of the line is effected. The line 
is pressed forcibly against the abutment 12 
by means of a compacting-head 20, Figs. 2 
and 6, carried on a block 21, which slides in 
grooves in the lower part of the Ways 1. The 
compacting-head is drawn to the left after 
the abutment rises by means of a cord 22, 
passing over pulley 23 and connected to the 
flexible lever 24, which is operated by a roll 
25 and calm 26. When the cord 22 is drawn 
down, the compacting-head 20 engages a pro 
jection 27 upon the slide 28, which carries 
the follower-head, Figs. 2, 4, and 6, and draws 
the follower over, thus compacting the line 
between the follower and the abutment 12. 
This operation measures the line. The meas 
lurement of the line is transferred to a gage 
29, the position of which determines the width 
of the final spaces. It will be evident that 
this width depends upon the number of word 
spaces in the line as well as upon the total 
variation of the line from the desired length 
or column measure. In other words, the to 
tal amount required to be added to or sub 
tracted from the line must be divided by the 
number of word-spaces in the line in order to 
set the gage for the production of justifying 
spaces of equal length. This division is ac 
complished by means of a series of levers acy 2, 
&c., pivoted to a stationary part 30 by means 
of pivots ac' y' 2", &c., arranged, respectively, 
at one-half, one-third, one-fourth, &c., of the 
lengths of the levers from their rear ends. 
The said rear ends engage a series of pins act 
y 2, &c., upon a slide 31, carrying the gage, 
when the levers are rendered operative. In 
order to render a lever operative, push-pins 
acy 2 are carried by the compacting-slide 21. 
These pins correspond to the number of word 
spaces in the line. As shown, they are 
adapted to be operated by hand; but in prac 
tice it will be advisable to use mechanism for 
setting one of them automatically after the 
composition of each line. 
The operation of measuring the line and 
setting the gage is as follows: Assuming that 
the line has four words, and therefore three 
word-spaces, the push-pin 2 is pressed in, as 
shown in Fig. 6. The line-key 10 is then de 
pressed, the escape - shaft starts, the abut 
ments 12 are raised, the flexible lever 24 
draws down the cord 22, and the compacting 
head is drawn against the follower, thus Com 
pacting the line between the follower and the 
abutment. The parts are so arranged that 
the movement of the compacting-head corre 
sponds to the amount to be added to or sub 
tracted from the line in order to bring it to 
the desired measure. This total variation pro 
duces in the instance under consideration a 
movement of the gage equal to one-third of 
the movement of the compacting-head due to 
the location of the fulcrum of the lever 2, 
which is operated upon by the push-pin 2'. 
When the gage is set in the above-described 
manner, it is immediately locked by a pair of 
wedges 32 33, which engage a projection 34 
These wedges 
on the back of the gage-slide. 
are normally supported by a rod 35, having a 
T-shaped head, and immediately after the 
gage is set by the lever the rod 35 is dropped, 
permitting the wedges to fall by gravitation. 
The wedges have pins 3637, which are en 
gaged by the T-head, the pin 36 on the right 
hand wedge being situated so that its wedge 
33 takes effect first, thus preventing the gage 
slide being drawn away from the lever before 
it is locked. The wedges are weighted by 
blocks 36 37. The wedge-lifter 35 is oper 
ated by a lever 38, rod 39, lever 40, and cam 
41. When the escape-shaft is at rest, the 
wedges are down. As the shaft begins to re 
volve the Wedges are raised. The gage is 
then set, and the wedges again drop to lock 
the gage before the shaft comes to rest. 
Space-casting mechanism.-The spaces are 
cast in a mold 42, consisting of upper and 
lower parts 43 44 and a divided body-piece 
forming the two sides of the mold-cavity. The 
two parts of the body-piece are relatively ad 
justable. One part 46 is rigidly connected to 
a body-slide 47, which extends through an 
opening in the lower part of the mold. The 
movable part 48 of the body-piece is connect 
ed to the end of the body-slide by a spring 49, 
which normally draws it against a projection 
50 upon the end of the body-slide. The gage 
29 is forked, and the body-slide passes be 
tween its prongs. When the slide is moved 
to the right, the body-piece 4S abuts against 
the gage and is drawn away from the projec 
tion 50, thus decreasing the mold-opening be 
tween the parts 46 and 48, the width of the 
opening depending upon the position of the 
gage. The body-slide is operated by means 
of a lever 51, having on its lower end a roll 
52, which is pressed against a cam 53 on the 
power-shaft by means of a spring 54. 
In the rear of the mold is a melting-pot 54 
of ordinary construction, provided with a 
burner 55 and pump 56. The pump-plunger 
is operated by a lever 57, connecting-rod 58, 
and lever 59, resting on a cam 60, the rod 58 
being normally drawn down by a spring 61. 
It is necessary that the pump be operated 
only when a space is required in the line, and 
to accomplish this the lever 59 when raised 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
55 
 
607,046 
3 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
25 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
is latched up by a spring-pressed hook 62. 
At the proper time this hook is withdrawn 
and the pump operated by the spring 61, as 
will be hereinafter explained. 
The pump consists in a hollow plunger O', 
fitting in the bottom of the melting-pot and 
having an opening O' to a well O below the 
plunger and a second opening O" communi 
cating with the metal in the pot 54. Within 
the plunger is the pump-rod O', which passes 
through the top of the plunger and is con 
nected with the lever 57. This rod is pro 
vided with a collar O', which engages a yoke 
O', connected with the plunger, and draws 
the plunger up when the rod is raised. The 
plunger is prevented from being drawn too 
far by a stout bar O, extending across the top 
of the pot. A channel O'leads from the well 
O to the mold. When the plunger is being 
raised, the metal runs freely through it into 
the well, Fig. 7. When the pump-rod is de 
pressed, however, it first closes the lower ap 
erture in the plunger and then depresses the 
plunger, injecting the metal forcibly through 
the channel O' into the mold. After the space 
is cast the body-slide moves to the left and 
the part 48 carries the space out of the mold 
to a position opposite a channel 63, through 
which the space is carried from the mold into 
the assembled line of type. The space is 
transferred through the channel by means of 
a finger 64 upon a rack 65, which is operated 
by a gear 66, vertical rack, and slide 67, said 
slide having a roll 68 resting on a cam 69. 
The slide 67 is normally drawn down by a 
spring 70. 
The devices for substituting the final for the 
temporary spaces are as follows: The line is 
drawn to the left continually by a weight 71 
and cord 72, passing over a pulley 73 at the 
end of the way 1. As the line is moved to the 
left under the influence of the weight 71 the 
projecting temporary space encounters the 
prongs of a parting-fork 74 on the constantly 
vibrating push-backlever 75, which is pivoted 
at 76 and has a roll 77, bearing upon the cam 
7S of shaft P, Figs. 3 and 6. The parting-fork 
74 moves to the left and then pushes the 
Spaces and the type at the right of the fork 
to the right, thus parting the line opposite the 
transfer-channel 63 and under a space-receiv 
ing magazine 79, connected to a block 80 above 
the ways. The temporary spaces are pushed 
into the channel by an elevator, hereinafter 
described, and retained by spring-detents 81. 
Directly below the magazine 79 is an elevator 
S2, attached to the slide 83, the elevator proper 
consisting of prongs between which the type 
may pass, but which are close enough to 
gether to engage the ends of the temporary 
spaces. The elevator is operated by a rod 84, 
which is normally drawn down by a spring 85. 
After a space has been pushed back by the 
parting-fork 74 into position over the elevator 
the elevator is raised by means of the pawl 
86, connected to a lever 87, having a roll which 
rests on a cam 88. The pawl 86 usually passes 
idly up and down at the left of a projection 
89 upon the elevator-rod 84, being guided by 
a pin 90, which enters a slot in the pawl, the 
pin being connected to a horizontal slide 91. 
The elevator is only raised when the slide 91 
is moved to the right, carrying the pawl 86 
into line with the projection 89. The slide 
91 has a pin engaging the lower forked end 
of the trigger-lever 92, the lower end of the 
lever and the slide being normally drawn to 
the left by a light spring 93, Fig. 3. The up 
per end of the trigger-lever normally extends 
to the right of the left-hand position of the 
parting-fork 74, and hence when the parting 
fork moves to the left the temporary space 
against it will move the trigger-lever to the 
left and throw the slide 91 to the right, thus 
bringing the pawl 86 into line with the eleva 
tor-rod and operating the elevator. There is a 
yielding connection between the elevator-rod 
84 and the elevator proper, which, as shown, 
consists of a spring 94. This connection pre 
vents the elevator from being damaged in case 
a space should for any reason refuse to enter 
the space-magazine. 
In order to relieve the line from the pres 
sure of the follower while the space is being 
ejected, I provide a ratchet 95 on the follower 
slide, which ratchet is temporarily engaged 
and held by a pawl 96 while the elevator is in 
operation. The pawl is located in a recess 
97, cut in the side of the ways, and it is op 
erated by a link98, connecting the pawl with 
the elevator-rod S4. The rear end of the pawl 
is normally drawn to the left by a Spring 99, 
Fig. 2. The left end of the recess against 
which the pawl bears is formed with a shoul 
der 100. When the elevator is lowered, the 
rear end of the pawl strikes a pin 101 and the 
forward end is withdrawn from the ratchet. 
As the elevator rises the rear end of the pawl 
engages the shoulder 100, and the forward end 
is immediately thrown up into engagement 
The further upward move 
with the ratchet. 
ment of the elevator-rod carries the pawl into 
a horizontal position and raises it over the 
shoulder 100, thus moving the ratchet to the 
right and drawing the follower slightly away 
from the type. 
While the line is parted and the temporary 
space is being removed, the final space is be 
ing cast and inserted in the opening in the 
line. To effect this at the proper time, the 
slide 91 is connected by means of suitable de 
vices with the latch 62, so that at the proper 
moment, when the mold-opening is opposite 
the nozzle of the melting-pot, the latch is 
withdrawn and the pump operated, thus in 
jecting the molten metal into the mold. The 
newly-cast space is immediately moved out 
of the mold and through the transfer-chan 
nel into the line, as heretofore described. 
The connections between the slide 91 and the 
latch 62 consist of a shaft 102, having E. 
arms 103 104 and a connecting-rod 105. 
The 
connecting-rod operates a pivoted arm 106 
upon a cam-lever 107, which is operated by 
. 
55 
 
4. 
607,046 
55 
 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
the cam 60, Figs. 1, 3, and 5. The arm 106 
is normally held out of line with the hook 62 
by the connecting-rod 105. Each time the 
trigger-lever is operated, however, the arm 
is thrown into line with the hook, and during 
the revolution of the power-shaft the hook is 
disconnected from the lever 59 and the pump 
is operated. 
After the line is measured it is desirable 
that the pressure of the line upon the abut 
lment 12 should be relieved while the albut 
ment is being withdrawn in order to prevent 
the possible disarrangement of the end type. 
To accomplish this end, lever 108, operated 
by a cam 109 on the escape-shaft, engages the 
lower end of the elevator-rod 84 and raises 
said rod during the time when the abutment 
slide is being lowered. This operates through 
the pawl 96 and ratchet 95 to relieve the pres 
sure of the measuring-head upon the line. 
As this operation takes place before the line 
reaches the elevator the raising of the eleva 
tor can do no harm. As shown, the type are 
guided on the ways by rods 110, which engage 
their nicks. 
The operation has been described in detail 
in connection with the foregoing specification 
and need be only briefly recapitulated. The 
line of type and temporary spaces are meas 
ured between the follower and the abutment, 
and at the same time the gage is set by means 
of the proper justifying-lever and locked by 
the wedges. The elevator-rod is then raised 
by lever 108, the follower is moved back to 
relieve the pressure upon the abutment, and 
the abutment is withdrawn from the path of 
the line. The follower is then released and 
the line is carried along by the weight 71 un 
til the first temporary space engages the push 
back lever. As this lever moves forward or 
to the left the line follows it, and when it 
again moves backward it parts the line and 
pushes the space into position over the ele 
vator. The trigger-lever starts the elevator, 
which rises and pushes the temporary space 
into the magazine 79. At the same time the 
trigger-lever releases the pump-rod and a 
space is cast and transferred into the open 
ing in the line. This takes place before the 
elevator moves down. The follower is then 
released and the line again moves forward 
until the next temporary space engages the 
push-back lever. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. In a justifying device for composing-ma 
chines, a series of level's having their fulcra. 
at varying distances from their ends compris 
ing a lever for each possible number of word 
spaces in a line, and means operated by said 
levers for determining the widths of justify 
ing word-spaces. 
2. In a justifying device for composing-ma 
chines, a gage for determining the width of 
justifying-spaces, and a series of levers for 
setting the gage, the fulcra of the levers be 
ing at varying distances from their ends. 
3. In a justifying device for composing-ma 
chines, a gage for determining the width of 
justifying-spaces, a series of levers adapted 
to operate on the gage and having their fulcra. 
at varying distances from their ends, and 
means for measuring a line of type and op 
erating a selected lever in accordance with 
the measurement. 
4. In a justifying device for composing-ma 
chines, a gage for determining the width of 
justifying-spaces, a series of levers adapted 
to set the gage, means for selecting a lever 
corresponding to the number of spaces in the 
line, and means for measuring a line of type 
and operating the selected lever in accord 
ance with the measurement. 
5. In a justifying device for composing-ma 
chines, the combination of the ways, the abut 
ment movable transversely to the ways, the 
follower, the compacting-head, the levers, de 
vices carried by the head for operating the 
levers, and the space-gage adapted to be set 
by said levers. 
6. In a justifying mechanism for compos 
ing-machines, the combination with ways, a 
means for moving a line of type along said 
ways, of a mold having a divided body-piece 
forming two sides thereof, a gage operating on 
one part of said body-piece whereby it is set 
relatively to the other, means for moving 
both parts of said body-piece, and means for 
transferring spaces from the mold to the 
ways. 
7. In a device for casting spaces, the com 
bination with a mold having upper and lower 
fixed sides, of slide 47, divided body-piece 
one part of which is fixed to the slide and the 
other part relatively movable and connected 
by a spring, and the gage for Setting the rela 
tively-movable part. 
8. The combination with the ways and the 
follower, of an elevator, and means for retain 
ing the follower while the elevator is in oper 
ation. 
9. The combination with the ways and the 
follower for moving type along said ways, of 
an elevator, and means for relieving the pres 
sure of the follower upon the type while the 
elevator is in operation. 
10. The combination with the ways, the 
follower, and the ratchet connected to the 
follower, of the elevator, and the pawl con 
nected to the elevator and arranged to engage 
the ratchet when the elevator is raised. 
11. The combination with the ways, the 
follower and the ratchet connected with the 
follower, of the elevator, the pawl, and the 
link connecting the pawl with the elevator, 
said pawl being operated to engage the ratchet 
and move back the follower when the elevator 
is raised and to release the ratchet when the 
elevator is lowered. 
12. The combination with the ways, the 
follower, and the abutment movable trans 
versely to the ways, of means for relieving 
the pressure of the follower upon the type 
while the abutment is being withdrawn. 
75 
9o 
95 
ICO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
607,046 
13. The combination with the typeways 
and the space-receiving magazine, of a space 
elevator, and means for operating the ele 
vator with a yielding pressure. 
14. The combination with the typeWays 
and the space-receiving magazine, of a space 
elevator, a cam for operating the elevator, 
and a yielding connection between the cam 
and the elevator proper. 
15. In a justifying device for composing 
machines, a gage for determining the Width 
of the justifying-spaces, and a Series of le 
vers for setting the gage, the fulcra of the le 
vers being fixed and arranged at one-half, 
one-third, one-fourth, &c., of the length of 
the levers from the ends thereof. 
Io 
16. In a justifying device for composing 
machines, a space-casting mold having a mov 
able wall, a series of levers, the fulcra of the 
levers being at varying distances from their 
ends, connections whereby the movable wall 
of the mold is adjusted by said levers, and 
means for measuring the line of type and op 
erating the selected lever in accordance with 
said measurement. . 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
FRANK AMOS JOHNSON. 
Witnesses: 
GILLISON A. LOTT, 
FRANK EI. MASSEY. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607146.txt	No. 607,46. 
(No Model.) 
J. TURNER. 
RALWAY TRANSFER TABL 
(Application filed June 19, 1896.) 
Patented July 2, 1898. 
s 
Lili 
lunt 
THE Norris ref:Rs co. Phorcy-LTHo., was ecstory, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPII TURNER, OF TILLERY, NORTH CAROLINA. 
RALWAY TRANSFER-TABLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,146, dated July 12, 1898. 
Application filed June 19, 1896, 
To a 27, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOSEPH TURNER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Tillery, 
in the county of Halifax and State of North 
Carolina, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Railway Transfer-Ta 
bles; and I do declare the following to be a 
full, clear, and exact description of the inven 
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the 
art to which it appertains to make and use 
the Same, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, and to the letters of refer 
ence marked thereon, which form a part of 
this specification. 
This invention relates to railway transfer 
tables. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
transfer-table simple in construction, not lia 
ble to get Out of order, whereby cars may be 
moved sidewise from one track to another in 
a short space of time, thus materially econo 
mizing time and labor in the making up of 
trains and in other necessary shifting of cars. 
Further, the object of the invention is to 
provide a transfer-table of such construction 
that cars may be shifted laterally with equal 
facility in either direction and wherein the 
return of the parts of the device to their first 
positions after rising is not necessary. 
With these objects in view the invention 
consists, essentially, of a railway transfer 
table comprising a series of sections pivotally 
connected and carrying tracks supporting 
Wheels on the Sections and two sets of ways 
for the reception of the supporting-wheels, 
the members of the uppersection being curved 
downward at their ends and the members of 
the lower section being curved upward at 
their ends, the ends of the members of the 
respective sets being arranged to overlap. 
Further, the invention consists of a trans 
fer-table comprising a series of sections piv 
otally connected and carrying tracks sup 
porting wheels having V-shaped grooves in 
their treads and mounted on the sections, and 
two sets of ways having angular faces for the 
reception of the Supporting-wheels, the mem 
bers of the upper set being curved downward 
at their ends and the members of the lower 
section being curved upward at their ends. 
Further, the invention consists of an end 
less transfer-table composed of sections, the 
IO 
25 
35 
O 
So 
55 
75 
Serial No. 596,171 (No model.) 
sections being sustained on axles provided 
with supporting-wheels and motors mounted 
on the axles and designed to give motion 
thereto. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure I is an elevation of my transfer-ta 
ble, the surrounding framework, &c., being 
removed in order to show the arrangement of 
the parts, there being five cars shown on the 
table; and Fig. 2 is a transverse section of the 
table. Fig. 3 is a detail view showing the 
V-shaped grooves in the wheels and the cor 
responding track-section. 
In the drawings the letter. A represents the 
sections of which the table is composed, which 
sections are connected to each other pivot 
ally or in any other suitable way which will 
permit independent up-and-down movement 
of the sections. In the form here shown the 
table is shown as composed of a series of axles 
A", haying preferably fixed thereon the sup 
porting-wheels ct, there being in the embodi 
ment of the invention herein shown four of 
the wheels for each axle. The main body of 
each section is composed of beams A, having 
in each end bearings for the axles and per 
mitting the vibration of the beams on the 
axles. Arranged transversely on each set of 
beams or preferably on alternate sets are 
track-sections B of the same gage as the 
tracks from which cars are shifted to the ta 
ble. The supporting-wheels a are flanged to 
retain them in place on their supporting 
ways or are provided in their treads, as shown, 
with V-shaped openings adapted to travel on 
correspondingly-shaped Ways. 
The sections are so connected as to form an 
endless series, and this series is designed to 
move in either direction to shift the cars car 
ried by the sections in either direction. 
The ways C for the support and guidance 
of the Wheels C. are arranged in parallel pairs 
one above the other, there being one pair for 
each set of wheels on the respective sections. 
The bearing-surfaces of the Ways are angu 
lar in cross-section and have a raised center 
to fit into the V-shaped grooves in the wheels 
G. The upper member of each pair of ways 
is provided with downwardly-curved ends c, 
the ends describing a semicircle, and the lower 
member of each pair has an upturned curved 
90 
95 
Od 
 
2 
607,146 
O 
25 
end c' corresponding in curvature to the end 
c of the upper member. The respective 
curved ends of the members are located a dis 
tance apart corresponding to the diameter of 
the supporting-wheels, so that when the lat 
ter pass between the curved ends they are se 
curely held on two sides against displace 
lment. 
The endless carriage hereinbefore described 
is arranged in a position below the tracks of 
a railway and in such position that when one 
of the sections is on the upper Ways the rail 
sections carried thereby will be on a level 
with the rails of the tracks. The tracks of 
a railway used in connection with the trans 
fer-table are arranged at equal distances 
apart and at distances corresponding to the 
spaces between the rails on the sections A. 
The described arrangement permits of the 
moving of cars from any number of tracks 
upon the transfer-table at the same time, and 
as the transfer-table is capable of moving in 
either direction the rapid transfer of cars 
from one track to another by the use of the 
table is rendered easy. The tracks may of 
course extend from one or both sides of the 
table. 
Motion may be imparted to the table in any 
suitable or desirable Way, and as an illustra 
tion of one means of propulsion I have shown 
the alternate axles provided with electric mo 
tors D. These motors are supplied with a cur 
rent of electricity for operating them through 
conductors d, extending from a source of elec 
trical supply, and the turning on and off of 
the current and the direction of the current, 
and consequently the direction of movement 
of the motors, is governed by the switch D*, 
located in the space between the upper and 
lower pairs of ways by which the table is sup 
ported. This space is sufficient for the ac 
commodation of an operator and for any mech 
anism necessary to the operation of the de 
vice. 
In order that cal's may be moved off the ta 
ble without employing a locomotive, I pro 
vide on each side of the table a device con 
sisting of a rope or chain E, provided with a 
hook for attachment to a car, and drum E, 
upon which the rope is to be wound. The 
drum is preferably located beneath the track, 
and the rope or chain passes over a Shea Vee, 
arranged approximately on a level With the 
track. The end of each drum is provided 
with a gear e, in which meshes a pinion e', 
to which pinion motion is imparted by hand 
or by suitable power. The railway-tracks are 
preferably for a short distance from the ta 
ble inclined slightly downward toward the 
table, so that cars may be moved by gravity 
from the tracks to the table. 
It will be clear that any desired number of 
sections may be employed and that the sec 
tions may be of any desired length adapting 
them for the reception of one or more cal's at 
a time. 
IIaving thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letter's 
Patent, is 
1. A transfer-table comprising a series of 
sections pivotally connected and carrying 
tracks, supporting-wheels on the sections, and 
two sets of ways for the reception of the Sup 
porting-wheels, the members of the upper Set 
being curved downward at their ends, and 
the members of the lower set being curved 
upward at their ends, the ends of the mem 
bers of the respective sets being arranged to 
overlap, substantially as described. 
2. A transfer-table comprising a Series of 
sections pivotally connected and carrying 
tracks, supporting-wheels having V-shaped 
grooves in the treads and mounted on the sec 
tions, and two sets of Ways having angular 
faces for the reception of the supporting 
wheels, the members of the upper set being 
curved downward at their ends, and the mem 
bers of the lower set being curved upward 
at their ends, substantially as described. 
3. An endless transfer-table composed of 
sections, the sections being sustained on axles 
provided with supporting-wheels, and motors 
mounted on the axles and designed to give 
motion to the axles, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOSEPI TURNER. 
Witnesses: 
C. P. TILLING, 
J. A. WHITE HEAD. 
55 
75 
95 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607246.txt	G. H. JOHNSON. 
Patented July 12, 1898. 
MOMENTUM WATER WHEEL BUCKET. 
(Application filed July 22, 1897.) 
No. 607,246. 
(No Model.) 
Ay, 7 
93-yvesses, 
%ave 
786e?sed 
 
The NoRRIS PETERs co. Photo-LITHo. washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GE OR GE H. JOHNSON, OF SIS SON, CALIF ORNIA. 
MOMENTUM WATER-WHEEL BUCKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,246, dated July 12, 1898. 
Application filed July 22, 1897, Serial No. 645,541 (No model) 
O 
To all, whom, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, GEORGE H. JoHNSON, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Sis 
Son, county of Siskiyou, State of California, 
have invented an Improvement in Momentum 
Water-Wheel Buckets; and I hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
Scription of the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
buckets for water-wheels of that classin which 
the Water is delivered into the wheel-bucket 
under a high head or pressure, such wheels 
being technically known as hurdy-gurdy 
wheels. 
My invention consists, essentially, in the 
novel construction of the buckets whereby the 
force of the Water is applied continuously and 
alternately to double buckets fixed to the rim 
of the wheel in pairs, side by side, and one in 
advance of the other. 
It also consists in a means for employing 
the reactionary force of the stream and in so 
diverging it from the line of travel that ites 
capes upon opposite sides and clear of the 
Wheel. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is an elevation of my water-wheel. 
Fig. 2 is a cross-section of a pair of buckets 
On line / ), Fig. 3. 
Fig. 3 is a plan view of a 
pair of buckets. 
A is the rim of a wheel, made of any suit 
able size and of any suitable or desired con 
struction. 
The buckets D and D'are preferably cast, 
preSSed, or otherwise formed from iron or steel 
and have the inner ends b made of such shape 
as to fit closely against the periphery of the 
wheel, to which they are bolted successively 
in pairs, extending all the way around the 
wheel. These buckets are formed with One 
bucket approximately the depth of a bucket 
ahead of or below the other of the pair, and 
in Width they are about once and a half the 
diameter of the stream which is delivered into 
them. The buckets project outward from the 
Wheel about two and one-half diameters of 
the stream, and the intervening edge C be 
tween them is made thin and sharp, 
The nozzle B, which delivers the water into 
the buckets, is so placed that the water splits 
or divides on the intervening edge C. This 
edge extends out once and one-fourth the di 
ameter of the stream from the face of the 
wheel, then dividing into two parts, as shown 
atc. These parts gradually diverge from each 
other, and the outer sides of the buckets also 
diverge in the same manner, the end forming 
a continuous curve or oval, as plainly shown. 
By this construction the Water delivered from 
the nozzle under high pressure is split upon 
the dividing edge C, one half being delivered 
into the buckets upon one side and the other 
into the buckets upon the other side, alter 
nately, so as to act continuously on the wheel. 
The bottom of the bucket is a continuous 
curve with the outer end, so that as the water 
strikes into the bucket it follows this curva 
ture, and by reason of the diverging ends of 
the bucket it is discharged over the outer end 
as the wheel revolves and delivered in planes 
at an angle outwardly from the plane of ro 
tation of the wheel. By this construction the 
discharge of the Water is so diverted as to be 
entirely clear of the wheel and all back. ac 
tion or hindrance to its free revolution is 
avoided. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. Water - wheel buckets formed in pairs 
with one bucket in advance of the other, said 
buckets uniting in a common radial plane 
along the adjacent edges, for approximately 
one-half the distance from the inner to the 
outer end, and curving outwardly and inde 
pendently away from each other for the re 
mainder of the distance. 
2. A water-wheel having a double row of 
buckets fixed upon its rim, so that the buck 
ets of one roW stand in advance of those of 
the other row in the direction of travel, the 
adjacent edges of the buckets lying in a come 
mon plane transverse to the axis of the wheel 
for approximately one-half of the bucket 
length outwardly, the buckets separating 
transversely away from each other for the re 
mainder of the distance to the Outer end. 
3. A water - wheel having a double row of 
buckets fixed upon its rim so that the buckets 
in One row stand intermediate between those 
of the other row in the direction of travel with 
the inner edges of both rows of buckets lying 
in the same plane transverse to the axis of 
the wheel, said buckets diverging outwardly 
55 
65 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
3O 
35 
45 
 
2 
607,246 
from each other from a point about half the 
length of the bucket from the rim to which hand. 
they are attached, and a nozzle, the axis of 
which is in line with the plane of the inner 
edges of the buckets whereby water therefrom 
is delivered alternately into the buckets upon 
... 
each side of the wheel. 
' 
Witnesses: 
ALEX ALBEE, 
A. J. KNIGHT. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
GEORGE. H. JOHNSON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607346.txt	No. 607,346. 
(No Model.) 
Patented July 12, 1898. 
J. T. CRAW. 
PAPER PLANT BOX. 
(Application filed Mar. 31, 1898.) 
JWWEMTOR 
of 5 see 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOSEPH. T. CRAW, OFJERSEY CITY, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
THE BROWN & BAILEY COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PAPER PLANT-BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,846, dated July 12, 1898. 
Application filed March 31, 1898, Serial No. 675,889, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon it inva? CO7 ce.77. 
Be it known that I, JOSEPH. T. CRAW, of 
Jersey City,in the county of Hudson and State 
of New Jersey, have invented a new and Im 
proved Paper Plant-Box, of which the follow 
ing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
plant-box made of paper, in which seedlings 
may be grown and young plants reared, and 
to construct the plant-box in the shape of a 
parallelogram, whereby the boxes may be com 
pactly placed upon a growing-table or in a 
cold frame, and whereby, further, the roots of 
the growing plants may be spread to a great 
extent within the boxes, adding materially to 
the strength of the plants. The square form 
of the plant-box also enables the young plants 
to be more economically and Securely packed 
for transportation than When the tapering 
form of pot or box is employed. 
A further object of the invention is to so 
fold the bottom portion of the plant-box that 
an opening for drainage Will be provided and 
whereby the bottom of the box may be ex 
peditiously and conveniently pulled open by 
any one of ordinary intelligence, enabling the 
boxes and the plants they contain to be placed 
in the ground when transplanting, the roots 
remaining undisturbed during the Operation 
and the boxes not interfering in the least with 
the growth of the plants; on the contrary, 
serving to facilitate the growth of said plants 
by reason of the fertilizing material applied 
to the boxes. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure I is a plan view of the blank from 
Fig. 2 is a perspec 
which the box is made. 
tive view of the box, showing the body por 
tion as completely formed. Fig. 3 is a bot 
tomplan view of the box, illustrating portions 
of the flaps carried in position at the bottom 
of the box and others of the flaps as ready to 
be placed in position. Fig. 4 is a bottom plan 
view of the completely-folded box. Fig. 5 is 
a vertical section through the complete box; 
and Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the com 
plete box, illustrating the manner in which 
the box is planted With the plant. 
The blank shown in Fig. 1 is composed of 
four panels, designated, respectively, as A, B, 
C, and D, the panels being in the shape of a 
parallelogram. The panel A, which is one of 
the end panels in the blank, is provided at 
its lower edge With a bottom flap C and at its 
outer vertical edge with a sealing-flap C. The 
panel B is provided with a bottom flap b at 
its lower edge, and the panels C and D are 
similarly provided with bottom flaps, desig 
nated, respectively, as c and d. 
A diagonal slot is produced in each bottom 
flap, preferably where the bottom flaps con 
nect with the body-panels and at or near the 
longitudinal center of the bottom flaps. The 
slots are designated, respectively, as 10, II, 12, 
and 13, the slot 10 being in the bottom flap c. 
and the slot 13 in the bottom flap d. At the 
Outer end of the bottom flap C, a recess 14 is 
made, extending from the upper edge to the 
bottom edge or from one longitudinal edge to 
the other, the recess being usually of concave 
form, and a semicircular and smaller recess 
15 is made, preferably, in the lower longitudi 
nal edge of the said bottom flap C. At or near 
the top of the end body-panel D an angular 
or A slot 16 is produced, the slot being usually 
near the upper edge of the panel D and is 
made to extend through its outer longitudinal 
edge, forming thereby a triangular tongue 17. 
In the corresponding end of the opposite body 
panel A an L-slot 18 is made, which is lower 
down than the slot 16, the -slot producing a 
tongue 19, which may be much longer than 
shown in the blank, if desired. 
The end panels of the body of the box may 
be connected by stitching, for example, or wire 
staples may be employed, or the end body 
panels of the blank may have an interlocking 
connection, as shown in Fig. 2. When the 
end panels of the box are to be connected by 
staples, the tongues 17 and 19 and the slots 
16 and 18 are omitted from the blank. 
In forming the box-body the end or body 
flap a' is bent upon its score-line to stand at 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
9o 
95 
OO 
2 
607,346 
an angle to the panel A, as is particularly 
shown in Figs. 2 and 5. Each panel is then 
bent upon the score-line dividing it from the 
next, and the various body-panels are brought 
into position to produce a figure representing 
a parallelogram, as shown in Fig. 2. After 
the various panels have been brought to po 
sition the side flap a will engage with the in 
ner face of the body-panel D, and the tongue 
17 is carried back of the side flap a', and thence 
outward in direction of the body-panel A. 
Next the panel D is slipped upward until the 
tongue 19 on the flap a shall have passed over 
a side edge of the slot 16 in the panel D, which 
slot forms the aforesaid triangular tongue 17. 
When the body of the box is made up in this 
manner, the blanks may be shipped flat to 
purchasers and expeditiously and conven 
iently set up by them. 
In the formation of the bottom of the box 
the flap d is carried inward at a right angle 
to the panel D to which it belongs, as shown 
in Fig. 3. The flap c is then carried inward 
from the body-panel C and over an end por 
tion of the flap d, a corner of the flap c being 
made to enter the slot 13 in the bottom flap d. 
The flap b is then carried over upon the flap 
c, and a corner of the flap b is made to enter 
the slot 12 in the flap c, as shown in Fig. 4. 
Finally the flap C is carried over upon the 
flap band beneath the opposing flap d, and a 
corner of the flap a is then entered into the 
slot 11 of the flap b, and a corner of the flap 
d is made to enter the slot 10 in the flap a. 
Thus it will be observed that a central drain 
age-opening is provided and the bottom of 
the box is rendered exceedingly stiff, yet the 
construction of the bottom is very simple and 
economic. 
After a plant is in the box and said plant 
is to be transplanted the box need not be 
turned bottom upward to shake out the plant 
or to ascertain how to disconnect the parts of 
the bottom, it simply being necessary to in 
troduce a finger in the recess 15 of the flap C. 
and draw the said flap downward, repeating 
the operation with reference to the opposing 
bottom flap c. The flaps will now stand 
straight down, as shown in Fig. 2. The flaps 
are then bent upward along the outside of the 
body of the box and the box, together with 
the plant and the earth it contains, are in 
troduced into the ground. Thus it will be 
observed that the earth around the plant need 
not be disturbed, nor the roots of the plant. 
Thus the plant is given no setback, but will 
have an uninterrupted growth. 
A fertilizing material may be worked up 
with the Stock from which the blank is to be 
made; but usually the inner face of the blank 
is completely coated with a liquid fertilizer 
which dries upon its surface. This fertiliz 
ing material is of great benefit to the plant 
and facilitates its growth. 
A plant-box of the construction above Set 
forth is particularly adapted for the purpose 
to which it is to be applied, since the boxes 
may be packed close together on a growing 
table or in a cold frame and no space is lost. 
The roots of the plants may spread much 
more than in a pot or box of tapering form, 
and consequently the plants will be hardier, 
and in transportation the boxes containing 
the plants may be packed together to form a 
square parcel, and one will act as a support 
to the others, and consequently the dirt will 
not be disturbed around the roots. Even if 
a single box is shipped its rectangular shape 
preserves the plant against bad usage to a 
great extent. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a paper plant-box, a blank comprising 
a series of panels of the shape of a parallelo 
gram, one of the end panels being provided 
with a side flap, and all of the said panels be 
ing provided with rectangular flaps at their 
lower edges, each of the said bottom flaps be 
ing provided with a diagonal slot between its 
ends, for the purpose specified. 
2. In paper plant-boxes, a blank consisting 
of a series of body-panels having the shape 
of a parallelogram, each body-panel being 
provided with a bottom flap at its lower edge 
and one of the side panels being provided 
with a vertical flap at its outer edge, the said 
vertical flap being provided with an angular 
slot at its edge, forming a tongue, the oppo 
site end panel of the body being provided 
with an angular slot producing a triangular 
tongue, each of the bottom flaps having a 
diagonal slot made therein, all of the slots 
having the same inclination, and the bottom 
flap of one of the end panels being provided 
with recessed edges, for the purpose set forth. 
3. A rectangular paper plant-box, the bot 
tom whereof consists of flaps extending from 
the lower edges of the body-panels, each of the 
said bottom flaps being provided with a diago 
nal slot arranged to receive the corner por 
tion of an adjacent overlapping flap, a drain 
age-opening being provided at the central 
portion of the body and bounded by the bot 
tom flaps, for the purpose set forth. 
JOSEPH. T. CRAW. 
Witnesses: 
J. FRED. ACKER, 
EVERARD BOLTON MARSHALL. 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
I C5 
O 
IO 
25 
45 
So 
55 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607446.txt	No. 607,446. 
W. MORGANS. 
Patented July 19, 1898. 
WNDING AND HAULING ENGINE. 
(Application filed Dec. 6, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
o 
an ae 
Q) 
S 
i 
A 
M//7/WASSAS 
WM/WAM/7(2A7. 
 
No. 607,446. 
W. MORGANS. 
Patented July 9, 1898. 
WINDING AND HAULING ENGINE. 
(Application filed Dec. 6, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
im 
//7/VASSAS, 
My/A7/7 OAR, 
... 
the Norris Peters co. PHero-LITHQ, washingtoN. p. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM MORG ANS, OF LONDON, ENGLAND. 
WINDING AND HAULING ENGINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,446, dated July 19, 1898. 
Application filed December 6, 1897, Serial No. 660,887, (No model.) Patented in England September 10, 1896, No. 20,021, 
To all, whon, it inctly concert: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM MORGANs, a 
Subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at London, England, have invented a cer 
tain new and useful Improvement in Wind 
ing and Hauling Engines, (for which I have 
obtained Letters Patent in Great Britain, 
under date of September 10, 1896, No. 20,021.) 
of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to winding and haul 
ing engines such as are used at collieries and 
Other mines and in other places for like and 
analogous purposes. 
It has for its object to prevent overlapping 
of ropes when Winding in shafts or pits and 
inclines of great depth or length, to obviate 
the employment of drums of the large diam 
eter hitherto necessary in deep winding and 
hauling, and to enable the direction of the 
rope in coiling and uncoiling to be kept at a 
right angle, or approximately so, to the axis 
Of the drum or drums. 
According to this invention the winding or 
hauling drum, with engine or pair of engines 
Or engine With two or more cylinders or elec 
tlic or other motor, which is referred to here 
inafter by the general term engine, is car 
ried on a frame or platform mounted on 
Wheels, for which rails are laid down. To 
Ward each end the drum-shaft carries a Worm. 
The Worm, which is situated toward one end 
Of the drum-shaft, gears with a worm-wheel 
Centered on a shaft which extends longitudi 
nally along the engine-carrying frame or plat 
format oneside thereof. Similarly the worm 
situated toward the opposite end of the drum 
shaft gears with a worm-wheel centered on a 
Shaft eXtending parallel with the other worm 
Wheel shaft, or only one worm and one worm 
Wheel may be employed. In front of the en 
gine-carrying frame or platform and fixed 
apart therefrom is a rack. A similar rack is 
fixed behind the frame. With these racks 
geal pinions carried toward the ends of the 
Worm-wheel shafts, or one rack only may be 
employed. As the drum revolves motion in 
a direction parallel to the axis of the drum is 
imparted to the engine-carrying frame or plat 
form. The extent of such transverse travel 
of the frame depends upon the setting or pro 
portioning of the worm-and-rack gearing, 
Which may be arranged so that the extent of 
travel for each revolution of the drum is equal 
to the diameter of the rope, or the said gear 
ing may be adjusted or set to give a clearance 
or interval between the coils. By the trans 
Verse motion of the engine-carrying frame or 
platform the rope is always maintained in a 
direct line with the plane of the groove of the 
head-gear pulleys, or incline pulleys usually 
provided for carrying the rope, and hence no 
angular strain is set up with respect to said 
pulleys. 
In order to accommodate the steam-pipes 
employed for conveying steam to or from the 
engine to the traversing motion of the engine 
carrying frame or platform, the said pipes 
are made either telescopic or flexible or with 
ball-and-socket swivel or knee joints, or are 
adapted for their office in other like or analo 
gOuS Ways. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure I represents in plan a pair of steam 
Winding or hauling engines mounted upon a 
frame constructed and arranged for move 
ment laterally in accordance with this inven 
tion. Fig. 2 is an end view as seen looking 
to Ward the rear ends of the engine-cylinders. 
Fig. 3 is a side elevation as seen from X, 
Fig. 1. 
The bed-plates C of the pair of engines. A 
are bolted or otherwise secured to girders b, 
transversely situated below the bed-plates 
and fixed to the longitudinal girders c. The 
girders c are Supported upon transverse beams 
d, carrying bearings for the journals of the 
axles of the wheels e, which rest upon railsf, 
extending transversely under the whole 
frame. The drum-shaft g, on which is keyed 
or otherwise secured the winding or hauling 
drum g', carries toward each end a worm h. 
The worms I gear with the worm-wheels i, Se 
cured on shafts fi, supported and free to ro 
tate in brackets f', fixed to the outside trans 
verse girders of the engine-carrying frame or 
in some other suitable position on the same. 
On the shaftsjare keyed or otherwise fixed 
pinions l, which gear with inverted racks k 
that is to say, racks having downwardly-pro 
jecting teeth. The racks lk are bolted to can 
talivers m, fixed in the walls of the engine 
As the drum g' when driven in either di 
rection by the engines A. rotates, lateral mo 
house. 
m 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
3. 
607,446 
5 j, and racks l. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
tion-that is to say, motion in a direction 
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the drum 
is imparted to the engine - carrying frame 
through the worms h, worm-wheels i, pinions 
The travel of the frame on the wheels e 
over the rails f is governed by the setting or 
the proportioning of the worm-and-rack gear 
ing, which may be so arranged that in one 
complete revolution of the drum the extent 
of transverse travel or lateral motion of the 
engine-carrying frame is equal to the diame 
ter of the rope, or the said gearing may be 
adjusted or Set to give a clearance or space 
between the coils of rope. By the transverse 
motion of the engine-carrying frame the rope 
is always maintained in a direct line with the 
plane of the groove of the head-gear pulleys 
or incline pulleys in coiling and uncoiling. 
This obviates angular or side strain with re 
Spect to the said pulleys and corresponding 
friction and Wear of ropes. 
In order to adapt the pipes in for conveying 
Steam or fluid to the engine-cylinders and 
the pipes O for exhaust to fulfil their func 
tions notwithstanding the transverse move 
ments of the engine-carrying frame, the for 
lmer are fitted at required places with steam 
tight swivel-joints n' and the latter with simi 
lar joints o'. Such joints are of a well-known 
kind. 
Among other advantages appertaining to 
this invention it admits, when steam-engines 
are used, of the employment in winding and 
hauling engines of cylinders and drums of 
Smaller diameter than hitherto practicable 
for winding from great depths without over 
lapping of the coils of rope and without un 
duly increasing the length of the engine 
Stroke to raise the load required to be lifted. 
A more advantageous relation is obtainable 
between the piston speed of the engine and 
the speed of the rope, whereby greater 
economy and safety in winding and unwind 
ing and hauling are obtained and the dura 
bility of the rope is increased. 
It is not necessary in all cases to employ 
tWO racks or two worms and two worm-wheels 
in order to traverse the engine - carrying 
frame. It may be done with one rack only 
and With One Worm and one worm-wheel. 
Further, the rack or racks employed need 
not be inverted. The teeth may project up 
Ward, and the pinion or pinions may be situ 
One or more winding-ropes may be worked 
from the same drum. When two ropes are 
used, so that one rope is being wound while 
the other rope is being unwound, the distance 
measured in a line parallel with the axis of 
the drum between the coil being wound and 
the coil being unwound is made to correspond 
With the distance, similarly measured, be 
tween the centers of the pit-cages or trains 
of Wagons to be wound or hauled or between 
the grooves of the head-gear or other pulleys 
over which the ropes are to be guided or car 
5 ated above. 
ried, and as one rope will coil on the drum 
while the other rope uncoils both ropes may 
coil alternately on the same portion of the 
drum. 
Although the drum shown in the appended 
drawings is cylindrical in form, it may be 
made conical or fusiform or a combination of 
any such forms. 
The drum-surface may be provided with a 
spiral groove for the rope to bed in. In such 
case the amount of travelse or lateral motion 
of the engine-carrying frame should be coin 
cident with pitch of the said spiral groove. 
Instead of employing one drum only it is 
obvious that more may be employed. When 
two or more drums are used, they may be ar 
ranged for clutching and unclutching on the 
shaft, or they may be placed on separate 
shafts coupled by connecting-rods or suitable 
gearing. 
Instead of traversing the engine-Caltrying 
frame by means of a rack and pinion the 
lateral motion may be communicated by 
means of a screw having a pitch correspond 
ing with the coils of the rope, or a screw or 
screws of different pitch may be used in con 
nection with toothed wheels suitably geared 
to give the required lateral motion. 
Other arrangements than those herein de 
scribed suitable for constructing a frame or 
platform for carrying the winding machinery 
may be adopted, and it is obvious that other 
motive agents than steam may be employed 
for operating such machinely. 
What I claim is 
1. In winding and hauling engines and in 
combination a platform, an engine and rope 
drum carried thereby, means for supporting 
the platform so that it is capable of move 
ment in a line at right angles to the travel of 
the rope or chain, and means operated by the 
motion of the drum during the winding and 
unwinding of the same for giving a propor 
tioned and regulated motion to the same and 
to the platform and engine while the rope 
coils and uncoils, substantially as described. 
2. In winding and hauling engines and in 
combination, a platform supported So as to 
be capable of movement in a line at right an 
gles to the travel of the rope or chain, an 
engine and rope-drum carried thereby, a worm 
carried by the drum, a worm-wheel engaging 
there with, a shaft in the platform on which 
Such wheel is mounted, a pinion on such shaft, 
and a fixed rack outside of the platform with 
which such pinion engages, the winding and 
unwinding of the drum thus rotating the shaft 
and moving the platform through the medium 
of the pinion and rack, Substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
WILLIAM MORGANS. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP M. JUSTICE, 
All LEN PARRY JONES. 
7 o 
75 
95 
ICC 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I 25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607546.txt	No. 607,546. 
(No Model.) 
A. R. MLNER. 
STORE STOOL. 
(Application filed Mar. 22, 1897.) 
Patented July 19, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 1. 
ZZAZzZaaaaa. 
\\\ 
1. 
ZZZZ/2ZZZZZ. 
THE NORRIS PETERS Co., PHOTOLITHO., WASHNGTON, d, c. 
 
No. 607,546. 
(No Model.) 
A. R. MILNER. 
STORE STOOL. 
(Application filed Mar. .22, 1897.) 
Patented July 19, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
2 
EEEEEE 
Z/Z/7ZZzazaa. 
2-6-2 6-6 
ZzZZ/zzzzzz. 
(247 
THE NORRIS PETERs co. Photo-Litho wash NGTON, D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALBERT R. MILNER, OF CANAL DOVER, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE A. R. 
MILNER SEATING COMPANY, OF CANTON, OHIO. 
STORE-STool. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,546, dated July 19, 1898. 
Application filed March 22, 1897, 
Serial No, 628,706, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, ALBERT R. MILNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Canal 
Dover, in the county of Tuscarawas and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Store-Stools, of which 
the following, with the accompanying draw 
ings, is a full, clear, and exact specification. 
Myinvention relates to folding stools placed 
in front of counters in stores. 
The objects of my invention are such im 
provements in folding store-stools as will fold 
them close against a counter, out of the way, 
to save all the floor-space possible, and, fur 
ther, to make Such folding store-stools remain 
in position to be occupied when at their lowest 
position and to hold them at any desired angle 
at which they may be placed. 
My invention consists in the construction 
and combination of parts described herein 
and defined in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of the stool embodying my invention and 
illustrates the preferred form of seat attach 
ment to the stool-arm. Fig. 1 is a top plan 
of the preferred means of attaching the seat 
to the arm, the seat being removed. Fig. 2 
is a side elevation of a stool embodying my in 
Vention, the supporting-bracket being partly 
in section, and illustrating a modified form 
of seat attachment to the stool-arm. Fig. 3 
is a front elevation of the stool illustrated in 
Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a perspective of the friction 
plate that sustains the stool-arm at any de 
sired angle; and Fig. 5 is a side elevation of 
the Supporting-bracket, partly in section, and 
the lower end of the stool-arm carried thereby, 
the bracket illustrated by Fig. 5 being a modi 
fication of the supports shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
and 3. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the support 
ing piece or bracket illustrated therein is de 
signed for attachment both to the floor and 
the counter of a store. In these figures, 1 is 
a floor piece or bracket that supports the stool 
arm 2 in Fig. 1 and 2 in Figs. 2 and 3. Pro 
jecting upwardly from the lower horizontal 
part of the floor-bracket are two standards 1 
and 1, between which the arm 2 is pivoted 
upon the pin 3, that passes through said up 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
rights and the lower end of the stool-arm. 
Projecting upwardly from the lower part of 
the floor-piece is a lug 1, that forms a full 
crum for the friction-plate 4, that is attached 
to the floor piece or bracket by the screw 5, 
that passes through the hole 4 in the friction 
plate into the floor piece or bracket, as illus 
trated. It will be seen that the end of the 
friction-plate through which the screw passes 
is free of the lower or horizontal wall and 
that the opposite upwardly-curved end of the 
friction-plate engages the lower rounded end 
of the arm 2. The bearing of the friction 
plate 4 against the lower rounded end of the 
arm 2 may be adjusted and increased by turn 
ing the screw 5 downwardly, and the bearing 
of the friction-plate upon the arm may be 
lessened by loosening the screw 5. In the 
upright wall 1 of the supporting-bracket is 
an adjusting-screw 6, which limits the upward 
movement of the arm 2. The perpendicular 
position of the arm 2 may be adjusted by 
turning set-screw 6 inwardly or outwardly, as 
desired. When the arm 2 or 2A reaches its 
upper limit or backward limit of its move 
ment, the shoulder or lug 2 thereon comes 
into contact with the head of the set-screw 6. 
The dotted lines A and B in Fig. 2 indicate 
different positions of the arm 2 or 2. Said 
friction-plate 4 will hold said arm at any an 
gle of inclination, either those indicated by 
the dotted lines A and B or other angles, 
Within the limits of the movement of the arm. 
Formed upon the sides of the lower end of 
the arm 2 are two heel-pieces 22, that come 
into contact with the lowerhorizontal wall of 
the bracket or floor-piece or with the floor or 
other obstruction and limit the downward or 
OutWard movement of the arm to an angle at 
which the seat carried by the arm will be in a 
horizontal plane when the arm is at its lowest 
position. 
The preferred means of attaching the seat 
to the arm is that illustrated in Figs. 1. and 
1". To the under side of the seat 7 is at 
tached a seat-plate 8, that has a recess Sin its 
upper side, in which is fixed a friction-plate 9 
by means of a screw 10. Said seat-plate 8 is 
provided with a recess 8, in which the upper 
end of the arm 2 enters. A pin 11 passes Ioo 
95 
9o 
75 
3. 
607,546 
through said seat-plate and through the up 
per end of the seat-arm. On the under side 
of the seat-plate 8, at the front of the arm 2, 
is a shoulder 8, that forms a stop that strikes 
against the angled face 2 of the upper end 
of the arm to limit the downward movement 
of the seat 7 relatively to the arm. When 
the seat is in the lowest position, with the lug 
8 in contact with the angle 2, and the arm 
2 is in its lowest position, the seat 7 will be in 
a horizontal plane. 
The friction-plate 9 
bears against the upper end of the arm 2, 
and as the seat 7 is tipped up said friction 
plate will hold the seat at any desired angle 
to which it is tipped relatively to the arm 2. 
The dotted lines C (shown in Fig. 1) indicate 
the position to which the seat is tipped when 
the seat and arm are thrown upwardly against 
the front of a counter to put the stool out of 
the Way. 
In the modification illustrated by Fig. 5 the 
arm 2, the friction-plate 4, screw 5, and set 
screw 6 are in all respects like those previously 
described. The modification illustrated in 
this figure relates to the supporting-bracket, 
and the lower horizontal wall of which, 1, 
is designed to be attached to the floor, the 
bracket having no provision for attaching it 
to a counter. Projecting upwardly from the 
lower wall of the bracket 1 is an upright or 
standard 1, that carries the adjusting-screw 
6. The lower horizontal wall of the bracket 
1 has a lug 19, that forms a fulcrum like the 
fulcrum 1 in the other bracket, upon which 
the friction-plate 4 rests. The bearing of the 
friction-plate 4 upon the lower rounded end 
of the arm 2 in the construction illustrated 
in Fig. 5 is in all respects like that previously 
described. 
In the modified form of seat attachment 
illustrated by Figs. 2 and 3 a seat-plate 8 is 
O 
25 
35 
55 
I do not claim, broadly, the application of 45 
formed upon or made integral with the upper 
end of the arm 2, and the seat is Secured 
upon said seat-plate by Screws or otherwise. 
friction-plates for the purpose of controlling 
the position or adjustment of stools. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a stool the combination with a sup 
porting-bracket, of an arm pivoted thereto, 
a stop to limit the downward movement of 
the arm, and an adjustable fulcrumed fric 
tion-plate secured to the bracket and engag 
ing the lower end of the pivoted arm, sub 
stantially as described. 
2. In a stool the combination of a bracket, 
an arm pivoted thereto, a stop to limit the 
downward movement of the pivoted arm, an 
adjustable stop to limit the upward movement 
of the pivoted arm, and a fulcrumed friction 
plate adjustably secured to the bracket and 
engaging the lower end of the pivoted arm, 
substantially as set forth. 
3. In a stool, the combination with a sup 
porting-bracket of an arm pivoted thereto, a 
stop to limit the downward movement of the 
arm, an adjustable stop to limit the upward 
movement of the arm, an adjustable full 
crumed friction-plate secured to the bracket 
and engaging the lower end of the pivoted 
arm, a seat, a frictional plate secured thereto 
and engaging the upper end of the pivoted 
arm, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 
in the presence of two witnesses, this 18th 
day of March, 1897. 
75 
ALBERT R. MILNER. 
Witnesses: 
J. A. OSBORNE, 
L. F. GRISWOLE). 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607646.txt	 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IPASCAI. MARINO, OF PARIS, FRANCE. 
ELECTROLYTIC BATH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,646, dated July 19, 1898. . 
Be it known that I, PASCAL MARINO, a sub. my process: 
Application filed December 1, 1896, Serial No. 614,121. (No specimens.) Patented in Belgium June 15, 1896, No. 121 776, 
trate more clearly the essential features of 
First. A solution containing one equivalent 
of sulfate of magnesium is mixed with a so 
lution containing less than one equivalent of 
chlorid of barium. It will give an insoluble 
precipitate of sulfate of barium in a solution 
of sulfate and of chlorid of magnesium. By 
decanting or filtering I separate the liquid 
from the precipitate, which liquid is employed 
as the electrolyte for depositing magnesium. 
Second. I mix a solution of chlorid or of 
nitrate or of acetate of that salt whose metal 
I want to deposit with a solution of a salt 
which gives by double decomposition an in 
soluble precipitate and a liquid to be used 
for electrolysis. Thus Imix together one so 
lution containing one equivalent of chlorid 
of aluminium with another one containing 
less than one equivalent of acetate of lead. 
This gives me an insoluble precipitate of 
chlorid of lead and a liquid containing the 
acetate of aluminium with chlorid of alu 
minium. Having purified the liquid of the 
traces of lead remaining in it by means of 
sulfureted hydrogen, the same is ready to 
be used as the basis of electrolyte for depos 
iting aluminium. 
Third. A solution containing one equiva 
lent of sulfate of chromium is mixed with 
a solution containing less than one equiva 
lent of chlorid of calcium. 
An insoluble . . 
precipitate of sulfate of calcium is obtained 
and a solution of chlorid of chrome with 
chrome sulfate init, which will deposit chrome 
when set to action. 
Fourth. A solution containing one equiva 
lent of sulfate, of manganese is mixed with 
a solution containing less than one equiva 
lent of chlorid of strontium. A precipitate 
of sulfate of strontium is produced, and the 
liquid contains chlorid of manganese with its 
sulfate, to be used for the electrolytic bath. 
The liquid for electrolysis may also be pre 
pared without adding to it alkali-metal salts 
and obtained directly by double decomposi 
For example, I take for the magne 
tion. 
sium bath a solution containing an equiva 
lent of sulfate of magnesia, to which an al 
kali-metal sulfate is added. This solution 
Imix with another one containing some chlo 
To all whom, it may concern: 
ject of the King of Italy, residing at Paris, 
France, have invented new and useful im 
provements in electrolytic baths for extract 
ing from metallic salts their metaleither sepa 
rately or in any desired composition of their 
alloys, (for which I have obtained a patent 
in Belgium, No. 121,776, bearing date June 
15, 1896;) arid I do hereby declare that the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, which will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
to use the same. 
The object of my invention is to extract all 
kinds of metals from their salts by means of 
an aqueous bath, which serves to obtain their 
metals separately or as alloys, either in the 
shape of a compact mass or as deposits on 
the surface of any metal or alloy whatever, 
even of the same kind with that to be deposit 
ed, or, more generally, on any conducting-sur 
face desired. 
The electrolytic deposits of different metals 
and alloys obtained by my process adhere 
strongly to metals they are deposited on, and 
thereason for that is that the metallic cathode 
enters on its surface into alloy with that metal 
whose depositsit receives. Besides that,they 
exhibit a very perfect cohesion and a remark 
ably bright metallic luster. 
For my bath. I prepare a solution, say, of 
one equivalent of that metallic salt which I 
propose to deposit by-electrolysis, selecting 
such salts as form insoluble precipitates with 
barium, strontium, calcium, or lead, and an 
other solution of the salt, either of barium or 
of calcium or of strontium or of lead, contain 
ing less than one equivalent of it. Then I 
mix up these two solutions, and in conse 
quence of the double decomposition taking 
place in the mixture an insoluble precipitate 
is formed, and the remaining liquid I use as 
the basis of my electrolyte. This saline solu 
tion resulting from an incomplete decomposi 
tion becomes in the latter case a mixture of 
different salts of the same metal-for exam 
ple, of sulfate with chlorid, sulfate with ace 
tate, sulfate with nitrate, chlorid with ace 
tate, chlorid with nitrate, &c. 
The following examples I believe will illus 
25 
o 
45 
So 
55 
75 
. 
90 
95. 
Ioo 
 
 
 
--" -- ". . . 
. . . . 
. 
. 
. . - 
--- 
20 the sulfuric acid combined with copp 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
55 
607,646 
- 
2 
rid of an alkali-earth metal, but not enough 
of it to precipitate the whole of the sulfuric 
acid combined with the magnesia and with 
the alkali. The double decomposition will 
give an insoluble precipitate of sulfate of 
the alkali-earth metal and a liquid which 
will contain a mixture of chlorid with sulfate 
of magnesia and of alkali. 
For the direct treatment of minerals with 
the object of extracting their metals Iem 
ploy, as it has already been pointed out 
above, an electrolyte obtained by an incom 
plete double decomposition. For example, 
when I want to extract copper from a min 
eral the electrolyte is prepared with a solution 
of sulfate of copper. An alkali-metal sulfate 
is added to it, and it is mixed with an insuffi 
cient quantity of chlorid of an alkali-earth 
metal, so as not to precipitate the whole of 
er and 
- 
the alkali. There will be formed a sulfate 
of the alkali-earth metal, and the liquid, de 
canted or filtered, will contain only a mix 
ture of sulfate and of chlorid. of copper, to 
gether with sulfate and chlorid of the al 
kali. For the sake of making this liquid a 
better conductor and in order to facilitate 
the decomposition of the mineral I add a 
mineral acid, either sulfuric or chlorhydric, 
and use in the bath the mineral itself as a 
solubie anode. 
It may appear at the start that the prepa 
ration of an electrolytic bath by way of dou 
ble decomposition and the assertion that by 
these methods of preparation entirely differ 
ent results are obtained, not sanctioned by 
theoretical considerations, are, so to say, 
'fancies.' Yet affirm that numerous ex 
periments prove that I am right. In fact, I 
insist that from a theoretical standpoint I. do 
not do anything else but to utilize the well 
known laws of Berthollet. It is only neces 
sary to understand them well in order to ap 
ply them with full certainty. 
Actually Berthollet's laws say that the re 
action taking place in a mixture of two dif 
ferent salts is complete whenever there is an 
insoluble precipitate. This phenomenon can 
be easily explained by taking in considera 
tion that the precipitating particles destroy 
the chemical equilibrium existing between 
two opposing reactions. Mr. Gottier, of the 
Institute of France, says, in his work on chem 
istry, that this explanation is perfectly true. 
and that it was first advanced by Gay-Lussac. 
Besides that, it is proved that an exchange, 
although an incomplete one, takes place even 
in this case when a mixture of two different 
salts does not give an insoluble precipitate 
as, for instance, when a colorless solution of 
chlorid of sodium is mixed with a blue solu 
tion of sulfate of copper, which phenomenon 
is observable on the green color of the mix 
ture; but in this case the reaction is never 
complete. It is useless to adduce further ex 
amples of the same kind. A very character 
istic change of color is observable when an 
. 
electric current is allowed to pass through the 
solution of chlorid and of sulfate of copper, 
which fact shows that the above-mentioned 
laws are applicable to the mixture of differ 
ent salts of the same metal. 
According to Berthollet's laws the reaction 
would have been complete if the chemical equi 
librium were disturbed by the falling particles 
of the precipitate. 
Why should not the same 
phenomenon take place when another force 
for instance, the electric force-were to actin 
the same sense? This gives the theoretical 
explanation of the above-mentioned case. At 
the same time when the metallic particles go 
from one chemical combination into another 
under the influence of a current they are ex 
posed in a free or nascent state and become 
ready to be precipitated on the cathode. 
It was known long ago that very weak cur 
rents can pass through conducting liquids and 
that they conform themselves to Ohm's law. 
This is why Clausius in 1857 (Poggendorf's 
Annalen, 101, 338) contended that any such 
hypothesis, as that of Grotthus, which con 
siders as united or joined together the two 
constituents of an electrolyte is not admissi 
ble and that the same is in contradiction with 
Ohms law. 
Certain relations were established between 
the osmotic pressure and the freezing-point 
and the lowering of freezing-point and the 
rising of boiling-point of solutions. It has 
been demonstrated that such depressions and 
risings are directly proportional to osmotic 
pressure of solutions, and consequently to the 
number of molecules they contain. (Van't 
Hoff Arrhenius, Zeit. Phisik Chen. 3, 115, 
10,51.) The molecular depression of freezing 
point-i. e., the product resulting from the 
multiplication of molecular weight by the de 
pression for each gram of dissolved matter 
can be figured out. IIowever, those bodies 
whose aqueous solutions conduct electricity 
generally give results higher than what the 
theory calls for. The same remark applies to 
theosmotic pressure. In order to explainthese 
anomalies, Arrhenius assumes (1887, Zeit. 
Phys. Chem. 1, 631) that electrolytic mole 
cules are already decomposed into their ele 
ments before the passage of the current and 
that they do not contain anything but elec 
tropositive and electronegative ions. This 
decomposition most likely is not a complete 
one, especially in the case of solutions of mean 
concentration forming what is termed elec 
trolytic disassociation. Therefore when an 
electrolyte is decomposed by a current it is 
because the molecules are beforehand sepa 
rated into ions. The current does not do 
anything else but to transfer the ions to re 
spective poles, but it does not separate them. 
On the contrary, if the current passes through 
it is because the ions are already separated. 
The osmotic pressure has increased in conse 
quence of this disassociation. In whatever 
way this exchange between the ions of two 
salts of the same metal takes place it con 
o 
75 
s 
ioc, 
 
Io5, 
Ia - 
II5 
I26. 
 
 
... 
646 . 
. 
3. 
o 
75 
90 
95 
OO 
forms itself always necessarily to the theory 
of Arrhenius. This theory explains in a quite 
satisfactory manner the anomalies which the 
electrolytes exhibit in opposition to the laws 
5 of Raoult and to the researches of Pfeffer. 
l, (Osmotische Untersuchungen, Leipsic, 1877.) 
This continuous double exchange between the 
ions permits to explain the results of my in 
vention. If between the two kinds of anions 
O some of them transfer themselves more easily 
than the others and attack with greater en 
ergy the anode, my aim is reached. I have 
economized the electric force and made the 
metallic deposits more regular, getting at 
: 'the same time a more coherent and adherent 
deposition thereof to the cathode. The nov 
elty of my process is based, therefore, on the 
actual fact that I have utilized the abstract 
hypothesis of scientific men and have verified 
it by numerous experiments. 
Whatever may be the case-i. e. whether 
the liquids produced in the above examples 
are obtained by double decomposition or the 
salts themselves are gotten by some other 
5 chemical processes or taken as found in na 
ture-it is always necessary to add to the 
liquid a solution of an alkaline salt-as, forin 
stance, that of ammonium, of potassium, of 
sodium, or of a compound of two or of three 
of them in a proportion of not less than one 
sixth of that of the metal contained in the 
electrolytic solution, and, moreover, there 
must be put in it a similar proportion of some 
organic acid or of boric acid. 
I add the salt of an alkali metal for the 
purpose of diminishing thereby the internal 
resistance of the bath to the electric cur 
rent, as experience has demonstrated that it 
does it, and, in the second place, for the sake 
4o of decreasing the acidity of the bath, as too 
great an acidity of the latter not only affects 
but even is apt to destroy the metallic de 
posit. By thus making the bath neutral I 
prevent the recombination of ions once sep 
45 arated or the formation of new compounds. 
The reason for adding organic acid to the 
electrolyte is partly for maintaining a con 
stant density in the bath and partly from the 
following considerations: The specific weight 
s 50 of the organic molecule is smaller than that 
of the usual inorganic molecules, which is 
shown by the fact that the specific gravity of 
prganic bodies is generally less than that of 
inorganic ones, while, on the other hand, or 
i ganic molecules possess a much greater fa 
cility for being decomposed than the inor 
ganic ones, and thus require only a very small 
initial impulse to set them in motion. Re 
curring now to the theory of Arrhenius and 
&Berthollet, the function which Gay-Lussac 
attributes to the falling particles of the pre 
3ipitate is in this case effected by the organic 
acid. In the phenomenon of separation of 
molecules into cations and anions the organic 
It is true that Mr. Roseleur has already em 
that Edward Weston has heretofore added to 
his electrolyte free or compound boric acid, 
while Mr. Hainantz has used a tartrate or 
tannic acid; but in all these cases the alka 
line solution and the organic acids, like the 
boric acid, have been applied separately and 
for ordinary baths, while in my process they 
are applied to my special baths in a very defi 
nite proportion. Therefore it makes my 
process applicable to all metals, like a gen 
eral law. 
Another example: A bath is prepared with 
the salt of magnesium, and two anodes are 
used, of which one anode is insoluble, being 
made, for example, of carbon. The other 
anode is soluble and is of zinc, lead, tin, &c. 
The cathode is of iron or of any other metal 
on which an electrolytic deposit of an alloy 
of magnesium with either zinc, lead, tin, &c., 
according to what metal is used for the solu 
ble anode, will be obtained. The same meth 
od must be followed when a deposit of iron, 
manganese, chromium, cobalt, tungsten, cop 
per, &c., is to be produced. All metallic de 
posits which come out of my bathhave a very. 
bright metallic luster and adhere strongly to... 
the metal they are deposited on. 
lJnder the 
stated conditions the above-mentioned reac 
tions are alike applicable whether for the 
formation of deposits of separate metals or 
for their alloys. Thus, for example, in order 
to obtain an alloy of aluminium, magnesium, 
and chromium all that is necessary is to em 
ploy a solution containing the salts of those 
metals. An organic acid or boric acid must 
be added to it, together with an alkaline salt . 
or salts, such as would not form an insoluble 
precipitate with either of the metallic salts 
whose deposits are desired. 
The electrolysis is carried on in waterproof 
tanks made of wood or some other such sub 
stance which is not affected by the solution 
it comes in contact with. 
For the anodes carbon or any other con 
ducting substance not affected by the prod 
ucts of chemical reaction may be employed, 
or, still better, they must be conductors, re 
maining unaffected while in contact or in ag 
glomeration with insoluble salts or the oxid 
of the metal contained in the bath. This last 
one-namely, the oxid of the metal-in the 
meantime will form soluble salts, needed for 
the keeping up at the same requisite degree 
the concentration of the bath it had at the 
start. The anodes may be made of the same 
metal I intend to deposit. 
For the cathodes may be employed a piece 
either of the metal whose production is con 
templated or of that alloy which is to be 
formed by the deposits. In fact, anything 
may serve for cathode if by its nature it is a 
conductor and will receive the deposit, and 
will allow the same to be separated from it 
when necessary for further use. 
If the metal or the alloy to be deposited 
has to be used for plating or surface-covering 
ployed ammonium chlorid for nickel-plating, of certain objects, as it is the case in silver, 
5 acid acts to facilitate the decomposition. 
. 
ular 
35 
- 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4 
. 
607,646 
30 
such quantity as to give, by an incomplete 
double decomposition an insoluble precipi 
tate, and a mixed solution of different solu 
ble salts of the metal to be deposited, adding 
to the mixed solution an organic acid and 
electrolyzing this mixture. 
3. The process of electrolytic production of 
metals contained in minerals, consisting in 
adding to a solution containing the salt of the 35. 
metal to be deposited mixed with alkali-metal 
salts of the same acid, an alkali-earth-metal 
salt of another acid in such quantity as to 
give by incomplete double decomposition an 
insoluble precipitate and a mixed solution of 
different soluble salts of the metal to be de 
posited, and also adding an organic acid and 
an acid such as chlorhydric or sulfuric acid 
capable of attacking the mineral, and elec 
trolyzing the mixed solution by passing an 
electric current therethrough, the mineral it 
self, in the bath, being used as the soluble 
45 
40 
anode. 
Witnesses: 
PASCA, NiARNO. 
- 
EDWARD L. STAREK, 
EDWARD P. MACLEAN. 
nickel, gold, &c., plating, then these same 
objects serve as cathodes. 
The bathis fed by adding to it from time 
to time the necessary quantity of solutions of 
salts of those metals whose deposits are 
sought. Soluble metallicanodes may do that 
also. Likewise oxids and salts placed at the 
aniode or in the bath will answer just as well. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
1. The process of electrolytic production of 
metals, consisting in adding to a solution of a 
salt of the metal to be deposited alkali-metal 
salts of the same acid and an alkali-earth 
metal salt of another acid in such quantity 
as to give, by an incomplete double decompo 
sition, an insoluble precipitate and a mixed 
solution of different soluble salts of the metal 
to be deposited, and electrolyzing such mixed 
solution. 
2. The process of electrolytic production of 
metals consisting in adding to a solution of a 
salt of the metal to be deposited, an alkali 
metal salt of the same acid, and also adding 
an alkali-earth-metal salt of another acid in 
O 
5 
20 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607746.txt	No. 607,746. 
(No Model.) 
S. W. HUFF. 
Patented July 19, 1898. 
BOND FOR ELECTRIC CONDUCTORs. 
(Application filed Aug. 29, 1898.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
: 
622esses 
a 
G-A-R -e, -tsu 
122-et-a222? 
5%%z-Z2 
27. 514 22. 
No. 607,746, 
S. W. HUFF. 
Patented July 19, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
 
BOND FOR ELECTRIC CONDUCTORS. 
Application filed Aug. 29, 1896.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 607,746. 
(No Model.) 
S. W. HUFF. 
Patented July 19, 1898. 
BOND FOR ELECTRIC CONDUCTORS. 
(Application filed Aug. 29, 1896.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Z5 
 
  
 
N N Z-1 
Zaf 
Z3 
- - 1st - 
-za- - l 
E. 
rse- Z3 
s ; 
za 
2x 
Z-W 
E. 
42 3' 3- a 
3 & AR 
a 34 
zz st -Z 
Z. 
Z4. 
Z 
At 
gi 
22. Z3? 
67267 
t 
...as ... 
El 
... 3 
| 
SA 
ES 
il 
Za. 
G 
Z-AI 
1. 
"ENESIHz 4 
*I SIRI, 
: 
| 
 
222esses." 
122222222. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SLAUGHTER W. HUFF, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR OF 
ONE-HALF TO JESSE HILLES, OF SAME PLACE. 
BOND FOR ELECTRIC CONDUCTORs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,746, dated July 19, 1898. 
Application filed August 29, 1896, Serial No. 604,304. (No model.) 
55 
7 O 
75 
To aid, whom it may concern: - 
Be it known that I, SLAUGHTER W. HUFF, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of the city of Baltimore, in the State of Mary 
land, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in and Relating to Bonding 
Electric Conductors, of which the following 
is a specification. 
My invention relates to the construction of 
bonds and to the manner of attaching them. 
In constructing the bonds I aim to make an 
article which is cheap, efficient in service, 
and durable and to make an electrical con 
nection between the parts to be connected 
which will be of lasting character and mini 
mum resistance and Which is not only appli 
cable for the use of an integral part of an or 
dinary bond, but which may be employed to 
advantage as a means for connecting, electric 
ally, any two adjacent parts in making elec 
trical bonds. 
My invention consists in making a bond, 
together with its means of electrical union 
with the rail or other part, entirely of an in 
tegral piece of flat (preferably sheet) metal, 
Such bond, when thus made, comprising a body 
portion which may be bent to impart elas 
ticity to it and make it yielding in use and 
tubular attaching - lugs projecting trans 
versely to the ends of the bond-that is to 
say, with their axes transverse to the length 
of the bond-and which lugs are formed by 
bending the flat metal around a suitable man 
drel, offsets or lateral extensions being left on 
the body portion in cutting out the blank 
from which to form this tubular attaching 
lug. Generally speaking, the section of metal 
at the connection between the body portion 
and its integral tubular attaching-lug is about 
equal to the transverse section of the main 
body portion in order to preserve the full con 
ductivity and avoid choking at this point, 
while the surface of the tubular attaching-lug 
is sufficiently increased where it comes in con 
tact with the steel or iron of the rail or other 
part to be connected, so as to compensate for 
the reduced conductivity of the metal and to 
amply distribute current up to the full ca 
pacity of the bond. 
The bank from which the bond is formed 
is provided on its ends with lateral exten 
sions running parallel to the length of the 
body portion and severed from said body 
portion for a part of the length of said exten- . 
SOS, 
In putting the bond in place I employ an 
anvil in which are seated thimbles carrying 
upsetting-pins which are adapted to support 
the bonds and upset the ends of the rivets 
when the latter are driven in, the anvil be 
ing held in place by a clamp or other suit 
able means. Bonds are attached to the un 
der sides of the feet of the rails, and in order 
to drill the holes uniformly to receive them I 
employ drilling-blocks with steel-lined open 
ings to direct the drills and with laterally 
projecting dowels which enter the bolt-holes 
in the abutting ends of the rails, and thus 
fix the location of the block and insure the 
drilling to take place uniformly at all joints. 
My invention will be understood in detail 
upon reference to the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figures 1, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 represent, re 
spectively, sheets marked for cutting out 
blanks, a blank partially struck up, a com 
pleted bond, a modified form of blank, and 
modified plans for marking sheet metal in 
cutting out blanks. Figs. 6 to 14 illustrate 
the mode of bonding abutting ends of rails or 
analogous parts to be connected, Figs. 6, 7, 
and 8 being a plan, an end view, and a side 
view of the drilling-blocks, Figs. 9 and 10 be 
ing an end view and a side view of the hold 
ing-tool, Figs. 11 and 12 showing the holding 
thimble and the upsetting-pin, and Figs. 13, 
14, and 15 illustrating two forms of rivets 
and the manner in which they are upset by 
the pin. Figs. 16 to 18 represent an end view, 
a side view, and a bottom view of two abut 
ting rails with the bonding complete. 
Referring to the drawings and to Figs. 1 
to 5, one form of the bond may be conven 
iently made from a strip C of sheet metal, 
cut upon the lines b and c, so as to form a 
body portion 1 and integral lug-forming off 
sets 2. This same shape of blank may be 
formed without waste, as shown in Fig. 1, 
or the blank may be cut so that the offsets 
assume the shape shown at 2 in Fig. 4, or 
the sheet may be cut as shown in Fig. 5, be 
ing wide enough to form two outer series of 
EO 
25 
35 
AO 
45 
90 
95 
IOC 
 
2 
607,746 
body portions, an intermediate series of body 
portions which overlap or break joints with 
those of the outer series, and two interposed 
rows of lug-forming parts severed by the cuts 
b, c, and d and left integrally joined to the 
adjacentends of the body portions. In either 
method of cutting out there is little waste, 
and in the method shown by Fig. 5 there is 
absolutely no waste of material. The blanks 
when formed are struck up into the form 
shown in Fig. 2 and afterward finished by 
bending until they assume the form shown 
by Fig. 3. 
It is desirable that the bending of the body 
ortion be sufficient to prevent producing tor 
sional effects on the attaching-lugs 3 when 
the body portion bends in use. 
In applying the bonds to the rails 4 drill 
ing-blocks 5, having perforations 6 with steel 
linings 7, are applied to the sides of the rails 
and held in place by dowels 8. (Shown by 
dotted lines in the bolt-holes in the ends of 
the rails.) The holes 6 are at the proper dis 
tance apart to cause the drills to bore at suit 
able points to receive the lugs on the bonds, 
and such holes are also at the proper incli 
nation to bore the holes perpendicular to the 
slanting face of the foot of the rail and to 
thereby make a riveted joint easily made 
without interference with the head of the rail. 
I then take a thimble 9, constructed to fit be-, 
neath the attaching-lug and also the curved 
end of the bond, introduce an upsetting-pin 
10 into the thimbles, and then insert the thim 
bles and pins in the sockets 11 in an anvil 
11 and support upon the thimbles a pair of 
bonds, as shown in Fig. 9, with their attach 
ing-lugs projecting into the bores from be 
neath the rail. I then drive in a rivet 14 with 
or without a conical cavity 14". This rivet 
is of sufficient size to force the metal of the 
attaching-lug firmly against the bore of the 
rail, and as it is driven in the lower end is up 
set by contact with the pin 10. The lug and 
rivet are hammered until left flush upon the 
upper side of the foot of the rail in order that 
they may offer no obstruction to the fish 
plate. 
The position of the bond in place is shown 
in Figs. 16, 17, and 18, and it will be seen 
that they occupy a position entirely out of the 
way and safe from vandalism, being buried 
beneath the rail in the ballast of the road. 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
1. A bond for making electrical connec 
tions, comprising a sheet-metal body portion 
bent or curved to lend resiliency to the struc 
ture, and having its end bent to form an in 
tegral tubular attaching-lug for insertion into 
the object to be connected, the axis of which 
lug is transverse to the plane embracing the 
curved body, whereby the latter lies close to 
the object, as explained. 
2. A bond for making electrical connec 
tions formed of flat metal and comprising a 
body portion and an integral external exten 
sion bent about an axis transverse to the body 
portion into a tubular attaching-lug project 
ing laterally from the flat body portion, as 
explained. 
3. In a bond for making electrical connec 
tions, the combination of the base-flange of 
the rail to be connected, having an opening, 
the tubular attaching-lug inserted in said 
opening from beneath, the rivet driven into 
said lug to permanently expand it into con 
tact with the wall of the opening, left flush 
on the upper side, and upset on the lower side 
to expand it, and the fish-plate covering the 
bond-joint above as explained. 
4. The herein-described blank for a bond 
for making electrical connections comprising 
the flat ribbon or strip of metal having at 
each end, a lateral extension parallel with the 
length of the bond and severed from the body 
of the bond for a portion of the length of the 
extension, and in dimensions adapted for 
bending into tubular shape to form lugs pro 
jecting axially beyond the body portion, as 
explained. 
SLAUGHTER, W. HUFF. 
Witnesses: 
- 
R. STANLEY CARSWELL, 
JOS. MULLEN, Jr. 
55 
75 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607846.txt	No. 607,846. 
(No Model.) 
H. W. GAYS 
CARLINE. 
(Application filed Jan. 17, 1898.) 
Patented July 26, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
 
%, 2 
Yn 
tes. 
N2: N 
Z247. 
Zzezy 74(2%. 
(voyria. 
 
  
 
 
 
No. 607846. 
(No Mode.) 
H. W. GAYS. 
GARENE. 
Application filed Jan. 1, 1898.) 
Patented July 26, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2 
s 
 
Z 
26%zy 72, 62%, 
& %. 22. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIENRY W. GAYS, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI. 
CARLINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,846, dated July 26, 1898. 
Application filed January 17, 1898, Serial No. 666,867, (No model.) 
55 
to 
75 
To all, Luhon it inctly conce7 7. 
Beit known that I, HENRY W. GAYS, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
of St. Louis, State of Missouri, have invented 
a certain new and usefulmprovementin Car 
lines, of which the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same, reference being had 
to the accompanying drawings, forming part 
of this specification, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevational view of my 
improved carline. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional view of the 
skeleton framing of a car, showing the appli 
cation of my improved carline. Fig. 4 is an 
enlarged detail front elevational view of the 
central portion of my improved carline, to 
gether with a section of the ridge-pole. Fig. 
3 is an enlarged detailplan view of the same, 
the ridge-pole not being shown. Fig. 6 is an 
enlarged vertical sectional view on line 6 6, 
Fig. 4. Fig. 7 is an enlarged vertical sectional 
view on line 77, Fig. 4. Fig. 8 is an enlarged 
detail view of one end of my improved car 
line, showing the nailing-strip mortised to re 
ceive the same. Fig. 9 is a similar view show 
ing the side plate mortised for the same pur 
pose. Fig. 10 is a vertical sectional view of 
the skeleton framing of a car, showing a modi 
fied construction of my improved carline. 
Fig. 11 is an enlarged detail front view of the 
ridge-pole bracket or support. Fig. 12 is an 
end elevational view of the same. Fig. 13 is 
an enlarged detail front view of the purlin 
bracket or support. Fig. 14 is an end eleva 
tional view of the same. Fig. 15 is an en 
larged detail side elevational view of the car 
line hanger or support, and Fig. 16 is an end 
view of the same. 
This invention relates to a new and useful 
improvement in carlines, the object being to 
provide a carline which will be light, strong, 
durable, and effective, as well as simple in 
construction, also saving the laborious work 
of mortising and dispensing with the neces 
sity of the assistance of a skilled mechanic. 
The special features of this invention re 
side in the novel construction of the carline, 
as will hereinafter be described, and after 
ward pointed out in the claims. 
In the drawings I have shown a portion of 
the skeleton framing of a car in connection 
with which my improved carline is illustrated; 
but it will be obvious that there are other uses 
to which my invention could be put without 
in the least departing from the principle of 
the same. 
Referring to the drawings, A indicates the 
end plate, B the side plates, C the end posts, 
and D the side posts, all of said parts being 
common and well known in car construction. 
E indicates my improved carline as an en 
tirety, which, as shown in detail in all the fig 
ures with the exception of Fig. 3, comprises a 
body 1, preferably of the shape of an I-beam 
in cross-section, as is illustrated more fully 
in Fig. 7, hangers 22, arranged on each side 
or end of the carline and preferably of an in 
verted-U or stirrup shape, said hangers being 
adapted to overlap and rest upon the side. 
plates B, pockets 33, preferably in and some 
what below the upper face of the carline E 
and adapted to receive purlins F, and a 
pocket 4, located in and somewhat below the 
upper face of the carline E and midway its 
length, which pocket is adapted to receive the 
ridge-pole G. 
The carline E is preferably reinforced or 
widened at the pockets 2,33, and 4, asis clearly 
shown in Figs. 2 and 5. This reinforcement 
is to provide a wide and substantial bearing 
for their respective timbers, while the inter 
mediate portions of the carline may be quite 
narrow and light and still be of ample strength. 
Another object of this reinforcement is to pro 
vide a suitable amount of stock around 
bolt-holes 5, which perforate the carline in 
pockets, 3 and 4. The pockets 3 and 4 are 
preferably provided with one or more sharp 
pointed lugs or projections 6, rising from the 
bottom thereof and adapted to lock or detain 
the purlins and the ridge-pole after the same 
have been firmly driven down in position. 
Hindicates a bolt which passes through the 
purlins and ridge-pole and through the holes 
5 in the carline E, firmly securing said pur 
lins and ridge-pole to said carline. To one 
end of this bolt H a nuth may be secured, 
and, if desired, a jam-nut may be added. 
This, however, is optional. 
After the carlines E are placed upon the 
side plates B and the purlins F and ridge-pole 
G. are secured thereto in the manner above 
Io 
25 
35 
do 
45. 
9o 
95 
Idd 
M 
g 
6O7,846 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
stated, said carlines and ridge-pole being also 
secured to the end plates A, the skeleton frame 
of the car is then ready to receive the roofing 
I in the ordinary manner. 
I prefer to arrange a nailing-Strip J on the 
side plates B, to which the roof may be se 
cured, and, if desired, I may notch these 
nailing-strips to receive the ends of the car 
lines to hold said carlines in position against 
longitudinal movement, as shown in Fig. 8, 
or I may notch the side plates B, as shown in 
Fig. 9, for the same purpose, or I may provide 
dowels 7 to fit in shallow bores in the side 
plates B, as shown in dotted lines. 
From the above it will be seen that a most 
rigid construction results from the use of my 
improved carlines and the rods or truss-rods 
which are commonly used in construction 
with Wooden carlines are entirely dispensed 
with. 
In Figs. 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 I have illus 
trated a modified construction of my im 
proved carline in which the carline proper, 
E", is simply a beam extending from one side 
plate to the other and rests in suitable hangers 
10 10, supported by said side plates. These 
hanger's 10 10 consist of pockets 11, adapted 
to receive and support one end of the carline 
and at the same time, by means of inverted-U 
or stirrup shaped portions 12 12, are adapted 
to overlap and rest upon the side plates in a 
similar manner and for the purpose described 
and illustrated in the preferred construction 
of my improved carline. In this latter con 
struction I substitute for the purlin pockets 
3 3 and the ridge - pole pocket 4 suitable 
brackets or supports 1313, adapted to receive 
said purlins, and a bracket 14, adapted to re 
ceive said ridge-pole. These brackets 13 13 
and 14 are Substantially of the same construc 
tion and are placed in their proper and re 
spective positions on the carline E'. 
The lower portions or bases of the pockets 
1313 and 14 are provided with depending 
flanges 1515, adapted to overlap the sides of 
the carline, thereby providing a substantial 
bearing and support for the same against any 
end thrust of their respective purlins or 
ridge-pole, and to prevent any lateral move 
ment of the brackets 13 13 and 14 suitable 
dowels 16, depending from the base of said 
brackets and preferably between the flanges 
15 15, engage suitable holes in the top of the 
carline. The upper portion of these brack 
ets 1313 and 14, upon which rest the carlines 
and ridge - pole, is provided with suitable 
flanges 17 17, arranged at right angles to the 
flanges 1515. Flanges 1717 engage and over 
lap the sides of the said purlins and ridge 
pole, thereby forming a Substantial support 
against any side thrust of carline, and to pre 
vent any end thrust of the purlins suitable 
dowels 18 rise from the top portion, prefer 
ably between the flanges 17 17, and engage 
suitable holes bored into the lower face of the 
purlin. 
The upper portions of the brackets 13 13 
and 14, which receive the purlins and ridge 
pole, and the lower portions, which engage the 
carlines, are preferably separated by WebS 19, 
which may be made to suit any style of car, 
pitch of roof, or depth of carline, asis obvious. 
The only material difference between the 
purlin-bracket and the ridgepole bracket 
resides in the construction of the upper por 
tion-i. e., the upper portion of the purlin 
bracket is made preferably on a slant or in 
cline of a corresponding pitch to the inclina 
tion of the roof, as is fully illustrated in Figs. 
10, 13, and 14. 
In Figs. 15 and 16 I have shown the idea of 
using an ordinary I-beam in the construction 
of a carline E", in which case the hangers 10 
10 may be riveted or otherwise secured to the 
beam and the carline then supported as be 
fore described. It will be readily understood 
that the brackets 13 13 and 14, With slight 
changes in the lower portion, may be suit 
ably attached to said I-beam carline E, and 
thus produce a strong, durable, and effective 
carline. 
In the drawings I have shown my improved 
carlines designed for a freight-car; but I do 
not wish to be understood as limiting myself 
to this construction, as the same is fully ap 
plicable to a crowned or flat roof or any other 
analogous structure. 
I am aware that many minor changes in the 
construction, arrangement, and combination 
of the several parts of my carline can be made 
and substituted for those herein shown and 
described without in the least departing from 
the nature and principle of my invention. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. A carline consisting of a body having 
hangers adapted to engage side plates, said 
carline being, also, provided with recesses or 
pockets on its upper face for receiving the 
purlins and ridge-pole, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. A carline provided with inverted-U- 
shaped hangers on its ends adapted to engage 
the side plates, and recesses or pockets in its 
upper face adapted to receive their respec 
tive timbers, the carline being perforated in 
line with said pockets for receiving a bolt, 
substantially as described. 
3. A carline provided with hangers and 
pockets suitably reinforced, said carline be 
ing, also, provided With lugs, or projections, 
which are arranged in said pockets for hold 
ing, or locking, Suitable timbers in position, 
substantially as described. 
4. A carline which is substantially-shaped 
in cross-section throughout its length, said 
carline having hangers on its ends to engage 
the side plates, and recesses or pocketS in its 
upper face to receive the purlins and ridge 
pole, substantially as described. 
5. In combination. With the side plates of 
a car, of a carline which is substantially I 
shaped in cross-section throughout its length, 
75 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I25 
607,846 
8, 
inverted-U-shaped hangers formed on the 
ends of said carline for engaging the side 
plates, means for locking said hangers to the 
side plates, purlins and ridge-pole, and means 
for locking said purlins and ridge-pole to the 
carline, substantially as described. 
6. A carline consisting of a body provided 
with hangers adapted to engage side plates, 
said carline being, also, provided with brack 
ets or supports, said brackets or supports be 
ing adapted to receive the purlins and ridge 
pole, substantially as described. 
7. A carline provided with inverted-U- 
shaped hangers on its ends adapted to engage 
the side plates, and brackets resting on, or 
secured to, the upper face of said carline, said 
brackets being provided with flanges for en 
bracing the purlins or ridge-pole, and flanges 
IO 
for embracing the carline, Substantially as 
described. 
8. A carline provided with hangers, brack 
ets for the purlins and ridge-pole, said brack 
ets being provided with flanges for embrac 
ing said purlins or ridge-pole, and flanges 
for embracing the carline, and dowels for en 
gaging said purlins or ridge-pole, and dow 
els for engaging said carline, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature, in the presence of two witnesses, 
this 8th day of January, 1898. 
25 
HENRY W. GAYS. 
Witnesses: 
F. R. CORNWALL, 
FIUGH IK. WAGNER. 
 
DISCLAIMER. 
607,846.-Henry W. Gays, St. Louis, Mo. CARLINE. Patent dated July 26, 1898. 
Disclaimer filed December 2, 1908, by the Chicago-Cleveland Car-Roofing Company, 
assignee. 
tified as follows, to wit: 
Enters its disclaimer 
To that part of the specification and claims of said Letters Patent which is iden 
Fig. 10 is a vertical sectional view of the skeleton framing of a car, showing a 
modified construction of my improved carline. Fig. 11 is an enlarged detail front 
view of the ridge-pole bracket or support. Fig. 12 is an end elevational view of the 
same. Fig. 13 is an enlarged detail front view of the purlin bracket or support. Fig. 
14 is an end elevational view of the same. Fig. 15 is an enlarged detail side eleva 
tional view of the carline hanger or support, and Fig. 16 is an end view of the same. 
In Figs. 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 I have illustrated a modified construction of my 
improved carline in which the carline proper, E, is simply a beam extending from one 
side plate to the other and rests in suitable hangers 10 10, supported by said side 
plates. These hangers 10 10 consist of pockets 11, adapted to receive and support one 
end of the carline and at the same time, by means of inverted-U or stirrup shaped 
portions 12 12, are adapted to overlap and rest upon the side plates in a similar man 
ner and for the purpose described and illustrated in the preferred construction of my 
improved carline. In this latter construction I substitute for the purlin-pockets 33 
and the ridge-pole pocket 4 suitable brackets or supports 13 13, adapted to receive 
said purlins and a bracket 14, adapted to receive said ridge-pole. These brackets 13 13 
and 14 are substantially of the same construction and are placed in their proper and 
respective positions on the carline E'. . 
The lower portions or bases of the pockets 1313 and 14 are provided with depending 
flanges 15 15, adapted to overlap the sides of the carline, thereby providing a substan 
tial bearing and support for the same against any end thrust of their respective pur 
lins or ridge-pole, and to prevent any lateral movement of the brackets 13 13 and 14 
suitable dowels 16, depending from the base of said brackets and preferably between 
the flanges 15 15, engage suitable holes in the top of the carline. The upper portion 
of these brackets 13 13 and 14, upon which rest the earlines and ridge-pole, is provided 
with suitable flanges 1717, arranged at right angles to the flanges 15 15. Flanges 
17 17 engage and overlap the sides of the said purlins and ridge-pole, thereby forming 
a substantial support against any side thrust of carline, and to prevent any end thrust 
of the purlins suitable dowels 18 rise from the top portion, preferably between the 
flanges 17 17, and engage suitable holes bored into the lower face of the purlin. 
The upper portions of the brackets 13 13 and 14, which receive the purlins and 
ridge-pole, and the lower portions, which engage the earlines, are preferably separated 
by webs 19, which may be made to suit any style of car, pitch of roof, or depth of 
carline, as is obvious. 
The only material difference between the purlin-bracket and the ridge-pole bracket 
resides in the construction of the upper portion-i. e., the upper portion of the purlin- 
bracket is made preferably on a slant or incline of a corresponding pitch to the incli 
nation of the roof, as is fully illustrated in Figs. 10, 13 and 14. 
In Figs. 15 and 16 I have shown the idea of using an ordinary I-beam in the con 
struction of a carline E. in which case the hangers 10 10 may be riveted or otherwise 
secured to the beam and the carline then supported as before described. It will be 
readily understood that the brackets 1313 and 14, with slight changes in the lower 
portion, may be suitably attached to said I-beam carline E', and thus produce a strong, 
durable, and effective carline. 
6. A carline consisting of a body provided with hangers adapted to engage side 
plates, said carline being, also, provided with brackets or supports, said brackets or 
supports being adapted to receive the purlins and ridge-pole, substantially as described. 
7. A carline provided with inverted-U-shaped hangers on its ends adapted to 
engage the side plates, and brackets resting on, or secured to, the upper face of said 
carline, said brackets being provided with flanges for embracing the purlins or ridge 
pole, and flanges for embracing the carline, substantially as described. 
* 8. A carline provided with hangers, brackets. for the purlins and ridge-pole, said 
brackets being provided with flanges for embracing said purlins or ridge-pole, and 
flanges for embracing the carline, and dowels for engaging said purlins or ridge-pole, 
and dowels for engaging said carline, substantially as described.' 
Official Gazette, 
December 15, 1908. . 
: 
- 
2 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US607946.txt	No. 607,946. 
(No Model.) 
 
A. McKANNA. 
Patented July 26, 1898. 
ORDER FILE FOR LOCOMOTIVE ENGINEERS. 
(Application filed July 30, 1897.) 
S 
Wiiposses 
16-26- 1621.7% y bis 
::::::::::::::::::: 
 
I57eplor 
47tos /27Az727co. 
Aftoppeys, 
C22-56. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AMOS MCKANNA, OF EMPORIA, KANSAS. 
ORDER-FILE FOR LOCOMOTIVE-ENGINEERS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 607,946, dated July 26, 1898. 
Application filed July 30, 1897, Serial No. 646,567, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, AMOS MCKANNA, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Emporia, 
in the county of Lyon and State of Kansas, 
have invented a new and useful Order-Eile 
for Locomotive-Engineers, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
My invention relates to files, and particu 
larly to an order-file adapted especially for 
use by locomotive-engineers or under condi 
tions requiring an interchangeable or suc 
cessive use of a plurality of filing-pins in or 
der that the filed instruments-such as bills, 
orders, and other papers-may be classified. 
As above indicated, the file embodying my 
invention is particularly designed for use by 
railway-engineers, who during a trip usually 
receive more or less running orders which 
must be executed consecutively or which are 
successively in effect and abandoned or an 
nuled, and all of these orders must be pre 
served (those which have not been executed 
in order that they may be inspected to insure 
accuracy and those which have been executed 
or have been superseded in order that they 
may be subsequently consulted) to insure 
the safety of the train and justify the actions 
of the engineer. To provide for this classi 
fication of orders, I employ filing-pins each 
of which is of looped construction, having a 
shank engaged with a securing-plate adapted 
to be attached by any suitable means to a 
base, said securing-plate engaging the shank 
of the filing-pin between the looped lower end 
of said pin and a tongue for closing the throat 
of the hook, whereby vertical displacement 
of the filing-pin with relation to the securing 
plate is prevented in one direction by said 
tongue and in the other direction by the 
closed end of the loop. In carrying out my 
invention I may employ a plurality of these 
filing-pins mounted upon a common base, 
whether that base is movable to enable the 
engineer to change its location in the cab or 
is stationary, and consists of a fixed sup 
port, such as the wall or other portion of the 
locomotive-cab, and to distinguishably desig 
nate a plurality of hooks constructed sub 
stantially as above indicated the securing 
plates may be distinguishably colored, where 
by orders of one class placed upon one of the 
hooks are distinguishable from orders of an 
other class engaged with another hook. 
Further objects and advantages of this in 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be 
particularly pointed out in the appended 
claim. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of an order-file constructed in accord 
ance with my invention, the same being shown 
in operative position in a locomotive-cab. 
Fig. 2 is a detail view in perspective of one 
of the filing-pins with the attached designat 
ing-plate. Fig. 3 is a similar view of the de 
vice embodying my invention, showing a 
modified arrangement of the filing-pins where 
in a permanent base is employed. Fig. 4 is 
a detail view of a filing-pin, showing a slightly 
modified construction of designating-plate. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw. 
lings. 
The preferable embodiment of my inven 
tion consists, essentially, of a base to which 
are fixed duplicate filing-pins, which may be 
distinguishably designated by plates of dif 
ferent colors threaded upon the shanks of the 
pins above the looped or paper-holding por 
tions of the latter, whereby the designating 
plates are unconcealed and unobscured by 
orders or other papers engaged with the fil 
ing-pins, said plates forming the means of 
attachment of the pins to a base. 
In the construction illustrated in Fig.1 the 
base 2 is movable or portable and consists of 
a board or equivalent object, to which are at 
tached the distinguishably-designated filing 
pins, and by suitable means provided for that 
purpose this base may be suspended upon a 
projection 13 upon the Wall 1 of a locomotive 
cab or similar fixed object. In Fig. 3, on the 
other hand, the distinguishably-designated 
filing-pins are secured to a permanent base 
consisting of the wall of the cab or its equiva 
Obviously the construction of each filing 
pin is susceptible of numerous modifications; 
but as it is desirable to employ a pin suitable 
for facilitating the engagement and disen 
gagement of the papers without allowing the 
accidental displacement thereof. I preferably 
employ a construction (shown in detail in 
Fig. 2) which embodies a straight shankar 
ranged parallel with the base and doubled 
upon itself to form a loop in a plane perpen 
lent, 
- 
95 
IOO 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
40 
45 
 
2 
607,946 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55. 
dicular to the base and extended to provide displacement of said pin is prevented by the 
looped lower end of the same, which is located 
an impaling-needle 10, a holding-arm 8 ex 
below the lower edge of the plate. Thus it 
tending forwardly from the shank at an in 
will be seen that the securing-plate engages 
terval from and approximately in the plane 
the shank of the filing - pin between the 
of said loop and having a transversely-offset 
planes of said holding or closing arm and the 
finger 9 to engage the impaling-needle and 
looped end of the pin to prevent relative dis 
thus close the throat of the filing-pin and 
placement of the pin and securing-plate, 
form an obstacle to prevent the accidental 
displacement of papers engaged with the pin. 
whether the latter is attached to a fixed ob 
ject or not. Also, in practice I prefer to pro 
This engaging finger 9 is preferably arranged 
vide the free end of the impaling-needle above 
perpendicular to the line of the holding-arm 
the plane of the holding-arm 8 with a return 
8 and is not returned or bent rearwardly to 
bend 11, terminating in a sharpened point 12. 
Ward the shank for the reason that it is desir 
able to displace the impaling-needle laterally 
Inasmuch as the colors red and White are 
recognized in the railway-service as repre 
without necessitating the backward swinging 
senting, respectively, danger and safety, I 
movement thereof. 
have found it expedient in carrying out my 
Attached to the shank of each filing-pin is 
invention to adopt these colors as those by 
a plate, and the plates 3 and 4 illustrated in 
which the securing-plates are distinguished, 
the drawings, and which may be differently 
and the specified arrangement of the plates 
colored, serve to designate the functions of 
upon the shanks of the filing-pins above the 
the filing-pins to which they are respectively 
planes of the loops which are formed between 
These plates constitute the means 
attached. 
the shanks and impaling-needles of the filing 
of securing the filing-pins to the base and 
pins provides for the permanent exposure of 
are provided with openings engaged by secur 
these plates by locating the orders or other 
ing-screws. The shank of each filing-pin is 
papers (indicated in the drawings at 14) with 
threaded through oppositely-extending half 
their upper edges but slightly, if any, above 
eyes or loops 6, formed in the plate, said 
the lower edges of the plates. Thus by plac 
loops, in the construction illustrated in Figs. 
ing unexecuted orders or those which are to 
I to 3, inclusive, being formed by horizontally 
be executed or those which are of special im 
cutting or slitting the plates, as indicated at 
portance upon the filing-pin which is distin 
5. In Fig. 4 I have shown a modification of 
guishably designated as dangerous and 
this construction wherein the plate is pro 
filing the less important orders or those which 
vided with a series of openings 15, through 
have been executed upon that pin which is 
which the shank is extended; but it will be 
designated by a safety distinguishing 
seen that the portions of the plate between 
mark the engineer is constantly reminded of 
said openings are looped or bowed alternately 
the orders requiring attention, or, in other 
in opposite directions, whereby the shank, 
Words, the orders are so classified as to avoid 
which is arranged in the plane of the plate, 
is adapted to lie parallel with the base to 
confusion in the execution thereof. 
Other advantages of the construction dis 
which the filing-pin is secured. Also, in the 
closed will be apparent to those skilled in the 
construction illustrated in the drawings, the 
filing-pin consists of a single blank of spring 
art, and it will be understood that various 
changes in the form, proportion, and the minor 
wire which is folded upon itself at an in 
details of construction may be resorted to 
termediate point to form an eye 7, which is 
without departing from the spirit or sacrific 
arranged parallel with the base and is pref 
ing any of the advantages of this invention. 
erably spread to form a broad bearing upon 
Having described my invention, what I 
the base to prevent the turning of the shank 
with relation to the plate. For instance, in 
claim is 
A train-order file having a looped filing-pin 
Fig. 1, wherein the movable base 2 is em 
ployed, the upper filing-pin is arranged suffi 
consisting of a shank extended at its lower 
end to form a loop and a filing-needle, and 
ciently near the upper end of the base to 
provided at an interval from said loop with 
cause its eye 7, while bearing for a portion of 
a forwardly-extending holding-arm to close 
its length upon said base, to project slightly 
the throat of the loop, and a securing-plate 
above the upper end of the base, whereby it 
provided with eyes through which said shank 
may be engaged with a suspending nail or pro 
is threaded, and being arranged between the 
jection 13, thus forming the means whereby 
planes of Said holding-arm and loop, and ex 
the base is suspended upon a stationary ob 
tending from the former to the latter, to pre 
ject. The sides of the eye 7 are respectively 
vent relative displacement of the pin and se 
extended to form the shank of the filing-pin 
curing-plate, Substantially as specified. 
and the holding-arm 8, said sides being inter 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
twisted at their point of intersection to pre 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
vent distortion of the eye and cause the hold 
the presence of two Witnesses. 
ing-arm 8 to Spring from the plane of the 
shank and hence occupy a position above the 
upper edge of the securing-plate, whereby 
downward displacement of the filing-pin with 
relation to the plate is prevented. Upward 
ELIHU McKANNA, 
WILLIAM. S. JAY. 
AMOS MCKANNA. 
Witnesses: 
75 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608046.txt	No. 608,046. 
(No Mode.) 
H. W. HOLLAND & T. WOOD WAR). 
Patented July 26, 1898. 
DOUBLE BARREL SINGLE TRIGGER FIREARM. 
(Application filed Oct. 16, 1897.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
the ngfirls. PeFERS co. Photo-Ho, washingtoN, d. c. 
 
No. 608,046. 
(No Model.) 
H. W. HOLAND & T. WOODWARD. 
Patented July 26, 1898. 
DOBLE BARRE SINGLE TRIGGER FREARM. 
(Application filed Qet. l6, 1897.) 
... 2 Sheets-Sheet 2, 
 
 
A2Zvesses 
re. Norris PETERs co, Photo-Lith 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIENRY WILLIAM HOLLAND AND THOMAS WOODWARD, OF LONDON, 
ENGLAND; SAID WOODWARD ASSIGNOR TO SAID HOLLAND. 
D OUBLE BARRE L SINGLE-TR G GER FREARM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,046, dated July 26, 1898. 
Application filed October 16, 1897, Serial No. 655,423, (No model.) 
55 
75 
(tity concern: 
To a/l, it'? On, it 
IBe it known that we, HENRY WILLIAMHOL 
LAND, residing at 28 Maida Vale, and THOMAS 
WOODWARD, residing at 69 Ashburnham 
road, London, in the county of Middlesex, 
England, gun-makers, subjects of the Queen 
of Great Britain, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Breech-Loading 
Small-Arms, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to double-barreled 
guns with a single trigger. In many of such 
guns the trigger acts on and raises a longitu 
dinally-moving slide having lugs on either 
side so placed that when the slide is in one 
position the right-hand lug is beneath the 
right-hand sear, so that the right-hand bar 
rel is discharged when the trigger is pulled, 
while when the slide is in its other position 
the left-hand lug is beneath the left-hand sear 
and the left-hand barrel is discharged when 
the trigger is pulled. Various devices have 
been proposed to prevent the premature dis 
charge of the second barrel by the involun 
tary pull of the trigger caused by the recoil 
from first discharge; but there have been ob 
jections to all of these. 
According to this invention we give to the 
slide an unusually long travel, so that the in 
Voluntary pull takes place before it has 
reached the position for firing the second 
barrel. 
Figures 1, 2, and 3 are side elevations, partly 
in section, of the central portion of the mech 
anism, the two locks, one on either side of it, 
being removed, but the positions of the sears 
of these locks being indicated. Figs. 4 and 
5 are a plan and end elevation of the slide. 
Fig. 6 is a plan, the top being removed. Fig. 
7 is a side elevation and section on the line 
77 of Fig. 6. 
a is the slide. (Shown separately in plan 
and end elevation at Figs. 4 and 5.) The 
bridge-piece a' rests on the top of the plate 
U', forming part of the trigger b. The nose 
U of the trigger projects up through the slot 
a, and its pivot to works in the slot a. 
c is a lever pivoted atc', whose nose engages 
with the notch a' in the slide. 
c is a spring acting on the lever c and 
Fig. 8 is a rear elevation. 
tending to cause it to draw the slide a for 
ward. 
at a are lugs on the sides of the slide a. 
d is the safety-bolt, carrying a projection 
d', which when the bolt is in the position 
shown in Fig. 1 comes above the nose b of 
the trigger and prevents the latter from be 
ing pulled. 
d is a lug on the bolt d, which when the 
bolt is drawn back, as in Fig. 1, comes against 
the lever c and carries it and the slide a to 
their rearmost positions. 
e and fare the sear and the blocking-Sear, 
respectively, of the right-hand lock, the re 
mainder of which is not shown in Figs. 1, 2, 
and 3. The corresponding sears e'f'' of the 
left-hand lock, when in place, lie in the same 
transverse lines as these, as shown in Figs. 6 
and 8. 
The action is as follows: Opening the breech 
to reload carries the safety-bolt drearward 
and cocks both hammers g in the usual Way. 
The rearward movement of the bolt, as above 
explained, draws back the slide a, and the 
cocking depresses the searf, which therefore 
descends in front of a small lug or projection 
a on the slide ct, the parts being brought into 
the position shown in Fig. 1. The safety-bolt 
is then pushed forward, but the slide a is pre 
vented from moving with it, as the lug a 
comes against the searf. If the trigger be 
pulled, the right-hand barrel is now fired and 
the parts are brought to the positions shown 
in Fig. 2. When the trigger is released, the 
searf remains in its raised position, and the 
lug a can therefore escape from it, and the 
slide a is free to move forward, so that the 
parts take the positions shown in Fig. 3, the 
lug a being beneath the sears of the left-hand 
barrel, which is therefore fired when the trig 
ger is again pulled. 
Owing to the considerable distance through 
which the slide has to move the second or in 
voluntary pull of the trigger caused by the 
recoil of the right-hand barrel takes place be 
fore it is possible for the slide a to have 
reached the position shown in Fig. 3. 
It will be observed that the slide C, is not 
retarded or impeded in its forward movement 
after the first barrel is fired. It will also be 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
608,046 
and the sears operating one sear when in One 
of its extreme positions and the other Sear 
when in the other, means for holding the slide 
in one extreme position when the gun is 
cocked, an arm pivoted at the top of the lock 
and engaging with the slide, a Spring acting 
on the arm, and a safety-bolt adapted to move 
above the trigger and restrain its movement 
and carry the arm and slide to one extreme 
position. 
5. The combination of a single trigger, tWO 
Sears, a slide interposed between the trigger 
and the sears operating one sear when in one 
of its extreme positions and the other sear 
when in the other, a lug on the slide, a block 
ing-sear engaging with the lug and holding 
the slide in one extreme position. When the 
gun is cocked, and means tending to carry 
the slide to the other extreme position, the 
distance between the two extreme positions 
being such that the slide cannot pass from 
the one to the other in the interval between 
the first pull and the involuntary pull of the 
trigger. 
6. The combination of a single trigger, two 
Sears, a slide interposed between the trigger 
and the Sears operating one Sear When in One 
of its extreme positions and the other Sear 
when in the other, a lug on the slide, a block 
ing-sear engaging with the lug and holding 
the slide in one extreme position when the 
gun is cocked, an arm pivoted at the top of 
the lock and engaging with the slide and a 
Spring acting on the arm. 
7. The combination of a single trigger, two 
sears, a slide interposed between the trigger 
and the Sears operating one sear When in one 
of its extreme positions and the other sear 
when in the other, a lug on the slide, a block 
ing-sear engaging with the lug and holding 
the slide in one extreme position when the 
gun is cocked, an arm pivoted at the top of 
the lock and engaging with the slide, a spring 
acting On the arm, and a safety-bolt adapted 
to move above the trigger and restrain its 
movement and carry the arm and slide to one 
extreme position. 
HENRY WILLIAM EHOLLAND. 
THOMAS WOODWARD. 
Witnesses: 
EUSTACE HASELL, 
W. M. HARRIS, 
FRED C. HARRIS. 
65 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
observed that the arm C multiplies the motion 
of the safety-bolt d-that is to say, the lower 
end of the arm c moves very much farther or 
has a very much longer range of movement 
than the bolt d. Obviously the slide a might 
be connected with any other moving part of 
the lock to impart the desired movement; but 
it is always desirable that the movement of 
the part of the lock which gives motion to the 
slide should be multiplied by the connecting 
devices, so that the slide may have a rela 
tively long movement when passing from its 
position for operating the first barrel to its 
position for Operating the second barrel. 
What we claim is 
1. The combination of a single trigger, two 
Sears, a freely-moving slide unretarded while 
moving from its position of firing the first bar 
rel to its position while firing the second bar 
rel, means for holding the slide in one ex 
treme position when the gun is cocked and 
means for moving the slide after the first pull 
of the trigger and continuing this movement 
until after the involuntary pull on the trig 
ger which occurs immediately after the first 
pull and before the second pull which fires the 
second barrel. 
2. The combination of a single trigger, two 
sears, a slide interposed between the trigger 
and the Sears, a moving part of the lock and 
a connection interposed between such moving 
part of the lock and the slide, which multi 
plies the motion and gives to the slide an in 
creased movement relatively to such moving 
part of the lock, and means for holding the 
slide in one extreme position when the gun is 
cocked, the arrangement being such that af 
ter the first pull of the trigger the slide is 
moved freely forward and continues to move 
until after the involuntary pull of the trigger, 
which occurs immediately after the first pull 
and before the second pull which fires the sec 
ond barrel. 
3. The combination of a single trigger, two 
sears, a slide interposed between the trigger 
and the sears operating one sear when in one 
of its extreme positions and the other sear 
when in the other, means for holding the slide 
in One extreme position when the gun is 
cocked, an arm pivoted at the top of the lock 
and engaging with the slide and a spring act 
ing on the arm. 
4. The combination of a single trigger, two 
Sears, a slide interposed between the trigger 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608146.txt	No. 608,146. 
(No Model.) 
Patented July 26, 1898. 
W. H. BARKER. 
BCYCLE BELL. 
(Application filed May 3, 1898.) 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. H. BARIKER, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
BEVIN BROTHERS MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF EAST HAMPTON, 
CONNECTICUT. 
BICYCLE-BELL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,146, dated July 26, 1898. 
Application filed May 3, 1898, Serial No, 679,567, (No model.) 
55 
75 
. 
e. 
To all, Luhon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. H. BARKER, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Hartford, in the county of Hartford and 
State of Connecticut, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Bells, of 
Which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, whereby any one skilled in the 
art can make and use the same. 
My invention relates more particularly to 
the class of bells used on vehicles for the pur 
pose of sounding an alarm; and the object of 
my invention is to provide a bell of this class 
in which the striking mechanism may be 
brought into operative connection with a 
Yable part for the purpose of sounding a 
To this end my invention consists in the 
device as a whole, in the combination of parts 
making up such a device, and in the details 
and their combination, as more particularly 
hereinafter described, and pointed out in the 
claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
view of a portion of the front fork of a bicycle, 
showing the front wheel with my improved 
bell operatively mounted in connection with 
the wheel on the fork. Fig. 2 is a detail view 
of the base-plate, looking inside, with the mech 
anism mounted thereon. Fig. 3 is a detail 
edge view of the bell with parts broken away 
to show construction. Fig. 4 is a detail view 
of a base-plate, showing a diagram of different 
positions of the pinion-lever. 
In the accompanying drawings the letter a 
denotes the front fork of a bicycle, and b the 
front wheel mounted therein. 
The letter c denotes a clamp secured to the 
front fork in any suitable manner and having 
an arm c' connected therewith at one end, the 
other end of the arm bearing a base-plated 
of a bell secured thereonin any suitable man 
ner, a post d, to which is secured a gong d, 
forming a suitable means of connection be 
tween the base-plate and gong. 
A hammer e is pivoted on the base-plate 
and is controlled in its striking movements 
by the springs e'e', suitably mounted on the 
base-plate. 
A striking-disk f is mounted on a post f", 
secured to the base-plate, and a striking-gear 
- 
. 
g is arranged to impart rotation to the strik 
ing-disk. A striking-pin f is secured to the 
striking-disk in position to encounter a pro 
jection e' on the hammer e in the rotation of 
the disk. 
Astriking-lever his pivoted, preferably, to 
the base-plate on the outside, one end of the 
striking-lever being provided with a cord l'or 
like means for swinging the lever on its pivot. 
To the opposite end of the lever is pivoted a 
shaft i, having mounted on one end a pinion 
l, and on the other end afriction-disk. This 
shaft i projects through a slot din the base 
plate, the pinion k being located inside of the 
base-plate. A spring l holds the lever h at 
one limit of its play. 
The pivotal point of connection of the strik 
ing-lever h is solocated with reference to the 
striking-gear g that the pinion k as the le 
ver is swung on its pivot shall Swing past 
the gear and at a distance therefrom to cause 
the teeth of the pinion and gear to mesh. 
The path of movement of the pinion in the 
swinging movement of the striking-lever as 
the pinion engages the gear is in the same di 
rection as that in which the gear rotates to 
operate the striking mechanism, and this in 
sures the engagement of the teeth. On the pin 
ion and gear without liability of the teethin 
terfering with each other in a manner to 
wedge and prevent a proper operation of the 
device. 
It is preferred that the lever shall swing in 
the same direction as that in which the pin 
ion shall rotate to cause the proper sounding 
of the alarm. 
I claim as my invention 
1. In a bell-striking mechanism including 
a gear, a swinging lever, a pinion mounted 
on the lever, a friction-disk operatively con 
nected with the pinion, means for rotating 
the friction-disk, and means for swinging the 
lever to cause engagement of the pinion and 
gear and friction-disk with driving means. 
2. In a bell-striking mechanism including 
a gear, a Swinging lever, a pinion mounted 
on the lever and adapted to be swung past a 
point at the periphery of the gear and on a 
radial line thereof with the teeth of the gear 
and pinion engaging, a friction-disk con 
nected with the pinion, means for rotating 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
9o 
95 
CO 
2 
608,146 
support, a disk operatively mounted in con 
nection with the hammer, a gong, a gear con 
nected with the disk, a swinging lever, a pin 
ion mounted on the lever, a friction-disk op 
eratively connected with the pinion, means 
for driving the friction-disk, and means for 
swinging the lever to cause the pinion to en 
gage the gear and the disk to engage the driv 
ing means. 
WILLIAM II. BARKER 
Witnesses: 
ARTHUR. B. JENKINS, 
GRACE E. METCALF. 
the friction-disk, and means for swinging the 
lever to cause the pinion and gear and the 
friction-disk and driving means to engage. 
3. In combination in a bell-striking mech 
anism including a gear, a Swinging lever, a 
pinion mounted on the lever in position to 
engage the gear on a tangent to the pitch 
line thereof, a friction-disk connected with 
the pinion, means for driving the friction 
disk, and means for swinging the lever to 
cause the gear and pinion and the friction 
disk and driving means to engage. 
4. A support, a hammer mounted on the 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608246.txt	No. 608,246. 
C. ARLDT. 
Patented Aug. 2, 1898. 
ELECTRICAL SIGNALING APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING COMMANDS. 
(Application filed Dec. 29, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
CFY 
S 
title3et2title 
 
L. 
r 
area 
 
- 
fall () did NZ 
 
 
Z 
22: f; it 
%263:1. ------...-3. Y. 4.4%, 
--------------------- 
Azave ador: 
a 42-a-s-s-zed, 
V 
he NORRS PEERS co. Photo-lifho washiofer to c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CONRAD ARLDT, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
ELECTRICAL SIGNALNG APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING COMMANDS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,246, dated August 2, 1898. 
Application filed December 29, 1897, Serial No. 664,453, (No model.) Patented in England May 7, 1897, No. 11413, and in 
France May 7, 1897, No, 254,366, 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, CONRAD ARLDT, engi 
neer, a subject of the King of Saxony, residing 
at Berlin, in the German Empire, have invent 
ed a certain new and useful Improvement in 
Electrical Signaling Apparatus for Transmit 
ting Commands and the Like; and Idohereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
Patents for this invention have been ob 
tained in the following countries: Great Brit 
ain, No. 11,413, filed May 7, 1897, and France, 
No. 254,366, filed May 7, 1897. 
Electrically-operated signaling apparatus 
for transmitting commands and the like as 
heretofore employed are more or less unre 
liable in their working in consequence either 
of the use of interpolated mechanical de 
vices or on account of variations in the po 
tential difference when their action de 
pended upon changes of resistance effected 
in the transmitting instrument. 
The present invention relates to a construc 
tion of electrical signaling apparatus where 
by such unreliability is entirely obviated. 
I will describe my invention with reference 
to the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figures 1 and 2 show vertical sections of 
One form of the Sending and receiving instru 
ments, and Fig. 3 a plan section. Fig. 4 
shows a vertical section, and Fig. 5 a plan, of 
another construction of receiver in which a 
system of six (or it might be three or other 
multiple of three) coils i' i*i; it i is are ar 
ranged with their axes parallel to the axis of 
rotation of the magnet. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the trans 
mitter consists of a resistance-coil a, closed 
on itself, which is supplied with current at 
two diametrically opposite points by a mov 
able sliding contact-arm b' U*, rotated by 
means of a movable lever c and connected 
by leads s's with the source of current. At 
three points d' d' d', situated one hundred 
and twenty degrees apart, this current is 
taken from the resistance-coil and is con 
ducted, by means of three leads e'ee, to the 
receiving instrument. The latter consists of 
an arrangement of three or of a multiple of 
three coilsf'f''f'', in the magnetic field of 
which is a magnet g with pointer h, mounted 
on an axis on which it can revolve freely. 
The coils are here shown as arranged per 
pendicularly to the axis of the pointer. The 
connections of the circuits are such that the 
three leads e', e, and e are respectively con 
nected to coils situated at an angle of one 
hundred and twenty degrees to each other. 
The other ends of these coils are connected 
by leads with the entering ends of the dia 
metrically opposite coils, the other ends of 
which are connected together by a ring 
shaped conductor l. 
Referring to Figs. 1, 2, and 3, the action of 
the apparatus is such that a current supplied 
by means of the opposite sliding contacts l' 
and b to the resistance C is so distributed 
through the leads e'e'e' and the receiver-coils 
f'f''f'' that the latter constitute a magnetic 
field whose direction always corresponds to 
that of the contact-arm b and hand-lever C of 
the transmitter. In the position shown at 
Fig. 3, for example, the positive current en 
ters at b' and divides in such manner that 
one part passes through the two half-coils of 
Ct, directly to the opposite negative contact l'. 
This part of the current has no influence upon 
the action of the apparatus and by a suitable 
proportioning of the resistance of C. can be 
made so small as to be negligible. The other 
portion of the current entering at b' divides, 
one portion going to the right to d and thence 
to wiree', passing to the outer end of the coil 
f', which it traverses, and passes out to the 
common wirel. The winding of this coil and 
also that of the coilsfand f is such that if 
the current flows from outside to inside a 
north pole is produced at the inside. Conse 
quently in this instance a north pole will be 
produced at the inner end off'. The other 
portion of the current passes to d and thence 
to e, where it passes to the inner end of the 
coilf, thence passing through the coil and 
out to the common wirel, thus creating an 
inner north pole in the magnet.f. The cur 
rents which pass to the common wire or ring 
conductor l return to the negative pole of the 
battery. Thus from the ring conductor lthe 
current passes to the inner end of the coilf, 
thence through the coil to the wire e, thence 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
85 
90 
95 
IOO 
2 
608,246 
preciable effect upon this direction, the ac 
curacy of the indications of the pointer is in 
this invention independent of variations in 
the potential of the current used. 
In apparatus for giving orders, with reply, 
the transmitter of the one apparatus is con 
nected to the receiver of the other apparatus. 
It is also possible without further trouble to 
operate from one transmitter any desired or 
varying number of receivers simultaneously. 
Obviously the arrangement may also be 
such that in the receiver there is provided a 
fixed permanent magnet g, while the coilsf, 
which are then provided with a pointer, have 
their movement in the field of this constant 
magnet. 
Having now particularly described my in 
vention, what I claim is- . 
In an electrically-actuated signaling appa 
ratus, the combination of a transmitting in 
strument comprising a closed wire coil, two 
diametrically opposite rotatable contacts sup 
plying current thereto, three leads connected 
to the coil at points one hundred and twenty 
degrees apart and a receiver consisting of three 
coils connected to the leads and acting upon 
a central rotatable magnet having a pointer 
whereby variation of resistance in the trans 
mitter caused by the change of position of its 
rotatable contacts will effect the movement of 
the pointer in the receiver to the correspond 
ing position quite independent of any varia 
tions in the tension of the current supplied, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
Witnesses. 
CONRAD ARTDT. 
Witnesses: 
CHARLES H. DAY, 
HENRY HASPER. 
45 
55 
75 
to the arml, to the negative pole of the bat 
tery. The north poles of f' and f' and the 
south pole off now form the components of 
a magnetic field whose direction will be the 
same as that of coilf', so that the magnet g 
and index h will also assume that position, 
and the latter will therefore have exactly the 
same position as b and c of the sending in 
strument. If now b and c be turned until b 
is brought to d, then the positive current en 
tering at O' will divide into two parts, which 
will flow through a till they reach the 
branches d and d, passing thence through 
the leads eande' to the receiver. In the lat 
ter the currents will pass through coilsf' and 
f in the direction from without to within, 
thus forming inner north poles. From f* 
if the currents pass into the ring conductor l 
and, joining, pass thence through the coil f' 
from inside to outside, producing an inner 
South pole, and finally the current passes 
from f' through e' and d to b, and so back to 
the current-generator. The poles of ffif' 
will thus form the components of a magnetic 
field the direction of which will correspond 
to the position of b c and which will bring 
g and h into a corresponding position. By 
the order of succession of the connections of 
the points d' d?ds with the coils f' if f this 
shifting can be made to take place in the same 
direction as in the transmitter or in the oppo 
site direction, at will. On further rotation of 
the contact-lever b in the transmitter the re 
spective operations and changes of the cur 
rent are repeated in the coils of the receiver, 
so that a complete rotary field is produced, 
which always moves in a synchronous man 
ner with the transmitter-lever. As only these 
variations of resistance affect the direction of 
the magnetic field, while the strength of the 
same-that is to say, the strength of the cur 
rent introduced into the circuit-has no ap 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608346.txt	No. 608,346. 
(No Model.) 
 
J. C. SHARP. 
STUMP SPLTTING DEVICE. 
(Application filed sept. 7, 1897.) 
Patented Aug. 2, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
No. 608,346. 
- 
Patented Aug. 2, 1898. 
J. C. SHARP. 
STUMP SPLITTING DEVICE. 
(Application filed Sept. 7, 1897.) 
 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN C. SIIARP, OF DELAVAN, WISCONSIN. 
STUMP-SPLITTING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,346, dated August 2, 1898, 
Application filed September 7, 1897, Serial No. 650,861. (No model.) 
To all whon, it naily concert: 
Be it known that I, JoHN C. SHARP, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Delavan, in the county of Walworth and 
State of Wisconsin, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Stump-Splitting 
Devices, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
When large stumps with green roots are re 
moved bodily with a stump-pulling machine, 
considerable earth is frequently raised with 
the roots, leaving a good-sized hole to fill up 
as Well as the labor of removing the earth from 
the roots, and if the stump be large it is heavy 
and difficult to handle and dispose of it. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
cheap and handy devices to be used in con 
nection with a stump-pulling machine where 
by its power may be utilized in splitting a 
stumpinto two or morepieces. Then with light 
power the pieces may be pulled out separately 
and be more easily handled. Furthermore, 
as in the process of splitting the stump will 
usually rise severalinches, loosening the earth 
more or less from its roots, and being pulled 
out in pieces, less earth is therefore taken up 
and a smaller hole left to fill than if the stump 
were pulled out bodily, raising the entire 
mass of earth in and above its roots. 
My invention consists of certain details 
hereinafter described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, in which similar numerals and 
letters of reference indicate like parts, Figure 
1 is a side elevation of my stump-splitting de 
vice with its wedge part in two sections con 
nected together, and the splitting device is 
in this view shown in position ready to be 
pulled through the stump 26. Fig. 2 is a plan 
view showing the wedge part of the device 
cut in horizontal section from the draft-bar, 
the latter part being removed to more clearly 
show the wedge part splitting the stump open. 
Fig. 3 is a side elevation of a modified form 
of my stump-splitting device, showing the 
wedge part in two sections and the front sec 
tion detachably connected to the draft-bar. 
Fig. 4 shows a plan view of the draft-bar alone 
of the splitting device shown in Fig. 3; and 
Fig. 5 shows a side elevation of the wedge 
part, shown also in Fig. 3, but it is detached 
from the draft-bar in this view. Fig. 6 shows 
a side elevation of a modified form of my 
stump-splitting device, its draft-bar alone 
being shown in plan view in Fig. 7 and its 
wedge part in side elevation and broken sec 
tion in Fig. 8. Fig. 9 is a side elevation of a 
modified form of my stump-splitting device, 
the downwardly-projecting part at the front 
end being shown as detachably connected to 
the draft-bar, and is shown in side elevation 
detached and in broken section in Fig. 10. 
Fig. 11 is a side elevation of a modified form 
of my stump - splitting device, showing the 
downwardly-projecting part detachably con 
nected to the front part of the draft-bar, said 
downwardly-projecting part being shown in 
side elevation and detached from the draft 
bar in Fig. 12. Fig. 13 is a side elevation of 
a modified form of my stump-splitting device, 
showing the Wedge part in two sections de 
tachably connected and also showing the lat 
eral flange on the wedge. Fig.14 is a plan view 
of my wedge shield or stop, showing how it 
is applied to the Wedge, the Wedge being shown 
as cut in horizontal section below the draft 
bar. A side elevation of Said wedge shield 
or stop as applied to the Wedge is also shown 
in Fig. 13. Fig.15 is a view of a broken sec 
tion of the draft-bar of my stump-splitting 
device with a detachable wedge part shown 
in broken section, also showing the tongue 
part 14 made in cylindrical form and fitting 
into a vertical round opening in the draft-bar. 
My stump-splitting device may be made of 
any strong and suitable metal and preferably 
of a metal that can be cast. 
The approximately horizontal draft-bar 1 
is preferably made with a downwardly-pro 
jecting part 2 at its front, with one or more 
holes 3 to receive the pin 4 of a clevis 5 for 
connecting the draft-bar to an eye or link 6 
on a draft-rope 7. At the rear end of the 
draft-bar 1 is another downwardly-projecting 
part A, with a wedge-point 8. The wedge 
part tapers from rear to front and may be 
made in two sections B and C, and on one of 
the sections two jaws 9 may be made with 
holes 10 to receive a vertical pin 11, which pin 
also passes through a vertical hole 12 in the 
other wedge-section. There are other simple 
ways in which the Wedge-sections may be de 
tachably connected together that I may use 
when occasion requires. The object in mak 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
608,846 
o 
3O 
45 
SO 
55 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
OC 
I O5 
O 
I I5 
ing the Wedge part in Sections is to render 
the handling lighter, and if the first or front 
section of the Wedge B splits the stump open 
widely enough the rear section C may not be 
attached or used, and in some cases after the 
Still in D has been Split. Some I may pass the 
draft-cable through the split opening and at 
tach it between the jaws 9 to the pin 11 and 
pull the Wedge - Section C alone directly 
through the stump, so as to split it open more 
widely. The Wedge part may in places be 
cast hollow or have openings D to remove un 
necessary stock and reduce the weight. 
Around the outer part of the draft-lbar and 
also the downwardly-projecting part at its 
front I preferably cast a lateral rib 13 to 
strengthen and stiffen the parts and extend 
the lower part of said rib 13 rearwardly above 
the Wedge part, so as to well stiffen the rear 
part of the draft-bar and strongly connect the 
Wedge part thereto. The object in having 
the front part of the draft-lbar bent or turned 
downwardly is to provide for a hitching-point, 
for the draft-cable approximately on the same 
horizontal plane as the lower part of the wedge 
Ol' below it even in some cases, so that there 
is no tendency of the wedge to rise and run 
out of the top of the stump before it has passed 
entirely through, and with the front part of 
the dra?t-bar thus bent or projecting down 
Wardly there is not the tendency to pry the 
Wedge part up higher than would be desired, 
as Would often be the case if the draft-bar 
Were made straight and the top of the stump 
then serving as a fulcrum for such a pry. It 
will be readily seen that thus bending or turn 
ing downwardly the front of the draft-bar is 
a very valuable and important feature of my 
invention, as the Wedge must, then go through 
the stump on the same plane as that on which 
the hitching-point of the draft-cable moves. 
In some cases I make the wedge part, sepa 
rate connecting it with the draft-bar by means 
of a tongue part, 14 sliding into a vertical 
opening 15, made in the draft-bar to receive 
it, and may be held in place by a cross-pin 16 
passing through holes 17 in the tongue and 
also in the sides of the opening 15. This ar 
rangement of the parts provides for lighter 
handling, for raising or lowering the wedge 
part. When desired, and also permits the use 
With the draft-bar of wedge parts made of 
(lifelent, thicknesses. I in sono instances 
also make the wedge part separate from the 
draft-bar, providing an opening IS to receive 
the draft-bar, and the cross-pin 19 may be 
used through the holes 20 and 21 in the wedge 
part and draft-bar, thus permitting the wedge 
part to be slid along the draft-bar and Jheld 
at the various points when desired. The 
downwardly-projecting part 2 may also be 
detachably and adjustably connected to the 
draft-bal' by means of an opening made either 
in said down Wardly-projecting part 2 or in 
the draft-bar and a cross-pin used, as heroin 
before described, for detachably connecting 
the Wedge part, and draft-bar. For small 
stumps I sometimes use a splitting device, 
Fig. 13, without the front part of the draft 
bar being bent or turned down. 
The lateral flange 22, Fig. 13, is sometimes 
made on the wedge part to strengthen and 
stiffen it, and said flange also has a tendency 
to prevent, the wedge part from lising when 
being pulled through the stump. 
The wedge part should be made (tuite long, 
tapering very gradually, so as to not recuire 
too much power to pull it through the stump, 
and should be made wide enough at its rear 
end to split, the stump open deeply enough in 
the ground so that the sections may casily 
separate when being pulled. The point of 
the wedge is preferably made straight up and 
down or at right angles to the horizontal 
draft-bar. In Some cases I cast a fillet, 23 in 
the corner, as shown, to strongly tie the draft 
bar and its rear downwardly-projecting part 
together. 
If for pulling the splitter through a stump 
I use a stump-pulling machine such as is an 
chored to a stump and swings laterally on the 
ground into its proper dra ?t-line during such 
adjusting, the changing draft would be liable 
to exert a lateral or foul strain on thc wedge 
point and perhaps cause it to bond or break. 
So in order to have the machine in its proper 
draft-line before the wedge is made to enter 
the stump I provide a shield or stop IV, which 
I attach to the wedge in any simple and slit 
ble manner or by means of a cross-pin 25 pass 
ing through holes in the sides of the shield 
and a hole in the Wedge, as shown in Jigs. I-1 
and 13. The blunt face of the stop or shield 
bearing against but not going into the stump 
causes the machine to swing into proper draft 
line, and then the shield or stop may be re 
moved and the wedge pulled through the 
stump. When the stump has been split into 
sections, the draft-cablo of the stump-pulling 
machine is attached to them and they are 
pulled out. 
While I have shown and described the pre 
ferred form of my stump-splitting and stamp 
removing devices, I do not wish to be limited 
thereto, as many modifications could bo made 
Without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. In a stun)-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-loar with a down 
Wardly-projecting part, with a wedge-point on 
it, and a part of said wedge projecting rear 
Wardly from said downwardly-projecting art, 
of said draft-bar, and said wedge adapted to 
pull through and split open a stump when 
suitable power is applied to said draft-bar, 
all substantially as shown and described and 
for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a down 
Wardly-projecting part with a wedge-point on 
it, a laterally-projecting flange on the wedge 
part to strengthen said Wedge and aid in hold 
ing it down when being pulled through a 
 
608,346, 
3. 
stump, and said Wedge adapted to split the 
Stump open, all substantially as shown and 
described and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a down 
Wardly-projecting part with a wedge-point on 
it, and a part of said wedge projecting rear 
Wardly from said downwardly-projecting part 
of Said draft-bar, said wedge made in two sec 
tions detachably connected, and said wedge 
adapted to pull through and split open a 
stump when suitable power is applied to the 
front end of said draft-bar, all substantially 
as shown and described and for the purpose 
set forth. 
4. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a down 
wardly-projecting part with a wedge-point on 
it, and a part of said wedge projecting rear 
Wardly from said downwardly-projecting part 
of said draft-bar, said Wedge made hollow or 
with an opening in it to render it lighter than 
if made in solid form, and said wedge adapt 
ed to pull through and split open a stump 
when suitable power is applied to the front 
end of said draft-bar, all substantially as 
shown and described and for the purpose set 
forth. 
5. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a down 
Wardly-projecting part with a Wedge-point on 
it and a part of said wedge projecting rear 
wardly from said downwardly-projecting part 
of said draft-bar, said Wedge made in two sec 
tions detachably connected, and one of said 
sections made hollow or with an opening in 
it to render it lighter to handle than if made 
in solid form, and said Wedge adapted to pull 
through and split open a stump when suit 
able power is applied to the front end of said 
draft-bar, all substantially as shown and de 
Scribed and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a wedge 
part detachably connected thereto by means 
of a slidable joint, and said wedge adapted 
to pull through and split open a stump when 
Suitable power is applied to the front end of 
said draft-bar, all substantially as shown and 
described and for the purpose set forth. 
7. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a part 
projecting downwardly from its front, and 
means for connecting the lower end of said 
downwardly-projecting part to a draft-cable, 
and at the rear end of said draft-bar a part pro 
jecting downwardly therefrom with a wedge 
point on it, and said wedge part adapted to 
pull through and split open a stump when 
suitable power is applied, all substantially as 
hy and described and for the purpose set 
forth. 
8. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation with a horizontal draft-bar of a part 
projecting downwardly from its front, and 
means for connecting the lower end of said 
downwardly-projecting part to a draft-cable, 
and at the other end of said draft-bar, a part 
projecting downwardly therefrom with a 
wedge-point on it, a part of said wedge pro 
jecting rearwardly from said latter down 
wardly-projecting part of the draft-bar, and 
said wedge adapted to pull through and split 
open a stump when suitable power is applied 
to the draft-bar all substantially as shown 
and described for the purpose set forth. 
9. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a part 
at its front projecting downwardly therefrom 
and means for connecting the lower end of 
said downwardly-projecting part to a draft 
cable, and at the rear end of said draft-bar a 
part projecting downwardly therefrom and 
with a wedge-point on it, said Wedge part pro 
jecting rearwardly from said latter down 
wardly-projecting part, and said wedge part 
made with an opening in it or hollowed out 
so as to lighten it, and said wedge adapted to 
pull through and split open a stump when 
suitable power is applied to said draft-bar all 
substantially as shown and described and for 
the purpose set forth. 
10. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a part 
at its front projecting downwardly therefrom 
and means for connecting the lower end of 
said downwardly-projecting part to a draft 
cable, and at the rear end of said draft-bar, 
a downwardly-projecting part with a wedge 
point on it, said wedge made in two sections 
detachably connected, and Said Wedge adapt 
ed to pull through and split open a stump 
when suitable power is applied to said draft 
bar, all substantially as shown and described 
and for the purpose set forth. 
11. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a part 
at its front projecting downwardly therefrom 
and means for connecting its lower end to a 
draft-cable, said downwardly-projecting part 
detachably connected to said draft-bar by 
means of a slidable joint, and at the rear end 
of said draft-bar, a part projecting down 
Wardly therefrom with a Wedge-point on it, 
and said wedge adapted to pull through and 
split open a stump when suitable power is 
applied to said draft-bar, all substantially as 
shown and described and for the purpose set 
forth. 
12. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a part 
projecting downwardly therefrom with a 
wedge-point on it, a stiffening-rib or thick 
ened part 13, on said draft-bar above said 
wedge part, and said Wedge adapted to pull 
through and split open a stump when suit 
able power is applied to the front end of said 
draft-bar, all substantially as shown and de 
scribed and for the purpose set forth. 
13. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a part 
projecting downwardly from the rear end of 
said draft-bar with a wedge-point on it, a 
stiffening-rib or thickened part 13, on said 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
I OS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
A. 
608,346 
said point to prevent it from pulling through 
the stump, when so desired, substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
15. In a stump-splitting device, the combi 
nation of a horizontal draft-bar with a part 
projecting downwardly from the front end 
thereof, and means for connecting the lower 
cind of said downwardly-projecting part to 
a draft-cable, a part projecting downwardly 
from the rear end of said horizontal draft-bar 
with a wedge part formed on the lower endl 
of said latter downwardly-projecting part, 
and said downwardly-projecting part con 
nected at its upper end both slidably and piv 
otally to said draft-bar, all substantially as, 
and for the purpose set forth. 
JOIN C. SI ARIP. 
Witnesses: 
LESLIE (. STI ARIP, 
WA IFR. C. JARIRs. 
25 
35 
O 
draft-bar above said wedge part, a part pro 
jecting downwardly from the front of said 
draft-bar, means for connecting said latter 
downwardly-projecting part of said draft-bar 
to a draft-cable, and said wedge part adapted 
to pull through and Split open a stump when 
suitable lower is applied to said draft-bar, 
all substantially as shown and described and 
for the purpose set forth. 
14. In a device to aid in the removal of 
stumps, the combination of a horizontal 
draft-bar with a part projecting downwardly 
from its front end, an eye or means on the 
lower end of said downwardly-projecting part 
for connecting the draft-cable of a stump-cN 
tracting machine thereto, a part projecting 
downwardly from the rear end of said hori 
Zontal draft-bar, with a point made on the 
lower end of said latter downwardly-project 
ing part, and of a stop or suitable means on 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608446.txt	No. 608,446. 
 
(No Mode.) 
E. P. EASTWICK, JR 
SUGAR CRYSTALLIZER. 
(Application filed Apr. 16, 1897.) 
Patented Aug. 2, 1898. 
 
WITNESSES : 
THE RdRRIS PETERs co: PHOTo-LITHo, washington.d.c. 
WE 
at 7.26 
A 77OARNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD P. EASTWICK, JR, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA. 
SUGAR CRYSTALLIZER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,446, dated August 2, 1898. 
Application filed April 16, 1897. Serial No. 632,460, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To att, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, EDWARD P. EASTWICK, 
Jr., of New Orleans, in the parish of Orleans 
and State of Louisiana, have invented a new 
and Improved Apparatus for Crystallizing 
Sugar in Motion, of which the following is a 
full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of my invention is to provide an 
apparatus for crystallizing sugar in motion 
which will give a more complete movement to 
the mass than has been heretofore attained 
by Such an apparatus. 
. Another object of the invention is to so con 
struct the apparatus that it will obviate the 
grinding and breaking of the grains incident 
to the Ordinary apparatus by reason of the 
arms, spirals, or paddles ordinarily apper 
taining to such machines scraping against the 
inside of the cylinder, since in the improved 
device the cylinder and its agitators turn to 
gether, effecting a thorough mixture of the 
masse-cuite without any tendency to injure 
the grain of the Sugar. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal vertical section 
through the improved apparatus. Fig. 2 is 
a transverse section through the apparatus. 
Fig. 3 is a side elevation of a slightly-modi 
fied form of the apparatus, parts being broken 
away; and Fig. 4 is a transverse section 
through a slightly-modified form of the cylin 
der of the apparatus. 
The crystallizing-tank A is of cylindrical 
shape, closed at its ends, and in its simpler 
form (shown in Figs. 1 and 2) is placed cen 
trally within three rings 10, 11, and 12. The 
two outer rings 10 and 12 rest upon roller 
bearings 13, while the central ring 11 is pro 
vided with exterior teeth 14, geared with a 
worm 15 upon a drive-shaft 16, the latter hav 
ing suitable driving-pulleys 17. A shaft 18 
is passed longitudinally through the center 
of the cylinder, being secured to the ends of 
the same. The shaft serves as a central brace, 
and lateral braces 19 are secured at intervals 
w 
m 
to the fore sides of the shaft and to the inner 
side Wall of the cylinder, as is particularly 
shown in Fig. 2. Longitudinal bars 20 con 
nect the transverse braces of each series, the 
Said longitudinal bars being nearer the inner 
than the outer ends of the transverse braces, 
as is also shown in Fig. 2. 
Two plates 21 and 22 are employed, being 
attached at opposite sides of diametrically 
opposed transverse braces 19 and their con 
necting-bars. Near the center of the cylin 
der the plates leave the transverse braces to 
which their major or Straight portions are at 
tached, being curved toward the side wall of 
the cylinder. The curved portions 23 of the 
plates are bent in opposite directions and rest 
upon the longitudinal bars 20, connecting the 
transverse braces 19, which are at an angle 
to the braces mainly supporting the plates, 
as is also shown in Fig. 2. The plates con 
stitute shelves, dividing the cylinder into . 
practically two compartments B and B', con 
necting at the center of the cylinder, while 
the main compartments are in a measure sub 
divided. The shelves extend from the cen 
ter of the cylinder to its side surface and from 
end to end of the cylinder. The cylinder is 
filled to about two-thirds of its capacity with 
the masse-cuite, and as the cylinder is re 
volved that portion of the masse-cuite which 
is at the bottom is carried up by the shelves 
and delivered at the top of the cylinder with 
out any tendency to break up the grains of 
the Sugar. 
In what is normally the top of the cylinder 
a covered opening 24 is formed, through 
which the masse-cuite is introduced into the 
cylinder, and the cylinder is further pro 
vided at one or both ends with covered open 
ings 25, which constitute manholes, admit 
ting of access to the interior of the cylinder. 
When it is desired to cool the cylinder, this 
may be accomplished as shown in Fig. 2, in 
which a funnel-shaped trough 26 is con 
structed capable of extending practically 
from end to end of the cylinder, being sus 
pended from any adjacent support 27. The 
upper or enlarged portion of the trough is 
filled with water and the lower portion with 
sponge 28 or other absorbent material, the 
absorbent filling being brought in engage 
ment with the periphery of the cylinder, so 
W 
9 O 
95 
OC 
5 
25 
45 
so 
 
2 
608,446 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
55 
that when the cylinder revolves its surface 
will be thinly coated with water, which, 
(quickly drying, Will cause the cylinder to rap 
idly cool, or the cylinder may be constructed 
as shown in Fig. 4, in which the periphery 
of the cylinder is provided with corrugations, 
forming a series of pockets, and ridges inter 
vening the pockets. Water may be delivered 
to the pockets through a tube 29 or its equiv 
alent, and the Water will be passed from one 
pocket to the other until completely dis 
charged. Under this arrangement the evap 
oration of Water would not be so rapid as un 
der the cooling arrangement shown in Fig. 2, 
but in many instances might be more desir 
able. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown the cylinder as jack 
eted. The cylinder in this case is provided 
With a central supporting-ring 30, and a jacket 
31 is formed upon each side of this ring, the 
ring being in its turn held to travel upon 
roller-bearings 32. The shaft 33 in the cyl 
inder is carried some (listance beyond the 
ends and is mounted to turn in boxes placed 
upon suitable standards 34. The power ap 
plied for turning the cylinder consists in form 
ing at one end of the shaft, 33 a worn-wheel 
35, engaging with a worm 36 on a drive-shaft 
37. The cooling material or the material that 
is to enter the jacket is introduced through a 
stationary pipe 38, which is carried into a lon 
gitudinal channel 39, made in the worm 
Wheel and that portion of the shaft adjacent 
thereto, a suitable packing-gland being em 
ployed. Branch pipes 40 are carried in op 
posite directions from the inner end of the 
channel 39 to a connection with opposite sides 
of the jacket adjacent to the driving end of 
the cylinder, the two jackets being connected 
by short lengths of pipe 41. The material 
finds its exit from the jacket at the opposite 
end of the cylinder in like manner as it, ob 
tained ingress-namely, branch pipes 42 are 
carried from the jacket at the discharge end 
of the cylinder to a connection with a chan 
nel made in the shaft, at that end of the cyl 
inder, with which channel a stationary off 
take-pipe 43 is connected. Apparatus for this 
purpose has been in use for some time, and 
as generally constructed consists of a closed 
Ol' Open receptacle which is stationary, hav 
ing Withill it moving arms, spirals, or pad 
dles to keep the mass in motion. The method 
of Crystallizing sugar in this way is to form 
the grain in the ordinary manner in a vacuum 
pan and then to drop the entire mass (called 
masse-cuite ) from the pan into the crys 
tallizing-talk, where the mass is kept in mo 
tion for Several hours. This movement causes 
the Sugar to crystallize and the grains to grow; 
but, as heretofore stated, such an apparatus 
is very defective, since the contact of the re 
volving agitators with the sides of the tank 
Will break up or destroy the grains, in many 
cases largely defeating the object sought to 
be obtained. 
In the operation of the improved apparatus 
it is adjusted with the opening 24 in its up 
permost position, as illustrated in the draw 
ings, and is then filled to about two-thirds of 
its space with masse-cuite. IPower is applied 
to the cylinder through the medium of the 
drive-shaft, and by means of the worm-gear 
operated from the shaft a slow rotary motion 
is given to said cylinder, the shelves there 
in moving with the cylinder. The material, 
masse-cuite, lying at the bottom of the cylin 
der is carried upward by the curved shelves 
and is discharged into the empty space above, 
thus giving constant motion to the entire 
mass. When the operation is accomplished, 
the apparatus is adjusted so that the open 
ing 24 is at its lowermost position. The power 
is then shut off and the movement of the cyl 
inder stopped. The entire contents of the 
cylinder are then discharged from the open 
ing 24 into the ordinary centrifugal mixer 
and the sugar is worked off in the centrifugal 
machine in the usual manner. The appara 
tus herein described takes the place of Sugar 
wagons or cars, in which sugar is allowed to 
crystallize at rest. The effect of motion is to 
hasten crystallization and thus reduce the 
danger of darkening or soutling. The plates 
or shelves extending from end to cind inside 
the cylinder may be straight or any shape 
desired. They may be in sections, a number 
of plates, or one single plate. The shaft JS is 
not always necessary. The bearings are not 
restricted to a shaft arranged as shown, in Ol' 
are roller's the only manner of Supporting that 
may be used. I do not restrict myself to any 
particular form of gearing or any particular 
driving mechanism. 
The revoluble cylinder need not necessarily 
be in a horizontal position, but may be in 
clined in degree and direction to facilitate the 
discharge of the contained masse-cuite. 
IIaving thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In an apparatus for the crystallization of 
sugar, a revoluble cylinder, and one or more 
plates supported within the cylinder and 
adapted to turn there with, the said plates ex 
tending from end to cind of the cylinder and 
from the sides of the cylinder toward the cen 
ter, the inner portions of the said plates being 
curved in outward directions and toward the 
side walls of the cylinder, the inner cnds of 
the plates terminating at a point between the 
center of the cylinder and the side walls so as 
to form pockets or buckets, whereby masse 
cuite contained in the cylinder may be mixed 
by being continuously carried from the bot 
tom and discharged at the top as the appa 
ratus revolves, substantially as set forth. 
2. In an apparatus for the crystallization of 
sugar in motion, a revoluble cylinder, trans 
verse braces extending from the centor of the 
cylinder to the side walls and arranged at 
angles to each other, and curved plates form 
ing pockets and extending from end to end 
of the cylinder, the said plates being sup 
7 O 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
IO5 
I IC 
I I5 
I 25 
 
608,446 
3. 
surface of the cylinder to the center thereof, 
the inner portions of said plates being curved 
in opposite directions and toward the side 
walls of the cylinder, and means for cooling 
the cylinder, substantially as described. 
5. In an apparatus for the crystallization of 
sugar in motion, a revoluble cylinder, plates 
forming shelves stationarily held in the said 
cylinder at each side of the center, the outer 
portion of the plates being straight and the 
inner portion being curved in opposite direc 
tions and extending to a point near the cen 
ter of the cylinder, and a water-distributing 
device, supported adjacent to the periphery 
of the cylinder, as and for the purposes 
specified. 
6. In an apparatus for the crystallization of 
sugar in motion, a revoluble cylinder having 
its peripheral surface corrugated forming a 
series of longitudinally - extending pockets, 
means for revolving said cylinder, and means 
for distributing water to the periphery of the 
cylinder to cool the same, substantially as 
specified. 
35 
45 
EDWARD P. EASTWICK, JR. 
Witnesses: 
C. K. MILLER, 
HELEN K. EASTWICK. 
ported by said braces and extending from the 
junction of one set of said braces. With the 
side walls of the cylinder to the braces ar 
ranged at angles to the first-mentioned braces 
and terminating at a point on the braces be 
tween the center of the cylinder and the side 
wall, as and for the purpose set forth. 
3. In an apparatus for the crystallization of 
sugar in motion, a revoluble cylinder, a shaft 
extending longitudinally through the center 
of the cylinder, transverse braces secured to 
opposite sides of the shaft and to the inner 
side wall of the cylinder, longitudinally-ex 
tending bars connecting the transverse braces 
of each series, and plates attached to oppo 
sitesides of diametrically-opposed braces and 
their connecting-bars, the said plates extend 
ing from end to end of said cylinder and from 
the peripheral surface to a point near the 
center, the ends of the plates adjacent to the 
center being curved in opposite directions 
and resting upon the longitudinal bars con 
necting the other transverse braces, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
4. In an apparatus for the crystallization of 
sugar in motion, a revoluble cylinder, plates 
forming shelves rigidly secured in said cylin 
der and extending from end to end of the 
same, the said plates extending from the side 
O 
(5 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608546.txt	No. 608,546. 
(No Mode.) 
Patented Aug. 2, 1898. 
L. COBURN. 
BED STEAD. 
(Application filed Nov. 17, 1897.) . 
S2 
 
22 is 
2S2NE 
Zzze A (240Z, 
a 42-6s 
Azwez: 
the Norris Peters co, PHoro-Tho...washington, p. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
LEMUEL COBURN, OF HOLYOKE, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
COBURN METALLIC BED AND PNEUMATIC TUBE MATTRESS COM 
PANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BED STEAD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,546, dated August 2, 1898. 
Application filed November 17, 1897. Serial No. 65 8,856. (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Beitknown that I, LEMUEL COBURN, a citi 
Zen of the United States of America, residing 
at Holyoke, in the county of Hampden and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented new 
and useful Improvements in Bedsteads, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to composite bed 
steads in which the parts thereof consist of 
both iron and wood, the object being to pro 
vide animproved bedstead of this description; 
and the invention consists in the peculiar con 
Struction and arrangement of the several 
parts of the structure, all as hereinafter fully 
described, and more particularly pointed out 
in the claims. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication, Figure 1 illustrates in perspective 
view a composite bedstead embodying myim 
provements. Fig. 2 is a perspective view, 
somewhat enlarged as compared with Fig. 1, 
of detail parts of the bedstead, which are here 
inafter fully described. Fig. 3 is a sectional 
view, on line 33, Fig. 1, of parts of one post 
and the adjoining ends of side and end rails 
and their fastening devices, which are fully 
described below. 
Referring to the drawings, A indicates the 
head-frame, and B the foot-frame, of the bed 
stead. Said head-frame comprises the tubu 
lar metallic corner-posts 22, having thereon 
the top knobs 3 and the two straight head 
rails 44, of wood, each of which is secured by 
its ends to the said corner-posts, as also are the 
side rails 77, as follows: On the ends of said 
head-rails 4 4 and side rails 77 is formed a 
tenon 6, midway between the ends of which 
is placed a nut 14 in a recess, as shown. A 
metallic tenon-cap 13 is provided to inclose 
said tenon 6, which cap is secured over the 
said tenon and nut by two screws 15. Upon 
then placing the rails between said posts 2 
the concave edges 21 of said tenon-cap en 
gage with the reverse curves of the edges of 
the corner-posts, whereby they are held inline 
with the latter, and the bolts 12 12 are in 
serted through the said corner - posts and 
through said tenon-cap 13 into engagement tion. 
with said nuts 14, the latter now abutting 
against the inner side of said tenon - cap. 5o 
Upon now screwing inwardly said bolts 12 
the said head-rails 4 4 and side rails 77 and 
corner-posts 22 are securely united, and said 
rails are so held between said corner-posts 
by the engagement of said tenon-caps there- 55 
with, as aforesaid, that they retain the po 
sitions shown-i. e., with their outer and 
inner sides in a plane with the sides of the 
corner-posts 2, to which they are secured. 
Said foot-frame B also comprises two of said 6o 
corner-posts 22, and the latter are connected 
to said side rails 77 in the manner above de 
scribed. Also the foot-rails 55, which are of 
wood and of curved form, as shown, are se 
cured by their ends between their corner-posts 65 
by like devices to those employed in securing 
the ends of said head-rails 4 4 and side rails 
77 to said posts. However, the bolts which 
connect said curved rails and their posts are 
indicated by 9. 
For the purpose of providing means for sus 
taining a mattress on the bedstead which 
are easily removable dovetail-shaped verti 
cal grooves 20 are formed on the inner sides 
of said side rails 77, to which are fitted the 
dovetail-shaped lugs 19, fitting said grooves, 
and two of said lugs are secured one on each 
end of several metal bars 18, preferably tu 
bular, and the latter are thereby sustained 
in positions transversely between said side 8o 
rails 77, upon which a mattress or other bed 
ding may be placed. As a matter of orna 
ment, rods 16, each having the metallic balls 
or spheres 17 fixed thereon near their ex 
tremities, are attached to said head and foot 85 
frames vertically between the inner opposite 
edges of the head-rails 4 4 and foot-rails. 55 
thereof by inserting the ends of said rods into 
suitable sockets formed in said rails, as indi 
cated in Fig. 1. It is obvious that said bolt 
12 may have a direct screw engagement with 
the tenon-cap 13 and the nut 14 be thus 
omitted; but for bringing the edge of the 
tenon-cap freely to the most even bearing 
against the corner-post 2 when drawn by the 
bolt the nut affords the most freedom of mo 
Having thus described my invention, what 
95 
75 
25 
30 
35 
45 
2 
608,546 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
(ent, is 
1. A composite bedstead comprising tubu 
lar metal posts, several side and end rails of 
Wood extending between said posts, a metal 
lic cap secured against the ends of each of 
said rails for engagement against the surface 
of Said posts, means in said cap for engaging 
a screw-bolt therewith and a screw-bolt pass 
ing transversely through the post and cngag 
ing said cap, substantially as set forth. 
2. A composite bedstead made from metal 
and wood having metallic posts, several side 
and end rails of Wood extending between said 
posts, and means fol' connecting the ends of 
each rail with said posts consisting of a per 
forated metallic cap receiving each rail end 
and firmly secured thereon, a nut held within 
said cap opposite said perforation, and a 
screw-bolt passing transversely through the 
post and said perforation, and engaging said 
nut, substantially as set forth. 
3. A composite bedstead comprising a head 
frame consisting of two metallic posts, two 
separated rails of wood extending in right, 
lines between said posts, a foot-frame con 
sisting of two metallic posts, two separated 
ails of wood extending in curved lines be 
tween said posts, two side rails of wood ex 
tending between the posts of said head and 
foot frames, and means for connecting the 
ends of each rail with said posts consisting 
of a metallic cap receiving each rail end and 
firmly secured thereto, means in said cap for 
clingaging a screw-bolt, and a Screw-bolt pass 
ing transversely through the post and engag 
ing said cap, and drawing the same firmly 
against the post, substantially as set forth. 
4. A composite bedstead comprising a head 
O 
25 
35 
frame consisting of two metallic posts, two 
separated rails of wood extending in right 
lines between said posts, the vertical rods 10, 
having the spheres 17, thereon, fixed between 
said rails, a foot-frame consisting of two me 
tallic posts, two separated rails of wood ex 
tending in curved lines between said posts, 
the vertical rods 16 having the spheres 17 
thereon fixed between said rails, two side rails 
of wood extending between the posts of said 
head and foot frames, and means for coll 
necting the ends of each rail with said posts 
consisting of a metallic cap receiving each 
rail end and firmly secured thereto, means in 
said cap for engaging a screw-bolt, and a 
screw-bolt passing transversely through the 
post and engaging Said cap, and drawing the 
same firmly against the post, Substantially as 
set forth. 
5. A composite bedstead comprising tubu 
lar metal posts, several side and end rails of 
Wood extending between said posts, vertical 
grooves, of dovetail form on the inner oppo 
site sides of said side rails, mattress-sustain 
ing tubular metallic bars extending between 
said side rails having dovetail-shaped lugs 
on the ends thereof for engagement with said 
grooves, a metallic cap secured against the 
ends of each of Said rails for engagement 
against the Surface of said posts, means in 
said cap for engaging a screw-bolt, there with, 
and a screw-bolt passing transversely through 
the post and engaging said cap, substantially 
as set fortill. 
LENIUEI, COBURN. 
Witnesses: 
II. A. CHAPIN, 
R. T. CLEMONS. 
45 
55 
7 O 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608646.txt	No. 608,646. 
(No Mode.) 
Patented Aug. 9, 1898. 
W. F. BROWN. 
LAWN SPRINKER. 
Application filed Feb. 2, 1898.) 
929-voca 
3 wbovkov 
-42% AZ7/Ozz/7- 
>1%20-ceed 4-2CYea. &lthotroyo 
 
The Norris PETERs co, Photo-Litho. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT - OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. F. IBROWN, OF MAQUOIKETA, IOW.A. 
AWN a SPRN KER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,646, dated August 9, 1898. 
Application filed February 2, 1898, Serial No. 668,832, (No model.) 
C) 
To all whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. F. BROWN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Maquo 
keta, in the county of Jackson and State of 
Iowa, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Lawn-Sprinklers; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
lawn-sprinklers; and the object is to simplify 
the construction and provide an inexpensive, 
efficient, and durable device of this kind. 
To these ends the invention consists in the 
construction, combination, and arrangement 
of the device, as will be hereinafter more fully 
described, and particularly pointed out in the 
claims. 
The accompanying drawings show my in 
vention in the best form now known to me; 
but many changes in the details might be 
made Within the skill of a good mechanic 
without departing from the spirit of my in 
vention as set forth in the claims at the end 
of this specification. 
The same reference-numerals indicate the 
same parts of the invention in both views. 
Figure 1 is a vertical elevation, partly in 
section, of my improved lawn-sprinkler. Fig. 
2 is another form of sprinkler-cap. 
1 denotes the circular base, formed with a 
vertical axially-threaded orifice 2 to receive 
the correspondingly-threaded end 3 of the 
standard 4, removably secured therein. The 
upper end of the standard 4 is turned hori 
Zontally to form the right-angular gooseneck 
5, which terminates in a horizontal sleeve or 
collar 6. 
7 denotes the sprinkler-head, which re 
sembles the inverted frustum of a cone, its 
lower end terminating in a cylindrical tube 
8, formed with an annular flange 9, over which 
3O 
35 
 
Witnesses: 
m 
JoHN II. CRANE, 
W. P. DUNLAP. 
- 
is mounted the female coupling 10, which in 
turn receives the male coupling 12, attached 
to the flexible hose-pipe 13. The tube S has 
a bearing in the collar 6, which forms the Sup 
port for the sprinkler-head and hose-pipe. 
The upper end of the sprinkler-head 7 is 
formed with an internally-threaded collar 14, 
which receives the externally-threaded flange 
15 of the foraminous hemispherical cap 16, 
which converts the solid column of water into 
a fine Spray. 
In Fig. 2 the cap is conical in form, and at 
its apex is horizontally mounted the fan 17, 
the inclined blades of which are rotated by 
the water, which in turn is equally distributed 
over the area of which the sprinkler forms 
the center. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new and useful, and desire to 
secure by Letters Patent of the United States, 
S 
1. The combination with the vertical stand 
ard 4 formed with the horizontal collar 6, of 
the sprinkler-head 7 formed with the tube 8 
and the female coupling 10 the male coupling 
12, the hose-pipe 13 and the foraminous cap 
16, substantially as shown and described. 
2. A lawn-sprinkler comprising the stand 
ard 4 formed with the horizontal collar 6 in 
combination with the sprinkler-head 7 pro 
vided with the threaded flange 14, the remov 
able foraminous cap 16 and the fan 17, and 
the tube 8 mounted in the collar 6, the fe 
male coupling 10 mounted on the lower end 
of said tube 8 and the male coupling 12, sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit 
0SSOS. 
WILLIAM. F. BROWN. 
45 
55 
65 
75 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608746.txt	No. 608,746. 
(No Mode.) 
. F. AMES. 
Patented Aug. 9, 1898. 
TYPE AND TYPE HOLDER FOR BOX PRINTING. 
(Application filed Nov. 17, 1897.) 
 
Fig.1. 
 
928-two-330-3, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN F. AMES, OF PORTIAND, OREGON. 
TYPE AND TYPE-HOLDER FOR Box-PRINTING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,746, dated August 9, 1898. 
Application filed November 17, 1897, Serial No, 658,807, (No model.) 
I5 like surfaces. 
To all whom it may concern: . 
IBe it known that I, JoHN F. AMES, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Portland, 
county of Multnomah, State of Oregon, have 
5 invented an Improvement in Type and Type 
Holders for Box-Printing; and I hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and exact 
description of the same. 
My invention relates especially to the con 
to struction of movable type and a chase or 
holder therefor, by which they are adapted 
to be employed, in conjunction with a cylin 
der upon which the holder is mounted, for the 
purpose of printing upon wooden boxes and 
It consists of the parts and the construc 
tion and combination of parts hereinafter de 
scribed and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
2O a section on the line ac Oc of Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is 
a plan view. Fig. 3 is a section on the line 
y y of Fig. 2. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
hard-surfaced type which are especially 
25 adapted for printing upon Wooden surfaces 
and so forming the faces of these type that they 
will readily take the ink over the whole sur 
face and correspondingly imprint it upon the 
surface to which they are afterward applied. 
In the employment of ordinary type for 
printing on paper and similar soft or yielding 
surfaces the faces of the type are made flat, 
and even if the type are of considerable size 
and employed upon a cylinder-press there is 
35 no difficulty in producing a fair impression 
because of the soft and yielding nature of 
the surface upon which it is applied. When, 
however, it is necessary to print upon the 
hard and comparatively unyielding surface 
4o of wood, and when the type, figures, or other 
characters or engravings which are used 
thereon are of considerable size, it is not pos 
sible to make the large surfaces take the ink 
properly or transmit it satisfactorily to the 
In my invention the type A, of whatever 
style, are made with convex printing-faces 
and concaved backs. 
The curvature of the front and rear faces 
5o is the same as that of the cylinder upon which 
the type will afterward be mounted for use, 
and it will be seen that whatever the size of 
45 surface to be imprinted. 
In the present case I have shown this holder 6o 
the type the curvature of the surface enables 
them to properly receive the ink from the link 
roller or pad and to correspondingly print it 55 
upon the desired surface. These type are 
preferably fixed in a holder or chase B, which 
has one or more open spaces or channels b, 
adapted to receive the type or printing-plates. 
in the form of a concavo-convex plate having 
sufficient depth to properly receive the type 
and having channels made in that portion of 
the face into which the type are to be placed. 
In some cases this chase or holder is cast, hav- 65 
ingaportion of the printing-surface cast with 
it, the mold from which the casting is made 
being of the same curvature as that of the 
cylinder to which the chase or holder is to be 
subsequently applied. Thus in a brand for 7o 
certain kinds of fruit the pictorial represen 
tation of the fruit or other design may be per 
manently cast upon one part of the holder, 
and the name of the fruit may be also cast 
upon the holder having the convex surfaces 75 
required. 
-The channels are made entirely through the 
holder or chase and may be made with suit 
able relation to the permanent parts of the 
plate, and into these channels are placed the 
proprietary names or such descriptive matter 
or titles as it is desired to imprint upon the 
boxes, so that while the main portion of the 
plate is permanent a different proprietary 
name or names of the producing-orchards or 85 
the trade-mark can be introduced by means 
of the movable type and any number of boxes 
printed that may be ordered by particular 
customers. In order to retain these movable 
type in place, I have shown the ends beveled 
and diverging considerably from the face to 
the rear, as shown at a. The grooves or chan 
nels b which are made in the curved chase or 
holder B have the opposite sides correspond 
ingly beveled, so that when the type are set in 95 
place these beveled contacting faces prevent 
their passing through the holder and drop 
ping out. 
The type are placed in the holder from the 
rear or concaved face, and the meeting sides 
of the type and also the ends of the channels 
in which they are placed are beveled on radial 
lines from the center of curvature of the 
holder, so that the type fit closely together 
CO 
 
2 
608,746. 
IO 
and also within the channels. When the 
type have thus been set, they are retained in 
place by means of an iron concavo - convex 
plate C, which is smooth and of uniform thick 
ness and which fits into the concave back of 
the type-holder, this concave face fitting 
against the concave rear faces of the type 
blocks. This plate is secured in place by 
dowel-pins D or other suitable means, and 
the whole device is mounted upon a cylinder, 
by which it is carried, so that boxes may be 
imprinted by passing beneath the rotating 
cylinder and the type-faces thus produced. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
A device for printing boxes consisting of a 
segmental holder adapted to be fixed upon a 
revolving cylinder, said holder having chan 
nels made entirely through it, the ends of the 
 
channels made radial from the center of cur 
vature of the holder and the sides of said 
channels beveled and converging from the 
concaved rear toward the front, type having 
convex printing-faces and concaved rear sur 
faces, and having beveled ends and radial 
converging sides whereby they are fitted from 
the rear into the channels in the holder, and 
a smooth, curved metallic plate, of uniform 
thickness, placed back of the type and holder 
and fitting the concaved rear face of said 
holder and the corresponding concaved rear 
faces of the type whereby the type are remov 
ably held in place. 
hand. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 35 
- 
JOHN F. AMES. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH. N. TEAL, 
BLANCHE LUCKEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608846.txt	Patented Aug. 9, 1898. 
H. P. DONNELY. 
TELEGRAPHREPEATER. 
(Application filed June 23, 1897.) 
No. 608,846. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
E. severy 
Zee 
A TTORNEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
 
HENRY P. DONNELLY, OF CINCINNATI, OHIO. 
TELEGRAPH. REPEATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,846, dated August 9, 1898. 
Application filed June 23, 1897, Serial No, 641,871. (No model.) 
55 
75 
IO 
- 
- 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY P. DONNELLY, 
of Cincinnati, in the county of Hamilton and 
State of Ohio, have invented a new and Im 
proved Telegraph-Repeater, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
My invention relates to a mechanism to be 
employed at a station intermediate of two 
signaling-stations and to act as a repeater or 
relay to automatically transmit the signals, 
thus shortening the length of line operated 
by one battery. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in both the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of one of the 
relays used in the mechanism; and Fig. 2 is 
a diagrammatic view of the connections for 
the same, showing the entire line. 
In operating telegraph instruments during 
unfavorable Weather, when there are apt to 
be many leaks in the line, the efficiency of 
the line depends upon its length, the shorter 
the line the greater being the efficiency. 
With this fact in view I have endeavored to 
shorten the length of the line which will be 
operated by one battery, and therefore to in 
crease the efficiency of the line. 
The relay which I use in this mechanism is 
illustrated in Fig. 1. It consists of two elec 
tromagnets M and M, with a lever D, pivoted 
at C between the two magnets. This lever is 
provided with an armature I, which should 
be a permanent magnet, so as to be held to 
Ward whichever electromagnet it is thrown 
until withdrawn by the energizing of the op 
posite magnet. A permanent magnet placed 
at the yoke-pieces or constituting the keeper 
Would serve as well as the permanently-mag 
netized armature. The point desired is that 
one of these parts should be provided with 
a permanent magnet, so that the lever may 
be held toward whichever side it is thrown 
until withdrawn by energizing the opposite 
magnet. 
The lever D has its upper end curved back 
ward upon itself, forming a hook. It also 
has a lever d, which is pivoted thereto by its 
lower end in such a way that the pivot end 
is insulated from the main armature-lever. 
The upper end of this lever is held by spring 
action against the inner surface of the hook 
upon the outer end of the armature-lever. 
. The relay is also provided with two stops 
F and F. The forward stop is so placed as 
to engage the lever d when the armature 
lever is attracted by the magnet M, and in 
this case the contact between the upper end. 
of the lever d and the hook upon the arma 
ture-lever is broken. 
The standard. H., carrying the stop F, is 
provided with a binding-post n, or other suit 
able means to which the wire may be con 
nected. The connection from the stop F is 
to the magnet M and from there to one half 
the main line. Connection is made direct 
from the main armature-lever D by a cut into 
the main line. 
The wires forming the coil of the magnet 
M form a part of one half of the main line, 
but the opposite half from that which in 
cludes the magnet M. The connection from 
the armature-lever is to that half of the line 
which contains the magnet M. The small 
spring-held lever d is connected by a wire D 
to local ground. 
The entire diagram of the line is shown in 
Fig. 2. At one terminal station are located 
the battery B, key K, and ground G, located 
as shown, and at the other terminal station 
are located the key K", battery B", and ground 
G'. The two relays forming the rest of the 
diagram are located at an intermediate point, 
preferably at about the middle of the distance 
between the two terminal stations. 
This device may be worked by reversals of 
polarity; but the connections shown are for 
closed-circuit signaling instruments. At the 
intermediate station the line is broken. Con 
nection is made from one half of the line 
through the magnet M of one relay and the 
magnet M of the other relay, these two mag 
nets being opposite magnets of two relays 
such as above described. The other half of 
the circuit is connected through the magnets 
M' and M. 
When the two keys K and K" are closed, 
both relays are in the position shown by the 
one at the right in Fig. 2. This connects the 
battery at each terminal station with one of 
the grounds at the intermediate station. The 
battery B would be connected with the ground 
G, but disconnected from the ground G. 
35 
45 
 
95 
IOO 
2 
608,846 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
45 
If the line be broken at one of the keys, as 
K, the magnet M, under the influence of the 
battery B" at the opposite terminal station, 
will attract the lever D toward it, thus break 
ing the connection between the spring-arm d 
and the stop F and de?nergizing the magnet 
M. This is the position shown in Fig. 2. If 
now the line be closed, by depressing the key 
IK the circuit from the battery B will pass 
through the magnet M, lever D, spring-arm 
d, and connection D to the ground G. 
As the magnet M is not energized, the en 
ergizing of the magnet M by this current will 
draw the lever D toward the magnet M. This 
breaks the circuit through the spring-arm d 
and armature-lever D and restores the circuit 
through arm d and stop F, the arm d being 
displaced through contact with the stop F. 
The current then passes over the connection 
A to the magnet M of the other relay through 
the connection A", post F", spring d", and con 
nection ID to the ground G8. 
As at this time the circuit A through the 
post F, spring-arm d, and connection D to 
the ground G' is closed, the magnet M' is en 
ergized equally with the magnet M and the 
armature-lever D' is not affected. It will be 
seen that by the mechanism described the 
current through one half of the circuit is used 
to operate the relays in such a way as to trans 
mit the signal through the other half of the 
circuit, utilizing for this purpose the battery 
at the other terminal. 
This device is capable of righting itself af 
ter any displacement and does not require 
any attention. Its use will greatly increase 
the efficiency of a circuit, as the working cir 
cuit is only one-half the length which it would 
otherwise be. 
IIaving thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. An automatic telegraph-repeater com 
prising two relays, each having a main and 
an auxiliary magnet, an armature-lever piv 
oted between the magnets, a spring-controlled 
ground connection for one end of the arma 
ture-lever, a fixed line connection which trans 
fers said ground connection from the lever to 
itself when the main magnet is energized, a 
telegraph-circuit which is broken intermedi 
ate its terminals and includes in each half the 
main magnet of one relay and the auxiliary 
magnet of the other relay, and a connection 
from each half of the circuit between its in 
75 
cluded magnets to the armature-lever of the 
relay containing its main magnet, substan 
tially as described. 
2. A relay having two opposing electro 
magnets included in different circuits, an ar 
mature located between said electromagnets 
and electrically connected with one of said 
circuits, and a movable contact device carried 
by the armature and permanently connected 
to the ground, said movable contact engaging 
the armature in one position SO as to connect 
said armature to the ground directly, while 
in the other position of the armature said con 
tact is electrically connected with the other 
circuit, and out of connection with the arma 
ture-circuit, substantially as described. 
3. A relay having two opposing electro 
magnets, one of which is included in the cir 
cuit of one station and the other in the circuit 
of the next station, an armature located be 
tween said electromagnets and electrically 
connected with one of said circuits, a contact 
arm carried by the armature and movable 
relatively thereto, a permanent ground con 
nection for said contact-arm, the contact-arm 
being adapted for conducting engagement 
with the armature in one position thereof, 
and a conducting-stop included in the other 
circuit and adapted for conducting engage 
ment with said contact-arm to remove it from 
electrical connection with the armature, sub 
stantially as described. 
4. A telegraph-repeater, comprising two re 
lays, each having a main and an auxiliary 
magnet, an armature located between the 
magnets of each relay, a contact-arm carried 
by the armature, and permanently connected 
to the ground, one armature being perma 
nently connected to its main magnet and the 
other to its auxiliary magnet, each armature 
being temporarily connected to its contact 
arm in one position thereof, a telegraph-cir 
cuit which is broken between its terminals 
and includes in each half the main magnet of 
one relay and the auxiliary magnet of the 
other relay, and contacts adapted to be en 
gaged by said contact-arm and electrically 
connected to that magnet of the same relay 
which has no permanent electrical connection 
with the armature of the same relay, substan 
tially as described. 
IIENRY P. DONNELILY, 
95 
OO 
To5 
55 
 
Witnesses: 
JAS. P. IXEANE, 
P. J. RYAN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US608946.txt	No. 608,946, 
(No Model.) 
Patented Aug. 9, 1898. 
M. ADAMS. 
FINGER RING EXHIBITOR. 
(Application filed Mar. 10, 1898.) 
  
 
Az 
7 
  
 
17 
WITNESSES 
2%3766-24 
rW 
/NVENTOR 
77z7ce2es 12a2729. 
9772letely GN 
ATTORNEYS. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MARCELLUS ADAMS, OF WEST PLAINS, MISSOURI, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO JOSEPH. C. DISS, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI. 
. 
FINGER-RING EXHIBITOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 608,946, dated August 9, 1898. 
Application filed March 10, 1898, Serial No, 673,378, (No model.) 
2O 
I5 and securely held. 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MARCELLUs ADAMS, of 
West Plains, in the county of Howell and 
State of Missouri, have invented a new and 
5 useful Improvement in Finger-Ring Exhibi 
tors, of which the following is a specification. 
My invention is a device to take the place 
of the ordinary ring-trays used by jewelers 
for the display of finger-rings, and it is in the 
Io nature of a ring-exhibitor which is to be made 
in sections and screwed down into the bottom 
of the trays and which serves to securely hold 
each ring in a position in which it is fully 
exposed for examination and yet is clamped 
It consists in the peculiar construction and 
arrangement of parts, which I will now pro 
ceed to fully describe with reference to the 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view, Fig.2 an end view, 
and Fig. 3 a plan view, of one section of my 
ring-exhibitor. 
In the drawings, A represents a part of the 
bottom of the tray, which is to be covered 
25 with colored plush or velvet. B is the base 
plate of the exhibitor, which is a long strip 
of metal screwed down to the bottom of the 
tray. This base-plate is provided with a se 
ries of upright stems b, which at their upper 
3o ends are bent at or about a right angle and 
terminate in a hook-like armb' on each stem. 
In the lower part of each one of these upright 
stems b there is formed by bending the wire 
a coil or convolution c, and through each of 
35 these coils, as in a bearing, there extends a 
horizontal rock-shaft C. This rock-shaft has 
an offsetting arm C at one end with a finger 
key or push-button on its end, by which when 
depressed the rock-shaft may be tilted. This 
4.o. rock-shaft is provided at d with a spiral 
spring, whose tension Strains the shaft in a di 
rection to throw the finger-key up. Upon the 
rock-shaft, beside each vertical stem b, there 
is Wrapped and soldered a horizontal hook 
45 shaped arm e, which lies immediately below 
the corresponding arm b' above. These two 
hook-shaped arms b' and e form together a 
holder for a ring r, and there are as many of 
them in a section as may be desired. The 
5o upper armb' is hooked in the top plate of a 
ring, and the lower arm e is hooked in the 
that section. 
In constructing the ring-exhibitors it is not Ioo 
necessary to make them of different patterns 
to accommodate different sizes of rings. It 
65 
bottom part of the ring, and when the spring 
of the rock-shaft strains the lower arms e in 
a downward direction it securely holds all 
the rings in tension in an upright position, 55 
so that they cannot become accidentally de 
tached and yet are fully exposed for exhi 
bition. 
The ring-exhibitor may be formed with 
curved saddle-pieces f, covered or plain, on 6o 
the upper arms b', which saddle-pieces lie 
within the inner periphery of the ring and 
hold them in an even and true plane against 
any tendency to twist about; but this maybe 
dispensed with, if desired. 
The ring - exhibitor as thus described is 
made in sections which are placed in rows in 
the tray and screwed down, and each section 
or group of holders is made with different 
distances between the two arms to adapt them 7o 
to rings of different sizes, so that all rings of 
a size may be kept upon One section and be 
thus readily found and picked out when 
needed. When a customer calls to see rings, 
the standard ring-measure is first used to get 75 
the exact size, and then the salesman, after 
having located the section containing rings of 
that size, which is indicated thereon, presses 
upon the finger-key and rocking the shaft, as 
shown in dottedlines in Fig. 2, releases all the 8o 
rings on that section. 
With this exhibitor it will be seen that the 
needless handling of the rings by customers 
is dispensed with, and the soiling and tar 
nishing of rings by sweaty or dirty fingers 85 
are avoided. The rings are also orderly and 
safely kept, much time is saved and trouble 
avoided in classifying and replacing the rings, 
and there is also less liability to the loss of 
rings from theft. 
Another advantage is that the rings are all 
positively held, and if the tray is upset or 
jolted the rings cannot be dislodged or spilled. 
The holder is to be made of tasteful design 
and neatly plated, and forms, with the rings, 95 
a very handsome display in the tray. On 
each one of the finger-keys or buttons will be 
stamped the number and size of the rings in 
9o 
- 
. 
. . 
. 
2 
608,946 
is only necessary to bend the arm e or b', or 
both of them, so as to vary the distance be 
tween them. The device, furthermore, need 
not be mounted in a tray, but may be placed 
on strips of wood or metal and arranged in 
show-cases or Windows in Squares, triangles, 
diamond shape, or any fanciful or ornamental 
forms. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A finger-ring exhibitor, comprising two 
sets of hook-shaped arms for fitting inside 
and holding the rings, a spring-actuated rock 
shaft carrying one set of arms, and a suitable 
base or support substantially as and for the 
purpose described. 
2. A finger-ring exhibitor consisting of an 
O 
upper set of hooked arms, a horizontal rock 
shaft with a corresponding set of hooked 
arms, a suitable base or support, a key or han 
dle for rocking the shaft, and a spring sub 
stantially as shown and described. 
3. A finger-ring exhibitor, consisting of a 
base-plate with upright stems having bear 
ings in their lower portions formed by coils 
of wire and horizontal hooked arms at their 
upper ends, a horizontal shaft arranged in 
the coils of the stems, and having horizontal 
hook-shaped arms, a rocking key and a 
spring substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
MARCELLUS ADAMS. 
Witnesses: 
DAN W. BUCK, 
JASPER, UITTS. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609046.txt	No. 609,046. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
-6a-6 e4. 
a 2.5%' 
 
R. E. PONDEXTER. 
Patented Aug. 16, 1898. 
KNIFE OR SCISSORS SHARPENER, 
(Application filed Apr. 20, 1898.) 
at 3 
 
A. 
S24 . 
A 
III 
 
 
SH-IIIHLH-7 
Zvezvezozy 
Zoaez A. Zezzo-excaea 
2,64444/.46% 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
ROBERT E. POINDEXTER, OF INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. 
KNIFE OR SCIS SORS SHARPENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,046, dated August 16, 1898. 
Application filed April 20, 1898, Serial No. 678,243, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whon, it invay concern: 
Beit known that I, ROBERTE. POINDEXTER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at In 
dianapolis, in the county of Marion and State 
of Indiana, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Knife or Scissors 
Sharpeners, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to improvements in 
tools for sharpening scissors, knives, and the 
cutting edges of like tools which can be 
sharpened by drawing the blades across a file; 
and the object of the invention is to provide 
a simple, cheap, and effective sharpening de 
vice in which the relative position of some of 
the parts can be changed to enable various 
portions and all portions of the cutting-sur 
face of a flat file to be brought successively 
into use. 
I accomplish the objects of the invention 
by the mechanism illustrated in the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a view in side elevation of my 
knife-sharpening device clamped to the top 
of a table, a knife being shown in dottedlines; 
Fig. 2, a front elevation looking in the direc 
tion of the arrow in Fig. 1; Fig. 3, a horizon 
tal section on the dotted line 33 of Fig. 1; 
Fig. 4, a modified construction for sharpen 
ing Scissors, the view being an elevation look 
ing in the direction of the arrow in Fig. 5; 
and Fig. 5 is a plan view of the modified con 
struction shown in Fig. 4. 
Similar letters of reference indicate like 
parts throughout the several views of the 
drawings. 
A is the top of a table to which the sharp 
ener is fastened. 
B is a vertical plate or standard which forms 
the body of the device. 
Cand Care parallel jaws integral with the 
body B, projecting from one edge of the latter 
and adapted to receive the table-top or other 
support to which the sharpener is to be fas 
tened, which supporting-body will be inserted 
between the two jaws and held by the set 
screw B', which passes through a threaded 
opening in the lower jaw C' in the manner 
shown in the . drawings. The upper end of 
the plate B is measurably thickened, and the 
thickened portion is provided with wide flat 
bottomed grooves b, within which the flat 
- 
s 
files D are inserted. The grooves are slightly 
wider at the ends next to the table, whereby 
when the knife is drawn outwardly in sharp 
ening the pull on the file will tend to tighten 
the latter in its seat, and the walls of the 
groove are sloped inwardly at the bottom the 
better to retain the files. The files are shaped 
to fit the peculiarities in the shape of the 
grooves in which they are seated. The teeth 
of the files will be inclined outwardly and 
upwardly with relation to the sharpener when 
in operative position, whereby the tendency 
will be to peel the metal from the edge of the 
knife-blade up in the process of sharpening. 
E are plates removably secured to the flat 
sides of the body B. The body.B has the 
longitudinal slot S, and the lower ends of the 
plates E are provided with openings through 
which a bolt or screw e is projected. A boss 
e' is formed around the opening on one of the 
plates to make room for a substantial thread 
which is formed therein to engage the thread 
on the screw, whereby the two plates will be 
tightened onto the body B. Two transverse 
ribs E' and E on opposite sides of the open 
ings for the screw are formed integrally with 
the plates E on the sides next to the body B. 
The top ends of the plates E are also pro 
vided with an enlargement E, with inwardly 
sloping inner sides, which stand in front of 
the files in the manner clearly shown in Fig. 
2. These are the rests and guides for the 
knife-blades F, which are held firmly against 
the inclined sides and are pressed down 
against the file. Alongitudinally-recipro 
cating movement of the knife will cause shav 
ings of the blade to be removed. The incli 
nation of the guide to the file is such as to 
give the right bevel to the cutting edge. 
One side of the blade is sharpened at a 
time, and the construction above described is 
duplicated in a reverse direction to permit 
both edges of the blade to be sharpened suc 
cessively. The plates will be made to stand 
normally away from the files at the tops of 
the latter to an extent which will be deter 
mined by the relative height of the ribs E 
and E'. In fitting up the tool one or the other 
of the ribs can be filed to give the desired 
normal position of the heads. The exact dis 
tances of the heads from the files will be ob 
tained by the bolts G, which pass through 
IO 
25 
30 
35 
45 
SO 
u 
2 
- 
609,046 
slotted openings g through the plates and en 
ter threaded openings in the body B. 
The slot S in the body B and the slots g in 
the plates E enable the plates to be raised and 
lowered to bring the edge of the knife under 
treatment into contact with unused portions 
of the file. This is an important feature of 
my invention, as it permits the use of the en 
tire surface of the file and adds very mate 
rially to the life of the tool. 
The modification shown in Figs. 4 and 5 
embodies no essential differences of construc 
tion over that shown in Figs. 1 and 2, except 
that the part II, which corresponds to the body 
B, is placed in a horizontal position, and the 
clamp is correspondingly changed in its point 
of attachment to suit this changed position 
of the body. A horizontal body is preferable 
for convenience in a tool for sharpening scis 
sors. The adjustable plate I is of course hori 
Zontal, and the angle of the head I" is more 
abrupt to suit the bevel on the edge of the 
tool to be sharpened. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim as new, and wish to secure by 
Letter's Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a knife or Scissors sharpenel', a body 
portion having means for affixing it to a sup 
port and having a flat file removably secured 
thereto and a guide against which the blade 
to be sharpened will be held, said guide being 
opposite the cutting-face of the file and being 
removably and adjustably secured to the body 
whereby it can be changed in its position to 
bring different portions of the file into use, 
substantially as described and for the pur 
poses specified. 
. 
2. The combination, with the body having 
means for securing it to a support, and files 
removably secured to the body, of plates with 
expanded beveled ends, said ends being oppo 
site the files and said plates being adjustably 
secured to the body to permit longitudinal 
adjustment of the plates, as and for the pur 
poses specified. 
3. In a sharpener for the purposes specified, 
a fixed body portion having one or more flat 
cutting-surfaces and as many guides as there 
are cutting-surfaces secured to the body por 
tion by threaded bolts and Said guides having 
ribs on each side of the bolt between the guide 
and the body, substantially as described and 
for the purposes specified. 
4. In a sharpener the body portion having 
means for fastening it to a substantial Sup 
port and having an upper thickened end, 
grooved substantially as described, to form. 
file-seats and having screw-holes and a lon 
gitudinal slot, files mounted in the seats, a 
pair of plates bolted at their lower ends to 
the body and having ribs on each side of the 
bolt and having upper, sloping flat-surfaced 
ends opposite the files and longitudinal slots 
intermediate of the ends of the plates and 
bolts substantially as shown and described to 
fasten the plates to the body and to regulate 
the distance of the heads from the files. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand and seal, at Indianapolis, Indiana, this 
4th day of April, A. D. 1898. 
ROBERT E. POINDEXTER. 
L. S. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPH. A. MINTURN, 
E. J., IIICKS. 
4o 
45 
55 
65 
IO 
3O 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609146.txt	No. 609,46. 
(No Model.) 
Patented Aug. 16, 1898. 
H. C. HART. 
WRENCH. 
(Application filed Dec. 22, 1897.) 
Ei= T. I 
Eic. E. 
E. S. 
 
28-wee3.co: 
g%27%-46% 
262% | 
3vvuowto: 
Afzzdez7, CAa/a, 
zy &62o-eca4-zo& 
8ttozweg) 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HUBERT C. HART, OF UNION VILLE, CONNECTICUT. 
WRENCH. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,146, dated August 16, 1898. 
Application filed December 22, 1897, Serial No. 662,976, (No model.) 
in Fig. 3, thereby forming a jaw, strap, and 
pintle, the edges of the latter being filed down 
to make them round to receive the operating 
screw 7, which is held in place by upsetting 
the outer end of the pintle. The ends of the 
blank forming the jaw, after they have been 
folded to the position shown in Fig. 3, are se 
cured together by rivets 8. 
By constructing the jaw and the strap in 
the manner shown and described it is evident 
that the cost of production will be greatly 
lessened, thus enabling the Wrench to be 
placed upon the market at a greatly-reduced 
COSt. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. As a new article of manufacture, a sliding 
jaW, strap, and pintle for a Wrench stamped 
from a single piece, the blank being bent cen 
trally of its width to form the strap and then 
brought together and riveted to form the jaw 
and pintle, substantially as set forth. 
2. A Wrench consisting of a handle having 
a fixed jaw, and having teeth of screw pitch 
On one of its edges, a sliding jaw and strap 
consisting of a piece of plate metal bent into 
shape and riveted together and provided with 
an integral pintle, and a screw swiveled upon 
said pintle and engaging the teeth of the han 
dle, substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
HUBERT C. HART. 
45 
So 
55 
6o 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE E. TAET, 
ERNEST M. HART. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, HUBERT C. HART, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Union 
Ville, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Nut-Wrenches; and 
I do declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention has relation to nut-wrenches. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
Wrench the sliding jaw and strap of which 
are stamped out from a single piece of metal 
and bent into form, with an integral stud for 
the operating-nut, thereby materially reduc 
ing the expense of manufacture and provid 
ing a simple and powerful wrench at a mini 
Illum COSt. 
With this objectin view the invention con 
sists of certain features of construction and 
combination of parts, which will be herein 
after fully described and claimed. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a side elevation of a wrench constructed in 
accordance with my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
blank beforeit is bent into the form of a strap 
and jaw, and Fig. 3 is a view of the blank 
after it has been bent into the desired shape. 
In said drawings, 1 denotes the handle of 
the Wrench, having at one end a fixed jaw 2, 
and having Onits under edge a series of teeth 
3, cut in the pitch of a screw. 
4 denotes the sliding jaw, 5 the strap, and 
6 the pintle. These parts are stamped out 
of a piece of plate metal to the form shown 
in Fig. 2 and then bent into the form shown 
O 
15 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609246.txt	No. 609.246. 
(No Model. ) 
N TESLA. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1898. 
ELECTRC CIRCUIT CONTROLLER, 
Application filed Feb. 28, 1898. 
N 
A. 
Y 
2. 
Z 
O M 
L 
A 
6. 
7 
of 
A7 
A. 
Af 
s 
yr 
7. 
1% Jelly N. Al 
O 
sasts, sess 
- Zo 
D 
----------- 
-A 
A. 
WZZzzafief, 
vita--- 54 eel? 
/72%/ez27 
THE NORRIS PETERs-co. Photo-ITHo, washington.o. c. 
 
UNITED -STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
NIKOLA TESLA, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
ELECTRIC. CIRCUIT CONTROLLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,246, dated August 16, 1898. 
Application filed February 28, 1898, Serial No. 671,897, (No model.) 
O 
I5 
. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, NIKOLATESLA, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the bor 
ough of Manhattan, in the city, county, and 
5 State of New York, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Electric-Circuit 
Controllers, of which the following is a speci 
fication, reference being had to the drawing 
accompanying and forming apart of the same. 
The invention which forms the subject of 
my present application is an improvement in 
a novel class of circuit-controlling appliances 
heretofore invented by me and more espe 
cially designed to be used with my now well 
known apparatus for the production of elec 
tric currents of high frequency by means of 
condenser-discharges, but applicable gener 
ally as a means for making and breaking an 
electric circuit. 
In the circuit-controllers of the particular 
class or type to which my present improve 
ment pertains I have utilized a conducting 
liquid as one of the terminals and have em 
ployed as the other terminala solid conductor 
and provided various means for bringing the 
two into rapidly-intermittent contact. 
The distinguishing feature of my present 
improvement lies chiefly in the use of a con 
ducting liquid for both the terminals under 
conditions which permit of a rapidly-inter 
mittent contact between them, as will be 
herein set forth. 
The accompanying drawing illustrates an 
apparatus embodying the principle of my said 
improvement. 
The figure is a central vertical section of 
the circuit-controller. 
In the drawing is shown a receptacle com 
posed of two cylindrical metallic portions A 
A', secured together by bolts B and nuts C, 
but insulated from each other. The recep 
tacle is journaled, by means of trunnions 
formed on or secured to its ends, in standards 
D D, and any suitable means is employed to 
This is conveniently 
impart rotation to it, 
effected by constructing or organizing the re 
ceptacle in such manner that it may serve as 
the rotating element of an electromagnetic 
motor in conjunction with a surrounding 
stationary element E. E. The abutting ends 
of the two parts of the receptacle are formed 
with inwardly-extending flanges F, which di 
vide the peripheral portions of the recepta 
cle into two compartments G. G'. 
Into one of 
these compartments, as G, extends a spindle 
-H, having its bearing in the end of the part 
A and the trunnion secured to or extending 
therefrom... .Into the other compartment G' 
extends a spindle H', similarly journaled in 
the end of part A and its trunnion. Each 
spindle carries or is formed with a weighted 
arm K, which, remaining in a vertical posi 
tion, holds its spindle stationary when the 
receptacle is revolved. 
To the weighted arm of spindle His secured 
a standard L, carrying a tube L', with one 
open end in close proximity to the inner pe 
ripheral wall of the compartment G and the 
other directed toward the axis, but inclined 
toward the opposite compartment. 
To the 
weighted arm of spindle H' is similarly se 
cured a standard M, which is hollow and con 
stitutes a portion of a duct or passage which 
extends through a part of the spindle and 
opens through a nozzle M' into a circular 
chamber N in the wall of the part A. From 
this chamber run passages N to nozzles O, in 
position to discharge jets or streams of liquid 
in such directions as to intersect, when the 
nozzles are rotated, a strealm issuing from the 
end of tube T. 
. In each portion or compartment of the re 
ceptacle is placed a quantity of a conducting 
liquid, such as mercury, and the ends of the 
-tubes L' and M are provided with openings 
which take up the mercury when on the ro 
tation of the receptacle it is carried by cen 
trifugal force against the peripheral wall. 
The mercury when taken up by the tube L' 
issues in a stream or jet from the inner end 
of said tube and is projected into the com 
partment G'. The mercury taken up by the 
tube M runs into the circular chamber N, 
from which it is forced through the passages 
N' to the nozzles O, from which it issues in 
jets or streams directed into the compart 
ment G. As the nozzles O revolve with the 
receptacle the streams which issue from them. 
will therefore be carried across the path of 
the stream which issues from the tube L' and 
which is stationary, and the circuit between 
the two compartments will be completed by 
- 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
Od 
 
2 
609,246 
IO 
the streams whenever they intersect and in 
- 
terrupted at all other times. 
The continuity of the jets or streams is not 
preserved ordinarily to any great distance 
beyond the orifices from which they issue, 
and hence they do not serve as conductors to 
electrically connect the two sides of the re 
ceptacle beyond their point of intersection 
with each other. 
It will be understood that sofar as the broad 
feature of maintaining the terminal jets is 
concerned widely-different means may be em 
ployed for the purpose and that the spindles 
mounted in free bearings concentrically with 
the axis of rotation of the receptacle and held 
against rotation by the weighted arms consti 
tute but one specific way of accomplishing this 
result. This particular plan, however, has 
certain advantages and may be applied to cir 
cuit-controllers of this class generally when 
everitis necessary to maintain a stationary or 
nearly stationary body within a rotating re 
ceptacle. It is further evident from the na 
ture of the case that it is not essential that 
the jet or jets in One compartment or portion 
of the instrument should be stationary and 
the others rotating, but only that there should 
be such relative movement between them as 
to cause the two sets to come into rapidly-in 
termittent contact in the operation of the de 
WCe. 
The number of jets, whether stationary or 
rotating, is purely arbitrary; but since the 
conducting fluid is directed from one com 
artment into the other the aggregate amount 
normally discharged from the compartments 
should be approximately equal. However, 
since there always exists a tendency to pro 
ject a greater quantity of the fluid from that 
compartment which contains the greater into 
that which contains the lesser amount no dif 
ficulty will be found in this respect in main 
taining the proper conditions for the satisfac 
tory operation of the instrument. 
A practical advantage, especially important 
when a great number of breaks per unit of 
time is desired, is secured by making the 
number of jets in one compartment even and 
in the other Odd and placing each jet sym 
metrically with respect to the center of rota 
tion. Preferably the difference between the 
number of jets should be one. By such means 
the distances between the jets of each set are 
made the greatest possible and hurtful short 
circuits are avoided. 
For the sake of illustration let the number 
of jets or nozzles L' in one compartment be 
nine and the number of those marked O in 
the other compartment ten. Then by one 
revolution of the receptacle there will be 
ninety makes and breaks. To attain the same 
result with Only one jet, as L', it would be 
necessary to employ ninety jets O in the other 
compartment, and this would be objection 
able, not only because of the close proximity 
of the jets, but also of the great quantity of 
fluid required to maintain them. 
In the use of the instriment as a circuit 
controller it is merely necessary to connect 
the two insulated parts of the receptacle to 
the two parts of the circuit, respectively, as 
by causing brushes XY, connected with cir 
cuit-wires, to bear at any suitable points on 
the said two parts A A'. 
In instruments of this character in which 
both terminals are formed by a liquid element 
there is no wear or deterioration of the ter 
minals and the contact between them is more 
perfect. The durability and efficiency of the 
devices are thus very greatly increased. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim is 
1. A circuit-controller comprising in com 
bination means for producing streams or jets 
of conducting liquid forming the terminals, 
and means for bringing the jets or streams of 
the respective terminals into intermittent 
contact with each other, as set forth. 
2. In a circuit-controller, the combination 
with two sets of orifices adapted to discharge 
jets in different directions, means for main 
taining jets of conducting liquid through said 
orifices, and means for moving said orifices 
relatively to each other so that the jets from 
those of one set will intermittently intersect 
those from the other, as set forth. 
3. The combination in a circuit-controller 
of ducts and means for discharging therefrom 
streams or jets of conducting fluid in elec 
trical contact with the two parts of the circuit 
respectively, the orifices of said ducts being 
capable of movement relatively to each other, 
whereby the streams discharged therefrom 
will intersect at intervals during their rela 
tive movement, and make and break the elec 
tric circuit, as set forth. 
4. In a circuit-controller the combination 
with one or more stationary nozzles and means 
for causing a conducting fluid forming one 
terminal to issue therefrom, of one or more 
rotating tubes or nozzles, means for causing 
a conducting liquid forming the other ter 
minal to issue therefrom, the said rotating 
nozzles being movable through such a path as 
to cause the liquid issuing therefrom to in 
tersect that from the stationary nozzles as set 
forth. 
5. The combination with a rotating recep 
tacle divided into two insulated compart 
ments, a spindle in one compartment with its 
axis concentric with that of the receptacle, 
means for opposing the rotation of said spin 
dle, and a tube or duct carried by the spindle 
and adapted to take up a conducting fluid at 
one end from the inner periphery of the com 
partment when the receptacle is rotated and 
direct it from the other end into the other 
compartment, of a similar spindle in the other 
compartment and means for opposing its ro 
tation, a tube carried by the spindle and hav 
ing an opening at one end near the inner pe 
riphery of the compartment and discharging 
into a chamber from which lead one or more. 
passages to nozzles fixed to the rotating re 
3O 
35 I) 
45 
55 
7 O 
75 
9 O 
95 
Od 
IO5 
IO 
II5 
I25 
609,246 
3. 
ing from the same, jets of conducting fluid 
which constitute respectively the terminals 
of the controller, means for moving the noz 
zles relatively to each other so that the jets 
of the two sets are brought successively into 
contact, the nozzles of each set being arranged 
symmetrically about an axis of rotation, there 
being one more nozzle in one set than in the 
other. 
NIKOLATESLA. 
Witnesses: 
M. LAWSON DYER, 
G. W. MARTLING. 
ceptacle and adapted to discharge across the 
path of the jet from the stationary nozzle, as 
set forth. 
6. In a circuit-controller the combination 
with a rotating receptacle of a body mounted 
therein and formed or provided with a 
Weighted portion eccentric to its axis which 
opposes its rotation and a tube or duct car 
ried by said body and adapted to take up a 
conducting fluid from the rotating receptacle 
as set forth. 
7. In a circuit-controller the combination 
of two sets of nozzles and means for project 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609346.txt	No. 609,346. 
(No Model.) 
T. HEWETT. 
Patented Aug. 6, 1898. 
WHEEL FOR CHAIN GEARING. 
(Application filed Feb. 10, 1898.) 
F7C. 3. 
No.jili) 
?????SSN 
||||||||||| 
 
Wutrasses 
7 wart or 
The nor Rts Perers co., PHOTO-lTHO. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
THOMAS HEWETT, OF LONDON, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO 
THOMAS KERRISON BELLIS, OF SAME PLACE. 
WHEEL FOR CHAN - GEARNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,846, dated August 16, 1898. 
Application filed February 10, 1898, Serial No. 669,821. (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concert: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS HEWETT, me 
chanical engineer, a subject of the Queen of 
Great Britain, residing at 6 Jeffrey's Square, 
St. Mary Axe, in the city of London, England, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Wheels for Chain-Gearing, (for 
which I obtained Letters Patentin Great Brit 
ain on the 23d day of July, 1897, numbered 
17,379,) of which the following is a specifica 
tion. 
This invention relates to an improved con 
struction of wheels for chain-gearing, such 
gearing being applicable as the driving-gear 
of bicycles and other. velocipedes and for a 
variety of other or analogous uses. . 
My improved chain-wheel I construct of 
two metal disks suitably shaped and secured 
fixedly together for the purpose of carrying 
Series of antifriction-rolls to be engaged by 
the driving-chain, as will be hereinafter fully 
described, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 shows a side view 
of a gear-wheel according to the present im 
provements. Fig. 2 shows a sectional view 
of the same, taken on the line acac of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 shows an edge view of the two half 
parts of the wheel shown in Figs. 1 and 2, said 
half parts being afterward connected to form 
a wheel. Fig. 4 shows a sectional view of such 
wheels, showing the method of fastening the 
two halves together; and Fig. 5 shows a side 
view of a portion of the larger or driving 
wheel, the smaller or driven wheel being 
shown in Fig. 1. 
My improved chain-wheel I construct of 
tWO metal disks C, C, each disk being stamped 
or formed near its periphery with a shoulder 
b and then a radial extension c or flange, so 
that when the two disks are brought side by 
side and secured fixedly together a wheel is 
formed with a recess or trough-like annular 
channel d, in which the drive-chain may lie. 
The disks a C are for lightness and other rea 
sons formed with openings a' a'. Some of 
these openings are arranged to come oppo 
sitely disposed in each disk, these openings 
forming a series of clear spaces in the periph 
eral channel-bed d for the escape of mud. 
These parts may be accurately produced by 
the aid of Suitable dies and presses. 
. 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
So 
55 
The disk portion a of the wheel is provided 
with openings a', which receive correspond 
ing projections k (see Fig. 4) from a ring k, 
said projections being riveted over at their 
outer ends to firmly hold the two halves of 
the wheel together. The collar k is interi 
orly threaded and serves as a means whereby 
to attach the wheel to the driven axis. The 
interiorly-threaded portion of the collar ki 
registers with the edges of the central aper 
tures a of the disks, which are interiorly 
threaded also, the threads of said central ap 
ertures corresponding with the threads of the 
collar and forming a continuation thereof. 
Having now particularly described and as 
certained the nature of my said invention and 
in what manner the same is to be performed, 
I declare that what I claim is 
1. In a wheel for chain-gearing, the combi 
nation with two centrally-apertured disks 
having parallel radial flanges on their periph 
eries forming a circumferential groove for the 
reception of a sprocket-chain, said disks be 
ing provided with a plurality of registering 
slots, of an interiorly-threaded collar provided 
on its inner face with integral projections ex 
tending through the slots in the disks and 
headed down at their outer ends to firmly bind 
the disks together, substantially as described. 
2. In a wheel for chain-gearing, the combi 
nation with two centrally-apertured disks 
having parallel radial flanges on their periph 
eries forming a circumferential groove for the 
reception of a sprocket-chain, said disks be 
ing provided with a plurality of registering 
slots, of an interiorly-threaded collar provided 
on its inner face with integral projections ex 
tending through the slots in the disks and 
headed down at their outer ends to firmly bind 
the disks together, the edges of the said cen 
tral apertures in the disks being threaded and 
forming a continuation of the threads of the 
collar, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit 
(SSGS. 
- 
75 
9o 
95 
THOMAS HEWETT. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED GEORGE BROOKES, 
ERNEST JOHN HILL. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609446.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT }FFICE 
  
PAULLWOFF, OF ST. PETERSBURG, RUSSIA. 
VEHICLE a S P R N G . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,446, dated August 23, 1898. 
Application filed March 1, 1898. Serial No. 672,213, (No model.) 
I. ? 
2 ? 
To all ?ph???, i? ??? ????cer?: 
Be it known that I, PAULLWOFF, a subject 
of the Emperor of Russia, and a resident of 
St. Petersburg, Russia, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Springs for 
Carriages or Vehicles of All Kinds, of which 
the following is a specification. 
My invention has for its object a special 
system of springs for carriages, cars, and ve 
hicles of all kinds. 
The spring of my system, which I call the 
cable-spring system, consists, essentially, 
of a cable or a rope attached by its ends to 
the fixed parts of the body or frame of the ve 
hicle with the aid of springs of buffer type, 
the middle part of the cable or rope bearing 
on the axle of the vehicle. 
The annexed drawings represent, in Figure 
1, a side view of the general arrangement of 
the spring of my system. Figs. 2 to 6 are de 
tailed views of separate parts of my system. 
Fig. 7 represents the lower part of a carriage 
frame with my spring attached thereto. Figs. 
8, 9, and 10 represent modified forms of buf 
fer-springs. 
As shown on the drawings, my spring con 
sists of a cable a, (preferably made of steel 
Wire,) provided with eyes or lugsy on its ends, 
by which the cable is attached to the hooked 
ends of the bolts bib', fixed to the carriage 
framed by means of the buffer-springs c c'. 
It is obvious that the constructive arrange 
ments of the springs of my system may be 
greatly varied. The annexed drawings rep 
resent some practical forms of constructive 
details without limiting myself to these ar 
rangements. So, for instance, when employ 
ing a cable with eyes on its ends, Fig. 2, I 
insert in the eyes y metallic rings ac, Fig. 3, 
in order to prevent the abrading of the cable. 
The hooked ends of the bolts bb' traversing 
the fixed parts of the carriage-frame pass 
through washers or cup-formed end pieces 
e el of the buffer-springs c c", which may con 
sist of spiral springs, Fig. 1, or caoutchouc 
buffers or cup-formed springs, Fig. 7, &c. 
To allow a free motion of the bolts b b' in all 
directions, the Washerse are made of spherical 
form and are located in spherical cavities of 
the fixed parts of the carriage-frame, Figs. 5 
and 6. On the inner sides of these fixed parts 
the cavities have preferably a conical form, 
Figs. 5 and 6. The end of each bolt b b' pro 
jecting from the end washer e' of the buffer 
spring is retained by a nut for the like. 
Buffer-springs can be arranged externally 
to the fixed parts of the carriage, as shown 
on Figs. 1 and 7, or inwardly-that is to say, 
between the axle and said fixed parts. By 
making buffer-springs sufficiently long and 
by placing them between the axle and the fixed 
parts of the carriage I can in some instances 
even omit the cable, as indicated on Fig. 10. 
Figs. Sand 9 represent two forms of buffer 
springs suited to my system. In Fig. 8 the 
spring is inclosed in a sheath, and in Fig. 9 
the spring is open and is acted upon by two 
forked links. In all cases the corresponding 
parts (sheath or forked link) are attached to 
the carriage-frame, preferably by means of 
hooks. 
The cable a can be made in form of a con 
tinuous loop, the middle part of which is 
wrapped around by a cord or wire or inclosed 
in a tube, &c., as shown on Fig. 4. The mode 
of fixing the middle part of the cable to 
the carriage-axle can be also of any suitable 
kind. 
As shown in Fig. 7, the cable a can be at 
tached to the axleg by means of a box i and 
hoops k. 
Each of the carriage-axles is provided, pref 
erably, with two cable-springs of my system; 
but their number can, if desired, be increased, 
and on the other hand I can use, for instance, 
only two springs in a four-wheeled carriage 
by attaching each of the cable-springs to both 
axles of the carriage. 
Springs of my system are applicable to car 
riages or vehicles of any kind, the railway 
cars not excepted. For this latter purpose it 
is advisable to attach the ends of the cable 
to buffer-springs by means of levers in order 
to avoid the use of buffers of too big dimen 
sions, or in lieu of this. I prefer to attach 
buffer-springs directly to the axle-box of the 
railway-car. 
The chief advantages of my cable-springs 
are that all parts of the spring are subjected 
to tensions and compressions and not to flex 
- 
55 
75 
95 
? OO 
35 
45 
 
2 
609,446 
ion. Besides this the springs of my system 
have the same flexibility and elasticity not 
only in the vertical but also in all side di 
rections. 
I claim as my invention 
In combination, the axle, the frame, the 
cable having its central portion resting upon 
the axle, and a pair of buffer-springs carried 
 
by said frame and connected to opposite ends 
of the cable, substantially as described. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand in presence of two witnesses. 
I. ? 
IPAUL. L.W. OFF. 
Witnesses: 
N. TSCHIENALEFFE, 
J. N. ILON. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609547.txt	No. 609,547. 
S. , HO WARD. 
Patented Aug. 23, 1898. 
MACHINE FOR CLEANING BRCKS. 
(Application filed Apr. 11, 1898.) 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
 
Witnesses. 
u-J-Bolgul- 
/, (147- 
, 
Inventor. 
8, cf. 66omavior 
5% 
y AttorneyS, 
The Norris Peters co, Photo-LITHo., WASHINGTON, d. c. 
7, 
No. 609,547. 
S. l. HOWARD. 
Patented Aug. 23, 1898. 
MACHINE FOR CLEANING BRCKS. 
(Applicatiori filed Apr. 11, 1898.) 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
17 
Za 
J7 
SNSNS 
6 
a. 
 
 
in Ventor. 
THE NORRIs PETERs co, PHOTo-Litho. WAS-incTON, p. c 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL I. HOWARD, OF WORCESTER, MASSACHUSETTS. 
MACH NE FOR CLEANING BRICKS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,547, dated August 23, 1898. 
Application filed April 11, 1898, Serial No. 677,137, (No model.) 
55 
, 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL. T. HoWARD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Worcester, in the county of Worcester and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented a new 
and useful Machine for Cleaning Bricks, of 
which the following is a specification. 
The object of my invention is to provide a 
simple, efficient, and inexpensive machine for 
removing mortar from old bricks. 
To this end my invention consists of the 
parts and combinations of parts hereinafter 
described, and more particularly pointed out 
in the claims at the end of this specification. 
In the accompanying two sheets of draw 
ings, Figure 1 is a side view of a machine for 
cleaning old bricks constructed according to 
my invention. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
same. Fig. 3 is an end view; and Figs. 4 to 
6, inclusive, are detail views of the relatively 
movable platforms or cleaning-surfaces. 
In tearing away or remodeling building 
constructions the bricks which have been 
once used are left with mortar adhering to 
their faces, which must be removed before the 
bricks can again be used. The ordinary prac 
tice in cleaning old bricks at the present time 
is to chip or knock of the mortar from the 
faces thereof by hand. This method of clean 
ing bricks is necessarily slow and expensive, 
and by careless work in removing mortar 
from the faces of the bricks many of the bricks 
which would otherwise be saved are broken, 
so that their value is destroyed. The greater 
art of the mortar which adheresto old bricks 
is ordinarily found adhering to the upper and 
lower faces thereof, the sides and ends of the 
bricks being comparatively clean, and I have 
found in practice that by scouring or rub 
bing the top and bottom surfaces of old bricks 
free from mortar such bricks will be suffi 
ciently clean to permit them to be readily used 
again; and the especial object of my present 
invention is therefore to provide a machine 
which will scour or clean the top and bottom 
surfaces of old bricks and incidentally will 
knock off the mortar which adheres to the 
sides or ends of the bricks. 
. A machine for cleaning old bricks con 
structed according to my invention comprises 
a framework of any ordinary or approved 
construction, two substantially parallel plat 
forms or cleaning-surfaces, and means for 
producing a relative to-and-fro movement be 
tween the platforms. 
The frame of the machine is preferably 
formed of angle-irons, which are bolted or riv 
eted together, so as to form a light, strong, 
and inexpensive construction. 
The platforms are slightly inclined and are 
preferably supported so that they can be ad 
justed to different inclinations to retain the 
bricks between them for longer or shorter 
periods, as may be necessary, on account of 
the different character of the mortar which is 
found adhering to the bricks being operated 
upon. 
In the machine which I have illustrated 
adjustable cross-pieces are employed for sup 
porting the platforms, so that by changing 
one or both of such cross-pieces the platforms 
may be arranged at the desired inclination. 
The lower platform is somewhat longer 
than the upper platform, so as to extend from 
one end of the machine to receive the bricks 
which are to be operated upon, and it is pref 
erably constructed from wooden planks hav 
ing angle-irons at its side, which extend up 
above the top surface of the planks, so as to 
retain the bricksthereon while being operated 
upon. 
The upperplatform is somewhat wider than 
the lower platform, so as to form a cover 
plate therefor, and the sides of the wooden 
upper platform are also preferably bound 
with angle-irons, the end of the upper plat 
form being slightly curved upward to allow 
the ready introduction of the bricks. 
To produce a relative to-and-fromotion be 
tween the platforms as thus constructed, I 
preferably employ two upright parallel dou 
ble bent crank-shafts, which may be geared to 
turn together by means of a chain or may be 
connected by a pitman in any ordinary man 
ner. At its lower end one of the vertical 
crank-shafts is provided with a crank-arm, to 
: which power can be applied from any con 
venient source-as, for example, from the 
75 
90 
95 
O 
25 
35. ) 
45 
 
2 
609,547 
nigger-head of a hoisting-engine, such as is 
ordinarily used to operate the derricks and 
hoists employed in constructing buildings. 
Referring to the drawings and in detail, 
the framework of the machine, as illustrated, 
comprises four upright corner-pieces or legs 
10 of angle-iron, having angle-iron side pieces 
11 and cross-pieces 18. 
Adjustably secured to the uprights 10 of 
the framework, as most clearly shown in Fig. 
3, are cross-pieces 13. As shown in the draw 
ings, the cross-pieces 13 are secured in place 
by bolts which pass through slots in the up 
right 10, so that the cross-pieces 13 can be se 
cured at different elevations as desired. 
Supported on the cross-pieces 13 is a lower 
platform 14. As shown most clearly in Fig. 
5, the platform 14 comprises a Wooden plank 
or body portion having angle-irons 15, se 
cured on the edges thereof, so as to project 
above the upper surface of the plank to hold 
the bricks in place while being operated upon. 
The upper platform 16, which rests sub 
stantially on top of the lower platform 14, is 
made wide enough to form a cover for the 
lower platform and comprises a wooden body 
portion, having angle-iron reinforcing side 
pieces 17, as shown in Fig. 4. At its end the 
upperplatform 16 is slightly bent up, as shown 
in Fig. 6, so as to allow the bricks to be readily 
introduced between said platforms. 
To produce a relative to-and-fro motion 
between the cleaning-platforms, I preferably 
employ upright parallel double-bent crank 
shafts 20 and 21, which are journaled in suit 
able boxes in cross-pieces 18 of the frame. 
The crank-shafts 20 and 21 are geared to turn 
together by means of sprocket-wheels 22 and 
23, having a driving-chain 24 running thereon. 
Instead of gearing the crank-shafts 20 and 
21 together by a driving-chain they may be 
connected by a pitman-rod or otherwise 
geared, as may be desired. 
The crank-shafts 20 and 21 pass loosely 
through the platforms 14 and 16, so that as 
said crank-shafts are turned they will produce 
a relative to-and-fro motion between the plat 
forms 14 and 16. 
Springs 26 are coiled on the crank-shafts 20 
and 21 to engage the upper platform 16, and 
are secured in place by adjustable collars 27, 
which may be fastened by set-screws in differ 
ent positions in the ordinary manner to ad 
just the tension of the springs 26 to produce 
any desired pressure between the platforms 
14 and 16. 
A crank-arm 28 is secured to the lower end 
of the crank-shaft 21, and power can be ap 
plied to the crank-arm 28 from any desired 
Source to operate the machine. 
In using a machine as thus constructed for 
cleaning bricks the bricks are deposited upon 
the extending end of the lower platform 14, 
and the inclination of the platforms 14 and 16 
will cause the bricks to work slowly down be 
tween said platforms, so that the mortar ad 
hering to the top and bottom surfaces of the 
bricks will be completely scoured or removed 
therefrom, and incidentally the greater part 
of the mortar adhering to the ends and side 
pieces of the bricks will also be jarred off. 
When the mortar adhering to the bricks is 
comparatively soft, the platforms 14 and 16 
will be set at a considerable inclination, SO 
that the bricks will work their way through 
the machine more rapidly than When the plat 
forms are set more nearly horizontal. . 
I am aware that changes may be made in 
the construction of my machine for cleaning 
old bricks by those who are skilled in the art 
without departing from the scope of my in 
vention as expressed in the claims. I do not 
wish, therefore, to be limited to the form 
which I have shown and described; but 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent of the United States, is 
1. In a machine for cleaning old bricks, the 
combination of two substantially parallel 
platforms, and means for producing a rela 
tive to-and-fro motion between said plat 
forms, substantially as described. 
2. In a machine for cleaning old bricks, the 
combination of two inclined, substantially 
parallel platforms, means for adjusting the 
inclination of said platforms, and means for 
producing a relative to-and-fro motion be 
tween said platforms, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a machine for cleaning old bricks, the 
combination of a frame, two substantially 
parallel platforms, and crank-shafts for pro 
ducing a relative to-and-fro motion between 
said platforms, substantially as described. 
4. In a machine for cleaning old bricks, the 
combination of a frame, cross-pieces adjust 
ably secured to the said frame, a platform 
supported by said cross-pieces and extending 
beyond the end of the frame of the machine 
to receive the bricks to be operated upon, an 
upper platform, and vertical crank-shafts for 
producing a relative to-and-fro motion be 
tween said platforms, substantially as de 
5. In a machine for cleaning bricks, the 
combination of an angle-iron frame, compris 
ing uprights, and side pieces, cross-pieces ad 
justably secured in said frame, a lower plat 
form supported by said cross-pieces and com 
prising a Wooden body portion having angle 
iron sides extending above the wooden sur 
face, an upper platform having its ends 
slightly curved up to allow the introduction 
of the bricks between said platforms, and 
double-bent, vertical crank-shafts geared to 
gether to produce a relative to-and-fromotion 
between said platforms, substantially as de 
scribed. 
6. In a machine for cleaning old bricks, the 
combination of an angle-iron framework, com 
prising uprights and side pieces, cross-pieces 
scribed. 
w 
7o 
75 
95 
IO 
Io. 
II 
II 
2 
2 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
609,547 
3 
adjustably secured in the frame, a lower plat 
form carried by said cross-pieces and com 
prising a wooden body portion with angle-iron 
sides extending above the surface thereof, an 
upper platform having its ends slightly bent 
up to allow the introduction of bricks between 
said platforms, bouble-bent vertical crank 
shafts geared together to produce a relative 
to-and-fro motion between said platforms, 
coiled springs normally pressing down on the 
upper platform, and means for adjusting the 
tension of said springs to produce the desired 
pressure on the bricks between said plat 
forms, substantially as described. 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 15 
SAMUEL I. HOWARD. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP W. SouTHGATE, 
LOUIS W. SOUTHGATE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609648.txt	S 
t 
t 
 
No. 609,648. 
(No Mode.) 
Patented Aug. 23, 1898. 
W. C. BAKER. 
ANT FRCTION BEARNG. 
(Application filed Jan. 31, 1898.) 
WITNESSES 
22. 
w 
the Norris Peters co, Photo-Litho.washington.D. c. 
/AWWEAVTOA 
sy 
% 
2-6- 
At 5: 2-6 
ATTOANEYS 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WALTER C. BAKER, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO. 
ANT FRCTION - BEAR ENG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,648, dated August 23, 1898. 
Application fled January 31, 1898, Serial No. 668,595, (No model.) 
O 
- 
To all, whom it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WALTER C. BAKER, of 
Cleveland, Cuyahoga county, Ohio, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Antifriction-Bearings; and I do hereby de 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
act description of the invention, such as will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it per 
tains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to antifriction-bear 
ings such as are used on vehicles. 
My invention consists, first, in splitting the 
Outer threaded end of the axle and providing 
the nut which engages the aforesaid threaded 
end with an adjustable wedge which by en 
gaging the split in the end of the axle acts to 
Spread the end and tighten the fit of the 
threads, preventing loosening or turning af 
ter the nut is adjusted. 
My invention also consists in other details 
of construction, which will hereinafter ap 
pear. 
The drawing illustrates an antifriction 
bearing embodying my invention, showing 
the same in side elevation, half in section. 
Referring to the drawing. A represents the 
sleeve of the bearing. The sleeve A is pref 
erably formed in two sections united by a 
Screw-thread, as at a, and forms the bushing 
for the wheel-hub. 
B B' represent hard-metal ball-cups which 
provide the ball-races of the bearing. The 
ball-cups B B are inside of the sleeve A and 
are located, respectively, at each end thereof. 
The ball-cups are placed in sleeve A snugly, 
but in such a manner as to allow them to be 
easily removed. The longitudinal extensions 
of the ball-cups are each formed long enough 
to provide bearing-surface for at least two 
rows of balls C" C3 C3 C4. 
D represents the axle or spindle, provided 
at its outer and inner ends with bearing-cones 
E. E. and E E, respectively. The cones E, 
E", E, and E are so mounted on the axle or 
spindle D as to fit snugly, but in such a man 
ner as to allow them to revolve thereon and 
also allow them to move in a horizontal direc 
tion for adjustment. 
The sleeve A, race-cup B B', balls C'C' C8 
C, axle or spindle D, and cones E, E, E, and 
E, which sustain the load and form the bear 
ing, may be of any suitable construction; but 
- 
. 
I prefer to construct and assemble the in as 
illustrated and set forth. 
At the Outer or threaded end of the axle or 
spindle D, I provide a slit d, or, in other words, 55 
I split the axle or spindle at d. I also provide 
a conical recess d'at the outer end of the slotd. 
G represents a nut which is screw-threaded 
internally, so as to engage the screw-thread on 
the end of the axle or spindle. The nut G is 
provided with a recess G', located beyond the 
screw-thread. This recess G' is formed larger 
in diameter than the outer diameter of the in 
ternal screw-thread of the nut and allows the 6 
nut to be adjusted. The nut G is provided 
at its inner end with a flange g, which in turn 
is provided with an annular projection g', ad 
justed to engage the outer cone E'. The pro 
jection g is formed narrow, and hence is eas 
ily surfaced or made true. 
H represents an adjustable screw-wedge, 
which is pointed and formed conical at one 
end h and provided at the opposite end with 
means, such as a slit, whereby it may be op 
erated. The Wedge H is screw-threaded and 
engages a screw-thread h", formed in the nut 
G, and its pointed end enters the conical re 
cess d'. . As the screw-wedge is advanced it 
will be seen that the threaded end of the axle 
or spindle will be enlarged circumferentially 
and thus the nut G be tightened thereon. 
J represents an annular dust collar or ring 
which is screw-threaded into the inner end of 
the sleeve A. The collar J is provided with 
annular packing-pocketsi and j', adapted to 
receive and retain annular packing-ringsfi, 
of elastic material, such as felt or the like. 
The packing-ring is so shaped as to conform 
to the collar D' of the axle and form in con 
nection there with a dust and water proof 
joint at this portion of the bearing. The pack 
ing-ringi is adapted to rest on the bearing 
cone E, and thus forms an auxiliary protec 
tion against the entrance of dust or water into 
the bearing. The packing-rings f* and is are 
preferably saturated or soaked with par 
affin or analogous substance, rendering them 
waterproof. 
By providing the bearing with two annular 
packing-rings, as above set forth, I furnish 
an antifriction-bearing which is both dust 
proof and Waterproof and a bearing into 
which water cannot be forced, nor can it per 
95 
OO 
25 
35 
40 
45 
  
2 
609,648 
O 
r 
colate into the bearing between the bearings 
of the moving parts. . 
It will be noticed that the cones E and E 
are provided at their vertical faces with nar 
row annular flanges e e, respectively. The 
object of providing the narrow annular flange 
e or e' is to obviate the necessity of grinding 
or Surfacing a broad face, and thus obtain a 
true working surface in less time than where 
the whole vertical surface has to be trued. 
The adjustment of the bearings is accom 
plished through the nut G, which bears against 
the cone E. The screw-threaded wedge Hiper 
forms two functions-viz., a means for tight 
ening the nut G and also the function of a 
gage to determine the position of said nut 
in relation to the axle or spindle D and the 
cone and balls. 
-- 
What I claim is 
1. In an antifriction-bearing, the combina 
tion with an axle or spindle having a slit at 
its end, adjustable bearing-cones, antifric 
tion-balls, and an outer casing, of an adjust 
ing-nut threaded to engage the threaded end 
of the axle or spindle, and having a flange 
bearing against one of the cones, and a head 
internally recessed, and provided with a cen 
tral threaded opening, and a screw passing 
through the opening in the head of the nut, 
and provided at its inner end with a wedge 
adapted to enter the slit in the spindle. 
2. In an antifriction-bearing, the combina 
25 
 
tion with an axle or spindle having a slit and 
a conical recess at its end, adjustable bear 
ing - cones, antifriction - balls, and an outer 
casing, of an adjusting-nut threaded to en 
gage the threaded end of the spindle, and 
having an annular flange bearing against the 
adjacent bearing-cone and a head internally 
recessed, and provided with a central thread 
ed opening, and a screw passing through the 
opening in the head of the nut and provided 
at its inner end with a wedge fitting the con 
ical recess in the end of the spindle. 
3. In an antifriction-bearing, the combina 
tion with the spindle threaded at its outer 
end, and slitted and recessed, of adjustable 
cones and antifriction-balls, an adjusting-nut 
provided with an annular flange bearing 
against the outer cone, and having an inter 
nally-recessed head, provided with an inter 
nally-threaded opening, and a screw engag 
ing the threads of the threaded opening and 
having a wedge at its inner end entering the 
recess at the end of the spindle, said wedge 
screw being adjustable and removable inde 
pendently of the nut. 
Signed by me, at Cleveland, Ohio, this 26th 
day of January, 1898. 
WALTER C. BAKER. 
- 
35 
45 
55 
Witnesses: 
J. L. WARD HOOVER, 
DANIEL E. DALY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609748.txt	No. 609,748. 
Patented Aug. 23, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 
METHOD OF PRINTING REPRESENTATIONS OF WOWEN FABRICS. 
A. B. SHERWOOD. 
(Application filed Oct. 4, 1897.) 
(No Mode.) 
 
| 
III 
H III 
ZAZzz 
RSes S, 
2-22 
w 
Z722/e 2222,' 
2722-az772ezzo.S72e2evoaz, 
No. 609,748. 
A. B. SHERWOOD. 
Patented Aug. 23, 1898. 
METHOD OF PRINTING REPRESENTATIONS OF WOWEN FABRCS. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(Application filed Oct. 4, 1897.) 
 
Act () 
777WAZSSAS 
AWWAW202 
6.4% 7%, A/ 4 4%. May Y 21&lopaeus 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER B. SHERWOOD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF 
TO ZEPANIAH. S. HOLBROOK, OF SAME PLACE. 
METHOD OF PRINTING REPRESENTATIONS OF WOVEN FABRICs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,748, dated August 28, 1898, 
Application filed October 4, 1897, Serial No. 653,991. (No specimens.) 
15 mere variations of color in the thread. 
To all, whom it nay concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER B. SHER 
WOOD, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Chicago, in the county of Cook and State 
5 of Illinois, have invented a new and useful 
Improvement in Methods of Printing Rep 
resentations of Woven-Fabric Surfaces, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to the art of reproduc 
Io ing upon sheets or webs of paper or other sur 
faces capable of being printed upon surface 
patterns or designs peculiar to Woven fabrics 
and produced by relief effects in the weaving 
in contradistinction to patterns formed by 
My object is to provide an improved method 
of printing upon paper and other surfaces 
light and shade surface designs or patterns in 
imitation of the surface appearance of woven 
2d fabrics, whereby the representation shall be 
particularly realistic in appearance and be 
produced at comparatively low cost. 
There is a surface appearance to all woven 
fabrics, irrespective of any variations of color, 
25 which is peculiarly distinctive, and hitherto 
fabrics have been employed for decorating in 
numerous instances where the surface appear 
ance alone was the end sought and not es 
pecially, at least, strength or durability of 
3o texture. Attempts have hitherto been made 
to print upon paper imitations of the surface 
appearance of canvas, for instance, for deco 
rative uses, the printing being done from en 
graved or molded surfaces prepared at com 
35 paratively great expense, which effect at the 
best but indifferent results. 
My invention consists in reproducing upon 
a web or sheet of paper or other plane sur 
face the surface appearance of a woven fab 
4o ric by providing a fabric woven with the pat 
tern or design to be produced, covering the 
surface of the fabric itself withink of desired 
color, and then impressing the inked surface 
upon the plane surface. 
Figure 1 is a view representing a reproduc 
tion of a fabric, and Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional 
view of a printing-cylinder with the fabricse 
cured thereto, 
In carrying out my invention as I prefer 
So to practice it in printing upon paper I fasten 
the fabric to be reproduced upon the cylin 
der or bed of a printing-press to afford the 
45 
 
printing-surface and then operate the press 
to ink the fabric and feed the paper thereto 
in the usual way to receive the impression 55 
directly from the inked surface of the fabric. 
When the fabric is sufficiently coarse and the 
paper sufficiently thin, the latter is embossed 
with the design as well as printed there with. 
The drawings show a pattern or design 6o 
printed from Watered silk. 
By employing paper suitably tinted or col 
ored to represent the ground color of the de 
sign and then printing from the fabric upon 
the ground color with a more or less contrast- 65 
ing shade of ink of the same or another color 
singularly realistic effects-as of watered silk, 
for example-may be obtained, which cannot, 
at least without very close inspection, be dis 
tinguished from the surface of watered silk 7o 
itself. 
I do not limit my invention to the use of 
any particular mechanism for carrying it out, 
nor do I limit it to printing directly from the 
fabric upon the surface which is to preserve 75 
the design, as a press may be employed, for 
example, wherein the fabric will print upon 
a transfer-surface and the design thereby re 
printed or transferred to the paper or other 
surface to be decorated. 
I am aware that it has been proposed to ink 
materials other than woven fabrics, such as 
vegetable leaves, and to use the same for 
transferring to other surfaces; but I am not 
aware that prior to my invention woven fab- 85 
rics have been covered upon one side with 
ink and the side so covered impressed upon 
the plane surface to produce thereon the pat 
tern or design of the woven fabric. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. The method of producing a pattern or 
design upon a plane surface, which consists 
in covering one side of a sheet of fabric woven 
with the design to be produced with ink of 95 
desired color, and then impressing the side 
of the fabric to which the ink has been ap 
plied upon the plane surface, substantially 
as described. 
2. The method of reproducing a design or 
pattern upon the surface of flexible material, 
which consists in securing a sheet of fabric 
woven with the design to be reproduced upon 
the cylinder or bed of a printing-press, cova 
go 
80 
IOO 
2 
609,748 
ering one side of such fabric with ink of de 
sired color, and then impressing the side of 
the fabric to which the ink has been applied 
upon the surface of flexible material, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The method of producing an embossed 
and printed pattern or design upon a sheet or 
web of paper or like flexible material, which 
consists in covering one side of a sheet of fab 
Ioric woven with the design to be produced with 
ink of desired color, and then impressing the 
side of the fabric to which the ink has been 
applied upon the paper or the like, with force 
sufficient to emboss as well as print the pat 
tern or design upon the latter, substantially I5 
as described. ALEXANDER B. SEHERWOOD. 
In presence of 
J. W. DYRENFORTH, 
J. H. LEE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609848.txt	No. 609,848. 
(No Mode.) 
 
C. SWAN. S. J. G. GRAY. 
RAILROAD TE AND CLAMP. 
Patented Aug. 30, 1898. 
(Application filed Jan. af 1888.) 
SSSSSSSSSSNSNSN 
SN 
   
2o M2 4 16 20 s 
SS327727 
Ss S /2 
S 
M 
a. S2& 
icoao 
628 two 
3-uovoc 
-6767/76s gaea/7- 
vay 
o/22/7cza ( 67 (227. 
s62-24 tcaes &lthotics 
tries noris Peters co, photo lith, washingston, , , 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES SWAN AND JOSHUA G. GRAY, OF HILLSIDE, PENNSYLVANIA. 
RAILROAD TE AND CLAMP. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,848, dated August 30, 1898. 
Application filed January 27, 1898, Serial No. 668,167, (No model.) 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
To all whom it may conce77: 
Be it known that We, CHARLES SWAN and 
JOSHUA. G. GRAY, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Hillside, in the county of 
Westmoreland and State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Railroad Ties and Clamps; 
and we do declare the following to be a full, 
clear, and exact description of the invention, 
such as will enable others skilled in the art to 
which it appertains to make and use the same. 
Our invention relates to novel improve 
ments in combined ties and clamps for rail 
road-rails; and the object is to improve the 
construction and increase the efficiency and 
durability of the same. 
To these ends the invention consists in the 
construction, combination, and arrangement 
of the device, as will be hereinafter more 
fully described, and particularly pointed out 
in the claims. 
The accompanying drawings show our in 
vention in the best form now known to us, 
but many changes in the details might be 
made within the skill of a good mechanic 
without departing from the spirit of our in 
vention as set forth in the claims at the end 
of this specification. 
In the several views of the drawings the 
same reference characters indicate the same 
parts of the invention. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of our im 
proved tie and clamp. Fig. 2 is a bottom 
plan view. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section 
through the tie. Fig. 4 is a transverse sec 
tion at right angles to Fig. 3. 
1 denotes the lower section of the tie, which 
is preferably rectangular in form and is pro 
vided with a longitudinal pocket or recess 2 
to receive a series of packing-strips 33, which 
may be of paper, cardboard, Vulcanized or 
indurated fiber, or the like. 
4 represents the top plate, formed with a 
shoulder 5, which snugly fits the recess 2, 
and it in turn is formed with a longitudinal 
pocket or recess 6 to receive a series of pack 
ing-strips7. A central bolt 8 extends through 
the top plate and tie to bind the two together. 
9 and 10 denote the usual rails, and 12 12" 
denote separable clamps, which are counter 
parts, being identical in construction, each 
being formed with a recess 13 to receive the 
contiguous flange of the rail. Each clamp is 
formed at one end with a depending lug 14, 
which extends below the projecting flange 15 
of the top plate 4, and its inner face 16 is 
beveled inwardly and transversely, as shown. 
The opposite end of the clamp is also formed 
with a depending lug 17, which is provided 
with an integral right-angular key 18, the up 
per inner edge of which is formed with a 
transverse rabbeted recess 19 to receive the 
flange 5 of the top plate. The outer face of 
this key 18 is beveled downwardly and in 
wardly, as shown, to correspond to the bev 
eled face 16 of the lug 14 on the opposite 
clamp. It will thus be seen that these wedge 
shaped keys interlock with the lugs 14 on the 
opposite clamp, and when the bolts 2020 are 
screwed up the clamps are drawn together to 
bind the rail to the tie and at the same time 
impart a longitudinal movement in opposite 
directions to the clamps to firmly bind the 
tie between them, or, properly speaking, rig 
idly bind or clamp themselves to the tie. 
The clamps 21 and 21, which are shown fixed 
to the rail 10, are the same in principle as 
those just described, the only difference be 
ing that in this case the wedge-shaped keys 
23 23 are separate, but when drawn together 
by the bolts 24 24 said clamps operate in 
identically the same manner as those first de 
scribed. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim as new and useful, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent of the United 
States, is- 
1. The combination with the tie 1 formed 
with the longitudinal recess 2, of the top plate 
4 formed with the shoulder 5 having the re 
cess 6, the packing fabric 3, 7, and means for 
removably securing said top plate to said tie, 
substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination with a tie formed with 
parallel flanges 15, 15, of the rail 9, the clamps 
12, 12', each formed with a transverse recess 
13, a depending lug 14 having an inner bev 
eled face. 16 and a depending lug 17 formed 
with a right-angular key 18 having the rab 
beted recess 19 and means for securing said 
clamps simultaneously to said tie and rail, 
substantially as shown and described. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto set 
our hands in presence of two subscribing wit 
leSSOS. 
- 
CHARLES SWAN. 
JOSHUA G. GRAY. 
Witnesses: 
C. H. WEST, 
JAMES CHAMBERS. 
75 
95 
IOC 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US609948.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES G. RODGERs, OF SPRINGFIELD, OHIO. 
VEHICLE-TRE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 609,948, dated August 30, 1898. 
Application filed November 24 1897, Serial No. 659,691 (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may conce7n: 
Be it known that I, JAMES G. RODGERs, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Spring 
field, in the county of Clark and State of Ohio, 
have invented certain new and useful.Im 
provements in Vehicle-Tires, of which the foll 
lowing is a specification. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in rubber vehicle-tires, 
having for its object to generally improve the 
construction and efficiency of such tires and 
to render them less liable to be accidentally 
removed from their seats upon a wheel. 
With this object in view the invention con 
sists in the novel construction, combination, 
and arrangement of the parts hereinafter 
more fully described. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, and in which like 
letters and numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts, Figure 1 is a cross-sectional 
view of the improved tire. Figs. 2, 3, and 4 
are views illustrating different forms in which 
the tire-section can be made. 
Referring more particularly to the draw 
ings, A designates the wheel-rim, formed, 
preferably, as shown, with flaring annular 
side flanges 1 and with a peripheral channel, 
and it is preferred to form this channel with 
a flat bottom and with substantially flat sides 
which extend at an angle greater than a right 
angle to the bottom. 
. 
Within the rim-channel Xis a flexible yield 
ing base-section B, formed, preferably, of rub 
ber, which conforms closely to the sides and 
bottom of the channel and may be secured 
thereto in any suitable manner, but prefer 
ably is stretched to hug its seat tightly. The 
base-section is therefore shorter than the pe 
riphery of the rim and is stretched, the ends 
being connected by any suitable fastening. 
This base-section is also preferably provided 
with a peripheral groove and with outwardly 
flaring side flanges 2, which rest in contact 
with the rim-flanges, but terminate at points 
within the outer edges thereof. The periph 
eral groove of the base-section is preferably 
similar in contour to the rim-channel, having 
substantially flaring sides, and within said 
groove is secured the base of a yielding outer 
or tread section C, of rubber. This section, 
instead of being under tension, like the base 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
?? 
75 
section, is under compression, being longer 
than its seat in the base-section and com 
pressed longitudinally to the proper dimen 
sions, and the base and tread sections are ce 
mented together and to all intents and pur 
poses are practically integral, forming a tire 
which is compressed at the Outer periphery 
and distended at the inner side and which 
therefore will not rub in the channel. 
Considerable difficulty has been experi 
enced heretofore in tires of this character by 
reason of the yielding treads being forced out 
of their retaining-rims by the lateral strains 
imposed upon them, this in a great measure 
resulting from the yielding qualities of the 
rubber which it has been necessary to use in 
order to obtain the proper cushioning effect, 
especially when the tire is retained in the 
channel by a single wire. This objection 
might be overcome in a large measure by 
forming the tread of the tire of less resilient 
rubber; but it will readily be seen that the 
advantage would be attained at the expense 
of lessening the yielding efficiency of the tire, 
In order, therefore, to effect the permanent 
retention of the rubber tire within the chan 
nel of the rim without at the Same time de 
creasing the resiliency of its tread portion, 
the base-section B of the tire is of rubber 
the yielding qualities of which are less than 
that of the tread-section C, and consequently 
when the two sections are secured together 
and within the rim-channelanylateral strain 
imposed upon the outer section will be trans 
mitted to the inner or base section, the rela 
tively low yielding quality of which will pre 
vent its being stretched sufficiently to be 
forced without the rim-channel even if it lay 
loosely, in the channel without being con 
nected to the rim. 
As an additional means of securing the tire 
within the rim. A the tread-section is provided 
with one or more annular non-extensible re 
taining wires or strips 3, which extends lone 
gitudinally therethrough and centrally with 
respect to the width of the section, and which, 
owing to the compressed condition of the 
outer part and the distended condition of the 
inner part of the tire, will not creep in and 
tear the tire, as results with ordinary con 
structions. In practice it is preferred to vul 
canize the tread-section C with a longitudi 
95 
Od 
2. 
609,948 
nal opening extending therethrough, and sub 
sequently pass the retaining-wire through the 
opening and secure its ends together. In 
Some instances, however, a continuous wire 
ring may be embedded in the rubber while 
in a green state and vulcanized therein. It 
will be understood, too, that in some cases 
more than one retaining-wire may be em 
ployed, according to the conditions which 
have to be met, the wires being passed through 
the tread-section parallel to and separated 
from each other. In every instance, how 
ever, it is preferred to form the retaining-ring 
of a diameter corresponding to or less than 
the maximum diameter of the rim-flanges. 
If desired, clips 7 of metal cord or other unex 
tensible material may be embedded in the sec 
tion B to stiffen it. 
In assembling the parts together the sec 
tion B is first placed and secured under ten 
sion in the channeled rim, and the continu 
ous tread-section C is then forced over the 
side flanges of the ring and brought to its 
seat within the groove of the base-section, 
and finally it is cemented to said section. 
It will be noted that the outer part Ain my 
improved tire is wide enough to wholly cover 
the inner portion. This prevents the wear 
ing away of the inner part forming side chan 
nels between the outer part and the side 
flanges, which results when the inner part is 
exposed at the sides of the outer part, as here 
tofore. 
Without limiting myself to the exact con 
struction shown and described, what I claim 
S 
1. The combination with a channeled rim, 
of a tire within the channel of the rim com 
prising a base-section, and a tread-section 
formed separately, the base-section beingun 
der tension and the tread-section under com 
pression, substantially as described. 
2. The combination with a channeled rim, 
of a tire within the channel of the rim com 
prising a channeled base-section, and a tread 
section formed separately, the tread-section 
being under compression and within the chan 
nel of the base-section to completely cover 
the same, and the base-section being under 
tension, substantially as described. 
3. The combination with a channeled rim, 
of a tire within the channel of the rim com 
prising a base-section of yielding material 
under tension, and a tread-section of yield 
ing material under compression, the yielding 
qualities of the tread-section being greater 
than those of the base-section, substantially 
as described. 
4. The combination with a channeled rim, 
of a tire within the channel comprising a base 
section of yielding material having a periph 
eral groove and a tread-section of relatively 
greater yielding material within said groove 
and a longitudinal retaining - wire passing 
through the outer section, Substantially as 
described. 
5. The combination with a channeled rim, 
of a tire comprising a base-section of yielding 
material having a peripheral groove, and a 
tread -section of relatively greater yielding 
material provided with a continuous non-ex 
tensible retaining-ring of a diameter less than 
the maximum diameter of the rim, substan 
tially as described. 
6. The combination with a rim having a pe 
ripheral channel and annular outwardly-flar 
ing side flanges, of a tire comprising a base 
section of yielding material conforming to the 
said channel and having a peripheral groove 
and a tread-section of yielding material with 
in the groove provided with a continuous non 
extensible retaining-ring, said tread-section 
extending beyond the rim and having its sides 
inclined inwardly from the side flanges of the 
rim and completely covering the base-section, 
substantially as described. 
7. The combination with a rim having a pe 
ripheral groove and annular outwardly-flar 
ing side flanges, of a tire within the channel 
comprising a base-section of yielding material 
conforming to the said channel and having a 
peripheral groove and a tread-section of rela 
tively greater yielding material cemented 
within the groove provided with a continuous 
non-extensible retaining-wire, said tread-sec 
tion extending beyond the rim and having its 
sides inclined inwardly from the side flanges 
of the rim, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JAMES G. RODGERS. 
Witnesses: 
O. F. SERVISS, 
EDWIN IL. ANTRIMI. 
55 
?? 
7 ? 
75 
OO 
? ? 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610048.txt	No. 610,048. 
(No Mode.) 
S. H. &. E. B. HAYCOCK. 
Patented Aug. 30, 1898. 
APPARATUS FOR MINING N FROZEN GROUND. 
(Application filed Nov. 22, 1897.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
N 
WWvesses: 
&was soccer 
 
the Norris. PETERs co, PHOTO-LITHo, WASHtMGTON, d, C. 
APPARATUS FOR MINING IN FROZEN GROUND. 
S. H. & E. B. HAYCOCK. 
(Application filed Nov. 22, 1897.) 
Patented Aug. 30, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 610,048, 
(No Model.) 
 
/Wves a 
Sow H. 
&-u-cav (). R 
ck 
 
rt Norris perers co, Photo-LTHo. WASHINGTON, D.C., 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL H. HAYCOCR, OF IROQUOIS, AND EDWARD B. HAYCOCR, OF 
OTTAWA, CANADA. 
APPARATUS FoR MINING IN FROZEN GROUND. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,048, dated August 30, 1898. 
- 
Application filed November 22, 1897, Serial No. 659,526, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that we, SAMUEL H. HAYCOCK, 
of Iroquois, and EDWARD B. HAYCOCK, of 
Ottawa, in the Province of Ontario and Do 
minion of Canada, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Apparatus for 
Mining in Frozen Ground; and we do hereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, forming 
a part thereof. 
Our invention, which will be hereinafter 
fully set forth and claimed, relates to appa 
ratus for sinking shafts and making drifts 
in sand, gravel, and similar formations, and 
especially when such formations are frozen. 
The object of our invention is an apparatus 
for treating certain formations, such as may, 
in a limited sense, be described as soluble, as 
Sand, gravel, and the like,and especially when 
frozen, for the purpose of sinking shafts and 
driving drifts in mining and similar opera 
tions. 
Figure 1 is a plan of our improved mining 
plant. Fig. 2 is a section of a shaft and drift, 
with part of the machinery shown in eleva 
tion. Fig. 3 is a top view of the sinker. Fig. 
4 is a vertical section of the same on line 4 4, 
Fig. 3. Fig 5 is a cross-section of a steam 
boiler with hot-air jacket. Fig. 6 is a jack 
eted Steam-pipe, the jacket being adapted to 
be filled with hot air by the fan. Fig. 7 shows 
a steam and hot-air junction, being a modifi 
cation. 
When a shaft is to be sunk in sand, gravel, 
or other formation of a similar description, 
and especially if there is more or less frost in 
the ground, a suitable building B is erected 
over the place where the shaft A is to be sunk, 
Which is adapted to contain the necessary 
machinery. This latter consists of a movable 
sinker C, a steam-boiler D, a hoist E, and a 
pump F. If it is desired to utilize hot air or 
the waste heat of the boiler, a fan G is also 
employed to force the hot air through the 
heater and pipes, and it may also be used for 
ventilating the shaft A and drift A'. If hot 
air is to be generated by the waste heat of the 
boiler, a casing or jacket D' is placed around 
the boiler to form an air-space 2, as shown in 
Fig. 5. In some cases, however, hot air may 
be used as the principal medium instead of 
steam and the latter only employed for motor 
purposes, such as hoisting, pumping, blow 
ing, and the like. 
The hoist, pump, and fan may each have 
its own engine, or one engine C may drive 
a line of shafting, and from this power may 
be taken by belts to the said machines. 
The sinker C is essentially a radiating ap 
paratus somewhat resembling an inverted 
funnel. It is made the size of the pit or shaft 
intended to be sunk and may be of any de 
sired shape, the rectangular form being shown 
in Figs. 1, 3, and 4. It may be constructed 
of galvanized-iron sheet and consists of a top 
3, of depressed (or low) pyramidal (or conical) 
shape, with a central nozzle 10, which is pro 
vided with a thread 10' for a coupling 11 for 
a flexible hose. The topis made with a double 
wall 3' and the space between the two Walls 
or sheets closed in and filled with non-con 
ducting material to prevent upward radiation 
and waste of heat. Hooks or eyes 12 are se 
cured to the upper sheet, to which short chains 
13 are secured, all joined in a central ring 14, 
to which the lifting chain or rope 15 may be 
attached. To the outer edge of the top is se 
cured a vertical downwardly-projecting rim 
or flange 4, having its lower edge strength 
ened by a bar 5. Within this structure and 
held apart therefrom to form a space 6'be 
tween them is an inner similar one consist 
ing of a top or crown 6, similar to the top 3, 
but more depressed or flat, connected by stays 
6" with the upper one at suitable intervals 
and provided with a rim 7, not as deep and 
not reaching as far down as the Outer one, 
and also provided with a strengthening-bar 
8, cross-stays 9, connecting the outer rim, 
being secured some inches up from the lower 
edge. The crown 6 may be corrugated to in 
crease its heating-surface. In each angle of 
the sinker (or at several points in the rim of 
a round one) may be inserted a short vertical 
pipe 16, projecting above the top 3 a little 
and provided with a hose-coupling 18 and 
kept low and near the lower edge 5. The 
sinker is connected with the boiler by means 
of a steam-pipe D', provided with suitable 
25 
35 
So 
 
90 
95 
OO 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
shown in Fig. 7; but other means of mixing 
hot air and steam are well known. 
Although steam is mentioned as the prin 
cipal heat-conveying medium, hot air or other 
media might be used under certain given con 
ditions with equal advantage. 
We claim as our invention 
1. In a sinker, the combination of a low py 
ramidal top, a nozzle at the apex, a vertical 
rim or flange at the edge, a strengthening-bar 
along the lower edge of the rim or flange, a 
non-conducting lining to the top, an inner 
casing consisting of crown and rim a little 
distance from the outer one so as to form a . 
space and the rim not extending as far down 
as the outer one and provided with a strength 
ening-bar, connections at intervals between 
the outer casing and the inner, and cross 
stays connecting said outer rim, substantially 
as Set forth. 
2. In a sinker, the combination of a low py 
ramidal top, a nozzle at the apex, a vertical 
rim or flange at the edge strengthened at its 
lower edge, a non-conducting lining to the 
top, an inner casing consisting of crown and 
rim similar to the outer one but smaller and 
a little distance from it so as to form a space 
and its rim strengthened at the lower edge not 
extending as far down as the outer one, con 
nections at intervals between the inner and 
Outer casings, vertical pipes in the spaces be 
tween the flanges having lateral bends below 
and projecting above the top and provided 
With means of connecting them with hose or 
closing them, substantially as set forth. 
3. A radiating apparatus or sinker approxi 
mating the shape of an inverted funnel and 
consisting of a flattened funnel-shaped top 
With central nozzle and hose-coupling and 
having a vertical flange or rim at the lower 
or Outer edge, and an inner casing similar to 
the outer one but smaller and with crown 
more depressed and forming a radiating-sur 
face with a space between it and the outer 
one that is open at the lower edges of the rims, 
substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof we have signed in the 
presence of the undersigned witnesses. 
SAML. H. HAYCOCK. 
EDWARD B. HAYCOCK. 
Witnesses to the signature of S. H. Hay 
A. E. DUERELL, 
MAY ADELAID HAYCOCK. 
Witnesses to the signature of E. B. Hay 
cock: 
cock: 
2 
610,048 
- 
valve D'' and with hose-coupling 11 at the 
discharge end, which latter is brought into 
convenient proximity over the sinker C and 
connected there with by a flexible hose D. 
The hoisting rope or chain 15, coming from 
the hoist E, is led over a pulley E", journaled 
vertically over the center of the shaft to a 
beam forming part of the building B or to 
sheer legs or other convenient or suitable 
Support. 
The process in frozen ground is as follows: 
The sinker C, which is preferably made in 
its rims about the size of the shaft to be sunk, 
is lowered by the hoist upon the place where 
the mouth of the shaft is to be. The flexible 
hose D having been duly connected with the 
coupling 11 of the sinker and the coupling 11" 
on the steam-pipe D'' and the steam-valve 
D' being turned on, the steam passes in the 
space 6' of the sinker and comes in direct 
contact with the ground along the rim 5 and 
8, while the crown 6 is heated and reflects 
the heat upon the ground below. The con 
densed water flows out at the rim and, with 
the water released from the ground by thaw 
ing, forms the latter into a slush. One of the 
pipes 16 in the sinker is now connected by 
its coupling 18 with a flexible hose F', con 
nected to the suction-pipe F of the pump E. 
The pump will be of a character adapted to 
lift water holding debris in suspension, such 
as the centrifugal pumps usually are, and the 
pump, being set in motion, will draw off the 
water, and this will carry with it any sand 
and other debris which may be held in sus 
pension and discharged into a sluice-box 
ready to be washed or discharged. The flexi 
ble hose E' may be changed from one pipe 16 
to the others in rotation, those not in use for 
the time being closed with a cap. Any accu 
mulation of heavier debris which the pump 
F is not capable of lifting must be removed 
from time to time by the shovel or in any 
other convenient manner by first shutting off 
the steam and then lifting the sinker by means 
of the hoist. The hoist may also be used for 
lifting such coarser debris after the shaft has 
been sunk some depth. 
When hot air is to be used as an auxiliary, 
it may be employed to heat a jacket d'around 
the steam-pipe D', into which the hot air from 
the boiler-jacket D is forced by the fan G. 
through a pipe d', as shown in Fig. 6, or the 
hot air may be allowed to mingle with the 
steam, a suitable junction D being inserted 
in the steam-pipe D'' and a back-pressure 
valved inserted in the hot-air pipe to pre 
vent the steam passing into it if the pressure 
becomes excessive. This modification is 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
A. HARVEY, 
B. HARVEY. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610148.txt	No. 610,148. 
Patented Aug. 30, 1898. 
J. D. SCHOFIELD, 
CULTIVATOR. 
(Application filed Dec. 15, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
* 
4. Sheets-Sheet . 
26 g. Z. 
M/ 
SA 
M3 . 
d 
7, 
9 
31z 
M3 N 6- Abi 
2. 
1. 
36 
g76 
WoP 
%2 \, 
143 
49 
R 
Effs-Sisis 
N 
y 
4/2 
33 
/5 
- 46 
a/6 
4/ 
o 
, 3 O 
3. 
s/ 
w.-------- Ss 
WITNESSES 
-(24.4 Kf73.4% 
(6-74). A ce- 
fwVEWTOf 
... 
M2/zzes Z.5/za/zeza, 
26//- 2. 
BY 
encrats regRs co, Photo-thio., wash!NGTON.p. c." 
 
No. 60,48. 
(No Model.) 
J. D. SCHOFIELD. 
CULTIVATOR. 
(Application filed Dec. 15, 1897. 
Patented Aug. 30, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
u2-9. 3. 
 
707 
) 
E. r 
3% 
S. 
 
W/TWESSES 
-6a--a < 76-2-24cc. 
6, 27 p(2-2ee- 
/ NVENTOR 
Mazes Z5caozze/a 
z/Ossets, 
BY 
No. 610,148, 
(No Model. 
J. D. SCHOFIELD. 
CULTWATOR, 
(Application filed Dec. 18, 1897. 
Patented Aug. 30, 1898. 
4. Sheets-a-Sheet 3. 
WITNESSES : 
-6- a 64.4%ie? 
ZZ 6, |NVENTOR." 
c/a 
votes / 7e/ 
A TTORAVE 
 
No. 610,148. 
(No Model.) 
J. D. SCHOFIELD. 
CULTIVATOR. 
(Application filed Dec. 15, 1897.) 
Patented Aug. 30, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4, 
 
 
ziS 
22 
SSS 
Fa 
INVENTOR 
- /2zes Z5/26/2zz, 
BY 
re. Nokis perERs c. HoTo...I r-O, wash Moton, c. c. 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE 
s 
JAMES DROMMOND SCHOFIELD, OF DALLAS, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
TEXAS IMPLEMENT AND MACHINE COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE: 
CULTIVATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,148, dated August 30, 1898. 
Application filed December 15, 1897, Serial No, 662,038, (No model.) 
To all tufvon, it may concern: 
Beit known that, JAMESDROMMOND SCHO 
FIELD, a citizen of the United States, residing 
at Dallas, in the county of Dallas and State 
of Texas, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Cultivators; and I do 
hereby declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as Will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
cultivators of the straddle-row or sulky 
style. 
The main object of my invention is to pro 
duce a new and improved cultivator of this 
class, the same being generally improved in 
regard to its structure and various details, 
all as will hereinafter appear, and which is 
also arranged, constructed, and adapted to 
combine with various styles and arrange 
ments of cultivator - shovels, whereby it is 
adapted for various kinds of cultivation, as 
may be dictated by the character of the soil, 
locality, and vegetation to be cultivated, and 
also to simultaneously open furrows and plant 
and cover seed of various kind, whereby by 
its presence the farmer is enabled to follow 
various kinds of agricultural pursuits with 
the single machine and its attachments. 
Warious other objects and advantages of 
my invention will hereinafter appear, and the 
novel features thereof will be particularly 
pointed out in the claims. 
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a 
perspective view of a cultivator embodying 
my invention, the same being shown as for 
cultivating corn, cotton, &c., and as provided 
with what I term a Texas gang, so named 
because of its popularity and particular adap 
tation in the State of Texas and vicinity. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view of the 
same. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the 
planter attachment that may be employed in 
connection with the cultivator-frame for the 
purpose of transforming the machine into a 
planter for successfully planting in rows or 
drills cotton, corn, sorghum, &c. Fig. 4 is a 
similar view of one member or section of what 
is popularly known as a Western gang, so 
Western States, and which, in conjunction 
with its companion, may be attached to my cul 
Fig. 5 illustrates in perspec 
tivator-frame. 
tive the disjointed parts composing the spring 
standard support and its socket and the part 
upon which it is formed. Fig. 6 is a per 
spective view of one of the Swinging adjust 
able seat-bars and its adjustable block. Fig. 
7 is a perspective view of one of the braces 
employed between the head-blocks, side bars, 
and cranks of axle. Fig. 8 illustrates in per 
spective the disjointed parts composing the 
front brace and the adjustable coupling for 
connection thereto for adjusting the draft 
pole. Fig. 9 is a perspective view of the rear 
end of one of the side beams and parts Sup 
ported thereby. Fig. 10 is a plan view of the 
cultivator-frame. Fig. 11 is a transverse sec 
tion of the same immediately in advance of 
the front transverse brace. Fig. 12 is a trans 
verse section through one of the head-blocks. 
Fig. 13 illustrates in side elevation the dis 
jointed members composing the beam-clevis. 
The two ground-wheels 1 may be journaled 
on the lower journals with which the two in 
dependent crank-sections 2, composing the 
crank-axle, are provided and in which they 
terminate at their outer ends. Between their 
cranked portions the two crank-sections are 
connected by a coupling-sleeve 3, so that the 
two crank-sections, and therefore the ground 
wheels, may be adjusted in and out, the axle 
sections being secured in any of their relative 
adjustments by means hereinafter described 
or otherwise. . 
The two side beams 4 may be and prefer 
ably are formed of metal. These two side 
beams 4 converge toward their front ends and 
are formed with inwardly-disposed rear ter 
minals, formed integral with each of which is 
an eye 5, which forms the coupling by which 
the sleeve 3 and the axle 2 may be secured to 
the side beams. Set-screws 6 may enter each 
eye 5 and serve to secure the axle-sections in 
their adjusted positions. 
Each eye 5 may have either secured to.it or 
formed integrala curved locking-sector 7, and 
at the side of each sector a lifting-lever 8 may 
be fulcrumed on the eye 5. Each lifting-lever 
. 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
so named because of its popularity in most of the is provided with a lifting-arm 9, that may ter. Ioo 
 
2. 
- 
610,148 
O 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So 
55 
minate in a hook for engaging with the lift 
chains 10, that are in the usual manner con 
nected to the cultivator-beams hereinafter re 
ferred to. Each of these lifting-levers is fur 
thermore provided with an ordinary form of 
spring-actuatedlocking-pawl for engagement 
with the adjacently-located toothed locking 
SectOr 7. 
The support for the seat 11 for the driver 
or operator in this instance consists of two 
seat-bars 12, which are bolted or otherwise 
secured together at their rear ends and are 
gradually diverged toward their frontends, at 
which latter points they are pivotally bolted, 
as at 13, to short inwardly-disposed standards 
14, secured to the side beams 4 of the cultival 
tor-frame. As perhaps bestillustrated by Figs. 
6 and 10, it will be seen that each seat-bar 12 
is provided with a sliding sleeve 15, on the 
under side of which is formed a stepped or 
notched flange 16, the steps or notches of 
which are arranged in different planes. By 
adjusting these sleeves 15 similarly on the 
seat-beams, so as to cause the different steps 
or notches to be brought above and in sup 
porting position upon the coupling-sleeve of 
the rear cranked axle, it will be obvious that 
the seat 11 will be vertically adjusted to suit 
the driver or operator. The front ends of 
the seat-bars being pivoted at 13 permits of 
the seat and its supporting-bars to be swung 
forward and over upon the machine when not 
in use and the machine is used as a walking 
cultivator. 
Attention is now directed more particularly 
to Figs. 8 and 10. The two side beams 4, it 
will be observed, converge and at their front 
ends embrace the opposite sides of a draft 
pole 18, at which point a pivotal connection 
is effected by a transverse bolt 19, such con 
nection being at some distance in advance of 
the rear end or heel of the pole. Securely 
bolted to the rear end or heel of the draft 
pole is a metallic heel-plate 20, the same be 
ing of such shape as to fit Snugly the end, 
bottom, and opposite sides of the pole. 
Formed integral with the rear wall of the 
heel-plate is a vertical flange 21, the same 
being provided with a series of holes 22, any 
one of which may be bolted by a bolt 23 to 
a pair of perforated ears 24, that project for 
ward from the cross-bar 25, that is interposed 
between the side beams 4, immediately in 
rear of the draft-pole. The cross-bar 25 is 
concaved on its under side to receive the 
arched draft-yoke 26 and is provided with 
perforated ears 27, through which clips 28 
are passed for securing said draft - yoke in 
position. The opposite ends of the cross-bar 
have cast thereon angular end Securing-plates 
29, which bear against the inner faces of the 
beams 4 and are bolted thereto. It will be 
obvious that by removing the bolt 23 the 
draft-pole may be tilted or adjusted to any 
height desired and the cultivator-frame al 
ways remain level, which is most desirable. 
In Fig. 5 I have illustrated in detail an 
angular casting 30, one of which is located 
on each beam 4. These castings are bolted to 
the beams 4, and depending from each cast 
ing is a depending sleeve 31, each sleeve em 
bracing one of the terminals of the yoke 26. 
These sleeves are strengthened by inclined 
braces 32, located between the sleeves 31 and 
the castings 30. The castings 30 are also 
formed each with a vertical Socket 33, and in 
each socket is removably seated a curved 
standard 34, from the upper out Wardly-curved 
end of which depend hooks 35, in each of 
which is supported one of the pair of beam 
supporting springs 36. 
The ends of the arched yoke 28 are Out 
wardly disposed each to loosely receive a cy 
lindrically-bored head-block 37, in the oppo 
site ends of which bored cones 38 are located. 
Pins 39 may be passed through the extremi 
ties of the arched draft-yoke 28 for the pur 
pose of securing the head-blocks and their 
cones in place. 
Inclined brace-rods 40 are bolted at their 
upper ends to the side beams and at their 
lower ends receive the outer cones 38. Clips 
41 may be located in the brace-rods 40, and 
similar clips 42 may be located on each of 
the cranked axle-sections, those clips 40 and 
41 at the same side of the machine being 
connected by intermediate braces 43, pivoted 
at their ends to the clips, so that a direct 
draft applied to the head-blocksis transmitted 
to the frame or side beams 4 and axles, and 
the pivotal connection mentioned permits of 
a relative adjustment of the ground-Wheels. 
The head-blocks 37 are provided at their 
front sides with the vertical flanges 44, per 
forated to receive the draft-chains 45, which 
at their front ends are connected to the usual 
loosely-suspended draft-links 46, that hang 
from the doubletree 47, pivoted upon the 
draft-pole. These draft-links are provided 
each with a series of holes, and removably and 
therefore adjustably connected thereto are 
the two singletrees 48. 
Any style of cultivator-beams-as, for in 
stance, that shown in Figs. 1 and 2 and indi 
cated as 49may be connected by the usual 
coupling 50 to the head-blocks, and the same 
may be either flat or pipe style, as preferred, 
and provided with any preferred number and 
arrangement of shovels. In Figs. 1 and 2 I 
have illustrated what I term the Texas 
gang, so named by reason of its popularity 
in that State. Again, in Fig. 4 I have illus 
trated and indicated by 51 what I call the 
Western gang, so designated for its popu 
larity throughout the West. The numerous 
styles, however, may be varied at will, and I 
have merely illustrated two, because they are 
those most generally used. In any case it 
will be apparent that a ready connection may 
be effected to the head-blocks by merely re 
moving and replacing the clevis -bolts 52. 
The lifting-chains 10 are then connected, as 
75 
95 
IOC 
O 
IIS 
I25 
610,148 
3. 
are also the lifting - springs 36, to the stir 
rups 53. 
In addition to employing this machine as 
a cultivator, I also contemplate employing 
the same as a one or a two row planter of the 
latest type. 
Referring now more particularly to Fig. 3, 
it will be seen that I have illustrated in de 
tail a two-row-planter attachment. In said 
figure, 55 designates a pair of compound 
beams having front inwardly-disposed ends 
56, to which are connected the clevis mem 
bers 57 for coupling with those of the culti 
Vator-frame. Each compound beam 55 is 
spread at its rear end, as at 58, and at its 
juncture Supports a shovel-carrying stand 
ard 59 for opening the furrows. Any style 
of planting mechanism may be supported on 
each beam; but in the present instance I 
have illustrated one style of my disk planter. 
A doubly compoundly curved yoke 60 is bolt 
ed to the rear spreading terminals of each 
beam 55 and is in turn supported by the cov 
ering - disks G1. Through suitable gearing 
Operated by said disks and contained in the 
gear-case 62 motion is imparted to the feed 
shaft 63 and to the feed mechanism (not 
shown) contained within the hopper 64. For 
the purpose of regulating the distance apart 
of the planted rows I may provide any means 
for accomplishing this object. In this in 
stance I connect the two beams 55 by over 
lapping bars 65, to which I attach the draft 
chains 10. These bars are perforated and 
adjustably secured together by bolts 66. 
It is thus apparent that I have produced an 
agricultural apparatus or machine which, 
under the general name of cultivator, is 
adapted by simple means to be transformed 
into a machine for cutting stalks, a four or six 
Shovel gang-cultivator, or a single or double 
row planter. It is further apparent that by 
adjusting the draft-pole up or down the ma 
Chine is adapted to operate in conjunction 
With any shovel sweep organg, will run lightly 
regardless of weight of operator, and is readily 
adjustable to entirely relieve the horses 
necks. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim is 
1. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the cultivator-frame, the adjustable crank 
axle and ground-wheels, of the front arched 
draft -yoke, the head-blocks carried there 
by, the inclined braces connecting the head 
blocks and cultivator-frame, and braces piv 
otally connecting the inclined braces and the 
Crank-axles. 
2. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the cultivator-frame, the adjustable crank 
axle and ground-wheels, of the front arched 
draft-yoke, the head-blocks carried there 
by, the inclined braces connecting the head 
blocks and cultivator-frame, clips located on 
the crank-axles and the inclined braces, and 
braces pivoted at their ends to the clips at 
each side of the machine. 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
75 
95 
3. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the opposite side beams, and an arched draft 
yoke, of castings Secured to the beams and 
provided with depending sleeves embracing 
the depending terminals of the draft-yoke. 
4. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the opposite side beams, and an arched draft 
yoke, of castings secured to the beams and 
provided with depending sleeves embracing 
the depending terminals of the draft-yoke, 
said castings being provided with sockets, 
curved standards located in the sockets, lift 
ing-springs depending from the standards, 
and beams coupled to the ends of the arched 
draft -yoke and connected to the lifting 
Springs. 
5. In a cultivator, the combination with 
Opposite side beams, an intermediate cross 
bar, an arched draft-yoke connected thereto, 
of castings secured to the side beams and pro 
vided with depending sleeves receiving the 
depending terminals of the draft-yoke. 
6. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the opposite side beams, the intermediate 
cross-bar terminating in end securing-plates 
bolted to the beams and having its under side 
longitudinally concaved, and an arched draft 
yoke located therein and clipped to the cross 
bar, of opposite castings bolted to the side 
beams and provided with depending sleeves 
receiving the depending terminals of the 
arched yoke-frame, and braces between said 
sleeves and castings. 
7. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the opposite side beams, the draft-pole piv 
oted between its ends between the front ends 
of said beams, the angular heel-plate casting 
20 bolted to the rear end or heel of the draft 
pole and provided with a vertical flange hav 
ing a series of bolt-holes, of a cross-bar con 
necting the side bealms and having a pair of 
perforated lugs to embrace the flange of the 
heel-plate, and a connecting-bolt. 
8. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the frame and the transverse axle, of a pair 
of seat-bars pivoted at their front ends to the 
frame, a seat Supported upon the rear ends 
of the bars, and a pair of sliding sleeves 
mounted on the bars, each sleeve, having a 
vertical flange provided with steps or notches 
located in different planes and adapted to en 
gage over the axle. 
9. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the cast-metal side beams terminating at their 
rear ends in the integral alining eyes and the 
toothed sectors, of the sleeve located in and 
connecting the eyes, the divided axle located 
in the sleeve, the lifting-sleeves fulcrumed at 
the sides of the sectors and carrying locking 
pawls and lifting-arms, the cultivator-beams, 
and the lifting-chains connected to the lift 
ing-arms and beams. 
10. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the upper framework and the arched draft 
yoke, of the head-blocks mounted on the ter 
minals of the yoke-frame and having the ends 
of their bores flared, the bored cones located 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
4. 
- 
610,148 
in said ends, means for securing said cones 
in position, and beams connected to the head 
blocks. 
11. In a cultivator, the combination with 
the frame, arched axle, and arched draft-yoke 
terminating in outwardly - disposed ends, 
bored head-blocks located on said ends, cone 
bearings located on said ends and fitting the 
ends of the bores of the head-blocks, inclined 
braces bolted to the frame and terminating 
at their lower ends in eyes engaging the outer 
cones, and braces connected to the brace-rods 
and to the arched axle. 
12. The combination with a cultivator com 
prising an arched draft-yoke, head-blocks for 
the same, and a member of a draft-clevis for 
each of the blocks, of opposite beams pro 
vided at their front ends with companion 
clevis members, planting mechanisms mount 
ed on said beams, and an adjustable connec 
tion between the said beams. 
O 
15 
13. The combination with a cultivator 
frame, comprising lift-levers, head-blocks, 
clevis members, and an arched draft-yoke, of 
beams provided at their front ends with com 
panion clevis members, planting mechanisms 
supported by the beams, and lift-chains for 
the same connected to the lift-levers. 
14. The combination with a cultivator 
frame comprising clevis members, of a pair 
of beams having their front ends inwardly 
disposed and provided with companion clevis 
members and carrying planter mechanisms, 
perforated bars overlapping each other and 
extending from the beams, and bolts for the 
same whereby they are adjustably connected. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
. 
JAMES DROAMOND SCHOFIELD, 
Witnesses: 
E. G. EISEN LOHR, 
J. C. HAMBERLIN. 
25 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610248.txt	No. 610,248. 
R. SCOTT. 
Patented Sept. 6, 1898. 
 
(No Model.) 
JACO UARD MECHANISM FOR EMBRODERING MACH NES. 
(Application filed Mar. 31, 1898.) 
 
H 
THE PRS PEYeftS Cd. PCF-1, WASH 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ROBERT SCOTT, OF, NOTTINGHAM, ENGLAND. 
JACQUARD MECHANISM FOR EMBRODERING-MACHINEs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,248, dated September 6, 1898. 
Application filed March 31, 1898, Serial No. 675,967, (No model.) 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ROBERT SCOTT, lace 
draftsman, a subject of the Queen of Great 
Britain, residing at 37 Birrell road, Sherwood 
Rise, Nottingham, England, have invented 
certain new and useful Jacquard Mechanism 
for Embroidery-Frames, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to apply 
jacquard mechanism to give the to-and-fro 
and up-and-down motions to an embroidery 
frame. 
Figures 1 and 2 are front elevations of the 
left and right hand portions of the machine, 
Fig. 2 being to half the scale of Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a horizontal section on the lines 33, Figs. 
1 and 2. Fig. 4 is a vertical section on the line 
44, Figs. I and 3. In the figures the greater 
part of the framing is omitted for the sake of 
simplicity. 
C is the embroidery-frame, which has fixed 
to it rails a free to run on grooved pulleys 
b', carried by levers b, pivoted at b. The 
other ends of the levers b are pivoted to a 
counterbalance-weight c. 
c' is a rod fixed to the weight c and carry 
ing grooved rollers c, running on the diagonal 
bar d of the framed, which is free to be 
moved horizontally to and fro in fixed bear 
ings dby the bar A, to which motion is given, 
as hereinafter described. 
If the bar A and framed are pushed to th 
right, the Weight c is raised and the frame a 
is lowered, whereas if the bar A is pulled to 
the left the frame C, is raised. 
The to -and-fro horizontal movement is 
given to the frame C by the bar B, whose end 
carries a rack gearing with the toothed wheel 
e, fixed to the shafte', on which is a feathere. 
f is a pinion gearing with a rack a, fixed 
on the frame C. and free to slide on the shaft 
e', but turning with it, being grooved to fit 
the feathere. As the bar B moves to and 
fro, therefore, the frame a moves with it, but 
to a diminished extent. 
Motion is given to the bars A and B in the 
following manner. 
g is a shaft revolving once for every stitch 
and having fixed to it four equal and similar 
cams g g g g . . The cams g g and gg, re 
spectively, are similarly placed on the shaft. 
... 
v. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
These eams act on rollers h h' on four slides 
h, to which they give a to-and-fro motion. 
The slidesh have pivoted to them connecting 
rods h, whose other ends are pivoted to links 
i, the latter being also pivoted at i' to levers 
le, which are pivoted at ic'. 
C is a bar free to move longitudinally in 
bearings. . Each linki passes through a hole 
in the bar C between two knife-edges C", fixed 
to it. Each lever k is acted on by a multiple 
lift jacquard of ordinary construction. 
l is a grid which reciprocates up and down 
through the same distance every, stitch. 
l is a frame connected by the rod l to the 
lever k. 
are vertical needles pivoted to the topbar 
of the framel and pulled to one side or left 
in the path of the grid by the jacquard-needles 
in the ordinary way. 
As the grid l rises the framel remains sta 
tionary unless and until the grid comes 
against one or other of the needles which 
has not been pulled aside by the jacquard, 
and the framel is then lifted by the grid dur 
ing the remainder of the stroke of the latter, 
So raising the lever k and linki more or less, 
according to which of the needles lis engag 
ing with the grid. . The link i is oscillated 
aboutits pivoti' by the rodh, causing the rod 
C to move to and fro, the extent of its recip 
rocations depending on the height to which 
the pivoti' has been raised. The jacquard 
cards are so punched that only one at the most 
of the levers k of each pair is raised at any 
time, as shown at Fig. 4. 
The bars C have teeth or racks C at one 
side of their ends, and the bars A and B have 
similar teeth or racks A'B' on both sides. 
Normally the teeth on the bars C do not en 
gage with those on the bars A and B, but when 
one of the levers, k is raised by the jacquard, 
as above described, the recesslin the plate 
k' is lifted above the ball C, (carried by the 
bar C,) so that the side of the plate his now 
in contact with the ball, as shown at Fig. 4. 
g are projections on the side of the cam-disks 
g' gigg, and as the cams revolve these pro 
jections acting on any of the plates which 
are raised press them sidewise against the 
bars C, putting the teeth of the latterinto gear 
with the teeth on the bar A or B, as the case 
65 
o 
75 
90 
95 
Oo 
2 
610,248 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
may be, causing this bar to move with the 
bar C, and thus giving the required vertical 
or horizontal movements to the embroidery 
frame. 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, mechan 
ism actuated by the bars moving the frame 
in two directions at right angles to each other, 
second and third pairs of parallel bars, means 
whereby one or other bar of each of the latter 
pairs moves one of the first bars and pattern 
mechanism reciprocating the second and third 
pairs of bars. 
2. The combination of a frame, a diagonal 
guide, a part moving in the guide and con 
nected to the frame, two parallel bars free to 
move longitudinally, connections between one 
bar and the frame and the other bar and the 
guide, pattern mechanism and means actu 
ated by it for moving the bars. 
3. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, a diago 
nal guide, a part moving in the guide, con 
nections between one bar and the frame and 
the other bar and the guide, second and third 
pairs of parallel bars, means whereby one or 
other bar of each of the latter pairs moves 
One of the first bars, and pattern mechanism 
reciprocating the second and third pairs of 
bars. 
4. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, mechan 
ism actuated by the bars moving the frame 
in two directions at right angles to each other, 
second and third pairs of parallel bars, means 
whereby one or other bar of each of the lat 
ter pairs moves one of the first bars, jaws on 
the bars of the second and third pairs, links 
passing between the jaws, rods pivoted to one 
end of the links, means for reciprocating the 
rods through a constant distance, levers piv 
oted to the other ends of the links, and pat 
tern mechanism for raising the levers. 
5. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, a diago 
nal guide, a part moving in the guide, con 
nections between one bar and the frame and 
the other bar and the guide, second and third 
pairs of parallel bars, means whereby one or 
other bar of each of the latter pairs moves 
one of the first bars, jaws on the bars of the 
second and third pairs, links passing between 
the jaws, rods pivoted to one end of the links, 
means for reciprocating the rods through a 
constant distance, levers pivoted to the other 
ends of the links, and pattern mechanism for 
raising the levers. 
6. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, mechan 
ism actuated by the bars, moving the frame 
in tWO directions at right angles to each other, 
second and third pairs of parallel bars, teeth 
on two sides of the bars of the first pair, teeth 
on one side of the other bars, means whereby 
the latter teeth are caused to engage with the 
 
75 
former, and pattern mechanism reciprocat 
ing the second and third pairs of bars. 
7. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, a diago 
nal guide, a part moving in the guide, con 
nections between one bar and the frame and 
the other bar and the guide, second and third 
pairs of parallel bars, teeth on two sides of 
the bars of the first pair, teeth on one side 
of the other bars, means whereby the latter 
teeth are caused to engage with the former, 
and pattern mechanism reciprocating the sec 
ond and third pairs of bars. 
8. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, mechan 
ism actuated by the bars moving the frame 
in two directions at right angles to each other, 
second and third pairs of parallel bars, teeth 
on two sides of the bars of the first pair, teeth 
on one side of the other bars, means whereby 
the latter teeth are caused to engage with the 
former, jaws on the second and third pairs of 
bars, links passing between the jaws, rods 
pivoted to one end of the links, means for 
reciprocating the rods through a constant 
distance, levers pivoted to the other ends of 
the links, and pattern mechanism for raising 
the levers. 
9. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, a diago 
nal guide, a part moving in the guide, con 
nections between one bar and the frame and 
the other bar and the guide, second and third 
pairs of parallel bars, teeth on two sides of 
the bars of the first pair, teeth on one side 
of the other bars, means whereby the latter 
teeth are caused to engage with the former, 
jaws on the second and third pairs of bars, 
links passing between the jaws, rods pivoted 
to one end of the links, means for recipro 
cating the rods through a constant distance, 
levers pivoted to the other ends of the links, 
and pattern mechanism for raising the levers. 
10. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, mechan 
ism actuated by the bars moving the frame 
in two directions at right angles to each other, 
second and third pairs of parallel bars, jaws 
on the bars of the second and third pair, links 
passing between the jaws, rods pivoted to 
One end of the links, means for reciprocating 
the rods through a constant distance, levers 
pivoted to the other ends of the links, pat 
tern mechanism for raising the levers, plates 
On the levers, teeth on two sides of the bars 
of the first pair, teeth on one side of the other 
bars, and cams acting on the plates when 
raised, causing them to move the bars of the 
second and third pairs, so making their teeth 
engage with those of the first bars. 
11. The combination of a frame, two paral 
lel bars free to move longitudinally, a diago 
nal guide, a part moving in the guide, con 
nections between One bar and the frame and 
the other bar and the guide, second and third 
pairs of parallel bars, jaws on the bars of the 
go 
95 
OO 
I o5 
d 
II5 
I 25 
610,248 
3. 
and cams acting on the plates when raised, 
causing them to move the bars of the second Io 
and third pairs, so making their teeth engage 
with those of the first bars. 
ROBERT SCOTT. 
Witnesses: 
G. F. WARREN, 
GEO. J. N. FRANKLIN. 
second and third pairs, links passing be 
tween the jaws, rods pivoted to one end of 
the links, means for reciprocating the rods 
through a constant distance, levers pivoted 
to the other ends of the links, pattern mech 
anism for raising the levers, plates on the le 
vers, teeth on two sides of the bars of the 
first pair, teeth on one side of the other bars, 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610349.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
OTTO ERNST, OF HOCHST-ON-THE-MAIN, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO THE FARB 
WERKE, WORMALS MEISTER, LUCIUS & BRUNING, OF SAME PLACE. 
VIOLET Azo DYE AND PROCESS OF MAKING IT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,349, dated September 6, 1898. 
Application filed November 7, 1896, Serial No. 611,407. (Specimens.) 
quantity of water, are added and the solution 
kept cold, allowed to run into forty kilo 
grams of ice-cold diluted hydrochloric acid, 
containing 0.92 kilogram of the acid, the so 
lution being well stirred. The diazonaph 
tholsulfonic acid separates at once as a yel 
low-brown precipitate. 1.43 kilograms of 
alpha-naphthylamin are dissolved in a solu 
tion of thirty liters of hot water and the cal 
culated quantity of hydrochloric acid, the 
solution being cooled down to about 25 cen 
tigrade by the addition of ice and the diazo 
compound allowed to run in. Three kilo 
grams of crystallized sodium acetate are 
added, whereupon the formation of the diffi 
cultly-soluble dyestuff begins. After stir 
ring for several hours and gradually heating 
the solution up to 80 centigrade the combi 
nation is complete. By the addition of a so 
lution of 2.2 kilograms of Soda and subse 
quent heating the dyestuff is transformed 
into the sodium salt. The latter forms in 
dry condition a green-black powder of me 
tallic luster, soluble with difficulty in cold, 
more easily in hot, Water, With a red-violet 
color. By the addition of some common salt 
a brown precipitate is obtained from this so 
lution. 
The sodium salt of the dyestuff is soluble 
in concentrated sulfuric acid with a grayish 
green color and gives by the addition of water 
a violet precipitate. The dyestuff has the 
following formula: 
55 
o 
75 
OH 
 
9o 
The dyestuff dyes wool violet in an acid 
bath, and on treatment with chromates or 
chromic acid an even saturated brown of 
beautiful shade is obtained, which is fast to 
milling and light. 
Having described my invention, I claim as 
new and desire to secure by Letters Patent 
1. The process of producing a new mono 
azo dyestuff which consists in combining di 
95 
OC 
40 
45 
O 
To all whom, ii. Tay concern: 
Be it known that I, OTTO ERNST, a citizen 
of the Empire of Germany, residing at Hchst 
On-the-Main, Germany, have invented cer 
5 tain new and useful Improvements in the 
Manufacture of a New Violet Monoa Zo Dye 
stuff Giving a Fast Brown by Oxidation with 
Chrome, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
No azo dyestuffs which were of any value 
in the arts have heretofore been obtained 
from diazotized amidonaphtholsulfonic acids. 
I have found that such dyestuffs may be ob 
tained from 1.8 diazonaphtholsulfonic acids, 
I5 On the One hand, and alpha-naphthylamin or 
its alkyl and alphyl derivatives, respectively, 
on the other hand, (alphyl' meaning an aro 
matic radical, and therefore alphylderivatives 
Of alpha-naphthylamin are Compounds, such 
20 as phenylnaphthylamin, CH-NHCH, and 
tolylnaphthylamin, CH-NHCHCH.) 
These dyestuffs are of great interest on ac 
count of their great fastness to light and as 
they produce by treatment with chromates 
25 or chromic acid on the fiber brown powerful 
tints of special fastness to milling and light, 
dyeing evenly also when applied to loose 
wool. 
The new dyestuff may be obtained by al 
3o lowing the diazotized 1.8.4 amidonaphthol 
sulfonic acid to act upon the hydrochlorid of 
alpha-naphthylamin in the presence or ab 
sence of acetates or by dissolving the amin 
in alcohol and then combining it with the 
35 diazo compound. The reaction of diazotized 
1.8.4 amidonaphtholsulfonic acid with alpha 
naphthylamin is explained by the equation: 
NaNC 
N= N 
--CHNH= 
CH-NH2. 
M 
SOH 
$o.H 
Example: 2.89 kilograms of 1.8 amido 
naphthol 4 sulfonic acid are, together with 
0.42 kilogram of caustic soda, dissolved in 
5o about ninety liters of water; 0.69 kilogram 
of nitrite of sodium, dissolved in a small 
2. 
610,349 
azotized 1.8.4 amidonaphtholmonosulfonie 
acid with alpha-naphthylamin, substantially 
as described. 
monoazo dyestuff, derived from diazotized 
1.8.4 amidonaphtholmonosulfonic acid and 
alpha-naphthylamin and having the formula: 
green-black powder of metallic luster, solu 
ble with difficulty in cold, more easily in hot 
Water, with a red-violet color, soluble in con 
2. As a new article of manufacture, the new centrated sulfuric acid with a gray-green 
color and giving by the addition of water a 
violet precipitate, dyeing wool violet in an 
acid-bath and producing by treatment with 
chromates or chromic acid an even, saturated 
brown color of beautiful shade fast to mill 
ing and light, Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have signed my name in pres 
ence of two subscribing witnesses. 
N\ 
OH 
N-N 
25 
OTTO ERNST. 
NH 
S. E 
OH 
the sodium salt of the dyestuff forming a 
Witnesses: 
HEINRICH HAHN, 
ALFRED BRISBOIS. . 
5 
O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610449.txt	No. 610,449. 
(No Model. ) 
Patented Sept. 6, 1898, 
G. N. EUNE. 
WNE TRMMER. 
(Application filed Oct. 25, 1897.) 
/ 27/ 
21 
A-1s 
Al-1 27 7 21,322 
 
  
Z/ 
 
WITNESSES : 
2 
/WWENTOR 
g7 52. 
BY sy-orie 
ATTORNEYS. 
THE NORRIs Peters co., PHOTO-ltho. WASH1NSN, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
GEORGE NORMAN JEUNE, OF DEER WOOD, MINNESOTA. 
WNETRIMMER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,449, dated September 6, 1898. 
Application filed October 25, 1897, Serial No. 656,316. (No model.) 
55 
75 
95 
o 
To all, Luhon, it naily concern. 
Beit known that I, GEORGENORMANJEUNE, 
of Deer Wood, in the county of Crow Wing 
and State of Minnesota, have invented a new 
and Improved Vine-Trimmer, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved machine more especially 
designed for conveniently trimming straw 
berry and other vines or plants running close 
to the ground, the machine being simple and 
durable in construction and arranged to per 
mit the user to conveniently move it over a 
field to cut rooted as well as exposed vines 
in a very simple manner. 
The invention consists of certain parts and 
details and combinations of the same, as will 
be fully described hereinafter and then point 
ed out in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the improve 
ment. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same, and 
Fig. 3 is an end elevation of the bracket for 
the pulley-shaft. 
The improved machine is provided with a 
shear or blade A, formed at its forward end. 
with a point A', from which extends upwardly 
and rearwardly a chisel-edge A* for readily 
cutting vines already rooted in the ground at 
the time the shear or blade is pushed forward, 
and the point A passes under the vines for 
the edge A* to cut the vine held at both sides 
to the ground by its roots. 
On the rear end of the shear or blade A is 
Secured an upwardly and rearwardly extend 
ing handle B, adapted to be taken hold of by 
the operator to move the machine over the 
ground, and on the said handle is secured a 
depending bracket C, in which is journaled a 
wheel D, adapted to travel on the ground, 
With the lower end or bottom of the wheelbe 
low the lower edge of the shear or blade A 
when the latter is in a horizontal position, as 
indicated in Fig. 1. 
On the wheel D is secured a smaller wheel 
E, somewhat less in diameter than the wheel 
D and connected by a belt F with a pulley G, 
secured to the outside of a revoluble cutter 
- 
H, journaled on the outer face of the blade 
A, so that the cutting edges of the curved 
arms of the said cutter operate in conjunction 
with the top edge of the blade A and cut any 
vines passing between the said top edge of the 
blade and the corresponding cutting edge of 
the revoluble cutter H. 
Now it will be seen that when the machine 
is moved forward over the ground by the op 
erator pushing the handle B then the wheel 
D revolves and causes the wheel E to rotate, 
so that a like motion is transmitted from the 
said wheel by the belt F to the pulley G and 
the cutter H to rotate the latter in the direc 
tion of the arrow a'. Now as the machine is 
moved forward rooted vines near the ground 
are cut by the chisel-edge A, as previously 
explained, and other vines passing over the 
top edge of the blade are cut by the quickly 
revolving cutter H, as before mentioned. , 
Thus it will be seen that by the use of the 
machine strawberry - beds can be readily 
trimmed of runners or other undesirable 
vines; but it is evident that the machine may 
be used for trimming other vines, if desired. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
A vine-trimmer comprising a shear or blade 
having substantially horizontal top and bot 
tom edges and having its front and rear edges 
inclined upwardly and rearwardly, the for 
ward end being formed with a point and hav 
ing a beveled chisel-edge on the inclined for 
Ward end, the said cutting edge also extend 
ing along a portion of the top of the blade, a 
-handle secured to the rear inclined end of the 
blade, a depending bracket secured to the 
handle at the rear of the blade and forked at 
its lower end, a wheel journaled in the mem 
bers of the said bracket, a revoluble cutter 
journaled on one face of the blade and oper 
ating in conjunction with the cutting edge at 
the top of the blade and means for rotating 
the cutter from the wheel, substantially as 
shown and described. 
GEORGE NORMAN JEUNE. 
Witnesses: 
JOSEPHI RAYMOND, 
MARY RAYMOND. 
25 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610549.txt	No. 610,549. 
(No Model.) 
W. D. MARTIN. 
MOP WRNGER 
(Application filed July 14, 1898. 
Patented Sept. 13, 1898. 
still 
eII, 
I 
2E 2ing 
a 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
ca. 124 - 2 
WWWENTOR 
4.32%2% 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM D. MARTIN, OF WARSAW, NEW YORK. 
MOPWRINGER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,549, dated September 13, 1898. 
Application filed July 14, 1898, Serial No. 685,943, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, WILLIAMD. MARTIN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at War 
saw, in the county of Wyoming and State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Mop-Wringers, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had therein to the accompanying 
drawings. 
This invention relates to a mop-Wringer 
for use on a mop-pail. 
The object of the invention is to produce a 
cheap and simple mop-Wringing device. 
Figure 1 is a plan of a mop-pail with wringer 
applied. Fig. 2 is a broken elevation of pail 
and section of Wringer. Fig. 3 is an end ele 
vation of Wringer applied to pail. Fig. 4 is 
a reverse view of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a cross 
section of Wringer on broken section of pail. 
The Wringer is applied to the top of a pail, 
as are many other mop-Wringers. In this 
Wringer the frame or bar A extends across 
the top of the pail, is pivoted to a bracket B", 
which extends down inside the pail, and is 
secured by screws or other fastenings to the 
pail. The bar A is generally as long as the 
extreme width of the pail, and by securing 
the bracket B at one side of the center line 
of the pail roller E, supported at one end on 
bracket B and at the other by a bracket B, 
will extend across the pail at such part as 
the length of the rollers may require. 
The bracket B at one side of the pail has a 
journal-bearing for roll E and a support for 
one end of bar A. Roll E is carried in bear 
ings at the ends of bar A. Brackets B and 
Beach have a slot D, in which slots the jour 
nals of the Wringer-roll Ehave their bearings. 
A spring F at each end of roll E is held to the 
bracket by a boss G and bears against the 
journal of roll E, pressing it toward the other 
roll E", but will permit roll E to yield when 
pressure against it flexes the spring F. Bar 
A is pivoted to the upper surface of bracket 
B'. A stout spring H, connected to bracket 
B' and to bar A, spreads the opposite end of 
bar A, so as to carry one end of roller E" away 
from roller E. Bar A has journal-bearings 
A'A', one at each end, as bearings for the roll 
E". The end of bar A, remote from bracket 
B', may swing on top of a wire or rest M on 
The spring H swings the 
top of the pail. 
end of the bar Aback, so that roll E", which 
has its ends journaled at the ends of bar A, 
may have its swinging end moved away from 
the end of roll E. This leaves a triangular 
space between rolls E and E", into which a 
mop may be entered when it is desirable to 
compress or Wring the mop. Bracket B 
has a small pulley I connected thereto. A 
chain K passes over this pulley I, one end of 
the chain being connected to bar A, the other 
end being connected to a lever L, which is 
pivoted to the outside of the pail and has a 
treadle M'. 
When it is desired to wring a mop, the mop 
is entered between rolls E. E", roll E' being 
rocked open by spring F, (see dotted lines, 
Fig. 1) and the rolls are brought together by 
pressure of the foot on the treadle M'. This 
draws on chain. IK and swings roll E" against 
or toward roll E. The mop interposed be 
tween the rolls is pressed between the two, 
roll E yielding should the pressure overcome 
the tension of springs F. The act of drawing 
the mop between the rollers tends to press 
the water out of the mop. A release of the 
treadle permits the rollers to swing open un 
der the action of spring F. 
It will be seen that the roll Eyields slightly 
against the resistance of springs F, but has 
little angular movement. Bar A and roller 
E" can be swung to a considerable distance 
and in angular relation to the roller E, so 
that a mop can be readily entered between 
the two. 
What I claim is 
1. Two brackets attached to a pailand hav 
ing journal-bearings for one of the rollers, a 
bar pivoted to one of the brackets and hav 
ing bearings for the other roller, and means 
for swinging this bar on its pivot so that the 
rolls may be at an angle to each other, or be 
brought into substantial parallelism, in com 
bination substantially as described. 
2. In a mop-Wringer, the two brackets for 
attachment to a pail, each having a slot 
therein to serve as a journal-bearing, a 
wringer-roll having its journals in said slots 
in the brackets, springs bearing the said roll 
to one side of said slots, and a bar pivoted to 
one of the brackets and swinging toward and 
away from the said roll, said bar carrying a 
second roll, all combined, 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
95 
OC 
2 
610,549 
the pail connected to the said chain, all com 
bined substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof; I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM. D. MARTIN. 
Witnesses: 
C. S. HIGGINS, 
JAMES: E. REID. 
O 
3. In combination with a mop-pail, a pair 
of brackets, one at each side of said pail, a 
roller journaled in said brackets, a bar piv 
oted to one of the brackets and swinging 
5 toward and away from the second bracket and 
carrying a roller a pulley mounted on this 
second bracket, a chain connected to the bar 
and extending over the pulley, and a lever on 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610649.txt	No. 610,649. 
(No Model.) 
j. HARRINGTON. 
BACK PEDALING BRAKE. 
Application filed May 8, 1897. 
Patented Sept. 13, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 
71-ee. (2ed 4./ 
22, 2 
 
orris perers co, PHoro-Litho, washington, D.C. 
No. 610,649. 
(No Model.) 
J. HARRINGTON. 
BACK PEDALNG BRAKE 
Application filed May 8, 1897. 
Patented Sept. 3, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2 
 
No. 610,649. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. HARRINGTON. 
BACK PEDALNG BRAKE. 
(Application filed May 8, 1897.) 
Patented Sept. 13, 1898, 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
No. 610,649. 
 
(No Model.) 
J. HARRINGTON. 
BACK PEDALING BRAKE. 
(Application filed May 8, 897.) 
Patented Sept. 13, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN HARRINGTON, OF RYDE, ISLE OF WIGHT, ENGLAND. 
BACK-PEDALING BRAKE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,649, dated September 13, 1898. 
Application filed May 8, 1897, Serial No. 635,697, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it navy concern: 
Be it known that I, JoHN HARRINGTON, a 
subject of the Queen of Great Britain, resid 
ing at Ryde, in the Isle of Wight, England, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Velocipedes, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The invention relates to an improved ar 
rangement of parts for operating a band 
brake, by which means the cranks can be ro 
tated for driving the machine, they can be 
held stationary and the machine allowed to 
run free, and by a backward pressure on either 
pedal the brake can be effectively applied. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is an elevation of part of one side 
of a machine, showing the driving mechan 
ism. Fig. 2 is an elevation of part of the op 
posite side of the machine, showing the brake 
mechanism in its normal position. Fig. 3 is 
a similar view to Fig. 2, but partly in Section, 
showing the brake in use. Fig. 4 is an eleva 
tion of the driving mechanism, partly in sec 
tion, so that the clutch may be seen. Fig. 5 
is a section of the toothed wheel and clutch. 
Fig. 6 is an elevation, partly in section, of 
the clutch apparatus for operating the brake 
as seen from the opposite side of the machine 
to that of Fig. 4, and Fig. 7 is a section of 
the same. Fig. 8 is an elevation, partly in 
section, of the brake-drum, looking from the 
inside of the wheel. Figs. 9 and 10 are side 
views of the metal clips which I employ to at 
tach the brake-drum to the spokes. Figs. 11 
and 12 are end views, respectively, of the 
clips shown in Figs. 9 and 10. Figs. 4 to 8 
are drawn to twice the scale of Figs. 1, 2, and 
3. Figs. 9 to 12 are drawn to full size. 
In all the figures like parts are indicated 
by similar letters of reference. 
In carrying my invention into effect I fix 
to the spokes a of the main sprocket or chain 
wheel a a ring a', revolving upon the periph 
ery of disk C., forming the center or hub of 
said main sprocket or chain wheel C, which 
is attached to the crank b, as shown in Figs. 
4 and 5, and consequently to the spindle c. 
The disk a has curved or inclined recesses a 
to receive clutch balls or rollers a. The ring 
a' is secured to the spokes a or periphery of 
the main sprocket or chain wheel a in any 
suitable manner and is kept in correct posi 
tion with relation to the disk a by means of 
metal rings a, which latter are secured either 
to the ring a', as shown, or to the disk C. 
The clutch for the brake mechanism is of 
similar construction to that above described, 
but smaller, and is attached to the opposite 
crank b', which, as usual, is attached to the 
spindle c. The outer ring d of the brake 
clutch, which encircles the spindle c inde 
pendently of the main sprocket or chain 
wheel and its clutch, has connected thereto 
a short band d", which by an adjustable rod 
e is connected to one end of the brake-band 
f. This outer ring d has also connected 
thereto one end of a short chain d, the other 
end of which is connected to the bottom fork 
g of the machine by a swiveling piece d to 
prevent the outer ring d moving forward be-, 
yond a certain distance when driving the ma 
chine forward, but which will permit it to 
move backward a sufficient distance to put 
on the brake when caused to do so by back 
pedaling. The other end of the brake-band 
f is connected to an arm or link f', which is 
pin-jointed to the bottom forkg or to a fix 
ture thereon, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. 
I preferably employ a brake-drum f', fixed 
to the spokes of the driving-wheel by means 
of metal clips, as shown in Fig. 8. These 
clips are formed of sheet metal folded to make 
a tubular receptacleh for the spoke, with a web 
h', through a hole in which is passed a fixing 
screw h. These clips are made right and left 
handed, as shown in Figs. 9 to 12, the webs 
h' overlapping each other and the screw h 
passing through the same into the brake 
drum. These metal clips may also be used 
to connect the spokes together in lieu of the 
copper wire and solder usually employed; 
but instead of connecting the spokes where 
they cross each other such clips would connect 
them together a little nearer to the hub. 
It will be understood that the inclined re 
cesses a and d shown in Figs. 4 and 6 are 
actually cut in opposite directions, these two 
figures being seen from opposite sides of the 
machine. By back-pedaling the main sprocket 
or chain wheel clutch is thrown out and the 
brake-clutch is then thrown into action. 
In Fig. 4 the clutch apparatus is shown in 
action gripping or clutching the periphery of 
O 
25 
45 
50 
55 
75 
: 95 
ICO 
 
2 
610,649 
the main sprocket or chain wheel a, and thus 
driving the machine, the arrow shown in full 
lines indicating the direction of rotation. 
In Fig. 6 I have shown the parts in the po 
sition they would assume when the brake is 
being applied, the disk d being connected 
rigidly with the outer ring d, which through 
the adjustable rode pulls one end of the brake 
band f. This action will cause the brake 
band to be applied firmly nearly all round 
the brake-drum f', as shown in Fig. 3, the 
upward pull of the end of the brake-band 
causing the link f' to move toward the brake 
drum; but as soon as a forward action is 
given to the cranks the outer ring d of the 
brake-clutch moves forward in the direction 
shown by the arrow in full lines in Fig. 6, 
until stopped by the chain d, thus allowing 
the rode to move backward and release the 
brake-band f, which latter by moving round 
pushes the link f' away from the drum. 
The apparatus herein described does not 
in any Way increase the width of tread. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a velocipede, the combination of a 
Spindle, cranks rigidly attached thereto, a 
main sprocket or chain wheel encircling said 
spindle, a clutch interposed between said 
spindle and main sprocket or chain wheel and 
acting to drive said main sprocket or chain 
wheel in one direction, a ring encircling said 
spindle independently of the main sprocket 
and its clutch, a clutch interposed between 
said ring and spindle and acting to rotate said 
ring in the contrary direction, a chain or band 
O 
25 
35 
 
to prevent said ring rotating beyond a certain 
distance, a brake-band and a drum therefor, 
a band connected to said ring, an adjustable 
rod connecting said band and brake-band, 
and a movable link connecting the other end 
of said brake-band to the frame of the ma 
chine, substantially as described. 
2. In a velocipede, the combination of a 
brake-band having one end attached to an 
operating-rod and the other end attached to . 
a movable link pivoted to part of the frame, 
a rotatable ring and clutch for operating said 
brake-band, and a driving - clutch, with a 
brake-drum arranged concentrically to the 
spokes of the driving-wheel, and independent 
spoke-grips formed of two parts, each having 
a tubular portion for the passage of the spokes, 
and a web, the webs of said parts being adapt 
ed to overlap one another and provided with 
registering screw-holes, and binding-screws 
passing through said holes and engaging said 
brake - drum, thereby securing said brake 
drum in place and binding the spokes to 
gether, substantially as described. 
3. In a velocipede, spoke-grips formed in 
two parts, each having a tubular portion for 
the passage of the spokes, and a Web, the 
webs of said parts being adapted to overlap 
one another and provided with registering 
screw-holes, and a binding-screw passing 
through said holes for securing said grips in 
place, substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
JOHN HARRINGTON. 
4. 
Witnesses: 
CLAUDE. K. MILLS, 
GEO. P. S. KELSEY. 
45 
SO 
55 
65 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610749.txt	No. 610,749. 
(No Mode.) 
L. A. TREAT. 
BAR PLNG MECHANISM. 
(Application filed Apr. 22, 1898.) 
Patented Sept. 3, 1898. 
3. Sheets-Sheet. 
 
Areasizia 
{CE-G 
 
No. 610,749. 
(No Model.) 
Patented Sept. 13, 1898, 
L. A. TREAT. 
BAR PLNG MECHANISM 
(Application filed Apr. 22, 1898.) 
N 3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
w 
N N. 
& N. 
$ S. 
s 
:: 
 
& 
s 
... if 
& 
S 
R 
t 
s 
Q 
R S. 
2 
y:: 
R NS 
is: 
O 
. 
an 
D 
o 
O 
e) { 
\ 
Sisle 
O 
I. 
DD 
9 
Ett 
R 
El 
O 
& 
EEA 
E 
an 
ago: O 
SQ. 
- 
WTNESSES 
: 
is 
a 
27. 
- 
INVENToR, 
A. (0.7-a-f 
, No. 4 lo?. 6 Atty. 
 
it it. N*ris PE refs co, PHon:-L, Ho. washington, d. c. 
No. 60,749. 
(No Model.) 
L. A. TREAT. 
BAR PLNG MECHANISM. 
(Application filed Apr. 22, 1898.) 
Patented Sept. 3, 1898. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
- 
-- 
-- 
, - - - "I, 
- 
- 
 
at . A 3 
Arge '- 
 
WTNESSES 
(2.7%a 
NVENToR, 
4.0.0. Total 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LINCOLN A. TREAT, OF YOUNGSTOWN, OHIO, ASSIGNOR TO THE OHIO STEEL 
COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
BAR PLNG MECHANISM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,749, dated September 13, 1898. 
Application filed April 22, 1898, Serial No. 678,471. (No model.) 
To ?till tuh-07, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, LINCOLN A. TREAT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Youngstown, in the county of Mahoning and 
State of Ohio, have invented or discovered 
certain new and useful Improvements in Bar 
Piling Mechanism, of which improvements 
the following is a specification. 
The invention described herein relates to 
certain improvements in bar-piling mechan 
1S. 
It is now the general practice to arrange 
bars as they come from the cutting mechan 
ism and while in a hot condition in a pile one 
upon the other. This arrangement of the hot 
bars prevents to a very considerable extent 
the Oxidation of the surfaces of the bars. The 
bar-piling mechanism now in general use is 
SO constructed and arranged with reference 
to the delivering-table of the cutting mech 
anism that the bars are slid longitudinally 
upon preceding bars. As the present mill 
practice requires a rapid movement of the 
bars, the latter are moved with considerable 
Velocity, so that when they are stopped by 
the abutment at the rear end of the piling 
frame the forward ends of the bars, which are 
hot, are buckled and bent. This bending or 
buckling prevents the bars from lying com 
pactly or closely one upon the other and there 
fore permits of the access of air and the con 
sequent oxidation of the surfaces. 
The object of the presentinvention is to pro 
vide for the straightening of the bent or buc 
kled portions of the bars and also to provide 
for the easy removal of a pile of bars. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming a 
part of this specification, Figure 1 is a top 
plan view of a bar-piling mechanism con 
structed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a view partly in side and partly in end 
elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a transverse 
section, the plane of section being indicated 
by the line III III, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 4 is a side 
elevation of a portion of a form of bar-piling 
mechanism having my improved straighten 
ing mechanism applied thereto. Fig. 5 is a 
sectional elevation of the same, showing the 
position of the parts when the receiving cage 
or frame is raised; and Fig. 6 is a front ele 
Vation of the straightening mechanism. 
O 
ed 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
At the end of the feed-table A leading from 
the shear mechanism are arranged a pair of 
rolls 1, one or both of which are positively 
driven, and the upper roll is forced down 
Wardly by springs 2, so as to obtain a firm 
grip by the rolls on the bar. The employ 
ment of a pair of gripping-rolls at this point 
is desirable, as the frictional resistance pre 
sented by the bar sliding over the surface of 
the preceding bar is considerable, so that at 
times the frictional grip of the ordinary feed 
rollers on which the article rests would not 
be sufficient to effect a movement of the 
bar. In the rear of the feed-rollers 1 and at 
suitable distances therefrom I arrange one 
Or more rails 3 at right angles to the path of 
movement of the article as fed by the rollers 
l, and on these rolls I place the wheels 4 of 
the trucks 5. On these trucks are secured 
Supporting frames or beds 6 and 6, carrying 
the cages or frames for the bars. The cages 
or frames are formed by bottom plates 7 7 
and side plates 9 and 9. The bottom plates 
may be made continuous, if desired; but it is 
preferred to form them in sections, as shown, 
the forward end of each section being down 
Wardly curved, so that they will not present 
any obstruction to the onward movement of 
the bars. 
A series of posts or standards 8 and 8 are 
secured to opposite sides of the beds 5 and 6. 
and project above the bottom plates 7 and 7. 
The side plates 9 and 9 are secured to these 
Standards above the bed-plates and serve to 
laterally retain the bars in position. In or 
der that the forward ends of these side plates 
may not present any obstacle to the onward 
movement of the bars, they are curved out 
Wardly, as shown in Fig. 1. These receiving 
cages or frames can be shifted laterally into 
and out of line with the feed-rollers 1 by any 
suitable form or construction of mechanism 
such, for example, as that shown, consisting 
of fluid-pressure cylinders 10 and 10, ar 
ranged on opposite sides of the cages or 
frames and having their piston-rods or rams 
connected to the frames, as shown. In such 
a construction one of the cages or frames af 
ter having received a sufficient number of 
bars can be shifted out of line of feed of the 
rollers 1 and the other frame simultaneously 
95 
OO 
2 
- - 
610,749 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
shifted into receiving position. While the 
second frame or cage is being charged the 
pile of bars can be removed from the other 
frame by a crane or any other suitable means. 
An abutment 12 is arranged in the line offeed 
of the bars as they come from the feed-rollers 
1 to serve as a stop to the onward movement 
of the bars. As hereinbefore stated, the bars 
are moved with such velocity into the cages 
or frames that their forward ends are buckled 
up by striking against the stop or abutment 
12, so that they will not lie closely against or 
upon the preceding bar, and the succeeding 
bar will be raised in similar manner. In or 
der to flatten out the ends of the bars and 
cause them to lie closely one upon the other, 
a power-driven hammer is so arranged with 
relation to the stop 12 that the ends of the 
bars when buckled can be easily and quickly 
hammered down to form a close compact pile. 
In the construction shown in Figs. 1 and 2 
the stop or abutment 12 is formed by a stand 
ard or upright 13, secured upon a suitable 
foundation in proper relation to the rear ends 
of the cages when in the line of feed of the 
rollers 1. A fluid-pressure cylinder 14 is se 
cured to the upper end of the post or stand 
ard, so that its axis will be in line with the 
rear ends of the bars as they abut against the 
stop 12. To the piston of this fluid-pressure 
cylinder is secured a suitably-shaped head 15. 
It will be readily understood that by the op 
eration of the piston with its hammer-head 
the ends of the bars may be quickly and eas 
ily hammered down straight. 
As shown in Figs. 4, 5, and 6, my improved 
straightening mechanism can be applied to a 
form of bar-piling mechanism now in use. 
Generally stated, this bar-piling mechanism 
consists of a frame 17, supported upon the 
rams or piston-rods of fluid-pressure cylin 
ders 18, whereby the frame can be raised and 
lowered as required. This frame is formed 
by a series of vertical standards 19, which 
have side plates secured thereto for the pur 
pose of laterally retaining the bars in posi 
tion. The cage or frame thus constructed is 
designed to be lowered to receive the bars 
from the feed-rollers 1 and when a sufficient 
number has been charged thereinto to be 
raised for the removal of the bar-piles, which 
are held in position by stops 21, mounted upon 
the guide-standards 22. 
At the rear end of the cage or frame a stop 
or abutment is formed by a bracket 23, piv 
otally mounted in suitable bearings formed 
On the post or standard 24. On its front side 
this bracket is provided with a toe or projec 
tion 25, adapted to project under the rear end 
of the cage or frame, which serves to hold the 
bracket in a vertical or operative position. 
The bracket is turned backward when the 
cage or frame is raised by means of a weight 
26, connected to a rearward projection 27 on 
the bracket. A hammer-head or plate 28 is 
secured to the upper end of bars 29, which 
pass through suitable guide-arms 30, secured 
to the front of the bracket, and have their 
lower ends connected to the forked ends of a 
lever 31, which has its rear end pivotally con 
nected to a fulcrum-link 32, having its lower 
end loosely connected to the base of the frame 
or standard. This lever is connected at a 
point midway between its ends to the rod 33, 
which has its ends connected to the pistons 
of fluid-pressure cylinders 34 and 34", which 
are formed integrally with or secured upon 
the frame or standard 24. As the bars are 
forced against the stop 12 formed by the 
upper ends of the bracket their buckled or 
bent ends can be straightened by the opera 
tion of the hammer-head 28. As soon as the 
cage or frame has been charged with the 
proper number of bars it is raised, so that the 
pile can be removed, as hereinbefore stated. 
As the cage or frame is raised the bracket 
and the hammer-head will be moved by the 
weight 26 out of the line of movement of the 
rear ends of the bars. As the frame is low 
ered to operative or receiving position its rear 
end will strike against the toe or projection 
25 on the bracket, thereby returning the 
bracket and the hammer-head to operative 
position. 
I claim herein as my invention 
1. The combination of a bar-piling mech 
anism and a striking or pressing mechanism 
arranged in such relation to the bar-piling 
mechanism as to be operative to straighten 
and flatten down bars fed into the piling 
mechanism, substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination of a bar-piling mech 
anism, a striking or pressing mechanism ar 
ranged in operative relation to the piling 
mechanism, and means for shifting one of 
said mechanisms, substantially as set forth. 
3. The combination of one or more bar-re 
ceiving cages or frames, means for shifting 
the same, and a striking or pressing mechan 
ism arranged in operative relation to the re 
ceiving cages or frames when in normal posi 
tion, substantially as set forth. 
4. The combination of a bar-receiving cage 
or frame, means for shifting the cage or frame, 
a striking or pressing mechanism and means 
controlled by the cage or frame for shifting 
the striking or pressing mechanism out of 
operative position, substantially as set forth. 
5. The combination of a bar-receiving cage 
or frame, means for raising and lowering the 
cage or frame, a pivotally-mounted bracket 
provided with a toe projecting under the rear 
end of the cage or frame and adapted to auto 
matically drop away from the frame, a strik 
ing or pressing head movably mounted on the 
bracket, an operating-motor and a flexible 
connection from the motor to the striking or 
pressing head, Substantially as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand. 
LINCOLN. A. TREAT. 
Witnesses: 
DARWIN S. WOLCOTT, 
F. E. GAITHER. 
75 
95 
OO 
IC5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610849.txt	No. 610,849. 
(No Model.) 
S. McELROY. 
Patented Sept. 13, 1898. 
APPARATUS FOR PURIFYING WATER. 
(Application filed oct. 20, 1897.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
WITNESSES 
- 
/WWEAVTOR 
(25 %ree 
BY 
2 vote 
 
THE MORRIS PETERS co, Photo-LTHo, washingro, c. 
ATTORNEYS, 
 
 
  
 
 
No. 60,849. 
S. M. CELROY. 
Patented Sept. 13, 1898. 
APPARATUS FOR PURIFYING WATER. 
(Application filed Oct. 20, 89.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
13 NMZ ZigZ2NZ 
S 
3y2 
N N 
Y 
k22 2Z 2a2azaaaaaaa 
C 
1. 
a/ 
/NWEAVTOR 
35 % BY 
ATTOAMEYS. 
the NORRIS PETERs co, PHoro-LTHo washtnero.c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL McELROY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y. 
APPARATUS FOR PURIFYING WATER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,849, dated September 13, 1898. 
Application filed October 20, 1897, Serial No. 665,794, (No model.) 
To all, whom it. Thaily concern: 
Be it known that I, SAMUEL MCELROY, of 
New York, (Brooklyn,) in the county of Kings 
and State of New York, have invented a new 
and Improved Conduit Induction-Valve, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
This invention relates to certain new and 
useful improvements in automatic conduit 
induction-valves for water depuration. 
My invention is intended to furnish a sim 
ple, direct, and economical method of charg 
ing water in conduits in a state of fermenta 
tion with air or other antiseptic gases or liq 
uids in the line of delivery of the conduit 
and from convenient adjacent stations by 
applying the principle of draft under lateral 
communication. 
It is well known that the oxygen of the air 
is a valuable corrective and destroyer of or 
ganic matter with which water-conduits are 
apt to be contaminated. The artificial meth 
ods generally in use for purifying water in 
volve costly pumping, filtering, and other sta 
tions, appliances, and machinery which are 
superseded by my invention, under which the 
force of gravity itself becomes the chief 
method of applying air or corrective gases or 
solutions directly to the water in motion with 
in the conduit. I therefore place in the line 
of the conduit a section of its length with sub 
stantially the vend-contracta form, so as to 
use the increased current in the section as a 
means of increasing the draft for certain in 
lets, producing in them a powerful induction 
assisted by a special eddy. At a convenient 
point opposite or near the induction-valve lo 
cally adapted for the purpose I place an in 
duction-chamber, With an inlet for air prop 
erly connected with an inlet to the induction 
valve section, with a check or stop valve to 
guard reactions, and also a Solution-chamber 
in like manner connected with the induction 
valve-section inlet and guarded by proper 
check and stop valves for the supply of anti 
septic gases or solutions composed and pro 
portioned in a natural or compressed state, as 
the condition of the Water and efficient treat 
ment may require. 
I will describe a conduit induction - valve 
embodying my invention, and then point out 
the novel features in the appended claims. 
- 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the views. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a section of con 
duit, showing a portion of my invention as ap 
plied thereto. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the 
water-conduit and showing my invention ap 
plied thereto. Fig. 3 is an end elevation. 
Fig. 4 is a longitudinal section of an induc 
tion-valve employed. Fig. 5 is an end view 
thereof. Fig. 6 is a side elevation thereof. 
Fig. 7 is a partial vertical section and partial 
elevation of an air and antiseptic applying 
device employed, and Fig. 8 is a section on the 
line 88 of Fig. 7. 
The induction-valve comprises a casing 1, 
which has its inlet end made circular to en 
gage with a conduit or pipe section 2 and its 
outlet end also made circular to engage with 
a pipe or conduit section 3. Between the 
ends the casing is reduced in cross-section, 
as indicated at 4, and between this reduced 
portion and the outlet end the casing is made 
rectangular. This compression of the casing 
is designed to produce compression in the 
central current and an increased velocity of 
Water in the throat thus formed. To pro 
mote this increased velocity, I use a deflect 
ing-plate 5, which conforms to the side of the 
induction-valve casing, and to the entrance 
end of which it is attached by a hinge-joint 
6. The plate 5 may be adjusted in or out by 
means of a screw-rod 7, engaging in a tapped 
hole formed in a screw-plug 8, engaging with 
a hollow lug extended from the casing. The 
inner end of the screw, 7 has a link connec 
tion 9 with a lug on the plate 5. 
On one side of the induction-valve casing 
and near its throat are two inlet-tubes 10 and 
11, which extend through the casing and are 
longitudinally curved, as plainly shown in 
Fig. 4. The tube 10 is designed for the inlet 
for antiseptic gases and solutions, and the 
tube 11 is designed for the inlet of air. It 
will be noted that the mouth of the tube 11 is 
somewhat rearward of the mouth of the tube 
10, and these mouth portions will be at a con 
venient distance beyond the throat of the cas 
ing to receive the strongest current draft, the 
ends being formed flatwise to promote draft 
eddies. 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
IOC) 
 
2 
610,849 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
50 
55 
To use the differing pressures caused by 
the change in velocity in the induction-valve 
and to promote the flow from the induction 
chamber by circulation, as will be hereinafter 
described, a supply-pipe 12 communicates 
with the interior of the valve-casing 1 or any 
convenient inlet upstream on the main, and 
its portion within the valve-casing is extended 
forward toward the inlet of the casing and is 
made funnel shape. 
13 indicates a casing designed to be located 
on a reservoir-bank near the pump-main or 
conduit-inlet, or near the sidewalk curb-line 
contiguous to and above the induction-valve, 
or at any suitable point for this use in a flow 
ing-conduit. In this casing is provided an 
air-inlet 14, a solution-tank 15, a solution and 
mixing tank 16, and a circulating-pipe-con 
taining tank 17. The air-inlet tank or cham 
ber 14 is provided with a hand-hole 18 at its 
top and is also provided near its top with air 
inlets 19, made in the form of screens. 
Extended upward in the chamber 14 is an 
air-inlet pipe 20, which has a pipe connection 
21 with the air-inlet tube 11. At its upper 
end the air-inlet pipe 20 is provided with an 
automatic check and stop valve 22. This 
valve is circular and is pivoted on a stem 
which is eccentrically placed, and the valve 
is designed to engage with a bevel-seat 23, 
formed in the pipe 20. The valve is held by 
a stop at less than full opening, and in case 
of reaction on the induction-valve this posi 
tion favors the tendency to close, which the 
difference in areas on each side of the pivotal 
point or stem will insure, as the pressure 
caused by the reaction on this enlarged area, 
will close the valve. An arm 24 is connected 
to one end of the pivot of the valve and is 
designed for use when closing the valve by 
hand. In case it is desirable to use the cham 
ber 14 under pressure from the conduit and 
since the other chambers can be used under 
any back pressure from the conduit, the in 
let-top can be closed tight and the air-pipe 
extended to any desired height for air-supply 
to the circulating current. 
The solution-tank 15 is designed to contain 
such antiseptic solutions or gases as are to be 
used. It is provided with a plug-closed inlet 
25, through which the material may be passed 
into the chamber or tank. In the chamber 
16 the antiseptic material or gases can be 
mixed with Water as supplied from the con 
duit or any suitable source. Communication 
is provided between the tanks 15 and 16 by 
means of a pipe 26, communicating at its up 
per end with the tank 15 and communicating 
at its lower end with a horizontally-disposed 
pipe 27, leading into the lower portion of the 
tank 16. The pipe 26 is provided with a stop 
valve 28, having an upwardly-extended stem 
29, provided at its upper end with a hand 
wheel, which may be reached through the 
hand-hole 30, formed in the top of the casing 
13. 
slide-valve 31, which is operated automat 
ically by the changes of pressure in the con 
duit, which increase or diminish the quantity 
of solution fed to the mixing-tank 16. 
As a means for supplying water from the 
conduit I employ the pipe 12 heretofore de 
scribed. This pipe 12 communicates with 
the pipe 27 in the casing 13. The pipe 27 has 
an upwardly-extended branch 32, upon the 
upper end of which is affixed a cylinder 33, in 
which a piston is arranged to operate verti 
cally. The upwardly-extended rod 34 of the 
piston is designed to carry a weight or weights 
35, which will normally balance the ordinary 
pressure from the conduit, but which may be 
moved by a change in the pressure up or 
down. Pivotally connected to an arm ex 
tended from the piston-rod 34 is a lever 36, 
which at one end is pivoted to lugs 37, at 
tached to the interior of the casing 13. An 
angle-lever 38, pivoted to an arm 39, extended 
from the pipe 26, has its horizontally-disposed 
member engaged with the lever 36, and its 
vertically-disposed member is provided with 
a slot through which a pin on the stem 39 of 
the valve extends. Obviously an increase of 
Water-pressure will move the piston upward 
in the cylinder 33, and as the lever 36 is ar 
ranged on an incline it will be rocked in such 
manner as to turn the angle-lever 38, which 
will force the valve 31 inward, thus automat 
ically diminishing the supply of material 
from the tank 15 to the tank 16. Upon a re 
duction of pressure the weighted piston-rod 
34 will be moved downward by the weight 
and move the valve 31 toward its open posi 
tion. The supply of material may also be 
regulated by means of the valve 28. A valve 
is provided to open and close the pipe 12. 
This valve has a stem 40, extended upward 
and provided with a hand-wheel at its upper 
end. 
As an adjunct of the depurating induction 
valve, which by chemical and mechanical ac 
tion tends to cause a prompt subsidence and 
deposit of organic matter in the conduit, at a 
proper point contiguous to the valve and con 
nected to the pipe or conduit I place a roil 
pipe 41. This roil-pipe has branch connec 
tions 4243 with the conduit, and in the branch 
connection 43, which is downstream, is placed 
a screen 44 and in the conduit near the branch 
42 is placed a screen 45. On the lower side 
of the pipe 41 and communicating there with 
is a chamber 46, designed to receive the sedi 
ment or mud, which may be drawn off through 
a valve-controlled pipe 47, leading to a sewer 
or other outlet. The screens 44 and 45 will 
serve to automatically check the flow of 
Water, so that the mud or similar matter car 
ried thereby will be deposited in the roil 
chamber. 
In operation the Water flowing through the 
conduit will produce a draft which draws the 
air through the pipe 21 and the antiseptic 
through a pipe 4S, leading from the bottom of 
Also arranged within the pipe 26 is a the tank 16 and communicating with the out 
let tube or pipe 10. This antiseptic air will 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
610,849 
- 
3 
5 Patent 
of course be mixed with the water and destroy 
or neutralize the impurities therein. . 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
1. In combination with a liquid-conduit, an 
induction-valve comprising a casing, a plate 
mounted to SWing in the casing, and means for 
directing air and an antiseptic into the cas 
ing, substantially as specified. 
2. In combination with a water-conduit, an 
induction-valve comprising a casing contract 
ed between its ends, a plate mounted to swing 
in the casing, means for adjusting said plate, 
and means for directing air and an antiseptic 
into the casing, substantially as specified. 
3. In combination with a water-conduit, an 
induction-valve comprising a casing contract 
ed between its ends, a pipe leading into the 
casing and having its outlet for air down 
stream of the contracted portion, a pipe lead 
ing into the casing and having its outlet foran 
tiseptic material downstream of the contract 
ed portion, and a plate adjustable transversely 
in the casing, substantially as specified. 
4. The combination, with a water pipe or 
conduit, and an induction-valve, of an air 
pipe having communication with the interior 
of the induction-valve, a valve eccentrically 
mounted in said air-pipe, a casing having a 
mixing-chamber for an antiseptic, and a pipe 
leading from said chamber and discharging 
into the induction - valve, substantially as 
specified. 
5. The combination, with a water pipe or 
conduit, of an induction-valve having con 
nection with sections of the pipe or conduit, 
O 
25 
35 
 
45 
55 
a casing arranged adjacent to the valve, the 
said casing having chambers for containing 
and mixing an antiseptic, and also having a 
chamber containing distributing-pipes, a 
valve-controlled air-pipe extending upward 
in a chamber of said casing and having com 
munication with the interior of the induction 
valve, and a pipe leading from the induction 
valve and connecting with a valve-controlled 
pipe system in the circulating-pipe chamber, 
substantially as specified. 
6. In combination with a water conduit or 
pipe and an induction-valve, a roil-pipe ar 
ranged below the Water conduit or pipe and 
having branch connections there with, a screen 
in the downstream branch of said roil-pipe, 
a screen in the main pipe adjacent to the up 
stream branch of the roil-pipe, the said roil 
pipe having a sediment-chamber at its lower 
side, and a valve-controlled pipe leading from 
said sediment-chamber, substantially as speci 
fied. 
7. In combination with a Water pipe or con 
duit, an induction-valve, a container for an 
antiseptic material, a pipe leading from said 
container to the induction-valve, a pipe lead 
ing from the induction-valve to the container, 
a valve actuated by a change of water-pressure 
in the conduit or pipe for controlling the pipe 
leading from the induction-valve into the con 
tainer for antiseptic material, and an air-pipe 
leading into the induction-valve, substantially 
as specified. 
Witnesses: 
SAMUEL MICELROY. 
HARRY B. CHRISTOPHER, 
NATHL. COTHREN. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US610950.txt	No. 60,950. 
(No Mode.) 
Patented Sept. 20, 1898. 
H. F. SMITH. 
PAPER BOX. 
{Application filed Feb. 15, 1897.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet . A2 
Zi. 
z/ 
hit . 
Z tele (or 
//ouvez voe. A 5/7e o/Zo 
1246/5 
| 
A1/a^/ges 5 es 
// 6, 6-4,a? 
 
No. 610,950. 
(No Model.) 
 
H. F. SMITH. 
PAPER BOX. 
(Application filed Feb. 15, 1897. 
Patented Sept. 20, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
Aa1a e 55 625 
4, 6, 6 (42/ 
1% 7%re 
Z72 eve/e (or 
/orz ce. Z 5 Zve a //e. 
a Co4-y-Sat 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HOWARD F. SMITH, OF ELKHART, INDIANA. 
PAPER BOX. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 610,950, dated September 20, 1898. 
Application filed February 15 1897, Serial No, 628,500, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
. 
. 
. . 
To all, whon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, HoWARD F. SMITH, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Elk 
hart, in the county of Elkhart and State of 
Indiana, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Paper Boxes, which are 
fully set forth in the following specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, in which-- . 
. 
Figure 1 is a plan view of the blank from 
Which a box constructed according to my in 
vention is made. Fig. 2 is a perspective view 
of such box struck up and partly collapsed. 
Fig. 3 is a perspective view of a box com 
pletely collapsed and ready for shipment. 
Fig. 4 is a perspective view of a box opened 
up provided with a filler and ready for use. 
My invention relates to knockdown paper 
boxes, and has for its object to provide a box 
which when struck up can easily be collapsed 
into a form suitable for shipment and can 
later be opened up for use by the purchaser 
without requiring from him the process of 
striking up or engaging together the various 
parts. Such a box is particularly adapted to 
receive a filler for the holding of eggs or other 
like contents, since such filler holds the box 
in proper position when opened out. My in 
Vention is equally adapted, however, to apply 
to any paper box, Without regard to such filler. 
Referring to the drawings by letter, A rep 
resents the body portion of the blank, which 
in most cases will constitute the bottom of 
the box. 
B B designate the two sides, formed inte 
gral with A, and C C the two ends. 
As shown in the drawings, the sides B B 
are longer than the ends C. C. The reverse 
may equally well be the case, however. Each 
of the sides B is provided at each end with 
a triangular flap B", the outer edge of which, 
B, is preferably formed at an angle of ap 
proximately forty-five degrees with the other 
edges thereof. Upon this edge is formed a 
tongue B. The construction of this tongue 
may be considerably varied. In the draw 
ings I have shown it as provided with two 
hooks or projections band b' at opposite ends 
Of the end pieces C C the opposite edges 
C'C' are beveled off, as shown. Adjacent to 
each such edge and disposed at an angle of 
approximately forty-five degrees to the base 
thereof. 
- 
. 
of the end piece. C, I form a slot C. The 
particular form of this slot, like that of the 
tongue, may be substantially varied. 
I find, 
however, that an especially secure form of 
lock, as well as one easy to operate, is ob 
tained by forming the slot C to comprise a 
straight slit c, an upper and a lower curved 
recess c' and c, respectively, on opposite sides 
of the slit c, and a short diagonal branch c 
at the lower end of the said slit. . 
When the box is to be struck up, it will be 
seen that the hook b may first be inserted in 
the upper end of the slot C, for which pur 
pose it made be bent slightly, as permitted 
by the recess c'. The whole tongue is then 
pressed upward in the slot and the lower hook 
b' inserted in the lower portion thereof, being 
bent slightly, as permitted by the recess c, 
while the branch c permits the entry of the 
tip of the tongue without fracture. The whole 
tongue will be thus firmly engaged with the 
slot C*-even more firmly than usual with 
knockdown boxes of this general type, Any 
slight increase of difficulty in joining the 
tongue and slot, as compared with such prior 
constructions, is of comparatively little im 
portance, since my present construction is 
intended to be struck up by a skilled opera 
tive in a factory and not by the unskilled pur 
In the drawings I have shown my box as 
provided with a cover D. It is obvious that 
my invention may, however, be applied to 
boxes without any cover. The cover D is 
shown as hinged at one edge to one of the 
sides B. The said cover is provided at either 
end with an end piece E, corresponding to the 
end pieces C C, and at one end of each of the 
said end pieces is formed a slot E", analogous 
to the slot C. The cover D is further pro 
vided with a side piece F, to each end of 
which is secured a flap F, corresponding to 
the flaps B", and provided with a tongue F, 
corresponding to the tongues B. The side 
piece F of the cover D may further be pro 
vided with a hook F, in which case there will 
be formed a slot F, adapted to receive the 
same in that side piece B to which the cover 
To strike up this box, the 
is not attached. 
operative will swing up the end pieces CC 
into a vertical position and then the side pieces 
B. B. The flaps B will next be bent around 
and outside of the end pieces C C and the 
chasers thereof. 
- 
. 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
Io5 
45 
 
2. 
610,950 
O 
tongues B caused to engage with the slots 
C in the manner already described. In case 
a cover ID is employed the end pieces E and 
side piece F thereof are swung up and locked 
in a similar manner. The box is thus in a 
condition for use and may receive a filler G, 
as shown in Fig. 4, such as are used in egg 
cases of any ordinary construction, or may 
receive any other contents. Ordinarily, how 
ever, it will be desired to ship the box from 
the factory, the said box receiving its con 
tents when it reaches the hands of the pur 
chaser. For this purpose a box so constructed 
is adapted to collapse into a flat form. 
Fig.2 shows the boxin a partially-collapsed 
state. To effect this, it will be seen that the 
end pieces C C are swung inward, in which 
operation each of the locks, from the arrange 
ment and form of both the slot and the tongue, 
acts as a species of hinge, while at the same 
time the side pieces B B also swing inward, 
but are prevented from binding against the 
end pieces C C by the beveled edges C of the 
latter. By continuing this proceeding the 
entire box-body may be collapsed into a flat 
shape, as shown in Fig. 3, and if a cover be 
employed it also may be similarly collapsed, 
as shown in said figure. In this condition 
the box is ready for shipment. When re 
ceived by the purchaser, it requires but the 
simplest operation to open up the collapsed 
box. In the box so opened up there may be 
inserted the filler G, which likewise will be 
transmitted in a collapsed state, or any other 
contents may be placed therein. 
As heretofore pointed out, it is obvious that 
many changes in the details of this construc 
tion, in the relative proportions of the parts, 
and particularly in the form of the locking 
devices may be made without departing from 
the gist of my invention. 
Having thus described the construction of 
my invention, what I claim, and desire to se 
cure by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a paper box, a bottom A; side pieces 
B; end pieces C; and means for detachably 
locking the said side and end pieces; all 
adapted to permit the box to collapse into a 
flat form Without unlocking or creasing said 
ieces. 
2. In a knockdown paper box, a bottom A; 
side pieces B provided with flaps B'; end 
pieces C; and means for detachably interlock 
ing the said flaps with the said end pieces; all 
adapted to permit the box to collapse into a 
flat form Without disengaging or creasing the 
Said pieces. 
3. In a knockdown paper box, a bottom A; 
side pieces B; flaps B provided with tongues 
B; and end pieces C provided with slots C9 
for receiving the tongues B8; all adapted to 
permit the box to collapse into a flat form 
Without disengaging or creasing the said 
pieces. 
4. In a knockdown paper box, a bottom A; 
side pieces B; flaps B' cut along their outer 
edges B at an angle of approximately forty 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
five degrees and provided with tongues B; 
and end pieces C provided with the slots C, 
disposed at an angle of approximately forty 
five degrees to the base of the said end pieces, 
adapted to receive the tongues B; all adapt 
ed to permit the box to collapse into a flat 
form without disengaging or creasing said 
pieces. 
5. In a knockdown paper box, a bottom A; 
side pieces B; flaps B' integral with the said 
sides, cut along their outer edges B at an 
angle of approximately forty-five degrees and 
provided thereon with tongues B; and end 
pieces Cbeveled along their edges C and pro 
vided with slots C disposed at an angle, of 
approximately forty-five degrees to the base 
of said end pieces adapted to receive the 
tongues B; all adapted to permit the box to 
collapse into a flat form without disengaging 
or creasing said pieces. 
6. In a knockdown paper box, the bottom 
A; the sides B; the flaps Beach cut along 
its outer edge at an angle of approximately 
forty-five degrees and carrying thereon a 
tongue B provided with hooks band b' at op 
posite ends thereof; and the end pieces C, 
each beveled along its edges, as at C", and 
provided with slots C comprising a slit c 
formed at an angle of approximately forty-five 
degrees to the base of the end piece, curved 
recesses c' and cat opposite ends and upon 
opposite sides of the slit c, and a diagonal 
branch c' at the lower end of said slit; all 
adapted to permit the box to collapse into a 
flatform without disengaging or creasing said 
pieces. 
7. In a paper box, a bottom A; side pieces 
B; end pieces C; and means for detachably 
locking the said side and end pieces; in com 
bination with a cover D hinged to one of the 
said side pieces B; all adapted to permit the 
bOX to collapse into a flat form without un 
locking or creasing said pieces. 
8. In a paper. box, a bottom A; side pieces 
B; end pieces C; and means for detachably 
locking the said side and end pieces; in com 
bination with a cover Dhinged to one of the 
said side pieces B; end pieces E.; theside piece 
F; and means for locking the said side piece 
and end pieces; all adapted to permit the box 
to collapse into a flat form without unlocking 
Or creasing Said pieces. 
9. In a knockdown paper box, a bottom A; 
side pieces B; end pieces C; and means for 
detachably locking the said side and end 
pieces; alladapted to collapse into a flat form 
for shipment without unlocking or creasing 
said pieces; in combination with a filler G 
also adapted to collapse into a flat form, and 
to hold the parts of the box in position when 
the box is opened up and the filler inserted 
therein. 
HOWARD F, SMITH. 
Witnesses: 
A. A. MURRAY, 
FLORA BROM. 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611050.txt	No. 611,050. 
(No Model.) 
Patented Sept. 20, 1898. 
H. S. BREEDEN. 
DUPLEX PEN. 
(Application filed Dec. 10, 1897.) 
 
  
2 
2S 
a 
sy 
7,4 
Wiiposses 
43-464-to-4, fy 7/5 Allorpeys, 
2 
Ipjepfor 
/6race 5./Breeae/7. 
THE NORRIS REERs co., Photo...ho...wash:NTQN. o. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIORACE S. BREEDEN, OF MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA. 
DUPLEX PEN. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611,050, dated September 20, 1898. 
Application filed December 10, 1897, Serial No, 661,408, (No model.) 
To all Luhon, it in Cly concern: 
Be it known that I, HORACE S. BREEDEN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Min 
neapolis, in the county of Hennepin and State 
of Minnesota, have invented a new and use 
ful Duplex Pen, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention relates to duplex pens, its 
object being to provide an attachment to fit 
on an ordinary pen holder or handle and carry 
an additional pen, said pen being slidably 
mounted and adapted to be projected in ad 
vance of the pen secured in the holder or re 
tracted to the rear thereof, as desired. 
The invention further contemplates a foun 
tain attachment for the supplemental pen 
adjustably supported to adapt it for pens of 
different lengths. 
With these objects in view the invention 
Consists of the several details of construction 
and combinations of parts, as will be herein 
after fully described, and particularly point 
ed out in the claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of an Ordinary penholder and pen pro 
Vided with my improved attachment, the sup 
plemental pen being projected into position 
for use. Fig. 2 is a side elevation showing 
the Supplemental pen retracted. Fig. 3 is a 
Section on the line a ac of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a 
group showing the several parts of the at 
tachment separated. Fig. 5 is an end view 
of the holder for the supplemental pen and 
fountain attachment. 
Similar reference-numerals indicate similar 
parts in the several figures. 
1 indicates an ordinary penholder, and 2 
the pen supported in the holder in the ordi 
nary manner. 
3 indicates a longitudinally - split sleeve 
formed of any suitable sheet spring metal, 
and 4 is a strip of metal curved transversely 
to correspond to the curvature of the sleeve 
and supported thereon. Tongues 5 are struck 
up from the sleeve and extend through slots 
6 in the plate and are folded down over upon 
the plate in order to Secure the sleeve and 
plate together. The plate may, however, be 
Secured to the sleeve in any other preferred 
manner. The edges of the strip 4 are bent 
upwardly and inwardly over the main por 
tion to form guides 7, in which a transversely 
- 
curved plate 8 is mounted to slide upon the 
strip 4. The plate S is provided with a series 
of perforations (indicated by 9) for a purpose 
to be hereinafter referred to. 
10 indicates the Supplemental pen, 11 the 
fountain attachment, and 12 the holder for 
the supplemental pen and fountain attach 
ment. This holder is formed from a piece of 
sheet metal curved transversely and having 
its side portions bent inwardly toward each 
other to lie parallel with the curved central 
portion to form the curved recess 13, which 
forms a seat for the supplemental pen 10. 
The side portions are then given a return 
bend and secured at their edges to the outer 
face of the plate S, and another curved recess 
14 is thus formed, which serves as a seat for 
the butt-end of the fountain attachment 11, 
the plate 8 forming the lower wall of this re 
cess. The recesses 13 and 14 are open at 
their rear ends, and consequently either the 
supplemental pen or the fountain attach 
ment may be, if necessary, extended through 
the rear open end, and in this manner the 
supplemental pen and fountain attachment 
may be adjusted relatively to each other to 
get the best results, and a long pen may be 
used with a short fountain attachment, or vice 
WeS. 
Pens provided with my attachment are 
designed especially to use different-colored 
inks-that is, the ordinary pen-point can be 
used for Writing with ink of one color and 
the supplemental pen for Writing withink of 
another color-and my attachment will be 
especially useful for bookkeepers. In prac 
tice the sleeve 3 will be fitted on the end of 
the holder. immediately in rear of the pen and 
the plate 8 fitted in the guides 7, and when 
the pen 2 is being used the Supplemental pen 
will be retracted in the position shown in Fig. 
2. When, however, it is desired to use the 
supplemental pen, the Writer can, by engag-. 
ing the perforated part of the plate 8 with 
the forefinger, easily push the supplemental 
pen forward in its guideways to bring it in 
advance of the pen 2, and the supplemental 
pen can then be used as long as desired and 
then retracted by a backward movement of 
the forefinger of the Writer. The perfora 
tions 9 in the plate 8 will enable the Writer 
to get a firm engagement between the fore 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
611,050 
75 
65 
cured to the plate at its front end and pro- 55 
vided with two recesses extending longitudi 
nally thereof, and a supplemental pen and a 
fountain attachment supported in the respec 
tive recesses, substantially as described. 
4. In a duplex pen, the combination with 
an ordinary penholder and pen, of a sleeve 
mounted on the holder in rear of the pen and 
having guideways, a plate slidably supported 
on the sleeve in said guideways, a holder se 
cured to the plate at its front end and pro 
vided with two curved recesses extending 
longitudinally thereof and open at both ends, 
and a Supplemental pen and a fountain at 
tachment adjustably supported in the respec 
tive recesses, substantially as described. 
5. The combination with a pen-staff having 
a main writing-pen, of a guide-sleeve clamped 
firmly to said staff and provided with a longi 
tudinal guideway, a slidable plate provided 
at its front end with a duplex holder and fit 
ted to the guideway for endwise adjustment 
on said sleeve, an auxiliary pen fitted to said 
holder for adjustment with the slidable plate 
and adapted to be projected thereby beyond 
the main pen, and a fountain attachment also 
clamped in said holder independently of the 
auxiliary pen and maintained by the holder 
in operative relation at all times to the aux 
iliary pen, substantially as described. 
6. In a duplex pen, the combination with 
an ordinary staff and a pen, of a carrier-plate 
slidably fitted to said staff, and a supplemen 
tal pen and fountain attachment separately 
fitted to the carrier-plate for movement there 
with and adjustable independently of each 
other in said carrier-plate, substantially as 
described. 
7. In a duplex pen, the combination with a 
staff and a pen, of a carrier-plate slidably 
mounted on said staff and provided with a 
double holder, a supplemental pen fitted to 
said holder, and a fountain attachment ad 
justably attached to the holder and arranged 
beneath the supplemental pen, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
95 
OO 
IIORACE S. BREEDEN. 
Witnesses: 
ELLA. A. WHITNEY, 
E. BIRD JOHNSON. 
finger and the plate and will prevent the fin 
ger from slipping on the plate. 
By having the curved recesses in the holder 
12 open at both ends it is obvious that the 
fountain attachment can be adjusted for use 
With either a long or short supplemental pen, 
and in this manner the attachment is capable 
of use regardless of the particular form of 
pen employed in the holder 12. 
In my invention the split sleeve is of elastic 
metal to firmly clasp or grip the ordinary pen 
holder to hold itself firmly in place on the 
holder, and this elastic sleeve is provided 
with longitudinal guideways in which is fit 
ted a slidable plate that carries the auxiliary 
pen 10. This carrier-plate is movable in the 
guideway of the fixed pen to have endwise 
movement thereon a sufficient distance to 
project the auxiliary pen beyond the ordi 
nary pen, and this movement of the carrier 
plate and the auxiliary pen is directed by the 
guideways on the sleeve to make the auxil 
iary pen occupy axial relation to the pen 
staff and not obliquely thereto, so that the 
auxiliary pen may be used with the same 
facility and advantage as the ordinary pen. 
It will be understood that changes in the 
form, proportion, and the minor details of 
Construction may be resorted to without de 
parting from the spirit or sacrificing any of 
the advantages of this invention. 
Having thus described the invention, what 
I claim is- 
1. In a duplex pen, the combination with 
an Ordinary penholder and pen, of a sleeve 
mounted on the holder in rear of the pen and 
having guideways, a plate slidably supported 
on the sleeve in said guideways, a holder se 
cured to the plate at its other end, and a sup 
plemental pen supported in said holder, sub 
Stantially as described. 
2. In a duplex pen, the combination with 
an ordinary penholder and pen, of a sleeve 
mounted on the holder in rear of the pen and 
having guideways, a plate slidable on the 
sleeve in said guideways and provided with a 
Series of perforations, and a supplemental 
pen carried by the plate at its front end, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. In a duplex pen, the combination with 
an ordinary penholder and pen, of a sleeve 
mounted on the holder in rear of the pen and 
having guideways, a plate slidably supported 
on the sleeve in said guideways, a holder se 
- 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
s 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611150.txt	J. M. RYAN. 
Patented Sept. 20, 1898. 
COMBINED ASH SIFTER AND RECEIVER, 
(Application filed Nov. 30, 1897.) 
No. 61,150. 
(No Mode.) 
 
 
 
IRN Y 
$ 
 
 
H 
 
 
 
it. 
is  
 
s 
- 3 
 
 
 
 
Zzz.22%77't 
zzzz, 47e/21 
 
 
 
N. W. 
R 
% 
s-, 
 
 
  
M 
  
  
  
Y. 
26s 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN M. RYAN, OF ST. LOUIS, MISSO URI: 
coMBINED ASH SIFTER AND RECEIVER, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611,150, dated September 20, 1898. 
Application filed November 30, 1897, Serial No. 660,324, (No model.) 
To all, Luhon, it in City concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN M. RYAN, of the 
city of St. Louis, State of Missouri, have in 
Vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in a Combined Ash Sifter and Receiver, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, forming a part hereof. 
My invention relates to a combined ash 
Sifter and receiver; and it consists of the 
novel construction, combination, and arrange 
ment of parts hereinafter shown, described, 
and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a sectional view of my improved 
ash-sifter, said view being taken on a longi 
tudinal line midway between the front and 
rear Walls of the sifter. Fig. 2 is a transverse 
Sectional view of the sifter, showing the lid 
in an elevated position, said view being taken 
approximately on the line 22 of Fig. 1. Fig. 
3 is a horizontal view taken approximately on. 
the line 33 of Fig. 2. 
Referring by numerals to the accompany 
ing drawings, 1 indicates the body of myim 
proved sifter, which is in the form of a rec 
tangular box, and to the top edge of the rear 
wall of this boxishinged the lid 2. The lower. 
edges of the side Walls and the front wall of 
the lid and the top edges of the side walls and 
front Wall of the box 1 are so formed as that 
when said lid is closed upon the box a lap 
joint is formed, thus making said box practi 
cally dust-proof. The lid 2 is held closed 
upon the box. 1 by a hook 3, which is secured 
to the front side of the front wall of the lid 
and engages an eye 4, Secured to the front 
face of the front Wall of the box 1. 
5 indicates an automatically-operated prop 
Or supporting-leg which is hinged to the rear 
face of the rear Wall of the lid 2 at a point 
near the top of said Wall, and a swinging bar. 
6 is pivoted to the ear 7, which is secured to 
the outside of the rear wall of the box, and 
said bar is pivoted at its opposite end to the 
prop or leg 5. 
The cylindrical sieve made use of in myim 
proved sifter comprises the shaft 8, extend 
ing longitudinally through the box and jour 
naled in the top edges of the side walls there 
m 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
of, and suitable circular disks 9 are fixed upon 5o 
said shaft at points just inside of the side 
walls of the box. Metallic wear-plates or 
Washers 10 are interposed between the disks 
9 and the end walls of the box 1 and lid 2. 
One end of the shaft projects a short distance 55 
beyond the box and is provided with a crank 
handle 11. Connecting the edges of the disks 
9 is a plurality of rectangular bars 12, and a 
section of suitable wire-netting 13 is stretched 
around these bars 12, the space between two 6o 
of Said bars being left open to allow the ashes 
to be placed in or removed from the rotary 
sifter. This opening is normally closed by a 
section of wire-netting 14, which is hinged to 
one of the bars 12 and normally fastened to 65 
the opposite bar by suitable hooks 15. The 
ends of the wire-netting 13 are rigidly fixed 
to the periphery of the disks 9. A swinging 
door 16 is located in the lower portion of the 
front Wall of the box, a lap-joint being formed 7o 
between the edges of said door and said front 
Wall. In the operation of my improved sifter the 
lid 2 of said sifter is raised, and by so doing 
the prop or leg 5, which has been normally 75 
lying against the rear walls of the lid and the 
box, will be moved downwardly into the po 
sition shown in Fig. 2, in which position it 
very firmly supports the lid. The door 14 of 
the rotary sifter is now opened and the ashes 8o 
are placed in said rotary sifter. After the 
door 14 has been closed and fastened the lid 
2 is closed and the rotary sifter is now ro 
tated by manually engaging the crank-handle 
10. This rotary movement of the sifter causes 85 
all of the dust and finer ashes to pass out 
wardly between the meshes of the wire-net 
ting and downwardly onto the floor on which 
the sifter rests, while all of the larger ashes 
are retained within the sifter. During this go 
sifting process no dust will escape from the 
sifter, owing to the lap-joints between the lid 
and the box and between the door 16 and the 
front wall of the box. The dust and finer 
ashes may be removed, When desired, by 95 
merely opening the door 16. 
An ash-sifter of my improved construction 
is simple, easily operated, and dustless while 
2 
611,150 
the box, which prop automatically drops into Io 
position when the lid is opened, substantially 
as specified. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN M. RYAN. 
Witnesses: 
ALBERT J. McCAULEY, 
JOHN C. HIGDON. 
in use, and therefore can be located conven 
iently to the stove in the kitchen or to a fur 
nace or like heating apparatus in the cellar. 
I claim 
In an ash-sifter, the combination with a 
box and the lid therefor, of the prop 5 pivot 
ally connected to the top of the rear side of 
the lid, and the swinging bar 6 pivotally con 
nected to said prop and to the rear side of 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611251.txt	No. 6,25. 
W. H. HERHOLD. 
Patented Sept. 27, 1898. 
?? 
- 
F 
97 . 
? 
- 
/ e55 e5' 
?/ ?. ( . 
-Z???e?? ??? 
???? 
?? 
??? 
?? 
????? 
???? 
????? 
???? 
???????? 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM EI. HEREIOLD, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO F. HERHOLD & 
SONS, OF SAME PLACE. 
CHAIR . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611,251, dated September 27, 1898. 
Application filed January 31, 1898, Serial No. 668,621 (No model.) 
To a 27, whon, it invay concern: 
Be it known that II, WILLIAM H. HIERHOLD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
5 nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Chairs; and I do declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains 
Io to make and use the same, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, and to 
the letters of reference marked thereon, which 
form a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to solid bottoms for 
5 chairs as distinguished from bottoms com 
prising a frame into which is fitted a seatpor 
tion. Its object is to secure durability by 
preventing the opening of the joints between 
the several pieces of which the bottom is com 
2O posed, and this object is attained by making 
the chair-bottom of a plurality of layers, pref 
erably two, glued together, the several lay 
ers being composed of a plurality of pieces 
glued together, the pieces being so assorted 
25 and arranged that the joints between the 
pieces of one layer are intermediate of the 
joints between the pieces of the adjacent 
layer. 
It has been customary in chair construc 
otion to make solid bottoms of a single thick 
ness; but usually it is impracticable to secure 
stock of sufficient width to avoid jointing. 
The grain runs from front to back, and there 
are usually one or more joints in the same di 
;5 rection. The tendency to shrinkage is in 
creased by the fact that such bottoms are 
usually quite thick, and as a result it is ex 
ceedingly difficult to prevent the opening of 
the joints, and it is common to find chairs of 
o this style which have been in use for a few 
months with the joint or joints entirely sepa 
rated, so that the several sections are rela 
tively movable. The only effort known to 
me to have been made to overcome this diffi 
5 culty is by the use of dowel-pins or transverse 
strips gained into the solid bottom, depend 
ence being placed upon the use of material 
so disposed that its grain is transverse to the 
grain of the pieces to be secured together. 
o Experience has shown that these methods are 
inadequate; but I have found that the con 
 
55 
struction forming the subject of this appli 
cation wholly overcomes the difficulty, and 
after a severe test the bottoms are found to be 
as solid as When first made. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan view of a chair, a portion of the bot 
tom being broken out. Fig. 2 is a sectional 
view of the bottom on the line 22 of Fig. 1, 
and Fig. 3 is a sectional view of the bottom 6o 
on the line 33 of Fig. 1. 
My improved chair-bottom is composed of 
a plurality of (preferably two) layers, desig 
mated by the characters A B, these layers 
having their contacting faces carefully 65 
dressed and secured together by cement, such 
as glue. Each of the layers AB is composed 
of a plurality of pieces, as shown, three in 
number, those of the upper layer being des 
ignated c de and those of the lower layerbe- 7o 
ing designated fgh. The several pieces or 
sections of each layer are glued together, and 
in making up the two layers the pieces of 
which they are composed are so selected that 
the joints by which the pieces or sections of 75 
one layer are united fail to coincide with the 
joints uniting the pieces or sections of which 
the adjacent layer is composed. The several 
sections of each layer are so placed that the 
grain is longitudinal as to the chair-bottom- 8o 
that is to say, running from front to rear-so 
that the grain is parallel throughout the en 
tire chair-bottom. 
The opening of the joints between the sec 
tions of which a chair-bottom is composed is 85 
due to the shrinkage of the material, assum 
ing that a good cement or glue is used, the 
contacting faces of adjacent pieces being 
drawn apart by the contraction of such pieces. 
This difficulty is avoided by the construction go 
described by utilizing the contracting tend 
ency of one piece to counteract that of an 
other. For example, the opening of the joint 
at the juncture of the pieces cd would be due 
to the shrinkage of these two pieces. The 95 
tendency of the piece f to shrink is quite as 
pronounced as that of the piece d' but inas 
much as these two pieces overlap and are se 
curely cemented together it is obvious that 
the tendency of the piece di to contract is 
counteracted by the similar tendency of the 
part f. If the joint uniting the pieces C d 
? ? ? 
2 
611,251 
was not reinforced, the shrinkage would be 
resisted only by the glue used in making it. 
The construction shown, however, supple 
ments the joint by a much larger area of 
glued surface, due to the overlapping of the 
parts dif, and, furthermore, the joint uniting 
the two parts last named can be broken only 
by the creeping of the one piece upon the 
other, while the joint between the parts c d 
must resist only a direct pull. By arranging 
the grain parallel a much stronger joint is 
made between the layers than if they were 
crossed, for the reason that in the latter case 
the contraction would be in transverse direc 
tions and would tend to rupture the joint 
I. ? 
more readily than when in exactly opposite 
directions. 
I claim as my invention 
As an article of manufacture, a Wood chair 
bottom built up of a plurality of layers ce 
mented together, each layer being composed 
of a plurality of sections cemented together, 
the joints in adjacent layers being out of reg 
ister and the grain of all contacting sections 
being parallel. 
WIILIAMI H. HEREIOLD. 
Witnesses: 
HESTER. B. BAIRD, 
LOUIS K. GILLSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611351.txt	No. 635. 
(O Model.) 
 
J. A. BROGAN. 
CUFF. 
{Application filed June 7, 1898. 
Patented Sept. 27 
pt. 27, 1898. 
 
soaris perers co, ProTouTHO. Washinto, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES A BROGAN, OF LAWRENCE, MASSACHUSETTS, 
CUFF. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611,351, dated September 27, 1898. 
Application filed June 7, 1898, Serial No. 682,799, (No model.) 
Io 
To all, whon, it malf concern: 
Be it known that I, JAMES A. BROGAN, of 
Lawrence, county of Essex, State of Massa 
chusetts, have invented an Improvement in 
Cuffs and the Like, of which the following 
description, in connection with the accom 
panying drawings, is a specification, like let 
ters on the drawings representing like parts. 
My invention is an improved cuff, and has 
for its object the provision of a cuff or the 
like not liable to crack at its edges and pre 
senting a novel and ornamental appearance. 
The details of my invention will appear 
more fully in the course of the following de 
scription, reference being had to the accom 
panying drawings, illustrative thereof. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
view of a cuff constructed according to my 
invention. Fig. 2 is a central horizontal sec 
tion thereof. Fig. 3 is a vertical section there 
of, showing the edge folds. 
The inner surface a of the cuff A is smooth, 
and the outer surface a' is corrugated by 
means of a plurality of plaits. 
Referring to Fig. 2, it will be seen that the 
cuff is made up of a plurality of plies, there 
being herein shown for convenience of illus 
tration two intermediate or stiffening plies a 
a', an inner ply a being laid thereon and in 
turned at its edges, as indicated at aa. The 
outer ply a' is inserted at a between the in 
ner ply C, and the stiffening a, and is thence 
formed in a series of plaits at a, as clearly 
shown in Fig. 2, stitched by vertical lines of 
stitches a', thereby providing a series of flut 
ings or plaits extending transversely of the 
cuff throughout its length. 
The several plies mentioned are laid to 
gether face to face and stitched along their 
longitudinal edges by rows of stitches a, be 
ing then turned so as to bring the parts into 
the position indicated in Fig. 3, where it will 
be observed that the outer ply a' and the 
stiffening-plies are folded over at their longi 
45 tudinal edges, as indicated ata, thereby pre 
25 
35 
- 
senting a rounded ornamental edge of some 
thickness, as is clearly evident, viewing Figs. 
1 and 3. The parts folded as thus described 
are then stitched around by a line of stitches 
a', which passes through and through the 
several thicknesses and follows around all the 
edges of the cuff. 
In use my improved cuff does not and can 
not crack at the edges, as is common in the 
ordinary cuff, for the reason that my cuff pre 
sents a flexible or joint-like edge, and also 
the major part of the cuff is prevented from 
readily soiling, because when the cuff is bent 
only the extreme edges of the successive 
plaits project from the cuff and serve there 
by to shield the remaining material from con 
tact with adjacent objects tending to soil it. 
On account of the number of layers of cloth 
due to the plaiting the cuff is given consid 
erable transverse stiffness, while being per 
fectly free to bend longitudinally. 
I have herein shown the cuff as having a 
tab at at one corner, although it will be un 
derstood that it may be of any style desired. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
S 
A cuff comprising an inner smooth ply, an 
outer plaited ply, and one or more interme 
diate stiffening-plies, the plaits of said outer 
ply extending transversely to the length of 
the cuff, and the severalplies being infolded at 
their edges, the outer ply and stiffening-plies 
being infolded together and stitched at the 
longitudinal edges of the cuff, and the sev 
eralplies being stitched through and through 
at their infolded edges, substantially as de 
scribed. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JAMES A BROGAN. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN C. EDWARDs, 
EMMA. J. BENNETT, 
55 
75 
85 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611451.txt	No. 611,451. 
(No Model.) 
S. HOD GSON. 
Patented Sept. 27, 1898. 
ATTACHMENT FOR TRAVELING WHEELS. 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
witN es. SES 
s/u/ 
% (67 
2, 
No. 61,451. 
S. HODGSON. 
ATTACHMENT FOR TRAVELING WHEELS. 
(Application filed Nov. 1, 1897.) 
Patented Sept. 27, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
  
  
is is is is 
lists SN 
| SS-HIRS 
. 
Sl 
i 
Se S s& sis 
WTNesses: 
9 
(2.1%. 
2%-42% a 21 
22%ry 24 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SAMUEL HODGSON, OF MED WAY, MASSA CHUSETTS, 
ATTACHMENT FOR TRAVELING WHEELs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611 451, dated September 27, 1898. 
Application filed November 1, 1897, Serial No. 656,995, (No model.) 
O 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that, I, SAMUEL HoDGSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Med 
way, in the county of Norfolk and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Attachment for Traveling. Wheels, of 
which the following is a specification. 
This invention is an attachment adapted to 
be applied to traveling wheels-that is to say, 
Wheels which roll or travel upon a surface, 
such as bicycle-wheels, in distinction from 
wheels which simply rotate. The invention 
has for its object to prevent such a wheel 
from falling and render it practically self 
balancing, or, in other Words, to balance the 
load upon the wheel, the exact effect of the 
attachment being to restore the wheel to an 
upright or vertical position as soon asittips to 
One side or the other beyond a certain angle. 
In carrying out my invention I employ an 
eccentric wheel or cam-wheel, which is sup 
ported by the same frame which is connected 
with the wheel which is to be rendered self 
balancing, said eccentric wheel or cam-wheel 
being located at one side of the traveling 
wheel and at such a distance from the ground 
as to come in contact there with when the 
traveling Wheel tips beyond a certain angle. 
Moreover, this eccentric or cam wheel is so 
hung that when it is brought in contact with 
the ground by the tipping of the main or trav 
eling wheel its protuberating or broadestpor 
tion--that is to say, the portion whose outer 
edge is farthest from the axis of the wheel 
is uppermost, but is immediately rolled down 
by the contact of: the attachment with the 
ground, so as to lift the traveling wheel and 
restore it to a vertical position, after which 
the eccentric or cam immediately and auto 
matically returns to its original position, 
wherein the attachment is out of contact with 
the ground. 
This invention is especially applicable to a 
bicycle-wheel, and is particularly useful to a 
learner, inasmuch as it absolutely prevents 
his falling, for the reason that the driving 
wheel is constantly returned to a vertical po 
sition as it inclines slightly toward one side 
or the other. It is useful, however, as ap 
lied to bicycles, not only when they are be 
ing used by learners, but also when they are 
ridden by ladies, elderly people, or any others 
who desire to avoid the possibility of a fall. 
In illustrating my invention, therefore, I 
have shown it as applied to a bicycle in the 55 
accompanying drawings, in which similarlet 
ters of reference indicate corresponding parts. 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a portion of 
a bicycle provided with my attachment. Fig. 
2 is a cross-section taken on line 2, Fig. 1, 
showing the parts at the rear thereof in ele 
vation. Fig. 3 is a cross-section taken cen 
trally through one of the eccentric wheels. 
Fig. 4 is a section taken on line 4, Fig. 2. 
Fig. 5 is a side elevation showing a modifica 
tion. 
a represents the rear or driving wheel, and 
C. the seat-supporting post, making a part of 
the frame of an ordinary bicycle. Adjust 
ably clamped at A' to this post is a frame or 
head A, which extends into the spreading 
legs B, extending downward on opposite sides 
of the driving-wheela at a sufficient angle to 
avoid the pedals and then bending outward 
into the substantially horizontal portions B'. 
These legs B are preferably connected and 
stiffened by the brace b. Rigidly secured to 
the outer end of each of the parts B' is a flange 
C, from which extends outwardly the hori 
Zontal axle or shaft C. On this axle or shaft 
is placed eccentrically the disk-wheel D, and 
around this disk-wheel is placed loosely a 
ring E, provided with a suitable tire e, pref 
erably of rubber. (See Fig. 3.) This ring 
is prevented from slipping off the eccentric 
wheel D by means of the annular shoulder. E", 
formed on the inner edge of the ring and ex 
tending into a corresponding recess D' on the 
inner edge of the periphery of the eccentric 
wheel, and by a ring-shaped plate E", which 
is secured to the ring E and extends down 
over the edge of the outer surface of the ec 
centric wheel. The flange C is provided on 
its outer edge with the shoulders F, about 
opposite each other, and constituting stops 
for the pin d, which extends inward horizon 
tally from that portion of the eccentric wheel 
in which the distance from the axle or shaft 
and the periphery is the greatest. (See Fig. 
4.) The eccentric wheel D is provided with 
a central recess H, and a central ring Kis 
secured to the outer face of the wheel, cover 
95 
75 
Ioo 
25 
30 
35 
45 
So ple 
 
611,451 
O 
25 
45 
55 
ing said recess and constituting that portion 
of the wheel which bears on the shaft or axle 
C'. A spring Lilies in said recess and has 
one end secured to the shaft C and the other 
to the wheel D. This spring Lholds the pro 
tuberating portion or broadest portion of the 
eccentric wheel D up, as shown in Figs. 3 and 
4, such portion being prevented from swing 
ing over beyond the highest point by the pin 
d, which bears against the upper shoulder F. 
The ring E and eccentric wheel D are pro 
vided, respectively, with the recesses f and g, 
within which is a ball h. The recessfin the 
ring E has a depth which is less than the di 
ameter of the ball h, while the recess ghasa. 
depth which is greater than the diameter of 
the ball. The length of the two recesses is 
sufficient only to receive the ball. It is evi 
dent that when the recessed portions of the 
ring and eccentric are down the ball h will 
lie partly in the recessf and partly in the re 
cess g and thus lock the ring and eccentric 
together; but if the portions of the ring and 
eccentric provided with the recesses are up 
the ball h will drop into the recess g, which 
is deep enough to receive it wholly, and the 
ring and eccentric become disengaged from 
each other, so that the former is free to move 
with relation to the latter. 
In practical operation when the wheel a 
tips while it is traveling it brings the tire e 
on one of the rings E into contact with the 
ground, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. As the 
normal relative position of the parts of my 
attachment is that indicated in Figs. 3 and 
4, when the tire e is brought into contact with 
the ground the ring E and eccentric wheel D 
are locked together by the ball h. The con 
tinued progress of the bicycle-wheel a causes 
the ring E to rotate, rotating with it the ec 
centric wheel D against the power of the 
spring Huntil the narrow portion of the ec 
centric wheel, which was at the moment of 
contact with the ground undermost, is rotated 
into an upper position, thus bringing the 
broad or protuberating portion of the eccen 
tric wheel beneath the axle C and lifting 
said axle and with it the leg BB" on that side, 
restoring the bicycle-wheel a to a vertical po 
sition. This one-half rotation of the ring E 
and eccentric D has brought the recesses gif 
directly over the axle, so that the ball h drops 
into the recesses g and frees the ring E from 
its engagement with the eccentric D. Thus 
the instant that the Wheel C is righted and 
the device on that side slightly lifted from 
the ground the Spring L is free to restore the 
eccentric to its original position by imparting 
a half-rotation thereto, the extent of the ro 
tation being determined by the shoulders F 
In practice the eccentric wheel 
and pin d. 
may not complete a half-rotation before it is 
freed by the righting of the bicycle-wheel, so 
that practically a quick touch on the ground 
is sufficient to Start the bicycle-wheel toward 
a vertical position. The devices on the op 
posite sides of the wheel are exactly similar, 
so that toward whichever side the bicycle may 
incline it is instantly restored to a vertical 
position by being lifted by the eccentric on 
that side. 
If desired, the eccentric or cam wheel need 
not be surrounded by a ring, but may itself 
make contact with the ground, and thus act 
on the bicycle-wheel. Such a modified con 
struction is shown in Eig. 5, in which the ec 
centric or cam wheel P is provided with its 
own tire and is further provided with the 
weights S, whereby its protuberating portion 
is kept in and restored to a higher position, 
such weights taking the place of the spring. 
As above indicated, this device or attach 
ment may be applied to any wheel which trav 
els along and over a surface, especially a wheel 
which is adapted to sustain a weight. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. A wheel adapted to travel over and along 
a surface; a frame connected therewith; and 
an eccentrically-hung wheel or cam supported 
by the frame at a short distance above said 
surface and on one side of the traveling 
wheel, said wheel being normally held with 
its short radius down, whereby the inclina 
tion of the traveling wheel causes the eccen 
tric wheel or cam to rotate and thereby re 
store the traveling wheel to an upright posi 
tion. 
2. A wheel adapted to travel over and along 
a surface; a frame connected there with; an 
eccentrically-hung wheel or cam supported 
by the frame at a short distance above said 
Surface on one side of the traveling wheel, 
whereby the inclination of the traveling 
wheel toward that side causes the eccentric 
Wheel or cam to rotate and thus restore the 
traveling wheel into an upright position; and 
a spring or its mechanical equivalent operat 
ing to normally hold the said protuberating 
peripheral edge in a position above the axle 
or shaft supporting the eccentric wheel or 
cam, substantially as described. 
3. A wheel adapted to travel over and along 
a surface; a frame connected there with; a 
disk supported eccentrically by the frame at 
a short distance above said surface and on 
One side of the traveling wheel; and a wheel 
supported on the periphery of said eccentric 
disk and operating when the traveling wheel 
inclines toward that side to rotate by its con 
tact with the ground and to impart rotation 
to said eccentric disk, substantially as set 
forth. 
4. A wheel adapted to travel over and along 
a surface; a frame connected there with; a 
disk supported eccentrically by the frame at 
a short distance above said surface and on 
One side of the traveling wheel; a wheel sup 
ported on the periphery of said eccentric disk, 
the inner surface of the wheel and the pe 
riphery of the eccentric disk being coinci 
dently recessed, but the recess in the eccen 
tric being deeper than that in the wheel and 
75 
95 
Od 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
611,451. 
- 
3. 
O 
being located in the short side of the eccen 
tric; a ball adapted to play in said recesses 
and lock the wheel and eccentric together 
when said recesses are below the axis of the 
latter but drop wholly into the recess in the 
eccentric when said recesses are above said 
axis; and a spring or its mechanical equiva 
lent operating to return the eccentric to its 
normal position in which its short radius is 
down, substantially as described. 
5. A wheel adapted to travel over and along 
a surface; the frame B, B' supported by said 
wheel and extending on opposite sides there 
of; horizontal shafts or axles supported by 
said frame on opposite sides of the wheel; 
the disk D supported eccentrically upon one 
of said axles or shafts and provided with the 
recess H; a spring within said recess secured 
at its opposite ends to the wheel and shaft 
and normally holding the protuberating or 
wider portion of the eccentric wheel above 
 
the shaft; the wheel Eloose on the periphery 
of the eccentric disk but prevented from side 
wise movement thereon; the periphery of the 
short side of said disk D being recessed as 
described and the inner surface of the wheel 
Ebeing coincidently recessed; a balladapted 
to play in said recesses and therebylock said 
wheel and disk together when the portions 
I containing the recesses are down; the flange 
C extending from the supporting frame or 
axle next the inner face of the eccentric 
wheel and provided with the shoulders F; 
and the pin dextending from the eccentric 
wheel next the recessed portion of the pe 
riphery of the flange between said shoulders, 
substantially as set forth. 
SAMUEL, HODGSON. 
Witnesses: 
HENRY W. WILLIAMS, 
A. N. BONNEY. 
25 - 
35 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611552.txt	No. 61,552. 
Patented Sept. 27, 1898. 
A. BALLANTYNE, Dec'd. 
M. A. BALLANTYNE, Administratrix. 
TENONING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Nov. 18, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
5. Sheets-Sheet . 
Wizzesses. 
a 4762 
(2/4%ae, 
o 
... if it fia. 
B, ...a...fifr 
 
the Norris perets (ss. Posforo, washings.g. s. c. 
No. 61,552. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
Patented Sept. 27, 1898. 
A. BALLANTYNE, Dec'd. 
M. A. BALLANTYNE, Administratrix. 
TENONING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Nov. 16, 1897.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
a. 
---- 
1 
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa22a2a2a2aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaar 
2. 
ors PerERS co. HoTo-LIrHo, wastero, 
 
No. 61,552. 
Patented Sept. 27, 1898. 
A. BALLANTYNE, Dec'd. 
M. A. BALLANTYNE, Administratrix. 
TENONING MACHINE. 
(Application fled Nov. 16, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3, 
Age. H. 
File:E 
H. 
 it 
t 
 
E. 
-an-2s 
2. Sa II - Elaze 
S3 remeE. g/ 
e 
% 
Ptil 
a/S HE 
Liz gy 
EE "A 
BE 
2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
Zzesses: 
4. 27 % 
 
 
 
V. 
Ale 
Asa 
 
a. 22 A. 2. 
E 
AEy, 7 
votia aeciesi?. 
Azorveggs. 
No. 61,552. 
(No Model.) 
Patented Sept. 27, 1898. 
A. BALLANTYNE, Dec'd. 
M. A. BALLANTYNE, Administratrix. 
TENONING MACHINE, 
(Application filed Nov. 16, 1897.) 
 
J-432 
 
22222 
a 74%ie W 
 
 
a.a441. Sea. 
Avriez' 
8. ; 8. 
 
The Norris PETERS co. Photo-thio., washington, D. c 
No. 6,552. 
(No Model.) 
 
Patented Sept. 27, 1898. 
A. BALLANTYNE, Dec'd. 
M. A. BALLANTYNE, Administratrix. 
TENONING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Nov. 16, 1897.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
Bal 
2 3 
 
 
A 1 
S2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Wiivaesses. 
(2. A. 762azad/ 
: 
- 
', 
the NORRIS PETERS co. Photo-uTHo. washington, c. 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
MARTHA. A. BALLANTYNE, OF LEAD, SOUTH DAKOTA, ADMINISTRATRIX 
OF ALEXANDER BALLANTYNE, DECEASED. 
TENONING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611,552, dated September 27, 1898. 
Application filed November 16, 1897, Serial No. 658,711. (No model.) 
55 
65 
7 O 
75 
- 
S0, 
To all whon, it may concer'72: 
Be it known that I, MARTHAALICE BAL 
LANTYNE, a citizen of the United States, re 
siding at Tead, county of Lawrence, South 
Dakota, as administratrix of the estate of 
ALEXANDERBALLANTYNE, deceased, dohere 
by declare that the said ALEXANDERBALLAN 
TYNE, deceased, Was the inventor of certain 
new and useful Improvements in Tenoning 
Machines, of which the following is a full, 
clear, and an exact specification. 
The objects of this invention are an im 
proved machine for tenoning logs and beams 
for mining-timbers, called square-sets, 
great compactness in order to occupy small 
floor-space, great strength, rigidity, and light 
ness, and improvements in various details that 
Secure ease of manipulation, thereby secur 
ing greater economy and more advantages in 
use than are had with the machines now in 
Said improvements consist in the several 
combinations defined in the claims, to which 
reference is here made for a detailed state 
ment of the invention. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
illustrates a side elevation of said improved 
tenoning-machine, and Fig.2 is afrontendele 
vation of the same. Fig. 3 is a sectional view 
of the Overhanging frame at acac in Fig. 2 and 
shows a top view of the log-carriage. Fig. 4 
is a top view of the front end head on the log 
carriage, showing its operation by means of a 
rack and pinion and the dogs and the trip 
ping-lever for releasing the dogs from the 
ratchets on each side of the rack. Fig. 5 is a 
side elevation of the parts illustrated in plan 
in Fig. 4. 
Fig. 6 is a back view of the rack 
and ratchet casting. Fig. 7 is a front eleva 
tion of the front head and its rack. Fig. 8 is 
a front view of the back end and the middle 
log-carriage heads, and Fig. 9 is a side eleva 
tion of the same and shows the relation of the 
ratchet and pawl that operates the pinion 
that engages the rack attached to the head. 
Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main 
frame and illustrates the log-rollers. 
Fig. 11 
shows the extensible trip-rod that operates 
the safety device for stopping the machine. 
Fig. 12 is an end view of the extensible trip 
rod. Fig. 13 is a horizontal cross-sectional 
view of the guides, showing the attached 
washers, eyebolts for the lifting-chains,guides 
for the Ts, and the safety device for stopping 
the machine by disengaging the friction 
clutches. Fig. 14 is a side elevation of the 
safety device. Fig. 15 is an elevation of the 
hand-levers, ratchets, and pawls that operate 
the pinions that raise and lower the back end 
and center heads on the carriage. Fig. 16 is 
a top view of the back end separator of the 
movable frame and shows the bearing that 
holds a swiveled yoke that serves as a turn 
Fig. 17 is an end view of the lifting 
table. 
frame and the swiveled yoke. Fig. 18 is a 
View, partly in section, illustrating the ad 
justment of the saws. 
Fig. 18 is a side ele 
Vation of the bearing that holds the arbor of 
the crosscut-saws. Fig. 19 is a front eleva 
tion of the adjustable brace for keeping the 
arbor of the crosscut-saws in proper position, 
and Fig. 19 is a side elevation of the adjust 
able brace. 
All of the figures from 4 to 19, inclusive, 
of the drawings are enlarged from Figs, 1 to 
3, inclusive. 
In all the figures of the drawings like ref 
erence characters refer to like parts. 
Said invention combines in its embodiment 
two general mechanisms that unitedly oper 
ate to produce a common result, and it fur 
ther relates to the details of these mechan 
is ims. The first of these mechanisms is the 
means employed for holding and manipulat 
ing a log or a timber to be operated upon, 
and the other consists of the saw-operating 
mechanism. These mechanisms will be de 
scribed in detail in the order stated. 
The mechanism that holds and manipulates 
the log or timber to be operated upon is seen 
in side elevation in Fig. 1, in front end ele 
Vation in Fig. 2, in top plan in Fig. 3, and 
enlarged details thereof are illustrated by 
Figs. 4 to 17, inclusive. 
1 is a general frame that incloses the main 
frame and that supports the overhanging 
frame of the saw-operating mechanism here 
in described. The main frame consists of 
two rectangular frames, one of them, 2, be 
ing at the bottom thereof and the other, 2, 
go 
95 
Oc 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
- 
611,552 
O 
3O 
35 
at the top thereof, the top of the frame be 
ing supported from the bottom by the four 
corner-posts 22 and two central posts 292. 
At the inside of the corner-posts are placed 
uprights 22, leaving a small space between 
the corner-posts and said uprights. Bolted 
upon the inner faces of the corner-posts and 
their adjacent uprights are slides 3 3, in 
which the guides of the vertically-movable 
carriage - frame move. The movable car 
riage-frame consists of two side bars 44, Z 
shaped, connected by the separators 55 and 
5. The side bars of the movable frame are 
secured to the upper ends of four vertical T 
guides 66, which are connected crosswise at 
the bottom by two cross-plates 66, that are 
braced lengthwise of the carriage by the 
brace 69. The T-guides 6 6 slide in the ver 
tical ways 33. Upon the upper side of the 
carriage are four independent rollers 7 7, 
that turn in boxes 88, fixed upon the upper 
faces of the Z-bars 44. Four eyebolts 9 pass 
through the T-guides 6 and are secured by 
means of slotted washers 10, that straddle the 
T-guides, and nuts 11, that are screwed upon 
the inner ends of the eyebolts. Connected 
with the eyebolts are chains 12, that pass 
over sheaves 13, that are fixed to shafts 13, 
that turn in boxes 13, that are attached to 
the main frame near its top. The chains 
have counterWeights 14 attached to their 
outer ends to balance the movable frame. The 
combined weight of the counterweights is 
preferably such as to allow the movable 
frame, with its load, to descend by gravity. 
Fixed to the movable frame are three slid 
ing heads 15, 16, and 17. The front head 15 
is forked and stepped, as illustrated, to allow 
a log or timber to lie thereon, and consists 
of a casting, Figs. 4 and 5, the lower part of 
which is composed of two side ratchets 15 
and 15 and a central rack 15. The back of 
the extension 15 of the casting is dovetailed 
at 15 into Way's 18 on the iron separator 18, 
which is bolted upon the inside of the two 
Z-bars 44 by bolts passing through the holes 
18 and the Z-bars. A shaft 19, running in 
boxes 2020, bolted on the surrounding sta 
tionary main frame, has keyed upon it the 
inion 21, which engages the rack 15. The 
shaft 19 is turned by means of a hand-lever 
22, provided with a pawl 23, which when not 
in use is disengaged from the ratchet-wheel 
24, that is keyed upon the shaft 19. On the 
face of the separator 18 are bolted two brack 
ets 25 25, the extremities of which are pro 
vided with bearings for the shaft 26, upon 
which are keyed two dogs 27 27, that engage 
the two ratchets 15 and 15. Keyed upon 
the shaft 26 between the two dogs is a trip 
lever 28. The function of the trip-lever is to 
disengage the dogs 27 27 from the ratchets 
15, 15. 
The two heads 16 and 17 are alike and are 
similar to the head 15, except that the faces 
are provided with racks (16 and 17) only. 
The extensions 16 and 17 of the heads 16 
and 17 move in ways 29, formed in the brack 
ets 29. The brackets 29 are fixed to ties of 
the Z-bars 44 by bolts that pass through the 
holes 29. Shafts 3031 pass through the bear 
ings formed in the Z-bars 44 and have keyed 
therein pinions 3233, that mesh with the racks 
16 and 17. The pinion-shafts 3031 are re 
volved by means of hand-levers 3435, similar 
to the lever 22, that operates the front head. 
Ratchet-wheels 36 37 are keyed upon the 
shafts 3031 outside of the Z-bars on one side. 
They are held in position by pawls 38 39. 
Dogs 4041, pivoted on the levers 3435, engage 
the ratchet-wheels 36 37 to turn the rack 
pinions 3233. 
At the back end of the movable frame is a 
separator 5, that has a bearing 5', in which 
is vertically swiveled the shank of the yoke 
42, that serves as a turn-table. 
The functions of the heads 15, 16, and 17, 
with their several racks, pinions, ratchets, 
pawls, and levers, are to set and line up logs 
and timbers upon the movable frame. After 
a tenon shall have been cut upon one end of 
a log the log may be tipped on a yoke 42 to 
clear the heads of the movable frame and 
then turned to cut the tenon upon the oppo 
site end of the log. 
After a log shall have been adjusted in po 
sition on the heads of the movable frame it 
is elevated against the saws, hereinafter de- . 
scribed, by lifting the movable frame. This 
is accomplished by power transmitted from 
any source to the shaft 43. A shaft jour 
naled in boxes 45 45 on the stationary main 
frame has keyed thereon a gear 46, that is 
driven by a worm-wheel 47, that is keyed 
upon the shaft 43. Upon the shaft 44 are 
keyed two sprocket-wheels 4848, over each 
of which passes a chain 49 49, one end of 
which carries weights 50 50', the other ends 
being attached to the cross-piece 6 of the 
movable frame. As the shaft 44 is turned 
in one direction or the other from the shaft 
43 through the Worm 47 and gear 46 the mov 
able frame, with its load, is lifted by the chains 
49 49 or allowed to lower by gravity. 
Power is transmitted to the shaft 43 through 
the pulleys 51 51 from the belts indicated 
by the dotted lines 52 52. The pulley's 51 
51* are fixed upon the shaft 43. A friction 
clutch 53 has movement longitudinally on 
the shaft, so that it may be thrown into con 
tact with the pulleys 51 and 51, located at 
each side of the clutch. One of said belts 
is crossed to turn the shaft in one direction, 
and the other is straight to turn the shaft in 
the opposite direction. The details of the 
clutch mechanism are not illustrated or de 
Scribed, for the reason that any suitable 
known form of clutch may be employed. 
The clutch mechanism is operated by hand 
by means of the hand-lever 53, pivoted at 
53, the pivoted clutch-lever 53, pivoted at 
53, and the intermediate connecting -link 
75 
95 
IOO 
EO 
II5 
I 25 
65 
 
611,552 
3. 
TO 
3O 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
is fixed upon the shaft 85. 
A fall 86 has one 
53. Any convenient lever and its place 
ment and arrangement may be used to oper 
end attached to the shaft 85 and its other end 
attached to the overhead beam 1. The fall 
ate the clutch. 
will wind on the shaft 85, as at S6, or a drum 
To the main stationary frame a safety de 
may be placed upon the shaft, upon which 
Vice is attached that limits the vertical move 
drum the fall may wind. The fall carries a 
ment of the movable frame. A lever 54, bent 
block 87, that hangs above the movable car 
at both ends, as shown in Fig. 14, is pivoted 
riage-frame, hereinbefore described. Logs 
at its center to a bracket 55, that is attached 
are lifted onto and from the carriage by means 
to the main frame. The upper end of the 
of the fall 86 and its block 87. 
lever 54 rests between the two collars 56 56, 
The operation of the said machine is mani 
that are fastened upon the intermediate con 
fest from the foregoing description. The car 
necting-link 53 by set-screws 5757. One of 
riage is lowered by throwing the friction 
the washers 10 that straddles one of the T 
clutch 53 into contact with the pulley 51. 
guides to hold one of the eyebolts 9 is pro 
When the roller 58 comes into contact with 
vided with an extension 10, Fig. 13, the ex 
the lower incline 54 of the lever 54, the shaft 
tremity of which is turned to receive a roller 
43 is thrown to the left and the clutch disen 
58. This roller is in contact with the lever 
gaged, thus stopping the movable carriage at 
54 during the ascent and descent of the mov 
the bottom of its travel. When the carriage 
able frame and its T-guides. The engage 
is at its lowest position, the heads on the car 
ment of one of the inclines 54 of the lever 
riage are lowered and the log is placed there 
54 with the roller swings the lever over to 
on. The heads are then raised by means of 
move the intermediate connecting-link 53 
their levers, ratchets, and pawls and the log 
and throws the clutch 53 out of engagement 
adjusted with its axis horizontal. The mov 
With the pulley 51, and the engagement of 
able frame is then raised by throwing the 
the opposite incline 54 with the roller 58 
clutch 53 into contact with the pulley 51. 
swings the lever to the opposite direction and 
This raises the log against the overhanging 
moves the intermediate connecting-link 53 
crosscut and rip saws to make the first series 
oppositely to disengage the clutch from the 
of cuts by the four saws. The frame is then 
pulley 51. Figs. 11, 12, 13, and 14 illustrate 
lowered, the log turned over a quarter-turn, 
the details of the safety device. When the 
and the frame is again raised to make the 
movement of the movable frame either up 
second cut to complete the tenon on one end 
ward or downward shall have been stopped 
of the log. When the roller 58 reaches the 
by disengaging the clutch 53 from one or the 
incline 54, the shaft 43 is moved to the right 
other of the driving-pnlleys 51 or 51, the con 
to clear the clutch of the pulley 51. Thisau 
necting-link 53 is moved by hand through 
tomatically stops the carriage at its upper 
the lever 53, suitably disposed to throw the 
limit of travel. To tenon the opposite end of 
clutch into engagement with the opposite 
the log, the movable frame is lowered, the log. 
drive-pulley. As any known means may be 
is tipped on the yoke or turn-table 42 to clear 
used for shifting, the clutch 53 in either di 
the heads, and the log is then turned by 
Jrection, the means illustrated is not further 
swinging it around. The lining up of the 
described. 
log and the tenoning of that end is a repeti 
Fig. 15 is an enlarged detail of the lever 22, 
tion of the work of tenoning the opposite end. 
in which 22 is a pivoted hand-lever that is 
Any length of timber can be tenoned. 
connected by the rod 22 with the pivoted 
The construction of the spindle that carries 
dog 23. Pressure on the lever 22 throws the 
the rip-saws and the means provided for ad 
dog into engagement with the ratchet 24, and 
justing the crosscut-saws are illustrated by 
upon release of the lever 22 the spring 22d 
Fig. 18. The spindle 79 is reduced in size 
disengages the dog from the ratchet. 
from a central part, as at 7979, upon which . 
1 1' constitute an overhanging framework 
reduced parts are fitted the rip-saws 80 and 
that carries the combination of saws and the 
81, held in place by the washers 79 799 and 
pulleys and shafting through which the saws 
79 790, that are secured by the nuts 79d 79td. 
are Operated. 61 and 62 are intermediate 
The turned ends 79 799 receive the pulleys 
pulleys, and 63 is an idler. Upon the same 
77 and 78. The means provided for the ad 
shaft 64 with the pulley 61 is a pulley 65, 
justment of the rip-saws 80 81 on the spindle to 
which drives the pulley 66 upon the spindle 
cut the tenons of different sizes is secured by 
67, upon which is fastened one of the cross 
providing different sizes of washers. To pro 
cut-saws 68. 69 is a belt from pulley 65 to 
vide for the adjustment of the crosscut-saws 
pulley 66. 
In the same manner a pulley 70 
68 and 73, the spindles 67 and 72 of said saws 
drives the pulley 71 upon the spindle 72, at 
turn in bearings 67 and 72, that are pro 
tached to which is a crosscut-saw 73. 74 is a 
vided with arms 67 and 72, that are at right 
belt from the pulley 70 to the pulley 71. The 
angles to the bearings. The arms are clamped 
pulleys 75 and 76 through the belts 75 and 
in boxes 67 and 729. The bearings 67* and 
76 drive the pulleys 77 and 78, mounted 
72% are supported by their arms 67 and 72. 
upon the spindle 79, on which are adjusted 
Lateral adjustment of the crosscut-saws is 
the rip-saws 80 and 81. Afriction-gear 82 on 
had by moving said arms 67 and 72 in their 
the shaft 83, upon which are fixed the pulleys 
62 and 70, engages the friction-gear 84, that boxes, and the adjustment is secured by 
75 
95 
IOO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
IOO 
 
4. 
611,552 
55 
 
O 
scribed. 
- 
clamping the arms tightly in the boxes by carriage up and down; movable heads on the 
means of the bolts 67 and 72. 
carriage for lining up timbers thereon, and a 
It is important to keep the crosscut-saws 
vertically-swiveled yoke for reversing tim 
68 and 73 in a perpendicular plane. 
bers on the carriage, substantially as de 
To ac 
complish this, the device illustrated by Figs. 
19 and 19 is employed. Its position in the 
4. In a tenoning-machine, a main frame pro 
overhanging framework is shown in Fig. 1. 
vided with guideways; a carriage-frame hav 
88 is an eyebolt that passes through one of 
ing vertical movement in said guideways; 
the timbers of the overhanging frame and is 
counterweights for the carriage-frame; mov 
secured in place by the nut 88. The screw 
able heads carried by the carriage-frame for 
threaded bar 89 passes loosely through the 
lining up logs thereon, and reversible driving 
eye of the eyebolt 88 and is fixed in position 
mechanism for moving said carriage, substan 
by the two nuts 90.90. The lower end of the 
tially as described. 
bar 89 has a curved shoulder 89, which rests 
5. In a tenoning-machine, a main frame; a 
against the bearing 67 of the spindle 72. 
carriage-frame having movement vertically 
This forms a vertically-adjustable brace for 
of the main frame; vertically - adjustable 
the spindles of the crosscut-saws and provides 
heads carried by the carriage-frame, and re 
for alining said saws vertically. 
The arbor 
versible driving mechanism for moving the 
boxes of these saws are pivoted to allow aline 
carriage-frame up and down, substantially as 
ment of the saws. A like device is provided 
described. 
for each of the crosscut-saws; but only one 
6. In a tenoning-machine, a vertically-mov 
of them shows in the drawings. 
able carriage-frame; guides for the carriage 
What is claimed, and desired to be secured 
frame; vertically-adjustable heads upon the 
by Letters Patent, is 
carriage-frame, and reversible driving mech 
1. The combination, in a tenoning-machine, 
anism for operating the carriage-frame, sub 
of vertical rip-saws; means for lateral adjust 
stantially as described. 
ment of the rip-saws; vertical crosscut-saws; 
7. In a tenoning-machine, a main frame 
means for Vertical alinement and lateral ad 
provided with guideways; a carriage-frame 
justment of the crosscut-saws; driving mech 
adapted to move vertically in said guide 
anism for said saws; a vertically-movable 
ways; movable heads carried by the carriage 
carriage-frame carrying adjustable heads for 
frame for lining up logs thereon; a driving 
leveling and supporting a stick of timber 
shaft provided with reverse driving-pulleys 
thereon; a vertically-swiveled yoke carried 
and clutch mechanism; a lever pivoted cen 
by the movable frame to reverse the timbers 
trally thereof to the main frame and having 
thereon; and a throw-off that limits the up. 
bends at its ends, said lever being in oper 
Ward and downward movement of the car 
ative engagement through an intermediate 
riage-frame, substantially as described. 
connecting-link and friction-clutches with the 
2. The combination, in a tenoning-machine, 
driving-shaft, and an arm carried by the car 
of a carriage - frame having vertical move 
riage-frame to give the said pivoted lever a 
ment; movable heads carried by the carriage 
rocking movement to reverse the driving 
frame; a vertically-swiveled yoke carried by 
mechanism, substantially as described. 
the carriage for reversing a timber thereon; 
8. In a tenoning-machine, a vertically-mov 
a throw-off to limit the upward and down 
able carriage-frame; guides for the carriage 
Ward movement of the carriage; and a fixed 
frame; vertically-adjustable heads upon the 
overhanging frame that carries the saw mech 
carriage-frame; reversible driving mechan 
anism, said saw mechanism embodying ver 
ism for operating the carriage-frame, and a 
tical rip-Saws; means to give the rip-saws lat 
safety device to limit the upward and down 
eral adjustment; crosscut - saws, means for 
ward movement of the carriage-frame, sub 
alining the crosscut-saws to a vertical plane, 
stantially as described. 
and means for adjusting the crosscut-saws 
laterally to the rip-saws, substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. In a tenoning-machine, a main frame; a 
carriage-frame inclosed within the mainframe 
and having vertical movement therein; re 
versible driving mechanism for moving the 
Administratriac of the estate of Alexander Bal 
MARTHA. A. BALLANTYNE, 
lantyne, deceased. 
Witnesses: 
R. H. DRISCOLL, 
MASON TYLER. 
25 
35 
45 
75 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611652.txt	No. 61 1,652. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
C. J. SPURCK. 
CORN PLANTER. 
(Application filed Apr. 12, 1898.) 
Patented Oct. 4, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet . 
25 
Ss2 
S2 
2. SS in 
No. 61,652. 
Patented Oct. 4, 1898. 
C. J. SPURCK. 
CORN PANTER. 
(Application filed Apr. 12, 1898, 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
No. 6,652. 
(NO iode.) 
 
C. J. SPURCK. 
CORN PLANTER. 
(Application filed Apr. 12, 1898.) 
Patented Oct. 4, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
2 
3 2 2 
3 1222 22 
2. 2 
e F 
zz2 
J%zz/ez/2/7 
22.3 
& 64% (2. 
 
No. 61,652. 
(No Mode.) 
C. J. SPURCK. 
CORN PLANTER. 
(Application filed Apr. 12, 1898.) 
Patented Oct. 4, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4. 
SNS NS 
  
 
  
  
2 
777, 
2 
22 7 2 
== 1' 27 
2 
17N 
A1 
 
 
C KX 
e 
 
the arris prers co, PHOTO-LiTHo, WASHINGTON, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES J. SPURCK, OF PEORIA, ILLINOIS. 
CORN - PLAN TER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611,652, dated October 4, 1898, 
Application filed April 12, 1898, Serial No. 677,281 (No model.) 
d 
25 
To ?till tufton, it 77 att? conce77. 
Be it known that I, CHARLES J. SPURCK, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Peoria, 
in the county of Peoria and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Corn-Planters; and Idohereby 
declare that the following is a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, which will 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
pertains to make and use the same. 
Myinvention relates to certain new and use 
ful improvements in corn-planters by means 
of which a planter is constructed that has cer 
tain novel features that are well adapted for 
the purpose designed. 
More particularly my invention relates to 
that class of corn-planters by which an ordi 
nary check-row planter may be converted into 
a drill-planter or to a hill-drop or to a hand 
and foot drop, the object being to facilitate 
an easy and quick adjustment of those parts, 
the same being accomplished either by the 
check-rower, the operating and rock shaft 
combined, or by the drive-wheels and the 
check-rower, as desired. 
Myinvention consists,essentially,in the pro 
vision of a main frame, a runner-frame, of the 
Corn-receiving boxes, and dropping mechan 
ism, whereby the same may be opened with 
out removing the grain, therein to examine, 
adjust, or change the dropping-plates or other 
mechanism, of the planter-shanks, the means 
for adjusting the same upon the frame for 
planting rows of different widths, as desired, 
and of certain other details adapted to sim 
plify the constructions heretofore employed 
in corn-planters. 
In order that my invention may be more 
clearly understood, I have illustrated the same 
in the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a top plan view of a seed-planting 
machinehaving myinvention applied thereto. 
Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the front portion 
Fig. 3 is a sectional elevation, 
of the planter. 
the section being taken transversely through 
the hopper and dropping mechanism. Figs. 
4 and 5 are respectively detail views, one an 
elevation and the other a section, of portions 
of the planter. Fig. 6 is a vertical section of a 
portion of the shank and a stand for the seed 
box, showing the relation of the one to the 
other and the manner of adjusting the shank 
- 
on the frame. Fig. 7 is a plan of the bottom 
for the seedbox and the manner of carrying 
the adjustable dropping-plates. Fig. 8 is a 
section on the line acac of Fig. 7. 
Fig. 9 is a 
cross-section through the perforations in the 
dropping-plates. Fig. 10 is a plan of the ring. 
Figs. 11 and 12 are plan views of the dropping 
plates. Fig. 13 is a vertical section of my im 
proved lxnocker and the manner of carrying 
the same. Fig. 14 is a top plan of the bottom 
to the said box, showing the cut-off and its cov 
ering. Fig. 15 is a sectional detail view. 
Like letters of reference indicate the Sev 
eral corresponding parts throughout the fig 
UeS. 
The framework upon which those portions 
of the machine which embody my invention 
are mounted may be of any usualor approved 
construction. 
In the said drawings, A represents the 
wheel-frame, and B the runner-frame, of an 
ordinary corn-planter, the parts being suit 
ably connected by means of the extension C. C. 
of the frame A, adjustably coupled at C in 
the couplings A' A', which are bolted to the 
beam C, the runner-frame being suitably se 
cured to the couplings by means of the straps 
on the bars C'C', which are bolted to the 
beam C and to the couplings at a' a'. 
b b are the carrying-wheels, which are ar 
ranged in the usual way on the shaft b', which 
carries a sprocket-wheelb, over which passes 
a driving-chain b, which delivers power to 
the operating - shaft L through a suitable 
sprocket-wheelb" on said shaft, the shaft be 
ing suitably journaled in the stands D, which 
carry the seedboxes, and held in position by 
means hereinafter described. 
E is a rock-shaft journaled in the bearings 
e e, suitably supported on the opposite ends 
of the beam C and also in the journal-box F, 
which is also provided for a purpose to be 
hereinafter more fully described. 
G. G. are cylindrical-shaped seedboxes ar 
ranged at opposite sides of the planter and 
are constructed in the manner shown in Figs. 
2 and 3, provided with the bottom or base E, 
adapted to be hinged to the extension D' of 
the stands D and at Ethereon, the same be 
ing locked and held in position by means of 
the thumb-and-screw connection at E, the 
stand D having the upward extension. E", 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
go 
95 
OO 
2 
611,652 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
the same being slotted at e' therein to adapt 
the screw to be slipped into or out of the slot 
ted opening provided in the bottom E' for 
holding the same in position. The construc 
tion of the seedbox, its bottom, and the man 
ner of carrying the seed-plates is very simple, 
the bottom of the box, which is detachable, 
serving the purpose of a bottom, forming the 
cut-off, and is adapted to carry therein a 
knocker, to be described. 
The bottom or base E of the seedbox is 
provided with the flange H, around which is 
adapted to be carried the driving-ring k, the 
said ring being provided with the base or 
flange extension h", in which are adapted to 
be carried the dropping-plates, the same be 
ing held in position by means of the depres 
sions i 
, which are adapted to engage the 
lugs h on the ring h, the said ring being also 
provided with the gear-teeth h, adapted to 
mesh in a pinion J on the operating-shaft L. 
The shaft L, which is journaled in the stand 
ard D and which is easily removable there 
from by simply raising the seedbox, is adapt 
ed to be firmly held in its journal by means 
of the engagement from the teeth of the ring 
h with the pinion J on the said shaft. 
The dropping-plates, which will be referred 
to as KK", are adjustable the one upon the 
other and are so adjustable by means of the 
bolts k, movable in suitable depressions in 
the plate K'. 
K is a bottom plate or covering serving as 
a Support for the dropping-plates and the 
toothed ring, which plate is held in place by 
means of the bolt le", carried through the base 
of the seedbox, and a nut screwed on the 
other end thereof and upon the outside of the 
plate K, as shown in Fig. 3, the bolt serving 
as a journal-support for the dropping-plates 
and ring, the plate being also provided with 
the opening k, adapted to match with the 
opening D in the seedbox-stand D. The 
base E of the box, as referred to above, is 
adapted to be used as a cut-off, the cut-off be 
ing shown best in Fig. 14 of the drawings and 
designated as m, its covering being referred to 
as M, having the extension m' and bolted to 
the base at n, the extension m'adapted to be 
carried in a plane directly above the bolt lic' 
and is adapted to hold the same in place. 
M" is a knocker of an improved form which 
has certain novel features which adapts it for 
use in connection with the dropping-plates 
and causes the sure delivery of each grain of 
corn to its proper place in the shanks. The 
base E is provided with a suitable slot eand 
also the luge'. The knocker is provided with 
the curved arm extension M, adapting the 
same to act as a hinge upon the lug e', the 
knocker being also provided with the exten 
sion mm and the lug n. I have shown in 
connection with said knocker a compression 
spring M, carried around the lug in on the 
knocker and around a lug projection m from 
the covering M, the projection in 
of the 
knocker in its adjustment being carried di 
rectly above the openings of the dropping 
plate and concentric to the holes in the stand 
D, adapted when the holes of the dropping 
plates are concentric to the lug in to hold the 
plate in a position normally stationary for the 
dropping of the seeds adapted to be planted, 
the action of the said knocker being such as to 
provide against any clogging of seeds that 
may not fall through the holes in the plates, 
adapted when the plates are revolved to bear 
against its upper face and to force any stray 
seeds through the perforations that may not 
have dropped in the course of the operation. 
In the adjustment of the planter I have pro 
vided means whereby the planter may be 
caused to drop in widths either a three-feet 
six-inch or a three-feet-eight-inch width. The 
seedboxes, being stationary on the frame, are 
placed at a distance from center to center a 
width of three feet seven inches. 
N N are shanks provided with the runner 
or furrow-opener N'N', as shown, and having 
suitable valves S for controlling the outlet of 
the seeds as they are dropped into the shanks, 
the same being timed in their operation and 
controlled by the arm n, movable with the 
rock-shaft E, to the outer end of which said 
arm is attached a rod in', controlling the op 
eration of the valve S in the heel of the shank. 
The shanks N N are suitably bolted to the 
beam and adjustable thereon in the following 
manner: The upper portion of the shanks N 
are funnel-shaped and have the flange exten 
sions N*N*. These flange extensions are pro 
vided with bolt-holes matching suitable holes 
n in the frame C, the bolt-holes in the frame 
being arranged a distance of one inch apart, 
adapting the shank, when it is desired to be 
adjusted for planting rows three feet six 
inches or three feet eight inches apart, to be 
moved and the bolts adjusted as desired, the 
funnel shape of the upper portion of the 
shank being provided to take up this manner 
of adjustment, adapting the orifice in the 
stand and the shank to always be coincident, 
the runner-frame B in like manner being pro 
vided with the series of bolt-holes b, adapting 
the runner to be simultaneously adjusted 
upon said frame as the shank is adjusted on 
the beam C. 
On the opposite or outer ends of the rock 
shaft E, I have shown a means adapted to be 
operated from the forked levers through the 
check-wire for actuating the rock-shaft and 
operating-shaft, which means is of a novel 
construction and is well adapted for the pur 
pose designed. 
Pare heads carried in a suitable manner on 
the beam C, and p' are forked levers suitably 
pivoted on the heads p. 
P are check-arms loosely carried on the 
rock-shaft E, and P are check-arm stops 
which are provided with half-boxings p for 
holding arms P' firmly upon the shaft E. 
The check-arm stops P are constructed in 
the manner shown in Fig. 15 and are shown 
having a bearing relation with the check 
75 
95 
IOO 
IIO 
II5 
I 25 
 
611,652 
3. 
arms P', the arm P' being always held in its 
normal position (shown in Figs. 2 and 15) by 
the loop from the rod p, which is adjustable 
on the forked lever p'. 
Referring to the half-boxings p, P is a 
curved arm extension from the boxing p, 
which is adapted for use as a spring-holder, 
the spring p being hooked on the hook p of 
the arm p', the opposite end of which is held 
by the head P. This manner of securing the 
spring holds the check-arm stop P under a 
continuous pressure. 
Mounted on the operating-shaft Lisa drum 
ratchet wheel O, provided with the trundles 
o, and O' are steady-brackets for the operat 
ing-shaft and are carried on either side of the 
drum-ratchet on the operating-shaft and are 
bolted at O' to the center journal-box F, which 
box F is bolted to the beam Cat F", as shown 
in Figs. 4 and 5. The rock-shaft E is pro 
vided with the upwardly-projecting curved 
arm-support O', to which is pivoted at o' the 
dog O, which is provided with the hook o', 
adapted to engage the trundles O of the 
drum-ratchet as the arm O is actuated by the 
movement of the rock-shaft E. The journal 
box F is of a novel construction, being pro 
vided with the centrally-disposed opening Q 
and the enlarged opening or cavity Q', as 
is best shown in Fig. 5. The opening Q is 
much smaller at its base and is provided with 
the in Wardly-bearing flangeq. Through the 
opening Q is purposed to be carried the 
plunger R, which is provided with the pecul 
iarly-curved plunger-head R', having the pro 
jections ' ', which are adapted to engage the 
trundles O of the drum-ratchet and stop a for 
Ward or backward movement of the shaft L. 
other than is necessary in the provision made 
for the movement of the seed-dropping plate. 
R is a coiled spring carried around the 
plunger R and has a bearing relation with 
the flange q and the head R' of the plunger, 
holding the head under a continuous pres 
Sure against the trundles of the drum-ratchet 
in the manner described. The plunger is also 
provided with the perforation q' in the lower 
end thereof, adapted when the plunger is not 
in use to be forced back into the opening Q, 
the head forced into the cavity Q', a cotter 
pin carried in the perforation q', the manner 
f adjusting the same being best shown in 
ig. 4. 
The Operation of the planter in its different 
forms from a study of the drawings will be 
readily understood; but for conveniences and 
to show the many advantages derived from 
the combination herein described I will de 
Scribe the manner of operating the machine 
and the changes necessary to plant with the 
different forms such as described in the pro 
amble of my specification. 
In check-row planting it is unnecessary to 
change any of the elementary working parts, 
the operation being such that when the forked 
levers p' are operated by the check-wire in 
the usual manner the check-arms P will be 
caused to contact with the check-arm stops 
P", causing the rock-shaft to be actuated, 
which will operate the valves in the shanks, 
the seed having been dropped by them caused 
by the rotation of the seed-plates through the 
rotation of the operating-shaft.L, the pinion 
J, and the ring-gear N. In using the planter 
to drill it will be seen that by removing the 
pivots, upon which the valve S swings, and 
placing the same in the perforation s' at the 
rear of the heel the planter has been quickly 
adjusted from a check-rower to a drill, and 
in planting in hills the manner of adjusting 
the necessary parts is as quickly accomplished 
and without in any way interfering with the 
seedbox or the plates carried therein or with 
out providing any auxiliary plates to facili 
tate in this manner of planting, the adjust 
ment of the parts being such that the dog O 
is displaced from its pivot in the arm O', the 
plunger held back in its normal position, 
(shown in Fig. 4) the driving-chain bhav 
ing the power for actuating the operating 
shaft which rotates the seed-plate, the drop 
ping of the seed being continued until the 
engagement of the check-wire engages with 
the forked lever p", which controls the parts 
as above referred to for opening the valve in 
the heel of the shank for dropping the seed 
in hills, as is desired. 
It will be seen from the above that I am 
enabled by the provisions made to adjust the 
planter to almost any variety of work, using 
it for a simple drill, as a combined drill and 
check-rower in which the drill operates con 
tinuously and the check-row devices only are 
operated by the wire, or it may be operated 
as a check-row planter, pure and simple, op 
erated through the agency of the foot-lever 
or by hand. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In a planter, a revolving shaft and seed 
plates operated thereby, a rock-shaft operat 
ing a valve in the planter-shank, a drum 
ratchet suitably journaled on the revolving 
shaft and a dog adapted to engage the trun 
dles on said drum-ratchet, a plunger carried 
independently of said dog and in a suitable 
stationary support provided for said plunger, 
suitable spring-pressure for forcing the fin 
gers of said plunger into contact with the 
trundles of the drum limiting the rotation of 
said drum when engaged by said dog, a per 
foration in the outer end of said plunger 
adapted to have inserted therein a suitable 
pin for the purpose of disengaging the plunger 
from the trundles of the drum to adapt a free 
and easy rotation of said drum, all substan 
tially as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In combination with a corn-planter hav 
ing cylindrical seed-hoppershinged to a fixed 
base and provided with seeding devices in 
termittingly actuated by a revolving shaft 
through a suitable pinion-gearing matching 
a pinion on said revolving shaft, dropping 
75 
9o 
95 
TO 
II5 
I 25 
O 
15 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 
4. 
611,652 
ad 
45 
55 
frame, two parallel shafts one for operating 
the seed-plates and the other for operating 
the valves within the planter-shanks, a drum 
ratchet on said operating-shaft, actuated by a 
dog intermittingly operated by the rotation 
of the rock-shaft, of a plunger adapted to 
limit the movement of said drum-ratchet when 
moved by said dog suitably mounted inde 
pendently of said dog and drum, of the means 
for rotating said rock-shaft and forcing said 
plunger into contact with said drum, all sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a planter, the combination with a re 
Volving shaft for operating the hopper seed 
devices, and a rock-shaft for operating the 
valves in the planter-shanks, of a drum 
ratchet suitably mounted on the revolving 
shaft, journal-supports for said shaft carried 
at opposite sides of the drum-ratchet and pre 
Venting lateral displacement of said drum, 
an arm on said rock-shaft, a dog suitably piv 
oted thereto to engage the trundles of said 
drum to cause a partial rotation of said re 
volving shaft when actuated by said rock 
shaft, of a plunger held under spring-pres 
sure and carried in a stationary frame-sup 
port independently of said frame and dog pro 
vided with fingers which are adapted to en 
gage the trundles of said drum and to be op 
erated substantially in the manner and for 
the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
CHARLES J. SPURCK. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. W. LA PORTE, 
ABRAHAM JACOBSON. 
plates removably supported in said hopper 
and adjustable the one upon the other, a 
knocker bearing upon said plates and coin 
cident with the perforation therein and actu 
ated thereby, of a laterally-adjustable planter 
Shank mounted on the planter-frame and in 
dependently movable of said seedboxes and 
base, all substantially as and for the purpose 
described. 
3. In a planter having seed-hoppers with 
Seed-plates arranged therein hinged to a fixed 
base or support which is provided with a ver 
tically-disposed opening, a planter-shank 
mounted on the planter-frame independently 
of Said hopper and base provided with a fun 
nel-shaped upper extension adapted in its 
Several movements to be coincident with the 
opening in said base, bearing and supporting 
plates extending from the upper end of the 
Shank adapted to be bolted to said planter 
frame and which shank is adjustable there 
On, all substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
4. In a planter, in combination with a cy 
lindrical seed-hopper which ishinged to a fixed 
base and provided with a ring-gear and drop 
ping-plates suitably carried in said ring and 
journaled on a stud carried through the bot 
tom of the seedbox, a planter-shank remov 
ably mounted on the planter-frame independ 
ently of said box and base and adjustable 
laterally on said planter-frame for planting 
rows substantially as hereinbeforespecified. 
5. In a planter having seed-hoppers with 
Seed-plates therein, a planter-shank mounted 
independently of said seedbox and support 
and laterally adjustable upon said planter 
O 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611752.txt	No. 6,752. 
(No Rodel.) 
Patented Oct. 4, 1898. 
H. GEISENHNER. 
TROLLEY EAR. 
(Application filed July 15, 1898) 
Wei, 
ar WY 
 
 
WTNesses, 
J8, I./8660, 
(67. A444 
NVENTOR 
)-(enry Geisenhaner, 
by (14.462a: 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
EIENERY GEISENHONER, OF SCHENECTADY, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF NEW YORK. 
TROLLEYEAR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611,752, dated October 4, 1898. 
Application filed July 15, 1898, Serial No. 686,981, (No model.) 
55 
65 
- 
O 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HENRY GEISENHNER, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Schenectady, county of Schenectady, State of 
New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Trolley-Ears, (Case 
No. 872,) of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
My invention relates to trolley-ears, and 
has for one of its objects to provide an ear 
which can be secured to the trolley-wire with 
out use of solder, and, further, to provide an 
ear which will withstand great strains on the 
trolley-wire. 
In the accompanying drawings, which show 
an embodiment of my invention, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of the ear mounted in po 
sition on the trolley-Wire. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal section of the ear and trolley-wire. 
Fig. 3 is a cross-section on line 33 of Fig. 2., 
Fig. 4 is an enlarged cross-section on the line 
44 of Fig. 2, and Fig. 5 is an enlarged cross 
section of a slight modification. 
The ear is composed of a flat plate A 
of some good strong material-as phosphor 
bronze, for example-and is provided with a 
plurality of holes or openings B on the lower 
side. The openings have been shown as rec 
tangular in outline; but the particular shape 
is immaterial, so long as sufficient stock is 
left at C C, the points of maximum strain. 
The upper edge of the plate A is secured to 
a support D, which support is preferably cast 
around the plate. This upper edge is pro 
vided with openings E, which are filled with 
metal, forming the Support D. This is an ex 
ceedingly strong construction and is very 
cheap to manufacture, as the plate A can be 
stamped out of sheet stock and requires no 
finish. The upper part of the support D is 
provided with an enlargement which is screw 
threaded to receive the hanger-bolt or other 
supporting devices. As the standard trolley 
wire is circular in cross-section, a suitable 
tool is provided on each tower-wagon resem 
bling a milling-cutter, and when it is decided 
at What place an ear is necessary a short slot 
is cut in the upper side of the wire F, the 
Width and depth of the slot depending upon 
So the size of the wire and the strain to which 
the ear is subjected. After the slot has been 
cut the lower edge of the plate A is inserted 
therein, and by means of a suitable clamp or 
vise, also carried by the tower-wagon, the 
metal is compressed or forced over the plate 
A at points C. This is clearly shown by the 
cross-sectional details. 
For the average trolley construction it is 
sufficient to secure the ear by forcing the 
metal of the trolley-wire over the plate at 
three points, as shown; but where the strain 
is greater or less the number and arrange 
ment of the holes B can be varied as desired. 
An ear of the construction shown in Figs. 
1 to 4 was made and placed in a suitable test 
ing-frame, which was so arranged that the 
support D was secured to one part and the 
trolley-wire F to another. 
A stress was then 
applied in a manner tending to separate the 
ear from the wire, and it was not until this 
stress reached two thousand and fifty pounds 
that the ear in any way separated from the 
WIre. 
In Fig. 5 is shown a slight modification in 
which the plate A is a trifle thicker at its 
lower edge. The advantage of this construc 
tion lies in the fact that the surfaces a, assist 
in retaining the plate in place, whereas with 
the construction previously described the 
metal extending over the plate at points f is 
all that is depended upon to hold the parts to 
gether. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. Atrolley-ear which is secured to the trol 
ley-wire by compressing the metal forming 
the wire around the ear. 
2. The combination of a trolley-ear, a trol 
ley-wire, a slot in the wire for receiving the 
ear, and means for retaining the ear in place, 
consisting of compressed portions of the trol 
ley-wire. 
3. The combination of a trolley-ear, having 
a plate on its under side, a trolley-Wire, a slot 
therein for receiving the plate, openings in 
the plate, and means for securing the ear to 
the wire consisting of compressed portions 
of the wire which extend partially or wholly 
through the openings in the plate. 
4. As an article of manufacture, a trolley 
ear comprising a flat metal plate having a se 
ries of openings on the lower side, and a metal. 
45 
25 
30 
35 
85 
95 
OO 
 
2 
611,752 
support or holder which is secured to the holes formed near the upper edge of the plate, 
plate. 
and a holder or support for the ear which is 
5. In a trolley-earthe combination of a plate, cast around the plate, the metal forming the 
holes formed near the upper edge of the plate, support filling the holes in the upper edge of 15 
cast around the plate, the metal forming the 
support filling the holes in the upper edge of my hand this 12th day of July, 1898. 
the plate. 
5 and a holder or support for the ear which is the plate. 
In testimony whereof I have here unto set 
HENRY GEISENHONER. 
6. In a trolley-ear the combination of a plate 
Io having a substantially straight under side, 
holes formed in the plate near the lower edge, 
Witnesses: 
B. B. HULL, 
G. HAYNES. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611852.txt	No. 61,852. 
(No Model.) 
 
J. R. WHITE. 
TRIP MECHANISM FOR CARS. 
Application filed July 14, 1897 
Patented Oct. 4, 1898. 
2 sheets-Sheet 1. 
   
 
\x/?TNESSES: 
1. d. 14-------u. 
2 
/ . 
/ 
SC s 
SS 
Y^s . 
 
livier 
4./244 
A . 
No. 611,852. 
- 
J. R. WHITE. . 
TRIP MECHANISM FOR CARS. 
(Application filed July 14, 1897.) 
Patented Oct. 4, 1898. 
 
(No Mode.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN R. WHITE, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, 
TRIP MECHANISM FOR CARS. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611,852, dated October 4, 1898. 
Application filed July 14, 1897, Serial No. 644,501 (No model.) 
To att, whon, it inctly concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN R. WHITE, of 
South Boston, in the county of Suffolk and 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Trip Mech 
anism for Cars, of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention has relation to railways em 
ployed more particularly for loading and un 
loading vessels or transporting material in 
short distances from one place to another; 
and it has for its object to provide a trip 
mechanism for automatically locking a Car 
against movement while it is being loaded or 
unloaded and which when operated Will per 
mit the car to pass freely along the track. 
The invention consists of a trip mechanism 
adapted more particularly for use upon in 
clined tracks and automatically locking the 
car against movement, means being provided 
for operating the trip to release the car, all as 
I have illustrated upon the drawings and shall 
now proceed to describe in detail and then 
point out in the claims hereto appended. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings and to the letters marked thereon, 
forming a part of this specification, the same 
letters designating the same parts or features, 
as the ease may be, wherever they occur. 
Of the drawings, Figure 1 represents, in side 
elevation, a car upon inclined tracks and held 
against movement by my improved trip. 
Fig.2 represents an end view of the car and 
the trip. Fig. 3 illustrates the parts of the 
mechanism in position to release the car. Fig. 
4 represents a perspective view of the trip, 
the car being broken away. 
Referring to the drawings, a indicates a car 
of the class employed for transporting coal or 
other material; but inasmuch as the inven 
tion relates not to the car but to the mechan 
ism for holding it against movement I shall 
not describe the car more than to state that it 
may be any one of the numerous kinds em 
ployed for this purpose. The car runs on rails 
a' ca, which are inclined and are supported 
upon beams act, resting upon the platform 
a. The tracks may be level nearly their en 
tire length, but are inclined at their ends for 
a purpose to be described. On the side of 
one of the beams a is bolted a plate b. Pro 
jecting out from the plate is a stud b", (see 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
65 
7 o 
75 
m 
Fig. 3,) on which is fulcrumed a trip-lever c, 
having its short arm c' bent up so as to pro 
ject above the tread of the rail at the side 
thereof. The long arm c of the lever is 
curved downwardly and has its lower end 
resting upon a stop b, projecting out from the 
plate. A spring dis connected to the arm c. 
and to a stud b on the plate to assist in hold 
ing the end of the arm c' above the rail and 
to return the lever to its normal position after 
being tilted. 
When the car passes along the rails and up 
the incline, it passes over the trip-lever, which 
drops to allow it to pass and immediately 
springs up again so as to lie in the path of the 
car and prevent it from traveling back and 
down the incline. Albuffer-plate C is bolted 
to the end of the car to strike against the le 
ver and prevent it from wearing the car. 
To depress the trip-lever and allow the car 
by its gravity to pass down the incline, a rock 
shaft e is journaled at one end in an annular 
flange or bearing b on the plate b and at its 
other end in a bearing afforded by a bracket 
b', secured to one of the timbers of the plat 
form, and is provided with an arme', connect 
ed to the arm c of the lever c by a connect 
ing rod or linke. A foot-levere is secured 
to the end of the shafte, which when depressed 
rocks the shaft, and the latter in turn raises 
the arme', and consequently the lower end c 
of the lever c, so as to depress the upper end 
c' of said lever below the plate a and allow 
the car to travel down the rails. 
It will be seen that the arm c' of the lever 
is considerably longer than the arm c'. This, 
coupled with the fact that the treadle mech 
anism is connected directly to the long arm of 
the lever, enables the operator to easily re 
lease the car, which with its contents is fre 
quently very heavy. 
Thus from the foregoing it will be seen that 
I provide a mechanism which automatically 
locks the car against backward movement and 
which may be easily operated by an operator 
placing his foot upon the foot-levere. Hence 
a single operator may release the car and 
start it toward the other end of the track with 
but little muscular exertion. 
Having thus explained the nature of the in 
vention and described a Way of constructing 
and using the same, though without attempt 
85 
95 
IOC 
2 
611,852 
said stud and having one end resting upon 
said stop b, and the other projecting upward 
to engage a car; a rock-shaft e having one end 
journaled in said bearing b, and formed with 
an arm e' a treadle e secured to said shaft 
to rock it; and a link econnecting said arm 
e' with said lever c, substantially for the pur 
pose set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification, in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses, this 7th day of 
July, A. D. 1897. 
25 
JOHN R. WIIITE. 
Witnesses: 
C. F. BROWN, 
A. D. HARRISON. 
ing to set forth all of the forms in which it 
may be made or all of the modes of its use, I 
declare that what I claim is 
1. A trip mechanism for cars comprising a 
lever fulcrumed between its ends and having 
one end longer than the other, the short end 
being arranged to engage a car, a stop, the 
long arm of said lever being at an angle to the 
short arm thereof and extending over the stop 
and adapted to normally rest thereon, a rock 
shaft having an arm connected to the long 
arm of said lever, a treadle connected to said 
rock-shaft, and a spring connected to saidle 
ver for holdingit yieldingly against said stop. 
2. In combination, a plate having a project 
ing stop b, a stud b', and a bearing b a le 
verc fulcrumed intermediate of its ends upon 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US611952.txt	No. 611,952. 
H. WORKMAN. 
Patented Oct. 4, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
 
WATER. TUBE STEAM BOLER. 
(Application filed Dec. 4, 1897.) 
A / 6, 7. 
A / 6, 2. 
a A.(U. (, 
2a 
... t 
twist: 
fHE NORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHo, washington.o.c 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HAROLD WORKMAN, OF DULLATUR, SCOTLAND. . 
WATER-TUBE STEAM - BOLER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 611,952, dated October 4, 1898. 
Application filed December 4, 1897, Serial No. 660,814 (No model.) 
- 
55 
65 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, HAROLD WORKMAN, B. 
Sc., a Subject of the Queen of Great Britain 
and Ireland, and a resident of Dullatur, in 
the county of Dumbarton, Scotland, have in 
vented certain Improvements in Water-Tube 
and other Steam-Boilers, of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
My said invention has mainly for its object, 
by an improved construction and arrange 
ment, to increase the efficiency of water-tube 
Steam-boilers. 
A boiler made with my improvements com: 
prises a stack of Water-tubes which are hori 
ZOntal, or approximately so, and which con 
stitute the main heating-surface, the furnace 
being placed beneath the stack of tubes. 
The tubes are formed into a number of ver 
tical sets or sections, and those of each sec 
tion, which may consist of one or more ver 
tlcal roWS of tubes, are connected at their 
ends by junction-boxes in a manner to form 
in each case one or more serpentine water 
passages from top to bottom. 
It is an important feature of my improved 
arrangements that the water flows downward 
through the stack of tubes, the water and 
steam flowing upward through return-tubes. 
The action of the furnace and fire-gases is 
most intense on the bottom tubes, the in 
tensity becoming gradually less as the fire 
gases reach one upper tier of tubes after an 
other. The descending wateris consequently 
subjected to increasing heat in proportion as 
it descends and very completely utilizes the 
heat of the fire-gases, which become reduced 
to a comparatively low temperature on reach 
ing the top of the stack of tubes. Heat re 
maining in the fire-gases may be further 
utilized by being made to act on tubes ar 
ranged in the uptake and having the feed 
Water passed through them. 
In order that my said invention and the 
manner of performing the same may be prop 
erly understood, I hereunto append a sheet of 
explanatory drawings, to be hereinafter re 
ferred to, and showing a boiler as made with 
my improvements. 
Figure 1 of the drawings is a vertical sec 
tion; and Fig. 2 is a vertical section, as at 
right angles to Fig. 1, of my improved boiler. 
In the boiler shown in the drawings there 
is a stack of horizontal water-tubes A, ar 
ranged in vertical sections, each section com 
prising a single vertical row of tubes. The 
tubes are fixed at their ends in junction 
boxes B C, those B at one end consisting of 
a vertical set of separate boxes, each connect 
ing two tubes, while a single vertical box C 
is shown at the other end, being made With 
compartments, each connecting two tubes. 
Separate junction-boxes may, however, be 
used at both ends of the tubes. The top tube 
A of the stack is, at one end, fixed in a box.D, 
communicating with the bottom or lower part 
of a water-and-steam drum E, and its other 
end communicates through the box C with 
the second or next lower tube, which come 
municates through a box B with the third 
tube, and in a similar way communication is 
made between each tube and the next lower 
only alternately at opposite ends, so that a 
continuous serpentine passage is formed 
through the tubes of each vertical section 
from top to bottom of the stack. The bottom 
tube of the stack communicates through a 
junction-box F with a vertical tube G, which 
communicates through a tube H and junc 
tion-boxes with the Water-and-steam drumE. 
The furnace J is directly under the stack of 
tubes, and its heat acting most strongly on 
the lower tubes causes an upward flow of 
water and steam through the ascension tubes 
G. H., while Water descends through the tubes 
A forming the stack, and a rigorous circula 
tion is maintained. 
The arrangement and manner of combin 
ing the water-tubes are susceptible of vari 
ation, the feature of the downward flow of 
the water through them being essential in 
applying my invention. 
The furnace may be of any suitable form 
in use with water-tube boilers. 
A complete boiler may consist of a single 
stack of water-tubes A, arranged with fur 
nace and accessory parts as hereinbefore de 
scribed, or it may consist of two stacks con 
nected to a single Water-and-steam drum, the 
75 
85 
90 
95 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
611,952 
return-tubes G being between the two stacks, 
or more than two stacks of water-tubes may 
be combined. 
What I claim as my invention is 
A water-tube steam-boiler having horizon 
tal or approximately horizontal water-tubes 
in a stack and connected alternately at op 
posite ends, the uppermost tubes being con 
nected to the lower part of a water-and-steam 
drum, and the lowermost tubes being con 
nected to the upper part of the same drum, 
in combination with a furnace below the stack 
IO 
of tubes, whereby the bottom tubes are sub 
jected to the greatest heat, and the water is 
caused to flow downward through the stack 15 
of tubes, substantially as herein set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
HAROLD WORKMAN. 
Witnesses: 
EDMUND HUNT, 
DAVID FERGUSON. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612052.txt	No. 612,052. 
D. S. MCRUEN 
Patented Oct. 1, 1898. 
 
 
 
ZZZ 
| NSN 
(1) 
N 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
DAVID S. McMULLEN, OF EVANSTON, ILLINOIS. . 
FENCE POST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 612,052, dated October 11, 1898. 
Application filed November 29, 1897, Serial No. 660,064. (No model.) 
55 
65 
o 
75 
O 
To at whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, DAVID S. McMULLEN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Evanston, in the county of Cook and State of 
Illinois, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Fence-Posts; and I do 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, and to the letters of reference marked 
thereon, which form a part of this specifica 
tion. 
The objects of this invention are to provide 
means for preventing the vertical and lateral 
movements of the post, to strengthen and pro 
tect the post at the surface of the ground, 
and to secure cheapness and lightness of con 
struction. These objects are attained in the 
construction hereinafter fully described, and 
illustrated in the accompanying drawings,in 
which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal view of my im 
25 proved post, showing it as set in the earth, 
the latter being shown in section. Fig. 2 is 
a plan section of the post on the line 22 of 
Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a sectional view on the line 
33 of Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a detail elevation 
viewed from the line 44 of Fig. 2, and Fig. 
5 is a plan section of the post on the line 5 5 
of Fig. 1. 
This invention relates particularly to metal 
posts. Heretofore the usual practice has been 
to make the post with a large hollow shaft, 
so as to provide a considerable area of bear 
ing-surface to prevent its lateral movement 
in the earth. Such a post is necessarily of 
great Weight, so that its cost is very consider 
able and the cost of transportation is very 
high. In order to reduce the weight as much 
as possible, the post is usually made, whether 
it be of cast or Wrought iron, with a compar 
atively thin shell. The greatest injury to a 
fence-post from rust or decay occurs at the 
surface of the ground, and the post deterio 
rates so rapidly at this point, which is also 
the point of greatest strain, that its life is 
comparatively short. All these difficulties 
are overcome in my improved post, in which 
I use a shaft, (marked in the drawings A,) 
preferably of Wrought-iron, of small diameter 
45 
35 
throughout its entire length. The shaft is 
provided with a foot-piece B, preferably of 
cast-iron, in disk form and having an up 
wardly-projecting annular flange b for encir 
cling the end of the post, and radial flanges 
b', extending upwardly from the disk B. A 
block C, preferably of cast-iron, is fixed upon 
the shaft at such point that it will project 
above and below the surface of the ground 
when the post is set, and which for the pur 
pose of shedding water preferably tapers up 
wardly, as shown at c. A plurality of Wings 
or blades D project radially from the block 
C and may be limited to its lower portion, as 
shown, so that they will be entirely buried 
when the post is set. These wings D are 
shown as being vertical or in planes parallel 
with the axis of the shaft; but it is obvious 
that this exact relation need not be sustained, 
the purpose of the blades being to offer re 
sistance to any lateral strain upon the post. 
The blades are shown as being three in num 
ber; but as many may be employed as may be 
desired, such a number or such a form of con 
struction being followed that these wings of 
ferresistance to lateral strain upon the shaft 
in whatsoever direction it may be applied. It 
will be seen that this block strengthens the 
shaft at the point of greatest strain and thick 
ensit by the application of a very considerable . 
mass of metal at the point at which disinte 
gration is most active, so that I am able to 
use a comparatively light shaft and still Se 
cure firmness of setting and durability. 
The form of the shaft is entirely immate 
rial. It may be a simple tube or rod, or it 
may be of any preferred angular form in 
cross-section. I have shown it as being cy 
lindrical in form. It is obvious that if this 
form is departed from the form of the flange 
b of the foot-piece will vary accordingly. The 
foot-piece and the wing-block C may be se 
cured upon the shaft in any desired manner. 
If desired, the foot-piece may be dispensed 
with, as indicated in Fig. 4, the shaft being 
pointed, so that it may be driven. When 
this construction is followed, the post is more 
easily set by making a shallow excavation to 
receive the wing-block. 
I claim as my invention- 
1. In a fence-post the combination with a 
shaft, of a block cast, upon the shaft interme 
. . 
. 
95 
OO 
2 
612,052 
diate of its ends, and adapted to project above having blades or wings radiating from its Io 
and below the surface of the earth when the lower portion; and a block cast upon the lower 
post is set, and a base-piece near the lower end of the post. 
end of the post. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
metal shaft, an upwardly-tapering block cast 
upon the shaft in such position that it is adapt- 
ed to extend above and below the surface of 
the ground when the post is set, such block 
2. In a fence-post, in combination, a wrought- in presence of two witnesses. 
DAVID S. MCMULLEN. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. M. WELLS, 
WINSOR CHASE. 
5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612152.txt	No. 62,152. 
(No Mode.) 
F.M. BELt. 
ELECTRIC LAMP SOCKET. 
pplication filed Jan. 10, 1898.) 
Patented Oct. 1, 1898. 
Af/a/a/MAe//, 
BY 
 
-- gar, 
ATIORAVE Y. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, 
FRANIK M. BELL, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-IIALE TO WILLMA 
POLLACK, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRIC-LAMP SOCKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 612,152, dated October 11, 1898. 
Application filed January 10, 1898, Serial No. 666,151 (No model) 
25. 
To all whom it Tival/ concer'7. 
Beit known that I, FRANK M. BELL, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at the city 
of New York, in the county and State of New 
5 York, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Electric-Lamp Sockets, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and ex 
act specification. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
Io holding devices for incandescent electric 
lamps, and has for its object more particularly 
to provide a simple, efficient, and reliable 
socket by means of which the user of the elec 
tric current will be enabled to use any of the 
I5 various forms of incandescent electric lamps 
now in general use without being obliged to 
change the fittings or in any wise alter the 
SOcket. 
The objects above set forth I am enabled 
2o to attain by means of my invention, which 
consists in the novel details of construction 
and in the combination, connection, and ar 
rangement of parts, as hereinafter more fully 
set forth and then pointed out in the claims. 
In the accompanying drawings, forming 
part of this specification, wherein like letters 
of reference indicate like parts, Figure 1 is a 
side view, partly in section, showing a socket 
constructed according to and embodying my 
3o invention. Fig. 2 is an inverted plan view 
thereof. Fig. 3 is an enlarged detail per 
spective view of the center contact-post. Fig. 
4 is a similar view illustrating a modified form 
of center contact-post. Fig. 5 is a view simi 
35 lar to Fig. 1, illustrating a modified form 
of device for holding the spiral in contact 
with the locking-dogs; and Figs. 6, 7, and 8 
are side views, partly in section, the first 
named of said figures showing a lamp secured 
4o and supported within the socket by means of 
the spiral, and the remaining figures showing 
the lamp secured and supported in the Socket 
by means of the center contact and the spring 
fingers and the spiral forced back. 
In said drawings, A designates the Socket, 
comprising the cylinder portion B, having a 
flaring mouth and a cap C. 
D denotes a base, made of porcelain or other 
insulating material, supported within the cyl 
E denotes a contact-post connected with 
5o inder portion B of the casing. 
45. 
65 
| one terminal of the circuit and Secured to the 
base D and arranged centrally on the un 
der side thereof, the projecting portion E of 
said contact-post being cored out and the 55 
outer surface of said cored-out projecting 
portion provided with screw-threads a, an 
annular groove b above said screw-threads, 
and a recess c provided in said annular groove 
b, and F denotes a spring disposed within said 
annular grooveb, having one end secured 
thereto adjacent to the recess and its other 
or free end passed around the post E and ex 
tending through the recess c, partly into the 
cored-out portion E' of said post. 
G denotes a metal base connected to the 
remaining terminal of the circuit and secured 
to the under side of the porcelain base D by 
means of screw d, said base G being provided 
With a cut-out central portion, oppositely-ar- 7o 
ranged stops e, and Spring contact-fingers 
H, made integral with the base G and de 
pending from its periphery, said spring con 
tact-fingers H being each provided with a lon 
gitudinal slot H' and at their lower or free 75 
ends with locking-dogs H, each comprising 
the inwardly-extending horizontal portion f 
and the downwardly and outwardly project 
ing inclined portion g. 
material, preferably hardened copper, which 
constitutes an internal screw-thread. Upon 
the outer surface of this spiral Iare provided 
the outwardly-projecting hook members I", 
which extend through the slots H" of the 85 
spring contact-fingers H, and thereby serve to 
prevent any of the rotary movement being im 
parted to said spiral I, and J denotes a spiral 
spring disposed within the spring contact 
fingers H intermediate the spiral I and the 
base G, whereby to maintain the spiral Inor 
mally pressed against the horizontal portions 
f of the locking-dogs H. 
In the modified form of contact-post as 
. 
illustrated at Fig. 4 E denotes the post, com-95 
prising the solid stem. E and the cored-out 
portion E, which is provided upon its outer 
surface with screw-threads a' and above said 
screw-threads a with a cut-away or recessed 
portion b', and F denotes a spring having one 
end secured to the interior of the cored-out 
portion E4 by means of a screw c' and its 
I denotes a spiral of suitable conducting 8o 
9o 
IOO 
 
2 
612,152 
7 O 
75 
other or free end bent downward and inward 
into the recess b' and its extreme end partly 
bent outward again. 
In Eig. 5 the main structure is substan 
tially like that shown at Fig. 1, except that 
in this one the spiral I* is held spring-pressed 
against the horizontal portions of the lock 
ing-dogs H by means of rodsK, having their 
lower ends secured to the outer surface of 
the spiral I* and their upper ends extending 
through the porcelain base D'and into hous 
ings L., secured to the upper side of said base 
The upper ends of said rods IK, within 
D. 
the housings T, are provided with shoulders 
M, and springs N are disposed within said 
housing, intermediate the tops of said hous 
ings L and the shoulders M. 
The operation will be best understood by 
referring to Figs. 6, 7, and S of the drawings. 
At Fig. 6 a lamp is shown having external 
screw-threads upon its base. To secure this 
one within the socket, it simply becomes nec 
essary to insert the base thereof within the 
spring contact-fingers and then turn the same 
until the Screw-threads upon its base are en 
gaged by the spiral I and then continue the 
turning until the top of the lamp-base is 
brought firmly in contact with the end of the 
contact-post E. Where the lamp-base is 
adapted for frictional holding and secure 
ment only, it is Only necessary to insert the 
base within the Spring-fingers and then firmly 
press the same home, care, however, being 
necessary to see that the stem projecting from 
the lamp-base has been properly, inserted in 
the cored-out portion of the contact-post E 
and engaged by the end of the spring F, as 
shown at Fig. 7. Where the lamp-base is 
provided with a central internal screw-thread, 
as illustrated at Fig. 8, it simply becomes 
necessary, as heretofore, to insert the lamp 
properly within the Spring-fingers and there 
upon turn Ol' Screw the lamp until the inter 
nal screw-threads are engaged by the screw 
threads C. on the contact-post E and continue 
the operation until further movement is ar 
rested by the base of the lamp coming into 
contact with the Studs ee on the base G of 
the socket. 
Without limiting myself to the details of 
construction, which may be varied within the 
scope of the invention, what I claim, and de 
sire to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. A SOcket Comprising a casing, a base of 
insulating material arranged therein, a cen 
tral contact and contact-fingers arranged 
upon said base, and a spiral supported by said 
contact-fingers, substantially as specified. 
2. A Socket comprising a casing, a base of 
insulating material arranged therein, a cen 
tral contact and contact-fingers arranged 
upon said base and a spiral loosely supported 
by said contact-fingers, substantially as speci 
fied. 
3. A socket comprising a casing, a base of 
insulating material arranged therein, a con 
tact arranged in the center of said base, con 
tact-fingers arranged at the periphery of Said 
base, and a spiral supported Within Said COll 
tact-fingers adapted to move vertically within 
the same, substantially as specified. 
4. A socket comprising a casing, a base of 
insulating material arranged therein, a con 
tact arranged in the center of said base, Spring 
contact-fingers arranged adjacent to the pe 
riphery of said base, a spiral movably Sup 
ported within said spring contact-fingers, and 
means for maintaining said spiral normally 
in position adjacent to the free ends of Said 
spring contact-fingers, substantially as speci 
fied. 
5. A socket comprising a casing, a base of 
insulating material arranged therein, a Con 
tact-post arranged in the center of Said base, 
spring contact-fingers arranged upon said 
base adjacent to the periphery thereof, said 
spring contact-fingers having dogs at their 
lower or free ends, a spiral supported Within 
said spring contact-fingers, and means for 
maintaining said spiral normally in Contact 
with said dogs, substantially as specified. 
6. A socket comprising a casing, a base of 
insulating material arranged therein, a con 
tact-post arranged in the center of said base, 
spring contact-fingers arranged upon said 
base adjacent to its periphery, Said Spring 
contact-fingers being provided with longitu 
dinal slots and at their lower or free ends 
with locking-dogs, a spiral supported Within 
said spring contact-fingers having engaging 
members upon its outer surface extending 
through the longitudinal slots of said spring 
contact-fingers, and a spiral spring disposed 
within said spring contact-fingers intermedi 
ate the base and the spiral, substantially as 
specified. 
7. In a socket for incandescent electric 
lamps a contact-post comprising a solid stem 
portion, and a hollow portion provided upon 
its outer surface with screw-threads, and 
above said screw-threads With a recess, and 
a spring having one end secured to said con 
tact-post and its other end free and extending 
through said recess and into the hollow por 
tion of said post, substantially as specified. 
8. In a socket for incandescent electric 
lamps a contact-post comprising a Solid stem 
portion, and a hollow portion provided upon 
its outer surface with screw-threads, an an 
nular groove above said screw-threads, a re 
cess in said annular groove, and a Spring dis 
posed in said annular groove having one end 
secured to said post, and its other end free and 
extending through the recess aforesaid, and 
into the hollow portion of said post, Substan 
tially as specified. 
9. A socket for incandescent electric lamps 
comprising a casing, insulated contacts there 
in, and a spiral, adapted to receive a lamp, 
loosely supported adjacent to the mouth of 
the casing by one of said contacts, substan 
tially as specified. 
10. In a socket for incandescent electric 
lamps, the combination with a base, of a plu 
95 
CO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
I25 
d 
25 
... 35 
45 
55 
65 
 
612,152 
3 
12. A socket comprising a casing, a base of 
insulating material secured therein, a hollow 
contact-post secured centrally to said base 
provided with internal and external engag 
ing means, a metal base secured to said in 
sulating-base having stops arranged thereon, 
a cut-out central portion, and a plurality of 
spring-fingers depending from the periphery 
of said metal base, said spring-fingers being 
provided with longitudinal slots, and at their 
lower or free ends with locking-dogs, a spiral 
disposed within said spring-fingers having 
outwardly-projecting hooks upon its outer 
surface extending through the slots in the 
spring-fingers, and a spiral spring disposed 
within said spring-fingers intermediate the 
metal base and the spiral whereby to main 
tain the latter normally in contact with the 
locking-dogs at the ends of the spring-fingers, 
substantially as specified. 
Signed at the city of New York, in the 
county and State of New York, this 8th day 
January, 1898. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK M. BELL. 
GUSTAVE DIETERICH, 
JOHN IXEHLENBECK. 
35 
45 
O 
rality of spring-fingers depending therefrom 
having longitudinal slots therein, and lock 
ing-dogs at their lower or free ends, said lock 
ing-dogs each comprising an inwardly-pro 
jecting horizontal portion and a downward 
and outward inclined portion; a spiral hav 
ing retaining members arranged upon its 
Outer surface extending through the slots in 
the spring-fingers, and spring means for main 
taining said spiral normally pressed against 
the horizontal portions of the locking-dogs, 
substantially as specified. 
11. In a socket for incandescent electric 
lamps the combination with a base having a 
central opening therein, stops arranged in 
termediate the central opening and the pe 
riphery of said base, and a plurality of spring 
fingers depending from the periphery of said 
base, said spring-fingers being provided with 
longitudinal slots, and at their lower or free 
ends with locking - dogs, a spiral disposed 
within said spring-fingers having hooks upon 
its outer surface extending through the slots 
in the spring-fingers, and a spiral spring dis 
posed within said spring-fingers intermediate 
the spiral and the base above mentioned, sub 
stantially as specified. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612252.txt	No. 612,252, 
(No Mode.) 
WITWESSES 
 
 
 
  
 
W. A. MADDIN. 
Patented Oct. If, 1898, 
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF FOR WATER SPOUTS. 
(Application filed Oct. 4, 1897.) 
FG4. 
SeSLS0LSLS0LSJYS 
BY 
ATIOFAVEYS, 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM A. MADDIN, OF MUSCOGEE, INDIAN TERRITORY. 
AUTOMATIC C UT - O FF FOR WATER - S PO UT S. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters P 
Application filed October 4, 1897, 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM. A. MADDIN, 
of Muscogee, CreekNation, Indian Territory, 
have invented a new and Improved Auto 
matic Cut-Off for Water-Spouts, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion. 
Myinvention relates to an automatic cut-off 
adapted for connection between a cistern and 
Waste or drain pipe and the water-supply or 
doWn-spout, the cut-off being adapted to regu 
late the supply of water to either the drain 
pipe or to the cistern or filter connected with 
the cistern. 
The Water from roofs through the first part 
of a rain-storm is dirty, impure, and unfit to 
enter a cistern. 
It is the object of the invention to provide 
an automatic cut-off which when in natural 
position will conduct the water that first falls 
on the roof to the waste-pipe; but after a 
short period and when the said roof has been 
Washed by the first flow of water the said 
cut-off will automatically so change its posi 
tion as to direct the flow of water from the 
roof to the cistern-pipe until the rain ceases, 
Whereupon the cut-off Will again return toits 
normal or natural position. The cut-off may 
be held stationary whenever so desired and 
the Water he made to flow continuously to the 
Waste-pipe. 
The invention consists in the novel con 
struction and combination of the several 
parts, as will be hereinafter fully set forth, 
and pointed out in the claims. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar character of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section 
through the improved cut-off, illustrating the 
directing member as locked in its normal po 
sition. Fig. 2 is a section similar to Fig. 1, 
illustrating the directing member of the cut 
off as having been carried automatically to a 
position which will serve to direct the water 
to the stand-pipe. Fig. 3 is a perspective view 
of the cut-off viewed from the outside, and 
Fig. 4 is a vertical transverse section taken 
Substantially on the line 4 4 of Fig. 2. 
Acasing A is provided, the sides 10 whereof 
- 
O 
2. ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
. 
atent No. 612,252, dated October 11, 1898. 
Serial No. 653,980, (No model.) 
are usually circular, or approximately so, the 
front and rear faces 11 being flat. An inlet 
pipe 12 is provided at the top of the casing, 
connected with any source of water-supply, 
while at the bottom of the casing two pipes 
are made to enter a pipe 13, adapted to con 
nect with a waste or drain pipe, and a pipe 
14, adapted to connect with a cistern. A 
transverse partition 15 is formed at the bot 
... tom of the casing between the two pipes, and 
above the said partition a pivot-pin 16 is se 
curely fastened in the front and back 11 of 
the casing. 
A directing member B is pivoted within the 
casing. This directing member preferably 
consists of two disks 17, connected at their 
bottom by an inverted-V-shaped partition 18, 
the disks 17 being cut away to conform to the 
outer shape of the said bottom, and the direct 
ing member B is pivoted in the casing by re 
ceiving the pin 16 between the members of 
the V-partition 1S. 
A curved partition 19 is carried from one 
disk 17 to the other at one side of the center, 
commencing from the apex of the angular or 
V shaped partition 18 and terminating at the 
upper central portion of the disks, connect 
ing with a central vertical partition 20. These 
two partitions 19 and 20 form together a 
chamber C. The upper portion of the curved 
partition on the top part of the chamber is 
provided with apertures 21 and the upper 
portion of the vertical wall or partition 20 of 
the said chamber is provided with apertures 
22. A third angular partition 23 serves to 
connect the disks, being located within the 
chamber C, the shorter leg of the partition 
23 connecting with the upper portion of the 
vertical partition 20 and the lower and longer 
leg of the partition 23 connecting with the 
vertical and curved partitions 19 and 20, 
where they meet, thus forming a second cham 
ber D of substantially triangular shape in 
One or more apertures 24 lead into the bot 
tom portion of the chamber D and one or 
more apertures 25 lead " into the bottom por 
tion of the chamber C. A. Weight 26 is sup 
ported by an arm 27, the arm being secured 
to the member of the V-shaped or pivotal 
partition 18 in front of the chamber C, and 
cross-section. 
- 
90 
95 
Ioo 
v. ---, - 
. 
 
2 : 
- 
612,252 
O 
5 
2 ? 
the Weight 26 serves normally to hold the 
apertured upper portion of the chamber C 
beneath the inlet-pipe 12. 
The directing member is provided at the 
top with an eye 2S, into which a pin 29 may 
be passed from the outside of the casing to 
hold the chamber C in its normal position. 
Supposing the pin 29 to have been removed, 
When it commences to rain the water will en 
ter the chamber C slowly through the upper 
apertures 21; but the bulk of the water will 
pass around the back of the chamber and 
through the pipe 13, connected with the drain. 
When, however, the chamber C has received 
Sufficient Water to overcome the power of 
the weight 26, the chamber will rock in di 
rection of the nearest side of the casing, as 
suming the position shown in Fig. 2, and the 
Water from the inlet 12 will be directed to 
the pipe connected with the cistern or filter 
for the cistern. Sufficient water will enter 
both chambers C and D, when the chambers 
are in their second position, to hold the said 
chambers in such position during the con 
tinuance of the rain. When the rain ceases, 
the Water will drain off from both chambers 
C and D through the lower apertures 24 and 
25 and the weight 26 will restore said cham 
bers to their normal position. 
25 
 
wall substantially straight and the opposing 
wall curved, and a supplemental chamber con 
tained in the main chamber, having a rear 
ward inclination, each chamber being pro 
vided with an inlet at its upper portion and 
an outlet at its lower portion, and a counter 
balance-Weight for the said distributing mem 
ber, substantially as shown and described. 
4. In a water cut-off, the combination with 
a casing provided with an inlet and discharge 
openings, of a counterbalanced water-direct 
ing member pivoted within the casing and ar 
ranged to direct the supply to either of the 
discharge-openings, said directing member 
consisting of a rocking body with which the 
weight is connected, the rocking body being 
provided with a chamber having inlet-open 
ings in its upper portion and an outlet-open 
ing at its bottom portion, the said directing 
member being provided at its top with an eye 
adapted to receive a pin, for the purpose 
specified. 
5. In a water cut-off, a casing provided with 
an inlet and separate discharge openings, and 
a counterbalanced water-directing member 
pivoted within the casing and arranged to di 
rect the water-supply to either of said dis 
charge - openings, the said Water - directing 
member being provided with a chamber hav 
| ing one wallsubstantially straight and the op 
posite wall curved, the said chamber having 
an inlet and an outlet, the pivot of the said 
water-directing member being located at the 
junction of the lower ends of the straight and 
curved walls of the chamber, substantially as 
shown and described. 
6. In a water cut-off, the combination with 
a casing having an inlet-pipe at its top and 
two discharge-pipes at its bottom, the said 
casing being provided at the bottom. With a 
transverse partition between the two dis 
charge-pipes, and having a pivot-pin located 
above and adjacent to the transverse parti 
tion and secured to the front and back of the 
casing, of a water-directing member consist 
ing of two disks connected at their bottom by 
an inverted-V-shaped partition, the said pivot 
pin being received between the members of 
the said partition, a curved partition connect 
ing the disks at one side of the center and ex 
tending from the apex of the V-shaped parti 
tion to the upper central portion of the disks, 
a central vertical partition connecting the 
disks and connecting at its ends with the ends. 
of the curved partition, the said curved and 
vertical partitions forming a main chamber, 
a supplemental chamber within the main 
chamber, the said chambers being each pro 
vided with an inlet and an outlet, and a 
weighted arm secured to one of the members 
of the V-shaped partition substantially as de 
scribed. 
WILLIAM. A. MADDIN. 
Witnesses: 
FRANK H. GRUBB, 
BEVERLY BERRY. 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
IOS 
O 
II5 
I 25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
larger chamber C serve to so distribute the 
Weight of the Water as to absolutely prevent 
the directing member B returning to its nor 
mal position while the said chambers are 
filled or even partially filled. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. In a Water cut-off, the combination, with 
a casing provided with an inlet and discharge 
Openings, of a counterbalanced water-direct 
ing member pivoted within the casing and 
arranged to direct the supply to either of the 
discharge-openings, said directing member 
consisting of a rocking body containing a 
main chamber, and a supplemental chamber 
inclined in direction of the main chamber, 
both of said chambers being provided with an 
inlet andan Outlet, for the purpose described. 
2. In a Water cut-off, the combination, with 
a casing provided with an inlet and discharge 
Openings, of a counterbalanced, water-direct 
ing member pivoted within the casing and ar 
ranged to direct the supply to either of the dis 
charge-openings, said directing member con 
sisting of a rocking body containing a main 
chamber and a supplemental chamber in 
clined in direction of the main chamber, both 
of said chambers being provided with an in 
let and an outlet, and a locking device, sub 
stantially as described, for securing the di 
recting member in a position to deliver to a 
predetermined outlet, as specified. 
3. In a water cut-offi, a distributing or regu 
lating member, consisting of a rocking body 
provided with a main chamber having one 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612353.txt	No. 612,353. 
APPARATUS FOR DRIVING SUBTERRANEAN TUNNELS. 
(Application filed Aug. 10, 1897.) 
W. LAUTER. 
Patented Oct. 1, 1898. 
No ode.) 
 
oats press co, poro-lift:a., wasteron, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILHELM LAUTER, OF FERANKFORT-ON-THE-MAIN, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO 
THE FIRM OF F. C. GILASER, OF BERLIN, GERMANY. 
APPARATUS FOR DRIVING SU BTERRAN EAN UN NES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 612,353, dated October 11, 1898. 
Application filed August 10, 1897, Serial No, 647,741, (No model.) Patened in Germany April 25, 1895, No, 87,157, and 
in England October 4, 1895, No, 8,565, 
I5 Sand and in Soft or aqueous strata. 
The driving forward of the shield, which is 5o 
To all whom it may concern: 
followed by the building in of the tunnel or 
Be it known that I, WILHELMI LAUTER, a 
gallery rings, is effected by the greater air 
Subject of the King of Prussia, German Em 
peror, residing at Frankfort-on-the-Main, in 
pressure existing in the chamber I and by the 
5 the Kingdom of Prussia, Germany, have in 
presses P, which bear on the one hand against 
Vented new and useful Improvements in Ap 
the finished lining of the tunnel and on the 55 
pliances or Apparatus for Driving Subterra 
other hand against the partition N. Com 
nean Tunnels or Galleries, (patented in Ger 
pressed air is introduced into the chamber I 
many April 25, 1895, No. 87,157, and in Eng 
from any suitable source of supply through a 
pipe M', extending through the wall M and 
Io land October 4, 1895, No. 18,565,) of which the 
following is a specification. 
provided at its end with a flap-valve M, which 6o 
This invention relates to appliances or ap 
opens inwardly to the chamber I. In order 
paratus for driving tunnels or galleries, more 
to facilitate the forcing forward of the shield 
particularly applicable for driving in quick 
in curves, the tubular sides thereof are made 
of two parts ID' and D, which fit together, 
with overlapping spherically-shaped surfaces 65 
I will describe the same with reference to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
at U, and are adjusted relatively to each other 
Figure 1 shows a longitudinal section, and 
by the extension or shortening of the screws 
S, connected to both parts, without materially 
Fig. 2 cross-sections, on lines A A and B B. 
narrowing the internal space of the shield or 
2O Fig. 3 is a detail sectional view of the con 
forming external projections which would in- 7o 
nections between the shield-sections. 
It consists of the tubular shield D' D, the 
terfere with the advance thereof. 
rear end of which incloses a short length of 
The excavation of the face of the working 
the lining T of the finished tunnel or gallery, 
is effected by the openings formed in the 
25 while the fore part, which is constructed with 
stepped face K of the shield, which are closed 
a slope, penetrates into the ground. 
by covers, such excavation being effected 75 
The iron lining of the tunnel or gallery 
Solely through the horizontal holes so long as 
there is danger of the compressed air escap 
consists of separate rings T and of outward 
projecting ribs R., arranged between these 
ing; otherwise the excavation is also effected 
through the vertical openings, the air-pres 
3o rings. By means of the saidribs the stiffness 
sure employed being such as to balance the 8o 
Of the tunnel-wall is increased and the rear 
part of the shield-casing is guided, leaving 
counter-pressure exercised by the water or 
annular spaces between the lining T and the 
soil. 
Having now particularly described and as 
shield D', which can be filled up with cement 
35 through the holes O, formed in the rings, so 
certained the nature of this invention and in 
what manner the same is to be performed, I 85 
as to form by these means in a safe manner 
an Outer lining of cement to the tunnel or 
declare that what I claim is 
gallery, The said openings O also enable the 
1. A tunnel-wall comprising rings provided 
With openings extending through their sides 
annular space to be filled up that is left by 
and outwardly-extending ribs intermediate 
4o the tubular shield D' D* as this is driven for 
the rings, substantially as described. 
2. In tunnel-driving apparatus, a tubular 
The shield is divided by the air-tight par 
shield having a stepped end, the steps being 
titionNinto two chambers Iand II, filled with 
compressed air, the outer chamber I being 
provided with openings, and detachable cov 
ers for said openings, substantially as de 
45 inclosed at the rear end by the wall M, fixed 
to the finished tunnel-lining and having an 
scribed. 
3. The combination with a tunnel compris 
air-sluice V, while the other chamber II is 
closed at the front end by the step-shaped 
ing a series of rings and formed with a trans 
Wall K, lying against the face of the working. verse wall, a tubular shield embracing one 
Ward. 
- 
90 
95 
2 
612,353 
end of the tunnel and having a transverse name to this specification in the presence of 
wall, a series of presses intermediate said two subscribing witnesses. 
latter wall and the end of the tunnel, and 
means for introducing compressed air inter. 
5 mediate the Walls of the tunnel and shield, 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
KARL TRIEBER, 
FRANK. H. MASON. 
substantially as described. 
Witnesses: 
WILHELMIAUTER 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612453.txt	No. 62,453. 
J. H. BIRD & G. P. CARROLL. 
CLUTCH SPROCKET. 
(Application filed Oct. 7, 1897.) 
Patented Oct. 18, 1898. 
No Model.) 
 
Af 
cri?is 
S 
1. N. 
AS 
It 
G) 
Sa 
S. 
 
f S. 
z WS 
Wi 
WSN 
W. % N 
W: 
A. W. 
WEN 
WEN 
z - 
WHEN 
, 
  
 
" 
 
 
 
6 
 
a 
WS 
? 
E. 
E. S. 
(i. 
A Wii 
MASS 
MEEN 
8 
.. 
WHEN 
Ky. N I 
Ss 
NE 
 
S 
/ . 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. BIRD AND GEORGE P. CARROLL, OF MANKATO, MINNESOTA. 
CLUTCH-SPROCKET. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 612,458, dated October 18, 1898. 
Application filed October 7, 1897, 
w 
I 
25 
15 
To all whom it naily concern: 
Be it known that we, JAMES H. BIRD and 
GEORGEP. CARROLL, residing at Mankato, in 
the county of Blue Earth and State of Minne 
sota, have invented a new and useful Clutch 
Sprocket, of which the following is a specifi 
cation. 
Our invention relates to sprocket-wheels, 
and more especially to sprocket-wheels for 
bicycles, tricycles, and like vehicles, although 
it is adapted for use with many kinds of driv 
ing-wheels. 
The general object of our invention is to 
furnish means whereby a sprocket or other 
driving wheel will be locked to turn with the 
shaft while power is applied to turn the shaft 
in either direction and free to rotate inde 
pendent of the shaft when the shaft is held 
Stationary. 
A special object of our invention is to pro 
vide means whereby the power applied to the 
cranks of bicycles and analogous vehicles 
will be transmitted to the sprocket-wheels to 
turn them and propel the vehicles; but when 
the cranks are held stationary, preferably 
with one in its lowest and the other in its 
highest position, the cranks and sprocket 
Wheel will be disconnected and the sprocket 
wheel be free to rotate independent of the 
cranks, thus admitting of coasting with the 
feet on the pedals. 
With these objects in view our invention 
consists in a sprocket or other driving wheel 
with clutch mechanism operated from the 
shaft, whereby the power from the shaft will 
be transmitted to the wheel, but when the 
shaft is stopped the wheel will be free to ro 
tate thereon independently. 
Ourinvention further consists in a sprocket 
wheel for bicycles or other vehicles provided 
with one or more clutch-shoes and means 
whereby these shoes will be kept in contact 
with the wheel and the wheel caused to rotate 
with the crank-shaft during such time as the 
rider is either back or forward pedaling, but 
will be free to rotate independently of the 
crank-shaft when the pedals are held sta 
tionary. 
Ourinvention further consists in a sprocket 
So wheel for bicycles or other analogous vehicles, 
formed hollow with a seat on one side to re 
35 
45 
. 
. 
 
55 
65 
75 
Serial No. 654,892, (No model.) 
ceive a disk secured to the crank-shaft and a 
clutch mechanism in the hollow of the wheel 
connected to the disk by means whereby 
when the disk is rotated in the act of pedal 
ing either back or forward the disk and wheel 
will be locked together, such mechanism 
causing the wheel and disk to be disconnected 
when the pedals are held one up and the other 
down. 
Our invention further consists in the in 
proved construction, arrangement, and com 
bination of parts hereinafter fully described, 
and afterward pointed out in the claims. 
In order to enable others skilled in the art 
to which our invention most nearly apper 
tains to make and use the same, We will now 
proceed to describe its construction and oper 
ation, having reference to the accompanying 
drawings, forming part of this specification, 
in which - 
Figure 1 is a perspective view illustrating 
a sprocket-wheel and inclosed clutch mech 
anism. Fig. 2 is a perspective view illustrat 
ing the disk secured to the crank-shaft. Fig. 
3 is a sectional view on the line 33 of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 4 is a sectional view on the line 4 4 of 
Fig. 5, the dust-guards being omitted. Fig. 
5 is a view in side elevation, with the crank 
shaft in section, showing also the dust-guards 
for the slots and the brake-controlling mech 
anism. Fig. 6 is a side elevation illustrating 
the same parts as in Fig. 1, but in a slightly 
modified form. Fig. 7 is a fragmentary de 
tail sectional view on the line 77 of Fig. 5. 
Fig. 8 is a detail perspective view of the dust 
guards for the slots and the brake-controlling 
Like letters of reference mark the same 
parts wherever they occur in the various fig 
ures of the drawings. 
Referring to the drawings by letters, A is 
the web of a sprocket-wheel having its rim B 
projected laterally and forming a hollow in 
which are located two brake or clutch shoes 
C, adapted, when pressed outward, to engage 
frictionally with the interior surface of the 
rim B, the inner surface of the rim and the 
outer surface of the shoes being V-shaped 
to insure close contact and greater friction. 
These shoes Care pivotally connected at their 
ends with toggle-levers DD and D'D', the 
slide. 
. 
95 
Od 
2 
612,453 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
levers DD being pivotally connected at their 
inner ends by pin E and levers D'D' by pin E'. 
F is a disk which is adapted by size and 
shape to fit on the face of the rim B and in 
side of an annular lateral flange G., project 
ing therefrom, in a manner to permit of its 
free rotation independent of the sprocket 
wheel. This disk is Secured to the crank 
shaft H, which when the parts are assembled 
passes through a central opening I in the Web 
A of the sprocket - wheel. In the disk, at 
points diametrically opposite, are two curved 
slots J J' with their ends ranging inward, and 
the pins E and E pass into or through these 
slots and have nuts outside the disk. 
In operation when power is applied to the 
pedals and the crank-shaft turned the disk F 
will be turned with it and the pins E E will 
be forced along in the slots J and J from 
their normal central position therein toward 
the center. This will cause the pairs of tog 
gle-levers DD and D'D' to move toward each 
other at their centers, and thus force the 
shoes C in violent contact with the rim B of 
the wheel, and inasmuch as the force of this 
contact will be increased exactly as the power 
applied to the crank-shaft the wheel and disk 
will be locked together and caused to rotate 
as one single body with the crank - shaft. 
When the pins E E are in their normal cen 
tral position in the slots J J', the pedals will 
be one in its lowest position and the other in 
its highest position, or in any predetermined 
opposite positions in which it may be desired 
to have them, and the wheel will be free to 
turn on the shaft and disk and independently 
therefrom; but as Soon as the pedals are op 
erated in either direction the locking opera 
tion Will take place, as before stated, and the 
wheel, disk, and shaft will move together. 
In order to prevent the entry of dust into 
the interior of the wheel through the slots, 
dust-guards are provided, consisting of in 
verted boxes M of an outline corresponding 
with the slots and secured to the plate F by 
means of screws or rivets N, passing through 
lateral flanges projecting from the boxes and 
lying upon said plate. One end of each of 
these flanges is cut away to admit of the pas 
sage therethrough into the boxes of slide 
plates P, having longitudinal slots Q, through 
which pass bolts R to secure them to the plate 
F, said slots Q being in line with the adja 
cent ends of the slots in the plate F. Within 
the boxes the slide-plates are provided with 
right-angular flanges S, which lie in the path 
of the heads of the bolts or pins EE, where 
by the pins will be stopped when the rider is 
back-pedaling before the brake-shoes are too 
tightly pressed into the V-shaped interior 
surfaces of the rim. 
In Fig. 6 we have illustrated a mechanism 
for carrying out our invention of slightly 
different form. In this construction the slots 
in the disk are omitted and a block or plate 
K secured to the disk at the center, so as to 
Links L are pivotally Con 
turn there with. 
nected at their inner ends with the block K 
and at their outer ends to the pins E E of 
the toggle-levers DD D' D', the parts being 
shown in their normal or inoperative position. 
As soon as the crank-shaft is rotated in either 
direction, carrying the disk and block KWith 
it, the toggle-levers will be pulled toward the 
center and force the shoes into contact With 
the rim of the wheel, with the results before 
described. 
The advantages attending the use of our 
invention are numerous and Will be obvious 
from the foregoing description. While power 
is necessary to propel the wheel, the contact 
is maintained, but whenever the wheel will 
turn of itself the rider can rest with his feet 
on the stationary pedals, thus avoiding the 
necessity of moving them with the pedals 
while they are carried around by the Wheel 
and obviating the necessity of taking the feet 
off the pedals in order to coast. By a back 
Ward pressure on the pedals the brake-shoes 
are forced into the V-shaped grooves in the 
interior of the rim and serve as brakes to 
retard or stop the movement of the wheel. 
While we have illustrated and described 
what we believe to be the best means InOW 
known to us for carrying out our invention, We 
do not wish to be understood as limiting Oul 
selves to the exact construction and arrange 
ment shown and described, but hold that Such 
slight changes and variations as might Sug 
gest themselves to the ordinary mechanic 
would properly fall Within the limit and scope 
of our invention. 
Having thus fully described our invention, 
what we claim as new, and desire to Secure by 
Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination of a hollow Sprocket 
wheel, the shaft upon which it is loosely 
mounted, a disk fixed on the shaft, a plural 
ity of clutch-shoes in the hollow wheel, toggle 
levers connecting the shoes, and connections 
between the disk and toggle-levers whereby 
the turning of the shaft and disk will cause 
the shoes to contact with the wheel and lock 
the wheel, disk and shaft together, substan 
tially as described. 
2. The combination of a hollow sprocket 
wheel, the shaft upon which it is loosely 
mounted, a disk fixed on the shaft, a plural 
ity of clutch-shoes in the hollow wheel, toggle 
levers connecting the shoes, the pins by which 
the pairs of toggle-levers are centrally con 
nected, the disk being provided with V-shaped 
grooves in which said pins operate, and ad 
justable slides for limiting the movement of 
the pins in said slots, substantially as de 
scribed. 
-3. The combination of the shaft with the 
Sprocket-wheel made hollow and mounted 
loosely thereon, a disk fixed on the shaft and 
provided with W-shaped slots, a plurality of 
clutch-shoes in the hollow wheel, toggle-le 
vers connecting the shoes, pins by which the 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
612,453 
8 
pairs of toggle-levers are centrally connected, gle-levers connecting the shoes, and pins by 
operating in Said grooves, dust-guards over which the pairs of toggle-levers are centrally 
said slots having flanges and connecting- connected, the disk being provided with V 
screws, and adjustable slides Working through shaped grooves in which said pins operate, 
5 said flanges for limiting the movement of the substantially as and for the purpose set forth. 15 
pins in the slots, substantially as described. 
4. The combination of a hollow sprocket- 
wheel, the shaft upon which it is loosely 
mounted, a disk fixed on the shaft, a plural- 
Io ity of clutch-shoes in the hollow wheel, tog- 
JAMES H. BIRD. 
GEORGE P. CARROLL. 
Witnesses: 
JEAN A. FLITTIE, 
JESSIE BEQUETTE. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612553.txt	UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
a. 
mm-m-m-m-www.w 
JOHN H. STEVENS, OF NEWARK, NEWJERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE CELLULOID 
COMPANY, OF NEW YORK, N.Y., A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY. 
WATER PRO OF FABRC. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 612,553, dated October 18, 1898. 
Application filed April 15, 1898, Serial No. 677,675. (No specimens.) 
To all, whon, it may concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN H. STEVENS, of 
the city of Newark, county of Essex, and State 
of New Jersey, have invented certain new and 
5 useful Improvements in Waterproof Fabrics, 
of which the following is a specification. 
Fabrics such as cloth, felt, and paper have 
been coated or saturated with pyroxylin so 
lutions for the purpose of making them wa 
Io terproof. Such solutions generally contain 
oils. . The non-drying oils turn rancid in the 
course of time, which gives these fabrics a 
disagreeable odor and to a large extent affects 
the strength. The most prominent non-dry 
I5 ing oil used for the purpose has been castor 
oil. I have improved these waterproof fab 
rics by the introduction of certain new ele 
ments into the combinations, by means of 
which I secure a waterproof fabric in which 
2O the tendency of the oils to turn rancid is 
largely diminished. As a consequence my 
fabrics have a less disagreeable odor and are 
more durable. I accomplish this by com 
bining my Waterproofing Solutions with com 
25 pounds or salts containing what may be 
termed the radical CHO of phenol, 
(CHOH.) 
I find that phenol itself (carbolic acid) pos 
sesses many objectionable properties as an 
3o ingredient in Waterproofing solutions, but 
that salts of compound acids containing the 
phenoylic radical CHO or compounds of the 
phenoylic radical with bases can be used with 
success. These compounds of the phenoylic 
35 radical With bases are sometimes called salts 
of carbolic acid. 
The Sulfocarbolates and carbolates are the 
best to use. I have met with success in using 
Sulfocarbolate of soda, for instance, in my 
As an example of a waterproofing solution 
for use in making my compound fabric I 
would recommend the following: pyroxylin, 
One hundred parts; castor-oil, one hundred 
45 and fifty parts; camphor, one hundred and 
fifty parts; sulfocarbolate of soda, four parts, 
and Wood-spirit sufficient to make a solution 
which can be spread. The nature of the pe 
culiar decomposition to which these oils are 
So subject and which results in rancidity has 
not been understood by chemists. It is not 
clearly known, for instance, that an antisep 
4o mixtures. 
tic substance would operate to retard such 
decomposition. I have discovered, however, 
that this is a fact and that the rancidity of 55 
castor-oil, for instance, is probably due to the 
same causes which generally operate to de 
compose organic matter. 
While the term antiseptic is a somewhat 
general One, nevertheless it is perfectly un- 6o 
derstood by chemists and others, and the an 
tiseptic properties of substances are also Well 
known. Consequently the operatoris already 
sufficiently informed as to the antiseptic value 
of the different compounds containing the 65 
phenoylic radical, and it is therefore unnec 
essary for me to give any further description 
in order to enable him to practically use this 
invention. 
Above all, I would recommend the sulfo- 7o 
carbolate of soda; but there are other salts 
and compounds from which the operator may 
Select. I prefer to select an antiseptic Salt 
or compound which is soluble in the solvent 
employed-say in wood - spirit-although 75 
while this gives the best effects it is not abso 
lutely necessary, because antiseptic salts or 
compounds can be thoroughly ground with the 
oil in a paint-mill or otherwise. The propor 
tions also will vary according to the circum- 8o 
stances-such as the amount of oil, the ex 
pected conditions of rancidity, the strength 
of the antiseptic used, &c.; but in general 
the proportions will be, say, from two to five 
parts, by Weight, of the antiseptic to each one 85 
hundred parts of pyroxylin. 
Having fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
nated with a pyroxylin compound consisting 
in part of a non-drying oil and a salt or com 
pound containing the phenoylic radical sub 
stantially as described. 
nated with a pyroxylin compound consisting 
in part of castor-oil and a salt or compound 
containing the phenoylic radical substantially 
as described. 
2. A waterproof fabric coated or impreg- 95 
1. A waterproof fabric coated or impreg- 9o 
JOHN II. STEVENS. 
Witnesses: 
ABRAHAM MANNERS, 
JAMES W. SCOTT. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612653.txt	No. 62,653. 
Patented Oct. 18, 1898. 
APPARATUS FOR LUBRICATING AND COOLING JOURNALS. 
L. C. WITKOWSKI. 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
(Application filed Jan. 13, 1898. ) 
f 
2 
al 
SY2Y 
WNa. 
7 
ESW, 2 
2, 3 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
WTNESSES 
 
 
2% 2 2 
 
- 
NVENTOR 
k62 (22% 22 
No. 62,653. 
APPARATUS FOR LUBRICATING AND COOING JOURNAS. 
(Application filed Jan 18, 1898. 
... C. WITKOWSK. 
Patented Oct. 8, 1898. 
(No Model.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
  
   
 
 
 
 
PN N 
22%22,22%2. 
re 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LOUIS C. WITIKOWSKI, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
APPARATUS FOR LUBRICATING AND COOLNG JOURNALS, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 612,653, dated October 18, 1898. 
Application filed January 13, 1898, Serial No. 666,538, (No model.) 
To atta, whon, it nagy conce77: 
Be it known that I, LOUIS C.WITKOWSKI, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Washington, in the District of Columbia, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Apparatus for Lubricating and 
Cooling Journals; and I do hereby declare the 
following to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
devices for cooling and lubricating journal 
bearings, and while it is applicable to all styles 
of journal-bearings, yet it is more particu 
larly adapted to car-journal bearings. 
It consists in providing an apparatus for lu 
bricating and cooling journals having a suit 
able reservoir for containing a cooling and 
lubricating agent, said reservoir being pro 
vided with a discharge-passage, a fuse-carrier. 
independent of said reservoir, and a remov 
able fuse-plug adapted to close the discharge 
passage, the fuse-carrier being adapted to be 
withdrawn and a new fuse inserted. 
It also consists, in a device for cooling and 
lubricating journals or bearings, in the com 
bination, with a suitable supporting means, of 
a flexible receptacle and means mounted in 
teriorly of the said receptacle for preventing 
the collapsing of the same, the construction 
being such that the said receptacle will not 
be broken by means of the parts with which 
it comes in contact. 
It further consists in providing a journal 
box with a suitable receptacle for holding a 
cooling and lubricating substance, the said 
receptacle having an outlet leading to the 
journal-bearings and a removable slide form 
ing a fuse-carrier, the said slide being adapted 
to hold a series of fuses for regulating the 
flow of the cooling and lubricating substance 
through a series of channels to the bearing 
surfaces. 
It further consists in certain other novel con 
structions, combinations, and arrangements 
of parts, as will be hereinafter more fully de 
scribed and claimed, 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1. 
represents a vertical central section through 
a journal-box, showing my improved lubricat 
ing and cooling mechanism applied thereto. 
. 
. 
. 
. 
Fig. 2 represents a detail sectional view simi 
lar to Fig. 1, but showing a little different ar 
rangement of the parts which constitute the 
receptacle for containing the lubricant, Fig. 
3 represents a similar detail view showing a 
receptacle with a different kind of cover. 
Fig. 4 represents a ton plan view of the same; 
Fig. 5, a side elevation of the top portion of 
the lubricant-holding receptacle. Fig. 6 rep 
resents an inverted plan view of the wedge 
or key employed for holding the frictional 
bearing or brass in place on the bearing and 
showing the outlet from the lubricating-re 
ceptacle and the channel formed on the un 
der side of the said wedge; and Fig. 7 repre 
sents a top plan view of a similar wedge, but 
showing the construction of the Wedge as used 
in Fig. 2. 
A in the drawings represents a journal-box; 
B, a key plate or Wedge; C, a bearing-plate, 
and D a receptacle for holding a lubricating 
and cooling substance. 
While I desire it to be understood that my 
improved cooling and lubricating device is 
applicable and useful with respect to all kinds 
of journal-bearings, yet it is particularly well 
adapted for use upon car-journals, and for 
the sake of setting forth my invention Ihave 
illustrated the same in the drawings as ap 
plied to car-journals. 
* As shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings, my in 
vention is adapted to be applied to standard 
journal boxes and bearings now in use with 
out appreciably changing the same. The top 
of the journal-box A is provided with an open 
ing or orifice, as at a, in which is inserted my 
improved receptacle D for containing a suit 
able lubricant. The receptacle D is prefer 
ably cylindrical in shape and extends down 
wardly below the top of the box and into the 
wedge B, a recess or socket similar to the ap 
erture a being provided with the said wedge. 
In journal-bearings of this character the 
movement of the car, especially in rounding 
curves and in passing over uneven places, 
causes more or less play between the key or 
wedge B and the journal-box A. For this 
reason, although a rigid receptacle may be 
used, yet I prefer to employ one which is 
flexible and more or less yielding, so that al 
lowance will be made for any movement of 
the parts. In practice. I prefer to construct 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
IOd 
h 
 
 
2 
612,653 
75. 
the receptacle of cloth or canvas, the same 
being held in a distended position by means 
of internal rings or similar devices. 
As shown in Fig. 1 of the drawings, the 
cloth-receptacle D is held distended by means 
of a spiral spring, as d, which preferably ex 
tends from top to bottom to stiffen the flexi 
ble receptacle. The lower end of the recep 
tacle D rests upon the bottom of the socket 
Ct', the said socket not extending entirely 
through the key or wedge B and being pro 
vided at one side with an opening, as b, which 
communicates with a groove or channel, as b', 
formed in the under surface of the said wedge. 
This channel b' is preferably made to extend 
for nearly the entire length of the wedge and 
is adapted to cover vertical passages or holes, 
as cc, formed in the bearing piece or brass C. 
While only one of these apertures c may be 
used, yet in order to distribute the lubricant 
more effectively upon the bearing I prefer to 
use two or more of these holes, there being 
three illustrated in the drawings. In order to 
control the discharge of the lubricating sub 
stance from the receptacle D through these ap 
ertures, I mount a fuse-carrier, as E, prefer 
ably in the bearing-piece C, a groove being 
formed in the upper surface thereof to receive 
the same. This carrier E is preferably con 
structed in the form of an elongated plate or 
slide and provided with one or more apertures, 
as ele, which are adapted to coincide with the 
apertures cin the bearing-piece when the parts 
are in place. The upperportion of the said ap 
ertures eare provided with a countersunkpor 
tion, as e'e', which is adapted to receive a fuse, 
as e. The fuses eare preferably thin disks of 
fusible metal and may be constructed so as to 
fuse at any desired degree of heat, so that the 
journal-bearings attaining that degree of heat 
or a greater degree the fuses will melt and per 
mit the cooling and lubricating material to 
flow upon the bearing-surfaces. The outer 
end of the fuse-carrier E extends beyond the 
end of the journal-bearings and is within easy 
reach when the lid of the journal-box is raised, 
so that it may be taken out or put in place, 
as desired. 
The top of the receptacle D is closed by 
means of a cap or cover, as F, which is pro 
vided with a downwardly-extending annular 
flange, as f, having screw-threads upon its 
outer periphery adapted to engage corre 
sponding screw-threads formed in the jour 
nal-box, as at f'. The flange fis preferably 
made a little larger than the receptacle D, so 
as not to bear upon the same when the parts 
are assembled. In order to prevent the cap F 
from jarring loose and becoming unscrewed 
by the jolting of the car, it is provided with 
a laterally-extending flange, as f', which is 
provided with an aperture, as f. A cotter 
pin, as f", may be inserted through this aper 
ture, one end of the said cotter-pin being made 
longer than the other and extending down 
wardly, so as to engage a socket or recess, as 
f, formed in the top of the journal-box A. 
The shorter end of the cotter-pin will be free 
to spring out, so as to lock the same in place 
in the usual and well-known manner. 
In order to prevent the fuse-carrier Efrom 
jarring out of place, I prefer to locate a ver 
tical rod, as g, preferably interiorly of the re 
ceptacle D at the lower end of the said rod, 
extending downwardly and through an aper 
ture in the wedge B and engaging a socket 
or aperture, as e, in the fuse-carrier E and 
thereby locking the same in place. The rod 
g is surrounded near its lower portion by a 
coil-spring, asg', which at one end rests upon 
the bottom of the recess or socket a formed 
in the wedge B. The upper end of the said 
spring bears against a pin or shoulder, asg', 
formed upon the rod g, the construction be 
ing such that the spring normally tends to 
hold the rod in its highest position. The 
upper end of the rod extends above the recep 
tacle D, and when the cover F is screwed into 
place it will bear against the upper end of the 
rod g and force the said rod g downwardly, 
so as to engage the aperture e' in the fuse 
carrier. It will be apparent from this con 
struction that when the receptacle is filled 
with lubricating and cooling material and the 
cover is screwed in place that the fuse-carrier 
will be locked against accidental or other re 
moval. Upon the box becoming empty the 
cap F may be removed to refill it, the spring 
g' at the same time operating to lift the rodg 
and permit the withdrawal of the fuse-carrier 
E, so that new fuses may be inserted in the 
countersinks e'. 
I preferably mount in the receptacle D an 
indicator, as d", which is provided at its lower 
end with a disk, as d, which rests upon the 
lubricant in the said receptacle. A rod ex 
tends from the said disk upwardly through 
the cover F and is provided with a target or 
other suitable indicator on its upper end. It 
will be apparent that when the receptacle is 
full of lubricant the indicator will be held up 
and show that the said receptacle is full; but 
when the lubricating substance has been dis 
charged upon the bearing the indicator will 
be allowed to fall and the target will therefore 
show that the receptacle needs refilling. 
As illustrated in Fig. 1 of the drawings, my 
invention is shown as applied to a standard 
journal-box for cars of comparatively heavy 
Weight. In applying my invention to jour 
nal-boxes for cars of light capacity it may 
be desirable to slightly change the construc 
tion of the same, especially as the wedge or 
key used in the said latter journal-boxes does 
not extend out so far toward the end of the 
car-axle as those used in the boxes for cars 
of heavier capacity. As illustrated in Fig. 
2 of the drawings, a flexible receptacle His 
mounted in an aperture formed in the top of 
the journal-box, the lower end of the said re 
ceptacle extending below the top portion of 
the said box and into a socket formed in the 
wedge I. As this socket comes in the for 
ward edge of the wedge I, as illustrated in 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
13o 
O 
25 
45 
So 
55 
65 
 
612,653 
3. 
O 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
Fig. 7 of the drawings, the lower end of the 
receptacle H is preferably provided with a 
...rigid bottom portion or cup, as h, provided 
with an annular seat, as h", to receive the 
lower end of the flexible receptacle H. In 
order to prevent any displacement of the 
lower edge of the said receptacle, one or more 
lugs, as h, are formed interiorly of the said 
cup h and extend upwardly a short distance 
interiorly of the receptacle H. A discharge 
aperture, as h, is formed in the said cup h, 
which communicates with a channel i, similar 
to the channel b' above described. A fuse 
carrier, as J, is also provided, which is adapt 
ed to extend beneath the cup II and to regu 
late the flow of the lubricant from the chan 
nel in the same manner as above described. 
In order to lock the slide or fuse-carrier J in 
place, a notch, as?i, may be provided in the 
bearing-piece C, which is adapted to be en 
gaged by a lug, asi", formed upon the under 
surface of the fuse-carrier J. When it is 
desired to withdraw the fuse-carrier J, it is 
merely necessary to spring the outer end 
thereof upwardly sufficiently to disengage 
the lug and notch. 
In connection with my improved indicator 
I contemplate using an alarm mechanism, as 
illustrated in Fig. 2 of the drawings. In 
this construction a bell or sounding-piece, as 
K, is mounted upon the cover and a striker, 
as k, is mounted in close proximity to the 
same, one end of the said striker extending 
into the path of a projection or lug, as k", 
formed upon the indicator le. As the indi 
cator descends upon the lubricant passing 
out of the receptacle EI the lug or projection 
k' will bear the end of the striker k down 
wardly until it slips past the same, when the 
other end will drop again and strike the bell 
K. This form of device is particularly well 
adapted for use in journals which are located 
in engine-rooms or machine-shops, and can 
be more distinctly heard than would be pos 
sible upon a railway-car. 
As illustrated in Figs. 3, 4, and 5 of the 
drawings, the capacity of the receptacle for 
holding the lubricant may be increased by 
casting a raised portion upon the top of the 
journal-box, as at m. This permits of the 
receptacle being made longer, and more lu 
bricant can therefore be carried therein. 
The upper end of the receptacle is closed by 
a cover M, which screws into the raised por 
tion n. In order to hold the same from un 
screwing, the cover M may be made with 
many sides, it being illustrated in Figs. 4 and 
5 as having eight sides. Projections or lugs 
m" are formed upon the portion in of the jour 
mal-box and are adapted to receive a pin, as 
m, which when put in place will extend along 
one side of the cover M, so that the said cover 
cannot be turned when the pin is in place. . 
The pin may be held from displacement by 
means of a cotter-pin, as n. 
From the above description, it will be noted 
that by providing the lubricating and cool 
ing device with several outlets leading to the 
journal-surfaces at different points if the 
axle or journal becomes heated at one end 
of the bearing, the fuse at that end might 
melt and the bearing be cooled without melt 
ing the other fuses and without discharging 
all of the lubricant. So it will appear that in 
case the whole journal becomes unduly heat 
ed, all the fuses will be melted and the lubri 
cating and cooling substance will be evenly 
distributed along the entire surface of the 
bearing. By the construction of my device 
also the condition of the material in the box 
is readily seen at a glance at the indicator 
and the cover can be quickly removed and 
new lubricant put in place and the slide or 
fuse-carrier can be quickly withdrawn and 
new fuses located therein as may be required. 
While I have described my improved re 
ceptacle for holding lubricant as made of any 
suitable flexible material, such as cloth or 
canvas or like substance, yet I wish to be un 
derstood as constructing the same in such a 
manner as to be impervious to liquids, so that 
where oil or grease is used in the same it will 
not leak out and escape through the walls of 
the said receptacle. Of course it will be ap 
parent that it may be constructed of rubber: 
cloth or any other liquid-proof material. 
In regard to the fuse-carrier or slide I de 
sire to call attention to the fact that I do not 
wish to limit myself to placing the same in a 
groove or slot formed in the bearing or brass 
of the car-journal, as it will be apparent that 
the groove or slot to receive the same might 
be formed in the Wedge or key without de 
parting in the least from the spirit of my in 
. 
vention. 
Having now described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In an apparatus for lubricating and cool 
ing journals, the combination of a suitable 
reservoir for containing a cooling or lubri 
cating agent, having a discharge-passage, a 
fuse-carrier independent of the said reservoir 
and a removable fuse-plug adapted to close 
the discharge-passage, the fuse-carrier being 
adapted to be Withdrawn and a new fuse in 
serted, substantially as described. 
2. In an apparatus for lubricating and cool 
ing journals, the combination with a journal 
or bearing, of a suitable reservoir for con 
taining a cooling or lubricating agent, having 
a discharge-passage, and a fuse-carrier inde 
pendent of said reservoir, a plurality of fuse 
plugs adapted to close the discharge-passage, 
the fuse-carrier being adapted to be with 
dra Win and a new series of fuses inserted and 
when in place to distribute the lubricant at 
different points along the journal or bearin 
substantially as described. 
3. In an apparatus for lubricating and cool 
ring journals, the combination with a suitable 
receptacle for holding a cooling and lubri 
cating substance, of a fuse-carrier independ 
ent of the said reservoir, adapted to control the 
so 
* 
- 
- 
r 
75 
95 
CO 
IO 
I 25 
 
4. 
612,653 
55 
 
O 
25 
35 
45 
discharge of the said substance from the same, 
fusible plugs mounted in the said carrier and 
means for holding the said carrier in position 
whereby it will not accidentally get out of 
place, substantially as described. 
4. In an apparatus for lubricating and cool 
ing journals the combination with a reservoir 
for containing a cooling and lubricating agent 
having a discharge-passage, of a removable 
slide forming a fuse-carrier, and removable 
fuse-plugs adapted to be carried by the said 
slide for regulating the discharge of the lu 
bricant, substantially as described. 
5. In an apparatus for lubricating and cool 
ing journals, the combination with a journal 
box provided with a suitable opening, of a 
flexible receptacle suspended therein and 
adapted to contain a suitable cooling and lu 
bricating material, the said flexible receptacle 
extending through the key of the bearing, 
and means for regulating the discharge of the 
lubricating substance from the lower end of 
the said receptacle, substantially as described. 
6. In an apparatus for lubricating and cool 
ing journals, the combination with a journal 
box, of a flexible receptacle suspended ver 
tically in said journal-box, rings mounted in 
teriorly thereof to hold the said receptacle 
from collapsing, the lower end of the said re 
ceptacle being adapted to discharge a lubri 
cating substance upon the bearing, and means 
for controlling the Said discharge, substan 
tially as described. 
7. In a device for lubricating and cooling 
journals, the combination with a receptacle 
for holding a lubricating substance, and an 
indicator mounted in the said receptacle, of 
a slide forming a fuse-carrier and fuse-plugs 
adapted to be removed bodily, if desired, car 
ried by the said fuse-carrier, the construction 
being such that the fuse-plugs may be made 
to regulate the discharge of the lubricant, 
substantially as described. 
8. A device for lubricating and cooling jour 
nals, comprising a suitable receptacle for 
holding the lubricant, an indicator adapted 
to rest upon the said lubricant and having a 
shank extending up through the cover there 
of, an alarm mounted upon the cover of the 
said receptacle, and a striker adapted to en 
gage the said alarm, and means upon the 
shank of the indicator adapted to operate the 
striker when the lubricant passes out of the 
receptacle for calling attention to the empty 
ing of the said receptacle, substantially as 
described. 
9. In a device for cooling and lubricating 
journals, the combination with a bearing, of 
a key for holding the same in place, a recep 
tacle mounted in the journal-box and extend 
ing into the said key, and means for regulat 
ing and directing the discharge of the mate 
rial in the said receptacle to the journal-bear 
ing, the construction being such that allow 
ance is made for any movement of the key 
with relation to the other parts by means of 
the flexible walls of the said receptacle, sub 
stantially as described. 
10. In a device for cooling journals, the com 
bination with a journal-box, of a receptacle 
for holding a cooling or lubricating substance, 
a bearing mounted on the journal, a key for 
holding the said bearing in place, the said 
key being provided with a channel for direct 
ing the lubricating substance to the bearing, 
the said bearing being provided with one or 
more apertures for directing the lubricating 
substance to the bearing and means for con 
trolling the discharge through the said aper 
tures, substantially as described. 
11. In a device for cooling and lubricating 
journal-bearings the combination with a suit 
able receptacle mounted in the journal-box, 
a bearing mounted upon said journal, a key 
for holding the said bearing in place, said key 
being provided with a groove for directing 
the said lubricating and cooling material to 
the bearing, the said bearing being provided 
with one or more openings, a fuse-plug car 
rier mounted in a slide in the said bearing 
and provided with apertures adapted to coin 
cide with the apertures or openings formed 
in the said bearing, fuse-plugs mounted in 
the apertures in the said carrier for closing 
them, the construction being such that upon 
the bearings becoming heated the fuse-plugs 
will melt and permit the cooling and lubri 
cating substance to flow upon the bearing 
surface, substantially as described. 
12. In a device for cooling and lubricating 
journal-bearings the combination with a suit 
able receptacle, of a cap for closing the same, 
a cotter-pin adapted to pass through an aper 
ture in the said cover, one leg of the said pin 
being extended beyond the other and adapted 
to engage an aperture formed in the box, the 
construction being such that the extended 
leg will prevent the accidental removal of the 
cover, substantially as described. 
13. In a device for cooling and lubricating 
journal-bearings the combination with a re 
ceptacle for holding a cooling and lubricating 
substance, of a fuse-carrier adapted to regu 
late the discharge of the said cooling and lu 
bricating substance, a pin mounted in the 
journal-box and adapted to extend through 
and engage an aperture formed in the said 
fuse-carrier, the construction being such that 
the fuse-carrier cannot be accidentally re 
moved from place, substantially as described. 
14. In a device for cooling and lubricating 
journal-bearings the combination with a suit 
able receptacle, of a many-sided cover adapt 
ed to be screwed thereon, a pin adapted to 
engage lugs formed upon the journal-box, the 
said pin also engaging one of the sides of the 
cover whereby it is prevented from unscrew 
ing, substantially as described. 
15. In a device for cooling and lubricating 
journals, the combination with a suitable re 
ceptacle for holding a cooling or lubricating 
substance, of a slide carrying fuse-plugs for 
o 
75 
95 
IOC 
IO 
II5 
I25 
612,653 
s 
O 
regulating the discharge of the said substance 
from the said receptacle, a pin adapted to ex 
tend downwardly through the said receptacle 
and engage an aperture formed in the said 
slide for preventing the accidental removal 
thereof, substantially as described. 
16. In a device for cooling and lubricating 
journals, the combination of a receptacle for 
holding a lubricating substance, a bearing 
piece for engaging the journal, a key for hold 
ing the said bearing-piece in place, said key 
being provided with an aperture, a support 
ing-cup for holding the lower end of the re 
ceptacle in position, the said cup being adapt 
ed to be fitted into said aperture formed in 
the key, the construction of the part being 
such that the base will be locked into position 
in the said key, substantially as described. 
17. In a device for cooling and lubricating 
journals, the combination of a receptacle for 
s 
holding a lubricating Substance, a bearing 
piece for engaging the journal, a key for hold 
ing the said bearing-piece in place, said key 
being provided with an aperture, a support 
ing-cup for holding the lower end of the re 
ceptacle in position, internal lugs in the said 
cup portion for holding the lower end of the 
said receptacle against accidental displace 
ment, the said cup being adapted to be fitted 
into said aperture formed in the key, the con 
struction of the parts being such that the cup 
will be locked into position in the said key, 
substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I hereunto affix my 
signature in presence of two witnesses. 
25 
LOUIS C. WITKOWSKI. 
Witnesses: 
EDWARD T. FEN WICK, 
JOHN I. FLETCHER. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612753.txt	No. 62,753. 
J. H. NEEDELS. 
Patented Oct. 18, 1898. 
ACETYLENE GAS GENERATOR. 
iApplication filed Dec. 31, 1897.) 
 
(No Model.) 
2. Sheets-Sheet 
N 
S9, 
R. 
S 
R 
NS 
 
S 
S2) 
  
&44.4%lvi. 
&lthots cro 
No. 612,753. 
(No Model.) 
J. H. NEEDES. 
Patented Oct. 18, 1898. 
A CETYLENE. GAS GENERATOR. 
{Application filed Dec. 31, 1897. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2 
S N SS S2 
 
Z. 
 
 
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz-z-z-z-z-z-z-z-z-z, 
Gay S 
axy 
N 
(it 
elitov1c go 
the Norris PETERS co, Photo-Litho, washington. . 
. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES H. NEEDELS, OF ATLANTA, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-THIRD TO 
G. C. HAYS, OF WILLIAMSPORT, OHIO. 
ACETYLENE-GAS GENERATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 612,753, dated October 18, 1898. 
Application filed December 31, 1897. Serial No. 665,085. (No model.) 
O 
15 
3O 
35 
40 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JAMES H. NEEDELS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at At 
lanta, in the county of Pickaway and State 
of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Acetylene-Gas Genera 
tors, of which the following is a specification, 
reference being had therein to the accompa 
nying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view of the 
complete apparatus. Eig. 2 is a cross-sec 
tional view of one of the generator -tanks, 
taken on line 22 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a sec 
tional view of a modification of the bottom of 
the generator-tank; Fig. 4, a vertical section 
showing a modified form of the apparatus. 
This invention relates to an improved ap 
paratus for generating gas from calcium car 
bid; and it has for its main objects to pro 
vide means for recharging the generators and 
for cleaning the refuse from them without 
stopping the generation of the gas, and also 
to provide means for maintaining a substan 
tially uniform pressure upon the gas through 
out the process of generation. 
Other objects and advantages of the inven 
tion will hereinafter appear. 
The invention consists in the novel combi 
nation and arrangement of parts hereinafter 
more fully described, and particularly point 
ed out in the claims. 
Referring to the parts by numerals, 11 des 
ignate two generators, and 2 the gasometer 
located between them. The generators are 
alike in their construction, and a description 
of one will therefore suffice. Each of these 
generators consists of a water-tank 3, which 
is formed with an inverted conical bottom 4, 
and a drain-pipe 5, which is connected to the 
apex of said bottom and is provided with a 
suitable valve 6. 
Within this tank is the 
holder 7, which is open at its lower end and 
closed at its upper end. Secured to the cen 
ter of the top of this holder is the charging 
mechanism, which consists of a Vertical cy 
lindrical basket 8, somewhat smaller in di 
ameter than the holder and extending a suit 
able distance into the same. The lower end 
of this cylinder is open and is provided with 
a wire screen 9. Extending outward and up 
ward from the lower edge of this cylinder are 
short tubes 10, whose inner ends communi 
cate with the interior of cylinder 8, their outer 
and upper ends opening into the space be 
tween the cylinder 8 and the walls of the 
holder. Projecting upward from the top of 
cylinder 8 is a smaller charging-cylinder 11, 
whose upper end is closed by a gas-tight 
cover 12. The lower end of cylinder 11 opens 
into the cylinder 8 and is closed by a swing 
ing valve 13. This valve may be opened and 
closed by means of a rod 14, which extends 
through the wall of the cylinder 8 above the 
holder 7, its inner end being connected to the 
valve by a link15. This rod is screw-thread 
ed through a suitable box and is connected 
to the link 15 by any suitable universal joint 
to permit of screwing the valve tight, Mount 
ed in the lower end of the holder is a revolv 
ing pan. 16, which is rotated by means of a 
rod 17, connected to a crank 18, secured to 
one of the pivots of the pan. Rod 17 is pro 
vided with a lug 19, which rests on a support 
20, carried by the holder, when the pain is in 
its horizontal position, as shown on the left 
in Fig. 1. Secured within the holder above 
the pan is a deflector 21, which directs the 
slaked carbid into the pan. 16. 
The gasometer consists of a tank having 
double walls 22 22, which form a chamber in 
which water or other sealing liquid is con 
tained. Within the inner tank porous ma 
terial 23, such as charcoal or other suitable 
purifying agent, is placed, said material fill 
ing the upper part of the tank and arranged 
to leave a space 24 below it. The movable 
section or bell 25 of the gasometer fits in the 
space between the double Walls and is pro 
vided with suitable counterbalancing-Weights 
26. Below the gasometerisarranged a water 
chamber 27, within which are arranged two 
coils 28 of the gas-pipes 29. These gas-pipes 
extend down through the water-tanks of the 
generators from the gas-space thereof and 
are then formed into the coils 28, and from 
these coils they extend up through the porous 
material to the gas-space formed by the mov 
able portion of the gasometer. 
Between the 
Water-tank 27 and the generators each of the 
pipes is provided with two valves 30, and be 
tween these pipes a drip-box 31 is connected 
to said pipe, a valve 31 being provided to 
55 
75 
95 
Od 
45 
 
612,753 
S 
2. 
30 
35 
40 
45 
50 
55 
cut this box off from communication with said 
plpe. 
Extending upward from the top of the mov 
able part of the gasometer is an upright 32, 
which carries a horizontal arm 33. To the 
outer ends of this arm are secured Vertical 
sleeves 34, provided with clamping-screWS 35. 
Fitting within these sleeves and adjustably 
connected thereto by means of the screw's 35 
are vertical rods 36, which are secured to and 
support the holders 7. By means of this ar 
rangement the holders are adjustably con 
nected to the movable section of the gasome 
ter and move with it, whereby a uniform gas 
pressure is maintained through the apparatus. 
Suitable pipes 37 are connected to the Val 
rious water-spaces to enable said spaces to 
be filled, and a pipe 38 is connected to space 
24 to draw the gas therefrom for consumption. 
The operation is as follows: The water 
chambers are filled and the carbid is placed 
in the charging-cylinders 11 and their tops se 
cured in position. Valves 13 are then opened, 
depositing the charges upon the gauze bot 
toms of the cylindrical baskets 8. When the 
carbid contacts with the water, gas is gener 
ated and the bells of the generators and gas 
ometer are raised, thereby lifting the baskets 
out of the water. The slaked carbid drops 
through the wire-gauze and is directed by 
the deflectors into the pans 16. The advan 
tage of these pans carried by the holders is 
that the slaked carbid continues to act as a 
Weight for the holders,and therefore the pres 
sure on the gas in the holders is maintained 
substantially uniform instead of growing less 
and less as the operation of generating pro 
ceeds. This is important when a large ap 
paratus suitable for lighting a town is in use. 
When the charges have been deposited in the 
baskets, the valves are tightly closed. This, 
together with the gas-tight covers 12, prevents 
the damp gas traveling upward through the 
unslaked carbid and partially slaking it. 
The object of the tubes 10 is to permit the 
escape of gas which is generated within the 
baskets just above the gauze to escape into 
the space surrounding said baskets, and they 
are inclined to enable this gas to escape when 
the gauze is below the Water in the water 
tank. They are carried upward a sufficient 
distance to prevent their outer ends from be 
ing submerged. The gas generated in the 
holders passes down pipe 29 and through the 
coils 28, where it is cooled, and thence up into 
the upperspace of the gasometer. From here 
it passes down through the porous material, 
by which it is dried and purified, and enters 
the space 24. From this space it is led off to 
be consumed. By means of the drip-boxes 
the pipes 29 may be drained of Water of con 
densation. When all the carbid in the baskets 
has been slaked and has fallen into pans 16, a 
new charge is placed in the charging-cylin 
ders 11, as shown on the right in Fig. 1, and 
then pans 16 are revolved or upset sufficiently 
to deposit their contents in the bottoms of the 
tanks, from which it may be drawn through 
pipes 5. 
In Fig. 3 the conical bottom of the genel 
ator water - tank communicates through an 
opening 40 with a closed conical chamber 41, 
which is provided with a valved outlet-pipe 
42. The opening 40 is provided with a valve 
43, which is operated by a rod 44 and a con 
nected lever 45. By means of this a single 
generator may be used, and it may be cleaned 
and recharged without stopping the operation 
of the apparatus. In this construction the 
contents of pan 16, after being deposited in 
the bottom of the tank, are first drawn into 
chamber 41 and valve 43 then closed. From 
chamber 41 it may then be removed without 
disturbing the action of the generator. This 
construction may be used in the apparatus 
shown in Fig. 1 if it be desired. 
When it is desired to use the apparatus for 
a domestic or single-house service, the bottom 
4 of the water-tank and chamber 41 is in 
closed by a tank 46, and the chamber thus 
formed filled with porous material 47, leaving 
a gas-space 4S below said material. Opening 
into this space is a gas-pipe 49, Which extends 
into a water-chamber 50 and is formed therein 
into a coil, and from there extends outward 
to conduct the gas to the point of consump 
tion. 
In Fig. 4 is shown another form of the ap 
paratus adapted for domestic service. In this 
construction the water-tank is formed with 
double walls, between which works the mov 
able section carrying the charging mechan 
ism. Within the tank formed by the inner 
wall of the water-tank is placed a water-re 
ceptacle 55, which is formed with a conical 
bottom 56. This receptacle empties into a 
receptacle 57 through a valved opening 58. 
This latter receptacle is discharged in the 
same manner as receptacle 41. (Shown in Fig. 
3.) The revolving panis carried by the holder 
or movable section by means of depending 
rods 59, which are secured to the top of the 
movable section, and the operating-rod for 
said pan is carried through the top of the 
holder, as shown. The deflector is also car 
ried by rods 59. The space between the re 
ceptacle 55 and the inner wall of the water 
tank is filled with porous material, and the 
gas is led from this space through a pipe 60 
at the bottom of the tank. The advantage 
of this construction is that the Water which 
comes into contact with the carbid is entirely . 
inclosed and does not contact with the Walls 
of the movable section, the water in which 
the lower end of said section is immersed thus 
remaining comparatively fresh and unfouled. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
what I claim, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is- 
1. In an acetylene-gas generator, the com 
bination of a water-tank, a movable holder, a 
carbid-basket carried by the holder and pro 
vided with a gauze bottom and adapted to be 
immersed in the water in the tank when the 
w 
75 
95 
CO 
IC5 
IO 
I I5 
I25 
612,753 
3. 
a receptacle carried by the holder and adapted 
to catch the slaked carbid, and means for up 
setting said receptacle to discharge its con 
tents, substantially as described. 
5. In an acetylene-gas generator the com 
bination of a generator with a gasometer, said 
gasometer consisting of a stationary tank 
formed with double walls, a body of porous 
material contained within said tank, a gas 
space being formed below said porous mate 
rial, a movable tank forming the upper part 
of said gasometer, a water-receptacle below 
said gasometer, a gas-pipe leading from the 
generator and formed into a coil in the water 
receptacle and then carried up above the por 
ous material, and a pipe leading out from the 
gas-space below the porous material, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature . 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JAMES H. NEEDELS. 
35 
Witnesses: 
T. C. TIPTON, 
G. C. HAYS. 
holder descends, and vent-tubes 10 communi 
cating at their lower ends with the lower end 
of the carbid-basket, at a point just above 
the gauze bottom, and terminating at their 
upper ends within the gas-space of the holder, 
as and for the purposes herein set forth. 
2. In an acetylene-gas generator the com 
bination of a water-tank, a movable holder. 
therein, a carbid-basketcarried by said holder, 
a receptacle carried by the holder and adapted 
to catch the slaked carbid, and means for dis 
charging said slaked carbid from said recep 
tacle, substantially as set forth. 
3. In an acetylene-gas generator the com 
bination of a water-tank, a movable holder 
therein, a carbid-basket carried by said holder, 
a receptacle carried by the holder and adapted 
to catch theslaked carbid, means for discharg 
ing said slaked carbid from said receptacle, 
and a deflector carried by the holder to direct 
the slaked carbid into the receptacle, substan 
tially as described. 
4. In an acetylene-gas generator the com 
bination of a water-tank, a movable tank 
therein, a carbid-basketcarried by said holder, 
O 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612853.txt	No. 612,853. 
(No Model.) 
 
Patented Oct. 25, 1898. 
J. A. LELAND. 
NAL EXTRACTOR 
(Application filed Mar. 28, 1898.) 
<<. 
S 
 
 
 
 
/6/z 1 Zeavea 
Ipje pior 
WH ifrosses 
1 (2644 
fy A. zs oAfforgeys, 
-7 
(6. 
co, PHOTOS-LITHO, WASHINGTON. O. C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN A. LELAND, OF MILLERS FALLS, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR TO THE 
MILLERS FALLS COMPANY, OF EWING, MASSACHUSETTS. 
NAL, EXTRACTOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 612,853, dated October 25, 1898. 
Application filed March 28, 1898, Serial No. 675,450, (No model.) 
To ali, Luhon, it may concert: 
Beit known that I, JOHN A. LELAND, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Miller's 
Falls, in the county of Franklin and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented a new and use 
ful Nail-Extractor, of which the following is 
a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
nail-extractors. 
The object of the present invention is, to 
improve the construction of nail-extractors 
and to provide a simple and comparatively 
inexpensive one adapted to be easily manu 
factured and capable of exerting great power 
in clamping a nail. 
A further object of the invention is to pro 
vide a nail-extractor in which the weight of 
the lever will operate to open the jaws when 
relieved of strain. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts, as hereinafter fully described, illus 
trated in the accompanying drawings, and 
pointed out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion of a nail-extractor constructed in accord 
ance with this invention. Fig. 2 is a longi 
tudinal sectional view of the same. Fig. 3 is 
an enlarged sectional view of the lower portion 
of the device. 
Like numerals of reference designate corre 
sponding parts in all the figures of the draw 
ings. 
1 designates a shank or rod provided at its 
lower end with a tapering rigid jaw 2, adapted 
to engage one side of a nail and coperating 
with a movable jaw 3, pivoted between its 
ends and having its lower portion tapered 
similar to the rigid jaw. The movable jaw, 
which is perforated near its center to receive 
its pivot 4, is mounted between a pair of red 
tangular plates 5, secured to opposite sides 
of the shank or bar 1 and projecting from the 
same, as clearly shown in the accompanying 
drawings. The central portion of the mov 
able jaw is enlarged, as shown, and the upper 
end is reduced to form a lug 6, which is ar 
ranged within a recess 7 of a lever 8. 
The lever 8, which is fulcrumed between 
the plates 5 on a pivot 9, is curved downward 
and outward, as shown, and its upper end is 
substantially hook-shaped to form the said re 
cess 7. The curved portion of the lever 8 
presents a lower convex face upon which the 
device is fulcrumed in extracting a nail, and 55 
the strain on the lever when pulling a nail 
operates to force the upper portion of the jaw 
3 outward and causes the lower engaging end 
to clamp a nail. By this arrangement a pow 
erful clamping action is produced and the 6o 
weight of the lever operates to open the jaws 
to release a nail automatically when the same 
is extracted. The plates 5 form projecting 
flanges to receive the pivoted jaw and the 
head of the lever, and the pivots 4 and 9 may 65 
consist of rivets or any other suitable fasten 
ing devices. 
It will be observed that the movable jaw 3 
and lever 8 are arranged wholly to one side 
of the rod 1, with their pivots in vertical 7o 
alinement, thereby enabling the rod to be used 
as a lever for prying out staples, lifting heavy 
objects, and opening boxes and the like. The 
jaw 3 is disposed longitudinally and about 
parallel with the rod 1, and its rounded lug 75 
6 articulates with the pivoted or hook-shaped 
end of the lever 8, which overhangs it, in such 
a manner as to result in a mutual sustaining 
of the pivots 4 and 9 when the jaw 3 and le 
ver 8 are subjected to strain, as when the im- 8o 
plement is in operation. 
The jaws are forced into the wood surround 
ing a nail by a rammer 10, consisting of a 
tubular body portion and provided with a 
rod or stem 11, extending upward from the 85 
tubular portion of the rammer or handle and 
receiving a wooden handle or grip 12, which 
is secured upon the rod or stem by a nut 13, 
engaging a threaded portion of the latter. 
tages: The device is simple and comparatively 
inexpensive in construction and may be read 
ily manufactured, and as the pivots 4 and 9 
of the jaw 3 and the lever 8 are located in 
vertical alinement the lever is adapted in 95 
extracting a nail to engage the inner edge of 
the upper portion of the jaw to cause the 
same to clamp the nail firmly, and after the 
nail has been extracted the lever automatic 
ally engages the outer edge of the upper por- Ioo 
tion of the jaw, thereby automatically open 
ing the jaws and releasing the nail. 
The invention has the following advan- go 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
SO 
2 
612,853 
formed into a jaw, companion plates secured 
to opposite sides of the rod, a movable jaw 
located wholly to one side of the rod about 
in parallel relation there with and pivoted be 
tween the said plates and having a rounded 
lug at its upper end, and a lever arranged 
upon the same side of the rod with the mov 
able jaw and pivoted between the aforesaid 
plates, the pivots of the lever and movable 
jaw alining vertically, and the inner or upper 
end of the lever overhanging the rounded lug 
and recessed upon its inner side forming a 
hooked portion to coperate with the said 
rounded lug, substantially in the manner and 
for the purpose specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
25 
35 
JOHN A. LELAND. 
Witnesses: 
PERRY E. AMICLON, 
AUGUSTUS C. CAREY. 
O 
Changes in the form, proportion, and minor 
details of construction may be resorted to 
without departing from the spirit or sacrific 
ing any of the advantages of this invention. 
What I claim is 
1. In a nail-extractor, the combination of 
a rod having its lower end made tapering and 
formed into a jaw and having offstanding 
projections in proximal relation to the fixed 
jaw, a movable jaw located wholly to one side 
of the rod about parallel therewith and piv 
oted between the offstanding projections and 
having a rounded lug at its upper end, and a 
lever arranged upon the same side of the rod 
with the movable jaw and pivoted between 
the offstanding projections, the pivots of the 
lever and movable jaw alining vertically, and 
the inner or upper end of the lever overhang 
ing and articulating with the rounded lug of 
the movable jaw, substantially as set forth 
for the purpose described. 
2. In a nail-extractor, the combination of 
a rod having its lower end made tapering and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US612953.txt	No. 612,953. 
(No Mode.) 
Patented Oct. 25, 1898. 
A. M. MEISNER. 
SOFT TREAD HORSESHOE. 
(Application fled Feb. 28, 1898.) 
 
  
 
  
7 
Z27, 2 
 
.  . 
ae 
s 
SS 
s 
Ar 
 
 
y 
- 2a 7. SXSN 
Z. 
Z 
7 
A- 
Z. 
Zz67-7O. 
267 t 
(IU 
a 
Zsa 
as Z. E. 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES 
PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTHONY M. MEISNER, 
OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
SoFT-TREAD HORSESHOE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 612,958, dated October 25, 1898. 
Application filed February 28, 1898, Serial No. 672,049, (No model.) 
to old, whon, it nagy CO7 ce.77. 
Beitknown that I, ANTHONY M. MEISNER, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Horseshoes, of which the 
following is a specification, reference being 
had to the accompanying drawings, which are 
made a part hereof, and in which 
Figure 1 is a plan view of a portion of a 
horseshoe embodying the invention in its pre 
ferred form. Fig. 2 is a sectional elevation 
thereof, the plane of the section being in 
dicated by the line 22, Fig. 1. Figs. 3, 4, 
and 5 are sections thereof on the lines 3.3, 
44, and 55, respectively, of Fig. 1. Fig. 6 
is a plan view of a portion of a horseshoe em 
bodying some features of the invention. 
Figs. 7, 8, and 9 are sections thereof on the 
lines 7 7, 88, and 99, respectively, of Fig. 6. 
Fig. 10 is a front view of a horseshoe embody 
ing some features of the invention. . 
v 
The present invention relates to that class 
of horseshoes which are provided with elastic 
cushions or pads which are adapted to have 
contact with the ground or pavement and are 
intended to relieve the hoof of the jar inci 
dent to shoes made wholly of metal. 
The objects of the invention are to provide 
a shoe of this classin which the metaliportions 
may be made light and elastic, so that the shoe 
as a whole will have a considerable degree of 
elasticity; to provide a shoe of this class in 
which the elastic pad is secured to a shoe in 
the nature of a supplemental shoe, which in 
turn is secured to the hoof through the me 
dium of a light shoe of ordinary construction 
without calks, so that when desired the sup 
plemental shoe may be removed and the shoe 
without calks used without it; to provide a 
shoe of this class with an elastic pad of Such 
construction that it will prevent the metal 
portion of the shoe from coming in contact 
with the ground or pavement, and to provide 
improved means for securing the elastic pad 
in place, to the end that it may readily be re 
placed when worn out. 
To these ends the invention consists in the 
features of novelty that are hereinafter fully 
described. 
A represents a horseshoe which is without 
calks and is of ordinary construction, except 
ing that it is provided with tapped or threaded 
openings for the reception of screws B, by 
which a supplemental shoe C may be secured 
to it. The shoe A is secured to the hoofs by 
nails D in customary manner. The supple 
mental shoe C is preferably provided with a 
marginal flange E, which embraces the shoe 
A and fits snugly around the outer edgethere 
of, so as to relieve the attaching-screws B of 
the severe lateral strains which would be put 
upon them if the shoes A and C did not have 
overlapping features. It is the intention that 
the shoe A shall be made very light, (lighter 
than would be required for ordinary use if 
the supplemental shoe C were not used,) and 
at the same time it is the intention that when 
it is desired to do so the supplemental shoe 
C may be removed, leaving the shoe A for 
use in customary manner. The supplemental 
shoe is preferably made of rather thin metal, 
so that it will have a greater degree of elas 
ticity than shoes of ordinary construction. It 
is provided in its under side with a channel 
in which the rib f of an elastic pad F (prefer 
ably made of rubber) fits, the lower portion 
of the pad being of sufficient width to over 
lap the lower edges of the flanges c of the 
supplemental shoe, thus interposing a body 
of elastic material between the metal portion 
of the supplemental shoe and the ground or 
pavement. In order to have the desired de 
gree of elasticity, the flanges c and top c' 
must be rather thin; but in order to give the 
supplemental shoe adequate strength at the 
toe, which is the part subjected to the most 
severe strains, it is thickened, as shown at c'. 
In order to secure the elastic pad in place, 
any suitable means may be employed; but I 
prefer to use screws G, which have their 
heads presented outward and are passed 
through perforations in the outer flange c 
and in the rib f of the elastic pad, their inner 
portions being threaded for engaging corre 
spondingly-threaded openings in the inner 
flange c. This means for securing the elastic 
pad in place on the supplemental shoe is sim 
ple and effective and enables the pad to be 
quickly removed when worn and a new one 
put in its place. 
I prefer to secure the elastic paid to a shoe 
which is supplemental to a shoe which is per 
manently secured to the hoof, as above de 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
 
2 
612,958 
shoe and adapted to engage the main shoe, 
means for securing the supplemental shoe to 
the main shoe, an elastic pad, and means for 
securing it to the supplemental shoe, substan 
tially as set forth. 
2. A light horseshoe provided with thread 
ed openings and having a lower surface 
adapted for contact with the ground or pave 
ment, and means for securing it to the hoof, in 
combination with a supplemental shoe hav 
ing a channel in its under side, a flange pre 
sented upward and adapted to engage the 
main shoe, and openings adapted to register 
with the threaded openings aforesaid, screws 
passing through the openings of the supple 
mental shoe and engaging the threaded open 
ings of the main shoe, an elastic pad disposed 
in the channel of the supplemental shoe and 
engaging the heads of the screws aforesaid, 
and screws passing through the sides of the 
channel and through the pad, for securing 
the latter in place, substantially as set forth. 
35 
45 
ANTHONY M. MEISNER, 
Witnesses: 
L. M. EIOPKINS, 
I. CROSS. 
Id 
Scribed; but, if desired, the shoe A may be 
dispensed with and the shoe to which the 
elastic pad is secured attached directly to 
the hoof, in which case this latter shoe is not 
Supplemental in its nature. A shoe of this 
character is shown in Figs. 6 to 10, inclusive, 
in which parts similar to parts shown in Figs. 
I to 5, inclusive, bear similar reference-let 
In this case the shoe is provided with 
teS. 
openings c' for the passage of nails by which 
it is Secured to the hoof, and the flange Eem 
braces the margin of the hoof. This flange 
may be coextensive with the outer margin of 
the shoe, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, or it may 
be placed only on the front of the shoe, as 
shown in Fig. 6, or it may be interrupted and 
placed at the front and sides, as shown in 
Fig. 10. In the latter figure the shoe is pro 
vided with a toe C and in this case the elastic 
pad is correspondingly recessed, as shown at f". 
Having thus described my invention, the 
following is what I claim as new therein and 
desire to secure by Letters Patent: 
1. A light horseshoe having a lower surface 
adapted for contact with the ground or pave 
ment, in combination with a supplemental 
shoe, a flange rising from the supplemental 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613053.txt	No. 613,053. 
(No Model.) 
A. B. BATES. 
PACKING FOR PIPE JOINTS, &c. 
Application filed Nov. 8, 1897. 
Patented Oct. 25, 1898. 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
N  
'N N C 
d N 
 
t 
3 37' 
3 
 
GGEette 
r 
 
 
 
-6 N 
G 
seas 
Raxr. 
 
 
 
  
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER B. BATES, OF BINGHAMTON, NEW YORK. 
PACKING FOR PIPE-JOINTS, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 613,053, dated October 25, 1898. 
Application filed November 8, 1897, Serial No. 657,736, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
To all whon, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDERB. BATEs, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bing 
hamton, in the county of Broome and State 
of New York, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Packings for Pipe-Joints 
and Machinery, of which the following is a 
specification. 
Heretofore packings for pipe and other 
joints have been made as rings of various sec 
tional shapes and materials. These packing 
rings have usually been placed between the 
opposite flat surfaces of the parts to be con 
nected and the compressing action of the bolts 
flattened the packings betweenthese surfaces. 
These packingshold with ordinary pressures, 
but with high pressures are not reliable. 
In some instances packing-rings have been 
inserted into the grooved faces of the joints, 
but always within the clamping devices. In 
screwing up the flanges and compressing the 
packing-rings the bolts are subject to enor 
mous strain, and this is particularly the case 
where there are elbows or bends in the pipes, 
and the flanges are liable to be broken by the 
twofold strain, one arising from the pressure 
of the fluid and the other from the force re 
quired in compressing the packing-ring, and 
this strain is increased by the leverage of the 
bolts, because the bolts are necessarily ap 
plied outside the packing-ring and in a circle 
or range of greater diameter, and the flanges 
through which the bolts pass are thus ex 
posed to a force that frequently causes them 
to crack or break. 
In the present invention I apply a second 
ring outside the circular range of bolts and 
of similar character to the packing-ring; but 
this second ring does not form a packing, be 
cause it in no respect would prevent leakage 
around the bolts; but it becomes an equalizer 
of the strain, so that the bolts draw the flanges 
toward each other without leverage strain and 
in such a manner that the outer ring becomes 
a support to the flange and insures the proper 
and uniform bearing pressure against the in 
ner packing-ring, and in consequence of the 
packing-ring and the equalizing-ring being 
similar the compressing action of the bolts is 
uniform and the surfaces of the flanges re 
main parallel or nearly So. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a vertical sec 
tion of a pipe-joint; Fig. 2, a plan of one of 
the flange-faces, and Fig. 3 is a section show 
y 
ing a modification in the sectional shape of 55 
the packing-rings. 
a, b, Figs. 1 and 2, represent the pipe-sec 
tions, and a b' the flanges thereon connected 
The surface of the flange a' is 
by bolts c. 
grooved concentrically at 23 within and out 
side of the line of bolts c, and the surface of 
the flange b' is similarly grooved at 45, the 
grooves 2 and 4 and 3 and 5 being in pairs 
and opposite one another in the opposite faces 
of the flanges. These grooves are of V shape 
sectionally. Rings did are of double-V shape, 
square, or diamond form in cross-section 
and correspond circumferentially with the 
grooves; but they are deeper than the com 
bined depth of the grooves and are received 
and fit therein. Hence the flanges are main 
tained at a short distance apart. The bolts c 
come between the rings, and when pressure 
is applied to the same to tighten the parts the 
rings are forced into the grooves, and the 
tendency is to spread them between the flanges 
in making a tight joint. 
In the form shown in Fig. 3 the edges of the 
V-grooves are made with parallel sides, and 
the rings are thicker to render the joint more 
certainly tight by the rings when compressed 
and to increase the efficiency of the joint. 
The inner ring d becomes a packing to retain 
the fluid-pressure, and the outer ring dis an 
equalizer of the strain. 
My invention is not confined to the joints 
of pipes, but is applicable to all joints where 
ordinary gaskets are now employed and is ap 
plicable to the cylinder-heads of pumps and 
engines, to valve-chests, man and hand hole 
plates of boilers, and other covered openings 
where tight joints are required. 
9o 
75 
- 
I claim as my invention 
In a joint having flat faces opposite to each 
other and bolts for connecting the parts, 
grooves of similar size and outline in both 
the adjacent surfaces, both within and out 
side of the line of bolts, and rings fitting and 
filling the grooves, the inner ring forming a 
packing and the outer ring an equalizer of 
the pressure by the bolts upon the joint, sub 
stantially as specified. 
Signed by me this 5th day of November, 
A. D. 1897. 
95 
IOO 
ALEX. B. BATES. 
Witnesses: 
GEO. T. PINCKNEY, 
HAROLD SERRELL 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613153.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN J. KENNELLY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO JAMES H. 
HAGGERTY, OF SAME PLACE. 
VWVR EN C H . 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 613,153, dated October 25, 1898. 
Application filed January 19, 1898, Serial No. 667,167, (No model.) 
55 
?? 
65 
o 
75 
95 
IOC 
I. ? 
- 
To all, Luhon, it Taty concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN J. KENNELLY, of 
New York, borough of Manhattan, county of 
New York, in the State of New York, have 
invented a new and Improved Wrench, of 
which the following is a full, clear, and exact 
description. 
My invention relates to an improvementin 
ratchet-wrenches which are provided with a 
rotatable barrel having a socketformed there 
in adapted to engage the nut; and it consists 
of an auxiliary or removable socket-piece 
which is held in place by the friction of a 
spring-pressed block and is provided with a 
socket adapted to receive a nut of a different 
size from the socketin the barrel of the wrench 
proper. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in all the figures. 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a wrench 
of this character with the removable socket 
piece lying alongside. Fig. 2 is an enlarged 
longitudinal section taken through the socket 
end of the Wrench with the removable socket 
piece in place. Fig. 3 is a similar view show 
ing a socket-piece in place, having a socket 
adapted to receive a nut of larger diameter 
than the barrel of the Wrench; and Fig. 4 is 
an end view of the removable socket-piece. 
The object of my invention isto providea 
removable device which may be readily at 
tached to a socket-wrench of this character 
and which will enable it to engage nuts of 
different diameters. 
The particular construction of the wrench 
proper is not material and has not therefore 
been illustrated in great detail. 
The Wrench, as shown, comprises a handle 
A and a barrel B, journaled in one end there 
of and rotatable by a suitable means mounted 
upon the handle. This means not forming 
an essential part of the present invention is 
not described in full. 
The barrel B, as shown in the drawings, has 
sockets C in each end thereof fitted to engage 
a nut of a certain size. These two sockets 
are connected with each other by a central 
aperture D, which ordinarily would beformed, 
as shown, of a circular cross-section. This 
circular cross-section is not, however, an es 
sential feature, but is only a convenient and 
cheap form of manufacture. It may be made 
of any cross-section desired. 
The auxiliary socket-piece or reducer, 
as it might be termed, consists of a stem 
or shank E, adapted to fit the central con 
necting-aperture D in the barrel, provided 
at one end with a head F, adapted to fit the 
socket C in the end of the barrel. This end 
of the auxiliary socket-piece or reducer is 
also provided with a socket?, fitted to receive 
a nut of a different diameter from that en 
gaged by the socket C with the barrel B. As 
shown in Fig. 2, this socket f is of smaller 
diameter than the socket in the barrel, while, 
as shown in Fig. 3, the head Fis projected be 
yond the end of the barrel and the socketf 
therein is of larger diameter than the socket 
in the end of the barrel. Either or both of 
these constructions will be provided in differ 
ent socket-pieces adapted to be inserted in 
the same Wrench. 
To hold the socket-piece in place in the 
barrel, the shank or stem E is provided with 
a slot adapted to receive the spring-held fric 
tion-block G. This block is preferably piv 
oted in this slot and is provided with a tail 
piece g, adapted to engage the end of the 
shank and prevent the block from being 
swung outward too far. The outer surface 
of the block is curved, as shown, so that the 
end thereof will be certain of entering the 
central aperture D in the barrel. It is held 
outward by means of a spring H, which is in 
serted in a transverse recess formed in the 
shank E. This spring engages the under side 
of the block G and holds the same out with 
force sufficient to hold the Socket-piece in 
place and prevent its dropping out of the bar 
relin whatever position the Wrench is placed. 
These socket-pieces are easily inserted and 
removed from the wrench and will enable the 
wrench to be used upon nuts of different di 
ameters instead of their use being confined to 
nuts of one diameter only. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
1. An attachment for socket - Wrenches, 
comprising a removable socket-piece having 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
613,153 
a head having an exterior surface adapted to 
fit the nut-socket in the Wrench, and a nut 
socket formed in said head of a different di- 2o 
ameter from that in the wrench, the stem of 
said auxiliary socket-piece having a slot there 
in extending to its end, a friction-block piv 
oted in said slot having an arm extending 
over and engaging the end of the stem, the 
body of said block being adapted to bear 
against the walls of the central opening in the 
wrench and a spring beneath said friction 
block, substantially as described. 
25 
JOHN J. KENNELILY. 
Witnesses: 
FRANCIS L. HAGGERTY, 
CHAS. III. LEWIS. 
a central stem provided with a slot at the 
outer end thereof, a spring - held friction 
block pivoted in said slot having an arm ex 
tending over and engaging the outer end of 
said stem, the body thereof being adapted 
to project from the side of the slot and to 
engage the surface of the Wrench-socket to 
hold the attachment in place, and a head fit 
ting the nut-socket and held thereby against 
turning and having a nut-receiving cavity or 
socket therein of different size from the one 
in the Wrench, substantially as described. 
2. A socket-wrench having a rotatable bar 
rel provided with a nut-socket and a central 
aperture, and means for receiving said bar 
rel, an auxiliary Socket-piece comprising a 
stem adapted to fit the central aperture, and 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613253.txt	No. 613,253. 
(No Mode.) 
S. A. DAVS. 
GEAR INDICATING DEVICE. 
(Application filed Oct. 7, 1897.) 
Patented Nov. 1, 1898. 
  
 
 
 
6.739.2022223 
EETow 
REAR 
Z72/e72607 
AS62ozee/Z Zazzs: 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
STEPHON A. DAVIS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
GEAR-INDICATING DEVICE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 613,253, dated November 1, 1898. 
Application filed October 7, 1897, Serial No. 654,422, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all, whon it may concern: 
Be it known that I, STEPHON A. DAVIS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented new and useful Improve 
ments in Gear-Indicating Devices, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to gear-indicating de 
vices, and has for its special object to provide 
an indicator comprising a table or tables of 
appropriate figures or characters and a plu 
rality of conjointly movable arms arranged 
to be operated in unison, so that by the posi 
tion of said arms with relation to the figures, 
numbers, or characters on the table or tables 
there will be at once indicated the required 
number of teeth for front and rear sprocket 
wheels of a cycle-gearing to give the desired 
gear for a driving-wheel of any known diam 
eter, or, conversely, to indicate the gear that 
corresponds with the diameter of the wheel 
and number of teeth on the front and rear 
sprockets. 
The table or tables may be further 
arranged to show the distance traveled by the 
driving-wheel in one revolution of the pedal, 
according to the gear of the wheel. 
The invention consists in the combination 
of conjointly-movable indicator-arms with 
appropriately-arranged columns or lines of 
figures or numbers in one or more tables for 
indicating the gear of cycles and the distance 
traveled by the driving-wheel in each revo 
lution of the pedal, as hereinafter more par 
ticularly set forth. 
In the annexed drawings, Figure 1 repre 
sents one form of my gear-indicating device. 
Fig.2 shows a modification in the form of the 
indicator. Fig. 3 shows another modification. 
Referring first to Fig. 1, the rigidly-con 
nected and conjointly-movable indicator 
arms a, and b are shown as radiating from a 
center or pivot c, on which they are supported 
in such manner as to move in unison when 
either arm is pushed either to the right or left. 
As shown, the indicator table or tables may 
constitute the segment of a circle of which 
the pivot c is the center. A preferred form 
of my invention for a cycle-gear indicator 
is that in which tables d, e, and f are pro 
vided to indicate various gears for cycle driv 
ing-wheels differing in diameter-such, for 
instance, as the usual twenty-eight-inch, 
twenty-six-inch, and thirty-inch wheels. Ob 
viously a table or tables may be calculated 
for a wheel or wheels of diameter differing 
from those here referred to. The indicator 
represented in Fig. 1 also shows tables or col 
umns of figures g h i for the number of teeth 
on a rear sprocket-wheel corresponding with 
any required gear for a driving-wheel of defi 
nite diameter-twenty-six, twenty-eight, or 
thirty inches, as the case may be. The indi 
cator also comprises a line of figures or table 
k for the number of teeth on various sizes of 
front sprocket-wheels. Other spaces traveled 
over by one of the indicator-arms may be util 
ized for tables l n n, showing the distance 
traveled by a driving-wheel of any diameter 
and gear included in the indicator-tables. 
Fig. 1 of the drawings shows the various 
figures or numbers comprised in the indicator 
table or tables as being conveniently ar 
ranged in radial columns on arcs of circles 
that are concentric with the pivot c, on which 
the conjointly - movable arms a, b are sup 
ported. The arrangement shown is not, how 
ever, essential, but may be varied according 
to the intended uses of the indicator and 
other circumstances. 
To illustrate the manner of using this gear 
indicator, let it be supposed that it is desired 
to ascertain at once and without calculation 
the required number of teeth on front and 
rear sprockets, respectively, required to give 
a gear of eighty to a twenty-eight-inch wheel. 
For this purpose the right-hand indicator-arm 
a will be made to point to S0, which is found 
in the top line of tabled, and in the same line 
of table g is found only the numeral 7, which 
thus indicates the required number of teeth 
for the rear sprocket-wheel. At the same 
time the left-hand indicator-arm b will point 
to the number 20' in tablele, thus indicating 
the number of teeth required on the front 
sprocket. The accuracy of this indication 
may be proved by a simple calculation-viz., 
28X20-c.560 and 560-7-80. The diameter of 
the driving-wheel in inches being multiplied 
by the number of teeth on the front sprocket 
and the product divided by the number of 
teeth on the rear sprocket, the quotient will 
represent the gear. Again, let it be supposed 
that it is desired to ascertain the gear of a 
twenty-eight-inch wheel used with a front 
95 
Od 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
Sprocket having eighteen teeth and a rear 
sprocket of nine teeth. For this purpose 
the left-hand indicator-arm b will be made 
to point to 1S' on table k and at the same 
time the right-hand indicator -arm a will 
cover 56 in that line of table d which coin 
cides with the numeral '9' in table g, thus in 
dicating that fifty-six is the gear of the driv 
ing-wheel, for 28X18 - 504 and 504--9= 56. 
It will be understood that where the gear is ex 
pressed with strict accuracy by a fraction the 
nearest whole number may be marked on the 
indicator-table or the precise gear may be 
marked, as preferred. 
Although in Fig. 1 I have only shown the 
indicator as arranged for wheels of twenty 
six, twenty-eight, and thirty inches, it will 
be obvious that it may be restricted or ex 
tended as required to indicate the proportions 
for the parts of various gears for wheels of 
any diameter. For the sake of clearness in 
the drawings only some of the numbers con 
cerned in the gears are marked in their ap 
propriate places. It will be understood that 
in constructing the indicator-tables they may 
be marked for any diameter of driving-wheel 
and for any number of teeth on front and 
rear sprockets, respectively, with correspond 
ing numbers to indicate the gear. 
Reference to Fig. 1 will show that by means 
of properly-calculated tables l n n the left 
hand indicator-arm b may be made to indi 
cate the distance traveled by a driving-wheel 
of any diameter and gear in one revolution 
of the pedal. The angle formed by the ra 
diating and conjointly-movable indicator 
arms a, b, Fig. 1, must of course be such that 
they will respectively correspond with the 
radial columns of figures in the indicator 
tables. 
In Fig. 2 Ihave shown an indicator in which 
the conjointly-movable indicator-arms op are 
placed parallel at a suitable distance apart 
and are carried by a laterally-movable slide 
q, supported in a guide 7', in front of and be 
low tables S t t for respectively indicating 
the number of teeth onfront and rear sprock 
ets and the resulting gear of a twenty-eight 
inch wheel. The parallel conjointly-movable 
indicator-arms O p are preferably arranged 
to project upward, as shown, though they 
might be extended downward if arranged 
above the indicator-tables St., in which the 
TC) 
25 
35 
45 
 
various indications are arranged in lines that 
intersect at right angles. Although I have 
shown this form of indicator as arranged for 
only a twenty-eight-inch wheel, it is obvious 
that the table or tables may be marked to in 
dicate various gears for several different-sized 
wheels. The manner of using this form of 
indicator will be apparent from the preced 
ing description, the left-hand indicator-arm 
O being designed to show the number of teeth 
on a front sprocket-wheel required for use 
with a rear sprocket-wheel of, say, from seven 
to twelve teeth in order to give the gear, as 
indicated by the right-hand indicator-arm p, 
the number of said gear being found beneath 
the arm p in that line of figures which coin 
cides with the line in table t marked with the 
required number of teeth for the rear sprocket. 
In Fig. 3 I have shown another arrange 
ment of tables or dials / 2 with two pivoted 
and conjointly-movable indicator-arms ) and 
U, connected by a cross-arm ac, having piv 
otal connection with said indicator-arms. 
Either form of cycle-gear indicator de 
scribed herein may be conveniently applied 
to card calendars for cycle-advertising pur 
poses or may be mounted in any other Suit 
able manner. 
What I claim as my invention is 
1. A cycle-gear indicator consisting of a 
plurality of conjointly-movable indicator 
arms and a table or tables comprising figures 
to indicate the number of teeth on a front 
sprocket, the number of teeth on a rear 
sprocket and the resulting gear for a wheel of 
definite diameter, substantially as described. 
2. A cycle-gear indicator, consisting of a 
table or tables comprising indications for the 
number of teeth on a front sprocket, the num 
ber of teeth on a rear sprocket, the gears for 
a wheel of definite diameter, and the distance 
traveled by such wheel for any gear at one 
revolution of the pedal, and a plurality of 
conjointly-movable indicator-arms, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit 
0SS eS. 
STEPHON A. DAVIS. 
Witnesses: 
JNO. COLBERT, 
ALMERIN S. COOK. 
55 
75 
95 
OO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613353.txt	No. 613,353. 
 
(No Model.) 
F. BUBSER. 
- POSHING MACHINE. 
(Application filed July 7, 1897.) 
Patented Nov. 
1898. 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 613,353. 
(No Model.) 
F. BUBSER. 
POLISHING MACHINE. 
(Application filed July 7, 1897.) 
Patented Nov. 1, 1898. 
- 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
The Norris Peters co, PHoTo-LTHO. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
No. 613,353. 
(No Mode.) 
F. BUBSER. 
POLISHING MACHINE. 
(Application filed 3uly 7, 1897.) 
Patented Nov. 1, 898. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
SSAtates 
22S 
SS 
anSSSS S-3s 
 
7 
NAAAAAAAA SAA 
Sirroris2S 
A 
w 
aaS 
  
 
 
 
 
THE McRRs PETERs co, PHoTo-LITHo...wash INGTON, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FIDEL BUBSER, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO THE POPE 
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE AND PORTLAND, MAINE. 
POLISHING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 613,353, dated November 1, 1898. 
Application filed July 7, 1897, 
Serial No, 643,687, (No model.) 
55 
io 
75 
To all tufton, it invazy concern: 
Be it known that I, FIDEL BUBSER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing in the city 
and county of Hartford, in the State of Con 
necticut, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Polishing-Machines, of 
which the following is a specification, refer 
ence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part thereof. 
This invention relates to machines for buff 
ing or polishing articles of wood or metal; 
and its object is to produce an improved ma 
chine of this class which shall operate with 
great efficiency and economy and which shall 
be particularly adapted to the buffing or pol 
ishing of tubes or rods of metal or wood, such 
as are employed in the construction of bicy 
cles. 
The machine couaprises in its construction 
a suitable buffer or polisher, with means for 
driving the same and means for holding the 
tube or other article to be polished in opera 
tive relation with the buffer or polisher. In 
its most approved form the holding means 
are so arranged that the tube or other article 
to be polished or buffed is fed automatically 
across the buffing or polishing surface, it be 
ing possible also to regulate the speed of 
movement of the tube or other article with 
relation to the speed of movement of the buff 
ing or polishing Surface, so as to produce any 
desired result. 
In the accompanying drawings I have illus 
trated my invention as embodied in such 
an improved form of machine, and I will pro 
ceed to describe my invention with reference 
thereto. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of 
the machine referred to. Fig. 2 is an eleva 
tion of the same as seen from the left in Fig. 
1, with the tube-supporting devices removed. 
Fig. 3 is a detail plan view, on a larger scale, 
illustrating particularly the manner of feed 
ing the tube to be polished or buffed across 
the polishing or buffing surface. Fig. 4 is a 
view, partly in longitudinal section and 
partly in elevation, of the parts shown in 
Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a detail view illustrating a 
slightly different form of the belt-tightener. 
Fig. 6 is a detail view illustrating a device for 
permitting angular adjustment of the rod or 
tube carrier. 
In the machine shown in the drawings the 
various Working parts are supported upon a 
bed-plate or frame A. Pedestals B and B' 
are mounted upon the bed-plate or frame A, 
the pedestal B being preferably fixed in po 
sition thereon, while the pedestal B'is mount 
ed adjustably thereon toward and from the 
other pedestal B, a lug b (shown in dotted 
lines in Fig. 2) projecting downward into a 
slot a of the bed-plate or frame and being 
engaged by a threaded shaft b', which is pro 
vided with a suitable hand-wheel b. The 
lug b is extended below the bed-plate or 
frame and is screw-threaded, as at b, to re 
ceive a clamping-lever b, by which the ped 
estal may be securely held in adjusted posi 
tion. 
In suitable bearings in each pedestal is 
mounted a spindle C, which has secured 
thereto a driving-pulley c, by which the buf 
fer or polisher may be driven, and a carry 
ing-pulley c', the two pulleys receiving a buff 
ing or polishing strap or belt D, which may 
be of any suitable material adapted for its 
purpose. 
The pedestal B is made adjustable, as al 
ready described, to accommodate straps of 
different lengths; but as it is desirable that 
provision should be made for slackening or 
tightening the belt at different times in the 
operation of the machine I have provided a 
belt-tightener, as shown clearly in Figs. 1 and 
2. As there shown, the belt-tightener com 
prises a suitable pulley d, mounted between 
the arms of a forked carrier or lever d", which 
is pivoted upon a suitable bracket d. A 
spring d, which may be attached to the free 
end of the lever d', serves to maintain the 
belt D normally tight, or at least with its up 
per or operative member yieldingly in contact 
with the tube or other article to be polished, 
as shown clearly in Fig. 2. A notched sector 
d is secured in proximity to the free end of 
the lever, and a latch d is mounted upon the 
lever and is adapted to engage the notch of 
the sector d to hold the pulley d out of con 
tact with the belt D in opposition to the ten 
sion of the spring d. 
A buffer or polisher such as that just de 
scribed, in which the buffing or polishing sur 
face is formed by a belt or strap, will gener 
ally be found to be better adapted for the 
buffing or polishing of tubes or rods than a 
disk or wheel buffer or polisher; but it will 
95 
OO 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
50 
 
O 
25 
35 
45 
be obvious that a buffer or polisher of this 
particular kind is not essential to the carry 
ing out of the invention and may be replaced 
by any other well-known form of buffer or 
polisher. 
Mounted upon the bed-plate or frame A is 
a second plate E, which forms a part of the 
devices for supporting and carrying the tube 
or other article to be buffed or polished. The 
said plate E is arranged at more or less of an 
oblique angle with respect to the bed-plate 
or frame A. In Fig. 3 I have represented it 
bolted to the bed-plate or frame A by bolts 
which pass through flanges e e. It is prefer 
able, however, to provide for angular adjust 
ment of the plate or carrier E, and in Fig. 6 
I have shown the bed-plate or frame A as 
formed with semicircular slots a C, through 
which the bolts e'e' pass, so that by loosening 
the bolts the plate E may be set as desired. 
Mounted in brackets fif on the plate E are 
supporting and guide tubes FF", there being 
preferably one such tube at each side of the 
buffer or polisher D. The brackets are split, 
as at f', and provided with clamping-bolts f', 
So that the position of each tube may be ad 
justed and the tube then fastened securely in 
its adjusted position. One of these tubes, F, 
receives the tube or rod to be polished at 
one side of the buffer or polisher and the 
other, F, delivers the polished tube or rod at 
the other side of the machine, the said tube 
Or rod having passed across the face of the 
buffer or polisher D between the ends of the 
tWO tubes F and F". In the end of the tube 
F nearest the buffer or polisher is a remov 
able bushing f, which is held in place by a 
Suitable clamping-ringf, applied to the end 
of the tube F, and has a conical opening which 
centralizes the tube or rod to be polished. 
Suitable bushings are substituted one for an 
Other, according to the size of the tube or rod 
to be polished, it being desirable that the tube 
Or rod shall be supported substantially cen 
tral with respect to the receiving-tube F, but 
shall pass freely through the bushing. The 
main function of the tubes F and F is to 
guide the tube or rod to be polished, prevent 
ing it from lashing about to its injury, and 
incidentally to support its end; but inasmuch 
as it is desirable that the tube or rod to be 
polished shall be permitted to rotate freely 
while it is in contact with the buffing or pol 
ishing surface I prefer to provide between the 
tubes F and F and in close proximity to the 
buffer or polisher, one on each side thereof, 
freely-rotatable supports for the tube or rod 
While it is being polished. I therefore secure 
to the plate E, between the two inner brack 
ets ff, two other brackets g g, which sup 
port freely-rotatable sleeves G, which in turn 
loosely support the tube Tand are themselves 
rotated by contact with the tube or rod. Any 
suitable bearings which will permit the sleeves 
G to rotate freely may be employed. In Fig. 
4 of the drawings I have shown the sleeve G 
as revolving on ballsg', which are supported 
by cones g, formed on a sleeve (1, the latter 
being fixed in the bracket g. The bearings 
are protected from dust by a dust-cap g or 
other suitable device. Bushings of may be 
placed in the sleeve G to directly support the 
tube, being removable to permit others to be 
substituted, according to the size of the tube. 
In the use of the machine which I have de 
Scribed herein the belt B is first slackened or 
allowed to drop below the axis of the tubes 
F F" by raising the free end of the forked le 
ver (l', the latch dengaging the notched sec 
tor d' to hold the tightening-pulley (l out of 
contact with the belt. The tube to be pol 
ished is then pushed through the receiving 
tube F and the supporting sleeve or bearing 
G until its end projects over the belt or strap 
D. The latch d is then released and the belt 
tightening pulley d is caused by the spring d 
to press the belt or strap against the tube. 
Motion being imparted to the belt or strap D 
the tube is subjected to the buffing or polish 
ing action of the belt and is fed forward across 
the face of the belt, its leading end entering 
the second bearing and the tube F until its 
whole length has passed across the belt. 
It will be understood that the speed of ro 
tation of the tube T will depend upon its po 
sition with relation to the belt D. If it is dis 
posed at right angles with respect thereto, it 
will have the maximum speed of rotation, 
while as its position approaches parallelism 
with the belt its speed of rotation will be pro 
portionately reduced. The peripheral speed 
of the rotation of the tube will of course be 
less than the speed of the belt or strap in any 
case by reason of the friction of the tube in 
its bearing, and the abrasive or polishing ac 
tion of the belt or strap on the tube will be 
proportional to the difference between the 
lineal speed of the belt or strap, or, in other 
words, the surface speed of the buffer or pol 
isher, and the peripheral speed of the tube. 
If it were desired to increase the abrasive ac 
tion beyond the maximum possible under 
these conditions, it would be necessary to ro 
tate the tube in the opposite direction. It 
will also be understood that if the tube crosses 
the belt or strap at right angles there will be 
no tendency of the tube to move in the direc 
tion of its axis, and in such a case it would 
be necessary to feed the tube forward by 
hand or by suitable mechanical devices. If, 
however, the tube crosses the belt or strap at 
an oblique angle-as represented, for exam 
ple, in Figs. 1 and 3 of the drawings-the ac 
tion of the belt or strap upon the tube will be 
not only to cause it to rotate, but to cause it 
to move in the direction of its length, thereby 
effecting the necessary feed automatically. 
A variation in the angle at which the tube 
crosses the belt or strap will obviously effect 
a corresponding change in the rate of feed. 
The form of belt-tightener shown in Fig. 5 
is preferable to that shown in Fig. 2 for the 
reason that it prevents the decrease in the 
tension of the spring, which takes place in the 
7 o 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
2 
613,853 
55 
65 
 
613,353 
3 
construction shown in Fig. 2 as soon as the 
roller d rises and likewise permits of the ad 
justment of the tightener while maintaining 
tension on the spring. In the construction 
shown in Fig. 5 the lever or carrier d is 
mounted, as before, upon a standard d and 
carries the pulley d. The spring d is also 
attached to the lever d, but instead of hav 
ing its lower end fixed to the frame or bed 
plate it is secured to an arm d. The latter 
is carried by a short shaft d", to which the 
rock-lever d is secured. A latch d on the 
lever dengages a notched sector di. This 
construction allows the operator to set the 
tension on the spring dat the proper amount 
to force the roller into contact with the belt 
and raise it to its operative position. 
Since many changes may be made in the 
details of construction and arrangement here 
in shown and described without departing 
from the spirit of my invention, I do not de 
sire my invention to be limited to the precise 
construction and arrangement shown and de 
scribed herein. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination with a buffer or pol 
isher and means to drive the same, of a rota 
table support to loosely hold the tube or rod 
to be buffed or polished, said support being 
mounted to rotate freely with the tube or rod, 
Substantially as shown and described. 
2. The combination with a buffer or pol 
isher and means to drive the same, of a freely 
rotatable sleeve loosely supporting the tube 
or rod to be buffed or polished and having its 
axis disposed at an oblique angle with rela 
tion to the direction of movement of the buf 
fer or polisher, Substantially as shown and 
described. 
3. The combination with a buffer or pol 
isher and means to drive the same, of a guid 
ing-tube to receive the rod or tube to be buffed 
or polished and mounted in proximity to the 
buffer or polisher with its axis disposed at an 
angle with relation to the plane of movement 
of the buffer or polisher, and a supporting 
sleeve rotatably mounted between said tube 
and buffer or polisher and in line with said 
tube, substantially as shown and described. 
4. The combination with a buffer or pol 
isher and means to drive the same, of a 
bracket mounted in proximity to said buffer 
or polisher, a sleeve supported on ball-bear 
ings in said bracket, with its axis disposed at 
an angle With relation to the plane of move 
ment of the buffer or polisher, and bushings 
in Said sleeve to receive and support the tube 
or rod to be buffed or polished, substantially 
as shown and described. 
5. The combination with a buffer or pol 
isher and means to drive the same, of a tube 
mounted in proximity to the buffer or pol 
isher, a removable bushing having a conical 
opening in the end of said tube, and a clamp 
to Secure Said bushing in said tube, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
6. The combination with an endless-belt 
25 
35 
45 
55 
buffer or polisher, pulleys to support said 
belt, and means to drive the same, of a freely 
rotatable support to loosely hold the article 
to be buffed or polished, a base or frame to 
maintain said support in proximity to said 
belt, said frame being adjustable axially to 
vary the degree of obliquity of the holder with 
relation to the direction of movement of the 
belt, and means to secure said frame and 
holder in adjusted position, substantially as 
shown and described. 
7. The combination with an endless-belt 
buffer or polisher, pulleys to support said 
belt and means to drive the same, of a rota 
table support to loosely hold the tube or rod 
to be buffed or polished mounted in proximity 
to said belt, said support being mounted to 
rotate freely with the tube or rod, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
8. The combination with an endless-belt 
buffer or polisher, pulleys to support said 
belt and means to drive the same, of a freely 
rotatable sleeve loosely supporting the tube 
or rod to be buffed or polished and having its 
axis disposed at an oblique angle with rela 
tion to the direction of movement of said belt, 
substantially as shown and described. 
9. The combination with an endless-belt 
buffer or polisher, pulleys to support said 
belt and means to drive the same, of a holder 
for the article to be buffed or polished mount= 
ed in proximity to said belt, a tightener-pull 
ley for said belt, a lever in which said tight 
ener-pulley is mounted, a spring holding said 
pulley normally against the belt, a latch 
mounted upon said lever, and a notched sec 
tor for engagement with said latch, substan 
tially as shown and described. 
10. The combination with an endless-belt 
buffer or polisher, pulleys to support said 
belt and means to drive the same, of a holder 
for the article to be buffed or polished mount 
ed in proximity to said belt, a tightener-pull 
ley for said belt, a yielding carrier for yield 
ingly holding said tightener-pulley against 
the belt and means for changing the position 
of said tightener-pulley while maintaining the 
tension on said yielding carrier, substantially 
as shown and described. 
11. The combination with an endless-belt 
buffer or polisher, pulleys to support said 
belt and means to drive the same, of a holder 
for the article to be buffed or polished mount 
ed in proximity to said belt, a tightener-pull 
ley for said belt, a carrier in which said tight 
ener-pulley is mounted, a spring applied to 
said carrier, and means to shift the position 
of said spring to change the position of said 
carrier and pulley while maintaining the ten 
sion on the spring, substantially as shown and 
described. 
This specification signed and witnessed this 
2d day of July, A. D. 1897. 
FIDEL BUBSER, 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. SHAFFER, 
HERMANN F. LUTZ, 
75 
go 
95 
IOO 
II5 
I25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613453.txt	No. 613,453. 
(No Model.) 
F. H. LPPNCOTT. 
PEN.C.L. 
(Application filed Mar, 26, 1898. 
Patented Nov. 1, 1898. 
ySNSN 
d5 
6 5 6 
Z/ 7 
Inventor. 
desher 97. 
incott 
d 
// 
9 stude 
 
Witnesses. 
(Xaux (G w 
well- 
J. Sists 
w 
He roaRIS perers co, Priors-HowaSHINso, c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FISHER. H. LIPPINCOTT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
PENCIL 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Pateat No. 613,458, dated November 1, 1898. 
Application filed March 26, 1898, Serial No. 675,209, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
- 
detached. 
To all, whom it nozy concern. 
Beit known that I, FISHER. H. LIPPINCOTT, 
a citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, State of Penn 
sylvania, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Pencils, of which the 
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompany 
ing drawings, of which 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of a pen 
cil in which my invention is embodied; Fig. 
2, a transverse section, enlarged, on line a ac, 
Fig. 1, and Fig. 3, a plan view of the follower 
The general nature of my invention is a 
tubular sheath or holder, preferably of wood, 
adapted to receive an ordinary lead or crayon, 
with which holder is combined a dog or fol 
lower that extends through a longitudinal slot 
in the holder, into the bore thereof, and has a 
tooth within the bore, which tooth when the 
follower is depressed by pressure of the thumb 
or finger upon the part that projects from the 
said slot will be caused to bite or sink into 
the wall of the bore and so prevent the lead 
from being retracted, but may be released by 
elevating the follower, thus raising the said 
tooth above the wall of the bore, and thereby 
permitting the follower to be pushed forward 
to cause the lead to protrude from the end of 
the holder the desired distance. 
The precise character of the improvement 
will clearly appear from the following descrip 
tion, reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings. 
1 is the sheath or holder, whose external 
form is similar to that of an ordinary wooden 
lead-pencil. It has a longitudinal bore 2 and 
a slot 3, communicating there with, which is of 
less width than the diameter of the bore. 
4 is the follower, which projects from and 
extends through the slot into the bore and has 
a tooth or projection 5, that is preferably in 
clined toward the rear. It has also a part 6 
within the bore whose width is greater than 
that of the slot and whose thickness is less 
than the bore, whereby it (the follower) is pre 
vented from escaping laterally through the 
slot, and also permits a lateral or tilting move 
ment of the follower. I usually bend over the 
forward end of the part 6, as seen in Fig. 1, 
so as to form a head 8 to abut against the lead 
or crayon 7. The portion of the follower pro 
jecting beyond the sheath has in this instance 
a cut-under notch 9, the purpose of which will 
hereinafter appear. 
In using the device the follower is inserted 
in the rear end of the bore and slot, (which 
may afterward be plugged or closed up to pre 
vent accidental escape of the follower,) or it 
may be pushed in at the forward end, if the 
slot be made to extend to that end, or it may 
be inserted, as in the present instance, pre 
vious to cementing together the two halves of 
the holder, as is usually done. The lead hav 
ing been inserted within the bore, which, I 
remark, should be made so that there will be 
sufficient friction (preferably at or near the 
forward end only) to prevent the lead from 
falling out, and the follower being at the rear 
end of the lead, if now it (the follower) be 
pushed forward the tooth 5 will ride upon or 
be raised above the wall of the bore and the 
lead will be advanced and so protruded the 
desired distance from the front end of the 
holder. Pressure is then applied to the fol 
lower so as to sink its tooth 5 into the wood, 
and thus prevent the lead from retracting by 
the pressure on the point in writing or other 
wise. Should it happen, however, that the 
follower be pushed too far, and thus too much 
of the lead be projected from the holder, it 
(the follower) may be drawn back, as indi 
cated by the dotted lines in Fig. 1, by first 
raising or tilting it sufficiently to release the 
tooth, which may be conveniently done by in 
serting the thumb or finger nail in the notch9. 
The follower may be made in various forms, 
each embodying the essential features of that 
part of the invention-that is to say, the part 
adapted to extend through the slot and into 
the bore, the tooth, and means for preventing 
the device from escaping laterally through 
the said slot, yet permitting the hereinbefore 
mentioned raising or tilting of the follower. 
Having thus described my invention, I 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent-- 
1. The combination of the holder of wood, 
or the like, having the bore and the slot com 
municating thereWith, and the longitudinally 
movable follower extending through said slot 
into the bore and movable in the direction of 
the plane of the slot and having the tooth, and 
45 
 
55 
75 
95 
CC 
2 
613,453 
3. The combination of the holder and the 
slot communicating therewith of less than the 
diameter of the bore and the follower con 
sisting of an integral piece of metal or the like 
extending through said slot and into the bore, 
and having the tooth or projection, 5, the 
widened part; 6, and the cut-under notch, 9, 
at the rear end of the part of the device pro 
jecting beyond the said slot, substantially as 
and for the purpose specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto af 
fixed my signature this 16th day of March, 
A. D. 1898. 
FISHER II. LIPPINCOTT, 
20 
25 
Witnesses: 
WALTER C. PUSEY, 
JOSHUA PUSEY. 
means for preventing the device from escap 
ing laterally through said slot, substantially 
as described. 
2. The combination of the holder of wood 
or the like having the bore and the slot com 
municating there with of less width than the 
diameter of the bore, and the follower con 
sisting of an integral piece of metal or other 
suitable material, extending through said slot 
and into said bore, and having the tooth adapt 
ed to enter the Wall of the bore when the de 
vice is pressed toward the latter and the part 
within the bore whose width transversely to 
the slot is greater than that of said slot and 
whose thickness is less than the diameter of 
the bore, substantially as and for the purpose 
set forth. 
O 
15 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613553.txt	No. 613,553. 
(No Model.) 
J. B. BENDER. 
WIRE REEL. 
(Application filed July 12, 1898.) 
Patented Nov. 1, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet i. 
-2 
6 
Y21 
2% 
2 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
V 
recess 
SX 
 
- YS III 
Wilpesses 
''ete 3y 72/5 Alorneys. 
a 76%zz- -A.Aervozer, Ipileptor. 
 
No. 613,553. 
(No Model.) 
J. B. BENDER. 
WIRE REEL. 
(Application filed July 12, 1898.) 
Patented Nov. 1, 1898. 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
incsscs 
ty. fy 7zs Alorneys. 
a 4/zz-A Aezczer, Ipilepior, 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN B. BENDER, OF WYMORE, NEBRASIKA. 
WIRE, REE 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 613,553, dated November 1, 1898. 
Application filed July 12, 1898, Serial No. 685,772, (No model.) 
. 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Beit known that I, JOHN B. BENDER, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wymore, 
in the county of Gage and State of Nebraska, 
have invented a new and useful Wire-Reel, 
of which the following is a specification. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
wire-reels. 
The object of the present invention is to 
improve the construction of wire-reels and 
to provide a simple and comparatively inex 
pensive one adapted to be readily mounted 
On a Wagon and capable as the latter is driven 
Over the ground to wind up wire automatic 
ally and arrange the same uniformly on a 
Spool. 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
vide a simple and efficient guide for directing 
Wire to a spool, adapted to control the wire and 
at the same time permit kinks and bends to 
pass through it without catching and clogging 
the machine. 
The invention consists in the construction 
and novel combination and arrangement of 
parts hereinafter fully described, illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, and pointed 
out in the claims hereto appended. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of a Wire-reel constructed in accordance 
With this invention and shown applied to a 
Wagon. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view 
taken longitudinally of the vehicle. Fig. 3 
is a transverse sectional view. Fig. 4 is an 
enlarged detail perspective view of the oscil 
lating guide. Fig. 5 is a detail sectional view 
illustrating the construction of the tension 
device. Fig. 6 is a detail perspective view 
of the toothed rim or band of the vehicle 
wheel. Fig. 7 is a similar view of the rim or 
band of the frame. 
Like numerals of reference designate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
lingS. 
1 designates a Supporting-frame detachably 
secured to a Wagon 2, and consisting of a ver 
tical bar 3 and a horizontal bar 4, crossing 
each other and connected at the outer end of 
the hub of the wheel 5. The frame is prin 
cipally supported by the wheel 5, and it is 
braced against the upper edges of the Wagon 
body by inclined bars or braces 6, pivoted at 
their outer ends to the vertical bar 3 at oppo 
site sides thereof and provided at their inner 
ends with notches 7, which receive the upper 
edges of the body. The braces 6, which di 
verge slightly, are pivoted in opposite recesses 
of the bar 3 of the frame, and the latter is se 
cured to the Wagon by means of a tie-rod 8, 
provided at its outer end with a hook. and 
having its inner end threaded and extended 
through the bar 3 and provided with a nut 9. 
The hook 10 of the rod is designed to engage 
the upper edge of one of the standards, and 
when the rod extends entirely across the 
wagon-body, as illustrated in Fig. 1 of the ac 
companying drawings, along rod is employed, 
and a short rod is used when the frame is con 
nected with the adjacent standard. 
The frame is connected with the Wheel 5 
by an inner toothed band 11 and an outer 
band 12, which is provided with outwardly 
extending arms 13 and 14, secured, respec 
tively, to blocks 15 and a fender 16 of the 
frame 1. The blocks 15 are arranged at the 
lower end of the vertical bar 3 and the ends 
of the horizontal bar 4, the block at One end 
of the latter being preferably formed by an 
extension of a vertical bar or standard 18. 
The fender 16, which is secured to the inner 
face of the upper portion of the bar 3, has a 
convex upper face and is located above the 
gearing to prevent dirt from falling into and 
clogging the Same. 
The inner band is provided at its inner and 
outer edges with flanges 19 and 20 and forms 
a bearing for the outer band, which is ar 
ranged in the space between the said flanges. 
The bolts 21 for securing the inner band to 
the wheel are located at points between the 
spokes, and the flanges of the inner band ex 
tend from the inner and outer faces of the 
same, the inner portions of the flanges being 
provided with perforations to receive the said 
bolts. The inner threaded ends of the bolts 
are arranged in slots 22 of plates 23, which 
engage the spokes and extend across the 
spaces between the same. The nuts 24 bear 
against the plates 23, and by slightly loosen 
ing the same the said plates may be turned 
out of engagement with the spokes, thereby 
permitting the device to be removed from the 
wheel without entirely detaching the nuts. 
The outer flange 20 is provided with teeth 
26, which mesh with a pinion 27, adapted to 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
IOO 
 
2 
613,553 
O 
2C) 
25 
35 
45 
55 
eonnect the inner band or gear-wheel with a 
pinion of a spool-shaft 29. The pinion 27 
is provided with a hub extension or sleeve 
and is slidingly mounted on a stub-shaft 32, 
whereby it is shifted into and out of mesh 
with the toothed flange of the inner band and 
the pinion of the spool-shaft to throw the ma 
chine into and out of operation. The hub 
extension or sleeve is provided with an an 
nular groove and is connected with an arm 30 
of a shifting-rod 31. The shifting-rod is an 
gularly bent between its ends to offset its 
outer portion from the plane of the pinion, and 
the transverse connecting portion is mounted 
in a guide 33. 
The spool-shaft 29 is tubular, being con 
structed of gas-pipe or other suitable ma 
terial, and within the tubular shaft 29 is ar 
ranged a bearing-tube 34, which is interposed 
between the spool-shaft and a rod 35, where 
by friction is reduced to a minimum. The 
gearing is arranged between the arm 14 and 
the upper portion of the vertical bar 3, and 
the spool-shaft, which extends through the 
frame, is adapted to receive an ordinary 
spool. 37, upon which the wire is reeled, and 
after one spool is filled it may be readily re 
moved from the spool-shaft and another spool 
placed thereon. 
The spool is secured to the spool-shaft by 
a tension device 28, detachably connected with 
the spool and consisting of a pair of bars or 
members provided at their inner faces with 
opposite recesses 39 to receive the shaft and 
connected at their ends by bolts 40, having 
nuts adapted to be adjusted to regulate the 
elamping action. As the wire collects on a 
spool each rotation of the latter winds an in 
creased amount of wire, and in order to com 
pensate for this inequality and relieve the 
parts of strain the tension device is provided. 
The tension device permits the spool to slip 
on the shaft to prevent the wire from being 
broken or the device from being injured. 
The rod upon which the inner tube 34 is 
mounted is provided at its inner end with a 
head and has its outer end threaded. The 
head is arranged against the arm 14 of the 
outer band, and a nut 41 screws on the 
threaded outer end of the rod. 
The spool-shaft is provided at its inner end, 
in the space between the frame and the arm 
14, with a worm 42, which meshes with a pinion 
43 of a shaft 44, journaled in bearings 45 of 
the frame 1 and in a bearing-opening of the 
standard 18. The front end of the shaft 44 
is provided with a crank 46 and is connected 
by a rod or bar 47 with an oscillating guide 
48, adapted to distribute wire evenly on the 
spool. The guide is provided at its top with 
a shank or bar 49, pivoted to an upper arm 
50 of a bracket 51 and provided with a series 
of perforations 52, which permit the connect 
ing-bar to be adjusted to vary the stroke. 
The bracket 51 is provided with a lower ex 
tended arm, which forms a support for the 
guide 48. 
The shank or bar 49 of the guide 4S has its 
lower end fitting in a socket 53 of the guide, 
and the latter consists of upper and lower in 
clined plates 54 and 55 and vertical sides or 
posts 56 and 57, rounded at their inner faces 
and located out of allinement, one of the posts 
being preferably four inches in advance of 
the other. The transverse separation of the 
posts or sides is about one inch, and by this 
construction perfect control of the Wire is 
had, and in event of a kink or bend strik 
ing the front side or post it will clear the 
same before reaching the rear side or post, 
thereby preventing the machine from becom 
ing clogged or injured by the kinks and bends 
of wire. 
The wheel rotates the spool-shaft and mo 
tion is reduced and communicated therefrom 
to the oscillating guide, which travels slowly 
back and forth in front of the spool, distribut 
ing the wire uniformly on the same. 
The invention has the following advan 
tages: The wire-reel, which is simple and com 
paratively inexpensive in construction, is 
adapted to be readily applied to either side 
of a vehicle, and in attaching it to the same 
it may be secured to the adjacent standard 
or to the other standard of the body. The 
fence-wire may be readily gathered and uni 
formly wound on spools, and the device may 
be readily thrown out of gear when desired. 
The top and bottom faces of the oscillating 
guide are disposed at an inclination, and the 
edges are bent upward and downward to pre 
vent wire from catching on them, and a long 
narrow opening is provided for the wire to 
pass through, and at the same time kinks and 
bends are permitted to pass through the said 
opening without catching on the guide. The 
tension device, which is capable of ready ad 
justment, secures the spool to the spool-shaft 
and permits the former to slip on the latter 
to prevent the wire from breaking and also 
to avoid straining the parts as the wire accu 
mulates on the spool. 
Changes in the form, proportion, and minor 
details of construction may be resorted to 
without departing from the spirit or sacrific 
ing any of the advantages of this invention. 
What I claim is 
1. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a frame provided with means 
for connecting it to the body of a Wagon, in 
ner and outer bands journaled on each other, 
one of the bands being connected with the 
frame and the other being designed to be se 
cured to one of the wheels of the vehicle, a 
spool-shaft, and gearing for connecting the 
spool-shaft with the vehicle-wheel, substan 
tially as described. 
2. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a frame designed to be con 
nected with a wagon-body, inner and outer 
bands journaled on each other, one of the 
bands being secured to the frame and the 
other being designed to be mounted on one 
of the wheels of the vehicle, a spool-shaft, 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
618,553 
8 
gearing for connecting the spool-shaft with 
such wheel, a guide adapted to receive wire 
and arranged to move across a spool to dis 
tribute the wire uniformly on the same, and 
means for connecting the guide with the spool 
shaft, substantially as described. 
3. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a frame, braces arranged at 
the top of the frame and adapted to engage 
the upper edges of a wagon-body, a tie-rod 
for securing the frame to the body, means for 
journaling the frame on one of the wheels of 
the body, a spool-shaft, and gearing for con 
necting the spool - shaft with the vehicle 
wheel, substantially as described. 
4. In a device of the class described, th 
combination with a wagon, of a frame Secured 
to the Wagon-body and journaled on One of 
the wagon-wheels, a spool-shaft mounted on 
the frame, and gearing for connecting the 
spool-shaft with the wheel, substantially as 
described. 
5. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a frame provided with means 
for journaling it on one of the wheels of a 
wagon, braces connected to the top of the 
frame and provided with notches to receive 
the upper edges of the adjacent side of the 
Wagon-body, and a tie-rod located between the 
braces and provided with a hook adapted to 
engage one of the standards, a spool-shaft 
mounted on the frame, and gearing for con 
necting the spool-shaft with the Wagon-wheel, 
substantially as described. 
6. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of an inner band provided with 
means for securing it to a wheel, and having 
inner and Outer annular flanges, an Outer band 
arranged between the flanges and provided 
With outwardly - extending arms, a frame 
mounted on the arms of the outer band and 
provided With means for engaging a Wagon 
body, a spool-shaft, and gearing for connect 
ing the same with the wagon-wheel, substan 
tially as described. 
7. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of an inner band provided with 
fastening devices extending inward from it, 
slotted plates receiving the fastening devices 
and adapted to span the spaces between the 
Spokes of a wheel and engage the same, an 
outer band arranged on the inner band, a 
frame secured to the outer band, a spool-shaft 
mounted on the frame, and gearing for con 
necting the spool-shaft with the wheels, sub 
stantially as described. 
8. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of an inner band provided with 
a toothed flange and designed to be secured 
to a wheel, an outer band journaled on the 
inner band, a frame secured to the outer band 
and designed to be connected with a wagon 
body, a spool-shaft mounted on the frame and 
provided With a pinion, and a pinion meshing 
With the said pinion and the teeth of the in 
ner band, and adapted to throw the reel into 
and out of gear, substantially as described. 
9. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of an annular band provided Wit. 
means for engaging a wheel and having a 
toothed flange, an outer band, a frame Se 
cured to the outer band, a spool-shaft, and 
gearing connecting the spool-shaft with the 
toothed flange, substantially as described. 
10. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a frame designed to be jour 
naled on a wagon-wheel and secured to the 
Wagon-body, a gear-wheel connected with the 
wagon-wheel, a spool-shaft mounted on the 
frame and connected with and operated by 
the said gear-wheel, a Worm mounted on the 
spool-shaft, a crank-shaft arranged at right 
angles to the spool-shaft and provided with a 
pinion meshing with the said Worm, and an 
oscillating guide connected with and operated 
by the crank-shaft, substantially as described. 
11. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a frame designed to be mount 
ed on a wagon, a spool-shaft journaled on the 
frame and provided with a Worm, gearing 
for connecting the spool-shaft With one of the 
vehicle-wheels, a standard mounted on the 
frame, a crank-shaft arranged at right an 
gles to the spool-shaft and provided with a 
pinion meshing with the Worm, said crank 
shaft being journaled on the standard, anoscil 
lating guide operating inadvance of the spool 
shaft, and a bar or rod connected with the 
crank-shaft and with the guide, Substantially 
as described. 
12. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a frame, a spool-shaft jour 
naled on the frame, a bracket located in ad 
: Vance of the spool-shaft and provided with 
(upper and lower arms, an Oscillating guide 
located in front of the spool-shaft, pivoted to 
the upper arm of the bracket and guided by 
the lower arm of the same, and gearing for 
connecting the guide with the spool-shaft, 
substantially as described. 
13. In a device of the class described, a 
guide provided at opposite sides with posts 
located out of allinement, one of the posts be 
ing located in advance of the other, substan 
tially as and for the purpose described. 
14. In a device of the class described, a 
guide comprising upper and lower inclined 
plates and vertical posts connecting the plates 
and arranged out of allinement, one of the 
posts being located in advance of the other, 
substantially as described. 
15. In a device of the class described, th 
combination of a frame, inner and outer 
bands, the outer band being provided with 
arms secured to the frame, a shield arranged 
at the top of the frame and interposed be 
tween the same and One of the arms, a spool 
shaft mounted on the frame, and gearing lo 
cated beneath the shield and connecting the 
spool-shaft with the inner band, Substantially 
as described. 
16. In a device of the class described, the 
combination with a shaft and a spool, of a 
tension device connected with the spool and 
O 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
 
75 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I 25 
4. 
6l3,553 
composed of two bars or members and pro 
vided at their inner faces with recesses to re 
ceive the shaft and engaging the same, and 
adjusting devices connecting the ends of the 
bars or members, substantially as described. 
17. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a frame, a rod secured to the 
frame, a tubular spool-shaft arranged on the 
rod, and an inner bearing-tube arranged on 
the rod and interposed between the same and 
the spool-shaft, substantially as described. 
18. In a device of the class described, the 
combination of a frame provided with a guide, 
inner and outer bands, the inner band being 
provided with teeth and the outer band be 
ing secured to the frame, a spool-shaft hav 
ing a pinion, an intermediate pinion meshing 
with the said pinion and with the teeth of the 
O 
inner band, and a shifting-rod arranged in 
the said guide and connected with the inter- 20 
mediate pinion, substantially as described. 
19. In a device. of the class described, a 
guide provided at the top with a socket and 
having inclined top and bottom portions and 
provided with vertical sides or posts rounded 25 
at their inner faces, one of the posts beinglo 
cated in advance of the other, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own. I have hereto affixed my signature in 3o 
the presence of two witnesses. 
JOHN B. BENDER, 
Witnesses: 
S. BREDENTHAL, 
P. M. HOBBS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613653.txt	No. 6(3,653. 
(No Model.) 
Patented Nov. 8, 1898. 
A. ALTMAN. 
CAN OPENER. 
(Application filed Aug. 2, 1897.) 
al 
 
 
 
zY 277 % 
acaa ASAAAC 
B 
a. 
77. 2 a. 
 
l 
 
 
ZZZZZZZZZZ52 
h 
29 
C l 9 J 
WITWESSES. 
IWWEWTOR. 
2%6-7- 
Attorney. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANDREW ALTMAN, OF ELIZABETH, NEWJERSEY. 
CAN-OPENER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 613,653, dated November 8, 1898. 
Application filed August 2, 1897, Serial No. 646,787, (No model.) 
55 
75 
To all whom it may concern: 
Be it known that I, ANDREW ALTMAN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Eliza 
beth, in the county of Union and State of New 
Jersey, have invented certain new and useful 
Improvements in Can-Openers; and Idohere 
by declare the following to be a full, clear, 
and exact description of the invention, such 
as will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same, ref 
erence being had to the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of this specification. 
This invention relates to new and useful 
improvements in can-opening tools, and has 
for its object to provide a cheap, durable, and 
useful device that may be employed for the 
purpose of easily and quickly removing or 
Opening the tops of cans. 
The invention consists in the general con 
struction and arrangement of the various 
parts to be hereinafter described, and par 
ticularly pointed out in the claim. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a side elevation illustrating a 
can-opener and corkscrew in position for use. 
Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section showing the 
receptacle in which the tools not in use are 
carried. Fig. 3 is a partial section illustrat 
ing the manner of securing the tools to the 
holder. 
Like letters of reference refer to correspond 
ing parts throughout the various figures. 
A indicates the universal handle, within 
one end of which is formed a tool-receptacle 
C, arranged to carry within it the implements 
to be employed therewith. This receptacle 
is inclosed by means of the swinging door B, 
which is pivoted at itsinner end upon a screw 
a' and is arranged when in position over the 
receptacle to swing below the edges thereof, 
thus forming a secure means by which the 
door is held from disengagement. At a*a. 
notch is provided in the end wall of the re 
ceptacle to permit a small instrument to be 
inserted in under the edge of the cover, where 
by it is raised out of the recess to be swung 
sidewise upon its pivot, by which access may 
be had to the receptacle. 
Suitably located at the opposite end of the 
holder are a number of pockets b, c, and 
d, adapted to receive and engage the tools, 
wherein they are held in position for use. 
The pockets b and c extend through the 
holder from side to side and at right angles 
to the long axis thereof, while the pocket d. 
is formed in the extreme outer end opposite 
the tool-receptacle and at right angles to the 
pockets band c. The shanks of the tools and 
pockets within which they are engaged are 
preferably made somewhat tapering and rec 
tangular in cross-section, so that when they 
are united the tool will be brought to a firm 
rigid seat and held from all lateral motion. 
Upon one side of the holder, at that end in 
which the pockets are formed, there is a dou 
ble spring-catch C, secured at its middle point 
by means of the screw e and provided at its 
free end with locking-pins f g to engage 
through the holes handi, which are arranged 
to enter the tool-pockets b and d at their 
edges, and as the shanks of the tools are pro 
vided with notches at l to register with these 
holes the pins fg are forced into engagement 
there with, thus securely locking the tools in 
position. 
In Fig. 1 the holder is shown as fitted with 
a can-opening tool, consisting of a cutting 
knife in and a tool in, which is provided with 
a pointed end to penetrate the can, and a right 
angled portion at m' to form a pivot upon 
which the holder is turned in the process of 
opening said can. This cutting-knife is held 
in the pocket c, which intersects the pocket 
d, by providing in its shank a hole or recess 
p, and upon the inner end of the tool in a lug 
p', so that when the tools are inserted in their. 
respective pockets the lug and hole engage, 
and as the ping upon the outer end of the 
spring C drops into the notch l in the shank 
of the tool in the parts are securely locked to 
gether. 
It will be obvious that some slight modifi 
cations may be made in the general construc 
tion and arrangement of my improved tool 
without materially affecting the results, and 
I desire to have it understood that while I 
have preferred to illustrate my invention in 
connection with the particular class of imple 
ments herein shown and described I do not 
desire to limit myself thereto. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim is 
As a new article of manufacture, a can 
opener, comprising a handle, in one end of 
95 
OC 
IO 
3o 
35 
45 
 
618,658 
2 
which pockets are formed, one of said pock- compressed pin adapted to hold the blade iri 
ets lying in axial line with said handle, the place, substantially as described. 
other of said pockets intersecting at right an- 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
gles the first-named pocket, can-opening tools, in presence of two Witnesses. 
5 comprising a centering pivot-point and an 
opening-blade held within said pockets, the 
opening-blade adapted to secure the center- 
ing-point in place in the handle, and a spring- 
FLORENCE M. STORCK, 
SAMUEL R. O.GDEN. 
Witnesses: 
ANDREW ALTMAN. 
cs 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613753.txt	No. 613,753. 
(No Model.) 
 
W. T. BRANITZKY. 
BCYCLE GEARNG. 
(Application filed Sept. 30, 1897.) 
Patented Nov. 8, 1898. 
5 
N 4 
1. 
3. 
WITNESSES 
3%-17s, 
7%.-a--- 
INVENTOR 
 
%a, 
by 7% 
THE NORAS PETERs co, PHoro-Lr Ho, washington, p. c. 
H 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM T. BRANITZKY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
BICYCLE-GEARNG. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 618,753, dated November 8, 1898. 
Application filed September 30, 1897, Serial No, 658,545, (No model.) 
To cell, Luhon, it naily concert: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMT. BRANITZKY, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi 
nois, have invented a new and useful Im 
provement in Bicycle Gearing and Propelling 
Mechanism, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
My invention relates to bicycle gearing and 
propelling mechanism, and has particular ref 
erence to an improved arrangement of gear 
ing adapted for lever propulsion. Its objects 
are, first, to provide an improved chainless 
gearing; second, to arrange same in compact 
form, and, third, to center same at the axle of 
the rear wheel, whereby the axle may be used 
as a bearing for the driver. I accomplish 
these objects by the construction illustrated 
in the accompanying drawings, in which - 
Figure 1 is a side elevation of part of a bi 
cycle embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a 
top plan of same. Fig. 3 is an enlargement 
of the casing 6 and gearing therein from the 
same view as shown in Fig. 1, the pitch-lines 
and circumference of the wheels being indi 
cated by the dotted lines. Fig. 4 is a hori 
zontal section of Fig. 3 on the line aca, show 
ing also the outline of the casing on the other 
end of the axle of the rear wheel. Fig. 5 is 
an enlarged detail view of part of the bear 
ing in the lever for the crank-pin 11, from the 
same view as shown in Fig. 1; and Fig. 6 is 
a vertical section of same on the line y J. 
The main parts shown in Fig. 1 are the cas 
ing 6, supported by the axle of the rear wheel 
and by the tubing 15. At the rear end of the 
casing is the fulcrum 9 for the lever 10. The 
lever has a longitudinal slot therein, serving 
as a bearing for the crank-pin 11 on the driver 
1. The free end of the lever is provided with 
a pedal 13 and is preferably connected with 
a guide 14 to prevent the lever from being 
strained outwardly. 
The driver, as will be seen by reference to 
Figs. 3 and 4, is an internal gear-wheel run 
ning on the axle 4 of the rear wheel of the 
bicycle. In the form shown the driver con 
sists of a plate 1, having the internal gear 
teeth riveted to its inner side near the cir 
cumference. Within this is the intermediate 
wheel 2 on the axle 5, which is supported by 
IO 
25 
35 
45 
 
the back wall of the casing. The axle 4 of 
the rear wheel of the bicycle is journaled in 
the casing and has the pinion 3rigidly mount 
ed thereon. The axle 4 has a flange 4 there 
on, to which the spokes of the wheel are se 
cured, the wheel being rigidly mounted upon 
its axle. A flange 4' projects into the casing 
from the flange 4'. The cone 6' is threaded 
to the casing. The axle 4 is reduced at the 
part where the pinion 3 is secured, forming 
a shoulder which holds the pinion free from 
the cone 6'. Outside of the pinion the driver 
1 is journaled upon the axle. At the end of 
the axle a nut or cone 8 is threaded to same 
and locked thereto by the screw 8". A sec 
tion 19 of the casing 6, (indicated by dotted 
lines in Fig. 1) is removable to provide for 
the insertion and removal of the axle. 
Insecuring the parts together the axle is first 
inserted in the casing. The section 19 is then 
put into its proper position. The cone 6' is 
then screwed into the casing after the inser 
tion of the balls 16, the cone serving also to hold 
the section 19 in its proper place. The pinion 
is then adjusted upon the axle against the 
shoulder formed therefor, the pinion being 
feathered or keyed upon the axle. The balls 
17, driver, balls 18, and come 8 are then succes 
sively put into their respective places. The 
plate 6' is then secured to the casing 6, thus 
forming a substantially-closed casing. 
The driver 1 has an annular projection1", 
extending to the outside of the casing and 
having thereon a pin 11. As will be seen by 
reference to Figs. 5 and 6, the pin 11 has piv 
otally mounted thereon a block 12, having 
grooves 12' therein for contact with the balls 
12', which are supported in an upper and 
lower row in the lever-slot and partly exposed 
toward the path of the block. This construc 
tion, while providing a sliding longitudinal 
movement, prevents a relative lateral move 
ment of the block and the lever and also 
prevents a frictional contact between same. 
The lever is so operated that the pin will 
move downwardly toward the rear of the slot 
on the downward stroke of the lever, thus 
carrying the driver in the direction indicated 
by the arrow. The intermediate wheel 2, 
meshing with the internal teeth on the driver, 
revolves in the same direction and drives the 
55 
65 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 
s 
613,753 
providing a bearing for said pin, whereby and 
through said gear-wheels, said bicycle-wheel 
is propelled, substantially as described. 
2. The combination of a bicycle-frame; a 
casing secured to the rear fork, and having 
an annular opening; a bicycle-wheel having 
its axle journaled in the casing; a pinion. On 
said axle; an intermediate gear-wheel jour 
naled in the casing and meshing with said 
pinion; an internal gear-wheel journaled on 
said axle, and meshing with the intermediate 
gear-wheel, and having an annular projection 
extending through said annular opening to 
the outside of the casing; a pin secured to Said 
projection; and an arm providing a bearing 
for said pin, whereby and through said gear 
wheels, said bicycle-wheel is propelled, sub 
stantially as described. 
WILLIAM. T. BRANITZKY. 
Witnesses: 
ALFRED MELTZER, 
WM. R. R.UMMLER. 
25 
35 
O 
m 
2, OW. 
pinion 3, together with the bicycle-wheel, in 
the opposite direction, as indicated by the 
As indicated by Figs. 2 and 4, the herein 
before-described mechanism is duplicated on 
the opposite side of the bicycle. 
It is plain that the form of the bearings in 
the casing, as well as the sliding-lever con 
nection with the pin 11, may be altered with 
out departing from the spirit of my invention. 
What I claim as my invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of a bicycle-frame; a 
casing secured to the rear fork, and having 
an annular opening; a bicycle-wheel having 
its axle journaled in the casing; a pinion on 
said axle; an intermediate gear-wheel jour 
naled in the casing; and meshing with said 
pinion; an internal gear-wheel journaled on 
said axle, and meshing with the intermediate 
gear-wheel, and having a pin projecting 
through said annular opening; and an arm 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613853.txt	No. 613,853. 
(No Mode.) 
W. H. CHAPMAN. 
ELECTRIC REGULATOR. 
(Application filed Mar. 24, 1898.) 
Patented Nov. 8, 1898. 
2. Sheets-Sheet . 
 
  
 
 
  
  
OOOOOOOOOOOOO 
OOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
M. 
(2E. F. 
Fig. 3 
W.M.' 
P 
Witnesses. 
In ven to r. 
 
No. 613,853. 
Patented Nov. 8, 1898. 
W. H. CHAPMAN. 
ELECTRIC REGULATOR. 
(Application filed Mar. 24, 1898.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2 
f 
i i 
J 
----- 
s 
) H ?o 
-77 
Fig. 6 
: f 
L 
 
O 
\ 
A 
C/+(-Ok 
3. yy 
M 
3 
X. 
x 
J. 
- 
i. 
i. 
d) Ho 
3 
d 
7. 
o 
A' 
A. 
2, 3 
s 
d 
d 
d 
X 
2 
a. 
1 
u" 
. 
3 
y: 
h 
* BZ, 
c 
 
w 
E. 
c 
Witness e S. 
(5.3 
SC-2 
3 
P 
fy.7 
O 
B 
l 
N 
T 
4. 
XC 
2. 
F/ 
In ventor 
%.7 eV/. 
the noRRIS PETERs co., Photo-Litho, wASHINGTON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM II. CHAPMAN, OF PORTLAND, MAINE, ASSIGNOR TO THE BELKNAP 
MOTOR COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
ELECTRIC REGULATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 618,853, dated November 8, 1898. 
Application filed March 24, 1898, Serial No, 675,051 (No model.) 
25 
To all, who in it may conce71. 
Beit known that I, WILLIAM. H. CHAPMAN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Portland, in the county of Cumberland and 
5 State of Maine, have invented a new and use 
ful Improvement in Electric Regulators, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to electric regulators 
in which a rheostat is operated automatically 
IO by magnetic power for the purpose of main 
taining either a constant voltage or a con 
stant current at some point in a given elec 
trical circuit. It is designed as an improve 
ment on the electric regulator for dynamos 
I5 shown and described in Letters Patent No. 
599,892, issued to me March 1, 1898. 
The objects of my invention are to provide 
a more direct application of the power of the 
Working solenoid to the contact-slider of the 
20 rheostat and to arrange a retarding device 
that may be adjusted while the regulator is 
doing service. I attain these objects by the 
mechanism shown in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the com 
plete regulator. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the 
Same. Fig. 3 is a vertical cross-section of the 
Working solenoid on the line acac of Fig. 2, 
and is drawn to a somewhat larger scale. 
3o Fig. 4 is an end elevation of the working 
Solenoid. Fig. 5 is a vertical cross-section of 
the middle portion of the Working solenoid 
on the line if y of Fig. 3. Fig. 6 is a detail 
View, partly in cross-section, showing the con 
35 tact-points and parts mechanically connected 
there with which control the energy of the 
Working solenoid, and is drawn to a large 
Scale. Fig. 7 is a diagram showing the com 
plete electrical connections of the various 
4o parts of the regulator with each other and 
With an alternating-current-generating sys 
tem which it is arranged to regulate. 
D is a cast-iron box having holes in its sides 
for Ventilation. The back of the box extends 
45 above the cover to provide support for the 
solenoid A and other parts of the regulator. 
Inside of the box is a set of resistance-coils 
(represented at t in the diagram Fig. 7) con 
nected in continuous series with each other 
5o and having their terminals connected in the 
usual manner of rheostats with a series of 
insulated copper segments B. On the cover 
of the box D are upwardly-projecting lugs b 
b', which support the Working solenoid. The 
working solenoid consists of two differen- 55 
tially-wound coils E and F, one mounted on 
each end of a brass tube O, and a soft-iron 
core T, arranged to move longitudinally with 
in the tube. The end portions of the core T 
are fitted to the tube nicely, like a piston to 6o 
a cylinder. The extreme ends of the core T, 
however, are turned to a cone shape, as ex 
perience has proved that that form gives a 
more even magnetic force throughout the 
range of movement of the core than plain 65 
blunt ends would do. The length of the core 
T is made somewhat less than the whole dis 
tance through the two coils E and F. 
At the middle part of the tube O and in 
closing it tightly is a brass casting C, having 7o 
on its lower side a plain surface, which rests 
on the lugs b b', to which it is secured by 
screws C. a. The casting C has on its upper 
side a longitudinal slot c, which coincides 
with a slot cut through the tube O. At the 75 
middle portion of the core T is attached the 
bar N, which passes upward through the slot 
c, along which it can move freely. Attached 
to the upper end of the bar N, but insulated 
therefrom, is the contact brush or slider O. 8o 
The contact-slider O is arranged to move over 
the surface of the series of segments B. A 
wire d connects the slider O with the segment 
of the Series which is situated at the extreme 
left, and the slider serves to short-circuit 85 
more or less of the resistance-coils connected 
with the segments, according to the position 
of the slider along the series of segments. 
The coils E and E are wound in a manner 
that constitutes a double differential solenoid 9o 
which is substantially the same in its con 
struction, connections, and operation as the 
differential Solenoid described in the Letters 
Patent, No. 599,892, issued to me March 1, 
1898, and it therefore does not need a detailed 95 
description in this specification. The char 
acters used in this specification to designate 
the wires leading from the various parts of 
this differential solenoid are purposely made 
the same as those used in the Letters Patent loo 
referred to to designate corresponding wires, 
so as to facilitate comparison of the two with 
 
618,853 
75 
9 O 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
ments 1 2 3 4, &c., together with the ring Y 
each other. At each end of the differential 
solenoid is a brass flange G. G', into which the 
and bar 2, constitute what is known as a 
compoundingswitch, whose purpose is the 
tube O is secured. 
MM" are cast-iron end plates secured by 
introduction of more or less of the turns of 
screws to the flanges G. G', with which they 
wire on a coil into a generator-circuit. 
make an oil-tight joint. Each end plate has 
On the top of the solenoid A is the fiber 
in it a chamberee', which has an opening up 
diskW, on which is mounted the forked brass 
ward, in which are the pipe-plugs ff', and 
piece n. In the piece in the lever His piv 
an opening downward connecting with the 
oted. At one end the lever H has the con 
necting-rod I pivoted to it, and the rod I Sup 
pipe IX, which leads from one end to the other 
of the solenoid and provides a passage for 
ports the iron core L of the solenoid A. The 
oil or other liquid which is used to fill up the 
upper end of this core is preferably located 
chambers e e', tube O, and the connecting 
about two-thirds way through the solenoid 
pipes. At one end of the pipe K is an ordi 
from bottom to top. On the other end of the 
nary valve P, such as used by steam-fitters, 
lever II is the weight J, which is adjustable 
and serves to adjust the freedom of flow of 
to different distances from the center or full 
liquid from one end to the other. At the 
crum of the lever II and serves to adjust the 
other end of the pipe K is a drain-cock U, 
balance between the two opposing forces that 
which is ordinarily kept closed, but is used 
act on the iron core L-namely, the force of 
gravity tending downward and the magnetic 
whenever it is desired to remove the liquid. 
Q and Q are iron rods extending from one 
pull of the solenoid tending upward. At 
end plate to the other and serving to improve 
tached to the lever II and projecting radially 
the magnetic circuit of the solenoid. 
upward from its fulcrum is the strip of heavy 
R. R." are two brass pieces which span across 
sheet-brass l, having at its upper end two 
platinum contact-pieces and i', one on each 
over the coil F from one rod Q to the other 
rod Q', to which they are secured. Onto the 
side. i and f' are platinum-tipped screws 
pieces R. R." is secured the cast-iron shoe S, 
placed one each side of the piece land al 
which serves as a frame for containing and 
ranged to make contact with the platinum 
clamping the Series of segments B, the seg 
contact-pieces i and it as the lever II is tilted 
ments being insulated from the shoe by fiber 
The screws if are 
one way or the other. 
or mica. 
supported and insulated by the circular 
A is a solenoid secured to the upwardly-ex 
shaped piece of fiber 7, attached to the up 
per end of the brass piece 77. 
tended back of the box D. This solenoid is 
composed of two distinct windings g and h, 
Referring to Fig. 7, A is an alternating 
Fig. 7. 
current generator whose voltage is to be con 
g is a winding of many turns of fine wire, 
trolled. C' is the direct-current excite) which 
and h are a few turns of a comparatively large 
supplies current to charge the field-magnets 
wire. The winding g has one end connected 
of the generator A. X" is the primary coil of 
by wire u to one terminal of an incandescent 
a transformer, and X* is the secondary coil 
lamp r, which is used as a non-inductive re 
of the transformer. One end of the field 
sistance, and the other end of the winding g 
magnet wire of the generator is connected by 
is connected with a terminal post p' on top 
wired to one end of the series of resistance 
of the solenoid A. The other terminal of the 
coils t, and the other end of the field-magnet 
lamp 7" is connected to the other binding-post 
wire of the generator is connected by wired 
45 p on top of the solenoid A. The winding h, 
to one terminal of the exciter. The other ter 
has its two ends and each successive convo 
minal of the exciter is connected by wire di 
lution connected, as shown in Fig. 7, with a 
with the other end of the set of resistance 
series of metallic segments arranged in a cir 
coils i. Thus the circuit through which the 
field-magnet of the generator is charged in 
cle, the number of which varies with the num 
ber of turns of wire used in the winding h. 
cludes in it the resistance-coils i, or such por 
In Fig. 7, his represented as having four con 
tion of them as are not short-circuited by the 
volutions, and there are five segments, to 
brush O. The two terminals of the secondary 
which these are connected. One end of the 
coil X are connected with the two binding 
winding his connected by wire 'to segment 
posts p p", which are the terminals of the cir 
1 and the other end of the winding by wire 
cuit composed of the fine winding g and the 
'v' to segment 5, and the intermediate convo 
lamp 7". The two terminals of the exciter are 
lutions are connected by wires v' ' ' to seg 
connected also to the wires if and ly, which 
ments 2, 3, and 4, respectively. The series of 
represent the terminals of the differential So 
segments 1 2 3 4, &c., is mounted on a piece 
lenoid E. F. 
of slate, (shown at W, Fig. 1) by which they 
v' and v' are the Wires leading from the 
terminals of the alternating generator. One 
are insulated. Concentric with the circular 
series of segments is a metallic ring Y, also 
of these wires, U*, goes directly to the com 
pounding-switch and is connected to segment 
mounted on the slate W. 
2 is a metallic bar pivoted at the center of 
l. The ring Y has the wire W leading from 
the ring Y and serving to connect the ring Y 
it, and the two wires W' and Ware the line 
with any one of the series of segments onto 
wires which lead to the devices to be oper 
which it may be placed. The series of seg- ated by the generator. The connection hav 
55 
35 
IIC 
II5 
I 25 
 
613,853 
3. 
75 
ing been made as shown and described, the 
operation of the mechanism may be explained 
as follows: Suppose the generator and its ex 
citer to be running under normal conditions 
and that the voltage of the generator, and con 
sequently the voltage of the transformer sec 
ondary, is a tits normal amount. The alternat 
ing current that is then flowing through the 
fine winding g of the solenoid Ahas a certain 
lifting force on the core L. The weight J is 
then moved along on the lever II until its 
counterbalancing force, together with the nor 
mal lifting force of the core L, will just bal 
ance the lever H in a horizontal position and 
keep the platinum contacts i i" clear of the 
screws if on both sides. This being the case, 
a current passes from the exciter by wire y 
through one half of the wire on each of the 
coils E and F and back to the exciter by the 
wirely. The pull of both coils being equal, 
the core Tremains stationary. But now sup 
pose the voltage of the generator by reason 
of increase of speed has risen to a higher 
value. This causes a greater current through 
the winding g. The core L is then acted upon 
by greater force, destroying the balance of 
the lever H and bringing the contact-piece 
in contact with the screw i. Currents then 
flow through both halves of the coil F and 
through only one half of the coil E. The two 
halves of F neutralize each other and the core 
T is pulled toward E and the slidero is moved 
Over the segments toward the left, introduc 
ing more resistance into the field-magnet cir 
cuit of the alternator. The rapidity of the 
movement is checked by the pressure of the 
oil against the core T, for the core T can only 
move as fast as it is able to displace the oil 
in front of it and force it through the pipe K 
to the other end, and the rapidity of the flow 
through this pipe may be controlled by setting 
the valve P more or less widely open. 
The field-magnets of all electrical genera 
tors take some appreciable time to change 
their degree of excitation, some requiring 
much more time than others, and this ar 
rangement of pipe and valve enables a quick 
and accurate adjustment to be made of the 
rapidity of the introduction of resistance into 
the field-magnet circuit to the rapidity with 
which the field-magnetis observed to respond 
to the change. Now suppose the voltage of 
the generator falls to a lower value by reason 
of diminished speed. The core L is then 
pulled up With less force, the lever H is un 
balanced the other way, and contact is made 
between the contact-pieces i' and screw.j'. In 
this case currents will flow through both 
halves of the coil Eand through only one half 
of the coil F. The two halves of E then neu 
tralize each other and the core T is pulled to 
Ward F and the contact-slider O moves to 
ward the right and cuts out resistance from 
the field-magnet circuit until the voltage is 
again brought to the normal and the lever H 
balanced, when the core T will come to a 
standstill again. 
It will be seen that the action of the appa 
ratus, as above described, is to maintain a 
constant voltage at the terminals of the gen 
erator; but in practice it is sometimes desir 
able to maintain the constant Voltage not at 
the terminals of the generator, but at some 
distant point on the line-wires. When there 
is considerable current being supplied to the 
lines by the generator, the loss of voltage on 
the lines may be considerable, and it is there 
fore often desirable to raise the voltage at the 
generator a little in proportion to the load on 
the line-wires. To accomplish this automat 
ically is the object of the coarse winding h, 
in which the main current is caused to flow 
in a direction opposite to the current in the 
fine winding g, thus neutralizing a portion of 
the effect of the winding h, on the core L and 
necessitating a higher voltage to balance the 
lever H when the lines are loaded. This ar 
rangement is known as a compound wind 
ing,' and the amount of compounding effect 
is proportional to the number of turns of the 
coarse wire that are introduced into the main 
circuit. The purpose of the compounding 
switch is to adjust the compounding effect by 
introducing more or less of the turns of the 
coarse winding hinto the main circuit. When 
the bar 2 is located, as in the diagram Fig. 7, 
on segment 1, there is no compound effect, 
because the main current entering by seg 
ment 1 passes through the bar 2 and ring Y 
to the line-wire W without going through a 
single convolution of the windingh. If, how 
ever, the bar 2 is located on segment 5, the 
main current will have to pass through all the 
convolutions of the winding h to get to the 
line W and in so doing produces the maxi 
mum compounding effect, and different suc 
cessive degrees of compound effect may be 
obtained by placing the bar 2 oil segments in 
termediate between 1 and 5. 
In some cases it is desirable to secure a con 
stant current in the main lines irrespective 
of the voltage for such purposes as the run 
ning of a series of incandescent lamps or a 
series of arc-lamps. 
In this case the fine 
winding g is disconnected or left off entirely 
and a considerable number of convolutions 
are used in the coarse winding h. The lever 
H will then be balanced only when a definite 
predetermined current is passing in the main 
circuit, and the definite current at which it 
will balance may be set by the weight J or by 
a change of the number of turns of winding 
on the solenoid A that are in the main circuit. 
The great advantage of my apparatus, as 
above described, consists in the directness of 
application of the power of the working so 
lenoid to the work of moving the resistance 
contact-slider and also in the facility of ad 
justment of the retarding device. The solen 
oid being placed in a horizontal position, there 
is no necessity for a counterbalancing weight 
and lever-arm, as is the case in that form of 
apparatus where the solenoid is vertical, and 
so the friction of pivots and the momentum 
95 
IOO 
Io5 
O 
II5 
125 
I 30 
O 
(5 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
 
O 
of dead-weights are done away with, and the 
only friction is that of the core T along the 
inside of the tube and of the slider O along 
the surface of the segments; but since any 
pressure that the slider O has on the surface 
of the segments relieves to just that extent 
the weight of the core T, bearing down on the 
lower side of the tube, the friction due to the 
weight of the core is largely transferred to 
the slider, where it is useful and necessary in 
maintaining more perfect contact, and the 
total friction is reduced to the minimum, and 
it is found in practice to require a much less 
expenditure of energy to operate the working 
solenoid in my present form of apparatus 
than in the form hitherto employed on ac 
count of its simplicity and directness of ap 
plication. The oil also, in which the core T 
is practically immersed, reduces the friction 
at the same time that it furnishes the means 
of retardation. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination of a solenoid mounted 
on a tube or cylinder containing a liquid, an 
iron core fitted as a piston inside of said tube 
or cylinder and arranged to be moved by the 
magnetic pull of Said Solenoid, a passage-Way 
for the movement of said liquid from one end 
to the other of said cylinder, a valve to regul 
late the rapidity of flow of said liquid and a 
rheostat having its contact-slider operatively 
connected to said iron core. 
2. In an electric regulator the combination 
of a solenoid having a differential winding 
mounted on a tube or cylinder and having its 
magnetic core fitted as a piston to said cylin 
der, a passage-way leading from one end to 
the other of said cylinder, and means for 
closing said passage-Way to a greater or less 
degree. 
3. Two differentially-wound coils mounted 
on a tube or cylinder, an iron core arranged 
to be moved inside of said cylinder by the 
magnetic force of said coils, and fitted to act 
as a piston inside of said cylinder, a passage 
way leading from one end of said cylinder to 
the other, a valve in said passage-Way, and a 
rheostat whose contact-slider is operatively 
connected to said iron core. 
4. Two differentially-wound coils of wire 
mounted on a closed tube or cylinder having 
its axis in a horizontal position and contain 
ing a liquid, an iron core arranged to be moved 
along the axis of said cylinder and having its 
periphery fitted to said cylinder to act as a 
piston, a passage-way leading from one end of 
said cylinder to the other, means for closing 
said passage-Way to a greater or less degree, a 
rheostat whose contact-segments are arranged 
in a horizontal straight line parallel to the 
axis of said cylinder and whose contact-slider 
is operatively connected to said core. 
5. In combination with an electrical gen 
erator, a differentially-wound solenoid mount 
ed on a tube or cylinder and having its mov 
able magnetic core fitted to act as a piston in 
said cylinder, a passage-way leading from 
one end of said cylinder to the other, means 
for closing said passage-way more or less, a 
rheostat operatively connected to said core, 
contact-points controlling the current admit 
ted to said differential solenoid, and a solenoid 
for operating said contact-points having a 
winding connected into the main supply-cir 
cuit of said electrical generator. 
6. In combination with an electrical gen 
erator, a differentially-wound solenoid mount 
ed on a tube or cylinder and having its mov 
able magnetic core fitted to act as a piston in 
said cylinder, a passage-way leading from 
one end of said cylinder to the other, means 
for closing said passage-way more or less, a 
rheostat operatively connected to said core, 
contact-points controlling the current admit 
ted to said differential solenoid, a solenoid 
for operating said contact-points having a 
winding connected into the main supply-cir 
cuit of said electrical generator and a switch 
for varying the number of convolutions of 
said winding contained in the said main sup 
ply-circuit. 
7. In combination with an electrical gen 
erator, a differentially-wound solenoid mount 
ed on a tube or cylinder and having its mov 
able iron core fitted to act as a piston in said 
cylinder, a passage-way leading from one end 
of said cylinder to the other, means for clos 
ing said passage-way more or less, a rheostat 
operatively connected to said core, contact 
points controlling the current admitted to 
said differential solenoid, a solenoid for op 
erating said contact-points having one wind 
ing connected into a circuit shunted from 
said generator-terminals and another wind 
ing connected into the main circuit of Said 
generator. 
WMI. II. CIIAPMAN. 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM J. KNOWLTON, 
MARY E. WILLARD. 
7 O 
75 
95 
OO 
IO5 
4. 
613,853 
25 
35 
45 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US613953.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER ALLEN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. 
UN ON SUT. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 613,953, dated November 8, 1898. 
Application filed May 25, 1898, Serial No. 681,686, (No model.) 
the garment at the two edges and there will 
be no loose flaps. This gives a double pro 
tection to the chest, removes the buttons from 
the center to the sides, where they are not ob 
jectionable, and allows a large opening when 
the garment is unbuttoned, so that it can be 
readily applied or removed without danger 
of tearing or straining the garment. Further 
more, the triangular breast-piece can be made 
perfectly plain or ornamented in the most 
elaborate manner, as it is made entirely in 
dependent of the garment and attached to 
the garment after it has been completed. 
It will be understood that hooks and eyes 
or other fastenings may be substituted for 
the buttons and that the buttons attaching 
the inner flap can be dispensed with if nec 
essary. 
While I have shown a full union suit, the 
arm and leg portions may be modified with 
out departing from my invention, and in 
some instances may be used on undervests 
or other underwear. 
m 
I claim as my invention- 
1. The combination of a union garment 
having an opening in the body portion cut on 
the bias from the neck-opening toward the 
waist, with a triangular shield secured to one 
edge of the garment at the opening and over 
lapping the other edge, substantially as de 
scribed. 
2. The combination in a union garment, of 
the body having an opening cut from One 
side of the neck down to about the center of 
the waist, a triangular breast-piece secured to 
the garment at the edge of the opening and 
overlapping the garment at the breast, and 
fastenings securing the inner edge of the gar 
ment to the breast-piece and the outer edge 
of the breast-piece to the garment, substan 
tially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
ALEXANDER ALLEN. 
Witnesses: 
WILL. A. BARR, 
JOS. H. KLEIN. 
55 
75 
go 
... 
O 
To a Luhon, it not concern: 
Be it known that I, ALEXANDER ALLEN, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in Phila 
delphia, Pennsylvania, have invented certain 
Improvements in Union Suits, of which the 
following is a specification. 
One object of my invention is to manufac 
ture a union garment in such a manner that 
it will have an overlapping section at the 
breast. 
A further object is to make this overlapping 
portion of an independent section, and a still 
further object of the invention is to so make 
the opening that the garment can be readily 
slipped on or off the Wearer. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view of my improved union suit, illustrat 
ing my invention. Fig. 2 is a view of the un 
finished body portion cut on the bias to form 
the opening, and Fig 3 is a triangular shield 
which is attached to the union suit and forms 
the overlapping breast portion. 
Union suits opening from the center of the 
neck directly down are objectionable, as they 
are apt to gap open, and the buttons confin 
ing the two portions together make it un 
comfortable for the wearer. Suits having 
openings across the shoulders are objection 
able, as they are uncomfortable and do not 
allow of the free stretch of the material and 
are difficult to put on and take off. I Over 
come these objections in the following man 
ner: A is the ordinary form of union Suit, as 
shown in Fig. 2. I cut the body portion after 
it is made on the line aca, forming two edges 
a d'. To the edge a, Isecure the edge b of the 
triangular breast-piece B, Fig. 3, as shown 
in Fig. 1, and stitch this breast-piece Securely 
to the garment, as shown, in Such a manner 
that its overlapping-edge b' can be detachably 
secured to the garment near the opposite 
shoulder. 
The garment is provided with buttons c, 
which are secured to the inner flap A at the 
points indicated in Fig. 1, and in the trian 
gular breast-piece Bare buttonholes binline 
with the buttons c, so that the outer flap of 
the breast-piece can be securely fastened to 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614053.txt	No. 614,053. 
(No Mode.) 
Patented Nov. 8, 1898. 
S. T. JOHNSON. 
CIRCUAR SAW. 
(Application filed June 24, 1898.) 
 
W/TWESSES 
/WWEA/TOR 
BY 
AT TORNEYS. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIEVE THEODOR JOHNSON, OF TRINIDAD, CALIFORNIA. 
CIRCULAR SAW. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Paterit No. 614,053, dated November 8, 1898. 
Application filed June 24, 1898, Serial No. 684,338, (No model.) 
To all, whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SIEVE THEODOR JOHN 
SON, of Trinidad, in the county of Humboldt 
and State of California, have invented a new 
and Improved Circular Saw, of which the fol 
lowing is a full, clear, and exact description. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
new and improved circular saw which is sim 
ple and durable in construction, very effect 
ive in operation, and more especially de 
signed for sawing shingles and the like and 
arranged with a removable cutting-section to 
permit of readily and conveniently removing 
said section from the central spindle-section 
and replacing it by a new one in case the cut 
ting-section is worn out or broken. 
The invention consists of novel features 
and parts and combinations of the same, as 
will be fully described hereinafter and then 
pointed out in the claim. 
Reference is to be had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part of this specification, 
in which similar characters of reference indi 
cate corresponding parts in both figures. 
Figure 1 is a face view of the improvement 
with part of the outer cutting-section broken 
a Way, and Fig. 2 is an enlarged cross-section 
of the same on the line 22 of Fig. 1. 
The improved circular saw is made in two 
sections A and B, of which the inner central 
section A is adapted to be secured to the spin 
dle or arbor C, and the outer section B is 
made ring-shaped with teeth at the peripheral 
edge, the thickness of the section decreasing 
from the inner edge to the outer toothed edge 
as is plainly indicated in Fig. 2. 
On the face of the inner section Aisformed 
a boss A", formed on its periphery with a 
screw-thread on which screws a correspond 
ing thread formed on the inner end of the 
outerring-section B. Thus when the section 
B is screwed on the boss A the faces of the 
sections A and B are flush with each other, 
as is plainly indicated in Fig. 2, and the in 
mer portion of the outer section B rests with 
its under side or top on an annular flange A, 
projecting outward from the boss A. Bolts, 
55 
rivets, or like fastening devices D are emi 
ployed for fastening the inner portion of the 
section B to the flange A after the outersec so 
tion has been screwed upon the boss A". 
Thus the two sections are securely united, 
and the outer section can be readily removed 
from the inner section whenever desired by 
first removing the screws, rivets, or like de 
vices D and unscrewing the section from the 
boss A'. A new section can then be placed 
on the section A. 
By the arrangement described the outer 
section B can be made comparatively narrow, 
especially as the saw is only intended for 
sawing shingles and the like. 
The saw can be cheaply manufactured, as 
by the use of a large inner section. A the 
outer cutting-section B can be made very nar 
row, and as this is the most expensive part 
of the saw it is evident that the cost of manu 
facturing is reduced to a minimum. Further 
more, in case such outer section is Worn Out 
it can be replaced by a new one on the same 
inner section or center. 
By having the heavy central section. A the 
section B can be made comparatively thin 
without danger of springing, as said section 
is partly supported on the flange A* of the in 
ner section. A. 
Having thus fully described my invention, 
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent 
A circular saw comprising a central section 
having a peripheral screw-thread and a flange 
projecting radially beyond said screw-thread, 
in combination with a rim-section having 
saw-teeth at its outer periphery, and a female 
screw-thread at its inner periphery, fitting 
the screw-thread on the central section, and 
securing devices such as screws extending 
through said rim and flange in a direction 
parallel to the axis. 
75 
SIEVE THEODOR JOHNSON, 
Witnesses: 
ANNIE. L. DAY, 
W. W. STONE. 
o 
15 
25 
35 
45 
 
... . . .sri-, "is ...: . 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614153.txt	No. 614,153. 
(No Model.) 
J. F. WEST. 
VENTIATING BACK REST. 
(Application filed Aug. 28, 1897.) 
Patented Nov. 5, 1898. 
34-uo-vitov 
throRRs Peters co, Photo-Lithd., WASH(NGFON, D.C. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JENNIE FREW WEST, OF GILMAN, ILLINOIS. 
VENTILATING BACK-REST. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 614,153, dated November 15, 1898. 
Application filed August 23, 1897. Serial No. 649,136, (No model.) 
w 
arr 
25 
To all whon, it naily concern: 
Be it known that I, JENNIE FREW WEST, 
of Gilman, in the county of Iroquois and State 
of Illinois, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Chair Attachments; 
and I do hereby declare the following to be 
a full, clear, and exact description of the in 
vention, such as will enable others skilled in 
the art to which it appertains to make and use 
the same. 
The invention relates to improvements in 
seat or chair attachments, and it has more 
particular relation to ventilating back-rests 
for railway car-seats. 
It will be understood from the following de 
Scription and claim, reference being had to 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of 
the device embodying my invention applied 
in position. Fig. 2 represents a central ver 
tical section through the same. 
1 in the drawings represents the back of 
the car-seat, 2 the seat proper, and 3 my im 
proved back-rest. This latter comprises a 
frame 4, having approximately the form of a 
yoke or pendent, U-shaped loop, provided at 
the upper ends of its arms with hooks 5, 
-e-adapted to be placed over the top of the back 
1. Said frame 4 supports an auxiliary frame 
6 of any suitable material, said latter frame 
-36 
having its respective sides and ends con 
nected by horizontal and vertical interlaced 
and spaced strips 7 of any suitable flexible 
material. Said frame 6 is further provided 
upon its back with spring-strips 8, each of 
which has its respective ends firmly secured 
to one of the vertical portions of said frame 
6, being held away from the latter by a plu 
rality of coil-springs 9, interposed between 
said strips and the rear sides of the vertical 
portions of the frame 6. 
It will be observed by the foregoing de 
scription that when applied in position upon 
a car-seat the lower loop portion or cross-bar. 
of the yoke will extend down between the 
rear of the seat 2 and the lower front edge of 
the back 1 and thus be held firmly in posi 
tion, the hooks 5 effectually supporting said 
frame. 
I preferably connect the upper portions of 
the frame 4 by a suitable flexiblehead-rest 10: 
35 
45 
 
When my improved device is applied in po 
sition, it will be observed that the interlaced 
portions 7 will be held some distance away 
from the upholstered back 1 under a spring 
tension, so as to leave a space between said 
portion 7 and the back for the entrance of 
air. By this means a perfect circulation be 
tween the respective portions 7 and behind 
the same is secured at all times. This is par 
ticularly desirablein warm weather, when the 
upholstered backs of the seats become very 
uncomfortable because of the heat confined 
by the same upon the traveler leaning against 
them. The flexibility of the frame further 
provides for absorbing all vibration which 
may be thrown upon the device because of 
its connection with the back 1. 
I do not care to limit the application of my 
invention to car-seats alone, as the same may 
be aptly employed in connection with chairs 
of all types and especially upholstered fur 
niture. The device could also be applied as 
a back-rest for invalids by extending the 
frame 4 and hooking the hooks over the head 
of the bedstead. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
In a removable, ventilating back-rest, the 
combination with the U-shaped frame, or 
yoke having integral hooks on the ends of its 
arms for engaging the back of the seat, of 
the ventilating back-rest frame proper Se 
cured to said yoke, a ventilating-cover on 
said back-rest frame, spring-strips substan 
tially parallel with the yoke-arms and se 
cured at their ends to the back-rest frame, 
and springs interposed between said strips 
and back-rest frame for holding the latter 
normally away from said strips intermedi 
ate their ends, and thereby from the seat to 
which the back-rest is applied, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed this 
specification in the presence of two subscrib 
ing Witnesses. 
JENNIE FREW WEST, 
Witnesses: 
WILLIAM J. DICK, 
FRANKLIN L. WEST. 
55 
66 
75 
95 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614253.txt	No. 614,253. 
(No Model.) 
- 
- 
- 
M. M. MOORE. 
TRACK DRILL 
Patented Nov. 5, 1898. 
(Application filed Feb. 1, 1898.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet . 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
No. 614,253. 
Patented Nov. 15, 1898. 
M. M. MOORE. 
TRACK ORL. 
(Application filed Feb. 1, 1898 
..) 
 
(No Model.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
s 
 
s 
=Assister sis 
 
inAAR 
E 
Essee 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 
% 
y 
- 
h 
1E 
M. EME 
3. 
As AM" As 
E es 
E. SAOH, 
E V e 
P e 
O 
se 
 
 
 
 
St 
No. 614,253. 
(No Model.) 
M. M. MOORE. 
TRACK DRLL, 
{Application filed Feb. 1, 1898.) 
Patented Nov. 15, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
2Z, N 
z- 
No. 
N 
S 
() 
fh ", 
 
 
  
2 % 2 2 2 
2 
2 
SanaaSnaS 
NS 
g 
SS 
N 
sz 
SE 
SS 
2 
E, 
N () 
Z276 ses, 
N S 
The Norris PeTERs co, PHOTOLITHQ. WASHINGTON, d. c. 
No. 614,253. 
(No Model.) 
M. M. MOORE. 
TRACK DRILL. 
(Application filed Feb. 1, 1898.) 
Patented Nov. 15, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 4 
 
| | 
ie 
2. 7 
s 
-z' 
a 
Z772/272%r 
J7%5e5 7.7%ove 
2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MOSES M. MOORE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
TRACK-DRILL. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 614,253, dated November 15, 1898. 
Application filed February 1, 1898, Serial No. 668,698, (No model.) 
a 
To all, whom it may concern: 
Beit known that I, MOSESM. MooRE, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented a new and usefullmprovement. 
in Track Drills, of which the following is a 
Specification. 
My invention relates to an improvement in 
track-drills, and has for its object more es 
pecially the production of a horizontal drill 
provided with vertically-disposed operating 
mechanism which may be quickly and cer 
tainly detached from the horizontal portion 
of the device in case of emergency, as at the 
approach of a train, while the drill is being 
used upon the track between the rails, 
To the above end my invention consists, 
generally stated, in a horizontally-disposed 
frame carrying a movable drill-stock pro 
vided with a gear for rotating it and a de 
tachable vertically - disposed standard in 
which is journaled a shaft carrying at its 
lower end a gear which meshes with the gear 
connected with the drill-stock and provided 
at its top with means for causing its rotation. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a plan section of my improved track-drill in 
position for boring a rail, said section being 
taken on line 1 of Fig. 2 and viewed as in 
dicated by the arrow; Fig. 2, a broken view 
in sectional elevation, the Section being taken 
on line 2 of Fig. 1; Fig. 3, an enlarged broken 
sectional view similar to Fig. 1; Eig. 4, a 
broken longitudinal section taken on line 4. 
of Fig. 1; Fig. 5, a detail of the means for 
raising and lowering the drill-point; Fig. 6, 
a section taken on line 6 of Fig. 5; Fig. 7, a 
section on line 7 of Fig. 4; and Fig. 8, a sec 
tion on line 8 of Fig. 3 and viewed in the di 
rection of the arrow, showing a detail of the 
feed mechanism. 
The operative mechanism is mounted upon 
a horizontally-disposed frame A, comprising 
side pieces A", a rear end standard A, circu 
lar guides A, frontend standards A", adjust 
ably secured to the side pieces A", and a guide 
B, with which the standards A are slidably; 
connected. The guide-strip B is held at a 
fixed distance from the rail C by means of 
hooks D, which pass under the rail and en 
gage the lower flange at the opposite side. 
Upon the guides A, Fig. 3, is mounted a 
sliding frame E, comprising sleeves E", mov 
ing on the circular guides A and provided 
with end lugs t and intermediately with in 
Wardly-extending lugs ti and upwardly-ex 
tending lugs it, front and rear cross-bars 
EE, respectively, secured to the sleeves by 
bolts s, and a central horizontally-disposed 
sleeve E", supported by laterally-extending 
lugs r, secured to the lugs it by rivets r". 
In the front cross-bar E of the sliding frame 
E is journaled a drill-stock F, in which is se 
cured the drill-bit F". The drill-stock F ex 
tends through the bar Eand is provided with 
in the frame with a bevel-gear F. 
The cen 
tral sleeve E of the sliding frame is provided 
With a lug G, Fig. 4, in which is journaled 
the lower end of a shaft H, provided toward 
its lower end with a gear H', meshing with 
the gear F. The shaft H is journaled in a 
vertically - disposed frame I, Fig. 2, which 
when the drill is in operation is rigidly se 
cured to the horizontally - disposed sliding 
frameE, but which is readily detachable there 
from in case of emergency. The vertical 
frame I comprises a sleeve I', which may be 
of ordinary gas-pipe, carrying at its top a 
yoke I, in which is journaled a horizontally 
disposed shaft I, from which motion is com 
municated to the shaft H by means of bevel 
gears J, and a vaulted or arched base-plate 
I, provided with a central socket I, into 
which the gas-pipe I" is screwed. The pipe 
or sleeve I' is of sufficient diameter to accom 
modate the shaft H loosely within it, the hub 
or socket I of the base-plate being accurately 
bored to afford a bearing for the shaft. The 
gear H is rigidly secured to the shaft H by 
means of a pin q. As a means for securing 90 
the vertical frame to the sliding frame E in 
a manner to be readily detachable, I provide 
spring-steel straps K, pivotally secured to 
bolts p, joining the lugs t, said straps being 
of a length to overlap when raised to the po 
sition shown in Fig. 2 and being provided 
near their lower ends with offsets p", which 
engage the sides of the base-plate I. The 
base-plate is provided at its four corners on 
its under side with dowel-pins (not shown) 
which fit into holest, with which the lugs is 
are provided. To lock the straps Kin a posi 
sion shown in Fig. 2, I provide the gas-pipe 
I' with a rotatable ring L, secured against 
95 
75 
Old 
O 
f5 
2 d 
25 
3o 
35 
4o 
45 
50 
 
2. 
614,253 
o 
25 
35 
40 
45 
55 
vertical movement by a ring L', held in place 
by set-screw m, said ring L being provided 
with a lug n, adapted to bear upon the straps 
when rotated to the proper position. The 
ring L is further provided with a lug in', by 
means of which it may be shifted from its 
locking position when struck a blow, as with 
a hammer, or when pressed by the foot of the 
workman. The rotation of the ring L is lim 
ited by the lug in engaging the set-screw in 
of the ring L', and thus the locking-ring is 
always in position for use. 
To the rear end of the main horizontal frame 
is rigidly secured a screw M, by means of 
which, proper connection being had with the 
other operative parts, the sliding frame E is 
automatically fed forward to cause the drill 
to enter the rail. The gear E is rigidly se 
cured to the drill-stock F by means of a pin l. 
At its rear end the drill-stock is provided with 
a reduced portion l', upon which is fitted a 
race member l', which forms a portion of a 
bearing for the balls l. 
The front end of the central sleeve E is pro 
vided with a suitable socket to receive the 
companion race memberl, and it is through 
this bar that the rearward thrust from the 
drill is transmitted to the sliding frame. The 
vaulted arch I does not extend rearwardly 
the full length of the base-plate, but an open 
section is left near the rear end of the plate, 
and at the rear end is provided a depressed 
cross-bar k, upon which is pivoted, by means 
of a pin c', a lever N, the front end of which 
extends above the rear portion of the horizon 
tally-disposed gear H' and the rear end of 
which extends above a nut Pupon the screw 
MI. The nut P is of circular form and is pro 
vided throughout the front half of its outer 
surface with ratchet-teeth i. At its rear por 
tion the nut is provided with a series of per 
forations h, adapted to receive an operating 
rod, by means of which the sliding frame may 
be retracted. As shown in Figs. 3 and 4, the 
nut Pfits closely between a lug h" upon the 
rear cross-bar E and the rear end of the cen 
tral sleeve E, into which fits a central hub 
P', with which the nut is provided, about 
which is confined a brassbearing-ring h. The 
rear end of the lever N is provided with a per 
forated circular boss 9, having an elevated 
portion g' and a depressed portion g. Within 
this portion of the lever is confined a spring 
held pawl Q, provided toward its upper end 
with a pinf, by means of which the pawl may 
be kept out of engagement with the ratchet 
wheel by turning the pin to engage the ele 
wated portion of the lugg. The gear H is 
provided upon its upper surface with a pine, 
which at every revolution engages the front 
end of the lever N. The rear end of the lever 
N bears against a stop d upon the depressed 
cross-bar k of the base-plate, being held nor 
mally against the same by means of a spring 
d'. At every revolution of the gear H the 
lever N is operated, and if the pawl Q is in 
engagement with the ratchet of the nut P the 
latter is moved forward the distance of one 
ratchet-tooth. Of course the gear II' may be 
supplied with more than one pin, if desired, 
or any other suitable means may be employed 
to increase the rate of feed. 
Figs. 1, 5, and 6 show the means whereby the 
position of the drill is regulated both as to 
height and position longitudinally of the rail. 
Upon the guide-bar B are the slidable stand 
ards A, provided with vertical slots R. 
Through these slots extend bolts c, rigidly Se 
cured to the side pieces A" of the frame and 
provided with thumb-nuts c' and with rectan 
gular bearing-blocks or washers c, the latter 
being adapted to be rotated to a vertical posi 
tion and so to pass through the slot R' when 
it is desired to remove the standard from the 
frame. 
The shaft I is provided with operating-han 
dles S, by means of which motion is commu 
nicated to the drill. 
The operation is as follows: The vertical 
standard is placed upon the horizontal frame, 
with the gear II' meshing with the gear F. 
and the shaft II resting in the socket G of 
the central sleeve E of the sliding frame and 
the dowel-pins on the under surface of the 
base-plate of the vertical standard fitting into 
the holest of the lugs li. The straps IK are 
then brought to the position shown in Fig. 2. 
and while held down with the foot the lock 
ing-ring IL is moved to a position to bring the 
lug an above the spring-straps, thus firmly 
clamping the base-plate of the standard to 
the sliding frame E. The drill is set in any 
position along the guide B and is adjusted at 
its front end by means of the thumb-screw c' 
at the standards A. If the drill is thrown out 
of a horizontal position in the vertical adjust 
ment of the front end, this may be overcome 
by blocking up the rear end of the drill. 
Workmen grasping the handles S, which are 
at a suitable height, to be conveniently oper 
ated through the medium of the shaft II, 
bevel-gears H' and F, and drill-stock F, ro 
tate the drill F. At each revolution of the 
gear II the pine of the gear engages the front 
of the lever N and moves the lever against 
the action of its spring to rotate the nut P, 
and thus force the sliding frame toward the 
rail which is being bored. After the hole has 
been drilled the sliding frame is retracted by 
first raising the pawl Q out of engagement 
with the ratchet and then by means of a hand 
lever turning the nut P in a reverse direction. 
If during the operation of the machine upon 
a track a train should approach, the Work 
men by kicking against the lug in' of the lock 
ing-ring L throws the latter out of engage 
ment with the spring-straps IK, when the ver 
tical standard can be at once removed, the 
horizontal frame being left in the drillingpo 
sition during the passage of the train. 
By making the vertical frame readily de 
tachable from the horizontal frame I Secure 
the important result of enabling the power to 
be applied to the drill in an advantageous 
75 
95 
co 
O 
1 I5 
I 25 
 
* 
-1 
614,253 
1. 
O 
25 
35 
manner and yet render it unnecessary to re 
move the main body of the drill from the bor 
ing position during the passage of a train. 
While the feature of a bearing in the cen 
tral sleeve of the sliding frame for the lower 
end of the vertically-disposed shaft is impor 
tant, yet obviously it would be possible to dis 
pense with this feature, depending upon the 
bearing afforded by the vertical frame for 
holding the bevel-gear H in mesh with the 
gear F. In such a construction the dowel 
pins mentioned Would serve not only to pre 
vent the vertical frame from twisting or ro 
tating with relation to the horizontal frame, 
but also to hold the vertical frame against be 
ing forced backward by the action of the gears. 
It is obvious that the construction may be 
varied in matters of detail without departing 
from the spirit of my invention, and I there 
fore do not limit myself to the precise con 
struction shown or described, except as shall 
appear from the appended claims. 
What I claim as new, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. In a track-drill, the combination of a hori 
Zontally-disposed frame, a drill-stock jour 
naled therein, a gear connected with said drill 
stock, a vertically-disposed frame, a shaft 
journaled therein provided with a gear en 
gaging the gear on said drill-stock, means for 
rotating the shaft, and means for detachably 
securing the vertical frame to the horizontal 
portion of the drill device to enable its quick 
removal in case of emergency, substantially 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In a track-drill, the combination of a hori 
Zontally-disposed frame provided with guides 
a sliding frame mounted on said guides, a drill 
stock journaled therein, a gear on said drill 
stock, feed mechanism for the sliding frame, 
a vertical frame resting upon the sliding 
frame, means for detachably securing the 
vertical frame to the sliding frame, a shaft 
journaled in the vertical frame provided with 
a gear engaging the drill-stock gear, and 
means for applying power to the vertical 
shaft, substantially as and for the purpose set 
forth. 
3. In a track-drill, the combination of a hori 
Zontally-disposed frame provided with guides, 
a sliding frame mounted thereon provided 
with a central vertical shaft-bearing, a drill 
stock journaled in the sliding frame provided 
with a bevel-gear, feed mechanism for the 
sliding frame, a vertical frame resting on the 
sliding frame, means for detachably securing 
the vertical frame to the sliding frame, a shaft 
journaled in the vertical frame with its lower 
- 
45 
55 
 
75 
3. 
end extending into the bearing on saidsliding 
frame and provided with a gear engaging said 6o 
drill-stock gear, and means for applying power 
to the vertical shaft, substantially as and for 
the purpose set forth. 
4. In a track-drill, the combination with a 
horizontally-disposed frame, drill-stock, gear, 
and screw-feed, of a detachable vertical frame 
resting on the horizontal portion of the drill 
device, comprising a vaulted base-plate I, a 
standard or sleeve I'', a shaft journaled there 
in provided with a gear H' meshing with the 
drill-stock gear, a depressed rear cross-piece 
k on the base-plate provided with a stop, a 
spring-held lever N pivoted on said cross 
piece and bearing normally against said stop, 
a spring-held pawl at the rear end of saidle 
ver engaging the feed-nut of said screw-feed, 
a projection on the gear H'engaging the front 
end of said lever, and means for rotating the 
shaft carrying the gear H', substantially as 
and for the purpose set forth. 
r-a 
5. In a track - drill, the combination of a 
horizontal frame, a drill - stock journaled 
therein provided with a gear, a vertical frame 
resting upon the horizontal frame provided 
with a base-plate, a shaft journaled therein 
provided with a gear engaging said drill-stock 
gear, spring-metal straps pivotally joined to 
the horizontal frame and passing over the 
edges of said base-plate and overlapping at 
their ends, and a locking-ring, or the like, 
on the vertical frame clamping said straps 
against the flanges of said base-plate, sub 
stantially as and for the purpose set forth. 
6. In a track-drill, the combination with a 
horizontally-disposed frame, a drilland drill 
operating mechanism mounted thereon, of a 
guide B, means for connecting said guide to 
the rail, slidable standards A" mounted on 
the guide provided with vertical slots, and 
bolt connection between the standards and 
front end of the frame for adjusting the ver 
tical height, substantially as and for the pur 
pose set forth. 
7. In a track-drill, the combination with a 
horizontally-disposed frame, a drilland drill 
operating mechanism mounted thereon, of 
standards A provided with slots R', bolts c 
connected with the frame and extending 
through the slots, rectangular or elongated 
washers c, and nuts c' for adjustably fasten 
ing the frame to the standards, substantially . 
as and for the purpose set forth. 
95 
MOSES M. MOORE. 
IOO 
Io5 
O 
In presence of - 
J. H. LEE, 
R. T. SPENCER, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614353.txt	No. 614,353. 
(No Mode.) 
H. C. F. STORMER. 
Patented Nov. 15, 1898. 
APPARATUS FOR WASHING ALKAL AMALGAM. 
(Application filed Feb. 7, 1898.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Sssay d 
E22E 
" 
 
2azzazzzzzzzzzzassazza 
RRS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHo, washinoro, b. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRIK CHRISTIAN FREDRIKST6RMER, OF CHRISTIANIA, NORWAY. 
APPARATUS FOR WASHING ALKAL AMAL.GAM. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 614,358, dated November 15, 1898. 
Application filed February 7, 1898, Serial No. 669,435, (No model.) 
To all avhon it may concern 
Be it known that I, HENRIK CHRISTIAN 
FREDRIKSTRMER, a subject of the King of 
Sweden and Norway, residing at Christiania, 
Norway, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Apparatus for Washing 
Alkali Amalgam; and I do hereby declare 
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de 
scription of the invention, such as will enable 
others skilled in the art to which it apper 
tains to make and use the same. 
This invention has relation to apparatus for 
Washing mercury amalgams-as, for instance, 
amalgams of metals of the alkalies with mer 
cury obtained by well-known electrolytical 
processes; and it has for its object a construc 
tion whereby the efficiency of the apparatus 
is very materially increased, in that a greater 
proportion of the amalgam is presented to the 
action of the solvent than is the case in known 
apparatuses of this kind. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figures 1 
and 2 illustrate by a vertical cross-section and 
a like longitudinal section a preferred con 
struction of apparatus; and Figs. 3 and 4 
show cross-sections of the revoluble drum, with 
an open-mesh fabric between the rods. 
A indicates a vessel whose bottom is con 
cave, the arc of the circle described having 
its center at or about the center of rotation of 
the shaft B, revolubly mounted in suitable 
bearings secured to the inner face of the end 
walls of said vessel. On the shaft B are se 
cured two disks E, in the proximate faces of 
which are formed annular edge offsets or re 
cessesD, which, together with the plates C, se 
cured to said inner faces of disks Eor to their 
shaft B, form peripheral grooves. . 
The disks E have circular rows of perfora 
tions at that portion which laps over the afore 
said offsets or grooves into which project the 
ends of cylindrical bars For bars of other 
form in cross-section, whereby a grated drum 
is formed whose periphery revolves close to 
the bottom of the vessel A. 
The shaft B carries a driving-pulley belted 
by a belt b to a pulley on a short shaft b', that 
revolves in suitable bearings near the upper 
edge of one of the end walls of said vessel A 
and carries a pulleyb, driven from any suit 
able prime motor, 
The vessel A is further provided with two 
feed branches a. a' and a discharge brancha. 
The branch c is or may be connected with a 
source of solvent-supply, as water, the branch 
a' with a source of amalgam-supply, and from 
branch a the mercury freed from its cation 
is discharged. 
It will readily be seen that when suitable 
quantities of amalgam and water are placed 
in or fed to vessel A and the drum is revolved 
the bars F will take up much greater quanti 
ties of such amalgam than is possible in known 
apparatuses and carry Such amalgam in the 
form of thin layers into contact with the sol 
vent, so that the washing is carried on much 
more expeditiously. The operation of wash 
ing may in this manner also be made a con 
tinuous one by continuously feeding a solvent 
to the last of the series of vessels and allowing 
it to continuously overflow through branch a 
to the next vessel, and so on through the se 
ries to the first, while the amalgam could be 
supplied to said first vessel through branch 
a' and periodically drawn off through branch 
a to the next vessel, and so on to the last of 
the series of such, in which case the vessels 
would have to be arranged stepwise, or the 
location of the branches a? a could be re 
versed, so that a' would constitute an over 
flow, in which case the amalgam will flow con 
tinuously from the first to the next, and so 
on to the last of the series of vessels. 
The efficiency of the described apparatus 
i. e., the active surfaces thereof-may be 
greatly increased by inserting a cylinder of a 
more or less open-mesh metallic fabric N be 
tween two concentric rows of bars F, Fig. 4, 
or several such cylinders could be so inserted, 
or the metallic fabric could be threaded Zig 
Zag fashion, as shown in Fig. 3. 
Any suitable material is used in the con 
struction of the amalgam-Washer, the chair 
acter of the material depending, of course, 
upon the character of the solvent used. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
by Letters Patent, is 
1. Apparatus for Washing amalgam, Com 
prising a suitable vessel adapted to receive 
the amalgam and a solvent of its cation, a 
cylindrical drum revoluble therein and com 
O 
(5 
35 
45 
So 
55 
75 
95 
IOC) 
2 
614,353 
5 
posed of concentric rows of bars extending metallic open-mesh fabric threaded zigzag Io 
between two heads and a foraminous fabric through the bars, substantially as described. 
interposed between the bars, substantially as 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
described. 
2. Apparatus for Washing amalgam, com- 
prising a suitable vessel adapted to receive 
the amalgam and a solvent of its cation, a 
drum composed of two heads, concentric rows 
of bars extending from head to head and a 
HENRIK CHRISTIAN FREDRIK STORMER. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JON WAOLER, 
THS. IBERG. 
Witnesses: 
N 
t 
fi AN 
& IRTF 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614453.txt	No. 64,453. 
S. Z. DE FERRANTI. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING ELECTRIC CABLES. 
d 
(Application filed Dec. 28, 1897. 
(No Mode.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet . 
0/24.4a and 4 variaziz 
Azarevor 
/*7&A-4 
Witnesses 
arn. A fare 
24a e A anted. 
 
No. 614,453. 
S. Z. DE FERRANT. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
0 
 
< $ $ N? ? ? 
No. 614,453. 
(No Mode.) 
S. Z. DE FERRANTI. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING ELECTRIC CABLEs. 
(Application filed Dec. 28, 1897.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Wi/vesses 
2-/- 4-4-- 
The cars PETERs co, Photo-tho. wash NGTON, D.C. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SEBASTIAN ZIAN IDE FERRANTI, OF HOLLIN WOOD, ENGLAND. 
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING ELECTRIC CABLES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 614,453, dated November 22, 1898, 
Application filed December 28, 1897, Serial No, 663,994, (No model.) 
55 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, SEBASTIAN ZIANI DE 
FERRANTI, electrical engineer, a subject of the 
Queen of Great Britain, residing at Hollin 
5 Wood, in the county of Lancaster, England, 
have invented a new and useful Improvement 
in Methods of Manufacturing Electric Cables, 
(Case No. 1,) (for which I have obtained a 
patentin Great Britain, No. 3,363, dated Feb 
Io ruary 9, 1897,) of which the following is a 
specification. 
This invention has for its object an im 
proved method of manufacturing electric ca 
bles of the kind or class described in the 
I5 specification for Improvement in electric 
cables, filed on the same date as the present 
application, Serial No. 664,000. 
According to my invention I construct elec 
tric cables containing two or more conductors, 
20 said conductors being insulated from each 
other and suitable for conveying currents for 
electric lighting or the distribution of elec 
trical energy. The several conductors are 
shaped to form a portion of a circle in cross 
25 section, so that when laid together with their 
insulation an approximately cylindrical cable 
is formed. . 
An essential feature of cables manufac 
tured by my present invention is that the 
3o several conductors are made of separate 
strands of wires in intimate contact with each 
other, the area of the stranded wires being 
Very little larger than the area of a solid con 
ductor of the same current-carrying capacity. 
In constructing a cable according to my in 
vention Istrand up copper wires in the usual 
Way, SO as to make a cylindrical conductor of 
approximately the same area as it is desired 
that the conductorshall eventually have when 
4o made up into a cable. I pass this cylindrical 
stranded conductor through a quickly-recip 
rocating press containing dies of the shape 
which it is desired to give to the conductor. 
This press may be run by means of a crank, 
45 or it may be in the form of a pneumatic ham 
mer or other similar device for quickly open 
ing and closing the dies. 
I form the dies of a tapering section in the 
direction of the motion of the cable which it 
5o is desired to press, so that the end of the con 
ductor which is to be dealt with may enter 
the dies and is only deformed a small amount 
35 
at first. As, however, it feeds through the 
tapering dies every blow presses it more 
nearly into the shape which it is desired to 
The pressed conductor is insulated 
give it. 
with paper or other fibrous material in any 
suitable manner, and two or more such insu 
lated conductors are placed together and in 
sulated to form a cylindrical cable. The ca 
ble may finally be sheathed with lead or other 
protective material. 
In order that my invention may be clearly 
understood, I will proceed to describe the 
same with reference to the accompanying 
drawings, in which 
Figure 1 illustrates a cable in its various 
stages of manufacture, the section at different 
stages being shown by small figures AIB CD 
E F, taken at the dotted lines above said fig 
ures. Fig. 2 shows a suitable form of press. 
Fig. 3 is an elevation, and Fig. 4 a section, on 
the line 4 4, Fig. 3, of a pair of dies suitable 
for giving the conductor a semicircular cross 
section. Figs. 5 and 6 are similar views, re 
spectively, of a pair of dies for giving the con 
ductors the shape of a sector of a circle in 
cross-section. Figs. 7 and 8 are similar views 
of a pair of dies for compressing a circular con 
ductor to a rectangular form in cross-section. 
Fig. 9 is a plan illustrating a plant for the 
manufacture of a cable comprising two in 
sulated conductors. 
Referring now to Fig. 1, which illustrates 
the manufacture of a twin conductor-cable, 1. 
are the several strands composing the con 
ductors. These are laid up by suitable ma 
chinery well known to persons skilled in the 
art to form a circular conductor, the cross 
section of which is shown at A. The two such 
conductors are led through presses-such as 
hereinafter described, for example-and de 
formed to the shape of a semicircle in cross 
section, as shown at B. The separate wires 
composing each conductor are thereby pressed 
into intimate contact with each other, and the 
conductor is reduced in its gross area without 
reducing any of its current-carrying capacity 
and with little loss of flexibility. The two 
semicircular conductors are now insulated in 
any suitable manner-for example, by being 
Wrapped with an insulating-tape, such as in 
dicated at 3. After insulating the cross-sec 
tion of each insulated conductor Will be simi 
65 
75 
95 
OO 
 
614,453 
O 
35 
45 
50 
lar to that shown at C. The two insulated 
conductors are next laid together to form a 
cable, the cross-section of which is shown at 
D and the whole insulated with another layer 
of insulation 4. The cross-section will now 
be as shown at E. A protecting-sheath, of 
lead or other suitable material 5, may then be 
placed around the insulated cable, the Sec 
tion of which is shown at F. 
The various stages in the manufacture of 
my improved cable as above described are 
well-known to cable manufacturers, with the 
exception of the device for pressing uninsu 
lated conductors from a cylindrical form to 
that desired. The apparatus for accomplish 
ing this is illustrated in Fig. 2, which I will 
now proceed to describe. 
67 are a pair of dies, the upper one of 
which is Supported in the end of a slide S, 
adapted to slide vertically in guides 99 of any 
suitable design. The lower die 7 is firmly sup 
ported upon a block. The slide S is connect 
ed by a link 11 to an eccentric-pin 12 on the 
fly-wheel 10, which is caused to rotate by any 
suitable means. The upper die is thereby 
caused to reciprocate and to strike a number 
of blows in succession as the cable is passed 
through the press. 
The shapes of the dies 
When it is desired to cause the conductor to 
issue in a semicircular shape are shown drawn 
to an enlarged scale in Figs. 3 and 4. The 
entering end 13 14 of the two dies being 
shaped so as to only slightly deform a circu 
lar cable, at the exit end 15 said dies are 
made of the shape which it is required the 
conductorshall finally assume. Consequently 
the conductor is gradually deformed as it 
passes through. 
By running the press at a high speed I am 
enabled to draw a circular cable almost con 
tinuously through it and bring it out shaped 
to the desired section. 
Figs. 5 and 6 show dies which deform a cir 
cular stranded cable to the shape shown at G. 
in cross-section, and Figs. 7 and S are similar 
views, which deform a circular cable to the 
shape shown at FI in cross-section. The ar 
rows in the several figures show the direction 
of movement of the conductor between the 
dies. 
Fig. 9 shows, diagrammatically, a plant for 
the construction of a cable constructed of 
two conductors, as hereinabove described 
with reference to Fig. 1, in which the insu 
lated conductors are laid together spirally. 
16 are drums containing circular stranded 
conductors. Said conductors (marked 17) are 
led through reciprocating presses 18, of the 
kind described with reference to Fig. 2, for 
example, which presses shape each conduc 
tor to a semicircular form in cross-section. 
The semicircular conductors are now wrapped 
spirally with insulating-paper 19 by means of 
the apparatus shown at 20, said apparatus 
being Well known, and the separate insulated 
conductors 21, after issuing from this appa 
ratus, are led around guide-rollers 22, being 
finally wound upon a drum 23. Said drum 
is supported in bearings in a framework 24 
and is arranged to be rotated through the 
bevel-gears 25 from the gear-wheel 26. The 
frame 24 is rotated in bearings 27 and 2S, 
through the front one of which, 2S, the two 
conductors pass. Owing to the double move 
ment of said drum-namely, on its own axis 
and upon the axis at right angles to the line 
of travel of the cable-said conductors are 
twisted at the same time as they are Wound 
upon the drum. 
The insulation surrounding the Separate 
conductors and the cable may be of any suit 
able description according to the duty which 
the cables have to perform, and I do not COn 
fine myself to the use of paper for this pur 
pose. 
What I claim is 
1. The method of manufacturing electric 
cables for electric-light and power distribu 
tion which consists in first forming a circulal' 
stranded conductor, compressing Said Con 
ductor to the shape of a part of a circle in 
cross-section, insulating said conductor, and 
lastly laying a number of such conductors 
together forming an approximately cylin 
drical cable, as set forth. 
2. The method of manufacturing electric 
cables which consists in first forming a cir 
cular stranded conductor to the shape of a 
part of a circle in cross-section, insulating 
said conductors, and lastly laying a numbel' 
of such conductors together spirally forming 
an approximately cylindrical cable, as Set 
forth. 
3. The method of manufacturing electric 
cables which consists in first forming a cir 
cular stranded conductor, passing the same 
between reciprocating dies to compress it to 
the shape of part of a circle in cross-section, 
insulating said conductor, and lastly laying 
a number of such conductors together to form 
an approximately cylindrical cable, as set 
forth. 
4. The method of manufacturing electric 
cables which consists in first forming a cir 
cular stranded conductor, passing the same 
between reciprocating dies to compress it to 
the shape of a circle in cross-section, insulat 
ing said conductor, laying a number of such 
conductors together to form an approximately 
cylindrical cable, and lastly covering said ca 
ble with a leaden sheath, as Set forth. 
5. The method of manufacturing electric 
cables which consists in first forming a cir 
cular stranded conductor, compressing Said 
conductor to the shape of a part of a circle in 
cross-section, wrapping said conductor With 
insulating-paper, and lastly laying a number 
of such conductors together to form an ap 
proximately cylindrical cable, as set forth. 
6. The method of manufacturing electric 
cables which consists in first forming a cir 
cular stranded conductor, compressing said 
conductor to the shape of a part of a circle in 
cross-section, Wrapping said conductor with 
7 O 
75 
95 
IOO 
O 5 
O 
II5 
I25 
55 
 
614,453 
insulating-paper, and lastly laying a number 
of such conductors together spirally to form 
an approximately cylindrical cable, as set 
forth. 
7. The method of manufacturing electric 
cables for electric-light and power distribu 
tion which consists in first forming a circular 
stranded conductor, compressing said con 
ductor to the shape of a part of a circle in 
cross-section, Wrapping said conductor spi 
rally with strips of sheetinsulation, and lastly 
laying a number of such conductors together 
to form an approximately cylindrical cable, 
as set forth. 
8. The method of manufacturing electric 
cables for electric-light and power distribu 
tion which consists in first forming a circular 
O 
I5 - 
Witnesses: 
W. M. HARRIs, 
WILMER MATTHEW's HARRIs, 
FREDERICK COWLEY HARRIS 
3. 
stranded conductor, compressing said con 
ductor to the shape of a part of a circle in 
cross-section, wrapping said conductor spi 
rally with strips of sheet insulation, laying a 
number of such conductors together spirally 
to form an approximately cylindrical cable, 
and lastly covering said cable with a leaden 
sheath, as set forth. 
In testimony whereof I have signed m 
name to this specification in the presence of 
subscribing witnesses. 
SEBASTIAN ZIANI DE FERRANTI, 
25 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614553.txt	No. 64,553. 
(No Mode.) 
 
A. & O. JAEGER. 
AUTOMATIC VENDING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Feb. 3, 1898.) 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
07t 27eg. 
2 
m 66%ala. 
bSS 
SS S. 
No. 614,553. 
(No Model.) 
 
A. & O. JAEGER. 
AUTOMATIC VENDING MACHINE. 
{Application filed Feb. 3, 1898.) 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
  
  
Trizi T 
l A / 
 
Z 
 
- f' 
M/ 
71/22Z, 65625ee2. 
27, Z., - 
WYYNN \s(u. 
The Norris Peters co, Photo-lit Ho, Washington, d.c: . 
6222 agye. 
. 
. . 
67, 
32-c6 
No. 614,553. 
(No Mode.) 
A. & O. JAEGER. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
AUTOMATIC VENDING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Eeb. 3, 1898.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
 
s 
 
-/257. Z2, 
R 
2 
(2% 
% 
 
  
 
 
2 
2 
24/2- 
Z7vez72) 
-10e a 2 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ALEXANDER JAEGER AND OTTO JAEGER, OF PHILADELPHIA, 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
AUTOMATIC VENDING-MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 614,553, dated November 22, 1898. 
Application filed February 3, 1898, Serial No. 668,951. (No model.) 
To all whon it may concern: 
Beit known that we, ALEXANDER JAEGER 
and OTTO JAEGER, citizens of the United 
States, residing at Philadelphia, in the county 
of Philadelphia and State of Pennsylvania, 
have invented a certain new and useful Im 
provement in Automatic Wending-Machines, 
of which the following is a specification. 
Our present invention relates to a new and 
useful improvement in automatic vending 
machines, and has for its object to provide a 
coin-detector of such construction as to ren 
der impossible the passage of iron or steel 
disks to the money-drawer of the machine, 
even though said disks be of a size which ex 
actly correspond with the coin intended to be 
used in operating the mechanism of the ma 
chine, and to dischargethese disks, which have 
been detected, to one side of the chute and 
outside of the trough by the insertion of the 
next coin or disk; also, to prevent the money 
passage from being clogged by paper, wood, 
or other material. 
A further object of our invention is to pro 
vide for the automatic discharge of the articles 
being vended, thus avoiding the necessity of 
having to operate a lever or pull for the ejec 
tion of said articles, and a still further object 
of our invention is to generally improve the 
construction and arrangement of devices of 
this description. 
With these ends in view this invention con 
sists in the details of construction and com 
bination of elements hereinafter set forth and 
then specifically designated by the claims. 
In order that those skilled in the art to 
Which this invention appertains may under 
stand how to make and use the same, the 
construction and operation will now be de 
Scribed in detail, referring to the accompany 
ing drawings, forming a part of this specifi 
cation, in which 
Figure I is a vertical section, taken through 
the center of one of the holders, showing the 
articles therein resting upon the trip-wheels 
and the mechanism in its normal position 
ready to be actuated by a coin so as to eject 
the lowest of the articles in the holder; Fig. 
2, an enlarged side view of the coin-detector, 
the upper portion of the chute being shown 
in elevation; Fig. 3, a section at the line 33 
I of Fig. 2, looking in the direction of the ar 
rows; Fig. 4, a section at the line 4 4, also 
looking in the direction of the arrows; Fig. 
5, a section at the line 55, looking in the di- 55 
rection of the arrow's marked adjacent there 
to; Fig. 6, a view similar to Fig. 5, but show 
ing a coin inserted within the slot and the 
mechanism for ejecting the spurious coins and 
other articles forced sidewise; Fig. 7, an en- 6o 
larged section of the trip mechanism, illus 
trating the manner in which the articles to be 
vended are extracted from the holder and 
conveyed to the tray; Fig. 8, a view of the 
trip mechanism, showing the trip-wheels as 65 
having been partially rotated by the action 
of the escapement and weight of the articles 
in the holder; Fig. 9, a plan view of the es 
capement mechanism and its frame; Fig. 10, 
a view similar to Fig. 7, but looking in the 7o 
opposite direction and showing the pawl for 
preventing a retrograde movement of the 
trip-wheels and also the swinging gate for 
permitting the outgo of the articles to be 
vended, but adapted to prevent tampering 75 
with the mechanism; Fig. 11, a vertical sec 
tion of the case, illustrating the manner of 
locking the panel which protects the money 
drawer; Fig. 12, a horizontal section of the 
case, further illustrating the manner of se- 8o 
curing the panel which protects the money 
drawer; and Fig. 13, a front elevation of the 
lower portion of the machine. 
In carrying out our invention as here em 
bodied. A represents the casing, which is pref- 85 
erably made of wood and of any suitable de 
sign to hold the operating parts of the device 
and the material to be vended, and within 
this case is located the holders B, which may 
be in any number to suit the requirement of 90 
the particular use to which the machine is to 
be put, and these holders are so constructed 
as to receive and hold the articles C, which 
are to be vended in small packages. Within 
the lower portion of the machine are placed 95 
a series of trip mechanisms D, which corre 
spond in number to the number of holders, 
and the frame of these mechanisms Support 
the lower ends of the holders by means of 
clips E, formed upon the back of the holders, Ioo 
engaging with the cross-pins F, while the up 
per ends of the holders are held in place by 
25 
30 
EO 
(5 
35 
45 
 
2 
614,553 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
So 
55 
the turn-button G, thus facilitating the re 
moval of these holders when occasion may re 
quire, as will be readily understood. 
Each of the trip mechanisms consists of a 
shaft H, which is journaled in the side plates 
of the frame and has secured thereon two 
escapement-wheels I, each having four teeth 
or notches therein. These escapement-wheels 
are so located relative to the lower ends of 
the holders that the articles contained within 
the holders rest upon one of the teeth of each 
of the wheels, thus preventing the downward 
movement of the articles so long as the wheels 
remain in the position shown in Figs. 1 and 
7. These wheels are held in this position by 
the trip-lever J, which is pivoted at IK and 
has formed thereon the escapement-teeth L 
and L', a spring MI normally holding the es 
capement-tooth Lin engagement with one of 
the teeth of the escapement-wheel, so that to 
trip these escapement-wheels it is only nec 
essary to swing the escapement-lever so as to 
carry the escapement-teeth upward, causing 
the tooth L to pass out of engagement with 
the teeth of the escapement-wheel, while the 
tooth L' enters into engagement with another 
tooth of this holder and acts after the man 
ner of a cam to insure the initial movement 
of the escapement-wheels, and this, in con 
nection with the weight of the articles within 
the holder, which, as clearly shown, is beyond 
the center of the shaft II, will cause the es 
capement-wheels to revolve one step or a dis 
tance equal to one-half of one of the teeth of 
the escapement-wheels, thereby bringing the 
mechanism to the position shown in Fig. 8. 
Now when the escapement-lever is released 
the spring M will return to its normal posi 
tion and in so doing again permit the escape 
ment-wheels to revolve another step, which 
will be equal to the half of a tooth, and con 
sequently these two steps Will have equaled 
the movement of one tooth and permitted the 
last package in the holder to drop therefrom. 
This of course will cause the articles remain 
ing in the chute to fall a distance equal to 
the package removed and the next lowest 
package to rest upon the teeth of the escape 
ment-wheels, as before described. To pre 
vent a retrograde movement of the escape 
ment-wheels, a pawl N is so pivoted as to en 
gage with the teeth thereof at the proper 
junction, and thus hold the wheels while the 
escapement is not acting thereon. 
O is a stop-plate secured to the frame of 
each of the escapement mechanisms and so 
located as to limit the movement of the es 
capement-lever in both directions, and the 
escapement-lever has an extension P project 
ing rearward therefrom, the outer portion of 
which is turned flat to afford a suitable sur 
face against which the coin may strike when 
dropping from the chute Q. 
A bracket R is secured to the back board 
of the casing and serves to support that por 
tion of the mechanism which receives the coin 
from the slot, sizes and tests the same be 
fore permitting it to pass to the chute, and 
ejects those coins and imitations of coins or 
other articles which are not up to standard, 
it being understood that there are as many 
brackets and mechanisms carried thereby as 
there are holders. An escutcheon R is at 
tached to the front portion of the bracket and 
has a slot R therein for the insertion of the 
coin, and immediately back of this escutcheon 
is journaled a rod S, in which are formed lon 
gitudinal grooves S', giving this rod in cross 
section the appearance of a pinion. Each of 
the grooves in the rod may serve as a guide 
for the coin after entering the slot, and as the 
rod is set upon an incline the tendency of the 
coin when entering the top groove is to roll 
rearward, and if it be of standard metal it 
will pass to the chute Q and, dropping down 
ward, fall upon the rear end of the lever P, 
depressing the same and bringing about the 
movement of the escapement-wheels, as before 
set forth, to extract one of the articles con 
tained within the holder. 
The chute Q is set upon an angle, and the 
lower side thereof is cut away, so as to just 
afford a bearing for a coin of standard size, 
so that should the coin or imitation be of less 
than standard size it will be dropped from the 
chute in its downward passage and be caught 
in the pan S. A horseshoe-magnet T is se 
cured to the plate T', which latter is pivoted 
within a portion of the bracket, so as to swing 
sidewise in the direction of the arrow marked 
adjacent thereto, and one pole of this magnet 
normally lies just to one side of the path of 
travel of the coin, as clearly indicated in Eig. 
3, so that the coin in its passage from the slot 
to the chute must come in close proximity to 
this pole, and should an iron or steel disk be 
inserted within the slot for the purpose of op 
erating the machine when reaching this pole 
it will be attracted thereby and prevented 
from gaining access to the chute. It is ob 
vious that while the spurious coins or other 
articles thus stand in the passage-way be 
tween the slot and the chute a standard coin 
cannot reach the chute to operate the ma 
chine, so that it is essential that this spurious 
coin be ejected from the passage-way, and 
this we accomplish in the following manner: 
An arm U is secured to the plate T and so 
bent as to form a push-off or ejector U', which 
normally lies to one side of the passage-way 
through which the coin passes, and this arm 
also has pivoted thereto a pawl U, the nose 
of which engages with the grooves in the rod 
S', so that it is only necessary to force the 
plate T' to one side in the direction of the 
arrow to swing the magnet in this direction 
and at the same time force the ejector U' 
against the spurious coin and likewise operate 
the pawl U* to revolve the rod one step, which 
will carry the lower portion of the coin or 
other articles sidewise, and a strip U will 
prevent the upper portion of the spurious 
coin following the pole of the magnet, thus 
freeing said coin and permitting it to drop 
7 o 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
IOS 
IO 
I 5 
I 25 
 
614,558 
O 
15 
25 
75 
85 
into the pan S, as clearly shown in Fig. 4. 
the front portion thereof is fitted a plate W8, 
as shown in Fig. 12, Said plate having a forked 
The slot in the escutcheon is of such a size as 
to just admit a coin of the proper dimension, 
end C1, which fits around a pin b, so that the 
plate may be swung after the mannel of a 
S0 that unless the coin is of standard size or 
hinged door, and yet when partly swung open 
under it cannot be inserted, whereas should 
it be understandard size it will drop from the 
may be removed and when closed is held in 
place by the bolt d, fitted to slide upon one 
chute, as before set forth, and should it be of 
iron or steel it will be ejected before reaching 
side of the casing and its lower end to enter 
the chute, thus avoiding the possibility of the 
a hole e, formed in the lug projecting from 
machine being operated by spurious or imi 
the plate. The bolt being inside of the cas 
ing when the latter is closed, it will be seen 
tation of coin. 
The ejector is operated upon the insertion 
that access cannot be had to the bolt to re 
lease the plate, and thus the money-drawerf 8o 
of each coin by means of a bar W, which is 
cannot be tampered with. The face-plate g 
secured to the plate T and has formed there 
is held in place by its lower edges entering 
with an arm V', which extends downward and 
into engagement with the notches formed in 
into contact with the lever W, the latter be 
ing pivoted at V and lying partially across 
the tray, as indicated at h, and the engage 
the slot, so that when inserting a coin this 
ment of the hooks with the lugsi, and finally 
the casingisclosed by the front boardic, which 
lever must be forced sidewise and in turn 
force the arm V' sidewise and bring about the 
has a groove in its lower edge adapted to fit 
over the bead l, formed upon the upper edge 
movement of the plate T', which actuates the 
ejector mechanism, as before set forth. This 
of the face-plate, and a Suitable lockis located 
Will eject the spurious coin or other articles 
at n for securing the upper portion of this 
front board. This arrangement permits of 
and leave the passage clear for the next coin 
ready access to any portion of the machine, 
tO paSS to the chute. 
When the rod S is revolved one step, the 
and especially to the holders and to the money 
next groove comes into position and acts as 
drawer. The pan for spurions coins rests 
upon the ledge n, its front edge being Sup 
a guideway until again revolved, and this is 
of considerable importance in that should par 
ported by the hooks p, and is thereafter easily 
ticles of grit or foreign matter become lodged 
removed when occasion requires. 
in the groove being used as a guideway it will 
Of course We do not Wish to be limited to 
fall therefrom when revolved, so that when 
the exact details of construction here shown, 
this groove again comes into position it will 
as these may be varied to some extent with 
be free from the obstruction of the passage 
out departing from the spirit of our invention. 
of the coin. A pawl V is arranged to engage 
IHaving thus fully described our invention, 
With the grooves in the rod S and prevents a 
what We claim as new and useful is 
retrograde movement thereof. 
1. In a vending - machine, a coin-testing 
When One of the packages has been with 
mechanism consisting of a grooved rod acting 
as a coin-guide, a magnet pivoted to SWing at 
drawn from the holder, it will in its down 
Ward movement come in contact with the gate 
right angles to said rod, and means for actu 
W, the latter being so pivoted and weighted 
atting said magnet, substantially as described. 
as to normally remain closed, as shown in 
2. In a vending-machine, a grooved rod to 
Figs. 1 and 10, and when this package comes 
act as a coin-guide a magnet pivoted to in 
in contact therewith the gate will be swung 
tercept a spurious coin of magnetic metal, and 
Open arid the package permitted to continue 
means connected with the magnet for forcing 
its downward movement until reaching the 
the latter sidewise, as and for the purpose de 
tray W, the rear portion of said tray being 
scribed. 
inclined, so as to slide the package forward 
3. In a vending-machine of the character 
into plain view of the customer. After the 
described, a coin-testing mechanism consist 
package has passed the gate the latter will 
ing of a grooved rod so journaled as to act as 
again close, and thus form an effective obstacle 
a guide for the coin from the slot to the chute, 
a pivoted magnet so arranged as to intercept 
for the insertion of a wire or other implement 
for the unauthorized operation of the trip 
an imitation coin of magnetic metal, means 
mechanism which would tend to withdraw the 
connected with the magnet for forcing the lat 
packages. 
ter sidewise when the next coin is inserted 
From this description it is obvious that the 
within the slot, and means for revolving the 
Would-be purchaser has only to insert the coin 
grooved rod with the sidewise movements of 
within the slot to set in operation the proper 
the magnet, as and for the purpose set forth. 
mechanism for the extraction of a package 
4. In combination with a machine of the 
from either of the holders, and no further 
character described, a coin-detector consist 
manipulation of the machine is necessary, 
ing of a suitable bracket, a grooved rod jour 
since the entire operations are performed 
naled therein, a magnet pivoted upon the 
automatically and the package dropped into 
bracket, a bar attached to the magnet, a le 
the tray in plain view, from which it may be 
ver arranged to partly cross the slot and in 
contact with an arm of the bar, so that the 
removed. 
A tray W' is secured between the sides of 
insertion of a coin within the slot will SWing 
the casing by suitable screws, and beneath the magnet sidewise, a pawl so carried that 
95 
I to 
I 15 
OO 
IOS 
2 d 
I25 
35 
4. 
45 
55 
 
614,553 
4 
the sidewise movements of the magnet will 
cause it to revolve the grooved rod, a pawl 
for preventing the retrograde movement of 
the rod, an ejector also moving in unison with 
the magnet, and a strip for forcing the spuri 
ous coin from the pole of the magnet, as and 
for the purpose set forth. 
5. In a vending-machine, a holder contain 
ing the articles to be vended, escapement 
Wheels arranged beneath said holder said 
wheels having notches formed therein produc 
ing teeth, the lower edges of said teeth being 
in the form of cams, a trip-lever, escapement 
teeth projecting from the end thereof, one of 
said teeth normally engaging the upper sides 
of the teeth of the escapement-wheel to hold 
it against movement, and the other upon a 
movement of the lever being adapted to en 
gage the under sides of said teeth to force 
said wheels around, and an extension formed 
upon said lever on which the coins strike, as 
and for the purpose described. 
In testimony whereof we have hereunto af 
fixed our signatures in the presence of two sub 
scribing witnesses. 
ALEXANDER JAEGER. 
OTTO JAEGER. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN A. AU, 
AUGUST JAEGER. 
(O 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614654.txt	No. 614,654, 
(No Model.) 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
J. D. H. ODGES. 
CAR FENDER. 
(Application filed Feb. 8, 1898.) 
YNWvesses: 
'3 S(hot-Cu 
(2.4. 
 
the Norris PETERs co. PHoro-LTHos. washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN D.HODGES, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF FIVE-SIXTHS 
TO JAMES BELLEW, FRANK H. REPETTO, AND PATRICK J. KING, 
OF SAME PLACE. 
CAR-FENDER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 614,654, dated November 22, 1898, 
Application filed February 8, 1898, Serial No, 669,554 (No model.) 
To all whom, it may concern: 
Be it known that I, JOHN D. HODGES, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Chicago, 
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Car-Fenders, of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
In Letters Patent of the United States 
granted to me on the 27th day of August, 1895, 
and numbered 545,290, I have described and 
claimed a fender for street-cars in which the 
buffer is normally held at a certain elevation 
above the rails, but upon meeting an obstruc 
tion is caused to automatically trip the fen 
der, which thereupon drops upon its hinges 
to present an incline. 
The present invention relates to improve 
ments in fenders of such type, and has for 
its object to simplify the construction of the 
tripping mechanism, reduce the number of 
parts, and render the action more reliable 
and accurate, to insure the operation of the 
trip irrespective of the point along the length 
Of the buffer at which it meets an obstruc 
tion and obviate any possible jamming, and 
in general to make the construction of the 
fender more economical and efficient. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side eleva 
tion, partly in section, of a fender embracing 
my improvement attached to the front or ad 
vancing platform of a car. Fig. 2 is a top 
plan view of said fender detached, and Fig. 
3 is a detail of a modification. 
A indicates a portion of a car-body, and A' 
the platform thereof, which is supposed for 
the time to be the front or advancing plat 
form. To brackets B, depending from the 
forward corners of the platform, is pivoted 
the fender-frame C, which is formed in two 
sections, one of which C'extends rearwardly 
from the pivotal point underneath the plat 
form, While the other section C extends for 
Wardly in advance of the platform, their con 
nection with the pivot-bolts c being in the na 
ture of a rule-joint, as at c', so that if the 
rear section is depressed and locked in a hori 
Zontal or other position it will hold the for 
Ward Section up in line with it, while the for 
Ward Section may be independently turned 
up and folded over against the dashboard of 
the car, as indicated by the curve in broken 
25 
35 
45 
 
lines, should it not be in use, as when it is at 
the rear of the car. 
The front section of the frame is braced by 
a cross-bar D, slightly in advance of the piv 55 
otal connections, and through this bar and 
the front bar D' of the section play parallel 
bearing-rods E, flattened at their forward 
ends and secured to the buffer E' by vertical 
pivot-pins e, as shown, so that the buffer will 
be permitted a slighthinging movement upon 
them in case it meets an obstruction near one 
end or the other. The rear ends of these rods 
have rounded headse', that bear against the 
rounded heads fof short thrust-rods F, play 
ing through the front transverse bar F" of 
the rear section of the frame, the contacting 
points of these heads being in line or about 
in line with the hinge between the two frame 
sections. These thrust-rods in turn are piv 
oted to the ends of converging levers G, full 
crumed to ears or lugs g, projecting rear 
Wardly from said last-mentioned front bar, 
and these levers at their meeting points yoke 
into the annularly-grooved head h of a latch 
bolt H, which plays through a transverse 
brace-bar H' and the rear bar Hof said rear 
section and centrally thereof. A coiled spring 
h', seated against a collar h upon this latch 
bolt and bearing against the brace-bar H', 
normally thrusts the bolt to the rear, draw 
ing upon the converging levers and causing 
them to press the buffer outward to its full 
est extent through the contacting rods. 
To the bottom of the car-body, immediately 
behind the rear section of the fender-frame, 
is secured a hanger K, having at its foot a 
ledge k, upon which the rear bar of said rear 
section normally rests to carry the whole 
frame in a horizontal position. Immediately 
above this ledge is a bolt-hole k', into which 
the latch-bolt takes to lock the fender into 
such horizontal position. Pivoted to the rear 
of this hanger, which will hereinafter be 
termed the latch-hanger, is a trip-lever L, 
having at its foot an inturned finger l, which 
plays through the rear of the bolt-hole to 
drive the latch-bolt out thereof when it is not 
automatically retracted by the action of the 
buffer. The upper end of this lever is con 
nected by rod or link M. With a bell-crank N. 
beneath the front of the platform, and a plun 
85 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
614,654 
pivots upon which it swings, the latch-hangel', 
the latch-bolt, a lever engaging with the heel 
end of said latch-bolt to retract it, a spring 
acting upon said latch-bolt to draw it into 
engagement and rock the lever, the buffer 
and its bearing-rods, and connections be 
tween the lever and the buffer, whereby the 
buffer is projected by the force of the spring 
on the latch-bolt, and acts through the lever 
to retract the bolt whenever forced back by 
an obstruction. 
2. The combination of the rule-jointed fen 
der-frame, pivots upon which it swings and 
which constitute the hinge between its joints, 
the buffer, its bearing-rods terminating in 
about a line with said hinge, a thrust-rod in 
contact with the headed rear end of one of 
said bearing-rods, and mounted in the rear 
section of the fender-frame, a lever actuated 
by said thrust-rod, a latch-bolt with which 
said lever engages, a spring acting upon said 
latch-bolt in opposition to the lever, and a 
latch-hanger into which said bolt takes. 
3. The combination of the rule-jointed fen 
der-frame, pivots upon which it swings, and 
which constitute the hinge between its joints, 
the buffer, its rearwardly-extending bearing 
rods terminating about inline with said hinge, 
the thrust-rods contacting with the rear ends 
of said bearing-rods, the converging levers 
with which said rods connect, the centrally 
arranged latch-bolt with which the meeting 
ends of said levers engage the spring upon 
said latch-bolt, and the latch-hanger. 
4. The combination with the fender and 
its latch-bolt, and with the latch-hanger, of 
the trip-lever having an in turned finger act 
ing upon the end of the latch-bolt to thrust 
it out of engagement, and connections be 
tween said lever and the platform, whereby 
the lever is operated by the driver. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
JOIN. D. HODGES. 
Witnesses: 
J. BUEHLER, 
L. DAVIS. 
55 
65 
75 
85 
O 
ger N', operated by the driver's foot, actuates 
the bell-crank and trip-lever, so as to release 
the latch-bolt when the overbalancing-weight 
of the front section of the fender-frame will 
swing it downward, lifting the rear section 
through the rule-joints and causing the whole 
to assume the position represented in dotted 
lines. 
Any suitable means may be employed for 
restoring the fender to its normal position 
when the transient emergency has passed. 
Such means are shown and described in my 
former patent, and I have not deemed it nec 
essary to represent them herein. 
Mounted on the forward bar of the fender 
and centrally thereof is a small truck O, 
which travels upon the side rails of the cable 
slot when the fender is down, in case the lat 
ter is applied to a cable-car, to cause it to 
ride easy and to sustain any weight that may 
be thrown upon it. 
A woven-wire or network fender P is or 
may be hung by hooks p upon the car-plat 
form over the fender-frame or as a part of 
the same. 
It will be understood that the apparatus is 
tripped by the driver whenever he sees occa 
sion therefor, but should his attention be at 
tracted elsewhere the latch-bolt will be a u 
tomatically withdrawn the moment the buffer 
encounters a resistance through the yielding 
of said buffer, carrying one or both of its bear 
ing-rods backward, and through the thrust 
rod or rods operating the converging levers to 
retract said latch-bolt. 
It is evident that the tripping mechanism 
herein described may be applied to other 
than jointed fender-frames and that in case 
the buffer is so mounted as to yield in paral 
lelism only but a single one of the two levers 
herein described may be employed, operated 
by a single bearing-rod and thrust-rod. Hence 
I do not restrict myself to the precise construc 
tion herein shown; but 
What I do claim, and desire to secure by 
Letters Patent, is 
1. The combination of the fender-frame, 
3O 
35 
45 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614754.txt	No. 614,754. 
E. L. PEASE. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
CONSTRUCTION OF FIREPROOF FLOORING, &c. 
(Application filed June 7, 1898,) 
(No Model.) 
 
 
3 Sheets-Sheet . 
 
 
  
SN 
zzz 
NYNs 
K57 
 
 
Fi 
7 very very vs 1 vs 
No. 614,754. 
(No. Model.) 
 
E. L. PEASE. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
CONSTRUCTION OF FIREPROOF FLOORING, &c. 
(Application fied June 7, 1898.) 
3. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
2WS 
 
tions retERs co. PHOTo-LTHO. WASHINGTON, O, 
No. 614,754. 
S. 
Patented Nov. 22, 1898. 
E. L. PEASE. 
CONSTRUCTION OF FIREPROOF FLOORING, &c. 
(Application filed June 7, 1898.) 
(No Model.) 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Fi J. 4. 
ev 
- I - I 
et 
- I - H - 
ITTTT 
  
 
 
ostersco, PHOTo-Litho. was". 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD LLOYD PEASE, OF HURW OR TH MOOR, ENGLAND. 
construction of FIRE PRoof FLOORING, &c. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 614,754, dated November 22, 1898. 
Application filed June 7, 1898, Serial No. 682,854, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
Figures 1 and 2 are corresponding sectional 7c 
To all, whon, it may concern: 
charged into the flooring when required. The 
Beitknown that I, EDWARD LLOYDPEASE, 
troughs are provided along their sides with 
a Subject of the Queen of Great Britain and 
holes or perforations; below the level of which 
Ireland, residing at Hurworth Moor; in the 
the said troughs are Water-tight, so that a lim 
county of Durham, England, have invented 
ited supply of water is troughed or pooled in 
certain new and useful Improvements in the 
the flooring and when heated is driven out into 
Construction of Fireproof Flooring and Tike 
the space below in the form of vapor. 
Structural Arrangements; and Idohereby de To this end I adopt the constructions repre 
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex 
sented in the accompanying drawings, which 
act description of the invention, such as will 
show the embodiment of my invention in a 
enable others skilled in the art to which it ap 
variety of forms, to which might be added 
pertains to make and use the same. 
others, those selected being intended to illus 
My invention relates to fireproof flooring 
trate representative modifications for the va 
and the like structural arrangements in which 
rious conditions which have to be complied 
a system of troughing adapted to hold water 
with in floor and flat-roof construction of the 
is incorporated with other structural ele 
ordinary or more usual kind. 
ments, the combination affording the requi 
In the drawings like letters of reference 
site strength and rigidity, as hereinafter de 
indicate like or corresponding parts in all the 
figures. 
Scribed. 
The object of this invention is to construct 
floors, flat roofs, and the like structures on a 
views taken transversely and longitudinally, 
practically fireproof principle by making pro 
respectively, to the floor-planking, with the 
vision for troughing or pooling water within 
construction adapted to floors of a narrow 
the structural elements of the floor and in 
span, the beams or joists C. C. forming shallow 
such a way that the water protects the floor 
troughs capable of holding water. These 
from the effects of heat or is generated into 
beams are preferably stiffened by any num 
steam, which issues through holes and perfo 
ber of partitions b, made of wood, with a hole 
rations, as from a sprinkler under pressure; 
bored through each to maintain a continuous 
but while I arrange for the retention in the 
communication from one compartment to an 
troughs of a certain supply of water to insure 
other along the trough. Figs. 3 and 4 are 
the indestructibility of the floor I can, if de 
similar illustrations of the construction as 
sired, arrange that the water-level of the sup 
adapted to floors of greater span, the hollow 
ply shall be above that of the perforations, 
beam or joist Cl, being of a truncated form of 
so that Water may be discharged therefrom. 
an inverted triangle, which is preferable to 
My present invention is more especially 
the circular form as giving greater depth for 
adapted to flooring of the kind described in 
the same width of material from which it is 
the specification of the Letters Patent granted 
made. The strength of the hollow beams of 
to me on May 31, 1895, and numbered 10,783, 
this form is further increased, if required, by 
as shown in Figs. 15 to 21, inclusive, of the 
internal struts, such as c in Fig. 4. In Fig. 5 
drawings, but is also adapted to other con 
the beams take the open tubular form and 
structions of flooring, as will be hereinafter 
are partially embedded in cement or concrete, 
explained. 
the lower part of each beam being kept open 
In carrying out my invention I provide in 
to form a trough for the reception of water, 
connection with my system of trough-flooring 
as shown in a transverse sectional view, to 
provision for charging the troughs with wa 
which end boards d are employed to support 
ter, preferably through an inlet-valve, the le 
the cement or concrete until it becomes hard 
ver of which is held in the shut-off position 
set. In Fig. 6 a recognized form of concrete 
by a cord or leadline of material which would 
floor, as shown in trailsverse section, is simi 
be easily consumed in case of fire, so that a larly rendered fireproof by combining there 
Io 
25 
35 
45 
5o continuous supply of water is automatically with corrugated plating e, in the concavities IOo 
 
95 
2 
614,754 
IO 
20 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
95 
of which water is pooled, while the convexi 
ties are perforated for the expulsion of water 
or steam. Fig. 7 illustrates a precisely simi 
lar combination of corrugated plating, with 
a recognized form of timber floor rendered 
fireproof in the manner described with ref 
erence to Fig. 6. Figs. 8 and 9 illustrate, in 
similar transverse sectional views, light and 
cheap constructions of flooring, in which 
sheets e' are set diagonally or thereabouts to 
the main beams in a manner which contrib 
utes strength to the floor, while forming 
troughs for pooling water. Other modes of 
combining With flooring of ordinary beam and 
boarding construction means for pooling 
water are illustrated in transverse sectional 
views in Figs. 10 and 11. In floors where the 
steel joists are not used the troughs have 
diaphragm-stiffeners b, as shown in Fig. 12, 
in addition to which struts may be used, as 
shown in Fig. 13. 
It must be understood that in all the modi 
fications as above described it is essential 
that provision be made not only for supply 
ing and pooling the water, but also for dis 
charging it into the room, Space, or compart 
ment below the floor or roof in case of fire. 
This is effected in all cases by perforations 
in the trough or plating, as the case may be, 
above the normal line of water-level, so that 
the water issues therefrom as water under 
pressure or as steam or vapor in such quan 
tity and effect as to extinguish any fire break 
ing out beneath a floor or ceiling so con 
structed. In combination with this and in 
order to set up and maintain a continuous 
supply of Water into the system of troughing, 
as hereinbefore described, I avail myself of 
any convenient means, such as an inlet-valve, 
as shown in Figs. 2 and 14, the level of which 
is overbalanced by a ball f', the arrangement 
being set to a constant tendency to open the 
valve and admit an inrush of water. This 
tendency is overpowered by a weight g, sus 
pended from a cord or lead line h, which 
holds up the lever if and keeps the valve 
closed. This cord consists of material which 
would be easily consumed in case of fire, so 
that the lever could then be overpowered by 
the ballf' and the inflow of water would take 
place. 
In order to insure the proper action of the 
ball-and-lever arrangement for turning on the 
Water, I provide a system of cording trained 
around pulleys in the manner as shown in 
Figs. 14 and 15, in which Fig. 14 is a side 
elevation, and Fig. 15 an incomplete plan, of 
what is suitable in this respect. Figs. 14 and 
15 are intended more especially to show a 
combination of such cords or lead lines sys 
tematically arranged with a view of securing 
the inflow of Water from the destruction or 
severance of any one of them. Taking has 
the main cord from the ball-lever f to the 
Weight g it will be seen that if the cord J. 
snapped altogether this weight g would fall, 
and if the cord h, was only temporarily re 
laxed the weight would immediately set up the 
tensile strain, as before, and close the Valve. 
h' are cords taken in a crosswise direction to 
their several points of connection relatively 
to cord h, which is trained around pulleys, 
forming a series of loops or bights, each. One 
of which is relaxed when the particular cord 
h' attached to it gives way. The cord l is 
then relaxed and the weight g drops; but in 
order to prevent this weight from again closing 
the valve I provide a check-chaini, which 
takes the weight g when it drops and pre 
vents all further strain on the rope or cord h, 
which would close the valve. 
It will be observed from the above descrip 
tion that the construction of the flooring, ill 
respect to the requisite strength and rigidity, 
is not material to my invention so long as 
the structural arrangement thereof admits of 
water being troughed or pooled therein, 
whether from a continuous or automatic Sup 
ply or permanently, and so long as the Water 
so troughed or pooled below an overflow level, 
which, if exceeded, forms an outlet for water, 
is exposed to heat in case of fire, as a means 
of protection for the exposed elements of the 
floor, and is driven forth as an effectual fire 
extinguisher in the form of vapor when the 
structural elements in contact with the Water 
reach a very high temperature. 
Having now described my invention, What 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In the construction of floors, roofs and 
the like, the combination with fireproof wa 
ter-troughing formed beneath said floors o' 
roofs and provided with overflow-orifices com 
municating with the outside, said troughs 
being normally partly filled with water, a 
weighted valve controlling the flow of water 
into said troughing, and a fusible cord secured 
to the weight-arm of said valve and normally 
acting to keep the valve closed and by its rup 
ture to open the said valve, substantially as 
described. 
2. In the construction of floors, roofs and 
the like, the combination with hollow water 
trough beams normally partly filled With Wa 
ter and provided with orifices along their sides 
above the normal water-line for the escape of 
the water in case of fire, substantially as de 
Scribed. 
3. In the construction of floors, roofs and 
the like, the combination with hollow water 
trough beams normally partly filled with wa 
ter, and provided with orifices along their sides 
above the normal water-line. for the escape of 
the water, and means for admitting a con 
tinuous supply of water into said troughing 
in case of fire, substantially as described. 
4. In the construction of floors, roofs and 
the like, the combination with fireproof wa 
ter-trough beams lying beneath said flool's or 
roofs, the troughing being normally partly 
filled with water and provided with overflow 
 
IC5 
Iid 
II S 
I 25 
I 3G 
614,754 
3 
orifices above the normal water-line for the 
Water to escape through in case of fire, a 
weighted valve controlling the flow of water 
into said troughing, a main fusible cord se- in presence of two witnesses. 
cured to the weight-arm of said valve and 
passing over a series of pulleys and Weighted 
at its free end, and a series of lateral cords 
connected to said main cord and forming a 
series of loops in said main cord between said 
pulleys, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
EDWARD LLOYD PEASE. 
Witnesses: 
GEORGE JAAIES CLARKSON, 
EDWARD THOMAS ELCOAT. 
IO 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614854.txt	No. 64,854. 
(No Model.) 
A. FRANK & L. R. KRATZMUELLER. 
Patented Nov. 29, 1898. 
INTUBATOR. 
(Application filed Dee. 9, 1897.) 
2 Z 
SIS 
WITN ESSE: 
2, 
s 
INVENTORS: 
47. 24 
 
THE MORRIS PETERs co, PHoTo-lirho, washington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
ANTON FRANK AND LOUIS ROMAN KRATZMUELLER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, 
NTUBATOR. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 614,854, dated November 29, 1898. 
Application filed December 9, 1897, Serial No. 661,307, (No model.) 
To alt, uhon it inctly concern: 
Be it known that we, ANTON FRANK and 
LOUIS ROMAN KRATZMUELLER, subjects of 
the Emperor of Germany, residing at Chicago, 
5 in the county of Cook and State of Illinois, 
have invented a new and useful Combined 
Intubator and Extubator of which the follow 
ing is a specification. 
Our invention relates to improvements in a 
Io combined intubator and extubator for insert 
ing and extracting intubation-tubes provided 
with jaws which work like the beak of a bird; 
and the objects of our invention are, first, 
that the two lever-shanks do not take more 
I5 space when open than when closed; second, 
that it consists of less parts than any other 
combined in and extubator, making its work 
ing much smoother, and thereby greatly facili 
tating the very difficult operation, and that 
2O the screw uniting the levers cannot be lost; 
third, that the instrument is easily separable 
and perfectly aseptic, having no cavities, and, 
fourth, that the simplicity of the instrument 
makes its Working a certainty, which is most 
25 important, as the instrument is always used 
in case of utmost emergency and the loss of 
a second may mean the loss of the life of the 
patient on whom it is used. 
We attain these objects by the arrange 
3o ment illustrated in the accompanying draw 
ings, in which 
Figure 1 shows a complete in and ex tuba 
tor as operated. Intubation-tube is shown 
in dotted lines. Figs. 2 and 3 are the top and 
35 side views of the handle-lever. Figs. 4 and 5 
are the top and side views of the combined 
operating and ratchet lever. Fig. 6 shows in 
enlarged size the thumb-screw about which 
as a fulcrum the two levers turn. 
TWO levers 1 and 2, pivoted together by 
means of thumb-screw 3, comprise the com 
plete in and ex tubator. Lever 1, having at 
one end the handle 4 and at the other end the 
jaW 5, of a slender and somewhat conical form, 
45 is tapped for the thumb-screw 3 near the wid 
ened angle formed between jaw 5 and lever 
1. Lever 2 has on one end the jaw 6, of the 
same shape as jaw 5 of lever 1. These jaws 
or blades 5 and 6 work like a beak and are 
5o roughened at the external surfaces, which are 
intended to grasp the inside walls of the in 
 
55 
tubation-tubes. Spring-trigger 7, at the other 
end of lever 2, is bent in the same direction 
as the jaw 6 and passes through the slot 8 of 
enlarged part 9 of lever 1. Teeth are cut 
into spring - trigger 7, which engage with 
tongue 10 of slot 8. Thumb-screw 3 holds to 
gether levers 1 and 2 near the angle formed 
by the junction of the blades or jaws 5 and 6 
with levers 1 and 2, respectively. When 
thumb-screw 3 is screwed entirely into tap 11 
of lever 1, the slot 12 of lever 2 can be slipped 
over rivet-shank 13 of thumb-screw 3, in or 
der to entirely separate the two levers for 
cleaning purposes. 
When thumb-screw 3 is screwed back, its 
knob 14 engages with countersunk recess 15 
and keeps lever 2 from displacement. Knob 
14 being larger than tap-hole 11 makes the 
screw irremovable, so that it cannot be lost. 
When hole 8 is in the middle of spring-trig 
ger 7, the shanks of levers 1 and 2 cover each 
other, so that the smallest possible space is 
occupied by the shanks when the beak is 
fully opened or closed. 
What we claim as our invention, and desire 
to secure by Letters Patent, is 
In a combined intubator and extubator, the 
combination of one lever, having on one end 
a jaw roughened outside, and a thumb-screw 
consisting of the screw proper, screwed into 
a tap located near the angle formed by the 
junction of the jaw and lever, this thumb 
screw having on one end a roll 15, on the 
other end a rivet-shank and knob, on the 
other end of the lever a handle and a slot 8, 
with another shorter lever, having on one 
end a jaw also roughened outside, and a slot 
with a recess near the angle formed by the 
junction of jaw and lever, said slot and recess go 
containing the rivet-shank and knob of the 
thumb-screw, on the other end of the second 
lever a spring-trigger passing through slot 
8 and adapted to be worked by thumb and 
index-finger of the hand substantially as set 95 
forth. 
85 
75 
ANTON FRANK, 
LOUIS ROMAN KRATAMUELLER, 
Witnesses: 
C. FREYTAG, 
CHAS. STORZ, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US614954.txt	No. 614,954. 
H. EFFERY & . MOXON. 
Patented Nov. 29, 1898. 
(No Mode.) 
 
MD GUARD STAY FOR BICYCLES. 
(Application filed Mar. 28, 1898.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
No. 614,954. 
H. EFFERY & . MOXON. 
Patented Nov. 29, 1898. 
MUD GUARD STAY FOR BCYCES. 
(Application filed Mar. 28, 1898.) 
 
(No Model.) 
nS 
2 Sheets-e-Sheet 2. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
IIENRY JEFFERY AND JOSEPII MOXON, OF STOCKIBRIDGE, ENGLAND. 
MUD - GUARD STAY FOR BICYCLES. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 614,954, dated November 29, 1898. 
Application filed March 28, 1898, Serial No. 675,451. (No model.) 
O 
w 
To a ZZ whon it inctly concern: 
Beit known that we, IIENRY JEFFERY, man 
ager of steel-Works, residing at Stockbridge, 
and JOSEPH MOXON, foreman of steel-works, 
residing at Hawthorn Brook, Stockbridge, 
near Sheffield, England, subjects of the Queen 
of Great Britain, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in and Relating to 
Detachable Mud-Guard Stays for Bicycles 
and the Like, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
According to our invention we provide bi 
cycles and the like with readily-detachable 
mud-guards carried by stays of trough-wire, 
the ends of which are formed to enter socikets 
attached by lugs to the machine and carrying 
Spring-catches to hold to the sockets. 
Our improvements are shown in the draw 
ings annexed. 
Figure 1 is a side view of an ordinary bi 
cycle with the mud-guards attached. Fig. 2 
is a side view, and Fig. 3 an end view, of one 
of the sockets and the lug-piece of which it 
forms a part for the back wheel. Figs. 2 
and 3' are similar views of another socket 
and lug-piece for the front wheel. Fig. 4 
shows separately one of the stays and the 
socket-pieces into which the ends of the stay 
enter. Fig. 5 is a section on the line a b, Fig. 
4; and Fig. 6, a section at right angles to Fig. 
5. Figs. 7 and 8 show two ways in which the 
portions of the stay containing the inner ends 
of the springs of the catches may be sur 
rounded with a tubular cap or casing to ex 
clude dirt. 
In the drawings, A is one of the lug-pieces, 
formed from a piece of sheet metal turned 
over at one end to form the socket A and 
With a hole A formed through it at the other 
end, by which it can be secured to any part 
of the machine. In Fig. 1 these lugs are 
shown as being attached to the ends of the 
Wheel-axles, the ends of the axles passing 
through the holes A* and the lugs clamped 
and held securely by the ordinary retaining 
nuts, which screw onto the ends of the axles. 
B is the stay to which the mud-guard C is 
riveted. It is formed from one piece of trough 
wire flattened and bent round at the middle, 
as shown. 
Dare the spring-catches carried at the ends 
of the stay. 
As will be seen, the ends of the trough-wire 
stay are bent inward to make the wire at these 
parts correspond with the cross-section of 
the sockets, the two edges of the wire being 
brought toward one another with sufficient 
space left to allow the spring-catch to extend 
outward between them. 
The inner end of each spring is formed to 
rest against the bottom of the trough and is 
retained by a rivet E, as shown. The other 
end of the spring stands out from the bottom 
of the trough, and a notch D' is formed in it 
where it projects out from the stay. The ex 
treme end of the spring is rounded, so that 
when the ends of the stay are being inserted 
into the sockets A these ends of the springs 
may be pressed inward and allow the ends of 
the stay to enter freely. When the ends of 
the stay have been passed into the sockets 
far enough for the notches D' to be brought 
opposite to the sockets, the catches fly out 
Ward, and the ends of the notches coming 
against the ends of the sockets retain the stay 
securely. The projecting shoulder D* at the 
inner end of each notch prevents the ends of 
the stay from being pressed down too far into 
the sockets. To release the stay from the 
Sockets, the spring-catches can be pressed in 
ward by the small buttons D. Its ends can 
then both be withdrawn simultaneously from 
the sockets and the mud - guard removed 
with it. 
Where the mud-guards pass between the 
fork carrying the front wheel or the forked 
portion of the frame carrying the hind driv 
ing-wheel, they may be retained by pins pass 
ing through them or be retained in any other 
suitable manner. 
To prevent dirt passing down the trough 
wire into the end portions which contain the 
spring-catches, the wire is filled in solid just 
above the inner end of each spring by a solid 
filling-piece B'. The inner portion or stem of 
each spring may also be completely inclosed 
by a tubular cap-piece G, surrounding the 
portion of the stay which contains it. The 
extreme ends of the stay are also closed in, as 
shown, by bending over a portion of the wire. 
To allow of the cap-piece G being removed 
whenever required from around the end of 
the spring, the rounding of the wire might be 
continued for some distance inward along 
25 
35 
40 
45 
 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
2 
614,954 
2. A two-armed stay for carrying a mud 
guard composed of one piece of trough-wire 
flattened at the center and bent round to fit 
to the interior of the mud-guard and strength 
ened around the bend by a correspondingly 
bent plate held at its ends within the trough 
wire arms by closing over onto a portion of 
the sides of the arms substantially as de 
scribed. 
3. A two-armed stay for carrying a mud 
guard, formed from trough-wire having a 
spring-catch carried within the end of each 
trough-arm and having a tube surrounding 
the portion of each arm in which the rear end 
of each spring-catch is contained so as to ex 
clude dirt substantially as described. 
IENRY JEFEERY, 
JOSEPH MIOXON. 
25 
35 
Witnesses: 
W. II. CHAPMAN, 
LAWRENCE W. BEECH. 
the Wire, as shown at Fig. 7, so that the cap 
may be slid endwise along the wire, or the 
tubular cap might be of thin spring metal 
and be slotted longitudinally, as shown at 
Fig. 8, so that when moved endwise in the 
Opposite direction it might open out to pass 
the shoulder D of the spring and so be slid 
off from the end of the stay. 
Where the central portion of the wire is 
flattened and bent round, it is strengthened 
by a strengthening-piece II, the ends of which 
are held by closing the sides of the trough 
wire around them, as shown at Figs. 4 and 5. 
What we claim is 
1. A two-armed stay for carrying the mud 
guard for a bicycle or other wheel, formed 
from trough-wire flattened at the center and 
bent round to fit to the interior of the mud 
guard where the mud-guard is to be attached 
to it and carrying at the end of each arm a 
spring-catch lying within the hollow of the 
trough-wire substantially as described. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615054.txt	(No Model.) 
(Application filed Oct. 19, 1897.) 
4 Sheets-Sheet . 
 
WITNESSES; 
???? 
??????? 
?? 
NVENTOR: 
rep 
No. 615,054. 
(No Motlet.) 
H. F. WASON. 
TRICYCLE. 
(Application filed Oct. 19, 1897.) 
Patented Nov. 29, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
s 
WTNESSES: 
 
NVENTOR: 
re NoRRIS PETER 
porouTHo, wasHINGTON, C. 
No. 615,054. 
(No Mode.) 
H. F. WATS ON. 
TRECYCLE. 
(Application filed Oct. 19, 1897.) 
Patented Nov. 29, 1898. 
4. Sheets-Sheet 3. 
WITNESSES 
INVENTOR. 
 
No. 615,054. 
(No Model.) 
Patented Nov. 29, 1898. 
4 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
H. F. WASON. 
TRICYCLE. ' 
(Application filed Oct. 19, i897.) 
AZG4 
 
  
 
WITNESSES 
?? 
????? 
? 
?? 
?? 
?????? 
??? 
INVENTOR: 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
HENRY F. WATSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR, BY 
DIRECT AND MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO HIMSELF AND WILLIAM J. 
CHANINEL, OF SAME PLACE. 
TRICYCLE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 615,054, dated November 29, 1898. 
Application filed October 19, 1897, Serial No. 655,661 (No model.) 
55 
?? 
?7 
75 
To cull tv/vorm, it Tinvat/ concerra: 
Be it known that I, HENRY F. WATSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing in the 
city and county of Philadelphia, in the State 
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new 
and useful Improvements in Tricycles, of 
which the following is a specification. 
It is the object of my invention to provide 
a tricycle of a simple, inexpensive, and strong, 
construction, adapted, by reason of the flexi 
bility of those portions of the frame in which 
the driving wheels are mounted, to run more 
Smoothly and easily than tricycles as hereto 
fore constructed. 
It is a further object of my invention to so 
arrange the component parts of my improved 
tricycle as to afford space for baggage-con 
taining receptacles which, although of large 
cubic area, are so fashioned and disposed as 
not to interfere with the working of the ma 
chine or to add to its normal lateral dimen 
sions. 
In the accompanying drawings I show, and 
herein Idescribe a good form of a convenient 
embodiment of my invention, the particular 
Subject-matter claimed as novel being here 
inafter definitely specified. 
It is to be understood that the tricycle rep 
resented in the drawings, and which I now 
proceed to describe, is merely the preferred 
embodiment of my invention, and that other 
embodiments, differing materially from it in 
detail of mechanical construction, can be made 
without departure from the spirit of my in 
vention. 
In the accompanying drawings, 
Figure 1 is a view in perspective of my im 
proved tricycle with the luggage hampers 
shown in place thereon. 
Figure 2 is a view partly in side elevation 
and partly in sectional elevation of the tri 
cycle shown in Figure 1. 
Figure 3 is a view in perspective of the rear 
portion of the main frame of the machine, 
the wheels and other connected parts being 
omitted for clearness of illustration. 
Figure 4 is a view in side elevation of one 
of the driving sprocket wheels. 
Figure 5 is a transverse section of the same. 
Figure 6 is a detail of the same. 
sponding parts. 
Similar letters of reference indicate corre 
In the drawings, 
A indicates the front or steering wheel, Cl 
the steering head, a the handle bar, B the 
saddle, b the saddle post, and CC' the upper 
and lower longitudinally - extending frame 
bars of the ordinary diamond frame usually 
employed in safety bicycles. 
At the junction of the saddle post and the 
bar C' is supported or journaled in any usual 
manner a crank axle. 
E E indicate the two rear driving wheels 
which are supported or journaled in the rear 
portion of the framework in such manner 
that each is adapted to have revolution inde 
pendent of the other and each adapted to 
have vertical movement independent of the 
other. 
This result is accomplished by providing 
the rear portion of the frame of the machine 
with two parts, which I term driving wheel 
housings, capable of vertical movement in 
dependent of each other, and by journaling 
said wheels one in each of said parts. 
Each of the driving wheels EE is equipped 
as to its axle with a sprocket wheel driven 
by sprocket chains FF in gear with them, 
and also in gear respectively with two inde 
pendent sprocket wheels G. G. mounted free 
for revolution on or with the crank axle and 
equipped with cranks and pedals G, so that 
by the rotation of said pedal cranks, and the 
consequent rotation of said sprocket wheels 
G G, driving rotation is contemporaneously 
imparted to both said driving wheels E. E. 
FIH are a pair of horizontally-extending 
forked members, the front ends of which are 
journaled upon the respective extremities of 
the crank axle, but inside of the sprocket 
wheels thereof, in such manner that each of 
said members is adapted for rotative move 
ment with respect to said axle. 
Between the legs h h' of each of said forked 
members His mounted one of the driving 
wheels E, the legs h, passing along the inner 
faces of the respective wheels, and the legs 
h' passing along the exterior faces of said 
wheels, and the extremities of said forked 
members being fashioned in any usual man 
9) 
OO 
IO 
15 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
- 
615,054 
O 
2 ? 
2 5 
45 
So 
55 
the axles e of the driving 
ner to receive 
wheels. 
II are a pair of auxiliary forks, each con 
sisting of a head from which spring two legs 
i i", each of which forks is disposed at an all 
gle of approximately forty-five degrees and 
incloses one of the driving wheels,-the ex 
tremities of said legs being rigidly connected 
in any usual manner to the extremities of 
the legs l. l', the connection of the forks II 
with the forked members II II being further 
reinforced by heavy mud guard plates ly 
which extend from the upper ends of the legs 
it to the front ends of the legs h, h", and by 
the vertically disposed metal guide plates J, 
each of which is rigidly connected at its up 
per end to a leg of the fork I and at its lower 
end to a leg of the forked member II. 
L is what I term the rear post of the ma 
chine, to which the upper ends of the forks 
I are connected by a suitable spring connec 
tion, whereof hereinafter. 
As will be understood, the forked members 
H and the forks I rigidly connected thereto, 
form, so to speak, two independent driving 
wheel housings, or frames; the front ends of 
the members II being mounted upon the 
crank axle free for movement independent of 
each other, and the forks I being connected 
by a flexible or spring device with the rear 
post of the main frame, it will be understood 
that said driving wheel housings are adapted 
to move vertically, independently of each 
other, upon the crank axle as an axis, and 
against the pressure of the spring connection 
referred to. 
As will be understood, therefore, in the pro 
pulsion of the device along streets and roads, 
when one of said driving wheels encounters 
and passes over an obstruction or protuber 
ance the consequent elevation of said driv 
ing wheel will be taken up, so to speak, in 
the spring connection between its housing 
and the main frame, and will not be commu 
nicated to the other driving wheel,--which, 
with the front or steering wheel, will remain 
upon the level ground and maintain the 
Weight of the rider, who will thus receive no 
appreciable jar or jolt from the passage of 
the wheel over the obstacle. 
The rear post L is, as a matter of conven 
ience, formed as two bars, designated L. L* 
respectively, of the generalform clearly shown 
in Figure 3, the upper ends of said members 
being connected, as rear posts are in the or 
dinary form of bicycle frames, to the main 
frame, beneath the saddle, said two members 
T* I being rigidly connected together by a 
brace L' extending from one bar to the other 
and provided with collars encompassing both, 
and which brace is provided with protruding 
extremities L., carrying depending bolts or 
lugs L', -said bars being further connected 
at their lower extremities by a second brace L'. 
The lower extremities of said bars are pro 
vided, respectively, with outwardly extend 
ing lugs I", engaged, respectively, in the on 
gitudinal guide openings in the guide plates 
J hereinbefore referred to, said lugs being 
securely retained in place within said guide 
openings by nuts or enlargements of any 
preferred kind mounted upon their free ex 
tremities. 
In the vertical swing or movement of the 
driving wheel housings, therefore, said hous 
ings are guided by the engagement of said 
guide plates (which form a part of and move 
with the driving wheel housing,)-with the 
lugs projecting from the rear post bars L* 
described. 
It will be understood, of course, that the 
engagement of said lugs L in said guide 
plates J prevents the driving wheel housings 
from spreading away from each other in the 
operation of the machine. 
Any preferred spring connection may obvi 
ously be resorted to to connect the driving 
wheel housings with the rear post, and to act, 
so to speak, as a buffer, between said hous 
ings and said frame. 
I prefer to provide the upper end of each 
of the forks I, which are situated in the vi 
cinity of the protruding extremities Lof the 
brace, with disk-like heads , and to inter 
pose between said disk heads and the pro 
truding extremities L referred to, strong heli 
cal expansion springs M, the lower ends of 
which springs are engaged with said disk 
plates by fitting snugly within upturned rims 
mounted on the same, -and the upper ends 
of said springs being spirally wound upon 
the bolts or similar devices L'depending from 
the projections L and having prolongations 
which extend down within the bores of said 
Springs. 
The springs being, as described, expansion 
springs, they tend to resist the elevation of 
the driving wheel housings, and to force said 
wheel housings downward, and the said 
springs may therefore be described as acting 
as buffers. 
In order to prevent the jar of the parts 
which might ensue when one of the wheel 
housings is violently elevated and compresses 
its buffer spring M, I provide in the center 
of each of the disks i* a rubber cushion 
adapted, in the compression of the spring, 
and the approach of a disk to a projection 
L', to be encountered by the depending bolt 
L described, and thus prevent the disk head 
from coming into violent contact with said 
projection L. 
Within the triangular space between the 
saddle post the rear post and the forked 
members II is disposed a triangular box or 
hamper N, which nearly fills said space, and 
is of breadth approximately equal to the dis 
tance apart of the sprocket wheels on the 
crank axle, care being taken that said box or 
hamper be restricted to this breadth in order 
to prevent interference with the action of the 
pedal cranks. 
Said box or hamper is conveniently re 
tained in position by U-bolts in which pass 
7 ? 
75 
9o 
95 
I do 
IO5 
I O 
II5 
13C 
 
615,054 
3 
75 
I OO 
I. ? 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
about the saddle post and engage with the turn is unrestricted, but said excessive ino 
front wall of the hamper, anda keeper mount 
tion of a driving wheel is merely communi 
ed on the rear wall of said hamper and en 
cated to a sprocket rim and causes said 
gaged with the bars L* of the rear post L. 
sprocket rim to travel slightly faster than the 
Any Suitable door or opening may, of 
spider upon which it is mounted, thus taking 
course, be formed in this hamper. 
up, so to speak, the excessive motion of the 
A second hamper, P, of a general triangu 
driving-wheel. 
lar shape, and of breadth slightly less than 
In the movement described of the sprocket 
the distance between the driving wheels, is 
rim independent of the sprocket spider upon 
mounted upon the rear post of the machine 
which it is mounted, the projection g of the 
in the manner shown particularly in Figures 
sprocket rim is carried away from the pro 
I and 2, Said hamper, as to the upper part of 
jection g of the sprocket spider, and, for the 
its front face, bearing against the upper part 
time being propulsion is imparted to the ma 
of the rear post of the main frame and being 
chine from the crank axle through the other 
Secured in position,--with the lower portion 
sprocket wheel and sprocket chain in com 
of its front face held out to clear the sprocket 
munication with the driving wheel which was 
wheels of the driving wheels, by the two 
the inner wheel in making the turn. 
armed keeper O, mounted upon the trans 
In the continued operation of the machine 
Verse brace L of the rear post of the main 
after the turn is made the continued rotation 
frame, eyes at the free extremities of said 
imparted to the pedal cranks and to the spi 
keeper registering with corresponding eyes 
der, will cause the projection of the Spider to 
connected with said hamper. A bolt passing 
almost immediately overtake and again en 
through the eyes of the hamper and the eyes 
counter the projection of the sprocket rim, 
of the keeper locks the hamper firmly in po 
and thereupon said two members will under 
sition. 
the actuation of the pedal cranks again ro 
The said hamper may have such rearward 
tate as a single integral wheel. 
extension as the constructor may desire, and 
Having thus described my invention, I 
is to be equipped with doors or openings p,- 
claim 
the approximately triangular form of said 
1. In a three wheeled vehicle, in combina 
hamper P being such as is best adapted to 
tion, a main frame provided with a steering 
fit the available space and to at the same time 
wheel, and with two independently movable 
impart a symmetrical appearance to the ve 
rear frames or housings in each of which is 
hicle as a whole. 
mounted a driving wheel, a crank or motor 
The attachment of the hamper P with the 
shaft, and means for transmitting the move 
main frame may be reinforced by the engage 
ment of said shaft to a driving wheel, sub 
ment of locking plates p connected to its re 
stantially as set forth. 
Spective sides, with the transverse bar L' of 
2. In combination, in a tricycle, a main 
the rear post L. 
frame connected with which are two forks in 
The sprocket driving wheels G are each 
parallelism with each other, and each inde 
formed in two parts, namely, a central spider 
pendent of the other, wheels mounted one in 
g and an annular toothed sprocket rim g 
each of said forks, said forks being so related 
mounted and adapted for movement upon 
to the main frame as to be each capable of 
the periphery of said spider, each spider be 
vertical movement with respect to the body 
ing secured to or integral with a pedal axle. 
of the frame independently of each other, a 
A projection g carried by the sprocket 
crank or motor shaft, means for transmitting 
Spider is adapted to encounter a correspond 
motion from said shaft by independent trains 
ing projection g mounted on the sprocket 
of gearing to said driving wheels, substan 
rim, so that rotation imparted, through the 
tially as set forth. 
pedal cranks to said spider, is, through said 
3. In combination, in a tricycle, a main 
projections, communicated to the sprocket 
frame embodying two forks in parallelism 
rim, and in the normal operation of the ma 
with each other and each independent of the 
chine said projections remain in contact and 
other, wheels mounted one in each of said 
the spider and rim rotate as a single integral 
forks, said forks being so related to the main 
frame as to be capable of movement with re 
In the operation of the machine, however, 
spect to the body of the frame independently 
as is manifest, when the vehicle follows a 
of the other, springs which normally main 
curved instead of a straight course, as in turn 
tain said forks in their normal positions and 
ing a corner, the outer driving wheel will be 
act as buffers to resist such independent mo 
caused to travel a greater distance in the 
tion, and guides which direct the independ 
same time than the inner wheel, and ob 
ent movements of said forks, substantially as 
viously if the ordinary solid sprocket wheels 
set forth. 
were employed this would cause the grinding 
4. In combination, in a tricycle, a main 
or scraping of the tires upon the ground and 
frame embodying two forks in parallelism 
their consequent rapid wearing away. 
with each other and each independent of the 
With my improved form of two - part 
other, wheels mounted one in each of said 
sprocket wheel, however, the excessive mo 
forks, said forks being so related to the main 
tion of the outer driving wheel in making a frame as to be capable of movement with re 
wheel. 
- 
I I. ? 
IIS 
I2 ? 
I 25 
 
 
4. 
615,054 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
bal's connected by transverse braces, pedals, 
sprocket wheels connected with said pedals, 
a pair of forked members mounted on the 
crank or pedal axle, driving wheels journaled 
in said forked members, two trains of gear 
ing independently connecting the sprocket 
wheels to the two driving wheels, auxiliary 
forks mounted on said forked members, and 
a spring connection between the upper ends 
of said auxiliary forks and the rear post, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
8. In a tricycle, in combination with the 
main frame, the steering wheel, and two driv 
ing wheels each equipped with sprocket 
wheels, two independent sprocket wheels 
mounted on a crank or pedal axle, and two 
independent sprocket chains connecting the 
sprocket wheels on the pedal axle to those 
connected with the driving wheels, each pedal 
axle sprocket wheel being formed in two 
parts, namely, a central spider and an annu 
lar sprocket rim adapted for rotative move 
ment on said spider, and a projection on one 
of said sprocket members adapted to make 
engagement with a projection on the other of 
said sprocket members, substantially as set 
forth. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my invention I have hereunto signed my name 
this 20th day of August, A. D. 1897. 
IHENRY F. WWATSON. 
In presence of 
F. NORMAN DIXON, 
THOS. IX. LAN CASTER. 
5 
1 ? 
2 ? 
spect to the body of the frame each independ 
ently of the other, and two trains of driving 
mechanism for imparting rotation to said two 
wheels, substantially as set forth. 
5. In a tricycle, in combination with a main 
frame including the steering head, saddle 
post, and a lear post, a pedal axle, a pair of 
horizontally-extending forked members jour 
naled on the pedal axle, a pair of driving 
Wheels mounted in the forks of said forked 
members, and a spring connection between 
said forked members, and the rear post, sub 
stantially as set forth. 
6. In a tricycle, in combination, the saddle 
post, the steering head, the steering wheel, 
frame members connecting said saddle post 
and steering head, the rear post, pedals and 
a crank or pedal axle, a pair of forked mem 
bers mounted on the crank or pedal axle, driv 
ing Wheels journaled in said forked members, 
two trains of gearing independently connect 
ing the pedals or pedal axle to the two driv 
ing wheels, auxiliary forks mounted on said 
forked members, spring connections between 
the upper ends of said auxiliary forks and 
the rear post, guide plates connecting the 
auxiliary forks with the forked members, and 
lugs or projections carried by the rear post 
and engaged with said guide plates, substan 
tially as set forth. 
7. In a tricycle, in combination with the sad 
dle post, the steering head, a steering wheel, 
members connecting said saddle post and 
steering head, a rear post formed as two 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615154.txt	 
No. 615,154. 
(No Mode.) 
Patented Nov. 29, 1898. 
E. A. FRANKLN. 
CHURN DASHER. 
(Application filed June 16, 1898.) 
YER 85 
s: 
Na 
SE 
giN 
-77 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
W 
 
 
 
2a 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EDWARD A. FRANKLIN, OF AUSTIN, TEXAS, ASSIGNOR TO THE CHICAGO 
NOVELTY MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF JERSEY CITY, NEWJERSEY. 
CHURN DASHER. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 615,154, dated November 29, 1898. 
Application filed June 16, 1898, Serial No. 683,614, (No model.) 
tion. 
al 
- 
To all, Luhon it may concern: 
Beit known that I, EDWARDA. FRANKLIN, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at 
Austin, in the county of Travis and State of 
5 Texas, have invented a new and useful Churn 
Dasher, of which the following is a specifica 
My invention relates to churns, and par 
ticularly to churn-dashers, and has for its ob 
. Io ject to provide an exhausting-dasher wherein 
the exhaust is radial and wherein the dasher 
disk carries a cylindrical wall constituting, 
in connection with a dasher-disk, a rotary 
vessel arranged within the churn-receptacle, 
I5 whereby as the liquid is radially exhausted 
from the interior of the vessel at a point in 
the plane of the dasher-disk it enters the ves 
sel by falling inwardly over the upper edge 
thereof to cause an intermingling of air with 
20 the liquid contents of the churn-receptacle, 
and hence a rapid separation of the butter. 
Further objects and advantages of this in 
vention will appear in the following descrip 
tion, and the novel features thereof will be par 
25 ticularly pointed out in the appended claims. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a sectional 
view of a churn mechanism, showing a dasher 
constructed in accordance with my invention. 
Fig. 2 is a top plan view of the dasher-disk. 
3o Fig. 3 is an inverted plan view of the same. 
Fig. 4 is a detail view of a portion of the 
dasher-disk. 
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor 
responding parts in all the figures of the draw 
Rising from a base 1 is a standard 2, in 
which is mounted the spindle 3 of a driving 
gear 4. Carried by the standard at its upper 
end is an arm 5, overhanging the base, and 
4o mounted parallel with the spindle 3 is a spin 
dle 6, provided at one end with a bevel-gear 
7 and at the other end with a pinion 8, mesh 
ing with said driving-gear. The bevel-gear 
7 is secured in place upon the spindle 6 by 
The base supports a churn-receptacle 10, 
having in its bottom a socket 11, in which is 
stepped the lower end of a dasher-spindle 12, 
and said spindle is provided at its upper end 
5o with a socket 13 for the reception of an ad 
justable center-pin 14, arranged in a vertical 
45 means of a set-screw 9. 
35 ings. 
 
opening 15 at the extremity of the overhang 
ing arm 5 and secured in place by means of 
a set-screw 16. The dasher-spindle carries 
a bevel-gear 17, which meshes with the bevel 
gear 7 and is secured at the desired adjust 
ment by means of a set-screw 18. 
The dasher embodying my invention con 
sists of a disk 19, from the center of which 
rises a sleeve 20, fitted for vertical adjust 
ment upon the dasher-spindle and provided 
contiguous to its upper end with a set-screw 
21, whereby the dasher may be secured at 
the desired adjustment upon the Spindle, and 
a cylindrical wall 22 rising from the periph 
ery of said dasher-disk and combining with 
the disk to form a vessel approximating the 
churn-receptacle in diameter and adapted to 
receive the liquid contents of the churn-re 
ceptacle by the inward flowing of such liquid 
over the upper edge of the cylindrical Wall, 
the adjustment of the dasher upon the spin 
dle being such that when the contents of the 
receptacle are at rest the upper edge of the 
cylindrical wall is above the surface of the 
liquid. 
As above indicated, an object of my inven 
tion is to provide a dasher of the hollow or 
vessel type, from which the liquid contents 
may be exhausted at a point near its bottom 
to cause the rising of the liquid between the 
exterior wall of the vessel and the Wall of the 
receptacle, whereby the vessel receives the 
liquid over its upper edge, and I am aWare 
that this operation, broadly Speaking, has 
been attained by mechanisms heretofore de 
vised. I have found in practice, however, 
that downwardly-exhausting dashers of this 
type are open to objections, of which one is 
that the centrifugal impulse imparted to the 
liquid contents of the vessel prevents the effi 
cient downward exhaustion through openings 
provided in the bottom of the vessel. There 
fore I have devised a laterally-exhausting ves 
sel of which the bottom, consisting of the 
dasher-disk 19, is provided with a series of seg 
mentally-curved radially-disposed ribs 23, ex 
tending from a point contiguous to the axis 
of the disk to the periphery thereof, each rib 
being enlarged at its outer end, as shown at 
24, and having its outer side curved in con 
formity to the periphery of the disk to form 
55 
7 o 
75 
95 
IOC) 
2 
615,154 
a bearing for the Wall 22. Between these 
ribs the upper surface of the dasher-disk is 
depressed to form cavities 25, which decline 
OutWardly and at the same time are enlarged 
toward the periphery of the disk and are 
bounded laterally by the adjacent ribs. At 
or near the center of the disk the floors of the 
cavities rise to the plane of the upper edges 
of the ribs, and from these points said floors 
decline gradually to the periphery of the disk 
and terminate in a plane below the lower edge 
of the cylindrical wall 22, thus providing be 
tween the floors of the cavities and said lower 
edge of the vessel a series of outlet-slots 26, 
through which the contents of the vessel may 
be discharged centrifugally. This discharge 
of the liquid is increased in violence by the 
fact that the curvature of the ribs is rear 
ward With relation to the direction of rotation 
of the dasher when in operation. In other 
words, each rib at its inner end is disposed 
approximately radially, and from an inter 
mediate point it curves rearwardly and out 
wardly, whereby the front wall of each cavity 
is concaved, while the rear Wall is convexed. 
The construction of the dasher-disk at its un 
der side is reversed to form radially-curved 
grooves 23, which decline rearwardly with 
relation to the direction of rotation of the disk 
from the axis to the periphery of the latter, 
whereby each groove is convexed forwardly 
and concaved rearwardly, while between the 
grooves 23 are downwardly - convexed en 
largements 25", corresponding in contour with 
the cavities in the upper surface of the dasher 
disk. The effect of this under-surface con 
struction of disk is to agitate and impart cen 
trifugal motion to the liquid beneath the 
dasher, whereby no portion of the contents of 
the churn-receptacle remains at rest during 
the operation of the dasher. 
I have found in practice that with a dasher 
constructed as described the liquid is dis 
charged from the initerior thereof with rapid 
ity and violence, and hence is caused to mount 
between the cylindrical wall of the vessel and 
the side of the receptacle inwardly over the 
upper edge of said vessel-wall with a consider 
able admixture of air, which obviously hastens 
the separation of the butter. 
A further advantage of the construction 
described resides in the fact that the dasher 
disk may be stamped from sheet metal by the 
use of suitably-faced dies, whereby the cost 
of manufacture is reduced to the minimum. 
It will be understood that the object in pro 
viding means for adjusting the dasher ver 
tically upon the dasher-spindie is to insure 
the arrangement of the upper edge of the cy 
lindrical wall of the vessel above the surface 
of the contents of the receptacle, whereby the 
exhaustion of the contents of the vessel is 
necessary in order to raise the level of the 
liquid between the walls of the vessel and re 
ceptacle sufficiently to pass inwardly over the 
upper edge of the vessel-wall. 
claim is 
Various changes in the form, proportion, 
and the minor details of construction maybe 
resorted to without departing from the spirit 
or sacrificing any of the advantages of this 
invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
1. A churn-dasher consisting of a disk pro 
vided with radial ribs and intermediate de 
pressions, extending radially to the periphery 
of the disk, and a cylindrical wall carried by 
the disk with its lower edge spaced from the 
plane of the floors of said depressions, at the 
periphery of the disk, to form outlet-openings, 
substantially as specified. 
2. A churn-dasher consisting of a vessel of 
which the bottom is provided with interior 
radial ribs and intermediate depressions with 
which communicate openings in the wall of 
the vessel in the plane of said depressions, 
substantially as specified. 
3. A churn-dasher consisting of a disk pro 
vided at its upper surface with a series of 
radial segmentally-curved ribs, and interme 
diate outwardly-enlarged cavities of which 
the floors decline outwardly, and a cylindrical 
wall carried by the disk with its lower edge 
spaced above the plane of the outer portions 
of the floors of the cavities to form outlet 
openings, substantially as specified. 
4. A churn-dasher consisting of a disk of 
which the upper surface is provided with a 
series of radial segmentally-curved ribs en 
larged at their outer ends to form rests or 
seats coincident with the periphery of the 
disk, and the disk also having cavities be 
tween said ribs, and a cylindrical wall fitted 
upon said rests or seats with its lower edge 
above the plane of the contiguous portions of 
the floors of the cavities to form outlet-slots, 
Substantially as specified. 
5. A churn-dasher comprising a disk pro 
vided at its upper surface with a series of 
radially-curved ribs which are deflected rear 
wardly toward their outer ends, and interme 
diate depressions, enlarged toward the pe 
riphery of the disk and having concaved front 
and convexed rear walls, the floors of said 
cavities declining toward the periphery of the 
disk, and provided at its under side with a 
series of radial segmentally-curved grooves 
coextensive with said ribs, and interposed 
downwardly-convexed enlargements coexten 
sive with said cavities, and a cylindrical wall 
secured to the outer ends of said ribs and 
spaced at its lower edge above the plane of 
the contiguous portions of the floors of the 
cavities to form outlet-openings, substan 
tially as specified. 
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as 
my own I have hereto affixed my signature in 
the presence of two witnesses. 
EDWARD A. FRANKLIN. 
Witnesses: 
E. R. FRANKLIN, 
JOHN D. JACKSON. 
45 
SO 
5 5 
65 
7 o 
75 
90 
95 
IOO 
I o5 
O 
I T5 
I 25 
O 
2 5 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615254.txt	No. 615,254. 
STAPLE BINDING DELIVERY MECHANISM FOR PRINTING MACHINEs. 
(Application filed Dec. 31, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
 
L. C. CROWELL. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1898. 
5. Sheets-Sheet . 
TE NORRS preRS 
co., PHT.ITH, wASHNGro, b. c. 
No. 65,254. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1898. 
STAPLE BINDING DEVERY MECHANISM FOR PRINTING MACH NES. 
L. C. CROWELL. 
(Application filed Dec. 31, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
a 
A. 
t 
n 
w 
y 
I 
11, 
t 
Se N 
c 
V 
s 
/ 
(S 
f 
t 
a 
W 
;Sg 
g 
w 
a- 
& & 
Y. 
SS W. 
y 8 
SS f 
\\ -v W 
V & 
--1 \ 
N \,\ , 
is 
N 
e 
N-- 
a Y. 
G 
a- 
a' -A- 
1.N. 
w 
A 
RS 
& 
SS 
a 
9. 
f 
A 
as?/ 
Sz-7 
so 
I 
| 
// 
5 M 
As 
s 
cy 
R 
---- 
s 
Se 
/ 
A 
f 
N. 
W. 
\ 
1. 
y 
ors esters co, photo-Leto, was No P. 
 
No. 65,254. 
L. C. CROWEL. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1898. 
STAPLE BINDING DEVERY MECHANISM FOR PRINTING MACH NES. 
(Application filed Dec. 31, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
aesa 
-62-e /64- 
C76%32.e. 
IHT 
indi 
chi-7- 
Noras refers co, PHoro-LTHC), WASHINGTON, O, 
 
No. 615,254. 
L. C. CROWE. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1898. 
STAPLE BINDING DELIVERY MECHANISM FOR PRINTING MACHINES. 
(Application filed Dec. 3i, 1897.) 
(No Model.) 
5 Sheets-Sheet 4. 
 
No. 65,254. 
(No Model.) 
STAPLE BINDING DELIVERY MECHANISM FOR PRINTING MACHINEs. 
(Application filed Dec. 31, 1897.) 
L. C. CROWE. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1898. 
5 Sheets-Sheet 5. 
Ng: 
S; SEs ses 
'WS 7 
s 27 
s 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
LUTHER C. CROWELL, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO ROBERT HOE, 
THEODORE. H. MEAD, AND CHARLES W. CARPENTER, OF SAME PLACE. 
STAPLE-BINDING DELIVERY MECHANISM FOR PRINTING-MACHINES, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 615,254, dated December 6, 1898. 
Application filed December 31, 1897, Serial No. 665,166, (No model.) 
25 
To att, whon, it inval/ conce7n: 
Beit known that I, LUTHER C. CROWELL, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at New 
York, (Brooklyn,) county of Kings, and State 
of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Staple-Binding De 
livery Mechanism for Printing - Machines, 
fully described and represented in the follow 
ing specification and the accompanying draw 
ings, forming a part of the same. 
The present improvements relate in a gen 
eral sense to that class of stapling mechan 
isms especially adapted for attachment to a 
web-printing machine to form a part of the 
delivery mechanism thereof, whereby the pli 
cated material, in the form of webs or sheets, 
may be bound together in packs on the line 
of ultimate folding thereof by means of sta 
ples made and set therein during the onward 
progress of the said plicated packs for final 
delivery, and thus form a completed product, 
such as a pamphlet or newspaper, whose leaves 
are bound together in the form of a book-like 
product. In a general Sense the type of such 
machines is comprehended in Patent No. 
510,528, and more especially the improved 
machine is of the class in which the staple 
forming, presenting, and inserting mechan 
isms are contained within the confines of a 
rotary carrier supporting them, which carrier. 
also supports the Wire-length - supplying 
means delivering material to form the staple, 
which class has its type disclosed in Patent 
No. 510,843. 
In the drawings annexed, Figure 1 is a sec 
tional view of the carrier for the stapling 
mechanism on the line 1 1 of Fig. 3. Fig. 2 
is a similar view of the parts in different po 
sitions. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal view of the 
carrier for the stapling mechanism on the line 
33 of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is an end view of the 
carrier for the stapling mechanism. Fig. 5 
is a sectional view on the line 55 of Fig. 3. 
Fig. 6 is an elevation of the Wire-feeding mech 
anism, the point of view being indicated by 
the arrow 6 in Fig. 5. Fig. 7 is a view of the 
staple-bending dies detached. Fig. 8 is a view 
of the anvil and bending-dies in the act of 
forming a staple, the point of view being on 
5o the opposite side of the shaft from that of 
35 
45 
 
Fig. 7. Fig. 9 shows the arms, of which the 
shoulders constitute the anvil. Fig. 10 is a 
partial section similar to that of Fig. 1, show 
ing the position of the parts directly after the 
formation of the staple. Fig. 11 is a similar 
view showing the position of the parts after 
the staple has been lifted above the anvil, 
and Fig. 12 is a detail of the staple-present 
ing tool. Figs. 7 to 12 are on an enlarged 
scale. 
The paper to be stapled is led to the stapling 
mechanism from any mechanism suitable to 
prepare the paper which is to be stapled. In 
the drawings, 60 70 represent the delivery 
rolls of any such mechanism, the preferable 
mechanism for the purpose being a longitu 
dinal folder of the type set forth in my Patent 
No. 331,280. The paper may, however, be 
presented to the stapling mechanism in the 
form of sheets, if desired, though in my opin 
ion the Web form is preferable. 
The paper to be folded passes between two 
carriers A and B, one of which carries mech 
anism for forming and presenting staples and 
the other carries clenching-dies coperating 
there with; but the clenching - dies may be 
stationary, if desired. . 
The carrier B is preferably provided with 
a number of stapling mechanisms spaced 
along its length in order to form in the paper 
a transverse seam made up of a number of 
staples. These mechanisms are similar and 
a description of one of them will therefore 
suffice for all, and it will therefore be under 
stood that the description which will be given 
applies equally to all these mechanisms, al 
though the parts are for convenience referred 
to in the singular number instead of in the 
plural. 
From the wire-spools 1, mounted in the car 
rier, the wire passes to a fixed guide 2, and 
thence over a roller-guide 3, thence between 
the feed-disks 4 5, which gear together and 
one of which, 5, carries on its shaft a bevel 
gear 6, which meshes with a second bevel 
gear 7 upon the shaft 8 of the stapling mech 
anism, which shaft has on its outer end, be 
yond the cylinder, a gear-wheel 9, which en 
gages with a fixed gear 10 and is given a rotary 
motion thereby as the cylinder revolves. The 
55 
75 
95 
OO 
2 
615,254 
wire passes from the feed-disks to the fixed the guide or sheath, 21 is forced back against 
guide 11, (see Fig. 5,) through which it passes 
the spring 23 by the carrier A until at the 
moment of clenching the staple its outer end 
to the anvil. The latter consists of arms 12 
is flush with the carrier B. The legs of the 
and 13, fixed to the cylinder and provided 
staple are clenched by the clenching-die 36. 
with shoulders it. 14", which serve as an an 
vil. The staple-bender is formed of two bend 
What I claim is 
1. The combination of staple-forming mech 
ing-dies 15 16, which are rotary and mounted 
anism having rotary motion, a staple-holding 
on shaft S and are placed just outside of the 
sheath or guide, and a cam-like moving Sur 
arms 12 13, and are provided with shoulders 
face or surfaces for lifting the formed Staple 
1717, which coact with the shoulders 1414' 
from the forming mechanism into the guide, 
to form a staple, as shown in Fig. S. After 
substantially as described. 
the staple is formed the legs of the staple 
2. The combination of staple-forming mech 
will lie in spaces provided for them between 
anism having rotary motion, a staple-holding 
the arms 12 13 and the shoulders 1717. In 
sheath or guide placed tangentially with ref 
order to provide for lifting the formed staple 
erence to the path of the rotating forming 
over the anvil, in order that it may be carried 
to the place of Setting, the bending-dies are 
mechanism and having its Wall cut a Way to 
permit the passage of said mechanism, and a 
provided with cam-like surfaces 1819, which, 
cam-like moving surface or surfaces for lift 
as the bending-dies revolve, serve to elevate 
ing the formed staple from the forming mech 
the staple to the position shown in Fig. 1. 
anism into the guide, substantially as de 
This elevation may, if desired, be secured 
by the action alone of the cam-like surfaces 
scribed. 
3. The combination of staple-forming mech 
1S 19; but in order to insure the proper ele 
anism having rotary motion, a staple-holding 
vation of the crown of the staple it is desir 
sheath or guide, cam-like moving surfaces for 
able that the anvil should be made in two 
lifting the formed staple from the forming 
parts, as shown, with a cam-like surface 20 
mechanism into the guide, and means for ad 
between them, which shall serve to positively 
vancing the staple in the guide to the Setting 
lift the crown of the staple. 
point, substantially as described. 
The means by which the staple is presented 
4. The combination of staple-forming mech 
to the material to be stapled consists in the 
anism having rotary motion, a staple-holding 
construction herein shown of the sheath or 
guide 21, supported by the bracket 22, and 
sheath or guide, cam-like moving surfaces for 
lifting the formed staple from the forming 
normally stationary with reference to the 
mechanism into the guide, and a reciprocat 
carrier and projecting outward through the 
ing plunger for advancing the staple to the 
shell of the carrier, as shown in Figs. 10 and 
setting-point, substantially as described. 
11, and held in its outward position, by the 
pressure of a spring 23 against leg 24. This 
5. The combination of staple-forming mech 
anism having rotary motion, a staple-holding 
sheath is cut away below, so as to permit the 
sheath or guide placed tangentially with re? 
staple to be introduced into it, and also to 
erence to the path of the rotating forming 
permit the clearance of the rotating bending 
mechanism and having its wall cut away to 
dies. 
permit the passage of said mechanism, a cam 
The staple when elevated by the cam-like 
like moving surface or surfaces for lifting the 
surfaces on the bending-dies is forced forward 
formed staple from the forming mechanism 
by the driver 25 to the front end of the guide 
into the guide, and means for advancing the 
or sheath, assuming the position shown in 
staple in the guide to the setting-point, Sub 
Fig. 2. The driver is moved at proper times 
stantially as described. 
to carry the staple forward by a cross-head 
6. The combination of staple-forming mech 
26, moving in a slotted arm 27, attached at 
anism having rotary motion, a Staple-holding 
one end to the cylinder-shell and at the other 
sheath or guide placed tangentially with ref 
end to a collar 28, mounted upon the cylin 
erence to the path of the rotating forming 
der-shaft. This cylinder-shaft carries at the 
mechanism and having its wall cut a Way to 
cylinder ends collars 29, in which is jour 
permit the passage of said mechanism, a cam 
naled the shaft 30, which shaft has fixed upon 
like moving surface or surfaces for lifting the 
it the arms 31 and 32. The arm 31 engages, 
formed staple from the forming mechanism 
by means of a slot, the cross-head 26 and 
into the guide, and a reciprocating plunger 
gives the proper movements to the driver as 
for advancing the staple to the setting-point, 
it is moved by a cam-roll 33 on arm 32, en 
substantially as described. 
gaging with the path-cam 34 in the cam-plate 
7. The combination of a fixed anvil, a rotat 
35, fixed to the shaft S. 
ing staple-bender, a sheath or guide for the 
As stated above, when the staple is about 
staple, and means for lifting the formed staple 
to be driven the parts assume the position 
over the anvil and into the guide, Substan 
shown in Fig. 2, and as the staple is carried 
to the position in which the carriers A and B 
tially as described. 
are in close proximity to each other the staple 
8. The combination of a fixed anvil, a rotat 
ing staple-bender, a sheath or guide for the 
is forced through the material by the proxi 
staple, means for lifting the formed staple 
mation of the cylinders, it being held from 
retracting by the driver. At the same time 
over the anvil and into the guide, and means 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
75 
95 
CO 
I o5 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
 
6i5,254 
3 
O 
5 
25 
for advancing the staple in the guide to the 
setting-point, substantially as described. 
9. The combination of a fixed anvil, a rotat 
ing staple-bender, a sheath or guide for the 
staple, means for lifting the formed staple 
over the anvil and into the guide, and a re 
ciprocating plunger for advancing the staple 
in the guide to the setting-point, substantially 
as described. 
10. The combination of a fixed anvil, a ro 
tating staple-bender, a sheath or guide for 
the staple, the wall of the guide being cut 
a Way and the anvil being placed in immediate 
juxtaposition with the path of the staple, and 
means for lifting the formed staple over the 
anvil into position to be forced forward in the 
guide, substantially as described. 
11. The combination of a fixed anvil, a ro 
tating staple-bender, a sheath or guide for 
the staple, and a cam-like moving surface or 
surfaces for lifting the formed staple over 
the anvil and into the guide, substantially as 
described. 
12. The combination of a fixed anvil, a ro 
tating staple-bender, a sheath or guide for 
the staple, a cam-like moving surface or sur 
faces for lifting the formed staple over the 
anvil and into the guide, and means for ad 
vancing the staple in the guide to the setting 
point, substantially as described. 
13. A rotary carrier having mounted there 
on a staple-forming mechanism having rotary 
motion, a staple-holding sheath or guide, and 
cam-like moving surfaces for lifting the 
formed staple from the forming mechanism 
into the guide, substantially as described. 
14. A rotary carrier having mounted there 
on a staple-forming mechanism having rotary 
motion, a staple-holding sheath or guide, cam 
like moving surfaces for lifting the formed 
staple from the forming mechanism into the 
guide, and means for advancing the staple in 
the guide to the setting-point, substantially 
as described. 
15. The combination of a rotary carrier hav 
ing mounted thereon a fixed anvil, a rotating 
staple-bender, a sheath or guide for the sta 
ple, and means for lifting the formed staple 
over the anvil and into the guide, substan 
tially as described. 
16. The combination of a rotary carrier hav 
ing mounted thereon a fixed anvil, a rotating 
staple-bender, a sheath or guide for the sta 
ple, means for lifting the formed staple over 
55 the anvil and into the guide, and means for 
35 
45 
 
advancing the staple in the guide to the set 
ting-point, substantially as described. 
17. The combination in a staple forming 
and setting mechanism, of means for feeding 
plicated material onward past staple-insert 
ing means, a carrier rotating to present the 
staple to the point of insertion, a staple-form 
ing mechanism having rotary motion with 
reference to the carrier, a staple-holding 
sheath or guide, and cam-like moving sur 
faces for lifting the formed staple from the 
forming mechanism into the guide, substan 
tially as described. 
18. The combination in a staple forming 
and setting mechanism, of means for feeding 
plicated material onward past staple-insert 
ing means, a carrier rotating to present the 
staple to the point of insertion, a staple-form 
ing mechanism having rotary motion with 
reference to the carrier, a staple-holding 
sheath or guide, cam-like moving surfaces 
for lifting the formed staple from the forming 
mechanism into the guide, and means for ad 
vancing the staple in the guide to the setting 
point, substantially as described. 
19. The combination in a staple forming 
and setting mechanism, of means for feeding 
plicated material Onward past staple-insert 
ing means, a carrier rotating to present the 
staple to the point of insertion, an anvil fixed 
with reference to the carrier, a staple-bender 
rotating with reference to the carrier, a sheath 
or guide for the staple, and means for lifting 
the formed staple over the anvil and into the 
guide, Substantially as described. 
20. The combination in a staple forming 
and setting mechanism, of means for feeding 
plicated material onward past staple-insert 
ing means, a carrier rotating to present the 
staple to the point of insertion, an anvil fixed 
with reference to the carrier, a staple-bender 
rotating with reference to the carrier, a sheath 
or guide for the staple, means for lifting the 
formed staple over the anvil and into the 
guide, and means for advancing the Staple in 
the guide to the setting-point, substantially 
as described. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of two subscribing 
witnesses. 
LUTHER C. CROWELL. 
75 
9o 
95 
IOO 
Witnesses: 
T. F. KEHOE, 
N. MAGUIRE. 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615354.txt	No. 615,354. 
F. GRAY. 
Patented Dec. 6, 1898. 
ovv. 
WALWE FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHERS. 
(Application filed Jan. 4, 1897.) 
(No Mode.) 
 
 
d 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
SF 23 N. 
22Zazaa 
SN 
start 39 
. 
. 
 
 
  
 
 
 
2 
% 
% S. Se 
24 
SN& 
N 
SN 
2 
RN 
S S 
  
 
The Norris PreRs co, Photo-THC, wASHINGTON, d. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANK GRAY, OF CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS. 
VALVE FOR FIRE-EXTINGUISHERs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 615,354, dated December 6, 1898. 
Application filed January 4, 1897, Serial No. 617,905, (No model.) 
55 
65 
75 
To all whon, it inval/ concern. 
Be it known that I, FRANK GRAY, a citizen 
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in 
the county of Cook and State of Illinois, have 
invented certain new and useful Improve 
ments in Valves for Fire-Extinguishers, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to certain improve 
ments in automatic valves for controlling the 
automatic sprinklers of what are known as 
dry-pipe systems. 
The objects of my invention are to increase 
the efficiency and sensitiveness of this class 
of valves, to assemble the various parts in a 
more compact and simple form, to avoid cor 
rosion, and to overcome friction in the work 
ing of the valve. 
My invention consists in a downwardly 
opening water-valve held closed by the wa 
ter-pressure, a piston connected there with 
by a spindle, a drain-cock below the water 
valve, and a cut-off valve also below the wa 
ter-valve, whereby the said water-valve will 
open when operative by opening the drain 
cock. 
My invention consists in a water-control 
ling valve or valve-face which is in turn con 
trolled by a piston, the valve and the piston 
being connected by a hollow spindle opened 
at one end, always to the Water-pressure, and 
forming a port in the water-controlling valve. 
and normally closed at its other end by a 
spindle-valve exposed to the water-pressure 
and held closed against said pressure by a 
diaphragm exposed to an increased air-pres 
sure within the pipes leading to the auto 
matic sprinklers, whereby upon a reduction 
of the air-pressure by the opening of any one 
of the sprinklers the Water-pressure opens 
the spindle-valve, operates the piston, and 
opens the water-valve to permit the water to 
pass through the pipes to the sprinklers. 
My invention has certain other objects in 
view; and it consists in certain other features 
about to be described, and pointed out in my 
claims, reference being now had to the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figurelis a central vertical section through 
the valve-casing, showing the various parts 
in a normally-closed position. Fig. 2 is a sec 
tion on the line a C of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a plan 
view of a portion of the piston, showing the 
construction for preventing corrosion and re 
ducing the friction. Fig. 4 is a detail sec 
tional view on the linebb of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is 
a like view on the line did of said figure. 
Fig. 6 is a detail perspective view of the set 
ting device. Fig. 7 is a sectional view illus 
trating a modified form in which the air-pres 
sure is below the piston. 
The valve-casing is designated at 15, within 
which the various valves of the apparatus 
are disposed. The water-valve is designated 
at 16, finding its seat upon the valve-seat 17. 
A port 18 is provided centrally in the water 
valve 16, connected by the hollow spindle 19 
with the piston 20, having also a central port 
21 at the end of the hollow spindle 19, con 
nected with said piston. A diaphragm 22 is 
connected with a spindle-valve 23, which is 
normally held to close the port 21, by means 
of said diaphragm, which latter is exposed to 
the initial air-pressure of the dry-pipe sys 
tem, which air-pressure is normally main 
tained within the pipes 24, leading to the au 
tomatic Sprinkler, a passage 25, communicat 
ing with the pipe 24, conveying the initial 
air-pressure to the diaphragm 22. In the 
form shown in Fig. 1 a check-valve 26 mor 
mally cuts off the initial pressure from the 
piston 20 and the water-valve 16. A drain 
cock 27 opens communication for draining 
purposes below the water - valve 16, and a 
manually-operated valve 28 controls the en 
trance of the water to the valve-casing 15. 
In order to prevent corrosion and to reduce 
the friction, I provide a certain peripheral 
construction for the piston 20, (shown more 
particularly in Figs. 3, 4, and 5,) and consist 
ing of the guiding-lugs 30, set into the pe 
riphery of the piston 20 and projected there 
from against the side of the casing 15, a 
washer 31 being provided of a suitable fabric, 
also projected beyond the edge of the piston 
to fill the space between the said edge of the 
piston and the casing-wall above the guides 
30. A ring 32 is bolted down upon the Washer 
31, and therefore holds said washer and the 
guiding-lugs 30 in position. 
By reason of the differential of area be 
tween the diaphragm 22 and the spindle-valve 
23 it is evident that a given pressure of air 
will cut off and withhold a much greater pres 
sure of the water on the valve 16. In order 
95 
CO 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
50 
 
: 
615,354 
7 o 
75 
O 
s 
2O 
25 
3O 
35 
4o 
45 
5o 
55 
to adjust the parts in position and impose the 
a proper condition, it will then open by grav 
initial air-pressure upon the diaphragm 23, 
ity or by the assistance of the air-pressure. 
the setting implement 33, Fig. 6, is provided, 
Under these conditions a test may be accom 
consisting of the limbs 34 and the tang 35, 
plished without permitting the water to pass 
carrying the adjusting-screw 36. This im 
through the valve 16 into the sprinkler-pipe 24. 
plement 33 is inserted into the interior of the 
Having thus described my invention, what 
casing 15, through a hand-hole therein, after 
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure 
the valve 16 has been pushed into a closed 
by Letters Patent, is 
position manually through the hand-hole 37. 
1. In a valve apparatus for automatic 
The ends of the limb 34 are passed through 
sprinkler systems the combination of a water 
valve, a piston, a hollow spindle connecting 
eyes of bolts projected from the piston 20, and 
thus the setting implement 33 is connected 
the water-valve and the piston, a port in the 
with said piston. In order to draw the valve 
water-valve opening into the spindle and a 
port in the piston also opening into the spin 
16 and the valve 23 tightly upon their re 
spective seats, the adjusting-screw 36, im 
dle together with a spindle-valve and dia 
pinging against the stud39, is rotated. Upon 
phragm connected therewith which spindle 
the accumulation of a predetermined initial 
valve normally remains seated upon the port 
air-pressure within the sprinkler-pipes and 
of the piston opening into the hollow spindle 
upon the diaphragm 22 the Water is admitted 
by virtue of the initial air-pressure upon the 
diaphragm, but which spindle-valve is opened 
below the water-valve 16, and the relative 
by the water-pressure upon a predetermined 
difference of pressure between the air and 
reduction of air-pressure in the sprinkler 
the Water is such that upon the reduction of 
a given pressure of air by the automatic open 
pipe whereby the water acts upon the piston 
ing of a sprinkler the diaphragm 22 permits 
to open the water-valve and permit the Water 
a release of the spindle-valve 23, and thus 
to pass through and into the sprinkler-pipe. 
permitting the Water to actuate the piston to 
2. In a valve apparatus for automatic 
open the Water-valve 16, whereupon the col 
sprinkler systems the combination of a water 
valve opening downwardly and subject to 
umn of Water opens the check-valve 26 and 
passes out into the sprinkler-pipe 24. 
a pressure tending to open it, a draining-cock 
I have also shown conjunctively employed 
below the Water-valve and a cut-off Valve for 
an electrical circuit-contact maker for auto 
cutting off the supply of water below the wa 
matically sounding an alarm included in said 
ter-valve whereby the operativeness of the 
circuit, which consists of a by-passage 40, 
Water-valve may be tested without permit 
leading to a cup-shaped chamber 41, within 
ting the water to pass through said valve into 
the sprinkler-pipe. 
Which a ball 42 rests. Above the ball is a 
contact-spring 43, Connected with one termi 
3. In a valve apparatus for automatic 
nal of the circuit and adapted to be brought 
sprinkler systems the combination of a water 
against the contact-point 44, connected with 
valve, a piston, a hollow spindle connecting 
the other terminal of the circuit. The Water 
the water-valve and the spindle, a portin the 
in passing through the open valve 16 into the 
Water-valve opening into the Spindle, a port 
Sprinkler-pipe 24 also passes into the cham 
in the piston also opening into the spindle, 
ber 41 and, lifting the ball 42 against the 
a spindle-valve and diaphragm connected 
contact-spring 43, closes the circuit through 
there with which spindle-valve normally re 
the contact-point 44. 
mains seated upon the port of the pistOn Open 
In Fig. 7 I have shown a form in which the 
ing into the hollow spindle by virtue of the 
air-pressure of the sprinkler-pipe is admitted 
initial air-pressure upon the diaphragm but 
below the piston 20 and upon the water-valve 
which spindle-valve is opened by the water 
16. In this construction a flexible diaphragm 
pressure upon a predetermined reduction of 
is provided, secured to the casing and holding 
air-pressure in the sprinkler-pipe whereby 
the piston to a limited stroke. This dia 
the water acts upon the piston to open the 
phragm prevents the passage of the air by 
water-valve and permit the water to pass 
the piston to bear against the under side of 
through and into the Sprinkler-pipe, a drain 
the diaphragm 22. In this construction also 
ing-cock below the water-valve and a cut-off 
a by-passage 45 is provided, leading from be 
valve for cutting off the supply of water be 
low the piston 20 to a point above the dia 
low the water-valve whereby the operative 
phragm 22. 
ness of the water-valve may be tested with 
It often becomes necessary to test the op 
out permitting the Water to pass through said 
erativeness of the valve 16-that is, to deter 
valve into the sprinkler-pipe. 
mine whether it is in condition to open auto 
4. In a valve apparatus for automatic 
matically-and to accomplish this test the 
Sprinklers the combination of a Water-Valve, 
air has been reduced in the sprinkler-pipes, 
a piston, which water-valve and piston are 
Which oftentimes permits the water to freeze 
connected by a hollow spindle, a spindle 
therein and produce other injurious results. 
valve for closing one end of the hollow spin 
By virtue of the construction whichI provide 
dle, a diaphragm exposed to the initial air 
the manually-operated valve 28 may be closed 
pressure normally holding the spindle-valve 
closed upon the spindle and a diaphragm con 
to cut off the Water from the valve 16 and the 
drain-pipe 27 opened. If the valve 16 is in nected with the piston cutting off the air 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
2 
I 25 
615,354 
8 
pressure from the under side of the spindle 
valve-controlling diaphragm and permitting 
the accumulation of the initial air-pressure 
below the piston and above the Water-valve. 
5. A setting device consisting of an imple 
ment which is bifurcated to form extended 
limbs, extensions from the piston of the valve 
apparatus having eyes therein through which 
the ends of the limbs pass and an adjusting 
device on the implement for raising the limbs ?o 
to tightly close the water-valve. 
in presence of two witnesses. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
FRANK GRAY. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. C. BULKLEY, 
J. B. WEIR. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615454.txt	No. 615,454. 
(No Model.) 
Patented Dec. 6, 1898. 
T. B. EFFERY. 
PNEU MATIC TRE. 
(Application filed May 10, 1897. 
Reserys 22 
''grit 
6 (7. 237 
sao 22e a 
The NaRiis PETERs co, PROTO-LITHO, was HNGroN, O. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
 
THOMAS B. JEFFERY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS. 
PNEU MATIC TRE. 
O 
25 
35 
To all whom it Tvctly concern: 
Be it known that I, THOMAS B. JEFFERY, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi 
cago, county of Cook, and State of Illinois, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provements in Pneumatic Tires, which are 
fully set forth in the following specification, 
reference being had to the accompanying 
drawings, forming a part thereof. 
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a transverse 
section of a wheel-rim and tire thereon em 
bodying my invention, the same being shown 
With the air-tube inflated. Fig. 2 is a section 
of the same structure, the parts being shown 
in the position occupied after one edge of the 
tire has been engaged with the rim and be 
fore the engagement of the opposite edge. 
Fig. 3 is a similar section showing the parts 
in the position occupied while the second edge 
is being inserted into engagement, but before 
the engagement has been fully effected. Fig. 
4 is a similar sectional view of a structure 
from which my invention is to be distin 
guished in respect to a certain feature there 
of, the parts being shown in a position corre 
sponding to Fig. 3 and illustrating the de 
fect which my invention is designed to over 
come. Fig. 5 is a view similar to Fig. 3, show 
ing a slightly-modified construction in respect 
to the flap. 
A is a wheel-rim of familiar construction, 
such as is employed in connection with the 
so-called  G. & J.' tires and having at the 
periphery lateral recesses A' A', overhung by 
the lips A A', these recesses being designed 
to receive the flanges B B of the tire B, and 
having also intermediate the recesses A' A' 
the peripheral recess A, which receives the 
angular flanges B of the tire B. 
The construction sofar as above described, 
both as to the wheel-rim A and the tire B, in 
volves no novelty. The novel feature of my 
improved tire consists in a flap wing or flange 
B, which extends from the inner surface of 
the tire, being united to the latter at or a lit 
tle back of the edge which is first engaged 
with the rim, and is wide enough so that after 
that edge has been engaged with the rim said 
flap or flange extends over and covers all the 
remainder of the periphery of the rim, over 
hanging the outer margin at the opposite side. 
This flap is comparatively stiff, having suffi 
cient flexibility to receive the normal curva 
ture of the tire when the latter is inflated, 
but being too stiff to be liable to buckle or 
fold except where it is made flexible at or 
near the line of its junction with the inner 
surface of the tire, such flexibility being prac 
tically limited to a line-that is, not extend 
ing over sufficient portion of the width of the 
flap to permit a sinuosity or reflexed fold or 
buckle to be formed, but only extending far 
enough to constitute practically a hinge-joint 
for the flap. The value of this flange is that 
being too wide when fully extended to be 
come lodged in the recess periphery of the 
rim and being too stiff to be folded and 
buckled, so as to become thus lodged or en 
gaged, it will always be found completely 
overhanging the edge of the rim after the first 
edge of the tire has been engaged with said 
rim, and when the operator attempts to insert 
the second edge the flap, being lifted off the 
edge of the rim by that edge, folds at the 
hinge-joint constituted by the flexible line IB 
mentioned and permits the second edge of the 
tire to pass in under it and become properly 
engaged with the recesses of the rim, while 
the flap laps the junction of the two edges 
with certainty of not becoming at any point 
in the circumference of the wheel entered in 
that joint. The inflation of the air-tube, it 
will be seen, presses the lapping flap or flange 
Bd down onto the edges of the tire and tends 
to hold them both in place. By reference to 
Fig. 4 it will be understood that if the flap 
were narrow enough so that its edge might 
lodge in the peripheral recess of the rim in 
stead of overhanging the outer marginal lip 
of the latter when the first edge of the tire is 
engaged with the rim, or if, while being wide 
enough to overhang the opposite margin of 
the rim, as described, it were flexible, so that 
it might be buckled or tucked back at some 
points in the circumference of the wheel and 
be thus engaged at such tucked points in the 
recess of the rim, great difficulty might be 
experienced in entering the second edge of 
the rim under such lip and in preventing the 
flap from occupying the space in the recess 
which is designed for the flange B" or from 
being caught between the abutting edges of 
the tire and so not only preventing the proper 
insertion and engagement of the tire, but also 
45 
So 
 
55 
75 
9o 
95 
Co 
2 
615,454 
has a peripheral recess to afford a seat for the 
tire; a tire which is rifted at its inner circum 
ference and provided with lateral beads or 
flanges to engage the rim located at such dis 
tances back from the edges of the rift that 
the sum of said distances substantially equals 
the entire width of the recess in the rim; a 
transversely stiff flap wing or flange flexibly 
united to the tire at the inner edge at a short 
distance back from one edge of the rift, such 
flap being of suitable width to cover the tire 
seat in the rim when said edge is duly seated 
therein. 
3. In combination with a wheel-rim which 
has a peripheral recess to afford a seat for the 
tire, a tire which is rifted at its inner circum 
ference and provided with lateral beads or 
flanges to engage the rim; a flap wing or flange 
which is united to the tire at or near one 
edge of the rift and adapted to extend there 
from over the entire width of the recess in 
the rim, such flap wing or flange being re 
duced in stiffness at a line remote from its 
free edge. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand, in the presence of two witnesses, at 
Chicago, Illinois, this 6th day of May, 1897. 
THOS. B. JEFFERY. 
45 
so 
35 
55 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. S. BURTON, 
JEAN ELLIOTT. 
constituting a fold which would be inflated 
into the inflated air-tube and create liability 
of rupture in the latter. 
It is not essential that the flap or flange B 
should have its flexible junction with the tire 
back of the edge of the latter, though this 
form is preferable in the instance of tires 
which are secured to rims so narrow that the 
edges of the tire meet and abut in the periph 
eral recess of the rim. In Fig. 5 I have shown 
a tire secured in a wider rim, the edges not 
necessarily meeting, and in that figure I have 
shown the flap having its flexible junction 
with the tire at the edge instead of back of 
the edge. 
I claim 
1. In combination with a wheel-rim periph 
erally recessed to afford a seat for the tire, a 
tire which is rifted at the inner circumference 
and has lateral beads or flanges parallel to 
the rift adapted to engage the recess in the 
wheel-rim; a flap wing or flange which is 
united to the tire at or near one edge of the 
rift, and which is of such width that when 
said edge is seated in the recess of the rim, 
the wing or flap entirely covers the remain 
der of the tire-seat, such wing or flap being 
transversely stiff except at a circumferential 
line at or near its junction with the tire-body, 
whereby it operates with a hinge-like action 
at such line as and for the purpose set forth. 
2. In combination with a wheel-rim which 
IS 
25 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615554.txt	Patented Dec. 6, 1898. 
W. HOGAN. 
CAR DUMPING APPARATUS. 
(Application filed Feb. 18, 1898.) 
79. 7. 
E s 
:- 
- 
No. 615,554. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
  
 
S 
 
E 
 
es 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM HOGAN, OF WASHINGTON, CALIFORNIA. 
CAR D U M PNG APPARATUS 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 615,554, dated December 6, 1898. 
Application filed February 18, 1898, Serial No, 670,768, (No model.) 
To all, whon it nay concern: 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMHOGAN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Wash 
ington, county of Nevada, State of California, 
have invented an Improvementin Car-Dump 
ing Apparatus; and I hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the same. 
My invention relates to a device which is 
especially useful for dumping cars, so as to 
discharge loads therefrom, and again right 
the car. 
It consists in the parts and the construc 
tions and combinations of parts hereinafter 
described and claimed. 
Figure 1 is a longitudinal elevation. Fig. 
2 is a transverse section on the line acac of 
Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a portion of a plan show 
ing the stop on the rings C. Fig. 4 is a simi 
lar view showing the locking arrangement for 
the rings C. Fig. 5 is a detail in perspective 
of one end of the support G. Fig. 6 is a de 
tail of the stop or check C. 
The object of my device is to provide a con 
venient means for discharging loads from cars 
and other similar vehicles and to return the 
vehicles to their normal position ready for an 
other load. 
A represents a track which approaches the 
point where the discharge is to take place 
from any direction. At the point where the 
discharge is to take place is a section A' of suf 
ficient length to receive the car to be dumped. 
This section of track is supported in rings or 
Segments C, to which the track and a proper 
Supporting-bed are secured. These segments 
may be of only sufficient length to allow the 
track and this car to be turned sufficiently to 
discharge the load from the car by gravita 
tion, or the segments may, as shown in the 
present case, be made in the form of an en 
tire circle. These segments rest upon wheels 
D, journaled to turn easily, and they normally 
Stand so that the tracks A are in line with 
the main tracks A. In this position they are 
held by a latch E, which engages a notch c 
in the edge of one of the segments or clamps 
it in any other suitable manner. Upon the 
opposite side are lugs F, which contact with 
a framework or support G, so that the track 
cannot be turned any farther in that direction 
and can only be turned in the opposite direc 
tion when the latch is disengaged. 
The car is very simply constructed. It con 
sists of a containing-box H, having upon one 
side or end a hinged door H', with latches of 
any suitable description by which the door is 
normally retained in a closed condition. In 
the present case I have shown the door as 
hinged or swiveled from its upper edge, form 
ing the entire side of the car. Upon each end 
of the car are fixed catches I, one of which. 
faces upward and the other downward. Piv 
oted to the swinging door or side of the car is 
a lever-arm J, which is pressed by a spring 
K so that it will normally engage both of the 
latches. The pivot or fulcrum being in the 
center, when the lever is pushed so as to turn 
it about its fulcrum its opposite ends disen 
gage simultaneously from the catches and al 
low the door or gate to swing open, and when 
the door is again closed the lever-latch passes 
over the points of the catches and automat 
ically engages them by the action of its spring, 
so as to again close the door. This car-body 
is mounted upon any suitable supporting 
framework. As here shown, for simplicity 
and cheapness I have shown a bed of timberg, 
having approximately a width of sixteen 
inches and a depth of six inches and a length 
of about six inches more than the car-body, 
so that the ends of these timbers of adjacent 
cars form bumpers. These timbers are con 
nected together, so that all the cars will form 
a train, by any suitable coupling which is 
easily disengaged. Upon the lower side of 
the timber are the axles K', carrying the 
wheels L. These wheels run upon the tracks 
AA'. 
The plate or latch E is pivoted at the outer 
end at E", and the other end swings horizon 
tally to and from the edge of the segment. 
The lever N is pivoted about the center and 
has an arm N' projecting upwardly, as shown 
in Fig. 1, and the arm passes through a hole 
in the latch E, so that when the lever N is 
tilted one way or the other it acts to move the 
N is a weight upon one end of the 
latch. 
lever N, and this normally holds that end of 
the lever down and, acting upon the latch E, 
presses it against the edge of the segment C, 
so that whenever either of the notches c or O 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
75 
95 
CO 
 
g 
615,554 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
55 
are brought into line with the latch the latter 
Will be forced to engage them. 
The support G is shown in detail in Fig. 5. 
The ends of the support G. are made full and 
rectangular, and the part G', intermediate be 
tween the ends, is cut away in order to allow 
the framework of the car to turn without con 
tact; but the lugs F on the segments are in 
line with the full portion of the support G, 
upon which they rest. 
Upon one side of the supplemental and 
turnable tracks A is a frame M, the upper 
edge of which projects so as to extend over 
the tops of the wheels on that side when the 
car is upon the track-section A' or to other 
wise engage and hold the car in place upon 
side from that toward which the car is to dis 
charge, and it prevents the car from lifting 
from the track when the track is turned so 
as to tilt the car. 
This discharging device for cars may be 
made to discharge either endwise or sidewise, 
and it may also be arranged to discharge cars 
laden with any substance or commodity which 
it is desirable to discharge in bulk. In my 
present invention I have shown it as applied 
to ore-cars, which are usually hauled in trains 
of eight or ten or more, and as here shown 
each car is successively run upon the dis 
charging dumping-table, and after its load is 
discharged it passes on to the section of track 
beyond until all the cars have been thus un 
loaded. They are then all coupled together 
and the mule or other hauling power con 
nected with them and all hauled back again 
to the mine or other point where they are to 
be loaded. 
The track A" has a depression or other stop 
or check C, which receives the wheels of a 
car and holds it sufficiently to preventits mov 
ing out of place while being discharged. 
The operation will be as follows: The car 
being run in upon the dumping - table the 
locking device M engages the wheels upon 
one side. By placing the foot upon the lever 
N the latch E is disengaged from the segment, 
and by taking hold of the segment with one 
hand the whole device, car and all, may be 
turned upon the rollers or wheels which sup 
port the segment, the side of the car having 
been previously unlatched, so that as the car 
tilts with the platform the material begins to 
slide out until it is all finally discharged. If 
there be some of the contents which stick or 
are not properly discharged, the segment may 
be turned far enough to allow the latch Eto 
engage with a second notch O, and thus hold 
the car in this position until the contents can 
be dislodged. 
In the dumping of ore from cars it is 
usually discharged upon what is known as a 
''grizzly,' consisting of an inclined frame 
work of iron bars a short distance apart, so 
that any ore fine enough to pass between these 
bars passes directly to a grinding-mill, while 
all the larger pieces of ore will slide off the 
- - - - - - - - - - - -bars and be delivered to the stamps or other 
crushing devices, by which it is eventually 
broken up small enough for the subsequent 
milling. By this peculiar means of discharg 
ing the cars the discharge will commence at 
one side of the grizzly, and as the car turns 
about the axis of the segment the discharge 
edge will gradually move toward the other 
side, and the ore will thus be well distributed 
from one side to the other instead of all being 
dumped in one place. The discharge being 
completed the segment and the car are re 
turned to their normal position, the latch and 
stop-lugs stopping the track A' in line with 
the main track A, while the gate or door at 
tation as the car returns to its upright posi 
tion. If there is a train of cars, the empty 
car is pushed on beyond the dumping-section 
and the next car follows it upon the section, 
and so on until the whole train is discharged. 
They can then be recoupled and hauled off to 
the point where they are to be loaded. 
Any suitable or well-known form of regis 
tering apparatus may be so connected as to 
be actuated by the tilting mechanism and 
thus keep a record of all the loads delivered 
by the apparatus. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The combination with a dumping-car, a 
main line of track and an independent sec 
tion of track adapted to receive said car, of 
curved segments supporting opposite ends of 
the independent section and turnable about 
an axial line which is approximately the cen 
ter of gravity of the loaded car, a roller-sup 
port for the segments, a latch at one side of 
the segments and adapted to engage the lat 
ter and hold the same against movement in 
one direction, and lugs upon the opposite side 
of the segments and a frame or support en 
gaged thereby to prevent the segments be 
ing turned in the other direction. 
2. The combination with a dumping-car, a 
main line of track and an independent sec 
tion of track adapted to receive said car, of 
curved segments supporting the opposite ends 
of the section, and turnable about an axial 
line which is approximately the center of 
gravity of the car, a roller-support for the 
segments, a latch at one side of the segments 
and adapted to engage notches in the latter 
and thereby hold the segments against move 
ment in one direction whereby the supple 
mental tracks are retained in line with the 
main tracks, a weighted fulcrumed lever hav 
ing an extension-arm for operating the latch, 
a stop at the opposite side of the segments 
and lugs on said segments to engage Said stop 
and thereby limit the movement of the seg 
ments in the opposite direction. 
3. The combination with a dumping-car, a 
| mainline of track and an independent sec 
9o 
- 
95 
75 
IOd 
I o5 
IIC) 
I 5 
I 25 
I 3G 
6i5,554 . 
3 
25 
35 
adapted to engage and hold the segments and 
track in its normal position. 
5. A car-dumping device consisting of a sec 
tion of track, curved segments upon which 
its opposite ends are supported, journaled 
wheels upon which the segments rest where 
by they and the track may be turned trans 
versely with relation to the main track, stops 
upon one side whereby the section of track is 
prevented from passing the line of the main 
track in one direction, an automatic latching 
device adapted to engage the notch or notches 
in the opposite side of the segment to retain 
the tracks in line while the car is entering or 
leaving, said segments and track being turn 
able about the axial line of the segments 
which is approximately the center of gravity 
of the loaded car. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 
hand. 
WILLIAMI HOGAN. 
Witnesses: 
S. H. NOURSE, 
JESSIE C. BRODIE. 
O 
tion of track having a stop engaged by the 
car-wheels to hold the car in place while dis 
charging, of segments supporting the oppo 
site ends of the section, and a roller-support 
therefor, independent stops at opposite sides 
of the segments each for preventing move 
ment of the segments in one direction, and a 
frame secured to one side of the section and 
having its upper end turned inwardly over 
the car-wheels on that side to retain the car 
upon the track while it is being tilted. 
4. In a dumping apparatus, a car mounted 
upon a bed and wheels and having a hinged 
outwardly-swinging side, a main track upon 
which the car travels, and an independent 
section adapted to receive the car and mount 
ed upon curved segments to which said sec 
tion is fixed, wheels journaled to support the 
Segments and upon which the segments are 
turnable so as to move the track transversely 
and tilt the car, stops fixed to the segments 
upon one side to prevent the track moving out 
of line with the main track in the opposite 
direction, and a latch upon the other side 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615654.txt	No. 615,654. 
(No Model.) 
Patented Dec. 6, 1898. 
M. C. MULCAHY. 
LOCK HINGE. 
(Application filed Oct. 18, 1897, 
) 
--- 
es S 
s S 
- | 
- 
-o- 
2 East 
 
s 
8 
S 
 
 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
MICHAEL C. MULCAHY, OF COHASSET, MASSACHUSETTS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
IIALF TO JOHN MADDEN, OF SAME PLACE. 
LocK-HINGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 615,654, dated December 6, 1898. 
Application filed October 13, 1897, Serial No. 655,040, (No model.) 
Io 
25 set forth in the claims. 
To all whon, it naily concern. 
Be it known that I, MICHAEL C.MULCAHY, 
of Cohasset, county of Norfolk, and State of 
Massachusetts, have invented an Improve 
5 ment in Blind-Fastening Hinges, of which the 
following description, in connection with the 
accompanying drawings, is a specification, 
like letters on the drawings representing like 
parts. 
This invention relates to hinges, and has 
for its object the production of a hinge pro 
vided with means whereby the blind or shut 
ter which it supports may be locked in prede 
termined position and prevented from Swing 
I5 ing to and fro, the means being situated at 
such a point as to enable them to be readily 
controlled and operated without the neces 
sity for leaning out of the window. Prefer 
ably the fastening means are also arranged 
20 to prevent the shutter from rising on the pin 
tle of the hinge and falling off the latter. 
The various features of my invention will 
be fully illustrated and described in the ac 
companying drawings and specification and 
In the drawings, Figure i shows a portion 
of the wall of a house with a Window-frame 
and a shutter attached thereto by means of a 
hinge constructed in accordance with my in 
3o vention, the shutter being shown open or 
thrown back against the wall of the house. 
Fig. 2 shows, on an enlarged scale, in side 
elevation the hinge and adjacent part of the 
shutter. Fig. 3 is a plan view of the hinge 
35 and attached portion of the shutter, a con 
cealed portion of the hinge being indicated in 
dotted lines. Fig. 4 is a sectional view on the 
line acac, Fig. 1, this figure also showing in 
dotted lines the shutter in closed position. 
4o Fig. 5 is a view in front elevation of the socket 
portion of the hinge in the position it occu 
pies in Fig. 1, but shown separately to permit 
the operating devices to be seen. Fig. 6 is a 
similar view of the pintle portion of the hinge. 
In the preferred embodiment of my inven 
tion, selected for description and illustrated 
in the drawings, C is the pintle or portion on 
which the leaf of the hinge vibrates and which 
in its general features may be of ordinary 
5o construction or of suitable desired construc 
45. 
 
- 
tion, being attached to the Wall by a suitable 
bracket a, illustrated as of usual form. On 
this pintle fits the socket b, forming part of 
the leaf b" or shutter-carrying portion of the 
hinge, in general of ordinary construction, 55 
preferably, and attached to the shutter C in 
any suitable manner, as by the screws c. 
In accordance with my invention I provide 
fastening or locking means adapted to engage 
both portions of the hinge at times and pre- 6o 
vent relative movement therebetween, and in 
the instance illustrated such means are car 
ried by the leaf portion of the hinge and mov 
able thereon in position to engage the pintle. 
As a convenient form of such fastening means 65 
I have shown a bolt d, mounted to slide in a 
suitable housing b on the leaf of the hinge, 
transversely arranged with respect to the 
pintle, toward which I arrange, preferably, to 
have it pressed normally by suitable means, 7o 
consisting in this instance of a spring d" at 
the butt-end of the bolt and held up to its 
work by a pin or equivalent stop d, a con 
struction which permits ready removal and 
replacement of the spring without disturb- 75 
ance of the bolt or other parts of the hinge, 
To receive the head of the bolt d, the latter 
being slightly rounded, preferably, I have 
shown the pintle as recessed, and any desired 
number of such recesses may be provided, 8o 
although in general two will be sufficient, 
those being situated, respectively, at points 
where entrance of the bolt will cause the shut 
ter to be held in its extreme open position 
closely adjacent the Wall of the house or in 85 
its closed position drawn to against the frame, 
as indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 4. 
A convenient manner of forming the lock 
ing-recesses in the pintle is by piercing the 
latter, as indicated at Clin Fig. 6, and if it is 9o 
desired to secure the advantage of having the 
shutter prevented from rising on the pintle 
as a simple construction to effect this end I 
prefer to connect the ends of the bore a by 
a peripheral groove a, into which takes the 95 
head of the bolt d. 
Any suitable means to operate the locking 
means may be utilized; but where a locking 
bolt similar to the bolt d is used, in the man 
ner above described, I prefer to use operat- Ioe 
- 
2 
ing means such as illustrated, consisting of 
a lever connected operatively at its inner end. 
with the bolt and at its outer end projecting 
beyond the material of the shutter in such a 
manner as to permit the lever to be conven 
iently reached and operated manually. Such 
a lever is designated in the drawings by the 
reference-letter d, supported from the leaf 
of the hinge and pivoted at d' in trunnions 
di, (best seen in Fig. 5,) the operative connec 
tion with the locking-bolt d being provided 
for by causing the inner end of the lever to 
enter a recess or slot d near the butt of the 
bolt. The lever is extended at its free end 
d" sufficiently beyond the end piece c' of the 
shutter to permit it to be readily reached and 
operated by the operator's hand. 
When the shutter is in the position shown 
in full lines in Figs. I to 4 and it is desired 
to swing the shutter into closed position, it is 
only necessary to press with the fingers the 
end d of the lever toward the house-i. e., 
from bottom to top of the sheet, referring to 
Fig. 4-when the bolt will be iretracted against 
the action of the spring d", releasing the shut 
ter, after which it may be swung around into 
the dotted-line position, and upon reaching 
this position the bolt will automatically enter 
the inner end of the bore C, locking the shut 
ter in closed position. 
In Figs. 3 and 5 I have shown auxiliary 
means of attachment for the leaf, these con 
sisting in the instance shown of perforated 
lugs b, but these do not form an essential 
feature of my invention, nor in general do I 
restrict myself to the exact construction of 
pintle, leaf, or operating parts, since these 
IO 
25 
35 
615,654 
40 
45 
55 
may be varied considerably without depart 
ing from the spirit of my invention. 
From the foregoing description and the 
drawings it will be clear that the operative 
parts of the hinge are thoroughly protected 
from the action of rain, frost, or Snow, so that 
the parts cannot become rusty or choked with 
ice in winter. 
IIaving fully described my invention, what 
I claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent, is 
1. In a hinge, a pintle having recesses and 
a peripheral groove, and a leaf provided with 
a locking-bolt adapted to enter said recesses 
respectively to lock said pintle and leaf in a 
plurality of rotative positions and to travel 
in said groove, said bolt and groove coper 
atting to maintain the parts of the hinge in 
their normal operative position and prevent 
unshipping thereof, and means by which said 
bolt may be withdrawn from said groove to 
permit the separation of Said hinge parts. 
2. The combination with a shutter or blind, 
of a hinge provided with means to lock said 
shutter in desired position, said locking means 
having its operating parts confined wholly 
Within the frame of said shutter and a con 
trolling-lever, to be operated at a point with 
in, and free from projections beyond, said 
shutter-frame, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
MICHAEL C. MULCAIIY. 
Witnesses: 
JOHN C. EDWARDS, 
EMMA. J. BENNETT, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615754.txt	No. 615,754. 
Patented Dec. 3, 1898. 
AUGUST SCHENCK & ADOLPH SCHENCK. 
DEVICE FOR KEEPING CONTENTS OF WESSELS BENEATH THE SURFACE OF 
 
(No Model.) 
LO 
THE REN CONTANED. 
. (Application filed Feb. 2, 1898.) 
is PerERs co. PHoro-LTHo, washington, D. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
AUGUST SCHENCK AND ADOLPH SCHENCK, OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS. 
DEVICE FOR KEEPING CONTENTS OF WESSELS BENEATH THE SURFACE OF LIQUID THEREIN CONTAINED, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 615,754, dated December 13, 1898. 
Application filed February 2, 1898, Serial No. 668,877, (No model.) 
To all whom it invazy concern: 
Be it known that we, AUGUST SCHENCK 
and ADOLPHSCHENCK, citizens of the United 
States, residing at San Antonio, in the county 
of Bexar and State of Texas, have. invented 
certain new and useful Improvements in De 
vices for Keeping the Contents of Vessels Be 
neath the Surface of the Liquid Therein Con 
tained; and we do hereby declare the follow 
ing to be a full, clear, and exact description 
of the invention, such as will enable others 
skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
This invention has relation to devices adapt 
ed to keep pickles, sauer-kraut, &c., beneath 
the Surface of the brine or vinegar in barrels; 
and it consists in the novel construction and 
arrangement of its parts, as hereinafter de 
scribed. 
The object of the invention is to provide a 
device adapted to be secured to the inner 
sides of a barrel, said device adapted to bear 
down upon the contents of the barrel and re 
tain the pickles, Sauer-kraut, &c., beneath 
the surface of the brine, vinegar, or other 
liquid that they are in. At the same time it 
is the object of the invention to provide a 
suitable means whereby the contents of the 
barrel may be easily reached and a portion 
or all of it removed without dislocating the 
device from its position with relation to the 
barrel. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a perspective view of a barrel, partly in sec 
tion, showing the device located therein. Fig. 
2 is a top plan view of a modified form of the 
device. Fig. 3 is a sectional view of the cen 
tral portion of the device. Fig. 4 is a sec 
tional view of one of the pointed arms and 
the edge of the device, and Fig. 5 is a sec 
tional view of the means for retaining the 
hinged section in a horizontal position. 
The device consists of a disk 1. The said 
disk is adapted to rest on the surface of the 
brine, vinegar, &c., and is made of such ma 
terial as will not contaminate the said liquid, 
the material being preferably wood. 
In the form of the invention as shown in 
Fig. 1 the disk 1 is provided with the hinged 
section 2, said hinged section having an elon 
gated perforation 3, the longitudinal axis of 
which is substantially in alinement with the 
radius of the disk 1. The bar 4 is provided 
on its under side with a point 5. Said point 
passes through the perforation 3 and is con 
nected at its lower end to the plate 6, the said 
plate 6 being against the under side of the 
hinged section 2, the said plate being adapted 
to close the perforation 3. The bar 4 is pro 
vided on its upper side with a handle or knob 
7, and the extreme outer end of said bar is 
pointed. Thus it will be seen that the said 
bar 4 must be moved longitudinally in aline 
ment with the perforation 3 and that the Outer 
pointed end of said bar may be made to stick 
into the inner side of the barrel, and thus the 
said section 2 may be maintained in the same 
horizontal plane as the disk 1. The disk 8 is 
concentrically arranged upon the disk 1, the 
said disk Shaving on its periphery a number 
of ratchets 9. A pawl 10 is pivoted on the 
upper side of the disk 1, and the spring 11 
bears at one end against said pawl and has a 
tendency to keep the end of said pawl in en 
gagement with the ratchets 9. The pawl is 
provided with a suitable handle or knob 12. 
At suitable intervals the pointed arms 13 are 
pivoted at their inner ends to the disk 8. The 
outer ends of said arms 13 pass through suit 
ably-swiveled eyes 14, the said eyes beinglo 
cated upon the disk 1. The extreme outer 
ends of the said arms 13 are preferably pro 
vided with metallic points 15, as shown in de 
tail in Fig. 4. The handle 16 is mounted on 
the perpendicular shaft 17. The lower end 
of said shaft is journaled in the disk1, and the 
provided with 
lower portion of said shaft is 
the squared section 18, that passes through 
the corresponding perforations in the upper 
disk 8. Thus as the said shaft 17 is made to 
revolve the disk 8 must also revolve. 
The device is located in the barrel as foll 
lows: The disk, with the points of the arms 
13 withdrawn, substantially as shown in Fig. 
2, is let down through the top of the barrel, 
and when the disk 1 comes in contact with 
the surface of the liquid and presses the con 
tents of the barrel below the surface of the 
liquid the shaft 17 is given a sharp turn, and 
as the disk 8 revolves the arms 13 are forced 
out and the points 15 engage and stick into 
the sides of the barrel, and thus the disk1 is 
held in its proper horizontal position. The 
end of the pawl 10, engaging the ratchets 9, 
55 
yo 
75 
95 
IOC) 
O 
25 
35 
45 
 
2 
615,754 
trically arranged on the first said disk said 
second disk having on its periphery a num 
ber of ratchets a spring-actuated pawl mount 
ed on the first said disk and adapted to en 
gage the said ratchets, said pawl having a 
handle, arms pivotally attached at their in 
ner ends to the said second disk, eyes swiv 
eled to the first said disk, said arms passing 
through said eyes, the outer ends of said arms 
being sharpened and adapted to engage the 
sides of the barrel a perpendicular shaft con 
centrically mounted on the second said disk, 
a handle located at the upper end of said per 
pendicular shaft. 
2. A device adapted to keep the contents 
of a barrel beneath the surface of the liquid 
contained therein, said device consisting of a 
disk adapted to be attached to the sides of 
the barrel, a hinged section connected to said 
disk, said hinged section having an elongated 
perforation, a longitudinally-movable bar lo 
cated on said hinged section, a pin connected 
to the said bar and passing through the elon 
gated perforation, a plate attached to the 
lower end of said pin and covering the lower 
end of said perforation, the outer end of said 
bar adapted to engage the side of the barrel 
and maintain the hinged section in a station 
ary position. 
In testimony whereof we affix our signa 
tures in presence of two witnesses. 
45 
55 
AUG SCHENCK. 
ADOLPH SCHENCIK. 
Witnesses: 
J. EICHOL, 
A. WYSOHETZKER. 
O 
prevents the disk 8 from revolving in the op 
posite direction. Thus the pointed ends of the 
arms 13 are maintained in engagement with 
the sides of the barrel. 
If it is desired to re 
move some of the contents of the barrel with 
out disturbing the positions of the disks 1 
with relation to the sides of the barrel, the 
hinged section 2 is swung up and the contents 
may be removed. After removing, the hinged 
section is lowered and the pointed end of the 
bar 4 is forced into the side of the barrel, as 
above described. When it is desired to re 
move the disk 1 from the barrel, the end of 
the pawl 10 is disengaged from the ratchets 
9 and the disk S is turned and the ends of 
the arms 13 are withdrawn from the sides of 
the barrel. The device can then be readily re 
moved or it may be lowered in its position. 
By swiveling the eyes 14 the said eyes can 
turn as the arms 13 are thrust out or driven 
in, and thus the circular motion of the inner 
ends of the said arms are compensated for 
and the said arms will not bind in the eyes. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim as new, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. A device adapted to keep the contents 
of barrels beneath the surface of the liquid 
contained therein, said device consisting of a 
disk adapted to be attached to the sides of 
the barrel, a hinged section connected to the 
side of the disk, a longitudinally-movable bar 
located on said hinged section, said bar hav 
ing a handle, the end of said bar being sharp 
ened and adapted to engage the sides of the 
barrel and maintain the hinged section in the 
same plane as the disk, a second disk concen 
(5 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615854.txt	No. 615,854. 
(No Mode, 
J. W. JOHNSON. 
RONING MACHINE. 
(Application. filed Aug. 8, 1898. 
Patented Dec. 3, 1898 
n 
A. 
AB -- 
| 
J. 
-- 
O 
OS 
se: 
2 
A. 
 
22 a e 
s 
s 
 
--- 
22, 2. 
re. Notas PEERs co. Photo-THo, WASH NetON. D. c. 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JOHN W. JOHNSON, OF CIRCLEVILLE, OIIIO. 
IRONING-MACHINE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 615,854, dated December 13, 1898. 
Application filed August 8, 1898, Serial No, 688,029, (No model.) 
O 
ed 
25 
To all Luhon, it mat? concern. 
Be it known that I, JOHN W. JOHNSON, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Cir 
cleville, in the county of Pickaway and State 
Of Ohio, have invented certain new and use 
ful Improvements in Ironing-Machines, of 
which the following is a specification. 
My said invention consists in certaim im 
provements in the details of construction of 
ironing-machines whereby such a machine 
is provided of unusual efficiency and dura 
bility with no addition to its cost. 
Said improvements relate chiefly to the 
bOSom-board for shirt-polishing and enable 
Said garment to be manipulated during the 
Operation to secure the best results and leave 
said garment in the most perfect and desir 
able condition, as will be hereinafter more 
fully described and claimed. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
which are made a part hereof and on which 
similar letters and figures of reference indi 
cate similar parts, Figure 1 is a perspective 
View of an ironing-machine embodying my 
said improvements; Fig. 2, a central longitu 
dinal section through the bosom-board and 
stand on an enlarged scale, and Fig. 3 a top 
Or plan view of the same. 
In said drawings the portion marked A rep 
resents the frame of the machine, B the trav 
eling table, and C the bosom-board. 
The machine is in main of a construction 
in common use and needs no description ex 
cept as to the details which constitute my. 
said improvements. 
The frame A is of any suitable form for 
the purpose and is provided withi suitable 
bearings for the driving mechanism, theiron 
ing-roll 1, and feed-roll 2, and other operat 
ing parts, as is usual. 
The table B is mounted on guides or tracks 
C. and is supported and fed by the roll 2. It 
is provided with a handhold b, by which the 
Operator can assist in its manipulation. The 
bearings of the rolls 1 and 2 are preferably 
roller-bearings, whereby the power required 
is reduced to the minimum, and while I have 
shown the machine to be operated by hand it 
will be understood, of course, that any power 
desired may be used. 
The bosom-board C is mounted on a table 
C by means of a pivot-bolt c, extending 
through a perforation in its center and 
through said table, with a nut on its lower 
end, its head being countersunk to even with 
or below the Surface of Said board to be out 
of the way of the work. Equidistant from 
said pivot, on each side thereof, in the direc 
tion of the length of the board a notch or 
socket c' is formed in its under side, with 
which a spring-bolt or detent c, mounted in 
a suitable casing con the under side of the 
table, is adapted to engage and secure said 
board from turning on said pivot. Said ta 
ble C is mounted on a hollow standard c, 
situated under the center of the bosom-board 
C, and two legs c, situated under opposite 
sides near the front corners, the whole being 
mounted on a suitable base plate or board C, 
which will set firmly on the traveling table 
B, or, if preferred, may constitute said table. 
The operation is as follows: The shirt is 
placed with its bosom in proper position on 
the board C, which is placed in the machine, 
as shown. The driving mechanism being 
put in motion, said bosom is passed back and 
forth under the polishing-roll 1 until the de 
sired finish has been secured to the Work. 
During the operation said board C can be re 
versed at alternate passes through the ma 
chine by pulling down the bolt c and turn 
ing said board half around until said bolt en 
gages with the socket c' opposite that from 
which it has just been withdrawn. By this 
method the edges of the bosom are kept 
Straight, as the strain is exerted equally in 
both directions, and the curving and stretcha 
ing and consequent injury to the garment is 
avoided. 
Having thus fully described my said inven 
tion, what I claim as new, and desire to ser 
cure by Letters Patent, is-s 
1. In an ironing-machine, the combination 
of the ironing-roller, a horizontal reciprocat 
ing table, a bosom-board mounted thereon 
by means of a centrally-located pivot, a catch 
for holding it in line with the movement, an 
engaging point being formed on opposite ends 
of said board, whereby said board may be re 
versed to present either end to the roller and 
Said catch engage there with to secure it in 
either position substantially as set forth. 
2. The combination, with an ironing-ma. 
chine, of a bosom-board C pivoted on a sup: 
55 
75 
95 
Iod 
35 
40 
45 
 
on its lower end within said hollow standard, 
and the spring-mounted bolt c'mounted in the I5 
casing c: on the under side of said table and 
adapted to engage sockets in the under side 
of said board and secure it in the position de 
sired, substantially as set forth. 
hand and seal, at Circleville, Ohio, this 3d 
day of Ausust, A. D. 1898. 
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my 20 
JOHN W. JOHNSON. L. S. 
Witnesses: 
ISAAC GOFE, 
GEORGE. M. ANDERSON, 
porting-table and provided with a socket on 
opposite sides of Said pivot, and a spring 
mounted bolt or detent c on the under side 
of said table adapted to engage with said 
sockets and hold said bosom-board in one or 
another position, as desired, substantially as 
set forth. 
3. The combination, in an ironing-machine, 
of the pivoted bosom-board C, the table C 
supported on the central hollow standard c' 
and legs c, the pivot-bolt c connecting the 
said bosom-board and table, being counter 
sunk in the board and provided with a nut 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US615954.txt	No. 615,954. 
C. S. BRADLEY. 
Patented Dec. 13, 1898. 
CHANGING PERIOD AND PHASE OF ALTERNATING CURRENTS. 
(Application filed June 22, 1896. Renewed Nov. 17, 1898.) 
(No Modet.) 
3al 
t 
WITNESSES 
% f1Geasa-is- 
NVENTOR 
BY N A 
A, ATTORNEY 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CIIARLES S. BRADLEY, OFAVON, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO THE GENERAL 
ELECTRIC COMPANY, OF NEW YORK. 
CHANG ING PERIOD AND PHASE OF ALTERNATING CURRENTs. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 615,954, dated December 13, 1898. 
Application filed June 22, 1896, Renewed November 17, 1898, Srial No. 696,737, (No model.) 
To cla Luhon, it nuclf concern: 
Be it known that I, CHARLESS. BRADLEY, 
a citizen of the United States, and a resident 
of Avon, in the county of Livingston and State 
5 of New York, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Changing the Period 
and Phase of Alternating Currents, of which 
the following is a specification. 
The object of this invention is to permit 
to the period or rate of an alternating current 
or a plurality of such currents to be changed 
and varied as desired for the operation of 
motors and other translating devices and to 
permit a single alternating current, or more 
I5 than one, to be converted into any desired 
number of phasially different currents. 
In carrying out the invention I operate a 
motor-generator the primary winding of which 
is adapted, either alone or by the assistance 
2o of the armature reaction, to develop a rotary 
magnetic field and the secondary or generat 
ing Winding of which is connected in circuit 
with devices for varying the capacity or in 
ductance, or both, to render said circuit con 
25 sonous to a desired rate of alternation needed 
in a consumption or distribution circuit. I 
have described a motor operating under con 
trol of such adjusting devices in a patent 
granted to me. April 7, 1896, No. 557,957. The 
3o generating-Winding of the motor-generator 
imay generate any rate of alternation, depend 
ing On the capacity-inductance product of the 
Winding and its connected circuits. The con 
dition of adjustment is approximately deter 
35 mined by the formula for electrical resonance 
in which the capacity of the circuits multi 
plied by their inductance equals twenty-five 
thousandthree hundred, divided by the square 
of the rate of alternation. When such an ad 
4o justmentis made for a desired rate of alterna 
tion, the circuits are in electrical consonance, 
as fully set forth in my patent above referred 
to. In an Organization of this kind the devices 
which are provided for varying the capacity 
45 inductance product are set for the period or 
rate desired, and the motor-generator will then 
develop Such rate. The generating-Winding 
may be opened or tapped at any desired num 
ber of symmetrically-distributed points, and 
So from such points currents differing in phase 
 
My invention therefore comprises a method 55 
It comprises also such an organization pro- 7o 
may be taken. The motor-generator may be 
driven by a single-phase current delivered to 
its magnetizing-winding or by a polyphase cur 
rent delivered thereto. 
of altering the time period of an alternating 
current consisting in charging one element 
with an alternating current to charge the 
same magnetically and create a shifting mag 
netic field and adjusting the circuits of a co- 6o 
Operating element movable with relation to 
the other, so as to render them electrically 
consonous at the rate of alternation desired. 
It comprises also a motor-generator provided 
with a magnetizing-winding and a secondary 65 
winding relatively movable thereto adjusted 
or capable of adjustment to produce electrical 
consonance with the desired time period or 
rate of alternation. 
vided with distributing connections to pro 
duce any desired number of phases in a con 
Sumption - circuit. An Organization of this 
kind is especially advantageous in certain 
kinds of Work-as, for example, in operating 75 
trains of cars, where a number of induction 
motors are simultaneously started and con 
trolled. It is desirable with such motors that, 
in starting up they should be supplied with 
currents of slow rate or long period and that 8o 
as they gain in speed the rate should be quick 
ened. 
In the accompanying drawing, which illus 
trates, diagrammatically, my invention, Aisa. 
motor-generator the primary element P of 85 
which is provided with a winding connected 
With a supply-circuit 12 or 123. For con 
venience of explanation. We will first assume 
that the winding is a closed coil tapped at 
three symmetrical points and connected with 9o 
a triphase Supply-circuit 1' 23. A rotary 
magnetic field will under such conditions be 
set up in the primary core. In inductive re 
lation to the rotary field is a secondary or 
generating element S, the winding of which 95 
leads through brushes b b binto a circuit 
including devices for varying the capacity 
inductance product of the secondary Wind 
ing and its connected external circuit. These 
devices are preferably condensers c' cc in Ioo 
2 
615,954 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
each branch of the polyphase circuit connect 
ing with the brushes O' bl', which are ren 
dered adjustable by any suitable device for 
varying their surface. As shown; a common 
controlling-handle II may actuate a Switch 
lever in each condenser branch and graduate 
by a single movement the capacity of all the 
condensel's similarly. The inductance fac 
tor of the equation which determines conso 
nance may, however, be varied instead of 
the capacity with similar results. As this 
matter of the interchangeability of condens 
ers and inductance for this purpose was fully 
considered in my patent hereinbefore re 
ferred to it need not be further described 
here. In parallel arc With the condensers 
are distributing-mains C, b c of a consump 
tion - circuit supplying translating devices. 
Induction-motors are shown at M. MI', since 
the invention is especially applicable to their 
operation. Other devices may, however, be 
supplied, if desired. When the motor-gen 
erator is in operation, the secondary element 
follows the rotary field; but as its magneti 
zation depends upon the slip' between the 
movable and fixed elements of the generator 
the secondary currents generated will obvi 
ously be of slower late than the primary cur 
rents. The rate is, however, dependent upon 
the capacity-inductance product of its cir 
cuits. If the condensers are adjusted for a 
low rate, the generator will assume a definite 
speed closely approximating this predeter 
mined rate. Either the primary or the sec 
ondary element of the generator may be the 
movable member. If a single-phase charging 
current be employed, as indicated in full lines, 
the reaction of the secondary member and the 
condensers will assist the single-phase cur 
rent in developing a rotary field in the pri 
mary element P, and similar results to those 
hereinbefore described will ensue in the gen 
erating and consumption circuits. With a 
single-phase system an auxiliary device for 
starting the motor-generator must be used. 
On starting up the motors the lowest rate in 
the circuit which supplies them is desirable, 
which will of course require the greatest ca 
pacity-inductance product to produce elec 
trical consonance. If capacity be the variable 
factor, the maximum amount of such capacity 
should be in circuit when the motors are start 
ing. This condition of adjustment is shown 
in the drawing. This adjustment furnishes 
the greatest storage capacity just when it is 
needed to give torque to the motors. More 
Over, as the revolving element of the motor 
generator is at such a time operating at a 
maNimum speed, because the rate is lowest 
when the difference in speed of the two gen 
erator elements is least, great momentum is 
stored, which greatly adds to the starting ef 
forts of the motors. As the motors rise in 
speed the condenser is reduced, slowing down 
the generator. The maximum capacity of 
the condensers should be of a value to pro- the capacity-inductance product. 
duce consonance when all of the motOFS are 
starting and are at low speed. In shutting 
down the motors the condensers may be all 
cut in gradually, thereby destroying the coll 
sonous adjustment for the higher rate of al 
ternation under which the moto's Were Opel'- 
ating and reducing the torque, thus causing 
the motors to slow down. In controlling the 
speed of the motors the condensel'-switch 
should be gradually shifted, thereby altering 
the capacity by degrees, and consequently al 
tering the speed of the motor-generator and 
motors. If several cars are cut off and the 
number of supplied motors reduced, the in 
ductance will be only fractionally altered, 
since the motors are in multiple arc With the 
supply-circuit. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to Secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. The method of altering the late of all 
alternating current consisting in leading Said 
current through a motor-generator, feeding 
a work-circuit from the secondary of said 
generator, and controlling the rate by alter 
ing the phase relation of the work-current. 
2. The method of changing the late of an 
alternating current, consisting in Setting up 
a magnetic field by said current, and operat 
ing in inductive relation thereto a circuit 
rendered consonous to the desired rate. 
3. The method of changing the rate of an 
alternating current, consisting in Setting up 
a shifting magnetic field by said current, 
driving a motor element thereby, and adjust 
ing the capacity-inductance product of the 
secondary circuit for the desired rate. 
4. The method of producing a variable late 
from an alternating current of definite rate, 
consisting in operating an induction-motor 
generator thereby, and varying the capacity 
inductance product of the secondary circuit 
of the motor-generator. 
5. The combination of a motor-generator 
comprising a primary winding, a secondary 
winding, condensers connected with said Sec 
ondary winding, and translating devices Sup 
plied by said secondary winding. 
6. A motor-generator provided with a field 
magnet adapted to be charged by an alter 
nating current, and an armature including a 
condenser in its circuit. 
7. A motor-generator provided with a field 
magnet adapted to be charged by an alter 
nating current, and an armature including 
devices for varying the capacity-inductance 
product of its circuit. 
S. A motor-generator provided with a field 
magnet adapted to be charged by an alter 
nating current, and a polyphase armature 
having a condenser in each circuit. 
9. A motor-generator provided with a field 
magnet adapted to be charged by an alter 
nating current, and a polyphase armature 
having in each circuit devices for varying 
75 
ICO 
I d5 
IO 
II5 
I 25 
 
615,954 
3. 
10. A motor-generator provided with a ro 
tary field-Winding, and an armature having 
an adjustable condenser in its circuit. 
11. A motor-generator provided with a field 
magnet adapted to be charged by an alter 
nating current, an armature having its cir 
cuits adjusted for electrical consonance, and 
connections with said armature for leading 
off a different number of phases from those 
led into the primary. 
12. The combination of an alternating-cur 
rent-supply circuit, a motor-generator driven 
IO 
thereby, a consumption-circuit, containing 
one or more induction-motors fed by the sec 
ondary of the motor-generator, and condensers. I5 
in said secondary circuit. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub 
scribed my name this 23d day of May, A. D. 
1896. 
CHARLES S. BRADLEY. 
Witnesses: 
C. R. WATERBURY, 
ROBT. H. READ. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US616056.txt	W. S. LANG FORD. 
Patented Dec. 3, 1898. 
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER. 
(Application fied sept. 15, 1897.) 
2. 
S 
A T toRnEy 
No. 66,056. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
: 
| 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAMS, LANGFORD, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR OF ONE 
HALF TO WILLIAM. H. GOUGH, OF SAME PLACE. 
AUTOMAC FIRE EXTENGUISHER 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 616,056, dated December 13, 1898. 
Application filed September 15, 1897, Serial No. 651,708, (No model.) 
55 
6 
75 
To all, whon, it may conce7n 
Beit known that I, WILLIAMS. LANGFORD, 
a citizen of the United States, residing at Bal 
timore, in the State of Maryland, have in 
vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in Automatic Fire-Extinguishers, of which 
the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to automatic fire-ex 
tinguishers for storehouses and other places 
of the class known as sprinklers. 
Some of the objects of the invention are to 
provide a construction that will allow water 
under pressure to be maintained in the sprin 
kler without liability of leakage at the valve, 
to provide an improved form of valve wherein 
the constant pressure of the water will operate 
to keep the valve tightly to its seat, to pro 
vide an improved fusible support and trip for 
holding the valve to its seat, to provide an 
improved locking-nut that is independent of 
the frame, and to provide a reversible water 
distributer that may be used either as an up 
Ward or a downward distributer. 
The invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view of my automatic 
Sprinkler device, showing all the parts in po 
sition. Fig. 2 is a view of the top of the frame 
and showing the distributer in section and in 
reversed position from that shown in Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an elevation of the sprinkler, show 
ing certain parts in section. The support 
and trip for the valve is not shown in this 
view. Fig. 4 is a side view of the barrel. 
Fig. 5 is a view of the locking-nut, Fig. 6 
shows two views of the fusible valve-support 
and trip. Fig. 7 shows four views of parts 
comprising the fusible valve-support and 
trip. Fig. 8 is a diametrical section of the 
valve parts. Fig. 9 is a bottom view of the 
valve-cap and levers, the ring-valve being re 
moved. Fig. 10 shows two views of the ring 
part of the valve. Fig. 11 shows reversed 
views of the valve-levers and also projected 
sectional views of same. Fig. 12 is a view of 
the gasket part of the valve. 
The letter A designates the barrel, having 
at one end a screw-thread a for attachment 
to a Water-pipe, a Wrench-grasp c, adjoining 
said end, a screw-head b at the other end and 
of larger exterior diameter than either the 
first-named screw or Wrench-grasp, a Water 
passage d through the barrel, and a circular 
valve-seat d around the passage on the head 
end. 
The frame B has a well-known yoke shape 
and has a ring-base e, which takes on the 
large screw-head b of the barrel. At its point 
end, on the inner side, the yoke-frame has 
a thin edge f. A valve-cap C covers the valve 
proper and takes over the circular valve-seat 
d", and the fusible support and trip D has one 
end resting on the valve-cap, and the other 
end has a slight groove or notch f', which en 
gages the thin edge f on the yoke-frame. 
This device D keeps the valve-cap to its po 
sition until the occurrence of a fire. 
The valve-cap C has a cavity which con 
tains the several valve parts and a circular 
rim or edge.g., which surrounds the said valve 
seat d'. The valve comprises the ring hand 
the thin disk or gasket h", of aluminium or 
other suitable non-corrosive material, which 
covers the water-passage d and rests on the 
circular valve-seat d". The ringh fits snugly 
within the circular rim g of the cap and has 
slight movement up and down therein. It 
has its upper inner surface beveled, as at h. 
Small levers i (in the present instance two) 
are within the cavity of the cap C. These 
levers are shown in Figs. 8, 9, and 11, and are 
segment-shaped in one view and also are 
somewhat wedge-shaped in section. The two 
points i at the ends of the curve constitute 
fulcrum-points, and the center point * con 
stitutes the long arm of the leveracted on by 
the thin disk or gasket, while the curve at 
constitutes the short arm of the lever and acts 
on the bevel h of the ring. It will now be 
seen that the thin non-corrosive disk or gas 
ket will be pressed by the liquid-pressure in 
passage d, and thereby the gasket will yield a 
little and be dished at its center and pressed 
on the center points of the two levers. This 
will tilt the levers and cause the curved parts 
at i to force the ring h toward the gasket and 
toward the valve-seat d on the barrel, and 
thereby as long as the cap C does not yield 
the liquid-pressure in passage dwill keep the 
valve tightly to its seat. 
The fusible device D, which holds the valve 
cap to its seat, has a body composed in the 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
616,056 
present instance of three sections if' f. The 
two end sections if' are alike and at the cen 
ter and at one side, as at lic, a but against each 
Other for a distance less than one-half the 
cross-width. At the center and opposite side 
the two end sections form a V-notch, which ex 
tends inward a distance more than one-half 
the cross-width. The central section f is V 
shaped and fits in the V-notch just described. 
These three sections are bound together by 
two suitably-shaped bands l l and readily 
fusible solder. These bands when placed in 
position, as shown, may partly or completely 
encircle the three sections. The encircling 
shape which the two bands l l assume is 
seen in the right-hand view of Fig. 7. 
Solder 
that is fusible at a moderate temperature 
say 160 Fahrenheit-is applied to confine the 
bands. 
The thrust-line or line of compression which 
the device D must sustain is longitudinally 
through the center. When the solder is fused 
by the heat of a fire, the embrace of the bands 
ll will be relaxed, the V-shaped section will 
slip out of position, and the two end sections 
Will tilt on their abutting point at le. This 
operation constitutes the trip action, which 
releases the valve-cap C and allows the water 
to discharge through the passage d. 
It is important in this class of sprinkler 
fire-extinguishers to make provision that will 
prevent leaks at the valve. One of the fea 
tures which I have provided to this end is a 
locking-nut N, wholly independent of the 
frame, but serving to prevent a rotary move 
ment of the frame on the large end of the bar 
rel. The locking-nut is also on the screw 
thread of the large end of the barrel, and said 
nut may be taken off over the wrench-grasp 
C and screw enda. In adjusting the parts to 
their position when the frame B has been 
turned on the screw-head b until the support 
D is compressed tightly between the yoke 
end f and the valve-cap C, thereby pressing 
the said valve-cap hard over the valve-seat 
d", said frame is then locked or secured 
from turning backward by bringing the lock 
ing-nut Ninto use. By turning this nut on 
the head b so that the nut will press against 
the ring-base e the frame will be prevented 
from rotary movement by the vibration from 
any cause and from loosening the support D, 
and is thereby kept tight, and no leakage at 
the valve will occur. 
I provide a revoluble distributer P, that is 
adapted to be reversed. This distributer has 
a central seat-bearing q on one side and a 
similar one g on the other side. It is provided 
with a number of blades , each of which is 
twisted similar to the form approximately 
of a propeller-blade; but all the blades are 
bent or curved upward from the central hub, 
thus forming a sort of dished affair. The 
blades at one side of the distributer there 
fore form a concave and the other side a con 
vex. This distributer is held by a pivot 
screw S at the point end of the yoke-frame, 
so as to receive the stream of Water that will 
flow from the passage d when the valve-cap 
C is removed. It will be seen that the Water 
striking against the convex side of the dis 
tributer in the position shown in Figs. I and 
3 will be deflected laterally and upward. 
When the distributer is reversed, as shown 
in Fig. 2, the stream of water will strike 
against the concave side and be deflected lat 
erally and upward. The peculiar construc 
tion of this distributer has the effect in prac 
tice to distribute the water over a greater 
area than any other form known to me. 
From this description the operation of the 
improved sprinkler will be understood. 
The foregoing description has reference to 
water as the element to extinguish the fire; 
but it is obvious this sprinkler device may 
be used with any other liquid or solution 
suitable. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent of the United States, is 
1. The combination in a sprinkler fire-ex 
tinguisher, of a screw-threaded barrel having 
on its end a valve-seat; a frame having a ring 
base screwed on said barrel; a valve-cap hav 
ing a cavity and a circular rim surrounding 
the valve-seat; a flexible disk within said 
cavity and resting on the valve-seat and clos 
ing the passage through the barrel; mechan 
ism inclosed in the cavity of the valve- cap 
and coacting with the said flexible disk, 
whereby the water in the barrel-passage press 
ing on the flexible disk will cause said mech 
anism to press the rim of said flexible disk 
tightly to the valve-seat; and a fusible Sup 
port interposed between a part of the frame 
and the said valve-cap. 
2. The combination in a sprinkler fire-ex 
tinguisher of a barrel having a Water-passage; 
a frame attached to the barrel; a valve-cap 
having a cavity which contains a valve con 
sisting of a ring and a disk covering the Wa 
ter-passage, levers having ends at the center 
resting on the said disk, and ends acting on 
the said ring; and a fusible support and trip 
holding said valve-cap in closed position. 
3. The combination in a fusible fire-extin 
guisher of a barrel having a water-passage; 
a frame attached to the barrel; a valve de 
vice closing the water-passage; and a fusible 
support and trip composed of three sections-- 
the two end sections abutting against each 
other only at one side of the longitudinal cen 
tral thrust-line and forming a V-notch on the 
other side, and the middle section having a 
V shape and fitted in said notch, and bands 
partly encircling said three sections and con 
fined by readily-fusible solder. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
WILLIAM. S. LANGEORD. 
Witnesses: 
CHAPIN A. FERGUSON, 
CHARLES B. MANN, Jr. 
75 
9o 
95 
IOC 
IO 
I I5 
I 25 
25 
35 
45 
50 
55 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US616156.txt	No. 66,156. 
(No Mode.) 
J. A. STEVENS. 
STEAM BOLER. . 
(Application filed June 14, 1898. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1898. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WTNESSES: . & 
S 
?m, f4- 
7) 
/ 
?D%/??? 
 
N 
 
s NNNN NNNN M 
N N N 
NWENTOR 
? 
?%? ??ze?? ?? 
?4//?? 
du4u 
ATTORNEY. 
No. 616,156. 
(No Model.) 
J. A. STEVENS. 
STEAM BOLER. 
(Application filed June 14, 1898.) 
Patented Dec. 20, 1898. 
3 Sheets-Sheet 3. 
Z 
 
 
  
 
 
 
WITNESSES: 
N 
|NWENTOR 
BY eldf/.t 
ATORNEY. 
d.ITHo., wash NGON, d. c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
. JOIIN A. STEVENS, OE LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS. 
STEAM - BOILE R. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 616,156, dated December 20, 1898. 
Application filed June 14, 1898, Serial No, 683,432, (No model.) 
To (t? t?7,07m, t? Trua/ coroce77,: 
Be it known that I, JOHN A. STEVENS, re 
siding at Lowell, in the county of Middlesex, 
State of Massachusetts, have invented certain 
new and useful Improvements in Steam-Boil 
ers, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention is more particularly an im 
provement in Water-tube boilers and furnaces 
therefor, whetherland or marine, and relates 
to my former inventions, in which the baffle 
walls are arranged parallel to the vertical 
planes of the tubes. 
The objects of my present invention are 
primarily to provide for the utilization of 
either half of the furnace independently of 
the other, to increase the heating-surface of 
the boiler, to secure the equal distribution of 
the heating-gases, to save space and utilize 
the heat of the gases until they have escaped, 
to facilitate cleaning and repair, and gener 
ally to secure increased economy, efficiency, 
and convenience of operation. 
In the construction the heating-space or 
furnace is divided into two distinct compart 
ments, preferably by a water-box wall, so that 
either half may be worked at will while the 
other is developing full power. By this ar 
rangement in case of accident to the water 
circulating and steam-generating system but 
one-half of the total fire will act to evapo 
rate the leakage and produce scalding steam. 
The action of the boiler will be rendered 
more even than when one large furnace is 
employed, and the liability of priming will 
be decreased since the flow of generated steam 
will be more constant. The increase in the 
heating-surface and the economical advan 
tage in the manner of utilizing the heat of 
the furnace-gases will more fully appear, as 
Will also the general advantage of the con 
struction, by reference to the accompanying 
drawings and description. 
In the accompanying drawings, illustrating 
my invention, Figure 1 is a transverse sec 
tional view of the construction in front elle 
vation. Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view on 
the line a C of Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is a vertical 
sectional view on the linebb of Fig. 1. Fig. 
4 is a transverse sectional view, infront elle 
Vation, of a modified form of the invention. 
Fig. 5 is a front elevation of the invention, 
partially in section, in illustration of a modi 
m 
. 
. 
fied form of header and connections. Fig. 
6 is an end elevation, partially in section, of 
the modification shown in Fig. 5. 
As shown in the drawings, the chamber, 
limited by the containing-walls 1, is divided 
into two distinct main compartments by a wall 
2, preferably composed of water-boxes extend 
ing between and communicating with corre 
sponding front and rear Water-legs and ris 
ing from a suitable foundation 5 to the roof 
baffle 6. Each of these main compartments 
is divided into three passes by a primary baf 
fle-wall 7 and a secondary baffle-wall 9. The 
baffle-wall 7, preferably composed of water 
boxes extending between and communicating 
with corresponding front and rear water-legs, 
rises from a foundation 8 toward the roof 
baffle 6. The baffle-wall 9, preferably com 
posed of water-boxes extending between and 
communicating with corresponding front and 
rear water-legs, extends downward from the 
roof-baffle 6. In each division or main coma 
partment the first of these three passes con 
tains a grate 10, suitably supported, and a 
bank of water-circulating and steam-gener 
ating tubes l1, extending parallel to the baffle 
walls and having their respective ends ex 
panded into the front and rear headers 3' and 
4. The second and third passes contain, re 
spectively, the banks of tubes 12 and 13, ex 
tending parallel to the baffle-walls and having 
their respective ends expanded into the front 
and rear headers 3' and 4'. 
The rear headers and Water-legs are con 
nected with the steam-drum 16 by means of 
the tubes 17, expanded in place, and the front 
headers are connected there with by nipples 
18. This drum is provided with the take-off 
and escape-valve connections 19 and 20 and 
with any conveniently-placed manholes, as 
21. The feed-water supply may be intro 
duced through this drum by means of the 
pipes 22 22' and nipples 22", which register 
with the tubes 17. The tubes 17 may support 
the roof-baffle 6, which is formed of any suit 
able non-conducting material and extends 
between the baffle-walls 99, or to such dis 
tance as to provide a sufficient escape from 
the end passes for the waste gases. The 
banks of tubes in the first passes are baffled 
by means of perforated tiles 40 to the extent 
found necessary. The waste gases escape be 
I. ? 
- 2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
 
55 
75 
85 
95 
OC 
2 
616,156 
tween the tubes 17 of the end passes and pass tion illustrated in Fig. 4, in which the cham 
thence by the channel 43 through the breech 
ber, limited by the walls 1", is divided into 
ing 41, which is placed above the drum 16, 
three passes by the side-wall water-boxes 2', 
the escape being regulated by means of a 
water-box baffle-wall 7", and water-box baffle 
damper 42. 
wall 9', which water-boxes are expanded into 
The space between the rear headers and the 
front and rear water-legs, as illustrated by 
wall 1' permits access for cleaning and repair 
the parts 2' 7'9". 
and provides a dry air-space, which prevents 
In the operation of the main construction 
the gaseous products of combustion rise from 
radiation. Air-ducts, as 0, made removable, 
may be placed in this space, through which 
the grates 10, heating the water-boxes 2 and 
air may be forced by a fan O' to the lower part 
7, the tubes 11 and 17, their connecting-head 
of the grate 10 when hot draft is used. This 
ers, and the steam-and-water drum. Being 
location of such ducts effects the heating of 
baffled by the tile-baffle 40 and deflected by 
the air passing therethrough, which tends to 
the roof-baffle 6, they pass above the respec 
increase the economy of the generator. The 
tive baffle-walls 7 of these first passes and 
front headers and water-legs may rest directly 
transversely thereto, into and down the sec 
upon a supporting-wall 23, excepting the front 
ond passes, heating the Water-boxes 7 and 9, 
headers 3' for the first passes, which are made 
the tubes 12, the drum, and the headers. 
short to permit charging the fuel. The rear 
Following the direction of the arrows, they 
headers and water-legs may rest directly on 
pass below the baffle-walls 9, thence upward 
the supporting-wall 25. A water-box 26, pro 
through the third passes, heating the water 
vided with hand-hole caps 27, is connected 
boxes 9, the tubes 13 and 17, their headers, 
with the rear headers and water-legs by the 
and the drum. Escaping between the tubes 
nipples 28, by means of which the tubes and 
17 of the third passes, they are conducted 
headers may be blown out; but the details of 
along the drum by the passages 43 and out 
through the breeching 41. By this course the 
construction may be modified in accordance 
heat of the gases is utilized in heating the 
with the details of the modifications illus 
water-circulating and steam-generating sys 
trated in Figs. 4, 5, and 6, in which parallel 
steam-drums are arranged parallel with the 
tem up to the point when such gases finally 
escape through the breeching. 
planes of the division and baffle walls. These 
drums are provided with water-boxes 36, 
In the modified construction illustrated in 
which are connected by means of the nipples 
Fig. 4 the heated gaseous products rise from 
35 with the headers or legs, into which the 
the grate 10', heating the water-boxes 2" 7", 
tubes and water-boxes are expanded, as in 
the tubes, headers, and drums of the first 
the case of the parts 4' 4". Similar connec 
pass. Being deflected thence in the direction 
tions are provided for the water-legs or head 
of the arrows by the drums and roof-baffle, 
ers 2" 7'9' 3' 3". The upper or steam spaces 
they are carried over the baffle-wall 7' into the 
of the drums are connected by the tubes 17, 
second pass and, descending, transmit their 
and the lower or water spaces of the drums 
heat to the water-boxes 7' 9', the tubes and 
are connected by the tubes 17', by means of 
headers of the second pass, and the drums con 
which the steam and water of the several 
nected there with. They pass thence under 
drums are equalized. Suitable non-conduct 
the baffle-wall 9' and upward through the 
ing material 6' covers the spaces between the 
outer pass, thence through the breeching 41, 
giving up their heat to the water-boxes 9', 
drums and forms a baffle there with. 
A water-box 29 is placed beneath the front 
the tubes, headers, and drums in their path. 
headers and Water-legs and is connected 
Having thus described my invention, I 
thereto by the nipples 30, the hand-hole caps 
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 
31 permitting access for blowing out and 
Patent 
cleaning. The rear headers and water-legs 
1. In the combination of a boiler and fur 
may be similarly connected with a water-box 
nace, a division-wall which separates the fur 
29', placed beneath them and connected there 
nace into two distinct compartments, a baffle 
with by the nipples 30', the hand-hole caps 31' 
wall parallel with said division-wall in each 
permitting access for blowing out and clean 
of said compartments, a bank of tubes par 
ing. In this construction the grate 10' is pro 
allel to said walls in each pass formed by said 
vided with a bridge-wall 32 at the rear end 
division and baffle walls, headers for said 
thereof. 
tubes, a steam-and-water drum connected 
As illustrated in Figs. 4 and 5, the headers 
with said headers, a grate in each of said 
may be either of the box type 3' 4" or of the 
passes, and an escape from each of said passes 
sectional sinuous type 3' 4'. 
located above the respective baffle-walls and 
In constructing the boiler spaces 33 may be 
transverse thereto, substantially as specified. 
left between the sectional headers at the de 
2. In the combination of a boiler and full 
Sired intervals for the insertion of a hose to 
nace, a water-box division-wall which sepa 
clear off soot and similar deposits upon the 
rates the furnace into two distinct compart 
heating-surfaces. 
ments, a water-box baffle-wall parallel with 
When the requirements of the boiler and 
said water-box division-wall in each of said 
furnace are limited, the principle of the in 
compartments, a bank of tubes parallel to said 
vention may be embodied as in the modifica 
walls in each pass formed by said division and 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
75 
95 
?. ? ? 
IO 
II5 
I 2 ? 
I 25 
616,156 
3. 
baffle Walls, headers for said tubes and water 
boxes, a steam-and-water drum connected 
with said headers, a grate in each of said 
passes, and an escape from each of said passes 
located above the respective baffle-walls and 
transverse thereto, substantially as specified. 
3. In the combination of a boiler and fur 
nace, a water-box division-wall which sepa 
rates the furnace into two distinct compart 
ments, a water-box baffle-wall parallel with 
said water-box division-wall in each of said 
compartments, a bank of tubes parallel to said 
Walls in each pass formed by said division 
and baffle walls, headers for the respective 
ends of Said tubes and water-boxes, a steam 
and-Water drum located above one set of said 
headers and connected thereto, a series of 
tubes connecting said steam-and-water drum 
and the otherset of said headers, a roof-baffle 
located above said passes, and an escape-pas 
Sage from each of said passes between said 
roof-baffle and said baffle-walls, substantially 
as specified. 
4. In the combination of a boiler and fur 
nace, a division-wall which separates the fur 
nace into two distinct compartments, a baffle 
wall parallel with said division-wall in each 
of said compartments, a bank of tubes par 
allel to said walls in each pass formed by said 
division and baffle walls, headers for the re 
Spective ends of said tubes, a steam-and-water 
drum located above one set of said headers 
and connected thereto, a series of tubes con 
necting said steam-and-water drum and the 
other set of said headers, a roof-baffle located 
above said passes, andan escape-passage from 
each of said passes between said roof-baffle 
and said baffle-walls, substantially as speci 
fied. 
5. In a boiler and furnace, a division-wall 
which separates the furnace into two distinct 
compartments, a baffle-wall parallel with said 
division-wall in each of said compartments, 
a second baffle-wall parallel with said first 
baffle-wall in each of said compartments, an 
escape-passage from each of the passes formed 
by said division and first baffle walls located 
above said first baffle-walls, and an escape 
passage from each of the passes formed by 
said first and second baffle-walls located be 
neath said second baffle-walls, substantially 
as specified. 
6. In a boiler and furnace, a water-box di 
vision-Wall which separates the furnace into 
two distinct compartments, a water-box baffle 
Wall parallel with said division-wall in each 
of said compartments, a second water-box 
baffle-wall parallel with said first baffle-wall 
in each of said compartments, an escape-pas 
sage from each of the passes formed by said 
division and first baffle walls located above 
said first baffle-walls, an escape-passage from 
each of the passes formed by said first and 
Second baffle-walls located beneath said sec 
Ond baffle-Walls, in combination with a water 
circulating and steam-generating system, sub 
stantially as specified. 
- 
7. In a boiler and furnace, a water-box di 
vision-wall which separates the furnace into 
two distinct compartments, a Water-box baffle 
wall parallel with said division-wall in each 
of said compartments, a second Water-box 
baffle-wall parallel with said first baffle-wall 
in each of Said compartments, a bank of tubes 
parallel to said Walls in each pass formed by 
said division and baffle walls, headers for the 
respective ends of said tubes, a steam-and 
water drum located above one set of said 
headers and connected thereto, a series of 
tubes connecting said steam-and-water drum 
and the other set of said headers, a roof-baffle 
located above said passes, an escape-passage 
between said roof-baffle and each of said first 
baffle-walls, and an escape-passage beneath 
each of said second baffle-walls, substantially 
as specified. 
8. In a boiler and furnace, a Water-box di 
vision-wall which separates the furnace into 
two distinct compartments, a water-box baffle 
wall parallel with said division-wall in each 
of said compartments, a second water-box 
baffle-wall parallel with said first baffle-wall 
in each of said compartments, combining with 
end walls to divide each compartment into 
three passes, a steam-and-Water drum con 
nected with said water-boxes, a roof-baffle lo 
cated above said passes, an escape-passage 
located between said roof-baffle and each of 
said first baffle-Walls, an escape beneath each 
of said second baffle-Walls, and an escape-pas 
sage from said third pass, substantially as 
specified. 
9. In a boiler and furnace, a division-Wall 
which separates the furnace into two distinct 
compartments, a baffle-Wall parallel with said 
division-wall in each of said compartments, 
a second baffle-wall parallel with said first 
baffle-wall in each of said compartments, com 
bining with end walls to divide each compart 
ment into three passes, a bank of tubes par 
allel to said walls in each of said passes, head 
ers for the respective ends of said tubes, a 
steam-and-Water drum located above one set 
of said headers and connected thereto, a se 
ries of tubes connecting said steam-and-water 
drum and the other set of said headers, a 
roof-baffle located above said passes, an es 
cape from the first of said passes located be 
tween said roof-baffle and said first baffle 
Wall, an escape from the second of said passes 
located beneath said second baffle-Wall, and 
an escape from the third of said passes adja 
cent to said steam-and-water drum, substan 
tially as specified. 
10. In a boiler and furnace, a division-wall 
which separates the furnace into two distinct 
compartments, a baffle-wall parallel with said 
division-wall in each of said compartments, 
a bank of tubes parallel to said walls in each 
pass formed by said division and baffle walls, 
headers for the respective ends of said tubes, 
a steam-and-water drum connected with said 
headers, an escape-passage above each of 
said baffle-walls and beneath said steam-and 
 
95 
Ioo 
II5 
I 2O 
I 25 
O 
2 ? 
25 
35 
45 
55 
?? 
 
616,156 
1 ? 
2 ? 
25 
4 
water drum, and a water-box connected with a baffle-wall parallel with the aforesaid side 3o 
the base of said headers, substantially as 
specified. 
11. In the combination of a boiler and fur 
nace, a pass or combustion-chamber and wa 
ter-boxes closing one side thereof, a water 
box baffle-wall parallel with the aforesaid 
side of said chamber, a second water-box 
baffle-wall parallel with said first baffle-wall, 
said baffle-walls and the end walls forming 
three communicating passes, a roof-baffle lo 
cated above said passes, a bank of tubes in 
each of said passes, headers for the respective 
ends of said tubes, and a steam-and-water 
drum connected with said headers, substan 
tially as specified. 
12. In a boiler and furnace, a pass or com 
bustion-chamber and water-boxes closing one 
side thereof, a water-box baffle-wall parallel 
with the aforesaid side of said chamber, a 
second water-box baffle-wallparallel with said 
first baffle-wall, a bank of tubes located in each 
of said passes, headers for the respective ends 
of Said tubes, a steam-and-Water drum con 
nected with said headers, and a water-box 
connected with the base of the respective 
headers, substantially as specified. 
13. In a boiler and furnace, a combustion 
chamber and a wall closing one side thereof, 
of said chamber, a second baffle-wall parallel 
with said first baffle-wall, combining with an 
end wall to form three communicating passes, 
a bank of tubes located in each of said passes, 
headers for the respective ends of said tubes, 
a steam-and-water drum connected with said 
headers, and a water-box connected with the 
base of the rear headers, substantially as 
specified. 
14. In a boiler and furnace, a combustion 
chamber and a wall closing one side thereof, 
a baffle-wall parallel with the aforesaid side 
of said chamber, a second baffle-wall par 
allel with said first baffle-wall, combining with 
an end wall to form three communicatin 
passes, a bank of tubes located in each of said 
passes, headers for the respective ends of said 
tubes, and communicating steam-and-water 
drums connected with said headers and form 
ing a roof-baffle for said passes, as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in the presence of the subscribing 
Witnesses. 
JNO. A. STEVENS. 
Witnesses: 
PHILIP R. COATS, 
FRANK E. KNOWLES. 
35 
45 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US616256.txt	No. 66,256. 
(No Model.) 
Patented Dec. 20, 1898. 
J. E. PLATT. 
HORSESHOER'S GAGE. 
led June 16, 1897.) 
icati 
n 
S. 
-- 
Ecces 
w 
f 
3. 22 
WITNESSES : 
26/02/6 
| 
W 
INVENTOR 
yws &Ssas 
Wiltsvists 
 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
JAMES E. PLATT, OF GOSHEN, NEW YORK. 
HORSE SHOERS GAGE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 616,256, dated December 20, 1898. 
Application filed June 16, 1897, Serial No. 640,949, . (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
40 
To ali, whon, it inctly conce77. 
Beit known that I, JAMES E. PLATT, a citi 
Zen of the United States, and a resident of 
Goshen, Orange county, State of New York, 
have invented a new and useful Horseshoer's 
Gage, of which the following is a specification. 
This invention relates to means for ena 
bling a horseshoer to properly trim a horse's 
hoofs with facility and accuracy preparatory 
to setting on the shoes. In trimming the hoofs 
it is of great importance that they be evenly 
trimmed, so that the legs with respect to each 
other will be of exactly the proper length and 
pitch; otherwise one leg may be too long or 
too short. If a leg is too long, it will be com 
pelled to sustain more than its share of the 
horse's weight, and if too short it will throw 
too much of the weight upon the other legs. 
Again, it is important that each-hoof should 
be evenly trimmed with respect to all parts 
of its under bearing-surface; otherwise the 
leg may be thrown forward or backward or 
to one side. Because of such inaccuracy in 
trimming the hoofs a horse of great value is 
liable to be permanently injured. 
Myinvention comprises means whereby the 
height, the pitch, and the level of the under 
bearing-surface can be accurately and quickly 
determined and whereby exactly the neces 
sary amount of the hoof required to be 
trimmed off may be determined. 
In the drawings forming part of this speci 
fication and in which like letters of reference 
designate similar parts, Figure 1 is a plan 
view of the device embodying my invention; 
and Fig. 2 is a side elevation, partly in sec 
tion, representing the same. 
Referring now more particularly to the pre 
cise embodiment of the invention as shown in 
the drawings, A is a base formed generally 
of a flat plate of metal or other suitable sub 
stance, to which is pivoted at a. an arm B, ar 
ranged to move in a vertical plane. The 
main purpose of the base A is to form a con 
venient horizontal support for the arm B, 
whereby the arm may be quickly and accu 
rately placed in a vertical plane before the 
horse's hoof. The arm B is graduated, as 
shown, and is provided generally with two 
adjustable spacing-pieces b and c, each hav 
ing a set-screw or equivalent device b' and c', 
whereby they may be fixed when adjusted to 
their proper position. The piece b has pref 
erably a horizontal edge and the piece c has 
preferably a vertical edge. In its best form 
the arm B carries a pointer C, arranged to 
move over a plate D, fixed to the base A at a 
right angle thereto, and graduated in degrees 
of a circle, so as to measure the vertical an 
gle of the arm B. The pointer C in its best 
form stands at a right angle to the arm B and 
carries a set-screw d, working in a circular 
slot d' in the plate D, by means of which the 
arm B may be fixed in any desired position. 
E is a spirit-level fixed to the plate A, 
which enables the horseshoer to quickly and 
accurately determine when the base A is in a 
horizontal plane when using the device. 
The operation of this part of the invention 
is as follows: The gage is set down in front 
of the hoof to be examined-the left front 
hoof, for example--with the base A in a hori 
Zontal level and the arm B therefore in a ver 
tical plane. The arm B is then moved on its 
pivot a till the pieces b and c rest against the 
front medial line of the hoof. The pieces b 
and c are then adjusted, the piece b being 
fixed so that its edge rests against the top of 
the hoof and the piece c being fixed so that 
its edge rests against the hoof lower down. 
These pieces b and c enable the arm B to be 
accurately placed in a plane parallel to the 
medial front line of the hoof. In the case of 
most horses the side walls of their hoofs are 
not smooth, but have protuberances and in 
dentations, and a straight-edge laid vertically 
along the front surface of the hoof would not 
be parallel to the medial front line of the 
hoof. The inclination of the straight-edge 
to this medial front line would, moreover, 
differ not only between the hoofs of different 
horses, but between the hoofs of the same 
horse. In my invention in order that the 
graduated arm B may be supported against 
the front of the hoof in a line parallel with 
the medial front line of the hoof I employ the 
adjustable spacing-pieces b and c, which are 
adapted to be placed against the hoof at 
points which are in the medial front line of 
the hoof. In this way the vertical height 
and especially the angle of inclination of the 
hoof may be accurately determined. The 
vertical height or length of the hoof may be 
now easily read on the graduated arm B, and 
55 
75 
95 
O 
45 
 
2 
616,256 
the angle formed by this line with the under 
bearing-surface of the hoof may be read on 
the graduations of the plate D, which meas 
ure this angle. The proper height and angle 
of the left front hoof having been thus de 
termined, the right front hoof is next made 
to conform with the same measurements, and 
both hoofs are in this way made identical 
with respect to height and angle or pitch. In 
the same way the two hind hoofs are made 
identical. 
In order to make the under bearing-sur 
faces of the hoofs level and accurately meas 
ure the height and pitch of the hoofs, as al 
ready explained, I generally employ a light, 
movable, and durable platform on which the 
two front feet at one time and the two hind 
feet at another time are placed during their 
examination by the gage. This platform 
consists of two separable pieces F and G. 
These pieces may be made of wood or other 
material, each comprising a top and two cleats 
Ol' Strips fastened by screws or other means to 
the under side of the tops at the edges. The 
cleatsf extend beyond the top, to which they 
are fastened about the breadth of the piece G., 
so as to form a base for both pieces F and G. 
The cleats g are fastened to the top of the 
piece G a short distance within the edge of 
the top and extend a short distance-say 
three or four inches-beyond one end of the 
top. By means of this construction when 
the piece F is laid on the ground, resting on 
the cleats f, the piece G may be placed with 
its top resting on the cleats f and the cleats 
() abutting against the inner sides of the cleats 
fand extending underneath the top of piece F, 
so that the two pieces form a solid level plat 
form upon which the horse's feet may be fixed. 
The platform is used in the following man 
ner: When the horse has been made to stand 
squarely on all four feet, one foot-as, say, 
the front left foot-is lifted and the piece F 
is slipped in place, so that when the foot is 
let down it will rest on the piece F, the cleats 
f of which are at this time extending one on 
each side of the right front foot. The right 
front foot is now raised and the piece G is 
laid upon the cleats.f, as above described, 
and the foot let down upon the piece G. It 
will be seen that both front feet are now on 
a level platform, where the hoofs can be accu 
rately inspected. The platform is used in 
the same way in examining the hind feet. 
If desired, of course two platforms may be 
used at the same time, one for the front feet 
and one for the hind feet. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
I claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 
Patent, is 
1. In apparatus of the class described, the 
combination with a low platform adapted to 
receive at once both fore feet or both hind 
feet of a horse and made freely separable along 
a line between the places of the two feet in po 
sition thereon, of means for holding the two 
parts in the same plane when pressed by the 
feet, and a gage adapted to rest upon said 
platform and to measure both the angle made 
with the platform and the slant height of the 
hoof alongside which it may itself be placed. 
2. In apparatus of the class described, the 
combination with a low platform adapted to 
receive at once both fore or hind feet of a 
horse and made freely separable along a line 
between the places of the feet thereon, of a 
base adapted to be placed upon any side of 
either hoof upon the platform, a graduated 
arm pivotally supported fron said base to 
swing in a vertical plane into position paral 
lel to the adjacent side of the hoof, and means 
for indicating the inclination of the arm when 
in such position. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
JAMES E. PLATT. L. s. 
Witnesses: 
CHAS. J. EORDLEY, 
THEODORE SMITH. 
5 
25 
35 
45 
55 
75 
85 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US616356.txt	No. 616,356. 
(No Mode.) 
B. REYES. 
PSTOL SWORD. 
(Application filed May 27, isgs. 
Patented Dec. 20, 1898. 
 
S 
N S 
o T. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
BERNARDO REYES, OF MONTEREY, MEXICO. 
PSTOL SWORD. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 616,356, dated December 20, 1898. 
Application filed May 27, 1898, Serial No. 681,905, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
45 
To all tuflon, it inval/ conce71. 
Beit known that I, BERNARDOREYES, a citi 
zen of the Republic of Mexico, residing at 
Monterey,in the State of Nuevo Leon, Mexico, 
have invented certain new and useful Im 
provementsin Pistol-Swords; and Idohereby 
declare the following to be a full, clear, and 
exact description of the invention, such as 
will enable others skilled in the art to which 
it appertains to make and use the same. 
My invention relates to improvements in 
pistol-swords, and has for its objects to pro 
vide an effective and convenient weapon, con 
sisting of a combined sword, revolver, and 
sword-hilt, in which the guard of the hilt shall 
be readily and conveniently attachable to and 
detachable from the revolver, and shall serve 
as a guard for the revolver-cylinder and for 
the trigger. 
To these ends my invention consists of the 
parts and combination of parts fully herein 
after described, and pointed out in the claims. 
My invention is illustrated in the accom 
panying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a side view in elevation; Fig. 2 
a detail of means for securing front end of 
hilt-guard to revolver, and Fig. 3 a detail of 
means for securing rear end of hilt-guard to 
revolver. 
Like letters of reference indicate the same 
parts throughout the several views. 
Referring to the drawings, A designates a 
Sword-blade, which may be straight, sword 
like, or slightly curved, like a saber, or of any 
desired form and dimensions, as long as it is 
capable of being secured to the revolver in 
such a way as not to interfere with the dis 
charge of the load. 
B is a pistol or revolver of any desired con 
struction, but provided with a projection b of 
the barrel, to which the sword-blade is se 
cured by bolts.screws, or other suitable means. 
The hilt of the sword forms the grip of the 
pistol, and consists of the part C, so made as 
to be readily grasped for using the weapon 
either as a firearm or as a sword. In the lower 
part of the hilt or central part of the pistol is 
the usual actuating and discharging mechan 
ism of a revolver, comprising a cylinder with 
its chambers, a trigger, and controlling-spring. 
It is an essential feature of the construction 
of the hilt that it shall contain this mechan 
ism of the revolver. 
The butt c of the pistol, constituting the up 
per end of the sword-hilt, is preferably made 
separate and secured to the main part and is 
provided with a threaded socket c'. Into this 
socket is adapted to be Screwed, so as to be 
removably held therein, the threaded end d 
of a guard or bow D. This bow may be of any 
desired form, and it extends beyond and in 
closes both the trigger and the cylinder of the 
revolver, thus serving as a guard or shield for 
these parts to protect them from injury by 
blows or other causes. The lower or front 
end of the guard is provided with an aperture 
through which passes a screw-bolt E, engag 
ing a lug F, depending from the pistol. By 
this construction the guard D may be readily 
detached from the hilt should it be found con 
venient or necessary to dispense with it or re 
place it. 
From the above description of my construc 
tion it will be seen that I have provided a new 
and improved pistol-sword in which the com 
bination of the blade, hilt, and revolver in 
the manner and by the means described pro 
duces a conveniently-handled and efficient 
Weapon having a removable guard, serving 
the double purpose of shielding the hilt and 
protecting the trigger and the revolver-cyl 
inder. 
Having thus described my invention, what 
1. In combination with a pistol and its op 
erating mechanism, a sword-blade secured to 
the barrel of said pistol, a hilt for said sword 
blade forming the pistol-grip, said operating 
mechanism within said hilt and a removable 
guard attached to said hilt, substantially as 
described. 
2. In combination with a pistol and its op 
erating mechanism, a sword-blade secured to 
said pistol, a hilt for said sword-blade form 
ing the grip of the pistol, said operating mech 
anism within said hit, a guard removably at 
tached at its upper end to the upper end of 
said hilt and extending beyond and inclosing 
said operating mechanism, and a bolt remov 
ably securing the lower end of said guard to 
said hilt, substantially as described. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in the presence of two witnesses. 
I claim is 
B. REYES, 
Witnesses: 
J. B. DICKINSON, 
CHAS. K. SAMS. 
55 
75 
95 
ICO 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US616456.txt	No. 66,456. 
Patented Dec. 27, 1898. 
C. EDGERTON & L. H. ROBERTS. 
PNEUMATIC GOVERNOR FOR WIND MOTORs, PUMPs, &c. 
(Application filed Aug. 2, 1898.) 
 
(No Model.) 
c 22z Z. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
CHARLES EDGERTON AND LINDLEY H. ROBERTS, OF PATON, IOW.A. 
PNEUMATIC GOVERNOR FOR WIND-MOTORS, PUMPS, &c, 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 616,456, dated December 27, 1898. 
Application filed August 2, 1898, Serial No. 687,573, (No model.) 
O 
25 
35 
To tit, it'? von, it inctly CO7 ceil: 
Be it known that we, CHARLES EDGERTON 
and LINDLEY H. ROBERTS, citizens of the 
United States, residing at Paton, in the county 
of Greene and State of Iowa, have invented 
a new and useful Pneumatic Governor for 
Wind-Motors, Pumps, &c., of which the fol 
lowing is a specification. 
The object of our invention is to provide a 
pneumatic governor for wind-wheels or the 
like which is of simple, strong, durable, and 
inexpensive construction and which may be 
set in motion by the raising and lowering of 
a comparatively small float and applies a 
greatly-increased power to the rod that throws 
the wind-wheel in or out of gear. 
Our invention consists in certain details of 
construction, arrangement, and combination 
of parts, as hereinafter more fully set forth, 
pointed out in our claims, and illustrated in 
the accompanying drawings, in which 
Figure 1 shows a side elevation of a pump, 
a part of a trough, the governor applied to 
and connected there with, and a portion of the 
windmill-frame and rod that controls the 
throwing of the wind-wheel in and out of gear. 
Fig. 2 shows a vertical sectional view of the 
governor proper. 
Referring to the accompanying drawings, 
the reference-numeral 10 is used to indicate 
a metal pump, 11 the pump-rod, and 12 the 
windmill-rod attached thereto. 13 indicates 
that portion of the windmill-frame shown, and 
14 the rod which controls the throwing of the 
wind-wheel in and out of gear. 15 indicates a 
Water-tank, and 16 a float therein, pivoted to a 
bell-crank lever 17, which is fulcrumed to the 
tank. All of the above-described parts are 
of the construction ordinarily used. Hence a 
detailed description of the construction and 
function thereof is deemed superfluous. 
The governor proper is composed of an up 
right cylinder 15, fixed to the platform adja 
cent to the pump and having a longitudinal 
slot 19 in one side. 20 indicates a piston 
within this cylinder designed to move verti 
cally above the slot and having a rod 21 con 
nected there with and extended first down 
wardly and then outwardly through the slot, 
forming the arm 22. Near the upper end of 
this cylinder is a small tube 23, extending 
horizontally outward and providing a com 
munication from the cylinder to the outside 
atmosphere. A valve 24 is provided to en 
gage the outer end of this tube and is mounted 
on a lever 25, fulcrumed to the support 26. 
A contractile coil-spring 27 is attached to the 
opposite end of the lever and to the cylinder 
18 to normally hold the valve open. A rod 
28 connects the lever 25 with the bell-crank 
lever 17. 
At the top of the cylinder 18 a smaller cyl 
inder 29 is mounted, and an opening 30 pro 
vides communication between the cylinders. 
31 indicates a valve within the cylinder 29, 
fixed to the rod 32, and thus forming an air 
pump. The rod 32 is in turn fixed to the 
bracket 33, which bracket is fixed to the wind 
mill-rod 12. Hence when the wind-wheel is 
Working, the air-pump continuously forces 
air into the large cylinder 18. 
Fixed to the end of the arm 22 is a rod 34, 
and 35 indicates a lever fulcrumed to the 
windmill-frame and having the rod 34 fixed 
to its outer end and the regulator-rod 14 at 
tached to its central portion. By this means 
the power applied to the rod 34 is increased 
as applied to the rod 14. 
In practical operation it is obvious that 
the air-pump will be operated simultaneously 
with the pump proper and that air will be con 
tinuously forced into the large cylinder 18 
and through the tube 23. When the water 
in the tank has reached a certain predeter 
mined height, the valve 24 is closed. When 
this occurs, the escape of air from the cylin 
der is obviously stopped, and inasmuch as 
the pumping of air continues the piston 20 is 
forced downward. It is obvious that each 
time the air-pump is operated the pressure is 
increased until the piston in the large cylin 
der is forced down. If for any reason it re 
quired an unusually great amount of power 
to throw the windmill out of gear, it is ob 
vious that the air-pump would continue to op 
erate and increase the power until the piston 
moved downwardly. It is obvious, further, 
that when the water in the tank is lowered 
the valve 24 will be moved from the tube 23, 
and thus permit the escape of the compressed 
70 
75 
95 
Iod 
e 
air in the cylinder 18. The pressure upon 
the piston being removed, it is forced up 
wardly by means of the usual weight on the 
lever that controls the windmill-regulator, 
and the wheel is thrown into gear. 
Having thus described our invention, what 
we claim, and desire to secure by Letters Pat 
ent of the United States therefor, is 
1. A pneumatic governor for windmills 
comprising a cylinder having an opening near 
its top, a valve for said opening a piston in 
the cylinder, an arm connected with the pis 
ton and projected beyond the cylinder, a rod 
connected there with and designed for attach 
ment to the device for throwing the windmill 
in and out of gear, an air-pump connected 
with the cylinder, means for operating the 
air-pump from the windmill-rod, a valve, de 
signed to close said opening a spring for nor 
mally opening said valve, a float and means 
for closing the valve upon the raising of the 
O 
616,456 
- 
stated. 
float, substantially as and for the purposes 
2. A pneumatic governor for windmills 
comprising a cylinder having an opening near 
its top, a valve for said opening a piston in 
the cylinder, an air-pump operated by the 
windmill to deliver air to the cylinder an arm 
connected with the piston and projected bes 
yond the cylinder, a rod connected therewith, 
a lever fulcrumed to the windmill-frame and 
having said rod fixed to its outer end, a wind 
mill gear-rod attached to the central portion 
of the lever, a float and means for closing the 
valve upon raising of the float, substantially 
as and for the purposes stated. 
CHARLES EDGERTON. 
LINDLEY H. ROBERTS. 
25. 
30 
35 
Witnesses: 
C. P. WALKER, 
A. B. ROBERTS. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US616556.txt	No. 616,556. 
S. R. PATTEN. 
Patented Dec. 27, 1898. 
MA. BAG CATCHER AND CRANE. 
Application filed Oct. 13, 1898., 
R 
s 
ad 
o 
N. 
( 
NY 
X/X y 2. 
au 
'. 
 
2 
, WA W 
 
N-Wy 
WS 
W 
\ 
A. 
A VA 
s & 
\\ 
& A. A 
\ 
W A 
y 
R 
No. 616,556. 
( No Model.) 
S. R. PATTEN. 
Patented Dec. 27, 1898. 
MAL BAG CATCHER AND CRANE. 
Application filed Oct. 13, 1898.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
zzzzzzesses." 
662 
 
He Norris PeTERS co, Photo-Litho. was,ington, D.c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
SIMON R. PATTEN, OF OMAHA, NEBRASKA. 
VA - BAG CATCHER AND CRAN E. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 616,556, dated December 27, 1898. 
Application filed October 13, 1898, Serial No, 693,391 (No model.) 
O 
3O 
35 
To (tal tuition it inctif concern: 
Beit known that, SIMON. R. PATTEN, a citi 
Zen of the United States, residing at Omaha, 
in the county of Douglas and State of Ne 
braska, have invented new and useful Im 
provements in Mail-Bag Catchers and Cranes, 
of which the following is a specification. 
My invention relates to mail-bag catchers 
and cranes for use in conjunction with rail 
Way mail-cars, and contemplates the employ 
ment of a Scoop on a car and a receptacle lo 
cated at one side of the car-track, in combi 
nation with a crane also located at the side 
of the car-track, the scoop being adapted to 
take bags from the crane while the car is in 
motion and guide them through an opening 
into the car, and the receptacle being held 
open by the crane and arranged to receive 
bags from an appurtenance of the Scoop and 
adapted to automatically close after the bags 
are received, and thereby protect the same 
from the Weather. 
With the foregoing in mind the invention 
will be fully understood from the following 
description and claims when takenin conjunc 
tion. With the annexed drawings, in which 
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a portion 
of a railway mail-car equipped with my im 
proved Scoop, said car being shown on the 
track in close proximity to the crane and bag 
receptacle located at the side thereof. Fig. 
2 is a detail elevation, partly in section, illus 
trating the crane and the bag-receptacle, the 
crane being shown in its operative position 
and the receptacle with its cover open. Fig. 
3 is a detail section of the car, illustrating 
the Scoop in elevation from the inside of the 
car. Fig. 4 is an enlarged detail section taken 
in the plane indicated by the line 4 4 of Fig. 
3, and Fig. 5 is a detail horizontal section 
illustrating the mail-bag receptacle in its 
proper relation to the scoop. 
In the said drawings similar letters desig 
late corresponding parts in all of the several 
views, referring to which 
A is a car-track, and B is a crane-upright 
located at One side of the same and equipped 
With a lever-arm CL and a pivotally-connected 
arm b, as shown. The lever C, is provided 
adjacent to its outer end with a weight c, cal 
culated to raise its inner end out of the way 
of passing trains when the bag is discharged, 
and it has a bent portion d at its end adja 
cent to the track, on which is pivotally 
mounted a block e, carrying a clipf. The 
arm l is also provided with a bent end por 
tion g, on which is pivotally mounted a block 
h, carrying a clip i. Said blocks e I are by 
reason of the bent portions of the arms held 
at an angle of about forty-five degrees when 
the arms are in a horizontal or approximately 
horizontal position, and being pivotally con 
nected adjacent to their upper ends to the 
arms the clip f at the lower end of blocke 
and the clip at the upper end of block h. 
will by virtue of gravity normally rest in a 
position to engage the Straps usually pro 
vided at the ends of mail-bags. When de 
sired, rings especially adapted for the pur 
pose may be attached to the mail-bags for 
the engagement of the clips in the manner 
described. 
As best shown in Fig. 2, the clips comprise 
rigid members i, fixed to the block, and re 
silient members or strap-springs k, connected 
to the blocks and impinging against and ex 
tending beyond the ends of the rigid mem 
bers, as illustrated. From this it follows that 
by pressing against the extended portions 
of the resilient members k, the clips may be 
readily opened for the placing of the straps 
or rings of a bag therein; also, that the clasps 
will permit the mail-bags to be taken on a 
train going in either direction. 
The weight c on lever-arm C. serves to raise 
the inner end thereof, while the weight of 
lower arm b and of the coverD serves to press 
the arm b downwardly. In this way the end 
straps of the bag are kept at the mouths of 
the clips and the bag is held under slight ten 
sion, so as to insure its disconnection from 
the crane when engaged by the scoop, pres 
ently described, and at the same time dis 
lodgment of the bag by wind is prevented. 
C is the mail-bag receptacle, located in the 
road-bed at the side of track A and in close 
proximity to the upright B, and D is the cover 
of said receptacle, which is connected to the 
same at one end and in a hinged manner. At 
its opposite end the cover D is provided with 
an arm E, which is designed to be placed in . 
a seat in of the pivoted arm b and be held in 
SO 
 
55 
65 
75 
9 O 
95 
ICG 
2 
616,556 
O 
3o 
35 
45 
55 
its raised position by the same after the man 
ner shown in Fig. 2. This receptacle and 
cover may be made of any size or shape nec 
essary to adapt them to the locality where a 
crane is placed. 
- 
F is the scoop, which has for its purpose to 
take the bag from the crane when the car is 
in motion and guide the same through the door 
or other opening in of the car into the same, 
and F is a receptacle provided inside the car 
at the rear of the scoop to receive the bags 
therefrom. The scoop may be formed of sheet 
iron or other material and may be of any form 
suitable to the purposes of my invention, al 
though I prefer to make it of metallic bars in 
the form shown and have it comprise an up 
right shaft p, journaled in bearings at the in 
side of the car-wall and at the rear side of the 
opening in with reference to the direction in 
which the car is to travel, the semicircular 
Outer end bar q, terminating in straight ends 
r, and the longitudinal bars S, interposed be 
tween and connected to the shaft p and end 
bar q, as shown. When it is not desired to 
use the scoop F, it is swung entirely within 
the car, so as not to strike bridges and other 
obstructions at the side of the track. When, 
however, the car approaches a crane holding 
a mail-bag, the scoop is swung out until the 
ends r of the bar q engage the inner side of 
the side Wall of the car, and is secured in such 
position by a pivoted latcht, which is designed 
to bear on a ledge at on the car and engage 
the upper end r of the scoop-bar q after the 
manner best shown in Fig. 4. When desir 
able, however, the latch may be dispensed 
with, in which event the scoop will be pro 
vided with a suitable handle, through the me 
dium of which an operator may hold the scoop 
in proper position while passing the crane. 
In its extended position (shown in Fig. 1) the 
Scoop is adapted as the car passes the crane 
to take the bag from the crane and guide it 
into the car and receptacle F therein through 
the opening thereof, and this irrespective of 
whether the car is traveling at a high or low 
rate of speed. 
G is an arm of the scoop which branches 
laterally outward from the bar g and termi 
nates at its outer end in a rearwardly-extend 
ing hook ) or other device suitable for hold 
ing the mail-bag securely. 
When it is desired to deliver a bag from the 
moving car into the receptacle C, the bag is 
hung on the hook or other device of arm G. 
while the scoop is in the car, and said scoop 
is then swung out into its operative position. 
With this done when the car reaches the 
crane the scoop will take the bag therefrom 
and guide it into the receptacle F in the car, 
and at the Salme time the arm b of the crane 
will sweep the bag off the hook of the arm 
G. and said bag will fall into the receptacle 
C. When the bag is taken from the crane, 
the arm b will fall, and the cover D, falling 
With it, will close the receptacle, and thereby 
protect the bag from the weather. At the 
same time both arms of the crane and the re 
ceptacle-cover will assume positions where 
they will be out of the way of the following 
CalS. The receptacle F is preferably fixed in the 
car, and in order to prevent injury to the 
bags when they violently enter it the said re 
ceptacle is provided at its inner end with a 
cushion F, calculated to take up the shock 
and jar and prevent the bags and also the re 
ceptacle from being damaged. In the pre 
ferred embodiment of the invention the cush 
ion Fis in the form of a rotary cylinder and 
comprises a shaft F, journaled in suitable 
bearings, bars F, and springs F, interposed 
between the bars and shaft. This form of 
cushion is preferable because it is adapted to 
turn when struck by the bags, and thereby 
further reduces the liability of the bags being 
injured. 
I have shown the car as equipped with a 
scoop F and receptacle Fon but one side. It 
is obvious, however, that the scoop and recep 
tacle may, when desired, be duplicated on the 
other side of the car, so as to permit of mail 
being taken from the crane into the car or dis 
charged from the car into the receptacle C 
irrespective of the direction in which the car 
is traveling. It is also obvious that when 
deemed necessary or desirable the stationary 
receptacle C may be provided with a cushion 
similar to the cushion F of the receptacle F. 
It will be appreciated from the foregoing 
that my improved apparatus while simple is 
reliable in operation and is calculated to take 
bags from a crane into a moving car and is 
adapted to deliver bags from the car into the 
receptacle and effect the closure of the recep 
tacle irrespective of the rate of speed at which 
the car is traveling. 
I have specifically described the construc 
tion and relative arrangement of the parts of 
my improved apparatus in order to impart a 
full, clear, and exact understanding of the 
same. I do not desire, however, to be un 
derstood as confining myself to such specific 
construction and arrangement of parts, as 
such changes or modifications may be made 
in practice as fairly fall within the scope of 
my invention. 
Having described my invention, what I 
claim, and desire to secure by Letters Patent, 
1S 
1. A mail-car having an opening, a Scoop 
arranged to be extended through said open 
ing and provided with an outwardly-extended 
bag-holding arm, a bag-receptacle arranged 
in the car, and a cushion in said receptacle; 
in combination with a stationary crane hav 
ing an upper bag-holding arm, and a lower 
gravitating bag-holding arm arranged in a 
plane to remove a bag from the arm of the 
scoop, a bag-receptacle arranged in proximity 
to the crane, and a gravitating cover for said 
receptacle arranged to be held in its open po 
sition by the lower arm of the crane, substan 
tially as specified. 
75 
9o 
95 
OO 
O 
II5 
I25 
 
616,556 
3 
O 
2C) 
2. A mail-car having an opening and a 
scoop arranged to extend through said open 
ing and provided with an out Wardly-extended 
bag-holding arm; in combination with a sta 
tionary crane having an upper bag-holding 
arm, and a lower gravitating bag-holding arm 
arranged in a plane to remove a bag from the 
arm of the Scoop, a bag-receptacle arranged 
in proximity to the crane, and a gravitating 
cover for said receptacle arranged to be held 
in its open position by the lower arm of the 
crane, substantially as specified. 
3. A mail - car having an opening and a 
Scoop arranged to extend through said open 
ing and provided with a bag-holding arm; in 
combination with a stationary crane having 
an upper arm provided with a bag-engaging 
spring-clip, and a lower gravitating arm pro 
vided with a bag-engaging spring-clip and 
arranged in a plane to remove a bag from the 
arm of the scoop, a bag-receptacle arranged 
in proximity to the crane, and a gravitating 
cover for said receptacle having an arm de 
signed to rest in a seat in the lower bag-hold 
ing arm of the crane, substantially as speci 
fied. 
4. The combination of a stationary crane 
having an upper arm and a lower gravitating 
arm and also having means on the arms for 
engaging and holding a mail-bag between 
them, a receptacle for mail-bags arranged in 
close proximity to the crane and having a 
gravitating cover arranged to be supported 
in its raised position by the lower arm of the 
crane, a car, a device on the car for taking 
bags from the crane, and a bag-holder on the 
car so arranged with respect to the lower arm 
35 
 
40 
45 
50 
55 
of the crane as to enable said arm to remove 
bags therefrom, substantially as specified. 
5. A crane comprising an upright, lower 
and upper arms connected to and extending 
laterally from the upright, a block with a 
bag-engaging clip at its lower end pivotally 
mounted adjacent to its upper end on the up 
per arm whereby it is free to swing on the 
arm and will normally rest with the clip de 
pending, and a block With a bag-engaging 
clip at its upper end pivotally mounted ad 
jacent to its upper end on the arm of the clip 
whereby it is free to swing on the arm and 
will normally rest with the clip uppermost, 
substantially as specified. 
6. A crane comprising an upright, lower 
and upper arms connected to and extending 
laterally from the upright and having the 
downwardly and upwardly bent end portions, 
respectively, a block with a bag-engaging clip 
at its lower end pivotally mounted adjacent 
to its upper end on the bent portion of the 
upper arm whereby it is free to swing on the 
arm and Will normally rest with the clip de 
pending, and a block with a clip at its upper 
end pivotally mounted adjacent to its upper 
end on the bent portion of the lower arm. 
whereby it is free to swing on the arm and 
will normally rest with the clip uppermost, 
Substantially as specified. 
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit 
GSSGS, 
SIMION R. PATTEN. 
Witnesses: 
IDA. W. BRINN, 
JAS. W. CARR, 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US616656.txt	UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
EMIL FISCIIER, OF BERLIN, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO C. F. BOEHRINGER & 
SOEHNE, OF WALDHOF, GERMANY. 
PROCESS OF OBTAINING ALKYL-URIC ACID. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 616,656, dated December 27, 1898. 
Application filed July 23, 1897, Serial No. 645,673, (No specimens.) 
To all thon it. Togy concerto: 
Be it known that I, EMIL FISCHER, a citi 
Zen of the Empire of Germany, residing at 
IBerlin, in the Empire of Germany, have in 
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements 
in the Art of Preparing the Alkyl Derivatives 
of Uric Acid; and I do hereby declare the fol 
lowing to be a full, clear, and exact descrip 
tion of the invention, such as will enable oth 
to ers skilled in the art to which it appertains to 
make and use the same. 
The present invention relates to the art of 
preparing the alkyl derivatives or homologues 
of uric acid; and it has special reference to 
I5 the method of preparing those derivatives 
which are set forth in my application for Let 
ters Patent of the United States, filed Octo 
ber 26, 1896, Serial No. 610,126. In that ap 
plication I have described and claimed a 
20 method of obtaining these derivatives which 
consists, essentially, in causing a haloid ether, 
such as methyl iodid, to act on uric acid or 
its alkyl derivatives together with an alkali, 
the preferable method being to employ the 
25 Wet Way-that is to say, to cause the haloid 
ether to act upon an alkaline solution of the 
uric acid or its alkyl derivative or upon uric 
acid or its alkyl derivative together with al 
kali suspended in Water. I have found in the 
3o course of subsequent experiments that the al 
kalization of the uric acid proper or its alkyl 
derivatives (which are all comprised under 
the generic designation ultic acid') may be 
effected not only by means of haloid ethers, or, 
35 in other words, the esters of the hydrohalogen 
acids, but that the esters of other acids may 
be utilized for this purpose. For this pur 
pose I have found the esters of those acids 
which have been found to possess consider 
4o able electrical conductivity (see Ostwald's 
Lehrbuch der Allgemeinen Chenie, 2d vol., 
1,650)-such as nitric acid,ethyl-sulfuric acid, 
isoethionic acid, benzene-sulfonic acid, or sul 
furic acid-to be particularly adapted. 
45. To enable those skilled in the art to fully 
understand and carry into effect my inven 
tion, I will give the following examples, which 
are descriptions of the preparation of methyl 
uric acid by the action of methyl nitrate, 
50 methyl-benzene -sulfonic-acid ester, and of 
 
Example 1: Two thousand one hundred 55 
methylsulfate of potassium on the alkaline so 
lution of uric acid proper, according to the 
methodset forth in the aforesaid application. 
The proportions are all given by Weight. 
parts of water are poured over thirty parts 
of uric acid and the mixture is then dissolved 
by the addition of two hundred parts of ten 
per cent. potash lye and then heated to and 
maintained for three hours at 80 centigrade, 6o 
together with twenty-four parts of methyl 
nitrate in a digester, the whole being stirred 
during the heating operation. The clear so 
lution while yet hot is then mixed with fifty 
parts of concentrated hydrochloric acid. It 65 
is then allowed to cool, and after standing 
for several hours the crystallized methyl-uric 
acid is separated by decanting or otherwise 
removing the mother liquor. By this method 
there are obtained twenty-nine parts of a 7o 
methyl-uric acid, which, however, still con 
tains some of the uric acid proper. On re 
moving the latter by the sparingly-soluble 
acid urate of potassium the purified methyl 
uric acid is obtained. 
Example 2: Fifty parts of uric acid are dis 
solved by means of two hundred and seventy 
parts of ten per cent. potash lye and twelve 
hundred and fifty parts of water, and then 
heated in a digester with seventy-seven parts 8o 
of methyl-benzene-sulfonic-acid ester to 100 
centigrade, and maintained at this tempera 
ture for three hours, the liquid being con 
stantly agitated. Since the mass on cooling 
assumes the consistency of a jelly, it is ad- 85 
vantageous to add to the still heated mass 
enough hydrochloric acid to produce acid re 
action. It is then allowed to cool. By this 
method forty-six parts of a methyl-uric acid 
are obtained, which, however, still contains 9o 
some of the uric acid proper. 
Example 3: Ten parts of uric acid are sus 
pended in sixty parts of hot water and brought 
into solution by the addition of sixty-six parts 
of double-normal potash lye and then heated 95 
in a digester, together with a concentrated 
aqueous solution of thirteen parts of methyl 
sulfate of potassium, to 110 centigrade. The 
liquid is maintained at this temperature for 
six hours and constantly agitated. After cool- Loo 
75 
25 
3. The process which consists in adding to 
the solution of uric acid proper with alkali 
the ester of an acid possessing considerable 
electrical conductivity, such as nitric acid, 
and then heating the solution under pressure 
and while agitating the same. 
4. The process which consists in adding to 
the solution of uric acid proper with alkali 
the ester of an acid possessing considerable 
electrical conductivity, such as nitric acid, 
and then heating the solution under pressure 
and while agitating the same, then adding to 
the hot solution hydrochloric acid and then 
allowing the same to cool. 
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 
in presence of two witnesses. 
EMIL FISCHER. 
30 
35 
Witnesses: 
W. HAUPT, 
HENRY HASPER. 
2 
616,656 
O 
ing and adding alcohol the lunchanged uric 
acid proper is separated out as acid urate of 
potassium. This is removed by filtration. 
From the filtrate the methyl-uric acid is pre 
cipitated in a pure state by hydrochloric acid. 
Instead of employing the uric acid proper 
the alkyl-uric acids may be employed with 
similar results. The term uric acid as en 
ployed in the claims comprises not only uric 
acid proper, but its alkyl derivatives. 
What I claim, and desire to secure by Let 
ters Patent, is 
1. The process which consists in acting upon 
a uric acid together with an alkali with an 
ester of an acid possessing considerable elec 
trical conductivity such as nitric acid. 
2. The process which consists in acting on 
a uric acid and an alkali in solution with the 
ester of an acid possessing considerable elec 
trical conductivity such as nitric acid. 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US616756.txt	No. 616,756. 
(No Mode.) 
W. C. WILLIAMSON, 
Patented Dec. 27, 1898. 
HYDRAULC TRANSMITTER FOR STEERING. 
(Application filed Feb. 17, 1898.) 
2 Sheets-Sheet . 
 
 
COOC s 
s= 
 
--------------------------------- s 
s 
S 
 
is 
Zavezz7. 
Jiti Azaze CZWZarzio 
A zea Arzezar 
2%zzzz z 27%a'z-7 
oRRIS PETERS co, Photo-Litho, wasnaro. 
HYDRAULC TRANSMITTER FOR STEERNG. 
(Application filed Feb. 7, 1898.) 
 
 
 
2 Sheets-Sheet 2. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
III: 
 N 
 
{WN 
S 
%ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 
Zoo 
WZ4ezero-C 726/Zeezerzaze 
477es-Azzaesar 
gtze 
aa2-27. 
The NORRIS PETERS co, PHoro-LTHo, washincron, to c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
WILLIAM. C. WILLIAMSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR 
TO THE WILLIAMSON BROTHERS COMPANY, OF SAME PLACE. 
HYDRAULIC TRANSMITTER FOR STEERING. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 616,756, dated December 27, 1898. 
Application filed February 17, 1898, Serial No. 670,661 (No model.) 
55 
To all, whon, it nually concer'7. 
Be it known that I, WILLIAM C. WILLIAM 
SON, a citizen of the United States, residing 
in Philadelphia,Pennsylvania, have invented 
certain Improvements in Hydraulic Trans 
mitters for Steering, of which the following is 
a specification. 
My invention relates to mechanism for 
transmitting motion through fluid from one 
point to another, and especially relates to hy 
draulic transmitters for steering ships, oper 
atting signals, &c. 
The object of my invention is to provide 
means for keeping the operating-cylinders 
charged with fluid at all times and to center 
the piston of the transmitting-cylinder, and 
also to provide a safety-valve for the appa 
ratus, as fully described hereinafter. 
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is 
a view.. showing a hydraulic steering-gear 
illustrating my invention. Fig. 2 is a view 
looking in the direction of the arrow, Fig. 1. 
Fig. 3 is an enlarged view of the compression 
cylinder. Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the 
transmitting-cylinder. Fig. 5 is a plan view 
of the controlling-cylinder, and Fig. 6 is a sec 
tional view of one of the check-valves. 
A is the ordinary steering-wheel, which is 
mounted on the stand A'. The shaft of this 
wheel is geared to a vertical shaft B, having 
a pinion b, which gears with a wheel b' on a 
shaft or stud, on which is a pinion b, gear 
ing into a rack c on the rod C, attached to 
which is a piston C within the transmitting 
cylinder D. On turning the wheel A in one 
direction or the other the piston will be moved 
toward one or the other end of the cylin 
der D, 
E is a controlling-cylinder connected to the 
transmitting-cylinder through pipes e e', so 
that each end of one cylinder is in communi 
cation with the corresponding end of the other 
cylinder. Within the cylinder E is a piston 
F, attached to a rod F, having a rack?, which 
meshes with a pinion f', and attached to the 
pinion is a gear f', which meshes with a pin 
ion g on a shaft of the controlling-valve mech 
anism of a steering-engine. By this arrange 
ment any movement of the steering-Wheel A 
will be transmitted through the two cylinders 
to the controlling-valve mechanism. 
H is a compression-cylinder in which is a 
piston I, having a hollow rod i extending up 
through the head of the cylinder and attached 
to a cross-head I'. Extending from the cross 
head through bearingShih. On the cylinder are 
two rods ', carrying springs I, which exert 
a pressure upon the fluid in the cylinder un 
der the piston. The tension of these springs 
can be regulated by nuts on the ends of the 
rods, The lower portion of the cylinder His 
connected to both ends of the cylinder ID by 
a pipe J and its two branches J J. In the 
passages are check-valves KK' of a construc 
tion clearly shown in Fig. 6. The pipe J is 
extended to a tank L above the cylinder H 
and connects also with the upper portion of 
the cylinder for the purpose of keeping the 
piston covered with fluid. A valve i in the 
pipe cuts off the flow of fluid from the tank 
and upper portion of the cylinder H from the 
lower portion of the cylinder. 
Stop-cocksfi are for the purpose of cut 
ting off the pipe and the tank, respectively, 
when it is necessary to repair or remove the 
cylinder H or its valve. 
The hollow piston-rod has at its upper end 
a cock i' to allow for the escape of air from 
the system when being charged with fluid, 
this being the highest point in the system. 
It will be seen that when pressure is ap 
plied to the piston I by means of the springs 
as soon as any fluid escapes from the system 
the piston I will force the check-valves k k. 
in the casings K K open, so that the liquid 
will flow into the cylinder from the pipe J 
and replace that which escaped, thus keeping 
at all times both the transmitting and con 
trolling cylinders filled with fluid. 
It will be understood that if a vacancy oc 
cursin one end only of the cylinder the check 
valve of that end only will be opened. 
The check-valves can be opened by the 
helmsman through the medium of the levers 
MM, which are pivoted at m, one arm of each 
lever being attached to a short plunger in', 
which extends through the stuffing-box of the 
valve-casing K and acts upon the check-valve 
stem. The opposite end of each lever is at 
tached to an operating cord or rod which ex 
tends, in the present instance, to a bell-crank 
lever n, connected to a push-rod n in close 
75 
85 
95 
IOO 
O 
25 
35 
45 
So 
 
2 
616,756 
proximity to the steering-wheel A, so that 
the helmsman can place his foot on the push 
rod and so operate the lever as to force the 
check-valves lic open against the pressure of 
their springs k', so that both ends of the trans 
mitting-cylinder D will communicate. He 
can then so operate the wheel as to center 
the piston C in the cylinder, after which by 
removing his footfrom the push-rod the valves 
will automatically close. 
In order to charge the system with fluid in 
the first place, I connect both ends of the cyl 
inder E with a pipe N, having stop-valves in 
1 at each end and connected to a supply-pipe 
N', and in this pipe is a stop-valve n, so that 
by coupling a pump to this pipe N and open 
ing the valves fluid can be forced into the cyl 
inders and pipes of the system. 
It will be noticed in referring to Fig. 6 that 
the check-valve k that I prefer to use is so 
constructed that it will act very quickly and 
without unnecessary friction. The valve k 
is adapted to its seat and has a long stem k 
extending up into the upper chamber, and be 
tween a flange on this stem and the casing is 
mounted a spring k', so as to insure the quick 
closing of the check-valve. It is closed by 
the pressure of the fluid in the cylinder D. 
A rod an extends through the cap of the valve 
casing and is connected to the operating-le 
ver, as described. This rod has a head on the 
under side, so as to prevent its being drawn 
out of the casing. A stop klimits the down 
ward movement of the valve. 
The cylinder H and its piston I also act as 
a safety-valve for preventing any increased 
pressure that may be created by increase of 
temperature. If, for instance, the liquid 
should expand, the piston I will simply move 
up against the pressure of its springs, and if 
the fluid contracts the springs will force the 
piston down, so that it not only acts to keep 
the system charged with fluid, but also acts 
as a safety-valve. A weight or weights may 
be used in some instances in place of the 
springs I'; but I prefer the springs. 
In some instances I may connect both ends 
of the compression-cylinder H by means of a 
by-pass S, having a relief-valves, which is set 
to a given pressure, so that in the event of 
the Springs of the compression-cylinder being 
adjusted carelessly to a greater pressure than 
required fluid under pressure in the lower 
portion of the cylinder H will open the pres 
sure-valves, causing the fluid to flow to the 
upper portion of the cylinder, thus relieving 
the pressure. This will be readily noticed 
by the person adjusting the nuts on the rods 
'', who can then readjust them. 
In some instances I may dispense with the 
cylinder Hand its piston and use simply the 
water column in the pipe, so that when the 
valves of the transmitting-cylinder are opened 
the water will flow into that end of the cyl 
inder in which there is a vacancy. 
I claim as my invention 
1. The combination in a fluid transmitter, 
O 
25 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
75 
of a transmitting-cylinder, a piston therein, 
means for operating the piston, a controlling 
cylinder, a piston therein connected to the 
mechanism to be operated, pipes leading from 
the ends of the transmitting-cylinder to the 
ends of the controlling-cylinder, a pipe ex 
tending from each end of the transmitting 
cylinder, means for creating a pressure in 
said pipes, a check-valve in each pipe clos 
ing against pressure from the cylinder, and 
means for positively opening said check 
valves, substantially as described. 
2. The combination in a fluid transmitter, 
of the transmitting-cylinder, a piston there 
in, means for operating the piston, a control 
ling-cylinder, a piston therein connected to 
the mechanism to be operated, pipes leading 
from the ends of the transmitting-cylinder to 
the ends of the controlling-cylinder, a pas 
sage communicating with both ends of the 
transmitting-cylinder, two check-valves in 
the passage closing against pressure from the 
cylinder, a liquid-supply pipe communicat 
ing with said passage between the two valves 
and means for simultaneously opening the 
two valves so that both ends of the cylinder 
will communicate with the fluid-supply, sub 
stantially as described. 
3. The combination in a fluid transmitter, 
of a transmitting-cylinder, a piston therein, 
means for operating the piston, a controlling 
cylinder, a piston therein connected to the 
mechanism to be operated, pipes leading from 
the ends of the transmitting-cylinder to the 
ends of the controlling-cylinder, a compres 
sion-cylinder connected to the system and a 
weighted piston within the cylinder, substan 
tially as described. 
4. The combination of a transmitting-cyl 
inder, a piston therein, means for operating 
said piston, a controlling-cylinder, a piston 
therein connected to the mechanism to be Op 
erated, tubes coupling the two cylinders to 
gether, a pipe connected to the two ends of 
the transmitting-cylinder, check-valves in 
said pipes, a compression-cylinder connected 
to the pipe, a piston having a hollow rod, a 
stop-cock in the said rod and means for ex 
erting a pressure upon the piston, substan 
tially as described. 
5. The combination of a transmitting-cyl 
inder, its piston, means for operating the said 
piston, a controlling-cylinder, a piston there 
in connected to the mechanism to be oper 
ated, pipes leading from the ends of the trans 
mitting-cylinder to the ends of the control 
ling-cylinder, a pipe connected to each end 
of the transmitting-cylinder, check-valves in 
said pipe, a compression-cylinder connected 
to the pipe, a piston mounted in the compres 
sion-cylinder, with means for exerting pres 
sure on the piston and means for opening 
both check-valves simultaneously so that the 
piston of the transmitting - cylinder can be 
centered, substantially as described. 
6. The combination of a transmitting-cyl 
inder, its piston, means for operating the pis 
95 
IC 
O 
2 
2 
816,756 
3 
45 
So 
55 
valves so that communication can be estab 
lished between the two ends of the cylinder 
to the center the piston therein to agree with 
the piston of the controlling-cylinder, sub 
stantially as described. 
9. The combination of a hydraulic trans 
mitter, the two connected cylinders, a com 
pression-cylinder connected to the system, a 
piston in the cylinder under pressure, means 
for adjusting the said piston, with a by-pass 
connected to both ends of the cylinder, and 
a relief-valve in said by-pass, substantially 
as described. 
10. The combination in a fluid transmitter, 
of a transmitting-cylinder, a piston therein, 
means for operating the piston, a controlling 
cylinder, a piston therein, connected to the 
mechanism to be operated, pipes leading from 
the ends of the transmitting-cylinder to the 
ends of the controlling-cylinder, a by-pass 
communicating with both ends of the trans 
mitting-cylinder, a spring check-valve at each 
end of the by-pass closing against pressure 
from the cylinder, a Supply-pipe communi 
cating With the by-pass between the two 
Valves, a rod mounted above the stem of each 
check-valve, a lever connected to each rod, 
means for Operating the levers in unison so 
as to force the rods down into the stem of 
each check-valve and open the valve against 
the pressure of the springs, substantially as 
described. 
In testimony whereof I have signed my 
name to this specification in the presence of 
two subscribing witnesses. 
WILLIAM. C. WILLIAMSON. 
Witnesses: 
WILL. A. BARR, 
JOS. H. KLEIN. 
ton, a controlling-cylinder, a piston therein 
connected to the mechanism to be operated, 
pipes leading from the ends of the transmit 
ting-cylinder to the ends of the controlling 
cylinder, a compression-cylinder connected 
to each end of the transmitting-cylinder, a 
hollow piston within the cylinder, and means 
for exerting a pressure thereon, a charging 
pipe connected to both ends of the control 
ling-cylinder and valves in the charging-pipe, 
substantially as described. 
7. The combination of a transmitting-cyl 
inder, its piston, means for operating the pis 
ton, a controlling-cylinder, a piston therein 
connected to the mechanism to be operated, 
pipes leading from the ends of the transmit 
ting-cylinder to the ends of the controlling 
cylinder, a compression-cylinder, a pipe lead 
ing from the compression - cylinder to each 
end of the transmitting-cylinder and coupled 
to both ends of the compression-cylinder and 
to a tank, a piston. Within the cylinder, a hol 
low rod for the piston having a stop-cock at 
its upper end, a Spring for exerting a pres 
Sure upon the piston and a stop-cock in the 
connection between the lower portion of the 
cylinder and the tank, substantially as de 
scribed. 
S. The combination in a fluid transmitter, 
of the transmitting-cylinder, a piston therein, 
means for operating said piston, a controlling 
cylinder, a piston therein connected to the 
mechanism to be operated, pipes leading from 
the ends of the transmitting-cylinder to the 
ends of the controlling-cylinder, a by-pass 
pipe communicating with both ends of the 
transmitting-cylinder, a supply-pipe commu 
nicating with the cylinder, a combined posi 
tive-opening and check valve in each end of 
the by-pass, and means for operating the 
25 
35 
 

/Volumes/External/txt/0600001-0700000/US616856.txt	No. 66,856. 
(No Model.) 
- 
F. H. RCHARDS. 
Patented Dec. 27, 1898. 
AUTOMATIC WEIGHING MACHINE. 
(Application filed Mar. 5, 1898, 
4. Sheets-Sheet . 
Weizvesses , 
Azzyevo, 
The cis Feters Co., P-Oto-Litho, was HINGTON, C. C. 
 
No. 66,856. 
F. H. RICHARDS. 
Patented Dec. 27, 1898. 
AUTOMATC WEIGHNG MACHINE. 
(Application filed Mar. 5, 1898.) 
(No Mode.) 
4. Sheets-Sheet 2. 
 
- 
S. 
a5 
Azeezzov*. 
t. NoRRS PETERSCQ. Proro-LT-c., wastinator. D. c. 
 
No. 616,856. 
(No Model.) 
 
F. H. RCHARDS, 
Patented Dec. 27, 1898. 
AUTOMATC W E GHNG MACHINE, 
(Application filed Mar. 5, 1898. 
4. Sheets 
Sheet 3. 
 
 
 
 
;---------+---+-------------------+----------------!><< 
Wizzeesses: 
z%% 
clez /94 
Aeetezza22 
24-6, 
THE NORRIS FE'? ERS Co. PHoro. LITHO. washin GTON, D. c. 
No. 616,856. 
F. H. RCHARDS. 
Patented Dec. 27, 1898. 
AUTOMATC WEIGHNG MACHINE. 
(Application filed Mar. 5, 1898.) 
4. Sheets --- Sheet, 4. 
(No Model.) 
 
 
 
 
 
+---------+---+ 
|----+-+---+---+-----+----+-------+-------+-----|-- 
|------r--r--r-----+-------------+--------+------+ 
Mzzeesses. 
The NORRIS Prers co. PHOto-Lithic, washington, c. 
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE. 
FRANCIS II. RICIIARDS, OF HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. 
AUTOMATC W E G H IN G - MACH NE. 
SPECIFICATION forming part of Letters Patent No. 616,856, dated December 27, 1898. 
Application filed March 5, 1898, Serial No, 672,725, (No model.) 
5 
O 
IS 
O 
25 
30 
35 
40 
To Gill, thoin, it in Gulf conce7n 
Beit known that, I, FRANCISH. RICHARDS, a 
citizen of the United States, residing at Hart 
ford, in the county of Hartford and State of 
Connecticut, have invented certain new and 
useful Improvements in Automatic Weigh 
ing-Machines, of which the following is a speci 
fication. 
This invention relates to Weighing-ma 
chines for automatically weighing various 
kinds of materials. 
One of the objects of the invention is to 
provide, in connection with weighing mech 
anism, means for frictionally engaging one of 
the members of the weighing mechanism to 
letard the operation thereof, said means being 
normally independent of the weighing mech 
anism and being thrown into engagement 
with the beam on the entrance of the supply 
stream into the empty load-receiver, by reason 
of which said load-receiver cannot prema 
turely descend. In the present case the 
means for retarding the Weighing mechanism 
is operated by a blade or similar device dis 
posed in the path of the Supply-stream and 
adapted to be shifted by said supply-stream 
when the stream-controlling valve is opened, 
so as to secure the advantage specified. 
Another object of the invention is to pro 
wide, in combination with a load-receiver and 
beam mechanism therefor carrying counter 
poising means for the load-receiver and load, 
respectively, means for uncoupling the load 
counterpoising means from the beam mech 
anism, said uncoupling means being prefer 
ably manually operated, whereby an attend 
ant can, by lifting the load-weight from the 
beam mechanism, ascertain if the empty load 
receiver and the counterpoising means there 
for balance. If they do not, as is frequently 
the case, it is simply necessary to add to or 
subtract from the counterpoising-weight for 
the load-receiver to compensate for any vari 
ation between the parts. 
The machine also includes improved over 
loading and load-discharging and interlock 
ing stop mechanism, hereinafter more partic 
ularly described. 
In the drawings accompanying and forming 
part of this specification, Figure I is a rear 
elevation of my improved weighing-machine. 
Figs. 2, 3, and 4 are side elevations of the same 
as seen from the left in Fig. 1, showing the 
positions occupied by the different parts dur 
ing the operation of the machine; and Fig. 
5 is a detail hereinafter more particularly de 
Scribed. 
Similar characters designate like parts in 
all the figures of the drawings. 
The framework for supporting the differ 
ent parts of the machine consists of the cham 
bered base 2, the hollow columns 3 and 4, rest 
ing thereon, and the hollow brackets 5 and 6, 
extending oppositely from the supply appara 
tus H, and the beam mechanism is incased in 
the several members of the framing, thereby 
to prevent the access of dust, &c., thereto. 
The weighing mechanism consists of a load 
receiver, as G, and a series of beams, as B, B', 
and B', therefor, the load-receiver being sus 
pended upon the beam B, fulcrumed, as at 7, 
in the base 2 and consisting of a pair of arms, 
as S, joined by the cylindrical counterweight 
W, forming part of the counterpoising means 
for the load-receiver. The load-receiver is 
provided at its opposite sides with brackets, 
as 9, having depending members, as 10, rest 
ing upon the poising ends of the beam-arms 
8, the mounting of the beam in the base and 
the load-receiver upon the beam being by the 
usual knife-edge and notched bearing-joints, 
and the beams Band B' are similarly mount 
ed in the hollow columns 3 and 4, respectively. 
A rod is shown at 20, having a loop 21 at its 
upper end, provided with a V-shaped bearing 
22, resting on the knife-edge 22 at the outer 
end of the beam B', said rod being bifurcated at 
its lower end, as at 23, and resting on the 
knife-edge 24 on the projection 25, extending 
rearward from the weight W, the connection 
of the rod with the two beams permitting the 
rod to be uncoupled therefrom. The rod car 
ries a series of removable weights, as 26, 
adapted to balance the load. 
In making a test it is desirable to uncouple 
the load-weights from the beam mechanism, 
and to carry out this operation the rod 20, 
upon which the said load-weights are mounted, 
is raised until it is clear of the two beams, it 
being understood that during a test the load 
receiver is empty. If there is any variation 
between the load-receiver and its counter 
poising means, the counterpoise for the load 
receiver can be increased or diminished to Se 
55 
65 
O 
75 
85 
95 
Oc 
45 
 
2 
616,856 
O 
IS 
25 
35 
45 
SO 
55 
cure the proper baiance between the parts being provided with the laterally-extending 
pivot 53, seated in and supported by the walls 
by adding to or subtracting from the weights 
of the bracket 5. The valve is a gravity One, 
27 on the rod 28, connected at its opposite 
it being adapted to swing shut or under the 
ends with the beams B and beam B, respec 
outlet of the hopper by its own weight, while 
tively, it being understood that the weights 
the means for opening the valve are prefer 
27 form a part of the counterpoising means 
ably connected with the pivot 53. 
for the load-receiver. 
The valve - opening actuator is designated 
It frequently happens in practice that 
by A, and it consists of a weighted lever piv 
through accumulations of dust on the load 
oted, as at 55, at the poising end of the beam 
receiver the balance between the same is dis 
B', the weight 56 of said lever normally rest 
turbed, in which case one or more weights 
ing on the pin 57 upon the beam, whereby the 
can be applied to the suspension-rod 28 to se 
opposite end of the lever constitutes in effect 
cure an accurate poise. The means for shift 
ing the rod 20 to uncouple it from the beam 
a fixed extension of the beam. The non-COlln 
terweighted end of the actuator is provided 
mechanism will be hereinafter described. 
with a projection 5S, straddled by the bifurca 
The load-discharging mechanism includes, 
preferably, a pair of closers, as L and I", re 
tion 59 at the lower end of the rod 60, pivoted, 
spectively, and a latch adapted to engage a 
as at 61, to the crank-arm 62 on the pivot 53. 
The projection 5S descends with the beam 
member connected with One of the closers, as 
from the position shown in Fig. 2 to that illus 
will hereinafter appear, to hold them shut, 
Said closer's being disposed, preferably, side 
trated in Fig. 3, and as it does so the valve V 
is permitted to shut to cut off the Supply, this 
by side and being adapted to cover the open 
ings of the delivery-spouts 30 and 31, respec 
operation being concluded when the load-re 
tively, at the lower end of the load-receiver. 
ceiver is overloaded. On the return Stroke of 
The closer L is fixed to the shaft 32, supported 
the actuator it thrusts the rod 60 upward for 
opening the valve. 
in bearings upon the under side of the load 
The supply-chute 50 constitutes a conven 
receiver, while the closer L is fixed to a simi 
larly-mounted shaft 32 at the opposite side 
ient means for overloading the load-receiver, 
the surplus or excess being withdrawn by the 
of the load-receiver, whereby the two closers 
operation of load-reducing means preferably 
are caused to oppositely Oscillate, and they 
involving a valve, as V', pivoted, as at 65, to 
are also connected for simultaneous opera 
the short spout G6, extending from the auxil 
tion. The shaft 32 is provided with a crank 
iary chamber 67 on the side of the load-re 
arm 33, the other closer-shaft 32 carrying a 
ceiver and communicating there With. The 
similai crank-arm 34, and the two arms are 
valve V' when opened wide, as shown in Fig. 3, 
connected by the link 35, pivoted to such 
uncovers the outlet of the spout 6 (3 to permit 
parts, and the disposition of the crank-arm 
the surplus to pass from the load-receiver G 
34 and the link 35 is such that these parts 
and into the surplus-receiver R, fixed to the 
constitute a toggle, as represented in Fig. 2, 
upright 3 and provided with a valve V', piv 
thereby to minimize the pressure applied by 
oted thereto, as at GS, the valve \' being pre? 
the closer mechanism to the closer-holding 
erably connected with the main valve V for 
latch. 
operation. The rod 70 serves as a connector 
The means for shutting the closers on the 
between the valves W and V', it being pivoted 
discharge of the load consist of weights, as 
at its opposite ends to the crank-arms 71 and 
36 and 37, respectively secured to the closer 
72, fixed, respectively, to the valve-pivots 53 
Supporting shafts 32 and 32', and said closers 
and 6S, the disposition of the Several parts 
are held shut by a latch 40, pivoted to the 
being such that the valves V and V' are 
load - receiver in the ordinary manner and 
caused simultaneously to shut and Open, the 
counterweighted to hold the hook 41 in en 
valve V' being adapted to cover the Outlet of 
gagement with the arm 42 of the lever 43, 
the surplus- receiver R to hold the Surplus 
pivoted to the load - receiver, the arm 44 of 
temporarily in the latter. The valves \" and 
said lever being pivoted to the rod 45, like 
V' will be locked against opening movement 
Wise connected at itslower end with the closer 
on the discharge of the load and until the 
I. On the completion of a load the latch 40 
is disengaged from the arm 42 of the lever 43, 
closers L and L are shut, and when the two 
at which time the pressure of the mass in the 
closers are latched the two valves Will be re 
leased, so that the Supply-stream can flow into 
load-receiver is sufficient to force the two in 
dependently-supported closers open simulta 
the empty load-receiver from the hopper 50, 
and the contents of the surplus-receiver R can 
neously to effect the discharge of the load. 
The Supply apparatus II includes a hopper, 
also gravitate into said load-receiver through 
the spout 74 on the side of and communicat 
as 50, Colm intlnicating with a suitable source 
of Supply, (not shown,) it being adapted to de 
ing with said load-receiver. 
The actuator for opening the auxiliary Ol' 
liver a stream into the chamber 51 below the 
load-reducing valve W' is in the nature of a 
Salme, fl'Olla which the material flows into the 
by-pass device, it consisting of a counter 
load-receiver G, the stream being controlled 
weighted lever 75, pivoted to the rod 70, the 
by a suitable stream controller or valve, 
lower arm of said actuator being held against 
as V, One side of which is adapted to receive 
a pivot, as 52, and the opposite side thereof the stop 76 on said rod by the weight 77. The 
75 
So 
90 
95 
CO 
IO 
I I5 
 
6i6,856 
3. 
O 
3O 
35 
45 
55 
actuator 75 is adapted to engage the Weighted 
arm 78 of the lever C during the descent of the 
load-receiver, thereby to open the load-reduc 
ing valve, said valve being held open by a fixed 
catch, as 79, depending from the column 3, 
adapted to be engaged by the gravitative latch 
S0, pivoted to the arm S1 of the lever C. 
In Fig. 2 the parts are shown occupying their 
primary positions, the valves V and W" being 
open, while the valve V is shut. 
On the de 
scent of the load-receiver and when it is nearly 
overloaded the valves V and V' will be closed, 
the rod 70 being elevated to carry the actuator 
75 against the arm 78 of the lever C, thereby 
lifting said arm 78 and throwing the latch S0 
into engagement with the coperating catch 
79, as represented in Fig. 3. The valve V' 
being open, the surplus will pass from the load 
receiver into the surplus-receiver R, and the 
lightened load-receiver will rise, and when the 
poising-line is reached, indicating the com 
plete withdrawal of the surplus, the latch S0 
will be raised clear of the catch 79, thereby 
releasing the valve V', so that the weight 78 
can promptly shut said valve, and simulta 
neously there with the closers L and L will be 
released by a by-pass tripper, as T, of the 
usual construction, pivotally mounted on the 
riser 85 on the base 2, and the latch-tripper 
being adapted to engage the arm 40' of the 
latch on the ascent of the load-receiver, so as 
to disengage said latch from the arm 42, 
thereby releasing the two closers. 
In connection with the Weighing mechanism 
a brake or retarding device is provided, said 
device being operable to prevent the prema 
ture descent of the load-receiver, and the brake 
or retarding device is preferably actuated by 
a blade or plate, as 90, forming a wall of the 
chamber 51 below the supply-hopper 50, said 
plate being pivotally supported for recipro 
cation. The brake is designated by 91, and 
it consists of an arm fixed to the shaft 92, sup 
ported for rocking movement by bearings on 
the Walls 93 and 9.3' of the chamber 51, said 
shaft being passed through the ears 94 and 
94 on the plate 90 and being secured thereto 
by pins or other simple means. The free end 
Of the brake or arm 91 terminates in a shoe 
95, adapted frictionally to engage the curved 
surface 96 of the upright offset 97 near the full 
crum of the auxiliary beam B'. 
In Fig. 4 the valve is shown shut, the plate 
90 being against the overhanging portion 90' 
of the chute 50, where it is held by the weight 
98, adjustably mounted on the arm 99, fixed 
to the transverse rock-shaft 92, and acting in 
opposition to the supply-stream, and the 
brake-shoe 95 is shown at a point above and 
not in engagement with the offset 97. On the 
opening of the valve V, which is a rapid op 
eration, the supply-stream will strike the up 
per side of the plate 90 and will force the same 
outward, thereby rocking the shaft 92 and 
carrying the brake-shoe 95 against the beam 
offset 97, so that the pressure applied is suf 
ficient to prevent the immediate descent of 
the load-receiver when the full volume of the 
supply strikes the closers L and L', respec 
tively. When the valve is closed to reduce 
the supply materially, the pressure against the 
plate 90 will be removed to such an extent by 
the weight 98, which drops and thereby ele 
vates the brake-shoe 95 and consequently 
frees the beam mechanism, that the load-re 
ceiver can freely descend, and the outlet of 
the chamber 51 being of greater area than the 
outlet of the hopper 50, as clearly shown in 
the several side elevations, this operation can 
be facilitated. 
In connection with the valve V' and the 
closer mechanism, consisting in the present 
case of the closers L and L', reciprocally-ef 
fective stops are provided, the lever 43 serv 
ing as one of said stops, while the other stop 
is designated by 100 and consists of a skele 
ton-shaped member fixed to the pivot 68 of the 
valve V', the two stops coperating to pre 
vent the opening of the valves V' and V' when 
the closer is open and also the opening of the 
closers when the valves are open in case the 
latch 40 should be accidentally tripped. The 
lever 43 has a segmental head or stop proper, 
101, having a flange 102, and the working face 
of the stop 100 consists of the stop-faces 103 
and 104, the first-mentioned being concentric 
to the axis of the valve, while the face 104 is 
oblique to the curved face 103. At the com 
mencement of operation, as shown in Fig. 2, 
the inner end of the stop portion 101 Will be 
adjacent to the oblique face 104, and as the 
load - receiver descends it will move down 
ward and by the oblique face, which latter at 
this time is vertically disposed, thereby freely 
permitting such movement. When the valve 
W' is shut, the stop 100 will be swung around 
and under the flange 102, and it will be ap 
parent that so long as the valve W' is open 
the stop 100 serves to block the movement of 
the stop portion 101. When, however, the 
valve W' is shut and the closer is open, as 
shown in Fig. 4, the stop portion 101 will be 
swung over the adjacent end of the stop 100, 
as shown in Fig. 4, carrying the flange 102 
thereagainst, so that the opening of the valve 
W',and consequently the valveV,is prevented 
while the closer is open, during which time 
the load-receiver and the beam mechanism 
can return to their primary positions; but the 
actuator A, operative with the valve V, can 
not do so, as it is also locked. When the clos 
ers shut, the several parts will be released 
and the actuator A can return to its primary 
position to open the valves V and V'. 
The lifting means for the load-weight-car 
rying rod 20 may be constructed as follows: 
A short shaft is illustrated at 112, passing 
through the outer wall of the column 3, said 
shaft having on its inside the short rock-arm 
113, to which the link 114 is pivoted, said 
link terminating in a loop 115, embracing the 
pin 116 near the lower end of the rod 20, by 
75 
90 
95 
CO 
IO5 
O 
II5 
 
a 
: 
616,856 
reason of which loose joint the Weighing mech 
anism can freely operate without interference 
from the rod-lifting means. The rock-shaft 
carries at its outer end the operating-lever 120, 
means being provided to hold said lever in its 
normal and its shifted positions, the set-screw 
121 on said lever constituting a convenient 
means for this purpose and being designed to 
enter openings, as 122, in the framework. In 
Fig. 2 the lever is shown occupying its nor 
mal or ineffective position. When a test is 
to be made for the purpose herein before set 
forth, the set-screw 121 is removed from the 
opening 122, in which it is located, and the 
lever 120 is grasped and lowered until the set 
Screw 121 is opposite the lower opening or ap 
erture 12:2, when it is thrust into the same, 
thereby holding the weight-supporting rod 20 
in its elevated position, at which time it can 
be readily ascertained if a true balance exists 
between the load-receiver and its counter 
poising means. After the test the parts are 
returned to their initial positions. 
The load-receiver may be connected with 
the framework in a manner substantially as 
shown in Letter's Patent No. 589,289, granted 
to me August 31, 1S97, to which reference may 
be had, and for which reason a detailed de 
Scription thereof herein is unnecessary. 
The operation of the hereinbefore-described 
machine is as follows: In Fig. 2 the parts are 
shown occupying their primary positions, the 
closers L and I' being shut and held by the 
latch 40, engaging the lever 42, connected with 
the closers, and the valves V and W" being 
open and the valve V' shut, and the surplus 
from the receiver R being represented pass 
ing into the empty load-receiver through the 
spout 74, and the full volume of the supply 
stream being shown flowing from the hopper 
50 into said load-receiver. The supply-stream 
On its entrance into the load-receiver strikes 
the plate 90 and throws the brake 91 into po 
sition to retail'd the descent of the load-re 
ceiver. When a predetermined portion of 
material has been received by the load-re 
ceiver, it, with the several beams, will de 
Scend, the actuator A moving there with and 
the free end thereof falling away from the 
rod (30, so that the valves V and W" can be 
shut. When the load-receiver is overloaded, 
the valve V is opened in the manner herein 
before set forth to permit the surplus to pass 
from the load-receiver G into the surplus-re 
ceiver R, and when the surplus has passed 
from the load-receiver the valve V will be re 
leased and shut by the weight 78 in the man 
her hereinbefore set forth, and simultaneously 
there with the tripper T will engage the latch 
40 and disengage the same from the lever 43, 
thereby freeing the closers L and L', which 
are then forced open to effect the discharge 
of the true load. On the shutting of the clos 
ers the several parts are returned to their pri 
mary positions to repeat the operation. 
IIaving described my invention, I claim 
1. The combination, with Weighing mech 
anism including a load-receiver, of a device 
for frictionally engaging one of the members 
of the Weighing mechanism to retard the de 
scent of the load-receiver, and mechanism for 
throwing said device into an inoperative po 
sition before the load is poised. 
2. The combination, with Weighing mech 
anism consisting of a load-receiver and beam 
mechanism, of a device located to frictionally 
engage the beam to retard the descent of the 
load-receiver, and means for throwing said 
device out of operative connection with the 
beam mechanism before the load is poised. 
3. The combination, with weighing mech 
anism including a load-receiver, of stream 
supplying means; and means normally inde 
pendent of the weighing mechanism, said 
means being in position to be operated to be 
thrown into position by the supply-stream to 
retard the operation of the weighing mechan 
ism before said supply-stream reaches the 
load-receiver. 
4. The combination, with Weighing mech 
anism consisting of a load-l'eceiver and beam 
mechanism therefor, of means supported in 
dependently of the weighing mechanism and 
adapted to engage one of the members there 
of to retard the operation of the same; strealm 
supplying means for the load-receiver; and a 
plate situated between the stream-Supplying 
means and the load-receiver, for operating the 
retarding means. 
5. The combination, with weighing mech 
anism consisting of a load-receiver and beam 
mechanism therefor, of a supply - chute; a 
chamber below said chute; a plate movably 
mounted and forming a Wall of the chamber, 
and adapted to be operated by the supply 
stream; and means operative by said plate 
for retarding the operation of the weighing 
mechanism. 
6. The combination, with a load-receiver, of 
a series of beams upon one of which the load 
receiver is mounted, a counterpoised rod sus 
pended from one beam and resting upon an 
other beam, and means for throwing said 
weighted rod out of operative connection with 
both beams. 
7. The combination, with a load-receiver, of 
a series of beams upon one of which the load 
receiver is mounted; a weighted rod suspend 
ed from one beam and resting upon another; 
and means independent of the weighing mech 
anism for lifting said weighted rod off the 
beam mechanism. 
S. The combination, with weighing mech 
anism including a load-receiver provided with 
a series of spouts, of a pair of closers facing 
in opposite directions and connected with the 
load-receiver, and connections between said 
closers located between the two spouts. 
9. The combination, with weighing mech 
anism including aload-receiver provided with 
a series of spouts, of a pair of oppositely-OS 
cillatory closers disposed side by side; and 
75 
So 
9 O 
CO 
I o5 
O 
II5 
IO 
35 
45 
55 
65 
 
616,856 
valve; a stop directly carried by said valve; 
and a lever mounted on the load-receiver and 
having a stop cooperative with the other stop. 
13. The combination, with Weighing mech 
anism including a load-receiver, of overload 
ing means for the load-receiver; load-reduc 
ing means involving a valve; means opera 
tive with the overloading means for opening 
said valve; a latch connected with the valve; 
a catch on the framework, adapted to be en 
gaged by the latch to hold the valve open; and 
a load-discharger. 
14. The combination, with Weighing mech 
anism including a load-receiver, of overload 
ing means for the load-receiver; load-reduc 
ing means including a valve; a lever connect 
ed with the valve and provided with a latch; 
a catch on the framework, adapted to be en 
gaged by the latch; means controlled by the 
Overloading means for operating the valve; 
and a load-discharger. 
FRANCIS I. RICARDS. 
35 
40 
45 
Witnesses: 
F. N. CHASE, 
JOHN O. SEIFER. 
O 
connections between the closers, including a 
toggle, said connections being located in the 
space between the Spouts. 
10. The combination, with Weighing mech 
anism including aload-receiverprovided with 
a closer, of Overloading and load - reducing 
means; a surplus-receiver provided with a 
valve; a stop connected with said valve and 
having two faces, one of which is oblique to 
the other; and a coperative stop connected 
with the closer. 
11. The combination, with Weighing mech 
anism including a load-receiver provided with 
a closer, of overloading means; load-reducing 
means; a surplus-receiver having an Oscillat 
ing valve; a stop connected with said valve 
and having two faces, one of which is concen 
tric to the valve, and the other of which is 
oblique relatively to said first-mentioned face; 
and a coperating stop connected with the 
closer. 
12. The combination, with Weighing mech 
anism including a load-receiver provided with 
a closer, of overloading and load-reducing 
means; a surplus-receiver provided with a 
25 
 

